PALI TEXT SOCIETY PALI-ENGLISH DICTIONARY

by T. W. RHYS DAVIDS.

Thanks to Leigh Brasington (of http://www.leighb.com/bigfiles/pts_ped.htm) who emailed the file: I have attached a zip file containing a Unicode version of the PED. It is not tab delimited, but it is what you would copy and paste from a PDF. The fact that it is Unicode may be of some help in preserving the diacriticals." 20151204

A
-- 1 the prep. ā shortened before double cons., as akko- sati (ā + kruś), akkhāti (ā + khyā), abbahati (ā + bṛh). -- Best to be classed here is the a -- we call expletive. It represents a reduction of ā -- (mostly before liquids and nasals and with single consonant instead of double). Thus anantaka (for ā -- nantaka = nantaka) Vv.807; amajjapa (for ā -- majjapa = majjapa) J vi.328; amāpaya (for āmāpaya = māpaya) J vi.518; apassato (= passantassa) J vi.552. A
A
-- 2 (an -- before vowels) [Vedic a -- , an -- ; Idg. *n̊, gradation form to *ne (see na2); Gr. a), a)n -- ; Lat. *en -- , in -- ; Goth., Ohg. & Ags. un -- ; Oir. an -- , in -- ] neg. part. prefixed to (1) nouns and adjectives; (2) verbal forms, used like (1), whether part., ger., grd. or inf.; (3) finite verbal forms. In compn. with words having originally two initial cons. the latter reappear in their assimilated form (e. g. appaṭicchavin). In meaning it equals na -- , nir -- and vi -- . Often we find it opp. to sa -- . Verbal negatives which occur in specific verb. function will be enumd. separately, while examples of neg. form. of (1) & (2) are given under their positive form unless the neg. involves a distinctly new concept, or if its form is likely to lead to confusion or misunderstanding. -- Concerning the combining & contrasting (orig. neg.) -- a -- (â) in redupl. formations like bhavâ -- bhava see ā4. A
A
-- 3 [Vedic a -- ; Idg. *e (loc. of pron. stem, cp. ayaŋ; orig. a deictic adv. with specific reference to the past, cp. Sk sma); Gr. e) -- ; also in Gr. e)kei_, Lat. equidem, enim] the augment (sign of action in the past), prefixed to the root in pret., aor. & cond. tenses; often omitted in ordinary prose. See forms under each verb; cp. also ajja. Identical with this a -- is the a -- which functions as base of some pron. forms like ato, attha, asu etc. (q. v.). A
A
-- 4 the sound a (a -- kāra) J vi.328, 552; VvA 279, 307, 311. Aŋsa
Aŋsa1
[Vedic aŋsa; cp. Gr. w)_mos, Lat. umerus, Goth ams, Arm. us] (a) the shoulder A v. 110; Sn 609. aŋse karoti to put on the shoulder, to shoulder J i.9. (b.) a part (lit. side) (cp. ˚āsa in koṭṭhāsa and expln of aŋsa as koṭṭhāsa at DA i.312, also v. l. mettāsa for mettaŋsa at It 22). -- atīt'aŋse in former times, formerly D ii.224; Th 2, 314. mettaŋsa sharing friendship (with) A iv.151 = It 22 = J iv.71 (in which connection Miln 402 reads ahiŋsā). -- Disjunctive ekena aŋsena . . . ekena aŋsena on the one hand (side) . . . on the other, partly . . . partly A i.61. From this: ekaŋsa (adj.) on the one hand (only), i. e. incomplete (opp. ubhayaŋsa) or (as not admitting of a counterpart) definite, certain, without doubt (opp. dvidhā): see ekaŋsa. -- paccaŋsena according to each one's share A iii.38. puṭaŋsena with a knapsack for provisions D i.117; A ii 183; cp. DA i.288, with v. l. puṭosena at both passages.

-- kūṭa "shoulder prominence", the shoulder Vin iii.127; DhA iii.214; iv.136; VvA 121. -- vaṭṭaka a shoulder strap (mostly combd with kāyabandhana; vv. ll. ˚vaddhaka, ˚bandhaka) Vin i.204 (T. ˚bandhaka); ii.114 (ddh); iv.170 (ddh); Vv 3340 (T. ˚bandhana, C. v. l. ˚vaṭṭaka); DhA iii.452. Aŋsa
Aŋsa2
[see next] point, corner, edge; freg. in combn with numerals, e. g. catur˚ four -- cornered, chaḷ˚, aṭṭh˚, soḷas˚ etc. (q. v.) all at Dhs 617 (cp. DhsA 317). In connection with a Vimāna: āyat˚ with wide or protruding capitals (of its pillars) Vv 8415; as part of a carriage-pole Vv 642 ( = kubbara -- phale patiṭṭhitā heṭṭhima -- aŋsā VvA 265). Aŋsi
Aŋsi
(f.) [cp. Vedic aśri, aśra, aśani; Gr. a)/kros pointed, a)/kris, also o)cu /s sharp: Lat. ācer sharp. Further connections in Walde Lat. Wtb. under ācer] a corner, edge ( = aŋsa2) Vv 782 (= aŋsa -- bhāga VvA 303). Aŋsu
Aŋsu
[cp. Sk. aŋśu (Halāyudha) a ray of light] a thread Vin iii.224. -- mālin, sun Sāsv 1. Akaṭa
Akaṭa
(adj.) [a + kaṭa] not made, not artificial, natural; ˚yūsa natural juice Vin i.206. Akampiyatta
Akampiyatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. akampiya, grd. of a + kampati] the condition of not being shaken, stableness Miln 354. Akalu
Akalu
(cp. agalu) an ointment J iv.440 (akaluñ candanañ ca, v. l. BB aggaluŋ; C. expls as kālâkaluñ ca rattacandanañ ca, thus implying a blacking or dark ointment); vi.144 (˚candana -- vilitta; v. l. BB aggalu˚); Miln 338 (˚tagara -- tālīsaka -- lohita -- candana). Akāca
Akāca
(adj.) [a + kāca] pure, flawless, clear D ii.244; Sn 476; J v.203. Akācin
Akācin
(adj.) = akāca Vv 601. Kern (Toevoegselen s. v.) proposes reading akkācin (= Sk. arka -- arcin shining as the sun), but VvA 253 expls by niddosa, and there is no v. l. to warrant a misreading. Akāsiya
Akāsiya
(adj. -- n.) [a + kāsika?] "not from the Kāsī -- country" (?); official name of certain tax -- gatherers in the king's service J vi.212 (akāsiya -- sankhātā rāja -- purisā C.). Akiccakāra
Akiccakāra
(adj.) [a + kicca + kāra] 1. not doing one's duty, doing what ought not to be done A ii.67; Dh 292; Miln 66; DA i.296. -- 2. ineffective (of medicine) Miln 151. Akiriya
Akiriya
(adj.) [a + kiriya] not practical, unwise, foolish J iii.530 (˚rūpa = akattabba -- rūpa C.); Miln 250. Akilāsu
Akilāsu
(adj.) [a + kilāsu] not lazy, diligent, active, untiring S i.47; v.162; J i.109; Miln 382. Akissava
Akissava
at S i.149 is probably faulty reading for akiñcana. Akutobhaya
Akutobhaya
(adj.) see ku˚. Akuppa
Akuppa
(adj.) [a + kuppa, grd. of kup, cp. BSk. akopya M Vastu iii.200] not to be shaken, immovable; sure, steadfast, safe Vin i.11 (akuppā me ceto -- vimutti) = S ii.239; Vin ii.69; iv.214; D iii.273; M i.205, 298; S ii.171; A iii.119, 198; Miln 361. Akuppatā
Akuppatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. last] "state of not being shaken", surety, safety; Ep. of Nibbāna Th 1, 364. Akka
Akka
[cp. Sk. arka] N. of a plant: Calotropis Gigantea, swallow -- wort M i.429 (˚assa jiyā bowstrings made from that plant).

-- nāla a kind of dress material Vin i.306 (vv. ll. agga˚ & akkha˚). -- vāṭa a kind of gate to a plantation, a movable fence made of the akka plant Vin ii.154 (cp. akkha -- vāṭa). Akkanta
Akkanta
[pp. of akkamati] stepped upon, mounted on A i.8; J i.71; Miln 152; DhA i.200. Akkandati
Akkandati
[ā + kandati, krand] to lament, wail, cry S iv.206. Akkamana
Akkamana
(nt.) [cp. BSk. ākramaṇa Jtm 3158] going near, approaching, stepping upon, walking to J i.62. Akkamati
Akkamati
[ā + kamati, kram] to tread upon, to approach, attack J i.7, 279; ThA 9; -- to rise Vin iii. 38. -- ger. akkamma Cp. iii.72. -- pp. akkanta (q. v.). Akkuṭṭha
Akkuṭṭha
(adj. n.) [pp. of akkosati] 1. (adj.) being reviled, scolded, railed at Sn 366 ( = dasahi akkosavatthūhi abhisatto SnA 364); J vi.187. -- 2. (nt.) reviling, scolding, swearing at; in combn akkuṭṭha -- vandita Sn 702 (= akkosa -- vandana SnA 492) Th 2, 388 (expln ThA 256 as above). Akkula
Akkula
(adj.) [ = ākula] confused, perplexed, agitated, frightened Ud 5 (akkulopakkula and akkulapakkulika). See ākula. -- 2 -- Akkosa
Akkosa
[ā + kruś = kruñc, see kuñca & koñca2; to sound, root kr̥, see note on gala] shouting at, abuse, insult, reproach, reviling Sn 623; Miln 8 (+ paribhāsa); SnA 492; ThA 256; PvA 243; DhA ii.61.

-- vatthu always as dasa a˚ -- vatthūni 10 bases of abuse, 10 expressions of cursing J i.191; SnA 364, 467; DhA i.212; iv.2. Akkosaka
Akkosaka
(adj.) [from last] one who abuses, scolds or reviles, + paribhāsaka A ii.58; iii.252; iv.156; v.317; PvA 251. Akkosati
Akkosati
[to krus see akkosa] to scold, swear at, abuse, revile J i.191; ii.416; iii.27; DhA i.211; ii.44. Often combd with paribhāsati, e. g. Vin ii.296; DhA iv.2; PvA 10. -- aor. akkocchi Dh 3; J iii.212 ( = akkosi DhA i.43. Der. wrongly fr. krudh by Kacc. vi.417; cp. Franke, Einh. Pāli -- gramm. 37, and Geiger, P. Gr. § 164). -- pp. akkuṭṭha (q. v.). Akkha
Akkha1
[Vedic akṣa; Av. aša; Gr. a)/cwn a(/maca ohariot with one axle); Lat. axis; Ohg. etc. ahsa, E. axle, to root of Lat. ago, Sk. aj] the axle of a wheel D ii.96; S v.6; A i.112; J i.109, 192; v.155 (akkhassa phalakaŋ yathā; C.: suvaṇṇaphalakaŋ viya, i. e. shiny, like the polished surface of an axle); Miln 27 (+ īsā + cakka), 277 (atibhārena sakaṭassa akkho bhijjati: the axle of the cart breaks when the load is too heavy); PvA 277. -- akkhaŋ abbhañjati to lubricate the axle S iv.177; Miln 367.

-- chinna one whose axle is broken; with broken axle S i.57; Miln 67. -- bhagga with a broken axle J v.433. -- bhañjana the breaking of the axle DhA i.375; PvA 277. Akkha
Akkha2
[Vedic akṣa, prob. to akṣi & Lat. oculus, "that which has eyes" i. e. a die; cp. also Lat. ālea game at dice (fr.* asclea?)] a die D i.6 (but expld at DA i.86 as ball -- game: guḷakīḷa); S i.149 = A v.171 = Sn 659 (appamatto ayaŋ kali yo akkhesu dhanaparājayo); J i.379 (kūṭ˚ a false player, sharper, cheat) anakkha one who is not a gambler J v.116 (C.: ajūtakara). Cp. also accha3.

-- dassa (cp. Sk. akṣadarśaka) one who looks at (i. e. examines) the dice, an umpire, a judge Vin iii.47; Miln 114, 327, 343 (dhamma -- nagare). -- dhutta one who has the vice of gambling D ii.348; iii.183; M iii.170; Sn 106 (+ itthidhutta & surādhutta). -- vāṭa fence round an arena for wrestling J iv.81. (? read akka -- ). Akkha
Akkha3
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [to akkhi] having eyes, with eyes PvA 39 (BB. rattakkha with eyes red from weeping, gloss on assumukha). Prob. akkhaṇa is connected with akkha. Akkhaka
Akkhaka
[akkha1 + ka] the collar -- bone Vin iv.213 (adhak- khakaŋ); y.216. Akkhaṇa
Akkhaṇa
[a + khaṇa, BSk. akṣaṇa AvŚ i.291 = 332] wrong time, bad luck, misadventure, misfortune. There are 9 enumd at D iii.263; the usual set consists of 8; thus D iii.287; VvA 193; Sdhp 4 sq. See also khaṇa.

-- vedhin (adj. n.) a skilled archer, one who shoots on the moment, i. e. without losing time, expld as one who shoots without missing (the target) or as quickly as lightning (akkhaṇa = vijju). In var. combns.; mostly as durepātin a. A i.284 (+ mahato kāyassa padāletā); ii.170 sq. (id.), 202; iv.423, 425; J ii.91 (expld as either "avirādhita11> -- vedhī" or "akkhaṇaŋ vuccati vijju": one who takes and shoots his arrows as fast as lightning), iii.322; iv.494 (C. explns aviraddha -- vedhin vijju -- ālokena vijjhana11> -- samattha p. 497). In other combn at J i.58 (akkhaṇavedhin + vālavedhin); v.129 (the 4 kinds of archers: a., vālavedhin, saddavedhin & saravedhin).

In BSk. we find akṣuṇṇavedha (a Sanskritised Pāli form, cp. Mathurā kṣuṇa = Sk. kṣaṇa) at Divy 58, 100, 442 (always with dūrevedha), where MSS. however read akṣuṇa˚; also at Lal. Vist. 178. See Divy Index, where trsln is given as "an act of throwing the spear so as to graze the mark" (Schiefner gives "Streifschuss"). -

Note. The explanations are not satisfactory. We should expect either an etym. bearing on the meaning "hitting the centre of the target" (i. e. its "eye") (cp. E. bull's eye), in which case a direct relation to akkha = akkhi eye would not seem improbable (cp. formation ikkhana) or an etym. like "hitting without mishap", in which case the expression would be derived directly from ak khaṇa (see prec.) with the omission of the neg. an -- ; akkhaṇa in the meaning of "lightning" (J ii.91 C.) is not supported by literary evidence. Akkhata
Akkhata
(adj.) [pp. of a + kṣan, cp. parikkhata1] unhurt, without fault Mhvs 19, 56 (C. niddosa). -- acc. akkhataŋ (adv.) in safety, unhurt. Only in one phrase Vv 8452 (paccāgamuŋ Pāṭaliputtaŋ akkhataŋ) & Pv iv.111 (nessāmi taŋ Pāṭaliputtaŋ akkhataŋ); see VvA 351 & PvA 272. Akkhaya
Akkhaya
(adj.) [a + khaya, kṣi] not decaying, in akkhaya- paṭibhāna, of unfailing skill in exposition Miln 3, 21. Akkhara
Akkhara
(adj.) [Vedic akṣara] constant, durable, lasting D iii.86. As tt. for one of 4 branches of Vedic learning (D i.88) it is Phonetics which probably included Grammar, and is expld by sikkhā (DA i.247 = SnA 477) -> pl. nt. akkharāni sounds, tones, words. citt'akkhara of a discourse (suttanta) having variety & beauty of words or sounds (opposed to beauty of thought) A i.72 = iii.107 = S ii.267. Akkharāni are the sauce, flavour (vyañjana) of poetry S i.38. To know the context of the a˚ the words of the texts, is characteristic of an Arahant Dh 352 (C. is ambiguous DhA iv.70). Later: akkharaŋ a syllable or sound PvA 280 (called sadda in next line); akkharāni an inscription J ii.90; iv.7 (likhitāni written), 489; vi.390, 407. In Grammar: a letter Kacc. 1.

-- cintaka a grammarian or versifier KhA 17; SnA 16, 23, 321. cp. 466; PvA 120. -- pabheda in phrase sakkharappabheda phonology & etymology D i.88 (akkharappabhedo ti sikkhā ca nirutti ca SnA 447 = DA i.247) = A iii.223 = Sn p. 105. -- piṇḍa "word -- ball", i. e. sequence of words or sounds DhA iv.70 (= akkharānaŋ sannipāto Dh 352). Akkharikā
Akkharikā
(f.) a game (recognising syllables written in the air or on one's back). D i.7; Vin ii.10; iii.180. So expld at DA i.86. It may be translated "letter game"; but all Indian letters of that date were syllables. Akkhāta
Akkhāta
(adj.) [pp. of akkhāti] announced, proclaimed, told, shown A i.34 (dur˚ ); ii.195; iv.285, 322; v.265, 283; Sn 172, 276, 595, 718. Akkhātar
Akkhātar
one who relates, a speaker, preacher, story -- teller S i.11, 191; iii.66; Sn 167. Akkhāti
Akkhāti
[ā + khyā, Idg. *sequ; cp. Sk. ākhyāti, Lat. inquam, Gr. e)nne/pw, Goth. saihvan, Ger. sehen etc. See also akkhi & cakkhu] to declare, announce, tell Sn 87, 172; imper. akkhāhi Sn 988, 1085; aor. akkhāsi Sn 251, 504, 1131 ( = ācikkhi etc. Nd2 465); fut. akkhissati Pv iv.163; cond. akkhissaŋ Sn 997; J vi.523. -- Pass. akkhāyati to be proclaimed, in phrase aggaŋ a. to be deemed chief or superior, to be first, to excel Miln 118, 182 (also in BSk. agram ākhyāyate M Vastu iii.390); ger. akkheyya to be pronounced S i.11; It 53. -- pp. akkhāta (q. v.). -- Intensive or Frequentative is ācikkhati. Akkhāna
Akkhāna
(nt.) [Sk. ākhyāna] telling stories, recitation; tale, legend D i.6 ( = DA i.84: Bhārata -- Rāmāyanādi); iii.183; M i.503; iii.167; Sdhp. 237. -- preaching, teaching Nd1 91 (dhamm˚). The 5th Veda J v.450. (vedam akkhānapañcamaŋ; C: itihāsapañcamaŋ vedacatukkaŋ). -- The spelling ākhyāna also occurs (q. v.). -- 3 -- Akkhāyika
Akkhāyika
(adj.) relating, narrating J iii.535; lokakkhāyikā kathā talk about nature -- lore D i.8; Miln 316. Akkhāyin
Akkhāyin
(adj.) telling, relating, announcing S ii.35; iii.7; J iii.105. Akkhi
Akkhi
(nt.) [to *oks, an enlarged form of *oqu, cp. Sk. īkṣate, kṣaṇa, pratīka, anīka; Gr. o)/sse, w)/y (*ku/klwy), o)fqalmo/s, pro/swpon; Lat. oculus, Ags. ēowan ( = E eye & wind -- ow); Goth. augō. See also cakkhu & cp. akkha2 & ikkhaṇika] the eye M i.383 (ubbhatehi akkhīhi); Sn 197, 608; J i.223, 279; v.77; vi.336; Pv ii.926 (akkhīni paggharanti: shed tears, cp. PvA 123); VvA 65 (˚īni bhamanti, my eyes swim) cp. akkhīni me dhūmāyanti DhA i.475; DhA ii.26; iii.196 (˚īni ummīletvā opening the eyes); Sdhp 103, 380. -- In combn with sa -- as sacchi & sakkhi (q. v.). As adj. ( -- ˚) akkha3 (q.v.).

-- añjana eye ointment, collyrium DhA iii.354. -- kūpa the socket of the eye J iv.407. -- gaṇḍa eye -- protuberance, i. e. eye -- brow (?) J vi.504 (for pamukha T.). -- gūtha secretion from the eye PvA 198. -- gūthaka id. Sn 197 ( = dvīhi akkhicchiddehi apanīta -- ttaca -- maŋsasadiso a˚ -- gūthako SnA 248). -- chidda the eye -- hole SnA 248. -- dala the eye -- lid DA i.194; ThA 259; DhsA 378. -- pāta "fall of the eye", i. e. a look, in mand˚ of soft looks (adj.) PvA 57. -- pūra an eye -- full, in akkhipūraŋ assuŋ (assu?) an eye full of tears J vi.191. -- mala dirt from the eye Pv iii.53 (= ˚gūtha C.). -- roga eye disease DhA i.9. Akkhika
Akkhika1
( -- ˚) (adj.) having eyes, with eyes Th 1,960 (añjan˚ with eyes anointed); DhA iv.98 (aḍḍh˚ with half an eye, i. e. stealthily); Sdhp 286 ( tamb˚ red -- eyed). -- an˚ having no eyes DhA i.11. Akkhika
Akkhika2
(nt.) [cp. Sk. akṣa] the mesh of a net J i.208. -- hāraka one who takes up a mesh (?) M i.383 (corresp. with aṇḍahāraka). Akkhitta
Akkhitta1
see khitta. Akkhitta
Akkhitta2
(adj.) [BSk ākṣipta Divy 363, pp. of ā + kṣip] hit, struck, thrown J iii.255 ( = ākaḍḍhita C.). Akkhin
Akkhin
(adj.) = akkhika J iii.190 (mand˚ softeyed); Vv 323 (tamb˚ red -- eyed); DhA i.11. Akkhobbha
Akkhobbha
(adj.) [a + kṣubh, see khobha] not to be shaken, imperturbable Miln 21. Akkhobhana
Akkhobhana
(adj) = akkhobbha J v.322 (= khobhetun na sakkhā C.). Akkhohiṇī
Akkhohiṇī
(f.) [ = akkhobhiṇī] one of the highest numerals (1 followed by 42 ciphers, Childers) J v.319; vi.395. Akhaṇḍaphulla
Akhaṇḍaphulla
see khaṇḍa. Akhāta
Akhāta
(adj.) not dug: see khāta. Akhetta
Akhetta
barren -- soil: see khetta. -- In cpd. ˚ññu the neg. belongs to the whole: not knowing a good field (for alms) J iv.371. Agati
Agati
see gati. -- ˚gamana practising a wrong course of life, evil practice, wrong doing D iii.228 (4: chanda˚, dosa˚ moha˚ bhaya˚); A ii.18 sq., J iv.402; v.98, 510; PvA 161. Agada
Agada
[Vedic agada; a + gada] medicine, drug, counter- poison J i.80 (˚harīṭaka ); Miln 121, 302, 319, 334; DA i.67; DhA i.215; PvA 198 ( = osadhaŋ). Agaru
Agaru
(adj.) [cp. Sk. aguru, a + garu] (a) not heavy, not troublesome, only in phrase: sace te agaru "if it does not inconvenience you, if you don't mind" (cp. BSk. yadi te aguru. Av. S i.94, 229; ii.90) Vin. i.25; iv.17, D i.51; DhA i.39. -- (b) disrespectful, irreverent (against = gen.) D i.89; Sn p. 51. Agalu
Agalu
[cp. Sk. aguru, which is believed to appear in Hebr. ahālīm (aloe), also in Gr. a)lo/h & a)ga/lloxon] fragrant aloe wood, Agallochum Vv 537 (aggalu = VvA 237 agalugandha); VvA 158 (+ candana). Cp. also Av. Ś i.24, and akalu. Agāra
Agāra
(nt.) [cp. Sk. agāra, probably with the a -- of communion; Gr. a)gei(rw to collect, a)gora/ market. Cp. in meaning & etym. gaha1]. -- 1. house or hut, usually implying the comforts of living at home as opp. to anagāra homelessness or the state of a homeless wanderer (mendicant). See anagāriyā. -- Thus freq. in two phrases contrasting the state of a householder (or layman, cp. gihin), with that of a religious wanderer (pabbajita), viz. (a.) kesamassuŋ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaŋ pabbajati "to shave off hair & beard, put on the yellow robes, and wander forth out of the home into the homeless state" D i.60 etc.; cp. Nd2 172ii. See also S i.185 (agārasmā anagāriyaŋ nikkhanta); M ii.55 (agāraŋ ajjhāvasatā); Sn 274, 805 (˚ŋ āvasati), and with pabbajita D i.89, 115, 202, 230; Pv ii.1317. -- (b.) of a "rājā cakkavattin" compared with a "sambuddha": sace agāraŋ āvasati vijeyya paṭhaviŋ imaŋ adaṇḍena asatthena . . . sace ca so pabbajati agārā anagāriyaŋ vivaṭacchado sambuddho arahā bhavissati "he will become the greatest king when he stays at home, but the greatest saint when he takes up the homeless life", the prophesy made for the infant Gotama D ii.16; Sn 1002, 1003. -- Further passages for agāra e. g. Vin i.15; D i.102 (BB. has v. l. agyâgāra, but DA i.270 expl. as dānâgāra); A i.156, 281; ii.52 sq.; Dh 14, 140; J i.51, 56; iii.392; Dpvs. i.36. -- 2. anagāra (adj.) houseless, homeless; a mendicant (opp. gahaṭṭha) Sn 628 = Dh 404; Sn 639, 640 (+ paribbaje); Pv ii.25 (= anāvāsa PvA 80). -- (nt.) the homeless state (= anagāriyā) Sn 376. See also agga2. -- 3. ˚āgāra: Owing to freq. occurrence of agāra at the end of cpds. of which the first word ends in a, we have a dozen quite familiar words ending apparently in āgāra. This form has been considered therefore as a proper doublet of agāra. This however is wrong. The long ā is simply a contraction of the short a at the end of the first part of the cpd. with the short a at the beginning of agāra. Of the cpds. the most common are: -- āgantuk˚ reception hall for strangers or guests S iv.219; v.21. -- itth˚ lady's bower S i.58, 89. -- kūṭ˚ a house with a peaked roof, or with gables S ii.103. 263; iii.156; iv.186; v.43; A i.230; iii.10, 364; iv.231; v.21. -- koṭṭh˚ storehouse, granary D i.134 (cp. DA i.295); S i.89. -- tiṇ˚ a house covered with grass S iv.185; A i.101. -- bhus˚ threshing shed, barn A i.241. -- santh˚ a council hall D i.91; ii.147; S iv.182; v.453; A ii.207; iv.179 sq. -- suññ˚ an uninhabited shed; solitude S v.89, 157, 310 sq., 329 sq.; A i.241 (v. l. for bhusâgāra); iii.353; iv.139, 392, 437; v.88, 109, 323 sq. Agāraka
Agāraka
(nt.) [fr. agāra] a small house, a cottage M i.450; J vi.81. Agārika
Agārika
(adj.) 1. having a house, in eka˚, dva˚ etc. D i.166 = A i.295 = ii.206. -- 2. a householder, layman Vin i.17. f. agārikā a housewife Vin i.272. See also āgārika. Agārin
Agārin
(adj.) [fr. agāra] one who has or inhabits a house, a householder Sn 376, Th i,1009; J iii.234. -- f. agārinī a housewife Vv 527 ( = gehassāmmī VvA 225); Pv iii.43 (id. PvA 194). Agāriya = agārika
Agāriya
= agārika, a layman M i.504 (˚bhūta). -- Usually in neg. anagāriyā (f.) the homeless state (= anagāraŋ) as opp. to agāra (q. v.) in formula agārasmā anagāriyaŋ pabbajita (gone out from the house into the homeless state) Vin i.15; M i.16; ii.55, 75; A i.49; D iii.30 sq., 145 sq.; Sn 274, 1003; Pv ii.1316; DA i.112. -- 4 -- Agga
Agga1
(adj. n.) [Vedic agra; cp. Av. agrō first; Lith. agrs early] 1. (adj;) (a.) of time: the first, foremost Dpvs iv.13 (sangahaŋ first collection). See cpds. -- (b.) of space: the highest, topmost, J i.52 (˚sākhā). -- (c.) of quality: illustricus, excellent, the best, highest, chief Vin iv.232 (agga -- m -- agga) most excellent, D ii.4: S I.29 (a. sattassa Sambuddha); A ii.17 = Pv iv.347 (lokassa Buddho aggo [A: aggaŋ] pavuccati); It 88, 89; Sn 875 (suddhi); PvA 5. Often combd. with seṭṭha (best), e. g. D ii.15; S iii.83, 264. -- 2. (nt.) top, point. (a.) lit.: the top or tip (nearly always -- ˚); as ār˚ point of an awl Sn 625, 631; Dh 401; kus˚ tip of a blade of grass Dh 70; Sdhp 349; tiṇ˚ id PvA 241; dum˚ top of a tree J ii.155; dhaj˚ of a banner S i.219; pabbat˚ of a mountain Sdhp 352; sākh˚ of a branch PvA 157; etc. -- (b.) fig. the best part, the ideal, excellence, prominence, first place, often to be trsl. as adj. the highest, best of all etc. S ii.29 (aggena aggassa patti hoti: only the best attain to the highest); Mhvs 7, 26. Usually as -- ˚; e. g. dum˚ the best of trees, an excellent tree Vv 3541 (cp. VvA 161); dhan˚ plenty D iii.164; madhur˚ S i.41, 161, 237; bhav˚ the best existence S iii.83; rūp˚ extraordinary beauty J i.291; lābh˚ highest gain J iii.127; sambodhi -- y -- agga highest wisdom Sn 693 (= sabbaññuta -- ñāṇan SnA 489; the best part or quality of anything, in enumn of the five "excellencies" of first -- fruits ( panca aggāni, after which the N. Pañcaggadāyaka), viz. khettaggan rās˚ koṭṭh˚ kumbhi˚ bhojan˚ SnA 270. sukh˚ perfect bliss Sdhp 243. Thus freq. in phrase aggaŋ akkhāyati to deserve or receive the highest praise, to be the most excellent D i.124; S iii.156, 264; A ii.17 (Tathāgato); It 87 (id.); Nd2 517 D (appamādo); Miln 183. -- 3. Cases as adv.: aggena (instr.) in the beginning, beginning from, from (as prep.), by (id.) Vin ii.167. (aggena gaṇhāti to take from, to subtract, to find the difference; Kern Toev. s. v. unnecessarily changes aggena into agghena), 257 (yadaggena at the moment when or from, foll. by tad eva "then"; cp. agge), 294 (bhikkh˚ from alms); Vbh 423 (vass˚ by the number of years). aggato (abl.) in the beginning Sn 217 (+ majjhato, sesato). aggato kata taken by its worth, valued, esteemed Th 2, 386, 394. agge (loc) 1. at the top A ii.201 (opp. mūle at the root); J iv.156 (id.); Sn 233 (phusit˚ with flowers at the top: supupphitaggasākhā KhA 192); J ii.153 (ukkh˚); iii.126 (kūp˚). -- 2 (as prep.) from. After, since, usually in phrases yad˚ (foll. by tad˚) from what time, since what date D i.152; ii.206; & ajja -- t -- agge from this day, after today D i.85; M i.528; A v.300; Sn p. 25 (cp. BSk. adyāgrena Av. Ś ii.13); at the end: bhattagge after a meal Vin ii.212.

-- angulī the main finger, i. e. index finger J vi.404. -- āsana main seat DA i.267. -- upaṭṭhāka chief personal attendant D ii.6. -- kārikā first taste, sample Vin iii.80. -- kulika of an esteemed clan Pv iii.55 ( = seṭṭh˚ PvA 199). -- ñña recognized as primitive primeval, D iii.225 (porāṇa +), A ii.27 sq.; iv.246, Kvu 341. -- danta one who is most excellently self -- restrained (of the Buddha) Th i.354. -- dāna a splendid gift Vin iii.39. -- dvāra main door J i.114. -- nakha tip of the nail Vin iv.221. -- nagara the first or most splendid of cities Vin i.229. -- nikkhitta highly praised or famed Miln 343. -- nikkhittaka an original depository of the Faith Dpvs iv.5. -- pakatimant of the highest character J v.351 (= aggasabhāva). -- patta having attained perfection D iii.48 sq. -- pasāda the highest grace A ii.34; It 87. -- piṇḍa the best oblation or alms i.141; M i. 28; ii.204. -- piṇḍika receiving the best oblations J vi.140. -- puggala the best of men (of the Buddha) Sn 684; DhA ii.39; Sdhp. 92, 558. -- purohita chief or prime minister J vi.391. -- phala the highest or supreme fruit (i. e. Arahantship) J i.148; Pv iv.188; PvA 230. -- bīja having eggs from above (opp. mūla˚), i. e. propagated by slips or cuttings D i.5; DA i.81. -- magga (adj.) having reached the top of the path, i. e. Arahantship ThA 20. -- mahesi the king's chief wife, queen -- consort J i.262; iii.187, 393; v.88; DhA i.199; PvA 76. -- rājā the chief king J vi.391; Miln 27. -- vara most meritorious, best Dpvs vi.68. -- vāda the original doctrine (= theravāda) Dpvs iv.13. -- vādin one who proclaims the highest good (of the Buddha) Th 1, 1142. Agga
Agga2
(nt.) (only -- ˚) [a contracted form of agāra] a (small) house, housing, accomodation; shelter, hut; hall. dān˚ a house of donation, i. e. a public or private house where alms are given J iii.470; iv.379, 403; vi.487; PvA 121; Miln 2. salāk˚ a hut where food is distributed to the bhikkhus by tickets, a food office J i.123, VvA 75. Aggatā
Aggatā
(f.) [abstr. of agga] pre -- eminence, prominence, superiority Kvu 556 (˚ŋ gata); Dpvs iv.1 (guṇaggataŋ gatā). -- (adj.) mahaggata of great value or superiority D i.80; iii.224. Aggatta
Aggatta
(nt.) [abstr. of agga = Sk. agratvan] the state or condition of being the first, pre -- eminence PvA 9, 89. Aggavant
Aggavant
(adj.) occupying the first place, of great eminence A i.70, 243. Aggalu
Aggalu
see agalu. Aggaḷa & Aggaḷā
Aggaḷa
& Aggaḷā (f.) (also occasionally with l.) [cp. Sk. argala & argalā to *areg to protect, ward off, secure etc., as in Ags. reced house; *aleg in Sk. rakṣati to protect, Gr. a)le/cw id., Ags. ealh temple. Cp. also *areq in Gr. a) rke/w = Lat. arceo, Orcus, Ohg rigil bolt.] a contrivance to fasten anything for security or obstruction: 1. a bolt or cross -- bar Vin i.290; D i.89 (˚ŋ ākoteṭi to knock upon the cross -- bar; a. = kavāṭa DA i.252); A iv.359 (id.); S. iv.290; A i.101 = 137 = iv.231. (phusit˚ with fastened bolts, securely shut Th 1,385 (id.); Vin iv.47; J. v.293 (˚ŋ uppīḷeti to lift up the cross -- bar. -- 2. a strip of cloth for strengthening a dress etc., a gusset Vin i.290 (+ tunna), 392 (Bdhgh on MV viii.21, 1); J i.8 (+ tunna) vi.71 (˚ŋ datvā); Vin iv.121.

-- dāna putting in a gusset J i.8. -- phalaka the post or board, in which the cross -- bar is fixed (cp. ˚vaṭṭi) M iii.95. -- vaṭṭi = ˚phalaka Vin ii.120, 148. -- sūci bolting pin M i.126. Aggi
Aggi
[Vedic agni = Lat. ignis. Besides the contracted form aggi we find the diaeretic forms gini (q. v.) and aggini (see below)] fire. -- 1. fire, flames, sparks; conflagration, Vin ii.120 (fire in bathroom); M i.487 (anāhāro nibbuto f. gone out for lack of fuel); S iv.185, 399 (sa -- upādāno jalati provided with fuel blazes); Sn 62; Dh 70 (= asaniaggi DhA iii.71); J i.216 (sparks), 294 (pyre); ii.102; iii.55; iv.139; VvA 20 (aggimhi tāpanaŋ + udake temanaŋ). -- The var. phases of lighting and extinguishing the fire are given at A iv.45: aggiŋ ujjāleti (kindle, make burn), ajjhupekkhati (look after, keep up), nibbāpeti (extinguish, put out), nikkhipati (put down, lay). Other phrases are e. g. aggiŋ jāleti (kindle) J ii.44; gaṇhāti (make or take) J i.494 (cp. below b); deti (set light to) J i.294; nibbāpeti (put out) It 93; Sdhp 552. aggi nibbāyati the f. goes out S ii.85; M i.487; J i.212 (udake through water); Miln 304. aggi nibbuto the f. is extinguished (cp. ˚nibbāna) J i.61; Miln 304. agginā dahati to burn by means of fire, to set fire to A i.136, 199; PvA 20. udar˚ the fire supposed to regulate digestion PvA 33; cp. Dial. ii.208, note 2; kapp˚uṭṭhān˚ the universal conflagration J iii.185; dāv˚ a wood or jungle fire J i.212; naḷ˚ the burning of a reed J vi.100; padīp˚ fire of a lamp Miln 47. 2. the sacrificial fire: In one or two of the passages in the older texts this use of Aggi is ambiguous. It may possibly be intended to denote the personal Agni, the fire -- god. But the commentators do not think so, and the Jātaka commentary, when it means Agni, has the phrase Aggi Bhagavā the Lord Agni, e. g. at J i.285, 494; ii.44. The ancient ceremony of kindling a holy fire on the day the child is born and keeping it up throughout his life, is also referred to by that commentary e. g. J i.285; ii.43. Aggiŋ paricarati (cp. ˚paricāriyā) to serve the sacred fire Vin i.31 (jaṭilā aggī paricaritukāmā); A v.263, 266; Th 2, 143 (= aggihuttaŋ paric˚ ThA 136); Dh 107; J i.494; DhA ii.232. aggiŋ juhati (cp. ˚homa, ˚hutta) to sacrifice (in)to the fire A ii.207; often combd. with aggihuttaŋ paricarati, e. g. S i.166; Sn p. 79. aggiŋ namati & santappeti to worship the fire A v.235. aggissa (gen.) paricāriko J yi.207 (cp. below ˚paricārika); aggissa ādhānaŋ A iv.41. -- 3. (ethical, always -- ˚) the fire of burning, consuming, feverish sensations. Freq. in standard set of 3 fires, viz. rāg˚, dos˚, moh˚, or the fires of lust, anger and bewilderment. The number three may possibly have been chosen with reference to the three sacrificial fires of Vedic ritual. At S iv.19; A iv.41 sq. there are 7 fires, the 4 last of which are āhuneyy˚, gahapat˚, dakkhiṇeyy˚, kaṭṭh˚. But this trinity of cardinal sins lies at the basis of Buddhist ethics, & the fire simile was more probably suggested by the number. D iii.217; It 92, Vbh 368. In late books are found others: ind˚ the fire of the senses PvA 56; dukkh˚ the glow of suffering ib. 60; bhavadukkh˚ of the misery of becomings Sdhp. 552; vippaṭisār˚ burning remorse PvA 60; sok˚ burning grief ib. 41.

Note. The form aggini occurs only at Sn 668 & 670 in the meaning of "pyre", and in combn. with sama "like", viz. aggini -- samaŋ jalitaŋ 668 ( = samantato jali taŋ aggiŋ Sn A 480); aggini -- samāsu 670 (= aggisamāsu Sn A 481). The form agginī in phrase niccagginī can either be referred to gini (q. v.) or has to be taken as nom. of aggini (in adj. function with ī metri causa;

otherwise as adj. agginiŋ), meaning looking constantly after the fire, i. e. careful, observant, alert. -- agāra (agyâgāra) a heated room or hut with a fire Vin i.24; iv.109; D i.101, 102 (as v. l. BB for agāra); M i.501; A v.234, 250. -- khandha a great mass of fire, a huge fire, fire -- brand S ii.85; A iv. 128; Th 2, 351 (˚samākāmā); J iv.139; vi.330; Ps i.125; Dpvs vi.37; Miln 304. -- gata having become (like) fire Miln 302. -- ja fire -- born J v.404 (C; text aggijāta). -- ṭṭha fire -- place J v.155. -- ṭṭhāna fire -- place Vin ii.120 (jantāghare, in bathroom). -- daḍḍha consumed by fire Dh 136; Pv i.74. -- dāha (mahā˚) a holocaust A i.178. -- nikāsin like fire J iii.320 (suriya). -- nibbāna the extinction of fire J i.212. -- pajjota fire -- light A ii.140 (one of the 4 lights, viz. canda˚, suriya˚, a˚, paññā˚). -- paricaraṇa ( -- ṭṭhāna) the place where the (sacrificial) fire is attended to DhA i.199. -- paricariyā fire -- worship DhA ii.232; Sn A 291 (pāri˚) 456. -- paricārika one who worship the fire a v.263 (brāhmaṇa). -- sālā a heated hall or refectory Vin i.25, 49 = ii.210; i.139; ii.154. -- sikhā the crest of the fire, the flame, in simile ˚ûpama, like a flaming fire Sn 703; Dh 308 = It 43, 90 (ayoguḷa). -- hutta (nt.) the sacrificial fire (see above 2), Vin i.33, 36 = J i.83; Vin i.246 = Sn 568 (˚mukha -- yañña); S i.166; Dh 392; Sn 249, p. 79; J iv.211; vi.525; ThA 136 (= aggi); DhA iv.151 (˚ŋ brāhmaṇo namati). -- huttaka (nt.) fire -- offering J vi.522 (= aggi -- jūhana C.). -- hotta = ˚hutta SnA 456 (v. l. BB ˚hutta). -- homa fire -- oblation (or perhaps sacrificing to Agni) D i.9 (= aggi -- jūhana DA i.93). -- 5 -- Aggika
Aggika
(adj.) [aggi + ka] one who worships the fire Vin i.71 (jaṭilaka); D ii.339 sq. (jaṭila); S i.166 (brāhmaṇa). Aggha
Aggha
[see agghati] 1. price, value, worth, Miln 244; Mhvs 26, 22; 30, 76; VvA 77. -- mahaggha (adj.) of great value J iv.138; v.414; vi.209; Pv ii.118. See also mahâraha. appaggha (adj.) of little value J. iv.139; v.414. -- anaggha (nt.) pricelessness, J v.484; cattari anagghāni the four priceless things, viz. setacchatta, nisīdanapallanka, ādhāraka, pādapīṭhikā DhA iii.120, 186. (adj.) priceless, invaluable J v.414; Mhvs 26, 25; DhA iv.216. -- agghena (instr.) for the price of Vin ii.52, cp. Bdhgh on p. 311, 312. -- 2. an oblation made to a guest D ii.240; J iv.396 = 476.

-- kāraka a valuator J i.124. -- pada valuableness J v.473 (˚lakkhaṇaŋ nāma mantaŋ). Agghaka
Agghaka
(adj.) = aggha; worth, having the value of ( -- ˚) Mhvs 30, 77. an˚ priceless Mhvs 30, 72. Agghati
Agghati
(intr.) [Sk. arghati, argh = arh (see arhati), cp. Gr. a)lfh/ reward, a)lfa/nw to deserve] to be worth, to have the value of (acc.), to deserve J i.112 (satasahassaŋ; aḍḍhamāsakaŋ); vi.174, 367 (padarajaŋ); DhA iii.35 (maṇin nâgghāma); Mhvs 32, 28. Freq. in stock phrase kalaŋ nâgghati (nâgghanti) soḷasiŋ not to be worth the 16th part of (cp. kalā) Vin ii.156; S i.233; Dh 70; Vv 207 (= nânubhoti VvA 104), 437; J v.284. -- Caus. agghāpeti to value, to appraise, to have a price put on (acc.) J i.124; iv.137, 278; Miln 192; Mhvs 27, 23. Cp. agghāpanaka & agghāpaniya. Agghanaka
Agghanaka
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. *agghana, abstr. to agghati] having the value of, equal to, worth Vin iv.226; J i.61 (satasahass˚), 112; DA i.80 (kahāpaṇ˚); DhA iii.120 (cuddasakoṭi˚); Mhvs 26, 22; 34, 87. -- f. ˚ikā J i.178 (satasahass˚). Agghaniya
Agghaniya
(adj.) [in function & form grd. of agghati] pri- celess, invaluable, beyond the reach of money Miln 192. Agghāpanaka
Agghāpanaka
[fr. agghāpana to agghāpeti, Caus. of agghati] a valuator, appraiser J i.124, 125; v.276 (˚ika). Agghāpaniya
Agghāpaniya
(adj.) [grd. of agghāpeti, see agghati] that which is to be valued, in ˚kamma the business of a valuator J iv.137. Agghika
Agghika
(nt.) ( -- ˚) [ = agghiya] an oblation, decoration or salutation in the form of garlands, flowers etc., therefore meaning "string, garland" (cp. Sinhalese ägä "festoon work") Mhvs 19, 38 (pupph˚) 34, 73 (ratan˚) 34, 76 ( dhaj˚); Dāvs i.39 (pupphamay˚); v.51 (kusum˚). Agghiya
Agghiya
(adj. -- n.) [grd. form from agghati] 1. (adj.) valu- able, precious, worth J vi.265 (maṇi); DhA ii.41 (ratan˚ of jewel's worth); Mhvs 30, 92. -- 2. (nt.) a respectful oblation J v.324 = vi.516; Dpvs vi.65; vii.4. Agha
Agha1
(nt.) [cp. Sk. agha, of uncertain etym.] evil, grief, pain, suffering, misfortune S i 22; M i.500 (roga gaṇḍa salla agha); A ii.128 (id.); J v.100; Th 2, 491; Sdhp 51. -- adj. painful, bringing pain J vi.507 (agha -- m -- miga = aghakara m. C.). -- bhūta a source of pain S iii.189 (+ agha & salla). Agha
Agha2
(m. nt.) [the etym. suggested by Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 200 (with ref. to M i.500, which belongs under agha1) is untenable (to Sk. kha, as a -- kha = agha, cp. Jain Prk. khaha). Neither does the pop. etym. of Bdhgh. offer any clue (= a + gha from ghan that which does not strike or aghaṭṭaniya is not strikeable DhsA 326, cp. Dhs. trsl. 194 & J iv.154 aghe ṭhitā = appaṭighe ākāse ṭhitā the air which does not offer any resistance). On the other hand the primary meaning is darkness, as seen from the phrase lokantarikā aghā asaŋvutā andhakārā D ii.12; S v.454, and BSk. aghasaŋvṛta M Vastu i.240, adj. dark M Vastu i.41; ii.162; Lal Vist 552] the sky, orig. the dark sky, dark space, the abyss of space D ii.12; S v.45; Vv 161 (aghasi gama, loc. = vehāsaŋ gama VvA 78); J iv.154; Dhs 638 (+ aghagata); Vbh 84 (id.).

-- gata going through or being in the sky or atmosphere Dhs 638, 722; Vbh 84. -- gāmin moving through the atmosphere or space i. e. a planet S i.67 = Miln 242 (ādicco seṭṭho aghagāminaŋ). Aghata
Aghata
at Th 1, 321 may be read as agha -- gata or (prefer- ably) with v. l. as aggha -- gataŋ, or (with Neumann) as agghaŋ agghatānaŋ. See also Mrs. Rh. D, Psalms of the Brethren, p. 191. Aghammiga
Aghammiga
[to agha1?] a sort of wild animal J vi.247 ( = aghāvaha miga) 507 (= aghakara). Cp. BSk. agharika Divy 475. Aghavin
Aghavin
(adj.) [to agha1] suffering pain, being in misery Sn 694 ( = dukkhita SnA 489). -- 6 -- Anka
Anka1
= anga, sign, mark, brand Miln 79; ˚karana branding J iv.366, 375. See also anketi. Anka
Anka2
[Vedic anka hook, bent etc., anc, cp. ankura & ankusa. Gr. a)gkw/n elbow, a)/gkura = anchor; Lat. uncus nail; Ohg. angul = E. angle] (a.) a hook J v.322 = vi.218 (v. l. BB anga). -- (b.) the lap (i. e. the bent position) or the hollow above the hips where infants are carried by Hindoo mothers or nurses ( ankena vahati) Vin ii.114; D ii.19 (anke pariharati to hold on one's lap or carry on one's hips), 20 (nisīdāpeti seat on one's lap); M ii.97 (ankena vahitvā); Th 1, 299; J i.262 (anke nisinna); ii.127, 236; vi.513; DhA i.170 ( ankena vahitvā) PvA 17 (nisīdāpeti). Ankita
Ankita
[pp. of anketi] marked, branded J i.231 (cakkan- kitā Satthu padā); ii.185 (˚kaṇṇaka with perforated ears). Ankura
Ankura
[cp. Sk. ankura, to anka a bend = a tendril etc.] a shoot, a sprout (lit. or fig.) J ii.105; vi.331 (Buddh ˚a nascent Buddha), 486; Dhs 617 (˚vaṇṇa); Miln 50, 251 269; Sdhp 273; Mhvs 15, 43. Ankusa
Ankusa
[Vedic ankuśa; to anc, see anka2] a hook, a pole with a hook, used (1) for plucking fruit off trees, a crook J i.9 (˚pacchi hook & basket); v.89 = vi.520 (pacchikhanitti˚), 529 (= phalānaŋ gaṇhanatthaŋ ankusaŋ). -> (2) to drive an elephant, a goad (cp patoda & tutta) Vin ii.196 (+ kasā); J vi.489; ThA 173 (ovādaŋ ankusaŋ katvā, fig. guide); Sdhp 147 (daṇḍ˚). -- (3) N. of a certain method of inference in Logic (naya), consisting in inferring certain mental states of a general character from respective traits where they are to be found Nett 2, 4, 127; Nett A 208; -- acc˚ beyond the reach of the goad D ii.266 (nāga). See also ankusaka.

-- gayha (the art) how to grasp and handle an eleph.-> driver's hook M ii.94 (sippa). -- gaha an eleph. -- driver Dh 326. Ankusaka
Ankusaka
[see anka2, cp. ankusa] 1. a crook for plucking fruit J iii.22. -- 2. an eleph. -- driver's hook J iii.431.

-- yattha a crooked stick, alpenstock, staff (of an ascetic) J ii.68 (+ pacchi). Anketi
Anketi
[Denom. fr. anka1] to mark out, brand J i.451 lakkhaṇena); ii.399. -- pp. ankita, q. v. Ankola
Ankola
[dial. for ankura] a species of tree Alangium Hexapetalum J vi.535. Cp. next. Ankolaka
Ankolaka
= ankola J iv.440; v.420. Anga
Anga
(nt.) [Vedic anga, anc cp. Lat. angulus = angle, corner etc., ungulus finger -- ring = Sk. angulīya. See also anka, anguṭṭha & angula] (1) (lit.) a constituent part of the body, a limb, member; also of objects: part, member (see cpd. ˚sambhāra); uttam˚anga the reproductive organ J v.197; also as "head" at ThA 209. Usually in cpds. (see below, esp. ˚paccanga), as sabbanga -- kalyāṇī perfect in all limbs Pv iii.35 (= sobhaṇa -- sabbanga -- paccangī PvA 189) and in redupln. anga -- m -- angāni limb by limb, with all limbs (see also below anga + paccanga) Vin iii.119; Vv 382 (˚ehi naccamāna); Pv ii.1210, 13, 18 (sunakho te khādati). -- (2) (fig.) a constituent part of a whole or system or collection, e. g. uposath˚ the vows of the fast J i.50; bhavanga the constituents or the condition of becoming (see bhava & cp. Cpd. 265 sq.); bojjhanga (q. v.). Esp. with numerals: cattāri angāni 4 constituents A ii.79 (viz. sīla, samādhi, paññā. vimutti and rūpa, vedanā, saññā, bhava), aṭṭhangika (q. v.) magga the Path with its eight constituents or the eightfold Path (KhA 85: aṭṭhɔ angāni assā ti) navanga Buddha -- sāsana see nava. -- (3) a constituent part as characteristic, prominent or distinguishing, a mark, attribute, sign, quality D i.113 sq., 117 (iminā p˚ angena by this quality, or: in this respect, cp. below 4; DA i.281 expls tena kāra-> ṇena). In a special sense striking (abnormal) sign or mark on the body D i.9, from which a prophesy is made (: hattha -- pādādisu yena kenaci evarūpena angena samannāgato dīghāyu . . hotī ti . . angasatthan = chiromantics DA i.92). Thus in combn. with samannāgata & sampanna always meaning endowed with "good", superior, remarkable "qualities", e. g. J i.3 (sabbanga -- sampanna nagaraŋ a city possessing all marks of perfection); ii.207. -> In enumn. with var. numerals: tīhi angehi s. A i.115; cattāri sotapannassa a -- D iii.227 = A iv.405 sq.; pañcanga -- vippahīno (i. e. giving up the 5 hindrances, see nīvaraṇa) and pañcanga -- samannāgato (i. e. endowed with the 5 good qualities, viz. the sīla -- kkhandha, see kkhandha ii.A d) S i.99 = A i.161; v.15, 29. Similarly the 5 attributes of a brahmin (viz. sujāta of pure birth, ajjhāyaka a student of the Vedas, abhirūpa handsome, sīlava of good conduct, paṇḍita clever) D i.119, 120. Eight qualities of a king D i.137. Ten qualities of an Arahant (cp. dasa1 B 2) S iii.83; Kh iv.10 = KhA 88; cp. M i.446 (dasahɔ angehi samannāgato rañño assājāniyo). -- (4) (modally) part, share, interest, concern; ajjhattikaŋ angaŋ my own part or interest (opp. bāhiraŋ the interest in the outside world). A i.16 sq. = S v.101 sq.; It 9. rañño angaŋ an asset or profit for the king M i.446. Thus adv. tadanga (see also ta˚ i.a) as a matter of fact, in this respect, for sure, certainly and tadangena by these means, through this, therefore M i.492; A iv.411; Sdhp 455, 456; iminā p˚ angena for that reason M ii.168. -- In compn. with verbs angi˚ (angī˚): angigata having limbs or ports, divided DA i.313; cp. samangi ( -- bhūta).

-- jāta "the distinguishing member", i. e. sign of male or female (see above 3); membrum virile and muliebre Vin i.191 (of cows); iii.20, 37, 205; J ii.359; Miln 124. -- paccanga one limb or the other, limbs great and small M i.81; J vi -- 20, used (a) collectively: the condition of perfect limbs, or adj. with perfect limbs, having all limbs Pv ii.1212 ( = paripuṇṇa -- sabbanga -- paccangavatī PvA 158); SnA 383; DhA i.390; ThA 288; Sdhp 83 fig. rathassa angapaccangan M i.395; sabbanga -- paccangāni all limbs Miln 148. -- (b) distributively (cp. similar redupl. formations like chiddâvachidda, seṭṭhânu -- seṭṭhi, khaṇḍākhaṇḍa, cuṇṇavicuṇṇa) limb after limb, one limb after the other (like angamangāni above 1), piecemeal M i.133 (˚e daseyya), 366; J i.20; iv.324 (chinditvā). -- paccangatā the condition or state of perfect limbs, i. e. a perfect body VvA 134 (suvisuddh˚). -- paccangin having all limbs (perfect) D i.34 (sabbanga -- peccangī); PvA 189. -- rāga painting or rouging the body Vin ii.107 (+ mukha˚). -- laṭṭhi sprout, offshoot ThA 226. -- vāta gout Vin i.205. -- vijjā the art of prognosticating from marks on the body, chiromantics, palmistry etc. (cp. above 3) D i.9 (see expl. at DA i.93); J i.290 (˚āya cheka clever in fortune -- telling); ˚ânubhāva the power of knowing the art of signs on the body J ii.200; v.284; ˚pāṭhaka one who in versed in palmistry etc. J ii.21, 250; v.458. -- vekalla bodily deformity DhA ii.26. -- sattha the science of prognosticating from certain bodily marks DA i.92. -- sambhāra the combination of parts Miln 28 = S i.135; Miln 41. -- hetuka a species of wild birds, living in forests J vi.538. Angaṇa
Angaṇa1
(nt.) [cp. Sk. angaṇa & ˚na; to anga?] an open space, a clearing, Vin ii.218; J i.109 ( = manussānan sañcaraṇa -- ṭṭhāne anāvaṭe bhūmibhāge C.); ii.243, 290, 357; Dāvs i.27. -- cetiy˚ an open space before a Chaitya Miln 366, DA i.191, 197; VvA 254. rāj˚ the empty space before the king's palace, the royal square J i.124, 152; ii.2; DhA ii.45.

-- ṭṭhāna a clearing (in a wood or park) J i.249, 421. -- pariyanta the end or border of a clearing J ii.200. Angaṇa
Angaṇa2
[prob. to anj, thus a variant of añjana, q. v.]; a speck or freckle (on the face) A v.92, 94 sq. (+ raja). Usually in neg. anangana (adj.) free from fleck or blemish, clear, (of the mind) (opp. sângana Sn 279); D i.76; M i.24 sq.; 100 (+ raja); A ii.211; Sn 517 (+ vigata-> raja = angaṇānan abhāvā malānañ ca vigamā . . . SnA 427), 622 = Dh 125 (= nikkilesa DhA iii.34); Dh 236, 351; Pug 60; Nett 87. -- 7 -- Angada
Angada
[cp. Sk. angada; prob. anga + da that which is given to the limbs] a bracelet J v.9, 410 (citt˚, adj. with manifold bracelets). Angadin
Angadin
(adj.) [to angada] wearing a bracelet J v.9. Angāra
Angāra
(m. nt.) [Vedic angāra] charcoal, burning coal, embers A iii.97, 380, 407; J i.73; iii.54, 55; v.488; Sn 668; Sdhp 32. kul˚ the charcoal of the family, a squanderer S iv.324 (see under kula).

-- kaṭāha a pot for holding burning coal, a charcoal pan DA i.261. -- kapalla an earthenware pan for ashes DhA i.260; Dhs A 333; VvA 142. -- kammakara a charcoal burner J vi.209. -- kāsu a charcoal pit M i.74, 365; Th 2, 491; J i.233; Sn 396; ThA 288; DhA i.442; Sdhp 208. -- pacchi a basket for ashes DhA iv.191. -- pabbata the mountain of live embers, the glowing mount (in Niraya) A i.141; Miln 303; PvA 221 (˚āropaṇa); Sdhp 208. -- maŋsa roast meat Mhvs 10, 16. -- masi ashes DhA iii.309. -- rāsi a heap of burning coal J iii.55. Angāraka
Angāraka
(adj.) [cp. Sk. angāraka] like charcoal, of red colour, N. of the planet Mars DA i.95; cp. J i.73. Angārika
Angārika
a charcoal -- burner J vi.206 ( = angāra -- kamma- kara p. 209). Angārin
Angārin
(adj.) [to angāra] (burning) like coal, of bright- red colour, crimson Th 1, 527 = J i.87 (dumā trees in full bloom). Angika
Angika
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. anga] consisting of parts, -- fold; only in compn. with num. like aṭṭh˚, duv˚ (see dve), catur˚, pañc˚ etc., q. v. Angin
Angin
(adj.) limbed, having limbs or parts, -- fold, see catur˚ & pacc˚ (under anga -- paccangin). -- f. anginī having sprouts or shoots (of a tree) Th 2, 297 ( = ThA 226). Anguṭṭha
Anguṭṭha
[cp. Sk. anguṣṭha, see etym. under anga] 1. the thumb Vin iii.34; Miln 123; PvA 198. -- 2. the great toe J ii.92; Mhvs 35, 43.

-- pada thumb -- mark A iv.127 = S iii.154. -- sineha love drawn from the thumb, i. e. extraordinary love Pv iii.52, cp. PvA 198. Anguṭṭhaka
Anguṭṭhaka
= anguṭṭha J iv.378; v.281; pād˚ the great toe S v.270. Angula
Angula
[Vedic angula, lit. "limblet" see anga for etym.] 1. a finger or toe M i.395 (vankɔ angulaṇ karoti to bend the fingers, v. l. anguliṇ); A iii.6 (id.); J v 70 (goṇ˚ adj. with ox toes, expld. by C. as with toes like an ox's tail; vv. ll. ˚anguṭṭha and ˚angulī). -- 2. a finger as measure, i. e. a finger -- breadth, an inch Vin ii.294, 306 (dvangula 2 inches wide); Mhvs 19, 11 (aṭṭh˚); DhA iii.127 (ek˚).

-- aṭṭhi (? cp. anga -- laṭṭhi) fingers (or toes) and bones DA i.93. -- anguli fingers and toes DhA iii.214. -- antarikā the interstices between the fingers Vin iii.39; Miln 180; DhA iii.214. Angulika
Angulika
(nt.) [ = angulī] a finger J iii.13 (pañc˚); v.204 (vaṭṭ˚ = pavāḷ˚ ankurasadisā vaṭṭangulī p. 207). See also pañcangulika. Angulī & Anguli
Angulī
& Anguli (thus always in cpds.) (f.) [Vedic angulī & ˚i; see anga] a finger A iv.127; Sn 610; J iii.416; iv.474; v.215 (vaṭṭ˚ with rounded fingers); Miln 395; DhA ii.59; iv.210; SnA 229.

-- patodaka nudging with the fingers Vin iii.84 = iv.110; D i.91 = A iv.343. -- pada finger -- mark A iv.127 = S iii.154. -- poṭha snapping or cracking the fingers J v.67. -- muddikā a signet ring Vin ii.106; J iv.498; v.439, 467. -- sanghaṭṭana˚ = poṭha DA i.256. Anguleyyaka
Anguleyyaka
(nt.) [cp. Sk. angulīyaka that which belongs to the finger, Mhg. vingerlîn = ring; E. bracelet, Fr. bras; thimble thumb etc.] an ornament for the finger, a finger -- ring J ii.444 (= nikkha). Acankama
Acankama
(avj.) [a + cankama] not fit for walking, not level or even Th 1, 1174 (magga). Acittaka
Acittaka
(adj.) [a + citta2 + ka] 1. without thought or intention, unconscious, unintentional DhA ii.42. -- 2. without heart or feeling, instr. acittakena (adv.) heartlessly J iv.58 (C. for acetasā). Acittikata
Acittikata
(adj.) [a + citta2 + kata; cp. cittikāra] not well thought of Miln 229. Acira
Acira
see cira & cp. nacira. Acela
Acela
(adj. -- n.) [a + cela] one who is not clothed, esp. t. t. for an anti -- Buddhist naked ascetic D i.161, 165; iii.6, 12, 17 sq.; S i.78; J v.75. Acelaka
Acelaka
= acela D i.166; iii.40; A i.295; ii.206; iii.384 (˚sāvaka); J iii.246; vi.229; Pug 55; DhA iii.489. Acc
Acc
-- 1. a + c˚, e. g. accuta = a + cuta. -- 2. Assimilation group of (a) ati + vowel; (b) c + cons. e. g. acci = arci. Accagā
Accagā
[ati + agā] 3rd sg. pret. of ati -- gacchati (q. v. for similar forms) he overcame, should or could overcome Sn 1040 (expld. wrongly as pp. = atikkanta at Nd2 10 and as atīta at DhA iv.494); Dh 414. Accankusa
Accankusa
(adj.) [ati + ankusa] beyond the reach of the goad D ii.266 (nāga). Accatari
Accatari
see atitarati. Accati
Accati
[Vedic arcati, ṛc, orig. meaning to be clear & to sing i. e. to sound clear, cp. arci] to praise, honour, celebrate Dāvs v.66 (accayittha, pret.) -- pp accita, q. v. Accanta
Accanta
(adj. -- & adv. ˚ -- ) [ati + anta, lit. "up to the end"] 1. uninterrupted, continuous, perpetual J i.223; Miln 413; VvA 71; PvA 73, 125, 266; Sdhp 288. -> 2. final, absolute, complete; adv. thoroughly S i.130 (˚ŋ hataputtāɔ mhi); iii.13 = A i.291 sq.; v.326 sq. (˚niṭṭha, ˚yogakkhemin); Kvu 586 (˚niyāmatā final assurance; cp. Kvu trsl. 340). -- 3. (˚ -- ) exceedingly, extremely, very much A i.145 (˚sukhumāla, extremely delicate), Miln 26 (id.); Sn 794 (˚suddhi = param ttha -- accantasuddhi SnA 528); Th 1, 692 (˚ruci); Dh 162 (˚dussīlya = ekanta˚ DhA iii.153). Accaya
Accaya
[from acceti, ati + i, going on or beyond; cp. Sk. atyaya] (1) (temporal) lapse, passing; passing away, end, death. Usually as instr. accayena after the lapse of, at the end or death of, after Vin i.25; D ii.127 (rattiyā a.), 154 (mam˚ when I shall be dead); M i.438 (temās˚ after 3 months); S i.69; Snp. 102 (catunnaŋ māsānaŋ), p. 110 (rattiyā); J i.253 (ekāha -- dvīh˚), 291 (katipāh˚ after a few days); PvA 47 (katipāh˚), 82 (dasamās˚), 145 (vassasatānaŋ). -- (2) (modal) passing or getting over, overcoming, conquering, only in phrase dur -- accaya difficult to overcome, of kāmapanka Sn 945 ( = dur -- atikkamanīya SnA 568), of sanga Sn 948: taṇhā Dh 336; sota It 95. -- (3) (fig.) going beyond (the norm), transgression, offence Vin i.133 (thull˚ a grave offence), 167 (id.); ii.110, 170; esp. in foll. phrases: accayo maŋ accagamā a fault has overcome me, i. e. has been committed by me (in confession formula) D i.85 (= abhibhavitvā pavatto has overwhelmed me DA i.236); A i.54; M i.438 (id.); accayaŋ accayato passati to recognise a breach of the regulation as such Vin i.315; A i.103; ii.146 sq.; ˚ŋ deseti to confess the transgression S i.239; ˚ŋ accayato paṭigaṇhāti to accept (the confession of) the fault, i. e. to pardon the transgression, in confessionformula at D i.85 = (Vin ii.192; M i.438 etc.). In the same sense accaya -- paṭiggahaṇa pardon, absolution J v.380; accayena desanaŋ paṭigaṇhāti J i.379; accayaŋ khamati to forgive Miln 420. -- 8 -- Accasara
Accasara
(adj.) [a form. fr. aor. accasari (ati + sṛ), influ- enced in meaning by analogy of ati + a + sara (smṛ). Not with Morris (J.P.T.S. 1889, 200) a corruption of accaya + sara (smṛ), thus meaning "mindful of a fault"] 1. going beyond the limits (of proper behaviour), too self -- sure, overbearing, arrogant, proud S i.239 (v. l. accayasara caused by prolepsis of foll. accaya); J iv.6 (+ atisara); DhA iv.230 ( = expecting too much). -- 2. going beyond the limits (of understanding), beyond grasp, transcendental (of pañha a question) M i.304; S v.218 (v. l. SS for BB reading ajjhapara). Cp. accasārin. Accasarā
Accasarā
(f.) [abstr. to accasara] overbearing, pride, self- surity Vbh 358 (+ māyā). Note. In id. p. at Pug 23 we read acchādanā instead of accasarā. Accasari
Accasari
[fr. ati + sṛ] aor 3. sg. of atisarati to go beyond the limit, to go astray J v.70. Accasārin
Accasārin
(adj.) = accasara 1., aspiring too high Sn 8 sq. (yo nâccasārī, opp. to na paccasārī; expld. at SnA 21 by yo nâtidhāvi, opp. na ohiyyi). Accahasi
Accahasi
[fr. ati + hṛ] aor 3 sg. of atiharati to bring over, to bring, to take J iii.484 ( = ativiya āhari C.). Accâbhikkhaṇa
Accâbhikkhaṇa
(˚ -- ) [ati + abhikkhaṇa] too often J v.233 (˚saŋsagga; C. expls. ativiya abhiṇha). Accāraddha
Accāraddha
(adj. adv.) [ati + āraddha] exerting oneself very or too much, with great exertion Vin i.182; Th 1, 638; SnA 21. Accāyata
Accāyata
(adj.) [ati + āyata] too long A iii.375. Accāyika
Accāyika
(adj.) [fr. accaya] out of time, viz. 1. irregular, extraordinary J vi.549, 553. -- 2. urgent, pressing M i.149 (karaṇiyan business) ii.112; J i.338; v.17 ˚ŋ (nt.) hurry DhA i.18. See also acceka. Accāvadati
Accāvadati
[ati + āvadati; or is it = ajjhāvadati = adhi + āvadati?] to speak more or better, to surpass in talk or speech; to talk somebody down, to persuade, entice Vin iv.224, 263; S ii.204 sq.; J v.433 (v. l. BB ajjhārati), 434 (v. l. BB aghācarati for ajjhācarati = ajjhāvadati?). Accāsanna
Accāsanna
(adj.) [ati + asanna] very near, too near PvA 42 (na a. n'âtidūra neither too near nor too far, at an easy distance). Accâhita
Accâhita
(adj.) [ati + ahita] very cruel, very unfriendly, terrible J iv.46 = v.146 (= ati ahita C.) = vi.306 (id.). Acci
Acci
& (in verse) accī (f.) [Vedic arci m. & arcis nt. & f. to ṛc, cp. accati] a ray of light, a beam, flame S iv.290 (spelt acchi), 399; A iv.103; v.9; Sn 1074 (vuccati jālasikhā Nd2 11); J v.213; Miln 40; ThA 154 (dīpɔ); Sdhp 250. Accikā
Accikā
(f.) [fr. acci] a flame M i.74; S ii.99. Accita
Accita
[pp. of accati] honoured, praised, esteemed J vi.180. Accimant
Accimant
(adj.) [fr. acci, cp. Vedic arcimant & arciṣmant] flaming, glowing, fiery; brilliant Th 1, 527; J v.266; vi.248; Vv 388. Accibandha
Acci
-- bandha (adj.) [ = accibaddha?] at Vin i.287 is expld. by Bdhgh as caturassa -- kedāra -- baddha ("divided into short pieces" Vin Texts ii.207), i. e. with squares of irrigated fields. The vv. ll. are acca˚ and acchi˚, and we should prefer the conjecture acchi -- baddha "in the shape of cubes or dice", i. e. with square fields. Accuggacchati
Accuggacchati
[ati + uggacchati] to rise out (of), ger. accuggamma D ii.38; A v.152 (in simile of lotus). Accuggata
Accuggata
(adj.) [ati + uggata] 1. very high or lofty Miln 346 (giri); VvA 197; DhA ii.65. -- 2. too high, i. e. too shrill or loud J vi.133 (sadda), 516 (fig. = atikuddha very angry C.). Accuṇha
Accuṇha
(adj.) [ati + uṇha] very hot, too hot Sn 966; Nd1 487; DhA ii.85, 87 (v. l. for abbhuṇha). See also ati -- uṇha. Accuta
Accuta
(adj.) [a + cuta] immoveable; everlasting, eternal; nt. ˚ŋ Ep. of Nibbāna (see also cuta) A iv.295, 327; Sn 204, 1086 ( = nicca etc. Nd2 12); Dh 225 (= sassata DhA iii.321); Sdhp 47. Accupaṭṭhapeti
Accupaṭṭhapeti
at J v.124 is to be read with v.l. as apaccu- paṭṭhapeti (does not indulge in or care for). Accupati
Accupati
at J iv.250 read accuppati, aor. 3rd sg. of accuppatati to fall in between (lit. on to), to interfere (with two people quarelling). C. expls. atigantvā uppati. There is no need for Kern's corr. acchupati (Toev. s. v.). Accussanna
Accussanna
(adj.) [ati + ussanna] too full, too thick Vin ii.151. Acceka
Acceka
= accāyika, special; ˚cīvara a spccial robe Vin iii.261; cp. Vin Texts i.293. Acceti
Acceti
[ati + eti fr. i] 1. to pass (of time), to go by, to elapse Th 1, 145 (accayanti ahorattā). -- 2. to overcome, to get over Miln 36 (dukkhaŋ). -- Caus. acceti to make go on (loc.), to put on J vi.17 (sūlasmiŋ; C. āvuṇeti), but at this passage prob. to be read appeti (q. v.). Accogāḷha
Accogāḷha
(adj.) [ati + ogāḷha] too abundant, too plentiful (of riches), lit. plunged into A iv.282, 287, 323 sq. Accodaka
Accodaka
(nt.) [ati + udaka] too much water (opp. ano- daka no water) DhA i.52. Accodara
Accodara
(nt.) [ati + udara] too much eating, greediness, lit. too much of a belly J iv.279 (C. ati -- udara). Accha
Accha1
(adj.) [cp. Sk. accha, dial., to ṛc (see accati), thus "shining"; cp. Sk. ṛkṣa bald, bare and Vedic ṛkvan bright. Monier -- Williams however takes it as a + cha fr. chad, thus "not covered, not shaded"] clear, transparent Vin i.206 (˚kañjika); D i.76 (maṇi = tanucchavi DA i.221), 80 (udakapatta), 84 (udaka -- rahada); M i.100; S ii.281 (˚patta); iii.105 (id.); A i.9; J ii.100 (udaka); Vv 7910 (vāri); DA i.113 (yāgu).

-- odaka having clear water, with clear water (of lotus ponds) Vv 4411; 815; f. ˚odikā Vv 412 = 602. Accha
Accha2
[Vedic ṛkṣa = Gr. a)/rktos, Lat. ursus, Cymr. arth] a bear Vin i.200; A iii.101; J v.197, 406, 416; Miln 23, 149. At J vi.507 accha figures as N. of an animal, but is in expln. taken in the sense of accha4 (acchā nāma aghammigā C.). Note. Another peculiar form of accha is P. ikka (q. v.). Accha
Accha3
= akkha2 (a die) see acci -- bandha. Accha
Accha4
(adj.) [Ved. ṛkṣa] hurtful, painful, bad DhA iv.163 (˚ruja). Acchaka
Acchaka
= accha2, a bear J v.71. Acchati
Acchati
[Vedic āsyati & āste, ās; cp. Gr. h_(stai] 1. to sit, to sit still Vin i.289; A ii.15; It 120 (in set carati tiṭṭhati a. sayati, where otherwise nisinna stands for acchati); Vv 741 ( = nisīdati VvA 298); PvA 4. -- 2. to stay, remain, to leave alone Th 1, 936; J iv.306. -- 3. to be, behave, live Vin ii.195; D i.102; S i.212; Vv 112; Pv iii.31 (= nisīdati vasati PvA 188); Miln 88; DhA i.424. In this sense often pleonastic for finite verb, thus aggiŋ karitvā a. (= aggiŋ karoti) D i.102; aggiŋ paricaranto a. (= aggiŋ paricarati) DA i.270; tantaŋ pasārento a. (= tantaŋ pasāreti) DhA i.424. -- Pot. acche It 110; aor. acchi Vin iv.308; DhA i.424. -- 9 -- Acchanna
Acchanna
(adj.) [pp. of acchādeti] covered with, clothed in, fig. steeped in (c. loe.) J jii.323 (lohite a. = nimugga C.). At D i.91 nacchanna is for na channa (see channa2) = not fair, not suitable or proper (paṭirūpa). Acchambhin
Acchambhin
(adj.) [a + chambhin] not frightened, undis- mayed, fearless Sn 42 (reading achambhin; Nd2 13 expls. abhīru anutrāsi etc.); J vi.322 ( = nikkampa C.). See chambhin. Accharā
Accharā1
(f.) [etym. uncertain, but certainly dialectical; Trenckner connects it with ācchurita (Notes 76); Childers compares Sk. akṣara (see akkhara); there may be a connection with akkhaṇa in akkhaṇa -- vedhin (cp. BSk. acchaṭā Divy 555), or possibly a relation to ā + tsar, thus meaning "stealthily", although the primary meaning is "snapping, a quick sound"] the snapping of the fingers, the bringing together of the finger -- tips: 1. (lit.) accharaŋ paharati to snap the fingers J ii.447; iii.191; iv.124, 126; v.314; vi.366; DhA i.38, 424. -- As measure: as much as one may hold with the finger -- tips, a pinch J v.385; DhA ii.273 (˚gahaṇamattaŋ); cp. ekacchara -- matta DhA ii.274. -- 2. (fig.) a finger's snap, i. e. a short moment, in ek˚acchara -- kkhaṇe in one moment Miln 102, and in def. of acchariya (q. v.) at DA i.43; VvA 329.

-- sanghāta the snapping of the fingers as signifying a short duration of time, a moment, ˚matta momentary, only for one moment (cp. BSk. acchaṭāsanghāta Divy 142) A i.10, 34, 38; iv.396; Th 1, 405; 2, 67 (expld. at ThA 76 as ghaṭikāmattam pi khaṇaŋ angulipoṭhanamattam pi kālaŋ). -- sadda the sound of the snapping of a finger J iii.127. Accharā
Accharā2
(f.) [Vedic apsaras = āpa, water + sarati, orig; water nymph] a celestial nymph M i.253 (pl. accharāyo) ii.64; Th 2, 374 (= devaccharā ThA 252); J v.152 sq. (Alambusā a.) Vv 55 (= devakaññā VvA 37); Vv 172; 1811 etc.; DhA iii.8, 19; PvA 46 (dev˚); Miln 169; Sdhp 298. Accharika
Accharika
(nt. or f.?) [fr. accharā2] in ˚ŋ vādeti to make heavenly music (lit. the sounds of an accharā or heavenly nymph) A iv.265. Acchariya
Acchariya
(adj. -- nt.) [cp. Sk. āścarya since Upanishads of uncertain etym. -- The conventional etym. of Pāli grammarians connects it with accharā1 (which is prob. correct & thus reduces Sk. āścarya to a Sanskritisation of acchariya) viz. Dhammapāla: anabhiṇha -- ppavattitāya accharāpaharaṇa -- yoggaŋ that which happens without a moment's notice, at the snap of a finger; i. e. causally unconnected (cp. Goth. silda -- leiks in similar meaning) VvA 329; and Buddhaghosa: accharā -- yoggan ti acchariyaŋ accharaŋ paharituŋ yuttan ti attho DA i.43] wonderful, surprising, strange, marvellous D ii.155; M i.79; iii.118, 125, 144 (an˚); S iv.371; A i.181; Miln 28, 253; DhA iii.171; PvA 121; VvA 71 (an˚). As nt. often in exclamations: how wonderful! what a marvel! J i.223, 279; iv.138; vi.94 (a. vata bho); DhA iv.51 (aho a.); VvA 103 (aho ti acchariyatthena nipāto). Thus freq. combd. with abbhutaŋ = how wonderful & strange, marvellous, beyond comprehension, e. g. D i.2, 60, 206, 210; ii.8; and in phrase acchariyā abbhutā dhammā strange & wonderful things, i. e. wonderful signs, portents marvels, M iii.118, 125; A iv.198; Miln 8; also as adj. in phrase acchariyaabbhuta -- (citta -- )jātā with their hearts full of wonder and surprise DhA iv.52; PvA 6, 50. -- See also acchera & accheraka. Acchādana
Acchādana
(nt.) [fr. acchādeti] covering, clothing Th 1, 698; Miln 279. -- fig. protection, sheltering J i.307. Acchādanā
Acchādanā
(f.) [ = prec.] covering, hiding, concealment Pug 19, 23. -- Note. In id. p. at Vbh 358 we read accasarā for acchādanā. Is the latter merely a gloss? Acchādeti
Acchādeti
[ā + chādeti1, Caus. of chad, cp. BSk. ācchā- dayati jīvitena to keep alive Av. Ś, i.300; Divy 136, 137] to cover, to clothe, to put on D i.63 = It 75; J i.254; iii.189; iv.318; Pug 57; Pv i.105 (ger. acchādayitvāna); DA i.181 (= paridahitvā); PvA 49, 50. -- fig. to envelop, to fill J vi.581 (abbhaŋ rajo acchādesi dust filled the air). -- pp. acchanna (q. v.). Acchi
Acchi
at S iv.290 is faulty spelling for acci (q. v.). Acchijja
Acchijja
(v. l. accheja) destroying (?) S i.127. Is the reading warranted? Cp. acchecchi. Acchidda
Acchidda
see chidda. Acchindati
Acchindati
[ā + chindati, lit. to break for oneself] to remove forcibly, to take away, rob, plunder Vin iv.247 (sayaŋ a. to appropriate); J ii.422; iii.179; iv.343; Miln 20; Sdhp 122. -- ger. acchinditvā J ii.422; DhA i.349; PvA 241 (sayaŋ); & acchetvā M i.434. Caus. ii. acchindāpeti to induce a person to theft Vin iv.224, 247. Acchinna
Acchinna
(adj.) [ā + chinna, pp. of acchindati] removed, taken away, stolen, robbed Vin iv.278, 303; J ii.78; iv.45; v.212. Acchiva
Acchiva
[*Sk. akṣiba and akṣība] a certain species of tree (Hypanthera Moringa) J vi.535. Acchupeti
Acchupeti
[ā + chupeti, Caus. of chupati] to procure or provide a hold, to insert, to put on or in Vin i.290 (aggaḷaŋ) ii.112. Acchecchi
Acchecchi
[Sk. acchaitsīt] 3rd sg. aor. of chindati "he has cut out or broken, has destroyed" (see also chindati 3), in combn. with taṇhaŋ M i.122; S i.12, 23, 127 (so read for acchejja); iv.105, 207. It 47; A iii.246, 445; DhA iv.70 (gloss acchindi, for acchidda pret. of Dh 351). The v. l. at all passages is acchejji, which is to be accounted for on graphological grounds, ch & j being substituted in MSS. Kern (Toevoegselen s. v.) mistakes the form & tries to explain acchejji as adj. = ati -- ejin (ejā), acchecchi = ati -- icchin (icchā). The syntactical construction however clearly points to an aor. Acchejja
Acchejja
= a + chejja not to be destroyed, indestructible, see chindati. Acchedana
Acchedana
(nt.) [abstr. to acchindati] robbing, plundering J vi.544. Acchera
Acchera
(adj.) = acchariya wonderful, marvellous S i.181; Vv 8413 (comp. accheratara); Pv iii.51 (˚rūpa = acchariyasabhāva PvA 197); Sdhp 244, 398. Accheraka
Accheraka
(adj.) = acchera (acchariya) J i.279; Bu i.9 (pāṭihīraŋ). Aja
Aja
[Vedic aja fr. aj (Lat. ago to drive), cp. ajina] a he- goat, a ram D i.6, 127; A ii.207; J i.241; iii.278 sq.; v.241; Pug 56; PvA 80.

-- eḷaka [Sk. ajaiḍaka] goats & sheep D i.5, 141; A ii.42 sq., 209; J i.166; vi.110; Pug 58. As pl. ˚ā S i.76; It 36; J iv.363. -- pada goat -- footed M i.134. -- pāla goatherd, in ˚nigrodharukkha (Npl.) "goatherds' Nigrodha -- tree" Vin i.2 sq. Dpvs i.29 (cp. M Vastu iii.302). -- pālikā a woman goatherd Vin iii.38. -- lakkhaṇa "goat -- sign", i. e. prophesying from signs on a goat etc. D i.9 (expld. DA i.94 as "evarūpānaŋ ajānaŋ mansaŋ khāditabbaŋ evarūpānaŋ na khāditabban ti"). -- laṇḍikā (pl.) goats' dung, in phrase nāḷimattā a. a cup full of goats' dung (which is put down a bad minister's throat as punishment) J i.419; DhA ii.70; PvA 282. -- vata "goats' habit", a practice of certain ascetics (to live after the fashion of goats) J iv.318.

aja -- pada refers to a stick cloven like a goat's hoof; so also at Vism 161. -- 10 -- Ajaka
Ajaka
a goat, pl. goats Vin ii.154. -- f. ajikā J iii.278 & ajiyā J v.241. Ajagara
Ajagara
[aja + gara = gala fr. *gel to devour, thus "goat- eater"] a large snake (rock -- snake?), Boa Constrictor J vi.507; Miln 23, 303, 364, 406; DhA iii.60. Also as ajakara at J iii.484 (cp. Trenckner, Notes p. 64). Ajacca
Ajacca
(adj.) [a + jacca] of low birth J iii.19; vi.100. Ajajjara
Ajajjara
see jajjara. Ajaddhuka & Ajaddhumāra
Ajaddhuka
& Ajaddhumāra see jaddhu. Ajamoja
Ajamoja
[Sk. ajamoda, cp. Sk. ajājī] cummin -- seed VvA 186. Ajā
Ajā
(f.) a she -- goat J iii.125; iv.251. Ajānana
Ajānana
(˚ -- ) (nt.) [a + jānana] not knowing, ignorance (of) J v.199 (˚bhāva); vi.177 (˚kāla). Ajina
Ajina
(nt.) [Vedic ajina, to aja, orig. goats' skin] the hide of the black antelope, worn as a garment by ascetics D i.167; Sn 1027; J i.12, 53; iv.387; v.407. kharājina a rough skin (as garment) M i.343; S iv.118; A ii.207; Sn 249 ( = kharāni a˚ -- cammāni SnA 291). dantājina? ivory (q. v.).

-- khipa a cloak made of a network of strips of a black antelope's hide D i.167; S i.117; A i.240, 295; ii.206; Vin i.306; iii.34; J vi.569. -- paveṇi a cloth of the size of a couch made from pieces of ant. skin sewn together Vin i.192; D i.7 ( = ajina -- cammehi mañcappamāṇena sibbitvā katā paveṇi DA i.87); A i.181. -- sāṭī a garment of skins (= ajina -- camma -- sāṭī DhA iv.156) Dh 394 = J i.481 = iii.85. Ajini
Ajini
aor 3rd sg. jayati, q. v. Ajiya = ajikā
Ajiya
= ajikā (see ajaka). Ajira
Ajira
(nt.). [Vedic ajira to aj, cp. Gr. a)gro/s, Lat. ager, Goth. akrs = Ger. Acker, = E. acre] a court, a yard Mhvs 35, 3. Ajīraka
Ajīraka
(nt.) [a + jīraka] indigestion J i.404; ii.181, 291; iii.213, 225. Ajeyya & Ajjeyya
Ajeyya1
& Ajjeyya (adj.) [a + jeyya, grd. of jayati, q. v.] - (a) not to be taken by force Kh viii.8 (cp. KhA 223). -> (b) not to be overpowered, invincible Sn 288; J v.509. Ajeyya
Ajeyya2
(adj.) [a + jeyya, grd. of jīyati, q. v.] not decaying, not growing old, permanent J vi.323. Ajja & Ajjā
Ajja
& Ajjā (adv.) [Vedic adya & adyā, a + dyā, a˚ being base of demonstr. pron. (see a3) and dyā an old loc. of dyaus (see diva), thus "on this day"] to -- day, now Sn 75, 153, 158, 970, 998; Dh 326; J i.279; iii.425 (read bahutaŋ ajjā; not with Kern, Toev. s. v. as "food"); Pv i.117 ( = idāni PvA 59); PvA 6, 23; Mhvs 15, 64. -> Freq. in phrase ajjatagge (= ajjato + agge(?) or ajja -- tagge, see agga3) from this day onward, henceforth Vin i.18; D i.85; DA i.235.

-- kālaŋ (adv.) this morning J vi.180; -- divasa the present day Mhvs 32, 23. Ajjatana
Ajjatana
(adj.) [cp. Sk. adyatana] referring to the day, to- day's, present, modern (opp. porāṇa) Th 1, 552; Dh 227; J ii.409. -- dat. ajjatanāya for today Vin i.17; PvA 171 & passim. Ajjatā
Ajjatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. ajja] the present time, in ajjatañ ca this very day S i.83 (v. l. ajjeva). Ajjati
Ajjati
[Vedic arjati, ṛj, a variant of arh, see arahati] to get, procure, obtain J iii.263 (?). pp. ajjita (q. v.). Ajjava
Ajjava
(adj. -- n.) [cp. Sk. ārjava, to ṛju, see uju] straight, upright (usually combd. with maddava gentle, soft) D iii.213; A i.94; ii.113; iii.248; Sn 250 (+ maddava), 292 (id.); J iii.274; Dhs 1339; Vbh 359 (an˚); SnA 292 ( = ujubhāva), 317 (id.). Ajjavatā
Ajjavatā
(f.) [fr. prec.] straight forwardness, rectitude, up- rightness Dhs 1339. (+ ajimhatā & avankatā). Ajjita
Ajjita
[pp. of ajjati] obtained Sdhp 98. Ajjuka
Ajjuka
[*Sk. arjaka] N. of a plant, Ocimum Gratissimum Vin iv.35; DA i.81 (all MSS. have ajjaka). Ajjukaṇṇa
Ajjukaṇṇa
[*Sk. arjakarṇa] N. of a tree Pentaptera To- mentosa J vi.535 (nn). Ajjuṇho
Ajjuṇho
(adv.) [haplology fr. ajja -- juṇho; see juṇhā] this moonlight night Vin i.25; iv.80. Ajjuna
Ajjuna
[Vedic arjuna, to raj; cp. Gr. a)rgo/s white, a)/rguros silver, Lat. argentum] the tree Pentaptera Arjuna J vi.535; DhA i.105 (˚rukkha). Ajjh
Ajjh
-- Assimilation group of adhi + vowel. Ajjhagā
Ajjhagā
[adhi + agā 3rd sg. pret. of adhigacchati (q. v. for similar forms) he came to, got to, found, obtained, experienced S i.12 (vimānaŋ); Sn 225 (expld. at KhA 180 by vindi paṭilabhi), 956 (ratiŋ; expld. at Nd1 457 by adhigacchi); It 69 (jātimaraṇaŋ); Dh 154 (taṇhānaŋ khayaŋ); Vv 327 (visesaŋ attained distinction; expld. at VvA 135 by adhigata); 5021 (amataŋ santiŋ; expld. VvA 215 by v. l. SS adhigañchi, T. adhigacchati). Ajjhatta
Ajjhatta
(adj. -- n.) [cp. Sk. adhyātma, cp. attā], that which is personal, subjective, arises from within (in contrast to anything outside, objective or impersonal); as adv. & ˚interior, personal, inwardly (opp. bahiddhā bāhira etc. outward, outwardly); Cp. ajjhattika & see Dhs. trsl. 272. -> D i.37 (subjective, inward, of the peace of the 2nd jhāna), 70 = A ii.210; v.206 (inward happiness. a. sukkhaŋ = niyakajjhattaŋ attano santāne ti attho DA i.183 cp. DhsA 169, 338, 361); S i.70, 169; ii..27 (kathaŋ kathī hoti is in inward doubt), 40 (sukhaŋ dukkhaŋ); iii.180 (id.); iv.1 sg. (āyatanāni), 139, 196; v.74 (ṭhitaŋ cittaŋ ajjhattaŋ susaṇṭhitaŋ suvimuttaŋ a mind firm, inwardly well planted, quite set free), 110, 143, 263, 297, 390; A i.40 (rūpasaññī), 272 (kāmacchanda etc.); ii.158. (sukhadukkhaŋ), 211; iii.86 (cetosamatha), 92 (vūpasantacitta); iv.32 (sankhittaŋ), 57 (itthindriyaŋ), 299 (cittaŋ), 305 (rūpasaññī), 360 (cetosamatha), 437 (vūpasantacitta); v 79 sq., 335 sq. (sati); It 39 (cetosamatha inward peace), 80, 82, 94; J i.045 (chātajjhatta with hungry insides); v.338 (id.); Ps i.76 (cakkhu etc.); Dhs 161 (= attano jātaŋ DhsA 169), 204, 1044; Pug 59; Vbh 1 sq. (khandhā), 228 (sati), 327 (paññā), 342 (arūˊpasaññī). -- adv. ˚ŋ inwardly, personally (in contrast -- pair ajjhattaŋ vā bahiddhā vā; see also cpd. ˚bahiddhā) A i.284; ii.171; iv.305; v.61; Sn 917 (= upajjhayassa vā ā ācariyassa vā te guṇā assū ti Nd1 350).

-- ārammaṇa a subjective object of thought Dhs 1047. -- cintin thought occupied with internal things Sn 174, 388. -- bahiddhā inside & outside, personal -- external, mutual, interacting S ii.252 sq.; iii.47; iv.382; Nd2 15; Dhs 1049 etc. (see also bahiddhā). -- rata with inward joy D ii.107 = S v.263 = Dh 362 = Ud 64 (+ samāhita); Th 1, 981; A iv.312; DhA iv.90 (= gocarɔ ajjhatta -- sankhātāya kammaṭṭhāna -- bhāvanāya rata). -- rūpa one's own or inner form Vin iii.113 (opp. bahiddhā -- rūpa & ajjh˚ -- bah˚ r.). -- saññojana an inner fetter, inward bond A i.63 sq.; Pug 22; Vbh 361. -- santi inner peace Sn 837 (= ajjhattānaŋ rāgādīnaŋ santibhāva SnA 545; cp. Nd1 185). -- samuṭṭhāna originating from within J i.207 (of hiri; opp. bahiddhā˚). -- 11 -- Ajjhattika
Ajjhattika
(adj.) [ajjhatta + ika], personal, inward (cp. Dhs trsl. 207 & Nd1 346: ajjhattikaŋ vuccati cittaŋ); opp. bāhira outward (q. v.). See also āyatana. -- M i.62; S i.73 (˚ā rakkhā na bāhirā); iv.7 sq. (āyatanāni); v.101 (anga); A i.16 (anga); ii.164 (dhātuyo); iii.400 (āyatanāni); v.52 (id.); It 114 (id.), 9 (anga); Kh iv. ( = KhA 82); J iv.402 (bāhira -- vatthuŋ ayācitvā ajjhattikassa nāmaŋ gaṇhati); Dhs 673, 751; Vbh 13, 67, 82 sq., 119, 131, 392 sq. Ajjhapara
Ajjhapara
S v.218: substitute v. l. accasara (q. v.). Ajjhappatta
Ajjhappatta
(& Ajjhapatta) [adhi + ā + *prāpta] 1. having reached, approached, coming near to J ii.450; vi.566 (p; C. attano santikaŋ patta). -- 2. having fallen upon, attacked J ii.59; v.198 (p; C. sampatta) -- 3. attained, found, got Sn 1134 ( = adhigacchi Nd2); J iii.296 (p. C. sampatta); v.158 (ajjhāpatta; C. sampatta). Ajjhabhavi
Ajjhabhavi
3rd sg. aor. of adhibhavati to conquer, over- power, overcome S i.240 (prohib. mā vo kodho ajjhabhavi); J ii.336. Cp. ajjhabhu & ajjhobhavati. Ajjhabhāsi
Ajjhabhāsi
3rd sg. aor. of adhibhāseti to address S iv.117 (gāthāhi); Kh v. = Sn p. 46 (gāthāya); PvA 56, 90. Ajjhabhu
Ajjhabhu
(3rd sg. aor. of adhibhavati (q. v.) to overcome, conquer It 76 (dujjayaŋ a. he conquered him who is hard to conquer; v. l. ajjhabhi for ajjhabhavi). Cp. ajjhabhavi. Ajjhayana
Ajjhayana
(nt.) [adhi + i] study (learning by heart) of the Vedas Miln 225. See also ajjhena. Ajjhavodahi
Ajjhavodahi
3rd sg. aor. of ajjhodahati [Sk. adhyavadhāti] to put down J v.365 ( = odahi, ṭhapesi C.). Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes reading ajjhavādahi (= Sk. avādhāt). Ajjhāgāre
Ajjhāgāre
(adv.) [adhi + agāre, loc. of agāra] at home, in one's own house A i.132 = It 109; A ii.70. Ajjhācarati
Ajjhācarati
[adhi (or ati?) + ā + car] 1. to conduct one- self according to Vin ii.301; M i.523; Miln 266. -- 2. to flirt with (perhaps to embrace) J iv.231 (aññam -- aññaŋ). pp. ajjhāciṇṇa. See also accāvadati & aticarati. Ajjhācāra
Ajjhācāra
[to adhi (ati?) + ā + car] 1. minor conduct (conduct of a bhikkhu as to those minor rules not included in the Pārājika's or Saŋghādisesa's) Vin i.63 (see note in Vin. Texts, i.184. -- 2. flirtation Vin iii.128 (in the Old Cy as expln of avabhāsati). -- 3. sexual intercourse J i.396; v.327 (˚cara v. l. for ajjhāvara); Miln 127 (an˚). Ajjhāciṇṇa
Ajjhāciṇṇa
[pp. of ajjhācarati] habitually done Vin ii.80 sq., 301. Ajjhājīva
Ajjhājīva
[adhi (ati?) + ā + jīv] too rigorous or strenuous a livelihood M ii.245 (+ adhipāṭimokkha). Ajjhāpajjati
Ajjhāpajjati
[adhi + ā + pad] to commit an offence, to incur, to become guilty of (acc.) Vin iv.237. pp. ajjhāpanna (q. v.). Ajjhāpatti
Ajjhāpatti
(f.) [abstr. to ajjhāpajjati] incurring guilt Dhs 299 (an˚). Ajjhāpana
Ajjhāpana1
(nt.) [fr. Caus. ii. of ajjheti] teaching of the sacred writ, instruction Miln 225. Ajjhāpana
Ajjhāpana2
(nt.) [ā + jhāpana fr. kṣā] burning, conflag- ration J vi.311. Ajjhāpanna
Ajjhāpanna
[pp. of adhi + āpajjati] become guilty of offence D i.245; iii.43; S ii.270; A iv.277, 280; v.178, 181. an˚ guiltless, innocent Vin i.103; D iii.46; S ii.194, 269; A v.181; Miln 401. For all passages except A iv.277, 280, cp. ajjhopanna. Ajjhāpīḷita
Ajjhāpīḷita
[adhi + ā + pīḷita] harassed, overpowered, tor- mented PvA 180 (khuppipāsāya by hunger & thirst). Ajjhābhava
Ajjhābhava
[cp. Sk. adhyābhava] excessive power, predo- minance J ii.357. Ajjhābhavati
Ajjhābhavati
[adhi + ā + bhū, in meaning of abhi + bhu] to predominate J ii.357. Ajjhāyaka
Ajjhāyaka
[cp. Sk. adhyāyaka, cp. ajjhayana] (a brahmin) engaged in learning the Veda (mantajjhāyaka J vi.209; SnA 192), a scholar of the brahmanic texts, a studious, learned person D i.88, 120; iii.94; A i.163; iii.223; Sn 140 (˚kula: thus for ajjhāyakula Fsb.); Th 1, 1171; J i.3; vi.201, 498; DA i.247. Ajjhāruha
Ajjhāruha
(& ˚rūha) (adj.) [to adhi + ā + ruh] growing up over, overwhelming A iii.63 sq. = S v.96; J iii.399. Ajjhārūḷha
Ajjhārūḷha
(adj.) [pp. of adhi + ā + ruh] grown up or high over J iii.399. Ajjhārūhati
Ajjhārūhati
[adhi + ārohati cp. atyārohati] to rise into the air, to climb over, spread over S i.221 = Nett 173 (= ajjhottharati SA; cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Kindred Sayings i.285). Ajjhāvadati
Ajjhāvadati
see accāvadati. Ajjhāvara
Ajjhāvara
[fr. adhi + ā + var] surrounding; waiting on, service, retinue J v.322, 324, 326, 327 (expld at all passages by parisā). Should we read ajjhācara? Cp. ajjhācāra. Ajjhāvasatar
Ajjhāvasatar
[n. ag. to ajjhāvasati] one who inhabits D i.63 (agāraŋ). Ajjhāvasati
Ajjhāvasati
[adhi + ā + vas] to inhabit (agāraŋ a house; i. e. to be settled or live the settled life of a householder) D ii.16; M i.353; Vin iv.224; J i.50; Pug 57; Miln 348. -- pp. ajjhāvuttha (q. v.). Ajjhāvuttha
Ajjhāvuttha
[cp. Sk. adhyuṣita; pp. of ajjhāvasati] inhabited, occupied (of a house) Vin ii.210; J i.145; ii.333; PvA 24 (˚ghara); fig. (not) occupied by SnA 566 ( = anosita). Ajjhāsaya
Ajjhāsaya
[fr. adhi + ā + śri, orig. hanging on, leaning on, BSk. however adhyāśaya Divy 586] intention, desire, wish, disposition, bent D ii.224 (adj.: intent on, practising); J i.88, 90; ii.352; v.382; DhsA 314, 334; PvA 88, 116, 133 (adj. dān˚ intent on giving alms), 168; Sdhp 219, 518. Freq. in phrase ajjhāsayânurūpa according to his wish, as he wanted PvA 61, 106, 128. Ajjhāsayatā
Ajjhāsayatā
(f.) [abstr. to ajjhāsaya] desire, longing PvA 127 (uḷār˚ great desire for c. loc.). Ajjhāsita
Ajjhāsita
[pp. of adhi + ā + śri] intent on, bent on Miln 361 (jhān˚). Cp. ajjhosita & nissita. Ajjhiṭṭha
Ajjhiṭṭha
[pp. of ajjhesati] requested, asked, invited Vin i.113 (an˚ unbidden); D ii.289 (Buddhaghosa and text read ajjhitta); Sn p. 218 ( = ajjhesita Nd2 16); J vi.292 (= āṇatta C.); DhA iv.100 (v. l. abhijjhiṭṭha). See also an˚. Ajjhupagacchati
Ajjhupagacchati
[adhi + upa + gam] to come to, to reach, obtain; to consent to, agree, submit Th 2, 474 ( = sampaṭicchati ThA 285); J ii.403; Miln 300; pp. ajjhupagata (q. v.). Ajjhupagata
Ajjhupagata
[pp. of ajjhupagacchati] come to, obtained, reached A v.87, cp. 210; v.187 sq. Ajjhupagamana
Ajjhupagamana
(nt.) [adhi + upa + gam] consent, agree- ment, justification Vin ii.97, 104. Ajjhupaharati
Ajjhupaharati
[adhi + upa + hṛ; cp. upaharati] to take (food) to oneself J ii.293 (aor. ajjhupāhari = ajjhohari C.). Ajjhupekkhati
Ajjhupekkhati
[adhi + upa + ikṣ; cp. BSk. adhyupek- ṣati] 1. to look on A i.257; Miln 275. -- 2. to look on intently or with care, to oversee, to take care of A iv.45 (kaṭṭhɔaggi, has to be looked after); PvA 149 (sisaŋ colaŋ vā). -- 3. to look on indifferently to be indifferent, to neglect Vin ii.78 = iii.162, cp. J i.147; M i.155; ii.223; A iii.194, 435; J v.229; DhA iv.125. -- 12 -- Ajjhupekkhana
Ajjhupekkhana
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [abstr. from ajjhupekkhati] care, diligence, attention Ps i.16; ii.119; Vbh 230 sq.; DhA iv.3. Ajjhupekkhitar
Ajjhupekkhitar
[n. ag. to ajjhupekkhati] one who looks on (carefully), one who takes care or controls, an overseer, caretaker S v.69 (sādhukaŋ), 324 (id.), 331 sq.; Vbh 227. Ajjhupeti
Ajjhupeti
[cp. Sk. abhyupeti; adhi + upa + i] to go to meet, to receive J iv.440. Ajjheti
Ajjheti
[Sk. ādhyāyati, Denom. fr. adhyāya] to be anxious about, to fret, worry Sn 948 (socati +); expld at Nd1 433 by nijjhāyati, at SnA 568 by abhijjhati (gloss BB gijjhati). Ajjhena
Ajjhena
(nt.) [Sk. adhyayana, see also ajjhayana] study (esp. of the Vedas) M iii.1; J ii.327 (as v. l. to be preferred to ajjhesanā); iii.114 ( = japa); v.10 (pl. = vede); vi.201 = 207; Vbh 353; SnA 314 (mantɔ).

-- kujja (˚kūta v. l.?) a hypocrite, a pharisee Sn 242; cp. SnA 286. Ajjhesati
Ajjhesati
(adhi + iṣ; cp. BSk. adhyeṣate Divy 160] to request, ask, bid DhA iv.18; aor. ajjhesi Vin ii.200; pp. ajjhiṭṭha & ajjhesita (q. v.), with which cp. pariyiṭṭha & ˚esita. Ajjhesanā
Ajjhesanā
(f.) [see ajjhesati] request, entreaty Vin i.6 = D ii.38 = S i.138; J ii.327 (better v. l. ajjhena). Ajjhesita
Ajjhesita
[pp. of ajjhesati; cp. ajjhiṭṭha] requested, asked, bidden Nd2 16 ( = ajjhiṭṭha). Ajjhokāsa
Ajjhokāsa
[adhi + okāsa] the open air, only in loc. ajjho- kāse in the open Vin i.15; S i.212; DhA iv.100. Ajjhogāḷha
Ajjhogāḷha
[pp. of ajjhogāhati] plunged into, immersed; having entered M i.457; S i.201; Miln 348. Ajjhogāhati
Ajjhogāhati
(& ˚gāheti) [Sk. *abhyavagāhate; adhi ( = abhi) + ava + gāh] to plunge into, to enter, to go into D i.101 (vanaŋ), 222 (samuddaŋ); M i.359, 536; A iii.75, 368; iv.356; v.133; Vin iii.18; J i.7; Nd1 152 (ogāhati +); Miln 87 (samuddaŋ); 300 (vanaŋ). -- pp. ajjhogāḷha (q. v.). Cp. pariyogāhati. Ajjhoṭhapeti
Ajjhoṭhapeti
[adhi + ava + ṭhapeti, Caus. of sthā] to bring to PvA 148 (gāmaŋ), where we should read ˚ṭṭhapeti. Ajjhotthata
Ajjhotthata
[pp. of ajjhottharati] spread over; covered, filled; overcome, crushed, overpowered J i.363 (ajjhottaṭa), 410; v.91 ( = adhipanna); DhA i.278; PvA 55; Dāvs v.5. Ajjhottharati
Ajjhottharati
[adhi + ava + stṛ] to cover over, spread out, spread over, cover; to submerge, flood Vin i.111; J i.61, 72, 73; Miln 296, 336; Dh i.264; Pass. ˚tthariyati to be overrun with (instr.), to be smothered, to be flooded A iii.92 = Pug 67; aor. ajjhotthari VvA 48 (gāmapadeso: was flooded). pp. ajjhotthata (q. v.). Ajjhopanna
Ajjhopanna
(?) only found in one stock phrase, viz. gathita (q. v.) mucchita ajjhopanna with ref. to selfishness, greed, bonds of craving. The reading ajjhopanna is the lectio difficilior, but the accredited reading ajjhosāna seems to be clearer and to harmonize better with the cognate ajjhosita & ajjhosāna (n.) in the same context. The confusion between the two is old -- standing and hard to be accounted for. Trenckner under v. l. to M i.162 on p. 543 gives ajjhopanna as BB ( = adhi -- opanna). The MSS. of Nd2 clearly show ajjhopanna as inferior reading, which may well be attributable to the very frequent SS substitution of p for s (see Nd2 Introd. xix.). Besides this mixture of vv. ll. with s and p there is another confusion between the vv. ll. ajjhāpanna and ajjhopanna which adds to the complication of the case. However since the evidence of a better reading between these two preponderates for ajjhopanna we may consider the o as established, and, with a little more clearness to be desired, may in the end decide for ajjhosāna (q. v.), which in this case would have been liable to change through analogy with ajjhāpanna, from which it took the ā and p. Cp. also ajjhosita. The foll. is a synopsis of readings as preferred or confused by the Ed. of the var. texts. -- 1. ajjhopanna as T. reading: M i.162, 173, 369; A i.74; ii.28; iii.68, 242; Md 75, 76; DA i.59; as v. l.: D i.245. -> 2. ajjhosāna as v. l.: A i.74 (C. expls. ajjhosāya gilitvā ṭhita); Nd2 under nissita & passim; Ud 75, 76 (ajjhosanna); DA i.59 (id.). -- 3. ajjhāpanna as T. reading: D i.245; iii.43, 46; S. ii.194, 270: iv.332 (ajjhapaṇṇa); A v.178, 181; Nd2 under nissita; Miln 401; as v. l.: M i.162; A iii.242; Ud 75, 76. Ajjhobhavati
Ajjhobhavati
[adhi + ava + bhu, Sk. abhi˚] to overcome, overpower, destroy J ii.80 (aor. ajjhobhavi = adhibhavi C.). Ajjhomaddati
Ajjhomaddati
[adhi + ava + mṛd] to crush down A iv.191, 193. Ajjhomucchita
Ajjhomucchita
[pp. adhi + ava + mūrch, cp. adhimuccita] stiffened out (in a swoon), lying in a faint (?) A iii.57 sq. (v. l. ajjhomuñcïta or ˚muccita better: sarīre attached to her body, clinging to her b.). Ajjholambati
Ajjholambati
[adhi + ava + lamb] to hang or hold on to (acc.), to cling to S iii 137; M iii.164 = Nett 179, cp. Sdhp 284 & 296. Ajjhosa
Ajjhosa
= ajjhosāya, in verse only as ajjhosa tiṭṭhati to cleave or cling to S iv.73; Th 1, 98, 794. Ajjhosati
Ajjhosati
[adhi + ava + sayati, sā, to bind, pp. sita: see ajjhosita] to be bound to, to be attached, bent on; to desire, cleave to, indulge in. Fut. ajjhosissati (does it belong here?) M i.328 (c. acc. paṭhaviŋ, better as ajjhesati). grd. ajjhositabha M i.109 (+ abhinanditabba, v. l. ˚etabba); DhsA 5 (id.); ger. ajjhosāya (q. v.) pp. ajjhosita (q. v.). Ajjhosāna
Ajjhosāna
(nt.) cleaving to (earthly joys), attachment, D ii.58 sq.; iii.289; M i.498 (+ abhinandana); S iii.187; A i.66; ii.11 (diṭṭhi˚, kāma˚ + taṇhā). In combn. with (icchā) and mucchā at Nd2 under chanda & nissita and taṇhā (see also ajjhopanna), and at Dhs 1059 of lābha, (the expln. at DhsA 363, 370, from as to eat, is popular etym.) Nett 23 sq. (of taṇhā). Ajjhosāya
Ajjhosāya
[ger. of ajjhosati, cp. BSk. adhyavasāya tiṣṭhati Divy 37, 534] being tied to, hanging on, attached to, only in phrase a. tiṭṭhati (+ abhinandati, same in Divy) M i.266; S. iv.36 sq.; 60, 71 sq.; Miln 69. See also ajjhosa. Ajjhosita
Ajjhosita
[cp. Sk. adhyavasita, from adhi + ava + sā; but sita is liable to confusion with sita = Sk. śrita, also through likeness of meaning with esita; see ajjhāsita & ajjhesita] hanging on, cleaving to, being bent on, (c. loc.) S ii.94 (+ mamāyita); A ii.25 (diṭṭha suta muta +); Nd1 75, 106, 163 = Nd2 under nissita; Th 2, 470 (asāre = taṇhāvasena abhiniviṭṭha ThA 284); Pv iv.84 (mayhaŋ ghare = taṇhābhinivisena abhiniviṭṭha PvA 267; v. l. BB ajjhesita, SS ajjhāsita). -- an˚ S iv.213; v.319; Nd1 411; Miln 74 (pabbajita). Ajjhohata
Ajjhohata
[pp. of ajjhoharati] having swallowed Sdhp 610 (balisaŋ maccho viya: like a fish the fishhook). Ajjhoharaṇa
Ajjhoharaṇa
(nt.) = ajjhohāra 1. A v.324; J vi.213. -- 13 -- Ajjhoharaṇiya
Ajjhoharaṇiya
(adj.) [grd. of ajjhoharati] something fit to eat, eatable, for eating J vi.258; DhA i.284. Ajjhoharati
Ajjhoharati
[Sk. abhyavaharati; adhi ( = abhi) + ava + hṛ] to swallow, eat, take as food M i.245; J i.460; ii.293; vi.205, 213; Miln 366; PvA 283 (aor.) -- pp. ajjhohaṭa (q.v.). Ajjhohāra
Ajjhohāra
[Sk. abhyavahāra] 1. taking food, swallowing, eating & drinking Vin iv.233; Miln 176, 366. -- 2. N. of a fabulous fish (swallower"; cp. timingala) J v.462. Añcati
Añcati
J i.417, read añchati (see next). Añchati
Añchati
[in meaning = ākaḍḍhati, which latter is also the Sk. gloss (ākārṣayati) to the Jain Prk. aŋchāvei = añchati: see Morris, J. P. T. S. 1893, 60] to pull, drag, pull along, to turn on a lathe D ii.291 (bhamakāro dīghaŋ a., where K has note: añjanto ti pi acchanto ti pi pātho) = M i.56 (vv. ll. p. 532 acch˚ & añj˚); Th 1, 750 (añcāmi T., v.l. aññāmi). Añchati should also be read at J i 417 for udakaŋ añcanti (in expln. of udañcanī pulling the water up from a well, q. v.), where it corresponds to udakaŋ ākkaḍḍhati in the same sentence. Añja
Añja
(adv.) [orig. imper. of añjati1; cp. Sk. anjasā (instr.) quickly, Goth. anaks suddenly, lit. with a pull or jerk] pull on! go on! gee up! J i.192. Añjati
Añjati1
[ = Sk. ṛñjati, ṛjyati to stretch, pull along, draw out, erect; cp. Sk. ṛju straight, caus. irajyati; Gr. o)re/gw; Lat. rego, rectus = erect. See also P. uju, añchati, ajjita, ānañja -- ānejja]. See añja, añjaya, añjali, añjasa. Añjati & Añjeti
Añjati2
& Añjeti [ = Sk. añjayati, Caus. of anakti to smear etc.; cp. Sk. añji ointment, ājya butter; Lat. unguo to anoint, unguentum ointment; Ohg. ancho = Ger. Anke butter] to smear, anoint, paint S ii.281; J iv.219 (akkhīni añjetvā, v. l. BB añcitvā). Caus. ii. añjāpeti DhA i.21. -> pp. añjita (q. v.). Añjana
Añjana
(nt.) [from añjati2] ointment, esp. a collyrium for the eyes, made of antimony, adj. anointed, smeary; glossy, black (cp. kaṇha ii. and kāla1 note). -- 1. Vin i.203 (five kinds viz. kāḷ˚, ras˚, sot˚, geruka, kapalla); D i.7, 12; DA i.98 (khār˚); 284; DhA iii.354 (akkhi˚ eye -- salve). -- 2. glossy, jet -- black J i.194; ii.369; v.416. The reading añjana at A iv.468 is wrong, it should be corrected into thanamajjanamattaŋ. See also pacc˚. In meaning collyrium box at Th 2, 413 ( = añjana -- nāḷi ThA 267); DhA ii.25.

-- akkhiha with anointed eyes Th 1, 960. -- upapisana perfume to mix with ointment Vin i.203; ii.112. -- cuṇṇa aromatic powder DhsA 13. -- nāḷi an ointment tube, collyrium box ThA 267. -- rukkha N. of a tree ("black" tree) J i.331. -- vaṇṇa of the colour of collyrium, i. e. shiny, glossy, dark, black D ii.18 (lomāni); J i.138 (kesā), 194; ii.369; PvA 258 (vana). Añjanī
Añjanī
(f.) [fr. añjana] a box for ointment, a collyrium pot Vin i.203, 204; ii.135; iv.168; M ii.65 = Th 1, 773. Añjanisalākā
Añjanisalākā
(f.) a stick to put the ointment on with Vin i.203; ii.135; J iii.419. Añjaya
Añjaya
(adj.) [from añjati1] straight J iii.12 (vv. ll. ajjava & and ājjava better?) expld by C. as ujuka, akuṭila. See also ajjava. Should we assume misreading for añjasa? Añjali
Añjali
[cp. Sk. añjali, fr. añjati1] extending, stretching forth, gesture of lifting up the hands as a token of reverence (cp. E. to "tender" one's respect), putting the ten fingers together and raising them to the head (VvA 7: dasanakha -- samodhāna -- samujjalaŋ añjaliŋ paggayha). Only in stock phrases (a.) añjaliŋ paṇāmeti to bend forth the outstretched hands Vin ii.188; D i.118; Sn 352; Sn p. 79. (b.) ˚ŋ paggaṇhāti to perform the a. salutation J i.54; DhA iv.212; VvA 7, 312 (sirasmiŋ on one's head); PvA 93. (c.) ˚ŋ karoti id. PvA 178; cp. katañjali (adj.) with raised hands Sn 1023; J i.17; PvA 50, and añjalikata id. Pv ii.1220. Cp. pañjali

-- kamma respectful salutation, as above A i.123; ii.180; iv.130; Vv 788, 8316; DhA i.32. -- karaṇīya (adj.) that is worthy of being thus honoured D iii.5; A ii.34; iii.36; iv.13 sq.; It 88. Añjalikā
Añjalikā
(f.) [ = añjali] the raising of the hands as a sign of respectful salutation Vv 15 (expld at VvA 24 as dasanakha -- samodhāna samujjalaŋ añjaliŋ sirasi paggaṇhantī guṇa -- visiṭṭhānaŋ apacayānaŋ akāsiŋ). Añjasa
Añjasa
[Sk. āñjasa (?). Cp. ārjava = P. ajjava, see añjati1 & añjaya] straight, straightforward (of a road) D i.235; J i.5; Th 2, 99; Vv 5020 (cp. VvA 215); VvA 84 (= akuṭila); Mhvs 25, 5; Miln 217; Sdhp 328, 595. Cp. pañjasa. Añjita
Añjita
[Sk. ankta & añjayita, pp. of añjeti] smeared, anointed J i.77 (su -- añjitāni akkhīni); iv.421 (añjitɔakkha). Añña
Añña
(pron.) [Vedic anya, with compar. suff. ya; Goth. anpar; Ohg. andar; formation with n analagous to those with l in Gr. a)/llos (a)/ljos), Lat. alius (cp. alter), Goth. aljis Ags. elles = E. else. From demonstr. base *eno, see na1 and cp. a3] another etc. -- A. By itself: 1. other, not the same, different, another, somebody else (opp. oneself) Vin iii.144 (aññena, scil. maggena, gacchati to take a different route); Sn 459, 789, 904; Dh 158 (opp. attānaŋ), 165; J i.151 (opp. attano); ii.333 (aññaŋ vyākaroti give a diff. answer). -- 2. another one, a second; nt. else, further Sn 1052 (= uttariŋ nt. Nd2 17); else J i.294. aññaŋ kiñci (indef.) anything else J i.151. yo añño every other, whoever else J i.256. -- 3. aññe (pl.) (the) others, the rest Sn 189, 663, 911; Dh 43, 252, 355; J i.254. -- B. del. in correlation: 1. copulative. añña . . añña the one . . the other (. . the third etc.); this, that & the other; some . . some Vin i.15; Miln 40; etc. -> 2. reciprocative añño aññaŋ, aññamaññaŋ, aññoññaŋ one another, each other, mutually, reciprocally (in ordinary construction & declension of a noun or adj. in sg.; cp. Gr. a)llh/lwn, allh/lous in pl.). (a.) añño aññaŋ Dh 165. (b.) aññamañña (cp. BSk. añyamañya M Vastu ii.436), as pron.: n'ālaŋ aññamaññassa sukhāya vā dukkhāya vā D i.56 = S iii 211. n'aññamaññassa dukkhaŋ iccheyya do not wish evil to each other Sn 148. daṇḍehi aññamaññaŋ upakkamanti (approach each other) M i.86 = Nd2 199. ˚ŋ agāravo viharati A iii.247. dve janā ˚ŋ ghātayiŋsu (slew each other) J i.254. aññamaññaŋ hasanti J v.111; ˚ŋ musale hantvā J v.267. ˚ŋ daṇḍâbhigāṭena PvA 58; or adj.: aññamaññaŋ veraŋ bandhiŋsu (established mutual enmity) J ii.353; ˚ŋ piyasaŋvāsaŋ vasiŋsu J ii.153; aññamaññaŋ accayaŋ desetvā (their mutual mistake) DhA i.57; or adv. dve pi aññamaññaŋ paṭibaddha citta ahesuŋ (in love with each other) J iii.188; or ˚ -- : aññamañña -- paccaya mutually dependent, interrelated Ps ii.49, 58. -> (c.) aññoñña (˚ -- ) J v.251 (˚nissita); Dāvs v.45 (˚bhinna). -- 3. disjunctive añña . . añña one . . the other, this one . . . that one, different, different from aññaŋ jīvaŋ . . aññaŋ sarīraŋ one is the soul . . the other is the body, i. e. the soul is different from the body D i.157; M i.430; A v.193; aññā va saññā bhavissati añño attā D i.187. Thus also in phrase aññena aññaŋ opposite, the contrary, differently, contradictory (lit. other from that which is other) Vin ii.85 (paṭicarati make counter -- charges); D i.57 (vyākāsi gave the opposite or contradictory reply); Miln 171 (aññaŋ kayiramānaŋ aññena sambharati). -> anañña (1) not another, i. e. the same, self -- same, identical M i.256 (= ayaŋ). -- (2) not anotber, i. e. alone, by oneself, oneself only Sn 65 (˚posin; opp. paraŋ) = Nd 4, cp. Nd2 36. -- (3) not another, i. e. no more, only, alone Sn p. 106 (dve va gatiyo bhavanti anaññā: and no other or no more, only two). See also under cpds.

-- ādisa different J vi.212, ˚tā difference PvA 243. -- khantika acquiescing in diff. views, following another faith (see khantika) D i.187; M i.487. -- titthiya an adherent of another sect, a non -- Buddhist.; D iii.115; M i.494, 512; P ii.21, 32 sq., 119; iii.116 sq.; iv.51, 228; v.6, 27 sq.; A i.65, 240; ii.176; iv.35 sq.; Vin i.60; J i.93; ii.415. -- diṭṭhika having diff. views (combd. with añña -- khantika) D i.187; M i.487. -- neyya (an˚) not to be guided by somebody else, i. e. independent in one's views, having attained the right knowledge by oneself (opp. para˚) Sn 55, 213, 364. -- mano (an˚) (adj.) not setting one's heart upon others Vv 115 (see VvA 58). -- vāda holding other views, an˚ (adj.) Dpvs iv.24. -- vādaka one who gives a diff. account of things, one who distorts a matter, a prevaricator Vin iv.36. -- vihita being occupied with something else, distracted, absent -- minded Vin iv.269; DhA iii.352, 381; ˚tā distraction, absentmindedness DhA i.181. -- saraṇa (an˚) not betaking oneself to others for refuge, i. e. of independent, sure knowledge S iii.42 = v.154. -- sita dependent or relying on others Sn 825. -- 14 -- Aññatama
Aññatama
(pron. adj.) [añña + superl. suff. tama; see also aññatara] one out of many, the one or the other of, a certain, any Mhvs 38, 14. Aññatara
Aññatara
(pron. adj.) [Sk. anyatara, añña + compar. suff. tara, cp. Lat. alter, Goth. anpar etc.] one of a certain number, a certain, somebody, some; often used (like eka) as indef. article "a". Very frequent, e. g. Sn 35, 210; It 103; Dh 137, 157; J i.221, 253; ii.132 etc. devaññatara a certain god, i. e. any kind of god S iv.180 = A iv.461. Aññattha
Aññattha
(adv.) [from añña = aññatra, adv. of place, cp. kattha, ettha] somewhere or anywhere else, elsewhere (either place where or whereto) J i.291; ii.154; DhsA 163; DhA i.212; iii.351; PvA 45; Mhvs 4, 37; 22, 14. Aññatra
Aññatra
(adv.) [anya + tra, see also aññattha] elsewhere, somewhere else J v.252; Pv iv.162. In compn. also = añña˚, e. g. aññatra -- yoga (adj.) following another discipline D i.187; M i.487. -- As prep. c. abl. (and instr.) but, besides, except, e. g. a. iminā tapo -- pakkamena D i.168; kiŋ karaṇīyaŋ a. dhammacariyāya S i.101; ko nu aññatram -- ariyehi who else but the Nobles Sn 886 (= ṭhapetvā saññā -- mattena SnA 555). -- kiŋ aññatra what but, i. e. what else is the cause but, or: this is due to; but for D i.90 (vusitavā -- mānī k. a. avusitattā); S i.29 (k. k. a. adassanā except from blindness); Sn 206 (id.). Aññathatta
Aññathatta
(nt.) [aññathā + tta] 1. change, alteration S iii.37; iv.40; A i.153; iii.66; Kvu 227 ( = jarā C, cp. Kvu trsl. 55 n. 2); Miln 209. -- 2. difference J i.147; It 11. -- 3. erroneous supposition, mistake Vin ii.2; S iii.91; iv.329. -- 4. fickleness, change of mind, doubt, wavering, M i.448, 457 (+ domanassa); J i.33 (cittaŋ); PvA 195 (cittassa). Aññathā
Aññathā
(adv.) [añña + thā] in a different manner, other- wise, differently S i.24; Sn 588, 757; DhsA 163; PvA 125, 133. anaññathā without mistake Vv 4418; anaññatha (nt.) certainty, truth Ps ii.104 ( = tatha).

-- bhāva (1) a different existence A ii.10; It 9 = 94; Sn 729, 740, 752; (2) a state of difference; i. e. change, alteration, unstableness D i.36; S ii.274; iii.8, 16, 42; Vbh 379. -- bhāvin based on difference S iii.225 sq.; iv.23 sq., 66 sq.; an˚ free from difference Vin i.36. Aññadatthu
Aññadatthu
(adv.) [lit. aññad atthu let there be anything else, i. e. be it what it will, there is nothing else, all, everything, surely] part. of affirmation = surely, all -- round, absolutely (ekaŋsa -- vacane nipāto DA i.111) only, at any rate D i.91; ii.284; Sn 828 (na hɔ aññadatthɔ atthi pasaŋsa -- lābhā, expld. SnA 541 as na hi ettha pasaŋsa -- lābhato añño attho atthi, cp. also Nd1 168); Miln 133; VvA 58; PvA 97, 114.

-- dasa sure -- seeing, seeing everything, all pervading D i.18; iii.135, 185; A ii.24; iii.202; iv.89, 105; It 15. Aññadā
Aññadā
(adv.) [añña + dā, cp. kadā, tadā, yadā] at another time, else, once S iv.285; J v.12; DhA iv.125. Aññā
Aññā
(f.) [Sk. ājñā, = ā + jñā, cp. ājānāti] knowledge, recognition, perfect knowledge, philosophic insight, knowledge par excellence, viz. Arahantship, saving knowledge, gnosis (cp. on term Compend. 176 n. 3 and Psalms of Brethren introd. xxxiii.) M i.445; S i.4 (sammad˚), 24 (aññāya nibbuta); ii.221; v.69, 129 (diṭṭhɔeva dhamme), 133, 237; A iii.82, 143, 192; v.108; It 39 sq., 53, 104; Dh 75, 96; Kh vii.11; Miln 334. -- aññaŋ vyākaroti to manifest ones Arahantship (by a discourse or by mere exclamation) Vin i.183; S ii.51 sq., 120; iv.139; v.222; J i.140; ii.333. See also arahatta.

-- atthika desirous of higher knowledge Pv iv.114. -- ārādhana the attainment of full insight M i.479. -- indriya the faculty of perfect knowledge or of knowledge made perfect D iii.219; S v.204; It 53; Pug 2; Dhs 362, 505, 552; Nett 15, 54, 60. -- citta the thought of gnosis, the intention of gaining Arahantship S ii.267; A iii.437. -- paṭivedha comprehension of insight Vin ii.238. -- vimokkha deliverance by the highest insight Sn 1105, 1107 (Nd2 19: vuccati arahatta -- vimokkho). Aññāṇa
Aññāṇa
(nt.) [a + ñāṇa] ignorance; see ñāṇa 3 e. Aññāṇaka
Aññāṇaka
(nt.) [Demin. of aññāṇa] ignorance Vin iv.144. Aññāṇin
Aññāṇin
(adj.) [a + ñāṇin] ignorant, not knowing DhA iii.106. Aññāta
Aññāta1
[pp. of ājānāti, q. v.] known, recognised Sn 699. an˚ what is not known, in phrase anaññāta -- ññassāmīɔ tɔ indriya the faculty of him (who believes): "I shall know what is not known (yet)" D iii.219; S v.204; It 53; Pug 2; Dhs 296 (cp. Dhs trsl. 86); Nett 15, 54, 60, 191.

-- mānin one who prides himself in having perfect knowledge, one who imagines to be in possession of right insight A iii.175 sq.; Th 1, 953. Aññāta
Aññāta2
[a + ñāta] unknown, see ñāta. Aññātaka
Aññātaka1
[a + ñātaka, cp. Sk. ajñāti] he who is not a kinsman DhA i.222. Aññātaka
Aññātaka2
(adj.) [Demin. of aññāta2] unknown, unrecog- nisable, only in phrase ˚vesena in unknown form, in disguise J i.14; iii.116; v.102. Aññātar
Aññātar
[n. ag. to ājānāti] one who knows, a knower of D ii.286; M i.169; S i.106 (dhammassa); Kvu 561. Aññātāvin
Aññātāvin
(adj. -- n.) [from ājānāti] one who has complete insight DhsA 291.

-- indriya (˚tāvɔ indr.) the faculty of one whose knowledge is made perfect Dhs 555 (cp. Dhs trsl. 150) and same loci as under aññindriya (see aññā). Aññātukāma
Aññātukāma
(adj.) [ā + jñātuŋ + kāma] desirous of gaining right knowledge A iii.192. See ājānāti. Aññāya
Aññāya
[ger. of ājānāti, q. v. for detail] reeognising, knowing, in the conviction of S i.24; A iii.41; Dh 275, 411. Aññoñña
Aññoñña
see añña B 2 c. Añhamāna
Añhamāna
[Sk. aśnāna, ppr. med. of aśnāti, aś to eat] eating, taking food; enjoying: only SS at Sn 240; all MSS at 239 have asamāna. SnA 284 expls. by āhārayamāna. Aṭaṭa
Aṭaṭa
[BSk. aṭaṭa (e. g. Divy 67), prob. to aṭ roam about. On this notion cp. description of roaming about in Niraya at Nd1 405 bottom] N. of a certain purgatory or Niraya A v.173 = Sn p. 126. Aṭaṇaka
Aṭaṇaka
(adj.) [cp. Sk. aṭana, to aṭ] roaming about, wild J v.105 (˚gāvī). Aṭanī
Aṭanī
(f.) a support a stand inserted under the leg of a bedstead Vin iv.168; Sām. Pās. on Pāc. 14 (quoted Min. Pāt. 86 and Vin iv.357); DhA i.234; J ii.387, 425, 484 supports of a seat. Morris J. P. T. S. 1884, 69 compares Marāthi aḍaṇī a three -- legged stand. See also Vin Texts ii.53. -- 15 -- Aṭala
Aṭala
(adj.) [cp. Sk. aṭṭa & aṭṭālaka stronghold] solid, firm, strong, only in phrase aṭaliyo upāhanā strong sandals M ii.155 (vv. ll. paṭaliye & agaliyo) = S i.226 (vv. ll. āṭaliyo & āṭaliko). At the latter passage Bdhgh. expls. gaṇangaṇ -- ûpāhanā, Mrs. Rh. D. (Kindred Sayings i.291) trsls. "buskined shoes". Aṭavī
Aṭavī
(f.) [Sk. aṭavī: Non -- Aryan, prob. Dravidian] 1. forest, woods J i.306; ii.117; iii.220; DhA i.13; PvA 277. -> 2. inhabitant of the forest, man of the woods, wild tribe J vi.55 ( = aṭavicorā C.).

-- rakkhika guardian of the forest J ii.335. -- sankhepa at A i.178 = iii.66 is prob. faulty reading for v. l. ˚sankopa "inroad of savage tribes". Aṭṭa
Aṭṭa1
[cp. see aṭṭaka] a platform to be used as a watch- tower Vin i.140; DA i.209. Aṭṭa
Aṭṭa2
[cp. Sk. artha, see also attha 5 b] lawsuit, case, cause Vin iv.224; J ii.2, 75; iv.129 (˚ŋ vinicchināti to judge a cause), 150 (˚ŋ tīreti to see a suit through); vi.336. Aṭṭa
Aṭṭa3
[Sk. ārta, pp. of ardati, ṛd to dissolve, afflict etc.; cp. Sk. ārdra ( = P. adda and alla); Gr. a)/rdw to moisten, a)/rda dirt. See also aṭṭīyati & aṭṭita] distressed, tormented, afflicted; molested, plagued, hurt Sn 694 (+ vyasanagata; SnA 489 ātura); Th 2, 439 (= aṭṭita ThA 270), 441 (= pīḷita ThA 271); J iv.293 (= ātura C.); Vv 809 (= attita upadduta VvA 311). Often -- ˚: iṇaṭṭa oppressed by debt M i.463; Miln 32; chāt˚ tormented by hunger VvA 76; vedan˚ afflicted by pain Vin ii.61; iii.100; J i.293; sūcik˚ (read for sūcikaṭṭha) pained by stitch Pv iii.23.

-- ssara cry of distress Vin iii.105; S ii.255; J i.265; ii.117; Miln 357; PvA 285. Aṭṭaka
Aṭṭaka
[Demin. of aṭṭa1] a platform to be used as a watch- house on piles, or in a tree Vin i.173; ii.416; iii.322, 372; DA i.209. Aṭṭāna
Aṭṭāna
at Vin ii.106 is obscure, should it not rather be read with Bdhgh as aṭṭhāna? (cp. Bdhgh on p. 315). Aṭṭāla
Aṭṭāla
[from aṭṭa] a watch -- tower, a room at the top of a house, or above a gate (koṭṭhaka) Th 1, 863; J iii.160; v.373; Miln 1, 330; DhA iii.488. Aṭṭālaka
Aṭṭālaka
[Sk. aṭṭālaka] = aṭṭāla; J ii.94, 220, 224; vi.390, 433; Miln 66, 81. Aṭṭita
Aṭṭita
(& occasionally addita, e. g. Pv ii.62; Th 2, 77, 89; Th 1, 406) [Sk. ardita, pp. of ardayati, Caus. of ardati, see aṭṭa3] pained, distressed, grieved, terrified Th 1, 157; J ii.436; iv.85 (v. l. addhita); v.84; VvA 311; ThA 270; Mhvs 1, 25; 6, 21; Dpvs i.66; ii.23; xiii.9; Sdhp 205. -> See remarks of Morris J. P. T. S. 1886, 104, & 1887. 47. Aṭṭiyati & Aṭṭiyati
Aṭṭiyati
& Aṭṭiyati [Denom. fr. aṭṭa3, q. v.] to be in trouble or anxiety, to be worried, to be incommodated, usually combd. with harāyati, e. g. D i.213 (+ jigucchati); S i.131; M i.423; Pv i.102 ( = aṭṭā dukkhitā PvA 48), freq. in ppr. aṭṭiyamāna harayāmāna (+ jigucchamāna) Vin ii.292; J i.66, 292; It 43; Nd2 566; Ps i.159. -> Spelling sometimes addiyāmi, e. g. Th 2, 140. -- pp. aṭṭita & addita. Aṭṭiyana
Aṭṭiyana
(nt.) [cp. Sk. ardana, to aṭṭiyati] fright, terror, amazement DhA ii.179. Aṭṭha
Aṭṭha1
[Vedic aṣṭau, old dual, Idg. *octou, pointing to a system of counting by tetrads (see also nava); Av. ašta, Gr. o)ktw/, Lat. octo, Goth. ahtau = Ohg. ahto, Ger. acht, E. eight] num. card, eight, decl. like pl. of adj. in -- a. A. The number in objective significance, based on natural phenomena: see cpds. ˚angula, ˚nakha, ˚pada, ˚pāda. B. The number in subjective significance. -- (1) As mark of respectability and honour, based on the idea of the double square: (a) in meaning "a couple" aṭṭha matakukkuṭe aṭṭha jīva -- k. gahetvā (with 8 dead & 8 live cocks; eight instead of 2 because gift intended for a king) DhA i.213. sanghassa a salākabhattaŋ dāpesi VvA 75 = DhA iii.104. a. piṇḍapātāni adadaŋ Vv 348. a. vattha -- yugāni (a double pair as offering) PvA 232, a therā PvA 32. -- The highest respectability is expressed by 8 X 8 = 64, and in this sense is freq. applied to gifts, where the giver gives a higher potency of a pair (23). Thus a "royal" gift goes under the name of sabb -- aṭṭhakaŋ dānaŋ (8 elephants, 8 horses, 8 slaves etc.) where each of 8 constituents is presented in 8 exemplars DhA ii.45, 46, 71. In the same sense aṭṭhɔ aṭṭha kahāpaṇā (as gift) DhA ii.41; aṭṭh -- aṭṭhakā dibbākaññā Vv 673 (= catusaṭṭhi VvA 290); aṭṭhaṭṭhaka Dpvs vi.56. Quite conspicuous is the meaning of a "couple" in the phrase satt -- aṭṭha 7 or 8 = a couple, e. g. sattaṭṭha divasā, a weck or so J i.86; J ii.101; VvA 264 (saŋvaccharā years). -- (b.) used as definite measure of quantity & distance, where it also implies the respectability of the gift, 8 being the lowest unit of items that may be given decently. Thus freq. as aṭṭha kahāpaṇā J i.483; iv.138; VvA 76; Miln 291. -- In distances: a. karīsā DhA ii.80; iv.217; PvA 258; a. usabhā J iv.142. -> (c.) in combn. with 100 and 1000 it assumes the meaning of "a great many", hundreds, thousands. Thus aṭṭha sataŋ 800, Sn 227. As denotation of wealt (cp. below under 18 and 80): a -- ˚sata -- sahassa -- vibhava DhA iv.7. But aṭṭhasata at S iv.232 means 108 (3 X 36), probably also at J v.377. -- aṭṭha sahassaŋ 8000 J v.39 (nāgā). The same meaning applies to 80 as well as to its use as unit in combn. with any other decimal (18, 28, 38 etc.): (a) 80 (asīti) a great many. Here belong the 80 smaller signs of a Mahāpurisa (see anuvyañjana), besides the 32 main signs (see dvattiŋsa) VvA 213 etc. Freq. as measure of riches, e. g. 80 waggon loads Pv ii.75; asīti -- koṭivibhava DhA iii.129; PvA 196; asīti hatthɔ ubbedho rāsi (of gold) VvA 66, etc. See further references under asīti. -- (b) The foll. are examples of 8 with other decimals: 18 aṭṭhādasa (only M iii.239: manopavicārā) & aṭṭhārasa (this the later form) VvA 213 (avenika -- buddhadhammā: Bhagavant's qualities); as measure J vi.432 (18 hands high, of a fence); of a great mass or multitue: aṭṭhārasa koṭiyo or ˚koṭi, 18 koṭis J i.92 (of gold), 227; iv.378 (˚dhana, riches); DhA ii.43 (of people); Miln 20 (id.); a. akkhohini -- sankhāsenā J vi.395. a. vatthū Vin ii.204. -- 28 aṭṭhavīsati nakkhattāni Nd1 382; paṭisallāṇaguṇā Miln 140. -- 38 aṭṭhatiŋsā Miln 359 (rājaparisā). -- 48 aṭṭhacattārīsaŋ vassāni Sn 289. -- 68 aṭṭhasaṭṭhi Th 1, 1217 ˚sitā savitakkā, where id. p. at S i.187 however reads atha saṭṭhi -- tasitā vitakkā); J i.64 (turiya -- satasahassāni) -> 98 aṭṭhanavuti (cp. 98 the age of Eli, 1 Sam. iv.15) Sn 311 (rogā, a higher set than the original 3 diseases, cp. navuti). -- (2) As number of symmetry or of an intrinsic, harmonious, symmetrical set, aṭṭha denotes, like dasa (q. v.) a comprehensive unity. See esp. the cpds. for this application. ˚aŋsa and ˚angika. Closely related to nos. 2 and 4 aṭṭha is in the geometrical progression of 2. 4. 8. 16. 32. where each subsequent number shows a higher symmetry or involves a greater importance (cp. 8 X 8 under 1 a) -- J v.409 (a. mangalena samannāgata, of Indra's chariot: with the 8 lucky signs); VvA 193 (aṭṭhahi akkhaṇehi vajjitaŋ manussabhāvaŋ: the 8 unlucky signs). In progression: J iv.3 (aṭṭha petiyo, following after 4, then foll. by 8, 16, 32); PvA 75 (a. kapparukkhā at each point of the compass, 32 in all). Further: 8 expressions of bad language DhA iv.3.

-- aŋsa with eight edges, octagonal, octahedral, implying perfect or divine symmetry (see above B. 2), of a diamond D i.76 = M iii.121 (maṇi veḷuriyo a.); Miln 282 (maṇiratanaŋ subhaŋ jātimantaŋ a.) of the pillars of a heavenly palace (Vimāna) J vi.127 = 173 = Vv 782 (a. sukatā thambhā); Vv 8415 (āyataŋsa = āyatā hutvā aṭṭha -- soḷasadvattiŋsādi -- aŋsavanto VvA 339). Of a ball of string Pv iv.328 (gulaparimaṇḍala, cp. PvA 254). Of geometrical figures in general Dhs 617. -- anga (of) eight parts, eightfold, consisting of eight ingredients or constituents (see also next and above B 2 on significance of aṭṭha in this connection), in compn. with ˚upeta characterised by the eight parts (i. e. the observance of the first eight of the commandments or vows, see sīla & cp. anga 2), of uposatha, the fast -- day A i.215; Sn 402 (Sn A 378 expls. ekam pi divasaŋ apariccajanto aṭṭhangupetaŋ uposathaŋ upavassa); cp. aṭṭhanguposathin (adj.) Mhvs 36, 84. In BSk. always in phrase aṣṭānga -- samanvāgata upavāsa, e. g. Divy 398; Sp. Av. Ś i.338, 399; also vrata Av. Ś i.170. In the same sense aṭṭhangupeta pāṭihāriyapakkha (q. v.) Sn 402, where Vv 156 has ˚susamāgata (expld. at VvA 72 by pānāṭipātā veramaṇī -- ādīhi aṭṭhahɔ angehi samannāgata). ˚samannāgata endowed with the eight qualities (see anga 3), of rājā, a king D i.137 sq., of brahmassara, the supreme or most excellent voice (of the Buddha) D ii.211; J i.95; VvA 217. Also in Buddh. Sk. aṣṭāngopeta svara of the voice of the Buddha, e. g. Sp. Av. Ś i.149. -- angika having eight constituents, being made up of eight (intrinsic) parts, embracing eight items (see above B 2); of the uposatha (as in prec. aṭṭhangɔ uposatha) Sn 401; of the "Eightfold Noble Path" (ariyo a. maggo). (Also in BSk. as aṣṭāngika mārga, e. g. Lal. Vist. 540, cp. aṣṭāngamārgadeśika of the Buddha, Divy 124, 265); D i.156, 157, 165; M i.118; It 18; Sn 1130 (magga uttama); Dh 191, 273; Th 2, 158, 171; Kh iv.; Vin i.10; Nd2 485; DA i.313; DhA iii.402. -- angula eight finger -- breadths thick, eight inches thick, i. e. very thick, of double thickness J ii.91 (in contrast to caturangula); Mhvs 29, 11 (with sattangula). -- aḍḍha (v. l. aḍḍhaṭṭha) half of eight, i. e. four (˚pāda) J vi.354, see also aḍḍha1. -- nakha having eight nails or claws J vi.354 (: ekekasmiŋ pāde dvinnaŋ dvinnaŋ khurānaŋ vasena C.). -- nava eight or nine DhA iii.179. -- pada 1. a chequered board for gambling or playing drafts etc., lit. having eight squares, i. e. on each side (DA i.85: ekekāya pantiyā aṭṭha aṭṭha padāni assā ti), cp. dasapada D i.6. -- 2. eightfold, folded or plaited in eight, cross -- plaited (of hair) Th 1, 772 (aṭṭhāpada -- katā kesā); J ii.5 (˚ṭṭhapana = cross -- plaiting). -- padaka a small square (1/8), i. e. a patch Vin i.297; ii.150. -- pāda an octopod, a kind of (fabulous) spider (or deer?) J v.377; vi.538; cp. Sk. aṣṭapāda = śarabha a fabulous eight -- legged animal. -- mangala having eight anspicious signs J v.409 (expld. here to mean a horse with white hair on the face, tail, mane, and breast, and above each of the four hoofs). -- vanka with eight facets, lit. eight -- crooked, i. e. polished on eight sides, of a jewel J vi.388. -- vidha eightfold Dhs 219. -- 16 -- Aṭṭha
Aṭṭha2
see Attha. Aṭṭhaka
Aṭṭhaka
(adj.) [Sk. aṣṭaka] -- 1. eightfold Vin i.196 = Ud 59 (˚vaggikāni); VvA 75 = DhA iii.104 (˚bhatta). -- 2. ˚ā (f.) the eight day of the lunar month (cp. aṭṭhamī), in phrase rattīsu antarɔaṭṭhakāsu in the nights between the eighths, i. e. the 8th day before and after the full moon Vin i.31, 288 (see Vin Texst i.130n); M i.79; A i.136; Miln 396; J i.390. -- 3. ˚ŋ (nt.) an octad Vv 672 (aṭṭh˚ eight octads = 64); VvA 289, 290. On sabbaṭṭhaka see aṭṭha B 1 a. See also antara. Aṭṭhama
Aṭṭhama
(num. ord.) [Sk. aṣṭama, see aṭṭha1] the eighth Sn 107, 230 (cp. KhA 187), 437. -- f. ˚ī the eighth day of the lunar half month (cp. aṭṭhakā) A i.144; Sn 402; Vv 166 (in all three pass. as pakkhassa cātuddasī pañcadasī ca aṭṭhamī); A i.142; Sn 570 (ito atthami, scil. divase, loc.). Aṭṭhamaka
Aṭṭhamaka
= aṭṭhama the eighth. -- 1. lit. Miln 291 (att˚ self -- eighth). -- 2. as tt. the eighth of eight persons who strive after the highest perfection, reckoned from the first or Arahant. Hence the eighth is he who stands on the lowest step of the Path and is called a sotāpanna (q. v.) Kvu 243 -- 251 (cp. Kvu trsl. 146 sq.); Nett 19, 49, 50; Ps ii.193 (+ sotāpanna). Aṭṭhāna
Aṭṭhāna
(nt.) [ā + ṭṭhāna] stand, post; name of the rub- bing -- post which, well cut & with incised rows of squares, was let into the ground of a bathing -- place, serving as a rubber to people bathing Vin ii.105, 106 (read aṭṭhāne with BB; cp. Vin ii.315). Aṭṭhi˚
Aṭṭhi˚1
[ = attha (aṭṭha) in compn. with kar & bhū, as freq. in Sk. and P. with i for a, like citti -- kata (for citta˚), angi -- bhūta (for anga˚); cp. the freq. combn. (with similar meaning) manasi -- kata (besides manasā -- k.), also upadhikaroti and others. This combn. is restricted to the pp and der. (˚kata & ˚katvā). Other explns. by Morris J. P. T. S. 1886, 107; Windisch, M. & B. 100], in combn. with katvā: to make something one's attha, i. e. object, to find out the essence or profitableness or value of anything, to recognise the nature of, to realise, understand, know. Nearly always in stock phrase aṭṭhikatvā manasikatvā D ii.204; M i.325, 445; S i.112 sq. = 189, 220; v.76; A ii.116; iii.163; J i.189; v.151 (: attano atthikabhāvaŋ katvā atthiko hutvā sakkaccaŋ suṇeyya C.); Ud 80 (: adhikicca, ayaŋ no attho adhigantabbo evaŋ sallakkhetvā tāya desanāya atthikā hutvā C.); Sdhp 220 (˚katvāna). Aṭṭhi
Aṭṭhi2
(nt.) [Sk. asthi = Av. asti, Gr. o)/steon, o)/strakon, a)s- tra/galos; Lat. os (*oss); also Gr. o)/zos branch Goth. asts] -> 1. a bone A i.50; iv.129; Sn 194 (˚nahāru bones & tendons); Dh 149, 150; J i.70; iii.26, 184; vi.448 (˚vedhin); DhA iii.109 (300 bones of the human body, as also at Suśruta iii.5); KhA 49; PvA 68 (˚camma -- nahāru), 215 (gosīs˚); Sdhp 46, 103. -- 2. the stone of a fruit J ii.104.

-- kankala [Sk. ˚kankāla] a skeleton M i.364; cp. ˚sankhalika. -- kadali a special kind of the plantain tree (Musa Sapientum) J v.406. -- kalyāṇa beauty of bones DhA i.387. -- camma bones and skin J ii.339; DhA iii.43; PvA 68 -- taca id. J ii.295. -- maya made of bone Vin ii.115. -- miñjā marrow A iv.129; DhA i.181; iii.361; KhA 52. -- yaka (T. aṭṭhīyaka) bones & liver S i.206. -- sankhalikā [B. Sk. ˚śakalā Sp. Av. Ś i.274 sq., see also aṭṭhika˚] a chain of bones, i. e. a skeleton DhA iii.479; PvA 152. -- sanghāṭa conjunction of bones, i. e. skeleton Vism 21; DhA ii.28; PvA 206. -- sañcaya a heap of bones It 17 = Bdhd 87. -- saññā the idea of bones (cp. aṭṭhika˚) Th 1, 18. -- saṇṭhāna a skeleton Sdhp 101. Aṭṭhika
Aṭṭhika1
(nt.) [fr. aṭṭhi] 1. = aṭṭhi 1 a bone M iii.92; J i.265, 428; vi.404; PvA 41. -- 2 = aṭṭhi 2 kernel, stone DhA ii.53 (tāl˚); Mhvs 15, 42.

-- sankhalikā a chain of bones, a skeleton A iii.324 see also under kaṭaṭṭhika. -- saññā the idea of a skeleton S v.129 sq.; A ii.17; Dhs 264. Aṭṭhika
Aṭṭhika2
at PvA 180 (sūcik˚) to be read aṭṭita (q. v.) for aṭṭika. Aṭṭhita
Aṭṭhita1
see ṭhita. Aṭṭhita
Aṭṭhita2
[ā + ṭhita] undertaken, arrived at, looked after, considered J ii.247 ( = adhiṭṭhita C.). Aṭṭhita
Aṭṭhita3
see atthika. Aṭṭhilla
Aṭṭhilla
at Vin ii.266 is expld. by Bdhgh on p. 327 by gojanghaṭṭika, perhaps more likely = Sk. aṣṭhīlā a round pebble or stone. Aḍḍha
Aḍḍha1
(& addha) [etym. uncertain, Sk. ardha] one half, half; usually in compn. (see below), like diyaḍḍha 1 1/2 (˚sata 150) PvA 155 (see as to meaning Stede, Peta Vatthu p. 107). Note. aḍḍha is never used by itself, for "half" in absolute position upaḍḍha (q. v.) is always used.

-- akkhika with furtive glance ("half an eye") DhA iv.98. -- aṭṭha half of eight, i. e. four (cp. aṭṭhaḍḍha) S ii.222 (˚ratana); J vi.354 (˚pāda quadruped; v. l. for aṭṭhaḍḍha). -- aḷhaka 1/2 an aḷhaka (measure) DhA iii.367. -- uḍḍha [cp. Mahārāṣṭrī form cauṭṭha = Sk. caturtha] three and a half J i.82; iv.180; v.417, 420; DhA i.87; Mhvs 12, 53. -- ocitaka half plucked off J i.120. -- karīsa ( -- matta) half a k. in extent VvA 64 (cp. aṭṭha -- karīsa). -- kahāpaṇa 1/2 kahāpaṇa A v.83. -- kāsika (or ˚ya) worth half a thousand kāsiyas (i. e. of Benares monetary standard) Vin i.281 (kambala, a woollen garment of that value; cp. Vin Texts ii.195); ii.150 (bimbohanāni, pillows; so read for aḍḍhakāyikāni in T.); J v.447 (a˚ -- kāsigaṇikā for a -- ˚kāsiya˚ a courtezan who charges that price, in phrase a˚ -- k˚ -- gaṇikā viya na bahunnaŋ piyā manāpā). -- kumbha a half ( -- filled) pitcher Sn 721. -- kusi (tt. of tailoring) a short intermediate cross -- seam Vin i.287. -- kosa half a room, a small room J vi.81 (= a˚ kosantara C.). -- gāvuta half a league J vi 55. -- cūḷa (˚vāhā vīhi) 1/2 a measure (of rice) Miln 102, perhaps misread for aḍḍhāḷha (āḷha = āḷhaka, cp. A iii.52), a half āḷha of rice. -- tiya the third (unit) less half, i. e. two and a half VvA 66 (māsā); J i.49, 206, 255 (˚sata 250). Cp. next. -- teyya = ˚tiya 2 1/2 Vin iv.117; J ii.129 (˚sata); DA i.173 (v. l. BB for ˚tiya); DhA i.95 (˚sata), 279; PvA 20 (˚sahassa). -- telasa [cp. BSk. ardhatrayodaśa] twelve and a half Vin i 243, 247; D ii.6 (˚bhikkhusatāni, cp. tayo B 1 b); DhA iii.369. -- daṇḍaka a short stick M i.87 = A i.47; ii.122 = Nd2 604 = Miln 197. -- duka see ˚ruka. -- nāḷika ( -- matta) half a nāḷi -- measure full J vi.366. -- pallanka half a divan Vin ii.280. -- bhāga half a share, one half Vv 136 (= upaḍḍhabhāga VvA 61); Pv i.115. -- maṇḍala semi -- circle, semi circular sewing Vin i.287. -- māna half a māna measure J i.468 (m. = aṭṭhannaŋ nāḷinaŋ nāmaŋ C.). -- māsa half a month, a half month, a fortnight Vin iii.254 (ūnak˚); A v.85; J iii.218; VvA 66. Freq. in acc. as adv. for a fortnight, e. g. Vin iv.117; VvA 67; PvA 55. -- māsaka half a bean (as weight or measure of value, see māsaka) J i.111. -- māsika halfmonthly Pug 55. -- muṇḍaka shaven over half the head (sign of loss of freedom) Mhvs 6, 42. -- yoga a certain kind of house (usually with pāsāda) Vin i.58 = 96, 107, 139, 239, 284; ii.146. Acc. to Vin T. i.174 "a gold coloured Bengal house" (Bdhgh), an interpretation which is not correct: we have to read supaṇṇa vankageha "like a Garuḷa bird's crooked wing", i. e. where the roof is bent on one side. -- yojana half a yojana (in distance) J v.410; DA i.35 (in expln. of addhāna -- magga); DhA i.147; ii.74. -- rattā midnight A iii.407 (˚aŋ adv. at m.); Vv 8116 (˚rattāyaŋ adv. = aḍḍharattiyaŋ VvA 315); J i.264 (samaye); iv.159 (id.). -- ratti = ˚rattā VvA 255, 315 (= majjhimayāma -- samaya); PvA 155. -- ruka (v. l. ˚duka) a certain fashion of wearing the hair Vin ii.134; Bdhgh expln. on p. 319: aḍhadukan ti udare lomarāji -- ṭhapanaŋ "leaving a stripe of hair on the stomach". -- vivata (dvāra) half open J v.293. -- 17 -- Aḍḍha
Aḍḍha2
(adj.) [Sk. āḍhya fr. ṛddha pp. of ṛdh, ṛdhnote & ṛdhyate (see ijjhati) to thrive cp. Gr. a)/lqomai thrive, Lat. alo to nourish. Cp. also Vedic iḍā refreshment & P. iddhi power. See also āḷhiya] rich, opulent, wealthy, well -- to -- do; usually in combn. with mahaddhana & mahābhoga of great wealth & resources (foll. by pahūta -- jātarūparajata pahūta vittūpakaraṇa etc.). Thus at D i.115, 134, 137; iii.163; Pug 52; DhA i.3; VvA 322; PvA 3, 78 etc. In other combn. Vv 314 (˚kula); Nd2 615 (Sakka = aḍḍho mahaddhano dhanavā); DA i.281 (= issara); DhA ii.37 (˚kula); Sdhp 270 (satasākh˚), 312 (guṇ˚), 540 sq. (id.), 561. Aḍḍhaka
Aḍḍhaka
(adj.) wealthy, rich, influential J iv.495; Pv ii.82 ( = mahāvibhava PvA 107). Aḍḍhatā
Aḍḍhatā
(f.) [abstr. to aḍḍha] riches, wealth, opulence Sdhp 316. Aṇa
Aṇa
[Sk. ṛṇa; see etym. under iṇa, of which aṇa is a doublet. See also āṇaṇya] debt, only in neg. anaṇa (adj.) free from debt Vin i.6 = S i.137, 234 = D ii.39; Th 2, 364 (i. e. without a new birth); A ii.69; J v.481; ThA 245. Aṇu
Aṇu
(adj.) [Sk. aṇu; as to etym. see Walde Lat. Wtb. under ulna. See also āṇi] small, minute, atomic, subtle (opp. thūla, q. v.) D i.223; S i.136; v.96 (˚bīja); Sn 299 (anuto aṇuŋ gradually); J iii.12 ( = appamattaka); iv.203; Dhs 230, 617 (= kisa); ThA 173; Miln 361. Note aṇu is freq. spelt anu, thus usually in cpd. ˚matta.

-- thūla (aṇuŋthūla) fine and coarse, small & large Dh 31 ( = mahantañ ca khuddakañ ca DhA i.282), 409 = Sn 633; J iv.192; DhA iv.184. -- matta of small size, atomic, least Sn 431; Vbh 244, 247 (cp. M iii.134; A ii.22); Dpvs iv.20. The spelling is anumatta at D i.63 = It 118; Dh 284; DA i.181; Sdhp 347. -- sahagata accompanied by a minimum of, i. e. residuum Kvu 81, cp. Kvu trsl. 66 n. 3. Aṇuka
Aṇuka
(adj.) = aṇu Sn 146, KhA 246. Aṇḍa
Aṇḍa
(nt.) [Etym. unknown. Cp. Sk. aṇḍa] 1. an egg Vin iii.3; S ii.258; M i.104; A iv.125 sq. -- 2. (pl.) the testicles Vin iii.106. -- 3. (in camm˚) a water -- bag J i.249 (see Morris J. P. T. S. 1884, 69).

-- kosa shell of eggs Vin iii.3 = M i.104; A iv.126, 176. -- cheda(ka) one who castrates, a gelder J iv.364, 366. -- ja 1. born from eggs S iii.241 (of snakes); M i.73; J ii.53 = v.85; Miln 267. -- 2. a bird J. v.189. -- bhārin bearing his testicles S ii.258 = Vin iii.100. -- sambhava the product of an egg, i. e. a bird Th 1, 599. -- hāraka one who takes or exstirpates the testicles M i.383. Aṇḍaka
Aṇḍaka1
(nt.) = aṇḍa, egg DhA i.60; iii.137 (sakuṇ˚). Aṇḍaka
Aṇḍaka2
(adj.) [Sk.? prob. an inorganic form; the diaeresis of caṇḍaka into c˚ aṇḍaka seems very plausible. As to meaning cp. DhsA 396 and see Dhs trsl. 349, also Morris J. P. T. S. 1893, 6, who, not satisfactorily, tries to establish a relation to ard, as in aṭṭa3] only used of vācā, speech: harsh, rough, insolent M i.286; A v.265, 283, 293 (gloss kaṇṭakā); J iii.260; Dhs 1343, cp. DhsA 396. Aṇṇa
Aṇṇa
(food, cereal). See passages under aparaṇṇa & pubbaṇṇa. Aṇṇava
Aṇṇava
(nt.) [Sk. arṇa & arṇava to ṛ, ṛṇoti to move, Idg. *er to be in quick motion, cp. Gr. o)/rnumi; Lat. orior; Goth. rinnan = E. run; Ohg. runs, river, flow.] 1. a great flood (= ogha), the sea or ocean (often as mah˚, cp. BSk. mahārṇava, e. g. Jtm 3175) M i.134; S i.214; iv.157 (mahā udak˚); Sn 173 (fig. for saŋsāra see SnA 214), 183, 184; J i.119 (˚kucchi), 227 (id.); v.159 (mah˚); Mhvs 5, 60; 19, 16 (mah˚). -- 2. a stream, river J iii. 521; v.255. Aṇha
Aṇha
[Sk. ahna, day, see ahan] day, only as -- ˚ in apar˚, pubb˚, majjh˚, sāy˚, q. v. Atakkaka
Atakkaka
(adj.) [a + takka2] not mixed with buttermilk J yi.21. Ataccha
Ataccha
(nt.) [a + taccha2] falsehood, untruth D i.3; J vi.207. Ati
Ati
(indecl.) [sk. ati = Gr. e)/ti moreover, yet, and; Lat. et and, Goth. ip; also connected with Gr. ata/r but, Lat. at but (= over, outside) Goth. appan] adv. and prep. of direction (forward motion), in primary meaning "on, and further", then "up to and beyond". I. in abstr. position adverbially (only as ttg.): in excess, extremely, very (cp. ii.3) J vi.133 (ati uggata C. = accuggata T.), 307 (ati ahitaŋ C. = accāhitaŋ T.).

II. as prefix, meaning. -- 1. on to, up to, towards, until); as far as: accanta up to the end; aticchati to go further, pass on; atipāta "falling on to"; attack slaying; atimāpeti to put damage on to, i. e. to destroy. -- 2. over, beyond, past, by, trans -- ; with verbs: (a.) trs. atikkamati to pass beyond, surpass; atimaññati to put one's "manas" over, to despise; atirocati to surpass in splendour. (b.) intr. atikkanta passed by; atikkama traversing; aticca transgressing; atīta past, gone beyond. -- Also with verbal derivations: accaya lapse, also sin, transgression ("going over"); atireka remainder, left over; atisaya overflow, abundance; atisāra stepping over, sin. -- 3. exceedingly, in a high or excessive degree either very (much) or too (much); in nominal compn. (a), rarely also in verbal compn. see (b). -- (a) with nouns & adj.: ˚āsanna too near; ˚uttama the very highest; ˚udaka too much water; ˚khippa too soon; ˚dāna excessive alms giving; ˚dāruṇa very cruel; ˚dīgha extremely long; ˚dūra too near; deva a super -- god ˚pago too early; ˚bālha too much; ˚bhāra a too heavy load; ˚manāpa very lovely; ˚manohara very charming; ˚mahant too great; ˚vikāla very inconvenient; ˚vela a very long time; ˚sambādha too tight, etc. etc. -> (b.) with verb: atibhuñjati to eat excessively.

III. A peculiar use of ati is its' function in reduplication -- compounds, expressing "and, adding further, and so on, even more, etc." like that of the other comparing or contrasting prefixes a (ā), anu, ava, paṭi, vi (e. g. khaṇḍâkhaṇḍa, seṭṭhânuseṭṭhi, chiddâvacchidda, angapaccanga, cuṇṇavicuṇṇa). In this function it is however restricted to comparatively few expressions and has not by far the wide range of ā (q. v.), the only phrases being the foll. viz. cakkâticakkaŋ mañcâtimañcaŋ bandhati to heap carts upon carts, couches upon couches (in order to see a procession) Vin iv.360 (Bdhgh); J ii.331; iv.81; DhA iv.61. -- devâtideva god upon god, god and more than a god (see atideva); mānâtimāna all kinds of conceit; vankâtivanka crooked all over J i.160. -- IV. Semantically ati is closely related to abhi, so that in consequence of dialectical variation we frequently find ati in Pāli, where the corresp. expression in later Sk. shows abhi. See e. g. the foll. cases for comparison: accuṇha ati -- jāta, ˚pīḷita ˚brūheti, ˚vassati, ˚vāyati, ˚veṭheti.

Note The contracted (assimilation -- ) form of ati before vowels is acc -- (q. v.). See also for adv. use atiriva, ativiya, atīva. -- 18 -- Atiambila
Ati
-- ambila (adj.) [ati + ambila] too sour DhA ii.85. Atiarahant
Ati
-- arahant [ati + arahant] a super -- Arahant, one who sur- passes even other Arahants Miln 277. Atiissara
Ati
-- issara (adj.) very powerful(?) J v.441 (˚bhesajja, medicin). Atiuṇha
Ati
-- uṇha (adj.) too hot PvA 37 (˚ātapa glow). See also accuṇha (which is the usual form). Atiuttama
Ati
-- uttama (adj.) by far the best or highest VvA 80. Atiudaka
Ati
-- udaka too much water, excess of water DhA i.52. Atiussura
Ati
-- ussura (adj.) only in loc. ˚e (adv.) too soon after sun- rise, too early VvA 65 (laddhabhattatā eating too early). Atieti
Ati
-- eti [ati + i] to go past or beyond, see ger. aticca and pp. atīta. Atikata
Atikata
(pp.) more than done to, i. e. retaliated; paid back in an excessive degree A i.62. Atikaddhati
Atikaddhati
[ati + kaḍḍhati] to pull too hard, to labour, trouble, drudge Vin iii.17. Atikaṇha
Atikaṇha
(adj.) [ati + kaṇha] too black Vin iv.7. Atikaruṇa
Atikaruṇa
(adj.) [ati + karuṇa] very pitiful, extremely mis- erable J i.202; iv.142; vi.53. Atikassa
Atikassa
(ger.) [fr. atikassati ati + kṛṣ; Sk. atikṛṣya] pul- ling (right) through J v.173 (rajjuŋ, a rope, through the nostrils; v. l. BB. anti˚). Atikāla
Atikāla
[ati + kāla] in instr. atikālena adv. in very good time very early Vin i.70 (+ atidivā). Atikkanta
Atikkanta
[pp. of atikamati] passed beyond, passed by, gone by, elapsed; passed over, passing beyond, surpassing J ii.128 (tīṇi saŋvaccharāni); DhA iii.133 (tayo vaye passed beyond the 3 ages of life); PvA 55 (māse ˚e after the lapse of a month), 74 (kati divasā ˚ā how many days have passed).

-- mānusaka superhuman It 100; Pug 60; cp. BSk. atikrānta -- mānuṣyaka M Vastu iii.321. Atikkantikā
Atikkantikā
(f.) [Der. abstr. fr. prec.] transgressing, over- stepping the bounds (of good behaviour), lawlessness Miln 122. Atikkama
Atikkama
[Sk. atikrama] going over or further, passing beyond, traversing; fig. overcoming of, overstepping, failing against, transgression Dh 191; Dhs 299; PvA 154 (katipayayojan˚), 159 (˚caraṇa sinful mode of life); Miln 158 (dur˚ hard to overcome); Sdhp 64. Atikkamaṇaka
Atikkamaṇaka
(adj.) [atikkamaṇa + ka] exceeding J i.153. Atikkamati
Atikkamati
[ati + kamati] (1) to go beyond, to pass over, to cross, to pass by. (2) to overcome, to conquer, to surpass, to be superior to. -- J iv.141; Dh 221 (Pot. ˚eyya, overcome); PvA 67 (maggena: passes by). grd. atikkamanīya to be overcome D ii.13 (an˚); SnA 568 (dur˚). ger. atikkamma D ii.12 (surpassing); It 51 (māradheyyaŋ, passing over), cp. vv. ll. under adhigayha; and atikkamitva going beyond, overcoming, transcending (J iv.139 (samuddaŋ); Pug 17; J i.162 (raṭṭhaŋ having left). Often to be trsl. as adv. "beyond", e. g. pare beyond others PvA 15; Vasabhagāmaŋ beyond the village of V. PvA 168. -- pp. atikkanta (q. v.). Atikkameti
Atikkameti
[Caus. of atikkamati] to make pass, to cause to pass over J i.151. Atikkhippaŋ
Atikkhippaŋ
(adv.) [ati + khippa] too soon Vin ii.284. Atikhaṇa
Atikhaṇa
(nt.) [ati + khaṇa(na)] too much digging J ii.296. Atikhāta
Atikhāta
(nt.) = prec. J ii.296. Atikhiṇa
Atikhiṇa
(adj.) [ati + khīṇa] in cāpâtikhīṇa broken bow (?) Dh 156 (expld. at DhA iii.132 as cāpāto atikhīṇā cāpā vinimmuttā). Atiga
Atiga
( -- ˚) (adj.) [ati + ga] going over, overcoming, sur- mounting, getting over Sn 250 (sanga˚); Dh 370 (id.); Sn 795 (sīma˚, cp. Nd1 99), 1096 (ogha˚); Nd1 100 ( = atikkanta); Nd2 180 (id.). Atigacchati
Atigacchati
[ati + gacchati] to go over, i. e. to overcome, surmount, conquer, get the better of, only in pret. (aor.) 3rd sg. accagā (q. v. and see gacchati 3) Sn 1040; Dh 414 and accagamā (see gacchati 2) Vin ii.192; D i.85; S ii.205; DA i.236 ( = abhibhavitvā pavatta). Also 3rd pl. accaguŋ It 93, 95. Atigāḷeti
Atigāḷeti
[ati + gāḷeti, Caus. of galati, cp. Sk. vi -- gālayati] to destroy, make perish, waste away J vi.211 ( = atigālayati vināseti C. p. 215). Perhaps reading should be atigāḷheti (see atigāḷhita. Atigāḷha
Atigāḷha
(adj.) [ati + gāḷha 1] very tight or close, inten- sive J i.62. Cp. atigāḷhita. Atigāḷhita
Atigāḷhita
[pp. of atigāḷheti, Denom. fr. atigāḷha; cp. Sk. atigāhate to overcome] oppressed, harmed, overcome, defeated, destroyed J v.401 ( = atipīḷita C.). Atighora
Atighora
(adj.) [ati + ghora] very terrible or fierce Sdhp 285. Aticaraṇa
Aticaraṇa
(nt.) [fr. aticarati] transgression PvA 159. Aticarati
Aticarati
[ati + carati] 1. to go about, to roam about Pv ii.1215; PvA 57. -- 2. to transgress, to commit adultery J i.496. Cp. next. Aticaritar
Aticaritar
[n. ag. of. aticarati] one who transgresses, esp. a woman who commits adultery A ii.61 (all MSS. read aticaritvā); iv.66 (T. aticarittā). -- 19 -- Aticariyā
Aticariyā
(f.) [ati + cariyā] transgression, sin, adultery D iii.190. Aticāra
Aticāra
[from aticarati] transgression Vv 158 ( = aticca cāra VvA 72). Aticārin
Aticārin
(adj. n.) [from aticarati] transgressing, sinning, esp. as f. aticārinī an adulteress S ii.259; iv.242; D iii.190; A iii.261; Pv ii.1214; PvA 151 (v. l. BB), 152; VvA 110. Aticitra
Aticitra
(adj.) [ati + citra] very splendid, brilliant, quite exceptional Miln 28. Aticca
Aticca
(grd.) [ger. of ati + eti, ati + i] 1. passing beyond, traversing, overcoming, surmounting Sn 519, 529, 531. Used adverbially = beyond, in access, more than usual, exceedingly Sn 373, 804 (= vassasataŋ atikkamitvā Nd1 120). -- 2. failing, transgressing, sinning, esp. committing adultery J v,424; VvA 72, Aticchati
Aticchati
[*Sk. ati -- ṛcchati, ati + ṛ, cp. aṇṇava] to go on, only occurring in imper. aticchatha (bhante) "please go on, Sir", asking a bhikkhu to seek alms elsewhere, thus refusing a gift in a civil way. [The interpretation given by Trenckner, as quoted by Childers, is from ati + 'iṣ "go and beg further on". (Tr. Notes 65) but this would entail a meaning like "desire in excess", since iṣ does not convey the notion of movement] J iii.462; DhA iv.98 (T. aticcha, vv. ll. ˚atha); VvA 101; Miln 8. -- Caus. aticchāpeti to make go on, to ask to go further J iii.462. -> Cp. icchatā. Aticchatta
Aticchatta
[ati + chatta] a "super" -- sunshade, a sunshade of extraordinary size & colours DhsA 2. Atitāta
Atitāta
(adj.) [ati + jāta, perhaps ati in sense of abhi, cp. abhijāta] well -- born, well behaved, gentlemanly It 14 (opp. avajāta). Atitarati
Atitarati
[ati + tarati] to pass over, cross, go beyond aor. accatari S iv.157 = It 57 (˚āri). Atituccha
Atituccha
(adj.) [ati + tuccha] very, or quite empty Sdhp 430. Atituṭṭhi
Atituṭṭhi
(f.) [ati + tuṭṭhi] extreme joy J i.207. Atitula
Atitula
(adj.) [ati + tula] beyond compare, incomparable Th 1, 831 = Sn 561 (= tulaŋ atīto nirupamo ti attho SnA 455). Atitta
Atitta
(adj.) [a + titta] dissatisfied, unsatisfied J i.440; Dh 48. Atittha
Atittha
(nt.) [a + tittha] "that which is not a fording- place". i. e. not the right way, manner or time; as ˚wrongly in the wrong way J i.343; iv.379; vi.241; DhA iii.347; DA i.38. Atithi
Atithi
[Sk. atithi of at = at, see aṭati; orig. the wanderer, cp. Vedic atithin wandering] a guest, stranger, newcomer D i.117 (= āgantuka -- navaka pāhuṇaka DA i.288); A ii.68; iii.45, 260; J iv.31, 274; v.388; Kh viii.7 (= nɔ atthi assa ṭhiti yamhi vā tamhi vā divase āgacchatī ti atithi KhA 222); VvA 24 (= āgantuka). Atidāna
Atidāna
(nt.) [ati + dāna] too generous giving, an exces- sive gift of alms Miln 277; PvA 129, 130. Atidāruṇa
Atidāruṇa
(adj.) [Sk. atidāruṇa, ati + dāruṇa] very cruel, extremely fierce Pv iii.73. Atiditthi
Atiditthi
(f.) [ati + diṭṭhi] higher doctrine, super know- ledge (?) Vin i.63 = ii.4 (+ adhisīla; should we read adhi -- diṭṭhi?) Atidivā
Atidivā
(adv.) [ati + divā] late in the day, in the afternoon Vin i.70 (+ atikālena); S i.200; A iii.117. Atidisati
Atidisati
[ati + disati] to give further explanation, to explain in detail Miln 304. Atidīgha
Atidīgha
(adj.) [ati + dīgha] too long, extremely long J iv. 165; Pv ii.102; VvA 103 (opp. atirassa). Atidukkha
Atidukkha
[ati + dukkha] great evil, exceedingly painful excessive suffering PvA 65; Sdhp 95. In atidukkhavāca PvA 15 ati belongs to the whole cpd., i. e. of very hurtful speech. Atidūra
Atidūra
(adj.) [ati + dūra] very or too far Vin i.46; J ii.154; Pv ii.965 = DhA iii.220 (vv. ll. suvidūre); PvA 42 (opp. accāsanna). Atideva
Atideva
[ati + deva] a super god, god above gods, usually Ep. of the Buddha S i.141; Th 1, 489; Nd2 307 (cp. adhi˚); Miln 277. atidevadeva id. Miln 203, 209. devâtideva god over the gods (of the Buddha) Nd2 307 a. Atidhamati
Atidhamati
[ati + dhamati] to beat a drum too hard J i.283; pp. atidhanta ibid. Atidhātatā
Atidhātatā
[ati + dhāta + ta] oversatiation J ii.193. Atidhāvati
Atidhāvati
[ati + dhāvati 1] to run past, to outstrip or get ahead of S iii.103; iv.230; M iii.19; It 43; Miln 136; SnA 21. Atidhonacārin
Atidhonacārin
[ati + dhonacārin] indulging too much in the use of the "dhonas", i. e. the four requisites of the bhikkhu, or transgressing the proper use or normal application of the requisites (expln. at DhA iii.344, cp. dhona) Dh 240 = Nett 129. Atināmeti
Atināmeti
[BSk. atināmayati, e. g. Divy 82, 443; ati + nāmeti] to pass time A i.206; Miln 345. Atiniggaṇhāti
Atiniggaṇhāti
[ati + niggaṇhāti] to rebuke too much J vi.417. Atinicaka
Atinicaka
(adj.) [ati + nīcaka] too low, only in phrase cakkavāḷaŋ atisambādhaŋ Brahmaloko atinīcako the World is too narrow and Heaven too low (to comprehend the merit of a person, as sign of exceeding merit) DhA i.310; iii.310 = VvA 68. Atineti
Atineti
[ati + neti] to bring up to, to fetch, to provide with Vin ii.180 (udakaŋ). Atipaṇḍita
Atipaṇḍita
(adj. [ati + paṇḍita] too clever DhA iv.38. Atipaṇḍitatā
Atipaṇḍitatā
(f.) [abstr. of atipaṇḍita] too much clever- ness DhA ii.29. Atipadāna
Atipadāna
(nt.) [ati + pa + dāna] too much alms -- giving Pv ii.943 ( = atidāna PvA 130). Atipapañca
Atipapañca
[ati + p.] too great a delay, excessive tarrying J i.64; ii.93. Atipariccāga
Atipariccāga
[ati + pariccāga] excess in liberality DhA iii.11. Atipassati
Atipassati
[ati + passati; cp. Sk. anupaśyati] to look for, catch sight of, discover M iii.132 (nāgaŋ). Atipāta
Atipāta
[ati + pat] attack, only in phrase pāṇâtipāta destruction of life, slaying, killing, murder D i.4 (pāṇātipātā veramaṇī, refraining from killing, the first of the dasasīla or decalogue); DA i.69 ( = pāṇavadha, pāṇaghāta); Sn 242; Kh ii. cp. KhA 26; PvA 28, 33 etc. Atipātin
Atipātin
(adj. -- n.) one who attacks or destroys Sn 248; J vi.449 (in war nāgakkhandh˚ = hatthikkhande khaggena chinditvā C.); PvA 27 (pāṇ˚). Atipāteti
Atipāteti
[Denom. fr. atipāta] to destroy S v.453; Dh 246 (v. l. for atimāpeti, q. v.). Cp. paripāteti. Atipīṇita
Atipīṇita
(adj.) [ati + pīṇita] too much beloved, too dear, too lovely DhA v.70. -- 20 -- Atipīḷita
Atipīḷita
[ati + pīḷita, cp. Sk. abhipīḍita] pressed against, oppressed, harassed, vexed J v.401 ( = atigāḷhita). Atippago
Atippago
(adv.) [cp. Sk. atiprage] too early, usually ellip- tical = it is too early (with inf. carituŋ etc.) D i.178; M i.84; A iv.35. Atibaddha
Atibaddha
[pp. of atibandhati; cp. Sk. anubaddha] tied to, coupled J i.192 = Vin iv.5. Atibandhati
Atibandhati
[ati + bandhati; cp. Sk. anubandhati] to tie close to, to harness on, to couple J i.191 sq. -- pp. atibaddha q. v. Atibahala
Atibahala
(adj.) [ati + bahala] very thick J vi.365. Atibāḷha
Atibāḷha
(adj.) [ati + bāḷha] very great or strong PvA 178; nt. adv. ˚ŋ too much D i.93, 95; M i.253. Atibāheti
Atibāheti
[ati + bāheti, Caus. to bṛh1; cp. Sk. ābṛhati] to drive away, to pull out J iv.366 ( = abbāheti). Atibrahmā
Atibrahmā
[ati + brahmā] a greater Brahma, a super -- god Miln 277; DhA ii.60 (Brahmuṇā a. greater than B.). Atibrūheti
Atibrūheti
[ati + brūheti, bṛh2, but by C. taken incorrectly to brū; cp. Sk. abhi -- bṛṇhayati] to shout out, roar, cry J v.361 ( = mahāsaddaŋ nicchāreti). Atibhaginiputta
Atibhagini
-- putta [ati + bh. -- p.] a very dear nephew J i.223. Atibhāra
Atibhāra
[ati + bhāra] too heavy a load Miln 277 (˚ena sakaṭassa akkho bhijjati). Atibhārita
Atibhārita
(adj.) [ati + bhārita] too heavily weighed, over- loaded Vtn iv.47. Atibhāriya
Atibhāriya
(adj.) too serious DhA i.70. Atibhuñjati
Atibhuñjati
[ati + bhuñjati] to eat too much, to overeat Miln 153. Atibhutta
Atibhutta
(nt.) [ati + bhutta] overeating Miln 135. Atibhoti
Atibhoti
[ati + bhavati, cp. Sk. atibhavati & abhibhavati] to excel, overcome, to get the better of, to deceive J i.163 ( = ajjhottharati vañceti C.). Atimaññati
Atimaññati
[Sk. atimanyate; ati + man] to despise, slighten, neglect Sn 148 ( = KhA 247 atikkamitvā maññati); Dh 365, 366; J ii.347; Pv i.76 (˚issaŋ, v. l. ˚asiŋ = atikkamitvā avamaññiŋ PvA 37); PvA 36; Sdhp 609. Atimaññanā
Atimaññanā
(f.) [abstr. to prec., cp. atimāna] arrogance, contempt, neglect Miln 122. Atimanāpa
Atimanāpa
(adj.) [ati + manāpa] very lovely PvA 77 (+ abhirūpa). Atimanorama
Atimanorama
(adj.) [ati + manorama] very charming J i.60. Atimanohara
Atimanohara
(adj.) [ati + manohara] very charming PvA 46. Atimanda(ka)
Atimanda(ka)
(adj.) [ati + manda] too slow, too weak Sdhp 204, 273, 488. Atimamāyati
Atimamāyati
[ati + mamāyati, cp. Sk. atīmamāyate in diff. meaning = envy] to favour too much, to spoil or fondle J ii.316. Atimahant
Atimahant
(adj.) [ati + mahant] very or too great J i.221; PvA 75. Atimāna
Atimāna
[Sk. atimāna, ati + māna] high opinion (of one- self), pride, arrogance, conceit, M i.363; Sn 853 (see expln. at Nd1 233), 942, 968; J vi.235; Nd1 490; Miln 289. Cp. atimaññanā. Atimānin
Atimānin
(adj.) [fr. atimāna] D ii.45 (thaddha +); Sn 143 (an˚) 244; KhA 236. Atimāpeti
Atimāpeti
[ati + māpeti, Caus. of mī, mināte, orig. meaning "to do damage to"] to injure, destroy, kill; only in the stock phrase pāṇaŋ atimāpeti (with v. l. atipāteti) to destroy life, to kill D i.52 (v. l. ˚pāteti) = DA i.159 (: pāṇaŋ hanati pi parehi hanāpeti either to kill or incite others to murder); M i.404, 516; S iv.343; A iii.205 (correct T. reading atimāteti; v. l. pāteti); Dh 246 (v. l. ˚pāteti) = DhA iii.356 (: parassa jīvitindriyaŋ upacchindati). Atimukhara
Atimukhara
(adj.) [ati + mukhara] very talkative, a chat- terbox J i.418; DhA ii.70. atimukharatā (f. abstr.) ibid. Atimuttaka
Atimuttaka
[Sk. atimuktaka] N. of a plant, Gaertnera Racemosa Vin ii.256 = M i.32; Miln 338. Atimuduka
Atimuduka
(adj.) [ati + muduka] very soft, mild or feeble J i.262. Atiyakkha
Atiyakkha
(ati + yakkha] a sorcerer, wizard, fortuneteller J vi.502 (C.: bhūtavijjā ikkhaṇīka). Atiyācaka
Atiyācaka
(adj.) [ati + yācaka] one who asks too much Vin iii.147. Atiyācanā
Atiyācanā
(f.) [ati + yācanā] asking or begging too much Vin iii.147. Atirattiŋ
Atirattiŋ
(adv.) [ati + ratti; cp. atidivā] late in the night, at midnight J i.436 (opp. atipabhāte). Atirassa
Atirassa
(adj.) [ati + rassa] too short (opp. atidīgha) Vin iv.7; J vi.457; VvA 103. Atirājā
Atirājā
[ati + rājā] a higher king, the greatest king, more than a king DhA ii.60; Miln 277. Atiriccati
Atiriccati
[ati + riccati, see ritta] to be left over, to remain Sdhp 23, 126. Atiritta
Atiritta
(adj.) [pp. of ati + rlc, see ritta] left over, only as neg. an˚ applied to food, i. e. food which is not the leavings of a meal, fresh food Vin i.213 sq, 238; ii.301; iv.82 sq., 85. Atiriva
Atiriva
(ati -- r -- iva) see ativiya. Atireka
Atireka
(adj.) [Sk. atireka, ati + ric, rinakti; see ritta] surplus, too much; exceeding, excessive, in a high degree; extra Vin i.255; J i.72 (˚padasata), 109; 441 (in higher positions); Miln 216; DhsA 2; DhA ii.98.

-- cīvara an extra robe Vin i.289. -- pāda exceeding the worth of a pāda, more than a pāda, Vin iii.47. Atirekatā
Atirekatā
(f.) [abstr. to prec.] excessiveness, surplus, excess Kvu 607. Atirocati
Atirocati
[ati + ruc] to shine magnificently (trs.) to out- shine, to surpass in splendour D ii.208; Dh 59; Pv ii.958; Miln 336 (+ virocati); DhA i.446 ( = atikkamitvā virocati); iii.219; PvA 139 (= ativiya virocati). Ativankin
Ativankin
(adj.) [ati + vankin] very crooked J i.160 (van- kâtivankin crooked all over; cp. ati iii.). Ativaṇṇati
Ativaṇṇati
[ati + vaṇṇati] to surpass, excel D ii.267. Ativatta
Ativatta
[pp. of ativattati: Sk. ativṛtta] passed beyond, surpassed, overcome (act. & pass.), conquered Sn 1133 (bhava˚); Nd2 21 ( = atikkanta, vītivatta); J v.84 (bhaya˚); Miln 146, 154. Ativattati
Ativattati
[ati + vṛt, Sk. ativartate] to pass, pass over, go beyond; to overcome, get over; conquer Vin ii.237 (samuddo velaŋ nɔ); S ii.92 (saŋsāraŋ); iv.158 (id.) It 9 (saŋsāraŋ) = A ii.10 = Nd2 172a; Th 1, 412; J i.58, 280; iv.134; vi.113, 114; PvA 276. -- pp. ativatta (q. v.). Ativattar
Ativattar1
[Sk. *ativaktṛ, n. ag. to ati -- vacati; cp. ativākya] one who insults or offends J v.266 (isīnaŋ ativattāro = dharusavācāhi atikkamitvā vattāro C.). -- 21 -- Ativattar
Ativattar2
[Sk. *ativartṛ, n. ag. to ati -- vattati] one who over- comes or is to be overcome Sn 785 (svātivattā = durativattā duttarā duppatarā Nd1 76). Ativasa
Ativasa
(adj.) [ati + vasa fr. vas] being under somebody's rule, dependent upon (c. gen.) Dh 74 ( = vase vattati DhA ii.79). Ativassati
Ativassati
[ati + vassati, cp. Sk. abhivarṣati] to rain down on, upon or into Th 1, 447 = Vin ii.240. Ativākya
Ativākya
(nt.) [ati + vac, cp. Sk. ativāda, fr. ati + vad] abuse, blame, reproach Dh 320, 321 ( = aṭṭha -- anariyavohāra -- vasena pavattaŋ vītikkama -- vacanaŋ DhA iv.3); J vi.508. Ativāta
Ativāta
[ati + vāta] too much wind, a wind which is too strong, a gale, storm Miln 277. Ativāyati
Ativāyati
[ati + vāyati] to fill (excessively) with an odour or perfume, to satiate, permeate, pervade Miln 333 (+ vāyati; cp. abhivāyati ibid 385). Ativāha
Ativāha
[fr. ati + vah, cp. Sk. ativahati & abhivāha] car- rying, carrying over; a conveyance; one who conveys, i. e. a conductor, guide Th 1, 616 (said of sīla, good character); J v.433. -- Cp. ativāhika. Ativāhika
Ativāhika
[fr. ativāha] one who belongs to a conveyance, one who conveys or guides, a conductor (of a caravan) J v.471, 472 (˚purisa). Ativikāla
Ativikāla
(adj.) [ati + vikāla] at a very inconvenient time, much too late D i 108 ( = suṭṭhu vikāla DA i.277). Ativijjhati
Ativijjhati
[Sk. atividhyati, ati + vyadh] to pierce, to enter into (fig.), to see through, only in phrase paññāya ativijjha (ger.) passati to recognise in all details M i.480; S v.226; A ii.178. Ativiya
Ativiya
(adv.) [Sk. atīva] = ati + iva, orig. "much -- like" like an excess = excessive -- ly. There are three forms of this expression, viz. (1) ati + iva in contraction atīva (q. v.); -- (2) ati + iva with epenthetic r: atiriva D ii.264 (v. l. SS. atīva); Sn 679, 680, 683; SnA 486; -> (3) ati + viya (the doublet of iva) = ativiya J i.61, 263; DhA ii.71 (a. upakāra of great service); PvA 22, 56, 139. Ativisā
Ativisā
(f.) [Sk. ativiṣā] N. of a plant Vin i.201; iv.35. Ativissaṭṭha
Ativissaṭṭha
(adj.) [ati + vissaṭṭha] too abundant, in ˚vākya one who talks too much, a chatterbox J v.204. Ativissāsika
Ativissāsika
(adj.) [ati + vissāsika] very, or too confiden- tial J i.86. Ativissuta
Ativissuta
(adj.) [ati + vissuta] very famous, renowned Sdhp 473. Ativeṭheti
Ativeṭheti
[ati + veṣṭ, cp. Sk. abhiveṣṭate] to wrap over, to cover, to enclose; to press, oppress, stifle Vin ii.101; J v.452 ( -- ativiya veṭheti piḷeti C.). Ativela
Ativela
(adj.) [ati + vela] excessive (of time); nt. adv. ˚ŋ a very long time; excessively D i.19 ( = atikālaŋ aticiran ti attho DA i.113); M i.122; Sn 973 (see expln. at Nd1 504); J iii.103 = Nd1 504. Atilīna
Atilīna
(adj.) [ati + līna] too much attached to worldly matters S v.263. Atilūkha
Atilūkha
(adj.) [ati + lūkha] too wretched, very miserable Sdhp 409. Atiloma
Atiloma
(adj.) [ati + loma] too hairy, having too much hair J vi.457 (opp. aloma). Atisañcara
Atisañcara
(˚cāra?) [ati + sañcāra] wandering about too much Miln 277. Atisaṇha
Atisaṇha
(adj.) [ati + saṇha] too subtle DhA iii.326. Atisanta
Atisanta
(adj.) [ati + santa1] extremely peaceful Sdhp 496. Atisambādha
Atisambādha
(adj.) [ati + sambādha] too tight, crowded or narrow DhA i.310; iii.310 = VvA 68; cp. atinīcaka. -> f. abstr. atisambādhatā the state of being too narrow J i.7. Atisaya
Atisaya
[cp. Sk. atiśaya, fr. ati + śī] superiority, distinc- tion, excellence, abundance VvA 135 ( = visesa); PvA 86; Dāvs ii.62. Atisayati
Atisayati
[ati + śī] to surpass, excel; ger. atisayitvā Miln 336 (+ atikkamitvā). Atisara
Atisara
(adj.) [fr. atisarati; cp. accasara] transgressing, sinning J iv.6; cp. atisāra. Atisarati
Atisarati
[ati + sṛ] to go too far, to go beyond the limit, to overstep, transgress, aor. accasari (q. v.) Sn 8 sq. (opp. paccasari; C. atidhāvi); J v.70 and atisari J iv.6. -> ger. atisitvā (for *atisaritvā) D i.222; S iv.94; A i.145; v.226, 256; Sn 908 ( = Nd1 324 atikkamitvā etc.). Atisāyaŋ
Atisāyaŋ
(adv.) [ati + sāyaŋ] very late, late in the evening J v.94. Atisāra
Atisāra
[fr. ati + sṛ, see atisarati. Cp. Sk. atisāra in diff. meaning but BSk. atisāra (sâtisāra) in the same meaning) going too far, overstepping the limit, trespassing, false step, slip, danger Vin i.55 (sâtisāra), 326 (id.); S i.74; M iii.237; Sn 889 (atisāraŋ diṭṭhiyo = diṭṭhigatāni Nd1 297; going beyond the proper limits of the right faith), J v.221 (dhamm˚), 379; DhA i.182; DhsA 28. See also atisara. Atisithila
Atisithila
(adj.) [ati + sithila] very loose, shaky or weak A iii.375. Atisīta
Atisīta
(adj.) [ati + sīta] too cold DhA ii.85. Atisītala
Atisītala
(adj.) [ati + sītala] very cold J iii.55. Atihaṭṭha
Atihaṭṭha
(adj.) [ati + haṭṭha] very pleased Sdhp 323. Atiharati
Atiharati
[ati + hṛ] to carry over, to bring over, bring, draw over Vin ii.209; iv.264; S i.89; J i.292; v.347. -> Caus. atiharāpeti to cause to bring over, bring in, reap, collect, harvest Vin ii.181; iii.18; Miln 66; DhA iv.77. -> See also atihita. Atihita
Atihita
[ati + hṛ, pp. of atiharati, hita unusual for hata, perhaps through analogy with Sk. abhi + dhā] brought over (from the field into the house), harvested, borne home Th 1, 381 (vīhi). Atihīna
Atihīna
(adj.) [ati + hīna] very poor or destitute A iv.282, 287; 323 (opp. accogāḷha). Atihīḷeti
Atihīḷeti
[ati + hīḍ] to despise J iv.331 ( = atimaññati C.). Atīta
Atīta
(adj. -- n.) [Sk. atīta, ati + ita, pp. of i. Cp. accaya & ati eti] 1. (temporal) past, gone by (cp. accaya 1) (a) adj. atītaŋ addhānaŋ in the time which is past S iii.86; A iv.219; v.32. -- Pv ii.1212 (atītānaŋ, scil. attabhāvāuaŋ, pariyanto na dissati); khaṇâtīta with the right moment past Dh 315 = Sn 333; atītayobbana he who is past youth or whose youth is past Sn 110. -- (b) nt. the past: atīte (loc.) once upon a time J i.98 etc. atītaŋ āhari he told (a tale of) the past, i. e. a Jātaka J i.213, 218, 221 etc. -- S i.5 (atītaŋ nânusocati); A iii.400 (a. eko anto); Sn 851, 1112. In this sense very frequently combd. with or opposed to anāgata the future & paccuppanna the present, e. g. atītânāgate in past & future S ii.58; Sn 373; J vi.364. Or all three in ster. combn. atītɔ -- anāgata -- paccuppanna (this the usual order) D iii.100, 135; S ii.26, 110, 252; iii.19, 47, 187; iv.4 sq.; 151 sq.; A i.264 sq., 284; ii.171, 202; iii.151; v.33; It 53; Nd2 22; but also occasionally atīta paccuppanna anāgata, e. g. PvA 100. -- 2. (modal) passed out of, having overcome or surmounted, gone over, free from (cp. accaya 2) S i.97 (maraṇaŋ an˚ not free from death), 121 (sabbavera -- bhaya˚); A ii.21; iii.346 (sabbasaŋyojana˚); Sn 373 (kappa˚), 598 (khaya˚, of the moon = ūnabhāvaŋ atīta Sn A 463); Th 1, 413 (c. abl.) -- 3. (id.) overstepping, having transgressed or neglected (cp. accaya 3) Dh 176 (dhammaŋ).

-- aŋsa the past ( = atīta koṭṭhāse, atikkantabhavesū ti attho ThA 233) D ii.222; iii.275; Th 2, 314. -- ārammaṇa state of mind arising out of the past Dhs 1041. -- 22 -- Atīradassin
Atīradassin
(adj. -- n.) [a + tīra + dassin] not seeing the shore J i.46; vi.440; also as atīradassanī (f.) J v.75 (nāvā). Cp. D i 222. Atīva
Atīva
(indecl.) [ati + iva, see also ativiya] very much, exceedingly J ii.413; Mhvs 33, 2 etc. Ato
Ato
(adv.) [Sk. ataḥ] hence, now, therefore S i.15; M i.498; Miln 87; J v.398 ( = tato C.). Atoṇa
Atoṇa
[etym.?) a class of jugglers or acrobats(?) Miln 191. Atta
Atta1
[ā + d + ta; that is, pp. of ādadāti with the base form reduced to d. Idg *d -- to; cp. Sk. ātta] that which has been taken up, assumed. atta -- daṇḍa, he who has taken a stick in hand, a violent person, S i.236; iv.117; Sn 630, 935; Dh 406. Attañjaha, rejecting what had been assumed, Sn 790. Attaŋ pahāya Sn 800. The opp. is niratta, that which has not been assumed, has been thrown off, rejected. The Arahant has neither atta nor niratta (Sn 787, 858, 919), neither assumption nor rejection, he keeps an open mind on all speculative theories. See Nd i.82, 90, 107, 352; ii.271; SnA 523; DhA iv.180 for the traditional exegesis. As legal t. t. attādānaŋ ādīyati is to take upon oneself the conduct, before the Chapter, of a legal point already raised. Vin ii.247 (quoted v.91). Atta
Atta2
see attan. Atta
Atta3
[Sk. akta, pp. of añjati] see upatta. Attan
Attan
(m.) & atta (the latter is the form used in compn.) [Vedic ātman, not to Gr. a)
emos = Lat. animus, but to Gr. a)tmo/s steam, Ohg. ātum breath, Ags. aepm]. -- I. Inflection. (1) of attan -- (n. stem); the foll. cases are the most freq.: acc. attānaŋ D i.13, 185; S i.24; Sn 132, 451. -- gen. dat. attano Sn 334, 592 etc., also as abl. A iii.337 (attano ca parato ca as regards himself and others). -- instr. abl. attanā S i.24; Sn 132, 451; DhA ii.75; PvA 15, 214 etc. On use of attanā see below iii.1 C. -- loc. attani S v.177; A i.149 (attanī metri causa); ii.52 (anattani); iii.181; M i.138; Sn 666, 756, 784; Vbh 376 (an˚). -- (2) of atta -- (a -- stem) we find the foll. cases: acc. attaŋ Dh 379. -- instr. attena S iv.54. -- abl. attato S i.188; Ps i.143; ii.48; Vbh 336.

Meanings. 1. The soul as postulated in the animistic theories held in N India in the 6th and 7th cent. B. C. It is described in the Upanishads as a small creature, in shape like a man, dwelling in ordinary times in the heart. It escapes from the body in sleep or trance; when it returns to the body life and motion reappear. It escapes from the body at death, then continues to carry on an everlasting life of its own. For numerous other details see Rh. D. Theory of Soul in the Upanishads J R A S 1899. Bt. India 251 -- 255. Buddhism repudiated all such theories, thus differing from other religions. Sixteen such theories about the soul D i.31. Seven other theories D i.34. Three others D i.186/7. A ʻ soul ʼ according to general belief was some thing permanent, unchangeable, not affected by sorrow S iv.54 = Kvu 67; Vin i.14; M i.138. See also M i.233; iii.265, 271; S ii.17, 109; iii.135; A i.284; ii.164, 171; v.188; S iv.400. Cp. ātuman, tuma, puggala, jīva, satta, pāṇa and nāma -- rūpa.

2. Oneself, himself, yourself. Nom. attā, very rare. S i.71, 169; iii.120; A i.57, 149 (you yourself know whether that is true or false. Cp. Manu viii.84. Here attā comes very near to the European idea of conscience. But conscience as a unity or entity is not accepted by Buddhism) Sn 284; Dh 166, 380; Miln 54 (the image, outward appearance, of oneself). Acc. attānaŋ S i.44 (would not give for himself, as a slave) A i.89; Sn 709. Acc. attaŋ Dh 379. Abl. attato as oneself S i.188; Ps i.143; ii.48; Vbh 336. Loc. attani A i.149; iii.181; Sn 666, 784. Instr. attanā S i.57 = Dh 66; S i.75; ii.68; A i.53; iii.211; iv.405; Dh 165. On one's own account, spontaneously S iv.307; v.354; A i.297; ii.99, 218; iii.81; J i.156; PvA 15, 20. In composition with numerals attadutiya himself and one other D ii.147; ˚catuttha with himself as fourth M i.393; A iii.36; ˚pañcama Dpvs viii.2; ˚sattama J i.233; ˚aṭṭhama VvA 149 (as atta -- naṭṭhama Vv 3413), & ˚aṭṭhamaka Miln 291.

anattā (n. and predicative adj.) not a soul, without a soul. Most freq. in combn. with dukkha & anicca -- (1) as noun: S iii.141 (˚anupassin); iv.49; v.345 (˚saññin); A ii.52 = Ps ii.80 (anattani anattā; opp. to anattani attā, the opinion of the micchādiṭṭhigatā sattā); Dh 279; Ps ii.37, 45 sq. (˚anupassanā), 106 (yaŋ aniccañ ca dukkhañ ca taŋ anattā); DhA iii. 406 (˚lakkhaṇa). -- (2) as adj. (pred.): S iv.152 sq.; S iv.166; S iv.130 sq., 148 sq.; Vin i.13 = S iii.66 = Nd2 680 Q 1; S iii.20 sq.; 178 sq., 196 sq.; sabbe dhammā anattā Vin v.86; S iii.133; iv.28, 401.

-- attha one's own profit or interest Sn 75; Nd2 23; J iv.56, 96; otherwise as atta -- d -- attha, e. g. Sn 284. -- atthiya looking after one's own needs Th 1, 1097. -- âdhipaka master of oneself, self -- mastered A i.150. -- adhipateyya selfdependence, self -- reliance, independence A i.147. -- âdhīna independent D i.72. -- ânudiṭṭhi speculation about souls S iii.185; iv.148; A iii.447; Sn 1119; Ps i.143; Vbh 368; Miln 146. -- ânuyogin one who concentrates his attention on himself Dh 209; DhA iii.275. -- ânuvāda blaming oneself A ii.121; Vbh 376. -- uññā self -- humiliation Vbh 353 (+ att -- avaññā). -- uddesa relation to oneself Vin iii.149 ( = attano atthāya), also ˚ika ibid. 144. -- kata self -- made S i.134 (opp. para˚). -- kāma love of self A ii.21; adj. a lover of "soul", one who cares for his own soul S i.75. -- kāra individual self, fixed individuality, oneself (cp. ahaŋkāra) D i.53 (opp. para˚); A iii 337 (id.) DA i.160; as nt. at J v.401 in the sense of service (self -- doing", slavery) (attakārāni karonti bhattusu). -- kilamatha self -- mortification D iii.113; S iv.330; v.421; M iii.230. -- garahin self -- censuring Sn 778. -- gutta selfguarded Dh 379. -- gutti watchfulness as regards one's self, self -- care A ii.72. -- ghañña self -- destruction Dh 164. -- ja proceeding from oneself Dh 161 (pāpa). -- ñū knowing oneself A iv.113, cp. D iii.252. -- (n) tapa self -- mortifying, self -- vexing D iii.232 = A ii.205 (opp. paran˚); M i.341, 411; ii.159; Pug 55, 56. -- daṇḍa see atta1. -- danta selfrestrained, self -- controlled Dh 104, 322. -- diṭṭhi speculation concerning the nature of the soul Nd1 107; SnA 523, 527. -- dīpa relying on oneself, independent, founded on oneself (+ attasaraṇa, opp. añña˚) D ii.100 = iii.42; S v.154; Sn 501 (= attano guṇe eva attano dīpaŋ katvā SnA 416). -- paccakkha only in instr. ˚ena by or with his own presence, i. e. himself J v.119. -- paccakkhika eye -- witness J v.119. -- paccatthika hostile to oneself Vin ii.94, 96. -- paṭilābha acquisition of a personality D i.195 (tayo: oḷārika, manomaya, arūpa). -- paritāpana self -- chastisement, mortification D iii.232 = A ii.205; M i.341; PvA 18, 30. -- parittā charm (protection) for oneself Vin ii.110. -- paribhava disrespect for one's own person Vbh 353. -- bhāva one's own nature (1) person, personality, individuality, living creature; form, appearance [cp. Dhs trsl. LXXI and BSk. ātmabhāva body Divy 70, 73 (˚pratilambha), 230; Sp. Av. Ś i.162 (pratilambha), 167, 171] Vin ii.238 (living beings, forms); S v.442 (bodily appearance); A i.279 (oḷārika a substantial creature); ii.17 (creature); DhA ii.64, 69 (appearance); SnA 132 (personality). -- (2) life, rebirth A i.134 sq.; iii.412; DhA ii.68; PvA 8, 15, 166 (atītā ˚ā former lives). ˚ŋ pavatteti to lead a life, to live PvA 29, 181. Thus in cpd. paṭilābha assumption of an existence, becoming reborn as an individual Vin ii.185; iii.105; D iii.231; M iii.46; S ii.255, 272, 283; iii.144; A ii.159, 188; iii.122 sq. -- (3) character, quality of heart Sn 388 (= citta SnA 374); J i.61. -- rūpa "of the form of self", self -- like only in instr. ˚ena as adv. by oneself, on one's own account, for the sake of oneself S iv.97; A ii.120. -- vadha self -- destruction S ii.241; A ii.73. -- vāda theory of (a persistent) soul D iii.230; M i.66; D ii.58; S ii.3, 245 sq.; iii.103, 165, 203; iv.1 sq., 43 sq., 153 sq.; Ps i.156 sq.; Vbh 136, 375. For var. points of an "attavādic" doctrine see Index to Saŋyutta Nikāya. -- vyābādha personal harm or distress self -- suffering, one's own disaster (opp. para˚) M i 369; S iv.339 = A i.157; A ii.179. -- vetana supporting oneself, earning one's own living Sn 24. -- sañcetanā self -- perception, self -- consciousness (opp. para˚) D iii.231; A ii.159. -- sambhava originating from one's self S i.70; A iv.312; Dh 161 (pāpa); Th 1, 260. -- sambhūta arisen from oneself Sn 272. -- sammāpaṇidhi thorough pursuit or development of one's personality A ii.32; Sn 260, cp. KhA 132. -- saraṇa see ˚dipa. -- sukha happiness of oneself, self -- success Dpvs i.66, cp. ii.11. -- hita personal welfare one's own good (opp. para˚) D iii.233; A ii.95 sq. -- hetu for one's own sake, out of self -- consideration Sn 122; Dh 328. -- 23 -- Attaniya
Attaniya
(adj.) [from attā] belonging to the soul, having a soul, of the nature of soul, soul -- like; usually nt. anything of the nature of soul M i.138 = Kvu 67; M i.297; ii.263; S iii.78 (yaŋ kho anattaniyaŋ whatever has no soul), 127; iv.54 = Nd2 680 F; S iv.82 = iii.33 = Nd2 680 Q 3; S iv.168; v.6; Nd2 680 D. Cp. Dhs trsl. XXXV ff. Attamana
Attamana
[atta1 + mano, having an up raised mind. Bdhgh's expln. is saka -- mano DA i.255 = attā + mano. He applies the same expln. to attamanatā (at Dhs 9, see Dhs trsl. 12) = attano manatā mentality of one's self] delighted, pleased, enraptured D i.3, 90 (an˚); ii.14; A iii.337, 343; iv.344; Sn 45 = Dh 328 (= upaṭṭhita -- satt DhA iv.29); Sn 995; Nd2 24 (= tuṭṭha -- mano haṭṭha -- mano etc.); Vv 14; Pug 33 (an˚); Miln 18; DA i.52; DhA i.89 (an˚ -- dhātuka displeased); PvA 23, 132; VvA 21 (where Dhpāla gives two explns, either tuṭṭhamano or sakamano). Attamanatā
Attamanatā
(f.) [abstr. to prec.] satisfaction, joy, pleasure, transport of mind M i.114; A i.276; iv.62; Pug 18 (an˚); Dhs 9, 86, 418 (an˚); PvA 132; VvA 67 (an˚). Attāṇa
Attāṇa
(adj.) [a + tāṇa] without shelter or protection J i.229; Miln 148, 325; ThA 285. Attha
Attha1
(also aṭṭha, esp. in combns mentioned under 3) (m. & nt.) [Vedic artha from ṛ, arti & ṛṇoti to reach, attain or to proceed (to or from), thus originally result (or cause), profit, attainment. Cp. semantically Fr. chose, Lat. causa] 1. interest, advantage, gain; (moral) good, blessing, welfare; profit, prosperity, well -- being M i.111 (atthassa ninnetar, of the Buddha, bringer of good); S iv.94 (id.); S i.34 (attano a. one's own welfare), 55 (id.) 86, 102, 126 = A ii.46 (atthassa patti); S i.162 (attano ca parassa ca); ii.222 (id.); iv.347 (˚ŋ bhañjati destroy the good or welfare, always with musāvādena by lying, cp. attha -- bhañjanaka); A i.61 (˚ŋ anubhoti to fare well, to have a (good) result); iii.364 (samparāyika a. profit in the future life); A v.223 sq. (anattho ca attho ca detriment & profit); It 44 (v. l. attā better); Sn 37, 58 (= Nd2 26, where the six kinds of advantages are enumd. as att˚ par˚ ubhay˚, i. e. advantage, resulting for oneself, for others, for both; diṭṭhadhammik˚ samparāyik˚ param˚ gain for this life, for a future life, and highest gain of all, i. e. Arahantship); Sn 331 (ko attho supitena what good is it to sleep = na hi sakkā supantena koci attho papuṇituŋ SnA 338; cp. ko attho supinena te Pv ii.61); PvA 30 (atthaŋ sādheti does good, results in good, 69 (samparāyikena atthena). -- dat. atthāya for the good, for the benefit of (gen.); to advantage, often eombd. with hitāya sukhāya, e. g. D iii.211 sq.; It 79. -- Kh viii.1 (to my benefit); Pv i.43 (= upakārāya PvA 18), ii.129 (to great advantage). See also below 6.

Sometimes in a more concrete meaning = riches, wealth, e. g. J i.256 (= vaḍḍhiŋ C.); iii.394 (id.); Pv iv.14 (= dhanaŋ PvA 219). -- Often as -- ˚: att˚ , one's own wellfare, usually combd. with par˚ and ubhay˚ (see above) S ii.29; v.121; A i.158, 216; iii.63 sq.; iv.134; Sn 75 (att-aṭṭha, v. l. attha Nd2), 284 (atta -- d -- attha); uttam˚ the highest gain, the very best thing Dh 386 (= arahatta DhA iv.142); Sn 324 (= arahatta SnA 332); param˚ id. Nd2 26; sad˚ one's own weal D ii.141; M i.4; S ii.29; v.145; A i.144; sāttha (adj.) connected with advantage, beneficial, profitable (of the Dhamma; or should we take it as "with the meaning, in spirit"? see sāttha) D i.62; S v.352; A ii.147; iii.152; Nd2 316. -- 2. need, want (c. instr.), use (for = instr.) S i.37 (˚jāta when need has arisen, in need); J i.254; iii.126, 281; iv.1; DhA i.398 (nɔ atthi etehɔ attho I have no use for them); VvA 250; PvA 24 (yāvadattha, adj. as much as is needed, sufficient = anappaka). -- 3. sense, meaning, import (of a word), denotation, signification. In this application attha is always spelt aṭṭha in cpds. aṭṭh -- uppatti and aṭṭha -- kathā (see below). On term see also Cpd. 4. -- S iii.93 (atthaŋ vibhajati explain the sense); A i.23 (id.), 60 (nīt˚ primary meaning, literal meaning; neyy˚ secondary or inferred meaning); ii.189 (˚ŋ ācikkhati to interpret); Sn 126 (˚ŋ pucchita asked the (correct) sense, the lit. meaning), 251 (˚ŋ akkhāti); Th 1, 374; attho paramo the highest sense, the ultimate sense or intrinsic meaning It 98, cp. Cpd. 6, 81, 223; Miln 28 (paramatthato in the absolute sense); Miln 18 (atthato according to its meaning, opp. vyañjanato by letter, orthographically); DhA ii.82; iii.175; KhA 81 (pad˚ meaning of a word); SnA 91 (id.); PvA 15 (˚ŋ vadati to explain, interpret), 16, 19 (hitatthadhammatā "fitness of the best sense", i. e. practical application), 71. Very frequent in Commentary style at the conclusion of an explained passage as ti attho "this is the meaning", thus it is meant, this is the sense, e. g. DA i.65; DhA iv.140, 141; PvA 33, etc. -- 4.Contrasted with dhamma in the combn. attho ca dhammo ca it (attha) refers to the (primary, natural) meaning of the word, while dhamma relates to the (interpreted) meaning of the text, to its bearing on the norm and conduct; or one might say they represent the theoretical and practical side of the text (pāḷi) to be discussed, the "letter" and the "spirit". Thus at A i.69; v.222, 254; Sn 326 (= bhāsitatthañ ca pāḷidhammañ ca SnA 333); It 84 (duṭṭho atthaŋ na jānāti dhammaŋ na passati: he realises neither the meaning nor the importance); Dh 363 (= bhāsitatthañ cɔ eva desanādhammañ ca); J ii.353; vi.368; Nd2 386 (meaning & proper nature); Pv iii.96 (but expld. by PvA 211 as hita = benefit, good, thus referring it to above 1). For the same use see cpds. ˚dhamma, ˚paṭisambhidā, esp. in adv. use (see under 6) Sn 430 (yenɔ atthena for which purpose), 508 (kena atthena v. l. BB for T attanā), J i.411 (atthaŋ vā kāraṇaŋ vā reason and cause); DhA ii.95 (+ kāraṇa(; PvA 11 (ayaŋ hɔ ettha attho this is the reason why). -- 5. (in very wide application, covering the same ground as Lat. res & Fr. chose): (a) matter, affair, thing, often untranslatable and simply to be given as "this" or "that" S ii.36 (ekena -- padena sabbo attho vutto the whole matter is said with one word); J i.151 (taŋ atthaŋ the matter); ii.160 (imaŋ a. this); vi.289 (taŋ atthaŋ pakāsento); PvA 6 (taŋ atthaŋ pucchi asked it), 11 (visajjeti explains it), 29 (vuttaŋ atthaŋ what had been said), 82 (id.). -- (b) affair, cause, case (cp. aṭṭa2 and Lat. causa) Dh 256, 331; Miln 47 (kassa atthaŋ dhāresi whose cause do you support, with whom do you agree?). See also alamattha. -- 6. Adv. use of oblique cases in the sense of a prep.: (a) dat. atthāya for the sake of, in order to, for J i.254 dhanɔ atthāya for wealth, kim˚ what for, why?), 279; ii.133; iii.54; DhA ii.82; PvA 55, 75, 78. -- (b) acc. atthaŋ on account of, in order to, often instead of an infinitive or with another inf. substitute J i.279 (kim˚); iii.53 (id.); i.253; ii.128; Dpvs vi.79; DhA i.397; PvA 32 (dassan˚ in order to see), 78, 167, etc. -- (c) abl. atthā J iii.518 (pitu atthā = atthāya C.). -- (d) loc. atthe instead of, for VvA 10; PvA 33; etc.

anattha (m. & nt.) 1. unprofitable situation or condition, mischief, harm, misery, misfortune S i.103; ii.196 (anatthāya saŋvattati); A iv.96 (˚ŋ adhipajjati) It 84 (˚janano doso ill -- will brings discomfort); J i.63, 196; Pug 37; Dhs 1060, 1231; Sdhp 87; DA i.52 (anatthajanano kodho, cp. It 83 and Nd2 420 Q2); DhA ii.73; PvA 13, 61, 114, 199. -- 2. ( = attha 3) incorrect sense, false meaning, as adj. senseless (and therefore unprofitable, no good, irrelevant) A v.222, 254 (adhammo ca); Dh 100 (= aniyyānad˚īpaka DhA ii.208); Sn 126 (expld. at SnA 180 as ahitaŋ).

-- akkhāyin showing what is profitable D iii.187. -- attha riches J vi.290 ( = atthabhūtaŋ atthaŋ C.). -- antara difference between the (two) meanings Miln 158. At Th 1, 374, Oldenberg's reading, but the v. l. (also C. reading) atthandhara is much better = he who knows the (correct) meaning, esp. as it corresponds with dhamma -- dhara (q. v.). -- abhisamaya grasp of the proficient S i.87 (see abhisamaya). -- uddhāra synopsis or abstract of contents ("matter") of the Vinaya Dpvs v.37. -- upaparikkhā investigation of meaning, (+ dhamma -- savanna) M iii.175; A iii.381 sq.; iv.221; v.126. -- uppatti (aṭṭh˚) sense, meaning, explanation, interpretation J i.89; DA i.242; KhA 216; VvA 197, 203 (cp. pāḷito) PvA 2, 6, 78; etc. -- kāma (adj.) (a) well -- wishing, a well -- wisher, friend, one who is interested in the welfare of others (cp. Sk. arthakāma, e. g. Bhagavadgīta ii.5: gurūn arthakāman) S i.140, 197, 201 sq.; A iii.143; D iii.164 (bahuno janassa a., + hitakāmo); J i.241; Pv iv.351; Pv A 25; SnA 287 (an˚). -> (b) one who is interested in his own gain or good, either in good or bad sense (= greedy) S i.44; PvA 112. -> -- kathā (aṭṭha˚) exposition of the sense, explanation, commentary J v.38, 170; PvA 1, 71, etc. freq. in N. of Com. -- kara beneficial, useful Vin iii.149; Miln 321. -- karaṇa the business of trying a case, holding court, giving judgment (v. l. aṭṭa˚) D ii.20; S i.74 (judgment hall?). -- kavi a didactic poet (see kavi) A ii.230. -- kāmin = ˚kāma, well -- wishing Sn 986 (devatā atthakāminī). -- kāraṇā (abl.) for the sake of gain D iii.186. -- kusala clever in finding out what is good or profitable Sn 143 (= atthacheka KhA 236). -- cara doing good, busy in the interest of others, obliging S i.23 (narānaŋ = "working out man's salvation"). -- caraka (adj.) one who devotes himself to being useful to others, doing good, one who renders service to others, e. g. an attendant, messenger, agent etc. D i.107 (= hitakāraka DA i.276); J ii.87; iii.326; iv.230; vi.369. -- cariyā useful conduct or behaviour D iii.152, 190, 232; A ii.32, 248; iv.219, 364. -- ñu one who knows what is useful or who knows the (plain or correct) meaning of something (+ dhammaññū) D iii.252; A iii.148; iv.113 sq. -- dassin intent upon the (moral) good Sn 385 (= hitânupassin SnA 373). -- dassimant one who examines a cause (cp. Sk. arthadarśika) J vi.286 (but expld. by C. as "saṇha -- sukhuma -- pañña" of deep insight, one who has a fine and minute knowledge). -- desanā interpretation, exegesis Miln 21 (dhamm˚). -- dhamma "reason and morality", see above n0. 3. ˚anusāsaka one who advises regarding the meaning and application of the Law, a professor of moral philosophy J ii.105; DhA ii.71. -- pada a profitable saying, a word of good sense, text, motto A ii.189; iii.356; Dh 100. -- paṭisambhidā knowledge of the meaning (of words) combd. with dhamma˚ of the text or spirit (see above n0. 3) Ps i.132; ii.150; Vbh 293 sq. -- paṭisaŋvedin experiencing good D iii.241 (+ dhamma˚); A i.151; iii.21. -- baddha expecting some good from (c. loc.) Sn 382. -- bhañjanaka breaking the welfare of, hurting DhA iii.356 (paresaŋ of others, by means of telling lies, musāvādena). -- majjha of beautiful waist J v.170 (= sumajjhā C.; reading must be faulty, there is hardly any connection with attha; v. l. atta). -- rasa sweetness (or substance, essence) of meaning (+ dhamma˚, vimutti˚) Nd2 466; Ps ii.88, 89. -- vasa "dependence on the sense", reasonableness, reason, consequence, cause D ii.285; M i.464; ii.120; iii.150; S ii.202; iii.93; iv.303; v.224; A i.61, 77, 98; ii.240; iii.72, 169, 237; Dh 289 (= kāraṇa DhA iii.435); It 89; Sn 297; Ud 14. -- vasika sensible It 89; Miln 406. -- vasin bent on (one's) aim or purpose Th 1, 539. -- vādin one who speaks good, i. e. whose words are doing good or who speaks only useful speech, always in combn. with kāla˚ bhūta˚ dhamma˚ D i.4; iii.175; A i.204; ii.22, 209; Pug 58; DA i.76 (expld. as "one who speaks for the sake of reaping blessings here and hereafter"). -- saŋvaṇṇanā explanation, exegesis PvA 1. -- saŋhita connected with good, bringing good, profitable, useful, salutary D i.189; S ii.223; iv.330; v.417; A iii.196 sq., 244; Sn 722 (= hitena saŋhitaŋ SnA 500); Pug 58. -- sandassana determination of meaning, definition Ps i.105. -- siddhi profit, advantage, benefit J i.402; PvA 63. -- 24 -- Attha
Attha2
(nt.) [Vedic asta, of uncertain etym.] home, primarily as place of rest & shelter, but in P. phraseology abstracted from the "going home", i. e. setting of the sun, as disappearance, going out of existence, annihilation, extinction. Only in acc. and as ˚ -- in foll phrases: atthangacchati to disappear, to go out of existence, to vanish Dh 226 ( = vināsaŋ natthibhāvaŋ gacchati DhA iii.324), 384 (= parikkhayaŋ gacchati); pp. atthangata gone home, gone to rest, gone, disappeared; of the sun (= set): J i.175 (atthangate suriye at sunset); PvA 55 (id.) 216 (anatthangate s. before sunset) fig. Sn 472 (atthagata). 475 (id.); 1075 (= niruddha ucchinṇa vinaṭṭha anupādi -- sesāya nibbāna -- dhātuyā nibbuta); It 58; Dhs 1038; Vbh 195. -- atthagatatta (nt. abstr.) disappearance SnA 409. -- atthangama (atthagama passim) annihilation, disappearance; opposed to samudaya (coming into existence) and synonymous with nirodha (destruction) D i.34, 37, 183; S iv.327; A iii.326; Ps ii.4, 6, 39; Pug 52; Dhs 165, 265, 501, 579; Vbh 105. -- atthagamana (nt.) setting (of the sun) J i.101 (suriyass' atthagamanā at sunset) DA i.95 (= ogamana). -- attha -- gāmin, in phrase udayɔ atthagāmin leading to birth and death (of paññā): see udaya. -- atthaŋ paleti = atthangacchati (fig.) Sn 1074 (= atthangameti nirujjhati Nd2 28). -- Also atthamita (pp. of i) set (of the sun) in phrase anatthamite suriye before sunset (with anatthangamite as v. l. at both pass.) DhA i.86; iii.127. -- Cp. also abbhattha. Attha
Attha3
pres. 2nd pl. of atthi (q. v.). Atthata
Atthata
[pp. of attharati] spread, covered, spread over with ( -- ˚) Vin i.265; iv.287; v.172 (also ˚an); A iii.50; PvA 141. Atthatta
Atthatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. attha1] reason, cause; only in abl. atthattā according to the sense, by reason of, on account of PvA 189 ( -- ˚). Atthara
Atthara
[fr. attharati] a rug (for horses, elephants etc.) D i.7. Attharaka
Attharaka
[ = atthara] a covering J i.9; DA i.87. -- f. ˚ikā a layer J i.9; v.280. Attharaṇa
Attharaṇa
(nt.) [fr. attharati] a covering, carpet, cover, rug Vin ii.291; A ii.56; iii.53; Mhvs 3, 20; 15, 40; 25, 102; ThA 22. Attharati
Attharati
[ā + stṛ] to spread, to cover, to spread out; stretch, lay out Vin i.254; v.172; J i.199; v.113; vi.428; Dh i.272. -- pp. atthata (q. v.). -- Caus. attharāpeti to caused to be spread J v.110; Mhvs 3, 20; 29, 7; 34, 69. -- 25 -- Atthavant
Atthavant
(adj.) [cp. Sk. arthavant] full of benefit S i.30; Th 1, 740; Miln 172. Atthāra
Atthāra
[cp. Sk. āstāra, fr. attharati] spreading out Vin v.172 (see kaṭhina). atthāraka same ibid.; Vin ii.87 (covering). Atthi
Atthi
[Sk. asti, 1st sg. asmi; Gr. ei)mi/ -- e)sti/; Lat. sum -- est; Goth. im -- ist; Ags. eom -- is E. am -- is] to be, to exist. -> Pres. Ind. 1st sg. asmi Sn 1120, 1143; J i.151; iii.55, and amhi M i.429; Sn 694; J ii.153; Pv i.102; ii.82. -> 2nd sg. asi Sn 420; J ii.160 (ɔsi); iii.278; Vv 324; PvA 4. -- 3rd sg. atthi Sn 377, 672, 884; J i.278. Often used for 3rd pl. ( = santi), e. g. J i.280; ii.2; iii.55. -- 1st pl. asma [Sk. smaḥ] Sn 594, 595; asmase Sn 595, and amha Sn 570; J ii.128. 2nd pl. attha J ii.128; PvA 39, 74 (āgatɔ attha you have come). -> 3rd pl. santi Sn 1077; Nd2 637 (= saŋvijjanti atthi upalabbhanti); J ii.353; PvA 7, 22 -- Imper. atthu Sn 340; J i.59; iii.26. -- Pot. 1st sg. siyā [Sk. syām] Pv ii.88, and assaŋ [Cond. used as Pot.] Sn 1120; Pv i.125 (= bhaveyyaŋ PvA 64). -- 2nd sg. siyā [Sk. syāḥ] Pv ii.87. -- 3rd sg. siyā [Sk. syāt] D ii.154; Sn 325, 1092; Nd2 105 (= jāneyya, nibbatteyya); J i.262; PvA 13, and assa D i.135, 196; ii.154; A v.194; Sn 49, 143; Dh 124, 260; Pv ii.324; 924. -- 1st pl. assu PvA 27. -> 3rd pl. assu [cp. Sk. syuḥ] Sn 532; Dh 74; Pv iv.136 (= bhaveyyuŋ PvA 231). -- Aor. 1st sg. āsiŋ [Sk. āsaŋ] Sn 284; Pv i.21 (= ahosiŋ PvA 10); ii.34 (= ahosiŋ PvA 83). -- 3rd sg. āsi [Sk. āsīt] Sn 994. -- 3rd āsuŋ [cp. Sk. Perf. āsuḥ] Pv ii.321, 133 (ti pi pāṭho for su). -> Ppr. *sat only in loc. sati (as loc. abs.) Dh 146; J i.150, 263, santa Sn 105; Nd2 635; J i.150 (loc. evaŋ sante in this case); iii.26, and samāna (q. v.) J i.266; iv.138.

-- bhāva state of being, existence, being J i.222, 290; ii.415; DhA ii.5; iv.217 (atthibhāva vā natthibhāva vā whether there is or not). Atthika
Atthika
(adj.) [cp. Sk. arthika] 1. (to attha1) profitable, good, proper. In this meaning the MSS show a variance of spelling either atthika or aṭṭhika or aṭṭhita; in all cases atthika should be preferred D i.55 (˚vāda); M ii.212 (aṭṭhita); A iii.219 sq. (idaŋ atthikaŋ this is suitable, of good avail; T aṭṭhitaŋ, vv. ll. as above); Sn 1058 (aṭṭhita; Nd2 20 also aṭṭhita, which at this pass. shows a confusion between aṭṭha and a -- ṭhita); J v.151 (in def. of aṭṭhikatvā q. v.); Pug 69, 70 (T aṭṭhika, aṭṭhita SS; expld. by Pug A v.4 by kalyāṇāya). -- 2. (to attha1 2) desirous of ( -- ˚), wanting, seeking for, in need of (c. instr.) A ii.199 (uday˚ desirous of increase); Sn 333, 460, 487 (puññ˚), 987 (dhan˚ greedy for wealth); J i.263 (rajj˚ coveting a kingdom); v.19; Pv ii.228 (bhojan˚ in need of food); iv.11 (kāraṇ˚), 121 (khiḍḍ˚ for play), 163 (puññ˚); PvA 95 (sasena a. wanting a rabbit), 120; DA i.70 (atthikā those who like to). -- anatthika one who does not care for, or is not satisfied with (c. instr.) J v.460; PvA 20; of no good Th 1, 956 ("of little zeal" Mrs. Rh. D.).

-- bhāva (a) usefulness, profitableness Pug A v.4. (b) state of need, distress PvA 120. Atthikavant
Atthikavant
(adj.) [atthika + vant] one who wants something, one who is on a certain errand D i.90 (atthikaŋ assa atthī ti DA i.255). Atthitā
Atthitā
(f.) [f. abstr. fr. atthi cp. atthibhāva] state of being, existence, being, reality M i.486; S ii.17 (˚añ c˚ eva natthitañ ca to be and not to be); iii.135; J v.110 (kassaci atthitaŋ vā natthitaŋ vā jānāhi see if there is anybody or not); DhsA 394. -- Often in abl. atthitāya by reason of, on account of, this being so DhA iii.344 (idamatthitāya under this condition) PvA 94, 97, 143. Atthin
Atthin
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [Vedic arthin] desirous, wanting anything; see mant˚, vād˚. Atthiya
Atthiya
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [ = atthika] having a purpose or end S iii.189 (kim˚ for what purpose?); A v.1 sq. (id.), 311 sq.; Th 1, 1097 (att˚ having one's purpose in oneself), 1274; Sn 354 (yad atthiyaŋ on account of what). Atra
Atra
(adv.) [Sk. atra] here; atra atra here & there J i.414 = iv.5 (in expln. of atriccha). Atraja
Atraja
(adj.) [Sk. *ātma -- ja, corrupted form for attaja (see attā) through analogy with Sk. atra "here". This form occurs only in J and similar sources, i. e. popular lore] born from oneself, one's own, appl. to sons, of which there are 4 kinds enumd., viz. atraja khettaja, dinnaka, antevāsika p. Nd2 448. -- J i.135; iii.103 = Nd1 504; J iii.181; v.465; vi.20; Mhvs 4, 12; 13, 4; 36, 57. Atriccha
Atriccha
(adj.) [the popular etym. suggested at JA iv.4 is atra atra icchamāna desiring here & there; but see atricchā] very covetous, greedy, wanting too much J i.414 = iv.4; iii.206. Atricchā
Atricchā
(f.) [Sk. *atṛptyā, a + tṛpt + yā, influenced by Desid. titṛpsati, so that atricchā phonetically rather corresponds to a form *a. -- tṛpsyā (cch = psy, cp. P. chāta Sk. psāta). For the simple Sk. tṛpti see titti (from tappati2). According to Kern, but phonetically hardly justifiable it is Sk. atīccha = ati + icchā "too much desire", with r in dissolution of geminated tt, like atraja for attaja. See also atriccha adj. and cp. J.P.T.S. 1884, 69] great desire, greed, excessive longing, insatiability J iv.5, 327. Atricchatā
Atricchatā
(f.) [see atricchā] excessive lust J. iii.222. Atha
Atha
(indecl.) [Sk. atha, cp. atho] copulative & adversative part. 1. after positive clauses, in enumerations, in the beginning & continuation of a story: and, and also, or; and then, now D ii.2; iii.152, 199 (athâparaŋ etad avoca); M i.435; Sn 1006, 1007, 1017; Sn p. 126 (athâparaŋ etad avoca: and further, something else); Dh 69, 119, 377; J ii.158; Pv ii.64; PvA 3, 8 (atha na and not), 70. -- 2. after negative clauses: but M i.430; Sn 990, 1047; Dh 85, 136, 387; PvA 68. Often combd. with other part., e. g. atha kho (pos. & neg.) now, and then; but, rather, moreover Vin i.1; D i.141, 167, 174; A v.195; PvA 79, 221, 251. na -- atha kho na neither -- nor PvA 28. atha kho pana and yet D i.139. atha ca pana on the other hand J i.279. atha vā or (after prec. ca), nor (after prec. na) Sn 134; Dh 140, 271; Pv i.41; ii.14. athā vā pi Sn 917, 921. Athabbaṇa
Athabbaṇa
[Vedic atharvan; as regards etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under ater] (1) the Atharva Veda DA i.247 = SnA 447 (˚veda). -- (2) one who is familiar with the (magic formulas of the) Atharvaveda J vi.490 (sâthabbaṇa= sahatthivejja, with the elephant -- healer or doctor). See also āthabbaṇa. Atho
Atho
(indecl.) [Sk. atho, atha + u] copulative and adver- sative part.: and, also, and further, likewise, nay S i.106; Sn 43, 155, 647; Dh 151, 234, 423; J i.83; ii.185; iv.495; It 106; Kh viii.7; Pv iv.315; PvA 251 (atho ti nipātamattaŋ avadhāraṇ -- atthe vā). Also combd. with other part., like atho pi Sn 222, 537, 985; Pv ii.320; KhA 166. Ada
Ada
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [to ad, see adeti, cp. ˚ga, ˚ṭha, ˚da etc.] eating S iv.195 (kiṭṭhâda eating corn); J ii.439 (vantâda = vantakhādaka C.). Adaka
Adaka
(adj.) = ada J v.91 (purisâdaka man -- eater). Adana
Adana
(nt.) [from adeti] eating, food J v.374 (v.l. modana). Adasaka
Adasaka
(adj.) see dasā. Adāsa
Adāsa
[prob. = adaŋsa, from ḍasati to bite, cp. dāṭhā tooth; lit meaning "toothless" or "not biting"] a kind of bird J iv.466. -- 26 -- Adiṭṭhā
Adiṭṭhā
[a + diṭṭhā, ger. of *dassati] not seeing, without seeing J iv.192 (T. adaṭṭhā, v. l. BB na diṭṭhā, C. adisvā); v.219. Adinna
Adinna
(pp.) [a + dinna] that which is not given, freq. in phrase adinn' ādāna (BSk. adattādāna Divy 302) seizing or grasping that whieh is not given to one, i. e. stealing, is the 2nd of the ten qualifications of bad character or sīla (dasa -- sīla see sīla ii.). Vin i.83 (˚ā veramaṇī); D i.4 ( = parassa haraṇaŋ theyyaŋ corikā ti vuttaŋ hoti DA i.71); iii.68 sq., 82, 92, 181 sq.; M i.361; It 63; Kh ii., cp. KhA 26. -- adinnādāyin he who takes what is not given, a thief; stealing, thieving (cp. BSK. adattādāyika Divy 301, 418) Vin i.85; D i.138; Sdhp 78. Adu
Adu
(or ādu) (indecl.) [perhaps identical with aduŋ, nt. of pron. asu] part. of affirmation: even, yea, nay; always in emphatic exclamations Vv 622 ( = udāhu VvA 258; v. l. SS. ādu) = Pv iv.317 (ādu) = DhA i.31 (T. ādu, v. l. adu); Vv 631 (v. l. ādu); J v.330 (T. ādu, C. adu; expld. on p. 331 fantastically as aduñ ca aduñ ca kammaŋ karohī ti). See also ādu. Aduŋ
Aduŋ
nt. of pron. asu. Adūsaka
Adūsaka
(adj.) [a + dūsaka] innocent J v.143 ( = nirapa- rādha C.); vi.84, 552. f. adūsikā Sn 312. Adūsiya
Adūsiya
= adūsaka J v.220 (= anaparādha C.). Adeti
Adeti
[Sk. ādayati, Caus. of atti, ad to eat, 1st sg. admi = Gr. e)/dw, Lat. edo; Goth. itan = Ohg. ezzan = E. eat] to eat. Pres. ind. ademi etc. J v.31, 92, 197, 496; vi.106. pot. adeyya J v.107, 392, 493. Adda
Adda1
[cp. Sk. ārdraka] ginger J i.244 (˚singivera). Adda & Addā
Adda2
& Addā 3rd sg. aor. of *dassati; see *dassati 2. a. Adda
Adda3
(adj.) [Sk. ārdra, from ṛdati or ardati to melt, cp. Gr. a)/rdw to moisten, a)\rda dirt; see also alla] wet, moist, slippery J iv.353; vi.309; Miln 346.

-- âvalepana "smeared with moisture", i. e. shiny, glittering S iv.187 (kūṭāgāra); M i.86 = Nd2 1996 (upakāriyo). See also addha2.

The reading allâvalepana occurs at Nd2 40 ( = S iv. 187), and is perhaps to be preferred. The meaning is better to be given as "newly plastered." Addakkhi
Addakkhi
3rd sg. aor. of *dassati; see *dassati 1 b. Addasā
Addasā
3rd sg. aor. of *dassati; see *dassati 2 a. Addā & Addāyanā
Addā
& Addāyanā at Vbh 371 in def. of anādariya is either faulty writing, or dial. form or pop. etym. for ādā and ādāyana; see ādariya. Addāyate
Addāyate
[v. denom. fr. adda] to be or get wet, fig. to be attached to J iv.351. See also allīyati. Addi
Addi
[Sk. ardri] a mountain Dāvs ii.13. Addita
Addita
(pp.) [see aṭṭita which is the more correct spelling] afflicted, smarted, oppressed J i.21; ii.407; iii.261; iv.295; v.53, 268; Th 1, 406; Mhvs 1, 25; PvA 260; Sdhp 37, 281. Addha
Addha1
(num.) [ = aḍḍha, q. v.] one half, half (˚ -- ) D i.166 (˚māsika); A ii.160 (˚māsa); J i.59 (˚yojana); iii. 189 (˚māsa). Addha
Addha2
(adj.) [ = adda3, Sk. ārdra] soiled, wet; fig. attached to, intoxicated with (cp. sineha) M ii.223 (na anaddhabhūtaŋ attānaŋ dukkhena addhabhāveti he dirties the impure self with ill); S iii.1 (addhabhūto kāyo impure body); J vi.548 (˚nakha with dirty nails, C. pūtinakha). Addhan
Addhan
(in cpds. addha˚) [Vedic adhvan, orig. meaning "stretch, length", both of space & time. -- Cases: nom. addhā, gen. dat. addhuno, instr. addhunā, acc. addhānaŋ, loc. addhani; pl. addhā. See also addhāna] 1. (of space) a path, road, also journey (see cpds. & derivations); only in one ster. phrase J iv.384 = v.137 (pathaddhuno paṇṇarase va cando, gen. for loc. ˚addhani, on his course, in his orbit; expld. at iv.384 by ākāsa -- patha -- sankhātassa addhuno majjhe ṭhito and at v.137 by pathaddhagato addha -- pathe gaganamajjhe ṭhito); Pv iii.31 (pathaddhani paṇṇarase va cando; loc. same meaning as prec., expld. at PvA 188 by attano pathabhūte addhani gaganatala -- magge). This phrase (pathaddhan) however is expld. by Kern (Toev. s. v. pathaddu) as "gone half -- way", i. e. on full -- moon -- day. He rejects the expln. of C. -- 2. (of time) a stretch of time, an interval of time, a period, also a lifetime (see cpds.); only in two standard applications viz. (a) as mode of time (past, present & future) in tayo addhā three divisions of time (atita, anāgata, paccuppanna) D iii.216; It 53, 70. (b) in phrase dīghaŋ addhānaŋ (acc.) a very long time A ii.1, 10 (dighaŋ addhānaŋ saŋsāraŋ); Sn 740 (dīghaŋ addhāna saŋsāra); Dh 207 (dīghaŋ addhāna socati); J i.137. gen. dīghassa addhuno PvA 148 (gatattā because a long time has elapsed), instr. dīghena addhunā S i.78; A ii.118; PvA 28.

-- āyu duration of life A ii.66 (dīghaŋ ˚ŋ a long lifetime. -- gata one who has gone the road or traversed the space or span of life, an old man [cp. BSk. adhvagata M Vastu ii.150], always combd. with vayo anuppatto, sometimes in ster. formula with jiṇṇa & mahallaka Vin ii.188; D i.48 (cp. DA i.143); M i.82; Sn pp. 50, 92; PvA 149. -- gū [Vedic adhvaga] a wayfarer, traveller, journeyman Th 255 = S i.212 (but the latter has panthagu, v. l. addhagū); J iii.95 (v. l. patthagu = panthagu); Dh 302. Addhā
Addhā
(adv.) [Vedic addhā, cp. Av. azdā certainty] part. of affirmation and emphasis: certainly, for sure, really, truly D i.143; J i.19 (a. ahaŋ Buddho bhavissāmi) 66 (a. tvaŋ Buddho bhavissasi), 203, 279; iii.340; v.307, 410 (C. expln. differs) Sn 47, 1057; Nd2 30 = Ps ii.21 (ekaŋsa -- vacanaŋ nissaŋsaya -- vacanaŋ etc.) addhā hi J iv. 399; Pv iv.15 2. Addhaneyya
Addhaneyya
(adj.) = addhaniya 2, lasting J v.507 (an˚). Addhaniya
Addhaniya
(adj.) [fr. addhan] 1. belonging to the road, fit for travelling (of the travelling season) Th 1, 529. -> 2. belonging to a (long) time, lasting a long period, lasting, enduring D iii.211; J i.393 (an˚) vi.71. See also addhaneyya. Addhariya
Addhariya
[Vedic adhvaryu fr. adhvara sacrifice] a sacri- ficing priest, N. of a class of Brahmins D i.237 (brāhmaṇa). Addhāna
Addhāna
(nt.) [orig. the acc. of addhan, taken as nt. from phrase dīghaŋ addhānaŋ. It occurs only in acc. which may always be taken as acc. of addhan; thus the assumption of a special form addhāna would be superfluous, were it not for later forms like addhāne (loc.) Miln 126; PvA 75 v. l. BB, and for cpds.] same meaning as addhan, but as simplex only used with reference to time (i. e. a long time, cp. VvA 117 addhānaŋ = ciraŋ). Usually in phrase atītaŋ (anāgataŋ etc.) addhānaŋ in the past (future etc.), e. g. D i.200; S i.140; A v.32; Miln 126 (anāgatamaddhāne for ˚aŋ); PvA 75 (v. l. addhāne). dīghaŋ addhānaŋ Pv i.105. Also in phrase addhānaŋ āpādeti to make out the length of time or period, i. e. to live out one's lifetime S iv.110; J ii.293 (= jīvitaddhānaŋ āpādi āyuŋ vindi C).

-- daratha exhaustion from travelling DA i.287. -- magga a (proper) road for journeying, a long road between two towns, high road D i.1, 73, 79; M i.276 (kantār˚); DA i.35 (interpreted as "addhayojanaŋ gacchissāmī ti bhuñjitabban ti ādi vacanato addha -- yojanam pi addhāna maggo hoti", thus taken to addha "half", from counting by 1/2 miles); VvA 40, 292. Cp. also antarāmagga. -- parissama "fatigue of the road", i. e. fatigue from travelling VvA 305. -- vemattatā difference of time or period Miln 285 (+ āyuvemattatā). -- 27 -- Addhika
Addhika
[fr. addhan] a wanderer, wayfarer, traveller DA i.298 ( = pathāvin), 270; PvA 78, 127 (˚jana people travelling). Often combd. with kapaṇa beggar, tramp, as kapaṇaddhikā (pl.) tramps and travellers (in which connection also as ˚iddhika, q. v.), e. g. J i.6 (v. l. ˚iddhika 262; DhA ii.26. Addhita
Addhita
at Pv ii.62 is to be corrected to aṭṭita (sic v. l. BB). Addhin
Addhin
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. addhan] belonging to the road or travelling, one who is on the road, a traveller, in gataddhin one who has performed his journey ( = addhagata) Dh 90. Addhuva
Addhuva
see dhuva. Adrūbhaka
Adrūbhaka
see dubbha. Advejjhatā
Advejjhatā
see dvejjhatā. Adha˚
Adha˚
in cpds. like adhagga see under adho. Adhamma
Adhamma
see dhamma. Adhama
Adhama
(adj.) [Vedic adhama = Lat. infimus, superl. of adho, q. v.] the lowest (lit. & fig.), the vilest, worst Sn 246 (narâdhama), 135 (vasalâdhama); Dh 78 (purisa˚); J iii.151 (miga˚); v.394 (uttamâdhama), 437 (id.), 397; Sdhp 387. Adhara
Adhara
(adj.) [Vedic adhara, compar. of adho] the lower J iii.26 (adharoṭṭha the l. lip). Adhi
Adhi
[Vedic adhi; base of demonstr. pron. a˚ + suffix -- dhi, corresponding in form to Gr. e)/n -- qa "on this" = here, cp. o(/qi where, in meaning equal to adv. of direction Gr. de/ (toward) = Ohg. zuo, E. to].

A. Prep. and pref. of direction & place: (a) as direction denoting a movement towards a definite end or goal = up to, over, toward, to, on (see C 1 a). -- (b) as place where (prep. c. loc. or abs.) = on top of, above, over, in; in addition to. Often simply deictic "here" (e. g.) ajjhatta = adhi + ātman "this self here" (see C 1 b).

B. adhi is freq. as modification pref., i. e. in loose compn. with n. or v. and as first part of a double prefixcpd. , like ajjhā˚ (adhi + ā), adhippa˚ (adhi + pra), but never occurs as a fixed base, i. e. as 2nd part of a pref.-> cpd., like ā in paccā˚ (prati + ā), paryā˚ (pari + ā) or ava in paryava˚ (pari + ava) or ud in abhyud˚ (abhi + ud), samud˚ (sam + ud). As such (i. e. modification) it is usually intensifying, meaning "over above, in addition, quite, par excellence, super" -- (adhideva a super -- god, cp. ati -- deva), but very often has lost this power & become meaningless (like E. up in "shut up, fill up, join up etc), esp. in double pref. -- cpds. (ajjhāvasati "to dwell here -- in" = āvasati "to dwell in, to inhabit") (see C 2). -- In the explns of P. Commentators adhi is often (sometimes far -- fetchedly) interpreted by abhibhū "overpowering" see e. g. C. on adhiṭṭhāti & adhiṭṭhita; and by virtue of this intens. meaning we find a close relationship between the prefixes ati, adhi and abhi, all interchanging dialectically so that P. adhi often represents Sk. ati or abhi; thus adhi > ati in adhikusala, ˚kodhita, ˚jeguccha, ˚brahmā; adhi > abhi in adhippatthita, ˚pātcti, ˚ppāya, ˚ppeta, ˚bādheti, ˚bhū, ˚vāha. Cp. also ati iv.

C. The main applications of adhi are the foll.: 1. primary meaning (in verbs & verb derivations): either direction in which or place where, depending on the meaning of the verb determinate, either lit. or fig. -- (a) where to: adhiyita (adhi + ita) "gone on to or into" = studied; ajjhesita (adhi + esita) "wished for"; ˚kata "put to" i. e. commissioned; ˚kāra commission; ˚gacchati "to go on to & reach it" = obtain; ˚gama attainment; ˚gaṇhāti to overtake = surpass, ˚peta (adhi + pra + ita) "gone in to" = meant, understood; ˚pāya sense meaning, intention; ˚bhāsati to speak to = address; ˚mutta intent upon; ˚vacana "saying in addition" = attribute, metaphor, cp. Fr. sur -- nom; ˚vāsāna assent, ˚vāseti to dwell in, give in = consent. -- (b) where: ˚tiṭṭhati (˚ṭṭhāti) to stand by = look after, perform; ˚ṭṭhāna place where; ˚vasati to inhabit; ˚sayana "lying in", inhabiting. -- 2. secondary meaning (as emphatic modification): (a) with nouns or adjectives: adhi -- jeguccha very detestable; ˚matta "in an extreme measure", ˚pa supreme lord; ˚pacca lordship; ˚paññā higher, additional wisdom; ˚vara the very best; ˚sīla thorough character or morality. -- (b) with verbs (in double pref. -- cpds.); adhi + ava: ajjhogāheti plunge into; ajjhoṭhapeti to bring down to (its destination); ˚otthata covered completely; ˚oharati to swallow right down. adhi + ā: ajjhappatta having reached (the end); ajjhapīḷita quite overwhelmed; ˚āvuttha inhabited; ˚ārūhati grown up over; ˚āsaya desire, wish (cp. Ger. n. Anliegen & v. daranliegen). adhi + upa: ajjhupagacchati to reach, obtain; ˚upeti to receive; ˚upekkhati "to look all along over" = to superintend adhi + pra: adhippattheti to long for, to desire.

Note. The contracted (assimilation -- )form of adhi before vowels is ajjh -- (q. v.). Adhika
Adhika
(adj.) [fr. adhi; cp. Sk. adhika] exceeding, extra- ordinary, superior, Pug 35; VvA 80 ( = anadhivara, visiṭṭha); DA i.141, 222; Dpvs v.32 (an˚); DhA iii.238; KhA 193 (= anuttara); Sdhp 337, 447. -- compar. adhikatara DhA ii.7; iii.176; nt. ˚ŋ as adv. extraordinarily PvA 86 (= adhimattaŋ). In combn. with numerals adhika has the meaning of "in addition, with an additional, plus" (cp. ādi + ādika, with which it is evidently confounded, adhika being constructed in the same way as ādika, i. e. preceding the noun -- determination), e. g. catunahutâdhikāni dve yojana -- sahassāni 2000 + 94 (= 294 000) J i.25; sattamāsâdhikāni sattavassāni 7 years and 7 months J v.319; paññāsâdhikāni pañca vassa -- satani 500 + 50 (= 550) PvA 152. See also sâdhika. Adhikata
Adhikata
(adj.) [adhi + kata; cp. Sk. adhikṛta] 1. com- missioned with, an overseer, Pv ii.927 (dāne adhikata = ṭhapita PvA 124). -- 2. caused by Miln 67 (kamma˚). -> 3. affected by something, i. e. confused, puzzled, in doubt Miln 144 (+ vimātijāta). Adhikaraṇa
Adhikaraṇa
(nt.) [adhi + karaṇa] 1. attendance, super- vision, management of affairs, administration PvA 209. -> 2. relation, reference, reason, cause, consequence D ii.59 ( -- ˚: in consequence of); S ii.41; v.19. Esp. acc. ˚ŋ as adv. ( -- ˚) in consequence of, for the sake of, because of, from M i.410 (rūpâdhikaraṇaŋ); S iv.339 (rāga˚); Miln 281 (mudda˚ for the sake of the royal seal, orig. in attendance on the r. s.). Kimâdhikaraṇaŋ why, on account of what J iv.4 ( = kiŋkāraṇaŋ) yatvâdhikaraṇaŋ (yato + adhi˚) by reason of what, since, because (used as conj.) D i.70 = A i.113 = ii.16 = D iii.225. -- 3. case, question, cause, subject of discussion, dispute. There are 4 sorts of a. enumd. at var. passages, viz. vivāda˚ anuvāda˚ āpatta˚ kicca˚ "questions of dispute, of censure, of misconduct, of duties" Vin ii.88; iii.164; iv.126, 238; M ii.247. -> Often ref.: Vin ii.74; S iv.63 = v.346 (dhamma˚ a question of the Dh.); A i.53 (case), 79; ii.239 (vūpasanta); v.71, 72; Pug 20, 55; DhA iv.2 (˚ssa uppamassa vūpasama), adhikaraṇaŋ karoti to raise a dispute M i.122 ˚ŋ vūpasameti to settle a question or difficulty Vin ii.261.

-- kāraka one who causes dispute discussions or dissent Vin iv.230 (f. ˚ikā); A iii.252. -- samatha the settlings of questions that have arisen. There are seven rules for settling cases enumd. at D iii.254; M ii.247; A i.99; iv.144. Adhikaraṇika
Adhikaraṇika
[fr. adhikaraṇa] one who has to do with the settling of disputes or questions, a judge A v.164, 167. Adhikaraṇī
Adhikaraṇī
(f.) [to adhikaraṇa 1, orig. meaning "serving, that which serves, i. e. instrument"] a smith's anvil J iii.285; Dāvs iii.16 sq.; DhsA 263. Adhikāra
Adhikāra
[cp. Sk. adhikāra] attendance, service, adminis- tration, supervision, management, help Vin i.55; J i.56; vi.251; Miln 60, 115, 165; PvA 124 (dāna˚; cp. Pv ii.927); DhA ii.41. -- 28 -- Adhikārika
Adhikārika
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [to adhikāra] serving as, referring to Vin iii.274 (Bdhgh). Adhikuṭṭanā
Adhikuṭṭanā
(f.) [adhi + koṭṭanā or koṭṭana] an executi- oner's block Th 2, 58; cp. ThA 65 (v. l. kuḍḍanā, should prob. be read koṭṭana); ThA 287. Adhikusala
Adhikusala
(adj.) [adhi + kusala] in ˚ā dhammā "items of higher righteousness" D iii.145. Adhikodhita
Adhikodhita
(adj.) [adhi + kodhita] very angry J v.117. Adhigacchati
Adhigacchati
[adhi + gacchati] to get to, to come into possession of, to acquire, attain, find; fig. to understand D i.229 (vivesaŋ) M i.140 (anvesaŋ nɔ âdhigacchanti do not find); S i.22 (Nibbānaŋ); ii.278 (id.); A i.162 (id.); Dh 187, 365; It 82 (santiŋ); Th 2, 51; Pug 30, 31; Pv i.74 (nibbutiŋ = labhati PvA 37); iii.710 (amataŋ padaŋ). opt. adhigaccheyya D i.224 (kusalaŋ dhammaŋ); M i.114 (madhu -- piṇḍikaŋ); Dh 61 and adhigacche Dh 368. ger. ˚gantvā D i.224; J i.45 (ānisaŋse); and ˚gamma Pv i.119 (= vinditvā paṭilabhitvā PvA 60). grd. ˚gantabba It 104 (nibbāna). cond. ˚gacchissaŋ Sn 446. 1st aor. 3 sg. ajjhagā Sn 225 (= vindi paṭilabhi KhA 180); Dh 154; Vv 327; 3 pl. ajjhagū J i.256 (vyasanaŋ) & ajjhāgamuŋ S i.12. 2nd aor. 3 sg. adhigacchi Nd1 457. -> pp. adhigata (q. v.). Adhigaṇhāti
Adhigaṇhāti
[adhi + gaṇhāti] to surpass, excel S i.87 = DA i.32; D iii.146; S iv.275; A iii.33; It 19. Ger. adhigayha Pv ii.962 = DhA iii.219 (v. l. BB at both pass. atikkamma); & adhiggahetvā It 20. -- pp. adhiggahīta (q. v.). Adhigata
Adhigata
[pp. of adhigacchati] got into possession of, con- quered, attained, found J i.374; VvA 135. Adhigatavant
Adhigatavant
(adj. -- n.) [fr. adhigata] one who has found or obtained VvA 296 (Nibbānaŋ). Adhigama
Adhigama
[fr. adhigacchati] attainment, acquisition; also fig. knowledge, information, study (the latter mainly in Miln) D iii.255; S ii.139; A ii.148; iv.22, 332; v.194; J i.406; Nett 91; Miln 133, 215, 358, 362, 388; PvA 207. Adhigameti
Adhigameti
[adhi + gameti, Caus. of gacchati] to make obtain, to procure PvA 30. Adhiggahīta
Adhiggahīta
[pp. of adhigaṇhāti] excelled, surpassed; over- powered, taken by (instr.), possessed J iii.427 ( = anuggahīta C.); v.102; vi.525 = 574; It 103; Miln 188, 189; Sdhp 98. Adhiciṇṇa
Adhiciṇṇa
only at S iii.12, where v. l. is aviciṇṇa, which is to be preferred. See viciṇṇa. Adhicitta
Adhicitta
(nt.) [adhi + citta] "higher thought", meditation, contemplation, nsually in combn. with adhisīla and adhipaññā Vin i.70; D iii.219; M i.451; A i.254, 256; Nd1 39 = Nd2 689 (˚sikkhā); Dh 185 (= aṭṭha -- samāpattisankhāta adhika -- citta DhA iii.238). Adhiceto
Adhiceto
(adj.) [adhi + ceto] lofty -- minded, entranced Th 1, 68 = Ud 43 = Vin iv.54 = DhA iii.384. Adhicca
Adhicca1
[ger. of adhi + eti, see adhīyati] learning, studying, learning by heart J iii.218, 327 = iv.301; iv.184 (vede = adhīyitvā C.), 477 (sajjhāyitvā C.); vi.213; Miln 164. Adhicca
Adhicca2
(˚ -- ) [Sk. *adhṛtya, a + *dhicca, ger. of dhṛ, cp. dhāra, dhāraṇa 3, dhāreti 4] unsupported, uncaused, fortuitous, without cause or reason; in foll. phrases: ˚āpattika guilty without intention M i.443; ˚uppatti spontaneous origin DhsA 238; ˚laddha obtained without being asked for, unexpectedly Vv 8422 = J v.171 = vi.315 (expld. at J v.171 by ahetunā, at vi.316 by akāraṇena) ˚samuppanna arisen without a cause, spontaneous, unconditioned D i.28 = Ud 69; D iii.33, 138; S ii.22 -- 23 (sukhadukkhaŋ); A iii.440 (id.); Ps i.155; DA i.118 (= akāraṇa˚). Adhicca
Adhicca3
(adj.) [ = adhicca 2 in adj. function, influenced by, homonym abhabba] without a cause (for assumption), unreasonable, unlikely S v.457. Adhijeguccha
Adhijeguccha
(nt.) [adhi + jeguccha] intense scrupulous regard (for others) D i.174, 176. Adhiṭṭhaka
Adhiṭṭhaka
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. adhiṭṭhāti] bent on, given to, addicted to J v.427 (surā˚). Adhiṭṭhāti
Adhiṭṭhāti
(adhiṭṭhahati) [Sk. adhitiṣṭhati, adhi + sthā] 1. to stand on J iii.278 (ger. ˚āya); DhA iv.183 (ger. ˚hitvā); fig. to insist on Th 1, 1131 (aor. ˚āhi). -- 2. to concentrate or fix one's attention on (c. acc.), to direct one's thoughts to, to make up one's mind, to wish Vin i.115 (inf. ˚ṭhātuŋ), 297 (id.), 125 (grd. ˚ṭhātabba) J i.80 (aor. ˚ahi); iii.278; iv.134 (v. l. ati˚ C. expls. abhibhavitvā tiṭṭhati); DhA i.34; iv.201 (ger. ˚hitvā); PvA 23 (aor. ˚ṭhāsi) 171 (id.), 75 (ger. ˚hitvā). On adhiṭṭheyya see Cpd. 209, n. 2; 219, n. 1. -- 3. to undertake, practice, perform, look after, to celebrate S ii.17; A i.115 sq.; J i.50; PvA 209 (ger. ˚ṭhāya). -- pp. adhiṭṭhita (q. v.). Adhiṭṭhāna
Adhiṭṭhāna
(nt.) [fr. adhi + sthā] 1. decision, resolution, self -- determination, will (cp. on this meaning Cpd. 62) D iii.229 (where 4 are enumd., viz. paññā˚, sacca˚ cāga˚ upasama˚); J i.23; v.174; Ps i.108; ii.171 sq., 207; DhsA 166 (cp. Dhs. trsl. 44). -- 2. mentioned in bad sense with abhinivesa and anusaya, obstinacy, prejudice and bias M i.136; iii.31, 240; S ii.17; iii.10, 135, 194. -- As adj. ( -- ˚) applying oneself to, bent on A iii.363. -- 3. looking after, management, direction, power Miln 309 (devānaŋ); PvA 141 (so read for adhitaṭṭhāna). [adiṭṭhāna as PvA 89, used as explanatory for āvāsa, should perhaps be read adhiṭṭhāna in the sense of fixed, permanent, abode]. Adhiṭṭhāyaka
Adhiṭṭhāyaka
(adj.) ( -- ˚) superintending, watching, looking after, in kamma˚ Mhvs 5, 175; 30, 98; kammanta˚ DhA i.393. Adhiṭṭhita
Adhiṭṭhita
(adj.) [pp. of adhiṭṭhāti] 1. standing on (c. loc.), esp. with the idea of standing above, towering over Vv 6330 (hemarathe a. = sakalaŋ ṭhānaŋ abhibhavitvā ṭhita VvA 269). -- (a) looked after, managed, undertaken, governed Vin i.57; S v.278 (svɔâdhiṭṭhita); PvA 141 (kammanta). -- (b) undertaking, bent on (c. acc.) Sn 820 (ekacariyaŋ). Adhideva
Adhideva
[adhi + deva] a superior or supreme god, above the gods M ii.132; A iv.304; Sn 1148; Nd2 307b, 422 a. Cp. atideva. Adhipa
Adhipa
[Sk. adhipa, abbrev. of adhipati] ruler, lord, master J ii.369; iii.324; v.393; Pv ii.86 (jan˚ king); Dāvs iii.52; VvA 314. Adhipaka
Adhipaka
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. prec.] mastering, ruling or governed, influenced by (cp. adhipati) A i.150 (atta˚ loka˚ dhamma˚). Adhipajjati
Adhipajjati
[adhi + pajjati] to come to, reach, attain A iv.96 (anatthaŋ); pp. adhipanna. Adhipaññā
Adhipaññā
(f.) [adhi + paññā] higher wisdom or know- ledge, insight (cp. jhāna & paññā); usually in combn. with adhicitta & adhisīla Vin i.70; D i.174; iii.219 (˚sikkhā); A i.240; ii.92 sq., 239; iii.106 sq., 327; iv.360; Nd1 39 (id.); Ps i.20, 25 sq., 45 sq., 169; ii.11, 244; Pug 61. -- 29 -- Adhipatati
Adhipatati
[adhi + patati] to fly past, vanish J iv.111 ( = ativiya patati sīghaŋ atikkamati C.). -- Caus. adhipāteti (q. v.) in diff. meaning. Cp. also adhipāta. Adhipatana
Adhipatana
(nt.) [fr. adhipatati] attack, pressing ThA 271. Adhipati
Adhipati
(n. -- adj.) [adhi + pati, cp. adhipa] 1. ruler, master J iv.223; Vv 811; Miln 388; DhA i.36 ( = seṭṭha). -> 2. ruling over, governing, predominant; ruled or governed by Vbh 216 sq. (chandaŋ adhipatiŋ katvā making energy predominant); DhsA 125, 126 (atta˚ autonomous, loka˚ heteronomous, influenced by society). See alṣo Dhs. trsl. 20 & Cpd. 60. Adhipateyya
Adhipateyya
(nt.) A i.147; iii 33 = S iv.275 is probably misreading for ādhipateyya. Adhipatthita
Adhipatthita
[pp. adhi + pattheti, cp. Sk. abhi + arthayati] desired, wished, begged for D i.120. Adhipanna
Adhipanna
[cp. Sk. abhipanna, adhi + pad] gone into, affected with, seized by ( -- ˚), a victim of (c. loc.) S i.72, Th 2, 345 (kāmesu); Sn 1123 (taṇhā˚ = taṇhânugata Nd2 32); Dh 288; J iii.38, 369; iv.396; v.91, 379 (= dosena ajjhotthaṭa); vi.27. Adhipāṭimokkha
Adhipāṭimokkha
(nt.) [adhi + pāṭimokkha] the higher, moral, code Vin v.1 (pāṭim˚ +); M ii.245 (+ ajjhājīva). Adhipāta
Adhipāta1
[adhipāteti] splitting, breaking, only in phrase muddhā˚ head -- splitting Sn 988 sq., 1004, 1025 (v. l. Nd2 ˚vipāta). Adhipāta
Adhipāta2
[from adhipatati = Sk. atipatati, to fly past, flit] a moth Sn 964. Expld. at Nd1 484 as "adhipātikā ti tā uppatitvā khādanti taŋkāraṇā a. vuccanti"; Ud 72 (expld. by C. as salabhā). Adhipatikā
Adhipatikā
(f.) [fr. adhipāta2] a moth, a mosquito Nd1 484 (see adhipāta2). Adhipāteti
Adhipāteti
[Caus. fr. adhipatati, cp. Sk. abhipātayati & P. atipāteti] to break, split J iv.337 ( = chindati). At Ud 8 prob. to be read adhibādheti (v. l. avibādeti. T. adhipāteti). Adhippagharati
Adhippagharati
[adhi + ppa + gharati] to flow, to trickle ThA 284. Adhippāgā
Adhippāgā
3 sg. aor. of adhippagacchati to go to J v.59. Adhippāya
Adhippāya
[adhi + ppa + i; Sk. abhiprāya] 1. intention, wish desire S i.124; v.108; A ii.81; iii.363 (bhoga˚); v.65; J i.79, 83; Sdhp 62. As adj. ( -- ˚) desiring PvA 226 (hass˚ in play = khiḍḍatthika). -- 2. sense, meaning, conclusion, inference (cp. adhigama) Miln 148; PvA 8, 16, 48, 131 (the moral of a story). -- adhippāyena (instr.) in the way of, like PvA 215 (kīḷ for fun). Adhippāyosa
Adhippāyosa
[adhi + pāyosa] distinction, difference, pe- culiarity, special meaning M i 46; S iii.66; iv.208; A i.267; iv.158; v.48 sq. Adhippeta
Adhippeta
[Sk. abhipreta, adhi + ppa + i, lit. gone into, gone for; cp. adhippāya] 1. desired, approved of, agreeable D i.120; ii.236; VvA 312, 315. -- 2. meant, understood, intended as J iii.263; PvA 9, 80, 120, 164. Adhippetatta
Adhippetatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. adhippeta] the fact of being meant or understood as, in abl. ˚ā with reference to, as is to be understood of VvA 13; PvA 52. Adhibādheti
Adhibādheti
[adhi + bādheti, cp. Sk. abhibādhayati] to vex, oppress, gore (to death) Ud 8 (T. adhipāteti, v. l. avibādeti). Adhibrahmā
Adhibrahmā
[adhi + Brahmā, cp. atibrahmā] a superior Brahmā, higher than Brahmā M ii.132. Adhibhavati
Adhibhavati
[adhi + bhavati, cp. Sk. & P. abhibhavati] to overcome, overpower, surpass S iv.185 sq. (cp. adhibhū); A v.248, 282 (˚bhoti); J ii.336; V.30. -- aor. adhibhavi J ii.80. 3. pl. adhibhaŋsu S iv.185. See also ajjhabhavi & ajjhabhū pp. adhibhūta (q. v.). Adhibhāsati
Adhibhāsati
[adhi + bhāsati] to address, to speak to; aor. ajjhabhāsi Vin ii.195; S i.103; iv.117; Sn p. 87; PvA 56, 90. Adhibhū
Adhibhū
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. adhi + bhū, cp. adhibhavati & Sk. adhibhū] overpowering, having power over; master, conqueror, lord S iv.186 (anadhibhū not mastering. For adhibhūta the v. l. abhi˚ is to be preferred as more usual in this connection, see abhibhū); Sn 684 (miga˚; v. l. abhi˚). Adhibhūta
Adhibhūta
[cp. adhibhū & adhibhūta] overpowered S iv.186. Adhimatta
Adhimatta
(adj.) [adhi + matta of mā] extreme, exceeding, extraordinary; nt. adv. ˚ŋ extremely M i.152, 243; S iv. 160; A ii.150; iv.241; J i.92; Pug 15; Miln 146, 189, 274, 290; Pv ii.36 ( = adhikataraŋ PvA 86); DhA ii.85; cp. PvA 281. Adhimattata
Adhimattata
(nt.) [abstr. fr. prec.] preponderance A ii.150; DhsA 334 (cp. Dhs. trsl. 200). Adhimana
Adhimana
(n. -- adj.) [adhi + mano] (n.) attention, direction of mind, concentration Sn 692 (adhimanasā bhavātha). -> (adj.) directing one's mind upon, intent (on) J iv.433 ( = pasannacitta); v.29 (an˚; v. l. ˚māna). Adhimāna
Adhimāna
[adhi + māna] undue estimate of oneself M ii.252; A v.162 sq. Adhimānika
Adhimānika
(adj.) [fr. adhimāna] having undue confidence in oneself, conceited A v.162, 169, 317; DhA iii.111. Adhimuccati
Adhimuccati
[Pass. of adhi + muc] 1. to be drawn to, feel attached to or inclined towards, to indulge in (c. loc.) S iii.225; iv.185; A iv.24, 145 sq., 460; v.17; Pug 63. -> 2. to become settled, to make up one's mind as to (with loc.), to become clear about Vin i.209 (aor. ˚mucci); D i.106; S i.116 (pot. ˚mucceyya); It 43; DA i.275. -> 3. to take courage, to have faith Sn 559; Miln 234; DA i.214, 316; J iv.272; v.103; DhA i.196; iii.258; iv.170. -> 4. of a spirit, to possess, to enter into a body, with loc. of the body. A late idiom for the older anvāvisati. J iv.172; v.103, 429; DhA i.196; iii.258; iv.170. -> pp. adhimuccita and adhimutta. -- Caus. adhimoceti to incline to (trs.); to direct upon (with loc.) S v.409 (cittaŋ devesu a.). Adhimuccana
Adhimuccana
(nt.) [fr. adhi + muc] making up one's mind, confidence DhsA 133, 190. Adhimuccita & Adhimucchita
Adhimuccita
& Adhimucchita (pp.) [either adhi + muc or mūrch; it would seem more probable to connect it with the former (cp. adhimuccati) and consider all vv. ll. ˚mucchita as spurious; but in view of the credit of several passages we have to assume a regular analogy -- form ˚mucchita, cp. mucchati and see also J.P.T.S. 1886, 109] drawn towards, attached to, infatuated, indulging in (with loc.) M ii.223 (an˚); S i.113; Th 1, 732 (v. l. ˚muccita), 923 (cch), 1175; J ii.437 (cch); iii.242; v.255 (kāmesu ˚mucchita, v. l. ˚muccita). Cp. ajjhomucchita. Adhimuccitar
Adhimuccitar
[n. ag. of adhimuccati] one who determines for something, easily trusting, giving credence A iii.165 (v. l. ˚mucchitā). Adhimutta
Adhimutta
(adj.) [pp. of adhimuccati, cp. BSk. adhimukta. Av. Ś i.8, 112; Divy 49, 302 etc.] intent upon ( -- ˚ or with loc. or acc.), applying oneself to, keen on, inclined to, given to Vin i.183; A v.34, 38; Dh 226; Sn 1071, 1149 (˚citta); Nd2 33; J i.370 (dān˚) Pug 26; PvA 134 (dān˚). Adhimutti
Adhimutti
(f.) [adhi + mutti] resolve, intention, disposition D i.174; A v.36; Ps i.124; Miln 161, 169; Vbh 340, 341; DA i.44, 103; Sdhp 378. -- 30 -- Adhimuttika
Adhimuttika
(adj.) [ = adhimutta] inclined to, attached to, bent on S ii.154, 158; It 70; Vbh 339 sq. + tā (f.) inclination D i.2. Adhimokkha
Adhimokkha
[fr. adhi + muc] firm resolve, determination, decision M iii.25 sq.; Vbh 165 sq., 425; DhsA 145, 264. See Dhs. trsl. 5; Cpd. 17, 40, 95. Adhiyita
Adhiyita
see adhīyati. Adhiroha
Adhiroha
[fr. adhi + ruh] ascent, ascending; in dur˚ hard to ascend Miln 322. Adhivacana
Adhivacana
(nt.) [adhi + vacana] designation, term, attrî- bute, metaphor, metaphorical expression D ii.62; M i.113, 144, 460; A ii.70, 124; iii.310; iv.89, 285, 340; It 15, 114; Sn p. 218; J i.117; Nd2 34 = Dhs 1306 (= nāma sankhā paññatti etc.); Vbh 6; PvA 63. See on term Dhs. trsl. 340.

-- patha "process of synonymous nomenclature" (Mrs. Rh. D.) D ii.68; S iii.71; Dhs 1306; DhsA 51. Adhivattati
Adhivattati
[adhi + vattati] to come on, proceed, issue, result S i.101; A ii.32. Adhivattha
Adhivattha
(adj.) [pp. of adhivasati] inhabiting, living in (c. loc.) Vin i.28; S i.197; J i.223; ii.385; iii.327; PvA 17. The form adhivuttha occurs at J vi.370. Adhivara
Adhivara
(adj.) [adhi + vara] superb, excellent, surpassing Vv 163 (an˚ unsurpassed, unrivalled; VvA 80 = adhika, visiṭṭha). Adhivāsa
Adhivāsa
[fr. adhi + vas] endurance, forbearance, holding out; only as adj. in dur˚ difficult to hold out Th 1, 111. Adhivāsaka
Adhivāsaka
(& ˚ika) (adj.) [fr. adhivāsa] willing, agree- able, enduring, patient Vin iv.130; M i.10, 526; A ii.118; iii.163; v.132; J iii.369 (an˚); iv.11, 77. Adhivāsana
Adhivāsana
(nṭ.) [fr. adhi + vas] 1 assent A iii.31; DhA i.33. -- 2. forbearance, endurance M i.10; J ii.237; iii.263; iv.307; v.174. Adhivāsanatā
Adhivāsanatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. adhivāsana] patience, endurance, Dhs 1342; Vbh 360 (an˚). Adhivāseti
Adhivāseti
[Caus. of adhivasati, cp. BSk. adhivāsayati in meaning of 3] 1. to wait for (c. acc.) J i.254; ii.352; iii.277. -- 2. to have patience, bear, endure (c. acc.) D ii.128, 157; J i.46; iii.281 (pahāre); iv.279, 407; v.51, 200; VvA 336, 337. -- 3. to consent, agree, give in Vin i.17; D i.109 (cp. DA i.277); S iv.76; DhA i.33; PvA 17, 20, 75 and freq. passim. -- Caus. adhivāsāpeti to cause to wait J i.254. Adhivāha
Adhivāha
[fr. adhi + vah; cp. Sk. abhivahati] a carrier, bearer, adj. bringing S iv.70 (dukkha˚); A i.6; Th 1, 494. Adhivāhana
Adhivāhana
(nt. -- adj.) [fr. adhi + vah] carrying, bringing, bearing Sn 79; f. ˚ī Th 1, 519. Adhivimuttatta
Adhivimuttatta
(nt.) = adhivimokkhatta & adhimutti, i. e. propensity, the fact of being inclined or given to J v.254 (T. kāmādhivimuttitā, v. l. ˚muttata). Adhivimokkhatta
Adhivimokkhatta
(nt.) = adhimokkha; being inclined to DhsA 261. Adhivutti
Adhivutti
(f.) [adhi + vutti, fr. adhi + vac, cp. Sk. abhi- vadati] expression, saying, opinion; only in tt. adhivuttipada (v. l. adhimutti -- p. at all passages) D i.13 (expld. by adhivacana -- pada DA i.103); M ii.228; A v.36. Adhivuttha
Adhivuttha
see adhivattha. Adhisayana
Adhisayana
(nt. -- adj.) [fr. adhiseti] lying on or in, inhabiting PvA 80 (mañcaŋ). Adhisayita
Adhisayita
[pp. of adhiseti] sat on, addled (of eggs) Vin iii.3; S iii.153. Adhisīla
Adhisīla
(nt.) [adhi + sīla] higher morality, usually in threefold set of adhicitta -- sikkha, adhipaññā˚ adhisïla˚ Vin i.70; D i.174; iii.219; A iii.133; iv.25; DhA i.334; PvA 207. See also adhicitta, sikkhā & sīla. Adhiseti
Adhiseti
[adhi + seti] to lie on, sit on, live in, to follow, pursue Dh 41; Sn 671 ( = gacchati C.) -- pp. adhisayita. Adhīna
Adhīna
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [cp. Sk. adhīna] subject, dependent D i.72 (atta˚ & para˚ ); J iv.112; DA i.217; also written ādhīna J v.350. See also under para. Adhīyati
Adhīyati
& adhiyati [Med. of adhi + i, 1st sg. adhīye taken as base in Pāli] to study, lit. to approach (cp. adhigacchati); to learn by heart (the Vedas & other Sacred Books) Vin i.270; S i.202 (dhammapadāni); J iv.184 (adhīyitvā), 496 (adhīyamāna); vi.458; DhA iii.446 (adhīyassu). -- ger. adhīyitvā J iv.75; adhiyānaŋ J v.450 ( = sajjhāyitvā C.) & adhicca: see adhicca 2; pp. adhiyita D i.96. Adhunā
Adhunā
(adv.) [Vedic adhunā] just now, quite recently D ii.208; Vin ii.185 (kālakata); Miln 155; Dāvs ii.94.

-- āgata a new comer M i.457; J ii.105. -- âbhisitta newly or just anointed D ii.227. -- uppanna just arisen D ii.208, 221. Adhura
Adhura
(nt.) [a + dhura, see dhura 2] irresponsibility, indifference to oblihations J iv.241. Adho
Adho
(adv.) [Vedic adhaḥ; compar. adharaḥ = Lat. inferus, Goth. undar, E. under, Ind. *n̊dher -- ; superl. adhamaḥ = Lat. infimus] below, usually combd. or contrasted with uddhaŋ "above" and tiriyaŋ "across", describing the 3 dimensions. -- uddhaŋ and adho above and below, marking zenith & nadir. Thus with uddhaŋ and the 4 bearings (disā) and intermediate points (anudisā) at S i.122; iii.124; A iv.167; with uddhaŋ & tiriyaŋ at Sn 150, 537, 1055, 1068. Expld. at KhA 248 by heṭṭhā and in detail (dogmatically & speculatively) at Nd2 155. For further ref. see uddhaŋ. The compn. form of adho before vowels is adh˚.

-- akkhaka beneath the collar -- bone Vin iv.213. -- agga with the points downward (of the upper row of teeth) J v.156 (+ uddh˚ expld. by uparima -- danta C.). -- kata turned down, or upside down J i.20; vi.298. -- gata gone by, past. Adv. ˚ŋ since (cp. uddhaŋ adv. later or after) J vi.187 (ito māsaŋ adhogataŋ since one month ago). -- gala (so read for T. udho˚) down the throat PvA 104. -- mukha head forward, face downward, bent over, upturned Vin ii.78; M i.132, 234: Vv 161 ( = heṭṭhā mukha VvA 78). -- bhāga the lower part (of the body) M i.473; DhA i.148. -- virecana action of a purgative (opp. uddha˚ of an emetic) D i.12; DA i.98 (= adho dosānaŋ nīharaṇaŋ); DhsA 404. -- sākhaŋ (+ uddhamūlaŋ) branches down (& roots up, i. e. uprooted) DhA i.75. -- sira (adj.) head downward J iv.194. -- siraŋ (adv.) with bowed head (cp. avaŋsiraŋ) J vi.298 (= siraŋ adhokatvā heṭṭhāmukho C.). -- sīsa (adj.) head first, headlong J i.233; v.472 (˚ka). An
An
-- form of the neg. prefix a -- before vowels. For negatives beginning with an˚ see the positive. Ana
Ana
-- negative prefix, contained in anappameyya, (Th 1, 1089), anamatagga & anabhava. See Vinaya Texts ii.113. Anajjhiṭṭha
Anajjhiṭṭha
(adj.) [an + ajjhiṭṭha] uncalled, unbidden, un- asked Vin i.113; Pv i.123 (T. anabbhita, v. l. anijjhiṭṭha; J iii.165 has anavhāta; Th 2, 129 ayācita; PvA 64 expls. by anavhāta). Anaṭi
Anaṭi
[An, Vedic aniti & anati] to breathe KhA i.124 (in def. of bāla); DA i.244 (read ananti for aṇanti). Cp. pāṇa. Anabhāva
Anabhāva
[ana + bhāva] the utter cessation of becoming. In the oldest Pali only in adj. form anabhāvaŋ kata or gata. This again found only in a string of four adjectives together expressing the most utter destruction. They are used at Vin iii.3 of bad qualities, at S ii.63 of certain wrong opinions, at M i.487; S iv.62 = v.527 of the khandas, at M i.331 of the Mental Intoxications (Āsavas), at A iv.73 of certain tastes, of a bad kamma A i.135, of evil passions A i.137, 184, 218; ii.214 of pride A ii.41, of craving A ii.249, of the bonds A iv.8. In the supplement to the Dīgha (D iii.326) and in the Iti -- vuttaka (p. 115) a later idiom, anabhāvaŋ gameti, cause to perish, is used of evil thoughts. Bdhgh (quoted Vin iii.267) reports as v. l. anubhāva. Cp. Nd i.90; and Nd2 under pahīna. -- 31 -- Anabbhita
Anabbhita
(adj.) [an + abbhita] not restored, not to be restored Vin iv.242; Pv i.123 (where reading prob. faulty & due to a gloss; the id. p. at Th 2, 129 has ayācita & at J iii.165 anavhāta; PvA 64 expls. by anavhāta, v. l. anabbhita). Anabhuṇṇatatā
Anabhuṇṇatatā
(f.) [an + abbhuṇṇata + tā] the state of not being erect, i. e. hanging down J v.156. Anabhijjhā
Anabhijjhā
(f.) [an + abhijjhā] absence of covetousness or desire D iii.229, 269; Dhs 32, 35, 277. Anabhijjhālū
Anabhijjhālū
(adj.) [an + abhijjhālū] not greedy or covetous D iii.82; Pug 40. Anabhijjhita
Anabhijjhita
(adj.) [an + abhijjhita] not desired Sn 40 (cp. Nd2 38); Vv 474 ( = na abhikankhita VvA 201). Anabhinandati
Anabhinandati
etc. see abhi˚ etc. Anabhirata
Anabhirata
(adj.) [an + abhirata] not taking delight in J i.61 (naccâdisu). Anabhirati
Anabhirati
(f.) [an + abhirati] not delighting in, dissatis- faction, discontent D i.17 (+ paritassanā); iii.289; J iii. 395; DA i.111. Anabhiraddha
Anabhiraddha
(adj.) [an + abhiraddha] in anger Vin iv.236. Anabhiraddhi
Anabhiraddhi
(f.) [an + abhiraddhi] anger, wrath D i.3 ( = kopassɔetaŋ adhivacanaŋ DA i.52). Anabhisambhuṇamāna
Anabhisambhuṇamāna
(adj.) [ppr. med. of an + abhisam- bhuṇāti] not obtaining, unable to get or keep up D i.101 ( = asampāpuṇanto avisahamāno vā DA i.268). Anamatagga
Anamatagga
(adj.) [ana ( = a neg.) + mata (fr. man) + aggā (pl.). So Dhammapāla (avidit -- agga ThA 289); Nāṇakitti in Ṭīkā on DhsA 11; Trenckner, Notes 64; Oldenberg, Vin. Texts ii.114. Childers takes it as an + amata + agga, and Jacobi (Erzähl. 33 and 89) and Pischel (Gram. § 251) as a + namat (fr. nam) + agga. It is Sanskritized at Divy 197 by anavarāgra, doubtless by some mistake. Weber, Ind. Str. iii.150 suggests an + āmrta, which does not suit the context at all]. Ep. of Saṃsāra "whose beginning and end are alike unthinkable", i. e., without beginning or end. Found in two passages of the Canon: S ii.178, 187 sq. = iii.149, 151 = v.226, 441 (quoted Kvu 29, called Anamatagga -- pariyāya at DhA ii.268) and Th 2, 495, 6. Later references are Nd2 664; PvA 166; DhA i.11; ii.13, 32; Sdhp 505. [Cp. anāmata and amatagga, and cp. the English idiom "world without end". The meaning can best be seen, not from the derivation (which is uncertain), but from the examples quoted above from the Saṃyutta. According to the Yoga, on the contrary (see e. g., Woods, Yoga -- system of Patañjali, 119), it is a possible, and indeed a necessary quality of the Yogī, to understand the beginning and end of Saṃsāra]. Anamha
Anamha
(adj.) [according to Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 70 = ana -- mha "unlaughing" with ana = an (cp. anabhāva & anamatagga) and mha from smi, cp. vimhayati = Sk. vismayati] being in consternation or distress, crying J iii. 223 (˚kāle = ārodana -- kāle C.). Anaya
Anaya
[a + naya] misfortune, distress Miln 277, usually combd. with vyasana (as also in BSk, e. g. Jtm 215) Vin ii.199; S iv.159; A v.156; Miln 292; VvA 327; Sdhp 362. Anariya
Anariya
(adj.) [an + ariya, see also anāriya] not Aiyan, ignoble, low Vin i.10; D iii.232 (˚vohāra, 3 sets of 4; the same at Vin v.125); Sn 664, 782 (˚dhamma); Pug 13. -- See ariya. Anala
Anala
(adj.) [an + ala] 1. not sufficient, not enough; unable, impossible, unmanageable M i.455; J ii.326 = iv. 471. -- 2. dissatisfied, insatiate J v.63 (= atitta C.). -> 3. ˚ŋ kata dissatisfied, satiated, S i.15 (kāmesu). Anavaya
Anavaya
(adj.) [derivation doubtful. See Trenckner Pali Misc. 65] not lacking, complete in (loc.), fulfilling D i.88 ( = anūna paripūra -- kārin DA i.248); A iii.152 (= samatta paripuṇṇa AA quoted by Tr. on Miln 10). Anavosita
Anavosita
(adj.) [an + avosita; or ana + avosita = avusita?] unfulfilled, undone Th 1, 101. Anasana
Anasana
(nt.) [an + asana, cp. Sk. an -- aśana] not eating, fasting, hunger D iii.75 & in same context at Sn 311 ( = khudā SnA 324). Anasitvāna
Anasitvāna
[ger. of an + aśati] without eating, fasting J iv.371. Anasuyyaŋ
Anasuyyaŋ
[Sk. anasūyan, ppr. of an + asūyati] not grum- bling J iii.27 (v. l. for anusuyyaŋ T.). Anasuropa
Anasuropa
[an + asuropa] absence of abruptness Dhs 1341. Anasūyaka
Anasūyaka
(adj.) [Sk. anasūyaka, cp. usūya] not grumbling, not envious J ii.192. Anassaka
Anassaka
(adj.) either an -- assaka or a -- nassaka (q. v.). Anassana
Anassana
(nt.) [a + nassana, naś; cp. Sk. naśana] im- perishableness, freedom from waste J iv.168. Anassāvin
Anassāvin
(adj.) [an + assāvin; cp. assāva + āsava] not intoxicated, not enjoying or finding pleasure in Sn 853 (sātiyesu a. = sātavatthusa kāmaguṇesu taṇhasanthavavirahita SnA 549). Anassāsika
Anassāsika
(adj.) [an + assāsa + ika; cp. Sk. āśvāsana & BSk. anāśvāsika Divy 207] not consoling, discouraging, not comforting M i.514; S ii.191. Anassuŋ
Anassuŋ
1st sq, pret. of anusūyati ( = Sk. anvaśruvaŋ) I have heard M i.393. Anāgata
Anāgata
(adj.) [an + āgata] not come yet, i. e. future. On usual combn. with atīta: see this. D iii.100 sq., 134 sq., 220, 275; M iii.188 sq.; S i.5; ii.283; A iii.100 sq., 400; Sn 318, 373, 851; It 53; J iv.159; vi.364; Dhs 1039, 1416. Anāgamana
Anāgamana
(nt.) [an + āgamana] not coming, not returning J i 203, 264. Anāgāmitā
Anāgāmitā
(f.) [anāgāmin + tā] the state or condition of an Anāgāmin S v.129, 181, 285; A iii.82; v.108, 300 sq.; Sn p. 140 = A iii.143; It 1 sq., 39, 40. Anāgāmin
Anāgāmin
(adj. -- n.) [an + āgāmin] one who does not return, a Never -- Returner, as tt. designating one who has attained the 3rd stage out of four in the breaking of the bonds (Saŋyojanas) which keep a man back from Arahantship. So near is the Anāgāmin to the goal, that after death he will be reborn in one of the highest heaven and there obtain Arahantship, never returning to rebirth as a man. But in the oldest passages referring to these 4 stages, the description of the third does not use the word anāgāmin (D i.156; ii.92; iii.107; M ii.146) and anāgāmin does not mean the breaking of bonds, but the cultivation of certain specified good mental habits (S iii.168, the anatta doctrine; S v.200 -- 2, the five Indriyas; A i.64, 120, cultivation of good qualities, ii 160; v.86, 171 = S 149). We have only two cases in the canon of any living persons being called anāgāmin. Those are at S v.177 and 178. The word there means one who has broken the lower five of the ten bonds, & the individuals named are laymen. At D ii.92 nine others, of whom eight are laymen, are declared after their death to have reached the third stage (as above) during life, but they are not called anāgāmins. At It 96 there are only 3 stages, the worldling, the Anāgāmin, and the Arahant; and the Saŋyojanas are not referred to. It is probable that already in the Nikāya period the older, wider meaning was falling into disuse. The Abhidhamma books seem to refer only to the Saŋyojana explanation; the commentaries, so far as we know them, ignore any other. See Ps ii.194; Kv. Tr. 74; Dhs. Tr. 302 n; Cp. 69.

-- phala fruition of the state of an Anāgāmin; always in combn. sotāpatti˚ sakadāgāmi˚ anāgāmi˚ arahatta˚ Vin i.293; ii.240; iv.29; D i.229; ii.227, 255; S iii.168; v.411; A i.23, 44; iii.272 sq.; iv.204, 276, 372 sq. -- magga the path of one who does not return (in rebirths) Nd2 569b. -- 32 -- Anāgāra & Anāgāriyā
Anāgāra
& Anāgāriyā see agāra & agāriyā. Anāghāta
Anāghāta
[an + āghāta] freedom from anger or ill -- will Vin ii.249. Anācāra
Anācāra
[an + ācāra] misconduct, immorality J ii.133; iii. 276; adj. anācārin Pug 57. Anājāniya
Anājāniya
(adj.) [an + ājāniya] of inferior race, not of good blood M i.367. Anādara
Anādara
[an + ādara] (a) (m) disrespect PvA 257. -- (b.) (adj.) disrespectful Sn 247 ( = ādaravirahita SnA 290). Anādaratā
Anādaratā
(f.) [abstr. fr. anādara] want of consideration, in expln. of dovacassatā at Dhs 1325 = Vbh 359 = Pug 30 (where reading is anādariyatā). Anādariya
Anādariya
(nt.) [fr. anādara] disregard, disrespect Vin i.176; iv.113 (where expld. in extenso); Dhs 1325 = dug 20 = Vbh 359. Anādā
Anādā
[ger. of an + ādiyati] without taking up or on to oneself Vin iv.120 ( = anādiyitvā C.). Anādāna
Anādāna
(adj.) [an + ādāna] free from attachment (opp. sādāna) A ii.10 = It 9 = 109 = Nd2 172a; Sn 620, 741, 1094; Nd2 41 (where as nt. = taṇha); Dh 352 (= khandhādisu niggahaṇa DhA iv.70), 396, 406, 421. Anāditvā
Anāditvā
[ger. of an + ādiyati] not taking up, not heeding J iv.352 (v. l. for T. anādiyitvā). Anādiyitvā
Anādiyitvā
[ger. of an + ādiyati, Sk. anādāya] without assuming or taking up, not heeding Vin iv.120; J iv.352; DhA i.41. See also ādiyati. Anānu
Anānu
-- represents the metrically lengthened from of ananu- (an + anu), as found e. g. in the foll. cpds.: ˚tappaŋ (ppr.) not regretting J v.492; ˚puṭṭha questioned Sn 782 ( = apucchita SnA 521); ˚yāyin not following or not defiled by evil Sn 1071 (expld. at Nd2 42 by both avedhamāna (?) avigacchamāna & by arajjamāna adussamāna); ˚loma not fit or suitable D ii.273 (v. l. anu˚). Anāpāthagata
Anāpāthagata
(adj.) [an + āpātha + gata] not fallen into the way of (the hunter), escaped him M i.174. Anāpāda
Anāpāda
(adj.) [an + āpāda] unmarried (of a woman) J iv.178 (āpāda = apādāna C.; aññehi akata -- pariggahā). Anāpucchā
Anāpucchā
see āpucchati. Anābādha
Anābādha
(adj.) [an + ābādha] safe and sound VvA 351. Anāmata
Anāmata
(adj.) [an + amata the ā being due to metrical lengthening] not affected by death, immortal J ii.56 ( = asusāna -- ṭṭhāna C.); DhA ii.99. Anāmanta
Anāmanta
(˚ -- ) [an + āmanta] without asking or being asked; in ˚kata unasked, unpermitted, uninvited J vi.226; ˚cāra living uninvited Vin v.132; A iii.259. Anāmaya
Anāmaya
(adj.) [an + āmaya] free from illness, not decaying, healthy Vv 1510 ( = aroga VvA 74), 177. Anāmasita
Anāmasita
(adj.) [an + āmasita, pp. of āmassati] not touched, virgin -- VvA 113 (˚khetta). Anāmassa
Anāmassa
(adj.) [grd. of an + āmassati, Sk. āmaśya] not to be touched J ii 360 (C. anāmāsitabba). Anāyatana
Anāyatana
(nt.) [an + āyatana] nonexertion, not exerting oneself, sluggishness, indolence J v.121 (˚sīla = dussīla C.). Anāyasa
Anāyasa
(adj.) [an + āya + sa, or should we read anāyāsa?] void of means, unlucky, unfortunate Vv 845 ( = natthi ettha āyo sukhan ti anāyasaŋ VvA 335). Anāyāsa
Anāyāsa
(adj.) [an + āyāsa] free from trouble or sorrow, peaceful Th 1, 1008. Anārambha
Anārambha
[an + ārambha] that which is without moil and toil Sn 745 ( = nibbāna SnA 507). Anārādhaka
Anārādhaka
(adj.) [an + ārādhaka] one who fails, unsuc- cessful Vin i.70. Anāriya
Anāriya
(adj.) [doublet of anariya] not Aryan, ignoble, Sn 815 (v. l. SS. anariya). Anālamba
Anālamba
(adj.) [an + ālamba] without support (from above), unsuspended, not held Sn 173 (+ appatiṭṭha; expld. at SnA 214 by heṭṭhā patiṭṭhâbhāvena upari ālambhāvena ca gambhīra). Anālaya
Anālaya
[an + ālaya] aversion, doing away with Vin i.10 (taṇhāya). Anāḷhiya & Anāḷhika
Anāḷhiya
& Anāḷhika (adj.) [an + ālhiya, Sk. āḍhya, see also addha2] not rich, poor, miserable, destitute, usually combd. with daḷidda M i.450; ii.178 (v. l. BB. anāḷiya); A iii.352 sq. (vv. ll. BB. anāḷhika), 384; J v.96. Anāvaṭa
Anāvaṭa
(˚ -- ) [an + āvaṭa] not shut; in ˚dvāratā (f.) not closing the door againṡt another, accessibility, openhand edness D iii.191. Anāvattin
Anāvattin
(adj. -- n.) [an + āvattin] one who does not return, almost syn. with anāgāmin in phrase anāvatti -- dhamma, one who is not destined to shift or return from one birth to another, D i.156 (cp. DA i.313); iii.132; Pug 16 sq., 62. Anāvasūraŋ
Anāvasūraŋ
(adv.) [an + ava + sūra = suriya, with ava lengthened to āva in verse] as long as the sun does not set, before sun -- down J v.56 (= anatthangata -- suriyaŋ C.) cp. Sk. utsūra. Anāvāsa
Anāvāsa
(adj. -- n.) [an + āvāsa] uninhabited, an uninhabited place Vin ii.22, 33; J ii.77. Anāvikata
Anāvikata
etc. see āvikata. Anāvila
Anāvila
(adj.) [an + āvila] undisturbed, unstained, clean, pure D i.84 ( = nikkaddama DA i.226); iii.269, 270; Sn 637 (= nikkilesa SnA 469 = DhA iv.192); Th 2, 369 (āvilacitta +); Dh 82, 413; ThA 251; Sdhp 479. Anāvuttha
Anāvuttha
(adj.) [an + āvuttha, pp. of āvasati] not dwelt in D .ii50. Anāsaka
Anāsaka
(adj.) [an + āsaka] fasting, not taking food S iv.118. f. ˚ā [cp. Sk. anāśaka nt.] fasting, abstaining from food Dh 141 ( = bhatta -- paṭikkhepa DhA iii.77). Anāsakatta
Anāsakatta
(nt.) [abstr. of anāsaka] fasting Sn 249 ( = abhojana SnA 292). Anāsava
Anāsava
(adj.) [an + āsava] free from the 4 intoxications (see āsava) Vin ii.148 = 164; D iii.112; Sn 1105, 1133; Dh 94, 126, 386; Nd2 44; It 75; Pug 27, Dhs 1101, 1451; Vbh 426; Th 1, 100; Pv ii.615; VvA 9. See āsava and cp. nirāsava. -- 33 -- Anāsasāna
Anāsasāna
(adj.) [an + āsasāna] not longing after anything Sn 369 (SnA 365 however reads anāsayāna & has anāsasāna as v. l. Cp. also vv. ll. to āsasāna. Expld by kañci rūpâdi -- dhammaŋ nâsiŋsati SnA 365. Anāhāra
Anāhāra
(adj.) [an + āhāra] being without food M i.487; Sn 985. Anikkaḍḍhanā
Anikkaḍḍhanā
(f.) [a + nikkaḍḍhanā] not throwing out or expelling J iii.22. Anikkasāva
Anikkasāva
(adj.) [a + nikkasāva, cp. nikasāva] not free from impurity, impure, stained Dh 9 = Th 1, 969 = J ii.198 = v.50; DhA i.82 (= rāgâdīhi kasāvehi sakasāva). Anikhāta
Anikhāta
(adj.) [a + nikhāta, pp. of nikhanati] not dug into, not dug down, not deep J vi.109 (˚kūla; C. agambhīrā). Anigha
Anigha
see nigha1 and īgha. Anicchā
Anicchā
(f.) [an + icchā] dispassion S v.6; adj. ˚a without desires, not desiring Sn 707. Aniñjana
Aniñjana
(nt.) [an + iñjana] immobility, steadfastness Ps i.15. Aniñjita
Aniñjita
(adj.) [an + iñjita] immoveable, undisturbed, un- shaken Th 1, 386. Aniṭṭhangata
Aniṭṭhangata
see niṭṭhā2. Aniṭṭhita
Aniṭṭhita
see niṭṭhita. Anitthi
Anitthi
(f.) [an + itthi] a woman lacking the characteristics of womanhood, a woman ceasing to be a woman, "nonwoman" J ii.126 (compd with anadī a river without water; interpreted by ucchiṭṭh -- itthi). Anindi
Anindi
-- [the compn. form of nindā] in ˚ḷocana (with) fault- less eyes J vi.265. Anindita
Anindita
(adj.) [a + nindita] blameless, faultless J iv.106 (˚angin of blameless body or limbs). Anibbisaŋ
Anibbisaŋ
[ppr. of nibbisati, q. v.] not finding Th 1, 78 = Dh 153 (= taŋ ñāṇaŋ avindanto DhA iii.128). Animisa
Animisa
(adj.) [Ved. animeṣa, cp. nimisati] not winking, waking, watchful Dāvs v.26 (nayana). Aniyata
Aniyata
(adj.) [a + niyata] not settled, uncertain, doubtful Vin i.112; ii.287; D iii.217. Aniyamita
Aniyamita
(adj.) [pp. of a + niyameti] indefinite (as tt. g.) VvA 231. Anila
Anila
[from an, cp. Sk. aniti to breathe, cp. Gr. a)/nemos wind; Lat. animus breath, soul, mind] wind J iv.119 (˚patha air, sky); Miln 181; VvA 237; Sdhp 594. Anirākata
Anirākata
(adj.) [a + nirākata] see nirankaroti. Anissara
Anissara
(adj.) [an + issara] without a personal ereator Th 1, 713. Anissukin
Anissukin
(adj.) [an + issukin, see also an -- ussukin] not hard, not greedy, generous D iii.47 (+ amaccharin; v. l. anussukin); SnA 569 (see under niṭṭhurin). Anīka
Anīka
(nt.) [Ved. anīka face, front, army to Idg. *og&uarc; (see), cp. Gr. o)/ mma eye, Lat. oculus, see also Sk. pratīka and P. akkhi] army, array, troops (orig. "front", i. e. of the battle -- array) Vin iv.107 (where expld. in detail); Sn 623 (bala˚ strong in arms, with strong array i. e. of khanti, which precedes; cp. SnA 467).

-- agga a splendid army Sn 421 ( = balakāya senāmukha SnA 384). -- ṭṭha a sentinel, royal guard D iii.64, 148; J v.100; vi.15 ("men on horseback", horseguard); Miln 234, 264. -- dassana troop -- inspection D i.6 (aṇīka˚ at DA i.85, q. v. interpretation); Vin iv.107 (senābyūha +). Anīgha
Anīgha
see nigha1 and cp. īgha. Anīti
Anīti
(f.) [an + īti] safety, soundness, sound condition, health A iv.238; Miln 323 (abl. ˚ito). Anītika
Anītika
(adj.) [fr. anīti] free from injury or harm, healthy, secure Vin ii.79 = 124 (+ anupaddava); iii.162; S iv.371; Sn 1137 (ītī vuccanti kilesā etc. Nd2 48); Miln 304. Anītiha
Anītiha
(adj.) [an + ītīha, the latter a cpd. der. fr. iti + ha = saying so and so, cp. itihāsa & itihītihaŋ] not such and such, not based on hearsay (itiha), not guesswork or (mere) talk A ii.26; Th 1, 331 (cp. M i.520); Sn 1053 (= Nd2 49, 151); J i.456; Nett 166 (cp. It 28). Anu
Anu1
(indecl.) [Vedic anu, Av. anu; Gr. a)/nw to a)/na along, up; Av. ana, Goth. ana, Ohg. ana, Ags. on, Ger. an, Lat. an (in anhelare etc.)] prep. & pref. -- A. As prep. anu is only found occasionally, and here its old (vedic) function with acc. is superseded by the loc. -> Traces of use w. acc. may be seen in expressions of time like anu pañcāhaŋ by 5 days, i. e. after (every) 5 days (cp. ved. anu dyūn day by day); a. vassaŋ for one year or yearly; a. saŋvaccharaŋ id. -- (b) More freq. w. loc. ( = alongside, with, by) a. tīre by the bank S iv.177; pathe by the way J v.302; pariveṇiyaŋ in every cell Vin i.80; magge along the road J v.201; vāte with the wind J ii.382.

B. As pref.: (a) General character. anu is freq. as modifying (directional) element with well -- defined meaning ("along"), as such also as 1st component of pref. -- cpds., e. g. anu + ā (anvā˚), anu + pra (anuppa˚), + pari, + vi, + saŋ. -- As base, i. e. 2nd part of a pref. -- cpd. it is rare and only found in combn sam -- anu˚. The prefix saŋ is its nearest relation as modifying pref. The opp. of anu is paṭi and both are often found in one cpd. (cp. ˚loma, ˚vāta). (b) Meanings. I. With verbs of motion: "along towards". -- (a) the motion viewed from the front backward = after, behind; esp. with verbs denoting to go, follow etc. E. g. ˚aya going after, connexion; ˚āgacch˚ follow, ˚kkamati follow, ˚dhāvati run after, ˚patta received, ˚parivattati move about after, ˚bandhati run after, ˚bala rear -- guard, ˚bhāsati speak after, repeat, ˚vāda speaking after, blame, ˚vicarati roam about ˚viloketi look round after (survey), ˚saŋcarati proceed around etc. -- (b) the motion viewed from the back forward = for, towards an aim, on to, over to, forward. Esp. in double pref. -- cpds. (esp. with ˚ppa˚), e. g. anu -- ādisati design for, dedicate ˚kankhin longing for, ˚cintana care for, ˚tiṭṭhati look after, ˚padinna given over to, ˚pavecchati hand over, ˚paviṭṭha entered into, ˚pasaŋkamati go up to, ˚rodati cry for, ˚socati mourn for. -- II. Witb verbs denoting a state or condition: (a) literal: along, at, to, combined with. Often resembling E. be -- or Ger. be -- , also Lat. ad -- and con -- . Thus often transitiving or simply emphatic. E. g. ˚kampā com -- passion, ˚kiṇṇa be -- set, ˚gaṇhāti take pity on, ˚gāyati be -- singen, ˚jagghati laugh at, belaugh, ˚ddaya pity with, ˚masati touch at, ˚yuñjati order along, ˚yoga devotion to, ˚rakkhati be -- guard, ˚litta be -- smeared or an -- ointed, ˚vitakheti reflect over, ˚sara con -- sequential; etc. -- (b) applied: according to, in conformity with. E. g. ˚kūla being to will, ˚chavika befitting, ˚ñāta permitted, al -- lowed, ˚mati con- sent, a -- greement, ˚madati ap -- preciate, ˚rūpa = con -- form, ˚vattin acting according to, ˚ssavana by hearsay, ˚sāsati ad -- vise, com -- mand etc. -- III. (a) (fig.) following after = second to, secondary, supplementary, inferior, minor, after, smaller; e. g. ˚dhamma lesser morality, ˚pabbajā discipleship, ˚pavattaka ruling after, ˚bhāga after -- share, ˚majjha mediocre, ˚yāgin assisting in sacrifice, ˚vyañjana smaller marks, etc.; cp. paṭi in same sense. -- (b) distributive (cp. A. a.) each, every, one by one, (one after one): ˚disā in each direction, ˚pañcāhaŋ every 5 days, ˚pubba one after the other. -- IV. As one of the contrasting ( -- comparative) prefixes (see remarks on ati & cp. ā3) anu often occurs in reduplicative cpds. after the style of khuddânukhuddaka "small and still smaller", i. e. all sorts of small items or whatever is small or insignificant. More freq. combns. are the foll.: (q. v. under each heading) padânupadaŋ, pubbânupubbaka, ponkhânuponkhaŋ, buddhânubuddha, vādânuvāda, seṭṭhânuseṭṭhi. -- V. As regards dialectical differences in meanings of prefixes, anu is freq. found in Pāli where the Sk. variant presents apa (for ava), abhi or ava. For P. anu = Sk. (Ved.) apa see anuddhasta; = Sk. abhi see anu -- gijjhati, ˚brūheti, ˚sandahati; = Sk. ava see anu -- kantati, ˚kassati2, ˚kiṇṇa, ˚gāhati, ˚bujjhati ˚bodha, ˚lokin, ˚vajja.

Note (a) anu in compn. is always contracted to ˚ânu˚, never elided like adhi = ˚dhi or abhi = ˚bhi. The rigid character of this rule accounts for forms isolated out of this sort of epds. (like mahânubhāva), like ānupubbikathā (fr. *pubbānupubba˚), ānubhāva etc. We find ānu also in combn. with an -- under the influence of metre. -- (b) the assimilation (contracted) form of anu before vowels is anv˚. -- 34 -- Anu
Anu2
(adj.) subtile; freq. spelling for aṇu, e. g. D i.223 Sdhp 271, 346 (anuŋ thūlaŋ). See aṇu. Anukankhin
Anukankhin
(adj.) [fr. anu + kānkṣ] striving after, longing for J v.499 (piya˚). Anukantati
Anukantati
[anu + kantati2] to cut Dh 311 (hatthaŋ = phāleti DhA iii.484). Anukampaka
Anukampaka
& ˚ika (adj.) [fr. anukampati] kind of heart, merciful, compassionate, full of pity ( -- ˚ or c. loc.) D iii.187; S i.105 (loka˚), 197; v.157; A iv.265 sq.; It 66 (sabba -- bhūta˚); Pv i.33 ( = kārunika PvA 16), 53 (= atthakāma, hitesin PvA 25), 88; ii.14 (= anuggaṇhataka PvA 69), 27; ThA 174; PvA 196 (satthā sattesu a.). Anukampati
Anukampati
[anu + kampati] to have pity on, to com- miserate, to pity, to sympathise with (c. acc.) S i.82, 206; v.189. Imper. anukampa Pv ii.16 ( = anuddayaŋ karohi PvA 70) & anukampassu Pv iii.28 (= anuggaṇha PvA 181). Med. ppr. anukampamāna Sn 37 (= anupekkhamāna anugayhamāna Nd2 50); PvA 35 (taŋ), 62 (pitaraŋ), 104. -- pp. anukampita (q. v.). Anukampana
Anukampana
(nt.) [fr. last] compassion, pity PvA 16, 88. Anukampā
Anukampā
(f.) [abstr. fr. anukampati] compassion, pity, mercy D i.204; M i.161; ii.113; S i.206; ii.274 (loka˚); iv.323; v.259 sq.; A i.64, 92; ii.159; iii.49; iv.139; Pug 35. -- Often in abl. anukampāya out of pity, for the sake of D iii.211 (loka˚ out of compassion for all mankind, + atthaya hitāya); J iii.280; PvA 47, 147. Anukampita
Anukampita
(adj.) [pp. of anukampati] compassioned, gra- tified, remembered, having done a good deed (of mercy) Pv iii.230. Anukampin
Anukampin
(adj.) [cp. anukampaka] compassionate, anxious for, commiserating. Only in foll. phrases: hita˚ full of solicitude for the welfare of S v.86; Sn 693; Pv iii.76. sabbapāṇa -- bhūta -- hita˚ id. S iv.314; A ii.210; iii.92; iv.249; Pug 57, 68. sabba -- bhūta˚ S i.25, 110; A ii.9; It 102. Anukaroti
Anukaroti
[anu + kṛ] to imitate, "to do after" A i.212; J i.491; ii.162; DhA iv.197. -- ppr. anukabbaŋ Vin ii.201 (mamâ˚). -- Med. anukubbati S i.19 = J iv.65. -> See also anukubba. On anvakāsi see anukassati 2. Anukassati
Anukassati
[anu + kassati, kṛṣ] 1. [Sk. anukaṛṣati] to draw after, to repeat, recite, quote D ii.255 (silokaŋ). -- 2. [Sk. ava -- kaṛṣati] to draw or take of, to remove, throw down, Th 1, 869 (aor. anvakāsi = khipi, chaḍḍesi C.). Anukāma
Anukāma
(adj.) [anu + kāma] responding to love, loving in return J ii.157. Anukāra
Anukāra
[cp. anukaroti] imitation Dpvs v.39. Anukārin
Anukārin
(adj.) imitating Dāvs v.32. Anukiṇṇa
Anukiṇṇa
[pp. of anu + kirati] strewn with, beset with, dotted all over Pv iv.121 (bhamara -- gaṇa˚). Anukubba
Anukubba
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [ = Sk. anukurvat, ppr. of anu- karoti] "doing correspondingly" giving back, retaliating J ii.205 (kicca˚). Anukubbati
Anukubbati
see anukaroti. Anukula
Anukula
freq. spelling for anukūla. Anukulaka
Anukulaka
(adj.) = anukula Sdhp 242 (iccha˚ according to wish). Anukūla
Anukūla
(adj.) [anu + kūla, opp. paṭikūla] favourable, agreeable, suitable, pleasant VvA 280; spelt anukula at Sdhp 297, 312.

-- bhava complaisance, willingness Vva 71. -- yañña a propitiative sacrifice D i.144 (expld. at DA i.302 as anukula˚ = sacrifice for the propagation of the clan). Anukkaṇṭhati
Anukkaṇṭhati
[an + ukkaṇṭhati] not to be sorry or not to lack anything, in ppr. ˚anto J v.10; and pp. ˚ita without regret or in plenty PvA 13. Anukkaṇṭhana
Anukkaṇṭhana
(nt.) [an + ukkaṇṭhana] having no lack anything, being contented or happy J vi.4. Anukkama
Anukkama
[to anukkamati] 1. order, turn, succession, going along; only in instr. anukkamena gradually, in due course or succession J i.157, 262, 290; VvA 157; PvA 5, 14, 35 etc. -- 2. that which keeps an animal in (regular) step, i. e. a bridle M i.446; Sn 622 (sandānaŋ saha˚). Anukkamati
Anukkamati
[anu + kram] 1. to follow, go along (a path = acc.) A v.195; It 80 (maggaŋ). -- 2. to advance (not with Morris J P T S. 1886, 111 as "abandon") S i.24, Th 1, 194. Anukkhipati
Anukkhipati
[anu + khipati] to throw out Cp. xi.6 (vaṭṭaŋ). Anukkhepa
Anukkhepa
[anu + khepa, see anukkhipati] compensation Vin i.285. Anukhaṇati
Anukhaṇati
[anu + khaṇati] to dig after or further J v.233. Anukhuddaka
Anukhuddaka
(adj.) [anu + khuddaka] in cpd. khudda˚ whatever there is of minor things, all less important items Vin ii.287 = D ii.154 = Miln 142; Miln 144. Anuga
Anuga
( -- ˚) (adj. -- suff.) [fr. anu + gam] following or fol- lowed by, going after, undergoing, being in or under, standing under the influence of Sn 332 ( vasa˚ in the power of), 791 (ejā˚ = abhibhūta Sn 527), 1095 (Māra-> vasa˚ = abhibhuyya viharanti Nd2 507); It 91 (ejā˚); J iii.224 (vasa˚ = vasavattin C.); Mhvs 7, 3. Anugacchati
Anugacchati
[anu + gacchati] to go after, to follow, to go or fall into (w. acc.) KhA 223; PvA 141 (˚gacchanto); aor. ˚gamāsi Vin i.16, & anvagā Mhvs 7, 10; 3rd pl. anvagū Sn 586 (vasaŋ = vasaŋ gata SnA 461). Pass. anugammati, ppr. anugammamāna accompanied or followed by, surrounded, adorned with J i.53; v.370. -> pp. anugata (q. v.). Anugata
Anugata
(adj.) [pp. of anugacchati] gone after, accompanied by, come to; following; fig. fallen or gone into, affected with ( -- ˚), being a victim of, suffering M i.16; D iii.85, 173 (parisā); A ii.185 (sota˚, v. l. anudhata); J ii.292 (samudda˚); v.369; Nd2 32 (taṇhā˚); PvA 102 (nāmaŋ mayhaŋ a. has been given to me), 133 (kammaphala˚). Anugati
Anugati
(f.) ( -- ˚) [fr. anu + gam] following, being in the train of, falling under, adherence to, dependence on S i.104 (vas˚ being in the power). Usually in cpd. diṭṭhânugati a sign (lit. belonging to) of speculation Vin ii.108; S ii.203; Pug 33; DhA iv.39. -- 35 -- Anugama
Anugama
[fr. anu + gam] following after, only as adj. in dur˚ difficult to be followed J iv.65. Anugāmika
Anugāmika
(adj.) going along with, following, accompa- nying; resulting from, consequential on Kh viii.8 (nidhi, a treasure acc. a man to the next world); J iv.280 (˚nidhi); Miln 159 (parisā); PvA 132, 253 (dānaŋ nāma ˚aŋ nidānan ti). Anugāmin
Anugāmin
(adj.) [fr. anugacchati] following, attending on; an attendant, follower SnA 453 ( = anuyutta). Anugāyati
Anugāyati
[anu + gāyati] to sing after or to, recite (a magic formula or hymn) praise, celebrate D i.104, 238; Sn 1131 (anugāyissaŋ); Miln 120. Anugāhati
Anugāhati
[anu + gāhati] to plunge into, to enter (acc.) Sdhp 611. Anugijjhati
Anugijjhati
[anu + gijjhati] to be greedy after, to covet Sn 769 (cp. Nd1 12); J iii.207; iv.4 ( = giddhā gathitā hutvā allīyanti C.). pp. ˚giddhā (q. v.). Cp. abhigijjhati. Anugiddha
Anugiddha
[pp. of anugijjhati] greedy after, hankering after, desiring, coveting Sn 86 (anânu˚), 144, 952; Th 1, 580. Anuggaṇha
Anuggaṇha
(adj.) [cp. anuggaha] compassionate, ready to help PvA 42 ˚sīla. Anuggaṇhataka
Anuggaṇhataka
(adj.) [ = anugganha] compassionate, com- miserating, helping PvA 69 (= anukampaka). Anuggaṇhana
Anuggaṇhana
(nt.) anuggaha1 DhsA 403. Anu(g)gaṇhāti
Anu(g)gaṇhāti
[anu + gaṇhāti] to have pity on, to feel sorry for, to help, give protection D i.53 (vācaŋ; cp. DA i.160: sārato agaṇhaṇto); J ii.74; Nd2 50 (ppr. med. ˚gayhamāna = anukampamāna); Pug 36; PvA 181 (imper. anuggaṇha = anukampassu). pp. anuggahīta (q. v.). Anuggaha
Anuggaha1
[anu + grah] "taking up", compassion, love for, kindness, assistance, help, favour, benefit S ii.11; iii.109; iv.104; v.162; A i.92, 114; ii.145; iv.167; v.70; It 12, 98; J i.151; v.150; Pug 25; PvA 145; ThA 104. Anuggaha
Anuggaha2
(adj.) [an + uggaha] not taking up Sn 912 ( = na gaṇhāti Nd1 330). Anuggahīta
Anuggahīta
(& ˚ita) [pp. of anuggaṇhāti] commiserated, made happy, satisfied M i.457; S ii.274; iii.91; iv.263; A iii.172; J iii.428. Anuggāhaka
Anuggāhaka
(adj.) [fr. anuggaha] helping, assisting S iii.5; v.162; Miln 354 (nt. = help). Anugghāṭeti
Anugghāṭeti
[an + ugghāṭeti] not to unfasten or open (a door) Miln 371 (kavāṭaŋ). Anugghāta
Anugghāta
[an + ugghāta] not shaking, a steady walk J vi.253. Anugghātin
Anugghātin
(adj.) [fr. last] not shaking, not jerking, J vi.252; Vv 53 (read ˚ī for i); VvA 36. Anughāyati
Anughāyati
[anu + ghāyati1] to smell, snuff, sniff up Miln 343 (gandhaŋ). Anucankamati
Anucankamati
[anu + cankamati] to follow (along) after, to go after D i.235; M i.227; Th 1, 481, 1044; Caus. ˚āpeti M i.253, cp. Lal. Vist. 147, 3; M Vastu i.350. Anucankamana
Anucankamana
(nt.) [fr. anucankamati] sidewalk J i.7. Anucarati
Anucarati
[anu + cariti] to move along, to follow; to practice; pp. anuciṇṇa & anucarita (q. v.) Anucarita
Anucarita
( -- ˚) [pp. of anucarati] connected with, ac- companied by, pervaded with D i.16, 21 (vīmaŋsa˚ = anuvicarita DA i.106); M i.68 (id.); Miln 226. Anuciṇṇa
Anuciṇṇa
(pp.) [pp. of anucarati] 1. pursuing, following out, practising, doing; having attained or practised Vin ii.203 = It 86 (pamādaŋ); J i 20 (v.126); Th 1, 236; 2, 206; Dpvs iv.9. -- 2. adorned with, accompanied by, connected with J iv.286. Anucintana
Anucintana
(nt.) [fr. anucinteti] thinking, upon, intention, care for PvA 164. Anucinteti
Anucinteti
[anu + cinteti] to think upon, to meditate, consider S i.203 (v. l. for anuvicinteti). Anuccangin
Anuccangin
see anujjangin. Anucchavika
Anucchavika
(& ˚ya) (adj.) [anu + chavi + ka] "according to one's skin", befitting, suitable, proper, pleasing, fit for, J i.58, 62, 126, 218; ii.5; iv.137, 138; Miln 358; DhA i.203, 390; ii.55, 56; VvA 68, 78; PvA 13, 26 ( = kappiya), 66, 81, 286. anucchaviya at Vin ii.7 (an˚); iii.120 (id. + ananulomika); Miln 13. Anucchiṭṭha
Anucchiṭṭha
(adj.) [see ucchiṭṭha] (food) that is not thrown away or left over; untouched, clean (food) J iii.257; DhA ii.3 (vv. ll. anucciṭṭha). Anujagghati
Anujagghati
[anu + jagghati] to laugh at, deride, mock D i.91; DA i.258 (cp. sañjagghati ibid 256). Anujavati
Anujavati
[anu + javati] to run after, to hasten after, to follow J vi.452 ( = anubandhati). Anujāta
Anujāta
(adj.) [anu + jāta] "born after" i. e. after the image of, resembling, taking after; esp. said of a son (putta), resembling his father, a worthy son It 64 (atijāta +, opp. avajāta); Th 1, 827 (fig. following the example of), 1279; J vi.380; DhA i.129; Dāvs ii.66. Anujānāti
Anujānāti
[anu + jānāti] 1. to give permission, grant, allow Vin iv.225; A ii.197; Pv iv.167; PvA 55, 79, 142. -- 2. to advise, prescribe Vin i.83; ii.301: Sn 982. -> grd. anuññeyya that which is allowed A ii.197; pp. anuññāta (q. v.) Caus. anujānāpeti J i.156. Anujīvati
Anujīvati
[anu + jīvati] to live after, i. e. like (acc.), to live for or on, subsist by J iv.271 ( = upajīvati, tassânubhāvena jīvitaŋ laddhaŋ (C.). -- pp. anujīvata (q. v.). Anujīvita
Anujīvita
(nt.) [pp. of anujīvati] living (after), living, livelihood, subsistence, life Sn 836 ( = jīvitaŋ SnA 545). Anujīvin
Anujīvin
(adj. -- n.) [fr. anujīvati] living upon, another, dependent; a follower, a dependant A i.152; iii.44; J iii.485; Dāvs v.43. Anujju
Anujju
(adj.) [an + ujju] not straight, crooked, bent, in cpds. ˚angin (anujjangin) with (evenly) bent limbs, i. e. with perfect limbs, graceful f. ˚ī Ep. of a beautiful woman J v.40 ( = kañcana -- sannibha -- sarīrā C.); vi.500 (T. anuccangī, C. aninditā agarahitangī); ˚gāmin going crooked i. e. snake J iv.330; ˚bhūta not upright (fig. of citta) J v.293. Anujjuka
Anujjuka
= anujju J iii.318. Anujjhāna
Anujjhāna
(nt.) [anu + jhāna] meditation, reflection, intro- spection Miln 352 (˚bahula). Anuññāta
Anuññāta
(adj.) [pp. of anujānāti] permitted, allowed; sanctioned, given leave, ordained D i.88; J i.92; ii.353, 416; Pv i.123 (na a. = ananuññāta at id. p. Th 2, 129; expld. at PvA 64 by ananumata); Pug 28; DA i.247, 248, 267; PvA 12, 81. Anuññātatta
Anuññātatta
(nt.) [abstr. to anuññāta] being permitted, permission J ii.353. Anuṭṭhaka
Anuṭṭhaka
(adj.) [fr. an + uṭṭhahati] not rising, not rousing oneself, inactive, lazy Th 1, 1033. -- 36 -- Anuṭṭhahati
Anuṭṭhahati
[anu + ṭhahati = ˚thāti, see ˚tiṭṭhati] to carry out, look after, practise do J v.121. -- pp. anuṭṭhita (q. v.). Anuṭṭhahāna
Anuṭṭhahāna
(adj.) [ppr. of an + uṭṭhahati] one who does not rouse himself, not getting up, inactive Dh 280 ( = anuṭṭhahanto avāyāmanto DhA iii.409). Anuṭṭhātar
Anuṭṭhātar
[n. ag. to an + uṭṭhahati] one without energy or zeal Sn 96 (niddāsīlin sabhāsīlin +) SnA 169 ( = viriya -- tejavirahita). Anuṭṭhāna
Anuṭṭhāna
(nt.) [an + uṭṭhāna] "the not getting up", in- activity, want of energy Dh 241 (sarīra -- paṭijagganaŋ akaronto DhA iii.347). Anuṭṭhita
Anuṭṭhita
[pp. of anuṭṭhati = anutiṭṭhati] practising, effecting or effected, come to, experienced, done D ii.103; S iv. 200; A iii.290 sq.; iv.300; J ii.61; Miln 198; PvA 132 (cp. anugata). Anuṭṭhubhati
Anuṭṭhubhati
[formally Sk. anuṣṭobhati, but in meaning = *anuṣṭīvati; anu + ṭṭhubhati, the etym. of which see under niṭṭhubhati] to lick up with one's saliva DA i.138. Anuṭṭhurin
Anuṭṭhurin
v. l. at SnA 569, see niṭṭhurin. Anuḍasati
Anuḍasati
[anu + ḍasati] to bite J vi.192. Anuḍahati
Anuḍahati
[anu + ḍahati] to burn over again, burn tho- roughly, fig. to destroy, consume J ii.330; vi.423. Pass. ˚ḍayhati J v.426. -- Also spelt ˚dahati, e. g. at S iv. 190 = v.53; Th 2, 488. Anuḍahana
Anuḍahana
(nt.) [fr. anuḍahati] conflagration, burning up, consumption J v.271; ThA 287 (d). Anuṇṇata
Anuṇṇata
(adj.) [uṇṇata] not raised, not elated, not haughty, humble Sn 702 (care = uddhaccaŋ nâpajjeyya SnA 492). Anutappati
Anutappati
[anu + tappati1; Sk. anutapyate, Pass. of anutapati] to be sorry for, to regret, repent, feel remorse J i.113; iv.358; v.492 (ppr. an -- anutappaŋ); Dh 67, 314; Pv ii.942; DhA ii.40. grd. anutappa to be regretted A i.22, 77; iii.294, and anutāpiya A iii.46 (an˚). Anutāpa
Anutāpa
[fr. anu + tāpa] anguish, remorse, conscience Vv 405 ( = vippaṭisāra VvA 180); DhsA 384. Anutāpin
Anutāpin
(adj.) [fr. anutāpa] repenting, regretting Th 2, 57, 190; Vv 21; VvA 115. Anutāpiya
Anutāpiya
grd. of anutappati, q. v. Anutāḷeti
Anutāḷeti
[anu + taḷeti] to beat J ii.280. Anutiṭṭhati
Anutiṭṭhati
[anu + tiṭṭhati see also anuṭṭhahati] to look after, to manage, carry on J v.113 ( = anugacchati); PvA 78. Anutīre
Anutīre
(adv.) [anu + tīre, loc. of tīra] along side or near the bank (of a river) Sn 18 ( = tīra -- samīpe SnA 28). Cp. anu A b. Anuttara
Anuttara
(adj.) [an + uttara] "nothing higher", without a superior, incomparable, second to none, unsurpassed, excellent, preeminent Sn 234 ( = adhikassa kassaci abhāvato KhA 193), 1003; Dh 23, 55 (= asadisa appaṭibhāga DhA i.423); Pv iv.35 2 (dhamma); Dhs 1294; DA i.129; PvA 1, 5, 6, 18, etc. Anuttariya
Anuttariya
(nt.) [abstr. fr. anuttara] preeminence, superi- ority, excellency; highest ideal, greatest good. They are mentioned as sets of 3 (viz. dassana˚, paṭipadā˚, vimutti˚) at D iii.219, or of 6 (viz. dassana˚, savana˚, lābha˚, sikkhā˚, pāricariyā˚, anussata˚) at D iii.250, 281; A i.22; iii.284, 325 sq., 452; Ps i.5. Cp. M i.235; A v.37. See also ānuttariya. Anuttāna
Anuttāna
(adj.) [an + uttāna] not (lying) open, not exposed; fig. unexplained, unclear J vi.247. Anutthunā
Anutthunā
(f.) [fr. anutthunāti] wailing, crying, lamenting Nd1 167 ( = vācāpalāpa vippalāpa etc.). Anutthunāti
Anutthunāti
[anu + thunati (thunāti); anu + stan] to wail, moan, deplore, lament, bewail D iii.86; Sn 827 (cp. Nd1 167); Dh 156; J iii.115; v.346, 479; DhA iii.133; PvA 60 (wrongly applied for ghāyati, of the fire of conscience). Anutrāsin
Anutrāsin
(adj.) [an + utrāsin] not terrified, at ease Th 1, 864. Anuthera
Anuthera
[anu + thera] an inferior Thera, one who comes next to the elder Vin ii.212 (therânutherā Th. & next in age). Anudadāti
Anudadāti
[anu + dadāti] to concede, grant, admit, fut. anudassati Miln 276, 375. Anudayati
Anudayati
(to sympathise with) see under anuddā. Anudassita
Anudassita
[pp. of anudasseti] manifested Miln 119. Anudahati
Anudahati
see anuḍahati. Anudiṭṭha
Anudiṭṭha
[pp. of anudisati] pointed out, appointed, dedi- cated, nt. consecration, dedication J v.393 (anudiṭṭha = asukassa nāma dassatī ti C.); Pv i.107 (= uddiṭṭha PvA 50). Anudiṭṭhi
Anudiṭṭhi
(f.) [anu + diṭṭhi] an "after -- view", sceptical view, speculation, heresy D i.12; M ii.228; S iii.45 sq.; Th 1, 754; Miln 325; DA i.103. attânudiṭṭhi (q. v.) a soul -- speculation. Anudisati
Anudisati
[anu + disati] to point out, direct, bid, address PvA 99 (aor. anudesi + anvesi). -- pp. anudiṭṭha (q. v.). Anudisā
Anudisā
(f.) [anu + disā] an intermediate point of ihe compass, often collectively for the usual 4 intermediate points D i.222; S i.122; iii.124. Anudīpeti
Anudīpeti
[anu + dīpeti] to explain Miln 227 (dhammâ- dhammaŋ). Anudūta
Anudūta
[anu + dūta] a person sent with another, a travelling companion Vin ii.19, 295; DhA ii.76, 78. Anudeva
Anudeva
see anvadeva. Anuddayatā
Anuddayatā
(f.) [abstr. to anuddayā] sympathy with ( -- ˚) compassion, kindness, favour, usually as par˚ kindness to or sympathy with other people S ii.218; v.169 (T. anudayatā); A iii.184; It 72; Vbh 356. Anuddayā
Anuddayā
(& anudayā) (f.) [anu + dayā] compassion, pity, mercy, care Vin ii.196; S i.204; ii.199; iv.323; A ii.176; iii.189; Pug 35 (anukampā); J i.147, 186, 214; PvA 70, 88, 181 ( = anukampā). In compn anudaya˚ e. g. ˚sampanna full of mercy J i.151, 262; PvA 66. Anuddā
Anuddā
(f.) [contracted form of anuddayā] = anuddayā Dhs 1056, where also the other abstr. formations anuddāyanā & anuddāyitattaŋ "care, forbearance & consideration"; DhsA 362 (anudayatī ti anuḍdā). Anuddhaŋseti
Anuddhaŋseti
[anu + dhaŋseti] to spoil, corrupt, degrade Vin iv.148 (expln. here in slightly diff. meaning = codeti vā codāpeti vā to reprove, scold, bring down); It 42. Usually in ster. phrase rāgo cittaŋ a. lust degrades the heart Vin iii.111; M i.26; S i.186; A i.266; ii.126; iii. 393 sq. -- pp. anuddhasta (q. v.). Anuddhata
Anuddhata
(adj.) [an + uddhata] not puffed up, not proud, unconceited calm, subdued Sn 850 ( = uddhacca -- virahita SnA 549, cp. anuṇṇata); It 30; Dh 363 (= nibbutacitta DhA iv.93); Vv 648; Pug 59. Anuddharin
Anuddharin
(adj.) [an + uddharin] not proud Sn 952 ( = anussukin SnA 569) see niṭṭhurin. -- 37 -- Anuddhasta
Anuddhasta
(adj.) [anu + dhasta, pp. of anuddhaŋseti, cp. Sk. apadhvasta] spoilt, corrupt, degraded M i.462 (citta); A ii.126 (id.). Anudhamma
Anudhamma
[anu + dhamma] 1. in compn. with dhamma as dhammânudhamma to be judged as a redupl. cpd. after the manner of cpds. mentioned under anu iv. & meaning "the Law in all its parts, the dhamma and what belongs to it, the Law in its fullness". For instances see dhamma C. iv. Freq. in phrase dh˚ -- ânudh˚ -- paṭipanna "one who masters the completeness of the Dh.", e. g. S ii.18; iii.163; It 81; Ps ii.189. -- 2. conformity or accordance with the Law, lawfulness, relation, essence, consistency, truth; in phrase dhammassa (c˚) anudhammaŋ vyākaroti to explain the truth of the Dh. Vin i.234; D i.161; M i.368, 482; S ii.33; iii.6; iv.51; v.7. See further M iii.30; Sn 963 (cp. Nd1 481 for exegesis). Also in cpd. ˚cārin living according to the Dhamma, living in truth S ii.81, 108; A ii.8; Dh 20 (cp. DhA i.158); Vv 317; Sn 69 (see Nd2 51). Anudhammatā
Anudhammatā
(f.) [abstr. to anudhamma) lawfulness, con- formity to the Dhamma A ii.46; Ps i.35, 36. Anudhāreti
Anudhāreti
[anu + dhāreti] to hold up DA i.61 (chattaŋ), cp. J 1.53, dhariyamāna. Anudhāvati
Anudhāvati
[anu + dhāvati] to run after, to chase, follow, persecute, pursue M i.474; S i.9; Dh 85; Th 1, 1174; Miln 253, 372. Anudhāvin
Anudhāvin
(adj. -- n.) [fr. anudhāvati] one who runs after S i.9, 117. Anunadī
Anunadī(
-- tire) along the bank of the river S iv.177 should be read anu nadītīre ( = anu prep. c. loc.; see under anu A). Anunamati
Anunamati
[anu + namati] to incline, bend (intrs.), give way Miln 372 (of a bow). Anunaya
Anunaya
[fr. anuneti] "leading along", friendliness, courtesy, falling in with, fawning D iii.254 (˚saŋyojana); A iv.7 sq. (id.) M i.191; Dhs 1059; Vbh 145; Nett 79; combd. w. opp. paṭigha (repugnance) at Miln 44, 122, 322. Anunayana
Anunayana
(nt.) [fr. anuneti] fawning DhsA 362. Anunāsika
Anunāsika
(adj.) [anu + nāsā + ika] nasal; as tt. g. the sound ŋ; in ˚lopa apocope of the nasal ŋ VvA 114, 253, 275, 333. Anunīta
Anunīta
(adj.) [pp. of anuneti] led, induced S iv.71; Sn 781. Anunetar
Anunetar
[n. ag. fr. anuneti] one who reconciles or con- ciliates Ps ii.194 (netā vinetā anunetā). Anuneti
Anuneti
[anu + neti] to conciliate, appease, win over, flatter S i.232 (ppr. anunayamāna); pp. anunīta (q. v.). Anupa
Anupa
see anūpa. Anupakampati
Anupakampati
[anu + pakampati] to shake, move, to be unsteady Th 1, 191 = Ud 41. Anupakkama
Anupakkama
[an + upakkama] not attacking, instr. ˚ena not by attack (from external enemies) Vin ii.195. Anupakkuṭṭha
Anupakkuṭṭha
(adj.) [an + upak˚] blameless, irreproachahle D i.113; Vin iv.160; Sn p. 115; DA i.281. Anupakkhandati
Anupakkhandati
[anu + pa + khandati] to push oneself forward, to encroach on D i.122 ( = anupavisati DA i.290); ger. anupakhajja pushing oneself in, intruding Vin ii.88 (= antopavisati), 213; iv.43 (= anupavisati); M i.151, 469; S iii.113; Vism 18. Anupakhajjati
Anupakhajjati
[den. fr. anupakhajja, ger. of anupakkhan- dati] to encroach, intrude Vin v.163. Anupagacchati
Anupagacchati
[anu + pa + gacchati] to go or return into (c. acc.) D i.55 (anupeti +). Anupaghāta
Anupaghāta
[an + upaghāta] not hurting Dh 185 (anūpa˚ metri causa; expld. by anupahananañ cɔeva anupaghātanañ ca DhA iii.238). Anupacita
Anupacita
(adj.) [anu + pa + cita, pp. of anupacināti] heaped up, accumulated ThA 56. Anupacināti
Anupacināti
[an + upacināti] not to observe or notice J v.339 ( = anoloketi C.; v. l. anapaviṇāti). Anupajagghati
Anupajagghati
[anu + pa + jagghati] to laugh at, to deride, mock over A i.198 (v. l. anusaŋ˚). Anupajjati
Anupajjati
[anu + pad] to follow, accompany J iv.304. - pp. anupanna (q. v.). Anupañcāhaŋ
Anupañcāhaŋ
(adv.) [anu + pañcā + ahaŋ] every five days PvA 139 (+ anudasāhaŋ). Anupaññatti
Anupaññatti
(f.) [anu + paññatti] a supplementary regula- tion or order Vin ii.286; v.2 sq. Anupaṭipāti
Anupaṭipāti
(f.) [anu + paṭipāti] succession; as adv. in order, successively DA i.277 (kathā = anupubbikathā); DhA iii.340 (anupaṭipāṭiyā = anupubbena); Vism 244. Anupaṭṭhita
Anupaṭṭhita
(adj.) [anu + pa + ṭhita] setting out after, following, attacking J v.452. Anupatati
Anupatati
[anu + patati] 1. to follow, go after, J vi.555 anupatiyāsi Subj.). -- 2. to fall upon, to befall, attack Vin iii.106 = M i.364; S i.23 (read ˚patanti for ˚patatanti) = Dh 221 (dukkhā); Th 1, 41 = 1167 (of lightning). -> pp. anupatita (q. v.). Cp. also anupāta & anupātin. Anupatita
Anupatita
[pp. of anupatati] "befallen", affected with, op- pressed by ( -- ˚) S ii.173 (dukkha˚); iii.69 (id.); Sn 334 (pamāda˚). Anupatitatta
Anupatitatta
(nt.) [abstr. of anupatita] the fact of being attacked by, being a victim of ( -- ˚) SnA 339. Anupatta
Anupatta
(anuppatta) [pp. of anupāpuṇāti; cp. Sk. anu- prāpta] (having) attained, received, got to (c. acc), reached D i.87 -- 111; ii 2; It 38; Sn 027, 635; Dh 386, 403; Pv iv.166; PvA 59 (dukkhaŋ), 242. In phrase addhagata vayo -- anuppatta having reached old age, e. g. Vin ii.188; D i.48; Sn pp. 50, 92; PvA 149. Anupatti
Anupatti
(anuppatti) (f.) [anu + patti] attainment, accom- plishment, wish, desire (fulfilled), ideal S i.46, 52. Anupathe
Anupathe
at J v.302 should be read as anu pathe by the way at the wayside; anu to be taken as prep. c. loc. (see anu A). C. explns. as janghamagga -- mahāmaggānaŋ antare. Anupada
Anupada
[cp. Sk. anupadaŋ adv., anu + pada] 1. the "after- foot", i. e. second foot a verse, also a mode of reciting, where the second foot is recited without the first one Vin iv.15 (cp. 355); Miln 340 (anupadena anupadaŋ katheti). -- 2. (adj.) (following) on foot, at every, step, continuous, repeated, in ˚dhamma -- vipassanā uninterrupted contemplation M iii.25; ˚vaṇṇanā word -- by -- word explanation DhsA 168. As nt. adv. ˚ŋ close behind, immediately after (c. gen.) J ii.230 (tassânupadaŋ agamāsi); vi.422. Esp. freq. in combn. padânupadaŋ (adv.) foot after foot, i. e. in the footsteps, immediately behind J iii. 504; vi.555; DhA i.69; ii.38. Anupadātar
Anupadātar
(anuppadātar) [n. ag. of anupadeti] one who gives, or one who sets forth, effects, designs D i.4 (cp. DA i.74); A ii.209. Anupadāna
Anupadāna
(anuppadāna) (nt.) [anu + pa + dāna, cp. anu- padeti] giving, administering, furnishing, the giving of ( -- ˚) D i.12 (cp. DA i.98; both read anuppādāna); J iii.205; Miln 315. -- 38 -- Anupadinna
Anupadinna
(anuppadinna) [pp. of anupadeti] given, handed over, furnished, dedicated Pv i.512. Anupadeti
Anupadeti
(anuppadeti) [anu + pa + dadāti] to give out, give as a present, hand over; to design, set forth, undertake S iii.131 (Pot. anuppadajjuŋ); M i.416 (Pot. anupadajjeyya. see dadāti i.3); Miln 210 (˚deti). fut. ˚dassati (see dadāti i.1); D iii.92; S iv.303 (v. l. SS for T. anusarissati); A iii.43; Sn 983. ger. ˚datvā SnA 35. inf. ˚dātuŋ A i.117. pp. ˚dinna (q. v.). Anupaddava
Anupaddava
(adj.) [an + upaddava] free from danger, uninjured, safe Vin ii.79 = 124 (+ anītika); iii.162; Dh 338; DhA iv.48; PvA 250 (expln. for siva). Anupadhāreti
Anupadhāreti
[an + upadhār˚] to disregard, to heed not, to neglect DhA iv.197; VvA 260. Anupadhika
Anupadhika
(adj.) [an + upadhi + ka] free from attach- ment (see upadhi) Vin i 36 (anupadhīka); D. iii 112 (anupadhika opp. to sa -- upadhika); Sn 1057 (anūpadhīka T., but Nd2 anūpadhika. with ū for u metri causa). Anupanna
Anupanna,
[pp. of anupajjati] gone into, reached, attained Sn 764 (māradheyya˚). Anupabandhati
Anupabandhati
(anuppa˚) [anu + pa + bandhati] to follow immediately, to be incessant, to keep on (without stopping), to continue Miln 132. -- Caus. ˚āpeti ibid. Anupabandhanatā
Anupabandhanatā
(anuppa˚) (f.) [abstr. to prec.] non- stopping, not ceasing Miln 132. Anupabandhanā
Anupabandhanā
(anuppa˚) (f.) [abstr. fr. anupabandhati] continuance, incessance, Pug 18 = Vbh 357 (in exegesis of upanāha). Anupabbajjā
Anupabbajjā
(f.) [anu + pabbajjā, cp. BSk. anupravrajati Divy 61] giving up worldly life in imitation of another S v.67 = It 107. Anupaya
Anupaya
(adj.) [an + upaya] unattached, "aloof" S i.181 (akankha apiha +). Anuparigacchati
Anuparigacchati
[anu + pari + gacchati] to walk round and round, to go round about (c. acc.) Vin iii.119; S i.75 (ger. ˚gamma); Sn 447 (aor. ˚pariyagā = parito parito agamāsi Sn A 393); J iv.267. Anuparidhāvati
Anuparidhāvati
[anu + pari + dhāvati] to run up & down or to move round & round (cp. anuparivattati) S. iii.150 (khīlan). Anupariyāti
Anupariyāti
[auu + pari + yāti] to go round about, to go about, to wander or travel all over (c. acc.) Vin ii.111; S i.102, 124; Th 1, 1235 (˚pariyeti), 1250 (id. to search); Pv iii.34 ( = anuvicarati); Miln 38; PvA 92 (˚yāyitvā, ger.) 217. Anupariyāya
Anupariyāya
(adj) [adjectivised ger. of anupariyāti] going round, encircling, in ˚patha the path leading or going round the city D ii.83 = S iv 194 = A v.195; A iv.107. Anuparivattati
Anuparivattati
[anu + pari + vṛt] to go or move round, viz. 1. to deal with, be engaged in, perform, worship Vin iii.307 (ādiccaŋ); D i.240; PvA 97. -- 2. to meet Miln 204 (Devadatto ca Bodhisatto ca ekato anuparivattanti). -- 3. to move round & round, move on and on, keep on rolling (c. acc.), evolve S. iii.150 (anuparidhāvati +) Miln 253 (anudhāvati + kāyan). Anuparivatti
Anuparivatti
(f.) ( -- ˚) [anu + parivatti] dealing with, oc- cupation, connection with S iii.16. Anuparivāreti
Anuparivāreti
[anu + pari + vāreti] to surround, stand by, attend on (c. acc.) Vin i.338; M i.153; DhA 1.55. Anupariveṇiyaŋ
Anupariveṇiyaŋ
[anu + pariveṇiyaŋ = loc. of pariveṇi] should be written anu pariveṇiyaŋ ("in every cell, cell by cell"), anu here functioning as prep. c. loc. (see anu A) Vin i.80, 106. Anuparisakkati
Anuparisakkati
[anu + pari + sakkati] to move round, to be occupied with, take an interest in (c. acc.) S iv.312 (v.l. ˚vattati). Anuparisakkana
Anuparisakkana
(nt.) [fr. anuparisakkati] dealing with, interest in S iv.312 (v.l. ˚vattana). Anupariharati
Anupariharati
[anu + pari + harati] to surround, enfold, embrace M i.306. Anupalitta
Anupalitta
(adj.) [an + upalitta] unsmeared, unstained, free from taint M i.319, 386 (in verse); as ˚ūpalitta in verse of Sn & Dh: Sn 211 ( = lepānaŋ abhāvā SnA 261), 392, 468, 790, 845; Dh 353. Anupavajja
Anupavajja
(adj.) [grd. of an + upavadati] blameless, without fault, Miln 391. Anupavattaka
Anupavattaka
(anuppa˚) (adj.) to anupavatteti] one who succeeds (another) King or Ruler in the ruling of an empire (cakkaŋ) Miln 342, 362; SnA 454. See also anuvattaka. Anupavatteti
Anupavatteti
(anuppa˚) [anu + pa + vatteti, fr. vṛt] to keep moving on after, to continue rolling, with cakkaŋ to wield supreme power after, i.e. in succession or imitation of a predecessor S i.191; Miln 362. See also anuvatteti. Anupavāda
Anupavāda
[an + upavāda] not blaming or finding fault, abstaining from grumbling or abuse Dh 185 (anūpa˚ in metre; expld at DhA iii.238 as anupavādanañ c'eva anupavādāpanañ ca "not scolding as well as not inciting others to grumbling"); adj. ˚vādaka Pug 60, & ˚vādin M i.360. Anupaviṭṭha
Anupaviṭṭha
(anuppa˚) [pp. of anupavisati] entered, gone or got into, fallen into (c. acc.) Miln 270, 318 sq., 409 (coming for shelter); PvA 97, 152 (Gangānadiŋ a. nadī: flowing into the G.). Anupaviṭṭhatā
Anupaviṭṭhatā
(f.) [abstr. to anupaviṭṭha] the fact of having entered Miln 257. Anupavisati
Anupavisati
[anu + pa + visati] to go into, to enter Dh i.290; VvA 42 ( = ogāhati). -- pp. ˚paviṭṭha (q.v.) -> Caus. ˚paveseti (q.v.). Anupavecchati
Anupavecchati
(anuppa˚) [see under pavecchati] to give, give over to, offer up, present, supply Vin i.221 (˚pavacchati); D i.74 ( = pavesati DA i.218); ii.78; M i.446; iii.133; A ii.64; iii.26 (v.l. ˚vacch˚); J v.394; Sn 208 (v.l. ˚vacch˚); SnA 256 (= anupavesati); PvA 28. Anupaveseti
Anupaveseti
[anu + pa + vis, cp. BSk. anupraveśayati Divy 238] to make enter, to give over, to supply SnA 256 ( = ˚pavecchati). Anupasankamati
Anupasankamati1
[anu + pa + saŋkamati] to go along up to (c. acc.) PvA 179. Anupasankamati
Anupasankamati2
[an + upasank˚] not to go to. not to approach DhA ii.30 (+ apayirupāsati). Anupasaṇṭhapanā
Anupasaṇṭhapanā
(f.) [an + upasaṇṭhapanā] not stopping, incessance, continuance Pug 18 (but id. p. at Vbh 357 has anusansandanā instead); cp. anupabandhanā. Anupassaka
Anupassaka
(adj.) [fr. anupassati] observing, viewing, contemplating Th 1, 420. Anupassati
Anupassati
[anu + passati] to look at, contemplate, observe Sn 477; Ps i.57, 187; Sn A 505. -- 39 -- Anupassanā
Anupassanā
(f.) [abstr. of anupassati, cf. Sk. anudarśana] looking at, viewing, contemplating, consideration, realisation S v.178 sq., Sn p. 140; Ps i.10, 20, 96; ii.37, 41 sq., 67 sq.; Vbh 194. See anicca˚, anatta˚, dukkha˚. Anupassin
Anupassin
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. anupassati] viewing, observing, realising S ii.84 sq., v.294 sq., 311 sq., 345, Dh 7, 253; Sn 255, 728; Ps i.191 sq.; Vbh 193 sq., 236; Sdhp 411. Anupahata
Anupahata1
[anu + pa + hata, pp. of anu + pa + han] thrown up, blown up Miln 274. Anupahata
Anupahata2
(adj.) [an + upahata] not destroyed, not spoilt DhA ii.33 (˚jivhapasāda). Anupāta
Anupāta
[of anupatati] attack in speech, contest, reproach A i.161 (vāda˚). Anupātin
Anupātin
(adj.) [fr. anupāta] 1. following, indulging in J iii.523 (khaṇa˚). -- 2. attacking, hurting J v.399. Anupādaŋ
Anupādaŋ
(adv.) [anu + pāda] at the foot Vism 182 (opp. anusīsaŋ at the head). Anupādā
Anupādā
[ger. of an + upādiyati = anupādāya] anupādā- niya, anupādāya, anupādiyāna, anupādiyiṭvā see upādiyati. Anupādāna & Anupādi
Anupādāna
& Anupādi see upādāna & upādi. Anupāpita
Anupāpita
[pp. of anupāpeti] having been lead to or made to reach, attained, found Miln 252. Anupāpuṇāti
Anupāpuṇāti
(anuppā˚) [anu + pāpuṇāti] to reach, attain, get to, find S i.105; ger. anuppatvāna Pv ii.924 ( = ˚pāpuṇitvā PvA 123). -- pp. anupatta (q. v.). -- Caus. anupāpeti (q. v.). Anupāpeti
Anupāpeti
[Caus. of anupāpuṇāti] to make reach or attain, to lead to, to give or make find J vi.88; Cp. xi. 4 (aor. anupāpayi); Miln 276. -- pp. anupāpita (q. v.). Anupāya
Anupāya
[an + upāya] wrong means J i.256; Sdhp 405. Anupāyāsa
Anupāyāsa
see upāyāsa. Anupālaka
Anupālaka
(adj.) [anu + pālaka] guarding, preserving Sdhp 474. Anupālana
Anupālana
(nt.) [fr. anupāleti] maintenance, guarding, keeping Dpvs iii.2. Anupāleti
Anupāleti
[anu + pāleti] to safeguard, warrant, maintain Miln 160 (santatiŋ). Anupāhana
Anupāhana
(adj.) [an + upāhana] without shoes J vi.552. Anupiya
Anupiya
(anuppiya) (adj) [anu + piya] flattering, plessant, nt. pleasantness, flattery, in ˚bhāṇin one who flatters I) iii.185; J ii.390; v.360; and ˚bhāṇitar id. Vbh 352. Anupīḷaŋ
Anupīḷaŋ
at PvA 161 is to be read anuppīḷan (q. v.). Anupucchati
Anupucchati
[anu + pucchati] to ask or inquire after (c. acc.) Sn 432, 1113. -- pp. anupuṭṭha (q. v.). Anupuṭṭha
Anupuṭṭha
[pp. of anupucchati] asked Sn 782 ( = pucchita SnA 521). Anupubba
Anupubba
(adj.) [anu + pubba] following in one's turn, successive, gradual, by and by, regular Vin ii.237 (mahāsamuddo a˚ -- ninno etc.); D i.184; Sn 511; J v.155 (regularly formed, of ūrū). Cases adverbially: anupubbena (instr.) by and by, in course of time, later, gradually Vin i.83; Dh 239 ( = anupaṭipāṭiyā DhA iii.340); Pug 41, 64; J ii.2, 105; iii.127; Miln 22; PvA 19. anupubbaso (abl. cp. Sk. anupūrvaśaḥ) in regular order Sn 1000. -> In compn. both anupubba˚ & anupubbi˚ (q. v.).

-- kāraṇa gradual performance, graded practice M i.446. -- nirodha successive passing away, fading away in regular succession, i. e. in due course. The nine stages of this process are the same as those mentioned under ˚vihāra, & are enumd. as such at D iii.266, 290; A iv.409, 456; Ps i.35. -- vihāra a state of gradually ascending stages, by means of which the highest aim of meditation & trance is attained, viz. complete cessation of all consciousness. These are 9 stages, consisting of the 4 jhānas, the 4 āyatanāni & as the crowning phrase "saññā -- vedayitanirodha" (see jhāna1). Enumd. as such in var. places, esp. at the foll.: D ii.156; iii.265, 290; A iv.410; Nd2 under jhāna; Ps i.5; Miln 176. -- sikkhā regular instruction or study (dhammavinaye) M i.479; iii.1 (+ ˚kiriyā ˚paṭipadā). Anupubbaka
Anupubbaka
(adj.) = anupubba, in cpd. pubbânupubbaka all in succession or in turn, one by one (on nature of this kind of cpd. see anu B iv.) Vin i.20 (˚ānaŋ kulānaŋ puttā the sons of each clan, one by one). Anupubbata
Anupubbata
(nt.) [fr. anupubba] acting in turn, gradation, succession Vv 6414 ( = anukūla kiriyā i. e. as it pleases VvA 280) cp. ānupubbatā. Anupubbikathā
Anupubbi
-- kathā (f.) [anupubba + kathā, formation like dhammi -- kathā] a gradual instruction, graduated sermon, regulated exposition of the ever higher values of four subjects (dāna -- kathā, sīla˚, sagga˚, magga˚) i. e. charity, righteousness, the heavens, and the Path. Bdhgh. explains the term as anupubbikathā nāma dānânantaraŋ sīlaŋ sīlânantaro saggo saggânantaro maggo ti etesaŋ dīpana -- kathā" (DA i.277). Vin i.15, 18; ii.156, 192; D i.110; ii.41; M i.379; J i.8; VvA 66, 197, 208; DA i.308; DhA i.6; Miln 228. -- The spelling is frequently ānupubbikathā (as to lengthening of anu see anu Note (a)), e. g. at D i.110; ii.41; M i.379; J i.8; Miln 228. Anupekkhati
Anupekkhati
[anu + pekkhati] 1. to concentrate oneself on, to look carefully A iii.23. -- 2. to consider, to show consideration for, Nd2 50 (ppr. ˚amāna = anukampamāna). -- Caus. anupekkheti to cause some one to consider carefully Vin ii.73. Anupekkhanatā
Anupekkhanatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. anupekkhana, see anupek- khatī] concentration (of thought) Dhs 8, 85, 284, 372. Anupeti
Anupeti
[anu + pa + i] to go into D i.55 (+ anupagacchati) S iii.207; DA i.165. Anupeseti
Anupeseti
[anu + pa + iṣ] to send forth after Miln 36. Anuposathikaŋ
Anuposathikaŋ
see anvaḍḍhamāsaŋ. Anuposiya
Anuposiya
(adj.) [grd. of anu + puṣ] to be nourished or fostered Sdhp 318. Anuppa˚
Anuppa˚
in all combns. of anu + ppa see under headings anupa˚. Anuppadajjuŋ
Anuppadajjuŋ
(S iii.131) see anupadeti. Anuppanna
Anuppanna
(˚uppāda, ˚uppādeti) see uppanna etc. Anuppīḷa
Anuppīḷa
(adj.) [an + uppīḷa] not molested, not oppressed (by robbers etc.) not ruined, free from harm J iii.443; v.378; VvA 351; PvA 161. Anupharaṇa
Anupharaṇa
(nt.) [anu + pharaṇa] flashing through, per- vading Miln 148. Anuphusīyati
Anuphusīyati
[anu + phusīyati, cp. Sk. pruṣāyati, Caus. of pruṣ] to sprinkle, moisten, make wet J v.242 (himaŋ; C. pateyya). Anubajjhati
Anubajjhati
at PvA 56 is faulty reading for anubandh- ati (q. v.). Anubaddha
Anubaddha
[pp. of anubandhati] following, standing be- hind (piṭṭhito) D i.1, 226. Anubandha
Anubandha
[anu + bandh] bondage M iii.170; It 91. Anubandhati
Anubandhati
[anu + bandhati] to follow, run after, pursue J i.195; ii.230; vi.452 ( = anujavati); PvA 56 (substitute for anubajjhanti!), 103, 155. aor. ˚bandhi J ii.154, 353; iii.504; PvA 260 (= anvāgacchi). ger. ˚bandhitvā J i.254. grd. ˚bandhitabba M i.106. -- pp. anubaddha (q. v.). -- 40 -- Anubandhana
Anubandhana
(nt.) [fr. anubandhati] that which connects or follows, connection, consequence J vi.526 (˚dukkha). Anubala
Anubala
(nt.) [anu + bala] rear -- guard, retinue, suite, in ˚ŋ bhavati to accompany or follow somebody Miln 125. Anubujjhati
Anubujjhati
[anu + bujjhati, Med. of budh, cp. Sk. ava- budhyate] to remember, recollect J iii.387 (with avabujjhati in prec. verse). Anubujjhana
Anubujjhana
(nt.) [fr. anubujjhati] awakening, recognition Ps i.18 (bujjhana +). Anubuddha
Anubuddha
[pp. of anu + bodhati] 1. awakened (act. & pass.), recognised, conceived, seen, known D ii.123 (˚ā ime dhammā); S i.137 (dhammo vimalenɔ ânubuddho) ii.203; iv.188; A ii.1; iii.14; iv.105; SnA 431. In phrase buddhânubuddha (as to nature of cpd. see anu B iv.) either "fully awakened (enlightened)" or "wakened by the wake" (Mrs. Rh. D.) Th 1, 679 = 1246. -- 2. a lesser Buddha, inferior than the Buddha DA i.40. Cp. buddhânubuddha. Anubodha
Anubodha
[anu + budh] awakening; perception, recogni- tion, understanding S i.126 (?) = A v.46 (anubodhiŋ as aor. of anubodhati?); Pug 21; Miln 233. Freq. in compn. ananubodha (adj.) not understanding, not knowing the truth S ii.92; iii.261; v.431; A ii.1; iv.105; Dhs 390, 1061; VvA 321 (= anavabodha) and duranubodha (adj.) hard to understand, difficult to know D i.12, 22; S i.136. Anubodhati
Anubodhati
[anu + budh] to wake up, to realise, perceive, understand; aor. anubodhiŋ A v.46 (?) = S i.126 (anubodhaŋ). -- Caus. ˚bodheti to awaken, fig. to make see to instruct J vi.139 (˚ayamāna) -- pp. anubuddha (q. v.). Anubodhana
Anubodhana
(nt.) [fr. anubodhati] awakening, understanding, recognition Ps i.18 (bodhana +). Anubbajati
Anubbajati
[anu + vraj] to go along, wander, follow, tread (a path) J iv.399 (maggaŋ = pabbajati C.). Anubbata
Anubbata
(adj.) [Vedic anuvrata, anu + vata] subject to the will of another, obedient, faithful, devoted J iii.521; vi.557. Anubbillāvitatta
Anubbillāvitatta
see ubbill˚. Anubyañjana
Anubyañjana
see anuvyañjana. Anubrūhita
Anubrūhita
[pp. of anubrūheti] strengthened with ( -- ˚), full of Ps i.167. Anubrūheti
Anubrūheti
[brūheti] to do very much or often, to practice, frequent, to be fond of (c. acc.), foster S i.178 (anubrūhaye); M iii.187 (id., so read for manu˚), Th 2, 163 (˚ehi); Cp. iii.12 (saŋvegaŋ anubrūhayiŋ aor.); J iii.191 (suññāgāraŋ). Often in phrase vivekaŋ anubrūheti to devote oneself to detachment or solitude, e.g. J i.9 (inf. ˚brūhetuŋ); iii.31 (˚brūhessāmi), Dh 75 (˚brūhaye = ˚brūheyya vaḍḍheyya DhA ii.103). -- pp. anubrūhita (q.v.) Cp. also brūhana. Anubhaṇanā
Anubhaṇanā
(f.) [anu + bhaṇana] talking to, admonition, scolding Vin ii.88 (anuvadanā +). Anubhavati & Anubhoti
Anubhavati
& Anubhoti [anu + bhavati] to come to or by, to undergo, suffer (feel), get, undertake, partake in, experience D i.129; ii.12 (˚bhonti); M ii.204; A i.61 (atthaŋ ˚bhoti to have a good result); J vi.97 (˚bhoma); Pv i.1011 (˚bhomi vipākaŋ); PvA 52 (˚issati = vedissati); Sdhf 290. Esp. freq. with dukkhaŋ to suffer pain, e.g. PvA i.1110 (˚bhonti); PvA 43, 68, 79 etc. (cp. anubhavana). -- ppr. med. ˚bhavamāna J i.50; aor. ˚bhavi PvA 75 (sampattiŋ); ger. ˚bhavitvā J iv.1; PvA 4 (sampattiŋ), 67 (dukkhaŋ), 73 (sampattiŋ); grd. ˚bhaviyāna (in order to receive) Pv ii.85 (= anubhavitvā PvA 109). -> Pass. anubhūyati & ˚bhavīyati to be undergone or being experienced; ppr. ˚bhūyamāna PvA 8, 159 (mayā a. = anubhūta), 214 (attanā by him) & ˚bhavīyamāna PvA 33 (dukkhaŋ). -- pp. anubhūta (q.v.). Anubhavana
Anubhavana
(nt.) [fr. anubhavati] experiencing, suffering; sensation or physical sensibility (cf. Cpd. 229, 2321) Nett 28 (iṭṭhâniṭṭh -- ânubhavana -- lakkhanā vedanā "feeling is characterised by the experiencing of what is pleasant and unpleasant"); Miln 60 (vedayita -- lakkhaṇā vedanā anubhavana -- lakkhaṇā ca); PvA 152 (kamma -- vipāka˚). Esp. in combn. with dukkha˚ suffering painful sensations, e.g. at J iv.3; Miln 181; DhA iv.75; PvA 52. Anubhāga
Anubhāga
[anu + bhāga] a secondary or inferior part, (after -- )share, what is left over Vin ii.167. Anubhāyati
Anubhāyati
[anu + bhāyati] to be afraid of J vi.302 (kissa nvɔ ânubhāyissaŋ, so read for kissânu˚). Anubhāva
Anubhāva
[fr. anubhavati] orig. meaning "experience, con- comitance" and found only in cpds. as -- ˚, in meaning "experiencing the sensation of or belonging to, experience of, accordance with", e.g. maha˚ sensation of greatness, rājâ˚ s. belonging to a king, what is in accordance with kingship, i. e. majesty. Through preponderance of expressions of distinction there arises the meaning of anubhāva as "power, majesty, greatness, splendour etc." & as such it was separated from the 1st component and taken as ānubhāva with ā instead of a, since the compositional character had obliterated the character of the a. As such (ānubhāva abs.) found only in later language. -- (1) anubhāva ( -- ˚): mahānubhāva (of) great majesty, eminence, power S i.146 sq.; ii.274; iv.323; Sn p. 93; Pv ii.112; PvA 76. deva˚ of divine power or majesty D ii.12; devatā˚ id. J i.168; dibba˚ id. PvA 71, 110. rājā˚ kingly splendour, pomp D i.49; J iv 247; PvA 279 etc. -- anubhāvena (instr. -- ˚) in accordance with, by means of J ii.200 (angavijjā˚); PvA 53 (iddh˚), 77 (kamma˚), 148 (id.), 162 (rāja˚), 184 (dāna˚), 186 (puñña˚). yathânubhāvaŋ (adv.) in accordance with (me), as much as (1 can); after ability, according to power S i.31; Vv 15 ( = yathābalaŋ VvA 25). -- (2) ānubhāva majesty power, magnificence, glory, splendour J v.10, 456; Pv ii.811; VvA 14; PvA 43, 122, 272. See also ānu˚. Anubhāvatā
Anubhāvatā
(f.) [ = anubhāva + tā] majesty, power S i.156 (mahâ˚). Anubhāsati
Anubhāsati
[anu + bhāsati] to speak after, to repeat D i.104; Miln 345; DA i.273. Anubhūta
Anubhūta
[pp. of anubhavati] (having or being) experienced, suffered, enjoyed PvA ii.1218. nt. suffering, experience J i.254; Miln 78, 80. Anubhūyamānatta
Anubhūyamānatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. ppr. Pass. of anubhavati] the fact of having to undergo, experiencing PvA 103. Anuma
Anuma
( -- dassika) see anoma˚. Anumagge
Anumagge
at J v.201 should be read anu magge along the road, by the way; anu here used as prep. c. loc. (see anu A b). Anumajjati
Anumajjati
[anu + majjati] 1. to strike along, to stroke, to touch DA i.276 ( = anumasati). -- 2. to beat, thresh, fig. to thresh ont J vi.548; Miln 90. -- Pass. anumajjīyati Miln 275 (cp. p. 428). Anumajjana
Anumajjana
(nt.) [abstr. fr. anumajjati] threshing out, pounding up (Dhs. trsl. 11), always used with ref. to the term vicāra (q.v.) Miln 62; DhsA 114; DA i.63, 122. Anumajjha
Anumajjha
(adj.) [anu + majjha] mediocre, without going to extremes J iv.192; v.387. Anumaññati
Anumaññati
[anu + maññati] to assent, approve, give leave Th 1, 72. -- pp. anumata (q.v.). -- 41 -- Anumata
Anumata
[pp. of anumaññati] approved of, given consent to, finding approval, given leave D i.99 ( = anuññāta DA i.267); J v.399 (= muta); Miln 185, 212, 231, 275; PvA 64 (= annuññāta). Anumati
Anumati
(f.) [from anumaññati] consent, permission, agree- ment, assent, approval Vin ii.294, 301, 306; D. i.137, 143; Dpvs iv.47, Cf. v.18; DA i.297; VvA 17, PvA 114. Anumatta
Anumatta
see aṇu˚. Anumasati
Anumasati
[anu + masati] to touch D i.106 ( = anumajjati DA i.276). Anumāna
Anumāna
[fr. anu + man] inference Miln 330 (naya +), 372, 413; Sdhp 74. Anumitta
Anumitta
[anu + mitta] a secondary friend, a follower. acquaintance J v.77. Anumināti
Anumināti
[cf. Sk. anumāti, anu + mināti from mi, Sk. minoti, with confusion of roots mā & mi] to observe, draw an inference M i.97; PvA 227 (˚anto + nayaŋ nento). See also anumīyati. Anumīyati
Anumīyati
[Sk. anumīyate, Pass. of anu + mā, measure, in sense of Med.] to observe, conclude or infer from S iii.36. Cp. anumināti. Anumodaka
Anumodaka
(adj.) [fr. anumodati] one who enjoys, one who is glad of or thankful for (c. acc.) Vin v.172; PvA 122; Sdhf 512. Anumodati
Anumodati
[anu + modati] to find satisfaction in (acc.), to rejoice in, be thankful for (c. acc.), appreciate, benefit from, to be pleased, to enjoy Vin ii.212 (bhattagge a. to say grace after a meal); S ii.54; A iii.50 (˚modanīya); iv.411; Dh 177 (ppr. ˚modamāna); It 78; Pv ii.919 (dānaŋ ˚modamāna = enjoying, gladly receiving); 1,54 (anumodare = are pleased; pitisomanassajātā honti PvA 27); J ii.112; PvA 19, 46, 81, 201) imper. modāhi); Sdhp. 501 sq. -- pp. anumodita (q.v.). Anumodana
Anumodana
(nt.) [fr. anumodati] "according to taste", i.e. satisfaction, thanks, esp. after a meal or after receiving gifts = to say grace or benediction, blessing, thanksgiving. In latter sense with dadāti (give thanks for = loc.), karoti (= Lat. gratias agere) or vacati (say or tell thanks): ˚ŋ datvā PvA 89; ˚ŋ katvā J i.91; DhA iii.170, 172; VvA 118; PvA 17, 47; ˚ŋ vatvā VvA 40 (pānīyadāne for the gift of water), 295, 306 etc. ˚ŋ karoti also "to do a favour" PvA 275. Cp. further DhA i.198 (˚gāthā verses expressing thanks, benediction); ii.97 (Satthāraŋ ˚ŋ yāciŋsu asked his blessing); PvA 23 (˚atthaŋ in order to thank), 26 (id.), 121, 141 (katabhatta˚), 142; Sdhp 213, 218, 516. Anumodita
Anumodita
[pp. of anumodati] enjoyed, rejoiced in PvA 77. Anummatta
Anummatta
(adj.) [an + ummatta] not out of mind, sane, of sound mind Miln 122; Sdhp 205. Anuyanta
Anuyanta
at A v.22 is doubtful reading (v.l. anuyutta). The meaning is either "inferior to, dependent on, a subject of, a vassal" or "attending on". The explanation may compare Sk. anuyātaŋ attendance [anu + yā, cp. anuyāyin] or Sk. yantṛ ruler [yam], in which latter case anu -- yantṛ would be "an inferior ruler" and P. yanta would represent the n. a.g. yantā as a -- stem. The v. l. is perhaps preferable as long as other passages with anuyanta are not found (see anuyutta 2). Anuyāgin
Anuyāgin
(adj) [fr. anu + yaj] offering after the example of another D i.142. Anuyāta
Anuyāta
[pp. of anuyāti] gone through or after, followed, pursued S ii.105 (magga); A v.236; It 29; Miln 217. Anuyāti
Anuyāti
(& anuyāyati) [anu + yā] 1. to go after, to follow J vi.49 (fut. ˚yissati), 499 (yāyantaŋ anuyāyati = anugacchati C). -- 2. to go along by, to go over, to visit Miln 391 (˚yāyati). -- pp. anuyāta (q. v.). See also anusaŋyāyati. Anuyāyin
Anuyāyin
(adj.) [cp. Sk. anuyāyin, anu + yā] going after, following, subject to (gen.) Sn 1017 (anânuyāyin); J vi.309; Miln 284. Anuyuñjanā
Anuyuñjanā
(f.) (& ˚yuñjana nt.) [abstr. fr. anuyuñjati] application or devotion to ( -- ˚) Miln 178; VvA 346 (anuyujjanaŋ wrong spelling?) Anuyuñjati
Anuyuñjati
[anu + yuñjati] 1. to practice, give oneself up to (acc.), attend, pursue S i.25, 122 (˚yuñjan "in loving self -- devotion" Mrs. Rh. D.); iii.154; iv.104, 175; Dh 26 (pamādaŋ = pavatteti DhA i.257), 247 (surāmeraya -- pānaŋ = sevati bahulīkaroti DhA iii.356); PvA 61 (kammaṭṭhānaŋ). -- 2. to ask a question, to call to account, take to task Vin ii.79; Vv 335; ppr. Pass. ˚yuñjiyamāna PvA 192. -- pp. anuyutta (q. v.). -- Caus. anuyojeti "to put to", to address, admonish, exhort DhA iv.20. Anuyutta
Anuyutta
[pp. of anuyuñjati] 1. applying oneself to, dealing with, practising, given to, intent upon D i.166, 167; iii. 232 = A ii.205 (attaparitāpanɔ ânuyogaŋ a.); S iii.153; iv.104; Sn 663 (lobhaguṇe), 814 (methunaŋ = samāyutta SnA 536), 972 (jhān˚); Pug 55; PvA 163 (jāgariya˚), 206. -- 2. following, attending on; an attendant, inferior, vassal, in expression khattiya or rājā anuyutta a prince royal or a smaller king (see khattiya 3 b) A v.22 (v l. for T. anuyanta, q. v.); Sn 553 (= anugāmin, sevaka SnA 453). Anuyoga
Anuyoga
[Sk. anuyoga, fr. anu + yuj] 1. application, devo- tion to ( -- ˚), execution, practice of ( -- ˚); often combd. with anuyutta in phrase ˚anuyogaŋ anuyutta = practising, e. g. Vin i.190 (maṇḍanɔ ânuyogaŋ anuyutta); D iii.113 (attakilamathɔ ânuyogaŋ a.); A ii.205 (attaparitāpanɔ ânuyogaŋ a.). -- As adj. ( -- ˚) doing, given to, practising (cp. anuyutta). D i.5; iii.107; M i.385; S i.182; iii.239; iv.330; v.320; A i.14; iii.249; iv.460 sq.; V. 17 sq., 205; J i.90 (padhānɔ ânuyogakiccaŋ); Vv 8438 (dhamma˚); Miln 348; DA i. 78, 104. -- 2. invitation, appeal, question (cp. anuyuñjati 2) Miln 10 (ācariyassa ˚ŋ datvā). Anuyogavant
Anuyogavant
(adj.) [anuyoga + vant] applying oneself to, full of application or zeal, devoted PvA 207. Anuyogin
Anuyogin
(adj.) [fr. anuyoga] applying oneself to, devoted to ( -- ˚) Dh 209 (atta˚ given to oneself, self -- concentrated). Anurakkhaka
Anurakkhaka
(adj.) [fr. anurakkhati, cp. ˚rakkhin] preserving, keeping up J iv.192 (vaŋsa˚); vi.1 (id.). Anurakkhaṇa
Anurakkhaṇa
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [abstr. fr. anurakkhati] guarding, protection, preservation D iii.225 sq.; A ii.16 sq.; J i.133; Pug 12; Dpvs iv.24 (adj.); VvA 32 (citta˚); Sdhp 449. Anurakkhati
Anurakkhati
[anu + rakkhati] to guard, watch over (acc.), preserve, protect, shield Sn 149; Dh 327; J i.46; Pug 12. -- ppr. med.˚ rakkhamāna(ka) as adj. Sdhp 621. Anurakkhā
Anurakkhā
(f.) [ = anurakkhaṇā] guarding, protection, preservation S iv.323 (anuddayā a. anukampā). Anurakkhin
Anurakkhin
(adj.) [fr. anurakkhati] guarding, preserving, keeping J v.24. Anurakkhiya
Anurakkhiya
(adj.) [f. anurakkhati] in dur˚ difficult to guard Vin iii.149. Anurañjita
Anurañjita
[pp. of anu + rañjeti, Caus. of rañj] illumined, brighterted, beautified Bu i.45 (byāmapabhā˚ by the shine of the halo); VvA 4 (sañjhātapa˚ for sañjhāpabhā˚). -- 42 -- Anuratta
Anuratta
(adj.) pp. of anu + rañj] attached or devoted to, fond of, faithful Th 2, 446 (bhattāraŋ); J i.297; Miln 146. Anuravati
Anuravati
[anu + ravati] to resound, to sound after, linger (of sound) Miln 63. Anuravanā
Anuravanā
(f.) [abstr. fr. anuravati] lingering of the sound, resounding Miln 63. Anuraho
Anuraho
(adv.) [anu + raho] in secret, face to face, private M i.27. Anurujjhati
Anurujjhati
[Sk. anurudhyate, Pass. of anu + rudh] to conform oneself to, have a regard for, approve, to be pleased A iv.158; Dhs A 362. -- pp. anuruddha (q. v.). Anuruddha
Anuruddha
[pp. of anurujjhati] enggaged in, devoted to; compliant or complied with, pleased S iv.71, (anānuruddha). Anurūpa
Anurūpa
(adj.) [anu + rūpa] suitable, adequate, seeming, fit, worthy; adapted to, corresponding, conform with ( -- ˚) J i.91; vi.366 (tad˚); PvA 61 (ajjhāsaya˚ according to his wish), 128 (id.) 78, 122, 130, 155; etc. Cp. also paṭirūpa in same meaning. Anurodati
Anurodati
[anu + rodati] to cry after, cry for J iii.166 = Pv i.127 (dārako candaŋ a.). Anurodha
Anurodha
[fr. anu + rudh] compliance, consideration satis- faction (opp. virodha) S i.111; iv.210; Sn 362; Dhs 1059; Vbh 145; DhsA 362. Anulapanā
Anulapanā
(f.) [anu + lapanā, lap] scolding, blame, accusa- tion Vin ii.88 (spelt anullapanā; combd. with anuvadana & anubhaṇanā). Anulitta
Anulitta
(adj.) [cp. Sk. anulipta, pp. of anulimpati] anointed, besmeared J i.266; PvA 211. Anulimpati
Anulimpati
[anu + limpati] to anoint, besmear, Miln 394 (˚limpitabba). Caus. ˚limpeti in same meaning Miln 169, and ˚lepeti Milm 169 (grd. ˚lepanīya to be treated with ointment). -- pp. anulitta (q. v.). Anulimpana
Anulimpana
(nt.) [fr. anulimpati] anointing Miln 353, 394. Anulepa
Anulepa
[fr. anu + lip] anointing Miln 152. Anulokin
Anulokin
(adj.) [fr. anu + loketi, cp. Sk. & P. avalokin & anuviloketi] looking (up) at, seeing ( -- ˚) M i.147 (sīsa˚). Anuloma
Anuloma
(adj.) [Sk. anu + loma] "with the hair or grain", i. e. in natural order, suitable, fit, adapted to, adaptable, straight forward D ii.273 (anānuloma, q. v.) S iv.401; Ps ii.67, 70; DhA ii.208. -- nt. direct order, state of fitting in, adaptation Miln 148.

-- ñāṇa insight of adaptation (cp. Cpd. 66, 68) DhA ii.208. -- paṭiloma in regular order & reversed, forward & backward (Ep. of paṭiccasamuppāda, also in BSk.) Vin i.1; A iv.448. Anulomika
Anulomika
(& ˚ya) (adj.) [fr. anuloma] suitable, fit, agree- able; in proper order, adapted to ( -- ˚) Vin ii.7 (an˚); iii.120 (an˚ = ananucchaviya); iv.239; A i.106; iii.116 sq.; It 103 (sāmaññassa˚); Sn 385 (pabbajita˚); KhA 243 (ananulomiya); DhsA 25; Sdhp 65. Anulometi
Anulometi
[v. denom. fr. anuloma] to conform to, to be in accordance with Miln 372. Anuḷāratta
Anuḷāratta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. an + uḷāra] smallness, littleness, insignificance VvA 24. Anuvajja
Anuvajja
(adj.) [grd. of anu + vadati, cp. anuvāda & Sk. avavadya] to be blamed, censurable, worthy of reproach Sn p. 78 (an˚ = anuvādavimutta SnA 396). Anuvattaka
Anuvattaka
(adj.) [fr. anuvatteti] 1. = anupavattaka (q. v.) Th 1, 1014 (cakka˚). -- 2. following, siding with ( -- ˚) Vin iv.218 (ukkhittânuvattikā f.). Anuvattati
Anuvattati
[Sk. anuvartati, anu + vattati] 1. to follow, imitate, follow one's example (c. acc.), to be obedient D ii.244; Vin ii.309 (Bdhgh.); iv.218; J i.125, 300; DA i.288; PvA 19. -- 2. to practice, execute Pv iv. 712. -- Caus. ˚vatteti (q. v.). Anuvattana
Anuvattana
(nt.) [abstr. fr. anuvattati] complying with, conformity with ( -- ˚), compliance, observance, obedience J i.367 (dhamma˚); v.78. Anuvattin
Anuvattin
(adj.) [fr. anuvattati] following, acting according to or in conformity with ( -- ˚), obedient J ii.348 (f. ˚inī); iii.319 (id.); Dh 86 (dhamma˚); Vv 155 (vasa˚ = anukūlabhāvena vattana sīla VvA 71); DhA ii.161. Anuvatteti
Anuvatteti
[anu + vatteti] = anupavatteti (q. v.) Th 1, 826 (dhammacakkaŋ: "after his example turn the wheel" Mrs. Rh. D.). Anuvadati
Anuvadati
[Sk. ava˚; anu + vadati] to blame, censure, reproach Vin ii.80, 88. -- grd. anuvajja (q. v.). Anuvadanā
Anuvadanā
(f.) [fr. anuvadati] blaming, blame, censure Vin ii.88 (anuvāda +). Anuvasati
Anuvasati
[anu + vasati] to live with somebody, to dwell, inhabit J ii.421. Caus. ˚vāseti to pass, spend (time) J vi.296. -- pp. ˚vuttha (q. v.). Anuvassaŋ
Anuvassaŋ
(adv.) [anu + vassa] for one rainy season; every rainy season or year, i. e. annually C. on Th 1, 24. Anuvassika
Anuvassika
(adj.) [fr. anuvassaŋ] one who has (just) pas- sed one rainy season Th 1, 24 ("scarce have the rains gone by" Mrs. Rh. D.; see trsl. p. 29 n. 2). Anuvāceti
Anuvāceti
[anu + Caus. of vac] to say after, to repeat (words), to recite or make recite after or again D i.104 ( = tehi aññesaŋ vācitaŋ anuvācenti DA i.273); Miln 345. Cp. anubhāseti. Anuvāta
Anuvāta1
[anu + vā to blow] a forward wind, the wind that blows from behind, a favourable wind; ˚ŋ adv. with the wind, in the direction of the wind (opp. paṭivātaŋ). A i.226 (˚paṭivātaŋ); Sdhp 425 (paṭivāta˚). In anuvāte (anu + vāte) at J ii.382 "with the wind, facing the w., in front of the wind" anu is to be taken as prep. c. loc. & to be separated from vāte (see anu A b.). Anuvāta
Anuvāta2
[anu + vā to weave (?) in analogy to vāta from vā to blow] only in connection with the making of the bhikkhus' garments (cīvara) "weaving on, supplementary weaving, or along the seam", i. e. hem, seam, binding Vin i.254, 297; ii.177; iv.121 (aggala +); PvA 73 (anuvāte appabhonte since the binding was insufficient). Anuvāda
Anuvāda
[fr. anuvadatī, cp. Sk. anuvāda in meaning of "repetition"] 1. blaming, censure, admonition Vin ii.5, 32; A ii.121 (atta˚, para˚); Vbh 376. -- 2. in combn. vādânuvāda: talk and lesser or additional talk, i. e. "small talk" (see anu B iv.) D i.161; M i.368.

-- adhikaraṇa a question or case of censure Vin ii.88 sq.; iii.164 (one of the 4 adhikaraṇāni, q. v.). Anuvāsana
Anuvāsana
(nt.) [fr. anuvāseti] an oily enema, an injection Miln 353. Anuvāseti
Anuvāseti
[anu + vāseti, Caus. of vāsa3 odour, perfume] to treat with fragrant oil, i. e. to make an injection or give an enema of salubrious oil Miln 169; grd. ˚vāsanīya ibid.; pp. ˚vāsita Miln 214. Anuvikkhitta
Anuvikkhitta
(adj.) [anu + vi + khitta, pp. of anu + vikkhipati] dispersed over S v.277 sq. (+ anuvisaṭa). Anuvigaṇeti
Anuvigaṇeti
[anu + vi + gaṇeti] to take care of, regard, heed, consider Th 1, 109. -- 43 -- Anuvicarati
Anuvicarati
[anu + vi + carati] to wander about, stroll roam through, explore D i.235; J ii.128; iii.188; PvA 189 ( = anupariyāti). -- Caus. ˚vicāreti to think over (lit. to make one's mind wander over), to meditate, ponder (cp. anuvicinteti); always combd. with anuvitakketi (q. v.) A i.264 (cetasā), iii.178 (dhammaŋ cetasā a.). -- pp. anuvicarita (q. v.). Anuvicarita
Anuvicarita
[pp. of anuvicāreti] reflected, pondered over, thought out S iii.203 (manasā); DA i.106 ( = anucarita). Anuvicāra
Anuvicāra
[anu + vicāra, cf. anuvicāreti] meditation, reflexion, thought Dhs 85 ( = vicāra). Anuvicinaka
Anuvicinaka
[fr. anu + vicināti] one who examines, an examiner Miln 365. Anuvicinteti
Anuvicinteti
[anu + vi + cinteti] to think or ponder over, to meditate D ii.203; S i 203 (yoniso ˚cintaya, imper. "marshall thy thoughts in ordered governance" Mrs. Rh. D.; v. l. anucintaya); Th 1, 747; Dh 364; It 82 (dhammaŋ ˚ayaŋ); J iii.396; iv.227; v.223 (dhammaŋ ˚cintayanto). Anuvicca
Anuvicca
[ger. of anuvijjati, for the regular from anuvijja prob. through influence of anu + i (anu -- v -- icca for anvicca), cf. anveti & adhicca; & see anuvijjati] having known or found out, knowing well or thoroughly, testing, finding out M i.301, 361 (v. l. ˚vijja); A ii.3, 84; v.88; Dh 229 ( = jānitvā DhA iii.329); Sn 530 (= anuviditvā SnA 431); J i.459 (= jānitvā C.); iii.426; Pug. 49.

-- kāra a thorough investigation, examination, test Vin i.236 (here spelt anuvijja) = M i.379 (= ˚viditvā C.) = A iv.185. Anuvijjaka
Anuvijjaka
[fr. anuvijja, ger. of anuvijjati] one who finds out, an examiner Vin v.161. Anuvijjati
Anuvijjati
[anu + vid, with fusion of Vedic vetti to know, and Pass. of vindati to find ( = vidyate)] to know thoroughly, to find out, to trace, to come to know; inf. ˚vijjitiŋ J iii.506; ger. ˚viditvā Sn A 431, also ˚vijja & vicca (see both under anuvicca); grd. ananuvejja not to be known, unfathomable, unknowable M i.140 (Tathāgato ananuvejjo). -- Caus. anuvijjāpeti to make some one find out J v.162. -- pp. anuvidita (q. v.). Anuvijjhati
Anuvijjhati
[anu + vyadh] 1. to pierce or be pierced, to be struck or hurt with (instr.) J vi.439 -- 2. to be affected with, to fall into, to incur DhA iii.380 (aparādhaŋ). -- pp. anuviddha (q. v.). Anuvitakketi
Anuvitakketi
[anu + vi + takketi] to reflect, think, ponder over, usually combd with anuvicāreti D i.119; iii.242; S v.67 = It 107 (anussarati +); A iii.383. Anuvidita
Anuvidita
[pp. of anuvijjati] found out, recognised; one who has found out or knows well Sn 528, 530 ( = anubuddha Sn A 431). Same in B.Sk., e.g. M Vastu iii.398. Anuviddha
Anuviddha
(adj.) [pp. of anuvijjhati] pierced, intertwined or set with ( -- ˚) VvA 278. Anuvidhīyati
Anuvidhīyati
[cf. Sk. anuvidhīyate & adj. anuvidhāyin; Pass. of anu + vi + dhā, cf. vidahati] to act in conformity with, to follow (instruction) M ii.105 = Th 1, 875; S iv.199; J ii.98; iii.357. Anuvidhīyanā
Anuvidhīyanā
(f.) [abstr. fr. anuvidhīyati] acting according to, conformity with M i.43. Anuviloketi
Anuviloketi
[anu + vi + loketi; B.Sk. anuvilokayati] to look round at, look over, survey, muster M i.339; Sn p. 140; J i.53; Miln 7 (lakaŋ), 21 (parisaŋ), 230. Anuvivaṭṭa
Anuvivaṭṭa
[anu + vivaṭṭa] an "after -- evolution", devolution; as part of a bhikkhuɔs dress: a sub -- vivaṭṭa (q. v.) Vin i.287 (vivaṭṭa +). Anuvisaṭa
Anuvisaṭa
(anu + visaṭa, pp. of anu + vi + sṛ] spread over S v.277 sq.; J iv.102. Anuvuttha
Anuvuttha
[pp. of anuvasati, cf. Sk. anūṣita] living with, staying, dwelling J ii.42 (cira˚); v.445 (id.). Anuvejja
Anuvejja
(adj.) in an˚ see anuvijjati. Anuvyañjana & anubyañjana
Anuvyañjana
& anubyañjana (e. g. Vin iv.15; J i.12) (nt.) [anu + vyañjana] accompanying (i. e. secondary) attribute, minor or inferior characteristic, supplementary or additional sign or mark (cf. mahāpurisa -- lakkhaṇa) Vin i.65 (abl. anuvyañjanaso "in detail"); M iii.126; S iv.168; A iv.279 (abl.); v.73 sq.; Pug 24, 58; Miln 339; VvA 315; DhsA 400.

-- gāhin taking up or occupying oneself with details, taken up with lesser or inferior marks D i.70 (cf. MVastu iii.52); iii.225; S iv.104; A i.113; ii.16, 152 sq.; Dhs 1345 (cf. Dhs trsl. 351). Anusaŋyāyati
Anusaŋyāyati
[anu + saŋ + yāyati] to traverse; to go up to, surround, visit (acc.) M i.209 (Bhagavantaŋ ˚itvā), J iv.214 (v.l. anuyāyitvā). See also anuyāti and anusaññāti. Anusaŋvacchara
Anusaŋvacchara
(adj.) [anu + saŋv˚] yearly DhA i.388 (nakkhattaŋ). Usually nt. ˚ŋ as adv. yearly, every year J i.68; v.99. On use of anu in this combn. see anu A a. Anusañcarati
Anusañcarati
[anu + saŋ + carati] to walk along, to go round about, to visit M i.279; S v.53, 301; J i.202; iii.502; PvA 279 (nagaraŋ). -- pp. anusañcarita (q. v.). Anusañcarita
Anusañcarita
[pp. of anusañcarati] frequented, visited, resorted to Miln 387. Anusañceteti
Anusañceteti
[anu + saŋ + ceteti] to set ones mind on, concentrate, think over, meditate Pug 12. Anusaññāti
Anusaññāti
[either anu + saŋ + jñā (jānāti) or (preferably) = anusaŋyāti as short form of anusaŋyāyati, like anuyāti > anuyāyati of anu + saŋ + yā, cf. Sk. anusaŋyāti in same meaning] to go to, to visit, inspect, control; ppr. med. ˚saññāyamāna Vin iii.43 (kammante); inf. ˚saññātuŋ A i.68. (janapade). Anusaṭa
Anusaṭa
[Sk. anusṛta, pp. of anu + sṛ] sprinkled with ( -- ˚), bestrewn, scattered Vv 53 (paduma˚ magga = vippakiṇṇa VvA 36). Anusatthar
Anusatthar
[n. ag. to anu + sās, cf. Sk. anuśāsitṛ & P. satthar] instructor, adviser J iv.178 (ācariya +). Cp. anusāsaka. Anusatthi
Anusatthi
(f.) [Sk. anuśāsti, anu + śās, cp. anusāsana] admonition, rule, instruction J i.241; Miln 98, 172, 186 (dhamma˚), 225, 227, 347. Anusandati
Anusandati
[Vedic anusyandati, anu + syad] to stream along after, to follow, to be connected with. Thus to be read at Miln 63 for anusandahati (anuravati +; of sound), while at A iv.47 the reading is to be corrected to anusandahati. Anusandahati
Anusandahati
[anu + saŋ + dhā, cf. Vedic abhi + saŋ + dhā] to direct upon, to apply to A iv.47 sq. (cittaŋ samāpattiyā; so to be read with v. l. for anusandati); Miln 63 (but here prob. to be read as anusandati, q.v.). Anusandhanatā
Anusandhanatā
(f.) [ = anusandhi] application, adjusting Dhs 8 (cittassa). Anusandhi
Anusandhi
(f.) [fr. anu + saŋ + dhā] connection, (logical) conclusion, application DA i.122 (where 3 kinds are enumd., viz. pucchā˚, ajjhāsayā˚, yathā˚); Nett 14 (pucchato; Hard., in Index "complete cessation"?!). Esp. freq. in (Jātaka) phrase anusandhiŋ ghaṭeti "to form the connection", to draw the conclusion, to show the application of the story or point out its maxim J i.106; 308; DhA ii.40, 47; etc. -- 44 -- Anusampavankatā
Anusampavankatā
(f.) [anu + saŋ + pavankatā; is reading correct?] disputing, quarrelling(?) Vin ii.88 (under anuvādâdhikaraṇa). Anusaya
Anusaya
[anu + śī, seti Sk. anuśaya has a diff. meaning] (see Kvu trsl. 234 n. 2 and Cpd. 172 n. 2). Bent, bias, proclivity, the persistance of a dormant or latent disposition, predisposition, tendency. Always in bad sense. In the oldest texts the word usually occurs absolutely, without mention of the cause or direction of the bias. So Sn. 14 = 369, 545; M. iii.31; S. iii.130, iv.33, v.28 236; A. i.44; ii.157; iii.74, 246, 443. Or in the triplet obstinacy, prejudice and bias (adhiṭṭhānâbhinivesânusayā) S. ii.17; iii.10, 135, 161; A. v.iii. Occasionally a source of the bias is mentioned. Thus pride at S. i.188; ii.252 ff., 275; iii.80, 103, 169, 253; iv.41, 197; A i.132, iv.70 doubt at M. i.486 -- ignorance lust and hatred at S iv.205, M iii.285. At D iii.254, 282; S v.60; and A iv.9. we have a list of seven anusaya's, the above five and delusion and craving for rebirth. Hence -- forward these lists govern the connotation of the word; but it would be wrong to put that connotation back into the earlier passages. Later references are Ps i.26, 70 ff., 123, 130, 195; ii.36, 84, 94, 158; Pug 21; Vbh 340, 383, 356; Kvu 405 ff. Dpvs i.42. Anusayita
Anusayita
[pp. of anuseti, anu + śī] dormant, only in combn. dīgharatta˚ latent so long Th 1, 768; Sn 355, 649. Cp. anusaya & anusayin. Anusayin
Anusayin
(adj.) [fr. anusaya] D ii.283 (me dīgharatta˚), "for me, so long obsessed (with doubts)". The reading is uncertain. Anusarati
Anusarati
[anu + sṛ] to follow, conform oneself to S iv. 303 (phalaŋ anusarissati BB, but balaŋ anupadassati SS perhaps to be preferred). -- Caus. anusāreti to bring together with, to send up to or against Miln 36 (aññamaññaŋ a. anupeseti). Anusavati
Anusavati
at S ii.54 (āsavā na a.; v. l. anusayanti) & iv. 188 (akusalā dhammā na a.; v. l. anusenti) should preferably be read anusayati: see anuseti 2. Anusahagata
Anusahagata
(adj.) having a residuum, accompanied by a minimum of . . S iii.130; Kvu 81, see aṇu˚. Anusāyika
Anusāyika
(adj.) [fr. anusaya] attached to one, i. e. inherent, chronic (of disease) M ii.70 (ābādha, v. l. BB anussāyika); DhA i.431 (roga). Anusāra
Anusāra
[fr. anu + sṛ] "going along with", following, conformity. Only in obl. eases ( -- ˚) anusārena (instr.) in consequence of, in accordance with, according to J i.8; PvA 187 (tad), 227; and anusārato (abl.) id. Sdhp 91. Anusārin
Anusārin
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. anu + sarati] following, striving after, acting in accordance with, living up to or after. Freq. in formula dhammânusārin saddhânusārin living in conformity with the Norm & the Faith D iii.254; M i.142, 479; S iii.225; v.200 sq.; A i.74; iv.10; Pug 15. -- Cp. also S i.15 (bhavasota˚); iv.128 (id.); J vi.444 (paṇḍitassa˚ = veyyāvaccakara C.); Sdhp 528 (attha˚). Anusāreti
Anusāreti
see anusarati. Anusāsaka
Anusāsaka
[fr. anusāsati] adviser, instructor, counsellor J ii.105; Miln 186, 217, 264. Cp. anusatthar. Anusāsati
Anusāsati
[Vedic anuśāsati, anu + sās] 1. to advise, ad- monish, instruct in or give advice upon (c. acc.) to exhort to Vin i.83; D i.135; ii.154; Dh 77, 159 (aññaŋ); J vi.368; cp. i.103; Pv ii.68; PvA 148. -- grd. anusāsiya Vin i.59; and ˚sāsitabba DhA iii.99. -- Pass ˚sāsiyati Vin ii.200; Miln 186. -- 2. to rule, govern (acc.) ādminister to (dat.) S i.236 = Sn 1002 (paṭhaviŋ dhammenam -- anusāsati, of a Cakkavattin); J ii.2; vi.517 (rajjassa = rajjaŋ C., i. e. take care of) DA i.246 (read ˚sāsantena); PvA 161 (rajjaŋ). -- pp. anusiṭṭha (q. v.); cp. anusatthar, anusatthi & ovadati. Anusāsana
Anusāsana
(nt.) [Vedic anuśāsana, fr. anu + śās] advice, instruction, admonition D iii.107; A i.292 (˚pāṭihāriya, cp. anusāsanī); Miln 359. Anusāsanī
Anusāsanī
(f.) [fr. anusāsati, cp. anusāsana] instruction, teaching, commandment, order S v.108; A ii.147; iii.87; v.24 sq., 49, 338; J v.113; Th 2, 172, 180; Pv iii.76; ThA 162; VvA 19, 80, 81.

-- pāṭihāriya (anusāsani˚) the miracle of teaching, the wonder worked by the commandments (of the Buddha) Vin ii.200; D i.212, 214; iii.220; A i.170; v.327; J iii.323; Ps ii.227 sq. Anusikkhati
Anusikkhati
[Vedic anuśikṣati; anu + Desid. of śak] to learn of somebody (gen.); to follow one's example, to imitate Vin ii.201 (ppr. med. ˚amāna); S i.235; A iv. 282, 286, 323; Sn 294 (vattaŋ, cp. RV iii.59, 2: vratena śikṣati), 934; J i.89; ii.98; iii.315; v.334; vi.62; Th 1, 963; Miln 61. -- Caus anusikkhāpeti to teach [ = Sk. anuśikṣayati] Miln 352. Anusikkhin
Anusikkhin
(adj.) [fr. anusikhati] studying, learning M i. 100; Dh 226 (ahoratta˚ = divā ca rattiñ ca tisso sikkhā sikkhamāna DhA iii.324). Anusiṭṭha
Anusiṭṭha
(Vedic anuśiṣṭa, pp. of anusāsati] instructed, ad- monished, advised; ordered, commanded M ii.96; J i.226; Pv ii.811; Miln 284, 349. Anusibbati
Anusibbati
[anu + sibbati, siv to sew] to interweave Vin iii.336 (introd. to Sam. Pās.). Anusuṇāti
Anusuṇāti
[anu + śru] to hear; pret. anassuŋ [Sk. an- vaśruvaŋ] I heard M i.333. Anusumbhati
Anusumbhati
[anu + sumbhati (sobhati); śubh or (Vedic) śumbh] to adorn, embellish, prepare J vi.76. Anusuyyaŋ
Anusuyyaŋ
[cp. Sk. anasūyaŋ] reading at J iii.27, see anasuyyaŋ. Anusuyyaka
Anusuyyaka
(adj.) [an + usuyyaka] not envious, not jealous Sn 325 ( = usuyyāvigamena a. SnA 332); J ii.192 (v. l. anussuyyaka); v.112. Anuseṭṭhi
Anuseṭṭhi
[anu + seṭṭhi] 1. an under -- seṭṭhi (banker, mer- chant) J v.384 (see anu B iii. a.). -- 2. in redupl. cpd. seṭṭhânuseṭṭhi (see anu B iv) "bankers & lesser bankers", i. e. all kinds of well -- to -- do families J vi.331. Anuseti
Anuseti
[anu + seti. cp. Sk. anuśayate or˚ śete, from śī] to "lie down with", i. e. (1) trs. to dwell on, harp on (an idea) S ii.65; iii.36; iv.208. -- 2. (of the idea) to obsess, to fill the mind persistently, to lie dormant & be continually cropping up. M i.40, 108, 433; S ii.54 (so read with SS for anusavanti) iv.188; A i.283; iii.246; Pug 32, 48. -- pp. anusayita (q. v.). Anusocati
Anusocati
[anu + socati] to mourn for, to bewail Sn 851 (atītaŋ na a.; cp. Nd1 222); Pv i.127; ii.68; PvA 95. Anusocana
Anusocana
(nt.) [abstr. fr. anusocati] bewailing, mourning PvA 65. Anusota˚
Anusota˚
[anu + sota, in ˚ŋ as adv. or acc. to expln. under anu A a.] in anusotaŋ (adv.) along the stream or current, down -- stream A ii.12; J i.70 (opp. paṭisotaŋ against the stream); PvA 169 (Gangāya a. āgacchanto).

-- gāmin "one who follows the stream", i. e. giving way to ones inclinations, following ones will A ii.5, 6 (opp. paṭi˚); Sn. 319 ( = sotaŋ anugacchanto Sn A 330); Pug 62. -- 45 -- Anussati
Anussati
(f.) [Sk. anusmṛti, fr. anu + smṛ, cp. sati] remembrance, recollection, thinking of, mindfulness. A late list of subjects to be kept in mind comprises six anussati -- ṭṭhānāni, viz. Buddha˚, Dhamma˚, Sangha˚, sīla˚, cāga˚, devatā˚, i. e. proper attention to the Buddha, the Doctrines, the Church, to morality, charity, the gods. Thus at D iii.250, 280 (cp. A i.211); A iii.284, 312 sq., 452; v.329 sq.; Ps i.28. Expanded to 10 subjects (the above plus ānāpāna -- sati, maraṇa -- sati, kāyagatā -- sati, upasamânussati) at A i.30, 42 (cp. Lal. Vist 34). For other references see D i.81; S v.67 = It 107 (anussaraṇa at latter pass.); A iii.284, 325, 452. Ps i.48, 95, 186; Pug 25, 60; Dhs 14, 23, 1350 (anussati here to be corr. to asati, see Dhs. trsl. 351); Sdhp. 225, 231, 482. See also anuttariya (anussat -- ânuttariya). Anussada
Anussada
(adj.) [an + ussada without haughtiness Sn 624 (vv. ll. anusaddha & anussuda; Sn A 467 expln. by taṇhā ussadâbhāva) = Dh 400 (which pass. has anussuta; v.l. K.B. anussada; DhA iv.165 expls. with taṇhā -- ussāvâbhāva, vv. ll. ˚ussada˚); It 97 (vv. ll. anussata & anussara). Anussaraṇa
Anussaraṇa
(nt.) [abstr. to anussarati] remembrance, me- mory, recollection It 107 ( = anussati at id. p. S v.67); PvA 25, 29. Anussarati
Anussarati
[Vedic anusmarati, anu + smṛ] to remember, recollect, have memory of (acc.), bear in mind; be aware of D ii.8, 53, 54 (jātito etc.); S iii.86 sq. (pubbenivāsaŋ); v.67 (dhammaŋ a. anuvitakketi), 303 (kappasahassaŋ); A i.25, 164 (pubbenivāsaŋ), 207 (Tathāgataŋ, Dhammaŋ etc.); iii.285 (id.), 323 (nivāsaŋ), 418; v.34, 38, 132, 199, 336 (kalyāṇamitte); It 82 (dhammaŋ), 98 (pubbenivāsaŋ); J i.167; ii.111; Dh 364; Pv i.59; Pug 60; Sdhp 580, 587; DA i.257; KhA 213; DhA ii.84; iv.95; PvA 29, 53, 69, 79, 107. -- pp. anussarita (see anussaritar). -- Caus anussarāpeti to remind someone, to call to mind J ii.147. Anussaritar
Anussaritar
[n. ag. to anussarita, pp. of anussarati] one who recollects or remembers S v.197, 225 (saritar +); A v.25, 28. Anussava
Anussava
[anu + sava fr. śru, cp. Vedic śravas nt.] hear- say, report, tradition M i.520; ii.211; S ii.115; iv.138; A i.26; J i.158 (with ref. to part. kira = annussav'atthe nipāto; so also at VvA 322, cf. anussavana); ii.396, 430 (id.); iv.441; instr. ˚ena from hearsay, by report A ii.191 (cf. itihītihaŋ). Anussavana
Anussavana
(nt.) [anu + savana fr. śru] = anussava PvA 103 (kira -- saddo anussavane, from hearsay). Anussavika
Anussavika
(adj.) [fr. anussava] "belonging to hearsay", traditional; one who is familiar with tradition or who learns from hearsay M i.520; ii.211. Cp. anussutika. Anussāvaka
Anussāvaka
[fr. anussāveti] one who proclaims or announces, a speaker (of a kammavācā) Vin i.74. Anussāvana
Anussāvana
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. anussāveti] a proclamation Vin i.317, 340; v.170, 186, 202 sq. Anussāvita
Anussāvita
[pp. of anussāveti] proclaimed, announced Vin i.103. Anussāveti
Anussāveti
[anu + sāveti, Caus. of śru, cp. B.Sk. anuśrā- vayati "to proclaim aloud the guilt of a criminal" AvŚ. i.102; ii.182] to cause to be heard or sound; to proclaim, utter, speak out Vin i.103 (˚ssāviyamāna ppr. Pass.); ii.48 (saddaŋ a.). -- pp. anussāvita. Anussuka
Anussuka
(adj.) [an + ussuka] free from greed Dh 199; cf. anussukin v. l. D iii.47, also anissukin and apalāsin. Anussukita
Anussukita
[an + ussuk˚] VvA 74 & anussukin Pug 23 = anussuka. Anussuta
Anussuta1
(adj.) [an + ussuta, ud + sṛ] free from lust Dh 400 ( = ussāvâvena anussuta C.). See also anussada. Anussuta
Anussuta2
[anu + suta, pp. of śru] heard of; only in cpd. ananussuta unheard of S ii.9; Pug 14. Anussutika
Anussutika
(adj.) [fr. anu + śru, cp. anussavika] according to tradition or report, one who goes by or learns from hearsay DA i.106, 107. Anussuyyaka
Anussuyyaka
see anusuyyaka. Anuhasati
Anuhasati
[anu + hasati] to laugh at, to ridicule DA i.256. Anuhīrati
Anuhīrati
[for ˚hariyati, anu + hṛ] to be held up over, ppr. anuhīramāna D ii.15 (vv. ll. v. l. anubhiram˚; glosses B. K. anudhāriyam˚, cp. Trenckner, Notes 79). Anūna
Anūna
(adj.) [Vedic anūna, an + ūna] not lacking, entire, complete, without deficiency J vi 273; Dpvs v.52; Miln 226; DA i.248 (+ paripūra, expld by anavaya). Anūnaka = anūna
Anūnaka
= anūna Dpvs iv.34. Anūnatā
Anūnatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. anūna] completeness Cp. iii.611. Anūpa
Anūpa
(adj.) [Vedic anūpa, anu + ap: see āpa, orig. along- side of water] watery, moist; watery land, lowland J. iv.358 (anopa T; anupa C. p. 359), 381 (˚khetta); Miln 129 (˚khetta). Anūpaghāta
Anūpaghāta
[metrically for anupa˚] not killing, not mur- dering. Dh 185 ( = anupahananañ cɔeva anupaghātanañ ca DhA iii.238). Anūpadhika
Anūpadhika
for anu˚ in metre Sn 1057, see upadhi. Anūpanāhin
Anūpanāhin
(adj.) [an + upanāhin, with ū metri causa] not bearing ill -- will, not angry with J iv.463. Anūpama
Anūpama
at It 122 is metric reading for anupama (see upama). Anūpalitta
Anūpalitta
(adj.) [an + upalitta, with ū in metre] free from taint, unstained, unsmeared Sn 211, 392, 468, 790, 845; Dh 353; cf. Nd1 90 and DhA iv.72. Anūpavāda
Anūpavāda
[an + upavāda, with metrically lengthened u] not grumbling, not finding fault Dh 185 ( = anupavādanañ cɔ eva anupavadāpanañ ca DhA iii.238). Anūhata
Anūhata
(adj.) [pp. of an + ūhaññati, ud + han] not rooted out, not removed or destroyed Th 1, 223 = Nd2 974; Dh 338 (= asamucchinna DhA iv.48). Aneka
Aneka
(adj.) (usually ˚ -- ) [an + eka] not one, i. e. many, various; countlcss, numberless It 99 (saŋvaṭṭakappā countless aeons); Sn 688 (˚sākhā); Dh 153 (˚jātisāra); J iv.2; vi.366.

-- pariyāyena (instr.) in many ways Vin i.16; Sn p. 15. -- rūpa various, manifold Sn 1049, 1079, 1082; Nd2 54 ( = anekavidha). -- vidha manifold Nd2 54; DA i.103. -- vihita various, manifold D i.12, 13, 178; It 98; Pug 55; DA i.103 (= anekavidha). Anekaŋsā
Anekaŋsā
(f.) [an + ekaŋsā] doubt Nd2 1. Anekaŋsikatā
Anekaŋsikatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. anekaŋsa + kata] uncertainty, doubtfulness Miln 93. Aneja
Aneja
(adj.) [an + ejā] free from desires or lust D ii.157; Sn 920, 1043, 1101, 1112; It 91 (opp. ejânuga Nd1 353 = Nd2 55; Dh 414 (= taṇhāya abhāvena DhA iv. 194), 422; Pv iv.135 (nittaṇha PvA 230). Anedha
Anedha
(adj.) [an + edha] without fuel J iv.26 ( = anindhana). Aneḷa
Aneḷa
(adj.) [an + eḷa = ena, see neḷa & cp. BSk. eḍa (mūka); Vedic anena] faultless, pure; only in foll. cpds.: ˚gala free from the dripping or oozing of impurity (thus expld. at DA i.282, viz. elagalana -- virahita), but more likely in lit. meaning "having a pure or clear throat" or, of vācā speech: "clearly enunciated" (thus Mrs. Rh. D. at Kindred Sayings i.241) Vin i.197 = D i.114 = S i.189; A ii.51, 97; iii.114, 195. Cp. also M Vastu iii. 322. -- ˚mūga same as prec. "having a clear throat", i. e. not dumb, fig. clever, skilled D iii.265; Sn 70 (= alālāmukha SnA 124), cp. Nd2 259. -- 46 -- Aneḷaka
Aneḷaka
(adj.) [cp. BSk. aneḍaka, e. g. Av. Ś. i.187, 243; M Vastu i.339; iii.322] = aneḷa, pure, clear M ii.5; J vi.529. Anesanā
Anesanā
(f.) [an + esanā] impropriety S ii.194; J ii.86; iv.381; Miln 343, 401; DA i.169; DhA iv.34; Sdhp 392, 427. Ano
Ano
-- is a frequent form of compn. an -- ava, see ava. Anoka
Anoka
(nt.) [an + oka] houselessness, a houseless state, fig freedom from worldliness or attachment to life, singleness S v.24 = A v.232 = Dh 87 (okā anokaŋ āgamma). -> adj. homeless, free from attachment S i.176; Dh 87 (= anālaya DhA ii.162); Sn 966 (adj.; expld at Nd1 487 by abhisankhāra -- sahagatassa viññāṇassa okāsaŋ na karoti, & at SnA 573 by abhisankhāra -- viññānɔ ādīnaŋ anokāsabhūta).

sārin living in a houseless state, fig. being free from worldly attachment S iii.10 = Nd1 197; Sn 628 (= anālaya -- cārin SnA 468); Ud 32; Dh 404 (v. l. anokka˚); DhA iv.174 (= anālaya -- cārin); Miln 386. Anogha
Anogha
in anogha -- tiṇṇa see ogha. Anojaka = anojā
Anojaka
= anojā Vv 354 (= VvA 161, where classed with yodhikā bandhujīvakā). Anojagghati
Anojagghati
at D i.91 is v. l. for anujagghati. Anojā
Anojā
(f.) [*Sk. anujā] a kind of shrub or tree with red flowers J vi.536 (korandaka +); usually in cpd. anojapuppha the a. flower, used for wreaths etc. J i.9 (˚dāma, a garland of a flowers); vi.227 (id.); DhA ii.116 (˚cangoṭaka). Anottappa
Anottappa
(nt.) [an + ottappa] recklessness, hardness D iii.212; It 34 (ahirika +); Pug 20; Dhs 365. Cp. anottāpin. Anottāpin & Anottappin
Anottāpin
& Anottappin (adj.) [fr. anottappa] not afraid of sin, bold, reckless, shameless D iii.252, 282 (pp; ahirika); Sn 133 (p; ahirika +); It 27, 115 (anatāpin anottappin, vv. ll. anottāpin); Pug 20, 24. Anodaka
Anodaka
(adj.) [an + udaka] without water, dry J i.307; DhA i.52; Sdhp 443. Anodissaka
Anodissaka
(adj.) [an + odissa + ka] unrestricted, without exception, general, universal; only in cpd. ˚vasena universally, thoroughly (with ref. to mettā) J i.81; ii 146; VvA 97 (in general; opp. odissaka -- vasena). See also Mrs. Rh. D. Psalms of the Brethren p. 5 n. 1. Anonamati
Anonamati
[an + onamati] not to bend, to be inflexible, in foll. expressions: anonamaka (nt.) not stooping DhA ii.136; auonamanto (ppr.) not bending D ii.17 = iii. 143; anonami -- daṇḍa (for anonamiya˚) an inflexible stick Miln 238 (anoṇami˚ T, but anonami˚ vv. ll., see Miln 427). Anopa
Anopa
see anūpa. Anoma
Anoma
(adj.) (only ˚ -- ) [an + oma] not inferior, superior, perfect, supreme, in foll. cpds.

-- guṇa supreme virtue DA i.288. -- dassika of superior beauty Vv 207, VvA 103 (both as v. l.; T. anuma˚); Vv 437. -- dassin one who has supreme knowledge; of unexcelled wisdom (Name of a Buddha) J i.228. -- nāma of perfect name S i.33 ("by name the Peerless" Mrs. Rh. D.), 235; Sn 153, 177 (cp. SnA 200). -- nikkama of perfect energy Vv 6427 ( = paripuṇṇa -- viriyatāya a. VvA 284). -- pañña of lofty or supreme wisdom (Ep. of the Buddha) Sn 343, 352 (= mahāpañña SnA 347); Th 2, 522 (= paripuṇṇa -- pañña ThA 296), DhA i.31. -- vaṇṇa of excellent colour Sn 686 J vi.202. -- viriya of supreme exertion or energy Sn 353. Anomajjati
Anomajjati
[anu + ava + majjati, mṛj] to rub along over, to stroke, only in phrase gattāni pāṇinā a. to rub over one's limbs with the hand M i.80, 509; S v.216. Anorapāra
Anorapāra
(adj.) [an + ora + pāra] having (a shore) neither on this side nor beyond Miln 319. Anoramati
Anoramati
[an + ava + ram] not to stop, to continue J iii.487; DhA iii.9 (ger. ˚itvā continually). Anovassa
Anovassa
(nt.) [an + ovassa; cp. Sk. anavavarṣana] absence of rain, drought J v.317 (v. l. BB for anvāvassa T.; q. v.). Anovassaka
Anovassaka
(adj.) [an + ovassaka] sheltered from the rain, dry Vin ii.211; iv.272; J i.172; ii.50; iii.73; DhA ii. 263; ThA 188. Anosita
Anosita
(adj.) [an + ava + sita, pp. of sā] not inhabited (by), not accessible (to) Sn 937 ( = anajjhositaŋ Nd1 441; jarādīhi anajjhāvutthaŋ ṭhānaŋ SnA 566). Anta
Anta1
[Vedic anta; Goth. andeis = Ohg. anti = E. end; cp. also Lat. antiae forehead (: E. antler), and the prep. anti opposite, antika near = Lat. ante; Gr. a)nti/ & a)/nta opposite; Goth., Ags. and; Ger. ant -- ; orig. the opposite (i. e. what stands against or faces the starting -- point)]. 1. end, finish, goal S iv.368 (of Nibbāna); Sn 467; J ii.159. antaŋ karoti to make an end (of) Sn 283, 512; Dh 275, cp. antakara, ˚kiriyā. -- loc. ante at the end of, immediately after J i.203 (vijay˚). -- 2. limit, border, edge Vin i.47; Dh 305 (van˚); J iii.188. -- 3. side: see ekamantaŋ (on one side, aside). -- 4. opposite side, opposite, counterpart; pl. parts, contrasts, extremes; thus also used as "constituent, principle" (in tayo & cattāro antā; or does it belong to anta2 2. in this meaning? Cp. ekantaŋ extremely, under anta2): dve antā (two extremes) Vin i.10; S ii.17; iii.135. ubho antā (both sides) Vin i.10; S ii.17; J i.8; Nd1 109. eko, dutiyo anto (contrasts) Nd1 52. As tayo antā or principles (?), viz. sakkāya, s. -- samudaya, s. -- nirodha D iii.216, cp. A iii. 401; as cattāro, viz. the 3 mentioned plus s. -- nirodhagāmini -- paṭipadā at S iii.157. Interpreted by Morris as "goal" (J P T S. 1894, 70). -- Often pleonastically, to be expld as a "pars pro toto" figure, like kammanta (q. v.) the end of the work, i. e. the whole work (cp. E. sea -- side, country -- side ); vananta the border of the wood = the woods Dh 305; Pv ii.310 (expld by vana PvA 86; same use in BSk., vanânta e. g. at Jtm vi.21; cp. also grāmânta Av. Ś. i.210); suttanta (q. v.), etc. Cp. ākāsanta J vi.89 & the pleonastic use of patha. -- ananta (n.) no end, infinitude; (adj.) endless, corresponds either to Sk. anta or antya, see anta2.

-- ânanta end & no end, or finite and endless, D i.22; DA i.115. -- ânantika (holding views of, or talking about) finiteness and infinitude D i.22 (see expln. at DA i.115); S iii.214, 258 sq.; Ps i.155. -- kara putting an end to, (n.) a deliverer, saviour; usually in phrase dukkhassɔa. (of the Buddha) M i.48, 531; A ii.2; iii.400 sq.; Th 1, 195; It 18; Sn 32, 337, 539; Pug 71. In other combn. A ii.163 (vijjāyɔ); Sn 1148 (pañhānɔ). -- -- kiriyā putting an end to, ending, relief, extirpation; always used with ref. to dukkha S iv.93; lt 89; Sn 454, 725; DhA iv.45. -- gata = antagū Nd2 436 (+ koṭigata). -- gāhikā (f.), viz. diṭṭhi, is an attribute of micchādiṭṭhi, i. e. heretical doctrine. The meaning of anta in this combn. is not quite clear: either "holding (wrong) principles (goals, Morris)", viz. the 3 as specified above 4 under tayo antā (thus Morris J P T S. 1884, 70), or "taking extreme sides, i. e. extremist", or "wrong, opposite (= antya, see anta2)" (thus Kern, Toev. s. v.) Vin i.172; D iii.45, 48 (an˚); S i.154; A i.154; ii.240; iii.130; Ps i.151 sq. -- gū one who has gone to the end, one who has gone through or overcome (dukkha) A iv.254, 258, 262; Sn 401 (= vaṭṭadukkhassa antagata); 539. -- ruddhi at J vi.8 is doubtful reading (antaruci?). -- vaṭṭi rimmed circumference J iii.159. -- saññin being conscious of an end (of the world) D i.22, cp. DA i 115. -- 47 -- Anta
Anta2
(adj.) [Vedic antya] 1. having an end, belonging to the end; only in neg. ananta endless, infinite, boundless (opp. antavant); which may be taken as equal to anta1 (corresp. with Sk. anta (adj.) or antya; also in doublet anañca, see ākāsɔânañca and viññāṇɔânañca); D i.23, 34 = D iii.224, 262 sq.; Sn 468 (˚pañña); Dh 179, 180 (˚gocara having an unlimited range of mental vision, cp. DhA iii.197); J i.178. -- 2. extreme, last, worst J ii.440 (C. hīna, lāmaka); see also anta1 4. -- acc. as adv. in ekantaŋ extremely, very much, "utterly" Dh 228 etc. See eka. Anta
Anta3
(nt.) [Vedic āntra, contr. fr. antara inner = Lat. interus, Gr. e)/ntera intestines] the lower intestine, bowels, mesentery It 89; J i.66, 260 (˚vaddhi -- maŋsa etc.); Vism 258; DhA i.80.

-- gaṇṭhi twisting of the bowels, lit. "a knot in the intestines" Vin i.275 (˚ābādha). -- guṇa [see guṇa2 = gula1] the intestinal tract, the bowels S ii.270; A iv.132; Kh iii. = Miln 26; Vism 42; KhA 57. -- mukha the anus J iv.402. -- vaṭṭi = ˚guṇa Vism 258. Antaka
Antaka
[Vedic antaka] being at the end, or making an end, Ep. of Death or Māra Vin i.21; S i.72; Th 2, 59 (expld by ThA 65 as lāmaka va Māra, thus taken = anta2); Dh 48 (= maraṇa -- sankhāto antako DhA ii.366), 288 (= maraṇa DhA iii.434). Antamaso
Antamaso
(adv.) [orig. abl. of antama, *Sk. antamaśah; cp. BSk. antaśah as same formation fr. anta, in same meaning ("even") Av. Ś. i.314; Divy 161] even Vin iii. 260; iv.123; D i.168; M iii.127; A v.195; J ii.129; DA i.170; SnA 35; VvA 155. Antara
Antara
(adj.) [Vedic antara, cp. Gr. e)/ntera = Sk. antra (see anta3), Lat. interus fr. prep. inter. See also ante & anto]. Primary meanings are "inside" and "in between"; as adj. "inner"; in prep. use & in cpds. "inside, in between". Further development of meaning is with a view of contrasting the (two) sides of the inside relation, i. e. having a space between, different from; thus nt. antaraŋ difference.

I. (Adj. -- n) 1. (a) inner, having or being inside It 83 (tayo antarā malā three inward stains); esp. as -- ˚ in cpds. āmis˚ with greed inside, greedy, selfish Vin i.303; dos˚ with anger inside, i. e. angry Vin ii.249; D iii.237; M i.123; PvA 78 (so read for des˚). Abl. antarato from within It 83. (b) in between, distant; dvādasa yojan˚ antaraŋ ṭhānaŋ PvA 139 139. -- 2. In noun -- function (nt.): (a). spatial: the inside (of) Vv 361 (pītantara a yellow cloak or inside garment = pītavaṇṇa uttariya VvA 116); Dāvs i.10 (dīpɔ antara -- vāsin living on the island); DhA i.358 (kaṇṇa -- chidd˚ the inside of the ear; VvA 50 (kacch˚ inner room or apartment). Therefore also "space in between", break J v.352 (= chidda C.), & obstacle, hindrance, i. g. what stands in between: see cpds. and antara -- dhāyati (for antaraŋ dhāyati). -- (b). temporal: an interval of time, hence time in general, & also a specified time, i. e. occasion. As interval in Buddhantaraŋ the time between the death of one Buddha and the appearance of another, PvA 10, 14, 21, 47, 191 etc. As time: It 121 (etasmiŋ antare in that time or at this occasion); Pv i.1011 (dīghaŋ antaraŋ = dīghaŋ kālaŋ PvA 52); PvA 5 (etasmiŋ antare at this time, just then). As occasion: J v.287; Pug 55 (eḷaka -- m -- antaraŋ occasion of getting rain). S i.20, quoted DA i.34, (mañ ca tañ ca kiŋ antaraŋ what is there between me and you?) C. expls. kiŋ kāraṇā. Mrs. Rh. D. in trsln. p. 256 "of me it is and thee (this talk) -- now why is this"; J vi.8 (assa antaraŋ na passiŋsu they did not see a diff. in him). -- 3. Phrases: antaraŋ karoti (a) to keep away from or at a distance (trs. and intrs.), to hold aloof, lit. "to make a space in between" M iii.14; J. iv.2 (˚katvā leaving behind); Pug A 231 (ummāraŋ a. katvā staying away from a threshold); also adverbially: dasa yojanāni a. katvā at a distance of 10 y. PvA 139. -- (b.) to remove, destroy J vi.56 (v. l. BB. antarāyaŋ karoti).

II. In prep. use (˚ -- ) with acc. (direction) or loc. (rest): inside (of), in the midst of, between, during (cp. III. use of cases). (a.) w. acc.: antaragharaŋ paviṭṭha gone into the house Miln 11. -- (b.) w. loc.: antaraghare nisīdanti (inside the house) Vin ii.213; ˚dīpake in the centre of the island J i.240; ˚dvāre in the door J v.231; ˚magge on the road (cp. antarāmagge) PvA 109; ˚bhatte in phrase ekasmiŋ yeva a. during one meal J i 19 = DhA i.249; ˚bhattasmiŋ id. DhA iv.12; ˚vīthiyan in the middle of the road PvA 96. ˚satthīsu between the thighs Vin ii.161 (has antarā satthīnaŋ) = J i.218.

III. Adverbial use of cases, instr. antarena in between D i.56; S iv.59, 73; J i.393; PvA 13 (kāl˚ in a little while, na kālantarena ib. 19). Often in combn. antarantarena (c. gen.) right in between (lit. in between the space of) DhA i.63, 358. -- loc. antare in, inside of, in between ( -- ˚ or c. gen. KhA 81 (sutt˚ in the Sutta); DhA iii.416 (mama a.); PvA 56, 63 (rukkh˚). Also as antarantare right inside, right in the middle of (c. gen.) KhA 57; DhA i.59 (vanasaṇḍassa a.). -- abl. antarā (see also sep. article of antarā) in combn. antarantarā from time to time, occasionally; successively time after time Sn p. 107; DhA ii.86; iv.191; PvA 272.

IV. anantara (adj.) having or leaving nothing in between i. e. immediately following, incessant, next, adjoining J iv.139; Miln 382 (solid; DhA i.397; PvA 63 (tadantaraŋ immediately hereafter), 92 (immed. preceding), 97 (next in caste). See also abbhantara.

-- atīta gone past in the meantime J ii.243. -- kappa an intermediary kappa (q. v.) D i 54. -- kāraṇa a cause of impediment, hindrance, obstacle Pug A 231 -- cakka "the intermediate round", i. e. in astrology all that belongs to the intermediate points of the compass Miln 178. -- cara one who goes in between or inside, i. e. a robber S iv.173. -- bāhira (adj.) inside & outside J i.125. -- bhogika one who has power (wealth, influence) inside the kings dominion or under the king, a subordinate chieftain (cp. antara -- raṭṭha) Vin iii.47 -- raṭṭha an intermediate kingdom, rulership of a subordinate prince J v.135. -- vāsa an interregnum Dpvs v.80. -- vāsaka "inner or intermediate garment", one of the 3 robes of a Buddhist bhikkhu (viz. the sanghāṭī, uttarāsanga & a.) Vin i.94, 289; ii.272. Cf. next. -- sāṭaka an inner or lower garment [cp. Sk. antarīya id.], under garment, i. e. the one between the outer one & the body VvA 166 (q. v.). Antaraŋsa
Antaraŋsa
[B.Sk. antarâŋsa; antara + aŋsa] "in between the shoulders", i. e. the chest J v.173 = vi.171 (phrase lohitakkho vihatɔ antaraŋso). Antaraṭṭhaka
Antaraṭṭhaka
(adj.) [antara + aṭṭhaka] only in phrases rattisu antaraṭṭhakāsu and antaraṭṭhake hima -- pātasamaye (in which antara functions as prep. c. loc., according to antara II. b.) i. e. in the nights (& in the time of the falling of snow) between the eighths (i. e. the eighth day before & after the full moon: see aṭṭhaka2). First phrase at Vin i.31, 288; iii 31; second at M i.79 (cp. p. 536 where Trenckner divides anta -- raṭṭhaka); A i.136 (in nom.); J i.390; Miln 396. Antaradhāna
Antaradhāna
(nt.) [fr. antaradhāyati] disappearance A i.58 (saddhammassa); ii.147; iii.176 sq.; Miln 133; Dhs 645, 738, 871. Cp. ˚dhāyana. Antaradhāyati
Antaradhāyati
[antara + dhāyati] to disappear Sn 449 (˚dhāyatha 3rd sg. med.); Vv 8128 (id.); J i.119 = DhA i.248; DhA iv.191 (ppr. ˚dhāyamāna & aor. dhāyi) PvA 152, 217, (˚dhāyi), 245; VvA 48. -- ppr. antarahita (q. v.). -- Caus. antaradhāpeti to cause to disappear, to destroy J i.147; ii.415; PvA 123. -- 48 -- Antaradhāyana
Antaradhāyana
(nt.) [fr. antaradhāyati] disappearance DhA iv.191. (v. l. ˚adhāna). Antarayati
Antarayati
[cp. denom. fr. antara] to go or step in be- tween, ger. antaritvā ( = antarayitvā) J i.218. Antarahita
Antarahita
(adj.) [pp. of antaradhāyati] 1. disappeared, gone, left D i.222. M i.487. Miln 18. PvA 245. -- 2 in phrase anantarahitāya bhūmiyā (loc) on the bare soil (lit. on the ground with nothing put in between it & the person lying down, i. e. on an uncovered or unobstructed ground) Vin i.47; ii.209; M ii.57. Antarā
Antarā
(adv.) [abl. or adv. formation fr. antara; Vedic antarā.] prep. (c. gen. acc. or loc.), pref. (˚ -- ) and adv. "in between" (of space & time), midway, inside; during, meanwhile, between. On interpretation of term see DA i.34 sq. -- (1). (prep.) c. acc. (of the two points compared as termini; cp. B.Sk. antarā ca Divy 94 etc.) D i.1 (antarā ca Rājagahaŋ antarā ca Nāḷandaŋ between R. and N.). -- c. gen. & loc. Vin ii.161 (satthīnaŋ between the thighs, where id. p. at J i.218 has antara -- satthīsu); A ii.245 (satthīnaŋ. but v. l. satthimhi). -- (2) (adv.) meanwhile Sn 291, 694; It 85; Dh 237. -- occasionally Miln 251. -- (3). (pref.) see cpds.

-- kathā "in between talk, talk for pastime, chance conversation, D ii.1, 8, 9; S i.79; iv.281; A iii.167; Sn p. 115; DA i.49 and freq. passim. -- gacchati to come in between, to prevent J vi.295. -- parinibbāyin an Anāgāmin who passes away in the middle of his term of life in some particular heaven D iii.237; A i.233; Pug 16. -- magge (loc.) on the road, on the way J i.253; Miln 16; DhA ii.21; iii.337; PvA 151, 258, 269, 273 (cp. antara˚). -- maraṇa premature death DhA i.409; PvA 136. -- muttaka one who is released in the meantime Vin ii.167. Antarāpaṇa
Antarāpaṇa
(nt.) [antarā + paṇa "in between the shopping or trading"] place where the trading goes on, bazaar J i.55; vi.52; Miln 1, 330; DhA i.181. Antarāya
Antarāya1
[antara + aya from i, lit. "coming in between"] obstacle, hindrance, impediment to ( -- ˚); prevention, bar; danger, accident to ( -- ). There are 10 dangers (to or from) enumd. at Vin i.112, 169 etc., viz. rāja˚, cora˚, aggi˚, udaka˚, manussa˚, amanussa˚, vāḷa˚, siriŋsapa˚, jīvita˚, brahmacariya˚. In B.Sk. 7 at Divy 544, viz. rājā -- caura -- manuṣy -- amanuṣya -- vyāḍ -- agny -- udakaŋ. -- D i.3, 25, 26; A iii.243, 306; iv.320; Sn 691, 692; Dh 286 ( = jīvit˚ DhA iii.431); J i.62, 128; KhA 181; DhA ii 52; VvA 1 = PvA 1 (hat˚ removing the obstacles) -- antarāyaŋ karoti to keep away from, hinder, hold back, prevent, destroy Vin i.15; J vi.171; Vism 120; PvA 20.

-- kara one who causes impediments or bars the way, an obstructor D i.227; S i.34; A i.161; Pv iv.322. Antarāya
Antarāya2
(adv.) [dat. of antara or formation fr. antara + ger. of i?) in the meantime Sn 1120 (cp Nd2 58) = antarā Sn A 603. Antarāyika
Antarāyika
(adj.) [fr. antarāya] causing an obstacle, forming an impediment Vin i.94 = ii.272; M i.130; S ii.226; ThA 288. Antarāyikin
Antarāyikin
(adj. -- n.) [cp. antarāyika] one who meets with an obstacle, finding difficulties Vin iv.280 (an˚ = asati antarāye). Antarāḷa
Antarāḷa
(nt.) [Sk antarāla] interior, interval Dāvs i.52; iii.53 (nabh˚). Antarika
Antarika
(adj.) [fr. antara] "being in between", i. e. - 1. intermediate, next, following: see an˚. -- 2. distant, lying in between PvA 173 (aneka -- yojan˚ ṭhāna). See also f. antarikā. -- 3. inside: see antarikā. -- anantarika with no interval, succeeding, immediately following, next Vin ii.165, 212 (ān˚); iv.234. Antarikā
Antarikā
(f.) [abstr. fr. antarika] "what lies in between or near", i. e. -- 1. the inside of Vin iv.272 (bhājan˚). -> 2. the neighbourhood, region of ( -- ˚), sphere, compass Vin iii.39 (ur˚, angul˚); J i.265 (yakkhassa sīm˚ inside the yṡ sphere of influence). -- 3. interval, interstice Vin ii.116 (sutt˚ in lace); A i.124 (vijj˚ the interval of lightning). Antalikkha
Antalikkha
(nt.) [Vedic antarikṣa = antari -- kṣa (kṣi), lit. situated in between sky and earth] the atmosphere or air D ii.15; A iii.239; iv.199; Sn 222, 688; Dh 127 = Miln 150 = PvA 104; Pv i.31 (= vehāyasa -- saññita a. PvA 14); KhA 166.

-- ga going through the air A i.215. -- cara walking through the air Vin i.21; D i.17; S i.111; J v.267; DA i.110. Antavant
Antavant
(ādj.) [anta1 + ˚vant] having an end, finite D i.22, 31, 187; Ps i.151 sq.; 157; Dhs 1099, 1117, 1175; Miln 145. -- anantavant endless, infinite A v.193 (loka). See also loka. Anti
Anti
(indecl.) [Vedic anti = Lat ante, Gr. a)nti/, Goth. and; Ags. and -- , Ger. ant -- , ent -- ] adv. & prep. c. gen.: opposite, near J v.399 (tavɔ antiŋ āgatā, read as tavɔ anti -- m -- āgatā; C. santikaŋ), 400, 404; vi.565 (sāmikassɔ anti = antike C.). -- Cp. antika. Antika
Antika
(adj. -- n.) -- 1. [der fr. anti] near KhA 217; nt. neighbourhood Kh viii.1. (odak˚); J vi.565 (antike loc. = anti near). -- 2. [der fr. anta = Sk. antya] being at the end, final, finished, over S i.130 (purisā etad -- antikā, v. l. SS antiyā: men are (to me) at the end for that, i. e. men do not exist any more for me, for the purpose of begetting sons. Antima
Antima
(adj.) [Cp. superl. of anta] last, final (used almost exclusively with ref. to the last & final reincarnation; thus in combn. with deha & sarīra, the last body) D ii.15; Dh 351; It 50 (antimaŋ dehaŋ dhāreti), 53 (id.); Vv 512; Sn 478 (sarīraŋ antimaŋ dhāreti) 502; Miln 122, 148; VvA 106 (sarīrɔ antima -- dhārin); Sdhp 278.

-- dehadhara one who wears his last body It 101 (dhāra T, ˚dhara v. l.); VvA 163. -- dhārin = prec. S i.14, 53 (+ khīṇāsava); ii.278; It 32, 40; Sn 471. -- vatthu "the last thing", i. e. the extreme, final or worst (sin) Vin i. 121, 135, 167, 320. -- sarīra the last body; (adj.) having ones last rebirth S i.210 (Buddho a˚ -- sarīro); A ii.37; Sn 624; Dh 352, 400; DhA iv.166 (= koṭiyaŋ ṭhito attabhāvo). Ante˚
Ante˚
(pref.) [Sk. antaḥ, with change of -- aḥ to -- e, instead of the usual -- o, prob. through interpreting it as loc. of anta] near, inside, within; only in foll. cpds.: ˚pura (nt.) "inner town", the king's palace, esp. its inner apartments, i. e. harem [Sk. antaḥpura, cp. also P. antopura] Vin i.75, 269; A v.81; J ii.125; iv.472; Miln 1; PvA 23, 81, 280; ˚purikā harem woman DhsA 403; ˚vāsika one who lives in, i. e. lodges or lives with his master or teacher, a pupil Vin i.60; iii.25; S i.180; iv.136; J i. 166; ii.278; iii.83, 463; PvA 12; VvA 138; ˚vāsin = ˚vāsika Vin iii.66; D i.1, 45, 74, 78, 88, 108, 157; M iii.116; DA i.36. Anto
Anto
(indecl.) [Sk. antaḥ; Av antarə Lat. inter, Oir. etar between, Ohg. untar; Idg. *entar, compar. of *en (in) = inner, inside] prep. inside, either c. acc. denoting direction = into, or c. loc. denoting place where = in. As prefix (˚ -- ) in, within, inside, inner (see cpds.) (1.) prep. c. acc. anto nivesanaŋ gata gone into the house J i.158; anto jālaŋ pavisati go into the net DhA iii.175; anto gāmaŋ pavisati to go into the village DhA ii.273; anto nagaraŋ pavisati DhA ii.89; PvA 47. -- (2) c. loc. anto gabbhe J ii.182; gāme DhA ii.52; gehe DhA ii.84; nadiyaŋ J vi.278; nivesane J ii.323; vasse in the rainy season J iv.242; vimānasmiŋ Pv i.101; sattāhe inside of a week PvA 55.

-- koṭisanthāra "house of the Golden Pavement" J iv.113. -- gadha (˚gata? Kern Toev.) in phrase ˚hetu, by inner reason or by reason of its intensity PvA 10; VvA 12. -- jana "the inside people", i. e. people belonging to the house, the family ( = Lat. familia) D iii.61 (opp. to servants); A i.152; J vi.301; DA i.300. -- jāla the inside of the net, the net DhA iv.41. -- jālikata "in -- netted", gone into the net D i.45; DA i.127. -- nijjhāna inner conflagration PvA 18. -- nimugga altogether immersed D i.75; A iii.26. -- parisoka inner grief Ps i.38. -- pura = antepura J i.262. -- mano "turning ones mind inside", thoughtful, melancholy Vin iii.19. -- bhavika being inside Miln 95. -- rukkhatā being among trees J i.7. -- vasati to inhabit, live within S iv.136. -- vaḷañjanaka (parijana) indoorpeople J v.118. -- vassa the rainy season (lit. the interval of the r. s.) VvA 66. -- vihāra the inside of the V. DhA i.50 (˚âbhimukhī turning towards etc.), -- samorodha barricading within Dhs 1157 (so read for anta˚, cp. Dhs. trsl. 311). -- soka inner grief Ps i.38. -- 49 -- Andu
Andu
[cp. Sk. andu, andū & anduka] a chain, fetter Vin i.108 = iii.249 (tiṇ˚); D i.245; J i.21 (˚ghara prisonhouse); DhA iv.54 (˚bandhana). Andha
Andha
(adj.) [Vedic andha, Lat. andabata (see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.), other etym. doubtful] 1. (lit.) blind, blinded, blindfolded J i.216 (dhūm˚); Pv iv.148; PvA 3. -- dark, dull, blinding M iii.151 (˚andhaŋ adv. dulled); Sn 669 (Ep. of timisa, like Vedic andhaŋ tamaḥ); DhA ii.49 (˚vana dark forest). -- 2. (fig.) mentally blinded, dull of mind, foolish, not seeing D i.191 (+ acakkhuka), 239 (˚veṇi, reading & meaning uncertain); A i.128; Th 2, 394 ( = bāla ThA 258). See cpds. ˚karaṇa, ˚kāra, ˚bāla, ˚bhūta.

-- ākula blinded, foolish Vv 849 ( = paññācakkhuno abhāvena VvA 337). -- karaṇa blinding, making blind, causing bewilderment (fig.), confusing It 82 (+ acakkhukaraṇa); Miln 113 (pañha, + gambhīra). -- kāra blindness (lit. & fig), darkness, dullness, bewilderment Vin i.16; D ii.12; A i.56; ii.54; iii.233; J iii.188; Th 1, 1034; Dh 146; Sn 763; Vv 214 (= avijj˚ VvA 106); Pug 30; Dhs 617; DA i.228; VvA 51, 53, 116, 161; PvA 6; Sdhp 14, 280. -- tamo deep darkness (lit. & fig.) S v.443; It 84 (v. l.; T. andhaŋ tamaŋ); J vi.247. -- bāla blinded by folly, foolish, dull of mind, silly J i.246, 262; vi.337; DhA ii.43, 89; iii.179; VvA 67; PvA 4, 264. -- bhūta blinded (fig.), mentally blind, not knowing, ignorant S iv.21; A ii.72; J vi.139 (spelled ˚būta); Dh 59, 174 (= paññā -- cakkhuno abhāvena DhA iii.175). -- vesa "blind form", disguise J iii.418. Andhaka
Andhaka
[fr. andha] "blind fly", i. e. dark or yellow fly or gad -- fly Sn 20 ( = kāṇa -- makkhikānaŋ adhivacanaŋ SnA 33). Anna
Anna
(nt.) [Vedic anna, orig. pp. of adati to eat] "eating", food, esp. boiled rice, but includes all that is eaten as food, viz. odana, kummāsa, sattu, maccha, maŋsa (rice, gruel, flour, fish, meat) Nd1 372 = 495. Anna is spelt aṇṇa in combns aparɔ aṇṇa and pubbɔ aṇṇa. Under dhañña (Nd2 314) are distinguished 2 kinds, viz. raw, natural cereals (pubbɔ aṇṇaŋ: sāli, vīhi, yava, godhūma, kangu, varaka, kudrūsaka) and boiled, prepared food (aparɔ aṇṇaŋ: sūpeyya curry). SnA 378 (on Sn 403) expls. anna by yāgubhattâdi. -- D i.7; A i.107, 132; ii.70, 85, 203; Sn 82, 240, 403, 924; J iii.190; Pug 51; Sdhp 106, 214.

-- āpa food & water Sdhp 100. -- da giving food Sn 297. -- pāna food & water, eating & drinking, to eat & to drink Sn 485, 487; Pv i.52, 82; KhA 207, 209; PvA 7, 8, 30, 31, 43. Annaya
Annaya
in dur˚ see anvaya. Anvakāsi
Anvakāsi
3rd sg. aor. of anukassati 2: drew out, removed, threw down Th 1, 869 ( = khipi, chaḍḍesi C.). Anvakkhara
Anvakkhara
(adj.) [anu + akkhara] "according to the syl- table", syll. after syll., also a mode of reciting by syllables Vin iv.15, cp. 355. Cp. anupadaŋ. Anvagā
Anvagā
3rd sg. aor. of anugacchati Mhvs 7, 10. Also in assim. form annagā J v.258. Anvagū
Anvagū
3rd pl. aor. of anugacchati S i.39; Sn 586. Anvaḍḍhamāsaŋ
Anvaḍḍhamāsaŋ
(adv.) [anu + aḍḍha + māsa] every fort- night, twice a month M ii.8; Vin iv.315 ( = anuposathikaŋ); DhA i.162; ii.25. Anvattha
Anvattha
(adj.) [anu + attha] according to the sense, ans- wering to the matter, having scnse ThA 6 (˚saññābhāva). Anvadeva
Anvadeva
(adv.) [anva -- d -- eva with euphonic d.; like samma- d -- eva corresponding to Sk. anvag -- eva] behind, after, later D i.172; M iii.172; S v.1 (spelt anudeva); A i.11; v. 214; It 34. Anvaya
Anvaya
(n. -- adj.) [Vedic anvaya in diff. meaning; fr. anu + i, see anveti & anvāya] 1. (n.) conformity, accordance D ii. 83 = iii.100; M i.69 (dhamm˚ logical conclusion of); S ii.58; D iii.226 (anvaye ñāṇaŋ); Pv ii.113 (tassa kammassa anvāya, v. l. BB anvaya & anvāya; accordingly, according to = paccayā PvA 147); PvA 228 (anvayato, adv. in accordance). -- 2. (adj.) following, having the same course, behaving according to, consequential, in conformity with ( -- ˚) D i.46 (tad˚); M i.238 (kāyo citt˚ acting in conformity to the mind, obeying the mind); Sn 254 (an˚ inconsistent); It 79 (tass˚). -- dur˚ spelt durannaya conforming with difficulty, hard to manage or to find out Dh 92 (gati = na sakkā paññāpetuŋ DhA ii.173); Sn 243, 251 (= duviññāpaya SnA 287 dunneyya ibid. 293). Anvayatā
Anvayatā
(f.) [abstr. to anvaya] conformity, accordance M i.500 (kāy˚ giving in to the body). Anvahaŋ
Anvahaŋ
(adv.) [anu + aha] every day, daily Dāvs iv.8. Anvāgacchati
Anvāgacchati
[anu + ā + gacchati] 1. to go along after, to follow, run after, pursue; aor. anvāgacchi Pv. iv.56 ( = anubandhi PvA 260). -- 2. to come back again J i.454 (ger. ˚gantvāna). -- pp. anvāgata (q. v.). Anvāgata
Anvāgata
[pp. of anvāgacchati] having pursued, attained; endowed with Th 1, 63; J iv.385; v.4. Anvādisati
Anvādisati
[anu + ā + disati] to advise, dedicate, assign; imper. ˚disāhi Pv ii.26 ( = uddissa dehi PvA 80); iii.28 (= ādisa PvA 181). Anvādhika
Anvādhika
(adj.) [derivation uncertain] a tailoring term. Only at Vin i.297. Rendered (Vinaya Texts ii.232) by ʻ half and half ʼ; that is a patchwork, half of new material, half of old. Bdhgh's note (see the text, p. 392) adds that the new material must be cut up. Anvāmaddati
Anvāmaddati
[anu + ā + maddati] to squeeze, wring J iii. 481 (galakaŋ anvāmaddi wrung his neck; vv. ll. anvānumaṭṭi & anvāvamaddi; C. gīvaŋ maddi). Anvāya
Anvāya
[ger. of anveti; cp. anvaya] undergoing, experiencing, attaining; as prep. (c. acc.) in consequence of, through, after D i.13 (ātappaŋ by means of self -- sacrifice), 97 (saŋvāsaŋ as a result of their cohabitation); J i.56 (buddhiŋ), 127 (piyasaŋvāsaŋ), 148 (gabbhaparipākaŋ). Often in phrase vuddhiŋ anvāya growing up, e. g. J i.278; iii. 126; DhA ii.87. Anvāyika
Anvāyika
(adj. -- n.) [fr. anvāya] following; one who follows, a companion D iii.169; Nd2 59; J iii.348. Anvārohati
Anvārohati
[anu + ā + rohati] to go up to, visit, ascend J iv.465 (aor. anvāruhi). -- 50 -- Anvāvassa
Anvāvassa
at J v.317 should be read with v. l. BB as anovassa absence of rain. Anvāviṭṭha
Anvāviṭṭha
[pp. of anvāvisati] possessed (by evil spirits) S i.114. Anvāvisati
Anvāvisati
[anu + ā + visati] to go into, to take posses- sion of, to visit M i.326; S i.67; Miln 156. -- pp. anvāviṭṭha (q. v.). Cp. adhimuccati. Anvāsatta
Anvāsatta
[pp. of anu + ā + sañj, cp. anusatta = Sk. anusakta] clung on to, befallen by (instr.), attached to A iv.356 (v. l. anvāhata), cp. Ud 35 (anvāsanna q. v.). See also foll. Anvāsattatā
Anvāsattatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. anvāsatta] being attacked by, falling a prey to (instr.), attachment to DhA i.287 (in same context as anvāsatta A iv.356 & anvāsanna Ud 35). Anvāsanna
Anvāsanna
[pp. of anu + ā + sad] endowed with, pos- sessed of, attacked by, Ud 35 (doubtfull; v. l. ajjhāpanna), = A iv.356 which has anvāsatta. Anvāssavati
Anvāssavati
[anu + ā + savati, sru] to stream into, to attack, befall D i.70; A iii.99; Pug 20, 58. Anvāhata
Anvāhata
[pp. of anu + ā + han] struck, beaten; per- plexed Dh 39 (˚cetasa). Anvāhiṇḍati
Anvāhiṇḍati
[anu + ā + hiṇḍati] to wander to (acc.) A iv.374, 376 [BSk. same, e. g. Divy 68 etc.]. Anveti
Anveti
[cp. anu + eti, from i] to follow, approach, go with Sn 1103 ( = anugacchati anvāyiko hoti Nd2 59); Dh 1 (= kāyikaŋ . . . dukkhaŋ anugacchati DhA i.24), 2, 71, 124; perhaps at Pv ii.620 (with v. l. BB at PvA 99) for anvesi (see anvesati; expld. by anudesi = was anxious for, helped, instructed). Anvesa
Anvesa
[from next] seeking, searching, investigation, M i.140 (˚ŋ nɔ âdhigacchanti do not find). Anvesati
Anvesati
[anu + esati] to look, for search, seek S i.112 (ppr. anvesaŋ = pariyesamāna C.); Cp iii.117 (ppr. anvesanto). -- aor. anvesi [Sk. anveṣi fr. icchati] Pv ii.620 (? perhaps better with v. l. PvA 99 as anventi of anveti). Anvesin
Anvesin
[anu -- esin] (adj.) striving after, seeking, wishing for Sn 965 (kusala˚). Anha
Anha
[Vedic ahan] see pubbanha, majjhanha, sāyanha. Cp. aha. Apa˚
Apa˚
[Vedic apa; Idg. *apo = Gr. a)po/, Av. apa, Lat. ab from *ap (cp. aperio); Goth. af, Ger. ab, Ags. E. of. -> A compar. form fr. apa is apara "further away"] Well-defined directional prefix, meaning "away from, off". Usually as base -- prefix (except with ā), & very seldom in compn. with other modifying prefixes (like sam, abhi etc.). -> 1. apa = Vedic apa (Idg. *apo): apeti to go away = Gr. a)/peimi, Lat. abeo, Goth. afiddja; apeta gone away, rid; ˚kaḍḍhati to draw away, remove; ˚kamati walk away; ˚gacchati go away; ˚nidhāti put away (= a)potiqhmi, abdo); ˚nudati push away; ˚neti lead away; ˚vattati turn away (= āverto); ˚sakkati step aside; ˚harati take away. -> 2. apa = Vedic ava (Idg. *aue; see ava for details). There exists a widespread confusion between the two preps. apa & ava, favoured both by semantic (apa = away, ava = down, cp. E. off) & phonetic affinity (p softened to b, esp. in BB Mss., & then to v, as b > v is frequent, e. g. bya˚ > vya˚ etc.). Thus we find in Pāli apa where Vedic and later literary Sk. have ava in the foll. instances: apakanti, ˚kassati, ˚kirati, ˚gata, ˚cāra, ˚jhāyati, ˚thaṭa, ˚dāna, ˚dhāreti, ˚nata, ˚nāmeti, ˚nīta, ˚lekhana, ˚loketi, ˚vadati. Apakaḍḍhati
Apakaḍḍhati
[apa + kaḍḍhati, cp. Sk. apa -- karṣati] to draw away, take off, remove D i.180; iii.127; DhA ii.86. -> Caus. apakaḍḍhāpeti J i.342; iv.415; Miln 34. -- Cp. apakassati; & see pakattheti. Apakata
Apakata
[pp. of apakaroti] put off, done away, in ājīvik âpakata being without a living M i.463 (the usual phrase being ˚apagata); Miln 279 (id.). At It 89 the reading of same phrase is ājīvikā pakatā (v. l. ā˚ vakatā). Apakataññu
Apakataññu
(adj.) [a + pa + kataññu] ungrateful Vin ii.199. Apakantati
Apakantati
[apa + kantati, Sk. ava + kṛntati] to cut off Th 2, 217 (gale = gīvaŋ chindati ThA 178; Kern, Toev. corrects to kabale a.). Apakaroti
Apakaroti
[apa + karoti, cp. Sk. apakaroti & apakṛta in same meaning] to throw away, put off; hurt, offend, slight; possibly in reading T. apakiritūna at Th 2, 447 (q. v.). -- pp. apakata (q. v.). Cp. apakāra. Apakassati
Apakassati
[Sk. apa -- & ava -- kaṛṣati, cp. apakaḍḍhati] to throw away, remove Sn 281 (v.l. BB & SnA ava˚; expld. by niddhamati & nikkaḍḍhati SnA 311). -- ger. apakassa Sn ii.198 = Miln 389. See also apakāsati. Apakāra & ˚ka
Apakāra
& ˚ka [cf. Sk. apakāra & apakaroti] injury, mischief; one who injures or offends DhA iii.63; Sdhp 283. Apakāsati
Apakāsati
at Vin ii.204 is to be read as apakassati and interpreted as "draw away, distract, bring about a split or dissension (of the Sangha)". The v. l. on p. 325 justifies the correction (apakassati) as well as Bdhgh's expln. "parisaŋ ākaḍḍhanti". -- Cp. A iii.145 & see avapakāsati. The reading at the id. p. at A v.74 is avakassati (combd. w. vavakassati, where Vin ii.204 has avapakāsati), which is much to be preferred (see vavakassati). Apakiritūna
Apakiritūna
at Th 2, 447 T (reading of C. is abhi˚) is explained ThA 271 to mean apakiritvā chaḍḍetvā throwing away, slighting, offending. The correct etym = Sk. avakirati (ava + kṛ2 to strew, cast out) in sense "to cast off, reject", to which also belongs kirāta in meaning "cast off" i. e. man of a so -- called low tribe. See also avakirati 2. Apakkamati
Apakkamati
[cp. Sk. apakramati, apa + kram] to go away, depart, go to one side J iii.27; Sdhp 294. -- aor. apakkami Pv iv.75; ger. apakkamitvā PvA 43, 124, & apakkamma Pv ii.928. Apagacchati
Apagacchati
[apa + gam] to go away, turn aside DhA i.401 (˚gantvā). -- pp. apagata (q. v.). Apagata
Apagata
[pp. of apagacchati] 1. gone, gone away from (c. abl.), removed; deceased, departed It 112; PvA 39, 63 ( = peta), 64 (= gata). -- 2. (˚ -- ) freq. as prefix, meaning without, lit. having lost, removed from; free from Vin ii.129 (˚gabbhā having lost her foetus, having a miscarriage); J i.61 (˚vattha without clothes); PvA 38 (˚soka free from grief), 47 (˚lajja not shy), 219 (˚viññāṇa without feeling). -- Cp. apakata. Apagabbha
Apagabbha
(adj.) [a + pa + gabbha] not entering another womb, i. e. not destined to another rebirth Vin iii.3. Apagama
Apagama
[Sk. apagama] going away, disappearance Sdhp 508. Apanga
Apanga
(apānga) [Sk. apānga] the outer corner of the eye J iii.419 (asitâpangin black -- eyed); iv.219 (bahi˚). Spelt avanga at Vin ii.267, where the phrase avangaŋ karoti, i. e. expld. by Bdhgh. ibid p. 327 as "avangadese adhomukhaŋ lekhaŋ karonti". According to Kern, Toev. 20, Bdhgh's expln is not quite correct, since avanga stands here in the meaning of "a coloured mark upon the body" (cp. PW. apānga). Apacaya
Apacaya
[fr. apa + ci] falling off, diminution (opp. ācaya gathering, heaping up), unmaking, esp. loss (of wordliness), decrease (of possibility of rebirth Vin ii.2 = iii.21 = iv.213; cp. J iii.342; S ii.95 (kāyassa ācayo pi apacayo pi); A iv.280 = Vin ii.259 (opp. ācaya); J iii.342 (sekho ˚ena na tappati); Vbh 106, 319, 326, 330.

-- gāmin going towards decrease, "making for the undoing of rebirth" (Dhs trsl. 82) A v.243, 277; Dhs 277, 339, 505, 1014; Vbh 12, 16 sq.; Nett 87 (cp. Kvu 156). -- 51 -- Apacāyati
Apacāyati
[fr. apa -- ci, cp. cināti & cayati, with diff. meaning in Sk.; better expld. perhaps as denom. fr. *apacāya in meaning of apacāyana, cp. apacita] to honour, respect, pay reverence D i.91 (pūjeti +); J iii.82. -> Pot. apace (for apaceyya, may be taken to apacināti 2) A iv.245; ThA 72 (here to apacināti 1). -- pp. apacita (q. v.). Apacāyana
Apacāyana
(nt.) [abstr. fr. apa + cāy, which is itself a der. fr. ci, cināti] honouring, honour, worship, reverence J i.220; v.326; DA i.256 (˚kamma); VvA 24 (˚ŋ karoti = añjalikaŋ karoti); PvA 104 (˚kara, adj.), 128 (+ paricariya). Apacāyika
Apacāyika
(adj.) [fr. *apacāya, cp. B.Sk. apacāyaka MVastu i.198; Divy 293] honouring, respecting J iv.94 (vaddha˚, cp. vaddhâpacāyin); Pv ii.7 8 (jeṭṭha˚); iv.324 (id.). In B.Sk. the corresp. phrase is jyeṣṭhâpacayaka. Apacāyin
Apacāyin
(adj.) [fr. *apacāya; cp. apacāyika] honouring, paying homage, revering Sn 325 (vaddha˚ = vaddhānaŋ apaciti karaṇena SnA 332) = Dh 109; J i.47, 132, 201; ii.299; v.325; Miln 206; Sdhp 549. Apacāra
Apacāra
[fr. apa + car, cp. Sk. apa & abhi -- carati] falling off, fault, wrong doing J vi.375. Apacita
Apacita
[pp. of apacayati or apacināti] honoured, wors- hipped, esteemed Th 1, 186; J ii.169; iv.75; Vv 510 ( = pūjita VvA 39); 3511 (cp. VvA 164); Miln 21. Apaciti
Apaciti
(f.) [Vedic apaciti in diff. meaning, viz. expiation] honour, respect, esteem, reverence Th 1, 589; J i.220; ii.435; iii.82; iv.308; vi.88; Miln 180, 234 (˚ŋ karoti), 377 (pūjana +); SnA 332 (˚karaṇa). Cp. apacāyana. Apacināti
Apacināti
[apa + cināti] 1. [in meaning of Sk. apacīyate cp. P. upaciyyati Pass. of upacināti] to get rid of, do away with, (cp. apacaya), diminish, make less S iii.89 (opp. ācināti); Th 1, 807; J iv.172 (apacinethɔ eva kāmāni = viddhaŋseyyatha C.). Here belong prob. aor. 3rd pl. apaciyiŋsu (to be read for upacciŋsu) at J vi. 187 (akkhīni a. "the eyes gave out") and Pot. pres. apace ThA 72 (on v.40). -- 2. [= apacayati] to honour, esteem; observe, guard Vin i.264 (apacinayamāna cīvaraŋ (?) v. l apacitiyamāna; trsl. guarding his claim is, Vin Texts); M i.324 (see detail under apaviṇāti) Th 1, 186 (grd. apacineyya to be honoured); J v.339 (anapacinanto for T. anupacinanto, v. l. anapavinati). -- pp. apacita (q.v.). Apacca
Apacca
[Vedic apatya nt.; der. fr. apa] offspring, child D i.90 (bandhupāda˚ cp. muṇḍaka), 103 (id.); S i.69 (an˚) Sn 991; DA i.254. Apaccakkha
Apaccakkha
(adj.) [a + paṭi + akkha] unseen; in instr. f. apaccakkhāya as adv. without being seen, not by direct evidence Miln 46 sq. Apacchapurima
Apacchapurima
(adj.) [a + paccha + purima] "neither after nor before", i. e. at the same time, simultaneous J iii.295. Apajaha
Apajaha
(adj.) [a + pajaha] not giving up, greedy, miserly A iii.76 (v. l. apānuta; C. expls. (a)vaḍḍhinissita mānatthaddha). Apajita
Apajita
(nt.) [pp. of apa + ji] defeat Dh. 105. Apajjhāyati
Apajjhāyati
[apa + jhāyati1; cp. Sk. abhi -- dhyāyati] to muse, meditate, ponder, consider M i.334 (nijjhāyati +); iii.14 (id.). Apaññaka
Apaññaka
(adj.) = apañña, ignorant Dpvs vi.29. Apaṭṭhapeti
Apaṭṭhapeti
[Caus. fr. apa -- tiṭṭhati, cp. Sk. apa + sthā to stand aloof] to put aside, leave out, neglect J iv.308; v.236. Apaṇṇaka
Apaṇṇaka
(adj.) [a + paṇṇaka; see paṇṇaka; Weber Ind. Str. iii.150 & Kuhn, Beitr. p. 53 take it as *a -- praśna -- ka] certain, true, absolute M i.401, 411; A v.85, 294, 296; J i.104 (where expld as ekaŋsika aviruddha niyyānika). Apanṇṇakatā
Apanṇṇakatā
(f.) [abstr. of apaṇṇaka] certainty, absolu- teness S iv.351 sq. Apatacchika
Apatacchika
only in khārāpatācch˚ (q. v.) a kind of torture. Apattha
Apattha1
(adj.) [Sk. apāsta, pp. of apa + as2] thrown away Dh 149 ( = chaḍḍita DhA iii.112). Apattha
Apattha2
2nd pl. pret. of pāpunāti (q. v.). Apatthaṭa
Apatthaṭa
= avatthaṭa covered Th 1, 759. Apatthita & Apatthiya
Apatthita
& Apatthiya see pattheti. Apadāna
Apadāna
(nt.) 1. [ = Sk. apadāna] removing, breaking off, D iii.88. -- 2. [= Sk. avadāna cp. ovāda] advice, admonition, instruction, morals Vin ii.4 (an˚ not taking advice), 7 (id.) M i.96; A v.337 sq. (saddhā˚) Th 1, 47. -- 3. legend, life history. In the title Mahāpadāna suttanta it refers to the 7 Buddhas. In the title Apadānaŋ, that is ʻ the stories ʼ, it refers almost exclusively to Arahants. The other, (older), connotation seems to have afterwards died out. See Dialogues ii.3. -- Cp. also pariyāpadāna. Apadisa
Apadisa
[fr apa + diś] reference, testimony, witness DhA ii.39. Apadisati
Apadisati
[apa + disati] to call to witness, to refer to, to quote Vin iii.159; J i.215; iii.234; iv.203; Miln 270; DhA ii.39; Nett 93. Apadesa
Apadesa
[cp. Sk. apadeśa] 1. reason, cause, argument M i.287 (an˚). -- 2. statement, designation PvA 8. -- 3. pretext J iii.60; iv.13; PvA 154. Thus also apadesaka J vi.179. Apadhāreti
Apadhāreti
[Caus. of apa + dhṛ, cp. Sk. ava -- dhārayati, but also BSk. apadhārayati Divy 231] to observe, request, ask ThA 16. Apanata
Apanata
[pp. of apanamati] "bent away", drawn aside, in ster. combn. abhinata + apanata ("strained forth & strained aside" Mrs Rh. D. Kindred S. p. 39) M i.386; S i.28. Apanamati
Apanamati
[semantically doubtful] to go away Sn 1102 (apanamissati, v. l. apalām˚ & apagam˚; expld at Nd2 60 by vajissati pakkhamissati etc. -- pp. apanata (q. v.) -> Caus. apanāmeti. Apanāmeti
Apanāmeti
[Caus. fr. apanamati] 1. to take away, remove M i.96 = A i.198 (kathaŋ bahiddhā a. carry outside); Kh viii.4 (= aññaŋ ṭhānaŋ gameti KhA 220). -- 2. [= Sk. ava -- namati] to bend down, lower, put down Vin ii.208 (chattaŋ); S i.226 (id.); J ii.287 (id., v. l. apanetvā); D i.126 (hatthaŋ, for salute). Apanidahati
Apanidahati
(& apanidheti) [apa + ni + dhā, cp. Vedic apadhā hiding -- place; Sk. apadadhāti = Gr. a)poti(qhmi = Lat. abdo "do away"] to hide, conceal Vin iv.123 (˚dheti, ˚dheyya, ˚dhessati); PvA 215 (˚dhāya ger.). -- pp. apanihita. -- Caus. apanidhāpeti to induce somebody to conceal Vin iv.123. Apanihita
Apanihita
[pp. of apanidahati] concealed, in abstr. ˚ttaŋ (nt.) hiding, concealing, theft PvA 216. Apanīta
Apanīta
[Sk. apanīta, pp. of apa + nī, see apaneti & cp. also onīta = apanīta] taken away or off. removed, dispelled PvA 39. Apanudati & Apanudeti
Apanudati
& Apanudeti [apa + nud, cp. Vedic apanudati & Caus. Sk. apanodayati] to push or drive away, remove, dispel; pres. apanudeti Miln 38. aor. apānudi Pv i.86 ( = apanesi PvA 41); ii.314 (= avahari aggahesi PvA 86); Dāvs i.8. ger. apanujja D ii.223. See also der. apanudana. -- 52 -- Apanudana & Apanūdana
Apanudana
& Apanūdana (nt.) [Sk. apanodana, fr. apa- nudati] taking or driving away, removal Vin ii.148 = J i.94 (dukkha˚); Sn 252 (id.); PvA 114 (id.). Apanuditar
Apanuditar
[n. ag. fr. apanudati, Sk. apanoditṛ] remover, dispeller D iii.148. Apaneti
Apaneti
[apa + nī] to lead away, take or put away, remove J i.62, 138; ii.4, 155 (aor. apānayi) iii.26; Miln 188, 259, 413; PvA 41, 74, 198 ( = harati) Sdhp 63. Pass. apanīyati S i.176. -- pp. apanīta (q. v.). Apapibati
Apapibati
[apa + pibati] to drink from something J ii.126 (aor. apāpāsi). Apabbūhati & Apabyūhati
Apabbūhati
& Apabyūhati [apa + vi + ūh] to push off, remove, scrape away A iii.187 (apaviyūhitvā, vv. ll. ˚bbūhitvā); J i.265 (paŋsuŋ). -- Caus. ˚byūhāpeti to make remove or brush J iv.349 (paŋsuŋ). Apabyāma
Apabyāma
see apavyāma. Apamāra
Apamāra
[Sk. apasmāra] epilepsy Vin i.93. Cp. apasmāra. Apamārika
Apamārika
(adj.) [cp. Sk. apasmārin] epileptic Vin iv.8, 10, 11. Apayāti
Apayāti
[Sk. apayāti, apa + yā] to go away J vi.183 (apāyāti metri causa; expld. by C. as apagacchati palāyati). -- Caus. apayāpeti [Sk. apayāpayati] to make go, drive away, dismiss M iii.176; S ii.119. Apayāna
Apayāna
(nt.) [Sk. apayāna, fr. apayāti] going away, retreat D i.9 (opp. upa˚); DA i.95. Apara
Apara
(adj.) [Vedic apara, der. fr. apa with compar. suffix -- ra = Idg. *aporos "further away, second"; cp. Gr. a)pwte/rw farther, Lat. aprilis the second month (after March, i. e. April). Goth. afar = after] another, i. e. additional, following, next, second (with pron. inflexion, i. e. nom. pl. apare) D iii.190 (˚pajā another, i. e. future generation); Sn 791, 1089 (nɔ); J i.59 (aparaŋ divasaŋ on some day following); iii.51 (apare tayo sahāyā "other friends three", i. e. three friends, cp. similarly Fr. nous autres Franc˚ais); iv.3 (dīpa); PvA 81 (˚divase on another day), 226; with other part. like aparo pi D iii 128. -- nt. aparaŋ what follows i. e. future state, consequence; future Vin i.35 (nâparaŋ nothing more); Sn 1092 (much the same as punabbhava, cp. Nd2 61). Cases adverbially; aparaŋ (acc.) further, besides, also J i.256; iii.278; often with other part. like athâparaŋ & further, moreover Sn 974; and puna cɔ aparaŋ It 100; Miln 418 (so read for puna ca paraŋ) and passim; aparam pi Vism 9. -- aparena in future D iii.201. -- Repeated (reduplicative formation) aparâparaŋ (local) to & fro J i.265, 278; PvA 198; (temporal) again and again, off & on J ii.377; Miln 132 VvA 271; PvA 176 (= punappunaŋ).

-- anta (aparanta) = aparaŋ, with anta in same function as in cpds. vananta (see anta1 5): (a.) further away, westward J v.471; Miln 292 (janapada). (b.) future D i.30 (˚kappika, cp. DA i.118); M ii.228 (˚ânudiṭṭhi -- thought of the future); S iii.46 (id.). -- âpariya (fr. aparâpara) ever -- following, successive, continuous, everlasting; used with ref. to kamma J v.106; Miln 108. -- bhāga the future, lit. a later part of time, only in loc. aparabhāge at a future date, later on J i.34, 262; iv.1; VvA 66. Aparajju
Aparajju
(adv.) [Sk. apare -- dyus] on the foll. day Vin ii.167; S i.186; Miln 48. Aparajjhati
Aparajjhati
[Sk. aparādhyate, apa + rādh] to sin or offend against (c. loc.) Vin ii.78 = iii.161; J v.68; vi.367; Miln 189; PvA 263. -- pp. aparaddha & aparādhita (q. v.). Aparaṇṇa
Aparaṇṇa
(nt.) [apara + aṇṇa = anna] "the other kind of cereal", prepared or cooked cereals, pulse etc. Opp. to pubbaṇṇa the unprepared or raw corn (= āmakadhañña Vin iv.265; Vin iii.151 (pubb˚ +); iv.265, 267; A iv. 108, 112 (tila -- mugga -- māsā˚; opp. sāli -- yavaka etc.); Nd2 314 (aparaṇṇaŋ nāma sūpeyyaŋ); J v.406 (˚jā = hareṇukā, pea); Miln 106 (pubbaṇṇa˚). See also dhañña & harita. Aparaddha
Aparaddha
[pp. of aparajjhati] missed (c. acc.), gone wrong, failed, sinned (against = loc.) D i.91, 103, 180; S i.103 (suddhimaggaŋ); Th 1, 78; Sn 891 (suddhiŋ = viraddha khalita Nd1 300); PvA 195. Aparapaccaya
Aparapaccaya
(adj.) [a + para + paccaya] not dependent or relying on others Vin i.12 (vesārajja -- ppatta +); D i.110 (id.); M ii 41; M i.491; S iii.83; DA i.278 ( = nâssa paro paccayo). Aparājita
Aparājita
(adj.) [Vedic aparājita; a + parājita] unconquered Sn 269; J i.71, 165. Aparādha
Aparādha
[fr. apa + rādh] sin, fault, offence, guilt J i.264 (nir˚); iii.394; iv.495; VvA 69; PvA 87, 116. Aparādhika
Aparādhika
(adj.) [fr. aparādha, cp. Sk. aparādhin] guilty, offending, criminal J ii.117 (vāja˚); Miln 149 (issara˚), 189 (aparādhikatā). Aparādhita
Aparādhita
[pp. of aparādheti, Caus. of apa + rādh; cp. aparaddha] transgressed, sinned, failing J v.26 (so read for aparadhɔ ito). Aparāyin
Aparāyin
(adj.) [a + parāyin, cp. parāyana] having no sup- port J iii.386 (f. ˚ī; C. appatiṭṭhā appaṭisaraṇā). Apalāpin
Apalāpin
see apalāsin [Sk. apalāpin "denying, concealing" different]. Apalāḷeti
Apalāḷeti
[apa + lāḷeti] to draw over to Vin i.85. Apalāyin
Apalāyin
(adj.) [a + palāyin] not running away, steadfast, brave, fearless Nd2 13 (abhīru anutrāsin apalāyin as expln. of acchambhin and vīra); J iv.296; v.4 (where C. gives variant "apalāpinī ti pi pāṭho", which latter has v. l. apalāsinī & is expld. by C. as palāpa -- rahite anavajjasarīre p. 5). See also apalāsin. Apalāsin
Apalāsin
(adj.) [apaḷāsin; but spelling altogether uncertain. There seems to exist a confusion between the forms apalāyin, apalāpin & apalāsin, owing to freq. miswriting of s, y, p in MSS. (cp. Nd2 introd. p. xix.). We should be inclined to give apalāsin, as the lectio difficilior, the preference. The expln. at Pug 22 as "yassa puggalassa ayaŋ paḷāso pahīno ayaŋ vuccati puggalo apaḷāsī" does not help us to clear up the etym. nor the vv. ll.] either "not neglectful, pure, clean" ( = apalāpin fr. palāsa chaff, cp. apalāyin at J v.4), or "not selfish, not hard, generous" (as inferred from combn. with amakkhin & amaccharin), or "brave, fearless, energetic" (= apalāyin) D iii.47, cp. Pug 22. See palāsin. Apalibuddha & Apalibodha
Apalibuddha
& Apalibodha [a + palibuddha, pp. of pari + bṛh, see palibujjhati] unobstructed, unhindered, free J iii. 381 (˚bodha); Miln 388; DhA iii.198. Apalekhana
Apalekhana
(nt.) [apa + lekhana from likh in meaning of lih, corresponding to Sk. ava -- lehana] licking off, in cpd. hatthâpalekhana "hand -- licking" (i. e. licking one's hand after a meal, the practice of certain ascetics) M 177 (with v. l. hatthâvalekhana M i.535; Trenckner compares BSk. hastapralehaka Lal. Vist. 312 & hastâvalehaka ibid. 323), 412; Pug 55 (expld. at Pug A 231 as hatthe piṇḍamhe niṭṭhite jivhāya hatthaŋ apalekhati). Apalekhati
Apalekhati
[apa + lekhati in meaning of Sk. avalihati] to lick off Pug A 231 (hatthaŋ). Apalepa
Apalepa
in "so ɔpalepa patito jarāgharo" at Th 2, 270 is to be read as "so palepa˚". Morris's interpret. J.P.T.S. 1886, 126 therefore superfluous. Apalokana
Apalokana
(nt.) [fr. apaloketi] permission, leave, in ˚kamma proposal of a resolution, obtaining leave (see kamma i.3) Vin ii.89; iv.152. Apalokita
Apalokita
[pp. of apaloketi; Sk. avalokita] 1. asked per- mission, consulted S iii.5. -- 2. (nt.) permission, consent, M i.337 (Nāgâpalokitaŋ apalokesi). -- 3. (nt.) an Ep. of Nibbāna S iv.370. -- 53 -- Apalokin
Apalokin
(adj.) [Sk. avalokin] "looking before oneself", looking at, cautious Miln 398. Apaloketi
Apaloketi
[BSk. ava -- lokayati] 1. to look ahead, to look before, to be cautious, to look after M i.557 (v. l. for apaciṇāti, where J v.339 C. has avaloketi); Miln 398. -> 2. to look up to, to obtain permission from (acc.), to get leave, to give notice of Vin iii.10, 11; iv.226 (anapaloketvā = anāpucchā), 267 (+ āpucchitvā); M i.337; S iii.95 (bhikkhusanghaŋ anapaloketvā without informing the Sangha); J vi.298 (vājānaŋ); DhA i.67. -- pp. apalokita (q. v.). See also apalokana & ˚lokin. Apavagga
Apavagga
[Sk. apavarga] completion, end, final delivery, Nibbāna; in phrase saggâpavagga Dāvs ii.62; iii.75. Apavattati
Apavattati
[apa + vṛt, cp. Lat. āverto] to turn away or aside, to go away J iv.347 (v. l. apasakkati). Apavadati
Apavadati
[apa + vadati] to reproach, reprove, reject, despise D i.122 ( = paṭikkhipati DA i.290); S v.118 (+ paṭikkosati). Apavahati
Apavahati
[apa + vahati] to carry or drive away; Caus. apavāheti to remove, give up Miln 324 (kaddamaŋ). Apaviṭṭha
Apaviṭṭha
at Pv iii 82 is to be read apaviddha (q. v.). Apaviṇāti
Apaviṇāti
is probably misreading for apaciṇāti (see apac˚ 2). As v. l. at J v.339 (anapavinanto) for T. anupacinanto (expld. by avaloketi C.). Other vv. ll. are anuvi˚ & apavī˚; meaning "not paying attention". The positive form we find as apavīṇati "to take care of, to pay attention to" (c. acc.) at M i.324, where Trenckner unwarrantedly assumes a special root veṇ (see Notes p. 781), but the vv. ll. to this passage (see M. i.557) with apavīṇāti and apacinati confirm the reading apaciṇāti, as does the gloss apaloketi. Apaviddha
Apaviddha
[pp. of apavijjhati, Vedic apa + vyadh] thrown away, rejected, discarded, removed S i.202; iii.143; Sn 200 (susānasmiŋ = chaḍḍita SnA 250); Th 1, 635 = Dh 292 (= chaḍḍita DhA iii.452); Pv iii.82 (susānasmiŋ; so read for T. apaviṭṭha); J i.255; iii.426; yi.90 (= chaḍḍita C.). Sdhp 366. Apaviyūhati
Apaviyūhati
see appabbūhati. Apavīṇati
Apavīṇati
see apaviṇāti ( = apaciṇāti). Apavyāma
Apavyāma
[apa + vyāma] disrespect, neglect, in phrase apayvāmato (apaby˚) karoti to treat disrespectfully, to insult, defile S i.226 (v. l. abyāmato; C. expls. apabyāmato karitvā abyāmato katvā); Kvu 472 (vv. ll. asabyākato, abyāto, apabyāto; Kvu trsl. 270 n. 1 remarks: "B. trsl.: abyāsakato. The Burmese scholar U. Pandi, suggests we should read apabyākato, by which he understands blasphemously"; it is here combd. with niṭṭhubhati, as at DhA ii.36); DhA ii.36 ("want of forbearance" Ed.; doubtful reading; vv. ll. appabyāyakamma & apasāma). For further detail see apasavya. Apasakkati
Apasakkati
[apa + sakkati] to go away, to go aside J iv.347 (v. l. for apavattati); VvA 101; PvA 265 (aor. ˚sakki = apakkami). Apasavya
Apasavya
(adj.) [apa + savya] right (i. e. not left), con- trary Ud 50 (T. has niṭṭhubhitvā abyāmato karitvā; vv. ll. are apabhyāmāto, abhyāmato & C. apasabyāmato), where C. expls. apasabyāmato karitvā by apasabyaŋ katvā, "which latter corresponds in form but not in meaning to Sk. apasavyaŋ karoti to go on the right side" (Morris J P T S. 1886, 127). -- See apavyāma. Apasāda
Apasāda
[fr. apa + sad] putting down, blame, dispara- gement M iii.230. Apasādita
Apasādita
[pp. of apasādeti] blamed, reproached, disparaged S ii.219; SnA 541. Apasādeti
Apasādeti
[Caus. of apa + sad] 1. to refuse, decline Vin iv.213, 263; J v.417 ( = uyyojeti). -- 2. to depreciate, blame, disparage Vin iii.101; M iii.230 (opp. ussādeti); DA i.160. -- pp. apasādita (q. v.). Apasmāra
Apasmāra
[Sk. apasmāra, lit. want of memory, apa + smṛ] epilepsy, convulsion, fit J iv.84. Cp. apamāra. Apassanto
Apassanto
etc. see passati. Apassaya
Apassaya
[cp. Sk. apāśraya, fr. apasseti] 1. support, rest ThA 258. -- 2. bed, bolster, mattress, in kaṇṭak˚ a mattress of thorns, a bolster filled with thorns (as cushion for asceties) M i.78; J i 493; iii.235. -- sâppassaya with a head rest J iv.299.

-- pīṭhaka a chair with a head -- rest J iii.235. Apassayika
Apassayika
(adj.) [fr. apassaya; cp. Sk. apāśrayin -- ˚] reclining on, in kaṇṭaka˚ one who lies on a bed of thorns (see kaṇṭaka) M i.78; J iv.299 (v. l, kaṇḍikesayika); Pug 55. Apassita
Apassita
[pp. of apasseti] 1. leaning against J ii.69 (tāla- mūlaŋ = nissāya ṭhita C.). -- 2. depending on, trusting in (c. acc. or loc.) Vv 101 (parâgāraŋ = nissita VvA 101); J iv.25 (balamhi = balanissita). See also avassita. Apasseti
Apasseti
[Sk. apāśrayati, apa + ā + sri] to lean against, have a support in (acc.), to depend on. -- 1. (lit.) lean against Vin ii.175 (bhitti apassetabbo the wall to be used as a head -- rest). -- 2. (fig.) mostly in ger. apassāya dependent upon, depending on, trusting in (loc. or acc. or -- ˚) Vin iii.38; J i.214; PvA 189. -- pp. apassita (q. v.). -- See also avasseti. Apassena
Apassena
(nt.) [fr. apasseti] a rest, support, dependence M iii.127 (˚ka); D iii.224 (cattāri apassenāni); as adj. caturâpassena one who has the fourfold support viz. sankhāyɔ ekaŋ paṭisevati, adhivāseti, parivajjeti, vinodeti A v.30.

-- phalaka (cp. Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 71) a bolsterslab, head -- rest Vin i.48; ii.175, 209. Apahattar
Apahattar
[n. ag. to apaharati] one who takes away or removes, destroyer M i 447 = Kvu 528. Apahara
Apahara
[Sk. apahāra, fr. apaharati] taking away, stealing, robbing J ii.34. Apaharaṇa
Apaharaṇa
(nt.) = apahara Miln 195. Apaharati
Apaharati
[apa + hṛ] to take away, remove, captivate, rob J iii.315 (aor. apahārayiŋ); Miln 413; DA i.38. Apākaṭatā
Apākaṭatā
(f.) [a + pākaṭa + tā] unfitness Miln 232 (v. l. apākatatta perhaps better). Apākatika
Apākatika
(adj.) [a + pākata + ika] not in proper or natural shape, out of order, disturbed DhA ii.7. Cp. appakāra. Apācīna
Apācīna
(adj.) [Vedic apācīna; cp. apācaḥ & apāka, western; to Lat. opācus, orig. turned away (from the east or the sun) i. e. opposite, dark] westerly, backward, below S iii.84; It 120 (apācīnaŋ used as adv. and taking here the place of adho in combn. with uddhaŋ tiriyaŋ; the reading is a conjecture of Windisch's, the vv. ll. are apācinaŋ; apācini, apāci & apāminaŋ, C. expls. by heṭṭhā). Apāṭuka
Apāṭuka
(adj.) [a + pātu + ka (?), acc. to Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 7 der. fr. apaṭu not sharp, blunt, uncouth. This is hardly correct. See pātur] not open, sly, insidious Th 1, 940 (as v. l. for T. avāṭuka, trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. as "unscrupulous", by Neumann as "ohne Redlichkeit"). Context suggests a meaning similar to the preceding nekatika, i. e. fraudulent. See also next. Apāṭubha
Apāṭubha
(adj.) [a + pātu + bha (?), at the only passage changed by Morris J. P. T. S. 1893, 7 to apāṭuka but without reason] = apāṭuka, i. e. sly, fraudulent J iv.184 (in context with nekatika; C. expls. apāṭubhāva dhanuppāda -- virahita, in which latter virahita does not fit in; the pass. seems corrupt). -- 54 -- Apāda
Apāda
(?) [apa + ā + dā] giving away in marriage J iv. 179 (in expln. of anāpāda unmarried; reading should prob. be āpāda = pariggaha). Apādaka
Apādaka
(adj.) [a + pāda + ka] not having feet, footless, creeping, Ep. of snakes & fishes Vin ii.110 = J ii.146 (where see expln.). Spelt apada(ka) at It 87 (v. l. apāda). Apāna
Apāna
(nt.) breathing out, respiration (so Ch.; no ref. in P. Cauon?) On Prāṇa & Apāna see G. W. Brown in J. Am. Or. Soc. 39, 1919 pp. 104 -- 112. See ānāpāna. Apānakatta
Apānakatta
(nt.) [a + pānaka + ttaŋ] "waterless state", living without drinking water J v.243. Apāpaka
Apāpaka
(adj.) [a + pāpaka] guiltless, innocent f. ˚ikā Vv 314; 326. Apāpata
Apāpata
(adj.) [apa + ā + pata] falling down into (c. acc.) J iv.234 (aggiŋ). Apāpurana
Apāpurana
(nt.) [fr. apāpurati] a key (to a door) Vin i.80; iii.119; M iii.127. See also avāpuraṇa. Apāpurati & Apāpuṇati
Apāpurati
& Apāpuṇati [Sk. apāvṛṇoti, apa + ā + vṛ, but Vedic only apa -- vṛṇoti corresponding to Lat. aperio = *apa -- ṷerio. On form see Trenckner, Notes 63] to open (a door) Vin i.5 (apāpurɔ etaŋ Amatassa dvāraŋ: imper.; where id. p. S i.137 has avāpur˚, T., but v. l. apāpur˚); Vv 6427 (apāpuranto Amatassa dvāraŋ, expld. at VvA 284 by vivaranto); It 80 (apāvuṇanti A. dv. as T. conj., with v. l. apānuṃanti, apāpurenti & apāpuranti). -- pp. apāruta (q. v.). -- Pass. apāpurīyati [cp. BSk. apāvurīyati M Vastu ii.158] to be opened M iii.184 (v. l. avā˚); J i.63 (avā˚); Th 2, 494 (apāpuṇitvā). See also avāpurati. Apābhata
Apābhata
[pp. of apa + ā + bhṛ cp. Vedic apa -- bharati, but Lat. aufero to ava˚] taken away, stolen J iii.54. Apāya
Apāya
[Sk. apāya, fr. apa + i, cp. apeti] "going away" viz. -- 1. separation, loss Dh 211 (piya˚ = viyoga DhA iii.276). -- 2. loss (of property) D iii.181, 182; A ii. 166; iv.283; J iii.387 (atth˚). -- 3. leakage, out flow (of water) D i.74; A ii.166; iv.287. -- 4. lapse, falling away (in conduct) D i.100. -- 5. a transient state of loss and woe after death. Four such states are specified purgatory (niraya), rebirth as an animal, or as a ghost, or as a Titan (Asura). Analogous expressions are vinipāta & duggati. All combined at D i.82; iii.111; A i.55; It 12, 73; Nd2 under kāya; & freq. elsewhere. -- apāyaduggativinipāta as attr. of saŋsāra S ii.92, 232; iv.158, 313; v.342; opp. to khīṇâpāya -- duggati -- vinipāta of an Arahant A iv.405; v.182 sq. -- See also foll. pass.: M iii.25 (anapāya); Sn 231; Th 2, 63; J iv.299; Pug 51; VvA 118 (opp. sugati); PvA 103; Sdhp 43, 75 & cp. niraya, duggati, vinipāta.

-- gāmin going to ruin or leading to a state of suffering DhA iii.175; cp. ˚gamanīya id. Ps. i.94, ˚gamanīyatā J iv.499. -- mukha "facing ruin", leading to destruction ( = vināsa -- mukha DA i.268), usually as nt. "cause of ruin" D i.101 (cattāri apāya mukhāni); iii.181, 182 (cha bhogānaŋ a˚ -- mukhāni, i. e. causes of the loss of one's possessions); A ii.166; iv.283, 287. -- samudda the ocean of distress DhA iii 432. -- sahāya a spendthrift companion D iii.185. Apāyika
Apāyika
(adj.) [also as āpāyika (q. v.); fr. apāya] belonging to the apāyas or states of misery D i.103; iii.6, 9, 12; It 42; PvA 60 (dukkha). Apāyin
Apāyin
(adj.) [fr. apāya] going away J i.163 (aḍḍha- rattāvɔapāyin = aḍḍharatte apāyin C.). -- an˚ not going away, i. e. constantly following (chāyā anapāyinī, the shadow) Dh 2; Th 1, 1041; Miln 72. Apāra
Apāra
(nt.) [a + pāra] 1. the near bank of a river J iii.230 (+ atiṇṇaŋ, C. paratīraŋ atiṇṇaŋ). -- 2. (fig.) not the further shore (of life), the world here, i.e. (opp. pāraŋ = Nibbāna) Sn 1129, 1130; Nd2 62; Dh 385 (expld. as bāhirāni cha āyatanāni DhA iv.141). See pāra & cp. avara. Apāraṇeyya
Apāraṇeyya
(adj.) [grd. of paraneti + a˚] that which cannot be achieved, unattainable J vi.36 ( = apāpetabba). Apāruta
Apāruta
[Sk. apāvṛta, pp. of apāpurati] open (of a door) Vin i.7 = M i.169 (apārutā tesaŋ Amatassa dvārā); D i.136 (= vivaṭa -- dvāra DA i.297); J i.264 (˚dvāra). Apālamba
Apālamba
["a Vedic term for the hinder part of a carriage" Morris J P T S. 1886, 128; the "Vedic" unidentified] a mechanism to stop a chariot, a safe guard "to prevent warriors from falling out" (C.) S i.33 (Mrs Rh. D. trsl. "leaning board"); J vi.252 (v. l. upā˚; Kern trsl. "remhout", i. e. brake). Apāhata
Apāhata
[pp. of apa + hṛ] driven off or back, refuted, refused Sn 826 (˚smiŋ = apasādite vade SnA 541). Api
Api
(indecl.) [Sk. api & pi; Idg. *epi *pi *opi; cp. Gr. e)/pi on to, o)/pi (o) /piqen behind, o)pi/ssa back = close at one's heels); Lat. ob. in certain functions; Goth. iftuma. -> The assimil. form before vowels is app˚ (= Sk. apy˚). See further details under pi.] both prep. & conj., orig. meaning "close by", then as prep. "towards, to, on to, on" and as adv. "later, and, moreover". -- 1 (prep. & pref.) (a) prep. c. loc.: api ratte later on in the night (q. v.) -- (b) pref.: apidhāna putting on to; apiḷahati bind on to, apihita (= Gr. e) piqeto/s, epithet) put on to, (q. v.). -- 2. (conj. & part.). (a) in affirmative sentences meaning primarily "moreover, further, and then, even": -- (a) (single) prothetic: api dibbesu kāmesu even in heavenly joys Dh 187; ko disvā na pasīdeyya api kaṇhâbhijātiko even an unfortunate -- born Sn 563 api yojanāni gacchāma, even for leagues we go Pv iv.107 (= anekāni yojanāni pi g. PvA 270. Epithetic (more freq. in the form pi): muhuttam api even a little while Dh 106, 107; aham api daṭṭhukāmo I also wish to see Sn 685. Out of prothetic use (= even = even if) develops the conditional meaning of "if", as in api sakkuṇemu (and then we may = if we may) J v.24 (c. = api nāma sakkuṇeyyāma; see further under b appɔeva nāma). -- api -- api in correlation corresponds to Lat. et -- et Sk ca -- ca, meaning both . . . and, and . . . as well as, & is esp. freq. in combn. app' ekacce . . . app' ekacce (and) some . . . and others, i. e. some . . . others [not with Kern Toev. s. v. to appa!], e. g. at D i.118; Th 2, 216; VvA 208, etc. -- app' ekadā "morever once" = sometimes Vin iv.178; S i.162; iv.111; J i.67; DhA iii.303, etc. -- (b) (in combn with other emphatic or executive particles) api ca further, and also, moreover D i.96; Miln 25, 47. -- api ca kho moreover, and yet, still, all the same It 89 (+ pana v. l.); Miln 20, 239. -- api ca kho pana all the same, never mind, nevertheless J i.253. -- api ssu so much so Vin ii.76. -- app' eva nāma (with pot.) (either) surely, indeed, yes, I reckon, (or) I presume, it is likely that, perhaps Vin i.16 (surely); ii.85 (id.); cp. pi D i.205 (sve pi upasaŋkameyyāma tomorrow I shall surely come along), 226 (siyā thus shall it be); M i.460 = It 89 (moreover, indeed); J i.168 (surely) Vin ii.262 (perhaps) J v.421 (id., piyavācaŋ labheyyāma). -- (b) in interrog. -- dubit. sentences as part. of interrog. (w. indic. or pot.) corresponding to Lat. nonne, i e. awaiting an affirmative answer ("not, not then"): api Yasaŋ kulaputtaŋ passeyya do you not see . . . Vin i.16; api samaṇa balivadde addasā have you not then seen . . . S i.115; api kiñci labhāmase shall we then not get anything? J iii.26; api me pitaraŋ passatha do you then not see my father? PvA 38. -- Also combd. with other interr. part. e. g. api nu J. ii.415. Apitika
Apitika
(adj.) [a + pitika] fatherless J v.251. -- 55 -- Apithīyati
Apithīyati
[for apidhīyati; api + dhā] Pass. of apidahati to be obstructed, covered, barred, obscured J ii.158. See also pithīyati. Apidahati
Apidahati
[api + dhā, cp. Gr. e)piti(qhmi] to put on (see api 1 b), to cover up, obstruct, J v.60 (inf. apidhetuŋ). pp. apihita, Pass. apithīyati, Der. apidhāna (q. v.). Apidhāna
Apidhāna
(nt.) [Vedic apidhāna in same meaning] cover, lid Vin i.203, 204; ii.122. See apidahati. Apiratte
Apiratte
[read api ratte, see api 1 a] later in the night J vi.560. Apilāpana
Apilāpana
(nt.) [fr. api + lap] counting up, repetition [Kern, Toev, s.v. gives der. fr. a + plāvana] Nett 15, 28, 54; Miln 37. Apilāpanatā
Apilāpanatā
(f.) in the pass. at Dhs 14 = Nd2 628 is evidently meant to be taken as a + pilāpana + tā (fr. pilavati, plu), but whether the der. & interpret. of Dhs A is correct, we are unable to say. On general principles it looks like popular etym. Mrs. Rh. D. translates (p. 16) "opposite of superficiality" (lit "not floating"); see her detailed note Dhs trsl. 16. Apilāpeti
Apilāpeti
[api + lap] "to talk close by", i. e. to count up, recite, or: talk idly, boast of Miln 37 (sāpatheyyaŋ). Apiḷandha
Apiḷandha
(adj.) at Vv 361 should be read as apiḷaddha ( = Sk. apinaddha) pp. of apiḷandhati (apiḷandhati) "adorned with", or (with v. l. SS) as apiḷandhana; VvA 167 expls. by analankata, mistaking the a of api for a negation. Apiḷandhana
Apiḷandhana
(nt.) [fr. apiḷandhati, also in shorter (& more usual) form piḷandhana, q. v.] that which is tied on, i.e. band, ornament, apparel, parure Vv 6410, 6418 (expld. inacurately at VvA 279 by; a -- kāro nipātamattaŋ, pilandhanaŋ = ābhāraṇaŋ); J vi.472 (c. pilandhituŋ pi ayuttaŋ?). Apiḷahati & Apiḷandhati
Apiḷahati
& Apiḷandhati [Sk. apinahyati, on n: ḷ see note on gala, & cp. guṇa: guḷa, veṇu: veḷu etc. On ndh for yh see avanandhati] to tie on, fasten, bind together; to adorn oneself with (acc.) J v.400 (ger. apiḷayha = piḷandhitvā C.) -- Cp. apiḷandhana & pp apiladdha. Apiha
Apiha
(adj.) [apihālu? a + piha, uncertain origin, see next. Morris J.P.I.S. 1886 takes it as a + spṛha] "unhankering" (Mrs Rh. D.) S i 181 (+ akankha; v. l. BB asita). Apihālu
Apihālu
(adj.) [a + pihālu, analysed by Fausböll Sn. Gloss. p. 229 as a -- spṛhayālu, but Bdhgh evidently different (see below)] not hankering, free from craving, not greedy S i.187 = Th 1, 1218 (akuhako nipako apihālu); Sn 852 (+ amaccharin, expld. at SnA 549 as apihana -- sīlo, patthanātanhāya rahito ti vuttaŋ hoti, thus perhaps taking it as a + pi (= api) + hana (fr. dhā, cp. pidahati & pihita); cp. also Nd2 227). Apihita
Apihita
[pp. of apidahati] covered J iv.4. Apuccaṇḍatā
Apuccaṇḍatā
(f.) [a + pūti + aṇḍa + tā] "not being a rotten egg," i. e. normal state, healthy birth, soundness M i.357. Apuccha
Apuccha
(adj.) [a + pucchā] "not a question", i. e. not to be asked Miln 316. Apekkha
Apekkha
(adj.) [ = apekkhā] waiting for, looking for S i.122 (otāra˚). Apekkhati
Apekkhati
1. [Sk. apīkṣate, apa + īkṣ] to desire, long for, look for, expect Sn 435 (kāme nɔâpekkhate cittaŋ), 773 (ppr. apekkhamāna); J iv.226 (id.); Dhs A 365. anapekkhamāna paying no attention to (acc.) Sn 59; J v.359. -> 2. [Sk. avīkṣate, ava + īkṣ; see avekkḥati] to consider, refer to, look at, ger. apekkhitvā (cp. Sk. avīkṣya) with reference to VvA 13. -- pp. apekkhita (q. v.). Apekkhavant
Apekkhavant
(adj.) [fr. apekkhā] full of longing or desire, longing, craving Vin iv.214; S iii.16; Th 1, 558; J v.453 ( = sataṇha); Sn A 76. Apekkhā & Apekhā
Apekkhā
& Apekhā (f.) [Sk. apekṣā, fr. apa + īkṣ. The spelling is either kkh or kh, they are both used promiscuously, a tendency towards kh prevailing, as in upekhā, sekha] attention, regard, affection for (loc.); desire, longing for (c. loc.) S i.77; iii.132; v.409 (mātā -- pitusu); Vin iv.214; Sn 38 ( = vuccati taṇhā etc. Nd2 65; = taṇhā sineha SnA 76); J i.9, 141; Th 1, 558; Dh 345 (puttesu dāresu ca = taṇhā DhA iv.56); Dhs 1059, 1136 (= ālayakaraṇa -- vasena apekkhatī ti apekkhā Dhs A 365, cp. Dhs trsl. 279). Freq. as adj. ( -- ˚or in combn. with sa˚ and an˚), viz. Vin iii.90 (visuddha˚); S i.122 (otara˚); sa˚ A iii.258, 433; iv.60 sq.; an˚ without consideration, regardless, indifferent S v.164; A iii.252, 347, 434; Sn 200 (anapekkhā honti ñātayo); J i.9. Cp. anapekkhin & apekkhavant; also B.Sk. avekṣatā. Apekkhita
Apekkhita
[pp. of apekkhati] taken care of, looked after, considered J vi.142, 149 ( = olokita C.). Apekkhin
Apekkhin
(adj.) [Sk. apekṣin, but B.Sk. avekṣin, e.g. Jtm 215; fr. apa + īkṣ] considering, regarding, expecting, looking for; usually neg. an˚ indifferent (against) = loc.) S i.16, 77; ii.281; iii.19, 87; Sn 166 (kāmesu), 823 (id.), 857; Dh 346. Cp. apekkhavant. Apeta
Apeta
(adj.) [pp. of apeti] gone away; (med.) freed of, rid of, deprived of (instr., abl. or ˚ -- ) Dh 9 (damasaccena); PvA 35 (dukkhato); usually ˚ -- in sense of "without, -- less", e. g. apeta -- kaddama free from mud, stainless Dh 95; ˚vattha without dress J v.16; ˚viññāṇa without feeling, senseless Dh 41; Th 2, 468; ˚viññāṇattaŋ senselessness, lack of feeling PvA 63. Apetatta
Apetatta
(nt.) [abstr. to apeta] absence (of) PvA 92. Apeti
Apeti
[apa + i, cp. Gr. a)/peimi, Lat. abeo, Goth. af -- iddja] to go away, to disappear D i.180 (upeti pi apeti pi); J i.292; Sn 1143 ( = nɔ apagacchanti na vijahanti Nd2 66). -- pp. apeta (q. v.). Apetteyyatā
Apetteyyatā
(f.) [a + petteyyatā, abstr. fr. *paitṛya fatherly] in combn. with amatteyyatā irreverence against father and mother D iii.70 (cp. Dh 332 & DhA iv.34). Apeyya
Apeyya
(adj.) [a + peyya, grd. of pā] not to be drunk, not drinkable J vi.205 (sāgara). Apesiya
Apesiya
(nt.) [? of uncertain origin] a means of barring a door Vin ii.154 (Bdhgh. explns on p. 321: apesī ti dīghadārumhi khāṇuke pavesetvā kaṇḍaka -- sākhāhi vinandhitvā kataŋ dvāra -- tthakanakaŋ). Apesiyamāna
Apesiyamāna
(adj.) [ppr. fr. a + peseti (q. v.)] not being in service Vin ii.177. App'
App'
in appɔ ekacce etc. see api. Appa
Appa
(adj.) [Vedic alpa, cp. Gr. a)lapa/zw (lapa/zw) to empty (to make little), a)lapadno/s weak; Lith. alpnas weak, alpstù to faint] small, little, insignificant, often in the sense of "very little = (next to) nothing" (so in most cpds.); thus expld. at VvA 334 as equivalent to a negative part. (see appodaka) D i.61 (opp. mahant, DA i.170 = parittaka); Sn 713, 775, 805, 896 (= appaka, omaka, thoka, lamaka, jatukka, parittaka Nd1 306); Dh 174; J i.262; Pug 39. -- nt. appaŋ a little, a small portion, a trifle; pl. appāni small things, trifles A ii.26 = It 102; A ii.138; Dh 20 (= thokaŋ eka -- vagga -- dvi -- vagga -- mattam pi DhA i.158), 224 (˚smiŋ yācito asked for little), 259.

-- aggha of little value (opp. mahaggha priceless) J i.9; Pug 33; DhA iv.184. -- assāda [BSk. alpâsvāda, cp. Divy 224 = Dh 186; alpa + ā + svād] of little taste or enjoyment, affording little pleasure (always used of kāmā) Vin ii.25 = M i.130 = A iii.97 = Nd2 71; Sn 61; Dh 186 (= supina -- sadisatāya paritta -- sukha DhA iii 240); Th 2, 358 (= ThA 244); J ii.313; Vism 124. -- ātanka little (or no) illness, freedom from illness, good health (= appābādha with which often combd.) [BSk. alpātanka & alpātankatā] D i.204 (+ appābādha); iii.166; A iii.65, 103; Miln 14. -- ābādha same as appātanka (q. v.) D i.204; iii.166, 237; M ii.125; A i.25; ii.88; iii.30, 65 sq., 103, 153; Pv iv.144; ˚ābādhatā id. [cp. BSk. alpābādhatā good health] A i.38. -- āyuka short lived D i.18; PvA 103, also as ˚āyukin Vv 416. -- āhāra taking little or no food, fasting M ii.5; Sn 165 (= ekāsana -- bhojitāya ca parimita -- bhojitāya ca SnA 207), also as ˚āhāratā M i.245; ii.5. -- odaka having little or no water, dry Sn 777 (macche va appodake khīṇasote = parittodake Nd1 50); Vv 843 (+ appabhakkha; expld. at VvA 334 as "appa -- saddo hɔ ettha abhāvattho appiccho appanigghoso ti ādisu viya"); J i.70; DhA iv.12. -- kasira in instr. ˚kasirena with little or no difficulty D i.251; S v.51; Th 1, 16. -- kicca having few duties, free from obligations, free from care Sn 144 (= appaŋ kiccaŋ assā ti KhA 241). -- gandha not smelling or having a bad smell Miln 252 (opp. sugandha). -- ṭṭha "standing in little"; i. e. connected with little trouble D i.143; A i.169. -- thāmaka having little or no strength, weak S iv.206. -- dassa having little knowledge or wisdom Sn 1134 (see Nd2 69; expld. by paritta -- pañña SnA 605). -- nigghosa with little sound, quiet, still, soundless (cp. VvA 334, as quoted above under ˚odaka) A v.15 (+ appasadda); Sn 338; Nd1 377; Miln 371. -- pañña, of little wisdom J ii.166; iii.223, 263. -- puñña of little merit M ii.5. -- puññatā having little merit, unworthiness Pv iv.107. -- phalatā bringing little fruit PvA 139. -- bhakkha having little or nothing to eat Vv 843. -- bhoga having little wealth, i. e. poor, indigent Sn 114 (= sannicitānaŋ ca bhogānaŋ āyamukhassa ca abhāvato SnA 173). -- maññati to consider as small, to underrate: see separately. -- matta little, slight, mean, (usually as ˚ka; not to be confounded with appamatta2) A iii.275; J i.242; also meaning "contented with little" (of the bhikkhu) It 103 = A ii.27; f. ˚ā trifle, smallness, însignificance D i.91; DA i.55. -- mattaka small, insignificant, trifling, nt. a trifle (cp. ˚matta) Vin 1, 213; ii.177 (˚vissajjaka the distributor of little things, cp. A iii.275 & Vin iv.38, 155); D i.3 (= appamattā etassā ti appamattakaŋ DA i.55); J i.167; iii.12 (= aṇu); PvA 262. -- middha "little slothful", i. e. diligent, alert Miln 412. -- rajakkha having little or no obtuseness D ii.37; M i.169; Sdhp 519. -- ssaka having little of one's own, possessing little A i.261; ii.203. -- sattha having few or no companious, lonely, alone Dh 123. -- sadda free from noise, quiet M ii.2, 23, 30; A v.15; Sn 925 (= appanigghosa Nd1 377); Pug 35; Miln 371. -- siddhika bringing little success or welfare, dangerous J iv.4 (= mandasiddhi vināsabahula C.); vi.34 (samuddo a. bahu -- antarāyiko). -- ssuta possessing small knowledge, ignorant, uneducated D i.93 (opp. bahussuta); iii.252, 282; S iv.242; It 59; Dh 152; Pug 20, 62; Dhs 1327. -- harita having little or no grass S i.169; Sn p. 15 (= paritta -- harita -- tiṇa SnA 154). -- 56 -- Appaka
Appaka
(adj.) [appa + ka] little, small, trifling; pl. few. nt. ˚ŋ adv. a little D ii.4; A v.232 sq., 253 sq.; Sn 909 (opp. bahu); Dh 85 (appakā = thokā na bahū DhA ii. 160); Pv i.102 (= paritta PvA 48); ii.939; Pug 62; PvA 6, 60 (= paritta). f. appikā J i.228. -- instr. appakena by little, i. e. easily DA i.256. -- anappaka not little, i. e. much, considerable, great; pl. many S iv.46; Dh 144; Pv i.117 (= bahū PvA 58); PvA 24, 25 (read anappake pi for T. ˚appakeci; so also KhA 208). Appakāra
Appakāra
(adj.) [a + pakāra] not of natural form, of bad appearance, ugly, deformed J v.69 ( = sarīrappakāra -- rahita dussaṇṭhāna C.). Cp. apākatika. Appakiṇṇa
Appakiṇṇa
[appa + kiṇṇa, although in formation also = a + pakiṇṇa] little or not crowded, not overheaped A v.15 (C. anākiṇṇa). Appagabbha
Appagabbha
(adj.) [a + pagabbha] unobtrusive, free from boldness, modest S ii.198 = Miln 389, Sn 144, 852 (cp. Nd1 228 & KhA 232); Dh 245. Appaccaya
Appaccaya
[a + paccaya] 1. (n.) discontent, dissatisfaction, dejection, sulkiness D i.3 ( = appatītā honti tena atuṭṭhā asomanassitā ti appacayo; domanassɔ etaŋ adhivacanaŋ DA i.52); iii.159; M i.442; A i.79, 124, 187; ii.203; iii.181 sq.; iv.168, 193; J ii.277; Sn p. 92 (kapa + dosa + appacaya); Vv 8331 (= domanassaŋ VvA 343); SnA 423 (= appatītaŋ domanassaŋ). -- 2. (adj.) unconditioned Dhs 1084, 1437. Appaṭi˚
Appaṭi˚
[a + paṭi˚] see in general under paṭi˚. Appaṭikārika
Appaṭikārika
(adj.) [a + paṭikārika] "not providing against", i. e. not making good, not making amends for, destructive J v.418 (spelling here & in C. appati˚). Appaṭikopeti
Appaṭikopeti
[a + paṭikopeti] not to disturb, shake or break (fig.) J v.173 (uposathaŋ). Appaṭikkhippa
Appaṭikkhippa
(adj.) [a + paṭikkhippa, grd. of paṭikkhi- pati] not to be refused J ii.370. Appaṭigandhika & ˚iya
Appaṭigandhika
& ˚iya (adj.) [a + paṭi + gandha + ika] not smelling disagreeable, i. e. with beautiful smell, scented, odorous J v.405 (˚ika, but C. ˚iya; expld. by sugandhena udakena samannāgata); vi.518; Pv ii.120; iii.226. Appaṭigha
Appaṭigha
(adj.) [a + paṭigha] (a) not forming an obstacle, not injuring, unobstructive Sn 42 (see expld. at Nd2 239; SnA 88 expls. "katthaci satte vā sankhāre vā bhayena na paṭihaññatī ti a."). -- (b) psychol. t. t. appld. to rūpa: not reacting or impinging (opp. sappaṭigha) D iii.217; Dhs 660, 756, 1090, 1443. Appaṭicchavi
Appaṭicchavi
(adj.) at Pv ii.113 is faulty reading for sam- patitacchavi (v. l.). Appaṭibhāga
Appaṭibhāga
(adj) [a + paṭibhāga] not having a counterpart, unequalled, incomparable DhA i.423 ( = anuttara). Appaṭibhāṇa
Appaṭibhāṇa
(adj.) [a + paṭibhāṇa] not answering back, bewildered, cowed down Vin iii.162; A iii.57; ˚ŋ karoti to intimidate, bewilder J v.238, 369. Appaṭima
Appaṭima
(adj.) [a + paṭima fr. prep. paṭi but cp. Vedic apratimāna fr. prati + mā] matchless, incomparable, invaluable Th 1, 614; Miln 239. Appaṭivattiya
Appaṭivattiya
(adj.) [a + paṭi + vattiya = vṛtya, grd. or vṛt] (a) not to be rolled back Sn 554 (of dhammacakka, may however be taken in meaning of b.). -- (b) irresistable J ii.245 (sīhanada). Note. The spelling with ṭ is only found as v. l. at J ii.245; otherwise as t. Appaṭivāṇa
Appaṭivāṇa
(nt.) [a + paṭivāṇa, for ˚vrāṇa, the guṇa -- form of vṛ, cp. Sk. prativāraṇa] non -- obstruction, not hindering, not opposing or contradicting A i.50; iii.41; v.93 sq.; adj. J i.326. Appaṭivāṇitā
Appaṭivāṇitā
(f.) [abstr. from (ap)paṭivāṇa] not being hindered, non -- obstruction, free effort; only in phrase "asantuṭṭhitā ca kusalesu dhammesu appaṭivāṇitā ca padhānasmiŋ" (discontent with good states and the not shrinking back in the struggle Dhs trsl. 358) A i.50, 95 = D iii.214 = Dhs 1367. Appaṭivāṇī
Appaṭivāṇī
(f.) [almost identical w. appaṭivāṇitā, only used in diff. phrase] non -- hindrance, non -- restriction, free action, impulsive effort; only in stock phrase chando vāyāmo ussāho ussoḷhī appaṭivāṇī S ii.132; v.440; A ii.93, 195; iii.307 sq.; iv.320; Nd2 under chanda C. [cp. similarly Divy 654]. Appaṭivāṇīya
Appaṭivāṇīya
(adj.) [grd. of a + paṭi + vṛ; cp. BSk. aprativāṇiḥ Divy 655; M Vastu iii.343] not to be obstructed, irresistible S i.212 (appld. to Nibbāna; Mrs. Rh. D. Kindred S. p. 274 trsls. "that source from whence there is no turning back"), Th 2, 55. -- 57 -- Appaṭividdha
Appaṭividdha
(adj.) [a + paṭi + viddha] "not shot through" i. e. unhurt J vi.446. Appaṭivibhatta
Appaṭivibhatta
(˚bhogin) (adj.) [a + paṭi + vibhatta] (not eating) without sharing with others (with omission of another negative: see Trenckner, Miln p. 429, where also Bdhgh's expln.) A iii289; Miln 373; cp. Miln trsl. ii.292. Appaṭivekkhiya
Appaṭivekkhiya
[ger. of a + paṭi + avekkhati] not ob- serving or noticing J iv.4 ( = apaccavekkhitvā anavekkhitvā C.). Appaṭisankhā
Appaṭisankhā
(f.) [a + paṭisankhā] want of judgment Pug 21 = Dhs 1346. Appaṭisandhika
Appaṭisandhika
(and ˚iya) (adj.) [a + paṭisandhi + ka (ya)] 1. what cannot be put together again, unmendable, irreparable (˚iya) Pv i.129 ( = puna pākatiko na hoti PvA 66) = J iii.167 (= paṭipākatiko kātuŋ na sakkā C.). -> 2. incapable of reunion, not subject to reunion, i. e. to rebirth J v.100 (˚bhāva). Appaṭisama
Appaṭisama
(adj.) [a + paṭi = sama; cp. BSk. apratisama M Vastu i.104] not having it's equal, incomparable J i.94 (Baddha -- sirī). Appaṭissavatā
Appaṭissavatā
(f.) [a + paṭissavatā] want of deference Pug 20 = Dhs 1325. Appaṇihita
Appaṇihita
(adj.) [a + paṇihita] aimless, not bent on anything, free from desire, usually as nt. aimlessness, combd. w. animittaŋ Vin iii.92, 93 = iv.25; Dhs 351, 508, 556. See on term Cpd. 67; Dhs trsl. 93, 143 & cp. paṇihita. Appatiṭṭha
Appatiṭṭha
(adj.) [a + patiṭṭha] 1. not standing still S i.1. -- 2. without a footing or ground to stand on, bottomless Sn 173. Appatissa
Appatissa
(& appaṭissa) (adj.) [a + paṭi + śru] not docile, rebellious, always in combn. with agārava A ii.20; iii.7 sq., 14 sq., 247, 439. Appatissa -- vāsa an unruly state, anarchy J ii.352. See also paṭissā. Appatīta
Appatīta
(adj.) [a + patīta, of prati + i, Sk. pratīta] dis- satisfied, displeased, disappointed (cp. appaccaya) J v.103 (at this passage preferably to be read with v. l. as appatika = without husband, C. expls. assāmika), 155 (cp. C. on p. 156); DA i.52; SnA 423. Appaduṭṭha
Appaduṭṭha
(adj.) [a + paduṭṭha] not corrupt, faultless, of good behaviour Sn 662 ( = padosâbhāvena a. SnA 478); Dh 137 (= niraparādha DhA iii.70). Appadhaŋsa
Appadhaŋsa
(adj.) [ = appadhaŋsiya, Sk. apradhvaŋsya] not to be destroyed J iv.344 (v. l. duppadhaŋsa). Appadhaŋsika
Appadhaŋsika
(& ˚iya) (adj.) [grd. of a + padhaŋseti] not to be violated or destroyed, inconquerable, indestructible D iii.175 (˚ika, v. l. ˚iya); J iii.159 (˚iya); VvA 208 (˚iya); PvA 117 (˚iya). Cp. appadhaŋsa. Appadhaŋsita
Appadhaŋsita
(adj.) [pp. of a + padhaŋseti] not violated, unhurt, not offended Vin iv.229. Appanā
Appanā
(f.) [cp. Sk. arpaṇa, abstr. fr. appeti = arpayati from of ṛ, to fix, turn, direct one's mind; see appeti] application (of mind), ecstasy,fixing of thought on an object, conception (as psychol. t. t.) J ii.61 (˚patta); Miln 62 (of vitakka); Dhs 7, 21, 298; Vism 144 (˚samādhi); DhsA 55, 142 (def. by Bdhg. as "ekaggaŋ cittaŋ ārammaṇe appeti"), 214 (˚jhāna). See on term Cpd. pp. 56 sq., 68, 129, 215; Dhs trsl. xxviii, 10, 53, 82, 347. Appabhoti
Appabhoti
(Appahoti) see pahoti. Appamaññati
Appamaññati
[appa + maññati] to think little of, to under- rate, despise Dh 121 ( = avajānāti DhA iii.16; v. l. avapamaññati). Appamaññā
Appamaññā
(f.) [a + pamaññā, abstr. fr. pamāṇa = Sk. *pramānya] boundlessness, infinitude, as psych. t. t. appld. in later books to the four varieties of philanthropy, viz. mettā karuŋā muditā upekkhā i. e. love, pity, sympathy, desinterestedness, and as such enumd. at D iii.223 (q. v. for detailed ref. as to var. passages); Ps i.84; Vbh 272 sq.; DhsA 195. By itself at Sn 507 (= mettajjhānasankhātā a. SnA 417). See for further expln. Dhs trsl. p. 66 and mettā. Appamatta
Appamatta1
(adj.) [appa + matta] see appa. Appamatta
Appamatta2
(adj.) [a + pamatta, pp. of pamadati] not negligent, i. e. diligent, careful, heedful, vigilant, alert, zealous M i.391 -- 92; S i.4; Sn 223 (cp. KhA 169), 507, 779 (cp. Nd1 59); Dh 22 (cp. DhA i.229); Th 2, 338 = upaṭṭhitasati Th A 239). Appamāda
Appamāda
[a + pamāda] thoughtfulness, carefulness, con- scientiousness, watchfulness, vigilance, earnestness, zeal D i.13 (: a. vuccati satiyā avippavāso DA i.104); iii.30, 104 sq., 112, 244, 248, 272; M i.477 (˚phala); S i.25, 86, 158, 214; ii.29, 132; iv.78 (˚vihārin), 97, 125, 252 sq.; v.30 sq. (˚sampadā), 41 sq., 91, 135, 240, 250, 308, 350; A i.16, 50. (˚adhigata); iii.330, 364, 449; iv.28 (˚gāravatā) 120 (˚ŋ garu -- karoti); v.21, 126 (kusalesu dhammesu); Sn 184, 264, 334 ( = sati -- avippavāsa -- sankhāta a. SnA 339); It 16 (˚ŋ pasaŋsanti puññakiriyāsu paṇḍitā), 74 (˚vihārin); Dh 57 (˚vihārin, cp. DhA i.434); 327 (˚rata = satiyā avippavāse abhirata DhA iv.26); Dāvs ii. 35; KhA 142. Appamāṇa
Appamāṇa
(freq. spelled appamāna) (adj.) [a + pamāṇa] 1. "without measure", immeasurable, endless, boundless, unlimited, unrestricted all -- permeating S iv.186 (˚cetaso); A ii.73; v.63; Sn 507 (mettaŋ cittaŋ bhāvayaŋ appāmāṇaŋ = anavasesa -- pharaṇena SnA 417; cp. appamaññā); It 21 (mettā), 78; J ii.61; Ps ii.126 sq.; Vbh 16, 24, 49, 62, 326 sq.; Dhs 182, 1021, 1024, 1405; DhsA 45, 196 (˚gocara, cp. anantagocara). See also on term Dhs trsl. 60. -- 2. "without difference", irrelevant, in general (in commentary style) J i.165; ii.323. Appameyya
Appameyya
(adj.) [a + pameyya = Sk. aprameya, grd. of a + pra + mā] immeasurable, infinite, boundless M i.386; S v.400; A i.266; Th 1, 1089 (an˚); Pug 35; Miln 331; Sdhp 338. Appavattā
Appavattā
(f.) [a + pavattā] the state of not going on, the stop (to all that), the non -- continuance (of all that) Th 1, 767; Miln 326. Appasāda
Appasāda
see pasāda. Appassāda
Appassāda
see appa. Appahīna
Appahīna
(adj.) [a + pahīna, pp. of pahāyati] not given up, not renounced M i.386; It 56, 57; Nd2 70 D1; Pug 12, 18. Appāṇaka
Appāṇaka
(adj.) [a + pāṇa + ka] breathless, i. e. (1) holding one's breath in a form of ecstatic meditation (jhāna) M i.243; J i.67 [cp. BSk. āsphānaka Lal. v.314, 324; M Vastu ii.124; should the Pāli form be taken as *a + prāṇaka?]. (2) not holding anything breathing, i. e. inanimate, lifeless, not containing life Sn p. 15 (of water). Appikā
Appikā
(f.) of appaka. Appiccha
Appiccha
(adj.) [appa + iccha from iṣ, cp. icchā] desiring little or nothing, easily satisfied, unassuming, contented, unpretentious S i.63, 65; A iii.432; iv.2, 218 sq., 229; v.124 sq., 130, 154, 167; Sn 628, 707; Dh 404; Pv iv.73; Pug 70. Appicchatā
Appicchatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] contentment, being satisfied with little, unostentatiousness Vin iii.21; D iii.115; M i.13; S ii 202, 208 sq.; A i.12, 16 sq.; iii.219 sq., 448; iv.218, 280 (opp. mahicchatā); Miln 242; SnA 494 (catubbidhā, viz. paccaya -- dhutanga -- pariyatti -- adhigama -- vasena); PvA 73. As one of the 5 dhutanga -- dhammā at Vism 81. -- 58 -- Appita
Appita
(adj.) [pp. of appeti, cp. BSk. arpita, e. g. prītyar- pitaŋ cakṣuḥ Jtm 3169] 1. fixed, applied, concentrated (mind) Miln 415 (mānasa) Sdhp 233 (citta). -- 2. brought to, put to, fixed on J vi.78 (maraṇamukhe); visappita (an arrow to which) poison (is) applied, so read for visap(p)īta at J v.36 & Vism 303. Appiya & Appiyatā
Appiya
& Appiyatā see piya etc. Appekadā
Appekadā
(adv.) see api 2 ax. Appeti
Appeti
[Vedic arpayati, Caus. of ṛ, ṛṇoti & ṛcchati (cp. icchati2), Idg. *ar (to insert or put together, cp. also *er under aṇṇava) to which belong Sk. ara spoke of a wheel; Gr. a)rari/skw to put together, a(/rma chariot, a)/rqron limb, a)reth/ virtue; Lat. arma = E. arms (i. e. weapon), artus fixed, tight, also limb, ars = art. For further connections see aṇṇava] 1. (*er) to move forward, rush on, run into (of river) Vin ii.238; Miln 70. -- 2. (*ar) to fit in, fix, apply, insert, put on to (lit. & fig.) Vin ii.136, 137; J iii.34 (nimba -- sūlasmiŋ to impale, C. āvuṇāti); vi.17 (T. sūlasmiŋ acceti, vv. ll. abbeti = appeti & upeti, C. āvuṇati); Miln 62 (dāruŋ sandhismiŋ); VvA 110 (saññāṇaŋ). Cp. Trenckner, Notes 64 n. 19, who defends reading abbeti at T. passages. Appesakkha
Appesakkha
(adj.) [acc. to Childers = Sk. *alpa + īśa + ākhya, the latter fr. ā + khyā "being called lord of little"; Trenckner on Miln 65 (see p. 422) says: "appesakkha & mahesakkha are traditionally expld. appaparivāra & mahāparivāra, the former, I suppose, from appe & sakkha (Sk. sākhya), the latter an imitation of it". Thus the etym. would be "having little association or friendship" and resemble the term appasattha. The BSk. forms are alpeśākhya & maheśākhya, e. g. at Av. Ś ii. 153; Divy 243] of little power, weak, impotent S ii.229; Miln 65; Sdhp 89. Appoti
Appoti
[the contracted form of āpnoti, usually pāpuṇāti, fr. āp] to attain, reach, get Vism 350 (in etym. of āpo). Appodaka
Appodaka
see appa. Appossukka
Appossukka
(adj.) [appa + ussuka, Sk. alpotsuka, e. g. Lal. V. 509; Divy 41, 57, 86, 159. It is not necessary to assume a hypothetic form of *autsukya as der. fr. ussuka] unconcerned, living at ease, careless, "not bothering", keeping still, inactive Vin ii.188; M iii.175, 176; S i 202 (in stock phrase appossukka tuṇhībhūta sankasāya "living at ease, given to silence, resigned" Mrs. Rh. D. Dhs trsl. 258, see also J.P.T.S. 1909, 22); ii. 177 (id.); iv.178 (id.); Th 2, 457 ( = nirussukka ThA 282); Sn 43 (= abyāvaṭa anapekkha Nd2 72); Dh 330 (= nirālaya DhA iv.31); J i.197; iv.71; Miln 371 (a. tiṭṭhati to keep still); DA i.264. Appossukkatā
Appossukkatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] inaction, reluctance, carelessness, indifference Vin i.5; D ii.36; Miln 232; DhA ii.15. Apphuta
Apphuta
(& apphuṭa) [Sk. *ā -- sphṛta for a -- sphārita pp. of sphar, cp. phurati; phuṭa & also phusati] untouched, unpervaded, not penetrated. D i.74 = M i.276 (pītisukhena). Apphoṭā
Apphoṭā
(f.) [fr. appoṭeti to blossom] N. of a kind of Jasmine J vi.336. Apphoṭita
Apphoṭita
[pp. of apphoṭeti] having snapped one's fingers or clapped one's hands J ii.311 (˚kāle). Apphoṭeti
Apphoṭeti
[ā + phoṭeti, sphuṭ] to snap the fingers or clap the hands (as sign of pleasure) Miln 13, 20. pp. apphoṭita. Aphusa
Aphusa
[Sk. *aspṛśya, a + grd. of phusati to touch] not to be touched Miln 157 (trsl. unchangeable by other circumstances; Tr. on p. 425 remarks "aphusāni kiriyāni seems wrong, at any rate it is unintelligible to me"). Aphegguka
Aphegguka
(adj.) [a + pheggu + ka] not weak, i. e strong J iii.318. Abaddha
Abaddha
[a + baddha] not tied, unbound, unfettered Sn 39 (v. l. and Nd2 abandha; expld -- by rajju -- bandhanɔ ādisu yena kenaci abaddha SnA 83). Abandha
Abandha
(n. -- adj.) [a + bandha] not tied to, not a follower or victim of It 56 (mārassa; v. l. abaddha). Abandhana
Abandhana
(adj.) [a + bandhana] without fetters or bonds, unfettered, untrammelled Sn 948, cp. Nd1 433. Ababa
Ababa
[of uncertain origin, prob. onomatopoetic]. N. of a cert. Purgatory, enumd. with many other similar names at A v.173 = Sn p. 126 (cp. aṭaṭa, abbuda & also Av. Ś i.4, 10 & see for further expln. of term SnA 476 sq. Abala
Abala
(adj.) [a + bala] not strong, weak, feeble Sn 1120 ( = dubbala, appabala, appathāma Nd2 73); Dh 29 (˚assa a weak horse = dubbalassa DhA i.262; opp. sīghassa a quick horse). Abbaje
Abbaje
T. reading at A ii.39, evidently interpreted by ed. as ā + vraje, pot. of ā + vraj to go to, come to (cp. pabbajati), but is preferably with v. l. SS to be read aṇḍaje (corresponding with vihangama in prec. line). Abbaṇa
Abbaṇa
(adj.) [a + vaṇa, Sk. avraṇa] without wounds Dh 124. Abbata
Abbata
(n. -- adj.) [a + vata, Sk. avrata] (a) (nt.) that which is not "vata" i. e. moral obligation, breaking of the moral obligation Sn 839 (asīlata +); Nd1 188 (v. l. SS abhabbata; expld. again as a -- vatta). SnA 545 ( = dhutangavataŋ vinā. -- (b) (adj.) one who offends against the moral obligation, lawless Dh 264 (= sīlavatena ca dhutavatena ca virahita DhA iii.391; vv. ll. k. adhūta & abhūta; B. abbhuta, C. abbuta). Abbaya
Abbaya
in uday˚ at Miln 393 stands for avyaya. Abbahati
Abbahati
(& abbuhati) [the first more freq. for pres., the second often in aor. forms; Sk. ābṛhati, ā + bṛh1, pp. bṛḍha (see abbūḷha)] to draw off, pull out (a sting or dart); imper. pres. abbaha Th 1, 404; J ii.95 (v. l. BB appuha = abbuha; C. expls. by uddharatha). -- aor. abbahi J v.198 (v. l. BB abbuhi), abbahī (metri causa) J iii.390 (v. l. BB dhabbuḷi = abbuḷhi) = Pv i.86 (which reads T. abbūḷha, but PvA 41 expls. nīhari) = DhA i.30 (vv. ll. sabbahi, sabbamhi; gloss K. B abbūḷhaŋ) = Vv 839 (T. abbuḷhi; v. l. BB abbuḷhaŋ, SS avyahi; VvA 327 expls. as uddhari), & abbuhi A iii.55 (v. l. abbahi, C. abbahī ti nīhari), see also vv. ll. under abbahi. -- ger. abbuyha Sn 939 (= abbuhitvā uddharitvā Nd1 419; v.l. SS abbuyhitvā; SnA 567 reads avyuyha & expls. by uddharitvā); S i.121 (taṇhaŋ); iii.26 (id.; but spelt abbhuyha). -- pp. abbuḷha (q. v.). -- Caus. abbāheti [Sk. ābarhayati] to pull out, drag out J iv.364 (satthaŋ abbāhayanti; v. l. abbhā˚); DhA ii.249 (asiŋ). ger. abbāhitvā (= ˚hetvā) Vin ii 201 (bhisa -- muḷālaŋ) with v. l. BB aggahetvā, SS abbūhitvā, cp. Vin i.214 (vv. ll. aggahitvā & abbāhitvā). pp. abbūḷhita (q. v.). Abbāhana
Abbāhana
(nt.) [abstr. fr. abbahati] pulling out (of a sting) DhA iii.404 (sic. T.; v. l. abbūhana; Fausböll aḍahana; glosses C. aṭṭhangata & aṭṭhangika, K. nibbāpana). See also abbuḷhana and abbhāhana. Abbuda
Abbuda
(nt.) [etym. unknown, orig. meaning "swelling", the Sk. form arbuda seems to be a trsl. of P. abbuda] 1. the foetus in the 1st & 2nd months after conception, the 2nd of the five prenatal stages of development, viz. kalala, abbuda, pesi, ghana, pasākha Nd1 120; Miln 40; Vism 236. -- 2. a tumour, canker, sore Vin iii.294, 307 (only in Samantapāsādikā; both times as sāsanassa a). -- 3. a very high numeral, appld. exclusively to the denotation of a vast period of suffering in Purgatory; in this sense used as adj. of Niraya (abbudo nirayo the "vast -- period" hell, cp. nirabbuda). S i.149 = A ii.3 (chattiŋsati pañca ca abbudāni); S i.152 = A v.173 = Sn p. 126 (cp. SnA 476: abbudo nāma koci pacceka -- nirayo nɔ atthi, Avīcimhi yeva abbuda -- gaṇanāya paccanokāso pana abbudo nirayo ti vutto; see also Kindred Sayings p. 190); J iii.360 (sataŋ ninnahuta -- sahassānaŋ ekaŋ abbudaŋ). -- 4. a term used for "hell" in the riddle S i.43 (kiŋsu lokasmiŋ abhudaŋ "who are they who make a hell on earth" Mrs. Rh. D. The answer is "thieves"; so we can scarcely take it in meaning of 2 or 3. The C. has vināsa -- karaṇaŋ. -- 59 -- Abbuḷhati
Abbuḷhati
(?) & Abbuhati see abbahati. Abbuḷhana
Abbuḷhana
(nt.) [fr. abbahati = abbuhati (abbuḷhati)] the pulling out (of a sting), in phrase taṇhā -- sallassa abbuḷhanaŋ as one of the 12 achievements of a Mahesi Nd1 343 = Nd2 503 (eds. of Nd1 have abbūhana, v. l. SS abbussāna; ed. of Nd2 abbuḷhana, v. l. SS abbahana, BB abbuhana). Cp. abbāhana. Abbūḷha
Abbūḷha
(adj.) [Sk. ābṛḍha, pp. of a + bṛh1, see abbahati] drawn out, pulled (of a sting or dart), fig. removed, destroyed. Most freq. in combn. ˚salla with the sting removed, having the sting (of craving thirst, taṇhā) pulled out D ii.283 (v. l. SS asammūḷha); Sn 593, 779 ( = abbūḷhita -- salla Nd1 59; rāgâdi -- sallānaŋ abbūḷhattā a. SnA 518); J iii.390 = Vv 8310 = Pv i.87 = DhA i.30. -- In other connection: M i.139 = A iii.84 (˚esika = taṇhā pahīnā; see esikā); Th 1, 321; KhA 153 (˚soka). Abbūḷhatta
Abbūḷhatta
(nt.) [abstr. of abbūḷha] pulling out, removal, destroying SnA 518. Abbūḷhita
Abbūḷhita
(& abbūhitta at J iii.541) [pp. of abbāheti Caus. of abbāhati] pulled out, removed, destroyed Nd1 59 (abbūḷhita -- sallo + uddhaṭa˚ etc. for abbūḷha); J iii.541 (uncertain reading; v. l. BB appahita, SS abyūhita; C. expls. pupphakaŋ ṭhapitaŋ appaggharakaŋ kataŋ; should we explain as ā + vi + ūh and read abyūhita?). Abbeti
Abbeti
[Trenckner, Notes 64 n. 19] at J iii.34 & vi.17 is probably a mistake in MSS for appeti. Abbokiṇṇa
Abbokiṇṇa
[ = abbhokiṇṇa, abhi + ava + kiṇṇa, cp. abhikiṇṇa] 1.filled M i.387 (paripuṇṇa +); DhA iv.182 (pañca jātisatāni a.). -- 2. [seems to be misunderstood for abbocchinna, a + vi + ava + chinna] uninterrupted, constant, as ˚ŋ adv. in combn. with satataŋ samitaŋ A iv.13 = 145; Kvu 401 (v. l. abbhokiṇṇa), cp. also Kvu trsl. 231 n. 1 (abbokiṇṇa undiluted?); Vbh 320. -- 3. doubtful spelling at Vin iii.271 (Bdhgh on Pārāj. iii.1, 3). Abbocchinna
Abbocchinna
see abbokiṇṇa 2 and abbhochinna. Abbohārika
Abbohārika
(adj.) [a + vi + ava + hārika of voharati] not of legal or conventional status, i. e. -- (a) negligible, not to be decided Vin iii.91, 112 (see also Kvu trsl. 361 n. 4). -- (b) uncommon, extraordinary J iii.309 (v. l. BB abbho˚); v.271, 286 (Kern: ineffective). Abbha
Abbha
(nt.) [Vedic abhra nt. & later Sk. abhra m. "dark cloud"; Idg. *m̊bhro, cp. Gr. a)fro\s scum, froth, Lat. imber rain; also Sk. ambha water, Gr. o)/ mbros rain, Oir ambu water]. A (dense & dark) cloud, a cloudy mass A ii.53 = Vin ii.295 = Miln 273 in list of to things that obscure moon -- & sunshine, viz. abbhaŋ mahikā (mahiyā A) dhūmarajo (megho Miln), Rāhu. This list is referred to at SnA 487 & VvA 134. S i.101 (˚sama pabbata a mountain like a thunder -- cloud); J vi.581 (abbhaŋ rajo acchādesi); Pv iv.39 (nīl˚ = nīla -- megha PvA 251). As f. abbhā at Dhs 617 & DhsA 317 (used in sense of adj. "dull"; DhsA expls. by valāhaka); perhaps also in abbhāmatta.

-- kūṭa the point or summit of a storm -- cloud Th 1, 1064; J vi.249, 250; Vv 11 ( = valāhaka -- sikhara VvA 12). -- ghana a mass of clouds, a thick cloud It 64; Sn 348 (cp. SnA 348). -- paṭala a mass of clouds DhsA 239. -- mutta free from clouds Sn 687 (also as abbhāmutta Dh 382). -- saŋvilāpa thundering S iv.289. Abbhakkhāti
Abbhakkhāti
[abhi + ā + khyā, cp. Sk. ākhyāti] to speak against to accuse, slander D i.161 = A i.161 (an -- abbhakkhātu -- kāma); iv.182 (id.); J iv.377. Cp. Intens. abbhācikkhati. Abbhakkhāna
Abbhakkhāna
(nt.) [fr. abbhakkhāti] accusation, slander, calumny D iii.248, 250; M i.130; iii.207; A iii.290 sq.; Dh 139 (cp. DhA iii.70). Abbhacchādita
Abbhacchādita
[pp. of abhi + ā + chādeti] covered (with) Th 1, 1068. Abbhañjati
Abbhañjati
[abhi + añj] to anoint; to oil, to lubricate M i.343 (sappi -- telena); S iv.177; Pug 56; DhA iii.311 = VvA 68 (sata -- pāka -- telena). Caus. abbhañjeti same J i.438 (telena ˚etvā); v.376 (sata -- pāka -- telena ˚ayiŋsu); Caus. ii. abbhanjāpeti to cause to anoint J iii.372. Abbhañjana
Abbhañjana
(nt.) [fr. abbhañjati] anointing, lubricating, oiling; unction, unguent Vin i.205; iii.79; Miln 367 (akkhassa a.); Vism 264; VvA 295. Abbhatika
Abbhatika
(adj.) [ā + bhata + ika, bhṛ] brought (to), procured, got, J vi.291. Abbhatikkanta
Abbhatikkanta
[pp. of abhi + ati + kram, cp. atikkanta] one who has thoroughly, left behind J v.376. Abbhatīta
Abbhatīta
[pp. of abhi + ati + i, cp. atīta & atikkanta] emphatic of atīta in all meanings, viz. 1 passed, gone by S ii.183 (+ atikkanta); nt. ˚ŋ what is gone or over, the past J iii.169. -- 2. passed away, dead M i.465; S iv.398; Th 1, 242, 1035. -- 3. transgressed, overstepped, neglected J iii.541 (saŋyama). Abbhattha
Abbhattha
(nt.) [abhi + attha2 in acc. abhi + atthaŋ, abhi in function of "towards" = homeward, as under abhi i.1 a; cp. Vedic abhi sadhasthaŋ to the seat R. V. ix. 21. 3] = attha2, only in phrase abbhatthaŋ gacchati "to go towards home", i. e. setting; fig. to disappear, vanish, M i.115, 119; iii.25; A iv.32; Miln 305; pp. abhhattangata "set", gone, disappeared Dhs 1038 (atthangata +); Kvu 576. Abbhatthatā
Abbhatthatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. abbhatta] "going towards setting", disappearance, death J v.469. Abbhanumodati
Abbhanumodati
[abhi + anu + modati] to be much pleased at to show great appreciation of Vin i.196; D i.143, 190; S iv.224; Miln 29, 210; DhA iv.102 (v. l. ˚ānu˚). Abbhanumodana
Abbhanumodana
(nt.) (& ˚ā f.) [fr. abbhanumodati] being pleased, satisfaction, thanksgiving DA i.227; VvA 52 (˚ānu˚); Sdhp 218. Abbhantara
Abbhantara
(adj.) [abhi + antara; abhi here in directive function = towards the inside, in there, with -- in, cp. abhi i.1 a] = antara, i. e. internal, inner, being within or between; nt. ˚ŋ the inner part, interior, interval (also as ˚ -- ) Vin i.111 (satt˚ with interval of seven); A iv.16 (opp. bāhira); Dh 394 (id.); Th 1, 757 (˚âpassaya lying inside); J iii.395 (˚amba the inside of the Mango); Miln 30 (˚e vāyo jivo), 262, 281 (bāhir -- abbhantara dhana); DhA ii.74 (adj. c. gen. being among; v. l. abbhantare). -> Cases used adverbially: instr. abbhantarena in the meantime, in between DhA ii.59. loc. abbhantare in the midst of, inside of, within (c. gen. or -- ˚) J i.262 (rañño), 280 (tuyhaŋ); DhA ii.64 (v. l. antare), 92 (sattavass˚); PvA 48 (= anto). Abbhantarika
Abbhantarika
(adj. -- n.) [fr. abbhantara, cp. Sk. abhyantara in same meaning] intimate friend, confidant, "chum" J i.86 (+ ativissāsika), 337 ("insider", opp. bāhiraka). Abbhantarima
Abbhantarima
(adj.) [superl. formation fr. abbhantara in contrasting function] internal, inner (opp. bāhirima) Vin iii.149; J v.38. -- 60 -- Abbhākuṭika
Abbhākuṭika
(adj.) [a + bhākuṭi + ka; Sk. bhrakuṭi frown] not frowning, genial Vin iii.181 (but here spelt bhākuṭikabhākuṭika); D i.116, cp. DA i.287; DhA iv.8 (as v. l.; T. has abbhokuṭika). Abbhāgata
Abbhāgata
[abhi + ā + gata] having arrived or come; (m.) a guest, stranger Vv 15 ( = abhi -- āgata, āgantuka VvA 24). Abbhāgamana
Abbhāgamana
(nt.) [abhi + ā + gamana; cp. Sk. abhyā- gama] coming arrival, approach Vin iv.221. Abbhāghāta
Abbhāghāta
[abhi + āghāta] slaughtering -- place Vin iii.151 (+ āghāta). Abbhācikkhati
Abbhācikkhati
[Intens. of abbhākkhāti] to accuse, slander, calumniate D i.161; iii.248, 250; M i.130, 368, 482; iii.207; A i.161. Abbhāna
Abbhāna
(nt.) [abhi + āyana of ā + yā (i)] coming back, rehabilitation of a bhikkhu who has undergone a penance for an expiable offence Vin i.49 (˚âraha), 53 (id.), 143, 327; ii.33, 40, 162; A i.99. -- Cp. abbheti. Abbhāmatta
Abbhāmatta
(adj.) [abbhā + matta (?) according to the Pāli Com.; but more likely = Vedic abhva huge, enormous, monstrous, with ā metri causa. On abhva (a + bhū what is contradictory to anything that is) cp. abbhuta & abbhuŋ, and see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under dubius] monstrous, dreadful, enormous, "of the size of a large cloud" (thus C. on S i.205 & J iii.309) S i.205 = Th 1, 652 (v. l. abbha˚ & abbhāmutta) = J iii.309 (v. l. ˚mutta). Abbhāhata
Abbhāhata
[abhi + ā + hata, pp. of han] struck, attacked, afflicted S i.40 (maccunā); Th 1, 448; Sn 581; J vi.26, 440; Vism 31, 232; DA i.140, 147; DhA iv.25. Abbhāhana
Abbhāhana
(nt.) [either = abbāhana or āvāhana] in udaka˚ the pulling up or drawing up of water Vin ii.318 (Bdhgh. on Cullavagga v.16, 2, corresponding to udaka -- vāhana on p. 122). Abbhita
Abbhita
[pp. of abbheti] 1. come back, rehabilitated, rein- stated Vin iii.186 = iv.242 (an˚). -- 2. uncertain reading at Pv i.123 in sense of "called" (an˚ uncalled), where id. p. at J iii.165 reads anavhāta & at Th 2, 129 ayācita. Abbhu
Abbhu
[a + bhū most likely = Vedic abhva and P. abbhuŋ, see also abbhāmatta] unprofitableness, idleness, nonsense J v.295 (= abhūti avaḍḍhi C.). Abbhuŋ
Abbhuŋ
(interj.) [Vedic abhvaŋ, nt. of abhva, see expld. under abbhamatta. Not quite correct Morris J P T S. 1889, 201: abbhuŋ = ā + bhuk; cp also abbhuta] alas! terrible, dreadful, awful (excl. of fright & shock) Vin ii. 115 (Bdhgh. expls. as "utrāsa -- vacanam -- etaŋ"); M i.448. -> See also abbhu & abbhuta. Abbhukkiraṇa
Abbhukkiraṇa
(nt.) [abhi + ud + kṛ] drawing out, pulling, in daṇḍa -- sattha˚ drawing a stick or sword Nd2 5764 (cp. abbhokkiraṇa). Or is it abbhuttīraṇa (cp. uttiṇṇa outlet). Abbhukkirati
Abbhukkirati
[abhi + ud + kirati] to sprinkle over, to rinse (with water) D ii.172 (cakkaratanaŋ; neither with Morris J P T S. 1886, 131 "give up", nor with trsl. of J ii.311 "roll along"); J v.390; PvA 75. Cp. abbhokkirati. Abbhuggacchati
Abbhuggacchati
[abhi + ud + gacchati] to go forth, go out, rise into D i.112, 127; A iii.252 (kitti -- saddo a.); Pug 36. ger. ˚gantvā J i 88 (ākāsaŋ), 202; DhA iv.198. aor. ˚gañchi M i.126 (kittisaddo); J i.93. -- pp. abbhuggata. Abbhuggata
Abbhuggata
[pp. of abbhuggacchati] gone forth, gone out, risen D i.88 (kitti -- saddo a., cp. DhA i.146: sadevakaŋ lokaŋ ajjhottharitvā uggato), 107 (saddo); Sn p. 103 (kittisaddo). Abbhuggamana
Abbhuggamana
(nt. -- adj.) [fr. abbhuggacchati] going out over, rising over (c. acc.) PvA 65 (candaŋ nabhaŋ abbhuggamanaŋ; so read for T. abbhuggamānaŋ). Abbhujjalana
Abbhujjalana
(nt.) [abhi + ud + jalana, from jval] breathing out fire, i. e. carrying fire in one's month (by means of a charm) D i.11 ( = mantena mukhato aggi -- jala -- nīharaṇaŋ DA i.97). Abbhuṭṭhāti
Abbhuṭṭhāti
(˚ṭṭhahati) [abhi + ud + sthā] to get up to, proceed to, D i.105 (cankamaŋ). Abbhuṇṇata
Abbhuṇṇata
[pp. of abbhunnamati] standing up, held up, erect J v.156 (in abbhuṇṇatatā state of being erect. stiffness), 197 (˚unnata; v. l. abbhantara, is reading correct?). Abbhuṇha
Abbhuṇha
(adj.) [ahhi + uṇha] (a) very hot DhA ii.87 (v. l. accuṇha). (b) quite hot, still warm (of milk) DhA ii.67. Abbhuta
Abbhuta1
(adj. nt.) [*Sk. adbhuta which appears to be constructed from the Pāli & offers like its companion *āścarya (acchariya abbhuta see below) serious difficulties as to etym. The most probable solution is that P. abbhuta is a secondary adj. -- formation from abbhuŋ which in itself is nt. of abbha = Vedic abhva (see etym. under abbhāmatta and cp. abbhu, abbhuŋ & J.P.T.S. 1889, 201). In meaning abbhuta is identical with Vedic abhva contrary to what usually happens, i. e. striking, abnormal, gruesome, horrible etc.; & that its significance as a + bhū ("unreal?") is felt in the background is also evident from the traditional etym. of the Pāli Commentators (see below). See also acchariya] terrifying, astonishing; strange, exceptional, puzzling, extraordinary, marvellous, supernormal. Described as a term of surprise & consternation (vimhayɔ āvahassɔ adhivacanaŋ DA i.43 & VvA 329) & expld. as "something that is not" or "has not been before", viz. abhūtaŋ ThA 233; abhūta -- pubbatāya abbhutaŋ VvA 191, 329; abhūta -- pubbaŋ DA i.43. -- 1. (adj.) wonderful, marvellous etc. Sn 681 (kiŋ ˚ŋ, combd. with lomahaŋsana); J iv.355 (id.); Th 2, 316 (abbhutaŋ vata vācaŋ bhāsasi = acchariyaŋ ThA 233); Vv 449 (˚dassaneyya); Sdhp 345, 496. -- 2. (nt.) the wonderful, a wonder, marvel S iv.371, also in ˚dhamma (see Cpd.). Very freq. in combn. with acchariyaŋ and a part. of exclamation, viz, acchariyaŋ bho abbhutaŋ bho wonderful indeed & beyond comprehension, strange & stupefying D i.206; acch. vata bho abbh. vata bho D i.60; acch. bhante abbh. A ii.50; aho acch. aho abbh. J i.88; acch. vata abbh. vata Vv 8316. -- Thus also in phrase acchariyā abbhutā dhammā wonderful & extraordinary signs or things M iii.118, 125; A ii.130; iv.198; Miln 8; and in acchariya -- abbhutacitta -- jāta dumbfounded & surprised J i.88; DhA iv.52; PvA 6, 50.

-- dhamma mysterious phenomenon, something wonderful, supernormal; designation of one of the nine angas or divisions of the Buddhist Scriptures (see nava B 2) Vin iii.8; M i.133; A ii.103; iii.86, 177; Pug 43; Miln 344; PvA 2, etc. Abbhuta
Abbhuta2
(nt.) [ = abbhuta1 in the sense of invoking strange powers in gambling, thus being under direct spell of the "unknown"] a bet, a wager, only in phrase abbhutaŋ karoti (sahassena) to make a bet or to bet (a thousand, i. e. kahāpaṇa's or pieces of money) Vin iii.138; iv.5; J i.191; v.427; vi.192; PvA 151; & in phrase pañcahi sahassehi abbhutaŋ hotu J vi.193. Abbhudāharati
Abbhudāharati
[abhi + ud + ā + harati] to bring towards, to fetch, to begin or introduce (a conversation) M ii.132. Abbhudīreti
Abbhudīreti
[abhi + ud + īreti] to raise the voice, to utter Th 2, 402; DA i.61; Sdhp 514. Abbhudeti
Abbhudeti
[abhi + ud + eti] to go out over, to rise A ii.50, 51 (opp. atthaŋ eti, of the sun). -- ppr. abbhuddayaŋ Vv 6417 ( = abhi -- uggacchanto VvA 280; abbhusayaŋ ti pi pāṭho). Abbhuddhunāti
Abbhuddhunāti
[abhi + ud + dhunāti] to shake very much Vv 649 ( = adhikaŋ uddhunāti VvA 278). -- 61 -- Abbhunnadita
Abbhunnadita
[pp. of abhi + ud + nadati] resounding, resonant Th 1, 1065). Abbhunnamati
Abbhunnamati
[abhi, + ud + namati] to, spring up, burst forth D ii.164. -- pp. abbhuṇṇata (& ˚unnata), q. v. -> Caus. abbhunnāmeti to stiffen, straighten out, hold up, erect D i.120 (kāyaŋ one's body); A ii.245 (id.); D i.126 (patodalaṭṭhiŋ; opp. apanāmeti to bend down). Abbhuyyāta
Abbhuyyāta
[pp. of abbhuyyāti] marched against, attacked Vin i.342; M ii.124. Abbhuyyāti
Abbhuyyāti
[abhi + up + yāti of yā] to go against, to go against, to march (an army) against, to attack S i.82 (aor ˚uyyāsi). -- pp. abbhuyyāta (q. v.). Abbhusūyaka
Abbhusūyaka
(adj.) [abhi + usūyā + ka] zealous, showing zeal, endeavouring in ( -- ˚) Pgdp 101. Abbhussakati & ˚usukkati
Abbhussakati
& ˚usukkati [abhi + ud + ṣvaṣk, see sak- kati] to go out over, rise above (acc.), ascend, freq. in phrase ādicco nabhaŋ abbhussakkamāno M i.317 = S iii.156 = It 20. -- See also S i.65; v.44; A i.242 (same simile); v.22 (id.). Abbhussahanatā
Abbhussahanatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. abhi + *utsahana, cp. ussāha] instigation, incitement Vin ii.88. Abbhusseti
Abbhusseti
[abhi + ud + seti of śī] to rise; v. l. at Vv 6417 according to VvA 280: abbhuddayaŋ (see abbhudeti) abbhussayan ti pi pāṭho. Abbheti
Abbheti
[abhi + ā + i] to rehabilitate a bhikkhu who has been suspended for breach of rules Vin ii.7 (abbhento), 33 (abbheyya); iii.112 (abbheti), 186 = iv.242 (abbhetabba) -- pp. abbhita (q. v.). See also abbhāna. Abbhokāsa
Abbhokāsa
[abhi + avakāsa] the open air, an open & un- sheltered space D i.63 ( = alagganatthena a. viya DA i.180), 71 (=acchanna DA i.210), 89; M iii.132; A ii.210; iii.92; iv.437, v.65; Sn p. 139 (˚e nissinna sitting in the open) J i.29, 215; Pug 57. Abbhokāsika
Abbhokāsika
(adj.) [fr. abbhokāsa] belonging to the open air, one who lives in the open, the practice of certain ascetics. D i.167; M i.282; A iii.220; Vin v.131, 193; J iv.8 (+ nesajjika); Pug 69; Miln 20, 342. (One of the 13 Dhutaŋgas). See also Nd1 188; Nd2 587.

-- anga the practice or system of the "campers -- out" Nd1 558 (so read for abbhokāsi -- kankhā, cp. Nd1 188). Abbhokiṇṇa
Abbhokiṇṇa
[pp. of abbhokirati] see abbokiṇṇa. Abbhokirati
Abbhokirati
[abhi + ava + kirati] to sprinkle over, to cover, bedeck Vv 59 ( = abhi -- okirati abhippakirati), 3511 (v. l. abbhuk˚). Cp. abbhukkirati & abbhokkiraṇa -> pp. abbhokiṇṇa see under abbokiṇṇa. Abbhokuṭika
Abbhokuṭika
spelling at DhA iv.8 for abbhākuṭika. Abbhokkiraṇa
Abbhokkiraṇa
(nt.) [fr. abbhokirati] in naṭānaŋ a. "turnings of dancers" DA i.84 in expln of sobha -- nagarakaŋ of D i.6. Abbhocchinna
Abbhocchinna
(besides abbocch˚, q.v. under abbokiṇṇa2) [a + vi + ava + chinna] not cut off, uninterrupted, continuous J i.470 (v. l. abbo˚); vi.254, 373; Cp. i.63; Miln 72; Vism 362 (bb), 391 (bb). Abbhohārika
Abbhohārika
see abbo˚. Aby˚
Aby˚
see avy˚. Abhabba
Abhabba
(adj.) [a + bhavya. The Sk. abhavya has a different meaning] impossible, not likely, unable D iii.13 sq., 19, 26 sq., 133; It 106, 117; Sn 231 (see KhA 189); Dh 32; J i 116; Pug 13.

-- ṭṭhāna a (moral) impossibility of which there are 9 enumd. among things that are not likely to be found in an Arahant's character: see D iii.133 & 235 (where the five first only are given as a set). Abhabbatā
Abhabbatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. abhabba] an impossibility, unli- kelihood Sn 232, cp. KhA 191. Abhaya
Abhaya
(adj.) [a + bhaya] free from fear or danger, fearless, safe Dh 258. -- nt. abhayaŋ confidence, safety Dh 317, cp. DhA iii.491. For further refs. see bhaya. Abhi
Abhi
-- [prefix, Vedic abhi, which represents both Idg *m̊bhi, as in Gr. a)mfi/ around, Lat. ambi, amb round about, Oir. imb, Gall. ambi, Ohg. umbi, Ags. ymb, cp. also Vedic (Pāli) abhitaḥ on both sides; and Idg. *obhi, as in Lat. ob towards, against (cp. obsess, obstruct), Goth. bi, Ohg. Ags. bī = E. be -- .

I. Meaning. -- 1. The primary meaning of abhi is that of taking possession and mastering, as contained in E. coming by and over -- coming, thus literally having the function of (a) facing and aggressing = towards, against, on to, at (see II. 1, a); and (b) mastering = over, along over, out over, on top of (see II. 1, b). 2. Out of this is developed the fig. meaning of increasing, i. e., an intensifying of the action implied in the verb (see III. 1). Next to saŋ -- it is the most frequent modification preflx in the meaning of "very much, greatly" as the first part of a double -- prefix cpd. (see III. 2), and therefore often seemingly superfluous, i. e., weakened in meaning, where the second part already denotes intensity as in abhi -- vi -- ji (side by side with vi -- ji), abhi -- ā -- kkhā (side by side with ā -- kkhā), abhi -- anu -- mud (side by side with anu -- mud). In these latter cases abhi shows a purely deictic character corresponding to Ger. her -- bei -- kommen (for bei -- kommen), E. fill up (for fill); e. g., abbhatikkanta (= ati ˚ C.), abbhatīta ("vorbei gegangen"), abbhantara ("with -- in", b -- innen or "in here"), abbhudāharati, abhipūreti ("fill up"), etc. (see also II. 1, c).

II. Lit. Meaning. -- 1. As single pref.: (a) against, to, on to, at -- , viz., abbhatthangata gone towards home, abhighāta striking at, ˚jjhā think at, ˚mana thinking on, ˚mukha facing, turned towards, ˚yāti at -- tack, ˚rūhati ascend, ˚lāsa long for, ˚vadati ad -- dress, ˚sapati ac -- curse, ˚hata hit at. (b) out, over, all around: abbhudeti go out over, ˚kamati exceed, ˚jāti off -- spring, ˚jānāti know all over, ˚bhavati overcome, ˚vaḍḍhati increase, ˚vuṭṭha poured out or over, ˚sandeti make over -- flow, ˚siñcati sprinkle over. (c) abhi has the function of transitivising intrs. verbs after the manner of E. be -- (con -- ) and Ger. er -- , thus resembling in meaning a simple Caus. formation, like the foll.: abhigajjati thunder on, ˚jānāti "er -- kennen" ˚jāyati be -- get, ˚tthaneti = ˚gajjati, ˚nadati "er tönen", ˚nandati approve of (cp. anerkennen), ˚passati con -- template, ˚ramati indulge in, ˚ropeti honour, ˚vuḍḍha increased, ˚saddahati believe in. -- 2. As base in compn. (2nd part of cpd.) abhi occurs only in combn. sam -- abhi (which is, however, of late occurrence and a peeuliarity of later texts, and is still more freq. in BSk.: see under sam -- ).

III. Fig. Meaning (intensifying). -- 1. A single pref.: abhikiṇṇa strewn all over, ˚jalati shine forth, ˚jighacchati be very hungry, ˚tatta much exhausted, ˚tāpa very hot, ˚toseti pleuse greatly, ˚nava quite fresh, ˚nipuṇa very clever, ˚nīla of a deep black, ˚manāpa very pleasant, ˚mangaly very lucky, ˚yobbana full youth, ˚rati great liking, ˚ratta deep red, ˚ruci intense satisfaction, ˚rūpa very handsome ( = adhika -- rūpa C.), ˚sambuddha wide and fully -- awake, cp. abbhuddhunāti to shake greatly (= adhikaŋuddh˚ C.). -- As 1st part of a prep. -- cpd. (as modification -- pref.) in foll. combinations: abhi -- ud (abbhud -- ) ˚ati, ˚anu, ˚ava, ˚ā, ˚ni, ˚ppa, ˚vi, ˚saŋ. See all these s. v. and note that the contraction (assimilation before vowel) form of abhi is abbh˚ . -- On its relation to pari, see pari˚, to ava see ava˚.

IV. Dialectical Variation. -- There are dial. variations in the use and meanings of abhi. Vedic abhi besides corresponding to abhi in P. is represented also by ati˚, adhi˚ and anu˚, since all are similar in meaning, and psychologically easily fused and confused (cp. meanings: abhi = on to, towards; ati = up to and beyond; adhi = up to, towards, over; anu = along towards). For all the foll. verbs we find in Pāli one or other of these three prefixes. So ati in ˚jāti, ˚pīḷita, ˚brūheti, ˚vassati, ˚vāyati, ˚veṭheti; also as vv. ll. with abhi -- kīrati, ˚pavassati, ˚roceti, cp. atikkanta -- abhi˚ (Sk. abhikrānta); adhi in ˚patthita, ˚pāteti, ˚ppāya, ˚ppeta, ˚bādheti, ˚bhū, ˚vāha (vice versa P. abhi -- ropeti compared with Sk. adhiropayati); anu in ˚gijjhati, ˚brūheti, ˚sandahati. -- 62 -- Abhikankhati
Abhikankhati
[abhi + kankhati] to desire after, long for, wish for S i.140, 198 (Nibbānaŋ); J ii.428; iv.10, 241; VvA 38, 283; ThA 244. -- pp. abhikankhita. Cp. BSk. abhikānkṣati, e. g. Jtm. p. 221. Abhikankhanatā
Abhikankhanatā
(f.) [abhi + kankhana + tā] wishing, longing, desire DA i.242. Abhikankhita
Abhikankhita
[pp. of abhikankhati] desired, wished, longed for VvA 201 ( = abhijjhita). Abhikankhin
Abhikankhin
(adj.) cp. wishing for, desirous (of -- ˚) Th 2, 360 (sītibhāva˚). Abhikiṇṇa
Abhikiṇṇa
[pp. of abhikirati] 1. strewn over with ( -- ˚), adorned, covered filled Pv ii.112 (puppha˚). -- 2. overwhelmed, overcome, crushed by ( -- ˚) It 89 (dukkh˚; vv. ll. dukkhâtiṇṇa & otiṇṇa) = A i.147 (which reads dukkhotiṇṇa). See also avatiṇṇa. Abhikirati
Abhikirati
-- 1. [Sk. abhikirati] to sprinkle or cover over: see abhikiṇṇa 1. -- 2. [Sk. avakirati, cp. apakiritūna] to overwhelm, destroy, put out, throw away, crush S i.54; Th 1, 598; 2, 447 (ger. ˚kiritūna, reading of C. for T. apa˚, expld. by chaḍḍetvā); Dh 25 (˚kīrati metri causa; dīpaŋ abhikīrati = viddhaŋseti vikirati DhA i.255; v. l. atikirati); J iv.121 (˚kīrati; dīpaŋ = viddhaŋseti C.); vi.541 (nandiyo m˚ abhikīrare = abhikiranti abhikkamanti C.); DhA i.255 (inf. ˚kirituŋ). -- pp. abhikiṇṇa see abhikiṇṇa 2. Abhikīḷati
Abhikīḷati
[abhi + kìḷati] to play (a game), to sport Miln 359 (kīḷaŋ). Abhikūjita
Abhikūjita
[abhi + kūjita, pp. of kūj] resounding (with the song of birds) Pv ii.123 (cakkavāka˚; so read for kujita). Cp. abhinikūjita. Abhikkanta
Abhikkanta
(adj. -- n.) [pp. of abhikkamati, in sense of Sk. and also P. atikkanta] (a) (adj.) lit. gone forward, gone out, gone beyond. According to the traditional expln. preserved by Bdhgh. & Dhp (see e. g. DA i.227 = KhA 114 = VvA 52) it is used in 4 applications: abhikkantasaddo khaya (+ pabbaniya KhA) sundarɔ -- âbhirūpa -- abbhanumodanesu dissati. These are: 1. (lit.) gone away, passed, gone out, departed (+ nikkhanta, meaning khaya "wane"), in phrase abhikkantāya rattiyā at the waning of the night Vin i.26; D ii.220; M i.142. 2. excellent, supreme (= sundara) Sn 1118 (˚dassāvin having the most exellent knowledge = aggadassāvin etc. Nd2 76); usually in compar ˚tara (+ paṇītatara) D i.62, 74, 216; A ii.101; iii.350 sq.; v.140, 207 sq.; DA i.171 (= atimanāpatara). 3. pleasing, superb, extremely wonderful, as exclamation ˚ŋ repeated with bho (bhante), showing appreciation (= abbhânumodana) D i.85, 110, 234; Sn p. 15, 24, etc. freq. 4. surpassing, beautiful (always with ˚vaṇṇa = abhirūpa) Vin i.26; D ii.220; M i.142; Pv ii.110 = Vv 91 (= atimanāpa abhirūpa PvA 71); KhA 115 (= abhirūpachavin). -- (b) (nt.) abhikkantaŋ (combd. with and opp. to paṭikkantaŋ) going forward (and backward), approach (and receding) D i.70 (= gamaṇa + nivattana DA i.183); Vin iii.181; A ii.104, 106 sq.; VvA 6. Abhikkama
Abhikkama
going forward, approach, going out Pv iv.12 (opp. paṭikkama going back); DhA iii.124 (˚paṭikkama). Abhikkamati
Abhikkamati
[Vedic abhikramati, abhi + kamati] to go forward, to proceed, approach D i.50 ( = abhimukho kamati, gacchati, pavisati DA i.151); ii.147, 256 (abhikkā-> muŋ aor.); DhA iii.124 (evaŋ ˚itabbaŋ evaŋ paṭikkamitabbaŋ thus to approach & thus to withdraw). -- pp. abhikkanta (q. v.). Abhikkhaṇa
Abhikkhaṇa1
(nt.) [fr. abhikkhanati] digging up of the ground M i.143. Abhikkhaṇa
Abhikkhaṇa2
(nt.) [abhi + *ikkhaṇa from īkṣ, cp. Sk. abhīkṣṇa of which the eontracted form is P. abhiṇha] only as acc. adv. ˚ŋ constantly, repeated, often Vv 2412 ( = abhiṇhaŋ VvA 116); Pv ii.84 (= abhiṇhaŋ bahuso PvA 107); Pug 31; DhA ii.91. Abhikkhaṇati
Abhikkhaṇati
[abhi + khaṇati] to dig up M i.142. Abhikkhipati
Abhikkhipati
[abhi + khipati] to throw Dāvs iii.60; cp. abhinikkhipati ibid. 12. Abhigajjati
Abhigajjati
[abhi + gajjati from garj, sound -- root, cp. P. gaggara] (a) to roar, shout, thunder, to shout or roar at (c. acc.) Sn 831 (shouting or railing = gajjanto uggajjanto Nd1 172); ger. abhigajjiya thundering Cp. iii.108. -> (b) hum, chatter, twitter (of birds); see abhigajjin. Abhigajjin
Abhigajjin
(adj.) [fr. abhigajjati] warbling, singing, chat- tering Th 1, 1108, 1136. Abhigamanīya
Abhigamanīya
(adj.) [grd. of abhigacchati] to be approached, accessible PvA 9. Abhigijjhati
Abhigijjhati
[abhi + gijjhati] 1. to be greedy for, to crave for, show delight in (c. loc.) Sn 1039 (kāmesu, cp. Nd2 77). -- 2. to envy (acc.) S i.15 (aññam -- aññaŋ). Abhigīta
Abhigīta
[pp. of abhigāyati, cp. gīta] 1. sung for. Only in one phrase, gāthābhigītaŋ, that which is gained by singing or chanting verses (Ger. "ersungen") S i.173 = Sn 81 = Miln 228. See SnA 151. -- 2. resounding with, filled with song (of birds) J vi.272 (= abhiruda). Abhighāta
Abhighāta
[Sk. abhighāta, abhi + ghāta] (a) striking, slaying, killing PvA 58 (daṇḍa˚), 283 (sakkhara˚). -> (b) impact, contact DhsA 312 (rūpa˚ etc.). Abhicetasika
Abhicetasika
(adj.) [abhi + ceto + ika] dependent on the clearest consciousness. On the spelling see ābhic˚ (of jhāna) M i.33, 356; iii.11; S ii.278; A ii.23; v.132. (Spelt. ābhi˚ at M i.33; A iii.114; Vin v.136). See Dial. iii.108. Abhiceteti
Abhiceteti
[abhi + ceteti] to intend, devise, have in mind J iv.310 (manasā pāpaŋ). Abhicchanna
Abhicchanna
(adj.) [abhi + channa] covered with, bedecked or adorned with ( -- ˚) J ii.48 (hema -- jāla˚, v. l. abhisañchanna), 370 (id.); Sn 772 ( = ucchanna āvuṭa etc. Nd1 24, cp. Nd2 365). Abhicchita
Abhicchita
(adj.) [abhi + icchita, cp. Sk. abhīpsita] desired J vi.445 (so read for abhijjhita). Abhijacca
Abhijacca
(adj.) [Sk. ābhijātya; abhi + jacca] of noble birth J v.120. Abhijaneti
Abhijaneti
occasional spelling for abhijāneti. Abhijappati
Abhijappati
[abhi + jappati] to wish for, strive after, pray for S i.143 (read asmâbhijappanti & cp. Kindred Sayings p. 180) = J iii.359 (= namati pattheti piheti C.); Ṣn 923, 1046 (+ āsiŋsati thometi; Nd2 79 = jappati & same under icchati). Cp. in meaning abhigijjhati. Abhijappana
Abhijappana
(nt.) [doubtful whether to jappati or to japati to mumble, to which belongs jappana in kaṇŋa˚ DA i.97] in hattha˚ casting a spell to make the victim throw up or wring his hands D i.11; DA i.97. Abhijappā
Abhijappā
(f.) [abstr. fr. abhijappati, cp. jappā] praying for, wishing, desire, longing Dhs 1059 = Nd2 taṇhā ii.; Dhs 1136. -- 63 -- Abhijappin
Abhijappin
(adj.) [fr. abhijappati] praying for, desiring A III.353 (kāma -- lābha˚). Abhijalati
Abhijalati
[abhi + jalati] to shine forth, ppr. ˚anto res- plendent PvA 189. Abhijavati
Abhijavati
[abhi + javati] to be eager, active Sn 668. Abhijāta
Abhijāta
(adj.) [abi + jāta] of noble birth, well -- born, S i.69; Vv 293; Miln 359 (˚kulakulīna belonging to a family of high or noble birth). Abhijāti
Abhijāti
(f.) [abhi + jāti] 1. Species. Only as t. t. in use by certain non -- Buddhist teachers. They divided mankind into six species, each named after a colour D i.53, 54; A iii.383 ff. (quoted DA i.162) gives details of each species. Two of them, the black and the white, are interpreted in a Buddhist sense at D iii.250, M ii.222, and Netti 158. This interpretation (but not the theory of the six species) has been widely adopted by subsequent Hindu writers. -- 2. Rebirth, descent, Miln 226. Abhijātika
Abhijātika
(adj.) [fr. abhijāti] belonging to ones birth or race, born of, being by birth; only in cpd. kaṇhâbhijātika of dark birth, that is, low in the social scale D iii.251 = A iii.348; Sn 563 = Th 1, 833; cp. J P T S. 1893, 11; in sense of "evil disposed or of bad character" at J v.87 (= kāḷaka -- sabhāva C.). Abhijātitā
Abhijātitā
(f.) [abstr. fr. abhijāti] the fact of being born, descendency VvA 216. Abhijāna
Abhijāna
(nt. or m?) [Sk. abhijñāna] recognition, remem- brance, recollection Miln 78. See also abhiññā. Abhijānāti
Abhijānāti
[abhi + jñā, cp. jānāti & abhiññā] to know by experience, to know fully or thoroughly, to recognise, know of (c. acc.), to be conscious or aware of D i.143; S ii.58, 105, 219, 278; iii.59, 91; iv.50, 324, 399; v.52, 176, 282, 299; Sn 1117 (diṭṭhiŋ Gotamassa na a.); J iv.142; Pv ii.710 = ii.103 (nɔābhijānāmi bhuttaŋ vā pītaŋ); Sdhp 550; etc. -- Pot. abhijāneyya Nd2 78a, & abhijaññā Sn 917, 1059 (= jāneyyāsi SnA 592); aor. abhaññāsi Sn p. 16. -- ppr. abhijānaŋ S iv.19, 89; Sn 788 (= ˚jānanto C.), 1114 (= ˚jānanto Nd2 78b) abhijānitva DhA iv.233; abhiññāya S iv.16; v.392; Sn 534 (sabbadhammaŋ), 743 (jātikkhayaŋ), 1115, 1148; It 91 (dhammaŋ); Dh 166 (atta -- d -- atthaŋ); freq. in phrase sayaŋ abhiññāya from personal knowledge or self -- experience It 97 (v.l. abhiññā); Dh 353; and abhiññā [short form, like ādā for ādāya, cp. upādā] in phrase sayaŋ abhiññā D i.31 (+ sacchikatvā); S ii.217; It 97 (v.l. for ˚abhiññāya), in abhiññā -- vosita perfected by highest knowledge S i.167 = 175 = Dh 423 ("master of supernormal lore" Mrs Rh. D. in kindred S. p. 208; cp. also DhA iv.233); It 47 = 61 = 81, and perhaps also in phrase sabbaŋ abhiññapariññeyya S iv.29. -- grd. abhiññeyya S iv.29; Sn 558 (˚ŋ abhiññātaŋ known is the knowable); Nd2 s.v.; DhA iv.233. -- pp. abhiññāta (q. v.). Abhijāyati
Abhijāyati
[abhi + jāyati, Pass. of jan, but in sense of a Caus. = janeti] to beget, produce, effect, attain, in phrase akaṇhaŋ asukkaŋ Nibbānaŋ a. D iii.251; A iii.384 sq. At Sn 214 abhijāyati means "to behave, to be", cp. SnA 265 (abhijāyati = bhavati). Abhijigiŋsati
Abhijigiŋsati
[abhi + jigiŋsati] to wish to overcome, to covet J vi.193 ( = jinituŋ icchati C). Burmese scribes spell ˚jigīsati; Th 1, 743 ("cheat"? Mrs Rh. D.; "vernichten" Neumann). See also abhijeti, and nijigiŋsanatā. Abhijighacchati
Abhijighacchati
[abhi + jighacchati] to be very hungry PvA 271. Abhijīvanika
Abhijīvanika
(adj.) [abhi + jīvana + ika] belonging to one's livehood, forming one's living Vin i.187 (sippa). Abhijīhanā
Abhijīhanā
(f.) [abhi + jīhanā of jeh to open ones mouth] strenuousness, exertion, strong endeavour J vi.373 (viriyakaraṇa C.). Abhijeti
Abhijeti
[abhi + jayati] to win, acquire, conquer J vi.273 (ābhi˚ metri causā). Abhijoteti
Abhijoteti
[abhi + joteti] to make clear, explain, illuminate J v.339. Abhijjanaka
Abhijjanaka
(adj.) [a + bhijjana + ka, from bhijja, grd. of bhid] not to be broken, not to be moved or changed, uninfluenced J ii.170; DhA iii.189. Abhijjamāna
Abhijjamāna
(adj.) [ppr. passive of a + bhid, see bhindati] that which is not being broken up or divided. In the stock descrīption of the varieties of the lower Iddhi the phrase udake pi abhijjamāne gacchati is doubtful. The principal passages are D i.78, 212; iii.112, 281; M i.34, 494; ii.18; A i.170, 255; iii.17; v.199; S ii 121; v.264. In about half of these passages the reading is abhijjamāno. The various rcadings show that the MSS also are equally divided on this point. Bdgh. (Vism 396) reads ˚māne, and explains it, relying on Ps ii.208, as that sort of water in which a man does not sink. Pv iii.11 has the same idiom. Dhammapāla's note on that (PvA 169) is corrupt. At D i.78 the Colombo ed. 1904, reads abhejjamāne and tr. ʻ not dividing (the water) ʼ; at D i.212 it reads abhijjamāno and tr. ʻ not sinking (in the water) ʼ. Abhijjhā
Abhijjhā
(f.) [fr. abhi + dhyā (jhāyati1), cp. Sk. abhidhyāna], covetousness, in meaning almost identical with lobha (cp. Dhs. trsl. 22) D i.70, 71 (˚āya cittaŋ parisodheti he cleanses his heart from coveting; abhijjhāya = abl.; cp. DA i.211 = abhijjhāto); M i.347 (id.); D iii.49, 71 sq., 172, 230, 269; S iv.73, 104, 188, 322 (adj. vigatɔâbhijjha), 343 (˚āyavipāka); A i.280; iii.92; v.251 sq.; It 118; Nd1 98 (as one of the 4 kāya -- ganthā, q. v.); Nd2 taṇhā ii.1; Pug 20, 59; Dhs 1136 (˚kāyagantha); Vbh 195, 244 (vigatɔâbhijjha), 362, 364, 391; Nett 13; DhA i.23; PvA 103, 282; Sdhp 56, 69. -- Often combd with ˚domanassa covetousness & discontent, e. g. at D iii.58, 77, 141, 221, 276; M i.340; iii.2; A i.39, 296; ii.16, 152; iv.300 sq., 457 sq.; v.348, 351; Vbh 105, 193 sq. -- anabhijjhā absence of covetousness Dhs 35, 62. -- See also anupassin, gantha, domanassa, sīla. Abhijjhātar
Abhijjhātar
see abhijjhitar. Abhijjhāti
Abhijjhāti
[cp. abhidyāti, abhi + jhāyati1; see also abhij- jhāyati] to wish for (acc.), long for, covet S v.74 (so read for abhijjhati); ger. abhijjhāya J vi.174 ( = patthetvā C.). -- pp. abhijjhita. Abhijjhāyati
Abhijjhāyati
[Sk. abhidhyāyati, abhi + jhāyati1; see also abhijjhāti] to wish for, covet (c. acc.). Sn 301 (aor. abhijjhāyiŋsu = abhipatthayamāna jhāyiŋsu Sn A 320). Abhijjhālū
Abhijjhālū
(& ˚u) (adj.) [cp. jhāyin from jhāyati1; abhijj- hālu with ˚ālu for ˚āgu which in its turn is for āyin. The B.Sk. form is abhidyālu, e. g. Divy 301, a curious reconstruction] covetous D i.139; iii.82; Ṣ ii.168; iii.93; A i.298; ii.30, 59, 220 (an˚ + avyapannacitto sammādiṭṭhiko at conclusion of sīla); v.92 sq., 163, 286 sq.; It 90, 91; Pug 39, 40. Abhijjhiṭṭa
Abhijjhiṭṭa
v. l. at DhA iv.101 for ajjhiṭṭha. Abhijjhita
Abhijjhita
[pp. of abhijjhāti] coveted, J. vi.445; usually neg. an˚ not coveted, Vin i.287; Sn 40 ( = anabhipatthita Sn A 85; cp. Nd2 38); Vv 474 (= na abhikankhita VvA 201). Abhijjhitar
Abhijjhitar
[n. ag. fr. abhijjhita in med. function] one who covets M i.287 (T. abhijjhātar, v. l. ˚itar) = A v.265 (T. ˚itar, v. l. ˚ātar). Abhiñña
Abhiñña
(adj.) (usually -- ˚) [Sk. abhijña] knowing, pos- sessed of knowledge, esp. higher or supernormal knowledge (abhiññā), intelligent; thus in chalabhiñña one who possesses the 6 abhiññās Vin iii.88; dandh˚ of sluggish intellect D iii.106; A ii.149; v.63 (opp. khipp˚); mah˚ of great insight S ii.139. -- Compar. abhiññatara S v.159 (read bhiyyo ˚bhiññataro). -- 64 -- Abhiññatā
Abhiññatā
(f.) [fr. abhiññā] in cpd. mahā˚ state or condition of great intelligence or supernormal knowledge S iv.263; V.175, 298 sq. Abhiññā
Abhiññā1
(f.) [fr. abhi + jñā, see jānāti]. Rare in the older texts. It appears in two contexts. Firstly, certain conditions are said to conduce (inter alia) to serenity, to special knowledge (abhiññā), to special wisdom, and to Nibbāna. These conditions precedent are the Path (S v.421 = Vin i.10 = S iv.331), the Path + best knowledge and full emancipation (A v.238), the Four Applications of Mindfulness (S v.179) and the Four Steps to Iddhi (S. v.255). The contrary is three times stated; wrong -- doing, priestly superstitions, and vain speculation do not conduce to abhiññā and the rest (D iii.131; A iii.325 sq. and v.216). Secondly, we find a list of what might now be called psychic powers. It gives us 1, Iddhi (cp. levitation); 2, the Heavenly Ear (cp. clairaudience); 3, knowing others' thoughts (cp. thought -- reading); 4, recollecting one's previous births; 5, knowing other people's rebirths; 6, certainty of emancipation already attained (cp. final assurance). This list occurs only at D iii.281 as a list of abhiññās. It stands there in a sort of index of principal subjects appended at the end of the Dīgha, and belongs therefore to the very close of the Nikāya period. But it is based on older material. Descriptions of each of the six, not called abhiññā's, and interspersed by expository sentences or paragraphs, are found at D i.89 sq. (trsl. Dial. i.89 sq.); M i.34 (see Buddh. Suttas, 210 sq.); A i.255, 258 = iii.17, 280 = iv.421. At S i.191; Vin ii.16; Pug 14, we have the adj. chaḷabhiññā ("endowed with the 6 Apperceptions"). At S ii.216 we have five, and at S v.282, 290 six abhiññā's mentioned in glosses to the text. And at S ii.217, 222 a bhikkhu claims the 6 powers. See also M ii.11; iii.96. It is from these passages that the list at D iii. has been made up, and called abhiññā's.

Afterwards the use of the word becomes stereotyped. In the Old Commentaries (in the Canon), in the later ones (of the 5th cent. a.d.), and in medieval and modern Pāli, abhiññā, nine times out ten, means just the powers given in this list. Here and there we find glimpses of the older, wider meaning of special, supernormal power of apperception and knowledge to be acquired by long training in life aud thought. See Nd1 108, 328 (expln. of ñāṇa); Nd2 s. v. and N0. 466; Ps i.35; ii.156, 189; Vbh 228, 334; Pug 14; Nett 19, 20; Miln 342; Vism 373; Mhvs xix.20; DA i.175; DhA ii.49; iv.30; Sdhp 228, 470, 482. See also the discussion in the Cpd. 60 sp., 224 sq. For the phrase sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā and abhiññā -- vosita see abhijānāti. The late phrase yathɔ abhiññaṃ means ʻ as you please, according to liking, as you like ʼ, J v.365 ( = yathādhippāyaṃ yathāruciṃ C.). For abhiññā in the use of an adj. (˚abhiñña) see abhiñña. Abhiññā
Abhiññā2
ger. of abhijānāti. Abhiññāta
Abhiññāta
[pp. of abhijānāti] 1. known, recognised Sn 588 (abhiññeyyaŋ ˚ŋ). -- 2. (well) -- known, distinguished D i.89 (˚kolañña = pākaṭa -- kulaja DA i.252), 235; Sn p. 115. Abhiññeyya
Abhiññeyya
grd. of abhijānāti. Abhiṭhāna
Abhiṭhāna
(nt.) [abhi + ṭhāna, cp. abhitiṭṭhati; lit. that which stands out above others] a great or deadly crime. Only at Sn 231 = Kh vi.10 (quoted Kvu 109). Six are there mentioned, & are explained (KhA 189) as "matricide, parricide, killing an Arahant, causing schisms, wounding a Buddha, following other teachers". For other relations & suggestions see Dhs trsl. 267. -- See also ānantarika. Abhiṇhaŋ
Abhiṇhaŋ
(adv.) [contracted form of abhikkhaṇaŋ] repeat- edly, continuous, often M i.442 (˚āpattika a habitual offender), 446 (˚kāraṇa continuous practice); Sn 335 (˚saŋvāsa continuous living together); J i.190; Pug 32; DhA ii.239; VvA 116 ( = abhikkhaṇa), 207, 332; PvA 107 (= abhikkhaṇaŋ). Cp. abhiṇhaso. Abhiṇhaso
Abhiṇhaso
(adv.) [adv. case fr. abhiṇha; cp. bahuso = Sk. bahuśaḥ] always, ever S i.194; Th 1, 25; Sn 559, 560, 998. Abhitakketi
Abhitakketi
[abhi + takketi] to search for Dāvs v.4. Abhitatta
Abhitatta
[pp. of abhi +tapati] scorched (by heat), dried up, exhausted, in phrases uṇha˚ Vin ii.220; Miln 97, and ghamma˚ S ii.110, 118; Sn 1014; J ii.223; VvA 40; PvA 114. Abhitāpa
Abhitāpa
[abhi + tāpa] extreme heat, glow; adj. very hot Vin iii.83 (sīsa˚ sunstroke); M i.507 (mahā˚ very hot); Miln 67 (mahābhitāpatara much hotter); Pv iv.18 (mahā˚, of niraya). Abhitāḷita
Abhitāḷita
[abhi + tāḷita fr. tāḷeti] hammered to pieces, beaten, struck Vism 231 (muggara˚). Abhitiṭṭhati
Abhitiṭṭhati
[abhi + tiṭṭhati] to stand out supreme, to excel, surpass D ii.261; J vi.474 (abhiṭṭhāya = abhibhavitvā C.). Abhitunna
Abhitunna
(tuṇṇa) [not as Morris, J.P.T.S. 1886, 135, suggested fr. abhi + tud, but acc. to Kern, Toev. p. 4 fr. abhi + tūrv. (Cp. turati & tarati2 and Ved. turvati). Thus the correct spelling is ˚tuṇṇa = Sk. abhitūrṇa. The latter occurs as v. l. under the disguise of (sok -- )âhituṇḍa for ˚abhituṇṇa at M. Vastu iii.2]. Overwhelmed, overcome, overpowered S ii.20; Ps i.129 (dukkha˚), 164; J i.407; 509 (˚tuṇṇa); ii.399, 401; iii.23 (soka˚); iv.330; v.268; Sdhp 281. Abhito
Abhito
(indecl.) adv. case fr. prep. abhi etym.]. -- 1. round about, on both sides J vi.535 ( = ubhayapassesu C.), 539. -- 2. near, in the presence of Vv 641 (= samīpe VvA 275). Abhitoseti
Abhitoseti
[abhi + toseti] to please thoroughly, to satisfy, gratify Sn 709 ( = atīva toseti Sn A 496). Abhitthaneti
Abhitthaneti
[abhi + thaneti] to roar, to thunder J i.330, 332 = Cp. iii.107. Abhittharati
Abhittharati
[abhi + tarati2, evidently wrong for abhittarati] to make haste Dh 116 ( = turitaturitaŋ sīghasīghaŋ karoti DhA iii.4). Abhitthavati
Abhitthavati
[abhi + thavati] to praise J i.89; iii.531; Dāvs iii.23; DhA i.77; PvA 22; cp. abhitthunati. Abhitthavana
Abhitthavana
(nt.) [fr. prec.] praise Th A 74. Abhitthunati
Abhitthunati
[abhi + thunati; cp. abhitthavati] to praise J i.17 (aor abhitthuniŋsu); cp. thunati 2. -- pp. ˚tthuta DhA i.88. Abhida
Abhida1
(adj.) as attr. of sun & moon at M ii.34, 35 is doubtful in reading & meaning; vv. ll. abhidosa & abhidesa, Neumann trsl. "unbeschränkt". The context seems to require a meaning like "full, powerful" or unbroken, unrestricted (abhijja or abhīta "fearless"?") or does abhida represent Vedic abhidyu heavenly? Abhida
Abhida2
Only in the difficult old verse D ii.107 ( = S v.263 = A iv.312 = Nd 64 = Nett 60 = Divy 203). Aorist 3rd sg. fr. bhindati he broke. Abhidassana
Abhidassana
(nt.) [abhi + dassana] sight, appearance, show J vi.193. Abhideyya
Abhideyya
in sabba˚ at PvA 78 is with v. l. BB to be read sabbapātheyyaŋ. Abhidosa
Abhidosa
(˚ -- ) the evening before, last night; ˚kālakata M i.170 = J i.81; ˚gata gone last night J vi.386 (= hiyyo paṭhama -- yāme C.). -- 65 -- Abhidosika
Abhidosika
belonging to last night (of gruel) Vin iii.15; Miln 291. See ābhi˚. Abhiddavati
Abhiddavati
[abhi + dru, cp. dava2] to rush on, to assail Mhvs 6, 5; Dāvs iii.47. Abhidhamati
Abhidhamati
[abhi + dhamati, cp. Sk. abhi˚ & api -- dhamati] blow on or at A i.257. Abhidhamma
Abhidhamma
[abhi + dhamma] the "special Dhamma," i. e., 1. theory of the doctrine, the doctrine classified, the doctrine pure and simple (without any admixture of literary grace or of personalities, or of anecdotes, or of arguments ad personam), Vin i.64, 68; iv.144; iv.344. Coupled with abhivinaya, D iii.267; M i.272. -- 2. (only in the Chronicles and Commentaries) name of the Third Piṭaka, the third group of the canonical books. Dpvs v.37; PvA 140. See the detailed discussion at DA i.15, 18 sq. [As the word abhidhamma standing alone is not found in Sn or S or A, and only once or twice in the Dialogues, it probably came into use only towards the end of the period in which the 4 great Nikāyas grew up.]

-- kathā discourse on philosophical or psychological matters, M i.214, 218; A iii.106, 392. See dhammakathā. Abhidhammika
Abhidhammika
see ābhidhammika. Abhidhara
Abhidhara
(adj.) [abhi + dhara] firm, bold, in ˚māna firm- minded Dh p. 81 (acc. to Morris J.P.T.S. 1886, 135; not verified). Abhidhāyin
Abhidhāyin
(adj.) [abhi + dhāyin fr. dhā]" putting on", designing, calling, meaning Pgdp 98. Abhidhāreti
Abhidhāreti
[abhi + dhāreti] to hold aloft J i.34 = Bu iv.1. Abhidhāvati
Abhidhāvati
[abhi + dhāvati] to run towards, to rush about, rush on, hasten Vin ii.195; S i.209; J ii.217; iii.83; DhA iv.23. Abhidhāvin
Abhidhāvin
(adj.) fr. abhidhāvati] "pouring in", rushing on, running J vi.559. Abhinata
Abhinata
[pp. of abhi + namati] bent, (strained, fig. bent on pleasure M i.386 (+ apanata); S i.28 (id.; Mrs. Rh. D. "strained forth", cp. Kindred S i.39). See also apanata. Abhinadati
Abhinadati
[abhi + nadati] to resound, to be full of noise J vi.531. Cp. abhinādita. Abhinandati
Abhinandati
[abhi + nandati] to rejoice at, find pleasure in (acc.), approve of, be pleased or delighted with (acc.) D i.46 (bhāsitaŋ), 55 (id.), 158, 223; M i.109, 458; S i.32 (annaŋ), 57, 14, (cakkhuŋ, rūpe etc.); A iv.411; Th 1, 606; Dh 75, 219; Sn 1054, 1057, 1111; Nd2 82; Miln 25; DA i.160; DhA iii.194 (aor. abhinandi, opp. paṭikkosi) VvA 65 (vacanaŋ). -- pp. abhinandita (q. v.). -> Often in combn. with abhivadati (q. v.). Abhinandana
Abhinandana
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. abhinandati, cp. nandanā], pleasure, delight, enjoyment D i.244; M i.498; J iv.397. Abhinandita
Abhinandita
[pp. of abhinandati] only in an˚ not enjoyed, not (being) an object of pleasure S iv.213 = It 38; S v. 319. Abhinandin
Abhinandin
(adj.) [fr. abhinandati, cp. nandin] rejoicing at, finding pleasure in (loc. or -- ˚), enjoying A ii.54 (piyarūpa); esp. freq. in phrase (taṇhā) tatratatrɔâbhinandinī finding its pleasure in this or that [cp. B.Sk. tṛṣṇā tatra -- tatrɔâbhinandinī M Vastu iii.332] Vin i.10; S v.421; Ps ii.147; Nett 72, etc. Abhinamati
Abhinamati
[abhi + namati] to bend. -- pp. abhinata (q.v.). Abhinaya
Abhinaya
[abhi + naya] a dramatic representation VvA 209 (sākhā˚). Abhinava
Abhinava
(adj.) [abhi + nava] quite young, new or fresh Vin iii.337; J ii.143 (devaputta), 435 (so read for accuṇha in expln of paccaggha; v.v. ll. abbhuṇha & abhiṇha); ThA 201 (˚yobbana = abhiyobbana); PvA 40 (˚saṇṭhāna), 87 (= paccaggha) 155. Abhinādita
Abhinādita
[pp. of abhinādeti, Caus. of abhi + nad; see nadati] resounding with ( -- ˚), filled with the noise (or song) of (birds) J vi.530 ( = abhinadanto C.); PvA 157 (= abhiruda). Abhinikūjita
Abhinikūjita
(adj.) [abhi + nikūjita] resounding with, full of the noise of (birds) J v.232 (of the barking of a dog), 304 (of the cuckoo); so read for ˚kuñjita T.). Cp. abhikūjita. Abhinikkhamati
Abhinikkhamati
[abhi + nikkhamati] to go forth from (abl.), go out, issue Dhs A 91; esp. fig. to leave the household life, to retire from the world Sn 64 ( = gehā abhinikkhamitvā kāsāya -- vattho hutvā Sn A 117). Abhinikkhamana
Abhinikkhamana
(nt.) [abhi + nikkhamana] departure, going away, esp. the going out into monastic life, retirement, renunciation. Usually as mahā˚ the great renunciation J i.61; PvA 19. Abhinikkhipati
Abhinikkhipati
[abhi + nikkhipati] to lay down, put down Davs iii.12, 60. Abhiniggaṇhanā
Abhiniggaṇhanā
(f.) [abstr. fr. abhiniggaṇhāti] holding back Vin iii.121 (+ abhinippīḷanā). Abhiniggaṇhāti
Abhiniggaṇhāti
[abhi + niggaṇhāti] to hold back, restrain, prevent, prohibit; always in combn. with abhinippīḷeti M i.120; A v.230. -- Cp. abhiniggaṇhanā. Abhinindriya
Abhinindriya
[vv. ll. at all passages for ahīnindriya] doubtful meaning. The other is expld by Bdhgh at DA i.120 as paripuṇṇ˚; and at 222 as avikal -- indriya not defective, perfect sense -- organ. He must have read ahīn˚. Abhi -- n -- indriya could only be expld as "with supersenseorgans", i. e. with organs of supernormal thought or perception, thus coming near in meaning to *abhiññindriya; We should read ahīn˚ throughout D i.34, 77, 186, 195. ii.13; M ii.18; iii.121; Nd2 under pucchā6 (only ahīn˚). Abhininnāmeti
Abhininnāmeti
[abhi + ninnāmeti cp. BSk. abhinirṇāmayati Lal. V. 439] to bend towards, to turn or direct to D i.76 (cittaŋ ñāṇa -- dassanāya); M i.234; S i.123; iv.178; Pug 60. Abhinipajjati
Abhinipajjati
[abhi + nipajjati] to lie down on Vin iv.273 (+ abhinisīdati); A iv.188 (in = acc. + abhinisīdati); Pug 67 (id.). Abhinipatati
Abhinipatati
[abhi + nipatati] to rush on (to) J ii.8. Abhinipāta
Abhinipāta
( -- matta) destroying, hurting (?) at Vbh 321 is expld. by āpātha -- matta [cp. Divy 125 śastrâbhinipāta splitting open or cutting with a knife]. Abhinipātana
Abhinipātana
(nt.) [fr. abhi -- ni -- pāteti in daṇḍa -- sattha˚ attacking with stick or knife Nd2 5764. Abhinipātin
Abhinipātin
(adj.) [abhi + nipātin] falling on io ( -- ˚) J ii.7. Abhinipuṇa
Abhinipuṇa
(adj.) [abhi + nipuṇa] very thorough, very clever D iii.167. Abhinippajjati
Abhinippajjati
[abhi + nippajjati] to be produced, accrue, get, come (to) M i.86 (bhogā abhinipphajjanti: sic) = Nd2 99 (has n'âbhinippajjanti). -- Cp. abhinipphādeti. Abhinippata
Abhinippata
at J vi.36 is to be read abhinippanna (so v. l. BB.). Abhinippatta
Abhinippatta
at Dhs 1035, 1036 is to be read abhinibbatta. Abhinippanna
Abhinippanna
(& ˚nipphanna) [abhi + nippanna, pp. of ˚nippajjati] produced, effected, accomplished D ii.223 (siloka); J vi.36 (so read for abhinippata); Miln 8 (pph.). -- 66 -- Abhinippīḷanā
Abhinippīḷanā
(f.) [abstr. to abhinippīḷeti, cp. nippīḷana] pressing, squeezing, taking hold of Vin iii.121 (+ abhiniggaṇhanā). Abhinippīḷeti
Abhinippīḷeti
[abhi + nippīḷeti] to squeeze, crush, subdue Vism 399; often in combn. with abhiniggaṇhāti M i. 120; A v.230. Abhinipphatti
Abhinipphatti
(f.) [abhi + nipphatti] production, effecting D ii.283 (v. l. ˚nibbatti). Abhinipphādeti
Abhinipphādeti
[abhi + nipphādeti] to bring into existence, produce, effect, work, perform D i.78 (bhājana -- vikatiŋ); Vin ii.183 (iddhiŋ); S v.156, 255; Miln 39. Abhinibbatta
Abhinibbatta
[abhi + nibbatta, pp. of abhinibbattati] repro- duced, reborn A iv.40, 401; Nd2 256 (nibbatta abhi˚ pātubhūta); Dhs 1035, 1036 (so read for˚ nippatta); VvA 9 (puññɔânubhāva˚ by the power of merit). Abhinibbattati
Abhinibbattati
[abhi + nibbattati] to become, to be repro- duced, to result Pug 51. -- pp. abhinibbatta. -- Cp. B.Sk. wrongly abhinivartate]. Abhinibbatti
Abhinibbatti
(f.) [abhi + nibbatti] becoming, birth, rebirth, D i.229; ii.283 (v. l. for abhinipphatti) S ii.65 (punabbhava˚), 101 (id.); iv.14, 215; A v.121; PvA 35. Abhinibbatteti
Abhinibbatteti
[abhi + nibbatteti, caus. of ˚nibbattati] to produce, cause, cause to become S iii.152; A v.47; Nd2 under jāneti. Abhinibbijjati
Abhinibbijjati
[either Med. fr. nibbindati of vid for *nir- vidyate (see nibbindati B), or secondary formation fr. ger. nibbijja. Reading however not beyond all doubt] to be disgusted with, to avoid, shun, turn away from Sn 281 (T. abhinibbijjayātha, v. l. BB˚ nibbijjiyātha & ˚nibbajjiyātha, SnA expls. by vivajjeyyātha mā bhajeyyātha; v. l. BB. abhinippajjiyā) = A iv.172 (T. abhinibbajjayātha, vv. ll. ˚nibbajjeyyātha & ˚nibbijjayātha); ger. abhinibbijja Th 2, 84. Abhinibbijjhati
Abhinibbijjhati
[abhi + nibbijjhati] to break quite through (of the chick coming through the shell of the egg) Vin iii.3; M i.104 = S iii.153 (read˚ nibbijjheyyun for nibbijjeyyun -- Cp. Buddh. Suttas 233, 234. Abhinibbidā
Abhinibbidā
(f.) [abhi + nibbidā; confused with abhinibb- hidā] disgust with the world, taedium Nett 61 (taken as abhinibbhidā, according to expln. as "padālanā -- paññatti avijj˚aṇḍa -- kosānaŋ"), 98 (so MSS, but C. abhinibbidhā). Abhinibbuta
Abhinibbuta
(adj.) [abhi + nibbuta] perfectly cooled, calmed, serene, esp. in two phrases, viz. diṭṭha dhamm' âbhinibbuta A i.142 = M iii.187; Sn 1087; Nd2 83, and abhinibbutatta of cooled mind Sn 343 (= apariḍayhamāna -- citta SnA 347), 456, 469, 783. Also at Sdhp. 35. Abhinibbhidā
Abhinibbhidā
(f.) [this the better, although not correct spelling; there exists a confusion with abhinibbidā, therefore spelling also abhinibbidhā (Vin iii.4, C. on Nett 98). To abhinibbijjhati, cp. B.Sk. abhinirbheda M Vastu i.272, which is wrongly referred to bhid instead of vyadh.] the successful breaking through (like the chick through the shell of the egg), coming into (proper) life Vin iii.4; M i.104; 357; Nett 98 (C. reading). See also abhinibbidā. Abhinimantanatā
Abhinimantanatā
(f.) [abstr. to abhinimanteti] speaking to, adressing, invitation M i.331. Abhinimanteti
Abhinimanteti
[abhi + nimanteti] to invite to (c. instr.), to offer to D i.61 (āsanena). Abhinimmadana
Abhinimmadana
(nt.) [abhi + nimmadana] crushing, sub- duing, levelling out M iii.132; A iv.189 sq. Abhinimmita
Abhinimmita
[abhi + nimmita, pp. of abhinimmināti] created (by magic) Vv 161 (pañca rathā satā; cp. VvA 79). Abhinimmināti
Abhinimmināti
[abhi + nimmināti, cp. BSk. abhinirmāti Jtm 32; abhinirminoti Divy 251; abhinirmimīte Divy 166] to create (by magic), produce, shape, make S iii.152 (rūpaŋ); A i.279 (oḷārikaŋ attabhāvaŋ); Nd2 under pucchā6 (rūpaŋ manomayaŋ); VvA 16 (mahantaŋ hatthi -- rāja -- vaṇṇaŋ). -- pp. abhinimmita (q. v.). Abhiniropana
Abhiniropana
(nt.) & ā (f.) [fr. abhiniropeti] fixing one's mind upon, application of the mind Ps i.16, 21, 30, 69, 75, 90; Vbh 87; Dhs 7, 21, 298 (cp. Dhs trsl. ii.19). See also abhiropana. Abhiniropeti
Abhiniropeti
[abhi + niropeti] to implant, fix into (one's mind), inculcate Nett 33. Abhinivajjeti
Abhinivajjeti
[abhi + nivajjeti] to avoid, get rid of D iii. 113; M i.119, 364, 402; S v.119, 295, 318; A iii.169 sq.; It 81. Abhinivassati
Abhinivassati
[abhi + ni + vassati fr. vṛṣ] lit. to pour out in abundance, fig. to produce in plenty. Cp i.103 (kalyāṇe good deeds). Abhiniviṭṭha
Abhiniviṭṭha
(adj.) [abhi + niviṭṭha, pp. of abhi -- nivisati] "settled in", attached to, clinging on Nd2 152 (gahita parāmaṭṭha a.); PvA 267 ( = ajjhāsita Pv iv.84). Abhinivisati
Abhinivisati
[abhi + nivisati] to cling to, adhere to, be attached to Nd1 308, 309 (parāmasati +). -- pp. abhiniviṭṭha; cp. also abhinivesa. Abhinivesa
Abhinivesa
[abhi + nivesa, see nivesa2 & cp. nivesana] "settling in", i. e. wishing for, tendency towards ( -- ˚), inclination, adherence; as adj. liking, loving, being given or inclined to D iii.230; M i.136, 251; S ii.17; iii.10, 13, 135, 161, 186 (saŋyojana˚ iv.50; A iii.363 (paṭhavī˚, adj.); Nd2 227 (gāha parāmasa +); Pug 22; Vbh 145; Dhs 381, 1003, 1099; Nett 28; PvA 252 (micchā˚), 267 (taṇhā˚); Sdhp 71. -- Often combd. with adhiṭṭhāna e. g. S ii.17; Nd2 176, and in phrase idaŋ -- saccɔ âbhinivesa adherence to one's dogmas, as one of the 4 Ties: see kāyagantha and cp. Cpd. 171 n. 5. Abhinisīdati
Abhinisīdati
[abhi + nisīdati] to sit down by or on (acc.), always combd. with abhinipajjati Vin iii.29; iv.273; A v.188; Pug 67. Abhinissaṭa
Abhinissaṭa
(pp.) [abhi + nissaṭa] escaped Th 1, 1089. Abhinihata
Abhinihata
(pp.) [abhi + nihata] oppressed. crushed, slain J iv.4. Abhinīta
Abhinīta
(pp.) [pp. of abhi -- neti] led to, brought to, obliged by ( -- ˚) M i.463 = Miln 32 (rājā & cora˚); M i.282; S iii.93; Th 1, 350 = 435 (vātaroga˚ "foredone with cramping pains" Mrs. Rk. D.); Pug 29; Miln 362. Abhinīla
Abhinīla
(adj.) [abhi + nīla] very black, deep black, only with ref. to the eyes, in phrase ˚netta with deep -- black eyes D ii.18; iii.144, 167 sq. [cp. Sp. Av. Ś i.367 & 370 abhinīla -- padma -- netra]; Th 2, 257 (nettā ahesuŋ abbinīla -- m -- āyatā). Abhinīhanati
Abhinīhanati
[abhi + nis + han, cp. Sk. nirhanti] to drive away, put away, destroy, remove, avoid M i.119 (in phrase āṇiŋ a. abhinīharati abhinivajjeti). Abhinīharati
Abhinīharati
[abhi + nīharati] 1. to take out, throw out M i.119 (see abhinīhanati). -- 2. to direct to, to apply to (orig. to isolate? Is reading correct?) in phrase ñāṇadassanāya cittaŋ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti D i.76 ( = tanninnaŋ tappoṇaŋ karoti DA i.220, 224; v. l. abhini˚) Cp. the latter phrase also in BSk. as abhijñâbhinirhāra Av. Ś ii.3 (see ref. & note Index p. 221); and the pp. abhinirhṛta (ṛddhiḥ) in Divy 48, 49 to obtain? Ind.), 264 (take to burial), 542. -- 67 -- Abhinīhāra
Abhinīhāra
[abhi + nīhāra, to abhinīharati; cp. BSk. sarīrɔ âbhinirhāra taking (the body) out to burial, lit. meaning, see note on abhinīharati] being bent on ("downward force" Dhs trsl. 242), i. e. taking oneself out to, way of acting, (proper) behaviour, endeavour, resolve, aspiration S iii.267 sq. (˚kusala); A ii.189; iii.311; iv.34 (˚kusala); J i.14 (Buddhabhāvāya a. resolve to become a Buddha), 15 (Buddhattāya); Ps i.61 sq.; ii.121; Nett 26; Miln 216; DhA i.392; ii.82 (kata˚). Abhipattika
Abhipattika
(adj.) [fr. abhipatti] one who has attained, attaining ( -- ˚), getting possession of S i.200 (devakañña˚). Abhipatthita
Abhipatthita
(pp.) [fr. abhipattheti] hoped, wished, longed for Miln 383; SnA 85. Abhipattheti
Abhipattheti
[abhi + pattheti] to hope for, long for, wish for Kh viii.10; SnA 320; DhA i.30. -- pp. abhipatthita (q. v.). Abhipassati
Abhipassati
[abhi + passati] to have regard for, look for, strive after A i.147 (Nibbānaŋ); iii.75; Sn 896 (khema˚), 1070 (rattamahā˚) Nd1 308; Nd2 428; J vi.370. Abhipāteti
Abhipāteti
[abhi + pāteti] to make fall, to bring to fall, to throw J ii.91 (kaṇḍaŋ). Abhipāruta
Abhipāruta
(adj.) [abhi + pāruta, pp. of abhipārupati] dressed Miln 222. Abhipāleti
Abhipāleti
[abhi + pāleti] to protect Vv 8421, cp. VvA 341. Abhipīḷita
Abhipīḷita
(pp.) [fr. abhipiḷeti] crushed, squeezed Sdhp 278, 279. Abhipīḷeti
Abhipīḷeti
[abhi + pīḷeti] to crush, squeeze Miln 166. - pp. abhipīḷita (q. v.). Abhipucchati
Abhipucchati
[abhi + pucchati] Sk. abhipṛcchati] to ask J iv.18. Abhipūreti
Abhipūreti
[abhi + pūreti] to fill (up) Miln 238; Dāvs iii. 60 (paŋsūhi). Abhippakiṇṇa
Abhippakiṇṇa
[pp. of abhippakirati] completely strewn (with) J i.62. Abhippakirati
Abhippakirati
[abhi + pakirati] to strew over, to cover (completely) D ii.137 (pupphāni Tathāgatassa sarīraŋ okiranti ajjhokiranti a.); VvA 38 (for abbhokirati Vv 59). -> pp. abhippakiṇṇa (q. v.). Abhippamodati
Abhippamodati
[abhi + pamodati] to rejoice (intrs.); to please, satisfy (trs, c. acc.) M i.425; S v.312, 330; A v.112; J iii 530; Ps i.95, 176, 190. Abhippalambati
Abhippalambati
[abhi + palambati] to hang down M iii. 164 (olambati ajjholambati a.). Abhippavassati
Abhippavassati
[abhi + pavassati] to shed rain upon, to pour down; intrs. to rain, to pour, fall. Usually in phrase mahāmegho abhippavassati a great cloud bursts Miln 8, 13, 36, 304; PvA 132 (v. l. ati˚); intrs. Miln 18 (pupphāni ˚iŋsu poured down). -- pp. abhippavuṭṭha. Abhippavuṭṭha
Abhippavuṭṭha
(pp.) [fr. abhippavassati] having rained, poured, fallen; trs. S v.51 (bandhanāni meghena ˚āni) = A v.127; intrs. M ii.117 (mahāmegho ˚o there has been a cloudburst). Abhippasanna
Abhippasanna
(adj.) [pp. of abhippasīdati, cp. BSk. abhi- prasanna] finding one's peace in (c. loc.), trusting in, having faith in, believing in, devoted to (loc.) Vin iii.43; D i.211 (Bhagavati) S i.134; iv.319; v.225, 378; A iii. 237, 270, 326 sq.; Sn p. 104 (brāhmaṇesu); PvA 54 (sāsand), 142 (id.). Cp. vippasanna in same meaning. Abhippasāda
Abhippasāda
[abhi + pasāda, cp. BSk. abhiprasāda Av. Ś 12 (cittasyu˚) & vippasāda] faith, belief, reliance, trust Dhs 12 ("sense of assurance" trsl., + saddhā), 25, 96, 288; PvA 223. Abhippasādeti
Abhippasādeti
[Caus. of abhippasīdati, cp. BSk. abhipra- sādayati Divy 68, 85, pp. abhiprasādita -- manāḥ Jtm 213, 220] to establish one's faith in (loc.), to be reconciled with, to propitiate Th 1, 1173 = Vv 212 (manaŋ arahantamhi = cittaŋ pasādeti VvA 105). Abhippāsāreti
Abhippāsāreti
[abhi + pasāreti, cp. BSk. abhiprasārayati Divy 389] to stretch out Vin i.179 (pāde). Abhippasīdati
Abhippasīdati
[abhi + pasīdati] to have faith in D i.211 (fut. ˚issati). -- pp. abhippasanna; Caus. abhippasādeti. Abhippaharaṇa
Abhippaharaṇa
(nt.) [abhi + paharaṇa] attacking, fighting, as adj. f. ˚aṇī fighting, Ep. of Mārassa senā, the army of M. Sn 439 (kaṇhassa˚ the fighting army of k. = samaṇabrāhmaṇānaŋ nippothanī antarāyakārī SnA 390). Abhibyāpeti
Abhibyāpeti
[abhi + vyāpeti, cp. Sk. vyāpnoti, vi + āp] to pervade Miln 251. Abhibhakkhayati
Abhibhakkhayati
[abhi + bhakkhayati] to eat (of animals) Vin ii.201 (bhinko pankaŋ a.). Abhibhava
Abhibhava
[fr. abhibhavati] defeat, humiliation SnA 436. Abhibhavati
Abhibhavati
[abhi + bhavati] to overcome, master, be lord over, vanquish, conquer S i.18, 32, 121 (maraṇaŋ); iv. 71 (rāgadose), 117 (kodhaŋ), 246, 249 (sāmikaŋ); J i.56, 280; PvA 94 ( = balīyati, vaḍḍhati). -- fut. abhihessati see abhihāreti 4. -- ger. abhibhuyya Vin i.294; Dh 328; It 41 (māraŋ sasenaŋ); Sn 45, 72 (˚cārin), 1097, Nd2 85 (= abhibhavitvā ajjhottharitvā, pariyādiyitvā); and abhibhavitvā PvA 113 (= pasayha), 136. -- grd. abhibhavanīya to be overcome PvA 57. -- Pass. ppr. abhibhūyamāna being overcome (by) PvA 80, 103. -- pp. abhibhūta (q. v.). Abhibhavana
Abhibhavana
(nt.) [fr. abhibhavati] overcoming, vanquishing, mastering S ii.210 (v. l. BB abhipatthana). Abhibhavanīyatā
Abhibhavanīyatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. abhibhavanīya, grd. of abhi- bhavati] as an˚ invincibility PvA 117. Abhibhāyatana
Abhibhāyatana
(nt.) [abhibhū + āyatana] position of a master or lord, station of mastery. The traditional account of these gives 8 stations or stages of mastery over the senses (see Dial. ii.118; Exp. i.252), detailed identically at all the foll. passages, viz. D ii.110; iii.260 (& 287); M ii.13; A i.40; iv.305, 348; v.61. Mentioned only at S iv.77 (6 stations); Ps i.5; Nd2 466 (as an accomplishment of the Bhagavant); Dhs 247. Abhibhāsana
Abhibhāsana
(nt.) [abhi + bhāsana fr. bhās] enlightenment or delight ("light & delight" trsl.) Th 1, 613 ( = tosana C.). Abhibhū
Abhibhū
(n. -- adj.) [Vedic abhibhū, fr. abhi + bhū, cp. abhi- bhavati] overcoming, conquering, vanquishing, having power over, a Lord or Master of ( -- ˚) D iii.29; S ii. 284; Sn 211 (sabba˚), 545 (Māra˚, cp. Mārasena -- pamaddana 561), 642. -- Often in phrase abhibhū anabhibhūta aññadatthudasa vasavattin, i. e. unvanquished Lord of all D i 18; iii.135 = Nd2 276; A ii.24; iv.94; It 122; cp. DA i.111 (= abhibhavitvā ṭhito jeṭṭhakoɔ ham asmīti). Abhibhūta
Abhibhūta
[pp. of abhibhavati] overpowered, overwhelmed, vanquished D i.121; S i.137 (jāti -- jarā˚); ii.228 (lābhasakkāra -- silokena); A i.202 (pāpakehi dhammehi); J i.189; PvA 14, 41 ( = pareta), 60 (= upagata), 68, 77, 80 (= pareta). Often neg. an˚ unconquered, e. g. Sn 934; Nd1 400; & see phrase under abhibhū. Abhimangala
Abhimangala
(adj.) [abhi + mangala] (very) fortunate, lucky, anspicious, in ˚sammatā (of Visākhā) "benedicted", blessed Vin iii.187 = DhA i.409. Opp. avamangala. Abhimaṇḍita
Abhimaṇḍita
(pp. -- ˚) [abhi + maṇḍita] adorned, embel- lished, beautified Miln 361; Sdhp 17. Abhimata
Abhimata
(adj.) [BSk. abhimata, e. g. Jtm 211; pp. of abhimanyate] desired, wished for; agreeable, pleasant C. on Th 1, 91. -- 68 -- Abhimatthati
Abhimatthati
(˚eti) & ˚mantheti [abhi + math or manth, cp. nimmatheti] 1. to cleave, cut; to crush, destroy M i.243 (sikharena muddhānaŋ ˚mantheti); S i.127; Dh 161 (v. l. ˚nth˚); J iv.457 (matthako sikharena ˚matthiyamāno); DhA iii.152 ( = kantati viddhaŋseti). -- 2. to rub, to produce by friction (esp. fire, aggiŋ; cp. Vedic agniŋ nirmanthati) M i.240. Abhimaddati
Abhimaddati
[Sk. abhimardati & ˚mṛdnāti; abhi + mṛd] to crush S i.102; A i.198; Sdhp 288. Abhimana
Abhimana
(adj.) [abhi + mano, BSk. abhimana, e. g. M Vastu iii.259] having one's mind turned on, thinking of or on (c. acc.) Th 1, 1122; J vi.451. Abhimanāpa
Abhimanāpa
(adj.) [abhi + manāpa] very pleasing VvA 53 (where id. p. at PvA 71 has atimanāpa). Abhimantheti
Abhimantheti
see abhimatthati. Abhimāra
Abhimāra
[cp. Sk. abhimara slaughter] a bandit, bravo, robber J ii.199; DA i.152. Abhimukha
Abhimukha
(adj.) [abhi + mukha] facing, turned towards, approaching J ii.3 (˚ā ahesuŋ met each other). Usually -- ˚ turned to, going to, inclined towards D i.50 (purattha˚); J i.203 (devaloka˚), 223 (varaṇa -- rukkha˚); ii.3 (nagara˚), 416 (Jetavana˚); DhA i.170 (tad˚); ii.89 (nagara˚); PvA 3 (kāma˚, opp. vimukha), 74 (uyyāna˚). -- nt. ˚ŋ adv. to, towards J i.263 (matta -- vāraṇe); PvA 4 (āghātana˚, may here be taken as pred. adj.); DhA iii.310 (uttara˚). Abhiyācati
Abhiyācati
[abhi + yācati] to ask, beg, entreat Sn 1101, cp. Nd2 86. Abhiyāti
Abhiyāti
[Vedic abhiyāti in same meaning; abhi _ yā] to go against (in a hostile manner, to attack (c. acc.) S i.216 (aor. abhiyaŋsu, v. l. SS abhijiyiŋsu); DhA iii.310 (aor. abhiyāsi as v. l. for T. reading pāyāsi; the id. p. VvA 68 reads pāyāsi with v. l. upāyāsi). Abhiyujjhati
Abhiyujjhati
[abhi + yujjhati from yudh] to contend, quarrel with J i.342. Abhiyuñjati
Abhiyuñjati
[abhi + yuj] to accuse, charge; intrs. fall to one's share Vin iii.50; iv.304. Abhiyoga
Abhiyoga
[cp. abhiyuñjati] practice, observance Dāvs iv.7. Abhiyogin
Abhiyogin
(adj.) [fr. abhiyoga] applying oneself to, prac- tised, skilled (an augur, sooth sayer) D iii.168. Abhiyobbana
Abhiyobbana
(nt.) [abhi + yobbana] much youthfulness, early or tender youth Th 2, 258 ( = abhinavayobbanakāla ThA 211). Abhirakkhati
Abhirakkhati
[abhi + rakkhati] to guard, protect J vi.589 ( = pāleti C.). Cp. parirakkhati. Abhirakkhā
Abhirakkhā
(f.) [fr. abhirakkhati] protection, guard J i.204 ( = ārakkhā 203). Abhirata
Abhirata
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [pp. of abhiramati] found of, indulging in, finding delight in A iv.224 (nekkhamma˚); v.175 (id.), Sn 86 (nibbāna˚), 275 (vihesa˚), 276 (kalaha˚); J v.382 (dāna˚); PvA 54 (puññakamma˚), 61 (satibhavana˚), 105 (dānâdipuñña˚). Abhiratatta
Abhiratatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. abhirata] the fact of being fond of, delighting in ( -- ˚) J v.254 (kāma˚). Abhirati
Abhirati
(f.) [fr. abhi + ram] delight or pleasure in (loc. or -- ˚) S i.185; iv.260; A v.122; Dh 88. -- an˚ displeasure, discontent, distaste Vin ii.110; D i.17 (+ paritassanā); S i.185; v.132; A iii.259; iv.50; v.72 sq., 122; J iii.395; DA i.111; PvA 187. Abhiratta
Abhiratta
(adj.) [abhi + ratta] very red J v.156; fig. very much excited or affected with ( -- ˚) Sn 891 (sandiṭṭhirāgena a.). Abhiraddha
Abhiraddha
(adj.) [pp. of abhi + rādh] propitiated, satis- fied A iv.185 (+ attamana). Abhiraddhi
Abhiraddhi
(f.) [fr. abhiraddha] only in neg. an˚ displeasure, dislike, discontent A i.79; DA i.52 ( = kopassɔ etaŋ adhivacanaŋ). Abhiramati
Abhiramati
[abhi + ram] to sport, enjoy oneself, find pleasure in or with (c. loc.), to indulge in love Sn 718, 1085; J i.192; iii.189, 393; DhA i.119; PvA 3, 61, 145. -- ppr. act. abhiranto only as nt. ˚ŋ in adv. phrase yathâbhirantaŋ after one's liking, as much as he pleases, after one's heart's content Vin i.34; M i.170; Sn 53. -> ppr. med. abhiramamāna J iii.188, PvA 162. -- pp. abhirata (q. v.). -- 2nd Caus. abhiramāpeti (q. v.). Abhiramana
Abhiramana
(nt.) [fr. abhiramati] sporting, dallying, amusing oneself PvA 16. Abhiramāpana
Abhiramāpana
(nt.) [fr. abhiramāpeti, Caus2 of abhiramati] causing pleasure to (acc.), being a source of pleasure, making happy M iii.132 (gāmante). Abhiramāpeti
Abhiramāpeti
[Caus. II. fr. abhiramati] 1. to induce to sport, to cause one to take pleasure J iii.393. -- 2. to delight, amuse, divert J i.61. -- Cp. abhiramāpana. Abhiravati
Abhiravati
[abhi + ravati] to shout ont Bu ii.90 = J i.18 (v.99) Abhirādhita
Abhirādhita
[pp. of abhirādheti] having succeeded in, fallen to one's share, attained Th 1, 259. Abhirādhin
Abhirādhin
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. abhirādheti] pleasing, giving plea- sure, satisfaction J iv.274 (mitta˚ = ārādhento tosento C.). Abhirādheti
Abhirādheti
[abhi + rādheti] to please, satisfy, make happy J i.421; DA i.52. -- aor. (pret.) abhirādhayi Vv 315 ( = abhirādhesi VvA 130); Vv 6423 (gloss for abhirocayi VvA 282); J i.421; iii.386 (= paritosesi C.). -- pp. abhirādhita. Abhiruci
Abhiruci
(f.) [Sk. abhiruci, fr. abhi + ruc] delight, longing, pleasure, satisfaction PvA 168 ( = ajjhāsaya). Abhirucita
Abhirucita
(adj.) [pp. fr. abhi + ruc] pleasing, agreeable, liked J i.402; DhA i.45. Abhiruda
Abhiruda
(adj. -- ˚) [Sk. abhiruta] resounding with (the cries of animals, esp. the song of birds), full of the sound of (birds) Th 1, 1062 (kuñjara˚), 1113 (mayūra -- koñca˚); J iv.466 (adāsakunta˚); v.304 (mayūra -- koñca˚); vi.172 (id., = upagīta C.), 272 (sakunta˚; = abhigīta C.), 483 (mayūra -- koñca˚), 539; Pv ii.123 (haŋsa -- koñca˚; = abhinādita PvA 157). -- The form abhiruta occurs at Th 1, 49. Abhirūpa
Abhirūpa
(adj.) [abhi + rūpa] of perfect form, (very), handsome, beautiful, lovely Sn 410 ( = dassaniyaɔ angapaccanga SnA 383); J i.207; Pug 52; DA i.281 (= aññehi manussehi adhikarūpa); VvA 53; PvA 61 (= abhikkanta). Occurs in the idiomatic phrase denoting the characteristics of true beauty abhirūpa dassanīya pāsādika (+ paramāya vaṇṇa -- pokkharatāya samannāgata), e. g. Vin i.268; D i.47, 114, 120; S ii.279; A ii.86, 203; Nd2 659; Pug 66; DhA i.281 (compar.); PvA 46. Abhirūḷha
Abhirūḷha
[pp. of abhirūhati] mounted, gone up to, ascended J v.217; DhA i.103. Abhirūhati
Abhirūhati
(abhiruhati) [abhi + ruh] to ascend, mount, climb; to go on or in to (c. acc.) Dh 321; Th 1, 271; J i.259; ii.388; iii.220; iv.138 (navaŋ); vi.272 (peculiar aor. ˚rucchi with ābhi metri causa; = abhirūhi C.); DA i.253. -- ger. abhiruyha J iii.189; PvA 75, 152 (as v. l.; T. has ˚ruyhitva), 271 (nāvaŋ), & abhirūhitvā J i.50 (pabbataŋ) ii.128. Abhirūhana
Abhirūhana
(nt.) [BSk. ˚rūhana, e. g. M Vastu ii.289] climbing, ascending, climb Miln 356. -- 69 -- Abhiroceti
Abhiroceti
[abhi + roceti, Caus. of ruc] 1. to like, to find delight in (acc.), to desire, long for J iii.192; v.222 ( = roceti); Vv 6423 (vataŋ abhirocayi = abhirocesi ruccitvā pūresi ti attho; abhirādhayi ti pi pāṭho; sādhesi nipphādesī ti attho VvA 282). -- 2. to please, satisfy, entertain, gladden Vv 6424 (but VvA 292: abhibhavitvā vijjotati, thus to no. 3). -- 3. v. l. for atiroceti (to surpass in splendour) at Vv 8112, cp. also no. 2. Abhiropana
Abhiropana
(nt.) [fr. abhiropeti] concentration of mind, attention (seems restricted to Ps ii. only) Ps ii.82 (v. l. abhiniropana), 84, 93, 115 (buddhi˚), 142 (˚virāga), 145 (˚vimutti), 216 (˚abhisamaya). See also abhiniropana. Abhiropeti
Abhiropeti
[abhi + ropeti, cp. Sk. adhiropayati, Caus. of ruh] to fix one's mind on, to pay attention, to show reverence, to honour Vv 377 (aor. ˚ropayi = ropesi VvA 169), 3710 (id.; = pūjaŋ kāresi VvA 172), 604 (= pūjesi VvA 253); Dāvs v.19. Abhilakkhita
Abhilakkhita
(adj.) [Sk. abhilakṣita in diff. meaning; pp. of abhi + lakṣ] fixed, designed, inaugurated, marked by auspices J iv.1; DA i.18. Abhilakkhitatta
Abhilakkhitatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. abhilakkhita] having signs or marks, being characterised, characteristics DhsA 62. Abhilanghati
Abhilanghati
[abhi + langhati] to ascend, rise, travel or pass over (of the moon traversing the sky) J iii.364; vi.221. Abhilambati
Abhilambati
[abhi + lambati] to hang down over (c. acc.) M iii.164 = Nett 179 (+ ajjholambati); J v.70 (papātaŋ), 269 (Vetaraṇiŋ). -- pp. abhilambita (q. v.). Abhilambita
Abhilambita
(adj.) [pp. of abhilambati] hanging down J v.407 (nīladuma˚). Abhilāpa
Abhilāpa
[fr. abhi + lap] talk, phrasing, expression Sn 49 (vācâbhilāpa making phrases, talking, idle or objectionable speech = tiracchanakathā Nd2 561); It 89 (? reading abhilāpāyaŋ uncertain, vv. ll. abhipāyaŋ abhipāpāyaŋ, abhisāpāyaŋ, abhisapāyaŋ, atisappāyaŋ. The corresp. passage S iii.93 reads abhisapayaŋ: curse, and C. on It 89 expls. abhilāpo ti akkoso, see Brethren 376 n. 1); Dhs 1306 = Nd2 34 (as exegesis or paraphrase of adhivacana, combd. with vyañjana & trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. as "a distinctive mark of discourse"); DA i.20, 23, 281; DhsA 51. Abhilāsa
Abhilāsa
[Sk. abhilāṣa, abhi + laṣ] desire, wish, longing PvA 154. Abhilekheti
Abhilekheti
[Caus. of abhi + likh] to cause to be inscribed Dāvs v.67 (cāritta -- lekhaŋ ˚lekhayi). Abhilepana
Abhilepana
(nt.) [abhi + lepana] "smearing over", stain, pollution Sn 1032, 1033 = Nett 10, 11 (see Nd2 88 = laggana "sticking to", bandhana, upakkilesa). Abhivagga
Abhivagga
[abhi + vagga] great mass (?), superior force (?), only in phrase ˚ena omaddati to crush with sup. force or overpower M i.87 = Nd2 1996. Abhivañcana
Abhivañcana
(nt.) [abhi + vañc] deceit, fraud Dāvs iii.64. Abhivaṭṭa
Abhivaṭṭa
[pp. of abhivassati, see also abhivuṭṭha] rained upon Dh 335 (gloss ˚vuṭṭha; cp. DhA iv.45); Miln 176, 197, 286. -- Note. Andersen P. R. prefers reading abhivaḍḍha at Dh 335 "the abounding Bīraṇa grass"). Abhivaḍḍhati
Abhivaḍḍhati
[Vedic abhivardhati, abhi + vṛdh] 1. to increase (intrs.) D i.113, 195 (opp. hāyati); M ii.225; A iii.46 (bhogā a.); Dh 24; Miln 374; PvA 8, 133; Sdhp 288, 523. -- 2. to grow over or beyond, to outg ow J iii.399 (vanaspatiŋ). -- pp. abhivuḍḍha & ˚vuddha (q.v.). Abhivaḍḍhana
Abhivaḍḍhana
(adj. -- nt.) [fr. abhivaḍḍhati] increasing (trs.), augmenting; f. ˚ī Sdhp 68. Abhivaḍḍhi
Abhivaḍḍhi
(f.) [cp. Sk. abhivṛddhi, fr. abhi + vṛdh] in- crease, growth Miln 94. -- See also abhivuddhi. Abhivaṇṇita
Abhivaṇṇita
[pp. of abhivanneti] praised Dpvs i.4. Abhivaṇṇeti
Abhivaṇṇeti
[abhi + vanneti] to praise Sdhp 588 (˚ayi). - pp. abhivaṇṇita. Abhivadati
Abhivadati
[abhi + vadati] 1. to speak out, declare, pro- mise J i.83 = Vin i.36; J vi.220. -- 2. to speak (kindly) to, to welcome, salute, greet. In this sense always combd. with abhinandati, e. g. at M i.109, 266, 458; S iii.14; iv.36 sq.; Miln 69. -- Caus. abhivādeti. Abhivandati
Abhivandati
[abhi + vandati] to salute respectfully, to honour, greet; grd. ˚vandanīya Miln 227. Abhivassaka
Abhivassaka
(adj.) [fr. abhivassati] raining, fig. shedding, pouring ont, yielding VvA 38 (puppha˚). Abhivassati
Abhivassati
[abhi + vassati from vṛṣ] to rain, shed rain, pour; fig. rain down, pour out, shed D iii.160 (ābhivassaŋ metri causa); A iii.34; Th 1, 985; J i.18 (v.100; pupphā a. stream down); cp. iii.106; Miln 132, 411. -> pp. abhivaṭṭa & abhivuṭṭha (q. v.). -- Caus. II. abhivassāpeti to cause (the sky to) rain Miln 132. Abhivassin
Abhivassin
(adj.) = abhivassaka It 64, 65 (sabbattha˚). Abhivādana
Abhivādana
(nt.) [fr. abhivādeti] respectful greeting, salu- tation, giving welcome, showing respect or devotion A ii.180; iv.130, 276; J i.81, 82, 218; Dh 109 (˚sīlin of devout character, cp. DhA ii.239); VvA 24; Sdhp 549 (˚sīla). Abhivādeti
Abhivādeti
[Caus. of abhivadati] to salute, greet, welcome, honour Vin ii.208 sq.; D i.61; A iii.223; iv.173; Vv 15 (abhivādayiŋ aor. = abhivādanaŋ kāresiŋ vandiŋ VvA 24); Miln 162. Often in combn with padakkhiṇaŋ karoti in sense of to bid goodbye, to say adieu, farewell, e. g. D i.89, 125, 225; Sn 1010. -- Caus. II. abhivādāpeti to cause some one to salute, to make welcome Vin ii.208 (˚etabba). Abhivāyati
Abhivāyati
[abhi + vāyati; cp. Sk. abhivāti] to blow through, to pervade Miln 385. Abhivāreti
Abhivāreti
[abhi + vāreti, Caus. of vṛ] to hold back, refuse, deny J v.325 ( = nivāreti C.). Abhivāheti
Abhivāheti
[abhi + vāheti, Caus. of vah] to remove, to put away Bu x.5. Abhivijayati
Abhivijayati
(& vijināti) [abhi + vijayati] to overpower, to conquer. Of ˚jayati the ger. ˚jiya at D i.89, 134; ii.16. Of ˚jināti the pres. 3rd pl. ˚jinanti at Miln 39; the ger. ˚jinitvā at M i.253; Pug 66. Abhiviññāpeti
Abhiviññāpeti
[abhi + viññāpeti] to turn somebody's mind on (c. acc.), to induce somebody (dat.) to (acc.) Vin iii.18 (purāṇadutiyikāya methunaŋ dhammaŋ abhiviññāpesi). Abhivitarati
Abhivitarati
[abhi + vitarati] "to go down to", i. e. give in, to pay heed, observe Vin i.134 and in ster. expln. of sañcicca at Vin ii.91; iii.73, 112; iv.290. Abhivinaya
Abhivinaya
[abhi + vinaya] higher discipline, the refinements of discipline or Vinaya; combd. with abhidhamma, e. g. D iii.267; M i.472; also with vinaya Vin v.1 sg. Abhivindati
Abhivindati
[abhi + vindati] to find, get, obtain Sn 460 ( = labhati adhigacchati SnA 405). Abhivisiṭṭha
Abhivisiṭṭha
(adj.) [abhi + visiṭṭha] most excellent, very distinguished DA i.99, 313. Abhivissajjati
Abhivissajjati
[abhi + vissajjati] to send out, send forth, deal out, give D iii.160. Abhivissattha
Abhivissattha
[abhi + vissattha, pp. of abhivissasati, Sk. abhiviśvasta] confided in, taken into confidence M ii.52 (v. l. ˚visaṭṭha). -- 70 -- Abhivuṭṭha
Abhivuṭṭha
[pp. of abhivassati, see also abhivaṭṭa] poured out or over, shed out (of water or rain) Th 1, 1065; Dh 335 (gloss); PvA 29. Abhivuḍḍha
Abhivuḍḍha
[pp. of abhivaḍḍhati, see also ˚vuddha] in- creased, enriched PvA 150. Abhivuddha
Abhivuddha
[pp. of abhivaḍḍhati, see also ˚vuḍḍha] grown up Miln 361. Abhivuddhi
Abhivuddhi
(f.) [Sk. abhivṛddhi, see also abhivaḍḍhi] in- crease, growth, prosperity Miln 34. Abhiveṭheti
Abhiveṭheti:
Kern's (Toev. s. v.) proposed reading at J v.452 for ati˚, which however does not agree with C. expln. on p. 454. Abhivedeti
Abhivedeti
[abhi + Caus. of vid] 1. to make known, to communicate Dāvs v.2, 11. -- 2. to know J vi.175 ( = jānāti C.). Abhivihacca
Abhivihacca
[ger. of abhi + vihanati] having destroyed, removed or expelled; only in one simile of the sun driving darkness away at M i.317 = S iii.156; v.44 = It 20. Abhivyāpeti
Abhivyāpeti
see abhibyāpeti. Abhisaŋvisati
Abhisaŋvisati
[abhi + saŋvisati]. Only in abhisaŋvisseyya- gattaŋ (or -- bhastaŋ or -- santuŋ) Th 2, 466 a compound of doubtful derivation and meaning. Mrs. Rh. D., following Dhammapāla (p. 283) ʻ a bag of skin with carrion filled ʼ. Abhisaŋsati
Abhisaŋsati
[Vedic abhiśaŋsati, abhi + śaŋs] to execrate, revile, lay a curse on J v.174 (˚saŋsittha 3rd sg. pret. med. = paribhāsi C.) -- aor. abhisasi J vi.187, 505, 522 (= akkosi C.), 563 (id.). -- pp. abhisattha. Cp. also abhisiŋsati. Abhisaŋsanā
Abhisaŋsanā
(f.) [? abhisaŋsati] is doubtful reading at Vv 6410; meaning "neighing" (of horses) VvA 272, 279. Abhisankhata
Abhisankhata
(adj.) [abhi + sankhata, pp. of abhisan- kharoti] prepared, fixed, made up, arranged, done M i.350; A ii.43; v.343; J i.50; Nd1 186 (kappita +); PvA 7, 8. Abhisankharoti
Abhisankharoti
(& ˚khāreti in Pot.) [abhi + sankharoti] to prepare, do, perform, work, get up Vin i.16 (iddhɔ âbhisankhāraŋ ˚khāreyya); D i.184 (id.); S ii.40; iii.87, 92; iv.132, 290; v.449; A i.201; Sn 984 (ger. ˚itvā: having got up this curse, cp. SnA 582); PvA 56 (iddhɔ âbhisaŋkhāraŋ), 172 (id.), 212 (id.). -- pp. abhisankhata (q. v.). Abhisankhāra
Abhisankhāra
[abhi + sankhāra] 1. putting forth, perform- ance, doing, working, practice: only in two combns., viz. (a) gamiya˚ (or gamika˚) a heathenish practice Vin i.233; A iv.180, & (b) iddha˚ ( = iddḥi˚) working of supernormal powers Vin i.16; D i.106; S iii.92; iv.289; v.270; Sn p. 107; PvA 56, 172, 212. -- 2. preparation, store, accumulation (of kamma, merit or demerit), substratum, state (see for detail sankhāra) S iii.58 (an˚); Nd1 334, 442; Nd2 s. v.; Vbh 135 (puñña˚ etc.), 340; DhsA 357 (˚viññāna "storing intellect" Dhs trsl. 262). Abhisankhārika
Abhisankhārika
(adj.) [fr. abhisankhāra] what belongs to or is done by the sankhāras; accumulated by or accumulating merit, having special (meritorious) effect (or specially prepared?) Vin ii.77 = iii.160; Sdhp 309 (sa ˚paccaya). Abhisankhipati
Abhisankhipati
[abhi + sankhipati] to throw together, heap together, concentrate Vbh 1 sq., 82 sq., 216 sq., 400; Miln 46. Abhisanga
Abhisanga
[fr. abhi + sañj, cp. abhisajjati & Sk. abhisanga] I. sticking to, cleaving to, adherence to J v.6; Nett 110, 112; DhsA 129 (˚hetukaŋ dukkhaŋ) 249 (˚rasa). Abhisangin
Abhisangin
(adj.) [fr. abhisanga] cleaving to ( -- ˚) Sdhp 566. Abhisajjati
Abhisajjati
[abhi + sañj; cp. abhisanga] to be in ill temper, to be angry, to curse, imprecate (in meaning of abhisanga 2) D i.91 ( = kodha -- vasena laggati DA i.257); iii.159; J iii.120 (+ kuppati); iv.22 (abhisajji kuppi vyāpajji, cp. BSk. abhiṣajyate kupyati vyāpadyate. Av. Ś i.286); v.175 (= kopeti C.); Dh 408 (abhisaje Pot. = kujjhāpana -- vasena laggapeyya DhA iv.182); Pug 30, 36. -> See also abhisajjana & abhisajjanā. Abhisajjana
Abhisajjana
(nt. -- adj.) [abstr. fr. abhisajjati in meaning of abhisanga 2] only as adv. f. ˚nī Ep. of vācā scolding, abusing, cursing A v.265 (para˚). Cp. next. Abhisajjanā
Abhisajjanā
(f.) [abstr. fr. abhisajjati, cp. abhisajjana] at Sn 49 evidently means "scolding, cursing, being in bad temper" (cp. abhisajjati), as its combn. with vācɔ âbhilāpa indicates, but is expld. both by Nd2 & Bdhgh. as "sticking to, cleaving, craving, desire" ( = taṇhā), after the meaning of abhisanga. See Nd2 89 & 107; SnA 98 (sineha -- vasena), cp. also the compromise -- expln by Bdhgh. of abhisajjati as kodha -- vasena laggati (DA i.257). Abhisañcināti
Abhisañcināti
(& ˚cayati) [abhi + sañcināti] to accumulate, collect (merit) Vv 476 (Pot. ˚sañceyyaŋ = ˚sañcineyyaŋ VvA 202). Abhisañcetayita
Abhisañcetayita
[pp. of abhisañceteti] raised into consci- ousness, thought out, intended, planned M i.350; S ii. 65; iv.132; A v.343. Abhisañceteti
Abhisañceteti
[abhi + sañceteti or ˚cinteti] to bring to consciousness, think out, devise, plan S ii.82. -- pp. abhisañcetayita (q. v.). Abhisaññā
Abhisaññā
(f.). Only in the compound abhi -- saññā -- nirodha D i.179, 184. The prefix abhi qualifies, not saññā, but the whole compound, which means ʻ trance ʼ. It is an expression used, not by Buddhists, but by certain wanderers. See saññā -- vedayita -- nirodha. Abhisaññūhati
Abhisaññūhati
[abhi + saññūhati, i. e. saŋ -- ni -- ūhati] to heap up, concentrate Vbh 1, 2, 82 sq.; 216 sq., 400; Miln 46. Cp. abhisankhipati. Abhisaṭa
Abhisaṭa
[pp. of abhisarati, abhi + sṛ to flow] 1. (med.) streamed forth, come together J vi.56 ( = sannipatita C.). -> 2. (pass.) approached, visited Vin i.268. Abhisatta
Abhisatta
[pp. of abhisapati, cp. Sk. abhiśapta, fr. abhi + śap] cursed, accursed, railed at, reviled J iii.460; v.71; SnA 364 ( = akkuṭṭha); VvA 335. Abhisattha
Abhisattha
[pp. of abhisaŋsati] cursed, accursed Th 1, 118 "old age falls on her as if it had been cursed upon her" (that is, laid upon her by a curse). Morris J P T S. 1886, 145 gives the commentator's equivalents, "commanded, worked by a charm". This is a curious idiom. Any European would say that the woman herself, not the old age, was accursed. But the whole verse is a riddle and Kern's translation (Toev. s. v.) ʻ hurried up ʼ seems to us impossible. Abhisaddahati
Abhisaddahati
[abhi + saddahati, cp. Sk. abhiśraddadhāti, e. g. Divy 17, 337] to have faith in, believe in (c. acc.), believe S v.226; Th 1, 785; Pv iv.113, 125 (˚saddaheyya = paṭiñeyya PvA 226); Nett 11; Miln 258; PvA 26; Dāvs iii.58. Abhisantāpeti
Abhisantāpeti
[ahhi + santāpeti, Caus. of santapati] to burn out, scorch, destroy M i.121. Abhisanda
Abhisanda
[abhi + sanda of syad, cp. BSk. abhisyanda, e. g. M Vastu ii.276] outflow, overflow, yield, issue, result; only in foll. phrases: cattāro puññɔ âbhisandā kusalɔ âbhisandā (yields in merit) S v.391 sq.; A ii.54 sq.; iii.51, 337; vi.245, & kammɔ âbhisanda result of kamma Miln 276. -- Cp. abhisandana. Abhisandana
Abhisandana
(nt.) [ = abhisanda] result, outcome, con- sequence Ps i.17 (sukhassa). -- 71 -- Abhisandahati
Abhisandahati
[abhi + sandahati of saŋ + dhā] to put together, to make ready Th 1, 151; ger. abhisandhāya in sense of a prep. = on account of, because of J ii.386 (= paṭicca C.). Abhisandeti
Abhisandeti
[abhi + sandeti, Caus. of syad] to make over- flow, to make full, fill, pervade D i.73, 74. Abhisanna
Abhisanna
(adj.) [pp. of abhisandati = abhi + syand, cp. Sk. abhisanna] overflowing, filled with ( -- ˚), full Vin i. 279 (˚kāya a body full of humours, cp. ii.119 & Miln 134); J i.17 (v.88; pītiyā); Miln 112 (duggandha˚). Abhisapati
Abhisapati
[abhi + sapati, of śap] to execrate, curse, ac- curse Vin iv.276; J iv.389; v.87; DhA i.42. -- pp. abhisatta. Abhisapana
Abhisapana
(nt.) [fr. abhisapati] cursing, curse PvA 144 (so read for abhisampanna). Abhisamaya
Abhisamaya
[abhi + samaya, from sam + i, cp. abhisameti & sameti; BSk. abhisamaya, e. g. Divy 200, 654] "coming by completely", insight into, comprehension, realization, clear understanding, grasp, penetration. See on term Kvu trsl. 381 sq. -- Esp. in full phrases: attha˚ grasp of what is proficient S i.87 = A iii.49 = It 17, cp. A ii.46; ariyasaccānaŋ a. full understanding of the 4 noble truths S v.415, 440, 441 [cp. Divy 654: anabhisamitānāŋ caturnāŋ āryasatyānāŋ a.]; Sn 758 (sacca˚ = saccɔ âvabodha SnA 509); Miln 214 (catusacc˚); Sdhp 467 (catusacc˚), 525 (saccānaŋ); dhammɔ âbhisamaya full grasp of the Dhamma, quasi conversion [cp. dharmɔ âbhisamaya Divy 200] S ii.134; Miln 20, 350; VvA 219; PvA 9 etc. frequent; sammā -- mānɔ âbhisamaya full understanding of false pride in ster. phrase" acchecchi (for acchejji) taṇhaŋ, vivattayi saññojanaŋ sammāmānâbhisamayā antam akāsi dukkhassa" at S iv.205, 207, 399; A iii.246, 444; It 47; cp. māna˚ S i.188 = Th 2, 20 (tato mānâbhisamayā upasanto carissasi, trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. in K. S. 239 "hath the mind mastered vain imaginings, then mayst thou go thy ways calm and serene"); Sn 342 (expld. by mānassa abhisamayo khayo vayo pahānaŋ SnA 344). Also in foll. passages: S ii.5 (paññāya), 104 (id.), 133 sq. (Abhisamaya Saŋyutta); Sn 737 (phassa˚, expld. ad sensum but not at verbum by phassa -- nirodha SnA 509); Ps ii.215; Pug 41; Vv 1610 (= saccapaṭivedha VvA 85); DA i.32; DhA i.109; VvA 73 (bhāvana˚), 84 (sacchikiriya˚); Dpvs i.31. -- anabhisamaya not grasping correctly, insufficient understanding, taken up wrongly S iii.260; Pug 21; Dhs 390, 1061, 1162 (Mrs. Rh. D. trsls. "lack of coordination"). Abhisamāgacchati
Abhisamāgacchati
[abhi + sam + āgacchati, cp. in meaning adhigacchati] to come to (understand) completely, to grasp fully, to master KhA 236 (for abhisamecca Sn 143). Abhisamācārika
Abhisamācārika
(adj.) [abhi + samācārika, to samācāra] belonging to the practice of the lesser ethics; to be practiced; belonging to or what is the least to be expected of good conduct, proper. Of sikkhā Vin v.181; A ii.243 sq.; of dhamma M i.469; A iii.14 sq.; 422. Abhisamikkhati
Abhisamikkhati
(& ˚ekkhati), [abhi + sam + īks, cp. sa- mikkhati] to behold, see, regard, notice J. iv.19 (2nd sg. med. ˚samekkhase = olokesi C.). -- ger. ˚samikkha & ˚samekkha [B.Sk. ˚samīkṣya, e.g. Jtm. p. 28, 30 etc.] J v.340 (˚samikkha, v. l. sañcikkha = passitvā C.); 393, 394 (= disvā C.). Abhisameta
Abhisameta
[pp. of abhisameti, fr. abhi + sam + i, taken as caus. formation, against the regular form Sk.P. samita & B.Sk. abhisamita] completely grasped or realised, understood, mastered S v.128 (dhamma a.), 440 (anabhisametāni cattāri ariyasaccāni, cp. Divy 654 anabhisamitāni c.a.); A iv.384 (appattaŋ asacchikataŋ +). Abhisametāvin
Abhisametāvin
(adj.) [possess. adj. -- formation, equalling a n. ag. form., pp. abhisameta] commanding full understanding or penetration, possessing complete insight (of the truth) Vin iii.189; S ii.133; v.458 sq. Abhisameti
Abhisameti
[abhi + sameti, sam + i; in inflexion base is taken partly as ordinary & partly as causative, e. g. aor. ˚samiŋsu & ˚samesuŋ, pp. sameta: Sk. samita. Cp. B.Sk. abhisamayati, either caus. or denom. formation, Divy 617: caturāryasatyāni a.] to come by, to attain, to realise, grasp, understand (cp. adhigacchati) Miln 214 (catusaccâbhisamayaŋ abhisameti). Freg. in combn. abhisambujjhati, abhisameti; abhisambujjhitvā abhisametvā, e. g. S ii.25; iii.139; Kvu 321. -- fut. ˚samessati S v.441. -- aor. ˚samiŋsu Miln 350; ˚samesuŋ S v.415. -- ger. ˚samecca (for ˚icca under influence of ˚sametvā as caus. form.; Trenckner's expln. Notes 564 is unnecessary & hardly justifiable) S v.438 (an˚ by not thoroughly understanding); A v.50 (sammɔattha˚ through complete realisation of what is proficient); Sn 143 ( = abhisamāgantvā KhA 236); and ˚sametvā S ii.25; iii.139. -- pp. abhisameta (q.v.). Abhisampanna
Abhisampanna
at PvA 144 is wrong reading for v. l. abhisapana (curse). Abhisamparāya
Abhisamparāya
[abhi + samparāya] future lot, fate, state after death, future condition of rebirth; usually in foll. phrases: kā gati ko abhisamparāyo (as hendiadys) ʻ what fate in the world -- to -- come ʼ, D ii.91; Vin i.293; S iv.59, 63; v.346, 356, 369; DhA i.221. -- evaŋ -- gatika evanabhisamparāya (adj.) "leading to such & such a revirn, such & such a future state" D i.16, 24, 32, 33 etc. ( = evaŋ -- vidhā paralokā ti DA i.108). -- abhisamparāyaŋ (acc. as adv.) in future, after death A i.48; ii.197; iii.347; iv.104; Pv iii.510 (= punabbhave PvA 200). -- diṭṭhe cɔeva dhamme abhisamparāyañ ca "in this world and in the world to come" A ii.61; Pug 38; Miln 162; PvA 195 etc. (see also diṭṭha). -- Used absolutely at PvA 122 (= fate). Abhisambujjhati
Abhisambujjhati
[abhi + sambujjhati] to become wide- awake, to awake to the highest knowledge, to gain the highest wisdom (sammāsambodhiŋ) D iii.135; It 121. aor. ˚sambujjhi S v.433; PvA 19. In combn. abhisambujjhati abhisameti, e. g. S. ii.25; iii.139. -- ppr. med. ˚sambudhāna; pp. ˚sambuddha -- Caus. ˚sambodheti to make awake, to awaken, to enlighten; pp. ˚bodhita. Abhisambujjhana
Abhisambujjhana
(nt.) = abhisambodhi J i.59. Abhisambuddha
Abhisambuddha
[pp. of abhisambujjhati] (a) (pass.) rea- lised, perfectly understood D iii.273; S iv.331; It 121. an˚ not understood M i.71, 92, 114, 163, 240. -- (b) (med.) one who has come to the realisation of the highest wisdom, fully -- awakened, attained Buddhahood, realising, enlightened (in or as to = acc.) Vin i.1; D ii.4; M i.6 (sammāsambodhiŋ); S i.68, 138, 139 & passim PvA 94, 99. Abhisambuddhatta
Abhisambuddhatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. abhisambuddha] thorough realisation, perfect understanding S v.433. Abhisambudhāna
Abhisambudhāna
(adj.) [formation of a ppr. med. fr. pp. abhsam + budh instead of abhisam + bujjh˚] awaking, realising, knowing, understanding Dh 46 ( = bujjhanto jānanto ti attho DhA i.337). Abhisambodhi
Abhisambodhi
(f.) [abhi + sambodhi] the highest enlight- enment J i.14 (parama˚). Cp. abhisambujjhana and (sammā -- ) sambodhi. Abhisambodhita
Abhisambodhita
(adj.) [pp. of abhisambodheti, Caus. of abhi + sambujjhati] awakened to the highest wisdom PvA 137 (Bhagavā). Abhisambhava
Abhisambhava
[fr. abhisambhavati] only in dur˚ hard to overcome or get over, hard to obtain or reach, troublesome S v.454; A v.202; Sn 429, 701; J v.269, vi.139, 439. Abhisambhavati (˚bhoti)
Abhisambhavati
(˚bhoti) [abhi + sambhavati] "to come up to", i. e. to be able to (get or stand or overcome); to attain, reach, to bear A iv.241; Th 1, 436; Nd1 471, 485; J iii.140; v.150, 417; vi.292, 293, 507 (fut. med. ˚sambhossaŋ = sahissāmi adhivāsessāmi C.); Ps ii.193. -> ger. ˚bhutvā Th 1, 1057 & ˚bhavitvā Sn 52 (cp. Nd2 85). -- aor. ˚bhosi D ii.232. -- grd. ˚bhavanīya D ii.210; Ps ii.193. -- See also abhisambhuṇāti. -- 72 -- Abhisambhuṇāti
Abhisambhuṇāti
[considered to be a bastard form of abhi- sambhavati, but probably of diff. origin & etym.; also in Bh. Sk. freq.] to be able (to get or reach); only in neg. ppr. anabhisambhuṇanto unable D i.101 ( = asampāpuṇanto avisahamāno vā DA i.268); Nd1 77, 312. Abhisambhū
Abhisambhū
(adj.) [fr. abhi + sam + bhū] getting, attaining (?) D ii.255 (lomahaŋsa˚). Abhisambhūta
Abhisambhūta
[pp. of abhisambhavati] attained, got Sdhp 556. Abhisammati
Abhisammati
[abhi + śam, Sk. abhiśamyati] to cease, stop; trs. (Caus.) to allay, pacify, still J vi.420 (pp. abhisammanto for ˚śammento? Reading uncertain). Abhisara
Abhisara
[fr. abhi + sarati, of sṛ to go] retinue J v.373. Abhisallekhika
Abhisallekhika
(adj) [abhi + sallekha + ika] austere, stern, only in f. ˚ā (scil. kathā) A iii.117 sq.; iv.352, 357; v.67. Abhisavati
Abhisavati
(better ˚ssavati?) [abhi + savati, of sru] to flow towards or into J vi.359 (najjo Gangaŋ a.). Abhisasi
Abhisasi
aor. of abhisaŋsati (q. v.). Abhisādheti
Abhisādheti
[abhi + sādheti] to carry out, arrange; to get; procure, attain J vi.180; Miln 264. Abhisāpa
Abhisāpa
[abhisapati] a curse, anathema S iii.93 = It 89 (which latter reads abhilāpa and It A expls. by akkosa: see vv. ll. under abhilāpa & cp. Brethren 376 n. 1.); Th 1,1118. Abhisāriyā
Abhisāriyā
(f.) [Sk. abhisārikā, fr. abhi + sṛ] a woman who goes to meet her lover J iii.139. Abhisāreti
Abhisāreti
[abhi + sāreti, Caus. of abhisarati] to approach, to persecute J vi.377. Abhisiŋsati
Abhisiŋsati
[ = abhisaŋsati, abhi + śaŋs. As to Sk. śaŋs > P. siŋs cp. āsiŋsati, as to meaning cp. nature of prayer as a solemn rite to the "infernals", cp. im -- precare], to utter a solemn wish, Vv 8118 (aor. ˚sīsi. v. l. ˚sisi. VvA 316 expls. by icchi sampaṭicchi). Abhisiñcati
Abhisiñcati
[abhi + siñncati fr. sic to sprinkle; see also āsiñcati & ava˚, Vedic only ā˚] to sprinkle over, fig. to anoint (King), to consecrate A i.107 (Khattiyɔ âbhisekena) J i.399 (fig. ˚itvā ger. ii.409 (id.); vi.161 (id.); Nd1 298; Miln 336 (amatena lokaŋ abhisiñci Bhagavā); PvA 144 (read abhisiñci cimillikañ ca . . .) -- Pass. abhisiñcati Miln 359. -- pp. abhisitta. -- Caus. abhiseceti. Abhisitta
Abhisitta
[pp. of abhisiñcati, Sk. ˚sikta] 1. sprinkled over, anointed Sn 889 (manasā, cp. N1 298); Miln 336 (amatena loka a.). -- 2. consecrated (King), inaugurated (more freq. in this conn. is avasitta), Vin iii.44; A i.107 (Khattiyo Khattiyehi Khattiyɔ âbhisekena a.); ii.87 (v.l. for avasitta, also an˚). Abhiseka
Abhiseka
[fr. abhi + sic, cp. Sk. abhiṣeka] anointing, consecration, inauguration (as king) A i.107 (cp. abhisitta); ii.87 read abhisekɔ -- anabhisitto; J ii.104, 352; DhA i.350; PvA 74. Cp. ābhisekika. Abhisecana
Abhisecana
(nt.) = abhiseka, viz. (a) ablution, washing off Th 2, 239 & 245 (udaka˚). -- (b) consecration J ii.353. Abhiseceti
Abhiseceti
[caus. of abhisiñcati] to cause to be sprinkled or inaugurated J v.26. (imper. abhisecayassu). Abhisevanā
Abhisevanā
(f.) [abhi + sevana fr. sev] pursuit, indulgence in ( -- ˚) Sdhp 210 (pāpakamma˚). Abhissara
Abhissara
(adj.) [abhi + issara] only neg. an˚ in formula atāṇo loko anabhissaro "without a Lord or protector" M ii.68 (v.l. ˚abhisaro); Ps i.126 (v.l. id.). Abhihaŋsati
Abhihaŋsati
[abhi + haŋsati fr. hṛṣ] 1. (trs.) to gladden, please, satisfy S iv.190 (abhihaṭṭhuŋ); A v.350 (id.). -> 2. (intr.) to find delight in (c. acc.), to enjoy S v.74 (rūpaŋ manāpaŋ); A iv.419 sq. (T. reads ˚hiŋsamāna jhānaŋ v.l. ˚hisamāna). Abhihaṭa
Abhihaṭa
[pp. of abhiharati] brought, offered, presented, fetched D i.166 = Pug 55 (= puretaraŋ gahetvā āhaṭaŋ bhikkhaŋ Pug A 231); DhA ii.79. Abhihaṭṭhuŋ
Abhihaṭṭhuŋ
[ger. of abhiharati]. Only in praise abhihaṭṭhuŋ pavāreti, to offer having fetched up. M. i.224; A v.350, 352; S iv.190, v.53, 300. See note in Vinaya Texts ii.440. Abhihata
Abhihata
[pp. of abhihanati] hit, struck PvA 55. Abhihanati
Abhihanati
(& ˚hanti) [abhi + han] 1. to strike, hit PvA 258. -- 2. to overpower, kill, destroy J v.174 (inf. ˚hantu for T. hantuŋ). -- pp. abhihata (q. v.). Abhiharati
Abhiharati
[abhi + harati, cp. Sk. abhyāharati & Vedic āharati & ābharati] -- 1. to bring (to), to offer, fetch D iii.170; J i.54, 157; iii.537; iv.421; DA i.272. -- 2. to curse, revile, abuse [cp. Sk. anuvyāharati & abhivyā˚] A i.198. -- Pass. abhihariyati VvA 172 (for abhiharati of Vv 3710; corresp. with ābhata VvA 172). -- pp. abhihaṭa (q.v.). -- Caus. abhihāreti 1. to cause to be brought, to gain, to acquire D ii.188 = 192 = 195 Th 1, 637; J iv.421 (abhihārayaŋ with gloss abhibhārayiŋ). -- 2. to betake oneself to, to visit, take to, go to Sn 414 (Paṇḍavaŋ ˚hāresi = āruhi Sn A 383), 708 (vanantaŋ abhihāraye = vanaŋ gaccheyya SnA 495); Th 2, 146 (aor. ˚hārayiŋ; uyyānaŋ = upanesi ThA 138). -- 3. to put on (mail), only in fut. abhihessati J iv.92 (kavacaŋ; C. expls. wrongly by ˚hanissati bhindissati so evidently taking it as abhibhavissati). -- 4. At J vi.27 kiŋ yobbanena ciṇṇena yaŋ jarā abhihessati the latter is fut. of abhibhavati (for ˚bhavissati) as indicated by gloss abhibhuyyati. Abhihāra
Abhihāra
[fr. abhiharati] bringing, offering, gift S i.82; Sn 710; J i.81 (āsanâ). Abhihiŋsati
Abhihiŋsati
spurious reading at A iv.419 for ˚haŋsati (q.v.). Abhihiŋsanā
Abhihiŋsanā
(& ˚ŋ) [for abhihesanā cp. P. hesā = Sk. hreṣā, & hesitaŋ] neighing Vv 6410 = VvA 279 (gloss abhihesana). See in detail under abhisaŋsanā. Abhihīta
Abhihīta
S i.50. Read abhigīta with SS. So also for abhihita on p. 51. ʻ So enchanted was I by the Buddha's rune ʼ. The godlet ascribes a magic potency to the couplet. Abhihesana
Abhihesana
see abhihiŋsanā. Abhihessati
Abhihessati
see abhihāreti 3 & 4. Abhīta
Abhīta
(adj.) [a + bhīta] fearless J vi.193. See also abhida 1. Abhīruka
Abhīruka
(adj.) [a + bhīru + ka] fearless DA i.250. Abhumma
Abhumma
(adj.) [a + bhumma] groundless, unfounded, un- substantial, J v.178; vi.495. Abhūta
Abhūta
(adj.) [a + bhūta] not real, false, not true, usually as nt. ˚ŋ falsehood, lie, deceit Sn 387; It 37; instr. abhūtena falsely D i.161.

-- vādin one who speaks falsely or tells lies Sn 661 = Dh 306 = It 42; expld. as "ariyɔ ûpavāda -- vasena alika -- vādin" SnA 478; as "tucchena paraŋ abhācikkhanto" DhA iii.477. Abhejja
Abhejja
(adj.) [grd. of a + bhid, cp. Sk. abhedya] not to be split or divided, not to be drawn away or caused to be dissented, inalienable Sn 255 (mitto abhejjo parehi); J i.263 (varasūra . . .) iii.318 (˚rūpa of strong character = abhijja -- hadaya); Pug 30 (= acchejja Pug A 212); Miln 160 (˚parisā); Sdhp 312 (+ appadusiya); Pgdp 97 (˚parivāra). -- 73 -- Amacca
Amacca
[Vedic amātya (only in meaning "companion"), adj. formation fr. amā an adverbial loc. -- gen. of pron. 1st person, Sk. ahaŋ = Idg. *emo (cp. Sk. m -- ama), meaning "(those) of me or with me", i. e. those who are in my house] 1. friend, companion, fellow -- worker, helper, esp. one who gives his advice, a bosom -- friend It 73; J vi. 512 (sahajātā amaccā); Pv ii.620 (a ˚ -- paricārikā well-advising friends as company or around him). Freq. in combn. with mitta as mittɔ âmaccā, friends & colleagues D iii.189 -- 90; S 190 = A ii.67; PvA 29; or with ñātī (ñāti -- sālohitā intimate friends & near -- relations), mittâmaccā ñātisālohitā Vin ii.126; Sn p. 104 (= mittā ca kammakarā ca SnA 447); mittā vā amaccā vā ñātī vā sālohitā vā A i.222; PvA 28; amaccā ñāti -- sanghā ca A i.152. -> 2. Especially a king's intimate friend, king's favourite, confidant J i.262; PvA 73 (˚kula), 74 (amaccā ca purohito ca), 81 (sabba -- kammika amacca), 93; and his special adviser or privy councillor, as such distinguished from the official ministers (purohita, mahāmatta, pārisajja); usually combd. with pārisajjā (pl.) viz. D i.136 (= piya -- sahāyaka DA i.297, but cp. the foll. expln. of pārisajjā as "sesā āṇatti -- karā"); Vin i.348; D iii.64 (amaccā pārisajjā gaṇakamahāmattā); A i.142 (catunnaŋ mahārājānaŋ a. pārisajjā). See on the question of ministers in general Fick, Sociale Gliederung p. 93, 164 & Banerjea, Public Administration in Ancient India pp. 106 -- 120. Amajja
Amajja
[etym.?] a bud J v.416 ( = makula C.). Amajjapāyaka
Amajjapāyaka
[a + majja + pāyaka, cp. Sk. amadyapa] one who abstains from intoxicants, a teetotaler J ii.192. Amata
Amata1
(nt.) [a + mata = mṛta pp. of mṛ, Vedic amṛta = Gr. a) -- m(b)rot -- o & a)mbrosi/a = Lat. im -- mort -- a(lis] 1. The drink of the gods, ambrosia, water of immortality, (cp. BSk. amṛta -- varṣa "rain of Ambrosia" Jtm 221). -- 2. A general conception of a state of durability & non -- change, a state of security i. e. where there is not any more rebirth or re -- death. So Bdhgh at KhA 180 (on Sn 225) "na jāyati na jīyati na mīyati ti amatan ti vuccati", or at DhA i.228 "ajātattā na jiyyati na miyyati tasmā amatan ti vuccati". -- Vin i.7 = M i.169 (apārutā tesaŋ amatassa dvārā); Vin i.39; D ii.39, 217, 241; S i.32 (= rāgadosamoha -- khayo), 193; iii.2 (˚ena abhisitta "sprinkled with A."); iv.94 (˚assa dātā), 370; v.402 (˚assa patti); A i.45 sq.; iii.451; iv.455; v.226 sq., 256 sq. (˚assa dātā); J i.4 (v.25); iv.378, 386; v.456 (˚mahā -- nibbāna); Sn 204, 225, 228 (= nibbāna KhA 185); Th 1, 310 (= agada antidote); It 46 = 62 (as dhātu), 80 (˚assa dvāra); Dh 114, 374 (= amata -- mahā -- nibbāna DhA iv.110); Miln 258 (˚dhura savanûpaga), 319 (agado amataŋ & nibbānaŋ amataŋ), 336 (amatena lokaŋ abhisiñci Bhagavā), 346 (dhammɔ âmataŋ); DA i.217 (˚nibbāna); DhA i.87 (˚ŋ pāyeti); Dāvs ii.34; v.31; Sdhp 1, 209, 530, 571.

-- ogadha diving into the ambrosia (of Nibbāna) S v. 41, 54, 181, 220, 232; A iii.79, 304; iv.46 sq., 317, 387; v.105 sq.; Sn 635; Th 1, 179, 748; Dh 411 ( = amataŋ nibbānaŋ ogahetvā DhA iv.186); Vv 5020. -- osadha the medicine of Ambrosia, ambrosial medicine Miln 247. -- gāmin going or leading to the ambrosia (of Nibbāna) S i.123; iv.370; v.8; A iii.329; Th 2, 222. -- dasa one who sees Amata or Nibbāna Th 1, 336. -- dundubhi the drum of the Immortal (Nibbāna) M i.171 = Vin i.8 (has ˚dudrabhi). -- dvāra the door to Nibbāna M i.353; S i. 137 = Vin i.5; S ii.43, 45, 58, 80; A v.346. -- dhātu the element of Ambrosia or Nibbāna A iii.356. -- patta having attained to Ambrosia A iv.455. -- pada the region or place of Ambrosia S i.212 ("Bourne Ambrosial" trsln. p. 274); ii.280; Dh 21 (= amatassa adhigama -- vupāyo vuttaŋ hoti DhA i.228). -- phala ambrosial fruit S i.173 = Sn 80. -- magga the path to Ambrosia DhA i.94. Amata
Amata2
(adj.) [see amata1] belonging to Amṛta = ambrosial Sn 452 = S i.189 (amatā vācā = amata -- sadisā sādubhāvena SnA 399: "ambrosial"), 960 (gacchato amataŋ disaŋ = nibbānaŋ, taŋ hi amatan ti tathā niddisitabbato disā cā ti SnA 572). Perhaps also at It 46 = 62 (amataŋ dhātuŋ = ambrosial state or Amṛta as dhātu). Amatabbāka
Amatabbāka
(?) at VvA 111, acc. to Hardy (Index) "a precious stone of dark blue colour". Amattaññu
Amattaññu
(adj.) [a + matta + ˚ñu = Sk. amātrajña] not knowing any bounds (in the taking of food), intemperate, immoderate It 23 (bhojanamhi); Dh 7 (id.); Pug 21. Amattaññutā
Amattaññutā
(f.) [abstr. to prec.] immoderation (in food) D iii.213; It 23 (bhojane); Pug 21; Dhs 1346 (bhojane); DhsA 402. Amatteyyatā
Amatteyyatā
(f.) [from matteyyatā] irreverence towards one's mother D iii.70, 71. Amanussa
Amanussa
[a + manussa] a being which is not human, a fairy demon, ghost, god, spirit, yakkha Vin i.277; D i. 116; S i.91, J i.99; Dhs 617; Miln 207; DhsA 319; DhA i.13 (˚pariggahīta haunted); PvA 216. -- Cp. amānusa. Amanussika
Amanussika
(adj.) [fr. amanussa] belonging to or caused by a spirit Vin i.202, 203 (˚âbādha being possessed by a demon). Amama
Amama
(adj.) [a + mama, gen. of ahaŋ, pron. 1st person, lit. "not (saying: this is) of me"] not egotistical, unselfish Sn 220 (+ subbata), 777; J iv.372 (+ nirāsaya); vi.259 ( = mamāyana -- taṇhā -- rahita C.); Pv iv.134 (= mamaŋkāravirahita PvA 230); Mhvs 1, 66, combd. with nirāsa (free from longing), at Sn 469 = 494; Ud 32; J iv.303; vi.259. Amara
Amara
(adj.) [a + mara from mṛ] not mortal, not subject to death Th 1, 276; Sn 249 ( = amara -- bhāva -- patthanatāya pavatta -- kāya -- kilesa SnA 291); J v.80 (= amaraṇa -- sabhāva), 218; Dāvs v.62. Amaratta
Amaratta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. amara] immortality J v.223 ( = devatta C.). Amarā
Amarā
(?) a kind of slippery fish, an eel (?) Only in expres- sion amarā -- vikkhepika eel -- wobbler, one who practices eel -- wriggling, fr. ˚vikkhepa "oscillation like the a. fish". In English idiom "a man who sits on the fence" D i.24; M i.521; Ps i.155. The expln. given by Bdhgh at DA i.115 is "amarā nāma maccha -- jāti, sā ummujjana -- nimmujjan -- ādi vasena . . gahetuŋ na sakkoti" etc. This meaning is not beyond doubt, but Kern's expln. Toev. 71 does not help to clear it up. Amala
Amala
(adj.) [a + mala] without stain or fault J v.4; Sdhp 246, 591, 596. Amassuka
Amassuka
(adj.) [a + massu + ka] beardless J ii.185. Amājāta
Amājāta
(adj.) [amā + jāta; amā adv. "at home", Vedic amā, see under amacca] born in the house, of a slave J i.226 (dāsa, so read for āmajāta, an old mistake, expld. by C. forcibly as "āma ahaŋ vo dāsī ti"!). See also āmāya. Amātika
Amātika
(adj.) [a + mātika from mātā] without a mother, motherless J v.251. Amānusa
Amānusa
(adj.) [Vedic amānuṣa, usually of demons, but also of gods; a + mānusa, cp. amanussa] non -- or superhuman, unhuman, demonic, peculiar to a non -- human (Peta or Yakkha) Pv ii.1220 (kāma); iv.157 (as n.); iv.36 (gandha, of Petas). -- f. ˚ī Dh 373 (rati = dibbā rati DhA iv.110); Pv iii.79 (ratti, love). Amāmaka
Amāmaka
(adj.) [a + mama + ka, cp. amama] "not of me" i. e. not belonging to my party, not siding with me DhA i.66. Amāya
Amāya
(adj.) [a + māyā] not deceiving, open, honest Sn 941 (see Nd1 422: māyā vuccati vañcanikā cariyā). Cp. next. -- 74 -- Amāyāvin
Amāyāvin
(adj.) [a + māyāvin, cp. amāya] without guile, not deceiving, honest D iii.47 (asaṭha +), 55 (id.), 237; DhA i.69 (asaṭhena a.). Amitābha
Amitābha
(adj.) [a + mita (pp. of mā) + ā + bhā] of boundless or immeasurable splendour Sdhp 255. Amitta
Amitta
[Vedic amitra; a + mitta] one who is not friend, an enemy D iii.185; It 83; Sn 561 ( = paccatthika SnA 455); Dh 66, 207; J vi.274 (˚tāpana harassing the enemies). Amilātatā
Amilātatā
(f.) [a + milāta + tā] the condition of not being withered J v.156. Amu˚
Amu˚
base of demonstr. pron. "that", see asu. Amucchita
Amucchita
(adj.) [a + mucchita] not infatuated (lit. not stupified or bewildered), not greedy; only in phrase agathita amucchita anajjhāpanna (or anajjhopanna) D iii.46; M i.369; S ii.194. See ajjhopanna. Amutta
Amutta
(adj.) [a + mutta] not released, not free from (c. abl.) It 93 (mārabandhanā). Amutra
Amutra
(adv.) [pron. base amu + tra] in that place, there; in another state of existence D i.4, 14, 184; It 99. Amūḷhavinaya
Amūḷha
-- vinaya "acquittal on the ground of restored sanity" (Childers) Vin i.325 (ix.6, 2); ii.81 (iv.5), 99 (iv.14, 27); iv.207, 351; M ii.248. Amoha
Amoha
(adj.) [a + moha, cp. Sk. amogha] not dull. As n. absence of stupidity or delusion D iii.214; Pug 25. -> The form amogha occurs at J vi.26 in the meaning of "efficacious, auspicious" (said of ratyā nights). Amba
Amba
[Derivation unknown. Not found in pre -- Buddhist literature. The Sk. is āmra. Probably non -- Aryan], the Mango tree, Mangifera Indica D i.46, 53, 235; J ii.105, 160; Vv 7910; Pug 45; Miln 46; PvA 153, 187.

-- aṭṭhi the kernel or stone of the m. fruit DhA iii.207, 208. -- ārāma a garden of mangoes, mango grove Vv 795; VvA 305. -- kañjika mango gruel Vv 3337 ( = ambilakañjika VvA 147). -- pakka a (ripe) mango fruit J ii.104, 394; DhA iii.207. -- panta a border of mango trees VvA 198. -- pānaka a drink made from mangoes DhA iii.207. -- piṇḍi a bunch of mangoes J iii.53; DhA iii.207. -- pesikā the peel, rind, of the m. fruit Vin ii.109. -- potaka a mango sprout DhA iii.206 sq. -- phala a m. fruit PvA 273, 274. -- rukkha a m. tree DhA iii.207; VvA 198. -- vana a m. grove or wood D ii.126; J i.139; VvA 305. -- siñcaka one who waters the mangoes, a tender or keeper of mangoes Vv 797. Ambaka
Ambaka1
(adj.) [ = ambakā?] "womanish" (?), inferior, silly, stupid, of narrow intellect. Occurs only with reference to a woman, in combn. with bālā A iii.349 (v. l. amma˚) = v.139 (where spelt ambhaka with v. l. appaka˚ and gloss andhaka); v.150 (spelt ambhaka perhaps in diff. meaning).

-- maddarī see next. Ambaka
Ambaka2
[demin. of amba] a little mango, only in ˚mad- darī a kiṇd of bird [etym. uncertain] A i.188. Ambakā
Ambakā
(f.) [Sk. ambikā demin. of ambī mother, wife, see P. amma & cp. also Sk. ambālikā f.] mother, good wife, used as a general endearing term for a woman Vin i.232 = D ii.97 (here in play of words with Ambapālī expld. by Bdhgh at Vin i.385 as ambakā ti itthiyikā). Ambara
Ambara1
(nt.) [Vedic ambara circumference, horizon] the sky, Dāvs i.38; iv.51; v.32. -- Note. At J v.390 we have to read muraja -- ālambara, and not mura -- jāla -- ambara. Ambara
Ambara2
(m. -- nt.) [etym. = ambara1 (?) or more likely a distortion of kambala; for the latter speaks the combn. rattambara = ratta -- kambala. -- The word would thus be due to an erroneous syllable division rattak -- ambala (= ambara) instead of ratta -- kambala] some sort of cloth and an (upper) garment made of it (cp. kambala) Vv 537 (ratt˚ = uttariya VvA 236). Ambala
Ambala
at J ii.246 (˚koṭṭhaka -- āsana -- sālā) for ambara1 (?) or for ambaka2 (?), or should we read kambala˚?. Ambāṭaka
Ambāṭaka
the hog -- plum, Spondias Mangifera (a kind of mango) Vin ii.17 (˚vana); DA i.271 (˚rukkha). Ambila
Ambila
(adj.) [Sk. amla = Lat. amarus] sour, acid; one of the 6 rasas or tastes, viz. a., lavaṇa, tittaka, kaṭuka, kasāya, madhura (see under rasa): thus at Miln 56. Another enumeration at Nd2 540 & Dhs 629. -- J i.242 (˚anambila), 505 (loṇ˚); ii.394 (loṇ˚); DA i.270 (˚yāgu sour gruel); DhA ii.85 (ati -- ambila, with accuṇha & atisīta). Ambu
Ambu
(nt.) [Vedic ambu & ambhas = Gr. o)/mbros, Lat. imber rain; cp. also Sk. abhra rain -- cloud & Gr. a)fro/s scum: see P. abbha] water J v.6; Nd1 202 (a. vuccati udakaŋ); Dāvs ii.16. -- Cp. ambha.

-- cārin "living in the water", a fish Sn 62 ( = maccha Nd2 91). -- sevāla a water -- plant Th 1, 113. Ambuja
Ambuja
(m. & nt.) [ambu + ja of jan] "water -- born", i. e. 1. (m.) a fish S i.52. -- 2. (nt.) a lotus Sn 845 ( = paduma Nd1 202); Dāvs v.46; Sdhp 360. Ambuda
Ambuda
[ambu + da fr. dā] "water -- giver", a cloud Dāvs v.32; Sdhp 270, 275. Ambha & Ambho
Ambha
& Ambho (nt.) [see ambu] water, sea Dāvs iv.54. Ambhaka
Ambhaka
see ambaka. Ambho
Ambho
(indecl.) [fr. haŋ + bho, see bho, orig. "hallo you there"] part. of exclamation, employed: 1. to draw attention = look here, hey! hallo! Vin iii.73 (= ālapanɔ âdhivacana); J ii.3; PvA 62. -- 2. to mark reproach & anger = you silly, you rascal D i.194; It 114; J i.174 (v. l. amho), 254; Miln 48. Amma
Amma
(indecl.) [voc. of ammā] endearing term, used (1) by children in addressing their mother = mammy, mother dear D i.93; J ii.133; iv.1, 281 (amma tāta uṭṭhetha daddy, mammy, get up!); DhA ii.87; PvA 73, 74. -> (2) in general when addressing a woman familiarly = good woman, my (good) lady, dear, thus to a woman J i.292; PvA 63; DhA ii.44; to a girl PvA 6; to a daughter DhA ii.48; iii.172. -- Cp. ambakā. Ammaṇa
Ammaṇa
(nt.) [of uncertain etym.; Sk. armaṇa is Sans- kritised Pāli. See on form & meaning Childers s. v. and Kern, Toev. p. 72] 1. a trough J v.297; vi.381 (bhatt˚). -> 2. a certain measure of capacity J i.62; ii.436 (taṇḍul˚). -> As ˚ka at J ii.117 (v. l. ampaṇaka); DA i.84. Ammā
Ammā
(f.) [onomat. from child language; Sk. ambā, cp. Gr. a)mma/s mother, Oisl. amma "granny", Ohg. amma "mammy", nurse; also Lat. amita father's sister & amāre to love] mother J iii.392 (gen. ammāya). -- Voc. amma (see sep.). Amha & Amhan
Amha
& Amhan (nt.) [Sk. aśman, see also asama2] a stone Sn 443 (instr. amhanā, but SnA 392 reads asmanā = pāsāṇena).

-- maya made of stone, hard Dh 161 ( = pāsāṇa˚ DhA iii.151). Amha, Amhi
Amha,
Amhi see atthi. Amhā
Amhā
(f.) [etym. uncertain; Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 201 too vague] a cow (?) A i.229. The C. says nothing. Amhākaŋ, Amhe
Amhākaŋ,
Amhe see ahaŋ. Amho = ambho
Amho
= ambho J i.174 (v. l.). Aya
Aya1
see ayo. -- 75 -- Aya
Aya2
(fr. i, go) 1. income, in aya -- potthaka receipt book J i.2. -- 2. inlet (for water, aya -- mukha) D i.74; A ii. 166, iv.287. Ayaŋ
Ayaŋ
(pron.) [Sk. ayaŋ etc., pron. base Idg. *i (cp. Sk. iha), f. *ī. Cp. Gr. i)n, min; Lat. is (f. ea, nt. id); Goth is, nt. ita; Ohg. er ( = he), nt. ez (= it); Lith. jìs (he), f. jì (she).] demonstr. pron. "this, he"; f. ayaŋ; nt. idaŋ & imaŋ "this, it" etc. This pron. combines in its inflection two stems, viz. as˚ (ayaŋ in nom. m. & f.) & im˚ (id˚ in nom. nt.).

I. Forms. A. (sg.) nom. m. ayaŋ Sn 235; J i.168, 279; f. ayaŋ [Sk. iyaŋ] Kh vii.12; J ii.128, 133; nt. idaŋ Sn 224; J iii.53; & imaŋ Miln 46. acc. m. imaŋ J ii.160; f. imaŋ [Sk. īmāŋ] Sn 545, 1002; J i.280. gen. dat. m. imassa J i.222, 279 & assa Sn 234, 1100; Kh vii.12 (dat.); J ii.158; f. imissā J i.179 & assā [Sk. asyāḥ] J i.290; DhA iii.172. instr. m. nt. iminā J i.279; PvA 80 & (peculiarly or perhaps for amunā) aminā Sn 137; f. imāya [Sk. anayā] J i.267. The instr. anena [Sk. anena] is not proved in Pāli. abl. asmā Sn 185; Dh 220; & imasmā (not proved). loc. m. nt. imasmiŋ Kh iii.; J ii. 159 & asmiŋ Sn 634; Dh 242; f. imissā PvA 79 (or imissaŋ?) & imāyaŋ (no ref.). -- B. (pl.) nom. m. ime J i.221; Pv i.83; f. imā [Sk. imāḥ] Sn 897 & imāyo Sn 1122; nt. imāni [ = Sk.] Vin i.84. acc. m. ime [Sk. imān] J i.266; ii.416; f. imā [Sk. imāḥ] Sn 429; J ii.160. gen. imesaŋ J ii.160 & esaŋ [Sk. eṣāŋ] M ii.86, & esānaŋ M ii.154; iii.259; f. also āsaŋ J i.302 (= etāsaŋ C.) & imāsaŋ. instr. m. nt imehi J vi.364; f. imāhi. loc. m. nt. imesu [Sk. eṣu] J i.307.

II. Meanings (1) ayaŋ refers to what is immediately in front of the speaker (the subject in question) or before his eyes or in his present time & situation, thus often to be trsld. by "before our eyes", "the present", "this here", "just this" (& not the other) (opp. para), viz. atthi imasmiŋ kāye "in this our visible body" Kh iii.; yathɔ âyaŋ padīpo "like this lamp here" Sn 235; ayaŋ dakkhiṇā dinnā "the gift which is just given before our eyes" Kh vii.12; ime pādā imaŋ sīsaŋ ayaŋ kāyo Pv i.83; asmiŋ loke paramhi ca "in this world & the other" Sn 634, asmā lokā paraŋ lokaŋ kathaŋ pecca na socati Sn 185; cp. also Dh 220, 410; J i.168; iii.53. -- (2) It refers to what immediately precedes the present of the speaker, or to what has just been mentioned in the sentence; viz. yaŋ kiñci vittaŋ . . . idam pi Buddhe ratanaŋ "whatever . . . that" Sn 224; ime divase these days (just gone) J ii.416; cp. also Vin i.84; Sn 429; J ii.128, 160. -- (3) It refers to what immediately follows either in time or in thought or in connection: dve ime antā "these are the two extremes, viz." Vin i.10; ayaŋ eva ariyo maggo "this then is the way" ibid.; cp. J i.280. -> (4) With a touch of (often sarcastic) characterisation it establishes a closer personal relation between the speaker & the object in question & is to be trsld. by "like that, such (like), that there, yonder, yon", e. g. imassa vānarindassa "of that fellow, the monkey" J i.279; cp. J i. 222, 307; ii 160 (imesaŋ sattānaŋ "creatures like us"). So also repeated as ayañ ca ayañ ca "this and this", "so and so" J ii.3; idañ cɔ idañ ca "such & such a thing" J ii.5. -- (5) In combn with a pron. rel. it expresses either a generalisation (whoever, whatever) or a specialisation ( = that is to say, what there is of, i. e. Ger. und zwar), e. g. yâyaŋ taṇhā Vin i.10; yo ca ayaŋ . . . yo ca ayaŋ "I mean this . . . and I mean" ibid.; ye kecɔ ime Sn 381; yadidaŋ "i. e." Miln 25; yatha -- y -- idaŋ "in order that" (w. pot.) Sn 1092. See also seyyathīdaŋ. -- (6) The gen. of all genders functions in general as a possessive pron. of the 3rd = his, her, its (lit. of him etc.) and thus resembles the use of tassa, e. g. āsavaɔ ssa na vijjanti "his are no intoxications" Sn 1100; sīlaŋ assā bhindāpessāmi "I shall cause her character to be defamed" J i.290; assa bhariyā "his wife" J ii.158 etc. freq. Ayana
Ayana
(nt.) [Vedic ayana, fr. i] (a) "going", road. -- (b) going to, goal S v.167 (ekāyano maggo leading to one goal, a direct way), 185 (id.); DA i.313; Dāvs iv.40. -> See also eka˚. Ayasa
Ayasa
(nt.) [a + yasa, cp. Sk. ayaśaḥ] ill repute, disgrace Miln 139, 272; Dāvs i.8. Ayira
Ayira
(& Ayyira) (n. -- adj.) [Vedic ārya, Metathesis for ariya as diaeretic form of ārya, of which the contracted (assimilation) form is ayya. See also ariya] (n.) ariyan, nobleman, gentleman (opp. servant); (adj.) arīyan, well-born, belonging to the ruling race, noble, aristocratic, gentlemanly J v.257; Vv 396. -- f. ayirā lady, mistress (of a servant) J ii.349 (v. l. oyyakā); voc. ayire my lady J v.138 ( = ayye C.). Ayiraka
Ayiraka
= ayira; cp. ariyaka & ayyaka; D iii.190 (v. l. BB yy); J ii.313. Ayo & Aya
Ayo
& Aya (nt.) [Sk. ayaḥ nt. iron & ore, Idg. *ajes -- , cp. Av. ayah, Lat. aes, Goth. aiz, Ohg. ēr ( = Ger. Erz.), Ags. ār (= E. ore).] iron. The nom. ayo found only in set of 5 metals forming an alloy of gold (jātarūpa), viz. ayo, loha (copper), tipu (tin), sīsa (lead), sajjha (silver) A iii.16 = S v.92; of obl. cases only the instr. ayasā occurs Dh 240 (= ayato DhA iii.344); Pv i.1013 (paṭikujjita, of Niraya). -- Iron is the material used kat)e)coxh/n in the outfit & construction of Purgatory or Niraya (see niraya & Avīci & cp. Vism 56 sq.). -- In compn. both ayo˚ & aya˚ occur as bases.

I. ayo˚: -- kapāla an iron pot A iv.70 (v. l. ˚guhala); Nd2 304 iii. d 2 (of Niraya). -- kūṭa an iron hammer PvA 284. -- khīla an iron stake S v.444; M iii.183 = Nd2 304 iii. c; SnA 479. -- guḷa an iron ball S v.283; Dh 308; It 43 = 90; Th 2, 489; DA i.84. -- ghana an iron club Ud 93; VvA 20. -- ghara an iron house J iv.492. -- paṭala an iron roof or ceiling (of Niraya) PvA 52. -- pākāra an iron fence Pv i.1013 = Nd2 304 iii. d 1. -- maya made of iron Sn 669 (kūṭa); J iv.492 (nāvā); Pv i.1014 (bhūmi of N.); PvA 43, 52. -- muggara an iron club PvA 55. -- sanku an iron spike S iv.168; Sn 667.

II. aya˚: -- kapāla = ayo˚ DhA i.148 (v. l. ayo˚). -kāra a worker in iron Miln 331. -- kūṭa = ayo˚ J i.108; DhA ii.69 (v. l.). -- nangala an iron plough DhA i.223; iii.67. -- paṭṭaka an iron plate or sheet (cp. loha˚) J v.359. -- paṭhavi an iron floor (of Avīci) DhA i.148. -- sanghāṭaka an iron (door) post DhA iv.104. -- sūla an iron stake Sn 667; DhA i.148. Ayojjha
Ayojjha
(adj.) [Sk. ayodhya] not to be conquered or sub- dued M ii.24. Ayya
Ayya
(n. -- adj.) [contracted form for the diaeretic ariya (q. v. for etym.). See also ayira] (a) (n.) gentleman, sire, lord, master J iii.167 = PvA 65; DhA i.8 (ayyā pl. the worthy gentlemen, the worthies), 13 (amhākaŋ ayyo our worthy Sir); ii.95. -- (b) (adj.) worthy, gentlemanly, honourable Vin ii.191; DhA ii.94 sq. -- The voc. is used as a polite form of address (cp. Ger. "Sie" and E. address "Esq.") like E. Sir, milord or simply "you" with the implication of a pluralis majestatis; thus voc. proper ayya J i.221, 279, 308; pl. nom. as voc. ayyā in addressing several J ii.128, 415; nom. sg. as voc. (for all genders & numbers) ayyo Vin ii.215; J iii.126, 127. -- f. ayyā lady, mistress M ii.96 (= mother of a prince); DhA i.398; voc. ayye my lady J v.138.

-- putta lit. son of an Ariyan, i. e. an aristocratic (young) man gentleman (cp. in meaning kulaputta); thus (a) son of my master (lit.) said by a servant J iii.167; (b) lord, master, "governor" J i.62 (by a servant); DA i.257 ( = sāmi, opp. dāsi -- putta); PvA 145 (by a wife to her husband); DhA ii.110; (c) prince (see W.Z.K.M. xii., 1898, 75 sq. & Epigraphia Indica iii.137 sq.) J vi.146. Ayyaka
Ayyaka
[demin. of ayya] grandfather, (so also BSk., e. g. M Vastu ii.426; iii.264) J iii.155; iv.146; vi.196; Pv i.84; Miln 284. ayyaka -- payyakā grandfather & great grandfather, forefathers, ancestors J i.2; PvA 107 ( = pitāmahā). -- f. ayyakā grandmother, granny Vin ii.169; S i.97; J ii.349 (here used for "lady", as v. l. BB); & ayyikā Th 2, 159; Vism 379. -- 76 -- Ara
Ara
[Vedic ara fr. ṛ, ṛṇoti; see etym. under appeti & cp. more esp. Lat. artus limb, Gr. a(/rma chariot, also P. aṇṇava] the spoke of a wheel D ii.17 (sahassɔ âra adj. with thousand spokes), cp. Miln 285; J iv.209; vi.261; Miln 238; DhA ii.142; VvA 106 (in allegorical etym. of arahant = saŋsāra -- cakkassa arānaŋ hatattā "breaker of the spokes of the wheel of transmigration") = PvA 7 (has saŋsāra -- vaṭṭassa); VvA 277. Arakkhiya
Arakkhiya
(adj.) [a + rakkhiya, grd. of rakkhati] not to be guarded, viz. (1) impossible to watch (said of women folk) J ii.326 (a. nāma itthiyo); iii.90 (mātugāmo nāma a.). -- (2) unnecessary to be guarded Vin ii.194 (Tathāgatā). Arakkheyya
Arakkheyya
(adj.) [in form = arakkhiya] only in nt. "that which does not need to be guarded against", what one does not need to heed, superfluous to beware of A iv.82 (cattāri Tathāgatassa a˚ āni). -- 3 arakkheyyāni are enumd. at D iii.217 (but as ārakkh˚, which is also given by Childers). Araghaṭṭa
Araghaṭṭa
[Sk. araghaṭṭaka (so Halāyudha, see Aufrecht p. 138), dialect.] a wheel for raising water from a well Bdgh. on cakkavaṭṭaka at cv v.16, 2 (Vin ii.318). So read for T. arahatta -- ghaṭi -- yanta acc to Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 30; cp. also Vin. Texts iii.112. -- The 2rd part of the cpd. is doubtful; Morris & Aufrecht compare the modern Hindī form arhaṭ or rahaṭ "a well -- wheel". Araja
Araja
(adj.) [a + raja] free from dust or impurity S iv.218 (of the wind); Vv 536 ( = apagata -- raja VvA 236). Arañña
Arañña
(nt.) [Vedic araṇya; from araṇa, remote, + ya. In the Rig V. araṇya still means remoteness (opp. to amā, at home). In the Ath V. it has come to mean wilderness or forest. Connected with ārād and āre, remote, far from]. forest D i.71; M i.16; iii.104; S i.4, 7, 29, 181, 203 (mahā); A i.60 (˚vanapatthāni); ii.252; iii.135, 138; Sn 39, 53, 119; Dh 99, 329, 330; It 90; Vv 567; Ps i.176. [The commentators, give a wider meaning to the word. Thus the O. C. (Vin iii.46, quoted Vism 72 & SnA 83) says every place, except a village and the approach thereto, is arañña. See also Vin iii.51; DA i.209; PvA 73; VvA 249; J i.149, 215; ii.138; v.70].

-- āyatana a forest haunt Vin ii.201; S ii.269; J i.173; VvA 301; PvA 54, 78, 141. -- kuṭikā a hut in the forest, a forest lodge S i.61; iii.116; iv.116, 380; DhA iv.31 (as v. l.; T. has ˚kuṭi). -- gata gone into the forest (as loneliness) M i.323; A iii.353; v.109 sq., 207, 323 sq. -- ṭhāna a place in the forest J i.253. -- vāsa a dwelling in the forest, a hermitage J i.90. -- vihāra living in (the) loneliness (of the forest) A iii.343 sq. Araññaka
Araññaka
(& Āraññāka) (adj.) [arañña + ka] belonging to solitude or to the forest, living in the forest, fond of solitude, living as hermits (bhikkhū) M i.214 (ā˚), 469; iii.89; S ii.187, 202 (v. l. ā˚), 208 sq.; 281; A iii.343, 391; iv.291, 344, 435; v.10. See also āraññaka. Araññakatta
Araññakatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. araññaka] the habit of one who lives in the forest, indulgence in solitude & sequestration, a hermit's practice, seclusion S ii.202, 208 sq. See also āraññakatta. Araṇa
Araṇa1
(adj. -- n.) [Vedic araṇa fr. *ara √ṛ, which as abl. ārā is used as adv. far from, cp. P. ārakā. Orig. meaning "removed from, remote, far". See also arañña]. (adj.) living in solitude, far from the madding crowd M iii.237 (˚vibhanga -- sutta); S i.44, 45; J i.340 (tittha˚?). Araṇa
Araṇa2
(nt.) [a + raṇa] quietude, peace Nett 55 (+ tāṇa), 176 (or as adj. = peaceful) ThA 134 (+ saraṇa); Vbh 19 sq. (opp. saraṇa). See saraṇa2.

-- vihārin (or araṇā -- vihārin) [to be most likely taken as araṇā˚, abl. of araṇa in function of ārakā, i. e. adv. far from, away; the spelling araṇa would refer it to araṇa2. As regards meaning the P. Commentators expln. it as opp. of raṇa fight, battle, i. e. peacefullness, friendliness & see in it a syn. of metta. Thus Dhammapāla at PvA 230 expls. it as "mettā -- vihārin", & in this meaning it is found freq. in BSk. e. g. Divy 401; Av. Ś ii.131 (q. v. for further ref. under note 3); M Vastu i.165; ii.292. Cp. also the epithet of the Buddhas raṇañjaha] one who lives in seclusion, an anchoret, hermit; hence a harmless, peaceful person A i.24; Th 2, 358, 360; Pv iv.133 ( = PvA 230); ThA 244. Cp. Dhs trsl. 336. Araṇi & ˚ī
Araṇi
& ˚ī (f.) [Vedic araṇī & araṇi fr. ṛ] wood for kind- ling fire by attrition, only in foll. cpds.: ˚potaka small firewood, all that is needed for producing fire, chiefly drill sticks Miln 53; ˚sahita (nt.) same Vin ii.217; J i. 212 (ī); v.46 (ī); DhA ii.246; ˚mathana rubbing of firewood J vi.209. --

Note. The reading at PvA 211 araṇiyehi devehi sadisa -- vaṇṇa is surely a misreading (v. l. BB ariyehi). Arati
Arati
(f.) [a + rati] dislike, discontent, aversion Sn 270, 436, 642, 938; Dh 418 ( = ukkaṇṭhitattaŋ DhA iv.225); Th 2, 339 (= ukkaṇṭhi ThA 239); Sdhp 476. Aravinda
Aravinda
[ara + vinda (?) Halāyudha gives as Sk. aravinda nt.] a lotus, Nymphaea Nelumbo Dāvs v.62. Araha
Araha
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [Vedic arha of arh] 1. worthy of, de- serving, entitled to, worth Dh 195 (pūjā˚); Pv ii.86 (dakkhiṇā˚); VvA 23 (daṇḍa˚ deserving punishment). Freq. in cpd. mahâraha [Sk. mahârgha] worth much, of great value, costly, dear J i.50, 58; iii.83, etc. (see mahant). -- 2. fit for, apt for, suitable PvA 26 (paribhoga˚ fit for eating). Arahati
Arahati
[Vedic arhati, etym. uncertain but cp. agghati] to be worthy of, to deserve, to merit ( = Lat. debeo) Sn 431, 552 (rājā arahasi bhavituŋ); J i.262; Dh 9, 10, 230; Pv iii.66. -- ppr. arahant (q. v.). Cp. also adj. araha. Arahatta
Arahatta1
(nt.) [abstr. formation fr. arahat˚, 2nd base of arahant in compn.: see arahant iv.2] the state or condition of an Arahant, i. e. perfection in the Buddhist sense = Nibbāna (S iv.151) final & absolute emancipation, Arahantship, the attainment of the last & highest stage of the Path (see magga & anāgāmin). This is not restricted by age or sex or calling. There is one instance in the Canon of a child having attained Arahantship at the age of 7. One or two others occur in the Comy ThA 64 (Selā); PvA 53 (Sankicca). Many women Arahants are mentioned by name in the oldest texts. About 400 men Arahants are known. Most of them were bhikkhus, but A iii.451 gives the names of more than a score lay Arahants (cp. D ii.93 = S v.360, and the references in Dial. iii.5 n4). -> Arahattaŋ is defined at S iv.252 as rāga -- kkhaya, dosa˚, moha˚. Descriptions of this state are to be found in the formulae expressing the feelings of an Arahant (see arahant ii.). Vin ii.254; D iii.10, 11, 255; A iii.34, 421, 430; v.209; Pug 73; Nett 15, 82; DA i.180, 188, 191; DhA ii 95; iv.193; PvA 14. -- Phrases: arahattaŋ sacchikaroti to experience Arahantship Vin ii.74; D i.229; arahattaŋ pāpuṇāti to attain or reach Arahantship (usually in aor. pāpuṇi) J ii.229 ThA 64; DhA ii.49 (saha paṭisambhidāhi) 93 (id.); PvA 53, 54, 61, 233 & freq. elsewhere; cp. arahattāya paṭipanna D iii.255; A i.120; iv.292 sq., 372 sq.

-- gahaṇa attainment of Arahantship DhA i.8. -- patta (& patti) one who has attained Ar. S i.196; v.273; A ii.157; iii.376; iv.235. -- phala the fruit of Ar. Vin i.39, 41, 293; iii.93; D iii.227, 277; S iii.168; v.44; A i.23, 45; iii.272; iv.276; Dhs 1017; Vbh 326. -- magga the Path of Ar. S i.78; A iii.391; DA i.224. -- vimokkha the emancipation of Ar. Nd2 19. Arahatta
Arahatta2
in ˚ghaṭi see araghaṭṭa. -- 77 -- Arahant
Arahant
(adj. -- n.) [Vedic arhant, ppr. of arhati (see arahati), meaning deserving, worthy]. Before Buddhism used as honorific title of high officials like the English ʻ His Worship ʼ; at the rise of Buddhism applied popularly to all ascetics (Dial. iii.3 -- 6). Adopted by the Buddhisṭs as t. t. for one who has attained the Summum Bonum of religious aspiration (Nibbāna).

I. Cases nom. sg. arahaŋ Vin i.9; D i.49; M i.245, 280; S i.169; see also formula C. under ii., & arahā Vin i.8, 25, 26; ii.110, 161; D iii.255; It 95; Kh iv.; gen. arahato S iv.175; Sn 590; instr. arahatā S iii.168; DA i.43; acc. arahantaŋ D iii.10; Dh 420; Sn 644; Loc. arahantamhi Vv 212. -- nom. pl. arahanto Vin i.19; iv.112; S i.78, 235; ii.220; iv.123; gen. arahataŋ Vin iii.1; S i.214; Sn 186; It 112; Pv i.1112. Other cases are of rare occurrence.

II. Formulae. Arahantship finds its expression in freq. occurring formulae, of which the standard ones are the foll.: A. khīṇā jāti vusitaŋ brahmacariyaŋ kataŋ karaṇīyaŋ nâparaŋ itthattāya "destroyed is (re -- ) birth, lived is a chaste life, (of a student) done is what had to be done, after this present life there is no beyond". Vin i.14, 35, 183; D i.84, 177, 203; M i.139; ii.39; S i. 140; ii.51, 82, 95, 120, 245; iii.21, 45, 55, 68, 71, 90, 94, 195, 223; iv.2, 20, 35, 45, 86, 107, 151, 383; v.72, 90, 144, 222; A i.165; ii.211; iii.93; iv.88, 179, 302; v.155, 162; Sn p. 16; Pug 61, etc. -- B. eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto ʻ alone, secluded, earnest, zealous, master of himself ʼ D i.177; ii.153 & continued with A: S i.140, 161; ii.21; iii.36, 74; iv.64; v.144, 166; A i.282; ii.249; iii.70, 217, 301, 376; iv. 235. -- C. arahaŋ khīṇāsavo vusitavā katakaraṇīyo ohitabhāro anupatta -- sadattho parikkhīṇa -- bhava -- saññojano sammad -- aññā vimutto: D iii.83, 97; M i.4, 235; S i.71; iii.161, 193; iv.125; v.145, 205, 273, 302; A i.144; iii.359, 376; iv.362, 369, 371 sq., It 38. -> D. ñāṇañ ca pana me dassanaŋ udapādi akuppā me ceto -- vimutti ayaŋ antimā jāti natthi dāni punabbhavo "there arose in me insight, the emancipation of my heart became unshake able, this is my last birth, there is now no rebirth for me: S ii.171; iii.28; iv.8; v.204; A i.259; iv.56, 305, 448.

III. Other passages (selected) Vin i.8 (arahā sītibhūto nibbuto), 9 (arahaŋ Tathāgato Sammāsambuddho), 19 (ekādasa loke arahanto), 20 (ekasaṭṭhi id.). 25 sq.; ii. 110, 161; iii.1; iv.112 (te arahanto udake kīḷanti); D i.49 (Bhagavā arahaŋ), 144; iii.10, 255: M i.245 (Gotamo na pi kālaŋ karoti: arahaŋ samaṇo Gotamo), 280; S i.9, 26, 50 (Tathāgato), 78, 140, 161, 169, 175, 178 (+ sītibhūta), 208, 214, 235 (khīnāsavā arahanto); iii. 160 (arahā tissa?), 168; iv.123, 175, 260, 393; v.159 sq., 164, 200 sq.; A i.22 (Sammāsambuddho), 27, 109, 266; iī.134; iii.376, 391, 439; iv.364, 394; v.120; Sn 186, 590, 644, 1003; It 95 (+ khīṇāsava), 112; Kh iv. (dasahi angehi samannāgato arahā ti vuccati: see KhA 88); Vv 212; i.217; Dh 164, 420 (khīṇāsava +); Ps ii.3, 19, 194, 203 sq.; Pug 37, 73; Vbh 324, 336, 422; Pv i.11 (khettûpamā arahanto), 1112; iv.132.

IV. In compn. & der. we find two bases, viz. (1) arahanta˚ in ˚ghāta the killing or murder of an Arahant (considered as one of the six deadly crimes): see abhiṭhāna; ˚ghātaka the murderer of the A.: Vin i.89, 136, 168, 320; ˚magga (arahatta˚?) the path of an A.: D ii 144. -- (2) arahat˚ in (arahad -- )dhaja the flag or banner of an A.: J i.65.

V. See further details & passages under anāgāmin, khīṇa, buddha. On the relationship of Buddha and Arahant see Dial. ii.1 -- 3; iii.6. For riddles or word -- play on the form arahant see M i.280; A iv.145; DA i.146 = VvA 105, 6 = PvA 7; DhA iv.228; DhsA 349. Arāti
Arāti
[a + rāti, cp. Sk. arāti] an enemy Dāvs iv.1. Ari
Ari
[Ved. ari; fr. ṛ] an enemy. -- The word is used in exegesis & word expln, thus in etym. of arahant (see ref. under arahant v.); of bhūri Ps ii.197. -- Otherwise in late language only, e. g. Sdhp 493 (˚bhūta). See also arindama & aribhāseti. Ariñcamāna
Ariñcamāna
[ppr. med. of P. riñcati for ricyati] not leaving behind, not giving up, i. e. pursuing earnestly Sn 69 (jhānaŋ = ajȧhamana SnA 123, cp. Nd2 94). Ariṭṭha
Ariṭṭha1
(adj.) [a + riṭṭha = Vedic ariṣṭa, pp of a + riṣ to hurt or be hurt] unhurt Sdhp 279. Ariṭṭha
Ariṭṭha2
[Sk. ariṣṭa, N. of a tree] a kind of spirituous liquor Vin iv.110. Ariṭṭhaka
Ariṭṭhaka
(adj.) [fr. ariṭṭha] (a) unhurt; perfect DA 1,94 (˚ŋ ñāṇaŋ). -- (b) [fr. ariṭṭha in meaning of "soap -- berry plant"?] in phrase mahā ariṭṭhako maṇi S i.104 "a great mass of soap stone" (cp. Rh. D. in J. R. A. S. 1895, 893 sq.), "a shaped block of steatite" (Mrs. Rh. D. in K. S 130). Aritta
Aritta
(nt.) [Vedic aritra, Idg. *ere to row (Sk. ṛ to move); cf. Gr. e)re/ssw to row, e)retmo/s rudder, Lat. remus, Ohg. ruodar = rudder; Ags. rōwan = E. row] a rudder. Usually in combn. with piya (phiya) oar, as piyârittaŋ (phiy˚) oar & rudder, thus at S i.103 (T. piya˚, v. l. phiya˚); A ii.201 (piya˚); J iv.164 (T. piya˚, v.l. phiya˚); Sn 321 (piya +; SnA 330 phiya = dabbi -- padara, aritta = veḷudaṇḍa). DhsA 149. Arindama
Arindama
[Sk. arindama, ariŋ + dama of dam] a tamer of enemies, victor, conqueror Pv iv.315 ( = arīnaŋ damanasīla PvA 251); Sdhp 276. Aribhāseti
Aribhāseti
[ = ariŋ bhāseti] to denounce, lit. to call an enemy J iv.285. Correct to Pari˚ according to Fausböll (J v. corr.) Ariya
Ariya
(adj. -- n.) [Vedic ārya, of uncertain etym. The other Pāli forms are ayira & ayya] 1. (racial) Aryan D ii.87. -> 2. (social) noble, distinguished, of high birth. -- 3. (ethical) in accord with the customs and ideals of the Aryan clans, held in esteem by Aryans, generally approved. Hence: right, good, ideal. [The early Buddhists had no such ideas as we cover with the words Buddhist and Indian. Ariya does not exactly mean either. But it often comes very near to what they would have considered the best in each]. -- (adj.): D i.70 = (˚ena sīlakkhandhena samannāgata fitted out with our standard morality); iii.64 (cakkavatti -- vatta), 246 (diṭṭhi); M i.139 (pannaddhaja); ii.103 (ariyāya jātiyā jāto, become of the Aryan lineage); S ii.273 (tuṇhībhāva); iv.250 (vaddhi), 287 (dhamma); v.82 (bojjhangā), 166 (satipaṭṭhānā), 222 (vimutti), 228 (ñāṇa), 255 (iddhipādā), 421 (maggo), 435 (saccāni), 467 (paññā -- cakkhu); A i.71 (parisā); ii.36 (ñāya); iii.451 (ñāṇa); iv.153 (tuṇhībhāva); v.206 (sīlakkhandha); It 35 (paññā), 47 (bhikkhu sammaddaso); Sn 177 (patha = aṭṭhangiko maggo SnA 216); Dh 236 (bhūmi), 270; Ps ii.212 (iddhi). -- alamariya fully or thoroughly good D i.163 = iii.82 = A iv.363; nâlamariya not at all good, object, ignoble ibid. -- (m.) Vin i.197 (na ramati pāpe); D i.37 = (yaŋ taŋ ariyā ācikkhanti upekkhako satimā etc.: see 3rd. jhāna), 245; iii.111 (˚ānaŋ anupavādaka one who defames the noble); M i.17, 280 (sottiyo ariyo arahaŋ); S i.225 (˚ānaŋ upavādaka); ii.123 (id.); iv.53 (˚assa vinayo), 95 (id.); A i.256 (˚ānaŋ upavādaka); iii.19, 252 (id.); iv.145 (dele! see arīhatatta); v.68, 145 sq., 200, 317; It 21, 108; Dh 22, 164, 207; J iii.354 = Miln 230; M i.7, i35 (ariyānaŋ adassāvin: "not recognising the Noble Ones") PvA 26, 146; DhA ii.99; Sdhp 444 (˚ānaŋ vaŋsa). -> anariya (adj. & n.) not Ariyan, ignoble, undignified, low, common, uncultured A i.81; Sn 664 (= asappurisa SnA 479; DhsA 353); J ii.281 (= dussīla pāpadhamma C.); v.48 (˚rūpa shameless), 87; DhA iv.3. -- See also ñāṇa, magga, sacca, sāvaka.

-- âvakāsa appearing noble J v.87. -- uposatha the ideal feast day (as one of 3) A i.205 sq., 212. -- kanta loved by the Best D iii.227. -- gaṇā (pl.) troops of worthies J vi.50 ( = brāhmaṇa -- gaṇā, te kira tāda ariyâcārā ahesuŋ, tena te evam āha C.). -- garahin casting blame on the righteous Sn 660. -- citta a noble heart. -- traja a true descendant of the Noble ones Dpvs v.92. -- dasa having the ideal (or best) belief It 93 = 94. -- dhana sublime treasure; always as sattavidha˚ sevenfold, viz. saddhā˚, sīla˚, hiri˚, ottappa˚, suta˚, cāga˚, paññā˚ "faith, a moral life, modesty, fear of evil, learning, self -- denial, wisdom" ThA 240; VvA 113; DA ii.34. -- dhamma the national customs of the Aryans (= ariyānaŋ eso dhammo Nd1 71, 72) M i.1, 7, 135; A ii.69; v.145 sq., 241, 274; Sn 783; Dhs 1003. -- puggala an (ethically) model person, Ps i.167; Vin v.117; ThA 206. -- magga the Aryan Path. -- vaŋsa the (fourfold) noble family, i. e. of recluses content with the 4 requisites D iii.224 = A ii.27 = Ps i.84 = Nd2 141; cp. A iii.146. -- vattin leading a noble life, of good conduct J iii.443. -- vatā at Th 1, 334 should be read ˚vattā (nom. sg. of vattar, vac) "speaking noble words": -- vāsa the most excellent state of mind, habitual disposition, constant practice. Ten such at D iii.269, 291 = A v.29 (Passage recommended to all Buddhists by Asoka in the Bhabra Edict). -- vihāra the best practice S v.326. -- vohāra noble or honorable practice. There are four, abstinence from lying, from slander, from harsh language, from frivolous talk. They are otherwise known as the 4 vacī -- kammantā & represent sīla nos. 4 -- 7. See D iii.232; A ii.246; Vin v.125. -- sangha the communion of the Nobles ones PvA 1. -- sacca, a standard truth, an established fact, D i.189, ii.90, 304 sq.; iii 277; M i.62, 184; iii.248; S v.415 sq. = Vin i.10, 230. It 17; Sn 229, 230, 267; Dh 190; DhA iii.246; KhA 81, 151, 185, 187; ThA 178, 282, 291; VvA 73. -- sāvaka a disciple of the noble ones (= ariyānaŋ santike sutattā a. SnA 166). M i.8, 46, 91, 181, 323; ii.262; iii.134, 228, 272; It 75; Sn 90; Miln 339; DhA i.5, (opp. putthujjana). -- sīlin of unblemished conduct, practising virtue D i.115 (= sīlaŋ ariyaŋ uttamaŋ parisuddhaŋ DA i.286); M ii.167.

When the commentators, many centuries afterwards, began to write Pali in S. India & Ceylon, far from the ancient seat of the Aryan clans, the racial sense of the word ariya was scarcely, if at all, present to their minds. Dhammapāla especially was probably a non -- Aryan, and certainly lived in a Dravidian environment. The then current similar popular etmologies of ariya and arahant (cp. next article) also assisted the confusion in their minds. They sometimes therefore erroneously identify the two words and explain Aryans as meaning Arahants (DhA i.230; SnA 537; PvA 60). In other ways also they misrepresented the old texts by ignoring the racial force of the word. Thus at J v.48 the text, speaking of a hunter belonging to one of the aboriginal tribes, calls him anariya -- rūpa. The C. explains this as "shameless", but what the text has, is simply that he looked like a non -- Aryan. (cp ʻ frank ʼ in English). -- 78 -- Arīhatatta
Arīhatatta
in phrase "arīhatta ariyo hoti" at A iv.145 is wrong reading for arīnaŋ hatattā. The whole phrase is inserted by mistake from a gloss explaining arahā in the foll. sentence "ārakattā kilesānaŋ arīnaŋ hatattā . . . arahā hoti", and is to be deleted (omitted also by SS). Aru
Aru
(nt.) [Vedic aruḥ, unknown etym.] a wound, a sore, only in cpds.: ˚kāya a heap of sores M ii.64 = Dh 147 = Th 1, 769 (= navannaŋ vaṇamukhānaŋ vasena arubhūta kāya DhA iii.109 = VvA 77); ˚gatta (adj.) with wounds in the body M i.506 (+ pakka -- gatta); Miln 357 (id); ˚pakka decaying with sores S iv.198 (˚āni gattāni); ˚bhūta consisting of wounds, a mass of wounds VvA 77 = DhA iii.109. Aruka
Aruka
= aru; only in cpd. ˚ûpamacitto (adj.) having a heart like a sore (of a man in anger) A i.124 = Pug 30 (expld at Pug A 212 as purāṇa -- vaṇa -- sadisa -- citto "an old wound" i. e. continually breaking open). Aruṇa
Aruṇa
[Vedic aruṇa (adj.) of the colour of fire, i. e. ruddy, nt. the dawn; of Idg. *ereu as in Sk. aruṣa reddish, Av. auruša white, also Sk ravi sun; an enlarged from of Idg. *reu as in Sk. rudhira, rohita red (bloody; see etym. under rohita), Gr. e)rudro/s, Lat. ruber.] the sun Vin ii.68; iv.245; J ii.154; v.403; vi.330; Dpvs i.56; DA i.30. -> a. uggacchati the sun rises J i.108; VvA 75, & see cpds.

-- ugga sunrise Vin iv.272; S v.29, 78, 101, 442 (at all Saŋyutta pass. the v.l. SS is aruṇagga); Vism 49. -- uggamana sunrise (opp. oggamanna). Vin iii.196, 204, 264; iv.86, 166, 230, 244; DhA i.165; ii.6; PvA 109. -- utu the occasion of the sun ( -- rise) DhA i.165. -- vaṇṇa of the colour of the sun, reddish, yellowish, golden Vism 123; DhA i 1.3 = PvA 216. -- sadisa (vaṇṇa) like the sun (in colour) PvA 211 (gloss for suriyavaṇṇa). Arubheda
Arubheda
the Rigveda ThA 206. Arūpa
Arūpa
(adj.) [a + rūpa] without form or body, incorporeal, D i.195 sq.; iii.240; Sn 755; It 62; Sdhp 228, 463, 480. See details under rūpa.

-- âvacara the realm or world of Formlessness, Dhs 1281 -- 1285; Ps i.83 sq., 101. -- kāyika belonging to the group of formless beings Miln 317 (devā). -- ṭhāyin standing in or being founded on the Formless It 62. -- taṇhā "thirst" for the Formless D iii.216. -- dhātu the element or sphere of the Incoporeal (as one of the 3 dhātus rūpa˚, arūpa˚, nirodha˚; see dhātu) D iii.215, 275; It 45. -- bhava formless existence D iii.216. -- loka the world of the Formless, Sdhp 494. -- saññin not having the idea of form D ii.110; iii.260; Exp. i.252. Arūpin
Arūpin
(adj.) [a + rūpin] = arūpa; D i.31 (arūpī attā hoti: see DA i.119), 195; iii.111, 139; It 87 (rūpino va arūpino va sattā). Are
Are
(indecl.) [onomat. Cp. Sk. lalallā, Gr. lale/w, Lat. lallo = E. lull, Ger. lallen & without redupl. Ags. holā, Ger. halloh, E. lo. An abbrev. form of are is re. Cf. also alālā] exclam. of astonishment & excitement: he! hallo! I say!, implying an imprecation: Away with you (with voc.) J i.225 (dāsiputta -- ceṭaka); iv.391 (duṭṭha -- caṇḍāla); DA i.265 (= re); VvA 68 (dubbinī), 217 ("how in the world"). Ala
Ala1
freq. spelling for aḷa. Ala
Ala2
(adj.) [alaŋ adv. as adj.] enough, only in neg. anala insufficient, impossible M i.455; J ii.326 = iv.471. Alaŋ
Alaŋ
(indecl.) [Vedic araŋ. In meaning 1. alaŋ is the ex- panded continuation of Vedic araŋ, an adv. acc. of ara (adj.) suitable; fitly, aptly rightly fr. ṛ Cp. aṇṇava, appeti, ara. In meaning 2. alaŋ is the same as are] emphatic particle 1. in affirmative sentences: part. of assurance & emphasis = for sure, very much (so), indeed, truly. Note. In connection with a dat. or an infin. the latter only apparently depend upon alaŋ, in reality they belong to the syntax of the whole sentence (as dat. or inf. absolute). It is customary however (since the practice of the Pāli grammarians) to regard them as interdependent and interpret the construction as "fit for, proper" (= yuttaŋ Pāli Com.), which meaning easily arises out of the connotation of alaŋ, e.g. alam eva kātuŋ to be sure, this is to be done = this is proper to be done. In this sense (c. dat.) it may also be compd. with Vedic araŋ c. dat. -- (a) (abs.) only in combn. with dat. or inf. (see c. & Note above). -- (b.) (˚ -- ) see cpds. -- (c.) with dat. or infin.: alaŋ antarāyāya for certain an obstacle M i.130 (opp. nâlaŋ not at all); alaŋ te vippaṭisārāya you ought to feel sorry for it Vin ii.250; alaŋ vacanāya one says rightly S ii.18; alaŋ hitāya untold happiness DhA ii.41. -- ito ce pi so bhavaŋ Gotamo yojana sate viharati alam eva . . . . . upasankamituŋ even if he were 100 miles from here, (surely) even so (i. e. it is fit or proper even then) one must go to him D i.117 (expld. at DA i.288 by yuttam eva = it is proper); alam eva kātuŋ kalyāṇaŋ indeed one must do good = it is appropriate to do good Pv ii.923 (= yuttaŋ PvA 122); alaŋ puññāni kātave "come, let us do meritorious works" Vv 4415 (= yuttaŋ VvA 191). -> 2. in negative or prohibitive sentences: part. of disapprobation reproach & warning; enough! have done with! fie! stop! alas! (etc. see are). -- (a) (abs.) enough: nâlaŋ thutuŋ it is not enough to praise Sn 217; te pi na honti me alaŋ they are not enough for me Pv i.63. -- (b) with voc.: alaŋ Devadatta mā te rucci sanghabhedo "look out D. or take care D. that you do not split up the community" Vin ii.198; alaŋ Vakkali kin te iminā pūtikāyena diṭṭhena . . . S iii.120. -- (c) enough of (with instr.): alaŋ ettakena enough of this, so much of that Miln 18; alam me Buddhena enough for me of the Buddha = I am tired of the B. DhA ii.34.

-- attha (adj.) "quite the thing", truly good, very profitable, useful D ii.231; M ii.69 (so read for alamatta); A ii.180; Th 1, 252; J i.401 (so read for ˚atta). -- ariya truly genuine, right noble, honourable indeed, only in ˚ñāṇa -- dassana [cp. BSk. alamārya -- jñāna -- darśana Lal v.309, 509] Vin i.9; A iii.64, 430; v.88; J i.389 (cp. ariya). -- kammaniya (quite or thoroughly) suitable Vin iii.187. -- pateyya: see the latter. -- vacanīyā (f.) a woman who has to be addressed with "alaŋ" (i. e. "fie"), which means that she ceases to be the wife of a man & returus into her parental home Vin iii.144, cp. 274 (Bdhgh's. expln.). -- samakkhātar one who makes sufficiently clear It 107. -- sājīva one who is thoroughly fit to associate with his fellow A iii.81. -- sāṭaka "curse -- coat", one who curses his waist -- coat (alaŋ sāṭaka!) because of his having eaten too much it will not fit; an over -- eater; one of the 5 kinds of gluttons or improper eaters as enumd. at DhA iv.16 = DhsA 404. -- 79 -- Alakkhika
Alakkhika
(& īka) (adj.) [a + lakkhika] unfortunate un- happy, of bad luck Vin iii.23; J iii.259. Alakkhī
Alakkhī
(f.) [a + lakkhi] bad luck, misfortune Th 1, 1123. Alagadda
Alagadda
[Der. unknown. In late Sk. alagarda is a water- snake] a kind of snake M i.133 = DA i.21; DhA iv. 132 (˚camma, so read for T. alla -- camma, vv. ll. alanda˚ & alandu˚). Alagga
Alagga
(adj.) [pp. of laggati] not stuck or attached Nd2 107 (also alaggita); alaggamāna (ppr.) id. DhA iii.298. Alaggana
Alaggana
(nt.) [a + laggana] not hanging on anything, not being suspended DA i.180. Alaŋkata
Alaŋkata
[pp. of alankaroti] 1. "made too much", made much of, done up, adorned, fitted out Dh 142 ( = vatthâbharaṇa -- paṭimaṇḍita DhA iii.83); Pv ii.36; Vv 11; J iii.392; iv.60. -- 2. "done enough" (see alaŋ, use with instr.), only neg. analankata in meaning "insatiate" S i.15 (kāmesu). Alaŋkaraṇa
Alaŋkaraṇa
(nt.) [alaŋ + karaṇa, fr. alankaroti] doing up, fitting out, ornamentation J i.60. Alaŋkaraṇaka
Alaŋkaraṇaka
(adj.) [fr. alankaraṇa] adorning, embellishing, decorating DhA i.410. Alaŋkaroti
Alaŋkaroti
[alaŋ + karoti, Vedic araṅkaroti] to make much of i. e. to adorn, embellish, decorate J i.60; iii.189; vi. 368. ger. ˚karitvā DhA i.410; PvA 74. -- pp. alankata. -- Caus. alankārāpeti to cause to be adorned J i.52. Alaŋkāra
Alaŋkāra
[fr. alankaroti, cp. Vedic araṅkṛti] "getting up" i. e. fitting out, ornament, decoration; esp. trinkets, ornaments D iii.190; A iii.239; 263 sq.; J vi.368; PvA 23, 46, 70 ( -- ˚ adj. adorned with), 74; Sdhp 249. Alattaka
Alattaka
[Sk. alaktaka] lac, a red animal dye J iv.114 (˚pāṭala); DhA ii.174; iv.197. Alanda & Alandu
Alanda
& Alandu see alagadda. Alamba
Alamba
(adj.) [a + lamba] not hanging down, not drooping, short J v.302; vi.3 (˚tthaniyo not flabby: of a woman's breasts cp. alambɔ ordhva -- stanī Suśruta i.371). Alasa
Alasa
(adj.) [a + lasa] idle, lazy, slack, slothful, languid S i.44, 217; Sn 96 ( = jāti -- alaso SnA 170); J iv.30; Dh 280 (= mahā -- alaso DhA iii.410). Opp. analasa vigorous, energetic S i.44; D iii.190 (dakkha +); Vin iv.211; Nd2 141 (id.). Alasatā
Alasatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. alasa] sloth, laziness; only in neg. analasatā zeal, industry VvA 229. Alassa
Alassa
(nt.) at S i.43 is spurious spelling for ālassa idleness, sloth; v. l. BB ālasya. Alāta
Alāta
(nt.) [Sk. alāta, related to Lat. altāre altar, adoleo to burn] a firebrand A ii.95 (chava˚ a burning corpse, see chava); J i.68; Pug 36; DhA iii.442. Alāpu
Alāpu
(nt.) [ = alābu, with p for b: so Trenckner Notes 6216] a gourd, pumpkin Dh 149 (= DhA iii.112; vv. ll. alābu & alābbu). Alābu
Alābu
[Sk. alābū f.] a long white gourd, Cucurbita Lage- naris M i.80 (tittaka˚), 315 (id.); PvA 47 (id.); DhsA 405. -- See also alāpu. Alābhaka
Alābhaka
[a + labhaka] not getting, loss, detriment Vin iii.77. Alālā
Alālā
(indecl.) [a + lālā interjection fr. sound root *lal, see etym. under are] "not saying lā lā" i. e. not babbling, not dumb, in ˚mukha not (deaf &) dumb SnA 124 ( = aneḷamūga of Sn 70). Alika
Alika
(adj.) [Sk. alīka] contrary, false, untrue S i.189; J iii.198; vi.361; Miln 26, 99. -- nt. ˚ŋ a lie, falsehood Dh 264.

-- vādin one who tells a lie, a liar Dh 223 = VvA 69 (has alīka˚); J ii.4; SnA 478 (for abhūta -- vādin Sn 661). Alīnatā
Alīnatā
(f.) [abstr. of alīna] open mindedness, prudence, sincerity J i.366. Aluḷita
Aluḷita
(adj.) [a + luḷita, pp. of lul] umoved, undisturbed Miln 383. Aloṇika
Aloṇika
(adj.) [a + loṇika] not salted J iii.409; VvA 184. Aloma
Aloma
(adj.) [a + loma] not hairy (upon the body) J vi.457. Alola
Alola
(adj.) [a + lola] undisturbed, not distracted (by desires), not wavering: of firm resolution, concentrated Sn 65 ( = nillolupa Nd2 98; = rasavisesesu anākula SnA 118). Alla
Alla
(adj.) (only ˚ -- ) [Vedic ārdra, to Gr. a)/rdw moisten, a)/rda dirt] -- 1. moist, wet M iii.94 (˚mattikā -- puñja a heap of moist clay; may be taken in meaning 2). -- 2. fresh (opp. stale), new; freshly plucked, gathered or caught, viz.˚âvalepana see adda3; ˚kusamuṭṭhi freshly plucked grass A v.234 = 249; ˚gomaya fresh dung A v.234; DhA i.377; ˚camma living skin Vism 195; ˚tiṇa fresh grass DA i.77; PvA 40; ˚dārūni green sticks J i.318; ˚madhu fresh honey DhA ii.197; ˚maŋsa -- sarīra a body of living flesh DhA ii.51 = iv.166; ˚rasa fresh -- tasting DhA ii.155; ˚rohita -- maccha fresh fish J iii.333. -> 3. wet = with connotation of clean (through being washed), freshly washed, ˚kesa with clean hair PvA 82 (sīsaŋ nahātvā allakesa); usually combd. with allavattha with clean clothes (in an ablution; often as a sign of mourning) Ud 14, 91; DhA iv.220; or with odāta vattha (id.) J iii.425. ˚pāṇi with clean hand Pv ii.99 (= dhotapāṇi PvA 116). [For analla -- gatta at S i.183 better read, with ibid 169, an -- allīna -- gatta. For allacamma at DhA iv.132 alagadda -- camma, with the v.l., is preferable]. Allāpa
Allāpa
[Sk. ālāpa; ā + lāpa] conversation, talk; only in cpd. ˚sallāpa conversation (lit. talking to & fro or together) J i.189; Miln 15; VvA 96; PvA 86. -- 80 -- Allika
Allika
(?) [either from alla = allikaŋ nt. in meaning defi- lement, getting soiled by ( -- ˚), or from allīyati = alliyakaŋ, a der. fr. ger. alliya clinging to, sticking to. The whole word is doubtful.] only in cpd. (kāma -- ) sukhɔ allikɔânuyoga given to the attachment to sensual joys Vin i.10; D iii.113, 130; S iv.330; v.421; Nett 110. Allīna
Allīna
[pp. of allīyati; Sk. ālīna] (a) sticking to, adhering or adhered to, clinging M i.80; A v.187; Nd2 under nissita (in form asita allīna upagata). -- (b.) soiled by ( -- ˚), dirtied A ii.201. -- anallīna "to which nothing sticks", i. e. pure, undefiled, clean S i.169 (id. p. on p. 183 reads analla: see alla). Cp. ālaya. Allīyati
Allīyati
[ā + līyati, lī, līyate, layate] to cling to, stick to, adhere to (in both senses, good or bad); to covet. -- (a) lit. kesā sīsaŋ allīyiŋsu the hair stuck to the head J i.64; khaggo lomesu allīyi the sword stuck in the hair J i.273. -- (b) fig. to covet, desire etc.: in idiomatic phrase allīyati (S iii.190 v. l.; T. ālayati) kelāyati vanāyati (S iii.190 v.l.; T. manāyati; M i.260 T. dhanāyati, but v.l. p. 552 vanāyati) mamāyati "to caress dearly & be extremely jealous of" (c. acc.) at M i.260 & S iii.190. -> J iv.5; v.154 (allīyituŋ, v.l. illīyituŋ); DhsA 364 (vanati bhajati a); pp. allīna -- Caus. alliyāpeti [cp. Sk. ālāpayati, but B.Sk. allīpeti M Vastu iii.144; pp. allīpita ibid. i.311; iii.408; pass. allīpīyate iii.127.] to make stick, to to bring near to (c. acc. or loc.) J ii.325 (hatthiŋ mahābhittiyan alliyāpetvā); iv.392 (sīsena sīsaŋ alliyāpetvā). Aḷa
Aḷa
[etym. unknown] 1. the claw of a crab M i.234; S i.123; J i.223, 505 (˚chinno kakkaṭako; T. spells ala˚); ii.342; iii.295; -- 2. the nails (of finger or toe) (?) in ˚chinna one whose nails are cut off Vin i.91. Aḷāra
Aḷāra
(adj.) [Is it the same as uḷāra?] only used with ref. to the eyelashes, & usually expld. by visāla, i.e. extended, wide, but also by bahala, i.e. thick. The meaning & etym. is as yet uncertain. Kern, (Toev. s.v.) transls. by "bent, crooked, arched". ˚akkhin with wide eyes (eyelashes?) J i.306 ( = visāla -- netta C.); ˚pamha with thick eye -- lashes Vv 357 (= bahala -- saŋyata -- pakhuma C.; v.l. ˚pamukha); ˚bhamuka having thick eyebrows or ˚lashes J vi.503 (so read for ˚pamukha; C. expls by visāl -- akkhigaṇḍa). Cp. āḷāra. Aḷhaka
Aḷhaka
in udakɔ aḷhaka VvA 155 read āḷhaka. Ava˚
Ava˚
(prefix) I. Relation between ava & o. Phonetically the difference between ava & o is this, that ava is the older form, whereas o represents a later development. Historically the case is often reversed -- that is, the form in o was in use first & the form in ava was built up, sometimes quite independently, long afterwards. Okaḍḍhati, okappati, okappanā, okassati, okāra, okantati, okkamati, ogacchati, odāta and others may be used as examples. The difference in many cases has given rise to a differentiation of meaning, like E. ripe: rife, quash: squash; Ger. Knabe: Knappe etc. (see below B 2). -- A. The old Pāli form of the prefix is o. In same cases however a Vedic form in ava has been preserved by virtue of its archaic character. In words forming the 2nd part of a cpd. we have ava, while the absolute form of the same word has o. See e.g. avakāsa ( -- ˚) > okāsa (˚ -- ); avacara > ocaraka; avatata; avadāta; avabhāsa; avasāna. -- B. 1. the proportion in the words before us (early and later) is that o alone is found in 65% of all cases, ava alone in 24%, and ava as well as o in 11%. The proportion of forms in ava increases as the books or passages become later. Restricted to the older literature (the 4 Nikāyas) are the foll. forms with o: okiri, okkanti, okkamati, okkhipati, ogacchati, ossajati. -- (1) The Pāli form (o˚) shows a differentiation in meaning against the later Sanskrit forms (ava˚). See the foll.:

avakappanā harnessing: okappanā confidence;

avakkanti (not Sk.): okkanti appearance;

avakkhitta thrown down: okkhitta subdued;

avacara sphere of motion: ocaraka spy;

avatiṇṇa descended: otiṇṇa affected with love;

avaharati to move down, put off: oharati to steal. (2) In certain secondary verb -- formations, arisen on Pāli grounds, the form o˚ is used almost exclusively pointing thus to a clearly marked dialectical development of Pali. Among these formations are Deminutives in ˚ka usually; the Gerund & the Infinitive usually; the Causatives throughout.

II. Ava as prefix. [P. ava = Vedic ava & occasionally o; Av. ava; Lat. au -- (aufero = avabharati, aufugio etc.); Obg. u -- ; Oir. ō, ua. See further relations in Walde, Lat. Wtb. under au]. -- Meaning. (Rest:) lower, low (opp. ut˚, see e. g. uccâvaca high & low, and below iii. c), expld. as heṭṭhā (DhA iv.54 under avaŋ) or adho (ibid. 153; SnA 290). -- (Motion:) down, downward, away (down), off; e. g. avasūra sun -- down; adv. avaŋ (q. v., opp. uddhaŋ). -- (a) lit. away from, off: ava -- kantati to cut off; ˚gaṇa away from the crowd; ˚chindati cut off; ˚yīyati fall off; ˚bhāsati shine out, effulge; ˚muñcati take off; ˚siṭṭha left over. -- down, out, over: ˚kirati pour down or out over; ˚khitta thrown down; ˚gacchati go down; ˚gāheti dip down; ˚tarati descend; ˚patita fallen down; ˚sajjati emit; ˚siñcati pour out over; ˚sīdati sink down. -- (b) fig. down in connection with verbs of emotion (cp. Lat. de -- in despico to despise, lit. look down on), see ava -- jānāti, ˚bhūta, ˚mānita, ˚vajja, ˚hasati. away from, i. e. the opposite of, as equivalent to a negation and often taking the place of the neg. prefix a˚ (an˚), e. g. in avajaya (= ajaya), ˚jāta, ˚mangala (= a˚), ˚pakkhin, ˚patta.

Affinities of ava. -- (a) apa. There exists an exceedingly frequent interchange of forms with apa˚ and ava˚, the historical relation of which has not yet been thoroughly investigated. For a comparison of the two the BSk. forms are indispensable, and often afford a clue as to the nature of the word in question. See on this apa 2 and cp. the foll. words under ava: avakata, ˚karoti, ˚khalita, ˚anga, ottappa, avattha, ˚nīta, ˚dāna, ˚pivati, ˚rundhati, ˚lekhati, ˚vadati, ˚varaka, ˚sakkati, avassaya, avasseti, ˚hita, avāpurīyati, avekkhati. -- (b) abhi. The similarity between abhi & ava is seen from a comparison of meaning abhi ii. b and ava ii. a. The two prefixes are practically synonymous in the foll. words: ˚kankhati, ˚kamati, ˚kiṇṇa, ˚khipati, ˚maddati, ˚rata, ˚lambati, ˚lekheti, ˚lepana, ˚siñcati. -- (c) The contrary of ava is ut (cp. above ii.2). Among the freq. contrast -- pairs showing the two, like E. up & down, are the foll. ukkaŋsâvakaŋsa, uggaman -- oggamana, uccâvaca, ullangheti -- olangheti, ullittâvalitta; ogilituŋuggilituŋ, onaman -- unnamana. Two other combns. founded on the same principle (of intensifying contrast) are chiddâvacchidda and ava˚ in contrast with vi˚ in olambavilamba, olugga -- vilugga. Avaŋ
Avaŋ
(adv.) [Vedic avāk & avāŋ] the prep. ava in adv. use, down, downward; in C. often expld. by adho. Rarely absolute, the only passage found so far being Sn 685 (avaŋ sari he went down, v. l. avasari, expld. by otari SnA 486). Opp. uddhaŋ (above, up high). Freq. in cpd. avaŋsira (adj.) head downward (+ uddhaŋpāda feet up), a position characteristic of beings in Niraya (Purgatory), e. g. S i.48; Sn 248 (patanti sattā nirayaŋ avaŋsirā = adhogata -- sīsā SnA 290); Vv 5225 (of Revatī, + uddhaŋpāda); Pv iv.146; J i.233 (+ uddhapāda); iv.103 (nirayaŋ vajanti yathā adhammo patito avaŋsiro); Nd1 404 (uddhaŋpāda +); DhA iv.153 (gloss adhosira). -- On avaŋ˚ cp. further avakkāra, avākaroti, avekkhipati. Avakaŋsa
Avakaŋsa
[fr. ava -- karṣati; on ŋs: *rṣ cp. haŋsati: harṣati] dragging down, detraction, abasement, in cpd. ukkaŋsâvak˚ lifting up & pulling down, raising and lowering, rise & fall D i.54. Avakankhati
Avakankhati
( -- ˚) [ava + kankhati; cp. Sk. anu -- kānkṣati] to wish for, strive after S iv.57 (n'); J iv.371 (n'); V 340 (n'), 348 (n' = na pattheti C). -- 81 -- Avakaḍḍhati
Avakaḍḍhati
[ava + kaḍḍhati, cp. avakassati & apakassati] Nett 4 (avakaḍḍhayitvā). Pass. avakaḍḍhati J iv.415 (hadayaŋ me a. my hcart is weighed down = sokena avakaḍḍhīyati C; v.l. avakassati). -- pp. avakaḍḍhita. Avakaḍḍhita
Avakaḍḍhita
[pp. of avakaḍḍhati] pulled down, dragged away DhA iii.195. Avakata
Avakata
= apakata, v.l. at It 89. Avakanta
Avakanta
[for *avakatta, Sk. avakṛtta; pp. of avakantati, see kanta2] cut, cut open, cut off J iv.251 (galakɔ âvakantaŋ). Avakantati & okantati
Avakantati
& okantati (okk˚) [cp. Sk. avakṛntati, ava + kantati, cp. also apakantati] to cut off, cut out, cut away, carve -- (ava:) J iv.155. -- pp. avakanta & avakantita. Avakantita
Avakantita
[pp. of avakantati] cut out PvA 213. Avakappanā & okappanā
Avakappanā
& okappanā (f.) [ava + kappanā] prepara- tion, fixing up, esp. harnessing J vi.408. Avakaroti
Avakaroti
[Sk. apakaroti, cp. P. apa˚] "to put down", to despise, throw away; only in der, avakāra & avakārin. -> pp. avakata (q. v.). -- See also avākaroti & cp. avakirati 2. Avakassati & okassati
Avakassati
& okassati [cp. Sk. avakarṣati, ava + kṛṣ; see also apakassati & avakaḍḍhati] to drag down, to draw or pull away, distract, remove. -- A v.74 = Vin ii.204 (+ vavakassati). Avakārakaŋ
Avakārakaŋ
(adv.) [fr. avakāra] throwing away, scattering about Vin ii.214. Avakārin
Avakārin
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. avakāra] despising, degrading, neglecting Vbh 393 sq. (an˚). Avakāsa & okāsa
Avakāsa
& okāsa [ava + kāś to shine, cp. Sk. avakāśa] 1. "appearance": akkhuddâvakāso dassanāya not little (or inferior) to behold (of appearance) D i.114; ariyāvakāsa appearing noble or having the app. of an Aryan J v.87; katâvakāsa put into appearance Vv 229. -- 2. "opportunity": kata˚ given leave D i.276 Sn 1030; anavakāsakārin not giving occasion Miln 383. -- anavakāsa not having a chance or opportunity (to happen), impossible; always in ster. phrase aṭṭhānaŋ etaŋ anavakāso Vin ii.199; A i.26; v.169; Pug 11, 12; PvA 28. Avakirati & okirati
Avakirati
& okirati [ava + kirati] 1. to pour down on, to pour out over; aor. avakiri PvA 86; ger. ˚kiritvā J v.144. -- 2. to cast out, reject, throw out; aor. avākiri Vv 305 = 485 (v.l. ˚kari; VvA 126 expls by chaḍḍesi vināsesi). -- Pass. avakirīyati Pv iii.110 (= chaḍḍīyati PvA 174); grd. ˚kiriya (see sep.). See also apakiritūna. pp. okiṇṇa. Avakiriya
Avakiriya
[grd of avakirati] to be cast out or thrown away; rejectable, low, contemptible J v.143 (taken by C. as ger. = avakiritvā). Avakujja
Avakujja
(adj.) [ava + kujja, cp. B.Sk. avakubja M Vastu i.29, avakubjaka ibid. 213; ii.412] face downward, head first, prone, bent over (opp. ukkujja & uttāna) J i.13 = Bu ii.52; J v.295; vi.40; Pv iv.108; PvA 178.

-- pañña (adj.) one whose reason is turned upside down (like an upturned pot, i.e. empty) A i.130; Pug 31 ( = adhomukha -- pañña Pug A 214). Avakkanta
Avakkanta
( -- ˚) [pp. ofnext] entered by, beset with, over- whelmed by (instr.) S iii.69 (dukkha˚, sukha˚ and an˚). Avakkanti
Avakkanti
(f.) [fr. avakkamati] entry, appearance, coming down into, opportunity for rebirth S ii.66 (nāmarūpassa); iii.46 (pañcannaŋ indriyānaŋ); Pug 13 ( = okkanti nibbatti pātubhāvo PugA 184); Kvu 142 (nāmarūpassa); Miln 123 (gabbhassa). Avakkama
Avakkama
[fr. avakkamati] entering, appearance J v.330 (gabbhassa). Avakkamati & okkamati
Avakkamati
& okkamati [ava + kamati fr. kram] to ap- proach. to enter, go into or near to, to fall into, appear in, only in ger. (poetically) avakamma J iii.480 (v.l. apa˚). Avakkāra
Avakkāra
[Sk. avaskara faeces, fr. avaŋ + karoti] throwing away, refuse, sweepings; only in cpd. ˚pātī a bowl for refuse, slop basin, ash -- bin Vin i.157, 352; ii.216; M i.207; DhA i.305. Avakkhalita
Avakkhalita
[pp. of avakkhaleti, Caus. of kṣal] washed off, taken away from, detracted DA i.66 (v.l. apa˚). Avakkhitta & okkhitta
Avakkhitta
& okkhitta [pp. of avakkhipati] 1. [ = Sk. avakṣipta] thrown down, flung down, cast down, dropped; thrown out, rejected. (ava:) M i.296 (ujjhita +); DA i.281 (an˚), 289 (pinḍa); PvA 174 (piṇḍa). 2. [= Sk. utkṣipta?] thrown off, gained, produced, got (cp. uppādita), in phrase sedɔ âvakkhitta gained by sweat A ii.67; iii.45. Avakkhipati & okkhipati
Avakkhipati
& okkhipati [ava + khipati; cp. Sk. ava- kṣipati] to throw down or out, cast down, drop; fig. usually appld to the eyes = to cast down, hence transferred to the other senses and used in meaning of "to keep under, to restrain, to have control over" (cp. also avakkhāyati), aor. ˚khipi DA i.268 (bhusaŋ, v. l. avakkhasi). Avakkhipana
Avakkhipana
(nt.) [fr. avakkhipati] throwing down, putting down J i.163. Avagacchati
Avagacchati
[ava + gacchati] to come to, approach, visit (cp. Vedic avagacchati) PvA 87. Avagaṇḍa (kāraka)
Avagaṇḍa
( -- kāraka) (adj.) [ava + gaṇḍa˚] "making a swelling", i. e. puffing out the cheeks, stuffing the cheeks, full (when eating); only nt. ˚ŋ as adv. after the manner or in the way of stuffing etc. Vin ii.214; iv.196. Avagata
Avagata
[pp. of avagacchati] at PvA 222 is uncertain reading; the meaning is "known, understood" (aññāta Pv iv.111); perhaps we should read āvikata or adhigata (so v.l. BB). Avagāhati & ogāhati
Avagāhati
& ogāhati [ava + gāhati] to plunge or enter into, to be absorbed in (acc. & loc.) Vism 678 (vipassanāvīthiŋ); Sdhp 370, 383. Avaguṇṭhana
Avaguṇṭhana
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. oguṇṭheti] covering Sdhp 314. Avaggaha
Avaggaha
[Sk. avagraha] hindrance, impediment, used at DA i.95 as syn. for drought (dubuṭṭhikā). Avanga
Avanga
see apanga. Avaca
Avaca
(adj.) [der. fr. ava after the analogy of ucca > ut] low, only in combn. uccâvacā (pl.) high and low, see ucca. KvuA 38. Avacana
Avacana
(nt.) [a + vacana] "non -- word", i. e. the wrong word or expression J i.410. Avacara
Avacara
( -- ˚) (n. -- adj.) [ava + car, also BSk. avacara in same sense, e.g. antaḥpurâvacarā the inmates of the harem Jtm 210] (a) (adj.) living in or with, moving in D i.206 (santika˚ one who stays near, a companion); fig. dealing or familiar with, at home in A ii.189 (atakka˚); iv.314 (parisā˚); J i.60 (tāḷa˚ one conversant with music, a musician, see tāḷa1); ii.95 (sangāma˚); Miln 44 (id. and yoga˚). -- (b) (n.) sphere (of moving or activity), realm, plane (of temporal existence); only as t.t in kāmâvacara rupâvacara arūpâvacara or the 3 realms of sense -- desires, form and non -- form: kāma˚ D i.34 (˚deva); Dhs 431 (as adj.); rūpa˚ Pug 37; arūpa˚ Pug 38; Ps i.83, 84, 101; Dhs A 387; PvA 138, 163; to be omitted in Dhs 1268, 1278. Avacaraka & ocaraka
Avacaraka
& ocaraka (adj. -- n.) [fr. avacara] 1. only in cpd. kāmâvacarika as adj. to kāmâvacara, belonging to the sphere of sense experiences, Sdhp. 254. -- 2. Late form of ocaraka, spy, only in C. on Th 1, 315 ff. quoted in Brethren 189, n 3. Occurs in BSk (Divy 127). -- 82 -- Avacaraṇa
Avacaraṇa
(nt.) [fr. avacarati 1] being familiar with, dealing with, occupation J ii.95. Avacuttha
Avacuttha
2nd pret. of vac, in prohib form mā evaŋ ava- cuttha do not speak thus J vi.72; DhA iv.228. Avacchidda
Avacchidda
( -- ˚) (adj.) [ava + chidda] perforated, only in redupl. (intensive) cpd. chiddâvacchidda perforated all over, nothing but holes J iii.491; DhA i.122. 284, 319. Cp. chidda -- vicchidda. Avacchedaka
Avacchedaka
( -- ˚) (adj) [ava + cheda + ka] cutting off, as nt. ˚ŋ adv. in phrase kabaḷâvacchedakaŋ after the manner of cutting off mouthfuls (of food) Vin ii.214; iv.196; cp. āsāvacchedika whose hope or longing has been cut off or destroyed Vin i. 259. Avajaya
Avajaya
[ava + jaya, cp. apajita] defeat DhA ii.228 (v.l. for T. ajaya). Avajāta
Avajāta
(adj.) [ava + jāta; cp. B.Sk. avajāta in meaning misborn, miscarriage] low -- born, of low or base birth, fig. of low character (opp. abhijāta) Sn 664 ( = buddhassa avajātaputta SnA 479); It 63; Miln 359. Avajānāti
Avajānāti
[ava + jñā] 1. to deny Vin ii.85; A iii.164 = Pug 65. -- 2. (later) to despise DhA iii.16; PvA 175 (grd. ˚jānitabba) -- Of short stem -- form ñā are found the foll: grd. avaññeyya PvA 175, and with o˚: grd. oñātabba PvA 195; pp. avañāta, besides avaññāta. Avajīyati
Avajīyati
[ava + jīyati; Sk. avajiryate] to be diminished, to be lost, be undone J i.313 (jitaŋ a; v.l. avajījy˚); Dh 179 (jitaŋ a = dujjitaŋ hoti DhA iii.197). Avajja
Avajja
(adj.) [Sk. avadya, seemigly a + vadya, but in reality a der. fr. ava. According to Childers = Sk. avarjya from vraj, thus meaning "not to be shunned, not forbidden". This interpretn is justified by context of Dh 318, 319. The P. commentator refers it to ava + vad (for *ava -- vadya) in sense of to blame, cp. apavadati] low, inferior, blamable, bad, deprecable Dh 318, 319; Dhs 1160. More fig. in neg. form anavajja blameless, faultless D i.70 (= anindita DA i.183); A ii.26 = It 102; Sn 47 (˚bhojin carrying on a blameless mode of livelihood, see Nd2 39), 263 (= anindita agarahita KhA 140): Ps ii.116, 170; Pug 30, 41, 58; Sdhp 436. Opp. sāvajja. Avajjatā
Avajjatā
(f.) [abstr. to prec.), only neg. an˚ blamelessness, faultlessness Pug 25, 41; Dhs 1349. Avajjha
Avajjha
(adj.) [grd of a + vadhati, Sk. vadhya, vadh] not to be killed or destroyed, inviolable Sn 288; J v.69; vi.132. Avañcana
Avañcana
(adj.) [a + vañcana from vañc] not (even) tot- tering, i.e. unfit for any motion (esp. walking), said of crippled feet J i.214 = Cp iii.910. Avañña
Avañña
(adj.) [to avaññā] despised, despicable Pv iii.113 ( = avaññeyya avajānitabba PvA 175). Avaññatti
Avaññatti
(f.) [ava + ñatti = Sk. *avajñapti, fr. ava + jñā] only as neg. an˚ the fact of not being despised, inferior or surpassed, egotism, pride, arrogance It 72; Vbh 350, 356; ˚kāma (adj.) wishing not to be surpassed, unvilling to be second, wanting to be praised A ii.240; iv.1 sq. Avaññā
Avaññā
(f.) [Sk. avajñā, fr. ava + jñā] contempt, disregard, disrespect J i.257 (˚ya). Avaññāta
Avaññāta
(adj.) [pp. of avajānāti] despised, treated with contempt PvA 135 (an˚); Sdhp 88, 90. Avaṭaŋsaka
Avaṭaŋsaka
( = vaṭ˚) see Vin Texts ii.347. Avaṭṭhāna
Avaṭṭhāna
(nt.) [Sk. avasthāna] position, standing place J i.508; PvA 286. Avaṭṭhita
Avaṭṭhita
(ad.) [Sk. avasthita, ava + thita] "standing down" = standing up, firm, fixed, settled, lasting Th 1, 1140. Usually neg. an˚ unsettled, unsteady; not lasting, changeable Dh 38 (˚citta; cp. DhA i.308 cittaŋ thāvaraŋ natthi); PvA 87 (= na sassata not lasting for ever). Avaṭṭhitatā
Avaṭṭhitatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] steadiness, only as neg. an˚ unsteadiness, fickleness ThA 259. Avaṭṭhiti
Avaṭṭhiti
(f.) [Sk. avasthiti] (firm) position, posture, stead- fastness S v.228; Dhs 11, 570. Avaḍḍhi
Avaḍḍhi
(f.) [a + vaḍḍhi] "non -- growth", decay DhA iii.335; C on A iii.76 (cp. apajaha). Avaṇṭa
Avaṇṭa
(adj.) [a + vaṇṭa] without a stalk J v.155. Avaṇṇa
Avaṇṇa
[a + vaṇṇa] blame, reproach, fault D i.1 ( = dosā nindā DA i.37); It 67; Pug 48, 59. Avaṇṇanīya
Avaṇṇanīya
(adj.) [grd. of a + vaṇṇeti] indescribable J v.282. Avataŋsa
Avataŋsa
see vataŋsaka. Avatata & otata
Avatata
& otata [ava + tata, pp. of tan] stretched over, covered, spread over with Vv 643 ( -- ˚); VvA 276 ( = chādita). Avatiṭṭhati
Avatiṭṭhati
[ava + tiṭṭhati] to abide, linger, stand still. D i.251 = S iv.322 = A v.299 (tatra˚); S i.25 (v.l. otiṭṭhati); Th. 1, 21; J ii.62; iv.208 (aor. avaṭṭhāsi). -> pp. avaṭṭhita (q. v.). Avatiṇṇa & otiṇṇa
Avatiṇṇa
& otiṇṇa [pp. of otarati] fallen into, affected with ( -- ˚), as ava˚ rare late or poetical form of o˚, e. g. J v.98 (issâ˚). See otiṇṇa. Avattha
Avattha1
[der. uncertain] aimless (of cārikā, a bhikkhu's wandering, going on tour) A iii.171 (C. avavatthika). Avattha
Avattha2
[Sk. apāsta, apa + āsta, pp. of as2] thrown away J v.302 ( = chaḍḍita C.). Avattharaṇa
Avattharaṇa
(nt.) [fr. avattharati] setting in array, deploying (of an army) J ii.104 (of a robber -- band), 336. Avattharati
Avattharati
[ava + tharati, stṛ] to strew, cover over or up J i.74 (˚amāna ppr.), 255 (˚itvā ger.); iv.84; Dāvs i.38. -- pp. otthaṭa Cp. pariy˚. Avatthāraṇa
Avatthāraṇa
(nt.) = avattharaṇa DA i.274. Avatthu (&˚ ka)
Avatthu
(&˚ ka) (adj.) [a + vatthu] groundless, unfounded (fig) Vin ii.241; J i.440 (˚kaŋ vacanaŋ). For lit meaning see vatthu. Avadāta
Avadāta
( = odāta) Dāvs iii.14 (metri causa). Avadāna
Avadāna
see apadāna. Avadāniya
Avadāniya
(adj.) [fr. avadāna cutting off; ava + dā2 to cut] stingy, niggardly Sn 774 ( = Nd1 36 which expls. as follows: avaŋ gacchanti ti pi avadāniyā; maccharino pi vuccanti avadāniyā; buddhānaŋ vacanaŋ nɔâdiyantī ti avadāniyā. Sn A 516 condenses this expln. into the foll.: avangamanatāya maccharitāya buddhâdīnaŋ vacanaŋ anādiyanatāya ca avadāniyā). Avadāpana
Avadāpana
(cleansing): see vodāpana. Avadāpeti
Avadāpeti
(to deal out) only BSk pary˚ Divy 202. Avadāyati
Avadāyati
[denom. fr. avadā in same meaning as anuddā, to dā1: see dayati2] to have pity on, to feel sorry for J iv.178 (bhūtānaŋ nâvadāyissaŋ, gloss nɔânukampiyaŋ). Avadīyati
Avadīyati
[Sk. avadīryati, ava + ḍr1, ḍrṇāti, see etym. under darī] to burst, split open J vi.183 ( = bhijjati C.) see also uddīyati, -- 83 -- Avadehaka
Avadehaka
( -- ˚) (adj.) [ava + deha + ka but more likely direct fr. ava + dih] in the idiom udarāvadehakaŋ bhuñjati, to eat one's fill M i.102; Th 1, 935. Vism 33 has udarāvadehaka -- bhojana, a heavy meal. Avadhāraṇa
Avadhāraṇa
(nt.) [Cp. Sk. avadhāraṇa, fr. ava + dhṛ] calling attention to, affirmation, emphasis; as t.t. used by C's in explanation of evaŋ at DA i.27; and of kho at PvA 11, 18. Avadhi
Avadhi
3 sg. aor. of vadhati. -- At DhA ii.73 avadhi = odhi. Avanata
Avanata
see oṇata. Avanati
Avanati
( -- ˚) (f.) [fr. avanamati] stooping, bending, bowing down, humiliation Miln 387 (unnatɔâvanati). Avani
Avani
(f.) [Vedic avani] bed or course of a river; earth, ground Dāvs iv.5. Avapakāsati
Avapakāsati
[ava + pa + kāsati = kassati, fr. kṛṣ] is a doubtful compd. of kassati, the combd. ava + pa occurring only in this word. In all likelihood it is a distortion of vavakassati (vi + ava + kassati), supplementing the ordinary apakassati. See meaning & further discussion under apakāsati -- Vin ii.204 (apakāsati +; v.l. avapakassati; Bdhgh. in expln. on p. 325 has apapakāsati which seems, to imply (a)vavakassati); A iii.145 sq. (avapakāsituŋ). Avapatta
Avapatta
see opatta. Avapāyin
Avapāyin
( -- ˚) (adj.) [cp. avapivati] coming for a drink, drinking J i.163. Avapivati
Avapivati
[ava + pā, cp. apapibati] to drink from J i.163. Avabujjhati
Avabujjhati
( -- ˚) [Cp. BSk. avabudhyate] to understand A iv.96 = It 83 (nɔavabujjhati); A iv.98 (id.) J i.378 = iii.387 (interchanging with anubujjhati at the latter pass.). Avabodha
Avabodha
[ava + bodha] perception, understanding, full knowledge Sn A 509 (sacca˚). -- Neg. an˚ not awakened to the truth Vv 826 ( = ananubodha VvA 319). Avabodhati
Avabodhati
( -- ˚) [cp. Sk. avabodhati] to realise, perceive, pay attention to J iii.151 nâva˚). Avabhāsa
Avabhāsa
[later form of obhāsa] Only in cpd. gambhīrā- vabhāso D ii.55, looking deep. Same cpd. at A ii.105 = Pug 46 has obhāsa. Avabhāsaka
Avabhāsaka
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. avabhāsa] shining, shedding light on, illuminating Sdhp 14. Avabhāsita
Avabhāsita
( -- ˚) [late form of obhāsita] shining with, resplendent Sdhp 590. Avabhuñjati
Avabhuñjati
[ava + bhuñjati] to eat, to eat up J iii.272 (inf. ˚bhottuŋ), 273. Avabhūta
Avabhūta
(adj.) [ava + bhūta, pp. of ava + bhū] "come down", despised, low, unworthy M ii.210. Avamangala
Avamangala
(adj.) [ava + mangala, ava here in privative function] of bad omen, unlucky, infaustus (opp. abhimangala); nt. bad luck, ill omen J i.372, 402; ii.197; vi.10, 424; DhA iii.123; PvA 261. Cf. next. Avamaññati
Avamaññati
[Sk. avamanyate] to slight, to disregard, despise DhA i.170; PvA 37, 175; Sdhp 271. -- pp. Caus. avamānita. Avamangalla
Avamangalla
(adj.) [fr. avamangala] of bad omen, nt. any- thing importune, unlucky J i.446. Avamāna & omāna
Avamāna
& omāna [fr. ava + man, think] disregard, dis- respect, contempt J ii.386; iii.423; v.384. Cp. next. Avamānana
Avamānana
(nt.) [fr. avamāna] = avamāna J i.22. Avamāneti
Avamāneti
[Caus. of avamaññati] to despise J v.246. - pp. avamānita PvA 36. Avaya
Avaya
only in neg. anavaya. Avayava
Avayava
[Dern uncertain. Cp. mediaeval Sk. avayava] limb, member, constituent, part VvA 53 (sarīra˚ = gattā). 168, 201, 276; PvA 211 (sarīra˚ = gattā), 251 (mūl˚ the fibres of the root). As t. t. g. at SnA 397. In the commentaries avayava is often used where aŋga would have been used in the older texts. Avarajjhati
Avarajjhati
( -- ˚) [ava + rajjhati of rādh, cp. Sk. avarād- hyate] to neglect, fail, spurn Th 1, 167; J iv.428 (v.l. ˚rujjh˚). Avaruddha
Avaruddha
[fr. avarundhati] 1. Doubtful reading at Vin iv.181, apparently meaning ʻ in revolt, out of hand ʼ (of slaves) -- 2. [late form of oruddha] restrained Sdhp. 592. Avaruddhaka
Avaruddhaka
[avruddha + ka] subdued, expelled, banished J vi.575; Dpvs i.21 (Np). Avaruddhati
Avaruddhati
[Sk. aparundhati; ava + ruddhati of rudh] to expel, remove, banish J vi.505 ( = nīharati C.), 515. See also avarundhati. Avarundhati
Avarundhati
[ava + rundhati. Only referred to by Dhp. in his Cy (ThA 271) on oruddha] to put under restraint, to put into one's harem as subsidiary wife. Avalambati
Avalambati
[ = olambati]. Only in late verse. To hang down. Pv ii.118; 102. Ger. avalamba (for ˚bya) Pv iii.35; cp. olubbha. Avalitta
Avalitta
( -- ˚) [Sk. avalipta, pp. of ava -- limpati] besmeared; in cpd. ullittâvalitta "smeared up & down" i. e. plastered inside & outside A i.101. Avalekhati
Avalekhati
[ava + lekhati, likh, Sk. avalikhati] to scrape off Vin ii.221 (v. l. apa˚). Avalekhana
Avalekhana1
(nt.) [fr. avalekhati] (a) scraping, scraping off Vin ii.141 (˚pidhara), 221 (˚kaṭṭha). (b) scratching in, writing down J iv.402, (˚sattha a chisel for engraving letters). Avalekhana
Avalekhana2
(nt.) v. l. for apalekhana. Avalepana
Avalepana
( -- ˚) (nt.) [fr. ava + lip] smearing, daubing, plastering M i.385 (pīta˚); Sn 194 (kāyo taca -- maŋsɔ âvalepano the body plastered with skin & flesh). Avasa
Avasa
(adj.) [a + vasa] powerless Sdhp 290. Avasaṭa & Osaṭa
Avasaṭa
& Osaṭa [Sk. apasṛta, cp. also samavasṛta, pp. of ava + sṛ] withdrawn, gone away; one who has left a community & gone over to another sect, a renegade Vin iv.216, 217 ( = titthāyatanaŋ saŋkata). Avasarati
Avasarati
[ava + sṛ] to go down, to go away (to) Sn 685 (v. l. BB. T. avaŋsari). Avasāna
Avasāna
( -- ˚) [for osāna] (nt.) stopping ceasing; end, finish, conclusion J i.87 (bhattakicc -- âvasāne at the end of the meal); PvA 76 (id.). Avasāya
Avasāya
[fr. avaseti] stopping, end, finish Th 2, 12 ( = avasānaŋ niṭṭhānaŋ ThA 19). But the id. p. at Dhp 218 has anakkhāte. Avasiñcanaka
Avasiñcanaka
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. osiñcati] pouring over (act. & med.), overflowing J i.400 (an˚). Avasiṭṭha
Avasiṭṭha
(sic & not osiṭṭha) [pp. of avasissati, Sk. avaśiṣṭa] left, remaining, over S ii.133; J i.138; v.339; VvA 66, pl. avasiṭṭhā all who are left, the others PvA 165 (janā). Avasiṭṭhaka
Avasiṭṭhaka
(adj.) [fr. avasiṭṭha] remaining, left J iii.311. -- 84 -- Avasitta
Avasitta
( -- ˚) [pp. of osiñcati] besprinkled, anointed, con- secrated, only in phrase rājā khattiyo muddhâvasitto of a properly consecrated king (see also khattiya) D i. 69; ii.227; iii.64; Pug 56; DA i.182 (T. muddhâvassita, v. l. ˚abhisitta); etc. -- See also abhisitta. Avasin
Avasin
(adj. -- n.) [a + vasin fr. vaś] not having control over oneself, D ii.275. Avasissati
Avasissati
[Sk. avaśiṣyate; Pass. of ava + śis; but expld. by Kern, Toev. s. v. as fut of avasīdati] to be left over, to remain, in phrase yaŋ pamāṇa -- kataŋ kammaŋ na taŋ tatrâvasissati D i.251; A v.299 = S iv.322; J ii.61 (see expln. on p. 62). Also in the phrases taco ca nahārū ca aṭṭhi ca avasissatu sarīre upasussatu maŋsa -- lohitaŋ M i.481; A i.50; S ii.28, and sarīrāni avasissanti S ii. 83. With the latter phrases cp. avasussati. Avasī
Avasī
metri causa for avasi, a + vasi, aor. of vas4 to stop, stay, rest J v.66 (mā avasī). Avasussati
Avasussati
[Sk. *ava -- suṣyati of śuṣ] to dry up, to wither; in later quotations of the old kāmaŋ taco ca nahāru ca aṭṭhi ca avasussatu (upasussatu sarīre maŋsalohitaŋ) J i.71, 110; Sdhp 46. It is a later spelling for the older avasissatu see Trenckner (M i.569). -- fut. avasucchati ( = Sk. *˚śokṣyati, fut. of Intens.) J vi.550 (v. l. BB ˚sussati; C. avasucchissati). Avasūra
Avasūra
[ava + sūra; ava here in function of *avaŋs see ava ii] sundown, sunset, acc. ˚ŋ as adv. at or with sundown J v 56 (anāvasūraŋ metrically). Avasesa
Avasesa1
[Sk. avaśeṣa, fr. ava + śiṣ, cp. avasissati] remainder, remaining part; only in cpds. an˚ (adj.) without any remainder, i. e. fully, completely M i.220 = A v.347 (˚dohin); A i.20 sq., 88; Sn 146; Pug 17; Dhs 363, 553; SnA 417 (˚pharaṇa); PvA 71 (˚ato, adv. altogether, not leaving anything out); & sâvasesa leaving something over, having something left A i.20 sq., 88; Pv iii.55 (jīvita˚ having still a little life left). Avasesa
Avasesa2
(adj.) [see prec.] remaining, left Sn 694 (āyu avaseso); J iii.19; Vbh 107 (taṇhā ca avasesā ca kilesā); PvA 19 (avasesā ca ñātakā the rest of the relatives), 21 (avasesā parisā), 201 (aṭṭhi -- tacamattɔ âvasesa -- sarīra with a body on which nothing but skin & bones were left), 206 (aṭṭhi -- sanghātamattɔ âvasesa -- sarīra). -- nt. (as pred.) ˚ŋ what is left PvA 52 (appɔ avasesaŋ); KhA 245 (nɔ atthi tesaŋ avasesaŋ). Avasesaka
Avasesaka
(adj.) [fr. avasesa2] being left, overflowing, ad- ditional, more J i.400 (an˚); Dpvs iv.45. Avassa
Avassa
(adj.) [a + vaś] against one's will, inevitable J i. 19 (˚bhāvin); v.319 (˚gāmitā). Usually as nt. ˚ŋ adv. inevitably (cp. BSk. avaśyaŋ Divy 347; Av. Ś i.209 etc.) J iii.271; DA i.263; Sdhp 293. Avassakaŋ
Avassakaŋ
(adv.) [see avassa] inevitably Dpvs ix.13. Avassajati & ossajati
Avassajati
& ossajati [ava + sṛj, perhaps ud + sṛj = Sk. utsṛjati, although the usual Vedic form is avasṛjati. The form ossajati puzzled the BSk. writers in their sanskritisation apotsṛjati = apa + ut + sṛj Divy 203] to let loose, let go, send off, give up, dismiss, release (ava): J iv.425; v.487 (aor. avassaji read for avissaji). Avassana
Avassana
(nt.) [a + vassana, Sk. vāsana of vāś to bleat] not bleating J iv.251. Avassaya
Avassaya
[Sk. *avāśraya for the usual apāśraya, see P. apassaya1] support, help, protection, refuge J i.211; ii. 197; iv.167; Miln 160; DhA ii.267; iv.198; PvA 5, 113. Avassava
Avassava
[ava + sava, Sk. ˚srava fr. sru to flow] outflow, effect, only neg. anassava no further effect Vin ii.89; M i.93; ii.246; A iii.334 sp. Avasseti
Avasseti
[ava + ā + śri, for the usual *apāśrayati; see apasseti] to lean against, to depend on, find shelter in (loc.) J ii.80 (aor. avassayiŋ = vāsaŋ kappesiŋ C.). -> pp. avassita. Avassāvana
Avassāvana
(nt.) [fr. ava + Caus. of sru to flow] straining, filtering (?) J ii.288. Avassita
Avassita
[for apassita, Sk. apaśrita] depending on, dealing with J v.375. See apassita. Avassuta
Avassuta
(adj.) [Sk. *avasruta, pp. of ava + sru, cp. avas- sava] 1. (lit.) flowing out or down, oozing, leaking J iv. 20. -- 2. (fig.) (cp. anvāssava & āsava) filled with desire, lustful (opp. anavassuta, q. v.) Vin ii.236; S iv.70, 184 (an˚); A i.261, 262 (an˚); ii.240; iv.128, 201; Sn 63 (an˚); Pug 27, 36; Dpvs ii.5 (T. reads avassita). -> Neg. anavassuta: 1. not leaking, without a leak J iv.20 (nāvā = udaka -- pavesanɔ âbhāvena a. C.). -- 2. free from leakage, i. e. from lust or moral intoxication Dh 39 (˚citta); Sn 63 (see expld. in detail at Nd2 40); SnA 116 (= kilesa -- anvāssava -- virahita). Avahaṭa
Avahaṭa
[pp. of avaharati] taken away, stolen Miln 46. Avaharaṇa
Avaharaṇa
( -- ˚) [fr. avaharati in both meanings] taking away, removal; theft PvA 47 (sāṭaka˚), 92 (soka˚). Avaharati & oharati
Avaharati
& oharati [ava + hṛ] to steal J i.384; PvA 47 (avahari vatthaŋ), 86 (id., = apānudi). -- pp. avahaṭa (q. v.). Avahasati
Avahasati
[ava + has] to laugh at, deride, mock J v.111 (aññamaññaŋ); PvA 178. -- aor. avahasi J iv.413. Avahāra
Avahāra
[fr. avaharati] taking, acquiring, acquisition Vin v.129 (pañca avahārā, viz. theyya˚, pasayha˚, parikappa˚, paṭicchanna˚, kusa˚). Avahīyati
Avahīyati
[for ohīyati] to be left behind, to stay behind J v.340. Avāgata
Avāgata
[ava + ā + gacchati] only in phrase dhammā avāgat -- amhā, we are fallen from righteousness, J v.82. (C. explains apāgata). Avākaroti
Avākaroti
[either ava + ā + karoti or avaŋ + karoti, the latter more probable. It is not necessary to take it with Kern, Toev. s. v. as Sk. apākṛṇoti, apa + ā + kṛ] 1. to revoke, undo, rescind, not fulfill, spoil, destroy J iii.339 (avākayirā = avakareyya chindeyya C.); v.495, 500; vi. 280. -- 2. to give back, restore J vi.577 (= deti C.). Avākirati
Avākirati
wrong by Hardy VvA Index for avakirati (q. v.). Avāṭuka
Avāṭuka
see apāṭuka. Avāpuraṇa
Avāpuraṇa
(nt.) [same as apāpuraṇa] a key S iii.132; A iv.374. Avāpurati
Avāpurati
[same as apāpurati] to open (a door) J i.63; vi.373. Avāvaṭa
Avāvaṭa
(adj.) [a + vāvaṭa] unobstructed, unhindered, free. Of a woman, not married J v.213 ( = apetâvaraṇā, which read for ˚bharaṇā, apariggahitā C.). Avikampamāna
Avikampamāna
(adj.) [a + vi + kampamāna, ppr. med. of kamp] not hesitating, not wavering, not doubting J iv.310 ( = anosakkamāna C.; Kern takes it at this passage as a + vikalpamāna, see Toev. s.v., but unnecessarily); vi.176 (= nirāsanka C.); J vi.273. Avikampin
Avikampin
(adj.) [fr. a + vi + kamp] unmoved, not shaking, steady Vv 5022 ( = acala VvA 215). Avikopin
Avikopin
(adj.) [a + vikopin; fr. vi + kup] not agitated, not moving, unshaken, undisturbed J vi.226 (acchejja +). Avikkhepa
Avikkhepa
[a + vikkhepa] calmness, balance, equanimity D iii.213; A i.83; Ps i.94; ii.228; Dhs 11, 15, 570. -- 85 -- Avicāreti
Avicāreti
[a + vicāreti] not to examine VvA 336. Aviccaŋ
Aviccaŋ
at J v.434 read aviviccaŋ [a + viviccaŋ] i. e. not secretly, openly. Avijānaŋ
Avijānaŋ
[a + vijānaŋ] not knowing, ignorant Ḍh 38, 60; It 103. Avijjā
Avijjā
(f.) [Sk. avidyā; fr. a + vid] ignorance; the main root of evil and of continual rebirth (see paṭicca -- samuppāda, cp. S ii.6, 9, 12; Sn p. 141 & many other passages). See on term Cpd. 83 n. 3, 187 sq, 262 sq. & for further detail vijjā. avijjā is termed an anusaya (D iii.254, 282; S iv.205, 208 sq., 212); it is one of the āsavā (Vin iii.4; D i.84; iii.216; It 49; Dhs 1100, 1109), of the oghā (D iii.230, 276; Dhs 390, 1061, 1162), of the nīvaraṇāni (S ii.23; A i.223; It 8; Dhs 1162, 1486), of the saŋyojanāni (D iii.254; Dhs 1131, 1460). See for various characterisatons the foll. passages: Vin i.1; iii.3; D iii.212, 230, 234, 274; M i.54, 67, 144; S ii.4, 26, 263; iii.47, 162; iv.256; v.52; A i.8, 285; ii.132, 158, 247; iii.84 sq., 414; iv.228; It 34 (yā kācɔ imā duggatiyo asmiŋ loke paramhi ca avijjāmūlakā sabbā icchā -- lobha -- sammussayā), 57, 81; Sn 199, 277, 729 (jāti -- maraṇa -- saŋsāraŋ ye vajanti punappunaŋ . . . avijjāyɔeva sā gati), 730, 1026, 1033 (avijjāya nivuto loko); Dh 243; Nd2 99; Pug 21; Dhs 390, 1061, 1162; DhA iii.350; iv.161 (˚paligha). Aviññāṇaka
Aviññāṇaka
(adj.) [a + viññāṇa + ka] senscless, without feeling or consciousness, unfeeling DhA i.6 (saviññāṇaka +). Aviññū
Aviññū
(adj.) = aviddasu. Avitakka
Avitakka
(adj.) [a + vitakka] free from thought D iii.219, 274; Th 2, 75 ("where reasonings cease" trsl.); Dhs 161 ("free from the working of conception" trsl.), 504 etc. Avidūra
Avidūra
(adj.) [a + vidūra] not far, near; usually in loc. ˚e as adv. near Sn. 147. Aviddasu
Aviddasu
(adj.) [a + viddasu] ignorant, foolish Sn 762 ( = bāla Sn A 509); Dh 268 = Nd2 514 (= aviññū DhA iii.395); PvA 18 (so read for avindasu). Avināsaka (˚ika)
Avināsaka
(˚ika) (adj.) [a + vināsa + ka] not causing destruction A iii.38 (˚ika); J v.116 ( = anāsaka C.). Avināsana
Avināsana
(adj.) [a + vināsana] imperishable Dpvs iv.16. Avinicchayaññū
Avinicchayaññū
(adj.) [a + vinicchaya + ñū] not knowing how to decide J v.367. Avinibbhujaŋ
Avinibbhujaŋ
(adj.) [ppr. of a + vinibbhujati] unable to distinguish or to know J v.121 ( = atīrento C.). Avinibbhoga
Avinibbhoga
(ad.) [a + vinibbhoga] not to be distinguished, indistinct J iii.428 (˚sadda). Avipariṇāma
Avipariṇāma
[a + viparināma] absence of change, stead- fastness, endurance D i.18; iii.31, 33 (˚dhamma); DA i.113 ( = jarā -- vasena vipariṇāmassa abhāvato). Avippaṭisāra
Avippaṭisāra
[a + vippaṭisāra] absence of regret or remorse A iii.46. Avippavāsa
Avippavāsa
(adj. -- n.) [a + vippavāsa] thoughtfulness, mind- fulness, attention; adj. not neglectful, mindful, attentive, eager Vin v.216; Sn 1142 (cp. Nd2 101: anussatiyā bhāvento); DA i.104 (appamādo vuccati satiyā avippavāso); DhA iv.26 (appamāda = satiyā avippavāsa). Aviruddha
Aviruddha
(adj.) [a + viruddha] not contrary, unobstructed, free, without difficulties Dh 406; Sn 365, 704, 854. Avirūḷhi
Avirūḷhi
(f.) [a + virūḷhi] absence or cesssation of growth Sn 235; DhA i.245 (˚dhamma). Avirodha
Avirodha
[a + virodha] absence of obstruction, gentleness M ii.105 = Th 1, 875. Avirodhana
Avirodhana
(nt.) = avirodha J iii.320, 412; v.378. Avivāda
Avivāda
[a + vivāda] absence of contesting or disputing, agreement, harmony D iii.245; Sn 896 (˚bhūma SnA 557 or ˚bhumma Nd1 308, expld. as Nibbāna). Avisaŋvādaka
Avisaŋvādaka
(adj.) [a + visaŋvada + ka] not deceiving, not lying D i.4; iii.170; Pug 57; DA i.73. Avisaŋvādanatā
Avisaŋvādanatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. a + visaŋvāda] honesty, faithfulness, uprightness D iii.190. Avisaŋvādeti
Avisaŋvādeti
[a + visaŋ + Caus. of vad] to keep one's word, to be honest, to be true J v.124. Avisaggatā
Avisaggatā
(f.) [a + visaggatā, v.l. viy˚, thus as a + viy- agga, Sk. vyagra = ākula] state of being undisturbed, harmony, balance J vi.224 (C. avisaggata). Cp. avyagga. Avisare
Avisare
at J v.117 according to Kern, Toev. s.v. corrupted from avisaye, i. e. towards a wrong or unworthy object [a + visaya, loc], C. differently: avisare = avisaritvā atikkamitva; v.l. adhisare. Avisāhaṭa
Avisāhaṭa
(adj.) [a + visāhaṭa] imperturbed Dhs 15, 24, 287, 570. (˚mānasata). Avissaji
Avissaji
at J vi.79 is with Kern, Toev. s. v. better to be read avassaji (see avassajati). Avissajjiya
Avissajjiya
(adj.) [grd. of a + vissajjati] not to be given away, inalienable (cp. avebhangiya) Vin i.305 (˚ika for ˚iya); ii.170 (five such objects in detail); v.216 (+ avebh˚); J vi.568. Avissāsaniya
Avissāsaniya
(adj.) [a + visāsana + iya, ika] not to be trusted, untrustworthy J iii.474. Aviha
Aviha
[of uncertain etym.] the world of the Aviha's, i.e. the 12th of the 16 Brahmā -- words, cp. Kindred Sayings 48 n. 3; Cpd. 139. -- S i.35, 60; A i.279; Pug 17. Avihiŋsa (Avihesa)
Avihiŋsa
(Avihesa) (f.) [a + vihiŋsā] absence of cruelty, mercy, humanity, friendliness, love D iii.213, 215, 240 (avihesā); Sn 292 ( = sakaruṇabhāva SnA 318); It 82 (˚vitakka). Aviheṭhaka
Aviheṭhaka
(adj.) [a + viheṭhaka] not harassing, not hurting D iii.166 (but cp. SnA 318 avihesaka in same context); Miln 219. Avī˚
Avī˚
in general see vī˚. Avīci
Avīci
[B.Sk. avīci a + vīci (?) no intermission, or no plea- sure (?), unknown, but very likely popular etym.] 1. avīciniraya, one of the (great) hells (see niraya), described in vivid colours at many passages of the Pāli canon, e.g. at Vin ii.203 = It 86; Nd1 18, 347, 405 = Nd2 304 iiid; Ps i.83; Dhs 1281; J i.71, 96; iii.182; iv.159; DhA i.148; PvA 52; SnA 290; Sdhp 37, 194; Pgdp 5 sq.; etc etc. -- 2. disintegration, decay Vism 449 (a. jarā nāma). Avekalla
Avekalla
(˚ -- ) adj.) [a + vekalla] without deficiency, in ˚buddhi complete knowledge J vi.297. Avekkhati
Avekkhati
[B.Sk. avīkṣate. The regular Pāli form however is apekkhati, to which the BSk. av˚ corresponds] to look at, to consider, to see It 33 (v.l. ap˚); Dh 28, 50, J iv.6; DhA i.259 ( = passati). Avekkhipati
Avekkhipati
[avaŋ + khipati, avaŋ here in form ave cor- resp. to avaḥ, cp. pure for puraḥ etc.] to jump, hop, lit. to throw (a foot) down J iv.251 ( = pacchimapāde khipati C.). Avecca
Avecca
(adv.) [Usually taken as ava + ger. of i (*itya), cp. adhicca & abhisamecca, but by P. grammarians as a + vecca. The form is not sufficiently clear semantically; B.Sk. avetya, e.g. Jtm. 210, is a Sanskritisation of the P. form] certainly, definitely, absolutely, perfectly, expld. by Bdhgh. as acala (on D ii.217), or as paññāya ajjhogahetvā (on Sn 229); by Dhp. as apara -- paccaya -- bhāvena (on Pv iv.125). -- Usually in phrase Buddhe Dhamme Sanghe avecca -- pasādo perfect faith in the B., the Dhamma & the Sangha, e.g. at M i.47; S ii.69; iv.271 sq., 304; v.344, 405; A i.222; ii.56; iii.212, 332, 451; iv.406; v.183; further at Ps i.161 (˚pasanna); Sn 229 (yo ariyasaccāni avecca passati); Pv iv.125. -- 86 -- Avedha
Avedha
(adj.) [a + vedha, grd. of vidh (vyadh) to pierce, Sk. avedhya] not to be hurt or disturbed, inviolable, unshakable, imperturbable Sn 322 (˚dhamma = akampanasabhāva SnA 331). Avebhangika
Avebhangika
(adj.) [fr. a + vi + bhanga] not to be divided or distributed Vin i.305. Cp. next. Avebhangiya
Avebhangiya
(nt.) [ = avebhangika] that which is not to be divided, an inalienable possession; 5 such objects enumd. at Vin ii.171, which are the same as under avissajjiya (q. v.); v.129. Avera
Avera
(adj.) [a + vera] peaceable, mild, friendly Sn 150 ( = veravirahita KhA 248); Sdhp 338. -- ˚ŋ (nt.) friendliness, kindness D i.247 (˚citta); Dh 5 (= khantimetta DhA i 51). Averin
Averin
(adj. -- n.) = avera Dh 197, 258. Avosita
Avosita
[reading uncertain, cp. avyosita] only in neg. an˚ unfulfilled, undone Th 1, 101. Avyagga
Avyagga
(ad) [a + vyagga, Sc. vyagra] not bewildered, not confused S v.66. Cp. avisaggatā. Avyattatā
Avyattatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. avyatta] state or condition of not being manifest or visible, concealment, hiding DhA ii.38. Avyatha
Avyatha
(adj.) [a + vyatha, cp. Sk. vyathā misfortune] not miserable, fortunate J iii.466 ( = akilamāna C.). Avyaya
Avyaya
[a + vyaya | absence of loss or change, safety D. i.72 (instr. ˚ena safely); Miln 393 (as abbaya T.). Avyāpajjha
Avyāpajjha1
(abyābajjha) (nt.) [a + vyapajjha or bajjha, a confusion between the roots bādh or pad] (act.) kindness of heart; (pass.) freedom from suffering (Ep. of Nibbāna) Vin i.183 (avyāpajjh˚âdhimutta); It 31 (abyābajjhɔārāma). Avyāpajjha
Avyāpajjha2
(abyābajjha) adj.) [either a + *vyāpadya or more likely a + *vyābādhya] free from oppression or injury; not hurting, kind D ii.242 (avera +), 276; M i.90; It 16 = 52 (sukhaŋ); Miln 410 (avera +). Avyāpanna
Avyāpanna
(adj.) [a + vyāpanna] free from desire to injure, free from malice, friendly, benevolent D iii.82,83 (˚citta); A ii.220 (id.); Pug 68 (id.). -- Same in B.Sk. e.g. Divy 105, 302. Avyāpāda
Avyāpāda
[a + vyāpāda] absence of desire to injure, free- dom from malice D iii.215, 229, 240; It 82 (all MSS. have aby˚); Dhs 33, 36, 277, 313, 1056. Avyāyata
Avyāyata
(adj.) [a + vyāyata of yam] at random, without discrimination, careless J i.496 ( = avyatta C.). Avyāyika
Avyāyika
(adj.) [fr. avyaya] not liable to loss or change, imperishable J v.508 ( = avigacchanaka C.). Avyāvaṭa
Avyāvaṭa
(adj.) [a + vyāvaṭa = Sk vyāpṛta] not occupied, i. e. careless, neglectful, not worrying Vin iii.136; Nd2 72 (abyāvaṭa for appossukka Sn 43); J iii.65; vi.188. Miln 177 (abyā˚). Avyāseka
Avyāseka
(adj.) [a + vy + āseka] untouched, unimpaired D i.182 (˚sukha = kilesa vyāseka -- virahitattā avyāseka DA i.183); Pug 59. Avyāharati
Avyāharati
[a + vy + āharati] not to bring or procure J v.80. Avyosita
Avyosita
(adj.) [a + vyosita, Sk. vyavasita] not having reached perfection, imperfect Th 1, 784 (aby˚). Avhaya
Avhaya
[fr. avhayati; cp. Sk. āhvaya "betting"] calling, name; adj. ( -- ˚) called, having the name of Sn 684 (isi˚), 686 (Asit˚), 689 (kanhasiri˚), 1133 (Sace˚, cp. Nd2 624). Avhayati & Avheti
Avhayati
& Avheti [Sk. āhvayati, ā + hū or hvā] -- 1. to call upon, invoke, appeal to D i.244 (avhayāma imper.); PvA 164. -- 2. to call, call up, summon M 1.17; J ii.10, 252 ( = pakkosati); v.220 (avhayesi); vi.18, 192, 273 (avhettha pret.); Vv 331 (avheti). -- 3. to give a name, to call, to address SnA 487 (= āmanteti ālapati). -- pp. avhāta (q. v.). Avhāta
Avhāta
[pp. of avhayati] called, summoned J iii.165 = (an˚ = anāhuta ayāctia) = Pv i.123, cp. PvA 64. The id. p. at Th 2, 129 reads ayācita. Avhāna
Avhāna
(nt.) [fr. avhayati, Sk. āhvāna in diff. meaning] - 1. begging, calling, asking Sn 710; Vism 68 (˚ânabhinandanā). -- 2. addressing, naming SnA 605 ( = nāma). Avhāyana
Avhāyana
(nt.) [cp. Sk. āhvayana] calling to, asking, in- vocation, imploration D i.11 (Sir -- avhāyane, v. l. avhayana; expld. at DA i.97 with reading Sirivhāyana as "ehi Siri mayhaŋ sire patiṭṭhāhī ti evaŋ sire Siriyā avhayanaŋ"), 244, 245 (v. l. avhāna). Avhāyika
Avhāyika
(adj.) [fr. avhaya] calling, giving a name; (m.) one who gives a name J i.401 = iii.234. Asa
Asa
(adj.) [for asaŋ = asanto, a + santo, ppr. of as in meaning "good"] bad J iv.435 = vi.235 (sataŋ vā asaŋ, acc. sg. with v. l. santaŋ . . ., expld -- by sappurisaŋ vā asappurisaŋ vā C.); v.448 (n. pl. f. asā expld. by asatiyo lāmikā C.; cp. p. 446 v.319). Asaŋvata
Asaŋvata
(adj.) [pp. of + saŋvuṇati, cp. saŋvuta] unres- tricted, open J vi.306. Asaŋvara
Asaŋvara
[a + saŋvāra] absence of closing or restraint, no control Dhs 1345. Asaŋvāsa
Asaŋvāsa
(adj.) [a + saŋvāsa] deprived of co -- residence, expelled from the community Vin iv.213, 214. Asaŋvindaŋ
Asaŋvindaŋ
[ppr. a + saŋvindati] not finding, not knowing Th 1, 717. Asaŋvuta
Asaŋvuta
(adj.) [pp. of a + saŋvuṇāti, cp. saŋvata] not restrained Dhs 1345, 1347. Asaŋsaṭṭha
Asaŋsaṭṭha
(adj.) [a + saŋsaṭṭha] not mixed or mixing, not associating, not given to society M i.ai4; S i.63; Sn 628 = Dh 404 (= dassana -- savana -- samullāpa paribhogakāya -- saŋsaggānaŋ abhāvena SnA 468 = DhA iv.173). Asaŋhārima
Asaŋhārima
(adj.) = asaŋhāriya (?) Vin iv.272. Asaŋhāriya
Asaŋhāriya
(adj.) [grd. of a + saŋharati] not to be destroyed or shattered It 77; Th 1, 372; Nd2 110. Asaŋhīra
Asaŋhīra
(adj.) [ = asaŋhāriya of saŋ + hṛ] immovable, unconquerable, irrefutable Vin ii.96; S i.193; A iv.141; v.71; Sn 1149 (as Ep. of Nibbāna, cp. Nd2 110); J i. 62; iv.283 (˚citta unfaltering); Dpvs iv.12. Asakka
Asakka
(adj.) [a + sakka; Sk. aśakya] impossible J v. 362 (˚rūpa). Asakkuṇeyya
Asakkuṇeyya
(adj.) [grd. of a + sakkoti] impossible, un- able to J i.55; KhA 185 and passim. Asakkhara
Asakkhara
(adj.) [a + sakkhara] not stony, free from gravel or stones, smooth J v.168; DhA iii.401 (opp. sasakkhara). Asakyadhītā
Asakyadhītā
(f.) [a + sakyadhītā] not a true Buddhist nun Vin iv.214. -- 87 -- Asagguṇa
Asagguṇa
[a + sagguṇa] bad quality, vice Sdhp 382 (˚bhā- vin, the a˚ belongs to the whole cpd.). Asankita & ˚iya
Asankita
& ˚iya (adj.) [a + sankita, pp. of śank] not hesitating, not afraid, not anxious, firm, bold J i.334 (˚iya); v.241; Sdhp 435, 541. Asankuppa
Asankuppa
(adj.) [a + sankuppa, grd. of kup] not to be shaken; immovable; steady, safe (Ep. of Nibbāna) Sn 1149 (cp. Nd2 106); Th 1, 649. Asankusaka
Asankusaka
(adj.) [a + sankusaka, which is distorted from Sk. sankasuka splitting, crumbling, see Kern, Toev. p. 18] not contrary J vi.297 (˚vattin, C. appaṭilomavattin, cp. J trsln. vi.143). Asankheyya
Asankheyya
(adj.) [a + sankheyya, grd. of saŋ -- khyā] in- calculable, innumerable, nt. an immense period A ii.142; Miln 232 (cattāri a.), 289 DhA i.5, 83, 104. Asanga
Asanga
(adj.) [a + sanga] not sticking to anything, free from attachment, unattached Th 2, 396 (˚mānasa, = anāsattacitta ThA 259); Miln 343. Cp. next. Asangita
Asangita
(adj.) [fr. asanga, a + sangita, or should we read asangika?] not sticking or stuck, unimpeded, free, quick J v.409. Asacca
Asacca
(adj.) [a + sacca] not true, false J v.399. Asajjamāna
Asajjamāna
(adj.) [ppr. med. of a + sajjati, sañj] not clinging, not stuck, unattached Sn 38, 71 (cp. Nd2 107); Dh 221 (nāmarūpasmiŋ a. = alaggamana DhA iii.298). Asajjittho
Asajjittho
2nd sg. pret. med. of sajjati to stick or cling to, to hesitate J i.376. See sajjati. Asajjhaya
Asajjhaya
[a + sajjhāya] non -- repetition Dh 241 (cp. DhA iii.347). Asañña
Asañña
(adj.) [a + saññā] unconscious, ˚sattā unconscious beings N. of a class of Devas D i.28 (cp. DA i.118 and BSk. asaŋjñika -- sattvāḥ Divy 505). Asaññata
Asaññata
(adj.) [a + saññata, pp. of saŋ + yam] unres- trained, intemperate, lacking self -- control It 43 = 90 = Sn 662 = Dh 307. Asaññin
Asaññin
(adj.) [a + saññin] unconscious D i.54 (˚gabbhā, cp. DA i.163); iii.111, 140, 263; It 87; Sn 874. Asaṭha
Asaṭha
(adj.) [a + saṭha] without guile, not fraudulent, honest D iii.47, 55, 237; DhA i.69. Asaŋṭhita
Asaŋṭhita
(adj.) [a + saṇṭhita] not composed, unsettled, fickle It 62, 94. Asat (Asanto)
Asat
(Asanto) [a + sat, ppr. of asti] not being, not being good, i. e. bad, not genuine (cp. asa); freq., e. g. Sn 94, 131, 881, 950; Dh 73, 77, 367; It 69 (asanto nirayaŋ nenti). See also asaddhamma. *Asati
*Asati
(& Asanāti q. v.) [Sk. aśnāti, aś to partake of, to eat or drink cp. aŋśa share, part] to eat; imper. asnātu J v 376; fut. asissāmi Th 1, 223; Sn 970. -- ppr. med. asamāna J v.59; Sn 239. ger. asitvā Miln 167; & asitvāna J iv.371 (an˚). pp. asita (q. v.). See also the spurious forms asmiye & añhati (añhamāna Sn 240), also āsita1. Asatiyā
Asatiyā
(adv.) [instr. of a + sati] heedlessly, unintentionally J iii.486. Asatta
Asatta
(adj.) [pp. of a + sajjati] not clinging or attached, free from attachment Sn 1059; Dh 419; Nd2 107, 108; DhA iv.228. Asattha
Asattha
(n. adj.) [a + sattha] absence of a sword or knife, without a knife, usually combd. with adaṇḍa in var. phrases: see under daṇḍa. Also at Th 1, 757 (+ avaṇa). Asadisa
Asadisa
(adj.) [a + sadisa] incomparable, not having its like DhA ii.89; iii.120 (˚dāna). Asaddha
Asaddha
(adj.) [a + saddha] not believing, without faith D iii.252, 282. Asaddhamma
Asaddhamma
[a + sat + dhamma, cp. asat & BSk. asaddharma] evil condition, sin, esp. sexual intercourse; usually mentioned as a set of several sins, viz. as 3 at It 85; as 4 at A ii.47; as 7 at D iii.252, 282; as 8 at Vin ii.202. Asana
Asana1
(nt.) [Vedic aśan(m)] stone, rock J ii.91; v.131. Asana
Asana2
(nt.) [cp. Sk. aśana of aś, cp. asati] eating, food; adj. eating J i.472 (ghatâsana Ep. of the fire; v.64 (id.). Usually in neg. form anasana fasting, famine, hunger Sn 311 ( = khudā SnA 324); DA i.139. See also nirasana. Asana
Asana3
(nt.) [Sk. asana] the tree Pentaptera Tomentosa J i.40 (as Bodhi -- tree of Gotama); ii.91; v.420; vi.530. Asana
Asana4
(nt.) [cp. Sk. asanā, to asyati to hurl, throw] an arrow M i.82 = S i.62. Cp. asani. Asanāti
Asanāti
[see asati] to eat, to consume (food) J i.472; v. 64; vi.14 (Esb. note: read asnāti; C. paribhuñjati). Asani
Asani
(f.) [Vedic aśani in same meaning; with Sk. aśri corner, caturaśra four cornered (see assa), to Lat. ācer pointed, sharp, Gr. a)/kros pointed, Ags. egl sting, Ohg. ekka corner, point. Connected with this is Sk. aśan (see asana1). Cp. also aŋsa & asama2] orig. a sharp stone as hurling -- weapon thence in mythol. Indra's thunderbolt, thunder -- clap, lightning J i.71, 167; ii.154; iii.323; Miln 277; VvA 83.

-- aggi the fire of thunder, i. e. lightning or fire caused by lightning DhA iii.71. -- pāta the falling of the thunderbolt, thunderclap, lightning DA i.280 (or should we read asannipāta?); PvA 45. -- vicakka same as ˚pāta (?) S ii. 229 ( = lābha -- sakkāra -- silokassa adhivacana); D iii.44, 47. Asantasaŋ & ˚anto
Asantasaŋ
& ˚anto (adj.) [ppr. of a + santasati] fearless, not afraid Sn 71, 74; J iv.101; vi.306; Nd2 109. Asantāsin
Asantāsin
(adj.) [a + santāsin, cp. asantāsaŋ] fearless, not trembling, not afraid Sn 850; Dh 351; Nd2 109; DhA iv.70. Asantuṭṭha
Asantuṭṭha
[pp. of a + santussati] not contented with, greedy, insatiate, unhappy Sn 108. Cp. next. Asantuṭṭhitā
Asantuṭṭhitā
(f.) [abstr. fr. asantuṭṭhita = asantuṭṭha] dis- satisfaction, discontentment D iii.214 (so read for tutth˚) = A i.95. Asanthava
Asanthava
[a + santhava] dissociation, separation from society, seclusion Sn 207. Asandhitā
Asandhitā
(f.) [a + sandhi + tā] absence of joints, discon- nected state J vi.16. Asannata
Asannata
(adj.) [a + sannata] not bent or bending Sdhp 417. Asapatta
Asapatta
(adj. -- n.) [a + sapatta = Sk. sapatna] (act.) with- out enmity, friendly (med.) having no enemy or foe, secure, peaceful D ii.276; Sn 150 (= vigata -- paccatthika, mettavihārin KhA 249); Th 2, 512. Asapattī
Asapattī
(f.) [a + sapattī] without co -- wife or rival in mar- riage S iv.249. Asappurisa
Asappurisa
[a + sappurisa, cp. asat] a low, bad or un- worthy man M iii.37; SnA 479 ( = anariya Sn 664). Asabala
Asabala
(adj.) [a + sabala] unspotted D ii.80 = iii.245. Asabbha
Asabbha
(adj.) [a + sabbha, i. e. *sabhya cp. sabhā & in meaning court: courteous, hof: hoflich etc.] not belonging to the assembly -- room, not consistent with good manners, impolite, vile, low, of base character J iii.527 (mātugāma); Dh 77 = J iii.367 = Th 1, 994; Miln 221; DhA i.256; ThA 246 (akkhi). Cp. next. -- Note. Both sabbha and sabbhin occur only in the negative form. -- 88 -- Asabbhin = asabbna
Asabbhin
= asabbna J i.494, more freq. in cpds. as asabbhi˚, e.g.

-- kāraṇa a low or sinful act Miln 280. -- rūpa low, common J vi.386 ( = asādhu -- jātika, lāmaka), 387 (= asabbhijātika), 414 (= apaṇḍita -- jātika). Cp. prec. *Asabha
*Asabha
[Sk. ṛṣabha] see usabha. Asama
Asama1
(adj.) [a + sama] unequal, incomparable J i.40 (+ appaṭipuggala); Sdhp 578 (+ atula). Esp. freq. in cpd. ˚dhura lit. carrying more than an equal burden, of incomparable strength, very steadfast or resolute Sn 694 ( = asama -- viriya SnA 489); J i.193; vi.259, 330. Asama
Asama2
(nt.) [the diaeretic form of Sk. aśman hurling stone, of whieh the contracted form is amha (q. v.); connected with Lat. ocris "mons confragosus"; Gr. a)/kmwn anvil; Lith. akmů̃ stone, see also asana1 (Sk. aśan stone for throwing) and asani] stone, rock DA i.270, 271 (˚muṭṭhika having a hammer of stone; v. l. BB. ayamuṭṭhika); SnA 392 (instr. asmanā). Asamaggiya
Asamaggiya
(nt.) [abstr. fr. a + samagga] lack of concord, disharmony J vi.516 (so read for asāmaggiya). Asamaṇa
Asamaṇa
at Pug 27 is to be read assamaṇa (q. v.). Asamapekkhana
Asamapekkhana
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. a + sam + apekkhati] lack of consideration S iii.261; Dhs 390, 1061, 1162. Asamāhita
Asamāhita
(adj.) [a + samāhita] not composed, uncontrolled, not firm It 113 (opp. susamāhita); Dh 110, 111; Pug 35. Asamijjhanaka
Asamijjhanaka
(adj.) [a + samijjhana + ka] unsuccessful, without result, fruitless; f. ˚ikā J iii.252. Asamiddhi
Asamiddhi
(f.) [a + samiddhi] misfortune, lack of success J vi.584. Asamosaraṇa
Asamosaraṇa
(nt.) [a + samosaraṇa] not coming together, not meeting, separation J v.233. Asampakampiya
Asampakampiya
(adj.) [grd. of a + sampakampeti] not to be shaken, not to be moved Sn 229 ( = kampetuŋ vā cāletuŋ vā asakkuṇeyyo KhA 185). Asampajañña
Asampajañña
(nt.) [a + sampajañña] lack of intelligence D iii.213; Dhs 390, 1061, 1162, 1351. Asampāyanto
Asampāyanto
[ppr. of a + sampāyati] unable to solve or explain Sn p. 92. Asambādha
Asambādha
(adj.) [a + sambādha] unobstructed Sn 150 ( = sambādha -- virahita KhA 248); J i.80; ThA 293. Asammodiya
Asammodiya
(nt.) [a + sammodiya] disagreement, dissension J vi.517 ( = asamaggiya C.). Asammosa
Asammosa
[a + sammosa cp. B.Sk. asammoṣadharman Ep. of the Buddha; Divy 49 etc] absence of confusion D iii.221 = Dhs 1366. Asayaŋvasin
Asayaŋvasin
(adj.) [a + sayaŋ + vasiŋ] not under one's own control, i. e. dependent D ii.262; J i.337. Asayha
Asayha
(adj.) [a + sayha, grd. of sah = Sk. asahya] im- possible, insuperable J vi.337. Usually in cpd. ˚sāhin conquering the unconquerable, doing the impossible, acchieving what has not been achieved before Th 1, 536, Pv ii.922 (Angīrasa); It 32. Asahana
Asahana
(nt. -- adj.) [a + sahana] not enduring, non -- endurance, inability J iii.20; PvA 17. Asahāya
Asahāya
(adj.) [a + sahāya] one who is without friends; who is dependent on himself Miln 225. Asā
Asā
see āsa. Asāta
Asāta
(adj.) [a + sāta, Sk. aśāta, Kern's interpretation & etymology of asāta at Toev. s.v. p. 90 is improbable] disagreeable Vin i.78 (asātā vedanā, cp. asātā vedanā M Vastu I 5); Sn 867; J i.288, 410; ii.105; Dhs 152, 1343. Asādhāraṇa
Asādhāraṇa
(adj.) [a + sādhāraṇa cp. asādhāraṇa Divy 561] not general, not shared, uncommon, unique Vin iii.35; Kh viii.9; J i.58, 78; Miln 285; DA i.71; Sdhp 589, 592. Asāmapāka
Asāmapāka
(adj.) [a + sāma + pāka] one who does not cook (a meal) for himself (a practice of ascetics) DA i.270. Asāra
Asāra
(n. adj.) [a + sāra] that which is not substance, worthlessness; adj. worthless, vain, idle Sn 937 ( = asāra nissāra sārâpagata Nd1 409); Dh 11, 12 (cp. DhA i.114 for interpretation). Asāraka
Asāraka
(adj.) [a + sāraka] unessential, worthless, sapless, rotten Th 1, 260; J ii.163 = DhA i.144. Asāraddha
Asāraddha
(adj.) [a + sāraddha] not excited, cool A i.148 = It 119 (passaddho kāyo a.; v.l. assāraddha). Asāhasa
Asāhasa
(nt.) [a + sāhasa] absence of violence, meekness, peaceableness D iii.147 (asāhase rata fond of peace); acc. as adv. asāhasaŋ without violence, not arbitrarily J iii.319; instr. asāhasena id. J vi.280; Dh 257 ( = amusāvādena DhA iii.382). Asi
Asi
[Vedic asi, Av. aŋhū Lat. ensis] a sword, a large knife D i.77 ( = DA i.222); M ii.99; A i.48 = (asinā sīsaŋ chindante); iv.97 (asinā hanti attānaŋ); J iv.118 (asi sunisito), 184; v.45 (here meaning "sickle"), 475 (asiñ ca me maññasi, probably faulty for either "āsiñ ca me" or "āsiñcam me"); Vism 201 (ñāṇâsi the sword of knowledge); PvA 253 (asinā pahaṭa).

-- camma sword & shield Vin ii.192; A iii.93; J vi.449. -- tharu the hilt of a sword DhA iv.66. -- nakha having nails like swords Pgdp 29. -- patta having sword -- like leaves, with swords (knives) for leaves (of the sword -- leaf -- wood in Niraya, a late feature in the descriptions of Purgatory in Indian speculative Theology, see e. g. Mārk -- aṇḍeyapurāṇa xii.24 sq.; Mhbhārata xii.321; Manu iv.90; xii. 75; Scherman, Visionsliteratur pp. 23 sq.) J vi.250 (˚niraya); PvA 221 (˚vana); Sdhp 194. -- pāsa having swords for snares (a class of deities) Miln 191. -- māla ( -- kamma) sword -- garland ( -- torture) J iii.178 (+sīsaŋ chindāpeti); Dāvs iii.35. Preferable to interpretation "sword -- dirt", see māla (mālā). -- lakkhana "swordsign", i.e. (fortune -- telling from) marks or a sword D i.9; J i.455. -- loma having swords for hair S ii.257, cp. Vin iii.106. -- sūna slaughter -- house (so also B.Sk. asisūnā Divy 10, 15; see further detail under "kāma" similes) Vin ii.26; M i.130, 143; A iii.97. -- sūla a swordblade Th 2, 488 (expld. at ThA 287 by adhikuṭṭanatthena, i.e. with reference to the executioner's block, cp. also sattisūla). Asika
Asika
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [asi + ka] having a sword, with a sword in phrase ukkhittɔasika with drawn sword, M i.377; J i.393. Asita
Asita1
[Sk. aśita, pp. of *asati, Sk. aśnāti] having eaten, eating; (nt.) that which is eaten or enjoyed, food M i.57; A iii.30, 32 (˚pīta -- khāyita etc.); PvA 25 (id.); J vi.555 ˚(āsana having enjoyed one's food, satisfied). Cp. āsita1. Asita
Asita2
(adj.) [a + sita pp. of *śri, Sk. aśrita] not clinging to, unattached, independent, free (from wrong desires) D ii.261 (˚âtiga); M i.386; Th 1, 38, 1242 (see Mrs Rh. D. in Brethren 404 note 2); J ii.247; It 97; Sn 251, 519, 593, 686 (Asitavhaya, called the Asita i.e. the Unattached; cp. SnA 487), 698 (id.), 717, 957, 1065 (cp. Nd2 111 & nissaya). -- 89 -- Asita
Asita3
(adj.) [Sk. asita; Idg. *ās, cp. Lat. āreo to be dry, i. e. burnt up; Gr. a)/zw to dry; orig. meaning burnt, hence of burnt, i. e. black colour (of ashes)] black -- blue, black M ii.180 (˚vyābhangī); A iii.5 (id.); Th 2, 480 ( = indanīla ThA 286); J iii.419 (˚âpangin black -- eyed); v. 302; Dāvs i.45. Asita
Asita4
(m. nt.) [fr. asi] a sickle J iii.129; v 46. Asīti
Asīti
(num.) [Sk. aśīti] 80 (on symbolical meaning & freq. application see aṭṭha1 B 1 c, where also most of the ref's. In addition we mention the foll.:) J i.233 (˚hattha 80 hands, i. e. 80 cubits deep); iii.174 (˚sahassa -- vāraṇa -- parivuta); vi.20 (vassasahassāni); Miln 23 (asītiyā bhikkhusahassehi saddhiŋ); Vīsm 46 (satakoṭiyo) DhA i.14, 19 (mahātherā); ii.25 (˚koṭi -- vibhava). Cp. ạ̄sītika. Asu
Asu
(pron.) [Sk. asau (m.), adas (nt.); base amu˚ in oblique cases & derivation, e.g. adv. amutra (q.v.)] pron. dẹmonstr. "that", that one, usually combd. with yo (yaŋ), e. g. asu yo so puriso M i.366; yaŋ aduŋ khettaŋ S iv.315. -> nom. sg. m. asu S iv.195; Miln 242; f. asu J v.396 (asū metri causâ); nt. aduŋ M i.364, 483; A i.250. Of oblique cases e. g. amunā (instr.) A i.250. Cp. also next. Asuka
Asuka
(pron. -- adj.) [asn + ka] such a one, this or that, a certain Vin iii.87; J i.148; PvA 29, 30, 35, 109, 122 (˚ŋ gatiŋ gata). Asuci
Asuci
(adj.) [a + suci] not clean, impure, unclean Sn 75 (˚manussā, see Nd2 112); Pug 27, 36; Sdhp 378, 603. Asucīka
Asucīka
(nt.) [abstr. fr. asuci] impurity, unclean living, defilement Sn 243 (˚missita = asucibhāva -- missita SnA 286. Asubha
Asubha
(adj.) [a + subha] impure, unpleasant, bad, ugly, nasty; nt. ˚ŋ nastiness, impurity. Cp. on term and the Asubha -- meditation, as well as on the 10 asubhas or offensive objects Dhs. trsl. 70 and Cpd. 121 n. 6. -- S iv.111 (asubhato manasikaroti); v.320; Sn 341; Sdhp 368. -- subhâsubha pleasant unpleasant, good & bad Sn 633; J iii. 243; Miln 136.

-- ânupassin realising or intuiting the corruptness (of the body) It 80, 81; DhA i.76. -- kathā talk about impurity Vin iii.68. -- kammaṭṭhāna reflection on impurity DhA iii.425. -- nimitta sign of the unclean i. e. idea of impurity Vism 77. -- bhāvanā contemplation of the impurity (of the body) Vin iii.68. -- saññā idea of impurity D iii.253, 283, 289, 291. -- saññin having an idea of or realising the impurity (of the body) It 93. Asura
Asura
[Vedic asura in more comprehensive meaning; con- nected with Av. ahurō Lord, ahurō mazdā˚; perhaps to Av. anhuš & Lat. erus master] a fallen angel, a Titan; pl. asurā the Titans, a class of mythological beings. Dhpāla at PvA 272 & the C. on J v.186 define them as kāḷakañjaka -- bhedā asurā. The are classed with other similar inferior deities, e. g. with garuḷā, nāgā, yakkhā at Miln 117; with supaṇṇā, gandhabbā, yakkhā at DA i.51. -> The fight between Gods & Titans is also reflected in the oldest books of the Pāli Canon and occurs in identical description at the foll. passages under the title of devâsura -- sangāma: D ii.285; S i.222 (cp. 216 sq.), iv.201 sq., v.447; M i.253; A iv.432. -- Rebirth as an Asura is considered as one of the four unhappy rebirths or evil fates after death (apāyā; viz. niraya, tiracchāna -- yoni, petā or pettivisaya, asurā), e. g. at It 93; J v.186; Pv iv.111, see also apāya. -- Other passages in general: S i.216 sq. (fight of Devas & Asuras); iv.203; A ii.91; iv.198 sq., 206; Sn 681; Nd1 89, 92, 448; DhA i.264 (˚kaññā); Sdhp 366, 436.

-- inda Chief or king of the Titans. Several Asuras are accredited with the rôle of leaders, most commonly Vepacitti (S i.222; iv.201 sq.) and Rāhu (A ii.17, 53; iii.243). Besides these we find Pahārāda (gloss Mahābhadda) at A iv.197. -- kāya the body or assembly of the asuras A i.143; J v.186; ThA 285. -- parivāra a retinue of Asuras A ii.91. -- rakkhasā Asuras and Rakkhasas (Rakṣasas) Sn 310 (defined by Bdhgh at SnA 323 as pabbata -- pāda -- nivāsino dānava -- yakkha -- saññitā). Asuropa
Asuropa
[probably a haplological contraction of asura -- ropa. On various suggestions as to etym. & meaning see Morris's discussion at J P T S. 1893, 8 sq. The word is found as āsulopa in the Asoka inscriptions] anger, malice, hatred; abruptness, want of forbearance Pug 18 = Vbh 357; Dhs 418, 1060, 1115, 1341 (an˚); DhsA 396. Asussūsaŋ
Asussūsaŋ
[ppr. of a + susūsati, Desid. of śru, cp. Sk. śuśrūṣati] not wishing to hear or listen, disobedient J v.121. Asūyaka
Asūyaka
see anasūyaka. Asūra
Asūra
(adj.) [a + sura1] -- 1. not brave, not valiant, co- wardly Sn 439. -- 2. uncouth, stupid J vi.292 (cp. Kern. Toev. p. 48). Asekha
Asekha
(& Asekkha) (adj. n.) [a + sekha] not requiring to be trained, adept, perfect, m. one who is no longer a learner, an expert; very often meaning an Arahant (cp. B.Sk. aśaikṣa occurring only in phrase śaikṣâśaikṣāh those in training & the adepts, e.g. Divy 261, 337; Av. Ś i.269, 335; ii.144) Vin i.62 sq.; iii.24; S i.99; D iii.218, 219; It 51 (asekho sīlakkhandho; v. l. asekkha); Pug 14 ( = arahant); Dhs 584, 1017, 1401; Kvu 303 sq.

-- muni the perfectly Wise DhA iii.321. -- bala the power of an Arahant, enumd. in a set of 10 at Ps ii.173, cp. 176. Asecanaka
Asecanaka
(adj.) [a + secana + ka, fr. sic to sprinkle, cp. B.Sk. asecanaka -- darśana in same meaning e. g. Divy 23, 226, 334] unmixed, unadulterated, i. e. with full and unimpaired properties, delicious, sublime, lovely M i.114; S i.213 (a. ojava "that elixir that no infusion needs" Mrs Rh. D.) = Th 2, 55 (expld. as anāsittakaŋ pakatiyā ɔva mahārasaŋ at ThA 61) = Th 2, 196 (= anāsittakaŋ ojavantaŋ sabhāva -- madhuraŋ ThA 168); S v.321; A iii. 237 sq. Miln 405. Asevanā
Asevanā
(f.) [a + sevanā] not practising, abstinence from Sn 259 ( = abhajanā apayirupāsanā KhA 124). Asesa
Asesa
(adj.) [a + sesa] not leaving a remnant, without a remainder, all, entire, complete Sn 2 sq., 351, 355, 500, 1037 ( = sabba Nd2 113). As ˚ -- (adv.) entirely, fully, completely Sn p. 141 (˚virāga -- nirodha); Miln 212 (˚vacana inclusive statement). Asesita
Asesita
(adj.) [pp. of a + Caus. of śiṣ, see seseti & sissati] leaving nothing over, having nothing left, entire, whole, all J iii.153. Asoka
Asoka1
(adj.) [a + soka, cp. Sk. aśoka] free from sorrow Sn 268 ( = nissoka abbūḷha -- soka -- salla KhA 153); Dh 412; Th 2, 512. Asoka
Asoka2
[Sk. aśoka] the Asoka tree, Jonesia Asoka J v.188; Vv 354, 359 (˚rukkha); Vism 625 (˚ankura); VvA 173 (˚rukkha). Asoṇḍa
Asoṇḍa
(adj.) [a + soṇḍa] not being a drunkard, abstaining from drink J v.116. -- f. asoṇḍī A iii.38. Asotatā
Asotatā
(nt.) [abstr. a + sota + ta, having no ears, being earless J vi.16. Asnāti
Asnāti
[Sk. aśnāti to eat, to take food; the regular Pāli forms are asati (as base) and asanāti] to eat; imper. asnātu J v.376. Asman
Asman
(nt.) [Vedic aśman; the usual P. forms are amha and asama2] stone, rock; only in instr. asmanā SnA 362. Asmasati
Asmasati
[spurious form for the usual assasati = Sk. āśva- sati] to trust, to rely on J v.56 (Pot. asmase). Asmi
Asmi
(I am) see atthi. Asmimāna
Asmimāna
[asmi + māna] the pride that says "I am", pride of self, egotism (same in B.Sk. e.g. Divy 210, 314) Vin i.3; D iii.273; M i.139, 425; A iii.85; Ps i.26; Kvu 212; DhA i.237. Cp. ahaŋ asmi. -- 90 -- Asmiye
Asmiye
1 sg. ind. pres. med. of aś to eat, in sense of a fut. "I shall eat" J v.397, 405 (C. bhuñjissāmi). The form is to be expld. as denom. formn. fr. -- āśa food, = aŋsiyati and with metathesis asmiyati. See also añhati which would correspond either to *aŋśyati or aśnāti (see asati). Assa
Assa1
[for aŋsa1, q. v. for etym.] shoulder; in cpd. assapuṭa shoulder -- bag, knapsack i. e. a bag containing provisions, instr. assupuṭena with provisions. Later exegesis has interpreted this as a bag full of ashes, and vv. ll. as well as Commentators take assa = bhasma ashes (thus also Morris J P T S. 1893, 10 without being able to give an etymology). The word was already misunderstood by Bdhgh. when he explained the Dīgha passage by bhasmapuṭena, sīse chārikaŋ okiritvā ti attho DA i.267. After all it is the same as puṭaŋsa (see under aŋsa1). -- D i.98, cp. A ii.242 (v. l. bhasma˚); DA i.267 (v.l. bhassa˚). Assa
Assa2
[for aŋsa2 = Sk. aśra point, corner, cp. Sk. aśri, Gr. a)/kros & o)cu/s sharp, Lat. acer] corner, point; occurs only in cpd. caturassa four -- cornered, quadrangular, regular (of symmetrical form, Vin ii.316; J iv.46, 492; Pv ii.119. Perhaps also at Th 2, 229 (see under assa3). Occurs also in form caturaŋsa under catur). Assa
Assa3
[Vedic aśva, cp. Av. aspō; Gr. i(/ppos, dial. i(/kkos; Lat. equus; Oir. ech; Gall. epo -- ; Cymr. ep, Goth. aíhva; Os. ehu; Ags. eoh] a horse; often mentioned alongside of and combd. with hatthi (elephant) Vin iii.6 (pañcamattehi assa -- satehi), 52 (enumd. under catuppadā, quadrupeds, with hatthi oṭṭha goṇa gadrabha & pasuka); A ii.207; v.271; Sn 769 (gavâssa). At Th ii.229 the commentary explains caturassa as ʻ four in hand ʼ; but the context shows that the more usual sense of caturassa (see assa2) was probably what the poet meant; Dh 94, 143, 144 (bhadra, a good horse), 380 (id.); Vv 203 (+ assatarī); VvA 78; DhA i.392 (hatthi -- assâdayo); Sdhp 367 (duṭṭh˚).

-- ājāniya [cp. BSk. aśvājāneya Divy 509, 511] a thoroughbred horse, a blood horse A i.77, 244; ii.113 sq., 250 sq.; iii.248, 282 sq.; iv.188, 397; v.166, 323; PvA 216. See also ājāniya. -- âroha one who climbs on a horse, a rider on horseback, N. of an occupation "cavalry" D i.51 (+ hatthâroha; expld. at DA i.156 by sabbe pi assācariyaassavejja -- assabhaṇḍādayo). -- kaṇṇa N. of a tree, Vatica Robusta, lit. "horse -- ear" (cp. similarly Goth. aíhva -- tundi the thornbush, lit. horse -- tooth) J ii.161; iv.209; vi.528. -- khalunka an inferior horse ("shaker"), opp. sadassa. A i.287 = iv.397. -- tthara a horse cover, a horse blanket Vin i.192; D i.7 -- damma a horse to be tamed, a fierce horse, a stallion A ii.112; ˚sārathi a horse trainer A ii. 112, 114; v.323 sq.; DhA iv.4. -- potaka the young of a horse, a foal or colt J ii.288. -- bandha a groom J ii. 98; v.449; DhA i.392. -- bhaṇḍa (for ˚bandha? or should we read ˚paṇḍaka?) a groom or horse -- trainer, a trader in horses Vin i.85 (see on form of word Kern, Toev. p. 35). -- bhaṇḍaka horse -- trappings J ii.113. -- maṇḍala circus Vism 308, cp. M i.446. -- maṇḍalika exercising -- ground Vin iii.6. -- medha N. of a sacrifice: the horse -- sacrifice [Vedic aśvamedha as Np.] S i.76 (v. l. sassa˚); It 21 (+ purisamedha); Sn 303. -- yuddha a horse -- fight D i.7. -- rūpaka a figure of a horse, a toy horse DhA ii.69 (+ hatthi -- rūpaka). -- lakkhaṇa (earning fees by judging) the marks on a horse D i.9. -- laṇḍa horse -- manure, horsedung DhA iv.156 (hatthi -- laṇḍa +). -- vāṇija a horsedealer Vin iii.6. -- sadassa a noble steed of the horse kind A i.289 = iv.397 (in comparison with purisa˚). Assa
Assa4
is gen. dat. sg. of ayaŋ, this. Assa
Assa5
3. sg. Pot. of asmi (see atthi). Assaka
Assaka1
( -- ˚) [assa3 + ka] with a horse, having a horse; anɔ without a horse J vi.515 (+ arathaka). Assaka
Assaka2
(adj.) [a + saka; Sk. asvaka] not having one's own, poor, destitute M i.450; ii.68; A iii.352; Ps i.126 (v. l. asaka). Assatara
Assatara
[Vedic aśvatara, aśva + compar. suffix tara in func- tion of "a kind of", thus lit. a kind of horse, cp. Lat. matertera a kind of mother. i. e. aunt] a mule Dh 322 = DhA i.213; DhA iv.4 (= vaḷavāya gadrabhena jāta); J iv.464 (kambojake assatare sudante; imported from Cambodia); vi.342. -- f. assatarī a she -- mule Vin ii.188; S i.154; ii.241; A ii.73; Miln 166. -- assatarī -- ratha a chariot drawn by she -- mules Vv 203, 208 (T. assatarī ratā) = 438; Pv i.111 (= assatariyutta ratha PvA 56); J vi.355. Assattha
Assattha1
[Vedic aśvattha, expld. in K Z i.467 as aśva -- ttha dial. for aśva -- stha "standing place for horses, which etym. is problematic; it is likely that the Sk. word is borrowed from a local dialect.] the holy fig -- tree, Ficus, Religiosa; the tree under which the Buddha attained enlightenment, i. e. the Bo tree Vin iv.35; D ii.4 (sammā -- sambuddho assatthassa mūle abhisambuddho); S v.96; J i.16 (v.75, in word -- play with assattha2 of v.79). Assattha
Assattha2
[pp. of assasati; cp. BSk. āsvasta Av. Ś i.210] encouraged, comforted A iv.184 (v. l. as gloss assāsaka); Ps i.131 (loka an˚; v. l. assaka); J i.16 (v.79 cp. assattha1); vi.309 ( = laddhassasa C.), 566. Assaddha
Assaddha
(adj.) [a + saddhā] without faith, unbelieving, Sn 663; Pug 13, 20; Dhs 1327; DhA ii.187. Assaddhiya
Assaddhiya
(nt.) [a + saddhiya, in form, but not in meaning a grd. of saddahati, for which usually saddheyya; cp. Sk. aśradheyya incredible] disbelief S i.25; A iii.421; v.113 sq., 146, 148 sq., 158, 161; Vbh 371; DA i.235; Sdhp 80. Assama
Assama
[ā + śram] a hermitage (of a brahmin ascetic esp. a jaṭila) Vin i.24 = iv.108; i.26, 246; iii.147; Sn 979; Sn p. 104, 111; J i.315 (˚pada) v.75 (id.) 321. vi.76 (˚pada). The word is not found anywhere in the Canon in the technical sense of the later Sanskrit law books, where "the 4 āśramas" is used as a t. t. for the four stages in the life of a brahmin priest (not of a brahmin by birth). See Dial. i.211 -- 217. Assamaṇa
Assamaṇa
[a + samaṇa] not a true Samaṇa Vin i.96; Sn 282; Pug 27 (so read for asamaṇa); Pug A 207. -- f. assamaṇī Vìn iv.214. Assaya
Assaya
[ā + sayati, śri] resting place, shelter, refuge, seat DA i.67 (puññ˚). Cp. BSk. rājāśraya Jtm 3156; aśraya also in meaning "body": see Av. Ś. i.175 & Index ii.223. Assava
Assava
(adj.) [ā + sunāti, śru] loyal D i.137; Sn 22, 23, 32; J iv.98; vi.49; Miln 254; an˚ inattentive, not docile DhA i.7. Assavati
Assavati
[ā + sru] to flow J ii.276 ( = paggharati C.). Cp. also āsavati. Assavanatā
Assavanatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. assavana] not listening to, in- attention M i.168. Assavanīya
Assavanīya
(adj.) [a + savanīya] not pleasant to hear Sdhp 82. Assasati
Assasati
[ā + śvas, on semantical inversion of ā & pa see under ā1 3] 1. to breathe, to breathe out, to exhale, J i 163; vi.305 (gloss assāsento passāsento susu ti saddaŋ karonto); Vism 272. Usually in combn. with passasati to inhale, i. e. to breathe in & out, D ii.291 = M i.56, cp. M i.425; J ii.53, cp. v.36. -- 2. to breathe freely or quietly, to feel relieved, to be comforted, to have courage S iv.43; J iv.93 assasitvāna ger. = vissamitvā c.); vi.190 (assāsa imper., with mā soci); med. assase J iv.57 (C. for asmase T.; expld. by vissase), 111 (˚itvā). -- 3. to enter by the breath, to bewitch, enchant, take possession J iv.495 (= assāsa -- vātena upahanati āvisati C.). -- Caus. assāseti. -- pp. assattha2. See also assāsa -- passāsa. -- 91 -- Assāda
Assāda
[ā + sādiyati, svad] taste, sweetness, enjoyment, satisfaction D i.22 (vedanānaŋ samudaya atthangama assāda etc.); M i.85; S ii.84 sq. (˚ânupassin), 170 sq.; iii.27 sq. (ko rūpassa assādo), 62, 102; iv.8 sq., 220; v.193, 203 sq.; A i.50 (˚ânupassin), 258, 260; ii.10; iii.447 (˚diṭṭhi) J i.508; iv.113, Sn 448; Ps i.139 sq., (˚diṭṭhi), 157; cp. i.1017; Pv iv.62 (kām˚); Vbh 368 (˚diṭṭhi); Nett 27 sq.; Miln 388; Vism 76 (paviveka -- rasɔ); Sdhp 37, 51. See also appassāda under appa. Assādanā
Assādanā
(f.) [cp. assāda] sweetness, taste, enjoyment S i.124; Sn 447 ( = sādubhāva SnA 393). Assādeti
Assādeti
[Denom. fr. assāda] to taste S ii.227 (lābha -- sakkāra- silokaŋ); Vism 73 (paviveka -- sukha -- rasaŋ); DhA i.318. Assāraddha
Assāraddha
v. l. at It 111 for asāraddha. Assāvin
Assāvin
(adj.) [ā + sru] only in an˚ not enjoying or finding pleasure, not intoxicated Sn 853 (sātiyesu a. = sāta -- vatthusa kāmaguṇesu taṇhā -- santhava -- virahita SnA 549). See also āsava. Assāsa
Assāsa
[Sk. āśvāsa, ā + śvas] 1. (lit.) breathing, esp. breathing out (so Vism 272), exhalation, opp. to passāsa inhalation, with which often combd. or contrasted; thus as cpd. assāsa -- passāsa meaning breathing (in & out), sign of life, process of breathing, breath D ii.157 = S i.159 = Th 1, 905; D iii.266; M i.243; S i.106; iv.293; v.330, 336; A iv.409; v.135; J ii.146; vi.82; Miln 31, 85; Vism 116, 197. -- assāsa in contrast with passāsa at Ps i.95, 164 sq., 182 sq. -- 2. (fig.) breathing easily, freely or quietly, relief, comfort, consolation, confidence M i.64; S ii.50 (dhamma -- vinaye); iv.254 (param -- assāsa -- ppatta); A i.192; iii.297 sq. (dhamma -- vinaye); iv.185; J vi.309 (see assattha2); Miln 354; PvA 104 (˚matta only a little breathing space); Sdhp 299 (param˚), 313. Assāsaka
Assāsaka
(adj. n.) [fr. assāsa] 1. (cp. assāsa 1) having breath, breathing, in an˚ not able to draw breath Vin iii.84; iv.111. -- 2. (cp. assāsa2) (m. & nt.) that which gives comfort & relief, confidence, expectancy J i.84; vi. 150. Cp. next. Assāsika
Assāsika
(adj.) [fr. assāsa in meaning of assāsa 2, cp. assāsaka 2] only in neg. an˚ not able to afford comfort, giving no comfort or security M i.514; iii.30; J ii.298 ( = aññaŋ assāsetuŋ asamatthaṭāya na assāsika). Cp. BSk. anāśvāsika in ster. phrase anitya adhruva anāśvāsika vipariṇāmadharman Divy 207; Av. Ś. 139, 144; whereas the corresp. Pāli equivalent runs anicca addhuva asassata (= appāyuka) vipariṇāma -- dhamma thus inviting the conjecture that BSk. āśvāsika is somehow distorted out of P. asassata. Assāsin
Assāsin
(adj.) [Sk. āśvāsin] reviving, cheering up, consoled, happy S iv.43 (an˚). Assāseti
Assāseti
[Caus. of assasati] to console, soothe, calm, com- fort, satisfy J vi.190, 512; DhA i.13. Assita
Assita
(adj.) [Sk. aśrita, ā + pp. of śri] dependent on, relying, supported by (acc.); abiding, living in or on D ii.255 (tad˚); Vv 5016 (sīho va guhaŋ a.); Th 1, 149 (janaŋ evɔ assito jano); Sdhp 401. Assirī
Assirī
(adj.) [a + sirī] without splendour, having lost its brightness, in assirī viya khāyati Nett 62 = Ud 79 (which latter has sassarɔ iva, cp. C. on passage l. c.). Assu
Assu1
(nt.) [Vedic aśru, Av. asrū, Lith aszarà, with etym. not definitely clear: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under lacrima] a tear Vin i.87 (assūni pavatteti to shed tears); S ii.282 (id.); Dh 74; Th 2, 496 (cp. ThA 289); KhA 65; DhA i.12 (˚puṇṇa -- netta with eyes full of tears); ii.98; PvA 125.

-- dhārā a shower of tears DhA iv.15 (pavatteti to shed). -- mukha (adj.) with tearful face [cp. BSk. aśrumukha e. g. Jtm 3116] D i.115, 141; Dh 67; Pug 56; DA i.284; PvA 39. -- mocana shedding of tears PvA 18. Assu
Assu2
is 3rd pl. pot. of atthi. Assu
Assu3
(indecl.) [Sk. sma] expletive part. also used in emphatic sense of "surely, yes, indeed" Sn 231 (according to Fausböll, but preferably with P. T. S. ed. as tayas su for tayɔ assu, cp. KhA 188); Vv 324 (assa v. l. SS) = VvA 135 (assū ti nipāta -- mattaŋ). Perhaps we ought to take this assu3 together with the foll. assu4 as a modification of ssu (see su2). Cp. āsu. Assu
Assu4
part. for Sk. svid (and sma?) see under su2. Ac- cording to this view Fausbölls reading kenɔ assu at Sn 1032 is to be emended to kena ssu. Assuka
Assuka
(nt.) [assu1 + ka] a tear Vin ii.289; Sn 691; Pv iv.53. Assutavant
Assutavant
(adj.) [a + sutavant] one who has not heard, ignorant M i.1, 8, 135; Dhs 1003, 1217, cp. Dhs trsl. 258. Aha
Aha1
(indecl.) [cp. Sk. aha & P. aho; Germ. aha; Lat. ehem etc.] exclamation of surprise, consternation, pain etc. "ch! alas! woe!". Perhaps to be seen in cpd. ˚kāmā miserable pleasures lit. "woe to these pleasures!") gloss at ThA 292 for T. kāmakāmā of Th 2, 506 (expld. by C. as "ahā ti lāmaka -- pariyāyo"). See also ahaha. Aha
Aha2
( -- ˚) & Aho (˚ -- ) (nt.) [Vedic ahan & ahas] a day. (1) ˚aha only in foll. cpds. & cases: instr. ekâhena in one day J vi. 366; loc. tadahe on that (same) day PvA 46; acc. katipâhaŋ (for) some or several days J i.152 etc. (kattpâha); sattāhaŋ seven days, a week Vin i.1; D ii. 14; J iv.2, and freq.; anvahaŋ daily Dāvs iv.8. -- The initial a of ahaŋ (acc.) is elided after i, which often appears lengthened: kati ɔhaŋ how many days? S i.7; ekâha -- dvī ɔhaŋ one or two days J i.292; dvīha -- tī ɔhan two or three days J ii.103; VvA 45; ekâha -- dvī ɔhɔ accayena after the lapse of one or two days J i.253. -- A doublet of aha is anha (through metathesis from ahan), which only occurs in phrases pubbanho & sāyanha (q. v.); an adj. der. fr. aha is ˚ahika: see pañcâhika (consisting of 5 days). -- (2) aho˚ in cpd. ahoratta (m. & nt.) [cp. BSk. ahorātraŋ Av. Ś. i.209] & ahoratti (f.) day & night, occurring mostly in oblique cases and adverbially in acc. ahorattaŋ: M i.417 (˚ânusikkhin); Dh 226 (id.; expld. by divā ca rattiñ ca tisso sikkhā sikkhamāna DhA iii. 324); Th 1, 145 (ahorattā accayanti); J iv.108 (˚ānaŋ accaye); Pv ii.131 (˚ŋ); Miln 82 (ena). -- ahorattiŋ Dh 387; J vi.313 (v. l. BB for T. aho va rattiŋ). Ahaŋ
Ahaŋ
(prom.) [Vedic ahaŋ = Av. azəm; Gr. e)gw/(n); Lat. ego; Goth. ik, Ags. ic, Ohg. ih etc.] pron. of 1st person "I". -> nom. sg. ahaŋ S iii.235; A iv.53; Dh 222, 320; Sn 172, 192, 685, 989, 1054, 1143; J i.61; ii.159. -- In pregnant sense (my ego, myself, I as the one & only, i. e. egotistically) in foll. phrases: yaŋ vadanti mama . . na te ahaŋ S i.116, 123; ahaŋ asmi "I am" (cp. ahaŋkāra below) S i.129; iii.46, 128 sq.; iv.203; A ii.212, 215 sq.; Vism 13; ahaŋ pure ti "I am the first" Vv 8450 (= ahamahaŋkārā ti VvA 351). -- gen. dat. mayhaŋ Sn 431, 479; J i.279; ii.160, mama S i.115; Sn 22, 23, 341, 997; J ii.159, & mamaŋ S i.116; Sn 253 (= mama C.), 694, 982. -- instr. mayā Sn 135, 336, 557, 982; J i.222, 279. -- acc. maŋ Sn 356, 366, 425, 936; J ii. 159; iii.26, & mamaŋ J iii.55, 394. -- loc. mayi Sn 559; J iii 188. The enclitic form in the sg. is me, & functions in diff. cases, as gen. (Sn 983; J ii.159), acc. (Sn 982), instr. (J i.138, 222), & abl. -- Pl. nom. mayaŋ (we) Sn 31, 91, 167, 999; J ii.159; vi.365, amhe J ii. 129, & vayaŋ (q. v.). -- gen. amhākaŋ J i.221; ii.159 & asmākaŋ Sn p. 106. -- acc. amhe J i.222; ii.415 & asme J iii.359. -- instr. amhehi J i.150; ii.417 & asmābhi ThA 153 (Ap. 132). -- loc. amhesu J i.222. -> The enclitic form for the pl. is no (for acc. dat & gen.): see under vayaŋ.

-- kāra selfishness, egotism, arrogance (see also mamaŋkāra) M iii.18, 32; S ii.253; iii.80, 136, 169 sq.; iv.41, 197, 202; A i.132 sq.; iii.444; Ud 70; Nett 127, and freq. passim. -- 92 -- Ahaha
Ahaha
[onomat. after exclamation ahahā: see aha1] 1. ex- clamation of woe J iii.450 (ahahā in metre). -- 2. (nt.) N. of a certain division of Purgatory (Niraya), lit. oh woe! A v.173 = Sn p. 126. Ahāsa
Ahāsa
[a + hāsa, cp. Sk. ahāsa & aharṣa] absence of exult- ancy, modesty J iii.466 ( = an -- ubbillāvitattaŋ C.). Ahāsi
Ahāsi
3rd sg. aor. of harati (q. v.). Ahi
Ahi
[Vedic ahi, with Av. aži perhaps to Lat. anguis etc., see Walde Lat. Wtb. s. v.] a snake Vin ii.109; D i.77; S iv.198; A iii.306 sq.; iv.320; v.289; Nd1 484; Vism 345 (+ kukkura etc.); VvA 100; PvA 144.

-- kuṇapa the carcase of a snake Vin iii.68 = M i.73 = A iv.377. -- gāha a snake catcher or trainer J vi.192. -- guṇṭhika (? reading uncertain, we find as vv. ll. ˚guṇḍika, ˚guṇṭika & ˚kuṇḍika; the BSk. paraphrase is ˚tuṇḍika Divy 497. In view of this uncertainty we are unable to pronounce a safe etymology; it is in all probability a dialectical; may be Non -- Aryan, word. See also under kuṇḍika & guṇṭhika & cp. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1886, 153) a snake charmer J i.370 (˚guṇḍ˚); ii.267; iii.348 (˚guṇḍ˚); iv.456 (T. ˚guṇṭ; v. l. BB ˚kuṇḍ˚) 308 (T. ˚kuṇḍ˚, v. l. SS ˚guṇṭh˚), 456 (T. ˚guṇṭ˚; v. l. BB ˚kuṇḍ); vi.171 (T. ˚guṇḍ˚; v. l. BB ˚kuṇḍ˚); Miln 23, 305. -- chattaka (nt.) "a snake's parasol", a mushroom D iii.87; J ii.95; Ud 81 (C. on viii.5, 1). -- tuṇḍika = ˚guṇṭhika Vism 304, 500. -- peta a Peta in form of a snake DhA ii.63. -- mekhalā "snake -- girdle", i. e. outfit or appearance of a snake DhA i.139. -- vātaka ( -- roga) N. of a certain disease ("snakewind -- sickness") Vin i.78; J ii.79; iv.200; DhA i.169, 187, 231; iii.437. -- vijjā "snake -- craft", i. e. fortune -- telling or sorcery by means of snakes D i.9 (= sappa -- daṭṭhatikicchana -- vijjā cɔ eva sappɔ avhāyana -- vijjā ea "the art of healing snake bites as well as the invocation of snakes (for magic purposes)" DA i.93). Ahiŋsaka
Ahiŋsaka
(adj.) [fr. ahiŋsā] not injuring others, harmless, humane, S i.165; Th 1, 879; Dh 225; J iv.447. Ahiŋsā
Ahiŋsā
(f.) [a + hiŋsā] not hurting, humanity, kindness D iii.147; A i.151; Dh 261, 270; J iv.71; Miln 402. Ahita
Ahita
(adj. -- n.) [a + hita] not good or friendly, harmful, bad; unkindliness D iii.246; Dh 163; Sn 665, 692; Miln 199 (˚kāma). Ahirika & Ahirīka
Ahirika
& Ahirīka (adj.) [fr. a + hirī] shameless, unscru- pulous D iii.212, 252, 282; A ii.219; Dh 244; Sn 133 (˚īka); It 27 (˚īka); Pug 19 (also nt. unscrupulousness); Dhs 365; Nett 39, 126; DhA iii.352. Ahīnindriya
Ahīnindriya
see discussed under abhinindriya. Ahuvāsiŋ
Ahuvāsiŋ
1st sg. pret. of hotī (q. v.) I was Vv 826 ( = ahosiŋ VvA 321). Ahuhāliya
Ahuhāliya
(nt.) [onomat.] a hoarse & loud laugh J iii.223 ( = danta -- vidaŋsaka -- mahā -- hasita C.). Ahe
Ahe
(indecl.) [ = aho, cp. aha1] exclamation of surprise or bewilderment: alas! woe etc., perhaps in cpd. ahevana a dense forest (lit. oh! this forest, alas! the forest (i. e. how big it is) J v.63 (uttamāhevanandaho, if reading is correct, which is not beyond doubt. C. on p. 64 expls. as "ahevanaŋ vuccati vanasaṇḍo"). Aho
Aho
(indecl.) [Sk. aho, for etym. see aha1] exclamation of surprise, astonishment or consternation: yea, indeed, well; I say! for sure! VvA 103 (aho ti acchariyɔ atthena nipāto); J i.88 (aho acchariyaŋ aho abbhutaŋ), 140. Usually combd. with similar emphatic particles, e. g. aho vata DhA ii.85; PvA 131 ( = sādhu vata); aho vata re D i. 107; Pv ii.94 5. Cp. ahe. Ahosikamma
Ahosi
-- kamma (nt.) an act or thought whose kamma has no longer any potential force: Cpd. 145. At p. 45 ahosikakamma is said to be a kamma inhibited by a more powerful one. See Buddhaghosa in Vism. Chap. xix. -- Ā. Ā
Ā1
(indecl.) [Vedic ā, prep. with acc., loc., abl., meaning "to, towards", & also "from". Orig. an emphatic -- deictic part. (Idg. *ē) = Gr. h)_ surely, really; Ohg. -- ā etc., increment of a (Idg. *e), as in Sk. a -- sau; Gr. e\ kei_ (cp. a3), see Brugmann, Kurze Vergl. Gr. 464, 465] a frequent prefix, used as well -- defined simple base -- prefix (with rootderivations), but not as modification (i. e. first part of a double prefix cpd. like sam -- ā -- dhi) except in one case ā -- ni -- saŋsa (which is doubtful & of diff. origin, viz. from combn. āsaŋsa -- nisaŋsa, see below 3b). It denotes either touch (contact) or a personal (close) relation to the object (ā ti anussaraṇɔ atthe nipāto PvA 165), or the aim of the action expressed in the verb. -- (1.) As prep. c. abl. only in J in meaning "up to, until, about, near" J vi.192 (ā sahassehi = yāva s. C.), prob. a late development. As pref. in meaning "forth, out, to, towards, at, on" in foll. applications: -- (a) aim in general or touch in particular (lit.), e. g. ākaḍḍhati pull to, along or up; ˚kāsa shining forth; ˚koṭeti knock at; ˚gacchati go towards; ˚camati rinse over; ˚neti bring towards, ad -- duce; ˚bhā shining forth; ˚bhujati bend in; ˚masati touch at; ˚yata stretched out; ˚rabhati at -- tempt; ˚rohana a -- scending; ˚laya hanging on; ˚loketi look at; ˚vattati ad -- vert; ˚vahati bring to; ˚vāsa dwelling at; ˚sādeti touch; ˚sīdati sit by; ˚hanati strike at. -- (b) in reflexive function: close relation to subject or person actively concerned, e. g. ādāti take on or up (to oneself); ˚dāsa looking at, mirror; ˚dhāra support; ˚nandati rejoice; ˚nisaŋsa subjective gain; ˚bādha being affected; ˚modita pleased; ˚rakkha guarding; ˚rādhita satisfied; ˚rāma (personal) delight in; ˚lingati embrace (to oneself); ˚hāra taking to (oneself). -- (c) in transitive function: close relation to the object passively concerned, e. g. āghātana killing; ˚carati indulge in; ˚cikkhati point ont, explain; ˚jīva living on; ˚ṇāpeti give an order to somebody; ˚disati point out to some one; ˚bhindati cut; ˚manteti ad -- dress; ˚yācati pray to; ˚roceti speak to; siñcati besprinkle; ˚sevati indulge in. -- (d) out of meaning (a) develops that of an intensive -- frequentative prefix in sense of "all -- round, completely, very much", e. g. ākiṇṇa strewn all over, ˚kula mixed up; ˚dhuta moved about; ˚rāva shouting out or very much; ˚luḷati move about; ˚hiṇḍati roam about. -- 2. Affinities. Closely related in meaning and often interchanging are the foll. prep. (prefixes): anu (˚bhati), abhi (˚saŋsati), pa (˚tapati), paṭi (˚kankhati) in meaning 1 a -- c; and vi (˚kirati, ˚ghāta, ˚cameti, ˚lepa, ˚lopa), sam (˚tapati, ˚dassati) in meaning 1 d. See also 3b. -- 3. Combinations: (a) Intensifying combns. of other modifying prefixes with ā as base: anu + ā (anvā -- gacchati, ˚disati, ˚maddati, ˚rohati, ˚visati, ˚sanna, ˚hata), paṭi + ā (paccā -- janati, ˚ttharati, ˚dāti, ˚savati), pari + ā (pariyā -- ñāta, ˚dāti, ˚pajjati, ˚harati), sam + ā (samā -- disati, ˚dāna, ˚dhi, ˚pajjati, ˚rabhati). -- (b) Contrast -- combns. with other pref. in a double cpd. of noun, adj. or verb (cp. above 2) in meaning of "up & down, in & out, to & fro"; ā + ni: āvedhika -- nibbedhika, āsaŋsa -- nisaŋsa (contracted to ānisaŋsa), āsevita -- nisevita; ā + pa: assasatipassasati (where both terms are semantically alike; in exegesis however they have been differentiated in a way which looks like a distortion of the original meaning, viz. assasati is taken as "breathing out", passasati as "breathing in": see Vism 271), assāsa -- passāsa, āmoditapamodita, āhuna -- pāhuna, āhuneyya -- pāhuneyya; ā + paccā: ākoṭita -- paccākoṭita; ā + pari: ākaḍḍhana -- parikaḍḍhana, āsankita -- parisankita; ā + vi: ālokita -- vilokita, āvāha -- vivāha, āveṭhana -- viniveṭhana; a + sam: allāpa -- sallāpa: ā + samā: āciṇṇa -- samāciṇṇa. -- 4. Before double consonants ā is shortened to a and words containing ā in this form are to be found under a˚, e. g. akkamaṇa, akkhitta, acchādeti, aññāta, appoṭeti, allāpa, assāda. -- 93 -- Ā˚
Ā˚2
guṇa or increment of a˚ in connection with such suf- fixes as -- ya, -- iya, -- itta. So in āyasakya fr. ayasaka; āruppa from arūpa; ārogya fr. aroga; ālasiya fr. alasa; ādhipacca fr. adhipati; ābhidosika fr. abhidosa etc. Ā˚
Ā˚3
of various other origins (guṇa e. g. of ṛ or lengthening of ordinary root a˚), rare, as ālinda (for alinda), āsabha (fr. usabha). Ā˚
Ā˚4
infix in repetition -- cpds. denoting accumulation or variety (by contrast with the opposite, cp. ā1 3b), constitutes a guṇa -- or increment -- form of neg. pref. a (see a2), as in foll.: phalâphala all sorts of fruit (lit. what is fruit & not fruit) freq. in Jātakas, e. g. i.416; ii.160; iii.127; iv.220, 307, 449; v.313; vi.520; kāraṇâkāraṇāni all sorts of duties J vi.333; DhA i.385; khaṇḍâkhaṇḍa pêle -- mêle J i.114; iii.256; gaṇḍâgaṇḍa a mass of boils DhA iii.297; cirâciraŋ continually Vin iv.261; bhavâbhava all kinds of existences Sn 801, cp. Nd1 109; Nd2 664; Th 1, 784 (˚esu = mahant -- âmahantesu bh. C., see Brethren 305); rūpârūpa the whole aggregate ThA 285; etc. Ākankhati
Ākankhati
[ā + kānkṣ, cp. kankhati] to wish for, think of, desire; intend, plan, design Vin ii.244 (˚amāna); D i.78, 176; S i.46; Sn 569 (˚amāna); Sn p. 102 ( = icchati SnA 436); DhA i.29; SnA 229; VvA 149; PvA 229. Ākankhā
Ākankhā
f. [fr. ā + kānkṣ] longing, wish; as adj. at Th 1, 1030. Ākaḍḍhati
Ākaḍḍhati
[ā + kaḍḍhati] to pull along, pull to (oneself), drag or draw out, pull up Vin ii.325 (Bdhgh. for apakassati, see under apakāsati); iv.219; J i.172, 192, 417; Miln 102, 135; ThA 117 (˚eti); VvA 226; PvA 68. -> Pass. ākaḍḍhiyati J ii.122 (˚amāna -- locana with eyes drawn away or attracted); Miln 102; Vism 163; VvA 207 (˚amāna -- hadaya with torn heart). -- pp. ākaḍḍhita. Ākaḍḍhana
Ākaḍḍhana
(nt.) [fr. ākaḍḍhati] drawing away or to, pulling out, distraction VvA 212 (˚parikaḍḍhana pulling about); DhsA 363; Miln 154 (˚parikaḍḍhana), 352. -- As f. Vin iii.121. Ākaḍḍhita
Ākaḍḍhita
[pp. of akaḍḍheti] pulled out, dragged along; upset, overthrown J iii.256 ( = akkhitta2). Ākantana
Ākantana
(?) a possible reading, for the dürakantana of the text at Th 1, 1123, for which we might read durākantana. Ākappa
Ākappa
[cp. Sk. ākalpa ā + kappa] 1. attire, appearance, Vin i.44 (an˚) = ii.213; J i.505. -- 2. deportment Dhs 713 (ā˚ gamanādi -- ākāro DhsA 321).

-- sampanna, suitably attired, well dressed, A iii.78; J iv.542; an˚ sampanna, ill dressed, J i.420. Ākampita
Ākampita
[pp. of ākampeti, Caus. of ā + kamp] shaking, trembling Miln 154 (˚hadaya). Ākara
Ākara
[cp. Sk. ākara] a mine, usually in cpd. ratan -- ākara a mine of jewels Th 1, 1049; J ii.414; vi. 459; Dpvs i.18. -- Cp. also Miln 356; VvA 13. Ākassati
Ākassati
[ā + kassati] to draw along, draw after, plough, cultivate Nd1 428. Ākāra
Ākāra
[a + karoti, kṛ] "the (way of) making", i. e. (1) state, condition J i.237 (avasan˚ condition of inhabitability); ii.154 (patan˚ state of falling, labile equilibrium), cp. paṇṇ˚. -- (2) property, quality, attribute D i.76 (anāvila sabb˚ -- sampanna endowed with all good qualities, of a jewel); ii.157 (˚varûpeta); J ii.352 (sabb˚ paripuṇṇa altogether perfect in qualities). -- (3) sign, appearance, form, D i.175; J i.266 (chātak˚ sign of hunger); Miln 24 (˚ena by the sign of . .); VvA 27 (therassa ā. form of the Th.); PvA 90, 283 (rañño ā. the king's person); Sdhp 363. -- (4) way, mode, manner, sa -- ākāra in all their modes D i.13 = 82 = iii.111; J i.266 (āgaman˚ the mode of his coming). Esp. in instr. sg. & pl. with num. or pron. (in this way, in two ways etc.): chahɔākārehi in a sixfold manner Nd2 680 (cp. kāraṇehi in same sense); Nett 73, 74 (dvādasahɔākārehi); Vism 613 (navahɔākārehi indriyāni tikkhāni bhavanti); PvA 64 (yenɔākārena āgato tenɔākārena gato as he came so he went), 99 (id.). -> (5) reason, ground, account D i.138, 139; Nett 4, 8 sq., 38; DhA i.14; KhA 100 (in expln. of evaŋ). In this meaning freq. with dass (dasseti, dassana, nidassana etc.) in commentary style "what is meant by", the (statement of) reason why or of, notion, idea PvA 26 (dātabb˚dassana), 27 (thoman˚ -- dassana), 75 (kāruññ ˚ŋ dassesi), 121 (pucchan˚ -- nidassanaŋ what has been asked); SnA 135 (˚nidassana).

-- parivitakka study of conditions, careful consideration, examination of reasons S ii.115; iv.138; A ii.191 = Nd2 151. Ākāraka
Ākāraka
(nt.) [ākāra + ka] appearance; reason, manner (cp. ākāra4) J i.269 (ākārakena = kāraṇena C.). Ākāravant
Ākāravant
(adj.) [fr. ākāra] having a reason, reasonable, founded M i.401 (saddhā). Ākāsa
Ākāsa1
[Sk. ākāśa fr. ā + kāś, lit. shining forth, i. e. the illuminated space] air, sky, atmosphere; space. On the concept see Cpd. 5, 16, 226. On a fanciful etym. of ākāsa (fr. ā + kassati of kṛṣ) at DhsA 325 see Dhs trsl. 178. -> D i.55 (˚ŋ indriyāni sankamanti the sense -- faculties pass into space); iii.224, 253, 262, 265; S iii.207; iv.218; v.49, 264; J i.253; ii.353; iii.52, 188; iv.154; vi.126; Sn 944, 1065; Nd1 428; Pv ii.118; SnA 110, 152; PvA 93; Sdhp 42, 464. -- ākāsena gacchati to go through the air PvA 75 (āgacch˚), 103, 105, 162; ˚ena carati id. J ii.103; ˚e gacchati id. PvA 65 (cando). -- Formula "ananto ākāso" freq.; e. g. at D i.183; A ii.184; iv. 40, 410 sq.; v.345.

-- anta "the end of the sky", the sky, the air (on ˚anta see anta1 4) J vi.89. -- ānañca (or ânañca) the infinity of space, in cpd. ˚āyatana the sphere or plane of the infinity of space, the "space -- infinity -- plane", the sphere of unbounded space. The consciousness of this sphere forms the first one of the 4 (or 6) higher attainments or recognitions of the mind, standing beyond the fourth jhāna, viz. (1) ākās˚, (2) viññāṇɔānañc -- āyatana (3) ākiñcaññ˚, (4) nɔeva saññānâsaññ˚, (5) nirodha, (6) phala. -- D i.34, 183; ii.70, 112, 156; iii.224, 262 sq.; M i.41, 159.; iii. 27, 44; S v.119; Ps i.36; Dhs 205, 501, 579, 1418; Nett 26, 39; Vism 326, 340, 453; DA i.120 (see Nd2 under ākāsa; Dhs 265 sq.; Dhs trsl. 71). As classed with jhāna see also Nd2 672 (sādhu -- vihārin). -- kasiṇa one of the kasiṇɔāyatanas (see under kasiṇa) D iii.268; A i.41. -- gangā N. of the celestial river J i.95; iii.344. -- gamana going through the air (as a trick of elephants) Miln 201. -- cārika walking through the air J ii.103. -- cārin = ˚cārika VvA 6. -- ṭṭha living in the sky (of devatā) Bu i.29; Miln 181, 285; KhA 120; SnA 476. -- tala upper story, terrace on the top of a palace SnA 87. -- dhātu the element of space D iii.247; M i.423; iii.31; A i.176; iii.34; Dhs 638. Ākāsa
Ākāsa2
(nt.?) a game, playing chess ʻ in the air ʼ (sans voir) Vin ii.10 = D i.6 (= aṭṭhapada -- dasapadesu viya ākāse yeva kiḷanaŋ DA i.85). Ākāsaka
Ākāsaka
(adj.) [ākāsa + ka] being in or belonging to the air or sky J vi.124. -- 94 -- Ākāsati
Ākāsati
[fr. ākāsa1] to shine J vi.89. Ākiñcañña
Ākiñcañña
(nt.) [abstr. fr. akiñcana] state of having nothing, absence of (any) possessions; nothingness (the latter as philosophical t. t.; cp. below ˚āyatana & see Dhs trsl. 74). -- Sn 976, 1070, 1115 (˚sambhava, cp. Nd2 116); Th 2, 341 ( = akiñcanabhāva ThA 240; trsl. "cherish no wordly wishes whatsoëer"); Nd2 115, see ākāsa; Miln 342.

-- āyatana realm or sphere of nothingness (cp. ākāsa˚) D i.35, 184; ii.156; iii.224, 253, 262 sq.; M i.41, 165; ii.254, 263; iii.28, 44, S iv.217; A i.268; iv.40, 401; Ps i.36; Nett 26, 39; Vism 333. See also jhāna & vimokkha. Ākiṇṇa
Ākiṇṇa
[pp. of ākirati] 1. strewn over, beset with, crowded, full of, dense, rich in (˚ -- ) Vin iii.130 (˚loma with dense hair); S i.204 (˚kammanta "in motley tasks engaged"); iv.37 (gāmanto ā. bhikkhūhi etc.); A iii.104 (˚vihāro); iv.4; v.15 (an˚ C. for appakiṇṇa); Sn 408 (˚varalakkhaṇa = vipula -- varalakkh˚ SnA 383); Pv ii.124 (nānā -- dijagaṇ˚ = āyutta PvA 157); Pug 31; PvA 32 (= parikiṇṇa); Sdhp 595. -- Freq. in idiomatic phrase describing a flourishing city "iddha phīta bahujana ākiṇṇa -- manussa", e. g. D i.211; ii.147 (˚yakkha for ˚manussa; full of yakkhas, i. e. under their protection); A iii.215; cp. Miln 2 (˚jana -- manussa). -- 2. (uncertain whether to be taken as above 1 or as equal to avakiṇṇa fr. avakirati 2) dejected, base, vile, ruthless S i.205 = J iii.309 = 539 = SnA 383. At K. S. 261, Mrs. Rh. D. translates "ruthless" & quotes C. as implying twofold exegesis of (a) impure, and (b) hard, ruthless. It is interesting to notice that Bdhgh. explains the same verse differently at SnA 383, viz. by vipula˚, as above under Sn 408, & takes ākiṇṇaludda as vipulaludda, i. e. beset with cruelty, very or intensely cruel, thus referring it to ākiṇṇa 1. Ākirati
Ākirati
[ā + kirati] to strew over, scatter, sprinkle, disperse, fill, heap Sn 665; Dh 313; Pv ii.49 (dānaŋ vipulaŋ ākiri = vippakirati PvA 92); Miln 175, 238, 323 (imper. ākirāhi); Sn 383. -- pp. ākiṇṇa. Ākiritatta
Ākiritatta
(nt.) [ākirita + tta; abstr. fr. ākirita, pp. of ākirati Caus.] the fact or state of being filled or heaped with Miln 173 (sakataŋ dhaññassa ā). Ākilāyati
Ākilāyati
v. l. at KhA 66 for āgilāyati. Ākucca
Ākucca
(or ˚ā?) [etym. unknown, prob. non -- Aryan] an iguana J vi.538 (C. godhā; gloss amattɔākuccā). Ākurati
Ākurati
[onomat. to sound -- root *kur = *kor as in Lat. cornix, corvus etc. See gala note 2 B and cp. kukkuṭa kokila, khaṭa etc., all words expressing a rasping noise in the throat. The attempts at etym. by Trenckner (Miln p. 425 as Denom. of ākula) & Morris (J.P.T.S. 1886, 154 as contr. Denom. of ankura "intumescence", thus meaning "to swell") are hardly correct] to be hoarse Miln 152 (kaṇṭho ākurati). Ākula
Ākula
(adj.) [ā + *kul of which Sk. -- P. kula, to Idg *qṷel to turn round, cp. also cakka & carati; lit. meaning "revolving quickly", & so "confused"] entangled, confused, upset, twisted, bewildered J i.123 (salākaggaŋ ˚ŋ karoti to upset or disturb); Vv 849 (andha˚); PvA 287 (an˚ clear). Often reduplicated as ākulākula thoroughly confused Miln 117, 220; PvA 56; ākula -- pākula Ud 5 (so read for akkula -- pakkula); ākula -- samākula J vi.270. -> On phrase tantākula -- jātā gulā -- guṇṭhika -- jātā see guḷā. Ākulaka
Ākulaka
(adj.) [fr. ākula] entangled D ii.55 (tant˚ for the usual tantākula, as given under guḷā). Ākulanīya
Ākulanīya
(adj.) [grd. of ā + *kulāyati, Denom. of kula] in an˚ not to be confounded or upset PvA 118. Ākulī
Ākulī
( -- puppha) at KhA 60 (milāta˚) read (according to Index p. 870) as milāta -- bakula -- puppha. Vism 260 (id. p.) however reads ākulī -- puppha "tangle -- flower" (?), cp. Ud 5, gāthā 7 bakkula, which is preferably to be read as pākula. Ākoṭana
Ākoṭana1
(nt.) [fr. ākoṭeti] beating on, knocking M i.385; Miln 63, 306; DhsA 144. Ākoṭana
Ākoṭana2
(adj.) [ = ākoṭana1] beating, driving, inciting, urging J vi.253 (f. ākoṭanī of paññā, expld. by "nivāraṇapatoda -- laṭṭhi viya paññā koṭinī hoti" p. 254). Ākoṭita
Ākoṭita
[pp. of ākoṭeti] -- 1. beaten, touched, knocked against J i.303; Miln 62 (of a gong). -- 2. pressed, beaten down (tight), flattened, in phrase ākoṭita -- paccākoṭita flattened & pressed all round (of the cīvara) S ii. 281; DhA i.37. Ākoṭeti
Ākoṭeti
[a + koṭṭeti, Sk. kuṭṭayati; BSk. ākoṭayati e. g. Divy 117 dvāraŋ trir ā˚, Cowell "break" (?); Av. Ś. Index p. 222 s. v.] -- 1. to beat down, pound, stamp J i.264. -> 2. to beat, knock, thrash Vin ii.217; J ii.274; PvA 55 (aññamaññaŋ); Sdhp 159. -- 3. Esp. with ref. to knocking at the door, in phrases aggaḷaŋ ākoṭeti to beat on the bolt D i.89; A iv.359; v.65; DA i.252 (cp. aggaḷa); dvāraŋ ā. J v 217; DhA ii.145; or simply ākoṭeti Vv 8117 (ākoṭayitvāna = appoṭetvā VvA 316). -- 4. (intrs.) to knock against anything J i.239. -- pp. ākoṭita (q. v.). Caus. ii. ākoṭapeti J iii.361. Ākhu
Ākhu
[Vedic ākhu, fr. ā + khan, lit. the digger in, i. e. a mole; but given as rat or mouse by Halāyudha] a mouse or rat Pgdp 10. Āgacchati
Āgacchati
[ā + gacchati, gam] to come to or towards, approach, go back, arive etc.

I. Forms (same arrangement as under gacchati): (1) √gacch: pres. āgacchati D i.161; J ii.153; Pv iv.151; fut. āgacchissati J iii.53; aor. āgacchi Pv ii.133; PvA 64. -- (2) √gam: aor. āgamāsi PvA 81, āgamā D i.108; J iii.128, and pl. āgamiŋsu J i.118; fut. āgamissati VvA 3; PvA 122; ger. āgamma (q. v.) & āgantvā J i.151; Miln 14; Caus. āgameti (q. v.). -- (3) √gā: aor. āgā Sn 841; Pv i.123 ( = āgacchi PvA 64). -- pp. āgata (q. v.).

II. Mcanings: (1) to come to, approach, arrive D i.108; Pv i.113; ii.133; Miln 14; to return, to come back (cp. āgata) PvA 81, 122. -- (2) to come into, to result, deserve (cp. āgama2) D i.161 (gārayhaŋ ṭhānaŋ deserve blame, come to be blamed); Pv iv.151 (get to, be a profit to = upakappati PvA 241). -- (3) to come by, to come out to (be understood as), to refer or be referred to, to be meant or understood (cp. āgata 3 & āgama 3) J i.118 (tīṇi piṭakāni āgamiŋsu); SnA 321; VvA 3. See also āgamma. Āgata
Āgata
[pp. of āgacchati] (1) come, arrived Miln 18 (˚kā- raṇa the reason of his coming); VvA 78 (˚ṭṭhāna); PvA 81 (kiŋ āgatɔattha why have you come here) come by, got attained (˚ -- ) A ii.110 = Pug 48 (˚visa); Mhvs xiv. 28 (˚phala = anāgānuphala) -- āgatɔāgatā (pl.) people coming & going, passers by, all comers PvA 39, 78, 129; VvA 190 (Ep. of sangha). -- svɔāgata "wel -- come", greeted, hailed; nt. welcome, hail Th 2, 337; Pv iv.315, opp. durāgata not liked, unwelcome, A ii.117, 143, 153; iii. 163; Th 2, 337. -- (2) come down, handed down (by memory, said of texts) D i.88; DhA ii.35; KhA 229; VvA 30; āgatāgamo, one to whom the āgama, or the āgamas, have been handed down, Vin i.127, 337; ii 8; iv.158; A ii.147; Miln 19, 21. -- (3) anāgata not come yet, i. e. future; usually in combn. with atīta (past) & paccuppanna (present): see atīta and anāgata. Āgati
Āgati
(f.) [ā + gati] coming, coming back, return S iii.53; J ii.172. Usually opp. to gati going away. Used in special sense of rebirth and re -- death in the course of saŋsāra. Thus in āgati gati cuti upapatti D i.162; A iii.54 sq., 60 sq., 74; cp. also S ii.67; Pv ii.922 (gatiŋ āgatiŋ vā). -- 95 -- Āgada
Āgada
(m.) & Āgadana (nt.) [ā + gad to speak] a word; talk, speech DA i.66 ( = vacana). Āgantar
Āgantar
[N. ag. fr. āgacchati] one who is coming or going to come A i.63; ii.159; It 4, 95 (nom. āgantā only one MS, all others āgantvā). an˚ A i.64; ii.160. Āgantu
Āgantu
(adj.) [Sk. āgantu] -- 1. occasional, incidental J vi.358. -- 2. an occasional arrival, a new comer, stranger J vi.529 ( = āgantuka -- jana C.); ThA 16. Āgantuka
Āgantuka
(adj. -- n.) [āgantu + ka; cp. BSk. āgantuka in same meaning as P. viz. āgantukā bhikṣavaḥ Av. Ś i.87, 286; Divy 50] -- 1. coming, arriving, new comer, guest, stranger, esp. a newly arrived bhikkhu; a visitor (opp. gamika one who goes away) Vin i.132, 167; ii.170; iii. 65, 181; iv.24, A i.10; iii.41, 366; J vi.333; Ud 25; DhA ii.54, 74; VvA 24; PvA 54. -- 2. adventitions, incidental ( = āgantu1) Miln 304 (of megha & roga). -> 3. accessory, superimposed, added Vism 195.

-- bhatta food given to a guest, meal for a visitor Vin i.292 (opp. gamika˚); ii.16. Āgama
Āgama
[fr. ā + gam] -- 1. coming, approach, result, D i.53 (āgamanaŋ pavattatī ti DA i.160; cp. Sdhp 249 dukkh˚). -- 2. that which one goes by, resource, reference, source of reference, text, Scripture, Canon; thus a designation of (?) the Pātimokkha, Vin ii.95 = 249, or of the Four Nikāyas, DA i.1, 2 (dīgh˚). A def. at Vism 442 runs "antamaso opamma -- vagga -- mattassa pi buddhavacanassa pariyāpuṇaṇaŋ". See also āgata 2, for phrase āgatɔāgama, handed down in the Canon, Vin loc. cit. Svāgamo, versed in the doctrine, Pv iv.133 (sv˚ = suṭṭhu āgatɔāgamo, PvA 230); Miln 215. BSk. in same use and meaning, e. g. Divy 17, 333, āgamāni = the Four Nikāyas. -- 3. rule, practice, discipline, obedience, Sn 834 (āgamā parivitakkaŋ), cp. Davs v.22 (takk˚, discipline of right thought) Sdhp 224 (āgamato, in obedience to). -> 4. meaning, understanding, KhA 107 (vaṇṇ˚). -- 5. repayment (of a debt) J. vi.245. -- 6. as gram. tt. "augment", a consonant or syllable added or inserted SnA 23 (sa -- kārɔāgama). Āgamana
Āgamana
(nt.) [fr. āgacchati, Sk. same] oncoming, ar- rival, approach A iii.172; DA i.160; PvA 4, 81; Sdhp 224, 356. an˚ not coming or returning J i.203, 264. Āgameti
Āgameti
[caus of agacchati] to cause somebody or some- thing to come to one, i. e. (1) to wait, to stay Vin ii. 166, 182, 212; D i.112, 113; S iv.291; PvA 4, 55. -> (2) to wait for, to welcome Vin ii.128 (ppr. āgamayamāna); M i.161 (id.) J i.69 (id. + kālaŋ). Āgamma
Āgamma
(adv.) [orig. ger. of āgacchati, q. v. under i.2 for form & under ii.3 for meaning. BSk. āgamya in meaning after the Pāli form, e. g. Divy 95, 405 (with gen.); Av. Ś i.85, 210 etc.; M Vastu i.243, 313]. With reference to (c. acc.), owing to, relating to; by means of, thanks to. In meaning nearly synonymous with ārabbha, sandhāya & paṭicca (see K. S. 318 s. v.) D i.229; It 71; J i.50; vi.424; Kh viii.14 ( = nissāya KhA 229); PvA 5, 21 etc. Āgāmitā
Āgāmitā
found only in neg. form anāgāmitā. Āgāmin
Āgāmin
(adj. n.) [ā + gāmin] returning, one who returns, esp. one who returns to another form of life in saŋsāra (cp. āgati), one who is liable to rebirth A i.63; ii.159; It 95. See anāgāmin. Āgāra
Āgāra
( -- ˚) see agāra. Āgāraka & ˚ika
Āgāraka
& ˚ika (adj. -- n.) ( -- ˚) [cp. BSk. āgārika Divy 275, & agārika] belonging to the house, viz. (1) having control over the house, keeping, surveying, in cpds. koṭṭh˚ possessor or keeper of a storehouse Vin i.209; bandhan˚ prison -- keeper A ii.207; bhaṇḍ˚ keeper of wares, treasurer PvA 2 (see also bhaṇḍ˚). -- (2) being in the house, sharing (the house), companion S iii.190 (paŋsv˚ playmate). Āgāḷha
Āgāḷha
(adj.) (ā + gāḷha 1; cp. Sk. samāgāḍhaŋ] strong, hard, harsh, rough (of speech), usually in instr. as adv. āgāḷhena roughly, harshly a i.283, 295; Pug 32 (so to be read for agāḷhena, although Pug A 215 has a˚, but expls. by atigāḷhena vacanena); instr. f. āgāḷhāya Vin v. 122 (ceteyya; Bdhgh. on p. 230 reads āgaḷāya and expls. by daḷhabhāvāya). See also Nett 77 (āgāḷhā paṭipadā a rough path), 95 (id.; v. l. agāḷhā). Āgilāyati
Āgilāyati
[ā + gilāyati; Sk. glāyati, cp. gilāna] to be wearied, exhausted or tired, to ache, to become weak or faint Vin ii.200; D iii.209; M i.354; S iv.184; KhA 66 (hadavaŋ ā.). Cp. āyamati. Āgu
Āgu
(nt.) [for Vedic āgas nt.] guilt, offence, S i.123; A iii.346; Sn 522 = Nd2 337 (in expln. of nāga as āguŋ na karotī ti nāgo); Nd1 201. Note. A reconstructed āgasa is found at Sdhp 294 in cpd. akatāgasa not having committed sin.

-- cārin one who does evil, D ii.339; M ii.88; iii.163; S ii.100, 128; A ii.240; Miln 110. Āghāta
Āghāta
[Sk. āghāta only in lit. meaning of striking, killing, but cp. BSk. āghāta in meaning "hurtfulness" at M Vastu i.79; Av. Ś ii.129; cp. ghāta & ghāteti] anger, ill -- will, hatred, malice D i.3, 31; iii.72 sq.; S i.179; J i.113; Dhs 1060, 1231; Vbh 167, 362, 389; Miln 136; Vism 306; DA i.52; VvA 67; PvA 178. -- anāghāta freedom from ill will Vin ii.249; A v.80.

-- paṭivinaya repression of ill -- will; the usual enumn. of ā -- ˚ paṭivinayā comprises nine, for which see D iii.262, 289; Vin v.137; A iv.408; besides this there are sets of five at A iii.185 sq.; SnA 10, 11, and one of ten at Vin v.138. -- vatthu occasion of ill -- will; closely connected with ˚paṭivinaya & like that enumd. in sets of nine (Vin v.137; A iv.408; Ps i.130; J iii.291, 404; v.149; Vbh 389; Nett 23; SnA 12), and of ten (Vin v.138; A v. 150; Ps i.130; Vbh 391). Āghātana
Āghātana
(nt.) [ā + ghāta(na), cp. āghata which has changed its meaning] -- 1. slaying, striking, destroying, killing Th 1, 418, 711; death D i.31 ( = maraṇa DA i.119). -> 2. shambles, slaughter -- house Vin i.182 (gav˚); A iv.138; J vi.113. -- 3. place of execution Vin iii.151; J i.326, 439; iii.59; Miln 110; DhA iv.52; PvA 4, 5. Āghāteti
Āghāteti
[Denom. fr. āghāta, in form = ā + ghāteti, but diff. in meaning] only in phrase cittaŋ a. (with loc.) to incite one's heart to hatred against, to obdurate one's heart. Sdhp. 126 = S i.151 = A v.172. Ācamati
Ācamati
[ā + cam] to take in water, to resorb, to rinse J iii.297; Miln 152, 262 (+ dhamati). -- Caus. I. ācamcti (a) to purge, rinse one's mouth Vin ii.142; M ii. 112; A iii.337; Pv iv.153 (ācamayitvā = mukhaŋ vikkhāletvā PvA 241); Miln 152 (˚ayamāna). -- (b) to wash off, clean oneself after evacuation Vin ii.221. -- Caus. II. ācamāpeti to cause somebody to rinse himself J vi.8. Ācamana
Ācamana
(nt.) [ā + camana of cam] rinsing, washing with water, used (a) for the mouth D i.12 ( = udakena mukhasiddhi -- karaṇa DA i.98); (b) after evacuation J iii 486.

-- kumbhī water -- pitcher used for rinsing Vin i.49, 52; ii.142, 210, 222. -- pādukā slippers worn when rinsing Vin i.190; ii.142, 222. -- sarāvaka a saucer for rinsing Vin ii.142, 221. Ācamā
Ācamā
(f.) [fr. ā + cam] absorption, resorption Nd1 429 (on Sn 945, which both in T. and in SnA reads ājava; expld. by taṇhā in Nidd.). Note. Index to SnA (Pj iii) has ācāma. -- 96 -- Ācaya
Ācaya
[ā + caya] heaping up, accumulation, collection, mass (opp. apacaya). See on term Dhs trsl. 195 & Cpd. 251, 252. -- S ii.94 (kāyassa ācayo pi apacayo pi); A iv.280 = Vin ii.259 (opp. apacaya); Dhs 642, 685; Vbh 319, 326, 330; Vism 449; DhA ii.25.

-- gāmin making for piling up (of rebirth) A v.243, 276; Dhs 584, 1013, 1397; Kvu 357. Ācarati
Ācarati
[ā + aarati] -- 1. to practice, perform, indulge in Vin i.56; ii.118; Sn 327 (ācare dhamma -- sandosa -- vādaŋ), 401; Miln 171, 257 (pāpaŋ). Cp. pp. ācarita in BSk. e. g. Av. S i.124, 153, 213 in same meaning. -- pp. āciṇṇa. -- 2. to step upon, pass through J v.153. Ācarin
Ācarin
(adj. -- n.) [fr. ā + car] treaching, f. ācarinī a female teacher Vin iv.227 (in contrast to gaṇa & in same sense as ācariya m. at Vin iv.130), 317 (id.). Ācariya
Ācariya
[fr. ā + car] a teacher (almost syn. with upajjhāya) Vin i.60, 61, 119 (˚upajjhāya); ii.231; iv.130 (gaṇo vā ācariyo a meeting of the bhikkhus or a single teacher, cp. f. ācarinī); D i.103, 116 (gaṇ˚) 238 (sattamâcariyamahāyuga seventh age of great teachers); iii.189 sq.; M iii.115; S i.68 (gaṇ˚), 177; iv.176 (yogg˚); A i.132 (pubb˚); Sn 595; Nd1 350 (upajjhāya vā āc˚); J ii.100, 411; iv.91; v.501; Pv iv.323, 351 ( = ācāra -- samācāra -- sikkhāpaka PvA 252); Miln 201, 262 (master goldsmith?); Vism 99 sq.; KhA 12, 155; SnA 422; VvA 138. -> For contracted form of ācariya see ācera.

-- kula the clan of the teacher A ii.112. -- dhana a teacher's fee S i.177; A v.347. -- pācariya teacher upon teacher, lit. "teacher & teacher's teacher" (see ā1 3b) D i.94, 114, 115, 238; S iv.306, 308; DA i.286; SnA 452 ( = ācariyo cɔeva ācariya -- ācariyo ca). -- bhariyā the teacher's fee J v.457; vi.178; DhA i.253. -- muṭṭhi "the teacher's fist" i. e. close -- fistedness in teaching, keeping things back, D ii.100; S v.153; J ii.221, 250; Miln 144; SnA 180, 368. -- vaŋsa the line of the teachers Miln 148. -- vatta serving the teacher, service to the t. DhA i.92. -- vāda traditional teaching; later as heterodox teaching, sectarian teaching (opp. theravāda orthodox doctrine) Miln 148; Dpvs v.30; Mhbv 96. Ācariyaka
Ācariyaka
[ācariya + ka, diff. from Sk. ācariyaka nt. art of teaching] a teacher Vin i.249; iii.25, 41; D i.88, 119, 187; ii.112; M i.514; ii.32; S v.261; A ii.170; iv. 310. See also sācariyaka. Ācāma
Ācāma
[Sk. ācāma] the scum or foam of boiling rice D i.166; M i.78; A i.295; J ii.289; Pug 55; VvA 99 sq.; DhA iii.325 (˚kuṇḍaka). Ācāmeti
Ācāmeti
[for ācameti? cp. Sk. ācāmayati, Caus. of ā + cam] at M ii.112 in imper. ācāmehi be pleased or be thanked(?); perhaps the reading is incorrect. Ācāra
Ācāra
[ā + car] way of behaving, conduct, practice, esp. right conduct, good manners; adj. ( -- ˚) practising, indulging in, or of such & such a conduct. -- Sn 280 (pāpa˚); J i.106 (vipassana˚); ii.280 (˚ariya); vi.52 (ariya˚); SnA 157; PvA 12 (sīla˚), 36, 67, 252; Sdhp 441. -- an˚ bad behaviour Vin ii.118 (˚ŋ ācarati indulge in bad habits); DhA ii.201 (˚kiriyā). Cp. sam˚.

-- kusala versed in good manners Dh 376 (cp. DhA iv.111). -- gocara pasturing in good conduct; i. e. practice of right behaviour D i.63 = It 118; M i.33; S v.187; A i.63 sq.; ii.14, 39; iii.113, 155, 262; iv.140, 172, 352; v.71 sq., 89, 133, 198; Vbh 244, 246 (cp. Miln 368, 370, quot. Vin iii.185); Vism i.8. -- vipatti failure of morality, a slip in good conduct Vin i.171. Ācārin
Ācārin
(adj. n.) [fr. ācāra] of good conduct, one who be- haves well A i.211 (anācārī viratā l. 4 fr. bottom is better read as ācārī virato, in accordance with v. l.). Ācikkhaka
Ācikkhaka
(adj. n.) [ā + cikkha + ka of cikkhati] one who tells or shows DhA i.71. Ācikkhati
Ācikkhati
[Freq. of ā + khyā, i. e. akkhāti] to tell, relate, show, describe, explain D i.110; A ii 189 (atthaŋ ā to interpret); Pug 59; DhA i.14; SnA 155; PvA 121, 164 (describe). -- imper. pres. ācikkha Sn 1097 ( = brūhi Nd2 119 & 455); Pv i.109; ii.81; and ācikkhāhi DhA ii.27. -> aor. ācikkhi PvA 6, 58, 61, 83. -- ācikkhati often occurs in stock phrase ācikkhati deseti paññāpeti paṭṭhapeti vivarati etc., e. g. Nd1 271; Nd2 465; Vism 163. -- attānaŋ ā. to disclose one's identity PvA 89, 100. -- pp. ācikkhita (q. v.). -- Caus. II. ācikkhāpeti to cause some body to tell DhA ii.27. Ācikkhana
Ācikkhana
(adj. -- nt.) [ā + cikkhana of cikkhati] telling, announcing J iii.444; PvA 121. Ācikkhita
Ācikkhita
[pp. of acikkhati] shown, described, told PvA 154 (˚magga), 203 (an˚ = anakkhāta). Ācikkhitar
Ācikkhitar
[n. ag. fr. ācikkhati] one who tells or shows DhA ii.107 (for pavattar). Āciṇa
Āciṇa
[pp. of ācināti? or is it distorted from āciṇṇa?] ac- cumulated; practised, performed Dh 121 (pāpaŋ = pāpaŋ āciṇanto karonto DhA iii.16). It may also be spelt ācina. Āciṇṇa
Āciṇṇa
[ā + ciṇṇa, pp. of ācarati] practiced, performed, (habitually) indulged in M i.372 (kamma, cp. Miln 226 and the expln. of āciṇṇaka kamma as "chronic karma" at Cpd. 144); S iv.419; A v.74 sq.; J i.81; DA i.91 (for aviciṇṇa at D i.8), 275; Vism 269; DhA i.37 (˚samāciṇṇa thoroughly fulfilled); VvA 108; PvA 54; Sdhp 90.

-- kappa ordinance or rule of right conduct or customary practice (?) Vin i.79; ii.301; Dpvs iv.47; cp. v.18. Ācita
Ācita
[pp. of ācināti] accumulated, collected, covered, fur- nished or endowed with J vi.250 ( = nicita); Vv 411; DhsA 310. See also āciṇa. Ācināti
Ācināti
[ā + cināti] to heap up, accumulate S iii.89 (v. l. ācinati); iv.73 (ppr. ācinato dukkhaŋ); DhsA 44. -- pp. ācita & āciṇa (ācina). -- Pass. ācīyati (q. v.). Ācīyati
Ācīyati
(& Āceyyati) [Pass. of ācināti, cp. cīyati] to be heaped up, to increase, to grow; ppr. āceyyamāna J v.6 ( = ācīyanto vaḍḍhanto C.). Ācera
Ācera
is the contracted form of ācariya; only found in the Jātakas, e. g. J iv.248; vi.563. Ācela
Ācela
in kañcanācela -- bhūsita "adorned with golden clothes" Pv ii.127 stands for cela˚. Ājañña
Ājañña
is the contracted form of ājāniya. Ājava
Ājava
see ācamā. Ājāna
Ājāna
(adj.) [ā + jāna from jñā] understandable, only in cpd. durājāna hard to understand S iv.127; Sn 762; J i.295, 300. Ājānana
Ājānana
(nt.) [ā + jānana, cp. Sk. ajñāna] learning, knowing, understanding; knowledge J i.181 (˚sabhāva of the character of knowing, fit to learn); PvA 225. Ājānāti
Ājānāti
[ā + jānāti] to understand, to know, to learn D i.189; Sn 1064 (˚amāna = vijānamāna Nd2 120). As aññāti at Vism 200. -- pp. aññāta. Cp. also āṇāpeti. Ājāniya (ājānīya)
Ājāniya
(ājānīya) (adj. n.) [cp. BSk. ājāneya & Sk. ājāti birth, good birth. Instead of its correct derivation from ā + jan (to be born, i. e. well -- born) it is by Bdhgh. connected with ā + jñā (to learn, i. e. to be trained). See for these popular etym. e. g. J i.181: sārathissa cittarucitaŋ kāraṇaŋ ājānana -- sabhāvo ājañño, and DhA iv.4: yaŋ assadamma -- sārathi kāraṇaŋ kāreti tassa khippaŋ jānana-> samatthā ājāniyā. -- The contracted form of the word is ājañña] of good race or breed; almost exclusively used to denote a thoroughbred horse (cp. assājāniya under assa3). (a) ājāniya (the more common & younger Pāli form): Sn 462, 528, 532; J i.178, 194; Dpvs iv.26; DhA i.402; iii.49; iv.4; VvA 78; PvA 216. -- (b) ājānīya: M i.445; A v.323; Dh 322 = Nd2 475. -- (c) ǡjañña = (mostly in poetry): Sn 300 = 304; J i.181; Pv iv.154; purisājañña "a steed of man", i. e. a man of noble race) S iii.91 = Th 1, 1084 = Sn 544 = VvA 9; A v.325. -- anājāniya of inferior birth M i.367.

-- susu the young of a noble horse, a noble foal M i. 445 (˚ûpamo dhamma -- pariyāyo). -- 97 -- Ājānīyatā
Ājānīyatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. ājāniya] good breed PvA 214. Ājira
Ājira
[ = ajira with lengthened initial a] a courtyard Mhvs 35, 3. Ājīva
Ājīva
[ā + jīva; Sk. ājīva] livelihood, mode of living, living, subsistence, D i.54; A iii.124 (parisuddha˚); Sn 407 (˚ŋ = parisodhayi = micchājīvaŋ hitvā sammājīvaŋ eva pavattayī SnA 382), 617; Pug 51; Vbh 107, 235; Miln 229 (bhinna˚); Vism 306 (id.); DhsA 390; Sdhp 342, 375, 392. Esp. freq. in the contrast pair sammā -- ājīva & micchā -- ā˚ right mode & wrong mode of gaining a living, e. g. at S ii.168 sq.; iii.239; v.9; A i.271; ii 53, 240, 270; iv.82; Vbh 105, 246. See also magga (ariyaṭṭhangika).

-- pārisuddhi purity or propriety of livelihood Miln 336; Vism 22 sq., 44; DhA iv.111. -- vipatti failure in method of gaining a living A i.270. -- sampadā perfection of (right) livelihood A i.271; DA i.235. Ājīvaka
Ājīvaka
(& ˚ika) [ājīva + ka, orig. "one finding his living" (scil. in a peculiar way); cp. BSk. ājīvika Divy 393, 427] an ascetic, one of the numerous sects of non -- buddhist ascetics. On their austerities, practice & way of living see esp. DhA ii.55 sq. and on the whole question A. L. Basham, Hist. & Doctrines of the Ājīvikas, 1951. -- (a) ājīvaka: Vin i.291; ii.284; iv.74, 91; M i.31, 483: S i.217; A iii.276, 384; J i.81, 257, 390. -- (b) ājīvika: Vin i.8; Sn 381 (v. l. BB. ˚aka).

-- sāvaka a hearer or lay disciple of the ājīvaka ascetics Vin ii 130, 165; A i.217. Ājīvika
Ājīvika
(nt.) (or ājīvikā f.?) [fr. ājīva] sustenance of life, livelihood, living Vbh 379 (˚bhaya) Miln 196 (id.); PvA 274, and in phrase ājīvikɔâpakata being deprived of a livelihood, without a living M i.463 = S iii.93 (T. reads jīvikā pakatā) = It 89 (reads ājīvikā pakatā) = Miln 279. Ājīvin
Ājīvin
(adj. -- n.) [fr. ājīva] having one's livelihood, finding one's subsistence, living, leading a life of ( -- ˚) D iii.64; A v.190 (lūkha˚) Āṭa
Āṭa
[etym.? Cp. Sk. āṭi Turdus Ginginianus, see Aufrecht, Halāyudha p. 148] a kind of bird J vi.539 ( = dabbimukha C.). Āṭaviya
Āṭaviya
is to be read for aṭaviyo (q. v.) at J vi.55 [ = Sk. āṭavika]. Āṭhapanā
Āṭhapanā
(f.) at Pug 18 & v. l. at Vbh 357 is to be read aṭṭhapanā (so T. at Vbh 357). Āṇañja
Āṇañja
see ānejja. Āṇaṇya
Āṇaṇya
see ānaṇya. Āṇatti
Āṇatti
(f.) [ā + ñatti (cp. āṇāpeti), Caus. of jñā] order, command, ordinance, injunction Vin i.62; KhA 29; PvA 260; Sdhp 59, 354. Āṇattika
Āṇattika
(adj.) [āṇatti + ka] belonging to an ordinance or command, of the nature of an injunction KhA 29. Āṇā
Āṇā
(f.) [Sk. ājñā, ā + jñā] order, command, authority Miln 253; DA i.289; KhA 179, 180, 194; PvA 217; Sdhp 347, 576. rājɔāṇā the king's command or authority J i.433; iii.351; PvA 242. āṇaŋ deti to give an order J i.398; ˚ŋ pavatteti to issue an order Miln 189, cp. āṇāpavatti J iii.504; iv.145. Āṇāpaka
Āṇāpaka
(adj. n.) [fr. āṇāpeti] 1. (adj.) giving an order Vism 303. -- 2. (n.) one who gives or calls out orders, a town -- crier, an announcer of the orders (of an authority) Miln 147. Āṇāpana
Āṇāpana
(nt.) [abstr. fr. āṇāpeti] ordering or being, ordered, command, order PvA 135. Āṇāpeti
Āṇāpeti
[ā + ñāpeti, Caus. of ā + jānāti fr. jñā, cp. Sk. ājñāpayati] to give an order, to enjoin, command (with acc. of person) J iii.351; Miln 147; DhA ii.82; VvA 68 (dāsiyo), 69; PvA 4, 39, 81. Āṇi
Āṇi
(Vedic āṇi to aṇu fine, thin, flexible, in formation an n -- enlargement of Idg. *olenā, cp. Ohg. lun, Ger. lünse, Ags. lynes = E. linch, further related to Lat. ulna elbow, Gr. w)le/nh, Ohg. elina, Ags. eln = E. el -- bow. See Walde, Lāt. Wtb. under ulna & lacertus]. -- 1. the pin of a wheel -- axle, a linch -- pin M i.119; S ii.266, 267; A ii.32; Sn 654; J vi.253, 432; SnA 243; KhA 45, 50. -- 2. a peg, pin, bolt, stop (at a door) M i.119; S. ii 266 (drum stick); J iv.30; vi.432, 460; Th 1, 744; Dh i.39. -> 3. (fig.) (˚ -- ) peg -- like (or secured by a peg, of a door), small, little in ˚colaka a small (piece of) rag Vin ii.271, cp. i.205 (vaṇabandhana -- colaka); ˚dvāra Th 1, 355; C. khuddaka -- dvāra, quoted at Brethren 200, trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. as "the towngate's sallyport" by Neumann as "Gestöck" (fastening, enclosure) āṇi -- gaṇṭhikɔāhato ayopatto at Vism 108; DA i.199 is apparently a sort of brush made of four or five small pieces of flexible wood. Ātanka
Ātanka
[etym. uncertain; Sk. ātanka] illness, sickness, disease M i.437; S iii.1; Sn 966 (˚phassa, cp. Nd1 486). Freq. in cpd. appātanka freedom from illness, health (cp. appābādha) D i.204; iii.166; A iii.65, 103; Miln 14. -- f. abstr. appātankatā M i.124. Ātankin
Ātankin
(adj.) [fr. ātanka] sick, ill J v.84 ( = gilāna C.). Ātata
Ātata
[fr. ā + tan, pp. tata; lit. stretched, covered over] generic name for drums covered with leather on one side Dpvs xiv.14; VvA 37 (q. v. for enumn. of musical instruments), 96. Ātatta
Ātatta
[ā + tatta1, pp. of ā -- tapati] heated, burnt. scorched, dry J v.69 (˚rūpa = sukkha -- sarīra C.). Ātapa
Ātapa
[ā + tapa] -- 1. sun -- heat Sn 52; J i.336; Dhs 617; Dpvs i.57; VvA 54; PvA 58. -- 2. glow, heat (in general) Pv i.74; Sdhp 396. -- 3. (fig.) (cp. tapa2) ardour, zeal, exertion PvA 98 (viriyā -- tapa; perhaps better to be read ˚ātāpa q. v.). Cp. ātappa.

-- vāraṇa "warding off the sun -- heat", i. e. a parasol, sun -- shade Dāvs i.28; v.35. Ātapatā
Ātapatā
(f.) [abstr. of ātapa] glowing or burning state, heat Sdhp 122. Ātapati
Ātapati
[ā + tap] to burn J iii.447. Ātappa
Ātappa
(nt.) [Sk. *ātāpya, fr. ātāpa] ardour, zeal, exertion D i.13; iii.30 sq., 104 sq., 238 sq.; M iii.210; S ii.132, 196 sq.; A i.153; iii.249; iv.460 sq.; v.17 sq.; Sn 1062 ( = ussāha ussoḷhi thāma etc. Nd2 122); J iii.447; Nd1 378; Vbh 194 (= vāyāma); DA i.104. Ātāpa
Ātāpa
[ā + tāpa fr. tap; cp. tāpeti] glow, heat; fig. ardour, keen endeavour, or perhaps better "torturing, mortification" Miln 313 (cittassa ātāpo paritāpo); PvA 98 (viriya˚). Cp. ātappa & ātāpana. -- 98 -- Ātāpana
Ātāpana
(nt.) [ā + tāpana] tormenting, torture, mortification M i.78; A i.296 (˚paritāpana); ii.207 (id.); Pug 55 (id.); Vism 3 (id.). Ātāpin
Ātāpin
(adj.) [fr. ātāpa, cp. BSk. ātāpin Av. Ś i.233; ii. 194 = Divy 37; 618] ardént, zealous, strenuous, active D iii.58, 76 sq., 141 (+ sampajāna), 221, 276; M i.22, 56, 116, 207, 349; ii.11; iii.89, 128, 156; S 113, 117 sq., 140, 165; ii.21, 136 sq.; iii.73 sq.; iv.37, 48, 54, 218; v.165, 187, 213; A ii.13 sq.; iii 38, 100 sq.; iv. 29, 177 sq., 266 sq., 300, 457 sq.; v.343 sq.; Sn 926; Nd1 378; It 41, 42; Vbh 193 sq.; Miln 34, 366; Vism 3 (= viriyavā); DhA i.120; SnA 157, 503. -- Freq. in the formula of Arahantship "eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto": see arahant II. B. See also satipaṭṭhāna. -> Opp. anātāpin S ii.195 sq.; A ii.13; It 27 (+ anottappin). Ātāpeti
Ātāpeti
[ā + tāpeti] to burn, scorch; fig. to torment, in- flict pain, torture M i.341 (+ paritāpeti); S iv.337; Miln 314, 315. Ātitheyya
Ātitheyya
(nt.) [fr. ati + theyya] great theft (?) A i.93; iv. 63 sq. (v. l. ati˚ which is perhaps to be prcferred). Ātu
Ātu
[dialectical] father M i.449 (cp. Trenckner's note on p. 567: the text no doubt purports to make the woman speak a sort of patois). Ātuman
Ātuman
[Vedic ātman, diaeretic form for the usual con- tracted attan; only found in poetry. Cp. also the shortened form tuman] self. nom. sg. ātumo Pv iv.52 ( = sabhāvo PvA 259), ātumā Nd1 69 (ātumā vuccati attā), 296 (id.), & ātumāno Nd1 351; acc. ātumānaŋ Sn 782 (= attānaŋ SnA 521), 888, 918; loc. ātume Pv ii.1311 (= attani C.). Ātura
Ātura
(adj.) [Sk. ātura, cp. BSk. ātura, e. g. Jtm 3170] ill, sick, diseased; miserable, affected S iii.1 (˚kāya); A i. 250; Sn 331; Vv 8314 (˚rūpa = abhitunna -- kāya VvA 328); J i.197 (˚anna "food of the miserable", i. e. last meal of one going to be killed; C. expls. as maraṇabhojana), 211 (˚citta); ii.420 (˚anna, as above); iii.201; v.90, 433; vi.248; Miln 139, 168; DhA i.31 (˚rūpa); PvA 160, 161; VvA 77; Sdhp 507. Used by Commentators as syn. of aṭṭo, e. g. at J iv.293; SnA 489. -- anātura healthy, well, in good condition S iii.1; Dh 198. Āthabbaṇa
Āthabbaṇa
(nt.) [ = athabbaṇa, q. v.] the Atharva Veda as a code of magic working formulas, witchcraft, sorcery Sn 927 (v. l. ath˚, see interpreted at Nd1 381; expld. as āthabbaṇika -- manta -- ppayoga at SnA 564). Āthabbaṇika
Āthabbaṇika
(adj. n.) [fr. athabbana] one conversant with magic, wonder -- worker, medicine -- man Nd1 381; SnA 564. Ādapeti
Ādapeti
[Caus. of ādāti] to cause one to take, to accept, agree to M ii.104; S i.132. Ādara
Ādara
[Sk. ādara, prob. ā + dara, cp. semantically Ger. ehrfurcht awe] consideration of, esteem, regard, respect, reverence, honour J v.493; SnA 290; DA i.30; DhsA 61; VvA 36, 61, 101, 321; PvA 121, 123, 135, 278; Sdhp 2, 21, 207, 560. -- anādara lack of reverence, disregard, disrespect; (adj.) disrespectful S i.96; Vin iv.218; Sn 247 ( = ādara -- virahita SnA 290; DA i.284; VvA 219; PvA 3, 5, 54, 67, 257. Ādaratā
Ādaratā
(f.) [abstr. fr. ādara] = ādara, in neg. an˚ want of consideration J iv.229; Dhs 1325 = Vbh 359 (in expln. of dovacassatā). Ādariya
Ādariya
(nt.) [abstr. fr. ādara] showing respect of honour; neg. an˚ disregard, disrespect Vin ii.220; A v.146, 148; Pug 20; Vbh 371; miln 266. Ādava
Ādava
[ā + dava2?] is gloss at VvA 216 for maddava Vv 5123; meaning: excitement, adj. exciting. The passage in VvA is somewhat corrupt, & therefore unclear. Ādahati
Ādahati1
[ā + dahati1] to put down, put on, settle, fix Vism 289 (samaŋ ā. = samādahati). Cp. sam˚ and ādhiyati. Ādahati
Ādahati2
[ā + dahati2] to set fire to, to burn J vi.201, 203. Ādā
Ādā
[ger. of ādāti from reduced base *da of dadāti 1b] taking up, taking to oneself Vin iv.120 ( = anādiyitvā C.; cp. the usual form ādāya). Ādāti (Ādadāti)
Ādāti
(Ādadāti) [ā + dadāti of dadāti base 1 dā] to take up, accept, appropriate, grasp, seize; grd. ādātabba Vin i.50; inf. ādātuŋ D iii.133 (adinnaŋ theyyasankhātaŋ ā.). -> ger. ādā & ādāya (see sep.); grd. ādeyya, Caus. ādapeti (q. v.). -- See also ādiyati & ādeti. Ādāna
Ādāna
(nt.) [ād + āna, or directly from ā + dā, base 1 of dadāti] taking up, getting, grasping, seizing; fig. appropriating, clinging to the world, seizing on (worldly objects). (1) (lit.) taking (food), pasturing M iii.133; J v.371 (& ˚esana). -- (2) getting, acquiring, taking, seizing S ii.94; A iv.400 (daṇḍ˚); PvA 27 (phal˚); esp. freq. in adinn˚ seizing what is not given, i. e. theft: see under adinna. -- (3) (fig.) attachment, clinging A v.233, 253 (˚paṭinissagga); Dh 89 (id.; cp. DhA ii.163); Sn 1103 (˚taṇhā), 1104 (˚satta); Nd1 98 (˚gantha); Nd2 123, 124. -- an˚ free from attachment S i.236 (sādānesu anādāno "not laying hold mong them that grip" trsl.); A ii.10; It 109; J iv.354; Miln 342; DhA iv.70 ( = khandhādisu niggahaṇo). Cp. upa˚, pari˚. Ādāya
Ādāya
[ger. of ādāti, either from base 1 of dadāti (dā) or base 2 (dāy). See also ādiya] having received or taken, taking up, seizing on, receiving; freq. used in the sense of a prep. "with" (c. acc.) Sn 120, 247, 452; J v.13; Vbh 245; DhA ii.74; SnA 139; PvA 10, 13, 38, 61 etc. -- At Vin i.70 the form ādāya is used as a noun f. ādāyā in meaning of "a casually taken up belief" (tassa ādāyassa vaṇṇe bhaṇati). Cp. upa˚, pari˚. Ādāyīn
Ādāyīn
(adj. -- n.) [fr. ā + dadāti base 2, cp. ādāya] taking up, grasping, receiving; one who takes, seīzes or appropriates D i.4 (dinn˚); A iii.80; v.137 (sār˚); DA i.72. Ādāsa
Ādāsa
[Sk. ādarśa, ā + dṛś, P. dass, of dassati1 2] a mir- ror Vin ii.107; D i.7, 11 (˚pañha mirror -- questioning, cp. DA i.97: "ādāse devataŋ otaretvā pañha -- pucchanaŋ"), 80; ii.93 (dhamnaɔ -- ādāsaŋ nāma dhamma -- pariyāyaŋ desessāmi); S v.357 (id.); A v.92, 97 sq., 103; J i.504; Dhs 617 (˚maṇḍala); Vism 591 (in simile); KhA 50 (˚daṇḍa) 237; DhA i.226.

-- tala the surface of the mirror, in similes at Vism 450, 456, 489. Ādāsaka
Ādāsaka
= ādāsa Th 2, 411. Ādi
Ādi
[Sk. ādi, etym. uncertain] -- 1. (m.) starting -- point, be- ginning Sn 358 (acc. ādiŋ = kāraṇaŋ SnA 351); Dh 375 (nom. ādi); Miln 10 (ādimhi); J vi.567 (abl. ādito from the beginning). For use as nt. see below 2 b. -- 2. (adj. & adv.) (a) (˚ -- ) beginning, initially, first, principal, chief: see cpds. -- (b) (˚ -- ) beginning with, being the first (of a series which either is supposed to be familiar in its constituents to the reader or hearer or is immediately intelligible from the context), i. e. and so on, so forth (cp. adhika); e. g. rukkha -- gumb -- ādayo (acc. pl.) trees, jungle etc. J i.150; amba -- panasɔ ādīhi rukkehi sampanno (and similar kinds of fruit) J i.278; amba -- labujɔādīnaŋ phalānaŋ anto J ii.159; asi -- satti -- dhami -- ādīni āvudhāni (weapous, such as sword, knife, bow & the like) J i.150; kasi -- gorakkhɔ ādīni karonte manusse J ii.128; . . . ti ādinā nayena in this and similar ways J i.81; PvA 30. Absolute as nt. pl. ādinī with ti (evaŋ) (ādīni), closing a quotation, meaning "this and such like", e. g. at J ii.128, 416 (ti ādīni viravitvā). -- In phrase ādiŋ katvā meaning "putting (him, her, it) first", i. e. heginning with, from . . . on, from . . . down (c. acc.) e. g. DhA i.393 (rājānaŋ ādiŋ K. from the king down); PvA 20 (vihāraŋ ādikatvā), 21 (pañcavaggiye ādiŋ K.).

-- kammika [cp. BSk. ādikarmaka Divy 544] a beginner Vin iii.146; iv.100; Miln 59; Vism 241; DhsA 187. -- kalyāṇa in phrase ādikalyāṇa majjhe -- kalyāṇa pariyosāna -- kalyāṇa of the Dhamma, "beautiful in the beginning, the middle & the end" see references under dhamma C. 3 and cp. DA i.175 ( = ādimhi kalyāṇa etc.); SnA 444; abstr. ˚kalyāṇatā Vism 4. -- pubbangama original Dpvs iv.26. -- brahmacariyaka belonging to the principles or fundaments of moral life D i.189; iii.284; M i.431; ii.125, 211; iii. 192; S ii.75, 223; iv.91; v.417, 438; f. ˚ikā Vin i.64, 68; A i.231 sq. -- majjhapariyosāna beginning, middle & end Miln 10; cp. above ādikalyāṇa. -- 99 -- Ādika
Ādika
(adj.) [ādi + ka] from the beginning, initial (see adhika); instr. ādikena in the beginning, at once, at the same time M i.395, 479; ii.213; S ii.224; J vi.567. Cp. ādiya3. Ādicca
Ādicca
[Vedic āditya] the sun S i.15, 47; ii.284; iii.156; v.44, 101; A i.242; v.22, 263, 266 sq.; It 85; Sn 550, 569, 1097 ("ādicco vuccati suriyo" Nd2 125); DhA iv. 143; Sdhp 14, 17, 40.

-- upaṭṭhānā sun -- worship D i.11 ( = jīvikatthāya ādiccaparicariyā DA i.97); J ii.72 (˚jātaka; ādiccaŋ upatiṭṭhati p. 73 = suriyaŋ namassamāno tiṭṭhati C.). -- patha the path of the sun, i. e. the sky, the heavens Dh 175 (= ākāsa DhA iii.177). -- bandhu "kinsman of the sun", Ep. of the Buddha Vin ii.296; S i.186, 192; A ii.54; Sn 54, 915, 1128; Nd1 341; Nd2 125b; Vv 425, 7810; VvA 116. Ādiṇṇa
Ādiṇṇa
[Sk. ādīrṇa, pp. of ā + dṛ, see ādiyati2] broken, split open S iv.193 ( = sipātikā with burst pod); cp. M i.306. Ādiṇṇata
Ādiṇṇata
(nt.) [abstr. fr. ādiṇṇa] state of being broken or split Ps i.49. Āditta
Āditta
[ā + ditta1, Sk. ādīpta, pp. of ā + dīp] set on fire, blazing, burning Vin i.34; Kv 209 (sabbaŋ ādittaŋ); S iii.71; iv.19, 108; A iv.320 (˚cela); Sn 591; J iv.391; Pv i.85 ( = paditta jalita PvA 41); Kvu 209; DA i.264; PvA 149; Sdhp 599.

-- pariyāya the discourse or sermon on the fire (lit. being in fllames) S iv.168 sq.; Vin i.34; DhA i.88. Ādina
Ādina
only at D i.115 (T. reading ādīna, but v. l. S id. ādina, B p. abhinna) in phrase ādina -- khattiya -- kula primordial. See note in Dial. i.148. Ādiya
Ādiya1
(adj.) grd. of admi, ad, Sk. ādya] edible, eatable A iii.45 (bhojanāni). Ādiya
Ādiya2
in ˚mukha is uncertain reading at A iii.164 sq. (vv. ll. ādeyya˚ & ādheyya), meaning perhaps "graspmouth", i. e. gossip; thus equal to ger. of ādiyati1. Perhaps to be taken to ādiyati2. The same phrase occurs at Pug 65 (T. ādheyya˚, C. has v. l. ādheyya˚) where Pug A 248 explns. "ādito dheyyamukho, paṭhama -- vacanasmiŋ yeva ṭhapita -- mukho ti attho" (sticking to one's word?). See ādheyya. Ādiya
Ādiya3
= ādika, instr. ādiyena in the beginning J vi.567 (= ādikena C.). Ādiya
Ādiya4
ger. of ādiyati. Ādiyati
Ādiyati1
[ā + diyati, med. pass. base of dadāti4, viz. di˚ & dī˚; see also ādāti & ādeti] to take up; take to oneself, seize on, grasp, appropriate, fig. take notice of, take to heart, heed. -- pres. ādiyati A iij.46; Sn 119, 156, 633, 785, Nd1 67; Nd2 123, 124; J iii.296: v.367. -- pot. ādiye Sn 400; imper. ādiya M iii.133 (so read for ādissa?). -- aor. ādiyi D iii.65; A iii.209, ādiyāsi Pv iv.148 (sayaŋ daṇḍaŋ ā. = acchinditvā gaṇhasi PvA 241), & ādapayi (Caus. formation fr. ādāti?) to take heed S i.132 (v. l. ādiyi, trsl. "put this into thy mind"). -- ger. ādiyitvā Vin iv.120 (= ādā); J ii.224 (C. for ādiya T.); iii.104; iv.352 (an˚ not heeding; v. l. anāditvā, cp. anādiyanto not attending J iii.196); DhA iii.32 (id.); PvA 13 (T. anādayitva not heeding), 212 (vacanaŋ anādiyitvā not paying attention to his word), ādiya S iii.26 (v. l. an˚ for anādīya); J ii.223 (= ādiyitvā C.); see also ādiya2, & ādīya S iii.26 (an˚). See also upādiyati & pariyādiyati. Ādiyati
Ādiyati2
[ā + diyati, Sk. ādīryate, Pass. of dṛ to split: see etym. under darī] to split, go asunder, break Ps i.49. -> pp. ādiṇṇa. See also avadīyati. Cp. also upādiṇṇa. Ādiyanatā
Ādiyanatā
(f.) [abstr. formation ādiyana (fr. ādiya ger. of ādiyati) + ta] in an˚ the fact of not taking up or heeding SnA 516. Ādisati
Ādisati
[ā + disati] (a) to announce, tell, point out, refer to. -- (b) to dedicate (a gift, dakkhiṇaŋ or dānaŋ). -> pres. ind. ādisati D i.213 = A i.170 (tell or read one's character); Sn 1112 (atītaŋ); Nd1 382 (nakkhattaŋ set the horoscope); Miln 294 (dānaŋ); pot. ādiseyya Th 2, 307 (dakkhiṇaŋ); Pv iv.130 (id. = uddiseyya PvA 228), & ādise Vin i.229 = D ii.88 (dakkhiṇaŋ); imper. ādisa PvA 49. -- fut. ādissati Th 2, 308 (dakkhiṇaŋ) PvA 88 (id.). -- aor. ādisi Pv ii.28; PvA 46 (dakkhiṇaŋ); pl. ādisiŋsu ibid. 53 (id.) & ādisuŋ Pv i.106 (id.). -- ger. ādissa Vin iii.127; Sn 1018; Pv ii.16 (dānaŋ), & ādisitvāna Th 2, 311. -- grd. ādissa (adj.) to be told or shown M i.12. Ādiso
Ādiso
(adv.) [orig. abl. of ādi, formed with ˚saḥ] from the beginning, i. e. thoroughly, absolutely D i.180; M iii.208. Ādissa
Ādissa
at M iii.133 is an imper. pres. meaning "take", & should probably better be read ādiya (in corresponsion with ādāna). It is not grd. of ādisati, which its form might suggest. Ādissa
Ādissa2
(adj.) blameworthy M i.12; MA = garāyha. Ādīna
Ādīna
at D i.115 & S v.74 (vv. ll. ādina, & abhinna) see ādina. See diṇṇa. Ādīnava
Ādīnava
[ā + dīna + va (nt.), a substantivised adj., orig. meaning "full of wretchedness", cp. BSk. ādīnava M Vastu iii.297 (misery); Divy 329] disadvantage, danger (in or through = loc.) D i.38 (vedanānaŋ assādañ ca ādīnavañ ca etc.), 213 (iddhi -- pāṭihāriye M i.318; S i.9 (ettha bhīyo); ii.170 sq. (dhātūnaŋ); iii.27, 62, 102 (rūpassa etc.); iv.7, 168; A i.57 (akaraṇīye kayiramāne) 258 (ko loke assādo); iii.250 sq.; 267 sq. (duccarite), 270 (puggala -- ppasāde); iv.439 sq.; v.81; J i.146; iv.2; It 9 = A ii.10 = Nd2 172a; Sn 36, 50 (cp. Nd2 127), 69, 424, 732; Th 2, 17 (kāye ā. = dosa ThA 23), 485 (kāmesu ā. = dosa ThA 287); Pv iii.107 (= dosa PvA 214); iv.67 (= dosa PvA 263); Ps i.192 sq.; ii.9, 10; PvA 12, 208. -- There are several sets of sources of evil or danger, viz. five dussīlassa sīla -- vipattiyā ā. at D ii.85 = iii.235 = A iii.252; five akkhantiyā ā. at Vbh 378; six of six each at D iii.182 sq. -- In phrase kāmānaŋ ā. okāro sankileso D i.110, 148; M i.115; Nett 42; DhA 16.

-- ânupassin realising the danger or evil of S ii.85 (upā dāniyesu dhammesu) abstr. ˚ânupassanā Vism 647 sq., 695. -- dassāvin same as ˚ânupassin D i.245 (an˚); A v.178 (id.); D iii.46; S ii.194, 269; A iii.146; v.181 sq.; Nd2 141. -- pariyesanā search for danger in ( -- ˚) S ii.171; iii.29; iv.8 sq. -- saññā consciousness of danger D i.7); iii.253, 283; A iii.79. Ādīpanīya
Ādīpanīya
(adj.) [grd. of ā + dīpeti] to be explained Miln 270. Ādīpita
Ādīpita
[pp. of ādīpeti, ā + caus. of dīp, cp. dīpeti] ablaze, in flames S i.31 (loka; v. l. ādittaka) 108; J v.366; DhA iii.32 (v. l. āditta). Ādu
Ādu
(indecl.) [see also adu] emphatic (adversative) part. (1) of affirmation & emphasis: but, indeed, rather J iii. 499 = vi.443; v.180; vi.552. -- (2) as 2nd component of a disjunctive question, mostly in corresponsion udāhu . . . ādu (= kiŋ . . . udāhu SnA 350), viz. is it so . . . or" Th 1, 1274 = Sn 354; Pv iv.317 = DhA i.31; J v.384; vi.382; without udāhu at J v.460 (adu). The close connection with udāhu suggests an expln. of ādu as a somehow distorted abbreviation of udāhu. -- 100 -- Ādeti
Ādeti
[a + deti, base2 of dadāti (day˚ & de˚), cp. also ādiyati] to take, receive, get Sn 121 ( = gaṇhāti SnA 179), 954 (= upādiyati gaṇhāti Nd1 444); cp. i.43; J iii. 103, 296; v.366 (= gaṇhāti C.; cp. ādiyati on p. 367); Miln 336. Ādeyya
Ādeyya
(adj.) [grd. of ādāti (q. v.)] to be taken up, accept- able, pleasant, welcome, only in phrase ˚vacana welcome or acceptable speech, glad words Vin ii.158; J vi.243; Miln 110; ThA 42. Ādeva, Ādevanā
Ādeva,
Ādevanā [ā + div. devati] lamenting, deploring, crying etc. in ster. phrase (explaining parideva or pariddava) ādevo paridevo ādevanā pari˚ ādevitattaŋ pari˚ Nd1 370 = Nd2 416 = Ps i.38. Ādesa
Ādesa
[fr. ādisati, cp. Sk. ādeśa] information, pointing out; as tt. g. characteristic, determination, substitute, e. g. kutonidānā is at SnA 303 said to equal kiŋ -- nidānā, the to of kuto (abl.) equalling or being substituted for the acc. case: paccatta -- vacanassa to -- ādeso veditabbo. Ādesanā
Ādesanā
(f.) [ā + desanā] pointing out, guessing, prophesy; only in phrase ˚pāṭihāriya trick or marvellous ability of mind -- reading or guessing other peoples character Vin ii. 200; D i.212, 213; iii.220; A i.170, 292; v.327; Ps ii. 227. For pāṭihāriya is subsiituted ˚vidhā (lit. variety of, i. e. act or performance etc.) at D iii.103. Ādhāna
Ādhāna
(nt.) [ā + dhāna] -- 1. putting up, putting down, placing, laying A iv.41 (aggissa ādhānaŋ, v. l. of 6 MSS ādānaŋ). -- 2. receptacle M i.414 (udak˚), cp. ādheyya. -> 3. enclosure, hedge Miln 220 (kaṇṭak˚ thorny brake, see under kaṇṭaka).

-- gāhin holding one's own place, i. e. obstinate (?), reading uncertain & interchanging with ādāna, only in one ster. phrase, viz. sandiṭṭhi -- parāmāsin ādhāna -- gāhin duppaṭinissaggin Vin ii.89; M i.43, 96; A iii.335 (v. l. ādāna˚, C. expls by daḷhagāhin); D iii.247 (adhāna˚). Ādhāra
Ādhāra
[ā + dhāra] -- 1. a container, receptacle, basin, lit. holder A iii.27; J vi.257. -- 2. "holding up", i. e. support, basis, prop. esp. a (round) stool or stand for the alms -- bowl (patta) Vin ii.113 (an˚ patto); M iii.95; S v.21; J v.202. -- fig. S v.20 (an˚ without a support, cittaŋ); Vism 8, 444. -- 3. (tt. g.) name for the loc. case ("resting on") Sn 211. Ādhāraka
Ādhāraka
(m. & nt.) [ā + dhāraka, or simply ādhāra + ka] -- 1. a stool or stand (as ādhāra2) (always m., except at J i.33 where ˚āni pl. nt.) J i.33; DhA iii.290 = VvA 220; DhA iii.120 = 186 (one of the four priceless things of a Tathāgata, viz.: setacchattaŋ, nisīdanapallanko, ādhārako pādapīṭhaŋ). -- 2. a reading desk, pulpit J iii.235; iv.299. Ādhāraṇatā
Ādhāraṇatā
(f.) [ā + dhāraṇatā] concentration, attention, mindfulness SnA 290 (+ daḷhīkaraṇa), 398 (id.). Ādhārita
Ādhārita
[pp. of ā + dhāreti, cp. dhāreti1] supported, held up Miln 68. Ādhāvati
Ādhāvati
[ā + dhavati1] to run towards a goal, to run after M i.265 (where id. p. S ii.26 has upadh˚); DA i. 39. Freq. in combn. ādhāvati paridhāvati to run about, e. g. J i.127, 134, 158; ii.68. Ādhāvana
Ādhāvana
(nt.) [fr. ādhāvati] onrush, violent motion Miln 135. Ādhipacca
Ādhipacca
(& Ādhipateyya) (nt.) [fr. adhi + pati + ya "being over -- lord"; see also adhipateyya] supreme rule, lordship, sovereignty, power S v.342 (issariy˚); A i.62 (id.), 147, 212; ii.205 (id.); iii.33, 76; iv.252 sg.; Pv ii.959 (one of the ṭhānas, cp. ṭhāna ii.2b; see also D iii. 146, where spelt ādhipateyya; expld. by issariya at PvA 137); J i.57; Dāvs v.17; VvA 126 (gehe ā = issariya). The three (att˚, lok˚, dhamm˚) at Vism 14. Ādhuta
Ādhuta
[ā + dhuta1] shaken, moved (by the wind, i. e. fanned Vv 394 (v. l. adhuta which is perhaps to be preferred, i. e. not shaken, cp. vātadhutaŋ Dāvs v.49; VvA 178 expls. by saṇikaŋ vidhūpayamāna, i. e. gently fanned). Ādheyya
Ādheyya
(adj.) [grd. of ā + dadhāti cp. ādhāna2] to be deposited (in one's head & heart Pug A), to be heeded, to be appropriated [in latter meaning easily mixed with ādheyya, cp. vv. ll. under ādiya2]; nt. depository ( = ādhātabbatā ṭhapetabbatā Pug A 217) Pug 34 (˚ŋ gacchati is deposited); Miln 359 (sabbe tassɔ ādheyya2 honti they all become deposited in him, i. e. his deposits or his property).

-- mukha see ādiya2. Ānaka
Ānaka
[Sk. ānaka, cp. Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 10] a kind of kettledrum, beaten only at one end S ii.266; J ii. 344; Dpvs xvi.14. Ānañca
Ānañca
see ākāsa˚ and viññāṇa˚. Ānañja
Ānañja
see ānejja. Ānaṇya
Ānaṇya
(nt.) [Sk. ānṛṇya, so also BSk. e. g. Jtm 3118; from a + ṛṇa, P. iṇa but also aṇa in composition, thus an -- aṇa as base of ānaṇya] freedom from debt D i.73; A iii.354 (Ep. of Nibbāna, cp. anaṇa); Nd1 160; Vism 44; DA i.3. Ānadati
Ānadati
[ā + nadati] to trumpet (of elephants) J iv.233. Ānana
Ānana
(nt.) [Vedic āna, later Sk. ānana from an to breathe] the mouth; adj. ( -- ˚) having a mouth Sdhp 103; Pgdp 63 (vikaṭ˚). Ānantarika
Ānantarika
(& ˚ya) [fr. an + antara + ika] without an interval, immediately following, successive Vin i.321; ii. 212; Pug 13; Dhs 1291.

-- kamma "conduct that finds retribution without delay" (Kvu trsl. 275 n. 2) Vin ii.193; J i.45; Kvu 480; Miln 25 (cp. Dhs trsl. 267); Vism 177 (as prohibiting practice of kammaṭṭhāna). Ānanda
Ānanda
[Vedic ānanda, fr. ā + nand, cp. BSk. ānandī joy Divy 37] joy, pleasure, bliss, delight D i.3; Sn 679, 687; J i.207 (˚maccha Leviathan); vi.589 (˚bheri festive drum); DA i 53 ( = pītiyā etaŋ adhivacanaŋ). Ānandati
Ānandati
[ā + nandati] to be pleased or delighted J vi. 589 (aor. ānandi in T. reading ānandi vittā, expld. by C. as nandittha was pleased; we should however read ānandi -- cittā with gladdened heart). See also ānandiya. Ānandin
Ānandin
(adj.) [fr. ā + nand] joyful, friendly Th 1, 555; J iv.226. Ānandiya
Ānandiya
(adj. -- .) [grd. of ānandati] enjoyable, nt. joy, feast J vi.589 (˚ŋ acarati to celebrate the feast = ānandachaṇa C.). Ānandī
Ānandī
(f.) [ā + nandī, cp. ānanda] joy, happiness in cpd. ānandi -- citta J vi.589 (so read probably for ānandi vitta: see ānandati). Ānaya
Ānaya
(adj.) [ā + naya] to be brought, in suvānaya easy to bring S i.124 = J i.80. Ānayati
Ānayati
see āneti. Ānāpāna
Ānāpāna
(nt.) [āna + apāna, cpds. of an to breathe] in haled & exhaled breath, inspiration & respiration S v.132, 311 sq.; J i.58; Ps i.162 (˚kathā); usually in cpd. ˚sati concentration by in -- breathing & out -- breathing (cp. Man. of Mystic 70) M i.425 (cp. D ii.291); iii.82; Vin iii.70; A i.30; It 80; Ps i.166, 172, 185 (˚samādhi); Nd2 466 B (id.); Miln 332; Vism 111, 197, 266 sq.; SnA 165. See detail under sati. -- 101 -- Ānāpeti
Ānāpeti
see āneti. Ānāmeti
Ānāmeti
[ā + nāmeti, Caus. of namati, which is usually spelt nameti] to make bend, to bend, to bring toward or under J v.154 (doubtful reading fut ānāmayissasi, v. l. ānayissati, C. ānessasi = lead to). Ānisaŋsa
Ānisaŋsa
[ā + ni + saŋsa, BSk. distorted to anuśaŋsa] praise i. e. that which is commendable, profit, merit, advantage, good result, blessing in or from (c. loc.). -> There are five ānisaŋsā sīlavato sīla -- sampadāya or blessings which accrue to the virtuous enumd. at D ii.86, viz. bhogakkhandha great wealth, kittisadda good report, visārada self -- confidence, asammūlho kālaŋ karoti an untroubled death, saggaŋ lokaŋ uppajjati a happy state after death. -- D i.110, 143; iii.132 (four), 236 (five); M i.204; S i.46, 52; iii.8, 93 (mahā˚); v.69 (seven), 73, 129, 133, 237 (seven), 267, 276; A i.58 (karaṇīye kariyamāne); ii.26, 185, 239, 243 (sikkhā˚); iii.41 (dāne), 248 (dhammasavane), 250 (yāguyā), 251 (upaṭṭhita -- satissa), 253 sq. (sīlavato sīlasampadāya etc., as above), 267 (sucarite), 441; iv.150 (mettāya ceto -- vimuttiyā), 361 (dhammasavane), 439 sq. (nekkhamme avitakke nippītike), 442, 443 sq. (ākāsɔānañcāyatane); v.i, 106 (mahā˚), 311; It 28, 29, 40 (sikkhā˚); Sn 256 (phala˚), 784, 952; J i.9, 94; v.491 (v. l. anu˚); Nd1 73, 104, 441; Kvu 400; Miln 198; VvA 6, 113; PvA 9 (dāna˚) 12, 64 ( = phala), 208, 221 (= guṇa); Sdhp 263. -- Eleven ānisaŋsas of mettā (cp. Ps ii.130) are given in detail at Vism 311-> 314; on another eight see pp. 644 sq. Ānisada
Ānisada
(nt.) [a + sad] "sit down", bottom, behind M i. 80 = 245; J iii.435 (gloss asata) Vism 251 = KhA 45 (˚ttaca), 252 (˚maŋsa). Ānuttariya
Ānuttariya
(nt.) [see also anuttariya which as -- ˚ probably represents ānutt˚] incomparableness, excellency, supreme ideal D iii.102 sq.; A v.37. Ānīta
Ānīta
[pp. of ānetī] fetched, brought (here), brought back adduced J i.291; iii.127; iv.1. Ānupuṭṭha
Ānupuṭṭha
metri causa for anupuṭṭha (q. v.). Ānupubba
Ānupubba
(nt.) [abstr. fr. anupubba] rule, regularity, order Th 1, 727 (cp. M Vastu ii.224 ānupubbā). Ānupubbatā
Ānupubbatā
(f.) (or ˚ta nt.?) [fr. last] succession; only in tt. g. padânu -- pubbatā word sequence, in expln. of iti Nd1 140; Nd2 137 (v. l. ˚ka). Ānupubbikathā
Ānupubbikathā
[for anupubbi˚ representing its isolated composition form, cp. ānubhāva & see also anupubbi˚] regulated exposition, graduated sermon D i.110; ii.41 sq.; M i.379; J i.8; Miln 228; DA i.277, 308; DhA iv.199. Ānubhāva
Ānubhāva
[the dissociated composition form of anubhāva, q. v. for details. Only in later language] greatness, magnificence, majesty, splendour J i.69 (mahanto); ii.102 (of a jewel) v.491; DhA ii.58. Ānejja
Ānejja
and Ānañja [abstr. fr. an + *añja or *ejja = *ijja. The Sanskritised equivalent would be *iñjya or *iñgya of ing to stir, move, with a peculiar substitution of *ang in Pāli, referring it to a base with ṛ (probably Sk. ṛj, ṛñjati) in analogy to a form like Sk. ṛṇa = Pāli aṇa & iṇa, both a & i representing Sk. ṛ. The form añja would thus correspond to a Sk. *añjya (*añgya). The third P. form ān -- eñja is a direct (later, and probably re -- instituted) formation from Sk. iñjya, which in an interesting way became in BSk. re -- sanskritised to āñijya (which on the other hand may represent āñejja & thus give the latter the feature of a later, but more specifically Pāli form). The editions of P. Texts show a great variance of spelling, based on MSS. vacillation, in part also due to confusion of derivation] immovability, imperturbability, impassibility. The word is n. but occurs as adj. at Vin iii. 109 (ānañja samādhi, with which cp. BSk. ānijyā śāntiḥ at Av. Ś i.199. -- The term usually occurs in cpd. ānejja -- ppatta (adj.) immovable lit. having attained impassibility, expld. by Bdhgh. at Vin iii.267 (on Pār. i.1, 6) as acala, niccala, i. e. motionless. This cpd. is indicated below by (p.) after the reference. -- The various spellings of the word are as follows: -- 1. ānejja D i.76 (v. l. ānañja -- p.) A ii.184 (p.); iii.93 (p.), 100 (p.), 377 sq. (p.); Nd2 471 (v. l. aneja, ānañja) = Vbh 137 (āneñja); Nd2 569a (v. l. ānañja), 601 (v. l. anejja & aneñja); Pug 60 (p.); DA i.219 (v. l. BB āneñja). -- 2. ānañja Vin iii.4 (p.) (v. l. ānañca˚, anañja˚, ānañja˚; Bdhgh. ānejja˚ p. 267), 109; Ud 27 (samādhi, adj. v. l. ānañca); DhA iv.46. See also below cpd. ˚kāraṇa. -- A peculiarity of Trenckner a spelling is āṇañja at M ii.229 (v. l. aṇañja, aneñja, āneñja), 253, 254. -- 3. āneñja S ii.82. (v. l. āṇañje, or is it āṇeñja?); D iii.217 (˚âbhisankhāra of imperturbable character, remaining static, cp. Kvu trsl. 358); Nd1 90 (id.), 206, 442; Ps ii.206; Vbh 135, 340; Vism 377 (p.), 386 (sixteen˚ fold), 571; Nett 87, 99. -> See also iñjati.

-- kāraṇa trick of immovability, i. e. pretending to be dead (done by an elephant, but see differently Morris J P T S. 1886, 154) J i.415; ii.325 (v. l. āṇañja, āneñca, ānañca); iv.308; v.273, 310. Āneñjatā
Āneñjatā
(f.) [fr. āneñja] steadfastness Vism 330, 386. Āneti
Āneti
[ā + neti] to bring, to bring towards, to fetch, pro- cure, convey, bring back Sn 110; PvA 54, 92. pot. 1st pl. ānema (or imper. 2nd pl ānetha M i.371. fut. ānayissati S i.124; Pv ii.65; J iii.173; v.154 (v. l.), & ānessati J v.154. inf. ānayituŋ Pv ii 610, ger. ānetvā PvA 42, 74. aor. ānesi PvA 3, & ānayi Pv i.77 (sapatiŋ). -- pp. ānīta (q. v.). -- Med. pass. ānīyati & āniyyati D ii.245 (āniyyataŋ imper. shall be brought); M i. 371 (ppr. ānīyamāna). -- Caus. II. ānāpeti to cause to be fetched J iii.391; v.225. Āpa & Āpo
Āpa
& Āpo (nt.) [Vedic ap & āp, f. sg. apā, pl. āpaḥ, later Sk. also āpaḥ nt. -- Idg. *ap & *ab, primarily to Lith. ùpé water, Old Prussian ape river, Gr. *) lpi/a N. of the Peloponnesus; further (as *ab) to Lat. amnis river, Sk. abda cloud, & perhaps ambu water] water; philosophically t. t. for cohesion, representative of one of the 4 great elements (cp. mahābhūta), viz. paṭhavī, āpo, tejo, vāyo: see Cpd. 268 & Dhs trsl. 201, also below ˚dhātu. -> D ii.259; M i.327; S ii.103; iii.54, 207; A iv.312, 375; Sn 307, 391 (˚ŋ), 392 (loc. āpe), 437 (id.); J iv.8 (paṭhavi -- āpa -- teja˚); Dhs 652; Miln 363 (gen. āpassa, with paṭhavī etc.); Sdhp 100.

-- kasiṇa the water -- device, i. e. meditation by (the element of) water (cp. Mystic 75 n.) D iii.268; J i.313; Dhs 203; Vism 170; DhA i 312; iii.214. -- dhātu the fluid element, the essential element in water, i. e element of cohesion (see Cpd. 155 n. 2; Mystic 9 n. 2; Dhs trsl. 201, 242) D iii.228, 247; M i.187, 422: Dhs 652; Nett 74. See also dhātu. -- rasa the taste of water A i.32; SnA 6. -- sama resembling water M i.423. Āpakā
Āpakā
(f.) [ = āpagā] river J v.452; vi.518. Āpagā
Āpagā
(f.) [āpa + ga of gam] a river Th 1, 309; Sn 319; J v.454; Dāvs i.32; VvA 41. Āpajjati
Āpajjati
[Sk. āpadyate, ā + pad] to get into, to meet with (acc.); to undergo; to make, produce, exhibit Vin ii.126 (saŋvaraŋ); D i.222 (pariyeṭṭhiŋ); It 113 (vuddhiŋ); J i.73; Pug 20, 33 (diṭṭhɔânugatiŋ); PvA 29 (ppr. āpajjanto); DhA ii.71 -- pot. āpajjeyya D i.119 (musāvādaŋ). -- aor. āpajji J v.349; PvA 124 (sankocaŋ) & āpādi S i.37; A ii.34; It 85; J ii.293; 3rd pl. āpādu D ii.273. -- ger. āpajjitva PvA 22 (saŋvegaŋ), 151. -> pp. āpanna (q. v.). -- Caus. āpādeti (q. v.). -- Note. The reading āpajja in āpajja naŋ It 86 is uncertain (vv. ll. āsajja & ālajja). The id. p. at Vin ii.203 (CV. vii.4, 8) has āsajjanaŋ, for which Bdhgh, on p. 325 has āpajjanaŋ. Cp. pariyāpajjati. -- 102 -- Āpaṇa
Āpaṇa
[Sk. āpaṇa, ā + paṇ] a bazaar, shop Vin i.140; J i.55; v.445; Pv ii.322; Miln 2, 341; SnA 440; DhA i. 317; ii.89; VvA 157; PvA 88, 333 (phal˚ fruit shop), 215. Āpaṇika
Āpaṇika
[fr. āpaṇa] a shopkeeper, tradesman J i.124; Miln 344; VvA 157; DhA ii.89. Āpatacchika
Āpatacchika
at J vi.17 is C. reading for apatacchika in khārâpat˚ (q. v.). Āpatati
Āpatati
[ā + patati] to fall on to, to rush on to J v.349 ( = upadhāvati C.); vi.451 (= āgacchati C.); Miln 371. Āpatti
Āpatti
(f.) [Sk. āpatti, fr. ā + pad, cp. apajjati & BSk. āpatti, e. g, Divy 330] an ecclesiastical offence (cp. Kvu trsl. 362 n. 1), Vin i.103 (˚khandha), 164 (˚ŋ paṭikaroti), 322 (˚ŋ passati), 354 (avasesā & anavasesā); ii.2 sq. (˚ŋ ropeti), 59, 60 (˚pariyanta), 88 (˚adhikaraṇa), 259 (˚ŋ paṭikaroti); iv.344; D iii.212 (˚kusalatā); A i.84 (id.), 87; ii.240 (˚bhaya); Dhs 1330 sq. (cp. Dhs trsl. 346). -> anāpatti Vin iii.35.

˚vuṭṭhānatā forgiveness of an offence Vin ii.250 (put before anāpatti). Āpattika
Āpattika
(adj.) [āpatti + ka, cp. BSk. āpattika Divy 303] guilty of an offence M i.443; Vin iv.224. an˚ Vin i.127. Āpatha
Āpatha
in micchāpatha, dvedhāpatha as classified in Vbh Ind. p. 441 should be grouped under patha as micchā˚, dvedhā˚. Āpathaka
Āpathaka
in ˚jjhāyin Nd2 3422 is read āpādaka˚ at Nd1 226, and āpātaka˚ at Vism 26. Āpadā
Āpadā
(f.) [Sk. āpad, fr. ā + pad, cp. āpajjati & BSk. āpad, e. g. in āpadgata Jtm 3133] accident, misfortune, distress, D iii.190; A ii.68 (loc. pl. āpadāsu), 187; iii. 45; iv.31; Th 1, 371; J iv.163 (āpadatthā, a difficult form; vv. ll. T. aparattā, āpadatvā, C. aparatthā; expld. by āpadāya); v.340 (loc. āpade), 368; PvA 130 (quot.); Sdhp 312, 554. Note. For the contracted form in loc. pl. āpāsu ( = *āpatsu) see *āpā. Āpanna
Āpanna
[pp. of āpajjati] -- 1. entered upon, fallen into, possessed of, having done Vin i.164 (āpattiŋ ā.); iii.90; D i.4 (dayāpanna merciful); Nd2 32 (taṇhāya). -- 2. unfortunate, miserable J i.19 (v.124). Cp. pari˚. *Āpā
*Āpā
(& *Āvā) (f.) [for āpadā, q. v.] misery, misfortune J ii.317 (loc. pl. āpāsu, v. l. avāsu, C. āpadāsu); iii.12 (BB āvāsu); v.82 (avāgata gone into misery, v. l. apagata, C. apagata parihīna), 445 (loc. āvāsu, v. l. avāsu, C. āpadāsu), 448 (āvāsu kiccesu; v. l. apassu, read āpāsu). Note. Since *āpā only occurs in loc. pl., the form āpāsu is to be regarded as a direct contraction of Sk. āpatsu. Āpāṇa
Āpāṇa
[ā + pāṇa] life, lit. breathing, only in cpd. ˚koṭi the end of life Miln 397; Dāvs iii.93; adj. -- koṭika M ii.120; Vism 10. Āpātha
Āpātha
[etym.? Trenckner, Miln p. 428 says: "I suspect ā. to be corrupted from āpāta (cp. āpatati), under an impression that it is allied to patha; but it is scarcely ever written so"] sphere, range, focus, field (of consciousness or perception; cp. Dhs trsl. 199), appearance A ii.67; J i.336; Vbh 321; Miln 298; Vism 21, 548; DA i.228; DhsA 308, 333; VvA 232 (˚kāla); DhA iv.85; Sdhp 356. Usually in phrase āpāthaŋ gacchati to come into focus, to become clear, to appear M i.190; S iv.160, or ˚ŋ āgacchati Vin i.184; A iii.377 sq.; iv.404; Vism 125. Cp. ˚gata below.

-- gata come into the sphere of, appearing, visible M i.174 = Nd2 jhāna (an˚ unapproached); PvA 23 (āpāthaŋ gata). -- gatatta abstr. fr. last: appcarance Vism 617. Āpāthaka
Āpāthaka
(adj.) [fr. āpātha] belonging to the (perceptual) sphere of, visible, in ˚nisādin lying down visible D iii.44, 47. Cp. āpathaka. Āpādaka
Āpādaka
(adj. -- n.) [fr. ā + pad] -- 1. (adj.) producing, leading to ( -- ˚) VvA 4 (abhiññ˚ catuttha -- jjhāna). -- 2. (n.) one who takes care of a child, a protector, guardian A i.62 = 132 = It 110 (+ posaka). -- f. āpādikā a nurse, foster -- mother Vin ii.289 (+ posikā). Āpādā
Āpādā
(f.) [short for āpādikā] a nursing woman, in an˚ not nursing, unmarried J iv.178. Āpādi
Āpādi
aor. of āpajjati (q. v.). Āpādeti
Āpādeti
[Caus. of āpajjati] to produce, make out, bring, bring into M i.78; iii.248; S iv.110 (addhānaŋ to live one's life, cp. addhānaŋ āpādi J ii.293 = jīvitɔaddhānaŋ āpādi āyuŋ vindi C.); SnA 466. -- Cp. pari˚ Āpāna
Āpāna
(nt.) [fr. ā + pā] drinking; drinking party, banquet; banqueting -- hall, drinking -- hall J i.52 (˚maṇḍala); v.292 (˚bhūmi); Vism 399 (id.); DhA i.213 (id., rañño). Āpānaka
Āpānaka
(adj.) [āpāna + ka] drinking, one who is in the habit of drinking D i.167. Āpānīya
Āpānīya
(adj.) [fr. āpāna, ā + pā] drinkable, fit for drinking or drinking with, in ˚kaŋsa drinking -- bowl, goblet M i. 316; S ii.110. Āpāyika
Āpāyika
(adj. -- n.) [fr. apāya] one suffering in an apāya or state of misery after death Vin ii.202 = It 85 (v. l. ap˚); Vin ii.205; D i.103; A i.265; It 42; Vism 16; PvA 60. Āpiyati
Āpiyati
[fr. ṛ, cp. appāyati & appeti] to be in motion (in etym. of āpo) Vism 364. Āpucchati
Āpucchati
[ā + pucchati] to enquire after, look for, ask, esp. to ask permission or leave; aor. āpucchi J i.140; PvA 110; grd. āpucchitabba DhA i.6; ger. āpucchitvā Vin iv.267 (apaloketvā +); Miln 29; PvA 111; āpucchitūna (cp. Geiger § 211) Th 2, 426; āpuccha Th 2, 416, & āpucchā [ = āpṛcchya, cp. Vedic ācyā for ācya], only in neg. form an˚ without asking Vin ii.211, 219; iv.165, 226 (= anapaloketvā); DhA i.81. -- pp. āpucchita Vin iv.272. Āpūrati
Āpūrati
[a + pūrati] to be filled, to become full, to increase J iii.154 (cando ā. = pūrati C.); iv.26, 99, 100. Āpeti
Āpeti
[Caus. of āp, see appoti & pāpuṇāti] to cause to reach or obtain J vi.46. Cp. vy˚. Āphusati
Āphusati
[ā + phusati] to feel, realise, attain to, reach; aor. āphusi Vv 169 ( = adhigacchi VvA 84). Ābaddha
Ābaddha
[pp. of ābandhati] tied, bound, bound up DA i. 127; fig. bound to, attached to, in love with DhA i.88; PvA 82 (Tissāya ˚sineha); Sdhp 372 (sineh, ˚hadaya). Ābandhaka
Ābandhaka
(adj.) [ā + bandh, cp. Sk. ābandha tie, bond] (being) tied to (loc.) PvA 169 (sīse). Ābandhati
Ābandhati
(ā + bandhati, Sk. ābadhnāti, bandh] to bind to, tie, fasten on to, hold fast; fig. to tie to, to attach to, J iv.132, 289; v.319, 338, 359. -- pp. ābaddha. Ābandhana
Ābandhana
(nt.) [fr. ā + bandh] -- 1. tie, bond DA i. 181 = Pug A 236 (˚atthena ñāti yeva ñāti -- parivaṭṭo). -> 2. tying, binding Vism 351 (˚lakkhaṇa, of āpodhātu). -> 3. reins (?) or harness (on a chariot) J v.319 (but cp. C. expln. "hatthi -- assa -- rathesu ābandhitabbāni bhaṇḍakāni", thus taking it as ā + bhaṇḍa + na, i. e. wares, loads etc.). With this cp. Sk. ābandha, according to Halāyudha 2, 420 a thong of leather which fastens the oxen to the yoke of a plough. -- 103 -- Ābādha
Ābādha
[ā + bādh to oppress, Vedic ābādha oppression] affliction, illness, disease Vin iv.261; D i.72; ii.13; A i.121; iii.94, 143; iv.333, 415 sq., 440; Dh 138; Pug 28; Vism 41 (udara -- vāta˚) 95; VvA 351 (an˚ safe & sound); SnA 476; Sdhp 85. -- A list of ābādhas or illnesses, as classified on grounds of aetiology, runs as follows: pittasamuṭṭhānā, semha˚, vāta˚, sannipātikā, utu -- pariṇāmajā, visama -- parihārajā, opakkamikā, kammavipākajā (after Nd2 304i.c., recurring with slight variations at S iv.230; A ii.87; iii.131; v.110; Nd1 17, 47; Miln 112, cp. 135). -> Another list of illnesses mentioned in tha Vinaya is given in Index to Vin ii., p. 351. -- Five ābādhas at Vin i. 71, viz. kuṭṭhaŋ gaṇḍo kilāso soso apamāro said to be raging in Magadha cp. p. 93. -- Three ābādhas at D iii.75, viz. icchā anasanaŋ jarā, cp. Sn 311. -- See also cpd. appābādha (health) under appa. Ābādhika
Ābādhika
(adj. -- n.) [fr. ābādha] affected with illness, a sick person A iii.189, 238; Nd1 160; Miln 302; DA 212; DhA i.31; PvA 271. -- f. ābādhikinī a sick woman A ii.144. Ābādhita
Ābādhita
[pp. of ābādheti, Caus. of ā + bādh] afflicted, oppressed, molested Th 1, 185. Ābādheti
Ābādheti
[ā + Caus. of bādh, cp. ābādha] to oppress, vex, annoy, harass S iv.329. Ābila
Ābila
(adj.) [Sk. āvila; see also P. āvila] turbid, disturbed, soiled J v.90. Ābhata
Ābhata
[pp. of ā + bharati from bhṛ] brought (there or here), carried, conveyed, taken D i.142; S. i.65; A ii.71, 83; It 12, 14 with phrase yathābhataŋ as he has been reared (cp. J v.330 evaŋ kicchā bhaṭo); Pv iii.5 (ratt˚ = rattiyaŋ ā. PvA 199); DhA ii.57, 81; iv.89; VvA 65. Cp. yathābhata. Ābhataka
Ābhataka
(adj.) = ābhata; DA i.205 (v. l. ābhata). Ābharaṇa
Ābharaṇa
(nt.) [Sk. ābharaṇa, ā + bhṛ] that which is taken up or put on, viz. ornament, decoration, trinkets D i. 104; Vv 802; J iii.11, 31; DhA iii.83; VvA 187. Ābharati
Ābharati
[ā + bhṛ] to bring, to carry; ger. ābhatvā J iv.351. Ābhassara
Ābhassara
(adj. -- n.) [etym. uncertain; one suggested in Cpd. 138 n. 4 is ā + *bha + *sar, i. e. from whose bodies are emitted rays like lightning, more probably a combn. of ābhā + svar (to shine, be bright), i. e. shining in splendour] shining, brilliant, radiant, N. of a class of gods in the Brahma heavens "the radiant gods", usually referred to as the representatives of supreme love (pīti & mettā); thus at D i.17; Dh 200; It 15; DhA iii.258 (˚loka). In another context at Vism 414 sq. Ābhā
Ābhā
(f.) [Sk. ābhā, fr. ā + bhā, see ābhāti] shine, splendour, lustre, light D ii.12; M iii.147 (adj. -- ˚); S ii.150 (˚dhātu); A ii.130, 139; iii.34; Mhvs xi.11; VvA 234 (of a Vimāna, v. l. pabhā); DhA iv.191; Sdhp 286. Ābhāti
Ābhāti
[ā + bhā] to shine, shine forth, radiate Dh 387 ( = virocati DhA iv.144); J v.204. See also ābheti. Ābhāveti
Ābhāveti
[ā + bhāveti] to cultivate, pursue Pv ii.1319 (met- tacittaŋ; gloss & v. l. abhāvetvā; expld. as vaḍḍhetvā brūhetvā PvA 168). Ābhāsa
Ābhāsa
[Sk. ābhāsa, fr. ā + bhās] splendour, light, appear- ance M iii.215. Ābhicetasika
Ābhicetasika
(adj.) See abhicetasika. This spelling, with guṇa of the first syllable, is probably more correct; but the short a is the more frequent. Ābhidosika
Ābhidosika
(adj.) [abhidosa+ika] belonging to the evening before, of last night Vin iii.15 (of food; stale); M i.170 (˚kālakata died last night); Miln 291. Ābhidhammika
Ābhidhammika
(adj.) [abhidhamma + ika] belonging to the specialised Dhamma, versed in or studying the Abhidhamma Miln 17, 341; Vism 93. As abhi˚ atKhA 151; J iv.219. Ābhindati
Ābhindati
[ā + bhindati] to split, cut, strike (with an axe) S iv.160 (v. l. a˚). Ābhisekika
Ābhisekika
(adj.) [fr. abhiseka] belonging to the conse- cration (of a king) Vin v.129. Ābhujati
Ābhujati
[ā + bhujati, bhuj1] to bend, bend towards or in, contract; usually in phrase pallankaŋ ā˚ "to bend in the round lap" or "bend in hookwise", to sit crosslegged (as a devotee with straightened back), e. g. at Vin i.24; D i.71; M i.56 (v. l. ābhuñjitvā), 219; A iii. 320; Pug 68; Ps i.176; J i.71, 213; Miln 289; DA i. 58, 210. In other connection J i.18 (v.101; of the ocean "to recede"); Miln 253 (kāyaŋ). Ābhujana
Ābhujana
(nt.) [fr. ābhujati] crouching, bending, turning in, in phrase pallankɔābhujana sitting cross -- legged J i 17 (v.91); PvA 219. Ābhujī
Ābhujī
(f.) [lit. the one that bends, prob. a poetic meta- phor] N. of a tree, the Bhūrja or Bhojpatr J v.195 ( = bhūjapatta -- vana C.), 405 (= bhūjapatta C.). Ābhūñjati
Ābhūñjati
[ā + bhuj2, Sk. bhunakti] to enjoy, partake of, take in, feel, experience J iv.456 (bhoge; Rh. D. "hold in its hood"?); DhsA 333. Ābhuñjana
Ābhuñjana
(nt.) [fr. ābhuñjati] partaking of, enjoying, ex- periencing DhsA 333. Ābheti
Ābheti
[*ābhayati = ābhāti, q. v.] to shine Pv ii.126 (ppr. ˚entī); Vv 82 (˚antī, v. l. ˚entī; = obhāsentī VvA 50). Ābhoga
Ābhoga
[fr. ābhuñjati, bhuj2 to enjoy etc. The translators of Kvu derive it from bhuj1 to bend etc. (Kvu trsl. 221 n. 4) which however is hardly correct, cp. the similar meaning of gocara "pasturing", fig. perception etc.] ideation, idea, thought D i.37 ( = manasikāro samannāhāro DA i.122; cp. semantically āhāra = ābhoga, food); Vbh 320; Miln 97; Vism 164, 325, 354; Dāvs 62; KhA 42 (˚paccavekkhana), 43 (id.) 68. Āma
Āma1
(indecl.) [a specific Pāli formation representing either amma (q. v.) or a gradation of pron. base amu˚ "that" (see asu), thus deictic -- emphatic exclamn. Cp. also BSk. āma e. g. Av. Ś i.36] affirmative part. "yes, indeed, certainly" D i.192 sq. (as v. l. BB.; T. has āmo); J i.115, 226 (in C. expln. of T. amā -- jāta which is to be read for āmajāta); ii.92; v.448; Miln 11, 19, 253; DhA i.10, 34; ii.39, 44; VvA 69; PvA 12, 22, 56, 61, 75, 93 etc. Āma
Āma2
(adj.) [Vedic āma = Gr. w)mo/s, connected with Lat. amārus. The more common P. form is āmaka (q. v.)] raw, viz. (a) unbaked (of an earthen vessel), unfinished Sn 443; (b) uncooked (of flesh), nt. raw flesh, only in foll. cpds.: ˚gandha "smell of raw flesh", verminous odour, a smell attributed in particular to rotting corpses (cp. similarly BSk. āmagandha M Vastu iii.214) D ii.242 sq.; A i.280; Sn 241, 242 (= vissagandha kuṇapagandha SnA 286), 248, 251; Dhs 625; and ˚giddha greedy after flesh (used as bait) J vi.416 (= āmasankhāta āmisa C.). Āmaka
Āmaka
(adj.) [ = āma2] raw, uncooked D i.5 = Pug 58 (˚maŋsa raw flesh); M i.80 (titta -- kalābu āmaka -- cchinno).

-- dhañña "raw" grain, corn in its natural, unprepared state D i.5 = Pug 58 (see DA i.78 for definition); Vin iv.264; v.135. -- sāka raw vegetables Vism 70. -- susāna "cemetery of raw flesh" charnelgrove (cp. āmagandha under ama2), i. e. fetid smelling cremation ground J i.264, 489; iv.45 sq.; vi.10; DhA i.176; VvA 76; PvA 196. Āmaṭṭha
Āmaṭṭha
[Sk. āmṛṣṭa, pp. of āmasati; cp. āmasita] touched, handled J i.98 (an˚); DA i.107 ( = parāmaṭṭha); Sdhp 333. -- 104 -- Āmaṇḍaliya
Āmaṇḍaliya
[ā + maṇḍala + iya] a formation resembling a circle, in phrase ˚ŋ karoti to form a ring (of people) or a circle, to stand closely together M i 225 (cp. Sk. āmaṇḍalikaroti). Āmata
Āmata
in anāmata at J ii.56 is métric for amata. Āmattikā
Āmattikā
(f.) [ā + mattikā] earthenware, crockery; in ˚āpaṇa a crockery shop, chandler's shop Vin iv.243. Āmaddana
Āmaddana
(nt.) [ā + maddana of mṛd] crushing VvA 311. Āmanta
Āmanta
(adj. -- adv.) [either ger. of āmanteti (q. v.) or root der. fr. ā + mant, cp. āmantaṇā] asking or asked, invited, only as an˚ without being asked, unasked, uninvited Vin i.254 (˚cāra); A iii.259 (id.). Āmantana
Āmantana
(nt.) & ˚nā (f., also ˚ṇā) [from āmanteti] ad- dressing, calling; invitation, greeting Sn 40 (ep. Nd2 128); ˚vacana the address -- form of speech i. e. the vocative case (cp. Sk. āmantritaŋ id.) SnA 435; KhA 167. Āmantanaka
Āmantanaka
(adj. -- n.) [fr. āmantana] addressing, speaking to, conversing; f. ˚ikā interlocutor, companion, favourite queen Vv 188 ( = allāpa -- sallāpa -- yoggā kīḷanakāle vā tena (i. e. Sakkena) āmantetabbā VvA 96). Āmantaṇīya
Āmantaṇīya
(adj.) [grd. of āmanteti] to be addressed J iv.371. Āmantita
Āmantita
[pp. of āmanteti] addressed, called, invited Pv ii.313 ( = nimantita PvA 86). Āmanteti
Āmanteti
[denom. of ā + *mantra] to call, address, speak to, invite, consult J vi.265; DA i.297; SnA 487 ( = ālapati & avhayati); PvA 75, 80, 127. -- aor. āmantesi D ii.16; Sn p. 78 (= ālapi SnA 394) & in poetry āmantayi Sn 997; Pv ii.27; 37 (perhaps better with v. l. SS samantayi). -- ger. āmanta (= Sk. *āmantrya) J iii.209, 315 (= āmantayitvāˊ C.), 329; iv.111; v.233; vi.511. -> pp. āmantita (q. v.). -- Caus. II. āmantāpeti to invite to come, to cause to be called, to send for D i.134 (v. l. āmanteti); Miln 149. Āmaya
Āmaya
[etym.? cp. Sk. āmaya] affliction, illness, misery; only as an˚ (adj.) not afflicted, not decaying, healthy, well (cp. BSk. nirāmaya Aśvaghoṣa ii.9) Vin i.294; Vv 1510 ( = aroga VvA 74); 177; 368; J iii.260, 528; iv. 427; vi.23. Positive only very late, e. g. Sdhp 397. Āmalaka
Āmalaka
[cp. Sk. āmalaka] emblic myrobalan, Phyllanthus Emblica Vin i.201, 278; ii.149 (˚vaṇṭika pīthu); S i.150; A v.170; Sn p. 125 (˚matti); J iv.363; v.380 (as v. l. for T. āmala); Miln 11; DhA i.319; VvA 7. Āmalakī
Āmalakī
(f.) āmalaka Vin i.30; M i.456 (˚vana). Āmasati
Āmasati
[ā + masati fr. mṛś] to touch (upon), to handle, to lay hold on Vin ii.221; iii.48 (kumbhiŋ); J iii.319 (id.); A v.263, 266; J iv.67; Ps ii.209; Miln 306; SnA 400; DhsA 302; VvA 17. -- aor. āmasi J ii.360; ger. āmasitvā Vin iii.140 (udakapattaŋ) J ii.330; grd. āmassa J ii.360 (an˚) and āmasitabba id. (C.). -- pp. āmaṭṭha & āmasita (q. v.). Āmasana
Āmasana
(nt.) [fr. āmasati] touching, handling; touch Vin iv.214. Cp. iii.118; Miln 127, 306; DA i.78. Āmasita
Āmasita
[pp. of āmasati] touched, taken hold of, occupied VvA 113 (an˚ khetta virgin land). Āmāya
Āmāya
(adj.) [to be considered either a der. from amā (see amājāta in same meaning) or to be spelt amāya which metri causa may be written ā˚] "born in the house" (cp. semantically Gr. i)qagenh/s > indigenous), inborn, being by birth, in cpd. ˚dāsa (dāsī) a born slave, a slave by birth J vi.117 ( = gehadāsiyā kucchismiŋ jātadasī C.), 285 (= dāsassa dāsiyā kucchimhi jātadāsā). Āmāsaya
Āmāsaya
[āma2 + āsaya, cp. Sk. āmāśaya & āmāśraya] receptacle of undigested food, i. e. the stomach Vism 260; KhA 59. Opp. pakkāsaya. Āmilāka
Āmilāka
(nt.?) [etym.?] a woollen cover into which a floral pattern is woven DA i.87. Āmisa
Āmisa
(nt.) [der. fr. āma raw, q. v. for etym. -- Vedic āmis (m.); later Sk. āmiṣa (nt.), both in lit. & fig. meaning] -> 1. originally raw meat; hence prevailing notion of "raw, unprepared, uncultivated"; thus ˚khāra raw lye Vin i. 206. -- 2. "fleshy, of the flesh" (as opposed to mind or spirit), hence material, physical; generally in opposition to dhamma (see dhamma B 1. a. and also next no.), thus at M i.12 (˚dāyāda); It 101 (id.); A i.91 = It 98 (˚dāna material gifts opp. to spiritual ones); Dhs 1344 (˚paṭisanthāra hospitality towards bodily needs, cp. Dhs trsl. 350). -- 3. food, esp. palatable food (cp. E. sweetmeat); food for enjoyment, dainties Vin ii.269 sq.; J ii.6; Miln 413 (lok˚); DA i.83 (˚sannidhi), -- 4. bait S i.67; iv.158; J iv.57, 219; vi.416; DA i.270. -- 5. gain, reward, money, douceur, gratuity, "tip" PvA 36, 46; esp. in phrase ˚kiñcikkha -- hetu for the sake of some (little) gain S ii.234; A i.128; v.265, 283 sq., 293 sq.; Pug 29; Pv ii.83 (= kiñci āmisaŋ patthento PvA 107); Miln 93; VvA 241 (= bhogahetu). -- 6. enjoyment Pv ii.82 (= kāmāmise -- laggacitto PvA 107). -- 7. greed, desire, lust Vin i.303 (˚antara out of greed, selfish, opp. mettacitto); A iii.144 (id.), 184 (id.); i.73 (˚garū parisā); J v.91 (˚cakkhu); Ps ii.238 (mār˚). See also cpds. with nir˚ and sa˚. Āmuñcati
Āmuñcati
[ā + mtic] to put on, take up; to be attached to, cling to DhsA 305. -- pp. āmutta (q. v.). Āmutta
Āmutta
[Sk. āmukta, pp. of ā + muc, cp. also BSk. āmukta jewel Divy 2, 3 etc., a meaning which might also be seen in the later Pāli passages, e. g. at PvA 134. Semantically cp. ābharaṇa] having put on, clothed in, dressed with, adorned with (always ˚ -- ) D i.104 (˚mālābharaṇa); Vin ii.156 = Vv 208 (˚maṇi -- kuṇḍala); S i.211; J iv.460; v. 155; vi.492; Vv 721 (= paṭimukka); 802 (˚hatthābharaṇa); Pv ii.951 (˚maṇikuṇḍala);J iv.183; VvA 182. Āmeṇḍita
Āmeṇḍita
(or Āmeḍita) [Sk. āmreḍita fram ā + mreḍ, dialectical] -- (nt.) sympathy in ˚ŋ karoti to show sympathy (? so Morris J.P.T.S. 1887, 106) DA i.228 = SnA 155 (v. l. at DA āmeḍita). Āmo
Āmo
= āma D i.192, 3. Āmoda
Āmoda
[Sk. āmoda, fr. ā + mud] that which pleases; fragrance, perfume Dāvs v.51. Āmodanā
Āmodanā
(f.) [fr. ā + mud] rejoicing Dhs 86, 285. Āmodamāna
Āmodamāna
(adj.) [ppr. med. of āmodeti] rejoicing, glad S i.100 (v. l. anu˚) = It 66; Vv 648 (= pamodamāna VvA 278); J v.45. Āmodita
Āmodita
[pp. fr. āmodeti] pleased, satisfied, glad J i.17 (v.80); v.45 (˚pamodita highly pleased); Miln 346. Āmodeti
Āmodeti
[Sk. āmodayati, Caus. of ā + mud] to please, gladden, satisfy Th 1, 649 (cittaŋ); J v.34. -- pp. āmodita (q. v.). Āya
Āya
[Sk. āya; ā + i] 1. coming in, entrance M iii.93. - 2. tax J v.113. -- 3. income, earning, profit, gain (opp. vaya loss) A iv.282 = 323; Sn 978; J i.228; KhA 38 (in expln. of kāya), 82 (in etym. of āyatana); PvA 130. -> 4. (āyā f.?) a lucky dice ("the incomer") J vi.281.

-- kammika a treasurer DhA i.184. -- kusala clever in earnings Nett 20. -- kosalla proficiency in money making D iii.220 (one of the three kosallas); Vbh 325. -- pariccāga expediture of one's income PvA 8. -- mukha (lit.) entrance, inflow, going in D i.74 ( = āgamana -- magga DA 1.78); M ii.15; A ii.166; (fig.) revenue income, money SnA 173. -- 105 -- Āyata
Āyata
[Sk. āyata, pp. of ā + yam, cp. āyamati] -- 1. (adj.) outstretched, extended, long, in length (with numeral) D iii.73 (ñātikkhaya, prolonged or heavy?); M i.178 (dīghato ā˚; tiriyañ ca vitthata); J i.77, 273 (tettiŋsɔ -- angulɔāyato khaggo); iii.438; Vv 8415 (˚aŋsa; cp. expln. at VvA 339); SnA 447; DhsA 48; PvA 152 (dāṭhā fangs; lomā hair), 185 (˚vaṭṭa); Sdhp 257. -- 2. (n.) a bow J iii.438.

-- agga having its point (end) stretched forward, i. e. in the future (see āyati) It 15, 52. -- paṇhin having long eye -- lashes (one of the signs of a Mahāpurisa) D ii.17 = iii.143. -- pamha a long eye -- lash Th 2, 384 (= dīghapakhuma ThA 250). Āyataka
Āyataka
(adj.) [ = āyata] -- 1. long. extended, prolonged, kept up, lasting Vin ii.108 (gītassara); A iii.251 (id.); J i.362. -- 2. sudden, abrupt, instr. ˚ena abruptly Vin ii.237. Āyatana
Āyatana
(nt.) [Sk. āyatana, not found in the Vedas; but freq. in BSk. From ā + yam, cp. āyata. The pl. is āyatanā at S iv.70. -- For full definition of term as seen by the Pāli Commentators see Bdhgh's expln at DA i. 124, 125, with which cp. the popular etym. at KhA 82: "āyassa vā tananato āyatassa vā saŋsāradukkhassa nayanato āyatanāni" and at Vism 527 "āye tanoti āyatañ ca nayatī ti ā."] -- 1. stretch, extent, reach, compass, region; sphere, locus, place, spot; position, occasion (corresponding to Bdhgh's definition at DA i.124 as "samosaraṇa") D iii.241, 279 (vimutti˚); S ii.41, 269; iv.217; v.119 sq., 318. sq.; A iii.141 (ariya˚); v.61 (abhibh˚, q. v.) Sn 406 (rajass˚ "haunt of passion" = rāgādi -- rajassa uppatti -- deso SnA 381); J i.80 (raj˚). Freq. in phrase araññ˚ a lonely spot, a spot in the forest J i.173; VvA 301; PvA 42, 54. -- 2. exertion, doing, working, practice, performance (comprising Bdhgh's definition at DA i.124 as paññatti), usually -- ˚, viz. kamm˚ Nd1 505; Vbh 324, 353; kasiṇ˚ A v.46 sq., 60; Ps i.28; titth˚ A i.173, 175; Vbh 145, 367; sipp˚ (art, craft) D i.51; Nd2 505; Vbh 324, 353; cp. an˚ non -- exertion, indolence, sluggishness J v.121. -- 3. sphere of perception or sense in general, object of thought, sense -- organ & object; relation, order. -- Cpd. p. 183 says rightly: "āyatana cannot be rendered by a single English word to cover both sense -- organs (the mind being regarded as 6th sense) and sense objects". -- These āyatanāni (relations, functions, reciprocalities) are thus divided into two groups, inner (ajjhattikāni) and outer (bāhirāni), and comprise the foll.: (a) ajjhatt˚: 1. cakkhu eye, 2. sota ear, 3. ghāna nose, 4. jivhā tongue, 5. kāya body, 6. mano mind; (b) bāh˚: 1. rūpa visible object, 2. sadda sound, 3. gandha odour, 4. rasa taste, 5. phoṭṭhabba tangible object, 6. dhamma cognizable object. -- For details as regards connotation & application see Dhs trsl. introduction li sq. Cpd. 90 n. 2; 254 sq. -- Approximately covering this meaning (3) is Bdhgh's definition of āyatana at DA i.124 as sañjāti and as kāraṇa (origin & cause, i. e. mutually occasioning & conditioning relations or adaptations). See also Nd2 under rūpa for further classifications. -- For the above mentioned 12 āyatanāni see the foll. passages: D ii.302 sq.; iii.102, 243; A iii.400; v.52; Sn 373 (cp. SnA 366); Ps i.7, 22, 101, 137; ii. 181, 225, 230; Dhs 1335; Vbh 401 sq.; Nett 57, 82; Vism 481; ThA 49, 285. Of these 6 are mentioned at S i.113, ii.3; iv.100, 174 sq.; It 114; Vbh 135 sq., 294; Nett 13, 28, 30; Vism 565 sq. Other sets of 10 at Nett 69; of 4 at D ii.112, 156; of 2 at D ii.69. -- Here also belongs ākāsɔ ānañcɔ āyatana, ākiñcaññ˚ etc. (see under ākāsa etc. and s. v.), e. g. at D i.34 sq., 183; A iv.451 sq.; Vbh 172, 189, 262 sq.; Vism 324 sq. -- Unclassified passages: M i.61; ii.233; iii.32, 216, 273; S i.196; ii.6, 8, 24, 72 sq.; iii.228; iv.98; v.426; A i.113, 163, 225; iii.17, 27, 82, 426; iv.146, 426; v.30, 321, 351, 359; Nd1 109, 133, 171, 340; J i.381 (paripuṇṇa˚); Vbh 412 sq. (id.).

-- uppāda birth of the āyatanas (see above 3) Vin i.185. -- kusala skilled in the ā. M iii.63. -- kusalatā skill in the spheres (of sense) D iii.212; Dhs 1335. -- ṭṭha founded in the sense -- organs Ps i.132; ii.121. Āyatanika
Āyatanika
(adj.) [fr. āyatana] belonging to the sphere of (some special sense, see āyatana 3) S iv.126 (phass˚ niraya & sagga). Āyati
Āyati
(f.) [fr. ā + yam, cp. Sk. āyati] "stretching forth", extension, length (of time), future. Only (?) in acc. āyatiŋ (adv.) in future Vin ii.89, 185; iii.3; Sn 49; It 115 (T. reads āyati but cp. p. 94 where T. āyatiŋ, v. l. āyati); J i.89; v.431; DA i 236. Āyatika
Āyatika
(adj.) [fr. last] future S i.142. Āyatikā
Āyatikā
(f.) [of āyataka] a tube, waterpipe Vin ii.123. Āyatta
Āyatta
[Sk. āyatta, pp. of ā + yat]. -- 1. striving, active, ready, exerted J v.395 (˚mana = ussukkamana C.). -> 2. striven after, pursued J i.341. -- 3. dependent on Vism 310 (assāsa -- passāsa˚); Nett 194; Sdhp 477, 605. Āyanā
Āyanā
(f.) [?] at DhsA 259 and Vism 26 is a grammarian's construction, abstracted from f. abstr. words ending in ˚āyanā, e. g. kankhā > kankhāyanā, of which the correct expln. is a derivation fr. caus. -- formation kankhāyati > kankhāy + a + nā. What the idea of Bdhgh. was in propounding his expln. is hard to say, perhaps he related it to i and understood it to be the same as āyāna. Āyamati
Āyamati
[ā + yam] to stretch, extend, stretch out, draw out Miln 176, usually in ster. phrase piṭṭhi me āgilāyati tam ahaŋ āyamissāmi "my back feels weak, I will stretch it" Vin ii.200; D iii.209; M i.354; S iv.184; J i.491. -> Besides this in commentaries e. g. J iii.489 (mukhaŋ āyamituŋ). Āyasa
Āyasa
(adj.) [Sk. āyasa, of ayas iron] made of iron S ii. 182; A iii.58; Dh 345; J iv.416; v.81; Vv 845 (an˚? cp. the rather strange expln. at VvA 335). Āyasakya
Āyasakya
(nt.) dishonour, disgrace, bad repute A iv.96; J v.17; VvA 110; usually in phrase ˚ŋ pāpuṇāti to fall into disgrace Th 1, 292; J ii.33 = 271; iii.514. [Bdhgh. on A iv.96 explains it as ayasaka + ya with guṇa of the initial, cp. ārogya]. Āyasmant
Āyasmant
(adj.) [Sk. āyuṣmant, the P. form showing as- similation of u to a] lit. old, i. e. venerable; used, either as adj. or absolute as a respectful appellation of a bhikkhu of some standing (cp. the semantically identical thera ). It occurs usually in nom. āyasmā and is expld. in Nd by typical formula "piya -- vacanaŋ garu˚, sagārava -- sappaṭissâdhivacanaŋ", e. g. Nd1 140, 445; Nd2 130 on var. Sn loci (e. g. 814, 1032, 1040, 1061, 1096). -- Freq. in all texts, of later passages see SnA 158; PvA 53, 54, 63, 78. -- See also āvuso. Āyāga
Āyāga
[ā + yāga of yaj] sacrificial fee, gift; (m.) recipient of a sacrifice or gift (deyyadhamma) Sn 486 ( = deyyadhammānaŋ adhiṭṭhāna -- bhūta SnA 412); Th 1, 566; J vi. 205 (˚vatthu worthy objact of sacrificial fees). Āyācaka
Āyācaka
(adj. -- n.) [fr. ā + yāc] one who begs or prays, petitioner Miln 129. Āyācati
Āyācati
[ā + yāc, cp. Buddh. Sk. āyācate Divy 1.] -- 1. to request, beg, implore, pray to (acc.) Vin iii.127; D i.240; PvA 160. -- 2. to make a vow, to vow, promise A i. 88; J i.169 = v.472; i.260; ii.117. -- pp. āyācita (q. v.). Āyācana
Āyācana
(nt.) [fr. āyācati] -- 1. asking, adhortation, ad- dressing (t. t. g. in expln. of imperative) SnA 43, 176, 412. -- 2. a vow, prayer A i.88; iii.47; J i.169 = v.472. -- 106 -- Āyācita
Āyācita
[pp. of āyācati] vowed, promised J i.169 (˚bhatta- jātaka N.). Āyāta
Āyāta
[pp. of āyāt.; cp. BSk. āyāta in same meaning at Jtm 210] gone to, undertaken Sdhp 407. Āyāti
Āyāti
[ā + yāti of yā] to come on or here, to come near, approach, get into S i.240; Sn 669; Sn p. 116 ( = gacchati SnA 463); J iv.410; pv ii.1212 (= āgacchati PvA 158); DhA i.93 (imper. āyāma let us go). -- pp. āyāta. Āyāna
Āyāna
(nt.) [fr. ā + yā to go] coming, arrival: see āyanā. Āyāma
Āyāma
[fr. ā + yam, see āyamati] -- 1. (lit.) stretching, stretching out, extension Vin i.349 = J iii.488 (mukh˚). -> 2. (appl.) usually as linear measure: extension, length (often combd. with and contrasted to vitthāra breadth or width & ubbedha height), as n. (esp. in abl. āyāmato & instr. āyāmena in length) or as adj. ( -- ˚): J i.7, 49 (˚ato tīṇi yojanasatāni, vitthārato aḍḍhatiyāni); iii.389; Miln 17 (ratanaŋ soḷasahatthaŋ āyāmena aṭṭhahatthaŋ vitthārena), 282 (ratanaŋ catuhatthɔāyāmaŋ); Vism 205 (+ vitth˚); Khb 133 (+ vitthāra & parikkhepa); VvA 188 (soḷasayojan˚), 199 (˚vitthārehi), 221 (˚ato + vitth˚); PvA 77 (+ vitth˚), 113 (id. + ubbedha); DhA i.17 (saṭṭhi -- yojan˚). Āyāsa
Āyāsa
[cp. Sk. āyāsa, etym.?] trouble, sorrow, only neg. an˚ (adj.) peaceful, free from trouble A iv.98; Th 1, 1008. Āyu
Āyu
(nt.) [Vedic āyus; Av. āyu, gradation form of same root as Gr. ai)w/n "aeon", ai)e/n always; Lat. aevum, Goth. aiws. Ohg. ēwa, io always; Ger. ewig eternal; Ags. āē eternity, ā always (cp. ever and aye)] life, vitality, duration of life, longevity D iii.68, 69, 73, 77; S iii.143 (usmā ca); iv.294; A i.155; ii.63, 66 (addh˚); iii.47; iv.76, 139; Sn 694, 1019; It 89; J i.197 (dīgh˚); Vv 555 (cp. VvA 247 with its definition of divine life as comprising 30 600 000 years); Vism 229 (length of man's āyu = 100 years); Dhs 19, 82, 295, 644, 716; Sdhp 234, 239, 258. -- Long or divine life, dibbaŋ āyu is one of the 10 attributes of ādhipateyya or majesty (see ṭhāna), thus at Vin i.294; D iii.146; S iv.275 sq.; A i.115; iii. 33; iv.242, 396; Pv ii.959 (= jīvitaŋ PvA 136).

-- ūhā see āyūhā. -- kappa duration of life Miln 141; DhA i.250. -- khaya decay of life (cp. jīvita -- kkhaya) D i.17 (cp. DA i.110); iii.29. -- pamāṇa span or measure of life time D ii.3; A i.213, 267; ii.126 sq.; iv.138, 252 sq., 261; v.172; Pug 16; Vbh 422 sq.; SnA 476. -- pariyanta end of life It 99; Vism 422. -- sankhaya exhaustion of life or lifetime Dpvs v.102. -- sankhāra (usually pl. ˚ā) constituent of life, conditions or properties resulting in life, vital principle D ii.106; M i.295 sq.; S ii.266; A iv.311 sq.; Ud 64; J iv.215; Miln 285; Vism 292; DhA i.129; PvA 210. Cp. BSk. āyuḥ -- saŋskāra Divy 203. Āyuka
Āyuka
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. āyu] -- being of life; having a life or age A iv.396 (niyat˚); VvA 196 (yāvatāyukā dibbasampatti divine bliss lasting for a lifetime). Esp. freq. in combn. with dīgha (long) and appa (short) as dīghāyuka A iv.240; PvA 27; appāyuka A iv.247; PvA 103; both at Vism 422. In phrase vīsati -- vassasahassɔāyukesu manussesu at the time when men lived 20 000 years D ii.5 -- 12 (see Table at Dial. ii.6); DhA ii.9; PvA 135; dasa -- vassasahassɔāyukesu manussesu (10 000 years) PvA 73; cattāḷīsa˚ DhA i.103; catusaṭṭhi -- kappɔāyukā subhakiṇhā Vism 422. Āyukin
Āyukin
(adj.) [fr. āyu] = āyuka; in appāyukin short lived Vv 416. Āyuta
Āyuta
(adj.) [Sk. ayuta, pp. of ā + yu, yuvati] -- 1. con- nected with, endowed, furnished with Th 1, 753 (dve pannarasɔāyuta due to twice fifteen); Sn 301 (nārī -- varagaṇ˚ = ˚saŋyutta SnA 320); Pv ii.124 (nānā -- saragaṇ˚ = ˚yutta PvA 157). -- 2. seized, conquered, in dur˚ hard to conquer, invincible J vi.271 (= paccatthikehi durāsada C.). Āyutta
Āyutta
[Sk. āyukta; pp. of ā + yuj] -- 1. yoked, to con- nected with, full of Pv i.1014 (tejasɔāyuta T., but PvA 52 reads ˚āyutta and explns. as samāyutta); PvA 157 ( = ākiṇṇa of Pv ii.124). -- 2. intent upon, devoted to S i.67. Āyuttaka
Āyuttaka
(adj. -- n.) [āyutta + ka] one who is devoted to or entrusted with, a trustee, agent, superintendent, overseer J i.230 (˚vesa); iv.492; DhA i.101, 103, 180. Āyudha
Āyudha
is the Vedic form of the common Pāli form āvudha weapon, and occurs only spuriously at D i.9 (v. l. āvudha). Āyuvant
Āyuvant
(adj.) [fr. āyu] advanced in years, old, of age Th 1, 234. Āyusmant
Āyusmant
(adj.) [Sk. āyuṣmant; see also the regular P. form āyasmant] having life or vitality PvA 63 (āyusmāviññāṇa feeling or sense of vitality; is reading correct?). Āyussa
Āyussa
(adj.) [Sk. *āyuṣya] connected with life, bringing (long) life A iii.145 dhamma). Āyūhaka
Āyūhaka
(adj.) [fr. āyūhati] keen, eager, active Miln 207 (+ viriyavā). Āyūhati
Āyūhati
[ā + y + ūhati with euphonic y, fr. Vedic ūhati, ūh1, a gradation of vah (see etym. under vahati). Kern's etym. on Toev. 99 = āyodhati is to be doubted, more acceptable is Morris' expln. at J.P.T.S. 1885, 58 sq., although contradictory in part.] lit. to push on or forward, aim at, go for, i. e. (1) to endeavour, strain, exert oneself S i.1 (ppr. anāyūhaŋ unstriving), 48; J vi.35 (= viriyaŋ karoti C.), 283 (= vāyamati C.). -- (2) to be keen on (w. acc.), to cultivate, pursue, do Sn 210 (= karoti SnA 258); Miln 108 (kammaŋ ūyūhitvā), 214 (kammaŋ āyūhi), 326 (maggaŋ). -- pp. āyūhita (q. v.). Āyūhana
Āyūhana
(adj. -- nt.) [fr. āyūhati] -- 1. endeavouring, striving, Ps i.10 sq., 32, 52; ii.218; Vism 103, 212, 462, 579. f. āyūhanī Dhs 1059 ("she who toils" trsl.) = Vbh 361 = Nd2 taṇhā 1. (has āyūhanā). -- 2. furtherance, pursuit DA i.64 (bhavassa). Āyūhā
Āyūhā
f. [āyu + ūhā] life, lifetime, only in ˚pariyosāna at the end of (his) life PvA 136, 162; VvA 319. Āyūhāpeti
Āyūhāpeti
[Caus. II. fr. āyūhati] to cause somebody to toil or strive after DhsA 364. Āyūhita
Āyūhita
[*Sk. ā + ūhita, pp. of ūh] busy, eager, active Miln 181. Āyoga
Āyoga
[Sk. āyoga, of ā + yuj; cp. āyutta] -- 1. binding, bandage Vin ii.135; Vv 3341; VvA 142 (˚paṭṭa). -- 2. yoke Dhs 1061 (avijj˚), 1162. -- 3. ornament, decoration Nd1 226; J iii.447 (˚vatta, for v. l. ˚vanta?). -- 4. occupation, devotion to, pursuit, exertion D i.187; Dh 185 ( = payoga -- karaṇa DhA iii.238). -- 5. (t. t.) obligation, guarantee(?) SnA 179. -- Cp. sam˚. Ārakatta
Ārakatta
(nt.) [*ārakāt + tvaŋ] warding off, keeping away, holding aloof, being far from (c. gen.); occurring only in pop. etym. of arahant at A iv.145; DhA iv.228; DA i.146 = VvA 105, 106 = PvA 7; cp. DhsA 349. Ārakā
Ārakā
(adv.) [Sk. ārāt & ārakāt, abl. form. fr. *āraka, see ārā2] far off, far from, away from, also used as prep. c. abl. and as adj. pl. keeping away from, removed, far Vin ii.239 = A iv.202 (sanghamhā); D i.99, 102 (adj.) 167; M i.280 (adj.) S ii.99; iv.43 sq.; A i.281; It 91; J i.272; iii.525; v.451; Miln 243; VvA 72, 73 (adj. + viratā). Ārakkha
Ārakkha
[ā + rakkha] watch, guard, protection, care D ii.59; iii.289; S iv.97, 175, 195; A ii.120; iii.38; iv. 266, 270, 281 (˚sampadā), 322 (id.), 400; v.29 sq.; J i.203; ii.326; iv.29 (˚purisa); v.212 (˚ṭṭhāna, i. e. harem), 374 (˚parivāra); Pug 21 (an˚), 24; Miln 154; Vism 19 (˚gocara preventive behaviour, cautiousness); SnA 476 (˚devatā); KhA 120 (id.), 169; DhA ii.146; PvA 195; Sdhp 357, 365. -- 107 -- Ārakkhlka
Ārakkhlka
[fr. ārakkha] a guard, watchman J iv.29. Ārakkheyya
Ārakkheyya
see arakkheyya. Āragga
Āragga
(nt.) [ārā + agga; Sk. ārāgra of ārā an awl, a prick] the point of an awl, the head of certain arrows, having the shape of an awl, or an arrow of that kind (see Halayudha p. 151) A i.65; Sn 625, 631; Dh 401, 407; Vism 306; DhA ii 51; iv.181. Āracayāracayā
Āracayāracayā
[ā + racayā a ger. or abl. form. fr. ā + *rac, in usual Sk. meaning "to produce", but here as a sound -- root for slashing noise, in reduplication for sake of intensification. Altogether problematic] by means of hammering, slashing or beating (like beating a hide) Sn 673 (gloss ārajayārajayā fr. ā + *rañj or *raj). -- SnA 481 explns. the passage as follows: ārajayārajayā; i. e. yathā manussā allacammaŋ bhūmiyaŋ pattharitvā khīlehi ākoṭenti, evaŋ ākoṭetvā pharasūhi phāḷetvā ekam ekaŋ koṭiŋ chinditvā vihananti, chinnachinnakoṭi punappuna samuṭṭhāti; āracayāracayā ti pi pāṭho, āviñjitvā (v. l. BB. āvijjhitvā) āviñjitvā ti attho. -- Cp. ārañjita. Āraññaka
Āraññaka
(adj.) [fr. arañña + ka] belonging to solitude or the forest, sequestered; living in the forest, fond of seclusion, living as hermits (bhikkhū). Freq. spelt araññaka (q. v.). -- Vin i.92 (bhikkhū); ii.32, 197, 217 (bh.), 265 (bh.); M i.214; A iii.100 sq., 219; iv.21; v.66; J iii.174 (v. l. BB. a˚); Miln 342; DhA ii.94 (vihāra). Āraññakatta
Āraññakatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. āraññaka, see also arañña- katta] the habit of sequestration or living in solitude M i.214; iii.40; A i.38. Āraññika
Āraññika
(adj.) = āraññaka Vin iii.15; A i.24; Pug 69; Vism 61, 71 (where defined); Miln 341. Ārañjita
Ārañjita
[in form = Sk. *ārañjita, ā + pp. of rañjayati, Caus. of rañj or raj, but in meaning different. Perhaps to rac (as *racita) to furnish with, prepare, or better still to be regarded as an idiomatic Pāli form of soundroot *rac (see āracayā˚) mixed with rañj, of which we find another example in the double spelling of āracayā (& ārajayā) q. v.] furrowed, cut open, dug up, slashed, torn (perhaps also "beaten") M i.178 (hatthipadaŋ dantehi ārañjitaŋ an elephant -- track bearing the marks of tusks, i. e. occasional slashes or furrows). Ārata
Ārata
[Sk. ārata, pp. of ā + ram, cp. ārati] leaving off, keeping away from, abstaining J iv.372 ( = virata); Nd2 591 (+ virata paṭivirata). Ārati
Ārati
(f.) [Sk. ārati, ā + ram] leaving off, abstinence Vv 639 ( = paṭivirati VvA 263); in exegetical style occurring in typ. combn. with virati paṭivirati veramaṇī, e. g. at Nd2 462; Dhs 299. Āratta
Āratta
(nt.?) [Sk. cp. ārakta, pp. of ā + raj] time, period (orig. affected, tinted with), only in cpd. vassāratta the rainy season, lent J iv.444; Dāvs ii.74. Āraddha
Āraddha
(adj.) [pp. of ā + rabh] begun, started, bent on, undertaking, holding on to, resolved, firm A i.148 (āraddhaŋ me viriyaŋ It 30; PvA 73 (ṭhapetuŋ began to place), 212 (gantuŋ). Cp. ārādhaka 1.

-- citta concentrated of mind, decided, settled D i.176; M i.414; S ii.21; Sn p. 102; SnA 436. Cp. ārādheti 1. -- viriya (adj.) strenuous, energetic, resolute Vin i.182; D iii.252, 268, 282, 285; A i.24; Sn 68, 344; It 71 (opp. hīna -- viriya); Nd2 131; Ps i.171; ThA 95. Cp. viriyārambha; f. abstr. ˚viriyatā M i.19. Ārabbha
Ārabbha
(indecl.) [ger. of ārabhati2 in abs. function; cp. Sk. ārabhya meaning since, from] -- 1. beginning, undertaking etc., in cpd. ˚vatthu occasion for making an effort, concern, duty, obligation D iii.256 = A iv.334 (eight such occasions enumd). -- 2. (prep. with acc.) lit. beginning with, taking (into consideration), referring to, concerning, with reference to, about D i.180; A ii.27 = It 103 (senāsanaŋ ā.); Sn 972 (upekhaŋ; v. l. ārambha; C. uppādetvā); Pv i.41 (pubbe pete ā.); DhA i.3; ii.37; PvA 3 (seṭṭhiputta -- petaŋ ā.), 16, and passim. Ārabhati
Ārabhati1
[not with Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 202 fr. rabh and identical with ārabhati2, but with Kern, Toev. s. v. identical with Sk. ālabhate, ā + labh meaning to seize the sacrificial animal in order to kill it; cp. nirārambha] to kill, destroy M i.371 (pāṇaŋ). Ārabhati & Ārabbhati
Ārabhati2
& Ārabbhati [ā + rabhati, Sk. ārabhati & ārambhati, ā + rabh] to begin, start, undertake, attempt S i.156 (ārabbhatha "bestir yourselves") = Miln 245 = Th 1, 256 (bh.); Pug 64 (bh.); viriyaŋ ārabhati to make an effort, to exert oneself (cp. ārambha) A iv.334. -> aor. ārabhi DhA ii.38 & ārabbhi PvA 35. -- ger. ārabbha, see sep. -- pp. āraddha (q. v.). Ārambha
Ārambha
[Sk. ārambha in meaning "beginning", fr ā + rabh (rambh) cp. ārabhati] -- 1. attempt, effort, inception of energy (cp. Dhs trsl. 15 & K. S. p. 318 giving C. def. as kicca, karaṇīya, attha, i. e. 1. undertaking & duty, 2. object) S i.76 (mah˚); v.66, 104 sq. (˚dhātu); iii.338 (id.), 166 (˚ja; T. arabbhaja, v. l. ārambhaja to be preferred) = Pug 64; Miln 244; Net 41; DhsA 145. -- viriyārambha (cp. āraddha -- viriya) zeal, resolution, energy Vin ii.197; S iv.175; A i.12, 16. -- 2. support, ground, object, thing Nett 70 sq., 107; an˚ unsupported, independent Sn 743 (= nibbāna SnA 507). Cp. also nirambha, upārambha, sārambha. Ārammaṇa
Ārammaṇa
(nt.) [cp. Sk. ālambana, lamb, but in meaning confounded with rambh (see rabhati)] primary meaning "foundation", from this applied in the foll. senses: (1) support, help, footing, expedient, anything to be depended upon as a means of achieving what is desired, i. e. basis of operation, chance Sn 1069 ( = ālambana, nissaya, upanissaya Nd2 132); Pv i.41 (yaŋ kiñcɔ ārammaṇaŋ katvā); ārammaṇaŋ labhati (+ otāraŋ labhati) to get the chance S ii.268; iv.185. -- (2) condition, ground, cause, means, esp. a cause of desire or clinging to life, pl. ˚ā causes of rebirth (interpreted by taṇhā at Nd1 429), lust Sn 474 (= paccayā SnA 410), 945 (= Nd1 429); KhA 23; DhA i.288 (sappāy˚); PvA 279. -- (3) a basis for the working of the mind & intellect; i. e. sense -- object, object of thought or consciousness, the outward constituent in the relation of subject & object, object in general. In this meaning of "relation" it is closely connected with āyatana (see āyatana3), so that it sometimes takes its place, it is also similar to visaya. Cpd. 3 distinguishes a 5 fold object, viz. citta, cetasika, pasāda -- & sukhuma -- rūpa, paññatti, nibbāna. See on term especially Cpd. 3, 14; Dhs trsl. xli. & 209. -- A 1. sq.; iv.385; Sn 506; Ps i.57 sq., 84 (four ā.); ii.97, 118, 143; Dhs 1 (dhamm˚ object of ideation), 180, 584, 1186 et passim; Vbh 12, 79, 92, 319, 332 (four); Nett 191 (six); Vism 87 sq., 375 (˚sankantika), 430 sq. (in var. sets with ref. to var. objects), 533; DhsA 48, 127; VvA 11, 38. -- rūpārammaṇa lit. dependence on form, i. e. object of sight, visible form, especially striking appearance, visibility, sight D iii.228; S iii.53; A i.82; J i.304; ii.439, 442; PvA 265. -> ārammaṇaŋ karoti to make it an object (of intellection or intention), to make it one's concern (cp. Pv i.41, above 1). -- ārammaṇa -- kusala clever in the objects (of meditation) S iii.266; ā˚ -- paccayatā relation of presentation (i. e. of subj. & obj.) Nett 80. -- (4) ( -- ˚) (adj.) being supported by, depending on, centred in, concentrated upon PvA 8 (nissay˚), 98 (ek˚); VvA 119 (buddh˚ pīti rapture centred in the Buddha). Āraha
Āraha
(adj.) metri causa for araha deserving J vi.164. -- 108 -- Ārā
Ārā1
(f.) [Sk. ārâ; *ēl "pointed", as in Ohg. āla = Ger. ahle, Ags. āēl = E awl; Oicel. alr] an awl; see cp. āragga. Perhaps a der. of ārā is āḷakā (q. v.). Ārā
Ārā2
(indecl.) [Vedic ārād, abl. as adv.; orig. a root der. fr. *ara remoteness, as in Sk. araṇa foreign & araṇya solitude q. v. under araṇa1 and arañña] far from, remote (from) (adv. as well as prep. with abl.) Sn 156 (pamādamhā), 736; Dh 253 (āsavakkhayā; DhA iii.377 expls. by dūragata); J ii.449 (jhānabhūmiyā; = dūre ṭhita C.); v.78 (saŋyame; = dūrato C.). See also ārakā.

-- cāra [in this combn. by Kern, Toev. s. v. unecessarily expld. as ārā = ārya; cp. similar phrases under ārakā] a life remote (from evil) A iv.389. -- cārin living far from evil leading a virtuous life D i.4; M i.179; iii.33; A iii. 216, 348; iv.249; v.138, 205; DA i.72 (= abrahmacariyato dūra -- cārin). Ārādhaka
Ārādhaka
(adj. -- n.) [fr. ā + rādh] 1. [perhaps for *āraddhaka because of analogy to āraddha of ā + rabh] successful, accomplishing or accomplished, undertaking, eager Vin i.70 (an˚ one who fails); M i.491; ii.197 = A i.69 = Miln 243; S v.19; A v.329 (in correlation with āraddhaviriya). -- 2. pleasing, propitiating Miln 227; VvA 220 (˚ikā f.). Ārādhana
Ārādhana
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) (either fr. ā + rādh or ā + rabh, cp. ārādhaka] satisfying, accomplishing; satisfaction, accomplishment D ii.287 (opp. virādhanā failure); M i.479; ii.199; A v.211 sq.; J iv.427. Ārādhanīya
Ārādhanīya
(adj.) [grd. fr. ārādheti] to be attained, to be won; successful Vin i.70 (an˚); J ii.233 (dur˚). Ārādhita
Ārādhita
[pp. of ārādheti; Sk. ārādhita, but BSk. ārāgita, e. g. Divy 131, 233] pleased Sdhp 510. Ārādheti
Ārādheti
[Caus. of ā + rādh, in meaning 2 confused with ārabhati. In BSk. strangely distorted to ārāgayati; freq. in Divy as well as Av. Ś] -- 1. to please, win favour, propitiate, convince J i.337 (dārake), 421, 452; ii.72 (manusse); iv.274 (for ābhirādheti T.); Vism 73 (ārādhayanto Nāthassa vana -- vāsena mānasaŋ); DhA ii.71; Dāvs iii.93 (ārādhayi sabbajanaŋ); Miln 352. In older literature only in phrase cittaŋ ārādheti to please one's heart, to gladden, win over, propitiate D i.118 sq., 175 (but cp. āraddha -- citta to ārabhati); M i85, 341; S ii.107; v.109; J ii.372; Miln 25. -- 2. to attain, accomplish, fulfill, succeed S v.23 (maggaŋ), 82, 180, 294; It iii. (v. l. ārām˚); Sn 488 = 509. Cp. ārādhaka 1. -- pp. ārādhita (q. v.). -- See also parābhetvā. Ārāma
Ārāma
[Sk. ārāma, ā + ram] -- 1. pleasure, fondness of ( -- ˚), delight, always as adj. ( -- ˚) delighting in, enjoying, finding pleasure in (usually combd. with rata, e. g. dhammārāma dhammarata finding delight in the Dh.) S i.235; iv.389 sq. (bhav˚, upādān˚); A i.35, 37, 130; ii.28 (bhāvan˚); It 82 (dhamm˚); Sn 327 (id.; expld. by SnA 333 as rati and "dhamme ārāmo assā ti"); Pug 53 (samagg˚); Vbh 351. -- 2. a pleasure -- ground, park, garden (lit. sport, sporting); classified at Vin iii.49 as pupph˚ and phal˚ a park with flowers or with fruit (i. e. orchard), def. at DhA iii.246 as Veḷuvana -- Jīvakɔ ambavanɔ ādayo, i. e. the park of Veḷuvana, or the park belonging to Jīvaka or mango -- groves in general. Therefore: (a) (in general) a park, resort for pastime etc. Vin ii.109; D i. 106; Dh 188; Vv 795 (amb˚ garden of mangoes); VvA 305 (id.); Pv ii.78 (pl. ārāmāni = ārāmɔ ûpavanāni PvA 102). -- (b) (in special) a private park, given to the Buddha or the Sangha for the benefit of the bhikkhus, where they meet & hold discussions about sacred & secular matters; a place of recreation and meditation, a meeting place for religious gatherings. Amongst the many ārāmas given to the bhikkhus the most renowned is that of Anāthapiṇḍika (Jetavana; see J i.92 -- 94) D i.178; Vin iv.69; others more frequently mentioned are e. g. the park of Ambapālī (Vin i.233); of Mallikā (D i.178), etc. -- Vin i.39, 140, 283, 291; ii.170; iii.6, 45, 162; iv.85; A ii.176; Dpvs v.18.

-- pāla keeper of a park or orchard, gardener Vin ii. 109; VvA 288. -- ropa, -- ropana planter, planting of pleasuregroves S i.33; PvA 151. -- vatthu the site of an Ārāma Vin i.140; ii. 170; iii.50, 90. Ārāmakinī
Ārāmakinī
(f.) see ārāmika. Ārāmatā
Ārāmatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. ārāma 1] pleasure, satisfaction A ii.28; iii.116; Vbh 381; Miln 233. Ārāmika
Ārāmika
(adj.) [fr. ārāma] 1. (to ārāma 1) finding delight in, fond of (c. gen.) (or servant in general?) Miln 6 (sanghassa trsl. at the service of the order). -- 2. (to ārāma 2) belonging to an Ārāma, one who shares the congregation, an attendant of the Ārāma Vin i.207 sq.; ii.177 (& ˚pesaka), 211; iii.24; iv.40; v.204; A ii.78 (˚samaṇuddesa); iii.109 (id.), 275 (˚pesaka); J i.38 (˚kicca) Vism 74 (˚samaṇuddesa). -- f. ārāmakiṇī a female attendant or visitor of an Ārāma Vin i.208. Ārāva
Ārāva
[cp. Sk. ārāva, fr. ā + ru] cry, sound, noise Dāvs iv.46. Āraha
Āraha
(nt.) only in pl. gihīnaŋ ārahāni, things proper to laymen, D iii.163. Āriya
Āriya
in anāriya at Sn 815 is metric for anariya (q. v.). Āruṇṇa
Āruṇṇa
(nt.) [orig. pp of ā + rud] weeping, crying, lam- enting Miln 357. Āruppa
Āruppa
(adj.) [fr. arūpa as ā ( = a2) -- *rūpya] formless, incorporeal; nt. formless existence D iii.275; M i.410, cp. 472; iii.163; S i.131 (˚ṭṭhāyin); ii.123; A iv.316; It 61; Sn 754; J i.406; Dhs 1385 (cp. trsl. 57); Vism 338; DA i.224; SnA 488, 508; Sdhp 5, 10; the four: Vism iii, 326 sq. Āruhati
Āruhati
[ā + ruh] to climb, ascend, go up or on to Sn 1014 (aor. āruhaŋ); Sdhp 188; ger. āruhitvā Sn 321 & āruyha J vi.452; Sn 139 (v. l. abhiruyha); It 71. -> Caus. āropeti (q. v.). Ārūgya
Ārūgya
see ārogya. Ārūḷha
Ārūḷha
[pp. of āruhati] -- 1. ascended, mounted, gone up, gone on to iv.137; J vi.452 (T. āruḷha); Vism 135 (nekkhamma -- paṭipadaŋ an˚); VvA 64 (magga˚); PvA 47 (˚nāva), 56 (hatthi˚). -- 2. come about, effected, made, done PvA 2, 144 (cp. BSk. pratijñām ārūḍha having taken a vow Divy 26). -- 3. (of an ornament) put on (to), arrayed J vi.153, 488. Ārūha
Ārūha
see āroha. Ārogatā
Ārogatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. a + roga + tā] freedom from illness, health Miln 341. Ārogya
Ārogya
(nt.) [abstr. fr. aroga, i. e. ā ( = a2) + roga + ya] absence of illness, health D i.11; iii.220 (˚mada), 235 (˚sampadā); M i.451 (T. ārūgya, v. l. ārogya), 508, 509; S ii.109; A i.146 (˚mada); ii.143; iii.72; v.135 sq.; Sn 749, 257 = Dh 204 = J iii.196; Nd1 160; Vism 77 (˚mada pride of health); PvA 129, 198; Sdhp 234. Ārocāpana
Ārocāpana
(nt.) [fr. ārocāpeti, Caus. of āroceti] announ- cement DhA ii.167. Ārocāpeti
Ārocāpeti
(Caus. II. of āroceti] to make some one announce, to let somebody know, usually in phrase kālaŋ ā. Sn p. 111; J i.115, 125; DhA ii.89; PvA 141. Ārocita
Ārocita
[pp. of āroceti] announced, called Vin ii.213 (kāla). Āroceti
Āroceti
[ā + roceti, Caus. of ruc; cp. BSk. ārocayati Sp. Av. Ś i.9 etc.] to relate, to tell, announce, speak to, address D i.109, 224; Pv ii.89 (aor, ārocayi); PvA 4, 13 (aññamaññaŋ anārocetvā not speaking to each other), 81, 274 & freq. passim. -- pp. ārocita; Caus. II. ārocāpeti (q. v.). -- 109 -- Ārodana
Ārodana
(nt.) [fr. ā + rud, cp. āruṇṇa] crying, lamenting A iii.268 sq.; J i.34; DhA i.184; ii.100. Āropana
Āropana
(nt.) [fr. āropeti] "putting on to", impaling Miln 197 (sūl˚), 290 (id.). Āropita
Āropita
[pp. of āropeti] -- 1. produced, come forward, set up PvA 2. -- 2. effected, made S iii.12; PvA 92, 257. -- 3. put on (to a stake), impaled PvA 220 ( = āvuta). Āropeti
Āropeti
[Caus. of āruhati]. -- 1. to make ascend, to lead up to (w. acc.) PvA 76 (pāsādaŋ), 160 (id.) -- 2. to put on, take up to (w. acc. or loc.) Pv ii.92 (yakkhaŋ yānaŋ āropayitvāna); PvA 62 (sarīraŋ citakaŋ ā.), 100 (bhaṇḍaŋ sakaṭesu ā.). -- 3. to put on, commit to the care of, entrust, give over to (w. loc.) J i.227; PvA 154 (rajjaŋ amaccesu ā.). -- 4. to bring about, get ready, make PvA 73, 257 (sangahaŋ ā. make a collection); SnA 51, 142. -> 5. to exhibit, tell, show, give S i.160 (ovādaŋ); Miln 176 (dosaŋ); DhA ii.75 (id.) -- 6. vādaŋ āropeti to refute a person, to get the better of (gen.) Vin i.60; M ii.122; S i.160. -- pp. āropita (q. v.). Āroha
Āroha
( -- ˚) [fr. ā + ruh] -- 1. climbing up, growth, in- crease, extent, in cpd. ˚pariṇāha length & circumference S ii.206; A i.288; ii.250; iv.397; v.19; J iii.192; v. 299; vi.20; Vbh 345 (˚māna + pariṇāha -- māna); SnA 382. -- 2. one who has climbed up, mounted on, a rider, usually in cpd. ass˚ & hatth˚ horse -- rider & elephantrider S iv.310; A ii.166 = iii.162 (T. ārūha); iv.107; DhsA 305. -- 3. outfit, possession (or increase, as 1?) Sn 420 (vaṇṇ˚). Ārohaṇa
Ārohaṇa
(nt.) [fr. ā + ruh] climbing, ascending; ascent J i.70; vi.488; Miln 352; Vism 244; PvA 74. Ālakamanda
Ālaka
-- manda [ālaya˚?] at Vin ii.152 is of uncertain reading and meaning ("open to view"? or "not having pegs" = āḷaka?) vv. ll. āḷakamanta & ālakamandāra; Bdhgh on p. 321 explns. āḷakamandā ti ekangaṇā manussâbhikiṇṇā, i. e. full of a crowd of people, Ch. quotes ālakamandā as "the city of Kuvera" (cp. Sk. alakā). Ālaggeti
Ālaggeti
[ā + Caus. of lag] to (make) hang on to (loc.), to stick on, fasten to Vin ii.110 (pattaŋ veḷagge ālaggetvā). Ālapati
Ālapati
[ā + lapati] to address S i.177, 212; J v.201; SnA 42, 347, 383, 394 ( = āmantayi of Sn 997), 487 (-> avhayati); PvA 11, 13, 33, 69. Ālapana
Ālapana
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. ā + lap] talking to, addressing, conversation Vin iii.73 (with ref. to exclam. "ambho"); J v.253 (˚ā); Vism 23 (˚ā); SnA 396; PvA 131 (re ti ā.). Ālapanatā
Ālapanatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. ālapana] speaking to, conversing with, conversation M i.331) (an˚). Ālamba
Ālamba
[Sk. ālamba, ā + lamb] anything to hang on, support S i.53 (an˚ without support); Sn 173 (id. + appatiṭṭha); J iii.396; Miln 343; Sdhp 245, 463. Ālambati
Ālambati
[ā + lamb] to hang on to or up, to take hold of, to fasten to Vin i.28, J i.57; vi.192; Vv 8448; ThA 34. -- ālambeti id. VvA 32. Ālambana
Ālambana
(adj. -- nt.) [fr. ā + lamb, cp. ālamba] (adj.) hanging down from, hanging up J iii.396; iv.457; SnA 214. -- (nt.) support, balustrade (or screen?) Vin ii.117, 152 (˚bāha) Miln 126. Ālambara & Āḷambara
Ālambara
& Āḷambara (nt.) [Sk. āḍambara] a drum Vin i.15 (l); J ii.344 (ḷ); v.390 (l); Vv 5418 (ḷ). Ālaya
Ālaya
(m. & nt.) [cp. Sk. ālaya, ā + lī, līyate, cp. allīna & allīyati, also nirālaya] -- 1. orig. roosting place, perch, i. e. abode settling place, house J i.10 (geh˚); Miln 213; DhA ii.162 (an˚ = anoka), 170 (= oka). -- 2. "hanging on", attachment, desire, clinging, lust S i.136 = Vin i.4 (˚rāma "devoted to the things to which it clings" K. S.); Vin iii.20, 111; S iv.372 (an˚); v.421 sq. (id.); A ii. 34, 131 (˚rāma); iii.35; It 88; Sn 177 (kām˚ = kāmesu taṇhā -- diṭṭhi -- vasena duvidho ālayo SnA 216), 535 (+ āsavāni), 635; Nett 121, 123 (˚samugghāta); Vism 293 (id.), 497; Miln 203 (Buddh ˚ŋ akāsi?); DhA i.121; iv.186 (= taṇhā); SnA 468 (= anoka of Sn 366). -- 3. pretence, pretext, feint [cp. BSk. ālaya M Vastu iii.314] J i.157 (gilān˚), 438; iii.533 (mat˚); iv.37 (gabbhinī); vi 20, 262 (gilān˚). Ālayati
Ālayati
see allīyati. Ālassa
Ālassa
(nt.) [Der. fr. alasa] sloth, idleness, laziness S i.43; D iii.182; A iv.59; v.136; Sdhp 567. Spelling also ālasya S i.43 (v. l. BB); Vbh 352; Miln 289, and ālasiya J i.427; DA i.310; DhA i.299; VvA 43. Ālāna & Āḷāna
Ālāna
& Āḷāna (nt.) [for ānāhana with substitution of l for n (cp. apilandhana for apinandh˚ and contraction of ˚āhana to ˚āna originally meaning "tying to" then the thing to which anything is tied] a peg, stake, post, esp. one to which an elephant is tied J i.415; iv.308; DhA i.126 (ḷ) where all MSS. have āḷāhana, perhaps correctly. Āli
Āli1
(m. or f.? [Sk. āḷi] a certain kind of fish J v.405. Āli & Āḷi
Āli2
& Āḷi (f.) [Sk. ālī] a dike, embankment Vin ii.256; M iii.96; A ii.166 (˚pabbheda); iii.28; J i.336; iii.533, 334. Ālika
Ālika
in saccālika at S iv.306 is sacc˚alika distortion of truth, falsehood S iv.306. Ālikhati
Ālikhati
[ā + likhati] to draw, delineate, copy in writing or drawing J i.71; Miln 51. Ālinga
Ālinga
[ā + ling] a small drum J v.156 (suvaṇṇ˚ -- tala). Ālingati
Ālingati
[ā + ling] to embrace, enfold D i.230; iii.73; J i.281; iv.21, 316, 438; v.8; Miln 7; DhA i.101: VvA 260. Ālitta
Ālitta
[pp. of ālimpati; Sk. ālipta] besmeared, stained Th 1, 737. Ālinda
Ālinda
(& Āḷinda) [Sk. alinda] a terrace or verandah be- fore the house -- door Vin i.248; ii.153; D i.89; M ii.119; S iv.290 (ḷ); A v.65 (ḷ); J vi.429; DA i.252; DhA i. 26; iv.196; SnA 55 (˚ka -- vāsin; v. l. alindaka); Mhvs 35, 3. As ālindaka at J iii.283. Ālippati
Ālippati
Pass. of ālimpeti (q. v.). Ālimpana
Ālimpana
(nt.) [for āḷimp˚ = Sk. ādīpana, see ālimpeti2] conflagration, burning, flame Miln 43. Ālimpita
Ālimpita
[pp. of ālimpeti2] ignited, lit. A iv.102 (v. l. ālepita). Ālimpeti
Ālimpeti1
[Sk. ālimpayati or ālepayati. ā + lip or limp] to smear, anoint Vin ii.107; S iv.177 (vaṇaŋ). -- Caus. II. ālimpāpeti Vin iv.316. -- Pass. ālimpīyati Miln 74 & ālippati DhA iv.166 (v. l. for lippati). -- pp. ālitta (q. v.). Ālimpeti
Ālimpeti2
[for Sk. ādīpayati, with change of d to l over ḷ and substitution of limp for ḷīp after analogy of roots in ˚mp, like lup > lump, lip > limp] to kindle, ignite, set fire to Vin ii.138 (dāyo ālimpetabbo); iii.85; D ii.163 (citakaŋ); A i.257; DhA i.177 (āvāsaŋ read āvāpaŋ), 225; PvA 62 (kaṭṭhāni). -- pp. ālimpita (q. v.). Ālu
Ālu
(nt.) [Sk. ālu & ˚ka; cognate with Lat. ālum & alium, see Walde Lat. Wtb. under alium] a bulbous plant, Radix Globosa Esculenta or Amorphophallus (Kern), Arum Campanulatum (Hardy) J iv.371 = vi.578; iv.373. -- 110 -- Āluka
Āluka1
= ālu J iv.46 (C. for ālupa). Āluka
Āluka2
(adj.) [etym.?] susceptiblé of, longing for, affected with ( -- ˚) Vin i.288 (sīt˚); DA i.198 (id.); J ii.278 (taṇh˚ greedy). Ālupa
Ālupa
(nt.) [etym.? Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests ālu -- a > ālu- va > ālupa] = āluka the edible root of Amorphophallus Campanulatus J iv.46 (= āluka -- kaṇḍa C.).

the form āluva occurs at Ap 237. Ālumpakāra
Ālumpakāra
[reading not sure, to ālumpati or ālopa] breaking off, falling off (?) or forming into bits(?) DhA ii.55 (˚gūtha). Ālumpati
Ālumpati
[ā + lup or lump, cp. ālopa] to pull out, break off M i.324. Āluḷa
Āluḷa
(adj. [fr. ā + lul] being in motion, confusion or agitation, disturbed, agitated J vi.431. Āluḷati
Āluḷati
[ā + lul; Sk. ālolati, cp. also P. āloḷeti] to move here & there, ppr. med. āluḷamāna agitated, whirling about DhA iv.47 (T. ālūl˚; v. l. āḷul˚) confuse DhsA 375. Caus. āluḷeti to set in motion, agitate, confound J ii.9, 33. -- pp. āluḷita (q. v.). Āluḷita
Āluḷita
[pp. of āluḷeti] agitated, confused J ii.101; Miln 397 (+ khalita). Ālepa
Ālepa
[cp. Sk. ālepa, of ā + lip] ointment, salve, liniment Vin i.274; Miln 74; DhsA 249. Ālepana
Ālepana
(nt.) [fr. ā + lip] anointing, application of salve D i.7 (mukkh˚). Āloka
Āloka
[ā + lok, Sk. āloka] seeing, sight (obj. & subj.), i. e. -- 1. sight, view, look S iv.128 = Sn 763; A iii. 236 (āloke nikkhitta laid before one's eye). anāloka without sight, blind Miln 296 (andha +). -- 2. light A i. 164 (tamo vigato ā. uppanno) = It 100 (vihato); A ii. 139 (four lights, i.e. canda˚, suriya˚, agg˚, paññ˚, of the moon, sun, fire & wisdom); J ii 34; Dhs 617 (opp. andhakāra); VvA 51 (dīp˚). -- 3. (clear) sight, power of observation, intuition, in combn. with vijjā knowledge D ii.33 = S ii.7 = 105, cp. Ps ii.150 sq. (obhāsaṭṭhena, S A. on ii.7). -- 4. splendour VvA 53; DvA 71.

-- kara making light, bringing light, n. light -- bringer It 108. -- karaṇa making light, illumining It 108. -- da giving light or insight Th 1, 3. -- dassana seeing light, i. e. perceiving Th 1, 422. -- pharaṇa diffusing light or diffusion of light Vbh 334; Nett 89. -- bahula good in sight, fig. full of foresight A iii.432. -- bhūta light J vi 459. -- saññā consciousness or faculty of sight or perception D iii.223; A ii.45; iii.93 -- saññin conscious of sight, i. e. susceptible to sight or insight D iii.49; M iii.3; A ii 211; iii.92, 323; iv.437; v.207; Pug 69. -- sandhi "break for the light", a slit to look through, an opening, a crack or casement Vin i.48 = ii.209 = 218; ii.172; iii.65; iv.47; J iv.310; PvA 24. Ālokana
Ālokana
(nt.) [fr. ā + lok] looking at, regarding DA i.194. Ālokita
Ālokita
(nt.) [pp. of āloketi] looking before, looking at, looking forward (opp. vilokitaŋ looking behind or backward), always in combn. ālokita -- vilokita in ster. phrase at D i.70 = e. g. A ii.104, 106, 210; Pug 44, 45, 50; Vism 19; VvA 6; DA i.193 (ālokitaŋ purato pekkhanaŋ vil˚ anudisā p.). Āloketar
Āloketar
[n. ag. to āloketi] one who looks forward or be- fore, a beholder DA i.194 (opp. viloketar). Āloketi
Āloketi
[Sk. ālokayati, ā + lok] to look before, look at, regard, see DA i.193, 194. -- pp. ālokita (q. v.). Ālopa
Ālopa
[ā + lup, cp. ālumpati; BSk. ālopa, e. g. Av. Ś i. 173, 341; Divy 290, 481] a piece (cut off), a bit (of food) morsel, esp. bits of food gathered by bhikkhus D i.5 = A v.206; iii.176; A ii 209; iii.304; iv.318; Th 1, 1055; It 18; Pv ii.17; Pug 58; Miln 231, 406; Vism 106; DA i.80 (= vilopa -- karaṇaŋ). Ālopati
Ālopati
[ālopeti? ā + lopeti, Caus. of ālumpati] to break in, plunder, violate Th 1, 743. Ālopika
Ālopika
(adj.) [ālopa + ika] getting or having, or con- sisting of pieces (of food) A i.295; ii.206; Pug 55. Āloḷa
Āloḷa
[fr. ā + luḷ, cp. āluḷati & āloḷeti] confusion, uproar, agitation DhA i.38. Āloḷī
Āloḷī
(f.) [a + luḷ] that which is stirred up, mud, in cpd. sītāloḷī mud or loam from the furrow adhering to the plough Vin i.206. Āloḷeti
Āloḷeti
[Caus. of āluḷati, cp. āluḷeti] to confuse, mix, shake together, jumble S i.175; J ii.272, 363; iv.333; vi.331; Vism 105. Āḷaka
Āḷaka
(or ˚ā f.) [Dimin of aḷa (?) or of ārā i (?). See Mor- ris J.P.T.S. 1886, 158] -- 1. a thorn, sting, dart, spike, used either as arrow -- straightener Miln 418; DhA i.288; or (perhaps also for piece of bone, fishbone) in making up a comb VvA 349 (˚sandhāpana = comb; how Hardy got the meaning of "alum" in Ind. to VvA is incomprehensible). -- 2 a peg, spike, stake or post (to tie an elephant to, cp. ālāna). Cp. ii.13. Āḷamba = āḷambara
Āḷamba
= āḷambara Vv 189 = 5024. See ālambara. Āḷavaka
Āḷavaka
(& ˚ika) (adj. -- n.) [ = āṭavika] dwelling in forests, a forest -- dweller S ii.235. As Np. at Vism 208. Āḷādvāraka
Āḷādvāraka
(adj.) at J v.81, 82 is corrupt & should with v. l. perhaps better be read advāraka without doors. Cp. Kern, Toev. 29 (ālāraka?). J v.81 has āḷāraka only. Āḷāra
Āḷāra
(adj.) [ = aḷāra or uḷāra or = Sk. arāla?] thick, mas- sed, dense or crooked, arched (?), only in cpd. ˚pamha with thick eyelashes Vv 6411 (= gopakhuma VvA 279); Pv iii.35 (= vellita -- dīgha -- nīla -- pamukha). Cp. alāra. Āḷārika & ˚iya
Āḷārika
& ˚iya (adj. -- n.) [Sk. ārālika, of uncertain etym.] a cook D i.51 ( = bhattakāraka DA i.157); J v.296 (= bhattakāraka C.); 307; vi.276 (˚iya, C. ˚ika = sūpika); Miln 331. Āḷāhana
Āḷāhana
(nt.) [fr. ā + ḍah or dah, see dahati] a place of cremation, cemetery D i.55; J i.287 (here meaning the funereal fire) 402; iii.505; Pv ii.122; Vism 76; Miln 350; DA i.166; DhA i.26; iii.276; PvA 92, 161, 163 ( = sarīrassa daḍḍha -- ṭṭhāna). -- Note. For āḷāhana in meaning "peg, stake" see ālāna. Āḷika
Āḷika
at A iii.352, 384 (an˚) is preferably to be read āḷhika, see āḷhaka. Āḷha
Āḷha
(nt.) = āḷhaka; only at A iii.52 (udak˚), where perhaps better with v. l. to be read as āḷhaka. The id. p. at A ii.55 has ālhaka only. Āḷhaka
Āḷhaka
(m. & nt.) [Sk. āḍhaka, fr. *āḍha probably meaning "grain"] a certain measure of capacity, originally for grain; in older texts usually applied to a liquid measure (udaka˚). Its size is given by Bdhgh. at SnA 476 as follows: "cattāro patthā āḷhakāni doṇaŋ etc." -- udakāḷhaka S v.400; A ii.55 = iii.337; VvA 155. -- In other connections at J i.419 (aḍḍh˚); iii.541 (mitaŋ āḷhakena = dhañña -- māpaka -- kammaŋ kataŋ C.); Miln 229 (patt˚); DhA iii.367 (aḍḍh˚).

-- thālikā a bowl of the capacity of an āḷhaka Vin i. 240; A iii.369; DhA iii.370 (v. l. bhatta -- thālikā). -- 111 -- Āḷhiya
Āḷhiya
(& āḷhika) (adj.) [fr. *āḷha, Sk. āḍhya, orig. pos- sessing grain, rich in grain, i. e. wealth; semantically cp. dhañña2] rich, happy, fortunate; only in neg. anāḷhiya poor, unlucky, miserable M i.450; ii.178 (+ daḷidda); A iii.352 sq. (so read with v. l. BB. ˚āḷhika for T. ˚āḷika; combd. with daḷidda; v. l. SS. anaddhika); J v. 96, 97 (+ daḷidda; C. na āḷhika). Āvajati
Āvajati
[ā + vajati, vraj] -- 1. to go into, to or towards J iii.434; iv.49, 107. -- 2. to return, come back J v.24, 479. Āvajjati
Āvajjati
[not with Senart M Vastu 377 = ava + dhyā, but = Sk. āvṛṇakti ā + vṛj, with pres. act. āvajjeti = Sk. āvarjayati] -- 1. to reflect upon, notice, take in, advert to, catch (a sound), listen J i.81; ii.423; v.3; Miln 106. -- 2. to remove, upset (a vessel), pour out Vin i.286 (kumbhiŋ); J ii.102 (gloss āsiñcati). -- Caus. āvajjeti (q. v.). Āvajjana
Āvajjana
(nt.) [fr. āvajjati, cp. BSk. āvarjana in diff. meaning] turning to, paying attention, apprehending; adverting the mind. -- See discussion of term at Cpd. 85, 227 (the C. derive āvajjana fr. āvaṭṭeti to turn towards, this confusion being due to close resemblance of jj and ṭṭ in writing); also Kvu trsl. 221 n. 4 (on Kvu 380 which has āvaṭṭanā), 282 n. 2 (on Kvu 491 āvaṭṭanā). -- Ps ii.5, 120; J ii.243; Vbh 320; Miln 102 sq.; Vism 432; DA i.271. Āvajjita
Āvajjita
[pp. of āvajjeti cp. BSk. āvarjita, e. g. Divy 171; Itin 221] bent, turned to, inclined; noticed, observed Miln 297; Vism 432 (citta); Sdhp 433. Āvajjitatta
Āvajjitatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. āvajjita] inclination of mind, observation, paying attention Ps ii.27 sq. Āvajjeti
Āvajjeti
[Caus. of āvajjati] 1. to turn over, incline, bend M iii.96; J iv.56 (so read for āvijjhanto); DA i.10 (kāyaŋ). -> 2. to incline (the mind); observe, reflect, muse, think, heed, listen for. According to Cpd. 227 often paraphrased in C. by pariṇāmeti. -- J i.69, 74, 81, 89, 108, 200; Miln 297; DhA ii.96; PvA 181 ( = manasikaroti). -- 3. to cause to yield A iii.27 (perhaps better āvaṭṭ˚). -> pp. āvajjita (q. v.). Āvaṭa
Āvaṭa
[Sk. āvṛta, pp. of ā + vṛ] covered, veiled, shut off against, prohibited D i.97, 246; M i.381 (˚dvāra); J vi.267. -- anāvaṭa uncovered, unveiled, exposed, open D i.137 (˚dvāra); iii.191 (˚dvāratā); S i.55; J v.213; Pv iii.64; Miln 283. Cp. āvuta2 & vy˚. Āvaṭṭa
Āvaṭṭa
(adj. -- n.) [Sk. āvarta, ā + vṛt] -- 1. turning round, winding, twisting M i.382; S i.32 (dvi -- r -- ā˚ turning twice); J ii.217; SnA 439 (˚gangā). -- 2. turned, brought round, changed, enticed M i.381; DhA ii.153. -- 3. an eddy, whirlpool, vortex M i.461 = A ii.123 (˚bhaya); Miln 122, 196, 377. -- 4. circumference J v.337; Dāvs v.24; DhA iii 184. Āvaṭṭati
Āvaṭṭati
[ = āvattati] in phrase ā. vivaṭṭati to turn forward & backward Vism 504. Āvaṭṭana
Āvaṭṭana
(nt.) [fr. ā + vṛt, cp. āvaṭṭa 2 and āvaṭṭanin] turning, twisting; enticement, snare, temptation J iii.494; DhA ii.153. Āvaṭṭanā
Āvaṭṭanā
(f.) [most likely for āvajjana. q. v. & see also Kvu trsl. 221, 282] turning to (of the mind), adverting, apprehending Kvu 380, 491. Āvaṭṭanin
Āvaṭṭanin
(adj.) [fr. āvaṭṭana] turning (away or towards), changing, tempting, enticing M i.375, 381; A ii.190; J ii.330 = iv.471; DA i.250. -- Cp. etymologically the same, but semantically diff. āvattanin. Āvaṭṭin
Āvaṭṭin
(adj. -- n.) [fr. āvaṭṭa instead of āvaṭṭana] only at M i.91 in neg. an˚ not enticed by (loc.), i. e. kāmesu. -> Cp. āvattin. Āvaṭṭeti
Āvaṭṭeti
[ā + vatteti, Caus. of vṛt, cp. BSk. āvartayati to employ spells Divy 438] to turn round, entice, change, convert, bring or win over M i.375, 381, 383, 505; A iii.27; DA i.272. Āvatta
Āvatta1
(adj.) [pp. of āvattati] gone away to, fallen back to, in phrase hīnāyɔāvatta (see same phrase under āvattati) M i.460; S ii.50; J i.206. Āvatta
Āvatta2
(nt.) [Sk. āvarta, of ā + vṛt, cp. āvaṭṭa[ winding, turn, bent J i.70 (in a river); Nett 81 (v. l. āvaṭṭa?), 105 (˚hārasampāta). Āvattaka
Āvattaka
(adj.) [āvatta + ka] turning, in dakkhiṇ˚ turning to the right, dextrorsal D ii.18; cp. dakkhiṇâvatta at DA i.259. Āvattati
Āvattati
[ā + vattati, of vṛt] to turn round, come to, go back, go away to, turn to; only in phrase hīnāya āvattati to turn to "the low", i. e. to give up orders & return to the world Vin i.17; M i.460; S ii.231; iv.191; Sn p. 92 ( = osakkati SnA 423); Ud 21; Pug 66; Miln 246. -> pp. āvatta (q. v.). Cp. āvaṭṭati. Āvattana
Āvattana
(adj. -- nt.) [Sk. āvartana] turning; turn, return Nett 113; Miln 251. Āvattanin
Āvattanin
(adj.) [fr. āvattana] turning round or back Th 1, 16 (cp. āvaṭṭanin). Āvattin
Āvattin
(adj. -- n.) [fr. āvatta, cp. āvaṭṭin in diff. meaning] returning, coming back, one who returns, in spec. meaning of one who comes back in transmigration, syn. with āgāmin (an˚), only in neg. anāvattin not returning, a non -- returner, with ˚dhamma not liable to return at D i. 156; iii.132; S v.346, 357, 376, 406; M i.91; DA i.313. Āvatthika
Āvatthika
(adj.) [ā + vatthika] befitting, original, inherent (one of the 4 kinds of nomenclature) Vism 210 = KhA 107. Āvapati
Āvapati
[a + vap] to give away, to offer, to deposit as a pledge Miln 279. Āvapana
Āvapana
(nt.) [fr. āvapati] sowing, dispersing, offering,de- positing, scattering J i.321. Āvara
Āvara
(adj.) [fr. ā + vṛ] obstructing, keeping off from J v.325 (so to be read in ariya -- magg -- âvara). Āvaraṇa
Āvaraṇa
(adj. -- n.) [fr. ā + vṛ, cp. āvarati; BSk. āvaraṇa in pañcɔ āvaraṇāni Divy 378] shutting off, barring out, withstanding; nt. hindrance, obstruction, bar Vin i.84 (˚ŋ karoti to prohibit, hinder); ii.262 (id.); D i.246 (syn. of pañca nīvaraṇāni); S v.93 sq.; A iii.63; J i.78 (an˚); v.412 (nadiŋ ˚ena bandhāpeti to obstruct or dam off the river); Sn 66 (pahāya pañcɔ āvaraṇāni cetaso, cp. Nd2 379), 1005 (an˚ -- dassāviṇ); Ps i.131 sq.; ii.158 (an˚); Pug 13; Dhs 1059, 1136; Vbh 341, 342; Miln 21 (dur˚ hard to withstand or oppose). -- dant˚ "screen of the teeth", lip J iv.188; vi.590. Āvaraṇatā
Āvaraṇatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. āvaraṇa] keeping away from, withholding from A iii 436. Āvaraṇīya
Āvaraṇīya
(adj.) [grd. fr. āvarati], M i.273; an˚ not to be obstructed, impossible to obstruct M iii.3; Miln 157. Āvarati
Āvarati
[ā + vṛ, cp. āvuṇāti] to shut out from (abl.), hold back from, refuse, withhold, obstruct M i.380 (dvāraŋ); Sn 922 (pot. ˚aye, cp. Nd1 368); DA i.235 (dvāraŋ); Dpvs i.38. -- pp. āvaṭa and āvuta2 (q. v.). Āvalī
Āvalī
(f.) [cp. Sk. āvalī & see valī] a row, range J v.69; DA i.140. -- 112 -- Āvasati
Āvasati
[ā + vas] to live at or in, to inhabit, reside, stay M ii.72; S i.42; Sn 43, 805, 1134; Nd1 123, 127; Nd2 133; J vi.317. -- pp. āvuttha (q. v.). Āvasatha
Āvasatha
[Sk. āvasatha, fr. ā + vas] dwelling -- place, ha- bitation; abode, house, dwelling Vin i 226 (˚âgāra restinghouse); iv.304 ( = kavāṭabaddha); S i.94, 229; iv.329; Sn 287, 672; J iv.396; vi.425; Pug 51; Miln 279. Āvaha
Āvaha
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. ā + vah] bringing, going, causing Pv ii.924 (sukh˚); Vv 2211 (id); Dāvs ii.37; PvA 86 (upakār˚), 116 (anatth˚); Sdhp 15, 98, 206. Āvahati
Āvahati
[ā + vahati] to bring, cause, entail, give S i.42 = Sn 181, 182 (āvahāti sukhaŋ metri causā); J iii.169; v. 80; Sn 823; Nd1 302; PvA 6. -- Pass. āvuyhati VvA 237 (ppr. ˚amāna). Āvahana
Āvahana
(adj) ( -- ˚) [ = āvaha] bringing, causing Th 1, 519; Sn 256. Āvahanaka
Āvahanaka
(adj. -- nt) [ = āvahana] one who brings VvA 114 (sukhassa). Āva
Āva
(misery, misfortune) see avā. Āvāṭa
Āvāṭa
[etym.?] a hole dug in the ground, a pit, a well D i.142 (yaññ˚); J i.99, 264; ii 406; iii.286; iv 46 (caturassa); vi.10; DhA i.223; VvA 63; PvA 225. Āvāpa
Āvāpa
[if correct, fr. ā + vā2 to blow with caus. p. -- Cp. J R A S. 1898, 750 sp.] a potter's furnace DhA i.177 (read for āvāsa?), 178. Āvāra
Āvāra
[Sk. āvāra, fr. ā + vṛ] warding off, protection, guard J vi 432 (yanta -- yutta˚, does it mean "cover, shield"?). -> For cpd. khandhɔāvāra see khandha. Āvāreti
Āvāreti
[Sk. āvārayati, ā + Caus. of vṛ] to ward off, hold back, bar, S iv 298; Nett 99. Āvāsa
Āvāsa
[Sk. āvāsa; ā + vas] sojourn, stay, dwelling, living; dwelling -- place, residence Vin i.92; D iii.234; S iv.91; A ii 68, 168; iii.46, 262; Sn 406; Dh 73 (cp. DhA ii.77); Nd1 128; J vi.105; Dhs 1122; Pug, 15, 19, 57; KhA 40; DhA i.177 (āvāsaŋ ālimpeti: read āvāpaŋ); PvA 13, 14, 36; VvA 113; Sdhp 247. -- anāvāsa (n. & adj.) uninhabited, without a home; an uninhabited place A iv.345; J ii.77; Pv ii.333; PvA 80 ( = anāgāra); VvA 46.

-- kappa the practice of (holding Uposatha in different) residence (within the same boundary) Vin ii.294, 300, 306; Dpvs iv.47, cp. v.18. -- palibodha the obstruction of having a home (in set of 10 Palibodhas) KhA 39; cp. Vism 90 sq. -- sappāyatā suitability of residence Vism 127. Āvāsika
Āvāsika
(adj.) [āvāsa + ika] living in, residing at home, being in (constant or fixed) residence, usually appld. to bhikkhus (opp. āgantuka) Vin i.128 sq.; ii.15, 170; iii. 65; v.203 sq.; M i.473; A i.236; iii.261 sq., 366; J iv.310; Pv iv.84 ( = nibaddha -- vasanaka PvA 267). Āvāha
Āvāha
[ā + vah] taking in marriage, lit. carrying away to oneself, marriage D i.99; J vi.363; SnA 273, 448; DhA iv.7. Often in cpd. ā˚ vivāha(ka) lit. leading to (one's home) & leading away (from the bride's home), wedding feast D iii.183 (˚ka); J i.452; VvA 109, 157. (v. l. ˚ka). Āvāhana
Āvāhana
(nt.) [ā + vshana, of vah] -- 1. = āvāha, i. e. marriage, taking a wife D i.11 (= āvāha -- karaṇa DA i. 96). -- 2. "getting up, bringing together", i. e. a mass, a group or formation, in senā˚ a contingent of an army J iv.91. Āvi
Āvi
(adv.) [Sk. āviḥ, to Gr. a)i/w to hear, Lat. audio (fr. *auizdiō) to hear] clear, manifest, evident; openly, before one's eyes, in full view. Only in phrase āvi vā raho openly or secret A v.350, 353; Pv ii.716 = DhA iv.21 (āvī v. l.), expld. at PvA 103 by pakāsanaŋ paresaŋ pākaṭavasana. Otherwise in foll. cpds. (with kar & bhū): ˚kamma making clear, evidence, explanation Vin ii.88; iii.24; Pug 19, 23; ˚karoti to make clear, show, explain D iii.121; Sn 84, 85, 349; J v.457; Pug 57; VvA 79, 150; ˚bhavati (˚bhoti) to become visible or evident, to be explained, to get clear J i.136; Vism 287 (fnt. āvibhavissati); DhA ii.51, 82; bhāva appearance, manifestation D i.78; A iii.17; J ii.50, 111; Vism 390 sq. (revelation, opp. tirobhāva). Cp. pātur. Āvijjhati (āviñjati, āviñchati)
Āvijjhati
(āviñjati, āviñchati) [ā + vijjhati of vyadh to pierce; thus recognised by Morris J P T S. 1884, 72, against Trenckner, Notes 59 (to piñj) & Hardy Nett. Ind. = vicchāy] -- 1. to encircle, encompass, comprise, go round, usually in ger. āvijjhitvā (w. acc.) used as prep. round about, near J i.153 (khettaŋ), 170 (pokkharaṇiŋ); DA i.245 (nagaraŋ bahi avijjhitvā round the outer circle of the town). Ordinarily = go round (acc.) at J iv.59 (chārika -- puñjaŋ). -- 2. [as in lit. Sk.] to swing round, brandish, twirl, whirl round Vin iii.127 (daṇḍaŋ āviñji); M iii.141 (matthena āviñjati to churn); J i.313; v.291 (cakkaŋ, of a potter's wheel); SnA 481 (T. āviñj˚, v. l. āvijjh˚; see āracaya˚); DhA ii.277 (āviñchamāna T.; v. l. āsiñciy˚, āvajiy˚, āgañch˚). -- 3. to resort to, go to, approach, incline to S iv.199 (T. āviñch˚; v. l. avicch˚ & āviñj˚); Nett 13. -- 4. to arrange, set in order J ii.406. -> 5. to pull (?) A iv.86 (kaṇṇasotani āvijjeyyāsi, v. l. āvijj˚, āviñj˚, āvicc˚, āviñch˚; cp. Trenckner, Notes 59 āviñjati "to pull"). -- pp. āviddha (q. v.). Āvijjhana
Āvijjhana
(so for āviñchana & āviñjana) (adj. -- n.) [fr. āvijj- hati, lit. piercing through, i. e. revolving axis] -- 1. ( = āvijjhati 2) swinging round, hanging loose, spinning in āvijjhana -- rajju a loose, rope, esp. in mythology the swinging or whirling rope by which Sakka holds the world's wheel or axis, in the latter sense at DhA ii.143 (T. āviñch˚ (v. l. āvijj˚) = iii.97, 98 (where āviñjanaṭṭhāna for ˚rajju). Otherwise a rope used in connection with the opening & shutting of a door (pulling rope?) Vin ii.120, 148; J v.298, 299 (T. āviñj˚, v. l. āvicch˚ & āvij˚). -- 2. (cp. āvijjhati 3) going to, approach, contact with DhsA 312 (˚rasa, T. āviñj˚, v. l. āviñch˚; or is it "encompassing"? = āvijjhati 1 ?); Vism 444 (āviñjanarasa). -- 3. (cp. āvijjhati 5) pulling, drawing along Vin iii.121 (= ākaḍḍhanā nāma). Āvijjhanaka
Āvijjhanaka
(nt.) [fr. āvijjhati in meaning 2] whirling round, that which spins round, the whirling -- round wheel (or pole) of the world (cp. the potter's wheel), the worldaxis DhA ii.146 (T. āviñch˚). Āviddha
Āviddha
[pp. of āvijjhati 2, cp. BSk. āviddha in meaning curved, crooked Av. S i.87 Lal. V. 207] whirling or spinning round, revolving; swung round, set into whirling motion J iv.6 (cakkaŋ = kumbhakāra -- cakkam iva bhamati C.); v.291. What does an -- āviddha at PvA 135 mean? Āvila
Āvila
(adj.) [is it a haplological contraction from ā + vi + lul to roll about?] stirred up, agitated, disturbed, stained, soiled, dirty A i.9; iii.233; J v.16, 90 (ābila); Nd1 488 (+ luḷita), 489; ThA 251; DA i.226. More frequent as anāvila undisturbed, clean, pure, serene D i.76; S iii. 83; iv,118; A i.9; iii.236; Sn 160; Dh 82, 413; J iii. 157; Miln 35; VvA 29, 30; ThA 251. Āvilati
Āvilati
[fr. āvila or is it a direct contraction of ā + vi + lulati?] to whirl round, to be agitated, to be in motion Miln 259 (+ luḷati). Āvilatta
Āvilatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. āvila] confusion, disturbance, agita- tion Sn 967; Nd1 488. Āvisati
Āvisati
[ā + vīś] to approach, to enter Vin iv.334; Sn 936 (aor. āvisi); J iv.410, 496; Vism 42. -- 113 -- Āvuṇāti
Āvuṇāti
[in form = *avṛṇoti, ā + vṛ, cp. āvarati, but in meaning = *āvayati, ā + vā to weave, thus a confusion of the two roots, the latter being merged into the former] to string upon, to fix on to (c. loc.), to impale J i.430; iii.35; v.145; vi.105. -- Caus. II. āvuṇāpeti J iii.218 (sūle). -- pp. āvuta1 (q. v.), whereas the other pp. āvaṭa is the true derivative of ā + vṛ. Āvuta
Āvuta
[pp. of āvuṇāti in meaning of Sk. āvayati, the cor- responding Sk. form being ā + uta = ota] -- 1. strung upon, tied on, fixed on to D i.76 (suttaŋ); ii.13 (id.); A i.286 (tantāvutaŋ web); J iii.52 (valliyā); vi.346 (suttakena); DA i.94 (˚sutta). -- 2. impaled, stuck on (sūle on the pale) J i.430; iii.35; v.497; vi.105; PvA 217, 220. Āvuta = Āvaṭa
Āvuta2
= Āvaṭa (see āvuṇāti & āvuta1) covered, obstructed, hindered It 8 (mohena); also in phrase āvuta nivuta ophuta etc. Nd1 24 (ṭ) = Nd2 365 = DA i.59. Āvuttha
Āvuttha
[pp. of āvasati] inhabited D ii.50 (an˚); S i.33. Āvudha
Āvudha
(nt.) [Vedic āyudha, fr. ā + yudh to fight] an instrument to fight with, a weapon, stick etc. D iii 219; M ii.100; A iv.107, 110; Sn 1008; J i.150; ii.110; iii. 467; iv.160, 283, 437; Nd2 on Sn 72; Miln 8, 339; DhA ii.2; iv.207; SnA 225, 466 (˚jīvika = issattha). See also āyudha. Āvuyhamāna
Āvuyhamāna
ppr. of āvuyhati (Pass. of āvahati), being conveyed or brought VvA 237 (reading uncertain). Āvuso
Āvuso
(voc. pl. m.) [a contracted form of āyusmanto pl. of āyusman, of which the regular Pāli form is āyasmant, with v for y as frequently in Pāli, e. g. āvudha for āyudha] friend, a form of polite address "friend, brother, Sir", usually in conversation between bhikkhus. The grammatical construction is with the pl. of the verb, like bhavaŋ and bhavanto. -- Vin ii.302; D i.151, 157; ii.8; SnA 227; DhA i.9; ii.93; PvA 12, 13, 38, 208. Āveṭhana
Āveṭhana
(nt.) [ā + veṭhana, veṣṭ] rolling up, winding up or round, fig. explanation Miln 28 (+ nibbeṭhana, lit. rolling up and rolling down, ravelling & unravelling), 231 (˚viniveṭhana). Āveṭhita
Āveṭhita
[pp. of āveṭheti, ā + veṣṭ, cp. āvedhikā] turned round, slung round or over J iv.383 sq. (v. l. āvedhita & āveḷita, C. expls. by parivattita). Āveṇi
Āveṇi
(adj) ( -- ˚) [according to Trenckner, Notes 75 fr. ā + vinā "Sine quā non", but very doubtful] special, peculiar, separate Vin ii.204 (˚uposatha etc.); J i.490 (˚sangha -- kammāni). Āveṇika
Āveṇika
(adj.) [fr. āveṇi; cp. BSk. āveṇika Av. Ś i.14, 108; Divy 2, 182, 268, 302] special, extraordinary, exceptional S iv.239; A v.74 sq.; Vism 268; VvA 112 (˚bhāva peculiarity, specialty), KhA 23, 35. Āveṇiya
Āveṇiya
(adj.) = āveṇika Vin i.71; J iv.358; vi.128. Āvedha
Āvedha
[cp. Sk. āviddha, ā + pp. of vyadh] piercing, hole, wound J ii.276 (v. l. aveddha; C. = viddha -- ṭṭhāne vaṇa). Āvedhika
Āvedhika
(adj. f. scil. pannā) [ā + vedhaka of āvedha, vyadh, but confused with āveṭh˚ of ā + veṣṭ, cp. āveṭhana & nibbedhaka] piercing, penetrating; or ravelling, turning, rolling up or round (cp. āvijjhati which is derived from ā + vyadh, but takes its meaning from āveṭheti), discrimination, thinking over J ii.9 (+ nibbedhikā, v. l. for both ṭh). Āveḷa
Āveḷa
(adj. & ˚ā f.) [not with Müller P.Gr. 10, 30, 37 = Sk. āpīḍa, but fr. ā + veṣṭh to wind or turn round, which in P. is represented by āveṭheti as well as āvijjhati; ḷ then standing for either ḍh (ṭh) or dh (āvedha, q. v.). There may have been an analogy influence through vell to move to and fro, cp. āveḷita. Müller refers to āveḷā rightly the late dial. (Prk.) āmela] -- 1. turning round, swinging round; diffusion, radiation; protuberance, with reference to the rays of the Buddha at J i.12, 95, 501. -> 2. (f.) a garland or other ornament slung round & worn over the head Vv 362 (kañcan˚; = āveḷa -- pilandhana VuA 167). See āveḷin. Āvelita
Āvelita
(ḷ?) [pp. of ā + vell, cp. āveḷa & BSk. āviddha curved, crooked Av. Ś i.87, Lal. V. 207] turned round, wound, curved J vi.354 (˚singika with curved horns, v. l. āvellita). Āveḷin
Āveḷin
(adj.) [fr. āveḷā] wearing garlands or other head- ornaments, usually in f. ˚inī J v.409 ( = kaṇṇālankārehi yuttā C.); Vv 302 (voc. āvelinī, but at id. p. 482 āveline), 323; VvA 125 (on Vv 302 expls. as ratana -- maya -- pupphɔ-> āveḷavatī). Āvesana
Āvesana
(nt.) [fr. āvisati] entrance; workshop; living -- place, house Vin ii 117 (˚vitthaka, meaning?); M ii 53; Pv ii.915. Āsa
Āsa1
contr. -- form of aŋsa in cpd. koṭṭhāsa part., portion etc.: see aŋsa1. Can we compare BSk. āsapātrī (see next). Āsa
Āsa2
[Sk. āśa] food, only in cpd. pātarāsa morning food, breakfast Sn 387 (pāto asitabbo ti pātar -- āso piṇḍapātassɔ etaŋ nāmaŋ SnA 374); DhA iv.211; see further ref. under pātar; and pacchā -- āsa aftermath S i.74. Can we compare BSk. āsa -- pātrī (vessel) Divy 246? Der. fr. āsa is āsaka with abstr. ending āsakattaŋ "cating", food, in nānā˚ various food or na + anāsak˚) Sn 249. See also nirāsa, which may be taken either as nir + *āśa or nir + *āsā. Āsa
Āsa3
the adj. form of āsā (f.), wish, hope. See under āsā. Āsa
Āsa4
archaic 3rd sg. perf. of atthi to be, only in cpd. itihāsa = iti ha āsa "thus it has been". Āsaŋsa
Āsaŋsa
(adj.) [of *āśaŋsā, see next] hoping, expecting something, longing for A i.108 = Pug 27 (expld. by Pug A 208 as "so hi arahattaŋ āsaŋsati patthetī ti āsaŋso"); SnA 321, 336. Cp. nir˚. Āsaŋsati
Āsaŋsati
[for the usual āsiŋsati, ā + śaŋs] to expect, hope for, wish Pug A 208 ( = pattheti). See also āsamāna. Āsaŋsā
Āsaŋsā
(f.) [from ā + śaŋs] wish, desire, expectation, hope J iv.92. -- Cp. nirāsaŋsa. Āsạŋsuka
Āsạŋsuka
(adj.) [fr. āsaŋsā] full of expectation, longing, hankering after, Th 2, 273 ( = āsiŋsanaka ThA 217; trsl. "cadging"). Āsaka
Āsaka
(adj.) [of āsa2] belonging to food, having food, only in neg. an˚ fasting S iv.118; Dh 141 (f. ā fasting = bhatta -- paṭikkhepa DhA iii.77); J v.17; vi.63. Āsakatta
Āsakatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. āsaka] having food, feeding, in an˚ fasting Sn 249 ( = abhojana SnA 292). Āsankati
Āsankati
[ā + śank] to be doubtful or afraid, to suspect, distrust, J i.151 (pret. āsankittha), 163 (aor. āsanki); ii. 203; SnA 298. -- pp. āsankita (q v.), Āsankā
Āsankā
(f.) [Sk. āśankā fr. ā + śank] fear, apprehension, doubt, suspicion J i.338; ii.383; iii.533; vi.350, 370; DhA iii.485; VvA 110. -- Cp. sāsanka & nirāsanka. Āsankita
Āsankita
(adj.) [pp. of āsankati] suspected, in fear, afraid, apprehensive, doubtful (obj. & subj.) Miln 173, 372 (˚parisankita full of apprehension and suspicion); DhA i.223; VvA 110. -- Cp. ussankita & parisankita. Āsankin
Āsankin
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. āsankā] fearing, anxious, apprehensive Sn 255 (bhedā˚); J iii.192 (id.). -- 114 -- Āsanga
Āsanga
[ā + sanga fr. sañj to hang on, cp. Sk. āsanga & āsakti] -- 1. adhering, clinging to, attachment, pursuit J iv.11. -- 2. that which hangs on (the body), clothing, garment, dress; adj. dressed or clothed in ( -- ˚); usually in cpd. uttarāsanga a loose (hanging) outer robe e. g. Vin i.289; S iv.290; PvA 73; VvÁ 33 (suddh˚), 51 (id.). Āsangin
Āsangin
(adj.) [fr. āsanga] hanging on, attached to J iv.11. Āsajja
Āsajja
(indecl.) [ger. of āsādeti, Caus. of āsīdati, ā + sad; Sk. āsādya] -- 1. sitting on, going to, approaching; allocated, belonging to; sometimes merely as prep. acc. "near" (cp. āsanna) Sn 418 (āsajja naŋ upāvisi he came up near to him), 448 (kāko va selaŋ ā. nibbijjāpema Gotamaŋ); J ii.95; vi.194; Miln 271. -- 2. put on to (lit. sitting or sticking on), hitting, striking S i.127 (khaṇuŋ va urasā ā. nibbijjapetha Gotamā "ye've thrust as 't were your breast against a stake. Disgusted, come ye hence from Gotama" trsl. p. 159; C. expls. by paharitvā, which comes near the usual paraphrase ghaṭṭetvā) -> 3. knocking against or "giving one a setting -- to", insulting, offending, assailing D i.107 (ā. ā. avocāsi = ghaṭṭetvā DA i.276); A iii.373 (tādisaŋ bhikkhuŋ ā.); J v.267 (isiŋ ā. Gotamaŋ; C. p. 272 āsādetvā); Pv iv.710 (isiŋ ā. = āsādetvã PvA 266). -- 4. "sitting on", i. e. attending constantly to, persevering, energetically, with energy or emphasis, willingly, spontaneously M i.250; D iii.258 = A iv.236 (dānaŋ deti); Vv 106 (dānaŋ adāsiŋ; cp. VvA 55 samāgantvā). See āsada, āsādeti, āsīdeti, āsajjana. Āsajjana
Āsajjana
(nt.) [fr. āsajja in meaning of no. 3] "knocking against", setting on, insult, offence Vin ii.203 (˚ŋ Tathāgataŋ an insult to the T.; quoted as such at VvA 55, where two meanings of ā. are given, corresponding to āsajja 1 & 3, viz. samāgama & ghaṭṭana, the latter in this quot.) = It 86 (so to be read with v. l.; T. has āpajja naŋ); S i.114 (apuññaŋ pasavi Māro āsajjanaŋ Tathāgataŋ; trsl. "in seeking the T. to assail"); J v.208. Āsati
Āsati
[from as] to sit DA i.208; h. sg. āsi S i.130. - pp. āsīna (q. v.). Āsatta
Āsatta1
[pp. of ā + sañj] (a) lit. hanging on, in phrase kaṇṭhe āsatto kuṇapo a corpse hanging round one's neck M i.120; J i.5. -- (b) fig. attached to, clinging to J i. 377 (+ satta lagga); ThA 259 (an˚). Āsatta
Āsatta2
[pp. of ā + śap] accursed, cursed J v.446 (an˚). Āsatti
Āsatti
(f.) [ā + sañj] attachment, hanging on (w. loc.), dependence, clinging Vin ii.156 = A i.138; S i.212; Sn 777 (bhavesu); Nd1 51, 221; Nett 12, 128. -- Cp. nirāsattin. Āsada
Āsada
[ā + sad; cp. āsajja & āsādeti] -- 1. approach, dealing with, business with (acc.), concern, affair, means of acting or getting Vin ii.195 = J v.336 (mā kuñjara nāgam āsado); M i.326 (metaŋ āsado = mā etaŋ āsado do not meddle with this, lit., be not this any affair); J i 414 (cakkaŋ āsado you have to do with the wheel; interpreted as adj. in meaning patto = finding, getting); vi.528 (interpreted as ankusa a hook, i. e. means of getting something). -- 2. (as adj.) in phrase durāsada hard to sit on, i. e. hard to get at, unapproachable, difficult to attack or manage or conquer Sn p. 107 (cp. SnA 451); J vi.272; Vv 5016 (= anupagamanīyato kenaci pi anāsādanīyato ca durāsado VvA 213); Miln 21; Dpvs v.21; vi.38; Sdhp 384. Āsana
Āsana
(nt.) [from āsati] sitting, sitting down; a seat, throne M i.469; Vin i.272 ( = pallankassa okāsa); S i.46 (ek˚ sitting alone, a solitary seat); A iii.389 (an˚ without a seat); Sn 338, 718, 810, 981; Nd1 131; J iv.435 (āsān' ûdaka -- dāyin giving seat & drink); v.403 (id.); vi.413; DhA ii.31 (dhamm˚ the preacher's seat or throne); SnA 401; PvA 16, 23, 141.

-- âbhihara gift or distinction of the seat J i.81. -- ûpagata endowed with a seat, sitting down Sn 708 ( = nisinna SnA 495). -- paññāpaka one who appoints seats Vin ii.305. -- paṭikkhitta one who rejects all seats, or objects to sitting down D i.167; A i.296; ii.206; Pug 55. -- sālā a hall with seating accommodation Vism 69; DhA ii. 65; iv.46. Āsana
Āsana2
(?) eating Vism 116 (visam˚, cp. visam -- āsita Miln 302). See, however, māsana. Āsanaka
Āsanaka
(nt.) [āsana + ka] a small seat Vv 15. Āsanika
Āsanika
(adj.) [fr. āsana] having a seat; in ek˚ sitting by oneself Vism 69. Āsandi
Āsandi
(f.) [fr. ā + sad] an extra long chair, a deck -- chair Vin i.192; ii.142, 163, 169, 170; D i.7 ( = pamāṇâtikkant' āsanaŋ DA i.86), 55 = M i.515 = S iii.307 (used as a bier) A i.181; J i.108. See note at Dial. i.11. Āsandikā
Āsandikā
(f.) fr. āsandi] a small chair or tabouret Vin ii. 149; KhA 44. Āsanna
Āsanna
(adj.) [pp. of ā + sad, see āsīdati] near (cp. āsajja1), opp. dūra J ii.154; DhA ii 91; PvA 42, 243. Āsappanā
Āsappanā
(fr.) [fr. + sṛp] lit. "creeping on to", doubt, mistrust, always combd. with parisappanā Nd3 1; Dhs 1004 (trsl. "evasion", cp. Dhs trsl. p 116), 1118, 1235; DA i.69. Āsabha
Āsabha
[the guṇa -- and compn. form of usabha, corresponding to Sk. ārṣabha > ṛṣabha, see usabha] (in compn.) a bull, peculiar to a bull, bull -- like, fig. a man of strong & eminent qualities, a hero or great man, a leader, thus in tār˚ Sn 687; nar˚ Sn 684, 696; āsabha -- camma bull's hide J vi. 453 (v. l. usabha˚).

-- ṭṭhāna (as āsabhaṇṭhāna) "bull's place", first place, distinguished position, leadership M i.69; S ii.27; A ii.8 (C. seṭṭha -- ṭṭhāna uttama -- ṭṭhāna); iii.9; v.33 sq.; DA i. 31; KhA 104. Āsabhin
Āsabhin
(adj.) [fr. āsabha] bull -- like, becoming to a bull, lordly, majestic, imposing, bold; only in phrase ˚ŋ vācaŋ bhāsati "speak the lordly word" D ii.15, 82; M iii.123j J i.53; DA i.91; cp. Dāvs i.28 (nicchārayi vācaŋ āsabhiŋ). Āsamāna
Āsamāna
(adj.) [ppr. of āsaŋsati or āsiŋsati, for the usual earlier āsasāna] wishing, desiring, hoping, expecting Vv 846 (kiŋ ā = kiŋ paccāsiŋ santo VvA 336); Pv iv.124 (= āsiŋsamāna patthayamana PvA 226). Āsaya
Āsaya
[ā + śī, cp. in similar meaning & derivation anusaya. The semantically related Sk. āśraya from ā + śri is in P. represented by assaya. Cp. also BSk. āśayataḥ intentionally, in earnest Divy 281; Av. Ś ii.161] -- 1. abode, haunt, receptacle; dependence on, refuge, support, condition S i.38; Vin iii.151; J ii.99; Miln 257; VvA 60; PvA 210; jal˚ river VvA 47; Pgdp 80; adj. depending on, living in ( -- ˚) Miln 317; Nd1 362 (bil˚, dak˚ etc.). See also āmāsaya, pakkāsaya. -- 2. (fig.) inclination, intention, will, hope; often combd. & compared with anusaya (inclination, hankering, disposition), e. g. at Ps i. 133; ii.158; Vbh 340; Vism 140 (˚posana); PvA 197. -> SnA 182 (˚vipatti), 314 (˚suddhi), KhA 103 (˚sampatti). Cp. nirāsaya. -- 3. outflow, excretion Pv iii.53 (gabbh˚ = gabbha -- mala PvA 198); Vism 344. Āsayati
Āsayati
[ā + śī; lit. "lie on", cp. Ger. anliegen & Sk. āśaya = Ger. Angelegenheit] to wish, desire, hope, intend J iv.291 (grd. āsāyana, gloss esamāna). See āsaya. Āsava
Āsava
[fr. ā + sru, would corresp. to a Sk. *āsrava, cp. Sk. āsrāva. The BSk. āśrava is a (wrong) sankritisation of the Pāli āsava, cp. Divy 391 & kṣīnāśrava] that which flows (out or on to) outflow & influx. 1. spirit, the intoxicating extract or secretion of a tree or flower, O. C. in Vin iv.110 (four kinds); B. on D iii.182 (five kinds) DhsA 48; KhA 26; J iv.222; vi.9. -- 2. discharge from a sore, A i.124, 127 = Pug 30. -- 3. in psychology, t.t. for certain specified ideas which intoxicate the mind (bemuddle it, befoozle it, so that it cannot rise to higher things). Freedom from the "Āsavas" constitutes Arahantship, & the fight for the extinction of these āsavas forms one of the main duties of man. On the difficulty of translating the term see Cpd. 227. See also discussion of term āsava (= āsavantī ti āsavā) at DhsA 48 (cp. Expositor pp. 63 sq). See also Cpd. 227 sq., & especially Dhs trsl. 291 sq. -- The 4 āsavas are kām˚, bhav˚, diṭṭh˚, avijj˚, i. e. sensuality, rebirth (lust of life), speculation and ignorance. -- They are mentioned as such at D ii.81, 84, 91, 94, 98, 123, 126; A i.165 sq., 196; ii.211; iii.93, 414; iv.79; Ps i.94, 117; Dhs 1099, 1448; Nd2 134; Nett 31, 114 sq. -- The set of 3, which is probably older (kāma˚, bhava˚, avijjā˚) occurs at M i. 55; A i.165; iii.414; S iv.256; v.56, 189; It 49; Vbh 364. For other connections see Vin i.14 (anupādāya āsavehi cittani vimucciŋsu), 17, 20, 182; ii.202; iii.5 (˚samudaya, ˚nirodha etc.); D i.83, 167; iii.78, 108, 130, 220, 223, 230, 240, 283; M i.7 sq., 23, 35, 76, 219, 279, 445 (˚ṭhāniya); ii.22; iii.72, 277; S ii.187 sq. (˚ehi cittaŋ vimucci); iii.45 (id.); iv.107 (id.), 20; v.8, 28, 410; A i.85 sq. (vaḍḍhanti), 98, 165 (˚samudaya, ˚nirodha etc.), 187; ii.154 (˚ehi cittaŋ vimuttaŋ), 196; iii.21, 93 (˚samudaya, ˚nirodha etc.), 245, 387 sq., 410, 414; iv.13, 146 (˚pariyādāna end of the ā.), 161 (˚vighāta -- pariḷāha); v.70, 237; Th 2, 4, 99, 101 (pahāsi āsave sabbe); Sn 162, 374, 535 (pl. āsavāni), 546, 749, 915, 1100; Dh 93, 253, 292; Nd1 331 (pubb˚); Vbh 42, 64, 426; Pug 11, 13, 27, 30 sq.; Miln 419; DhsA 48; ThA 94, 173; KhA 26; DA i 224; Sdhp 1; Pgdp 65 (piyāsava -- surā, meaning?).

Referring specially to the extinction (khaya) of the āsavas & to Arahantship following as a result are the foll. passages: (1) āsavānaŋ khaya D i.156; S ii.29, 214; iii 57, 96 sq, 152 sq; iv.105, 175; v.92, 203, 220, 271, 284; A i.107 sq., 123 sq., 232 sq., 273, 291; ii.6, 36, 44 sq., 149 sq., 214; iii 69, 114, 131, 202, 306, 319 sq.; iv.83 sq., 119, 140 sq., 314 sq.; v.10 sq., 36, 69, 94 sq, 105, 132, 174 sq., 343 sq.; It 49; Pug 27, 62; Vbh 334, 344; Vism 9; DA i.224; cp. ˚parikkhaya A v 343 sq. See also arahatta formula C. -- (2) khīṇāsava (adj.) one whose Āsavas are destroyed (see khīṇa) S i.13, 48, 53, 146; ii 83, 239; iii.199, 128, 178; iv.217; A i 77, 109, 241, 266; iv.120, 224, 370 sq.; v 40, 253 sq.; Ps ii 173; cp. parikkhīṇā āsavā A iv.418, 434, 451 sq.; āsavakhīṇa Sn 370. -- (3) anāsava (adj.) one who is free from the āsavas, an Arahant Vin ii.148 = 164; D iii.112; S i 130; ii.214, 222; iii.83; iv.128; A i.81, 107 sq., 123 sq., 273, 291; ii.6, 36, 87, 146; iii.19, 29, 114, 166; iv.98, 140 sq., 314 sq., 400; A v.10 sq., 36, 242, 340; Sn 1105, 1133; Dh 94, 126, 386; Th i.100; It 75; Nd2 44; Pv ii.615; Pug 27; Vbh 426; Dhs 1101, 1451; VvA 9. Cp. nirāsava ThA 148. -- Opp. sāsava S iii 47; v.232; A i.81 v.242; Dhs 990; Nett 10; Vism 13, 438. -- 115 -- Āsavati
Āsavati
[ā + sru, cp. Sk. āsravati; its doublet is assavati] to flow towards, come to, occur, happen Nett 116. Āsasāna
Āsasāna
[either grd. for *āsaŋsāna or contracted form of ppr. med. of āsaŋsati ( = āsiŋsati) for *asaŋsamāna] hoping, wishing, desiring, longing for Sn 369 (an˚; SnA 365 however reads āsayāna), 1090; Th 1, 528; J iv.18 (= āsiŋsanto C.), 381; v.391 (= āsiŋsanto C.). See anāsasāna, āsaŋsati, āsamāna & āsayāna. Āsā
Āsā
(f.) [cp. Sk. āśaḥ f.] expectation, hope, wish, longing, desire; adj. āsa ( -- ˚) longing for, anticipating, desirous of Vin i.255 (˚avacchedika hope -- destroying), 259; D ii. 206; iii.88; M iii.138 (āsaŋ karoti); A i.86 (dve āsā), 107 (vigat -- āso one whose longings have gone); Sn 474, 634, 794, 864; J i.267, 285; v.401; vi.452 (˚chinna = chinnāsa C.); Nd1 99, 261, 213 sq; Vv 3713 (perhaps better to be read with v. l. SS ahaŋ, cp. VvA 172); Pug 27 (vigat˚ = arahattāsāya vigatattā vigatāso Pug A 208); Dhs 1059 (+ āsiŋsanā etc.), 1136; PvA 22 (chinn˚ disappointed), 29 (˚âbhibhūta), 105; Dāvs v.13; Sdhp 78, 111, 498, 609. Āsāṭikā
Āsāṭikā
(f.) [cp. Mārāṭhi āsāḍī] a fly's egg, a nit M i.220 sq.; A v.347 sq., 351, 359; Nett 59; J iii.176. Āsādeti
Āsādeti
[Caus. of āsīdati, ā + sad; cp. āsajja & āsanna] - 1. to lay hand on, to touch, strike; fig. to offend, assail, insult M i.371; J i.481; v.197; aor. āsādesi Th 1, 280 (mā ā. Tathāgate); ger. āsādetvā J v.272; Miln 100, 205 (˚ayitvā); PvA 266 (isiŋ), āsādiya J v.154 (āsādiya metri causa; isiŋ, cp. āsajja3), & āsajja (q. v.); infin. āsāduŋ J v.154 & āsādituŋ ibid.; grd. āsādanīya Miln 205; VvA 213 (an˚). -- 2. to come near to (c. acc.), approach, get J iii.206 (khuracakkaŋ). Āsāḷhā & Āsāḷhī
Āsāḷhā
& Āsāḷhī (f.) [Sk. āṣāḍha] N. of a month (June- July) and of a Nakkhatta; only in compn. as Āsaḷha˚ & Āsaḷhi˚, viz. ˚nakkhatta J i.50; SnA 208; ˚puṇṇamā J i.63; DhA i.87; SnA 199; VvA 66; PvA 137; ˚māsa SnA 378 ( = vassûpanāyikāya purimabhāge A.); VvA 307 (= gimhānaŋ pacchimo māso). Āsāvati
Āsāvati
(f.) N. of a creeper (growing at the celestial grove Cittalatā) J iii.250, 251. Āsāsati
Āsāsati
[cp. Sk. āśāsati & āśāsti, ā + śās] to pray for, expect, hope; confounded with śaŋs in āsaŋsati & āsiŋsati (q. v.) & their derivations. -- pp. āsiṭṭha (q. v.). Āsi & Āsiŋ
Āsi
& Āsiŋ 3rd & 1st sg. aor. of atthi (q. v.). Āsiŋsaka
Āsiŋsaka
(adj.) [fr. ā + siŋsati, cp. āsaŋsā] wishing, aspiring after, praying for Miln 342. Āsiŋsati
Āsiŋsati
[Sk. āśaŋsati, ā + śaŋs, cp. also śās & āsāsati, further abhisaŋsati, abhisiŋsati & āsaŋsati] to hope for, wish, pray for (lit. praise for the sake of gain), desire, (w. acc.) S i.34, 62; Sn 779, 1044, 1046 (see Nd2 135); J i.267; iii.251; iv.18; v.435; vi.43; Nd1 60; Mhvs 30, 100; VvA 337; PvA 226 (ppr. āsiŋsamāna for āsamāna, q. v.). Āsiŋsanaka
Āsiŋsanaka
(adj.) [fr. āsiŋsanā] hoping for something, lit. praising somebody for the sake of gain, cadging ThA 217 (for āsaŋsuka Th 2, 273). Āsiŋsanā
Āsiŋsanā
(f.) [abstr. fr. ā + śaŋs, cp. āsiŋsati] desire, wish, craving J v.28; Dhs 1059, 1136 (+ āsiŋsitatta). As āsīsanā at Nett 53. Āsiŋsaniya
Āsiŋsaniya
(adj.) [grd. of āsiŋsati] to be wished for, desir- able Miln 2 (˚ratana). Āsikkhita
Āsikkhita
[pp. of ā + śikṣ, Sk. āśikṣita] sohooled, in- structed PvA 67, 68. Āsiñcati
Āsiñcati
[ā + sic, cp. abhisiñcati & avasiñcati] to sprinkle, besprinkle Vin i.44; ii.208; J iv.376; Vv 796 ( = siñcati VvA 307); PvA 41 (udakena), 104, 213 (ger. ˚itvā). -> pp. āsitta (q. v.). Cp. vy˚. Āsiṭṭha
Āsiṭṭha
[pp. of āsāsati, Sk. āśiṣṭa] wished or longed for PvA 104. *Āsita
*Āsita1
[ = asita1?] "having eaten", but probably māsita (pp. of mṛś to touch, cp. Sk. mṛśita, which is ordinarily in massita), since it only occurs in combns. where m precedes, viz. J ii.446 (dumapakkani -- m -- asita, where C. reading is māsita & expln. khāditvā asita (v. l. āsita) dhāta); Miln 302 (visam -- āsita affected with poison = visamāsita). Cp. also the form māsi(n) touching, eating at J vi.354 (tiṇa˚, expld. by C. as khādaka). -- āsita at J v.70 is very doubtful, v. l. āsina & asita; C. expls. by dhāta suhita p. 73. -- 116 -- *Āsita
*Āsita2
[registered as such with meaning "performed" by Hardy in Index] at VvA 276 is better read with v. l. SS bhāsita ( -- vādana etc.). Āsitta
Āsitta
[pp. of āsiñcati, Sk. āsikta] sprinkled, poured out, anointed J v.87; Pug 31; Miln 286; DhsA 307; DhA i.10; VvA 69. Āsittaka
Āsittaka
(adj.) [āsitta + ka] mixed, mingled, adulterated Vin ii.123 (˚ûpadhāna "decorated divan"?); ThA 61, 168 (an˚ for asecanaka, q. v.). Āsītika
Āsītika
(adj.) [fr. asīta] 80 years old M ii.124; J iii.395; SnA 172. Āsītika
Āsītika
(m.) [etym.? Cp. BSk. āsītakī Lal. V. 319] a certain plant M i 80 = 245 (˚pabba). Āsīdati
Āsīdati
[cp. Sk. āsīdati, ā + sad] -- 1. to come together, lit. to sit by D i.248 (v. l. BB ādisitvā for āsīditvā, to be preferred?). -- 2. to come or go near, to approach (w. acc.), to get (to) A iii.69 (āsīvisaŋ), 373 (na sādhurūpaŋ āsīde, should perhaps be read without the na); J iv.56. -- 3. to knock against, insult, offend attack J v. 267 (Pot. āsīde = pharusa -- vacanehe kāyakammena vā gbaṭṭento upagaccheyya C.). -- pp. āsanna (q. v.). See also āsajja, āsajjana, āsada & Caus. āsādeti. Āsīna
Āsīna
(adj.) [pp. of ās, see āsati] sitting S i.195 = Nd2 136; Sn 1105, 1136; Dh 227, 386; J i.390; iii.95; v. 340; vi.297; Dāvs ii.17. Āsīyati
Āsīyati
[etym. doubtful; Trenckner Miln p. 422 = ā + śyā to freeze or dry up, but taken by him in meaning to thaw, to warm oneself; Müller, P. Gr. 40 same with meaning "cool oneself"; Morris' J.P. T. S. 1884, 72 as ā + śrā or śrī to become ripe, come to perfection, evidently at fault because of śrā etc. not found in Sk. More likely as a Pass. formation to be referred to ā + śī as in āsaya, i. e. to abide etc.] to have one's home, one's abode or support in (loc.), to live in, thrive by means of, to depend on Miln 75 (kaddame jāyati udake āsīyati i. e. the lotus is born in the mud and is supported or thrives by means of the water). Āsīvisa
Āsīvisa
Derivation uncertain. The BSk. āsīviṣa (e. g. Jtm 3161) is a Sanskritisation of the Pali. To suppose this to come from ahi + visa (snake's poison) would give a wrong meaning, and leave unexplained the change from ahi to āsi] a snake Vin iv.108; S iv.172; A ii.110; iii. 69; J i.245; ii.274; iv.30, 496; v.82, 267; Pug 48; Vism 470 (in comp.); DhA i.139; ii.8, 38; SnA 334, 458, 465; VvA 308. Āsīsanā
Āsīsanā
see āsiŋsanā. Āsu
Āsu
expletive particle = assu3 J v.241 (v. l. assu; nipāta- mattaŋ C. p.243). Āsuŋ
Āsuŋ
3rd pl. aor. of atthi. Āsumbhati
Āsumbhati
(& Āsumhati) [ā + śumbh to glide] to bring to fall, throw down or round, sling round Vin iv.263, 265; Vv 5011 (˚itvāna); J iii.435 (aor. āsumhi, gloss khipi). Āsevati
Āsevati
[ā + sev] to frequent, visit; to practise, pursue, indulge, enjoy A i.10; Sn 73 (cp. Nd2 94); Ps ii.93 (maggaŋ). -- pp. āsevita. Āsevana
Āsevana
(nt.) & āsevanā (f.) [fr. āsevati] -- 1. practice, pursuit, indulgence in Vin ii.117; PvA 45. -- 2. succession, repetition Dhs 1367; Kvu 510 (cp. trsl. 294, 362); Vism 538. Āsevita
Āsevita
[pp. of āsevati] frequented, indulged, practised, en- joyed J i.21 (v.141; āsevita -- nisevita); ii.60; Sdhp 93, 237. Āha
Āha
[Vedic āha, orig. perfect of ah to speak, meaning "he began to speak", thus in meaning of pres. "he says"] a perfect in meaning of pret. & pres. "he says or he said", he spoke, also spoke to somebody (w. acc.), as at J i.197 (cullalohitaŋ āha). Usually in 3rd person, very rarely used of 2nd person, as at Sn 839, 840 ( = kathesi bhaṇasi Nd 188, 191). -- 3rd sg. āha Vin ii.191; Sn 790 (= bhaṇati Nd1 87), 888; J i.280; iii.53 and freq. passim; 3rd pl. āhu Sn 87, 181; Dh 345; J i.59; SnA 377, and āhaŋsu J i.222; iii.278 and freq. Āhacca
Āhacca1
ger. of āhanati. Āhacca
Āhacca2
(adj.) [grd. of āharati, corresponding to a Sk. *āhṛtya] 1. (cp. āharati1) to be removed, removable, in ˚pādaka -- pīṭha & ˚mañca a collapsible bed or chair, i e. whose legs or feet can be put on & taken away at pleasure (by drawing out a pin) Vin ii.149 (cp. Vin Texts iii.164 n. 5); iv.40, 46 (def. as "ange vijjhitvā ṭhito hoti" it stands by means of a perforated limb), 168, 169. -- 2. (cp. āharati2) reciting, repeating, or to be quoted, recitation (of the Scriptures); by authority or by tradition M iii.139; DhsA 9, & in cpds. ˚pada a text quoted from Scripture), tradition Miln 148 (˚ena by reference to the text of the Scriptures); ˚vacana a saying of the Scriptures, a traditional or proverbial saying Nett 21 (in def. of suttaŋ). Āhaṭa
Āhaṭa
[pp. of āharati] brought, carried, obtained Vin i.121; iii.53; D ii.180 (spelt āhata); J iii.512 (gloss ānīta); Dāvs i.58. Āhata
Āhata
[pp. of āhanati] struck, beaten, stamped; afflicted, affected with ( -- ˚) Vin iv.236 = D iii.238 (kupito anattamano āhata -- citto); Vin i.75, 76; S i.170 (tilak˚, so read for tilakā -- hata, affected with freckles, C. kāḷa -- setādi vaṇṇehi tilakehi āhatagatta, K. S. p. 318); J iii 456; Sdhp 187, 401. Āhataka
Āhataka
[fr. āhata] "one who is beaten", a slave, a worker (of low grade) Vin iv.224 (in def. of kammakāra, as bhaṭaka + ā). Āhanati
Āhanati
[ā + han] to beat, strike, press against, touch ppr. āhananto Miln 21 (dhamma -- bheriŋ); Dāvs iv.50. -> ger. āhacca touching M i.493; J i.330; vi 2, 200; Sn 716 = uppīḷetva SnA 498; Vism 420. -- pp. āhata (q. v.).

1st sg. fut. āhañhi Vin i.8; D ii.72, where probably to be read as āhañh' ( = āhañhaŋ). See Geiger, P.Gr. § 153, 2. Āhanana
Āhanana
(nt.) [fr. ā + han] beating, striking, coming into touch, "impinging" Vism 142 (+ pariyāhanana, in def. of vitakka) = DhsA 114 (cp. Expos. 151); Vism 515 (id.). Āharaṇa
Āharaṇa
(adj. -- n.) [fr. āharati] to be taken; taking away; only in phrase acorāharaṇo nidhi a treasure not to be taken by thieves Miln 320; Kh viii.9; KhA 224; Sdhp 589. Āharaṇaka
Āharaṇaka
[āharaṇa + ka] one who has to take or bring, a messenger J ii.199; iii.328. Āharati
Āharati
[ā + hṛ] -- 1. to take, take up, take hold of, take out, take away M i.429 (sallaŋ); S i 121; iii.123; J i.40 (ger. āharitvā "with"), 293 (te hattaŋ); Nd2 540c (puttamaŋsaŋ, read āhāreyya?); Pv ii.310; DA i.186, 188 -> 2. to bring, bring down, fetch D ii.245; J iv 159 (nāvaŋ; v. l. āhāhitvā); v.466; VvA 63 (bhattaŋ); PvA 75. -> 3. to get, acquire, bring upon oneself J v.433 (padosaŋ); DhA ii.89. -- 4. to bring on to, put into (w. loc.); fig. & intrs. to hold on to, put oneself to, touch, resort to M i.395 (kaṭhalaŋ mukhe ā.; also inf. āhattuŋ); Th 1, 1156 (pāpacitte ā.; Mrs. Rh. D. Brethren ver. 1156, not as "accost" p. 419, n.). -- 5. to assault, strike, offend (for pāhari?) Th 1, 1173. -- 6. (fig.) to take up, fall or go back on (w. acc.), recite, quote, repeat (usually with desanaŋ & dasseti of an instructive story or sermon or homily) J iii.383 (desanaŋ), 401; v.462 (vatthuŋ āharitvā dassesi told a story for example); SnA 376; PvA 38, 39 (atītaŋ), 42, 66, 99 (dhamma -- desanaŋ). See also payirudāharati. -> pp. āhaṭa (q. v.). -- Caus. II. āhārapeti to cause to be brought or fetched; to wish to take, to call or ask for J iii.88, 342; v.466; PvA 215. -- 117 -- Āharima
Āharima
(adj.) [fr. āharati] "fetching", fascinating, captiv- ating, charming Vin iv.299; Th 2, 299; ThA 227; VvA 14, 15, 77. Āhariya
Āhariya
[grd. of āharati] one who is to bring something J iii.328. Āhavana & Āhavanīya
Āhavana
& Āhavanīya see under āhuneyya. Āhāra
Āhāra
[fr. ā + hṛ, lit. taking up or on to oneself] feeding, support, food, nutriment (lit & fig.). The term is used comprehensively and the usual enumn. comprises four kinds of nutriment, viz. (1) kabaḷinkāra āhāro (bodily nutriment, either oḷāriko gross, solid, or sukhumo fine), (2) phassāhāro n. of contact, (3) manosañcetanā˚ n. of volition ( = cetanā S. A. on ii.11 f.), (4) viññāṇ˚ of consciousness. Thus at M i.261; D iii.228, 276; Dhs 71 -- 73; Vism 341. Another definition of Dhammapāla's refers it to the fourfold tasting as asita (eaten), pīta (drunk), khāyita (chewed), sāyita (tasted) food PvA 25. A synonym with mūla, hetu, etc. for cause, Yamaka, i.3; Yam. A (J.P.T.S., 1910 -- 12) 54. See on term also Dhs trsl. 30. -- Vin i.84; D i.166; S i.172; ii.11, 13, 98 sq. (the 4 kinds, in detail); iii.54 (sa˚); v.64, 391; A iii.51 (sukhass˚), 79, 142 sq., 192 sq.; iv.49, 108; v.52 (the four), 108, 113 (avijjāya etc.), 116 (bhavataṇhāya), 269 sq. (nerayikānaŋ etc.); Sn 78, 165, 707, 747; Nd1 25; Ps i.22 (the four) 122 (id.), 55, 76 sq; Kvu 508; Pug 21, 55; Vbh 2, 13, 72, 89, 320, 383, 401 sq. (the four); Dhs 58, 121, 358, 646; Nett 31, 114, 124; DhsA 153, 401; DhA i.183 (˚ŋ pacchindati to bring up food, to vomit); ii.87; VvA 118; PvA 14, 35, 112, 148 (utu˚ physical nutriment); Sdhp 100, 395, 406; A v.136 gives ten āhāra opposed to ten paripanthā. -- an˚ without food, unfed M i.487 (aggi); S iii.126; v.105; Sn 985.

-- ûpahāra consumption of food, feeding, eating Vin iii. 136. -- ṭhitika subsisting or living on food D iii.211, 273; A v.50, 55; Ps i.5, 122. -- pariggaha taking up or acquirement of food Miln 244 or is it "restraint or abstinence in food"? Same combn. at Miln 313. -- maya "food -- like", feeding stuff, food J iii.523. -- lolatā greed after food SnA 35. -- samudaya origin of nutriment S iii.59. Āhāratthaŋ
Āhāratthaŋ
[āhāra + tta] the state of being food. In the idiom āhārattaṇ pharati; Vin i.199, of medicine, ʻ to penetrate into food -- ness ʼ, to come under the category of food; Miln 152, of poison, to turn into food. [According to Oldenberg (Vin i.381) his MSS read about equally ˚attaŋ and ˚atthaŋ. Trenckner prints ˚atthaŋ, and records no variant (see p. 425)]. Āhāreti
Āhāreti
[Denom. fr. āhāra] to take food, eat, feed on S ii.13; iii.240; iv.104; A i.114, 295; ii.40, 145, 206; iv. 167; Nd2 540c (āhāraŋ & puttamaŋsaŋ cp. S ii.98). Āhika
Āhika
( -- ˚) (adj.) [der. fr. aha2] only in pañcāhika every five days (cp. pañcāhaŋ & sattāhaŋ) M iii.157. Āhiṇḍati
Āhiṇḍati
[ā + hiṇḍ, cp. BSk. āhiṇḍate Divy 165 etc.] to wander about, to roam, to be on an errand, to be engaged in (w. acc.) Vin i.203 (senāsana -- cārikaŋ), 217; ii. 132 (na sakkoti vinā daṇḍena āhiṇḍituŋ); iv.62; J i.48, 108, 239; Nd2 540b; Pv iii.229 ( = vicarati PvA 185); Vism 38, 284 (aṭaviŋ); VvA 238 (tattha tattha); PvA 143. Āhita
Āhita
[pp. of ā + dhā] put up, heaped; provided with fuel (of a fire), blazing Sn 18 (gini = ābhato jalito vā SnA 28). See sam˚. Āhu
Āhu
3rd pl. of āha (q. v.). Āhuti
Āhuti
(f.) [Vedic āhuti, ā + hu] oblation, sacrifice; vener- ation, adoration M iii 167; S i.141; Th 1, 566 (˚īnaŋ paṭiggaho recipient of sacrificial gifts); J i.15; v.70 (id.); Vv 6433 (paramâhutiŋ gato deserving the highest adoration); Sn 249, 458; Kvu 530; SnA 175; VvA 285. Āhuna
Āhuna
= āhuti, in āhuna -- pāhuna giving oblations and sacrificing VvA 155; by itself at Vism 219. Āhuneyya
Āhuneyya
(adj.) [a grd. form. fr. ā + hu, cp. āhuti] sacrificial, worthy of offerings or of sacrifice, venerable, adorable, worshipful D iii.5, 217 (aggi); A ii.56, 70 (sāhuneyyaka), 145 sq. (id.); iv.13, 41 (aggi); It 88 (+ pāhuneyya); Vv 6433 (cp. VvA 285). See def. at Vism 219 where expld. by "āhavanīya" and "āhavanaŋ arahati" deserving of offerings. Āhundarika
Āhundarika
(adj.) [doubtful or āhuṇḍ˚?] according to Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 73 "crowded up, blocked up, impassable" Vin i.79; iv.297; Vism 413 (˚ŋ andha -- tamaŋ). -- I. I
I
in i -- kāra the letter or sound i SnA 12 (˚lopa), 508 (id.). Ikka
Ikka
[Sk. ṛkṣa, of which the regular representation is P. accha2] a bear J vi.538 [ = accha C.). Ikkāsa
Ikkāsa
(?) [uncertain as regard meaning & etym.] at Vin ii.151 (+ kasāva) is trsl. by "slime of trees", according to Bdhgh's expln. on p. 321 (to C. V. vi.3, 1), who however reads nikkāsa. Ikkhaṇa
Ikkhaṇa
(nt.) [fr. īkṣ] seeing Vism 16. Ikkhaṇika
Ikkhaṇika
[fr. īkṣ to look or see, cp. akkhi] a fortune- teller Vin iii.107; S ii.260; J i.456, 457; vi.504. Ikkhati
Ikkhati
[fr. īkṣ] to look J v.153; ThA 147; DhsA 172. Ingita
Ingita
(nt.) [pp. of ingati = iñjati] movement, gesture, sign J ii.195, 408; vi.368, 459. Ingha
Ingha
(indecl.) [Sk. anga prob. after P. ingha (or añja, q. v.); fr. iñjati, cp. J.P.T.S. 1883, 84] part. of exhortation, lit. "get a move on", come on, go on, look here, Sn 83, 189, 862, 875 = 1052; J v.148; Pv iv.57; Vv 539 (= codan'atthe nipāto VvA 237); VvA 47; DhA iv.62. Inghāḷa
Inghāḷa
[according to Morris J.P. T.S. 1884, 74 = angāra, cp. Marāthī ingala live coal] coal, embers, in inghāḷakhu Th 2, 386 a pit of glowing embers (= angāra -- kāsu ThA 256). The whole cpd. is doubtful. Icc'
Icc'
see iti. Iccha
Iccha
( -- ˚) (adj.) [the adj. form of icchā] wishing, longing, having desires, only in pāp˚ having evil desires S i.50; ii.156; an˚ without desires S i.61, 204; Sn 707; app˚ id. Sn 628, 707. Icchaka
Icchaka
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. iccha] wishing, desirous, only in nt. adv. yad -- icchikaŋ (and yen˚) after one's wish or liking M iii.97; A iii.28. -- 118 -- Icchati
Icchati1
[Sk. icchati, iṣ, cp. Av. isaiti, Obulg. iskati, Ohg. eiscōn, Ags. āscian = E. ask; all of same meaning "seek, wish"] to wish, desire, ask for (c. acc.), expect S i.210 (dhammaŋ sotuŋ i.); Sn 127, 345, 512, 813, 836; Dh 162, 291; Nd1 3, 138, 164; Nd2 s. v.; Pv ii.63; Pug 19; Miln 269, 327; SnA 16, 23, 321; KhA 17; PvA 20, 71, 74; Pot. icche Dh 84; Sn 835 Pv ii.66 & iccheyya D ii.2, 10; Sn 35; Dh 73, 88; ppr. icchaŋ Sn 826, 831, 937; Dh 334 (phalaŋ) aor. icchi PvA 31. -- grd. icchitabba PvA 8. -- pp. iṭṭha & icchita (q. v.). ->

Note. In prep. -- cpds. the root iṣ2 (icchati) is confused with root iṣ1 (iṣati, eṣati) with pp. both ˚iṭṭha and ˚iṣita. Thus ajjhesati, pp. ajjhiṭṭha & ajjhesita; anvesati (Sk. anvicehati); pariyesati (Sk. parīcchati), pp. pariyiṭṭha & pariyesita. Icchati
Icchati2
[Sk. rcchati of ṛ, concerning which see appeti] see aticchati & cp. icchatā. Icchatā
Icchatā
( -- ˚) (f.) [abstr. fr. icchā] wishfulness, wishing: only in aticchatā too great wish for, covetousness, greed Vbh 350 (cp. aticchati, which is probably the primary basis of the word); mah˚ & pāp˚ Vbh 351, 370. Icchana
Icchana
(nt.) [fr. iṣ2, cp. Sk. īpsana] desiring, wish J iv. 5; vi.244. Icchā
Icchā
(f.) [fr. icchati, iṣ2] wish, longing, desire D ii.243; iii.75; S i.40 (˚dhūpāyito loko), 44 (naraŋ parikassati); A ii.143; iv.293 sq.; 325 sq.; v.40, 42 sq.; Sn 773, 872; Dh 74, 264 (˚lobha -- samāpanna); Nd1 29, 30; Pug 19; Dhs 1059, 1136; Vbh 101, 357, 361, 370; Nett 18, 23, 24; Asl. 363; DhsA 250 (read icchā for issā? See Dhs trsl. 100); SnA 108; PvA 65, 155; Sdhp 242, 320.

-- âvacara moving in desires M i.27 (pāpaka); Nett 27. -- âvatiṇṇa affected with desire, overcome by covetousness Sn 306. -- pakata same Vin i.97; A iii.119, 191, 219 sq.; Pug 69; Miln 357; Vism 24 (where Bdhgh however takes it as "icchāya apakata" and puts apakata = upadduta). -- vinaya discipline of one's wishes D iii.252, A iv.15; v.165 sq. Icchita
Icchita
[pp. of icchati] wished, desired, longed for J i.208; DhsA 364; PvA 3, 53, 64 (read anicchita for anijjhiṭṭha, which may be a contamination of icchita & iṭṭha), 113, 127 (twice). Ijjhati
Ijjhati
[Vedic ṛdhyate & ṛdhnoti; Gr. a)/lqomai to thrive, Lat. alo to nourish, also Vedic iḍā refreshment & P. iddhi power] to have a good result, turn out a blessing. succeed, prosper, be successful S i.175 ("work effectively" trsl.; = samijjhati mahapphalaŋ hoti C.); iv.303; Sn 461, 485; J v.393; Pv ii.111; ii.913 (= samijjhati PvA 120); Pot. ijjhe Sn 458, 459; pret. ijjhittha (= Sk. ṛdhyiṣṭha) Vv 206 (= nippajjittha mahapphalo ahuvattha VvA 103). -> pp. iddha. See also aḍḍha2 & aḍḍhaka. Cp. sam˚. Ijjhana
Ijjhana
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. ijjhati] success, carrying out suc- cessfully Ps i.17 sq., 74, 181; ii.125, 143 sq., 161, 174; Vbh 217 sq.; Vism 266, 383 (˚aṭṭhena iddhi); DhsA 91, 118, 237. Iñjati
Iñjati
[Vedic ṛñjati (cp. P. ajjati). Also found as ingati (so Veda), and as ang in Sk. anga = P. añja & ingha & Vedic pali -- angati to turn about. See also ānejja & añjati1] to shake, move, turn about, stir D i.56; S i.107, 132, 181 (aniñjamāna ppr. med. "impassive"); iii.211; Th 1, 42; 2, 231; Nd2 s. v. (+ calati vedhati); Vism 377; DA i.167. -- pp. iñjita (q. v.). Iñjanā
Iñjanā
(f.) & ˚aŋ (nt.) [fr. iñj, see iñjati] shaking, movement, motion Sn 193 ( = calanā phandanā SnA 245); Nett 88 (= phandanā C.). an˚ immobility, steadfastness Ps i.15; ii.118. Iñjita
Iñjita
[pp. of iñjati] shaken, moved Th 1, 386 (an˚). Usually as nt. iñjitaŋ shaking, turning about, movement, vacillation M i.454; S i.109; iv.202; A ii.45; Sn 750, 1040 (pl. iñjitā), 1048 (see Nd2 140); Dh 255; Vbh 390. -> On the 7 iñjitas see J.P. T.S. 1884, 58. Iñjitatta
Iñjitatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. iñjita nt.] state of vacillation, wavering, motion S v.315 (kāyassa). Iṭṭha
Iṭṭha
(adj.) [pp. of icchati] pleasing, welcome, agreeable, pleasant, often in the idiomatic group iṭṭha kanta manāpa (of objects pleasing to the senses) D i.245; ii.192; M i.85; S iv.60, 158, 235 sq.; v.22, 60, 147; A ii.66 sq.; v.135 (dasa, dhammā etc., ten objects affording pleasure); Sn 759; It. 15; Vbh 2, 100, 337. -- Alone as nt. meaning welfare, good state, pleasure, happiness at Sn 154 (+ aniṭṭha); Nett 28 (+ aniṭṭha); Vism 167 (id.); PvA 116 ( = bhadraŋ), 140. -- aniṭṭha unpleasant, disagreeable PvA 32, 52, 60, 116. -- See also pariy˚, in which iṭṭha stands for eṭṭha. Iṭṭhakā (Itthakā)
Iṭṭhakā
(Itthakā) (f.) [BSk. iṣṭakā, e. g. Divy 221; from the Idg. root *idh > *aidh to burn, cp. Sk. idhma firewood, inddhe to kindle (idh or indh), edhaḥ fuel; Gr. a)i/qw burn, ai(_qos fire -- brand; Lat. aedes, aestas & aestus; more especially Av. ištya tile, brick] -- 1. a burnt brick, a tile Vin ii 121 (˚pākara a brick wall, distinguished fr. silāpakāra & dāru˚); J iii.435, 446 (pākār iṭṭhikā read ˚aṭṭhakā); v.213 (rattiṭṭhikā); Vism 355 (˚dārugomaya); PvA 4 (˚cuṇṇa -- makkhita -- sīsa the head rubbed with brickpowder, i. e. plaster; a ceremony performed on one to be executed, cp. Mṛcchakaṭika x.5 piṣṭa -- cūṛnɔâvakīrṇaśca puruṣo ɔhaŋ paśūkṛtaḥ with striking equation iṣṭaka > piṣṭa). -> 2. pl. (as suvaṇṇa˚) gold or gilt tiles used for covering a cetiya or tope DhA iii.29, 61; VvA 157. Iṭṭhi˚
Iṭṭhi˚
in ˚khagga -- dhāra at J vi.223 should be read iddha. Iṇa
Iṇa
(nt.) [Sk. ṛṇa, see also P. an -- aṇa] debt D i.71, 73; A iii.352; v.324 (enumd. with baddha, jāni & kali); Sn 120; J i.307; ii.388, 423; iii.66; iv.184 (iṇagga for nagga?); 256; v.253 (where enumd. as one of the 4 paribhogas, viz. theyya˚, iṇa˚, dāya˚, sāmi˚); vi.69, 193; Miln 375; PvA 273, 276, iṇaŋ gaṇhāti to borrow money or take up a loan Vism 556; SnA 289; PvA 3. -- iṇaŋ muñcati to discharge a debt J iv.280; v.238; ˚ŋ sodheti same PvA 276; labhati same PvA 3.

-- apagama absence of debt ThA 245. -- gāhaka a borrower Miln 364. -- ghāta stricken by debt Sn 246 ( = iṇaŋ gahetva tassa appadānena iṇaghāta). -- ṭṭha (with iṇaṭṭa as v. l. at all passages, see aṭṭa) fallen into or being in debt M i.463 = S iii.93 = It 89 = Miln 279. -- paṇṇa promissory note J i.230; iv.256. -- mokkha release from debt J iv.280; v.239. -- sādhaka negotiator of a loan Miln 365. Iṇāyika
Iṇāyika
[fr. iṇa] one connected with a debt, viz. (1) a creditor S i.170; J iv.159, 256; vi.178; ThA 271 see also dhanika); PvA 3. -- (2) a debtor Vin i.76; Nd1 160. Ita
Ita
[pp. of eti, i] gone, only in cpd. dur -- ita gone badly, as nt. evil, wrong Davs i.61; otherwise in compn. with prep., as peta, vīta etc. Itara
Itara1
(adj.) [Ved. itara = Lat. iterum a second time; compar. of pron. base *i, as in ayaŋ, etaŋ, iti etc.] other, second, next; different Dh 85, 104, 222; J ii.3; iii.26; iv.4; PvA 13, 14, 42, 83, 117. In repetition cpd. itarîtara one or the other, whatsoever, any Sn 42; J v.425; Nd2 141; Miln 395; KhA 145, 147; acc. itarîtaraŋ & instr. itarîtarena used as adv. of one kind or another, in every way, anyhow [cp. BSk. itaretara M Vastu iii. 348 and see Wackernagel Altind. Gram. II. Ś 121 c.] J vi 448 (˚ŋ); Dh 331 (˚ena); Vv 841 (text reads itritarena, v. l. itaritarena, expld. by itaritaraŋ VvA 333). Itara
Itara2
(adj.) freq. spelling for ittara (q. v.). Iti (ti)
Iti
(ti) (indecl.) [Vedic iti, of pron. base *i, cp. Sk. itthaŋ thus, itthā here, there; Av. ipa so; Lat. ita & item thus. Cp. also P. ettha; lit. "here, there (now), then"] emphatic-> deictic particle "thus". Occurs in both forms iti & ti, the former in higher style (poetry), the latter more familiar in conversational prose. The function of "iti" is expld. by the old Pāli C. in a conventional phrase, looking upon it more as a "filling" particle than trying to define its meaning viz. -- itī ti padasandhi padasaŋsaggo padapāripurī akkharasamavāyo etc." Nd1 123 = Nd2 137. The same expln. also for iti' haŋ (see below iv.) -- I. As deictic adv. "thus, in this way" (Vism 423 iti = evaŋ) pointing to something either just mentioned or about to be mentioned: (a) referring to what precedes Sn 253 (n'eso maman ti iti naŋ vijaññā), 805; It 123 (ito devā. . . taŋ namassanti); Dh 74 (iti bālassa sankappo thus think the -- foolish), 286 (iti bālo vicinteti); Vv 7910 (= evaŋ VvA 307); VvA 5. -- (b) referring to what follows D i.63 (iti paṭisañcikkhati); A i.205 (id.) -- II. As emphatic part. pointing out or marking off a statement either as not one's own (reported) or as the definite contents of (one's own or other's) thoughts. On the whole untranslatable (unless written as quotation marks), often only setting off a statement as emphatic, where we would either underline the word or phrase in question, or print it in italics, or put it in quot. marks (e. g. bālo ti vuccati Dh 63 = bālo vuccati). -- 1. in direct speech (as given by writer or narrator), e. g. sādhu bhante Kassapa lābhataŋ esā janatā dassanāyā ti. Tena hi Sīha tvaŋ yeva Bhagavato ārocehī ti. Evaŋ bhante ti kho Sīho . . . . D i.151. -- 2. in indirect speech: (a) as statement of a fact "so it is that" (cp. E. "viz.", Ger. "und zwar"), mostly untranslated Kh iv. (arahā ti pavuccati); J i.253 (tasmā pesanaka -- corā t' eva vuccanti); iii.51 (tayo sahāyā ahesuŋ makkato sigālo uddo ti); PvA 112 (ankuro pañca -- sakaṭasatehi . . . aññataro pi brāhmaṇo pañca -- sakaṭasatehī ti dve janā sakata -- sahassehi . . . patipannā). -- (b) as statement of a thought "like this", "I think", so, thus Sn 61 ("sango eso" iti ñatvā knowing "this is defilement"), 253 ("neso maman" ti iti naŋ vijaññā), 783 ("iti' han" ti), 1094 (etaŋ dīpaŋ anāparaŋ Nibbānaŋ iti naŋ brūmi I call this N.), 1130 (aparā pāraŋ gaccheyya tasmā "Parāyanaŋ" iti). -- III. Peculiarities of spelling. (1) in combn. with other part. iti is elided & contracted as follows: icc' eva, t' eva, etc. -- (2) final a, i, u preceding ti are lengthened to ā, ī, ū, e. g. mā evaŋ akatthā ti DhA i.7; kati dhurānī ti ibid; dve yeva dhurāni bhikkhū ti ibid. -> IV. Combinations with other emphatic particles: + eva thus indeed, in truth, really; as icc' eva Pv i.119 (= evam eva PvA 59); t' eva J i.253; Miin 114; tv' eva J i.203; ii.2. -- iti kira thus now, perhaps, I should say D i.228, 229, 240. -- iti kho thus, therefore D i.98, 103; iii.135. iti vā and so on (?), thus and such (similar cases) Nd1 13 = Nd2 420 A1. -- iti ha thus surely, indeed Sn 934, 1084 (see below under ītihītihaŋ; cp. SnA Index 669: itiha? and itikirā); It 76; DA i.247, as iti haŋ at Sn 783 (same expln. at Nd1 71 as for iti). -- kin ti how J ii.159.

-- kirā (f.) [a substantivised iti kira] hearsay, lit. "so I guess" or "I have heard" A i.189 = ii.191 sq. = Nd2 151. Cp. itiha. -- bhava becoming so & so (opp. abhava not becoming) Vin ii.184 (˚abhava); D i.8 (ip = iti bhavo iti abhavo DA i.91); A ii.248; It 109 (id.); syn. with itthabhava (q. v.). -- vāda "speaking so & so", talk, gossip M i.133; S v.73; A ii.26; It iii.35. -- vuttaka (nt.) [a noun formation fr. iti vuttaŋ] "so it has been said", (book of) quotations, "Logia", N. of the fourth book of the Khuddaka -- nikāya, named thus because every sutta begins with vuttaŋ h' etaŋ Bhagavatā "thus has the Buddha said" (see khuddaka and navanga) Vin iii.8; M i.133; A ii.7, 103; iii.86, 177, 361 sq.; Pug 43, 62; KhA 12. Kern, Toev. s. v. compares the interesting BSk. distortion itivṛttaŋ. -- hāsa [= iti ha āsa, preserving the Vedic form āsa, 3rd sg. perf. of atthi] "thus indeed it has been", legendary lore, oral tradition, history; usually mentioned as a branch of brahmanic learning, in phrase itihāsa -- pañca -- mānaŋ padako veyyākaraṇo etc. D i.88 = (see DA i.247); A i.163; iii.223; Sn 447, 1020. Cp. also M Vastu i.556. -- hītiha [itiha + itiha] "so & so" talk, gossip, oral tradition, belief by hearsay etc. (cp. itikirā & anītiha. Nd2 spells ītihītiha) M i.520; S i.154; Sn 1084; Nd2 151. -- 119 -- Ito
Ito
(indecl.) [Vedic itaḥ, abl. -- adv. formation fr. pron. base *i, cp. iti, ayaŋ etc.] adv. of succession or motion in space & time "from here". "from now". (1) with ref. to space: (a) from here, from this, often implying the present existence (in opp. to the "other" world) It 77; Sn 271 (˚ja. ˚nidāna caused or founded in or by this existence = attabhāvaŋ sandhāy' āha SnA 303), 774 (cutāse), 870 (˚nidāna), 1062 (from this source, i. e. from me), 1101; Pv i.57 (ito dinnaŋ what is given in this world); i.62 (i. e. manussalokato PvA 33); i.123 (= idhalokato PvA 64); Nett 93 (ito bahiddhā); PvA 46 (ito dukkhato mutti). -- (b) here (with implication of movement), in phrases ito c' ito here and there PvA 4, 6; and ito vā etto vā here & there DhA ii.80. -- (2) with ref. to time: from here, from now, hence (in chronological records with num. ord. or card., with ref. either to past or future). (a) referring to the past, since D ii.2 (ito so ekanavuto kappo 91 kappas ago); Sn 570 (ito aṭṭhame, scil. divase 8 days ago SnA 457; T. reads atthami); VvA 319 (ito kira tiŋsa -- kappa -- sahasse); PvA 19 (dvā navuti kappe 92 kappas ago), 21 (id.), 78 (pañcamāya jātiyā in the fifth previous re -- birth). -- (b) referring to the future, i. e. henceforth, in future, from now e. g. ito sattame divase in a week VvA 138; ito paraŋ further, after this SnA 160, 178, 412, 549; PvA 83; ito paṭthāya from now on, henceforward J i.63 (ito dāni p.); PvA 41. Ittara
Ittara
(sometimes spelt itara) (adj.) [Vedic itvara in meaning "going", going along, hence developed meaning "passing"; fr. i] -- 1. passing, changeable, short, temporary, brief, unstable M i.318 (opp. dīgharattaŋ); A ii.187; J i.393; iii.83 (˚dassana = khaṇika˚ C.), iv.112 (˚vāsa temporary abode); Pv i.1111 (= na cira -- kāla -- ṭṭhāyin anicca vipariṇāma -- dhamma PvA 60); DA i.195; PvA 60 (= paritta khaṇika). -- 2. small, inferior, poor, unreliable, mean M ii.47 (˚jacca of inferior birth); A ii.34; Sn 757 (= paritta paccupaṭṭhāna SnA 509); Miln 93, 114 (˚pañña of small wisdom). This meaning (2) also in BSk. itvaṛa, e. g. Divy 317 (dāna). Ittaratā
Ittaratā
(f.) [fr. ittara] changeableness Miln 93 (of a woman). Ittha
Ittha
(indecl.) [the regular representative of Vedic ittha here, there, but preserved only in cpds. while the Pāli form is ettha] here, in this world (or "thus, in such a way"), only in cpd. ˚bhāv' aññathā -- bhāva such an (i. e. earthly) existence and one of another kind, or existence here (in this life) and in another form" (cp. itibhāva & itthatta) Sn 729, 740 = 752; It 9 (v. l. itthi˚ for iti˚) = A ii.10 = Nd2 172a; It 94 (v. l. ittha˚). There is likely to have been a confusion between ittha = Sk. itthā & itthaŋ = Sk. itthaŋ (see next). Itthaŋ
Itthaŋ
(indecl.) [adv. fr. pron. base ˚i, as also iti in same meaning] thus, in this way D i.53, 213; Dāvs iv.35; v.18.

-- nāma (itthan˚) having such as name, called thus, socalled Vin i.56; iv.136; J i.297; Miln 115; DhA ii.98. -- bhūta being thus, of this kind, modal, only in cpd. ˚lakkhaṇa or ˚ākhyāna the sign or case of modality, i. e. the ablative case SnA 441; VvA 162, 174; PvA 150. Itthatta
Itthatta1
(nt.) [ittha + *tvaŋ, abstr. fr. ittha. The curious BSk. distortion of this word is icchatta M Vastu 417] being here (in this world), in the present state of becoming, this (earthly) state (not "thusness" or "life as we conceive it", as Mrs. Rh. D. in K. S. i.177; although a confusion between ittha & itthaŋ seems to exist, see ittha); "life in these conditions" K. S. ii.17; expld. by itthabhāva C. on S i.140 (see K. S. 318). -- See also freq. formula A of arahatta. -- D i.18, 84; A i.63; ii.82, 159, 203; Sn 158; Dhs 633; Pug 70, 71; DA i.112. -- 120 -- Itthatta
Itthatta2
(nt.) [itthi + *tvaŋ abstr. fr. itthi] state or con- dition of femininity, womanhood, muliebrity Dhs 633 ( = itthi -- sabhāva DhsA 321). Itthi & Itthī
Itthi
& Itthī (f.) [Vedic stri, Av. strī woman, perhaps with Sk. sātuḥ uterus fr. Idg. ˚sī to sow or produce, Lat. sero, Goth. saian, Ohg. sāen, Ags. sāwan etc., cp. also Cymr. hīl progeny, Oir. sīl seed; see J. Schmidt, K. Z. xxv.29. The regular representative of Vedic strī is P. thī, which only occurs rarely (in poetry & compn.) see thī] woman, female; also (usually as -- ˚) wife. Opp. purisa man (see e. g. for contrast of itthi and purisa J v.72, 398; Nett 93; DhA i.390; PvA 153). -- S i.33 (nibbānass' eva santike), 42, 125 (majjhim˚, mah˚), 185; A i.28, 138; ii.115, 209; iii.68, 90, 156; iv.196 (purisaŋ bandhati); Sn 112, 769 (nom. pl. thiyo = itthi -- saññikā thiyo SnA 513); J i.286 (itthi doso), 300 (gen. pl. itthinaŋ); ii.415 (nom. pl. thiyo); v.397 (thi -- ghātaka), 398 (gen. dat. itthiyā), v.425 (nom pl. itthiyo); Vbh 336, 337; DA i.147; PvA 5, 44, 46, 67, 154 (amanuss˚ of petīs); Sdhp 64, 79. -- anitthi a woman lacking the characteristics of womanhood, an unfaithful wife J ii.126 (= ucchiṭṭh˚ C.); kul' -- itthi a wife of good descent Vin ii.10; A iii.76; iv.16, 19; dahar˚ a young wife J i.291; dur˚ a poor woman J iv.38. -> Some general characterisations of womanhood: 10 kinds of women enumd. at Vin iii.139 = A v.264 = VvA 72, viz. mātu -- rakkhitā, pitu˚, mātāpitu˚ bhātu˚, bhaginī˚, ñāti˚, gotta˚, dhamma˚, sarakkhā, saparidaṇḍā; see Vin iii.139 for expln. -- S i.38 (malaŋ brahmacariyassa), 43 (id.); J i.287 (itthiyo nāma āsa lāmikā pacchimikā); iv. 222 (itthiyo papāto akkhāto; pamattaŋ pamathenti); v. 425 (sīho yathā . . . tath' itthiyo); women as goods for sale S i.43 (bhaṇḍānaŋ uttamaŋ); DhA i.390 (itthiyo vikkiṇiya bhaṇḍaŋ).

-- agāra ( -- āgāra) as itthā̆gāra women's apartment, seraglio Vin i.72; iv.158; S i.58, 89; J i.90; also coll. for womenfolk, women (cp. Ger. frauenzimmer) D ii.249; J v.188. -- indriya the female principle or sex, femininity (opp. puris' indriya) S v.204; A iv.57 sq.; Vism 447, 492; Dhs 585, 633, 653 et passim. -- kathā talk about women D i.7 (cp. DA i.90). -- kāma the craving for a woman S iv.343. -- kutta a woman's behaviour, woman's wiles, charming behaviour, coquetry A iv.57 = Dhs 633; J i.296, 433; ii.127, 329; iv.219, 472; DhA iv.197. -- ghātaka a woman -- killer J v. 398. -- dhana wife's treasure, dowry Vin iii.16. -- dhutta a rogue in the matter of women, one who indulges in women Sn 106; J iii.260; PvA 5. -- nimitta characteristic of a woman Dhs 633, 713, 836. -- pariggaha a woman's company, a woman Nd1 11. -- bhāva existence as woman, womanhood S i.129; Th 2, 216 (referring to a yakkhinī, cp. ThA 178; Dhs 633; PvA 168. -- rūpa womanly beauty A i.1; iii.68; Th 2, 294. -- lakkhaṇa fortune -- telling regarding a woman D i.9 (cp. DhA i.94, + purisa˚); J vi. 135. -- linga "sign of a woman", feminine quality, female sex Vism 184; Dhs 633, 713, 836; DhsA 321 sq. -- sadda the sound (or word) "woman" DhA i.15. -- soṇḍī a woman addicted to drink Sn 112. Itthikā
Itthikā
(f.) [fr. itthi] a woman Vin iii.16; D ii.14; J i. 336; Vv 187; Sdhp 79. As adj. itthika in bahutthika having many women, plentiful in women Vin ii.256 (kulāni bahuttikāni appapurisakāni rich in women & lacking in men); S ii.264 (id. and appitthikāni). Ida & Idaŋ
Ida
& Idaŋ (indecl.) [nt. of ayaŋ (idaŋ) in function of a deictic part.] emphatic demonstr. adv. in local, temporal & modal function, as (1) in this, here: idappaccayatā having its foundation in this, i. e. causally connected, by way of cause Vin i.5 = S i.136; D i.185; Dhs 1004, 1061; Vbh 340, 362, 365; Vism 518; etc. -- (2) now, then which idha is more freq.) D ii.267, 270, almost syn. (for with kira. -- (3) just (this), even so, only: idam -- atthika just sufficient, proper, right Th 1, 984 (cīvara); Pug 69 (read so for ˚maṭṭhika, see Pug A 250); as idam -- atthitā "being satisfied with what is sufficient" at Vism 81: expld. as atthika -- bhāva at Pug A 250. idaŋsaccâbhinivesa inclination to say: only this is the truth, i. e. inclination to dogmatise, one of the four kāya -- ganthā, viz. abhijjhā, byāpāda, sīlabbata -- parāmāsa, idaŋ˚ (see Dhs 1135 & Dhs trsl. 304); D iii.230; S v.59; Nd1 98; Nett 115 sq. Idāni
Idāni
(indecl.) [Vedic idānīŋ] now Dh 235, 237; KhA 247. Iddha
Iddha1
[pp. of iddhe to idh or indh, cp. indhana & idhuma] in flames, burning, flaming bright, clear J vi.223 (˚khaggadharā balī; so read for T. iṭṭhi -- khagga˚); Dpvs vi.42. Iddha
Iddha2
[pp. of ijjhati; cp. Sk. ṛddha] (a) prosperous, opulent, wealthy D i.211 (in idiomatic phrase iddha phīta bahujana, of a prosperous town); A iii.215 (id.); J vi.227, 361 ( = issara C.), 517; Dāvs i.11. -- (b) successful, satisfactory, sufficient Vin i.212 (bhattaŋ); iv.313 (ovādo). Iddhi
Iddhi
[Vedic ṛddhi from ardh, to prosper; Pali ijjhati]. There is no single word in English for Iddhi, as the idea is unknown in Europe. The main sense seems to be ʻ potency ʼ. -- 1. Pre -- Buddhistic; the Iddhi of a layman. The four Iddhis of a king are personal beauty, long life, good health, and popularity (D ii.177; M iii.176, cp. J iii.454 for a later set). The Iddhi of a rich young noble is 1. The use of a beautiful garden, 2. of soft and pleasant clothing, 3. of different houses for the different seasons, 4. of good food, A i.145. At M i.152 the Iddhi of a hunter, is the craft and skill with which he captures game; but at p. 155 other game have an Iddhi of their own by which they outwit the hunter. The Iddhi, the power of a confederation of clans, is referred to at D ii.72. It is by the Iddhi they possess that birds are able to fly (Dhp 175). -- 2. Psychic powers. including most of those claimed for modern mediums (see under Abhiññā). Ten such are given in a stock paragraph. They are the power to project mind -- made images of oneself; to become invisible; to pass through solid things, such as a wall; to penetrate solid ground as if it were water; to walk on water; to fly through the air; to touch sun and moon; to ascend into the highest heavens (D i.77, 212; ii.87, 213; iii.112, 281; S ii.121; v.264, 303; A i.170, 255; iii.17, 28, 82, 425; v.199; Ps i.111; ii.207; Vism 378 sq., 384; DA i.122). For other such powers see S i.144; iv.290; v.263; A iii.340. -- 3. The Buddhist theory of Iddhi. At D i.213 the Buddha is represented as saying: ʻ It is because I see danger in the practice of these mystic wonders that I loathe and abhor and am ashamed thereof ʼ. The mystic wonder that he himself believed in and advocated (p. 214) was the wonder of education. What education was meant in the case of Iddhi, we learn from M i.34; A iii.425, and from the four bases of Iddhi, the Iddhipādā. They are the making determination in respect of concentration on purpose, on will, on thoughts & on investigation (D ii.213; M i.103; A i.39, 297; ii.256; iii. 82; Ps i.111; ii 154, 164, 205; Vbh 216). It was ar offence against the regulations of the Sangha for a Bhikkhv to display before the laity these psychic powers beyond the capacity of ordinary men (Vin ii.112). And falsely to claim the possession of such powers involved expulsion from the Order (Vin iii.91). The psychic powers of Iddhi were looked upon as inferior (as the Iddhi of an unconverted man seeking his own profit), compared to the higher Iddhi, the Ariyan Iddhi (D iii.112; A i.93; Vin ii.183). There is no valid evidence that any one of the ten Iddhis in the above list actually took place. A few instances are given, but all are in texts more than a century later than the recorded wonder. And now for nearly two thousand years we have no further instances. Various points on Iddhi discussed at Dial. i.272, 3; Cpd. 60 ff.; Expositor 121. Also at Kvu 55; Ps ii.150; Vism xii; DhA i.91; J i.47, 360.

-- ânubhāva (iddhånu˚) power or majesty of thaumaturgy Vin 31, 209, 240; iii.67; S i 147; iv.290; PvA 53. -- âbhisankhāra (iddhåbhi˚) exercise of any of the psychic powers Vin i.16, 17, 25; D i.106; S iii.92; iv.289; v.270; Sn p. 107; PvA 57, 172 212. -- pāṭihāriya a wonder of psychic power Vin i.25, 28, 180, 209; ii.76, 112, 200; D i.211, 212; iii.3, 4, 9, 12 sq., 27; S iv.290; A i.170, 292; Ps ii.227. -- pāda constituent or basis of psychic power Vin ii.240; D ii.103, 115 sq., 120; iii.77, 102, 127, 221; M ii.11; iii.296; S i.116, 132; iii.96, 153; iv.360; v.254, 255, 259 sq., 264 sq., 269 sq., 275, 285; A iv.128 sq., 203, 463; v.175; Nd1 14, 45 (˚dhīra), 340 (˚pucchā); Nd1 s. v.; Ps i.17, 21, 84; ii.56, 85 sq., 120, 166, 174; Ud 62; Dhs 358, 528, 552; Nett 16, 31, 83; DhsA 237; DhA iii.177; iv.32. -- bala the power of working wonders VvA 4; PvA 171. -- yāna the carriage (fig.) of psychic faculties Miln 276. -- vikubbanā the practice of psychic powers Vism 373 sq. -- vidhā kinds of iddhi D i.77, 212; ii.213; iii.112, 281; S ii.121; v.264 sq., 303; A i.170 sq., 255; iii.17, 28, 82 sq., 425 sq.; v.199; Ps i.111; ii.207; Vism 384; DA i.222. -- visaya range or extent of psychic power Vin iii.67; Nett 23. -- 121 -- Iddhika
Iddhika1
( -- ˚) (adj.) the compn. form of addhika in cpd. kapaṇ -- iddhika tramps & wayfarers (see kapaṇa), e. g. at J i.6; iv.15; PvA 78. Iddhika
Iddhika2
( -- ˚) (adj.) [iddhi + ka] possessed of power, only in cpd. mah -- iddhika of great power, always combd. with mah -- ânubhāva, e. g. at Vin i.31; ii.193; iii.101; S ii. 155; M i.34; Th 1, 429. As mahiddhiya at J v.149. See mahiddhika. Iddhimant
Iddhimant
(adj.) [fr. iddhi] -- 1. (lit.) successful, proficient, only in neg. an˚ unfortunate, miserable, poor J vi.361. -> 2. (fig.) possessing psychic powers Vin iii.67; iv.108; A i.23, 25; ii.185; iii.340; iv.312; Sn 179; Nett 23; Sdhp 32, 472. Idha
Idha
(indecl.) [Sk. iha, adv. of space fr. pron. base *i (cp. ayaŋ, iti etc.), cp. Lat. ihi, Gr. i)qa -- genh/s, Av. ida] here, in this place, in this connection, now; esp. in this world or present existence Sn 1038, 1056, 1065; It 99 (idh' ûpapanna reborn in this existence); Dh 5, 15, 267, 343, 392; Nd1 40, 109, 156; Nd2 145, 146; SnA 147; PvA 45, 60, 71. -- idhaloka this world, the world of men Sn 1043 ( = manussaloka Nd2 552c); PvA 64; in this religion, Vbh 245. On diff. meanings of idha see DhsA 348. Idhuma
Idhuma
[Sk. idhma, see etym. under iṭṭhakā] fire -- wood - Tela -- kaṭāha -- gāthā, p. 53, J.P.T.S. 1884. Inda
Inda
[Vedic indra, most likely to same root as indu moon, viz. *Idg. *eid to shine, cp. Lat. īdūs middle of month (after the full moon), Oir. ēsce moon. Jacobi in K. Z. xxxi.316 sq. connects Indra with Lat. neriosus strong & Nero). -- 1. The Vedic god Indra D i.244; ii.261, 274; Sn 310, 316, 679, 1024; Nd1 177. -- 2. lord, chief, king. Sakko devānaŋ indo D i.216, 217; ii.221, 275; S i.219. Vepɔcitti asurindo S i.221 ff. manussinda, S i.69, manujinda, Sn 553, narinda, Sn 863, all of the Buddha, ʻ chief of men ʼ; cp. Vism 491. [Europeans have found a strange difficulty in understanding the real relation of Sakka to Indra. The few references to Indra in the Nikāyas should be classed with the other fragments of Vedic mythology to be found in them. Sakka belongs only to the Buddhist mythology then being built up. He is not only quite different from Indra, but is the direct contrary of that blustering, drunken, god of war. See the passages collected in Dial. ii.294-> 298. The idiom sa -- Indā devā, D ii.261, 274; A v.325, means ʻ the gods about Indra, Indra's retinue ʼ, this being a Vedic story. But Devā Tāvatiŋsā sahindakā means the T. gods together with their leader (D ii.208 -- 212; S iii.90; cp. Vv 301) this being a Buddhist story].

-- aggi (ind' aggi) Indra's fire, i. e. lightning PvA 56. -- gajjita (nt.) Indra's thunder Miln 22. -- jāla deception DA i.85. -- jālika a juggler, conjurer Miln 331. -- dhanu the rainbow DA i.40. -- bhavana the realm of Indra Nd1 448 (cp. Tāvatiŋsa -- bhavana). -- linga the characteristic of Indra Vism 491. -- sāla N. of tree J iv.92. Indaka
Indaka
[dimin. fr. inda] -- 1. Np. (see Dict. of names), e. g. at Pv ii.957; PvA 136 sq. -- 2. ( -- ˚) see inda 2. Indakhīla
Indakhīla
[inda + khīla, cp. BSk. indrakīla Divy 250, 365, 544; Av. Ś i.109, 223]. "Indra's post"; the post, stake or column of Indra, at or before the city gate; also a large slab of stone let into the ground at the entrance of a house D ii.254 (˚ŋ ūhacca, cp. DhA ii.181); Vin iv.160 (expld. ibid. as sayani -- gharassa ummāro, i. e. threshold); S v.444 (ayokhīlo +); Dh 95 (˚ûpama, cp. DhA ii.181); Th 1, 663; J i.89; Miln 364; Vism 72, 466; SnA 201; DA i.209 (nikkhamitvā bahi ˚ā); DhA ii.180 (˚sadisaŋ Sāriputtassa cittaŋ), 181 (nagara -- dvāre nikhataŋ ˚ŋ). Indagū
Indagū
see hindagū. Indagopaka
Indagopaka
[inda + gopaka, cp. Vedic indragopā having Indra as protector] a sort of insect ("cochineal, a red beetle", Böhtlingk), observed to come out of the ground after rain Th 1, 13; Vin iii.42; J iv.258; v.168; DhA i.20; Brethren p. 18, n. Indanīla
Indanīla
[inda + nīla "Indra's blue"] a sapphire J i.80; Miln 118; VvA 111 (+ mahānīla). Indavāruṇī
Indavāruṇī
(f.) [inda + vāruṇa] the Coloquintida plant J iv.8 (˚ka -- rukkha). Indīvara
Indīvara
(nt.) [etym.?] the blue water lily, Nymphaea Stel- lata or Cassia Fistula J v.92 (˚ī -- samā ratti); vi.536; Vv 451 ( = uddālaka -- puppha VvA 197). Indriya
Indriya
(nt.) [Vedic indriya adj. only in meaning "belonging to Indra"; nt. strength, might (cp. inda), but in specific pāli sense "belonging to the ruler", i. e. governing, ruling nt. governing, ruling or controlling principle] A. On term: Indriya is one of the most comprehensive & important categories of Buddhist psychological philosophy & ethics, meaning "controlling principle, directive force, élan, du/namis", in the foll. applications: (a) with reference to sense -- perceptibility "faculty, function", often wrongly interpreted as "organ"; (b) w. ref. to objective aspects of form and matter "kind, characteristic, determinating principle, sign, mark" (cp. woman -- hood, hood = Goth. haidus "kind, form"); (c) w. ref. to moods of sensation and (d) to moral powers or motives controlling action, "principle, controlling" force; (e) w. ref. to cognition & insight "category". -> Definitions of indriya among others at DhsA 119; cp. Expositor 157; Dhs trsl. lvii; Cpd. 228, 229.

B. Classifications and groups of indriyāni. An exhaustive list comprises the indriyāni enumd under A a -- e, thus establishing a canonical scheme of 22 Controlling Powers (bāvīsati indriyāni), running thus at Vbh 122 sq. (see trsl. at Cpd. 175, 176); and discussed in detail at Vism 491 sq. (a. sensorial) (1) cakkh -- undriya ("the eye which is a power", Cpd. 228) the eye or (personal potentiality of) vision, (2) sot -- indriya the ear or hearing, (3) ghān˚ nose or smell, (4) jivh˚ tongue or taste, (5) kāy˚ body -- sensibility, (6) man˚) mind; (b. material) (7) itth˚ female sex or femininity, (8) puris˚ male sex or masculinity, (9) jīvit˚ life or vitality; (c. sensational) (10) sukh˚ pleasure, (11) dukkh˚ pain, (12) somanasa˚ joy, (13) domanass˚ grief, (14) upekh˚ hedonic indifference (d. moral) (15) saddh˚ faith, (16) viriy˚ energy, (17) sat˚ mindfulness, (18) samādh˚ concentration, (19) paññ˚ reason; (e. cognitional) (20) anaññāta -- ñassāmīt˚ the thought "I shall come to know the unknown", (21) aññ˚ ( = aññā) gnosis, (22) aññātā -- v˚ one who knows. -- Jīvitindriya (no. 9) is in some redactions placed before itth˚ (no. 7), e. g. at Ps i.7, 137. -- From this list are detached several groups, mentioned frequently and in various connections, no. 6 manas (mano, man -- indriya) wavering in its function, being either included under (a) or (more frequently) omitted, so that the first set (a) is marked off as pañc' indriyāni, the 6th being silently included (see below). This uncertainty regarding manas deserves to be noted. The foll. groups may be mentioned here viz 19 (nos. 1 -- 19) at Ps i.137; 10 (pañca rūpīni & pañca arūpīni) at Nett 69; three groups of five (nos. 1 -- 5, 10 -- 14, 15 -- 19) at D iii.239, cp. 278; four (group d without paññā, i. e. nos. 15 -- 18) at A ii.141; three (saddh˚, samādh˚, paññ˚, i. e. nos. 15, 18, 19) at A i. 118 sq. Under aṭṭhavidhaŋ indriya -- rūpaŋ (Cpd. 159) or rūpaŋ as indriyaŋ "form which is faculty" Dhs 661 (cp. trsl. p. 204) are understood the 5 sensitives (nos. 1 -- 5), the 2 séx -- states (nos. 7, 8) and the vital force (no. 9), i. e. groups a & b of enumn.; discussed & defined in detail at Dhs 709 -- 717, 971 -- 973. -- It is often to be guessed from the context only, which of the sets of 5 indriyāni (usually either group a or d) is meant. These detached groups are classed as below under C. f. -- Note. This system of 22 indriyāni reflects a revised & more elaborate form of the 25 (or 23) categories of the Sānkhya philosophy, with its 10 elements, 10 indri, īni & the isolated position of manas.

C. Material in detail (grouped according to A a -- e) (a) sensorial: (mentioned or referred to as set of 5 viz B. nos. 1 -- 5): M i.295: S iii.46 (pañcannaŋ ˚ānaŋ avak kanti), 225; iv.168; A ii.151 (as set of 6, viz. B. nos. 1 -- 6): M i.9; S iv.176; v.74, 205, 230; A i.113; ii.16, 39, 152; iii.99, 163, 387 sq.; v.348. Specially referring to restraint & control of the senses in foll. phrases: in driyāni saŋvutāni S ii.231, 271; iv.112; pañcasu ˚esu saŋvuto Sn 340 ( = lakkhaṇato pana chaṭṭhaŋ pi vuttaŋ yeva hoti, i. e. the 6th as manas included, SnA 343); ˚esu susaŋvuta Th 2, 196 (= mana -- chaṭṭhesu i˚ suṭṭhu saŋvutā ThA 168) indriyesu guttadvāra & guttadvāratā D iii.107; S ii.218; iv.103, 112, 175; A i.25, 94, 113; ii.39; iii.70, 138, 173, 199, 449 sq.; iv.25, 166; v.134; It 23, 24; Nd1 14; Vbh 248, 360; DA i.182 (= manachaṭṭesu indriyesu pihita -- dvāro hoti), i. vippasannāni S ii. 275; iii.2, 235; iv.294; v.301; A i.181; iii.380. ˚ānaŋ samatā (v. l. samatha) A iii.375 sq. (see also f. below) ˚āni bhāvitāni Sn 516 (= cakkh' ādīni cha i. SnA 426); Nd2 475 B8. -- Various: S i.26 (rakkhati), 48 (˚ûpasame rato); iv.40, 140 (˚sampanna); v.216, 217 sq. (independent in function, mano as referee); Ps. i.190 (man˚); Vbh 13 (rūpa), 341 (mud˚ & tikkh˚) 384 (ahīn˚). -- (b) physical: (above B 7 -- 9) all three: S v.204; Vism 447; itthi˚ & purisa˚ A iv.57; Vbh 122, 415 sq.; puris˚ A iii.404; jīvit˚ Vbh 123, 137; Vism 230 (˚upaccheda = maraṇa). See also under itthi, jīvita & purisa. -- (c) sensational (above B 10 -- 14): S v.207 sq. (see Cpd. 111 & cp. p. 15), 211 sq.; Vbh 15, 71; Nett 88. -- (d) moral (above B 15 -> 19): S iii.96, 153; iv.36, 365 sq.; v.193 sq., 202, 219 (corresponding to pañcabalāni), 220 sq. (and amata), 223 sq. (their culture brings assurance of no rebirth), 227 sq. (paññā the chief one), 235, 237 (sevenfold fruit of), A iv.125 sq., 203, 225; v.56, 175; Ps ii.49, 51 sq., 86; Nd1 14; Nd2 628 (sat˚ + satibala); Kvu 589; Vbh 341; Nett 15, 28, 47, 54. Often in standard combn. with satipaṭṭhāna, sammappadhāna. iddhipāda, indriya, bala, bojjhanga, magga (see Nd2 s. v. p. 263) D ii.120; Vin iii. 93, Ps ii.166 & passim. As set of 4 indriyāni (nos. 16-> 19) at Nett 83. -- (e) cognitional (above B 20 -- 22) D iii.219 = S v.204 (as peculiar to Arahantship); It 53; Ps i.115; ii.30. -- (f) collectively, either two or more of groups a -- e, also var. peculiar uses: personal; esp. physical faculties. S i.61 (pākat˚), 204 (id.); iii.207 (ākāsaŋ ˚āni sankamanti); iv.294 (vipari -- bhinnāni); A iii.441 (˚ānaŋ avekallatā). magic power A iv.264 sq. (okkhipati ˚āni). indriyānaŋ paripāko (moral or physical) over -- ripeness of faculties S ii.2, 42; A v.203; Nd2 252 (in def. of jarā); Vbh 137. moral forces Vin i.183 (˚ānaŋ samatā, + viriyānaŋ s. as sign of Arahant); ii.240 (pañc˚). principle of life ekindriyaŋ jīvaŋ Vin iii.156; Miln 259. heart or seat of feeling in phrase ˚āni paricāreti to satisfy one's heart PvA 16, 58, 77. obligation, duty, vow in phrase ˚āni bhinditvā breaking one's vow J ii.274; iv.190.

D. Unclassified material D i 77 (ahīn˚); iii 239 (domanass˚ & somanass˚) M i.437 (vemattatā), 453 (id.); ii. 11, 106; iii.296; S iii.225; v.209 (dukkh˚, domanass˚); A i.39, 42 sq., 297; ii.38 (sant˚), 149 sq.; iii.277, 282; Ps i.16, 21, 88, 180; ii.1 sq, 13, 84, 119, 132, 143, 145, 110, 223; Nd1 45 (˚dhīra), 171 (˚kusala), 341 (pucchā); Dhs 58, 121, 528, 556 (dukkh˚), 560, 644. 736; Nett 18 (sotāpannassa), 28 (˚vavaṭṭhāna), 162 (lok'uttara); Vism 350 (˚vekallatā); Sdhp 280, 342, 364, 371, 449, 473.

E. As adj. ( -- ˚) having one's senses, mind or heart as such & such S i.138 (tikkh˚ & mud˚); iii.93 (pākat˚); v.269 (id.); A i.70 (id) & passim (id.); A i.70 (saŋvut˚) 266 (id.), 236 (gutt˚); ii.6 (samāhit˚); 8n 214 (susamāhit˚ his senses well -- composed); PvA 70 (pīṇit˚ joyful or gladdened of heart).

F. Some compounds: -- gutta one who restrains & watches his senses S i.154; Dh 375. -- gutti keeping watch over the senses, self -- restraint DhA iv.111. a paropariya, b paropariyatta & c paropariyatti (˚ñāṇa) (knowledge of) what goes on in the senses and intentions of others a J i.78; b A v.34, 38; b Ps i.121 sq., 133 sq.; ii.158, 175; b Vbh 340, 342; c S v.205; c Nett 101. See remark under paropariya. -- bhāvanā cultivation of the (five, see above Cd) moral qualities Vin i.294 (+ balabhāvanā); M iii.298. -- saŋvara restraint or subjugation of the senses D ii.281; M i.269, 346; S i.54; A iii.360; iv.99; v.113 sq., 136, 206; Nd1 483; Nett 27, 121 sq; Vism 20 sq. -- 122 -- Indhana
Indhana
(nt.) [Vedic indhana, of idh or indh to kindle, cp. iddha1] firewood, fuel J iv.27 (adj. an˚ without fuel, aggi); v.447; ThA 256; VvA 335; Sdhp 608. Cp. idhuma. Ibbha
Ibbha
(adj.) [Ved. ibhya belonging to the servants] menial; a retainer, in the phrase muṇḍakā samaṇakā ibbhā kaṇhā (kiṇhā) bandhupādâpaccā D i.90 (v. l. SS imbha; T. kiṇhā, v. l. kaṇhā), 91, 103; M i.334 (kiṇhā, v. l. kaṇhā). Also at J vi.214. Expld. by Bdhgh. as gahapatika at DA i.254, (also at J vi.215). Iriṇa
Iriṇa
(nt.) [Vedic iriṇa, on etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under rarus] barren soil, desert J vi.560 ( = niroja C.). Cp. īriṇa. Iriyati
Iriyati
[fr. īr to set in motion, to stir, Sk. īrte, but pres. formation influenced by iriyā & also by Sk. iyarti of ṛ (see acchati & icchati2); cp. Caus. īrayati ( = P. īreti), pp. īrṇa & īrita. See also issā] to move, to wander about, stir; fig. to move, behave, show a certain way of deportment M i.74, 75; S i.53 (dukkhaŋ aticca iriyati); iv.71; A iii.451; v.41; Sn 947, 1063, 1097; Th 1,276; J iii.498 (= viharati); Nd1 431; Nd2 147 (= carati etc.); Vism 16; DA i.70. Iriyanā
Iriyanā
(f.) [fr. iriyati] way of moving on, progress, Dhs 19, 82, 295, 380, 441, 716. Iriyā
Iriyā
(f.) [cp. from iriyati, BSk. īryā Divy 485] movement, posture, deportment M i.81; Sn 1038 ( = cariyā vatti vihāro Nd2 148); It 31; Vism 145 (+ vutti pālana yapana).

-- patha way of deportment; mode of movement; good behaviour. There are 4 iriyāpathas or postures, viz. walking, standing, sitting, lying down (see Ps ii.225 & DA i.183). Cp. BSk. īryāpatha Divy 37. -- Vin i.39; ii.146 (˚sampanna); Vin i.91 (chinn˚ a cripple); S v.78 (cattāro i.); Sn 385; Nd1 225, 226; Nd2 s. v.; J i.22 (of a lion), 66, 506; Miln 17; Vism 104, 128, 290, 396; DhA i.9; iv.17; VvA 6; PvA 141; Sdhp 604. Irubbeda
Irubbeda
the Rig -- veda Dpvs v.62 (iruveda); Miln 178; DA i.247; SnA 447. Illiyā
Illiyā
(f.) [fr. illī, cp. Sk. *īlikā] = illī J v.259; vi.50. Illī
Illī
(f.) [cp. Vedic ilībiśa Np. of a demon] a sort of weapon, a short one -- edged sword J v.259. Illīyituŋ
Illīyituŋ
v. l. for allīyituŋ at J v.154. Iva
Iva
(indecl.) [Vedic iva & va] part. of comparison: like, as Dh 1, 2, 7, 8, 287, 334; J i.295; SnA 12 ( = opamma -- vacanaŋ). Elided to 'va, diaeretic -- metathetic form viya (q. v.). -- 123 -- Isi
Isi
[Vedic ṛṣi fr. ṛṣ. -- Voc. ise Sn 1025; pl. npm. isayo, gen. isinaŋ S ii.280 & isīnaŋ S i.192; etc. inst. isibhi Th 1, 1065] -- 1. a holy man, one gifted with special powers of insight & inspiration, an anchoret, a Seer, Sage, Saint, "Master" D i.96 (kaṇho isi ahosi); S i.33, 35, 65, 128, 191, 192, 226 sq., 236 (ācāro isīnaŋ); ii.280 (dhammo isinaŋ dhajo); A ii.24, 51; Vin iv.15 = 22 (˚bhāsito dhammo); It 123; Sn 284, 458, 979, 689, 691, 1008, 1025, 1043, 1044, 1116 (dev˚ divine Seer), 1126, Nd2 149 (isi -- nāmakā ye keci isi -- pabbajjaŋ pabbajitā ājīvikā nigaṇṭhā jaṭilā tāpasā); Dh 281; J i.17 (v.90: isayo n' atthi me samā of Buddha); J v.140 (˚gaṇa), 266, 267 (isi Gotamo); Pv ii.614 (= yama -- niyam' ādīnaŋ esanatthena isayo PvA 98); ii.133 (= jhān' ādīnaŋ guṇānaŋ esanatthena isi PvA 163); iv.73 (= asekkhānaŋ sīlakkhandh' ādīnaŋ esanatthena isiŋ PvA 265); Miln 19 (˚vāta) 248 (˚bhattika); DA i.266 (gen. isino); Sdhp 200, 384. See also mahesi. -- 2. (in brahmanic tradition) the ten (divinely) inspired singers or composers of the Vedic hymns (brāhmaṇānaŋ pubbakā isayo mantānaŋ kattāro pavattāro), whose names are given at Vin i. 245; D i.104, 238; A iii.224, iv.61 as follows: Aṭṭhaka, Vāmaka, Vāmadeva, Vessāmitta, Yamataggi (Yamadaggi), Angirasa, Bhāradvāja, Vāseṭṭha, Kassapa, Bhagu.

-- nisabha the first (lit. "bull") among Saints, Ep. of the Buddha Sn 698; Vv 167 (cp. VvA 82). -- pabbajjā the (holy) life of an anchoret Vism 123; DhA i.105; iv.55; PvA 162. -- vāta the wind of a Saint Miln 19; Vism 18. -- sattama the 7th of the great Sages (i. e. Gotama Buddha, as 7th in the sequence of Vipassin, Sikhin, Vessabhu, Kakusandha, Koṇāgamana & Kassapa Buddhas) M i.386; S i.192; Sn 356; Th 1, 1240 ( = Bhagavā isi ca sattamo ca uttamaṭṭhena SnA 351); Vv 211 (= buddha -- isinaŋ Vipassi -- ādīnaŋ sattamo VvA 105). Isikā (isīkā)
Isikā
(isīkā) (f.) [Sk. iṣīkā] a reed D i.77, cp. DA i.222; J vi.67 (isikā). Isitta
Isitta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. isi] rishi -- ship D i.104 ( = isi -- bhāva DA i.274). Issati
Issati
[denom. fr. issā. Av. areṣyeiti to be jealous, Gr. e)/ratai to desire; connected also with Sk. arṣati fr. ṛṣ to flow, Lat. erro; & Sk. irasyati to be angry = Gr. *)/arhs God of war, a)rh\; Ags. eorsian to be angry] to bear ill-will, to be angry, to envy J iii.7; ppr. med. issamānaka Sdhp 89, f. ˚ikā A ii.203. -- pp. issita (q. v.). Issattha
Issattha
(nt. m.) [cp. Sk. iṣvastra nt. bow, fr. iṣu ( = P. usu) an arrow + as to throw. Cp. P. issāsa. -- Bdhgh. in a strange way dissects it as "usuñ ca satthañ cā ti vuttaŋ hoti" (i. e. usu arrow + sattha sword, knife) SnA 466] -- 1. (nt.) archery (as means of livelihood & occupation) M i.85; iii.1; S i.100 (so read with v. l.; T. has issatta, C. explns. by usu -- sippaŋ K. S. p. 318); Sn 617 (˚ŋ upajīvati = āvudha jīvikaŋ SnA 466); J vi.81; Sdhp 390. -- 2. (m.) an archer Miln 250, 305, 352, 418. Issatthaka
Issatthaka
[issattha + ka] an archer Miln 419. Issara
Issara
[Vedic īśvara, from īś to have power, cp. also P. īsa] lord, ruler, master, chief A iv.90; Sn 552; J i.89 (˚jana), 100, 283 (˚bheri); iv.132 (˚jana); Pv iv.67 (˚mada); Miln 253 (an˚ without a ruler); DhsA 141; DA i.111; PvA 31 (gehassa issarā); Sdhp 348, 431. -- 2. creative deity, Brahmā, D iii.28; M ii.222 = A i.173; Vism 598. Issariya
Issariya
[fr. issara] rulership, mastership, supremacy, domi- nion (Syn. ādhipacca) D iii.190; S i.43, 100 (˚mada); v.342 (issariy -- âdhipacca); A i.62 (˚ādhipacca); ii.205, 249; iii.38; iv.263; Sn 112; Dh 73; Ud 18; Ps ii.171, 176; J i.156; v.443; DhA ii.73; VvA 126 (for ādhipacca) PvA 42, 117, 137 (for ādhipacca); Sdhp 418, 583. Issariyatā
Issariyatā
(f.) [fr. issariya] mastership, lordship Sdhp 422. Issā
Issā1
(f.) [Sk. īrṣyā to Sk. irin forceful, irasyati to be angry, Lat. īra anger, Gr. *)/arhs God of war; Ags. eorsian to be angry. See also issati] jealousy, anger, envy, ill -- will D ii.277 (˚macchariya); iii.44 (id.); M i.15; S ii.260; A i.95, 105 (˚mala), 299; ii.203; iv.8 (˚saññojana), 148, 349, 465; v.42 sq., 156, 310; Sn 110; J v.90 (˚âvatiṇṇa); Pv ii.37; Vv 155; Pug 19, 23; Vbh 380, 391; Dhs 1121, 1131, 1460; Vism 470 (def.); PvA 24, 46, 87; DhA ii.76; Miln 155; Sdhp 313, 510.

-- pakata overcome by envy, of an envious nature S ii.260; Miln 155; PvA 31. See remarks under apakata & pakata. Issā
Issā2
(f.) [cp. Sk. ṛśya -- mṛga] in issammiga ( = issāmiga) J v.410, & issāmiga J v.431, a species of antelope, cp. J v.425 issāsinga the antlers of this antelope. Issāyanā
Issāyanā
(& Issāyitatta) [abstr. formations fr. issā] = issā Pug 19, 23; Dhs 1121; Vism 470. Issāsa
Issāsa
[Sk. iṣvāsa, see issattha] an archer Vin iv.124; M iii.1; A iv.423 (issāso vā issās' antevāsī vā); J ii.87; iv.494; Miln 232; DA i.156. Issāsin
Issāsin
[Sk. iṣvāsa in meaning "bow" + in] an archer, lit. one having a bow J iv.494 ( = issāsa C.). Issita
Issita
[pp. of īrṣ (see issati); Sk. īrṣita] being envied or scolded, giving offence or causing anger J v.44. Issukin
Issukin
(adj.) [fr. issā, Sk. īrṣyu + ka + in] envious, jealous Vin ii.89 (+ maccharin); D iii.45, 246; M i.43, 96; S iv.241; A iii.140, 335; iv.2; Dh 262; J iii.259; Pv. ii.34; Pug 19, 23; DhA iii.389; PvA 174. See also an˚. Iha
Iha
(indecl.) [Sk. iha; form iha is rare in Pāli, the usual form is idha (q. v.)] adv. of place "here" Sn 460. -- Ī. Īgha
Īgha
(?) [doubtful as to origin & etym. since only found in cpd. anīgha & abs. only in exegetical literature. If genuine, it should belong to ṛgh Sk. ṛghāyati to tremble, rage etc. See discussed under nigha1] confusion, rage, badness SnA 590 (in expln of anigha). Usually as an˚ (or anigha), e. g. J iii.343 ( = niddukkha C.); v.343. Īti & Ītī
Īti
& Ītī (f.) [Sk. īti, of doubtful origin] ill, calamity, plague, distress, often combb. with & substituted for upaddava, cp. BSk. ītay' opadrava (attack of plague) Divy 119. -> Sn 51; J i.27 (v.189); v.401 = upaddava; Nd1 381; Nd2 48, 636 (+ upaddava = santāpa); Miln 152, 274, 418. -- anīti sound condition, health, safety A iv.238; Miln 323. Ītika
Ītika
(adj.) [fr. īti] connected or affected with ill or harm, only in neg. an˚ . Ītiha
Ītiha
a doublet of itiha, only found in neg. an˚. Īdisa
Īdisa
(adj.) [Sk. īdṛs, ī + dṛś, lit. so -- looking] such like, such DhsA 400 (f. ˚ī); PvA 50, (id.) 51. Īriṇa
Īriṇa
(nt.) [ = iriṇa, q. v. & cp. Sk. īriṇa] barren soil, desert D i.248; A v.156 sq.; J v.70 (= sukkha -- kantāra C.); vi.560; VvA 334. Īrita
Īrita
[pp. of īreti, Caus. of īr, see iriyati] -- 1. set in motion, stirred, moved, shaken Vv 394 (vāt'erita moved by the wind); J i.32 (id.); Vv 6420 (haday'erita); Pv ii.123 (malut'erita); PvA 156 (has erita for ī˚); VvA 177 ( = calita). -- 2. uttered, proclaimed, said Dāvs v.12. -- 124 -- Īsa
Īsa
[fr. iś to have power, perf. īśe = Goth. aih; cp. Sk. īśvara = P. issara, & BSk. īśa, e. g. Jtm 3181] lord, owner, ruler J iv.209 (of a black lion = kāḷa -- sīha C.); VvA 168. f. īsī see mahesī a chief queen. Cp. also mahesakkha. Īsaka
Īsaka
[dimin. of īsā] a pole J ii.152; vi.456 (˚agga the top of a pole). Īsakaŋ
Īsakaŋ
(adv.) [nt. of īsaka] a little, slightly, easily M i. 450; J i.77; vi.456; DA i.252, 310; VvA 36; Vism 136, 137, 231, īsakam pi even a little Vism 106; Sdhp 586. Īsā
Īsā
(f.) [Vedic īṣā] the pole of a plough or of a carriage S i.104 (nangal' īsā read with v. l. for nangala -- sīsā T.), 172, 224 (˚mukha): A iv.191 (rath˚); Sn 77; J i.203 (˚mukha); iv.209; Ud 42; Miln 27; SnA 146; VvA 269 (˚mūlaŋ = rathassa uro).

-- danta having teeth (tusks) as long as a plough -- pole (of an elephant) Vin i.352; M i.414; Vv 209 = 439 (= ratha -- īsā -- sadisa -- danto); J vi.490 = 515. Īsāka
Īsāka
(adj.) [fr. īsā] having a pole (said of a carriage) J vi.252. Īhati
Īhati
[Vedic īh, cp. Av. īžā ardour, eagerness, āziš greed] to endeavour, attempt, strive after Vin iii.268 (Bdhgh.) J vi.518 (cp. Kern, Toev. p. 112); DA i.139; VvA 35. Īhā
Īhā
(f.) [fr. īh] exertion, endeavour, activity, only in adj. nir -- īha void of activity Miln 413. -- U. U
U
the sound or syllable u, expld. by Bdhgh at Vism 495 as expressing origin ( = ud). Ukkaŋsa
Ukkaŋsa
[fr. ud + kṛṣ see ukkassati] exaltation, excellence, superiority (opp. avakkaŋsa) D i.54 (ukkaŋs -- âvakkaŋsa = hāyana -- vaḍḍhana DA i.165); M i.518; Vism 563 (id.); VvA 146 (˚gata excellent), 335 (instr. ukkaŋsena par excellence, exceedingly); PvA 228 (˚vasena, with ref. to devatās; v. l. SS okk˚). Ukkaŋsaka
Ukkaŋsaka
(adj.) [fr. ukkaŋsa] raising, exalting (oneself), extolling M i.19 (att˚; opp. para -- vambhin); J ii.152. Cp. sāmukkaŋsika. Ukkaŋsati
Ukkaŋsati
[ud + kṛṣ, karṣati, lit. draw or up, raise] to exalt, praise M i.498; J iv.108. -- pp. ukkaṭṭha. -- ukkaŋseti in same meaning M i.402 sq. (attānaŋ u. paraŋ vambheti); A ii.27; Nd2 141. Ukkaŋsanā
Ukkaŋsanā
(f.) [abstr. of ukkaŋsati] raising, extolling, exaltation, in att˚ self -- exaltation, self -- praise M i.402 (opp. para -- vambhanā); Nd2 505 (id.). Ukkaṭṭha
Ukkaṭṭha
(adj.) [pp. of ukkaŋsati] -- 1. exalted, high, prominent, glorious, excellent, most freq. opp. to hīna, in phrase hīna -- m -- ukkaṭṭha -- majjhime Vin iv.7; J i.20 (v.129), 22 (v.143); iii.218 ( = uttama C.). In other combn. at Vism 64 (u. majjhima mudu referring to the 3 grades of the Dhutangas); SnA 160 (dvipadā sabbasattānaŋ ukkaṭṭhā); VvA 105 (superl. ukkaṭṭhatama with ref. to Gotama as the most exalted of the 7 Rishis); Sdhp 506 (opp. lāmaka). -- 2. large, comprehensive, great, in ukkaṭṭho patto a bowl of great capacity (as diff. from majjhima & omaka p.) Vin iii.243 (= uk. nāma patto aḍḍhālhak' odanaŋ gaṇhāti catu -- bhāgaŋ khādanaŋ vā tadūpiyaŋ vā byañjanaŋ). -- 3. detailed, exhaustive, specialised Vism 37 (ati -- ukkaṭṭha -- desanā); also in phrase ˚vasena in detail SnA 181. -- 4. arrogant, insolent J v. 16. -- 5. used as nom at J i.387 in meaning "battle, conflict". -- an˚ Vism 64 (˚cīvara).

-- niddesa exhaustive exposition, special designation, term par excellence DhsA 70; VvA 231; PvA 7. -- pariccheda comprehensive connotation SnA 229, 231, 376. Ukkaṭṭhatā
Ukkaṭṭhatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. ukkaṭṭha] superiority, eminence, exalted state J iv.303 (opp. hīnatā). Ukkaṭṭhita
Ukkaṭṭhita
[for ukkaṭhita, ud + pp. of kvath, see kaṭhati & kuthati] boiled up, boiling, seething A iii.231 & 234 (udapatto agginā santatto ukkaṭṭhito, v. l. ukkuṭṭhito); J iv.118 (v. l. pakkudhita = pakkuṭhita, as gloss). Ukkaṇṭhati
Ukkaṇṭhati
[fr. ud + kaṇṭh in secondary meaning of kaṇṭha neck, lit. to stretch one's neck for anything; i. e. long for, be hungry after, etc.] to long for, to be dissatisfied, to fret J i.386 (˚māna); iii.143 (˚itvā); iv.3, 160; v.10 (anukkhaṇṭhanto); DhsA 407; PvA 162 (mā ukkaṇṭhi, v. l. ukkaṇhi, so read for T. mā khuṇḍali). -- pp. ukkaṇṭhita (q. v.). Cp. pari˚. Ukkaṇṭhanā
Ukkaṇṭhanā
(f.) [fr. ukkaṇṭhati] emotion, commotion D ii.239. Ukkaṇṭhā
Ukkaṇṭhā
(f.) [fr. ukkanṭḥ˚] longing, desire; distress, regret Nett 88; PvA 55 (spelt kkh), 60, 145, 152. Ukkaṇṭhi
Ukkaṇṭhi
(f.) [fr. ukkanṭḥ˚] longing, dissatisfaction ThA 239 ( = arati). Ukkaṇṭhikā
Ukkaṇṭhikā
(f.) [abstr. fr. ukkaṇṭhita] = ukkaṇṭhi, i. e. longing, state of distress, pain J iii.643. Ukkaṇṭhita
Ukkaṇṭhita
[pp. of ukkaṇṭhati] dissatisfied, regretting, longing, fretting J i.196; ii.92, 115; iii.185; Miln 281; DhA iv.66, 225; PvA 13 (an˚), 55, 187. Ukkaṇṇa
Ukkaṇṇa
(adj.) [ud + kaṇṇa] having the ears erect (?) J vi.559. Ukkaṇṇaka
Ukkaṇṇaka
(ad.) [ut + kaṇṇa + ka lit. "with ears out" or is it ukkandaka?] a certain disease (? mange) of jackals, S ii.230, 271; S. A. ʻ the fur falls off from the whole body ʼ. Ukkantati
Ukkantati
[ud + kantati] to cut out, tear out, skin Vin i.217 (˚itva); J i.164; iv.210 (v. l. for okk˚); v.10 (ger. ukkacca); Pv iii.94 (ukkantvā, v. l. BB ukkacca); PvA 210 (v. l. SS ni˚), 211 ( = chinditvā). Ukkapiṇḍaka
Ukkapiṇḍaka
[etymology unknown] only in pl.; vermin, Vin i.211 = 239. See comment at Vin. Texts ii.70. Ukkantikaŋ
Ukkantikaŋ
(nt. adv.), in jhān˚ & kasiṇ˚, after the method of stepping away from or skipping Vism 374. Ukkamati
Ukkamati
(or okk˚ which is v. l. at all passages quoted) [ud + kamati from kram ] to step aside, step out from (w. abl.), depart from A iii.301 (maggā); J iii.531; iv. 101 (maggā); Ud 13 (id.); DA i.185 (id.). Caus. ukkāmeti; Caus. II. ukkamāpeti J ii.3. Ukkamana
Ukkamana
(nt.) [fr. ukkamati] stepping away from Vism 374. Ukkala
Ukkala
in phrase ukkala -- vassa -- bhañña S iii.73 = A ii.31 = Kvu 141 is trsld. as "the folk of Ukkala, Lenten speakers of old" (see Kvu trsl. 95 with n. 2). Another interpretation is ukkalāvassa˚, i. e. ukkalā + avassa˚ [*avaśya˚], one who speaks of, or like, a porter (ukkala = Sk utkala porter, one who carries a load) and bondsman M iii.78 reads Okkalā (v. l. Ukkalā) -- Vassa -- Bhaññā, all as N. pr. Ukkalāpa
Ukkalāpa
see uklāpa. -- 125 -- Ukkalissati
Ukkalissati
[ = ukkilissati? ud + kilissati] to become depraved, to revoke(?) Miln 143. Ukkā
Ukkā
(f.) [Vedic ulkā & ulkuṣī, cp. Gr. a)/flac ( = lamprw_s torch Hesychius), velxa/nos (= Volcanus); Lat. Volcanus, Oir. Olcān, Idg. *ṷI̊q to be fiery] 1. firebrand, glow of fire, torch D i.49, 108; S ii.264; Th 2, 488 (˚ûpama); J i.34 (dhamm -- okkā); ii.401; iv.291; v.322; Vism 428; ThA 287; DA i.148; DhA i.42, 205; PvA 154. Esp. as tiṇ˚ firebrand of dry grass M i.128, 365; Nd2 40Ie; DhA i.126; Sdhp 573. -- 2. a furnace or forge of a smith A i.210, 257; J vi.437; see also below ˚mukha. -> 3. a meteor: see below ˚pāta.

-- dhāra a torch -- bearer Sn 335; It 108; Miln 1. -- pāta "falling of a firebrand", a meteor D i.10 ( = ākāsato ukkānaŋ patanaŋ DA i.95); J i.374; vi.476; Miln 178. -- mukha the opening or receiver of a furnace, a goldsmith's smelting pot A i.257; J vi.217 (= kammārɔuddhana C.), 574; Sn 686; DhA ii.250. Ukkācanā
Ukkācanā
(f.) [fr. ukkāceti, ud + *kāc, see ukkācita] en- lightening, clearing up, instruction Vbh 352 (in def. of lapanā, v. l. ˚kāpanā). Note Kern, Toev. s. v. compares Vism p. 115 & Sk. uddīpana in same sense. Def. at Vism 27 ( = uddīpanā). Ukkācita
Ukkācita
[pp. either to *kāc to shine or to kāceti denom. fr. kāca1] enlightened, made bright (fig.) or cleaned, cleared up A i.72, 286 (˚vinīta parisā enlightened & trained). Ukkāceti
Ukkāceti
[according to Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 112 a denom. fr. kāca2 a carrying pole, although the idea of a bucket is somewhat removed from that of a pole] to bale out water, to empty by means of buckets J ii.70 (v. l. ussiñcati). Ukkāmeti
Ukkāmeti
[Caus. of ukkamati] to cause to step aside J vi.11. Ukkāra
Ukkāra
[fr. ud + kṛ "do out"] dung, excrement J iv.485, otherwise only in cpd. ukkāra -- bhūmi dung -- hill J i.5, 146 (so read for ukkar˚), ii.40; iii.16, 75, 377; iv.72, 305; Vism 196 (˚ûpama kuṇapa); DhA iii.208. Cp. uccāra. Ukkāsati
Ukkāsati
[ud + kāsati of kas to cough] to "ahem"! to cough, to clear one's throat Vin ii.222; iv.16; M ii.4; A v.65; aor. ukkāsi J i.161, 217. -- pp. ukkāsita. Ukkāsikā
Ukkāsikā
(f.?) [doubtful] at Vin ii.106 is not clear. Vin Texts iii.68 leave it untranslated. Bdhgh's expln. is vattavaṭṭi (patta˚? a leaf? Cp. S iii.141), prob. = vaṭṭi (Sk. varti a kind of pad). See details given by Morris J.P.T.S. 1887, 113, who trsls. "rubber, a kind of pad or roll of cotton with which the delicate bather could rub himself without too much friction". Ukkāsita
Ukkāsita
[pp. of ukkāsati] coughed, clearing one's throat, coughed out, hawking D i.89; Bu i.52 (+ khipita) -> ˚sadda the noise of clearing the throat D i.50; J i.119; DhA i.250 (+ khipita˚). Ukkiṇṇa
Ukkiṇṇa
[pp. of ud + kṛ dig2] dug up or out D i.105; J iv.106; Miln 330; DA i.274 ( = khāta). Ukkiledeti
Ukkiledeti
[Caus. of ud + klid, see kilijjati] to take the dirt out, to clean out DA i.255 (dosaŋ); SnA 274 (rāgaŋ; v. l. BB. uggileti). Ukkujja
Ukkujja
(adj.) [ud + kujja] set up, upright, opp. either nikkujja or avakujja A i.131; S v.89 (ukkujjɔâvakujja); Pug 32 ( = uparimukho ṭhapito C. 214). Ukkujjati
Ukkujjati
(˚eti) [Denom. fr. ukkujja] to bend up, turn up, set upright Vin i.181; ii.126 (pattaŋ), 269 (bhikkhuŋ); mostly in phrase nikkujjitaŋ ukkujjeyya "(like) one might raise up one who has fallen" D i.85, 110; ii.132, 152; Sn p. 15 ( = uparimukhaŋ karoti DA i.228 = SnA 155). Ukkujjana
Ukkujjana
(nt.) [fr. ukkujjati] raising up, setting up again Vin ii.126 (patt˚). Ukkuṭika
Ukkuṭika
[fr. ud + *kuṭ = *kuñc, as in kuṭila & kuñcita; lit. "bending up". The BSk. form is ukkuṭuka, e. g. Av. S i.315] a special manner of squatting. The soles of the feet are firmly on the ground, the man sinks down, the heels slightly rising as he does so, until the thighs rest on the calves, and the hams are about six inches or more from the ground. Then with elbows on knees he balances himself. Few Europeans can adopt this posture, & none (save miners) can maintain it with comfort, as the calf muscles upset the balance. Indians find it easy, & when the palms of the hands are also held together upwards, it indicates submission. See Dial. i.231 n. 4. -- Vin i.45 (˚ŋ nisīdati); iii.228; A i.296; ii.206; Pug 55; Vism 62, 104, 105 (quot. fr. Papañca Sūdanī) 426; DhA i.201, 217; ii.61 (as posture of humility); iii.195; iv.223.

-- padhāna [in BSk. distorted to utkuṭuka -- prahāṇa Divy 339 = Dh 141] exertion when squatting (an ascetic habit) D i.167; M i.78, 515; A i.296; ii.206; J i.493; iii.235; iv.299; Dh 141 (= ukkuṭika -- bhāvena āraddha -- viriyo DhA iii.78). Ukkuṭṭhi
Ukkuṭṭhi
(f.) [fr. ud + kruś, cp. *kruñc as in P. kuñca & Sk. krośati] shouting out, acclamation J ii.367; vi.41; Bu i.35; Miln 21; Vism 245; DhA ii.43; VvA 132 (˚sadda). Ukkusa
Ukkusa
[see ukkuṭṭhi & cp. BSk. utkrośa watchman (?) Divy 453] an osprey J iv.291 (˚rāja), 392. Ukkūla
Ukkūla
(adj.) [ud + kūla] sloping up, steep, high (opp. vikkūla) A i.35 sq.; Vism 153 (nadi); SnA 42. Cp. utkūlanikūla -- sama Lal. V. 340. Ukkoṭana
Ukkoṭana
(nt.) [fr. ud + *kuṭ to be crooked or to deceive, cp. kujja & kuṭila crooked] crookedness, perverting justice, taking bribes to get people into unlawful possessions (Bdhgh.) D i.5; iii.176; S v.473; A ii.209, v.206; DA i.79 = Pug A 240 ("assāmike sāmike kātuŋ lañcagahaṇaŋ"). Ukkoṭanaka
Ukkoṭanaka
(adj.) [fr. ukkoṭana] belonging to the perversion of justice Vin ii.94. Ukkoṭeti
Ukkoṭeti
[denom. fr. *ukkoṭ -- ana] to disturb what is settled, to open up again a legal question that has been adjudged, Vin ii.94, 303; iv.126; J ii.387; DA i.5. Ukkhali
Ukkhali
(˚lī) (f.) [der. fr. Vedic ukha & ukhā pot, boiler; related to Lat. aulla (fr. *auxla); Goth. auhns oven] a pot in which to boil rice (& other food) J i.68, 235; v. 389, 471; Pug 33; Vism 346 (˚mukhavaṭṭi), 356 (˚kapāla, in comp.); DhA i.136; ii.5; iii.371; iv.130; Pug A 231; VvA 100. Cp. next. Ukkhalikā
Ukkhalikā
(f.) = ukkhali. Th 2, 23 (= bhatta -- pacana- bhājanaŋ ThA 29); DhA iv.98 (˚kāla); DhsA 376. Ukkhā
Ukkhā(?)
[can it be compared with Vedic ukṣan?] in ukkha- sataŋ dānaŋ, given at various times of the day (meaning = e(kato/mbh?) S ii.264 (v. l. ukkā). Or is it to be read ukhāsataŋ d. i. e. consisting of 100 pots (of rice = mahā danaŋ?). S A: paṇītabhojana -- bharitānaŋ mahā -- ukkhalinaŋ sataŋ dānaŋ. Cp. ukhā cooking vessel ThA 71 (Ap. v.38). Kern, Toev. under ukkhā trsl. "zeker muntstuck", i. e. kind of gift. Ukkhita
Ukkhita
[pp. of ukṣ sprinkle] besmeared, besprinkled J iv.331 (ruhir˚, so read for ˚rakkhita). Cp. okkhita. Ukkhitta
Ukkhitta
[pp. of ukkhipati] taken up, lifted up, t.t. of the canon law "suspended" Vin iv.218; J iii.487.

-- ˚āsika with drawn sword M i.377; S iv.173; J i.393; DhsA 329; Vism 230 (vadhaka), 479. -- paligha having the obstacles removed M i.139; A iii.84; Dh 398 = Sn 622 (= avijjā -- palighassa ukkhittatāya u. SnA 467 = DhA iv.161). -- sira with uplifted head Vism 162. Ukkhittaka
Ukkhittaka
(adj. -- n.) [fr. ukkhitta] a bhikkbu who has been suspended Vin i.97, 121; ii.61, 173, 213. Ukkhipati
Ukkhipati
[ut + khipati, kṣip]. To hold up, to take up J i.213; iv.391: vi.350; Vism 4 (satthaŋ); PvA 265. A t. t. of canon law, to suspend (a bhikkhu for breach of rules) Vin iv.309; Pug 33. -- ukkhipiyati to be suspended Vin ii.61. Caus. II. ukkhipāpeti to cause to be supported J i.52; ii.15, 38; iii.285, 436. -- pp. ukkhitta, ger. ukkhipitvā as adv. "upright" Vism 126. -- 126 -- Ukkhipana
Ukkhipana
(nt.) [fr. ud + kṣip] 1. pushing upwards J i.163. -- 2. throwing up, sneering Vism 29 (vācāya). Ukkheṭita
Ukkheṭita
[pp. of ud + kheṭ or *khel, see kheḷa] spit out, thrown off, in phrase moho (rāgo etc) catto vanto mutto pahino paṭinissaṭṭho u. Vin iii.97 = iv.27. Ukkhepa
Ukkhepa
(adj. -- n.) [fr. ud + kṣip] (adj.) throwing away DhA iv.59 (˚dāya a throw -- away donation, tip). -- (m.) lifting up raising J i.394 (cel˚); vi.508; DA i.273; dur˚ hard to lift or raise Sdhp 347. Ukkhepaka
Ukkhepaka
(adj.) [fr. ukkhepa] throwing (up); ˚ŋ (acc.) in the manner of throwing Vin ii.214 = iv.195 (piṇḍ˚). Ukkhepana
Ukkhepana
(nt.) [fr. ud + kṣip] suspension J iii.487. Ukkhepanā
Ukkhepanā
(f.) [ = last] throwing up, provocation, sneering Vbh 352 = Vism 23, expld. at p. 29. Ukkhepaniya
Ukkhepaniya
(adj.) [ukkhepana + iya, cp. BSk. utkṣepa- nīyaŋ karma Divy 329] referring to the suspension (of a bhikkhu), ˚kamma act or resolution of suspension Vin i.49, 53, 98, 143, 168; ii.27, 226, 230, 298: A i.99. Uklāpa (ukkalāpa)
Uklāpa
(ukkalāpa) (adj.) [cp. Sk. ut -- kalāpayati to let go] - 1. deserted J ii.275 (ukkalāpa T.; vv. ll. uklāpa & ullāpa). -- 2. dirtied, soiled Vin ii.154, 208, 222; Vism 128; DhA iii.168 (ukkalāpa). Ugga
Ugga1
(adj.) [Vedic ugra, from ukṣati, weak base of vakṣ as in vakṣana, vakṣayati = Gr. a)ve/cw, Goth. wahsjan "to wax", also Lat. augeo & P. oja] mighty, huge, strong, fierce, grave, m. a mighty or great person, noble lord D i.103; S i.51 = VvA 116 (uggateja "the fiery heat"); J iv.496; v.452 (˚teja); vi.490 (+ rājaputtā, expld. with etymologising effort as uggatā paññātā by C.); Miln 331; DhA ii.57 (˚tapa); Sdhp 286 (˚daṇḍa), 304 (id.). -> Cp. sam˚. As Np. at Vism 233 & J i.94.

-- putta a nobleman, mighty lord S i.185 ("high born warrior" trsl.); J vi.353 ( = amacca -- putta C.); Th 1, 1210. Ugga
Ugga2
= uggamana, in aruṇ -- ugga sunrise Vin iv.272. Uggacchati
Uggacchati
[ud + gam] to rise, get up out of (lit. & fig.) Th 1, 181; aruṇe uggacchante at sunrise VvA 75; Pv iv.8; Vism 43, ger. uggañchitvāna Miln 376. -- pp. uggata (q. v.). Uggajjati
Uggajjati
[ud + gajjati] to shout out Nd1 172. Uggaṇhāti
Uggaṇhāti
[ud + gṛh, see gaṇhāti] to take up, acquire, learn [cp. BSk. udgṛhṇāti in same sense, e. g. Divy 18, 77 etc.] Sn 912 (uggahaṇanta = uggahaṇanti = uggaṇhanti SnA 561); imper. uggaṇha J ii.30 (sippaŋ) & uggaṇhāhi Miln 10 (mantāni); ger. uggayha Sn 832, 845; Nd1 173. -- Caus. uggaheti in same meaning Sdhp 520; aor. uggahesi Pv iii.54 (nakkhatta -- yogaŋ = akari PvA 198); ger. uggahetvā J v.282, VvA 98 (vipassanākammaṭṭhānaŋ); infin. uggahetuŋ VvA 138 (sippaŋ to study a craft). -- Caus. II. uggaṇhāpeti to instruct J v. 217; vi.353. -- pp. uggahita (q. v.). See also uggahāyati. -- A peculiar ppr. med. is uggāhamāna going or wanting to learn DA i 32 (cp. uggāhaka). Uggata
Uggata
[pp. of uggacchati] come out, risen; high, lofty, exalted J iv.213 (suriya), 296 (˚atta), 490; v.244; Pv iv.14 (˚atta one who has risen = uggata -- sabhāva samiddha PvA 220); VvA 217 (˚mānasa); DA i.248; PvA 68 (˚phāsuka with ribs come out or showing, i. e. emaciated, for upphāsulika). Cp. acc˚. Uggatta
Uggatta
in all Pv. readings is to be read uttatta˚, thus at Pv iii.32; PvA 10, 188. Uggatthana
Uggatthana
at J vi.590 means a kind of ornament or trinket, it should prob. be read ugghaṭṭana [fr. ghaṭṭeti] lit. "tinkling", i. e. a bangle. Uggama
Uggama
[fr. ud + gam; Sk. udgama] rising up Sdhp 594. Uggamana
Uggamana
(˚na) (nt.) [fr. ud + gam] going up, rising; rise (of sun & stars) D i.10, 240; S ii.268 (suriy˚); J iv.321 (an˚), 388; Pv ii.941 (suriy˚); DA i.95 ( = udayana); DhA i.165 (aruṇ˚); ii.6 (id.); VvA 326 (oggaman˚); PvA 109 (aruṇ˚). Cp. ugga2 & uggama. Uggaha
Uggaha
(adj) ( -- ˚) [fr. ud + gṛh, see gaṇhāti] -- 1. taking up, acquiring, learning Vism 96 (ācariy˚), 99 (˚paripucchā), 277 (kananaṭṭhānassa). -- 2. noticing, taking notice, perception (as opp. to manasikāra) Vism 125, 241 sq. neg. an˚ Sn 912 ( = gaṇhāti Nd1 330). Cp. dhanuggaha. Uggahaṇa
Uggahaṇa
(nt.) [fr. uggaṇhāti] learning, taking up, studying PvA 3 (sipp˚). As uggaṇhana at Vism 277. Uggahāyati
Uggahāyati
[poetic form of uggaheti (see uggaṇhati), but according to Kern, Toev. s. v. representing Ved. udgṛbhāyati] to take hold of, to take up Sn 791 ( = gaṇhāti Nd1 91). -- ger. uggahāya Sn 837. Uggahita
Uggahita
[pp. of uggaṇhāti] taken up, taken, acquired Vin i.212; J iii.168 (˚sippa, adj.), 325; iv.220; vi 76; Vism 241. The metric form is uggahīta at Sn 795, 833, 1098; Nd1 175 = Nd2 152 (= gahita parāmaṭṭha). Uggahetar
Uggahetar
[n. ag. to ugganhāti, Caus. uggaheti] one who takes up, acquires or learns A iv.196. Uggāra
Uggāra
[ud + gṛ or *g&lcircle; to swallow, see gala & gilati; lit. to swallow up] spitting out, vomiting, ejection Vism 54; DA i.41; KhA 61. Uggāhaka
Uggāhaka
(adj. -- n.) [fr. ud + gṛh, see uggaṇhāti] one who is eager to learn J v.148 [cp. M Vastu iii.373 ogrāhaka in same context]. Uggāhamāna
Uggāhamāna
see uggaṇhāti. Uggirati
Uggirati1
[Sk. udgirati, ud + gṛ2; but BSk. udgirati in meaning to sing, chant, utter, formation fr. gṛ2 instead of gṛ1, pres. gṛṇāti; in giraŋ udgirati Jtm 3126. -- The by -- form uggirati is uggilati with interchange of I̊ and ṛ, roots *gr̥ & *gI̊, see gala & gilati] to vomit up ("swallow up") to spit out Ud 14 (uggiritvāna); DA i.41 (uggāraŋ uggiranto). Cp. BSk. prodgīrṇa cast out Divy 589. Uggirati
Uggirati2
[cp. Sk. udgurate, ud + gur] to lift up, carry Vin iv.147 = DhA iii.50 (talasattikaŋ expld. by uccāreti); J i.150 (āvudhāni); vi.460, 472. Cp. sam˚. Uggilati
Uggilati
= uggirati1, i. e. to spit out (opp. ogilati) M i.393; S iv.323; J iii.529; Miln 5; PvA 283. Uggīva
Uggīva
(nt.) [ud + gīva] a neckband to hold a basket hanging down J vi.562 (uggīvañ cɔâpi aŋsato = aŋsakūṭe pacchi -- lagganakaŋ C.). Ugghaŋseti
Ugghaŋseti
[ud + ghṛṣ, see ghaŋsati1] to rub Vin ii.106. - pp. ugghaṭṭha (q. v.). Ugghaṭita
Ugghaṭita
(adj.) [pp. of ud + ghaṭati; cp. BSk. udghaṭaka skilled Divy 3, 26 and phrase at M Vastu iii.260 udghaṭitajña] striving, exerting oneself; keen, eager in cpd. ˚ññū of quick understanding A ii.135; Pug 41; Nett 7 -- 9, 125; DA i.291. Ugghaṭeti
Ugghaṭeti
[ud + ghaṭati] to open, reveal (? so Hardy in Index to Nett) Nett 9; ugghaṭiyati & ugghaṭanā ibid. Ugghaṭṭa (Ugghaṭṭha?)
Ugghaṭṭa
(Ugghaṭṭha?) [should be pp. of ugghaŋsati = Sk. udghṛṣṭa, see ghaŋsati1, but taken by Bdhgh. either as pp. of or an adj. der. fr. ghaṭṭ, see ghaṭṭeti] knocked, crushed, rubbed against, only in phrase ughaṭṭa -- pāda foot -- sore Sn 980 (= maggakkamaṇena ghaṭṭa -- pādatala etc. SnA 582); J iv.20 (ṭṭh; expld. by uṇha -- vālukāya ghaṭṭapāda); v.69 (= raj okiṇṇa -- pāda C. not to the point). -- 127 -- Uggharati
Uggharati
[ud + kṣar] to ooze Th 1, 394 = DhA iii.117. Ugghāṭana
Ugghāṭana
(nt.?) [fr. ugghāṭeti] that which can be removed, in ˚kiṭikā a curtain to be drawn aside Vin ii.153 (cp. Vin Texts iii.174, 176). Ch s. v. gives "rope & bucket of a well" as meaning (kavāṭaŋ anugghāṭeti). Cp. ugghaṭanā . Ugghāṭita
Ugghāṭita
[pp. of ugghāṭeti] opened Miln 55; DhA i.134. Ugghāṭeti
Ugghāṭeti
[for ugghaṭṭeti, ud + ghaṭṭ but BSk. udghāṭayati Divy 130] to remove, take away, unfasten, abolish, put an end to Vin ii.148 (tālāni), 208 (ghaṭikaŋ); iv.37; J ii.31; vi.68; Miln 140 (bhava -- paṭisandhiŋ), 371; Vism 374. -- Caus. II. ugghāṭāpeti to have opened J v.381. Ugghāta
Ugghāta
[ud + ghāta] shaking, jolting; jolt, jerk Vin ii. 276 (yān˚); J vi.253 (an˚); DhA iii.283 (yān˚). Ugghāti
Ugghāti
(f.) [fr. ud + ghāta] -- 1. shaking, shock VvA 36. -- 2. striking, conquering; victory, combd. with nighāti Sn 828; Nd1 167; SnA 541; Nett 110 (T. reads ugghāta˚). Ugghātita
Ugghātita
[pp. of ugghāteti, denom. fr. udghāta] struck, killed A iii.68. Ugghosanā
Ugghosanā
(f.) [abstr. fr. ugghoseti, cp. ghosanā] procla- mation DA i.310. Ugghoseti
Ugghoseti
[ud + ghoseti] to shout out, announce, proclaim J i.75; DhA ii.94; PvA 127. Ucca
Ucca
(adj.) [For udya, adj. formation from prep. ud above, up] high (opp. avaca low) D i.194; M ii.213; A v.82 (˚ṭhāniyaŋ nīce ṭhāne ṭhapeti puts on a low place which ought to be placed high); Pv iv.74 (uccaŋ paggayha lifting high up = uccataraŋ katvā PvA 265); Pug 52, 58; DA i.135; PvA 176.

-- âvaca high and low, various, manifold Vin i.70, 203; J iv.115, 363 ( = mahaggha -- samaggha C. p. 366); Sn 703, 714, 792, 959; Dh 83; Nd1 93, 467; Vv 121 (= vividha VvA 60); 311. -- kulīnatā high birth A iii.48 (cp. uccā˚). Uccaka
Uccaka
(adj.) [fr. ucca] high Vin ii.149 (āsandikā a kind of high chair). Uccatta
Uccatta
(nt.) [fr. ucca = Sk. uccatvaŋ] height J iii.318. Uccaya
Uccaya
[fr. ud + ci, see cināti; Sk. uccaya] heaping up, heap, pile, accumulation Dh 115, 191, 192; Vv 4711; 827 ( = cetiya VvA 321); DhA iii.5, 9; DhsA 41 (pāpassa). -- siluccaya a mountain Th 1, 692; J i.29 (v.209); vi.272, 278; Dāvs V.63. Uccā
Uccā
(˚ -- ) (adv.) [cp. Sk. uccā, instr. sg. of uccaŋ, cp. paścā behind, as well as uccaiḥ instr. pl. -- In BSk. we find ucca˚ (uccakulīna Av. Ś iii.117) as well as uccaŋ (uccaŋgama Divy 476). It is in all cases restricted to cpds.] high (lit. & fig.), raised, in foll. cpds.

-- kaṇerukā a tall female elephant M i.178. -- kāḷārikā id. M i.178 (v. l. ˚kaḷārikā to be preferred). -- kula a high, noble family Pv iii.116 ( = uccā khattiya -- kul -- âdino PvA 176). -- kulīnatā birth in a high -- class family, high rank M iii.37; VvA 32. -- sadda a loud noise D i.143, 178; A iii.30. -- sayana a high bed (+ mahāsayana) Vin i. 192; D i.5, 7; cp. DA i.78. Uccāra
Uccāra
[Ud + car] discharge, excrement, faeces Vin iii.36 (˚ŋ gacchati to go to stool); iv.265, 266 (uccāro nāma gūtho vuccati); DhA ii.56 (˚karaṇa defecation); uccārapassāva faeces & urine D i.70; M i.83; J i.5; ii.19. Uccāranā
Uccāranā
(f.) [fr. uccāreti] lifting up, raising Vin iii.121. Uccārita
Uccārita
[pp. of uccāreti] -- 1. uttered, let out PvA 280 (akkharāni). -- 2. lifted, raised ThA 255. Uccāreti
Uccāreti
[ud + cāreti, Caus. of car] to lift up, raise aloft Vin iii.81; iv.147 = DhA iii.50; M i.135. -- pp. uccārita (q. v.). Uccālinga
Uccālinga
[etym.?] a maw -- worm Vin iii.38, 112; J ii.146. Uccināti
Uccināti
[ud + cināti] to select, choose, search, gather, pick out or up Vin i.73; ii.285 (aor. uccini); J iv.9; Pv iii.2 4 (nantake = gavesana -- vasena gahetvāna PvA 185); Dpvs iv.2. Ucchanga
Ucchanga
[Sk. utsanga, ts > cch like Sk. utsahate > BSk. ucchahate see ussahati] the hip, the lap Vin i.225; M i. 366; A i.130 (˚pañña); J i.5, 308; ii.412; iii.22; iv.38, 151; Pug 31; Vism 279; DhA ii.72. Ucchādana
Ucchādana
(nt.) [ut + sād, Caus. of sad, sīdati, cp. ussada] rubbing the limbs, anointing the body with perfumes shampooing D i.7, 76; at the latter passage in combn. anicc˚ -- dhamma, of the body, meaning "erosion, decay", and combd. with parimaddana abrasion (see about detail of meaning Dial. i.87); thus in same formula at M i. 500; S iv.83; J i.146 & passim; A i.62; ii.70 (+ nahāpana); iv.54, 386; It 111; Th 2, 89 (nahāpan˚); Miln 241 (˚parimaddana) 315 (+ nahāpana); DA i.88. Ucchādeti
Ucchādeti
[fr. ut + sād, see ucchādana] to rub the body with perfumes J vi.298; Miln 241 (+ parimaddati nahāpeti); DA i.88. Ucchiṭṭha
Ucchiṭṭha
[pp. of ud + śiṣ] left, left over, rejected, thrown out; impure, vile Vin ii.115 (˚odakaŋ); iv.266 (id.); J ii.83 (bhattaŋ ucchiṭṭhaŋ akatvā), 126 (˚nadī impure; also itthi outcast), 363; iv.386 (˚ŋ piṇḍaŋ), 388; vi.508; Miln 315; DhA i.52; ii.85; iii.208; PvA 80 ( = chaḍḍita), 173 (˚bhattaŋ). At J iv.433 read ucch˚ for ucciṭṭha. -- an˚ not touched or thrown away (of food) J iii.257; DhA ii.3. -- See also uttiṭṭha & ucchepaka. Ucchiṭṭhaka
Ucchiṭṭhaka
(fr. ucchiṭṭha) = ucchiṭṭha J iv.386; vi.63, 509. Ucchindati
Ucchindati
[ud + chid, see chindati] to break up, destroy, annihilate S v.432 (bhavataṇhaŋ), A iv.17 (fut. ucchecchāmi to be read with v. l. for T. ucchejjissāmi); Sn 2 (pret. udacchida), 208 (ger. ucchijja); J v.383; Dh 285. -> Pass. ucchijjati to be destroyed or annihilated, to cease to exist S iv.309; J v.242, 467; Miln 192; PvA 63, 130 ( = na pavattati), 253 (= natthi). -- pp. ucchinna (q. v.). Ucchinna
Ucchinna
[pp. of ucchindati] broken up, destroyed S iii. 10; A v.32; Sn 746. Cp. sam˚. Ucchu
Ucchu
[Sk. cp. Vedic Np. Ikṣvāku fr. ikṣu] sugar -- cane Vin iv.35; A iii.76; iv.279; Miln 46; DhA iv.199 (˚ūnaŋ yanta sugar -- cane mill), PvA 257, 260; VvA 124.

-- agga (ucch˚) top of s. c. Vism 172. -- khaṇḍikā a bit of sugar -- cane Vv 3326. -- khādana eating s. c. Vism 70. -- khetta sugar -- cane field J i.339; VvA 256. -- gaṇṭhikā a kind of sugar -- cane, Batatas Paniculata J i.339; vi.114 (so read for ˚ghaṭika). -- pāla watchman of s. -- c. VvA 256. -- pīḷana, cane -- pressing, Asl. 274. -- puṭa sugar -- cane basket J iv.363. -- bīja seed of s. -- c. A i.32; v.213. -- yantra a sugar -- mill J i.339. -- rasa s. -- c. juice Vin i.246; Vism 489; VvA 180 -- vāta, Asl. 274. -- sālā, Asl. 274. Uccheda
Uccheda
[fr. ud + chid, chind, see ucchindati & cp. cheda] breaking up, disintegration, perishing (of the soul) Vin iii.2 (either after this life, or after kāmadeva life, or after brahmadeva life) D i.34, 55; S iv.323; Nd1 324; Miln 413; Nett 95, 112, 160; DA i.120.

-- diṭṭhi the doctrine of the annihilation (of the soul), as opp. to sassata -- or atta -- diṭṭhi (the continuance of the soul after death) S ii.20; iii.99, 110 sq; Ps i.150, 158; Nd1 248 (opp. sassati˚); Dhs 1316; Nett 40, 127; SnA 523 (opp. atta˚). -- vāda (adj.) one who professes the doctrine of annihilation (ucchedadiṭṭhi) Vin i.235; iii.2; D i.34, 55; S ii.18; iv.401; A iv.174, 182 sq.; Nd1 282; Pug 38. -- vādin = ˚vāda Nett 111; J v.244. -- 128 -- Ucchedana
Ucchedana
(adj.) [fr. ud + chid] cutting off, destroying; f. ˚anī J v.16 (surā). Ucchedin
Ucchedin
(adj.) an adherent of the ucchedavāda J v.241. Ucchepaka
Ucchepaka
(nt.) [ = ucchiṭṭhaka in sense of ucchiṭṭha- bhatta] leavings of food M ii.7 (v. l. uccepaka with cc for cch as ucciṭṭha: ucchiṭṭha). The passage is to be read ucchepake va te ratā. A diff. connotation would be implied by taking ucchepaka = uñchā, as Neumann does (Majjhima trsl.2 ii.682). Uju & Ujju
Uju
& Ujju (adj.) [Vedic ṛju, also ṛjyati, irajyate to stretch out: cp. Gr. o) re/gw to stretch; Lat. rego to govern; Goth. ufrakjan to straighten up; Ohg. recchen = Ger. recken = E. reach; Oir. rēn span. See also P. ajjava] straight, direct; straightforward, honest, upright D iii.150 T. ujja), 352 (do.) 422, 550; Vv 187 (= sabba -- jimha -- vanka -- kuṭilabhāvɔâpagama -- hetutāya u. VvA 96); Pug 59; Vbh 244 (ujuŋ kāyaŋ paṇidhāya); Vism 219 (uju avanka akuṭila); DA i.210 (id.), KhA 236; DhA i.288 (cittaŋ ujuŋ akuṭilaŋ nibbisevanaŋ karoti); VvA 281 (˚koṭi -- vanka); PvA 123 (an˚).

-- angin (ujjangin) having straight limbs, neg. an˚ not having straight limbs, i. e. pliable, skilful, nimble, graceful J v.40 ( = kañcana -- sannibha -- sarīra C.); vi.500 (T. anuccangin = anindita -- agarahitangin C.). -- gata walking straight, of upright life M i.46; A iii.285 sq. (˚citta); v.290 sq.; Sn 350 (ujju˚), 477 (id.); Dh 108 (ujju˚, see DhA ii.234 for interpretation). -- gāmin, neg. an˚ going crooked, a snake J iv.330. -- cittatā straightness, unwieldiness of heart Vbh 350. -- diṭṭhitā the fact of having a straightforward view or theory (of life) Miln 257. -- paṭipanna living uprightly D i.192; S iv.304; v.343; Vism 219. -- magga the straight road D i.235; Vin v.149; It 104; J i.344; vi.252; DhA ii.192. -- bhāva straightness, uprightness SnA 292, 317; PvA 51. -- bhūta straight, upright S i.100, 170; ii.279; v.384, 404; A ii.57; iv.292; J i.94; v.293 (an˚); Vv 3423 (see VvA 155); Pv i.1010 (= citta -- jimha -- vankaKutīla -- bhāva -- karānaŋ kilesānaŋ abhāvena ujubhāvappatta PvA 51). -- vaŋsa straight lineage, direct descendency J v.251. -- vāta a soft wind Miln 283. -- vipaccanīka in direct opposition D i.1; M i.402; DA i.38. Ujuka & Ujjuka
Ujuka
& Ujjuka (adj.) [uju + ka] straight, direct, upright M i.124; S i.33 (ujuko so maggo, the road to Nibbāna), 260 (citta); iv.298; v.143, 165; J i.163; v.297 (opp. khujja); DhA i.18 (˚magga); Sdhp 321. -- anujjuka crooked, not straight S iv.299; J iii.318. Ujukatā
Ujukatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. ujuka] straightness, rectitude Dhs 50, 51 (kāyassa, cittassa); Vism 436 sq. Ujutā
Ujutā
(f.) [abstr. of uju] straight(forward)ness, rectitude Dhs 50, 51. Ujjagghati
Ujjagghati
[ud + jagghati] to laugh at, deride, mock, make fun of Vin iii.128; Th 2, 74 (spelt jjh = hasati ThA 78); A iii.91 (ujjh˚, v. l. ujj˚) = Pug 67 (= pāṇiŋ paharitvā mahāhasitaŋ hasati Pug A 249). Ujjangala
Ujjangala
[ud + jangala] hard, barren soil; a very sandy and deserted place D ii.146 (˚nagaraka, trsl. "town in the midst of a jungle", cp. Dial. ii.161); J i.391; Vv 855 ( = ukkaŋsena jangala i. e. exceedingly dusty or sandy, dry); Pv ii.970 (spelt ujjhangala, expld. by ativiya -- thaddhabhūmibhāga at PvA 139); Vism 107. Also in BSk. ujjangala, e. g. M Vastu ii.207. Ujjala
Ujjala
(adj.) [ud + jval, see jalati] blazing, flashing; bright, beautiful J i.220; Dāvs ii.63. Ujjalati
Ujjalati
[ud + jalati, jval] to blaze up, shine forth Vin i.31; VvA 161 (+ jotati). -- Caus. ujjāleti to make shine, to kindle Vin i.31; Miln 259; Vism 428; ThA 69 (Ap. v.14, read dīpāŋ ujjālayiŋ); VvA 51 (padīpaŋ). Ujjava
Ujjava
(adj.) [ud + java] "running up", in cpd. ujjav -- ujjava a certain term in the art of spinning or weaving Vin iv. 300, expld. by "yattakaŋ patthena (patthana?) añcitaŋ hoti tasmi takkamhi vedhite". Ujjavati
Ujjavati
[ud + javati] to go up -- stream Vin ii.301. Ujjavanikāya
Ujjavanikāya
instr. fem. of ujjavanaka used as adv. [ud + javanaka, q. v.] up -- stream, lit "running up" Vin ii.290; iv.65 (in expln. of uddhaŋgāmin, opp. ojavanikāya). Ujjahati
Ujjahati
[ud + jahati] to give up, let go; imper. ujjaha S i.188; Th 2, 19; Sn 342. Ujju & Ujjuka
Ujju
& Ujjuka see uju & ujuka. Ujjota
Ujjota
[ud + *jot of jotati, Sk. uddyotate] light, lustre J i.183 (˚kara); Miln 321. Ujjotita
Ujjotita
[pp. of ujjoteti, ud + joteti] illumined Dāvs v.53. Ujjhaggati
Ujjhaggati
see ujjagghati. Ujjhaggikā
Ujjhaggikā
(f.) [fr. ujjagghati, spelling varies] loud laughter Vin ii.213, cp. iv.187. Ujjhati
Ujjhati
[Sk. ujjhati, ujjh] -- 1. to forsake, leave, give up J vi.138; Dāvs ii.86. -- 2. to sweep or brush away J vi.296. -- pp. ujjhita (q. v.). Ujjhatti
Ujjhatti
(f.) [fr. ud + jhāyati1, corresponding to a Sk. *ud -- dhyāti] irritation, discontent A iv.223, 467 (v. l. ujj˚); cp. ujjhāna. Ujjhāna
Ujjhāna
(nt.) [ud + jhāna1 or jhāna2?] -- 1. taking offence, captiousness Dh 253 ( = paresaŋ randha -- gavesitāya DhA iii.377); Miln 352 (an˚ -- bahula). -- 2. complaining, wailing J iv.287.

-- saññin, -- saññika irritable S i.23; Th 1, 958; Vin ii.214, cp. iv.194; Dpvs ii.6; DhA iii.376 (˚saññitā irritability). Ujjhāpana
Ujjhāpana
(nt.) [fr. ud + jhāyati1 or jhāyati2 to burn, to which jhāpeti to bring to ruin etc.? cp. ujjhāna] stirring up, provoking J v.91 (devat˚), 94 (˚kamma). Ujjhāpanaka
Ujjhāpanaka
(adj.) [fr. ujjhāpana] one who stirs up an- other to discontent Vin iv.38. Ujjhāpeti
Ujjhāpeti
[Caus. of ujjhāyati] to harass, vex, irritate M i. 126; S i.209 ("give occasion for offence"); Vin iv.38 (cp. p. 356); J v.286; PvA 266. Ujjhāyati
Ujjhāyati
[ud + jhāyati1 or perhaps more likely jhāyati2 to burn, fig. to be consumed. According to Müller P. G. pp. 12 & 42 = Sk. ava -- dhyā, but that is doubtful phonetically as well as semantically] to be irritated, to be annoyed or offended, to get angry, grumble; often in phrase ujjhāyati khīyati vipāceti expressing great annoyance Vin i.53, 62, 73; ii.207; iv.226; S i.232 & passim. -- S i.232 (mā ujjhāyittha); J ii.15; DhA ii.20; aor. ujjhāyi J i.475; DhA ii.88; inf. ujjhātuŋ J ii.355. -> Caus. ujjhāpeti (q. v.). Ujjhita
Ujjhita
[pp. of ujjhati] destitute, forsaken; thrown out, cast away M i.296 (+ avakkhitta); Th 1, 315 (itthi); 2, 386 (cp. ThA 256 vātakkhitto viya yo koci dahano); Dh 58 ( = chaḍḍita of sweepings DhA i.445); J iii.499; v.302; vi.51. Uñcha & Uñchā
Uñcha
& Uñchā (f.) [Sk. uñcha & uñchana, to uñch. Neu- mann's etym. uñchā = E. ounce, Ger. unze (Majjhima trsl.2 ii.682) is incorrect, see Walde Lat. Wtb. under uncia] anything gathered for sustenance, gleaning S ii. 281; A i.36; iii.66 sq., 104; Vin iii.87; Sn 977; Th 2, 329, 349; J iii.389; iv.23, 28, 434, 471 (˚ya, dat. = phalâphalɔatthāya C.); ThA 235, 242. Cp. samuñchaka.

-- cariyā wandering for, or on search for gleaning, J ii.272; iii.37, 515; v.3; DA i.270; VvA 103; ThA 208. -- cārika (adj.) going about after gleanings, one of 8 kinds of tāpasā SnA 295 (cp. DA i.270, 271). -- patta the gleaning -- bowl, in phrase uñchāpattāgate rato "fond of that which has come into the gl. b." Th 1, 155 = Pv iv.73 (= uñchena bhikkhācārena laddhe pattagate āhāre rato PvA 265; trsld. in Psalms of Brethren "contented with whatever fills the bowl"). aññāt˚, marked off as discarded (goods) S ii.281, so S A. -- 129 -- Uñchati
Uñchati
[fr. uñch] to gather for sustenance, seek (alms), glean Vism 60 ( = gavesati). Uññā
Uññā
(f.) [ = avaññā (?) from ava + jñā, or after uññā- tabba?] contempt Vin iv.241; Vbh 353 sq. (att˚). Uññātabba
Uññātabba
(adj.) [grd. fr. ava + jñā (?)] to be despised, contemptible, only in stock -- phrase "daharo na uṇṇātabbo na paribhotabbo" S i.69; Sn p. 93; SnA 424 ( = na avajānitabbo, na nīcaŋ katvā jānitabbo ti). In same connection at J v.63 mā naŋ daharo [ti] uññāsi (v. l. maññāsi) apucchitvāna (v. l. ā˚). Uṭṭitvā
Uṭṭitvā
at Vin ii.131 is doubtful reading (see p. 318, v. l. uḍḍhetvā), and should perhaps be read uḍḍetvā ( = oḍḍetva, see uḍḍeti), meaning "putting into a sling, tying or binding up". Uṭṭepaka
Uṭṭepaka
one who scares away (or catches?) crows (kāk˚) Vin i.79 (vv. ll. uṭṭhe˚, uḍḍe˚, uḍe˚). See remarks on uṭṭepeti. Uṭṭepeti
Uṭṭepeti
in phrase kāke u. "to scare crows away" (or to catch them in snares?) at Vin i.79. Reading doubtful & should probably be read uḍḍepeti (? Caus. of uḍḍeti = oḍḍeti, or of uḍḍeti to make fly away). The vv. ll. given to this passage are uṭṭeceti, upaṭṭhāpeti, uḍḍoyeti. See also uṭṭepaka. Uṭṭhapana
Uṭṭhapana
see vo˚. Uṭṭhahati & Uṭṭhāti
Uṭṭhahati
& Uṭṭhāti [ud + sthā see tiṭṭhati & uttiṭṭhati] to rise, stand up, get up, to arise, to be produced, to rouse or exert oneself, to be active, pres. uṭṭhahati Pug 51. -- pot. uṭṭhaheyya S i.217; as imper. uttiṭṭhe Dh 168 (expld. by uttiṭṭhitvā paresaŋ gharadvāre ṭhatvā DhA iii.165, cp. Vin Texts i.152). -- imper. 2nd pl. uṭṭhahatha Sn 331; 2nd sg. uṭṭhehi Pv ii.61; J iv.433. -- ppr. uṭṭhahanto M i.86; S i.217; J i.476. -- aor. uṭṭhahi J i.117; PvA 75. -- ger. uṭṭhahitvā PvA 4, 43, 55, 152, & uṭṭhāya Sn 401. -- inf. uṭṭhātuŋ J i.187. -> Note. When uṭṭh˚ follows a word ending in a vowel, and without a pause in the sense, a v is generally prefixed for euphony, e. g. gabbho vuṭṭhāsi an embryo was produced or arose Vin ii.278; āsanā vuṭṭhāya arising from his seat, Vism 126. See also under vuṭṭhahati. -- pp. uṭṭhita; Caus. uṭṭhāpeti. -- Cp. pariyuṭṭhāti. Uṭṭhahāna
Uṭṭhahāna
[ppr. of uṭṭhahati] exerting oneself, rousing one- self; an˚ sluggish, lazy Dh 280 ( = ayāyāmanto DhA iii. 409); cp. anuṭṭhahaŋ S i.217. Uṭṭhātar
Uṭṭhātar
[n. ag. of ut + ṣṭhā, see uṭṭhahati] one who gets up or rouses himself, one who shows energy S i.214; A iv.285, 288, 322; Sn 187; J vi.297. -- an˚ one who is without energy S i.217; Sn 96. Uṭṭhāna
Uṭṭhāna
(nt.) [fr. ut + ṣṭhā] -- 1. rising, rise, getting up, standing (opp. sayana & nisīdana lying or sitting down) D ii.134 (sīha -- seyyaŋ kappesi uṭṭhāna -- saññaŋ manasikaritvā); Dh 280 (˚kāla); J i.392 (an˚ -- seyyā a bed from which one cannot get up); Vism 73 (aruṇ -- uṭṭhānavelā time of sunrise) DhA i.17. -- 2. rise, origin, occasion or oppertunity for; as adj. ( -- ˚) producing J i.47 (kapp˚); vi.459; Miln 326 (dhaññ˚ khettaŋ atthi). -- 3. "rousing", exertion, energy, zeal, activity, manly vigour, industry, often syn. with viriya M i.86; A i.94; ii.135 (˚phala); iii.45 (˚viriya), 311; iv.281 (˚sampadā); It 66 (˚adhigataŋ dhanaŋ earned by industry); Pv iv.324; Pug 51 (˚phala); Miln 344, 416; ThA 267 (˚viriya); PvA 129 (+ viriya). -- an˚ want of energy, sluggishness A iv.195; Dh 241. -> Note. The form vuṭṭhāna appears for uṭṭh˚ after a vowel under the same conditions as vuṭṭhahati for uṭṭhahati (q. v.) gabbha -- vuṭṭhānaŋ J i.114. See also vuṭṭh˚, and cp. pariy˚. Uṭṭhānaka
Uṭṭhānaka
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. uṭṭhāna] -- 1. giving rise to yielding (revenue), producing J i.377, 420 (satasahass˚); iii. 229 (id.); v.44 (id.). Cp. uṭṭhāyika. -- 2. energetic J vi.246. Uṭṭhānavant
Uṭṭhānavant
(adj.) [uṭṭhāna + vant] strenuous, active Dh 24. Uṭṭhāpeti
Uṭṭhāpeti
[Caus. ii. of utthahati] -- 1. to make rise, only in phrase aruṇaŋ (suriyaŋ) u. to let the sun rise, i. e. wait for sunrise or to go on till sunrise J i.318; vi.330; Vism 71, 73 (aruṇaŋ). -- 2. to raise J vi.32 (paṭhaviŋ). -> 3. to fit up J vi.445 (nāvaŋ). -- 4. to exalt, praise DA i.256. -- 5. to turn a person out DhA iv.69. -- See also vuṭṭhāpeti. Uṭṭhāyaka
Uṭṭhāyaka
(adj.) [adj. formation fr. uṭṭhāya, ger. of uṭṭha- hati] "getting -- up -- ish", i. e. ready to get up, quick, alert, active, industrious; f. ˚ikā Th 2, 413 ( = uṭṭhāna -- viriyasampannā ThA 267; v. l. uṭṭhāhikā) Uṭṭhāyika
Uṭṭhāyika
(adj.) [ = uṭṭhānaka] yielding, producing J ii.403 (satasahass˚). Uṭṭhāyin
Uṭṭhāyin
(adj.) [adj. form. fr. uṭṭhāya, cp. uṭṭhāyaka] getting up D i.60 (pubb˚ + pacchā -- nipātin rising early & lying down late). Uṭṭhāhaka
Uṭṭhāhaka
(adj.) [for uṭṭhāyaka after analogy of gāhaka etc.] = uṭṭhāyaka J v.448; f. ˚ikā A iii.38 (v. l. ˚āyikā); iv.266 sq. Uṭṭhita
Uṭṭhita
[pp. of uṭṭhahati] -- 1. risen, got up Pv ii.941 (kāl˚); Vism 73. -- 2. arisen, produced J i.36; Miln 155. -- 3. striving, exerting oneself, active J ii.61; Dh 168; Miln 213. -- an˚ S ii.264; Ps i.172. -- Cp. pariy˚. -> Note. The form is vuṭṭhita when following upon a vowel; see vuṭṭhita & uṭṭhahati, e. g. paṭisallāṇā vutthito arisen from the seclusion D ii.9; pāto vuṭṭhito risen early PvA 128. Uḍḍayhana
Uḍḍayhana
(nt.) [fr. uḍḍayhati, see uddahati] burning up, conflagration Pug 13 (˚velā = jhāyana -- kālo Pug A 187); KhA 181 (T. uḍḍahanavelā, v. l. preferable uḍḍayh˚). Uḍḍahati
Uḍḍahati
[ud + ḍahati] to burn up (intrs.) KhA 181 (uḍḍaheyya with v. l. uḍḍayheyya, the latter preferable). Usually in Pass. uḍḍayhati to be burnt, to burn up (intrs.) S iii.149, 150 (v. l. for ḍayhati); J iii.22 (udayhate); v.194. fut. uḍḍayhissati J i.48. Uḍḍita
Uḍḍita
[pp. of uḍḍeti2] ensnared (?), bound, tied up S i.40 ( = taṇhāya ullanghita C.; trsld. "the world is all strung up"). Uḍḍeti
Uḍḍeti1
[ud + ḍeti to fly. The etym. is doubtful, Müller P. Gr. 99 identifies uḍḍeti1 & uḍḍeti2 both as causatives to ḍī. Of uḍḍeti2 two forms exist, uḍḍ˚ & oḍḍ˚, the latter of which may be a variant of the former, but with specialisation of meaning ("lay snares"), it may be a cpd. with ava˚ instead of ud˚. It is extremely doubtful whether uḍḍeti2 belongs here, we should rather separate it & refer it to another root, probably lī, layate (as in allīna, nilīyati etc.), to stick to, adhere, fasten etc. The change l > ḍ is a freq. Pāli phenomenon. Another Caus. II. of the same root (ḍī?) is uṭṭepeti] to fly up M i.364 (kāko maŋsapesiŋ ādāya uḍḍayeyya; vv. ll. ubbaḍaheyya, uyya, dayeyya); J v.256, 368, 417. Uḍḍeti
Uḍḍeti2
[see discussion under uḍḍeti1] (a) to bind up, tie up to, string up Vin ii.131 (so read for uṭṭitvā, v. l. uḍḍhetvā). -- (b) to throw away, reject PvA 256 (+ chaḍḍayāmi gloss). -- pp. uḍḍita. Uḍḍha
Uḍḍha
( -- ˚) (num. ord.) [the apocope form of catuttha = uttha, dialectically reduced to uḍḍha under the influence of the preceding aḍḍha] the fourth, only in cpd. aḍḍhuḍḍha "half of the fourth unit", i. e. three & a half (cp. diyaḍḍha 1 1/2 and aḍḍha -- teyya 2 1/2) J v.417 sq. (˚āni itthisahassāni); Mhvs xii.53. -- 130 -- Uṇṇa
Uṇṇa
(nt.) & Uṇṇā (f.) [Sk. ūrṇa & ūrṇā; Lat. lāna wool; Goth. wulla; Ohg. wolla = E. wool; Lith. vilna; Cymr. gwlan (= E. flannel); Gr. lh_nos, also ou_) los = Lat. vellus (fleece) = Ags. wil -- mod] -- 1. wool A iii.37 = iv.265 (+ kappāsā cotton) J ii.147; SnA 263 (patt˚). -- 2. hair between the eyebrows Sn 1022, & in stock phrase, describing one of the 32 signs of a Mahāpurisa, bhamukɔantare jātā uṇṇā odātā etc. D ii.18 = iii.144 = 170 = SnA 285. Also at Vism 552 in jāti -- uṇṇāya.

-- ja in uṇṇaja mukha J vi.218, meaning "rounded, swelling" (C. expls. by kañcanɔādāso viya paripuṇṇaŋ mukhaŋ). -- nābhi (either uṇṇa˚ or uṇṇā, cp. Vedic ūrṇavābhi, ūrṇa + vābhi from Idg. *ṷebh to weave as in Lat. vespa = wasp, of which shorter root in Sk. vā) a spider, lit. "wool -- i. e. thread -- weaver", only in combn. with sarabū & mūsikā at Vin ii.110 = A ii.73 = J ii.147 (= makkaṭaka C). Uṇṇata
Uṇṇata
(adj.) [pp. of uṇṇamati, Sk. unnata] raised, high, fig. haughty (opp. oṇata) A ii.86; Sn 702 (an˚ care = uddhaccaŋ nɔāpajjeyya SnA 492); Pug 52 (= ucca uggata Pug A 229). Cp. unnata. Uṇṇati
Uṇṇati
(f.) [fr. uṇṇamati] haughtiness Sn 830; Nd1 158, 170; Dhs 1116, 1233. Cp. unnati. Uṇṇama
Uṇṇama
[fr. uṇṇamati] loftiness, height, haughtiness Dhs 1116, 1233. Cp. unnama . Uṇṇamati
Uṇṇamati
[ud + nam] to rise up, to be raised, to straighten up, to be haughty or conceited Sn 366, 829, 928; Nd1 169; J vi.346 inf. uṇṇametave Sn 206. Cp. unnamati. Uṇṇī
Uṇṇī
(f.) [Sk. aurṇī fr. aurṇa woollen, der. of ūrṇa] a woollen dress Vin ii.108. Uṇha
Uṇha
(adj. -- n.) [Vedic uṣṇā f. to oṣati to burn, pp. uṣṭa burnt, Sk. uṣṇa = Lat. ustus; cp. Gr. eu)/w, Lat. uro to burn, Ags. ysla glowing cinders, Lith. usnis nettle] hot, as adj. only in phrase uṇhaŋ lohitaŋ chaḍḍeti to spill hot blood, i. e. to kill oneself DhA i.95; otherwise in cpds.; abs. only as nt. "heat" & always in contrast to sītaŋ "cold" Vin ii.117 (sītena pi uṇhena pi); D ii.15 (opp. sīta); M i.85; A i.145 = 170 = J v.417 (sītaŋ vā uṇhaŋ vā tiṇaŋ vā rajo vā ussāvo vā); Sn 52, 966 (acc ˚); Nd1 486 = Nd2 677 (same as under sita); J i.17 (v.93); Miln 410 (megho uṇhaŋ nibbāpeti); PvA 37 (ati˚).

-- ākāra appearance of heat, often in phrase (Sakkassa) paṇḍu -- kambala -- silɔāsanaŋ uṇhākāraŋ dassesi, of Sakka's throne showing an appearance of heat as a sign of some extraordinary event happening in the world, e. g. J i.330; v.92; DhA i.17, and passim. -- odaka hot water VvA 68. -- kalla glowing -- hot embers or ashes J ii.94 (so read for ˚kalala); iv.389 (˚vassa, rain of hot ashes, v. l. ˚kukkuḷavassa). -- kāla hot weather Vin ii.209. Uṇhatta
Uṇhatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. uṇha] hot state, heat Vism 171. Uṇhīsa
Uṇhīsa
[Sk. uṣṇīṣa] a turban D i.7; ii.19 = iii.145 (˚sīsa cp. Dial. ii.16); J ii.88; Miln 330; DA i.89; DhsA 198. Ut(t)aṇḍa
Ut(t)aṇḍa
see uddaṇḍa. Utu
Utu
(m. & nt.) [Vedic ṛtu special or proper time, with adj. ṛta straight, right, rite, ṛti manner to Lat. ars "art", Gr. damar(t), further Lat. rītus (rite), Ags. rīm number; of *ar to fit in, adjust etc. q. v. under appeti] -- 1. (lit.) (a) (good or proper) time, season: aruṇa -- utu occasion or time of the sun( -- rise) DhA i.165; utuŋ gaṇhāti to watch for the right time (in horoscopic practice), to prognosticate ibid. sarīraŋ utuŋ gaṇhāpeti "to cause the body to take season", i. e. to refresh the body by cool, sleep, washing etc. J iii.527; DA i.252. -- (b) yearly change, time of the year, season Vism 128. There are usually three seasons mentioned, viz. the hot, rainy and wintry season or gimha, vassa & hemanta A iv.138; SnA 317. Six seasons (in connection with nakkhatta) at J v.330 & vi.524. Often utu is to be understood, as in hemantikena (scil. utunā) in the wintry season S v.51. -- (c) the menses SnA 317; J v.330 (utusinātāya read utusi nhātāya; utusi loc., as expld. by C. pupphe uppanne utumhi nahātāya). -- 2. (applied in a philosophical sense: one of the five fold cosmic order, physical change, physical law of causation (opp. kamma), physical order: see Asl. 272 f.; Dialogues, II, 8, n.; Kvu trsln. 207; cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Buddhism, p. 119 f., Cpd. 161, Dhs trsln. introd. xvii; & cp. cpds. So in connection with kamma at Vism 451, 614; J vi.105 (kamma -- paccayena utunā samuṭṭhitā Veraraṇī); perhaps also at Miln 410 (megha ututo samuṭṭhahitvā).

-- āhāra physical nutriment (cp. Dhs trsln. 174) PvA 148. -- ûpasevanā seasonable activity, pursuit (of activities) according to the seasons, observance of the seasons Sn 249 ( = gimhe ātapa -- ṭṭhāna -- sevanā vasse rukkha -- mūla -- sevanā hemante jalappavesa -- sevanā SnA 291). -- kāla seasonable, favourable time (of the year) Vin i.299; ii.173. -- ja produced by the seasons or by physical change Miln 268 (kamma˚, hetu˚, utu˚); Vism 451. -- nibbatta coming to existence through physical causes Miln 268. -- pamāṇa measure of the season, i. e. the exact season Vin i.95. -- pariṇāma change (adversity) of the season (as cause of disease) S iv.230; A ii.87; iii.131; v.110; Miln 112, 304; Vism 31. -- parissaya danger or risk of the seasons A iii.388. -- pubba festival on the eve of each of the (6) seasons J vi.524. -- vāra time of the season, ˚vārena ˚vārena according to the turn of the season J i.58. -- vikāra change of season Vism 262. -- veramanī abstinence during the time of menstruaīion Sn 291 (cp. SnA 317). -- saŋvacchara the year or cycle of the seasons, pl. ˚ā the seasons D iii.85 = A ii.75; S v.442. The phrase utusaŋvaccharāni at Pv ii.955 is by Dhammapāla taken as a bahuvrīhi cpd., viz. cycles of seasons & of years, i. e. vasanta -- gimh ādike bahū utū ca citta -- saŋvaccharɔadi bahūni saŋvaccharāni ca PvA 135. Similarly at J v.330 (with Cy). -- sappāya suitable to the season, seasonable DhA 327. -- samaya time of the menses SnA 317. Utuka
Utuka
( -- ˚) (adj.) [utu + ka] seasonable, only in cpd. sabb- otuka belonging to all seasons, perennial D ii.179; Pv iv. 122 ( = pupphupaga -- rukkhādīhi sabbesu utūsu sukkhāvaha PvA 275); Sdhp 248. Utunī
Utunī
(f.) [formed fr. utu like bhikkhunī fr. bhikkhu] a menstruating woman Vin iii.18; iv.303; S iv.239; A iii. 221, 229; Miln 127. an˚ A iii.221, 226. Utta
Utta
[pp. of vac, Sk. ukta; for which the usual form is vutta only as dur˚ speaking badly or spoken of badly, i. e. of bad repute A ii.117, 143; iii.163; Kh viii.2; KhA 218. Uttaṇḍāla
Uttaṇḍāla
(adj.) [ud + taṇḍula] "grainy", i. e. having too many rice grains (of rice gruel), too thick or solid (opp. atikilinna too thin or liquid) J i.340; iii.383 (id.); iv.44 (id.). Uttatta
Uttatta
[ud + tatta1, pp. of ud + tap, Sk. uttapta] heated; of metals: molten, refined; shining, splendid, pure J vi. 574 (hemaŋ uttattaŋ agginā); Vv 8417; Pv iii.32 (˚rūpa, so read for uggata˚, reading correct at PvA 188 ˚singī); PvA 10 (˚kanaka, T. uggatta˚); Mhbv 25 (id.). Uttanta
Uttanta
[ = utrasta, is reading correct?] frightened, faint Vin iii.84. See uttasta & utrasta. Uttama
Uttama
(adj.) [superl. of ud˚, to which compar. is uttara. See etym. under ud˚] "ut -- most", highest, greatest, best Sn 1054 (dhammaŋ uttamaŋ the highest ideal = Nibbāna, for which seṭṭhan Sn 1064; cp. Nd2 317); Dh 56; Nd1 211; Nd2 502 (in paraphrase of mahā combd. with pavara); KhA 124; DhA i.430: PvA 1, 50. -- dum -- uttama a splendid tree Vv 393; nar˚ the best of men Sn 1021 (= narāsabha of 996); pur˚ the most magnificent town Sn 1012; puris˚ the noblest man Th 1, 629, 1084; nt. uttamaŋ the highest ideal, i. e. Arahantship J i.96.

-- anga the best or most important limb or part of the body, viz. (a) the head Vin ii.256 = M i.32 = A iv.278 (in phrase uttamange sirasmiŋ); J ii.163; also in cpd. ˚bhūta the hair of the head Th 2, 253 (= kesa -- kalāpa ThA 209, 210) & ˚ruha id. J i.138 = vi.96 (= kesā C.); (b) the eye J iv.403; (c) the penis J v.197. -- attha the highest gain or good (i. e. Arahantship SnA 332) Sn 324; Dh 386, 403; DhA iv.142; ThA 160. -- adhama most contemptible J v.394, 437. -- guṇā (pl.) loftiest virtues J i.96. -- purisa It 97 & -- porisa the greatest man (= mahāpurisa) Dh 97 (see DhA ii.188). -- bhāva the highest condition, state or place DhA ii.188 (˚ŋ patto = puris'-> uttamo). -- 131 -- Uttamatā
Uttamatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. uttama] highest amount, climax, limit DA i.169 (for paramatā). Uttara
Uttara1
(adj.) compar. of ud˚, q. v. for etym.; the superl. is uttama] -- 1. higher, high, superior, upper, only in cpds., J ii.420 (musal˚ with the club on top of him? Cy not clear, perhaps to uttara2); see also below. -- 2. northern (with disā region or point of compass) D i.153; M i.123; S i.224; PvA 75. uttarāmukha (for uttaraŋmukha) turning north, facing north Sn 1010. -- 3. subsequent, following, second (˚ -- ) J i.63 (˚āsāḷha -- nakkhatta). -> 4. over, beyond ( -- ˚): aṭṭhɔutara -- sata eight over a hundred, i. e. 108; DhA i.388. -- sa -- uttara having something above or higher, having a superior i. e. inferior D i.80 (citta), ii.299; M i.59; S v.265; Vbh 324 (paññā); Dhs 1292, 1596; DhsA 50. -- anuttara without a superior, unrivalled, unparalleled D i.40; S i.124; ii.278; iii.84; Sn 179. See also under anuttara.

-- attharaṇa upper cover J vi.253. -- âbhimukha facing North D ii.15. -- āsanga an upper robe Vin i.289; ii. 126; S i.81; iv.290; A i.67, 145; ii.146; DhA i.218; PvA 73; VvA 33 = 51. -- itara something higher, superior D i.45, 156, 174; S i.81; J i.364; DhA ii.60; iv.4. -- oṭṭha the upper lip (opp. adhar˚) J ii.420; iii.26; iv. 184. -- chada a cover, coverlet, awning (sa˚ a carpet with awnings or canopy above it) D i.7; A i.181; iii.50. -- chadana = ˚chada D ii.187; DhA i.87. -- dvāra the northern gate J vi.364. -- dhamma the higher norm of the world (lok˚), higher righteousness D ii.188 (paṭividdha -- lokɔuttara -- dhammatāya uttama -- bhāvaŋ patta). -- pāsaka the (upper) lintel (of a door) Vin ii.120 = 148. -- pubba north -- eastern J vi.518. -- sse (v. l. ˚suve) on the day after tomorrow A i.240. Uttara
Uttara2
(adj.) [fr. uttarati] crossing over, to be crossed, in dur˚ difficult to cross or to get out of S i.197 (not duruttamo); Miln 158; and in cpd. ˚setu one who is going to cross a bridge Miln 194 (cp. uttara -- setu). Uttaraṇa
Uttaraṇa
(nt.) [fr. uttarati] bringing or moving out, saving, delivery Th 1, 418; J i.195. In BSk. uttaraṇa only in sense of crossing, overcoming, e. g. Jtm 31 8 (˚setu). -> Cp. uttara. Uttarati
Uttarati
[ud + tarati1] -- 1. to come out of (water) Vin ii.221 (opp. otarati); J i.108 (id.). -- 2. to go over, to flow over (of water), to boil over Miln 117, 118, 132, 260, 277. -- 3. to cross over, to go beyond M i.135; aor. udatāri Sn 471 (oghaŋ). -- 4. to go over, to overspread J v.204 (ger. uttariyāna = avattharitvā C.). -- pp. otiṇṇa (q. v.). -- Caus. uttareti (q. v.). Uttari (˚) & Uttariŋ
Uttari
(˚ -- ) & Uttariŋ (adv.) [compn. form of uttara, cp. angi -- bhūta uttāni -- karoti etc.] out, over, beyond; additional, moreover, further, besides. -- (1) uttariŋ: D i.71; M i.83; iii.148; S iv.15; Sn 796 (uttariŋ kurute = uttariŋ karoti Nd2 102, i. e. to do more than anything, to do best, to esteem especially); J ii.23; iii.324; Miln 10 (ito uttariŋ anything beyond this, any more) DhA iv.109 (bhaveti to cultivate especially; see vuttari); VvA 152. -- uttariŋ appaṭivijjhanto not going further in comprehension, i. e. reaching the highest degree of comprehension, Vism 314, referring to Ps ii.131, which is quoted at Miln 198, as the last of the 11 blessings of mettā. -- (2) uttari˚ in foll. cpds.

-- karaṇīya an additional duty, higher obligation S ii. 99; iii.168; A v.157 = 164; It 118. -- bhanga an extra portion, tit -- bit, dainties, additional or after -- meal bits Vin ii.214; iii.160; iv.259; J ii.419; DhA i.214 sa -- uttaribhanga together with dainty bits J i.186, cp. 196 (yāgu). -- bhangika serving as dainties J i.196. -- manussa beyond the power of men, superhuman, in cpd. ˚dhamma an order which is above man, extraordinary condition, transcendental norm, adj. of a transcendental character, miraculous, overwhelming Vin i.209; ii.112; iii.105; iv.24; D i.211; iii.3, 12, 18; M i.68; ii.200; S iv.290, 300, 337; A iii.430; v.88; DhA iii.480. -- sāṭaka a further, i. e. upper or outer garment, cloak, mantle J ii.246; DhA iv.200; PvA 48, 49 (= uttarīyaŋ). Uttarika
Uttarika
(adj.) [fr. uttara] transcending, superior, super- human Nett 50. Uttariya
Uttariya
(nt.) [abstr. fr. uttara; uttara + ya = Sk. *ut- tarya] -- 1. state of being higher. Cp. iii.35; neg. an˚ state of being unsurpassed (lit. with nothing higher), preeminence; see anuttariya. -- 2. an answer, rejoinder DhA i.44 (karaṇ˚ -- karaṇa). Uttarīya
Uttarīya
(nt.) [fr. uttara] an outer garment, cloak Pvi.103 ( = uparivasanaŋ uparihāraŋ uttarisāṭakaŋ PvA 49); Dāvs iii.30; ThA 253. Uttasati
Uttasati1
[identical in form with next] only in Caus. uttā- seti to impale, q. v. Uttasati
Uttasati2
[ut + tasati2] -- 1. to frighten J i.47 (v.267). - to be alarmed or terrified Vin i.74 (ubbijjati u. palāyati); iii.145 (id.); J ii.384; vi.79; ppr. uttasaŋ Th 1, 863; & uttasanto Pv ii.23. -- See utrasati. Caus. uttāseti (q. v.). -> pp. uttasta & utrasta (q. v.). Cp. also uttanta. Uttasana
Uttasana
(adj. -- nt.) [fr. ud + tras, cp. uttāsana] frightening, fear J i.414 (v. l. for uttasta). Uttasta
Uttasta
[pp. of uttasati2; usual form utrasta (q. v.)] frightened, terrified, faint -- hearted J i.414 (˚bhikkhu; v. l. uttasana˚). Uttāna
Uttāna
(adj.) [fr. ut + tan, see tanoti & tanta] -- 1. streched out (flat), lying on one's back, supine Vin i.271 (mañcake uttānaŋ nipajjāpetvā making her lie back on the couch); ii.215; J i.205; Pv iv.108 (opp. avakujja); PvA 178 (id.), 265. -- 2. clear, manifest, open, evident [cp. BSk. uttāna in same sense at Av. S ii.106] D i.116; S ii.28 (dhammo uttāno vivaṭo pakāsito); J ii.168 ( = pākaṭa); v.460; PvA 66, 89, 140, 168. -- anuttāna unclear, not explained J vi.247. -- The cpd. form (˚ -- ) of uttāna in combn. with kṛ & bhū is uttānī˚ (q. v.). -- 3. superficial, "flat", shallow A i.70 (parisa); Pug 46.

-- mukha "clear mouthed", speaking plainly, easily understood D i.116 (see DA i.287); DhA iv.8. -- seyyaka "lying on one's back", i. e. an infant M i.432; A iii.6; Th 1, 935; Miln 40; Vism 97 (˚dāraka). Uttānaka
Uttānaka
(adj.) [fr. uttāna] -- 1. ( = uttāna1) lying on one's back J vi.38 (˚ŋ pātetvā); DhA i.184. -- 2. (= uttāna2) clear, open D ii.55; M i.340 = DhA i.173. Uttānī
Uttānī
(˚ -- ) [the compn. form of uttāna in cpds. with kṛ & bhū cp. BSk. uttānī -- karoti M Vastu iii.408; uttānī -- kṛta Av. Ś i.287; ii.151] open, manifest etc., in ˚kamma (uttāni˚) declaration, exposition, manifestation S v.443; Pug 19; Vbh 259, 358; Nett 5, 8, 9, 38. -- ˚karaṇa id. SnA 445. -- ˚karoti to make clear or open, to declare, show up, confess (a sin) Vin i.103; S ii.25, 154; iii.132, 139; iv.166; v.261; A i.286; iii.361 sq. -- 132 -- Uttāpeti
Uttāpeti
[Caus. of uttapati] to heat, to cause pain, torment J vi.161. Uttāra
Uttāra
[fr. ud + tṛ as in uttarati] crossing, passing over, ˚setu a bridge for crossing (a river) S iv.174 = M i.134; cp. uttara2. Uttārita
Uttārita
[pp. of uttāreti] pulled out, brought or moved out J i.194. Uttāritatta
Uttāritatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. uttārita] the fact of having or being brought or moved out J i.195. Uttāreti
Uttāreti
[Caus. of uttarati] to make come out, to move or pull out J i.194; SnA 349. -- pp. uttārita (q. v.). Uttāsa
Uttāsa
[Sk. uttrāsa, fr. ud + tras] terror, fear, fright D iii.148; S v.386; Miln 170; PvA 180. Uttāsana
Uttāsana
(nt.) [fr. uttāseti2] impalement J ii.444; SnA 61 (sūle). Uttāsavant
Uttāsavant
(adj.) [uttāsa + vant] showing fear or fright, fearful S iii.16 sq. Uttāsita
Uttāsita
[pp. of uttāseti2] impaled Pv iv.16 ( = āvuta āropita VvA 220); J i.499; iv.29. Uttāseti
Uttāseti1
[Caus of uttasati, ud + tras, of which taŋs is uttā- seti2 is a variant] to frighten, terrify J i.230, 385; ii.117. Uttāseti
Uttāseti2
[cp. Sk. uttaŋsayati in meaning to adorn with a wreath; ud + taŋs to shake, a variation of tars to shake, tremble] to impale A i.48; J i.230, 326; ii.443; iii.34; iv.29. -- pp. uttāsita (q. v.). Cp. uttāsana. Uttiṭṭha
Uttiṭṭha
[ = ucchiṭṭha? Cp. ucchepaka. By Pāli Cys. referred to uṭṭhahati "alms which one stands up for, or expects"] left over, thrown out Vin i.44 (˚patta); Th 1, 1057 (˚piṇḍa); 2, 349 (˚piṇḍa = vivaṭadvāre ghare ghare patiṭṭhitvā labhanaka -- piṇḍa ThA 242); J iv.380 (˚piṇḍa; C. similarly as at ThA; not to the point); 386 (˚piṇḍa = ucchiṭṭhaka piṇḍa C.); Miln 213, 214. Uttiṭṭhe
Uttiṭṭhe
see uṭṭhahati. Uttiṇa
Uttiṇa
(adj.) [ud + tiṇa] in uttiṇaŋ karoti to take the straw off, lit. to make off -- straw; to deprive of the roof M ii.53. Cp. next. Uttiṇṇa
Uttiṇṇa
[pp. of uttarati] drawn out, pulled out, nt. outlet, passage J ii.72 (paṇṇasālāya uttiṇṇāni karoti make entrances in the hut). Or should it be uttiṇa? Utrasta
Utrasta
[pp. of uttasati, also cp. uttasta] frightened, ter- rified, alarmed Vin ii.184; S i.53, 54 (an˚); Sn 986; Miln 23; DhA ii.6 (˚mānasa); PvA 243 (˚citta), 250 (˚sabhāva). Utrāsa
Utrāsa
[ = uttāsa] terror J ii.8 (citt˚). Utrāsin
Utrāsin
(adj.) [fr. *Sk. uttrāsa = P. uttāsa] terrified, fright- ened, fearful, anxious S i.99, 219. -- Usually neg. an˚ in phrase abhīru anutrāsin apalāyin without fear, steadfast & not running away S i.99; Th 1, 864; Nd2 13; J iv.296; v.4; Miln 339. See also apalāyin. Ud
Ud
-- [Vedic ud -- ; Goth. ūt = Ohg. ūz = E. out, Oir. ud -- ; cp. Lat. ūsque "from -- unto" & Gr. u(/steros = Sk. uttara] prefix in verbal & nominal combn. One half of all the words beginning with u˚ are combns. with ud˚, which in compn. appears modified according to the rules of assimilation as prevailing in Pāli. -- I. Original meaning "out in an upward direction", out of, forth; like ummujjati to rise up out of (water), ujjalati to blaze up high; udeti to come out of & go up; ukkaṇṭha stretching one's neck out high (cp. Ger. "empor"); uggilati to "swallow up", i. e. spit out. -- The opposites of ud -- are represented by either ava or o˚ (see under II. & IV. & cp. ucc -- âvaca; uddhambhāgiya: orambhāgiya), ni (see below) or vi (as udaya: vi -- aya or vaya). -- II. Hence develop 2 clearly defined meanings, viz. (1) out, out of, away from -- : ˚aṇha ("day -- out"); ˚agga ("top -- out"); ˚āgacchati; ˚ikkhati look out for, expect; ˚kantati tear out; ˚khitta thrown off; ˚khipati pick out; ˚gacchati come out; ˚gamaṇa rising (opp. o˚); ˚gajjati shout out; ˚gilati (opp. o˚); ˚ghoseti shout out; ˚cināti pick out; ˚chiṭṭha thrown out; ˚jagghati laugh at, cp. Ger. aus -- lachen ˚tatta smelted out; ˚tāna stretched out; ˚dāleti tear out; ˚dhaṭa lifted out, drawn out; ˚disati point out to; ˚drīyati pull out; ˚pajjati to be produced; ˚patti & ˚pāda coming out, origin, birth; ˚paṭipatiyā out of reach; ˚paḷāseti sound out; ˚phāsulika "ribs out"; etc. etc. -- (2) up (high) or high up, upwards, on to (cp. ucca high, uttara higher) -- : ˚kujja erect (opp. ava˚); ˚kūla sloping up (opp. vi˚); ˚khipati throw -- up, ˚gaṇhāti take up; ˚chindati cut up; ˚javati go up -- stream, ˚javana id. (opp. o˚); uñña pride; ˚thāna "standing up" ˚ṭhita got up; ˚tarati come out, go up (opp. o˚); ˚nata raised up, high (opp. o˚); ˚nama e -- levation; ˚nāmin raised (opp. ni˚); ˚patati fly up; etc. etc. -- III. More specialised meanings (from elliptical or figurative use) are: (1) ud˚ = without, "ex -- ", e. g. unnangala "outplough" = without a plough; uppabbajita an ex -- bhikkhu. -> (2) ud˚ = off, i. e. out of the way, wrong, e. g. uppatha a wrong road, ummagga id. -- (3) ud˚ = out of the ordinary, i. e. exceedingly, e. g. ujjangala extremely dusty; uppanduka very pale; uppoṭheti to beat hard. -- IV. Dialectical variations & combinations. -- (1) Owing to semantic affinity we often find an interchange between ud˚ and ava˚ (cp. E. break up = break down, grind up or down, tie up or down), according to different points of view. This wavering between the two prefixes was favoured by the fact that o always had shown an unstable tendency & had often been substituted for or replaced by ū, which in its place was reduced to u before a double consonant, thus doing away with the diff. between ū & u or o & u. For comparison see the foll.: ukkamati & okk˚; uññā: avañña; uddiyati: odd˚; uḍḍeyya oḍḍ˚; uppīḷeti: opīḷ˚; etc., & cp. abbhokirati > abbhukkirati. -- (2) the most freq. combns. that ud˚ enters into are those with the intensifying prefixes abhi˚ and sam˚; see e. g. abhi + ud (= abbhud˚) + gacchati, ˚jalati; ˚ṭhāti; ˚namati etc.; sam + ud + eti; ˚kamati; ˚chindati; ˚tejeti; ˚pajjati etc. Uda
Uda1
(indecl.) [Sk. uta & u, with Lat. aut (or), Gr. au(_ti (again), au)ta/r (but, or), Goth. auk = Ger. auch to pron. base ava˚ yonder, cp. ava ii.] disjunctive part. "or"; either singly, as at Sn 455, 955, 1090; J v.478 (v. l. udāhu); Nd1 445 (expld. as "padasandhi" with same formula as iti, q. v.); Pv ii.1216 (kāyena uda cetasā); or combd. with other synonymous particles, as uda vā at Sn 193, 842, 1075; It 82 = 117 (caraŋ vā yadi vā tiṭṭhaŋ nisinno uda vā sayaŋ walking or standing, sitting or lying down); KhA 191. -- See also udāhu. Uda
Uda2
(˚ -- ) [Vedic udan (nt.), also later uda (but only ˚ -- ), commonly udaka, q. v.] water, wave. In cpds. sometimes the older form udan˚ is preserved (like udañjala, udaññavant), but generally it has been substituted by the later uda˚ (see under udakaccha, udakanti, udakumbha, udapatta, udapāna, udabindu). Udaka
Udaka
(nt.) [Vedic udaka, uda + ka (see uda2), of Idg. *ṷed, *ud, fuller form *eṷed (as in Sk. odatī, odman flood, odana gruel, q. v.); cp. Sk. unatti, undati to water, udra = Av. udra = Ags. otor = E. otter ("water -- animal"); Gr. u(/dwr water ("hydro"), u(/dra hydra ("water -- animal"); Lat. unda wave; Goth. watō = Ohg. wazzar = E. water; Obulg. voda water, vydra otter] water Vin ii.120, 213; D ii.15 (˚assa dhārā gushes or showers of w.); Dh 80, 145; J i.212; Pv i.57; Pug 31, 32; Miln 318; VvA 20 (udake temanaŋ aggimhe tāpanaŋ); DhA i.289; DhA iii. 176, 256; PvA 39, 70. -- Syn. ambu, ela, jala etc. -> The compn. form ( -- ˚) is either ûdaka (āsanûdaka -- dāyin J iv.435) or ˚odaka (pādodaka water for the feet PvA 78). odaka occurs also in abs. form (q. v.), cp. also oka. Bdgh.'s kaŋ = udakaŋ, tena dāritan: kandaran ti is a false etymology; DA i.209.

-- aṇṇava water -- flood M i.134. -- āyatika a water -- pipe Vin ii.123. -- āḷhaka a certain measure of water, an āḷhaka of w. S v.400; A ii.55 = iii.337; VvA 155. -- ûpama resembling water, like water A iv.11 (puggala). -- ogāhana plunging into water J iii.235. -- ogha a water flood VvA 48. -- orohaka descending into water, bathing; N. of a class of ascetics, lit. "bather" M i.281; S iv.312; A v. 263. -- orohaṇa plunging into water, taking a bath, bathing D i.167; S i.182; A i.296; ii.206; J iv.299; Pug 55. -- kalaha the "water dispute" DhA iii.256. -- kāka a water crow J ii.441. -- kicca libation of water, lit. water -- performance; cleansing, washing D ii.15. -- kīḷā sporting in the w. J vi.420. -- gahaṇasāṭaka bathing -- gown J v.477. -- ghaṭa a water pitcher PvA 66. -- cāṭi a water jar DhA i.52. -- ṭṭhāna a stand for water Vin ii.120. -- tumba a water vessel J ii.441; DA i.202; DhA ii.193. -- telaka an oily preparation mixed with water Vin ii.107. -- dantapoṇa water for rinsing the mouth & tooth -- cleaner Vin iii.51; iv.90, 92, 233; J iv.69. -- daha a lake (of water) D i.45. -- doṇikā a water -- tub or trough Vin ii.220. -- dhārā a shower of water Ps i.125; J iv.351. -- niddhamana a water spout or drain Vin ii.120, 123; DhA ii.37. -- nibbāhana an aquaduct Miln 295. -- paṭiggaha receiving or accepting water Vin ii.213. -- patta a waterbowl Vin ii. 107; D i.80; S iii.105. -- puñchanī a towel Vin ii.122. -- posita fed or nourished by water VvA 173. -- phusita a drop of water S ii.135. -- bindu a drop of w. It 84 (v. l. for udabindu); PvA 99. -- bubbula a w. bubble A iv.137; Vism 109, 479 (in comp.). -- bhasta devoid of water ThA 212 (for anodaka Th 2, 265). -- maṇika a water -- pot Vin i.227; M i.354; A iii.27; Miln 28; DhA i.79. -- mallaka a cup for w. A i.250. -- rakkhasa a water -- sprite DhA iii.74. -- rahada a lake (of w.) D i.74, 84; A i.9; ii.105; iii.25; Sn 467; Pug 47. -- rūha a water plant Vv 356. -- lekhā writing on w. A i.283 = Pug 32 (in simile ˚ûpama like writing on w.; cp. Pug A 215). -- vāra "waterturn", i. e. fetching water DhA i.49. -- vāraka bucket S ii.118. -- vāha a flow of water, flowing w. J vi.162. -- vāhaka rise or swelling (lit. carrying or pulling along (of water), overflowing, flood A i.178. -- vāhana pulling up water Vin ii.122 (˚rajju). -- sadda sound of water Dhs 621. -- sarāvaka a saucer for w. Vin ii.120. -- sāṭaka = sāṭikā J ii.13. -- sāṭikā "water -- cloak", a bathing -- mantle Vin i. 292; ii.272; iv.279 (= yāya nivatthā nhāyati C.); DhA ii.61 (T. ˚sāṭaka). -- suddhika ablution with water (after passing urine) Vin iv.262 (= mutta -- karaṇassa dhovanā C.). -- 133 -- Udakaccha
Udakaccha
[uda + kaccha] watery soil, swamp J v.137. Udakumbha
Udakumbha
[uda + kumbha] a water jug J i.20; Dh 121, 122; Pv i.129. Udagga
Udagga
(adj.) [ud + agga, lit. "out -- top", cp. Sk. udagra] top- most, high, lofty Th 1, 110; fig. elated, exalted, exultant, joyful, happy D i.110 (˚citta); Sn 689 (+ sumana), 1028 (id.); Pv iv.155 (attamana +); iv.58 (haṭṭha +); Miln 248; DhA ii.42 (haṭṭha -- pahaṭṭha udagg -- udagga in high glee & jubilant); Vism 346 (id.); Sdhp 323. See also der. odagya. Udaggatā
Udaggatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. udagga] exaltation, jubilation, glee Sdhp 298. Udaggi˚
Udaggi˚
in udaggihuttaŋ [ = ud + aggi + hutta, cp. Vedic agnihotra] the fire prepared (for sacrifice) J v.396 (= uda -- aggihuttaŋ C. wrongly), lit. "the sacrifice (being) out" Udangaṇa
Udangaṇa
(nt.) [ud + angaṇa1; Kern unnecessarily changes it to uttankana "a place for digging for water" see Toev. p. 96] an open place J i.109. Udacchidā
Udacchidā
3rd sg. praet. of ucchindati to break up Sn 2, 3 (˚ā metri causa). Udañcana
Udañcana
(nt.) [fr. ud + añc, see añchati] a bucket for drawing water out of a well DhA i.94. Udañcanin
Udañcanin
(adj. -- n.) [ud + añcanin to añc see añchati] draining, pulling up water f. ˚ī a bucket or pail J i. 417 (f. ˚ī). Udañjala
Udañjala
[udan + jala see uda2] in ˚ŋ kīḷati a water -- game: playing with drops of water (?) Vin iii.118 (Bdhgh.: udañjalan ti udaka -- cikkhallo vuccati p. 274) Udaññavant
Udaññavant
(adj.) [udan = uda(ka) + vant] rich in water, well -- watered J v.405 (= udaka -- sampanna C.). Udaṇha
Udaṇha
[ud + aṇha] day -- break, dawn, sunrise J v.155. Udatāri
Udatāri
3rd sg aor. of uttarati to cross over Sn 471 (oghaŋ). Udatta
Udatta
(adj.) [Sk. udātta] elevated, high, lofty, clever Nett 7, 118, 123 ( = uḷārapañña C.). Udadhi
Udadhi
[uda + dhi, lit. water -- container] the sea, ocean S i.67; It 86; Sn 720; J v.326; vi.526; ThA 289; VvA 155 ("udakaŋ ettha dhīyatī ti udadhi"); Sdhp 322, 577. Udapatta
Udapatta1
[ụda for ud, and patta, pp. of pat, for patita? Kern, Toev. s. v. takes it as udak -- prāpta, risen, flying up, sprung up J iii.484 ( = uppatita C.); v.71 (= uṭṭhita C.). Udapatta
Udapatta2
[uda + patta; Sk. udapātra] a bowl of water, a water -- jug, ewer M i.100; S v.121; A iii.230 sq., 236; v.92, 94, 97 sq. Udapādi
Udapādi
3rd sg. aor. of uppajjati to arise, originate, be- come D i.110, 180, 185; S ii.273; It 52, 99; SnA 346, 462. Udapāna
Udapāna
[uda + pāna lit. "(place for) drinking water"; cp. opāna, which in the incorrect opinion of Pāli Commentators represents a contracted udapāna] a well, a cistern Vin i.139; ii.122; M i.80; A iv.171; J iii.216; Ud 78; Pv ii.78; ii.925; Miln 411; Vism 244 (in simile); DA i.298; VvA 40; PvA 78. Udappatta
Udappatta
see udapatta. Udabindu
Udabindu
[uda + bindu] a drop of water M i.78; Sn 812; Dh 121, 122, 336; It 84 (v. l. udaka˚); Nd1 135; SnA 114; DhA ii.51. Udabbhadhi
Udabbhadhi
aor. 3rd sg. of ubbadhati [ud + vadh] to destroy, kill Sn 4 ( = ucchindanto vadhati SnA 18). Udabbahe
Udabbahe
3rd sg. Pot. of ubbahati [ud + bṛh1, see also abbahati] to draw out, tear out, remove Th 1, 158; Sn 583 ( = ubbaheyya dhāreyya (?) SnA 460); J ii.223 (= udabbaheyya C.); vi.587 (= hareyya C.); aor. udabbahi Vin iv.5. Udaya
Udaya
[fr. ud + i, cp. udeti] rise, growth; increment, in- crease; income, revenue, interest A ii.199; Ps i.34; Vv 847 (dhanɔatthika uddayaŋ patthayāna = ānisaŋsaŋ atirekalābhaŋ VvA 336); 8452; DhA ii.270; PvA 146 (ulār˚ vipāka), 273 (˚bhūtāni pañca kahāpaṇa -- satāni labhitvā, with interest); Sdhp 40, 230, 258. -- See also uddaya.

-- attha rise and fall, birth & death (to attha2) M i.356; S v.197 sq., 395; A iii.152 sq.; iv.111, 289, 352; v.15, 25. -- atthika desirous of increase, interest or wealth (cp. above Vv 847 dhanɔatthika) A ii.199. -- bbaya (ud -- aya + vy -- aya) increase & decrease, rise & fall, birth & death, up & down D iii.223; S i.46 = 52 (lokassa); iii.130; A ii.90; iii. 32; iv.153; It 120; Vism 287; Ps i.54; ThA 90. -- vyaya = ˚bbaya S iv.140; A ii.15 (khandhānaŋ); Dh 113, 374 (khandhānaŋ, see DhA iv.110). Udayaŋ & Udayanto
Udayaŋ
& Udayanto ppr. of udeti (q. v.). Udayana
Udayana
(nt.) [fr. ud + i] going up, rise DA i.95. -- 134 -- Udara
Udara
(nt.) [Vedic udara, Av udara belly, Gr. u(/steros = Lat. uterus belly, womb; Lith. védaras stomach, See also Walde, Lat. Wtb. under vensica] -- 1 the belly, stomach D ii.266; Sn 78, 604, 609, 716; J i.146, 164, 265; Miln 213; PvA 283; KhA 57, 58; DhA i.47 (pregnant); Sdhp 102. -- 2. cavity, interior, inside Dāvs i.56 (mandir -- odare). -- ūnûdara with empty belly Th 1, 982; Miln 406, 407; cp. ūna.

-- aggi the fire of the belly or stomach (i. e. of digestion) KhA 59; SnA 462; PvA 33; -- âvadehakaŋ (adv.) bhunjati to eat to fill the stomach, eat to satiety, to be gluttonous M i.102; A v.18; Th 1, 935; Vism 33. -- paṭala the mucous membrane of the stomach Vism 359 ( = sarīr˚abbhantara 261); SnA 248; KhA 55, 61. -- pūra stomachfilling Vism 108. -- vaṭṭi "belly -- sack", belly Vin iii.39, 117; Vism 262 where KhA reads ud. paṭala). -- vāta the wind of the belly, stomach -- ache 9J i.33, 433; Vism 41 (˚ābādha); DhA iv.129. Udariya
Udariya
(nt.) [fr. udara] the stomach Kh iii. (cp. KhA 57); Vism 258, 358. Cp sodariya. Udassaye
Udassaye
2nd sg. pot. of ud + assayati [ā + śri, cp. assaya] J v.26 (meaning to instal, raise?), expld. by C. as ussayāpesi (?) Reading may be faulty for udāsase (?). Udahāraka
Udahāraka
[uda + hāraka] a water -- carrier J ii.80. Udahāriya
Udahāriya
(adj.) [fr. udahāra fetching of water, uda + hṛ] going for water Vv 509. Udāgacchati
Udāgacchati
[ud + ā + gacchati] to come to completion Da i.288. Cp sam. Udāna
Udāna
(nt.) [fr. ud + an to breathe] -- 1. "breathing out", exulting cry, i e. an utterance, mostly in metrical form, inspired by a particularly intense emotion, whether it be joyful or sorrowful (cp. K. S. p. 29 n. 2) D i.50, 92; S i.20, 27, 82, 160; A i.67; J i.76; Pug 43, 62; Nett 174; PvA 67; Sdhp 514. -- The utterance of such an inspired thought is usually introduced with the standing phrase "imaŋ udānaŋ udānesi" i. e. breathed forth this solemn utterance [Cp. BSk. udānaŋ udānayati Divy 99 etc.], e. g. at Vin i.2 sq., 12, 230, 353; D i.47; ii.107 (udāna of triumph); S iii.55; Mhvs xix.29; DA i.140; Ud. 1 passim; SnA 354 ("the familiar quotation about the sakyas"). Occasionally (later) we find other phrases, as e. g. udānaŋ pavatti J i.61; abhāsi Vin iv.54; kathesi J vi. 38. -- 2. one of the angas or categories of the Buddhist Scriptures: see under nava & anga. -- Cp. vodāna. Udānita
Udānita
[pp. of udāneti] uttered, breathed forth, said DhA iv.55. Udāneti
Udāneti
[denom. f. udāna, cp. BSk. udānayati] to breathe out or forth, usually in phrase udānaŋ udānesi: see under udāna1. Absolutely only at J iii.218. Udāpatvā
Udāpatvā
at J v.255 is uncertain reading (v. l. udapatvā, C. explns. reading udapatvā by uppatitvā = flying up), perhaps we should read udapatta flew up, pret. of ud + pat = Sk. *udapaptat (so Kern, Toev. s. v.). Udāyati
Udāyati
at DA i.266 (udāyissati fut.) is hardly correct; D i.96 has here udrīyissati (q. v.), which belongs to darati to break, tear etc., udāyati could only belong to dāyāti meaning to cut, mow, reap. but not to split etc. DA i.266 explns. udāyissati with bhijjhissati. The difficulty is removed by reading udrīyissati. To v. l. undriyati cp. ˚undriya for ˚uddaya (dukkh˚ for dukkhudraya see udraya). We find udāyati once more at Vism 156 in expln. of ekodi where it is evidently meant for udeti (Caus. = uṭṭhapeti). Udāra
Udāra
(adj.) [Sk. udāra, of which the usual P. form is ulāra (q. v.). Cp. BSk. audāra & audārika.] raised, sublime, noble, excellent Dāvs iii.4 (samussit -- odāra -- sitātapattaŋ); DA i.50 (˚issariya); Sdhp 429, 591. Udāvatta
Udāvatta
[pp. of udāvattate, ud + ā vattati] retired, de- sisting J v.158 ( = udāvattitva nivattitva C). Udāsīna
Udāsīna
(adj.) [ud + āsīna, pp. of ās to sit; lit. sit apart, be indifferent] indifferent, passive, neutral DhsA 129. Udāhaṭa
Udāhaṭa
[pp of udāharati] uttered, spoken; called, quoted Pug 41. Udāharaṇa
Udāharaṇa
(nt.) [fr. udāharati] example, instance J iii.401 (˚ŋ āharitvā dassento), 510; Miln 345; SnA 445; VvA 297. Udāharati
Udāharati
[ud + ā + hṛ] to utter, recite. speak. Sn 389; J iii.289; DA i.140 (see udāhāra). -- pp udāhaṭa (q. v.). Cp. pariy˚. Udāhāra
Udāhāra
[fr. udāharati] utterance, speech DA i.140 (˚ŋ udāhari = udānaŋ udānesi); Pug A 223, Udāhu
Udāhu
(indecl.) [uta + āho, cp. P. uda & aho and Sk. utāro] disjunctive -- adversative particle "or", in direct questions D i 157; ii.8; Sn 599, 875, 885; J i.20, 83; VvA 258 ( = ādu); PvA 33, 51; Miln 10. -- The first part of the question is often introduced with kiŋ, while udāhu follows in the second (disjunctive) part, e. g. kin nakkhattaŋ kīḷissasi udāhu bhatiŋ karissasi VvA 63; kiŋ amhehi saddhiŋ āgamissasi udāhu pacchā will you come with us or later? DhA ii.96: See under kiŋ. -- Often combd with other expletive particles, e. g. udāhu ve Sn 1075, 1077; udāhu no Sn 347; eva . . . no udāhu (so . . . or not) D i.152; (ayaŋ) nu kho -- udāhu (ayaŋ) is it (this) -- (this) Vism 313. Udi
Udi
(or udī) is artificial adj. formn. fr. udeti, meaning "rising, excelling", in expln. of ekodi at Vism 156 (udayatī ti udi uṭṭhapetī ti attho). Udikkhati
Udikkhati
[ud + īkṣ, Sk. udīkṣate] -- 1. to look at, to survey. to perceive Vin i.25 (udiccare, 3sd. pl. pres. med.); J v.71, 296; Vv 8121 (aor. udikkhisaŋ = ullokesiŋ VvA 316); Dāvs ii 109; Sdhp 308. -- 2. to look out for, to expect J i.344; VvA 118. -- 3. to envy Miln 338. Udikkhitar
Udikkhitar
[n. ag. of udikkhati] one who looks for or after D iii 167. Udicca
Udicca
(adj.) [apparently an adjectivised ger. of udeti but distorted from & in meaning = Sk. udañc, f. udīcī northern, the north] "rising", used in a geographical sense of the N. W. country, i. e. north -- westerly, of north -- western origin (cp. Brethren 79, Miln trsln. ii.45 n. 1) J i.140, 324, 343, 373; Miln 236. -- See also uddiya. Udiccare
Udiccare
3sd. pl. pres. med. of udikkhati (q. v.). Udita
Udita1
[pp. of ud -- i, see udeti] risen, high, elevated Miln 222; (˚odita); Dāvs iv.42; Sdhp 14 (of the sun) 442 (˚odita). Udita
Udita2
[pp. of vad, see vadati] spoken, proclaimed, uttered Vuttodaya 2 (quoted by Childers in Khuddaka -- pātha ed. 1869, p. 22). Udīraṇa
Udīraṇa
(nt.) [fr. udīreti] utterance, saying J v.237; Dhs 637, 720; Miln 145. Udīrita
Udīrita
[pp. of udīreti] uttered J iii.339; v.394 = 407. Udīreti
Udīreti
[ud + īreti, cp. in meaning īrita] -- 1. to set in motion, stir up, cause J iii.441 (dukkhaŋ udīraye Pot. = udīreyya C.); v.395 (kalahaŋ to begin a quarrel). -- 2. to utter, proclaim, speak, say S i.190; Sn 632 (pot. ˚raye = bhāseyya SnA 468); Dh 408 (giraŋ udīraye = bhāseyya DhA iv.182); J v.78 (vākyaŋ); Pass. udīyati (uddiyyati = Sk. udīryate) Th 1, 1232 (nigghoso). Udu
Udu
(adj.) [ = *ṛtu? cp. utu & uju] straight, upright, in ˚mano straight -- minded D iii.167, 168 (= uju˚ in v. l. and expln. by C.). -- 135 -- Udukkhala
Udukkhala
(m. & nt.) [Sk. ulukhala] a mortar Vin i.202 (+ musala pestle); J i.502; ii.428; v.49; ii.161, 335; Ud 69 (m; + musaḷa); DhA ii.131 (˚sala); Vism 354 (in comp.). The relation between udukkhala and musala is seen best from the description of eating at Vism 344 and DA i.200, where the lower teeth play the role of ud., the upper teeth act as m., while the tongue takes the part of a hand. On this passage & other connections as well as etym. see Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 37. Udukkhalikā
Udukkhalikā
(f.) [fr. udukkhala] part of a door (threshold?) Vin ii.148 (+ uttara -- pasaka lintel of a door). Udumbara
Udumbara
[Sk. udumbara] the glomerous fig tree, Ficus Glomerata D ii.4; Vin iv.35; A iv.283 (˚khādika), 283 (id.), 324 (id.); Sn 5; DhA i.284; SnA 19; KhA 46, 56; VvA 213. Cp. odumbara. Udeti
Udeti
(ud + eti of i to go] to go out or up, to rise (of the sun), to come out, to increase Asl. 169; Vism 156 (eko udetī ti ekodi); J ii.33; iii.324; ppr. udayaŋ It 85 (ādicco), & udayanto PvA 154 (udayante suriye = sole surgente). -- pp. udita (see udita1). Cp. udicca & udi. Udda
Udda1
[Vedic udra, to uda2 water, lit. living in water; Cp. Gr. u(/dros "hydra"; Ohg. ottar = Ags. otor = E. otter; Lith. ûdra = Obulg. vydra otter] an aquatic animal, the otter (?) Childers s. v. doubts the identity of this creature with the regular otter, since it lives in the jungle. Is it a beaver -- Vin i.186 (˚camma otter -- skin, used for sandals); Cp. i.102 (˚pota); J iii.51 sq., 335. The names of two otters at J iii.333 are Gambhīra -- cārin and Anutīra -- cārin. Udda
Udda2
[for uda2?] water, in passage amakkhito uddena, amakkhito semhena, a. ruhirena i. e. not stained by any kind of (dirty) fluid D ii.14; M iii.122. Uddaṇḍa
Uddaṇḍa
[ud + daṇḍa] a kind of building (or hut), in which the sticks stand out (?) Nd1 226 = Nd2 976 (uṭanda) = Vism 25 (v. l. BB uṭṭanda). Uddaya
Uddaya1
[a (metric?) variant of udaya] gain, advantage, profit Vv 847 (see udaya); J v.39 (satt˚ -- mahāpaduma of profit to beings?). Uddaya
Uddaya2
in compounds dukkh˚ and sukh˚. see udraya. Uddalomī
Uddalomī
[ = udda + lomin beaver -- hair -- y ] a woollen coverlet with a fringe at each end D i.7 (= ubhato dasaŋ uṇṇā -- mayɔ attharaṇaŋ; keci ubhato uggata -- pupphaŋ ti vadanti DA i.87); A i.181. See however uddha -- lomin under uddhaŋ. Uddasseti
Uddasseti
[ud + dasseti, Caus. of dassati1] to show, reveal, point out, order, inform, instruct D ii.321 sq.; M i.480 (read uddassessāmi for conjectured reading uddisissāmi?); ii.60 (v. l. uddiset˚) A iv.66. Uddāna
Uddāna
(nt.) [fr. ud + dā, dayati to bind: see under dāma] a group of Suttas, used throughout the Vinaya Piṭaka, with ref. to each Khandhaka, in the Saŋyutta, the Anguttara and other books (cp. Miln 407) for each group of about ten Suttas (cp. DhsA 27). The Uddāna gives, in a sort of doggerel verse, at the end of each group, the titles of the Suttas in the group. It may then be roughly rendered "summary". If all the Uddānas were collected together, they would form a table of contents to the whole work. -- Otherwise the word has only been found used of fishes "macchuddāna" (so J ii.425; DhA ii.132). It then means a group of fish placed apart for for sale in one lot. Perhaps a set or a batch would meet the case. Uddāpa
Uddāpa
[*udvāpa] foundation of a wall, in stock phrase daḷh˚ etc. D iii.101; S v.194 = also at J vi.276 (= pākāra -- vatthu C.). Kern, Toev. s. v. refers it to Sk. ud -- vapati to dig out, and translates "moat, ditch". The meaning "wall" or "mound" however harmonises quite well with the der. fr. "digging", cp. E. dike > Ger. Teich. See also uddāma 2. Uddāpavant
Uddāpavant
(adj.) [fr. uddāpa] having a wall or embank- ment S ii.106 (v. l. uddhā˚); C. expls. as apato uggatattā J iv.536 (so read with v. l. for T. uddhā pavatta; C. expls. as tīra -- mariyādā -- bandhana). Uddāma
Uddāma
[fr. ud + dā as in uddāna, see dāma] 1. (adj.) "out of bounds", unrestrained, restless Dāvs v.56 (˚sāgara). -- 2. (n.) wall, enclosure (either as "binding in", protecting or as equivalent of uddāpa fr. ud + vam "to throw up" in sense of to throw up earth, to dig a mound = udvapati) in phrase aṭṭāla -- uddāma -- parikhâdīni watchtowers, enceintes, moats etc. DhA iii.488. Uddāraka
Uddāraka
[?] some wild animal J v.416 (reading uncertain, expln. ditto). Uddāla
Uddāla
= uddālaka, only as Np. J iv.298 sq. Uddālaka
Uddālaka
[fr. ud + dal, see dalati] the Uddāla tree, Cassia Fistula (also known as indīvara), or Cordia Myxa, lit. "uprooter" Vv 67 ( = vātaghātako yo rājarukkho ti pi vuccati VvA 43); J iv.301 (˚rukkha), 440; v.199 (= vātaghātaka C.), 405; vi.530 (so read for uddh˚); VvA 197 (˚puppha = indīvara); PvA 169. Uddālanaka
Uddālanaka
(adj.) [fr. uddālana > ud + dāleti] referring to destruction or vandalism, tearing out Vin iv.169. Uddāleti
Uddāleti
[ud + dāleti, Caus. of dal, see dalati] to tear out or off Vin iv.170; S iv.178. Uddiṭṭha
Uddiṭṭha
[pp. of uddisati] -- 1. pointed out, appointed, set out, put forth, proposed, put down, codified M i.480 (pañha); Sn p. 91 (id. = uddesa -- mattenɔ eva vutta, na vibhangena SnA 422); SnA 372. -- 2. appointed, dedicated J v.393 (an ˚ŋ pupphaŋ = asukassa nāma dassāmī ti); PvA 50; KhA 138. Uddiya
Uddiya
(adj.) [Sk. udīcya?] northern, northwestern (i. e. Nepalese) J iv.352 (˚kambala) in expln. of uddiyāna [Sk. udīcīna?]. See udicca & cp. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1889, 202, and last not least Lüders in K. Z. 1920 (vol. 49), 233 sq. The word is not sufficiently cleared up yet. Uddisati
Uddisati
[ud + disati] -- to propose, point out, ap- point, allot Dh 353, cp. DhA iv.72; Miln 94 (satihāraŋ); fut. uddisissati M i.480 (ex conj., is probably to be changed to uddassessati, q. v.). -- 2. to specify PvA 22 (aor. uddisi), 25 ( = nīyādeti, dadāti), 27. -- Pass. uddissati to show oneself, to be seen Pv iii.212, and uddissiyati PvA 46. -- pp. uddiṭṭha (q. v.). -- Caus. II. uddisāpeti (q. v.). -- ger. uddissa (q. v.) Uddisāpeti
Uddisāpeti
[Caus. II. of uddisati] -- 1. to make recite Vin i.47 = ii.224; iv.290. -- 2. to dedicate PvA 35 (v. l. ādisati). Uddissa
Uddissa
(indecl.) [orig. ger. of uddisati] -- 1. indicating, with signs or indications J iii.354 = Miln 230. -- 2. prep w. acc.: (a) (lit.) pointing to, tending towards, towards, to PvA 250 Suraṭṭha -- visayaŋ). -- (b) (appld.) with reference to, on account of, for, concerning PvA 8 (pete), 17 (= ārabbha), 49 (ratanattayaŋ), 70 (maŋ), 146.

-- kata allotted to, specified as, meant for (cp. odissa & odissaka) Vin i.237 (maŋsa); ii.163; D i.166 = A i. 295 = Pug 55 (viz. bhikkhā); M i.77; KhA 222; J ii. 262, 263 (bhatta). Uddissana
Uddissana
(nt.) [fr. uddissa] dedication PvA 27, 80. Uddīpanā
Uddīpanā
(f.) [fr. ud + dīpeti] explanation, reasoning, argument Vism 27 (for ukkācanā). Uddīyati, Uddīyana
Uddīyati,
Uddīyana ete. see udrī˚. -- 136 -- Uddeka
Uddeka
[Sk. udreka, ud + ric] vomit, spouting out, erup- tion Vism 261 (where id. p. at KhA 61 reads uggāra); ˚ŋ dadāti to vomit Vin i.277. Uddekanika
Uddekanika
(adj.) [uddeka + ana + ika] spouting, ejecting M ii.39 (maṇika; perhaps better to be read with v. l. as udañjanika = udañcanika fit for drawing up water). Uddesa
Uddesa
[fr. uddisati] -- 1. pointing out, setting forth, proposition, exposition, indication, programme M iii.223 (u. uddiṭṭha), 239; S iv.299; SnA 422. -- 2. explanation S v.110 sq.; sa -- uddesa (adj.) with (the necessary) expln., point by point, in detail, D i.13, 81; iii.111; A iii.418; It 99; Nd2 6171. -- 3. samaṇuddesa one marked as a Samaṇa, a novice (cp. sāmaṇera) D i.151; M iii.128; A iv.343; uddesa -- bhatta special or specified food Vin i.58 = 96, cp. ii.175, propounding, recitation, repetition Vin i.50 = ii.228 (uddesena paripucchāya ovādena by recitation, questioning & advice); ii.219 (˚ŋ dadāti to hold a recitation + paripucchaŋ d); A iv.114 (+ paripucchā); v.50 sq. (pañho, u. veyyākaraṇaŋ); Nd2 3852 (+ paripucchā); J i.116; Miln 257 (+paripucchā). ek'uddesa a single repetition Vin iii.47; A iii.67, 180; Miln 10, 18. Uddesaka
Uddesaka
(adj.) [fr. uddesa] assigning, defining, determining, in bhatt˚ one who sorts out the food VvA 92. Uddesika
Uddesika
(adj. nt.) [fr. uddesa] -- 1. indicating, referring to, respecting, defining; (nt.) indication, definition D ii. 100 (mam ˚bhikkhusangho); Miln 159 (id.); KhA 29. -> Esp. as -- ˚ in phrase aṭṭha -- vass' uddesika -- kāla the time referring to (or indicating) the 8th year, i. e. at the age of 8 PvA 67; soḷasa -- vass˚ M i.88; J i.456; VvA 259. In the same application padesika (q. v.). -- 2. memorial J iv.228 (cetiya). Uddehaka
Uddehaka
(adj.) [fr. ud + dih, see deha] "bubbling up", only adv. ˚ŋ in cpd. pheṇ˚ (paccamāna) boiling) under production of scum (foam) M iii.167; A i.141; J iii.46; Miln 357. Uddosita
Uddosita
[Derivation uncertain. Cp. Müller P. Gr. 42] shed, stable (?) Vin i.140; ii.278; iii.200; iv.223. Uddha
Uddha
(adj.) [possibly a combn. of aḍḍha2 & uddhaŋ; or should we read aḍḍh˚ or vuḍḍh˚?] in phrase uddhehi vatthehi in rich, lofty clothes J iv.154 (of a devatā; passage may be corrupt). Uddhaŋ
Uddhaŋ
(& Uddha˚) (indecl.) [nt. of adj. *uddha = Sk. ūrdhva high; to Idg. *ared(h) as in Lat. arduus steep, or *ured as in Sk. vardhate to raise, Gr. o) rqo/s straight] high up, on top, above (adv. & prep.). -- On uddhaŋ in spatial, temporal, ethical & psychological application see in detail Nd2 155. -- I. (adv.). -- A. (of space) up, aloft, on top, above (opp. adho) Vin iii.121; KhA 248 (= upari). -- In contrast with adho (above > below) D i.23, 153, 251; Vism 176 (u. adho tiriyaŋ expld.); DA i.98 (see also adho). -- Esp. with ref. to the points of the compass as "in zenith" (opp. adho "in nadir"), e. g. at D i.222 ("straight up"); It 120; J i.20. -> B. (of time) in future, ahead, hence Sn 894; Nd1 303 (u. vuccati anāgataŋ). -- II. (prep. with abl. & instr.). -> A. (of space) in phrase uddhaŋ pādatalā adho kesamatthakā (above the soles & below the scalp) D ii. 293, 294; iii.104; A iii.323; v.109. -- B. (of time) after, hence Pv i.1012 (u. catūhi māsehi after 4 months = catunnaŋ māsānaŋ upari PvA 52); PvA 147 (sattahi vassa satehi u., meaning here 700 years ago, cp. ito in similar application, meaning both past & future), 148 (sattāhato u. after a week; uttari v. l. BB.). -- In cpds. uddha˚ & uddhaŋ˚ (see below). The reading udhogalaŋ at PvA 104 is to corrected to adho˚. -- III. Note (cp. Trenckner, Notes 60). In certain cases we find ubbhaŋ for uddhaŋ. Notice the foll.: ubbhaŋ yojanaŋ uggato J v.269; ubbhaṭṭhako hoti "standing erect" D i.167; M i.78; ubbhamukhu "mouth (face) upwards", turned upwards S iii.238; Miln 122.

(1) uddha˚ in: -- gāmin going upwards S v.370 sq. cchiddaka ( -- vātapānā) (windows) having openings above DhA i.211. -- pāda heels upwards either with adhosira (head down) A iv.133, or avansira Vv 5225 (v. l.); J i. 233. -- mukha turned upwards, adv. ˚ā upwards or backwards (of a river) Miln 295 (Gangā u. sandati; in same context ubbha˚ Miln 122). -- lomin "having hair on the upper side", a kind of couch or bed (or rug on a couch) Vin i.192 = ii.163, 169. So is prob. to be read for uddalomī (q. v.). -- virecana action of an emetic (lit. throwing up) (opp. adho -- virecana of a purgative) D i.12 (= uddhaŋ dosānaŋ nīharaṇaŋ DA i.98); DhA iii.126; SnA 86. -- suddha clean on top Vin ii.152. -- (2) uddhaŋ˚ in: -- āghātanika an after -- deather, a teacher who maintains that the soul exists after death D i.31, cp. DA i.119. -- pāda feet up (& head down) Vv 5225 (v. l. uddha˚). -- bhāgiya belonging to the upper part (opp. oram˚): see saŋyojana. -- virecana v. l. BB. at SnA 86 for uddha˚. -- sara(ŋ) (adv.) with raised or lofty voice, lit. "sounding high" Sn 901, see Nd1 315. -- sota (adj.) one who is going upwards in the stream of life [cp. BSk. ūrdhvasrotaḥ Mahāvy § 46] D iii.237; S v.69, 201, 205, 237, 285, 314, 378; A i.233; ii.134; iv.14 sq., 73 sq., 146, 380; v.120; Dh 218; Th ii.12; Pug 17; Nett 190; DhA iii.289; lit. up -- stream at J iii.371. Uddhaŋsati
Uddhaŋsati
[ud + dhaŋsati, in lit. meaning of dhvaŋs, see dhaŋsati] to fly out or up (of dust) Vv 784 na tatthɔ uddhaŋsati rajo; expld. by uggacchati VvA 304. -- pp. uddhasta (q. v.). Uddhagga
Uddhagga
(adj.) [uddha + agga] -- 1. standing on end (lit. with raised point). bristling, of the hair of a Mahāpurisa D ii.18 = iii.144, 154. -- 2. prominent, conspicuous J iv.345 (˚rājin having prominent stripes, of a lion). -> 3. pointing upwards (of the lower teeth, opp. adhagga point -- downwards) J v.156 (= heṭṭhima -- danta C.). -> 4. lofty, beneficial (of gifts) A ii.68 (dakkhiṇā); iii.46 (id.) see also uddhaggika. Uddhaggika
Uddhaggika
(adj.) [cp. uddhagga) aiming at or resulting in a lofty end, promoting spiritual welfare, beneficial (of gifts) D i.51 = iii.66; S i.90; A iii.259; DA i.158. Uddhacca
Uddhacca
(nt.) [substantivised ger. of ud -- dharati, ud + dhṛ, cp. uddhaṭa & uddhata. The BSk. auddhatya shows a strange distortion. BSk. uddhava seems to be also a substitute for uddhacca] over -- balancing, agitation, excitement, distraction, flurry (see on meaning Dialogues i.82; Dhs trsln. 119; Cpd. 18, 45, 83). A i.256, 282; iii.375, 421, 449; iv.87; v.142, 145, 148; D iii.234; S v.277 sq.; DhSA 260; SnA 492 (in sense of "haughtiness"? for Sn 702 uṇṇata); Nd1 220, 501; Ps i.81, 83; ii.9, 97 sq.; 119, 142, 145, 169, 176; Pug 18, 59; Dhs 427, 429 (cittassa), 1159, 1229, 1426, 1482; Vbh 168, 369, 372, 377; Vism 137, 469 ( = uddhata -- bhāva); Sdhp 459. Together with kukkucca "flurry or worry" u. is enumd. as the 4th of the 5th nīvaraṇa's and as the 9th of the 10 saŋyojana's (q. v.), e. g. at D i.71, 246; iii.49, 234, 269, 278; S i.99; A i.3; iii.16; v.30; Nd2 379; Dhs 1486. Uddhaja
Uddhaja
(adj.) [uddhaŋ + ja] upright, honest M i.386 (v. l. for pannadhaja). Uddhaṭa
Uddhaṭa
[pp. of uddharati2; see also uddhata, uddhita & uddhacca] -- 1. pulled out J ii.26. -- 2. pulled out, destroyed, extirpated, in phrase˚ dāṭha with its fangs removed (of a snake) J i.505; ii.259; vi.6. -- 3. cut off or out Miln 231 (uddhaṭ -- uddhaṭe ālope whenever a piece is cut off). -- 4. drawn out, lifted out, raised J i.143; sass˚kāle at the time of lifting the corn; v.49 (˚paŋsu). Cp. uddhaṭa -- bīja castrated J ii.237. Uddhata
Uddhata
[pp. of uddharati1; as to its relation to uddhaṭa see remarks under uddhacca]. -- 1. lifted up, raised, risen, high (of the sun, only in this special phrase u. aruṇo) Vin ii.236; Ud 27 (vv. ll. uggata & uddhasta). -> 2. unbalanced, disturbed, agitated, shaken S i.61 (+ unnaḷa "muddled in mind & puffed up" trsl.), 204 (id.) v.112 (līnaŋ cittaŋ uddhataŋ c.), 114 = Vism 133, 269; A ii.23; iii.391; v.93 sq., 142, 163; It 72; Th 2, 77 (so read with v. l., T. has uddhaṭa; ThA 80 explns. as nānɔ ārammaṇe vikkhitta -- citta asamāhita); Nd2 433 (+ avūpasanta -- citto); Pug 35 (= uddhaccena samannāgata Pug A 217). -- an˚ well balanced, not shaken, calm, subdued M i.470; A ii.211; v.93 sq., 104; Sn 850 (= uddhaccavirahita SnA 549); Dh 363 (= nibbutacitto DhA iv.93); J v.203; Vv 648. -- See also ubbhata. -- 137 -- Uddhana
Uddhana
(nt.) [*ud -- dhvana, fr. ud + dhvan instead of dhmā, for uddhamana (*uddhmāna Sk.), see dhamati] an oven J i.33, 68, 71, 346; ii.133, 277; iii.178, 425; v.385, 471; ii.218 (kammār˚), 574; Sn p. 105; Miln 118, 259; Vism 171, 254; DhA i.52, 224; ii.3; iii.219 (˚panti); iv.176. Uddhamma
Uddhamma
[ud + dhamma] false doctrine Dpvs v.19. Uddharaṇa
Uddharaṇa
(nt.) [abstr. fr. uddharati] -- 1. taking up, lifting, raising Miln 307 (sass˚ -- samaya the time of gathering the corn; to uddharati 1. but cp. in same meaning uddhaṭa from uddharati 2). DA i.192. -- 2. pulling or drawing out (cp. uddharati 2) Vin iii.29. See also ubbahati2. Uddharati
Uddharati
[ud + dharate of dhṛ] -- 1. (in this meaning confused with ubbharati from bṛh, cp. interchange of ddh & bbh in uddha: ubbha, possibly also with bṛh: see abbahati and cp. ubbahati1). (a) to raise, rise, lift up; hence: to raise too much, overbalance, shake etc.: see pp. uddhata (*udbhṛta) & cp. uddhacca & uddharaṇa. -- (b) to take up, lift, to remove, take away D i.135 (baliŋ uddhareyya raise a tax); M i.306 (hiyaŋ); J i.193 (aor. poet. udaddhari = uddharitvā kaḍḍhitvā pavaṭṭesi C.); VvA 157. -- Caus. uddharāpeti Vin ii.180, 181; J vi.95. -- 2. to pull out, draw out (syn. with abbahati, q. v. for comparison) D i. 77 (ahiŋ karaṇḍā uddhareyya, further on ahi k. ubbhato) PvA 115 (= abbahati); imper. uddharatha J ii.95 (for abbaha); Dh 327 (attānaŋ duggā); aor. uddhari J iii.190 (ankena); cond. uddhare Th 1, 756; ger. uddharitvā D i.234; Nd1 419; SnA 567; DhA iv.26; PvA 139, & (poet.) uddhatvā J iv.406 (cakkhūni, so read for T. laddhatvañ cakkhūni = akkhīni uddharitvā C.). -- pp. uddhaṭa & ubbhata. Uddharin
Uddharin
īn an˚ Sn 952 see under niṭṭhurin. Uddhasetā
Uddhasetā
see uddhasta. Uddhasta
Uddhasta
[pp. of uddhaŋseti, see dhaŋsati & cp. anuddhaŋ seti] attacked, perhaps "spoilt" (smothered!) in combn. with pariyonaddha (covered) at A i.202 (T. uddhaseta, expld. by upari dhaŋsita C.); ii.211 (vv. ll. uddhasotā for ˚etā & uddhaŋso). -- Registered with an˚ as anuddhasta in Index vol. to A, should however be read as anuddhasta (q. v.). Cp. also viddhasta. Uddhāra
Uddhāra
(& ubbhāra in Vin.; e. g. ii.255, cp. 256 where ubbhata unterchanges with uddhāra) [fr. uddharati1] -> 1. taking away, withdrawal, suspension, in kaṭhin˚ (q. v.) Vin i.255 sq.; iii.262; iv.287; v.177 sq. -- 2. a tax, levy, debt, in phrase ˚ŋ sodheti (so read for sādheti loc. cit.) to clear up a debt J ii.341; iii.106; iv.45, 247. uddhāra -- sodhana (v. l. sādh˚) the clearance of a debt J ii.341. -- 3. synopsis or abstract Dpvs v.37 (atth˚ of the meaning of the Vin.); SnA 237 (atth˚ + pad˚). Uddhālaka
Uddhālaka
at J vi.530 is to be read uddālaka. Uddhita
Uddhita
[a by -- form of uddhaṭa] pulled out, destroyed, extirpated, removed J vi.237 (˚pphala = uddhaṭa -- bīja C.). Uddhunāti
Uddhunāti
[ud + dhunāti] to shake VvA 279. Uddhumāta
Uddhumāta
(adj.) [pp. of uddhumāyati] swollen, bloated, risen (of flour) A i.140; Sn 200 (of a corpse); SnA 100 sq., 171; DA i.114. Cp. next. Uddhumātaka
Uddhumātaka
(adj.) [prec. + ka] swollen, bloated, puffed up M i.88 (of a corpse; + vinīlaka); Vism 178, 193 (id.); J i.164 (udaraŋ ˚ŋ katvā), 420 (˚nimitta appearance of being blown up); Miln 332; DhA i.307. See also subha & asubha.

-- saññā the idea of a bloated corpse A ii.17; Dhs 263; Miln 331; cp. Dhs trsln. 69. Uddhumātatta
Uddhumātatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. uddhumāta] swollen con- dition Vism 178. Uddhumāyati
Uddhumāyati
[ud + dhmā, see dhamati & remarks on uddhacca] to be blown up, to swell up, rise; aor. ˚āyi J iii.26; VvA 76; ger. ˚ājitvā J ii.18; DhA i.126. -- pp. uddhumāta & ˚āyita (q. v.). Uddhumāyana
Uddhumāyana
(nt.) [fr. uddhumāyati] puffing, blowing or swelling up J iv.37. Uddhumāyika
Uddhumāyika
(adj.) [cp. uddhumāyita] like blowing or swelling up, of blown -- up appearance M i.142 sq. Uddhumāyita
Uddhumāyita
[pp. of uddhumāyati] swollen, bloated, puffed up VvA 218. Udrabhati
Udrabhati
[? doubtful in form & etym.] to eat M i.306 (upacikā bījaŋ na udrabheyyuŋ; vv. ll. on p. 555: udrah˚, udah˚, udāh˚, uddhah˚, uṭṭhah˚; udraheyyun ti khādeyyuŋ C. (udrabhāsane, Dhātum.)). -- Note. The Dhātupāṭha, 212, and the Dhātu -- mañjūsā, 311, explain udrabha by adane, eating. Udraya
Udraya
(& Uddaya) ( -- ˚) [perhaps a bastard form of uddaya = udaya yielding etc. The BSk. usually renders P. dd by dr. If so, then equal to adaya & uddaya1] coming forth, result, consequence. Usually in foll. two phrases: dukkh˚ (yielding pain) & sukh˚ (giving pleasure); e. g. as dukkh˚ at M i 415; J iv.398; v.119 (v. l. ˚indriya); Pv i.1110 (so read for T. ˚andriya, cp. undriyati as v. l. for udāyati); Ps ii.79 (kammaŋ); as sukh˚ at J v.389 (v. l. ˚indriya); DhA ii.47 (˚uddaya). Both dukkh˚ & sukh˚ at Ps i.80. Besides these in foll. combns.: kaṭuk˚ causing bitterness J v.241; sa˚ with (good or evil) consequences S ii.29; M i.271. Udrīyati
Udrīyati
(& Uddīyati) [cp. Sk. ud dīryate, Pass of ud + dṛ, dṛṇōti, and P. darati & dalati; see also avadīyati which may be a Sanskritised oddīyati for uddīyati] to burst, split open, break, fall to pieces Vin i.148 (vihāro udriyati); ii 174 (id); iv.254 (i); D i.96 (˚īyissati = bhijjhissati DA i 96, so read for udāyati); S i 113, 119. Udrīyana & Uddīyana
Udrīyana
& Uddīyana (nt.) [fr. udrīyati] breaking or splitting open, bursting J i.72; DhA ii.7 (˚sadda), 100 (paṭhavī -- uddīyana -- sadda; vv. ll. uddri˚, udri˚). Undura
Undura
[etym ?] a rat Vin i.209; ii.148, 152; iii.151; J i.120; Miln 23, 363. Spelt undūra at Vism 62. Unna
Unna
[pp. of ud, unatti & undati, see udaka] in phrase pīti -- vegenɔunna "bubbling up with the excitement of joy", overflowing with joy Mhvs 19, 29 (expld. by uggatacitta i. e. lofty, exalted C.). -- It may however be better & more in keeping with Pāli word -- formation as well as with meaning & interpretation to explain the word as ud + na, taking ˚na as abs. (base) -- form of nam, thus lit. "bent up", i. e. raised, high, in meaning of unnata. Cp. the exactly similar formation, use & meaning of ninna = ninnata. Thus unna / ninna would correspond to unnata / ninnata. Unnaka
Unnaka
[etym.?] a species of perfume J vi 537 (gloss kuṭantaja). Unnangala
Unnangala
(adj.) [ud + nangala, on meaning of ud in this case see ud] in phrase ˚ŋ karoti, according to Morris, J P T S 1887, 120 "to make an up -- ploughing, to turn up etc.", but more aptly with C. on J vi.328 to make "out -- plough" (not "up -- plough") in sense of out -- of -- work, i. e. to make the people put their ploughs (or work in general) away and prepare for a festival; to take a holiday. A typical "Jātaka" -- phrase; J i.228; ii.296, 367; iii. 129, 414; iv.355; vi.328; DhA iii.10. -- 138 -- Unnata
Unnata
[pp. of unnamati. Besides this form we find uṇṇata in fig. special meaning, q. v.] raised, high, lofty, in high situation (opp. oṇata) Pv iv.66 ( = sāmin PvA 262); J i.71; ii369; vi 487; Miln 146, 387; DA i.45 See also unnaḷa. Unnati
Unnati
(f) [fr. unnamati; cp. uṇṇati] rising, lifting up, elevation Miln 387 (˚avanati). Unnadati
Unnadati
[ud + nadati] to resound, shout out, roar J i.110; ii 90; iii.271, 325; Miln 18; aor. unnadi J i 74; Miln 13. -- Caus. unnādeti (q. v.). Unnama
Unnama
[fr ud + nam; cp. also uṇṇama in fig. meaning] rising ground, elevation, plateau Kh vii.7 = Pv i.57 (= thala unnata -- padesa PvA 29); Miln 349; DA i.154. Unnamati
Unnamati
[ud + namati, see uṇṇamati in fig. meaning] to rise up, ascend Miln 117 (oṇamati +); Vism 306. -- Caus. unnāmeti (q. v.). -- pp. unnara & uṇṇata (q. v.). Unnala & Unnaḷa
Unnala
& Unnaḷa (adj.) [Bdhgh. has ud + nala; but it is either a dissimilated form for *ullala (n > l change freq., cp. P. nangala > lāngala; nalāṭa > lalaṭa) from ud + lal to sport, thus meaning "sporting, sporty, wild" etc.; or (still more likely) with Kern, Toev. s. v. a dial. form of unnata P. uṇṇata, although the P. Commentators never thought of that. Cp. with this the BSk. unnata in same stock phrase uddhata unnata capala M Vastu i.305, and the Marathic Prk. mula = Sk. mṛta, Pischel, Gr. § 244. To these may be added P. celakedu > cetakedu J vi.538] showing off, insolent, arrogant, proud, haughty, in phrase uddhata unnaḷa capala M i.32; S i.61 = 204 (trsld. as "muddled in mind, puffed up, vain", expld. as uggata -- nala uddhaṭa -- tuccha -- māna K. S. 318); A i.70, 266; ii.26; iii 199, 355, 391; It 113 (+ asamāhita); Dh 292 (+ pamatta; expld. as "māna -- naḷaŋ ukkhipitvā caraṇena unnala" DhA iii.452); Th 1, 634; Pug 35 (= uggatanaḷo tuccha -- mānaŋ ukkhipitvā ti attho PugA 217). Unnahanā
Unnahanā
(f.) [ud + nah, see nayhati] flattering, tying or pushing oneself on to somebody, begging Vism 27. Unnāda
Unnāda
[fr. ud + nad] shout, shouting J ii 405. Unnādin
Unnādin
(adj.) [fr. ud + nad] shouting out; resounding, noisy, loud, tumultuous Vin iii.336; D i.95, 143, 178; J ii.216. Unnādeti
Unnādeti
[Caus. of unnadati] to make resound J i.408 (paṭhaviŋ), ii.34. Unnāmin
Unnāmin
(adj) [ud + nam in Caus. form] raising or rising; in combn. with ninnāmin raised & bent, high & low A iv.237 (of cultivated land). Unnāmeti
Unnāmeti
(unn˚) [Caus. of unnamati] to raise DhsA 5; written uṇṇameti (with a for ā before mutes & liquids) at Sn 206 (inf. uŋṇametave). Upa
Upa
-- [Vedic upa; Av. upa on, up; Gr. u(po/ under, u(pe/r over; Lat. sub fr. * (e)ks -- upo; Goth. uf under & on; Ohg. ūf = Ags. up = E. up; Oir. fo under. See also upari] prefix denoting nearness or close touch (cp. similarly ā), usually with the idea of approach from below or rest on top, on, upon, up, by. -- In compn. a upa is always contracted to upa, e. g. devūpaṭṭhāna, lokûpaga, puññûpatthambhita. -- Meanings: (1) (Rest): on upon, up -- : ˚kiṇṇa covered over; ˚jīvati live on (cp. anu˚); ˚tthambhita propped up, sup -- ported; ˚cita heaped up, ac -- cumulated; ˚dhāreti hold or take up; ˚nata bent on; ˚nissaya foundation; ˚nissita depending on etc. -- (2) (Aim): (out) up to (the speaker or hearer); cp. the meanings developed out of this as "higher, above" in upara, upari, upama = Lat. superus, supremus E. g. ˚kaḍḍhati drag on to; ˚kappati come to, accrue; ˚kappana ad -- ministering; ˚kāra service to; ˚kkhata administered; ˚gacchati go to, ap -- proach (cp. upâtigacchati); ˚disati ad -- vise; ˚dhāvati run up to: ˚nadati to sound out; ˚nikkhamati come out up to; ˚nisevita gone on to or after; ˚neti bring on to; etc. -- (3) (Nearness): close by, close to, near, "ad -- "; e. g. ˚kaṇṇaka close to the ear; ˚cāra ap -- plication; ˚ṭṭhāna at -- tending; ṭṭhita ap -- proached; ˚tiṭṭhati stand by, look after; ˚dduta urged; ˚nāmeti place close to; ˚nibandhati tie close to; ˚nisīdati sit close to or down by. -- (4) (Intensive use): quite, altogether, "up"; e. g. ˚antika quite near; ˚chindati cut up. -- (5) (Diminutive use as in Lat. subabsurdus; Gr. u(po/leukos whitish; Oir. fo -- dord; Cymr. go -- durdd murmur): nearly, about, somewhat, a little, secondary, by -- , miniature, made after the style of, e. g. ˚aḍḍha about half; ˚kacchaka like a little hollow; ˚kaṇḍakin (= ˚paṇḍukin? whitish); ˚deva a minor god; ˚nibha somewhat similar to; ˚nila bluish; upapurohita minor priest; uparajja viceroyalty; upalohitaka, uparopa; ˚vana a little forest. etc. Note. The nearest semantie affinity of upa is ā˚. Upaka
Upaka
( -- ˚) [for ˚upaga] found only in combn. kulûpaka where second k stands for g. through assimilation with first k. Only with ref. to a bhikkhu = one who frequents a certain family (for the purpose of getting alms), a family friend, associate Vin i.192, 208; iii.84; S ii.200 sq.; A iii.258 sq.; Nd2 3851; Pv iii.85; PvA 266. -- f. kulûpikā (bhikkhunī) Vin ii.268; iv.66. -- Sporadic in gayhūpaka (for ˚ûpaga) at J iv.219. Upakaccha
Upakaccha
(˚ -- ) [upa + kacchā2] only in combn. with ˚antare lit. "in between the hips or loins or arm -- pits", in 3 phrases (cp. Kern, Toev. ii.140 s. v.), viz. upakacchantare katvā taking (it) between the legs J i.63, 425, khipitvā throwing (it) into the armpits J v.211 & ṭhapetvā id. J v.46. Upakacchaka
Upakacchaka
[upa + kacchā + ka, cp. Sk. upakakṣa in diff. meaning] (1) [ = upa + kaccha1 + ka] like an enclosure, adj. in the form of a hollow or a shelter J i.158. (2) [= upa + kacchā2 + ka] like the armpit, a hollow, usually the armpit, but occasionally it seems to be applied to the hip or waist Vin iii.39; iv.260 (pudendum muliebre); Miln 293; J v.437 (= kaccha2). Upakaṭṭha
Upakaṭṭha
(adj.) [pp. of upa + karś to draw up or near to] approaehing, near J iv.213 (yāva upakaṭṭha -- majjhantikā till nearly noon). Usually in foll. two phrases: upakaṭṭhe kāle when the time was near, i. e. at the approach of meal time Vin iv.175; VvA 6, 294; and upakaṭṭhāya vassûpanāyikāya as Lent was approaching Vin i.253; PvA 42; VvA 44. Cp. vūpakaṭṭha. -- loc. upakaṭṭhe as adv. or prep. "near, in the neighbourhood of" Nd2 639 ( = santike); Dāvs v.41 (so read for upakaṇṭhe). Upakaḍḍhati
Upakaḍḍhati
[upa + kaḍḍhati, cp. upakaṭṭha] to drag or pull on to (w. dat.), or down to D i.180 (+ apakaḍḍhati); iii.127 (id.); M i.365; S i.49; ii.99; Dh 311 (nirayāya = niraye nibbattapeti DhA iii.484). Upakaṇṭha
Upakaṇṭha
at Dāvs v.41 is to be corrected to upakaṭṭha. Upakaṇḍakin
Upakaṇḍakin
(Pv ii.113) see under uppaṇḍukin. Upakaṇṇa
Upakaṇṇa
(˚ -- ) [upa + kaṇṇa] lit. (spot) near the ear, only in oblique cases or in der. ˚ka (q. v.) Th 1, 200 (upakannamhi close to the ear, under the ear). Upakannaka
Upakannaka
(adj.) [upa + kaṇṇa + ka) by the ear, being at or on the ear of somebody, only in loc. as adv. upakaṇṇake secretly Vin i.237; ii.99; iv.20, 271; S i.86; A iii.57; SnA 186; and in cpd. ˚jappin one who whispers into the ear (of another), spreader of reports A iii. 136. Cp. kaṇṇajappaka & kaṇṇajappana. -- 139 -- Upakappati
Upakappati
[upa + kappati] intrs.) to be beneficial to (w. dat.), to serve, to accrue S i.85; Pv i.44 ( = nippajjati PvA 19); i.57 (petānaŋ); i.104 (= viniyujjati PvA 49); J v.350; PvA 8, 29 (petānaŋ), 27 (id.), 241; Sdhp 501, 504. Upakappana
Upakappana
(nt.) [fr. upakappati] profit PvA 29 (dān˚), 49 (an˚). Upakappanaka
Upakappanaka
(adj.) [fr. upakappana] profitable J i.398; DhA ii.133. Upakaraṇa
Upakaraṇa
(nt.) [fr. upa + kṛ] help, service, support; means of existence, livelihood D ii.340; A ii.86; J i.7; PvA 60 (commodities), 133 (˚manussa, adj. suitable, fit); Sdhp 69. In general any instrument or means of achieving a purpose, viz. apparatus of a ship J iv.165; tunnavaya˚ a weaver's outfit J ii.364; dabb˚ fit to be used as wood Vism 120; dān˚ materials for a gift PvA 105 (so read & cp. upakkhaṭa); nahān˚ bathing requisites VvA 248; vitt˚ luxuries A v.264 sq., 283, 290 sq.; PvA 71. Upakaroti
Upakaroti
[upa + karoti] to do a service, serve, help, sup- port Th 2, 89 (aor. upakāsiŋ = anugaṇhiŋ santappesiŋ ThA 88). -- pp. upakkhaṭa (q. v.). Upakāra
Upakāra
[fr. upa + kṛ, cp. upakaraṇa] service, help, be- nefit, obligation, favour D iii.187 sq.; VvA 68; PvA 8, 18 (˚āya hoti is good for); Sdhp 283, 447, 530. -> bahûpakāra (adj.) of great help, very serviceable or helpful S iv.295; PvA 114. upakāraŋ karoti to do a favour, to oblige PvA 42, 88, 159 (kata); katûpakāra one to whom a service has been rendered PvA 116.

-- āvaha useful, serviceable, doing good PvA 86. Upakāraka
Upakāraka
(adj.) [fr. upakāra] serviceable, helping, effec- tive J v.99; Vism 534. -- f. upakārikā 1. benefactress, helper J iii.437. -- 2. fortification (strengthening of the defence) on a city wall D i.105, see DA i.274 & cp. parikkhāra; M i.86 ( = Nd2 1996). -- 3. (philosophy) = cause (that which is an aid in the persistence or happening of any given thing) Tikapaṭṭhāna i.11 Upakārin
Upakārin
(adj. -- n.) [fr. upakāra; cp. ASk. upakārin Jtm. 3142] a benefactor J iii.11; DA i.187; Sdhp 540, 546. Upakiṇṇa
Upakiṇṇa
[pp. of upakirati] strewn over with ( -- ˚), covered Vv 351 (rucak˚, so read for rājak˚; expld by okiṇṇa VvA 160). Upakiriyā
Upakiriyā
(f.) [fr. upa + kr] implement, ornament J v.408. Upakūjati
Upakūjati
[upa + kūjati] to sing to (of birds) J iv.296 (kūjantaŋ u. = replies w. song to the singing). -- pp. upakūjita (q. v.). Upakūjita
Upakūjita
( -- ˚) [pp. of upakūjati] resounding, filled with the hum or song of (birds) J iv.359; PvA 154. Upakūla
Upakūla
[upa + kūla] embankment, a river's bank, river- side J vi.26 (rukkhɔûpakūlaje the trees sprung up at its bank). Upakūlita
Upakūlita
[derivation uncertain] used of the nose in old age Th 2, 258 (jarāya paṭisedhikā viya says the commentary. Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 74 trsls. obstructed; Mrs. Rh. D. in "Sisters" takes it for upakūḷita and trsls. seared and shrivelled. So also Ed. Müller J R A S. 1919. 538. This is probably right; but Oldenberg, Pischel and Hardy all read upakūlita. Upakūḷita
Upakūḷita
[pp. of kūḍ, a variant of kuth, kvathati] singed, boiled, roasted J i.405 ("half -- roasted" = aḍḍhajjhāmaka C.). See also upakūsita. Upakūsita
Upakūsita
at J ii.134 is perhaps faulty for ˚kūḷita, which is suggested by C. expln. "kukkule jhāmo" and also by v. l. ˚kuṭhita (for kuṭṭhita boiled, sweltering, hot). The variant (gloss) ˚kūjita may have the same origin, viz. ˚kūḷita, was however interpreted (v. l. BB.) by ˚kupita (meaning "shaken, disturbed by fire"). Upakka
Upakka
see uppakka. Upakkanta
Upakkanta
[pp. of upakkamati] 1. attacked by ( -- ˚) Miln 112. -- 2. attacking, intriguing or plotting against (loc.) DA i.140. Upakkama
Upakkama
[fr. upa + kram] (1) lit. (a) going to, nearing, approach ( -- ˚) VvA 72. -- (b) attack Vin ii.195; Miln 157; DA i.69, 71. -- (2) applied (a) in general: doing, acting, undertaking, act S i.152 = Sn p. 126. -- (b) in special: ways, means, i. e. either good of helpful means, expedient, remedy Sn 575; Miln 151, 152; or bad or unfair means, treachery, plotting Th 1, 143; J iv.115 (punishment); Miln 135, 176. Upakkamati
Upakkamati
[upa + kamati of kram] to go on to, i e. (1) to attack M i.86 = Ud 71. -- (2) to undertake Vin iii.110, 111. -- (3) to begin Vin iv.316; DA i.318. Upakkamana
Upakkamana
(nt.) [fr. upa + kram] going near to, attacking J iv.12. Upakkitaka
Upakkitaka
[fr. upa + krī to buy] a buyer, hawker, dealer combd. with bhataka DhA i.119 = Ud 23 (C. expls. by "yo kahāpaṇâdīhi kiñci kināti so upakkitako ti vuccati"); Ps ii.196 (? T. upakkhittaka). Upakkiliṭṭha
Upakkiliṭṭha
[pp. of upa + klid or kliś, cp. kilesa & next] soiled, stained, depraved, impure S i.179; A i.207 (citta); Vism 13. Upakkilesa
Upakkilesa
[fr. upa + kliś] anything that spoils or obstructs, a minor stain, impurity, defilement, depravity, Vin ii.295 (cp. SnA 487 & VvA 134 & see abbha); M i.36, 91; D iii.42 sq., 49 sq., 201; S v.92 sq. (pañca cittassa upakkilesā), 108, 115; A i.10 (āgantuka), 207 (cittassa), 253 (oḷārika etc.); ii.53 (candima -- suriyānaŋ samaṇa -- brāhmaṇānaŋ), 67; iii.16 (jātarūpassa, cittassa), 386 sq.; iv.177 (vigatā); v.195; Ps i.164 (eighteen); Pug 60; Dhs 1059, 1136; Nett 86 sq., 94, 114 sq.; Sdhp 216, 225 (as upaklesa). Ten stains at Vism 633. Upakkuṭṭha
Upakkuṭṭha
[pp. of upakkosati] blamed, reproached, cen- sured, faulty D i.113 (an˚); Sn p. 115 (id.); J iii.523; DA i.211. Upakkosa
Upakkosa
[fr. upa + kruś] censure, reproach J vi.489. Upakkosati
Upakkosati
[upa + kosati] to scold, reprove, blame D i. 161; J iii.436, 523; iv.81, 317, 409. Upakkhaṭa & ˚ta
Upakkhaṭa
& ˚ta [pp. of upakaroti] done as a favour or service, given, prepared, administered D i.127 ( = sajjita DA i.294); Pv ii.84 (= sajjita PvA 107); J vi.139; Miln 156. Upakkhalati
Upakkhalati
[upa + khalati] to stumble, trip D ii.250; M ii.209; A iii.101; J iii.433. Upakkhalana
Upakkhalana
(nt.) [fr. prec.] stumbling, tripping Vism 500. Upakkhittaka
Upakkhittaka
at Ps ii.196 see upakk˚. Upakhandha
Upakhandha
[upa + khandha] lit. upper (side of the) trunk, back, shoulder J iv.210 ( = khandha C.). Upaga
Upaga
(always as ˚ûpaga) (adj.) [upa + ga] -- 1. going to, getting to, reaching, in phrases kāy˚, S ii.24; ākāsɔānañcɔ āyatan˚ etc. Ps i.84; kāy˚ S ii.24; brahmalok˚ Pv ii.1319; yathākamm˚ D i.82. -- 2. coming into, experiencing, having, as vikappan˚ according to option Vin iv.283; phal˚ bearing fruit, & pupph˚ having flowers, in flower PvA 275. -> 3. attached to, belonging to, being at J i.51 (hatth˚); VvA 12 (id. + pādûpaga). -- 4. in phrase gayh˚ lit. "accessible to the grip", acquisition of property, theft J iv.219 (T. gayhûpaka); Miln 325; DhA ii.29; PvA 4. -- 140 -- Upagacchati
Upagacchati
[upa + gacchati] -- 1. to come to, go to, approach, flow to (of water) D ii.12; PvA 12 (vasanaṭṭhānaŋ), 29, 32 (vāsaŋ) 132; ger. ˚gantvā PvA 70 (attano santikaŋ), & ˚gamma S ii.17, 20. -- 2. to undergo, go (in) to, to begin, undertake Sn 152 (diṭṭhiŋ anupagamma); J i.106 (vassaŋ); PvA 42 (id.); J i.200; niddaŋ upagacchati to drop off into sleep PvA 43 (aor. upagacchi, MSS. ˚gañchi), 105, 128. -- pp. upagata (q. v.). Upagaṇhanā
Upagaṇhanā
(f.) [abstr. of upa + gṛh] taking up, keeping up. meditating Miln 37. Upagaṇhāti
Upagaṇhāti
[upa + gaṇhāti] to take up (for meditation) Miln 38. Upagata
Upagata
[pp. of upagacchati] -- 1. gone to, come, ap- proached (intrs.) Sn 708 (āsan˚ = nisinna SnA 495); PvA 77 (santikaŋ), 78, 79 (petalokaŋ), 123. -- 2. undergoing, coming or come under, overpowered, suffering Nd2 under asita (= ajjhupagata in same conn. at A v.187); Pv i.1110 (khuppipās˚); PvA 60 (= abhibhūta). Upagamana
Upagamana
(nt.) [fr. upa + gam] approaching, going or coming to, undergoing, undertaking Vin ii.97 (+ ajjhupag˚); Nett 27; Vism 600; PvA 42 (vass˚). Upagamanaka
Upagamanaka
(adj.) [fr. upagamana] going to, one who goes to (with acc.) PvA 168 ( = ˚upaga). Upagaḷita
Upagaḷita
[pp. of upagaḷati] flowing out, spat or slobbered out J v.471 (˚khelo; v. l. paggharita). Upagāmin
Upagāmin
(adj.) [fr. upa + gam, cp. ˚upaga] going to, undergoing, experiencing A ii.6 (jāti jar˚). Upagūhati
Upagūhati
[upa + gūhati] to embrace J i.346, 349; ii.424; iii.437; v.157, 328, 384. -- ger. upaguyha J vi.300. Upagghāta
Upagghāta
[pp. of next] scented, smelled, kissed J vi.543 (C. sīsamhi upasinghita). Upagghāyati
Upagghāyati
[upa + ghrā, see ghāyati1] to smell at, in sense of "to kiss" J v.328 (also inf. upagghātuŋ). Upaghaṭṭita
Upaghaṭṭita
[pp. of upaghaṭṭeti] knocked or knocking against J i.26 (v.179). Upaghāta
Upaghāta
[fr. upa + (g)han, cp. ghāta] hurting, injuring, injury M iii.237; S ii.218; iv.323 sq.; A iii.173; Th 1, 583; Miln 274, 307, 347; DA i.273. an˚ not hurting others, kindness Dh 185. Upaghātana
Upaghātana
(nt.) [fr. upaghāta] hurting DhA iii.237 (an˚). Upaghātika
Upaghātika
(adj.) [fr. upaghāta] injuring, offending Vin ii.13. Upaghātin
Upaghātin
(adj.) [fr. upaghāta] hurting, injuring J iii.523. Upacaya
Upacaya
[fr. upa + ci, cp. caya & ācaya] heaping up, gathering, accumulation, heap. As t.t. with ref. to kamma "conservation", with ref. to body & form "integration". (See discussion & defin. at Cpd. 253; Dhs trsl. 195). -> D i.76 ( = odana = kummāsɔûpacayo, see under kāya); Dhs 582, 642 (rūpassa u. = āyatanānaŋ ācayo), 864; Vbh 147, 151 sq.; Kvu 520; Nett 113; Vism 449; DA i.220; PvA 198 (but v. l. paccayassa preferable). Upacarati
Upacarati
[upa + carati] to deal with, handle, use J vi. 180. -- pp. upaciṇṇa & upacarita (q. v.). Upacarita
Upacarita
[pp. of upacarati] practised, served, enacted, performed Miln 359, 360. Upacāra
Upacāra
[fr. upa + car] -- 1. approach, access Vin ii.120, 152; iv.304; J i.83, 172; DhsA 328 (phal˚). -- 2. habit, practice, conduct Vin ii.20 (dassan˚); SnA 140 (id.); J iii.280. -- 3. way, means application, use of (esp. of spells etc.) J iii.280 (mantassa); vi.180; Miln 153, 154 (dur˚ an evil spell); VvA 127 (gram. t.t. kāraṇ˚). -- 4. entrance, access, i. e. immediate vicinity or neighbourhood of ( -- ˚) J iv.182 (nagar˚); usually as gām˚ Vin i.109; iii.46; iv.230; KhA 77; SnA 83, 179. -- 5. attention, attendance Vin iv.272; J vi.180; Miln 154. -- 6. civility, polite behaviour J ii.56; vi.102. -- 7. On upacāra as philos, t.t. and its relation to appanā see Dhs trsln. 53, 54; Cpd. 55; Mystic p. xi. Thus used of samādhi (neighbourhood -- , or access -- concentration, distinguishing it from appanā -- samādhi) at Vism 85, 126, 144 and passim. Upacikā
Upacikā
(f.) [connected with Sk. upadīkā, although the relation is not quite clear. Attempts at explns. by Trencker Notes 62 (*utpādikā > upatikā > upacikā) & Kern, Toev. p. 102 (upacikā = Vedic upajīka, this fr. upajihikā for ˚dihikā, vv. ll. upadehihā & upadīkā). It may however be a direct der. from upa + ci, thus meaning "making heaps, a builder"] the termite or white ant Vin ii.113, 148, 152; iii.151; M i.306; J iii.320; iv.331; Miln 363, 392; Vism 62, DhA ii.25; iii.15. Upaciṇṇa
Upaciṇṇa
[pp. of upacarati] used, frequented, known (as value) J vi.180. Upacita
Upacita
[pp. of upacināti] -- 1. heaped up, accumulated, collected, produced (usually of puñña merit, & kamma karma) Sn 697; KhA 132; SnA 492; VvA 7, 271, 342; PvA 30, 150. -- 2. built up, conserved (of the body) Miln 232; DA i.220. Upacitatta
Upacitatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. upacita] storing up, accumulation Dhs 431. Upacināti
Upacināti
[upa + ci] -- 1. to collect, heap up, accumulate (puññaŋ or pāpaŋ) VvA 254; PvA 8, 241. -- 2. to concentrate, pay attention Th 1, 199 (C. upacetuŋ for ocetuŋ T.); J v.339 ( = oloketi). -- Pass. upaciyyati Th 1, 807. -- pp. upacita (q. v.). Upacca = uppacca
Upacca
= uppacca (q. v.) "flying up" (= uppatitvā PvA 103) at Th 2, 248 (= ThA 205, where v. l. and gloss upecca & upacca, expld. by upanetvā), as well as at Pv ii.717 (= PvA 103 where read upaccha; & gloss upacca & upecca). Upaccagā
Upaccagā
[upa + ati + agā of gam] 3rd sg. pret. of upâ- tigacchati (q. v.) to escape, pass, go by; to overcome Sn 333 (mā upaccagā = mā atikkami SnA 339) = Th 2, 5 (= mā atikkami ThA 12); Sn 636, 641, 827 (= accagā atikkanta Nd1 167); Dh 315, 412, 417 (= atikkanta DhA iv.225); Bu ii.43. -- pl. upaccaguŋ S i.35; A iii.311. Upaccati
Upaccati
(?) in phrase "akkhīni upacciŋsu" at J vi.187 is probably faulty for apaciyiŋsu aor. of apaciyyati, Pass. of apacināti (cp. upaciyyati > upacināti) "the eyes failed", lost power, went bad; cp. apacaya falling off, diminution. If not this reading we should suggest upacchijjiŋsu from upacchindati "were destroyed", which however is not quite the sense wanted. Upacchindati
Upacchindati
[upa + chindati] to break up or off, to destroy, interrupt, to stop Sn 972 (pot. ˚chinde); J iv. 127; Nd1 502; ThA 267; PvA 31 (kulavaŋso upacchijji aor. pass.); Vism 164, 676 (bhavangaŋ). Upacchinna
Upacchinna
[pp. of upacchindati] cut off, interrupted J i. 477; Miln 306. Upacchubhati
Upacchubhati
[upa + chubhati from kṣubh or chubh, see chuddha, khobha, nicchubhati, nicchodeti] to throw at M i.364 (vv. ll. ˚chumbh˚, ˚cubh˚). Upaccheda
Upaccheda
[fr. upa + chid] breaking or cutting off, destruction, stoppage, interruption M i.245, 327 (pāṇ˚ murder); J i.67; Miln 134 (paveṇ˚ break of tradition) PvA 82 (kulavaŋs˚); DhA i.152 (āhār ˚ŋ karoti to prevent fr. taking food); DA i.136, 159. Upacchedaka
Upacchedaka
(adj. -- n.) [fr. upaccheda] destroying, breaking off, stopping, interrupting J i.418 (vacan˚); iv.357; DA i.69 (jīvitɔ indriy˚); VvA 72 (id.). -- 141 -- Upajānāti
Upajānāti
[upa + jānāti] to learn, acquire or have know- ledge of (w. gen. or instr.), to know Vin i.272 (saŋyamassa); ii.181 (gharāvāsɔatthena); A i.50 (dvinnaŋ dhammānaŋ upaññāsin). -- fut. upaññissati (& upaññassati Sn 716) Sn 701, 716 ( = upaññayissati kathayissati SnA 498); J v.215. -- pp. upaññāta (q. v.). Upajīvati
Upajīvati
[upa + jīvati] to live on (w. acc.), to depend on, to live by somebody, to be supported by (acc.) D i.228; S i.217; Sn 612 sq.; Th 1, 943; J iii.309, 338; iv.271 ( = anujīvati); Pv ii.950 (Ankuraŋ u. ti taŋ nissāya jīvanti PvA 134); Miln 231. Upajīvika
Upajīvika
(adj.) [ = upajīvin] Sdhp 501 (see next). Upajīvin
Upajīvin
( -- ˚) (adj. -- n.) [fr. upa + jīv] living on, sub- sisting by A ii.135 (phal˚); Sn 217 (para -- datt˚), J i.227 (vohār˚); iv.380; Pug 51; Miln 160 (Satth˚); VvA 141 (sipp˚). f. upajīvinī in rūp˚ (itthi) a woman earning her living by her beauty (i. e. a courtesan) Miln 122; PvA 46; cp. kiliṭṭha -- kamm˚ gaṇikā PvA 195. Upajūta
Upajūta
(nt.) [upa + jūta] stake at game J vi.192. Upajjha
Upajjha
see next. Upajjhāya
Upajjhāya
[Vedic upādhyāya, upa + adhi + i, līt. "one who is gone close up to"] a spiritual teacher or preceptor, master. Often combd. with ācariya e. g. Vin i. 119; Nd1 350; the ācariya being only the deputy or substitute of the upajjhāya. Vin i.45, 53, 62, 120; iv. 130; S i.185; A ii.66, 78; iii.69; SnA 346; DhA ii.93; PvA 55, 60, 230. -- A short form of upajjhāya is upajjha, found in the Vinaya, e. g. at Vin i.94; iii.35; with f. upajjhā Vin iv.326. Upaññāta
Upaññāta
[pp. of upajānāti] found out, learnt, known Vin i.40; J v.325, 368; A i.61. Upaṭṭita
Upaṭṭita
[upa + aṭṭita, from ard, see aṭṭita] pained, terri- fied; overcome, overwhelmed J vi.82 (visavegena). Upaṭṭhapeti & ˚ṭṭhāpeti
Upaṭṭhapeti
& ˚ṭṭhāpeti [Caus. II. of upaṭṭhahati] 1. to provide, procure, get ready, put forth, give Vin ii.210; D ii.19; M i.429; J i.266; iv.2; v.218; Pug 59, 68; Miln 15, 257, 366 (pānīyaŋ paribhojanīyaŋ), 397; DA i.270; Sdhp 356. -- 2. to cause to be present Vin i.45; S i.170; Pv iv.170. -- 3. to cause to be waited on or to be nursed A v.72 (gilānaŋ upaṭṭhātuŋ vā upaṭṭhāpetuŋ vā). -- 4. to keep (a servant) for hire Vin ii.267. -> 5. to ordain Vin i.62, 83. Upaṭṭhahati & ˚ṭṭhāti
Upaṭṭhahati
& ˚ṭṭhāti [upa + sthā, cp. upatiṭṭhati] 1 (trs.) to stand near or at hand (with acc.), to wait on, attend on, serve, minister, to care for, look after, nurse (in sickness) Vin i.50, 302; iv.326; M iii.25; S i.167; A iii.94; v.72; Sn 82 = 481 (imper. ˚ṭṭhahassu); J i.67 (ppr. ˚ṭṭhahamāna), 262 (ppr. ˚ṭṭhahanto); iv.131; v.396; Dpvs ii.16; PvA 19, 20. -- aor. upaṭṭhahi PvA 14, 42, 82. -- inf. upaṭṭhātuŋ A v.72; PvA 20. -- ger. upaṭṭhahitvā PvA 76. -- grd. upaṭṭhātabba Vin i.302; PvA 20. -- pp. upaṭṭhita (q. v.). -- 2. (intrs.) to stand out or forth, to appear, to arise, occur, to be present M i.104 sq.; A iv.32; J iv.203 (mante anupaṭṭhahante since the spell did not occur to him); v.207; Miln 64; ThA 258. -> aor. upaṭṭhāsi J i.61; iv.3; PvA 42. -- Caus. I. upaṭṭheti; Caus. II. upaṭṭhapeti & ˚ṭṭhāpeti (q. v.). -- Pass. upaṭṭhīyati J iv.131 (ppr. ˚ṭṭhiyamāna), & upaṭṭhahīyati A iii.94 (ppr. ˚ṭṭhahiyamāna). Upaṭṭhāka
Upaṭṭhāka
[fr. upa + sthā, cp. BSk. upasthāka M Vastu i.251, and upasthāyaka Divy 426; Av. Ś. i.214; ii.85, 112.] a servitor, personal attendant, servant, "famulus". Ānanda was the last u. of Gotama Buddha (see D i.206; Th 1, 1041 f.; ThA in Brethren loc. cit.; Vin i.179 (Sāgato u.), 194; ii.186; iii.66; iv.47; D i.150 (Nāgita); S iii.113; A i.121; iii.31, 189; J i 15, 100 (a merchant's); ii.416; Pug 28; DhA ii.93; VvA 149; PvA 211. -- agg˚ main follower, chief attendant D ii.6; gilān˚ an attendant in sickness, nurse Vin i.303; A i.26; sangh˚ one who looks after the community of Bhikkhus Vin i.216; A i.26; iii.39. -- dupaṭṭhāka & supaṭṭhāka a bad (& good) attendant Vin i.302.

-- kula a family entertaining (or ministering to) a thera or a bhikkhu, a family devoted to the service of (gen.) Vin i.83 (Sāriputtassa), 213; iii.62, 66, 67; iv.283, 286; VvA 120. Upaṭṭhāna
Upaṭṭhāna
(nt.) [fr. upa + sthā] -- 1. attendance, waiting on, looking after, service, care, ministering A i.151, 225; Sn 138; J i.226, 237, 291; ii.101; iv.138; vi.351. Ps i.107; ii.7 sq., 28, 230; PvA 104, 145 (paccekabuddhassa), 176; VvA 75 (ther˚); Sdhp 560. -- 2. worship, (divine) service D iii.188 sq. (˚ŋ gacchati); PvA 122. Buddh˚ attendance on a Buddha PvA 93; ThA 18. -> 3. a state room J iii.257.

-- sambhāra means of catering, provisions PvA 20. -- sālā hall for attendance, assembly room, chapel [cp. BSk. upasthāna -- śālā Divy 207] Vin i.49, 139; ii.153, 208; iii. 70 (at Vesālī); iv.15, 42; D ii.119 (at Vesālī); S ii.280; v.321; A ii.51, 197; iii.298; DhA i.37, 38; iii.413. Upaṭṭhāpana
Upaṭṭhāpana
(nt.) [fr. upa + sthā] attendance, service Vin iv. 291. Upaṭṭhita
Upaṭṭhita
[pp. of upaṭṭhahati or upatiṭṭhāti, cp. BSk. upa- sthita Divy 281, 342] -- 1. furnished provided, served, got ready, honoured with Sn 295 (˚asmiŋ yaññasmiŋ); J v.173 (annena pānena); Pv i.52 ( = sajjita paṭiyatta PvA 25); ii.98 (= payirupāsita PvA 116); PvA 132. -> 2. come, come about, appeared, arrived; present, existing Sn 130 (bhattakāle upaṭṭhite when mealtime has come), 898; Dh 235; Miln 274; PvA 124 (dānakāle ˚e). -> 3. standing up (ready), keeping in readiness M i.77; A ii.206; Sn 708 (= ṭhito C.); Pv ii.953 (ready for service, serving, waiting upon cp. PvA 135.

-- sati with ready attention, one whose attention is fixed, concentrated Vin i.63; D iii.252, 282; S iv.186; A iii. 251; Pug 25. Upaṭṭheti
Upaṭṭheti
[Caus. of upaṭṭhahati] to make serve or attend; sakkaccaŋ u. (with acc.) to bestow respect (upon) Vin iv.275. fut. ˚essati Vin iv.291. to place, fix (parimukhaŋ satiŋ upaṭṭhapetvā) Vibh. 244. Upaḍayhati
Upaḍayhati
[upa + ḍayhati] to be burnt up Miln 277. Upaḍḍha
Upaḍḍha
(adj. -- nt.) [upa + aḍḍha, used abs. whereas aḍḍha only in compn., cp. also BSk. upārdha Divy 86, 144, 514; AvS i.211, 240] half Vin i.281 (˚kāsina); ii.200 (˚āsana); J iii.11 (˚rajja); Vism 320 (˚gāma); DhA i.15, 205 (˚uposathakamma); ii.85; KhA 239 (˚gāthā); SnA 298; VvA 38, 61, 120; PvA 209, 276. Upatappati
Upatappati
[upa + tappati1)] to be vexed or tormented J v.90; DhsA 42. Upatāpa
Upatāpa
[fr. upa + tap] vexation, trouble Vism 166. Upatāpana
Upatāpana
(nt.) [upa + tāpana] vexation, tormenting, torture J iv.13; ThA 243. Upatāpika
Upatāpika
(adj.) [fr. upatāpa] causing pain, molesting J ii.224. Upatāpeti
Upatāpeti
[upa + tāpeti] to cause pain, to vex, torment, harass J ii.178, 224; iv.11; DhsA 42 (vibādhati +). Upatiṭṭhati
Upatiṭṭhati
[upa + sthā, cp. upaṭṭhahati, ˚ṭṭhāti etc.] lit. "to stand by", to look after, to worship Pv iii.118; J ii.73 (ādiccaŋ = namassamāno tiṭṭhati C.); Miln 231 (ger. ˚tiṭṭhitvā); J v.173 (˚tiṭṭhate). pp. upaṭṭhita (q. v.). Upatta
Upatta
[upa + akta, pp. of añj] smeared, spread over M i.343; J i.399. Upatthaddha
Upatthaddha
[upa + thaddha, pp. of upatthambhati] - 1. stiff Vin iii.37 (angāni). -- 2. supported or held up by, resting on, founded on, relying on Th 1, 1058, 1194; 2, 72 (yobbanena); J i.47 (v. 267: mettābalena); v. 121, 301; Kvu 251 (cakkhu dhamm˚ "when it is the medium of an idea"); Nett 117; Miln 110 (kāruñña -- bal˚). -- 142 -- Upatthambha
Upatthambha
[fr. upa + stambh] -- 1. a support, prop, stay Miln 355, 415, 417; Sdhp 565. -- 2. relief, ease Vin iii.112. -- 3. encouragement J v.270; DhA i.279. Upatthambhaka
Upatthambhaka
(adj. nt.) [fr. upatthambha) holding up, supporting, sustaining DhsA 153. Upatthambhana
Upatthambhana
(nt.) = upatthambha Miln 36; J i.447; DA i.124; ThA 258; Vism 279. Upatthambhita
Upatthambhita
[pp. of upatthambheti] propped up, sup- ported, sustained J i.107; Miln 36; DA i 234; PvA 117 (puñña -- phal˚), 148 (utu -- āhārehi u.). Upatthambheti
Upatthambheti
[upa + thambheti, Caus. of thambhati] to make firm, shore up, support, prop up J i.127 [ppr. ˚ayamāna), 447; DA i.113; DhA iii.73 (˚ayamāna ppr.). -> pp. upatthambhita. Upatthara
Upatthara
[fr. upa + stṛ] a (floor) covering, carpet, rug D i.103 (rath˚); J ii.126 (pabbat˚); ii.534. Upatheyya
Upatheyya
[for upadheyya, see Trenckner, Notes 6216] a cushion J vi.490, 513. Upadaŋsitar
Upadaŋsitar
[n. ag. fr. upadaŋseti] one who shows Pug 49 (where upadhaŋsita is to be corrected to upad˚, as already pointed out by Morris J P T S. 1887, 126. The word seems to be a crux to commentators, philologists, and translators, like upadaŋseti. Kern, Toev. s. v. keeps to the reading upah˚, tries to connect it with Sk. dharṣati & trsls. "one who confirms". The Pug A leaves the word unexplained). Upadaŋseti
Upadaŋseti
[ = upadasseti with ˚aŋs˚ for ˚ass˚ like dhan- seti = Sk. dharṣayati, haŋsa = harṣa etc. only in poetical passages] to cause to appear, to manifest M ii.120; S i. 64, 65 (of gods, to become resplendent, to show divers colour -- tones); A ii.84 = iii.139 = 264 = Pug 49 (to show pleasure); Th i.335, to bring forth (a goad, and so incite, urge on); Vin iv.309. Upadasseti
Upadasseti
(upa + dasseti, Caus. of drś, cp. also upa- daŋseti] to make manifest, to show Miln 276, 316, 347. Upadahati
Upadahati
[upa + dahati1] to put down, supply, furnish, put on; give, cause, make Vin iv.149; D ii.135 (vippaṭisāraŋ); A i.203 (dukkhaŋ); Miln 109, 139, 164, 286, 383. grd. pass. ˚dahātabba to be given or caused Vin ii.250 = A iii.197 (vippaṭisāra). Cp. upadhi. Upadāyaka
Upadāyaka
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. upa + dā] giving, bestowing Sdhp 319. Upadiṭṭha
Upadiṭṭha
[pp. of upadisati] pointed out, put forth, speci- fied Miln 144 (pañha). Upadisati
Upadisati
[upa + disati] to point out, show, advise, specify J v. 457 (sippaŋ); Miln 21 (dhamma -- maggaŋ). -- pp. upadiṭṭha (q. v.). Upadissati
Upadissati
[upa + dissati] to be seen (open), to be shown up, to be found out or discovered Sn 140 (pres. upadissare = ˚nti SnA 192). Upadeva
Upadeva
[upa + deva, on use of upa in this meaning see upa 5] a secondary, lesser, minor god PvA 136. Upadesa
Upadesa
[fr. upadisati] pointing out, indication, instruction, advice PvA 26 (tadupadesena read for tadupād˚; KhA 208 differs at id. p.); KhA 100; Sdhp 227. Upaddava
Upaddava
[upa + dava2 of dru] lit. rushing on; accident, misfortune, distress, oppression S ii.210; A i.101; Sn 51; Dh 338 (an˚); DhA i.16; Sdhp 267, 398. Upaddavati
Upaddavati
[fr. upa + dru] to annoy, trouble DA i.213. -- pp. upadduta (q. v.). Upadduta
Upadduta
[pp. of upaddavati] overrun, oppressed, annoyed, overcome, distressed Vin ii.170; iii.144, 283; S ii.210; iv.29; J i.26, 61, 339; ii.102; iv.324, 494; Pv ii.108; Vism 24 ( = apakata); Miln 279; VvA 311 (aṭṭita +); PvA 61. an˚ unmolested PvA 195; anupaddutatta state of not being molested VvA 95. Upadhaŋsitar & Upadhaŋseti
Upadhaŋsitar
& Upadhaŋseti at Pug 49 is to be read upad˚ (q. v.). Upadhāna
Upadhāna
(adj. nt.) [fr. upa + dhā, cp. upadahati] "putting under", i. e. (1) a pillow, cushion D i.7; S ii.267 = Miln 366 (kaḷingar˚); S iii.145; A i.137, 181; iii.50, J iv.201; v.506 (tamb˚ = ratt˚ C.); (2) imposing, giving, causing Dh 291 dukkh˚). Upadhāneti
Upadhāneti
[f. upa + dhā] to suppose, think, reflect DhA i.239 (should be corrected to upadhāreti). Upadhāraṇā
Upadhāraṇā
(nt.) [fr. upa + dhṛ) "receptacle", milk -- pail D ii.192; A iv.393; J vi.503. See kaŋs˚. Kern, Toev. i. 142 proposes corruption fr. kaŋsɔûpadohana, which latter however does not occur in Pali. Upadhāraṇā
Upadhāraṇā
(f) [cp. upadhāraṇa] calculation VvA 7. Upadhārita
Upadhārita
[pp. of upadhāreti] considered, reflected upon Dh i.28; sûpadh˚ Miln 10; dûpadh˚ Vin iv.275. Upadhāreti
Upadhāreti
(Caus. of upa + dhṛ, cp. dhāreti 3] 1. "to hold or take up" (cp. semantically Lat. teneo = E. tenet), to reason out, conclude, reflect, surmise, know as such & such, realise J i.338; DhA i.28, 41; ii.15, 20, 37, 96; iv.197 (an˚); VvA 48, 200 (an˚), 234, 260 (an˚), 324; PvA 119 (for jānāti). -- 2. to look out for (acc.) J iii. 65; vi.2. Upadhāvati
Upadhāvati
[upa + dhāvati 1] to run up to or after, fall upon, surround Vin ii.207; iv.260 (pp. ˚dhāvita); S i.185; S ii.26 (aparantaŋ); Th 1, 1209; Miln 209; VvA 256; PvA 154, 168, 173 (for padhāvitā). Upadhi
Upadhi
[fr. upa + dhā, cp. upadahati & BSk. upadhi Divy 50, 224, 534] 1. putting down or under, foundation, basis, ground, substratum (of rebirth) S i.117, 124, 134, 186; A ii.24 (˚sankhaya); iii.382 (id.); iv.150 (˚kkhaya); It 21, 69; Sn 364, 728 (upadhī -- nidānā dukkha = vaṭṭa -- dukkhaŋ SnA 505), 789, 992; Nd1 27, 141; Nd2 157; Vbh 338; Nett 29; DhA iv.33. -- (2) clinging to rebirth (as impeding spiritual progress), attachment (almost syn. with kilesa or taṇhā, cp. nirupadhi & anupadhi); S A. = pañcakkhandhā, S ii.108. At M i 162 (cp. Sn 33 = S i.6 = i.107) wife and children, flocks and herds, silver and gold are called upadhayo. upadhi is the root of sorrow ib. 454; S ii.108; Sn 728 = 1051 = Th i.152 and the rejection of all upadhis is Nibbāna D ii.36. (cp. S i.136; iii.133; v.226; A i.80; M i.107 = ii.93; Vin i.5, 36 = J i.83 = Mvst ii.444; It 46, 62); D iii.112 calls that which has upadhi ignoble (= non -- Aryan). At S i.117 = Divy 224 upadhi is called a bond (saŋgo). Cp. opadhika. -- The upadhis were later systematized into a set of 10, which are given at Nd2 157 as follows: 5 taṇhɔ upadhis (taṇhā, diṭṭhi, kilesa, kamma, duccarita), āhār -- upadhi, paṭigh˚, catasso upādinnā dhātuyo u. (viz. kāma, diṭṭhi, sīlabbata, attavāda; see D iii.230), cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni u., cha viññāṇa -- kāyā u. Another modified classification see at Brethren p. 398. Upadhika (Upadhīka)
Upadhika
(Upadhīka) (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. upadhi] having a substratum, showing attachment to rebirth, only in cpds. an˚ free from clinging Vin i.36; Sn 1057, & nir˚ id. S i.141. Upadheyya
Upadheyya
(nt.) [cp. upadhāna] a cushion J vi.490 (for upatheyya, q. v.). Upanaccati
Upanaccati
[upa + naccati] to perform a dance D ii.268. Upanata
Upanata
[pp. of upanamati] inclined, bent, prone PvA 190. Upanadati
Upanadati
[upa + nadati] to resound (with song) Pv iii.34 ( = vikūjati PvA 189). -- 143 -- Upanandha
Upanandha
[pp. of upanayhati, see naddha & nandhati] scorned, grumbled at Vin ii.118. Upanandhati
Upanandhati
[a secondary der. fr. upanandha, pp. of upa- nayhati] to bear enmity towards, to grumble at (with loc.); aor. upanandhi Vin ii.118 (tasmiŋ); iv.83; Mhvs 36, 117. Upanamati
Upanamati
[upa + namati] to be bent on, strive after J iii 324 ( = upagacchati C.). -- pp. upanata; Caus. upanāmeti (q. v.). Upanayana
Upanayana
(nt.) [fr. upa + ni; cp. naya & nayana] tt. for the minor premiss, subsumption (see Kvu trsl. 11) Miln 154; Nett 63; DhsA 329 (so read with v. l. for ˚najana). Upanayhati
Upanayhati
[upa + nayhati] -- 1. to come into touch with It 68 = J iv.435 (pūtimacchaŋ kusaggena, cp. DhA i.45). -- 2. to bear enmity towards (loc.), to grudge, scorn Dh 3, 4. -- pp. upanandha (for ˚naddha). -- See also upanandhati. Upanayhanā
Upanayhanā
(f.) & ˚nayhitatta (nt.) are syn. for upanāha (grudge, ill -- will) in exegesis at Pug 18 = 22, whereas id. p. at Vbh 357 reads upanahanā upanahitattaŋ (with v. l. upanayihanā & upanayihitattaŋ). Upanāmita
Upanāmita
[pp. of upanāmeti] brought up to, placed against D ii.134. Upanāmeti
Upanāmeti
[Caus. of upanamati] 1. to bend over to, to place against or close to, to approach, bring near D ii. 134; S i.207; Th 1, 1055; Sn p. 48 ( = attano kāyaŋ Bhagavato upanāmeti); J i.62; v.215; SnA 151. -- 2. to offer, to present J iv.386; ii.5; Miln 210, 373; PvA 274. -- pp. upanāmita (q. v.). [cp. BSk. upanāmayati to hand over Divy 13, 14, 22]. Upanāyika
Upanāyika
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. upa + nī] -- 1. referring to, belonging to in cpd. att˚ ref. to oneself Vin iii.91; Vism 27. -- 2. beginning, in phrase vass'ûpanāyikā (f.) the approach of the rainy season, period for entering on Lent (cp. BSk. varṣopanāyikā Divy 18, 489 & see also upakaṭṭha and vassa) Vin i.253; A i.51 (divided into 2 parts, first & second, or purimikā & pacchimikā); J iii.332; DA i.8; DhA i.203; iii.438; VvA 44; PvA 42. Upanāha
Upanāha
[fr. upa + nah, see upanayhati, same in BSk.; e. g. at M Vastu ii.56.] ill -- will, grudge, enmity M i.15; A i.91, 95, 299; iv.148, 349, 456; v.39, 41 sq., 209, 310; Pug 18 = Vbh 357 (pubbakālaŋ kodho aparakālaŋ upanāho Miln 289. Upanāhin
Upanāhin
(adj. -- n.) [fr. upanāha] one who bears ill -- will, grudging, grumbling, finding fault Vin ii.89; M i.95; D iii.45; S ii.206; iv.241; A iii.260, 334; v.123, 156; Sn 116; Th 1, 502; J iii.260 (kodhana +); Pug 18; Vbh 357. -- Opp. an˚ not being angry (loc.) D iii.47; S ii. 207; iv.244; A v.124 sq.; J iv.463. Upanikkhamati
Upanikkhamati
[upa + nikkhamati] to go out, to come out (up to somebody) Th 2, 37; 169; J iii 244; Pv i. 101 (aor. ˚nikkhami; imper. ˚nikkhamassu). Upanikkhitta
Upanikkhitta
[upa + n˚] laid down (secretly), placed by or on top S v.457; J vi.390; Miln 80. -- m. a spy J vi.394 (˚purisa). Upanikkhittaka
Upanikkhittaka
[ = prec.] a spy J vi 409 (˚manussa), 431 (id.), 450 (id.). Upanikkhipati
Upanikkhipati
(upa + n˚] to deposit near, to lay up Vin i.312; S ii.136 sq.; Miln 78, 80; Nett 21, 22; DA i. 125. -- pp. upanikkhitta (q. v.). Upanikkhipana
Upanikkhipana
(nt.) [fr. ˚nikkhipati] putting down (near somebody), putting in the way, trap Vin iii.77. Upanikkhepa
Upanikkhepa
[fr. upa + nis + kṣip] "putting near", depositing; -- 1. appld. to the course of memory, association of ideas Miln 78, 80; cp. ˚nikkhepana S ii.276. -- 2. deposit, pledge J vi.192, 193 ( = upajūta). Upanighaŋsati
Upanighaŋsati
[upa + ni + ghaŋsati1] to rub up against, to crush (close) up to DhA i.58. Upanijjhāna
Upanijjhāna
(nt.) [upa + nijjhāna1] meditation, reflection, consideration only in two phrases: ārammaṇa˚ & lakkhaṇa˚, with ref. to jhāna J v.251; DhA i.230; iii.276; VvA 38, 213. Cp. nijjhāyana. Upanijjhāyati
Upanijjhāyati
[upa + nijjhāyati] to meditate upon, con- sider, look at, reflect on Vin i.193 ("covet"); ii 269; iii. 118; D i.20; A iv.55; Miln 124; Vism 418. -- pp. upanijjhāyita (q. v.). Upanijjhāyana
Upanijjhāyana
[for ˚nijjhāna] meditation, reflection Miln 127; Vism 418. Upanijjhāyita
Upanijjhāyita
[pp. of ˚nijjhāyati] considered, looked at, thought over or about Sn p. 147 ( = diṭṭha, ālokita SnA 508). Upanidhā
Upanidhā
(f.) [abstracted from upanidhāya or direct for- mation fr. upa + ni + dhā?] comparison Nd2 158 ( = upamā; should we read upanidhāya?). Upanidhāya
Upanidhāya
(indecl.) [ger. of upa + nidahati of dhā] comparing in comparison, as prep. w. acc. "compared with" M i.374; iii.177 (Himavantaŋ pabbatarājānaŋ); S ii.133 (mahāpaṭhaviŋ), 262; v.457 (Sineru -- pabbata -- rājānaŋ); A iii.181 sq.; iv.253 sq. (dibbasukhaŋ); Th 1, 496 (kammaŋ); J ii.93; DA i.29, 59, 283. Upanidhi
Upanidhi
(f.) [upa + ni + dhā, cp. nidhi] -- 1. deposit, pledge Vin iii.51. -- 2. comparison, in phrase upanidhiŋ na upeti "does not come into comparison, cannot be compared with" M iii.177; S ii.263; v.457 (so read for upanidhañ); Ud 23. Upanipajjati
Upanipajjati
[upa + ni + pad] to lie down close to or on top of (acc.) Vism 269; J v.231. Upanibajjhati
Upanibajjhati
see upanibandhati. Upanibaddha
Upanibaddha
[pp. of ˚nibandhāti] -- 1. tied on to Miln 253, 254. -- 2. closely connected with, close to Vin iii. 308 (Samanta Pāsādikā). -- 3. attached to DA i.128. Upanibandha
Upanibandha
[upa + ni + bandh] 1. close connection, dependence Vism 19 (˚gocara). -- 2. (adj. -- ˚) connected with, dependent on Vism 235 (jīvitaŋ assāsa -- passāsa˚ etc). Upanibandhati
Upanibandhati
[upa + n˚) to tie close to, to bind on to, attach M iii.132; Miln 254, 412. -- Pass. upanibajjhati to be attached to Sn 218. -- pp. ˚nibaddha (q. v.). Upanibandhana
Upanibandhana
(adj. nt.) [upa + n˚] (adj.) closely con- nected with D i.46; DA i.128; (nt.) tie, fetter, leash Miln 253. Upanibbatta
Upanibbatta
[upa + nibbatta] come out, produced DA i.247. Upanibha
Upanibha
(adj. [upa + nibha] somewhat like ( -- ˚) M i. 58 = A iii.324 (sankha -- vaṇṇa˚); J i.207 (= sadisa C.); v.302 (tāla˚). Upanivattati
Upanivattati
[upa + n˚] to return Sn 712; J iv.417; v.126. Upanisā
Upanisā
(f.) [if = Vedic upaniṣad, it would be fr. upa + ni + sad, but if, as is more likely, a contracted form of upanissaya, it would be fr. upa + ni + śri . The history of this word has yet to be written, cp. Kern, Toev. s. v. & Divy 530 svopaniṣad] -- 1. cause, means D ii. 217, 259; M iii.71 (samādhiŋ sa -- upanisaŋ); S ii.30 -- 32 (S A. = kāraṇa, paccaya); v.25; A i.198; iii.20, 200 sq., 360; iv.99, 336, 351; v.4 sq., 313 sq.; Sn 322 (= upanissaya SnA 331); p. 140 (= kāraṇa, payojana SnA 503); Dh 75 (cp. DhA ii.102 aññā nibbānagāminī paṭipadā). -> 2. likeness, counterfeit [= Sk. upaniṣad = aupamye Pāṇini i.4, 79] J vi.470 (= paṭirūpaka C.). -- 144 -- Upanisīdati
Upanisīdati
[upa + nisīdati of sad] to sit close to or down by D i.95; A iv.10; J ii.347; Pv iv.163 (ger. ˚sajja = ˚sīditvā PvA 242); Vism 269. Upanisevati
Upanisevati
[upa + n˚] to pursue, follow, go up after, cling to (acc) M i.306. -- pp. upanisevita (q. v.). Upanisevana
Upanisevana
(adj.) [fr. upanisevati] going close after, fol- lowing J v.399 [f. ˚ī.). Upanisevita
Upanisevita
[pp. of upanisevati] gone on to, furnished with, sticking or clinging to, full of J v.302 (kakka˚). Upanissaya
Upanissaya
[upa + ni˚] basis, reliance, support, founda- tion, assurance, certainty; esp. sufficing condition or qualification for Arahantship (see long article in Childers s. v.); no 9 in the 24 paccayas, Tikapatthāṇa, Tikapaṭṭhāna i.1, a term only found in the Paṭṭhāna, the Jātaka & later exegetical literature J i.78, 508; iv.96; vi.70; Nett 80; Vism 19 (˚gocara), 535 (˚paccaya); DhsA 315 (id.); DhA ii.33; VvA 98; PvA 38 (sotāpatti -- phalassa), 55 (˚sampatti); Sdhp 265, 320. Upanissayati
Upanissayati
[upa + ni˚] to depend or rely on (acc.) Miln 240 (attānaŋ). -- ger. ˚nissāya (q. v.); -- pp. ˚nissita (q. v.). Upanissāya
Upanissāya
(adv.) [ger. of upanissayati, cp. nissayati in same use & meaning) near, close by (with acc.); depending on, by means of (acc) M ii.3; S ii.269; Sn 867 (taŋ), 901 (tāpa˚), 978, PvA 9 (Rājagahaŋ), 67 (id.); VvA 63 (Rājagaha -- seṭṭhiŋ "with"). Cp. BSk. upaniśritya also a ger. formation, in same meaning, e. g. at Divy 54, 207, 505. Upanissita
Upanissita
[upa + ni˚] dependent or relying on Sn 877; Nd1 283, Miln 245. Upanīta
Upanīta
[pp. of upaneti] 1. brought up to or into (mostly -- ˚) Th 2, 498; Sn 677 (niraye), 774 (dukkha˚), 898 (bhava˚); J iii.45 (thūṇa˚); iv.271 (dukkh˚); Nd1 38; Dh 237 (˚yaya = atikkantavayo DhA iii.337, advanced in age); Pv iv.110 (dukkha˚ made to suffer). an˚ Sn 846. -- 2. offered, presented J i.88; PvA 274, 286. -> 3. brought to conclusion, brought to an end (of life) J v.375 (= maraṇa -- santikaŋ u. C.). -- 4. bringing up (for trial), charging M i.251 (vacanapatha, cp. upanīya). Upanīya (˚īyya, ˚eyya)
Upanīya
(˚īyya, ˚eyya) [ger. of upaneti] "bringing up" (for trial), charging, accusing D i.107 (vadati, cp. DA i. 276); A i.172 (˚vācā); cp. upanīta 3. Upanīla
Upanīla
(adj.) [upa + nīla] somewhat dark -- blue J v.168. Upaneti
Upaneti
[upa + neti] to bring up to, conduce, adduce; to present, give J i.200; Miln 396; DA i.276; PvA 39, 43, 49, 53, 74. -- Pass. upanīyati (˚niyyati) -- 1. to be brought (up to) J iv.398; ppr. ˚nīyamāna J i.200; PvA 5. -- 2. to be brought to conclusion, or to an end (of life) M ii.68; S i.2. -- 3. to be carried along or away A i.155. -- pp. upanīta (q. v.). -- ger. upanīya (q. v.). Upanti
Upanti
(adv.) [upa + anti] near, before, in presence of J iv.337. Upantika
Upantika
(adj.) [upa + antika] nt. acc. ˚ŋ near J iv.337; v.58 (with gen.); vi.418 (so read for ˚ā); loc. ˚e near or quite near Pv ii.915 ( = samīpe gehassa PvA 120). Upapacciyati
Upapacciyati
see uppaccati. Upapajjati
Upapajjati
[doubtful whether a legitimate form as upa + pad or a diaeretic form of uppajjati = ud + pad. In this case all passages ought to go under the latter. Trenckner however (Notes 77) defends upa˚ & considers in many cases upp˚ a substitution for upa. The diaeresis may be due to metre, as nearly all forms are found in poetry. The v. l. upp˚ is apparently frequent; but it is almost impossible to distinguish between upap˚ and upp˚ in the Sinhalese writing, and either the scribe or the reader may mistake one for the other] to get to, be reborn in (acc.); to originate, rise Vin iii.20 (nirayaŋ); A iii.415; v.292 sq.; Sn 584; It 13 (nirayaŋ), 14 (sugatiŋ; v. l. upp˚), 67 (saggaŋ lokaŋ; v. l. upp˚); 43 = Dh 307 (nirayaŋ); Dh 126, 140; Pv i.107 (v.l. BB. udapajjatha = uppajja PvA 50); Pug 16, 51, 60; Nett 37, 99, cp. Kvu 611 sq. -> pp. upapannā (q. v.). -- Caus. upapādeti & pp. upapādita (q. v.). Upapatti
Upapatti
[fr. upa + pad, cp. uppatti] -- 1. birth, re- birth, (lit. attainment) M i.82; S iii.53; iv.398; A v. 289 sq.; Sn 139, 643, 836; Dh 419 (sattānaŋ); in var. specifications as: deva˚ rebirth among gods PvA 6, 81; devaloka˚ A i.115; kāma˚ existence in the sensuous universe D iii.218; It 94; arūpa˚ in the formless spheres Vbh 172, 267, 296; rūpa˚, in the world of form Vbh 171 sq., 263 sq.; 299; niraya˚ in Purgatory PvA 53. -> 2. occasion, opportunity (lit. "coming to"); object for, in dāna˚ objects suitable for gifts A iv.239 (where 8 enumd., see dāna).

-- deva a god by birth (or rebirth) VvA 18; also given as uppatti -- deva, e. g. at KhA 123. See detail under deva. Upapattika
Upapattika
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. upapatti] belonging to a birth or rebirth; in peta˚ born as a Peta PvA 119. -- Cp. upapātika. Upapanna
Upapanna
[pp. of upapajjati] -- 1. ( -- ˚) possessed of, having attained, being furnished with Sn 68 (thāma -- bala), 212, 322, 1077 (ñāṇa˚, cp. Nd2 266b and uppanna -- ñāṇa). -> 2. reborn, come to existence in (with acc.) S i.35 (Avihaŋ, expld. by C. not quite to the point as "nipphattivasena upagata", i. e. gone to A, on account of their perfection. Should we read uppanna?) A v.68. Upaparikkhaṇa
Upaparikkhaṇa
(nt.) = upaparikkhā VvA 232. Upaparikkhati
Upaparikkhati
[upa + pari + īkṣ; cp. BSk. upaparīkṣate Divy 5, 230] to investigate, ascertain, test, examine M i.133, 292, 443; S ii.216; iii.42, 140; iv.174; J i.489; ii.400; v.235; Miln 91, 293; Dāvs v.27; Sdhp 539; PvA 60 (paññāya u. = ñatvā), 140 (= viceyya). Upaparikkhā
Upaparikkhā
(f.) [fr. upaparikkhati, cp. BSk. upaparīkṣā Divy 3 etc.] investigation, examination Vin iii.314; M ii.175 (attha˚); A iii.381 sq.; iv.221; v.126; Dhs 16, 20, 292; Pug 25; Nett 8, 42; DA i.171. Upaparikkhin
Upaparikkhin
(adj.) [fr. upaparikkhati] investigating, re- flecting, testing S iii.61; A iv.221 sq., 296, 328. Cp. BSk. upaparīkṣaka Divy 212. Upapāta
Upapāta
= upapatti [but der. fr. pat (cp. uppāda1 = ud + pat but uppāda2 = ud + pad) with the meaning of the casual & unusual] rebirth Vin iii.4; S iv.59 (cut˚); Pug 50. Upapātika
Upapātika
(adj.) [fr. upapāta but evidently mixed with uppāda1 and uppāda2, cp. upapajjati, upapatti & BSk. upapāduka Av. S ii.94, 95; Divy 523] = opapātika i. e. rebirth without parents, as a deva DA on D iii.107; ThA 207. Upapādita
Upapādita
[pp. of upapādeti, Caus. of upapajjati] accom- plished J ii.236. Upapādeti
Upapādeti
[Caus. of upapajjati] to execute, perform J v.346. Upapāramī
Upapāramī
(f.) [upa + pāramī, cp. upa 5] minor perfection Bu i.77 (opp. paramattha -- pāramī); DhA i.84. Upapisana
Upapisana
[upa + piṣ] grinding, powder, in añjan˚ pow- dered ointment (for the eyes) Vin i.203; ii.112. Upapurohita
Upapurohita
[upa + purohita, see upa 5] a minor or assistant priest J iv.304. Upapīla
Upapīla
at D i.135 read uppīḷa (q. v.). -- 145 -- Upapphusati
Upapphusati
[upa + phusati, of spṛś] to touch; aor. upap- phusi J v.417, 420. Upaplavati
Upaplavati
[upa + plavati, cp. uppilavati] to swim or float to (acc.), in uncertain reading as aor. upaplaviŋ at Sn 1145 (dīpā dīpaŋ upaplaviŋ floatcd from land to land; vv. ll. at SnA 606 uppalaviŋ & upallaviŋ; all MSS. of Nd2 p. 54 & no. 160 write upallaviŋ). Perhaps we should better read uppalaviŋ (or upallaviŋ) as diaeretic form for *upplaviŋ, aor. of uppilavati (or uplavati), q. v. Expld. at Nd2 160 by samupallaviŋ. Upabbajati
Upabbajati
[upa + vraj] to go to, resort to, visit Th 1, 1052; J iv.270, 295; v.495 ( = upagacchati C.); vi.43. Upabbūḷha
Upabbūḷha
see sam˚. Upabrūhaṇa
Upabrūhaṇa
(nt.) [fr. upa + bṛh2, cp. BSk. upabṛŋhita Jtm 3195] expansion, increase, augmentation Vism 145; DhsA 117. Upabhunjaka
Upabhunjaka
(adj.) [fr. next] one who eats or enjoys Vism 555. Upabhunjati
Upabhunjati
[upa + bhuj] to enjoy J iii.495; v.350 (inf. ˚bhottuŋ) -- grd. upabhogga. -- pp. upabhattu (q. v.). Upabhutta
Upabhutta
[pp. of upabhunjati] enjoyed Dāvs iii.65. Upabhoga
Upabhoga
[fr. upa + bhuj cp. upabhuñjati] enjoyment, profit Vin iv.267; J ii.431; iv.219 (v. l. paribhoga); vi. 361; Miln 201, 403; PvA 49, 220 (˚paribhoga); DhA iv.7 (id.); Sdhp 268, 341, 547. Upabhogin
Upabhogin
(adj.) [fr. upabhuñjati] enjoying Miln 267. Upabhogga
Upabhogga
(adj.) [Sk. upabhogya, grd. of upabhuñjati] to be enjoyed, enjoyable Miln 201. Upama
Upama
(adj.) [compar. -- superl. formation fr. upa, cp. Lat. summus fr. *(s)ub -- mo] "coming quite or nearly up to", i. e. like, similar, equal D i.239 (andha -- veṇ˚); M i.432 (taruṇ˚ a young looking fellow); A iv.11 udak˚ puggala a man like water); Pv i.11 (khett˚ like a well cultivated field; = sadisa PvA 7); PvA 2, 8 etc. -- Note. ūpama metri causa see ū˚ and cp. opamma & upamā. Upamā
Upamā
(f.) [f. of upama in abstract meaning] likeness, simile, parable, example (cp. formula introducing u. S ii. 114; M i.148); Sn 705 (cp. Dh 129, 130), 1137 ( = upanidhā sadisaŋ paṭibhāgo Nd2 158); It 114; Vism 341, 478, 512, 582 sq., 591 sq.; PvA 29, 112 (dhen˚); SnA 329, 384; Sdhp 29, 44, 259.

-- vacana expression of comparison (usually applied to part. evaŋ) SnA 13, 472; KhA 185, 195, 208, 212; PvA 25. Upamāna
Upamāna
(nt.) [fr. upa + mā] comparison, the 2nd part of the comparison J v.341; VvA 13. Upamānita
Upamānita
[pp. of caus. upa + mā] measured out, likened, like, comparable Th 2, 382 ( = sadisa ThA 255). Upameti
Upameti
[upa + mā] to measure one thing by another, to compare J vi.252; Vism 314 (˚metvā, read ˚netvā?). Upameyya
Upameyya
(adj.) [grd. of upa + mā] to be compared, that which is to be likened or compared, the 1st part of a comparison VvA 13. Upaya
Upaya
[fr. upa + i, cp. upāya] approach, undertaking, taking up; clinging to, attachment, only as adj. ( -- ˚) in an˚ (anûpaya metri causā) not going near, aloof, unattached S i.141, 181; ii.284; Sn 786, 787, 897 (cp. SnA 558); and in rūpûpaya (vv. ll. rūpupaya & rūpupāya) "clinging to form" (etc.) S iii.53 = Nd1 25 = Nd2 570 (+ rupɔārammaṇa). Upayācati
Upayācati
[upa + yācati] to beg, entreat, pray to J vi. 150 (divyaŋ). Upayācitaka
Upayācitaka
(nt.) [of adj. upa + yācita + ka; pp. of yācati] begging, asking, praying, propitiation J vi.150 ( = devatānaŋ āyācana). Upayāti
Upayāti
[upa + yāti of yā] to go to, to approach S i.76; ii.118 (also Caus. ˚yāpeti); Dpvs vi.69; Sdhp 579. Upayāna
Upayāna
(nt.) [fr. upa + yā, cp. BSk. upayāna Jtm 3163] nearing, approach, arrival D i.10; DA i.94. Upayānaka
Upayānaka
[fr. upayāna] a crab J vi.530. Upayuñjati
Upayuñjati
[upa + yuj] to combine, connect with; to use, apply; ppr. med. upayujjamāna VvA 245 (preferably be read as ˚bhuñjamāna, with reference to enjoying drink & food). Upayoga
Upayoga
[fr. upa + yuj] connection, combination; em- ployment, application J vi.432 (nagare upayogaŋ netvā for use in the town? v. l. upabhogaŋ). Usually in cpd. ˚vacana as tt. g. meaning either combined or condensed expression, ellipsis SnA 386; KhA 236; PvA 73, 135; or the acc. case, which is frequently substituted for the foll. cases: sāmi -- vacana SnA 127; PvA 102; bhumma˚ SnA 140; KhA 116; karaṇa˚ SnA 148; sampadāna˚ J v.214; SnA 317; itthambhūta˚ SnA 441; nissakka˚ J v.498. Uparacita
Uparacita
[pp. of upa + rac] formed ThA 211; Sdhp 616. Uparajja
Uparajja
(nt.) [upa + rajja, cp. uparaja] viceroyalty A iii. 154 (v. l. opa˚); J i.511; iv.176; DA i.134. Uparata
Uparata
[pp. of uparamati] having ceased, desisting from ( -- ˚), restraining oneself (cp. orata) Vin i.245 (ratt -- ûparata abstaining from food at night = ratti -- bhojanato uparata DA i.77); D i.5 (id.); M i.319 (bhaya˚); Sn 914 (= virata etc. Nd1 337); Miln 96, 307; DhsA 403 (vihiŋs˚). Uparati
Uparati
(f.) [fr. upa + ram] ceasing, resting; cessation M i.10; S iv.104; Miln 274. Uparamati
Uparamati
[upa + ram] to cease, desist, to be quiet J iii. 489; v.391 (v. l. for upāramati, also in C.); Miln 152. Uparamā
Uparamā
(f.) [cp. lit. Sk. uparama, to uparamati] cessation Miln 41, 44 (an˚). Uparava
Uparava
[fr. upa + ru] noise J ii.2. Uparājā
Uparājā
[upa + rājā; see upa 5] a secondary or deputy king, a viceroy J i.504; ii.316; DhA i.392. Upari
Upari
(indecl.) [Vedic upari, der. fr. upa, Idg. *uper(i); Gr. uper, Lat. s -- uper; Goth. ufar, Ohg. ubir = Ger. über E. over; Oir. for] over, above (prep. & prefix) 1. (adv.) on top, above (opp. adho below) Vin iv.46 (opp. heṭṭhā); J vi.432; KhA 248 (= uddhaŋ; opp. adho); SnA 392 (abtimukho u. gacchati explaining paccuggacchati of Sn 442); PvA 11 (heṭṭhā manussa -- saṇṭhānaŋ upari sūkara -- s˚), 47 (upari chattaŋ dhāriyamāna), 145 (sabbattha upari upon everything). -- 2. (prep. w. gen) with ref. either to space = on top of, on, upon, as in kassa upari sāpo patissati on whom shall the curse fall? DhA i 41; attano u. patati falls upon himself PvA 45; etissā upari kodho anger on her, i. e. against her VvA 68; or to time = on top of, after, later, as in catunnaŋ māsānaŋ upari after 4 months PvA 52 (= uddhaŋ catūhi māsehi of Pv i.1012); sattannaŋ vassa -- satānaŋ upari after 700 years PvA 144. -> 3. (adv. in compn., meaning "upper, higher, on the upper or top side", or "on top of", if the phrase is in loc. case. See below.

-- cara walking in the air, suspended, flying J iii.454. -- pāsāda the upper story of a palace, loc. on the terrace D i.112 (loc.); PvA 105, 279. -- piṭṭhi top side, platform Vin ii 207 (loc). -- bhaddaka N. of a tree [either Sk. bhadraka Pinus Deodara, or bhadra Nauclea Cadamba, after Kern, Toev. s. v.] J vi.269. -- bhāga the upper part; used in instr., loc or aor. in sense of "above, over, beyond" J iv.232 (instr.). -- bhāva higher state or condition M i.45 (opp. adh˚). -- mukha face upwards DA i. 228; Pug A 214. -- vasana upper garment PvA 49. -- vāta higher than the wind, loc. on the wind J ii.11; or in ˚passe (loc.) on the upper (wind -- ) side DhA ii.17. -- visāla extended on top, i. e. of great width, very wide J iii.207. -- vehāsa high in the air (˚ -- ), in ˚kuṭī a lofty or open air chamber, or a room in the upper story of the Vihāra Vin iv.46 (what the C. means by expln. majjhimassa purisassa asīsa -- ghaṭṭā "not knocking against the head of a middle -- (sized) man" is not quite clear). -- sacca higher truth PvA 66 (so read for upari sacca). -- 146 -- Upariṭṭha
Upariṭṭha
(adj.) [superl. formation fr. upari in analogy to seṭṭha] highest, topmost, most excellent Th 1, 910. Cp. next. Upariṭṭhima
Upariṭṭhima
(adj) [double -- superl. formation after analogy of seṭṭha, pacchima & heṭṭhima: heṭṭhā] = upariṭṭha & uparima Dhs 1016, 1300, 1401; Pug 16, 17 (sañyojanāni = uddhaŋbhāgiya -- sañyojanāni Pug A 198). Uparima
Uparima
(adj.) [upari + ma, superl. formation] uppermost, above, overhead D iii.189 (disā); Nett 88. Cp. upariṭṭhima. Upariya
Upariya
(adv.) [fr. upari] above, on top, in compd. heṭṭh˚ below and above Vism 1. Uparujjhati
Uparujjhati
[Sk. uparudhyate, Pass. of uparundhati] to be stopped, broken, annihilated, destroyed D i.223; Th 1, 145; It 106; Sn 724, 1036, 1110; Nd2 159 ( = nirujjhati vūpasammati atthangacchati); Miln 151; Sdhp 280. -> pp. uparuddha. Uparuddha
Uparuddha
[pp. of uparujjhati] stopped, ceased Miln 151 (˚jīvita). Uparundhati
Uparundhati
[upa + rudh] to break up, hinder, stop, keep in check M i.243; J i.358; Th 1, 143, 1117; Sn 118, 916 (pot. uparundhe, but uparuddhe Nd1 346 = uparuddheyya etc.); Miln 151, 245, 313. -- ger. uparundhiya Th 1, 525; Sn 751; aor. uparundhi J iv.133; PvA 271. -- Pass. uparujjhati (q. v.). Uparūḷha
Uparūḷha
[upa + rūḷha, pp. of ruh] grown again, recovered J iv.408 (cakkhu). Uparocati
Uparocati
[upa + ruc] to please (intrs.) J vi.64. Uparodati
Uparodati
[upa + rud] 1. to lament J vi.551 (fut ˚rucchati) -- 2. to sing in a whining tone J v.304. Uparodha
Uparodha
[fr. upa + rudh] obstacle; breaking up, destruc- tion, end J iii.210, 252; Pv iv.15; Miln 245, 313. Uparodhana
Uparodhana
(nt.) [fr. upa + rudh] breaking up, destruc- tion Sn 732, 761. Uparodheti
Uparodheti
[Caus of uparundhati] to cause to break up; to hinder, stop; destroy Vin iii.73. Uparopa
Uparopa
[upa + ropa, cp. upa 5] "little plant", sapling Vin ii.154. See also next. Uparopaka
Uparopaka
= uparopa, sapling J ii.345; iv.359. Upala
Upala
[Lit. Sk. upala, etym. uncertain] a stone Dāvs iii.87. Upalakkhaṇā
Upalakkhaṇā
(f.) & ˚aŋ (nt.) [upa + lakkhaṇa] discrimi- nation S iii.261 (an˚); Dhs 16, 20, 292, 1057; Pug 25; VvA 240. Upalakkheti
Upalakkheti
[upa + lakṣay] to distinguish, discriminate Vism 172. Upaladdha
Upaladdha
[pp. of upalabhati] acquired, got, found J vi. 211 (˚bāla; v. l. paluddha˚); Sdhp 4, 386. Upaladdhi
Upaladdhi
(f.) [fr. upa + labh] acquisition; knowledge Miln 268; VvA 279. Upalabhati
Upalabhati
[upa + labh] to receive, get, obtain to find, make out Miln 124 (kāraṇaŋ); usually in Pass. upalabbhati to be found or got, to be known; to exist M i.138 (an˚); S i.135; iv.384; Sn 858; Pv ii.111 ( = paccanubhavīyati PvA 146); Kvu 1, 2; Miln 25; PvA 87. Upalāpana
Upalāpana
(nt.) [fr. upa + lap] talking over or down, per- suasion; diplomacy, humbug D ii.76; Miln 115, 117. Upalāpeti
Upalāpeti
[Caus. of upa + lap] to persuade, coax, prevail upon, talk over, cajole Vin i.119; iii.21; J ii.266; iii.265; iv.215; PvA 36, 46, 276. Upalāḷita
Upalāḷita
[pp. of upalāḷeti] caressed, coaxed Sdhp 301. Upalāḷeti
Upalāḷeti
[Caus. of upa + lal; cp. BSk. upalāḍayati Divy 114, 503]. -- 1. to caress, coax, fondle, win over J ii. 267; Vism 300; Sdhp 375. -- 2. to boast of, exult in J ii.151. -- pp. upalāḷita (q. v.). Upaḷāseti
Upaḷāseti
[upa + Caus. of las] to sound forth, to (make) sound (a bugle) D ii.337 (for uppaḷāseti? q. v.). Upalikkhati
Upalikkhati
[upa + likh] to scratch, scrape, wound A iii. 94 sq. ( = vijjhati C.). Upalitta
Upalitta
[pp. of upalimpati] smeared with ( -- ˚), stained, tainted Th 2, 467 (cp. ThA 284; T. reads apalitta); Pug 56. Usually neg. an˚ free from taint, undefiled M i.319, 386; Miln 318; metri causa anûpalitta S i.141; ii.284; Sn 211, 392, 468, 790, 845; Dh 353 (cp. DhA iv.7). Upalippati
Upalippati
[Pass. of upalimpati] to be defiled; to stick to, hang on to Sn 547, 812; J iii.66 ( = allīyati C.); Miln 250, 337. Upalimpati
Upalimpati
[upa + lip] to smear, defile D ii.18; Vin iii. 312; J i.178; iv.435; Miln 154. -- Pass. upalippati, pp. upalitta (q. v.). Upalepa
Upalepa
[fr. upa + lip] defilement J iv.435. Upalohitaka
Upalohitaka
(adj. [upa + lohita + ka, see upa 5] reddish J iii.21 ( = rattavaṇṇa C.). Upallaviŋ
Upallaviŋ
Sn 1145 see upaplavati. Upavajja
Upavajja
(adj.) [grd. of upavadati] blameworthy S iv.59, 60; A ii.242. an˚ blameless, without fault S iv.57 sq; A iv.82; Miln 391. Upavajjatā
Upavajjatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. upavajja] blameworthiness S iv. 59 (an˚). Upavaṇṇeti
Upavaṇṇeti
[upa + vaṇṇeti] to describe fully Sdhp 487. Upavattati
Upavattati
[upa + vṛt] to come to pass, to take place J vi.58. Upavadati
Upavadati
[upa + vad] to tell (secretly) against, to tell tales; to insult, blame D i.90; S iii.125 (attā sīlato na upav.); A ii.121 (id.); v.88; J ii.196; PvA 13. Upavana
Upavana
(nt.) [upa + vana, see upa 5] a kind of wood, miniature wood, park J iv.431; v.249; Miln 1; VvA 170 ( = vana), 344; ThA 201; PvA 102 (ārām˚), 177 (mahā˚). Upavasati
Upavasati
[upa + vasiti]. -- 1. to dwell in or at J iii.113; DA i.139. -- 2. to live (trs.); to observe, keep (a holy day); only in phrase uposathaŋ upavasati to observe the fast day S i.208; A i.142, 144, 205; Sn 402 (ger. upavassa); J iii.444; SnA 199; PvA 209. -- pp. upavuttha (q. v.). See also uposatha. Upavāda
Upavāda
[fr. upa + vad] insulting, railing; blaming, finding fault Nd1 386; PvA 269; an˚ (adj.) not grumbling or abusing Dh 185 (anûpa˚ metri causa). Upavādaka
Upavādaka
(adj.) [fr. upavāda] blaming, finding fault, speaking evil of (gen.), generally in phrase ariyānaŋ u. insulting the gentle Vin iii.5; A i.256; iii.19; iv.178; v.68; It 58, 99. -- an˚ Ps i.115; Pug 60. -- 147 -- Upavādin
Upavādin
(adj. [fr. upavāda] = upavādaka; in ariy˚ S i. 225; ii.124; v.266; Pv iv.339. an˚ M i.360. Upavāyati
Upavāyati
[upa + vāyati] to blow on or towards somebody M i.424; A iv.46; Th 1, 544; Pv iii.66; Miln 97. Upavāsa
Upavāsa
[fr. upa + vas, see upavasati] keeping a prescri- bed day, fasting, self -- denial, abstaining from enjoyments [Same as uposatha; used extensively in BSk. in meaning of uposatha, e. g. at Av. Ś i.338, 339; Divy 398 in phrase aṣṭânga -- samanvāgataŋ upavāsaŋ upavasati] A v.40 (? uncertain; vv. ll. upāsaka, ovāpavāssa, yopavāsa); J vi.508; SnA 199 (in expln. of uposatha). Upavāsita
Upavāsita
(adj.) (upa + vāsita] perfumed PvA 164 (for gandha -- samerita). Upavāhana
Upavāhana
(nt.) [upa + vāhana] carrying away, washing away Sn 391 (sanghāṭi -- raj -- ûpa˚ = paŋsu -- malādino sanghāṭirajassa dhovanaŋ SnA 375). Upavicāra
Upavicāra
[upa + vicāra; cp. BSk. upavicāra Divy 19, trsld on p. 704 in Notes by "perplexed by doubts" (?)] applying (one's mind) to, discrimination D iii.245 (domanass˚); M iii.239; S iv.232 (somanass˚ etc.); A iii.363 sq.; v.134; Ps i.17; Dh 8, 85, 284; Vbh 381. Upavijaññā
Upavijaññā
(f.) (adj.) [grd. formation of upa + vi + jan, cp. Sk. vijanya] about to bring forth a child, nearing childbirth M i.384; Th 2, 218; Ud 13; Dāvs iii.38; ThA 197. Upavisati
Upavisati
[upa + visati] to come near, to approach a per- son J iv.408; v.377; aor. upāvisi Sn 415, 418 (āsajja upāvisi = samīpaŋ gantvā nisīdi SnA 384). Upavīna
Upavīna
[upa + vīṇā] the neck of a lute S iv. 197; Miln 53. Upavīta
Upavīta
[?] covered (?) at VvA 8 in phrase "vettalatâdīhi upavītaŋ āsanaŋ" should prob. be read upanīta (vv. ll. uparivīta & upajita); or could it be pp. of upavīyati (woven with)? Upavīyati
Upavīyati
[Pass. of upa + vā2 to weave] te be woven J vi.26. Upavuttha
Upavuttha
[pp. of upavasati] celebrated, kept (of a fastday) A i.211 (uposatha); Sn 403 (uposatha). Cp. uposatha. Upavhyati
Upavhyati
[upa + ā + hū, cp. avhayati for *āhvayati] to invoke, call upon D ii.259; S i.168. Upasaŋvasati
Upasaŋvasati
[upa + saŋ + vas] to live with somebody, to associate with (acc.) J i.152. Upasaŋharaṇa
Upasaŋharaṇa
(nt.) [fr. upasaŋharati] drawing together, bringing up to, comparison Vism 232 sq.; J v.186. Upasaŋharati
Upasaŋharati
[upa + saŋ + hṛ] -- 1. to collect, bring together, heap up, gather Miln 132. -- 2. to dispose, arrange, concentrate, collect, focus Vin iv.220 (kāyaŋ); M i.436 (cittaŋ), 468 (cittaŋ tathattāya); S v.213 sq. (id.); DhsA 309 (cakkhuŋ). -- 3. to take hold of, take care of, provide, serve, look after Miln 232. Upasaŋhāra
Upasaŋhāra
[fr. upa + saŋ + hṛ] taking hold of, taking up, possession, in devat˚ being seized or possessed by a god Miln 298. Upasaŋhita
Upasaŋhita
(adj.) [pp. of upa + saŋ + dhā] accompanied by, furnished or connected with ( -- ˚) D i.152; M i.37, 119 (chand˚); S ii.220 (kusal˚); iv.60 (kām˚), 79 (id.); Sn 341 (rāg˚), 1132 (giraŋ vaṇṇ˚ = vaṇṇena upetaŋ Nd2); Th 1, 970; J i.6; ii.134, 172; v.361. Upasankamati
Upasankamati
[upa + saŋ + kram, cp. BSk. upasankra- mati Av. S. i.209] -- 1. to go up to (with acc.), to approach, come near; freq. in stock phrase "yena (Pokkharasādissa parivesanā) tenɔ upasankami, upasankamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdiɔ', e. g. Vin i.270; D i.109; ii.1, and passim. -- aor. ˚sankami Pv. ii.210; SnA 130, 140; KhA 116; PvA 88; ger. ˚sankamitvā SnA 140; PvA 6, 12, 19, 20, 88; ˚sankamma Sn 166, 418, 460, 980, 986; inf. ˚sankamituŋ PvA 79. -- . 2. to attend on (as a physician), to treat Miln 169, 233, 353; DA i.7. Upasankamana
Upasankamana
(nt.) [fr. upasankamati] going near, ap- proach M ii.176; S v.67 = It 107; PvA 232. Upasankheyya
Upasankheyya
(adj.) [grd of upa + sankharoti] to be prepared, produced or contracted Sn 849 ( = ˚sankhātabba SnA 549; cp. Nd1 213). Upasagga
Upasagga
[Sk upasarga, of upa + sṛj] -- 1. attack, trouble, danger Vin i.33; A i.101; Th 2, 353; Dh 139 (where spelt upassaga, cp. DhA iii.70); Miln 418. -- 2. (tt. g.) prefix, preposition J ii.67 (saŋ), 126 (apa); iii.121 (ni, pa); DA i.245 (adhi); KhA 101 (sa˚ and an˚); PvA 88 (atthe nipāto a particle put in metri causa, expln. of handa); DhsA 163, 405. Upasaṇṭhapanā
Upasaṇṭhapanā
(f.) [fr. upa + sanṭḥapeti] stopping, cau- sing to cease, settling Pug 18 (see also an˚). Upasanta
Upasanta
[pp. of upa + śam, cp. upasammati] calmed, composed, tranquil, at peace M i.125; S i.83, 162; A iii. 394; Sn 848, 919, 1087, 1099; Nd1 210, 352, 434; Nd2 161; Dh 201, 378; Miln 394; DhA iii.260; iv.114; PvA 132 ( = santa). Upasama
Upasama
[Sk. upaśama, upa + śam] calm, quiet, appea- sement, allaying, assuagement, tranquillizing Vin i 10 = S iv.331 = v.421 (in freq. phrase upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saŋvattati; see nibbāna iii.7); D i.50; iii.130 sq., 136 sq., 229 (as one of the 4 objects of adhiṭṭhāna, viz. paññā˚ sacca˚ cāga˚ upasama˚); M i. 67; iii.246; S i.30, 34 (sīlena), 46 citta -- v -- ûpasama), 48, 55; ii.223, 277; iii.86 (sankhārānaŋ . . . v -- ūpasamo) D ii. 157; S i.158 (see vūpasama and sankhāra); (ariyaŋ maggaŋ dukkh˚ -- gāminaŋ); iv.62, 331; v.65 (avūpasama), 179, 234 (˚gāmin), 378 sq.; A i.3 (avūpasama), 30, 42; ii.14 (vitakk˚); iii.325 sq.; v.216, 238 sq.; Sn 257, 724, 735, 737; It 18 (dukkh˚) 83; Dh 205; Nd1 351; J i.97; Ps i.95; Miln 170, 248; Vism 197 (˚ânussati); Sdhp 587. Cp. vi˚ (vū˚). Upasamati
Upasamati
[upa + śam in trs. meaning for usual sammati in intrs. meaning] to appease, calm, allay, assuage Sn 919; Th 1, 50 (pot. upasame = upasameyya nibbāpeyya Nd1 352). -- pp. upasanta q. v.). Upasamāna
Upasamāna
(nt.) = upasama Th 1, 421; Sdhp 335 (dukkh˚). Upasampajjati
Upasampajjati
[upa + sampajjati] to attain, enter on, acquire, take upon oneself usually in ger. upasampajja M i.89; S iii.8; A iv.13; v.69; Dhs 160 (see DhsA 167); DA i.313; SnA 158. -- pp. upasampanna (q. v.). Upasampadā
Upasampadā
(f.) [fr. upa + saŋ + pad] -- 1. taking, acquiring; obtaining, taking upon oneself, undertaking D ii.49; M i.93; A iii.65; Dh 183 (cp. DhA iii.236); Nett 44 (kusalassa). -- 2. (in special sense) taking up the bhikkhuship, higher ordination, admission to the privileges of recognized bhikkhus [cp. BSk. upasampad & ˚padā Divy 21, 281 etc.] Vin i.12, 20, 95, 146 and passim; iii.15; iv.52; D i.176, 177, 202; S i.161; A iv.276 sq. & passim; DhA ii.61 (pabbajjā +); PvA 54 (laddh˚ one who has received ordination), 179 (id.). Upasampanna
Upasampanna
[pp. of upasampajjati] obtained, got, received; in special sense of having attained the recognition of bhikkhuship, ordained [cp. BSk. upasampanna Divy 281] S i.161; A v.70; Vin iii.24; iv.52, 130; Miln 13. -- 148 -- Upasampādeti
Upasampādeti
[Denom. fr. upasampadā] 1. to attain to, obtain, produce DhsA 167 ( = nipphādeti). -- 2. to admit to bhikkhuship, to ordain Vin iv.130, 226, 317 (= vutṭhāpeti); grd. ˚etabba Vin i.64 sq.; iv.48; A v.72. Upasamphassati
Upasamphassati
[upa + sam + spṛś] to embrace J v.297. Upasammati
Upasammati
[Sk. upasamyati, upa + śam in intrs. function] to grow calm, to cease, to be settled or composed, to be appeased S i.62, 221; Dh 100 sq. Upasavyāna
Upasavyāna
(nt.?) [?] "a robe worn over the left shoulder" (Hardy, Index to ed.) VvA 166 (v. l. upavasavya). Upasiŋsaka
Upasiŋsaka
(adj.). [fr. upa + siŋsati = śaŋs, cp. āsiŋsaka] striving after, longing or wishing for Miln 393 (āhār˚; Morris J P T S. 1884, 75 proposes reading upasinghaka). Upasinghaka
Upasinghaka
(adj.) [fr. upa + singh] sniffing after J ii. 339; iii.144; Miln 393 (? see upasiŋsaka). Upasinghati
Upasinghati
[upa + singh] -- 1. to sniff at S i.204 (pa- dumaŋ); i.455; J ii.339, 408; vi.336. -- 2. to sniff up Vin i.279. -- Caus. āyati to touch gently KhA 136. Caus. II. apeti to touch lightly, to stroke J iv.407. Upasinghita
Upasinghita
[pp. of upasinghati] scented, smelled at (loc.) J vi.543 (sisaŋhi, C. for upagghata). Upasussati
Upasussati
[upa + sussati] to dry up M i.481; Sn 433; J i.71. Upasecana
Upasecana
(nt.) [fr. upa + sic] sprinkling over, i. e. sauce Th 1, 842; J ii.422; iii.144; iv.371 (maŋs˚); vi.24. See also nandi˚ & maŋsa˚. Upaseniyā
Upaseniyā
(f.) [Sk. upa + either śayanika of śayana, or sayaniya of śī] (a girl) who likes to be always near (her mother), a pet, darling, fondling J vi.64 ( = mātaraŋ upagantvā sayanika C.). Upasevati
Upasevati
[upa + sev] -- 1. to practice, frequent, pursue Miln 355. -- 2. to serve, honour, Sn 318 (˚amāna). -> pp. upasevita (q. v.). Upasevanā
Upasevanā
(f.) [abstr. fr. upasevati] serving, pursuing, fol- lowing, service, honouring, pursuit S iii.53 = Nd1 25 = Nd2 570 (nand˚ pleasure -- seeking); It 68 (bāl˚ & dhīr˚); Sn 249 (utu˚ observance of the seasons); Miln 351. Upasevita
Upasevita
[pp. of upasevati] visited, frequented PvA 147 (for sevita). Upasevin
Upasevin
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. upasevati] pursuing, following, going after A iii.136 (vyatta˚); Miln 264 (rāj˚); DhA iii.482 (para -- dār˚). Upasobhati
Upasobhati
[upa + śubh] to appear beautiful, to shine forth Th 1, 1080. -- Caus.˚sobheti to make beautiful, embellish, adorn Vv 526; J v.132; PvA 153. -- pp. upasobhita (q. v.). Upasobhita
Upasobhita
[pp. of upasobheti] embellished, beautified, adorned PvA 153, 187; Sdhp 593. Upassagga
Upassagga
see upasagga. Upassaṭṭha
Upassaṭṭha
[Sk. upasṛṣṭa, pp. of upa + sṛj] "thrown upon", overcome, visited, afflicted, ruined, oppressed S iv.29; A iii.226 (udak˚); J i.61; ii.239. Upassaya
Upassaya
[fr. upa + śri, cp. assaya & missaya] abode, resting home, dwelling, asylum S i.32, 33; Vv 684; Miln 160. Esp. freq. as bhikkhuni˚ or bhikkhun˚ a nunnery Vin ii.259; iv.265, 292; S ii.215; J i.147, 428; Miln 124. Upassāsa
Upassāsa
[upa + assāsa; upa + ā + śvas] breathing J i.160. Upassuti
Upassuti
(f.) [fr. upa + śru] listening to, attention S ii. 75; iv.91; J v.100; Miln 92. Upassutika
Upassutika
(adj.) [fr. upassuti] one who listens, an eaves- dropper J v.81. Upahacca
Upahacca
(˚ -- ) [ger. of upahanti] -- 1. spoiling, impairing, defiling J v.267 (manaŋ) -- 2. reducing, cutting short; only in phrase upahacca -- parinibbāyin "coming to extinction after reducing the time of rebirths (or after having almost reached the destruction of life") S v.70, 201 sq.; A i.233 sq.; iv.380; Pug 17 (upagantvā kālakiriyaŋ āyukkhayassa āsane ṭhatvā ti attho Pug A 199); Nett 190. -- The term is not quite clear; there seems to have existed very early confusion with upapacca > upapajja > uppajja, as indicated by BSk. upapadya -- parinirvāyin, and by remarks of C. on Kvu 268, as quoted at Kvu trsln. 158, 159. Upahaññati
Upahaññati
[Pass. of upahanti] to be spoilt or injured Sn 584; J iv.14; Miln 26. Upahata
Upahata
[pp. of upahanti] injured, spoilt; destroyed D i.86 (phrase khata + upahata); S i.238 (na sûpahata "not easily put out" trsl.); ii 227; A i.161; Dh 134; J vi. 515; Miln 223, 302; DhA ii.33 (an˚).

The formula at D i.86 (khata+upahata) is doubtful as to its exact meaning. According to Bdhgh it means "one who has destroyed his foundation of salvation," i.e. one who cannot be saved. Thus at DA i.237: "bhinna -- patiṭṭho jāto," i.e. without a basis. Cp. remarks under khata. The trsln at Dial. i.95 gives it as "deeply affected and touched in heart": doubtful. The phrase upahaccaparinibbāyin may receive light from upahata. Upahattar
Upahattar
[Sk. *upahartṛ, n. ag. of upa + hṛ] a bringer (of) M i.447 sq. Upahanti
Upahanti
(& ˚hanati J i.454) [upa + han] to impair, in- jure; to reduce, cut short; to destroy, only in ger. upahacca; pp. upahata & Pass. upahaññati (q. v.). Upaharaṇa
Upaharaṇa
(nt.) [fr. upa + hṛ] -- 1. presentation; luxury J i.231. -- 2. taking, seizing J vi.198. Upaharati
Upaharati
[upa + hṛ] to bring, offer, present A ii.87; iii. 33; Dh i.301, 302; J v.477. Upahāra
Upahāra
[fr. upa + hṛ] bringing forward, present, offering, gift Vin iii.136 (āhār˚) A ii.87; iii.33; v.66 (mett˚); J i.47; iv.455; vi.117; DA i.97. Upahiŋsati
Upahiŋsati
[upa + hiŋs] to injure, hurt Vin ii.203; J iv.156. Upāgacchati
Upāgacchati
[upa + ā + gam] to come to, arrive at, reach, obtain, usually aor. upāgañchi Cp i 1010, pl. upāgañchuŋ Sn 1126; or upāgami Sn 426, 685, pl. upāgamuŋ Sn 302, 1126. Besides in pres. imper. upāgaccha PvA 64 (so read for upagaccha). -- pp. upāgata. Upāgata
Upāgata
[pp. of upāgacchati] come to, having reached or attained Sn 1016; PvA 117 (yakkhattaŋ); Sdhp 280. Upāta
Upāta
[according to Kern, Toev. s. v. = Sk. upātta, pp of upa + ā + dā "taken up"; after Morris J.P. T. S. 1884, 75 = uppāta "flying up"] thrown up, cast up, raised (of dust) Th 1, 675. Upâtigacchati
Upâtigacchati
[upa + ati + gacchati] to "go out over", to surpass, overcome, only in 3rd sg. pret. upaccagā Sn 333, 636, 641, 827; Th 1, 181; 2, 4; J i.258; vi.182; & 3rd pl. upaccaguŋ S i.35; A iii.311; J iii.201. Upâtidhāvati
Upâtidhāvati
[upa + ā + dhāvati] to run on or in to Ud 72. Upâtipanna
Upâtipanna
[pp. of upâtipajjati, upa + ā + pad] fallen into, a prey to (with loc.) Sn 495 ( = nipanna with gloss adhimutta SnA 415). Upâtivatta
Upâtivatta
[pp. of upâtivattati] gone beyond, escaped from, free from (with acc.) S i.143; A ii.15; Sn 55, 474, 520, 907; J iii.7, 360; Fd1 322 = Nd2 163. Cp. BSk. upātivṛtta in same sense at M Vastu iii.281. Upâtivattati
Upâtivattati
[upa + ati + vattati] to go beyond, overstep M i.327; Sn 712 (v. l. for upanivattati); Nett 49. -> pp. upâtivatta (q. v.). -- 149 -- Upādā
Upādā
(adv.) [shortened ger. of upādiyati for the usual upādāya in specialised meaning] lit. "taking up", i. e. subsisting on something else, not original, secondary, derived (of rūpa form) Dhs 877, 960, 1210; Vism 275, 444 (24 fold); DhsA 215, 299, 333, cp. Dhs trsln. 127, 197. -- Usually (and this is the earlier use of upādā) as neg. anupādā (for anupādāya) in meaning "not taking up any more (fuel, so as to keep the fire of rebirth alive)", not clinging to love of the world, or the kilesas q. v., having no more tendency to becoming; in phrases a. parinibbānaŋ "unsupported emancipation" M i.148; S iv.48; v.29; DhA i.286 etc.; a. vimokkho mental release A v.64 (A A: catuhi upādānehi agahetvā cittassa vimokkho; arahattassɔetaŋ nāmaŋ); Vin v.164; Ps ii.45 sq.; a. vimutto D i.17 ( = kinci dhammaŋ anupādiyitvā vimutto DA i.109); cp. M iii.227 (paritassanā). Upādāna
Upādāna
(nt.) [fr. upa + ā + dā] -- (lit. that (material) substratum by means of which an active process is kept alive or going), fuel, supply, provision; adj. ( -- ˚) supported by, drawing one's existence from S i.69; ii 85 (aggikkhandho ˚assa pariyādānā by means of taking up fuel); v.284 (vāt˚); J iii.342 sa -- upādāna (adj.) provided with fuel S iv.399; anupādāna without fuel DhA ii.163. -> 2. (appld.) "drawing upon", grasping, holding on, grip, attachment; adj. ( -- ˚) finding one's support by or in, clinging to, taking up, nourished by. See on term Dhs trsln. 323 & Cpd. 171. They are classified as 4 upādānāni or four Graspings viz. kām˚, diṭṭh˚, sīlabbat˚, attavād˚ or the graspings arising from sense -- desires, speculation, belief in rites, belief in the soul -- theory D ii.58; iii.230; M i.51, 66; S ii.3; v 59; Dhs 1213; Ps i.129; ii.46, 47; Vbh 375; Nett 48; Vism 569. -- For upādāna in var. connections see the foll. passages: D i.25; ii.31, 33, 56; iii.278; M i.66, 136 (attavād˚) 266; S ii.14, 17, 30, 85; iii.10, 13 sq., 101, 135, 167, 191; iv.32, 87 sq., 102 (tannissitaŋ viññāṇaŋ tadupādānaŋ), 390, 400 ( = taṇhā); A iv.69; v.111 (upāy˚); Sn 170, 358, 546; Ps i.51 sq., 193; ii.45 sq, 113; Vbh 18, 30, 67, 79, 119, 132; Dhs 1059, 1136, 1213, 1536 sq.; Nett 28 sq., 41 sq., 114 sq.; DhA iv.194. -- sa˚ full of attachment (to life) M i.65; Vin iii.111; S iv.102; an˚ unattached, not showing attachment to existence S iv.399; Vin iii.111; Th 1, 840; Miln 32; DA i.98.

-- kkhandha, usually as pañcɔ upādāna -- kkhandhā the factors of the "fivefold clinging to existence" [cp. BSk. pañcɔ u˚ -- skandhāḥ Av. Ś ii.1681 & note] D ii.35, 301 sq.; iii.223, 286; M i.61, 144, 185; iii.15, 30, 114, 295; Ps ii.109 sq.; Vbh 101; Vism 505 (khandha -- pañcaka). See for detail khandha ii.B 2. -- kkhaya extinction or disappearance of attachment S ii.54; A iii.376 sq.; Sn 475, 743; It 75. -- nidāna the ground of upādāna; adj. founded on or caused by attachment Ps ii.111; Vbh 135 sq. -- nirodha destruction of "grasping" Vin i.1 (in formula of paṭicca -- samuppāda); S ii.7; iii.14; A i.177. -- paccaya = ˚nidāna S ii.5; iii 94; Sn 507, 742. Upādāniya
Upādāniya
(adj.) [fr. upādāna, for *upādānika > ˚aka] be- longing to or connected with upādāna, sensual, (inclined to) grasping; material (of rūpa), derived. See on term Dhs trsln. 203, 322. -- S ii.84; iii.47; iv.89, 108; Dhs 584, 1219, 1538; Vbh 12 sq., 30, 56, 119, 125, 319, 326. Upādāya
Upādāya
(adv.) [ger. of upādiyati] -- 1. (as prep. with acc.) lit. "taking it up" (as such & such), i. e. (a) out of, as, for; in phrase anukampaŋ upādāya out of pity or mercy D i.204; PvA 61, 141, 164. -- (b) compared with, alongside of, with reference to, according to D i.205 (kālañ ca samayañ ca acc. to time & convenience); DhA i.391; VvA 65 (paŋsucuṇṇaŋ); PvA 268 (manussalokaŋ). The same use of upādāya is found in BSk., e. g. at Divy 25, 359, 413; Av. Ś i.255. -- 2. (ic same meaning & application as upādā, i. e. in neg. form first & then in positivé abstraction from the latter) as philosophical term "hanging on to", i. e. derived, secondary (with rūpa) Vbh 12, 67 etc.; Nd1 266. Usually as anupādāya "not clinging to", without any (further) clinging (to rebirth), emancipated, unconditioned, free [cp. BSk. paritt -- anupādāya free from the world Divy 655], freq. in phrase a. nibbuta completely emancipated S ii.279; A i.162; iv. 290; besides in foll. pass.: Vin i.14 (a. cittaŋ vimuccati) 182 (id.); S ii.187 sq.; iv.20, 107; v.317; Dh 89 = S v.24 (ādānapaṭi -- nisagge a. ye ratā); Dh 414; Sn 363; It 94 (+ aparitassato). Upādi˚
Upādi˚
[the compn. -- from of upādāna, derived fr. upādā in analogy to nouns in ˚a & ˚ā which change their a to i in compn. with kṛ & bhū; otherwise a n. formation fr. dā analogous to ˚dhi fr. dhā in upadhi] = upādāna, but in more concrete meaning of "stuff of life", substratum of being, khandha; only in combn. with ˚sesa (adj.) having some fuel of life (= khandhas or substratum) left, i. e. still dependent (on existence), not free, materially determined S v.129, 181; A iii.143; It 40; Vism 509. More frequently neg. an -- upādi -- sesa (nibbāna, nibbānadhātu or parinibbāna, cp. similarly BSk. anupādi -- vimukti M Vastu i.69) completely emancipated, free, without any (material) substratum Vin ii.239 (nibbāna -- dhātu); D iii.135; M i.148 (parinibbāna); A ii.120; iv.75 sq., 202, 313; J i.28, 55; Sn 876; It 39, 121 (nibbāna -- dhātu); Ps. i.101; Vism 509; DhA iv.108 (nibbāna); VvA 164, 165. Opp. saupādisesa A iv.75 sq., 378 sq.; Sn 354 (opp. nibbāyi); Vism 509; Nett 92. See further ref. under nibbāna & parinibbāna. Upādiṇṇa
Upādiṇṇa
[for ˚ādinna with substitution of ṇṇ for nn owing to wrong derivation as pp. from ādiyati2 instead of ādiyati1] grasped at, laid hold of; or "the issue of grasping", i. e. material, derived, secondary (cp. upādā), see def. at Dhs trsln. 201, 324. -- Dhs 585, 877, 1211, 1534; Vbh 2 sq., 326, 433; Vism 349, 451; an˚ Vin iii.113; Dhs 585, 991, 1212, 1535. Upādiṇṇaka
Upādiṇṇaka
(adj,) = upādiṇṇa DhsA 311, 315, 378; Vism 398. Upādiyati
Upādiyati
[upa + ā + dā, see ādiyati1] to take hold of, to grasp, cling to, show attachment (to the world), cp. upādāna D ii.292; M i.56, 67; S ii.14; iii.73, 94, 135; iv. 168 (na kiñci loke u. = parinibbāyati); Sn 752, 1103, 1104; Nd1 444 (= ādeti); Nd2 164. ppr. upādiyaŋ S iv. 24 = 65 (an˚); -- ppr. med. upādiyamāna S iii.73; SnA 409, & upādiyāna (˚ādiyāno) Sn 470; Dh 20. -> ger. upādāya in lit. meaning "taking up" J i.30; Miln 184, 338, 341; for specialised meaning & use as prep. see separately as also upādā and upādiyitvā VvA 209; DA i.109 (an˚); DhA iv.194 (an˚). -- pp. upādiṇṇa (q. v.). Upādhi
Upādhi
[fr. upa + ā + dhā] 1. cushion J vi.253. -- 2. sup- plement, ornament (?), in ˚ratha "the chariot with the outfit", expld. by C. as the royal chariot with the golden slipper J vi.22. Upādhiya
Upādhiya
[fr. upāhi] being furnished with a cushion J vi. 252 (adj.). Upāya
Upāya
[fr. upa + i, cp. upaya] approach; fig. way, means, expedient, stratagem S iii.53 sq., 58; D iii.220 (˚kosalla); Sn 321 (˚ññū); J i.256; Nd2 570 (for upaya); PvA 20, 31, 39, 45, 104, 161; Sdhp 10, 12. 350, 385. -- Cases adverbially; instr. upāyena by artifice or means of a trick PvA 93; yena kenaci u. PvA 113. -- abl. upāyaso by some means, somehow J iii.443; v.401 ( = upāyena C.). -> anupāya wrong means J i.256; Sdhp 405; without going near, without having a propensity for S i.181; M iii.25.

-- kusala clever in resource J i.98; Nett 20; SnA 274. Upāyatta
Upāyatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. upāya] a means of ( -- ˚) VvA 84 (paṭipajjan˚). Upāyana
Upāyana
(nt.) [fr. upa + i, cp. upāya] going to (in special sense), enterprise, offering, tribute, present J v.347; vi. 327; Miln 155, 171, 241; Sdhp 616, 619. -- 150 -- Upāyāsa
Upāyāsa
[upa + āyāsa, cp. BSk. upāyāsa Divy 210, 314.] (a kind of) trouble, turbulence, tribulation, unrest, disturbance, unsettled condition M i.8, 144, 363; iii.237; A i.144, 177, 203 (sa˚); ii.123, 203; iii.3, 97, 429; Sn 542; It 89 = A i.147 = M i.460; J ii.277 (˚bahula); iv 22 (id.); Pug 30, 36; Vbh 247; Nett 29; Miln 69; Vism 504 (def.); DA i.121. -- anupāyāsa peacefulness, composure, serenity, sincerity D iii.159; A iii.429; Ps i 11 sq. Upāramati
Upāramati
[upa + ā + ram] to cease, to desist J v.391, 498. Upāraddha
Upāraddha
[pp. of upārambhati] blamed, reprimanded, reproved A v 230. Upārambha
Upārambha
[Sk. upārambha, upa + ālambhatc] -- 1. re- proof, reproach, censure M i.134, 432; S iii.73; v.73; A i.199; ii.181; iii.175; iv.25; Vbh 372. -- 2. (adj.) indisposed, hostile Th 1, 360 sq.; DA i.21, 263. Upārambhati
Upārambhati
[Sk. upālambhate, upa + ā + labh] to blame, reprimand, reproach M i.432, 433. -- pp. upāraddha (q. v.). Upālāpeti
Upālāpeti
at PvA 276 read upalāpeti (q. v.). Upāvisi
Upāvisi
3rd sg. aor. of upavisati (q. v.). Upāsaka
Upāsaka
[fr. upa + ās, cp. upāsati] a devout or faithful layman, a lay devotee Vin i.4, 16 (tevāciko u.), 37, 139, 195 sq.; ii.125; iii.6, 92; iv.14, 109; D i.85; ii.105, 113; iii.134, 148, 153, 168, 172 sq., 264; M i.29, 467, 490; S v.395, 410; A i.56 sq.; ii.132 (˚parisā); iii 206 (˚caṇḍāla, ˚ratana); iv.220 sq. (kittāvatā hoti); Sn 376, 384; J i.83; Pv i 104; Vbh 248 (˚sikkhā); DA i.234; PvA 36, 38, 54, 61, 207. -- f. upāsikā Vin i.18, 141, 216; iii.39; iv.21, 79; D iii.124, 148, 172, 264; M i.29, 467, 491; S ii.235 sq.; A i.88; ii.132; v.287 sq.; Miln 383; PvA 151, 160. Upāsakatta
Upāsakatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. upāsaka] state of being a be- lieving layman or a lay follower of the Buddha Vin i.37; S iv,301; Vv 8421. Upāsati
Upāsati
[upa + ās] lit. "to sit close by", to go after, attend, follow, serve, honour, worship D ii.287; A i.162; J v. 339, 371 ( = upagacchati C.); Miln 418 (lakkhe upāseti fix his attention on the target). -- 3rd pl. pres. med. upāsare A i.162; J iv.417 (= upāyanti C.). Cp. payirupāsati. -- pp. upāsita & upāsīna (q. v.). See also upāsaka, upāsana1. Upāsana
Upāsana1
(nt.) [fr. upāsati] attendance, service, honour S i.46 (samaṇ˚); Th 1, 239; Miln 115. Cp. payir˚. Upāsana
Upāsana2
(nt.) [fr. upāsati] -- 1. archery J vi.448; usually in phrase katûpāsana skilled in archery M i.82; S ii. 266; A ii.48; J iv.211; Mhvs 24, 1. -- Miln 232 (˚ŋ sikkhitvā). -- 2. practice Miln 419. -- 3. in ˚sālā gymnasium, training ground Miln 352. Upāsikā
Upāsikā
see upāsaka; cp. payir˚. Upāsita
Upāsita
[pp. of upāsati] honoured, served, attended S 1133, cp. Nd2 165; Th 1, 179. Upāsīna
Upāsīna
[pp. of upāsati] sitting near or close to J v.336. Upāhata
Upāhata
[upa + āhata] struck, afflicted, hurt J i.414. Upāhanā
Upāhanā
(f.) [with metathesis for upānahā = Sk. upānah f. or upānaha m.; but cp. BSk. upānaha nt. Divy 6] a shoe, sandal Vin i.185; ii.118, 207 (adj. sa -- upāhana), 208; S i.226; J iv.173, 223; Pv ii.49; Nd2 226; KhA 45; DhA i.381 (chatt ˚ŋ as nt? v. l. ˚nā); PvA 127, 186. -> upāhanaŋ (or upāhanā) ārohati to put on sandals J iv. 16; vi. 524; opp. omuñcati take off Vin ii.207, 208; J iii.415; iv.16. -- Note. An older form upānad˚ (for upānadh = Sk. upānah) is seen by Kern in pānadûpama J ii.223, which is read by him as upānadûpama (v. l. upāhan -- upama). See Toev. s. v. upānad. Upiya
Upiya
[ger. of upeti] undergoing, going into, metri causa as ūpiya ( -- ˚) and opiya, viz. hadayasmiŋ opiya S i 199 = Th 1, 119; senûpiya J v.96 (v. l. senopiya; C. sayanûpagata). In tadûpiya the 2nd part upiya represents an adj. upaka fr. upa (see ta I. a), thus found at Miln 9. Upekkhaka
Upekkhaka
(adj.) [fr. upekkhā] disinterested, resigned, stoi- cal Vin iii.4; D i.37, 183; iii.113, 222, 245, 269, 281; S v.295 sq., 318; A iii.169 sq., 279; v.30; Sn 515, 855, 912; It 81; Nd1 241, 330; Pug 50, 59; Dhs 163; DhsA 172. Upekkhati
Upekkhati
[upa + īkṣ] to look on, to be disinterested or indifferent Sn 911; Nd1 328; J vi.294. Upekkhanā
Upekkhanā
(f.) [abstr. fr. upa + īkṣ] is commentator's paraphrase for upekkhā (q. v.) Nd1 501 = Nd2 166; Vbh 230. Upekkhavant
Upekkhavant
(adj.) = upekkhaka J v.403. Upekkhā & Upekhā
Upekkhā
& Upekhā (f.) [fr. upa + īkṣ, cp. BSk. upekṣā Divy 483; Jtm 211. On spelling upekhā for upekkhā see Müller P. Gr. 16] "looking on", hedonic neutrality or indifference, zero point between joy & sorrow (Cpd. 66); disinterestedness, neutral feeling, equanimity. Sometimes equivalent to adukkham -- asukha -- vedanā "feeling which is neither pain nor pleasure". See detailed discussion of term at Cpd. 229 -- 232, & cp. Dhs trsln. 39. -- Ten kinds of upekkhā are enumd. at DhsA 172 (cp. Dhs trsln. 48; Hardy, Man. Buddhism 505). -- D 138 (˚sati -- parisuddhi purity of mindfulness which comes of disinterestedness cp. Vin iii.4; Dhs 165 & Dhs trslnn. 50), 251; ii.279 (twofold); iii.50, 78, 106, 224 sq., 239, 245 (six ˚upavicāras), 252, 282; M i.79, 364; iii 219; S iv.71, 114 sq., v.209 sq. (˚indriya); A i 42; 81 (˚sukha), 256 (˚nimitta); iii.185, 291 (˚cetovimutti); iv.47 sq., 70 sq., 300, 443; v.301, 360; Sn 67, 73, 972, 1107, (˚satisaŋsuddha); Nd1 501 = Nd2 166; Ps i.8, 36, 60, 167, 177; Pug 59 (˚sati); Nett 25, 97 (˚dhātu), 121 sq.; Vbh 12, 15 (˚indriya), 54 (id.), 69, 85 (˚dhātu), 228, 324, 326 (˚sambojjhanga), 381 (˚upavicāra); Dhs 150, 153, 165, 262, 556, 1001, 1278, 1582; Vism 134 (˚sambojjhanga, 5 conditions of), 148 (˚ânubrūhanā), 160 (def. & tenfold), 317 (˚bhāvanā), 319 (˚brahmavihāra), 325 (˚vihārin), 461; SnA 128; Sdhp 461. Upeta
Upeta
[pp. of upeti] furnished with, endowed with, pos- sessed of Sn 402, 463, 700, 722; Dh 10, 280; Nd2 s. v., Th 1, 789; Pv i.76 (bal˚); ii 712 (phal˚, v. l. preferable ˚upaga), iv.112 (ariyaŋ aṭṭhangavaraŋ upetan = aṭṭhahi angehi upetaŋ yuttaŋ PvA 243); Vism 18 (+ sam˚, upagata, samupagata etc); PvA 7. --

Note. The BSk. usually has samanvāgata for upeta (see aṭṭhanga). Upeti
Upeti
[upa + i] to go to (with acc.), come to, approach, undergo, attain D i.55 (paṭhavi -- kāyaŋ an -- upeti does not go into an earthly body), 180; M i.486 (na upeti, as answer: "does not meet the question"); S iii.93; It 89; Sn 209, (na sankhaŋ "cannot be reckoned as") 749, 911, 1074; 728 (dukkhaŋ), 897; Sn 404 (deve); Nd1 63; Nd2 167; Dh 151, 306, 342; Sn 318; J iv.309 (maraṇaŋ upeti to die), 312 (id.), 463 (id.); v.212 (v. l. opeti, q. v.); Th 1, 17 (gabbhaŋ); Pv ii.334 (saggaŋ upehi ṭhānaŋ); iv. 352 (saraṇaŋ buddhaŋ dhammaŋ); Nett 66; fut. upessaŋ Sn 29; 2nd sg. upehisi Dh 238, 348. -- ger. upecca Vv 337; S i.209 = Nett 131; VvA 146 (realising = upagantvā cetetvā vā); PvA 103 (gloss for uppacca flying up); see also upiya & uppacca. -- pp. upeta. Upocita
Upocita
[pp. of upa + ava + ci] heaped up, abounding, comfortable J iv.471. Uposatha
Uposatha
[Vedic upavasatha, the eve of the Soma sacrifice, day of preparation]. At the time of the rise of Buddhism the word had come to mean the day preceding four stages of the moon's waxing and waning, viz. 1st, 8th, 15th, 23d nights of the lunar month that is to say, a weekly sacred day, a Sabbath. These days were utilized by the pre -- Buddhistic reforming communities for the expounding of their views, Vin i.101. The Buddhists adopted this practice and on the 15th day of the half -- month held a chapter of the Order to expound their dhamma, ib. 102. They also utilized one or other of these Up. days for the recitation of the Pāṭimokkha (pāṭimokkhuddesa), ibid. On Up. days laymen take upon themselves the Up. vows, that is to say, the eight Sīlas, during the day. See Sīla. The day in the middle of the month is called cātudassiko or paṇṇarasiko according as the month is shorter or longer. The reckoning is not by the month (māsa), but by the half -- month (pakkha), so the twenty -- third day is simply aṭṭhamī, the same as the eighth day. There is an accasional Up. called sāmaggi -- uposatho, "reconciliation -- Up.", which is held when a quarrel among the fraternity has been made up, the gen. confession forming as it were a seal to the reconciliation (Vin v.123; Mah. 42). -- Vin i.111, 112, 175, 177; ii.5, 32, 204, 276; iii.164, 169; D iii. 60, 61, 145, 147; A i.205 sq. (3 uposathas: gopālaka˚, nigaṇṭha˚, ariya˚), 208 (dhamm˚), 211 (devatā˚); iv.248 (aṭṭhanga -- samannāgata), 258 sq. (id.), 276, 388 (navah angehi upavuttha); v.83; Sn 153 (pannaraso u); Vbh 422; Vism 227 (˚sutta = A i.206 sq.); Sdhp 439; DA i.139; SnA 199; VvA 71, 109; PvA 66, 201. -- The hall or chapel in the monastery in which the Pāṭimokkha is recited is called uposathaggaŋ (Vin iii.66), or ˚āgāraŋ (Vin i.107; DhA ii.49). The Up. service is called ˚kamma (Vin i.102; v.142; J i.232; iii.342, 444; DhA i.205). uposathaŋ karoti to hold the Up. service (Vin i.107, 175, 177; J i.425). Keeping the Sabbath (by laymen) is called uposathaŋ upavasati (A i.142, 144, 205, 208; iv.248; see upavasati), or uposathavāsaŋ vasati (J v.177). The ceremony of a layman taking upon himself the eight sīlas is called uposathaŋ samādiyati (see sīlaŋ & samādiyati); uposatha -- sīla observance of the Up. (VvA 71). The Up. day or Sabbath is also called uposatha -- divasa (J iii.52). -- 151 -- Uposathika
Uposathika
(adj.) [fr. uposatha] -- 1. belonging to the Upo- satha in phrase anuposathikaŋ (adv.) on every U., i. e. every fortnight Vin iv.315. -- 2. observing the Sabbath, fasting (cp. BSk. uposadhika M Vastu ii.9); Vin i.58; iv. 75, 78; J iii.52; Vism 66 (bhatta); DhA i.205. Uposathin
Uposathin
(adj.) [fr. upusatha] = uposathika, fasting Mhvs 17, 6. Uppakitaka
Uppakitaka
indexed at Ud iii.2 wrongly for upakki- taka (q. v.). Uppakka
Uppakka
(adj.) [fr. ud + pac, cp. Sk. pakva & see also uppaccati] -- 1. "boiled out", scorched, seared, dried or shrivelled up; in phrase itthiŋ uppakkaŋ okiliniŋ okiriniŋ Vin iii.107 = S ii.260; expld. by Bdhgh. Vin iii.273 as "kharena agginā pakkasarīra". -- 2. "boiled up", swollen (of eyes through crying) J vi.10. Uppacca
Uppacca
[ger. of uppatati] flying up Th 2, 248 (see under upacca); S i.209 (v. l. BB. upecca, C. uppatitvā pi sakuṇo viya) = Pv ii.717 (= uppatitvā PvA 103) = DhA iv.21 (gloss uppatitvā) = Nett 131 (upecca). Uppaccati
Uppaccati
[ud + paccati, Pass. of pac] in ppr. uppacci- yamāna (so read for upapacciyamāna, as suggested by v. l. BB. uppajj˚) "being boiled out", i. e. dried or shrivelled up (cp. uppakka 1) J iv.327. Not with Morris J P T S. 1887, 129 "being tormented", nor with Kern, Toev. under upapacc˚ as ppr. to pṛc (*upapṛcyamāna) "dicht opgesloten", a meaning foreign to this root. Uppajjati
Uppajjati
[ud + pajjati of pad] to come out, to arise, to be produced, to be born or reborn, to come into existence D i.180; Sn 584; Pv ii.111 ( = nibbattati PvA 71); PvA 8 (nibbattati +), 9, 20, 129 (= pātubhavati); DA i.165. -> Pass. uppajjiyati Vin i.50. -- ppr. uppajjanto PvA 5, 21; fut. ˚pajjissati PvA 5 (bhummadevesu, corresp. with niraye nibbattissati ibid.), 67 (niraye); aor. uppajji PvA 21, 50, 66; & udapādi (q. v.) Vin iii.4; J i.81; ger. ˚pajjitvā D ii.157 = S i.6, 158 = ii.193 = J i.392 = Th 1, 1159; & uppajja J iv.24. -- Caus. uppādeti (q. v.). -> pp. uppanna (q. v.). See also upapajjati and upapanna. Uppajjana
Uppajjana
(adj. -- nt.) [fr. uppajjati] coming into existence; birth, rebirth PvA 9 (˚vasena), 33 (id.). Uppajjanaka
Uppajjanaka
(adj.) [fr. uppajjana] (belonging to) coming into existence, i. e. arising suddenly or without apparent cause, in ˚bhaṇḍa a treasure trove J iii.150. Uppajjitar
Uppajjitar
[n. ag. fr. uppajjati] one who produces or is reborn in (with acc.) D i.143 (saggaŋ etc.). Uppaṭipāṭiyā
Uppaṭipāṭiyā
[abl. of uppaṭipāṭi, ud + paṭipāṭi] lit. "out of reach", i. e. in a distance J i.89; or impossible Vism 96 (ekapañho pi u. āgato nâhosi not one question was impossible to be understood). As tt. g. "with reference to the preceding", supra Vism 272; SnA 124, 128; DhsA 135 (T. ˚paṭipāṭika). Uppaṇḍanā
Uppaṇḍanā
(f.) [abstr. fr. ut + paṇd or unknown etym.] ridiculing, mocking Miln 357; Vism 29; PugA 250 (˚kathā). Uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajāta
Uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajāta
(adj.) [redupl. intens. formation; ud + paṇḍu + ka + jāta; paṇḍu yellowish. The word is evidently a corruption of something else, perhaps upapaṇṇḍuka, upa in meaning of "somewhat like", cp. upanīla, upanibha etc. and reading at Pv ii.113 upakaṇḍakin. The latter may itself be a corruption, but is expld. at PvA 72 by upakaṇḍaka -- jāta "shrivelled up all over, nothing but pieces (?)". The trsln. is thus doubtful; the BSk. is the P. form retranslated into utpāṇḍuka Divy 334, 463, and trsld. "very pale"] "having become very pale" (?), or "somewhat pale" (?), with dubbaṇṇa in Khp, A 234, and in a stock phrase of three different settings, viz. (1) kiso lūkho dubbaṇṇo upp˚ dhamani -- santhata -- gatto Vin i.276; iii.19, 110; M ii.121; distorted to BSk. bhīto utp˚. kṛśāluko durbalako mlānako at Divy 334. -- (2) kiso upp˚. J vi. 71; DhA iv.66. -- (3) upp˚ dhamanisanth˚ J i.346; ii.92; v.95; DhA i.367. Besides in a doubtful passage at Pv ii.112 (upakaṇḍakin, v. l. uppaṇḍ˚ BB.), expld. at PvA 72 "upakaṇḍakajāta", vv. ll. uppaṇḍaka˚ and uppaṇḍupaṇḍuka˚. Uppaṇḍeti
Uppaṇḍeti
[ut + paṇḍ, of uncertain origin] to ridicule, mock, to deride, make fun of Vin i.216, 272, 293; iv. 278; A iii.91 = Pug 67 (ūhasati ullapati +); J v.288, 300; DhA ii.29; iii.41; PvA 175 (avamaññati +). -> Note. The BSk. utprāsayati at Divy 17 represents the P. uppaṇḍeti & must somehow be a corruption of the latter (vv. ll. at Divy 17 are utprāśayati, utprāṇayati & utprāśrayati). Uppatati
Uppatati
[ud + patati] to fly or rise up into the air; to spring upwards, jump up; 3rd sq. pret. udapatta [Sk. *udapaptat] J iii.484 (so read for ˚patto, & change si to pi); ger. uppatitvā J iii.484; iv.213; PvA 103, 215; and uppacca (q. v.). -- pp. uppatita (q. v.). Uppatita
Uppatita
[pp. of uppatati] jumped up, arisen, come about Sn 1 ( = uddhamukhaŋ patitaŋ gataŋ SnA 4), 591; Dh 222 (= uppanna DhA iii.301); Th 1, 371. Uppatti
Uppatti
(f.) [Vedic utpatti, ud + pad] coming forth, product, genesis, origin, rebirth, occasion A ii.133 (˚paṭilābhikāni sanyojanāni); Vbh 137 (˚bhava), 411; cp. Compendium, 262 f. (khaṇa); Miln 127 (˚divasa); Vism, 571 sq. (˚bhava, 9 fold: kāma˚ etc.); SnA 46, 159, 241, 254, 312, 445; PvA 144, 215. On uppatti deva see deva and upapatti. -> See also aṭṭhuppatti, dānuppatti. Uppatha
Uppatha
[Sk. utpatha, ud + patha] a wrong road or course D i.10 (˚gamana, of planets); S i.38, 43; J v.453; vi. 235; DhA iii.356 (˚cāra). -- 152 -- Uppanna
Uppanna
[pp. of uppajjati] born, reborn, arisen, produced, D i.192 (lokaŋ u. born into the world); Vin iii.4; Sn 55 ˚ñāṇa; see Nd2 168), 998; J i.99; Pv ii.22 (pettivisayaŋ); Dhs 1035, 1416; Vbh 12, 17, 50, 319; 327; DhA iii. 301; PvA 21 (petesu), 33, 144, 155. -- anuppanna not arisen M ii.11; not of good class D i.97 (see DA i.267). Uppabbajati
Uppabbajati
[ud + pabbajati] to leave the Order DhA i. 68; PvA 55. -- pp. ˚pabbajita. -- Caus. uppabbājeti to turn out of the Order J iv.219; DhA iv.195. -- Caus. II. uppabbajāpeti to induce some one to leave the Order J iv.304. Uppabbajjta
Uppabbajjta
[ud + pabbajita] one who has left the community of bhikkhus, an ex -- bhikkhu VvA 319; DhA i.311. Uppala
Uppala
[Sk. utpala, uncertain etym.] the (blue) lotus; a waterlily. The 7 kinds of lotuses, mentioned at J v.37 are: nīla -- ratta -- set -- uppala, ratta -- seta -- paduma, seta -- kumuda, kalla -- hāra. -- D i.75; ii.19; Vin iii.33 (˚gandha); J ii. 443; Dh 55; Vv 322; 354; Pv ii.120; iii.105; DhA i.384 (nīl˚); iii.394 (id.); ThA 254, 255; VvA 132, 161. -> What is meant by uppala -- patta (lotus -- leaf?) at Vin iv.261? Uppalaka
Uppalaka
[uppala + ka] "lotus -- like", N. of a hell (cp. BSk. utpala at Divy 67 etc.) A v.173. See also puṇḍarika. Uppalin
Uppalin
(adj. -- n.) [fr. uppala] having lotuses rich in l., only in f. uppalinī a lotus -- pond D i.75; ii.38; S i.138; A iii. 26; Vv 322; DA i.219. Uppaḷāseti
Uppaḷāseti
[ud + pra + las, cp. Sk. samullāsayati in same meaning] to sound out or forth, to make sound Miln 21 (dhamma -- sankhaŋ). Reading at D ii.337 is upaḷāseti in same meaning. Uppāṭaka
Uppāṭaka
[fr. ud + paṭ in meaning of "biting, stinging"] an insect, vermin S i.170 (santhāro ˚ehi sañchanno "a siesta -- couch covered by vermin swarm" trsld. p. 215 & note). Uppāṭana
Uppāṭana
(nt.) [fr. ud + paṭ] pulling out, uprooting, de- stroying, skinning J i.454; ii.283; vi.238; Miln 166; PvA 46 (kes˚); Sdhp 140 (camm˚). Cp. sam˚. Uppāṭanaka
Uppāṭanaka
(adj.) [fr. uppāṭana] pulling up, tearing out, uprooting J i.303 (˚vāta); iv.333 (id.). Uppāṭeti
Uppāṭeti
[Sk. utpāṭayati, Caus. uf ud + paṭ to split, cp. also BSk. utpāṭayati nidhānaṇ to dig out a treasure Av. Ś i.294] to split, tear asunder; root out, remove, destroy Vin ii.151 (chaviŋ to skin); M ii.110 (attānaŋ); Th 2, 396 (ger. uppāṭiyā = ˚pāṭetvā ThA 259); J i.281 (bījāni); iv.162, 382; vi.109 (= luñcati); Miln 86; DhA iii.206. -> Caus. uppāṭāpeti in pp. uppāṭāpita caused to be torn off DhA iii.208. See also upphāleti. Uppāda
Uppāda1
[Sk. utpāta, ud + pat] flying up, jump; a sudden & unusual event, portent, omen D i.9 (v. l. uppāta) = Vism 30 (T. uppāta, v. l. uppāda) Sn 360; J i.374; vi. 475; Miln 178. Uppāda
Uppāda2
[Sk. utpāda, ud + pad] coming into existence, appearance, birth Vin i.185; D i.185; S iii.39 (+ vaya); iv.14; v.30; A i.152 (+ vaya), 286, 296; ii.248 (taṇh˚); iii.123 (citt˚ state of consciousness); iv.65 (id.); Dh 182, 194; J i.59, 107 (sat˚); Vbh 303 (citt˚), 375 (taṇh˚); PvA 10; ThA 282. -- anuppāda either "not coming into existence" D iii.270, M i.60; A i.286, 296; ii.214, 249: iii.84 sq.; Ps i.59, 66; Dhs 1367; or "not ripe" D i.12. Uppādaka
Uppādaka
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. uppāda2] producing, generating PvA 13 (dukkh˚). f. ˚ikā DhA iv.109 (jhānɔ). Uppādana
Uppādana
(nt.) [fr. uppada2] making, generating, causing PvA 71 (anubal˚ read for anubalappadāna?) 114. Uppādin
Uppādin
(adj.) [fr. uppāda2] having an origin, arising, bound to arise Dhs 1037, 1416; Vbh 17, 50, 74, 92 and passim; DhsA 45. Uppādetar
Uppādetar
[n. ag. fr. uppādeti] one who produces, causes or brings into existence, creator, producer M i.79; S i. 191; iii.66; v.351; Miln 217. Uppādeti
Uppādeti
[Caus. of uppajjati, ud + pad] -- 1. to give rise to, to produce, put forth, show, evince, make D i.135; M. i.162, 185; Pug 25; PvA 4, 16, 19, 59; Sdhp 539. cittaŋ u. to give a (temporary) thought to (with loc.) J i.81; Miln 85; DhA ii.89; PvA 3. -- 2. to get, obtain, find J iv.2; Miln 140; DhA i.90; PvA 121. -- 3. in lohitaŋ u. to draw (blood) Miln 214. Uppilavati
Uppilavati
(& Uplavati) [Sk. utplavati, ud + plu, cp. utplutya jumping up, rising Sp. Av. Ś i.209] -- 1. to emerge (out of water), to rise, float S iv.313 (uplava imper.); Miln 80, 379; VvA 47 (uplavitvā, v. l. uppalavitvā); DA i.256 (v. l. upari lavati). -- 2. to jump up, frisk about, to be elated or buoyant J ii.97 (cp. Morris J P T S. 1887, 139); Miln 370. -- See also upaplavati, uplāpeti & ubbillāvita etc. Uppīḷa
Uppīḷa
(adj.) [ud + pīḍ] oppressing or oppressed: an˚ free from oppression, not hurt or destroyed D i.135 (opp. sa -- uppīḷa; T. upapīḷa but v. l. upp˚); J iii.443; v.378; PvA 161. Uppīḷita
Uppīḷita
[pp. of uppīḷeti] pressed J vi.3. Uppīḷeti
Uppīḷeti
[ud + pīḍ for ava + pīḍ, cp. uplāpeti = opilāpeti, & opīḷeti] -- 1. to press (down) on to, to hold (tight) to (with acc.), to cover up or close M i.539 (piṭṭhi -- pāṇiŋ hanukena); J i 483 (hatthena akkhīni); ii.245 (hatthikumbhe mukhaŋ); v.293 (aggalaŋ); ThA 188. -- 2. to stampede VvA 83 (paṭhaviŋ). Uppoṭheti
Uppoṭheti
[ud + poṭheti] to beat PvA 4. Upplavana
Upplavana
at DhA i.309 remains to be explained, T. faulty. Upphāleti
Upphāleti
[Caus. of ud + phal] to cut, rip or split open Vin i.276 (udara -- cchaviŋ upphāletvā; v. l. uppāṭetvā, perhaps preferable). Upphāsulika
Upphāsulika
(adj.) [ud + phāsulikā for phāsukikā = phā- suka a rib] "with ribs out", i. e. with ribs showing, emaciated, thin, "skinny" Pv ii.11 (= uggata -- phāsuka PvA 68); iv.101 (MSS. uppā˚); ThA 133 (spelt uppā˚). Uplāpeti
Uplāpeti
[Sk. avaplāvayati, Caus. of ava + plu, with sub- stitution of ud for ava; see also uppilavati] to immerse M i.135 (vv. ll. upal˚ & opil˚); J iv.162 (fig. put into the shade, overpower; v. l. upal˚). See also opilāpeti & ubbillāvita. Ubbaṭuma
Ubbaṭuma
(adj.) [ud + *vṛti (of vṛt) + ma (for mā > mant); cp. Sk. udvṛtta & vṛtimant] going out of its direction, going wrong (or upset?), in phrase ubbaṭumaŋ rathaŋ karoti to put a cart out of its direction A iv. 191, 193. Ubbaṭṭeti
Ubbaṭṭeti
[Caus. of ud + vṛt, as doublet of ubbatteti, cp. BSk. udvartayati Divy 12, 36] to anoint, give perfumes (to a guest), to shampoo J i.87 (gandhacuṇṇena), 238 (id.); v.89, 438. Ubbaṭṭhaka
Ubbaṭṭhaka
misprint in Pug Index as well as at Pug A 233 for ubbhaṭṭhaka (q. v.). Ubbattati
Ubbattati
[ud + vṛt] to go upwards, to rise, swell J vi. 486 (sāgaro ubbatti). See also next. Ubbatteti
Ubbatteti
[Caus. of ud + vṛt, of which doublet is ubbaṭṭeti; cp. also ubbaṭuma] -- 1. to tear out J i.199; Miln 101 (sadevake loke ubbattiyante); DhA i.5 (hadayamaŋsaŋ), 75 (rukkhaŋ). -- 2. to cause to swell or rise J iii.361 (Gangāsotaŋ); iv.161 (samuddaŋ). -- 3. (intrs.) to go out of direction, or in the wrong direction Vism 327 (neva ubbaṭṭati na vivaṭṭati; v. l. uppaṭṭati); DhA iii.155. -- 153 -- Ubbadhati
Ubbadhati
[ud + vadhati] to kill, destroy Sn 4 (praet. udabbadhi = ucchindanto vadheti SnA 18). Ubbandhati
Ubbandhati
[ud + bandhati] to hang up, strangle Vin iii. 73 (rajjuyā); J i.504 (id.); iii.345; Th 2, 80; Vism 501; VvA 139, 207 (ubbandhitu -- kāmā in the intention of hanging herself). Ubbarī
Ubbarī
(f.) [Sk. urvarā, Av. urvara plant] fertile soil, sown field; fig. woman, wife J vi 473 ( = orodha C.). Ubbasati
Ubbasati
see ubbisati. Ubbaha
Ubbaha
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. ud + vṛh, i. e. to ubbahati1] only in cpd. dur˚ hard to pull out, difficult to remove Th 1, 124, 495 = 1053. Ubbahati
Ubbahati1
[ud + bṛh or vṛh, see also uddharati] to pull out, take away, destroy Sn 583 (udabbahe pot. = ubbaheyya dhāreyya SnA 460); Th 1, 158; J ii.223 (udabbahe = udabbaheyya C.); iv.462 (ubbahe); vi.587 (= hareyya C.). Ubbahati
Ubbahati2
[ud + vahati, although possibly same as ubba- hati1, in meaning of uddharati, which has taken up meanings of *udbharati, as well as of *udbṛhati and *udvahati] to carry away, take away, lift (the corn after cutting); only in Caus. II. ubbahāpeti to have the corn harvested Vin ii 180 = A i.241. -- Here belong uddhaṭa and uddharaṇa. Cp. also pavāḷha. Ubbāḷha
Ubbāḷha
[adj. pp. of ud + bāhati = vāh or more likely of ud + bādh] oppressed, troubled, harassed, annoyed, vexed Vin i.148, 353; ii.119; iv.308; J i.300; Vism 182 (kuṇapa -- gandhena); DhA i.343. Ubbāsīyati
Ubbāsīyati
[Pass. of ubbāseti, ud + vas] "to be dis -- inhabited", i. e. to be abandoned by the inhabitants Mhvs 6, 22 ( = chaḍḍīyati C.). -- Cp. ubbisati. Ubbāhana
Ubbāhana
(nt.) [fr. ubbahati2] carrying, lifting, in ˚sa- mattha fit for carrying, i. e. a beast of burden, of an elephant J vi.448. Ubbāhikā
Ubbāhikā
(f.) [orig. f. of ubbāhika, adj. fr. ubbāheti in abstr. use] a method of deciding on the expulsion of a bhikkhu, always in instr. ubbāhikāya "by means of a referendum", the settlement of a dispute being laid in the hands of certain chosen brethren (see Vin Texts iii.49 sq.) Vin ii.95, 97, 305; v.139, 197; A v.71; Mhvs 4, 46. Ubbāheti
Ubbāheti
[hardly to be decided whether fr. ud + vāh (to press, urge), or bṛh or bādh; cp. uddharati 2] to oppress, vex, hinder, incommodate J v.417 sq. Ubbigga
Ubbigga
[Sk. udvigna, pp. of ud + vij] agitated, flurried, anxious Vin ii.184; S i.53; Th 1, 408; J i.486; iii.313; Miln 23, 236, 340 (an˚); Vism 54 (satat˚); DhA ii.27; ThA 267; Sdhp 8, 77. Ubbijjati
Ubbijjati
[Pass. of ud + vij] to be agitated, frightened or afraid Vin i.74 (u. uttasati palāyati); iii.145 (id.); S i. 228 (aor. ubbijji); Miln 149 (tasati +), 286 (+ saŋviji); Vism 58. -- Caus. ubbejeti (q. v.). -- pp. ubbigga (q. v.). Ubbijjanā
Ubbijjanā
(f.) [abstr. fr. ubbijjati] agitation, uneasiness DA i.111. Cp. ubbega. Ubbinaya
Ubbinaya
(adj.) [ud + vinaya] being outside the Vinaya, ex -- or un -- Vinaya, wrong Vinaya Vin ii.307; Dpvs v.19. Ubbilāpa
Ubbilāpa
(v. l. uppilāva, which is prob. the correct reading] joyous state of mind, elation Ud 37. See next. Ubbilāvita
Ubbilāvita
(according to the very plausible expln. given by Morris J P T S. 1887, 137 sq. for uppilāpita, pp. of uppilāpeti = uplāpeti P. allīyati, ālāpa > allāpa etc., and bb for pp as in vanibbaka = Sk. vanīpaka (*vanipp˚)] happy, elated, buoyant, ltt. frisky; only in cpds. ˚atta rejoicing, exultancy, elation of mind D i.3, 37; J iii 466; Miln 183; DA i.53, 122; and ˚ākāra id. DhA i.237. At Vism 158 "cetaso ubbilāvitaŋ" stands for ubbilāvitattaŋ, with v. l. BB uppilāvitaŋ. Cp. J v.114 (ubbilāvita -- cittatā). Ubbilla
Ubbilla
[either a secondary formation fr. ubbilāvita, or representing uppilava (uppilāva) for upplava, ud + plu, as discussed under ubbilāvita. The BSk. word udvilya Lal. V. 351, 357, or audvilya Divy 82 is an artificial reconstruction from the Pāli, after the equation of Sk. dvādaśa > dial. P. bārasa, whereas the original Sk. dv. is in regular P. represented by dd, as in dvīpa > dīpa, *udvāpa > uddāpa. Müller's construction ubbilla > *udvela rests on the same grounds, see P. Gr. 12.] elation, elated state of mind M iii.159; ˚bhāva id. DA i.122; Sdhp 167. See next. Ubbisati
Ubbisati
[better reading v. l. ubbasati, ud + vas] "to be out home", to live away from home J ii.76. -- See also ubbāsīyati. -- pp. ubbisita (˚kāle) ibid. Ubbūḷhavant
Ubbūḷhavant
see uruḷhavant. Ubbega
Ubbega
[Sk. udvega, fr. ud + vij] excitement, fright, an- guish D iii.148; later, also transport, rapture, in cpd. (˚pīti); Vism 143; DhsA 124; PugA 226. Ubbegin
Ubbegin
(adj.) [fr. ubbega] full of anguish or fear J iii. 313 ( = ubbegavant C.). Ubbejanīya
Ubbejanīya
(adj.) [fr. ubbejeti] agitating, causing anxiety J i.323, 504. Ubbejitar & Ubbejetar
Ubbejitar
& Ubbejetar [n. ag. fr. ubbejeti] a terrifier, a terror to A ii.109 (˚etar); iv.189 (id.); Pug 47, 48 ( = ghaṭṭetvā vijjhītvā ubbegappattaŋ karotī ti PugA 226). Ubbejeti
Ubbejeti
[Caus. of ud + vij] to set into agitation, terrify, frighten Miln 388 (˚jayitabba grd.); PugA 226. Ubbeṭhana
Ubbeṭhana
(nt.) [fr. ud + veṣṭ] an envelope, wrap J vi.508. Ubbedha
Ubbedha
[ud + vedha of vyadh] height, only as measure, contrasted with āyāma length, & vitthāra width J i.29 (v.219; asīti -- hatth˚), 203 (yojana -- sahass˚); VvA 33 (yojana˚), 66 (asīti -- hatth˚), 158 (hattha -- sat˚), 188 (soḷasa -- yojan˚), 221, 339; PvA 113. See also pabbedha. Ubbedhati
Ubbedhati
[ud + vedhati = Sk. vyathate] to be moved, to shake (intrs.), quiver, quake J vi.437 (= kampati C.). Ubbhaŋ
Ubbhaŋ
(& Ubbha˚) (indecl.) [a doublet of uddhaŋ, see uddhaŋ iii.] up, over, above, on top J v.269 (ubbhaŋ yojanaŋ uggata); in cpds. like ubbhakkhakaŋ above the collar bone Vin iv.213; ubbhajānumaṇḍalaŋ above the knee Vin iv.213; ubbhamukha upwards S iii.238; Miln 122. Ubbhaṭṭhaka
Ubbhaṭṭhaka
(adj.) [ubbha + ṭha + ka of sthā, prob. contracted fr. ubbhaṭṭhitaka] standing erect or upright D i.167; M i.78, 92, 282, 308, 343; A i.296; ii.206; Pug 55 (ubb˚; = uddhaŋ ṭhitaka PugA 233). Ubbhaṇḍita
Ubbhaṇḍita
[pp. of ubbhaṇḍeti, ud + *bhaṇḍ, cp. bhāṇḍa] bundled up, fixed up, wrapped up, full Vin i.287. Ubbhata
Ubbhata
[pp. of uddharati with bbh for ddh as in ubbhaŋ for uddhaŋ; cp. ubbahati and see also the doublet uddhaṭa] drawn out, pulled out, brought out, thrown out or up, withdrawn Vin i.256 (kaṭhina, cp. uddhāra & ubbhāra); iii.196 (id.); D i.77 (cp uddharati); M i.383 (ubbhatehi akkhihi); Dh 34 (okamokata u. = *okamokataḥ u.); J i.268; PvA 163. Ubbhava
Ubbhava
[ud + bhava] birth, origination, production Pgdp 91 (dānassa phal˚). Cp. BSk. udbhāvanā Divy 184 (guṇ˚) 492 (id.). Ubbhāra
Ubbhāra
= uddhāra (suspension, withdrawal, removal) Vin i.255, 300; v.136, 175; cp. Vin Texts i.19; ii.157. -- 154 -- Ubbhijjati
Ubbhijjati
[ud + bhid] to burst upwards, to spring up out of the ground, to well up; to sprout D i.74 = M iii. 93 = iii.26; J i.18 (v.104); Dh 339 (ger. ubbhijja = uppajitvā DhA iv.49); DA i.218. -- pp. ubbhinna. Ubbhida
Ubbhida1
(nt.) [Sk. udbhida] kitchen salt Vin i.202, cp. Vin Texts ii.48. Ubbhida
Ubbhida2
(adj.) [fr. ud + bhid] breaking or bursting forth, in cpd. ˚odaka "whose waters well up", or "spring water" D i.74; M i.276; DA i.218. Ubbhinna
Ubbhinna
[pp. of ubbhijjati] springing up, welling up Dh i.218. Ubbhujati
Ubbhujati
[ud + bhuj] to bend up, to lift up (forcibly), ger. ˚itvā in meaning of "forcibly" Vin ii.222; iii.40. *Ubha
*Ubha
see ubho; cp. ubhato & ubhaya. Ubhato
Ubhato
(adv.) [abl. of *ubha, to which ubhaya & ubho] both, twofold, in both (or two) ways, on both sides; usually ˚ -- , as ˚bhāgavimutta one who is emancipated in two ways D ii.71; Dialogues ii.70, n. 1; M i.477 (cp. 385 ˚vimaṭṭha); S i.191; A i.73; iv.10, 77; Png 14, 73; Nett 190; ˚byañjanaka (vyañj˚) having the characteristics of both sexes, hermaphrodite Vin i.89, 136, 168; iii.28; v. 222; ˚sangha twofold Sangha, viz. bhikkhu˚ & bhikkhunī Vin ii.255; iv.52, 242, 287; Mhvs 3234. -> See further Vin ii.287 (˚vinaye); D i.7 (˚lohitaka, cp. DA i.87); M i.57 (˚mukha tied up at both ends), 129 (˚daṇḍakakakaca a saw with teeth on both sides), 393 (koṭiko pañho; S iv.323 (id.). Ubhaya
Ubhaya
(adj.) [*ubha + ya, see ubho] both, twofold Sn 547, 628, 712, 1106, 1107, 801 (˚ante); Nd1 109 (˚ante); J i.52; PvA 11, 24, 35, 51. -- nt. ˚ŋ as adv. in combn. with ca c'ûbhayaŋ following after 2nd. part of comprehension) "and both" for both -- and; and also, alike, as well Dh 404 (gahaṭṭhehi anāgārehi c'ûbhayaŋ with householders and houseless alike); Pv i.69. -- Note. The form ubhayo at Pv ii.310 is to be regarded as fem. pl. of ubho ( = duve PvA 86).

-- aŋsa lit. both shoulders or both parts, i. e. completely, thoroughly, all round (˚ -- ) in ˚bhāvita thoroughly trained D i.154 (cp. DA i.312 ubhaya -- koṭṭhāsāya bhāvito). Ubhayattha
Ubhayattha
[adv.) [Sk. ubhayatra, fr. ubhaya] in both places, in both cases Vin i.107; A iii.64; Dh 15 -- 17; DhA i.29 (˚ettha), 30; PvA 130. Ubho
Ubho
(udj.) [Sk. ubhau, an old remnant of a dual form in Pāli; cp. Gr. a)/mfw both, Lat. ambo, Lith. abū, Goth. bai, Ohg. beide = E. both. To prep. -- adv. *amb, *ambi; see abhi & cp. also vīsati] both; nom. acc. ubho S i.87 = A iii.48 = It 16; It 43 = Sn 661 = Dh 306; Sn 220, 543, 597; Dh 74, 256, 269; 412; Nd1 109; Pv i.76; J i.223; ii.3; PvA 13, 82 (tā ubho). -- ubhantaŋ both ends, both sides Sn 1042 (see Nd2 169; Sn A 588 expls. by ubho ante). -- gen. ubhinnaŋ S i.162; ii. 222; J ii.3; instr. ubhohi (hatthehi) Vin ii.256; J iv.142; loc. ubhosu Sn 778 (antesu); J i.264 (passesu; PvA 94 (hatthesu). -> Note. The form ubhayo at Pv ii.310 is to be regarded as a nom. fem. (= duve PvA 86). Ummagga
Ummagga
[ud + magga, lit. "off -- track"] -- 1. an underground watercourse, a conduit, main M i.171; A ii.189; J vi.426, 432; SnA 50 ("ummaggo paññā pavuccati"); DhA i.252 (˚cora); ii.37 (v l. umanga); iv.104; PvA 44 (read with v. l. SS kummagga). -- 2. a side track, a wrong way, devious way S i.193 (v. l. ˚manga) = Th 1, 1242; S iv.195; A iv.191. Ummanga
Ummanga
[ud + manga (?) or for ummagga, q. v. for vv. ll.] "out luck", i. e. unlucky; or "one who has gone off the right path" Vin v.144. Ummatta
Ummatta
(adj.) [ud + matta of mad] out of one's mind, mad S v.447 (+ viceta); J v.386; Miln 122; Sdhp 88; PvA 40 (˚puggala read with v. l. SS for dummati puggala). Cp. next & ummāda.

-- rūpa like mad, madly, insane Pv i.81; ii.62 (where J iii.156 has santaramāna). Ummattaka
Ummattaka
(adj.) = ummatta; Vin i.123, 321; ii.60, 80; iii.27, 33; A iv.248; Vism 260 (reason for); Miln 277; PvA 38, 39, 93 (˚vesa appearance of a madman), 95. -> f. ummattikā Vin iv.259, 265; ThA 111. Ummaddeti
Ummaddeti
[ud + maddeti, Caus. of mṛd] to rub something on (acc.) Vin ii.107 = 266 (mukhaŋ). Ummasati
Ummasati
[ud + masati of mṛś.] to touch, take hold of, lift up Vin iii.121. Cp. next. Ummasanā
Ummasanā
(f.) [abstr. fr. ummasati] lifting up Vin iii.121 ( = uddhaŋ uccāraṇā). Ummā
Ummā
(f.) [cp. Sk. umā] flax, only in cpd. ˚puppha the (azure) flower of flax M ii.13 = A v.61 (v. l. dammā˚, ummāta˚); D ii.260; Th 1, 1068; DhsA 13. Also (m.) N. of a gem Miln 118. Ummāda
Ummāda
[ud + māda] madness, distraction, mental aberra- tion S i.126 (˚ŋ pāpuṇeyya citta -- vikkhepaŋ vā); A ii.80; iii.119; v.169; Pug 69; PvA 6 (˚patta frantic, out of mind), 94 (˚vāta), 162 (˚patta). Ummādanā
Ummādanā
(f.) (or ˚aŋ nt.) [abstr. fr. ummāda] maddening Sn 399 (+ mohanaŋ = paraloke ummādanaŋ ihaloke mohanaŋ SnA 377); ThA 2, 357 (cp. ThA 243). Ummāra
Ummāra
[according to Müller P. Gr. = Sk. udumbara (?)] - 1. a threshold Vin iv.160 (= indakhīla); Th 2, 410; J i. 62; iii.101; Vism 425; DhA i.350. -- 2. a curb -- stone J vi.11. -- 3. as uttar˚ (the upper threshold) the lintel J i.111; DhA ii.5 (v. l. upari˚). -- 4. window -- sash or sill J i.347; iv.356. Ummi
Ummi
(& Ummī) (f.) [for the usual ūmi, cp. similar double forms of bhummi > bhūmi] a wave Th 1, 681; Miln 346. Ummisati
Ummisati
[ud + misati] to open one's eyes J iii.96 (opp. nimisati; v. l. ummisati for ˚mīḷ˚?). Ummihati
Ummihati
[ud + mih] to urinate Vin i.78 (ūhanati +). Ummīleti
Ummīleti
[Caus. of ud + mīl; opp. ni(m)mīleti] to open one's eyes J i.439; ii.195; iv.457; vi.185; Miln 179, 357, 394; Vism 185, 186; DhA ii.28 (opp. ni˚); VvA 205, 314. Ummuka
Ummuka
(nt.) [Sk. ulmuka perhaps to Lat. adoleo, cp. also alāta firebrand; see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. adoleo] a fire brand Vin iv.265; S iv.92 (T. ummukka meaning "loosened"?); J ii.69 v. l. ˚kk), 404 (kk); iii.356. Ummujjati
Ummujjati
[ud + majj] to emerge, rise up (out of water) Vin i.180; S iv.312; A iv.11 sq; J ii.149, 284; iii.507; iv.139; Pug 71; Miln 118; DA i.37, 127; PvA 113. Ummujjana
Ummujjana
(nt.) [fr. ummujjati] emerging Vism 175 (+ nim- mujjana); DA i.115. Ummujjamānaka
Ummujjamānaka
(adj.) [ummujjamāna, ppr. med, of um- mujjati, + ka] emerging A ii.182. Ummujjā
Ummujjā
(f.) [fr. ummujjati] emerging, jumping out of (water), only in phrase ummujja -- nimujjaŋ karoti to emerge & dive D i.78; M i.69; A i.170; J iv.139; Nett 110; Vism 395 ( = Ps ii.208). Ummūla
Ummūla
(adj.) [ud + mūla] "roots -- out", with roots showing, laying bare the roots J i.249 (˚ŋ karoti); Sdhp 452. Ummūlaka
Ummūlaka
(adj.) [ = ummūla] uprooting, laying bare the roots J i.303 (vāta). Ummūleti
Ummūleti
[Caus. fr. ummūla] to uproot, to root out J i.329. -- 155 -- Umhayati
Umhayati
[Sk. *ut -- smayate, ud + smi] to laugh out loud J ii.131 ( = hasitaŋ karoti); iii.44; iv.197; v.299 (˚amāna = hasamāna C.). Caus. umhāpeti J v.297. Uyyassu
Uyyassu
(imper. 3rd. sg.) is v. l. BB. and C. reading at J vi.145, 146 for dayassu, fly; probably for (i) yassu of yā to go. Uyyāti
Uyyāti
[ud + yā] to go out, to go away J ii.3, 4 (imper. uyyāhi); iv.101. -- Caus. uyyāpeti to cause to go away, to bring or take out S iv.312. Uyyāna
Uyyāna
(nt.) [Sk. udyāna, fr. ud + yā] a park, pleasure grove, a (royal) garden J i.120, 149; ii.104; iv.213; v.95; vi.333; PvA 6, 74, 76; VvA 7; Sdhp 7.

-- kīḷā amusement in the park, sports DhA i.220; iv.3. -- pāla overseer of parks, head gardener, park keeper J ii. 105, 191; iv.264 bhūmi garden ground, pleasure ground J i.58; Vv 6419; Pv ii.129; DA i.235. Uyyānavant
Uyyānavant
(adj.) [fr. uyyāna] full of pleasure gardens Pv iii.36. Uyyāma
Uyyāma
[Sk. udyama, ud + yam; P. uyyāma with ā for a, as niyāma > niyama; cp. BSk. udyama Jtm 210] exertion, effort, endeavour Dhs 13, 22, 289, 571; DhsA 146. Uyyuñjati
Uyyuñjati
[ud + yuj] to go away, depart, leave one's house Dh 91 (cp. DhA ii.170). -- pp. uyyutta. -- Caus. uyyojeti (q. v.). Uyyuta
Uyyuta
(adj.) [ud + yuta] striving, busy (in a good or bad cause) Sn 247, 248; J v.95. Uyyutta
Uyyutta
[pp. of uyyuñjati] striving, active, zealous, energ- etic J i.232. Uyyoga
Uyyoga
[fr. ud + yuj] departure, approach of death Dh 236 (cp. DhA iii.335). Uyyojana
Uyyojana
(nt.) [fr. uyyojeti] inciting, instigation A iv.233. Uyyojita
Uyyojita
[pp. of uyyojeti] instigated Miln 228; PvA 105. Uyyojeti
Uyyojeti
[Caus. of uyyuñjati] -- 1. to instigate Vin iv.235; J iii.265. -- 2. to dismiss, take leave of (acc.), send off, let go Vin i.179; A iii.75; J i.119 (bhikkhu -- sanghaŋ), 293; iii.188; v.217; vi.72; Vism 91; DhA i.14, 15, 398; ii.44; VvA 179; PvA 93. -- pp. uyyojita (q. v.). Uyyodhika
Uyyodhika
(nt.) [fr. ud + yudh] a plan of combat, sham fight Vin iv.107; D i.6; A v.65; DA i.85. Ura
Ura
(m. nt.) & Uro (nt.) [Sk. uras] -- 1. the breast, chest. -- Cases after the nt. s. -- declension are instr. urasā Th 1, 27; Sn 609; & loc. urasi Sn 255; J iii.148; iv. 118, also urasiŋ J iii.386 ( = urasmiŋ C.). Other cases of nt. a -- stem, e. g. instr. urena J iii.90; PvA 75; loc. ure D i.135; J i.156, 433, 447; PvA 62 (ure jāta; cp. orasa). -- Vin ii.105 (contrasted with piṭṭhi back); iv.129; J iv.3; v.159, 202; Nd2 659; Pv iv.108; DhA iii.175; DA i.254; DhsA 321; PvA 62, 66. -- uraŋ deti (with loc.) to put oneself on to something with one's chest, fig. to apply oneself to J i.367, 401, 408; iii.139, 455; iv.219; v.118, 278. -- 2. (appld.) the base of a carriage pole Vv 6328 (= īsāmūla VvA 269).

-- ga going on the chest, creeping, i. e. a snake S i.69; Sn 1, 604; J i.7; iv.330; vi.208; Vv 808; Pv i.121 ( = urena gacchati ti urago sappassɔ etaŋ adhivacanaŋ PvA 63); PvA 61, 67. -- cakka an iron wheel (put on the chest), as an instrument of torture in Niraya J i.363, 414. -- cchada "breast cover", breast plate (for ornament) Vin ii.10; J iv.3; v.215, 409; vi.480; ThA 253. -- ttāḷi beating one's breast (as a sign of mourning & sorrow) M i.86, 136; A ii.188; iii.54, 416; iv.293; PvA 39. -- tthala the breast A ii.174. Urabbha
Urabbha
[Sk. urabhra, with ulā & uraṇa to be compared with Gr. a)rh/n wether, cp. Hom. ei) = ros wool; Lat. vervex; Ags. waru = E. ware (orig. sheepskins) = Ger. ware. Here also belongs P. urāṇī] a ram D i.127; A i.251 sq.; ii.207; iv.41 sq.; J v.241; Pug 56; DA i.294; DhA ii.6. See also orabbhika. Urāṇī
Urāṇī
(f.) [or uraṇī?, f. of uraṇa, see urabbha] an ewe J v.241 ( = urāṇikā C.); v. l. uraṇī & uraṇikā. Uru
Uru
(adj.) [cp. Av. ravah space; Gr. eu)rus wide; Lat. rūs free or wide space, field; Idg. *ru, *uer wide, to which also Goth. rūms space = Ags. rūm, E. room, Ger. raum] wide, large; excellent, eminent J v.89; Miln 354; Sdhp 345, 592. -- pl. urū sands, soil J v.303. Urundā
Urundā
(f.) [ura + undā?] freedom of the chest, free breathing, relief D ii.269 (v. l. uruddhā perhaps preferable, for ura + uddharana lifting or raising the chest). Urūḷhava
Urūḷhava
(adj.) [doubtful, prob. for urūḷhavant, with affix vant to a pp. formed with ud˚. The word is taken by Kern, Toev. s. v. as ud -- ūḷha of vah (with d for r). The well accredited (and older) variant ubbuḷhavā is expld. (see Kern, s. v.) as pp. of ud + bṛh2, cp. upabrūhana. Perhaps we have to consider this as the legitimate form urūḷhava as its corruption. Morris, J. P.T.S. 1887, 141 takes urūḷhavā as ud + rūḷha, pp. of ruh (with r. for rr = dr), thus "overgrown"] large, bulky, immense; great, big, strong. Only in one stock phrase "nāgo isādanto urūḷhavo" Vv 209, 439; J vi.488; of which variant n. ī. ubbuḷhavā M i.414 = 450. The word is expld. at J vi.488 by "ubbāhana -- samattha"; at VvA 104 (pl. urṳ̄ḷhavā) by "thāmajava -- parakkamehi byūhanto (v. l. brahmanto) mahantaŋ yuddha -- kiccaŋ vahituŋ samatthā ti attho". The BSk. udviddha (Divy 7) may possibly be a corruption of ubbūḷha. Ulati
Ulati
is a commentator's invention; said to be = gacchati to go Vism 60 (in definition of paŋsu -- kūla; paŋsu viya kucchita -- bhāvaŋ ulatī ti paŋsu -- kūlaŋ). Ulūka
Ulūka
[Sk. ulūka; cp. Lat. ulucus & ulula owl, ululāre to howl, Ger. uhu; onomat. *ul, as in Gr. o)lolu/zw, Sk. ululi, Lith. ulůti] an owl Vin i.186 (˚camma, sandals of owl's skin); iii.34; A v.289 sq.; J ii.208, 352 (as king of the birds); Miln 403; DhA i.50 (kāka˚ crows & owls).

-- pakkha owls' wings (used as dress) Vin i.305; D i.167. -- pakkhika dress of owls' wings, or owl feathers A i.241, 296; ii.206; Pug 55 ( = ulūka -- pattāni ganthetvā kata -- nivāsanaŋ Pug A 233). Ullanghati
Ullanghati
[ud + langh, cp. BSk. prollanghya transgres- sing ( = pra + ullangh˚) Divy 596] to leap up J iii.222 (udakato ˚itvā). -- Caus. ullangheti to make jump up (always with olangheti, i. e. to make dance up & down) Vin iii.121; J v.434; DhA iv.197. -- pp. ullanghita (q v.). Ullanghanā
Ullanghanā
(f.) [abstr. fr. ud + langh] jumping up, lifting up, raising Vin iii.121; J iv.5 (˚samattha?). Ullanghita
Ullanghita
[pp. of ullangheti] being jumped on, set on C. on S i.40 (see K. S. i.318) (for uḍḍita = taṇhāya ullanghita). Ullapati
Ullapati
[ud + lapati] to call out, to talk to, lay claim to Vin i.97; iii.105; Pug 67 ( = katheti Pug A 249). Ullapana
Ullapana
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. ullapati] calling out, enticing, laying claim to Vin iii.101; Th 2, 357; Miln 127; ThA 243. -- ullapanā = uddhaŋ katvā lapanā Vism 27. Ullahaka
Ullahaka
(adj.) [?] only in acc. nt. ullahakaŋ used adverbially, in cpd. dant˚ after the manner of rubbing the teeth, by means of grinding the teeth M iii.167. Seems to be a a(/pac legome/non. Ullāpa
Ullāpa
is v. l. for uklāpa (q. v.). Ullikhana
Ullikhana
(nt.) [fr. ud + likh] combing, scratching VvA 349; ThA 267. -- 156 -- Ullikhita
Ullikhita
[pp. of ud + likh] scratched, combed Vin i.254; J ii.92 (aḍḍhullikhitehi kesehi); Ud 22 (id. with upaḍḍh˚ for aḍḍh˚); VvA 197. Ullingeti
Ullingeti
[Denom. of ud + linga] to exhibit, show as a characteristic Vism 492. Ullitta
Ullitta
[pp. of ud + lip] smeared; only in combn. ullittâ- valitta smeared up & down, i. e. smeared all round Vin ii 117; M ii.8; A i.101, 137; iv.231; Th 1, 737. Ullumpati
Ullumpati
[ud + lup, cp. BSk. ullumpati Mahāvy § 268] to take up, to help (with acc.), to save Vin ii.277; D i.249. Ullumpana
Ullumpana
(nt.) [fr. ullumpati] saving, helping; in phrase ˚sabhāva -- saṇṭhita of a helping disposition, full of mercy DA i.177; PvA 35. Same as ullopana (q. v.). Ullulita
Ullulita
[pp. of ulloleti] waved, shaken (by the wind); waving J vi.536. Ulloka
Ulloka
[ud + lok˚] doubtful in its meaning; occurs at Vin i.48 = ii.209 as ullokā paṭhamaŋ ohāreti, trsl. Vin Texts by "a cloth to remove cobwebs", but better by Andersen, Pāli Reader as "as soon as it is seen"; at Vin ii.151 the translators give "a cloth placed under the bedstead to keep the stuffing from coming out". See on term Morris J.P.T.S. 1885, 31. -- In cpd ulloka -- paduma at J vi.432 it may mean "bright lotus" (lit. to be looked at). See ulloketi. Ullokaka
Ullokaka
(adj.) [fr. ulloketi] looking on (to), looking out; in phrase mukh˚ looking into a person's face; i. e. cheerful, winning; or "of bright face", with a winning smile D i.60; DA i.59, 168; PvA 219 (˚ika for ˚aka). Ullokita
Ullokita
[pp. of ulloketi] looked at, looked on J i.253; DA i 193. Ulloketi
Ulloketi
[ud + lok˚, cp. loka, āloka & viloka] to look on to, look for, await J i.232 (ākāsaŋ), 253; ii.221, 434; DA i.153, 168; VvA 316. -- pp. ullokita (q. v.). Ullopana
Ullopana
(nt.) = ullumpana DhA i.309 (T. faulty; see remarks ad locum). Ullola
Ullola
[fr. ud + lul] -- 1. a wave J iii.228; vi.394. - 2. commotion, unrest J iv.306, 476. Ullolanā
Ullolanā
(f.) [fr. ulloleti] wavering, loitering (in expectation of something), greed ThA 243. Ulloleti
Ulloleti
[denom. fr. ullola] to stroll or hang about, to wait for, expect ThA 243. -- pp. ullulita. Uḷāra
Uḷāra
(adj.) [Vedic udāra, BSk. audāra] great, eminent, excellent, superb, lofty, noble, rich. -- Dhammapāla at VvA 10 -- 11 distinguishes 3 meanings: tīhi atthehi ūḷāraŋ; paṇītaŋ (excellent), seṭṭhaŋ (best), mahantaŋ (great) Vin iii.41 (˚bhoga); D i.96; M iii.38 (˚bhogatā); S v.159; Sn 53, 58, 301; Nd2 170; J i.399; v.95; Vv 11; 8426; Pv i.512 ( = hita samiddha PvA 30); VvA 18 (˚pabhāva = mahānubhāva); ThA 173, 280; PvA 5, 6, 7, 8, 25, 30, 43, 58 and passim; Sdhp 26, 260, 416. -> Der. oḷārika (q. v.). Uḷāratā
Uḷāratā
(f.) = uḷāratta Sdhp 254. Uḷāratta
Uḷāratta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. uḷāra] greatness etc.; only neg. an˚ smallness, insignificance, inferiority VvA 24. Uḷu
Uḷu
[Sk. uḍu, dialectical?] a lunar mansion Miln 178. Uḷunka
Uḷunka
[dial.?] a ladle, a spoon Vin i.286; J i.120, 157; iii.461; Miln 8; DhA i.425; ii.3, 20; iv.75, 123. Uḷumpa
Uḷumpa
[dial.?] a raft, a float Vin i.230; iii 63 (˚ŋ ban- dhati); J iv.2; DhA ii.120. Uviṭṭa
Uviṭṭa
[ = viṭṭha, pp. of viś, with prefixed u] having entered, come in D ii.274 (v. l. BK. upa˚). Usabha
Usabha1
[Vedic ṛṣabha; Av. aršan male, Gr. a)/rshn, a)/rrhn masculine, to Idg. *eres & *rēs to wet, sprinkle (with semen), as also in Sk. rasa juice, rasā wet, liquid, Lat. rōs dew. A parallel root *ueres in Sk. varṣa rain, Gr. e)/rsh dew; Sk. vṛṣan & vṛṣabha bull] a bull; often fig. as symbol of manliness and strength (cp. nisabha) D i.6 (˚yuddha bull -- fight), 9 (˚lakkhaṇa signs on a b.), 127; Vin iii.39 (puris˚ "bull of a man", a very strong man); A i.188; ii.207; iv.41 sq., 376; v.347, 350; Sn 26 sq., 416, 646, 684; Dh 422; J i.28 (v.203; ˚kkhandha broadshouldered), 336; v.99 (bharatûsabha); vi.136; Pug 56; Vism 153 (˚camma, in simile); DhA i.396; SnA 226, 333; KhA 144; PvA 163; VvA 85. -- The compn. forms of usabha are āsabha, isabha (in nisabha) & esabha (q. v.). The relations between usabha, vasabha & nisabha are discussed at SnA 40. Usabha
Usabha2
(nt.) [ = usabha1, in special application (?)] a cer- tain measure of length, consisting of 20 yaṭṭhis (see yaṭṭhi) or 140 cubits J i.64 (eight), 70 (id.); ii.91; iv.17 (one), 142 (eight); DhA i.108 (˚mattaŋ). Usā
Usā
(f.) [doubtful] (a certain) food J vi.80. Usīra
Usīra
(m. & nt.) [Sk. uśīra] the fragrant root of Andropogon Muricatum (cp. bīraṇa) Vin i.201; ii.130 (˚mayā vijanī); S ii.88 (˚nāḷi); A ii.199 (id.); Dh 337; J v.39; Th 1, 402 (˚attho). Usu
Usu
(m. & f) Sk. iṣu] an arrow Vin iii.106 (˚loma); D i.9; M i.86; iii.133; S i.127; A ii.117; iii.162; J iv.416; vi.79, 248, 454; Miln 331, 339; SnA 466; PvA 155.

-- kāra an arrow -- maker, fletcher M ii.105; Dh 80, 145; Th 1, 29; J ii.275; vi.66; DhA i.288. Usumā
Usumā
(f.) [the diaeretic form of Sk. uṣman, of which the direct equivalent is P. usmā (q. v.)] heat J i.31 ( = uṇha iii.55), 243; ii.433; Vism 172 (usuma -- vaṭṭi -- sadisa); DA i.186; DhA i.225; ii.20. Usuyyaka
Usuyyaka
(adj.) [fr. usuyyā] envious, jealous Vin ii.190; Sn 318, 325; J ii.192 (v. l. asuyy˚); v.114. -- Note. The long vowel form usūyaka occurs in cpd. abbhusūyaka (q. v.). Spelling ussuyikā occurs at Vv 3321 (see VvA 147). Usuyyati & Usūyati
Usuyyati
& Usūyati [Sk. asūyati; fr. usuyā envy] to be jealous or envious, to envy (with acc.) Vin i.242; J iii. 27 (ppr. an -- usuyyaŋ); Pv ii.320 (maŋ usūyasi = mayhaŋ issaŋ karosi PvA 87). Usuyyanā
Usuyyanā
(f.) & Usuyyitatta (nt.) are exegetical abstr. formations of usuyyā (q. v.). Dhs 1121; Pug 19. Usuyyā & Usūyā
Usuyyā
& Usūyā (f.) [Sk. asūyā] envy, jealousy, detraction S i.127 (ū); Sn 245 (u); J ii.193 (ū); iii.99 (ū; v. l. ussuyyā); Miln 402 (ū); Dhs 1121 (u); VvA 71 (u); SnA 332 (u). Usmā
Usmā
(f.) [see usumā] heat D ii.335, 338; M i.295; S ii. iii.143; iv.215, 294; v.212; Dhs 964; DA i.310. -- In combn. with ˚kata it appears as usmī˚, e. g. at M i 132, 258.

-- gata heated, belonging to heat Dhs 964; as tt. one who mortifies or chastises himself, an ascetic J v.209 ( = samaṇateja C.; cp. BSk. uṣṇagata & uṣmagata Divy 166, 240, 271. 469, & see Kern's mistakes at Toev. s. v.). Ussa
Ussa
(adj.) [der. fr. ud = *ud -- s(y)a, in analogy to oma fr. ava; but taken by Kern, Toev. s. v. as an abbreviated ussada] superior, higher (opp. oma inferior) A iii.359; Sn 860 (= Nd1 251 with spelling ossa), 954. Ussakkati
Ussakkati1
[ud + sakkati, see sakkati] to creep out or up to, to rise A iii.241 sq.; Miln 260. Ussakkati
Ussakkati2
[by -- form of ussukkati] to endeavour Vism 437; VvA 95 (Caus. II. ussakkāpesi), 214. -- 157 -- Ussankita
Ussankita
(adj.) [pp. of ud + śank] = ussankin A iii.128; DhA iii.485 (+ pari˚; cp. ā˚). Ussankin
Ussankin
(adj.) [fr. ud + śank] distrustful, fearful, anxious Vin ii.192. Ussankha
Ussankha
(adj.) [ud + sankha] with ankles midway (?) in ˚pāda the 7th of the characteristics of a Mahāpurisa D ii.17; iii.143, 154; DA explains: the ankles are not over the heels, but midway in the length of the foot. Ussajjati
Ussajjati
[ud + sṛj, cp. BSk. protsṛjati Divy 587] to dis- miss, set free, take off, hurl A iv.191. Ussaṭa
Ussaṭa
[pp. of ud + sarati of sṛ, cp. saṭa for *sūta] run away M ii.65. Ussada
Ussada
[most likely to ud + syad; see ussanna]: this word is beset with difficulties, the phrase satt -- ussada is applied in all kinds of meanings, evidently the result of an original application & meaning having become obliterated. satt˚ is taken as *sapta (seven) as well as *sattva (being), ussada as prominence, protuberance, fulness, arrogance. The meanings may be tabulated as follows: (1) prominence (cp. Sk. utsedha), used in characterisation of the Nirayas, as "projecting, prominent hells", ussadanirayā (but see also below 4) J i.174; iv.3, 422 (pallankaŋ, v. l. caturassạŋ, with four corners); v.266. -- adj. prominent ThA 13 (tej -- ussadehi ariyamaggadhammehi, or as below 4?). -- 2. protuberance, bump, swelling J iv.188; also in phrase sattussada having 7 protuberances, a qualification of the Mahāpurisa D iii.151 (viz. on both hands, feet, shoulders, and on his back). -- 3. rubbing in, anointing, ointment; adj. anointed with ( -- ˚), in candan˚ J iii.139; iv.60; Th 1, 267; Vv 537; DhA i.28; VvA 237. -- 4. a crowd adj. full of ( -- ˚) in phrase sattussada crowded with (human beings) D i.87 (cp. DA i.245: aneka -- satta -- samākiṇṇa; but in same sense BSk. sapt -- otsada Divy 620, 621); Pv iv.18 (of Niraya = full of beings, expld. by sattehi ussanna uparûpari nicita PvA 221. -- 5. qualification, characteristic, mark, attribute, in catussada "having the four qualifications (of a good village)" J iv.309 (viz. plenty of people, corn, wood and water C.). The phrase is evidently shaped after D i.87 (under 4). As "preponderant quality, characteristic" we find ussada used at Vism 103 (cf. Asl. 267) in combns. lobh˚, dos˚, moh˚, alobh˚ etc. (quoted from the "Ussadakittana"), and similarly at VvA 19 in Dhammapāla's definition of manussa (lobhɔādīhi alobhɔādīhi sahitassa manassa ussannatāya manussā), viz. sattā manussa -- jātikā tesu lobhɔ -> ādayo alobhɔādayo ca ussadā. -- 6. (metaph.) self -- elevation, arrogance, conceit, haughtiness Vin i.3; Sn 515, 624 (an˚ = taṇhā -- ussada -- abhāvena SnA 467), 783 (expld. by Nd1 72 under formula sattussada; i. e. showing 7 bad qualities, viz. rāga, dosa, moha etc.), 855. -- See also ussādana, ussādeti etc. Ussadaka
Ussadaka
(adj.) [fr. ussada 4] over -- full, overflowing A iii.231, 234 (˚jāta, of a kettle, with vv. ll. ussuraka˚ & ussuka˚). Ussanna
Ussanna
(adj.) [pp. of ud + syad, cp. abhisanna] -- 1. overflowing, heaped up, crowded; extensive, abundant, preponderant, excessive, full of (˚ -- ) Vin i.285 (cīvaraŋ u. overstocked; ii.270 (āmisaŋ too abundant); iii.286; Th 2, 444 ( = upacita ThA 271); J i.48, 145 ˚kusalamūla); DhA i.26 (id.); (lobho etc.) Asl. 267; Miln 223 (id.); J i.336 (kāla, fulfilled); iii.418; iv.140; Pv iii.51 (˚puñña, cp. PvA 197); PvA 71 (˚pabhā thick glow). Cp. accussanna. -- 2. anointed VvA 237. -- 3. spread out, wide DhA ii.67 (mahāpaṭhavī u.), 72 (id.). Ussannatā
Ussannatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. ussanna] accumulation, fulness, plenty Kvu 467 (where Kvu trsln. p. 275 gives ussadattā); VvA 18, 19. Ussaya
Ussaya
in ˚vādika Vin iv.224 is a variant of usuyya˚ "using envious language, quarrelsome". -- Another ussaya [fr. ud + śri, cp. Sk. ucchrita, P. ussita & ussāpeti] meaning "accumulation" is found in cpd. samussaya only. Ussayāpeti
Ussayāpeti
see udassaye. Ussarati
Ussarati
[ud + sarati of sṛ] to run out, run away J i.434 (imper. ussaratha); v.437. -- pp. ussaṭa (q. v.). -- Caus. ussāreti (q. v.). Ussava
Ussava
[Sk. utsava] feast, making merry, holiday Vin iii. 249; J i.475; ii.13, 248; VvA 7, 109 (˚divasa). Ussahati
Ussahati
[ud + sah, cp. BSk. utsaha Jtm 215; utsahetavya Divy 494; utsahana Divy 490; ucchahate for utsahate Av. Ś ii.21] to be able, to be fit for, to dare, venture Vin i.47, 83; ii.208; iii.17; D i.135; S iv.308, 310; Miln 242; VvA 100. -- Caus. ussāheti (see pp. ussāhita). Ussāda
Ussāda
[fr. ussādeti] throwing up on DA i.122. Ussādana
Ussādana
(nt.) [to ussādeti, cp. ussādita] -- 1. overflowing, piling up, abundance M iii.230 (opp. apasādana). -- 2. (probably confused with ussāraṇa) tumult, uproar, confusion A iii.91, 92 (v. l. ussāraṇa) = Pug 66 (= hatthiassarathâdīnaŋ cɔeva balakāyassa ca uccāsadda -- mahāsaddo Pug A 249). Ussādita
Ussādita
[fr. ussādeti, BSk. ucchrāyita Divy 76, 77, 466]. [See ussāpita & ussārita under ussāpeti & ussāreti. There exists in Pāli as well as in BSk. a confusion of different roots to express the notion of raising, rising, lifting & unfolding, viz. sṛ, syad, śri, sad, chad. (See ussada, ucchādana, ussādeti, ussāpeti, ussāreti)]. Ussādiyati
Ussādiyati
[Pass. med. of ussādeti, cp. ussada 4] to be in abundance, to be over Vin ii.167. Ussādeti
Ussādeti
[denom. fr. ussada 1] -- 1. to dismiss D iii.128 [for ussāreti1] -- 2. to raise, cause to rise up on, haul up, pile up M i.135; iii.230; A iv.198, 201; Miln 187, 250. -- Pass. ussādiyati (q. v.). -- pp. ussādita (q. v.). Ussāpana
Ussāpana
(nt.) [fr. ussāpeti] lifting up, raising, erecting, unfolding (of a flag or banner) A iv.41; Nd2 503 (dhamma -- dhajassa). Ussāpita
Ussāpita
[pp. of ussāpeti, cp. ussādita] lifted, raised, un- furled Miln 328 (dhamma -- dhaja); J ii.219. Ussāpeti
Ussāpeti
[Caus. of ud + śri, cp. BSk. ucchrāpayati Av. S i.384, 386, 387; ii.2] to lift up, erect, raise, exalt Vin ii.195; A iv.43; J ii.219; iv.16; v.95 (chattaŋ); PvA 75 (id.); Miln 21; DhA i.3; iii 118 (kaṭṭhāni). -- pp. ussāpita & ussita (q. v.). See also usseti. Ussāraṇa
Ussāraṇa
(nt.) [fr. ussāreti] procession, going or running about, tumult DhA ii.7 (so read for ossāraṇā). Cp. ussādana. Ussārita
Ussārita
[pp. of ussāreti2] lifted out or up Vism 63 (samudda- vīcīhi thale ussārita; v. l. ussādita). Ussāreti
Ussāreti1
[Caus. of ussarati] to cause to move back, to cause to go away or to recede Vin i.32, 46 (here a student, when folding up his master's robe, has to make the corners move back a hand's breadth each time. Then the crease or fold will change and not tend to wear through), 276; ii.237 (here the reading ussādeti may be preferred); J i.419; iv.349; v.347. -- Caus. II. ussārāpeti J ii.290. Ussāreti
Ussāreti2
[ = ussādeti] to cause to raise aloft (of a flag), to lift J v.319 (= ussāpeti). -- pp. ussārita. Ussāva
Ussāva1
[either = Sk. avaśyāya, or to ud + sru] hoar- frost, dew D ii.19; J iv.120; v.417; ˚bindu a dew drop A iv.137; Pv iv.15; SnA 458; in comparisons: Vism 231, 633. Ussāva
Ussāva2
[fr. ud + sru] outflow, taint, stain (cp. āsava) DhA iv.165 (taṇhā˚; v. l. ussada, to ussada 6). Ussāvana
Ussāvana
(nt.) [ = ussāpana] proclamation (of a building as legal store house); in ˚antika within the proclaimed limit Vin i.239. -- 158 -- Ussāsa
Ussāsa
see nirussāsa. Ussāha
Ussāha
[Sk. utsāha & utsaha, see ussahati] strength, power, energy; endeavour, good -- will M ii.174; S v.440; A i. 147; ii.93, 195; iii.75, 307; iv.320; v.93 sq.; Miln 323, 329 (dhiti +) Vism 330; Sdhp 49, 223, 535, 619; SnA 50; DhA iii.394; PvA 31, 106, 166; VvA 32, 48. -- In exegetical literature often combd. with the quâsi synonym ussoḷhi e. g. at Nd2 s. v.; Dhs 13, 22, 289, 571. Ussāhana
Ussāhana
(f.) [fr. ussahati cp. BSk. utsahana Divy 490] = ussāha Nett 8. Ussāhita
Ussāhita
[pp. of ussāheti, Caus. of ussahati] determined, incited, encouraged, urged J i.329; VvA 109; PvA 201. Cp. sam˚. Ussiñcati
Ussiñcati
[ud + sic] to bale out, exhaust J i.450, ii.70; iv.16; Miln 261. Ussiñcana
Ussiñcana
(nt.) [fr. ussiñcati] drying, baling out, raising water, exhausting J i.417. Ussita
Ussita
[Sk. ucchrita, pp. of ud + sri, see ussāpeti] erected, high S v.228; Th 1, 424 (pannaddhaja); J v.386; Vv 8415; VvA 339. Cp. sam˚. Ussīsaka
Ussīsaka
(nt.) [ud + sīsa + ka] the head of a bed, a pillow for the head J i.266; ii.410, 443; iv.154; v.99; vi.32, 37, 56; DhA i.184 (˚passe, opp. pāda -- passe). Ussuka
Ussuka
(adj.) [Sk. utsuka, also BSk. e. g. Jtm 3168] -- 1. endeavouring, zealous, eager, active S i.15 (an˚ inactive); A iv.266; Sn 298. -- 2. greedy, longing for Dh 199 (an˚). Ussukita
Ussukita
(adj.) = ussukin; only neg. an˚ free from greed VvA 74. Ussukin
Ussukin
(adj.) [fr. ussuka] greedy, longing; only neg. an˚ Pug 23. Ussukka
Ussukka
(nt.) [*utsukya fr. ussuka; cp. BSk. utsukya Divy 601 and autsukya Av. Ś i.85] zeal, energy, endeavour, hard work, eagerness Vin i.50; S iv.288, 291, 302; Nd2 s. v. Nett 29; VvA 147; PvA 5, 135; Vism 90 (āpajjati); 644 (˚ppahānaŋ). -- Cp. appossukka. Ussukkatā
Ussukkatā
(f.) = ussukka A y.195. Ussukkati
Ussukkati
[denom. fr. ussukka] to endeavour D i.230. - Caus. II. ussukkāpeti to practice eagerly, to indulge in, to perform VvA 95, 98, 243. See also ussakkati . Ussuta
Ussuta
(adj.) [pp. of ud + sru, cp. avassuta] defiled, lust- ful (cp. āsava), only neg. an˚ free from defilement Dh 400. Ussuyā, Ussuyaka
Ussuyā,
Ussuyaka, uss. Ussussati
Ussussati
[ud + sussati of śuṣ] to dry up (intrs.) S i.126; iii.149 (mahāsamuddo u.); Sn 985; J vi.195. Ussūra
Ussūra
(adj) [ut + sūra] "sun -- out", the sun being out; i. e. after sunrise or after noon, adverbially in ˚bhatta eating after mid -- day, unpunctual meals A iii.260, and ˚seyyā sleep after sunrise, sleeping late D iii.184; DhA ii.227. Besides as loc. adv. ussūre the sun having been up (for a long time), i. e. at evening Vin i 293; iv.77; J ii.286, also in ati -- ussūre too long after sunrise VvA 65; DhA iii.305. Usseti
Usseti
[ud + śri] to erect, raise, stand up J iv 302; aor. ussesi J vi.203. -- Caus. ussāpeti; pp. ussita & ussāpita (q. v.). Usseneti
Usseneti
[denom. fr. ussena = ussayana, ud + śri (?)] to draw on to oneself, to be friendly S iii.89 (v. l. ussi˚); A ii.214 sq. (opp. paṭisseneti); Ps ii.167 (ussi˚); Kvu i. 93 (reading ussineti + visineti). See also paṭiseneti. Usseḷheti
Usseḷheti
(?) Vin ii.10 (for ussoḷh˚?); cp. ussoḷhikāya. Ussota
Ussota
(adj.) [ud + sota] nt. ussotaŋ as adv. "up -- stream" Miln 117. Ussoḷhi
Ussoḷhi
(f.) [a by -- form of ussāha fr. ud + sah, pp. *soḍha dialectical] exertion M i.103; S ii.132; v.440; A. ii. 93, 195; iii.307; iv.320; v.93 sq. Often comḅd. with ussāha (q. v.). Ussoḷhikā
Ussoḷhikā
(f.) [adj. of ussoḷhi] belonging to exertion, only in instr. as adv. ussoḷhikāya "in the way of exertion", i. e. ardently, keenly, eagerly S i.170 (naccati). Uhunkara
Uhunkara
[onomat. uhu + kara, see under ulūka] an owl (lit. "uhu" -- maker) J vi.538 ( = ulūka C.). -- Ū. Ūkā
Ūkā
(f.) [Sk. yūkā, prob. dialectical] a louse J i.453; ii. 324; iii.393; v.298; Miln 11; Vism 445; DhsA 307, 319; DhA iii.342; VvA 86.

is also used as linear measure (cp. Sk. yūkālikṣaŋ) VbhA 343 (where 7 likkhā are said to equal 1 ūkā). Ūtagītaŋ
Ūtagītaŋ
at J i.290 in phrase "jimaŋ ūtagītaŋ gāyanto" read "imaŋ jūtagītaŋ g." Ūna
Ūna
(adj.) [Vedic ūna; cp. Av. ūna, Gr. eu)_nis, Lat. vāpus, Goth. wans, Ags. won = E. want] wanting, deficient, less M ii.73; J v.330; DhA i.77; DhA iv.210. Mostly adverbially with numerals = one less, but one, minus (one or two); usually with eka (as ekūna one less, e. g. ekūna -- aṭṭhasataŋ (799) J i.57; ekūna -- pañcasate KhA 91, ekūna -- vīsati (19) Vism 287; ekenɔūnesu pañcasu attabhāvasatesu (499) J i.167; also with eka in instr. as eken'ūnapañcasatāni (deficient by one) Vin ii.285; KhA 91; sometimes without eka, e. g. ūnapañcasatāni (499) Vin iii.284; ūnavīsati (19) Vin iv.130, 148. With "two" less: dvīhi ūnaŋ sahassaŋ (998) J i.255. -- anūna not deficient, complete PvA 285 (= paripuṇṇa).

-- udara (ūnudara, ūnūdara, ūnodara) an empty stomach, adj. of empty stomach; ˚udara J ii.293; vi.295; ˚ūdara J vi.258; Miln 406; odara Sn 707; DhA i.170. -- bhāva depletion, deficiency SnA 463 (v. l. hānabhāva). Ūnaka
Ūnaka
(adj.) [ūna + ka] deficient, wanting, lacking Vin iii.81, 254; iv.263; Sn 721; Miln 310, 311, (˚satta -- vassika one who is not yet 7 years old), 414; DhA i.79. Ūnatta
Ūnatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. ūna] depletion, deficiency Vin ii. 239; J v.450. Ūpāya
Ūpāya
at DhA ii.93 stands for upāya. Ūpiya
Ūpiya
see upiya & opiya. Ūmika
Ūmika
[f. ūmi] wave Miln 197 (˚vanka waterfall, cataract). Ūmī & Ūmi
Ūmī
& Ūmi (f.) [Sk. ūrmi, fr. Idg. *ṷel (see nibbāna i.2); cp. Gr. e)lu/w io wind, e(/lic wound; Lat. volvo to roll; Ags. wylm wave; Ohg. wallan; also Sk. ulva, varutra, valaya, valli, vṛṇoti. See details in Walde, Lat. Wtb. under volvo] a wave M i.460 (˚bhaya); S iv.157; v.123 (˚jāta); A iii.232 sq. (id.); Sn 920; J ii.216; iii.262; iv.141; Miln 260 (˚jāta). -- Note. A parallel form of ūmī is ummī. -- 159 -- Ūru
Ūru
[Vedic ūru; cp. Lat. vārus bow -- legged, of Idg. *ṷā, to which also Ohg. wado = Ger. wade calf of leg] the thigh Sn 610; Vin ii.105 (in contrast with bāha); iii. 106; J i.277; ii.275, 443; iii.82; v.89, 155; Nd2 659 (so read for uru); Vv 6413; DA i.135 = Vin ii.190.

-- aṭṭhi(ka) the thigh bone M i.58; iii.92; J i.428 (ūraṭṭhika); KhA 49, 50 (ūraṭṭhi). -- (k)khambha stiffening or rigidity of the thigh, paralysis of the leg (as symptom of fright) M i.237; J v.23. Ūsa
Ūsa
[Sk. ūṣa] salt -- ground; saline substance, always combd. with khāra S iii 131 (˚gandha); A i.209. Ūsara
Ūsara
(adj.) [Sk. ūṣara, fr. ūṣa] saline S iv.315; A iv.237; DhsA 243. -- nt. ˚ŋ a spot with saline soil PvA 139 (gloss for ujjhangala). Ūha
Ūha
see vy˚, sam˚. Ūhacca
Ūhacca1
(indecl.) [ger. of ūharati, ud + hṛ (or ava + hṛ, cp. ohacca & oharati) for uddharati 1 & 2] -- 1. lifting up, raising or rising J iii.206. -- 2. pulling out, taking away, removing D ii.254 (cp. DhA ii.181); S i.27 (v. l. for ohacca); Sn 1119 ( = uddharitvā uppāṭayitvā Nd2 171). Ūhacca
Ūhacca2
(indecl.) [ger. of ūhanati2 = ūhadati] soiling by defe- cation, defecating J ii.71 (= vaccaŋ katvā C.). Ūhaññati
Ūhaññati
[Pass. of ūhanati1] to be soiled; to be disturbed aor. ūhaññi Vin i.48; M i.116; aor. also ūhani M i.243. Ūhata
Ūhata1
[pp. of ud + hṛ or dhṛ thus for uddhaṭa as well as uddhata] -- 1. lifted, risen, raised Vin iii.70; J v.403. -> 2. taken out, pulled out, destroyed Th 1, 223 = Nd2 974; Th 1, 514; Dh 338 (= ucchinna DhA iv.48). -- 3. soiled with excrements Vin ii.222. Ūhata
Ūhata2
[pp. of ūhanati1] disturbed M i.116. Ūhadati
Ūhadati
[for ūhanati2 (?) or formed secondarily fr. ūhacca or ohacca?] to defecate J ii.355; DhA ii.181 (so read with v. l. for T. ūhadayati). Ūhana
Ūhana
(nt.) [fr. ūhanati?] reasoning, consideration, examin- ation Miln 32 ("comprehension" trsl.; as characteristic of manasikāra); Vism 142 = DhsA 114 ("prescinding" trsl.; as characteristic of vitakka). Ūhanati
Ūhanati1
[ud + han] to disturb, shake up, defile, soil M i.243; J ii.73. -- Pass. aor. ūhani: see ūhaññati. -- pp. ūhata2 (q. v.). Cp. sam˚. Ūhanati
Ūhanati2
[either ud + han or ava + han, cp. ohanati] 1. to cut off, discharge, emit, defecate Vin i.78; iii.227. -> 2. [prob. for ūharati, cp. ūhacca1] to lift up, to take away M i.117 (opp. odahati). Cp. ohana in bimb ohana. -> ger. ūhacca2 (q. v.). Ūharati
Ūharati
[for uddharati] only in forms of ger. ūhacca1 and pp. ūhata1 (q. v.). Ūhasati
Ūhasati
[either ud or ava + has, cp. avahasati] to laugh at, deride, mock A iii.91; J v.452 (+ pahasati); Pug 67 ( = avahasati Pug A 249). Ūhasana
Ūhasana
(nt.) [fr. ūhasati] laughing, mocking Miln 127. Ūhā
Ūhā
(f.) [etym.?] life, only in cpd. āyūha lifetime PvA 136, 162 (˚pariyosāna). -- As N. of a river at Miln 70. -> Cp. BSk. ūhā in ūhāpoha Av. S i.209, 235. -- E. Eka
Eka
(adj. -- num.) [Vedic eka, i. e. e -- ka to Idg. *oi as in Av. aēva, Gr. oi)_os one, alone; and also with diff. suffix in Lat. ū -- nus, cp. Gr. oi)no/s (one on the dice), Goth. etc. ains = E. one] one. Eka follows the pron. declension, i. e. nom. pl. is eke (e. g. Sn 43, 294, 780 etc.) -- 1. "one" as number, either with or without contrast to two or more; often also "single" opp. to nānā various, many (q. v.). Very frequent by itself as well as with other numerals, ekangula one thumb Mhvs 29, 11; DhA iii. 127; ekapasse in one quarter DhA ii.52; ekamaccha a single fish J i.222. In enumeration: eka dve pañca dasa DhA i.24. With other numerals: eka -- tiŋsa (31) D ii.2; ˚saṭṭhi (61) Vin i.20; ˚navuti (91) DhA i.97; ˚sata (101) DhA ii.14. Cp. use of "one less" in ekūna (see under cpds. & ūna). -- 2. (as predicative and adj.) one, by oneself, one only, alone, solitary A iii.67 (ek -- uddesa); J i.59 (ekadivasena on the one day only, i. e. on the same day); Dh 395; Sn 35, 1136 (see Nd2 172a), ekaŋ ekaŋ one by one S i 104 (devo ekaŋ ekaŋ phusāyati rains drop by drop), cp. ekameka. -- 3. a certain one, some one, some; adj. in function of an indefinite article = a, one (definite or indefinite): ekasmiŋ samaye once upon a time J i.306; ekena upāyena by some means J iii.393; ekaŋ kulaŋ gantuŋ to a certain clan (corresp. with asuka) DhA i.45; ekadivasaŋ one day J i.58; iii.26; PvA 67. Cp. Sn 1069 (see Nd2 172b). -- All these three categories are found represented in freq. cpds., of which the foll. are but a small selection.

-- akkhi see ˚pokkhara. -- agga calm, tranquil (of persons just converted), collected [cp. Buddh. Sk. ekāgra Jtm 3170] S iv.125; A i.70, 266; ii.14, 29; iii.175 (˚citta), 391; Sn 341; J i.88; Nett 28, cp. Miln 139. -- aggatā concentration; capacity to individualise; contemplation, tranquillity of mind (see on term Cpd. 16, 1785, 237, 240) S v.21, 197, 269 (cittassa); A i.36; iv.40; Dhs 11 (cittassa); Vism 84. -- anga a part, divisioh, something belonging to J iii.308; Ud 69. -- angaṇa one (clear) space J ii.357. -- āgārika a thief, robber D i.52, 166; A i.154, 295; ii.206; iii.129; Nd1 416; Nd2 304 iii.a. DA i.159 ( = ekam eva gharaŋ parivāretvā vilumpanaŋ DA i.159). -- āyana leading to one goal, direct way or "leading to the goal as the one & only way (magga) M i.63; S v.167, 185. -- ārakkha having one protector or guardian D iii.269; A v.29 sq. -- ālopika = ekāgārika D i.166; A i.295; ii.206. -- āsana sitting or living alone M i.437; Sn 718; Dh 305; J v.397; Miln 342; Vism 60 (expld. with reference to eating, viz. ekāsane bhojanaŋ ekāsanaŋ, perhaps comparing āsana with asana2. The foll. ˚āsanika is ibid. expld. as "taŋ sīlam assā ti ekāsaniko"). -- āsanika one who keeps to himself Miln 20, 216; Vism 69. -- âha one day M i.88; usually in cpd. ekâhadvîhaŋ one or two days J i.255; DhA i.391. -- âhika of or for one day D i.166. -- uttarika( -- nikāya) is another title for Anguttarika -- nikāya Miln 392. -- ūna one less, minus one, usually as 1st part of a numeral cpd., like ˚vīsati (20 -- 1 = 19) DhA i.4; ˚paññāsa (49) J iii.220; ˚saṭṭhi (59) DhA iii.412; ˚pañcasatā (499) DhA ii.204. See ūna. -- eka one by one, each, severally, one to each D ii.18 (˚loma); iii.144 (id.), 157; J i.222; DhA i.101 (ekekassa no ekekaŋ māsaŋ one month for each of us); ii.114; VvA 256; PvA 42, 43. -- ghana compact, solid, hard Dh 81. -- cara wandering or living alone, solitary S i.16; Sn 166, 451; Dh 37. -- cariyā walking alone, solitude Dh 61; Sn 820. -- cārin = ˚cara Miln 105. -- cittakkhaṇika of the duration of one thought Vism 138. -- cintin "thinking one thing (only)", simple Miln 92. -- thūpa (all) in one heap, mixed up, together J v.17 (= sūkarapotakā viya C.). -- doṇikā( -- nāvā) a trough -- shaped canoe with an outrigger J vi.305. -- paṭalika having a single sole (of sandals, upāhanā) Vism 125. -- paṭṭa single cloth (cp. dupaṭṭa) Vism 109. -- padika( -- magga) a small (lit. for one foot) foot -- path J i.315; v.491. -- pala one carat worth (see pala) Vism 339. -- passayika is to be read ekɔapassayika (see under apa˚). -- pahārena all at once Vism 418; DhsA 333. -- piṭaka knowing one Piṭaka Vism 62. -- puttika having only one son KhA 237. -- purisika (itthi) (a woman) true to one man J i.290. -- pokkhara a sort of drum J vi.21, 580 (C. explns. by ek -- akkhi -- bherī). -- bījin having only one (more) seed, i. e. destined to be reborn only once S v.205; A i.233; iv.380; Nett 189. -- bhattika having one meal a day A i.212; iii.216; J i.91. -- bhattakinī a woman true to one husband J iii.63. -- rajja sole sovereignty Dh 178; PvA 74. -- rājā universal king J i.47 (of the Sun). -- vāciya a single remark or objection J ii.353. -- vāraŋ once J i.292; ˚vārena id. DhA i.10. -- sadisa fully alike or resembling, identical J i.291. -- sama equal J vi.261. -- sāṭa & sāṭaka having a single vestment, a "one -- rober" S i.78 (˚ka); Ud 65. -- 160 -- Ekaŋsa
Ekaŋsa1
(adj.) [eka + aŋsa1] belonging to one shoulder, on or with one shoulder; only in phṛase ekaŋsaŋ uttarāsangaŋ karoti to arrange the upper robe over one shoulder (the left) Vin i.46; ii.188 & passim. Ekaŋsa
Ekaŋsa2
[eka + aŋsa1 or better aŋsa2] "one part or point", i. e. one -- pointedness, definiteness; affirmation, certainty, absoluteness D i.153; A ii.46; Sn 427, 1027; J iii.224 (ekaŋsatthe nipāto for "nūna"); SnA 414 (˚vacana for "taggha"). -- Opp. an˚ Miln 225. -- instr. ekaŋsena as adv. for certain, absolutely, definitely, inevitably D i.122, 161, 162; M i.393; S iv.326; A v.190; J i.150; iii. 224; PvA 11. Ekaŋsika
Ekaŋsika
(adj.) [fr. ekaŋsa2] certain D i.189, 191; an˚ uncertain, indefinite D i.191. Ekaŋsikatā
Ekaŋsikatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. ekaŋsika] as neg. an˚ indefini- teness Miln 93. Ekaka
Ekaka
(adj.) [eka + ka] single, alone, solitary Vin ii.212; J i.255; ii.234; iv.2. -- f. ekikā Vin iv.229; J i.307; iii.139. Ekacca
Ekacca
(adj.) [der. fr. eka with suffix *tya, implying likeness or comparison, lit. "one -- like", cp. E. one -- like = one -- ly = only] one, certain, definite D i.162, A i.8; often in pl. ekacce some, a few D i.118; A v.194; Th 2, 216; J ii. 129; iii.126. See also app˚ under api. Ekaccika
Ekaccika
(adj.) [fr. ekacca] single, not doubled (of cloth, opp. to diguṇa) J v.216 (˚vasana = eka -- paṭṭa -- nivattha). Ekacciya
Ekacciya
(adj.) = ekacca S i.199; J iv.259; acc. as adv. ˚ŋ once, single Vin i.289 (cp. Vin Texts ii.212). Ekajjhaŋ
Ekajjhaŋ
(adv.) [fr. eka, cp. literary Sk. aikadhyaŋ, but BSk. ekadhyaŋ M Vastu i.304] in the same place, in conjunction, together Miln 144 (karoti), KhA 167; SnA 38. Ekato
Ekato
(adv.) [abl. formation fr. eka, cp. Sk. ekataḥ] -- 1. on the one side (opp. on the other) J iii.51; iv.141. -> 2. together J ii.415; iii.57 (vasanto), 52 (sannipatanti), 391; iv.390; DhA i.18. ekato karoti to put together, to collect VvA 3. ekato hutvā "coming to one", agreeing DhA i.102, cp. ekato ahesuŋ J i.201. Ekatta
Ekatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. eka] -- 1. unity D i.31. -- 2. lone- liness, solitude, separation Sn 718; Th 1, 49; Miln 162; J vi.64; VvA 202 ( = ekībhāva). Ekattatā
Ekattatā
(f.) [fr. ekatta] unity, combination, unification, concentration Nett 4, 72 sq, 107 sq. Ekadatthu
Ekadatthu
(adv.) [eka -- d -- atthu, cp. aññadatthu] once, defi- nitely, specially J iii.105 ( = ekaŋsena C.). Ekadā
Ekadā
(adv.) [fr. eka] once, at the same time, at one time, once upon a time S i.162; Sn 198; DhA ii.41; Miln 213. Ekanta
Ekanta
(adj.) [Sk. ekānta] one -- sided, on one end, with one top, topmost (˚ -- ) usually in function of an adv. as ˚ -- , meaning "absolutely, extremely, extraordinary, quite" etc. -> 1. (lit.) at one end, only in ˚lomin a woollen coverlet with a fringe at one end D i.7 ( = ekato dasaŋ uṇṇāmayɔ attharaṇaŋ keci ekato uggata -- pupphan ti vadanti DA i.87); Vin i.192; ii.163, 169; A i.181. -- 2. (fig.) extremely, very much, in freq. combns; e. g. ˚kāḷaka A iii.406; iv. 11; ˚gata S v.225; A iii.326; ˚dukkha M i.74; S ii.173; iii.70 (+ sukha); A v.289; ˚dussīlya DhA iii.153; ˚nibbida A iii.83; iv.143; ˚paripuṇṇa S ii.219; v.204; ˚manāpa S iv.238; ˚sukha A ii.231; iii.409; ˚sukhin DA i.119 etc. Ekantarika
Ekantarika
(adj.) [eka + antarika] with one in between, alternate J iv.195, ˚bhāvena (instr. adv.) in alternation, alternately Vism 374; ekantarikāya (adv.) with intervals Vism 244. Ekamantaŋ
Ekamantaŋ
(adv.) [eka + anta, acc. in adv. function, cp. BSk. ekamante M Vastu i.35] on one side, apart, aside Vin i.47, 94 = ii.272; D i.106; Sn p. 13 (expld. at SnA 140 as follows: bhāvana -- puŋsaka -- niddeso, ekɔokāsaŋ ekapassan ti vuttaŋ hoti, bhummatthe vā upayogavacanaŋ); Sn 580, 1009, 1017; J i.291; ii.102, 111; SnA 314, 456. -> Also in loc. ekamante on one side DhA i.40. Ekameka
Ekameka
(adj.) [eka -- m -- eka, cp. BSk. ekameka M Vastu iii.358] one by one, each A v.173; Vv 782. Ekavidha
Ekavidha
(adj.) [eka + vidha] of one kind, single, simple Vism 514; adv. ekavidhā singly, simply Vism 528. Ekaso
Ekaso
(adv.) [Sk. ekaśaḥ] singly, one by one J iii.224 (an˚). Ekākiya
Ekākiya
(adj.) alone, solitary Th 1, 541; Miln 398. Ekādasa
Ekādasa
(num.) [Sk. ekādaśa] eleven Vin i.19. -- num. ord. ekādasama the eleventh Sn 111, 113. Ekānika
Ekānika
(adj) = ekākiya; instr. ekānikena as adv. "by oneself" Miln 402. Ekikā
Ekikā
see ekaka. Ekībhāva
Ekībhāva
[eka + bhāva, with ī for a in compn. with bhū] being alone, loneliness, solitude D iii 245; M ii.250; A iii.289; v.89, 164; Vism 34; SnA 92, 93; DhA ii.103; VvA 202; DA i.253, 309. Ekodi
Ekodi
(adj.) [most likely eka + odi for odhi, see avadhi2 & cp. avadahati, avadahana, lit. of one attention, limited to one point. Thus also suggested by Morris J.P.T.S. 1885, 32 sq. The word was Sanskritised into ekoti, e. g. at M Vastu iii.212, 213; Lal. Vist. 147, 439] concentrated, attentive, fixed A iii.354; Nd1 478. Usually in compn. with kṛ & bhū (which points however to a form ekoda˚ with the regular change of a to i in connection with these roots!), as ekodi -- karoti to concentrate M i.116; S iv. 263; ˚bhavati to become settled S iv.196; v.144; ˚bhūta concentrated Sn 975; ˚bhāva concentration, fixing one's mind on one point D i.37; iii.78, 131; A i.254; iii.24; Vism 156 (expld. as eko udeti); Dhs 161 (cp. Dhs trsln. 46); DhsA 169; Nett 89. Ejā
Ejā
(f.) [to iñj, q. v. and see ānejja. There is also a Sk. root ej to stir, move] motion, turbulence, distraction, seduction, craving S iv.64; Sn 791; It 91; Nd1 91, 353; Dhs 1059 (cp. Dhs trslu. 277); VvA 232. -- aneja (adj.) unmoved, undisturbed, calm, passionless S i.27, 141, 159; iii.83; iv.64; A ii.15; Nd1 353; VvA 107. Eṭṭha
Eṭṭha
[pp. of ā + iṣ] see pariy˚; do. ˚eṭṭhi. Eṭṭhi
Eṭṭhi
(f.) [fr. eṭṭha, ā + iṣ, cp. Sk. eṣṭi] desire, wish, in combn. with gaveṭṭhi pariyeṭṭhi etc. Vbh 353 = Vism 23, 29 etc. Eṇi
Eṇi
(f.) [etym.? dial.] a kind of antelope, only two foll. cpds.: ˚jangha "limbed like the antelope" (one of the physical characteristics of the Superman) D ii.17; iii.143, 156; M ii.136; S i.16; Sn 165; ˚miga the eṇi deer J v.416; SnA 207, 217. -- 161 -- Eṇeyya
Eṇeyya
D iii.157; J vi.537 sq., & Eṇeyyaka A i.48; ii. 122; J v.155 Nd2 604 = eṇi. Etad
Etad
(pron. adj.) [Vedic etad, of pron. base *e; see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under equidem] demonstr. pron. "this", with on the whole the same meaning and function as tad, only more definite and emphatic. Declined like tad. Cases: nt. sg. etad (poetical -- archaic form) A ii.17; Sn 274, 430, 822, 1087; J i.61, 279; & etaŋ (the usual form) Sn 51, 207, 1036, 1115; J ii.159; pl. etāni Sn 52; J ii.159. -- m. sg. esa Sn 81, 416, 1052; J i.279; ii. 159; Miln 18; DhA i.18; & eso Sn 61, 312, 393; J vi. 336; pl. ete Sn 188, 760; J i.223. -- f. sg. esā Sn 80, 451; J i.307; pl. etā Sn 297, 897; J ii.129. -- Oblique cases: gen. dat. etassa J ii.159; f. etissā J iii.280; instr. etena Sn 655; J i.222; pl. loc. etesu Sn 248, 339, 1055; f. etāsu Sn 607. Other cases regular & frequent. Etarahi
Etarahi
(adv.) [Sk. etarhi, cp. tarahi & carahi] now, at present D i.29, 151, 179, 200; ii.3; J i.215 (opp. tadā); iii.82; vi.364 (instead of paccuppanna). Etādisa
Etādisa
(adj.) [etad + disa, of dṛś, cp. Sk. etādṛśa] such, such like, of this kind D ii.157; Sn 588, 681, 836; Pv i. 94; iv.186 ( = edisa yathā -- vutta -- rūpa PvA 243); PvA ii.71. Eti
Eti
[P. eti represents Sk. eti as well as ā -- eti, i. e. to go and to come (here); with Sk. eti cp. Av. aeiti, Gr. ei)_si, Lat. eo, it; Goth. iddja went, Obulg. iti, Oir. etha] to go, go to, reach; often ( = ā + eti) to come back, return Sn 364, 376, 666 (come); J vi.365 (return); ppr. ento J iii.433 (acc. suriyaŋ atthaŋ entaŋ the setting sun); imper. 2nd sg. ehi only in meaning "come" (see separately), 3rd etu D i.60; 2nd pl. etha D i.211; Sn 997; J ii.129; DhA i.95 (in admission formula "etha bhikkhavo" come ye [and be] bhikkhus! See ehi bhikkhu). -- fut. essati J vi.190, 365, & ehiti J ii.153; 2nd sg. ehisi Dh 236, 369. -- pp. ita (q. v.). Etta
Etta
(adv.) [ = Sk. atra, see also ettha] there, here Pv i.56 (sic; cp. KhA 254 note). Ettaka
Ettaka
(adj.) [etta + ka, contrasting -- comparative function, cp. tattaka] so much, this much, according to context referring either to deficiency or abundance, thus developing 2 meanings, viz. (1) just as much (& no more), only so little, all this, just this, such a small number, a little; pl. so few, just so many D i.117 (opp. aparimāṇa), 124; A iv.114; Nd2 304iii. (ettakena na tussati is not satisfied with this much); Vv 7912 (cp. VvA 307); Miln 10, 18 (alaŋ ettakena enough of this much); DhA i.90 (enough, this much), 93, 399 (pl. ettakā); ii.54 (only one), 174 sq.; VvA 233 (a little), 323. -- ettakaŋ kālaŋ a short time (but see also under 2) J i.34; DhA ii.20. -- (2) ever so much (and not less), so much, pl. so many, ever so many, so & so many, such a lot A iii.337; J i.207 (pl. ettakā), 375 (nt. ettakaŋ); iii.80 (id.), 94 (˚ŋ dhanaŋ such great wealth); Miln 37 (pl.); DhA i.392, 396 (pl. f. ettikā), 397, 398; ii.14, 89 (pl.), 241 (pl. so many); VvA 65 (dhanaŋ). -- ettakaŋ kālaŋ for some time, such a long time (see also above, under 1) DhA ii.62, 81; iii.318; VvA 330. Ettato
Ettato
(adv.) [with double suffix for *atra -- taḥ] from here, therefore S i.185. Ettāvatā
Ettāvatā
(adv.) [fr. etta = ettaka, cp. kittāvatā: kittaka] so far, to that extent, even by this much D i.205, 207; S ii.17; Sn 478; Vv 556 (cp. VvA 248); Pv iv.167; Miln 14; DA i.80; SnA 4; PvA 243. Etto
Etto
(adv.) [in analogy to ito fr. *et˚, as ito fr. *it˚] orig. abl. of etad; from this, from it, thence, hence, out of here Sn 448, 875; J i.223 (opp. ito), v.498; Pv i.11; ii.104; DhA ii.80 (ito vā etto vā here & there); PvA 103. Ettha
Ettha
(adv.) [ = Sk. atra, cp. etta] here, in this place; also temporal "now", & modal "in this case, in this matter" D ii.12; S v.375; Dh 174; Sn 61, 171, 424, 441, 502, 1037, & freq. passim. Edisa
Edisa
(adj.) [Sk. īdṛśa] such like, such Vv 373; PvA 69, 243. Edisaka
Edisaka
= edisa Sn 313. Edha
Edha
[Sk. edhaḥ, cp. idhma, inddhe; Gr. ai)_qos, a)i/qw, Lat. aedes, Ohg. eit, Ags. ād funeral pile, etc. See idhuma & iṭṭhaka] fuel, fire etc. Only in adj. neg. an˚ without fuel J iv.26. Edhati
Edhati
[edh, cp. iddhati] to prosper, succeed in, increase S i.217 (sukhaŋ); Sn 298; Dh 193; J i.223; iii.151. -> sukh˚edhita at Vin iii.13 is better read as sukhe ṭhita, as at J vi.219. Ena
Ena
(pron.) [fr. pron. base *ē̆, cp. e -- ka; to this cp. in form & meaning Lat. ūnus, Gr. oi)no/s, Ohg. ein, Oir. ōin] only used in acc. enaŋ (taŋ enaŋ) "him, this one, the same" Sn 583, 981, 1114; Dh 118, 313; J iii.395; Nd2 304iii.b. See also naŋ. Eraka
Eraka1
(adj.) [fr. ereti] driving away, moving J iv.20 (˚vāta); ˚vattika a certain kind of torture M i.87 = A i.47 = ii.122 = Nd2 604 = Miln 197. Eraka
Eraka2
(nt.) [fr. ereti] Typha -- grass J iv.88. As eragu(?) a kind of grass used for making coverlets Vin i.196 (eraka Bdhgh. on D i.166). Eraṇḍa
Eraṇḍa
[dial.?] the castor oil plant Nd2 680ii.; J ii.440. Cp. elaṇḍa. Erāvaṇa
Erāvaṇa
N. of Indra's elephant Sn 379; Vv 4413; VvA 15. Erita
Erita
[pp. of ereti] moved, shaken, driven J iv.424; Vv 394, 424; Th 1, 104, Pv ii.123; Vism 172 (+ samerita), 342 (vāt˚ moved by the wind). Cp. īrita. Ereti
Ereti
[ = īreti (q. v.) Caus. of īr, Sk. īrayati] to move, set into motion, raise (one's voice) M i.21; Sn 350 (eraya imper.); Th 1, 209 (eraye); J iv.478. -- pp. erita (q.v.). Ela
Ela
(nt.) [?] salt(?) or water(?) in elambiya ( = el˚ambu -- ja) born in (salt) water Sn 845 (= ela -- saññaka ambumhi jāta); Nd1 202 (elaŋ vuccati udakaŋ). Elaṇḍa
Elaṇḍa
= eraṇḍa (?) M i.124. Elambaraka
Elambaraka
[?] N. of a creeping vine J vi.536. Elāluka (Eḷāluka)
Elāluka
(Eḷāluka) (nt.) [etym.?] a kind of cucumber(?) Vv 3329; J i.205; v.37; DhA i.278. Eḷa
Eḷa
(nt.) [Sk. enas] in eḷamūga deaf & dumb A ii.252; iii.436; iv.226; Miln 20, 251 (cp. Miln trsl. ii.71). A rather strange use and expln. of eḷamūga (with ref. to a snake "spitting") we find at J iii.347, where it is expld. as "eḷa -- paggharantena mukhena eḷamūgaŋ" i. e. called eḷamūga because of the saliva (foam?) dripping from its mouth, v. l. elamukha. -- Cp. neḷa & aneḷa. Eḷaka
Eḷaka1
[?] a threshold (see Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 146) Vin ii.149 (˚pādaka -- pītha, why not "having feet resembling those of a ram"? Cp. Vin Texts iii.165 "a chair raised on a pedestal"); D i.166; A i.295; ii.206. The word & its meaning seems uncertain. Eḷaka
Eḷaka2
[Sk. eḍaka] a ram, a wild goat Sn 309; Vism 500 (in simile); J i.166; Pug A 233 ( = urabbha). -- f. eḷakā S ii.228, eḷakī Th 2, 438, eḷikī J iii.481. Eḷagala
Eḷagala
see aneḷa. Eḷagalā
Eḷagalā
(f.) [dial.?] the plant Cassia Tora (cp. Sk. eḍagaja the ringworm -- shrub, Cassia Alata, after Halāyudha), J iii. 222 ( = kambojī C.). Eḷagga
Eḷagga
in kāmāmis˚ at PvA 107 is to be read kāmā- mise lagga˚. -- 162 -- Eva
Eva
(adv.) [Vedic eva] emphatic part "so, even, just"; very freq. in all contexts & combns. -- 1. eva J i.61 (ajjɔeva this veryday), 278 (tathɔeva likewise); ii.113 (ahaŋ e. just I), 154 (ekam e. just one), 160 (attano e. his very own). -- 2. eva often appears with prothetic (sandhi -- )y as yeva, most frequently after i and e, but also after the other vowels and ŋ, cp. J i.293, 307; ii.110, 128, 129, 159; iv.3; vi.363. -- 3. After ŋ eva also takes the form of ñeva, mostly with assimilation of ŋ to ñ, viz. tañ ñeva J i.223; tasmiñ ñeva J i.139; ahañ ñeva Miln 40. -- 4. After long vowels eva is often shortened to va (q. v.).

-- rūpa (1) such, like that Sn 279, 280; It 108; J ii. 352, etc. -- (2) of such form, beauty or virtue J i.294; iii.128, etc. Evaŋ
Evaŋ
(adv.) [Vedic evaŋ] so, thus, in this way, either re- ferring to what precedes or what follows, e. g. (1) thus (as mentioned, expld. at Vism 528 as "niddiṭṭha -- nayanidassana") D i.193 (evaŋ sante this being being so), 195 (id.); Vin ii.194 (evaŋ bhante, yes); J i.222; Pv ii.1312 evaŋ etaŋ, just so). -- (2) thus (as follows) M i. 483 (evaŋ me sutaŋ "thus have I heard"). -- Often combd. with similar emphatic part., as evam eva kho "in just the same way" (in final conclusions) D i.104, 199, 228, 237, 239; in older form evaŋ byā kho ( = evam iva kho) Vin ii.26; iv.134 = DA i.27; evam evaŋ "just so" D i.51; Sn 1115; evaŋ kho D i.113; evam pi Sn 1134; evaŋ su D i.104; etc. etc.

-- diṭṭhin holding such a view M i.484. -- nāma having that name M i.429. Esa
Esa1
see etad. Esa
Esa2
(adj.) = esin Sn 286. Esati
Esati
[ā + iṣ1 with confusion of iṣ1 and iṣ2, icchati, see also ajjhesati, anvesati, pariyesati] to seek, search, strive for Sn 592 (esāno ppr. med.), 919; Dh 131. Esanā
Esanā
(f.) [fr. esati] desire, longing, wish D iii.216, 270; M i.79; S v.54, 139; A i.93; ii.41; v.31; VvA 83; PvA 98, 163, 265. See also anesanā, isi & pariy˚. Esanī
Esanī
(f.) [fr. iṣ] a surgeon's probe M ii.256. Esabha
Esabha
( -- ˚) a by -- form of usabha (q. v.), in cpd. rathesabha. Esika
Esika
(nt.) & Esikā1 (f.) [a by -- form of isīkā] a pillar, post A iv.106, 109. Freq. in cpd. ˚ṭṭhāyin as stable as a pillar D i.14; S iii.202, 211, 217; DA i.105. Esikā
Esikā2
desire, see abbūḷha. Esin
Esin
(adj.) [Sk. eṣin, of iṣ] seeking, wishing, desiring S ii.11 (sambhav˚); J i.87 (phal˚); iv.26 (dukkham˚); Pv ii.928 (gharam); PvA 132. Ehi
Ehi
[imper. of eti] come, come here Sn 165; J ii 159; vi. 367; DhA i.49. In the later language part. of exhortation = Gr. a)/ge, Lat. age, "come on" DhA ii.91; PvA 201 (+ tāva = a)/ge dh/). ehipassika (adj.) [ehi + passa + ika] of the Dhamma, that which invites every man to come to see for himself, open to all, expld. at Vism 216 as "ehi, passa imaŋ dhamman ti evaŋ pavattaŋ ehi -- passavidhaŋ arahatī ti", D ii.217; iii.5, 227; S i.9; iv.41, 272; v.343; A i.158; ii.198. ehibhadantika one who accepts an invitation D i.166; M i.342; ii.161; A i.295; ii.206. ehi bhikkhu "come bhikkhu!" the oldest formula of admission to the order Vin i.12; iii.24; DhA i.87; J i.82; f. ehi bhikkhunī Vin iv.214 pl. etha bhikkhavo DhA i.95. ehibhikkhu -- pabbajjā initiation into Bhikkhuship SnA 456. ehibhikkhubhāva -- state of being invited to join the Sangha, admission to the Order J i.82, 86; DhA ii.32; SnA 456. ehisāgata -- (& svāgata -- )vādin a man of courtesy (lit. one who habitually says: "come you are welcome") D i.116; Vin ii.11; iii.181. -- O. O
O
Initial o in Pali may represent a Vedic o or a Vedic au (see ojas, ogha, etc.). Or it may be guṇa of u (see oḷārika, opakammika, etc.). But it is usually a prefix representing Vedic ava. The form in o is the regular use in old Pali; there are only two or three cases where ava, for metrical or other reasons, introduced. In post -- canonical Pali the form in ava is the regular one. For new formations we believe there is no exception to this rule. But the old form in o has in a few cases, survived. Though o; standing alone, is derived from ava, yet compounds with o are almost invariably older than the corresponding compounds with ava (see note on ogamana). Oka
Oka
(nt.) [Vedic okas (nt.), fr. uc to like, thus orig. "comfort", hence place of comfort, sheltered place, habitation. The indigenous interpretation connects oka partly with okāsa = fig. room (for rising), chance, occasion (thus Nd1 487 on Sn 966: see anoka; SnA 573 ibid.; SnA 547: see anoka; SnA 573 ibid.; SnA 547: see below), partly with udaka (as contraction): see below on Dh 34. Geiger (P. Gr. § 20) considers oka to be a direct contraction of udaka (via *udaka, *utka, *ukka, *okka). The customary synomym for oka (both lit. & fig.) is ālaya] resting place, shelter, resort; house, dwelling; fig. (this meaning according to later commentators prevailing in anoka, liking, fondness, attachment to (worldly things) S iii.9 = Sn 844 (okam pahāya; oka here is expld. at SnA 547 by rūpa -- vatthɔ ādi -- viññaṇassɔ okāso); S v.24 = A v. 232 = Dh 87 (okā anokam āgamma); Dh 34 (oka -- m -- okata ubbhato, i. e. oka -- m -- okato from this & that abode, from all places, thus taken as okato, whereas Bdhgh. takes it as okasya okato and interprets the first oka as contracted form of udaka, water, which happens to fit in with the sense required at this passage, but is not warranted otherwise except by Bdhgh's quotation "okapuṇṇehi cīvarehī ti ettha udakaŋ". This quot. is taken from Vin i.253, which must be regarded as a corrupt passage cp. remarks of Bdhgh. on p. 387: oghapuṇṇehī ti pi pāṭho. The rest of his interpretation at DhA i.289 runs: "okaŋ okaŋ pahāya aniketa -- sārī ti ettha ālayo, idha (i. e. at Dh 34) ubhayam pi labbhati okamokato udaka -- sankhātā ālayā ti attho", i. e. from the water's abode. Bdhgh's expln. is of course problematic); Dh 91 (okam okaŋ jahanti "they leave whatever shelter they have", expld. by ālaya DhA ii.170).

-- cara (f. ˚carikā J vi.416; ˚cārikā M i.117) living in the house (said of animals), i. e. tame (cp. same etym. of "tame" = Lat. domus, domesticus). The passage M i. 117, 118 has caused confusion by oka being taken as "water". But from the context as well as from C. on J vi.416 it is clear that here a tame animal is meant by means of which other wild ones are caught. The passage at M i.117 runs "odaheyya okacaraŋ ṭhapeyya okacārikaŋ" i. e. he puts down a male decoy and places a female (to entice the others), opp. "ūhaneyya o. nāseyya o." i. e. takes away the male & kills the female. -- (ñ)jaha giving up the house (and its comfort), renouncing (the world), giving up attachment Sn 1101 (= ālayaŋjahaŋ SnA 598; cp. Nd2 176 with v. l. oghaŋjaha). -- anoka houseless, homeless, comfortless, renouncing, free from attachment: see separately. Okaḍḍhati
Okaḍḍhati
[o + kaḍḍhati] to drag away, remove Th 2, 444. See also ava˚. Okantati (okkant˚)
Okantati
(okkant˚) [o + kantati, cp. also apakantati] to cut off, cut out, cut away, carve; pres. okantati M i. 129; Pv iii.102 ( = ava˚ PvA 213); ger. okantitvā J i. 154 (migaŋ o. after carving the deer); PvA 192 (piṭṭhi-> maŋsāni), & okacca J iv.210 (T. okkacca, v. l. BB ukk˚; C. expls. by okkantitvā). -- pp. avakanta & avakantita. -- 163 -- Okappati
Okappati
[o + kappati] to preface, arrange, make ready, settle on, feel confident, put (trust) in Vin iv.4; Ps ii.19 ( = saddahati ibid. 21); Miln 150, 234; DA i.243. Okappanā
Okappanā
(f.) [o + kappanā] fixing one's mind (on), sett- ling in, putting (trust) in, confidence Dhs 12, 25, 96, 288; Nett 15, 19, 28; Vbh 170. Okappeti
Okappeti
[o + kappeti] to fix one's mind on, to put one's trust in M i.11; Miln 234 (okappessati). Okampeti
Okampeti
[o + Caus. of kamp] to shake, to wag, only in phrase sīsaŋ okampeti to shake one's head M i.108, 171; S i.118. Okassati
Okassati
[o + kassati, see also apakassati & avakaḍḍhati] to drag down, draw or pull away, distract, remove. Only in ger. okassa, always combd. with pasayha "removing by force" D ii.74 (T. okk˚); A iv.16 (T. okk˚, v.l. ok˚), 65 (id.); Miln 210. Also in Caus. okasseti to pull out, draw out Th 2, 116 (vaṭṭiŋ = dīpavaṭṭiŋ ākaḍḍheti ThA 117). [MSS. often spell okk˚]. Okāra
Okāra
[o + kāra fr. karoti, BSk. okāra, e. g. M Vastu iii. 357] only in stock phrase kāmānaŋ ādīnavo okāro sankileso D i.110, 148 ( = lāmaka -- bhāva DA i 277); M i.115, 379, 405 sq.; ii.145; A iv.186; Nett 42 (v. l. vokāra); DhA i.6, 67. The exact meaning is uncertain. Etymologically it would be degradation. But Bdhgh. prefers folly, vanity, and this suits the context better. Okāsa
Okāsa
[ava + kāś to shine] -- 1. lit. "visibility", (visible) space as geometrical term, open space, atmosphere, air as space D i.34 (ananto okāso); Vism 184 (with disā & pariccheda), 243 (id.); PvA 14 (okāsaŋ pharitvā permeating the atmosphere). This meaning is more pronounced in ākāsa. -- 2. "visibility", i. e. appearance, as adj. looking like, appearing. This meaning closely resembles & often passes over into meaning 3, e. g. katokāsa kamma when the k. makes its appearance = when its chance or opportunity arises PvA 63; okāsaŋ deti to give one's appearance, i. e. to let any one see, to be seen by (dat.) PvA 19. -- 3. occasion, chance, opportunity, permission, consent, leave A i.253; iv.449; J iv.413 (vātassa o. natthi the wind has no access); SnA 547. -- In this meaning freq. in combn. with foll. verbs: (a) okāsaŋ karoti to give permission, to admit, allow; to give a chance or opportunity, freq. with pañhassa veyyā -- karaṇāya (to ask a question), e. g. D i.51, 205; M ii.142; S iv 57. -> Vin i.114, 170; Nd1 487; PvA 222. -- Caus. ˚ŋ karoti Vin ii.5, 6, 276; Caus. II. ˚ŋ kārāpeti Vin i.114, 170. -> katokāsa given permission (to speak), admitted in audience, granted leave Sn 1031; VvA 65 (raññā); anokāsakata without having got permission Vin i.114. -- (b) okāsaŋ yācati to ask permission M ii.123. -- (c) okāsaŋ deti to give permission, to consent, give room J ii.3; VvA 138. -> (d) with bhū: anokāsa -- bhāva want of opportunity Sdhp 15; anokāsa -- bhūta not giving (lit. becoming) an opportunity SnA 573. Elliptically for o. detha Yogāvacara's Man. 4 etc.

-- âdhigama finding an opportunity D ii.214 sq.; A iv. 449. -- kamma giving opportunity or permission Sn p. 94 (˚kata allowed); Pv iv.111 (˚ŋ karoti to give permission). -- matta permission Sn p. 94. -- loka the visible world ( = manussa -- loka) Vism 205; VvA 29. Okāsati
Okāsati
[ava + kāś] to be visible; Caus. okāseti to make visible, let appear, show S iv.290. Okiṇṇa
Okiṇṇa
[pp. of okirati; BSk. avakīrṇa Divy 282; Jtm 3192] strewn over, beset by, covered with, full of J v.74, 370; PvA 86, 189 ( = otata of Pv iii.33). Okiraṇa
Okiraṇa
[o + kiraṇa] casting out (see the later avakirati2), only as adj. -- f. okirinī (okilinī through dialect. variation) a cast -- out woman (cast -- out on acct of some cutaneous disease), in double combn. okilinī okirinī (perhaps only the latter should be written) Vin iii.107 = S ii.260 (in play of words with avakirati1). Bdhgh's allegorical expln. at Vin iii.273 puts okilinī = kilinnasarīrā, okiriṇī = angāraparikiṇṇa. Cp. kirāta. Okirati
Okirati
[o + kirati] -- 1. to pour down on, pour out over M i.79; aor. okiri Vin iii.107 = S ii.260; Pv ii.38; PvA 82. -- 2. to cast -- out, reject, throw out: see okiraṇa. -> pp. okiṇṇa (q. v.). -- Caus. II. okirāpeti to cause to pour out or to sprinkle over Vism 74 (vālikaŋ). Okilinī
Okilinī
see okiraṇa. Okoṭimaka
Okoṭimaka
(adj.) [o + koṭi + mant + ka. Ava in BSk., in formula durvarṇa durdarśana avakoṭimaka Sp. Av. Ś i. 280. Kern (note on above passage) problematically refers it to Sk. avakūṭara = vairūpya (Pāṇini v.2, 30). The Commentary on S i.237 explns. by mahodara (fat -- bellied) as well as lakuṇṭaka (dwarf); Pug A 227 expls. by lakuṇṭaka only] lit. "having the top lowered", with the head squashed in or down, i. e. of compressed & bulging out stature; misshapen, deformed, of ugly shape (Mrs. Rh. D. trsls hunchback at S i.94, pot -- bellied at S i.237; Warren, Buddhism p. 426 trsls. decrepit). It occurs only in one stock phrase, viz. dubbaṇṇa dud -- das(s)ika okoṭimaka "of bad complexion, of ugly appearance and dwarfed" at Vin ii.90 = S i.94 = A i.107 = ii.85 = iii.285 sq. = Pug 51. The same also at M iii.169; S i.237; ii.279; Ud 76. Okkanta
Okkanta
[pp. of okkamati] coming on, approaching, taking place D ii.12; Miln 299 (middhe okkante). See also avakkanta S ii.174; iii.46. Okkanti
Okkanti
(f.) [fr. okkamati] entry (lit. descent), appearance, coming to be. Usually in stock phrase jāṭi sañjāti o. nibbatti M iii.249; S ii.3; iii.225; Nd2 257; Pug A 184. Also in gabbh˚ entry into the womb DA i.130. Okkantika
Okkantika
(adj.) [fr. okkanti] coming into existence again and again, recurring. Only as epithet of pīti, joy. The opposite is khaṇika, momentary Vism 143 = DhsA 115 (Expositor 153 trsls. "flooding"). Okkandika
Okkandika
[kand or kram?] at J ii.448 is doubtful, v. l. okkantika. It is used adverbially: okkandikaŋ kīḷati to sport (loudly or joyfully). C. explns. as "migo viya okkandi -- katvā kīḷati"; in the way of roaring(?) or frisking about (?), like a deer. Okkamati
Okkamati
[o + kamati fr. kram] lit. to enter, go down into, fall into. fig. to come on, to develop, to appear in (of a subjective state). It is strange that this important word has been so much misunderstood, for the English idiom is the same. We say ʻ he went to sleep ʼ, without meaning that he went anywhere. So we may twist it round and say that ʻ sleep overcame him ʼ, without meaning any struggle. The two phrases mean exactly the same -> an internal change, or developement, culminating in sleep. So in Pali niddā okkami sleep fell upon him, Vin i.15; niddaŋ okkami he fell on sleep, asleep, DhA i.9; PvA 47. At It 76 we hear that a dullness developed (dubbaṇṇiyaŋ okkami) on the body of a god, he lost his radiance. At D ii.12; M iii.119 a god, on his rebirth, entered his new mother's womb (kucchiŋ okkami). At D ii 63 occurs the question ʻ if consciousness were not to develop in the womb? ʼ (viññāṇaŋ na okkamissatha) S v.283 ʻ abiding in the sense of bliss ʼ (sukha -- saññaŋ okkamitvā). See also Pug 13 = 28 (niyāma okk˚, ʻ he enters on the Path ʼ). -> Caus. okkāmeti to make enter, to bring to S iv.312 (saggaŋ). -- pp. okkanta. See also avakkamati. Okkamana
Okkamana
(nt.) [fr. okkamati] entering into, approaching, reaching M iii.6; A iii.108 (entering the path); also in phrase nibbānassa okkamanāya A iv.111 sq., cp. 230 sq. Okkala
Okkala
see ukkala. -- 164 -- Okkassa
Okkassa
see okassati. Okkhāyati
Okkhāyati
[ava + khāyati, corresp. to Sk. kṣeti fr. kṣi to lie] to lie low, to be restrained (in this sense evidently confounded with avakkhipati) S iv.144 sq. (cakkhuŋ etc. okkhāyati). Okkhāyika
Okkhāyika
(adj.) [fr. ava + khāyin fr. kṣi, cp. avakkhā- yati; Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests relation to BSk. avakhāta of khan, and compares Lal. V. 319] low -- lying, deep, remote, only in one phrase, viz. udaka -- tarakā gambhīragatā okkhāyikā M i.80, 245. Okkhita
Okkhita
[pp. of ava + ukkhati, Sk. avokṣita, fr. ukṣ to sprinkle] besprinkled, bestrewn with ( -- ˚) Th 2, 145 (candan˚ = candanânulitta ThA 137); J v.72 (so in v. l. T. reads okkita; C. explns. by okiṇṇa parikkita parivārita). Okkhitta
Okkhitta
[pp. of okkhipati] thrown down, flung down, cast down, dropped; thrown out, rejected; only in phrase okkhitta -- cakkhu, with down -- cast eyes, i. e. turning the eyes away from any objectionable sight which might impair the morale of the bhikkhu; thus meaning "with eyes under control"Sn 63, 411, 972; Nd1 498; Nd2 177; Pv iv.344 (v. l. ukkh˚); VvA 6. -- For further use & meaning, see avakkhitta. Okkhipati
Okkhipati
[ava + khipati; Sk. avakṣipati] to throw down or out, cast down, drop; fig. usually appld. to the eyes = cast down, hence transferred to the other senses and used in meaning "keep under, restrain, to have control over" (cp. also avakkhāyati); aor. ˚khipi A iv.264 (indriyāni); ger. ˚khipitvā Vin iv.18 (id.). -- pp. avakkhitta & okkhitta (q. v.). Ogacchati
Ogacchati
[ava + gacchati] to go down, sink down, recede; of sun & moon: to set D i.240 (opp. uggacchati); A iv. 101 (udakāni og.). See also ava˚. Ogaṇa
Ogaṇa
(adj.) [Vedic ogaṇa with dial. o for ava] separated from the troop or crowd, standing alone, Vin i.80; J iv. 432 = (gaṇaŋ ohīna C.). Ogadha
Ogadha
( -- ˚) (adj.) [Sk. avagāḍha; P. form with shortened a, fr. ava + gāh, see gādha1 & gāhati] immersed, merging into, diving or plunging into. Only in two main phrases, viz. Amatogadha & Nibbānogadha diving into N. -> Besides these only in jagatɔogadha steeped in the world S i.186. Ogamana
Ogamana
(nt.) [o + gam + ana; Sk. avagamana. That word is rather more than a thousand years later than the Pāli one. It would be ridiculous were one to suppose that the P. could be derived from the Sk. On the other hand the Sk. cannot be derived from the P. for it was formed at a time & place when & where P. was unknown, just as the Pali was formed at a time & place when & where Sk. was unknown. The two words are quite independent. They have no connection with one another except that they are examples of a rule of word -- formation common to the two languages] going down, setting (of sun & moon), always in contrast to uggamana (rising), therefore freq. v.l. ogg˚ D i.10, 68; DA i.95 ( = atthangamana); VvA 326. Ogahana
Ogahana
(nt.) [o + gahana fr. gāhati; Sk. avagāhana; concerning shortening of ā cp. avagadha] submersion, ducking, bathing; fig. for bathing -- place Sn 214 ( = manussānaŋ nahāna -- tittha SnA 265). See also avagāhana. Ogādha
Ogādha1
(adj.) [Sk. avagāḍha; ava + gādha2] immersed, entered; firm, firmly footed or grounded in ( -- ˚), spelt ogāḷha Miln 1 (abhidhamma -- vinay˚). Cp. BSk. avagādhaśrāddha of deep faith Divy 268. Cp. pariyogāḷha. Ogādha
Ogādha2
(nt.) [ava + gādha2] a firm place, firm ground, only in cpd. ogādhappatta having gained a sure footing A iii.297 sq. Ogāha
Ogāha
[fr. o + gah] diving into; only in cpd. pariy˚. Ogāhati (ogāheti)
Ogāhati
(ogāheti) [Sk. avagāhate; ava + gāhati] to plunge or enter into, to be absorbed in (w. acc. or loc.). Pv ii. 1211; Vv 61 ( = anupavisati VvA 42), 392 (sālavanaŋ o. = pavisati VvA 177). ogāheti PvA 155 (pokkharaṇiŋ); ger. ogāhetvā M iii.175 (T. ogah˚; v. l. ogāhitvā); PvA 287 (lokanāthassa sāsanaŋ, v. l. ˚itvā). See also ava˚. Ogāhana
Ogāhana
(nt.) [fr. ogāhati] plunging into ( -- ˚) PvA 158. Ogilati
Ogilati
[o + gilati] to swallow down (opp. uggilati) M. i. 393 (inf. ogilituŋ) Miln 5 (id.). Oguṇṭhita
Oguṇṭhita
[pp. of oguṇṭheti, cp. BSk. avaguṇṭhita, e. g. Jtm 30] covered or dressed (with) Vin ii.207; PvA 86 (v. l. okuṇṭhita). Oguṇṭheti
Oguṇṭheti
[o + guṇṭheti] to cover, veil over, hide S iv.122 (ger. oguṇṭhitvā sīsaŋ, perhaps better read as oguṇṭhitā; v. l. SS. okuṇṭhitū). -- pp. oguṇṭhita (q. v.). Ogumpheti
Ogumpheti
[ava + Denom. of gumpha garland] to string together, wind round, adorn with wreaths, cover, dress Vin i.194 (Pass. ogumphiyanti; vv. ll. ogumbhiyanti, ogubbiy˚, ogummīy˚, okumpiy˚); ii.142 (ogumphetvā). Oggata
Oggata
[pp. of avagacchati: spelling gg on acct. of con- trast with uggata, cp. avagamana. Müller P. Gr. 43 unwarrantedly puts oggata = apagata] gone down, set (of the sun) Vin iv.55 (oggate suriye = atthangate s.), 268 (id. = rattɔ andhakāre); Th 1, 477 (anoggatasmiŋ suriyasmiŋ). Ogha
Ogha
[Vedic ogha and augha; BSk. ogha, e. g. Divy 95 caturoghɔ ottīrṇa, Jtm 215 mahaugha. Etym. uncertain]. 1. (rare in the old texts) a flood of water VvA 48 (udakɔ ogha); usually as mahogha a great flood Dh 47; Vism 512; VvA 110; DhA ii.274 = ThA 175. -- 2. (always in sg.) the flood of ignorance and vain desires which sweep a man down, away from the security of emancipation. To him who has "crossed the flood", oghatiṇṇo, are ascribed all, or nearly all, the mental and moral qualifications of the Arahant. For details see Sn 173, 219, 471, 495, 1059, 1064, 1070, 1082; A ii.200 sq. Less often we have details of what the flood consists of. Thus kāmogha the fl. of lusts A iii.69 (cp. Dhs 1095, where o. is one of the many names of taṇhā, craving, thirst). In the popular old riddle at S i.3 and Th 1, 15, 633 (included also in the Dhp. Anthology, 370) the "flood" is 15 states of mind (the 5 bonds which impede a man on his entrance upon the Aryan Path, the 5 which impede him in his progress towards the end of the Path, and 5 other bonds: lust, ill -- temper, stupidity, conceit, and vain speculation). Five Oghas referred to at S i.126 are possibly these last. Sn 945 says that the flood is gedha greed, and the avijjogha of Pug 21 may perhaps belong here. As means of crossing the flood we have the Path S i.193 (˚assa nittharaṇatthaŋ); iv.257; v.59; It iii (˚assa nittharanatthāya); faith S i.214 = Sn 184 = Miln 36; mindfulness S v.168, 186; the island Dh 25; and the dyke Th 1,7 = Sn 4 (cp. D ii.89). 3. Towards the close of the Nikāya period we find, for the first time, the use of the word in the pl., and the mention of 4 Oghas identical with the 4 Āsavas (mental Intoxicants). See D iii.230, 276; S iv.175, 257; v.59, 292, 309; Nd1 57, 159; Nd2 178. When the oghas had been thus grouped and classified in the livery, as it were, of a more popular simile, the older use of the word fell off, a tendency arose to think only of 4 oghas, and of these only as a name or phase of the 4 āsavas. So the Abhidhamma books (Dhs 1151; Vbh 25 sq., 43, 65, 77, 129; Comp. Phil. 171). The Netti follows this (31, 114 -- 24). Grouped in combn. āsavagantha -- ogha -- yoga -- agati -- taṇhɔupādāna at Vism 211. The later history of the word has yet to be investigated. But it may be already stated that the 5th cent. commentators persist in the error of explaining the old word ogha, used in the singular, as referring to the 4 Āsavas; and they extend the old simile in other ways. Dhammapāla of Kāñcipura twice uses the word in the sense of flood of water (VvA 48, 110, see above 1).

-- âtiga one who has overcome the flood Sn 1096 (cp. Nd2 180). -- tiṇṇa id. S i.3, 142; Sn 178, 823, 1082, 1101, 1145; Dh 370 ( = cattāro oghe tiṇṇa DhA iv.109); Vv 6428 (= catunnaŋ oghānaŋ saŋsāra -- mahɔoghassa taritattā o. VvA 284); 827; Nd1 159; Nd2 179. -- 165 -- Oghana
Oghana
(nt.) watering, flooding (?) M i.306 (v. l. ogha). Oghaniya
Oghaniya
(adj.) [fr. ogha(na)] that which can be engulfed by floods (metaph.) Dhs 584 (cp. Dhs trsl. 308); Vbh 12, 25 & passim; DhsA 49. Ocaraka
Ocaraka
[fr. ocarati] in special meaning of one who makes himself at home or familiar with, an investigator, informant, scout, spy (ocarakā ti carapurisā C. on Ud 66). -- Thus also in BSk. as avacaraka one who furnishes information Divy 127; an adaptation from the Pāli. -- Vin iii.47, 52; M i.129 = 189 (corā ocarakā, for carā?); S i.79 (purisā carā (v. l. corā) ocarakā (okacarā v. l. SS) janapadaŋ ocaritvā etc.; cp. K. S. p. 106 n. 1) = Ud 66 (reads coiā o.). Ocarati
Ocarati
[o + carati] to be after something, to go into, to search, reconnoitre, investigate, pry Vin iii.52 (ger. ˚itvā); M 1502 (ocarati); S i.79 (˚itvā: so read for T. ocaritā; C. explns. by vīmaŋsitvā taŋ taŋ pavattiŋ ñatvā). -> pp. ociṇṇa. Ociṇṇa
Ociṇṇa
[pp. of ocarati] gone into, investigated, scouted, explored S i.79 = Ud 66 (reads otiṇṇa). Ocita
Ocita
[o + cita, pp. of ocināti1] gathered, picked off J iii. 22; iv.135, 156; Sdhp 387. Ocināti (ocinati)
Ocināti
(ocinati) -- 1. [ = Sk. avacinoti, ava + ci1] to gather, pluck, pick off DhA i.366; also in pp. ocita. -> 2. [= Sk. avacinoti or ˚ciketi ava + ci2, cp. apacināti2] to disregard, disrespect, treat with contempt; pres. ocināyati (for ocināti metri causa) J vi.4 (= avajānāti C.). Ocīraka
Ocīraka
see odīraka. Occhindati
Occhindati
[o + chindati] to cut off, sever J ii.388 (maggaŋ occhindati & occhindamāna to bar the way; v. l. BB. ochijjati), 404. Ojavant
Ojavant
(adj.) [fr. ojā; Vedic ojasvant in diff. meaning: powerful] possessing strengthening qualities, giving strength M i.480; S i.212 (so read for ovajaŋ; phrase ojavaŋ asecanakaŋ of Nibbāna, trsld. "elixir"); Th 2, 196 (id. = ojavantaŋ ThA 168); A iii.260 (an˚ of food, i. e. not nourishing DhA i.106. Ojavantatā
Ojavantatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. ajavant] richness in sap, strength giving (nourishing) quality J i.68 (of milk). Ojahāti
Ojahāti
[o + jahati] to give up, leave, leave behind, renounce, ger. ohāya D i.115 (ñāti -- sanghaŋ & hirañña -- suvaṇṇaŋ); M ii.166 (id.); J v.340 ( = chaḍḍetvā C.); PvA 93 (maŋ). -> Pass. avahīyati & ohīyati, pp. ohīna (q. v.). -- See also ohanati. Ojā
Ojā
(f.) [Vedic ojas nt., also BSk. oja nt. Divy 105; fr. *aug to increase, as in Lat. auges, augustus & auxilium, Goth. aukan (augment), Ags. ēacian; cp. also Gr. a)e/cw, Sk. ukṣati & vakṣana increase] strength, but only in meaning of strength -- giving, nutritive essence (appld. to food) M i.245; S ii.87; v.162 (dhammɔ); A iii.396; J i.68; Dhs 646, 740, 875; Miln 156; DhA ii.154 (paṭhav˚). See also def. at Vism 450 (referring to kabalinkārɔāhāra. The compn. form is oja, e. g. ojadāna J v.243; ojaṭṭhamaka (rūpa) Vism 341. Ojināti
Ojināti
[Sk. avajayati, ava + ji] to conquer, vanquish, sub- due J vi.222 (ojināmase). Oñāta
Oñāta
[pp. o + jānāti, see also avañāta] despised Miln 191, 229, 288. Oṭṭha
Oṭṭha1
[Vedic oṣṭha, idg. *ō (u) s; Av. aosta lip; Lat. ōs mouth = Sk. āḥ Ags. ōr margin] the lip A iv.131; Sn 608; J ii.264; iii.26 (adhar˚ & uttar˚ lower & upper lip), 278; v.156; DhA i.212; iii.163; iv.1; VvA 11; PvA 260. Cp. bimboṭṭha. Oṭṭha
Oṭṭha2
[Vedic uṣṭra, f. uṣṭrī, buffalo = Ohg. Ags. ur, Lat. urus bison, aurochs. In cl. Sk. it means a camel]. It is mentioned in two lists of domestic animals, Vin iii.52; Miln 32. At J iii.385 a story is told of an oṭṭhī -- vyādhi who fought gallantly in the wars, and was afterwards used to drag a dung -- cart. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 150 suggests elephant. Oṭṭhubhati
Oṭṭhubhati
[cp. Sk. avaṣṭhīvati] to spit out M i.79, 127. Oḍḍita
Oḍḍita
[pp. of oḍḍeti] thrown out, laid (of a snare) J i. 183; ii.443; v.341; ThA 243. Oḍḍeti
Oḍḍeti
[for uḍḍeti (?). See further under uḍḍeti] to throw out (a net), to lay snares A i.33 = J ii.37, 153; iii.184 and passim; ThA 243. -- pp. oḍḍita (q. v.). Oḍḍha
Oḍḍha
[better spelling oḍha, pp. of ā + vah] carried away, appropriated, only in cpd. sah -- oḍhā corā thieves with their plunder Vism 180 (cp. Sk. sahoḍha Manu ix.270). Oṇata
Oṇata
[pp. of oṇamati] bent down, low, inclined. Usually of social rank or grade, combd. with & opp. to uṇṇata, i. e. raised & degraded, lofty and low A ii.86 = Pug 52 (= nīca lāmaka Pug A 229); Pv iv.66; Miln 387; DA i.45; PvA 29. Oṇamati
Oṇamati
[o + namati] (instr.) to incline, bend down to, bow to (dat.) Miln 220, 234 (oṇamati & oṇamissati), 400; DA i.112. Caus. oṇāmeti M ii.137 (kāyaŋ). -- pp. oṇata & Caus. oṇamita. Oṇamana
Oṇamana
(nt.) [fr. oṇamati] bending down, inclining, bowing down to Miln 234. Oṇamita
Oṇamita
[pp. of oṇameti, Caus. of nam] having bowed down, bowing down Miln 234. Oṇi
Oṇi
(m. or f.) [cp. Vedic oṇi charge, or a kind of Soma vessel] charge, only in cpd. oṇi -- rakkha a keeper of entrusted wares, bailee Vin iii.47, 53 ( = āhaṭaŋ bhaṇḍaŋ gopento). Oṇīta
Oṇīta
see onīta. Oṇojana
Oṇojana
(nt.) [fr. oṇojeti, Sk. avanejana] washing off, cleaning, washing one's hands Vin ii.31 (Bdhgh. refers it to fig. meaning onojeti2 by explaining as "vissajjana" gift, presentation). Oṇojeti
Oṇojeti
(with vowel assimilation o
Otata
[o + tata, pp. of tan] stretched over, covered, spread over with; Dh 162 (v. l. otthata); Miln 307 (+ vitata); DhA iii.153 ( = pariyonandhitvā ṭhita). See also avatata & sam -- otata. Otaraṇa
Otaraṇa
(adj.) [fr. otarati] going down, descending Nett 1, 2, 4, 107. Otarati
Otarati
[o + tarati] to descend, to go down to (c. acc.), to be -- take oneself to. ppr. otaranto Vin ii.221. -- aor. otari SnA 486 (for avaŋsari); DhA i.19 (cankamanaŋ); PvA 47 (nāvāya mahāsamuddaŋ), 75. -- inf. otarituŋ Pug 65, 75 (sangamaŋ). -- ger. otaritvā PvA 94 (pāsādā from the palace), 140 (devalokato). -- Caus. II. otarāpeti to cause to descend, to bring down to J vi.345. -- pp. otiṇṇa. -- Caus. I. otāreti. Opp. uttarati. -- 166 -- Otallaka
Otallaka
(adj.) [of uncertain etym. perhaps *avatāryaka from ava + tṛ, or from uttāḷa?] clothed in rags, poor, indigent J iv.380 ( = lāmaka olamba -- vilamba -- nantakadharo C.). Otāpaka
Otāpaka
(adj.) [fr. otāpeti] drying or dried (in the sun), with ref. to food SnA 35 (parivāsika -- bhattaŋ bhuñjati hatthɔotāpakaŋ khādati). Otāpeti
Otāpeti
[o + tāpeti] to dry in the sun Vin ii.113; iv.281; Miln 371 (kummo udakato nikkhamitvā kāyaŋ o. fig. applied to mānasa). Otāra
Otāra
[fr. otarati, BSk. avatāra. The Sk. avatāra is cen- turies later and means ʻ incarnation ʼ] -- 1. descent to, i. e. approach to, access, fig. chance, opportunity otāraŋ labhati. Only in the Māra myth.He, the tempter, ʻ gets his chance ʼ to tempt the Buddha or the disciples, M i. 334; S i.122; iv.178, 185; DhA iii.121. (avatāraŋ labhati, Divy 144, 145) ot˚ adhigacchati, to find a chance, Sn 446. [Fausböll here translates ʻ defect ʼ. This is fair as exegesis. Every moral or intellectual defect gives the enemy a chance. But otāra does not mean defect]. Ot˚ gavesati to seek an opportunity, DhA iii.21. Otārāpekkha, watching for a chance, S i.122. At one passage, A iii. 67 = 259, it is said that constant association leads to agreement, agreement to trust, and trust to otāra. The Com. has nothing. ʻ Carelessness ʼ would suit the context. o. gavesati to look for an opportunity DhA iii.21, and otāraŋ labhati to get a chance S i.122; iv.178, 185; M i.334; DhA iii.21 (gloss okāra & okāsa); cp. avatāraŋ labhati Divy 144, 145 etc. -- 2. access, fig. inclination to, being at home with, approach, familiarity (cp. otiṇṇa and avacara adj.) A iii.67, 259. -- 3. (influenced by ocarati2 and ociṇṇa) being after something, spying, finding out; hence: fault, blame, defect, flaw Sn 446 (= randha vivara SnA 393); also in phrase otārâpekkha spying faults S i.122 (which may be taken to meaning 1, but meaning 3 is accredited by BSk. avatāraprekṣin Divy 322), Mrs. Rh. D. translates the latter passage by "watching for access". Otāreti
Otāreti
[Caus. of otarati] to cause to come down, to bring down, take down J i.426; iv.402; Nett 21, 22; DhA ii.81. Otiṇṇa
Otiṇṇa
[pp. of otarati; the form ava˚ only found in poetry as -- ˚ e. g. issâvatiṇṇa J v.98; dukkha˚, soka˚ etc. see below 2] -- 1. (med.) gone down, descended PvA 104 (uddho -- galaŋ na otiṇṇaŋ not gone down further than the throat). -- 2. (pass.) beset by (cp. avatāra 2), affected with, a victim of, approached by M i.460 = A ii.123 (dukkhɔ otiṇṇa) = It 89 (as v. l.; T. has dukkhâbhikiṇṇa, which is either gloss or wrong reading for dukkhâvatiṇṇa); M ii.10; S i.123 (sokâva˚), 137 (id.); Sn 306 (icchâvatiṇṇa affected with desire), 939 (sallena otiṇṇo = pierced by an arrow, expld. by Nd1 414 as "sallena viddho phuṭṭho"); J v.98 (issâva˚ = issāya otiṇṇa C.). -- 3. (in special sense) affected with love, enamoured, clinging to, fallen in love with Vin iii.128 (= sāratto apekkhavā paṭibaddha -- citto); A iii.67, 259 (˚citta); SnA 322 (id.). -- Note. otiṇṇa at S v.162 should with v.l. SS be deleted. See also avatiṇṇa. Ottappa
Ottappa
(nt.) [fr. tappati1 + ud, would corresp. to a Sk. form *auttapya fr. ut -- tapya to be regretted, tormented by remorse. The BSk. form is a wrong adaptation of the Pāli form, taking o˚ for apa˚, viz. apatrapya M Vastu iii. 53 and apatrapā ibid. i.463. Müller, P. Gr. & Fausböll, Sutta Nipāta Index were both misled by the BSk. form, as also recently Kern, Toev. s. v.] fear of exile, shrinking back from doing wrong, remorse. See on term and its distinction from hiri (shame) Dhs trsl. 20, also DhsA 124, 126; Vism 8, 9 and the definition at SnA 181. Ottappa generally goes with hiri as one of the 7 noble treasures (see ariya -- dhanā). Hiri -- ottappa It 36; J i.129; hir -- ottappa at M i.271; S ii.220; v.1; A ii.78; iv.99, 151; v.214; It 34; J i.127, 206; VvA 23. See also hiri. -- Further passages: D iii.212; M i.356; S ii.196, 206, 208; v.89; A i.50, 83, 95; iii.4 sq., 352; iv.11; v.123 sq.; Pug 71; Dhs 147, 277; Nett 39. -- anottappa (nt.) lack of conscience, unscrupulousness, disregard of morality A i.50, 83, 95; iii.421; v.146, 214; Vbh 341, 359, 370, 391; as adj. It 34 (ahirika +).

-- gāravatā respect for conscience, A iii.331; iv.29. -- dhana the treasure of (moral) self -- control D iii.163, 251, 282; VvA 113. -- bala the power of a (good) conscience D iii.253; Ps ii.169, 176; Dhs 31, 102 (trln. power of the fear of blame). Ottappati
Ottappati
[ut + tappati1] to feel a sense of guilt, to be conscious or afraid of evil S i.154; Ps ii.169, 176; Pug 20, 21; Dhs 31; Miln 171. Ottappin & Ottāpin
Ottappin
& Ottāpin (adj.) [fr. ottappa] afraid of wrong, conscientious, scrupulous (a) ottappin D iii.252, 282; It 28, 119. -- (b) ottāpin M i.43 sq.; S ii.159 sq., 196, 207; iv.243 sq.; A ii.13 sq.; iii.3 sq., 112; iv.1 sq.; v.123, 146. Anottappin bold, reckless, unscrupulous Pug 20 (+ ahirika). anottāpin at S ii.159 sq., 195, 206; iv. 240 sq.; Sn 133 (ahirika +). Otthaṭa
Otthaṭa
[pp. of ottharati] -- 1. spread over, veiled, hidden by ( -- ˚) Miln 299 (mahik˚ suriya the sun hidden by a fog). -- 2. strewn over (with) Sdhp 246 ( -- ˚). Otthata = Otthaṭa
Otthata
= Otthaṭa, v. l. at Dh 162 for otata. Ottharaka
Ottharaka
(nt.) [fr. of tharati] a kind of strainer, a filter Vin ii.119. Ottharaṇa
Ottharaṇa
(nt.) [fr. ottharati] spreading over, veiling Miln 299 (mahik˚). Ottharati
Ottharati
[o + tharati, Sk. root str] to spread over, spread out, cover Miln 121 (opp. paṭikkamati, of water). See also avattharati. Odaka
Odaka
(nt.) [compn. form of udaka] water; abs. only at J iii.282. -- an˚ without water, dried up Th 2, 265 ( = udaka -- bhasta ThA 212). Cp. combn. sītodaka, e. g. M i. 376. See udaka.

-- antika -- 1. neighbourhood of the water, a place near the water (see antika1) Kh viii.1, 3 (gambhīre odakantike, which Childers, Kh. trsln. p. 30, interprets "a deep pit"; see also KhA 217 sq.). -- 2. "water at the end", i. e. final ablution (see antika2), in spec. sense the ablution following upon the sexual act Vin iii.21; cp. odak -- antikatā (f. abstr.) final ablution, cleansing J ii.126. Odagya
Odagya
(nt.) [der. fr. udagga] exultation, elation Nd1 3 = Nd2 446 = Dhs 9, 86, 285, 373; DhsA 143 (= udaggasabhāva a "topmost" condition). Odana
Odana
(m. & nt.) [Sk. odana, to Idg. *ud, from which also udaka, q. v. for full etym.] boiled (milk -- )rice, gruel Vin ii.214 (m.); D i.76, 105; S i.82 (nāḷik˚); DhA iv. 17 (id.); A iii.49; iv.231; Sn 18; J iii.425 (til˚ m.); Dhs 646, 740, 875; PvA 73; VvA 98; Sdhp 113. Combd. with kummāsa (sour milk) in phrase o -- k -- upa -- caya a heap of boiled rice and sour milk, of the body (see kāya I.); also at M i.247. Odanika
Odanika
[fr. odana] a cook J iii.49. Odaniya
Odaniya
(adj.) [fr. odana, cp. Sk. odanika] belonging to rice -- gruel, made of rice -- gruel Vin iii.59 (˚ghara a ricekitchen); VvA 73 (˚surā rice -- liquor). -- 167 -- Odapattakinī
Odapattakinī
(f.) (adj.) [f. of uda + pattaka + in, i. e. having a bowl of water, Ep. of bhariyā a wife, viz. the wife in the quality of providing the house with water. Thus in enumn. of the 10 kinds of wives (& women in general) at Vin iii.140 (expld. by udakapattaŋ āmasitvā vāseti) = VvA 73. Odapattiyā
Odapattiyā
at Cp. ii.48 = last. Odarika & ˚ya
Odarika
& ˚ya (adj.) [fr. udara] living for one's belly, vor- acious, gluttonous Miln 357; J vi.208 (˚ya); Th 1, 101. Odarikatta
Odarikatta
(nt.) [fr. odarika] stomach -- filling M i.461; Vism 71. Odahati
Odahati
[o + dahati, fr. dhā] -- 1. to put down, to put in, supply M i.117 (okacaraŋ, see under oka); ii.216 (agadɔangāraŋ vaṇa -- mukhe odaheyya); Th 1, 774 (migavo pāsaŋ odahi the hunter set a snare; Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 76 suggests change of reading to oḍḍayi, hardly justified); J iii.201 (visaŋ odahi araññe), 272 (passaŋ o. to turn one's flanks towards, dat.); Miln 156 (kāye ojaŋ odahissāma supply the body with strength). -- 2. (fig.) to apply, in phrase sotaŋ odahati to listen D i.230; Dāvs v.68. -- pp. ohita. Odahana
Odahana
(nt.) [fr. odahati] -- 1. putting down, applying, application M ii.216; heaping up, storing DhA iii.118. -> 2. putting in, fig, attention, devotion Nett 29. Odāta
Odāta
(adj.) [Derivation unknown. The Sk. is avadāta, ava + dāta, pp. of hypothetical dā4 to clean, purify] clean, white, prominently applied to the dress as a sign of distinction (white), or special purity at festivities, ablutions & sacrificial functions D ii.18 (uṇṇā, of the Buddha); iii.268; A iii.239; iv.94, 263, 306, 349; v.62; Dhs 617 = (in enumn. of colours); DA i.219; VvA 111. See also ava˚.

-- kasiṇa meditation on the white (colour) Vism 174. -- vaṇṇa of white colour, white M ii.14; Dhs 247. -- vattha a white dress; adj. wearing a white dress, dressed in white D i.7, 76, 104; J iii.425 (+ alla -- kesa). -- vasana dressed in white (of householders or laymen as opposed to the yellow dress of the bhikkhus) D i.211; iii.118, 124 sq., 210; M i.491, ii.23; A i.73; iii.384; iv.217 [cp. BSk. avadāta -- vasana Divy 160]. Odātaka
Odātaka
(adj.) [fr. odāta] white, clean, dressed in white S ii.284 (v. l. SS odāta); Th 1, 965 (dhaja). Odissa
Odissa
(adv.) [ger. of o + disati = Sk. diśati, cp. uddissa] only in neg. anodissa without a purpose, indefinitely (?) Miln 156 (should we read anudissa?). Odissaka
Odissaka
(adj.) [fr. odissa] only in adv. expression odis- saka -- vasena definitely, in special, specifically (opp. to anodissaka -- vasena in general, universally) J i.82; ii.146; VvA 97. See also anodissaka & odhiso. Odīraka
Odīraka
in odīrakajāta S iv.193 should with v. l. be read ocīraka [ = ava + cira + ka] "with its bark off", stripped of its bark. Odumbara
Odumbara
(adj.) [fr. udumbara] belonging to the Udum- bara tree Vv 5016; cp. VvA 213. Odhasta
Odhasta
[Sk. avadhvasta, pp. of ava + dhvaŋsati: see dhaŋsati] fallen down, scattered M i.124 = S iv.176 (˚patoda; S reads odhasata but has v. l. odhasta). Odhānīya
Odhānīya
(nt.) [fr. avadhāna, ava + dhā, cp. Gr. a)poqh/kh, see odahati] a place for putting something down or into, a receptacle Vin i.204 (salāk˚, vy. ll. and gloss on p. 38 as follows: sālākāṭṭhāniya A, salākātaniya C, salākadhāraya B, salākɔodhāniyan ti yattha salākaŋ odahanti taŋ D E). -- Cp. samodhāneti. Odhi
Odhi
[from odahati, Sk. avadhi, fr. ava + dhā] putting down, fixing, i. e. boundary, limit, extent DhA ii.80 (jaṇṇu -- mattena odhinā to the extent of the knee, i. e. kneedeep); iv.204 (id.). -- odhiso (adv.) limited, specifically Vbh 246; Nett 12; Vism 309. Opp. anodhi M iii. 219 (˚jina), also in anodhiso (adv.) unlimited, universal, general Ps ii. 130, cp. anodissaka (odissaka); also as anodhikatvā without limit or distinction, absolutely Kvu 208, and odhisodhiso "piecemeal" Kvu 103 (cp. Kvu trsln. 762, 1271).

-- sunka "extent of toll", stake J vi.279 ( = sunkakoṭṭhāsaŋ C.). Odhika
Odhika
(adj.) [fr. odhi] "according to limit", i. e. all kinds of, various, in phrase yathodhikāni kāmāni Sn 60, cp. Nd2 526; J v.392 (id.). Odhunāti
Odhunāti
[o + dhunāti] to shake off M i.229; S iii.155; A iii.365 (+ niddhunāti); Pv iv.354 (v. l. BB ophun˚, SS otu˚) = PvA 256; Vin ii.317 (Bdhgh. in expln. of ogumphetvā of CV. v.11, 6; p. 117); Miln 399 (+ vidhunāti). Onaddha
Onaddha
[pp. of onandhati] bound, tied; put over, covered Vin ii.150, 270 sq. (˚mañca, ˚pīṭha); M ii.64; Dh 146 (andhakārena); Sdhp 182. See also onayhati. Onandhati
Onandhati
[o + nandhati, a secondary pres. form con- structed from naddha after bandhati > baddha; see also apiḷandhati] to bind, fasten; to cover up Vin ii.150 (inf. onandhituŋ); Miln 261. Onamaka
Onamaka
(adj.) [fr. onamati] bending down, stooping DhA ii.136 (an˚). Onamati
Onamati
[o + namati] to bend down (instr.), stoop D ii. 17 (anonamanto ppr. not bending); iii.143 (id.); Vv 393 (onamitvā ger.). -- pp. oṇata. Onamana
Onamana
(nt.) [abstr. fr. onamati] in compn. with ˚unna- mana lowering & raising, bending down & up DhA i.17. Onayhati
Onayhati
[ava + nayhati] to tie down, to cover over, envelop, shroud DhsA 378 (megho ākāsaŋ o.) -- pp. onaddha. Onāha
Onāha
[fr. ava + nah, cp. onaddha & onayhati] drawing over, covering, shrouding D i.246 (spelt onaha); Miln 300; Dhs 1157 ( = megho viya ākāsaŋ kāyaŋ onayhati). Onīta
Onīta
[in form = Sk. avanīta, but semantically = apanīta. Thus also BSk. apanīta, pp. of apa + nī, see apaneti] only found in one ster. phrase, viz. onīta -- patta -- pāṇi "having removed (or removing) his hand from the bowl", a phrase causing constructional difficulties & sometimes taken in glosses as "onitta˚" (fr. nij), i. e. having washed (bowl and hands after the meal). The Cs. expln. as onīto pattato pāṇi yeva, i. e. "the hand is taken away from the bowl". The spelling is frequently oṇīta, probably through BB sources. See on term also Trenckner, Notes 6624 & cp. apa -- nīta -- pātra at M Vastu iii.142. The expression is always combd. with bhuttāvin "having eaten" and occurs very frequently, e. g. at Vin ii.147: D i.109 (= DA i. 277, q. v. for the 2 explns. mentioned above M ii.50, 93; S v.384; A ii.63; Sn p. 111 (= pattato onītapāṇi, apanītahattha SnA 456); VvA 118; PvA 278. Oneti
Oneti,
prob. for apaneti, see apaneti & pp. onīta. Onojeti
Onojeti
see oṇojeti. Opakkamika
Opakkamika
(adj.) [fr. upakkama] characterising a sensa- tion of pain: attacking suddenly, spasmodic, acute; always in connection with ābādha or vedanā M i.92, 241; S iv. 230 = A ii.87 = iii.131 = v.110 = Nd2 304ic = Miln 112. Opakkhin
Opakkhin
(adj.) [o + pakkhin, adj. fr. pakkha wing, cp. similarly avapatta] "with wings off" i. e. having one's wings clipped, powerless A i.188 (˚ŋ karoti to deprive of one's wings or strength; so read for T. opapakkhiŋ karoti). Opaguyha
Opaguyha
see opavayha. -- 168 -- Opatati
Opatati
[o + pat] to fall or fly down (on), to fall over (w. acc.) J ii.228 (lokāmisaŋ ˚anto); vi.561 (˚itvā ger.); Miln 368, 396. -- pp. opatita. Opatita
Opatita
[pp. of opatati] falling (down) PvA 29 (udaka; v. l. ovuḷhita, opalahita; context rcads at PvA 29 mahāsobbhehi opatitena udakena, but id. p. at KhA 213 reads mahāsobbha -- sannipātehi). Opatta
Opatta
(adj.) [o + patta, Sk. avapattra] with leaves fallen off, leafless (of trees) J iii.495 (opatta = avapatta nippatta patita -- patta C.). Opadhika
Opadhika
(adj.) [fr. upadhi. BSk. after the P., aupadhika Divy 542] forming a substratum for rebirth (always with ref. to puñña, merit). Not with Morris, J. P.T.S. 1885, 38 as "exceedingly great"; the correct interpretation is given by Dhpāla at VvA 154 as "atta -- bhāva -- janaka paṭisandhi -- pavatti -- vipāka -- dāyaka". -- S i.233 = A iv.292 = Vv 3421; It 20 (v. l. osadhika), 78. Opanayika
Opanayika
(adj.) [fr. upaneti, upa + nī] leading to (Nib- bāna) S iv.41 sq., 272, 339; v.343; A i.158; ii.198; D iii.5; Vism 217. Opapakkhi
Opapakkhi
in phrase ˚ŋ karoti at A i.188 read opakkhiŋ karoti to deprive of one's wings, to render powerless. Opapaccayika
Opapaccayika
(adj.) [ = opapātika] having the character- istic of being born without parents, as deva Nett 28 (upādāna). Opapātika
Opapātika
(adj.) [fr. upapatti; the BSk. form is a curious distortion of the P. form, viz. aupapāduka Av. Ś ii.89; Divy 300, 627, 649] arisen or reborn without visible cause (i. e. without parents), spontaneous rebirth (Kvu trsl. 2832), apparitional rebirth (Cpd. 1654, q. v.) D i.27, 55, 156; iii.132, 230 (˚yoni), 265; M i.34, 73, 287, 401 sq., 436 sq, 465 sq.; ii.52; iii.22, 80, 247; S iii.206, 240 sq., 246 sq.; iv.348; v.346, 357 sq., 406; A i.232, 245, 269; ii.5, 89, 186; iv.12, 226, 399, 423 sq.; v. 265 sq., 286 sq., 343 sq.; Pug 16, 62, 63; Vbh 412 sq.; Miln 267; Vism 552 sq., 559; DA i.165, 313. The C. on M i.34 explns. by "sesa -- yoni -- paṭikkhepa -- vacanaŋ etaŋ". See also Pug. A 1, § 40. Opapātin
Opapātin
(adj.) = opapātika, in phrase opapātiyā (for opapātiniyā?) iddhiyā at S v.282 (so read for T. opapāti ha?) is doubtful reading & perhaps best to be omitted altogether. Opama
Opama
at J i.89 & Sdhp 93 (anopama) stands for ūpama, which metri causā for upama. Opamma
Opamma
(nt.) [fr. upama; cp. Sk. aupamya] likeness, simile, comparison, metaphor M i.378; Vin v.164; Miln 1, 70, 330; Vism 117, 622; ThA 290. Oparajja
Oparajja
viceroyalty is v. l. for uparajja. Thus at M ii. 76; A iii.154. Opavayha
Opavayha
(adj. n.) [fr. upavayha, grd. of upavahati] fit for riding, suitable as conveyance, state -- elephant (of the elephant of the king) S v.351 = Nett 136 (v. l. opaguyha; C. explns. by ārohana -- yogga); J ii.20 (SS opavuyha); iv. 91 (v. l. ˚guyha); vi.488 (T. opavuyha, v. l. opaguyha; gajuttama opavayha = rāja -- vāhana C.); DA i.147 (ārohanayogga opavuyha, v. l. ˚guyha); VvA 316 (T. opaguyha to be corrected to ˚vayha). Opasamika
Opasamika
(adj.) [fr. upa + sama + ika; cp. BSk. aupaśamika Av. Ś ii.107; M Vastu ii.41] leading to quiet, allaying, quieting; Ep. of Dhamma D iii.264 sq.; A ii.132. Opasāyika
Opasāyika
(adj.) [fr. upasaya, upa + śī] being near at hand or at one's bidding (?) M i.328. Opāṭeti
Opāṭeti
[ava + Caus. of paṭ, Sk. avapāṭayati] to tear as- under, unravel, open Vin ii.150 (chaviŋ opāṭetvā). Opāta
Opāta
[o + pāta fr. patati to fall, Vedic avapāta] -- 1. falling or flying down, downfall, descent J vi.561. -- 2. a pitfall J i.143; DhA iv.211. Opāteti
Opāteti
[o + Caus. of pat] to make fall, to destroy (cp. atipāteti), i. e. 1. to break, to interrupt, in kathaŋ opāteti to interrupt a conversation M ii.10, 122, 168; A iii.137, 392 sq.; Sn p. 107. -- 2. to drop, to omit (a syllable) Vin iv.15. Opāna
Opāna
(nt.) [o + pāna fr. pivati. Vedic avapāna. The P. Commentators however take o as a contracted form of udaka, e. g. Bdhgh. at DA i.298 = udapāna]. Only in phrase opāna -- bhūta (adj.) a man who has become a welling spring as it were, for the satisfaction of all men's wants; expld. as "khata -- pokkharaṇī viya hutvā" DA i. 298 = J v.174. -- Vin i.236; D i.137; M i.379; A iv. 185; Vv 654; Pv iv.160; J iii.142; iv.34; v.172; Vbh 247; Miln 411; Vism 18; VvA 286; DA 1177, 298. Opārambha
Opārambha
(adj.) [fr. upārambha] acting as a support, supporting, helpful M ii.113. Opiya
Opiya
is metric for upiya [upa + ger. of i] undergoing, going into S i.199 = Th 1, 119 (nibbānaŋ hadayasmiŋ opiya; Mrs. Rh. D. trsls. "suffering N. in thy heart to sink", S A. hadayasmiŋ pakkhipitvā. Opilavati
Opilavati
[Sk. avaplavati, ava + plu] to be immersed, to sink down S ii.224. -- Caus. opilāpeti (see sep.). Opilāpita
Opilāpita
[pp. of opilāpeti] immersed into (loc.), gutted with water, drenched J i.212, 214. Opilāpeti
Opilāpeti
[Caus. of opilavati, cp. Sk. avaplāvayati] to im- merse, to dip in or down, to drop (into = loc.) Vin i. 157 = 225 = S i.169 (C.: nimujjapeti, see K. S. 318); M i.207 = iii.157; DhA iii.3 (˚āpetvā; so read with vv. ll. for opīḷetvā); J iii.282. -- pp. opilāpita. Opīḷeti
Opīḷeti
in "bhattaŋ pacchiyaŋ opīḷetvā" at DhA ii.3 is with v. l. to be read opilāpetvā (gloss odahitvā), i. e. dropping the food into the basket. Opuñchati
Opuñchati
is uncertain reading for opuñjeti. Opuñchana
Opuñchana
or Opuñjana (nt.) [fr. opuñjeti] heaping up, covering over; a heap, layer DhA iii.296. Opuñjeti
Opuñjeti
or ˚ati [o + puñjeti Denom. of puñja, heap] to heap up, make a heap, cover over with (Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 153 trsls. "cleanse") Vin ii.176 (opuñjati bhattaŋ); J iv.377 (opuñchetvā T., but v. l. opuñjetvā; gloss upalimpitvā); DhA iii.296 (opuñchitvā, gloss sammajjitvā). -> Caus. opuñjāpeti in same meaning "to smear" Vin iii.16 (opuñjāpetvā; v. l. opuñchāpetvā). Opunāti
Opunāti
also as opuṇāti (Dh) [o + punāti fr. pū] to win- now, sift; fig. lay bare, expose Dh 252 ( = bhusaŋ opuṇanto viya DhA iii.375); SnA 312. -- Caus. opunāpeti [cp. BSk. opunāpeti M Vastu iii.178] to cause to sift A i.242; J i.447. Opuppha
Opuppha
[o + puppha] bud, young flower J vi.497 (vv. ll. p. 498 opaṇṇa & opatta). Opeti
Opeti
[unless we here deal with a very old misspelling for oseti we have to consider it a secondary derivation from opiya in Caus. sense, i e. Caus. fr. upa + i. Trenckner, Notes 77, 78 offers an etym. of ā + vapati, thus opiya would be *āvupiya, a risky conclusion, which besides being discrepant in meaning (āvapati = to distribute) necessitates der. of opiya fr. opati (*āvapati) instead of vice versā. There is no other instance of *āva being contracted to o. Trenckner then puts opiya = ūpiya in tadūpiya ("conform with this", see ta˚ Ia), which is however a direct derivation from upa = upaka, upiya, of which a superl. formation is upamā ("likeness"). Trenckner's expln. of ūpiya as der. fr. ā + vap does not fit in with its meaning] to make go into (c. loc.), to deposit, receive (syn. with osāpeti) S i.236 (SA na . . pakkhipanti) = Th 2, 283 = J v.252 (T. upeti); in which Th 2, 283 has oseti (ThA 216, with expln. of oseti = ṭhapeti on p. 219). -- aor. opi J iv.457 (ukkhipi gloss); vi.185 (= pakkhipi gloss). -> ger. opitvā (opetvā?) J iv.457 (gloss khipetvā). -- 169 -- Ophuṭa
Ophuṭa
[a difficult, but legitimate form arisen out of analogy, fusing ava -- vuta ( = Sk. vṛta from vṛ; opp. *apāvuta = P. apāruta) and ava -- phuṭa (Sk. sphuṭa from sphuṭ). We should probably read ovuta in all instances] covered, obstructed; always in combn. āvuta nivuta ophuṭa (oputa, ovuta) D i.246 (T. ophuta, vv. ll. ophuṭa & opuṭa); M iii.131 (T. ovuṭa); Nd1 24 ovuṭa, v. l. SS ophuṭa); Nd2 365 (ophuṭa, v. l. BB oputa; SS ovuta); DA i.59 (oputa); SnA 596 (oputa = pariyo -- naddha); Miln 161 (ovuta). Obandhati
Obandhati
[o + bandhati] to bind, to tie on to Vin ii.116 (obandhitvā ger.). Obhagga
Obhagga
[o + bhagga, pp. of bhañj, Sk. avabhagna] broken down, broken up, broken S v.96 (˚vibhagga); A iv.435 (obhaggɔobhagga); DhA i.58 (id.); J i.55 (˚sarīra). Obhañjati
Obhañjati
[o + bhañj] to fold up, bend over, crease (a garment); only Caus. II. obhañjāpeti J i.499 (dhovāpeti +). See also pp. obhagga. Obhata
Obhata
[pp. of obharati] having taken away or off, only in cpd. ˚cumbaṭā with the "cumbaṭa" taken off, descriptive of a woman in her habit of carrying vessels on her head (on the cumbaṭa stand) Vin iii.140 = VvA 73 (Hardy: "a woman with a circlet of cloth on her head"?). Obharati
Obharati
[ava + bharati, cp. Sk. avabharati = Lat. aufero] to carry away or off, to take off. -- pp. obhata. Obhāsa
Obhāsa
[from obhāsati] shine, splendour, light, lustre, efful- gence; appearance. In clairvoyant language also "aura" (see Cpd. 2141 with C. expln. "rays emitted from the body on account of insight") -- D i.220 (effulgence of light); M iii.120, 157; A ii.130, 139; iv.302; It 108 (obhāsakara); Ps i.114, 119 (paññā˚); ii.100, 150 sq., 159, 162; Vism 28, 41; PvA 276 (˚ŋ pharati to emit a radiance); Sdhp 325. With nimitta and parikathā at Vism 23; SnA 497. See also avabhāsa. Obhāsati
Obhāsati1
[o + bhāsati from bhās, cp. Sk. avabhāsati] to shine, to be splendid Pv i.21 ( = pabhāseti vijjoteti PvA 10). -- Caus. obhāseti to make radiant or resplendent, to illumine, to fill with light or splendour. -- pres. obhāseti Pv iii.115 (= joteti PvA 176); Miln 336; ppr. obhāsayanto Pv i.111 (= vijjotamāna PvA 56) & obhāsento Pv ii.110 (= jotanto ekālokaŋ karonto PvA 71); ger. obhāsetvā S i.66; Kh v. = Sn p. 46; KhA 116 (= ābhāya pharitvā ekobhāsaŋ karitvā). -- pp. avabhāsita. Obhāsati
Obhāsati2
[ava + bhāsati fr. bhāṣ; Sk. apabhāṣati] to speak to (inopportunely), to rail at, offend, abuse Vin ii.262; iii.128. Obhāsana
Obhāsana
(nt. -- adj.) [fr. obhāsa, cp. Sk. avabhāsana] shining VvA 276 (Hardy: "speaking to someone"). Obhoga
Obhoga
[o + bhoga from bhuj to bend] bending, winding, curve, the fold of a robe Vin i.46 (obhoge kāyabandhanaŋ kātabbaŋ). Oma
Oma
(adj.) [Vedic avama, superl. formation fr. ava] lower (in position & rank), inferior, low; pl. omā A iii.359 (in contrast with ussā superiors); Sn 860 (ussā samā omā superiors, equals, inferiors), 954; SnA 347 ( = paritta lāmaka). -- More freq. in neg. form anoma not inferior, i. e. excellent. Omaka
Omaka
(adj.) [oma + ka] lower in rank, inferior; low, in- significant Nd1 306 (appaka +); J ii.142; DhA i.203. Omaṭṭha
Omaṭṭha
[pp. of omasati] touched S i.13 = 53 = Th 1, 39. Omaddati
Omaddati
[o + maddati from mṛd, BSk. avamardati Jtm 3133] -- 1. to rub J vi.262 (sarīraŋ omaddanto); Miln 220. -- 2. to crush, oppress M i 87 = Nd2 1996 (abhivaggena); J ii.95. Omasati
Omasati
[o + mas = Sk. mṛṣ] -- 1. (lit.) to touch J v. 446. -- 2. (fig.) to touch a person, to reproach, insult Vin iv.4 sq. -- pp. omaṭṭha. Omasanā
Omasanā
(f.) [fr. omasati] touching, touch Vin iii.121 ( = heṭṭhā oropanā). Omāna
Omāna1
[fr. o + man, think. The Sk. avamāna is later] disregard, disrespect, contempt DhA ii.52 (+ atimāna). Cp. foll. & see also avamāna. Omāna
Omāna2
[at J ii.443 we read ucce sakuṇa omāna meaning ʻ Oh bird, flying high ʼ. With the present material we see no satisfactory solution of this puzzle. There is a Burmese correction which is at variance with the commentary] "flying", the v. l. BB is ḍemāna (fr. ḍī). C. explns. by caramāna gacchamāna. Müller, P. Gr. 99 proposes to read ḍemāna for omāna. Omissaka
Omissaka
(adj.) [o + missaka] mixed, miscellaneous, various J v.37; vi.224 (˚parisā). Cp. vo˚. Omukka
Omukka
(adj.) [fr. + muc] cast off, second hand Vin i.187. Omuñcati
Omuñcati
[o + muc] to take off, loosen, release; unfasten, undo, doff D i.126 (veṭhanaŋ as form of salute); J ii.326; vi.73 (sāṭakaŋ); Vism 338; PvA 63 (tacaŋ); VvA 75 (ābhāraṇāni). -- Caus. omuñcāpeti to cause to take off Vin i.273. -- pp. omutta. Omutta
Omutta
[pp. of omuñcati] released, freed, discharged, taken off It 56 (read omuttɔassa Mārapāso for T. omukkassa m.). Omutteti
Omutteti
[Sk. avamūtrayati, Denom. fr. mūtra, urine] to discharge urine, pass water M i.79, 127. Oyācati
Oyācati
[o + yāc, opp. āyācati] to wish ill, to curse, imprecate Vin iii.137. Ora
Ora
(adj.) [compar. formation fr. ava; Vedic avara] below, inferior, posterior. Usually as nt. oraŋ the below, the near side, this world Sn 15; VvA 42 (orato abl. from this side). -- Cases adverbially: acc. oraŋ (with abl.) on this side of, below, under, within M ii.142; Sn 804 (oraŋ vassasatā); Pv iv.335 (oraŋ chahi māsehi in less than 6 months or after 6 months; id. p. at Pv i.1012 has uddhaŋ); PvA 154 (dahato); instr. orena J. v.72; abl. orato on this side Miln 210.

-- pāra the below and the above, the lower & higher worlds Sn 1 (see SnA 13 = Nd2 422b and cp. paroparaŋ); Miln 319 (samuddo anorapāro, boundless ocean). -- pure (avarapure) below the fortress M i.68 (bahinagare +). -- mattaka belonging only to this world, mundane; hence: trifling, insignificant, little, evanescent Vin ii.85, 203 = It 85; D i.3; M i.449; A iv.22; v.157, 164; Vbh 247; Nett 62; DhA i.203; DA i.55. Oraka
Oraka
(adj.) [ora + ka] inferior, posterior Vin i.19; ii. 159; M ii.47; Sn 692 ( = paritta SnA 489; cp. omaka); J i.381. Orata
Orata
[o + rata, pp. of ramati] -- 1. delighted, satisfied, pleased Miln 210 (cp. abhirata). -- 2. desisting, abstaining from, restraining oneself VvA 72 ( = virato; cp. uparata). Orabbhika
Orabbhika
[fr. urabbha. The Sk. aurabhrika is later & differs in meaning] one who kills sheep, a butcher (of sheep) M i.343, 412; S ii.256; A i.251; ii.207 = Pug 56; iii.303; Th 2, 242 (= urabbhaghātaka ThA 204); J v.270; vi.111 (and their punishment in Niraya); Pug A 244 (urabbhā vuccanti eḷakā; urabbhe hanatī ti orabbhiko). -- 170 -- Oramati
Oramati
[Denom. fr. ora instead of orameti] to stay or be on this side, i. e. to stand still, to get no further J i.492 (oramituŋ na icchi), 498 (oramāma na pārema). Note. This form may also be expld. & taken as imper. of ava + ramati (cp. avarata 2), i. e. let us desist, let us give up, (i. e. we shall not get through to the other side). -- anoramati (neg.) see sep. -- On the whole question see also Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 154 sq. Oramāpeti
Oramāpeti
(Caus. II. of oramati] to make someone desist from J v.474 (manussa -- maŋsā). Orambhāgiya
Orambhāgiya
(adj.) [ora + bhāga + iya; BSk. avarabhā- gīya, e. g. Divy 533] being a share of the lower, i e. this world, belonging to the kāma world, Ep. of the 5 saŋyojanāni (see also saŋyojana) D i.156; iii.107, 108, 132; M i.432; It 114; Pug 22; Nett 14; SnA 13; DA i.313. -- Note. A curious form of this word is found at Th 2, 166 orambhāga -- manīya, with gloss (ThA 158) oraŋ āgamanīya. Probably the bh should be deleted. Oravitar
Oravitar
[ora + n. ag. of vitarati?] doubtful reading at A v.149, meaning concerned with worldly things (?). The vv. ll. are oramitā, oravikā, oramato, oravi. Orasa
Orasa
(adj.) [Fr. ura, uras breast Vedic aurasa] belonging to one's own breast, self -- begotten, legitimate; innate, natural, own M ii.84; iii.29; S ii.221 (Bhagavato putto o. mukhato jāto); iii.83; J iii.272; Vv 5022; ThA 236; KhA 248; PvA 62 (urejāta +). Orima
Orima
[superl. formation fr. ora, equivalent to avama] the lower or lowest, the one on this side, this (opp. yonder); only in combn. orima -- tīra the shore on this side, the near shore (opp. pāra˚ and pārima˚ the far side) D i.244; S iv.175 (sakkāyassɔ adhivacanaŋ) = SnA 24; Dhs 597; Vism 512 (˚tīra -- mahɔogha); DhA ii.99. Oruddha
Oruddha
[fr. orundhati. In meaning equalling Sk. aparuddha as well as ava˚] -- 1. kept back, restrained, subdued A iii.393. -- 2. imprisoned J iv.4. See also ava˚. Orundhati
Orundhati
[cp. Sk. avarundhate] to get, attain, take for a wife. -- ger. orundhiya J iv.480. -- aor. oruddha Th 2, 445. -- pp. oruddha. See also avarundhati. Orodha
Orodha
[fr. orundhati; Sk. avarodha] obstruction; con- finement, harem, seraglio Vin ii.290; iv.261 (rājɔ orodhā harem -- lady, concubine); J iv.393, 404. Oropaṇa
Oropaṇa
(nt.) [abstr. fr. oropeti] taking down, removal, cutting off (hair), in kes' oropaṇa hair -- cutting DhA ii. 53 (T. has at one place orohaṇa, v. l. oropaṇa). Oropeti
Oropeti
[Caus. fr. orohati; BSk. avaropayati] to take down, bring down, deprive of, lay aside, take away, cut off (hair) VvA 64 (bhattabhājanaŋ oropeti) -- ger. oropayitvā Sn 44 ( = nikkhipitvā paṭippassambhayitvā Nd2 181; apanetvā SnA 91); J vi.211 (kesamassuŋ). Orohaṇa
Orohaṇa
(nt.) [abstr. fr. orahati] descent, in udakɔorohaṇâ- nuyoga practice of descending in to the water (i. e. bathing) Pug 55; J i.193; Miln 350. Orohati
Orohati
[o + rohati] to descend, climb down D ii.21; M iii.131; J i.50; Miln 395; PvA 14. -- Caus. oropeti (q. v.). Olaggeti
Olaggeti
[Caus. of o + lag] to make stick to, to put on, hold fast, restrain M ii.178; A iii.384 (vv. ll. oloketi, olabheti, oketi); Th 1, 355. Olagga
Olagga
[Sk. avalagna, pp. of avalagati] restrained, checked Th 1, 356 Olanghanā
Olanghanā
(f.) [fr. olangheti] bending down Vin iii.121 ( = heṭṭhā onamanā). Olangheti
Olangheti
[Caus. of ava + langh] to make jump down, in phrase ullangheti olangheti to make dance up & down J v.434 = DhA iv.197 (the latter has T. ullaggheti ol˚; but v. l. ullangheti ol˚). Olamba
Olamba
(adj.) [fr. ava + lamb] hanging down Vin iii.49; J iv.380 (˚vilamba). Olambaka
Olambaka
(adj. -- n.) [see olambati] -- 1. (adj.) hanging down VvA 32 (˚dāma). -- 2. (n.) (a) support, walking stick J iv.40 (hatth˚). -- (b) plumb -- line J vi.392. Olambati & avalambati
Olambati
& avalambati [ava + lamb] to hang down, hang on, to be supported by, rest on. The form in o is the older. Pres. avalambare Pv ii.118 ( = olambamānā tiṭṭhanti PvA 77); ii.102 (= olambanti PvA 142); olambati M iii.164 (+ ajjholambati); J i.194; PvA 46. -- ger. avalamba (for ˚bya) Pv iii.35 (= olambitva PvA 189) & olambetvā J iii.218. See also olubbha. Olambanaka
Olambanaka
[fr. olambati] an armchair, lit. a chair with supports Vin ii.142. Olikhati
Olikhati
[o + likh, cp. Sk. apalikhati] to scrape off, cut off, shave off (hair) A iii.295 (veṇiŋ olikhituŋ); Th 1, 169 (kese olikhissaŋ); 2, 88. Oligalla
Oligalla
[of unknown etym.: prob. Non -- Aryan, cp. BSk. oḍigalla Saddh. P. chap. vi.] a dirty pool near a village M iii.168; S v.361; A i.161; iii.389; Miln 220; Vism 343. Oliyati
Oliyati
[o + līyate from lī] to stick, stick fast, adhere, cling to It 43; Nett 174. -- pp. olīna (see avalīna). Olīna
Olīna
[pp. of oliyate] adhering, sticking or clinging to (worldliness), infatuated M i.200 (˚vuttika); J vi.569 (anolīna -- mānasa); Vbh 350 (˚vuttikā); Miln 393 (an˚). Olīyanā
Olīyanā
[fr. oliyati] adhering, infatuation Ps i.157; Dhs 1156, 1236. Olugga
Olugga
[pp. of olujjati] breaking off, falling to pieces, rotting away M i.80, 245 (olugga -- vilugga), 450 (id.); Vism 107 (id.). Olujjati
Olujjati
[Sk. avarujyate, Pass. of ava + ruj] to break off, go to wreck, fall away S ii.218 (v. l. ull˚). -- pp. olugga. Olubbha
Olubbha
[assimil. form of olumbha which in all likelihood for olambya, ger. of olambati. The form presents difficulties. See also Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 156] holding on to, leaning on, supporting oneself by (with acc.); most frequently in phrase daṇḍaŋ olubbha leaning on a stick, e. g. M i.108 ( = daṇḍaŋ olambitvā C.; see M i 539); A iii.298; Th 2, 27 (= ālambitvā); VvA 105. In other connections: S i.118; iii.129; J i.265 (āvāṭa -- mukha -- vaṭṭiyaŋ); vi.40 (hatthe); DhA ii.57 (passaŋ; gloss olambi); VvA 217, 219. Olumpeti
Olumpeti
[o + Caus. of lup] to strip off, seize, pick, pluck Vin i.278 (bhesajjan olumpetvā, vv. ll. ulumpetvā, oḷump˚, odametvā). Olokana
Olokana
(nt.) [see oloketi] looking, looking at, sight Sdhp 479 (mukhassɔ). Olokanaka
Olokanaka
(adj. -- n.) [fr. oloketi] window Vin ii.267 (olo- kanakena olokenti, adv.). Oloketi
Oloketi
[BSk. avalokayati or apaloketi] to look at, to look down or over to, to examine, contemplate, inspect, consider J i.85, 108 (nakkhattaŋ); Pv ii.964; DhA i.10, 12, 25, 26; ii.96 (v. l. for T. voloketi); iii.296; PvA 4, 5, 74, 124. Oḷāra
Oḷāra
at PvA 110 is with v. l. BB to be read uḷāra. Oḷārika
Oḷārika
(adj.) [fr. uḷāra] gross, coarse, material, ample (see on term Dhs trsl. 208 & Cpd. 159 n. 4) D i.37, 186 sq. (attā) 195, 197, 199; M i.48, 139, 247; ii.230; iii.16, 299; S ii.275 (vihāra); iii.47 (opp. sukhuma); iv.382 (id.); v.259 sq.; A iv.309 sq. (nimittaŋ obhāso); J i.67; Dhs 585, 675, 889; Vbh 1, 13, 379; Vism 155 (˚anga), 274 sq. (with ref. to breathing), 450. -- 171 -- Oḷumpika
Oḷumpika
(adj.) [Deriv. unknown, BSk. olumpika and oḍum- pika M Vastu iii.113, 443. In the Śvet -- Upan. we find the form uḍupa a skiff.] Sen. Kacc 390 belonging to a skiff (no ref. in Pāli Canon?); cp. BSk. olumpika M Vastu iii. 113 & oḍumpika ibid. 443. Ovaja
Ovaja
at S i.212 read ojava. Ovaṭa
Ovaṭa
[o + vaṭa, pp. of vṛ, another form of ovuta = ophuta, q. v.] obstructed, prevented Vin ii.255 = iv.52 = A iv.277 (v. l. ovāda); also an˚ ibid. Ovaṭṭika
Ovaṭṭika
(nt.) [fr. ava + vṛt] -- 1. girdle, waistband M ii.47; J iii.285 (v. l. ovaddhi˚); Vism 312; DhA ii.37; iv.206; DA i.218 (Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 156: a kind of bag). -- 2. a bracelet Vin ii.106 ( = vaḷayaŋ C.). -> 3. a patch, patching (˚karaṇa), darning (?) Vin i.254 (vv. ll. ovaṭṭiya˚, ovadhita˚ ovadhīya˚); J ii.197 (v. l. ovaddhi˚). See also ovaddheyya (ava˚). Ovadati
Ovadati
[o + vadati. The Sk. avavadati is some centuries later and is diff. in meaning] to give advice, to admonish, exhort, instruct, usually combd. with anusāsati. -- pres. ovadati Vin iv.52 sq.; DhA i.11, 13; imper. ovadatu M iii.267. -- pot. ovadeyya Vin iv.52 ( = aṭṭhahi garudhammehi ovadati); Sn 1051 (= anusāseyya). -- aor. ovadi DhA i.397. -- inf. ovadituŋ Vin i.59 (+ anusāsituŋ). -- grd. ovaditabba Vin ii.5; and ovadiya (see sep.). -- Pass. avadiyati; ppr. ˚iyamāna Pug 64 (+ anusāsiyamāna). Ovadiya
Ovadiya
(adj.) [grd. of ovadati] who or what can be ad- vised, advisable Vin i.59 (+ anusāsiya); Vv 8436 ( = ovāda -- vasena vattabbaŋ VvA 345). Ovaddheyya
Ovaddheyya
a process to be carried out with the kaṭhina robes. The meaning is obscure Vin i.254. See the note at Vin. Texts ii.154; Vin i.254 is not clear (see expln. by C. on p. 388). The vv. ll. are ovadeyya˚ ovadheyya˚ ovaṭṭheyya˚. Ovamati
Ovamati
[o + vam] to throw up, vomit Ud 78. Ovaraka
Ovaraka
(nt.) [Deriv. uncertain. The Sk. apavaraka is some centuries later. The Sk. apavaraka forbidden or secret room, Halāyudha "lying -- in chamber"] an inner room Vin i.217; M i.253; J i.391 (jāto varake T. to be read as jātɔovarake i. e. the inner chamber where he was born, thus also at VvA 158); Vism 90, 431; VvA 304 ( = gabbha). Ovariyāna
Ovariyāna
[ger. of o + vṛ] forbidding, obstructing, holding back, preventing Th 2, 367 (v. l. ovadiyāna, thus also ThA 250 explained "maŋ gacchantiŋ avaditvā gamanaŋ nisedhetvā"). Ovassa & ˚ka
Ovassa
& ˚ka see anovassa(ka). Ovassati
Ovassati
[o + vassati] to rain down on, to make wet. - Pass. ovassati to become wet through rain Vin ii.121. Ovahati
Ovahati
[o + vahati] to carry down. -- Pass. ovuyhati It 114 (ind. & pot. ovuyheyya). Ovāda
Ovāda
[BSk. avavāda in same sense as P.] advice, instruc- tion, admonition, exhortation Vin i.50 = ii.228; ii.255 = iv.52; D i.137 (˚paṭikara, function of a king); J iii.256 (anovādakara one who cannot be helped by advice, cp. ovadaka); Nett 91, 92; DhA i.13, 398 (dasavidha o.); VvA 345. -- ovādaŋ deti to give advice PvA 11, 12, 15, Ovādaka
Ovādaka
(adj. -- n.) [fr. ovāda; cp. BSk. avavādaka in same meaning, e. g. Divy 48, 254, 385] admonishing (act.) or being admonished (pass.); giving or taking advice; a spiritual instructor or adviser M i.145; A i.25; S v.67 = It 107. -- anovādaka one who cannot or does not want to be advised, incorrigible J i.159; iii.256, 304; v.314. Ovādin
Ovādin
(adj. -- n.) [fr. ovāda] = ovādaka M i.360 (anovādin). Ovijjhati
Ovijjhati
[ava + vyadh] to pierce through Vism 304. Ovuta
Ovuta
see ophuta. Ovuyhati
Ovuyhati
[Pass. of ovahati] to be carried down (a river) It 114. Osakkati
Osakkati
[o + sakkati fr. P. sakk = *Sk. ṣvaṣk, cp. Māgadhī osakkai; but sometimes confused with sṛp, cp. P. osappati & Sk. apasarpati] to draw back, move back D i.230; J iv.348 (for apavattati C.); v.295 (an -- osakkitvā). See also Trenckner, Notes p. 60. Osajjati
Osajjati
[o + sṛj] to emit, evacuate PvA 268 (vaccaŋ excrement, + ohanati). -- pp. osaṭṭha. Osaṭa
Osaṭa
[pp. of o + sṛ] having withdrawn to (acc.), gone to or into, undergone, visited M i.176, 469 (padasamācāro sangha -- majjhe o.); ii.2 (Rājagahaŋ vass˚āvāsaŋ o.); Miln 24 (sākacchā osaṭā bahū). See also avasaṭa. Osaṇheti
Osaṇheti
[o + saṇheti, denom. fr. saṇha] to make smooth, to smooth out, comb or brush down (hair) Vin ii.107 (kese); J iv.219 (id.). Osadha
Osadha
(nt.) [Vedic auṣadha] see osadhī. Osadhika
Osadhika
v. l. It 20 for opadhika. Osadhikā
Osadhikā
(f.) [fr. osadha] remedy, esp. poultice, foment- ation J iv.361. Osadhī
Osadhī
(f.) [Vedic avaṣa + dhī: bearer of balm, comfort, refreshment]. There is no difference in meaning between osadha and osadhī; both mean equally any medicine, whether of herbs or other ingredients. Cp. e. g. A iv.100 (bījagāma -- bhūtagāmā . . osadhi -- tiṇavanappatayo) Pv ii.610, with Sn 296 (gāvo . . . yāsu jāyanti osadhā); D i.12, cp. DA i.98; Pv iii.53; PvA 86; J iv.31; vi.331 (? trsln. medicinal herb). Figuratively, ʻ balm of salvation ʼ (amatosadha) Miln 247. Osadhi -- tārakā, star of healing. The only thing we know about this star is its white brilliance, S i.65; It 20 = A v.62; Vv 92; Pv ii.110; cp. PvA 71; Vism 412. Childers calls it Venus, but gives no evidence; other translators render it ʻ morning star ʼ. According to Hindu mythology the lord of medicine is the moon (oṣadhīśa), not any particular star. Osanna
Osanna
(adj.) [o + pp. of syad to move on] given out, exhausted, weak Miln 250 (˚viriya). Osappati
Osappati
[o + sṛp to creep] to draw back, give way J vi.190 (osappissati; gloss apīyati). Osaraka
Osaraka
(adj.) [fr. osarati, osarana & osaṭa] of the nature of a resort, fit for resorting to, over -- hanging eaves, affording shelter Vin ii.153. See also osāraka. Osaraṇa
Osaraṇa
(nt.) [fr. avasarati] -- 1. return to, going into (acc.) visiting J i.154 (gāmantaŋ ˚kāle). -- 2. withdrawal, distraction, drawing or moving away, heresy Sn 538 ( = ogahanāni titthāni, diṭṭhiyo ti attho SnA 434). Osarati
Osarati
[o + sṛ] to flow, to go away, to recede to, to visit M i.176 (gāmaŋ etc.); ii.122. -- pp. osaṭa. See also avasarati. Osāna
Osāna
(nt.) [fr. osāpeti] stopping, ceasing; end, finish, con- clusion S v.79 (read paṭikkamosāna), 177, 344; Sn 938 -- 172 -- Osāpeti
Osāpeti
[With Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 158 Caus. of ava + sā, Sk. avasāyayati (cp. P. avaseti, oseti), but by MSS. & Pāli grammarians taken as Caus. of sṛ: sarāpeti contracted to sāpeti, thus ultimately the same as Sk. sārayati = P. sāreti (thus vv. ll.). Not with Trenckner, Notes 78 and Müller P. Gr. 42. Caus. of ā + viś to sling] to put forth, bring to an end, settle, put down, fix, decide S i.81 (fut. osāpayissāmi; vv. ll. oyayiss˚ and obhāyiss˚ = Ud 66 (T. otarissāmi? vv. ll. obhāyiss˚, otāy˚ & osāy˚; C. paṭipajjissāmi karissāmi); J i.25 (osāpeti, v. l. obhāseti); Nd1 412 (in expln. of osāna); VvA 77 (agghaŋ o. to fix a price; vv. ll. ohāpeti & onarāpeti) = DhA iii.108 (v. l. osāreti). Cp. osāreti. Osāraka
Osāraka
[fr. osarati] shelter, outhouse J iii.446. See also osaraka. Osāraṇā
Osāraṇā
(f.) [fr. osāreti 3] -- 1. restoration, rehabilitation reinstatement (of a bhikkhu after exclusion from the Sangha) Vin i.322; Miln 344. -- 2. procession (?) (perhaps reading should be ussāraṇā) DhA ii.1 (T. oss˚). Osārita
Osārita
[pp. of osāreti 3] restored, rehabilitated Vin iv.138. Osāreti
Osāreti
[Caus. of o +sṛ to flow] -- 1. (with v. l. osāpeti, reading osāreti is uncertain) to stow away, deposit, put in, put away (see also opeti) J vi.52, 67 (pattaŋ thavikāya o.). -- 2. to bring out, expound, propound, explain Miln 13 (abhidhammapiṭikaŋ), 203 (kāraṇaŋ), 349 (lekhaŋ to compose a letter). -- 3. (t.t.) to restore a bhikkhu who has undergone penance Vin i.96, 322, 340; iv.53 (osārehi ayyā ti vuccamāno osāreti). -- Pass. osāriyati Vin ii.61; pp. osārita (cp. osāraṇā). Osiñcati
Osiñcati
[o + siñcati] -- 1. to pour out or down over, to besprinkle Vin ii.262; M i.87 (telena); Pv i.85 (ppr. osiñcaŋ = āsiñcanto PvA 41). -- 2. to scoop out, empty, drain (water) J v.450 (osiñciyā, pot. = osiñceyya C.). -> pp. avasitta & ositta. Osita
Osita
[pp. of ava + sā] inhabited (by), accessible (to) Sn 937 (an˚). Cp. vy˚. Ositta
Ositta
[pp. of osiñcati] sprinkled, besprinkled J v.400. See also avasitta. Osīdati
Osīdati
[fr. o + sad] to settle down, to sink, run aground (of ships) S iv.314 (osīda bho sappi -- tela); Miln 277 (nāvā osīdati). -- ger. osīditvā J ii.293. -- Caus. II. osīdāpeti J iv.139 (nāvaŋ). Osīdana
Osīdana
(nt.) [fr. osīdati] sinking DhsA 363. Ossa
Ossa
see ussa. Ossakk˚
Ossakk˚
see osakk˚. Ossagga
Ossagga
[fr. ossajati] relaxation, in cpd. sati -- ossagga (for which more common sati -- vossagga) relaxation of memory, inattention, thoughtlessness DhA iii.163 (for pamāda Dh 167). See vossagga. Ossajjati
Ossajjati
[o + sṛj send off] to let loose, let go, send off, give up, dismiss, release D ii.106 (aor. ossaji); Sn 270 = S i.207; Th 1, 321; J iv.260. -- pp. ossaṭṭha. See also avassajati. Ossajjana
Ossajjana
(nt.) [fr. ossajati] release, dismissal, sending off DA i.130. Ossaṭṭha
Ossaṭṭha
[pp. of ossajati] let loose, released, given up, thrown down D ii.106; S iii.241; J i.64; iv.460 ( = nissaṭṭha). Ossanna
Ossanna
[pp. of osīdati for osanna, ss after ussanna] sunk, low down, deficient, lacking J i.336 (opp. ussanna). Hardly to be derived from ava + syad . Ossavana
Ossavana
(nt.) [fr. ava + sru] outflow, running water M i.189 (v. l. ossāvana & osavana). Cp. avassava. Ohana
Ohana
only in cpd. bimbɔohana, see under bimba. Ohanati
Ohanati
[ava + han, but prob. a new formation from Pass. avahīyati of hā, taking it to han instead of the latter] to defecate, to empty the bowels PvA 268 (+ osajjati). Oharaṇa
Oharaṇa
(nt.) [fr. oharati] lit. "taking away", leading astray, side -- track, deviating path J vi.525 (C.: gamana -- magga). Cp. avaharaṇa. Oharati
Oharati
[o + hṛ take] -- 1. to take away, take down, take off S i.27 (ger. ohacca, v. l. ūhacca); Pv ii.66 (imper. ohara = ohārehi PvA 95); DhA iv.56 (see ohārin). See also ava˚. -- Caus. I. ohāreti (see avahārati); Caus. II. oharāpeti in meaning of oharati to take down, to cut or shave off (hair) J vi.52 (kesamassuŋ); DhA ii.53 (cp. oropeti). -- pp. avahaṭa. Ohāya
Ohāya
ger. of ojahāti. Ohāra
Ohāra
see avahāra & cp. vohāra. Ohāraṇa
Ohāraṇa
(nt.) [fr. ohāreti, cp. avaharaṇa] taking down, cutting off (hair) J i.64 (kesa -- massu˚). Ohārin
Ohārin
(adj. -- n.) [fr. avaharati] dragging down, weighty, heavy Dh 346 ( = avaharati heṭṭhā haratī ti DhA iv.56). Ohāreti
Ohāreti
[Caus. of oharati] -- 1. to give up, leave behind, renounce (cp. ojahāti) Sn 64 ( = oropeti Nd2 183). -- 2 to take down (see oharati 1) Vin i.48; PvA 95. -- 3 to cut down, shave off (hair; see oharāpeti under oharati) It 75 (kesamassuŋ hair & beard, v. l. ohāyāpetvā); Pug 56 (id.). Ohita
Ohita
[pp. of odahati; BSk. avahita (Jtm 210 e. g.) as well as apahita (Lal. V. 552 e. g.)] -- 1. put down into, deposited Dh 150. -- 2. put down, laid down, taken off, relieved of, in phrase ohitabhāro (arahaŋ) (a Saint) who has laid down the burden: see arahatta iii. C.; cp. ˚khandhabhāra DhA iv.168. -- 3. put down in, hidden, put away in ( -- ˚) Sn 1022 = (kosɔohita). -- 4. (fig.) put down to, applied to, in ohita -- sota listening, attentive, intent upon (cp. sotaŋ odahati to listen) usually in phrase ohitasoto dhammaŋ suṇāti; M i.480; iii.201; S v.96; A iv.391; Vism 300 (+ aṭṭhiŋ katvā). Ohiyyaka
Ohiyyaka
(adj. -- n.) [fr. ohīyati, avahiyyati] one who is left behind (in the house as a guard) Vin iii.208; iv.94; S i.185 (vihārapāla). Ohīna
Ohīna
[pp. of ojahāti] having left behind J iv.432 (gaṇaŋ). Ohīyati
Ohīyati
(ohiyyati) [ava + hīyati, Pass. of ha, see avajahāti] - 1. to be left behind, to stay behind J v.340 (avahīyati = ohiyyati C.). -- 2. to stay behind, to fall out (in order to urinate or defecate); ger. ohīyitvā Vin iv.229; DhA ii.21 (cp. ohanati). See also ohiyyaka. Ohīḷanā
Ohīḷanā
(f.) [ava + hīḷanā, of hīḍ] scorning, scornfulness Vbh 353 (+ ohīḷattaŋ). -- 173 -- -- K. Ka˚
Ka˚
(pron. interr.) [Sk. kaḥ, Idg. *qṷo besides *qui (see ki˚ & kiŋ) & *qṷu (see ku˚). Cp. Av. ka -- ; Gr. ph = |, pw_s, poi_os, etc.; Lat. quī; Oir. co -- te; Cymr. pa; Goth. hvas, Ags. hwā (=E. who), Ohg. hwër] who? -- m. ko, f. kā (nt. kiŋ, q. v.); follows regular decl. of an atheme with some formations fr. ki˚, which base is otherwise restricted to the nt. -- From ka˚ also nt. pl. kāni (Sn 324, 961) & some adv. forms like kathaŋ, kadā, kahaŋ, etc. -- 1. (a) ka˚: nom. m. ko Sn 173, 765, 1024; J i.279; Dh 146; f. kā J vi.364; PvA 41; gen. sg. kassa Miln 25; instr. kena; abl. kasmā (nt.) as adv. "why" Sn 883, 885; PvA 4, 13, 63, etc. -- (b) ki˚ (m. & f.; nt. see kiŋ): gen. sg. kissa Dh 237; J ii.104. ko -- nāmo (of) what name Miln 14; DhA ii.92, occurs besides kin -- nāmo Miln 15. -- kvattho what (is the) use Vv 5010 stands for ko attho. -- All cases are freq. emphasized by addition of the affirm. part. nu & su. e. g. ko su'dha tarati oghaŋ (who then or who possibly) Sn 173; kena ssu nivuto loko "by what then is the world obstructed?" Sn 1032; kasmā nu saccāni vadanti . . . Sn 885. -> 2. In indef. meaning combd with -- ci (Sk. cid: see under ca 1 and ci˚): koci, kāci, etc., whoever, some (usually with neg. na koci, etc., equalling "not anybody"), nt. kiñci (q. v.); e. g. mā jātu koci lokasmiŋ pāpiccho It 85; no yāti koci loke Dh 179; n'âhaŋ bhatako 'smi kassaci Sn 25; na hi nassati kassaci kammaŋ "nobody's trace of action is lost" Sn 666; kassaci kiñci na (deti) (he gives) nothing to anybody VvA 322; PvA 45. -- In Sandhi the orig. d of cid is restored, e. g. app' eva nāma kocid eva puriso idh' agaccheyya, "would that some man or other would come here!" PvA 153. -> Also in correl. with rel. pron. ya (see details under ya˚): yo hi koci gorakkhaŋ upajīvati kassako so na brāhmano (whoever -- he) Sn 612. See also kad˚. Kaŋsa
Kaŋsa
[cp. Sk. kaŋsa; of uncertain etym., perhaps of Babylonian origin, cp. hirañña] 1. bronze Miln 2; magnified by late commentators occasionally into silver or gold. Thus J vi.504 (silver) and J i.338; iv.107; vi.509 (gold), considered more suitable to a fairy king. -- 2. a bronze gong Dh 134 (DhA iii.58). -- 3. a bronze dish J i.336; āpānīya˚ a bronze drinking cup, goblet M. i.316. -- 4. a "bronze," i. e. a bronze coin worth 4 kahāpaṇas Vin iv.255, 256. See Rhys Davids, Coins and Measures §§ 12, 22. -- "Golden bronze" in a fairy tale at Vv 54 is explained by Dhammapāla VvA 36 as "bells." -- It is doubtful whether brass was known in the Ganges valley when the earlier books were composed; but kaŋsa may have meant metal as opposed to earthenware. See the compounds.

-- upadahārana (n. a.) metal milk -- pail (?) in phrase: dhenusahassāni dukūla -- sandanāni (?) kaŋsūpadhāraṇām D ii.192; A iv.393; J vi.503 (expld at 504). Kern (Toev. p. 142) proposes correction to kaŋs'ûpadohana ( = Sk. kāŋsy'opodohana), i.e. giving milk to the extent of a metal pailful. -- kaṇṭaka metal thorns, bits of sharp metal, nails J v.102 (cp. sakaṇṭaka) -- kūta cheating with false or spurious metal D i.5 (=DA i.79: selling brass plates for gold ones). -- tāla bronze gong DhA i.389; DhsA 319 (˚tāḷa); VvA 161 or cymbals J vi.277. 411. -- thāla metal dish, as distinguished from earthenware D i.74 (in simile of dakkho nahāpako=A iii.25) cp. DA i. 217; Vism 283 (in simile); DhA iii.57 (: a gong); DA i.217; DhA iv.67 =J iii.224; reading at Miln 62 to be ˚tāla (see J.P.T.S. 1886, 122). -- pattharika a dealer in bronze ware Vin ii.135. -- pāti & pātī a bronze bowl, usually for food: M i.25; A iv.393; Sn 14; PvA 274. -- pūra full of metal J iv.107. -- bhaṇḍa brass ware Vin ii.135. -- bhājana a bronze vessel Vism 142 (in simile). -- maya made of bronze Vin i.190; ii.112; -- mallaka metal dish, e. g. of gold J iii.21. -- loha bronze Miln 267. Kaŋsati
Kaŋsati
= kassati, see ava˚. Kakaca
Kakaca
[onomat. to sound root kr̥, cp. note on gala; Sk. krakaca] a saw Th 1, 445; J iv.30; v.52; vi.261; DA i.212; in simile ˚ -- ūpama ovāda M i.129. Another simile of the saw (a man sawing a tree) is found at Ps i.171, quoted & referred to at Vism 280, 281.

-- khaṇḍa fragment or bit of saw J i.321. -- danta tooth of a saw, DA i.37 (kakaca -- danta -- pantiyaŋ kīḷamāna). Kakaṇṭaka
Kakaṇṭaka,
the chameleon J i.442, 487; ii.63; vi.346; VvA 258. Kaku
Kaku
[Brh. kakud, cp. kākud hollow, curvature, Lat. cacumen, & cumulus] a peak, summit, projecting corner S i.100 (where satakkatu in Text has to be corrected to satakkaku: megho thanayaŋ vijjumālā satakkaku. Com. expln sikhara, kūṭa) A iii.34 ( = AA 620~kūṭa). Cp. satakkaku & Morris, J.P.T.S. 1891 -- 93, 5. Kakuṭa
Kakuṭa
a dove, pigeon, only in cpds.:

-- pāda dove -- footed (i. e. having beautiful feet) DhA i.119; f. pādī appl. to Apsaras, J ii.93; DhA i.119; Miln 169. Kakutthaka
Kakutthaka
see ku˚. Kakudha
Kakudha
[cp. Sk. kakuda, and kaku above] 1. the hump on the shoulders of an Indian bull J ii.225; J vi.340. -> 2. a cock's comb: see sīsa kakudha. -- 3. a king's symbol or emblem (nt.) J v.264. There are 5 such insignia regis, regalia: s. kakudha -- bhaṇḍa. -- 4. a tree, the Terminalia Arjuna, Vin i.28; J vi.519; kakudharukkha DhA iv.153. Note. On pakudha as twin -- form of ka˚ see Trenckner, J.P.T.S. 1908, 108.

-- phala the fruit of the kakudha tree Mhvs xi.14, where it is also said to be a kind of pearl; see mutta. -- bhaṇḍa ensign of royalty J i.53; iv.151; v.289 ( = sakāyura). The 5 regalia (as mentioned at J v.264) are vāḷavījanī, uṇhīsa, khagga, chatta, pādukā: the fan, diadem, sword, canopy, slippers. -- pañcavidha -- k˚ PvA 74. Kakka
Kakka1
[cp. Sk. kalka, also kalanka & kalusa] a sedi- ment deposited by oily substances, when ground; a paste Vin i.205 (tila˚), 255. Three kinds enumerated at J. vi.232: sāsapa˚ (mustard -- paste), mattika˚ (fragrant earth -- paste, cp. Fuller's earth), tila˚ (sesamum paste). At DA i.88, a fourth paste is given as haliddi˚, used before the application of face powder (poudre de riz, mukha -- cuṇṇa). Cp. kakku. -- 174 -- Kakka
Kakka2
[cp. Sk. karka) a kind of gem; a precious stone of yellowish colour VvA 111. Kakkaṭa
Kakkaṭa
a large deer (?) J vi.538 (expld as mahāmiga). Kakkaṭaka
Kakkaṭaka
[cp. Sk. karkaṭa, karkara "hard," kankata "mail"; cp. Gr. karki/nos & Lat. cancer; also B. Sk. kakkaṭaka hook] a crab S i.123; M i.234; J i.222; Vv 546 (VvA 243, 245); DhA iii.299 (mama . . . kakkaṭakassa viya akkhīni nikkhamimsu, as a sign of being in love). Cp. kakkhaḷa.

-- nala a kind of sea -- reed of reddish colour, J iv.141; also a name for coral, ibid. -- magga fissures in canals; frequented by crabs, DhsA 270. -- yantaka a ladder with hooks at one end for fastening it to a wall, Mhvs ix.17. -- rasa a flavour made from crabs, crab -- curry, VvA 243. Kakkara
Kakkara
[onomat, cp. Sk. kṛkavāku cock, Gr. ke/rkac, kerki/s, Lat. querquedula, partridge; sound -- root kr̥, see note on gala] a jungle cock used as a decoy J ii.162, purāṇa˚, ii.161; cp. dīpaka1 & see Kern, Toev. p. 118: K˚ -- Jātaka, N˚ 209. Kakkaratā
Kakkaratā
(f.) roughness, harshness, deceitfulness, Pug 19, 23. Kakkariya
Kakkariya
(nt.) harshness, Pug 19, 23. Kakkaru
Kakkaru
a kind of creeper (˚jātāni = valliphalāni) J vi.536. Kakkasa
Kakkasa
(adj.) [Sk. karkaśa to root kr̥ as in kakkaṭaka] rough, hard, harsh, esp. of speech (vācā para -- kaṭukā Dhs 1343), M i.286 = Dhs 1343; A v.265=283, 293; DhsA 396. -- akakkasa: smooth Sn 632; J iii.282; v.203, 206, 405, 406 (cp. J.P.T.S. 1891 -- 93, 13); akakkasanga, with smooth limbs, handsome, J v.204. Kakkassa
Kakkassa
roughness Sn 328, Miln 252. Kakkārika
Kakkārika
(and ˚uka) [fr. karkaru] a kind of cucumber Vv 3328 = eḷāluka VvA 147. Kakkāru
Kakkāru
(Sk. karkāru, connected with karkaṭaka] 1. a pumpkin -- gourd, the Beninkasa Cerifera J vi.536: kakkārujātāni = valliphalāni (reading kakkaru to be corr.). -- 2. a heavenly flower J iii.87, 88=dibbapuppha Kakkāreti
Kakkāreti
[*kaṭ -- kāreti to make kaṭ, see note on gala for sound -- root kr̥ & cp. khaṭakhaṭa] to make the sound kak, to half choke J ii.105. Kakku
Kakku
[cp. kakka = kalka] a powder for the face, slightly adhesive, used by ladies, J v.302 where 5 kinds are enumd: sāsapa˚, loṇa˚, mattika˚, tila˚, haliddi˚. Kakkoṭaka
Kakkoṭaka
(?) KhA 38, spelt takk˚ at Vism 258. Kakkola
Kakkola
see takkola. Kakkhaḷa
Kakkhaḷa
[kakkhaṭa, cp. Sk. karkara = P. kakkaṭaka] 1. rough, hard, harsh (lit. & fig.) Dhs 648 (opp. muduka Dhs 962 (rūpaŋ paṭhavīdhātu: kakkhalaŋ kharagataŋ kakkhaḷattaŋ kakkhaḷabhāvo); Vism 349 (=thaddha), 591, 592 (˚lakkhaṇa); DhA ii.95; iv.104; Miln 67, 112; PvA 243 (=asaddha, akkosakāraka, opp. muduka); VvA 138 (=pharusa). -- 2. cruel, fierce, pitiless J i.187, 266; ii.204; iv162, 427. Akakkhaḷa not hard or harsh, smooth, pleasant DhsA 397. -- ˚vacata, kind speech, ibid. (=apharusa ˚vācatā mudu˚).

-- kathā hard speech, cruel words J vi.561. -- kamma cruelty, atrocity J iii.481. -- bhāva rigidity Dhs 962 (see kakkhala) MA 21; harshness, cruelty J iii.480. a˚ absence of hardness or rigidity DhsA 151. Kakkhaḷatā
Kakkhaḷatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] hardness, rigidity, Dhs 859; Vbh 82; J v.167; DhsA 166. -- akakkhaḷatā absence of roughness, pleasantness Dhs 44, 45, 324, 640, 728, 859; DhsA 151; VvA 214 ( = saṇha). Kakkhalatta
Kakkhalatta
(nt.) hardness, roughness, harshness Vin ii.86; Vbh 82; Vism 365; cp. M.Vastu i.166: kakkhaṭatva. Kakkhaḷiya
Kakkhaḷiya
hardness, rigidity, roughness, Vbh 350. Kanka
Kanka
[Sk. kanka, to sound -- root kn̊, cp. kinkiṇī & see note on gala] a heron M i.364, 429; J v.475.

-- patta a heron's plume J v.475. Kankata
Kankata
[ = kaŋ or kiŋ+kṛta, to kiṇi, "the tinklings"] elephant's trappings VvA 104 (=kappa). Kankaṇa
Kankaṇa
(nt.) [to same root as kanka] a bracelet, orna- ment for the wrist Th 2, 259 ( = ThA 211). Kankala
Kankala
[Sk. kankāla & cp. śṛnkhala (as kaṇṇa>śṛnga), orig. meaning "chain"] skeleton; only in cpd. atthi˚. Aṭṭhikankal' ūpamā kāmā Vin ii.25; M i.130, 364; J v.210; Th 1, 1150 (˚kuṭika): aṭṭhikankalasannibha Th 2, 488 ( = ThA 287; cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 75): aṭṭhikankala aṭṭhi -- puñja aṭṭhi -- rāsi S ii.185= It 17 (but in the verses on same page: puggalass' aṭṭhisañcayo). Cp. aṭṭhisankhalikā PvA 152; aṭṭhika sankhalikā J i.433; aṭṭhi -- sanghāṭa Th 1, 60. Kankuṭṭhaka
Kankuṭṭhaka
[cp. Sk. kankuṣṭha] a kind of soil or mould, of a golden or silver colour Mhvs 32. 6 (see note on p. 355). Kankhati
Kankhati
[Sk. kānkṣ cp. śank, Lat. cunctor] 1. with loc.: to be uncertain, unsettled, to doubt (syn. vicikicchati, with which always combined). Kankhati vicikicchati dvīsu mahāpurisa -- lakkhaṇesu D i.106 is in doubt and perplexity about (Bgh's gloss, patthanaŋ uppādati DA i.275, is more edifying than exact.) = Sn 107; na kankhati na vicikicchati S ii.17=iii.135; kankheyya vicikiccheyya S ii.50, 54; iii.122; v.225 (corr. khankheyya!) 226; same with Satthari kankheyya dhamme˚ sanghe˚ sikkhāya˚ A iv.460=v.17=M i.101=Dhs 1004; cp. Dhs. 1118. -- 2. with acc.: to expect, to wait for, to look forward to. Kālaŋ k. to abide one's time, to wait for death S i.65 (appiccho sorato danto k. k. bhāvito (so read for bhatiko) sudanto); Sn 516 (id. with bhāvito sadanto); It 69 (id. bhāvitatto). -- J v.411 (=icchati); vi.229 (=oloketi). pp. kankhita S iii.99; Sn 540; (+vicikicchita); inf. kankhituŋ S iv.350=399 (+vicikicchituŋ). Kankhana
Kankhana
(nt.) doubting, doubt, hesitation MA 97; DhsA 259. Kankhanīya
Kankhanīya
[grd. of kankhati] to be doubted S iv.399. Kankhā
Kankhā
(f.) [cp. Sk. kānkṣā] 1. doubt, uncertainty S i.181; iii.203 (dukkhe k. etc.; cp. Nd2 1); Sn 541, 1149; ˚ŋ vinayati Sn 58, 559, 1025; k. pahīyati Ps ii.62; combd with vimati: D i.105; iii.116; S iv.327; v.161; A ii.79, 160, 185; DA i.274; with vicikicchā: S iv.350; Dhs. 425. Defined as = kankhāyanā & kankhāyitatta Nd21; Dhs 425 (under vicikicchā). 3 doubts enumd at D iii.217; 4 in passages with vimati (see above); 7 at Dhs 1004; 8 at Nd2 1 & Dhs 1118; 16 at M i.8 & Vism 518. -- 2. as adj. doubting, doubtful, in akankha one who has overcome all doubt, one who possesses right knowledge (vijjā), in combns akankha apiha anupaya S i.181; akhila a. Sn 477, 1059; Nd2i; cp. vitiṇṇa˚ Sn 514; avitiṇṇa˚ Sn 249, 318, 320 (=ajānaŋ); nikkankha S ii.84 (+nibbicikiccha). -- 3. expectation SA 183. -- On connotation of k. in general see Dhs trsl. p. 115 n1.

-- cchida removing or destroying doubt Sn 87. -- cchedana the removal of d. J i.98; iv.69. -- ṭṭhāniya founded on d., doubtful (dhammā) D iii.285; A iv.152, 154; v.16; AA 689. -- dhamma a doubting state of mind, doubt D ii.149; S iv.350. -- vitaraṇa overcoming of doubt Miln 233; DhsA 352, ˚visuddhi complete purification in consequence of the removal of all doubt D iii.288; M i.147; Ud 60; Vism 523; Bdhd 116 sq. -- samangin affected with doubts, having doubts DhsA 259. -- 175 -- Kankhāyati
Kankhāyati
[Denom. fr. kankhā] to doubt, pp. Kankhā- yita Sn 1021. Kankhāyanā
Kankhāyanā
(f.) +kankhāyitatta (nt.) doubting and hesitation, doubtfulness, Nd2 1; Dhs 425, 1004, 1118; DhsA 259. Kankhin
Kankhin
(adj.) [Sk. kānkṣin] 1. doubting, wavering, un- decided, irresolute D ii.241; Sn 1148; Nd2 185; combd with vecikicchin S iii.99; M i.18; A ii.174; Sn 510. -- 2. longing for Pgdp 106 (mokkha˚). -- akankhin not doubting, confident, sure (cp. akankha) D ii.241; A ii.175. Kangu
Kangu
(f.) [derivation unknown, prob. non -- Aryan, cp. Sk. kangu] the panic seed, Panicum Italicum; millet, used as food by the poor (cp. piyangu); mentioned as one of the seven kinds of grains (see dhañña) at Vin iv.264; DA i.78. -- Miln 267; Mhvs 32, 30.

-- piṭṭha millet flour, in ˚maya made of m. meal J vi.581. -- bhatta a dish of (boiled) millet meal Vism 418 (in simile). Kaca
Kaca
[Sk. kaca, cp. kāñcī and Latin cingo, cicatrix] the hair (of the head), in ˚kalāpa a mass of hair, tresses Dāvs iv.51. Kacavara
Kacavara
[to kaca?] 1. sweepings, dust, rubbish (usually in combn with chaḍḍeti and sammajjati) J i.292; iii.163; iv.300; Vism 70; DA i.7; DhA i.52; SnA 311. -- 2. rags, old clothes SA 283 ( = pilotikā).

-- chaḍḍana throwing out sweepings, in ˚pacchi a dust basket, a bin J i.290. -- chaḍḍanaka a dust pan J i.161 (+ muṭṭhi -- sammjjanī). -- chaḍḍani a dust pan DhA iii.7 (sammajjanī+). -- chaḍḍikā (dāsī) a maid for sweeping dust, a cinderella DhA iv.210. Kacci & kaccid
Kacci
& kaccid (indecl.) [Sk. kaccid = kad+cid, see kad˚] indef. interrog. particle expressing doubt or suspense, equivalent to Gr. a)/n, Lat. ne, num, nonne: then perhaps; I doubt whether, I hope, I am not sure, etc., Vin i.158, 350; D i.50 (k. maŋ na vañcesi I hope you do not deceive me), 106; S iii.120, 125; Sn. 335, 354, p. 87; J i.103, 279; v.373; DhA ii.39 (k. tumhe gatā "have you not gone," answer: āma "yes"); PvA 27 (k. tan dānaŋ upakappati does that gift really benefit the dead?), 178 (k. vo piŋḍapāto laddho have you received any alms?). Cp. kin. -- Often combd with other indef. particles, e. g. kacci nu Vin i.41; J iii.236; vi.542; k. nu kho "perhaps" (Ger. etwa, doch nicht) J i.279; k. pana J i.103. -- When followed by nu or su the original d reappears according to rules of Sandhi: kaccinnu J ii.133; v.174, 348; vi. 23; kaccissu Sn 1045, 1079 (see Nd2 186). Kaccikāra
Kaccikāra
a kind of large shrub, the Caesalpina Digyna J vi.535 (should we write with BB kacchi˚?). Kaccha
Kaccha1
(nt.) [cp. Sk. kaccha, prob. dial.] 1. marshy land, marshes; long grass, rush, reed S i.52 (te hi sotthiŋ gamissanti kacche vāmakase magā), 78 (parūḷha k -- nakha -- lomā with nails and hair like long -- grown grass, cp. same at J iii.315 & Sdhp 104); J v.23 (carāmi kacchāni vanāni ca); vi.100 (parūḷha -- kacchā tagarā); Sn 20 (kacche rūḷhatiṇe caranti gāvo); SnA 33 (pabbata˚ opp. to nadī˚, mountain, & river marshes). Kern (Toev. ii.139) doubts the genuineness of the phrase parūḷha˚. -- 2. an arrow (made of reed) M i.429 (kaṇḍo . . . yen' amhi viddho yadi vā kacchaŋ yadi vā ropiman ti). Kaccha
Kaccha2
(adj.) [ger. of kath] fit to be spoken of A i.197 (Com. = kathetuŋ yutta). akaccha ibid. Kacchaka
Kacchaka1
a kind of fig -- tree DA i.81. -- 2. the tree Cedrela Toona Vin iv.35; S v.96; Vism 183. Kacchati
Kacchati1
Pass. of katheti (ppr. kacchamāna A iii.181). -- 2. Pass. of karoti. Kacchantara
Kacchantara
(nt.) [see kacchā2] 1. interior, dwelling, apartment VvA 50 ( = nivesa). -- 2. the armpit: see upa˚. Kacchapa
Kacchapa
[Sk. kacchapa, dial. fr. *kaśyapa, orig. Ep of kumma, like magga of paṭipadā] a tortoise, turtle S iv.177 (kummo kacchapo); in simile of the blind turtle (kāṇo k.) M iii.169 = S v.455; Th 2, 500 (cp. J.P.T.S. 1907, 73, 174). -- f. kacchapinī a female t. Miln 67.

-- lakkhaṇa "tortoise -- sign," i. e. fortune -- telling on the ground of a tortoise being found in a painting or an ornament; a superstition included in the list of tiracchāna -- vijjā D i.9≈; DA i.94. -- loma "tortoise -- hair," i. e. an impossibility, absurdity J iii.477, cp. sasavisāṇa; ˚maya made of t. hair J iii.478. Kacchapaka
Kacchapaka
see hattha˚. Kacchapuṭa
Kacchapuṭa
[see kaccha1] reed -- basket, sling -- basket, pingo, in -- vāṇija a trader, hawker, pedlar J i.111. Kacchā
Kacchā1
(f.) [derivation unknown, cp. Sk. kakṣā, Lat. cohus, incohare & see details under gaha1] 1. enclosure, denoting both the enclosing and the enclosed, i. e. wall or room: see kacchantara. -- 2. an ornament for head & neck (of an elephant), veilings, ribbon Vv 219 = 699 (=gīveyyaka VvA); J iv.395 (kacchaŋ nāgānaŋ bandhatha gīveyyaŋ paṭimuñcatha). 3. belt, loin -- or waist -- cloth (cp. next) Vin ii.319; J v.306 (=saŋvelli); Miln 36; DhA i.389. Kacchā
Kacchā2
(f.) & kaccha (m. nt.) [Derivation unknown, cp. Sk. kakṣa & kakṣā, Lat. coxa, Ohg. hahsa]; the armpit Vin i.15 (addasa . . . kacche vīṇaŋ . . . aññissā kacche ālambaraŋ); S i.122 = Sn 449 (sokaparetassa vīŋā kacchā abhassatha); It 76 (kacchehi sedā muccanti: sweat drops from their armpits); J v.434=DhA iv.197 (thanaŋ dasseti k˚ŋ dass˚ nābhiŋ dass˚); J v.435 (thanāni k˚ āni ca dassayantī; expld on p. 437 by upakacchaka); vi.578. The phrase parūḷha -- kaccha -- nakhaloma means "with long -- grown finger -- nails and long hair in the armpit," e. g. S i.78.

-- loma (kaccha˚) hair growing in the armpit Miln 163 (should probably be read parūḷha -- k. -- nakha -- l., as above). Kacchikāra
Kacchikāra
see kacci˚. Kacchu
Kacchu
[Derivation uncertain, cp. Sk. kacchu, dial. for kharju: perhaps connected with khajjati, eating, biting] 1. the plant Carpopogon pruriens, the fruit of which causes itch when applied to the skin DhA iii.297 (mahā˚ -- phalāni). -- 2. itch, scab, a cutaneous disease, usually in phrase kacchuyā khajjati "to be eaten by itch" (cp. E. itch>eat) Vin i.202, 296; J v.207; Pv ii.311 (cp. kapi˚); Vism 345; DhA i.299.

-- cuṇṇa the powdered fruit of Carpopogon pruriens, causing itch DhA iii.297. -- piḷakā scab & boils J v.207. Kajjala
Kajjala
[Sk. kajjala, dial. fr. kad+jala, from jalati, jval, orig. burning badly or dimly, a dirty burn] lamp -- black or soot, used as a collyrium Vin ii.50 (read k. for kapalla, cp. J.P.T.S. 1887, 167). Kajjopakkamaka
Kajjopakkamaka
a kind of gem Miln 118 (vajira k. phus- sarāga lohitanka). Kañcaka
Kañcaka
a kind of tree (dāsima˚) J vi.536 (expld as "dve rukkhajātiyo"). BB have koñcaka. Kañcana
Kañcana
(nt.) [Derivation uncertain, cp. Sk. kāñeana, either from khacati (shine = the shining metal, cp. kāca (glass) & Sk. kāś), or from kanaka gold, cp. Gr. knhko/s (yellow). P. kañcana is poetical] gold A iii.346= Th 1, 691 (muttaŋ selā va k.); Th 2, 266 (k˚ ssa phalakaŋ va); VvA 4, 9 (=jātarūpa). Esp. freq. in cpds.=of or like gold.

-- agghika a golden garland Bu X. 26. -- agghiya id. Bu v.29. -- āveḷā id. J vi.49; Vv 362; Pv ii.127 (thus for ˚ācela); iii.93; PvA 157. -- kadalikkhaṇḍa a g. bunch of bananas J vi.13. -- thūpa a gilt stupa DhA iii.483; iv.120. -- patimā a gilt or golden image or statue J vi.553; VvA 168. -- paṭṭa a g. turban or coronet J vi.217. -- patta a g. dish J v.377. -- pallanka a gilt palanquin J i.204. -- bimba the golden bimba fruit Vv 366 (but expld at VvA 168 by majjita -- kpaṭimā -- sadisa "like a polished golden statue"). -- bubbula a gilt ornament in form of a ball Mhvs 34, 74. -- rūpa a g. figure J iii.93. -- latā g. strings surrounding the royal drum J vi.589. -- vaṇṇa of g. colour, gilt, shining, bright J v.342 ( = paṇḍara). -- velli a g. robe, girdle or waist cloth J v.398 (but expld as "k -- rūpakasadisa -- sarīra "having a body like a g. statue"), cp. J v.306, where velli is expld by kacchā, girdle. -- sannibha like g., golden -- coloured (cp. k -- vaṇṇa and Sk. kanaka -- varṇa Sp. Av. Ś. i.121, 135, etc.), in phrase ˚taca "with golden -- coloured skin," Ep. of the Buddha and one of the 32 signs of a great man (mahāpurisa -- lakkhaṇa) D ii.17; iii.143, 159; M ii.136; Miln 75; attr. of a devatā Vv 302, 322; VvA 284; of a bhikkhu Sn 551=Th 1, 821. -- sūci a gold pin, a hair -- pin of gold J vi.242. -- 176 -- Kañcanaka
Kañcanaka
(adj.) golden J iv.379 (˚daṇḍa). Kañcuka
Kañcuka
[from kañc (kac) to bind, cp. Gr. ka/kala fetter, Sk. kañcuka] 1. a closely fitting jacket, a bodice Vin i.306 = ii.267; A i.145; DhA iii.295 (paṭa˚ŋ paṭimuncitvā dressed in a close bodice); PvA 63 (urago tacaŋ kañcukaŋ omuñcanto viya). -- 2. the slough of a snake (cp. 1) DA i.222. -- 3. armour, coat of mail J v.128 (sannāha˚); DA i.157 (of leather); Dāvs v.14. -- 4. a case, covering, encasement; of one pagoda incasing another: Mhvs i.42. Kañjaka
Kañjaka
N. of a class of Titans PvA 272 (kāḷa -- k˚ -- bhedā Asurā; should we read khañjaka? Cp. Hardy, Manual of Buddhism 59). Kañjika
Kañjika
(nt.) [Sk. kāñjika] sour rice -- gruel J i.238 (udaka˚); Vv 3337 (amba˚), 435 ( = yāgu VvA 186); DhA i.78, 288; VvA 99 (ācāma -- k˚ -- loṇudaka as expln of loṇa -- sovīraka "salty fluid, i. e. the scum of sour gruel"). Cp. next. Kañjiya
Kañjiya
(nt.) = kañjika; J iii.145 (ambila˚); vi.365 (˚āpaṇa); DhA ii.3; iv.164.

-- teḷa a thick substance rising as a scum on rice -- gruel, used in straightening arrows DhA i.288. Kaññā
Kaññā
(f.) [from kanīna young, compar. kanīyah, superl. kaniṣṭha; orig. "newly sprung" from *qen, cp. Gr. kaino/s, Vedic kanyā, Lat. re -- cen(t)s, Ags. hindema "novissimus." See also kaniṭṭha] a young (unmarried) woman, maiden, girl Pv i.111. -- As emblem of beauty in simile khattiya -- kaññā vā . . . pannarasa -- vassuddesikā vā solasa -- vassuddesikā vā . . . M i.88; in combn khattiya -- kaññā, brāhmaṇa -- k˚, etc. A ii.205; iv.128; Kisāgotamī nāma khattiya -- k˚ J i.60; deva˚ a celestial nymph J i.61.

-- dāna giving away of a girl in marriage Pgdp 85. Kaṭa
Kaṭa1
[Sk. kaṭa from kṛṇatti: to do wicker -- work, roll up, plait; *gert, cp. Gr. ka/rtalos, Lat. cratis = E. crate, Goth. haurds, E. hurdle] a mat: see cpds. & kaṭallaka.

-- sara a reed: Saccharum Sara, used as medicine DhsA 78. -- sāra (DhA i.268) & sāraka a mat for sitting or lying on, made of the stalks of the screw -- pine, Pandanus Furcatus J vi.474; v.97; DA i.137; DhA ii.183 Kaṭa
Kaṭa2
another form of kaṭi (hip), only used in cpds.:

-- aṭṭhika the hip -- bone D ii.296 = M i.58, 89=M iii.92 (as v.l.). Note. kaṭiṭṭhika at M iii.92 and as v.l. at D ii.296. -- sāṭaka a loin -- cloth J iv.248. Kaṭa
Kaṭa3
= kata [pp. of karoti] in meaning of "original," good (cp. sat); as nt. "the lucky die" in phrase kaṭaggaha (see below). Also in combn with su˚ & duk˚ for sukata & dukkata (e. g. Vin ii.289; DhA iii.486; iv.150), and in meaning of "bad, evil" in kaṭana. Cp. also kali.

-- ggaha "he who throws the lucky die," one who is lucky, fortunate, in phrase "ubhayattha k." lucky in both worlds, i. e. here & beyond Th 1, 462; J iv.322 ( = jayaggaha victorious C.); cp. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1887, 159. Also in "ubhayam ettha k." S iv.351 sq. -- Opposed to kali the unlucky die, in phrase kaliŋ gaṇhāti to have bad luck J vi.206 (kaliggaha=parājayasaŋkhāta, i. e. one who is defeated, as opp. to kaṭaggaha=jayasankhāta), 228, 282. Kaṭaka
Kaṭaka
(m. nt.) anything circular, a ring, a wheel (thus in kara˚ Vin ii.122); a bracelet PvA 134. Kaṭakañcukatā
Kaṭakañcukatā
see kaṭu˚. Kaṭakaṭāyati
Kaṭakaṭāyati
= taṭataṭāyati to crush, grind, creak, snap PugA. i.34; VvA 121 (as v.l.); Vism 264. Cp. also karakarā. Kaṭacchu
Kaṭacchu
[cp. on etym. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1887, 163] a ladle, a spoon; expld by uḷunka DhA iv.75, 123; by dabbi PvA 135. Used for butter VvA 68, otherwise for cooked food in general, esp. rice gruel. -- Vin ii.216; J i.454; iii.277.

-- gāha "holding on to one's spoon," i. e. disinclination to give food, niggardliness, stinginess DhsA 376, cp. Dhs trsl. 300 n2. -- gāhika "spoon in hand," serving with ladles (in the distribution of food at the Mahādāna) PvA 135. -- parissāvana a perforated ladle Vin ii.118. -- bhikkhā "ladle -- begging," i. e. the food given with a ladle to a bhikkhu when he calls at a house on his begging tour Th 1, 934; Miln 9; DhA iv.123; as representing a small gift to one individual, opposed to the Mahādanā Pv ii.957; as an individual meal contrasted with public feeding (salāka -- bhatta) DhA i.379. -- matta (bhatta) "only a spoonful of rice" Miln 8; DhA iv.75. Kaṭacchuka
Kaṭacchuka
(adj.) relating to spoons Vin ii.233. Kaṭana
Kaṭana
(nt.) [from kaṭa, pp. of karoti] an evil deed A iv.172 (v.l. = AA 744 kaṭanaŋ vuccati pāpakammaŋ). Kaṭallaka
Kaṭallaka
[to kaṭa1] a puppet (pagliaccio), a marionette with some contrivance to make it dance J v.16 (dāru˚ expld by dārumaya -- yanta -- rūpaka). Kaṭasī
Kaṭasī
(f.) [prob. a contamination of kaṭa + sīva(thikā), charnel -- house, under influence of foll. va(ḍḍh˚), cp. Sk. kaṭa (?) a corpse] a cemetery; only in phrase kaṭasiŋ vaḍḍheti "to increase the cemetery" referring to dying and being buried repeatedly in the course of numerous rebirths, expld by susāna & āḷāhana ThA 291. -- vaḍḍhenti kaṭasiŋ ghoraŋ ādiyanti punabbhavaŋ Vin ii.296 = A ii.54=Th 1, 456 (where ācinanti (?) for ādiy˚), 575; Th 2, 502. Also in cpds. ˚vaḍḍhana J i.146; Ud 72=Nett 174; ˚vaḍḍhita S ii.178 sq.= Nd2 664. Kaṭākaṭa
Kaṭākaṭa
see kata i.3. Kaṭāha
Kaṭāha
(m. nt.) [Sk. kaṭāha] a pot [in older texts only as -- ˚]. -- 1. pot, vessel, vase, receptacle. udaka˚ Vin ii.122; ghaṭi˚ Vin ii.115; loha˚ Vin ii.170. ayo˚ (in simile "diva -- santatte ayokaṭāhe") M i.453 = A iv.138; gūtha˚ Vin iv.265; tumba˚ (a gourd used as receptacle for food) vin ii.114; alābu˚ DhsA 405. -- Uncompounded only at Dpvs 92 (˚ka); Mhvs 17, 47; 18, 24. -- 2. anything shaped like a pot, as the skull: sīsa˚ D ii.297= M i.58; Miln 197. Kaṭi
Kaṭi
[Sk. kaṭi, *(s)qṷel; orig. bending, curvature, cp. Gr. ske/los hip, Lat. scelus crooked deed, Ger. scheel squint] hip, waist Vin iii.22, 112; Nd2 659; J iv.32; Miln 418. In cpds. also kaṭa (q. v.).

-- thālaka a cert. bone on the small of the back J vi.509. -- padesa the buttocks J iii.37. -- pamāṇa (adj.) as far as the waist J vi.593. -- pariyosāna the end of the hips, the bottom J ii.275. -- puthulaka (adj.) with broad hips, having beautiful hips J v.303 (in expln of soṇī puthulā). -- bhāga the waist J iii.373. -- bhāra a burden carried on the hip (also a way of carrying children) Vin ii.137; iii.49. -- sandhi the joint of the hip Miln 418, Vism 185. -- samohita (adj.) fastened or clinging to the waist J v.206. -- sutta a belt, girdle (as ornament) PvA 134. -- suttaka a string or cord around the waist to fasten the loin -- cloth Vin ii.271; also an ornamental waist -- band, girdle Vin ii.107 (see Vin. Texts iii.69, 142, 348). -- 177 -- Kaṭuka
Kaṭuka
(adj.) [Sk. kaṭu(ka), from *(s)qṷer to cut; cp. Sk. kṛṇoti (kṛṇtati), Lat. caro "cutlet." -- k. is almost exclusively poetical; usually expld in prose by aniṭṭha, tikhiṇa, ghora (of niraya); often combd with khara, opp. madhura, e. g. PvA 119] sharp, bitter, acid, severe. -- 1. severe, sharp (fig.), of dukkha, vedanā, kāmā, etc. M i.10 = A ii.143; J vi.115; Th 2, 451 (= ThA 281); SA 56. -- painful, terrible, frightful ( -- appld to the fruits of evil actions and to the sufferings in Niraya: see kammapphala & niraya) J iii.519; Pv i.102, 111; iv.18, 76. -- bitter, or perhaps pungent of taste DhS 291; Miln 65, 112; J iii.201. -- 2. (nt.) pungency, acidity, bitterness D ii.349=J i.380; Th 2, 503 (pañca˚); J vi.509. -- Note. Is k. to be written instead of kadukkha at VvA 316, where it explains maraṇa? Cp. J iii.201: tesaŋ taŋ kaṭukaŋ āsi, maraṇaŋ ten' upāgamuŋ.

-- udraya causing bitterness or pain J v.241, cp. dukkhudraya J v.119. -- odaka a bitter draught Sdhp 159. -- pabhedana (adj.) having a pungent juice exuding from the temples, said of an elephant in rut Dh 324 ( = tikhiṇamada DhA iv.13). -- pphala a kind of perfume made of the berry of an aromatic plant J ii.416=DhA iii.475 (kappūra -- k˚ -- ādīni), cp. Sk. kakkolaka. -- (adj.) of bitter fruit J ii.106 (of the mango); S i.57=J iii.291=Dh 66 (of kamma); Pv i.1110 (id.). -- bhaṇḍa (sg. & pl.) spices. There are 4 enumd at J iii.86: hingujīraka, singiveraka, marica, pipphali; 3 at VvA 186 (as tikaṭuka, cp. kaṭula): ajamoja, hingujīraka, lasuṇa; PvA 135; DhA ii.131. -- bhāva stinginess DhsA 376. -- rohiṇī the black hellebore Vin i.201 (as medicine). -- vipāka (adj.) having a bitter result (of pāpa) Miln 206; compar. ˚tara S ii.128. -- sāsana a harsh command J vi.498. Kaṭukañcukatā
Kaṭukañcukatā
(f.) [der. by Bdhgh. as kaṭuka + añcuka (añc), a popular etymology (DhsA 376). At Dhs 1122 and as v.l. K in Vbh we have the spelling kaṭakancukatā (for kaṭakuñcakatā?), on which and ˚kuñcaka see Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 159 sq. and Dhs. trsl. 300 n2. -- Morris' derivation is kaṭa (kar) + kañcuka + tā (kañcuka = kuñcaka to kuñc, to contract), thus a dern fr. kañcuka "bodice" and meaning "being tightened in by a bodice," i. e. tightness. Although the reading kaṭukañc˚ is the established reading, the var. lect. kaṭakuñc˚ is probably etym. correct, semantically undoubtedly better. It has undergone dissimilatory vowel -- metathesis under influence of popular analogy with kaṭuka. With kuñcikatā cp. the similar expression derived from the same root: kuṇalī -- mukha, of a stingy person Pv ii.928, which is expld by "sankucitaŋ mukhaŋ akāsi" (see kuñcita)] closeness, tightness, close -- fistedness, niggardliness. Expld as "the shrinking up of the heart," which prevents the flow or manifestation of generosity. It occurs only in the stock phrase "vevicchaŋ kadariyaŋ k. aggahitattaŋ cittassa" in macchariya -- passage at Nd2 614=Dhs 1122 =Pug 19, 23=Vbh 357, 371; and in the macchariya expln at Vism 470. Kaṭukatta
Kaṭukatta
(nt.) pungency, acidity, bitterness Miln 56, 63. Kaṭumikā
Kaṭumikā
(f.) [from karoti; see Sk. kṛtrima & kuṭṭima; also kutta & kutti] artificiality, outward help, suggestion, appld to sati Miln 78, 79 (cp. Miln trsl. i.121 n and MVastu i.477). Kaṭula
Kaṭula
(adj.) [Sk. kaṭura] containing pungent substances (generally three: tekaṭula) Vin i.210 (yāgu), cp. tikaṭuka. Kaṭuviya
Kaṭuviya
(adj.) [kaṭu viya?] impure, defiled, in ˚kata A i.280. Kaṭerukkha
Kaṭerukkha
a kind of creeper J vi.536 (perhaps read as next). Kaṭeruha
Kaṭeruha
a flowering plant J vi.537 ( = pupphagaccha). Cp. kaseruka. Kaṭṭha
Kaṭṭha1
[Sk. kṛṣṭa, pp. of kasati, cp. kiṭṭha] ploughed, tilled Sn 80; Miln 255; PvA 45, 62. a˚ untilled, unprepared Anvs 27. su˚ well -- ploughed A i.229; Miln 255. Kaṭṭha
Kaṭṭha2
(adj.) [Sk. kaṣṭa] bad, useless: see kaṭṭhaka2. Only in cpds.; perhaps also in pakaṭṭhaka.

-- anga pithless, sapless, of no value (of trees) J ii.163 = DhA i.144. -- mukha "with the injurious mouth," a kind of snake DhsA 300. Kaṭṭha
Kaṭṭha3
(nt.) [Brh. kāṣṭha, cp. Ohg. holz] 1. a piece of wood, esp. a stick used as fuel, chips, firewood S i.168 = Sn 462; M i.234 (+ kaṭhala); PvA 256 (+ tiṇa). In phrase "sattussada sa -- tiṇa -- kaṭṭh' odaka sa -- dhañña" (densely populated with good supply of grass, firewood, water, and corn) in ster. description of a prosperous place (cp. Xenophon's po/lis oi)koume/nh eu)dai/mwn kai\ mega/lh) D i.87, 111, etc. Both sg. (coll.) & pl. as "sticks" D ii.341, esp. in phrase kaṭṭhaŋ phāleti to chop sticks Vin i.31; Sn p. 104; J ii.144; Pv ii.951 (=PvA 135), or k˚ŋ pāteti (phāṭeti=phāleti? See pāteti) M i.21. Frequent also in similes: M i.241= ii.93=iii.95 (alla k.); M iii.242=S ii.97=iv.215= v.212 (dve k.); A iii.6 (+ kaṭhala); iv.72 (+ tiṇa); i.124=Pug 30, 36 (+ kaṭhala). -- 2. a piece of stick used for building huts (wattle and daub) M i.190. -> 3. a stick, in avalekhana˚ (for scraping) Vin ii.141, 221, and in danta˚ a tooth -- pick VvA 63, etc. (see danta). -- 4. (adj.) in cpds.=of wood, wooden.

-- aggi wood -- fire, natural fire A iv.41, 45, enumerated last among the 7 fires. -- atthaŋ for the purpose of fuel, in phrase k. pharati to serve as fuel A ii.95 = S iii.93= It 90=J i.482. -- atthara a mat made of twigs (cp. kaṭasāra) J v.197, also as -- attharika (& ˚kā) J vi.21; DhA i.135; f. at J i.9; iv.329; vi.57. -- kalingara chips and chaff DhA iii.122 (cp. k -- khaṇḍa). -- khaṇḍa a piece of wood, splinter, chip, suggesting something useless, trifling DhA i.321 (as expln of niratthaŋ va kalingaraŋ); ThA 284 (as expln of chuṭṭho kalingaraŋ viya). -- tāla a wooden key Vin ii.148 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.162). -- tāḷa a w. gong DhsA 319. -- tumba a w. vessel Vin i.205. -- pādukā a wooden shoe, clog Vin i.188. -- puñja a heap of w. A iv.72; J ii.327. -- phālaka wood -- cutter Vism 413. -- bhatin a wood -- cutter Dpvs 20, 28, where given as a nickname of King Tissa. -- mañcaka a wooden bed Miln 366. -- maya wooden Vin i.203; J i.289 = v.435. -- rūpa (& ˚ka) a w. figure, doll J i.287. -- vāha a cartload of fire -- wood S ii.84. -- vāhana riding on a faggot J i.136. -- vipalāvita drifting wood J i.326. -- hatthin a w. elephant, built by order of King Caṇḍapajjota to decoy King Udena (cp. the horse of Troy) DhA i.193. -- hāraka (f. ˚ikā) gathering fire -- wood, an occupation of poor people M i.79; S i.180; J i.134; ii.412; iv. 148; v.417; Miln 331; Vism 120; VvA 173. -- hārin=˚hāraka Vin iii.41; J i.133 (title of J no. 7. referred to at DhA i.349). Kaṭṭhaka
Kaṭṭhaka1
(m. nt.) [to kaṭṭha3] a kind of reed Dh 164; DhA iii.156 ( = velu -- sankhāta -- kaṭṭha). Kaṭṭhaka
Kaṭṭhaka2
(m. pl.) [to kaṭṭha2] a kind of fairy D ii.261 -- 178 -- Kaṭṭhissa
Kaṭṭhissa
(nt.) [Sk.?] a silken coverlet embroidered with gems D i.7 = Vin i.192= ii.163; DA i.87=AA 445. Kaṭhati
Kaṭhati
[Sk. kvathati; cp. Goth. hvapo scum, hvapjan to seethe. The Dhātumañjūsā (no. 132, ed. Andersen & Smith) comments on kaṭh with "sosāna -- pākesu." See also kuthati] 1. to boil, to stew Bdhgh on Vin i.205, see Vin. Texts ii.57 n1, where pp. is given as kuthita. Similarly Th 2, 504 (cp. Sisters 174 n4, but cp. Mil. trs. ii.271 "distressed"; E. Müller, J.R.A.S. 1910, 539). -- 2. to be scorched, pp. kaṭhita ( = hot) Miln 323, 325, 357, 397. -- The pp. occurs as ˚kaṭṭhita & ˚kuṭṭhita in cpds uk˚ pa˚ (q. v.). See also kuṭṭhita. Kaṭhala
Kaṭhala
[Sk. kaṭhara (˚la, ˚lla, ˚lya: all found in Av. S and Divy), to kṛṇāti; cp. khāṭi] gravel, pebble, potsherd J iii.225; v.417; VvA 157; combd with sakkhara at D i.84 = A i.9, and in simile at A i.253. As f. combd with kaṭṭha at A i.124=Pug 30, 36; A iii.6; as m. in same combn at Vism 261. Kaṭhalaka
Kaṭhalaka
gravel, potsherd J iii.227; Miln 34. Kaṭhina
Kaṭhina
(adj. -- n.) [Sk. kaṭhina & kaṭhora with dial. ṭh for rth; cp. Gr. kratu/s, kratero/s strong, kra/tos strength; Goth. hardus = Ags. heard=E. hard. Cp. also Sk. kṛtsna=P. kasiṇa]. 1. (adj.) hard, firm, stiff. Cp. ii.2; Dhs 44, 45 (where also der. f. abstr. akaṭhinatā absence of rigidity, combd with akakkhalatā, cp. DhsA 151 akaṭhina -- bhāva); PvA 152 (˚dāṭha). -- (fig.) hard, harsh, cruel J i.295=v.448 (=thaddha -- hadaya); adv. ˚ŋ fiercely, violently Miln 273, 274. -- 2. (nt.) the cotton cloth which was annually supplied by the laity to the bhikkhus for the purpose of making robes Vin i.253 sq.; also a wooden frame used by the bh. in sewing their robes Vin. ii.115 -- 117. -- On the k. robe see Vin. i.298 sq.; iii.196 sq., 203 sq., 261 sq.; iv.74, 100, 245 sq., 286 sq.; v.15, 88, 119, 172 sq.; 218. Cp. Vin. Texts i.18; ii.148; iii.92.

-- attharaṇa the dedication of the k. cloth Vin i.266; see next. -- atthāra the spreading out, i. e. dedication of the k. cloth by the people to the community of bhikkhus. On rules concerning this distribution and description of the ceremony see Vin i.254 sq.; Bu ix.7; cp. Vin v.128 sq., 205 -- uddhāra the withdrawal or suspension of the five privileges accorded to a bhikkhu at the k. ceremony Vin i.255, 259; iii.262; iv.287, 288; v.177 -- 179, cp. next & Vin. Texts ii.157, 234, 235. -- ubbhāra = ˚uddhāra, in kaṭhinassa ubbhārāya "for the suspension of the k. privileges" Vin i.255. -- khandhaka the chapter or section treating of k., the 7th of the Mahāvagga of the Vinaya Vin ii.253 -- 267. -- cīvara a k. robe made of k. cloth Bu ix.7. -- dussa the k. cloth Vin i.254. -- maṇḍapa a shed in which the bhikkhus stitched their k. cloth into robes Vin ii.117. -- rajju string used to fix the k. cloth on to the frame Vin ii.116. -- sālā=˚maṇḍapa Vin ii.116. Kaṭhinaka
Kaṭhinaka
(adj.) referring to the kaṭhina cloth Vin v.61, 114. Kaḍḍhati
Kaḍḍhati
[dialect. form supposed to equal Sk. karṣati, cp. Prk. kaḍḍhai to pull, tear, khaḍḍā pit, dug -- out. See also Bloomfield, J.A.O.S. xiv. 1921 p. 465.] 1. to draw out, drag, pull, tug J i.193, 225, 265, 273 (khaggaŋ k. to draw the sword). -- 2. to draw in, suck up (udakaŋ) J iv.141. -- 3. to draw a line, to scratch J. i.78, 111, 123; vi.56 (lekhaŋ). Kaḍḍhana
Kaḍḍhana
(nt.). 1. pulling, drawing Miln 231. - 2. refusing, rejecting, renunciation, appl. to the selfdenial of missionary theras following Gotama Buddha's example Mhvs 12, 55. Kaḍḍhanaka
Kaḍḍhanaka
(adj.) pulling, dragging J v.260. Kaṇa
Kaṇa
[Derivation uncertain, possibly connected with kana; positive of kanīyān = small; Vedic kaṇa] the fine red powder between the husk and the grain of rice, huskpowder D i.9 (˚homa), expld at DA i.93 by kuṇḍaka. -> (adj.) made of husk -- powder or of finely broken rice, of cakes J i.423 (k -- pūva=kuṇḍakena pakka -- pūva). -- akaṇa (adj.) free from the coating of red powder. characteristic of the best rice Mhvs 5, 30; Anvs 27 (akaṇaŋ karoti to whiten the rice). Cp. kākaṇa.

-- bhakkha eating husk -- powder, a practice of cert. ascetics D i.166 = M i.78=A i.241≈. Kaṇaya
Kaṇaya
[Derivation unknown, cp. Sk. kaṇaya = kaṇapa] a sort of spear, lance J i.273; ii.364 (like a spear, of a bird's beak); Miln 339.

-- agga the point of a spear J i.329 (like . . ., of a beak). Kaṇavīra
Kaṇavīra
[Sk. karavīra] Nerium odorum, oleander, the flower of which is frequently used in the garland worn by criminals when led to the place of execution (cp. Rouse, J. trsl. iv.119 and Mṛcchakaṭika X. beginning: diṇṇa -- kalavīla -- dāme. See also under kaṇṭha) Vism 183 (n); DhsA 317; SnA 283; VvA 177; cp. next. Kaṇavera
Kaṇavera
= kaṇavīra J iii.61; iv.191; v.420; vi.406. Kaṇājaka
Kaṇājaka
(nt.) a porridge of broken rice, eaten together with sour gruel (bilanga -- dutiya; always in this combn except at J v.230) Vin ii.77 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.9); S i.90, 91; A i.145; iv.392; J i.228; iii.299; DhA iii.10; iv.77; VvA 222, 298 (corr. bilanka; Hardy at VvA Index p. 364 expl. as "a certain weight"(?)).

-- bhatta a meal of k. porridge J v.230. Kaṇikā
Kaṇikā
(f.) [cp. kaṇa] 1. a small particle of broken rice (opp. taṇḍula a full grain) J vi.341, 366 (˚āhi pūvaŋ pacitvā). 2. a small spot, a freckle, mole, in a˚ (adj.) having no moles D i.80, and sa˚ with moles D. i.80 (cp. DA i.223). Kanikāra
Kanikāra
(m. nt.) & kaṇṇikāra J iv.440; v.420; the difference stated at J v.422 is kaṇi˚ = mahāpupphā kaṇṇi˚=khuddakapupphā) [Sk. karṇikāra] -- 1. (m.) the tree Pterospermum acerifolium J i.40; v.295; vi.269, 537. -- 2. (nt.) its (yellow) flower (k -- puppha), taken metaphorically as typical emblem of yellow and of brightness. Thus in similes at D ii.111 (=pīta)= M ii.14 (ṇṇ)=A v.61 (ṇṇ); DhA i.388; of the yellow robes (kāsāyāni) J ii.25; with ref. to the blood of the heart Vism 256;=golden VvA 65; DhA ii.250 (v. l. ṇṇ).

-- makula a k. bud J ii.83. Kaṇerika
Kaṇerika
(nt.) a helmet (?) J vi.397. Kaṇeru
Kaṇeru
(m. f.) [Derivation uncertain, just possibly con- nected with kara, trunk. Sanskrit has kareṇu, but the medieval vocabularies give also kaṇeru] a young elephant J ii.342; iv.49; v.39, 50, 416; vi.497; DhA i.196 (v. l.) kareṇukā) -- f. ˚kā M i.178. -- See also kareṇu. Kaṇṭa
Kaṇṭa
(cp. next) a thorn Miln 351. Kaṇṭaka
Kaṇṭaka
[From kantati2 to cut. Brh. kaṇṭaka. Spelt also kaṇṭhaka] 1. a thorn Sn 845; Vin i.188; J v.102; vi.105 (in description of the Vetaraṇī); cp. kusa˚. -- 2. any instrument with a sharp point Sdhp 201. -> 3. a bone, fish -- bone J i.222; in piṭṭhi˚ a bone of the spine D ii.297≈ (see kaṭaṭṭhi); M i.80 = 245; Vism 271; Sdhp 102. -- 4. (fig.) an obstacle, hindrance, nuisance ("thorn in my side"); Kvu 572; enemy, infestor; a dacoit, thief, robber D i.135 (sa˚ and a˚, of the country as infested with dacoits or free from them, cp. DA i.296); J i.186 (paṭikaṇṭaka, enemy); v.450; Th 1, 946; DhA i.177 (akkhimhi); VvA 301. -- 5. (fig.) anything sharp, thorny, causing pain: of kāmā (passions) S iv.189, 195, 198; Ud 24; Kvu 202; cp. sa˚. -- Thus grouped, like saŋyojanāni, into 10 obstacles to perfection (dasa k.) A v.134; as "bringing much trouble" J iv.117. Often in standing phrase khāṇu -- kaṇṭaka stumbling and obstruction A i.35; SnA 334. As abstr. kaṇṭakattaŋ hindrance at Vism 269 (sadda˚). -- akaṇṭaka 1. free from thorns J ii.118; v.260. -- 2. (fig.) free from thieves, quiet, peaceful D i.135; also not difficult, easy, happy, bringing blessings (of the right path) A v.135; Vv 187; VvA 96. -- sakaṇṭaka 1. having bones (of food) J iv.192, 193. -- 2. (fig.) beset with thieves, dangerous D i.135; thorny, i. e. painful, miserable (of duggati and kāmā) S iv.195; Th 2, 352; J v.260. -- Cp. also kaṇḍaka and nikkaṇṭaka.

-- âpacita covered with thorns J vi.249 (cp. ˚ācita); -- âpassaya ( = kaṇṭak' apāśraya) a bed made of an outstretched skin, under which are placed thorns or iron spikes; to lie or stand on such is a practice of certain naked ascetics D i.167=M i.78≈. -- âpassayika (adj. to prec.) "bed -- of -- thorns -- man" D i.167≈. At J i.493 the reading is k -- āpassaya, at iii.74 k -- apassaya; at iii.235 the reading is kaṇṭhaka -- seyyaŋ kappetha (should it be k -- āpassaye seyyaŋ k˚?); D i.167 reads kaṇṭhakā -- passayika. -- ācita covered with thorns J v.167. -- ādhāna a thorny brake, a thorny hedge M i.10 (k -- dhāna; for dhāna =ṭhāna see dhāna & cp. rāja -- dhānī); A i.35; Miln 220. -- kasā a thorny whip used for punishment and torture J iii.41. -- gahana a thorny thicket or jungle S ii.228. -- gumba a th. bush J i.208. -- latā a th. creeper, the Capparis Zeilanica J v.175. -- vaṭṭa a thorny brake or hedge M i.448. -- 179 -- Kaṇṭaki
Kaṇṭaki
(f.) in cpd. ˚vāṭa a thorny fence (cactus hedge?) Vin ii.154. Kaṇṭha
Kaṇṭha
[*qṷent from *qṷelt, primarily neck, cp. Lat. collus "the turner." Syn. with k. is gīvā, primarily throat, Brh. kaṇṭha] 1. throat A iv.131; J v.448; Miln 152 (kaṇṭho ākurati, is hoarse); PvA 280 (akkharāni mahatā kaṇṭhena uccaritāni). The throat of Petas is narrow and parched with thirst: PvA 99 (k -- oṭṭha -- tālūnaŋ tassita), 180 (sūci˚ like a needle's eye, cp. sūcicchidda. v. l. sūcikaṭṭha "whose bones are like needles"), 260 (visukkha -- k -- ṭṭha -- jivhā). -- 2. neck Vin i.15; Dh 307 (kāsāva˚); Vv 6417 (expid at VvA 280 by gīvūpagasīsūpagādi -- ābharaṇāni). Esp. in loc. kaṇṭhe round the neck, with ref. to var. things tied round, e. g. kuṇapaŋ k. āsattaŋ A iv.377; kuṇapaŋ k. baddhaŋ J i.5; k. mālā J i.166, 192; k. bandhanti vaḍḍhanaŋ J iii.226; with the wreath of karavīra flowers (q. v.) on a criminal ready for execution: rattavaṇṇa -- virala -- mālāya bandhakaṇṭha PvA 4 (cp. AvŚ i.102; ii.182; karavīra -- mālābaddha [sakta ii.182] -- kaṇṭheguṇa).

-- kūpa the cavity of the throat Mhbv 137. -- ja produced in the throat, i. e. guttural Sāsv 150. -- suttaka an ornamental string or string of beads worn round the neck Vin ii.106. Kaṇṭhaka
Kaṇṭhaka1
thorn, see kaṇṭaka. Kaṇṭhaka
Kaṇṭhaka2
N. of Gotama's horse, on which he left his father's palace Mhbv 25; spelt kanthaka at J i.54, 62 sq. Kaṇḍa
Kaṇḍa
(m. nt.) [perhaps as *kaldno fr. *kalad to break, cp. Gr. kladaro/s, Lat. clades, etc., Sk. kāṇḍa. See also khagga and khaṇḍa] 1. the portion of a stalk or cane between one knot and another; the whole stalk or shaft; the shaft of an arrow, an arrow in general M i.429 (two kinds of arrows: kaccha & ropima, cp. kaṇḍa -- cittaka); J i.150; ii.91; iii.273; v.39; Miln 44, 73; Mhvs 25, 89. As arrow also in the "Tell" story of Culladhanuggaha at J iii.220 & DhA iv.66. -> 2. a section, portion or paragraph of a book DA i.12; Pgdp 161. -- 3. a small portion, a bit or lump DhA i.134 (pūva˚); Mhvs 17, 35. -- 4. kaṇḍaŋ (adv.) a portion of time, for a while, a little Pgdp 36. -- See also khaṇḍa, with which it is often confounded. Der. upa -- kaṇḍakin (adj.) (thin) like a stalk or arrow Pv. ii.113 (of a Petī).

-- gamana the going of an arrow, i. e. the distance covered by an arrow in flight, a bow -- shot J ii.334; cp. kaṇḍu. -- cittaka (Sk. kāṇḍa -- citraka) an excellent arrow A ii.202. -- nāḷī a quiver J iii.220. -- pahāra an arrow -- shot, arrow -- wound Miln 16 (ekena k -- paharena dve mahākāyā padālitā "two birds killed with one stone"), 73. -- vāraṇa (adj.) warding off arrows, appl. to a shield J vi.592 (nt.); a shield J iv.366. Kaṇḍaka
Kaṇḍaka
= kaṇṭaka Vin ii.318 (Bdhgh.); A iii.383; Bu xiii.29. -- akaṇḍaka free from thieves, safe, secure PvA 161. Kaṇḍarā
Kaṇḍarā
(f.) sinew, tendon Vin i.91, 322 (in cpd. kaṇ- ḍara -- cchinna one whose tendons (of the feet) have been cut); Kvu 23, 31; Vism 253, 254 (where KhA 49 reads miñja). Kaṇḍita
Kaṇḍita
at J i.155 is misprint; read: kaṇḍam assa atthī ti kaṇḍī taŋ kaṇḍinaŋ. Kaṇḍin
Kaṇḍin
(adj.) having a shaft inserted, appl. to the head of an arrow (salla) J i.155; (m.) an archer ibid. Kaṇḍu
Kaṇḍu1
(f.) [perhaps from *kanad to bite, scratch; cp. Sk. kandara, Gr. knada/ llw to bite, knw/dwn, knw/dalon, etc., Sk. kaṇḍu m. & f.] the itch, itching, itchy feeling, desire to scratch Vin i.202, 296; J. v.198; Vism 345. kaṇḍuŋ karoti to make or cause to itch J v.198; vineti to allay the itch, to scratch J v.199. -- (fig.) worldly attachment, irritation caused by the lusts, in "kaṇḍuŋ saŋhanti" (as result of jhāna) A iv. 437.

-- uppala a kind of lotus -- blossom Dāvs iv.48; -- paṭicchādi an "itch -- cloth," i. e. a covering allowed to the bhikkhus when suffering from itch or other cutaneous disease Vin i.296, 297; iv.171, 172. -- rogin (adj.) suffering from the itch Khus 105. Kaṇḍu˚
Kaṇḍu˚2
[ = kaṇḍa in compn] an arrow -- shot (as measure), in sahassa -- kaṇḍu sata -- bheṇḍu Th 1, 164=J ii.334 (but the latter: sata -- bhedo), expld at Th 1, 164n by sahassakaṇḍo sahassa [sata?] -- bhūmako, and at J ii.334 by sahassa -- kaṇḍubbedho ti pāsādo satabhūmiko ahosi; in preceding lines the expression used is "sahassa -- kaṇḍagamanaŋ uccaŋ." Kaṇḍuka
Kaṇḍuka
the itch, itchy feeling, irritation J v.198. Kaṇḍuvati
Kaṇḍuvati
(kandūvati) [Denom. fr. kaṇḍu. Sk. kandū- yati] 1. to itch, to be itchy, to be irritated, to suffer from itch Vin i.205; ii.121; J v.198 (kaṇḍuvāyati); DhA iii.297 (kaṇḍūvantī). -- 2. to scratch, rub, scrape A ii.207; J vi.413; Pug 56. Kaṇḍuvana
Kaṇḍuvana
(nt.) [fr. kaṇḍūvati] 1. itching, itchy feeling DhA i.440; cp. Dhātumañjūsā no. 416 kaṇḍūvana.-> 2. scratching, scraping M i.508; J ii.249 (appl. to bad music). Kaṇḍusa
Kaṇḍusa
(nt.) a strip of cloth used to mark the kaṭhina robe, in ˚karaṇa Vin i.254, and ˚ka ibid. 290. Kaṇḍūyana
Kaṇḍūyana
(nt.) [See kaṇḍuvana] the itch J v.69. Kaṇḍolikā
Kaṇḍolikā
(f.) a wicker -- basket or stand Vin ii.114, 143 (see Vin. Texts iii.86). Kaṇṇa
Kaṇṇa
[Vedic karṇa, orig. not associated with hearing, therefore not used to signify the sense (sota is used instead; cp. akkhi>cakkhu), but as "projection" to *ker, from which also Sk. śṛṇga horn. Cp. Gr. ko/rus helmet; Lat. cornu & cervus = E. corner, horn & hart. Further related Sk. aśri (caturaśraḥ four -- cornered), śaṣkuli auditory passage; Lat. ācer=Gr. a)/kris, a)/kanos, o)cu/s; Ger. ecke; also Sk. śūla & P. koṇa] 1. a corner, an angle Vin i.48, 286; J i.73; iii.42; v.38; vi.519; PvA 74; DhA ii.178; Dāvs ii.111. -- cīvara˚ the edge of the garment Vism 389. Freq. in cpd. catu˚ (catukkaṇṇa) four -- cornered, square, as Ep. of Niraya Nd2 304iii=Pv i.1013 (expld by catu -- koṇa). Also of cloth Vin ii.228; J i.426; iv.250. -- 2. the ear Sn 608; J i.146, 194; DhA i.390 (dasā˚). Freq. in phrase kaṇṇaŋ chindati (to cut off the ear) as punishment, e. g. A i.47. -- loc. kaṇṇe in the ear, i. e. in a low tone, in a whisper DhA i.166. -- 3. the tip of a spoon J. i.347. -- assakaṇṇa N. of a tree (see under assa3).

-- alankāra an ornament for the ear J v.409. -- āyata (mutta) (a pearl) inserted in the lobe of the ear J ii. 275, 276. -- kita (should it be kaṇha˚? cp. paŋsukita, malaggakita; kita = kata) spoiled, rusty, blunt Vin ii.115 (of needles); dirty, mouldy Vin i.48 (of a floor); ii.209 (of walls); stained, soiled Vin iv.281 (of robes). -- gūthaka the cerumen, wax, of the ear, Vin ii.134; Sn 197= J i.146. -- cālana shaking the ears J iii.99. -- cūḷa the root of the ear J vi.488; as ˚cūlikā at J ii.276; Vism 255; DhA iv.13. -- chidda (nt.) the orifice of the ear, the outer auditory passage (cp. sūci -- chidda eye of the needle) Vin iii.39; J ii.244, 261. -- chinna one whose ears are cut off Vin i.322; Kvu 31. -- cheda cutting or tearing off of the ear Miln 197, 290. -- jappaka one who whispers into the ear, one who tells secretly, also a gossip Vin ii.98; sa˚ whispered into the ear, appl. to a method of taking votes ibid. Cp. upakaṇṇakajappin. -- jappana whispering into the ear D i.11; DA i.97. -- tela anointing the ear with medicinal oil D i.12 (expld at DA i.98, where reading is ˚telanaŋ). -- nāsa ear & nose J ii.117; Miln 5 (˚chinna). -- patta the lobe of the ear J v.463. As ˚panta at ThA 211. -- pāli=˚patta Th 2, 259 (expld by ˚panta). -- piṭṭhī the upper part or top of the ear DhA i.394. -- puccha the "tail" or flap of the ear Sdhp 168. -- bila orifice of the ear Vism 195. -- bheri a sort of drum. Cp. ix.24. -- mala "ear -- dirt," ear -- wax, in ˚haraṇī, an instrument for removing the wax from the ear Vin ii.135. -- mālā a garland from corner to corner (of a temple) Dāvs ii.111. -- muṇḍa 1. (adj.) one whose ears have been shorn or clipped Pv ii.1218 (of the dog of Hell, cp. PvA 152 chinnakaṇṇa). -- 2. (˚ka) "with blunt corners," N. of the first one of the fabulous 7 Great Lakes (satta -- mahāsarā) in the Himavant, enumd at J v.415; Vism 416; DA i.164. -- mūla the root of the ear, the ear in gen. J i.335; iii.124; loc. fig in a low tone DhA i.173; near, near by DhA ii.8 (mama k.). -- roga a disease of the ear DhsA 340. -- vallī the lobe of the ear Mhvs 25, 94. -- vijjhana perforating the ear, ˚mangala the ceremony of ear -- piercing DhA ii.87; cp. mangala. -- vedha (cp. prec.) ear -- piercing, a quasi religious ceremony on children J v.167. -- sakkhali & ˚ikā the orifice or auditory passage of the ear DhA i.148; DhsA 334, in which latter passage ˚ikaŋ paharati means to impinge on the ear (said of the wind); ˚ikaŋ bhindati (=bhindanto viya paharati) to break the ear (with unpleasant words) DhA ii.178 (T. sankhaliŋ, v. l. sakkhaliŋ). -- sankhali a small chain attached to the ear with a small ornament suspended from it J v.438. -- sandhovika washing the ears A v.202. -- sukha 1. (adj.) pleasant to the ear, agreable D i.4=M i.179, 268 =A ii.209≈; Miln 1; DA i.75=DhsA 397; -- 2. (nt.) pleasant speech J ii.187; v.167; opp. kaṇṇa -- sūla. -- sutta an ornamental string hanging from the ear Vin ii.143. -- suttaka a string from corner to corner, a clothes -- line Vin i.286. -- sūla 1. a piercing pain (lit. stake) in the ear, ear -- ache VvA 243. -- 2. what is disagreeable to hear, harsh speech DhsA 397 (opp. ˚sukha).

-- sota the auditory passage, the ear (+ nāsika -- sotāni, as ubho sotāni, i. e. heṭṭhā & uparimā) D i.106 = Sn p. 108; A iv.86; J ii.359; Miln 286, 357; DhA ii.72. -- 180 -- Kaṇṇaka
Kaṇṇaka
(& ˚ika) (adj.) [fr. kaṇṇa] having corners or ears ( -- ˚); f. ˚ikā Vin ii.137; J ii.185. -- kāḷa -- kaṇṇika see under kāḷa. Kaṇṇavant
Kaṇṇavant
(adj.) [fr. kaṇṇa] having an (open) ear, i. e. clever, sharp J ii.261 ( = kaṇṇachiddaŋ pana na kassaci n'atthi C.). Kaṇṇikā
Kaṇṇikā
(f.) [cp. kaṇṇaka & Sk. karṇikā] 1. an ornament for the ear, in ˚lakkhaṇa: see below. -- 2. the pericarp of a lotus J i.152, 183; v.416; Miln 361; Vism 124 (paduma˚); VvA 43. -- 3. the corner of the upper story of a palace or pagoda, house -- top J i.201; iii.146, 318, 431, 472; DhA i.77 (kūṭāgāra˚); DA i.43; VvA 304; Bdhd 92. -- 4. a sheaf in the form of a pinnacle DhA i.98. -- In cpds. kaṇṇika˚.

-- baddha bound into a sheaf; fig. of objects of thoughts DhA i.304. -- maṇḍala part of the roof of a house J. iii.317; DhA iii.66; vi.178. -- rukkha a tree or log, used to form the top of a house J i.201 = DhA i.269. -- lakkhaṇa the art of telling fortune by marks on ornaments of the ear, or of the house -- top D i.9 (=pilandhana -- k˚ pi geha -- k˚ pi vasena DA i.94). Kaṇṇikāra
Kaṇṇikāra
see kaṇikāra. Kanha
Kanha
(adj.) [cp. Vedic kṛṣṇa, Lith. kérszas] dark, black, as attr. of darkness, opposed to light, syn. with kāḷa (q. v. for etym.); opp. sukka. In general it is hard to separate the lit. and fig. meanings, an ethical implication is to be found in nearly all cases (except 1.). The contrast with sukka (brightness) goes through all applications, with ref. to light as well as quality. I. Of the sense of sight: k -- sukka dark & bright (about black & white see nīla & seta), forming one system of coloursensations (the colourless, as distinguished from the red -- green and yellow -- blue systems). As such enumd in connection with quasi definition of vision, together with nīla, pīta, lohita, mañjeṭṭha at D ii.328 = M i.509 sq. =ii.201 (see also mañjeṭṭha). -- II. (objective). 1. of dark (black), poisonous snakes: kaṇhā (f.) J ii.215 (=kāḷa -- sappa C); ˚sappa J i.336; iii.269, 347; v.446; Vism 664 (in simile); Miln 149; PvA 62; ˚sīsā with black heads A iii.241 (kimī). -- 2. of (an abundance of) smooth, dark (=shiny) hair (cp. in meaning E. gloom: gloss=black: shiny), as Ep. of King Vasudeva Pv ii.61, syn. with Kesavā (the Hairy, cp. *)apo/llwn *ou)lai_os Samson, etc., see also siniddha -- , nīla -- , kāla -- kesa). sukaṇha -- sīsa with very dark hair J v.205, also as sukaṇha -- kaṇha -- sīsa J v.202 (cp. susukāḷa). ˚jaṭi an ascetic with dark & glossy hair J vi.507, cp. v.205 sukaṇhajaṭila. ˚añjana glossy polish J v.155 (expld as sukhumakaṇha -- lom' ācitattā). -- 3. of the black trail of fire in ˚vattanin (cp. Vedic kṛṣṇa -- vartaniŋ agniŋ R. V. viii.23, 19) S i.69=J iii.140 (cp. iii.9); J v.63. -> 4. of the black (fertile) soil of Avanti "kaṇh -- uttara" black on the surface Vin i.195. -- III. (Applied). 1. ˚pakkha the dark (moonless) half of the month, during which the spirits of the departed suffer and the powers of darkness prevail PvA 135, cp. Pv iii.64, see also pakkha1 3. -- 2. attr. of all dark powers and anything belonging to their sphere, e. g. of Māra Sn 355, 439 (= Namuci); of demons, goblins (pisācā) D i.93 with ref. to the "black -- born" ancestor of the Kaṇhāyanas (cp. Dh i.263 kāḷa -- vaṇṇa), cp. also kāḷa in ˚sunakha, the Dog of Purgatory PvA 152. -- 3. of a dark, i. e. miserable, unfortunate birth, or social condition D iii.81 sq. (brāhmano va sukko vaṇṇo, kaṇho añño vaṇṇo). ˚abhijāti a special species of men according to the doctrine of Gosāla DA i.162; A iii.383 sq. ˚abhijātika "of black birth," of low social grade D iii.251=A. iii.384; Sn 563; cp. Th 1, 833 and J.P.T.S. 1893, 11; in the sense of "evil disposition" at J v.87 (expld as kāḷaka -- sabhāva). -- 4. of dark, evil actions or qualities: ˚dhamma A v.232=Dh 87; D iii.82; Sn 967; Pug 30; Miln 200, 337; ˚paṭipadā J i.105, and ˚magga the evil way A v.244, 278; ˚bhāvakara causing a low (re -- )birth J iv.9 (+ pāpa -- kammāni), and in same context as dhamma combd with ˚sukka at A iv. 33; Sn 526 (where kaṇhā˚ for kaṇha˚): Miln 37; ˚kamma "black action" M i.39; ˚vipāka black result, 4 kinds of actions and 4 results, viz. kaṇha˚, sukka˚, kaṇha -- sukka˚, akaṇha -- asukka˚ D iii.230=M i.389 sq.=A ii.230 sq.; Nett 232. akaṇha 1. not dark, i. e. light, in ˚netta with bright eyes, Ep. of King Pingala -- netta J ii.242 in contrast with Māra (although pingala -- cakkhu is also Ep. of Māra or his representatives, cp. J v.42; Pv ii.41). -- 2. not evil, i. e. good A ii.230, 231. -- atikaṇha very dark Vin iv.7; sukaṇha id. see above ii.2. -- 181 -- Kata
Kata
(& sometimes kaṭa) [pp. of karoti] done, worked, made. Extremely rare as v. trs. in the common meaning of E. make, Ger. machen, or Fr. faire (see the cognate kapp and jan, also uppajjati & vissajjati); its proper sphere of application is either ethical (as pāpaŋ, kusalaŋ, kammaŋ: cp. ii.1 b) or in such combinations, where its original meaning of "built, prepared, worked out" is still preserved (cp. i.1 a nagara, and 2 a).

I. As verb -- determinant (predicative). -- 1. in verbal function (Pass.) with nominal determination "done, made" (a) in predicative (epithetic) position: Dh 17 (pāpaŋ me kataŋ evil has been done by me), 68 (tañ ca kammaŋ kataŋ), 150 (aṭṭhīnaŋ nagaraŋ kataŋ a city built of bones, of the body), 173 (yassa pāpaŋ kataŋ kammaŋ). -- (b) in absolute (prothetic) position, often with expression of the agent in instr. D i.84 = 177=M i.40=Sn p. 16 (in formula kataŋ karanīyaŋ, etc., done is what had to be done, cp. arahant ii.A.); Vin iii.72 (kataŋ mayā kalyāṇaŋ akataŋ mayā pāpaŋ); Pv i.55 (amhākaŋ katā pūjā done to us is homage). -- So also in composition (˚ -- ), e. g. (nahāpakehi) ˚parikammatā the preparations (being) finished (by the barbers) J vi.145; (tena) ˚paricaya the acquaintance made (with him) VvA 24; PvA 4; (tattha) ˚paricayatā the acquaintance (with that spot) VvA 331; (tesaŋ) ˚pubba done before D ii.75=A iv.17; (kena) J vi.575; ˚matta (made) drunk Th 1, 199; (cira) ˚saŋsagga having (long) been in contact with, familiar J iii.63 (and a˚). 2. in adj. (med -- passive) function (kaṭa & kata); either passive: made, or made of; done by= being like, consisting of; or medio -- reflexive: one who has done, having done; also "with" (i. e. this or that action done). -- (a) in pregnant meaning: prepared, cultivated, trained, skilled; kaṭ -- âkaṭa prepared & natural Vin i.206 (of yūsa); akaṭa natural ibid., not cultivated (of soil) Vin i.48= ii.209; DA i.78, 98; untrained J iii.57, 58. -- ˚atta selfpossessed, disciplined J vi.296; ˚indiya trained in his senses Th 1, 725; ˚ûpāsana skilled, esp. in archery M i.82; S i.62; A ii.48=iv.429; S i.99; J iv.211; Miln 352, ˚kamma practised, skilled J v.243; of a servant S i.205 (read āse for ase), of a thief A iii.102 (cp. below ii.1 a); ˚phaṇa having (i. e. with) its hood erected, of a snake J vi.166; ˚buddhi of trained mind, clever J iii.58; a˚ ibid.; ˚mallaka of made -- up teeth, an artificial back -- scratcher Vin ii.316; a˚ not artificially made, the genuine article Vin ii.106; ˚yogga trained serviceable S i.99; a˚ useless S i.98. ˚rūpa done naturally, spontaneously J v.317 (expld by ˚jāniya; ˚sabhāva); ˚veṇī having (i. e. with) the hair done up into a chignon J v.431; ˚hattha (one) who has exercised his hands, dexterous, skilful, esp. in archery M i.82; S i.62, 98; ii.266; A ii.48; J iv.211,; v.41; vi.448; Miln 353; DhA i.358; a˚ unskilled, awkward S i.98; su˚ well -- trained J v 41 (cp. ˚upāsana), ˚hatthika an artificial or toy -- elephant J vi.551. -- (b) in ordinary meaning: made or done; ˚kamma the deed done (in a former existence) J i.167; VvA 252; PvA 10; ˚piṭṭha made of flour (dough) PvA 16 (of a doll); ˚bhāva the performance or happening of J iii.400; Mhbv 33; ˚sanketa (one who has made an agreement) J v.436 -- (c) with adverbial determination (su˚, du˚; cp. dūrato, puro, atta, sayaŋ, & ii.2 c): sukata well laid out, of a road J vi.293, well built, of a cart Sn 300=304; J iv.395, well done, i. e. good A i.102 (˚kamma -- kārin doing good works). -- dukkata badly made, of a robe Vin iv.279 (ṭ), badly done, i. e. evil A i.102 (˚kamma kārin); sukata -- dukkata good & evil (˚kammāni deeds) D i.27= 55=S iv.351; Miln 5, 25. 3. as noun (nt.) kataŋ that which has been done, the deed. -- (a) absolute: J iii.26 (katassa appaṭikāraka not reciprocating the deed); v.434 (kataŋ anukaroti he imitates what has been done) kat -- âkataŋ what has been done & left undone Vin iv.211; katāni akatāni ca deeds done & not done Dh 50. -- (b) with adv. determination (su˚, du˚): sukataŋ goodness (in moral sense) Sn 240; Dh 314; dukkataŋ badness Vin i.76; ii.106; Dh 314; dukkatakārin doing wrong Sn 664.

II. As noun -- determinant (attributive) in composition (var. applications & meanings). -- 1. As 1st pt. of compd: Impersonal, denoting the result or finishing of that which is implied in the object with ref. to the act or state resulting, i. e. "so and so made or done"; or personal, denoting the person affected by or concerned with the act. The lit. translation would be "having become one who has done" (act.: see a), or "to whom has been done" (pass.: see b). -- (a) medio -- active. Temporal: the action being done, i. e. "after." The noun -- determinates usually bear a relation to time, especially to meal -- times, as kat -- anna -- kicca having finished his meal Dāvs i.59; ˚bhatta -- kicca after the meal J iv.123; PvA 93; ˚purebhatta -- kicca having finished the duties of the morning DA i.45 sq.; SnA 131 sq.; ˚pātarāsa breakfast J i.227; DhA i.117, a˚ before br. A iv.64; ˚pātarāsa -- bhatta id. J vi.349; ˚ânumodana after thanking (for the meal) J i.304; ˚bhatt'ânumodana after expressing satisfaction with the meal PvA 141. In the same application: kat -- okāsa having made its appearance, of kamma Vv 329 (cp. VvA 113); PvA 63; ˚kamma ( -- cora) (a thief) who has just "done the deed," i. e. committed a theft J iii.34; Vism 180 (katakammā corā & akata˚ thieves who have finished their "job" & those who have not); DhA ii.38 (corehi katakammaŋ the job done by the th.), cp. above i.2 a; ˚kāla "done their time," deceased, of Petas J iii.164 (pete kālakate); PvA 29, cp. kāla; ˚cīvara after finishing his robe Vin i.255, 265; ˚paccuggamana having gone forth to meet J iii. 93. ˚paṇidhāna from the moment of his making an earnest resolve (to become a Buddha) VvA 3; ˚pariyosita finished, ready, i. e. after the end was made VvA 250; ˚buddha -- kicca after he had done the obligations of a Buddha VvA 165, 319; DA i.2; ˚maraṇa after dying, i. e. dead PvA 29; ˚massu -- kamma after having his beard done J v.309 (see note to ii.1 b). -- Qualitative: with ethical import, the state resulting out of action, i. e. of such habit, or "like, of such character." The qualification is either made by kamma, deed, work, or kicca, what can be or ought to be done, or any other specified action, as ˚pāpa -- kamma one who has done wrong DhA i.360 (& a˚); ˚karaṇīya one who has done all that could be done, one who is in the state of perfection (an Arahant), in formula arahaŋ khīṇ'āsavo vusitavā ohitabhāro (cp. above i.1 b & arahant ii.A) M i.4, 235; It 38; Miln 138; ˚kicca having performed his obligations, perfected, Ep. of an Arahant, usually in combn with anāsava S i.47, 178; Dh 386; Pv ii.615; Th 2, 337, as adj.: kata -- kiccāni hi arahato indriyāni Nett 20; ˚kiccatā the perfection of Arahantship Miln 339. -- With other determinations: -- āgasa one who has done evil Sdhp 294. -- âdhikāra having exerted oneself, one who strives after the right path J i.56; Miln 115. -- âparādha guilty, a transgressor J iii.42. -- âbhinihāra (one) who has formed the resolution (to become a Buddha) J i.2; DhA i.135. -- âbhinivesa (one) who studies intently, or one who has made a strong determination J i.110 (& a˚). -- ussāha energetic Sdhp 127. -- kalyāṇa in passage kata -- kalyāno kata -- kusalo katabhīruttāṇo akata -- pāpo akata -- luddho (luddo) [: ˚thaddho It] akata -- kibbiso having done good, of good character, etc. A ii.174 = Vin iii.72=It 25=DhsA 383; PvA 174; also Pass. to whom something good has been done J i.137; iii.12; Pv ii.99; akata -- kalyāṇa a man of bad actions It 25; Pv ii.79. -- kibbisa a guilty person M i.39; Vin iii.72 (a˚), of beings tormented in Purgatory Pv iv.77; PvA 59. -- kusala a good man: see ˚kalyāṇa. -- thaddha hard -- hearted, unfeeling, cruel: see ˚kalyāṇa. -- nissama untiring, valiant, bold J v.243. -- parappavāda practised in disputing with others DA i.117. -- pāpa an evil -- doer It 25; Pv ii.79 (+ akata -- kalyāṇa); PvA 5; a˚: see ˚kalyāṇa. -- puñña one who has done good deeds, a good man D ii.144; Dh 16, 18, 220; Pv iii.52; Miln 129; PvA 5, 176; a˚ one who has not done good (in previous lives) Miln 250; VvA 94. -- puññatā the fact of having done good deeds D iii.276 (pubbe in former births); A ii.31; Sn 260, cp. KhA 132, 230; J ii.114. -- bahukāra having done much favour, obliging Dāvs iv.39. -- bhīruttāṇa one who has offered protection to the fearful: see ˚kalyāṇa. -- bhūmikamma one who has laid the ground -- work (of sanctification) Miln 352. -- ludda cruel M iii.165; a˚ gentle Nett 180; cp ˚kalyāṇa. -- vināsaka (one) who has caused ruin J i.467. -- vissāsa trusting, confiding J i.389. -- ssama painstaking, taking trouble Sdhp 277 (and a˚). -- (b) medio -- passive: The state as result of an action, which affected the person concerned with the action (reflexive or passive), or "possessed of, afflicted or affected with." In this application it is simply periphrastic for the ordinary Passive. -- Note. In the case of the noun being incapable of functioning as verb (when primary), the object in question is specified by ˚kamma or ˚kicca, both of which are then only supplementary to the initial kata˚, e. g. kata -- massu -- kamma "having had the beard ( -- doing) done," as diff. fr. secondary nouns (i. e. verb -- derivations). e. g. kat -- âbhiseka "having had the anointing done." -- In this application: ˚citta -- kamma decorated, variegated DhA i.192; ˚daṇḍa -- kamma afflicted with punishment (=daṇḍāyita punished) Vin i.76; ˚massu -- kamma with trimmed beard, after the beard -- trimming J v.309 (cp. J iii.11 & karana). -- Various combinations: katañjalin with raised hands, as a token of veneration or supplication Sn 1023; Th 2, 482; J i.17=Bu 24, 27; PvA 50, 141; VvA 78. -- attha one who has received benefits J i.378. -- ânuggaha assisted, aided J ii.449; VvA 102. -- âbhiseka anointed, consecrated Mhvs 26, 6. -- ûpakāra assisted, befriended J i.378; PvA 116. -- okāsa one who has been given permission, received into audience, or permitted to speak Vin i.7; D ii.39, 277; Sn 1030, 1031 (˚âva˚); J v.140; vi.341; Miln 95. -- jātihingulika done up, adorned with pure vermilion J iii.303. -- nāmadheyya having received a name, called J v.492. -- paṭisanthāra having been received kindly J vi.160; DhA i.80. -- pariggaha being taken to wife, married to (instr.) PvA 161 (& a˚). -- paritta one on whom a protective spell has been worked, charm -- protected Miln 152. -- bhaddaka one to whom good has been done PvA 116. -- sakkāra honoured, revered J v.353; Mhvs 9, 8 (su˚). -- sangaha one who has taken part in the redaction of the Scriptures Mhvs 5, 106. -- sannāha clad in armour DhA i.358. -- sikkha (having been) trained Miln 353. -- 2. As 2nd pt. of compd: Denoting the performance of the verbal notion with ref. to the object affected by it, i. e. simply a Passive of the verb implied in the determinant, with emphasis of the verb -- notion: "made so & so, used as, reduced to" (garukata=garavita). -> (a) with nouns (see s. v.) e. g., anabhāva -- kata, kavi˚, kāla -- vaṇṇa˚ (reduced to a black colour) Vin i.48= ii.209, tāl'āvatthu˚, pamāṇa˚, bahuli˚, yāni˚, sankhār'ûpekkhā˚, etc. -- (b) with adjectives, e. g. garu˚, bahu˚. -- (c) with adverbial substitutes, e. g. atta˚, para˚ (paraŋ˚), sacchi˚, sayaŋ, etc. -- 182 -- Kataka
Kataka
(nt.) [fr. kantati2] a scrubber, used after a bath Vin ii.129, 143; cp. Vin. Texts ii.318. Kataññu
Kataññu
(adj.) [cp. Sk. kṛtajña] lit. knowing, i. e. acknowledging what has been done (to one), i. e. grateful often in combn with katavedin grateful and mindful of benefits S ii. 272; A i.87 = Pug 26; Vv 8127; Sdhp 509, 524. akataññu 1. ungrateful S i.225; J iii.26 (=kata -- guṇaŋ ajānanto C.), 474; iv.124; PvA 116; Bdhd 81. -- 2. (separate akata -- ññu) knowing the Uncreated, i. e. knowing Nibbāna Dh 97, 383; DhA ii.188; iv.139. -- akataññu -- rūpa (& ˚sambhava) of ungrateful nature J iv.98, 99. Kataññutā
Kataññutā
(f.) [abstr. fr. last] gratefulness (defined at KhA 144 as katassa jānanatā) Sn 265; J i.122 (T. ˚nā, v. l. ˚tā); iii.25; Pv ii.97; VvA 63; Sdhp 497, 540. In combn with kataveditā S ii.272; A i.61; ii.226, 229. kataññū -- kataveditā J iii.492. -- akataññutā ungratefulness, in combn with akataveditā A i.61; iii.273; J v.419; as one of the 4 offences deserving of Niraya A ii.226. Katatta
Katatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. kata, cp. Sk. kṛtatvaŋ] the doing of, performance of, only in abl. katattā D ii.213; A i.56; J iii.128; Dhs 431, 654; SnA 356; DhA iii.154; iv.142. Used adverbially in meaning of "owing to, on account of" Miln 275; DhsA 262; Mhvs 3, 40. -- akatattā through non -- performance of, in absence or in default of A. i.56; PvA 69, 154. Katana
Katana
(nt.) [fr. kata] a bad deed, injuring, doing evil (cp. kaṭana) J iv.42 (yam me akkhāsi . . . katanaŋ kataŋ), cp. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1893, 15. Katama
Katama
(adj.) [cp. Vedic katama, interr. pron. with formation of num. ord., in function = katara, cp. antama > antara, Lat. dextimus>dexter] which, which one (of two or more) Vin ii.89; M i.7; J i.172; Miln 309; PvA 27. In some cases merely emphatic for ko, e. g. Vin i.30 (katamena maggena āgato?); D i.197 (katamo so atta -- paṭilābho?); J i.97; Sn 995; Miln 51. -- instr. katamena (scil. maggena) adv. by which way, how? Miln 57, 58. Katara
Katara
(adj.) [Vedic katara, interr. pron. with formation of num. ord., cp. Gr. po/teros, Lat. uter] which one (of a certain number, usually of two) J i.4; PvA 119. Often only emphatic for ko, e. g. J i.298 (kataraŋ upaddavaŋ na kareyya), and used uninflected in cpds., as katara -- geha J iii.9; ˚gandhaŋ J vi.336; ˚divasaŋ J ii.251; ˚nagarato (from what city) DhA i.390; ˚nāma (kataraŋnāma, adj.) (of what name) ibid. -- katarasmiŋ magge in which way, how? J iv.110. Katavedin
Katavedin
(adj.) [kata + vedin, see kataññu] mindful, grateful S i.225; Pug 26; J i.424; ii.26. Kataveditā
Kataveditā
(f.) [abstr. fr. last] gratefulness: see Kataññutā. Katāvin
Katāvin
(adj. -- n.) [secondary formation fr. kata] one who has done (what could be done), used like katakicca to denote one who has attained Arahantship S i.14; Miln 264. Kati
Kati
(indecl.) [interr. pron.; used like Lat. quot. Already Vedic.] how many? Vin i.83 (k. sikkhāpadāni), 155; S i.3 (˚sangâtiga having overcome how many attachments? ), 70; Sn 83, 960, 1018; Ps ii.72; Miln 78; DhA i.7, 188; PvA 74. Katikā
Katikā
(f.) [to katheti or karoti?] 1. agreement, contract, pact Vin i.153 (T. kātikā), 309; J vi.71; Miln 171, 360. -- 2. talking, conversation, talk (adhammikā k., cp. kathikā & kathā) J ii.449. -- katikaŋ karoti to make an arrangement or agreement Vin iii.104, 220, 230; J. i.81; iv.267; DhA i.91; VvA 46. In cpds. katika˚, e. g. ˚vatta observance of an agreement, ˚ŋ karoti to be faithful to a pact Dh i.8; ˚ŋ bhindati to break an agreement J vi.541; ˚saṇṭhāna the entering of an agreement Vin ii.76, 208: iii.160. Katipaya
Katipaya
(adj.) [cp. Sk. katipaya] some, several; a few (in cpds. or in pl.) J i.230, 487; iii.280, 419; iv.125; v.162; Pv ii.920 ( = appake only a few); DhA i.94 (very few); PvA 46. In sg. little, insignificant Vv 5320 (=appikā f.). ˚vāre a few times, a few turns J v.132; vi.52; PvA 135; Mhbv 3. -- 183 -- Katipāhan
Katipāhan
(adv.) [katipaya + ahan, contracted, see aha2] (for) a few days Vin iii.14; J i.152, 298, 466; ii.38; iii.48; iv.147; Mhvs 7, 38; PvA 145, 161; VvA 222. katipāhena (instr.) within a few days Mhvs 17, 41; DhA i.344; PvA 13, 161. katipāh'accayena after (the lapse of) a few days J i.245; DhA i.175; PvA 47. Katima
Katima
[num. ord. fr. kati], f. katimī in k. pakkhassa which (of many other) day of the half -- month Vin i.117. Kativassa
Kativassa
(adj.) [kati + vassa] 1. (having) how many years, how old? J v.331. -- 2. (having had) how many rainy seasons (in the bhikkhu's career) of how many years' seniority? Vin i.86; Ud 59; Miln 28; DhA i.37. Katividha
Katividha
(adj.) [kati + vidha, for Vedic katidhā] of how many kinds Vism 84. Kate
Kate
(adv.) [loc. of kata] for the sake of, on behalf of; with acc. maŋ k. J iv.14; with gen. maŋsassa k. J v.500. Katta
Katta
[pp. of kantati2; cp. Sk. kṛtta] is represented in Pali by kanta2; katta being found only in cpd. pari˚. Kattabba
Kattabba
(adj.) [grd. of karoti] 1. to be done, to be made or performed; that which might or could be done Dh 53; J i.77, 267; v.362. -- 2. (nt.) that which is to be done, obligation, duty Th 1, 330; J ii.154; v.402; DhA i.211. -- akattabba (adj.) not to be done J iii.131; v.147; (nt.) that which ought not to be done J v.402. kattabb' âkattabba to be done and not to be done J i.387. kattabba -- yuttaka 1. (adj.) fit or proper to be done DhA i.13. -- 2. (nt.) duty, obligation J iii.9; vi.164; DhA i.180; (the last) duties towards the deceased J i.431. -- Cp. kātabba. Kattabbaka
Kattabbaka
(nt.) [fr. last] task, duty Th 1, 330. Kattabbatā
Kattabbatā
(f.) [fr. kattabba] fitness, duty, that which is to be done J ii. 179 (iti -- ˚āya because I had to do it thus). Kattar
Kattar
[n. ag. fr. karoti, cp. Sk. kartṛ] one who makes or creates, a maker, doer; in foll. construction. I. Dependent. Either in verb -- function with acc., as n. agent to all phrases with karoti e. g. pañhaŋ karoti to put a question, pañhaŋ kattā one who puts a question; or in n. function with gen., e. g. mantānaŋ kattāro the authors of the Mantas, or in cpd. rāja -- kattāro makers of kings. -- II. Dependent. as n. kattā the doer: kattā hoti no bhāsitā he is a man of action, and not of words. -- 1. (indef.) one who does anything (with acc.) A i.103; ii.67; v.347, 350 sq.; (with gen.) J i.378; iii.136 (one who does evil, in same meaning at iii.26, C. akataññū, cp. J.P.T.S. 1893, 15: not to kṛt!); iv.98 (expld as kata by C); v.258; Miln 25, 296; Bdhd 85 sq. -- 2. an author, maker, creator D i.18 (of Brahmā: issaro, k., nimmātā), 104 (mantānaŋ); A ii.102; Dh i.111. -- 3. an officer of a king, the king's messenger J v.220 ( = 225); vi.259, 268, 302, 313, 492. Note. At J v.225 & vi.302 the voc. is katte (of a -- decl.), cp. also nom. ˚katta for ˚kattā in salla -- katta. -- 4. as t.t.g. N. of the instr. case VvA 97; Kacc 136, 143, 277. Kattara
Kattara
(adj.) (only˚ -- ) [cp. Sk. kṛtvan (?), in diff. meaning] ˚daṇḍa a walking -- stick or staff (of an ascetic) Vin i.188; ii.76 = 208 sq.; iii.160; J i.9; v.132; vi.52, 56, 520; Vism 91, 125, 181. ˚yaṭṭhi=prec. J ii.441; DA i.207; iii.140. ˚ratha an old (?) chariot J iii.299. ˚suppa a winnowing basket Vin i.269=DhA i.174 (˚e pakkhipitvā sankāra -- kūṭe chaḍḍehi). Kattari & ˚ī
Kattari
& ˚ī (f.) [to kantati2] scissors, shears J iii.298, with ref. to the "shears" of a crab, "as with scissors": cp. Vin. Texts iii.138 (see next). Kattarikā
Kattarikā
(f.) [fr. last] scissors, or a knife Vin ii.134; J. i.223. Kattikā
Kattikā
(f.) (& ˚kattika) [cp. Sk. kṛttikā f. pl. the Pleiades & BSk. karthika] N. of a month (Oct. -- Nov.), during which the full moon is near the constellation of Pleiades. It is the last month of the rainy season, terminating on the full moon day of Kattikā (kattika -- puṇṇamā). This season is divided into 5 months: Āsāḷha, Sāvaṇa, Bhaddara (Poṭṭhapāda), Assayuja, Kattikā; the month Assayuja is also called pubba -- kattikā, whereas the fifth, K., is also known as pacchima -- kattikā; both are comprised in the term k. -- dvemāsika. Bhikkhus retiring for the first 3 months of the Vassa (rainy season) are kattika -- temāsikā, if they include the 4th, they are k. -- cātumāsikā. The full moon of Assayuja is termed k. -- temāsinī; that of Kattika is k. -- cātumāsinī. See Vinaya passages & cp. nakkhatta. -- Nett 143 (kattiko, v. l. kattikā).

-- cātumāsinī see above Vin iii.263. -- coraka a thief who in the month of K., after the distribution of robes, attacks bhikkhus Vin iii.262. -- chaṇa a festival held at the end of Lent on the full moon of pubba -- kattikā, and coinciding with the Pavāraṇā J i.433; ii.372; v.212 sq.; Mhvs 17, 17. -- temāsi ( -- puṇṇamā) (the full moon) of pubbakattikā Vin iii.261; Mhvs 17, 1 (˚puṇṇamāsī). -- māsa the month K. J ii.372; Mhvs 12, 2 (kattike māse). -- sukkapakkha the bright fortnight of K. Mhvs 17, 64. Kattu˚
Kattu˚
1. base of inf. kattuŋ (of karoti), in compds ˚kamyatā willingness to do something Vbh 208; Vism 320, 385; DhA iii.289; ˚kāma desirous to do Vin ii.226. ˚kāmatā desire to do or to perform Vism 466; VvA 43. -- 2. base of kattar in compn. Kattha
Kattha
(adv.) [der. fr. interr. base ka˚ (kad2), whereas Sk. kutra is der. fr. base ku˚, cp. kuttha] where? where to, whither? Vin i.83, 107; ii.76; D i.223; Sn 487, 1036; J iii.76; Pv ii.916; DhA i.3. -- k. nu kho where then, where I wonder? D i.215 sq., PvA 22 (with Pot.) -- katthaci(d) (indef.) anywhere, at some place or other J i.137; v.468; wherever, in whatever place Miln 366; PvA 284; KhA 247; J iii.229; iv.9, 45; as katthacid eva J. iv. 92; PvA 173. Sometimes doubled katthaci katthaci in whatsoever place J iv.341. -- na k. nowhere M. i.424; Miln 77; VvA 14.

-- ṭhita fig. in what condition or state? D ii.241 (corresp. with ettha); J iv.110. -- vāsa in what residence? Sn 412. -- vāsika residing where? J ii.128, 273. Katthati
Katthati
[cp. Sk. katthate, etym. unexpld] to boast Sn 783 (ppr. med. akatthamāna). Cp. pavikatthita. Katthitar
Katthitar
(n. ag. fr. katthati] a boaster Sn 930. Katthin
Katthin
(adj.) [fr. katth] boasting A v.157 (+ vikatthin). Katthu
Katthu
(?) a jackal, in ˚soṇā j. & dogs J vi.538 (for koṭṭhu˚). Kathaŋ
Kathaŋ
(adv.) [cp. Vedic kathaŋ & kathā] dubit. interr. part. 1. how; with ind. pres. PvA 6 (k. puriso paṭilabhati), or with fut. & cond. J i.222; ii.159 (k. tattha gamissāmi); vi.500; PvA 54 (na dassāmi) -- 2. why, for what reason? J iii.81; v.506. Combined with -- ca Vin i.114; ii.83. -- carahi D ii.192. -- nu & -- nu kho Vin ii.26, J iii.99; iv. 339; Nd2 189, see also evaŋ nu kho. -- pana D ii.163. -- su Nd2 189. -- hi J iv.339; DhA i.432. -- hi nāma Vin i.45; ii.105; iii.137; iv.300; all in the same meaning; -- ci (kathañci) scarcely, with difficulty Th 1, 456.

-- kathā "saying how? how?" i. e. doubt, uncertainty, unsettled mind (cp. kaṅkhā); expl. as vicikicchā dukkhe kankhā Nd2 190; D ii.282; Sn 500, 866, 1063, 1088; DhA iv.194; as adj. and at end of cpd. ˚ -- katha, e. g. vigata˚ (in phrase tiṇṇa -- vicikiccha . . . vesārajjappatta) D i.110 = Vin i.12; tiṇṇa˚ (+ visalla) Sn 17, 86, 367. k -- k -- salla "the arrow of doubt" D ii.283 (vicikicchā +). -- kathin having doubts, unsettled, uncertain D ii.287; M i.8; Nd2 191; DhsA 352; a˚ free from doubt, Ep. of Arahant (expld DA i.211: "not saying how and how is this?"); M i.108; It 49; Sn 534, 635, 868, 1064; in phrases tiṇṇa -- vicikiccho viharati akathankathī kusalesu dhammesu D i.71=Pug 59, jhāyī anejo a˚ Dh 414 (: DhA iv.194)=Sn 638. -- kara (adj.) how acting, what doing? k. ahaŋ no nirayam pateyyaŋ ("ti/ poiw_n maka/rios e)/somai") J iv.339; Sn 376; J iv.75; v.148. -- jīvin leading what kind of life? Sn 181. -- dassin holding what views? Sn 848 (see ˚sīla). -- pakāra of what kind Vin i.358; Sn 241 (:kathappakāra). -- paṭipanna going what way, i. e. how acting? D ii.277, 279, 281. -- bhāvita how cultivated or practised? S v.119. -- bhūta "how being," of what sort, what like D ii.139, 158; -- rūpa of what kind? M i.218; A i.249; iii.35; J iii.525. -- vaṇṇa of what appearance, what like? D ii.244. -- vidha what sort of? J v.95, 146; DhsA 305. -- sameta how constituted? Sn 873. -- sīla of what character or conduct? how in his morality? Sn 848 (kathaŋdassī kathaŋsīlo upasanto ti vuccati). -- 184 -- Kathana
Kathana
(nt.) [fr. kath, see katheti] 1. conversing, talking J i.299; iii.459; vi.340. -- 2. telling i. e. answering, solving (a question) J v.66 (pañha˚). -- 3. preaching DhA i.7. -- 4. reciting, narrating Kacc. 130. Cp. kathita. -- akathana not talking or telling J i.420; vi.424; not speaking fr. anger J iv.108; DhA i.440.

-- ākāra, in ˚ŋ karoti to enter into conversation with J vi.413. -- samattha able to speak (of the tongue) J iii.459; able to talk or converse with (saddhiŋ) J vi.340. -- sīla (one) in the habit of talking, garrulous J i.299; a˚ J i.420. Kathala
Kathala
(potsherd) spelling at Vism 261 for kaṭhala. Kathali
Kathali
(metri causâ) = next, in the Uddāna at Vin ii.234 Kathalika
Kathalika
(nt.) [der. uncertain], always in combn pād'- odaka pāda -- pīṭha pāda -- k˚: either a cloth to wipe the feet with after washing them, or a footstool Vin i.9, 47; ii.22 sq., 210, 216. At VvA 8 however with pāda -- pīṭha expld as a footstool (pāda -- ṭhāpana -- yoggaŋ dārukhaṇḍaŋ āsanaŋ). Bdhgh (on CV ii.1.1) expld pādapīṭha as a stool to put the washed foot on, pāda -- kathalika as a stool to put the unwashed foot on, or a cloth to rub the feet with (ghaŋsana).

the meaning "bowl" seems to be preferable to Bdhgh's forced interpretation as "towel." Kathā
Kathā
(f.) [fr. kath to tell or talk, see katheti; nearest synonym is lap, cp. vāc' âbhilāpa & sallāpa] 1. talk, talking, conversation A i.130; PvA 39. So in antarā˚ D i.179; Sn p. 107, 115; cp. sallāpa. Also in tiracchāna˚ low, common speech, comprising 28 kinds of conversational talk a bhikkhu should not indulge in, enumd in full at D i.7 = 178=iii.36 & passim (e. g. S v.419: corr. suddha˚ to yuddha˚!; A v.128=Nd2 192); ref. to at A iii.256; v.185; J i.58; Pug 35. Similarly in gāma˚ Sn 922; viggāhikā k. A iv.87; Sn 930. Ten good themes of conversation (kathā -- vatthūni) are enumd at M iii.113=A iii.117=iv.357=v.67; Miln 344; similarly dhammī kathā A ii.51; iv.307; v.192; Sn 325; pavattanī k. A i.151; yutta kathāyaŋ Sn 826; sammodanīyā k. in salutation formula s˚ŋ k˚ŋ sāraṇīyaŋ vītisāretvā D i.52, 108, etc.; A v.185; Sn 419, pp. 86, 93, 107, 116. -- 2. speech, sermon, discourse, lecture Vin i.203, 290 (˚ŋ karoti to discuss); A iii.174; iv. 358. Freq. in anupubbi˚ a sermon in regular succession, graduated sermon, discussing the 4 points of the ladder of "holiness," viz. dānakathā, sīla˚, sagga˚, magga˚ (see anupubba) Vin i.15; A iii.184; iv.186, 209, 213; DhA i.6; VvA 66. -- 3. a (longer) story, often with vitthāra˚ an account in detail, e. g. PvA 19. bāhira˚ profane story KhA 48. -- 4. word, words, advice: ˚ŋ gaṇhāti to accept an advice J ii.173; iii.424. -- 5. explanation, exposition, in aṭṭha˚ (q. v.), cp. gati˚ Ps ii.72. -- 6. discussion, in ˚vatthu (see below) Mhvs 5, 138. -- dukkathā harmful conversation or idle talk A iii. 181; opp. su˚ A iii.182. -- kathaŋ vaḍḍheti "to increase the talk," to dispute sharply J i.404; v.412. ˚ŋ samuṭṭhāpeti to start a conversation J i.119; iv. 73. -- At the end of cpds. (as adj.) ˚kathā e. g. chinna˚ Sn 711; ṭhita˚ DA i.73; madhura˚ J iii.342; vi.255.

-- âbhiññāṇa recollection due to speech Miln 78, 79. -- ojja (k˚ -- udya, to vad) a dispute, quarrel Sn 825, 828. -- dhamma a topic of conversation DA i.43. -- nigghosa the sound of praise, flattery J ii.350. -- pavatti the course of a conversation J i.119; DhA i.249; Mhbv 61. -- pābhata subject of a conversation, story J i.252, 364. -- bāhulla abundance of talk, loquacity A iv.87. -- magga narrative, account, history J i.2. -- rasa the sweetness of (this) speech Miln 345. -- vatthu 1. subject of a discourse or discussion, argument M i.372; ii.127, 132. There are 10 enumd at A iv.352, 357 (see kathā) and at Vism 19 as qualities of a kalyāṇa -- mitta, referred to at A v.67, 129; Vism 127; DhA iv.30. Three are given at D iii.220 = A i.197. ˚kusala well up in the subjects of discussion VvA 354. -- 2. N. of the fifth book of the Abhidhamma Piṭaka, the seven constituents of which are enumd at var. places (e. g. DA i.17; Mhbv 94, where Kvu takes the 3rd place), see also J.P.T.S. 1882, 1888, 1896. -- samuṭṭhāna the arising of a discussion Mhvs 5, 138. -- samuṭṭhāpana starting a conversation J i.119; iii.278; DhA i.250. -- sampayoga conversational intercourse A i.197. -- sallāpa talk, conversation Vin i.77; D i.89 sq., 107 sq.; ii.150; M i.178; A ii.197; v.188; Ud 40; J ii.283; Miln 31; DA i.276 (expld as kathanapaṭikathana); DhA ii.91 (˚ŋ karoti) VvA 153. Kathāpeti
Kathāpeti
Caus. ii. of katheti (q. v.). Kathālikā
Kathālikā(f.)
[fr. kuth, to boil] kettle, cooking pot; in daṇḍa˚ (a pot with a handle) Vin i.286 (v. l. kathālaka), and meda˚ A iv. 377; DhA ii. 179. Kathika
Kathika
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. kathā, cp. Sk. kathaka] relating, speaking, conversing about, expounding, in cpds. citta˚ Th 2, 449 (cp. citra -- kathin); (a) tiracchāna˚ A iv.153; dhamma˚ J i.148; iii.342; iv.2 (˚thera); vi.255 (mahā˚); as noun a preacher, speaker, expounder A iii.174; Mhvs 14, 64 (mahā˚). Kathikā
Kathikā
(f.) [fr. last?] agreement Dpvs 19, 22; see katikā. Kathita
Kathita
[pp. of katheti, cp. Sk. kathita] said, spoken, related J ii.310; iv.73; v.493. su˚ well said or told J. iv.73. As nt. with instr. J iv.72 (tena kathitaŋ the discourse (given) by him). Kathin
Kathin
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [cp. kathika] speaking; one who speaks, a speaker, preacher J i.148 (dhamma -- kathikesu citrakathī); Miln 90, 348 (˚seṭṭha best of speakers). See also kathaŋ -- kathin. Katheti
Katheti
(v. den. fr. kathā, cp. Sk. kathayate] aor. kathesi, inf. kathetuŋ & kathetave (Vin i.359); Pass. kathīyati & katheti (Miln 22, cp. Trenckner, Notes 122); ppr. Pass. kathīyamāna & kacchamāna (A. iii.181); grd. kathetabba, kathanīya & kaccha, -- 1. to speak, say, tell, relate (in detail: vitthārato PvA 77). mā kathesi ( = mā bhaṇi) do not speak PvA 16. -- to tell (a story): J. i.2; iv.137; PvA 12, 13. -- 2. to converse with J. vi.413; PvA 86 (=āmantayi). -- 3. to report, to inform J v.460. -- 4. to recite DhA i.166. -- 5. to expound, explain, preach J i.30; Miln 131; DhA i.88; Nd2 s. v. -- 6. to speak about (with acc.) Vin ii.168. -- 7. to refer to J i.307. -- 8. to answer or solve (a question) J i.165; v.66. -- Caus ii. kathāpeti to make say Mhvs 24, 4 (aor. kathāpayi); DhA ii.35; KhA 118. Kad˚
Kad˚
[old form of interr. pron. nt., equal to kiŋ; cp. (Vedic) kad in kadarthaŋ = kiŋarthaŋ to what purpose] orig. "what?" used adverbially; then indef. "any kind of," as (na) kac( -- cana) "not at all"; kac -- cid "any kind of; is it anything? what then?" Mostly used in disparaging sense of showing inferiority, contempt, or defectiveness, and equal to kā˚ (in denoting badness or smallness, e. g. kākaṇika, kāpurisa, see also kantāra & kappaṭa), kiŋ˚, ku.˚ For relation of ku>ka cp. kutra> kattha & kadā.

-- anna bad food Kacc 178. -- asana id. Kacc 178. -- dukkha (?) great evil ( = death) VvA 316 (expld as maraṇa, cp. kaṭuka). -- 185 -- Kadamba
Kadamba
(cp. Sk. kadamba] the kadamba tree, Nauclea cordifolia (with orange -- coloured, fragrant blossoms) J. vi.535, 539; Vism 206; DhA i.309 (˚puppha); Mhvs 25, 48 (id.). Kadara
Kadara
(adj.) miserable J ii.136 (expld as lūkha, kasira). Kadariya
Kadariya
(adj.) [cp. Sk. kadarya, kad + arya?] mean, miserly, stingy, selfish; usually expld by thaddhamaccharī (PvA 102; DhA iii.189, 313), and mentioned with maccharī, freq. also with paribhāsaka S i.34, 96; A ii.59; iv.79 sq.; Dh 177, 223; J v.273; Sn 663; Vv 295. As cause of Peta birth freq. in Pv., e. g. i.93; ii.77; iv.148; PvA 25, 99, 236. -- (nt.) avarice, stinginess, selfishness, grouped under macchariya Dhs 1122; Sn 362 (with kodha). Kadariyatā
Kadariyatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. last] stinginess, niggardliness D ii.243; Miln 180; PvA 45. Kadala
Kadala
(nt.) the plantain tree Kacc 335. Kadalī
Kadalī1
(f.) [Sk. kadalī] -- 1. the plantain, Musa sapien- tium. Owing to the softness and unsubstantiality of its trunk it is used as a frequent symbol of unsubstantiality, transitoriness and worthlessness. As the plantain or banana plant always dies down after producing fruit, is destroyed as it were by its own fruit, it is used as a simile for a bad man destroyed by the fruit of his own deeds: S i.154 = Vin ii.188=S ii.241=A ii.73 =DhA iii.156; cp. Miln 166; -- as an image of unsubstantiality, Cp. iii.24. The tree is used as ornament on great festivals: J i.11; vi.590 (in simile), 592; VvA 31. -- 2. a flag, banner, i. e. plantain leaves having the appearance of banners ( -- dhaja) J v.195; vi.412. In cpds. kadali˚.

-- khandha the trunk of the plantain tree, often in similes as symbol of worthlessness, e. g. M i.233 = S iii.141=iv.167; Vism 479; Nd2 680 Aii.; J vi.442; as symbol of smoothness and beauty of limbs VvA 280; -- taru the plantain tree Dāvs v.49; -- toraṇa a triumphal arch made of pl. stems and leaves Mhbv 169; -- patta a pl. leaf used as an improvised plate to eat from J v.4; DhA i.59; -- phala the fruit of the plantain J v.37. Kadalī
Kadalī2
(f.) a kind of deer, an antelope only in ˚miga J v.406, 416; vi.539; DA i.87; and ˚pavara -- pacc.-> attharaṇa (nt.) the hide of the k. deer, used as a rug or cover D i.7 = A i.181=Vin i.192=ii.163, 169; sim. D. ii.187; (adj.) (of pallanka) A i.137=iii.50=iv.394. Kadā
Kadā
(indecl.) [Vedic kadā. Cp. tadā, sadā in Pali, and perhaps Latin quando]. interr. adv. when? (very often foll. by fut.) Th 1, 1091 -- 1106; J ii.212; vi. 46; DhA i.33; PvA 2. -- Combd with -- ssu J v.103, 215; vi.49 sq. -- ci [cid] indef. -- 1. at some time A iv.101. -- 2. sometimes J i.98; PvA 271. -- 3. once upon a time Dāvs i.30. -- 4. perhaps, may be J i.297; vi.364. + eva: kadācideva VvA 213; -- kadāci kadāci from time to time, every now and then J i.216; iv. 120; DhsA 238; PvA 253. -- kadāci karahaci at some time or other, at times A i.179; Miln 73; DhA iii.362. -- na kadāci at no time, never S i.66; J v.434; vi.363; same with mā k˚ J vi.310; Mhvs 25, 113; cp. kudācana. -- kadāc-> -- uppattika (adj.) happening only sometimes, occasional Miln 114. Kaddama
Kaddama
[Derivation unknown. Sk. kardama] mud, mire, filth Nd2 374 ( = panka); J i.100; iii.220 (written kadamo in verse and kaddemo in gloss); vi.240, 390; PvA 189 (=panka), 215; compared with moral impurities J iii.290 & Miln 35. a˚ free from mud or dirt, clean Vin ii.201, of a lake J iii.289; fig. pure of character J iii.290. kaddamīkata made muddy or dirty, defiled J vi.59 (kilesehi).

-- odaka muddy water Vin ii.262; Vism 127. -- parikhā a moat filled with mud, as a defence J vi. 390; -- bahula (adj.) muddy, full of mud DhA i.333; Kanaka
Kanaka
(nt.) [cp. Sk. kanaka; Gr. knh_kos yellow; Ags. hunig = E. honey. See also kañcana] gold, usually as uttatta˚ molten gold; said of the colour of the skin Bu i.59; Pv iii.32; J v.416; PvA 10 suvaṇṇa).

-- agga gold -- crested J v.156; -- chavin of golden complexion J vi.13; -- taca (adj.) id. J v.393; -- pabhā golden splendour Bu xxiii.23; -- vimāna a fairy palace of gold VvA 6; PvA 47, 53; -- sikharī a golden peak, in ˚rājā king of the golden peaks (i. e. Himālayas): Dāvs iv.30. Kaniṭṭha
Kaniṭṭha
(adj.) [Sk. kaniṣṭha; compar. & superl.; see kaññā] younger, youngest, younger born Vin iii.146 (isi the younger); J ii.6; PvA 42, 54; esp. the younger brother (opp. jeṭṭha, ˚ka) J i.132; DhA i.6, 13; Mhvs. 9, 7; PvA 19, 55. Combd with jeṭṭhaka the elder & younger brothers J i.253; sabba -- k. the very youngest J i.395. f. kaniṭṭhā the youngest daughter DhA i.396. -- fig. later, lesser, inferior, in ˚phala the lesser fruit (of sanctification) Pv iv.188. -- akaniṭṭha "not the smaller" i. e. the greatest, highest; in akaniṭṭhagāmin going to the highest gods (cp. parinibbāyin) S v.237 = 285, etc. ˚bhavana the abode of the highest gods J. iii.487. Kaniṭṭhaka
Kaniṭṭhaka
(adj.) younger (opp. jeṭṭha) A iv.93 = J ii.348; DhA i.152; the younger brother Mhvs 5, 33, 8, 10; 35, 49; 36, 116; -- ˚ikā and ˚akā a younger sister, Mhvs 1, 49; Pv i.115 (better read for kaniṭṭhā). Kaniṭṭhatta
Kaniṭṭhatta
(nt.) the more recent and therefore lower, less developed state (of sanctification) DhA i.152. Kaniṭṭhī
Kaniṭṭhī
(f.) a younger sister Mhvs 7, 67. Kaniya
Kaniya
(adj.) [compar. of kan˚, Sk. kanīyaŋs] younger, less, inferior Kacc 122 (only as a grammarian's construction, not in the living language where it had coalesced with *kanyā = kaññā). Kanta
Kanta1
[Sk. kānta, pp. of kāmeti] -- 1. (adj.) in special sense an attribute of worldly pleasure (cp. kāma, kāmaguṇā): pleasant, lovely, enjoyable; freq. in form. iṭṭhā kantā manāpā, referring to the pleasures of the senses S i.245; ii.192; iv.60, 158, 235 sq.; v.22, 60, 147; A ii.66 sq.; M i.85; Sn 759; It 15; Vbh 2, 100, 337; bāla˚ (lovely in the opinion of the ignorant) Sn 399.-> D ii.265; iii.227 (ariya˚); J iii.264; v.447; with ref. to the fruit of action as giving pleasure: ˚phala Kvu 35, 211, PvA 277 (hatthi -- ) k˚ pleasing to elephants; of manta DhA i.163; of vīṇā J vi.255, 262; DhA i.163. -- 2. beloved by, favourite of, charming J vi.255, 262; DhA i.163. -- 3. (n.) the beloved one, the husband J vi.370 (wrongly written kan tena); of a precious stone Miln 118; Sdhp 608, cp. suriya˚, canda˚ -- kantā (f.) the beloved one, the wife J v.295; kantena (instr.) agreeably, with kind words A ii.213; J v.486 (where porisādassa kante should be read as porisādassak' ante). -- a˚ undesired, disagreeable, unpleasant, in same form as kanta, e. g. D ii.192; in other combn J v.295; Vbh 100; Nett 180; PvA 193. -- akantena with unpleasant words A ii.213. -- kantatara compar. J iii.260.

-- bhāva the state of being pleasant DA i.76; VvA 323. Kanta
Kanta2
[pp. of kantati2, Sk. kṛtta. kanta is analogy- form. after pres. kantati, regularly we should expect katta. See also avakanta. It may be simply misreading for katta, cp. Kern, Toev. under parikanta.] cut, cut out or off Th 2, 223 (˚salla = samucchinna -- rāg' -- ādisalla ThA 179) cp. katta & pari˚. -- 186 -- Kantati
Kantati1
[Sk. kṛṇatti, *qert, cp. kata, & Lat. cratis, crassus, E. crate] to plait, twist, spin, esp. suttaŋ (thread) Vin iv.300; PvA 75; DhA iii.273; kappāsaŋ A iii.295. Cp. pari˚. Kantati
Kantati2
[Sk. kṛṇtati; *(s)qert, to cut; cp. Gr. kei/rw, to shear; Lat. caro, cena; Ohg. sceran, E. shear; see also kaṭu] to cut, cut off J ii.53 (: as nik˚ in gloss, where it should be mūlāni kant˚); iii.185; vi.154; DhA iii.152 (+ viddhaŋseti). Kantāra
Kantāra
(adj. n.) [perhaps from kad -- tarati, difficult to cross, Sk. (?) kāntāra] difficult to pass, scil. magga, a difficult road, waste land, wilderness, expld as nirudaka īriṇa VvA 334 (on Vv 843), combd with maru˚ PvA 99 and marukantāramagga PvA 112; opp. khemantabhūmi. Usually 5 kinds of wilds are enumerated: cora˚, vāla˚, nirudaka˚, amanussa˚, appabbhakkha˚ J i.99; SA 324; 4 kinds at Nd2 630: cora˚, vāla˚, dubhikkha˚, nirudaka˚. The term is used both lit. & fig. (of the wilds of ignorance, false doctrine, or of difficulties, hardship). As the seat of demons (Petas and Yakkhas) freq. in Pv (see above), also J i.395. As diṭṭhi˚ in pass. diṭṭhi -- gata, etc. M i.8, 486, Pug 22 (on diṭṭhi vipatti).

-- addhāna a road in the wilderness, a dangerous path (fig.)Th 1, 95~D i.73 = M i.276; -- paṭipanna a wanderer through the wilderness, i. e. a forester J iii.537. -- magga a difficult road (cp. kummagga) J ii.294 (lit.); in simile: S ii.118. -- mukha the entrance to a desert J i.99. Kantāriya
Kantāriya
(adj.) [from kantāra] (one) living in or belonging to the desert, the guardian of a wilderness, applied to a Yakkha Vv 8421 ( = VvA. 341). Kantika
Kantika1
(adj.) [to kantati1] spinning PvA 75 (sutta˚ itthiyo). Kantika
Kantika2
= kanta1 in a˚ unpleasant, disgusting Pv iii.41 (=PvA 193). Kantita
Kantita1
[Sk. kṛtta, pp. of kantati1] spun, (sutta) Vin iv.300. Kantita
Kantita2
(adj.) Sk. kṛtta pp. of kantati2] cut off, severed, at Miln 240 better as kantita1, i. e. spun. Kanda
Kanda
[Sk. kanda] a tuberous root, a bulb, tuber, as radish, etc. J i.273; iv.373; vi.516; VvA 335; ˚mūla bulbs and roots (˚phala) D i.101; a bulbous root J v.202. Kandati
Kandati
[Sk. krandati to *q(e)lem; cp. Gr. kale/w, ke/lados, Lat. clamor, calare, calendae, Ohg. hellan to shout] to cry, wail, weep, lament, bewail Dh 371; Vv 8312; J vi.166; Miln 11, 148; freq. of Petas: PvA 43, 160, 262 (cp. rodati). -- In kāmaguṇā pass. urattāḷiŋ k. M. i.86 = Nd2 s. v.; A iii.54 (urattāḷī for ˚iŋ v. l.); in phrase bāhā paggayha k˚ Vin i.237; ii.284; J v.267. Kandana
Kandana
(nt.) [Sk. krandana] crying, lamenting PvA 262 Kandara
Kandara
[Sk. kandara] -- 1. a cave, grotto, generally, on the slope or at the foot of a mountain Vin ii.76, 146; used as a dwelling -- place Th 1, 602; J i.205; iii.172. -> 2. a glen, defile, gully D i.71 = A ii.210=Pug 59; A iv.437; Miln 36; expld at DA i.209 (as a mountainous part broken by the water of a river; the etym. is a popular one, viz. "kaŋ vuccati udakaŋ; tena dāritaŋ"). k -- padarasākhā A i.243=ii.240; PvA 29. Kandala
Kandala
N. of a plant with white flowers J iv.442. -- ma- kuḷa knob (?) of k. plant Vism 253 (as in description of sinews). Kandaḷa
Kandaḷa
N. of esculent water lily, having an enormous bulb D i.264. Kandita
Kandita
(adj.) [pp. of kandati] weeping, lamenting Dāvs iv.46; a˚ not weeping J iii.58. (n. nt.) crying, lamentation J iii.57; Miln 148. Kanna
Kanna
(adj.) [Sk. skanna] trickling down J v.445. Kannāma
Kannāma
= kinnāma J vi.126. Kapaṇa
Kapaṇa
(adj. n.) [Sk. kṛpaṇa from kṛp wail, cp. Lat. crepo; Ags. hraefn = E. raven. Cp. also Sk. kṛcchra] -- 1. poor, miserable, wretched; a beggar; freq. expld by varāka, duggata, dīna and daḷidda; very often classed with low -- caste people, as caṇḍālā Pv. iii.113 & pesakārā (Ud 4). Sn 818; J i.312, 321; iii.199; Pv ii.914; iii.113, iv.52; DA i.298; DhA i.233; ThA 178. -- 2. small, short, insignificant A i.213; Bdhd 84. (f.) ˚ā a miserable woman J iv.285; -- ˚an (adv.) pitifully, piteously, with verbs of weeping, etc. J iii.295; v.499; vi.143; a˚ not poor J iii.199; -- ati˚ very miserable Pgdp 74. Der. ˚tā wretchedness Sdhp 315.

-- addhikā pl. often with ˚ādi, which means samaṇabrāhmaṇa -- k˚ -- vaṇibbaka -- yācakā (e. g. D i.137; PvA 78) beggars and wayfarers, tramps J i.6, 262, DhA i.105, 188 (written k˚ -- andhika); see also DA i.298 and kapaṇikā; -- iddhikā pl. (probably miswriting for ˚addh˚, cp. Trenckner, J.P.T.S. 1908, 130) D i.137; It 65; DA i.298; -- itthī a poor woman J iii.448; -- jīvikā in ˚aŋ kappeti to make a poor livelihood J i.312; -- bhāva the state of being miserable PvA 274; -- manussa a wretched fellow, a beggar Vism 343; -- laddhaka obtained in pain, said of children J vi.150, cp. kiccha laddhaka; -- visikhā the street or quarter of the poor, the slums Ud 4; -- vuttin leading a poor life PvA 175. Kapaṇikā
Kapaṇikā
(f.) a (mentally) miserable woman Th 2, 219; ThA 178; cp. kapaṇā; also as kapaṇiyā J vi.93. Kapalla
Kapalla
at Vin i.203, is an error for kajjala, lamp -- black, used in preparation of a collyrium (cp. J.P.T.S. 1887, 167). Kapalla
Kapalla
(nt.) [Sk kapāla; orig. skull, bowl, cp. kapola & Lat. caput, capula, capillus, Goth. haubi, E. head]-> 1. a bowl in form of a skull, or the shell of reptiles; see kapāla. -- 2. an earthenware pan used to carry ashes J i.8; vi.66, 75; DhA i.288. -- 3. a frying pan (see cpds. & cp. angāra -- kapalla) Sn 672. -- kapalla is only a variant of kapāla.

-- pāti an earthen pot, a pan J i.347 = DhA i.371; -- pūva a pancake J i.345; DhA i.367; VvA 123; Mhvs 35, 67. Kapallaka
Kapallaka
-- 1. a small earthen bowl J vi.59; DhA i.224. -- 2. a frying pan J i.346. Kapāla
Kapāla
(nt.) [Sk. kapāla, see kapalla] -- 1. a tortoise- or turtle -- shell S i.7 = Miln 371; S iv.179; as ornament at DA i.89. -- 2. the skull, cp. kaṭāha in sīsakaṭāha. -> 3. a frying pan (usually as ayo˚, of iron, e. g. A iv.70; Nd2 304iii; VvA 335) J ii.352; Vv 845; DhA i.148 (v. l. ˚kapalla); Bdhd 100 (in simile). -- 4. a begging bowl, used by certain ascetics S iv.190; v.53, 301; A i.36; iii.225; J i.89; PvA 3. -- 5. a potsherd J ii.301.

-- ābhata the food collected in a bowl A i.36; -- khaṇḍa a bit of potsherd J ii.301; -- hattha "with a bowl in his hand," begging, or a beggar, Th 1, 1118; J i.89; iii.32; v.468; PvA 3. Kapālaka
Kapālaka
-- 1. a small vessel, bowl J i.425. -- 2. a beggar's bowl J i.235; DhA ii.26. Kapāsa
Kapāsa
= kappāsa, q. v. Dāvs ii.39. Kapi
Kapi
[Sk. kapi, original designation of a brownish colour, cp. kapila & kapota] a monkey (freq. in similes) Sn 791; Th 1, 1080; J i.170; iii.148, cp. kavi.

-- kacchu the plant Mucuna pruritus Pv ii.310; ˚phala its fruit PvA 86; -- citta "having a monkey's mind," capricious, fickle J iii.148 = 525; -- naccanā Npl., Pv iv.137; -- niddā "monkey -- sleep," dozing Miln 300. Kapiñjala
Kapiñjala
[Derivation unknown. Sk. kapiñjala] a wild bird, possibly the francolin partridge Kvu 268; J vi.538 (B.B. kapiñjara). -- 187 -- Kapiṭhana
Kapiṭhana
the tree Thespesia populneoides Vin iv. 35. Kapiṭṭha
Kapiṭṭha
and ˚ttha -- 1. the tree Feronia elephantum, the wood -- apple tree J vi.534; Vism 183 (˚ka); Mhvs 29, 11; -- 2. ˚ŋ (nt.) the wood apple Miln 189; -- 3. the position of the hand when the fingers are slightly and loosely bent in J i.237; kapitthaka S v.96. Kapitthana
Kapitthana
= kapiṭhana J ii.445; vi.529, 550, 553; v. l. at Vism 183 for ˚itthaka. Kapila
Kapila
(adj.) [Sk. kapila, cp. kapi] brown, tawny, reddish, of hair & beard VvA 222; ˚ā f. a brown cow DhA iv.153. Kapisīsa
Kapisīsa
[Sk. kapiśīrṣa] the lintel of a door D ii.143 (cp. Rh.D. Buddh. Suttas p. 95 n1) -- ˚ka the cavity in a doorpost for receiving the bolt Vin ii.120, 148 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.106 n3). Kapota
Kapota
[Sk. kapota, greyish blue, cp. kapi) -- 1. (m.) a pigeon, a dove J i.243; Miln 403; -- 2. (f.) ˚i a female pigeon PvA 47; ˚ka (f. ˚ikā Miln 365) a small pigeon J i.244.

-- pāda (of the colour) of a pigeon's foot J i.9. Kapola
Kapola
[Sk. kapola, cp. kapalla, orig. meaning "hollow"] the cheek Vism 263, 362; DhA i.194. Kappa
Kappa
(adj. n.) [Sk. kalpa, see kappeti for etym. & forma- tion] anything made with a definite object in view, prepared, arranged; or that which is fit, suitable, proper. See also DA i.103 & KhA 115 for var. meanings. -- I Literal Meaning. -- 1. (adj.) fitting, suitable, proper (cp. ˚tā) ( = kappiya) in kappâkappesu kusalo Th 1, 251, ˚kovido Mhvs 15, 16; Sn 911; as juice Miln 161. -> ( -- ˚) made as, like, resembling Vin i.290 (ahata˚); Sn 35 (khaggavisāṇa˚); hetu˚ acting as cause to Sn 16; Miln 105; -- a˚ incomparable Mhvs 14, 65; -- 2. (nt.) a fitting, i. e. harness or trapping (cp. kappana) Vv 209 (VvA 104); -- a small black dot or smudge (kappabindu) imprinted on a new robe to make it lawful Vin i.255; iv.227, 286: also fig. a making -- up (of a trick): lesa˚ DA i.103; VvA 348. -- II. Applied Meaning. -> 1. (qualitative) ordinance, precept, rule; practice, manner Vin ii.294, 301 (:kappati singiloṇa -- kappo "fit is the rule concerning . . ."); cp. Mhvs 4, 9; one of the chalanga, the 6 disciplines of Vedic interpretation, VvA 265; -- 2. (temporal) a "fixed" time, time with ref. to individual and cosmic life. As āyu at DA i.103 (cp.kappaŋ); as a cycle of time=saŋsāra at Sn 521, 535, 860 (na eti kappaŋ); as a measure of time: an age of the world Vin iii.109; Miln 108; Sdhp 256, 257; PvA 21; It 17=Bdhd 87=S ii.185. There are 3 principal cycles or aeons: mahā˚, asankheyya˚, antara˚; each mahā˚ consists of 4 asankheyya -- kappas, viz. saŋvaṭṭa˚ saŋvaṭṭaṭṭhāyi˚ vivaṭṭa˚ vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyi˚ A ii.142; often abbreviated to saŋvaṭṭa -- vivaṭṭa˚ D i.14; It 15; freq. in formula ekampijātiŋ, etc. Vin iii.4=D iii.51, 111= It 99. On pubbanta˚ & aparanta˚, past & future kappas see D i.12 sq. paṭhama -- kappe at the beginning of the world, once upon a time (cp. atīte) J i.207. When kappa stands by itself, a Mahā -- kappa is understood: DA i.162. A whole, complete kappa is designated by kevala˚ Sn pp. 18=46~125; Sn 517; also dīgha˚ S ii.181; Sdhp 257. For similes as to the enormous length of a kappa see S ii.181 & DA i.164=PvA 254. -- acc. kappaŋ adv.: for a long time D ii.103=115= Ud 62, quot. at DA i.103; Vin ii.198; It 17; Miln 108; mayi āyukappaŋ J i.119, cp. Miln 141. Cp. sankappa.

-- âtīta one who has gone beyond time, an Arahant Sn 373. -- âvasesaŋ (acc.) for the rest of the kappa, in kappaŋ vā k -- âvasesaŋ vā D ii.117 = A iv.309=Ud 62; Miln 140: -- āyuka (one) whose life extends over a kappa Mhvs v.87; -- uṭṭhāna arising at or belonging to the (end of a) kappa: -- aggi the fire which destroys the Universe J ii.397; iii.185; iv.498; v.336; vi.554; Vism 304; -- kāla the time of the end of the world J v.244; -- uṭṭhāna (by itself) the end of the world J i.4=Vism 415; -- kata on which a kappa, i. e. smudge, has been made, ref. to the cīvara of a bhikkhu (see above) Vin i.255; iv.227, 286; DA i.103; -- (ñ)jaha (one) who has left time behind, free from saŋsāra, an Arahant Sn 1101 (but expld at Nd2 s. v., see also DA i.103, as free from dve kappā: diṭṭhi˚ taṇha˚). -- jāla the consumption of the kappa by fire, the end of a kappa Dpvs i.61. -- ṭṭha staying there for a kappa, i. e. in purgatory in āpāyiko nerayiko + atekiccho, said of Devadatta Vin ii.202, 206; A iii.402 ~iv.160; It 11~85. -- ṭṭhāyin lasting a whole cycle, of a vimāna Th 1, 1190. -- ṭṭhika enduring for an aeon: kibbisa (of Devadatta) Vin ii.198=204; (cp. Vin. Texts iii.254) sālarukkha J v.416; see also ṭhitakappiŋ Pug 13. -- ṭṭhitika id. DhA i.50 (vera); Miln 108 (kammaŋ). ("sabbe pi magga -- samangino puggalā ṭhita -- kappino.") -- ṭṭhiya -- =prec. A v.75; J i.172, 213; v.33; Miln 109, 214. ˚rukkha the tree that lasts for a kappa, ref. to the cittapāṭalī, the pied trumpet -- tree in the abode of the Asuras J i.202; -- nibbatta originated at the beginning of the k. (appl. to the flames of purgatory) J v.272; -- parivaṭṭa the evolution of a k; the end of the world Dpvs i.59; -- pādapa= ˚rukkha Mhbv 2; -- rukkha a wishing tree, magical tree, fulfilling all wishes; sometimes fig. J vi.117, 594; Vism 206; PvA 75, 176, 121; VvA 32 (where combd with cintāmaṇi); DhA iv.208; -- latā a creeper like the kapparukkha VvA 12; -- vināsaka (scil. aggi): the fire consuming the world at the end of a k. Vism 414 sq.; (mahāmegho) DhA iii.362; -- samaṇa an ascetic acc. to precepts, an earnest ascetic J vi.60 (cp. samaṇa -- kappa); -- halāhala "the k -- uproar," the uproar near the end of a kalpa J i.47. Kappaka
Kappaka
[fr. kḷp, kappeti] a barber, hairdresser, also attendant to the king; his other function (of preparing baths) is expressed in the term nahāpaka (Pv ii.937) or nahāpita (˚ā?) (DA i.157) Vin. i.344; ii.182; D i.51 ( = DA i.157, in list of various occupations); J i.60, 137; iii.315; Pv ii.937; iii.14 (where expl. by nahāpita in the meaning of "bathed," cp. expl. ad i.106) DhA i.85 (˚vesa disguise of a barber), 342 (pasādhana˚ one who arranges the dress, etc., hairdresser).

-- jātika belonging to or reborn in the barber class, in this sense representing a low, "black" birth PvA 176. Kappaṭa
Kappaṭa
[kad -- paṭa = ku -- paṭa] a dirty, old rag, torn gar- ment (of a bhikkhu) Th 1,199. Kappatā
Kappatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. kappa] fitness, suitability DA i.207. Kappati
Kappati
[Pass. of kappeti, cp. Sk. kalpyate] to be fit, seeming, proper, with dat. of person D ii.162; Vin ii.263, 294; iii.36; Th 1,488; Mhvs 4, 11; 15, 16. Kappana
Kappana
(nt.) [fr. kappeti, cp. Sk. kalpana] the act of preparing, fixing; that which is fixed, arranged, performed. 1. kappanā (f.) the fixing of a horse's harness, harnessing, saddling J i.62; -- 2. (nt.) ( -- ˚) procuring, making: jīvika˚; a livelihood J iii.32; putting into order; danta˚ J i.321; -- 3. (adj.) ( -- ˚) trimmed, arranged with: nānāratana˚ VvA 35. Kappara
Kappara
[cp. Sk. kūrpara] the elbow Vin iii.121 = iv.221; J i.293, 297; DhA i.48, 394; VvA 206. Kappāsa
Kappāsa
[cp. Sk. karpāsa] 1. the silk -- cotton tree J iii.286; vi.336. -- 2. cotton D ii.141; A iii.295; S v.284; J i.350; vi.41; comb. w. uṇṇa A iii.37 = iv.265=268.

-- aṭṭhi a cotton seed DhA iii.71; -- paṭala the film of the cotton seed Vism 446; Bdhd 66; -- picu cotton S v.284; J v.110, 343; vi.184: -- maya made of cotton PvA 77. Kappāsika
Kappāsika
(adj.) made of cotton D ii.188, cp. A iv.394; D ii.351; Vin i.58 = 97= 281; J vi.590; Pv ii.117. (nt) cotton stuff Miln 267.

-- paṇṇa the leaf of the cotton tree, used medicinally Vin i.201; -- sukhuma fine, delicate cotton stuff D ii.188; A iv.394; Miln 105. -- 188 -- Kappāsī
Kappāsī
(f.) [ = kappāsa] cotton J vi.537; PvA 146. Kappika
Kappika
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. kappa] 1. belonging to a kappa, in paṭhama˚ -- kāla the time of thé first Age DA i.247; Vbh 412 (of manussā); VvA 19 (of Manu); without the kāla (id.) at J i.222; as noun the men of the first Age J ii.352. -- 2. In cpds. . . . pubbanta˚ and aparanta˚ the ika˚ belongs to the whole cpd. D i.39 sq.; DA i.103. See also kappiya 2. Kappita
Kappita
[pp. of kappeti] 1. prepared, arranged, i. e. har- nessed D i.49; J vi.268; i. e. plaited DA i.274; i. e. trimmed: ˚kesamassu "with hair & beard trimmed" D ii.325; S iv.343; J v.173, 350; vi.268; Vv 731. -> 2. getting procuring; as ˚jīvika a living J v.270; made ready, drawn up (in battle array) D ii.189; -> 3. decorated with, adorned with Sdhp 247. -- su˚ well prepared, beautifully harnessed or trimmed Vv 601. Kappin
Kappin
(adj.) [fr. kappa] 1. (cp. kappa ii.1a) getting, procuring, acquiring (pañña˚) Sn 1090; -- 2. (cp. kappa ii.1b) having a kappa (as duration), lasting a Cycle Pug 13; in Mahā˚ enduring a Mahākappa DA i.164 = PvA 254. Kappiya
Kappiya
(adj.) [fr. kappa] 1. (cp. kappa ii.1a) according to rule, right, suitable, fitting, proper, appropriate (PvA 26 = anucchavika paṭirūpa) J i.392; DA i.9; PvA 25, 141. -- a˚ not right, not proper, unlawful Vin i.45, 211; ii.118; iii.20; (nt) that which is proper A i.84; Dhs 1160; -- a˚ ibid; -- kappiyâkappiya (nt) that which is proper and that which is not J i.316; DA i.78. -> 2. (cp. kappa ii.1b) connected with time, subject to kappa, i. e. temporal, of time, subject to saŋsāra; of devamanussā Sn 521; na+of the Muni Sn 914. In another sense ("belonging to an Age") in cpd. paṭhama ˚ -- kāla the time of the first Age J ii.352. -- a˚ delivered from time, free from saŋsāra, Ep. of an Arahant Sn 860; cp. Miln 49, 50. See also kappika.

-- ânuloma (nt.) accordance with the rule Nett 192. -- kāraka "one who makes it befitting," i. e. who by offering anything to a Bhikkhu, makes it legally acceptable Vin i.206; -- kuṭī (f.) a building outside the Vihāra, wherein allowable articles were stored, a kind of warehouse Vin i.139; ii.159; -- dāraka a boy given to the Bhikkhus to work for them in the Vihāra DA i.78 (v. l. BB ˚kāraka); -- bhaṇḍa utensils allowable to the Bhikkhus J i.41; DhA i.412. a˚ thing unauthorised Vin. ii.169; a list of such forbidden articles is found at Vin i.192; -- bhūmi (f.) a plot of ground set apart for storing (allowable) provisions Vin i.239 (cp. ˚kuṭi); -- lesa [cp. Sk. kalpya] guile appropriate to one's own purpose VvA 348; -- saññin (a) imagining as lawful (that which is not) A i.84; a˚ opp. ibid. -- ˚tā the imagining as lawful (that which is not) appl. to kukkucca Dhs 1160; a˚ opp. ibid. Kappu
Kappu
(nt.) = kappa in the dialect used by Makkhali Gosāla, presumably the dialect of Vesāli, D i.54; DA i.164 (a Burmeṣe MS. reads kappi, and so do Pv iv.332; PvA 254). Kappūra
Kappūra
(m. & nt.) [cp. Sk. karpūra] camphor: (a) the plant J vi.537. -- (b) the resinous exudation, the prepared odoriferant substance (cp. kaṭukapphala) J ii.416 = DhA iii.475; Miln 382; Dāvs v.50. Kappeti
Kappeti
[Der. from kappa, cp. Sk. kṛpa shape, form; *qṷrep caus. from. fr. *qṷer = Sk. kr, karoti to shape, to make, cp. karoti] to cause to fit, to create, build, construct, arrange, prepare, order.

I. lit. 1. in special sense: to prepare, get done, i. e. harness: J i.62; plait DA i.274, an offering (yaññaŋ) Sn 1043; i. e. to trim etc. M ii.155; J i.223; Mhvs 25, 64. 2, generally (to be translated according to the meaning of accompanying noun), to make, get up, carry on etc. ( = Fr. passer), viz. iriyāpathaŋ to keep one's composure Th i.570; J v.262; Bdhd 33; jīvitaŋ: to lead one's life PvA 3, 4, 13; divāvihāraŋ to take the noonday rest Mhvs 19, 79; nisajjaŋ to sit down Vin iii.191; vāsaŋ, saŋvāsaŋ to make one's abode D ii.88; Sn 283; PvA 36, 47; saŋvāsaŋ to have (sexual) intercourse with J iii.448; Mhvs 5, 212; PvA 6; seyyaŋ: to lie down, to make one's bed Pug 55 etc. (acelaka -- passage=D i.166).

II. fig. 1. in special sense: to construct or form an opinion, to conjecture, to think Sn 799; DA i.103; -- 2. generally: to ordain, prescribe, determine J v.238 ( = say vidahati) -- Caus. II. kappāpeti to cause to be made in all senses of kappeti; e. g. Vin ii.134 (massuŋ k. to get one's beard done); J v.262 (hatthiyānāni k. to harness the elephant -- cars); DA i.147 (pañca hatthinikā -- satāni k. harness the 500 elephants). Pass. kappiyati in ppr. kappiyamāna getting harnessed J i.62. Kabara
Kabara
(adj.) [cp. Sk. kabara] variegated, spotted, striped; mixed, intermingled; in patches Vism 190. Of a cow (˚gāvī) DhA i.71 (˚go -- rūpa) ibid. 99; of a calf (˚vaccha) J v.106; of a dog (˚vaṇṇa = sabala q. v.) J vi.107; of leprosy J v.69; of the shade of trees (˚cchāya, opp. sanda˚) M i.75; J iv.152; DhA i.375.

-- kucchi having a belly striped with many colours, of a monster J i.273; -- kuṭṭha a kind of leprosy J v.69; -- maṇi the cat's eye, a precious stone, also called masāragalla, but also an emerald; both are prob. varieties of the cat's eye VvA 167, 304. Kabala
Kabala
(m., nt.) [cp. Sk. kavala BSk. kavaḍa Divy 290 (+ālopa), 298, 470] a small piece ( = ālopa PvA 70), a mouthful, always appl. to food, either solid (i. e. as much as is made into a ball with the fingers when eating), or liquid Vin ii.214; It 18=J iii.409; iv.93; Dh 324; Miln 180, 400; Bdhd 69; DhA ii.65; PvA 39; Mhvs 19, 74. Kabale kabale on every morsel J i.68; Miln 231; -- sakabala appl. to the mouth, with the mouth full of food Vin ii.214; iv. 195; -- Sometimes written kabala.

-- âvacchedaka choosing portions of a mouthful, nibbling at a morsel Vin ii.214; iv.196. Kabalinkāra
Kabalinkāra
(adj.) [kabala in compn form kabalī˚ before kr & bhū; kabalin for kabalī˚] always in combn with āhāra, food "made into a ball," i. e. eatable, material food, as one of the 4 kinds of food (see stock phrase k˚ āhāro oḷāriko vā sukhumo vā . . . at M i.48 = S ii.11, 98=D iii.228, 276; Bdhd 135) Dhs 585, 646 (where fully described), 816; Miln 245; Vism 236, 341, 450, 616; Bdhd 69, 74; DA i.120. Written kabalīkāra nearly always in Burmese, and sometimes in Singh. MSS.; s. also Nett 114 -- 118.

-- āhāra -- bhakkha (of attā, soul) feeding on material food D i.34, 186, 195; -- bhakkha, same A iii.192 = v.336 (appl. to the kāmâvacara devas); DA i.120. Kabaḷikā
Kabaḷikā
(f.) [cp. Sk. kavalikā] a bandage, a piece of cloth put over a sore or wound Vin i.205 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.58 n4). Kabba
Kabba
(nt.) [cp. Sk. kāvya] a poem, poetical composition, song, ballad in ˚ŋ karoti to compose a song J vi.410; -- karaṇa making poems DA i.95; and -- kāra a poet Kh 21; J vi.410. Kabya
Kabya
= kabba in cpds. ˚âlankāra composing in beautiful verse, a beautiful poem in ˚ŋ bandhati, to compose a poem ibid.; and -- kāraka a poet, ibid. Kama
Kama
[fr. kram, cp. Vedic krama ( -- ˚) step, in uru˚, BSk. krama reprieve, Divy 505] -- 1. (nt.) going, proceeding, course, step, way, manner, e. g. sabbatth'âvihatakkama "having a course on all sides unobstructed" Sdhp 425; vaḍḍhana˚ process of development Bdhd 96 paṭiloma˚ (going) the opposite way Bdhd 106; cp. also Bdhd 107, 111. a fivefold kama or process (of development or division), succession, is given at Vism 476 with uppattik˚, pahāna˚, patipattik˚, bhūmik˚, desanāk˚, where they are illustrated by examples. Threefold applied to upādāna at Vism 570 (viz. uppattik˚, pahānak˚, desanāk˚) -- 2. oblique cases (late and technical) "by way of going," i. e. in order or in due course, in succession: kamato Vism 476, 483, 497; Bdhd 70, 103; kamena by & by, gradually Mhvs 3, 33; 5, 136; 13, 6; Dāvs i.30; SnA 455; Bdhd 88; yathākkamaŋ Bdhd 96. -- 3. (adj.) ( -- ˚) having a certain way of going: catukkama walking on all fours ( = catuppāda) Pv i.113. -- 189 -- Kamaṇa
Kamaṇa
a step, stepping, gait J v.155, in expln J v.156 taken to be ppr. med. -- See san˚. Kamaṇḍalu
Kamaṇḍalu
(m., nt.) [etym. uncertain] the waterpot with long spout used by non -- Buddhist ascetics S i.167; J ii.73 ( = kuṇḍikā); iv.362, 370; vi.86, 525, 570; Sn p. 80; DhA iii.448 -- adj. kamaṇḍaluka [read kā˚?] "with the waterpot" A v.263 (brāhmaṇā pacchābhūmakā k.). Kamati
Kamati
[kram, Dhtp. expld by padavikkhepe; ppr. med. kamamāna S i.33; Sn 176; Intens. cankamati.] to walk. (I) lit. 1. c. loc. to walk, travel, go through: dibbe pathe Sn 176; ariye pathe S i.33; ākāse D i.212 = M i.69=A iii.17; -- 2. c. acc. to go or get to, to enter M ii.18; J vi.107; Pv i.12 (saggaŋ) -- (II) fig. 1. to succeed, have effect, to affect M i.186; J v.198; Miln 198; -- 2. to plunge into, to enter into A ii.144; -> 3. impers. to come to (c. dat) S iv.283. Kamatthaŋ
Kamatthaŋ
(adv.) [kaŋ atthaŋ] for what purpose, why? J iii.398 ( = kimatthaŋ). Kamanīya
Kamanīya
(adj.) [grd of kāmayati] (a) desirable, beautiful, lovely J v.155, 156; Miln 11; (b) pleasant, sweet ( -- sounding) D ii.171; J i.96. -- As nt. a desirable object S i.22. Kamala
Kamala
(nt.) a lotus, freq. combd with kuvalaya; or with uppala J i.146; DA i.40, expld as vārikiñjakkha PvA 77. 1. lotus, the lotus flower, Nelumbium J i.146; DA i.40; Mhbv 3; Sdhp 325; VvA 43, 181, 191; PvA 23, 77; -- At J i.119, 149 a better reading is obtained by corr. kambala to kamala, at J i.178 however kamb˚ should be retained. -- 2. a kind of grass, of which sandals were made Vin. i.190 (s. Vin. Texts ii.23 n.) -- 3. f. kamalā a graceful woman J v.160;

-- komalakarā (f.) (of a woman) having lotus -- like (soft) hands Mhbv 29; -- dala a lotus leaf Vism 465; Mhbv 3; Bdhd 19; DhsA 127; VvA 35, 38. -- -- pādukā sandals of k. grass Vin i.190. Kamalin
Kamalin
(adj.) [fr. kamala] rich in lotus, covered with lotuses (of a pond) in kamalinī -- kāmuka "the lover of lotuses," Ep. of the Sun Mhbv. 3 (v. l. ˚sāmika perhaps to be preferred). Kampa
Kampa
( -- ˚) [fr. kamp] trembling, shaking; tremor DA i.130 (paṭhavi˚); Sdhp 401; a˚ (adj.) not trembling, unshaken; calm, tranquil Sdhp 594; Mhvs 15, 175. Kampaka
Kampaka
(adj.) [fr. kampa] shaking, one who shakes or causes to tremble Miln 343 (paṭhavi˚). Kampati
Kampati
[kamp to shake Dhtp. 186: calane; p. pres. kam- panto, kampaŋ, kampamāna; aor. akampi; caus. kampeti; p. pres. kampetan Dpvs xvii.51; ger. kampayitvāna D ii.108; J v.178] -- to shake, tremble, waver Kh 6; J i.23; Sn 268 (expl. KhA 153: calati, vedhati); Bdhd 84; -- Cp. anu˚, pa˚, vi˚, sam˚. -- kampamāna (adj.) trembling J iii.161; agitated, troubled (˚citta) J ii.337; a˚ not trembling, unhesitating, steadfast J vi. 293. Kampana
Kampana
[fr. kamp] 1. adj. causing to shake DhA i.84, trembling Kacc 271; 2. (nt) (a) an earthquake J i.26 47; (b) tremor (of feelings) J iii.163.

-- rasa (adj.) "whose essence is to tremble," said of doubt (vicikicchā) DhsA 259. Kampin
Kampin
(adj.) [fr. kampa] see vi˚. Kampiya
Kampiya
(adj.) [grd. of kampati] in a˚ not to be shaken, immovable, strong Th 2, 195; Miln 386; (nt.) firmness, said of the 5 moral powers (balāni) DA i.64. Kampurī
Kampurī
(va.) at Th 2, 262 is to be corr. into kambu -- r -- iva (see Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 76). Kambala
Kambala
(m., nt.) [cp. Sk. kambala] 1. woollen stuff, woollen blanket or garment. From J iv.353 it appears that it was a product of the north, probably Nepal (cp. J.P.T.S. 1889, 203); enumd as one of the 6 kinds of cīvaras, together w. koseyya & kappāsika at Vin i.58 = 96, also at A iv.394 (s. ˚sukhuma); freq. preceded by ratta (e. g. DA i.40. Cp. also ambara2 and ambala), which shows that it was commonly dyed red; also as paṇḍu Sn 689; Bdhd 1. -- Some woollen garments (aḍḍhakāsika) were not allowed for Bhikkhus: Vin i.281; ii.174; see further J i.43, 178, 322; iv.138; Miln 17, 88, 105; DhA i.226; ii.89 sq. 2. a garment: two kinds of hair-> (blankets, i. e.) garments viz. kesa˚ and vāla˚ mentioned Vin i.305=D i.167=A i.240, 295. -- 3. woollen thread Vin i.190 (expld by uṇṇā) (cp. Vin. Texts ii.23); J vi.340; -- 4. a tribe of Nāgas J vi.165.

-- kañcuka a (red) woollen covering thrown over a temple, as an ornament Mhvs 34, 74; -- kūṭâgāra a bamboo structure covered with (red) woollen cloth, used as funeral pile DhA i.69; -- pādukā woollen slippers Vin i.190; -- puñja a heap of blankets J i.149; -- maddana dyeing the rug Vin i.254 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.154); -- ratana a precious rug of wool J iv.138; Miln 17 (16 ft. long & 18 ft. wide); -- vaṇṇa (adj.) of the colour of woollen fabric, i. e. red J v.359 (˚maŋsa); -- silāsana (paṇḍu˚) a stone -- seat, covered with a white k. blanket, forming the throne of Sakka DhA i.17; -- sukhuma fine, delicate woollen stuff D ii.188 = A iv.394; Miln 105; -- sutta a woollen thread J vi.340. Kambalin
Kambalin
(adj.) [fr. kambala] having a woollen garment D i.55; ii.150. Kambalīya
Kambalīya
(nt.) [fr. kambala] (a sort of) woollen garment Pv ii.117 (cp. PvA 77). Kambu
Kambu
[cp. Sk. kambu, Halāyudha = śankha; Dhtp. saŋvaraṇe] 1. a conch, a shell: saṇha -- kambu -- r -- iva . . . sobhate su gīvā Th 2, 262 (for kampurī'va); s. cpds. -- 2. a ring or bracelet (made of shells or perhaps gold: see Kern. Toev. s. v.) J iv.18, 466 (+kāyūra); Pv ii.127, iii.93 (=PvA 157, sankhavalaya) Vv 362 (=VvA 167 hatth'âlankāra), worn on the wrist, while the kāyūra is worn on the upper part of the arm (bhujâlankāra ibid.); -- 3. a golden ring, given as second meaning at VvA 167, so also expl. at J iv.18, 130; J v.400.

-- gīva (adj.) having a neck shaped like a shell, i. e. in spirals, having lines or folds, considered as lucky J iv.130 ( = suvaṇṇālingasadisagīvo), cp. above 1; -- tala the base or lower part of a shell, viz. the spiral part, fig. the lines of the neck J v.155 (˚ābhāsā gīvā, expld on p. 156 as suvaṇṇālingatala -- sannibhā); also the (polished) surface of a shell, used as simile for smoothness J v.204, 207; -- pariharaka a wristlet or bracelet VvA 167. Kambussa
Kambussa
[fr. preceding] gold or golden ornament (bracelet) J v.260, 261 (: kambussaŋ vuccati suvaṇṇaŋ). Kambojaka
Kambojaka
(adj.) coming fr. Kamboja J iv.464 (assatara). Kambojā
Kambojā
(f.) N of a country J v.446 (˚ka raṭṭha); Pv ii.91 (etc.); Vism 332, 334, 336. -- 190 -- Kamboji
Kamboji
(m., nt.) [meaning & etym. unexpld] the plant Cassia tora or alata J iii.223 (˚gumba = elagalāgumba; vv. ll. kammoja˚ & tampo˚ [for kambo˚]). Kamma
Kamma
(nt.) [Vedic karman, work esp. sacrificial process. For ending ˚man = Idg. *men cp. Sk. dhāman=Gr. dh=ma, Sk. nāman=Lat nomen] the doing, deed, work; orig. meaning (see karoti) either building (cp. Lit. kùrti, Opr. kūra to build) or weaving, plaiting (still in mālākamma and latā˚ "the intertwining of garlands and creepers"; also in kamma -- kara possibly orig. employed in weaving, i. e. serving); cp. Lat. texo, to weave=Sk. takṣan builder, artisan, & Ger. wirken, orig. weben. Grammatically karman has in Pāli almost altogether passed into the -- a decl., the cons. forms for instr. & abl. kammā and kammanā gen. dat. kammuno, are rare. The nom. pl. is both kammā and kammāni.

I. Crude meaning. 1. (lit.) Acting in a special sense, i. e. office, occupation, doing, action, profession. Two kinds are given at Vin iv.6, viz. low (hīna) & high (ukkaṭṭha) professions. To the former belong the kammāni of a koṭṭhaka and a pupphacchaḍḍaka, to the latter belong vāṇijjā and gorakkhā. -- Kamma as a profession or business is regarded as a hindrance to the religious life, & is counted among the ten obstacles (see palibodha). In this sense it is at Vism 94 expld by navakamma (see below 2a). -- kassa˚ ploughing, occupation of a ploughman Vism 284; kumbhakāra˚ profession of a potter J vi.372; tunna˚ weaving Vism 122; PvA 161. purohita˚ office of a high -- priest ( = abstr. n. porohiccaŋ) SnA 466; vāṇija˚ trade Sāsv. 40. -- kammanā by profession Sn 650, 651; kammāni (pl.) occupations Sn 263=Kh v.6 (anavajjāni k.=anākulā kammantā Sn 262). paresaŋ k˚ŋ katvā doing other people's work=being a servant VvA 299; sa˚ pasutā bent upon their own occupations D i.135, cp. attano k˚ -- kubbānaŋ Dh 217. kamma -- karaṇa -- sālā work -- room (here: weaving shed) PvA 120.

2. Acting in general, action, deed, doing (nearly always -- ˚) (a) (active) act, deed, job, often to be rendered by the special verb befitting the special action, like cīvara˚ mending the cloak VvA 250; uposatha˚ observing the Sabbath Vbh 422; nava˚ making new, renovating, repairing, patching Vin ii.119, 159 (˚karoti to make repairs); J i.92: Vism 94, adj. navakammika one occupied with repairs Vin ii.15; S i.179; patthita˚ the desired action (i. e. sexual intercourse) DhA ii.49; kammaŋ karoti to be active or in working, to act: nāgo pādehi k.k. the elephant works with his feet M i.414; kata˚ the job done by the thieves DhA ii.38 (corehi), as adj. kata˚ cora (& akata ˚cora) a thief who has finished his deed (& one who has not) Vism 180, also in special sense: occasion for action or work, i. e. necessity, purpose: ukkāya kammaŋ n'atthi, the torch does not work, is no good Vism 428. (b) (passive) the act of being done ( -- ˚), anything done (in its result), work, often as collect. abstr. (to be trsld. by E. ending -- ing): apaccakkha˚ not being aware, deception Vbh 85; daḷhī˚ strengthening, increase Vbh 357, Vism 122; citta˚ variegated work, mālā˚ garlands, latā˚ creeper ( -- work) Vism 108; nāma˚ naming Bdhd 83; pañhā˚ questioning, "questionnaire" Vism 6. -- So in definitions niṭṭhuriya˚ = niṭṭhuriya Vbh 357; nimitta˚= nimitta, obhāsa˚=obhāsa (apparition > appearing) Vbh 353. -- (c) (intrs.) making, getting, act, process ( -- ˚). Often trsl. as abstr. n. with ending -- ion or -- ment, e. g. okāsa˚ opportunity of speaking, giving an audience Sn p. 94; pātu˚ making clear, manifestation DhA iv.198 anāvi˚, anuttāni˚ concealment Vbh 358; kata˚ (adj.) one who has done the act or process, gone through the experience SnA 355; añjali˚, sāmīci˚ veneration, honouring (in formula with nipaccakāra abhivādana paccuṭṭhāna) D iii.83 (≈Vin ii.162, 255); A i.123; ii.180; J. i.218, 219.

3. (Specialised) an "act" in an ecclesiastical sense; proceedings, ceremony, performed by a lawfully constituted chapter of bhikkhus Vin i.49, 53, 144, 318; ii.70, 93; v.220 sq.; Khus J.P.T.S. 1883, 101. At these formal functions a motion is put before the assembly and the announcement of it is called the ñatti Vin i.56, after which the bhikkhus are asked whether they approve of the motion or not. If this question is put once, it is a ñattidutiyakamma Vin ii.89; if put three times, a ñatticatuttha˚ Vin i.56 (cp. Vin. Texts i.169 n2). There are 6 kinds of official acts the Sangha can perform: see Vin i.317 sq.; for the rules about the validity of these ecclesiastical functions see Vin i.312 -- 333 (cp. Vin T. ii.256 -- 285). The most important ecclesiastical acts are: apalokanakamma, ukkhepanīya˚ uposatha˚ tajjaniya˚ tassapāpiyyasikā˚ nissaya˚, patiññākaraṇīya˚, paṭipucchākaraṇīya˚ paṭisāraṇiya˚ pabbājaniya˚, sammukhākaraṇīya˚. -- In this sense: kammaŋ karoti (w. gen.) to take proceedings against Vin i.49, 143, 317; ii.83, 260; kammaŋ garahati to find fault with proceedings gone through Vin ii.5; kammaŋ paṭippassambheti to revoke official proceedings against a bhikkhu Vin iii.145.

4. In cpds.: -- -- âdhiṭṭhāyaka superintendent of work, inspector Mhvs 5, 174; 30, 98; -- âdhipateyya one whose supremacy is action Miln 288; -- ārambha commencement of an undertaking Mhvs 28, 21; -- âraha (a) entitled to take part in the performance of an "act" Vin iv.153; v.221; -- ārāma (a) delighting in activity D ii.77; A iv.22; It 71, 79; -- ārāmatā taking pleasure in (worldly) activity D ii.78 = A iv.22, cp. Vbh 381; A iii.116, 173, 293 sq., 330, 449; iv.22 sq., 331; v.163; It 71; âvadāna a tale of heroic deeds J vi.295; -- kara or ˚kāra: used indiscriminately. 1. (adj.) doing work, or active, in puriso dāso+pubbuṭṭhāyī "willing to work" D i.60 et sim. (=DA i.168: analaso). A i.145; ii.67; Vv 754; 2. (n.) a workman, a servant (a weaver?) usually in form dāsā ti vā pessā ti vā kammakarā ti vā Vin i.243; D i.141=Pug 56 (also ˚kārā); A ii.208; iii.77, 172; Th 2, 340; J i.57. Also as dāsā pessā k˚kārā A iii.37= iv.265, 393, and dāsā k˚ kārā Vin i.240, 272; ii.154; D iii.191; S i.92; -- a handyman J i.239; Miln 378; (f) -- ī a female servant Vin ii.267; ˚kāra Vin iv.224, kārī Dhs A98=VvA 73 (appl. to a wife); -- karaṇa 1. working, labour, service J iii.219; PvA 120; DA i.168; 2. the effects of karma J i.146; -- karanā and kāraṇā see below; -- kāma liking work, industrious; a˚ lazy A iv.93= J ii.348; -- kāraka a workman, a servant DA i.8; Mhvs 30, 42; Nd2 427; a sailor J iv.139; -- garu bent on work Miln 288; -- ccheda the interruption of work J i.149; 246; iii.270; -- jāta sort of action J v.24 (=kammam eva); -- dhura (m. nt.) draught -- work J i.196; -- dheyya work to be performed, duty A iv.285= 325; cp. J vi.297; -- dhoreyya "fit to bear the burden of action" Miln 288 (cp. Mil. trsl. ii.140); -- niketavā having action as one's house or temple ibid.; -- nipphādana accomplishing the business J vi.162; -- ppatta entitled to take part in an eccles. act Vin i.318; v.221; -- bahula abounding in action (appl. to the world of men) Miln 7; -- mūla the price of the transaction Miln 334; -- rata delighting in business D ii.78; It 71; -- vatthu objects, items of an act Vin v.116; -- vācā the text or word of an official Act. These texts form some of the oldest literature and are embodied in the Vinaya (cp. Vin i.317 sq.; iii.174, 176; iv.153, etc.). The number of officially recognized k˚ is eleven, see J.P.T.S. 1882, 1888, 1896, 1907; k˚ŋ karoti to carry out an official Act Mhvs 5, 207; DhsA 399; -- ˚ŋ anussāveti to proclaim a k˚, to put a resolution to a chapter of bhikkhus Vin i.317; -- vossagga difference of occupation J vi.216; -- sajja (a) "ready for action," i. e. for battle J v.232; -- sādutā "agreeableness to work" DhsA 151 (cp. kammaññatā & kamyatā); -- sāmin "a master in action," an active man Miln 288; -- sippī an artisan VvA 278; -- sīla one whose habit it is to work, energetic, persevering Miln 288; a˚ indolent, lazy J vi.245; a˚ -- ttaŋ indolence, laziness Mhvs 23, 21; -- hīna devoid of occupation, inactive Miln 288.

II. Applied (pregnant) meaning: doing, acting with ref. to both deed and doer. It is impossible to draw a clear line between the source of the act (i. e. the acting subject, the actor) and the act (either the object or phenomenon acted, produced, i. e. the deed as objective phenomenon, or the process of acting, i. e. the deed as subjective phenomenon). Since the latter (the act) is to be judged by its consequences, its effects, its manifestation always assumes a quality (in its most obvious characteristics either good or bad or indifferent), and since the act reflects on the actor, this quality is also attached to him. This is the popular, psychological view, and so it is expressed in language, although reason attributes goodness and badness to the actor first, and then to the act. In the expression of language there is no difference between: 1. the deed as such and the doer in character: anything done (as good or bad) has a corresponding source; 2. the performance of the single act and the habit of acting: anything done tends to be repeated; 3. the deed with ref. both to its cause and its effect: anything done is caused and is in itself the cause of something else. As meanings of kamma we therefore have to distinguish the foll. different sides of a "deed," viz.

1. the deed as expressing the doer's will, i. e. qualified deed, good or bad; 2. the repeated deed as expression of the doer's habit = his character; 3. the deed as having consequences for the doer, as such a source qualified according to good and evil; as deed done accumulated and forming a deposit of the doer's merit and demerit (his "karma"). Thus pāpakamma=a bad deed, one who has done a bad deed, one who has a bad character, the potential effect of a bad deed=bad karma. The context alone decides which of these meanings is the one intended by the speaker or writer.

Concerning the analysis of the various semantic developments the following practical distinctions can be made: 1. Objective action, characterized by time: as past = done, meaning deed (with kata); or future=to be done, meaning duty (with kātabba). 2. Subjective action, characterized by quality, as reflecting on the agent. 3. Interaction of act and agent: (a) in subjective relation, cause and effect as action and reaction on the individual (individual "karma," appearing in his life, either here or beyond), characterized as regards action (having results) and as regards actor (having to cope with these results): (b) in objective relation, i. e. abstracted from the individual and generalized as Principle, or cause and effect as Norm of Happening (universal "karma," appearing in Saŋsāra, as driving power of the world), characterized (a) as cause, (b) as consequence, (c) as cause -- consequence in the principle of retribution (talio), (d) as restricted to time.

1. (Objective): with ref. to the Past: kiŋ kammaŋ akāsi nārī what (deed) has this woman done? Pv i.92; tassā katakammaŋ pucchi he asked what had been done by her PvA 37, 83, etc. -- with ref. to the Future: k. kātabbaŋ hoti I have an obligation, under 8 kusītavatthūni D iii.255 = A iv.332; cattāri kammāni kattā hoti "he performs the 4 obligations" (of gahapati) A ii.67.

2. (Subjective) (a) doing in general, acting, action, deed; var. kinds of doings enum. under micchājīva D i.12 (santikamma, paṇidhi˚, etc.); tassa kammassa katattā through (the performance of) that deed D iii.156; dukkaraŋ kamma -- kubbataŋ he who of those who act, acts badly S i.19; abhabbo taŋ kammaŋ kātum incapable of doing that deed S iii.225; sañcetanika k. deed done intentionally M iii.207; A v.292 sq.; pamāṇakataŋ k. D i.251 = S iv.322. kataraŋ k˚ŋ karonto ahaŋ nirayaŋ na gaccheyyaŋ? how (i. e. what doing) shall I not go to Niraya? J iv.340; yaŋ kiñci sithilaŋ k˚ŋ . . . na taŋ hoti mahapphalaŋ . . . S i.49=Dh 312=Th 1, 277; kadariya˚ a stingy action PvA 25; k. classed with sippa, vijjā -- caraṇa D iii.156; kāni k˚āni sammā -- niviṭṭha established slightly in what doings? Sn 324; (b) Repeated action in general, constituting a person's habit of acting or character (cp. kata ii.1. a.); action as reflecting on the agent or bearing his characteristics; disposition, character. Esp. in phrase kammena samannāgata "endowed with the quality of acting in such and such a manner, being of such and such character": tīhi dhammehi samannāgato niraye nikkhitto "endowed with (these) three qualites a man will go to N." A i.292 sq.; asucinā kāyak˚ena sam˚ asucimanussā "bad people are those who are of bad ways (or character)" Nd2 112; anavajja kāya -- k˚ sam˚ A ii.69 (cp. A iv.364); kāya -- kammavacī -- kammena sam˚ kusalena (pabbajita) "a bhikkhu of good character in deed and speech" D i.63; kāya . . . (etc.) -- k˚sam˚ bāla (and opp. paṇḍita) A ii.252 (cp. A i.102, 104); visamena kāya (etc.) -- k˚ sam˚ A i.154=iii.129; sāvajjena kāya (etc.) -- k˚ sam˚ A ii.135 -- kammaŋ vijjā ca dhammo ca sīlaŋ jīvitam uttamaŋ, etena maccā sujjhanti, na gottena dhanena vā S i.34=55; M iii.262, quoted at Vism 3, where k. is grouped with vipassanā, jhāna, sīla, satipaṭṭhāna as main ideals of virtue; kammanā by character, as opp. to jaccā or jātiyā, by birth: Sn 136; 164; 599; nihīna˚ manussā (of bad, wretched character) Sn 661; manāpena bahulaŋ kāya (etc.) -- kammena A ii.87= iii.33, 131; and esp. with mettā, as enum. under aparihāniyā and sārāṇīyā dhammā D ii.80; A iii.288; mettena kāya-> (etc.) -- kammena D ii.144; iii.191; A v.350 sq. (c) Particular actions, as manifested in various ways, by various channels of activity (k˚ -- dvārā), expressions of personality, as by deed, word and thought (kāyena, vācāya, manasā). Kamma kat) e)coxh/n means action by hand (body) in formula vacasā manasā kammanā ca Sn 330, 365; later specified by kāya -- kamma, for which kāya -- kammanta in some sense (q. v.), and complementing vacī -- k˚ mano -- k˚; so in foll. combns: citte arakkhite kāya -- k˚ pi arakkhitaŋ hoti (vacī˚ mano˚) A i.261 sq.; yaŋ nu kho ahaŋ idaŋ kāyena k˚ kattukāmo idaŋ me kāya -- k˚ attabyādhāya pi saŋvatteyya . . . "whatever deed I am going to do with my hands (I have to consider:) is this deed, done by my hands, likely to bring me evil?" M i.415; kāya -- (vacī -- etc.) kamma, which to perform & to leave (sevitabbaŋ and a˚) A i.110=iii.150; as anulomika˚ A i.106; sabbaŋ kāya -- k˚ (vacī˚ mano˚) Buddhassa ñāṇânuparivattati "all manifestation of deed (word & thought) are within the knowledge of Buddha" Nd2 235; yaŋ lobhapakataŋ kammaŋ karoti kāyena vā vācāya vā manasā vā tassa vipākaŋ anubhoti . . . Nett 37; kin nu kāyena v˚ m˚ dukkaṭaŋ kataŋ what evil have you done by body, word or thought? Pv ii.13 and freq.; ekūna -- tiŋsa kāyakammāni Bdhd 49. (d) Deeds characterized as evil (pāpa -- kammāni, pāpāni k˚, pāpakāni k˚; pāpakamma adj., cp. pāpa -- kammanta adj.). pāpakamma: n'atthi loke raho nāma p˚ pakubbato "there is no hiding ( -- place) in this world for him who does evil" A i.149; so p˚ -- o dummedho jānaŋ dukkaṭaŋ attano . . . "he, afflicted with (the result of) evil -- doing . . ." A iii.354; p˚ -- ŋ pavaḍḍhento ibid.; yaŋ p˚ -- ŋ kataŋ sabban taŋ idha vedanīyaŋ "whatever wrong I have done I have to suffer for" A v.301; pabbajitvāna kāyena p˚ -- ŋ vivajjayī "avoid evil acting" Sn 407; nissaŋsayaŋ p˚ -- ŋ . . . "undoubtedly there is some evil deed (the cause of this) i. e. some evil karma Pv iv.161. -- pāpaŋ kammaŋ: appamattikam pi p˚ k˚ kataŋ taŋ enaŋ nirayaŋ upaneti "even a small sin brings man to N." A i.249, tayā v'etaŋ p˚ k˚ kataŋ tvañ ñeva etassa vipākaŋ paṭisaŋvedissasi "you yourself have done this sin you yourself shall feel its consequences" M iii.180= A i.139, na hi p˚ kataŋ k˚ sajju khīraŋ va muccati Dh 71=Nett 161; yassa p˚ kataŋ k˚ kusalena pithīyatiso imaŋ lokaŋ pabhāseti "he will shine in this world who covers an evil deed with a good one" M ii.104= Dh 173=Th 1, 872; p˚ -- ssa k˚ -- ssa samatikkamo "the overcoming of evil karma" S iv.320; p˚ssa k˚ssa kiriyāya "in the performance of evil" M i.372; p˚āni k˚āni karaŋ bālo na bujjhati "he, like a fool, awaketh not, doing sinful deeds" Dh 136=Th 1, 146; pāpā p˚ehi k˚ehi nirayaŋ upapajjare "sinners by virtue of evil deeds go to N." Dh 307; te ca p˚esu k˚esu abhiṇham upadissare Sn 140. -- pāpakāni kammāni: p˚ānaŋ k˚ānaŋ hetu coraŋ rājāno gāhetvā vividhā kammakāraṇā kārenti "for his evil deeds the kings seize the thief and have him punished" A i.48; ye loke p˚āni k˚ karonti te vividhā kamma -- kāraṇā karīyanti "those who do evil deeds in this world, are punished with various punishments" M iii.186=A i.142; k˚ŋ karoti p˚ŋ kāyena vācā uda cetasā vā Sn 232 (=kh 190); similarly Sn 127; karontā p˚ŋ k˚ŋ yaŋ hoti kaṭukapphalaŋ, "doing evil which is of bitter fruit" Dh 66= S i.57=Nett 131; k˚ehi p˚ehi Sn 215. -- In the same sense: na taŋ k˚ŋ kataŋ sādhu yaŋ katvā anutappati "not well done is that deed for which he feels remorse" S i.57=Dh 67 =Nett 132; āveni -- kammāni karonti (with ref. to sangha -- bheda) A v.74; adhammikakammāni A i.74; asuci -- k˚āni (as suggested by 5 and attributes: asuci, duggandha, etc.) A iii.269; sāvajjakammāni (as deserving Niraya) (opp. avajja > sagga) A ii.237; kammāni ānantarikāni deeds which have an immediate effect; there are five, enumd at Vbh 378. -> (e) deeds characterized as good or meritorious (kusala, bhaddaka, etc.) taŋ k˚ŋ katvā kusalaŋ sukhudrayaŋ D iii.157; puñña -- kammo of meritorious (character) S i.143; kusalehi k˚ehi vippayuttā carati viññāṇacariyā Ps i.80; kusalassa k˚ssa katattā Vbh 173 sq.; 266 sq.; 297 sq.; kusala -- k˚ -- paccayāni Bdhd 12; puññakamma, merit, compd with kapparukkha in its rewarding power VvA 32 (cp. puññânubhāva -- nissandena "in consequence of their being affected with merit" PvA 58) -- Cp. also cpds.: kamma -- kilesa, k˚ -- ṭṭhāna, k˚ -- patha; k˚lakkhaṇa k˚ -- samādāna.

3. (Interaction) A. in subjective relation; (a) character of interaction as regards action; action or deed as having results: phala and vipāka (fruit and maturing); both expressions being used either singly or jointly, either˚ -- or independt; phala: tassa mayhaŋ atīte katassa kammassa phalaŋ "the fruit of a deed done by me in former times" ThA 270; Vv 479 ( = VvA 202); desanā . . . k -- phalaŋ paccakkhakāriṇī "an instruction demonstrating the fruit of action" PvA 1; similarly PvA 2; cp. also ibid. 26, 49, 52, 82 (v. l. for kammabala). vipāka : yassa k˚ssa vipākena . . . niraye pacceyyāsi . . . "through the ripening of whatever deed will you be matured (i. e. tortured) in N." M ii.104; tassa k˚ssa vipākena saggaŋ lokaŋ uppajji "by the result of that deed he went to Heaven" S i.92; ii.255; k -- vipāka -- kovida "well aware of the fruit of action," i. e. of retribution Sn 653; kissa kvipākena "through the result of what (action)" Pv i.65; inunā asubhena k -- vipākena Nett 160; k -- vipāka with ref. to avyākata -- dhammā: Vbh 182; with ref. to jhāna ibid. 268, 281; with ref. to dukkha ibid. 106; k -- vipāka -- ja produced by the maturing of (some evil) action, as one kind of ābādha, illness: A v.110=Nd2 3041; same as result of good action, as one kind of iddhi (supernatural power) Ps ii.174; -- vipāka (adj.). asakkaccakatānaŋ kammānaŋ vipāko the reaper of careless deeds A iv.393; der. vepakka (adj.) in dukkha -- vepakka resulting in pain Sn 537. -- -- phala+vipāka: freq. in form. sukaṭa dukkhaṭānaŋ kammānaŋ phalaŋ vipāko: D i.55= iii.264=M i.401=S iv.348=A i.268=iv.226= v.265, 286 sq.; cp. J.P.T.S. 1883, 8; nissanda -- phalabhūto vipāko ThA 270; tiṇṇaŋ k˚ānaŋ phalaŋ, tiṇṇaŋ k -- ānaŋ vipāko D ii.186 -- (b) the effect of the deed on the doer: the consequences fall upon the doer, in the majority of cases expressed as punishment or affliction: yathā yathâyaŋ puriso kammaŋ karoti tathā tathā taŋ paṭisaŋvedissati "in whichever way this man does a deed, in the same way he will experience it (in its effect)" A i.249; na vijjati so jagati -- ppadeso yathā ṭhito muñceyya pāpa -- kammā "there is no place in the world where you could escape the consequences of evil -- doing" Dh 127=Miln 150=PvA 104, cp. Divy 532; so the action is represented as vedaniya, to be felt; in various combinations: in this world or the future state, as good or bad, as much or little A iv.382; the agent is represented as the inheritor, possessor, of (the results of) his action in the old formula: kammassakā sattā k -- dāyādā k -- yonī k -- bandhū . . . yaŋ k˚ŋ karonti kalyānaŋ vā pāpakaŋ vā tassa dāyādā bhavanti M iii.203=A iii.72 sq.=186=v.88~288 sq. (see also cpds.). The punishment is expressed by kammakaraṇa (or ˚kāraṇa), "being done back with the deed," or the reaction of the deed, in phrase kamma -- karaṇaŋ kāreti or kārāpeti "he causes the reaction of the deed to take place" and pass, kamma -- karaṇā karīyati he is afflicted with the reaction, i. e. the punishment of his doing. The 5 main punishments in Niraya see under kāraṇaŋ, the usual punishments (beating with whips, etc.) are enumerated passim, e. g. M iii.164, 181; and Nd2 604. [As regards form and meaning Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 76 and 1893, 15 proposes kāraṇā f. "pain, punishment, " fr. kṝ to tear or injure, "the pains of karma, or torture"; Prof. Duroiselle follows him, but with no special reason: the derivation as nt. causative -- abstr. fr. karoti presents no difficulty.] -- ye kira bho pāpakāni k˚ -- āni karonti te diṭṭh' eva dhamme evarūpā vividhā k -- kāraṇā karīyanti, kim anga pana parattha! "Those who, as you know, do evil are punished with various tortures even in this world, how much more then in the world to come!" M iii.181; M iii.186=A i.142; sim. k˚ -- kāraṇāni kārenti (v. l. better than text -- reading) S iv.344; Sdhp 7; Nd2 on dukkha. As k -- karaṇaŋ saŋvidahiŋsu J ii.398; kamma -- kāraṇa -- ppatta one who undergoes punishment Vism 500. See also examples under 2d and M i.87; A i.47; J v.429; Miln 197.

B. in objective relation: universal karma, law of cause and consequence. -- (a) karma as cause of existence (see also d, purāṇa˚ and pubbe kataŋ k˚): compared to the fruitful soil (khetta), as substratum of all existence in kāma, rūpa, arūpa dhātu A i.223 (kāmadhātu -- vepakkañ ce kammaŋ nâbhavissa api nu kho kāmabhavo paññāyethā ti? No h'etaŋ . . . iti kho kammaŋ khettaŋ . . .); as one of the 6 causes or substrata of existence A iii.410; kammanā vattati loko kammanā vattati pajā "by means of karma the world goes on, mankind goes on" Sn 654; kamma -- paccayā through karma PvA 25 ( = Kh 207); k˚ŋ kilesā hetu saŋsārassa "k. and passions are the cause of saŋsāra (renewed existence)" Nett 113; see on k. as principle: Ps ii.78; 79 (ch. vii., kamma -- kathā) M i.372 sq.; Nett. 161; 180 -- 182; k. as 3 fold: Bdhd 117; as 4 fold M iii.215; and as cause in general Vism 600 (where enumd as one of the 4 paccaya's or stays of rūpa, viz. k., citta, utu, āhāra); Bdhd 63, 57, 116, 134 sq.; Vbh 366; Miln 40 sq. as a factor in the five -- fold order (dhammatā or niyama) of the cosmos: k˚ -- niyama DA. on D 11, 12; DhsA. 272; Cp. cpds.: kammaja (resulting from karma) Bdhd 68, 72, 75; ˚ -- vātā, birth -- pains i. e. the winds resulting from karma (caliŋsu) DhA i.165; DhA ii.262; k˚ -- nimitta Bdhd 11, 57, 62; k˚ -- sambhava Bdhd 66; k˚ -- samuṭṭhāna Vism 600; Bdhd 67, 72; see further cpds. below. -- (b) karma as result or consequence. There are 3 kamma -- nidānāni, factors producing karma and its effect: lobha, dosa, moha, as such (tīṇi nidānāni kammānaŋ samudayāya, 3 causes of the arising of karma) described A i.134=263=iii.338=Nd2 517; so also A v.86; 262; Vbh 208. With the cessation of these 3 the factor of karma ceases: lobha -- kkhayā kamma -- nidāna -- saŋkhayo A v.262. There are 3 other nidānāni as atīte anāgate paccuppanne chanda A i.264, and 3 others as producing or inciting existence (called here kamma -- bhava, consequential existence) are puñña, apuñña, ānejja (merit, demerit and immovability) Vbh 137=Nd2 471. -- (c) karma as causeconsequence: its manifestation consists in essential likeness between deed and result, cause and effect: like for like "as the cause, so the result." Karma in this special sense is Retribution or Retaliation; a law, the working of which cannot be escaped (cp. Dh 127, as quoted above 3 A (b), and Pv ii.717: sace taŋ pāpakaŋ kammaŋ karissatha karotha vā, na vo dukkhā pamutt' atthi) -- na hi nassati kassaci kammaŋ "nobody's (trace, result of) action is ever lost" Sn 666; puññâpuñña -- kammassa nissandena kanaka vimāne ekikā hutvā nibbatti "through the consequence of both merit and demerit" PvA 47; cp. VvA 14; yatth' assa attabhāvo nibbattati tattha taŋ k˚ŋ vipaccati "wherever a man comes to be born, there ripens his action" A i.134; -- correspondence between "light" and "dark" deeds and their respective consequence are 4 fold: kaṇha -- kamma>kaṇha vipāka, sukka˚, kaṇhasukka, akaṇha -- asukka: D iii.230=M i.389=A ii.230 sq.; so sakena kammena nirayaŋ upapajjati Nd2 304iii; k˚ -- ânubhāva -- ukkhitta "thrown, set into motion, by the power of k." PvA 78; sucarita -- k -- ânubhavâvanibbattāni vimānāni "created by the power of their result of good conduct" VvA 127; k -- ânubhāvena by the working of k. PvA 77; k˚ -- vega -- ukkhittā (same) PvA 284; yathā kamm -- ûpaga "undergoing the respective consequences (of former deeds) affected with respective karma: see cpds., and cp. yathā kammaŋ gato gone (into a new existence) according to his karma J i.153 & freq.; see cpds.; k -- sarikkhatā "the karma -- likeness," the correspondence of cause and consequence: taŋ k -- s˚ŋ vibhāventaŋ suvaṇṇamayaŋ ahosi "this, manifesting the karma -- correspondence, was golden" VvA 6; so also k -- sarikkhaka, in accordance with their deed, retributionary, of kamma -- phalaŋ, the result of action: tassa kamma -- sarikkhakaŋ kammaphalaŋ hoti "for her the fruit of action became like action," i. e. the consequence was according to her deed. PvA 206; 284; 258; as nt.: k -- s˚ŋ pan'assa udapādi "the retribution for him has come" DhA i.128; J iii.203; cp. also Miln 40 sq.; 65 sq.; 108. -- (d) The working and exhaustion of karma, its building up by new karma (nava˚) and its destruction by expiration of old karma (purāṇa). The final annihilation of all result (˚kkhaya) constitutes Arahantship. nava>purāṇa -- kamma: as aparipakka, not ripe, and paropakka, ripe D i.54=S iii.212; as pañca -- kammuno satāni, etc. ibid.; kāyo . . . purāṇaŋ k˚ŋ abhisankhataŋ ("our body is an accumulation of former karma") S ii.65=Nd2 680 D; see also A ii.197; Pv iv.71; PvA 1, 45; Nett 179; and with simile of the snake stripping its slough (porāṇassa k˚ssa parikkhīṇattā . . . santo yathā kammaŋ gacchati) PvA 63. -- k˚ -- nirodha or ˚kkhaya: so . . . na tāva kālaŋ karoti yāva na taŋ pāpakammaŋ vyanti hoti "He does not die so long as the evil karma is unexhausted" A i.141≈; nava -- purāṇāni k˚āni desissāmi k˚ -- nirodhaŋ k˚ -- nirodha -- gāminiñ ca paṭipadaŋ "the new and the old karma I shall demonstrate to you, the destruction of k. and the way which leads to the destruction of k." S iv.132~A iii.410; . . . navānaŋ k˚ānaŋ akaraṇā setughātaŋ; iti k -- kkhayā dukkhakkhayo . . . (end of misery through the end of karma) A i.220=M ii.214; same Ps i.55 -- 57; cp. also A i.263; Nd2 411 (expl. as kamma -- parāyaṇa vipāka -- p˚: "gone beyond karma and its results," i. e. having attained Nibbāna). See also the foll. cpds.: k˚ -- âbhisankhīsa, ˚āvaraṇa, ˚kkhaya, ˚nibandhana.

-- âdhikata ruled by karma, Miln 67, 68; ˚ena by the influence of k. ibid. -- âdhiggahita gripped by karma Miln 188, 189; -- ânurūpa (adj.) (of vipāka) according to one's karma J iii.160; DA i.37; -- âbhisankhāra (3 B) accumulation of k. Nd2 116, 283, 506. -- âbhisanda in ˚ena in consequence of k. Miln 276, cp. J.P.T.S. 1886, 146; -- âraha see I.; -- âyatana 1. work Vbh 324, cp. Miln 78; 2. action = kamma J iii.542; cp. J iv.451, 452. -- âyūhana the heaping up of k. Vism 530; DhsA 267, 268; cp. k˚ŋ āyūhi Miln 214 and J.P.T.S. 1885, 58. -- āvaraṇa the obstruction caused by k. A iii.436= Pug 13=Vbh 341 (in defin. of sattā abhabbā: kammāvaraṇena samannāgatā, kiles˚, vipāk˚ . .), Kvu 341; Miln 154, 155; Vism 177 (=ānantariya -- kamma); -- ūpaga in yatha kamm -- ûpage satte: the beings as undergoing (the consequences of) their respective kamma (3B) in form. cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate . . . pajānāti (or passati) Vin iii.5=D i.82=S ii.122 (214)= v.266=A iv.178= v.13 (35, 200, 340)=Vbh 344; abbreviated in M iii.178; Nett. 178; see also similar Sn 587; Bdhd 111; -- upacaya accumulation of k. Kvn A. 156; -- kathā exposition of k.; chapter in Ps ii.98; -- kāma (adj.) desirous of good karma Th 2, 275; PvA 174; a˚ opp.= inactive, indolent A iv.92, PvA 174; -- kiriyā -- dassana (adj.) understanding the workings of k. J i.45; -- kiliṭṭha bad, evil k. Dh 15 (=DhA i.129, expl. kiliṭṭha -- k˚); -- kilesa (2) depravity of action, bad works, there are 4 enumd at D iii.181=J iii.321, as the non -- performance of sīla 1 -- 4 (see sīla), equal to pāpa -- kāya -- k˚; -- kkhaya (3 B) the termination, exhaustion of the influence of k.; its destruction: sabba -- k˚ -- kkhayaŋ patto vimutto upadhi -- sankhaye S i.134; as brought about by neutral, indifferent kamma: D iii.230=A ii.230 sq.; M i.93, DhsA 89; -- ja (3 B) produced by k. J i.52; as one mode of the origin of disease Miln 135; Nd2 3041; appld. to all existence Miln 271; Vism 624 (kammajaŋ āyatanadvāra -- vasena pākaṭaŋ hoti); appld to rūpa Vism 451, 614; appl. to pains of childbirth (˚vātā) J i.52, DhA i.165; a˚ not caused by k., of ākāsa and nibbāna Miln 268, 271; -- ṭṭhāna (2) 1. a branch of industry or occupation, profession, said of diff. occupations as farmer, trader, householder and mendicant M ii.197; A v.83. 2. occasion or ground for (contemplating) kamma (see ṭhāna ii.2. c.), kamma -- subject, a technical term referring to the instruments of meditation, esp. objects used by meditation to realize impermanence. These exercises ("stations of exercise" Expos. 224) are highly valued as leading to Arahantship DhA i.8 (yāva arahattaŋ kamma -- ṭṭhānaŋ kathesi), 96; PvA 98 (catu -- saccakamma -- ṭṭhāna -- bhāvanā meditation on the 4 truths and the objects of meditation). Freq. in phrase kammaṭṭhāne anuyutto (or anuyoga vasena) na cirass'eva arahattaŋ pāpuṇi: J iii.36; Sāsv 49; see also J i.7, 97, 182, 303, 414; Sdhp 493. These subjects of meditation are given as 38 at DhsA 168 (cp. Cpd. 202), as 32 (dvattiŋs' ākāra -- k˚) at Vism 240 sq., as 40 at Vism 110 sq. (in detail); as pañca -- sandhika at Vism 277; some of them are mentioned at J i.116; DhA i.221, 336; iv.90; -- ˚ŋ anuyuñjati to give oneself up to meditation Sāsv 151; PvA 61; -- ˚ŋ uggaṇhāti to accept from his teacher a particular instrument of meditation Vism 277 sq. (also ˚assa uggaho & uggaṇhana); KhA 40; DhA i.9, 262; iv.106; PvA 42; -- ˚ŋ katheti to teach a pupil how to meditate on one of the k˚ DhA i.8, 248, 336; PvA 61; -- ˚ŋ adāsi DhA iv.106; ˚gaṇhāti J iii.246; Vism 89; ˚ācikkhana instruction in a formula of exercise DhsA 246; ˚dāyaka the giver of a k -- ṭṭh˚ object, the spiritual adviser and teacher, who must be a kalyāṇamitta (q. v.), one who has entered the Path; Vism 89; Bdhd 89, 91, cp. Vism 241; -- ṭṭhānika a person practising kammaṭṭhāna Vism 97, 187, 189; DhA i.335; -- tappana the being depressed on acct. of one's (bad) karma DhA i.150. -- -- dāyāda (3 A (b) and cp. ˚ssaka) the inheritor of k., i. e. inheriting the consequences of one's own deeds M i.390; Miln 65=DhsA 66; -- dvāra "the door of action," i. e. the medium by which action is manifested (by kāya, vacī, mano) (s. 2b) J iv.14; KvuA 135; DhsA 82; Bdhd 8; -- dhāraya name of a class of noun -- compounds Kacc 166; -- nānatta manifoldness of k. DhsA 64 (also -- nānākaraṇa ib.); -- nibandhana (3 B) bound to k. (: rathass'āṇī va yāyato, as the linchpin to the cart) Sn 654; -- nibbatta (3 B) produced through k. Miln 268; DhsA 361; -- nimitta the sign, token of k. DhsA 411; -- nirodha the destruction of k. [see 3 B (d)]; -- paccaya the ground, basis of karma Vism 538; KvuA 101; ˚paccayena by means of k. J vi.105, Vism 538; (adj.) J v.271, DhsA 304; -- paṭisaraṇa (a) having k. as a place of refuge or as a protector J vi.102; Miln 65; cp. DhsA 66; -- paṭibāḷha strong by k. Miln 301; -- pathā (2 b) pl. the ways of acting (=sīla q. v.), divided into kusala (meritorious, good) and akusala (demeritorious, evil) and classified according to the 3 manifestations into 3 kāya˚, 4 vācī˚, 3 mano˚, altogether 10; so at Vin v.138, S ii.168, A v.57, 268; as kus˚ and akus˚ at D iii.71, 269, 290; as 7 only at S ii.167; as akus˚ only at A v.54, 266; Vbh 391; Nett 43; Bdhd 129, 131; ˚ppatta having acquired the 10 items of (good) action Sdhp 56, 57. -- phala [3 A (a)] the fruit of k., the result of (formerly) performed actions J i.350; VvA 39, PvA 1, 26, 52; ˚ -- upajīvin 1. living on the fruit of one's labour (ad I) J iv.160; -- 2. living according to the result of former deeds A ii.135; -- bandhu having k. as one's relative, i. e. closely tied to one's karma (see ˚ssaka) Th 1, 496; cp. J vi.100, etc. -- bala the power of k. J vi.108; PvA 82. -- bhava [3 B (b)] karmic existence, existence through karma Vbh 137; DhsA 37; -- bhūmi 1. the place of work J iii.411; 2. the ground of actions, i. e. the field of meritorious deeds Miln 229; -- mūla (good) k. as a price (for long life, etc.) Miln 333, 334, 341; -- mūlaka produced by k. Miln 134; -- yoni having k. for matrix, i. e. as the cause of rebirth Miln 65; DhsA 66. -- lakkhaṇa having k. as distinctive characteristic A i.102; AA 370; -- vagga name of section in Nipāta IV of Anguttara (Nos. 232 -- 238) A ii.230 sq.; -- vavaṭṭhāna the continuance of k. DhsA 85; -- vāda (a) holding to the view of (the power and efficacy of) k. S ii.33 sq.; A i.287 (+kiriyavāda, viriyavāda); -- vādin believing in k. D i.115; Vin i.71; J vi.60; -- vipāka [3 A (a)] the ripening of k., the result of one's actions (see above) Vbh 106, 182, 268, 281; as one of the four mysteries (acinteyyāni) of Buddhism at Miln 189. -- ˚ja produced as a result of k.: D ii.20; Mhbv 78; Ps ii.174, 213; Miln 135; Vism 382 (appld to iddhi); concerning disease as not produced by k., see A v.110; Miln 134, 135; AA 433, 556. -- visuddhi meritorious karma Dh 16 (=Dh i.132); -- visesa variety or difference of k. DhsA 313; -- vega the impetus of k. PvA 284; -- sacca (adj.) having its reality only in k.; said of loka, the world A ii.232. -- samādāna (2) the acquisition of ways of acting, one's character, or the incurring of karma, either as micchādiṭṭhi˚ (of wrong views) or sammādiṭṭhi (conforming to the right doctrine), so in yathākamm -- ûpaga passage (q. v.): D iii.96; M i.70; iii.178, 179; four such qualities or kinds of karma enum. at Nett 98; of Buddha's knowledge as regards the quality of a man's character: S v.304; A iii.417 sq.; Ps ii.174; Vbh 338; -- samārambha [3 B (a)] having its beginning in k.; said of loka, the world of men; with ˚ṭṭhāyin: lasting as long as the origin (cause) of k. exists A ii.232; -- samuṭṭhāna [3 B (a)] rising from k. Miln 127; DhsA 82; Kvn 100; -- sambhava produced by k. Miln 127; -- sarikkhaka [see above 3 B (c)] similar or like in consequence to the deed done DhA iii.334 (˚vipāka). -- sarikkhatā (do.) the likeness between deed and result; -- sahāya "companion to the deed," said of thought DhsA 323; -- socana sorrowing for one's (bad) deeds DhA i.128. -- (s)saka [3 A (b), q. v.] (a) one whose karma is his own property, possessed of his own k. M iii.203, etc. (in phrase k., kamma -- dāyāda, kamma -- bandhu, etc.; cp. Vism 301); J iv.128; Miln 65; DA i.37=who goes according to his own karma (attano k˚ânurūpaŋ gatiŋ gacchanti, n'eva pitā puttassa kammena gacchati, na putto pitu kammena . . .); der. ˚tā the fact that every being has his very own karma A iii.186; Dhs 1366; Vbh 324; ˚ta as adj.; qualifying ñāṇa, i. e. the knowledge of the individual, specific nature of karma Dhs 1366, Vbh 328. -- 194 -- Kammaka
Kammaka
(adj.) [fr. kamma] connected with, dependt on karma Miln 137 (a˚). Kammanīya, ˚iya & kammañña
Kammanīya,
˚iya & kammañña (adj.) "workable," fit for work, dexterous, ready, wieldy. Often of citta "with active mind" in formula vigatūpakkilesa mudubhūta k˚ ṭhita ānejjappatta D i.76, etc. = M i.22= Pug 68; S iii.232; v.92, 233; A i.9; DhA i.289; Bdhd 101, expld at Vism 377 (˚iya). Further of citta (muduñ ca kammaññañ ca pabhassarañ ca) A i.257 (reads ˚iyañ)=Vism 247; of upekhā and sati Nd2 661, cp. Bdhd 104; of kāya & citta Bdhd 121. Said of a lute=workable, ready for playing A iii.375=Vin i.182. Of the body A iv.335. -- a˚ not ready, sluggish A iv.333; Vism 146. -- kammañña -- bhāva the state of being workable, readiness, of kāya Dhs 46, of vedanā, etc., Dhs 326, of citta DhsA 130, see next; a˚ unworkable condition DhsA 130. Kammaññatā
Kammaññatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] workableness, adapta- bility, readiness, appl. to the wood of the sandal tree (in simile) A i.9; said of kāya and citta in connection with kammaññattaŋ k˚bhāvo k˚mudutā: Dhs 46, 47 = 326=641=730; cp. Dhs 585; similar Bdhd 16, 20, 71; DhsA 136, 151 (=kammasādutā) a˚ unworkableness, inertness, unwieldiness, sluggishness Miln 300; Nett 86, 108, cp. Dhs 1156, 1236; DhsA 255; expld as cittagelaññaŋ DhsA 377; as cetaso līnattaŋ Vbh 373. Kammanta
Kammanta
[Sk. karmānta; kamma+anta, cp. anta 14.] 1. doing, acting, working; work, business, occupation, profession. paṭicchanna˚ of secret acting Sn 127 = Vbh 357; as being punished in Niraya A i.60; S iv.180; as occupation esp. in pl. kammantā: S v.45=135; DhA i.42 (kammantā nappavattanti, no business proceeds, all occupations are at a standstill); anākula˚ Sn 262=Kh v.5; abbhantarā k˚ uṇṇā ti vā, kappāsā ti vā as housework, falling to the share of the wife A iii.37=iv.365; khetta˚ occupation in the field A iii.77; see also D i.71; M iii.7; S i.204; Miln 9, 33; and below; as place of occupation: Sn p. 13, PvA 62. Phrases: ˚ŋ adhiṭṭhāti to look after the business A i.115; PvA 141; jahati give up the occupation S iv.324; PvA 133; ˚ŋ payojeti to do or carry on business D i.71; ii.175; iii.66, 95; A iii.57; ˚ŋ pavatteti to set a business on foot PvA 42 (and vicāreti: PvA 93); ˚ŋ saŋvidahati to provide with work A iv.269=272. Mhvs vi.16. -- 2. deed, action in ethical sense= kamma, character, etc., Kh 136 (k˚=kamma); pāpa˚ doing wrong Pv iv.81; iv.161; J vi.104 (opp. puñña˚); as specified by kāya˚ vacī ˚mano˚ A v.292 sq.; VvA 130 (in parisuddha -- kāya -- kammantatā); dhammikā k˚ā M ii.191; ākiṇṇa -- k˚ (evam -- ) of such character S i.204; kurūra -- k˚ (adj.) of cruel character A iii.383=Pug 56 (in def. of puggalo orabbhiko); sammā˚ of right doing, opp. micchā˚, as constituting one element of character as pertaining to "Magga" (: q. v.) D ii.216; S ii.168; v.1; A iii.411; Bdhd 135; expl. as kāya -- kamma (=sīla 1 -- 3) at S v.9=Vbh 105; Vbh 235; as kāya -- duccaritehi ārati virati . . . Vbh 106.

-- âdhiṭṭhāyika superintendent of work DhA i.393; -- ṭṭhāna: 1. the spot where the ceremonies of the Ploughing Festival take place J i.57; 2. the common ground of a village, a village bazaar J iv.306; -- dāsa a farm -- servant J i.468; -- bheri the drum announcing the (taking up of) business DhA iii.100; -- vipatti "failure of action," evil -- doing A i.270 opp. -- sampadā "perfection of action, right -- doing" A i.271; -- saŋvidhāna the providing of work D iii.191 (one of the 5 duties of the gahapati). Kammantika
Kammantika
(adj.) [fr. kammanta] 1. a business manager J i.227. -- 2. a labourer, artisan, assistant J i.377. -- 195 -- Kammāra
Kammāra
[Vedic karmāra] a smith, a worker in metals generally D ii.126, A v.263; a silversmith Sn 962 = Dh 239; J i.223; a goldsmith J iii.281; v.282. The smiths in old India do not seem to be divided into black -- , gold -- and silver -- smiths, but seem to have been able to work equally well in iron, gold, and silver, as can be seen e. g. from J iii.282 and VvA 250, where the smith is the maker of a needle. They were constituted into a guild, and some of them were well -- to -- do as appears from what is said of Cunda at D ii.126; owing to their usefulness they were held in great esteem by the people and king alike J iii.281.

-- uddhana a smith's furnace, a forge J vi.218; -- kula a smithy M i.25; kūṭa a smith's hammer Vism 254; -- gaggarī a smith's bellows S i.106; J vi.165; Vism 287 (in comparison); -- putta "son of a smith," i. e. a smith by birth and trade D ii.126; A v.263; as goldsmith J vi.237, Sn 48 (Nd2 ad loc.: k˚ vuccati suvaṇṇakāro); -- bhaṇḍu (bhaṇḍ, cp. Sk. bhāṇḍika a barber) a smith with a bald head Vin i.76; -- sālā a smithy Vism 413; Mhvs 5, 31. Kammāsa
Kammāsa
[Vedic kalmāṣa, which may be referred, with kalana, kaluṣa, kalanka and Gr. kelaino/s to *qel, fr. which also Sk. kāla black -- blue, Gr. khla/s, khli/ s; Lat. cālīgo & callidus] 1. variegated, spotted, blemished J v.69 (˚vaṇṇa), said of the spotted appearance of leprosy. -- fig. inconsistent, varying A ii.187. -- 2. (nt.) inconsistency, blemish, blot A iv.55; Vism 51. -- a˚ not spotted, i. e. unblemished, pure, said of moral conduct D ii.80; A ii.52; iii.36, 572; vi.54, 192; Bdhd 89.

-- kārin in a˚ not acting inconsistently A ii.187; cp. ibid. 243. -- pāda 1. (a) having speckled feet J v.475; (b) (m) one who has speckled feet, i. e. an ogre; also N. of a Yakkha J v.503, 511 (cp. J.P.T.S. 1909, 236 sq.). Kammika
Kammika
(adj. -- n.) [fr. kamma] 1. ( -- ˚) one who does or looks after; one whose occupation is of such & such a character: āya˚ revenue -- overseer, treasurer DhA i.184; sabba˚ (always with ref. to amacca, the king's minister) one who does everything, the king's confidant Vism 130; PvA 81. -- On term ādi˚ beginner (e. g. Vism 241) see Cpd. 53, 129 n.2. -- 2. a merchant, trader, in jalapatha˚ and thalapatha˚ by sea & by land J i.121. -- 3. a superintendent, overseer, manager J ii.305 (executioner of an order); vi.294; Mhvs 30, 31. -- 4. one connected with the execution of an ecclesiastical Act Vin ii.5 (cp. p. 22); Bdhd 106. Kammin
Kammin
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. kamma, cp. kammaka] doing, per- forming, practising J vi.105; Sdhp 196, 292. Kamya
Kamya
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. kām] wishing for, desiring DhsA 365 (sādhu˚; v. l. ˚kāma); kamyā, abl. in the desire for, see next. Kamyā
Kamyā
( -- ˚) in abl. function (of kamyā f. for kamyāya or kamya adj.?) in the desire for: S i.143 = J iii.361 (expld by kāmatāya); Sn 854, 929. Kamyatā (˚) & kammatā
Kamyatā
( -- ˚) & kammatā (Nd) [fr. kām] wish, desire, longing for, striving after; with inf. or equivalent: kathetu˚ VvA 18; muñcitu˚ (+paṭisankhā) Ps i.60, 65; Bdhd 123; asotu˚, adaṭṭhu˚ and adassana˚ Vbh 372. Esp. in definitions, as of chanda: kattu˚ Vbh 208; Bdhd 20; of jappā: puñcikatā sādhu˚ Vbh 351; 361 = Dhs 1059; Nd2 s. v. taṇhāii (: has the better reading mucchañci katā asādhu˚; v. l. pucchañci˚; both Vbh and Dhs have sādu in text which should be corrected to asādhu˚; see detail under puñcikatā); of māna; ketu˚ Nd2 505; Dhs 1116=1233; Vbh 350 sq.; Bdhd 24; of lapanā: pāṭu˚ (v. l. cāṭu˚) Vbh 246= 352. -- As abl. (=kamyā) in dassana˚ S i.193=Th 1, 1241; Sn 121 (expl. as icchāya SnA 179). Cp. kammaññatā & kamma -- sādutā. Kaya
Kaya
[fr. kri] purchase, buying A iii.226 (+vi˚).

-- (a)kkaya, buying & selling Pv i.56 (see also Kh vii.6 and note). -- vikkaya (kraya vikraya) buying & selling, trade in ˚paṭivirata D i.5 = A ii.209= v.205= Pug 58; D i.64; S v.473; Sn 929; J v.243; Khus 114; DhA i.78; PvA 29 (= KhA 212). Kayati
Kayati
[krī, perhaps connected with kṛ] to buy; Inf. ketuŋ J iii.282; cp. kiṇāti. Kayika
Kayika
[fr. krī, cp. BSk. krayika Divy 505] a buyer, trader, dealer Miln 334. Kayin
Kayin
a buyer J vi.110. Kara
Kara
[fr. kṛ] 1. (adj.) ( -- ˚) producing, causing, forming, making, doing, e. g. anta˚ putting an end to; pabhaŋ causing splendour; pāpa˚ doing evil; divā˚ & divasa the day -- maker, i. e. the sun; kaṇhabhāva˚ causing a "black" existence (of pāpakamma) J iv.9; padasandhi˚ forming a hiatus PvA 52; vacana˚, etc. -> 2. (m) "the maker," i. e. the hand Mhvs 5, 255 -- 256; 30, 67. -- atikaraŋ (adv.) doing too much, going too far J i.431; -- dukkara (a) difficult to do, not easy, hard, arduous S i.7; iv.260; A i.286; iv.31, 135; v.202; +durabhisambhavo Sn 429 701; Ud. 61; (n. nt.) something difficult, a difficult task A i.286 (cp. iv.31); J i.395; Miln 121, dukkara -- kārikā "doing of a hard task," exertion, austerity M i.93; Nd2 262b. -- sukara easy to do S i.9; ii.181; Dh 163; Ud 61; na sukaraŋ w. inf. it is not easy to . . . D i.250; A iii.52, 184; iv.334.

-- kaṭaka (m. nt.) a hand -- wheel, i. e. a pulley by which to draw up a bucket of water Vin ii.122; cp. Vin. Texts iii.112; -- ja "born of kamma" in karaja -- kāya the body sprung from action, an expression always used in a contemptible manner, therefore = the impure, vile, low body A v.300; J i.5; Vism 287, 404; DA i.113, 217, 221; DhA i.10; iii.420; DhsA 403. karaja -- rūpa Vism 326. -- tala the palm of the hand Mhbv 6, 34; -- mara "one who ought to die from the hand (of the enemy)," but who, when captured, was spared and employed as slave; a slave J iii.147, 361; iv.220; DhA iii.487; -- ˚ānītā a woman taken in a raid, but subsequently taken to wife; one of the 10 kinds of wives (see itthi) Vin iii.140 (=dhajāhaṭā); -- gāhaŋ gaṇhāti to make prisoner J i.355; iii.361; -- mita "to be measured with (two) hands," in ˚majjhā, a woman of slender waist J v.219; vi.457. Karaka
Karaka1
[Etymology unknown. The Sanskrit is also karaka, and the medieval koṣas give as meaning, besides drinking vessel, also a coco -- nut shell used as such (with which may be compared Lat. carīna, nutshell, keel of a boat; and Gr. ka/ rua, nut.) It is scarcely possible that this could have been the original meaning. The coconut was not cultivated, perhaps not even known, in Kosala at the date of the rise of Pali and Buddhism] 1. Water -- pot, drinking -- vessel ( = : pānīya -- bhājana PvA 251). It is one of the seven requisites of a samaṇa Vin ii.302. It is called dhammakaraka there, and at ii. 118, 177. This means "regulation waterpot" as it was provided with a strainer (parissavana) to prevent injury to living things. See also Miln 68; Pv iii.224; PvA 185. -- 2. hail (also karakā) J iv. 167; Miln 308; Mhvs xii. 9.

-- vassa a shower of hail, hail -- storm J iv.167; Miln 308; DhA i.360. Karakarā
Karakarā
(for kaṭakaṭā, q. v.) (adv.) by way of gnashing or grinding the teeth (cp. Sk. dantān kaṭakaṭāpya), i. e. severely (of biting) J iii.203 (passage ought to be read as karakarā nikhāditvā). -- 196 -- Karañja
Karañja
[cp. Sk. karañja, accord. to Aufrecht, Halāyudha p. 176 the Dalbergia arborea] the tree Pongamia glabra, used medicinally Vin i.201; J vi.518, 519. Karaṇa
Karaṇa
[fr. kṛ, cp. Vedic karaṇa] 1. adj. (f. ī) ( -- ˚) doing, making, causing, producing; as cakkhu˚ ñāṇa˚ (leading to clear knowledge) S iv.331; v.97; It 83; and acakkhu˚ etc. S v.97; nāthā ˚ā dhammā A v.23 (cp. v.89) and thera˚ A ii.22; dubbaṇṇa˚ S v.217; see also D i.245; M. i.15; S v.96, 115; A iv.94; v.268; Miln 289. -> 2. (nt.) ( -- ˚) the making, producing of; the doing, performance of ( = kamma), as bali˚ offering of food =bali kamma) PvA 81; gabbha˚ Sn 927; pānujja˚ Sn 256. 3. (abs.) (a) the doing up, preparing J v.400, vi.270 (of a building: the construction) (b) the doing, performance of, as pāṇâtipātassa k˚ and ak˚ ("commission and omission"); DhA i.214; means of action J iii.92. (c) ttg. the instrumental case (with or without ˚vacana) PvA 33; VvA 25, 53, 162, 174. -- ˚atthe in the sense of, with the meaning of the instrumental case J iii.98; v.444; PvA 35; VvA 304; DhsA 48; Kacc 157. -- 4. ( -- ˚) state, condition; in noun -- abstract function= ˚ttaŋ (cp. kamma I.2) as nānā˚ (=nānattaŋ) difference M ii.128; S iv.294; Bdhd 94; kasi˚ ploughing PvA 66; kattabba˚ (=kattabbattaŋ) "what is to be done," i. e. duty PvA 30; pūjā˚ veneration PvA 30. sakkāra˚ reverence, devotion SnA 284.

Note: in massu˚ and kamma˚ some grammarians have tried to derive k˚ from a root kṛ, to hurt, cut, torture (see Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 15), which is however quite unnecessary [see kamma 3 A (b), kataii 1 (b)]. Karaṇa here stands for kamma, as clearly indicated by semantic grounds as well as by J vi.270 where it explains kappita -- kesa -- massu, and J v.309 & DhA i.253 where massukamma takes the place of ˚karaṇa, and J iii.314, where it is represented by massu -- kutti (C.: massukiriya). Cp. also DA i.137. a˚ Negative in all meanings of the positive, i. e. the non -- performing J i.131; v.222; Nett 81; PvA 59; DhsA 127; non -- undertaking (of business) J i.229; noncommission M i.93; abstaining from Dhs 299. Cpd. -- uttariya (nt.) angry rejoinder, vehement defence DhA i.44. Karaṇīya
Karaṇīya
[grd. of karoti] 1. adj. (a) that ought to be, must or should be done, to be done, to be made ( = kātabbaŋ karaṇârahaŋ KhA 236) Vin i.58; D i.3, cp. Miln 183; A v.210; DA i.7. Often -- ˚ in the sense of "doing, making," as yathā kāma˚ S ii.226; cp. iv.91, 159; "having business" bahu˚ D ii.76; A iii.116; S ii.215; anukampa˚ PvA 61: -- (b) done, in the sense of undoing, i. e. overcome, undone D ii.76 cp. Dial. ii.81 n. -- 2. (m.) one who has still something left to perform (for the attainment of Arahantship, a sekha J iii.23. -- 3. (nt.) (a) what ought to be done, duty, obligation; affairs, business D i.85; ii.68, 74 cp. A iv.16; M i.271; S iii.168; iv.281 cp. Vin iii.12; Vin i.139; A i.58; Sn 143; Sn p. 32 (yan te karanīyaŋ taŋ karohi "do what you have to do"); -- ˚ŋ tīreti to conclude a business Vin. ii.158; J v.298. Kataŋ ˚ŋ done is what was to be done, I have done my task, in freq. formula "khīṇā jāti vusitaŋ brahmacariyaŋ . . ." to mark the attainment of Arahantship D i.84; ii.68=153; Th 2, 223; Vin i.14; Sn p. 16; DA i.226, etc. See Arahant ii.C. -> There are 3 duties each of a samaṇa, farmer and householder enumerated at A i.229; 3 of a bhikkhu A i.230; -- (b) use, need (with instr.): appamādena k˚ S iv.125; cetanāya k˚ A v.2, 312; cp. Miln 5, 78. akaraṇīya 1. (adj.) (a) what ought not to be done, prohibited A i.58; iii.208=DA i.235. -- (b) incapable of being done (c. gen.) It 18. -- (c) improper, not befitting (c. gen.) Vin i.45=216=iii.20; PvA 64. -- (d) not to be "done," i. e. not to be overcome or defeated D ii.76; A iv.113; -- (e) having nothing to do Vin i.154. -> 2. (nt.) a forbidden matter, prohibition Vin ii.278 -> sa˚ 1. having business, busy Vin i.155; -- 2. one who has still something to do (in sense of above 2) D ii.143; Th 1, 1045; DA i.9. Karaṇīyatā
Karaṇīyatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] the fact that something has to be performed, an obligation Vin ii.89, 93; sa˚ being left with something to do Miln 140. Karaṇḍa
Karaṇḍa
(m. nt.) [cp. Sk. karaṇḍa, ˚ka, ˚ikā. The Dhātu- mañjūsā expls k. by "bhājanatthe"] 1. a basket or box of wicker -- work Mhvs 31, 98; Dāvs v.60; DhA iii.18; -- 2. the cast skin, slough of a serpent D i.77 ( = DA i.222 ahi -- kañcuka) cp. Dial. i.88. Karaṇḍaka
Karaṇḍaka
[fr. last] a box, basket, casket, as dussa˚ M i.215 = S v.71=A iv.230 (in simile); S iii.131; v.351 cp. Pug 34; J i 96; iii.527; v.473 (here to be changed into koraṇḍaka); DA i.222 (vilīva˚); SnA 11. Karamanda
Karamanda
[etym.?] a shrub Vism 183 (+kanavīra). Karati
Karati1
[cp. Sk. kṛntati] to cut, injure, hurt; in "karato kārayato chindato chedāpayato . . ." D i.52 = M i.516; S iii.208. Karati
Karati2
(˚tī) (f.) a superior kind of bean, the Dolichos catjang J vi.536 ( = rājamāsa). Karabha
Karabha
the trunk of an elephant; in karabhoru (k˚+ūru) (a woman) with beautiful thighs Mhbv 29. Karamara
Karamara
see Kara. Karaḷa
Karaḷa
(karala) a wisp of grass (tiṇa˚) DhA iii.38; DhsA 272. Karavī
Karavī
[cp. Sk. kala -- kaṇṭha cuckoo, & kalavinka sparrow] the Indian cuckoo J vi.539. Karavīka
Karavīka
same J v.204, 416; Vv 364; Vism 112, 206; VvA 166, 219.

-- bhāṇin speaking like the cuckoo, i. e. with a clear and melodious voice, one of the mahāpurisa -- lakkhaṇas D ii.20 = iii.144=173=M ii.137, etc.; cp. Dial. ii.17 n. and BSk. kalaviṅka -- manojña -- bhāṣin Sp. Av.Ś i.371 (Index p. 225, where references to Lalitavist. are given). Karavīya
Karavīya
(˚iya) = prec. J vi.538. Karavīra
Karavīra
[cp. Sk. karavīra] 1. the oleander, Nerium odorum. Its flower was used especially in garlands worn by delinquents (see kaṇṭha) -- 2. a kind of grass J iv.92. -- patta a kind of arrow M i.429. Karahi
Karahi
(Sk. karhi, when? kar = loc. of pron. st. *quo= Lat. cur why, Goth. hvar, E. where), only in karaha -- ci (karhi cid) at some time, generally preceded by kadāci D i.17; ii.139; M i.177, 454; A i.179; iv.101; Miln 73, 76. Karin
Karin
(adj.) [fr. kara] "one who has a hand," an elephant (cp. hatthin) Mhvs 24, 34; 25, 68; Dāvs iv.2. In cpds. kari.

-- gajjita the cry of the elephant, an elephant's trumpeting Dāvs v.56; -- vara an excellent elephant Mhbv 4, 143; Dāvs iv.2. Kariparibandha
Kari
-- paribandha (adj.) [ = karīsa -- paribaddha] bound up in filth, full of filth, disgusting; Ep. of the body Th 1, 1152. Kari here is abbrev. of karīsa2 (see note ad loc.). Karīsa
Karīsa1
(nt.) a square measure of land, being that space on which a karīsa of seed can be sown (Tamil karīsa), see Rhys Davids, Ancient Coins and Measures of Ceylon, p. 18; J i.94, 212; iv.233, 276; VvA 64. Karīsa
Karīsa2
(nt.) [cp. Sk. karīṣa, to chṛṇatti to vomit, cp. Lat. -- cerda in mūscerda, sūcerda] refuse, filth, excrement, dung D ii.293; J i.5; Vism 259, 358 (in detail); PvA 87, 258; KhA 59; mutta˚ urine and faeces A i.139; Sn 835.

-- magga the anus J iv.327; -- vāca (nt.) a cesspool J iii.263 ( = gūthakūpa); -- vāyin, f. ˚inī diffusing an odour of excrement PvA 87. -- 197 -- Karuṇā
Karuṇā
(f.) [cp. Vedic karuṇa nt. (holy) action; Sk. karuṇā, fr. kṛ. As adj. karuṇa see under 3.] pity, compassion. Karuṇā is one of the 4 qualities of character significant of a human being who has attained enfranchisement of heart (ceto -- vimutti) in the 4 sentiments, viz. mettā k.˚ upekhā muditā Freq. found in this formula with ˚sahagatena cetasā. The first two qualities are complementary, and SnA 128 (on Sn 73) explains k˚ as "ahita -- dukkh -- âpanaya -- kāmatā," the desire of removing bane and sorrow (from one's fellowmen), whilst mettā is expl. as "hita -- sukh -- ûpanayakāmatā," the desire of bringing (to one's fellow -- men) that which is welfare and good. Other definitions are "paradukkhe sati sādhūnaŋ hadayakampanaŋ karotī ti" Bdhd 21; "sattesu k˚ karuṇāyanā karuṇāyitattaŋ karuṇā cetovimutti" as expl. of avihiŋsa dhātu Vbh 87; paradukkhāsahana -- rasā Vism 318. K˚ -- sahagatena cetasā denotes the exalted state of compassion for all beings (all that is encompassed in the sphere of one's good influence: see cātuddisa "extending over the 4, i. e. all, directions): D i.251; iii.78, 50, 224; S iv.296, 322, 351; v.115; A i.183, 196; ii.129, 184; iii.225; v.300, 345; J ii.129; Nd2 on Sn 73; Vbh 273, 280; Dhs 1258. The def. of karuṇā at Vism 318 runs "paradukkhe sati sādhūnaŋ hadaya -- kampanaŋ karoti." Frequently referred to as an ideal of contemplation (in conn. w. bhāvanā & jhāna), so in "karuṇaŋ cetovimuttiŋ bhāveti" S v.119; A i.38; v.360; in k˚ cetovimutti bhāvitā bahulī -- katā, etc. D iii.248; A iii.291; iv.300; in k˚ -- sahagataŋ saddhindriyaŋ A i.42; unspecified S v.131; A iii.185; Nett 121, 124; Ps i.8; k˚+mettā Nett 25; k˚+muditā Bdhd 16 sq., 26 sq., 29; ananta k˚ pañña as Ep. of Buddha Bdhd 1; karuṇaŋ dūrato katvā, without mercy, of the Yamadūtā, messengers of Death Sdhp 287; mahā˚ great compassion Ps i.126, 133; -- ˚samāpatti a ʻ gest, ʼ feat of great compassion: in which Buddha is represented when rising and surveying the world to look for beings to be worthy of his mercy and help D ii.237; Ps. 1, 126 f. DhA i.26, 367; PvA 61, 195; -- 3. As adj. only in cpds. (e. g. ˚vācā merciful speech; neg. akaruṇa merciless Mhbv 85, & ati˚ very merciful J iv.142) and as adv. karuṇaŋ pitifully, piteously, mournfully, in k˚ paridevati J vi.498, 513, 551; Cp. ix.54; also in abl. karuṇā J vi.466. -- See also kāruñña.

-- âdhimutta intent upon compassion D ii.241, 242; -- ânuvattin following the dictates of mercy Dāvs iii.46; -- guṇaja originating in the quality of compassion Sdhp 570; -- jala water of c., shower of mercy Miln 22; Mhbv 16; -- jhāna meditation on pity, ecstasy of c. D ii.237 -- 39; -- ṭṭhāniya worthy of c. PvA 72; -- para one who is highest in compassion, compassionate Sdhp 112, 345; -- bala the power of c. Mhvs 15, 61, 130; Sdhp 577; -- brahmavihāra divine state of pity Vism 319. -- bhāvanā consideration or cultivation of pity Vism 314 sq. -- rasa the sweetness of c. Mhbv 16; -- vihāra (a heart) in the state of c. Vism 324 (& adj. ˚vihārin); DA i.33; -- sāgara an ocean of mercy Mhbv 7; -- sītala "cool with c." +hadaya, whose heart is tempered with mercy Sdhp 33; DA i.1. Karuṇāyati
Karuṇāyati
[v. den. fr. karuṇā; cp. BSk. karuṇāyati Divy 105] to feel pity for, to have compassion on Sn 1065 (˚āyamāna; expl. by Nd2 as anuddayamāno anurakkh˚ anuggaṇh˚ anukamp˚); Vbh 273; Vism 314. Der. ˚āyanā compassionateness Vbh 87 = 273 (and ˚āyitattaŋ ibid.). Karumbhaka
Karumbhaka
a species of rice -- plant of a ruddy colour Miln 252 (see Mil. trsl. ii.73). Karumhā
Karumhā
(pl.) a class of Devas D ii.260. Kareṇu
Kareṇu
[metathesis for kaṇeru, q. v., cp. Sk. kareṇu] elephant, in cpd. -- lolita resounding with the noise made by elephants, of a forest Th 2, 373. Kareṇukā
Kareṇukā
(f.) [fr. kareṇu) a female elephant J ii.343; DhA i.196 (v. l. for kaṇeru). Kareri
Kareri
in Childers the tree Capparis trifoliata, but see Brethren, p. 363, n. 2: musk -- rose tree or "karer"; Th 1, 1062; Ud 31; J v.405; vi.534. Karoṭi
Karoṭi1
(f.) 1. a basin, cup, bowl, dish J i.243; ii.363; iii.225; iv.67; v.289, 290. -- 2. the skull (cp. kaḷopi. On the form cp. Dial. i.227 n.) J vi.592. Karoṭi
Karoṭi2
(m.) a class of genii that formed one of the 5 guards of the devas against the asuras J i.204, associated with the nāgas (cp. Divy 218; and Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 22). As N. of Supaṇṇas (a kind of Garuḍas) expld as "tesaŋ karoṭi nāma pānabhojanaŋ" by C. on J i.204. Kern, Toev. s. v. compares BSk. karoṭapāṇayah a class of Yakṣas MVastu i.30. Karoṭika
Karoṭika
[fr. karoṭi1)] 1. a bowl, basin J iv.68; DhA ii.131 (sappi˚). -- 2. the skull J vi.592; where it may be a helmet in the form of a skull. Karoṭiya
Karoṭiya
= karoṭika 2, J vi.593. Karoti
Karoti
v. irreg. [Sk. karoti, *qṷer to form, to build (or plait, weave? see kamma), cp. kar -- man, Lith. kùrti to build, O.Tr. cruth form; Lat. corpus, with p -- addition, as Sk. kṛpa, kḷp = kṛp. Derived are kalpa > kappa, kalpate > kappeti]. Of the endless variety of forms given by grammarians only the foll. are bona fide and borne out by passages from our texts (when bracketed, found in gram. works only): I. Act. 1. Ind. Pres. karomi, etc. Sn 78, 216, 512, 666= Dh 306=It 42; Opt. kare Dh 42, 43, pl. (kareyyāma) kareyyātha Sn p. 101; or (sing.) kareyya (freq.), kareyyāsi PvA 11; kareyya Sn 920, 923; kuriyā (=Sk. kuryāt) J vi.206; Ppr. karan Dh 136, or karonto (f. karontī) Dh 16, 116. -- 2. Impf. (akara, etc.). -- 3. Aor. (akaŋ) akariŋ, etc., 3rd sing. akāsi Sn 343, 537, 2nd pl. akattha Pv i.112; PvA 45, 75; 3rd pl. akariŋsu; akaŋsu Sn 882; PvA 74; without augment kari DhA ii.59. Prohibitive mā(a)kāsi Sn 339, 1068, etc. -- 4. Imper. karohi Sn p. 32; 1062; karotha Sn 223; KhA 168. -- 5. Fut. karissāmi, etc.; kassāmi Pv iv.139; kāsaŋ J iv.286; vi.36; kāhāmi (in sense of I will do, I am determined to do, usually w. puññaŋ & kusalaŋ poetical only) Pv ii.113; Vv 33192; 2nd sing. kāhasi Sn 427, 428; Dh 154; 1st pl. kāhāma Pv iv.1011. -- 6. Inf. kātuŋ PvA 4, 61, 69, 115, Kh vi.10, etc.; kattuŋ VvA 13; kātave Mhvs 35, 29; Vv 4415 (=kātuŋ); kātuye Th 2, 418. -- 7. Pp. kata, see sep. -- 8. Ger. katvā Sn 127, 661, 705, etc.; katvāna (poet.) Sn 89, 269, Pv i.13; karitvā see iv. II. Med. 1. Ind. pres. (kubbe, etc.) 3rd sing. kubbati Sn 168, 811; 3rd pl. kubbanti Sn 794; or 3rd sing. kurute Sn 94, 796, 819; It. 67; Opt. (kubbe, etc.) 2nd pl. kubbetha Sn 702, 719, 917; It 87; or 3rd sing. kayirā Sn 728= 1051; S i.24; Dh 53, 117; kayirātha (always expl. by kareyya) Dh 25, 117; It 13; Pv i.1111; KhA 224; kubbaye Sn 943. -- Ppr. (kurumāna, kubbāno, karāno) (a) kubbaŋ Sn 844, 913; (a)kubbanto It 86; f. (vi)kubbantī Vv 112; (a)kubbamāna Sn 777, 778, 897; (vi)kubbamāna Vv 331. -- 2. Impf. (akariŋ, 2nd sing. akarase, etc.) 3rd sing. akubbatha Pv ii.1318; 1st pl. akaramhase J iii.26, ˚a DhA i.145. -- 3. Aor. (none) -- 4. Imper. (2nd sing. kurussu, 3rd sing. kurutaŋ, 2nd pl. kuruvho) 3rd sing. kurutaŋ (=Sk. kurutāŋ) J vi.288. -- 5. Fut. (none). III. Pass. 1. Ind. pres. (karīyati, etc.) kayirati Dh 292=Th 1, 635; KhA 168; and kīrati Th 1, 143. Ppr. (karīyamāna, kayīra˚). -> 2. Fut. kariyissati Vin i.107. -- 3. Grd. karaṇīya (q. v.), (kayya) kātabba DhA i.338. IV. Caus. I. (Denom. to kāra) kārayati=kāreti, in origin. meaning of build, construct, and fig. perform, exercise, rule, wield (rajjaŋ): kārehi PvA 81 (of huts), kārayissāmi Pv ii.64 (of doll); kāressaŋ J v.297 (do.), akārayi Pv ii.1310; akārayuŋ Mhvs iv.3; akāresi Mhvs 23, 85; kāretuŋ PvA 74; kārayamāna VvA 9 (of chair); kāretvā (nāmaŋ) PvA 162; karitvā Sn 444 (vasiŋ) 674; 680 (vittiŋ); p. 97 (uttarāsangaŋ). V. Caus. II. Kārāpeti S i.179; PvA 20; Aor. kārāpesi he had (=caused to be) erected, constructed Vin ii.159; fut. kārāpessāmi Mhvs 20, 9; ger. kārāpetvā PvA 123; grd. kārapetabba Vin ii.134.

Meanings of karoti: 1. to build, erect Mhvs 19, 36; 20, 9 (Caus.). -- 2. to act, perform, make, do Vin i.155; J i.24; ii.153 (tathā karomi yathā na . . . I prevent, cp. Lat. facio ne . . .); iii.297; Pv i.88 = ii.619; Mhvs 3, 1; 7, 22; -- 3. to produce DhA i.172; -- 4. to write, compose J vi.410; PvA 287; -- 5. to put on, dress Vin ii.277; J i.9; -- 6. to impose (a punishment) Mhvs 4, 14; -- 7. to turn into (with loc. or two acc.) J ii.32; Mhvs 9, 27; -- 8. to use as (with two acc.) J i.113; ii.24; -- 9. to bring into (with loc.) J v.454 -> 10. to place (with loc.) J v.274; (with acc. of the person) Dh 162. It is very often used periphrastically, where the trsln would simply employ the noun as verb, e. g. kathaŋ k˚ D ii.98; kodhaŋ k˚ and kopaŋ k˚ to be angry J iv.22; vi.257; cayaŋ k˚ to hoard up; corikaŋ k˚ to steal Vin i.75; taṇhaŋ k˚ (c. loc.) to desire J i.5; sītaŋ k˚ to cool D ii.129. -- It is often compd with nouns or adjectives with a change of final vowel to ī (i) uttāni˚ to make clear D ii.105; pākaṭī˚, bahulī˚, muṭṭhī˚, etc. (q. v.). Cp. the same process in conn. with bhavati. -- The meanings of karoti are varied according to the word with which it is connected; it would be impossible and unnecessary to give an exhaustive list of all its various shades. Only a few illustrations may suffice: aŋse k˚ to place on one's shoulder J i.9; antarāyaŋ k˚ to prevent J i.232; ādiŋ k˚ (c. acc.) to begin with; nimittaŋ k˚ to give a hint D ii.103; pātarāsaŋ k˚ to breakfast; mānasaŋ k˚ to make up one's mind; mahaŋ k˚ to hold a festival D ii.165; massuŋ k˚ to trim the beard DhA i.253; musāvādaŋ k˚ to tell a lie J vi.401; rajjaŋ k˚ to reign S i.218; vase k˚ to bring into one's power J i.79; sandhiŋ k˚ to make an agreement Mhvs 16; sinehaŋ k˚ to become fond of J i.190. -- Similarly, cpd with adverbs: alaŋ k˚ to make much of, i. e. to adorn, embellish; dūrato k˚ to keep at a distance, i. e. keep free from PvA 17; Sdhp 287; purak k˚ (purakkharoti) to place before, i. e. to honour Pv iii.71. --

Note phrase kiŋ karissati what difference does it make? (Cp. Ger. was macht's) D i.120; or what about . . . J i.152. -- 198 -- Kalakala
Kalakala
(adj.) [cp. Sk. kala] any indistinct and confused noise Mhbv 23 (of the tramping of an army); in -- mukhara sounding confusedly (of the ocean) ibid. 18. Cp. karakarā. Kalati
Kalati
[kal, kālayati] to utter an (indistinct) sound: pp. kalita Th 1, 22. Kalanda
Kalanda
[cp. Sk. karaṇḍa piece of wood?] heap, stack (like a heap of wood? cp. kalingara) Miln 292 (sīsa˚). Kalandaka
Kalandaka
1. a squirrel Miln 368; -- 2. an (ornamental) cloth or mat, spread as a seat J vi.224; -- nivāpa N. of a locality in Veḷuvana, near Rājagaha, where oblations had been made to squirrels D ii.116; Vin i.137; ii.105, 290, etc. Kalabha
Kalabha
[cp. Sk. kalabha] the young of an elephant: see hatthi˚ and cp. kalāra. Kalamba
Kalamba
(nt.) [cp. Sk. kalamba menispermum calumba, kalambī convolvulus repens] N. of a certain herb or plant (Convolv. repens?); may be a bulb or radish J iv.46 ( = tālakanda), cp. p. 371, 373 (where C expls by tāla -- kanda; gloss BB however gives latā -- tanta); vi.578. See also kaḍamba & kaḷimba.

-- rukkha the Cadamba tree J vi.290. Kalambaka
Kalambaka
= kalamba, the C. tree J vi.535. Kalambukā
Kalambukā
(f.) = kalambaka D iii.87 (vv. ll. kaladukā, kalabakā) the trsln (Dial. iii.84) has "bamboo." Kalala
Kalala
(m. nt.) 1. mud J i.12, 73; Miln 125, 324, 346; Mhbv 150; PvA 215 ( = kaddama); DhA iii.61; iv.25. -- su˚ "well -- muddied" i. e. having soft soil (of a field) Miln 255. -- 2. the residue of sesamum oil (tela˚), used for embalming J ii.155. -- 3. in Embryology: the "soil," the placenta S i.206=Kvu ii.494; Miln 125. Also the first stage in the formation of the foetus (of which the first 4 during the first month are k., abbuda, pesi, ghana, after which the stages are counted by months 1 -- 5 & 10; see Vism 236; Nd1 120; & cp. Miln 40). -- 4. the foetus, appl. to an egg, i. e. the yolk Miln 49. -- In cpds with kar & bhū the form is kalalī˚.

-- gata (a) fallen into the mud Miln 325; -- gahaṇa "mud thicket," dense mud at the bottom of rivers or lakes J i.329; -- kata made muddy, disturbed Vv 8431 (VvA 343); -- bhūta = prec., A i.9, cp. J ii.100; A iii.233; Miln 35; -- makkhita soiled with mud DhA iii.61. Kalasa
Kalasa
(nt.) [cp. Vedic kalaśa] 1. a pot, waterpot, dish, jar M iii.141; J iv.384; Dāvs iv.49; PvA 162. -- 2. the female breasts (likened to a jar) Mhbv 2, 22. Kalaha
Kalaha
[cp. Sk. kalaha, fr. kal] quarrel, dispute, fight A i.170; iv.196, 401; Sn 862, 863 (+vivāda); J i.483; Nd2 427; DhA iii.256 (udaka˚ about the water); iv.219; Sdhp 135. ˚ŋ udīreti to quarrel J v.395; karoti id. J i.191, 404; PvA 13; vaḍḍheti to increase the tumult, noise J v.412; DhA iii.255. -- a˚ harmony, accord, agreement S i.224; mahā˚ a serious quarrel, a row J iv.88.

-- âbhirata delighting in quarrels, quarrelsome Sn 276; Th 1, 958. -- ŋkara picking up a quarrel J vi.45; -- karaṇa quarrelling, fighting J v.413; -- kāraka (f. -- ī) quarrelsome, pugnacious A iv.196; Vin i.328; ii.1; -- kāraṇa the cause or reason of a dispute J iii.151; vi.336; -- jāta "to whom a quarrel has arisen," quarrelling, disputing A i.70; Vin i.341; ii.86, 261; Ud 67; J iii.149; -- pavaḍḍhanī growth or increase of quarrels, prolongation of strife (under 6 evils arising from intemperance) D iii.182 = DhsA 380; -- vaḍḍhana (nt.) inciting & incitement to quarrel J v.393, 394; -- sadda brawl, dispute J vi.336. Kalā
Kalā
[Vedic kalā *squel, to Lat scalpo, Gr. ska/llw, Ohg scolla, scilling, scala. The Dhtp. (no 613) expls kala by "sankhyāne."] 1. a small fraction of a whole, generally the 16th part; the 16th part of the moon's disk; often the 16th part again subdivided into 16 parts and so on: one infinitesimal part (see VvA 103; DhA ii.63), in this sense in the expression kalaŋ nâgghati soḷasiŋ "not worth an infinitesimal portion of" = very much inferior to S i.19; iii.156= v.44=It 20; A i.166, 213; iv.252; Ud 11; Dh 70; Vv 437; DhA ii.63 (=koṭṭhāsa) DhA iv.74. -- 2. an art, a trick (lit. part, turn) J i.163. -- kalaŋ upeti to be divided or separated Miln 106; DhA i.119; see sakala. -- In cpd. with bhū as kalī -- bhavati to be divided, broken up J i.467 (=bhijjati). Cp. vikala. Kalāpa
Kalāpa
[cp. Sk. kalāpa] 1. anything that comprises a number of things of the same kind; a bundle, bunch; sheaf; a row, multitude; usually of grass, bamboo -- or sugar -- canes, sometimes of hair and feathers S iv.290 (tiṇa˚); J i.158 (do.); 25 (naḷa˚), 51 (mālā˚), 100 (uppalakumuda˚); v.39 (usīra˚); Miln 33; PvA 257, 260 (ucchu˚), 272 (veḷu˚); 46 (kesā), 142 (mora -- piñja˚) -- 2. a quiver Vin ii.192; It 68; J vi.236; Miln 418; PvA 154, 169. -- 3. in philosophy: a group of qualities, pertaining to the material body (cp. rūpa˚) Vism 364 (dasadhamma˚) 626 (phassa -- pañcamakā dhammā); Bdhd 77 (rūpa˚) 78, 120.

-- agga (nt.) "the first (of the) bunch," the first (sheaves) of a crop, given away as alms DhA i.98. -- sammasanā grasping (characteristics) by groups Vism 287, 606, 626 sq. -- 199 -- Kalāpaka
Kalāpaka
1. a band, string (of pearls) Vin ii.315; Mhvs 30, 67. -- 2. a bundle, group J i.239. Kalāpin
Kalāpin
(adj.) [fr. kalāpa] having a quiver J vi.49 (acc. pl. ˚ine). f. kalāpinī a bundle, sheaf (yava˚) S iv.201; ii.114 (naḷa˚). Kalābuka
Kalābuka
(nt.) [cp. Sk. kalāpaka] a girdle, made of several strings or bands plaited together Vin ii.136, 144, 319; Kalāya
Kalāya
a kind of pea, the chick -- pea M i.245 (kaḷāya); S i.150; A v.170; Sn p. 124; J ii.75 ( = varaka, the bean Phaseolus trilobus, and kālarāja -- māsa); J iii.370; DhA i,319. Its size may be gathered from its relation to other fruits in ascending scale at A v.170=S i.150= Sn p. 124 (where the size of an ever -- increasing boil is described). It is larger than a kidney bean (mugga) and smaller than the kernel of the jujube (kolaṭṭhi).

-- matta of the size of a chick -- pea S i.150; A v.170; Sn p. 124 (ḷ); J iii.370; DhA i.319. Kalāyati
Kalāyati
[Denom. fr. kalā] to have a measure, to outstrip J i.163 (taken here as "trick, deceive"). Kalāra
Kalāra
in hatthi˚ at Ud 41, expld in C by potaka, but cp. the same passage at DhA i.58 which reads kalabha, undoubtedly better. Cp. kaḷārikā. Kali
Kali
(m.) [cp. Sk. kali] 1. the unlucky die (see akkha); "the dice were seeds of a tree called the vibhītaka . . . An extra seed was called the kali" (Dial. ii.368 n.) D ii.349; J i.380; Dh 252 ( = DhA iii.375) at J vi.228, 282, 357 it is opposed to kaṭa, q. v. -- 2. (=kaliggaha) an unlucky throw at dice, bad luck, symbolically as a piece of bad luck in a general worldly sense or bad quality, demerit, sin (in moral sense) kaliŋ vicināti "gathers up demerit" Sn 658; appamatto kali . . . akkhesu dhanaparājayo . . . mahantataro kali yo sugatesu manam padosaye S i.149=A ii.3=v.171, 174=Sn 659=Nett 132; cp. M iii.170; A v.324; Dh 202 (=DhA iii.261 aparādha). -- 3. the last of the 4 ages of the world (see ˚yuga). -- 4. sinful, a sinner Sn 664 (=pāpaka). -> 5. saliva, spittle, froth (cp. kheḷa) Th 2, 458, 501; J v.134.

-- (g)gaha the unlucky throw at dice, the losing throw; symbolically bad luck, evil consequence in worldly & moral sense (ubhayattha k˚ faring badly in both worlds) M i.403 = 406; iii.170 (in simile). See kaṭaggaha; -- devatā (m. pl.) the devotees of kali, the followers of the goddess kali Miln 191 (see Miln trsl. i.266 n.); -- (p)piya one who is fond of cheating at dice, a gambler Pgdp 68; -- yuga (nt.) one of the 4 (or 8) ages of the world, the age of vice, misery and bad luck; it is the age in which we are Sāsv 4, 44, Vinl 281; -- sāsana (nt.) in ˚ŋ āropeti to find fault with others Vin iv.93, 360. Kalingara
Kalingara
(m. nt.) (BB ḷ) [cp. Sk. kaḍankara & kaḍangara, on which in sense of "log" see Kern, Toev. s. v. kalingara] 1. a log, a piece of wood M i.449, 451; S ii.268; DhA iii.315; often in sense of something useless, or a trifle (combd with kaṭṭha q. v.) Dh 41; DhA i.321 ( = kaṭṭhakhaṇḍa, a chip) Th 2, 468 (id.) as kaṭṭhakalingarāni DhA ii.142. -- 2. a plank, viz. a step in a staircase, in sopāna˚ Vin ii.128, cp. sopāna -- kaḷevara.

-- ûpadhāna a wooden block used for putting one's head on when sleeping S ii.267; Miln 366; -- kaṇḍa a wooden arrow J iii.273 (acittaŋ k˚: without feeling) Kalingu
Kalingu
(m. nt.) [cp. Sk. kalinga & kalingaka] the Laurus camphora, the Indian laurel J vi.537. Kalita
Kalita
[pp. of kalati] sounding indistinctly Th 1, 22. Kalusa
Kalusa
[cp. Sk. kaluṣa] muddy, dirty, impure; in ˚bhāva the state of being turbid, impure, obscured (of the mind) DA i.275. Kalevara
Kalevara
see kaḷebara. Kalya
Kalya
see kalla; -- rūpa pleased, glad Sn 680, 683; a˚ not pleased Sn 691. Kalyatā
Kalyatā
(f.) 1. the state of being sound, able, pliant J ii.12. -- 2. pleasantness, agreeableness, readiness, in a˚ opp. (appld to citta) Dhs 1156; DhsA 377 ( = gilānabhāva). Kalyāṇa
Kalyāṇa
(& kallāṇa) [Vedic kalyāṇa] 1. (adj.) beautiful, charming; auspicious, helpful, morally good. Syn. bhaddaka PvA 9, 116) and kusala (S ii.118; PvA 9, 122); opp. pāpa (S i.83; M i.43; PvA 101, 116 and under ˚mitta). kata˚ = katûpakāra PvA 116 Appld to dhamma in phrase ādi˚ majjhe˚ pariyosāne˚ D i.62 and ≈; S v.152; Sn p. 103; VvA 87; Vism 213 sq. (in var. applications); etc. -- As m. one who observes the sīlapadaŋ (opp. pāpa, who violates it) A ii.222, cp. k˚ -- mittā=sīlâdīhi adhikā SnA 341. -- S iv.303; v.2, 29, 78; A iii.77; iv.361; Vin ii.8, 95; J i.4; Miln 297; -- kata˚ (opp. kata -- pāpa) of good, virtuous character, in phrase k˚ katakusala, etc. It 25, etc. (see kata ii.1 a). k˚ of kitti ( -- sadda) D i.49 (=DA i.146 seṭṭha); S iv.374; v.352; of jhāna (tividha˚) Bdhd 96, 98, 99; of mittā, friends in general (see also cpd.) Dh 78 (na bhaje pāpake mitte . . . bhajetha m˚ kalyāṇe), 116, 375 (= suddhâjīvin); Sn 338. -- 2. (nt.) (a) a good or useful thing, good things Vin i.117; A iii.109; cp. bhadraŋ. -> (b) goodness, virtue, merit, meritorious action J v.49 (kalyāṇā here nt. nom. in sense of pl.; cp. Vedic nt.), 492; -- ˚ŋ karoti to perform good deeds S i.72; A i.138 sq.; Vin i.73; PvA 122. -- (c) kindness, good service J i.378; iii.12 (=upakāra), 68 (˚ŋ karoti). -> (d) beauty, attraction, perfection; enumd as 5 kalyāṇāni, viz. kesa˚, maŋsa˚, aṭṭhi˚, chavi˚, vaya˚ i. e. beauty of hair, flesh, teeth, skin, youth J i.394; DhA i.387.

-- ajjhāsaya the wish or intention to do good DhA i.9; -- -- âdhimuttika disposed towards virtue, bent on goodness S ii.154, 158; It 70, 78; Vbh 341; -- kāma desiring what is good A iii.109; -- kārin (a) doing good, virtuous (opp. pāpa˚) S i.227, cp. J ii.202 = iii.158; DhsA 390; (m.) who has rendered a service J vi.182; -- carita walking in goodness, practising virtue Vbh 341; -- jātika one whose nature is pleasantness, agreeable J iii.82; -- dassana looking nice, lovely, handsome Sn 551=Th 1, 821 (+kañcanasannibhattaca); -- dhamma (1) of virtuous character, of good conduct, virtuous Vin i.73; iii.133; S v.352; Pug 26; It 96; Pv iv.135; Miln 129; DhA i.380; J ii.65 (=sundara˚), PvA 230 (= sundara -- sīla); sīlavā+k˚ (of bhikkhu, etc.) M i.334; S iv.303; PvA 13. -- k˚ena k˚atara perfectly good or virtuous A ii.224. -- (2) the Good Doctrine DhA i.7. -- ˚tā the state of having a virtuous character A ii.36; -- pañña "wise in goodness" possessed of true wisdom Th 1, 506; It 97; -- paṭipadā the path of goodness or virtue, consisting of dāna, uposathakamma & dasakusalakammapathā J iii.342; -- paṭibhāṇa of happy retort, of good reply A iii.58, cp. Miln 3; -- pāpaka good and bad J v.238; vi.225; Kvu 45; (nt.) goodness and evil J v.493; -- pīti one who delights in what is good Sn 969; -- bhattika having good, nice food Vin ii.77; iii.160 (of a householder); -- mitta 1. a good companion, a virtuous friend, an honest, pure friend; at Pug 24 he is said to "have faith, be virtuous, learned, liberal and wise"; M i.43 (opp. pāpa˚); S i.83, 87 (do.); A iv.30, 357; Pug 37, 41; J iii.197; Bdhd 90; a˚ not a virtuous friend DhsA 247. -- 2. as t.t. a spiritual guide, spiritual adviser. The Buddha is the spiritual friend par excellence, but any other Arahant can act as such S v.3; Vism 89, 98, 121; cp. kammaṭṭhāna -- dāyaka. -- mittatā friendship with the good and virtuous, association with the virtuous S i.87; such friendship is of immense help for the attainment of the Path and Perfection S v.3, 32; it is the sign that the bhikkhu will realize the 7 bojjhangas S v.78=101; A i.16, 83, it is one of the 7 things conducive to the welfare of a bhikkhu D iii.212; A iv.29, 282; Th 2, 213; It 10; Dhs 1328=Pug 24; Vism 107. -- a˚ not having a virtuous friend and good adviser DhsA 247. -- rūpa beautiful, handsome J iii.82; v.204; -- vākkaraṇa, usually comb. with ˚vāca, of pleasant conversation, of good address or enunciation, reciting clearly D i.93, 115; A ii.97; iii.114, 263; iv.279; Vin ii.139; Miln 21; DA i.263 (=madhura -- vacana); a˚ not pronouncing or reciting clearly D i.94. 122; -- ˚tā the fact of being of good and pleasing address A i.38; -- vāca, usually in form. k˚ k˚ -- vākkaraṇo poriyā vācāya samannāgato D i.114; A ii.97; iii.114, 195, 263; iv.279; Vin ii.139; DA i.282; -- sadda a lucky word or speech J ii.64; -- sampavanka a good companion A iv.357 (in phrase k˚ -- mitta k˚ -- sahāya k˚ -- s˚); Pug 37; -- ˚tā companionship with a virtuous friend S i.87. -- sahāya a good, virtuous companion A iv.284; 357; Pug 37; cp. prec., -- ˚tā=prec. S i.87; -- sīla practising virtue, of good conduct, virtuous Th 1, 1008; It 96. -- 200 -- Kalyāṇaka
Kalyāṇaka
(adj.) [fr. last] good, virtuous DA i.226; DhsA 32. Kalyāṇatā
Kalyāṇatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. kalyāṇa] beauty, goodness, virtuousness Vism 4 (ādi); k˚ -- kusala clever, experienced in what is good Nett 20. Kalyāṇin
Kalyāṇin
(adj.) [fr. kalyāṇa] (a) beautiful, handsome Vv iv.5; -- (b) auspicious, lucky, good, proper J v.124; Ud 59; -- (c) f. [cp. -- ī Vedic kalyāṇī] a beautiful woman, a belle, usually in janapada˚ D i.193 = M ii.40; S ii.234; J i.394; v.154. Kalla & Kalya
Kalla1
& Kalya (adj.) [cp. Sk. kalya] 1. well, healthy, sound Vin i.291. -- 2. clever, able, dexterous Miln 48, 87. -- 3. ready, prepared J ii.12, cp. -- citta. -- 4. fit, proper, right S ii.13 (pañha). -- nt. kallaŋ it is proper, befitting (with inf. or inf. -- substitute): vacanāya proper to say D i.168, 169; A i.144; abhinandituŋ D ii.69; -- kallaŋ nu [kho] is it proper? M iii.19; S iv.346; Miln 25. -- a˚ 1. not well, unfit Th 2, 439, cp. ThA 270. -> 2. unbecoming, unbefitting D ii.68; J v.394.

-- kāya sound (in body), refreshed Vin i.291; -- kusala of sound skill (cp. kallita) S iii.265; -- citta of ready, amenable mind, in form. k˚, mudu -- citta, vinīvaraṇa˚, udagga˚, etc. D i.110 = 148=ii.41=A iv.209=Vin i.16=ii.156; VvA 53, 286; Vv 5019 (=kammaniya -- citta "her mind was prepared for, responsive to the teaching of the dhamma"); PvA 38. -- cittatā the preparedness of the mind (to receive the truth) J ii.12 (cp citta -- kalyatā); -- rūpa 1. of beautiful appearance Th 1, 212, -- 2. pleased, joyful (kalya˚) Sn 680, 683, 691; -- sarīra having a sound body, healthy J ii.51; a˚ -- tā not being sound in body, ill -- health VvA 243. Kalla
Kalla2
(m. nt.) ashes J iii.94 (for kalala), also in ˚ -- vassa a shower of ashes J iv.389. Kallaka
Kallaka
(adj.) [fr. last] in a˚ unwell, indisposed Vin iii.62; J iii.464; DhsA 377. Kallatā
Kallatā
(f.) see kalyatā; -- a˚ unreadiness, unpreparedness, indisposition (of citta), in expln of thīna Nd2 290 = Dhs 1156=1236=Nett 86; DhsA 378; Nett 26. The reading in Nd2 is akalyāṇatā, in Dhs akalyatā; follows akammaññatā. Kallahāra
Kallahāra
[cp. Sk. kahlāra, the P. form to be expld as a diaeretic inversion kalhāra > kallahāra] the white esculent water lily J v.37; Dpvs xvi.19. Kallita
Kallita
(nt.) [fr. kalla] pleasantness, agreeableness S iii.270, 273 (samādhismiŋ -- ˚kusala); A iii.311; iv.34 (id.). Kallola
Kallola
[cp. Sk. kallola] a billow, in -- ˚mālā a series of billows Dāvs iv.44. Kaḷāya
Kaḷāya
= kalāya. Kaḷāra
Kaḷāra
(adj.) [cp. Sk. karāla projecting (of teeth), whereas kaḍāra means tawny] always referring to teeth: with long, protruding teeth, of Petas (cp. attr. of the dog of the "Underworld" PvA 152: tikhiṇâyatakaṭhina -- dāṭho and the figure of the witch in fairy -- tales) J v.91 ( = nikkhantadanto); vi.548 (= sūkara -- dāṭhehi samannāgato p. 549); Pv ii.41 (=k˚ -- danto PvA 90). Kaḷārikā
Kaḷārikā
(f.) [fr. last, lit. with protruding teeth] a kind of large (female) elephant M 1. 178 (so read with v. l. for kāḷ˚). Cp. kalāra. Kaḷingara
Kaḷingara
= kalingara. Kaḷimb(h)aka
Kaḷimb(h)aka
(cp. kaḍamba, kalamba) a mark used to keep the interstices between the threads of the kaṭhina even, when being woven Vin ii.116, 317 (v. l. kaḷimpaka). Kaḷīra
Kaḷīra
the top sprout of a plant or tree, esp. of the bamboo and cert. palm trees (e. g. coco -- nut tree) which is edible Sn 38 (vaŋsa˚ = veḷugumba Nd2 556 and p. 58); Th 1, 72; J i.74, cp. iii.179; vi.26; Miln 201 (vaŋsa˚); Vism 255 (vaŋsa˚ -- cakkalaka, so read for kalira˚; KhA 50 at id. passage reads kaḷīra -- daṇḍa).

-- (c)chejja (nt.) "the cutting off of the sprout," a kind of torture Miln 193, cp. Miln. trsl. i.270 and kadalīccheda. Kaḷebara
Kaḷebara
(: kale˚ and kalevara) (m. & nt.) [cp. BSk. kaḍe- bara Av. Ś. ii.26] 1. the body S i.62 = A ii.48;=iv.429 =M i.82; J ii.437, iii.96, 244; Vism 49, 230. -- 2. a dead body, corpse, carcass; often in description of death: khandhānaŋ bhedo k˚assa nikkhepo, D ii.355= M. i.49=Vbh 137; Th 2, 467; J iii.180, 511; v.459; Mhvs 2010; 3781; PvA 80. Cp. kuṇapa. -- 3. the step in a flight of stairs M ii.92, cp. kalingara. Kaḷopī
Kaḷopī
( = khaḷopi) f. 1. a vessel, basin, pot: see cpds. - 2. a basket, crate (= pacchi ThA 219; J v.252) M i.77, 342; S i.236=Th 2, 283 (where osenti is to be corr. to openti); J v.252. -- On the form of the word (=karoṭi?) see Trenckner J.P.T.S. 1908, 109 and Davids, Dial. i.227. kaḷopī (as khaḷopī) is expld at Pug A p. 231 as "ukkhalī, pacchi vā."

-- mukha the brim of a pan or cooking vessel D i.166 = M i.77=342=A i.295= ii.206 (kumbhi -- m˚+kaḷopim˚); -- hattha with a vessel or basket in his hand A iv.376. Kavaca
Kavaca
(nt.) [cp. Sk. kavaca] a mail, a coat of mail, armour D ii.107 = Ud 64 (appld to existence); Th 1, 614 (of sīla); J iv.92, 296; Miln 199, 257; Vism 73.

-- jālikā a mail -- coat Miln 199. Kavandha
Kavandha
(m. nt.) [cp. Sk. kavandha & kabandha] 1. the (headless) trunk of the body, endowed with the power of motion Vin iii.107; cp. S ii.260 (asīsaka˚); Miln 292; DhA i.314. -- 2. a headless dwarf, whose head has been crushed down into his body J v.424, 427 (cp. the story of Dhanu, the Rākṣasa who was punished by having his head and thighs forced into his body, Raghuvaŋsa xii.57). Kavāṭa
Kavāṭa
(m. nt.) 1. the panels of the door, the door proper, not the aperture Vin ii.114, 120, 207, 208 (see Vin ii.148 for the description of a door) iv.269, 304 (˚baddha = āvasatha); J i.19; Nd2 2351d; Vism 28 (˚koṇa doorcorner). -- 2. dvāra˚ a door -- post J i.63; ii.334; PvA 280. -- 3. a window Mhvs ix.17; -- ˚ŋ paṇāmeti to open the door Vin ii.114, 120, 207; ˚ŋ ākoṭeti to knock at the door D i.88 (=DA i.252); Vin ii.208. -- akavāṭaka (adj.) having no doors, doorless Vin ii.148, 154 (v. l. for akkavāta Text).

-- piṭṭha the panels and posts of a door; the door and the door -- posts Vin i.47, 48 = ii.208, 218; -- baddha "door -- bound," closed, secure Vin iv.292 (see also above). -- 201 -- Kavāṭaka
Kavāṭaka
= kavāṭa Vin ii.148; DA i.62 (nīvaraṇa˚). Kavi
Kavi
[Vedic kavi] a poet S i.38; ii.267; Dāvs i.10; four classes enumd at A ii.230 & DA i.95, viz. 1. cintā˚ an original p. 2. suta˚ one who puts into verse what he Las heard. 3. attha˚ a didactic p. 4. paṭibhāṇa˚ an improvisor.

-- kata composed by poets S ii.267; A i.72. Kavya
Kavya
[cp. Vedic kavya wise; sacrificer] poetry; ballad, ode (cp. kabba) J vi.213, 216.

-- kāra a poet J vi.216. Kaviṭṭha
Kaviṭṭha
[cp. kapittha] the elephant -- apple tree, Feronia elephantum J v.38 (˚vana). Kasaka
Kasaka
see kassaka. Kasaṭa
Kasaṭa
(metathesis of sakaṭa, cp. Trenckner, Miln p. 423) 1. (adj.) bad, nasty; bitter, acrid; insipid, disgusting A i.72; J ii.96; 159. -- 2. (m.) (a) fault, vice, defect M i.281; Ps ii.87. -- (b) leavings, dregs VvA 288 (v. l. sakaṭa). -- (c) something bitter or nasty J ii.96; v.18. -- (d) bitter juice J ii.105 (nimba˚). -- sa˚ faulty, wrong, bitter to eat, unpalatable Miln 119.

-- ôdaka insipid, tasteless water J ii.97. Kasati
Kasati
[kṛṣ or karṣ] to till, to plough S i.172, 173 = Sn 80; Th i.531; J i.57; ii.165; vi.365. -- kassate (3rd sing. med.) Th 1, 530. -- pp. kattha (q. v.) Caus. II. kasāpeti Miln 66, 82; DhA i.224. Kasana
Kasana
(nt.) ploughing, tilling J iv.167; vi.328, 364; Vism 384 (+vapana sowing). Kasambu
Kasambu
[Derivation uncertain] anything worthless, rubbish, filth, impurity; fig. low passions S i.166; Sn 281 = Miln 414=A iv.172; Vism 258 (maŋsa˚), 259 (parama˚).

-- jāta one whose nature is impurity, in comb. brahmacāripaṭiñño antopūti avassuto k˚ S iv.181; A ii.240; iv.128, 201; Vin ii.236; Pug 27, 34, 36; Vism 57 (+avassuta pāpa). ˚ka -- jāta ibid. in vv. ll. Kasā
Kasā
(f.) [Vedic kaśā] a whip Vin i.99 (in Uddāna); M i.87, etc.; Dh 143; Miln 197. -- -- kasāhi tāḷeti to whip, lash, flog as punishment for malefactors here, as well as in Niraya (see kamma -- karaṇā) M i.87 = A i.47= ii.122, etc.; PvA 4 (of a thief scourged on his way to the place of execution); DhA ii.39 (id.).

-- niviṭṭha touched by the whip, whipped Dh 144 ( = DhA iii.86); -- pahāra a stroke with the whip, a lash J iii.178; -- hata struck with the whip, scourged Vin i.75; 91=322; Sdhp 147. Kasāya
Kasāya
and Kasāva [Derivation uncertain. The word first appears in the late Vedic form kaṣāya, a decoction, distillation, essence; used figy of evil. The old Pali form is kasāva] 1. a kind of paste or gum used in colouring walls Vin ii.151. -- 2. an astringent decoction extracted from plants Vin i.201, 277; J v.198. -- 3. (of taste), astringent DhS 629; Miln 65; DhA ii.31. -> 4. (of colour) reddish -- yellow, orange coloured Vin i.277. -- 5. (ethical) the fundamental faults (rāga, dosa, moha) A i.112; Dh 10; Vbh 368. -- a˚ faultless, flawless, in akasāvattaŋ being without defect A i.112 (of a wheel, with -- sa˚ ibid.); -- sa˚ faulty DhA i.82; -- mahā˚ wicked J iv.387. In cpds. both forms, viz. (kasāya) -- yoga an astringent remedy J v.198 (kasāva˚ ibid.); -- rasa reddishyellow dye J ii.198; (kasāva) -- ôdaka an astringent decoction Vin i.205; -- gandha having a pungent smell Vin i.277; -- rasa having an astringent taste ibid.; -- vaṇṇa of reddish -- yellow colour ibid. Kasāyatta
Kasāyatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. kasāya] astringency Miln 56. Kasi
Kasi
and Kasī (f.) [fr. kasāti] tilling, ploughing; agricul- ture, cultivation M ii.198; S i.172, 173 = Sn 76 sq.; Vin iv.6; Pv i.56 (k˚, gorakkha, vaṇijjā); PvA 7; Sdhp 390 (k˚, vaṇijjā); VvA 63. -- ˚ŋ kasati to plough, to till the land J i.277; Vism 284.

-- kamma the act or occupation of ploughing, agriculture J ii.165, 300; iii.270. -- karaṇa ploughing, tilling of the field PvA 66; -- khetta a place for cultivation, a field PvA 8 (kasī˚); -- gorakkha agriculture and cattle breeding D i.135; -- bhaṇḍa ploughing implements DhA i.307. Kasiṇa
Kasiṇa1
[Vedic kṛtsna] (adj.) entire, whole J iv.111, 112. Kasiṇa
Kasiṇa2
[Deriv. uncertain] (nt.) one of the aids to kam- maṭṭhāna the practice by means of which mystic meditation (bhāvanā, jhāna) may be attained. They are fully described at A v.46 sq., 60; usually enumerated as ten [sāvakā dasa k˚ -- āyatanāni bhāventi]; paṭhavī˚, āpo˚, tejo˚, vāyo˚, nīla˚, pīta˚, lohita˚, odāta˚, ākāsa˚, viññāṇa˚ -- that is, earth, water, fire, air; blue, yellow, red, white; space, intellection (or perhaps consciousness) M ii.14; D iii.268, 290; Nett 89, 112; Dhs 202; Ps i.6, 95; cp. Manual 49 -- 52; Bdhd 4, 90 sq., 95 sq. -- For the last two (ākāsa˚ and viññāṇa˚) we find in later sources āloka˚ and (paricchinn') ākāsa˚ Vism 110; cp. Dhs trsl. 43 n. 4, 57 n. 2; Cpd. 54, 202. -- Eight (the above omitting the last two) are given at Ps i.49, 143, 149. -- See further J i.313; iii.519; DhsA 186 sq. There are 14 manners of practising the kasiṇas (of which the first nine are: k˚ -- ânulomaŋ; k˚ -- paṭilomaŋ; k˚ -- ânupaṭilomaŋ; jhānânulomaŋ; jh˚paṭi˚; jh˚ -- ânupaṭi˚; jh˚ -- ukkantikaŋ; k˚ ukk˚; jh˚k˚ -- ukk˚) Vism 374; cp. Bdhd 5, 101 sq., 104, 152. -> Nine qualities or properties of (paṭhavi -- ) kasiṇa are enumd at Vism 117. -- Each k. is fivefold, according to uddhaŋ, adho, tiriyaŋ, advayaŋ, appamāṇaŋ; M ii.15, etc. -- kasiṇaŋ oloketi to fix one's gaze on the particular kasiṇa chosen J v.314; ˚ŋ samannāharati to concentrate one's mind on the k. J iii.519.

-- āyatana the base or object of a kasiṇa exercise (see above as 10 such objects) D iii.268; M ii.14; Ps i.28, etc.; -- ārammaṇa = ˚āyatana Vism 427 (three, viz. tejo˚, odāta˚, āloka˚). -- kamma the k. practice J i.141; iv.306; v.162, 193. -- jhāna the k. meditation DhsA 413. -- dosa fault of the k. object Vism 117, 123 (the 4 faults of paṭhavī -- kasiṇa being confusion of the 4 colours). -- parikamma the preliminary, preparatory rites to the exercise of a kasiṇa meditation, such as preparing the frame, repeating the necessary formulas, etc. J i.8, 245; iii.13, 526; DhsA 187; -- ˚ŋ katheti to give instructions in these preparations J iii.369; ˚ŋ karoti to perform the k -- preparations J iv.117; v.132, 427; vi.68; -- maṇḍala a board or stone or piece of ground divided by depressions to be used as a mechanical aid to jhāna exercise. In each division of the maṇḍala a sample of a kasiṇa was put. Several of these stone maṇḍalas have been found in the ruins at Anurādhapura. Cp. Cpd. 54 f. 202 f. J iii.501; DhA iv.208. -- samāpatti attainment in respect of the k. exercise Nd2 4668 (ten such). Kasita
Kasita
(pp. of kasati) ploughed, tilled Anvs 44; -- a˚ un- tilled ibid. 27, 44. -- Cp. vi˚. Kasira
Kasira
(adj.) [Probably fr. Vedic kṛcchra, the deriv. of which is uncertain] miserable, painful, troubled, wretched A iv.283; Sn 574; J ii.136; iv.113 = vi.17; Pv iv.121 (=PvA 229 dukkha). -- adv. kasirā (abl.) with difficulty J v.435; -- kasirena (instr.) D i.251; M i.104; S i.94; Vin i.195; J i.338; iii.513. a˚ without pain, easy, comfortable J vi.224 (=niddukkha); -- lābhin obtaining without difficulty (f˚ inī A iv.342) in formula akicchalābhī akasiralābhī etc. M i.33; S ii.278; A i.184; ii.23, 36; iv.106; Ud 36; Pug 11, 12.

-- ābhata amassed with toil and difficulty (of wealth) J v.435; -- vuttika finding it hard to get a livelihood A i.107 = Pug 51. -- 202 -- Kaseruka
Kaseruka
[etym. connected with Sk. kaseru backbone?] a plant, shrub SnA 284 (v. l. kaŋsīruka for kiŋsuka?). See also kaṭeruha. Kassaka
Kassaka
[fr. kasati] a husbandman, cultivator, peasant, farmer, ploughman D i.61 (k˚ gahapatiko kārakārako rāsi -- vaḍḍhako); A i.241; A. i.229, 239 (the three duties of a farmer); S i.172 = Sn 76; iii.155 (v. l. for T. kasaka); iv. 314; Vin iv.108; Bdhd 96; DA i.170; often in similes, e. g. Pv i.11; ii.968 (likeness to the doer of good works); Vism 152, 284, 320. -- vaṇṇa (under) the disguise of a peasant S i.115 (of Māra). Kassati
Kassati
[kṛṣ] see ava˚, anu˚ (aor. anvakāsi), pari˚; other- wise kasati; cp. also kissati. Kassāma
Kassāma
fut. of karoti. Kahaŋ
Kahaŋ
[cp. Vedic kuha; for a: u cp. kad˚.] interr. adv. where? whither? Vin i.217; D i.151; Sn p. 106; J ii.7; iii.76; v.440. -- k -- nu kho where then? D i.92; ii.143, 263. Kahāpaṇa
Kahāpaṇa
[doubtful as regards etym.; the (later) Sk. kārṣāpaṇa looks like an adaptation of a dial. form] 1. A square copper coin M ii.163; A i.250; v.83 sq.; Vin ii.294; iii. 238; DhsA 280 (at this passage included under rajataŋ, silver, together with loha -- māsaka, dārumāsaka and jatu -- māsaka); S i.82; A i.250; Vin ii.294; iv.249; J i.478, 483; ii.388; Mhvs 3014. The extant specimens in our museums weigh about 5/6 of a penny, and the purchasing power of a k. in our earliest records seems to have been about a florin. -- Frequent numbers as denoting a gift, a remuneration or alms, are 100,000 (J ii.96); 18 koṭis (J i.92); 1,000 (J ii.277, 431; v.128, 217; PvA 153, 161); 700 (J iii.343); 100 (DhA iii.239); 80 (PvA 102); 10 or 20 (DhA iv.226); 8 (which is considered, socially, almost the lowest sum J iv.138; i.483). A nominal fine of 1 k. ( = a farthing) Miln 193. -- ekaŋ k˚ pi not a single farthing J i.2; similarly eka -- kahāpaṇen' eva Vism 312. -- Various qualities of a kahāpaṇa are referred to by Bdhgh in similes at Vism 437 and 515. Black kahāpaṇas are mentioned at DhA iii.254. -- See Rh. Davids, Ancient Measures of Ceylon; Buddh. India, pp. 100 -- 102, fig. 24; Miln trsl. i.239.

-- gabbha a closet for storing money, a safe DhA iv.104; -- vassa a shower of money Dh 186 ( = DhA iii.240). Kahāpaṇaka
Kahāpaṇaka
(nt.) N. of a torture which consisted in cutting off small pieces of flesh, the size of a kahāpaṇa, all over the body, with sharp razors M i.87 = A i.47, ii.122; cp. Miln 97, 290, 358. Kā
Kā
(indecl.) interj. imitating the crow's cry: kā kā J iv.72. Kā˚
Kā˚
in composition, is assimilated (and contracted) form of kad˚ as kāpuppha, kāpurisa. Kāka
Kāka
[onomat., cp. Sk. kāka; for other onomat. relatives see note on gala] the crow; freq. in similes: S i.124 = Sn 448; J i.164. Its thievish ways are described at DhA iii.352; said to have ten bad qualities A v.149; J i.342; iii.126; kākā vā kulalā vā Vin iv.40. -- As bird (of the dead) frequenting places of interment and cremation, often with other carcass -- eating animals (sigāla, gijjha) Sn 201; PvA 198 (=dhanka); cp. kākoḷa. -- In cpds. often used derisively. -- f. kākī J ii.39, 150; iii.431.

-- āmasaka "touching as much as a crow," attr. of a person not enjoying his meals DhA iv.16; DhsA 404; -- uṭṭepaka a crow -- scarer, a boy under fifteen, employed as such in the monastery grounds Vin i.79 cp. 371. -- opamā the simile of the crow DhA ii.75. -- orava "crow -- cawing," appld to angry and confused words Vin i.239, cp. iv.82; -- ôlūka crows and owls J ii.351; DhA i.50; Mhbv 15; -- guyha (tall) enough to hide a crow (of young corn, yava) J ii.174; cp. J. trsl. ii.122; -- nīḷa a crow's nest J ii.365; -- paññā "crow -- wisdom," i. e. foolishness which leads to ruin through greed J v.255, 258; cp. vi.358; -- paṭṭanaka a deserted village, inhabited only by crows J vi. 456; -- pāda crow's foot or footmark Vism 179 (as pattern); -- peyya "(so full) that a crow can easily drink of it," full to the brim, overflowing, of a pond: samatittika k˚ "with even banks and drinkable for crows" (i. e. with the water on a level with the land) D i.244; S ii.134 (do.); D ii.89; M i.435; A iii.27; J ii.174; Ud 90; cp. note to J. trsl. ii.122; PvA 202. See also peyya. -- bhatta "a crow's meal," i. e. remnants left from a meal thrown out for the crows J ii.149; -- vaṇṇa "crow -- coloured" N. of a king Mhvs 2211; -- vassa the cry of a crow Vin ii.17; -- sīsa the head of a crow J ii.351; as adj.: having a crow's head, appld to a fabulous flying horse D ii.174; cp. J ii.129; -- sūra a "crow -- hero," appl. to a shameless, unconscientious fellow Dh 244; DhA iii.352; -- ssaraka (having a voice) sounding like a crow Vin i.115. Kākacchati
Kākacchati
[derived by Fausböll fr. kās, to cough; by Trenckner fr. krath; by Childers & E. Müller fr. kath; should it not rather be a den. fr. kakaca a saw?] to snore Vin iv.355; A iii.299; J i.61, 160 ( = ghurughurûpassāsa; cp. DA i.42 ghurû -- ghurûpassāsī); i.318; vi.57; Miln 85; Vism 311. Kākaṇa
Kākaṇa
(nt.) [kā (for kad˚) + kaṇa = less than a particle] a coin of very small value Sdhp 514. Kākaṇikā
Kākaṇikā
(f.) = prec. J i.120, 419; vi.346; DA i.212; DhA i.391; VvA 77=DhA iii.108. From the latter passages its monetary value in the opinion of the Commentator may be guessed at as being 1/8 of a kahāpaṇa; it occurs here in a descending line where each succeeding coin marks half the value of the preceding one, viz., kahāpaṇa, aḍḍha, pāda, māsaka, kākaṇikā, upon which follows mudhā "for nothing."

-- agghanaka "not even a farthing's worth," worth next to nothing J vi.346. Kākola
Kākola
and Kākoḷa [Onomat. The Lit. Sk. has the same form] a raven, esp. in his quality as bird of prey, feeding on carrion (cp. kāka) J iii.246 ( = vanakāka); v.268, 270 (gijjha k˚ ā ca ayomukhā . . . khādanti naraŋ kibbisakārinaŋ); vi.566.

-- gaṇā (pl.) flocks of ravens Sn 675; VV5215 ( = VvA 227). Kāca
Kāca1
[Der. unknown. The word first occurs in the Śat Br. & may well be non -- Aryan] a glass -- like substance made of siliceous clay; crystal Vin i.190; ii.112 (cp. Divy 503, kācamaṇi rock -- crystal). -- a˚ not of glass or quartz, i. e. pure, clear, flawless, appl. to precious stones D ii.244 = J ii.418 (= akakkasa) Sn 476. In the same sense also MVastu i.164.

-- ambha (nt.) red crystal J vi.268 ( = rattamaṇi); -- maya made of crystal, crystalline Vin i.190; ii.112. Kāca
Kāca2
[cp. Sk. kāca & kāja] a pingo, a yoke, a carrying- pole, usually made of bamboo, at both ends of which baskets are hung (double pingo). Besides this there is a single pingo (ekato -- kājo) with only one basket and "middle" p. (antarā˚) with two bearers and the basket suspended in the middle Vin ii.137; J i.154; v.13, 293, 295 sq., 320, 345; PvA 168.

-- daṇḍaka the pole of a pingo DA i.41. Kācanā
Kācanā
(f.) [fr. kāca2] balancing like carrying on a kāca, fig. deliberation, pondering Vbh 352 = Vism 27. -- 203 -- Kācin
Kācin
(adj.) [fr. kāca1], only neg. a˚ free from quartz, free from grit, flawless Vv 601 ( = niddosa VvA 253). Kāja
Kāja
= kāca2, i. e. carrying -- pole M iii.148; J i.9; iii.325; v.200; Dpvs xii.3; Mhvs 5, 24; DhA iv.232.

-- koṭi the end of a carrying -- pole J i.9; v.200. -- hāraka a pingo -- bearer DhA iv.128. Kāṭakoṭacikā
Kāṭa
-- koṭacikā [kāṭa + koṭacikā] a low term of abuse, "pudendum virile & muliebre" Vin iv.7 (buddhagh iv.354: kātan ti purisa -- nimittaŋ); cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 89. Kāṇa
Kāṇa
(adj.) [cp. Sk. kāṇa] blind, usually of one eye, occa- sionally of both (see PugA 227) S i.94; Vin ii.90 = A i.107=ii.85=Pug 51 (in expln of tamaparāyaṇa purisa); Th 2, 438; J i.222 (one -- eyed); vi.74 (of both eyes); DhA iii.71.

-- kaccha Np. Sdhp 44; -- kacchapa "the blind turtle" in the well -- known parable of a man's chances of human rebirth after a state of punishment Th 2, 500 ( = ThA 290); Miln 204; DhsA 60; cp. M iii.169=S v.455. Kātabba
Kātabba
(adj. -- n.) (grd. of karoti) that which ought to, can or must be done (see karoti) J i.264, etc. Also as kattabba PvA 30. Kātuŋ
Kātuŋ
and Kātu˚ (in compn with kāma) inf. of karoti.

-- kāma desirous of doing or making, etc. Mhvs 3734 (a˚). PvA 115; -- kāmatā the desire to do, etc. J iv.253; v.364. See also kattu˚ in same combns. Kātuye
Kātuye
is Vedic inf. of karoti Th 2, 418 (in ThA 268 taken as kātuŋ ayye!). Kādamba
Kādamba
[cp. Sk. kādamba] a kind of goose with grey wings J v.420; VvA 163. Kādambaka
Kādambaka
made of Kadamba wood; also ˚ya for ˚ka; both at J v.320. Kānana
Kānana
(nt.) [cp. Sk. kānana] a glade in the forest, a grove, wood Sn 1134 ( = Nd2 s. v. vanasaṇḍa); Th 2, 254 (=ThA 210 upavana); J vi.557; Sdhp 574. Kānāmā
Kānāmā
f. of konāma of what name? what is her (or your) name? Vin ii.272, 273; J vi.338. Kāpilanī
Kāpilanī
patron. f. of Kapila; the lady of the Kapila clan Th 2, 65. Kāpilavatthava
Kāpilavatthava
(adj.) of or from Kapilavatthu, belonging to K. D ii.165, 256; S iv.182. Kāpurisa
Kāpurisa
[kad + purisa] a low, vile, contemptible man, a wretch Vin ii.188; D iii.279; S i.91, 154; ii.241; v.204; Th 1, 124, 495; J ii.42; vi.437; Pv ii.930 (PvA 125 = lāmaka˚); sometimes denoting one who has not entered the Path A iii.24; Th 2, 189. Kāpotaka
Kāpotaka
(adj.) [fr. kapota] pigeon -- coloured, grey, of a dull white, said of the bones of a skeleton D i.55; Dh 149 ( = DhA iii.112). Kāpotikā
Kāpotikā
(f.) [of doubtful origin, fr. kapota, but probably popular etym., one may compare Sk. kāpiśāyana, a sort of spirituous liquor Halāyudha 2, 175, which expresses a diff. notion, i. e. fr. kapi] a kind of intoxicating drink, of a reddish colour (like pigeons' fect) Vin iv.109, cp. J i.360 (surā). Kāma
Kāma
(m. nt.) [Dhtp (603) & Dhtm (843) paraphrase by "icchāyaŋ," cp. Vedic kāma, kam = Idg. *qā] to desire, cp. Lat. carus, Goth. hōrs, E whore. -- 1. Objective: pleasantness, pleasure -- giving, an object of sensual enjoyment; -- 2. subjective: (a) enjoyment, pleasure on occasion of sense, (b) sense -- desire. Buddhist commentators express 1 and 2 by kāmiyatī ti kāmo, and kametī ti kāmo Cpd. 81, n. 2. Kāma as sense -- desire and enjoyment plus objects of the same is a collective name for all but the very higher or refined conditions of life. The kāma -- bhava or -- loka (worlds of sensedesire) includes 4 of the 5 modes (gati's) of existence and part of the fifth or deva -- loka. See Bhava. The term is not found analyzed till the later books of the Canon are consulted, thus, Nd1 1 distinguishes (1) vatthukāmā: desires relating to a base, i. e. physical organ or external object, and (2) kilesakāmā: desire considered subjectively. So also Nd2 202, quoted DhA ii.162; iii.240; and very often as ubho kāmā. A more logical definition is given by Dhammapāla on Vv 11 (VvA 11). He classifies as follows: 1. manāpiyā rūpādi -- visayā. -- 2. chandarāga. -- 3. sabbasmiŋ lobha. -- 4. gāmadhamma. -- 5. hitacchanda. -- 6. serībhāva, i. e. k. concerned with (1) pleasant objects, (2) impulsive desire, (3) greed for anything, (4) sexual lust, (5) effort to do good, (6) self -- determination.

In all enumerations of obstacles to perfection, or of general divisions and definitions of mental conditions, kāma occupies the leading position. It is the first of the five obstacles (nīvaraṇāni), the three esanās (longings), the four upādānas (attachments), the four oghas (floods of worldly turbulence), the four āsavas (intoxicants of mind), the three taṇhās, the four yogas; and k. stands first on the list of the six factors of existence: kāmā, vedanā, saññā, āsavā, kamma, dukkha, which are discussed at A iii.410 sq. as regards their origin, difference, consequences, destruction and remedy. -> Kāma is most frequently connected with rāga (passion), with chanda (impulse) and gedha (greed), all expressing the active, clinging, and impulsive character of desire. -> The foll. is the list of synonyms given at various places for kāma -- cchanda: (1) chanda, impulse; (2) rāga, excitement; (3) nandī, enjoyment; (4) taṇhā, thirst; (5) sineha, love; (6) pipāsā, thirst; (7) pariḷāha, consuming passion; (8) gedha, greed; (9) mucchā, swoon, or confused state of mind; (10) ajjhosāna, hanging on, or attachment Nd1. At Nd2 200; Dhs 1097 (omitting No. 8), cp. DhsA 370; similarly at Vism 569 (omitting Nos. 6 and 8), cp. Dhs 1214; Vbh 375. This set of 10 characteristics is followed by kām -- ogha, kāma -- yoga, kām -- upādāna at Nd2 200, cp. Vism 141 (kām -- ogha, ˚āsava, ˚upādāna). Similarly at D iii.238: kāme avigata -- rāga, ˚chanda, ˚pema, ˚pipāsa, ˚pariḷāha, ˚taṇha. See also kāma -- chanda below under cpds. In connection with synonyms it may be noticed that most of the verbs used in a kāma -- context are verbs the primary meaning of which is "adhering to" or "grasping," hence, attachment; viz. esanā (iṣ to Lat ira), upādāna (upa + ā + dā taking up), taṇhā (tṛṣ, Lat. torreo = thirst) pipāsā (the wish to drink), sineha (snih, Lat. nix=melting), etc. -- On the other hand, the reaction of the passions on the subject is expressed by khajjati "to be eaten up" pariḍayhati "to be burnt," etc. The foll. passage also illustrates the various synonymic expressions: kāme paribhuñjati, kāmamajjhe vasati, kāma -- pariḷāhena pariḍayhati, kāmavitakkehi khajjati, kāma -- pariyesanāyā ussukko, A i.68; cp. M i.463; iii.129. Under this aspect kāma is essentially an evil, but to the popular view it is one of the indispensable attributes of bliss and happiness to be enjoyed as a reward of virtue in this world (mānussakāmā) as well as in the next (dibbā kāmā). See kāmāvacara about the various stages of next -- world happiness. Numerous examples are to be found in Pv and Vv, where a standing Ep. of the Blest is sabbakāmasamiddha "fully equipped with all objects of pleasure," e. g. Pv i.105; PvA 46. The other -- world pleasures are greater than the earthly ones: S v.409; but to the Wise even these are unsatisfactory, since they still are signs of, and lead to, rebirth (kāmûpapatti, It (4): api dibbesu kāmesu ratiŋ so nâdhigacchati Dh 187; rāgaŋ vinayetha mānusesu dibbesu kāmesu cāpi bhikkhu Sn 361, see also It 94. -- Kāma as sensual pleasure finds its most marked application in the sphere of the sexual: kāmesu micchācārin, transgressing in lusts, sinning in the lusts of the flesh, or violating the third rule of conduct equivalent to abrahmacariyā, inchastity (see sīla) Pug 38, 39; It 63, etc. itthi -- kāmehi paricāreti "he enjoys himself with the charms of woman" S iv.343. Kāmesu brahmacariyavā practising chastity Sn 1041. Kāmatthā for sexual amusement A iii.229.

Redemption from kāma is to be effected by selfcontrol (saŋyama) and meditation (jhāna), by knowledge, right effort and renunciation. "To give up passion" as a practice of him who wishes to enter on the Path is expressed by: kāmānaŋ pahānaŋ, kāmasaññānaŋ pariññā, kāma -- pipāsānaŋ -- paṭivinayo, kāmavitakkānaŋ samugghāto kāma -- pariḷāhānaŋ vūpasamo Vin iii.111; -- kāmesu (ca) appaṭibaddhacitto "uddhaŋsoto" ti vuccati: he whose mind is not in the bonds of desire is called "one who is above the stream" Dh 218; cp. Th 2, 12; -- tasmā jantu sadā sato kāmāni parivajjaye Sn 771; -- yo kāme parivajjeti Sn 768 = Nett 69. -- nikkhamma gharā panujja kāme Sn 359; -- ye ca kāme pariññāya caranti akutobhayā te ve pāragatā loke ye pattā āsavakkhayaŋ A iii.69. -- Kāmānaŋ pariññaŋ paññāpeti Gotamo M i.84; cp. A v.64; kāme pajahati: S i.12=31; Sn 704; kāmānaŋ vippahāna S i.47; -- ye kāme hitvā agihā caranti Sn 464; -- kāmā nirujjhanti (through jhāna) A iv.410; kāme panudati Dh 383=S i.15 (context broken), cp. kāmasukhaŋ analaŋkaritvā Sn 59; -- kāmesu anapekkhin Sn 166=Ś i.16 (abbrev.); S ii.281; Sn 857; -- cp. rāgaŋ vinayetha . . . Sn 361. vivicc' eva kāmehi, aloof from sensuous joys is the prescription for all Jhāna -- exercise.

Applications of these expressions: -- kāmesu palāḷita A iii.5; kāmesu mucchita S i.74; kāmālaye asatta S i.33; kāmesu kathaŋ nameyya S i.117; kāmesu anikīḷitāvin S i.9 (cp. kela); kittassa munino carato kāmesu anapekhino oghatiṇṇassa pihayanti kāmesu gathitā pajā Sn 823 (gadhitā Nd1); -- kāmesu asaññata Sn 243; -- yo na lippati kāmesu tam ahaŋ brūmi brāhmaṇaŋ Dh 401; -- Muni santivādo agiddho kāme ca loke ca anûpalitto Sn 845; kāmesu giddha D iii.107; Sn 774; kāmesu gedhaŋ āpajjati S i.73; -- na so rajjati kāmesu Sn 161; -- kāmānaŋ vasam upāgamum Sn 315 ( = kāmānaŋ āsattataŋ pāpuniŋsu SnA 325); kāme parivajjeti Sn 768, kāme anugijjhati Sn 769.

Character of Kāmā. The pleasures of the senses are evanescent, transient (sabbe kāmā aniccā, etc. A ii.177), and of no real taste (appāsādā); they do not give permanent satisfaction; the happiness which they yield is only a deception, or a dream, from which the dreamer awakens with sorrow and regret. Therefore the Buddha says "Even though the pleasure is great, the regret is greater: ādīnavo ettha bhīyyo" (see k -- sukha). Thus kāmā as kālikā (needing time) S i.9, 117; aniccā (transitory) S i.22; kāmā citrā madhurā "pleasures are manifold and sweet" (i. e. tasty) Sn 50; but also appassādā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā: quot. M i.91; see Nd2 71. Another passage with var. descriptions and comparisons of kāma, beginning with app' assādā dukkhā kāmā is found at J iv.118. -- atittaŋ yeva kāmesu antako kurute vasaŋ Dh 48; -- na kahāpaṇavassena titti kāmesu vijjati appasādā dukkhā kāmā iti viññāya paṇḍito "not for showers of coins is satisfaction to be found in pleasures -- of no taste and full of misery are pleasures: thus say the wise and they understand" Dh 186; cp. M i.130; Vin ii.25 (cp. Divy 224). -- Kāmato jāyatī soko kāmato jāyatī bhayaŋ kāmato vippamuttassa n'atthi soko kuto bhayan ti "of pleasure is born sorrow, of pleasure is born fear" Dh 215. -> Kāmānam adhivacanāni, attributes of kāma are: bhaya, dukkha, roga, gaṇḍa, salla, sanga, panka, gabbha A iv.289; Nd2 p. 62 on Sn 51; same, except salla & gabbha: A iii.310. The misery of such pleasures is painted in vivid colours in the Buddha's discourse on pains of pleasures M i.85 and parallel passages (see e. g. Nd2 199), how kāma is the cause of egoism, avarice, quarrels between kings, nations, families, how it leads to warfare, murder, lasciviousness, torture and madness. Kāmānaŋ ādīnavo (the danger of passions) M i.85 sq. = Nd2 199, quot. SnA 114 (on Sn 61); as one of the five anupubbikathās: K˚ ādīnavaŋ okāraŋ saŋkilesaŋ A iv.186, 209, 439; -- they are the leaders in the army of Māra: kāmā te paṭhamā senā Sn 436; -- yo evamvādī . . . n'atthi kāmesu doso ti so kāmesu pātavyataŋ āpajjati A i.266=M i.305 sq.

Similes. -- In the foll. passage (following on appassādā bahudukkhā, etc.) the pleasures of the senses are likened to: (1) aṭṭhi -- kankhala, a chain of bones; -> (2) maŋsapesi, a piece of (decaying) flesh; -- (3) tiṇ'ukkā, a torch of grass; (4) angāra -- kāsu, a pit of glowing cinders; -- (5) supina, a dream; (6) yācita, beggings; -- (7) rukkha -- phala, the fruit of a tree; -- (8) asisūna, a slaughter -- house; -- (9) satti -- sūla, a sharp stake; -- (10) sappa -- sira, a snake's head, i. e. the bite of a snake at Vin ii.25; M i.130; A iii.97 (where aṭṭhisankhala); Nd2 71 (leaving out No. 10). Out of this list are taken single quotations of No. 4 at D iii.283; A iv.224 = v.175; No. 5 at DhA iii.240; No. 8 at M i.144; No. 9 at S i.128=Th 2, 58 & 141 (with khandhānaŋ for khandhāsaŋ); No. 10 as āsīvisa (poisonous fangs of a snake) yesu mucchitā bālā Th 2, 451, and several at many other places of the Canon.

Cases used adverbially: -- kāmaŋ acc. as adv. (a) yathā kāmaŋ according to inclination, at will, as much as one chooses S i.227; J i.203; PvA 63, 113, 176; yena kāmaŋ wherever he likes, just as he pleases A iv.194; Vv i.11 ( = icchānurūpaŋ VvA 11) -- (b) willingly, gladly, let it be that, usually with imper. S i.222; J i.233; iii.147; iv.273; VvA 95; kāmaŋ taco nahāru ca aṭṭhi ca avasissatu (avasussatu in J) sarīre upasussatu maŋsa -- lohitaŋ "willingly shall skin, sinews and bone remain, whilst flesh and blood shall wither in the body" M i.481; A i.50; S ii.28; J i.71, 110; -- kāmasā (instr.) in same sense J iv.320; vi.181; -- kāmena (instr.) do. J v.222, 226; -- kāmā for the love of, longing after (often with hi) J iii.466; iv.285, 365; v.294; vi.563, 589; cp. Mhv iii.18, 467. -- akāmā unwillingly D i.94; J vi.506; involuntarily J v.237.

˚kāma (adj.) desiring, striving after, fond of, pursuing, in kāma -- kāma pleasure -- loving Sn 239 (kāme kāmayanto SnA 284); Dh 83 (cp. on this passage Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 39 -- 41); same expln as prec. at DhA ii.156; Th 2, 506. -- atthakāma well -- wishing, desirous of good, benevolent J i.241; v.504 (anukampakā +); sic lege for attakāmarūpā, M i.205, iii,155, cf. S i.44 with ib. 75; A ii.21; Pv iv.351; VvA 11 (in quotation); PvA 25, 112; mānakāma proud S i.4; lābhakāma fond of taking; grasping, selfish A ii.240; dūsetu˚ desiring to molest Vin iv.212; dhamma˚ Sn 92; pasaŋsa˚ Sn 825. So frequently in comb. w. inf., meaning, willing to, wishing to, going to, desirous of: jīvitu˚, amaritu˚, dātu˚, daṭṭhu˚, dassana˚, kātu˚, pattu˚, netu˚, gantu˚, bhojetu˚, etc. -- sakāma ( -- adj.) willing J v.295. -- akāma 1. not desiring, i. e. unwilling: M ii.181; mayhaŋ akāmāya against my wish ( = mama anicchantiyā) Pv ii.107, J v.121, 183, etc. 2. without desire, desireless, passionless Sn 445. -- nikkāma same Sn 1131.

-- agga (nt.) the greatest pleasure, intense enjoyment M ii.43; Vv 163 ( = VvA 79, attributed to the Paranimmita -- vasavattino -- devā); -- aggi the fire of passion J v.487; -- ajjhosāna (nt.) attachment to lust and desire, No. 10 in kāmacchanda series (see above); -- âdhikaraṇa having its cause in desire M i.85; S i.74; -- âdhimutta, bent upon the enjoyment of sensual pleasures A iii.168; J vi.159; -- ânusārin pursuing worldly pleasures J ii.117; -- andha blinded by passion Ud 76=Th 1, 297; -- âbhibhū overcoming passions, Ep. of the Buddha D ii.274; -- âbhimukha bent upon lust, voluptuous PvA 3; -- âvacara "having its province in kāma," belonging to the realm of sensuous pleasures. This term applies to the eleven grades of beings who are still under the influence of sensual desires and pleasures, as well as to all thoughts and conditions arising in this sphere of sensuous experience D i.34 (of the soul, expld DA 120: cha k˚ -- devapariyāpanna); J i.47; Dhs 1, 431; Ps 1, 84, 85, 101; Vbh 324; Vism 88, 372, 452 (rūpa˚, arūpa˚, lokuttara), 493 (of indriyas), 574; PvA 138. -- kamma an action causing rebirth in the six kāma -- worlds Dhs 414, 418, 431; -- devatā PvA 138 (+brahmādevatā) and -- devā the gods of the pleasure -- heavens J i.47; v.5; vi.99; Vism 392; or of the kāmâvacara -- devaloka J vi.586, -- bhūmi and -- loka the plane or world of kāma Ps i.83; J vi.99; see also avacara; -- âvacaraka belonging to the realm of kāma J vi.99; Sdhp 254 (˚ika); -- assāda the relish of sensual pleasures PvA 262; DA i.89, 311; -- ātura affected by passion, love -- sick J iii.170; -- ārāma pleasure -- loving A iv.438 (gihī k -- bhogī, ˚ratā, ˚sammuditā); -- ālaya, the abode of sensual pleasure (i. e. kāma -- loka) S i.33=Sn 177; Sn 306; -- āvaṭṭa the whirlpool of sensuality J ii.330; -- āsava the intoxication of passion, sensuality, lusts; def. as kāmesu kāma -- chando, etc. (see above k -- chando) Vbh 364, 374; Dhs 1097; as the first of four impurities, viz. k˚, bhava˚, diṭṭhi˚, avijjā˚ at Vin iii.5 (the detachment from which constitutes Arahantship); Vbh 373; Dhs 1096, 1448; as three (prec. without diṭṭhi˚) at It 49; Vbh 364; cp. D i.84; ii.81; iii.216; M i.7; -- itthi a pleasure -- woman, a concubine Vin i.36; J i.83; v.490; vi.220; -- upabhoga the enjoyment of pleasures VvA 79; -- upādāna clinging to sensuality, arising from taṇhā, as k˚ diṭṭhi˚ sīlabbata˚, attavāda˚ D iii.230; M i.51; Vbh 136, 375; Vism 569; -- ûpapatti existence or rebirth in the sensuous universe. These are three: (1) Paccupaṭṭhita -- kāmā (including mankind, four lowest devalokas, Asuras, Petas and animals), (2) Nimmāna -- ratino devā, (3) Paranimmita -- vasavattino devā D iii.218; It 94. -- ûpasaŋhita endowed with pleasantness: in formula rūpā (saddā, etc.) iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā k˚ rajaniyā "forms (sounds, etc.=any object of sense), desirable, lovely, agreeable, pleasant, endowed with pleasantness, prompting desires" D i.245=M i.85; 504; D ii.265; M iii.267; VvA 127. -- esanā the craving for pleasure. There are three esanās: kāma˚, bhava˚, brahmacariya˚ D iii.216 270; A ii.42; Vbh 366; It 48; S v.54; -- ogha the flood of sensual desires A iii.69; D iii.230, 276; Vbh 375; Vism 141; DhsA 166; Nd2 178 (viz. kām˚, bhav˚, diṭṭh˚, avijj˚). -- kaṇṭaka the sting of lust Ud 27; -- kara the fulfilment of one's desires J v.370 (=kāmakiriyā) -- karaṇīya in yathā˚ pāpimato the puppet of the wicked (lit. one with whom one can do as one likes) M i.173; It 56; -- kalala the mud of passions J iii.293; -- kāra the fulfilment of desires Sn 351=Th 1, 1271; -- kārin acting according to one's own inclination Th 1. 971; or acting willingly DA i.71; -- koṭṭhāsa a constituent of sensual pleasure (=kāmaguṇa) J iii.382; v.149; DA i.121; PvA 205; -- kopa the fury of passion Th 1, 671; -- gavesin, pleasure -- seeking Dh 99=Th 1, 992. -- gijjha J i.210 and -- giddha greedy for pleasure, craving for love J iii.432; v.256; vi.245; -- giddhimā, same J vi.525. -- giddhin f. ˚inī same Mhvs vi.3. -- guṇā (pl.) always as pañca: the five strands of sensual pleasures, viz., the pleasures which are to be enjoyed by means of the five senses; collectively all sensual pleasures. Def. as cakkhuviññeyyā rūpā, etc. A iii.411; D i.245; ii.271; iii.131, 234; Nd2 s. v.; Ps i.129; as manāpiyehi rūpâdīhi pañcahi kāma -- koṭṭhāsehi bandhanehi vā DA i.121, where it is also divided into two groups: mānusakā and dibbā. As constituents of kāmarāga at Nett 28; as vana (desire) Nett 81. -- In the popular view they are also to be enjoyed in "heaven": saggaŋ lokaŋ upapajjissāmi tattha dibbehi pañcahi k -- guṇehi samappito samangibhūto paricāressāmī ti Vin iii.72; mentioned as pleasures in Nandana S i.5; M i.505; A iii.40, iv.118; in various other connections S iv.202; Vv 307; Pv iii.71 (˚ehi sobhasi; expl. PvA 205 by kāma -- koṭṭhāsehi); PvA 58 (paricārenti); cp. also kāma -- kāmin. As the highest joys of this earth they are the share of men of good fortune, like kings, etc. (mānusakā k˚ guṇā) S v.409; A v.272, but the same passage with "dibbehi pañcahi k˚ -- guṇehi samappita . . ." also refers to earthly pleasures, e. g. S i.79, 80 (of kings); S v.342 (of a Cakkavatti); A ii.125; iv.55, 239; v.203; of the soul D i.36; Vbh 379; other passages simply quoting k -- g˚ as worldly pleasures are e. g. S i.16=Sn 171; S i.92; iv.196. 326; A iii.69 (itthirūpasmiŋ); D i.60, 104; Sdhp 261. In the estimation of the early Buddhists, however, this bundle of pleasures is to be banned from the thought of every earnest striver after perfection: their critique of the kāmaguṇā begins with "pañc' ime bhikkhave kāmaguṇā . . ." and is found at various places, e. g. in full at M i.85=Nd2 s. v.; M i.454; ii.42; iii.114; quoted at M i.92; A iii.411; iv.415, 430, 449, 458. Other expressions voicing the same view are: gedho pañcannaŋ k˚ -- guṇānaŋ adhivacanaŋ A iii.312 sq.; asisūnā . . . adhivac˚ M i.144; nivāpo . . . adhivac˚ M. i.155; sāvaṭṭo . . . adhivac˚ It 114. In connection w. rata & giddha PvA 3; pahīna M iii.295; gathita & mucchita M i.173; mā te kāmaguṇe bhamassu cittaŋ "Let not thy heart roam in the fivefold pleasures" Dh 371; cittassa vossaggo Vbh 370; asantuṭṭha Vbh 350. See also Sn 50, 51, 171, 284, 337. -- guṇika consisting of fivefold desire, appl. to rāga S ii.99; J iv.220; Dhs A.371; -- gedha a craving for pleasure S i.100; ThA 225; -- cāgin he who has abandoned lusts Sn 719. -- citta impure thought J ii.214; -- chanda excitement of sensual pleasure, grouped as the first of the series of five obstacles (pañca nīvaraṇāni) D i.156, 246; iii.234, 278; A i.231; iv.457; A i.134=Sn 1106; S i.99; v.64; Bdhd 72, 96, 130; Nd2 200, 420A. Also as the first in the series of ten fetters (saŋyojanāni) which are given above (p. 31) as synonyms of kāma. Enumerated under 1 -- 10 at Nd2 200 as eight in order: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10 (omitting pipāsā and gedha) Vbh 364; Dhs 1114, 1153; Nd2 ad chandarāga and bhavachanda; in order: 2, 3, 5, 9, 6, 7, 10, 4 at A ii.10; -- as nine (like above, omitting gedha) at Vbh 374; Dhs 1097; -- as five in order: 1, 5, 9, 6, 7, (cp. above passage A ii.10) at M i.241; -- as four in order: 1, 5, 9, 7 at S iv.188; -- as six nīvaraṇas (5 + avijjā) at Dhs 1170, 1486. See also D i.246; iii.234, 269; Ps i.103, 108; ii.22, 26, 44, 169; Vism 141; Sdhp 459; -- jāla the net of desires Th 1, 355; -- taṇhā thirst after sensual pleasures; the first of the three taṇhās, viz. kāma˚, bhava˚, vibhava˚ D iii.216, 275; It 50; Vbh 365 (where defined as kāmadhātupaṭisaŋyutto rāgo); Dhs 1059, 1136 (cp. taṇhā: jappāpassage); as the three taṇhā, viz. ponobbhavikā, nandirāga -- sahagatā, tatratatr' âbhinandinī at Vin i.10= Vbh 101; as k -- taṇhāhi khajjamāno k -- pariḷāhena pariḍayhamāno M i.504. See also D ii.308; S i.131; A ii.11; Th 2, 140; J ii.311; v.451; Miln 318. -- da granting desires, bestowing objects of pleasure and delight; Ep. of Yakkhas and of Vessantara (cp. the good fairy) J vi.498, 525; Mhvs 19, 9; as sabba˚ Pv ii.138; -- dada= prec. Pv ii.918; PvA 112; J vi.508; of a stone Miln 243, 252; of Nibbāna Miln 321; Kh viii.10: esa devamanussānaŋ sabbakāmadado nidhi "this is the treasure which gives all pleasures to gods and men"; -- dukkha the pain of sensual pleasures J iv.118; -- duha granting wishes, like a cow giving milk J v.33; vi.214; f. ˚duhā the cow of plenty J iv.20; -- dhātu "element of desire." i. e. 1. the world of desire, that sphere of existence in which beings are still in the bonds of sensuality, extending from the Avīci -- niraya to the heaven of the Paranimmita -- vasavatti -- devas S ii.151; Th 1, 181; also 2. sensual pleasures, desires, of which there are six dhātus, viz. kāma˚, vyāpāda, vihiŋsā˚, nekkhamma˚, avyāpāda˚, avihiŋsā˚, Vbh 86; Nett 97; D iii.215= Vbh 363 (as the first three=akusaladhātus); Vbh 404. See also D iii.275; Th 1, 378; J v.454; Vism 486 (cp. Vbh 86). -- nandī sensual delight (cp. ˚chanda) A ii.11; Dhs 1114, etc. -- nidānaŋ acc. adv. as the consequence of passion, through passion, M i.85, etc. (in kāmaguṇā passage); -- nissaraṇa deliverance from passion, the extinction of passion It 61 (as three nissaraṇīyā dhātuyo), cp. A iii.245; -- nissita depending on craving Miln 11; -- nīta led by desire J ii.214, 215; -- panka the mire of lusts Sn 945; Th 2, 354; J v.186, 256; vi.230, 505; Mhbv 3; -- paṭisandhi -- sukhin finding happiness in the association with desire M iii.230; -- pariḷāha the flame or the fever of passion M i.242, 508; S iv.188; A i.68 (pariḍayhati, khajjati, etc.); A ii.11; Vin iii.20; Nd2 374 (comd with ˚palibodha); DhA ii.2; see also kāmacchanda passage. -- pāla the guardian of wishes, i. e. benefactor J v.221; -- pipāsā thirst for sensuality M i.242; A ii.11, and under k˚ -- chanda; -- bandha Ud 93, and -- bandhana the bonds of desire J vi.28, also in the sense of k˚ -- guṇā, q. v.; -- bhava a state of existence dominated by pleasures. It is the second kind of existence, the first being caused by kamma Vbh 137. It rests on the effect of kamma, which is manifested in the kāma -- dhātu A i.223. It is the first form of the 3 bhavas, viz. kāma˚, rūpa˚, arūpa˚ Vin i.36; D iii.216; A iv.402; Vism 572. Emancipation from this existence is the first condition to the attainment of Arahantship: kāmabhave asatta akiñcana Sn 176, 1059, 1091 (expl. SnA 215: tividhe bhave alaggana); Bdhd 61. ˚parikkhīṇa one who has overcome the desire -- existence Dh 415=Sn 639. -- bhoga enjoyment of sensual pleasures, gratification of desires S i.74 (sāratta -- ˚esu giddhā kāmesu mucchitā); Th 2, 464; It 94 ( -- ˚esu paṇḍito who discriminates in worldly pleasures); J ii.65; -- bhogin enjoying the pleasures of the senses Vin i.203, 287; ii.136, 149; D iii.124, 125; Miln 243, 350, as Ep. of the kāmûpapatti -- beings It 94; as ten kinds A v.177; as bringing evil, being blameworthy S i.78; cp. A iv.281, 438; S iv.333 sq.; A iii.351; Th 2, 486; J iii.154. ye keci kāmesu asaññatā janā avītarāgā idha k -- bhogino (etc.) A ii.6, cp. ii.17. kāmabhogī kām'ārāmo kāmarato kāma -- sammudita A iv.439; -- ˚seyyā sleeping at ease, way of lying down, the second of the four ways of sleeping (kāmabhogīseyyā vāmena passena) A ii.244; -- bhojin=˚bhogin Ud 65; -- magga the path of sensuous pleasures J v.67; -- matta intoxicated with sensuous pleasures J vi.231; -- mucchā sensual stupor or languor S iv.189; A ii.11; Dhs 1114, etc. (see kāmacchanda); -- yoga application to sensuous enjoyment, one of the four yogas, viz. kāma˚, bhava˚, diṭṭhi˚, avijjā˚ (cp. āsavā) A ii.10; only the first two at It 95; cp. D iii.230, 276; S v.59; DhsA 166; -- rata delighting in pleasures J v.255; -- rati amorous enjoyment (as arati) Th 2, 58 and 141; J i.211; iii.396; iv.107. -- n'atthi nissaraṇaŋ loke kiŋ vivekena kāhasi bhuñjassu kratiyo mâhu pacchânutāpinī S i.128. mā pamādam anuyuñjetha, mā kāmaratisanthavaŋ appamatto hi jhāyanto pappoti paramaŋ sukhan S i.25=Dh 27=Th 1, 884; -- rasa the taste of love J ii.329; iii.170; v.451; -- rāga sensual passion, lust. This term embraces the kāmaguṇā & the three rāgas: Dhs 1131, 1460; Nett 28; M i.433 sq.; D iii.254, 282; S i.22= A iii.411; S i.13, 53; iii.155; Th 2, 68, 77; PvA 6; see also k -- chanda passage. Relinquishing this desire befits the Saint: Sn 139 (˚ŋ virājetvā brahmalokûpago). As k -- rāgavyāpāda Dhs 362; SnA 205; -- rūpa a form assumed at will VvA 80, or a form which enjoys the pleasures of heaven Vbh 426; -- lāpin talking as one likes D i.91 (=DA i.257 yadicchaka -- bhāṇin); -- lābha the grasping of pleasures, in ˚abhijappin A iii.353; -- loka the world of pleasures=kāmâvacara, q. v. Sdhp 233, 261; -- vaṇṇin assuming any form at will, Protean J ii.255= iii.409=Vv 33191; J v.157; Vv 163; VvA 80, 143, 146; -- vasika under the influence of passions J ii.215; -- vitakka a thought concerning some sensuous pleasure, one of the three evil thoughts (kāma˚ vyāpāda˚ vihiŋsā˚) D iii.215, 226; M i.114; A i.68; J i.63; iii.18, 375; iv.490; vi.29; It 82, 115; Vbh 362; Miln 310; -- vega the impulse of lust J vi.268; -- sagga the heaven of sensuous beings, there are six q. v. under sagga J i.105; ii.130; iii.258; iv.490; vi.29, 432; at all these passages only referred to, not enumd; cp. k -- âvacara; -- sankappa-bahula full of aspirations after pleasure A iii.145, 259; D iii.215; -- sanga attachment to passion Ud 75; -- saññā lustful idea or thought; one of the three akusalasaññās (as vitakka) D i.182; iii.215; M ii.262; S i.126; Vbh 363; Th 1, 1039; virata k˚ āya S i.53=Sn 175; -- saññojana the obstacle or hindrance formed by pleasures; ˚âtiga Ep. of Arahant, free of the fetters of lust A iii.373 (+ kāmarāgaŋ virājetvā); -- sineha love of pleasures Dhs 1097 (also as ˚sneha M i.241; S iv.188; A ii.10); see k -- chanda; -- sukha happiness or welfare arising from (sensual) pleasure, worldly happiness, valued as mīlha˚, puthujjana˚, anariya˚, and not worth pursuit: see kāmaguṇā, which passage closes: yaŋ ime pañca k -- guṇe paṭicca uppajjati sukhaŋ somanassaŋ idaŋ vuccati k -- sukhaŋ A iv.415; S iv.225; varying with . . . somanassaŋ ayaŋ kāmānaŋ assādo M i.85, 92, etc. -- As kāma˚ and nekkhamma˚ A i.80; as renounced by the Saint: anapekkhino k˚ ŋ pahāya Dh 346= S i.77; M iii.230; Sn 59 (see Nd2 s. v.). See also S iv.208; M ii.43; Th 2, 483; Vv 617; J ii.140; iii.396; v.428; kāmasukhallik' ânuyoga attachment to worldly enjoyment S iv.330; v.421; Vin i.10; D iii.113; Nett 110; Vism 5, 32; -- sutta N. of the first sutta of the Aṭṭhakavagga of Sn; -- seṭṭhā (pl.) a class of devas D ii.258; -- sevanā pursuit of, indulgence in, sensuous pleasure J ii.180; iii.464; -- sevin adj. to prec. J iv.118; -- hetu having craving as a cause: in ādīnava -- section, foll. on kāmaguṇā M i.86, etc., of wealth S i.74; -- hetuka caused by passion Th 2, 355=ThA 243; J v.220, 225. -- 206 -- Kāmaka
Kāmaka
(adj.) [fr. kāma] only -- ˚ in neg. akāmaka un- willing, undesirous D i.115; M i.163; Vin iii.13; J iv.31; cp. kāmuka. Kāmaṇḍaluka
Kāmaṇḍaluka
(adj.) having a kamaṇḍalu (q. v.) S iv.312 cp. A v.263. Kāmatā
Kāmatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. kāma] desire, longing, with noun: viveka˚ . . . to be alone PvA 43; anattha˚ J iv.14; with inf. PvA 65 (gahetu˚); J iii.362 (vināsetu˚); Mhvs 5, 260; DhA i.91. Kāmin
Kāmin
(adj.) [fr. kāma] 1. having kāma, i. e. enjoying pleasure, gratifying one's own desires in kāma -- kāmin realizing all wishes; attr. of beings in one of the Sugatis, the blissful states, of Yakkhas, Devas or Devaññataras (Pv i.33 = PvA 16), as a reward for former merit; usually in combn with bhuñjāmi paribhogavant (Pv iv.346) or as "nandino devalokasmiŋ modanti kkāmino" A ii.62= It 112; Th 1, 242; J iii.154; Pv ii.115; Pv iii.116 (expl. "as enjoying after their hearts' content all pleasures they can wish for"). -- 2. giving kāma, i. e. benevolent, fulfilling people's wishes; satisfying their desires, in atthakāminī devatā Sn 986. -- akāmakāmin passionless, dispassionate Sn 1096, syn. of vītataṇhā without desire (cp. Nd2 4). Kāmuka
Kāmuka
(adj. -- n.) [cp. Sk. kāmuka] desiring, loving, fond of; a sweetheart, lover J v.306; Mhbv 3. Kāmeti
Kāmeti
[den. fr. kāma] to desire, to crave, 1. to crave for any object of pleasure: Th 1, 93; J iii.154; iv.167; v.480; -- 2. to desire a woman, to be in love with D i.241; M ii.40; J ii.226; v.425; vi.307, 326, etc. -> pp. kāmita in kāmita -- vatthu the desired object PvA 119; VvA 122; grd. kāmitabba to be desired, desirable PvA 16 (v. l. for kañña, better), 73; VvA 127; and kāmetabba J. v.156 ( = kamaṇīya); ppr. (kāmaŋ) kāmayamānassa Sn 766 (=icchamānassa, etc., Nd1); J vi.172=Nett 69. -- 207 -- Kāya
Kāya
[der. probably fr. ci, cinoti to heap up, cp. nikāya heaping up, accumulation or collection; Sk. kāya] group, heap, collection, aggregate, body. -- Definitions and synonyms. -- SnA 31 gives the foll. synonyms and similes of kāya: kuṭī, guhā (Sn 772), deha, sandeha (Dh 148 = Th 1, 20), nāvā (Dh 369), ratha (S iv.292), dhaja, vammīka (M i.144), kuṭikā (Th 1, 1); and at KhA 38 the foll. def.: kāye ti sarīre, sarīraŋ hi asucisañcayato kucchitānaŋ vā kesādīnaŋ āyabhūtato kāyo ti vuccati. . . . It is equivalent to deha: S i.27; PvA 10; to sarīra KhA 38; PvA 63, to nikāya (deva˚) D iii.264; and cp. formula of jāti: sattānaŋ tamhi tamhi sattanikāye jāti . . . Nd2 257.

Literal meaning. -- 1. mahājana -- kāya a collection of people, a crowd S iv.191; v.170; VvA 78; -- bala˚ a great crowd Sn p. 105; DhA i.193, 398. -- 2. group or division: satta kāyā akaṭā, etc. (seven eternal groups or principles) D i.56 = M i.517=S iii.211 (in Pakudha Kaccāyana's theory); with reference to groups of sensations or sense -- organs, as vedanā -- kāya, saññā˚, viññāṇa˚, phassa˚, etc. S iii.60, 61; D iii.243, 244; taṇhā˚ D iii.244; appl. to hatthi˚, ratha˚, patti˚, groups of elephants, carriages or soldiers S i.72. -- A good idea of the extensive meaning of kāya may be gathered from the classification of the 7 kāyas at J ii.91, viz. camma˚, dāru˚, loha˚, ayo˚, vāluka˚, udaka˚, phalaka˚, or "bodies" (great masses, substances) of skin, wood, copper, iron, sand, water, and planks. -- Var. other combns: Asura˚ A i.143; D iii.7; Ābhassara˚ ("world of radiance") D i.17=iii.29, 84; Deva˚ S i.27, 30; D iii.264 (˚nikāya); dibbā kāyā A i.143; Tāvatiŋsa˚ D iii.15.

Applied meaning. -- I. Kāya under the physical aspect is an aggregate of a multiplicity of elements which finally can be reduced to the four "great" elements, viz. earth, water, fire, and air (D i.55). This "heap," in the valuation of the Wise (muni), shares with all other objects the qualities of such elements, and is therefore regarded as contemptible, as something which one has to get rid of, as a source of impurity. It is subject to time and change, it is built up and kept alive by cravings, and with death it is disintegrated into the elements. But the kamma which determined the appearance of this physical body has naturally been renewed and assumes a new form. II. Kāya under the psychological aspect is the seat of sensation (Dhs §§ 613-> 16), and represents the fundamental organ of touch which underlies all other sensation. Developed only in later thought DhsA. 311 cf. Mrs. Rhys Davids, Bud. Psy. Ethics lvi. ff.; Bud. Psy. 143, 185 f.

I. (Physical). -- (a) Understanding of the body is attained through introspection (sati). In the group of the four sati -- paṭṭhānas, the foundations of introspection, the recognition of the true character of "body" comes first (see Vbh 193). The standing formula of this recognition is kāye kāyânupassī . . . contemplating body as an accumulation, on which follows the description of this aggregate: "he sees that the body is clothed in skin, full of all kinds of dirty matter, and that in this body there are hair, nails, teeth," etc. (the enumeration of the 32 ākāras, as given Kh iii.). The conclusions drawn from this meditation give a man the right attitude. The formula occurs frequently, both in full and abridged, e. g. D ii.293, 294; iii.104, 141; A iii.323 = v.109; S iv.111=v.278; Vbh 193, 194; Nett 83, 123; with slight variation: kāye asubhânupassī . . . A iii.142 sq.; v.109 (under asubhasaññā); It 81; cp. kāye aniccânupassī S iv.211; and kāyagatā sati. -- This accumulation is described in another formula with: ayaŋ . . . kāyo rūpī cātum(m)ahābhūtiko mātā -- pettika -- sambhavo odana -- kummās' upacayo, etc. "this body has form (i. e. is material, visible), is born from mother and father, is a heap of gruel and sour milk, is subject to constant dressing and tending, to breaking up and decay," etc., with inferences D i.55=S iii.207; S ii.94; iv.194; v.282, 370; D i.76, 209; M i.144, 500; ii.17; A iv.386=S iv.83.

(b) Various qualities and functions of the material body. As trunk of the body (opposed to pakkhā and sīsa) S ii.231; also at Pv i.83; as depending on nourishment (āhāra -- ṭṭhitika, etc.) Sv.64; A ii.145 (with taṇhā, māna, methuna); as needing attention: see ˚parihārika. As saviññāṇaka, having consciousness A iv.53 = S ii.252=S iii.80, 103, 136, 169; cp. āyu usmā ca viññānaŋ yadā kāyaŋ jahant' imaŋ S iii.143. As in need of breathing assāsa -- passāsa S v.330, 336; as tired, fatigued (kilanta -- kāya) kilanta -- kāyā kilanta -- cittā te devā tamhā kāyā cavanti "tired in body, tired in mind these gods fall out of this assembly" (D i.20; iii.32≈); in other connection PvA 43; see also kilanta. kāyo kilanto D iii.255 sq.;=A iv.332; S v.317; M i.116; jiṇṇassa me . . . kāyo na paleti Sn 1144; ātura -- kāyo S iii.1 (cittaŋ anāturaŋ); paripuṇṇa -- k˚ suruci sujāto, etc., with a perfect body (of the Buddha) Sn 548= Th 1, 818; cp. mahā -- k˚ (of Brahmins) Sn 298. The body of a Buddha is said to be endowed with the 32 signs of a great man: Bhagavato kāye dvattiŋsa mahāpurisa -- lakkhaṇāni . . . Sn p. 107, cp. 549. The Tathāgata is said to be dhamma -- kāyo "author and speaker of Doctrine," in the same sense Brahma -- kāyo "the best body" (i. e. of Doctrine) D iii.84 (Dial. iii, 81).

(c) Valuation of physical body. From the contemplating of its true character (kāyânupassī) follows its estimation as a transient, decaying, and repulsive object. -- kāye anicc' ânupassī S iv.211 (and vay' ânupassī, nirodh' ânupassī), so also asubhânupassī It 81; kāyañ ca bhindantaŋ ñatvā It 69; evaŋdhammo (i. e. a heap of changing elements) A iii.324; aciraŋ vat' ayaŋ kāyo paṭhaviŋ adhisessati chuddho apetaviññāṇo niratthaŋ va kalingaraŋ Dh 41. pittaŋ semhañ ca vamati kāyamhā Sn 198. As bahu -- dukkho bahuādīnavo A v.109; as anicca dukkha, etc. M i.500; ii.17; kāyena aṭṭiyamānā harayamānā S iv.62; v.320; dissati imassa kāyassa ācayo pi apacayo pi ādānam pi nikkhepanam pi S ii.94. -- This body is eaten by crows and vultures after its death: S v.370. Represented as pūti˚ foul S i.131; iii.120. -- Bdhgh. at Vism 240 defines kāya as "catu -- mahābhūtika pūti -- kāya" (cp. similar passages on p. 367: patthaddho bhavati kāyo, pūtiko bhavati kāyo).

(d) Similes. -- Out of the great number of epithets (adhivacanāni) and comparisons only a few can be mentioned (cp. above under def. & syn.): The body is compared to an abscess (gaṇḍa) S iv.83 = A iv.386; a city (nagara) S iv.194; a cart (ratha) S iv.292; an anthill (vammīka) M i.144; all in reference to its consisting of the four fundamental elements, cp. also: pheṇ' ûpamaŋ kāyaŋ imaŋ viditvā "knowing that the body is like froth" Dh 46; kumbh' ûpamaŋ kāyaŋ imaŋ viditvā nagar' ûpamaŋ cittaŋ idaŋ ṭhapetvā Dh 40: the body is as fragile as a water -- pot.

(e) Dissolution of the body is expressed in the standard phrase: kāyassa bhedā param maraṇā . . ., i. e. after death . . . upon which usually follows the mention of one of the gatis, the destinies which the new kāya has to experience, e. g. D i.82, 107, 143, 162, 245, 247, 252; iii.96, 97, 146, 181, 235; M i.22; S i.94; iii.241; Dh 140; It 12, 14; J i.152; PvA 27, etc., etc. Cp. also iv.

II. (Psychological). -- As the seat of feeling, kāya is the fifth in the enumeration of the senses (āyatanāni). It is ajjhattika as sense (i. e. subjective) and its object is the tangible (phoṭṭhabba). The contact between subject and object consists either in touching (phusitvā) or in sensing (viññeyya). The formulas vary, but are in essence the same all through, e. g. kāya -- viññeyyā phoṭṭhabbā D i.245; kāyena phoṭṭhabbaŋ phusitvā D iii.226, 250, 269; M i.33; ii.42; S iv.104, 112; kāyena phusitvā A v.11; kāyo c' eva phoṭṭhabbā ca D iii.102. Best to be grouped here is an application of kāya in the sense of the self as experiencing a great joy; the whole being, the "inner sense," or heart. This realization of intense happiness (such as it is while it lasts), pīti -- sukha, is the result of the four stages of meditation, and as such it is always mentioned after the jhānas in the formula: so imaŋ eva kāyaŋ vivekajena pīti -- sukhena abhisandeti . . . "His very body does he so pervade with the joy and ease born of detachment from worldliness" D i.73 sq. = M i.277; A ii.41, etc. -- A similar context is that in which kāya is represented as passaddha, calmed down, i. e. in a state which is free from worldly attachment (vivekaja). This "peace" of the body (may be translated as "my senses, my spirits" in this connection) flows out of the peace of the mind and this is born out of the joy accompanying complete satisfaction (pamuditā) in attaining the desired end. The formula is pamuditassa pīti jāyati pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaŋ vedeti, sukhino cittaŋ samādhiyati D iii.241, 288; S iv.351; M i.37; A iii.21, 285; iv.176; v.3, 333; Vbh 227. -> Similarly: pamuditāya pīti jāyati, pītimanāya kāyo p˚, passadhakāyā sukhaŋ ved˚ Vin i.294 (c̣p. Vin. Texts ii.224: "all my frame will be at peace," or "individuality"; see note) passaddhakāya -- sankhāra mentioned at A v.29 sq. is one of the ten ariya -- vāsā, the noblest conditions. A quasi -- analogy between kāya and kāma is apparent from a number of other passages: kāya -- chando -- ˚sneho -- ˚anvayatā pahīyati M i.500; ajjhattañ ca bahiddha ca kāye chandaŋ virājaye Sn 203; kāye avigata -- rāgo hoti (kāme, rūpe) D iii.238=A iii.249; madhurakajāto viya kāyo S iii.106; A iii.69.

III. (Ethical). -- Kāya is one of the three channels by which a man's personality is connected with his environment & by which his character is judged, viz. action, the three being kāya, vacī (vāca) and manas. These three kammantas, activities or agents, form the three subdivisions of the sīla, the rules of conduct. Kāya is the first and most conspicuous agent, or the principle of action kat) e)coxh/n, character in its pregnant sense.

Kāya as one of a triad. -- Its usual combination is in the formula mentioned, and as such found in the whole of the Pāli Canon. But there is also another combination, found only in the older texts, viz. kayenā vācāya uda cetasā: yañ ca karoti kāyena vācāya uda cetasā taŋ hi tassa sakaŋ hoti tañ ca ādāya gacchati S i.93 yo dhammacārī kāyena vācāya uda cetasā idh eva nam pasaŋsanti pacca sagge pamodati S i.102. -- So also at A i.63; Sn 232. Besides in formula arakkhitena kāyena a˚ vācāya a˚ cittena S ii.231 = 271; iv.112. -> With su -- and duccarita the combn is extremely frequent, e. g. S i.71, 72; M i.22, etc., etc. In other comb. we have kāya -- (v˚., m.˚) kamma, moneyya, soceyya, etc. -- k˚. v˚. m˚. hiŋsati S i.165; saŋsappati A v.289 sq.; kāye (v˚. m˚.) sati kāya -- sañcetanā -- hetu uppajjati S ii.39 sq.; The variations of k -- in the ethics of the Dhamma under this view of k˚. v˚. m˚. are manifold, all based on the fundamental distinctions between good and bad, all being the raison d'être of kamma: yaŋ . . . etarahi kammaŋ karoti kāyena v. m. idaŋ vuccati navakammaŋ S iv.132. -- Passages with reference to good works are e. g. D iii.245; A i.151; v.302 sq.; (see also Kamma ii.2 b. c.). -- With reference to evil: S iii.241, 247; A i.201; kin nu kāyena vācāya manasā dukkaṭaŋ kataŋ Pv ii.13 and passim. Assutavā puthujjano tīhi ṭhānehi micchā paṭipajjati kāyena v. m. S ii.151; pāpaŋ na kayirā vacasā manasā kāyena vā kiñcana sabbaloke S i.12=31; yassa kāyena vācāya manasā n'atthi dukkaṭaŋ saŋvutaŋ tīhi ṭhānehi, tam ahaŋ brūmi brāhmaṇaŋ Dh 391=Nett 183. Kāyena saŋvaro sādhu sādhu vācāya saŋvaro manasā saŋvaro sādhu sādhu sabbattha saŋvaro Dh 361=S i.73= Miln 399; ye ca kāyena v. m. ca susaŋvutā na te Māravasânugā, na te Mārassa paccagū S i.104; vācānurakkhī manasā susaŋvuto kāyena ca akusalaŋ na kayirā Dh 281=Nett 183.

Kāya as one of a dyad: vācā and kāya: S i.172 (˚gutta) M i.461 (rakkhita and a˚); Pv i.22 (˚saññatā and opp.); Vism 28 (k˚ -- vacī -- kamma); PvA 98.

Kāya alone as a collective expression for the three: A i.54; Dh 259, 391; Sn 206, 407; kāye avītarāgo M i.101; A iii.249; iv.461 sq.; ˚ -- samācāra S v.354; kāyaŋ paṇidhāya Ps i.175; Vbh 244 = 252; bhāvita˚ and a˚ M i.239; A i.250; iii.106 sq., cp.: kāya -- ppakopaŋ rakkheyya, kāyena saŋvuto siyā kāyaduccaritaŋ hitvā, kāyena sucaritaŋ care Dh 231. Ahiŋsakā ye munayo niccaŋ kāyena saŋvutā Dh 225.

Kāya in combn with citta: ṭhito va kāyo hoti ṭhitaŋ cittaŋ . . . S v.74; anikaṭṭha -- kāyo nikaṭṭha -- citto A ii.137; sāraddha -- kāyo sankiliṭṭha -- citto A v.93 = 95= 97; bhāvita -- kāyo, ˚sīlo, ˚citto, ˚pañño S iv.111; A iv.111; v.42 sq. Apakassa kāyaŋ apakassa cittaŋ S ii.198. Kāya -- citta -- passaddhi, etc. Dhs §§ 29 -- 51. In these six couples (or yugalas) later Abhidhamma distinguished kāya as=the cetasikas (mental properties, or the vedanā, saññā and sankhārā khandhas), body being excluded. Cpd. 96. See also combn kilantakāya, kilanta -- citta under kilamati.

IV. (Various). -- Kāyena (i. e. "visibly") aññamaññaŋ passituŋ A ii.61; as nānatta˚ and ekatta˚ at A iv.39 = Nd2 570. The relation between rūpa -- kāya (= cātumahābhūtika), and nāma -- kāya, the mental compound (=vedanā saññā, etc.) is discussed at Nett 77, 78, and Ps i.183 sq., see also S ii.24. K. is anattā, i. e. k. has no soul A v.109; S iv.166. n'âyaŋ kāyo tumhākaŋ n'āpi paresaŋ, purāṇaŋ idaŋ kammaŋ . . . "neither is this body yours, nor anyone else's: it is (the appearance of) former karma" S ii.64, 65=Nd2 680. Dissamānena kāyena and upaḍḍha -- dissamānena S i.156. -> Manomaya -- kāya a body made by the mind (cp. VvA 10 and DA i.110, 120, 222) according to Bdhgh only at the time of jhāna S v.282 sq.; manomaya pīti -- bhakkha sayaŋpabha D i.17=VvA 10; manomayaŋ kāyaŋ abhinimmināya . . . D i.77; m˚ sabbanga -- paccangī D i.34, 77, 186, 195. -- Under the control of psychic powers (iddhi): kāyena va saŋvatteti he does as he likes with his body, i. e. he walks on water, is ubiquitous, etc. (yāva brahmalokā pi: even up to heaven) S v.265= D i.78=A i.170: see also S v.283, 284. -- In the various stages of Saŋsāra; kāyaŋ nikkhipati he lays down his (old) body S iv.60, 400; cp. S iii.241 (ossaṭṭha -- kāya); referring to continuous change of body during day and night (of a Petī) Pv ii.1211.

-- anga a limb of the body, kāy'angaŋ vāc'angaŋ vā na kopenti: they remain motionless and speechless (ref. to the bhikkhus begging) J iii.354; DhsA 93, 240; -- ânupassin in combn kāye kāyânupassī "realizing in the body an aggregate" D ii.94, 100, 291 sq.; D iii.58, 77, 141, 221, 276; M i.56; A i.39, 296; ii.256; iii.449; iv.300, 457 sq.; S iv.211; v.9, 75, 298, 329 sq.; Vbh 193 sq.; 236; see also above. Der.: ˚anupassanā Ps. i.178, 184; ii.152, 163, 232; ˚passita Nett. 123; -- āyatana the sense of touch D iii.243, 280, 290; Dhs 585, 613, 653, 783; -- indriya same D iii.239; Dhs 585, 613, 972; -- ujjukatā straightness of body (+citta˚, of thought) Dhs 53, 277, 330; Vism 466; Bdhd 16, 20. -- ûpaga going to a (new) body S ii.24; -- kamma "bodily action," deed performed by the body in contradistinction to deeds by speech or thought (see above) D i.250; iii.191, 245, 279; M i.415; iii.206; A i.104; iii.6, 9, 141 sq.; v.289; Th 2, 277; Ps ii.195; Dhs 981, 1006; Vbh 208, 321, 366; Pug 41; Bdhd 69; DhsA 68, 77, 344. -- kammaññatā wieldiness, alertness of the bodily senses included under nāmakāya Dhs 46, 277, 326. -- kammanta = ˚kamma, in comb. ˚sampatti and ˚sandosa A v.292, 294, 297; M i.17. -- kali "the misfortune of having a body"=this miserable body Th 2, 458, 501; ThA 282, 291; -- kasāva bodily impurity or depravity A i.112; -- gata "relating to the body," always combined with sati in the same sense as ˚anupassin (see above) S i.188; M. iii.92; A i.44; Sn 340 (cp. SnA 343); Th 1, 468, 1225; J i.394; Dh 293= Nett 39; Dh 299; Miln 248, 336, 393; Vism 111, 197, 240 sq. -- gantha bodily tie or fetter (binding one to saŋsāra), of which there are four: abhijjhā, byāpāda, sīlabbata -- parāmāsa, idaŋ -- saccâbhinivesa D iii.230= S v.59=Dhs 1135=Vbh 374; cp. Mrs. Rh. D., Dhs. trsl. p. 304; -- gandha spelling for ˚gantha at Nett 115-> 119; -- gutta one who guards his body, i. e. controls his action (+vacīgutta) S i.172=Sn 74; -- gutti the care or protection of the body Vin i.295; J ii.162; -- citta body and mind: ˚ābādha physical and mental disease J iv.166; see other combns above; -- ḍāha fever Vin i.214; -- tapana chastisement of body, curbing one's material desires, asceticism PvA 98. -- thāma physical strength J iii.114; -- daratha bodily distress J v.397; vi.295; -- daḷha bodily vigour Vin ii.76, 313; -- dukkha bodily pain (+ceto˚) M iii.288; -- duccarita misconduct by the body, evil deeds done through the instrumentality of the body (cp. ˚kamma) D iii.52, 96, 111, 214; A i.48; Dh 231; It 54, 58; Dhs 300, 1305; Bdhd 16, 20; -- duṭṭhulla unchastity Th 1, 114; -- dvāra the channel or outlet of bodily senses J i.276; iv.14; VvA 73; DhA iv.85; Bdhd 69; -- dhātu the "element" of body, i. e. the faculty of touch, sensibility Dhs 613; Kvu 12; -- pakopa blameworthy conduct, misbehaviour (+vacī˚, mano˚) Dh 231=DhA 330; -- pacālaka (nt.) shaking or swaying the body, "swaggering" Vin ii.213; -- paṭibaddha 1. adj. (of the breath), dependent on, or connected with the body S iv.293; attached or bound to the body J iii.377; v.254; 2. m. an article of dress worn on the body Vin iii.123, iv.214; -- payoga the instrumentality or use of the body DA i.72=DhsA 98; -- pariyantika limited by the body, said of vedanā, sensation S v.320=A ii.198; -- parihārika tending or protecting the body D i.71=A ii.209=Pug 58; Vism 65 (cīvara); DA i.207; -- pasāda clearness of the sense of touch or sense in general DhsA 306; Bdhd 62, 66, 74; cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 173n, 198n; -- passaddhi serenity or quietude of the senses S iv.125 (cp. iv.351 and above); v.66, 104; Dhs 40, 277, 320; DhsA 130; Bdhd 16, 19, 29; -- pāgabbhiya "body -- forwardness" immodesty, lasciviousness, gener. said of women J ii.32; v.449; -- pāgabbhiniya same J i.288; -- pāguññatā good condition of the mental faculties, fitness of sense, opp. kāyagelañña, apathy Dhs 46, 277, 326; Vism 466; Bdhd 16, 20, 157; -- phandita (nt.) bodily activity J iii.25; -- baddha fastened to the body, appl. to robes DA i.207; -- bandhana a girdle or waistband Vin i.46, 51; ii.118, 135, 177, 213, 266; M i.237; -- bala physical strength PvA 30; -- bhāvanā meditation or training with regard to action D iii.219; M i.237; cp. Miln 85; -- macchera "body -- selfishness," pampering the body Th 1, 1033; -- mudutā pliability of sense=˚kammaññatā Dhs 44, 277, 324; Bdhd 16, 20, 157; -- muni a sage with regard to action It 56; -- moneyya the true wisdom regarding the use of the body as an instrument of action It 56; 67; D iii.220; A i.273; Nd2 514; -- ratha the "carriagelike" body J vi.253; -- lahutā buoyancy of sense = ˚muduta, same loci; -- vanka crookedness of action A i.112; -- vikāra change of position of the body J iii.354; -- vijambhana alertness DhA iv.113; -- viññatti intimation by body, i. e. merely by one's appearance, appl. chiefly to the begging bhikkhu Dhs 585, 636, 654, 844; DhsA 82, 301; Miln 229, 230; Vism 448; Bdhd 69, 70; -- viññāṇa consciousness by means of touch, sensory consciousness D iii.243; Dhs 556, 585, 651, 685, 790; Miln 59; Vbh 180; ˚dhātu element of touch -- consciousness Dhs 560; Vbh 88; Kvu 12; -- viññeyya to be perceived by the sense of touch (+phoṭṭhabba, see above) D i.245; ii.281; iii.234; M i.85, 144; Dhs 589, 967, 1095; Vbh 14; Kvu 210; Miln 270; -- vipphandana throbbing of the body, bodily suffusion, appld to ˚vinnatti Bdhd 69, 70; DhsA 323; -- viveka seclusion of the body, hermitism J i.289; DhsA 165; -- vūpakāsa= ˚viveka D iii.285 (+citta˚ "singleness" of heart); -- veyyāvacca menial duties J i.12; ˚kara a servant J ii.334; -- veyyāvaṭika same J vi.418; Sn p. 104; DhA i.27; ˚kamma id. J v.317 (=veyyāvacca) DhsA 160; -- saŋsagga bodily contact, sexual intercourse Vin iii.121, 190; J vi.566; -- sakkhin he who has realized and gained the final truth concerning the body (cp. ˚anupassin) D iii.105, 254; M i.478=Pug 14, 29; M ii.113; iii.45; A i.74; 118; iv.10, 451; v.23; Ps ii.52, 62; Nett 190; Kvu 58; Vism 93, 387. -- sankhāra the material aggregate, substratum of body Vin iii.71; S ii.40; iii.125; iv.293; A i.122; ii.158, 231; Ps i.184, 186; Vism 530. -- sangaha control of body (+citta˚) Nett 91; -- sañcetanā ( -- hetu) ground (for the rise of), material, i. e. impure thoughts A ii.157; Vism 530 (+vacī˚, mano˚). -- samācāra (good) conduct as regards one's actions D ii.279 (+vacī˚) M i.272 sq.; ii.113; iii.45; S v.354; A iii.186 sq. -- sampīlana crushing the body (of dukkha) Nett 29; -- samphassa the sense of touch (see āyatana) D iii.243; S v.351; Dhs 585, 616, 651, 684; ˚ja arisen through touch or sensibility D iii.244; Dhs 445, 558; -- sucarita good conduct in action, as one of the three ˚kammāni (vacī˚, mano˚) D iii.52, 96, 111, 169, 215; It 55, 59, 99, Dhs 1306; -- suci purity of body, i. e. of action (+vacī˚, ceto˚) A i.273; It 55; -- soceyya purification of body (+vacī˚, mano˚) D iii.219; A i.271; v 264, 266; It 55. -- 209 -- Kāyika
Kāyika
(adj.) [fr. kāya] 1. belonging to the body, i. e. felt by the body (experienced by the senses), or resulting from the body, i. e. done by the body ( = acted as opposed to spoken or thought). sukhaŋ physical happiness (opp. cetasika˚) S v.209; A i.81; dukkhaŋ D ii.306; M i.302 (opp. cetasikaŋ); kāyikaŋ (sc. dhammaŋ) sikkhati to teach the conduct of body (opp. vācasikaŋ) Vin ii.248. In comb. with vācasika also at S i.190; Pug 21; Vism 18 (of anācara); PvA 119 (of saŋyama, control) Shhp 55; Bdhd 26, 134; referring to diff. kinds of amusements Nd2 219=SnA 86. 2. -- ˚ (of devas) belonging to the company of -- : ˚ D i.220; gandhabba˚ PvA 119. Kāyūra & Kāyura
Kāyūra
& Kāyura [see also keyūra, which is the only form in Sk.] 1. an ornamental bracket or ring worn on the upper arm (bāh'âlankāra Pv; bhuj˚ Vv) or neck (gīvāya pilandhana J iii.437); a bracelet or necklace Vin ii.106; J iii.437; iv.92; Pv iii.93; Vv 362. -- 2. adj. as sakāyura raṭṭha having the insignia "regis" J v.289 = 486. Kāyūrin
Kāyūrin
(adj.) [fr. last] wearing bracelets Pv iii.91. Kār
Kār
-- secondary root of karoti, in denom. and intensive function in kāra, kāraka, kāraṇa, kārin, kāreti and their derivations. Kāra
Kāra
[fr. kār -- , cp. Vedic kāra song of praise, which is, however, derived fr. kṛ = kir to praise; also Vedic ˚kāra in brāhma˚, fr. kṛ] 1. abs. (a) deed, service, act of mercy or worship, homage: kāra -- paṇṇaka J vi.24 (vegetable as oblation); appako pi kato kāro devûpapattiŋ āvahati "even a small gift of mercy brings about rebirth among the gods" PvA 6. -- kāraka one who performs a religious duty D i.61 (=DA i.170). (b) doing, manner, way: yena kārena akattha tena k˚ pavattamānaŋ phalaŋ "as you have done so will be the fruit" PvA 45. -- 2. ( -- ˚) (a) the production or application of, i. e. the state or quality of . . .: atta˚ one's own state =ahaŋ kāra, individuality; para˚ the personality of others A iii.337; citti˚ reflection, thought PvA 26; see e. g. andha˚ darkness, sak˚ homage, etc. -- balakkārena forcibly PvA 68. -- (b) as ttg. the item, i. e. particle, letter, sound or word, e. g. ma -- kāra the letter m PvA 52; ca -- kāra the particle ca PvA 15; sa -- kāra the sound sa SnA 23. -- (c) (adj. -- n.) [cp. kara] one who does, handles or deals with: ayakāra iron -- smith Miln 331. -- 210 -- Kāraka
Kāraka
(usually -- ˚) the doer (of): Vin ii.221 (capu -- capu˚); sāsana˚ he who does according to (my) advice Sn 445; Bdhd 85 sq.; -- f. kārikā: veyyāvacca˚ a servant PvA 65 (text reads ˚tā); as n. the performance of ( -- ˚), service: dukkara -- kārikā the performance of evil deeds S i.103; Th 2, 413 ( = ThA 267). -- agga -- kārikā first test, sample Vin iii.80. Kāraṇa
Kāraṇa
(nt.) [in meaning 1 represented in later Sk. by kāraṇā f., in meaning 2 = Sk. kāraṇa nt., equivalent to prakṛti, natural form, constituent, reason, cause]. 1. -- (a) a deed, action, performance, esp. an act imposed or inflicted upon somebody by a higher authority (by the king as representative of justice or by kamma: M iii.181; see kamma 11 3.A b.) as an ordeal, a feat or punishment: a labour or task in the sense of the 12 labours of Heracles or the labours of Hades. kāraṇaŋ kārāpeti "he makes somebody perform the task." Pass, kāraṇaŋ or kāraṇā karīyati. Thus as a set of five tasks or purgatory obligations under the name of pañcavidha -- bandhana "the group of five" (not, as Warren trsl. p. 257 "inflict on him the torture called the fivefold pinion"), a means of punishment in Niraya (q. v. under pañca). Not primarily torture (Rh. Davids, Miln trsl. i.254, and others with wrong derivation from kṛṇtati). At DhA iii.70 these punishments are comprehended under the term dasa -- dukkhakāraṇāni (the ten punishments in misery); the meaning "punishment" also at J iv.87 (tantarajjukaŋ k˚ŋ katvā), whereas at J vi.416 k. is directly paraphrased by "maraṇa," as much as "killing." Often spelt karaṇa, q. v.; the spelling kāraṇā (as f.) at Miln 185 seems to be a later spelling for kāraṇaŋ. See karaṇa for further reference. -- Kiŋ kāraṇaŋ ajja kāressati "what task will he impose on me to -- day?" A v.324; as pañcavidhabandhana K˚ A i.141, PvA 251, Nd2 304iii. -- As adj. ˚kāraṇa in dāruṇa˚ "being obliged to go through the dreadful trial" PvA 221. -- (b) duty obligation, in kāraṇ' âkāraṇā (pl.) duties great and small DhA i.385. Cp. also kāraṇaŋ karoti to try M i.444. -- (c) a trick (i. e. a duty imposed by a higher authority through training) J ii.325 (ānañja˚); Miln 201 (ākāsa -- gamana˚). 2. -- (a) acting, action as (material) cause: k˚ -- bhūta being the cause of . . . PvA 15; -- (b) (intellectual) cause, reason Miln 150; DhA i.389; esp. as -- ˚: arodana˚ the reason for not crying PvA 63; asocana˚ same, ibid. 62; āgamana˚ the reason for coming (here) ibid. 81, 106. =pariyatti, DhA. 36.=attha, SA on i.215, SnA. i.238 -- instr. kāraṇena by necessity, needs PvA 195; tena k˚ therefore ibid. 40 -- abl. kāranā by means of, through, by (=hetu or nissāya) PvA 27; imasmā k˚ therefore PvA 40; kāraṇaṭṭhā (expl. as attha -- kāraṇā Nd2) for the purpose of some object or advantage Sn 75; opp. nikkāraṇā from unselfishness ibid. -- sakāraṇa (adj.) with good reason (of vacana) PvA 109. Kāraṇika
Kāraṇika
[der. fr. prec.] the meaning ought to be "one who is under a certain obligation" or "one who dispenses certain obligations." In usu˚ S ii.257 however used simply in the sense of making: arrow -- maker, fletcher. Perhaps the reading should be ˚kāraka. Kāraṇḍava
Kāraṇḍava1
[of uncertain etym., cp. karaṇḍa] chaff, offal, sweepings, fig. dirt, impurity: yava˚ A iv.169 (chaff); samaṇa˚ ibid. -- In passage kāraṇḍavaŋ niddhamatha, kasambuŋ apakassatha A iv.172 = Sn 281=Miln 414 trsld by Rh. Davids Miln trsl. ii.363 "get rid of filth, put aside rubbish from you," expl. SnA 311 by kacavara (q. v.). Rh. D's note3 loc. cit. is to be modified according to the parallel passages just given. Kāraṇḍava
Kāraṇḍava2
[cp. Sk. kāraṇḍava] a sort of duck Vv 358 (expld as also by Halāyudha 2, 99 by kādamba, black goose). Kārā
Kārā
(f.) [cp. Sk. kārā] confinement, captivity, jail, in ˚bhedaka cora a thief who has broken out of jail Vin i.75. Kārāpaka
Kārāpaka
[fr. kārāpeti] a schemer, inventor J vi.333. Kārāpaṇa
Kārāpaṇa
see kāreti. Kārāpita
Kārāpita
[pp. of kārāpeti, Caus. of karoti] made to do J vi.374. Kārikā
Kārikā
see kāraka Kāritā
Kāritā
= kārikā (performance); see pāripūri˚. Kārin
Kārin
( -- ˚) (adj.) doing: yathāvādī tathākārī "as he says so he does" D iii.135, Sn 357; see for examples the various cpds. as kamma˚, kibbisa˚, khaṇḍa˚, chidda˚, dukkaṭa˚, dvaya˚, paccakkha˚, pubba˚, sakkacca˚, sampajāna˚, etc. Kāriya
Kāriya
(adj.) [grd. of kāreti, Caus. of karoti] to be done, neg. akāriya to be undone, (not) to be made good It 18. Kāruñña
Kāruñña
(nt.) [fr. karuṇa] compassion (usually with anudayā and anukampā) S ii.199; A iii.189; Vism 300; PvA 75; Sdhp 509. Kāruññatā
Kāruññatā
(f.) compassionateness S i.138. Kāruṇika
Kāruṇika
(adj.) [fr. karuṇa] compassionate, merciful Pv ii.113; PvA 16; Bdhd 49; often with mahā˚: of great mercy Sdhp 330, 557; so of the Buddha: mahākāruṇika nātha "the Saviour of great mercy" in introductory stanzas to Pv and Vv. Kāreti
Kāreti
(Causative of karoti), to construct, to build, etc.; pp. kārita; der. -- kārāpaṇa the construction of (vihāra˚) DhA i.416. For details see karoti iv.; see also kārāpaka & kārāpita. Kāla
Kāla
(and Kāḷa) -- Preliminary. 1. dark (syn. kaṇha, which cp. for meaning and applications), black, blueblack, misty, cloudy. Its proper sphere of application is the dark as opposed to light, and it is therefore characteristic of all phenomena or beings belonging to the realm of darkness, as the night, the new moon, death, ghosts, etc. -- There are two etymologies suggestible, both of which may have been blended since IndoAryan times: (a) kāla = Sk. kāla, blue -- black, kālī black cloud from *qāl (with which conn. *qel in kalanka, spot, kalusa dirty, kammāsa speckled, Gr. kelaino/s, Mhg. hilwe mist)=Lat. cālidus spot, Gr. khli/s spot, and khla/s dark cloud; cp. Lat. cālīgo mist, fog, darkness. -- (b) see below, under note. -- Hence. 2. the morning mist, or darkness preceding light, daybreak, morning (cp. E. morning=Goth. maúrgins twilight, Sk. marka eclipse, darkness; and also gloaming= gleaming=twilight), then: time in general, esp. a fixed time, a point from or to which to reckon, i. e. term or terminus (a quo or ad quem). -- Note. The definition of colour -- expressions is extremely difficult. To a primitive colour -- sense the principal difference worthy of notation is that between dark and light, or dull and bright, which in their expressions, however, are represented as complements for which the same word may be used in either sense of the complementary part (dark for light and vice versa, cp. E. gleam > gloom). All we can say is that kāla belongs to the group of expressions for dark which may be represented simultaneously by black, blue, or brown. That on the other hand, black, when polished or smooth, supplies also the notion of "shining" is evidenced by kāḷa and kaṇha as well, as e. g. by *skei in Sk. chāyā=Gr. skia/ shadow as against Ags. hāēven "blue" (E. heaven) and Ohg. skīnan, E. to shine and sky. The psychological value of a colour depends on its light -- reflecting (or light-absorbing) quality. A bright black appears lighter (reflects more light) than a dull grey, therefore a polished (añjana) black (=sukāḷa) may readily be called "brilliant." In the same way kāla, combined with other colour -- words of black connotation does not need to mean "black," but may mean simply a kind of black, i. e. brown. This depends on the semasiological contrast or equation of the passage in question. Cp. Sk. śyāma (dark -- grey) and śyāva (brown) under kāsāya. That the notion of the speckled or variegated colour belongs to the sphere of black, is psychologically simple (: dark specks against a light ground, cp. kammāsa), and is also shown by the second etymology of kāla=Sk. śāra, mottled, speckled=Lat. caerulus, black -- blue and perhaps caelum "the blue" (cp. heaven)=Gr. khru/los the blue ice -- bird. (On k > s cp. kaṇṇa > śṛṇga, kilamati > śramati, kilissati > ślis˚, etc.) The usual spelling of kāla as kāḷa indicates a connection of the ḷ with the r of śāra. -- The definition of kāḷa as jhām' angārasadisa is conventional and is used both by Bdhgh. and Dhpāla: DhsA 317 and PvA 90.

1. Kāḷa, dark, black, etc., in enumn of colours Vv 221 (see VvA 111). na kāḷo samaṇo Gotamo, na pi sāmo: mangura -- cchavi samano G. "The ascetic Gotamo is neither black nor brown: he is of a golden skin" M i.246; similarly as kāḷī vā sāmā vā manguracchavī vā of a kalyāṇī, a beautiful woman at D I.193 = M. ii.40; kāḷa -- sāma at Vin iv.120 is to be taken as dark -- grey. -- Of the dark half of the month: see ˚pakkha, or as the new moon: āgame kāḷe "on the next new moon day" Vin i.176. -- of Petas: Pv ii.41 (kāḷī f.); PvA 561 (˚rūpa); of the dog of Yama (˚sunakha) PvA 151. -- In other connn: kāḷavaṇṇa -- bhūmi darkbrown (i. e. fertile) soil Vin i.48=ii.209.

-- añjana black collyrium Vini .203; -- ânusārī black, (polished?) Anusāri ("a kind of dark, fragrant sandal wood" Vin. Texts ii.51) Vin i.203; S iii.156 = v.44= A v.22; -- ayasa black (dark) iron (to distinguish it from bronze, Rh. D., Miln trsl. ii.364; cp. blacksmith > silversmith) Miln 414, 415; -- kañjaka a kind of Asuras, Titans D iii.7; J v.187; PvA 272; -- kaṇṇī "black -- cared," as an unlucky quality. Cp. iii.611; J i.239; iv.189; v.134, 211; vi.347; DhA i.307; ii.26; the vision of the "black -- eared" is a bad omen, which spoils the luck of a hunter, e. g. at DhA iii.31 (referring here to the sight of a bhikkhu); as "witch" PvA 272; DhA iii.38, 181; as k -- k. sakuṇa, a bird of ill omen J ii.153; -- kaṇṇika= prec.; -- kabara spotted, freckled J vi.540; -- kesa (adj.) with glossy or shiny hair, by itself (kāḷa -- kesa) rare, e. g. at J vi.578; usually in cpd. susukāḷa -- kesa "having an over -- abundance of brilliant hair" said of Gotama. This was afterwards applied figuratively in the description of his parting from home, rising to a new life, as it were, possessed of the full strength and vigour of his manhood (as the rising Sun). Cp. the Shamash -- Saga, which attributes to the Sun a wealth of shiny, glossy (=polished, dark) hair (=rays), and kāḷa in this connection is to be interpreted just as kaṇha (q. v.) in similar combinations (e. g. as Kṛṣṇa Hṛṣīkesa or Kesavā). On this feature of the Sun -- god and various expressions of it see ample material in Palmer, The Samson Saga pp. 33 -- 46. -- The double application of su˚ does not offer any difficulty, sukāḷa is felt as a simplex in the same way as eu)plokamo/s or duh˚ in combns like sudubbala PvA 149, sudullabha VvA 20. Bdhgh. already interprets the cpd. in this way (DA i.284= suṭṭhu -- k˚, añjana -- vaṇṇa k˚ va hutvā; cp. kaṇh -- añjana J v.155). Cp. also siniddha -- nīla -- mudu -- kuñcita -- keso J i.89, and sukaṇhakaṇha J v.202. -- susukāḷakesa of others than the Buddha: M ii.66. Modern editors and lexicographers see in susu˚ the Sk. śiśu young of an animal, cub, overlooking the semantical difficulty involved by taking it as a separate word. This mistake has been applied to the compound at all the passages where it is found, and so we find the reading susu kāḷakeso at M i.82=A ii.22 =J ii.57; M i.163=A i.68=S i.9, 117; also in Childers' (relying on Burnouf), or even susū k˚ at S iv.111; the only passages showing the right reading susu -- k˚ are D i.115, M i.463. Konow under susu J.P.T.S. 1909, 212 has both. -- kokila the black (brown) cuckoo VvA 57; -- jallika (kāḷi˚ for kāḷa˚) having black drops or specks (of dirt) A i.253; -- daṇḍa a black staff, Sdhp 287 (attr. to the messengers of Yama, cp. Yama as having a black stick at Śat. Br. xi. 6, 1, 7 and 13); -- pakkha the dark side, i. e. moonless fortnight of the month A ii.18; -- ˚ cātuddasī the 14th day of the dark fortnight PvA 55; -- ˚ ratti a moonless night VvA 167; (opp. dosina r.) -- meyya a sort of bird J vi.539; -- loṇa black (dark) salt Vin i.202 (Bdhgh. pakati -- loṇa, natural salt); -- loha "black metal," iron ore Miln 267; -- valli a kind of creeper Vism 36, 183. -- sīha a special kind of lion J iv.208. -- sutta a black thread or wire, a carpenter's measuring line J ii.405; Miln 413; also N. of a Purgatory (nivaya) J v.266. See Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 76 -- 78; -- hatthin "black elephant," an instrument of torture in Avīci Sdhp 195.

2. Kāla time, etc. (a) Morning: kāle early Pv ii.941 ( = pāto PvA 128), kālassa in the morning (gen. of time), early VvA 256. Cp. paccūsa -- kāle at dawn DhA iii.242. Opposed to evening or night in kāḷena in the morning Pv i.63 (opp. sāyaŋ). Kāle juṇhe by day and by night Nd2 631. -- (b) time in general: gacchante gacchante kāle in course of time DhA i.319; evaŋ gacchante kāle as time went on PvA 54, 75, 127, etc. -- kālaŋ for a time Vin i.176 (spelt kāḷaŋ); kañci kālaŋ some time yet VvA 288; ettakaŋ kālaŋ for a long time PvA 102. -- kālena kālaŋ (1) from time to time PvA 151; VvA 255, 276; -- (2) continuously, constantly A iv. 45; Pug 11 (+samayena samayaŋ); D i.74 (: but expld at DA i.218 by kāle kāle in the sense of "every fortnight or every ten days"). kāle in (all) time, always (cp. ai)ei/) Sn 73 (expl. in Nd2 by niccakāle under sadā; but at SnA 128 by phāsu -- kālena "in good time"); -- kāle kāle from time to time, or repeatedly VvA 352. See also cira˚, sabba˚. -- (c) Time in special, either (1) appointed time, date, fixed time, or (2) suitable time, proper time, good time, opportunity. Cp. Gr. kairi/s and w(=ra; or (3) time of death, death. -> (1) Mealtime: PvA 25; VvA 6; esp. in phrase kālo bho Gotamo, niṭṭhitaŋ bhattaŋ "it is time, Gotama, the meal is ready" D i.119=226; Sn p. 111; and in kālaŋ āroceti or ārocāpeti he announces the time (for dinner) D i.109, 226; Sn p. 111; PvA 22, 141; VvA 173. -- date: kālato from the date or day of . . ., e. g. diṭṭha˚ paṭṭhāya "from the day that she first saw her" VvA 206; gihī˚ paṭṭhāya "from the day of being a layman" PvA 13. (2) proper time, right time: also season, as in utu˚ favourable time (of the year) Vin i.299; ii.173; kālaŋ jānāti "he knows the proper time" A iv.114; as cattāro kālā, four opportunities A ii.140; yassa kālaŋ maññasi for what you think it is time (to go), i. e. goodbye D i.106, 189, etc. The 3 times of the cycle of existence are given at Vism 578 as past, present, and future. -- kāla˚ (adj.) in (due) time, timely Vism 229 (˚maraṇa timely death). -- Opp. akāla (it is the) wrong time or inopportune D i.205; akāla -- cārin going (begging) at the improper time Sn 386. akālamegha a cloud arising unexpectedly (at the wrong time) Miln 144. -- kāle at the proper time, with vikāle (opp.) Vin i.199, 200; J ii.133; Sn 386. akāle in the wrong season VvA 288. kālena in proper time, at the right moment A ii.140; Sn 326, 387 (=yutta kālena SnA 374); Pv i.53 (=ṭhitakālena PvA 26); Pug 50; It 42; KhA 144 (=khaṇena samayena). Cp. vikāla. (3) The day, as appointed by fate or kamma, point of time (for death, cp. Vism 236), the "last hour," cp. h)mar, illa dies. So in the meaning of death appld not only to this earthly existence, but to all others (peta˚, deva˚, etc.) as well, in phrase kālaŋ karoti "he does his time=he has fulfilled his time" Vin iii.80; Sn 343, DhA i.70; and frequently elsewhere; cp. -- kata, -- kiriyā. -- As death in kālaŋ kankhati to await the appointed time S i.187; Sn 516 (cp. kankhati) and in dern kālika. -- Other examples for this use of kāla see under bhatta˚, yañña˚, vappa˚.

-- antara interval, period: kālantarena in a little while PvA 13; na kālantare at once PvA 19; -- kata (adj.) dead Sn 586, 590; in combn petā kālakatā "the Petas who have fulfilled their (earthly) time Sn 807; Pv i.57; i.121. Also as kālankata Pv ii.79; Vv 809; Vism 296. -- kiriyā death (often combd with maraṇa) M ii.108; A i.22, 77, 261 (as bhaddikā, cp. A iii.293); iv.320; Sn 694; Pv i.1012 (of a Petī who has come to the end of her existence); DhA ii.36; iv.77. -- gata = ˚kata PvA 29, 40. -- ññū knowing the proper time for . . . (c. dat. or loc.) Sn 325; described at A iv.113 sq.; as one of the five qualities of a rājā cakkavattī (viz. atthaññū, dhamma˚, matta˚, k˚, parisa˚) A iii.148; one of the seven qual. of a sappurisa, a good man (=prec.+atta˚, puggala˚) D iii.252, 283; as quality of the Tathāgata D iii.134=Nd2 276; Pug 50. -- ññutā n. abstr. to prec. A ii.101; -- (p)pavedana announcement of death ( -- time) Th 1, 563=J i.118=Vism 389=DhA i.248. -- bhojana in a˚ eating at the improper time S v.470; -- vādin speaking at the proper time, in formula kāla˚ bhūta˚ attha˚ dhamma˚ vinaya˚ under sīla No. 7: D i.4; iii.175; DA i.76; A ii.22, 209; Pug 58; -- vipassin considering the right moment, taking the opportunity It 41. -- sataŋ (˚sahassaŋ, etc.) a hundred (thousand, etc.) times Vism 243. -- 212 -- Kālika
Kālika
(adj.) [fr. kāla 2] belonging to time, in time, as sabba -- kālika always in time, cp. Gr. w(rai_os Vv 392; with time, i. e. gradual, slowly, delayed S i.117 = Nd2 645; usually neg. akālika 1. not delayed, immediate, in this world, comb. with sandiṭṭhika S ii.58; S i.117= iv.41=339=v.343; -- 2. subject to time, i. e. temporal, vanishing PvA 87; -- 3. unusual, out of season Miln 114 (cp. akāla). -- See also tāva -- kālika. Kālīya
Kālīya
a kind of (shiny) sandal wood; so to be read for tālīsa at Vin i.203 (see note on p. 381). Kālusiya
Kālusiya
(and Kālussiya) (nt.) [der. fr. kalusa, stained, dirty see cognates under kammāsa and kāla] darkness, obscurity DA i.95; PvA 124 (cakkhu˚); fig. (dosa˚) VvA 30. Kāḷa
Kāḷa
see kāla 1. Kāḷaka
Kāḷaka
(adj.) [fr. kāḷa] black, stained; in enumeration of colours at Dhs 617 (of rūpa) with nīla, pītaka, lohitaka, odāta, k˚, mañjeṭṭha; of a robe A ii.241; f. kāḷikā VvA 103; -- (nt.) a black spot, a stain, also a black grain in the rice, in apagata˚ without a speck or stain (of a clean robe) D i.110 = A iv.186=210=213; vicita˚ (of rice) "with the black grains removed" D i.105; A iv.231; Miln 16; vigata˚ (same) A iii.49. -- A black spot (of hair) J v.197 (= kaṇha -- r -- iva). -- Fig. of character DhA iv.172. Kāḷārika
Kāḷārika
see kaḷārika. Kāveyya
Kāveyya
(nt.) [grd. fr. kāvyate fr. kavi poet cp. Sk. kāvya] 1. poetry, the making of poems, poetry as business. one of the forbidden occupations D i.11 ( = DA i.95 kabba -- karaṇa) -- 2. poetry, song, poem (of suttanta) A i.72=iii.107.

-- matta intoxicated with poetry, musing, dreaming S i.110, 196. Kāsa
Kāsa1
[cp. Sk. kāśa] a kind of reed, Saccharum sponta- neum S iii.137. Kāsa
Kāsa2
[cp. Sk. kāsa] cough; in list of diseases under ābādhā A v.110 = Nd2 3041. Kāsāya
Kāsāya
and Kāsāva (adj.) [Sk. kāṣāya from the Pāli; kāsāya prob. fr. Sk. śyāma or śyāva brown = Pāli sāma, with kā=kad, a kind of, thus meaning a kind of brown, i. e. yellow. See further under sāma and cp. kāla] 1. Kāsāya as attr. of vatthāni, the yellow robes of the Buddhist mendicant, in phrase kāsāyāni v˚ acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaŋ pabbajitvā, describing the taking up of the "homeless state" D i.60, 61, 63, 115; M ii.67; A i.107; ii.208; iv.118, 274, 280; Pug 57; Nd2 172. ˚vattha (adj.) with yellow robes Sn 64; cp. ɔnivattha J iii.179 (dressed in yellow, of the executioner: see Fick, Soziale Gliederung p. 104 & cp. kāsāya -- nivāsana J iii.41; kāsāviya J iv.447); PvA 20; ˚vāsin dressed in yellow Sn 487. -- 2. Kāsāva (vattha) the yellow robe (never in above formula) Vin i.287; S iv.190=v.53=301; Dh 9, 10=Th 1, 969, 970=J ii.198 =v.50; Miln 11. ˚kaṇṭhā (pl.) the "yellow necks" those whose necks are dressed in yellow Dh 307 (= DhA iii.480)=It 43; ˚pajjota glittering with yellow robes Vbh 247; Miln 19. Kāsāvaka
Kāsāvaka
[fr. kāsāva] a yellow robe DhA ii.86. Kāsāviya
Kāsāviya
[fr. kāsāva] one who is dressed in yellow, esp. of the royal executioner (cp. kāsāya -- vattha) J iv.447 ( = cora -- ghātaka C.). Kāsika
Kāsika
(adj.) [cp. Sk. kāśika & in a diff. sense aḍḍha -- kāsika] belonging to the Kāsī country, or to Benares; in ˚uttama (scil. vattha) an upper garment made of Benares cloth Pv i.108; J vi.49 (where to be read kāsik' uttama for kāsi -- kuttama). ˚vattha Benares muslin A i.248; iii.50; Pug 34; Miln 2; DhA i.417; Vism 115. Kāsu
Kāsu
[cp. Sk. karṣū, fr. kṛṣ] a hole; only in cpd. angāra- kāsu a cinderhole, a fire -- pit, usually understood as a pit of glowing cinders J i.232. Mostly found in similes, e. g. S iv.56, 188; Sn 396; Sdhp. 208; and in kāmā angārakās' ûpamā metaphor A iv.224 = v.175; see also kāma. Ki˚
Ki˚
2nd. stem of interr. pron. (cp. ka˚ ku˚); 1. in oblique cases of ko (kaḥ), as gen. kissa. loc. kismiŋ & kiŋhi. -> 2. in nt. kiŋ what? (cp. Gr. ti/, Lat. quid; ending -- m besides -- d in kad, as Lat. quom, tum besides quod, id). -- 3. in primary derivations, as kittaka, kīva ( = Sk. kiyant) which stands in same relation to *qṷi as Lat. quantus to *qṷo; and in secondary derivations from kiŋ, as kiñci, kiñcakkha, kīdisa, etc. Kiŋ
Kiŋ
[nt. of rel. pron. ka] 1. as nt. subst. what? sotānaŋ kiŋ nivāraṇaŋ what is the obstruction? Sn 1032; kiŋ tava patthanāya what is it about your wish, i. e. what good is your wish? VvA 226; kim idaŋ this is what, that is why, therefore, PvA 11; often with su in dubitative question: kiŋ sū' dha vittaŋ purisassa seṭṭhaŋ what, then, is the best treasure of man in this world? Sn 181; or with nu: kiŋ nu kho what is it then (in series evañ nu kho, na nu kho, kathaŋ nu kho) Nd2 186. -- Gen. kissa of what? Pv i.91; ii.940 ( = kīdisassa) and in kissa hetu on the ground of what i. e. why? Sn 1131; Pv ii.81 (=kiŋ nimittaŋ). -- Instr. kena by what or how is it that: kena ssu nivuto loko Sn 1032. -- Acc. kiŋ: kiŋ kāhasi what will you do? Sn 428; kiŋ āgamma kiŋ ārabbha on what grounds & for what reason? D i.13, 14, etc.; kiŋ nissita to what purpose Sn 1043. -- Loc., kismiŋ in what or what about: kismiŋ vivādo "what is the quarrel about?" D i.237; or kimhi, e. g. kimhi sikkhamāno in what instructed? D ii.241 (corresponds to ettha=in this). The ŋ of kiŋ in Sandhi is either elided or contracted or undergoes the usual Sandhi changes; ki ha=kiŋ ha KhA 78, kissa= kiŋ assa Sn 1032; kīdisa (q. v.)=kiŋ disa; kiñci (see below)=kiŋ cid; kiŋ va a little: see kittaka. -- 2. as interr. particle, introducing a question=Lat. nonne, Gr. a)/n: kiŋ idāni pi dinne te labheyyuŋ? "Will they receive that which is given now?" PvA 22. So as disjunctive particle in comb. with udāhu (whether -- or): kiŋ -- udāhu what (about this) . . . or is it (otherwise), is it so . . . or is it not so? (cp. po/teron -- h)/, Lat. utrum -- an): kim imasmiŋ attabhāve pitaraŋ pucchasi udāhu atīte? "do you enquire about your father in this existence, or in a past one?" PvA 38; kiŋ nakkhattaŋ kīḷissasi udāhu bhatiŋ karissasi? "Will you take a holiday or will you work?" VvA 63. -- Very often modified and intensified by other exhortative particles: kiŋ aññatra (with abl.) unless (by), except for Sn 206 (see aññatra) kin nu kho why, but why, why in the world? D ii.131; J ii.159; DhA ii.91. As kimo in kimo nu why then? J iii.373; v.479 (=kim eva); kimu Sdhp 137; kim pana=nonne: kim pana bhante addasa? "Have you not seen?" D ii.132; kim pana tvaŋ maññasi what then do you think=do you not think then, that? . . . J i.171; kim anga how much more or less, i. e. far more, or far less Miln 274 as kim anga pana why then? M iii.181; Miln 23; Vism 233; kin ti how then? D ii.74; kin ti te sutaŋ have you not heard? D i.104; kintikaro= kathankaro q. v.; kiñca (cp. kiñcâpi under kiñci)= num -- que, nonne; is it not that, rather J i.135 (expld in c. by garahatte ca anuggahatthe nipāto). -- kiñci in comb. with yaŋ or yad: whatever; in other combn positive: some, neg.: na kiñci nothing; yad atthi kiñci whatever there is of . . . Sn 231; n'atthi kiñci there is nothing: see under atthi and kiñcana; kiñci n'atthi loke there is nothing in this world . . . Sn 1122. -> kiñcâpi whatever, however much: kiñcâpi te tattha yatā caranti "however much they endeavour in this" Sn 1080; J i.147; It 114; KhA 187, 190. Same as disjunctive conjunction with foll. pana: (=Lat. quamvis) kiñcâpi hi . . . pana although . . . yet DhA i.391; kiñcâpi with pot. . . . atha kho although -- yet; it may be that -- but S i.72. -- 3. In composition (˚ -- ) often implying doubt, uncertainty ("what is it, that is so & so?"), or expressing strangeness (: doubtful likeness), e. g. kinnara a kind of man (but not sure about it), a half -- man; kimpakka odd -- looking or doubtful (poisonous) fruit; kimpurisa a strange man (doubtful whether man or beast); cp. kiŋsuka.

-- akkhāyin preaching what? in conn. with kiŋ vādin saying what? i. e. holding what views? A i.62; -- atthaŋ for what purpose J i.279. -- atthiya to what purpose J iv.239; Miln 19; VvA 230; to any purpose, of any use S v.171; -- abhiñña having what name? J vi.126. -- kara doing whatever (his duty), a servant, in k˚ -- patissāvin an obedient servant D i.60 (cp. expln at DA i.168) A iii.37; iv.265 sq.; ThA 252; -- karaṇīya business, occupation A iii.113, 116, 258; v.24, 90, 338; -- kāraṇā (abl. of kāraṇa) by reason of what, i. e. why? PvA 25; -- kusalagavesin striving after that which is good M i.163 = 240; -- jacca of what caste? Sn p. 80; -- nāma of what name? Miln 15, 17; DhA iii.397 (both konāma and kiŋnāma). -- pakka strange or unknown (doubtful) fruit, in ˚rukkha a tree with odd fruit (i. e. poisonous fruit, cp. Rām. ii.66, 6; Kern, Toev. s. v. takes it to be Strychnos nux vomica) J i.368. -- purisa 1. a wild man of the woods J iv.254; vi.272, 497. -- 2. =kinnara (q. v.) A i.77; J v.42, 416. f. kimpurisī J v.215, 216. -- phala=˚pakka, in ˚rukkha a tree with unknown (poisonous) fruit J i.271. -- rukkha what kind of tree J v.203. -- vādin holding what view? A i.62; -- samācāra (a) of what conduct, in comb. with; -- sīla of what character Sn 324 (=SnA 331). -- 213 -- Kiŋsuka
Kiŋsuka
[kiŋ+su+ka] N. of a tree (creeper), lit. "what- ever -- like," or "what do you call it," i. e. strange tree (see kiŋ su & kiŋ 3), pop. name for the Butea frondosa S iv.193 (parable of the k.); J ii.265 (˚opama -- jātaka); v.405; vi.536. Perhaps v. l. at SnA 284.

-- puppha the (red) flower of the k. tree Vism 252. -- vaṇṇa of the colour of the k. (flower) J i.73 (angārā ashes). Kikita
Kikita
(?) dense, thick (?) SS at S iv.289 (for kuṭṭhita), said of the heat. Kikī
Kikī
[onomat. to sound -- root kṛ (see note on gala), cp. Sk. kṛka -- vāku cock, after the cry of the bird] 1. (m.) the blue jay (J ii.350 k. sakuṇo). -- 2. (f.) a hen (or the female of the jay?), in simile fr. the Apadāna of a hen watching her egg Vism 36 (aṇḍaŋ anurakkhamānā); J iii.375 (rakkhati); cp. SnA 317 (kikī sakuṇikā aṇḍassa upari seti). Kinkaṇika
Kinkaṇika
(m. nt.) [ = kinkiṇika] a small bell J iv.362; VvA 12. Kinkiṇika
Kinkiṇika
(m. nt.) [onomat. formation fr. sound part. kiṇi, see note on gala] a small bell J iv.259, 413; (suvaṇṇa˚); Vv 781 ( = kinkiṇi VvA 303); Vin iii.42 (kinkiṇikā saddo).

-- jāla a net or fringe of tinkling bells D ii.183; J i.32; DhA i.274. Kicca
Kicca
(nt.) [grd. of karoti = Sk. kṛtya] 1. (adj.) that which ought to be done, that which is to be performed; nt. something to do DhA i.15. Defd as kātabban ti kiccaŋ, kiñcid eva karaṇīyan ti KhA 218; kattabaŋ karaṇīyaŋ DhA iii.452. -- 2. (nt.) (a) duty, obligation, service, attention; ceremony, performance. The sg. is used collectively as pl. -- adj. ( -- ˚) one who is under an obligation, etc., or to whom an obligation, etc., is due A ii.67; Dh 276, 293; J iii.26; DhA i.5. -- kattabbak˚ -- karaṇa "the performance of incumbent duties" PvA 30; idaŋ me kiccaŋ akāsi "he has done me this service" PvA 29. -- In special sense of the duties to the dead: ahaŋ tava pitu ˚ŋ karomi "I will do the last duty to your father" PvA 274. -- a˚ that which is not (his) duty A ii.67; Dh 292, 293. -- (b) (as philos. term) function; rasa (essence) is either kicca r˚ -- or sampatti r, function or property. Cpd. 13, 213, n. l.; Vism 162 (parivyatta˚ quite conspicuous f.), 264 (abbhañjana˚ f. of lucubrating), 338, 493 (indriyānaŋ kiccaŋ), 547 (tad -- ārammaṇa˚, bhavanga˚, cuti˚, etc.); kiccavasena by way of f. Abhdh. -- sangaha v.8, cp. Dhs. trsl. 132 (with ref. to DhsA 264); kiccato Vism 581. -- appa˚ having few or no duties Sn 144 (cp. KhA 241. -- ārāmika˚ duties of the Ārāma J i.38. -- udaka˚ water -- performance, ablution D ii.15. -- kata˚ one who has performed his duties or mission, i. e. an Arahant Sn 1105; Vv 531 (cp. VvA 231. -- bahu˚ having many obligations, being very busy A iii.116 sq. -- bhatta˚ meal DA i.45 sq.; PvA 76; freq. in formula kata˚ (see kata), cp. kat -- annakicca Dāvs i.59. -- mata˚ funeral rites PvA 274. -- sarīra˚ the duties of the body, i. e. funeral rites PvA 74). -> Note. In compn with kud˚ kicca appears as kuk -- kucca (q. v.).

-- âkiccā pl. (kicca+kicca, see Trenckner, Notes J.P.T.S. 1908, 127; cp. ṭhānāṭhāna, bhavābhava maggāmagga, phalāphala, etc.) duties of all kinds, various duties: ativasā assu kiccākiccesu "they shall serve me in all duties" Dh 74 (DhA ii.78 = khuddakamahantesu karaṇīyesu "in small and great duties"); ˚esu yuttapayutto māṇavo (cp. a maid "of all work") VvA 298; ˚esu ussukā endeavouring to do all duties Sn 298 (but expld at SnA 319 as "zeal in what is to be done and what is not to be done," taken as kicca+ akicca cp. akicca); -- âdhikaraṇa settlement of the agenda at formal meetings of a chapter Vin ii.89= iii.164; iii.168; v.101 sq.; 150 sq.; See Vin Texts iii.45; -- kara doing one's duty S i.91; Sn 676; -- karaṇīyāni pl.=kiccākicca, various duties A iv.87; -- kārin=kiccakara A iii.443. Kiccayatā
Kiccayatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. last] duty Vin ii.89 (k˚ karaṇī- yatā); Miln 42. Kiccha
Kiccha
[see kasira] 1. (adj.) (a) distressed, in difficulty, poor, miserable, painful: kicchā vatâyaŋ idha vutti yaŋ jano passati kibbisakārī (miserable is the life of one who does wrong) Sn 676 = parihīnattha, in poverty PvA 220 (kicco= kiccho). -- (b) difficult to obtain, hard, troublesome Dh 182 (kiccho manussapaṭilābho, DhA 235=dullabho). -- 2. (nt.) distress, misery, pain, suffering: kicchaŋ āpanno loko D ii.30; S ii.5; ˚ŋ vā so nigacchati "he gets into difficulties (i. e. becomes poor)" J v.330 (=dukkhaŋ nigacchati); Vism 314; DhA i.80. -- Oblique cases used adverbially: instr. kicchena with difficulty J i.147, 191 (paṭijaggita); v.331 (id.) abl. kicchā id. J v.330. -- akiccha (˚ -- ) without difficulty, easily, in phrase akiccha -- lābhin taking or sharing willingly (+kasira -- lābhin) M i.33, 354=S ii.278 =A ii.23, 36; A iii.31, 114.

-- patta fallen into misery Pv iii.54 ( = PvA 199 dukkhappatta) -- vuttin living in misery, poor Pv ii.914 (=dukkhajīvita). -- 214 -- Kicchati
Kicchati
[v. denom. fr. kiccha, cp. Sk. kṛcchrāyate] to be troubled, to be wearied, to suffer Th 1, 962 (w. acc. of obj.); usually with kilamati: k˚ kāyo kilamati Th 1, 1073. Used in a play of words with vicikicchati by Bdhgh at DhsA 354 as "ārammaṇaŋ nicchetuŋ asakkonto kicchati kilamati" and at Bdhd. 25 (on vicikicchā) as sabhāvaŋ vicinanto etāya kicchati kilamati. Kiñcana
Kiñcana
(adj. -- nt.) [kiŋ+cana, equal to kiŋ+ci, indef. pron.] only in neg. sentences: something, anything. From the freq. context in the older texts it has assumed the moral implication of something that sticks or adheres to the character of a man, and which he must get rid of, if he wants to attain to a higher moral condition. -> Def. as the 3 impurities of character (rāga, dosa, moha) at D iii.217; M i.298; S iv.297; Vbh 368; Nd2 206b (adding māna, diṭṭhi, kilesa, duccarita); as obstruction (palibujjhana), consisting in rāga, etc. at DhA iii.258 (on Dh 200). Khīṇa -- saŋsāro na c'atthi kiñcanaŋ "he has destroyed saŋsāra and there is no obstruction (for him)" Th 1, 306. n'āhaŋ kassaci kiñcanaŋ tasmiŋ na ca mama katthaci kiñcanaŋ n'atthi "I am not part of anything (i. e. associated with anything), and herein for me there is no attachment to anything" A ii.177.-> akiñcana (adj.) having nothing Miln 220. -- In special sense "being without a moral stain," def. at Nd2 5 as not having the above (3 or 7) impurities. Thus freq. an attribute of an Arahant: "yassa pure ca pacchā ca majjhe ca n'atthi kiñcanaŋ akiñcanaŋ anādānaŋ tam ahaŋ brūmi brāhmaṇan" Dh 421 = Sn 645, cf. Th i. 537; kāme akiñcano "not attached to kāma" as Ep. of a khīṇāsava A v.232 sq.=253 sq. Often combd with anādāna: Dh 421; Sn 620, 645, 1094. -- Akiñcano kāmabhave asatto "having nothing and not attached to the world of rebirths" Vin i.36; Sn 176, 1059; -- akiñcanaŋ nânupatanti dukkhā "ill does not befall him who has nothing" S i.23. -- sakiñcana (adj.) full of worldly attachment Sn 620=DA 246. Kiñcikkha
Kiñcikkha
(nt.) [E. Mūller P. Gr. p. 35 expls kiñcid+ka] a trifle, a small thing: yaŋ vā taŋ vā appamattakaŋ Sn 121; 131; PugA 210 (iii.4). āmisa -- kiñcikkha -- hetu "for the sake of a little gain" A i.128 = Pug 29; at Pv ii.83 as āmisa -- kiñci -- hetu (but all vv. ll. B. have ˚kiñcakkha˚) "for some food" (expld at PvA 107: kiñci āmisaŋ patthento); -- katā kiñcikkhabāvanā at S iv.118 is evidently corrupt (v. l. ˚bhādhanā for bādhanā? ).

-- kamyatā in the desire for some little thing Sn 121 (cp. SnA 179: appamattake kismiñcid eva icchāya). Kiñjakkha
Kiñjakkha
(m. nt.) [cp. Sk. kiñjalka & remarks at Aufrecht Halāyudha p. 186] a filament, esp. of the lotus S iii.130; J i.60, 183; v.39; Vv 221; -- vāri˚ Pv ii.120 ( = kesara PvA 77) in combn with kesara VvA 12, 111, 175. Kiṭaka
Kiṭaka
[doubtful] only at Pv i.92,4, of clothes which are changed into missā kiṭakā, which is expl. at PvA 44 by kiṭakasadisāni lohapaṭṭasadisāni bhavanti "they become like (hot) copper plates." Kiṭika
Kiṭika
at Vin ii.153 of ālinda, a verandah, said to be saŋ- saraṇa˚ ugghāṭana˚ (a movable screen or a curtain that can be drawn aside) Vin Texts iii.174, 176. Kiṭṭha
Kiṭṭha
[cp. Sk. kṛṣṭa kṛṣ] growing corn, the crop on the ground, a cornfield A iii.393 (in simile), cp. S iv.195.

-- āda eating corn A iii.393. -- ārakkha the guardian of the cornfield S iv.196. -- sambādha "when the corn is thick," in ˚samaye near harvest -- time M i.115 (in simile); J i.143 (sassa -- samaye+), 338. Kiṇakiṇāyati
Kiṇakiṇāyati
[ = kinkiṇāyati, denom. fr. kinkiṇi, small bell] to tinkle; also spelt kiṇikiṇāyati J iii.315. See also kilikilāyati and cp. Sk. kiṭikiṭāyati to grind (one's teeth) & Prk. kiḍikiḍiya (chattering) Weber, Bhagavatī p. 289; also BSk. kaṭakaṭāyati Tal. Vist. 251. See taṭataṭayati & note on gala. Kiṇāti
Kiṇāti
[krī Vedic kriṇāti] to buy Vism 318; pot. kiṇe J v.375; ger. kiṇitvā M i.384; J i.92, 94; inf. kiṇituŋ J iii.282. Kiṇi
Kiṇi
(indecl.) a part., expressing the sound of a small bell: "tink" DhA i.339 (v. l. kiri; see also kili and note on gala). Kiṇṇa
Kiṇṇa1
[cp. Sk. kiṇva] ferment, yeast; Vin ii.116; VvA 73. Kiṇṇa
Kiṇṇa2
[pp. of kirati] strewn, scattered, covered; only in compn with profixes: ā˚, o˚, ud˚, upa˚, pari˚, saŋ˚; see also appa˚. Kiṇha
Kiṇha
(adj.) [see kaṇha; DA i.254 kiṇhā ti kaṇhā, kāḷakā ti attho] black; in the stock phrase muṇḍakā samaṇakā ibbhā k˚ bandhupādâpaccā D i.90 = 116; S iv.117; M i.334; ii.177; in a moral sense=bad, wicked, with nâlam -- ariyā dhammā D i.163. Kita
Kita
[pp. of kṛ, with i for a, cp. kiraṇa for karaṇa. The Dhtp. expld by nivāsane] 1. adorned: mālā˚ adorned with garlands Vin iii.249. -- 2. soiled, only in cpds. kaṇṇa˚ said of a wall, also of the ground at Vin i.48 = ii.209; and paŋsu˚, soiled with dust Vin ii.121, 174. Kitava & kitavā
Kitava
& kitavā [ = kaṭavā? cp. kaṭa] one who plays false; a cheat; adj. deceitful S i.24; J v.116; 117 (a˚); -- kitavā at Dh 252 (=DhA iii.375) in combn with saṭha also at J vi.228, where the connection with kaṭa is evident: kaṭaŋ Aḷāto gaṇhāti kiṭavā sikkhito yathā= like one who is skilled in having the kaṭa, the lucky die. Expld at DhA iii.375 as taken from fowling: kitavāya attabhāvaŋ paṭicchādeti "he hides himself by means of a pretence" (behind sham branches). Kittaka
Kittaka
(pron. interr.) [fr. kīva, cp. ettaka & BSk. kettaka (MVastu i.50); see Trenckner, Notes p. 134] how much? how great? nt. as adv.: to what extent? pl.: how many? Vin i.297; k˚ŋ antovassaŋ avasiṭṭhaŋ "how much of the rainy season is left?" VvA 66; kittakā pana vo bhante parivāra -- bhikkhū? "How many bhikkhus are in your retinue?" J i.32. -- As indef.: a little; kittakaŋ jīvissāmi, J v.505; kittakaŋ addhānaŋ a short time VvA 117 ( = kiŋva ciraŋ). Kittana
Kittana
(nt.) [f. kitteti] praise PvA 31, 107. Kittāvatā
Kittāvatā
(adv.) to what extent? how far? in what respect? K˚ nu kho mahāpurisa hoti "in what respect is a man a great man?" Nd2 502 B; k˚ nu kho paññavā ti vuccati? M i.292. Kitti & Kittī
Kitti
& Kittī f. [Vedic kīrti, *qer: cp. Gr. karkai/rw, Ohg. hruod, hruom = Ger. ruhm; *qār: cp. Sk. kāru poet; Gr. kh_ruc herald, Lat. carmen hymn of praise. -- The explns of Dhtp (579) & Dhtm (812) are saŋsadde & saŋsaddane] fame, renown, glory, honour, yaso ca kittī ca S i.25; kittiñ ca sukhañ ca S i.187; yaso kitti sukhañ ca A ii.32 yaso kittī ca "fame and renown" Sn 817 (=Nd1 147, where appl. to the religious perfection attained by a samaṇa); Sn 185 (in the same sense); VvA 68 (bāhira˚ -- bhāva becoming known outside); yaso kitti Sdhp 234.

-- sadda the sound of fame, praise, renown (thutighosa DA i.146) esp. appld to the Buddha, whose fame is heralded before him: Bhagavantaŋ Gotamaŋ evaŋ kalyāṇo k˚ -- saddo abbhuggato "the high reputation went forth over the world, concerning the Venerable Gotama": (such is this Exalted One, Arahant, etc.) D i.49, 87, 115, 116, 236; S iv.323, 374; v.352; A i.57, 180; iii.30, 39, 58, 253, 267; iv.80; etc. The same with reference to others: Miln 284. Appld to the good reputation of a man (of a kalyāṇamitta) at Pug 37; the opposite is pāpako kittisaddo, bad reputation: A i.126; iii.269; Pug 36; -- vaṇṇa praise, in ˚hara receiving or deserving praise D iii.191; cp. ˚bhatā Nd1 147. -- 215 -- Kittika
Kittika
(adj.) [fr. kitti] famous VvA 200. Kittita
Kittita
(pp. of kitteti] told Bdhd 124; su˚ well told Sn 1057. Kittima
Kittima
(adj.) [cp. Sk. kṛtimā, der. fr. kṛti, karoti, in sense of kata i.2 (a) made up, artificial; clever, skilful ThA 227; DhA 391 (of nāma); VvA 275 (of ratha: cleverly constructed)]. Cp. also kutta, -- f. kittimā at J iii.70; vi.508 is according to Kern, Toev. s. v. a misspelling for tittima. Kitteti
Kitteti
[v. den. fr. kitti] 1. to praise, extol PvA 124, 162; -- 2. to proclaim, announce, relate, tell; ppr. kittento praising PvA 159. -- fut. kittayissati in sense of aor. Vv 345 ( = katheti VvA 151). -- kittayissāmi I shall relate Sn 1053, 1132. grd: kittanīya to be praised PvA 9. -- aor. akittayi Sn 875, 921. -- pp. kittita. Kinnara
Kinnara
[kiŋ+nara, lit. what -- man, see kiŋ 3] a little bird with a head like a man's] J iv.106, 254, 438, v.47, 456; Mil 267. Canda kinnara Np. J i.91, vi.283, vi.74. -> f. kinnarā Np. of a queen J v. 437 sq., and kinnarī Th 2, 381 (cp. ThA 255), J ii.121 (matta -- kinnarī viya), 230; iv.432 sq. Cp. kimpurisa. Kinnāma
Kinnāma
see under kiŋ. Kipillikā
Kipillikā
(f.) & Kipillaka (nt.) [Cp. Sk. pipīlikā, see Trenckner, Notes, p. 108] an ant Sn 602 (kuntha˚); DhA i.360; J iv.142 (kuntha˚); v.39 (tamba˚ -- ˚āni); Miln 272. -- kipillaka J i.487 (v. l. BB. for pillaka); iv.375 (tamba˚ -- puṭa); DhA iv.134 (v. l. SS. for T. pillaka). -- Cp. kuntha & pipīlikā. Kibbisa
Kibbisa
(nt.) [Ved. kilbiṣa, according to Grassmann to *kil as in kilāsa, thus originally "stain, dirt." Buddh. Sk. kilviṣa classed with aparādha at Mvyntp. 245 No. 903] wrongdoing, demerit, fault, usually with ˚ŋ karoti to do wrong Sn 246; Sdhp, 204; J iii.135 or ˚ŋ pasavati A v.75; Vin ii.198. -- kata˚ (adj.) having done wrong in akata -- kalyāṇo, etc. A ii.174 and ≈(see kalyāṇa and kata ii.1 a); M i.39; Pv iv.77; PvA 59.

-- kāraka1 = next J iii.14; -- kārin, doing wrong Sn 665 sq.; PvA 58. Kibbisaka
Kibbisaka
= kibbisa Sdhp 290. Kimi
Kimi
m. [Vedic kṛmi] a worm, vermin: setā kimī kaṇha- sīsā A iii.241; Miln 272; DA i.199; -- As animal of death and putrefaction M i.507; J i.146; Sn 201; esp. with ref. to the punishment of Petas: Pv i.31; Th 2, 439; PvA 192; Sdhp 603. As glow -- worm M ii.34; 41 (with khajjopanaka); sālaka˚ a very minute insect Miln 312. In similes: Th 1, 1175 (kimī va mīlhasallitto); Vism 500, 598. In cpd. kimi -- kula the worm kind (genus worm) Miln 100; Vism 235; ˚gaṇa crowd of worms Vism 314. Kimina
Kimina
(adj.) [from kimi] covered with worms J v.270. Kira
Kira
(& Kila) [Vedic kila] adv. 1. emphatic: really, truly, surely. (Gr. dh/) -- 2. presumptive (with pres. or fut.): I should think one would expect. -- 3. narrative (with aor.): now, then, you know (Gr. de\, Lat. at, G. aber). -> kira in continuous story is what "iti" is in direct or indirect speech. It connects new points in a narrative with something preceding, either as expected or guessed. It is aoristic in character (cp. Sk. sma). In questions it is dubitative, while in ordinary statements it gives the appearance of probability, rather than certainty, to the sentence. Therefore the definitions of commentators: "people say" or "I have heard": kirasaddo anussavane: "kira refers to a report by hearsay" PvA 103; kira -- saddo anussav'atthe J i.158; VvA 322 are conventional and one -- sided, and in both cases do not give the meaning required at the specified passages. The same holds good for J i.158 & ii.430 (kirā ti anussavatthe nipāto). -- 1. mahantaŋ kira Bārāṇasirajjaŋ "the kingdom of B. is truly great" J i.126; attā hi kira duddamo "self is difficult to subdue, we know" Dh 159; amoghaŋ kira me puṭṭhaŋ Sn 356. -- na kira surely not Sn 840; J i.158. -- 2. esā kira Visākhā nāma "that I presume is the Visākhā" (of whom we have heard) DhA i.399; petā hi kira jānanti "the petas, I should say, will know" Pv ii.710; evaŋ kira Uttare? "I suppose this is so, Uttarā" VvA 69. evaŋ kira saggaŋ gamissatha "thus you will surely go to Heaven" Vv 828; "I hear" DhA i.392. -- 3. atīte kira with aor. once upon a time . . . PvA 46, etc.; so kira pubbe . . . akāsi, at one time, you know, he had made . . . J i.125; sā kira dāsī adāsi now the maid gave her . . . PvA 46; cp. J i.195, etc. Kiraṇa
Kiraṇa
(nt.) 1. [fr. kṛ, karoti to do] an occupation, place of work, workshop J iv.223. Cp. kita & kittima. -> 2. [fr. kṛ, kirati to scatter, cp. pp. kiṇṇa] scattering, effusion (of sun rays), effulgence VvA 169, 199. Kirati
Kirati
[kīr] to scatter, strew; not found in simples, only in cpds. apa˚, abbhuk˚, abhi˚, ava˚ (o˚), pari˚, vi˚. See also pp., kiṇṇa2. Kirāta
Kirāta
(& kirāṭa) [prob. dial.] a man of a tribe of jungle- men, classed with dwarfs among the attendants of a chief DA i.148. See on the Kirāta as a mountain tribe Zimmer, Altindisches Leben p. 34. Cp. also apakiritūna & okirati2, okiraṇa. -- A secondary meaning of kirāṭa is that of a fraudulent merchant, a cheat (see kirāsa & kerāṭika). Kirāsa
Kirāsa
(adj.) [a by -- form of kirāṭa] false, fraudulent J iv.223 ( = kerāṭika). Kiriyati
Kiriyati
[Pass. of kirati or karoti] to be affected or moved Vism. 318. Kiriya, Kiriyā & Kriyā
Kiriya,
Kiriyā & Kriyā [abstr. fr. karoti] 1. (n.) -- (a) ( -- ˚) action, performance, deed; the doing = fulfilment; cp. ˚karaṇa, anta˚, making an end of, putting a stop to (dukkhassa) S iii.149; iv.93; Sn 454, 725; -- kāla˚ "fulfilment of one's time" i. e. death S iii.122; Pv i.1012; Sn 694; Pug 17; kusala˚ performance of good actions S i.101; v.456; dāna˚ the bestowing of gifts PvA 123; pāpa˚ commission of sin Pug 19=23; puñña˚ the performance of good works S i.87=89=A iii.48; a˚ PvA 54 mangala˚ celebration of a festival PvA 86; massu -- kiriyā the dressing of the beard J iii.314 (cp. m -- karaṇa and kappanā); sacchi˚ realization, see s. v. -- akiriyā the non -- performance of, omission, abstaining from (a˚ akaraṇa=veramaṇī) J iii.530; Vbh 285. -> (b) an act in a special sense=promise, vow, dedication, intention, pledge: PvA 18; justice: Miln 171; kiriyaŋ bhindati to break one's vow Miln 206. -- (c) philosophically: action ineffective as to result, non -- causative, an action which ends in itself (Mrs. Rh. D. in Dhs. trsl. xciii.), inoperative (see Cpd. 19). In this sense it is grouped with kamma (cp. for relation kamma: kiriyā= Ger. sache: ursache). Thus is the theory of Makkhali: n'atthi kammaŋ, n'atthi kiriyaŋ n'atthi viriyan ti= there is no karma, no after -- effect and no vigour in this world A i.286 (different at D i.53); n'atthi kiriyā it does not matter M i.405. -- 2. (adj.) (a) making no difference, indefinite; of no result, as def. of avyākatā dhammā Vbh 106, 182=302=Dhs 566 and 989 (manodhātu kiriyā neva kusalā nâkusalā na ca kammavipākā: indifferent, neither good nor bad and having no fruit of kamma), same of jhāna Vbh 268=281; DhsA 388. -- (b) indecisive, in akiriyaŋ vyākaroti to give an indecisive answer, to reply evasively D i.53 and≈

-- pada (ttg.) the verb (i. e. that which supplies the action) VvA 315; -- vāda (adj.) promulgating the (view of a) consequence of action, believing in merit and demerit, usually combd with kammavāda (q. v.) also ˚vādin: D i.115 (of Gotama) A i.62; Vin i.71; a˚-> denying the difference between merit & demerit A iv.174 = Vin i.234; 242, Vin iii.2; A iv.180 sq.; S iii.73. (+natthikavāda); -- vādin adj. to prec. A i.62; -- hetu being a cause of discrimination Dhs 1424 sq. -- 216 -- Kiriyatā
Kiriyatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. last] the performance of ( -- ˚), state of, etc. See sakkacca˚, sacchi˚, sātacca˚. Kirīṭin
Kirīṭin
(adj.) enveloped, adorned Pv iii.91 ( = veṭhitasīsa). Kila
Kila
see kili (the sound click). Kilañjā
Kilañjā
(f.) a mat of fibre or rushes, matting Vism 327; also a screen, a fascine, hurdle, faggots; a crate, crating: tassa gandhabbaŋ kilañjā -- kaṇḍūvanaŋ viya hutvā . . . J ii.249; "his music was like the scraping of a mat"; suvaṇṇa -- kilañjā a gilt mat J iv.212. As a fascine, used in making a road: DhA i.442. as a screen (combd with chatta, fan) PvA 127; as faggots: J i.158; Miln 287; as a crate or basket, used by distillers: M i.228 = 374 (soṇḍikā -- kilañjā) (cp. the trsln under soṇḍa in J.P.T.S. 1909); to which is likened the hood of a snake: S i.106 (snake=māra). Kilanta
Kilanta
[pp. of kilamati] tired, exhausted, weary, either with ˚kāya tired in body PvA 43; VvA 65 (indicating the falling asleep); or ˚citta tired in mind D i.20 = iii.32 (paduṭṭhacitta+, of the waning of the gods); or both ˚kāya -- citta Pv iii.23; opp. akilanta -- kāya -- citta alert, vigorous; with sound body and mind. Kilama
Kilama
[spelt klama, fr. klam] fatigue J v.397 ( = kilanta- bhāva). Kilamati
Kilamati
[Sk. klamati, a variation of śramati sri from sri to lean, cp. kilanta, as "sleepy," and Lat. clīnāre, clemens. To k > ś cp. kaṇṇa > śṛṇga, kilissati > śliṣyati, etc. The Dhtp (222) & Dhtm (316) paraphrase kilam by gilāne.] 1. to go short of, to be in want of (instr.) DhA ii.79; na piṇḍakena kilamati does not go short of food Vin ii.15, 87; iv.23 sq. -- 2. to weary, to be wearied, tired, fatigued; to be in trouble or in misery PvA 215 (to be incommodated) 277 (be in distress); fut. kilamissāmi PvA 76. Cp. pari˚. -- pp. kilanta. Kilamatha
Kilamatha
[fr. klam, in formation cp. samatha] tiredness, fatigue, exhaustion M i.168; A ii.199; S i.136; as kāya˚, citta˚ S v.128; as daratha˚ A iii.238; PvA 23; as niddā˚ A ii.48, 50. Kilamita
Kilamita
[pp. of kilameti] worn out, tired, fatigued Pvii.83. Kilameti
Kilameti
[denom. fr. kilama] to be tired or fatigued J i.115; ppr. kilamayanto D i.52. -- pp. kilamita. Kilāsa
Kilāsa
[cp. Sk. kilāsa] a cutaneous disease, perhaps leprosy, enumd under the var. diseases (ābādhā) together with kuṭṭha gaṇḍa k˚ sosa Vin ii.271; A v.110; Nd2 3041. Kilāsika & ˚iya
Kilāsika
& ˚iya (adj.) [fr. last] afflicted with a cutaneous disease, a leper, in same combn as kilāsa, Vin i.93; Kvu 31 (˚iya). Kilāsu
Kilāsu
[fr. sram, cp. kilamatha. E Müller P. Gr. 38 = glāsnu, glā, cp. gilāna] exhausted, tired of (c. dat. or inf.) Vin iii.8; a˚ untiring in (c. dat. or acc.) S i.47; v.162; J i.109; Miln 382. Kili
Kili
(sometimes kila) [onomat. fr. sound -- root k&lcircle;] 1. in- decl. the sound "click," of the noise of a trap when shutting J i.243; ii.363, 397 (as "kilī"). -- Also repeated "kilikilī ti" click, click J i.70. -- 2. as n. f. tinkling, clicking, ticking (cp. kiṇi), in kiliŋ karoti to tinkle J v.203. Kilikilāyati
Kilikilāyati
[denom. fr. kili with reduplication] to tinkle J v.206; (freq. fr. kili or den. fr. kilikilā; cp. kilakilā "shouting for joy" AvŚ i.48 and in cpd. hāhākārakilakilā "shouting hā -- hā and hail -- hail" ibid. i.67 MVastu iii.312 and Divy 459). See also kiṇakiṇāyati. Note. -- Kil is one of the variations of the sound -- imitating qel, which otherwise appears as qal, qul in Gr. kel -- ados, L. cal -- are, Ohg. hell -- an (cp. Sk. krandati?) also Gr. kla/zw, L. clango, Goth. hlahjan ("laugh") and in Sk kolāhala, kokila, cp. cuculus (cuckoo) and perhaps Sk. ululī, ulūka (owl), Gr. o)lolu/zw, L. ululare. See also the cognate qer under kitti. Kilijjati
Kilijjati
[med -- pass. of kilid = Sk. klid, to be wet. prob.= śliṣ to stick to, and confounded with svid, cp. also kelana & khela. The meaning "to get wet, to be soiled" only in pp. kilinna. -- The Dhtm (199), however, expls k. by parideva lament, to be in trouble, which is not quite in harmony with the meaning; it is more likely that in P. we have a confusion between klid & kliś in a meaning which differs from Sk.] to become heated, to get into a state of inflammation, to fester (of wounds) Vin i.205 (vaṇo kilijjittha festered); Sn 671 (gloss for kilissati, expld at SnA 481 by pūti hoti). -- pp. kilinna. See also ukkiledeti (to clean out a stain, to "disinfect"). Kiliṭṭha
Kiliṭṭha
[pp of kilissati] 1. soiled, stained, impure; of gatta, limbs J i.129; of cīvara, cloak Bdhd 92; of vattha, clothes DhA ii.261; of pāvāra -- puppha, mango blossom KhA 58 = Vism 258. -- 2. unclean, lustful (morally) bad, in ˚kamma dirty pursuit, i. e. cohabitation J iv.190; PvA 195 (of a gaṇikā); together with kuthita Miln 250. Kilinna
Kilinna
[pp. of kilijjati] 1. wet, usually with saliva and perspiration Vin iii.37; J i.61 (lālā˚), 164 (kheḷa˚); DA i.284 (assu˚); VvA 67 (seda˚). -- 2. The other meaning of kilid (to get inflamed) is to be found in kilinna -- sarīra (adj.) with an inflamed body (i. e. suffering from a skin -- disease), which is Bdhgh's expln of okilinī: see under okiraṇa. Kilissati
Kilissati
[Sk. kliśyati = kliś or śliṣ to adhere, cp. P. kheḷa and silesuma or semha, Sk. śleṣma, slime. Same root as Gr. lei/mac snail; Ags. slīm slime. Another, specifically Pali, meaning is that of going bad, being vexed, with ref. to a heated state. This lies at the bottom of the Dhtp. (445) & Dhtm. (686) expln by upatāpe.] 1. to get wet, soiled or stained, to dirty oneself, be impure It 76 (of clothes, in the passing away of a deva); Th 1, 954 (kilisissanti, for kilissanti); Ps i.130. Kilisseyya Dh 158 (expld as nindaŋ labhati) to do wrong. Cp. pari˚. Kilissana
Kilissana
(nt.) getting dirty, staining J i.8. Kilesa
Kilesa
(and klesa) [from kilissati] 1. stain, soil, impurity, fig. affliction; in a moral sense, depravity, lust. Its occurrence in the Piṭakas is rare; in later works, very frequent, where it is approx. tantamount to our terms lower, or unregenerate nature, sinful desires, vices, passions.

1. Kilesa as obstacle (see ˚āvaraṇa, ˚ -- sampayutta, ˚ -- vippayutta, ˚pahāna) Ps i.33; Sdhp 455; bhikkhu bhinnakileso "one whose passions are broken up" Vḅh 246, PvA 51; upasanta kileso "one whose passions are calmed" PvA 230; no ce pi jātu puriso kilese vāto yathā abbhaghanaŋ vihāne Sn 348; pariyodapeyya attānaŋ cittaklesehi paṇḍito S v.24 = A v.232, 253=Dh 88. 2. Occurs in such combinations as kilesā ca khandhā ca abhisankhārā ca Nd2 487; kilesa+khandha: Ps i.69-> 72; ii.36, 140; cp. Vbh 44, 68; kilesa+saŋsāra PvA 7; kammaŋ kilesā hetu saŋsārassa Nett 113, cp. 191. -> 3. kilesa also occurs in a series explanatory of taṇhā, in the stereotype combn of t., diṭṭhi, kilesa "clinging to existence, false ideas and lust" (see Nd2 s. v. taṇhā v.). -- 4. In the same function it stands with rāga, viz. rāga dosa moha kilesa, i. e. sensuality, bewilderment and lust (see Nd2 s. v. rāga ii.), cp. Dhs 982, 1006. -> The grouping as dasa kilesa -- vatthūni is: lobha dosa moha māna diṭṭhi vicikicchā thīnaŋ uddhaccaŋ ahirikaŋ anottappaŋ Dhs 1548=Vbh 341; Vism 683; mentioned at Ps i.130. -- These with the exception of the last two, are also grouped as aṭṭha k˚ -- vatthūni at Vbh 385. -- As three kilesas (past, present and future) at Ps ii.217. -- 5. The giving up of kilesa is one of the four essentials of perfection: the recognition of evil, the removal of its source (which is kilesa), the meditation on the Path, and the realization of the extinction of evil (see Nd2 s. v. dukkha ii.). Kilesa in this connection interchanges with samudaya, as denoting the origin of evil; cp. samudayo kilesā Nett 191.

-- āvaraṇa the obstacle of lust Vbh 342 Pug 13; Vism 177; ˚āvaraṇatā id. A iii.436; -- kkhaya the destruction of lust Bdhd 81; -- paripantha danger of lust J vi.57; -- pahāna the giving up of worldly lust Vin iii.92 sq., iv.25; Bdhd 129, 131; -- puñja the heap of lusts; consisting of ten qualities, viz. the four āhārā (etc. four of each:), vipallāsā, upādānāni, yogā, gandhā, āsavā, oghā, sallā, viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo, agatigamanāni. Nett 113, 114; 116 sq. -- bhūmi the substratum or essence of lust Nett 2, 192; there are four mentioned at Nett 161: anusaya˚, pariyuṭṭhāna˚, saŋyojana˚, upādāna˚; -- māra death which is the consequence of sinful desire DhA i.317 (in expl. of Māra); -- vatthūni (pl.) the (10) divisions of kilesa (see above) Dhs 1229, 1548; Vism 20. -- vinaya the discipline of lust Nett 22; -- vippayutta free from lust (dhamma principles, to which belongs Nibbāna) Dhs 1555; -- sampayutta connected or affected with lust Dhs 1554 (as 12 principles); Vbh 18 = 30=44=56, 68, 80, 96, 120, 323. -- 217 -- Kileseti
Kileseti
[v. den. fr. kilesa] to become soiled or stained (fig.): indriyāni kilesenti Sdhp. 364. Kiloma
Kiloma
[ = next?] at J iii.49 taken as syn. of loma, hair and used in sense of pharusa, shaggy, rough (in kiloma maŋsakhaṇḍa as simile for kiloma -- vācā). Kilomaka
Kilomaka
[ = Sk. kloman, the right lung, cp. Greek pleu/mwn, Lat. pulmo] the pleura M i.185 = Kh iii, Nett 77=Vbh 193; J iv.292; Miln 26. Discussed in detail at Vism 257, 357. Kisa
Kisa
(adj.) [Sk. kṛśa, perhaps to Lat. gracilis, slim] lean, haggard, emaciated, opp. thūla fat (VvA 103). As Ep. of ascetics Sn 165, Dh 395 = Th 1, 243; esp. as Ep. of petas: Pv ii.113; Sn 426, 585; Sdhp 101; Miln 303. For phrase kisa -- dhamani -- santhata see the latter. Kisaka
Kisaka
= kisa Vin i.36=J i.83; f. kisikā Th 2, 27. Kissati
Kissati
[den. fr. kisa] 1. to get thin, to become exhausted, to waste, weary, worry J vi.495 (pret. mā kisittha = C. mā kisā bhava). -- 2. [Pass. of kassati, kṛṣ] see pari˚ Kissava
Kissava
in neg. akissava at S i.149 is doubtful in origin and meaning. The trsln gives "without wisdom." Should we read akittima or akiñcana, as we suggested under a˚, although this latter does not quite agree with the sense required? Kīṭa
Kīṭa
(nt.) [cp. Sk. kīṭa] a general term for insect DhA i.187; usually in combn with paṭanga, beetle (moth?) M iii.168 (with puḷava); Sn 602; J vi.208; Miln 272 (˚vaṇṇa); PvA 67; Vism 115. kīṭa at J v.373 means a kind of shield ( = cāṭipāla ? c.), the reading should prob. be kheṭa. Kīṭaka
Kīṭaka
(nt.) one or all kinds of insects Vin i.188. Kīta
Kīta
[pp. of kiṇāti] bought J i.224 (˚dāsa a bought slave) ii.185. Kīdisa
Kīdisa
(interr. adj.) [cp. Sk. kīdṛś = kiŋ dṛśa] what like? of what kind? which? (cp. tādisa) Sn 836, 1089 (=kiŋ saṇṭhita Nd2; Pv ii.63; PvA 50, 51; VvA 76). -- As Np. S iv.193. -- See also Kīrisa. Kīra
Kīra
[cp. Sk. kīra] a parrot Abhp 640 (cp. cirīṭi). Kīrisa
Kīrisa
= kīdisa Th 2, 385 (cp. ThA 256). Kīla
Kīla
= a pin, a stake, see Khīla. Kīḷati
Kīḷati
[Sk. krīḍati] to play, sport, enjoy or amuse oneself Vin iv.112 (udake k. sport in the water); Pv ii.121 ( = indriyāni paricarāmi PvA 77) D ii.196; J v.38; Th 2, 147; PvA 16, 67, 77, 189; -- c. acc. to celebrate: nakkhattaŋ J i.50; VvA 63; PvA 73; ThA 137; chaṇaŋ DhA iii.100. -- pp. kīḷita. Caus. II. kīḷāpeti to make play, to train J ii.267 (sappaŋ to train or tame a snake). Kīḷanaka
Kīḷanaka
[fr. kīḷati] a plaything, a toy Th 2, 384 (with ref. to the moon). Kīḷanā
Kīḷanā
(f.) [fr. same) playing, sport, amusement Nett 18; PvA 67; DhA iii.461 (nakkhatta˚ celebration). Kīḷā
Kīḷā
f. [fr. krīḍ, cp. Sk. krīḍā] play, sport, enjoyment; udakakīḷaŋ kīḷantī enjoying herself on the water PvA 189. -- uyyāna˚ amusement in the park DhA i.220; iv. 3; nakkhatta -- kīḷaŋ kīḷati to celebrate a festival (i. e. the full moon when standing in a certain Nakkhatta) VvA 109, ThA 137; sāla -- kīḷā sport in the sāla woods J v.38; kīḷādhippāyena in play, for fun PvA 215; -- Cp. kīḷikā.

-- goḷa a ball to play with Vism 254. -- goḷaka id. Vism 256 (cp. KhA 53); ThA 255; -- pasuta bent on play J i.58; -- bhaṇḍaka (nt.) toy Miln 229 ( = kīḷāpanaka M i.266); -- maṇḍala play -- circle, children's games, playground J vi.332; DhA iii.146; -- sālā playhouse J vi.332. Kīḷāpanaka
Kīḷāpanaka
1. (nt.) a plaything, toy M i.266, 384; a list given at A v.203. -- 2. (adj.) one who makes play J iv.308 (sappa˚ a snake -- trainer, cp. sappaŋ kīḷāpeti J ii.267). Kīḷikā
Kīḷikā
(f.) play, sport, amusement; always -- ˚, like kumāra˚ D ii.196; uyyāna˚ (sport in the garden) J iii.275; iv.23, 390; udaka˚ ThA 186. Kīḷita
Kīḷita
[pp. of kīḷati] played or having played, playing, sporting; celebrated (of a festival) A iv.55 (hasitalapita˚); PvA 76 (sādhu˚). -- (nt.) amusement, sport, celebration M i.229 (kīḷita -- jātaŋ kīḷati). Cp. sahapaŋsu˚˚; see also keḷi & khiḍḍā. Kīvant & Kīva
Kīvant
& Kīva (interr. adj. and adv.) [Sk. kiyant and kīvant; formed fr. interr. stem ki] how great? how much? how many? and in later language how? (cp. rel. yāva). As indef.: Kīvanto tattha bheravā "however great the terrors" Sn 959. -- Kīva kaṭuka how painful? PvA 226; k˚ -- ciraŋ how long? Pj and Sn 1004; k˚ -- dīghaŋ same Sn p. 126; k˚ dūre how far? Miln 16; DhA i.386; k˚ -- mahantaŋ how big? DhA i.29; VvA 325; k˚ bahuŋ how much? DhA iv.193. Kīvatika
Kīvatika
(interr. adj.) [fr. last] of number: how much? how many? Kīvatikā bhikkhū how many Bhikkhus? Vin i.117. -- 218 -- Ku
Ku
(kud -- and kum -- ) 3rd stem of interrog. pron. ka (on form and meaning cp. kad; = Lat.* qṷu in (qṷ)ubi, like katara (qṷ)uter; cp. also Vedic kū how? Sk. kutra, kutaḥ, kuha, kva) where? when? whither? whence? As adv. in cpds. in disparaging sense of "what of"? i. e. nothing of, bad, wrong, little, e. g. kum -- magga wrong path; kuk -- kucca=kud -- kicca doing wrong, troubling about little=worry. -- kuŋ at PvA 57 (in expl. of kuñjara) is interpreted as paṭhavi.

1. Kuto where from? whence? Dh 62; k˚bhayaŋ whence i. e. why fear? Dh 212 sq.; Sn 270, 862; Pv ii.69; how? J vi.330; with nu whence or why then? Sn 1049 ( = kacci ssu Nd2 s. v.). kut -- ettha=kuto ettha J. i.53. -- na kuto from nowhere Sn 35, 919; a -- kuto id. in akutobhaya "with nothing to fear from anywhere" i. e. with no reason for fear S i.192; Th 1, 510; Th 11, 333; Sn 561 (modāmi akutobhayo); Pv ii.121 (id.); kuto -- ja arisen from where? Sn 270; -- ˚nidāna having its foundation or origin in what? Sn 270, 864 sq.

2. Kudā at what time, when? (cp. kadā) Pug 27; indef. kudācanaŋ: at any time, na k˚ never Sn 221 (expl. by soḷasim pi kalaŋ SnA 277); Dh 5, 210; Bdhd 125; gamanena na pattabbo lokass' anto k˚ "by walking, the end of the world can never be reached" S i.62.

3. Kuva, kva, where? Sn 970 (kuvaŋ & kuva) indef. kvaci anywhere; with na: nowhere; yassa n'atthi upamā kvaci "of whom (i. e. of Gotama) there is no likeness anywhere" Sn 1137; cp. 218, 395; expld by Nd2 like kuhiñci. kuvaŋ at D iii.183.

4. Kutha (kudha) where? J v.485 ( = kuhiŋ).

5. Kuhiŋ ( = kuhaŋ, cp. Sk. kuha) where? whither? Often with fut.: k˚ bhikkhu gamissati Sn 411; ko gacchasi where are you going? Pv ii.81; tvaŋ ettakaŋ divasaŋ k˚ gatā where have you been all these days? PvA 6; 13; 42; indef. kuhiñci, anywhere, with na k˚: nowhere, or: not in anything, in: n'atthi taṇhā k˚ loke "he has no desire for anything in this world" Sn 496, 783, 1048 see Nd on 783 & 1048=kimhici; Dh 180. Kukutthaka
Kukutthaka
(v. l. BB. kukkuṭhaka) a kind of bird J vi.539. Kern (Toev. s. v.) takes it to be Sk. kukkuṭaka, phasianus gallus. Kukku
Kukku
[cp. Sk. kiṣku?] a measure of length S v.445 = A iv.404, and in kukkukata Vin i.255=v.172 (cp. however Vin. Texts i.154, on Bdhgh's note=temporary). Kukkuka
Kukkuka
[fr. kukku] "of the kukku -- measure," to be measured by a kukku. Of a stone -- pillar, 16 k's high S v.445 A iv.404. -- akukkuka -- jāta of enormous height (of a tree) M i.233 = S iii.141 (text: akukkajāta) =iv.167; A ii.200 (text: akukkuccakajāta). Kern (Toev. s. v. kukka) takes it to mean "grown crooked," a˚ the opposite. Kukkucca
Kukkucca
[kud -- kicca] 1. bad doing, misconduct, bad character. Def. kucchitaŋ kataŋ kukataŋ tassa bhāvo kukkuccaŋ Vism 470 & Bdhd 24; -- Various explanations in Nd2 on Sn 1106 = Dhs 1160, in its literal sense it is bad behaviour with hands and feet (hattha -- pada˚) J i.119=DA i.42 (in combn with ukkāsita & khipitasadda); hattha˚ alone J ii.142. -- 2. remorse, scruple, worry. In this sense often with vippaṭissāra; and in conn. w. uddhacca it is the fourth of the five nīvaraṇas (q. v.) Vin i.49; iv.70; D i.246; S i.99; M i.437; A i.134=Sn 1106; A i.282; Sn 925; Nd2 379; DhA iii.483; iv.88; Sdhp 459; Bdhd 96. -- na kiñci k˚ŋ na koci vippaṭissāreti "has nobody any remorse?" S iii.120=iv.46. The dispelling of scrupulousness is one of the duties and virtues of a muni: k˚ŋ vinodetuŋ A v.72; k. pahāya D i.71=A ii.210=Pug 59; chinnakukkucca (adj.) free from remorse M i.108; khīṇāsava k˚ -- vūpasanta S i.167=Sn 82. -- akukkucca (adj.) free from worry, having no remorse Sn 850. Kukkuccaŋ kurute (c. gen.) to be scrupulous about J i.377; kariŋsu DhA iv.88; cp. kukkuccaŋ āpajjati (expl. by sankati) J iii.66. Kukkuccaka
Kukkuccaka
(adj.) conscientious (too) scrupulous, "faith- ful in little" J i.376; VvA 319. Kukkuccāyati
Kukkuccāyati
[denom. fr. kukkucca] to feel remorse, to worry A i.85; Pug 26. Der. are kukkuccāyanā and ˚āyitatta = kukkucca in def. at Dhs 1160=Nd2 s. v. Kukkucciya
Kukkucciya
= kukkucca Sn 972. Kukkuṭa
Kukkuṭa
(Sk. kurkuṭa & kukkuṭa; onomatopoetic = Lat. cucurio, Ger. kikeriki) a cock Miln 363; J iv.58; VvA 163; f. kukkuṭī a hen DhA i.48; ThA 255; in simile M i.104=357=A iv.125 sq., 176 sq. (cp. ˚potako).

-- aṇḍa (kukkuṭ˚) a hen's egg Vism 261. -- patta the wing of a cock A iv.47. -- potaka a chicken, in simile M i.104 = 357=A iv.126=176. -- yuddha a cock fight D i.6; -- lakkhaṇa divining by means of a cock D i.9; -- sampātika a shower of hot ashes (cock as symbol of fire) A i.159=D iii.75, cp. Divy 316 and see Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 38; -- sūkarā (pl.) cocks and pigs D i.5= A ii.209=Pug 58; D i.141; A ii.42 sq.; It 36. Kukkura
Kukkura
[Sk. kurkura, or is it ku -- krura? Cp. kurūra) a dog. usually of a fierce character, a hound A iii.389; v.271; J i.175 sq.; 189; Pv iii.79; Sdhp 90. In similes: S iv.198; M i.364; A iv.377. -- f. kukkurinī Miln 67.

-- vatika (adj.) imitating a dog, cynic M i.387 (+dukkara kāraka; also as k˚ -- vata, ˚sīla, ˚citta, ˚ākappa); D iii.6, 7; Nett 99 (+govatika; -- sangha a pack of hounds A iii.75. Kukkuḷa
Kukkuḷa
[taken as variant of kukkuṭa by Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 39; occurs also in BSk. as Name of a Purgatory, e. g. MVastu i.6; iii.369, 455. The classical Sk. form is kukūla] hot ashes, embers S iii.177; J ii.134; Kvu 208, cf. trans. 127; with ref. to Purgatory S i.209; J v.143 (˚nāma Niraya); Sdhp 194; Pgdp 24.

-- vassa a shower of hot ashes J i.73; iv.389 (v. l.). Kukkusa
Kukkusa
1. the red powder of rice husks Vin ii.280 (see Bdgh ii.328: kukkusaŋ mattikaŋ = kuṇḍakañ c'eva mattikañ ca). -- 2. (adj.) variegated, spotted J vi.539 (=kaḷakabara 540; v. l. B. ukkusa). Kunkuma
Kunkuma
(nt.) [cp. Sk. kunkuma] saffron Miln 382; Vism 241. Kunkumin
Kunkumin
(adj.) fidgety J v.435. Kunkumiya
Kunkumiya
(nt.) noise, tumult J v.437 ( = kolāhala). Kucchi
Kucchi
(f.) [Sk. kukṣiḥ, cp. kośa] a cavity, esp. the belly (Vism 101) or the womb; aṇṇava˚ the interior of the ocean i.119, 227; J v.416; jāla˚ the hollow of the net J i.210. As womb frequent, e. g. mātu˚ J i.149; DA i.224; PvA 19, 63, 111, 195; as pregnant womb containing gabbha J i.50; ii.2; vi.482; DhA ii.261.

-- ḍāha enteric fever DhA i.182; -- parihārika sustaining, feeding the belly D i.71 = Pug 58; -- roga abdominal trouble J i.243; -- vikāra disturbance of the bowels Vin i.301; -- vitthambhana steadying the action of the bowels (digestion) Dhs 646=740=875. Kucchita
Kucchita
[Sk. kutsita, pp. of kutsāy] contemptible, vile, bad, only in Coms VvA 215; in def. of kāya KhA 38; in def. of kusala DhsA 39; VvA 169; in def. of kukkucca Vism 470; in def. of paŋsu -- kūla Vism 60. Kucchimant
Kucchimant
(adj.) [fr. kucchi] pregnant J v.181. Kujati
Kujati
[or kujjati? see kujja] in kujantā dīnalocanā Sdhp 166: to be bent, crooked, humpbacked? Kujana
Kujana
(adj.) [fr. kujati] only neg. a˚ not going crooked, in ratho akujano nāma S i.33. Kujja
Kujja
(adj.) [Sk. kubja, humpbacked; √qub, Lat. cubare, Gr. kufo/s, Mhg. hogger, humpback] lit. "bent," as nt. kujjaŋ in ajjhena -- kujjaŋ Sn 242 crookedness, deceit, fraud (cp. SnA 286 kūṭa?). Cp. kujati & khujja, see also ava˚, uk˚, nik˚, paṭi˚, pali˚. -- 219 -- Kujjhati
Kujjhati
[cp. Vedic krunhyate, fr. krudh] to be angry with (dat.) A i.283 = Pug 32, 48; Vism 306; mā kujjhittha kujjhataŋ, "don't be angry" S i.240; mā kujjhi J iii.22; na kujjheyya Dh. 224; ger. kujjhitvā PvA 117, grd. kujjhitabba Pv iv.1.11 Kujjhana
Kujjhana
(adj.) [fr. kujjhati] angry = kodhana VvA 71; Pug A 215 (˚bhāva). Kujjhanā (f.) anger, irritation, together with kujjhitattaŋ in defn of kodha Dhs 1060= Pug 18, 22. Kujjhāpana
Kujjhāpana
(nt.) [Caus. formation fr. kujjhati] being angry at DhA iv.182. Kuñca
Kuñca
(nt.) [kruñc, cp. Sk. krośati, Pali koñca, Lat. crocio, cornix, corvus; Gr. krw/cw, kraugh/; all of crowing noise; from sound -- root k&rcircle;, see note on gala] a crowing or trumpeting noise (in compounds only). -- kāra cackling (of a hen) ThA 255; -- nāda trumpeting (of an elephant) J iii.114. Kuñcikā
Kuñcikā
(f.) a key, Bdhgh on C. V. v.29, 2 (Vin ii.319) cp. tāla Vin ii.148; Vism 251 (˚kosaka a case for a key); DA i.200, 207, 252; DhA ii.143. Kuñcita
Kuñcita
(adj.) [pp. of kuñc or kruñc; cp. Sk. kruñcati, to be crooked, Lat. crux, Ohg. hrukki, also Sk. kuñcita bent] bent, crooked J i.89 (˚kesa with wavy hair); v.202 (˚agga: kaṇṇesu lambanti ca kuñcitaggā: expld on p. 204 by sīhakuṇḍale sandhāya vadati, evidently taking kuñcita as a sort of earring); of Petas, Sdhp 102. Kuñja
Kuñja
(m.) a hollow, a glen, dell, used by Dhpāla in expln of kuñjara at VvA 35 (kuñjaro ti kuñje giritale ramati) and PvA 57 (kuŋ pathaviŋ jīrayati kuñjo suvāraŋ aticarati kuñjaro ti). -- nadī˚ a river glen DA i.209. Kuñjara
Kuñjara
(m.) [Deriv. unknown. The sound is not unlike an elephant's trumpeting & need not be Aryan, which has hasti. The Sk. of the epics & fables uses both h˚ and k˚] an elephant Vin ii.195; M i.229, 375; S i.157; Dh 322, 324, 327; J v.336; Vv 51; Pv i.113; DhA iv.4; ThA 252; Miln 245. -- deva˚ chief of the gods, Ep. of Sakka Vv 477; J v.158.

-- vara a state elephant VvA 181. -- sālā an elephant's stable DhA iv.203. Kuṭa
Kuṭa
a pitcher Vv 509; J i.120; DhA ii.19, 261; iii.18. Kuṭa is to be read at J i.145 for kūṭa (antokuṭe padīpo viya; cp. ghaṭa). Note. Kuṭa at DhsA 263 stands for kūṭa3 sledge -- hammer. Kuṭaka
Kuṭaka
a cheat Pgdp 12; read kūtaka. So also in gāma kuṭaka S ii.258. Kuṭaja
Kuṭaja
a kind of root (Wrightia antidysenterica or Neri- cum antidysentericum), used as a medicine Vin i.201 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.45). Kuṭati
Kuṭati
see paṭi˚ and cp. kūṭa1, koṭṭeti & in diff. sense kuṭṭa1. Kuṭava
Kuṭava
(v. l. S. kū˚; B. kulāvaka) a nest J iii.74; v. l. at DhA ii.23 (for kuṭikā). Kuṭikā
Kuṭikā
(f.) from kuṭī [B. Sk. kuṭikā Av.Ś. ii.156] a little hut, usually made of sticks, grass and clay, poetical of an abode of a bhikkhu Vin iii.35, 41, 42 = VvA 10; PvA 42, 81; DhA ii.23. Cp. also tiṇa˚, dāru˚; arañña˚ a hut in the woods S i.61; iii.116; iv.380. Often fig. for body (see kāya). Th 1, 1. -- As adj. -- ˚, e. g. aṭṭhakuṭiko gāmo a village of 8 huts Dh i.313. Kuṭimbika
Kuṭimbika
(also kuṭumbika) a man of property, a land- lord, the head of a family, J i.68, 126, 169, 225; ii.423; PvA 31, 38, 73, 82. Kutumbiya -- putta Np. Vism 48. Kuṭila
Kuṭila
(adj.) bent, crooked (cp. kuj and kuc, Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 15) J iii.112 ( = jimha); Miln 297 (˚sankuṭila), 418 (of an arrow); nt. a bend, a crook Miln 351. -- a˚ straight Vv 167 ( -- magga).

-- bhāva crookedness of character Vism 466; PvA 51; VvA 84. -- a˚ uprightness Bdhd 20. Kuṭilatā
Kuṭilatā
(f.) [fr. kuṭila] crookedness, falseness, in a˚, up- rightness of character Dhs 50, 51; DhA i.173. Kuṭī
Kuṭī
(kuṭi˚) (f.) any single -- roomed abode, a hut, cabin, cot, shed Vin iii.144 (on vehāsa -- kuṭī see vehāsa & Vin iv.46); Sn 18, 19; Pv ii.28; VvA 188, 256 (cīvara˚, a cloak as tent). See also kappiya˚, gandha˚, paṇṇa˚, vacca˚.

-- kāra the making of a hut, in ˚sikkhāpada, a rule regarding the method of building a hut J ii.282; iii.78. 351; -- dūsaka (a) destroying a hut or nest DhA ii. 23; -- purisa a "hut man," a peasant Miln 147. Kuṭukuñcaka
Kuṭukuñcaka
see kaṭukañcuka. Kuṭumba
Kuṭumba
(nt.) family property & estates J i.122, 225; rāja˚ (and ˚kuṭumbaka) the king's property J i.369, 439. -- kuṭumbaŋ saṇṭhapeti to set up an establishment J i.225; ii.423; iii.376. Kuṭumbika
Kuṭumbika
see kuṭimbika. Kuṭṭa
Kuṭṭa1
[cp. koṭṭeti, kuṭ to crush, which is expld by Dhtp (90, 555) & Dhtm (115, 781) together with koṭṭ by chedana; it is there taken together with kuṭ of kūṭa1, which is expld as koṭilla] powder. Sāsapa˚ mustard powder Vin i.205; ii.151 (at the latter passage to be read for ˚kuḍḍa, cp. Vin Texts iii.171), 205. Kuṭṭa
Kuṭṭa2
[of doubtful origin & form, cp. var. BSk. forms koṭṭa -- rājā, koṭa˚ & koḍḍa˚, e. g. MVastu i.231] only found in cpds. ˚dārūni sticks in a wattle & daub wall Vism 354, and in kuṭṭa -- rājā subordinate prince, possibly kuḍḍa˚ a wattle and daub prince S iii.156 (v. l. kuḍḍa˚); = v.44 (v. l. kujja˚); cp. kuḍḍa˚ J v.102 sq., where expl. pāpa -- rājā, with vv. ll. kuṭa and kūṭa. See also khujja and khuddaka -- rājā. Kuṭṭha
Kuṭṭha1
(nt.) (cp. kus; Sk. kuṣṭhā f.) leprosy J v.69, 72, 89; vi.196, 383; Vism 35 (+gaṇḍa); DA i.260, 261, 272. The disease described at DhA 161 sq. is probably leprosy. Cp. kilāsa. On var. kinds of leprosy see J v.69, iv.196. Kuṭṭha
Kuṭṭha2
a kind of fragrant plant (Costus speciosus) or spice J vi.537. Kuṭṭhita
Kuṭṭhita
hot, sweltering (of uṇha) S iv.289 (v. l. kikita); molten (of tamba, cp. uttatta) Pgdp 33. See also kathati kuthati, ukkaṭṭhita & pakkuṭṭhita. Kuṭṭhin
Kuṭṭhin
a leper M i.506 (in simile); Th 1, 1054; J v.413; vi.196; Ud 49; DhA iii.255. Kuṭṭhilikā
Kuṭṭhilikā
the pericarp or envelope of a seed (phala˚) VvA 344 ( = sipāṭikā). Kuṭhārī
Kuṭhārī
(f.) [cp. Sk. kuṭhāra, axe = Lat. culter, knife from *(s)qer, to cut, in Lat. caro, etc]. An axe, a hatchet Vin iii.144; S iv.160, 167; M i.233=S iii.141; A. i.141; ii.201; iv.171; J i.431; DhA iii.59; PvA 277. Purisassa hi jātassa kuthārī jāyate mukhe "when man is born, together with him is born an axe in his mouth (to cut evil speech)" S i.149=Sn 657=A v.174. Kuḍumalaka
Kuḍumalaka
[for kusuma˚] an opening bud A iv.117, 119. Kuḍḍa
Kuḍḍa
[to kṣud to grind, cp. cuṇṇa] a wall built of wattle and daub, in ˚nagaraka "a little wattle and daub town" D ii.146, 169 (cp. Rh.D. on this in Buddh. Suttas p. 99). Three such kinds of simply -- built walls are mentioned at Vin iv.266, viz. iṭṭhakā˚ of tiles, silā˚ of stone, dāru˚ of wood. The expln of kuḍḍa at Vism 394 is "geha -- bhittiyā etam adhivacanaŋ." Kuḍḍa -- rājā see under kuṭṭa). Also in tirokuḍḍaŋ outside the wall M i.34 = ii.18; A iv.55; Vism 394, and tirokuḍḍesu Kh viii1=Pv i.51. -- parakuḍḍaŋ nissāya J ii.431 (near another man's wall) is doubtful; vv. ll. S. kuḍḍhaŋ. B. kuṭaŋ and kuṭṭaŋ. (kuḍḍa -- ) pāda the lower part of a lath and plaster wall Vin ii.152. Note. Kuḍḍa at Vin ii.151 is to be read kuṭṭa. -- 220 -- Kuḍḍamūla
Kuḍḍa
-- mūla a sort of root Vin iii.15. Kuḍḍaka
Kuḍḍaka
in eka˚ and dvi˚ having single or double walls J i.92. Kuṇa
Kuṇa
(adj.) [cp. kuṇi lame from *qer, to bend = Gr. kullo/s crooked and lame, Lat. curvus & coluber snake] distorted, bent, crooked, lame Pv ii.926 (v. l. kuṇḍa; cp. PvA 123. kuṇita paṭikuṇita an -- ujubhūta); DhA iii.71 (kāṇa˚ blind and lame). Kuṇapa
Kuṇapa
[der. fr. kuṇa? cp. Sk. kuṇapa] a corpse, carcase, Vin iii.68 = M i.73=A iv.377 (ahi˚, kukkura˚, manussa˚ pūti˚); A iv.198 sq.; Sn 205; J i.61, 146; PvA 15. Kaṇṭhe āsatto kuṇapo a corpse hanging round one's neck M i.120; J i.5; also Vin iii.68≈. -- The abovementioned list of corpses (ahi˚, etc.) is amplified at Vism 343 as follows: hatthi˚, assa˚, go˚, mahiŋsa˚, manussa˚, ahi˚, kukkura˚. Cp. kaḷebara.

-- gandha smell of a rotting corpse SnA 286; PvA 32. Kuṇalin
Kuṇalin
in kuṇalīkata and kuṇalīmukha contracted, con- torted Pv ii.9 26.28. (Hardy, but Minayeff and Hardy's S.S. Kuṇḍalī˚), expld PvA 123 by mukhavikārena vikuṇitaŋ (or vikucitaŋ SS.) sakuṇitaŋ (better: sankucitaŋ) (cp. Sk. kuc or kuñc to shrink). Kuṇāla
Kuṇāla
N. of a bird (the Indian cuckoo) J v.214 sq. (kuṇāla -- jātaka). Kuṇāla -- daha "cuckoo -- lake," N. of one of the seven great lakes in the Himavant Vism 416. Kuṇālaka
Kuṇālaka
[fr. kuṇāla] the cuckoo J v.406 ( = kokila). Kuṇi
Kuṇi
(adj.) deformed, paralysed (orig. bent, crooked, cp. kuṇa) only of the arm, acc. to Pug A iv.19 either of one or both arms (hands) J i.353 (expl. kuṇṭhahattha) = DhA i.376; Pug 51 (kāṇa, kuṇi, khañja); see khañja. Kuṇita
Kuṇita
(or kuṇika) = kuṇa PvA 123, 125 (or should it be kucita?). Cp. paṭi˚. Kuṇṭha
Kuṇṭha
[cp. kuṇa and kuṇḍa] 1. bent, lame; blunt (of a sword) DhA i.311 (˚kuddāla); Pug A i.34 (of asi, opp. tikkhina); ˚tiṇa a kind of grass Vism 353. -- 2. a cripple J ii.117. Kuṇṭhita
Kuṇṭhita
[a variant of guṇṭhita, as also found in cpd. palikuṇṭhita] Pv ii.38 and kuṇḍita S i.197, both in phrase paŋsu˚, according to Hardy, PvA p. 302 to be corrected to guṇṭhita covered with dust (see guṇṭheti). The v. l. at both places is ˚kuṭṭhita. Also found as paŋsukuṇṭhita at J vi.559 ( = ˚makkhita C; v. l. B B. kuṇḍita). Kuṇḍa
Kuṇḍa
(a) bent, crooked DA i.296 (˚daṇḍaka); PvA 181. Kuṇḍaka
Kuṇḍaka
the red powder of rice husks (cp. kukkusa) Vin ii.151; 280; J ii.289 (text has kuṇḍadaka) = DhA iii.325 (ibid. as ācāma˚). Also used as toilet powder: DhA ii.261 (kuṇḍakena sarīraŋ makkhetvā). -- sakuṇḍaka ( -- bhatta) (a meal) with husk powder -- cake J v.383.

-- angārapūva pancake of rice powder DhA iii.324; -- kucchi in ˚sindhavapotaka "the rice -- (cake -- ) belly colt" J ii.288; -- khādaka (a) eating rice -- powder J ii.288; (cp. DhA iii.325); -- dhūma, lit. smoke of red rice powder, Ep. of the blood J iii.542; -- pūva cake of husk -- powder J i.422 sq.; -- muṭṭhi a handful of rice -- powder VvA 5; DhA i.425; -- yāgu husk -- powder gruel J ii.288. Kuṇḍala
Kuṇḍala
[cp. kuṇḍa, orig. bending, i. e. winding] a ring esp. earring A i.254 = iii.16; J iv.358 (su˚ with beautiful earrings); DhA i.25. Frequent as maṇi˚, a jewelled earring Vin ii.156; S i.77; M i.366; Pv ii.950; sīha˚ or sīhamukha˚ an earring with a jewel called "lion's mouth" J v.205 (=kuñcita), 438. In sāgara˚ it means the ocean belt Miln 220=J iii.32 (where expl. as sāgaramajjhe dīpavasena ṭhitattā tassa kuṇḍalabhūtaŋ). Cp. also rajju˚ a rope as belt VvA 212. -- kuṇḍalavatta turning, twisting round D ii.18 (of the hair of a Mahāpurisa). Kuṇḍalin
Kuṇḍalin1
(adj.) [fr. kuṇḍala] wearing earrings S iv.343; J v.136; vi.478. su˚ Vv 731. Cp. Maṭṭha˚ Np. DhA i.25; Pv ii.5. Kuṇḍalin
Kuṇḍalin2
in kuṇḍalī -- kata contorted Pv ii.927. See kuṇalin and cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 14. Kuṇḍi
Kuṇḍi
(f.) [ = kuṇḍikā] a pail or pot, in phrase kuṇḍi- paddhana giving a pailful of milk J vi.504 (Kern, Toev. s. v. compares phrase Sk. kāŋsy'ôpadohana & proposes reading kuṇḍ' opadohana. See also kaŋsupadhāraṇa). Kuṇḍika
Kuṇḍika
[cp. kuṇḍa] bending, in ahi -- kuṇḍika (?) a snake charmer (lit. bender) J iv.308 (v. l. S. guṇṭhika) see ahi; and catu -- kuṇḍika bent as regards his four limbs, i. e. walking on all fours M i.79; Pv iii.24 (expl. at PvA 181). Kuṇḍikā
Kuṇḍikā
(f.) a water -- pot J i.8, 9, ii.73 ( = kamaṇḍalu), 317; v.390; DhA i.92 (cp. kuṭa). Kutuka
Kutuka
(adj.) eager, in sakutuka eagerness Dāvs iv.41. Kutumbaka
Kutumbaka
( -- puppha) N. of a flower J i.60. Kutūhala
Kutūhala
(m. nt.) tumult, excitement; Dāvs v.22; DhA iii.194 (v. l. kot˚). a˚ (adj.) unperturbed, not shamming J i.387 (expl. by avikiṇṇa -- vaco of straight speech). See also kotūhala.

-- mangala a festivity, ceremony, Nd2 in expl. of anekarūpena Sn 1079, 1082; -- sālā a hall for recreation, a common room D i.179 = S iv.398=M ii.2, cp. Divy 143. Kuto
Kuto
see under ku˚. Kutta
Kutta
(nt.) [Der. fr. kattā = Sk. kṛtṛ as kṛttra=P. kutta, cp. Sk. kṛtrima artificial=P. kuttima, in caus. -- pass. sense=kappita of kḷp)] "being made up." 1. Work. The beginning of things was the work of Brahmā. The use of kutta implies that the work was so easy as to be nearer play than work, and to have been carried out in a mood of graceful sport. D iii.28. -- 2. behaviour, i. e. charming behaviour, coquetry J ii.329, combd with līḷā (graceful carriage) J i.296, 433; and with vilāsa (charming behaviour) J ii.127; iv.219, 472; itthi˚ and purisa˚ A iv.57=Dhs 633 (expl. at DhsA 321 by kiriyā). -- As adj. in kuttavāla, well arranged, plaited tails D i.105 (expld at DA i.274 as kappita -- vāla; cp. kappita). Kuttaka
Kuttaka
[der. fr. kutta, that which is made up or "woven," with orig. meaning of karoti to weave?] 1. nt. a woollen carpet (DA i.87 = as used for dancing -- women), together with kaṭṭhissa and koseyya in list of forbidden articles of bedding D i.7=A i.181=Vin i.192=ii.163. -- 2. adj. "made up," pretending, in samaṇa -- k˚ a sham ascetic Vin iii.68 -- 71. Kuttama
Kuttama
in kāsi -- kuttama J vi.49 should be read as kāsik'- uttama. Kutti
Kutti
(f.) [cp. kutta] arrangement, fitting, trapping, harnessing Vin ii.108 (sara˚: accuracy in sound, harmony); J iii.314 (massu˚ beard -- dressing, expld by massu -- kiriyā. Here corresponding to Sk *kḷpti!); iv.352 (hattha˚, elephant trappings, cp. kappanā); v.215 ( = karaṇa, cp. Sk. kalpa). -- 221 -- Kutthaka
Kutthaka
S i.66 should be replaced by v. l. koṭṭhuka. Kutha
Kutha
see under ku˚. Kuthati
Kuthati
[Sk. kvathati cp. kaṭhati, kaṭhita, kuṭṭhita, ukkaṭṭhita & upakūḷita2] to cook, to boil: kuthanto (ppr) boiling (putrid, foul? So Kern, Toev, s. v.) J vi.105 (of Vetaraṇī, cp. kuṭṭhita). -- pp. kuthita. Kuthana
Kuthana
(nt.) [fr. kvath = kuth] digestion Vism 345. Kuthita
Kuthita
[pp. of kuthati] 1. boiled, cooked Th 2, 504; KhA 62; Vism 259 = KhA 58. Cp. vikkuthita. -> 2. digested Vism 345. -- 3. fig. tormented, distressed (perhaps: rotten, foul, cp. kilijjati=pūti hoti) Miln 250 (+kiliṭṭha). -- Cp. Vin. Texts ii.57 on Bdhgh's note to MV vi.14, 5. Kudaṇḍaka
Kudaṇḍaka
a throng J iii.204. Kudassu
Kudassu
(kud -- assu) interj. to be sure, surely (c. fut.) A i.107; Nett 87; SnA 103. Kudā
Kudā
see under ku˚. Kudāra
Kudāra
(ku -- dāra) a bad wife Pv iv.147. Kudārikā
Kudārikā
at Pv iv.147 & PvA 240 is spelling for kuṭhārikā. Kudiṭṭhi
Kudiṭṭhi
(f.) [ku+diṭṭhi] wrong belief Sdhp 86. Kuddāla
Kuddāla
a spade or a hoe (kanda -- mūla -- phalagahaṇ'- atthaŋ DA i.269) Vin iii.144; J v.45; DhA iv.218. Often in combn kuddāla -- piṭaka "hoe and basket" D i.101; S ii.88; v.53; A i.204; ii.199; J i.225, 336. Kuddālaka
Kuddālaka
= prec. DhA i.266. Kuddha
Kuddha
(adj.) [pp. of kujjhati] angry A iv.96 (and akkuddha iv.93); Pv i.77; J ii.352, 353; vi.517; DhA ii.44. Nom. pl. kuddhāse It 2 = 7. Kudrūsa
Kudrūsa
a kind of grain Miln 267; also as kudrūsaka Vin iv.264; D iii.71; Nd2 314; DA i.78; DhsA 331. Kunta
Kunta
[cp. Sk. kunta lance?] a kind of bird, otherwise called adāsa J iv. 466. Kuntanī
Kuntanī
(f.) a curlew (koñca), used as homing bird J iii.134. Kuntha
Kuntha,
only in combn kuntha -- kipillaka (or ˚ikā) a sort of ant J i.439; iv.142; Sn 602 (˚ika); Vism 408; KhA 189. Cp. kimi. Kunda
Kunda
(nt.) the jasmine Dāvs v.28. Kunnadī
Kunnadī
(f.) (kuŋ -- nadī) a small river, a rivulet S i.109; ii.32, 118; A iv.100; J iii.221; Vism 231, 416; DA i.58. Kupatha
Kupatha
(kuŋ+patha) wrong path (cp. kummagga) Miln 390. Kupita
Kupita
(adj.) [pp. of kuppati] -- 1. shaken, disturbed Th 2, 504 (by fire = ThA 292); J iii.344 (˚indriya). -> 2. offended, angry D iii.238=M i.101=A iv.460= v.18; M. i.27; A iii.196 sq.; Pv i.67. Often combd with anattamana "angry and displeased" Vin ii.189; D i.3, 90 (=DA i.255 kuddha). -- As nt. kupitaŋ disturbance, in paccanta˚ a disturbance on the borderland J iii.497; Miln 314; PvA 20. Kuppa
Kuppa
(adj.) [ger. of kuppati] shaking, unsteady, movable; A iii.128 (˚dhammo, unsteady, of a pāpabhikkhu); Sn 784; of a kamma: a proceeding that can be quashed Vin ii.71 (also a˚). nt. kuppaŋ anger Vin ii.133 (karis-> sāmi I shall pretend to be angry). -- akuppa (adj.) and akuppaŋ (nt.) steadfast, not to be shaken, an Ep. of arahant and nibbāna (cp. asankuppa); akuppa -- dhammo Pug 11 (see akuppa). Akuppaŋ as freedom from anger at Vin ii.251. Kuppati
Kuppati
[Sk. kupyate, *qup to be agitated, to shake = Lat. cupio, cupidus, "to crave with agitation," cp. semantically Lat. tremere>Fr. craindre] to shake, to quiver, to be agitated, to be disturbed, to be angry. -> aor. kuppi, pp. kupita, ger. kuppa, caus. kopeti A iii.101; Sn. 826, 854; Pug 11, 12, 30. Of the wind Miln 135; of childbirth udaravāto kuppi (or kupita) J ii.393, 433; paccanto kuppi the border land was disturbed J iv.446 (cp. kupita). Kuppila
Kuppila
[?] a kind of flower J vi.218 (C: mantālaka- makula). Kubbati
Kubbati2
etc. see karoti ii. Kubbanaka
Kubbanaka
[fr. kuŋ -- vana] brushwood or a small, and therefore unproductive, wood Sn 1134 (expl. Nd2 by rittavanaka appabhakkha appodaka). Kubbara
Kubbara
the pole of a carriage A iv.191, 193; VvA 269, 271, 275. ratha˚ S i.109, Vv 642 ( = vedikā VvA). Der. (vividha -- ) kubbaratā VvA 276. Kumati
Kumati
wrong thought, wrong view (cp. kudiṭṭhi) Bdhd 137. Kumāra
Kumāra
[Vedic kumāra] a young boy, son Sn 685 sq. (kuhiŋ kumāro aham api daṭthukāmo: w. ref. to the child Gotama); Pv iii.52; PvA 39, 41 ( = māṇava); daharo kumāro M ii.24, 44. -- a son of ( -- ˚) rāja˚ PvA 163; khattiya˚, brāhmaṇa˚ Bdhd 84; deva˚ J iii.392 yakkha˚ Bdhd 84.

-- kīḷā the amusement of a boy J i.137; -- pañhā questions suitable for a boy Kh iii.; -- lakkhaṇa divination by means of a young male child (+kumāri˚) D i.9. Kumāraka
Kumāraka
1. m. a young boy, a youngster, kumārakā vā kumāriyo boys and girls S iii.190. 2. nt. ˚ŋ a childish thing A iii.114. -- f. ˚ikā a young girl, a virgin J i.290, 411; ii.180; iv.219 (thulla˚); vi.64; DhA iii.171.

-- vāda speech like a young boy's; S ii.219. Kumārī
Kumārī
(f.) a young girl Vin ii.10; v.129 (thulla˚); A iii.76; J iii.395 (daharī k˚); Pug 66 (itthī vā k˚ vā).

-- pañha obtaining oracular answers from a girl supposed to be possessed by a spirit D i.11 (cp. DA i.97). Kumina
Kumina
(nt.) a fish net Vin iii.63; Th 1, 297; J ii.238; ThA 243. Kumuda
Kumuda
(nt.) 1. the white lotus Dh 285; Vv 354 ( = VvA 161); J v.37 (seta˚); Vism 174; DA i.139. -- 2. a high numeral, in vīsati kumudā nirayā A v.173=Sn p. 126.

-- naḷa a lotus -- stalk J i.223; -- patta ( -- vaṇṇa) (having the colour of) white lotus petals J i.58 (Ep. of sindhavā, steeds); -- bhaṇḍikā a kind of corn Miln 292; -- vaṇṇa (adj.) of the colour of white lotus (sindhavā) PvA 74, -- vana a mass of white lotuses J v.37. Kumbha
Kumbha
[for etym. s. kūpa and cp. Low Ger. kump or kumme, a round pot] 1. a round jar, waterpot ( = kulālabhājana earthenware DhA i.317), frequent in similes, either as illustrating fragility or emptiness and fullness: A i.130, 131=Pug 32; A v.337; S ii.83; Miln 414. As uda˚ waterpot Dh 121; J i.20; Pv i.129. -- 2. one of the frontal globes of an elephant Vin ii.195 (hatthissa); VvA 182 (˚ālankārā ornaments for these).

-- ûpama resembling a jar, of kāya Dh 40 ( = DhA i.317); of var. kinds of puggalā A ii.104=Pug 45. -- kāra 1. a potter; enumerated with other occupations and trades at D i.51=Miln 331. Vin iv.7. In similes, generally referring to his skill D i.78=M ii.18; Vism 142, 376; Sn 577; DhA i.39 (˚sālā). rāja˚ the king's potter J i.121. -- 2. a bird (Phasianus gallus? Hardy) VvA 163. -- Cpds.: ˚antevāsin the potter's apprentice D i.78=M ii.18; -- ˚nivesana the dwelling of a potter Vin i.342, 344; S iii.119; ˚pāka the potter's oven S ii.83; A iv.102; ˚ -- putta son of a potter (cp. Dial. i.100), a potter Vin iii.41 sq.; -- kārikā a large earthen vessel (used as a hut to live in, Bdhgh) Vin ii.143, cp. Vin. Texts iii.156; -- ṭṭhānakathā gossip at the well D i.8=D iii.36=A v.128= S v.419, expld. at DA i.90 by udaka -- ṭṭhānakathā, with variant udakatittha -- kathā ti pi vuccati kumbha -- dāsikathā vā; -- thūṇa a sort of drum D i.6 (expl. at DA i.84: caturassara -- ammaṇakatāḷaŋ kumbhasaddan ti pi eke); D iii.183; J v.506 (pāṇissaraŋ+). -- ˚ika one who plays that kind of drum Vin iv.285=302; -- tthenaka of cora, a thief, "who steals by means of a pot" (i. e. lights his candle under a pot (?) Bdhgh on Vin ii.256, cp. Vin. Texts iii.325 "robber burglars") only in simile Vin ii.256=S ii.264=A iv.278; -- dāsī a slave girl who brings the water from the well D i.168; Miln 331; DhA i.401 (udakatitthato k˚ viya ānītā). -- dūhana milking into the pitchers, giving a pail of milk (of gāvo, cows) Sn 309. Cp. kuṇḍi. -- bhāramatta as much as a pot can hold J v.46; -- matta of the size of a pot, in kumbhamattarahassangā mahodarā yakkhā, expln. of kumbhaṇḍā J iii.147. -- 222 -- Kumbhaṇḍa
Kumbhaṇḍa
1. m. a class of fairies or genii grouped with Yakkhas, Rakkhasas and Asuras S ii.258 (k˚ puriso vehāsaŋ gacchanto); J i.204; iii.147 (with def.); Miln 267; DhA i.280; Pgdp 60. -- 2. nt. a kind of gourd J i.411 (lābu˚); v.37; (elāḷuka -- lābuka˚); DA i.73 = DhA i.309 (placed on the back of a horse, as symbol of instability); the same as f. kumbhaṇḍī Vism 183 (lābu+). Kumbhī
Kumbhī
(f.) a large round pot (often combd with kaḷopī,) Vin i.49, 52, 286; ii.142, 210; Th 2, 283. loha˚ a copper (also as lohamaya k˚ Sn 670), in ˚pakkhepana, one of the ordeals in Niraya PvA 221. Also a name for one of the Nirayas (see lohakumbhī). Cp. nidhi˚.

-- mukha the rim of a pot (always with kaḷopi -- mukha) D i.166 and≈(see kaḷopī); Vism 328. Kumbhīla
Kumbhīla
(kuŋ+bhīra?) a crocodile (of the Ganges) J i.216, 278; DhA i.201; iii.362.

-- bhaya the fear of the crocodile, in enumeration of several objects causing fear, at M i.459 sq. = A ii.123 sq.; Miln 196=Nd2 on bhaya. -- Th 2, 502; -- rājā the king of the crocodiles J ii.159. Kumbhīlaka
Kumbhīlaka
[fr. kumbhīla] a kind of bird ("little croco- dile") J iv.347. Kumma
Kumma
[Vedic kūrma] a tortoise S iv.177 (+kacchapa); M i.143; J v.489; Miln 363, 408 (here as land -- tortoise: cittaka -- dhara˚). Kummagga
Kummagga
(and kumagga) [kuŋ+magga] a wrong path (lit. and fig.) Miln 390 (+kupatha); fig. ( = micchāpatha) Dhs 381, 1003; Pug 22. Kummaggaŋ paṭipajjati to lose one's way, to go astray. lit. Pv iv.35; PvA 44 (v. l. SS.); fig. Sn 736; It 117; Th 2, 245. Kummāsa
Kummāsa
[Vedic kulmāṣa] junket, usually with odana, boiled rice. In formula of kāya (cātummahābhūtika etc., see kāya) D i.76 = M ii.17 and ≈; in enum. of material food (kabaḷinkārâhāra) Dhs 646, 740, 875. -> Vin iii.15; J i.228; Vv 146 (=VvA 62 yava˚); VvA 98 (odana˚). In combn with pūva (cake) DhA i.367; PvA 244. Kummiga
Kummiga
(kuŋ+miga] a small or insignificant animal Miln 346. Kuyyaka
Kuyyaka
a kind of flower J i.60 (˚puppha). Kuraṇḍaka
Kuraṇḍaka
[cp. Sk. kuraṇṭaka blossom of a species of Amaranth] a shrub and its flower Vism 183 (see also kuravaka & koraṇḍaka). ˚leṇa Npl. Vism 38. Kurara
Kurara
an osprey J iv.295, 397 ( = ukkusa); v.416; vi.539 (=seta˚). Kuravaka
Kuravaka
[ = Sk. kuraṇṭaka Halāyudha, cp. kuraṇḍaka] N. of a tree, in ratta˚ J i.39 (=bimbijāla the red Amaranth tree). Kurunga
Kurunga
[deriv. unknown. The corresponding Sk. forms are kulunga and kulanga] a kind of antelope, in -- miga the antelope deer J i.173 (k˚ -- jatāka); ii.153 (do.). Kuruṭṭharū
Kuruṭṭharū
(v. l. kururū) a badly festering sore D ii.242. Kurundī
Kurundī
N. of one of the lost SS commentaries on the Vinaya, used by Buddhaghosa (cp. Vin. Texts i.258; ii.14). Kuruvindaka
Kuruvindaka
vermillion in cuṇṇa, a bath -- powder made from k. J iii.282; and ˚suttī a string of beads covered with this powder Vin ii.106 (cp. Bdhgh Vin ii.315; Vin. Texts iii.67). Kurūra
Kurūra
(adj.) [Sk. krūra, cp. Lat. cruor thick blood, Gr. kre/as (raw) flesh, Sk. kravih; Ohg. hrō, E. raw] bloody, raw, cruel, in ˚kammanta following a cruel (bloody) occupation (as hunting, fishing, bird killing, etc.) A iii.383 = Pug 56 (expld. Pug A 233 by dāruṇa˚, also at PvA 181). Kurūrin
Kurūrin
= kurūra Pv iii.23. Kula
Kula
(nt.; but poetic pl. kulā Pv ii.943 [Idg. *qṷel (revolve); see under kaṇṭha, cakka and carati] 1. clan, a high social grade, "good family," cp. Gr. (doric) fua/, Goth. kuni. A collection of cognates and agnates, in sense of Ohg. sippa, clan; "house" in sense of line or descent (cp. House of Bourbon, Homeric gene/h). Bdhgh at Vism 91 distinguishes 2 kinds of kulāni, viz. ñātikulaŋ & upaṭṭhāka -- kulaŋ. -- 1. A ii.249 (on welfare and ill -- luck of clans); Sn 144; 711; It 109 sq. (sabrahmakāni, etc.); Dh 193. -- brāhmaṇa˚ a Brahmanic family A v.249; J iv.411, etc.; vāṇija˚ the household of a trader J iii.82; kassaka˚ id. of a farmer J ii.109; purāṇaseṭṭhi˚ of a banker J vi.364; upaṭṭhāka˚ (Sāriputtassa) a family who devoted themselves to the service of S. Vin i.83; sindhava˚ VvA 280. -- uccākula of high descent Pv iii.116, opp. nīca˚ of mean birth Sn 411 (cp. ˚kulīno); viz. caṇḍālakula, nesāda˚, veṇa˚, etc. M ii.152 = A i.107=ii.85=iii.385=Pug 51; sadisa˚ a descent of equal standing PvA 82; kula -- rūpa -- sampanna endowed with "race" and beauty PvA 3, 280. -- 2. household, in the sense of house; kulāni people DhA i.388; parakulesu among other people Dh 73; parakule do. VvA 66; kule kule appaṭibaddhacitto not in love with a particular family Sn 65; cp. kule gaṇe āvāse (asatto or similar terms) Nd2 on taṇhā iv. -- devakula temple J ii.411; rāja˚ the king's household. palace J i.290; iii.277; vi.368; kulāni bahutthikāni (= bahuitthikāni, bahukitthī˚ A iv.278) appapurisāni "communities in which there are many women but few men" Vin ii.256=S ii.264=A iv.278; ñāti -- kula (my) home Vv 3710 (: pitugehaŋ sandhāya VvA 171).

-- angāra "the charcoal of the family" i. e. one who brings a family to ruin, said of a squanderer S iv.324 (text kulangāroti: but vv. ll. show ti as superfluous); printed kulanguro (for kul -- ankuro? v. l. kulangāro) kulapacchimako (should it be kulapacchijjako? cp. vv. ll. at J iv.69) dhanavināsako J vi.380. Also in kulapacchimako kulagaro pāpadhammo J iv.69. Both these refer to an avajāta putta. Cp. also kulassa angārabhūta DhA iii.350; Sn A 192 (of a dujjāto putto), and kulagandhana; -- itthi a wife of good descent, together with kuladhītā, ˚kumārī, ˚suṇhā, ˚dāsī at Vin ii.10; A iii.76; Vism 18. -- ûpaka (also read as ˚upaka, ˚ûpaga; ˚upaga; for ûpaga, see Trenckner, P.M. 62, n. 16; cp. kulopaka Divy 307) frequenting a family, dependent on a (or one & the same) family (for alms, etc.); a friend, an associate. Freq. in formula kulūpako hoti bahukāni kulāni upasankamati, e. g. Vin iii.131, 135; iv.20. -- Vin i.192, 208; iii.84, 237; v.132; S ii.200 sq.; A iii.136, 258 sq.; Pv iii.85; Vism 28; DA i.142 (rāja˚); PvA 266. f. kulūpikā (bhikkhunī) Vin ii.268; iv.66; -- gandhana at It 64 and kule gandhina at J iv.34 occur in the same sense and context as kulangāra in J. -- passages on avajāta -- putta. The It -- MSS. either explain k -- gandhana by kulacchedaka or have vv. ll. kuladhaŋsana and kusajantuno. Should it be read as kulangāraka? Cp. gandhina; -- geha clanhouse, i. e. father's house DhA i.49. -- tanti in kulatantikulapaveṇi -- rakkhako anujāto putto "one who keeps up the line & tradition of the family" J vi.380; -- dattika (and ˚dattiya) given by the family or clan J iii.221 (˚sāmika); iv.146 (where DhA i.346 reads ˚santaka), 189 (˚kambala); vi.348 (pati). -- dāsī a female slave in a respectable family Vin ii.10; VvA 196; -- dūsaka one who brings a family into bad repute Sn 89; DhA ii.109; -- dvāra the door of a family Sn 288; -- dhītā the daughter of a respectable family Vin ii.10; DhA iii.172; VvA 6; PvA 112; -- pasāda the favour received by a family, ˚ka one who enjoys this favour A i.25, cp. SnA 165, opp. of kuladūsaka; -- putta a clansman, a (young) man of good family, fils de famille, cp. Low Ger. haussohn; a gentleman, man of good birth. As 2nd characteristic of a Brahmin (with sujāto as 1st) in formula at D i.93, 94≈; Vin i.15, 43, 185, 288, 350; M i.85≈(in kāmānaŋ ādīnavo passage), 192, 210, 463; A ii.249; J i.82; vi.71; It 89; VvA 128; PvA 12, 29; -- macchariya selfishness concerning one's family, touchiness about his clan D iii.234 (in list of 5 kinds of selfishness); also to be read at Dhs 1122 for kusala˚; -- vaŋsa lineage, progeny M ii.181; A iii.43; iv.61; DA i.256; expressions for the keeping up of the lineage or its neglect are: ˚ṭhapana D iii.189; PvA 5; nassati or nāseti J iv.69; VvA 149; upacchindati PvA 31, 82; -- santaka belonging to one's family, property of the clan J i.52; DhA i.346 (where J iv.146 reads ˚dattika). -- 223 -- Kulanka
Kulanka
-- pādaka "buttresses of timber" (Vin. Texts iii.174) Vin ii.152 (cp. Bdhgh. p. 321 and also Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 78). Kulattha
Kulattha
a kind of vetch M i.245 (˚yūsa): Miln 267; Vism 256 (˚yūsa). Kulala
Kulala
a vulture, hawk, falcon, either in combn with kāka or gijjha, or both. Kāka+k˚ Vin iv.40; Sn 675 ( = SnA 250); gijjha+k˚ PvA 198; gijjhā kākā k˚ Vin iii.106; kākā k˚ gijjhā M i.58; cp. gijjho kanko kulalo M i.364, 429. Kulāla
Kulāla
a potter; only in -- cakka a potter's wheel J i.63; -- bhājana a potter's vessel DhA i.316; PvA 274. Kulāva
Kulāva
1. waste (?) Vin ii.292: na kulāvaŋ gamenti "don't let anything go to waste." Reading doubtful. -- 2. a cert. bird J vi.538. Kulāvaka
Kulāvaka
(nt.) a nest D i.91 ( = DA i.257 nivāsaṭṭhanaŋ); S i.8; S i.224=J i.203 (a brood of birds=supaṇṇapotakā); J iii.74 (v. l. BB), 431; vi.344; DhA ii.22. Kulika
Kulika
(adj.) [fr. kula] belonging to a family, in agga˚ coming from a very good family PvA 199. Kuḷika
Kuḷika
(?) in kata˚ -- kalāpaka a bundle of beads? Bdhgh Vin ii.315 (C.V. v.1, 3) in expln of kuruvindaka -- sutti. Kulinka
Kulinka
a bird J iii.541 ( = sakuṇika 542). Cp. kulunka. Kulin
Kulin
= kulika, in akulino rājāno ignoble kings Anvs. introd. (see J.P.T.S. 1886 p. 355, where akuliro which is conjectured as akulino by Andersen, Pāli Reader, p. 1024). Kulīna
Kulīna
= prec. in abhijāta -- kula -- kulīna descendant of a recognized clan Miln 359 (of a king); uccā˚ of noble birth, in uccākulīnatā descent from a high family S i.87; M iii.37; VvA 32; nīca˚ of mean birth Sn 462. Kulīra
Kulīra
a crab, in kulīra -- pādaka "a crab -- footer," i. e. a (sort of) bedstead Vin ii.149; iv.40 (kulira), cp. Bdhgh on latter passage at Vin iv.357 (kuḷira˚ and kuḷiya˚): a bedstead with curved or carved legs; esp. when carved to represent animal's feet (Vin. Texts iii.164). Kulīraka
Kulīraka
a crab J vi.539 ( = kakkaṭaka 540). Kulunka
Kulunka
a cert. small bird J iii.478. Cp. kulinka. Kulla
Kulla1
a raft (of basket -- work) (orig. meaning "hollow shaft," cp. Sk. kulya, bone; Lat. caulis stalk, Gr. kaulo/s, Ohg. hol, E. hollow) Vin i.230; D ii.89 (kullaŋ bandhati); M i.134 (kullūpama dhamma). Kulla
Kulla2
(adj.) [fr. kula, Sk. kaula & kaulya, *kulya] be- longing to the family J iv.34 (˚vatta family custom). Kullaka
Kullaka
crate, basket work, a kind of raft, a little basket J vi.64.

-- vihāra (adj.) the state of being like one who has found a raft (?) Vin ii.304 (cp. Bdhgh uttānavihāra ibid. p. 330, and Vin. Texts iii.404: an easy life). More correct is Kern's expln (Toev. s. v.) which puts kullaka in this combn = kulla2 (Sk. kauyla), thus meaning well -- bred, of good family, gentlemanly. -- saṇṭhāna consisting of stalks bound together, like a raft J ii.406 -- 408 (not correct Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 78). Cp. Kern, Toev. i.154. Kuva
Kuva(ŋ)
see ku -- . Kuvalaya
Kuvalaya
the (blue) water -- lily, lotus, usually combd with kamala, q. v. Vv 354; DA i.50; VvA 161, 181; PvA 23, 77. Kuvilāra
Kuvilāra
= koviḷāra J v.69 (v. l. B. ko˚). Kusa
Kusa
1. the kusa grass (Poa cynosuroides) DhA iii.484: tikhiṇadhāraŋ tiṇaŋ antamaso tālapaṇṇam pi; Dh 311; J i.190 ( = tiṇa); iv.140. -- 2. a blade of grass used as a mark or a lot: pātite kuse "when the lot has been cast" Vin i.299; kusaŋ sankāmetvā "having passed the lot on" Vin iii.58.

-- agga the point of a blade of grass PvA 254 = DA i.164; Sdhp 349; kusaggena bhuñjati or pivati to eat or drink only (as little as) with a blade of grass Dh 70; VvA 73 (cp. Udānavarga p. 105); -- kaṇṭhaka=prec. Pv iii.228; -- cīra a garment of grass Vin i.305=D i.167 =A i.240, 295=ii.206=Pug 55; -- pāta the casting of a kusa lot Vin i.285; -- muṭṭhi a handful of grass A v.234= 249. Kusaka
Kusaka
= prec. Vv 355 (=VvA 162). Kusala
Kusala
(adj.) [cp. Sk. kuśala] 1. (adj.) clever, skilful, expert; good, right, meritorious M i.226; Dh 44; J i.222. Esp. appl. in moral sense ( = puñña), whereas akusala is practically equivalent to pāpa. ekam pi ce pāṇaŋ aduṭṭhacitto mettāyati kusalo tena hoti It 21; sappañño paṇḍito kusalo naro Sn 591, cp. 523; Pv i.33 (=nipuṇa). With kamma=a meritorious action, in kammaŋ katvā kusalaŋ D iii.157; Vv iii.27; Pv i.1011 see cpds. -- ācāra -- k˚ good in conduct Dh 376; parappavāda˚ skilled in disputation Dpvs iv.19; magga˚ (and opp. amagga˚) one who is an expert as regards the Path (lit. & fig.) S iii.108; samāpatti˚, etc. A v.156 sq.; sālittaka -- payoge k˚ skilled in the art of throwing potsherds PvA 282. -- In derivation k. is expld by Dhpāla & Bdhgh by kucchita and salana, viz. kucchita -- salanādi atthena kusalaŋ VvA 169; kucchite pāpadhamme salayanti calayanti kappenti viddhaŋsenti ti kusalā DhsA 39; where four alternative derivations are given (cp. Mrs. Rh. D., Dhs. trsl. p. lxxxii). -- 2. (nt.) a good thing, good deeds, virtue, merit, good consciousness (citta omitted; cp. DhsA 162, 200, etc.): yassa pāpaŋ kataŋ kammaŋ kusalena pithīyati, so imaŋ lokaŋ pabhāseti "he makes this world shine, who covers an evil deed with a good one" M ii.104=Dh 173=Th 1, 872; sukhañ ca k. pucchi (fitness) Sn 981; Vv 301 (=ārogyaŋ); D i.24; J vi.367; Pv i.13 (=puñña); PvA 75; Miln 25. -- In special sense as ten kusalāni equivalent to the dasasīlaŋ (cp. sīla) M i.47; A v.241, 274. All good qualities (dhammā) which constitute right and meritorious conduct are comprised in the phrase -- kusala -- dhammā Sn 1039, 1078, expld. in extenso Nd2 s. v. See also cpd. ˚dhamma. -- Kusalaŋ karoti to do what is good and righteous, i. e. kāyena, vācāya, manasā It 78; cp. Dh 53; sabba -- pāpassa akaraṇaŋ kusalassa upasampadā sacittapariyodapanaŋ etaŋ Buddhānusāsanaŋ D ii.49=Dh 183; cp. Nett 43, 81, 171, 186. Kusalaŋ bhāveti to pursue righteousness (together with akusalaŋ pajahati to give up wrong habits) A i.58; iv.109 sq.; It 9. -- akusala adj.: improper, wrong, bad; nt.: demerit, evil deed D i.37, 163; bālo+akusalo Sn 879, 887;=pāpa PvA 60, cp. pāpapasuto akatakusalo ib. 6. kusalaŋ & akusalaŋ are discussed in detail (with ref. to rūpâvacara˚ fivefold, to arūpâvacara˚ & lokuttara˚ fourfold, to kāmâvacara˚ eight & twelvefold) at Vism 452 -- 454. -- kusalâkusala good and bad M i.489; S v.91; Miln 25; Nett 161, 192; Dhs 1124 sq. -- sukusala (dhammānaŋ) highly skilled D i.180 (cp. M. ii.31).

-- anuesin striving after righteousness Sn 965; cp. kinkusalānuesin D ii.151 and kinkusalagavesin M i.163 sq.; -- abhisanda overflow of merit (+puñña˚) A ii.54 sq.; iii.51; 337; -- kamma meritorious action, right conduct A i.104; 292 sq.; Ps i.85; ii.72 sq.; PvA 9, 26; -- cittā (pl.) good thoughts Vbh 169 -- 173, 184, 285 sq., 294 sq.; -- cetanā right volition Vbh 135; -- dhammā (pl.) (all) points of righteousness, good qualities of character S ii.206; M i.98; A iv.11 sq.; v.90 sq.; 123 sq.; Pug 68, 71; Vbh 105; Ps i.101, 132; ii.15, 230; VvA 74, 127; -- pakkha "the side of virtue," all that belongs to good character M iii.77 (and a˚) with adj. ˚pakkhika S v.91; -- macchariya Dhs 1122 is to be corrected to kula˚ instead of kusala˚ (meanness as regards family) cp. Nd2 on veviccha; -- mūla the basis or root of goodness or merit; there are three: alobha, adosa, amoha M i.47, 489 = A i.203=Nett 183; D iii.214; Dhs 32, 313, 981; Vbh 169 sq., 210; Nett 126. Cp. ˚paccaya Vbh 169; ˚ropanā Nett 50; -- vitakka good reasoning, of which there are three: nekkhamma˚, avyāpāda˚, avihiŋsā˚ D iii.215; It 82; Nett 126; -- vipāka being a fruit of good kamma Dhs 454; Vism 454 (twofold, viz. ahetuka & sahetuka). -- vedanā good, pure feeling Vbh 3 sq.; cp. ˚saññā and ˚sankhārā Vbh 6 sq.; Nett 126 (three ˚saññā, same as under ˚vitakkā); -- sīla good, proper conduct of life M ii.25 sq.; adj. ˚sīlin D i.115 (=DA i.286). -- 224 -- Kusalatā
Kusalatā
[fem. abstr. fr. kusala] (only -- ˚) skill, cleverness, accomplishment; good quality. -- lakkhaṇa˚ skill in interpreting special signs VvA 138; aparicita˚ neglect in acquiring good qualities PvA 67. For foll. cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Dhs. trsl. pp. 345 -- 348; āpatti˚ skill as to what is an offence; samāpatti˚ in the Attainments; dhātu˚ in the Elements; manasikāra˚ proficiency in attention; āyatana˚ skill in the spheres; paṭiccasamuppāda˚ skill in conditioned Genesis; ṭhāna˚ and aṭṭhāna˚ skill in affirming (negating) causal conjuncture: all at D iii.212 and Dhs 1329 -- 1338; cp. A i.84, 94. Kusi
Kusi
(nt.) one of the four cross seams of the robe of a bhikkhu Vin i.287; ii.177; and aḍḍha˚ intermediate cross seam ibid. See Bdhgh's note in Vin. Texts ii.208. Kusīta
Kusīta
(adj.) [Sk. kusīda; cp. kosajja] indolent, inert, inactive. Expl. by kāma -- vitakkādīhi vitakkehi vītināmanakapuggalo DhA ii.260; by nibbiriyo DhA iii.410; by alaso PvA 175, Often combd with hīnaviriya, devoid of zeal; It 27, 116; Dh 7, 112, 280; Miln 300, 396. Also equivalent to alasa Dh 112; combd with dussīla Miln 300, 396; with duppañña D iii.252 = 282; A ii.227, 230; iii.7, 183, 433. -- In other connections: M i.43, 471; A iii.7 sq., 127; v.95, 146, 153, 329 sq.; S ii.29, 159, 206; It 71, 102; J iv.131 (nibbiriya+); Vism 132; DhA i.69. The eight kusītavatthūni, occasions of indolence, are enumerated at A iv.332; D iii.255; Vbh 385. -- akusīta alert, mindful, careful Sn 68 (+alīnacitto); Nd2 s. v.; Sdhp 391. Kusītatā
Kusītatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. kusīta] in a˚ alertness, brightness, keenness VvA 138. Kusuma
Kusuma
(nt.) any flower J iii.394 (˚dāma); v.37; PvA 157 ( = puppha); VvA 42; Dpvs i.4; Sdhp 246, 595; Dāvs v.51 (˚agghika), fig. vimutti˚ the flower of emancipation Th 1, 100; Miln 399. Kusumita
Kusumita
(adj.) in flower, blooming VvA 160, 162. Kusumbha
Kusumbha
(nt.) the safflower, Carthamus tinctorius, used for dying red J v.211 (˚rattavattha); vi.264 (do); Khus iv.2. Kussubbha
Kussubbha
and kussobbha (nt.) [Sk. kuśvabhra] a small pond, usually combd with kunnadī and appld in similes: S ii.32 = A i.243=v.114; S ii.118; v.47, 63, 395; A ii.140; iv.100; Sn 720; PvA 29; DA i.58. Kuha
Kuha
(adj.) [Sk. kuha; *qeudh to conceal, cp. Gr. keu/dw; Ags hȳdan, E. hide] deceitful, fraudulent, false, in phrase kuhā thaddhā lapā singī A ii.26 = Th 1, 959= It 113. -- akuha honest, upright M i.386; Sn 957; Miln 352. Kuhaka
Kuhaka
[der. fr. prec.] deceitful, cheating; a cheat, a fraud, combd with lapaka D i.8; A iii.111. -- A v.159 sq.; Sn 984, 987; J i.375 (˚tāpasa); DhA iv.152 (˚brāhmaṇa); iv.153 (˚cora); Miln 310, 357; PvA 13; DA i.91. Kuhanā
Kuhanā
(f.) [abstr. fr. adj. kuhana = kuhaka] 1. deceit, fraud, hypocrisy, usually in combn kuhana -- lapana "deceit and talking -- over"=deceitful talk D i.8; A iii.430; DA i.92; Miln 383; Nd2 on avajja. -- M i.465=It 28, 29; S iv.118; A v.159 sq.; Vism 23; Vbh 352; Sdhp 375. -- 2. menacing SnA 582. -- Opp. akuhaka Sn 852. -- Var. commentator's derivations are kuhāyanā (fr. kuhanā) and kuhitattaŋ (fr. kuheti), to be found at Vism 26.

-- vatthūni (pl.) cases or opportunities of deceit, three of which are discussed at Nd2 on nikkuha, mentioned also at Vism 24; DA i.91 & SnA 107. Kuhara
Kuhara
(nt.) (der. fr. kuha) a hole, a cavity; lit. a hiding- place Dāvs i.62. Kuhiŋ
Kuhiŋ
see under ku˚. Kuhilikā
Kuhilikā
(pl.) kuhali flowers Attanugaluvaŋsa 216. Kuhīyati
Kuhīyati
only in pahaŋsīyati+k˚ "he exults and rejoices" at Miln 325 (cp. Miln trsl. ii.220, where printed kuhūyati). Kuheti
Kuheti
[v. denom. fr. kuha] to deceive DA 91; ger. kuhitvā deceiving J vi.212. Kūjati
Kūjati
[kuj, expld with guj at Dhtp 78 by "avyatte sadde"] to sing (of birds; cp. vikūjati) J ii.439; iv.296; Dāvs v.51. -- pp. kūjita see abhi˚, upa˚. -- 225 -- Kūṭa
Kūṭa1
(nt.) [Dhtp 472 & Dhtm 526 expl. kuṭ of kūṭa1 by koṭille (koṭilye), cp. Sk. kūṭa trap, cp. Gr. paleu/w to trap birds] a trap, a snare; fig. falsehood, deceit. As trap J i.143 (kūṭapāsādi); iv.416 (expln paṭicchannapāsa). As deceit, cheating in formula tulā˚ kaŋsa˚ māna˚ "cheating with weight, coin and measure" (DA i.78 = vañcana) D i.5=iii.176=S v.473=M i.180 =A ii.209; v.205=Pug 58. māna˚ PvA 278. -- As adj. false, deceitful, cheating, see cpds. -- Note. kūṭe J i.145 ought to be read kuṭe (antokuṭe padīpo viya, cp. ghaṭa).

-- aṭṭa a false suit, in ˚kāra a false suitor J ii.2; DhA i.353; -- jaṭila a fraudulent ascetic J i.375; DhA i.40; -- māna false measure PvA 191; -- vāṇija a false -- trader Pv iii.42; PvA 191; -- vinicchayikatā a lie (false discrimination) PvA 210. -- vedin lier, calumniator J iv.177. Kūṭa
Kūṭa2
(m. nt.) [Vedic kūṭa horn, bone of the forehead, prominence, point, *qele to jut forth, be prominent; cp. Lat. celsus, collis, columen; Gr. kolwno/s kolofw/n; Ags. holm, E. hill] -- (a) prominence, top (cp. koṭi), in abbha˚ ridge of the cloud Vv i.1 ( = sikhara); aŋsa˚ shoulder, clavicle, VvA 121, 123 pabbata˚ mountain peak Vin ii.193; J i.73. Cp. koṭa. -- (b) the top of a house, roof, pinnacle A i.261; Vv 784 (=kaṇṇikā VvA 304); gaha˚ Dh 154; PvA 55. Cp. also kūṭāgāra. -- (c) a heap, an accumulation, in sankāra˚ dust -- heap M ii.7; PvA 144. -- (d) the topmost point, in phrase desanāya kūṭaŋ gahetvā or desanā kūtaŋ gaṇhanto "leading up to the climax of the instruction" J i.275, 393, 401; v.151; vi.478; VvA 243. Cp. arahattena kūṭaŋ gaṇhanto J i.114; arahattaphalena k. gaṇhiŋ ThA 99.

-- anga the shoulder Vv 158 ( = VvA 123). -- âgāra (nt.) a building with a peaked roof or pinnacles, possibly gabled; or with an upper storey Vin i.268; S ii.103= v.218; iii.156; iv.186; v.43, 75, 228; A i.101, 261; iii.10, 364; iv.231; v.21; Pv iii.17; 221; Vv 82 (=ratanamayakaṇṇikāya bandhaketuvanto VvA 50); VvA 6 (upari˚, with upper storey) v. l. kuṭṭhāgāra; PvA 282 (˚dhaja with a flag on the summit); DhA iv.186. In cpds.: -- ˚ matta as big as an upper chamber J i.273; Miln 67; -- ˚sālā a pavilion (see description of Maṇḍalamāḷa at DA i.43) Vin iii.15, 68, 87; iv.75; D i.150; S ii.103=v.218; iv.186. -- (n) gama going towards the point (of the roof), converging to the summit S ii.263= iii.156=v.43; -- ṭṭha standing erect, straight, immovable, in phrase vañjha k˚ esikaṭṭhāyin D i.14=56= S iii.211=M i.517 (expl. DA i.105 by pabbatakūṭaŋ viya ṭhita); -- poṇa at Vism 268 is to be read ˚goṇa: see kūṭa4. Kūṭa
Kūṭa3
(nt.) [*qolā to beat; cp. Lat. clava; Gr. kla/w, ko/los, and also Sk. khaḍga; Lat. clades, procello; Gr. kladaro/s. The expln of kuṭ3 at Dhtp 557 & Dhtm 783 is "āko ṭane"] a hammer, usually as aya˚ an iron sledge hammer J i.108; or ayo˚ PvA 284; ayomaya˚ Sn 669; kammāra˚ Vism 254. Kūṭa
Kūṭa4
(adj.) [Sk. kūṭa, not horned; *(s)qer to cut, mutilate, curtail, cp. Lat. caro, curtus; also Sk kṛdhu maimed. The expln of kuṭ as "chede," or "chedane" (cutting) at Dhtp 90, 555; Dhtm 115, 526, 781 may refer to this kūṭa. See also kuṭṭa] without horns, i. e. harmless, of goṇa a draught bullock Vin iv.5 = J i.192 (in play of words with kūṭa deceitful J. trsl. misses the point & translates "rascal"). These maimed oxen (cows & calves) are represented as practically useless & sluggish in similes at Vism 268, 269: kūṭa -- goṇa -- (so read for ˚poṇa) -- yutta -- ratha a cart to which such a bullock is harnessed (uppathaŋ dhāvati runs the wrong way); kūṭa -- dhenuyā khīraŋ pivitvā kūṭa -- vaccho, etc., such a calf lies still at the post. -- Kūṭa -- danta as Np. should prob. belong here, thus meaning "ox -- tooth" (derisively) (D i.127; Vism 208), with which may be compared danta -- kūṭa (see under danta). Kūṭeyya
Kūṭeyya
(nt.) [der. fr. *kūṭya of kūṭa1, cp. in formation sāṭheyya] fraud, deceit, in combn with sāṭheyya & vankeyya M i.340; A v.167. Kūpa
Kūpa
(m.) [Vedic kūpa, orig. curvature viz. (a) interior = cavity, cp. Lat. cupa, Gr. ku/pellon cup; also Gr. ku/mbh, Sk. kumbha; -- (b) exterior=heap, cp. Ags. hēap, Ohg. heap, Sk. kūpa mast]. 1. a pit, a cavity: akkhi˚ the socket of the eye M i.80, 245; DhsA 306; gūtha˚ a cesspool D ii.324; Sn 279; Pv ii.316; Pug 36; miḷha˚ a pit for evacuations Pgdp 23, 24; loma˚ the root of the hair, a pore of the skin DA i.57; Vism 262, 360; also in na loma -- kūpamattaŋ pi not even a hairroot J i.31; iii.55; vacca˚=gūtha˚ Vin ii.141, 222. As a tank or a well: J vi.213; VvA 305. -- 2. the mast of a boat J iii.126; Miln 363, 378. See next.

-- khaṇa one who digs a pit J vi.213. -- tala the floor of a pit Vism 362. Kūpaka
Kūpaka
= kūpa 1. Vism 361 (akkhi˚), 362 (nadītīra˚), 449 (id.); =kūpa. 2. J ii.112; iv.17. Kūla
Kūla
(nt.) [Dhtp 271: kūla āvaraṇe] a slope, a bank, an embankment. Usually of rivers: S i.143 = J iii.361; A i.162; Sn 977; J i.227; Miln 36: udapāna˚ the facing of a well Vin ii.122; vaccakūpassa k˚ the sides of a cesspool Vin ii.141. See also paŋsu˚, & cp. uk˚, upa˚, paṭi˚. Kūra
Kūra
(nt.) in sukkha˚ boiled rice (?) Vin iv.86; DhA ii.171. Keka
Keka
[?] N. of a tree J v.405. Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests misreading for koka Phoenix sylvestris. Keṭubha
Keṭubha
[deriv. unknown] expld by Buddhaghosa DA i. 247 as "the science which assists the officiating priests by laying down rules for the rites, or by leaving them to their discretion" (so Trenckner, J.P.T.S. 1908, 116). In short, the ritual; the kalpa as it is called as one of the vedangas. Only in a stock list of the subject a learned Brahmin is supposed to have mastered D i.88; A i.163, 166; Sn 1020; Miln 10, 178. So in BSk; AvŚ ii.19; Divy 619. Keṭubhin
Keṭubhin
[deriv. unknown] MA 152 (on M i 32) has "trained deceivers (sikkhitā kerātikā); very deceitful, false all through"; iii.6 = A iii.199. Ketaka
Ketaka
[etym. uncertain] N. of a flower J iv.482. Ketana
Ketana
sign etc., see saŋ˚. Ketu
Ketu
[Vedic ketu, *(s)qait, clear; cp. Lat. caelum ( = *caid- lom), Ohg heitar, heit; Goth. haidus; E. -- hood, orig. appearance, form, like] -- 1. ray, beam of light, splendour, effulgence Th 1, 64; which is a riddle on the various meanings of ketu. -- 2. flag, banner, sign, perhaps as token of splendour Th 1, 64. dhamma -- k˚ having the Doctrine as his banner A i.109=iii.149; dhūma -- k˚ having smoke as its splendour, of fire, J iv.26; VvA 161 in expln of dhūmasikha.

-- kamyatā desire for prominence, self -- advertisement (perhaps vainglory, arrogance) Vism 469; Dhs 1116 (Dhs A. trs. 479), 1233 = Nd2 505; Nd1 on Sn 829 (= uṇṇama); -- mālā "garland of rays" VvA 323. Ketuŋ
Ketuŋ
see kayati. Ketuvant
Ketuvant
(adj.) [fr. ketu] having flags, adorned with flags VvA 50. Kedāra
Kedāra
(m. nt.) an irrigated field, prepared for ploughing, arable land in its first stage of cultivation: kedāre pāyetvā karissāma "we shall till the fields after watering them" J i.215; as square -- shaped (i. e. marked out as an allotment) Vin i.391 (caturassa˚; Bdhgh on MV viii.12, 1); J iii.255 (catukkaṇṇa˚); surrounded by a trench, denoting the boundary ( -- mariyādā) DhA iii.6. -- J iv.167; v.35; PvA 7 ( = khetta). The spelling is sometimes ketāra (J iii.255 v. l.) see Trenckner, J.P.T.S. 1908, 112. Note. The prefix ke -- suggests an obsolete noun of the meaning "water," as also in kebuka, ke -- vaṭṭa; perhaps Sk. kṣvid, kṣvedate, to be wet, ooze? ke would then be k(h)ed, and kedara= ked+dṛ, bursting forth of water=inundation; kebuka =kedvu(d)ka (udaka); kevaṭṭa=ked+vṛ, moving on the water, fisherman; (cp. AvŚ Index Kaivarta: name of an officer on board a trading vessel).

-- koṭi top or corner -- point of a field Vism 180. -- 226 -- Kebuka
Kebuka
[on ke -- see note to prec.] water J vi.38 ( = 42: k. vuccati udakaŋ). As nadī a river at J iii.91, where Seruma at similar passage p. 189. Keyūra
Keyūra
(nt.) a bracelet, bangle DhA ii.220 (v. l. kāyura). Keyūrin
Keyūrin
(adj.) wearing a bracelet PvA 211 ( = kāyūrin). Keyya
Keyya
(ger. of kayati) for sale J vi.180 ( = vikkiṇitabba). Kerāṭika
Kerāṭika
(adj.) [fr. kirāṭa] deceitful, false, hypocritic J i.461 (expld by biḷāra); iv.220; iv.223 ( = kirāsa); MA 152; DhA iii.389 (=saṭha). -- a˚ honest, frank J v.117 (=akitava, ajūtakara). Kerāṭiya
Kerāṭiya
= prec. J iii.260 (˚lakkhaṇa); MA 152. Kelisā
Kelisā
at Th 1, 1010 is to be corrected into keḷiyo (see keḷi2). Keḷanā
Keḷanā
(f.) [fr. kilissati? or is it kheḷana?] desire, greed, usually shown in fondness for articles of personal adornment: thus "selfishness" Vbh 351 = DA i.286 (+paṭikeḷanā). In this passage it is given as a rather doubtful expln of cāpalla, which would connect it with kṣvel to jump, or khel to swing, oscillate, waver, cp. expln Dhtp 278 kela khela=calane. Another passage is Nd2 585, where it is combd with parikeḷanā and acts as syn. of vibhūsanā. Keḷāyati
Keḷāyati
[Denom. fr. kīḷ in meaning "to amuse oneself with," i. e. take a pride in. Always combd with mamāyati. BSk. same meaning (to be fond of): śālikṣetrāṇi k. gopāyati Divy 631. Morris. J.P.T.S. 1893, 16 puts it (wrongly?) to kel to quiver: see also keḷanā] to adorn oneself with (acc.), to fondle, treasure, take pride in (gen.) M i.260 (allīyati kelāyati dhanāyati mamāyati, where dhanāyati is to be read as vanāyati as shown by v. l. S. iii.190 & M i.552); S iii.190 (id.); Miln 73. -- pp. keḷāyita. Keḷāyana
Keḷāyana
(nt.) [fr. keḷāyati, cp. kelanā & keḷi] playfulness, unsettledness Vism 134 (opp. majjhatta), 317. Keḷāyita
Keḷāyita
[pp. of keḷāyati] desired, fondled, made much of J iv.198 (expld with the ster. phrase kelāyati mamāyati pattheti piheti icchatī ti attho). Keḷāsa
Keḷāsa
(cp. Sk. kailāsa] N. of a mountain Bdhd 138. Keḷi
Keḷi1
(f.) [fr. krīḍ to play, sport: see kīḷati] 1. play, amusement, sport PvA 265 ( = khiḍḍā); parihāsa˚ merry play, fun J i.116. -- 2. playing at dice, gambling, in ˚maṇḍala "circle of the game," draught -- board; ˚ŋ bhindati to break the board, i. e. to throw the die over the edge so as to make the throw invalid (cp. Cunningham, Stupa of Bharhut, plate 45) J i.379. Keḷi
Keḷi2
(f.) [either fr. kil as in kilijjati & kilissati, or fr. kel, as given under keḷanā] the meaning is not quite defined, it may be taken as "attachment, lust, desire," or "selfishness, deceit" (cp. kerāṭika & kilissati), or "unsettledness, wavering." -- keḷi -- sīla of unsettled character, unreliable, deceitful PvA 241. ˚sīlaka id. J ii.447. -- pañca citta -- keḷiyo = pañca nīvaraṇāni (kāmacchanda etc.), the gratifications of the heart Th 1, 1010 (corr. kelisā to keḷiyo!). -- citta -- keḷiŋ kīḷantā bahuŋ pāpakammaŋ katvā enjoying themselves (wrongly) to their heart's content J iii.43. Cp. kāmesu a -- ni -- kīḷitāvin unstained by desires S i.9, 117. Kevaṭṭa
Kevaṭṭa
[on ke -- see kedāra] fisherman D i.45 (in simile of dakkho k˚) A iii.31 = 342, cp. iv.91; Ud 24 sq.; J i.210; DhA ii.132; iv.41; PvA 178 (˚gāma, in which to be reborn, is punishment, fishermen being considered outcast); cp. J vi.399 N. of a brahmin minister, also D i.411 N. of Kevaḍḍha (?).

-- dvāra N. of one of the gates of Benares, and a village near by Vv 197; VvA 97. Kevala
Kevala
(adj. -- adv.) [cp. Lat. caelebs = *caivilo -- b˚ to live by oneself, i. e. to live in celibacy, perhaps also, Goth. hails, Ohg. heil, E. whole] expression of the concept of unity and totality: only, alone; whole, complete; adv. altogether or only -- 1. ˚ŋ (adv.) (a) only=just: k. tvaŋ amhākaŋ vacanaŋ karohi "do all we tell you" PvA 4; -- only=but, with this difference: VvA 203, 249; -- k. . . . vippalapati he only talks PvA 93; -> and yet: "sakkā nu kiñci adatvā k. sagge nibbattituŋ? " is it possible not to give anything, and yet go to heaven? kevalaŋ mano -- pasāda -- mattena only by purity of mind DhA i.33; kevalaŋ vacchake balava -- piyacittatāya simply by the strong love towards the babycalf Vism 313; (b) alone: k. araññaŋ gamissāmi VvA 260; -- exclusive Miln 247. -- na k. . . . atha kho not only . . . but also VvA 227. -- 2. whole, entire Sn p. 108; Cp. i.1019; Pv ii.63 (=sakala PvA 95); Vism 528 (=asammissa, sakala); Pv ii.63 (=sakala PvA 95). -> k.>akevala entire>deficient M i.326. ˚ŋ entirely, thoroughly, all round: k˚ obhāsenti VvA 282.

-- kappa a whole kappa Sn pp. 18, 45, 125; KhA 115; VvA 124, 255. -- paripuṇṇa fulfilled in its entirety (sakala DA i.177) of the Doctrine; expld also at Nett 10. Kevalin
Kevalin
(adj.) [fr. kevala] one who is fully accomplished, an Arahant; often with mahesi and uttamapurisa. Defn sabbaguṇa -- paripuṇṇa sabba -- yoga -- visaŋyutta Sn A 153. -- ye suvimuttā te kevalino ye kevalino vaṭṭaŋ tesaŋ natthi paññâpanāya S iii.59 sq., i. e. "those who are thoroughly emancipated, these are the accomplished . . ."; kevalīnaŋ mahesiŋ khīṇ' āsavaŋ Sn 82 = S i.167; -- k. vusitavā uttamapuriso Nd2 on tiṇṇa=A v.16. -- with gen.: brahmacariyassa k. "perfected in morality" A ii.23. -- As Ep. of "brāhmaṇa" Sn 519=Nd2 s. v.; of dhammacakka A ii.9; see also Sn 490, 595. -- akevalin not accomplished, not perfected Sn 878, 891. Kesa
Kesa
[Vedic keśa; cp. kesara hair, mane = Lat. caesaries, hair of the head, Ags. heord=E. hair] the hair of the head S i.115 (haṭa -- haṭa -- k˚, with dishevelled hair); A i.138 (palita -- kesa with grey hair; also at J i.59); Sn 456 (nivutta˚), 608; Th 1, 169; J i.59, 138; iii.393; Miln 26; KhA 42; Vism 353 (in detail). The wearing of long hair was forbidden to the Bhikkhus: Vin ii.107 sq.; 133 (cp. kesa -- massu); -- dark (glossy) hair is a distinction of beauty: susukāḷa -- keso (of Gotama) D i.115; cp. kaṇha and kalyāṇa; PvA 26. -- The hair of Petas is long and dishevelled PvA 56; Sdhp 103; it is the only cover of their nakedness: kesehi paṭicchanna "covered only with my hair" Pv i.102. -- kesesu gahetvā to take by the hair (in Niraya) D i.234; -- kesaŋ oropeti to have one's hair cut Vin ii.133.

-- oropaṇa ( -- satthaka) (a) hair -- cutting (knife), i. e. a razor DhA i.431; -- ohāraka one who cuts the hair, a barber Vism 413. -- kambala a hair blanket (according to Bdhgh human hair) D i.167 = A i.240, 295=ii.206= Vin i.305= M i.78=Pug 55; A i.286. -- kambalin wearing a hair blanket (of Ajita) D i.55. -- kalāpā (pl.) (atimanohara˚) beautiful tresses PvA 46; -- kalyāṇa beauty of hair DhA i.387; -- kārika hairdresser Vv 175; -- dhātu the hair -- relic (of the Buddha) J i.81; -- nivāsin covered only with hair of Petas (: keseh' eva paṭicchādita -- kopīnā) Pv iii.16. ˚massu hair and beard; kappita -- k˚ -- m˚ (adj.) with h. and b. dressed D i.104; A iv.94; J vi.268. Esp. freq. in form kesa -- massuŋ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaŋ pabbajati "to shave off hair & beard, dress in yellow robes and leave the home for the homeless state," i. e. renounce the world and take up the life of a Wanderer D i.60, 115; iii.60, 64, 76; A i.107; iii.386; It 75; Pug 57; similarly A ii.207=Pug 56. -- sobha the splendour or beauty of the hair PvA 46. -- hattha a tuft of hair PvA 157; VvA 167. -- 227 -- Kesayati
Kesayati
see kisa. Kesara
Kesara1
a mane, in -- sīha a maned lion J ii.244; SnA 127. Kesara
Kesara2
[fr. kesa] filament of flowers, hairy structures of plants esp. of the lotus; usually of kiñjakkha PvA 77; VvA 12; 111; -- sa -- kesarehi padumapattehi lotusleaves with their hairs VvA 32; nicula -- k˚ fibres of the Nicula tree VvA 134.

-- bhāra a sort of fan (cp. vāladhi and cāmara) VvA 278. Kesarin
Kesarin
[fr. kesara1] having a mane, of a lion, also name of a battle -- array (˚saŋgāmo) Dpvs i.7; cp. AvŚ i.56. Kesava
Kesava
[fr. last] of rich hair, of beautiful hair. Ep. of King Vāsudeva (cp. kaṇha) Pv ii.62. Kesika
Kesika
(adj.) [fr. kesa] hairy, of mangoes Miln 334. Ko
Ko
see ka. Koka
Koka1
[not = Sk. koka, cuckoo] a wolf J vi.525; Nd1 13= Nd2 420; Miln 267=J v.416. ˚vighāsa remainder of a wolf's meal Vin iii.58. Koka
Koka2
[cp. Sk. koka] N. of a tree, Phoenix sylvestris: see keka. Kokanada
Kokanada
(nt.) [cp. Sk. kokanada] the (red) lotus A iii.239 = J i.116. Kokāsika
Kokāsika
the red lotus in ˚jāta "like the red lotus," said of the flower of the Pāricchattaka tree A iv.118. Kokila
Kokila
[cp. Sk. koka a kind of goose, also cuckoo, with derivation kokila cuckoo; cp. Gr. ko/kkuc, Lat. cuculus, E. cuckoo] the Indian cuckoo. Two kinds mentioned at VvA 57: kāḷa˚ and phussa˚ black and speckled k. -> As citra˚ at J v.416. -- Vv 111, 588; VvA 132, 163. Koca
Koca
[fr. kuc] see saŋ˚. Koci
Koci
see ka. Koccha
Koccha1
(nt.) some kind of seat or settee, made of bark, grass or rushes Vin ii.149; iv.40 (where the foll. def. is given: kocchaŋ nāma vāka -- mayaŋ vā usīra -- mayaŋ vā muñjamayaŋ vā babbaja -- mayaŋ vā anto saŋveṭhetvā baddhaŋ hoti. Cp. Vin. Texts i.34; iii.165); J v.407. Also in list of 16 obstructions (palibodhā) at Miln 11. Koccha
Koccha2
(nt.) a comb (for hair -- dressing) Vin ii.107; Vv 8446 ( = VvA 349); Th 2, 254, 411 (=ThA 267).

-- kāra a comb -- maker Miln 331 (not in corresp. list of vocations at D i.51). Koja
Koja
mail armour J iv.296 ( = kavaca). Kojava
Kojava
a rug or cover with long hair, a fleecy counterpane Vin i.281; DhA i.177; iii.297 (pāvāra˚); Dāvs v.36. Often in expln of goṇaka (q. v.) as dīgha -- lomaka mahākojava DA i.86; PvA 157. Koñca
Koñca1
[cp. Sk. krauñca & kruñc] the heron, often in combn with mayūra (peacock): Th 1, 1113; Vv 111, 358; J v.304; vi.272; or with haŋsa Pv ii.123. -- Expld as sārasa VvA 57; jiṇṇa˚ an old heron Dh 155. Koñca
Koñca2
= abbr. of koñca -- nāda, trumpeting, in koñcaŋ karoti to trumpet (of elephants) Vin iii.109; J vi.497.

-- nāda the trumpeting of an elephant ("the heron's cry") [not with Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 163 sq. to kruñc. (meaning to bend, cp. Lat. crux, E. ridge), but prob. a contamination of krośa, fr. krus to crow, and kuñja = kuñjara, elephant (q. v.). Partly suggested at Divy 251; see also expln at VvA 35, where this connection is quite evident.] J i.50; Miln 76 (in etymol. play with koñca); VvA 35. -- rāva=prec. DhA iv.70. -- vādikā a kind of bird J vi.538. Koṭa
Koṭa
[fr. kūṭa2] belonging to a peak, in cpd. ˚pabbata "peak -- mountain," Npl. Vism 127 (write as K˚), 292. Koṭacikā
Koṭacikā
pudendum muliebre, in conn. with kāṭa as a vile term of abuse Vin iv.7 (Bdhgh. koṭacikā ti itthinimittaŋ . . . hīno nāma akkoso). Koṭi
Koṭi
(f.) [cp. Sk. koṭi & kūṭa2] the end -- (a) of space: the extreme part, top, summit, point (cp. anta to which it is opposed at J vi.371): dhanu -- koṭiŋ nissāya "through the (curved) end of my bow," i. e. by means of hunting J ii.200; aṭṭhi -- koṭi the tip of the bone J iii.26; cāpa˚ a bow VvA 261; vema˚ the part of a loom that is moved DhA iii.175; khetta˚ the top (end) of the field SnA 150; cankamana˚ the far end of the cloister J iv.30; PvA 79. -- (b) of time: a division of time, with reference either to the past or the future, in pubba˚ the past (cp. pubbanta), also as purima˚; and pacchima˚ the future (cp. aparanta). These expressions are used only of saŋsāra: saŋsārassa purimā koṭi na paññāyati "the first end, i. e. the beginning of S. is not known" Nd2 664; DhsA 11; of pacchimā koṭi ibid. -- anamatagg' âyaŋ saŋsāro, pubba˚ na paññāyati S's end and beginning are unthinkable, its starting -- point is not known (to beings obstructed by ignorance) S ii.178 = iii.149= Nd2 664=Kvu 29=PvA 166; cp. Bdhd 118 (p.k. na ñāyati). -- koṭiyaŋ ṭhito bhāvo "my existence in the past" J i.167. -- (c) of number: the "end" of the scale, i. e. extremely high, as numeral representing approximately the figure a hundred thousand (cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie. p. 336). It follows on satasahassāni Nd2 664, and is often increased by sata˚ or sahassa˚, esp. in records of wealth (dhana) Sn 677; J i.227, 230, 345=DhA i.367 (asīti˚ -- vibhavo); J i.478; PvA 3, 96; cp. also koṭisatā arahanto Miln 6, 18. -- kahāpaṇa -- koṭi -- santhārena "for the price (lit. by the spreading out) of 10 million kahāpaṇas" Vin ii.159= J i.94 (ref. to the buying of Jetavana by Anāthapiṇḍika).

-- gata "gone to the end," having reached the end, i. e. perfection, nibbāna. Nd2 436; -- ppatta = prec. Nd2 436; as "extreme" J i.67. -- simbalī N. of a tree (in Avīci) Sdhp 194. Koṭika
Koṭika
(adj.) [fr. koṭi] 1. having a point or a top, with ref. to the human teeth as eka˚, dvi˚, ti˚, catu˚, or teeth with one, two, etc., points Vism 251. -- 2. having an end or climax SA on pariyanta (see KS. p. 320); āpāna˚ lasting till the end of life Miln 397: Vism 10. -> 3. referring to (both) ends (of saŋsāra), in ubhato˚ pañhā questions regarding past & future M i.393 sq. Koṭin
Koṭin
(adj.) [fr. koṭi] aiming for an end or goal J vi.254 (cp. ākoṭana2). Koṭilla
Koṭilla
(nt.) [fr. kuṭila] crookedness Dhtm 526; Abhp 859. As koṭilya at Dhtp 472. Koṭumbara
Koṭumbara
(nt.) [cp. BSk. kauṭumba Divy 559] a kind of cloth J vi.47 (coming from the kingdom of k.), 500 (spelt kodumb˚). -- ˚ka k. -- stuffs Miln 2. Koṭṭa
Koṭṭa
(?) breaking, asi -- k˚ note on Vin iv.363 (for asikoṭṭha Vin iv.171?); ˚aṭṭhi at Vism 254 read koṭṭh˚. -- 228 -- Koṭṭana
Koṭṭana
[fr. koṭṭeti] 1. grinding, crushing, pounding (grains) J i.475; ˚pacan' ādi pounding and cooking, etc. DhA ii.261. -- 2. hammering or cutting (?) in dāru˚ J ii.18; vi.86 (maŋsa˚, here "beating," T. spells ṭṭh). Cp. adhikuṭṭanā. Koṭṭita
Koṭṭita
(pp. of kotteti] beaten down, made even Vism 254, 255. Koṭṭima
Koṭṭima
a floor of pounded stones, or is it cloth? Dāvs iv.47. Koṭṭeti
Koṭṭeti
[cp. Sk. kuṭ & kuṭṭa1. Expld one -- sidedly by Dhtp (91 & 556) as "chedane" which is found only in 3 and adhikuṭṭanā. The meaning "beat" is attributed by Dhtp (557) & Dhtm (783) to root kuṭ3 (see kūṭa3) by expla "akoṭane." Cp. also kūṭa4; ākoṭeti & paṭikoṭeti] -- 1. to beat, smash, crush, pound J i.478; vi.366 (spelt ṭṭh); DhA i.25 (suvaṇṇaŋ) 165. -- 2. to make even (the ground or floor) Vin ii.291 (in making floors); J vi.332. -- 3. to cut, kill SnA 178 ( = hanti of Sn 121); DhA i.70 (pharasunā). -- pp. koṭṭita. -- Caus. koṭṭāpeti to cause to beat, to massage Vin ii.266; J iv.37 (ṭṭ the only v. l. B.; T. has ṭṭh). Koṭṭha
Koṭṭha1
(m. nt.) [Sk. koṣṭha abdomen, any cavity for holding food, cp. kuṣṭa groin, and also Gr. ku/tos cavity, ku/sdos pudendum muliebre, ku/stis bladder = E. cyst, chest; Lat. cunnus pudendum, Ger. hode testicle] anything hollow and closed in (Cp. gabbha for both meanings) as -- 1. the stomach or abdomen Miln 265, Vism 357; Sdhp 257. -- 2. a closet, a monk's cell, a storeroom, M i.332; Th 2, 283 (?)=ThA, 219; J ii.168. -> 3. a sheath, in asi˚ Vin iv.171.

-- aṭṭhi a stomach bone or bone of the abdomen Vism 254, 255. -- abbhantara the intestinal canal Miln 67; -- âgāra (nt.) storehouse, granary, treasury: in conn. with kosa (q. v.) in formula paripuṇṇa -- kosa -- koṭṭhâgāra (adj.) D i.134, expld at DA i.295 as threefold, viz. dhana˚ dhañña˚ vattha˚, treasury, granary, warehouse; PvA 126, 133; -- âgārika a storehouse -- keeper, one who hoards up wealth Vin i.209; DhA i.101; -- āsa [ = koṭṭha +aŋsa] share, division, part; ˚koṭṭhāsa (adj.) divided into, consisting of. K. is a prose word only and in all Com. passages is used to explain bhāga: J i.254; 266; vi.368; Miln 324; DhA iv.; 108 (=pada), 154; PvA 58, 111, 205 (kāma˚=kāmaguṇā); VvA 62; anekena k˚ -- ena infinitely PvA 221. Koṭṭha
Koṭṭha2
a bird J vi.539 (woodpecker?). Koṭṭha
Koṭṭha3
[cp. Sk. kuṭṭha] N. of a plant, Costus speciosus (?) J v.420. Koṭṭhaka
Koṭṭhaka1
(nt.) "a kind of koṭṭha," the stronghold over a gateway, used as a store -- room for various things, a chamber, treasury, granary Vin ii.153, 210; for the purpose of keeping water in it Vin ii.121 = 142; 220; treasury J i.230; ii.168; -- store -- room J ii.246; koṭthake pāturahosi appeared at the gateway, i. e. arrived at the mansion Vin i.291.; -- udaka -- k a bath -- room, bath cabinet Vin i.205 (cp. Bdhgh's expln at Vin. Texts ii.57); so also nahāna -- k˚ and piṭṭhi -- k˚, bath -- room behind a hermitage J iii.71; DhA ii.19; a gateway, Vin ii.77; usually in cpd. dvāra -- k˚ "door cavity," i. e. room over the gate: gharaŋ satta -- dvāra -- koṭṭhakapaṭimaṇḍitaŋ "a mansion adorned with seven gateways" J i.227=230, 290; VvA 322. dvāra -- koṭṭhakesu āsanāni paṭṭhapenti "they spread mats in the gateways" VvA 6; esp. with bahi: bahi -- dvārakoṭṭhakā nikkhāmetvā "leading him out in front of the gateway" A iv.206; ˚e thiṭa or nisinna standing or sitting in front of the gateway S i.77; M i.161, 382; A iii.30. -- bala -- k. a line of infantry J i.179. -- koṭṭhaka -- kamma or the occupation connected with a storehouse (or bathroom?) is mentioned as an example of a low occupation at Vin iv.6; Kern, Toev. s. v. "someone who sweeps away dirt." Koṭṭhaka
Koṭṭhaka2
[cp. Sk. koyaṣṭika] the paddy -- bird, as rukkha˚ J iii.25; ii.163 (v. l. ṭṭ). Koṭṭhu
Koṭṭhu
see kotthu. Koṭṭheti
Koṭṭheti
at J ii.424 the v. l. khobheti (nāvaŋ) should be substituted. See also koṭṭeti. Koṇa
Koṇa
[cp. Sk. koṇa & also P. kaṇṇa] 1. a corner Vin ii.137; catu˚ = catu -- kaṇṇa PvA 52; -- ˚racchā crossroads PvA 24. -- 2. a plectrum for a musical instrument Miln 53. Koṇṭa
Koṇṭa
(v. l. B. koṇḍa) (?) a man of dirty habits J ii.209. 210, 212. Koṇṭha
Koṇṭha
a cripple J ii.118. Koṇḍa
Koṇḍa
-- damaka (?) [cp. kuṇḍa] J iv.389; also as v. l. B at J ii.209. Koṇḍañña
Koṇḍañña
a well -- known gotta J ii.360. Kotūhala
Kotūhala
(nt.) [on formation cp. kolāhala; see also kutūhala] excitement, tumult, festival, fair Dāvs ii.80; esp. in ˚mangalaŋ paccāgacchati he visits the fair or show of . . . M i.265; A. iii.439; ˚mangalika celebrating feasts, festive A iii.206; J i.373; Miln 94 (cp. Miln trsl. i.143n: the native commentator refers it to erroneous views and discipline called kotūhala and mangalika) -- (b) adj.: kotūhala excited, eager for, desirous of Miln 4; DhA i.330.

-- sadda shout of excitement Miln 301. Kotthalī
Kotthalī
(koṭṭhalī?) a sack (?) Vin iii.189 = iv.269. Kotthu
Kotthu
[koṭṭhu J only: cp. Sk. kroṣṭu, of kruś] a jackal D iii.25, 26; M i.334; Nd1 149 (spelt koṭṭhu); J vi.537 (˚sunā: expld by sigāla -- sunakhā, katthu -- soṇā ti pi pāṭho). kotthuka (and koṭṭhuka) = prec. S i.66 (where text has kutthaka) J ii.108; Miln 23. Kodaṇḍa
Kodaṇḍa
(nt.) [cp. Sk. kodaṇḍa] a cross -- bow M i.429 (opp. to cāpa); Miln 351 (dhanu and k˚). ˚ka same J iv.433 (expld by dhanu). Kodumbara
Kodumbara
see koṭumbara. Kodha
Kodha
[Vedic krodha fr. krudh, cp. kujjhati] anger. Nearest synonyms are āghāta (Dhs. 1060 = Nd2 576, both expositions also of dosa), upanāha (always in chain rāga, dosa, moha, kodha, upanāha) and dhūma (cp. qumo/s, Mhg. toûm=anger). As pair k. and upanāha A i.91, 95; in sequence kodha upanāha makkha paḷāsa, etc. Nd2 rāga 1.; Vbh 357 sq.; Vism 53, 107, 306; in formula abhijjhā byāpāda k. upanāha M i.36; A i.299=iv.148; cp. A iv.456=v.209; v.39, 49 sq., 310, 361. As equivalent of āghāta Dhs 1060=Nd2 576, cp. Pug 18. In other combn: with mada and thambha Sn 245; kadariya Sn 362; pesuniya Sn 928; mosavajja Sn 866, 868 (cp. S i.169). Other passages, e. g. A i.283; S i.240; Sn 537, (lobha˚); Pv ii.37; Dh i.52 (anattha -- janano kodho); PvA 55, 222. -- kodha is one of the obstacles to Arahantship, and freedom from kodha is one of the fundamental virtues of a well-balanced mind. -- mā vo kodho ajjhabhavi "let not anger get the better of you" S i.240; māno hi te brāhmaṇa khāribhāro kodho dhūmo bhasmani mosavajjaŋ, etc. "anger is the smoke (smouldering) in the ashes" S i.169=Nd2 576. -- kodhaŋ chetvā cutting off anger S i.41=47=161=237; kodhaŋ jahe vippajaheyya mānaŋ "give up anger, renounce conceit" J i.23 25=Dh 221; kodhaŋ pajahanti vipassino: "the wise give up anger" It 2=7; panuṇṇa -- kodha (adj.) one who has driven out anger Sn 469; akkodhena jine kodhaŋ conquer anger by meekness Dh 223=J ii.4=VvA 69. Yo ye uppatitaŋ kodhaŋ rathaŋ bhantaŋ va dhāraye tam ahaŋ sārathiŋ brūmi -- "He who restrains rising anger as he would a drifting cart, him I call a waggoner" Dh 222, cp. Sn 1. -- akkodha freedom from anger, meekness, conciliation M i.44; S i.240 (with avihiŋsā tenderness, kindness); A i.95; Dh 223=J ii.4=VvA 69.

-- âtimāna anger and conceit Sn 968. -- upāyāsa companionship or association with anger, the state of being pervaded with anger (opp. akkodh˚) M i.360, 363; often compared with phenomena of nature suggesting swelling up, viz. "uddhumāyika" kodhupāyāsassa adhivacanaŋ M i.144; "sa -- ummī" It 114; "sobbho papāto" S iii.109; -- garu "having respect for" i. e. pursuing anger (opp. saddhammagaru) A ii.46 sq., 84; -- paññāṇa (adj.) knowing the true nature of anger Sn 96 (cp. SnA 170); -- bhakkha feeding on, i. e. fostering anger, Ep. of a Yakkha S i.238; -- vinaya the discipline or control of anger A i.91; v.165, 167 (combd. with upanāha vinaya). -- 229 -- Kodhana
Kodhana
(adj.) [fr. kodha) having anger, angry, uncon- trolled]; usually in combn with upanāhin, e. g. Vin ii.89; D iii.45, 246; A v.156, cp. Sn 116; S ii.206; Pug 18. -- k˚ kodhābhibhūta A iv.94 sq.; k˚ kodhavinayassa na vaṇṇavādī A v.165. -- Used of caṇḍa PvA 83. -- Cp. S iv.240; M i.42 sq., 95 sq.; PvA 82. -> akkodhana friendly, well -- disposed, loving D iii.159; S ii.207; iv.243; M i.42 sq., 95 sq.; Sn 19, 624, 850, 941; Vv 155; VvA 69. Konta
Konta
a pennant, standard (cp. kunta) J vi.454; DA i.244; SnA 317. Kontīmant
Kontīmant
at J vi.454 is expld by camma -- kāra, thus "worker in leather ( -- shields or armour)," with der. fr. konta ("satthitāya kontāya likhattā . . ."), but reading and meaning are uncertain. Kopa
Kopa
[fr. kup] ill -- temper, anger, grudge Vin ii.184 = Sn 6; Dhs 1060; with appaccaya (mistrust) M i.27; almost exclusively in phrase kopañ ca dosañ ca appaccayañ ca pātukaroti (pātvakāsi) "he shows forth ill -- temper, malice and mistrust" (of a "codita" bhikkhu) D iii.159; S iv.305; M i.96 sq., 250, 442; A i.124, 187; ii.203; iii.181 sq.; iv.168, 193; J i.301; Sn p. 92. -> akopa (adj.) friendly, without hatred, composed Sn 499.

-- antara (adj.) one who is under the power of ill-temper S i.24. Kopaneyya
Kopaneyya
(adj.) [fr. kopa] apt to arouse anger J vi.257. Kopīna
Kopīna
(nt.) [cp. Sk. kaupīna] a loin -- cloth J v.404; Pv ii.323; PvA 172; Sdhp 106.

-- niddaŋsanin "one who removes the loin -- cloth," i. e. shameless, impure D iii.183. Kopeti
Kopeti
[caus. of kuppati] to set into agitation, to shake, to disturb: rājadhamme akopetvā not disturbing the royal rules PvA 161; J ii.366 = DhA iv.88; kammaŋ kopetuŋ Vin iv.153 to find fault with a lawful decision; kāyangaŋ na kopeti not to move a limb of the body: see kāya. Cp. paṭi˚, pari˚, vi˚, saŋ˚. Komala
Komala
see kamala; Mhbv 29. Komāra
Komāra
[fr. kumāra] (adj.) juvenile, belonging to a youth or maiden: f. komārī a virgin A iv.210.

-- pati husband of a girl -- wife J ii.120. -- brahmacariyā (˚ŋ carati) to practise the vow of chastity or virginity A iii.224; ThA 99. -- bhacca Np. "master of the k˚ -- science," i. e. of the medical treatment of infants (see note on Vin i.269 at Vin. Texts ii.174). As such it is the cognomen of Jīvaka D i.47 (as Komārabhacca DA i.132); Vin i.71; J i.116; cp. Sdhp 351. Komāraka
Komāraka
(and ˚ika) = prec. A i.261; J ii.180 (dhamma virginity); of a young tree S iv.160. -- f. ˚ikā J iii.266. Komudī
Komudī
(f.) [fr. kumuda the white waterlily, cp. Sk. kaumudī] moonlight; the full -- moon day in the month Kattika, usually in phrase komudī catumāsinī Vin i.155, 176, sq.; D i.47 (expld at DA i.139 as: tadā kira kumudāni supupphitāni honti) or in phrase komudiyā puṇṇamāya DhA iii.461. Koraka
Koraka
(m. nt.) [cp. Sk. koraka] 1. a bud J ii.265. - 2. a sheath J iii.282. Korakita
Korakita
(adj.) [fr. koraka] full of buds VvA 288. Korajika
Korajika
(adj.) [fr. ku+raj or rañj, cp. rāga] affected, excitable, infatuated Nd1 226 = Nd2 342 (v. l. kocaraka)=Vism 26 (v. l. korañjika). Koraṇḍaka
Koraṇḍaka
[ = kuraṇḍaka] a shrub and its flower J v.473 (˚dāma, so read for karaṇḍaka), vi.536; as Npl. in Koraṇḍaka -- vihāra Vism 91. Korabya
Korabya
[Sk. kauravya] Np. as cognomen: the descendant of Kuru J ii.371 (of Dhanañjaya). Koriyā
Koriyā
(f.) a hen v. l. (ti vā pāḷi) at Th 2, 381 for turiyā. See also ThA 255 ( = kuñcakārakukkuṭī). Kola
Kola
(m. nt.) [Halāyudha ii.71 gives kola in meaning of "hog," corrupted fr. kroḍa] the jujube fruit M i.80; A iii.49 (sampanna -- kolakaŋ sūkaramaŋsa "pork with jujube"); J iii.22 ( = badara); vi.578.

-- mattiyo (pl.) of the size of a j. truit, always comb. w. kolaṭṭhi -- mattiyo, of boils A v.170 = Sn p. 125, cp. S i.150; -- rukkha the j. tree SnA 356; DA i.262; -- sampāka cooked with (the juice of) jujube Vv 435 (=VvA 186). Kolankola
Kolankola
[der. fr. kula] going from kula to kula (clan to clan) in saŋsāra: A i.233 = Pug 16; S v.205; Nett 189, cp. A iv.381; A v.120. Kolañña
Kolañña
(adj.) [fr. kula] born of (good) family (cp. ku- laja); as -- ˚, belonging to the family of . . . D i.89; DA i.252; Miln 256. -- khīṇa -- kolañña (adj.) one who has come down in the world Vin i.86. Kolaṭṭhi
Kolaṭṭhi
the kernel of the jujube, only in cpd. ˚mattiyo (pl.) S i.150 = A v.170= Sn p. 125 (with kolamattiyo), and ˚mattā Th 2, 498=ThA 289; DhA i.319. Kolaputti
Kolaputti
at A i.38 is composition form of kulaputta, and is to be combined with the foll. -- vaṇṇa -- pokkharatā, i. e. light colour as becoming a man of good family. Kern, Toev. s. v. quite unnecessarily interprets it as "heroncolour," comparing Sk. kolapuccha heron. A similar passage at Nd1 80 = Nd2 505 reads kolaputtikena vā vaṇṇapokkharatāya vā, thus taking kolaputtikaŋ as nt, meaning a man of good virtue. The A passage may be corrupt and should then be read ˚puttikaŋ. Kolamba
Kolamba
(and koḷamba VvA) a pot or vessel in general. In Vin always together with ghaṭa, pitcher: Vin i.208, 213, 225, 286; J i.33; DA i.58; VvA 36. Kolāhala
Kolāhala
(nt.) (cp. also halāhala) shouting, uproar, excite- ment about ( -- ˚), tumult, foreboding, warning about something, hailing. There are 5 kolāhalāni enumd at KhA 120 sq. viz. kappa˚ (the announcement of the end of the world, cp. Vism 415 sq.), cakkavatti˚ (of a worldking), buddha˚ (of a Buddha), mangala˚ (that a Buddha will pronounce the "eu)agge/lion"), moneyya˚ (that a monk will enquire of the Lord after the highest wisdom, cp. SnA 490). One may compare the 3 (mahā -- )halāhalāni given at J i.48 as kappa -- halāhala, buddha˚ and cakkavatti˚, eka -- kolāhalaŋ one uproar J iv.404; vi.586; DhA ii.96. See also Vin ii.165, 275, 280; J v.437; DhA i.190; PvA 4; VvA 132. Koliya
Koliya
(adj.) [fr. kola] of the fruit of the jujube tree J iii.22, but wrongly expld as kula -- dattika ph. = given by a man of (good) family. Kolīniyā
Kolīniyā
(f.) well -- bred, of good family J ii.348 (BB koley- yaka). -- 230 -- Koleyyaka
Koleyyaka
(adj.) of good breed, noble, appld to dogs J i.175; iv.437. Cp. kolīniyā, and Divy 165: kolikagadrabha a donkey of good breed. Koḷāpa
Koḷāpa
(and kolāpa) (adj.) 1. dry, sapless; always appld to wood, freq. in similes S iv.161, 185; M i.242; iii.95; J iii.495; Miln 151; DhA ii.51; iv.166. -- 2. hollow tree Nd2 40; SnA 355 (where Weber, Ind. Streifen v.1862, p. 429 suggests reading koṭara = Sk. koṭara hollow tree; unwarranted). Koḷikā
Koḷikā
(or kolika?) (f.) adj. = kolaka, appl. to boils, in pīḷikoḷikā (itthi) having boils of jujube size Th 2, 395 (expl. at ThA 259; akkhidalesu nibbattanakā pīḷikā vuccati). Kovida
Kovida
(adj.) [ku+vid.] one who is in the possession of right wisdom, with ref. either to dhamma, magga, or ariyasaccāni, closely related to medhāvin and paṇḍita. S i.146, 194, 196 (ceto -- pariyāya˚); A ii.46; M i.1, 7, 135, 300, 310, 433; Dh 403 = Sn 627; Sn 484 (jātimaraṇa˚), 653 (kammavipāka˚); Pv i.1112; Vv 159 (=VvA 73), 6330 (=VvA 269); Miln 344; Sdhp 350. -- akovida ignorant of true wisdom (dhammassa) S i.162; Sn 763; S iv.287=Nd2 on attānudiṭṭhi. Koviḷāra
Koviḷāra
[cp. Sk. kovidāra] Bauhinia variegata; a tree in the devaloka (pāricchattaka koviḷāra: k -- blossom, called p. VvA 174) A iv.117 sq.; Sn 44; J iv.29; Vv 381; DhA i.270.

-- puppha the flower of the K. tree SnA 354 (where the limbs of one afflicted with leprosy are compared with this flower). Kosa
Kosa1
(m. nt.) [cp. Sk. kośa and koṣa, cavity, box vessel, cp. Goth. hūs, E. house; related also kukṣi = P. kucchi] any cavity or enclosure containing anything, viz. 1. a store -- room or storehouse, treasury or granary A iv.95 (rāja˚); Sn 525; J iv.409 (=wealth, stores); J vi.81 (aḍḍhakosa only half a house) in cpd. -- ˚ koṭṭhāgāra, expld at DA i.295 as koso vuccati bhaṇḍāgāraŋ. Four kinds are mentioned: hatthī˚, assā˚, rathā˚, raṭṭhaŋ˚. -> 2. a sheath, in khura˚ Vism 251, paṇṇa˚ KhA 46. -> 3. a vessel or bowl for food: see kosaka. -- 4. a cocoon, see -- ˚kāraka; -- 5. the membranous cover of the male sexual organ, the praeputium J v.197. The Com. expls by sarīra -- saŋkhāta k˚. See cpd. kosohita. -> Cp. also kosī.

-- ārakkha the keeper of the king's treasury (or granary) A iii.57; -- ohita ensheathed, in phrase kosohita vatthaguyha "having the pudendum in a bag." Only in the brahmin cosmogonic myth of the superman (mahā -- purisa) D iii.143, 161. Applied as to this item, to the Buddha D i.106 (in the Cy DA i.275, correct the misprint kesa into kosa) D ii.17; Sn 1022 pp. 106, 107; Miln 167. For the myth see Dial iii.132 -- 136. -- kāraka the "cocoon -- maker," i. e. the silk -- worm, Vin iii.224; Vism 251. -- koṭṭhāgāra "treasury and granary" usually in phrase paripuṇṇa -- k -- k (adj.) "with stores of treasures and other wealth" Vin i.342; D i.134; S i.89; Miln 2; & passim. Kosa
Kosa2
at VvA 349 is marked by Hardy, Index and trsld by scar or pock. It should be corrected to kesa, on evidence of corresp. passage in ThA 267 (cp. koccha). Kosaka
Kosaka
[fr. kosa] 1. a sheath for a needle J iii.282; - 2. a bowl, container, or vessel for food J i.349 (v. l. kesaka); M ii.6, 7, ( -- ˚āhāra adj. living on a bowl -- full of food; also aḍḍha˚) Vism 263. -- 3. case for a key (kuñcikā˚) Vism 251. Kosajja
Kosajja
(nt.) [From kusīta] idleness, sloth, indolence; expld at Vbh 369. -- Vin ii.2; S v.277 -- 280; A i.11, 16; ii.218; iii.375, 421; v.146 sq.; 159 sq.; A iv.195 = Dh 241; Miln 351; Vism 132; Nett 127; DhA iii.347; iv.85; DhsA 146; SnA 21. Kosamattha
Kosamattha
= ka+samattha "who is able," i. e. able, fit DA i.27. Kosalla
Kosalla
(nt.) [der. fr. kusala] proficiency. There are 3 kinds mentioned at D iii.220, Vbh 325 & Vism 439 sq., viz. āya˚, apāya˚ and upāya˚; at Dhs 16 = 20=292 = 555=Nd2 ad paññā it is classed between paṇḍicca and nepuñña. See also Pug 25; Vism 128 sq. (appanā˚), 241 sq. (uggaha˚ & manasikāra˚), 248 (bojjhanga˚); PvA 63, 99 (upāya˚). Kosātakī
Kosātakī
(f.) [cp. Sk. kośātakī] a kind of creeper Vv 474; Vism 256, 260, 359; VvA 200; -- bīja the seed of the k. A i.32 = v.212. Kosika
Kosika
= kosiya, an owl J v.120. Kosiya
Kosiya
an owl J ii.353, cp. Np. Kosiyāyana J i.496. Biḷārakosika (and ˚kosiya) J iv.69. Kosī
Kosī
(f.) a sheath D i.77 = M ii.17. Koseyya
Koseyya
[der. fr. kosa, cp. Sk. kauśeya silk -- cloth and P. kosa -- kāraka] silk; silken material Vin i.58 = Miln 267; Vin i.192, 281; ii.163, 169; D i.7, cp. A i.181 (see DA i.87); A iv.394; Pv ii.117; J i.43; vi.47.

-- pāvāra a silk garment Vin i.281; -- vattha a silk garment DhA i.395. Kohañña
Kohañña
(nt.) [fr. kuhana] hypocrisy, deceit J ii.72; iii.268; iv.304; DhA i.141. Kvaṇ
Kvaṇ
(indecl.) is together with kuṇ registered as a part. of sound ("sadde") at Dhtp 118 & Dhtm 173. -- Kh. Kha
Kha
syllable & ending, functioning also as root, meaning "void, empty" or as n. meaning "space"; expld. by Bdhgh with ref. to dukkha as "khaŋ saddo pana tucche; tucchaŋ hi ākāsaŋ khan ti vuccati" Vism 494. -- In meaning "space, sky" in cpd. khaga "sky -- goer" (cp. viha -- ga of same meaning), i. e. bird Abhp 624; Bdhd 56. Khagga
Khagga
[Sk. khaḍga; perhaps to Lat. clades and gladius; cp. also kūṭa3] 1. a sword (often with dhanu, bow) at D i.7 (Dh i.89 = asi) as one of the forbidden articles of ornament (cp. BSk. khaḍga -- maṇi Divy 147, one of the royal insignia); -- khaggaŋ bhandati to gird on one's sword PvA 154, khaggaŋ sannayhati id. DhA iii.75; ˚gāhaka a sword -- bearer Miln 114; ˚tala sword -- blade Mhvs 25, 90. -- 2. a rhinoceros J v.406 (=gavaja), 416; vi.277 (˚miga), 538. In cpd. ˚visāṇā (cp. BSk. khaḍgaviṣāṇa Divy 294=Sn 36) the horn of a rh. (: khagga -- visāṇaŋ nāma khagga -- miga -- singaŋ SnA 65) Sn 35 sq. (N. of Sutta); Nd2 217 (khagga -- visāṇa -- kappa "like the horn of the rh." Ep. of a Paccekabuddha, (cp. Divy 294, 582), also at Vism 234. Khacita
Khacita
[pp. of khac as root expld at Dhtm. 518 by "bandhana"] inlaid, adorned with, usually with jewels e. g. VvA 14, 277; maṇi -- muttâdi khacitā ghaṇṭā "bells inlaid with jewels, pearls, etc." VvA 36; of a fan inlaid with ivory (danta -- khacita) Vin iii.287 (Sam. Pās.). Suvaṇṇa -- khacita -- gajak' attharaṇā "elephants' trappings interwoven with gold" VvA 104; of a chair, inlaid with pearls J i.41; of a canopy embroidered with golden stars J i.57. -- 231 -- Khajja
Khajja
(adj. -- nt.) [grd. of khajjati] to be eaten or chewed, eatable, solid food, usually in cpd. -- bhojja solid and other food, divided into 4 kinds, viz. asita, pīta, khāyita, sāyita Pv i.52 ( = PvA 25) J i.58; Miln 2. -- bhājaka a distributor of food (an office falling to the lot of a senior bhikkhu) Vin ii.176 (=v.204); iv. 38, 155. Khajjaka
Khajjaka
(adj.) [fr. last] eatable, i. e. solid food (as ˚bhoj- janāni opposed to yāgu PvA 23); (nt.) J i.186 (of 18 kinds, opp. yāgu); i.235 (id.); Miln 294. -- ˚bhājaka = prec. Khajjati
Khajjati
( = khādiyati, Pass. of khādati; Dhtm 93 bhak- khaṇa) 1. to be eaten, chewed, eaten up, as by animals: upacikāhi Vin ii.113; suṇakhehi Pv iii.78; puḷavehi J iii.177; cp. Pv iv.52 (cut in two) -- 2. to be itchy, to be irritated by itch (cp. E. "itch"=Intens. of "eat") J v.198 (kh˚ kanduvāyati); Pv ii.39 (kacchuyā kh˚) -- 3. to be devoured (fig.), to be consumed, to be a victim of: kāmataṇhāhi M. i.504; rūpena S iii.87, 88 (khajjanīya -- pariyāya, quoted Vism 479). -> ppr. khajjamāna Pv ii.15 (consumed by hunger & thirst). Khajjara
Khajjara
caterpillar Pgdp 48. Khajjopanaka
Khajjopanaka
[cp. Sk. khadyota] the fire -- fly M ii.34 = 41; J ii.415; vi.330, 441; DhA iii.178; also khajjūpanaka Vism 412 (in simile). See Trenckner J.P.T.S. 1908, 59 & 79. Khañja
Khañja
(adj.) [cp. Sk. khañja, Dhtp 81: khañja gati- vekalye] lame (either on one foot or both: PugA 227) Vin ii.90 = A i.107=ii.85=Pug 51 (comb. with kāṇa and kuṇi); Th 2, 438 (+kāṇa); DhA i.376 (+kuṇi). Khañjati
Khañjati
[fr. khañja] to be lame Pv iii.228. Khañjana
Khañjana
(nt.) hobbling, walking lame PvA 185. Khaṭakhaṭa
Khaṭakhaṭa
(khāṭ -- kata, making khāṭ; cp. kakkāreti) the noise of hawking or clearing one's throat: -- sadda Vin i.188; DhA iii.330; cp. khakkhaṭa (v. l. khaṭkhaṭa) Divy 518 = utkāśanaśabda. Khaṭopikā
Khaṭopikā
(f.) [perhaps connected with Sk khaṭvā? uncertain] couch, bedstead M i.450, 451 (vv. ll. ka˚, khajj˚). Khaṇa
Khaṇa1
(m.) [Derivation unknown. It has been suggested that khaṇa and the Sk. kshaṇa are derived from īkshaṇa (seeing) by process of contraction. This seems very forced; and both words are, in all probability, other than the word from which this hypothesis would derive them.] 1. (1) a (short), moment, wink of time; in phrase khaṇen' eva "in no time" PvA 38.117; Sdhp 584 (etc.). Sdhp 584; khaṇo ve mā upaccagā "let not the slightest time be wasted" Sn 333 = Dh 315; cf. Th. ii.5 (cp. khaṇâtīta); n' atthi so kh˚ vā layo vā muhutto vā yaŋ (nadī) āramati "there is no moment, no inkling, no particle of time that the river stops flowing" A iv.137 (as simile of eternal flow of happening, of unbroken continuity of change); Vism 238 (jīvita˚), 473; (khaṇa -- vasena uppād'-> ādi -- khaṇa -- ttaya, viz. uppāda, ṭhiti, bhanga, cp. p. 431); J iv.128; aṭṭha -- kkhaṇa -- vinimmutto kh˚ paramadullabho: one opportunity out of eight, very difficult to be obtained Sdhp 4, 16; cp. 45, 46. -- 2. moment as coincidence of two events: "at the same moment," esp. in phrase taŋ khaṇaŋ yeva "all at once," simultaneously, with which syn. ṭhānaso J i.167, 253; iii.276, PvA 19; PvA 27, 35; tasmiŋ khaṇe J ii.154; PvA 67; Sdhp 17. -> 3. the moment as something expected or appointed (cp. kairo/s), therefore the right moment, or the proper time. So with ref. to birth, rebirth, fruit of action, attainment of Arahantship, presence on earth of a Buddha, etc., in cpds.: cuti -- kkhaṇo Bdhd 106; paṭisandhi˚ Ps ii.72 sq.; Bdhd 59, 77, 78; uppatti˚ Vbh 411 sq.; sotāpattimagga˚ Ps ii.3; phala˚ Ps i.26, Bdhd 80; nikanti˚ Ps ii.72 sq.; upacāra˚ Bdhd 94; citta˚ id. 38, 95. -- khaṇe khaṇe from time to time Dh 239 (= okāse okāse DhA iii.340, but cp. Comp. 161, n. 5), Buddhuppāda˚, Th ii.A, 12. akkhaṇa see sep. Also akkhaṇavedhin. -- akkhaṇe at the wrong time, inopportune Pv iv.140 (=akāle). On kh. laya, muhutta cp. Points of Contr. 296, n. 5.

-- âtīta having missed the opportunity Sn 333 = Dh 315 (=DhA iii.489); -- ññū knowing, realizing the opportunity Sn 325 (cp. SnA 333). -- paccuppanna arisen at the moment or momentarily Vism 431 (one of the 3 kinds of paccuppanna: kh˚., santati˚, addhā˚). -- paritta small as a moment Vism 238. Khaṇa
Khaṇa2
[fr. khaṇ] digging J ii.296. Cp. atikhaṇa. Khaṇati
Khaṇati
[fr. khan or khaṇ; Dhtp 179: anadāraṇe] 1. to dig (? better "destroy"; cp. Kern Toev. s. v.), dig out. uproot Dh 247, 337; Sn p. 101; J ii.295; iv.371, 373: Sdhp 394. Also khanati & cp. abhikkhaṇati, palikkhaṇati. -- 2. [ = Sk. kṣanati] to destroy Vin ii.26 (attānaŋ); M i.132 (id.). -- pp. khata & khāta (cp. palikkhata). Khaṇana
Khaṇana
(nt.) [fr. khaṇ] digging Miln 351 (pokkharaṇi˚). Khaṇika
Khaṇika
(adj.) [fr. khaṇa] unstable, momentary, temporary, evanescent, changeable; usually syn. with ittara, e. g. J i.393; iii.83; PvA 60. -- Vism 626 (khaṇikato from the standpoint of the momentary). Khaṇikā pīti "momentary joy" is one of the 5 kinds of joy, viz. khuddikā, khaṇikā, okkantikā, ubbegā, pharaṇā (see pīti) Vism 143, DhsA 115.

-- citta temporary or momentary thought Vism 289. -- maraṇa sudden death Vism 229. -- vassa momentary, i. e. sudden rain ( -- shower) J vi.486. Khaṇikatta
Khaṇikatta
(nt.) [fr. khaṇika] evanescence, momentariness Vism 301. Khaṇḍa
Khaṇḍa
[freq. spelt kaṇḍa (q. v.). Cp. Sk. khaṇḍa; expld at Dhtp 105 as "chedana"] 1. (adj.) broken, usually of teeth; Th 2, 260 ( = ThA 211); Miln 342; Vism 51. -> 2. (m. nt.) a broken piece, a bit, camma˚ a strip of hide Vin ii.122; coḷa˚ a bit of cloth PvA 70; pilotika˚ bits of rags PvA 171; pūva˚ a bit of cake J iii.276; -- akhaṇḍa unbroken, entire, whole, in -- kārin (sikkhāya) fulfilling or practising the whole of (the commandments) Pv iv.343 and ˚sīla observing fully the sīla -- precepts Vv 113; cp. Vism 51 & Bdhd 89.

-- âkhaṇḍa (redupl. -- iter. formation with distributive function) piece by piece, nothing but pieces, broken up into bits Vism 115. -- âkhaṇḍika piece by piece, consisting of nothing but bits, in kh ˚ŋ chindati to break up into fragments A i.204 (of māluvālatā); ii.199 (of thūṇā); S ii.88 (of rukkha); cp. Vin iii.43 (dārūni ˚ŋ chedāpetvā); J v.231 (˚ŋ katvā). -- danta having broken teeth, as sign of old age in phrase kh˚ palitakesa, etc. "with broken teeth and grey hair" A i.138 and ≈; J i.59, 79 (id.). -- phulla [Bdhgh on Vin ii.160; khaṇḍa = bhinn'okāso, phulla=phalit' okāso.] broken and shattered portions; ˚ŋ paṭisankharoti to repair dilapidations Vin ii.160 (=navakammaŋ karoti) 286; iii.287; A iii.263; cp. same expression at Divy 22. a˚ unbroken and unimpaired fig. of sīla, the rule of conduct in its entirety, with nothing detracted Vv 8316=Pv iv.176 (cp. akhaṇḍasīla)=DhA i.32. Khaṇḍati
Khaṇḍati
to break, DhA iv.14; pp. khaṇḍita broken, PvA 158 ( -- kaṇṇo = chinnakaṇṇo). Khaṇḍikā
Khaṇḍikā
(f.) [fr. khaṇḍa] a broken bit, a stick, in ucchu˚ Vv 3326 ( = ucchu -- yaṭṭhi DhA iii.315). Khaṇḍicca
Khaṇḍicca
(nt.) the state of being broken (of teeth), having broken teeth, in phrase kh˚ pālicca, etc., as signs of old age (see above) M i.49 = D ii.305; A iii.196; Dhs 644=736=869; DhA iii.123; in similar connection Vism 449. Khaṇḍeti
Khaṇḍeti
[v. denom. fr. khaṇḍa] to renounce, to remit, in vetanaŋ ˚etvā J iii.188. Khata
Khata1
[pp. of khanati] 1. dug up, uprooted, fig. one whose foundation (of salvation) has been cut off; in combn with upahata D i.86 ( = DA i.237); khataŋ upahataŋ attānaŋ pariharati "he keeps himself uprooted and half -- dead" i. e. he continues to lead a life of false ideas A i.105=ii.4; opp. akkhataŋ anupahataŋ, etc. A i.89. -- 232 -- Khata
Khata2
[pp. of kṣan, to wound] hurt, wounded; pādo kh˚ hoti sakalikāya "he grazed his foot" S i.27 = Miln 134, 179. -- akkhata unmolested, unhurt Vv 8452 (= anupadduta VvA 351). See also parikkhata. Khataka
Khataka
[fr. khata2] damage, injury VvA 206, khatakaŋ dāsiyā deti "she did harm to the servant, she struck the s." Or is it khalikaŋ? (cp. khaleti); the passage is corrupt. Khatta
Khatta
(nt.) [Sk. kṣatra, to kṣi, cp. Gr. kta/omai, kth_ma, possession] rule, power, possession; only in cpds.:

-- dhamma the law of ruling, political science J v.490 (is it khattu˚ = khattā˚?) -- vijjā polity D i.9, condemned as a practice of heretics. Bdhgh at DA i.93 explains it as nīti -- sattha, political science (=˚dhamma), See Rh. D. Dialogues i.18. -- vijjavādin a person who inculcates Macchiavellian tricks J v.228 (paraphrased: mātāpitaro pi māretvā attano va attho kāmetabbo ti "even at the expense of killing father and mother is wealth to be desired for oneself"), so also J v.240; -- vijjācariya one who practises kh -- ˚vijjā ibid.; -- vida (so read for ˚vidha)=˚vijja (adj.) a tricky person, ibid. (v. l. ˚vijja, better). Cp. Sk. kṣātra -- vidya. Khattar
Khattar
[Sk. kṣattṛ fr. kṣatra] attendant, companion, charioteer, the king's minister and adviser (Lat. satelles "satellite" has been compared for etym.) D i.112 ( = DA i.280, kh˚ vuccati pucchita -- pucchita -- pañhaŋ vyākaraṇa -- samattho mahāmatto: "kh˚ is called the King's minister who is able to answer all his questions"); Buddhaghosa evidently connects it with katheti, to speak, respond=katthā; gādhaŋ k˚ A ii.107=Pug 43 v. l. for kattā (cp. Pug A 225). Khattiya
Khattiya
[der. fr. khatta = kṣatra "having possessions"; Sk. kṣatriya] pl. nom. also khattiyāse J iii.441. A shortened form is khatya J vi.397. -- f. khattiyā A iii.226 -- 229, khattī D. i.193, and khattiyī. A member of one of the clans or tribes recognised as of Aryan descent. To be such was to belong to the highest social rank. The question of such social divisions in the Buddha's time is discussed in Dialogues i.97 -- 107; and it is there shown that whenever they are referred to in lists the khattiyas always come first. Khattiyo seṭṭho jane tasmiŋ D i.199=ii.97=M i.358=S i.153, ii.284. This favourite verse is put into the mouth of a god; and he adds that whoever is perfect in wisdom and righteousness is the best of all. On the social prestige of the khattiyas see further M ii.150 -- 157; iii.169; A ii.86; S i.71, 93; Vin iv.6 -- 10. On the religious side of the question D iii.82; 93; M i.149, 177; ii.84; S i.98. Wealth does not come into consideration at all. Only a very small percentage of the khattiyas were wealthy in the opinion of that time and place. Such are referred to at S i.15. All kings and chieftains were khattiyas D i.69, 136; iii.44, 46, 61; A i.106; iii.299; iv.259. Khattiyas are called rājāno Dhp 294, quoted Netti 165.

-- âbhiseka the inauguration of a king A i.107, 108 (of the crown -- prince) = A ii.87; -- kaññā a maid of khattiya birth J i.60; iii.394; -- kula a khattiya clan, a princely house, Vin ii.161 (w. ref. to Gotama's descent); iii.80; -- parisā the assembly of the khattiyas; as one of the four parisās (kh˚, brāhmaṇa˚, gahapati˚, samaṇa) at Vin i.227; A ii.133; as the first one of the eight (1 -- 4 as above, Cātummahārājika˚, Tāvatiŋsa˚, Māra˚, Brahma˚) at M i.72 =D iii.260; -- mahāsāla "the wealthy khattiya" (see above ii.1) D iii.258, etc.; -- māyā "the magic of the noble" DhA i.166; -- vaŋsa aristocratic descent DA i.267; -- sukhumāla a tender, youthful prince (of the Tathāgata: buddha˚, kh˚) DhA i.5. Khattiyī
Khattiyī
(f.) a female khattiya, in series brāhmaṇī kh˚ vessī suddī caṇḍālī nesādī veṇī rathakārī pukkusī A iii.229; similarly M ii.33, 40. ˚Khattuŋ
˚Khattuŋ
[Sk. ˚kṛtvah, cp. ˚kad] in compn with numerals "times": dvikkhattuŋ, tikkhattuŋ, etc.; twice, three times, etc. Khadira
Khadira
[Sk. khadira; Gr. ki/ssaros, ivy; Lat. hedera, ivy] the tree Acacia catechu, in cpds. -- angārā (pl.) embers of (burnt) acacia -- wood J i.232; PvA 152; -- ghaṭikā a piece of a. -- wood J iv.88; -- tthambha a post of a. -- wood DhA iii.206; -- patta a bowl made of a. -- wood J v.389; -- vana a forest of acacias J ii.162; -- sūla an impaling stake of a. -- wood J iv.29. Khanati
Khanati
see khaṇati. Khanittī
Khanittī
(f.) [to khan, cp. Sk. khanitra] a spade or hoe Vin i.270; J vi.520 = V.89 (+ankusa). Khantar
Khantar
[n. agent of khanti] possessed of meekness or gentleness; docile, manageable. Said of an elephant A ii.116 = iii.161 sq. Khanti & Khantī
Khanti
& Khantī f. [Sk. kṣānti] patience, forbearance, forgiveness. Def. at Dhs 1341: khantī khamanatā adhivāsanatā acaṇḍikkaŋ anasuropo attamanatā cittassa. Most frequent combinations: with mettā (love) (see below); -- titikkhā (forbearance): khantī paramaŋ tapo titikkhā nibbānaŋ paramaŋ vadanti Buddhā Dh 184 = D ii.49=Vism 295; khantiyā bhiyyo na vijjati, S i.226; cp. DhA iii.237: titikkhā -- sankhātā khantī; -- avihiŋsā (tolerance): kh˚, avihiŋsā, mettatā, anudayatā, S v.169; -- akodhana (forbearing, gentle) VvA 71; -- soraccaŋ (docility, tractableness) D iii.213= A i.94; also with maddava (gentleness) and s. as quality of a well -- bred horse A iii.248, cp. A ii.113 and khantā; -- sovaccassatā (kind speech) Sn 266 (cp. KhA 148). See also cpds. -- Khantī is one of the ten paramitās J i.22, 23: cp. A iii.254, 255. -- In other connections: khantiyā upasamena upeta S i.30; ativissuto Sdhp 473; anulomikāya kh˚iyā samannāgata (being of gentle and forbearing disposition) A iii.437, 441; Ps ii.236 sq.; Vbh 340. See also A iii.372; Sn 189, 292, 897, 944. -> In scholastic language frequent in combination diṭṭhi khanti ruci, in def. of idha (Vbh 245), tattha (Nd2), diṭṭhi (Nd2), cp. Nd2 151 and Vbh 325 sq. -- akkhanti intolerance Vin iv.241 (=kopa); Vbh 360 (in def as opp. of khanti Dhs 1341. q. v. above), 378.

-- bala (nt.) the force of forbearance; (adj.) one whose strength is patience: . . . aduṭṭho yo titikkhati khantībalaŋ balānīkaŋ tam ahaŋ brūmi brāhmaṇaŋ Dh 399 = Sn 623; -- DhA iv.164; Ps ii.171, 176; -- mettā forbearing love, in phrase kh˚ -- mettânuddayasampanna (adj.) one whose character is compassion and loving forbearance J i.151, 262; PvA 66 (+yuttakāra); VvA 71 (in expln of akodhana); -- suñña (nt.) the void of khanti Ps ii.183; -- soracca (nt.) gentleness and forbearance S i.100, 222; A ii.68; J iii.487; DhA i.56; ˚e niviṭṭha "established in forbearance and meekness" A iii.46=D iii.61. Khantika
Khantika
(adj.) [fr. prec.] acquiescing in -- , of such and such a belief, in añña˚ belonging to another faith, combd with aññadiṭṭhika and aññarucika D i.187; M i.487. Khandati
Khandati
[skand] to jump, only in cpd. pakkhandati; given as root khand at Dhtm 196 with meaning "pakkhandana." Khandha
Khandha
[Sk. skandha] -- I. Crude meaning: bulk, massiveness (gross) substance. A. esp. used (a) of an elephant: the bulk of the body, i. e. its back S i.95; vāraṇassa J iii.392; hatthi -- khandha -- vara -- gata on the back of the state elephant J i.325; PvA 75. Also with ref. to an elephant (hatthināga) sañjāta˚ "to whom has grown bulk = a large back" Sn 53, expl. SnA 103 by susaṇṭhitakkhandho "well endowed with bulk." -> (b) of a person: the shoulder or back: nangalaŋ khandhe karitvā S i.115 appl. to Māra; Vism 100; DhA iv.168 (ohita˚ -- bhāra the load lifted off his shoulder). -> -- (c) of a tree: the trunk. rukkhassa PvA 114, also as rukkha˚ J i.324; tāla˚ the stem of a palm PvA 56; nigrodhassa khandhaja (see cpds.) S i.207=Sn 272; mūlaŋ atikkamma kh˚ ŋ sāraŋ pariyesitabbaŋ "one must go beyond the root and search the trunk for sweetness" S iv.94. -- (d) as t.t. in exegetical literature: section, chapter, lit. material as collected into uniform bulk; freq. in postscripts to Texts and Commentaries. See also khandhaka. -- B. More general as denoting bulk ( -- ˚); e. g. aggi˚ a great mass of fire M ii.34, 41; J iv.139; udaka˚ a mass of water (i. e. ocean) A iii.336; S iv.179; J i.324; PvA 62; puñña˚ a great accumulation of merit A iii.336=S v.400; bhoga˚ a store of wealth A v.84; J i.6; maṇi˚ an extraordinarily large jewel (possessing magic power) J ii.102 sq. -

II. Applied meaning. -- A. ( -- ˚) the body of, a collection of, mass, or parts of; in collective sense "all that is comprised under"; forming the substance of. -> (a) dukkha˚ all that is comprised under "dukkha," all that goes to make up or forms the substance, the idea of "ill." Most prominent in phrase kevalassa dukkhakhandhassa samudaya and nirodha (the origin & destruction of all that is suffering) with ref. to the paṭiccasamuppāda, the chain of causal existence (q. v.) Vin i.1; S ii.95; iii.14; A i.177; v. 184 & passim. Similarly: samudaya Vbh 135 sq. nirodha Nett 64; antakiriyā A i.147; vyādhimaraṇatunnānaŋ dukkhakkhandhaŋ vyapānudi Th 2, 162. -- (b) lobha˚ dosa˚ moha˚ the three ingredients or integrations of greed, suffering and bewilderment, lit. "the big bulk or mass of greed" (see also under padāleti), S v.88 (nibbijjhati through the satta bojjhangā). -- (c) vayo˚ a division of age, part of age, as threefold: purima˚, majjhima˚, pacchima˚ Nd2 in def. of sadā. -- (d) sīla (etc.) kh˚ the 3 (or 5) groups or parts which constitute the factors of right living (dhamma), viz. (1) sīla˚ the group dealing with the practice of morality; (2) samādhi˚ that dealing with the development of concentration; (3) paññā˚ that dealing with the development of true wisdom. They are also known under the terms of sīla -- sampadā, citta˚, paññā˚ D i.172 sq.; see sīla. -- D i.206; Nett 64 sq.; 126. tīhi dhammehi samannāgato "possessed of the three qualities," viz. sīla -- kkhandhesu, etc. It 51; cp. A i.291; v.326. tīhi khandhehi . . . aṭṭhangiko maggo sangahito M i.301; sīlakkhandhaŋ, etc. paripūreti "to fulfil the sīla -- group" A i.125; ii.20, iii.15 sq. These 3 are completed to a set of 5 by (4) vimutti˚ the group dealing with the attainment of emancipation and (5) vimutti -- ñāṇa -- dassana ˚the group dealing with the realization of the achievement of emancipation. As 1 -- 4 only at D iii.229 (misprint puñña for paññā); cp. A i.125. As 5 at S i.99 = A i.162; S v.162; A iii.134, 271; v.16 (all loc.=S i.99); It 107, 108; Nd2 under sīla.

B. (absolute) in individual sense: constituent element, factor, substantiality. More especially as khandhā (pl.) the elements or substrata of sensory existence, sensorial aggregates which condition the appearance of life in any form. Their character according to quality and value of life and body is evanescent, fraught with ills & leading to rebirth. Paraphrased by Bdhgh. as rāsi, heap, e. g. Asl. 141; Vibh A 1 f.; cf. B. Psy. 42. 1. Unspecified. They are usually enumerated in the foll. stereotyped set of 5: rūpa˚ (material qualities), vedanā (feeling), saññā (perception), sankhārā (coefficients of consciousness), viññāṇa (consciousness). For further ref. see rūpa; cp. also Mrs. Rh. D. Dhs trsl. pp. 40 -- 56. They are enumerated in a different order at S i.112, viz. rūpaŋ vedayitaŋ saññaŋ viññāṇaŋ yañ ca sankhataŋ n' eso 'ham asmi. Detailed discussions as to their nature see e. g. S iii.101 ( = Vbh 1 -- 61); S iii.47; iii.86. As being comprised in each of the dhātus, viz. kăma˚ rūpa˚ arūpa -- dhātu Vbh 404 sq.

(a) As factors of existence (cp. bhava). Their rôle as such is illustrated by the famous simile: "yathā hi angasambhārā hoti saddo ratho iti evaŋ khandhesu santesu hoti satto ti sammuti" "just as it is by the condition precedent of the co -- existence of its various parts, that the word ʻ chariot ʼ is used, just so it is that when the skandhas are there, we talk of a ʻ being ʼ" (Rh. D.) (cp. Hardy, Man. Buddh. p. 425) S i.135 = Miln 28. Their connotation "khandha" is discussed at S iii.101 =M iii.16: "kittāvatā nu kho khandhānaŋ khandhâdhivacanaŋ? rūpaŋ (etc.) atītânāgatapaccuppannaŋ ajjhattaŋ vā bahiddhā vā oḷārikaŋ," etc.: i.e. material qualities are equivalent terms for the kh. What causes the manifestation of each kh.? cattāro mahābhūtā . . . paccayo rūpa -- khandhassa paññāpanāya; phasso . . . vedana˚, saññā˚, sankhārā˚, etc.; nāmarūpaŋ . . . viññāṇa˚: the material elements are the cause of rūpa, touch is that of vedanā, saññā, sankhārā, name and shape that of viññāṇa (S iii.101); cp. M i.138 sq., 234 sq. On the same principle rests their division in: rūpa -- kāyo rūpakkhandho nāmakāyo cattāro arūpino khandhā "the material body forms the material factor (of existence), the individualized body the 4 immaterial factors" Nett 41; the rūpakkhandha only is kāmadhātu -- pariyāpanno: Vbh 409; the 4 arūpino kh˚ discussed at Ps ii.74, also at Vbh 230, 407 sq. (grouped with what is apariyāpanna) -- Being the "substantial" factors of existence, birth & death depend on the khandhas. They appear in every new conjuncture of individuality concerning their function in this paṭisandhi -- kkhaṇe; see Ps ii.72 -- 76. Thus the var. phases of life in transmigration are defined as -- ( jāti:) ya tesaŋ tesaŋ sattānaŋ tamhi tamhi satta -- nikāye jāti sañjāti okkanti abhinibbatti khandhānaŋ pātubhāvo āyatanānaŋ paṭilābho Nd2 on Sn 1052; cp. jāti dvīhi khandhehi sangahitā ti VvA 29; khandhānaŋ pātubhāvo jāti S ii.3; Nett 29; khandhānaŋ nibbatti jāti Vism 199. -- (maraṇaŋ:) yā tesaŋ tesaŋ sattānaŋ . . . cuti cavanatā bhedo antaradhānaŋ maccu maraṇaŋ kālakiriyā khandhānaŋ bhedo kalevarassa nikkhepo M i.49=Vbh 137=S ii.3, 42. -- vivaṭṭa -- kkhandha (adj.) one whose khandhas have revolved (passed away), i. e. dead S i.121=iii.123. -- kh˚anaŋ udaya -- vyaya (or udayabbaya) the rising and passing of the kh., transmigration Dh 374=Th 1, 23, 379=It 120=KhA 82; Ps i.54 sq. -- (b) Their relation to attachment and craving (kāma): sattisūlûpamā kāmā khandhānaŋ adhikuṭṭanā S i.128=Th 2, 58, 141 (ThA 65: natthi tesaŋ adhik˚?); craving is their cause & soil: hetupaṭicca sambhūtā kh. S i.134; the 4 arūpino kh. are based on lobha, dosa, moha Vbh 208. -- (c) their annihilation: the kh. remain as long as the knowledge of their true character is not attained, i. e. of their cause & removal: yaŋ rūpaŋ, etc. . . . n' etaŋ mama n' eso 'haŋ asmi na m' eso attā ti; evaŋ etaŋ yathābhūtaŋ sammappaññāya passati; evaŋ kho jānato passato . . . ahankāramamankāra -- mānânusayā na hontī ti S iii.103; -- pañca -- kkhandhe pariññāya S iii.83; pañca -- kkhandhā pariññātā tiṭṭhanti chinnamūlakā Th 2, 106. See also S i.134. -- (d) their relation to dhātu (the physical elements) and āyatana (the elements of sense -- perception) is close, since they are all dependent on sensory experience. The 5 khandhas are frequently mentioned with the 18 dhātuyo & the 12 āyatanāni: khandhā ca dh˚ cha ca āyatanā ime hetuŋ paṭicca sambhūtā hetubhangā nirujjhare S i.134; kh˚ -- dh˚ -- āyatanaŋ sankhataŋ jātimūlaŋ Th 2, 472; dhammaŋ adesesi khandh'-> āyatana -- dhātuyo Th 2, 43 (cp. ThA 49). Enumerated under sabba -- dhammā Ps i.101= ii.230; under dhammā (states) Dhs 121, as lokuttara -- kkhandhā, etc. Dhs 358, 528, 552. -- khandhānaŋ khandhaṭṭho abhiññeyyo, dhātūnaŋ dhātuṭṭho, etc. Ps i.17; cp. i.132; ii.121, 157. In def. of kāmâvacarā bhūmi Ps i.83. In def. of dukkha and its recognition Nett 57. In def. of arahanto khīṇāsavā Nd2 on sankhāta -- dhammā ("kh. sankhātā," etc.), on tiṇṇa ("khandha -- (etc.) pariyante thitā"), & passim. -- (e) their valuation & their bearing on the "soul" -- conception is described in the terms of na mama (na tumhākaŋ), anattā, aniccaŋ and dukkhaŋ (cp. upādānakkh˚ infra and rūpa) rūpaŋ (etc.) . . . aniccaŋ, dukkhaŋ, n' eso 'ham asmi, n 'eso me attā "material qualities (etc. kh. 2 -- 5) are evanescent, bad, I am not this body, this body is not my soul" Vin i.14=S iv.382. n' eso 'ham asmi na m' eso attā S i.112; iii.103, 130 & passim; cp. kāyo na tumhākaŋ (anattā rūpaŋ) S ii.65; Nd2 680; and rūpaŋ na tumhākaŋ S iii.33 M i.140=Nd2 680. -- rūpaŋ, etc. as anattā: Vin i.13; S iii.78, 132 -- 134; A i.284= ii.171; 202; cp. S iii.101; Vin i.14. -- as aniccaŋ: S iii.41, 52, 102, 122, 132 sq., 181 sq., 195 sq., 202 -- 224, 227; A iv.147 (aniccânupassī dukkhânupassī); anicca dukkha roga, etc., Ps ii.238 sq.; Vbh 324. -- 2. Specified as panc' upādāna -- kkhandhā the factors of the fivefold clinging to existence. Defined & discussed in detail (rūpûpadāna -- kkhandha, etc.) S iii.47; 86 -- 88; also Vin i.10; S iii.127 sq. Specified S iii.58 iii.100=M iii.16; S iii.114, 158 sq.; v.52, 60; A iv.458; Vism 443 sq. (in ch. xiv: Khandha -- niddesa), 611 sq. (judged aniccato, etc.). -- Mentioned as a set exemplifying the number 5: Kh iii.; Ps i.22, 122. Enumerated in var. connections S i.112; D iii.233; M i.190; A v.52; Kh iv. (expld KhA 82=A v.52); Miln 12 (var. references concerning the discussion of the kh. in the Abhidhamma). -- What is said of the khandhas alone -- see above 1 (a) -- (e) -- is equally applied to them in connection with upādāna. -> (a) As regards their origin they are characterized as chandamūlakā "rooted in desire, or in wilful desire" S iii.100; cp. yo kho . . . pañcas' upādānakkhandhesu chandarāgo taŋ tattha upādānaŋ ti M i.300, 511. Therefore the foll. attributes are characteristic: kummo pañcann' etaŋ upād˚ ānaŋ adhivacanaŋ M i.144; bhārā have pañcakkh˚ā S iii.26; pañcavadhakā paccatthikā pañcann' . . . adhivacanaŋ S iv.174; pañc' upād˚ . . . sakkāyo vutto M i.299= S iv.259. -- (b) their contemplation leads to the recognition of their character as dukkha, anicca, anattā: na kiñci attānaŋ vā attaniyaŋ vā pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu S iii.128; rogato, etc. . . . manasikātabbā pañc˚ S iii.167; pañcasu upād˚esu aniccânupassī "realizing the evanescence in the 5 aggregates of attachment" A v.109; same with udayavyayânupassī S iii.130; A ii.45, 90; iii.32; iv.153; and dhammânupassī M i.61. Out of which realization follows their gradual destruction: pañc' . . . khandhānaŋ samudayo atthangamo assādo, etc. S iii.31, 160 sq.; A ii.45, 90; iv.153; Nd2 under sankhārā. That they occupy a prominent position as determinants of dukkha is evident from their rôle in the exposition of dukkha as the first one of the noble truths: sankhittena pañc'upādānakkhandhā pi dukkhā "in short, the 5 kh. are associated with pain" Vin i.10=M i.48=A i.177=S v.421; Ps i.37, 39; Vbh 101 & passim; cp. katamaŋ dukkham ariyasaccaŋ? pañc'upād˚ ā tissa vacanīyaŋ, seyyathīdaŋ . . . S iii.158= v.425; khandhādisā dukkhā Dh 202 (& expl. DhA iii.261). -- 3. Separately mentioned: khandhā as tayo arūpino kh˚ (ved˚, sañña˚, sankh˚) DhA i.22; viññāṇa -- kh˚ (the skandha of discriminative consciousness) in Def. of manas: manindriyaŋ viññāṇaŋ viññ˚ -- khandho tajjā manoviññāṇadhātu Nd2 on Sn 1142=Dhs 68.

-- âdhivacana having kh. as attribute (see above) S iii.101 = M iii.16; -- āvāra a camp, either (1) fortified (with niveseti) or (2) not (with bandhāpeti), esp. in the latter meaning w. ref. to a halting place of a caravan (=khandhāvāra?) (1) J iv. 151; v.162; DhA i.193, 199.-> (2) J i.101, 332; PvA 113; DhA ii.79. Said of a hermitage J v.35. -- fig. in sīla -- khandhāvāraŋ bandhitvā "to settle in the camp of good conduct" DA i.244; -- ja (adj. -- n.) sprung from the trunk (of the tree), i. e. a growth or parasite S i.207=Sn 272, expl. at SnA 304; khandhesu jātā khandha -- jā, pārohānam etaŋ adhivacanaŋ. -- niddesa disquisition about the khandhas Vism (ch. xiv esp.) 482, 485, 492, 509, 558, 389. -- paṭipāṭi succession of khandhas Vism 411 sq. -- paritta protective spell as regards the khandhas (as N. of a Suttanta) Vism 414. -- bīja "trunk seed" as one kind of var. seeds, with mūla˚ phaḷu˚ agga˚ bīja˚ at Vin v.132, & D i.5, expld. DA i.81: nāma assattho nigrodho pilakkho udumbaro kacchako kapitthano ti evam -- ādi. -- rasa taste of the stem, one of various tastes, as mūla˚ khandha˚ taca˚ patta˚ puppha˚, etc. Dhs 629=Nd2 540. -- loka the world of sensory aggregates, with dhātu -- and āyatanaloka Ps i.122. -- vibhanga division dealing with the khandhas (i. e. Vibh. 1 sq.) Miln 12. -- santāna duration of the khandhas Vism 414. -- 234 -- Khandhaka
Khandhaka
[fr. khandha] division, chapter, esp. in the Vinaya (at end of each division we find usually the postscript: so & so khandhakaŋ niṭṭhitaŋ "here ends the chapter of . . ."); in cpd. ˚vatta, i. e. duties or observances specified in the v. khandha or chapter of the Vinaya which deals with these duties Vism 12, 101 (cp. Vin ii.231), 188. Khandhiman
Khandhiman
(adj.) having a (big) trunk, of a tree A iii.43. Khama
Khama
(adj.) [fr. kṣam] (a) patient, forgiving. (b) en- during, bearing, hardened to (frost & heat, e. g.), fit for. -- (a) kh. belongs to the lovable attributes of a bhikkhu (kh. rūpānaŋ, saddānaŋ, etc.; indulgent as regards sights, sounds, etc.) A iii.113 = 138; the same applied to the king's horse A iii.282. Khamā paṭipadā the way of gentleness (and opp. akkhamā), viz. akkosantaŋ na paccakosati "not to shout back at him who shouts at you" A ii.152 sq.; cp. Nett 77; classified under the four paṭipadā at D iii.229. In combn. w. vacana of meek, gentle speech, in vattā vacana˚ a speaker of good & meek words S i.63; ii.282; Miln 380; cp. suvaco khamo A v.24 sq., forgiving: Miln 207.-> (b) khamo sītassa uṇhassa, etc., enduring frost & heat A iii.389=v.132; addhāna˚ padhāna˚ (fit for) A iii.30; ranga˚, anuyoga˚, vimajjana˚ M i.385. -- akkhama (adj.) impatient, intolerant, in combn dubbaca dovacassa karaṇehi dhammehi samannāgata S ii.204 sq.= A ii.147 sq. With ref. to rūpa, saddā, etc. (see also above), of an elephant A iii.156 sq. -- D iii.229; Sdhp 95. Khamati
Khamati
[Dhtp 218: sahane, cp. Sk. kṣamate, perhaps to Lat. humus, cp. Sk. kṣāh, kṣāman soil; Gr. xqw/n, xamai] 1. to be patient, to endure, to forgive (acc. of object and gen. of person): n' âhaŋ bhayā khamāmi Vepacittino (not do I forgive V. out of fear) S i.221, 222; aparādhaŋ kh. to forgive a fault J iii.394. khamatha forgive DhA ii.254; khamatha me pardon me Miln 13; DhA i.40. -- 2. (impers.) to be fit, to seem good; esp. in phrase yathā te khameyya "as may seem good to you; if you please" D i.60, 108; M i.487. sabbaŋ me na khamati "I do not approve of" M i.497 sq.; na khamati "it is not right" D ii.67. -- 3. to be fit for, to indulge in, to approve of, in nijjhānaŋ khamanti M i.133, 480; cp. diṭṭhi -- nijjhāna -- kkhanti M i.480 & A i.189. -- ppr. med. khamamāna Vin i.281 (uppaḍḍhakāsinaŋ kh˚) fit for, allowing of, worth, cp. Bdhgh. note Vin Texts i.195. -- grd. khamanīya to be allayed, becoming better (of a disease) Vin i.204; D ii.99. -- caus. khamāpeti to pacify, to ask one's pardon, to apologize (to = acc.) J i.267; PvA 123, 195; DhA i.38, 39; ii.75, 254. -- to ask permission or leave (i. e. to say good -- bye) DhA i.14. Khamana
Khamana
(nt.) long -- suffering Miln 351; bearing, suffering Sdhp 202; and a˚ intolerance Bdhd 24. Khamanatā
Khamanatā
(f.) forbearance and a˚ intolerance, harsh- ness both as syn. of khanti & akkhanti Dhs 1342, Vbh 360. Khamā
Khamā
(f.) [fr. ksam] (a) patience, endurance. (b) the earth (cp. chamā & see khamati) J iv.8 (v. l. B. chamāya). Khamāpanā
Khamāpanā
(f.) [abstr. fr. khamāpeti, Caus. of khamati] asking for pardon J iv.389. Khambha
Khambha
[Sk. khambha & sthambha] 1. prop, support, in ˚kata "making a prop," i. e. with his arms akimbo Vin ii.213 = iv.188. -- 2. obstruction, stiffening, paralysis, in ūru˚ "stiffening of the thigh" M i.237 (through pain); J v.23 (through fear). See also chambheti & thambha. -- 235 -- Khambheti
Khambheti
[Caus. fr. prec. -- Sk. skambh, skabhnāti] 1. to prop, to support Th 2, 28 (but expl. at ThA 35 by vi˚, obstruct) -- 2. to obstruct, to put out, in pp. khambhita ( = vi˚) Nd2 220, where it explains khitta. -> ger. khambhiya: see vi˚. Khaya
Khaya
[Sk. kṣaya to kṣi, kṣiṇoti & kṣiṇāti; cp. Lat. situs withering, Gr. fqi/ sis, fqi/nw, fqi/w wasting. See also khepeti under khipati] waste, destruction, consumption; decay, ruin, loss; of the passing away of night VvA 52; mostly in applied meaning with ref. to the extinction of passions & such elements as condition, life, & rebirth, e. g. āsavānaŋ kh. It 103 sq., esp. in formula āsavānaŋ khayā anāsavaŋ cetovimuttiŋ upasampajja A i.107 = 221=D iii.78, 108, 132=It 100 and passim. -- rāgassa, dosassa, mohassa kh. M i.5; A i.299, cp. rāga˚, dosa˚, moha˚, A i.159; dosa˚ S iii.160, 191; iv.250. -- taṇhānaŋ kh. Dh 154; sankhārānaŋ kh. Dh. 383; sabbamaññitānaŋ, etc. M i.486; āyu˚, puñña˚ Vism 502. -- yo dukkhassa pajānāti idh' eva khayaŋ attano Sn 626=Dh 402; khayaŋ virāgaŋ amataŋ paṇītaŋ Sn 225. -- In exegesis of rūpassa aniccatā: rūpassa khayo vayo bhedo Dhs 645=738=872. -- See also khīṇa and the foll. cpds. s. v.: āyu˚, upadhi˚, upādāna˚, jāti˚, jīvita˚, taṇha˚, dukkha˚, puñña˚, bhava˚, loka˚, saŋyojana, sabbadhamma˚, samudda˚.

-- âtīta (a) gone beyond, recovered from the waning period (of chanda, the moon = the new moon) Sn 598; -- ânupassin (a) realizing the fact of decay A iv.146 sq.= v.359 (+vayânupassin); -- ñāṇa knowledge of the fact of decay M ii.38=Pug 60; in the same sense khaye ñāṇa Nett 15, 54, 59, 127, 191, cp. kvu 230 sq.; -- dhamma the law of decay A iii.54; Ps i.53, 76, 78. Khara
Khara1
[cp. Sk. khara] 1. (adj.) rough, hard, sharp; painful D ii.127 (ābādha); J iii.26 (vedanā) Miln 26 (+sakkhara -- kaṭhala -- vālikā), PvA 152 (loma, shaggy hair; cp. Np. Khara -- loma -- yakkha Vism 208). -- ˚ka = khara rough, stony PvA 265 (=thaṇḍila). -- 2. (m.) a donkey, a mule, in -- putta, nickname of a horse J iii.278. -- 3. a saw J ii.230 (=kakaca C.); vi.261.

-- âjina a rough skin, as garment of an ascetic Sn 249 ( = kharāni ajina -- cammāni Sn A 291); Pug 56; -- gata of rough constitution Dhs 962; also as khari -- gata M i.185; Vism 349 (=pharusa). -- mukha a conch J vi.580. -- ssara of rough sound S ii.128. Khara
Khara2
[Sk. kṣara] water J iii.282. Kharatta
Kharatta
(nt.) [fr. khara] roughness A i.54; PvA 90 (in expln of pharusa). Khala
Khala
[cp. Sk. khala] 1. corn ready for threshing, the threshing floor Nd2 587; Vism 120; DA i.203 (khalaŋ sodheti). -- 2. threshing, mash, in ekamaŋsa -- khalaŋ karoti "to reduce to one mash of flesh" D i.52 = M i.377 (+maŋsa -- puñja; DA i.160=maŋsa -- rāsi).

-- agga the best corn for threshing DhA i.98; iv.98; -- kāla the time for threshing DhA iv.98; -- bhaṇḍ'agga the best agricultural implement for threshing DhA i.98; iv.98; -- bhaṇḍa -- kāla the time for the application of the latter DhA iv.98; -- maṇḍala a threshing -- floor Vism 123; DhA i.266 (˚matta, as large as . . .). Khalanka
Khalanka
in -- pāda at J vi.3 should probably be read kalanka˚ (q. v.). Khalati
Khalati
[Dhtp 260: kampane; Dhtm 375: sañcalane; cp. Sk. skhalati, cp. Gr. sfa/ llw to bring to fall, to fail] to stumble; ger. khalitvā Th 1, 45; Miln 187; pp. khalita q. v. Cp. upa˚, pa˚. Khali
Khali
a paste Vin ii.321 (:Bdhgh. on C.V. vi.3, 1 for madda). Khalika
Khalika
(or khalikā f.) a dice -- board, in khalikāya kīḷanti to play at dice (see illustr. in Rh. D. Buddh. India p. 77) Vin ii.10; cp. D i.6 (in enumn of various amusements; expl. at DA i.85 by jūta -- khalika pāsaka -- kīḷanaŋ). See also kali. Khalita
Khalita1
[Sk. khalati = Lat. calvus, bald; cp. khallāṭa] bald -- headed A i.138 (+vilūna); Th 2, 255 (=vilūnakesa ThA 210). Khalita
Khalita2
[pp. med. of khalati, cp. Dhtp 611; Dhtm 406 khala = soceyye] (adj. & n.) 1. faltering, stumbling, wrong -- doing, failure A i.198; Nd1 300; Th 2, 261; DhA iii.196 (of the voice; ThA 211=pakkhalita); J i.78; Miln 94, 408. -- 2. disturbed, treated badly J vi. 375. -- akhalita undisturbed Th 1, 512. Khalu
Khalu
[indecl., usually contracted to kho, q. v.] either positive: indeed, surely, truly D i.87; Sn p. 103; J iv.391 (as khaḷu); Mhvs vii.17; or negative: indeed not Vism 60 ( = paṭisedhan' atthe nipāto). -- pacchābhattika (adj.)=na p˚: a person who refuses food offered to him after the normal time Vin v.131=193; Pug 69; Vism 61. See Com. quot. by Childers, p. 310. Khalunka
Khalunka
[adj. fr. khala in caus. sense of khaleti, to shake. In formation = khalanga>khalanka>khalunka, cp. kulūpaka for kulūpaga] only appld to a horse= shaking, a shaker, racer (esp. as java A i.287), fig. of purisa at Anguttara passages. Described as bold and hard to manage A iv.190 sq.; as a horse which cannot be trusted and is inferior to an ājānīya (a thoroughbred) A v.166. Three kinds at A i.287 sq.=iv.397 sq. In expl. of vaḷavā (mare) at J i.180= sindhavakule ajāto khalunk'asso; as vaḷavā khaḷunkā J i.184. -- Der. khalunkatā in a˚, not shaking, steadiness VvA 278. Khaleti
Khaleti
[Sk. kṣālayati of kṣal?] lit. to wash (cp. pakkhā- leti), slang for "to treat badly," "to give a rubbing" or thrashing (exact meaning problematic); only at J iv.205 = 382: gale gahetvā khalayātha jammaŋ "take the rascal by the throat and thrash him" (Com. khalayātha khalīkāraŋ (i. e. a "rub," kind of punishment) pāpetvā niddhamatha=give him a thrashing & throw him out. v. l. at both passages is galayātha). Khallaka
Khallaka
in baddhā upāhanāyo shoes with heel -- coverings (?) Vin i.186 (see Bdhgh. note on it Vin Texts ii.15). -> Also as khalla -- baddhâdibhedaŋ upāhanaŋ at PvA 127 in expln of upāhana. Kern (Toev. s. v.) sees in it a kind of stuff or material. Khallāta
Khallāta
[Sk. khalvāta, cp. khalita] bald, in -- sīsa a bald head DhA i.309. Der. khallātiya baldness, in khallātiyapetī the bald -- headed Petī PvA 46 (where spelled khalātiya) and 67. Khallika
Khallika
only at S v.421; cp. S iv.330 (Dhamma- cakka -- p -- Sutta). It is a misreading. Read with Oldenberg, Vin i.10, kāmesu kāmasukhallikānuyoga (devotion to the passions, to the pleasures of sense). See kāmasukha and allika . Khaḷopī
Khaḷopī
[and khalopi, also kalopī, q. v. Cp. Trenckner Notes, p. 60, possibly = karoṭi] a pot, usually with kumbhī: D i.167 ( -- mukha+kumbhi -- mukha); Pug 55; Miln 107. Khāṇu
Khāṇu
[also often spelled khānu; prob. = Sk. sthāṇu, corrupted in etym. with khaṇati, cp. Trenckner, Notes 58, n. 6] a stump (of a tree), a stake. Often used in description of uneven roads; together with kaṇṭaka, thorns A i.35; iii.389; Vism 261 (˚paharaṇ' aggi), 342 (˚magga); SnA 334. -- jhāma˚ a burnt stump (as characteristic of kālaka) S iv.193. -- nikhāta˚ an uprooted trunk DA i.73. Khāṇu -- kondañña N. of a Thera Vism 380; DhA ii.254. Khāṇuka
Khāṇuka
= khāṇu S v.379 (avihata˚): J ii.18, 154; v.45 (loha -- daṇḍa -- kh˚ pins & stakes of brass); Miln 187 (mūle vā khāṇuke vā . . . khalitvā stumbling over roots & stumps); Vism 381=DhA ii.254 (with ref. to the name of Khāṇu -- kondañña who by robbers was mistaken for a tree stump); VvA 338 (in a road=sankuka). -- 236 -- Khāta
Khāta
(adj.) [Sk. khāta; pp. of khan] dug DA i.274 ( = ukkiṇṇa), a˚ not dug Miln 351 (˚taḷāka). Cp. atikhāta J ii.296. Khāda
Khāda
(nt.) eating, in -- kāraṇa the reason of eating . . . PvA 37. Khādaka
Khādaka
(adj.) eating (nt.) Vism 479; eating, living on (adj. -- ˚), an eater J iv.307; PvA 44; lohita -- maŋsa˚ (of Yakkhas) J i.133, 266; camma˚ J i.176; gūtha˚ (of a Peta) PvA 266. Khādati
Khādati
[Dhtp 155 "khāda bhakkhane"; cp. Sk. khā- dati, cp. Gr. knw/dwn the barbed hook of a javelin, i. e. "the biter"; Lith. kándu to bite] to chew, bite, eat, devour ( = Ger. fressen); to destroy. -- Pres. Dh 240; J i.152 (sassāni); iii.26; Pv i.63 (puttāni, of a Petī); i.94. -- kaṭṭhaŋ kh˚ to use a toothpick J i.80, 282, -> dante kh˚ to gnash the teeth J i.161. -- santakaŋ kh˚ to consume one's property DhsA 135. -- of beasts, e. g. Sn 201, 675. -- Pot. khādeyya J iii.26. -- Imper. khāda J i.150 (maŋsaŋ); ii.128 (khādaniyaŋ); vi.367. (pūvaŋ); PvA 39, 78. -- Part. pres. khādanto J i.61; iii.276. -- Fut. khādissati J i.221; ii.129. -- Aor. khādiŋsu PvA 20. -- Pass. ppr. khādiyamāna (cp. khajjati) PvA 69 (taṇhāya) (expl. of khajjamāna). -> Inf. khādituŋ J i.222; ii.153; DhA iv.226. -- Ger. khāditvā J i.266, 278 (phalāni); PvA 5, 32 (devour); poetical khādiyā J v.464 (=khāditvā). -- Grd. khāditabba J iii.52, and khādaniya (q .v.). -- Pp. khādita (q. v.). Cp. pali˚. Khādana
Khādana
(nt.) the act of eating (or being eaten) PvA 158. -- adj. f. khādanī the eater Dpvs 238; khādana at J ii.405 is to be read as ni˚ (q. v.). Cp. vi˚. Khādaniya
Khādaniya
[grd. of khādati; also as khādanīya] hard or solid food, opp. to and freq, combd with bhojaniya (q. v.). So at D ii.127; J i.90, 235; iii.127; Sn. p 110; Miln 9, 11. -- Also in combn anna, pāna, kh˚ Sn 924; ii.49. By itself J iii.276. -- piṭṭha˚ pastry Vin i.248. Khādā
Khādā
(f.) food, in rāja˚ royal food Sn 831 (rājakhādāya puṭṭho = rājakhādanīyena rājabhojanīyena posito Nd1 171; where printed ˚khadāya throughout). Khādāpana
Khādāpana
[fr. khādāpeti] causing to be eaten (kind of punishment) Miln 197 (sunakhehi). Khādāpeti
Khādāpeti
(Caus. ii. of khādati] to make eat J iii.370; vi.335. Khādika
Khādika
= khādaka, in aññamañña˚ S v.456. Khādita
Khādita
(adj.) [pp. med. & pass. of khādati] eaten, or having eaten, eaten up, consumed J i.223; ii.154; PvA 5. -- A twin form of khādita is khāyita, formed prob. on analogy of sāyita, with which freq. combined (cp., however, Trenckner P.M. 57), e. g. Pug 59; Vism 258; PvA 25. Used as the poetical form Pv i.1211 (expl. PvA 158 = khādita). -- Der. khāditatta (nt.) the fact of being eaten J i.176.

-- ṭṭhāna the eating place, place of feeding J v.447. Khādin
Khādin,
f. khādinī = khādaka PvA 31. Khāyati
Khāyati
[pass. = Sk. khyāyate, khyā] to seem to be, to appear like (viya) J i.279; aor. khāyiŋsu J i.61; ppr. med. khāyamāna J iv. 140; PvA 251. Cp. pakkhāyati. Khāyita
Khāyita
see khādita; cp. avakkhāyika. Khāra
Khāra
[Sk. kṣāra, pungent, saline, sharp to ksā, kṣāyati to burn, cp. Gr. chro/ s, dry; Lat. serenus, dry, clear, seresco to dry] any alkaline substance, potash, lye. In combn with ūsa (salt earth) at S iii.131 ( -- gandha); A i.209. -- Used as a caustic Pv iii.102; Sdhp 281. See also chārikā.

-- âpatacchika a means of torturing, in enumn of var. tortures (under vividha -- kamma -- kāranā kārenti) M i.87 = A i.48=ii.122=Nd2 604; J vi.17 (v. l. ˚ṭicch˚; C. has āpatacchika, v. l. paṭicchaka); Vism 500; Miln 197. Both A & Nd have v. l. kharāpaṭicchaka; -- ôdaka an alkaline solution Vism 264, 420; DhA i.189; PvA 213; cp. khārodikā nadī (in Niraya) Sdhp 194. Khāraka
Khāraka
(adj.) [fr. khāra] sharp or dry, said of the buds of the Pāricchattaka A iv.117 sq. Khārī
Khārī
(f.) [and khāri -- ] a certain measure of capacity (esp. of grain, see below khārika). It is used of the eight requisites of an ascetic, and often in conn. with his yoke (kāja): "a khārī -- load."

-- kāja Vin i.33 (cp. Vin Texts i.132); J v.204. -- bhaṇḍa DhA iii.243 (:kahaŋ te kh -- bh˚ ko pabbajita parikkhāro); -- bhāra a shoulder -- yoke S i.169; J iii.83; -- vidha = ˚kāja S i.78=Ud 65; D i.101. At Ud and D passages it is read vividha, but DA i.269 makes it clear: khārī ti araṇi -- kamaṇḍalu -- sūcâdayo tāpasa -- parikkhārā; vidho ti kāco, tasmā khāribharitaŋ kācam ādāyā ti attho. As Kern (Toev. s. v.) points out, ˚vidha is a distortion of vivadha, which is synonymous with kāja. Khārika
Khārika1
[adj. to khāra] alkaline, in enumn of tastes (cp. rasa) at S iii 87; Dhs 629 and ≈. Khārika
Khārika2
[adj. of khārī] of the khārī measure, in vīsati˚ kosalako tilavāho A v.173 = Sn p. 126. Khāleti
Khāleti
Caus. of khalati: see khaleti & vikkhāleti. Khāhinti
Khāhinti
at Th 2, 509 is to be read kāhinti ( = karissanti ThA 293). Khiḍḍā
Khiḍḍā
[Vedic krīḍā, cp. kīḷati] play, amusement, pleasure usually combd with rati, enjoyment. Var. degrees of pleasures (bāla˚, etc.) mentioned at A v.203; var. kinds of amusement enumerated at Nd2 219; as expounded at D i.6 under jūta -- pamādaṭṭhāna. Generally divided into kāyikā & vācasikā khiḍḍā (Nd2; SnA 86). Expl. as kīḷanā SnA 86, as hassādhippāya (means of mirth) PvA 226; sahāyakādīhi keḷi PvA 265. Cp. Sn 926; Pv iv.121.

-- dasaka "the decad of play," i. e. the second 10 years of man's life, fr. 11 -- 20 years of age Vism 619. -- padosika corrupted by pleasures D i.19, 20 = DA i.113 (v. l. padūsika); -- rati play & enjoyment Sn 41, 59; Vv 1612, 327; Pv iv.72; Vism 619. Khitta
Khitta
[pp. of khip, to throw Dhtp 479; peraṇe] thrown; cast, overthrown Dh 34; rajo paṭivātaŋ kh˚, dirt thrown against the wind S i.13, 164 = Sn 662=Dh 125= J iii.203; ratti -- khittā sarā arrows shot in the night Dh 304=Nett 11; acchi vātavegena khittā a flame overthrown by the power of the wind, blown out Sn 1074 (expld Nd2 220 by ukkhittā nuṇṇā, khambhitā); in interpret. of khetta PvA 7 said of sowing: khittaŋ vuttaŋ bījaŋ. -- akkhitta not upset, not deranged, undisturbed, in qualities required of a brahmin w. ref. to his genealogy: yāva sattamā pitāmahāyugā akkhitto D i.113=Sn p. 115, etc. Cp. vi˚.

-- citta (a) one whose mind is thrown over, upset, unhinged, usually combd with ummattaka, out of one's mind Vin i.131, 321; ii.64, etc.; Sdhp 88. Cp. citta -- kkhepa. Khipa
Khipa
(nt.) [fr. ksip] a throw, anything thrown over, as ajina˚ a cloak of antelope hide D i.167 and ≈; or thrown out, as a fishing net ( = kumina) eel -- basket A i.33=287; Th 2, 357 (=ThA 243). Cp. khippa & vikkhepika. Khipati
Khipati
[Vedic kṣipati] to throw, to cast, to throw out or forth, to upset Sn p. 32 (cittaŋ); J i.223 (sīsaŋ). 290 (pāsake); ii.3 (daḷhaŋ dalhassa: to pit force against force) -- aor. khipi S iv.2, 3 (khuracakkaŋ); PvA 87 ( = atthāresi). -- ger. khipitvā J i.202. -- 1st caus. khepeti (perhaps to kṣi, see khaya) to throw in, to put in, to spend (of time): dīgham addhānaŋ khepetvā J i.137; Th 2, 168 (khepeti jātisaŋsāraŋ=pariyosāpeti ThA 159); DhA i.102 (dvenavuti -- kappe khepesuŋ); āyuŋ khepehi spend (the rest of) your life PvA 148; ger. khepayitvāna (saŋsāraŋ) Pv iv.332 (=khepetvā PvA 254). In this sense Trenckner (P. M. 76) takes it as corresponding to Sk. kṣāpayati of kṣi=to cause to waste. See also khepana. -- 2nd caus. khipāpeti to cause to be thrown J i.202; iv.139 (jalaŋ). Cp also khepa. -- 237 -- Khipana
Khipana
(nt.) the act of throwing or the state of being thrown J i.290 (pasaka -- k˚). Khipanā
Khipanā
(f.) [fr. khipati] throwing up, provocation, mockery, slander Miln 357; Vbh 352; cp. Vism 29. Khipita
Khipita
(nt.) [pp. of khipati = that which is thrown out; acc. to Trenckner Notes p. 75 for khupita fr. kṣu to sneeze; possibly a contamination of the two] sneezing, expectoration Pv ii.23 (expl. PvA 80: mukhato nikkhantamala); DhA i.314 (˚roga+kāsa, coughing).

-- sadda the sound of expectorations D i.50; DhA i.250. Khippa
Khippa
(adj.): [Vedic kṣipra to kṣip] 1. quick, lit. in the way of throwing (cp. "like a shot") Sn 350 (of vacana = lahu SnA). -- 2. a sort of fishing net or eel -- basket (cp. khipa & Sk. kṣepaṇī) S i.74. -- nt. adv. khippaŋ quickly A ii.118=iii.164; Sn 413, 682, 998; Dh 65, 137, 236, 289; J iv.142; Pv ii.84, 92, 1221, Pug 32. -- Compar. khippatara Sn p. 126.

-- âbhiññā quick intuition (opp. dandh˚) D iii.106; Dhs 177; Nett 7, 24, 50, 77, 112 sq.; 123 sq.; Vism 138. Khippati
Khippati
[fr. kṣip] to ill -- treat, in ppr. khippamāna Vv 8444, expld at VvA 348 by vambhento, pīḷanto. Khila
Khila
(m. nt.) [cp. Sk. khila] waste or fallow land A iii.248; fig. barrenness of mind, mental obstruction. There are five ceto -- khilā enumd in detail at M i.101 = A iv.460= D iii.238 (see under ceto); mentioned A v.17; SnA 262. As three khilā, viz. rāga, dosa, moha at S v.57; also with other qualities at Nd2 9. In combn with paligha S i.27 (chetvā kh˚ ŋ); khilaŋ pabhindati to break up the fallowness (of one's heart) S i.193; iii.134; Sn 973.-> akhila (adj.) not fallow, unobstructed, open -- hearted: cittaŋ susamāhitaŋ . . . akhilaŋ sabbabhūtesu Dii.261; S iv.118; in combn with anāsava Sn 212; with akankha Sn 477, 1059; with vivattacchada Sn 1147; cp. vigatakhila Sn 19. Khiḷa
Khiḷa
[cp. Sk. kiṇa] hard skin, callosity J v.204 (v. l. kiṇa). Khīṇa
Khīṇa
[pp. of khīyati, Pass. to khayati] destroyed, exhausted, removed, wasted, gone; in cpds. ˚ -- often to be translated "without." It is mostly applied to the destruction of the passions (āsavā) & demerit (kamma). Khīṇā jāti "destroyed is the possibility of rebirth," in freq. occurring formula "kh. j. vusitaŋ brahmacariyaŋ kataŋ karaṇīyaŋ nâparaŋ itthattāya," denoting the attainment of Arahantship. (See arahant ii, formula A) Vin i. 35; D i.84, 177, 203; M ii.39; Sn p. 16; Pug 61 etc. See expln at DA i.225 = SnA 138. -- khīṇaŋ mayhaŋ kammaŋ J iv.3, similarly khīṇaŋ purāṇaŋ navaŋ natthi sambhavaŋ Sn 235 (khīṇa=samucchinna KhA 194); pāpakamme khīṇe PvA 105. āsavakhīṇa one whose cravings are destroyed Sn 370, cp. 162.

-- āsava (adj.) whose mind is free from the four mental obsessions, Ep. of an Arahant Vin i.183; M i. 145; ii.43; iii.30; D iii.97, 133, 235; It 95; Sn 82, 471, 539, 644; Dh 89, 420; PvA 7 ( = arahanto); cp. BSk kṣīṇāśrava Divy 542. -- The seven powers of a kh.˚ (khīṇāsava -- balāni) discussed at D iii.283; Ps i.35; ten powers at Ps ii.173, 176; cp. Vism 144 (where a kh. walks through the air). -- punabbhava one in whom the conditions of another existence have been destroyed (=khīṇāsava) Sn 514, 656; -- bīja one who is without the seed (of renewed existence) (=prec.) Sn 235 (=ucchinna -- bīja KhA 194); -- maccha without fish (of a lake) Dh 155; -- vyappatha without the way of (evil) speech (vyapp˚=vācāya patho; expl. SnA 204 as na pharusavāco) Sn 158; -- sota with the stream gone, i. e. without water, in macche appodake kh˚ Sn 777. Khīṇatta
Khīṇatta
(nt.) DA i.225 & khīṇatā (f.) DhA iv.228, the fact of being destroyed. Khīya
Khīya
[cp. khīyati2] in -- dhammaŋ āpajjati to fall into a state of mental depression Vin iv.151, 154; A iii.269; iv.374. See also remarks by Kern, Toev. s. v. Khīyati
Khīyati
[Sk. kṣīyate, pass. to khayati] to be exhausted, to waste away, to become dejected, to fall away from Vin iv.152; J i.290 (dhạna); Pv ii.942; 112; Ps i.94, 96; ii.31 (āsavā); Bdhd 80. -- ppr. khīyamāna Sn 434; Bdhd 19. aor. khīyi D iii.93; grd. khīyitabba ibid. see also khāya and khīyanaka. In phrase "ujjhāyati khīyati vipāceti it seems to correspond to jhāyati2 [Sk. kṣāyati] and the meaning is "to become chafed or heated, to become vexed, angry; to take offence"; as evidenced by the combn with quâsi -- synonyms ujjhāyati & vipāceti, both referring to a heated state, fig. for anger (cp. kilissati). Thus at Vin ii.259 & passim. See ujjhāyati for further refs. Khīyanaka
Khīyanaka
(a) [der. fr. khīya] in combn with pācittiya a "falling away" offence (legal term denoting the falling away from a consent once given) (see khīya) Vin ii.94, 100; iv.38. Khīra
Khīra
(nt.) [Sk. kṣīra] milk, milky fluid, milky juice Vin i.243; ii.301; M i.343 sq. = A ii.207=Pug 56; A ii.95 (in simile with dadhi, navanīta, sappi, sappi -- maṇḍa)= D i.201; DhA i.98; enumd with dadhi, etc., as one constituent of material food (kabalinkāro ähāro) at Dhs 646=740=875; -- J iv.138 (mātu kh˚); 140; Dh 71=Nett 161; Miln 41; PvA 198 (=sneha, milky juice); VvA 75; DhA i.98 (nirudaka kh˚, milk without water). -- duddha -- khīra one who has milked Sn 18.

-- ôdaka (nt.) milk -- water or milk & water lit. J ii.104, 106; fig. in simile khīrodakībhūtā for a samaggā parisā "a congregation at harmony as milk and water blend" A i.70; S iv.225 = M i.207, 398=A iii.67, 104; -- odana (nt.) milk -- rice (boiled) Vv3324 (=VvA 147). -- gandha the smell of milk J vi.357. -- ghaṭa a pot of milk Miln 48; -- paka drinking milk; sucking (of a calf: vaccho mātari kh˚) Dh 284 (v. l. khīra -- pāna); DhA iii.424; -- paṇṇin (m.) N. of a tree the leaves of which contain a milky sap, Calotropis gigantea M i.429; -- matta having had his fill of milk, happy (of a babe) S i.108; -- mūla the price of milk; money with which to buy milk DhA iv.217; -- sāmin master of the milk (+dhīrasāmin) Bdhd 62. Khīranikā
Khīranikā
(f.) a milk -- giving cow S i.174. Khīla
Khīla
[Sk. kīla & khīla] a stake, post, bolt, peg Vin ii.116 (khīlaŋ nikhanitvā digging in or erecting a post); S iii.150 (kh˚ vā thambha vā); iv.200 (daḷha˚ a strong post, Ep. of satī); Mhvs 29, 49. -- ayo˚ an iron stake A i.141; S v.444; Nd2 304iii; Sn 28 (nikhāta, erected); SnA 479. Cp. inda˚.

-- ṭṭhāyi -- ṭhita standing like a post (of a stubborn horse) A iv.192, 194. Khīlaka
Khīlaka
(adj.) having sticks or stumps (as obstacles), in a˚ unobstructed J v.203 ( = akāca nikkaṇṭaka 206). Khīḷana
Khīḷana
[der. fr. khīḷeti] scorn Miln 357. Khīḷeti
Khīḷeti
[to kīḷ or to khila?] to scorn, deride, only in combn hīḷita khīḷita garahita (pp.) Miln 229, 288; cp. khīḷana. Khu
Khu
( -- ˚) is doubtful second part of inghāḷa˚ (q. v.). Khuŋseti
Khuŋseti
[kruś? Dhtp 625: akkosane; cp. Müller P.G. 52 to scold, to curse, to be angry at, to have spite against D i.90, DA i.256 ( = ghaṭṭeti); Vin iv.7; SnA 357; DhA iv.38. -- pp. khuŋsita DhA ii.75. -- 238 -- Khujja
Khujja
(adj.) [either Sk kubja, of which khujja would be the older form (cp. Walde, Lat. Etym. Wtb. s. v. cubitum), or Sk. kṣudra (?) (so Müller, P.G. p. 52). See also the variant kujja & cp. kuṭṭa2] 1. humpbacked J v.426 (+piṭhasappī); DA i.148 (in combn with vāmana & kirāta); f. DhA i.194, 226. -- 2. small, inferior, in kh˚ -- rājā a smaller, subordinate king Sdhp 453. Khuṇḍali
Khuṇḍali
at PvA 162 (mā kh.) is to be read ukkaṇṭhi. Khudā
Khudā
[Sk. kṣudh & kṣudhā, also BSk. kṣud in kṣuttarṣa hunger & thirst Jtm p. 30] hunger Sn 52 (+pipāsā: Nd2 s. v. kh˚ vuccati chātako), 966; Pv i.64 ( = jighacchā) ii.15 (+taṇhā), 24; PvA 72. See khuppipāsā. Khudda
Khudda
(adj.) [Vedic kṣudra] small, inferior, low; trifling, insignificant; na khuddaŋ samācare kiñci "he shall not pursue anything trifling" Sn 145 ( = lāmakaŋ KhA 243); kh˚ ca bālaŋ Sn 318. Opp. to strong Vv 3210 (of migā= balavasena nihīnā VvA 136).

-- ânukhuddaka, in ˚āni sikkhāpadāni the minor observances of discipline, the lesser & minor precepts Vin ii.287 = D ii. 154; Vin iv.143; A i.233; cp. Divy 465; -- âvakāsa in akhuddâvakāso dassanāya not appearing inferior, one of the attributes of a well -- bred brahmin (with brahmavaṇṇī) D i.114, 120, etc. -- desa, in ˚issara ruler of a small district Sdhp 348. Khuddaka
Khuddaka
= khudda; usually in cpds. In sequence khuddaka -- majjhima -- mahā Vism 100. Of smaller sections or subdivisions of canonical books Vin v.145 sq. (with ref. to the paññattis), see also below. -- catuppade kh˚ ca mahallake Sn 603. Khuddaka (m.) the little one, Miln 40 (mātā ˚assa).

-- nadī = kunnadī, a small river PvA 154; -- nikāya name of a collection of canonical books, mostly short (the fifth of the five Nikāyas) comprising the foll. 15 books: Khuddaka -- Pāṭha, Dhammapada, Udāna, Itivuttaka, Sutta -- Nipāta, Vimāna -- Vatthu, Peta -- Vatthu, Thera and Therī Gāthā, Jātaka (verses only), Niddesa, Paṭisambhidāmagga, Apadāna, Buddha -- Vaŋsa, CariyāPiṭaka. The name Kh -- N. is taken from the fact that it is a collection of short books -- short, that is, as compared with the Four Nikāyas. Anvs (J.P.T.S. 1886) p. 35; Gvns (J.P.T.S. 1886) p. 57; PvA 2, etc. -- pāṭha N. of the first book in the Khuddaka Nikāya; -- mañcaka a small or low bed J i.167; -- rājā an inferior king J v.37 (+mahārājā); SnA 121; cp. khujja & kuṭṭa; -- vaggulī (f.) a small singing bird DhA iii.223; -- vatthuka belonging to or having smaller sections Vin v.114. Khuppipāsā
Khuppipāsā
[cp. khudā] hunger & thirst: ˚āya mīyamāno M i.85. Personified as belonging to the army of Māra Sn 436 = Nd2 on visenikatvā. To be tormented by hunger & thirst is the special lot of the Petas: Pv i.1110; ii.22, PvA 10, 32, 37, 58, etc.; Vism 501; Sdhp 9, 101, 507. Khubhati
Khubhati
see saŋ˚ & khobha. The root is given at Dhtp 206 & 435 as "khubha = sañcalane." Khura
Khura1
[Vedic khura] the hoof of an animal Vv 6410 (of a horse = turagānaŋ khuranipāta, the clattering of a horse's hoof VvA 279), cp. Sk. kṣura, a monkey's claw Sp. AvŚ i.236.

khura -- kāse M i.446, read (with Neumann) for khura -- kāye, "in the manner of dragging (kṛṣ) the hoofs." Khura
Khura2
[Vedic kṣura, to kṣṇu, kṣṇoti to whet, kṣṇotra whet- stone; cp. Gr. xnau /w scrape, cu/w shave, Lat. novacula razor. The Pali Dhtp (486) gives as meanings "chedana & vilekhana"] a razor Vin ii.134; S iv.169 (tiṇha a sharp r.) DhA ii.257.

-- agga the hall of tonsure PvA 53; -- appa a kind of arrow D i.96; M i.429 (+vekaṇḍa); Vism 381. -- kosa razor -- sheath Vism 251, 255. -- cakka a wheel, sharp as a razor J iv.3; -- dhāra 1. carrying razors, said of the Vetaraṇī whose waters are like razors Sn 674 (+tiṇha-> dhāra); J v.269; Vism 163. -- 2. the haft of a razor, or its case Sn 716 (˚ûpama); Vism 500; DhA ii.257; -- nāsa having a nose like a razor J iv.139; -- pariyanta a disk as sharp as a razor, a butcher -- knife D i.52 ( = DA i.160; khura -- nemi khura -- sadisa -- pariyanta), cp. ˚cakka; -- māla N. of an ocean, in ˚samudda J iv.137; -- mālī (f.)= prec. ibid.; -- muṇḍa close -- shaven Vin i.344; VvA 207. Khuramuṇḍaŋ karoti to shave closely D i.98; S iv.344= A ii.241; -- bhaṇḍa the outfit of a barber, viz. khura, khura -- silā, khura -- sipāṭikā, namataka Vin i.249; ii.134, cp. Vin. Texts iii.138; -- silā a whetstone Vin ii.134; -- sipāṭikā a powder prepared with s. gum to prevent razors from rusting Vin ii.134. Khulukhulukaṛakaŋ
Khulukhulu
-- kaṛakaŋ (nt. adv.) "so as to make the sound khulu, khulu," i.e. clattering or bumping about M ii.138. Cp. ghuru -- ghuru. Kheṭa
Kheṭa
[cp. Sk. kheṭaka] a shield: see kīṭa. Khetta
Khetta
(nt.) [Vedic kṣetra, to kṣi, kṣeti, kṣiti, dwelling -- place, Gr. kti/ zw, Lat. situs founded, situated, E. site; cp. also Sk. kṣema "being settled," composure. See also khattiya. Dhammapāla connects khetta with kṣip & trā in his expln at PvA 7: khittaŋ vuttaŋ bījaŋ tāyati . . . ti khettaŋ] 1. (lit.) a field, a plot of land, arable land, a site, D i.231; S i.134 (bījaŋ khette virūhati; in simile); three kinds of fields at S iv.315, viz. agga˚, majjhima˚, hīna˚ (in simile); A i.229 = 239; iv.237 (do.); Sn 524; J i.153 (sāli -- yava˚); Pv ii.968=DhA iii.220 (khette bījaŋ ropitaŋ); Miln 47; PvA 62; DhA i.98. Often as a mark of wealth=possession, e. g. D iii.93 in defn of khattiya: khettānaŋ patī ti khattiya., In the same sense connected with vatthu (field & farm cp. Haus und Hof), to denote objects of trade, etc. D i.5 (expld at DA i.78: khetta nāma yasmiŋ pubbaṇṇaŋ rūhati, vatthu nāma yasmiŋ aparaṇṇaŋ rūhati, "kh. is where the first crop grows and v. where the second." A similar expln at Nd1 248, where khetta is divided into sāli˚, vīhi. mugga˚, māsa˚, yava˚, godhūma˚, tila˚, i. e. the pubbaṇṇāni, and vatthu expld ghara˚, koṭṭhaka˚, pure˚, pacchā˚, ārāma˚, vihāra˚ without ref. to aṇṇa.) S ii.41; Sn 769. Together with other earthly possessions as wealth (hirañña, suvaṇṇa) Sn 858; Nd2 on lepa, gahaṭṭha, etc. As example in definition of visible objects Dhs 597; Vbh 71 sq. -- Kasī˚ a tilled field, a field ready to bear Pv i.12, cp. PvA 8; jāti˚ "a region in which a Buddha may be born" (Hardy, after Childers s. khetta) PvA 138. Cp. the threefold division of a Buddha -- kkhetta at Vism 414, viz. jāti˚, āṇā˚, visaya˚. -- 2. fig. (of kamma) the soil of merit, the deposit of good deeds, which, like a fertile field, bears fruit to the advantage of the "giver" of gifts or the "doer" of good works. See dakkhiṇeyya˚, puñña˚ (see detailed expln at Vism 220; khetta here= virūhana -- ṭṭhāna), brahma˚. -- A i.162, 223 (kammaŋ, khettaŋ, viññāṇaŋ bījaŋ); iv.237; It 98; VvA 113.-> akhetta barren soil A iii.384 (akhettaññu not finding a good soil); iv.418 (do.); PvA 137. Sukhetta a good soil, fertile land S i.21; PvA 137; opp. dukkhetta S v.379.

-- ûpama to be likened to a (fruitful) field, Ep. of an Arahant Pv i.11; -- kammanta work in the field A iii.77; -- gata turned into a field, of puññakamma "good work becoming a field of merit" PvA 136, 191; -- gopaka a field watcher J iii.52; -- ja "born on one's land," one of the 4 kinds of sons Nd1 247; Nd2 448; J i.135. -- jina one unsurpassed in the possession of a "field" Sn 523, 524; -- pāla one who guards a field J iii.54; -- mahantatā the supremeness of the field (of merit) VvA 108; -- rakkhaka the guardian of a field J ii.110; -- vatthu possession of land & goods (see above) D iii.164; S v.473 = A ii.209; A v.137; Pug 58; PvA 3; -- sampatti the successful attainment of a field of (merit) PvA 198; VvA 102; see VvA 30, 32 on the three sampattis, viz. khetta˚, citta˚, payoga˚; -- sāmika the owner of the field Miln 47; VvA 311. -- sodhana the cleaning of the field (before it is ploughed) DhA iii.284. Kheda
Kheda
(adj.) [Sk. kheda fatigue, khedati; perhaps to Lat. caedo] subject to fatigue, tired VvA 276. -- As noun "fatigue" at Vism 71. -- 239 -- Khepa
Khepa
[cp. khipati] ( -- ˚) throwing, casting, Sdhp 42. Usually in citta -- kkhepa loss of mind, perplexity Dh 138. Cp. vi˚, saŋ˚. Khepana
Khepana
[cp. khepeti] -- ˚ the passing of, appld to time: āyu˚ VvA 311. Khepita
Khepita
[pp. of khepeti] destroyed, brought to waste, annihilated, khepitatta (nt.) the fact of being destroyed, destruction, annihilation, DhA ii.163 (kilesavaṭṭassa kh.). Khepeti
Khepeti
see khipati. Khema
Khema
[Vedic kṣema to kṣi, cp. khetta] 1. (adj.) full of peace, safe; tranquil, calm D i.73 (of a country); S i.123 (of the path leading to the ambrosial, i. e. Nibbāna) i.189 = Sn 454 (of vācā nibbānapattiyā); M i.227 (vivaṭaŋ amatadvāraŋ khemaŋ nibbānapattiyā "opened is the door to the Immortal, leading to peace, for the attainment of Nibbāna") A iii.354 (of ñāna) It 32; Sn 268 (=abhaya, nirupaddava KhA 153); Dh 189 sq.; Pv iv.33 (of a road=nibbhaya PvA 250); VvA 85. -> 2. (nt.) shelter, place of security, tranquillity, home of peace, the Serene (Ep. of Nibbāna). In general: D i.11 (peace, opp. bhaya); Sn 896 (+avivādabhūmi); 953. -- In particular of Nibbāna: S iv.371; A iv.455; Vv 5320 (amataŋ khemaŋ); Ps i.59. See also yoga. Abl. khemato, from the standpoint of the Serene S ii.109; Sn 414, 1098; Nd2 s. v. (+tāṇato, etc.).

-- atta one who is at peace (+viratta) S i.112 ( = khemībhūtaŋ assabhāvaŋ SA). -- anta security, in ˚bhūmi a peaceful country (opp, kantāra), a paradise (as Ep. of Nibbāna) D i.73; Nd2 on Satthā; Vism 303. -- ṭṭhāna the place of shelter, the home of tranquillity Th 2, 350 (=Nibbāna ThA 242); -- ṭṭhita peaceful, appeased, unmolested D i.135; -- dassin looking upon the Serene Sn 809; -- ppatta having attained tranquillity (=abhayappatta, vesārajjappatta) M i.72=A ii.9. Khemin
Khemin
(adj.) one who enjoys security or peace S iii.13; Sn 145 ( = abhaya KhA 244); Dh 258. Kheḷa
Kheḷa
[Sk. kheṭa, cp. kṣveḍa and śleṣma, P. silesuma. See also kilid & kilis, cp. ukkheṭita. On root khela see keḷanā; it is given by Dhtp 279 in meaning "calana." The latter (khela) has of course nothing to do with kheḷa] phlegm, saliva, foam; usually with singhānikā mucus, sometimes in the sense of perspiration, sweat A i.34; iv.137; Sn 196 (+singh˚); Kh ii. = Miln 26 (cp. Vism 263 in detail, & KhA 66); J i.61; iv.23; vi.367; Vism 259, 343 (+singhāṇikā), 362; DhA iii.181; iv.20, 170; Pv ii.23 as food for Petas, cp. Av.S. i.279 (kheṭamūtropajīvinī; ii.113: kheṭavadutsṛjya); PvA 80 (=niṭṭhubhana).

-- kilinna wet with exudation J i.164; -- mallaka a spitting box, a cuspidor Vin i.48; ii.175, 209 sq.; -- singhānikā phlegm & mucus DhA i.50. Kheḷāpaka
Kheḷāpaka
(Vin) & kheḷāsika (DhA) an abusive term "eating phlegm" (?) [Müller, P.G. 30 = kheṭâtmaka] Vin ii.188, cp. Vin. Texts iii.239; ˚vāda the use of the term "phlegm -- eater," calling one by this name Vin ii.189; DhA 140. Cp. āpaka.? spittle -- dribbler; "wind bag." Kho
Kho
[before vowels often khv'; contr. of khalu = Sk. khalu] an enclitic particle of affirmation & emphasis: indeed, really, surely; in narration: then, now (cp. kira); in question: then, perhaps, really. Def. as adhikār' antara -- nidassan' atthe nipāto KhA 113; as avadhāraṇaŋ (affirmative particle) PvA 11, 18. -- A few of its uses are as foll.: abhabbo kho Vin i.17; pasādā kho D ii.155. After pron.: mayhaŋ kho J i.279; ete kho Vin i.10; idaŋ kho ibid.; so ca kho J i.51; yo kho M i.428; -- After a negation: na kho indeed not J ii.111; no ca khv' āssa A v.195; mā kho J i.253; -- Often combd with pana: na sakkhā kho pana "is it then not possible" J i.151; api ca kho pana J i.253; siyā kho pana D ii.154; -- Following other particles. esp. in aoristic narration: atha kho (extremely frequent); tatra kho; tâpi kho; api ca kho; evaŋ bhante ti kho; evaŋ byā kho Vin iv.134; Dh i.27, etc. -- In interr. sentences it often follows nu: kin nu kho J i.279; atthi nu kho J iii.52; kahan nu kho J i.255. Khobha
Khobha
(m.) [cp. Vedic kṣubh kṣobhayati, to shake = Goth. skiuban Ger. schieben, to push, E. shove] shaking, shock Vism 31, 157; khobhaŋ karoti to shake VvA 35, 36, 278; khobha -- karaṇa shaking up, disturbance Vism 474. See also akkhobbha. Khoma
Khoma
[cp. Vedic kṣauma] adj. flaxen; nt. a linen cloth, linen garment, usually combd with kappāsika Vin i.58, 96, 281; A iv.394; v.234 = 249 (˚yuga); J vi.47, 500; Pv ii.117; DhA i.417.

-- pilotikā a linen cloth Vin i.296. -- G. ˚Ga
˚Ga
[fr. gam] adj., only as ending: going. See e. g. atiga, anuga, antalikkha˚, ura˚, pāra˚, majjha˚, samīpa˚, hattha˚. It also appears as ˚gu, e. g. in addha˚, anta˚, paṭṭha˚, pāra˚, veda˚. -- dugga (m. & nt.) a difficult road Dh 327 = Miln 379; Pv ii.78 (=duggamana -- ṭṭhāna PvA 102); ii.925; J ii.385. Gagana
Gagana
(nt.) the sky (with reference to sidereal motions); usually of the moon: g˚ majjhe puṇṇacando viya J i.149, 212; g˚ tale canda -- maṇḍalaŋ J iii.365; cando g˚ majjhe ṭhito J v.137; cando gagane viya sobhati Vism 58; g˚ tale candaŋ viya DhA i.372; g˚ tale puṇṇacanda "the full -- moon in the expanse of the heavens" VvA 3; g˚ talamagga the (moon's) course in the sky PvA 188; etc. Of the sun: suriyo ākāse antalikkhe gaganapathe gacchati Nd2 on Sn 1097. Unspecified: J i.57; Vism 176 (˚tal -- âbhimukhaŋ). Gaggara
Gaggara
[Vedic gargara throat, whirlpool. *gṷer to sling down, to whirl, cp. Gr. ba/raqron, Lat. gurges, gurgulio, Ohg. querechela "kehle"] 1. roaring, only in f. gaggarī a blacksmith's bellows: kammāra˚, in simile M i.243; S i.106; Vism 287. -- 2. (nt.) cackling, cawing, in haŋsa˚ the sound of geese J v.96 (expl. by haŋsamadhurassara). Gaggarā as N. of a lake at Vism 208. -- See note on gala. Gaggaraka
Gaggaraka
[fr. gaggara] a whirlpool, eddy J v.405; according to Kern Toev. s. v. a sort of fish (Sk. gargaraka, Pimelodus Gagora); as gaggalaka at Miln 197. Gaggarāyati
Gaggarāyati
[v. den. fr. prec.; cp. gurgulio: gurges, E. gargle & gurgle] to whirl, roar, bellow, of the waves of the Gangā Miln 3. -- cp. gaḷagaḷāyati. Gaccha
Gaccha
[not = Sk. kaccha, grass -- land, as Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 16. The passage J iii.287 stands with gaccha, v. l. kaccha for gaccha at A iv.74; g˚ for k˚ at Sn 20] a shrub, a bush, usually together with latā, creeper & rukkha, tree, e. g. Nd2 235, id; J i.73; Miln 268; Vism 182 (described on p. 183). With dāya, wood A iv.74. puppha˚ a flowering shrub J i.120; khuddaka˚ -- vana a wood of small shrubs J v.37. -- PvA 274; VvA 301 ( -- gumba, brushwood, underwood); DhA i.171 ( -- pothana -- ṭṭhāna); iv.78 ( -- mūla). -- 240 -- Gacchati
Gacchati
[Vedic gacchati, a desiderative (future) formation from *gṷem "I am intent upon going," i. e. I go, with the foll. bases. -- (1) Future -- present *gṷemskéti> *gaścati>Sk. gacchati = Gr. ba/skw (to bainw). In meaning cp. i, Sk. emi, Gr. ei)=mi "I shall go" & in form also Sk. pṛcchati=Lat. porsco "I want to know," Vedic icchati "to desire." -- (2) Present *gṷemi̯o=Sk. gamati=Gr. bai/nw, Lat. venio, Goth. qiman, Ohg. koman, E. come; and non -- present formations as Osk. kúmbened, Sk. gata=Lat. ventus; gantu=(ad) ventus. -- (3) *gṷā, which is correlated to *stā, in Pret. Sk. ágām, Gr. e)/bhn, cp. bh_ma]. These three formations are represented in Pāli as follows (1) gacch˚, in pres. gacchati; imper. gaccha & gacchāhi; pot. gacche (Dh 46, 224) & gaccheyya; p.pres. gacchanto, med. gacchamāna; fut (2nd) gacchissati; aor. agacchi (VvA 307; v. l. agañchi). -- (2) gam˚ in three variations; viz. (a) gam˚, in pres. caus. gameti; fut. gamissati; aor. 3 sg. agamā (Sn 408, 976; Vv 797; Mhvs vii.9), agamāsi & gami (Pv ii.86) 1. pl. agamiŋhase (Pv ii.310), pl. agamuŋ (Sn 290), agamaŋsu & gamiŋsu; prohib. mā gami; ger. gamya (J v.31); grd. gamanīya (KhA 223). See also der. gama, gamana, gāmika, gāmin. -- (b) gan˚, in aor. agañchi (on this form see Trenckner, Notes, p. 71 sq. -- In n'āgañchi J iii.190 it belongs to ā+gam); pres. -- aor gañchisi (Sn 665); inf. gantuŋ; ger. gantvā; grd. gantabba. See also der. gantar. -> (c) ga˚, in pp. gata. See also ga, gati, gatta. -- 3. gā˚, in pret. agā (Pv ii.322), 3rd pl. aor. agū (=Sk. ˚uḥ), in ajjhagū, anvagū (q. v.).

Meanings and Use: 1. to go, to be in motion, to move, to go on (opp. to stand still, tiṭṭhati). Freq. in combn with tiṭṭhati nisīdati seyyaŋ kappeti "to go, to stand, sit down & lie down," to denote all positions and every kind of behaviour; Nd2 s. v. gacchati. -> evaŋ kāle gacchante, as time went on J iii.52, or evaŋ g˚ kāle (PvA 54, 75) or gacchante gacchante kāle DhA i.319; gacchati = paleti PvA 56; vemakoṭi gantvā pahari (whilst moving) DhA iii.176. -- 2. to go, to walk (opp. to run, dhāvati) DhA i.389. -- 3. to go away, to go out, to go forth (opp. to stay, or to come, āgacchati): agamāsi he went Pv ii.86; yo maŋ icchati anvetu yo vā n' icchati gacchatu "who wants me may come, who does not may go" Sn 564; āgacchantānañ ca gacchantānañ ca pamāṇaŋ n' atthi "there was no end of all who came & went" J ii.133; gacchāma "let us go" J i.263; gaccha dāni go away now! J ii.160; gaccha re muṇḍaka Vism 343; gacchāhi go then! J i.151, 222; mā gami do not go away! J iv.2; pl. mā gamittha J i.263; gacchanto on his way J i.255, 278; agamaŋsu they went away J iv.3; gantukāma anxious to go J i.222, 292; kattha gamissasi where are you going? (opp. agacchasi) DhA iii.173; kahaŋ gacchissatha id. J ii.128; kuhiŋ gamissati where is he going? Sn 411, 412. -- 4. with acc. or substitute: to go to, to have access to, to arrive or get at (with the aim of the movement or the object of the intention); hence fig. to come to know, to experience, to realize. -- (a) with acc. of direction: Rājagahaŋ gami he went to R. Pv ii.86; Devadaha -- nagaraŋ gantuŋ J i.52; gacchām' ahaŋ Kusināraŋ I shall go to K. D ii.128; Suvaṇṇabhūmiŋ gacchanti they intended to go ("were going") to S. J iii.188; migavaŋ g. to go hunting J i.149; janapadaŋ gamissāma J ii.129; paradāraŋ g. to approach another man's wife Dh 246. -- (b) with adverbs of direction or purpose (atthāya): santikaŋ (or santike) gacchati to go near a person (in gen.), pitu s. gacchāma DhA iii.172; devāna santike gacche Dh 224 santikaŋ also J i.152: ii.159, etc. Kathaŋ tattha gamissāmi how shall I get there? J i.159; ii.159; tattha agamāsi he went there J ii.160. dukkhānubhavanatthāya gacchamānā "going away for the purpose of undergoing suffering" J iv.3; vohāratthāya gacchāmi I am going out (=fut.) on business J ii.133. -- Similarly (fig.) in foll. expressions (op. "to go to Heaven," etc.=to live or experience a heavenly life, op. next); Nirayaŋ gamissati J vi.368; saggaŋ lokaŋ g. J i.152; gacche pāram apārato Sn 1129, in this sense interpreted at Nd2 223 as adhigacchati phusati sacchikaroti, to experience. -- Sometimes with double acc.: Bhagavantaŋ saraṇaŋ gacchāmi "I entrust myself to Bh." Vin i.16. -- Cp. also phrases as atthangacchati to go home, to set, to disappear; antarā -- gacchati to come between, to obstruct. -- 5. to go as a stronger expression for to be, i. e. to behave, to have existence, to fare (cp. Ger. es geht gut, Fr. cela va bien=it is good). Here belongs gati "existence," as mode of existing, element, sphere of being, and out of this use is developed the periphrastic use of gam˚, which places it on the same level with the verb "to be" (see b). -- (a) sugatiŋ gamissasi you will go to the state of well -- being, i. e. Heaven Vin ii.195; It 77; opp. duggatiŋ gacchanti Dh 317 -- 319; maggaŋ na jānanti yena gacchanti subbatā (which will fall to their share) Sn 441; gamissanti yattha gantvā na socare "they will go where one sorrows not" Sn 445; Vv 514; yan ca karoti . . . tañ ca ādāya gacchati "whatever a man does that he will take with him" S i.93. -- (b) periphrastic (w. ger. of governing verb): nagaraŋ pattharitvā gaccheyya "would spread through the town" J i.62; pariṇāmaŋ gaccheyya "could be digested" D ii.127; sīhacammaŋ ādāya agamaŋsu "they took the lion's skin away with them" J ii.110; itthiŋ pahāya gamissati shall leave the woman alone J vi.348; sve gahetvā gamissāmi "I shall come for it tomorrow" Miln 48. Gaja
Gaja
[Sk. gaja] an elephant J iv.494; Miln 2, 346; DhsA 295 (appld to a kind of thought).

-- potaka the young of an elephant PvA 152; -- rājā the king of the elephants Miln 346. Gajaka
Gajaka
= gaja, in gajakattharaṇa an elephant's cover VvA 104. Gajjati
Gajjati
[Sk. garjati, cp. gargara & jarā roaring, cp. uggaj- jati Dhtp 76: gajja sadde] to roar, to thunder, usually of clouds. Of the earth: Dāvs v.29; of a man (using harsh speech) J i.226; ii.412 (mā gajji); Nd1 172 ( = abhi˚); J iv.25. -- Caus. gajjayati, ger. gajjayitvā (megho g˚ thanayitvā (megho g˚ thanayitvā pavassati) It 66. Gajjitar
Gajjitar
[n. agent fr. prec.] one who thunders, of a man in comparison with a cloud A ii.102 = Pug 42. Gaṇa
Gaṇa
[Vedic gaṇa; *ger to comprise, hold, or come together, cp. Gr. a)gei/rw to collect, a)gora/ meeting, Lat. grex, flock, Sk. jarante "conveniunt" (see Wackernagel, Altind. Gr. i.193). Another form of this root is grem in Sk. grāma, Lat. gremium; see under gāma] -- 1. (a) in special sense: a meeting or a chapter of (two or three) bhikkhus, a company (opposed both to sangha, the order & puggala, the individual) Vin i.58, 74, 195, 197; ii.170, 171; iv.130, 216, 226, 231, 283, 310, 316, 317; v.123, 167. -- (b) in general: a crowd, a multitude, a great many. See cpds. -- 2. as -- ˚: a collection of, viz., of gods, men, animals or things; a multitude, mass; flock, herd; host, group, cluster. -- (a) deva˚ J i.203; DhA iii.441; PvA 140 (˚parivuta); pisāca˚ S i.33; tidasa˚ Sn 679. -- (b) amacca˚ suite of ministers J i.264; ariya˚ troup of worthies J vi.50; naranarī˚ crowds of men & women Miln 2; dāsi˚ a crowd of servants J ii.127; tāpasa˚ a group of ascetics J i.140 (˚parivuta); bhikkhu˚ J i.212 (˚parivuta). -- (c) dvija˚ J i.152; dija˚ Pv ii.124; sakuṇa˚, of birds J i.207; ii.352; go˚, of cows A i.229; v.347, 359; J ii.128; kākola˚, of ravens Sn 675; bhamarā˚, of bees J i.52; miga˚ of beasts J i.150. -- (d) taru˚ a cluster of trees PvA 154; tāra˚, a host of stars A i.215; Pv ii.967; with ref. to the books of the Canon: Suttantika˚ & Ābhidhammika˚ Vism 93.

-- âcariya "a teacher of a crowd," i. e. a t. who has (many) followers. Always in phrase sanghī ca gaṇī ca ganācariyo ca, and always with ref. either to Gotama: D i.116; M ii.3; or to the 6 chief sectarian leaders, as Pūraṇa Kassapa, etc.: D i.47, 163; S i.68; iv.398; M i.198, 227, 233; ii.2; Sn p. 91; cp. DA i.143. In general: Miln 4. -- ārāma (adj.) & -- ārāmatā in phrase gaṇārāmo gaṇarato gaṇārāmataŋ anuyutto: a lover of the crowd A iii.422 sq.; M iii.110 = Nd2 on Sn 54. -- gaṇin the leader of many, Ep. of Bhagavā Nd2 307. -- (ŋ)gaṇupāhanā (pl.) shoes with many linings Vin i.185, 187; cp. Vin. Texts ii.14. See also Bdhgh. on aṭaliyo (q. v. under aṭala). -- pūraka (adj.) one who completes the quorum (of a bhikkhus chapter) Vin i.143 sq.; -- bandhana in ˚ena dānaŋ datvā to give by co -- operation, to give jointly DhA ii.160; -- bhojana food prepared as a joint meal Vin ii.196; iv. 71; v.128, 135, 205; -- magga in ˚ena gaṇetuŋ to count by way of batches Vin i.117; -- vassika (adj.) through a great many years Sn 279; -- sanganika (adj.) coming into contact with one another DhA i.162. -- 241 -- Gaṇaka
Gaṇaka
[fr. gaṇ, to comprise in the sense of to count up] a counter, one skilled in counting familiar with arithmetic; an accountant, overseer or calculator. Enumd as an occupation together with muddika at D i.51 (expl. DA i.157 by acchidda -- pāṭhaka); also with muddika and sankhāyika S iv.376; as an office at the king's court (together with amaccā as gaṇaka -- mahāmatta = a ministerial treasurer) D iii.64, and in same context D iii.148, 153, 169, 171, 177; as overseer Vin iii.43; as accountant Miln 79, 293; VvA 66. Gaṇakī
Gaṇakī
(f.) = gaṇikā Vin iii.135 -- 136, in purāṇa˚ a woman who was formerly a courtesan, & as adj. gaṇakī -- dhītā the daughter of a courtesan. Gaṇanā
Gaṇanā
(f.) counting, i. e. 1. counting up, arithmetic, number J i.29; Vism 278 sq.; Miln 79; VvA 194. -> 2. counting, census, statistics; Tikap. 94; J i.35; Miln 4 (senā ˚ŋ kāretvā); DhA i.11, 34. -- 3. the art of counting, arithmetics as a study & a profession, forbidden to the bhikkhus Vin i.77 = iv.129 (˚ŋ sikkhati to study ar.); D i.11 (expl. DA i.95 by acchiddaka -- gaṇanā); M i.85; iii.1 (˚ājīva); DA i.157. -- gaṇana -- patha (time -- ) reckoning, period of time Miln 20, 116. Gaṇikā
Gaṇikā1
(f.) "one who belongs to the crowd," a harlot, a courtesan (cp. gaṇakī) Vin i.231 (Ambapālī) 268, (do.); ii.277 (Aḍḍhakāsī); Ud 71; Miln 122; DhA iii.104; VvA 75 (Sirimā); PvA 195, 199. -- Customs of a gaṇikā J iv.249; v.134. -- Cp. saŋ˚. Gaṇikā
Gaṇikā2
(f.) = gaṇanā, arithmetic Miln 3. Gaṇin
Gaṇin1
(adj.) one who has a host of followers, Ep. of a teacher who has a large attendance of disciples; usually in standing combn sanghī gaṇī gaṇācariyo (see above). Also in foll.: Sn 955, 957; Dpvs iv.8 (mahāgaṇī), 14 (therā gaṇī); gaṇī -- bhūtā (pl.) in crowds, combd with sanghā sanghī D i.112, expld at DA i.280: pubbe nagarassa anto agaṇā bahi nikkhamitvā gaṇa -- sainpannā ti. See also paccekagaṇin. Gaṇin
Gaṇin2
a large species of deer J v.406 ( = gokaṇṇa). Gaṇeti
Gaṇeti
[denom. to gaṇa Dhtp 574: sankhyāne] 1. to count, to reckon, to do sums Dh 19; J vi.334; Miln 79, 293; pp. gaṇita Sn 677; pass. gaṇīyati Sdhp 434; inf. (vedic) gaṇetuye Bw. iv.28; caus. gaṇāpeti M iii.1. -- 2. to regard, to take notice of, to consider, to care for J i.300; iv.267. Gaṇṭhi
Gaṇṭhi
(m.) [Vedic granthi, to grem to comprise, hold to- gether, cp. Lat. gremium, Sk. gaṇa & grāma, see also gantha] 1. a knot, a tie, a knot or joint in a stalk (of a plant) J i.172; DA i.163; DhA i.321 (˚jātaŋ what has be come knotty or hard); -- diṭṭhi -- gaṇṭhi the tangle of false doctrine VvA 297; anta -- gaṇṭh -- ābādha entanglement of intestines Vin i.275. -- 2. a (wooden) block Vin ii.110 (of sandal wood).

-- ṭṭhāna (for gaṇṭhikaṭṭhāna?) the place of the block (i. e. of execution) J iii.538; (reads gaṇṭhi -- gaṇṭi -- ṭṭhāna); Vism 248. -- bhedaka, in ˚cora "the thief who breaks the block" (or rope, knot?) DhA ii.30. Gaṇṭhikā
Gaṇṭhikā
(f.) (freq. spelled gaṇḍikā, q. v.) = gaṇṭhi, viz. 1. a knot, a tie DA i.199 (catu -- pañca -- gaṇṭhik'āhata patta a bowl with 4 or 5 knots, similarly āṇi -- gaṇṭhik'-> āhata ayopatta Vism 108; but see āṇi); DhA i.335 (˚jāta= gaṇṭhijāta knotty part), 394. -- 2. a block (or is it knot?) Vin ii.136 (? +pāsaka; cp. Vin. Texts iii.144); v.140. Esp. in phrase gaṇṭhikaŋ paṭimuñcitvā Vin i.46= ii.213, 215, trsld at Vin. Texts iii.286 "fasten the block on (to the robe)" but at i.155 "tie the knots." Also in dhamma -- gaṇṭhikā a block for execution J i.150 (v. l. gaṇḍikā). -- 3. N. of a plant PvA 127. -- ucchugaṇṭhikā sugar cane: see ucchu.

-- kāsāva a yellow robe which was to be tied (or which had a block?) J iv.446. Gaṇḍa
Gaṇḍa
[a variation of gaṇṭha ( -- i), in both meanings of (1) swelling, knot, protuberance, and (2) the interstice between two knots or the whole of the knotty object, i. e. stem, stalk] -- 1. a swelling, esp. as a disease, an abscess, a boil. Freq. in similes with ref. to kāma and kāya. Mentioned with similar cutaneous diseases under kilāsa (q. v. for loci). As Ep. of kāya S iv.83 = A iv.386, of kāmā A iii.310, iv.289; Nd2 on Sn 51; also Th 2, 491 (= dukkhatā sūlaya ThA 288); S iv.64 (=ejā); Sn 51, 61 (v. l. for gaḷa); J i.293; Vism 360 (˚pilakā); DhA iii.297 (gaṇḍ -- ā -- gaṇḍajāta, covered with all kinds of boils); iv.175; PvA 55. Cp. Av. S ii.1681. -- 2. a stalk, a shaft, in N. of a plant -- ˚tindu -- rukkha J v.99, and in der. gaṇḍikā & gaṇḍī, cp. also Av. S ii.13312. -> 3.=gaṇḍuppāda in cpd. gaṇḍamattikā clay mixed with earth -- worms Vin ii.151 (cp. Bdhgh. gaṇḍuppādagūtha -- mattikā clay mixed with excrement of earthworms Vin. Texts iii.172).

-- uppāda (lit. producing upheavals, cp. a mole) an earth -- worm, classed as a very low creature with kīṭā & puḷavā at M iii.168; J v.210 (˚pāṇa); DhA iii.361 (˚yoni); SnA 317. Gaṇḍaka
Gaṇḍaka
(adj.) having boils Sdhp 103. Gaṇḍamba
Gaṇḍamba
N. of the tree, under which Gotama Buddha performed the double miracle; with ref. to this freq. in phrase gaṇḍamba -- rukkha -- mūle yamakapāṭihāriyaŋ katvā J i.77; iv.263 sq.; DA i.57; PvA 137; Miln 349; Dāvs v.54. Also at DhA iii.207 in play of words with amba -- rukkha. Gaṇḍikā
Gaṇḍikā
(f.) [a -- n. formation from gaṇḍa or gaṇṭha, see also gaṇṭhikā] -- 1. a stalk, a shaft (cp. gaṇḍī) J i.474; DhsA 319 (of the branches of trees: g˚ -- ākoṭana -- sadda). -- 2. a lump, a block of wood (more freq. spelling gaṇṭhikā, q. v.). -- 3. N. of a plant Vv 354 ( = bandhujīvaka VvA 161).

-- âdhāna the putting on of a shaft or stem, as a bolt or bar Vin ii.172; cp. Vin. Texts iii.213 and gaṇḍī; also ghaṭikā2. Gaṇḍin
Gaṇḍin
[adj. fr. gaṇḍa] -- 1. having swellings, in ure gaṇḍī (f.) with swellings on the chest, i. e. breasts J v.159, 202 (thane sandhāyâha 205). -- 2. having boils, being afflicted with a glandular disease (with kuṭṭhin & kilāsin) Kvu 31. Gaṇḍī
Gaṇḍī
(f.) [ = gaṇḍikā in meaning 1; prob.=Sk. ghaṇṭā in meaning 2] -- 1. a shaft or stalk, used as a bar J i.237. -- 2. a gong DhA i.291 (gaṇḍiŋ paharati to beat the g.); ii.54, 244; gaṇḍiŋ ākoṭetvā KhA 251. Cp. AvS i.258, 264, 272; ii.87, 95 & Divy 335, 336. Also in gaṇḍisaññā "sign with the gong" J iv.306. -- 3. the executioner's block (=gaṇḍikā or gaṇṭhikā) J iii.41. Gaṇḍusa
Gaṇḍusa
[cp. Sk. gaṇḍūṣa] a mouthful J i.249 (khīra˚). -- 242 -- Gaṇhati & Gaṇhāti
Gaṇhati
& Gaṇhāti [Vedic grah (grabh), gṛhṇāti pp. gṛhīta to grasp. *gher to hold, hold in, contain; cp. Gr. xo/rtos enclosure, Lat. hortus, co -- hors (homestead); Goth. gards (house); Ohg. gart; E. yard & garden. To this belong Vedic gṛha (house) in P. gaha˚, gihin, geha, ghara, & also Vedic harati to seize, hasta hand]. The forms of the verb are from three bases, viz. (1) gaṇha- (Sk. gṛhṇā -- ); Pres.: ind. gaṇhāti (gaṇhāsi PvA 87), pot. gaṇheyya, imper. gaṇha (J i.159; PvA 49 = handa) & gaṇhāhi (J i.279). Fut. gaṇhissati; Aor. gaṇhi. Inf. gaṇhituŋ (J iii.281). Ger. gaṇhitvā. Caus. ganhāpeti & gāhāpeti. -- 2. gahe -- (Sk. gṛhī -- ): Fut. gahessati. Aor. aggahesi (Sn 847; J i.52). Inf. gahetuŋ (J i.190, 222). Ger. gahetvā & gahetvāna (poet.) (Sn 309; Pv ii.3). -- 3. gah -- (Sk. gṛh -- ): Aor. aggahi. Ger. gayha & gahāya (Sn 791). Pass. gayhati. Pp. gahita & gahīta. Cp. gaha, gahaṇa, gāha.

Meanings: to take, take up; take hold of; grasp, seize; assume; e. g. ovādaŋ g. to take advice J i.159; khaggaŋ to seize the sword J i.254 -- 255; gocaraŋ to take food J iii.275; jane to seize people J i.253; dhanaŋ to grasp the treasure J i.255; nagaraŋ to occupy the city J i.202; pāde gāḷhaŋ gahetvā holding her feet tight J i.255; macche to catch fish J iii.52; mantaŋ to use a charm J iii.280; rajjaŋ to seize the kingdom J i.263; ii.102; sākhaŋ to take hold of a branch Sn 791; J i.52. Very often as a phrase to be translated by a single word, as: nāmato g. to enumerate PvA 18; paṭisandhiŋ g. to be born J i.149; maraṇaŋ g. to die J i.151; mūlena g. to buy J iii.126; vacanaŋ g. to obey J iii.276 (in neg.). The ger. gahetvā is very often simply to be translated as "with," e. g. tidaṇḍaŋ gahetvā caranto J ii.317; satta bhikkhū gahetvā agamāsi VvA 149.

Caus. gaṇhāpeti to cause to be seized, to procure, to have taken: phalāni J ii.105; rājānaŋ J i.264. Cp. gāhāpeti. Gata
Gata
[pp. of gacchati in medio -- reflexive function] gone, in all meanings of gacchati (q. v.) viz. 1. literal: gone away, arrived at, directed to (c. acc.), opp. ṭhita: gate ṭhite nisinne (loc. abs.) when going, standing, sitting down (cp. gacchati 1) D i.70; opp. āgata: yassa maggaŋ na jānāsi āgatassa gatassa vā Sn 582 (cp. gati 2). Also periphrastic ( = gacchati 5 b): aṭṭhi paritvā gataŋ "the bone fell down" J iii.26. Very often gata stands in the sense of a finite verb (=aor. gacchi or agamāsi): yo ca Buddhaŋ . . . saraṇaŋ gato (cp. gacchati 4) Dh 190; attano vasanaṭṭhānaŋ gato he went to his domicile J i.280; ii.160; nāvā Aggimālaŋ gatā the ship went to Aggimālā J iv.139. -> 2. in applied meaning: gone in a certain way, i. e. affected, behaved, fared, fated, being in or having come into a state or condition. So in sugata & duggata (see below) and as 2nd part of cpds. in gen., viz. gone; atthaŋ˚ gone home, set; addha˚ done with the journey (cp. gat -- addhin); gone into: taṇhā˚ fallen a victim to thirst, tama˚ obscured, raho˚, secluded, vyasana˚ fallen into misery; having reached: anta˚ arrived at the goal (in this sense often combd with patta: antagata antapatta Nd2, 436, 612), koṭi˚ perfected, parinibbāna˚ having ceased to exist. vijjā˚ having attained (right) knowledge; connected with, referring to, concerning: kāya˚ relating to the body (kāyagatā sati, e. g. Vism 111, 197, 240 sq.); diṭṭhi˚ being of a (wrong) view; sankhāra˚, etc. -- Sometimes gata is replaced by kata and vice versa: anabhāvaŋkata>anabhāvaŋ gacchati; kālagata> kālakata (q. v.).

agata not gone to, not frequented: ˚ŋ disaŋ (of Nibbāna) Dh 323; purisantaraŋ ˚ŋ mātugāmaŋ "a maid who has not been with a man" J i.290.

sugata of happy, blessed existence, fortunate; one who has attained the realm of bliss ( = sugatiŋ gata, see gati), blessed. As np. a common Ep. of the Buddha: Vin i.35; iii.1; D i.49; S i.192; A ii.147 et passim (see Sugata). -- D i.83; Sn 227 (see expl. KhA 183).

duggata of miserable existence, poor, unhappy, ill-fated, gone to the realm of miscry (duggatiŋ gata PvA 33, see gati) Pv i.62; ii.317; duggata -- bhāva (poverty) J vi.366; duggat -- itthi (miserable, poor) J i.290; parama -- duggatāni kulāni clans in utmost misery (poverty) PvA 176. -- Compar. duggatatara DhA i.427; ii.135.

-- atta (fr. attā) self -- perfected, perfect D i.57 (expl. by koṭippatta -- citto DA i.168); cp. paramāya satiyā ca gatiyā ca dhitiyā ca samannāgata M i.82; -- addhin (adj. of addhan) one who has completed his journey (cp. addhagata) Dh 90; -- kāle (in gata -- gata -- kāle) whenever he went J iii.188; -- ṭṭhāna place of existence PvA 38; = gamana in āgata -- ṭṭhānaŋ vā: coming and going (lit. state of going) J iii.188; -- yobbana (adj.) past youth, of old age A i.138; Sn 98=124. Gataka
Gataka
a messenger J i.86. Gatatta
Gatatta
1. = Sk. gat -- ātman (see prec.). -- 2.=Sk. gatatvaŋ the fact of having gone KhA 183. Gati
Gati
(f.) [fr. gacchati; cp. Gr. ba/sis, Lat. (in -- ) ventio, Goth. (ga -- ) qumps] 1. going, going away, (opp. āgati coming) (both gati & āgati usually in pregnant sense of No. 2. See āgati); direction, course, career. Freq. of the two careers of a Mahāpurisa (viz. either a Cakkavatti or a Buddha) D ii.16 = Sn p. 106; Sn 1001, or of a gihī arahattaŋ patto Miln 264, with ref. to the distinction of the child Gotama J i.56. -- phassâyatanānaŋ gati (course or direction) A ii.161; jagato gati (id.) A ii.15, 17; sakuntānaŋ g. the course, flight of birds Dh 92=Th 1, 92. -- Opp. āgati Pv ii.922. -- tassā gatiŋ jānāti "he knows her going away, i. e. where she has gone" PvA 6. -- 2. going away, passing on (=cuti, opp. upapatti coming into another existence); course, esp after death, destiny, as regards another (future) existence A i.112; D ii.91; M i.388 (tassa kā gati ko abhisamparāyo? what is his rebirth and what his destiny?); in combn āgati vā gati vā (=cutûpapatti), rebirth & death M i.328, 334. In defn of saŋsāra expld as gati bhavâbhava cuti upapatti=one existence after the other Nd2 664; as gati upapatti paṭisandhi Nd2 on dhātu (also as puna -- gati rebirth). -- The Arahant as being beyond Saŋsāra is also beyond gati: yassa gatiŋ na jānanti devā gandhabba -- mānusā Dh 420=Sn 644; yesaŋ gati n' atthi Sn 499; and Nibbāna coincides with release from the gatis: gativippamokkhaŋ parinibbānaŋ SnA 368. -- attā hi attano gati "everybody is (the maker of) his own future life" Dh 380; esā maccharino gati "this is the fate of the selfish" Pv iii.114; sabbagatī te ijjhantu "all fate be a success to you" J v.393; gato so tassa yā gati "he has gone where he had to go (after death)" Pv i.122. -> 3. behaviour, state or condition of life, sphere of existence, element, especially characterized as sugati & duggati, a happy or an unhappy existence. gati migānaŋ pavanaŋ, ākāso pakkhīnaŋ gati, vibhavo gati dhammānaŋ, nibbānaŋ arahato gati: the wood is the sphere of the beasts, the air of the birds, decay is the state of (all) things, Nibbāna the sphere of the Arahant Vin v.149=SnA 346; apuññalābho ca gatī ca pāpikā Dh 310; duggati J i.28; avijjāy' eva gati the quality of ignorance Sn 729; paramāya gatiyā samannāgato of perfect behaviour M i.82; see also defn at Vism 237. -> 4. one of the five realms of existence of sentient beings (=loka), divided into the two categories of sugati (=Sagga, realm of bliss) & duggati (=Yamaloka, apāya, realm of misery). These gatis are given in the foll. order: (1) niraya purgatory, (2) tiracchānayoni the brute oreation, (3) pittivisaya the ghost world, (4) manussā (m -- loka) human beings, (5) devā gods: M i.73; D iii.234; A iv.459; Nd2 550; cp. S v.474 -- 77; Vism 552. They are described in detail in the Pañcagatidīpana (ed. L. Feer, J.P.T.S. 1884, 152 sq.; trsl. by the same in Annales du Musée Guimet v. 514 -- 528) under Naraka -- kaṇḍa, Tiracchāna˚, Peta˚, Manussa˚, Deva˚. Of these Nos. 1 -- 3 are considered duggatis, whilst Nos. 4 and 5 are sugati. In later sources we find 6 divisions, viz. 1 -- 3 as above, (4) asurā, (5) manussā, (6) devā, of which 1 -- 4 are comprised under apāyā (conditions of suffering, q. v.) or duggatiyo (see Pv iv.11, cp. PvA 103). These six also at D iii.264. -- lokassa gatiŋ pajānāti Bhagavā Sn 377 (gati=nirayādipañcappabhedaŋ SnA 368). The first two gatis are said to be the fate of the micchādiṭṭhino D i.228, dve niṭṭhā DA i.249 (q. v. for var. appl. of gati) as well as the dussīlā (A i.60), whilst the last two are the share of the sīlavanto (A. i.60).

-- gata gone its course (of a legal enquiry, vinicchaya) Vin ii.85 (cp. Vin Texts iii.26); J ii.1.

agati 1. no course, no access, in agati tava tattha: there you have no access S i.115. -- 2. = duggati, a wrong course. agatigamana a wrong course of life D iii.133; A i.72; ii.18 sq.; iii.274 sq.; J v.510; PvA 161. Technically the four agati -- gamanāni are: chanda˚ dosa˚ moha˚ bhaya˚ D iii.228 (see also under chanda).

sugati (sometimes suggati after duggati e. g. J vi.224) a happy existence; a realm of bliss; the devaloka. Cp. sugatin. Usually with gacchati (sugatiŋ) & gata "gone to Heaven" Vin ii.195; D ii.202; It 77; PvA 65. In combn w. sagga loka (sugatiŋ, etc. uppajjati) D i.143; A i.97; J i.152. parammaraṇā sugati pāṭikankhā It 24; suggatiŋ gata Dh 18; sugati pāpehi kammehi sulabhā na hoti "bliss is not gained by evil" PvA 87; = sugga & dibbaṭṭhāna PvA 89; sugati -- parāyana sure of rebirth in a realm of bliss, ib.

duggati a miserable existence; a realm of misery (see above gati 4). Usually with gacchati (duggatiŋ gata, reborn in a miserable state) or uppajjati D i.82; A i.97, 138 (+vinipātaŋ nirayaŋ); ii.123; iii.3; iv.364; Dh 17; Sn 141; SnA 192 ( = dukkhappatti); PvA 87. Sakakammāni nayanti duggatiŋ, one's own deeds lead to rebirth in misery, Dh 240; with ref. to a Peta existence: Pv i.62; ii.16; 113; 317. Cp. duggata. -- 243 -- Gatika
Gatika
(adj.) 1. going to, staying with, in bhikkhu˚ a person living with the bhikkhus Vin i.148. -- 2. leading to: yaŋ˚ what they lead to (of the 5 indriyas) S v.230. -- 3. having a certain gati, leading to one of the four kinds of rebirth: evaŋ˚ D i.16 (w. ref. to one of the first 3 gatis: DA i.108); niyata˚ whose destiny is certain (w. ref. to sugati) and aniyata˚ whose destiny is uncertain (w. ref. to a duggati) DhA iii.173. Gatin
Gatin
(adj. = gatika) 1. going, i. e. having a certain course: sabbā nadī vankagatī "every river flows crooked" J i.289. -- 2. having a certain gati, fated, destined, esp. in su˚ & dug˚: samparāye suggatī going to a happy existence after death Vin ii.162=J i.219; saggaŋ sugatino yanti "those who have a happy fate (because of leading a good life) go to one of the Heavens" Dh 126. Gatimant
Gatimant
(adj.) of (perfect) behaviour, going right, clever (cp. gatatta under gata, & gati 3) M i.82. Gatta
Gatta
(nt.) [Vedic gātra] the body, pl. gattāni the limbs. - As body: Vin i.47; S i.169 = 183 (analla˚ with pure bodies; anallīna˚ at 169, but v. l. analla˚); A i.138; Sn 673 (samacchida˚ with bodies cut up); Pv i.112 (bhinna -- pabhinna˚, id.); PvA 56 (=sarīra); 68. -- As limbs: S iv.198 (arupakkāni festering with sores); M i.506 (id.); M i.80=246; J i.61 (lālākilinna˚); Sn 1001 (honti gattesu mahāpurisalakkhaṇā), 1017, 1019; Pv iii.91 (=sarīrâvayavā PvA 211); Miln 357 (arupakkāni). Gathita
Gathita
(adj.) [pp. of ganthati to tie, cp. gantha, knot; Sk. grathita] tied, bound, fettered; enslaved, bound to, greedy for, intoxicated with (c. loc.). When abs. always in combn w. paribhuñjati and w. ref. to some object of desire (bhoga, lābha, kāmaguṇe). Usually in standing phrase gathita mucchita ajjhāpanna (ajjhopanna) "full of greed & blind desire." In this connection it is frequently (by B MSS.) spelt gadhita and the editors of S, A, & Miln have put that in the text throughout. With mucchita & ajjhāpanna: D i.245; iii.43; M i.162, 173; S ii.270; iv.332; A v.178, 181 Nd2 on nissita C. -- c. loc.: J iv.371 (gharesu); DA i.59 (kāmaguṇesu). In other connections: ādānaganthaŋ gathitaŋ visajja Sn 794 (cp. Nd1 98); yāni loke gathitāni na tesu pasuto siyā Sn 940. -- J iv.5 ( = giddha); v.274 (gedhita for pagiddha); PvA 262 (gadhita as expln of giddha) -- agathita (agadhita) not fettered (by desire) without desire, free from the ties of craving (+m˚, a˚) S ii.194, 269; A v.181; Miln 401 (trsl. Rh.D. ii.339: "without craving, without faintness, without sinking"). Gada
Gada
speech, sentence Dh i.66, DA i.66 f.; and on D iii.135 (§ 28); gada at S ii.230 (v. l.) in phrase diṭṭhagadena sallena is to be read diddhagadena s. Gaddula
Gaddula
(and gaddūla) a leather strap S iii.150; J ii.246; iii.204; fig, in taṇhā -- gaddūla "the leash of thirst," Nd2 on jappā (taṇhā) = Dhs 1059=Vbh 361, cp. DhsA 367. Gaddūhana
Gaddūhana
(nt.) [Derivation unknown; Sk. dadrūghna] a small measure of space & time M iii.127; S ii.264 (˚mattam pi, SA "pulling just once the cow's teat"); A iv.395; Miln 110. See Trenckner P.M. 59, 60; Rh. D. J.R.A.S. 1903, 375. Gaddha
Gaddha
[Vedic gṛdha; see gijjha] a vulture; in gaddha- bādhipubbo, of the bhikkhu Ariṭṭha, who had been a vulture trainer in a former life Vin ii.25 = iv.218= M i.130; see also Vin. Texts ii.377. Gadrabha
Gadrabha
[Vedic gardabha., Lat. burdo, a mule; see Walde Lat. Wtb., s. v.] an ass, donkey Vin v.129; M i.334; A i.229; J ii.109, 110; v.453; DA i.163. -- f. gadrabhī J ii.340.

-- bhāraka a donkey load J ii.109; DhA i.123; -- bhāva the fact of being an ass J ii.110; -- rava (& -- rāva) the braying of an ass ibid. & Vism 415. Gadhita
Gadhita
see gathita. Gantar
Gantar
[n. agent of gacchati in the sense of a periphrastic future] "goer" in gantā hoti he will go, he is in the habit of going, combd w. sotā hantā khantā, of the king's elephant A ii.116 = iii.161; v. l. for gatā at M ii.155. Gantha
Gantha
(in BB often misspelt gandha) [fr. ganthati] -- 1. a bond, fetter, trammel; always fig. and usually referring to and enumd as the four bodily ties, or knots (kāya˚, see under kāya): S v.59 = Dhs 1135; D iii.230; Nd1 98; DhA iii.276; 4 kāyaganthā, viz., abhijjhā, byāpāda, sīlabbataparāmasa, idaŋsaccâbhinivesa; thus Nd1 98; Vism 683. In other conn. Sn 347, 798, 847, 857, 912; Nd2 on jappā (taṇhā); Dh 211; Ps i.129; Dhs 1059, 1472; Vbh 18, 24, 55, 65, 77, 117, 120; Nett 31, 54, 114, 124 (gandha); Sdhp 616. -- chinna˚ (adj.) one who has cut the ties (of bad desires, binding him to the body). Combn w. anigha nirāsa S i.12 (˚gandha), 23; w. asita anāsava Sn 219. Cp. pahīnamānassa na santi ganthā S i.14. See also ādāna˚; cp. ganthaniya. -- 2. [only in late Pali, and in Sk.] composition, text, book (not with ref. to books as tied together, but to books as composed, put together. See gantheti 2).

-- dhura the burden of the books, i. e. of studying the Scriptures, expld as one who knows by heart one, two, or all Nikāyas. Always combd w. vipassanādhuraŋ, the burden of contemplation DhA i.8; iv.37; -- pamocana the state of being released from, freed from the fetters of the "body" always w. ref.to Nibbāna S i.210; A ii.24; It 104, cp. 122; -- pahīna (adj.) connected with or referring to the ganthas Dhs 1480; opp. vi˚ Dhs 1482. Ganthati & Gantheti
Ganthati
& Gantheti [Vedic grath, granth, grathnāti, to *grem, cp. Lat. gremium; see also gaṇṭhi gathita, gantha] 1. to tie, knot, bind, fasten together: kathaŋ mittāni ganthati "how does he bind friends" S i.214 = Sn 185; mālaŋ ganthamāna tying a garland Vv 381 (ganthento VvA 173). Of medicines: to mix, to prepare J iv.361. -- pp. ganthita tied, bound, fettered: catūhi ganthehi g˚ Ps i.129; -- grd. ganthaniya to be tied or tending to act as a tie (of "body"); expl. as ārammaṇa -- karaṇa -- vasena ganthehi ganthitabba DhsA 69; dhammā g˚ ā ("states that tend to be are liable to be ties" Buddh. Ps. p. 305; Expositor 64) Dhs 1141; 1478. In combn saññojaniya g˚ oghaniya (of rūpa) Dhs 584=Vbh 12; of rūpa -- kkhandha Vbh 65, of dasāyatanā ib. 77, dasindriyā ib. i.29, saccā g˚ and ag˚ (=gantha -- sampayutta & vippayuttā) ib. 117. -- 2. to put together, to compose: mante ganthetvā (v. l. gandhitvā) Sn 302, 306. -- 244 -- Ganthika
Ganthika
(adj.) [fr. gantha 2] hard -- studying DhA i.156 (bhikkhu; cp. gantha -- dhura). Gandha
Gandha
[Vedic gandha, from ghrā ghrāti to smell, ghrāna smell, & see P. ghāna. Possibly conn. w. Lat. fragro = E. fragrant] smell, viz. -- 1. odour, smell, scent in gen. J iii.189; Dh 54 -- 56=Miln 333; Dhs 605 under ghānâyatanāni); āma˚ smell of raw flesh A i.280; D ii.242; Sn 241 sq; maccha˚ the scent of fish J iii.52; muttakarīsa˚ the smell of faeces and urine A iii.158; catujāti˚ four kinds of scent J i.265; PvA 127; dibba -- g˚puppha a flower of heavenly odour J i.289. -- 2. odour, smell in particular: enumerated as mūla˚, sāra˚, puppha˚, etc., S iii.156=v.44=A v.22; Dhs 625 (under ghandāyatanāni, sphere of odours). Specified as māla˚, sāra˚, puppha˚ under tīṇi gandhajātāni A i.225; -- puppha˚ Dh 54=A i.226. -- 3. smell as olfactory sensation, belonging to the sphere (āyatanāni) of sense -- impressions and sensory objects & enum. in set of the 12 ajjhatta -- bāhirāni āyatanāni (see under rūpa) with ghānena gandhaŋ ghāyitvā "sensing smell by means of the olfactory organ" D iii.102; 244=250= 269=Nd2 on rūpa; M iii.55, 267; S iv.71; Vin i.35; Defined at Vism 447. Also as gandhā ghānaviññeyya under kāmaguṇā M ii.42; D iii.234, etc. In series of 10 attributes of physical quality ( -- rūpa, etc.) as characteristic of devas D iii.146; Pv ii.958; as sāra˚, pheggu˚, taca˚, etc. (nine qualities in all) in definition of Gandhabba -- kāyikā devā S iii.250 sq. -- In the same sense & similar connections: vaṇṇa -- g˚ -- ras'ûpeto Dh 49; J ii.106; gandhānaŋ khamo & akkhamo (of king's elephant) A iii.158 sq.; itthi˚, purisa˚ A i.1, 2; iii.68; in combn w. other four senses Sn 387, 759, 974. -> 4. perfume, prepared odorific substance used as a toilet requisite, either in form of an unguent or a powder. Abstinence from the use of kallaesthetics is stated in the Sīlas (D i.8) as characteristic of certain Wanderers and Brahmins. Here gandha is mentioned together with mālā (flowers, garlands): D i.5=Kh ii; D i.7 (˚kathā); Vin ii.123; Sn 401; J i.50, 291; PvA 62. The use of scented ointment ( -- vilepana & ālepa, see cpds.) is allowed to the Buddhist bhikkhus (Vin i.206); and the giving of this, together with other commodities, is included in the second part of the deyyadhamma (the list of meritorious gifts to the Sangha), under Nos. 5 -- 14 (anna -- pāna -- vattha -- yānamālā -- gandhā -- vilepana -- seyy -- âvasatha -- padīpeyya): S iii.252; Nd2 523=It 65. Out of this enumeration: g˚ -- m˚ -- v˚ -- Pv ii.316; chatta -- g˚ -- m˚ -- upāhanā Pv ii.49; ii.936; m˚ -- g˚ -- v˚ kappūra -- kaṭukapphalāni J ii.416. -> The application of scented ointment (gandhena or gandhehi vilimpati) is customary after a bath, e. g. PvA 50 (on Pv i.106); J i.254, 265; iii.277. Var. kinds of perfumes or scented substances are given as g˚dhūpa -- cuṇṇa -- kappūra (incense, powder, camphor) J i.290; vāsa -- cuṇṇa -- dhūpanādi g˚ KhA 37. See also cpds. -- 5. occurs as v. l. for gantha (book).

duggandha a disagreeable smell Dhs 625; ˚ŋ vāyati to emit a nasty odour PvA 14; as adj. having a bad smell, putrid Sn 205; PvA 15 ( = pūtigandha), f. -- ā: duggandhā pūti vāyasi "you emit a bad odour") Pv i.61 (=aniṭṭha˚). -- sugandha an agreeable smell Dhs 625; as adj. of pleasant smell J iii.277; Sdhp. 246.

-- āpaṇa a perfumery shop J i.290; ˚ika perfume seller Miln 344; -- āyatana an olfactory sense -- relation, belonging to the six bāhirāni āyatanāni, the objective sensations D iii.243, 290; Dhs 585, 625, 655; -- ārammaṇa bearing on smell, having smell as its object Dhs 147, 157, 365, 410, 556, 608; -- ālepa (nt.) anointing with perfumes Vin i.206; -- āsā "hunger for odours," craving for olfactory sensations Dhs 1059; -- odaka scented water J i.50; ii.106; iii.189; -- karaṇḍaka a perfume -- box S iii.131; v.351; Pug 34; -- kuṭī (f.) a perfumed cabin, name of a room or hut occupied by the Buddha, esp. that made for him by Anāthapiṇḍika in Jetavana (J i.92). Gotamassa g˚ J ii.416, cp. Av. Ś ii.401; DhA iv.203, 206; -- cuṇṇa scented (bath -- ) powder J iii.277; -- jāta (nt.) odour, perfume ("consisting of smell"). Three kinds at A i.225 (māla˚, sāra˚, puppha˚); enum. as candanādi DhA i.423; in defin. of gandha DA i.77; -- Dh 55; -- taṇhā thirst or craving for odours (cp. g˚ -- āsā) Dhs 1059 = Nd2 on jappā; -- tela scented oil (for a lamp) J i.61; ii.104; DhA i.205; -- tthena a perfume -- thief S i.204; -- dhātu the (sensory) element of smell Dhs 585; 625. 707 (in conn. w. ˚āyatana); -- pañcangulika see sep.; -- sañcetanā the olfactory sensation; together with ˚saññā perception of odours D iii.244; A iv.147; v.359; -- sannidhi the storing up of scented unguents D i.6 (=DA i.82). Gandhana
Gandhana
see gandhina. Gandhabba
Gandhabba
[Vedic gandharva] 1. a musician, a singer J ii.249 sq.; iii.188; VvA 36, 137. -- 2. a Gandharva or heavenly musician, as a class (see ˚kāyika) belonging to the demigods who inhabit the Cātummahārājika realm D ii.212; A ii.39 (as birds); iv.200 (with asurā & nāgā), 204, 207; cp. S iii.250 sq.; also said to preside over child -- conception: M i.265 sq.; Miln 123 sq.

-- kāyika belonging to the company of the G. S iii.250 sq.; PvA 119; -- mānusā (pl.) G. & men Dh 420 = Sn 644; -- hatthaka "a G. -- hand," i. e. a wooden instrument in the shape of a bird's claw with which the body was rubbed in bathing Vin ii.106, see Vin. Texts iii.67. Gandhabbā
Gandhabbā
(f.) music, song J ii.254; VvA 139; Miln 3; ˚ŋ karoti to make music J ii.249; iii.188. Gandhāra
Gandhāra
(adj.) belonging to the Gandhāra country (Kandahar) f. gandhārī in gandhārī vijjā N. of a magical charm D i.213; at J iv.498 it renders one invisible. Gandhika
Gandhika
(and ˚uja Pv ii.120; ii.121) -- 1. having perfume, fragrant, scentful, J i.266 (su˚); Pv ii.110 ( = surabhigandha); ii.121 (sogandhiya); VvA 58 (read gandhikāgandhikehi). -- 2. dealing in perfume, a perfumer Miln 262 (cp. gandhin 2). Gandhin
Gandhin
(adj.) 1. having a scent of, smelling of ( -- ˚), i. e. candana˚ of sandal wood J iii.190; gūtha of˚ faeces Pv ii.315 ( = karīsavāyinī PvA). -- 2. dealing with scents, a perfumer PvA 127 (=māgadha; cp. gandhika 2). Gandhina
Gandhina
in kule antimagandhina J iv.34 (expl. by sabba- pacchimaka) and gandhana in kula -- gandhana It 64 see under kula˚. Gabbita
Gabbita
(adj.) proud, arrogant J ii.340 (˚bhāva = issariya); iii.264 (˚sabhāva= dittasabhāva); Sum. V. on D iii.153 (=avamata). Gabbha
Gabbha
[Vedic garbha, either to *gelbh, as in Lat. galba, Goth. kalbo, Ohg. kalba, E. calf, or *gṷe bh, as in Gr. delfu/s womb, adelfo/s sharing the womb, brother, de/lfac young pig; cp. *gelt in Goth. kilpei womb. Ags. cild, Ger. kind, E. child. Meaning: a cavity, a hollow, or, seen from its outside, a swelling] 1. interior, cavity (loc. gabbhe in the midst of: angāra˚ J iii.55); an inner room, private chamber, bedroom, cell. Of a Vihāra: Vin ii.303; iii.119; iv.45; VvA 188; 220; -- J i.90 (siri˚ royal chamber); iii.276; Vv 785 ( = ovaraka VvA 304); DhA i.397; Miln 10, 295. See also anto˚. -> 2. the swelling of the (pregnant) womb, the womb (cp. kucchi). ˚ŋ upeti to be born Dh 325=Th 1, 17= Nett 34, 129; ˚ŋ upapajjati to be born again Dh 126; gabbhā gabbhaŋ . . . dukkaŋ nigacchanti from womb to womb (i. e. from birth to birth) Sn 278; gabbhato paṭṭhāya from the time of birth J i.290, 293. As a symbol of defilement g. is an ep. of kāma A iv.289, etc. -- 3. the contents of the womb, i. e. the embryo, foetus: dasa māse ˚ŋ kucchinā pariharitvā having nourished the foetus in the womb for 10 months D ii 14; dibbā gabbhā D i.229; on g. as contained in kucchi, foetus in utero, see J i.50 (kucchimhi patiṭṭhito) 134; ii.2; iv.482; M i.265; Miln 123 (gabbhassa avakkanti); DhA i.3, 47; ii.261. -- Pv i.67; PvA 31; gabbho vuṭṭhāsi the child was delivered Vin ii.278; itthi -- gabbho & purisa˚ female & male child J i.51; gabbhaŋ pāteti to destroy the foetus Vin ii.268; apagatagabbhā (adj.) having had a miscarriage Vin ii.129; mūḷha -- gabbhā id. M ii.102 (+visatā˚); paripuṇṇa -- gabbhā ready to be delivered J i.52; PvA 86; saññi˚ a conscious foetus D i.54=M i.518=S iii.212; sannisinna -- gabbhā having conceived Vin ii.278.

-- avakkanti (gabbhe okkanti Nd2 3041) conception D iii.103, 231; Vism 499, 500 (˚okkanti); this is followed by gabbhe ṭhiti & gabbhe vuṭṭhāna, see Nd2; -- āsaya the impurities of childbirth Pv iii.53 ( = ˚mala); -- karaṇa effecting a conception Sn 927; -- gata leaving the womb, in putte gabbhagate when the child was born PvA 112; -- dvāra the door of the bed -- chamber J i.62; -- pariharaṇa =next Vism 500; -- parihāra "the protection of the embryo," a ceremony performed when a woman became pregnant J ii.2; DhA i.4; -- pātana the destruction of the embryo, abortion, an abortive preparation Vin iii.83 sq.; Pv i.66 (akariŋ); PvA 31 (dāpesi); DhA i.47 (˚bhesajja); -- mala the uncleanness of delivery, i. e. all accompanying dirty matter PvA 80, 173 (as food for Petas), 198; DhA iv.215; -- vīsa in ahañc' amhi gabbhavīso "I am 20 years, counting from my conception" Vin i.93; -- vuṭṭhāna (nt.) childbirth, delivery J i.52; DhA i.399; ii.261; -- seyyā (f.) the womb; only in expressions relating to reincarnation, as: na punar eti (or upeti) gabbhaseyyaŋ "he does not go into another womb," of an Arahant Sn 29, 152, 535; Vv 5324; and gabbhaseyyaka (adj.) one who enters another womb Vbh 413 sq.; Vism 272, 559, 560; Bdhd 77, 78. -- 245 -- Gabbhara
Gabbhara
(nt.) [Derivation uncertain. Cp. Sk. gahvara] a cavern Sn 416 (giri˚); Vv 635 (giri˚). Gabbhinī
Gabbhinī
(adj. f.) pregnant, enceinte Vin ii.268; S iii.202; J i.151, 290; iv.37; Pv i.66; PvA 31, 82: VvA 110 ( -- bhāva); in combn g˚ pāyamānā purisantaragatā (pregnant, lactating & having had sex. intercourse) A i.295 = ii.206=M i.77, 238, 307, 342=Pug 55; with utunī anutunī (menstruating & having ceased to menstruate) A iii.226 sq. ˚Gama
˚Gama
1. adj. going, able to go; going to, leading to; in vihangama going in the air Sn 221, 606; Th i.1108: J i.216 (cp. gamana); aghasi˚ id. Vv 161 ( = vehāsaŋ˚ VvA 78); nabhasi˚ going on clouds Sn 687; nibbāna˚ leading to N. S v.11; dūraŋ˚ going far, hadayaŋ˚ going to one's heart, q. v. -- 2. m. course, going to; in atthaŋ˚ going home, going to rest, etc., q. v. Gamana
Gamana
1. (nt.) the fact or the state of going, movement, journey, walk; ( -- ˚) striving for, the leading of, pursuit A ii.48 sq. (gamanena na pattabbo lokass' anto = one cannot walk to the end of the world); Dh 178 (saggassa going to heaven); Sn 40, 691, cp. vāraŋ˚; J i.62; 216 (in expl. of vihaŋgama: (ākāse) gamanato pakkhī vihaŋ gamā ti vuccanti); 295; PvA 57. -- pahiṇa˚ going on messages D i.5, etc.; agati˚ wrong pursuit, ˚ŋ gacchati to pursue a wrong walk of life A ii.18; PvA 161; magga˚ tramping, being on the road PvA 43; saraṇa˚ finding shelter (in the Dhamma) PvA 49. -- 2. (adj.) ( -- ˚) going or leading to, conducive to: nibbāna˚ maggo the Path leading to Nibbāna S i.186; Dh 289; duggati˚ magga the road to misery Th 2, 355; duggamana -- ṭṭhānā (pl.) inaccessible places PvA 102 (in expl. of duggā).

-- antarāya an obstacle to one's departure J i.62; -- āgamana going & coming, rise and set Vv 836 ( = ogamanuggamana VvA 326); DhA i.80 (˚kāle); ˚sampanna senāsana a dwelling or lodging fit for going and coming, i. e. easily accessible A v.15; J i.85; ˚ŋ karoti to go to and fro VvA 139. -- kamma going away DhA ii.81. -- kāraṇa a reason for or a means to going, in ˚ŋ karoti to try to go J i.2; -- bhāva the state of having gone away J ii.133; -- magga (pleonastic) the way J i.202; 279; -- vaṇṇa the praise of his course or journey J i.87. Gamanīya
Gamanīya
(adj.; grd to gam) 1. as grd. to gacchati: (a place where one) ought to go; in a˚ not to be gone to (+ṭhāna) VvA 72. -- 2. as grd. to gameti: in bhogā pahāya gamanīyā (riches that have) to be given up (by leaving) Kh viii.8 (see expl. as KhA 223); PvA 87 ( = kālikā, transient). Gamika
Gamika
(and gamiya J i.87) (adj.) going away, setting out for a journey (opp. āgantuka coming back) appl. to bhikkhus only: Vin i.292 (˚ bhatta food for outgoing bh.); ii.170 (āgantuka˚), 211, 265; v.196; J vi.333 (āgantuka˚). See also under abhisankhāra. Cp. Av Ś i.87; Divy 50. Gamina
Gamina
(adj.) being on a "gati," only at Sn 587 in "aññe pi passe gamine yathākamm' ûpage nare." Gameti
Gameti
[caus. of gacchati] to make go, to send, to set into motion, to cause to go It 115 (anabhāvaŋ to destroy), see under gacchati. Gambhīra
Gambhīra
(adj.) [Vedic gambhīra & gabhīra] deep, pro- found, unfathomable, well founded, hard to perceive, difficult. -- (a) lit. of lakes: Dh 83; Pv ii.119 ( = agādha); Pug 46; of a road (full of swamps) J i.196. -- (b) fig. of knowledge & wisdom: dhammo g. duddaso . . . M i.487; S i.136; Tathāgato g. appameyyo duppariyogāho M i.487; parisā g. (opp. uttāna, shallow, superficial, thoughtless) A i.70; g. ṭhāna w. ref. jhāna, etc. Ps ii.21; saddhamma g. Sdhp. 530; g. gūḷha nipuṇa Nd 342; lokanātho nipuṇo g. PvA 1; also w. nipuṇa J vi.355; Miln 234; Bdhd. 118, 137; -- (nt.) the deep; deep ground, i. e. secure foundation Sn 173; Kh viii.1, 3 (see KhA 217).

-- avabhāsa (adj.) having the appearance of depth or profundity, D ii.55; S ii.36; Pug 46 (+uttāna), cp. Pug A 226; -- pañña one whose wisdom is profound Sn 176, 230; 627 = Dh 403 (+medhāvin) cp. DhA iv.169 & see Ps ii.192 for detailed explanation; -- sita resting on depth (of soil), well -- founded A iv.237. Gambhīratā
Gambhīratā
(f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] depth DhA i.92. Gamma
Gamma
(adj.) [fr. gāma. Vedic gramya] of or belonging to the village, common, pagan (cp. Fr. villain), always combd with hīna, low & pagan Vin i.10 and ≈ (anta, standard of life); A iii.325 (dassana, view); D iii.130 (sukhallikânuyoga, hedonist) Sdhp 254. Cp. pothujjanika. Gayha
Gayha
(adj.) [grd. of gayhati; Vedic grāhya] to be taken, to be seized, as nt, the grip, in gayhūpaga (adj.) for being taken up, for common use SnA 283. -- (nt.) that which comes into one's grasp, movable property, acquisition of property DhA ii.29; iii.119; PvA 4. As gayhūpakaŋ at J iv.219. Gayhaka
Gayhaka
(adj. = gayha) one who is to be taken (prisoner), in ˚niyyamāna id. S i.143=J iii.361 (expl. as karamaragāhaŋ gahetvā niyyamāna; cp. karamara). -- 246 -- Gayhati
Gayhati
[Pass. to gaṇhāti] to get seized, to be taken (see gaṇhāti); p.pres. gayhamāna being caught DhA iii.175 (˚ka). -- grd. gayha. Garahaka
Garahaka
(adj.) finding fault with, rebuking; in paṭhavī˚ āpa˚, etc., combd w. paṭhavī -- jigucchaka, etc. (disgusted w. the great elements) M i.327. Garahaṇa
Garahaṇa
(nt.) reproof VvA 16, as f. ˚ṇā at Vism 29. Garahati
Garahati
[Vedic garhati Dhtp 340 nindāyaŋ] to reproach, to blame, scold, censure, find fault with: agarahiyam mā garahittha "do not blame the blameless" S i.240; D i.161 (tapaŋ to reject, disapprove of); D iii.92, 93 (aor. garahi, grd. garahitabba); Sn 313, 665; Miln 222 (+jigucchanti); PvA 125, 126; Sdhp. 382. -- pp. garahita blameworthy Dh 30 (pamādo); Sn 313; J v.453; Miln 288 (dasa puggalā g.). agarahita blameless, faultless PvA 89 ( = anindita, 131). -- See also gārayha & cp. vi˚. Garahā
Garahā
(f.) blame, reproach D i.135 "stating an example," see DA i.296; D iii.92, 93; Sn 141; J i.10 (garahapaṭicchādanabhāva preventing all occasion for finding fault); 132 (garaha -- bhaya -- bhīta for fear of blame), 135 (garahatthe as a blame); Nett 184. Garahin
Garahin
(adj.) blaming, censuring Sn 660 (ariya˚), 778 (atta˚), 913 (anatta˚); Miln 380 (pāpa˚). Garu
Garu
[Vedic guru; Gr. baru/s, Lat. gravis & brutus, Goth. kaurus] 1. adj. (a) lit. heavy, opp. lahu light, appld to bhāra, a load S iii.26; J i.196 ( = bhārika); vi.420; DhA i.48; Sdhp 494 (rūpagarubhāra the heavy load of "form"). Compar. garutara (as against Sk. garīyaŋ) PvA 191. -- (b) fig. important, to be esteemed, valued or valuable A iii.110 sq. (piya manāpa g. bhavanīya); c. gen. or -- ˚ bent on (often in sequence ˚garu, ˚ninna, ˚poṇa, etc., e. g. Vism 135); pursuing, paying homage to, reverent; (or) esteemed by, honoured, venerated: Satthugaru esteeming the Lord; Dhamma˚, Sanghe g. A iii.331=iv.28 sq.; dosa˚ S i.24; kodha˚, saddhamma˚ (pursuing, fostering) A ii.46 sq.=84 sq.; Sdhp 1 (sabba -- loka˚ worshipped by all the world); Dpvs iv.12. -- agaru (c. gen.) irreverent towards Sn p. 51 (Gotamassa). Cp. garuka, gārava; also agaru & agalu. -- 2. N. a venerable person, a teacher: garunaŋ dassanāya & sakāsaŋ Sn 325, 326 (v. l. garūnaŋ to be preferred, so also SnA 332, 333); garūnaŋ dārā It 36. -- garukaroti (for garuŋ k˚) to esteem, respect, honour; usually in series sakkaroti g˚ māneti pūjeti Vin ii.162; M i.31; D i.91; A iii.76; iv.276; Nd2 334 (on namati), 530 (on yasassin); PvA 54. Expl. at DA i.256 by gāravaŋ karoti. -- garukātabba worthy of esteem PvA 9. -- garukāra (sakkāra g. mānana vandana) esteem, honour, regard Pug 19=Dhs 1121. -- See also guru.

-- upanissita (adj.) depending on a teacher, one being taught Ps ii.202; -- ṭṭhāniya one who takes the place of a teacher A iii.21, 393; Nett 8; Vism 344. -- dhamma a rule to be observed. There are 8 chief rules enum. at Vin ii.255 = A iv.276, 280; see also Vin iv.51, 315; v.136. Taken in the sense of a violation of these rules Vin i.49=ii.226; i.52, 143, 144; ii.279; -- nissaya in ˚ŋ gaṇhāti to take up dependency on a teacher, i. e. to consider oneself a pupil Vin ii.303; -- saŋvasa association with a teacher Nd2 235 4˚; Miln 408. Garuka
Garuka
[from garu] somewhat heavy. -- 1. lit. J i.134 (of the womb in pregnancy); Dh 310; Miln 102. Usually coupled & contrasted with lahuka, light: in def. of sense of touch Dhs 648; similarly w. sithila, dhanita, dīgha, rassa Miln 344; DA i.177 (in expl. of dasavidha vyañjana). -- 2. fig. (a) heavy, grave, serious esp. appld to -- āpatti, breach of regulations, offence (opp. lahuka) Vin v.115, 130, 145, 153; Dh 138 (ābādha, illness); appld to kamma at Vism 601 (one of the four kinds); nt. as adv. considerably Miln 92 (˚ŋ parinamati). -> (b) important, venerable, worthy of reverence Th 2, 368 (Satthu sāsana = garukātabba ThA 251); Miln 140. -- (c) -- ˚ "heavy on," bent on, attaching importance to: nahāna˚ fond of bathing Vin i.196; tadattha˚ engaged in (jhāna) Nd2 264; kamma˚ attributing importance to k. Nd2 411; saddhamma˚ revering the Doctrine Sdhp. 520. Nibbāna -- garuka Vism 117 (+Nâdhimutta & N -- pabbhāra).

-- āpatti a grievous offence, see above. As terasa g -- ˚ino at Miln 310. Garutta
Garutta
(nt.) the fact of being honoured or considered worthy of esteem, honourableness A v.164 sq. Garuḷa
Garuḷa
[Derivation uncertain. Sk. garuḍa, Lat. volucer winged, volo to fly]. N. of a mythical bird, a harpy Ps ii.196 = Nd2 235, 3 q.; Vism 206; VvA 9 (= supaṇṇa); DhA i.144. Gala
Gala
[*gel to devour, to swallow = Lat. gula, Ohg. kela, cp. Sk. gala jalukā, and *gṷel, as Gr. de/lear, cp. also Sk. girati, gilati Dhtp 262 gives as meaning of gal "adana." This root gal also occurs at Vism 410 in fanciful def. of "puggala"; the meaning here is not exactly sure (to cry, shout?)] the throat J i.216, 264, iii.26; iv.494: i.194 (a dewlap); PvA 11, 104.

-- agga the top of the throat Sdhp 379; -- ajjhoharaniya able to be swallowed (of solid food) Dhs 646, 740, 875; -- ggaha taking by the throat, throttling D i.144 (+daṇḍapahāra); -- nāḷī the larynx DhA i.253; ii.257; -- ppamāṇa (adj.) going up to the neck J i.264 (āvāṭa); -- pariyosāṇa forming the end of the throat J iii.126; -- ppavedhaka (nt.) pain in the throat M i.371; -- mūla the bottom of the throat PvA 283. -- vāṭaka the bottom (?) of the throat (oesophagus?) Vism 185, 258.

Note. -- gala with many other words containing a guttural+liquid element belongs to the onomatopoetic roots k̊l g̊l (k̊r g̊r), usually reduplicated (iterative), the main applications of which are the following:

1. The (sounding) throat in designation of swallowing, mostly with a dark (guttural) vowel: gulp, belch, gargle, gurgle.

2. The sound produced by the throat (voice) or sound in general, particularly of noises or sounds either inarticulate, confused & indefinable or natural sounds striking enough per se to form a sufficient means of recognition (i. e. name) of the animal which utters this sound (cuckoo, e. g.). To be divided into:

A. palatal group ("light" sounds): squeak, yell, giggle, etc., applied to -- (a) Animate Nature: the cackling, crowing noise of Palmipeds & related birds, reminding of laughter (heron, hen, cock; cp. P. koñca, Lat. gallus) -- (b) Inanimate Nature: the grinding, nibbling, trickling, dripping, fizzing noises or sounds (P. galati, etc.).

B. guttural group ("dark" sounds): groan, growl, howl, etc., appld to -- (a) Animate N.: the snorting, grunting noise of the Pachyderms & related quadrupeds (elephant, op. P. koñca, kuñjara; pig, boar) -- (b) Inanimate N.: the roaring, crashing, thundering noises (P. gaḷagaḷāyati, ghurughurāyati).

3. The sound as indicating motion (produced by motion):

A. palatal group ("sharp" sounds, characteristic of quick motion: whizz, spin, whirl): P. gaggaraka whirlpool, Gr. kerki/s spindle, bobbin.

B. guttural group ("dull" sounds, characteristic of slow and heavy motion: roll, thud, thunder). Sometimes with elimination of the sound -- element appld to swelling & fullness, as in "bulge" or Gr. sfarage/w (be full).

These three categories are not always kept clearly separate, so that often a palatal group shifts into the sphere of a guttural one & vice versa. -- The formation of k̊l g̊I roots is by no means an extinct process, nor is it restricted to any special branch of a linguistic family, as examples show. The main roots of Idg. origin are the foll. which are all represented in Pāli -> (the categories are marked acc. to the foregoing scheme 1, 2A, 2B, 3): kal (2A): kla/zw, clango, Goth. hlahjan laugh; kār (2 A): kh_ruc, Sk. kāru (cp. P. kitti), cārmen; kel (2 A): ke/lados, calo (cp. P. kandati), Ohg. hellan; ker (2 Aa): karkai/rw, ko/rkoros = querquedula=kakkara (partridge); kol (2 B): cuculus, kokila (a); kolāhala and halāhala (b); kor (2 Ba): cornix (cp. P. kāka), corvus=crow=raven; Sk. krośati; P. koñca. -- gṷel (1) Lat. gula, glutio, de/lear; gṷer: (1) bo/ros, bibrw/skw, Lat. voro, Sk. girati, Ohg. querka; (3) ba/raqron (whirlpool) Sk. gargara: gel (1) Sk. gilati, Ohg. kela -- gal (2 A): gallus (a) gloria (b); gar (2 Ab): gh_rus, garrulus, Ohg. kara: gel (2 A): xelidw/n (a) hirrio (to whine), Ohg. gellan (b): ger: (1) gargari/zw (gargle) Sk. gharghara (gurgling). (2 Aa) ge/ranos = crane, Ger. krähen, Lat. gracillo (cackle); (2 Ba) Ohg. kerran (grunt), Sk. gṛṇāti (sing); (2 Ab) Sk. jarate (rustle); gur (2 Ba): gru/zw=grundio= grunt; Lat. gurgulio; Sk. ghurghura.

With special reference to Pāli formations the foll. list shows a few sound roots which are further discussed in the Dictionary s. v. Closely connected with Idg. k̊l g̊I is the Pāli cerebral ṭ, tḥ, ḷ, ṇ, so that roots with these sounds have to be classed in a mutual relation with the liquids. In most cases graphic representation varies between both (cp. gala & gaḷa) -- kil (kiṇ) (2 Ab): kikī (cp. Sk. kṛka˚), kilikilāyati & kinkiṇāyati (tinkle), kili (click), kinkaṇika (bell); kur (2 B): ākurati to hawk, to be hoarse; khaṭ (1) khaṭakhaṭa (hawking), kākacchati (snore); (2 Aa) kukkuṭa (cock); gal (1) gala (throat) uggilati (vomit); (2 Ab) galati (trickle): (2 Ba) Pk. galagajjiya (roar) & guluguliya (bellow); (2 Bb) gaḷagaḷāyati (roar); gar (2 A); gaggara (roar & cackle, cp. Sk. gargara to 3); (2 B); gaggarāyati (roar); (3) gaggaraka (whirlpool); ghar (1) Sk. gharghara (gurgling); (2 Ab) gharati (trickle), Sk. ghargharikā (bell); (2 Bb) ghurughurāyati (grunt). -- See also kakaca, kanka, kankaṇa, cakora (cankora), cakkavaka, jagghati, ciṭiciṭāyati, taṭataṭayati, timingala, papphāsa. -- 247 -- Galaka
Galaka
(nt.) throat J iii.481; iv.251. Gaḷa
Gaḷa
[same as gala, see note on prec.] 1. a drop, i. e. a fall: see gaḷāgala. -- 2. a swelling, a boil ( = gaṇḍa) J iv.494 (mattā gajā bhinnagaḷā elephants in rut, with the temple -- swellings broken; expl. p. 497 by madaŋ gaḷantā); Sn 61 (? v. l. gaṇḍa). -- 3. a hook, a fishhook Sn 61 (?), expl. at SnA 114 by ākaḍḍhanavasena baḷiso.

gaḷāgaḷaŋ gacchati to go from drop to drop, i. e. from fall to fall, w. ref. to the gatis J v.453 (expl. by apāyaŋ gacchati). Gaḷagaḷāyati
Gaḷagaḷāyati
[ = gaggarāyati, see note on gala] to roar, to crash, to thunder; deve gaḷagaḷāyate (loc. abs.) in a thunderstorm, usually as deve vassante deve g˚ amidst rain and heavy thunder D ii.132; S i.106; A v.114 sq. (gala˚); Th 1, 189; Miln 116 (gaganaŋ ravati galag˚); KhA 163 (mahāmegha). -- Gangā galagalantī the roaring Gangā Miln 122 (cp. halāhalasadda ibid.). Gaḷati
Gaḷati
(and galati) [Sk. galati, cp. Ohg. quellan to well up, to flow out; see note on gala and cp. also jala water] 1. to drip, flow, trickle (trs. & intr.) Vin i.204 (natthu g.); M i.336 (sīsaŋ lohitena gaḷati); J iv.497 (madaŋ); iv.3 (lohitaŋ g.); v.472 (do. v. l. paggharati); Pv iv.53 (assukāni g.). -- 2. to rain Th 1, 524 (deve gaḷantamhi in a shower of rain. Cp. gala -- gaḷāyati). -- 3. to drop down, to fall DhA ii.146 (suriyo majjhaṭṭhānato galito). -- Cp. pari˚. Gaḷayati
Gaḷayati
[denom. to gaḷa in sense of gaḷati 1] to drip, to drop, in assukāni g. to shed tears Sn 691. Gaḷita
Gaḷita
rough, in a˚ smooth J v.203, 206 (+mudu & akak- kasa); vi.64. Gaḷocī
Gaḷocī
(f.). N. of a shrub (Cocculus cordifolius); in gaḷocilatā DhA iii.110; a creeper. Cp. pūtilatā. Gava˚
Gava˚
base of the N. go, a bull, cow, used in cpds. See gāv˚, go.

-- akkha a kind of window Mhvs 9. 15, 17; -- āghātana slaughtering of cows Vin i.182; -- âssa cows & horses Vin v.350; D i.5~; Sn 769; -- caṇḍa fierce towards cows Pug 47; -- pāna milky rice pudding J i.33; -- (˚m)pati "lord of cows," a bull Sn 26, 27 (usabha). Gavacchita
Gavacchita
furnished with netting (?) (Hardy in Index) VvA 276, of a carriage ( = suvaṇṇajālavitata). Gavaja
Gavaja
see gavaya. Gavaya
Gavaya
(and gavaja) a species of ox, the gayal [Sk. gavaya, cp. gavala, buffalo] J v.406. (˚ja = khagga); Miln 149; DhsA 331. Gavi
Gavi
a tree -- like creeper, in -- pphala the fruit of a g. Sn 239 ( = rukkhavalliphala SnA). ˚Gavesaka
˚Gavesaka
(adj. fr. next) looking for, seeking J i.176 (kāraṇa˚); ii.3 (aguṇa˚). Gavesati
Gavesati
[gava+esati. Vedic gaveṣate. Origin. to search after cows. Dhtp 298 = maggana tracking] to seek, to search for, to wish for, strive after Dh 146 (gavessatha), 153; Th 1, 183; Nd2 2, 70, 427; J i.4, 61; Miln 326; PvA 187, 202 (aor. gavesi=vicini); Bdhd 53. In Nd2 always in combn esati gavesati pariyesati. Gavesana
Gavesana
search for PvA 185. Gavesin
Gavesin
(adj.) seeking, looking for, striving after (usually -- ˚) D i.95 (tāṇa˚, etc.); Dh 99 (kāma˚), 245 (suci˚), 355 (pāra˚); Nd2 503 (in expl. of mahesi, with esin & pariyesin); Bdhd 59. Gassetuŋ
Gassetuŋ
at DhsA 324 is to be corrected into dassetuŋ. Gaha
Gaha1
[see under gaṇhāti] a house, usually in cpds. (see below). J iii.396 ( = the layman's life; Com. geha).

-- kāraka a house -- builder, metaph. of taṇhā (cp. kāya as geha) Dh 153, 154 = Th 1, 183, 184; DhA iii.128; -- kūṭa the peak of a house, the ridge -- pole, metaph. of ignorance Dh 154 (=kaṇṇika -- maṇḍala DhA 128), replacing thūṇirā (pillar) at Th 1, 184 in corresp. passage (= kaṇṇikā Com.); -- ṭṭha a householder, one who leads the life of a layman (opp. anagāra, pabbajita or paribbājaka) Vin i.115 (sagahaṭṭhā parisā an assembly in which laymen were present); S i.201; A iii.114, 116, 258; It. 112 (gharaŋ esino gahaṭṭhā) Dh 404= Sn 628; Sn 43 (gharaŋ āvasanto, see Nd2 226 for explanation), 90, 134 (paribbājaŋ gahaṭṭhaŋ vā) 398, 487; Sdhp 375. -- ˚vatta a layman's rule of conduct Sn 393 (=agāriyā paṭipadā SnA 376) -- ˚ka belonging to a layman; acting as a layman or in the quality of a l. A ii.35 (kinkaraṇiyāni), iii.296 (brahmacariyā); -- pati see sep. Gaha
Gaha2
[Sk. graha, gaṇhāti, q. v. for etym.] "seizer," seizing, grasping, a demon, any being or object having a hold upon man. So at S i.208 where Sānu is "seized" by an epileptic fit (see note in K.S. i.267, 268). Used of dosa (anger) Dh 251 (exemplified at DhA iii.362 by ajagara˚ the grip of a boa, kumbhīla˚ of a crocodile, yakkha˚ of a demon). sagaha having crocodiles, full of e. (of the ocean) (+sarakkhasa) It 57. Cp. gahaṇa & saŋ˚. Gahaṇa
Gahaṇa
[fr. gaṇhāti] (adj.) seizing, taking; acquiring; (n.) seizure, grasp, hold, acquisition Vism 114 (in detail). Usually -- ˚: nāma˚ -- divase on the day on which a child gets its name (lit. acquiring a name) J i.199, 262; arahatta˚ DhA i.8; dussa˚ DhA ii.87; maccha˚ J iv.139; hattha˚ J i.294; byanjana˚ -- lakkhaṇa Nett 27. gahaṇatthāya in order to get . . . J i.279; ii.352. -> amhākaŋ g˚ sugahaṇaŋ we have a tight grip J i.222, 223. -- 248 -- Gahaṇī
Gahaṇī
(f.) the "seizer," a supposed organ of the body dealing with digestion and gestation. Sama -- vepākiniyā g˚ iyā samannāgata "endowed with good digestion" D ii.177 = iii.166. Same phrase at Av Ś i.168, 172. Cp. Vedic graha. B. Psy. 59, 67.

Gahaṇika in phrase saŋsuddha -- gahaṇika coming from a clean womb, of pure descent, in the enum. of the indispensable good qualities of a brahmin or a noble D i.113, 115, 137 (gahaṇī expl. as kucchi DA i.281); A i.163, iii.154, 223; Sn p. 115. J i.2; duṭṭha -- gahaṇika having a bad digestion Vin i.206. Gahana
Gahana
[Sk. gahana, cp. also ghana] 1. adj. deep, thick, impervious, only in a˚ clear, unobstructed, free from obstacles Vv 187 (akanataka+); Miln 160 (gahanaŋ a˚ kataŋ the thicket is cleared). -- 2. nt. an impenetrable place, a thicket jungle, tangle. -- (a) 18 gahanāni at J v.46; usually appl. to grass: tiṇa˚ A i.153 = iii.128 (+rukkha˚); Miln 369; adj. tiṇagahanā obstructed with grass (of vihārā) Vin ii.138; -- S i.199 (rukkhamūla˚); J i.7, 158; PvA 5 (pabbata˚), 43; VvA 230 (vana˚). -- (b) fig. imperviousness, entanglement, obstruction, appl. to diṭṭhi, the jungle of wrong views or heresy (usually combd w. diṭṭhi -- kantāra, the wilderness of d., see diṭṭhi) M i.8, 485; Pug 22; DA i.108. Of rāga˚, moha˚, etc., and kilesa˚ Nd2 630 (in expl. of Satthā; rāgagahanaŋ tāreti); DhA iv.156 (on Dh 394); VvA 96. -- manussa˚ M i.340.

-- ṭṭhāna a lair in the jungle J i.150, 253. Gahapati
Gahapati
[gaha+pati. Vedic gṛhapati, where pati is still felt in its original meaning of "lord," "master," implying dignity, power & auspiciousness. Cp. Sk. dampati = dominus=despo/ths; and pati in P. senāpati commander-in-chief, Sk. jāspati householder, Lat. hospes, Obulg. gospoda=potestas, Goth. brūp -- faps, bride -- groom, hunda -- faps=senāpati. See details under pati.] the possessor of a house, the head of the household, pater familias (freq.+seṭṭhi). -- 1. In formulas: (a) as regards social standing, wealth & clanship: a man of private (i. e. not official) life, classed w. khattiyā & brāhmaṇā in kh˚ -- mahāsālā, wealthy Nobles, brahm˚mahāsālā, do. Brahmins, gah˚ -- m˚ well -- to -- do gentry S i.71; Nd2 135; DhA i.388. -- kh˚ -- kula, br˚ -- kula, g˚ -- kula the kh˚, etc. clans: Vin ii.161; J i.218. kh˚, amaccā, br˚, g.˚ D i.136. -- (b) as regards education & mode of life ranking with kh˚, br˚, g.˚ and samaṇā Vin i.227; A i.66; Nd2 235, see also cpd. -- paṇḍita.-> 2. Other applications: freq. in combn brāhmaṇagahapatikā priests & yeomen: see gahapatika. In combn w. gahapatiputta (cp. kulaputta) it comprises the members of the g. rank, clansmen of the (middle) class, and implies a tinge of "respectable people" esp. in addresses. So used by the Buddha in enumerating the people as gahapati vā gah˚ -- putto vā aññatarasmiŋ vā kule paccājāto D i.62; M i.344. gahapatī ca gahapatāniyo householders and their wives A ii.57. In sg. the voc. gahapati may be rendered by "Sir" (Miln 17 e. g. and freq.), & in pl. gahapatayo by "Sirs" (e. g. Vin i.227; M i.401; A ii.57). -- As regards occupation all resp. businesses are within the sphere of the g., most frequently mentioned as such are seṭṭhino (see below) & cp. seṭṭhi˚ Vin i.16, but also kassaka, farmer A i.229, 239 sq.; and dārukammika, carpenter A iii.391. Var. duties of a g. enum. at A i.229, 239. -- The wealth & comfortably -- living position of a g. is evident from an expression like kalyāṇa -- bhattiko g. a man accustomed to good food Vin ii.77=iii.160. -- f. gahapatānī Vin iii.211, 213 sq., 259 (always w. gahapati); DhA i.376; pl. gahapatāniyo see above. -- Note. The gen. sg. of gahapati is ˚ino (J i.92) as well as -- issa (Vin i.16; D iii.36). -- 3. Single cases of gahapatis, where g. almost assumes the function of a title are Anāthapiṇḍika g. Vin ii.158 sq.; S i.56; ii.68; A ii.65; J i.92; PvA 16; Meṇḍaka g. Vin i.240 sq.; Citta S iv.281 sq.; Nakulapitā S ii.1 sq.; Potaliya M i.359; Sandhāna D iii.36 sq.; Hāliddikāni S ii.9. -- See next.

-- 'aggi the sacred fire to be maintained by a householder, interpreted by the Buddha as the care to be bestowed on one's children & servants A iv.45; see enum. under aggī at A iv.41; D iii.217; -- cīvara the robe of a householder (i. e. a layman's robe) Vin i.280 sq.; ˚dhara wearing the householder's (private man's) robe (of a bhikkhu) M i.31; A iii.391 sq.; -- necayika (always with brāhmaṇa -- mahāsālā) a business man of substance D i.136; iii.16 sq.; -- paṇḍita a learned householder. Cp. above 1 (b), together w. khattiya˚, etc. M i.176, 396; w. samaṇa -- brāhmaṇa˚ Miln 5; -- parisā a company of gahapatis (together w. khattiya˚, etc., see above) Vin i.227; M i.72; D iii.260; -- putta a member of a g. clan D i.62, 211; M i.344; S iii.48, 112; PvA 22; -- mahāsāla a householder of private means (cp. above 1 a) usually in combn with khattiya˚, etc. D iii.258; S i.71; iv.292; A ii.86; iv.239; -- ratana the "householder -- gem" one of the seven fairy jewels of the mythical overlord. He is a wizard treasure -- finder (see ratana) D ii.16, 176; Sn p. 106. Cp. Rh.D. Dialogues etc. ii.206. Gahapatika
Gahapatika
(adj. -- n.) belonging to the rank or grade of a householder, a member of the gentry, a man of private means (see gahapati) D i.61 (expl. as gehassa pati ekageha -- matte jeṭṭhaka DA i.171); Nd2 342; PvA 39. Often in combn w. khattiya & brāhmaṇa: A i.66; D iii.44, 46, 61; & often in contrast to brāhmaṇa only: brāhmaṇa -- gahapatika Brahmins & Privates (priests & laymen, Rh.D. Buddh. S. p. 258) M i.400; A i.110; It iii.; J i.83, 152, 267; PvA 22. -- paṇṇika g˚ "owner of a house of leaves" as nickname of a fruiterer J iii.21; of an ascetic J iv.446. Gahita
Gahita
(and gahīta Dh 311) (adj.) [pp. of gaṇhāti] seized. taken, grasped D i.16; DA i.107 ( = ādinna, pavattita); J i.61; iv.2; PvA 43 (v. l. for text gaṇhita). -- nt. a grasp, grip DhA iii.175; -- gahitakaŋ karoti to accept VvA 260. -- duggahīta (always ˚gahīta) hard to grasp M i.132 sq.; A ii.147, 168; iii.178; Dh 311; J vi.307 sq.; sugahita (sic) easy to get J i.222.

-- bhāva (cittassa) the state of being held (back), holding back, preventing to act (generously) DhsA 370 (in expln of aggahitattaŋ cittassa Dhs 1122 see under ā˚). Gāthaka
Gāthaka
[demin. of gāthā] = gāthā, in ekaŋ me gāhi gāthakaŋ "sing to me only one little verse" J iii.507. Gāthā
Gāthā
(f.) [Vedic gāthā, on dern see gāyate] a verse, stanza, line of poetry, usually referring to an Anuṭṭhubbaŋ or a Tuṭṭhubbaŋ, & called a catuppādā gāthā, a stanza (śloka) of four half -- lines A ii.178; J iv.395. Def. as akkhara -- padaniya -- mita -- ganthita -- vacanaŋ at KhA 117. For a riddle on the word see S i.38. As a style of composition it is one of the nine Angas or divisions of the Canon (see navanga Satthu sāsana). Pl. gāthā Sn 429; J ii.160; gāthāyo Vin i.5, 349; D ii.157. gāthāya ajjhābhāsati to address with a verse Vin i.36, 38; Kh v. intr. -- gāthāhi anumodati to thank with (these) lines Vin i.222, 230, 246, 294, etc. -- gāthāyo gīyamāna uttering the lines Vin i.38. -- anantaragāthā the foll. stanza J iv.142; Sn 251; J i.280; Dh 102 (˚sataŋ).

-- abhigīta gained by verses S i.167 = Sn 81, 480 (gāthāyo bhāsitvā laddhaŋ Com. cp. Ger. "ersungen"). -- âvasāne after the stanza has been ended DhA iii.171; -- jānanaka one who knows verses Anvs. p. 35; -- dvaya (nt.) a pair of stanzas J iii.395 sq.; PvA 29, 40; -- pada a half line of a gāthā Dh 101; KhA 123; -- sukhattaŋ in order to have a well -- sounding line, metri causā, PvA 33. Gādha
Gādha1
[Sk. gāḷha pp. of gāh, see gāhati] depth; a hole, a dugout A ii.107 = Pug 43 (cp. PugA 225); Sdhp 394 (˚ŋ khaṇati). Cp. gāḷha2. Gādha
Gādha2
[Sk. gāḷha firm Dhtp 167 "paṭiṭṭhāyaŋ" cp. also Sk. gādha, fordable & see gāḷha1] adj. passable, fordable, in a˚ unfathomable, deep PvA 77 ( = gambhīra). nt. a iord, a firm stand, firm ground, a safe place: gambhīre ˚ŋ vindati A v.202. ˚ŋ esati to seek the terra firma S i.127; similarly: ˚ŋ labhati to gain firm footing S i.47; ˚ŋ ajjhagā S iv.206; ˚ŋ labhate J vi.440 (=patiṭṭhā). Cp. o˚, paṭi˚. -- 249 -- Gādhati
Gādhati
[v. der. fr. gādha2] to stand fast, to be on firm ground, to have a firm footing: āpo ca paṭhavī ca tejo vāyo na gādhati "the four elements have no footing" D i.223 = S i.15; -- Dhamma -- Vinaye gādhati "to stand fast in the Doctrine & Discipline" S iii.59 sq. Gāma
Gāma
[Vedic grāma, heap, collection, parish; *grem to comprise; Lat. gremium; Ags. crammian (E. cram), Obulg. gramada (village community) Ohg. chram; cp. *ger in Gr. a)geirw, a)gora/, Lat, grex.] a collection of houses, a hamlet (cp. Ger. gemeinde), a habitable place (opp. arañña: gāme vā yadi vâraññe Sn 119), a parish or village having boundaries & distinct from the surrounding country (gāmo ca gāmupacāro ca Vin i.109, 110; iii.46). In size varying, but usually small & distinguished from nigama, a market -- town. It is the smallest in the list of settlements making up a "state" (raṭṭhaŋ). See definition & description at Vin iii.46, 200. It is the source of support for the bhikkhus, and the phrase gāmaŋ piṇḍāya carati "to visit the parish for alms" is extremely frequent. -- 1. a village as such: Vin i.46; Ārāmika˚, Pilinda˚ Vin i.28, 29 (as Ārāmikagāmaka & Pilinda -- gāmaka at Vin iii.249); Sakyānaŋ gāme janapade Lumbineyye Sn 683; Uruvela˚ Pv ii.1318; gāmo nâtikālena pavisitabbo M i.469; ˚ŋ raṭṭhañ ca bhuñjati Sn 619, 711; gāme tiŋsa kulāni honti J i.199; -- Sn 386, 929, 978; J ii.153; vi.366; Dh 47, 49; Dhs 697 (suñño g.); PvA 73 (gāme amaccakula); 67 (gāmassa dvārasamīpena). -- gāmā gāmaŋ from hamlet to hamlet M ii.20; Sn 180 (with nagā nagaŋ; expl. SnA 216 as devagāmā devagāmaŋ), 192 (with purā puraŋ); Pv ii.1318. In the same sense gāmena gāmaŋ Nd2 177 (with nigamena n˚, nagarena n˚., raṭṭhena r˚., janapadena j˚.). -- 2. grouped with nigama, a market -- town: gāmanigamo sevitabbo or asevitabbo A iv.365 sq., cp. v.101 (w. janapadapadeso); -- Vin iii.25, 184 (˚ŋ vā nigamaŋ vā upanissāya); iv.93 (piṇḍāya pavisati); gāmassa vā nigamassa vā avidūre D i.237; M i.488; gāme vā nigame vā Pug 66. -- 3. as a geographical -- political unit in the constitution of a kingdom, enumd in two sets: (a) gāma -- nigamarājadhāniyo Vin iii.89; A iii.108; Nd2 271iii; Pv ii.1318; DhA i.90. -- (b) gāma -- nigama -- nagara -- raṭṭha -- janapada Nd2 177, 304iii (˚bandhana), 305 (˚kathā); with the foll. variations: g. nigama nagara M ii.33 -- 40; g. nigama janapada Sn 995; Vism 152; gāmāni nigamāni ca Sn 118 (expld by SnA 178: ettha ca saddena nagarāni ti pi vattabbaŋ). -- See also dvāra˚; paccanta˚; bīja˚; bhūta˚; mātu˚.

-- anta the neighbourhood of a village, its border, the village itself, in ˚nāyaka leading to the village A iii.189; ˚vihārin ( = āraññaka) living near a v. M i.31, 473; A iii.391 (w. nemantanika and gahapati -- cīvara -- dhara); -- Sn 710; -- antara the (interior of the) village, only in t. t. gāmantaraŋ gacchati to go into the v. Vin ii.300, & in ˚kappa the "village -- trip -- licence" ( Vin. Texts iii.398) ib. 294, 300; cp. iv.64, 65; v.210; -- ûpacāra the outskirts of a v. Vin i.109, 110; defined at Vin iii.46, 200; -- kathā village -- talk, gossip about v. -- affairs. Included in the list of foolish talks (+nigama˚, nagara˚, janapada˚) D i.7 (see expln at DA i.90); Sn 922. See kathā; -- kamma that which is to be done to, or in a village, in ˚ŋ karoti to make a place habitable J i.199; -- kūṭa "the village -- fraud," a sycophant S ii.258; J iv.177 (=kūṭavedin); -- goṇā (pl.) the village cattle J i.194; -- ghāta those who sack villages, a marauder, dacoit (of corā thieves) D i.135; S ii.188; -- ghātaka (corā) =˚ghāta S iv.173; Miln 20; Vism 484; nt. village plundering J i.200. -- jana the people of the v. Miln 47; -- ṭṭhāna in purāṇa˚ a ruined village J ii.102; -- dārakā (pl.) the youngsters of the v. J iii.275; f. -- dārikā the girls of the v. PvA 67; -- dvaya, in ˚vāsika living in (these) two vs. PvA 77; -- dvāra the v. gates, the entrance to the v. Vin iii.52; J ii.110, 301; cp. PvA 67; -- dhamma doings with women -- folk (cp. mātugāma), vile conduct D i.4≈(+methuna) A i.211; J ii.180 (=vasaladhamma); VvA 11; DA i.72 (= gāma -- vāsīnaŋ dhamma?); -- poddava (v. l. kāmapudava) a shampooer (? Vin. Texts iii.66; Bdhgh explains: kāmapudavā ti chavi -- rāga -- maṇḍanânuyuttā nāgarikamanussā; gāmaŋ podavā ti pi pādho es' ev' attho, Vin ii.315) Vin ii.105; -- bhojaka the village headman J i.199; DhA i.69; -- majjhe in the midst of the v. J i.199; vi.332; -- vara an excellent v. S i.97; J i.138; -- vāsin the inhabitant of a v. J ii.110; v.107; DA i.72; -- saññā the thought of a v. M iii.104; -- samīpe near a v. J i.254; -- sahassa a thousand parishes (80,000 under the rule of King Bimbisāra) Vin i.179; -- sāmanta in the neighbourhood of a v., near a v. D i.101; (+mgama˚) -- sīmā the boundary of the parish Vin i.110 (+nigama˚); -- sūkara a village pig J iii.393. Gāmaka
Gāmaka
1. = gāma Vin i.208; J i.199 (Macala˚), 253; iv.431 (cora˚); PvA 67 (Iṭṭhakāvatī and Dīgharājī); DhA ii.25 (dvāra˚). -- 2. a villager J v.107 (= gāmavāsin).

-- āvāsa an abode in a village PvA 12; VvA 291. Gāmaṇika
Gāmaṇika
= gāmaṇi S i.61; A iii.76 (pūga˚). Gāmaṇī
Gāmaṇī
(m.) the head of a company, a chief, a village headman Vin ii.296 (Maṇicūḷaka). Title of the G.-> Saŋyutta (Book VIII. of the Saḷāyatana -- Vagga) S iv.305 sq.; & of the G. -- Jātaka J i.136, 137. -- S iv.306 (Talapuṭa naṭa˚), 308 (yodhājīvo g.), 310 (hatthāroho g.), 312 (Asibandhakaputta), 330 (Rāsiya). Gāmaṇḍala
Gāmaṇḍala
"the round of the ox," like the oxen driven round & round the threshing -- floor Th 1, 1143. -- Cp. gomaṇḍala (s.v. go). Gāmika
Gāmika
1. [to gāma] a governor of a village, overseer of a parish Vin i.179; A iii.76, 78, 300 (in series w. raṭṭhika pettanika, senāpatika, pūgagamaṇika). -- 2. [to gam] adj. going wandering, travelling ( -- ˚) J ii.112. ˚Gāmin
˚Gāmin
(adj.) [from gacchati, gam] f. ˚iṇī, in composition ˚gāmi˚. -- (a) going, walking, lit.: sīgha˚ walking quickly Sn 381; -- (b) leading to, making for, usually with magga or paṭipadā (gāminī), either lit. Pāṭaliputtagāmi -- magga the road to P. Miln 17; or fig. of ways & means connected w. one of the "gatis." as apāya˚ DhA iii.175, udaya˚ paṭipadā S v.361; nibbāna˚ dhamma Sn 233; amata -- gāmi -- magga S v.8; udayatthagāmiṇī paññā A v.15; dukkhanirodha˚ paṭipadā Vin i.10; cp. ācaya˚ Dhs 584. 1013. Acc. ˚gāminaŋ: khemaŋ Amata˚ M i.508; brahmacariyaŋ: nibbān' ogadha˚ It 28, 29; dukkhûpasama˚ maggaŋ Sn 724 = Dh 191; niraya˚ maggaŋ Sn 277, ThA 243. Or ˚gāmiŋ: Sn 233, 381. Gāmeyya
Gāmeyya
(adj.) belonging to a village in sa˚ of the same v., a clansman S i.36 = 60 (+sakhā). Gāyaka
Gāyaka
[fr. next] a singer PvA 3 (naṭaka˚). Gāyati
Gāyati
[Vedic gai, gāyate] to sing, to recite, often comb w. naccati to dance; ppr. gāyanto, gāyamāna & gīyamāna (Vin i.38); imper. gāhi (J iii.507); fut. gāyissati; grd. gāyitabba. Vin ii.108 (dhammaŋ), 196 (gāthaŋ); Sn 682 (g˚ ca vādayanti ca); J i.290 (gītaŋ); iii.507 (naccitvā gāyitvā); Vism 121 (aor. gāyi); PvA 151. Cp. gāthā, gīta, geyya. Gāyana
Gāyana
(nt.) singing VvA 315 (naccana+). Gārayha
Gārayha
(adj.) [grd. of garahati] contemptible, low Vin iii.186; iv.176 sq.; 242; v.149; M i.403; A ii.241 (kammaŋ pādaŋ gārayhaŋ mosallaŋ); Sn 141; Nett 52; SnA 192. a˚ not to be blamed J vi.200 (spelt aggarayha). -- 250 -- Gārava
Gārava
(m. and [later] nt.) [cp. Sk. gaurava, fr. garu] reverence, respect, esteem; with loc. respect for, reverence towards; in the set of six venerable objects: Buddhe [Satthari], Dhamme, Sanghe, sikkhāya, appamāde, paṭisanthāre Vin v.92 = D iii.244. As 7 gāravā (the 6+samānhi) in adj. a˚ and sa˚ at A iv.84 (see below). D iii.284; Sn 265; Vism 464 (atta˚ & para˚). Expld KhA 144 by garubhāvo; often in combn with bahumāna PvA 135 (=pūjā), sañjāta -- g˚ -- bahumāna (adj.) PvA 50; VvA 205. Instr. gāravena out of respect, respectfully D ii.155; J i.465. Appld to the terms of address bhante & bhaddante PvA 33, 121, & āyasmā (see cpd. ˚adhivacana). -- agārava (m. nt.) disrespect Vin v.92 (six: as above); J i.217; PvA 54. -- As adj. in sagārava and agārava full of reverence toward (with loc.) & disrespectful; D iii.244 (six g.); A iv.84 (seven); M i.469; combd with appatissa & sappatissa (obedient) A iii.7 sq., 14 sq., 247, 340. Also in tibba -- gārava full of keen respect (Satthu -- garu Dhamma -- garu Sanghe ca tibba -- gārava, etc.) A iii.331=iv.28 sq.

-- âdhivacana a title of respect, a reverential address Nd2 466 (with ref. to Bhagavā), cp. sagārava sappaṭissâdhivacana Nd2 130 (āyasmā). Gāravatā
Gāravatā
[Der. fr. gārava] reverence, respect, in Satthu˚, Dhamma˚, etc. A iii.330 sq., 423 sq.; iv.29 (ottappa˚). Gāḷha
Gāḷha
(adj.) [cp. Sk. gāḍha] 1. [cp. gādha1] strong, tight, close; thick. In phrase pacchābāhaŋ g˚ bandbanaŋ bandhati to pinion the arms tightly D i.245; A ii.241; J i.264; PvA 4. Of an illness (gāḷhena rogâtankena phuṭṭha) A ii.174 sq.; appld to poison smeared on an arrow M i.429. -- gālhaŋ & gālhakaŋ (adv.) tightly J i.265, 291. -- agāḷha (? prob. to be read āgāḷha) (of vacana, speech, combd with pharusa) strong (?) Pug 32 (expl by Com. atigāḷha thaddha), cp. 2. and gaḷita. -> 2. [cp. gādha1 deep J i.155 (˚vedhin, piercing); Miln 370 (ogāhati). Cp. ajjhogāḷha, atigāḷha, ogāḷha, nigāḷhita, pagāḷha. Gāvī
Gāvī
(f.) [see go] gen. sg. gāviyā (Pug 56 = A ii.207); nom. pl. gāviyo (SnA 323; VvA 308); gen. pl. gāvīnaŋ DhA i.396; SnA 323; VvA 308). -- A cow Vin i.193; A iv.418; J i.50; Ud 8, 49; Vism 525 (in simile); DhA ii.35; VvA 200. Gāvuta
Gāvuta
(nt.) [cp. Vedic gavyūti pasture land, district] a linear measure, a quarter of a yojana = 80 usabhas, a little less than two miles, a league J i.57, 59; ii.209; Vism 118; DhA i.396. Gāvutika
Gāvutika
(adj.) reaching a gāvuta in extent DA i.284. Gāvo
Gāvo
see go. Gāha
Gāha
[fr. gaṇhāti] 1. (n.) seizing, seizure, grip (cp. gaha): canda˚ suriya˚ an eclipse (lit. the moon, etc., being seized by a demon) D i.10 ( = DA i.95: Rāhu candaŋ gaṇhāti). Esp. appld to the sphere of the mind; obsession, being possessed (by a thought), an idea, opinion, view, usually as a preconceived idea, a wrong view, misconception. So in defn of diṭṭhi (wrong views) with paṭiggāha & abhinivesa Nd2 271iii (on lepa); Pug 22; Dhs 381 (=obsession like the grip of a crocodile DhsA 253), 1003; Vbh 145, 358. In the same formula as vipariyesa ggāha (wrong view), cp. viparīta˚ VvA 331 (see diṭṭhi). As doubt & error in anekaŋ sa+g˚ in defn of kankhā & vicikicchā Nd2 1; Vbh 168; ekaŋsa˚ & apaṇṇaka˚ certainty, right thought J i.97. -- gāhaŋ vissajjeti to give up a preconceived idea J ii.387. -- 2. (adj.) act. holding: rasmi˚ holding the reins Dh 222; dabbi˚ holding the spoons Pv ii.953 (=gāhaka PvA 135). -- (b) med. -- pass. taken: jīvagāha taken alive, in ˚ŋ gaheti to take (prisoner) alive S i.84, karamaragāhaŋ gaheti same J iii.361 (see kara). Gāhaka
Gāhaka
(adj.) f. gāhikā holding ( -- ˚) chatta˚ Sn 688; Dāvs ii.119; katacchu˚ PvA 135; cāmarī˚ J vi.218. Cp. saŋ˚. Gāhati
Gāhati
[Sk. gāhate but Dhtp 349 = viloḷana] to immerse, to penetrate, to plunge into: see gādha & gāḷha; cp. also avagadha ajjhogāhati, ogāhati, pagāhati. Gāhana
Gāhana
(nt.) [fr. last] submersion, see avagahana, avagā- hati & avagāhana. Gāhavant
Gāhavant
in ekaŋsa -- gāhavatī nibbici kicchā "doubtless- ness consisting in certainty" VvA 85 in expld of ekaŋsika. Gāhāpaka
Gāhāpaka
[fr. gāhāpeti] one who is made to take up, a receiver Vin ii.177 (patta˚). Gāhāpeti
Gāhāpeti
[caus. of gaṇhāti] to cause to take; to cause to be seized or fetched; to remove. Aor, gāhāpesi J i.53; ii.37; gāhāpayi Pv iv.142. -- Ger. gāhāpetvā J i.166; ii.127; iii.281; DhA i.62 (patta -- cīvaraŋ). With double acc. mahājanaŋ kathaŋ g˚ made people believe your words J ii.416; cetake kasā g. made the servants seize their whips J iii.281. Cp. gaṇhāpeti. Gāhi
Gāhi
Imper. pres. of gāyati J iii.507. Gāhika
Gāhika
( -- ˚) = gahin, see anta˚. Gāhin
Gāhin
(adj.) ( -- ˚) grasping, taking up, striving after, ādhāna˚ D iii.247; udaka˚ J i.5; piya˚ Dh 209; nimitta˚ anubyañjana˚, etc. Gāheti
Gāheti
[v. denom. fr. gāha] to understand, to account for DA i.117. Gingamaka
Gingamaka
(v. l. BB kinkamaka) a sort of ornament J vi.590. Gijjha
Gijjha
[Vedic gṛdhra, cp. gijjhati] 1. (m.) a vulture. Classed with kāka, crow & kulala, hawk M i.88; (kākā+), 364 (in simile, with kankā & kulatā) 429 (do.); Sn 201 (kākā+); PvA 198 (+kulalā). It occurs also in the form gaddha. -- 2. (adj.) greedy, desirous of ( -- ˚): kāma˚ J i.210 (cp. giddha); cp. paṭi˚.

-- kūṭa "Vulture's Peak" Np. of a hill near Rājagaha Vin ii.193; DhA i.140; PvA 10 and passim. -- potaka the young of a vulture Vism 537 (in simile). Gijjhati
Gijjhati
[Sk. gṛdhyati, to Lat. gradior?] to desire, to long for, to wish: pp. gaddha & giddha. Cp. abhi˚, pali˚. -> pp. (Pass.) gijjhita Th 2, 152 ( = paccāsiŋsita ThA). Giñjakā
Giñjakā
(f.) a brick, in ˚āvasatha a house of bricks, as N pl. "the Brick Hall" D i.91; Vin i.232; M i.205. Giddha
Giddha
(adj.) [pp. of gijjhati] greedy; greedy for, hankering after (with loc.) S i.74 (+kāmesu mucchita); ii.227; A ii.2; iii.68; Sn 243 (rasesu), 774 (kāmesu); 809; Pv iv.62 (sukhe); PvA 3 (+rata) ( = gadhita), 271 (āhāre=hungry; cp. giddhin). In series with similar terms of desire; giddha gathita (or gadhita) mucchita ajjhopanna Nd2 369 (nissita); SnA 286. Cp. gathita. -- agiddha without greed, desireless, controlled It 92 (+vītagedha); Sn 210 (do), 845. Cp. pa˚. Giddhi
Giddhi
(f.) [cp. Sk. gṛdhyā or gṛdhnutā] greed, usually in cpds.: ˚māna greed & conceit Sn 328, ˚lobha g. & desire M i.360, 362 (also a˚ and giddhilobhin); J v.343. Der. giddhikatā (f. abstr. = Sk. gṛdhnutā) greed Vbh 351 (v. l. gedhi˚). Giddhin
Giddhin
(adj. fr. prec.) greedy, usually -- ˚ greedy for, desirous after Pv iv.107 (āhāra˚) f. giddhinī: gāvī vaccha˚ Vin i.193; S iv.181. Cp. also paligedhin. Giddhimā
Giddhimā
(adj. fr. giddhi) greedy, full of greed J v.464 (rasa˚). Gini
Gini
(poet.) [Vedic agni; this the aphetic form, arisen in a combn like mahāgni = mahā -- gini, as against the usual assimilation aggi] fire A iii.347 (mahāgini); Sn 18, 19 (āhito > nibbuto: made > extinguished); J iv.26. ->

Note. The occurrence of two phonetic representatives of one Vedic form (one by diaeresis & one by contraction) is common in words containing a liquid or nasal element (l. r. n; cp. note on gala), e. g. supina & soppa (Sk. svapna), abhikkhaṇa and abhiṇha (abhīkṣṇa), silesuma & semha (śleṣman) gaḷagaḷa & gaggara (gargara), etc. -- 251 -- Gimha
Gimha
[Vedic grīṣma] I. (sg.) heat, in special application to the atmosphere: hot part (of the day or year), hot season, summer; a summer month. Always used in loc. as a designation of time. 1. of the day: VvA 40 (˚samaye; v. l. gimhānamāse). -- 2. of summer: usually in combn w. and in contrast to hemanta winter: hemanta -- gimhisu in w. & s. Dh 286 (cp. gimhika for ˚isu). Miln 274; Dpvs i.55; Vism 231 (˚âbhitatta worn out by the heat); Sdhp 275 (˚kāle). In enumn w. other seasons: vasse hemante gimhe Nd2 631 (sadā); vasanta gimhādika utū PvA 135. -- 3. of a summer month; paṭhamasmiŋ gimhe Sn 233 (see KhA 192 for expln) -- II. (pl.) gimhā the hot months, the season of summer, in ˚naŋ pacchime māse, in the last month of summer M i.79; S iii.141; v.50, 321; Vv 795 ( = āsāḷhimāse VvA 307). Gimhāna
Gimhāna
(adj. -- n.) [orig. gen. pl. of gimhā = gimhānaŋ, fr. combn gimhāna(ŋ) māse, in a month of summer] of summer, summerly, the summer season A iv.138 (+hemanta & vassa); Sn 233 (gimhānamāse); VvA 40 (v. l.). On terms for seasons in gen. cp. Miln trsl. ii.113. Gimhika
Gimhika
(adj. fr. gimha) summerly, relating to the summer, for the summer Vin i.15; D ii.21 (+vassika & hemantika). Girā
Girā
[Vedic gir & gēr, song; gṛṇāti to praise, announce gūrti praise = Lat. grates "grace"; to *ger or *gṷer, see note on gala] utterance (orig. song, important utterance, still felt as such in older Pāli, therefore mostly poetical), speech, words D iii.174; Sn 350, 632, 690, 1132; Dh 408; Th 2, 316, 402; Vv 5018 (=vācā VvA); Dhs 637, 720; DhsA 93; DA i.61 (aṭṭhangupetaŋ giraŋ), J ii.134. Giri
Giri
[Vedic giri, Obulg. gora mountain] a mountain; as a rule only in cpds, by itself (poetical) only at Vism 206 (in enumn of the 7 large mountains).

-- agga mountain top, in giraggasamajja N. of a festival celebrated yearly at Rājagaha, orig. a festival on the mountain top (cp. Dial. i.8 & Vin. Texts iii.71). Vin ii.107, 150; iv.85, 267; J iii.538; DhA i.89. The BSk. version is girivaggu -- samāgama AvŚ ii.24; -- kannikā (f.) N. of a plant (Clitoria ternatea) Vism 173; DhA i.383 (v. l. kaṇṇikā cp. Sk. ˚karnī;) -- gabbhara = ˚guhā Sn 416; -- guhā a mountain cleft, a rift, a gorge; always in formula pabbata kandara g˚, therefore almost equivalent to kandara, a grotto or cave Vin ii.146; D i.71= M i.269, 274, 346, 440=A ii.210=Pug 59 (as giriŋ guhaŋ); A iv.437; expl. at DA i.210: dvinnaŋ pabbatānaŋ antaraŋ ekasmiŋ yeva vā ummagga -- sadisaŋ mahā -- vivaraŋ; -- bbaja (nt.) [Etym. uncertain, according to Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 79 to vaja "a pen," cp. Marāthī vraja "a station of cowherds," Hindi vraja "a cow -- pen"; the Vedic giribhraj˚ (RV. x.68. 1) "aus Bergen hervorbrechend" (Roth) suggests relation to bhraj, to break=bhañj=Lat. frango]=˚guhā, a mountain cave or gorge, serving as shelter & hiding place J iii.479 (trsl. by Morris loc. cit. a hill -- run, a cattle -- run on the hills); v.260 (sīhassa, a lion's abode) expld as kañcanaguhā ibid. (for kandara -- guhā? cp. Kern, Toev. p. 130). S ii.185. Also N. for Rājagaha Sn 408; Dpvs v.5; in its Sk. form Girivraja, which Beal, Buddh. Records ii.149 expls as "the hill -- surrounded," cp. ib. ii.158 (=Chin. Shan -- Shing), 161; see also Cunningham, Ancient Geogr. 462. It does not occur in the Avadānas; -- rājā king of the mountains, of Mount Sineru Miln 21, 224; -- sikhara mountain top, peak VvA 4; (kañcana˚, shining). Giriyā
Giriyā
(pl.) in dhamma˚ & brahma˚, a name of certain theatrical entertainers Miln 191. Gilati
Gilati
[Vedic girati & gilati Dhtp 488: adane; cp. gala throat, Ohg. kela, E. gullet; see note on gala] to swallow, to devour: mā Rāhu gilī caraŋ antalikkhe S i.51 = VvA 116; mā gilī lohagulaŋ Dh 371; -- J iii.338; Miln 106. -- pp. gilita : gilitabaḷisa having swallowed the hook S iv.159. Cp. ud˚, o˚, pari˚; -- Caus. gilāpeti to make swallow J iii.338. Gilana
Gilana
(nt.) [fr. gilati] devouring, swallowing Miln 101. Gilāna
Gilāna
(adj.) [Sk. glāna, glā to fade, wither, be exhausted, expld suitably by "hāsa -- kkhaya" at Dhtp 439] sick, ill Vin i.51, 53, 61, 92, 142 sq., 176, 302 sq.; ii.165, 227 sq.; iv.88, etc.; S v.80, 81 (bāḷha˚ very ill); A i.120 = Pug 27; A iii.38, 143 sq.; iv.333; v.72 sq.; J i.150; ii.395; iii.392; PvA 14; VvA 76.

-- ālaya pretence of illness J vi.262. -- upaṭṭhāka (f. -- ī) one who attends to the sick Vin i.92, 121 sq.; 142 sq.; 161, 303, A i.26; iii.143 sq.; -- ˚bhatta food for the attendant or nurse Vin i.292 sq.; -- upaṭṭhāna tending or nursing the sick D iii.191; -- paccaya support or help for the sick PvA 144; usually with ˚bhesajja medicine for the sick in freq. formula of cīvarapiṇḍapāta˚ (the requisites of the bhikkhu): see cīvara; -- pucchaka one who asks (i. e. enquires after) the sick Vin iv.88 = 115, 118; -- bhatta food for the sick Vin i.142 sq.; 292 sq.; 303; Vism 66. -- bhesajja medicine Vin i.292 sq.; -- sālā a hall for the sick, hospital S iv.210; A iii.142; Vism 259. Gilānaka
Gilānaka
(adj.) 1. ill ( = gilāna) A iii.142; -- 2. fit for an illness (bhesajja medicine) Miln 74. Gilāyati
Gilāyati:
see āgilāyati. Giha
Giha
[ = gaha] only in agiha (adj.) houseless, homeless (=pabbajita, a Wanderer); poet. for anagāra Sn 456, 464, 487, 497. Gihin
Gihin
(adj. -- n.) [fr. gaha, cp. gaha & geha; Sk. gṛhin] a householder, one who leads a domestic life, a layman (opp. pabbajita & paribbājaka). Geu. sg. gihissa (D iii.147, 167) & gihino (D iii.174); n. pl. gihī; in cpds. gihī˚ & gihi˚ (usually the latter). gihī agāraŋ ajjhāvasantā A i.49; gihī odātavasanā (clad in white robes as distinguished fr. kasāva -- vasanā the yellowrobed i. e. bhikkhus) D i.211; iii.117, 124, 210; M i.340; iii.261; A i.74. -- Contrasted with pabbajitā: A i.69; D iii.147, 167, 179. gihī dhaññena dhanena vaḍḍhati D iii.165. -- Other passages in general: S ii.120, 269; iii.11; iv.180, 300 sq.; A ii.65; 69 (kāmabhogī); iv.438 (do.); D iii.124 (do.); A iii.211 (sambodhiparāyano); iv.345 sq.; D iii.167 sq.; 171 sq.; 176, 192; Sn 220, 221, 404; Dh 74; Miln 19, 264; DhA i.16 (gihīniyāma); Sdhp 376, 426; PvA 13 (gihīkālato paṭṭhāya from the time of our laymanship); DhA ii.49 (id.).

-- kicca a layman's or householder's duties Pv iv.142 ( = kuṭumba -- kiccāni PvA 240); -- dhamma a layman's duty A iii.41; -- parisā a congregation of laymen S i.111; M i.373; A iii.184; -- bandhanāni (pl.) a layman's fetters Sn 44 (=Nd2 228 puttā ca dāsī dāsā ca, etc.); -- byañjanāni (pl.) characteristics of a layman, or of a man of the world (w. ref. to articles of dress & ornament) Sn 44, 64 (=Nd2 229); Miln 11; -- bhūta as a householder D ii.196; -- bhoga riches of a worldly man S iii.93; It 90; -- linga characteristic of a layman DhA ii.61. -- saŋsagga association with laymen A iii.116, 258; -- saŋyojana the impediments of a householder (cp. ˚bandhanāni) M i.483; -- sukha the welfare of a g. A i.80. Gīta
Gīta
[pp. of gāyati] 1. (pp.) sung, recited, solemnly pro- claimed, enunciated: mantapadaŋ gītaŋ pavuttaŋ D i.104 (cp. gira). -- 2. (nt.) singing, a song; grouped under vācasikā khiḍḍā, musical pastimes at Nd2 219; SnA 86. Usually combd with nacca, dancing: A i.261; Vv8110 as naca gītādi J i.61; VvA 131; referring to nacca -- gīta -- vādita, dancing with singing & instrumental accompaniment D iii.183 (under samajja, kinds of festivities); Vv 324. Same with visūkadassana, pantomimic show at D i.5≈(cp. DA i.77; KhA 36).

-- rava sound of song Mhvs vii.30; -- sadda id. J iv.3; Dhs 621; DhA i.15; -- ssara id. Vin ii.108; A iii.251; J iii.188. -- 252 -- Gītaka
Gītaka
(nt.) & gītikā (f.) a little song J iii.507. Gīvā
Gīvā
(f.) [Sk. grīvā, to *gṷer to swallow, as signifying throat: see note on gala for etym.] the neck Sn 609; J i.74 (˚ŋ pasāreti to stretch forth), 167 (pasārita˚), 207, 222, 265; iii.52; VvA 27 (mayūra˚), 157; DA i.296 (˚āya kuṇḍa -- daṇḍaka -- bandhana, as exhibition & punishment): similarly in the sense of "life" (hinting at decapitation) J ii.300 (˚ŋ karissāmi "I shall go for his neck"); iv.431 = v.23. -- Syn. kaṇṭha the primary meaning of which is neck, whereas gīvā orig. throat. Gīveyyaka
Gīveyyaka
(nt.) [cp. Sk. graiveyaka] necklace, an orna- ment for the neck (orig. "something belonging to the neck," cp. necklet, bracelet, etc.) Vin i.287; A i.254 sq. ( = Vism 247, where gīveyya only); 257; iii.16; J iv.395 (gīveyya only); v.297; vi.590; VvA 104. Guggula
Guggula
[?] a kind of perfume J vi.537. Gucch˚
Gucch˚
in jigucchati (Des. of gup = Sk. jugupsate) to detest, see s. v. Guñjā
Guñjā
(f.) a plant (Abrus precatorius); the redness of its berries is referred to in similes; DhA iv.133 (˚vaṇṇāni akkhīni). See also jiñjuka. Guṇa
Guṇa1
[Non -- Aryan?] 1. a string, a cord -- (a) of a robe, etc., in (kāya -- bandhanaŋ) saguṇaŋ katvā to make tight by tying with a knot Vin i.46 (Vin. Texts: "laying the garments on top of each other," wrongly construed); ii.213 (trsln. "folding his garments"); cp. guṇaka. -> (b) of musical instruments Vin i.182 = A iii.375 (vīṇā)., -- (c) of a bow, in aguna stringless J v.433 (dhanu). -> 2. (a strand of a rope as) constituent part, ingredient, component, element; with numerals it equals -- fold, e. g. pañca kāmaguṇā the 5 strands of kāma, or 5 -- fold craving (see kāma); ekaguṇaŋ once, diguṇaŋ twice Sn 714; diguṇaŋ nivāpaŋ pacitvā cooking a double meal VvA 63; catugguṇa fourfold, of a sanghāti D ii.128; S ii.221, cp. Rhys Davids, Dialogues ii.145. aṭṭhaguṇa (hirañña) Th. 2, 153; aneka -- bhāgena guṇena seyyo many times or infinitely better Pv iv.19; sataguṇena sahassa˚ 100 and 1,000 times PvA 41; asankheyyena guṇena infinitely, inconceivably Miln 106; sataguṇaŋ sahassaguṇaŋ Vism 126. -- 3. (a part as) quality, esp. good quality, advantage, merit J i.266; ii.112; iii.55, 82. -- lobha˚ Sn 663; sādhu˚ Sn 678; sīla˚ J i.213; ii.112; Buddha˚ J ii.111; pabbajita˚ J i.59.

-- aggatā state of having the best qualities, superiority Dpos iv.1. -- aḍḍha rich in virtue Sdhp 312, 561. -- upeta in khuppipāsāhi guṇûpeto as PvA 10 is to be read khuppipās' âbhibhūto peto. -- kathā "tale of virtue," praise J i.307; ii.2. -- kittana telling one's praises PvA 107, 120. -- guṇika in phrase tantākulajāta g -- g -- jāta at S iv.158, see under guḷā -- guṇṭhika. Guṇa
Guṇa2
[for which often guḷa with common substitution of ḷ for ṇ, partly due to dissimilation, as mālāguḷa > mālāguṇa; cp. Sk. guṇikā tumour: guḷa and gaḷa, veḷu: veṇu, and note on gala] a ball, a cluster, a chain (?), in anta˚ the intestines; M i.185 -- , Kh 11., cp. KhA 57 for expln. -- mālāguṇa a garland or chain (cluster) of flowers Dh 53 (but ˚guḷa at J i.73, 74). See guḷa3. Guṇa
Guṇa2
[Derivation unknown. Cp. Sk. ghuna] a wood- worm J iii.431 (˚pāṇaka). Guṇaka
Guṇaka
(adj.) [to guḷa1, cp. guḷika?] having a knot at the end, thickened at the top (with ref. to kāyabandha, see guṇa 1a) Vin ii.136, cp. Vin. Texts ii.143. Guṇavant
Guṇavant
(adj.) [to guṇa1] possessed of good qualities, virtuous Pv ii.971 ( = jhān' ādiguṇa -- yutta); PvA 62 (mahā˚). Guṇi
Guṇi
(f.) [of adj. guṇin, having guṇas or guḷas, i. e. strings or knots] a kind of armour J vi.449 (g. vuccate kavacaŋ C.); see Kern, Toev. p. 132. Guṇṭhika
Guṇṭhika
(in meaning = guṇṭhita) one who is covered with or wrapped up in, only in ahi˚ a snake -- trainer (like a Laocoon). See details under ahi or J ii.267; iii.348 (text: ˚guṇḍika); J iv.308 (ahi -- kuṇḍika, v. l. SS guṇṭhika); iv.456 (text ˚guṇṭika; v. l. BB ˚kuṇḍika). Also in guḷā -- guṇṭhika (q. v.). Guṇṭhima
Guṇṭhima
covered over (?), see pāli˚. Guṇṭheti
Guṇṭheti
[cp. Sk. guṇṭhayati Dhtp (563) & Dhtm (793) give both roots guṇṭh & guṇḍ as syn. of veṭh] to cover, to veil, to hide; pp. guṇṭhita in paŋsu˚ covered with dust Pv ii.35 (in Hardy's conjecture for kuṇṭhita, q. v.). Also in cpd. paliguṇṭhita obstructed, entangled Sn 131 (mohena) where v. l. BB kuṇṭhita. Cp. o˚. Guṇḍika
Guṇḍika
see guṇṭhika. Gutta
Gutta
[Sk. gupta, pp. of gup in med. -- pass. sense, cp. gopeti). -- I. as pp. guarded, protected. -- (a) lit. nagaraŋ guttaŋ a well -- guarded city Dh 315 = Th 1, 653, 1005; Devinda˚ protected by the Lord of gods Vv 308. -- (b) fig. (med.) guarded, watchful, constrained; guarded in, watchful as regards . . . (with loc.) S iv.70 (agutta & sugutta, with danta, rakkhita); A iii.6 (atta˚ self -- controlled); Sn 250 (sotesu gutto+ vijitindriyo), 971 (id.+yatacārin); Dh 36 (cittaŋ). -> II. as n. agent (=Sk. goptṛ, cp. kata in kāla -- kata= kāḷaŋ kartṛ) one who guards or observes, a guardian, in Dhammassa gutta Dh 257, observer of the Norm (expl. DhA iii.282: dhammojapaññāya samannāgata), cp. dhammagutta S i.222.

-- indriya one whose senses are guarded; with well-guarded senses Sn 63 (+rakkhita -- mānasāno; expl. SnA: chassu indriyesu gopitindriyo); Nd2 230; Vv 5015; Pv iv.132; -- dvāra "with guarded doors" always in combn with indriyesu g -- d. having the doors of the senses guarded, practising. self -- control D i.63≈(expld DA i.182 by pihita -- dvāro), 70; S ii.218; iv.103, 112, 119 sq., 175; Sn 413 (+susaŋvuta); Pug 24. Cp. foll.; -- dvāratā (f. abstr. to prec.) in indriyesu g˚ self constraint, control over (the doors of) one's senses, always combd with bhojane mattaññutā (moderation in taking food) D iii.213; It 24; Pug 20, 24; Dhs 1347; PvA 163. Opp. a˚ lack of sense -- control D iii.213; It 23; Dhs 1345. Gutti
Gutti
(f.) [Vedic gupti] protection, defence, guard; watchfulness. -- (a) lit. of a city A iv.106 sq. -- (b) fig. of the senses in indriyānaŋ gutti Dh 375; Pug 24 (+gopanā); Dhs 1348; Sdhp 341 (agutti); Vin iv.305; A ii.72 (atta˚); also in pl.: guttīsu ussuka keen in the practice of watchfulness D iii.148. Guttika
Guttika
[fr. last] a guardian, one who keeps watch over, in nagara˚ the town -- watchman, the chief -- constable PvA 4; Miln 345. Gumpha
Gumpha
see ogumpheti. Gumba
Gumba
[Sk. gulma, *glem to *gel, to be thick, to con- glomerate, cp. Lat. glomus (ball), globus, etc. See guḷa] 1. a troop, a heap, cluster, swarm. Of soldiers: Vin i.345; of fish (maccha˚) D i.84 = M i.279=ii.22= A i.9. -- 2. a thicket, a bush, jungle; the lair of an animal in a thicket (sayana˚ J iv.256) S iii.6 (eḷagalā˚); J iii.52 (nivāsa˚, vasana˚); VvA 301 (gaccha˚ underwood); J i.149, 167; ii.19; iii.55; iv.438; VvA 63, 66. Cp. pagumba=gumba, in vana˚ Sn 233 (see KhA 192). veḷu˚ Th 1,919. -- Acc. gumbaŋ (adv.) thickly, in masses balled together Miln 117 (of clouds).

-- antara thicket VvA 233. -- 253 -- Gumbiya
Gumbiya
(adj.) [fr. gumba] one of the troop (of soldiers) Vin i.345. Guyha
Guyha
[ger. of guh = Vedic guhya] 1. adj. to be hidden, hidden in ˚bhaṇḍaka the hidden part (of the body) DhA iv.197. -- 2. (nt.) that which is hidden; lit. in vattha˚ hidden by the dress, i. e. the pudendum D i.106; Sn 1022, etc. (see vattha), fig. a secret Miln 92; guyhaŋ pariguyhati to keep a secret A iv.31; Nd2 510. Guru
Guru
(adj. -- n.) [a younger form of garu (q. v.); Sk. guru] venerable, reverend, a teacher VvA 229, 230 (˚dakkhiṇā a teacher's fee); PvA 3 (˚janā venerable persons); Sdhp 227 (˚ûpadesa), 417. Guḷa
Guḷa1
[Sk. guḍa and gulī ball, guṭikā pill, guṇikā tumour; to *gleu to make into a ball, to conglomerate. Cp. Sk. glauḥ ball; Gr. glouto/s; Ohg. chliuwa; Ger. kugel, kloss; E. clot, cleat; also *gel with same meaning: Sk. gulma tumour, gilāyu glandular swelling; cp. Lat. glomus, globus; Ger. klamm; E. clamp, clump. A root guḷ is given by Dhtp 576,77 in meaning of "mokkha"] a ball, in cpds. sutta˚ a ball of string ( = Ohg. chliuwa) D i.54=; M iii.95; PvA 145; ayo˚ an iron globe Dh 308; DA i.84; loha˚ of copper Dh 371; sela˚ a rockball, i. e. a heavy stone -- ball J i.147.

-- kīḷā play at ball DhA i.178; iii.455; iv.124. -- parimaṇḍala the circumference of a ball, or (adj.) round, globular, like a ball PvA 253. Guḷa
Guḷa2
(Non -- Aryan?] sugar, molasses Vin i.210, 224 sq., 245. -- saguḷa sugared, sweet, or "with molasses" J vi.324 (saguḷāni, i. e. saguḷa -- pūve pancakes).

-- āsava sugar -- juice VvA 73. -- odaka s. -- water Vin i.226. -- karaṇa a sugar factory ibid. 210. -- pūvaka sweet cake Mhvs 10. 3. -- phāṇita molasses VvA 179. Guḷa
Guḷa3
[for guṇa2, due to distance dissimilation in maṇi- guṇa and mālāguṇa> maṇigula and mālāgula; cp. similarly in meaning and form Ohg. chliuwa>Ger. knäuel] a cluster, a chain (?), in maṇi˚ a cluster of jewels, always in simile with ref. to sparkling eyes "maniguḷa -- sadisāni akkhīni" J i.149; iii.126, 184 (v. l. BB ˚guḷika); iv.256 (v. l. id.); mālā˚ a cluster, a chain of flowers, a garland J i.73, 54; puppha˚ id. Dh. 172, 233. Guḷā
Guḷā
(f.) [to guḷa1] a swelling, pimple, pustule, blight, in cpd. guḷā -- guṇṭhika -- jāta D ii.55, which is also to be read at A ii.211 (in spite of Morris, prelim. remarks to A ii.4, whose trsln. is otherwise correct) = guḷā -- gunṭḥita covered with swellings (i. e. blight); cp. similar expression at DhA iii.297 gaṇḍāgaṇḍa ( -- jāta) "having become covered all over with pustules (i. e. rash)." All readings at corresp. passages are to be corrected accordingly, viz., S ii.92 (guḷigandhika˚); iv.158 (guṇaguṇika˚); the reading at Dpvs xii.32, also v. l. SS at A ii.211, is as quoted above and the whole phrase runs: tantākulajātā guḷāguṇṭhikajātā "entangled like a ball of string and covered with blight." Guḷika
Guḷika
(adj.) [to guḷa3 = guṇa, cp. also guṇaka] like a chain, or having a chain, (nt. & f.) a cluster, a chain in maṇi˚ a string of jewels, a pearl necklace J iii.184 (v. l. BB for ˚guḷa); iv.256; Vism 285 (+muttā -- guḷikā). Guḷikā
Guḷikā
(f.) [to guḷa1; cp. Sk. guṭikā pill, guṇikā tumour] a little ball S v.462 (satta -- kolaṭṭhi -- mattiyo guḷikā, pl.); Th 2, 498 (kolaṭṭhimatta g˚ balls of the size of a jujube), cp. ThA 289. Guhanā
Guhanā
(f. abstr. to gūhati) hiding, concealing, keeping secret Vbh 358 (+pariguhanā). Also as gūhanā, q. v. Guhā
Guhā
(f.) [Vedic guhā, guh, gūhati to hide (q. v.) Dhtp 337: saŋvaraṇa] a hiding place, a cave, cavern (cp. kandara & see giriguhā); fig. the heart (in ˚āsaya). According to Bdhgh. (on Vin i.58, see Vin. Texts i.174) "a hut of bricks, or in a rock, or of wood." Vin i.58, 96, 107, 239, 284; ii.146; iii.155; iv.48 (cp. sattapaṇṇi -- guhā); Sn 772, 958; J ii.418; vi.574; Vv 5016.

-- āsaya hiding in the heart; or the shelter of the heart A iv.98 (maccupāso+); J v.367 (id.); Dh 37 (cittaŋ; see DhA i.304). Gū
Gū
( -- ˚) [fr. gam, cp. ˚ga] going, having gone (through), being skilled or perfected in. See addha˚, anta˚, chanda˚, dhamma˚, paṭṭha˚, pāra, veda˚. Gūtha
Gūtha
[Sk. gūtha; probably to Lat. bubino, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.] excrements, faeces, dung. As food for Petas frequently mentioned in Pv; (cp. Stede, Peta Vatthu 24 sq.), as a decoction of dung also used for medicinal purposes (Vin i.206 e. g.). Often combn with mutta (urine): Pv i.91; PvA 45, 78; DA i.198.

-- kaṭāha an iron pot for defecation Vin iv.265. -- kalala dung & mire J iii.393; -- kīḷana playing with excrements Vism 531. -- kūpa a privy (cp. karīsa) M i.74; Sn 279; Pv ii.316; Pug 36; J vi.370; Vism 54. -- khādaka living on faeces J ii.211 (˚pāṇaka) PvA 266; -- gata having turned to dung It 90; -- gandhin smelling of excrements Pv ii.315; -- ṭṭhāna a place for excrementation Th 1, 1153; -- naraka = foll. Vism 501; -- niraya the mirepurgatory VvA 226; Sdhp 194; -- pāṇa an insect living on excrement (=˚khādakapāṇa) J ii.209, 212; -- bhakkha feeding on stercus M iii.168; PvA 192; DhA ii.61; -- bhānin of foul speech A i.128; Pug 29 (Kern, Toev. s. v. corrects into kūṭa˚?). Gūthaka
Gūthaka
"a sort of gūtha," excretion, secretion, rheum, in akkhi˚ and kaṇṇa˚ (of eye & ear) Sn 197 (cp. SnA 248; Vism 345 sq.). Gūḷha & gūḷhaka
Gūḷha
& gūḷhaka (adj.) [pp. of gūhati] hidden, secret Vin ii.98 (gūḷha -- ko salākagāho). Gūhati
Gūhati
[Sk. gūhati, pp. gūḍha; see guyha, guhā, etc.] to hide, to conceal. See paṭi˚, pari˚. -- Caus. gūhayati Sdhp 189 (gūhayaŋ ppr.). Cp. gūḷha. Gūhana
Gūhana
(nt.) hiding, concealment Sdhp 65 (laddhi˚ -- citta). Gūhanā
Gūhanā
(f.) [abstr. fr. gūhati] = gūhanā (q. v.) Pug. 19. Cp. pari˚. Geṇḍuka
Geṇḍuka
a ball for playing. The SS spelling is in all places bheṇḍuka, which has been taken into the text by the editors of J. and DhsA. The misspelling is due to a misreading of Singhalese bh>g; cp. spelling parābhetvā for parāgetvā. -- bheṇḍukena kīḷi J iv.30; bhūmiyaŋ pahata -- bheṇḍuka (striking against the ground) J iv.30; Vism 143 (pahaṭa -- citra˚) = DhsA 116 (where wrongly pahaṭṭha -- citta -- bheṇḍuka); J v.196 (citra -- bh˚); DhA iii.364. Gedha
Gedha1
[Vedic gṛdhyā, cp. gijjhati] greed. Its connection with craving and worldly attachment is often referred to. Kāmesu g˚ S i.73; Sn 152; A iii.312 sq. (gedho: pañcann' etaŋ kāmaguṇānaŋ adhivacanaŋ). gedhataṇhā S i.15 (v. l. kodha˚); Sn 65, 945, 1098; Th 2, 352; Nd2 231; Dhs 1059 (under lobha), 1136; Nett 18; DhA i.366; PvA 107. -- agedhatā freedom from greed Miln 276. -- See also gedhi & paligedha. Gedha
Gedha2
[ = geha? Kern] a cave A i.154=iii.128 (the latter passage has rodha, cp. v. l. under gedhi). Gedhi
Gedhi
[Sk. gṛdhi, cp. gedha] greed, desire, jealousy, envy: gedhiŋ karoti (c. loc.) to be desirous after M i.330. -- gedhikata in ˚citta (adj.) jealous, envious, ibid. As gedhikatā (f.) vanity, greed, conceit Nd2 585 (v. l. rodhigatā). -- 254 -- Gedhita
Gedhita
[pp. of gijjhati] greedy, in gedhita -- mano greedy- minded Pv ii.82; as nt. greed, in der. gedhifatta (syn. of gedhikatā) Nd2 585. Geyya
Geyya
(nt.) [grd. of gāyati, Sk. geya] a certain style of Buddhist literature consisting of mixed prose & verse. It is only found in the ster. enum of the Scriptures in their ninefold division, beginning suttaŋ geyyaŋ veyyākaraṇaŋ. See under navanga. Geruka
Geruka
(nt.) & gerukā (f.) [Sk. gairika] yellow ochre (Bdhgh suvaṇṇa˚ cp. Sk. kañcana˚ & svarṇa˚), red chalk used as colouring Vin i.203; ii.151; A i.210; Miln 133 (˚cuṇṇa). Freq. in ˚parikamma a coating of red chalk, red colouring Vin ii.117, 151, 172; ˚parikammakata "coated with red colouring" Vin i.48; ii.218. Gelañña
Gelañña
(nt.) [n -- abstr. fr. gilāna] sickness, illness D ii.99; A i.219; iii.298; iv.333 sq.; Vism 321, 466, 478. Geha
Geha
(nt.) [Sk. geha = gṛha, to gṛh, gaṇhāti; cp. gaha, gihin, ghara; see also gedha2] a dwelling, hut, house; the household J i.145, 266, 290; ii.18, 103, 110, 155 vi.367; Vism 593; PvA 22, 62, 73, 82; fig. of kāya (body) Th 1, 184=Dh 154. -- Appld to a cowshed at Miln 396.

-- angana the open space in front of the house VvA 6; -- jana (sg. collective) the members of the household, the servants PvA 16, 62, 93; -- jhāpana incendiarism Vism 326. -- ṭṭhāna a place for a dwelling DhA iii.307; -- dvāra the house door PvA 61; -- nissita (adj.) concerning the house, connected with (the house and) worldly life Sn 280 (pāpiccha); It 117 (vitakka); cp. ˚sita; -- patana the falling of the house J iii.118. -- pavesana ( -- mangala) (the ceremony of) entering a new hut DhA iii.307; -- piṭṭhi the back of the house PvA 78; -- rakkhika keeping (in the) house, staying at home VvA 76 (dārakā); -- vigata (nt.) the resources of the house, worldly means, riches Th 2, 327 ( = upakaraṇa ThA 234); -- sita (*śrita)=˚nissita, connected with worldly life (opp. nekkhamma, renunciation). Of chandā & vitakkā (pl.) M i.123; domanassa & somanassa (grief & pleasure) S iv.232=Miln 45; Vbh 381; DhsA 194; dhammā, etc. S iv.71; Vbh 380; Nett 53. Go
Go
(m. -- f.) [Vedic go, Lat. bos, Gr. bou_s, Ohg. chuo, Ags. cū = E. cow] a cow, an ox, bull, pl. cattle. For f. cp. gāvī; see also gava˚ for cpds. -- Sg. nom. go (Sn 580, also in composition, cp. aja -- go -- mahisādi PvA 80=pasū); gen. gavassa (M i.429); instr. gavena, gāvena; acc. gavaŋ, gāvan; abl. gavamhā, gavā (D i.201=A ii.95= Pug 69); loc. gavamhi, gāvimhi (SnA 323), gave (Sn 310). -- Pl. nom. gāvo (D i.141; M i.225; A i.205; ii.42 sq.; Sn 20, 296, 307; J i.295); gen. gonaŋ A ii.75 (cp. Vedic gonām), gavaŋ (J iv.172, cp. gavaŋ pati), gunnaŋ (A i.229, ii.75; v.271; J i.194; iii.112; iv.223); instr. gohi (Sn 33); acc. gāvo (M i.225; A i.205; Sn 304; Dh 19, 135); abl. gohi; loc. gosu, gavesu. -- See also gava, gavesati, goṇa.

-- kaṇṭaka the hoof of an ox, in ˚haṭā bhūmi, trampled by the feet of cattle Vin i.195; A i.136 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.34); -- kaṇṇa a large species of deer J v.406 ( = gaṇin), 416 (khagga+); DhsA 331 (gavaya+); cp. next; -- kāṇā (f.) = gokaṇṇa D iii.38=53; -- kula (nt.) a cow pen, a station of cattle S iv.289; -- gaṇa a herd of cattle M i.220; A i.229; J ii.127; DhA i.175; VvA 311; -- ghaŋsikā a cow -- hide (?). Vin ii.117 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.98); -- ghātaka one who kills cows, a butcher D ii.294 (in simile); M i.58, 244, 364 (˚sūnā, slaughter -- house); S ii.255; iv.56; A iii.302, 380; J v.270; Vism 348 (in simile). -- cara I. Lit. A. (noun -- m.) pasture, lit. "a cow's grazing," search after food; fodder, food, subsistence (a) of animals: J i.221; iii.26; Dh 135 (daṇḍena gopālo gāvo pāceti gocaraŋ: with a stick the cowherd drives the cattle to pasture). Sīho gocarāya pakkamati "the lion goes forth for his huut" A ii.33= iii.121; gocarāya gacchati to go feeding, to graze Sn 39; J i.243; gocare carati to go feeding, to feed J i.242.-> (b) metaph. of persons, esp. the bhikkhu: pucchitabba gocara (and agocara) "enquiries have to be made concerning the fitness or otherwise of his pasturage (i. e. the houses in which he begs for food)" Vin ii.208; samaṇo gocarato nivatto an ascetic returned from his "grazing" Pv iv.142: Similarly at Vism 127, where a suitable g. -- gama ranks as one of the 7 desiderata for one intent on meditation. -- B. (adj.) ( -- ˚) feeding on or in, living in; metaph. dealing with, mixing with. vana˚ living in the woods Pv ii.65; vāri˚ (in water) Sn 605; jala˚ (id.) J ii.158 (opp. thala˚). Vesiyā˚ (etc.) associating with v. Vin i.70. -- II. Applied. A. (noun -- m. or nt.) a "field" (of sense perception, etc.), sphere, object; -- ˚ food for, an object of (a) psychologically indriyānaŋ nānāgocarāni various spheres of sense -- perception S v.218; sense -- object (=ārammaṇaŋ) Ps i.180; ii.97; 150 sq.; DhsA 314, 315 (sampatta˚ physical contact with an object, gandha˚ smell -- contact, i. e. sensation); indriya˚ Sdhp 365. -- (b) ethically: ariyānaŋ gocare ratā "finding delight in the pasture of the good," walking in the ways of the good Dh 22; vimokho yesaŋ gocaro "whose pasture is liberty" Dh 92=Th 1, 92. Esp. in phrase ācāra -- gocara -- sampanna "pasturing in the field of good conduct" D i.63=It 118; M i.33; S v.187; It. 96; analysed as Dvandva cpd. at Vbh 246, 247, but cp. pāpācāra -- gocara Sn 280, 282. This phrase (ācāra -- gocara) is also discussed in detail at Vism 19, where 3 kinds of gocarā are distinguished, viz. upanissaya˚, ārakkha˚, upanibandha˚. So also in contrast w. agocara, an unfit pasture, or an unfit, i. e. bad, sphere of life, in gocare & agocare carati to move in a congenial or uncongenial sphere A iii.389; iv.345 sq.; D iii.58=77; S v.147; Vbh 246, 247 (expl. w. vesiyā˚ etc., cp. above=having bad associations). -- B. (adj.) -- ˚: belonging to, dependent on, falling to the share of: eta˚ dependent on this M i.319; sattasaddhamma˚, moving in the sphere of the seven golden rules S iii.83; rūpa˚ to be perceived by sight J i.396; Nibbāna˚ belonging to N. Sdhp 467. -- ˚kusala (adj.) skilled in (finding proper) food; clever in right living -- ˚ behaving properly in, exercising properly M i.220=A v.347 (of a cowherd driving out his cattle); S iii.266 sq. (samādhi˚); A iii.311 (do.) v.352 sq. (w. ref. to cattāro satipaṭṭhānā); -- ˚gahaṇa the taking of food, feeding J i.242; -- ˚gāma a village for the supply of food (for the bhikkhus) PvA 12, 42; -- ˚ṭṭhāna pasturage J iii.52; -- ˚pasuta intent on feeding J iii.26; -- ˚bhūmi pasturage, a common DhA iii.60; -- ˚visaya (the sphere of) an object of sense S v.218; Vbh 319; -- caraṇa pasturing J vi.335; -- ṭṭha (nt.) [Sk. goṣṭha to sthā to stand; cp. Lat. stabulum, stable; super -- stes; Goth. awistr] a cow -- stable, cow -- pen M i.79; J iv.223; -- pa [Sk. gopa, cp. gopati] a cowherd, herdsman Sn 18; Dh 19; J iv.364 (a robber); Vism 166 (in simile); DhA 157, f. gopī Sn 22, 32; -- pakhuma (adj.) having eyelashes like a heifer D ii.18; iii.144, 167 sq.; VvA 162, 279 (=āḷārapamha); -- pada a cow's footprint, a puddle A iii.188; iv.102; Miln 287; also ˚padaka A iii.188 v. l.; DA i.283; -- pariṇāyaka leader of the cows, Ep. of a bull (gopitā+) M i.220, 225; -- pāla a cowherd (usually as ˚ka) Dh 135; -- pālaka=prec. Vin i.152, 243 sq.; M i.79, 115 sq., 220=A v.347; M i.333; S iv.181; A i.205 ( -- ˚uposatha); Miln 18, 48; Vism 279 (in comparison); DhA iii.59; -- pitā "father (protector) of the cows"=gavaŋ pati, Ep. of a bull M i.220 (+˚pariṇāyaka); -- pī f. of gopa, q. v.; -- pura (nt.) [Sk. gopura] the gate of a city J vi.433; Miln 1, 67, 330; Bdhd 138; -- balivadda in ˚nayena; in the expression gobalivadda (black -- cattle -- bull) i. e. by an accumulation of words VvA 258; -- bhatta cows' fodder J iv.67; -- maṇḍala ox -- beat, ox -- round, Cp. iii.151 (as gā˚), quoted J i.47 (cp. assa -- m˚); SnA 39; also in phrase ˚paribbūḷha Sn 301 (expld by SnA 320 as goyūthehi parikiṇṇa); J vi.27; at M i.79 however it means the cowherds or peasants (see note M i.536: gopāladārakā or gāmadārakā to v. l. gāmaṇḍala) cp. gāmaṇḍala; -- maya (m. nt.) cowdung M i.79; A i.209, 295; v.234, 250, 263 sq.; Nett 23; DhA i.377. -- ˚pāṇaka a coprophagan, dor beetle J ii.156; -- ˚piṇda a lump of cowdung J i.242; -- ˚bhakkha eating cowdung D i.166≈; -- māyu a jackal Pgdp 49; -- mutta (and ˚ka) a precious stone of light red colour VvA iii; DhsA 151; -- medaka=gomuttaka VvA 111.; -- medha a cow sacrifice, in ˚yañña SnA 323; -- yūtha a herd of cows SnA 322; DhA i.323; -- rakkhā (f.) cow -- keeping, tending cattle, usually combd with kasī, agriculturing M i.85; Pv i.56; J i.338; ii.128; given as a superior profession (ukkaṭṭha -- kamma) Vin iv.6. -- ravaka the bellowing of a cow M i.225; -- rasa (usually pl.) produce of the cow, enumd in set of five, viz. khīra, dadhi, takka, navanīta, sappi (milk, cream, buttermilk, butter, ghee) Vin i.244; DhA i.158, 323, 397; VvA 147; SnA 322; -- rūpa (collect.) cattle J i.194; iv.173; Miln 396 (bull); -- lakkhaṇa fortune telling from cows D i.9≈; -- vaccha (khīra˚ & takka˚) Vism 28. -- vatika [Sk. govratin] one who lives after the mode of cows, of bovine practices M i.387; Nett 99 (cp. govata DhsA 355, and Dhs. trsl. p. 261); -- vikattana (and ˚vikantana; Sk. vikṛntana) a butcher's knife M i.244, 449; A iii.380 Sdhp 381 (vikatta only); -- vittaka one whose wealth is cattle J i.191; -- vinda the supt. of cowherds A iii.373; -- sappi ghee from cow's milk Vin iii.251; DhsA 320; -- sālā cow -- stable A i.188; -- singa a cow's horn Vism 254. -- sita mixed with milk VvA 179; -- sīla=govatika DhsA 355; -- sīsa (nt.) an excellent kind of sandal wood PvA 215 (cp. Sp. AvS i.67, 68, 109); -- hanuka the jaw bone of a cow, in ˚ena koṭṭāpeti (koṭṭh˚ J) to massage with a cow's jaw bone Vin ii.266, J iv.188; v.303. -- 255 -- Goṭaviya
Goṭaviya
(goṭavisa Text) v. l. J vi.225, part of a boat, the poop (expl. ib. p. 226 by nāvāya pacchimabandho). Goṭhaphala
Goṭhaphala
a medicinal seed [Sk. gotravṛkṣa? Kern] Vin i.201. Goṇa
Goṇa1
[The Sanskrit goṇa, according to B. R., is derived from the Pali] an ox, a bullock S iv.195 sq.; J i.194; iv.67; Pv i.82; PvA 39, 40; VvA 63 (for ploughing); DA i.163; DhA iii.60. -- ˚sira wild ox J vi. 538( = araññagoṇaka). Goṇa
Goṇa2
= goṇaka2, in ˚santhata (of a pallanka), covered with a woollen rug Vv 818; Pv iii.117; (text saṇṭhita; v. l. BB goṇakatthata, cp. next). Goṇaka
Goṇaka1
[goṇa1] a kind of ox, a wild bull J vi.538 (arañña˚). Goṇaka
Goṇaka2
[Sk. BSk. goṇika, cp. Pischel, Beitr. iii.236; also spelled gonaka] a woollen cover with long fleece (DA i.86: dīghalomako mahākojavo; caturangulādhikāni kira tassa lomāni) D i.7≈; S iii.144; J v.506; Pv ii.128; Th 2, 378 (+tūlika); ThA 253 ( = dīgha -- lomakāḷakojava). -- ˚atthata spread w. a goṇaka -- cover A i.137= iii.50=iv.394; cp. iv.94, 231 (always of a pallanka), See also goṇa2. Goṇisādika
Goṇisādika
an ox -- stall Vin i.240; cp. Vin. Texts ii.121. As gonisādi Vin iii.46. Gotta
Gotta
(nt.) [Vedic gotra, to go] ancestry, lineage. There is no word in English for gotta. It includes all those descended, or supposed to be descended, from a common ancestor. A gotta name is always distinguished from the personal name, the name drawn from place of origin or residence, or from occupation, and lastly from the nick -- name. It probably means agnate rather than cognate. About a score of gotta names are known. They are all assigned to the Buddha's time. See also Rh. D. Dialogues i.27, 195 sq. -- jāti gotta lakkhaṇa Sn 1004; gotta salakkhaṇa Sn 1018; Ādiccā nāma gottena, Sākiyā nāma jātiyā Sn 423; jāti gotta kula J ii.3; jātiyā gottena bhogena sadisa "equal in rank, lineage & wealth" DhA ii.218. -- evaŋ -- gotta (adj.) belonging to such & such an ancestry M i.429; ii.20, 33; kathaŋ˚ of what lineage, or: what is your family name? D i.92; nānā˚ (pl.) of various families Pv ii.916. -- With nāma (name & lineage, or nomen et cognomen): nāmagottaŋ Vin i.93; ii.239; D i.92 (expl. at DA i.257: paññatti -- vasena nāmaŋ paveṇi -- vasena gottaŋ: the name for recognition, the surname for lineage); Sn 648; Vv 8445 (with nāma & nāmadheyya; expl. at VvA 348-> 349: nāmadheyya, as Tisso, Phusso, etc.; gotta, as Bhaggavo Bhāradvājo, etc.). -- gottena by the ancestral name: Vin i.93; D ii.154; Sn 1019; Dh 393; gottato same J i.56. Examples: Ambaṭṭha Kaṇhāyana -- gottena D i.92; Vipassī Koṇḍañño g˚; Kakusandho Kassapo g˚; Bhagavā Gotamo g˚ D ii.3; Nāgito Kassapo g˚ DA i.310; Vasudevo Kaṇho g˚ PvA 94.

-- thaddha conceited as regards descent (+jāti˚ & dhana˚) Sn 104; -- pañha question after one's family name Sn 456; -- paṭisārin (adj.) relying on lineage D i.99 (cp. Dialogues i.122); A v.327 sq.; -- bandhava connected by family ties (ñāti˚+) Nd2 455; -- rakkhita protected by a (good) name Sn 315; VvA 72; -- vāda talk over lineage, boasting as regards descent D i.99. Gottā
Gottā
[n. ag. to gopeti = Sk. goptṛ] f. gottī protectress J v.329. Gotrabhū
Gotrabhū
"become of the lineage"; a technical term used from the end of the Nikāya period to designate one, whether layman or bhikkhu, who, as converted, was no longer of the worldlings (puthujjanā), but of the Ariyas, having Nibbāna as his aim. It occurs in a supplementary Sutta in the Majjhima (Vol. III. 256), and in another, found in two versions, at the end of the Anguttara (A iv.373 and v.23). Defined at Pug 12, 13 & Vism 138; amplified at Ps i.66 -- 68, frequent in P (Tikap. 154 sq., 165, 324 etc.), mentioned at VvA 155. On the use of gotrabhū in medieval psychology see Aung, in Compendium, 66 -- 68. Comp. the use of upanissaya at J i.235. -- ˚ñāṇa, PPA 184; Vism 673. Ā˚ Vism 683. Godhaka
Godhaka
a kind of bird J vi.358. Godharaṇī
Godharaṇī
(f. -- adj.) being able to be paired (of a young cow), or being with calf (?) Sn 26. Godhā
Godhā1
(f.) [Sk. godhā] iguana, a large kind of lizard Vin i.215 -- 16 (˚mukha); D i.9≈(˚lakkhaṇa, cp. DA i.94); J ii.118; iii.52; 538; DhA iii.420. As godha (m.) at J v.489. Dimin. golikā at J ii.147. Godhā
Godhā2
(f.) string of a lute J vi.580 (cp. RV. 8, 58, 9). Godhūma
Godhūma
wheat (usually mentioned with yava, spelt) Miln 267; DA i.163; SnA 323. See dhañña. Gopaka
Gopaka
a guardian, watchman DA i.148; cp. khetta˚. Gopanā
Gopanā
(f.) protecting, protection, care, watchfulness (cp. gutti) Pug 24 (+gutti) Dhs 1347; Miln 8, 243. Gopānasī
Gopānasī
(f.) a beam supporting the framework of a roof, shaped *l; fig. of old people, bent by age (see ˚vanka). Vin iii.65, 81; S ii.263; iii.156; v.43, 228; M i.80; A i.261; iii.364; v.21; Vism 320; DhA ii.190; VvA 188.

-- gaṇā (pl.) a collection of beams, the rafters Vv 784; -- bhogga ( -- sama) bent like a rafter (nārī) J iii.395; -- vanka (gopānasi˚) as crooked as a rafter (of old people, cp. BSk. gopānasī -- vakra AvŚ ii.25n5) S i.117; M i.88; A i.138. Gopita
Gopita
(adj.) [pp. of gopeti] protected, guarded, watched (lit. & fig.) J vi.367; Miln 345; SnA 116 (˚indriya = guttindriya); Sdhp 398. Gopeti
Gopeti
[Sk. gopayati, gup; cp. gutta, gottā] to watch, guard, pot. gopetha Dh 315; -- pp. gopita (q. v.). -- 256 -- Gopphaka
Gopphaka
[Dem. of goppha = Sk. gulpha] the ankle Vin iv.112; A iv.102; J v.472; DhA ii.80, 214; SnA ii.230. Gomika
Gomika
[Sk. gomin] an owner of cows S i.6 = Sn 33, 34. Golikā
Golikā
see godhā1. Golomika
Golomika
(adj.) [inverted diaeretic form fr. Sk. gulma = P. gumba: viz. *golmika> *golmika>golomika] like a cluster; in phrase massuŋ golomikaŋ kārāpeti "to have the beard trimmed into a ball -- or cluster -- shape" Vin ii.134. Bdhgh's expln "like a goat's beard" (cp. Vin. Texts iii.138) is based on pop. etym. go+loma+ ika "cow -- hair -- like," the discrepancy being that go does not mean goat. Goḷaka
Goḷaka
a ball ThA 255 (kīḷā˚). -- Gh. ˚Gha
˚Gha
(adj. -- suffix to ghan) killing, destroying, see hanati. -- iṇagha at Sn 246 is v. l. SS for iṇaghāta. Cp. paṭi˚ & see also ghana2 & ghāta. Ghaŋsati
Ghaŋsati1
[Sk. gharṣati, *ghṛṣ to *gher to rub or grind, cp. Gr. xe/rados, xerma/s, xri/w, enlarged in Lat. frendo = Ags. grindan to grind] to rub, crush, grind, S ii.238; J i.190 (=ghasituŋ? to next?) 216; vi.331. -- Caus. ghaŋsāpeti to rub against, to allow to be rubbed or crushed Vin ii.266. Cp. upani˚, pari˚, & pahaŋsati1. -> Pass. ghaŋsīyati (ghaŋsiyati) to rub (intr.), to be rubbed Vin i.204; ii.112. Ghaŋsati
Ghaŋsati2
[ = haŋsati for Sk. haṛsati, see haŋsati] to be pleased, to rejoice J iv.56 (v. l. ghasati). Cp. pahaŋsati2. Ghaŋsana
Ghaŋsana
rubbing, in pāda -- gh ˚ī a towel for rubbing the feet Vin ii.130. Ghaŋsikā
Ghaŋsikā
in go˚, cow -- hide (?) see go. Ghaccā
Ghaccā
(f.) [fr. hanati, han and ghan] destruction (usually -- ˚) D iii.67 (mūla˚); J i.176 (sakuṇa˚). Ghañña
Ghañña
(adj. -- n.) [fr. Sk. ghana to han, cp. ghānya & hatya] killing, destroying ( -- ˚) see atta˚. Ghaṭa
Ghaṭa1
[Non -- Aryan?] a hollow vessel, a bowl, vase, pitcher. Used for holding water, as well as for other purposes, which are given under pānīya˚ paribhojana˚ vacca˚ at Vin i.157 = 352=M i.207. In the Vinaya freq. combd with kolamba, also a deep vessel: i.209, 213, 225, 286. -- As water -- pitcher: J i.52, 93 (puṇṇa˚), 166; VvA 118, 207, 244 (˚satena nhāto viya); PvA 66 (udaka˚), 179 (pānīya˚), 282. -- In general: S iv.196. For holding a light (in formula antoghaṭe padīpo viya upanissayo pajjalati) J i.235 (cp. kuṭa), PvA 38. Used as a drum J vi.277 (=kumbhathūna); as bhadda˚ Sdhp 319, 329.

-- pamāṇa (adj.) of the size of a large pot J ii.104; PvA 55. Ghaṭa
Ghaṭa2
(m. & f.) [Sk. ghaṭā; conn. with ganthati to bind together] multitude, heap, crowd, dense mass, i. e. thicket, cluster. itthi˚ a crowd of women J iv.316; maccha˚ a swarm of fish J ii.227; vana˚ dense forest J ii.385; iv.56; v.502; vi.11, 519, 564; brahma˚ company of brahmins J vi.99. Ghaṭaka
Ghaṭaka
[Dem. of prec.] 1. a small jar (?) Vin ii.129, 130 (combd w. kataka & sammajjanī); cp. Vin. Texts iii.130. -- 2. the capital of a pillar J i.32 (cp. kumbha). Ghaṭati
Ghaṭati
[Sk. ghaṭate, to granth, cp. ganthati. The Dhtp gives two roots ghaṭ, of which one is expld by "ghāṭane" (No. 554), the other by "īhāyaŋ," i. e. from exertion (No. 98)] to apply oneself to, to exert oneself, to strive; usually in formula uṭṭhahati gh˚ vāyamati M i.86; S i.267 (yamati for vāy˚); Pug 51; or yuñjati gh˚ vāy˚ J iv.131. -- Sdhp 426, 450. Ghaṭana
Ghaṭana
see [Ghaṭṭana] . Ghaṭikā
Ghaṭikā1
(f.) [to ghaṭa1] a small bowl, used for begging alms Th 2, 422 ( = ThA 269: bhikkhā -- kapāla). Ghaṭikā
Ghaṭikā2
(f.) [to ghaṭa2, orig. meaning "knot," cp. gantha & gaṇṭhi, also gaṇḍa ] 1. a small stick, a piece of a branch, a twig J i.331; iv.87 (khadira˚); vi.331; Th 2, 499 ( = khaṇḍa ThA 290). upadhānaghaṭikā J iii.179 (belonging to the outfit of an executioner); pāsa˚ J ii.253 is a sort of magic stick or die (=pāsaka) -> 2. a game of sticks ("tip -- cat" sticks Miln trsl. ii.32). D i.6≈(DA i.85: ghaṭikā ti vuccati dīgha -- daṇḍakena rassa daṇḍaka -- paharaṇa kīḷā, tip -- cat); Vin ii.10; iii.181; M i.266; A v.203; Miln 229. -- 3. a stack of twigs S ii.178, 4; (a stick used as) a bolt Vin ii.120, 208; iii.119; usually as sūci˚ a needle -- shaped stick Vin ii.237 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.106); S iv.290; Ud 52; J i.346. Cp. gaṇḍikādhāna. Ghaṭita
Ghaṭita
[pp. of ghaṭeti] connected, combined Vism 192. Ghaṭī
Ghaṭī
(f.) [to ghaṭa1] a jar DhA i.426. In cpds. also ghaṭi˚.

-- odana rice boiled in a jar DhA i.426; -- kaṭāha a water pot, or rather a bowl for gathering alms (cp. ghaṭikā1) Vin ii.115 ( = ghaṭi -- kapāla Bdhgh); -- kāra a potter DhA i.380; Np. of a kumbhakāra S i.35, 60; M ii.45 sq. (= ˚suttanta, mentioned as such at DhA iii.251); J i.43. Ghaṭīyati
Ghaṭīyati
[Pass. of ghaṭeti] 1. to be connected or con- tinued DhA i.46 (paveṇī na gh.), 174. -- 2. to be obstructed Nd2 102 ( = virujjhati, paṭihaññati). Ghaṭeti
Ghaṭeti
[Denom. fr. ghaṭa2, cp. gantheti] to join, to connect, to unite J i.139; freq. in anusandhiŋ ghaṭetvā adding the connection (between one rebirth & another) J i.220, 308. Ghaṭṭa
Ghaṭṭa
see araghaṭṭa; meaning "rubbed, knocked against" in phrase ghaṭṭa -- pāda -- tala SnA 582 (for ugghaṭṭha); also at Vin iv.46 in def. of vehāsa -- kuṭī (a cell or hut with air, i. e., spacious, airy) as majjhimassa purisassa a -- sīsa -- ghaṭṭā "so that a man of medium height does not knock his head (against the ceiling)"; of uncertain meaning ("beating"?) at J i.454 (v. l. for T. ghota). Ghaṭṭana
Ghaṭṭana
(nt.) [Sk. ghaṭana, to granth, cp. gantha] 1. combining, putting together, combination, composition, J i.220; PA. 312, etc. -- 2. striking, fig. insulting (ghaṭṭana = āsajjana) VvA 55. To meaning "strike" cp. saŋghaṭṭana. Ghaṭṭeti
Ghaṭṭeti
[Sk. ghaṭṭayati] to strike, beat, knock against, touch; fig. to offend, mock, object to. (a) lit. M ii.4 (jannukena; text reads ghatteti, v. l. ghaṭeti); Sn 48 ( = saŋ˚ Nd2 233); J i.218; Pv iv.109 (=paṭihaŋsati PvA 271); DA i.256 (=khuŋseti); DhA i.251. -- (b) fig. A iii.343; Sn 847 (cp. Nd1 208); Vism 18. -- pp. ghaṭṭita Pug 30, 36; psychologically ghaṭṭayati=ruppati. B or S iii.86. -- Pass. ghaṭīyati (q.v.). -- Cp. āsajja and ugghāṭeti. Ghaṇṭā
Ghaṇṭā
(f.) a small bell (cp. kinkanikā) J iv.215; VvA 36, 37, 279 (khuddaka˚). As ghaṇṭī at Vism 181. Ghata
Ghata
(nt.) [Vedic ghṛta, ghṛ to sprinkle, moisten] clari- fied butter VvA 326; Miln 41; Sdhp 201 ( -- bindu). With ref. to the sacrificial fire (fire as eating ghee, or being sprinkled w. ghee) ghatāsana; J i.472; v.64, 446; Pv i.85 (ghatasitta). -- 257 -- Ghana
Ghana1
[Vedic ghana, cp. Gr. eu)qhnh/s?] (a) (adj.) solid, compact, massive; dense, thick; in eka˚ of one solid mass (of sela, rock) Vin i.185 = Dh 81=Th 1, 643= Miln 386; A iii.378, cp. ghanasela -- pabbata DhA i.74. -- gh. paŋsu J i.264, paṭhavī (solid ground) J i.74; PvA 75; palāsa (foliage) PvA 113; buddharasmiyo J i.12; ˚maŋsa solid, pure flesh DhA i.80; ˚sāṭaka (thick cloth) J i.292; ˚sañchanna (thickly covered) PvA 258; ˚suvaṇṇakoṭṭima DhA iv.135; abbha˚ a thick cloud Sn 348 (cp. SnA 348). -- (b) (m.) the foetus at a certain stage (the last before birth & the 4th in the enum. of the foll. stages: kalala, abbuda, pesī, gh.) S i.206; J iv.496; Miln 40; Vism 236. The latter meaning is semantically to be explained as "swelling" & to be compared with Gr. bru/w to swell and e(/mbruon=embryo (the gravid uterus). Ghana
Ghana2
[Vedic ghana to hanti (ghanti, cp. ghātayati), *gṷhen "strike," cp. Gr. qei/nw, fo/nos, Lat. of -- fendo, Ags. gud, Ohg. gundea] a club, a stick, a hammer; in ayo˚ an iron club VvA 20. Also coll. term for a musical instrument played by striking, as cymbal, tambourine, etc. VvA 37. Ghanika
Ghanika
[to ghana1 in meaning of "cloud" (Sk.)] a class of devas (cloud -- gods?) Miln 191. Ghamma
Ghamma
[Vedic gharma = Gr. qermo/s, Lat. formus, Ohg. etc. warm; to *gṷher "warm," cp. Sk. ghṛṇoti, hara; Gr. qe/ros, etc.] heat; hot season, summer. Either in loc. ghamme J iv.172 (=gimha -- kāle); Pv iv.53 & ghammani ("in summer" or "by the heat") S i.143= J iii.360 (sampareta overcome by heat); Sn 353; J iv.239; v.3. -- Or. in cpd. with ˚abhitatta (ghammâbhitatta, overpowered by heat) M i.74; D ii.266; A iii.187 sq.; Sn 1014 (cp. 353 ghammatatta); Miln 318; VvA 40; PvA 114. Ghara
Ghara1
(nt.; pl. ˚ā Dh 241, 302) [cp. gaha & geha] a house A ii.68; Sn 43 (gahaṭṭhā gharaŋ āvasantā), 337 (abl. gharā), 889 (id. gharamhā); J i.290 (id. gharato); iv.2, 364, 492 (ayo˚); Pug 57; Miln 47. Combd with vatthu PvA 3, 17. -- sūcighara a needle -- case VvA 251.

-- ājira house -- yard Vism 144 (where Dhs A 116 in id. passage reads gharadvāra). -- āvāsa the household life (as contrasted with the life of a mendicant) Vin ii.180 (gharāvāsatthaŋ); A ii.208; M i.179, 240, 267, 344; Sn 406 (cp. S v.350); J i.61; PvA 61; -- kapoṭa [Sk. gṛhakapota] the house -- pigeon Miln 364, 403; -- golikā house or domestic lizard J ii.147. -- dāsī a female house -- slave Pv ii.321; -- dvāra a house -- door J iv.142; Dhs A 116; PvA 93; -- bandhana the bonds of the house, i. e. the establishing of marriage DhA i.4; -- mukha an opening in the house, the front of the house Nd2 177; -- mesin one who looks after the house, a pater familias, householder Sn 188; It 112 (gahaṭṭha+); J vi.575; -- sandhi a cleft or crevice in the house PvA 24; -- sūkara a tame, domestic pig DhA iv.16. Ghara
Ghara2
[a drink (cp. gala) & garala poison] (˚ -- ); in -- ˚dinnak- ābādha sickness in consequence of a poisonous drink (expl. as suffering fr. the results of sorcery) Vin i.206 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.60); -- visa poison Pug 48; DhA ii.38; -- sappa a poisonous snake DhA ii.256. Gharaṇī
Gharaṇī
(f.) [fr. ghara1] a house -- wife Vin i.271; S i.201; Pv iii.19 ( = ghara -- sāminī PvA 174); DhA iii.209. Ghasa
Ghasa
(adj. -- n.) eating, an eater; in mahagghasa a big eater A v.149 (of the crow); Dh 325; Miln 288. Ghasati
Ghasati
[Vedic grasati & *ghasti, pp. grasta, cp. Gr. gra/w to gnaw, gra/stis fodder, Lat. gramen grass] to eat J iii.210; ppr. ghasamāna Vin ii.201; Th 1, 749. -- Cp. ghasa, ghasta & ghāsa. See also jaddhu. Desid. jighacchati. Ghasta
Ghasta
[pp. of ghasati = Sk. grasta] only in vanka˚ having eaten or swallowed the hook (cp. grasta -- vanka) D ii.266 (v -- g˚ va ambujo); J vi.113. Ghāṭa
Ghāṭa
see saŋ˚; ghāṭana see ghaṭati. Ghāta
Ghāta
(usually -- ˚) [Sk. ghāta & ghātana; to han (ghan), strike, kill; see etym. under ghana2 & hanti] killing, murdering; slaughter, destruction, robbery D i.135 (gāma˚, etc. village robbery); setu˚ the pulling down of a bridge (fig.) Vin i.59, etc. (see setu); pantha˚ highway robbery, brigandage, "waylaying" J i.253. -> Th 2, 474, 493 ( = samugghāta Com.); Sn 246 (ina˚); VvA 72 (pāṇa˚+pāṇa -- vadha & ˚atipāta). Cp. next & vi˚; saŋ˚. Ghātaka
Ghātaka
(adj. -- ˚) murdering, destroying, slaughtering Vin i.89 (arahanta˚), 136 (id.), 168 (id.); ii.194 (manussa˚); iv.260 (tala˚) J iv.366 (gāma˚ corā robbers infesting the village); v.397 (thī˚ = itthi˚); Pug 56 (maccha˚). -- As noun: (m.) one who slays, an executioner: go˚ a bull -- slaughterer M i.244, etc. (see go); cora˚ an executioner or hangman J iii.41; Pug 56; PvA 5. -- (nt.) brigandage, robbery, slaughtering: gāmaghātakaŋ karoti J i.200. Ghātikā
Ghātikā
(f. abstr. to ghātaka) murder J i.176 sq. Ghātita
Ghātita
(adj.) [pp. of ghāteti] killed, destroyed ThA 289; also in Der. ghātitatta (nt.) the fact of having killed J i.167. Cp. ugghātita. Ghātin
Ghātin
(adj. -- n.) killing; a murderer J i.168 (pāṇa˚); vi.67 (ghātimhi = ghātake). Ghātimant
Ghātimant
(adj.) able to strike, able to pierce (of a needle), in ghana˚ going through hard material easily J iii.282. Ghāteti
Ghāteti
[Denom. fr. ghāta, cp. Sk. ghātayati to han] tc kill, slay, slaughter It 22 (yo na hanti na ghāteti); Dh 129, 405; J i.255; Mhvs vii.35, 36. -- aor. aghātayi J i.254; ger. ghātetvā J i.166. -- Caus. ghātāpeti to have somebody killed J iv.124. -- Cp. ghacca, ghātita, āghāteti. Ghāna
Ghāna
(nt.) [Sk. ghrāṇa to ghrā, see ghāyati. On n for ṇ cp. Trenckner, Notes, p. 81] the nose; usually in its function as organ of smell = sense of smell (either in phrase ghānena gandhaŋ ghāyati: to smell an odour by means of the nose; or in ghana -- viññeyyā gandhā: odours which are sensed by the nose). In the enum. of the senses gh. is always mentioned in the 3rd place (after cakkhu & sota, eye & ear); see under rūpa. In this connection: Vin i.34; D i.21, 245; iii.102, 244 sq.; S i.115; M i.112, 191; ii.42; Dh 360; Pug 20; Miln 270; Vism 444 sq. (with defn). -- In other connections: Pv ii.24 (ghāna -- chinna, one whose nose is cut off).

-- āyatana the organ of smell D iii.243, 280; Dhs 585, 605, 608; -- indriya the sense of smell D iii.239; Dhs 585 etc. (as above); -- dhātu the element of smell Dhs. as above; -- viññāṇa perception of smell Dhs 443, 608, 628; -- samphassa contact with the sense of smell S i.115; D iii. & Dhs as above. Ghāyati
Ghāyati1
[Sk. ghrāti & jighrati, to ghrā, cp. gandha] to smell, always with gandhaŋ; ger. ghātvā S iv.71, 74 or ghāyitvā J i.210 (jālagandhaŋ); iii.52 (macchagandhaŋ); Miln 347. Cp. sāyati & upagghāyati. Ghāyati
Ghāyati2
[a variant of jhāyati] to be consumed, to be tor- mented by thirst Pv i.1110 (ghāyire = ghāyanti PvA 60; v. l. BB jhāyire & jhāynati) Miln 397. Ghāsa
Ghāsa
[Vedic ghāsa, fr. ghasati, q. v. cp. Lat. gramen = grass] grass for fodder, pasturing: food J i.511 (˚ŋ kurute); PvA 173 (˚atthāya gacchati "go feeding"). Mostly in: -- esana search for food (=gocara) S i.141; Sn 711. -- Cp. vi˚.

-- chada (chāda & chādana) food & clothing, i. e. tending, fostering, good care ( = posana) (act.) or being well looked after, well provided (pass.); chada: Pug 51; chāda: J i.94; A i.107; ii.85; iii.385; chādana: D i.60; M i.360; VvA 23, 137; -- hāraka one who fetches the fodder (food) Th 1, 910. -- 258 -- Ghāsana
Ghāsana
(nt.) = ghāsa; in -- ˚ṭṭhāna pasture (=gocara) VvA 218. Ghuṭṭha
Ghuṭṭha
[Sk. ghuṣṭa, pp. ghuṣ, see ghoseti & cp. saŋ˚] pro- claimed, announced; renowned J i.50 (of festival); 425 (nakkhattaŋ); ii.248 (ussava); Pv ii.82 (dūra˚ of wide renown, world -- famed of Bārāṇasī); DhA iii.100 (chaṇe ghuṭṭhe when the fair was opened). Ghurughuru
Ghuru
-- ghuru onomat. expression of snoring & grunting noise [gṛ -- gṛ to *gel or *ger, see note on gala] in -- passāsa (& ˚in) snoring & breathing heavily, panting, snorting & puffing S i.117 (of Māra); J i.160 (of sleeping bhikkhus, gh˚ kākacchamānā breathing loud & snoring). Cp. next. Ghurughurāyati
Ghurughurāyati
[Denom. fr. prec.] to snore J iii.538; DhA i.307. Cp. Prk. ghurughuranti varāhā (grunting hogs) & ghurukkanti vagghā (roaring tigers). Ghoṭaka
Ghoṭaka
[cp. Sk. ghoṭaka, Halāyudha 2, 281] a (bad) horse J vi.452. Ghota
Ghota
is read at J i.454, probably for ghaṭṭa; meaning is "striking, stroke," combd with kasā, whip. Ghora
Ghora
(adj.) [Vedic ghora, orig. meaning, wailing, howling, lamenting, to *gher, *ger, see note on gala & cp. ghuru. A root ghur is given by Dhtp 487 in meaning of "bhīma," i. e. horrible. -- Rel. to Goth. gaurs, sad; Ohg. gōrag, miserable; & perhaps Lat. funus, funeral. See Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.] terrible, frightful, awful Vin ii.147. Freq. as attr. of niraya (syn. with dāruṇa; PvA 87, 159, 206) Pv i.1012; iv.18. Of an oath (sapatha) Pv i.68; ii.1216. -- ghorassara of a terrible cry (Ep. of an ass) Miln 363, 365. Ghosa
Ghosa
[Vedic ghoṣa to ghus] 1. shout, sound, utterance Vin ii.155 ("Buddha" -- ghosa); M i.294; A i.87, 228; Sn p. 106; Sn 696, 698; Dhs 637, 720 (+ghosa -- kamma). -- 2. shouting, howling, wailing (of Petas) Pv iii.34; iv.36, 338.

-- pamāṇa to be measured (or judged) by one's reputation A ii.71 = Pug 53; also as pamāṇika DhA iii.114 (in same context). Ghosaka
Ghosaka
(adj.) sounding, proclaiming, shouting out ( -- ˚), in dhamma˚ praising the Law J ii.286; Satthu guṇa˚ sounding the praise of the Master DhA iii.114. As n. Name of a deva (Gh. devaputta) DhA i.173. Ghosanā
Ghosanā
(f.) fame, renown, praise, in Māra˚ J i.71. Ghosavant
Ghosavant
(adj.) full of sound, roaring J iii.189. Ghosita
Ghosita
1. [pp. of ghoseti] proclaimed, renowned, PvA 107 ( = ghuṭṭha); VvA 31 (nakkhattaŋ). As Npl. Ghositārāma DhA i.53, 161, 208. -- 2. [n. ag.=ghositṛ, cp. ghosaka] one who proclaims, advocates, or heralds; in Np. Ghositaseṭṭhi DhA i.187. Ghoseti
Ghoseti
[Denom. of ghosa, cp. Sk. ghoṣayati, caus. to ghuṣ] to proclaim, announce; cry aloud, wail, shout J ii.112; iii.52; Pv ii.937 ( = uggh˚); iv.63; pp. ghosita & ghuṭṭha (q. v.). -- Caus. ghosāpeti to have proclaimed J i.71. -- C. Ca
Ca
(indef. enchtic particle) [Vedic ca adv. to rel. pron. *qṷo, idg. *que = Cr. te, Lat. que, Goth. -- h. Cp. ka, ki, ku] 1. Indefinite (after demonstr. pron. in the sense of kiŋ=what about? or how is it? cp. kiŋ)=ever, whoever, what -- ever, etc. [Sk. kaśca, Gr. o(s te, Lat: quisque, Goth. hvazuh] so ca whoever (see below 3), tañ ca pan' amhākaŋ ruccati tena c' amhā attamanā M i.93; yañ ca kho . . . ceteti yañ ca pakappeti . . . whatever he thinks, whatever he intends . . . S ii.65. As a rule the Pali form corresp. to Sk. kaśca is *kascid=koci, & ci (cid) is the regular P. representative of the indefinite ca (cp. cana & api). -- 2. Copulative or disjunctive according to the general context being positive or negative. (a) copulative: and, then, now: tadā ca now then, and then (in historical exposition) J iii.188. Most frequent in connecting two or three words, usually placed after the second, but also after the third: atthaŋ anatthañ ca Dh 256; pubbâparāni ca Dh 352; alaŋ etehi ambehi jambūhi panasehi ca J ii.160. -- In the same sense added to each link of the chain as ca -- ca (cp. Sk. ca -- ca, Gr. te te, Lat. que que; also mixed with constituents of similar pairs as api -- ca, cp. te -- kai): tuyhañ ca tassā ca to you and her (orig. this or whatever to you, whatever to her)=to you as well as to her J i.151. Often with the first member emphasized by eva: c' eva, as well as: hasi c' eva rodi ca he laughed as well as cried J i.167; maŋsena c' eva phalāphalena ca with flesh as well as with all kinds of fruit J iii.127; subhaddako c' eva supesalo ca J iii.82; c' eva apace padūse pi ca waste and even defile ThA 72 (Ap v.40). -> (b) disjunctive: but (esp. after a negation): yo ca but who Th 1, 401; yadā ca but when (cp. tadā ca) J iii.128. In conditional clauses (cp. 3) combd with sace=but if, on the other hand: sace agāraŋ ajjhāvasati . . . sace ca pabbajati agārā Sn 1003. With neg, na ca=but not: mahatī vata te bondi, na ca paññā tadūpikā (but your wisdom is not in the same proportion) J ii.160. -> 3. Conditional: if [=Vedic ced, Lat. absque] D i.186, 207; ii.36, 57 (jāti ca not va); M i.91; S iii.66 (rūpañ ca attā abhavissa); A i.58; v.87; J ii.110 (ciram pi kho khadeyya yavaŋ . . . ravamāno ca dūsayi: "he might have caten a long time, if he had not come to harm by his cry," or "but"); iv.487; v.185, 216 (Sakko ca me varaŋ dajjā so ca labbhetha me varo: "if S. will give me a wish, that wish will be granted," or: "whatever wish he will allow, that one will be fulfilled"); vi.206, 208. -- na ca (at the beginning of an interrog. phrase)= if not S i.190 (ahaŋ ca kho . . . pavāremi, na ca me Bhagavā kiñci garahati: if the Bh. will not blame me). For BSk. ca=ced see AvŚ ii.189, n. o. Cakita
Cakita
(adj.) [Sk. cakita, cak] disturbed; afraid, timid Dāvs iv.35, 46. Cakora
Cakora
[Sk. cakora to kol (kor), see note on gala] the francolin partridge (Perdix rufa) J v.416; Vv 358; VvA 163. See also cankora. Cakka
Cakka
(nt.) [Vedic cakra, redupl. formation fr. *quel to turn round (cp. P. kaṇṭha > Lat. collus & see also note on gala) = that which is (continuously) turning, i. e. wheel, or abstr, the shape or periphery of it, i. e. circle. Cakra=Gr. ku/klos, Ags. hveohl, hveol=wheel. The unredupl. form in Sk. carati (versatur), Gr. pe/lomai, poleu/w, po/los (pole); Lat. colo, incolo; Obulg. kolo wheel, Oisl. hvel] I. Crude meaning: 1. a wheel (of a carriage) Dh 1; PvA 65 (ratha˚); Miln 27. -- 2. a discus used as a missile weapon J i.74; Pgdp 36; cp. khura˚ a razor as an instr. of torture. -- 3. a disc, a circle: heṭṭhāpādatalesu cakkāni jātāni, forming the 2nd characteristic mark of a Mahāpurisa D ii.17= iii.143; D iii.149. -- J ii.331; Miln 51. -- 4. an array of troops (under tayo vyūhā: paduma˚ cakka˚ sakaṭa˚) J ii.404=iv.343. -- II. Applied meaning: 1. (a wheel as component part of a carriage, or one of a duad or tetrad=) collection, set, part; succession; sphere, region, cycle Vin i.330 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.281); iii.96; iriyāpatha˚ the 4 ways of behaviour, the various positions (standing, walking, sitting, lying down) DA i.249; Sdhp 604. sā˚, miga˚ the sphere or region of dogs & wild animals Miln 178; cakkena (instr.) in succession PvA iii. cakkaŋ kātabbaŋ, or bandhitabbaŋ freq. in Yam. and Paṭṭh, "The cycle of formulated words is to be here repeated." -- 2. (like the four wheels constituting the moving power of a carriage=) a vehicle, instrument, means & ways; attribute, quality; state, condition, esp. good condition (fit instrumentality), catucakka an instr. of four, a lucky tetrad, a fourwheeler of the body as expressing itself in the four kinds of deportment, iriyāpathas A ii.32; S i.16, 63 (catucakkaŋ). In this sense generalized as a happy state, consisting of "4 blessings": paṭirūpadesa -- vāsa, sappurisûpassaya, atta -- sammāpaṇidhi, pubbe -- kata -- puññatā A ii.32; J v.114; mentioned at Ps i.84. Cp. also Sn 554 sq.; 684. Esp. pronounced in the two phrases dhamma -- cakka (the wheel of the Doctrine, i. e. the symbol of conquering efficacy, or happiness implicated in the D.) and brahma -- c˚ the best wheel, the supreme instrument, the noblest quality. Both with pavatteti to start & kcep up (like starting & guiding a carriage), to set rolling, to originate, to make universally known. dhamma˚ e. g. S i.191; A i.23, 101; ii.34, 120; iii.151; iv.313; Sn 556 sq.; 693; J iii.412; Ps ii.159 sq.; PvA 67 (see dhamma). brahma˚ M i.71; S ii.27; A ii.9, 24; iii.9, 417; v.33; Vbh 317 sq.; 344 (see brahma). Cp. cakkavattin (below). -- Cp. vi˚.

-- chinna (udaka) (water of a well) the wheel of which is broken Ud 83; -- bhañjanin one who destroys a state of welfare & good J v.112 (patirāpadesavāsādino kusala -- cakkassa bhañjanī C.); -- bheda breaking peace or concord, sowing discord Vin ii.198; iii.171; -- yuga a pair of wheels Vv 832; -- ratana the treasure of the wheel, that is of the sun (cp. Rh. D. Buddh. Suttas p. 252; Dialogues ii.197, 102) D ii.171; iii.59 sq., 75; J i.63; ii.311; DA i.249. See also cakkavattin; -- vaṭṭaka (nt.) a scoop -- wheel (a wheel revolving over a well with a string of earthen pots going down empty & coming up full, after dredger fashion) Vin ii.122; -- vattin (cp. dhammacakkaŋ pavatteti above) he who sets rolling the Wheel, a just & faithful king (rājā hoti c. dhammiko dhammarājā cāturanto Sn p. 106, in corresp. pass. v. 1002 as vijeyya pathaviŋ imaŋ adaṇḍena asatthena dhammena -- m -- anusāsati). A definition is given by Bdhgh. at DA i.249. -- Three sorts of c. are later distinguished: a cakkavāla -- c˚ a universal king, or cāturanta -- c˚ (ruling over four great continents Sn p. 106; KhA 227), a dīpa -- c˚ (ruling over one), a padesa -- c˚ (ruling over part of one) Usually in phrase rājā cakka vattin: D i.88; iii.156; iv.302; v.44, 99, 342; D ii.16, 172; iii.59 sq., 75, 142 sq.; M iii.65; A i.76, 109 sq.; ii.37, 133, 245; iii.147 sq; 365; iv.89, 105; v.22; Kh viii.12 (˚sukha); J i.51; ii.395; iv.119; Vbh 336; PvA 117; VvA 18; Sdhp 238, 453; DhA ii.135 (˚sirī). -- ˚gabbha Vism 126: -- ˚rajjaŋ kāresi J ii.311; -- viddha (nt.) a particular form of shooting J v.130; -- samārūḷha (adj.) having mounted the wheels, i. e. their carts (of janapadā) A i.178; iii.66, 104. -- 259 -- Cakkalaka
Cakkalaka
[fr. cakka] a disc or tuft (?) Vism 255 (kaḷīra˚, where KhA 50 reads in same context kaḷīra -- daṇḍa). Cakkali
Cakkali
(f.) drapery Vin ii.174. Cakkalikā
Cakkalikā
a window blind, curtain Vin ii.148. Cakkavāka
Cakkavāka
[Vedic cakravāka, cp. kṛkavāku, to sound root kṛ, see note on gala] the ruddy goose (Anas Casarca) J iii.520; iv.70 sq. (N. of J No. 451); Pv ii.123; Miln 364, 401; -- f. cakkavākī J iii.524; vi.189 = 501. Cakkavāḷa
Cakkavāḷa
(m. & nt.) a circle, a sphere, esp. a mythical range of mountains supposed to encircle the world; pl. worlds or spheres J i.53, 203; vi.330; Vism 205 (its extent), 207, 367, 421; DhsA 297; DhA 11. 15; iii.498; in the trope "cakkavāḷaŋ atisambādhaŋ brahmaloko atinīco" ( = the whole world cannot hold it) to express immensity DhA i.310; VvA 68.

-- gabbha the interior of the C. sphere J iv.119; DA i.284; -- pabbata (nt.) the C. mountains, "world's end" J iii.32; vi.272; -- rajja (nt.) the whole world, strictly speaking the whole region of a sphere J ii.392. Cakkhu
Cakkhu
(nt.) [Vedic cakṣuḥ, etym. not clear, as redupl. perhaps to īks, akṣa eye, kṣạṇa moment, or as intens. to cit, cp. cinteti, & see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under inquam] the eye (nom. sg. cakkhuŋ Vin i.34; S i.115; M iii.134, etc.). -- I. The eye as organ of sense -- (a) psychologically: cakkhunā rūpaŋ disvā "seeing visible object (shape) with the eye" (Nd2 on rūpa q. v.) is the defin. of this first & most important of the senses (cp. Pv ii.61 dakkhiṇa c. = the most valuable thing): the psychology of sight is discussed at DA i.194 sq., and more fully at Dhs 597 sq. (see DhsA 306 sq; Dhs trsl. 173 sq.); cp. cak khunā puriso ālokati rūpagatāni Nd2 234. In any enumeration of the senses cakkhu heads the list, e. g. Vin i.34; D i.21; ii.308, 336 sq.; iii.102, 225, 244 sq.; 269; Nett 28. -- See rūpa. Also combd. with sota: M i.318; iii.264; A i.281. -- cakkhusmiŋ haññati rūpehi S iv.201; hata˚ A i.129. passāmi naŋ manasā cakkhunā va "I see him with my mind as with my eye" Sn 1142. -- Vin i.184; S i.32, 199; iv.123; Dh 360; J iv.137; DA i.183; Nett 191. Vism 444 sq. As adj. ( -- ˚) seeing, having or catching sight of: eka˚ (dvi˚) one -- eyed (two˚) A i.128 sq.; āmisa˚ seeing an object of sensual enjoyment S ii.226; iv.159; J v.91 (= kilesalola). acakkhu blind A iii.250, 256; Ps i.129. -- (b) ethically: as a "sense" belonging to what is called "body" (kāya) it shares all the qualities of the latter (see kāya), & is to be regarded as an instr. only, i. e. the person must not value it by itself or identify himself with it. Subduing the senses means in the first place acquiring control over one's eyes (cp. okkhitta cakkhu, with down -- cast eyes Sn 63, 411, 972; Pv iv.344; & indriyesu guttadvāra; ˚indriya). In this connection the foll. passages may be mentioned: Vin i.34; D i.70; S iv.123; ii.244 (aniccaŋ, etc.); iii.255 (do.) iv.81, 128 (na tumhākaŋ); Ps I.132 (aniccatṭhaŋ). Numerous others see under rūpa. -- II. The eve as the most important channel of mental acquiring, as faculty of perception & apperception; insight, knowledge (cp. veda, olda to vid, to see). In connection with ñāṇa (ghw_sis) it refers to the apperception of the truth (see dhamma -- cakkhu): intuition and recognition, which means perfect understanding (cp. the use of the phrase jānāti passati "to know and to see"=to understand clearly). See e. g. S ii.7 -- 11, 105; iv.233; v.179; 258; 422 sq. Most frequently as dhamma˚ "the eye of the truth," said of the attainment of that right knowledge which leads to Arahantship, in phrase virajaŋ vitamalaŋ dh -- cakkhuŋ uppajjati Vin i.16; D i.86, 110; S ii.134 sq.; iv.47; 107; v.467; A iv.186; Ps ii.150 sq.; 162; Miln 16. Similarly paññā˚, It 52; ariya˚ M i.510. -- III. The eye as the instr. of supersensuous perception, "clear" sight, clairvoyance. This is the gift of favoured beings whose senses are more highly developed than those of others, and who through right cognition have acquired the two "eyes" or visionary faculties, termed dibba-cakkhu & buddha -- cakkhu It 52; D ii.38 resp. They are most completely described at Nd2 235 (under cakkhumā), & the foll. categories of the range of application of cakkhu are set forth: 1. maŋsa -- cakkhu: the physical eye which is said to be exceptionally powerful & sensitive. See Kv iii.7 (trans. p. 149 ff.). Vism 428 (maŋsa˚ 2 ñāṇa˚). -- 2. dibba -- ˚: the deva -- eye, the eye of a seer, all-pervading, & seeing all that proceeds in hidden worlds.-> 3. paññā˚: the eye of wisdom; he who knows all that can be known (jānaŋ passaŋ recognizing & seeing, i. e. of perfect understanding; cakkhubhūta ñāṇa˚ dhamma˚ brahma˚). -- 4. buddha˚: the eye of a Buddha or of complete intuition, i. e. of a person who "sees the heart of man," of a being realizing the moral state of other beings and determined to help them on the Path to Right Knowledge. -- 5. samanta˚: (a summary account of Nos. 1 -- 4, & in all Scripture -- passages a standing Ep. of Gotama Buddha, see below), the eye of all round knowledge, the eye of a Tathāgata, of a being perfected in all wisdom. -- Out of these are mentioned & discussed singly or in sets: (Nos. 1 -- 5): DhsA 306; SnA 351; (Nos. 1 -- 3:) It 52=Kvu 251 sq. (It 52=Kvu 254); (dibba:) Vin i.8, 288; ii.183; iii.5; D i.82, 162; iii. 52, iii. 281; M i.213; S i.144, 196; ii.122, 213, 276; iv.240; v.266, 305; A i.165, 256, 281 sq.; iii.19, 29, 418; iv.85, 141, 178, 291; v.13, 35, 68, 200, 211, 340; J iii.346; Ps i.114; ii.175; Vbh 344; PvA 5. -- (paññā˚:) S iv.292; v.467, A i.35; DhA iii.174, 175. -- (buddha˚:) Vin i.6; S i.138; Ps ii.33; PvA 61. -- (samanta˚:) S i.137=Nd2 2354; Sn 345, 378, 1063, 1069, 1090, 1133; Ps ii.31=Nd2 2355.

-- āyatana (either cakkh' or cakkhv˚) the organ or sense of sight D iii.243, 280, 290; Dhs 585, 653; -- indriya (cakkhundriya) the organ of eye, faculty of vision D i.70; iii.225, 239; A i.113; Dhs 585, 597, 661, 830, 971; Vism 7; -- karaṇa (always in combn w. ñāṇa -- karaṇa) producing (right) insight (and knowledge) It 82 (of kusalavitakkā); f. ˚ī S iv.331 (of majjhimā paṭipadā); Ps ii.147; -- dada one who gives the eye (of understanding) Th 1, 3; -- dhātu the element of vision Dhs 597, 703, 817. -- patha the range of vision; sight J i.65 = DhA i.173; J i.146; iv.189, 378, 403 (=cakkhūnaŋ etaŋ nāmaŋ C.); VvA 119; -- bhāta (+ñāṇa˚) (adj.) one who has become the possessor of right understanding S ii.255; iv.94; A v.226 sq. -- lola greed (or greedy) with the eye Nd2 177; -- viññāṇa consciousness by means of visual perception, visual cognition Vin i.34; D ii.308, 310; iii.243; Dhs 433, 556, 585, 589, 620; cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Buddh. Psych. Eth. p. 177; Miln trsl. i.80, 89; -- viññeyya (adj.) (i. e. rūpā) to be apperceived by the sense of sight Vin i.184; D ii.281; iii.234; Dhs 589, 967, 1095; -- samphassa contact with the sense of vision (usually with ˚ja: sprung from visual contact) (of vedanā, feelings) Vin i.34; D ii.308 sq.; iii.243; Ps i.5, 40, 136. -- 260 -- Cakkhuka
Cakkhuka
(adj.) having eyes, seeing ( -- ˚), in dibba˚ A i.23. 148 (see cakkhu iii.2) and a˚ blind D i.191; S iii.140; Nd 67. Cakkhumant
Cakkhumant
(adj.) [cakkhu+mant] having eyes, being gifted with sight; of clear sight, intuition or wisdom; possessing knowledge (cp. samantacakkhu) D i.76 (one who knows, i. e. a connoisseur); cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhinti "those who have eyes to see shall see" (of the Buddha) D i.85, 110, etc. -- Vin i.16; S i.27; A i.116, 124; iv.106; Dh 273; It 108, 115; DA i.221; DhA iii.403; iv.85. -- Esp. as Ep. of the Buddha: the Allwise S i.121, 134, 159, 210; Sn 31, 160, 992, 1028, 1116, 1128; Vv 125 ( = pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumā Buddho Bhagavā VvA 60, cp. cakkhu iii.); Vv 8127. Cakkhula
Cakkhula
(adj.) [ = cakkhuka] in visama˚ squint -- eyed. squinting J i.353; vi.548. Cakkhussa
Cakkhussa
(adj.) [Vedic cakṣuṣya] pleasing to or good for the eyes (opp. a˚) Vin ii.137, 148. Cankama
Cankama
[Sk. cankrama & cankramā, fr. cankamati] (a) walking up & down S iv.104. -- (b) the place where one is walking, esp. a terraced walk, cloister Vin i.15, 182; ii.220; D i.105; S i.212; A i.114; 183; iii.29; iv.87; J i.17; ii.273; v.132 (cp. kattaradaṇḍa -- passages). Cankamati
Cankamati
[Intens. of kamati, to kram = Sk. cankramīti; cp. kamati] to walk about, to walk up & down Vin i.15, 182; ii.193, 220; iv.18; S i.107, 212; PvA 105. -- Caus. cankamāpeti J iii.9. Cankamana
Cankamana
(nt.) [fr. cankamati] 1. walking up & down S ii.282; DhA i.10. -- 2. a cloister walk ( = cankama) VvA 188. Usually ˚ -- : Vin i.139 (˚sālā); J iii.85; iv.329; PvA 79 (˚koṭi the far end of the cloister). Cankamika
Cankamika
(adj.) [fr. cankama] one who has the habit of walking about Miln 216 (ṭhāna˚ standing & walking). Cankora
Cankora
[cp. cakora] the Greek partridge Vv 358 (cp. VvA 163); J vi.538. Cangavāra
Cangavāra
[cp. Tamil canguvaḍa a dhoney, Anglo -- Ind. ḍoni, a canoe hollowed from a log, see also doṇi] a hollow vessel, a bowl, cask M i.142; J v.186 (in similes). As ˚ka Miln 365 (trsl. Miln ii.278 by "straining cloth"). -> Cp. cañcu "a box" Divy 131. Cangoṭaka
Cangoṭaka
[cp. cangavāra] a casket, a box J i.65; iv.257; v.110, 303; vi.369, 534; DhA ii.116; iii.101; VvA 33, 158; Mhvs iv.106; Anvs p. 35 Vism 173. Caccara
Caccara
(nt.) [Sk. catvara, cp. Trenckner, Notes, p. 56] a quadrangular place, a square, courtyard; a place where four roads meet, a cross road Vin iii.151; iv.271; Miln 1 (+catukkasinghāṭaka), 330 (do.); J i.425 (˚raccha). Caja
Caja
(adj.) giving up, to be given up; in cpd. duc˚ hard to give up A iii.50; J v.8. Cp. cāga. Cajati
Cajati
[Sk. tyajate, tyaj = Gr. so be/w to scare away] 1. to let loose, to emit, to discharge A ii.33; J ii.342 (mutta karīsaŋ) fig. to utter (a speech) J v.362. -- 2. to abandon, to give up, sacrifice (with loc. of person to whom: Asuresu pāṇaŋ S i.224=J i.203) Dh 290; J ii.205; iii.211; v.464; vi.570. -- pp. catta, q. v. -- grd. caja [Sk. tyajya] q. v. Cañcala
Cañcala
(adj.) [Intens. of cal = car, to move, with n instead of r in reduplication, cp. Sk. cañcūryate=carcarīti, cañcala (=*carcara), Gr. gargalizw & gaggalizw to tickle; see also note on gala & cp. cankamati] moving to & fro, trembling, unsteady J iv.498 (=calācala); Sdhp 317, 598. Caṭula
Caṭula
(adj.) [Sk. catura] clever, skilled Mhbv 148. See catura. Caṇḍa
Caṇḍa
(adj.) [Sk. caṇḍa] fierce, violent; quick -- tempered, uncontrolled, passionate Vin ii.194 (hatthī); D. i.90 ( = māṇa -- nissita -- kopa -- yutta DA i.256); S i.176; ii.242; A ii.109=Pug 47 (sakagava˚); J i.450; ii.210, 349; Vism 343, 279 (˚sota, fierce current), (˚hatthi); DhA iv.9 (goṇa) 104; Sdhp 41, 590, 598. -- f. caṇḍī M i.126; J ii.443; iii.259; Pv ii.34 (=kodhanā PvA 83). -> Compar. caṇḍatara S ii.242. -- In cpds. caṇḍi˚, see caṇḍikata & caṇḍitta. Caṇḍaka
Caṇḍaka
(adj.) = caṇḍa; f. caṇḍikā Pv ii.35, & caṇḍiyā J iii.259 (=kodhaṇā). Caṇḍāla
Caṇḍāla1
[Vedic caṇḍāla] a man of a certain low tribe, one of the low classes, an outcaste; grouped with others under nīcā kulā (low born clans) as caṇḍālā nesādā veṇā rathakārā pukkusā at A i.107 = ii.85=Pug 51. As caṇḍāla -- pukkusā with the four recognized grades of society (see jāti & khattiya) at A i.162. -- Vin iv.6; M ii.152; S v.168 sq. (˚vaŋsa); A iii.214, 228 (brāhmaṇa˚); iv.376; J iv.303; PvA 175; Miln 200. -- f. caṇḍālī A iii.226; Pv iii.113; DhA ii.25. See also pukkusa. Caṇḍāla
Caṇḍāla2
(nt.) a kind of amusement or trick D i.6≈( = ayo- gulakīḷā play with an iron ball DA i.84). Caṇḍikata
Caṇḍikata
(adj.) [cp. caṇḍa] angry Vin iv.310. Caṇḍikka
Caṇḍikka
(nt.) [*caṇḍikya, of caṇḍika > caṇḍaka] ferocity anger, churlishness Nd2 313, 576, Dhs 418, 1060, 1115, 1231; Vbh 357; DhA ii.227. Cp. caṇḍitta. Caṇḍitta
Caṇḍitta
(nt.) anger Dhs 418; Pug 18 = 22. Cp. caṇḍikka. Catukka
Catukka1
(nt.) [fr. catu = *catuka > *catukyaŋ] 1. a tetrad, a set of four, consisting of four parts: ˚pañcakajjhānā (pl.) the fourfold & the fivefold system of meditation DhsA 168; see cpds. -- 2. a place where four roads meet J vi.389; Miln 330 (see also below); esp. in phrase catukke catukke kasāhi tāḷeti (or is it "in sets of four"? See Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 79) J i.326; ii.123; DhA iv.52. -- 3. a square (in a village) Miln 1, 365; J ii.194; v.459; DhA 317.

-- bhatta a meal for four bhikkhus Vin ii.77; iii.160; -- magga the 4 fold path Nett 113; -- yañña (usually sabba catukka˚) a sacrifice consisting of (all) the four parts J iii.44, 45; PvA 280; cp. J i.335. (Or is it the "cross -- road sacrifice"?) -- 261 -- Catukka
Catukka2
[origin. "consisting only of one quarter"?] empty, shallow, little Nd2 415 (˚pañña, with omakapañña, lāmaka -- p˚); J iv.441 (nadī = tuccha Com.). Catuttha
Catuttha
(num. ord.) [Vedic caturtha, Idg. *queturto = Gr. te/tratos, Lat. quartus, Ohg. fiordo] the fourth Sn 97, 99, 450; J iii.55; vi.367; ˚ŋ (adv.) for the fourth time DhA iii.174. -- f. catutthī Sn 436; Vism 338. -- See also ( s.v. Aḍḍha) aḍḍhuḍḍha.

-- bhatta food eaten only every fourth day J v.424. -- magga "the fourth Path," of Arahantship DhA i.309; -- mana (?) (nt.) name of the tongue, in so far as it forms the fourth vatthu (beside eyes, ears, nose) according to the gloss: J v.155; extremely doubtful. Catur
Catur,
catu˚ in composition [Vedic catvārah (m.) cat- vāri (nt.) fr. *qṷetuor, *qṷetur = Gr. te/ttares (hom. pi/sures), Lat. quattuor, Goth. fidwōr, Ohg. fior, Ags fēower, E. four; catasras (f.) fr. *qṷ(e)tru, cp. tisras. Also as adv. catur fr. *quetrus=Lat. quater & quadru˚] base of numeral four; 1. As num. adj. nom. & acc. m. cattāro (Dh 109; J iii.51) and caturo (Sn 84, 188), f. catasso (Sn 1122), nt. cattāri (Sn. 227); gen. m. catunnaŋ (Sn p. 102), [f. catassannaŋ]; instr. catubbhi (Sn 229), catūhi (Sn 231) & catuhi; loc. catūsu (J i.262) & catusu. -- 2. As num. adv., catu˚ catur˚ in cpds. catuddasa (14), also through elision & reduction cuddasa PvA 55, 283, etc., cp. also cātuddasī. Catuvīsati (24) Sn 457; catusaṭṭhi (64) J i.50; ii.193; PvA 74; caturāsīti (84) usually with vassa -- sahassāni J i.137; ii.311; Pv iv.77; DhA ii.58; PvA 9, 31, 254, etc. See also cattārīsa (40).

-- (r)aŋsa ( = caturassa, having four edges, four -- edged Dhs 617; PvA 189 (read ˚sobhitāya); -- (r)anga (consisting of) four limbs or divisions, fourfold M i.77; J i.390; ii.190, 192; vi.169 (uposatha, cp. aṭṭhanga); Dpvs i.6; Sdhp 64; -- (r)angika=prec. Dhs 147, 157, 397; KhA 85; Sdhp 58; -- (r)angin (adj.) comprising four parts, f. ˚inī, of an army consisting of elephants, chariots, cavalry & infantry D ii.190; J ii.102, 104; Vism 146; SnA 225, 353; DhA iv.144; cp. J vi.275; -- (r)angula (adj.) measuring 4 fingers, 4 fingers broad or wide, Vin i.46; S ii.178; J vi.534; Th 1, 1137; Vism 124. -- (r)angulika=prec. Th 2, 498 ( -- ThA, 290); -- (r)anta see cātur˚; -- (r)assa [catur+assa2] four -- cornered, quadrangular, regular Vin ii.310 (Bdhgh); J iv.46 (āvāṭa) 492 (sālā); v.49; Pv ii.119. Cp. caturaŋsa & next; -- (r)assara (see last) with 4 sharp sides (of a hammer; ˚muggara) DhA i.126; -- (r)âdhiṭṭhāna (adj.) one who has taken the four resolutions (see adhiṭṭhāna) M iii.239; -- (r)âpassena (adj.) endowed with the four apassena: lit.: reclining on four A v.29, 30; D iii.269, 270; -- ussada (catussada) full of four, endowed with 4 things, rich in four attributes J iv.309 (expld. p. 311 as having plenty of people, grain, wood & water); iv.422=461 "with four pillows" (p. 422 has caturassada for caturussada, which latter is also to be preferred to catussada, unless this is a haplology). In the same connection occurs satt -- ussada (full of people) D i.111 e. g. & Pv iv.18 (see satta). The formation "cattussada" has probably been influenced by "sattussada"; -- (k)kaṇṇa (& ˚ka) (a) with 4 corners Vin ii.137; J iii.255. -- (b) "between four ears," i. e. secret, of manta (counsel) J vi.391; -- (k) kama walking with four (feet), quadruped Vv 648; Pv i.113; -- kuṇḍika on all fours M i.79; A iii.188; D iii.6; Pv iii.27 (cp. PvA 181); -- koṇa four cornered, crossed, in ˚raccha cross road PvA 24; -- (k)khandha the four khandhas, viz. feeling, perception, synthesis & intellect (see khandha) DhsA 345; -- (g)guṇa fourfold, quadruple D ii.135; S i.27; J i.213; VvA 186; Sdhp 240; -- cakka with four wheels S i.16=63 (said of the human body, see under cakka); -- jāta of four sorts, viz. gandha (perfume) having four ingredients ThA 72 (see next) -- jāti of four kinds J i.265, v.79; (gandha). These 4 ingredients of perfume are saffron, jasmine, Turkish (tarukkha) & Greek incense (yavana); -- jātiya (& ˚jātika) in ˚gandha prec. J iii.291; iv.377; PvA 127; Miln 354; J i.178 (˚ka); -- (d)disā (pl.) the 4 quarters of the globe S i.167= Sn p. 79; D i.251; may also be taken for abl. sg. as adv.: in the 4 quarters Vin i.16, cp. acc. catuddisaŋ D ii.12; -- (d)dīpika covering the 4 continents, of megha (a cloud) DhA ii.95; -- dvāra with 4 gates, of a house D i.102 (=DA i.270); of Avīciniraya It 86; J iv.3; Pv i.1013; cp. Catudvāra Jātaka (No. 439; J iv.1 sq.); -- nahuta ninety -- four J i.25; vi.486; -- paccaya the four requisites (see paccaya) J iii.273, ˚santosa contentment with ˚DhA iv.111; -- paṇṇasa fifty-four DhA i.4; -- (p)patha a fourways J iv.460; -- (p)pada [Sk. caturpād, Gr. tetra/pous, Lat. quadrupes] a quadruped Vin ii.110; S i.6; A v.21; Sn 603, 964; It 87; J i.152; iii.82; -- parivaṭṭa (cp. aṭṭha ˚adhideva -- ñāṇadassana A iv.304) fourfold circle S iii.59 sq. (pañcupādānakkhandhe). -- parisā (f.) the fourfold assembly, scil. of male & female bhikkhus & upāsakas (cp. parisā) PvA 11; -- pala fourfold Vism 339. -- (p)pādaka (adj.) consisting of 4 padas, i. e. a sloka; f. ˚ikā (gāthā) a complete stanza or sloka Anvs p. 35; -- pārisuddhasīla (nt.) the four precepts of purity J iii.291; DhA iv.111; -- (b)bidha (catur+vidha) fourfold ThA, 74; -- (b)bipallāsa (catur+vipallāsa) the fourfold change (cp. Nett 85) Th+1, 1143; SnA 46; -- byūha (catur+vyūha) arranged in 4 arrays (of hāra) Nett 3, 105; -- bhāga the 4th part, a quarter Dh 108; -- bhūmika having 4 stories or stages (of citta or dhamma) DhA i.21; iv.72; DhsA 344, 345; cp. Vism 493 (of indriya); -- madhura (nt.) sweetness (syrup) of 4 (ingredients) DA i.136; ThA 68; -- mahāpatha a crossing on a high -- road Vism 235. -- mahābhūtika consisting of the four great elements DhsA 403; -- (m)mahārājika: see cātum˚; -- māsa 4 months, a season PvA 96; Dpvs i.24, 37 (cā˚); see under māsa; -- sacca the four truths or facts (see ariyasacca) DhA iii.380; Miln 334; (s)sāla (nt.) [catur+sāla] a square formed by 4 houses, in phrasc catuhi gabbhehi paṭimaṇḍitaŋ catussälaŋ kāretvā VvA 220; DhA iii.291; -- 'ha (catuha & catūha) 4 days; catuhena within 4 days S ii.191; catūhapañcāha 4 or 5 days Vin iv.280. -- See also cpds. with cātu˚. Catura
Catura
[Deriv. uncertain. Perhaps from tvar to move, that is quickly. Sk. catura] clever, skilled, shrewd J iii.266; vi.25. -- Der. f. abstr. caturatā cleverness Vbh 351 ( = cāturiya). Caturiya
Caturiya
at Vv 412 is to be read ca turiya, etc. Otherwise see cāturiya. Catta
Catta
[pp. of cajati] given up. sacrificed A ii.41; iii.50; Th 1, 209 (˚vaṇṇa who has lost fame); J ii.336; iv.195; v.41 (˚jīvita). Cattatta
Cattatta
(nt.) [fr. catta] the fact of giving up, abandon- ment, resignation Vbh 254 sq.; DhsA 381. Cattārīsa
Cattārīsa
(& cattālīsa) [Sk. catvāriŋśat] forty S ii.85; Sn p. 87; It 99≈. Usually cattāḷīsa J i.58; v.433; DhA i.41; ii.9. 93.

-- danta having 40 teeth (one of the characteristics of a Mahāpurisa) D ii 18; iii.144, 172. Cattārīsaka
Cattārīsaka
(adj.) having forty M iii.77. Cadika
Cadika
at Miln 197 (ūmikavankacadika) prob. for ˚madika. Cana
Cana
( -- ˚) [Vedic cana fr. rel. pron. *qṷo+demonstr. pron. *no, cp. anā, nānā; Gr. rh/; Lat. -- ne in quandone = P. kudācana. cana=Goth. hun, Ohg. gin, Ger. ir -- gen -- d. Cp. ci] indef. particle "like, as if," added to rel. or interrog. pronouns, as kiñcana anything, kudācana at any time, etc. Cp. ca & ci. Canaŋ
Canaŋ
= cana; and then, if Vin iii.121 (cp. ca 3); or should it be separated at this passage into ca naŋ? Canda
Canda
[Vedic candra from *(s)quend to be light or glowing, cp. candana sandal (incense) wood, Gr. ka/hdaros cinder; Lat. candeo, candidus, incendo; Cymr. cann white; E. candid, candle, incense, cinder] the moon (i. e. the shiner) S i.196; ii.206; M ii.104; A i.227, ii.139 sq.; iii.34; Dh 413; Sn 465, 569, 1016; J iii.52; vi.232; Pv i.127; ii.66; Vv 647 (maṇi˚ a shiny jewel. or a moonlike jewel, see VvA 278, v. l. ˚sanda). -- puṇṇa˚ the full moon J i.149, 267; v.215; ˚mukha with a face like a full moon (of the Buddha) DhA iii.171. Canda is extremely frequent in similes & comparisens: see list in J.P.T.S. 1907, 85 sq. In enumerations of heavenly bodies or divine beings Canda always precedes Suriya (the Sun), e. g. D ii.259; A i.215; ii.139; Nd2 308 (under Devatā). Cp. candimant. On quâsi mythol. etym. see Vism 418.

-- kanta a gem Miln 118; -- (g)gāha a moon -- eclipse (lit. seizure, i. e. by Rāhu) D i.10 (cp. DA i.95); -- maṇḍala the moon's disc, the shiny disc, i. e. the moon A i.283; J i.253; iii.55; iv.378; v.123; Dhs 617; Vism 216 (in compar,); PvA 65; -- suriyā (pl.) sun & moon J iv.61. -- 262 -- Candaka
Candaka
= canda VvA 278 (maṇi˚); Sdhp 92 (mayūra˚ the eye in a peacock's tail). Candatta
Candatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. canda] in cpd. paripuṇṇa˚ state or condition of the full moon SnA 502. Candana
Candana
(m. & nt.) [Deriv. unknown. Possibly non- Aryan; but see under canda, Sk. candana] sandal (tree, wood or unguent, also perfume) Vin i.203; A i.9, 145, 226; iii.237; Dh 54; J v.420 (tree, m.); Miln 382; DhA i.422; iv.189 (˚pūjā); VvA 158 (agalu˚ with aloe & sandal); PvA 76. -- Kāsika˚ sandal from Kāsī A iii.391; iv.281; Miln 243, 348; ratta˚ red s. J iv.442; lohita˚ id. A v.22; J i.37; hari˚ yellow s. J i.146.

-- ussada covered with sandal perfumes Th 1, 267; Pv iii.91 ( = candanasārānulitto PvA 211); -- gaṇṭhi (or better gaṇḍi; see the latter) a block of sandal wood Vin ii.110; -- gandhin having a scent of sandal J iii.190; -- vilepana sandal unguent J iv.3. -- sāra choice sandal (wood or perfume) Vv 523, J i.53, 340. Candanikā
Candanikā
(f.) a pool at the entrance of a village (usually, but not necessarily dirty: see Vin ii.122 & cp. candanapanka Av.Ś i.221, see also PW sub candana2) S v.361; M i.11, 73, 448; A i.161; Th 1, 567; J v.15; Miln 220; Vism 264, 343, 359; Sdhp 132. Candimā
Candimā
(m. or f.?) [Sk. candramas m. & candrimā f., cp. pūrṇimā; a cpd. of canda+mā, cp. māsa. The Pāli form, however, is based on a supposed derivation fr. canda+mant, like bhagavā, and is most likely m. On this formation cp. Lat. lumen = Sk. rukmān luminous, shiny] the moon. By itself only in similes at Dh 208, 387 (at end of pada) & in "abbhā mutto va candimā" M ii.104=Dh 172=Th 1, 871; Dh 382=Th 1, 873; Ps i.175. -- Otherwise only in combn with suriya, moon & sun, D i.240; ii.12; iii.85 sq., 90, 112; S ii.266; v.264 sq.; A i.227; ii.53, 130; v.59; Vv 30; J ii.213; Miln 191; Vism 153. Also in cpd. candimāpabhā the light of the moon (thus BB, whereas SS read at all passages candiyā˚ or candiya -- pabhā) S iii.156=v.44= It 20. Capala
Capala
(adj.) [Sk. capala cp. cāpa bow; from *qep to shake or quiver, see Walde Lat. Wtb. under caperro] moving to & fro, wavering, trembling, unsteady, fickle S i.204; v.269; M i.470 (and a˚ steady); A iii.199, 355, 391; Dh 33; Pug 35; J i.295; ii.360. At J vi.548 it means one who lets the saliva flow out of his mouth (expld by paggharita -- lāla "trickle -- spit"). Capalatā
Capalatā
(f.) [fr. last] fickleness, unsteadiness Miln 93. 251; Pgdp 47, 64. At Nd2 585 as capalanā+cāpalyaŋ with gedhikatā, meaning greed, desire (cp. capala at J vi.548). Capu
Capu
(or capucapu) a sound made when smacking one's lips Vin ii.214 (capucapukāraka adj.), 221; iv.197. Cappeti
Cappeti
[Sk. carvayati Dhtp 295 gives root cabb in meaning "adana"] to chew Bdhgh on Vin ii.115. Cp. jappati. Camati
Camati
(& cameti) [cam. to sip; but given at Dhtm 552 in meaning "adana," eating] to rinse, only in cpd. ācamati (ācameti). Camara
Camara
[Deriv. unknown, probably non -- Aryan. Sk. camara] 1. the Yak ox (Bos grunniens) J i.149; iii.18, 375; v.416; Miln 365. -- f. -- ī J i.20; Sdhp 621. -- In cpds. camari˚ J iv.256. -- 2. a kind of antelope ( -- ī) J vi.537.

-- vījanī (f.) a chowry (the bushy tail of the Yak made into a brush to drive away flies) Vin ii.130. This is one of the royal ensigns (see kakudhabhaṇḍa & cp. vāla -- vījanī). Camasa
Camasa
[Vedic camasa, a cup] a ladle or spoon for sacri- ficing into the sacred fire J vi.52824 = 5294 (unite ca with masa, cp. 5299 and n. 4: aggijuhana -- kaṭacchu -- sankhātimasañca [for camasañ ca] v. l. Bd). Cp. Kern, Toevoegselen s. v. Camu
Camu
(f.) [Both derivation and exact meaning uncertain. The Vedic camū is a peculiar vessel into wh. the Soma flows from the press. In late Pali & Sk. it means a kind of small army, perhaps a division drawn up more or less in the shape of the Vedic vessel] an army J ii.22; camūpati a general Mhvs 10, 65; 23, 4; Dāvs i.3. Campa
Campa
= campaka J vi.151. Campaka
Campaka
the Champaka tree (Michelia champaka) having fragrant white & yellow flowers J v.420; vi.269; Miln 338; DA i.280; Vism 514 (˚rukkha, in simile); DhA i.384; VvA 194. Campā
Campā
(f.) N. of a town (Bhagulpore) & a river D i.111; DA i.279; J iv.454. Campeyya
Campeyya
N. of a Nāgarāja J iv.454 ( = ˚jātaka, No. 506); Vism 304. Campeyyaka
Campeyyaka
(adj.) belonging to Campā Vin v.114; J vi.269 (here: a Champaka -- like tree). Camma
Camma
(nt.) [Vedic carman, cp. Lat. corium hide or leather, cortex bark, scortum hide; Ohg. herdo; Ags. heorða = E. hide; also Sk. kṛtti; Ohg. scirm (shield); E. skin; from *sqer to cut, skin (cp. kaṭu)=the cut -- off hide, cp. Gr. de/rw: (de/rma] 1. skin, hide, leather Vin i.192 (sīha˚ vyaggha˚ dīpi˚), 196 (elaka˚ aja˚ miga˚); A iv.393 (sīha˚ dīpi˚); PvA 157 (kadalimiga˚ as rug); J ii.110 (sīha˚); iii.82, 184; Miln 53; Sdhp 140. It is supposed to be subcutaneous (under chavi as tegument), & next to the bone: chaviŋ chindetvā cammaŋ chindati S ii.238=A iv.129; freq. in expr. like aṭṭhi -- cammanahāru -- matta (skin & bones) PvA 68, see under nahāru; camma -- maŋsa -- nahāru PvA 80. -- 2. a shield Vin ii.192 (asi˚ sword & shield); M i.86; A iii.93; J v.373; vi.580.

-- aṇḍa a water -- skin J i.250; -- kāra a worker in leather, a tanner Vin iv.7; Miln 331; a harness -- maker J v.45; a waggon -- builder and general artisan J iv.174 ( = rathakāra); also as -- kārin PvA 175 (=rathakārin); -- khaṇḍa an animal's skin, used as a rug Miln 366; Vism 99; skin used as a water -- vessel (see khaṇḍa) Vin ii.122; Ps i.176; -- ghaṭaka a water -- skin J ii.345; -- naddha (nt.) a drum Bu i.31; -- pasibbaka a sack, made of skin or leather ThA 283; J vi.431, 432 (as v. l.); -- bandha a leather strap Vin i.194; -- bhastā (f.) a sack J v.45; -- māluka a leather bag J vi.431, 432; -- yodhin a soldier in cuirass D i.51≈(in list of var. occupations; DA i.157: cammakañcukaŋ pavisitvā); A iv.107, 110; -- varatta (f.) a leather thong J ii.153; -- vāsin one who wears the skin (of a black antelope), i. e. a hermit J vi.528; -- sāṭaka an ascetic wearing clothes of skin J iii.82 (nāma paribbājaka). Cammaka
Cammaka
a skin Bu ii.52. Caya
Caya
[from cināti] piling, heaping; collection, mass Vin ii.117; DhsA 44; in building: a layer Vin ii.122, 152. As -- ˚ one who heaps up, a collector, hoarder M i.452 (nikkha˚, khetta˚, etc.). See also ā˚, apa˚, upa˚. Cara
Cara
(n -- adj.) [from car, carati] 1. the act of going about, walking; one who walks or lives (usually -- ˚): oka˚ living in water M i.117; J vi.416; antara˚ S iv.173; eka˚ solitary Sn 166; saddhiŋ˚ a companion Sn 45; anattha˚ J v.433; jala˚ Dāvs iv.38. See also cāreti & gocara. -- Instr. carasā (adv.) walking M i.449. -- cara -- vāda "going about talk," gossip, idle talk S iii.12; v.419. -- sucara easy, duccara difficult Vin iii.26. -- 2. one who is sent on a message, a secret emissary, a spy S i.79. Also as carapurisa J ii.404; iv.343; vi.469; DhA i.193. -> Note. -- cara -- purāya at A v.133 should be changed into v. l. SS paramparāya. -- 263 -- Caraka
Caraka
1. = cara2 (a messenger) J vi.369 (attha˚); adj. walking through: sabbalokaŋ˚ J v.395. -- 2. any animal S i.106; PvA 153 (vana˚). Caraṇa
Caraṇa
(nt.) [of a deer, called pañca -- hattha "having 5 hands," i. e. the mouth and the 4 feet] 1. walking about, grazing, feeding VvA 308 (˚ṭṭhāna). -- 2. the foot Vin iv.212; J v.431. -- 3. acting, behaviour, good conduct, freq. in combn with vijjā, e. g. A ii.163; v.327; Dh 144; Vism 202 (in detail); PvA 1, etc. -> D iii.97, 156; Sn 410, 462, 536; Miln 24. sampannacaraṇa (adj.) accomplished in right behaviour S i.153, 166; Sn 1126; Pv ii.138. -- Cp. sañ˚. Caraṇavant
Caraṇavant
(adj.) one of good conduct ( = sampanna- caraṇa) Sn 533, 536. Carati
Carati
[Vedic carati, *qṷel to move, turn, turn round (cp. kaṇṭha & kula) = Lat. colo (incolo), Gr. pe/lomai, po/los (also ai)po/los goat -- herd & bouko/los cowherd=gocara); also P. cakka, q. v. A doublet of car is cal, see calati Dhtp 243 expld car by "gati -- bhakkhanesu"] to move about, to "live and move," to behave, to be. -- Imper. act. cara (J i.152), carā (metri causa, J iii.393); -> imper. med. carassu (Sn 696), pl. carāmase (=exhortative, Sn 32); -- ppr. caranto (J i.152; PvA 14) & caraŋ (Sn 151; Dh 61, 305; It 117); med. caramāna (Vin i.83; Pv i.1010; PvA 160); -- pot. careyya (Sn 45, 386, 1065; Dh 142, 328) & care (Sn 35; Dh 49, 168, 329; It 120); -- fut. carissati (M i.428); -- aor. sg. 1st acariŋ (S iii.29), acārisaŋ (Pv iii.95), 3rd acari (Sn 344), acāri (Sn 354; Dh 326); cari (J ii.133). -- pl. 3rd acariŋsu (Sn 809), acārisuŋ (Sn 284); cariŋsu (Sn 289), acaruŋ (Sn 289), acāruŋ (J vi.114); -- inf. carituŋ (caritu -- kāma J ii.103); -- ger. caritvā (J i.50) & caritvāna (Sn 816); -- pp. ciṇṇa (q. v.) -- Caus. cāreti (=Denom. of cara), pp. carita. 2nd caus. carāpeti (q. v.). -- See also cara, caraṇa, cariyā, cāraka, cārikā, cārin.

Meaning: 1. Lit. (a) to move about, to walk, travel, etc.; almost synon. with gacchati in contrast to tiṭṭhati to stand still; cp. phrase carañ vā yadi vā tiṭṭhaŋ nisinno udāhu sayaŋ It 117 (walking, standing, sitting, reclining; the four iriyāpathā); care tiṭṭhe acche saye It 120; tiṭṭhaŋ caraŋ nisinno vā sayāno vā Sn 151. -> Defined as "catūhi iriyāpathehi vicarati" (i. e. more generally applied as "behaviour," irrespective of position) DhA ii.36. Expl. constantly by series viharati iriyati vattati pāleti yapeti yāpeti Nd2 237. -- carāmi loke I move about ( = I live) in the world Sn 25, 455; agiho c. I lead a homeless life Sn 456, 464; eko c. he keeps to himself Sn 35, 956; Dh 305, 329; sato c. he is mindful Sn 1054, 1085; gocaraŋ gaṇhanto c. to walk about grazing (see below) J iii.275; gavesanto c. to look for J i.61. -- (b) With definition of a purpose: piṇḍāya c. to go for alms (gāmaŋ to the village) Sn 386; bhikkhāya c. id. J iii.82. -- With acc. (in etymol. constr.) to undertake, set out for, undergo, or simply to perform, to do. Either with c. cārikaŋ to wander about, to travel: Vin i.83; S i.305 (applied: "walk ye a walk"); Sn 92; Dh 326; PvA 14 (janapada -- cārikaŋ), 160 (pabbata -- c˚ wandering over the mountains); or with cāraŋ: piṇḍa -- c.˚ carati to perform the begging -- round Sn 414; or with caritaŋ: duccaritaŋ c. to lead a bad life Sn 665 (see carita). Also with acc. of similar meaning, as esanaŋ c. to beg Th 1, 123; vadhaŋ c. to kill Th 1, 138; dukkhaŋ c. to undergo pain S i.210. -> (c) In pregnant sense: to go out for food, to graze (as gocaraŋ c. to pasture, see gocara). Appl. to cows: caranti gāvo Sn 20; J iii.479; or to the bhikkhu: Pv i.1010 (bh. caramāno= bhikkhāya c. PvA 51); Sn 386 (vikāle na c. buddhā: the Buddhas do not graze at the wrong time). -- 2. Appld meaning: (a) abs. to behave, conduct oneself Sn 1080; J vi.114; Miln 25 (kāmesu micchā c. to commit immorality). -- (b) with obj. to practise, exercise, lead a life: brahmacariyaŋ c. to lead a life of purity Vin i.17; Sn 289, 566, 1128; dhammañ c. to walk in righteousness J i.152; sucaritaŋ c. to act rightly, duccaritaŋ c. to act perversely S i.94; Dh 231. Carahi
Carahi
(adv.) [Sk. tarhi; with change t > c due to analogy with ˚ci (˚cid) in combn with interr.] then, therefore, now, esp. after interr. pron.: ko carahi jānāti who then knows? Sn 990; kathañ carahi jānemu how then shall we know? Sn 999; kiñ c. A v.194. -- Vin i.36; ii.292; Sn 988; J iii.312; Miln 25; DA i.289. Carāpeti
Carāpeti
[Caus. 11. of carati] to cause to move, to make go J i.267 (bheriŋ c. to have the drum beaten); PvA 75 (do.); DhA i.398 (to circulate). As cārāpeti J v.510 (bheriŋ). Carita
Carita
[pp. of cāreti, see cara & carati] 1. (adj.) going, moving, being like, behaving ( -- ˚) J vi.313; Miln 92 (rāgac˚ = ratta); Vism 105, 114 (rāga˚, dosa˚, moha˚, etc.). -- 2. (nt.) action, behaviour, living Dh 330 (ekassa c. living alone); Ps i.124; Miln 178. See also carati 1b, 2b. Esp. freq. with su˚ and duc˚: good, right, proper or (nt.) good action, right conduct & the opposite; e. g. sucarita Dh 168, 231; PvA 12, 71, 120; duccarita A i.146; ii.85, 141; iii.267, 352; D iii.111. 214; Dh 169, Sn 665; Pv i.94 (˚ŋ caritvā), etc. See also kāya˚ vacī˚ mano˚ under kāya. Caritaka
Caritaka
(nt.) conduct ( = carita2) Th 1, 36. Caritar
Caritar
[n. agent to cāreti, cp. carita] walking, performing (c. acc.) M i.77. Carima
Carima
(adj.) [Vedic carama, Gr. te/los end, pa/lai a long time (ago)] subsequent, last (opp. pubba) Th 1, 202; It 18; J v.120. -- acarima not later (apubba ac˚ simultaneously) D i.185; M iii.65; Pug. 13.

-- bhava the last rebirth (in Saŋsāra, with ref. to Arahantship) ThA 260, cp. caramabhavika in Divy (freq.) & next. Carimaka
Carimaka
(adj.) last ( = carima) M i.426; Nd2 569b (˚viñ- ñāṇassa nirodha, the destruction of the last conscious state, of the death of an Arahant); Vism 291. Cariya
Cariya
(nt.) & cariyā (f.) [from car, carati] (mostly -- ˚) conduct, behaviour, state of, life of. Three cariyās at Ps i.79; six at Vism 101; eight at Ps ii.19 sq., 225 & four sets of eight in detail at Nd2 237b. Very freq. in dhamma˚ & brahma˚, a good walk of life, proper conduct, chastity -- eka˚ living alone Sn 820; unchā˚ begging J ii.272; iii.37; bhikkhā˚ a life of begging Sn 700; nagga˚ nakedness Dh 141. -- See also carati 2b. In cpds. cariyā˚.

-- piṭaka the last book in the Khuddaka -- nikāya; -- manussa a spy, an outpost J iii.361 (v. l. cārika˚). Cala
Cala
(adj.) [see calati] moving, quivering; unsteady, fickle, transient S iv.68 (dhammā calā c' eva vyayā ca aniccā, etc.); J ii.299; iii.381; v.345; Miln 93, 418; Sdhp 430, 494. -- acala steadfast, immovable S i.232; J i.71 (ṭṭhāna); Vv 514 (˚ṭṭhāna = Ep. of Nibbāna); acalaŋ sukhaŋ (=Nibbāna) Th 2, 350; cp. niccala motionless DhA iii.38.

-- âcala [intens. redupl.] moving to & fro, in constant motion, unsteady J iv.494, 498 ( = cañcala); Miln 92; (cp. Divy 180, 281); -- kkaku having a quivering hump J iii.380 iv.330 (=calamānakakudha or calakakudha). Calaka
Calaka1
(m.) a camp marshal, adjutant D i.51≈(in list of various occupations); A iv.107 sq. Calaka
Calaka2
(nt.) [perhaps from carv to chew; but Sk. car- vana, chewing, is not found in the specific sense of P. calaka. Cp. ucchiṭṭha and cuṇṇa] a piece of meat thrown away after having been chewed Vin ii.115; iv.266 ( = vighāsa); VvA 222 (˚aṭṭhikāni meat -- remnants & bones). -- 264 -- Calati
Calati
[Dhtp 251 kampana, to shake. Perhaps connected with car, carati] to move, stir, be agitated, tremble, be confused, waver S i.107; Sn 752; J i.303 (kileso cali); iii.188 (macchā c.) Miln 260. -- ppr. med. calamāna J iv.331. -- Esp. freq. in expression kammaja -- vātā caliŋsu the labour -- pains began to stir J i.52; vi.485. -> pp. calita (q. v.). -- caus. caleti to shake S i.109. Calana
Calana
(adj. & nt.) shaking, trembling, vibrating; excite- ment J iii.188; DhsA 72. -- f. calanī (quick,+langhī) a kind of antelope J vi.537. Calita
Calita
(adj.) [pp. of calati] wavering, unsteady Miln 93, 251; Vism 113; VvA 177. -- (nt.) Sn p. 146. Cavati
Cavati
[Vedic cyavate from cyu = Gr. seu/w; cp. Lat. cieo, cio, sollicitus, Gr. ki/w, kine/w, Goth. haitan=Ohg, heizan] to move, get into motion, shift, to fall away, decease, esp. to pass from one state of existence into another D i.14 (sañsaranti c˚ upapajjanti, cp. DA i.105); Kh viii.4 (=KhA 220: apeti vigacchati acetano pi samāno puññakkhaya -- vasena aññaŋ thānaŋ gacchati); It 99= Nd2 2352 (satte cavamāne upapajjamāne); It 77 (devo deva -- kāyā c. "the god falls from the assembly of gods"), Sn 1073 for bhavetha (=Nd2 238;) PvA 10. Caus. cāveti: inf. cāvetuŋ S i.128 sq., 134 (˚kāma.) -- pp. cuta (q. v.), see also cuti. Cavana
Cavana
(nt.) [from cavati] shifting, moving, passing away, only in ˚dhamma doomed to fall, destined to decease D i.18, 19; iii.31, 33; M i.326; It 76; J iv.484; vi.482 (˚dhammatā). Cavanatā
Cavanatā
(f) state of shifting, removal S ii.3≈(cuti+); M i.49 (id.). Cāga
Cāga
[from cajati, to give up, Vedic tyaj. Cp. Sk. tyāga] (a) abandoning, giving up, renunciation Vin i.10; S iii.13, 26, 158; M i.486; A i.299. More freq. as: (b) liberality, generosity, munificence (n.) generous, munificent (adj.): sīlasampanno saddho purisapuggalo sabbe maccharino loke cāgena atirocati "he who is virtuous & religious excels all stingy people in generosity" A iii.34. In freq. combns e. g. sacca dama dhiti c. Sn 188 = S i.215; sacca dama c. khanti Sn 189= S i.215; mutta˚ (adj.) liberal, munificent, S v.351=392. ˚paribhāvita citta "a heart bent on giving" S v.309. In this sense cāga forms one of the (3, 4, 5 or 7) noble treasures of a man (cp. the Catholic treasure of grace & see ˚dhana below), viz. (as 5) saddhā, sīla, suta, cāga, paññā (faith, virtue, right knowledge, liberality, wisdom) S i.232; A i.210; iii.80=S iv.250; M iii.99; D iii.164, 165; cp. A i.152=iii.44; (as 4: the last minus suta) S v.395; A ii.62 (sama˚); (as 3) saddhā, sīla, cāga J ii.112; (as 7) ajjhesanā, tapo, sīla, sacca, cāga, sati, mati J ii.327; cp. śīla -- śruta -- tyāga Itm 311. -- PvA 30, 120; Sdhp 214, 323. See also anussati & anussarati.

-- âdhiṭṭhāna the resolution of generosity, as one of the 4: paññā˚, sacca˚, c˚., upasama˚ D iii.229; -- ânussati generosity A i.30; v.331; D iii.250, 280; Vism 197; -- kathā talk about munificence A iii.181; -- dhana the treasure of the good gift, as one of the 7 riches or blessings, the ariyadhanāni, viz. saddhā, sīla, hiri, ottappa, suta, c., paññā D iii.163, 251,; A iv.5; VvA 113; as one of 5 (see above) A iii.53; -- sampadā (& sampanna) the blessing of (or blessed with) the virtue of munificence A i.62; ii.66; iii.53; iv.221, etc. Cāgavant
Cāgavant
(adj.) generous A iii.183; iv.217, 220; Pug 24. Cāgin
Cāgin
(adj.) giving up, sacrificing, resigning Sn 719 (kāma˚). Cāṭi
Cāṭi
(f.) [cp. Hindī cāṭā] 1. a jar, vessel, pot J i.199; 302 (pānīya˚); iii.277 (madhu˚ honey jar); DhA i.394 (tela˚ oil tank); VvA 76 (sālibhatta˚ holding a meal of rice).-> 2. a measure of capacity J ii.404; iv.343. -- 3. a large vessel of the tank type used for living in Vin i.153.

-- pañjara a cage made of, or of the form of a large earthen jar, wherein a man could lie in ambush J v.372, 385; -- pāla (nt.) an earthenware shield (?) J v.373 ( = kīṭa). Cāṭu
Cāṭu
[cp. cāru] pleasant, polite in ˚kammatā politeness, flattery Miln 370 (cp. Sk. cāṭukāra); cāṭu -- kamyatā Vbh 246; Vism 17, 23, 27; KhA 236. Cātur˚
Cātur˚
(and cātu˚) [see catur] consisting of four. Only in cpds. viz.

-- (r)anta (adj.) "of four ends," i. e. covering or belonging to the 4 points of the compass, all -- encircling, Ep. of the earth: J ii.343 (paṭhavī); iv.309 (mahī) -- (n -- m.) one who rules over the 4 points; i. e. over the whole world (of a Cakkavattin) D i.88 (cp. DA i.249); ii.16; Sn 552. See also Sp. AvS ii.111, n. 2; -- kummāsa sour gruel with four ingredients VvA 308; -- (d)dasī (f.) [to catuddasa fourteen] the 14th day of the lunar half month A i.144. PvA 55; VvA 71, 99, 129. With pancadasī, aṭṭhamī & pāṭihāriyapakkha at Sn 402; Vv 155. ˚dasika belonging to the 14th day at Vin iv.315; -- (d)disa (adj.) belonging to, or comprising the four quarters, appld to a man of humanitarian mind Sn 42 ("showing universal love," see Nd2 239); cp. RV x.136. Esp. appld to the bhikkhu -- sangha "the universal congregation of bhikkhus" Vin i 305; ii.147; D i.145; J i.93; Pv ii.28; iii.214 (expld PvA 185 by catūhi disāhi āgata -- bhikkhu -- sangha). Cp. AvŚ i.266; ii.109; -- (d)dīpa of four continents: rājā Th 2, 486; cp. M Vastu i.108, 114; -- (d)dīpaka sweeping over the whole earth (of a storm) Vin i.290, cp. J iv.314 & AvŚ i.258; -- (b)bedā (pl.) the four Vedas Miln 3; -- māsin of 4 months; f. ˚inī Vin i.155; D i.47; M iii.79; DA i.139, cp. komudī; -- (m)mahāpatha the place where 4 roads cross, a crossroad D i.102, 194 = 243; M i.124; iii.91; cp. catu˚. -- (m)mahābhūtika consisting of the 4 great elements (of kāya) D i.34, 55, 186, 195; S ii.94 sq.; Miln 379; cp. Av.Ś ii.191 & Sk. cāṭurbhautika; -- (m)mahārājikā (pl.) (sc. devā) the retinue of the Four Kings, inhabiting the lowest of the 6 devalokas Vin i.12; iii.18; D i.215; Nd2 307 (under devā); J ii.311 (deva -- loka); -- yāma (saŋvara) fourfold restraint (see yāma) D i.57, 58 (cp. DA i.167); iii.48 sq.; S i.66; M i.377; Vism 410. Cp. Dial. i.75 n1. Cāturiya
Cāturiya
(nt.) [cp. catura+iya] skill, cleverness, shrewd- ness J iii.267; vi.410; ThA, 227; Vbh 551; Vism 104; Dāvs v.30. Cāpa
Cāpa
(m. nt.) [Sk. cāpa, from *qēp tremble, cp. capala wavering, quivering] a bow M i.429 (opposed to kodaṇḍa); Dh 156 (˚âtikhīṇa shot from the bow, cp. DhA iii.132), 320 (abl. cāpāto metri causa); J iv.272; v.400; Miln 105 (daḷha˚), 352.

-- koṭi the end of a bow VvA 261; nāḷi (f.) a bow -- case J ii.88; -- lasuṇa (nt.) a kind of garlic Vin iv.259. Cāpalla
Cāpalla
(nt.) [Der. fr. capala, Sk. cāpalya] fickleness D i.115 ( = DA i.286). Also as cāpalya M i.470; Vbh 351; Vism 106. Cāmara
Cāmara
(nt.) [from camara] a chowrie, the tail of bos grunniens used as a whisk Sn 688; Vv 643; J vi.510; VvA 271, 276. Cpd. cāmarī -- gāhaka J vi.218 (anka) a hook holding the whisk. Cāmikara
Cāmikara
(nt.). [Deriv. unknown. Sk. cāmīkara] gold VvA 12, 13, 166. Cāvati
Cāvati
[fr. ci] to honour, only in cpd. -- apacāyati (q. v.). The Dhtp (237) defines the root cāy by pūjā. Cāra
Cāra
[fr. car carati to move about] motion, walking, going; doing, behaviour, action, process Miln 162 (+vihāra); Dhs 8 = 85 (=vicāra); DhsA 167. Usually -- ˚ (n. & adj.): kāma˚ going at will J iv.261; pamāda˚ a slothful life J i.9; piṇḍa˚ alms -- begging Sn 414, 708; sabbaratti˚ wandering all night S i.201; samavattha˚ A iii.257. See also carati ib.

-- vihāra doing & behaving, i. e. good conduct J ii.232; Dpvs. vi.38; cp. Miln 162 (above). -- 265 -- Cāraka
Cāraka
(cārika) (adj.) wandering about, living, going, behaving, always -- ˚, like ākāsa˚, niketa˚, pure˚ (see pubbangama), vana˚, -- f. cārikā journey, wandering, esp. as cārikaŋ carati to go on alms -- pilgrimage (see carati ib) Vin i.83; J i.82; ii.286; Dh 326; Miln 14, 22; ˚ñ pakkamati to set out wandering J i.87; Miln 16. -> S i.199; M i.117; A iii.257; DA i.239 sq. (in detail on two cārikā); VvA 165; EnA 295 (unchā˚). Cāraṇa
Cāraṇa
(adj.) = cāraka Sn 162 (saŋsuddha˚). Cāraṇika
Cāraṇika
v.v. vāraṇika Th i.1129? a little play, masque, cp. Sk cāraṇa & Mrs. Rh. D. Pss of the Brethren, 419. Cāritta
Cāritta
(nt.) [From car] practice, proceeding, manner of acting, conduct J i.90, 367; ii.277 (loka˚); v.285 (vanka˚); Miln 133; VvA 31. -- cārittaŋ āpajjati to mix with, to call on, to have intercourse with (c. loc.) M i.470; S ii.270 (kulesu); M i.287 = iii.40 (kāmesu); J iii.46 (rakkhita -- gopitesu).

-- vāritta manner of acting & avoiding J iii.195, cp. Th 1. 591; Vism 10. See on their mutual relation Vism 11; -- sīla code of morality VvA 37. Cārin
Cārin
(only -- ˚) (adj.) walking, living, experiencing; be- having, acting, practising. (a) lit. asanga˚ S i.199; akāla˚ Sn 386; ambu˚ Sn 62; vihangapatha˚ Sdhp 241; sapadāna˚ M i.30; Sn 65; pariyanta˚ Sn 904. -> (b) fig. anudhamma˚ Sn 69; āgu˚ A ii.240; A iii.163; dhamma˚ Miln 19; brahma˚ Sn 695; manāpa˚ Vv 314; yata˚ Sn 971; sama˚ Miln 19. See all s. v. & cp. caṭu. Cāru
Cāru
(adj.) [Vedic cāru & cāyu to *qe -- *qā, as in kāma, Lat. carus, etc., see under kāma] charming, desirable, pleasant, beautiful J vi.481; Miln 201; Sdhp 428, 512; VvA 36 ( = vaggu), sucāru S i.181; Pv ii.1212 (=suṭṭhumanorama).

-- dassana lovely to behold Sn 548; J vi.449 (expl. on p. 450 as: cāru vuccati suvaṇṇaŋ = suvaṇṇadassana); vi.579; f. -- ī Pv iii.614. Cāreti
Cāreti
[Denom. fr. cara; cp. carati] to set going, to pasture, feed, preserve: indriyāni c. to feast one's senses (cp. Ger. "augenweide") PvA 58; khantiŋ c. to feed meekness DA i.277; olambakaŋ cārento drooping J i.174; Pass. ppr. cāriyamāna being handed round J iv.2 (not vā˚) -- pp. carita. -- Cp. vi˚. Cāla
Cāla
[From calati] shaking, a shock, only in bhūmi˚ earth- quake. Cālanī
Cālanī
(f.) [to cālana of calaka2] a pestle, a mortar Vin i.202 (in cuṇṇa˚ & dussa˚, cp. saṇha). Cāleti
Cāleti
[caus. of calati] to move, to shake J v.40; to scatter J i.71 (tiṇāni); to sift Vin i.202. Cāvanā
Cāvanā
(f.) moving, shifting, disappearance Vin iii.112 (ṭhānato); Sdhp 61 (id.). Cāveti
Cāveti
[caus. of cavati] to bring to fall, move, drive away; disturb, distract A iv.343 (samādhimhā); J i.60 (inf. cāvetu -- kāma); ii.329 (jhānā, abl.). Aor. acāvayi (prohib.) Sn 442 (ṭhānā). Ci
Ci
(cid in Sandhi) [Vedic cid nom. nt. to interr. base *qṷi (as in Gr. ti/s, Lat. quis, Goth. hvi -- leiks, see ki˚, cp. ka˚, ku˚), = Gr. ti/(d), Lat. quid & quid(d)em, Av. ciṭ (cp. tad, yad, kad beside taŋ, yaŋ, kiŋ)] indef. interr. particle (always -- ˚), in koci (= Sk. kaścid) whoever, kiñci (kincid -- eva) whatever, kadāci at some time or any time, etc. (q. v.), see also ca, cana, ce. Cikicchati
Cikicchati
[Sk. cikitsati, Desid. of cit, cinteti. Cp. vici- kicchā], usually tikicchati to reflect, think over, intend, aim at. Pp. cikicchita KhA 188 (in expln of vicikicchita q. v.). Cikkhati
Cikkhati
(cikkhanā, etc.) [Freq. of khyā, Dhtp 19: cikkh = vacane] to tell, to announce: see ā˚ & paṭisaŋ˚. Cikkhalla
Cikkhalla
(nt.) [Sk. cikkaṇa & cikkala, slippery+ya] mud, mire, swamp; often with udaka˚. Vin i.253; ii.120, 159, 291: iii.41; A iii.394; J i.196; Miln 286, 311, 397; PvA 102, 189, 215. -- (adj.) Vin ii.221; iv.312; Pv iv.116; Miln 286. Cikkhallavant
Cikkhallavant
(adj.) muddy PvA 225. Cikkhassati
Cikkhassati
[Desid. of kṣar = Sk. cikṣariṣati] to wish to drop, to ooze out Miln 152 (˚ssanto), see Kern. Toev. ii.139 & Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 87. Cingulaka
Cingulaka
(& ˚ika) (m. nt.) 1. a kind of plant Sn 239 ( = kaṇavīra -- pupphasaṇṭhāna -- sīsa SnA 283). -- 2. a toy windmill, made of palm -- leaves, etc. (DA i.86: tālapaṇṇādīhi kataŋ vātappahārena paribbhamana -- cakkaŋ) Vin ii.10; D i.6 M i.266; A v.203; Miln 229. Cingulāyati
Cingulāyati
[Denom. fr. cingula] to twirl round, to revolve like a windmill A i.112. Cicciṭāyati
Cicciṭāyati
[onomat. cp. ciṭiciṭāyati] to hiss, fizz, sizzle (always combd with ciṭiciṭāyati) Vin i.225; S i.169; Sn p. 15; Pug 36; Miln 258 sq. Cicciṭāyana
Cicciṭāyana
(nt.) fizzing Vism 408 (˚sadda). Ciñcā
Ciñcā
(f.) [Sk. ciñcā & tintiḍikā] the tamarind tree J v.38 (˚vana); SnA 78. Ciṭiciṭi
Ciṭi
-- ciṭi [redupl. interj.] fizz DA i.137. Ciṭiciṭāyati
Ciṭiciṭāyati
see cicciṭāyati; Vin i.225; cp. Divy 606. Ciṇṇa
Ciṇṇa
[pp. of carati] travelled over, resorted to, made a habit of; done, performed, practised J iii.541; Miln 360. -- su˚ well performed, accomplished S i.42 = 214=Sn 181; Pv iii.56. -- Cp. ā˚, pari˚, vi˚.

-- ṭṭhāna the place where one is wont to go J ii.159; -- mānatta one who performs the Mānatta Vin iv.242; -- vasin one who has reached mastership in (c. loc.) ThA 74; Vism 154, 158, 164, 169, 331 sq., 376; der. -- vāsibhāva DhsA 167 (read vasī˚). Ciṇṇatta
Ciṇṇatta
(nt.) [Der. fr. ciṇṇa] custom, habit Miln 57, 105. Cita
Cita
[pp. of cināti] heaped; lined or faced with (cp. citaka2) pokkharaṇiyo iṭṭhakāhi citā D ii.178, cp. Vin ii.123.

-- antaraŋsa "one whose shoulder -- hole is heaped up," one who has the shoulders well filled out (Ep. of a Mahāpurisa) D ii.18; iii.144, 164. Citaka & Citakā
Citaka
& Citakā (f.) [from ci, cināti to heap up]. -- 1. a heap, a pile, esp. a funeral pile; a tumulus D ii.163; cp, ii.1014. J i.255; v.488; vi.559, 576; DA i.6; DhA i.69; ii.240; VvA 234; PvA 39. -- 2. (adj.) inlaid: suvaṇṇa˚, with gold J vi.218 ( = ˚khacita). Citi
Citi
(f.) [From ci, cināti, to heap up] a heap, made of bricks J vi.204 (city -- avayata -- piṭṭhikā). See also cetiya. Cittaka
Cittaka
(nt.) [to citta1] a sectarian mark on the forehead in ˚dhara -- kumma a tortoise bearing this mark, a landtortoise Miln 364, 408, cp. Miln trsl. ii.352. Citta & Citra
Citta1
& Citra (adj.) [to cetati; *(s)qait to shine, to be bright, cp. Sk. citra, Sk. P. ketu, Av. ciprō, Lat. caelum, Ags. hador, Ohg. heitar, see also citta2] variegated, manifold, beautiful; tasty, sweet, spiced (of cakes), J iv.30 (geṇḍuka); Dh 171 (rājaratha); Vv 479; Pv ii.112 (aneka˚); iv.313 (pūvā = madhurā PvA 251). Citta (nt.) painting Th 1, 674. -- Sn 50 (kāmā=Nd2 240 nānāvaṇṇā), 251 (gāthā); J v.196 (geṇḍuka), 241 vi.218. -- sucitta gaily coloured or dressed S i.226 (b); Dh 151 (rājaratha); Pv i.109 (vimāna).

-- akkhara (adj.) with beautiful vowels S ii.267 (Cp. ˚vyañjana); -- attharaka a variegated carpet DA i.256; -- āgāra a painted house, i. e. furnished with pictures; a picture gallery Vin iv.298; -- upāhana a gaily coloured sandal D i.7≈; -- kata adorned, dressed up M ii.64 = Dh 147=Th 1, 769; DhA iii.109 (=vicitta); -- katha (adj.) =next S i.199 (+bahussuta); -- kathin a brilliant speaker, a wise speaker, an orator, preacher. Freq. combd w. bahussuta (of wide knowledge, learned), e. g. paṇḍita . . . medhāvin kalyāṇapaṭibhāna S iv.375, samaṇa bahussuta c. uḷāra Vv 8426. -- A iii.58; J i.148; Miln 1, 21; -- kathika=˚kathin A i.24; Th 2, 449 (+bahussuta), expld at ThA 281 by cittadhammakatha; -- kamma decoration, ornamentation, painting J iv.408; vi.333; Miln 278; Vism 306; PvA 147; DhsA 334; (m.) a painter J vi.481; -- kāra a painter, a decorator (cp. rajaka) S ii.101=iii.152; Th 2, 256; J vi.333; -- chatta at J vi.540 to be changed into ˚patta; -- patta (adj.) having variegated wings J vi.540, 590; -- pāṭalī (f.) N. of a plant (the "pied" trumpet -- flower) in the world of Asuras J i.202; DhA i.280; -- pekhuna having coloured wings J i.207; vi.539; -- bimba ( -- mukhi) (a woman whose face is) like a painted image J v.452 (cp cittakata); -- miga the spotted antelope J vi.538; -- rūpa (nt.) a wonder, something wonderful J vi.512; as adv. ˚ŋ (to citta2?) easily Vin ii.78=iii.161; iv.177, 232; -- latā the plant Rubia Munjista J vi.278; ˚vana the R.M. grove, one of Indra's gardens [Sk. caitraratha] J i.52, 104; ii.188; vi.590, etc.; -- vitāna a bright canopy DhA iv.14; -- vyañjana (adj.) with beautiful consonants (cp. ˚akkhara) S ii.267=A i.73=iii.107; -- sāṇī variegated cloth J ii.290; DhA iv.14; -- sālā a painted room or picture gallery DA i.253; -- sibbana with fine sewing; a cover of various embroidery Sn 304= J iv.395; J vi.218. -- 266 -- Citta
Citta2
(nt.) [Sk. citta, orig. pp. of cinteti, cit, cp. yutta> yuñjati, mutta> muñcati. On etym. from cit. see cinteti].

I. Meaning: the heart (psychologically), i. e. the centre & focus of man's emotional nature as well as that intellectual element which inheres in & accompanies its manifestations; i. e. thought. In this wise citta denotes both the agent & that which is enacted (see kamma II. introd.), for in Indian Psychology citta is the seat & organ of thought (cetasā cinteti; cp. Gr. frh/n, although on the whole it corresponds more to the Homeric qumo/s). As in the verb (cinteti) there are two stems closely allied and almost inseparable in meaning (see § III.), viz. cit & cet (citta & cetas); cp. ye should restrain, curb, subdue citta by ceto, M i.120, 242 (cp. attanā coday' attānaŋ Dhp 379 f.); cetasā cittaŋ samannesati S i.194 (cp. cetasā cittaŋ samannesati S i.194). In their general use there is no distinction to be made between the two (see § III.). -- The meaning of citta is best understood when explaining it by expressions familiar to us, as: with all my heart; heart and soul; I have no heart to do it; blessed are the pure in heart; singleness of heart (cp. ekagga); all of which emphasize the emotional & conative side or "thought" more than its mental & rational side (for which see manas & viññāṇa). It may therefore be rendered by intention, impulse, design; mood, disposition, state of mind, reaction to impressions. It is only in later scholastic lgg. that we are justified in applying the term "thought" in its technical sense. It needs to be pointed out, as complementary to this view, that citta nearly always occurs in the singular ( = heart), & out of 150 cases in the Nikāyas only 3 times in the plural (=thoughts). The substantiality of citta (cetas) is also evident from its connection with kamma (heart as source of action), kāma & the senses in general. -> On the whole subject see Mrs. Rh. D. Buddh. Psych. Eth. introd. & Bud. Psy. ch. II.

II. Cases of citta (cetas), their relation & frequency (enumd for gram. purposes). -- The paradigma is (numbers denoting %, not including cpds.): Nom. cittaŋ; Gen. (Dat.) cetaso (44) & cittassa (9); Instr. cetasā (42) & cittena (3); Loc. citte (2) & cittamhi (2). -- Nom. cittaŋ (see below). Gen. cittassa only (of older passages) in c˚ upakkileso S iii.232; v.92; A i.207; c˚ damatho Dh 35 & c˚ vasena M i.214; iii.156. Instr. cittena only in S i. viz. cittena nīyati loko p. 39; upakkiliṭṭha˚ p. 179; asallīnena c˚ p. 159. Loc. citte only as loc. abs. in samāhite citte (see below) & in citte vyāpanne kāyakammam pi v. hoti A i.162; cittamhi only S i.129 & cittasmiŋ only S i.132. -- Plural only in Nom. cittāni in one phrase: āsavehi cittāni (vi) mucciŋsu "they purified their hearts from intoxications" Vin i.35; S iii.132; iv.20; Sn p. 149; besides this in scholastic works = thoughts, e. g. Vbh 403 (satta cittāni).

III. Citta & cetas in promiscuous application. There is no cogent evidence of a clear separation of their respective fields of meaning; a few cases indicate the rôle of cetas as seat of citta, whereas most of them show no distinction. There are cpds. having both citta˚ & ceto˚ in identical meanings (see e. g. citta -- samādhi & ceto˚), others show a preference for either one or the other, as ceto is preferred in ceto -- khila & ceto -- vimutti (but: vimutta -- citta), whereas citta is restricted to combn w. upakkilesa, etc. The foll. sentences will illustrate this. Vivaṭena cetasā sappabhāsaŋ cittaŋ bhāveti "with open heart he contemplates a radiant thought" S v.263 = D iii.223=A iv.86; cetasā cittaŋ samannesati vippamuttaŋ "with his heart he scrutinizes their pure mind" S i.194; vigatâbhijjhena cetasā is followed by abhijjāya cittaŋ parisodheti D iii.49; anupārambhacitto bhabbo cetaso vikkhepaŋ pahātuŋ A v.149; cetaso vūpasamo foll. by vūpasanta -- citto A i.4; samāhite citte foll. by ceto -- samādhi D i.13≈; cittaŋ paduṭṭhaŋ foll. by ceto -- padosa A i.8; cp. It. 12, 13; cetaso tato cittaŋ nivāraye "a desire of his heart he shall exclude from this" S iv.195.

IV. Citta in itṡ relation to other terms referring to mental processes.

1. citta≈hadaya, the heart as incorporating man's personality: hadayaŋ phaleyya, cittavikkhepaŋ pāpuṇeyya (break his heart, upset his reason) S i.126; cittaŋ te khipissāmi hadayan te phālessāmi id. S i.207, 214; Sn p. 32; kāmarāgena cittaŋ me pariḍayhati S i.188>nibbāpehi me hadaya -- pariḷāhaŋ Miln 318 ("my heart is on fire"); cp. abhinibbutatto Sn 343 = apariḍayhamāna -- citto SnA 347; cittaŋ adhiṭṭhahati to set one's heart on, to wish DhA i.327.

2. c. as mental status, contrasted to (a) physical status: citta>kāya, e. g. kilanta˚ weary in body & mind D i.20 = iii.32; ātura˚ S iii.2 -- 5; nikaṭṭha˚ A ii.137; ṭhita˚ steadfast in body & soul (cp. ṭhitatta) S v.74; ˚passaddhi quiet of body & soul S v.66. The Commentators distinguish those six pairs of the sankhārākkhandha, or the cetasikas: citta -- kāya -- passaddhi, -- lahutā, etc. as quiet, buoyancy, etc., of (a) the viññāṇakkhandha (consciousness), (b) the other 3 mental khandhas, making up the nāma -- kāya (DhsA 150 on Dhs. 62: Compendium of Phil. 96, n. 3); passaddha˚ D iii.241, 288. -- (b) intellectual status: citta>manas & viññāṇa (mind>thought & understanding). These three constitute the invisible energizer of the body, alias mind in its manifestations: yañ ca vuccati cittan ti vā mano ti vā viññāṇan ti vā: (a) ayaŋ attā nicco dhuvo, etc., D i.21; (b) tatr' assutavā puthujjano n' âlaŋ nibbindituŋ, etc. S ii.94; (g) taŋ rattiyā ca divasassa ca añña -- d -- eva uppajjati aññaŋ nirujjhati S ii.95, cf. ThA. 1 on 125. -- Under ādesanā -- pāṭihāriya (thought reading): evam pi te mano ittham pi te mano iti pi te cittaŋ (thus is your thought & thus your mind, i. e. habit of thinking) D i.213 =iii.103; A i.170. -- niccaŋ idaŋ c. niccaŋ idaŋ mano S i.53; cittena niyyati loko "by thoughts the world is led" S i.39=A ii.177 (cp. KS 55); apatiṭṭhita -- citto ādīna -- manaso avyāpaṇnacetaso S v.74; vyāpanna -- citto paduṭṭha -- manasankappo S iii.93; paduṭṭha -- citto=paduṭṭha -- manaso PvA 34, 43.

3. c. as emotional habitus: (a) active = intention, contrasted or compared with: (a) will, c. as one of the four samādhis, viz. chanda, viriya, c., vīmaŋsā D iii.77; S v.268; Vbh 288. -- (b) action, c. as the source of kamma: citte vyāpanne kāyakammam pi vyāpannaŋ hoti "when the intention is evil, the deed is evil as well" A i.262; cittaŋ appamāṇaŋ . . . yaŋ kiñci pamāṇakataŋ kammaŋ, etc. A v.299. -- Esp. in contrast to kāya & vācā, in triad kāyena vācāya cittena (in deed & speech & will otherwise as k. v. manasā, see under kāya III.) S ii.231, 271=iv.112. Similarly taŋ vācaŋ appahāya (cittaŋ˚, diṭṭhiŋ˚) S iv.319=D iii.13, 15; & under the constituents of the dakkhiṇeyyasampatti as khetta -- sampatti, citta˚, payoga˚ (the recipient of the gift, the good -- will, the means) VvA 30, 32. -- (b) passive=mood, feelings, emotion, ranging with kāya & paññā under the (3) bhāvanā D iii.219; S iv.111; A iii.106; cp. M i.237; Nett 91; classed with kāya vedanā dhammā under the (4) satipaṭṭhānas D ii.95, 100, 299 sq.; S v.114, etc. (see kāya cpds.). As part of the sīlakkhandha (with sīla ethics, paññā understanding) in adhisīla, etc. Vin v.181; Ps ii.243; Vbh 325; cp. tisso sampadā, scil. sīla, citta, diṭṭhi (see sīla & cp. cetanā, cetasika) A i.269. -- citta & paññā are frequently grouped together, e. g. S i.13 = 165; D iii.269; Th i.125 sq. As feeling citta is contrasted with intellection in the group saññā c. diṭṭhi A ii.52; Ps ii.80; Vbh 376.

4. Definitions of citta (direct or implied): cittan ti viññāṇaŋ bhūmikavatthu -- ārammaṇa -- kiriyādi -- cittatāya pan' etaŋ cittan ti vuttaŋ DhA i.228; cittan ti mano mānasaŋ KhA 153; cittaŋ manoviññāṇaŋ ti cittassa etaŋ vevacanaŋ Nett 54. yaŋ cittaŋ mano mānasaŋ hadayaŋ paṇḍaraŋ, etc. Dhs 6 = 111 (same for def. of manindriya, under § 17; see Buddh. Psych.). As rūpâvacara citta at Vism 376.

V. Citta in its range of semantical applications: (1) heart, will, intention, etc. (see I.).

(a) heart as general status of sensory -- emotional being; its relation to the senses (indriyāni). A steadfast & constrained heart is the sign of healthy emotional equilibrium, this presupposes the control over the senses; samādahaŋsu cittaŋ attano ujukaŋ akaŋsu, sārathī va nettāni gahetvā indriyāni rakkhanti paṇḍitā S i.26; ujugato -- citto ariyasāvako A iii.285; ṭhita c. S i.159≈; A iii.377 = iv.404 (+ānejjappatta); c. na kampati Sn 268; na vikampate S iv.71; opp. capalaŋ c. Dh 33; khitta˚ a heart unbalanced A ii.52 (+visaññin); opp.: avikkhitta˚ A v.149; PvA 26; c. rakkhitaŋ mahato atthāya saŋvattati a guarded heart turns to great profit A i.7; similarly: c. dantaŋ, guttaŋ, saŋvutaŋ ibid. -- cittaŋ rakkhetha medhāvī cittaŋ guttaŋ sukhāvahaŋ Dh 36; cakkhundriyaŋ asaŋvutassa viharato cittaŋ vyāsiñcati . . . rūpesu S iv.78; ye cittaŋ saññamessanti mokkhanti Mārabandhanā "from the fetters of Māra those are released who control their heart" Dh 37; pāpā cittaŋ nivāraye Dh 116; bhikkhuno c. kulesu na sajjati, gayhati, bajjhati S ii.198 (cp. Schiller: "Nicht an die Güter hänge dein Herz").

(b) Contact with kāma & rāga: a lustful, worldly, craving heart. -- (a) kāmā: kāmā mathenti cittaŋ Sn 50; S iv.210; kāmarāgena ḍayhāmi S i.188; kāme nâpekkhate cittaŋ Sn 435; mā te kāmaguṇe bhamassu cittaŋ Dh 371; manussakehi kāmehi cittaŋ vuṭṭhapetvā S v.409; na uḷāresu kāmaguṇesu bhogāya cittaŋ namati A iv.392; S i.92; kāmāsavā pi cittaŋ vimuccati A ii.211, etc.; kāmesu c. na pakkhandati na ppasīdati na sanṭiṭṭhati (my h. does not leap, sit or stand in cravings) D iii.239; kāmesu tibbasārāgo vyāpannacitto S iii.93; kāmāmise laggacitto (divide thus!) PvA 107. -- (b) rāgā: rāgo cittaŋ anuddhaŋseti (defilement harasses his heart) S i.185; ii.231 = 271; A ii.126; iii.393; rāga -- pariyuṭṭhitaŋ c. hoti A iii.285; sārattacitto S iv.73; viratta˚ S iv.74; Sn 235; PvA 168. -> (g) various: patibaddha -- c. (fettered in the bonds of ˚) A iv.60; Sn 37, 65; PvA 46, 151, etc. -- pariyādinna˚ (grasping, greedy), usually combd w. lābhena abhibhūta: S ii.226, 228; iv.125; A iv.160; D iii.249. -- upakkiliṭṭha˚ (etc.) (defiled) S i.179; iii.151, 232 sq.; v.92 (kāmacchando cittassa upakkileso); A i.207; v.93 sq. -- otiṇṇa˚ fallen in love A iii.67; SnA 322.

(c) A heart, composed, concentrated, settled, selfcontrolled, mastered, constrained. -- (a) c. pasīdati (pasanna -- ˚c) (a heart full of grace, settled in faith) S i.98; A i.207; iii.248; Sn 434; pasanna˚: A iv.209, 213; Sn 316, 403, 690, cp. c. pakkhandati pasīdati S iii.133; A iii.245; also vippasanna˚: S v.144; Sn 506; cp. vippasannena cetasā Pv i.1010. -- (b) c. santiṭṭhati in set s. sannisīdati, ekodihoti, samādhiyati (cp. cetaso ekodibhāva) S ii.273; iv.263; A ii.94, 157. -- (g) c. samādhiyati (samāhita -- c˚, cp. ceto -- samadhi quiescence) D i.13 = iii.30, 108; S i.120, 129, 188; iv.78=351; A i.164; ii.211; iii.17, 280; iv.177; Vbh 227; Vism 376, etc. -- (d) supatiṭṭhita -- c˚ always in formula catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu -- s -- c˚: S iii.93; v.154; 301; D iii.101; A v.195. -- (e) susaṇṭhita c. S v.74. -- vasībhūta c. S i.132; A i.165. -- danta c. Dh 35. -- (d) "with purpose of heart," a heart set on, striving after, endeavouring, etc. -- (a) cittaŋ namati (inclines his h. on, with dat: appossukkatāya S i.137); nekkhamma -- ninna S iii.233; viveka˚ D iii.283; A iv.233; v.175. -- (b) cittaŋ padahati (pa+dhā: pro -- ti/qhti) in phrase chandaŋ janeti vāyamati viriyaŋ ārabbhati c˚ ŋ paggaṇhāti padahati D iii.221; A ii.15=iv.462; S v.269; Nd2 97; Nett 18. In the same ṣense pa -- ni -- dahati (in paṇidhi, paṇihita bent down on) (cp. ceto -- paṇidhi) S i.133 (tattha) iv.309 (dup˚); v.157; Dh 42=Ud 39; Dh 43 (sammā˚).

(e) An evil heart ("out of heart proceed evil thoughts" Mk. 7, 21) -- (a) paduṭṭha -- c˚ (cp. ceto -- padosa) D i.20 = iii.32; A i.8 (opp. pasanna -- c˚); iv.92; It 12, 13; Pv A 33, 43, etc. -- (b) vyāpanna -- c˚: citte vyāpanne kāyakammam pi vyāpannaŋ hoti A i.262. Opp. a˚: S iv.322; A ii.220. -- (g) samoha -- c˚ (+sarāga, etc.) D i.79; ii.299; iii.281; Vism 410, & passim.

(f) "blessed are the pure in heart," a pure, clean, purified (cp. Ger. geläutert), emancipated, free, detached heart. (a) mutta -- c˚, vimutta -- c˚, etc. (cp. cetaso vimokkho, ceto -- vimutti, muttena cetasā), āsavehi cittāni mucciŋsu S iii.132, etc.; vi˚ Sn p. 149. -- vimutta: S i.28 (+subhāvita), 29, 46 = 52; iii.45 (+viratta), 90; iv.236 (rāgā); Sn 23 (+sudanta); Nd2 587. -- suvimutta: S i.126, 141, 233; iv.164; A iii.245; v.29; Sn 975 (+satimā). -- (b) cittaŋ parisodheti M i.347; A ii.211; S iv.104. -- (g) alīna c. (unstained) S i.159; A v.149; Sn 68; 717; Nd2 97 (cp. cetaso līnatta).

(g) good -- will, a loving thought, kindliness, tenderheartedness, love ("love the Lord with all your heart"). -- (a) metta -- c˚ usually in phrase mettacittaŋ bhāveti "to nourish the heart with loving thought," to produce good -- will D i.167; S ii.264; A i.10; v.81; Sn 507 (cp. mettā -- sahagatena cetasā). -- (b) bhāvita -- c˚ "keep thy heart with all diligence" (Prov. 4, 23) S i.188 (+susamāhita); iv.294; v.369 (saddhā -- paribhāvita); A i.6 (+bahulīkata, etc.); Sn 134 ( = S i.188); Dh 89=S v.29; PvA 139.

(h) a heart calmed, allayed, passionless (santa˚ upasanta˚) D.iii.49; S i.141; Sn 746.

(i) a wieldy heart, a heart ready & prepared for truth, an open & receptive mind: kalla˚, mudu˚, udagga˚, pasanna˚ A iv.186; kalla˚ PvA 38 (sanctified); lahu˚ S i.201; udagga˚ Sn 689, 1028; S i.190 (+mudita); mudu˚ PvA 54.

(k) Various phrases. Abbhuta -- cittajātā "while wonder filled their hearts" S i.178; evaŋcitto "in this state of mind" S ii.199; Sn 985; cittam me Gotamo jānāti (G. knows my heart) S i.178; theyya -- citto intending to steal Vin iii.58; āraddha -- citto of determined mind M i.414; S ii.21, cp. 107; Sn p. 102; aññācittaŋ upaṭṭhāpeti S ii.267; nānā˚ of varying mind J i.295; nihīnacitto low -- minded PvA 107; nikaṭṭha˚ A ii.137; āhata˚ A iv.460 = v.18; supahata˚ S i.238 (cp. Miln 26); visankhāragata˚ Dh 154; sampanna˚ Sn 164; vibbhanta˚ S i.61=A i.70=ii.30=iii.391.

(2) thought: mā pāpakaŋ akusalaŋ cittaŋ cinteyyātha (do not think any evil thought) S v.418; na cittamattam pi (not even one thought) PvA 3; mama cittaŋ bhaveyya (I should think) PvA 40. For further instances see Dhs & Vbh Indexes & cp. cpds. See also remarks above (under I.). Citta likened to a monkey Vism 425.

-- âdhipati the influence of thought (adj. ˚pateyya) Nett 16; Dhs 269, 359; DhsA 213. Commentators define c. here as javanacittuppāda, our "thought" in its specialized sense, Compendium of Phil. 177, n. 2. -- ânuparivattin consecutive to thought Dhs 671, 772, 1522; -- ânupassanā the critique of heart, adj. ˚ânupassin D ii.299; iii.221, 281; M i.59 & passim (cp. kāy˚); -- āvila disturbance of mind Nd2 576 (˚karaṇa); -- ujjukatā rectitude of mind Dhs 51, 277, etc.; -- uppāda the rise of a thought, i. e. intention, desire as theyya ˚ŋ uppādesi he had the intention to steal (a thought of theft) Vin iii.56; -- M i.43; iii.45; J ii.374; -- ekaggatā "one -- pointedness of mind," concentration Nett 15, 16; Vism 84, 137, 158; DhA iii.425; ThA 75; cp. ekagga -- citto A iii.175; -- kali a witch of a heart, a witch -- like heart Th 1, 356; -- kallatā readiness of heart, preparedness of mind VvA 330; -- kilesa stain of h. Dh 88 (DhA ii.162 = pañca nīvaraṇā); -- kelisā pastime of the mind Th 1, 1010; -- kkhepa derangement of the mind, madness Vin v.189=193 (ummāda+); A iii.219 (ummāda+); DhA iii.70 (=ummāda); PvA 39; Dh 138; cp. ˚vikkhepa; -- cetasika belonging to heart & thought, i. e. mental state, thought, mind D i.213; Dhs 1022 ( -- dhammā, Mrs. Rh. D.: emotional, perceptual & synthetic states as well as those of intellect applied to sense -- impressions), 1282; Ps i.84; Miln 87; Vism 61, 84, 129, 337; -- dubbhaka a rogue of a heart, a rogue -- like heart Th 1, 214; -- pakopana shaking or upsetting the mind It 84 (dosa); -- pamaddin crushing the h. Th 2, 357 (=ThA 243; v. l. pamāthin & pamādin); -- pariyāya the ways (i. e. behaviour) of the h. A v.160 (cp. ceto -- paricca); -- passaddhi calm of h., serenity of mind (cp. kāya˚) S v.66; Dhs 62; -- bhāvanā cultivation of the h. M iii.149; -- mala stain of h. PvA 17; -- mudutā plasticity of mind (or thought) Dhs 62, 277, 325; -- rucita after the heart's liking J i.207; -- rūpaŋ according to intention, as much as expected Vin i.222; ii.78; iii.161; iv.177, 232; -- lahutā buoyancy of thought Dhs 62, 323, 1283; Vism 465; -- vikkhepa (cp. ˚kkhepa) madness S i.126 (+ummāda); Nett 27; Vism 34; -- vippayutta disconnected with thought Dhs 1192, 1515; -- visaŋsaṭṭha detached fr. thought Dhs 1194, 1517; -- vūpasama allayment of one's h. S i.46; -- sankilesa (adj.) with impure heart (opp. c. -- vodāna) S iii.151; -- saññatti conviction Miln 256; -- santāpa "heart -- burn," sorrow PvA 18 (=soka); -- samādhi (cp. ceto -- samādhi) concentration of mind, collectedness of thought, self -- possession S iv.350; v.269; Vbh 218; -- samodhāna adjustment, calming of thoughts ThA 45; -- sampīḷana (adj.) h.-> crushing (cp. ˚pamaddin & ˚pakopana) Nett 29 (domanassa). -- sahabhū arising together with thought Dhs 670, 769, 1520. -- hetuka (adj.) caused by thought Dhs 667, 767. -- 268 -- Citta
Citta2
[cp. Sk. caitra, the first month of the year: March- April, orig. N. of the star Spica (in Virgo); see E. Plunket, Ancient Calendars, etc., pp. 134 sq., 171 sq.] N. of the month Chaitra PvA 135. Cp. Citra -- māsa KhA 192. Cittaka() & Citraka()
Cittaka(a)
& Citraka(b) 1. (adj.)(a) coloured J iv.464. - 2. (m.)(b) the spotted antelope J vi.538. -- 3. (nt.) a (coloured) mark (on the forehead) Miln 408 (˚dharakumma). -- f. cittakā a counterpane of many colours (DA i.86 cittikā: vāna [read nāna˚] citra -- uṇṇā -- may' attharaṇaŋ) Vin i.192; ii.163, 169; D i.7; A i.181≈. Cittaka
Cittaka2:
see acittaka. Cittatara
Cittatara,
compar. of citta1, more various, more varied. S iii.151 sq. -- a punning passage, thus: by the procedure (caraṇa) of mind (in the past) the present mind (citta) is still more varied. Cp. SA in loco: Asl. 66; Expositor 88. Cittatā
Cittatā.
[f. abstr. to citta1] SA on S iii. 151 sq. (bhūmicittatāya dvāracittatāya ārammaṇacittatāya kammanānatta). Cittatā
Cittatā
[f. abstr. to citta2] "being of such a heart or mind," state of mind, character S iii.152; iv.142 (vimutta˚); v.158 (id.); A v.145 sq. (upārambha˚); Vbh 372 (id.); Vbh 359 (amudu˚); PvA 13 (visuddhi˚, noble character); paṭibaddha˚ (in love with) PvA 145, 147, 270. In S iii.152 l cittitā q. v. Cittatta
Cittatta
(n.) = cittatā S v.158. Citti
Citti
(f.) [fr. cit, cp. citta, cintā, cinteti, formation like mutti>muc, sitti>sic] "giving thought or heart" only in combn w. kar: cittikaroti to honour, to esteem. Ger. cittikatvā M iii.24; A iii.172; Pv ii.955 (cittiŋ k. = pūjetvā PvA 135); Dpvs i.2; -- acittikatvā M iii.22; A iv.392. -- pp. cittikata thought (much) of Vin iv.6 (& a˚); Vbh 2. Cittikāra
Cittikāra
[see citti] respect, consideration VvA 178 (garu˚), 242; PvA 26; Vbh 371 (a˚); Vism 123 (cittī˚), 188. Cittita
Cittita
[pp. of citteti, Denom. fr. citta1] painted, variegated, varied, coloured or resplendent with ( -- ˚) S iii.152 (sic l. for cittatā) So SA, which, on p. 151, reads citten' eva cittitaŋ for cintitaŋ. Th 1, 736; 2, 390 (su˚); Vv 367; 402. Citra
Citra
= citta3, the month Chaitra, KhA 192 (˚māsa). Cināti
Cināti
[Sk. cinoti & cayati, ci, to which also kāya, q. v. See also caya, cita] to heap up, to collect, to accumulate. Inf. cinituŋ Vin ii.152; pp. cita (q. v.). Pass. cīyati J v.7. Caus. cināpeti to construct, to build J vi.204; Miln 81. -- Note cināti at J ii.302 (to weave) is to be corr. to vināti (see Kern, Toev. s. v.). -- Cp. ā˚, pa˚, vi˚. -- Note. cināti also occurs as cinati in pa˚. Cintaka
Cintaka
(adj.) [cp. cintin] one who thinks out or invents, in akkhara˚ the grammarian PvA 120, nīti˚ the lawgiver ib. 130; cp. Divy 212, 451, "overseer." Cintana
Cintana
(nt.) = cintā Th 1, 695; Miln 233. Cintanaka
Cintanaka
(adj.) thoughtful, considerate J i.222. Cintā
Cintā
[to cit, cinteti] "the act of thinking" (cp. citti), thought S i.57; Pug 25; Dhs 16, 20, 292; Sdhp 165, 216. -- loka˚ thinking over the world, philosophy S v.447; A ii.80.

-- kavi "thought -- poetry," i. e. original poetry (see kavi) A ii.230; -- maṇi the jewel of thought, the true philosopher's stone VvA 32; N. of a science J iii.504; -- maya consisting of pure thought, metaphysical D iii.219; J iv.270; Vbh 324; Nett 8, 50, 60 (˚mayin, of paññā); Vism 439 (id.). Cintita
Cintita
[pp. of cinteti, cp. also cintaka] (a) (adj.) thought out, invented, devised S i.137 (dhammo asuddho samalehi c.); iii.151 (caraṇaŋ nāma cittaŋ citten' eva c.); Pv ii.613 (mantaŋ brahma˚, expl. PvA 97 by kathitaŋ). -- (b) (nt.) a thought, intention, in duc˚ & su˚ (bad & good) A i.102; ThA 76; -- matta as much a, a thought, loc. cintita -- matte (yeva) at the mere thoughts just as he thought it DhA i.326 ( = cintita kkhaṇe in the moment of thinking it, p. 329). Cintin
Cintin
[adj. to cintā] only -- ˚: thinking of, having one's thoughts on A i.102 (duccintita˚ & su˚); Sn 174 (ajjhatta˚; v. l. B. ˚saññin) 388; J iii.306 = iv.453 = v.176=v.478; Miln 92. Cinteti & ceteti
Cinteti
& ceteti [Sk. cetati to appear, perceive, & cinta- yati to think, cit (see citta2) in two forms: (a) Act, base with nasal infix cint (cp. muñc, yuñj, siñc, etc.); (b) Med. base (denom.) with guṇa cet (cp. moc, yoj, sec, etc, & the analogous formations of chid, chind, ched under chindati) to *(s)qait: see citta1, with which further cp. caksu, cikita, ciketi, cikitsati, & in meaning passati (he sees = he knows), Gr. oi)da=vidi, E. view=thought, Ger. anschauung] -- Forms: (a) cint: pres. cinteti. pot. cinteyya; ppr. cintento & cintayanto (Sn 834); -- aor. cintesi, 3rd pl. cintesuŋ (J i.149), acintayuŋ (Sn 258); -- ger. cintetvā (J i.279) & cintiya (Mhvs vii.17, 32); -- grd. cinteyya & cintetabba; pp. cintita (q. v.). Cp. also cintana, cintin. -- (b) cet: pres. ceteti & cetayati (S i.121), pot. cetaye (Pv ii.97= cinteyya PvA 116); ppr. cetayāna (J v.339); fut. cetessati (Vin iii.19); -- aor. acetayi (Pv i.66=cetesi PvA 34); -- ger cecca (Vin iii.112; iv.290); also cicca: see sañ˚. -- grd. cetabba (for *cetetabba only at J iv.157, v. l. ceteyya, expl. by cintetabba); -- pp. cetayita (q. v.). Cp. also cetanā.

Note. The relation in the use of the two forms is that cet is the older & less understood form, since it is usually expld by cint, whereas cint is never expld by cet & therefore appears to be the more frequent & familiar form.

Meaning: (a) (intr.) to think, to reflect, to be of opinion, Grouped with (phuṭṭho) vedeti, ceteti, sañjānāti he has the feeling, the awareness (of the feeling), the consciousness S iv.68. Its seat is freq. mentioned with manasā (in the heart), viz. manasā diṭṭhigatāni cintayanto Sn 834; na pāpaŋ manasā pi cetaye Pv ii.97; J i.279; PvA 13 (he thought it over), ib. (evaŋ c. you think so); Sdhp 289 (īdisaŋ c. id.) Mhvs vii.18, 32; Miln 233 (cintayati), 406 (cintayitabba). -- Prohibitive: mā cintayi don't think about it, don't worry, don't be afraid, never mind J i.50, 292, 424; iii.289; vi.176; pl. mā cintayittha J i.457; iv.414; vi.344; Vism 426; DhA i.12; iii.196; also mā cintesi J iii.535. -- (b) (with acc.) to ponder, think over, imagine, think out, design, scheme, intend, plan. In this sense grouped with (ceteti) pakappeti anuseti to intend, to start to perform, to carry out S ii.65. maraṇaŋ ākankhati cetayati (ponders over) S i.121; acinteyyāni na cintetabbāni A ii.80; cetabba -- rūpa (a fit object of thought, a good thought) J iv.157 ( = cintetabba); loka -- cintaŋ c. S v.447; ajjhattarūpe, etc. ceteti Vin iii.113; mangalāni acintayuŋ Sn 258; diṭṭhigatāni cintayanto Sn 834; kiŋ cintesi J i.221; sokavinayan' -- upāyaŋ c. to devise a means of dispelling the grief PvA 39. -- Esp. with pāpaŋ & pāpakaŋ to intend evil, to have ill -- will against (c. dat.): mā pāpakaŋ akusalaŋ cittaŋ cinteyyātha S v.418; na p. cetaye manasā pi Pv ii.97 (=cinteyya, piheyya PvA 116); p. na cintetabba PvA 114; tassā p. acetayi Pv i.66 (=cetesi PvA 34); kiŋ amhākaŋ cintesi what do you intend against us? J i.211. -- (c) (with dat.) (restricted to ceteti) to set one's heart on, to think upon, strive after, desire: āgatipunabbhavāya c. to desire a future rebirth S iv.201; vimokkhāya c. to strive after emancipation S iii.121; attavyābadhāya c. M iii.23=A i.157=S iv.339; pabbajjāya c. It 75; rakkhāya me tvaŋ vihito . . . udāhu me cetayase vadhāya J iii.146 -- acinteyya that which must not or cannot be thought A ii.80 (cattāri ˚āni four reflections to be avoided); VvA 323 (a. buddhânubhāva unimaginable majesty of a B.). -- 269 -- Cipiṭa
Cipiṭa
(adj.) [pp. to cip (?) see next: cp. Sk. cipiṭa grain flattened after boiling] pressed flat, flattened VvA 222. To be read also at J vi.185 for vippita. Cippiyamāna
Cippiyamāna
[ppr. Pass. of cip, see cipiṭa] crushed flat (Rh. D.; cp. also Kern Toev.) Miln 261. Cimilikā
Cimilikā
(f.) see cilimikā Vin ii.150; iv.40; Cp. Vin. Texts iii.167; J.P.T.S. 1885, 39. Cira
Cira
(adj.) [Vedic. cira, perhaps to *quei̯e to rest, cp. Lat. quiēs, civis; Goth. hveila; Ohg. wīlōn; E. while] long (of time), usually in cpds. & as adv. Either ciraŋ (acc.) for a long time Sn 678, 730, 1029; Dh 248; Kh vii.5; J ii.110; iv.3; Pv ii.333 or cirena (instr.) after a long time Vin iv.86; DhsA 239; or cirāya (dat.) for long Dh 342. cirassa (gen.) see cirassaŋ. -- cirataraŋ (compar.) for a (comparatively) long time, rather long A iii.58; Pv ii.87. cir -- â -- ciraŋ continually Vin iv.261; J v.233. -- acira not long (ago) lately, newly: ˚arahattappatta S i.196; ˚pabbajita S i.185; ˚parinibbute Bhagavati shortly after the death of the Bhagavant D i.204, etc.; Sn p. 59.

-- kālaŋ (adv.) a long time freq. e. g. PvA 19, 45, 60, 109; -- ṭṭhitika perpetual, lasting long A iv.339 (opp. pariyāpajjati); Vv 801; Pug 32, 33; Vism 37, 175; DA i.3. -- dikkhita (not ˚dakkhita) having long since been initiated S i.226 = J v.138 (=cirapabbajita); -- nivāsin dwelling (there) for a long time S ii.227; -- paṭika [cp. Sk. ciraŋ prati] long since, adj. constr. in conformity w. the subject Vin i.33; D ii.270= S iii.120; -- pabbajita having long since become a wanderer A iii.114; Sn p. 92; DA i.143; -- ppavāsin (adj.) long absent Dh 219 (=cirappavuttha DhA iii.293). -- rattaŋ (adv.) for a long time Sn 665, 670; J iv.371; and -- rattāya id. J ii.340; Pv i.94. Cirassaŋ
Cirassaŋ
(adv.) [origin. gen. of cira = cirasya] at last Vin ii.195; D i.179; S i.142; J ii.439; iii.315; iv.446 (read cirassa passāmi); v.328; Th 1, 868; ThA 217; PvA 60. -- na cirass' eva shortly after D iii.11; J iv.2; DhA iii.176; PvA 32. -- sucirass' eva after a very long while S i.193. Cirāyati
Cirāyati
[Sk. cirayati, v. denom. fr. cira] to be long, to tarry, to delay, DhA i.16; VvA 64, 208; cp. ciraŋ karoti id. J ii.443. Cirīṭa
Cirīṭa
[Sk. ciri, cp. kīra] a parrot J v.202 (in compn cirīti˚). Cilimikā
Cilimikā
(f.) [Der. fr. cīra] as cimilikā at Vin ii.150; iv.40 a kind of cloth or carpeting, made from palmleaves, bark, etc. Also at PvA 144 (doubtful reading). Cillaka
Cillaka
[kilaka or khīlaka, q. v.] a peg, post, pillar, in dāruka˚ Th 2, 390 (cp. ThA 257). Not with Kern (Toev.) "a wooden puppet," as der. fr. citta.1 Cīnaka
Cīnaka
(m. nt.) a kind of bean Sn 239 ( = aṭavi -- pabbata- padesu āropita -- jāta -- cīna -- mugga SnA 283); J v.405. Cīnapiṭṭha
Cīnapiṭṭha
(nt.) red lead DA i.40; DhsA 14. Cīyati
Cīyati
[Pass. of cināti] to be gathered, to be heaped up Sn 428 (cīyate pahūtaŋ puññaŋ). See also ā˚. Cīra
Cīra
(nt.) [Sk. cīra, cp. cīvara] 1. bark, fibre D i.167 (kusa˚, vāka˚, phalaka˚); Vin iii.34; A i.295; Pug 55. -- a bark dress Vin i.305; J vi.500 (cp. cīraka). -- 2. a strip (orig. of bark), in suvaṇṇa˚ -- khacita gold -- brocaded VvA 280 (see also next). Cp. ocīraka (under odīraka). Cīraka
Cīraka
[cp. cīra] 1. bark (see cpds.) -- 2. a strip, in suvaṇṇa˚ gold brocade (dress) J v.197.

-- vāsika (nt.) bark -- dress (a punishment) M i.87 = A i.48=Miln 197. Cīriya
Cīriya
(adj.) [fr. cīra] like or of bark, in cpd. dāru˚ (as Np.) "wood -- barker" DhA ii.35. Cīriḷikā
Cīriḷikā
(f.) [cp. Sk. cīrī & jhillikā a cricket, cīrilli a sort of large fish] a cricket A iii.397 (v. l. cīrikā). Cp. on word -- formation pipiḷikā & Mod. Gr. tsi/tsikos cricket. Cīvara
Cīvara
(nt.) [*Sk. cīvara, prob. = cīra, appld orig. to a dress of bark] the (upper) robe of a Buddhist mendicant. C. is the first one of the set of 4 standard requisites of a wandering bhikkhu, vir. c˚, piṇḍapāta alms-bowl, senāsana lodging, a place to sleep at, gilānapaccaya -- bhesajja -- parikkhāra medicinal appliances for use in sickness. Thus mentioned passim e. g. Vin iii.89, 99, 211; iv.154 sq.; D i.61; M ii.102; A i.49; Nd2 s. v.; It 111. In abbreviated form Sn 339; PvA 7; Sdhp 393. In starting on his begging round the bhikkhu goes patta -- cīvaraŋ ādāya, The 3 robes are sanghāṭi, uttarāsaṅga, antaravāsaka, given thus, e.g. at Vin i.289. that is literally ʻ taking his bowl & robe. ʼ But this is an elliptical idiom meaning ʻ putting on his outer robe and taking his bowl. ʼ A bhikkhu never goes into a village without wearing all his robes, he never takes them, or any one of the three, with him. Each of the three is simply an oblong piece of cloth (usually cotton cloth). On the mode of wearing these three robes see the note at Dialogues ii.145. -- Vin iii.11; D ii.85; Sn p. 21; PvA 10, 13 & passim. The sewing of the robe was a festival for the laity (see under kaṭhina). There are 6 kinds of cloth mentioned for its manufacture, viz. khoma, kappāsika, koseyya, kambala, sāṇa, bhanga Vin. i.58=96=281 (cp. ˚dussa). Two kinds of robes are distinguished: one of the gahapatika (layman) a white one, and the other that of the bhikkhu, the c. proper, called paŋsukūlaŋ c. "the dust -- heap robe" Vin v.117 (cp. gahapati). -- On cīvara in general & also on special ordinances concerning its making, wearing & handling see Vin i.46, 49 sq., 196, 198, 253 sq., 285, 287 sq., 306=ii.267 (of var. colours); ii.115 sq. (sibbati to sew the c.); iii.45, 58 (theft of a c.), 195 -- 223, 254 -- 266; iv.59 -- 62, 120 -- 123, 173, 279 sq., 283 (six kinds). -- A iii.108 (cīvare kalyāṇakāma); v.100, 206; Vism 62; It 103; PvA 185. -- Sīse cīvaraŋ karoti to drape the outer robe over the head Vin ii.207, 217; ˚ŋ khandhe karoti to drape it over the back Vin ii.208, 217; ˚ŋ nikkhipati to lay it down or put it away Vin i.47 sq.; ii.152, 224; iii.198, 203, 263; ˚ŋ saŋharati to fold it up Vin i.46. -- Var. expressions referring to the use of the robe: atireka˚ an extra robe Vin iii.195; acceka˚ id. Vin iii.260 sq.; kāla˚ (& akāla˚) a robe given at (and outside) the specified time Vin iii.202 sq.; iv.284, 287; gahapati˚ a layman's r. Vin iii.169, 171; ti˚ the three robes, viz. sanghāṭī, uttarāsanga, antaravāsaka Vin i.288, 289; iii.11, 195, 198 sq.; v.142; adj. tecīvarika wearing 3 rs. Vin v.193; dubbala˚ (as adj.) with a worn -- out c. Vin iii.254; iv.59, 154, 286; paŋsukūla˚ the dust -- heap robe PvA 141; sa˚ -- bhatta food given with a robe Vin iv.77; lūkha˚ (adj.) having a coarse robe Vin i.109 (+duccola); iii.263 (id.); A i.25; vihāra˚ a robe to be used in the monastery Vin iii.212.

-- kaṇṇa the lappet of a monk's robe DhA iii.420; VvA 76 = DhA iii.106, cp. cīvarakarṇaka Av.Ś ii.184, & ˚ika Divy 239, 341, 350. -- kamma (nt.) robe -- making Vin ii.218; iii.60, 240; iv.118, 151; A v.328 sq.; DhA iii.342; PvA 73, 145. -- kāra ( -- samaya) (the time of) sewing the robes Vin iii.256 sq. -- kāla ( -- samaya) the right time for accepting robes Vin iii.261; iv.286, 287; -- dāna ( -- samaya) (the ime for) giving robes Vin iv.77, 99; -- dussa clothing -- material Vin iv.279, 280; -- nidāhaka putting on the c. Vin i.284; -- paṭiggāhaka the receiver of a robe Vin i.283; ii.176; v.205; A iii.274 sq.; -- paṭivisa a portion of the c. Vin i.263, 285, 301; -- palibodha an obstacle to the valid performance of the kathina ceremony arising from a set of robes being due to a particular person [a technical term of the canon law. See Vinaya Texts ii.149, 157, 169]. It is one of the two kaṭhinassa palibodhā (c. & āvāsa˚) Vin i.265; v.117, cp. 178; -- paviveka (nt.) the seclusion of the robe, i. e. of a non -- Buddhist with two other pavivekāni (piṇḍapāta˚ & senāsana˚) at A i.240; -- bhanga the distribution of robes Vin iv.284; -- bhatta robes & a meal (given to the bh.) Vin iii.265; -- bhājaka one who deals out the robes Vin i.285; ii.176; v.205; A iii.274 sq. (cp. ˚paṭiggāhaka); -- bhisī a robe rolled up like a pillow Vin i.287 sq.; -- rajju (f.) a rope for (hanging up) the robes; in the Vinaya always combd with ˚vaŋsa (see below); -- lūkha (adj.) one who is poorly dressed Pug 53; -- vaŋsa a bamboo peg for hanging up a robe (cp. ˚rajju) Vin i.47, 286; ii.117, 121, 152, 153, 209, 222; iii.59; J i.9; DhA iii.342; -- sankamanīya (nt.) a robe that ought to be handed over (to its legal owner) Vin iv.282; 283. -- 270 -- Cuṇṇa
Cuṇṇa
[Sk. cūrṇa, pp. of carvati, to chew, to *sqer to cut, break up, as in Lat. caro, Sk. kṛṇāti (cp. kaṭu); cp Lit. kirwis axe, Lat. scrūpus sharp stone, scrupulus, scortum. See also calaka2 & cp. Sk. kṣunna of kṣud to grind, to which prob. P. kuḍḍa] 1. pp. broken up, powdered; only in cpd. ˚vicuṇṇa crushed to bits, smashed up, piecemeal J i.73; ii.120, 159, 216; iii.74. -- 2. (nt.) (a) any hard substance ground into a powder; dust, sand J i.216; VvA 65 (paŋsu˚); Pv iii.33 (suvaṇṇa˚ gold -- dust; PvA 189 = vālikā); DA i.245 (id.); DhsA 12. -- (b) esp. "chunam" (Anglo -- Ind.) i. e. a plaster, of which quicklime & sand are the chief ingredients & which is largely used in building, but also applied to the skin as a sort of soap -- powder in bathing. Often combd with mattikā clay, in distinction of which c. is for delicate use (tender skin), whereas m. for rougher purposes (see Vin i.202); cuṇṇāni bhesajjāni an application of c. Vin i.202. -- Vin i.47=52; ii.220, 224 sq.; A i.208; iii.25; J v.89. cuṇṇa -- tela -- vālaṇḍupaka Vism 142 (where Asl 115 reads cuṇṇaŋ vā telaŋ vā leḍḍūpaka). -- nahāniya˚ D i.74=M iii.92; PvA 46; na -- hāna˚ J ii.403, 404. -- gandha -- cuṇṇa aromatic (bath) powder J i.87, 290; iii.276; candana˚ id. Miln 13, 18. -- iṭṭhaka˚ plaster (which is rubbed on the head of one to be executed) PvA 4, cp. Mṛcchakaṭika X, beginning (stanza 5) "piṣṭa -- cūrṇâvakīrṇaśca puruṣo 'haŋ paśūkṛtaḥ."

-- cālanī a mortar for the preparation of chunam Vin i.202; -- piṇḍa a lump of ch. Vin iii.260; iv.154 sq. Cuṇṇaka
Cuṇṇaka
(adj.) [fr. cuṇṇa] (a) a preparation of chunam, paint (for the face, mukha˚) D i.7; M ii.64 = Th 1, 771; J v.302. -- (b) powder; cuṇṇakajātāni reduced to powder M iii.92 (aṭṭhikāni). -- f. ˚ikā in cuṇṇikamaŋsa mince meat J i.243. Cuṇṇeti
Cuṇṇeti
[Denom. of cuṇṇa] to grind to powder, to crush; to powder or paint w. chunam Vin ii.107 (mukhaŋ); J iv.457. -- ppr. pass cuṇṇiyamāna being ground J vi.185. Cuta
Cuta
[pp. of cavati; Sk. cyuta] 1. (adj.) shifted, disappeared, deceased, passed from one existence to another Vin iv.216; Sn 774, 899; It 19, 99; J i.139, 205; Pug 17. -- -- accuta permanent. not under the sway of Death, Ep. of Nibbāna Dh 225. -- 2. (n.) in cpd. cutûpapāta disappearance & reappearance, transmigration, Saŋsāra (see cuti) S ii.67 (āgatigatiyā sati c˚ hoti); A iii.420; iv.178; DhA i.259; usually in phrase sattānaŋ cutûpapāta -- ñāṇa the discerning of the saŋsāra of beings D i.82 = M i.248; D iii.111. As cutuppāta at A ii.183. Cp. jātisaŋsāra -- ñāṇa. Cuti
Cuti
(f.) [cp. Sk. cyuti, to cavati] vanishing, passing away, decease, shifting out of existence (opp. upapatti, cp. also gati & āgati) D i.162; S ii.3 = 42; iii.53; M i.49; Sn 643; Dh 419; J i.19, 434; Vism 292, 460, 554; DhA iv.228. Cudita
Cudita
(adj.) [pp. of codati] being urged, receiving blame, being reproved Vin i.173; ii.250; ii.250, 251; M i.95 sq.; A iii.196 sq. -- ˚ka id. Vin v.115, 158, 161, 164. Cuddasa
Cuddasa
[contracted fr. catuddasa, Sk. caturdaśa, cp. catur] fourteen J i.71; vi.8; Miln 12; DhA iii.120, 186. Cunda
Cunda
an artist who works in ivory J vi.261 (Com: dantakāra); Miln 331. Cundakāra
Cundakāra
a turner J vi.339. Cumbaṭa
Cumbaṭa
(nt.) [cp. Prk. cumbhala] (a) a coil; a pad of cloth, a pillow J i.53 (dukūla˚); ii.21 (id.); VvA 73. -- (b) a wreath J iii.87. Cp. next. Cumbaṭaka
Cumbaṭaka
(nt.) cumbaṭa, viz. (a) a pillow DhA i.139; VvA 33, 165. -- (b) a wreath J iv.231 (puppha˚); SnA 137; DhA i.72 (mālā˚). Cumbati
Cumbati
[Sk. cumbati. Dhtp 197 defines as "vadana- saŋyoge"] to kiss J ii.193; v.328; vi.291, 344; VvA 260. Cp. pari˚. Culla & cūḷa
Culla
& cūḷa (adj.) [Sk. kṣulla = kṣudra (P. khudda, see khuddaka), with c: k= cuṇṇa: kṣud] small, minor (opp. mahā great, major), often in conn. with names & titles of books, e. g. c˚ Anāthapiṇḍika=A jr. J ii.287, cp. Anglo -- Indian chota sahīb the younger gentleman (Hind. chhota=culla); or Culla -- vagga, the minor section (Vin ii.) as subordinate to Mahā -- vagga (Vin i.), Culla -- niddesa the minor exposition (following upon Mahā -- niddesa); culla -- sīla the siṃple precepts of ethics (opp. mahā˚ the detailed sīla) D i.5, etc. Otherwise only in cpds.:

-- angulī little finger DhA ii.86. -- ûpaṭṭhāka a "lesser" follower, i. e. a personal attendant (of a thera) J i.108 (cūl˚); ii.325 (cull˚; DhA i.135; ii.260; cūḷ); -- pitā an uncle ("lesser" father = sort of father, cp. Lat. matertera, patruus, Ger. Vetter=father jun.) J ii.5; iii.456 (v. l. petteyya); PvA 107; DhA i.221 (cūḷa˚). -- 271 -- Cullāsīti
Cullāsīti
[ = caturāsīti] eighty -- four J vi.226 (mahākappe as duration of Saŋsāra); PvA 254 (id.). Also as cūḷāsīti q. v. Cūlikā
Cūlikā
(f.) [Sk. cūlikā, cp. cūḍā] = cūḷa; kaṇṇa˚ the root of the ear J ii.276; Vism 249, 255; DhA iv.13 (of an elephant). ˚baddha S ii.182; KS ii.122. See also cūḷā. Cūḷa
Cūḷa
[Sk. cūḍa & cūlikā] 1. swelling, protuberance; root, knot, crest. As kaṇṇa -- cūḷa the root of an elephant's ear J vi.488. aḍḍha -- cūḷa a measure (see aḍḍha). See also cūlikā. -- 2. (adj.) see culla. Cūḷaka
Cūḷaka
(adj.) [fr. cūḷā] having a cūḷa or top -- knot; pañca˚ with five top -- knots J v.250 (of a boy). Cūḷanikā
Cūḷanikā
(f.) [Der. fr. culla, q. v.] only in phrase sahassi cūḷanikā lokadhātu "the system of the 1,000 lesser worlds" (distinguished from the dvi -- sahassī majjhimakā & the ti -- sahassī mahāsahassi lokadhātu) A i.227; Nd2 235, 2b. Cūḷā
Cūḷā
(f.) [Vedic cūḍā. to cūḍa] = cūḷa, usually in sense of crest only, esp. denoting the lock of hair left on the crown of the head when the rest of the head is shaved (cp. Anglo -- Indian chuḍā & Gujarāti choṭali) J i.64, 462; v.153, 249 (pañcacūḷā kumārā); DhA i.294; as mark of distinction of a king J iii.211; v.187; of a servant J vi.135. -- a cock's comb J ii.410; iii.265.

-- maṇi (m.) a jewel worn in a crest or diadem, a jewelled crest J i.65; ii.122; v.441. Cūḷāsīti
Cūḷāsīti
for cullāsīti at Th 2, 51. Ce
Ce
[Vedic ced; ce = Lat. que in absque, ne -- c, etc., Goth. h in ni -- h. see also ca 3] conditional particle "if," constructed either with Indicative (ito ce pi yojanasate, viharati even if he lived 100 y. from here D i.117) or Conditional (tatra ce tumhe assatha kupitā D i.3), or Potential (passe ce vipulaŋ sukhaŋ Dh 290). -- Always enclitic (like Lat. que) & as a rule placed after the emphasized word at the beginning of the sentence: puññañ ce puriso kayirā Dh 118; brāhmaṇo ce tvaŋ brūsi Sn 457. Usually added to pronouns or pron. adverbs: ahañ ce va kho pana ceteyyaŋ D i.185; ettha ce te mano atthi S i.116, or combd with other particles, as noce, yañce, sace (q. v.). Freq. also in combn with other indef. interrog. or emphatic particles, as ce va kho pana if then, if now: ahañ ce va kho pana pañhaŋ puccheyyaŋ D i.117; ahañ ce va kho pana abhivādeyyaŋ D i.125; api (pi) ce even if: api ce vassasataŋ jīve mānavo Sn 589. Cecca
Cecca
= cicca (equal to sañcicca), ger. of cinteti, corresp. to either *cetya [ cet] or *cintya [cint]; only in ster. def. jānanto sañjānanto cecca abhivitaritvā Vin ii.91; iii.73, 112; iv.290. Ceṭa
Ceṭa
a servant, a boy J iii.478. See next. Ceṭaka
Ceṭaka
a servant, a slave, a (bad) fellow Vin iv.66; ] ii.176 = DhA iv.92 (duṭṭha˚ miserable fellow); iii.281; iv.82 (bhātika -- ceṭakā rascals of brothers); v.385; Miln 222. Cetaka
Cetaka
a decoy -- bird (Com. dīpaka -- tittira, exciting partridge) J iii.357. Cetakedu
Cetakedu
a kind of bird J vi.538. See also cela˚. Cetanaka
Cetanaka
(adj.) [see cetanā] connected with a thought or intention J vi.304; usually in a˚ without a thought, unintentional J ii.375; vi.178; Vbh 419. Cetanā
Cetanā
[f. abstr. fr. cet, see cinteti] state of ceto in action, thinking as active thought, intention, purpose, will. Defined as action (kamma: A iii.415; cp. KV. viii.9, § 38 untraced quotation; cp. A v.292). Often combd w. patthanā & paṇidhi (wish & aspiration), e. g. S ii.99, 154; A i.32, 224; v 212; Nd2 112 (in def. of asucimanussā, people of ignoble action: asuciyā cetanāya, patthanāya, paṇidhinā samannāgatā). Also classed with these in a larger group in KV., e. g. 343, 380. -- Combd w. vedanā saññā c. citta phassa manasikāra in def. of nāmakāya (opp. rūpakāya) S ii.3 (without citta), Ps i.183 (do.); Nett 77, 78. -- Enumd under the four blessings of vatthu, paccaya, c., guṇātireka ( -- sampadā) & def. as "cetanāya somanassa -- sahagatañāṇa -- sampayutta -- bhāvo" at DhA iii.94. -- C. is opposed to cetasika (i. e. ceto) in its determination of the 7 items of good conduct (see sīla) which refers to actions of the body (or are wilful, called cetanākamma Nett 43, 96; otherwise distinguished as kāya -- & vacīkammantā A v.292 sq.), whereas the 3 last items (sīla 8 -- 10) refer to the behaviour of the mind (cetasikakamma Nett., mano -- kammanta A), viz. the shrinking back from covetousness, malice, & wrong views. -> Vin iii.112; S iii.60; A ii.232 (kaṇhassa kammassa pahānāya cetanā: intention to give up wrong -- doing); VvA 72 (vadhaka -- cetanā wilful murder); maraṇacetanā intention of death DhA i.20; āhār' āsā cetanā intention consisting in deśire for food Vism 537. -> PvA 8, 30 (pariccāga˚ intention to give); Pug 12; Miln 94; Sdhp 52, 72. -- In scholastic lgg. often expld as cetanā sañcetanā sañcetayitatta (viz. state or behaviour of volition) Dhs 5; Vbh 285. -- Cp. Dhs 58 (+citta); Vbh 401 (id.); Vbh 40, 403; Vism 463 (cetayatī ti cetanā; abhisandahatī ti attho). Cetayita
Cetayita
[pp. of ceteti, see cinteti] intended A v.187; Miln 62. Cetasa
Cetasa1
N. of a tree, perhaps the yellow Myrobalan J v.420. Cetasa
Cetasa2
(adj.) [orig. the gen. of ceto used as nominative] only in -- ˚: sucetasa of a good mind, good -- hearted S i.4 = 29, 46=52; paraphrased by Buddhaghosa as sundaracetasa; pāpa˚ of a wicked mind, evil -- minded S i.70=98; a˚ without mind S i.198; sabba˚ all-hearted, with all one's mind or heart, in phrase aṭṭhikatvā manasikatvā sabbacetaso samannāharitva ohitasoto (of one paying careful & proper attention) S i.112 sq.=189, 220; A ii.116; iii.163, 402; iv.167. The editors have often misunderstood the phrase & we freq. find vv. ll. with sabbaŋ cetaso & sabbaŋ cetasā, -- appamāṇa˚ S iv.186; avyāpanna˚ S v.74. Cetasika
Cetasika
(adj.) belonging to ceto, mental (opp. kāyika physical). Kāyikaŋ sukhaŋ > cetasikaŋ s. A i.81; S v. 209; kāyikā darathā > c. d. M iii.287, 288; c. duk khaŋ D ii 306; A i.157; c. roga J iii.337. c. kamma is sīla 8 -- 10 (see under cetanā) Nett 43. -- As n. combd with citta it is to be taken as supplementing it, viz. mind & all that belongs to it, mind and mental properties, adjuncts, co -- efficients (cp. vitakka -- vicāra & sach cpds. as phalâphala, bhavâbhava) D i.213; see also citta. Occurring in the Nikāyas in sg. only, it came to be used in pl. and, as an ultimate category, the 52 cetasikas, with citta as bare consciousness, practically superseded in mental analysis, the 5 khandha -- category. See Cpd. p. 1 and pt. II. Mrs. Rh. D., Bud. Psy. 6, 148, 175. -- ˚cetasikā dhammā Ps i.84; Vbh 421; Dhs 3, 18, etc. (cp. Dhs. trsl. pp. 6, 148). Cetaso
Cetaso
gen. sg. of ceto, functioning as gen. to citta (see citta & ceto). Cetāpana
Cetāpana
(nt.) [see cetāpeti; cp. BSk. cetanika] barter Vin iii.216, see also Vin. Texts i.22 & Kacc. 322. Cetāpeti
Cetāpeti
[Caus. of *cetati to ci, collect; see also Kern, Toev. s. v.] to get in exchange, to barter, buy Vin iii.216 (expld by parivatteti), 237; iv.250. -- 272 -- Cetiya
Cetiya
(nt.) [cp. from ci, to heap up, cp. citi, cināti] 1. a tumulus, sepulchral monument, cairn, M i.20; Dh 188; J i.237; vi.173; SnA 194 (dhātu -- gharaŋ katvā cetiyaŋ patiṭṭhāpesuŋ); KhA 221; DhA iii.29 (dhātu˚); iv. 64; VvA 142; Sdhp 428, 430. Pre -- Buddhistic cetiyas mentioned by name are Aggāḷava˚ Vin ii.172; S i.185; Sn p. 59; DhA iii.170; Ānanda˚ D ii.123, 126; Udena˚ D ii.102, 118; iii.9; DhA iii.246; Gotama (ka)˚ ibid.; Cāpāla˚ D ii.102, 118; S v.250; Ma -- kuṭabandhana˚ D ii.160; Bahuputta˚ D ii.102, 118; iii.10; S ii.220; A iv.16; Sattambaka˚ D ii.102, 118; Sārandada D ii.118, 175; A iii.167; Supatiṭṭha˚ Vin i.35.

-- angaṇa the open space round a Cetiya Miln 366; Vism 144, 188, 392; DA i.191, 197; VvA 254. -- vandanā Cetiya worship Vism 299. Ceteti
Ceteti
see cinteti. Ceto
Ceto
(nt.) [Sk. cetas] = citta, q. v. for detail concerning derivation, inflexion & meaning. Cp. also cinteti. -> Only the gen. cetaso & the instr. cetasā are in use; besides these there is an adj. cetaso, der. from nom. base cetas. Another adj. -- form is the inflected nom. ceto, occurring only in viceto S v.447 (+ummatto, out of mind).

I. Ceto in its relation to similar terms: (a) with kāya & vācā: kāyena vācāya cetasā (with hand, speech & heart) Sn 232; Kh IX. kāya (vācā˚, ceto˚) -- muni a saint in action, speech & thought A i.273 = Nd2 514. In this phrase the Nd has mano˚ for ceto˚, which is also a v. l. at A -- passage. -- (b) with paññā (see citta iv. b) in ceto -- vimutti, paññā -- vimutti (see below iv.). -- (c) with samādhi, pīti, sukha, etc.: see ˚pharaṇatā below.

II. Cetaso (gen.) (a) heart. c˚ upakkilesa (stain of h.) D iii.49, 101; S v.93. līnatta (attachment) S v.64. appasāda (unfaith) S i.179; ekodibhāva (singleness) D iii.78; S iv.236 (see 2nd jhāna); āvaraṇāni (hindrances) S 66. -- vimokkha (redemption) S i.159. santi (tranquillity) Sn 584, 593. vūpasama (id.) A i.4; S v.65. vinibandha (freedom) D iii.238 = A iii.249; iv.461 sq. -- (b) mind. c˚ vikkhepa (disturbance) A iii.448; v.149: uttrāsa (fear) Vbh 367. abhiniropanā (application) Dhs 7. -- (c) thought. in c˚ parivitakko udapādi "there arose a reflection in me (gen.)" S i.139; ii.273; iii.96, 103.

III. Cetasā (instr.) -- (a) heart. mettā -- sahagatena c. (with a h. full of love) freq. in phrase ekaŋ disaŋ pharitvā, etc. e. g. D i.186, iii.78, 223; S iv.296; A i.183; ii.129; iv.390; v.299, 344; Vbh 272. ujubhūtena (upright) S ii.279; A i.63; vivaṭena (open) D iii.223 = S v.263; A iv.86. macchera -- maḷa -- pariyuṭṭhitena (in which has arisen the dirt of selfishness) S iv.240; A ii.58. santim pappuyya c. S i.212. taṇhādhipateyyena (standing under the sway of thirst) S iii.103. -- vippasannena (devout) S i.32=57, 100; Dh 79; Pv i.1010. muttena A iv.244. vimariyādi -- katena S iii.31. vigatâbhijjhena D iii.49. pathavī -- āpo etc. -- samena A iv.375 sq. ākāsasamena A iii.315 sq. sabba˚ S ii.220. abhijjhā -- sahagatena A i.206. satārakkhena D iii.269; A v.30. -- migabhūtena cetasā, with the heart of a wild creature M i.450. -- acetasā without feeling, heartlessly J iv.52, 57. -- (b) mind: in two phrases, viz. (a) c. anuvitakketi anuvicāreti "to ponder & think over in one's mind" D iii.242; A i.264; iii.178; -> (b) c. pajānāti (or manasikaroti) "to know in one's mind," in the foll. expressions: para -- sattānaŋ para -- puggalānaŋ cetasā ceto -- paricca pajānāti "he knows in his mind the ways of thought (the state of heart) of other beings" (see ceto -- paricca & ˚pariyāya) M ii.19; S ii.121, 213; v.265; A i.255=iii.17=280. puggalaŋ paduṭṭha -- cittaŋ evaŋ c˚ ceto -- paricca p. It 12, cp. 13. Arahanto . . . Bhagavanto c˚ cetoparicca viditā D iii.100. para -- cittapariyāya kusalo evaŋ c˚ ceto-> paricca manasikaroti A v.160. Bhagavā [brāhmaṇassa] c˚ ceto -- parivitakkaŋ aññāya "perceiving in his mind the thought of [the b.]" S i.178; D iii.6; A iii.374; Miln 10.

IV. Cpds. -- khila fallowness, waste of heart or mind, usually as pañca c -- khilā, viz. arising from doubt in the Master, the Norm, the Community, or the Teaching, or from anger against one's fellow -- disciples, D iii.237, 278; M i.101; A iii.248 = iv.460=v.17; J iii.291; Vbh 377; Vism 211. -- paṇidhi resolution, intention, aspiration Vv 4712 (=cittassa samma -- d -- eva ṭhapanaŋ VvA 203); Miln 129; -- padosa corruption of the h., wickedness, A i.8; It 12, 13 (opp. pasāda): -- paricca "as regards the heart," i. e. state of heart, ways of thought, character, mind (=pariyāya) in ˚ñāṇa Th 2, 71=227 (expld at ThA 76, 197 by cetopariyañāṇa) see phrase cetasā c -- p. above (iii. b.); -- pariyāya the ways of the heart (=paricca), in para -- ceto -- pariyāya -- kusalo "an expert in the ways of others' hearts" A v.160; c. -- p -- kovido encompassing the heart of others S i.146, 194=Th 1, 1248; i.196=Th 1, 1262. Also with syncope: ˚pariyañāṇa D i.79; iii.100; Vism 431; DA i.223. -- parivitakka reflecting, reasoning S i.103, 178; -- pharaṇatā the breaking forth or the effulgence of heart, as one of five ideals to be pursued, viz. samādhi, pīti -- pharaṇatā, sukha˚, ceto˚, āloka˚ D iii.278; -- vasippatta mastery over one's h. A ii.6, 36, 185; iv.312; M i.377; Vism 382; Miln 82, 85; -- vimutti emancipation of h. (always w. paññā -- vimutti), which follows out of the destruction of the intoxications of the heart (āsavānaŋ khayā anāsavā c. -- v.) Vin i.11 (akuppā); D i.156, 167, 251; iii.78, 108, 248 (muditā); S ii.265 (mettā); M i.197 (akuppā), 205, 296; iii.145 (appamāṇā, mahaggatā); A i.124; ii.6, 36; iii.84; Sn 725, 727=It 106; It 20 (mettā), 75, 97; Pug 27, 62; Vbh 86 (mettā) Nett 81 (virāgā); DA i.313 (=cittavimutti); -- vivaraṇa setting the h. free A iv.352; v.67. See also arahant II D. -- samatha calm of h. Th 2, 118; -- samādhi concentration of mind (=cittasamādhi DA i.104) D i.15; iii. 30; S iv.297; A ii.54; iii.51; -- samphassa contact with thought Dhs 3. Cela
Cela
(nt.) [Derivation unknown. Cp. Sk. cela] cloth, esp. clothes worn, garment, dress A i.206; Pv ii.127 (kañcanā˚ for kañcana˚); iii.93 (for veḷa); dhāti˚ baby's napkin J iii.539. In simile of one whose clothes are on fire (āditta˚+ādittasīsa) S v.440; A ii.93; iii.307; iv.320. -- acela a naked ascetic D i.161, 165≈; J v.75; vi.222.

-- aṇḍaka (v. l. aṇḍuka) a loincloth M i.150; -- ukkhepa waving of garments (as sign of applause), usually with sādhukāra J i.54; ii.253; iii.285; v.67; DhA ii.43; SnA ii.225; VvA 132, 140; -- paṭṭikā (not ˚pattika) a bandage of cloth, a turban Vin ii.128 (Bdhgh. celasandhara); M ii.93; DhA iii.136; -- vitāna an awning J i.178; ii.289; iv.378; Mhbv 122; Vism 108. Celaka
Celaka
1. one who is clothed; acelaka without clothes D i.166; M i.77. -- 2. a standard -- bearer [cp. Sk. ceḍaka P. ceṭa & in meaning E. knight > Ger. knecht; knave > knabe, knappe] D i.51; DA i.156; A iv. 107, 110; Miln 331. Celakedu
Celakedu
= cetakedu J vi.538. Celāpaka
Celāpaka
= celāvaka J v.418. Celāvaka
Celāvaka
[cp. Sk. chilla?] a kind of bird J vi.538 (Com. celabaka; is it celā bakā?); J v.416. See also celāpaka. Cokkha
Cokkha
(adj.) [Cp. Sk. cokṣa] clean J iii.21; ˚bhāva cleanliness M i.39 ( = visuddhibhāva; to be read for T mokkha˚? See Trenckner's note on p. 530). Coca
Coca
(nt.) [Both derivation & meaning uncertain. The word is certainly not Aryan. See the note at Vinaya Texts ii.132] the cocoa -- nut or banana, or cinnamon J v.420 (˚vana); -- ˚pāna a sweet drink of banana or cocoa -- nut milk Vin i.246. Codaka
Codaka
(adj.) [to codeti] one who rebukes; exhorting, reproving Vin i.173; ii 248 sq.; v.158, 159 etc.; S i.63; M i.95 sq.; D iii.236; A i.53; iii.196; iv.193 sq.; DA i.40. -- 273 -- Codanā
Codanā
(f.) [see codeti] reproof, exhortation D i.230; iii.218; A iii.352; Vin V.158, 159; Vism 276. -- As ttg. in codan' atthe nipāto an exhortative particle J vi.211 (for ingha); VvA 237 (id.); PvA 88 v. l. (for handa). Codita
Codita
[pp. of codeti, q. v.] urged, exhorted, incited; questioned Sn 819; J vi.256; Pv ii.966; Vv 161; PvA 152; Sdhp 309. Codetar
Codetar
[n. ag. to codeti] one who reproves, one who exacts blame, etc. Vin v.184. Codeti
Codeti
[Vedic codati & codayati, from cud] aor. acodayi (J v.112), inf. codetuŋ, grd. codetabba; Pass. cujjati & codiyati; pp. cudita & codita (q. v.): Caus. codāpeti (Vin. iii.165) to urge, incite, exhort; to reprove, reprimand, to call forth, to question; in spec. sense to demand payment of a debt (J vi.69 iṇaŋ codetvā; 245; Sn 120 iṇaŋ cujjamāna being pressed to pay up; PvA 3 iṇayikehi codiyamāna) D i.230; Vin i.43 (āpattiyā c. to reprove for an offence), 114, 170 sq., 322 sq.; ii.2 sq., 80 sq.; iii.164, etc.; J v.112; Dh 379; PvA 39, 74. Copana
Copana
(nt.) [cup, copati to stir, rel. to kup, see kuppati] moving, stirring DhA iv.85; DhsA 92, 240, 323. Cora
Cora
[cur, corayati to steal; Dhtp 530 = theyye] a thief, a robber Vin i.74, 75, 88, 149; S ii.100, 128=A ii.240; S ii.188 (gāmaghāta, etc.); iv.173; M ii.74=Th 1, 786; A i.48; ii.121 sq.; iv.92, 278; Sn 135, 616, 652; J i.264 (˚rājā, the robber king); ii.104; iii.84; Miln 20; Vism 180 (sah' oḍḍha c.), 314 (in simile), 489 (rāja -- puris' ânubandha˚, in comparison), 569 (andhakāre corassa hattha -- pasāraṇaŋ viya); DhA ii.30; PvA 3, 54, 274. -- mahā˚ a great robber Vin iii.89; D iii.203; A i.153; iii.128; iv.339; Miln 185. -- Often used in similes: see J.P.T.S. 1907, 87.

-- âṭavi wood of robbers Vism 190; -- upaddava an attack from robbers J i.267; -- kathā talk about thieves (one of the forbidden pastimes, see kathā) D i.7 = Vin i.188≈; -- ghātaka an executioner A ii.207; J iii.178; iv.447; v.303; PvA 5. Coraka
Coraka
[cp. Sk. coraka] a plant used for the preparation of perfume J vi.537. Corikā
Corikā
f. thieving, theft Vin i.208; J iii.508; Miln 158; PvA 4, 86, 192; VvA 72 ( = theyyā). Corī
Corī
(f.) a female thief Vin iv.276; J ii.363; (adj.) thievish, deceitful J i.295. -- dāraka˚ a female kidnapper J vi.337. Corovassikaŋ
Corovassikaŋ
at Nd2 40 (p. 85) read terovassikaŋ (as S iv.185). Cola
Cola
(& coḷa) [Cp. Sk. coḍa] a piece of cloth, a rag S i.34; J iv.380; Miln 169; PvA 73; Sdhp 396. -- bhisi a mat spread with a piece of cloth (as a seat) Vin iv.40. -> duccola clad in rags, badly dressed Vin i.109; iii.263. Colaka
Colaka
(& coḷaka) = cola Vin i.48, 296; ii.113, 151, 174, 208, 225; Pv ii.17; Miln 53 (bark for tinder?); DhA ii.173. -- Ch. Cha & Chaḷ
Cha
& Chaḷ (cha in composition effects gemination of consonant, e. g. chabbīsati = cha+vīsati, chabbaṇṇa= cha+vaṇṇa, chaḷ only before vowels in compn: chaḷanga, chaḷ -- abhiññā) [Vedic ṣaṣ & ṣaṭ (ṣaḍ=chaḷ), Gr. e(/c, Lat. sex, Goth, saihs] the number six.

Cases: nom. cha, gen. channaŋ, instr. chahi (& chambhī (?) J iv.310, which should be chambhi & prob. chabbhi = ṣaḍbhiḥ; see also chambhī), loc. chasu (& chassu), num. ord. chaṭṭha the sixth. Cp. also saṭṭhi (60) soḷasa (16). Six is applied whenever a "major set" is concerned (see 2), as in the foll.: 6 munis are distinguished at Nd2 514 (in pairs of 3: see muni); 6 bhikkhus as a "clique" (see chabaggiya, cp. the Vestal virgins in Rome, 6 in number); 6 are the sciences of the Veda (see chaḷanga); there are 6 buddha -- dhammā (Nd2 466); 6 viññāṇakāyā (see upadhi); 6 senses & sense -- organs (see āyatana) -- cha dānasālā J i.282; oraŋ chahi māsehi kālakiriyā bhavissati (l shall die in 6 months, i. e. not just yet, but very soon, after the "next" moon) Pv iv.335. Six bodily faults J i.394 (viz. too long, too short, too thin, too fat, too black, too white). Six thousand Gandhabbas J ii.334.

-- aŋsa six -- cornered Dhs 617. -- anga the set of six Vedāngas, disciplines of Vedic science, viz. 1. kappa, 2. vyākaraṇā, 3. nirutti, 4. sikkhā, 5. chando (viciti), 6. jotisattha (thus enumd at VvA 265; at PvA 97 in sequence 4, 1, 3, 2, 6, 5): D iii.269; Vv 6316; Pv ii.613; Miln 178, 236. With ref. to the upekkhās, one is called the "one of six parts" (chaḷ -- ang' upekkhā) Vism 160. -- abhiññā the 6 branches of higher knowledge Vin ii.161; Pug 14. See abhiññā. -- âsīti eighty -- six [i. e. twice that many in all directions: psychologically 6 X 80 = 6 X (4 X 2)10], of people: an immense number, millions Pv ii.137: of Petas PvA 212; of sufferings in Niraya Pv iii.106. -- âhaŋ for six days J iii.471. -- kaṇṇa heard by six ears, i. e. public (opp. catukaṇṇa) J vi.392. -- tiŋsa(ti) thirty -- six A ii.3; It 15; Dh 339; DhA iii.211, 224 (˚yojana -- parimaṇḍala); iv.48. -- danta having six tusks, in ˚daha N. of one of the Great Lakes of the Himavant (satta -- mahā -- sarā), lit. lake of the elephant with 6 tusks. cp. cha -- visāṇa Vism 416. -- dvārika entering through six doors (i. e. the senses) DhA iv.221 (taṇhā). -- dhātura (=dhātuya) consisting of six elements M iii.239. -- pañca (chappañca) six or five Miln 292. -- phass' āyatana having six seats of contact (i. e. the outer senses) M iii.239; Th 1, 755; PvA 52; cp. Sn 169. -- baṇṇa (=vaṇṇa) consisting of six colours (of raŋsi, rays) J v.40; DhA i.249; ii.41; iv.99. -- baggiya (=vaggiya) forming a group of six, a set of (sinful) Bhikkhus taken as exemplification of trespassing the rules of the Vinaya (cp. Oldenberg, Buddha 7384). Their names are Assaji, Punabhasu, Paṇḍuka, Lohitaka, Mettiya, Bhummajaka Vin ii.1, 77, and passim; J ii.387; DhA iii.330. -- bassāni (= vassāni) six years J i.85; DhA iii.195. -- bidha (=vidha) sixfold Vism 184. -- bisāṇa (=visāṇa) having six (i. e. a "major set") of tusks (of pre -- eminent elephants) J v.42 (Nāgarājā), 48 (kuñjara), cp. chaddanta. -- bīsati (=vīsati) twenty-six DhA iv.233 (devalokā). Chakana & Chakaṇa
Chakana
& Chakaṇa (nt.) [Vedic śakṛt & śakan; Gr. ko/pros; Sk. chagana is later, see Trenckner, Notes 62 n. 16] the dung of animals Vin i.202; J iii.386 (ṇ); v.286; vi.392 (ṇ). Chakaṇatī
Chakaṇatī
(f.) = chakana Nd2 199. Chakala
Chakala
[cp. Sk. chagala, from chāga heifer] a he -- goat J vi.237; ˚ka ibid. & Vin iii 166. -- f. chakalī J vi.559. Chakka
Chakka
(nt.) [fr. cha) set of six Vism 242 (meda˚ & mutta˚). Chakkhattuŋ
Chakkhattuŋ
(adv.) [Sk. ṣaṭkṛtvas] six times D ii.198; DhA iii.196. Chaṭṭha
Chaṭṭha
the sixth Sn 171, 437; DhA iii.200: SnA 364. Also as chaṭṭhama Sn 101, 103; J iii.280. -- 274 -- Chaḍḍaka
Chaḍḍaka
(adj.) throwing away, removing, in puppha˚ a flower -- rubbish remover (see pukkusa) Th 1, 620; Vism 194; -- f. chaḍḍikā see kacavara˚. Chaḍḍana
Chaḍḍana
(nt.) throwing away, rejecting J i.290; Dhtp 571. -- ī (f.) a shovel, dust -- pan DhA iii.7. See kacavara˚. Chaḍḍita
Chaḍḍita
[pp. of chaddeti] thrown out. vomited; cast away, rejected, left behind S iii.143; J i.91, 478; Pv ii.23 ( = ucchiṭṭhaŋ vantan ti attho PvA 80); VvA 100; PvA 78, 185. Chaḍḍeti
Chaḍḍeti
[Vedic chardayati & chṛṇatti to vomit; cp. also avaskara excrements & karīsa dung. From *sqer to eliminate, separate, throw out (Gr. kri/nw, Lat. ex -> (s)cerno), cp. Gr. skw_s, Lat. mus(s)cerda, Ags. scearn] to spit out, to vomit, throw away; abandon, leave, reject Vin 214 sq.; iv.265; M i.207; S i.169 (chaṭṭehi wrongly for chaḍḍehi) = Sn p. 15; J i.61, 254, 265, 292; v.427; Pug 33; DhA i.95 (uṇhaŋ lohitaŋ ch. to kill oneself); ii.101; iii.171; VvA 126; PvA 43, 63, 174, 211; 255; Miln 15. -- ger. chaḍḍūna Th 2, 469 (=chaḍḍetvā ThA 284); grd. chaḍḍetabba Vin i.48; J ii.2; chaḍḍanīya Miln 252; chaḍḍiya (to be set aside) M i.12 sq. -- Pass. chaḍḍīyati PvA 174. -- Caus. chaḍḍāpeti to cause to be vomited, to cast off, to evacuate, to cause to be deserted Vin iv.265; J i.137; iv.139; vi.185, 534; Vism 182. -- pp. chaḍḍita (q. v.). -- See also kacavara˚ Chaṇa
Chaṇa
a festival J i.423, 489 (surā˚), 499; ii.48 (mangala˚), 143, iii.287, 446, 538; iv.115 (surā˚); v.212; vi.221; 399 (˚bheri); DhA iii. 100 (surā˚), 443 (˚vesa); iv.195; VvA 173. Chaṇaka
Chaṇaka
[ = akkhaṇa? Kern; cp. Sk. *ākhaṇa] the Chaṇaka plant Miln 352; cp. akkhaṇa. Chatta
Chatta1
(nt.) [late Vedic chattra = *chad -- tra, covering to chad, see chādati] a sunshade ("parasol" would be misleading. The handle of a chatta is affixed at the circumference, not at the centre as it is in a parasol), a canopy Vin i.152; ii.114; D i.7≈; ii.15 (seta˚, under which Gotama is seated); J i.267 (seta˚); iv.16; v.383; vi.370; Sn 688, 689; Miln 355; DhA i.380 sq.; DA i.89; PvA 47. -- Esp. as seta˚ the royal canopy, one of the 5 insignia regis (setachatta -- pamukhaŋ pañcavidhaŋ rāja -- kakudhabhaṇḍaŋ PvA 74), see kakudhabhaṇḍa. J vi.4, 223, 389; ˚ŋ ussāpeti to unfold the r. canopy PvA 75; DhA i.161, 167. See also paṇṇa˚.

-- daṇḍa the handle of a sunshade DhA iii.212; -- nāḷi the tube or shaft (of reeds or bamboo) used for the making of sunshades M ii.116; -- mangala the coronation festival J iii.407; DhA iii.307; VvA 66. Chatta
Chatta2
[cp. Sk. chātra, one who carries his master's sun- shade] a pupil, a student J ii.428. Chattaka
Chattaka
(m. nt.) 1. a sun -- shade J vi.252; Th 2, 23 ( = ThA 29 as nickname of sun -- shade makers). See also paṇṇa˚. -- 2. ahi˚ "snake's sun -- shade," N. for a mushroom: toadstool D iii.87; J ii.95; a mushroom, toadstool J ii.95. Chattiŋsakkhattuŋ
Chattiŋsakkhattuŋ
(adv.) thirty -- six times It 15. Chada
Chada
[cp. chādeti chad = saŋvaraṇe Dhtp 586] anything that covers, protects or hides, viz. a cover, an awning D i.7≈ (sa -- uttara˚ but ˚chadana at D ii.194); -- a veil, in phrase vivaṭacchada "with the veil lifted" thus spelt only at Nd2 242, 593, DhA i.106 (vivattha˚, v. l. vaṭṭa˚) & DA i.251 (vivatta˚), otherwise ˚chadda; -- shelter, clothing in phrase ghāsacchada Pug 51 (see ghāsa & cp. chāda); -- a hedge J vi.60; -- a wing Th 1, i 108 (citra˚). Chadana
Chadana
(nt.) [Vedic chad] = chada, viz. lit. 1. a cover, covering J i.376; v.241. -- 2. a thatch, a roof Vin ii.154 (various kinds), 195; J ii.281; DhA ii.65 (˚piṭṭha); iv.104 (˚assa udaka -- patana -- ṭṭhāna), 178; PvA 55. -> 3. a leaf, foliage J i.87; Th 1, 527. -- 4. hair J v.202. -- fig. pretence, camouflage, counterfeiting Sn 89 (=paṭirūpaŋ katvā SnA 164); Dhs 1059=Vbh 361= Nd2 271ii. Dhs reads chandanaŋ & Vbh chādanaŋ.

-- iṭṭhikā a tile DhA iv.203. Chadda
Chadda
(nt.) [Dhtp 590 & Dhtm 820 expln a root chadd by "vamane," thus evidently taking it as an equivalent of chaḍḍ] = chada, only in phrase vivattacchadda (or vivaṭa˚) D i.89; Sn 372, 378, 1003, 1147; DA i.251. Nd2 however & DA read ˚chada expl. by vivaṭa -- rāgadosamoha -- chadana SnA 365. Chaddhā
Chaddhā
[Sk. ṣaṭśaḥ] sixfold Miln 2. Chanda
Chanda
[cp. Vedic and Sk. chanda, and skandh to jump]. 1. impulse, excitement; intention, resolution, will; desire for, wish for, delight in (c. loc.). Expld at Vism 466 as "kattu -- kāmatāy" adhivacanaŋ; by Dhtp 587 & Dhtm 821 as chand = icchāyaŋ. -- A. As virtue: dhammapadesu ch. striving after righteousness S i.202; tibba˚ ardent desire, zeal A i.229; iv.15; kusaladhamma˚ A iii.441. Often combd with other good qualities, e. g. ch. vāyāma ussāha ussoḷhi A iv.320; ch. viriya citta vīmaŋsā in set of samādhis (cp. iddhipāda) D iii.77 (see below), & in cpd. ˚âdhipateyya. -- kusalānaŋ dhammānaŋ uppādāya chandaŋ janeti vāyamati viriyaŋ ārabhati, etc., see citta v. 1 db. -> M ii.174; A i.174 (ch. vā vāyāmo vā); iii.50 (chandasā instr.); Sn 1026 (+viriya); Vv 2412 (=kusala˚ VvA 116); J vi.72; DhA i.14. -- B. As vice: (a) kinds & character of ch. -- With similar expressions: (kāya -- ) ch. sneha anvayatā M i.500. -- ch. dosa moha bhaya D iii.182; Nd2 3372 (See also below chandâgati). Its nearest analogue in this sense is rāga (lust), e. g. ch. rāga dosa paṭigha D i.25 (cp. DA i.116); rūpesu uppajjati ch. vā rāgo S iv.195. See below ˚rāga. In this bad sense it is nearly the same as kāma (see kāma & kāmachanda: sensual desire, cp. DhsA 370, Vism 466 & Mrs. Rh. D. in Dhs trsl. 292) & the combn kāmachanda is only an enlarged term of kāma. Kāye chanda "delight in the body" M i.500; Sn 203. bhave ch. (pleasure in existence) Th 2, 14 (cp. bhavachanda); lokasmiŋ ch. (hankering after the world) Sn 866; methunasmiŋ (sexual desire) Sn 835 (expl. by ch. vā rāgo vā peman Nd1 181). -- Ch. in this quality is one of the roots of misery: cittass' upakkileso S iii.232 sq.; v.92; mūlaŋ dukkhassa J iv.328 sq. -- Other passages illustrating ch. are e. g. vyāpāda˚ & vihiŋsā˚ S ii.151; rūpa -- dhātuyā˚ S iii.10; iv.72; yaŋ aniccaŋ, etc. . . . tattha˚ S iii.122, 177; iv.145 sq.; asmī ti ch. S iii.130; atilīno ch. S v.277 sq., cp. also D ii.277. -- (b) the emancipation from ch. as necessary for the attainment of Arahantship. -- vigata˚ (free from excitement) and a˚ S i.111; iii.7, 107, 190; iv.387; A ii.173 sq.; D iii.238; ettha chandaŋ virājetvā Sn 171=S i.16. Kāye chandaŋ virājaye Sn 203. (a)vīta˚ A iv.461 sq. ˚ŋ vineti S i.22, 197; ˚ŋ vinodeti S i.186; ch. suppaṭivinīta S ii.283. na tamhi ˚ŋ kayirātha Dh 117. -> 2. (in the monastic law) consent, declaration of consent (to an official act: kamma) by an absentee Vin i.121, 122. dhammikānaŋ kammānaŋ chandaŋ datvā having given (his) consent to valid proceedings Vin iv.151, 152; cp. ˚dāyaka ii.94. --

Note. The commentaries follow the canonical usage of the word without adding any precision to its connotation. See Nd2 s. v.; DhsA 370; DhA i.14, J vi.72, VvA 77.

-- âgati in ˚gamana the wrong way (of behaviour, consisting) in excitement, one of the four agatigamanāni, viz. ch˚, dosa˚, moha˚, bhaya˚ D iii.133, 228; Vbh 376 (see above); -- âdhipateyya (adj.) standing under the dominant influence of impulse Dhs 269, 359, 529; Vbh 288 (+viriya˚, citta˚, vīmaŋsā˚); -- ânunīta led according to one's own desire S iv.71; Sn 781; -- âraha (adj.) fit to give one's consent Vin ii.93; v.221; -- ja sprung from desire (dukkha) S i.22; -- nānatta the diversity or various ways of impulse or desire S ii.143 sq.; D iii.289; Vbh 425; -- pahāna the giving up of wrong desire S v.273; -- mūlaka (adj.) having its root in excitement A iv.339; v.107; -- rāga exciting desire (cp. kāmachanda) D ii.58, 60; iii.289; S i.198; ii.283; iii. 232 sq. (cakkhusmiŋ, etc.); iv.7 sq. 164 (Bhagavato ch -- r. n' atthi), 233; A i.264 (atīte ch -- r -- ṭṭhānīyā dhammā); ii.71; iii.73; Nd2 413; DhA i.334; -- samādhi the (right) concentration of good effort, classed under the 4 iddhipādā with viriya˚; citta˚ vīmaŋsā˚ D iii.77; S v.268; A i.39; Vbh 216 sq.; Nett 15; -- sampadā the blessing of zeal S v.30. -- 275 -- Chandaka
Chandaka
a voluntary collection (of alms for the Sangha), usually as ˚ŋ saŋharati to make a vol. coll. Vin iv.250; J i.422; ii.45, 85 (saŋharitvā v. l. BB; text sankaḍḍhitvā), 196, 248; iii.288 (nava˚, a new kind of donation); Cp. BSk. chandaka -- bhikṣana AvŚ vol. ii.227. Chandatā
Chandatā
(f.) [see chanda] (strong) impulse, will, desire Nd2 394; Vbh 350, 370. Chandavantatā
Chandavantatā
(f.) [abstr. to adj. chandavant, chanda+ vant] = chandatā VvA 319. Chandasā
Chandasā
(f.) [see chando] metrics, prosody Miln 3. Chandika
Chandika
(adj.) [see chanda] having zeal, endeavouring usually as a˚ without (right) effort, & always combd w. anādara & assaddha Pug 13; Vbh 341; PvA 54 (v. l.), 175. Chandīkata
Chandīkata
(adj.) & chandīkatā (f.) (with) right effort, zealous, zeal (adj.) Th 1, 1029 (chandi˚) (n.) Vbh 208. Chando
Chando
(nt.) [Vedic chandas, from skandh, cp. in meaning Sk. pada; Gr. i)/ ambos] metre, metrics, prosody, esp. applied to the Vedas Vin ii.139 (chandaso buddhavacanaŋ āropeti to recite in metrical form, or acc. to Bdhgh. in the dialect of the Vedas cp. Vin. Texts iii.150); S i.38; Sn 568 (Sāvittī chandaso mukhaŋ: the best of Vedic metres).

-- viciti prosody VvA 265 (enumd as one of the 6 disciplines dealing with the Vedas: see chaḷanga). Channa
Channa1
[pp. of chad, see chādeti1] 1. covered J iv. 293 (vāri˚); vi.432 (padara˚, ceiling); ThA 257. -> 2. thatched (of a hut) Sn 18. -- 3. concealed, hidden, secret J ii.58; iv.58. -- nt. channaŋ a secret place Vin iv.220. Channa
Channa2
[pp. to chad (chand), chandayati, see chādeti2] fit, suitable, proper Vin ii.124 (+paṭirūpa); iii.128; D i.91 (+paṭirūpa); S i.9; M i.360; J iii.315; v.307; vi.572; Pv ii.1215 ( = yutta PvA 159). Chapaka
Chapaka
name of a low -- class tribe Vin iv.203 ( = caṇḍāla Bdhgh. on Sekh. 69 at Vin iv.364), f. ˚ī ib. Chappañca
Chappañca
[cha+pañca] six or five Miln 292. Chab˚
Chab˚
see under cha. Chamā
Chamā
(f.) [from kṣam, cp. khamati. It remains doubtful how the Dhtm (553, 555) came to define the root cham ( = kṣam) as 1. hīḷane and 2. adane] the earth; only in oblique cases, used as adv. Instr. chamā on the ground, to the ground (=ved. kṣamā) M i.387; D iii.6; J iii.232; iv.285; vi.89, 528; Vv 414 (VvA 183; bhūmiyaŋ); Th 2, 17; 112 (ThA 116: chamāyaŋ); Pv iv.53 (PvA 260: bhūmiyaŋ). -- loc. chamāyaŋ Vin i.118; A i.215; Sn 401; Vism 18; ThA 116; chamāya Vin ii.214. Chambhati
Chambhati
[see chambheti] to be frightened DhA iv.52 (+vedhati). Chambhita
Chambhita
[pp. of chambheti]. Only in der. chambhitatta (nt.) the state of being stiff, paralysis, stupefaction, consternation, always combd with other expressions of fear, viz. uttāsa S v.386; bhaya J i.345 (where spelled chambhittaŋ); ii.336 (where wrongly expld by sarīracalanaŋ), freq. in phrase bhaya ch. lomahaŋsa (fear, stupefaction & horripilation ("gooseflesh") Vin ii.156; S i.104; 118; 219; D i.49 (expld at DA i.50 wrongly by sakala -- sarīra calanaŋ); Nd2 470; Miln 23; Vbh 367; Vism 187. -- In other connections at Nd2 1 ( = Dhs 425, 1118, where thambhitatta instead of ch˚); Dhs 965 (on which see Dhs trsl. 242). Chambhin
Chambhin
(adj.) [see chambheti] immovable, rigid; terri- fied, paralysed with fear S i.219; M i.19; J iv.310 (v. l. jambhī, here with ref. to one who is bound (stiff) with ropes (pāsasatehi chambhī) which is however taken by com. as instr. of cha & expld by chasu ṭhānesu, viz. on 4 limbs, body & neck; cp. cha). -- acchambhin firm, steady, undismayed S i.220; Sn 42; J i.71. -- See chambheti & chambhita. Chambheti
Chambheti
[cp. Sk. skabhnāti & stabhnāti, skambh, and P. khambha, thambha & khambheti] to be firm or rigid, fig. to be stiff with fear, paralysed: see chambhin & chambhitatta, Cp. ūrukhambha (under khambha2). Challi
Challi
[Sk. challi] bark, bast DhA ii.165; Bdhgh on MV. viii.29. Chava
Chava
[Derivation doubtful. Vedic śava] 1. a corpse Vin ii.115 (˚sīsassa patta a bowl made out of a skull). See cpds. -- 2. (adj.) vile, low, miserable, wretched Vin ii.112, 188; S i.66; M i.374; A ii.57; J iv.263.

-- aṭṭhika bones of a corpes, a skeleton C iii.15, 1 (?); -- âlāta a torch from a pyre S iii.93 = A ii.95=It 90= J i.482; Vism 54, 299 (˚ûpama). -- kuṭikā a charnelhouse, morgue, Vin i.152; -- dāhaka one who (officially) burns the dead, an "undertaker" Vin i.152; DhA i.68 (f. ˚ikā); Vism 230; Miln 331. -- dussa a miserable garment D i.166≈A i.240; ii.206. -- sarīra a corpse Vism 178 sq. -- sitta a water pot (see above 1) Th 1, 127. Chavaka
Chavaka
1. a corpse J v.449. -- 2. wretched Miln 156, 200; (˚caṇḍāla, see expln at J v.450). Chavi
Chavi
(f.) [*(s)qeu to cover. Vedic chavi, skuṇāti; cp. Gr. sku_lon; Lat. ob -- scurus; Ohg. skūra (Nhg. scheuer); Ags scēo>E. sky also Goth. skōhs>E. shoe] the (outer, thin) skin, tegument S ii.256; A iv.129; Sn 194; J ii.92. Distinguished from camma, the hide (under -- skin, corium) S ii.238 (see camma); also in combn ch -- cammamaŋsa Vism 235; DhA iv.56.

-- kalyāṇa beauty of complexion, one of the 5 beauties (see kalyāṇa 2d) DhA i.387; -- dos' -- ābādha a skin disease, cutaneous irritation Vin i.206; -- roga skin disease DhA iii.295; -- vaṇṇa the colour of the skin, the complexion, esp. beautiful compl., beauty Vin i.8; J iii.126; DhA iv.72; PvA 14 (vaṇṇadhātu), 70, 71 ( = vaṇṇa). Chāta
Chāta
(adj.) [cp. Sk. psāta from bhas (*bhsā), Gr. yw/xw; see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under sabulum & cp. bhasman, probably Non -- Aryan] hungry J i.338; ii.301; v.69; Pv ii.113 ( = bubhukkhita, khudāya abhibhūta PvA 72) ii.936 (jighacchita PvA 126); PvA 62; VvA 76; Miln 253; Mhvs vii.24. Cp. pari˚.

-- ajjhatta with hungry insides J i.345; ii.203; v.338, 359; DhA i.125; DhA i.367 (chātak'); iii.33, 40. -- kāla time of being hungry. Chātaka
Chātaka
[fr. prec.] 1. adj. hungry J i.245, 266. -- 2. (nt.) hunger, famine J i.266; ii.124, 149, 367; vi.487; DhA i.170. Chātatā
Chātatā
[f. abstr. fr. chāta] hunger (lit. hungriness) DhA i.170. Chādana
Chādana
(nt.) [to chādeti] covering. clothing, often combd with ghāsa˚ food & clothing (q. v.) J ii.79 (vattha˚); Pv i.107 (bhojana˚); ii.17 (vattha˚); PvA 50 ( = vattha); DhA iv.7. -- As adj. J vi.354 (of the thatch of a house). -- 276 -- Chādanā
Chādanā
(f.) [fr. chādeti] covering, concealment Pug 19, 23. Cp. pari˚. Chādi
Chādi
(f.) [chādeti1] shade J iv.351. Chādiya
Chādiya
(nt.) covering (of a house or hut), thatch, straw, hay (for eating) J vi.354 ( = gehacchādana -- tiṇa). Chādeti
Chādeti1
[Caus. of chad, Sk. chādayati] (a) to cover, to conceal Vin ii.211 (Pass. chādīyati); Sn 1022 (mukhaŋ jivhāya ch.); Dh 252; Pv iii.43. -- (b) (of sound) to penetrate, to fill J ii.253; vi.195. -- pp. channa1 (q. v.). Chādeti
Chādeti2
[for chandeti, cp. Sk. chandati & chadayati; to khyā?] (a) to seem good, to please, to give pleasure S ii.110; A iii.54; DhA iii.285 (bhattaŋ me na ch.). -> (b) to be pleased with, to delight in, to approve of (c acc.) esp. in phrase bhattaŋ chādeti to appreciate the meal Vin ii.138; D i.72 ( = rucceyya); v.31 (chādayamāna), 33 (chādamana), 463; Th 2, 409; Pv i.118 (nacchādimhamhase), pp. channa2. Chāpa & ˚ka
Chāpa
& ˚ka [Sk. śāva] the young of an animal M i.384 (˚ka); S ii.269 (bhinka˚); J i.460; ii.439 (sakuṇa˚); Miln 402; -- f. chāpī J vi.192 (maṇḍūka˚). Chāyā
Chāyā
(f.) [Vedic chāyā, light & shade, *skei (cp. (s)qait in ketu), cp. Sk. śyāva; Gr. skia/ & skoio/s; Goth. skeinan. See note on kāla, vol. ii. p. 382] shade, shadow S i.72, 93; M ii.235; iii.164; A ii.114; Sn 1014; Dh 2; J ii.302; iv.304; v.445; Miln 90, 298; DhA i.35; PvA 12, 32, 45, 81, etc. -- Yakkhas have none; J v.34; vi.337. chāyā is frequent in similes: see J.P.T.S. 1907, 87. Chārikā
Chārikā
(f.) [Cp. kṣāyati to burn, kṣāra burning; Gr. chro/s dry, Lat. serenus dry, clear. See also khāra & bhasma.] Ashes Vin i.210; ii.220; D ii.164 = Ud 93; A i.209; iv.103; J iii.447; iv.88; v.144; DhA i.256; ii.68; VvA 67; PvA 80 (chārikangāra). Chiggaḷa
Chiggaḷa
[cp. chidda] a hole, in eka˚ -- yuga M iii.169≈; tāḷa˚ key hole S iv.290; Vism 394. Chida
Chida
(always -- ˚) (adj.) breaking, cutting, destroying M i.386; S i.191 = Th 1, 1234; Th 1, 521; 1143; Sn 87 (kankha˚) 491, 1021, 1101 (taṇha˚); VvA 82 (id.). Chidda
Chidda
[cp. Ohg. scetar. For suffix ˚ra, cp. rudhira, etc. Vedic chid+ra. Cp. Sk. chidra] 1. (adj.) having rents or fissures, perforated S iv.316; J i.419; (fig.) faulty, defective, Vin i.290. -- 2. (nt.) a cutting, slit, hole, aperture, S i.43; J i.170 (eka˚), 172, 419, 503; ii.244, 261; (kaṇṇa˚); Vism 171, 172 (bhitti˚), 174 (tāḷa˚); SnA 248 (akkhi˚); DhA iii.42; VvA 100 (bhitti˚); PvA 180 (kaṇṇa˚), 253 (read chidde for chinde); fig. a fault, defect, flaw Dh 229 (acchidda -- vutti faultless conduct) Miln 94.

-- âvachidda full of breaches and holes J iii.491; Vism 252; DhA i.122, 284 (cp. ˚vichidda); iii.151. -- kārin inconsistent A ii.187; -- vichidda = ˚âvachidda J i.419; v.163 (sarīraŋ chiddavichiddaŋ karoti to perforate a body). Chiddaka
Chiddaka
(adj.) having holes or meshes (of a net) D i.45. Chiddatā
Chiddatā
(f.) perforation, being perforated J i.419. Chiddavant
Chiddavant
(adj.) having faults, full of defects M i.272. Chindati
Chindati
[Vedic chid in 3 forms viz. 1. (Perf.) base chid; 2. Act. (pres.) base w. nasal infix. chind; 3. Med. (denom). base w. guṇa ched. Cp. the analagous formations of cit under cinteti. -- Idg.* sk(h)eid, Gr. sxi/zw (E. schism); Lat. scindo (E. scissors); Ohg. scīzan; Ags. scītan; cp. also Goth. skaidan, Ohg. sceidan. Root chid is defined at Dhtp 382, 406 as "dvedhākaraṇa"] to cut off, to destroy, to remove, both lit. (bandhanaŋ, pāsaŋ, pasibbakaŋ, jīvaŋ, gīvaŋ, sīsaŋ, hatthapāde, etc.) and fig. (taṇhaŋ, mohaŋ, āsavā, saŋyojanāni, vicikicchaŋ, vanathaŋ, etc.) Freq. in similes: see J.P.T.S. 1907, 88. -- Forms: (1) chid: aor. acchidā Sn 357, as acchidaŋ M ii.35, acchidda Dh 351 (cp. agamā); Pass. pres. chijjati (Sk. chidyate) Dh 284; It 70; J i.167; Th 1, 1055 = Miln 395; Miln 40; aor. chijji J iii.181 (dvidhā ch. broke in two). -- fut. chijjissati J i.336; -- ger. chijjitvā J i.202; iv.120; -- pp. chijjita J iii.389; see also chida, chidda, chinna. -> (2) chind: Act. pres. chindati S i.149=A v.174= Sn 657; PvA 4, 114; VvA 123; -- imper. chinda Sn 346; J ii.153; chindatha Dh 283; -- pot. chinde Dh 370; -- ppr. chindamāna J i.70, 233. -- fut. chindissati DhA ii.258. -- aor. acchindi Vin i.88 & chindi J i.140. -- ger. chinditvā J i.222, 254, 326; ii.155. -> inf. chindituŋ Vin i.206; PvA 253. -- grd. chindiya J ii.139 (duc˚). -- Caus. chindāpeti J ii.104, 106; Vism 190 (rājāno core ch.). -- (3) ched: fut. checchati (Sk. chetsyati) M i.434; Dh 350; Miln 391. -- aor. acchecchi (Sk. acchaitsīt) S i.12; A ii.249; Sn 355=Th 1, 1275; J vi.261. acchejji (v. l. of acchecchi) is read at S iv.205, 207, 399; v.441; A iii.246, 444; It 47. -- inf. chetuŋ J iv.208; Pv iv.328, & chettuŋ Sn 28. -- ger. chetvā Sn 66, 545, 622; Dh 283, 369; J i.255; Nd2 245, & chetvāna Sn 44; Dh 346; J iii.396. -- grd. chetabba Vin ii.110, & chejja (often combd w. bhejja, torture & maiming, as punishments) Vin iii.47 (+bh˚); J v.444 (id.) vi.536; Miln 83, 359. Also chejja in neg. acchejja S vi.226. -- Caus. chedeti Vin i.50, & chedāpeti ib.; J iv.154. See also cheda, chedana. Chindanaka
Chindanaka
(adj.) [fr. chindati] breaking, see pari˚. Chinna
Chinna
[pp. of chindati] cut off, destroyed Vin i.71 (acchinna -- kesa with unshaven hair); M i.430; D ii.8 (˚papañca); J i.255; ii.155; iv.138; Dh 338; Pv i.112 (v. l. for bhinna), 116; DhA iv.48. Very often in punishments of decapitation (sīsa˚) or mutilation (hatthapāda˚, etc.) e. g. Vin i.91; iii.28; Pv ii.24 (ghāna -- sīsa˚); Miln 5. Cp. sañ˚. As first part of cpd., chinna˚ very frequently is to be rendered by "without," e. g.

-- āsa without hope J ii.230; PvA 22, 174; -- iriyāpatha unable to walk, i. e. a cripple Vin i.91; -- kaṇṇa without ears PvA 151; -- gantha untrammelled, unfettered Sn 219; -- pilotika with torn rags, or without rags S ii.28; PvA 171 (+bhinna˚); -- bhatta without food i. e. famished, starved J i.84; v.382; DhA iii.106 = VvA 76; -- saŋsaya without doubt Sn 1112; It 96, 97, 123; Nd2 244. -- sāṭaka a torn garment Vism 51. Chinnaka
Chinnaka
(adj.) [fr. chinna] cut; a˚ uncut (of cloth) Vin i.297. Chinnikā
Chinnikā
(f.) deceitful, fraudulent, sly, only in combn w. dhuttā (dhuttikā) & only appld to women Vin iii.128; iv.61; J ii.114; Miln 122. Chuddha
Chuddha
[Sk. kṣubdha (?) kṣubh, perhaps better ṣṭīv, pp. ṣṭyūta (see niṭṭhubhati), cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. §§ 66, 120, & Trenckner Notes p. 75. See also khipita] thrown away, removed, rejected, contemptible Dh 41 = Th 2, 468 (spelled chuṭṭha); J v.302. Chupati
Chupati
[Dhtp 480 = samphasse] to touch Vin i.191; iii.37, 121; J iv.82; vi.166; Vism 249; DhA i.166 (mā chupi). -- pp. chupita. Chupana
Chupana
(nt.) touching Vin iii.121; J vi.387. Chupita
Chupita
[pp. of chupati] touched Vin iii.37; J vi.218. Chubhati
Chubhati
given as root chubh (for kṣubh) with def. "nicchubhe" at Dhtm 550. See khobha. Churikā
Churikā
(f.) [Sk. kṣurikā to kṣura see khura, cp. chārikā> khara] a knife, a dagger, kreese Th 2, 302; J iii.370; Miln 339; cp. Miln trsln. ii.227; ThA 227; DhA iii.19. -- 277 -- Churita
Churita:
see vi˚. Cheka
Cheka
(adj.) 1. clever, skilful, shrewd; skilled in (c. loc.) Vin ii.96; M i.509; J i.290 (anga -- vijjāya); ii.161, 403; v.216, 366 (˚pāpaka good & bad); vi.294 (id.); Miln 293.; DA i.90; VvA 36, 215; DhA i.178. -- 2. genuine Vism 437 (opp. kūṭa). Chekatā
Chekatā
(f.) [cheka+tā] skill VvA 131. Chejja
Chejja
1. see chindati. -- 2. one of the 7 notes in the gamut VvA 139. Cheta
Cheta
an animal living in mountain cliffs, a sort of leo- pard S i.198. Chettar
Chettar
[Sk. chettṛ, n -- agent to chindati] cutter, destroyer Sn 343; J vi.226. Cheda
Cheda
[see chindati] cutting, destruction, loss Sn 367 (˚bandhana); J i.419; 485; sīsa˚ decapitation DhA ii.204; PvA 5; aṇḍa˚ castration J iv.364; -- bhatta ˚ŋ karoti to put on short rations J i.156. pada˚ separation of words SnA 150. -- ˚gāmin (adj.) liable to break, fragile A ii.81; J v.453. -- Cp. vi˚. Chedaka
Chedaka
(adj.) [fr. cheda] cutting; in aṇḍa˚ one who castrates J iv.366. Chedana
Chedana
(nt.) [see chindati] cutting, severing, destroying D i.5; ( = DA i.80 hattha˚ -- ādi); iii.176; Vin ii.133; A ii.209; v.206; S iv.169 (nakha˚); v.473; Miln 86; Vism 102 (˚vadha -- bandana, etc.). Chedanaka
Chedanaka
1. (adj.) one who tears or cuts off PvA 7. - 2. (nt.) the process of getting cut (a cert. penance for offences: in combn with āpattiyo & pācittiyaŋ) Vin ii.307; iv.168, 170, 171, 279; v.133, 146 (cha ch. āpattiyo). Cheppā
Cheppā
(f.) [Sk. sépa] tail Vin i.191; iii.21. -- J. Ja
Ja
( -- ˚) [adj. -- suffix from jan, see janati; cp. ˚ga; gacchati] born, produced, sprung or arisen from. Freq. in cpds.: atta˚, ito˚, eka˚, kuto˚, khandha˚, jala˚, daratha˚, dāru˚, di˚, puthuj˚, pubba˚, yoni˚, vāri˚, saha˚, sineha˚. Jagat
Jagat
(nt.) [Vedic jagat, intens. of gam, see gacchati] the world, the earth A ii.15, 17 (jagato gati); S i.186 (jagatogadha plunged into the world). Jagatī
Jagatī
(f.) [see jagat] only in cpds. as jagati˚:

-- ppadesa a spot in the world Dh 127 = PvA 104; -- ruha earth grown, i. e. a tree J i.216. Jagga
Jagga
(nt.) [jaggati+ya] wakefulness S i.111. Jaggati
Jaggati
( = jāgarati, Dhtp 22 gives jagg as root in meaning "niddā -- khaya."] (a) to watch, to lie awake J v.269. -> (b) to watch over, i. e. to tend, to nourish, rear, bring up J i.148 (dārakaŋ), 245 (āsīvisaŋ). Jaggana
Jaggana
(nt.) [from jaggati] watching, tending, bringing up J i.148 (dāraka˚). Jagganatā
Jagganatā
(to jāgarati] watchfulness J i.10. Jagghati
Jagghati
[Intens. to sound -- root ghar. for *jaghrati. See note on gala. Kern compares Ved. jakṣati, Intens. of hasati (Toev. under anujagghati); Dhtp 31 jaggh = hasane] to laugh, to deride J iii.223; v.436; vi.522. -> pp. jagghita J vi.522. See also anu˚, pa˚. Jagghitā
Jagghitā
(f.) laughter J iii.226. Jaghana
Jaghana
(nt.) [Vedic jaghana, cp. Gr. koxw/nh; see janghā] the loins, the buttocks Vin ii.266; J v.203. Jangala
Jangala
(nt.) a rough, sandy & waterless place, jungle A v.21; J iv.71; VvA 338. Cp. ujjangala. Janghā
Janghā
(f.) [Vedic janghā; cp. Av. zanga, ankle; Goth. gaggan, to go; Ags. gang, walk. From *ghengh to walk; see also jaghana] the leg, usually the lower leg (from knee to ankle) D ii.17≈(S i.16 = Sn 165 (eṇi˚); Sn 610; J ii.240; v.42; vi.34; ThA 212). In cpds. jangha˚ (except in janghā -- vihāra).

-- ummagga a tunnel fit for walking J vi.428; -- pesanika adj. going messages on foot Vin iii.185; J ii.82; Miln 370 (˚iya); Vism 17. -- bala(ŋ) (nissāya) by means of his leg (lit. by the strength of, cp. Fr. à force de); -- magga a footpath J ii.251; v.203; VvA 194. -- vihāra the state of walking about (like a wanderer), usually in phrase ˚ŋ anucankamati anuvicarati D i.235; M i.108; Sn p. 105, p. 115; or ˚ŋ carati PvA 73. -- A i.136; J ii.272; iv.7, 74; DhA iii.141. Jangheyyaka
Jangheyyaka
(nt.) [see janghā] lit. "belonging to the knees"; the kneepiece of a robe Vin i.287. Jacca
Jacca
(adj.) [jāti+tya] of birth, by birth (usually -- ˚) M ii.47 (ittara˚. of inferior birth); Sn p. 80 (kiŋ˚ of what birth, i. e. of what social standing); J i.342 (hīna˚ of low birth): Sdhp 416 (id.) J v.257 (nihīna˚); Miln 189 (sama˚ of equal rank).

-- andha (adj.) blind from birth Ud 62 sq. (Jaccandhavagga vi.4); J i.45, 76; iv.192; Vbh 412 sq.; in similes at Vism 544, 596. Jaccā
Jaccā
instr. of jāti. Jajjara
Jajjara
[From intensive of jarati] withered, feeble with age Th 2, 270; J i.5, 59 (jarā˚); ThA 212; PvA 63 (˚bhāva, state of being old) -- a˚ not fading (cp. amata & ajarāmara), of Nibbāna S iv.369. Jajjarita
Jajjarita
[pp. of intens. of jar see jarati] weakened DhA i.7. Jañña
Jañña
(adj.) [ = janya, cp. jātya; see kula & koleyyaka] of (good) birth, excellent, noble, charming, beautiful M i.30 (jaññajañña, cp. p. 528); J ii.417 (=manāpa sādhu). a˚ J ii.436. Jaṭa
Jaṭa
a handle, only in vāsi˚ (h. of an adze) Vin iv.168; S iii.154 = A iv.127. Jaṭā
Jaṭā
(f.) [B.Sk. jatā] tangle, braid, plaiting, esp. (a) the matted hair as worn by ascetics (see jatila) Sn 249; Dh 241, 393; J i.12 (ajina+); ii.272. -- (b) the tangled branches of trees J i.64. -- (c) (fig.) (the tangle of) desire, lust S i.13 = 165.

-- aṇḍuva ( = ˚andu?) a chain of braided hair, a matted topknot S i.117; -- âjina braided hair & an antelope's hide (worn by ascetics) Sn 1010 (˚dhara), cp. above J i.12; -- dharaṇa the wearing of matted hair M i.282. Jaṭita
Jaṭita
[pp. of jaṭ, to which also jaṭā; Dhtp 95: sanghāte] entangled S i.13; Miln 102, 390; Vism 1 (etym.). Jaṭin
Jaṭin
one who wears a jaṭā, an ascetic Sn 689; f. -- inī J vi.555. Jaṭila
Jaṭila
[BSk. jaṭila] one who wears a jaṭā, i. e. a braid of hair, or who has his hair matted, an ascetic. Enumd amongst other ʻ religious ʼ as ājīvikā nigaṇṭhā j. paribbājakā Nd2 308; ājīvikā nig˚ j. tāpasā Nd2 149, 513; -- Vin i.24 = iv.108; i.38 (purāṇa˚ who had previously been j.)=VvA 13=PvA 22; S i.78; Sn p. 103, 104 (Keṇiya j.); J i.15; ii.382; Ud 6; Dpvs i.38. -- 278 -- Jaṭilaka
Jaṭilaka
= jaṭila M i.282; A iii.276; Miln 202; Vism 382. Jaṭhara
Jaṭhara
(m. nt.) [Vedic jaṭhara, to *gelt = *gelbh (see gabbha), cp. Goth. kilpei uterus, Ags. cild=E. child] the belly Miln 175. Jaṇṇu(ka)
Jaṇṇu(ka)
[cp. jānu & jannu] the knee D ii.160; J vi.332; SnA ii.230; DhA i.80 (˚ka); ii.57 (id.), 80; iv.204; VvA 206 (jaṇṇu -- kappara). Jatu
Jatu
[Sk. jatu; cp. Lat. bitumen pitch; Ags. cwidu. resin, Ohg. quiti glue] lac. As medicine Vin i.201. ˚maṭṭhaka a decking with lac. used by women to prevent conception Vin iv.261; consisting of either jatu, kaṭṭha (wood), piṭṭha (flour), or mattikā (clay). Jattu
Jattu
(nt.) [Vedic jatru] the collar -- bone DhA ii.55 (gloss: aŋsakūṭa); Dāvs iv.49. Jaddhu
Jaddhu
[for jaddhuŋ, inf. to jakṣ (P. jaggh), corresp. to Sk. jagdhi eating food; intens. of ghasati] only in composition as a˚ not eating, abstaining from food. ˚ka one who fasts M i.245; ˚māra death by starvation J vi.63 ( = anāsaka -- maraṇa; Fsb. has note: read ajuṭṭha˚?); ˚mārika A iv.287 (v. l. ajeṭṭha˚). Jana
Jana
[*genē: see janati. Cp. Gr. gi/nos, go/nos; Lat. genus = Fr. gens, to which also similar in meaning] a creature, living being: (a) sg. an individual, a creature, person, man Sn 121, 676, 807, 1023 (sabba everybody). Usually collectively: people, they, one (=Fr. on), with pl. of verb Dh 249 (dadanti); often as mahājana the people, the crowd S i.115; J i.167, 294; PvA 6; lokamahājana=loka DhA iii.175; or as bahu(j)jana many people, the many A i.68; Dh 320; DhA iii.175. See also puthujjana. -- (b) pl. men, persons, people, beings: nānā˚ various living beings Sn 1102 (expld at Nd2 248 as khattiyā brāhmaṇā vessā suddā gahaṭṭhā pabbajitā devā manussā.) dve janā J i.151; ii.105; tayo j. J i.63; iii.52; keci janā some people PvA 20. See also Sn 243, 598, 1077, 1121.

-- âdhipa a king of men J ii.369; -- inda = prec. J iii.280, 294; -- esabha the leader of men, the best of all people Dh 255; -- kāya a body or group of people J i.28; DhA i.33 (dve j.: micchā & sammā -- diṭṭhikā); Dpvs i.40; -- pada country see sep.; -- majjhe (loc.) before (all) the people J i.294; Th 2, 394; -- vāda people's talk, gossip Sn 973. Janaka
Janaka
[to janati] 1. producing, production Vism 369; adj. ( -- ˚) producing: pasāda˚ Mhvs i.4 ( = ˚kāraka); a species of karma Vism 601; Cpd. 144 (A.i). -- 2. n. f. ˚ikā genetrix, mother J i.16; Dhs 1059≈(where it represents another jānikā, viz. deception, as shown by syn. māyā & B.Sk. janikā Lal. V. 541; Kern, Toev. p. 41). Janatā
Janatā
(f.) [from janati] a collection of people ("man- kind"), congregation, gathering; people, folk D i.151 ( = DA i.310, correct jananā), 206; Vin ii.128=M ii.93 (pacchimā); A i.61 (id.); iii.251 (id.); It 33; J iv.110; Pv iii.57 (= janȧsamūha upāsakagaṇa PvA 200). Janati
Janati1
[Sk. janati (trs.) & jāyate (intrs.); *gene & *gnē to (be able to) produce; Gr. gi/gnomai (ge/nesis) gnwto/s = jāta=(g)nātus; Lat. gigno, natura, natio; Goth. knōps & kunps; Cymr. geni, Ags. cennan, Ohg. kind, etc.] only in Caus. janeti [Sk. janayati] often spelled jāneti (cp. jaleti: jāleti) & Pass. (intrs.) jāyati to bring forth, produce, cause, syn. sañjaneti nibbatteti abhinibbatteti Nd2 s. v. (cp. karoti). ussāhaŋ j. to put forth exertion J ii.407 (see chanda); (saŋ)vegaŋ j. to stir up emotion (aspiration) J iii.184; PvA 32; Mhvs i.4; dukkhaŋ j. to cause discomfort PvA 63. -- Aor. janayi Th 2, 162 (Māyā j. Gotamaŋ: she bore). -- Pp. janita produced PvA 1. -- See also jantu jamma, jāta, jāti, ñāti, etc. Janati
Janati2
to make a sound J vi.64 ( = sanati saddaŋ karoti). Janana
Janana
(adj.) [to janati] producing, causing ( -- ˚) It 84 (anattha˚ dosa); J iv.141; Dpvs i.2; DhsA 258; Dhtp 428. -- f. jananī PvA 1 (saŋvega˚ dẹsanā); = mother (cp. janettī) J iv.175; PvA 79. Note. jananā DA i.310 is misprint for janatā. Janapada
Janapada
[jana+pada, the latter in function of collective noun -- abstract: see pada 3] inhabited country, the country (opp. town or market -- place), the continent; politically: a province, district, county D i.136 (opp. nigama); ii.349; A i.160, 178; Sn 422, 683, 995, 1102; J i.258; ii.3 (opp. nagara), 139, 300; PvA 20, 32, 111 (province). See also gāma. The 16 provinces of Buddhist India are comprised in the soḷasa mahā -- janapadā (Miln 350) enumd at A i.213 = iv.252 sq.=Nd2 247 (on Sn 1102) as follows: Angā, Magadhā (+Kālingā, Nd2] Kāsī, Kosalā, Vajjī, Mallā, Cetī (Cetiyā A iv.), Vaŋsā (Vangā A i.), Kurū, Pañcālā, Majjā (Macchā A), Sūrasenā, Assakā, Avantī, Yonā (Gandhārā A), Kambojā. Cp. Rhys Davids, B. India p. 23.

-- kathā talk or gossip about the province D i.7≈; -- kalyāṇī a country -- beauty, i. e. the most beautiful girl in the province D i.193 (see kalyāṇa); -- cārikā tramping the country PvA 14; -- tthāvariya stableness, security, of the realm, in ˚patta, one who has attained a secure state of his realm, of a Cakkavattin D i.88; ii.16; Sn p. 106; -- padesa a rural district A iv.366; v.101. Janavati
Janavati
(?) A iv.172. Janitta
Janitta
(nt.) [jan+tra, cp. Gr. gene/teira] birthplace J ii.80. Janettī
Janettī
(f.) [f. to janitṛ = gene/tws=genitor, cp. genetrix. The Sk. form is janitrī. On e: i cp. petti˚: pitri˚] mother D ii.7 sq.; M iii.248; A iv.276; J i.48; ii.381; iv.48. Jantāghara
Jantāghara
[acc. to Abhp. 214 = aggisālā, a room in which a fire is kept (viz. for the purpose of a steam bath, i. e. a hot room, cp. in meaning Mhg. kemenate =Lat. caminata, Ger. stube=E. stove; Low Ger. pesel (room)= Lat. pensile (bath) etc.) Etym. uncertain. Bühler KZ 25, p. 325=yantra -- gṛha (oil -- mill?); E. Hardy (D. Lit. Ztg. 1902, p. 339)=jentāka (hot dry bath), cp. Vin. Texts i.157; iii.103. In all probability it is a distorted form (by dissimilation or analogy), perhaps of *jhānt -- āgāra, to jhā to burn=Sk. kṣā, jhānti heat or heating (=Sk. kṣāti)+āgāra, which latter received the aspiration of the first part (=āghāra), both being reduced in length of vowels=jant -- āghara] -- 1. a (hot) room for bathing purposes, a sitzbath Vin i.47, 139; ii.119, 220 sq., 280; iii.55; M iii.126; J ii.25, 144; Vism 18; Dpvs viii.45. -- 2. living room J i.449. Janti
Janti
at DA i.296 in jantiyā (for D i.135 jāniyā) = hāni, abandonment, giving up, payment, fine [prob.=jahanti, to jahāti]. But see jāni. Jantu
Jantu1
[Vedic jantu, see janati] a creature, living being, man, person S i.48; A iv.227; Sn 586, 773 sq., 808, 1103; Nd2 249 ( = satta, nara, puggala); Dh 105, 176, 341, 395; J i.202; ii.415; v.495; Pv ii.949 (=sattanikāya, people, a crowd PvA 134). Jantu
Jantu2
a grass Vin i.196. Jannu
Jannu
[cp. jaṇṇu(ka) & jānu] the knee DhA i.394. -- ˚ka D ii.17≈(in marks of a Mahāpurisa, v. l. ṇṇ); J iv.165; DhA i.48. Japa
Japa
(& jappa vv. ll.) [fr. japati] 1. muttering, mumbling. recitation A iii.56 = J iii.205 (+manta); Sn 328 (jappa) (=niratthaka -- kathā SnA 334). -- 2. studying J iii.114 (=ajjhena). -- 279 -- Jap(p)aka
Jap(p)aka
(adj.) whispering, see kaṇṇa.˚ Japati
Japati
(& jappati Dhtp 189, also japp 190 = vacane; sound -- root jap) to mumble, whisper, utter, recite J iv.204; Pv ii.61 (=vippalapati PvA 94); PvA 97; ppr. jappaŋ S i.166 (palāpaŋ); J iv.75. See japa, japana; also pari˚. Japana
Japana
(sic. DA i.97, otherwise jappana) whispering, mumbling (see japati), in kaṇṇa˚. See also pari˚. Jappati
Jappati
[not, as customary, to jalp, Sk. jalpati ( = japati), but in the meaning of desire, etc., for cappati to capp, as in cappeti=Sk, carvayati to chew, suck, be hungry (q. v.) cp. also calaka] to hunger for, to desire, yearn, long for, (c. acc.) Sn 771 (kāme), 839 (bhavaŋ), 899, 902; Nd2 79 (=pajappati), -- pp. jappita Sn 902. See also jappā, jappanā, etc., also abhijjappati & pa˚. Jappanā
Jappanā
= jappā Sn 945; Dhs 1059≈. Cp. pa˚. Jappā
Jappā
(f.) [to jappati] desire, lust, greed, attachment, hunger (cp. Nd2 on taṇhā) S i.123 (bhava -- lobha˚); Sn 1033; Nd2 250; Nett 12; Dhs 279, 1059. Jambāla
Jambāla
[Sk. jambāla] mud; adj. jambālin muddy, as n. jambālī (f.) a dirty pool (at entrance to village) A ii.166. Jambu
Jambu
(f.) [Sk. jambu] the rose -- apple tree, Eugenia Jambolana J ii.160; v.6; Vv 67; 4413, 164. -- As adj. f. jambī sarcastically "rose -- apple -- maid," appld to a gardener's daughter J iii.22.

-- dīpa the country of the rose -- apples i. e. India J i.263; VvA 18; Miln 27, etc. -- nada see jambonada; -- pakka the fruit of Eugenia jambolana, the rose -- apple (of black or dark colour) Vism 409; -- pesī the rind of the r. -- a. fruit J v.465; -- rukka the r. -- a. tree DhA iii.211; -- saṇḍa rose -- apple grove ( = ˚dīpa, N. for India) Sn 552= Th 1, 822. Jambuka
Jambuka
[Sk. jambuka, to jambh?] a jackal J ii.107; iii.223. Jambonada
Jambonada
[Sk. jāmbūnada; belonging to or coming from the Jambu river (?)] a special sort of gold (in its unwelded state); also spelled jambunada (J iv.105; VvA 13, 340) A i.181; ii.8, 29; Vv 8417. Cp. jātarūpa. Jambhati
Jambhati
[cp. Vedic jehate, Dhtp 208 & Dhtm 298 define jambh as "gatta -- vināma," i. e. bending the body] to yawn, to arouse oneself, to rise, go forth (of a lion) J vi.40. Jambhanā
Jambhanā
(f.) [to jambhati] arousing, activity, alertness Vbh 352. Jamma
Jamma
(adj.) [Vedic *jālma (?), dialectical?] miserable, wretched, contemptible J ii.110; iii.99 ( = lāmaka); f. -- ī S v.217; Dh 335, 336 (of taṇhā); J ii.428; v.421; DhA iv.44 (=lāmakā). Jamman(a)
Jamman(a)
(nt.) [to janati] birth, descent, rank Sn 1018. Jaya
Jaya
[see jayati] vanquishing, overcoming, victory D i.10; Sn 681; J ii.406; opp. parājaya Vism 401.

-- ggaha the lucky die J iv.322 ( = kaṭaggaha, q. v.); -- parājaya victory & defeat Dh 201; -- pāna the drink of victory, carousing, wassail; ˚ŋ pivati DhA i.193; -- sumana "victory's joy," N. of a plant (cp. jātisumana) Vism 174; DhA i.17, 383. Jayati
Jayati
(jeti, jināti) [Sk. jayati, ji to have power, to con- quer, cp. jaya = bi/ a; trans. of which the intrans. is jināti to lose power, to become old (see jīrati)] to conquer, surpass; to pillage, rob, to overpower, to defeat. -- Pres. [jayati] jeti J ii.3; jināti Sn 439; Dh 354; J i.289; iv.71. -- Pot. jeyya Com. on Dh 103; jine Dh 103=J ii.4=VvA 69; 3rd pl. jineyyuŋ S i.221 (opp. parājeyyuŋ). -- Ppr. jayaŋ Dh 201. -- Fut. jessati Vv 332; jayissati ib.; jinissati J ii.183. -- Aor. jini J i.313; ii.404; ajini Dh 3; pl. jiniŋsu S i.221 (opp. parājiŋsu), 224 (opp. parājiŋsu, with v. l. ˚jiniŋsu); A iv.432 (opp. ˚jiyiŋsu, with v. l. ˚jiniŋsu). Also aor. ajesi DhA i.44 (=ajini). -- Proh. (mā) jīyi J iv.107. -- Ger. jetvā Sn 439; jetvāna It 76. -- Inf. jinituŋ J vi.193; VvA 69. -- Grd. jeyya Sn 288 (a˚); jinitabba VvA 69 (v. l. jetabba). -- Pass. jīyati (see parā˚), jīyati is also Pass. to jarati -- Caus. 1. jayāpeti to wish victory to, to hail (as a respectful greeting to a king) J ii.213, 369, 375; iv.403. -- 2. jāpayati to cause to rob, to incite, to plunder M i.231; It 22=J iv.71 (v. l. hāpayati)= Miln 402; J vi.108 (to annul); Miln 227. -- Des. jigiŋsati (q. v.). -- pp. jina & jita (q. v.). Jayā
Jayā
f. [Vedic jāyā] wife only in cpd. jayampatikā, the lady of the house and her husband, the two heads of the household. That the wife should be put first might seem suggestive of the matriarchate, but the expression means just simply "the pair of them," and the context has never anything to do with the matriarchate. -> husband & wife, a married couple S ii.98; J i.347; iv.70, of birds. See also jāyampatikā. Jara
Jara
(adj.) (˚ -- ) [See jarati] old, decayed (in disparaging sense), wretched, miserable; -- ûdapānaŋ a spoilt well J iv.387; -- gava = ˚goṇa Pv i.81; -- goṇa [cp. Sk. jaradgava] a decrepit, old bull J ii.135; -- sakka "the old S." J iv.389; -- sālā a tumble -- down shed PvA 78. Jaratā
Jaratā
(f.) [see jarati] old age Dhs 644≈ (rūpassa j. decay of form); Vism 449. Jarati
Jarati
[Vedic jarati & jīryati, *gerā to crush, to pound, overcome (cp. jayati); as intrs. to become brittle, to be consumed, to decay, cp. Lat. granum, Goth kaúrn, E. etc. corn] to suffer destruction or decay, to become old, in two roots, viz. 1. jar [jarati] in Caus. jarayati to destroy, to bring to ruin J v.501 = vi.375. -- 2. jīr [Sk. jīryati] see jīyati, jīrati, jīrayati, jīrāpeti. -- Pp. jiṇṇa. -- Cp. also jara, jarā, jajjara, jīraṇatā. Jarā
Jarā
(f.) & (older) jaras (nt.) [of the latter only the instr. jarasā in use: Sn 804, 1123 ( = jarāya Nd2 249). -- Sk. jarā & jaraḥ to *gerā: see jarati; cp. Gr. gh_ras, ge/ras, grau_s old age, etc. See also jīraṇa(tā)] decay, decrepitude, old age Vin i.10, 34; A i.51, 138 (as Death's messenger); v.144 sq. (bhabbo jaraŋ pahātuŋ); Sn 311 (cp. D iii.75); J i.59; Th 2, 252 sq.; Vism 502 (def. as twofold & discussed in its valuation as dukkha). Defined as "yā tesaŋ sattānaŋ tamhi tamhi sattanikāye jarā jīraṇatā khaṇḍiccaŋ pāliccaŋ valittacatā āyuno saŋhāni indriyānaŋ paripāko" D ii.305=M i.49= S ii.2=Nd2 252= Dhs 644, cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 195. -- Frequently combd with maraṇa (maccu, etc.) "decay & death" (see under jāti as to formulas): ˚maraṇa, D ii.31 sq.; M i.49; Sn 575; ˚maccu Sn 581, 1092, 1094. ajarāmara not subject to decay & death (cp. ajajjara) Th II, 512; Pv ii.611; Vv 6311; J iii.515.

-- ghara the house of age (adj.) like a decayed house Th 2, 270 ( = jiṇṇagharasadisa ThA 213). -- jajjara feeble with age J i.59; -- jiṇṇa decrepit with age PvA 148; -- dhamma subject to growing old A i.138, 145; ii.172, 247; iii.54 sq., 71 sq.; -- patta old J iii.394; iv.403; -- bhaya fear of old age A i.179; ii.121; -- vata the wind of age DhA iv.25. -- sutta the Suttanta on old age, N. of Sutta Nipāta iv.6 (p. 157 sq.; beginning with "appaŋ vata jīvitaŋ idaŋ"), quoted at DhA iii.320. Jala
Jala
(nt.) [Sk. jala, conn. with gala drop (?), prob. dialec- tical; cp. udaka] water Sn 845; J i.222; iii.188; iv.137.

-- gocara living in the water J ii.158. -- ja born or sprung from w. J iv.333; v.445; VvA 42; -- da "giving water," rain -- cloud Dāvs v.32; -- dhara [cp. jalandhara rain -- cloud] the sea Miln 117; -- dhi = prec. Dāvs v.38. -- 280 -- Jalati
Jalati
[Sk. jvalati, with jvarati to be hot or feverish, to jval to burn (Dhtp 264: dittiyaŋ), cp. Ohg. kol = coal; Celt. gûal] to burn, to shine D 3, 188; M i.487; J i.62; ii.380; iv.69; It 86; Vv 462; VvA 107; Miln 223, 343. -- Caus. jaleti & jāleti (cp. janeti: jāneti) to set on fire, light, kindle S i.169; J ii.104; Miln 47. -- Pp. jalita. Intens. daddaḷhati (q. v.). Cp. ujjāleti. Jalana
Jalana
(n. -- adj.) [Sk. jvalana] burning Pgdp 16. Jalābu
Jalābu
[Sk. jarāyu, slough & placenta, to jar see jarati, originally that which decays ( = decidua); cp. Gr. gh_ras slough. As to meanings cp. gabbha] 1. the womb S iii.240. -- 2. the embryo J iv.38. -- 3. the placenta J ii.38.

-- ja born from a womb, viviparous M i.73; D iii.230; J ii.53 = v.85. Jalita
Jalita
(adj.) [pp. to jalati] set on fire, burning, shining, bright, splendid Sn 396, 668, 686; Vv 216 ( = jalanto jotanto VvA 107); Pv i.1014 (burning floor of Niraya); ii.112 (˚ânubhāva: shining majesty); PvA 41 (=āditta burning); ThA 292. Jalūpikā
Jalūpikā
(f.) [Sk. *jalūkikā = jalūkā & (pop. etym.) jalankā (sprung fr. water), borrowed fr. Npers. ƶalū (?Uhlenbeck); cp. Gr. bde/lla leech, Celt. gel; perhaps to gal in the sense of such (?)] a leech Miln 407 (v. l. jalopikā). jalūkā
jalūkā
leech DA i.117. Jalogi
Jalogi
(nt.?) toddy (i. e. juice extracted from the palmyra, the date or the cocoa palm) Vin ii.294 (pātuŋ the drinking of j.), 301, 307; Mhvs 4, 10. Jalla
Jalla1
(nt.) [*jalya to jala or gal] moisture, (wet) dirt, perspiration (mostly as seda˚ or in cpd. rajo˚, q. v.) Sn 249 ( = rajojalla SnA 291); J vi.578 (sweat under the armpits=jallikā Com.). Jalla
Jalla2
[prob. = jhalla, see Kern, Toevoegselen s. v.] athlete, acrobat J vi.271. Jallikā
Jallikā
(f.) [demin. of jalla] a drop (of perspiration), dirt in seda˚, etc. A i.253 (kāli˚); Sn 198 = J i.146; vi.578. Jaḷa
Jaḷa
(adj.) [Sk. jaḍa] dull, slow, stupid D iii.265 (a˚); A ii.252; Pug 13; Miln 251; DA i.290. Java
Java
[Sk. java, to javati] 1. (n.) speed S ii.266; v.227; M i.446; A ii.113; iii.248; Sn 221; J ii.290; iv.2. Often combd with thāma, in phrase thāmajavasampanna endowed with strength & swiftness J i.62; VvA 104; PvA 4; Miln 4. -- javena (instr.) speedily J ii.377. -- 2. (adj.) swift, quick J iii.25; vi.244 (mano˚, as quick as thought); Vv 16 ( = vegavanto VvA 78); VvA 6 (sīgha˚).

-- cchinna without alacrity, slow, stupid (opp. sīghajava) DhA i.262; -- sampanna full of swiftness, nimbleness, or alacrity A i.244 sq.; ii.250 sq. Javati
Javati
Vedic ju javate intr. to hurry, junāti trs. to incite, urge: to run, hurry, hasten S i.33; J iv.213; Dāvs v.24; DhsA 265, pp. jūta. Javana
Javana
(nt.) 1. alacrity, readiness; impulse, shock Ps i.80 sq.; Vism 22; DhsA 265 (cp. Dhs trsl. pp. 132, 156); DA i.194. Usually in cpd. javana -- pañña (adj.) of alert intellection, of swift understanding, together with hāsa -- pañña (hāsu˚ at M iii.25; J iv.136) & puthu˚ tikkha˚ S v.376, 377; Nd2 235, 3a. Also in cpds. ˚paññā Ps ii.185 sq.; ˚paññatā A i.45; ˚paññattaŋ S v.413. -> 2. The twelfth stage in the function (kicca) of an act of perception (or vīthicitta): the stage of full perception, or apperception. Vism ch. xiv. (e. g. p. 459); Abhdhs. pt. iii, § 6 (kiccaŋ); Comp. pp. 29, 115, 245. In this connection javana is taken in its equally fundamental sense of "going" (not "swiftness"), and the "going" is understood as intellectual movement. Javanaka
Javanaka
= java 2 (adj.) VvA 78. Jaha
Jaha
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [to jahati] leaving behind, giving up, see attaŋ˚, okaŋ˚, kappaŋ˚, raṇaŋ˚, sabbaŋ˚, etc (S i.52; It 58; Sn 790, 1101, etc.); duj˚ hard to give up Th 1, 495. Jahati & jahāti
Jahati
& jahāti [Vedic root hā. Cp. *ghē(i) & ghī to be devoid (of), Gr. xh_ros void of, xh_ra widow, xw/ra open space (cp. Sk. vihāya = ākāsa), xwri/zw separate; Lat. her -- es; Sk. jihīte to go forth=Ohg. gēn, gān, Ags. gan=go; also Sk. hāni want=Goth. gaidw, cp. Gr. xati/zw] to leave, abandon, lose; give up, renounce, forsake. Ster. expln at Nd2 255 (and passim): pajahati vinodeti byantikaroti anabhāvaŋ gameti. Lit. as well as fig.; esp. w. ref. to kāma, dosa & other evil qualities. -- Pres. jahāti Sn 1, 506 (dosaŋ), 589; Dh 91; imper. jahassu Sn 1121 (rūpaŋ); pot. jahe It 34; Dh 221; J iv.58, & jaheyya Sn 362; It 115; J i.153; iv.58. -- Fut. jahissāmi J iii.279; iv.420; v.465; in verse: hassāmi J iv.420; v.465. -- Ger. hitvā (very frequent) Sn 284, 328; Dh 29, 88, etc.; hitvāna (Sn 60), jahitvā & jahetvā (Sn 500). -- Inf. jahituŋ J i.138. -- Pp. jahita Sn 231; Kh 9; Miln 261. -- Pass. hāyati S ii.224; Sn 817; Miln 297, hāyate J v.488 & hīyati J ii.65; Sn 944 (hīyamāna), cp. hāyare J ii.327; pp. hīna (q. v.). -- Caus. hāpeti (q. v.). See also hāni, hāyin, jaha. Jahitikā
Jahitikā
(f.) [See jahati] (a woman) who has been jilted, or rejected, or repudiated J i.148. Jāgara
Jāgara
(adj.) [fr. jāgarti] waking, watchful, careful, vigilant S i.3; A ii.13 = It 116; M ii.31; It 41; Miln 300. -- bahu˚ wide awake, well aware, cautious Sn 972 (cp. rakkhita -- mānasāno in same context v. 63); Dh 29. Jāgaraṇa
Jāgaraṇa
(nt.) [der. fr. jāgara] a means for waking or keeping awake Miln 301. Jāgaratā
Jāgaratā
(f.) [cp. Sk. jāgaraṇa] watchfulness, vigilance S i.3. Jāgarati
Jāgarati
[Sk. jāgarti to be awake (redupl. perf. for jājarti) *ger & gerēi; cp. Lat. expergiscor (*exprogrīscor); Gr. e)gei/rw, perf. e)grh/gora (for *e)gh/ gora). Def. at Dhtp 254 by niddā -- khaya] to be awake, to be watchful, to be on the alert (cp. guttadvāra) Dh 60 (dīghā jāgarato rattī), 226; It 41; Miln 300. -- pp. jāgarita (q. v.). Jāgarita
Jāgarita
(nt.) [pp. of jāgarti] waking, vigil It 41; Pug 59. Jāgariyā
Jāgariyā
(f.) [BSk. M Vastu jāgarikā] keeping awake, watchfulness, vigilance, esp. in the sense of being cautious of the dangers that are likely to befall one who strives after perfection. Therefore freq. in combn "indriyesu guttadvāro bhojane mattaññū jāgariyaŋ anuyutto" (anuyuñjati: to apply oneself to or being devoted to vigilance), e. g. S ii.218; M i.32, 273, 354 sq., 471; A i.113 sq.; ii.40. -- Also in ˚ŋ bhajati to pursue watchfulness (bhajetha keep vigil) It 42; Sn 926 (niddaŋ na bahulīkareyya j˚ŋ bhajeyya ātāpī). -- S iv.104; M i.273, 355; Miln 388.

-- ânuyoga application or practice of watchfulness Nd1 484. Jāta
Jāta
[pp. of janati (janeti), cp. Lat. (g)nātus, Goth. kunds; also Gr. (kasi/ -- ) gnhto/s, Ohg. knabo] 1. As adj. -- noun: (a) born, grown, arisen, produced ( = nibbatta pātubhūta Nd2 256) Sn 576 (jātānaŋ maccānaŋ niccaŋ maraṇato bhayaŋ); jātena maccena kattabbaŋ kusalaŋ bahuŋ Dh 53=Miln 333; yakkhinī jātâsi (born a G.) J vi.337; rukkho j. J i.222; latā jātā Dh 340; gāmanissandhena jātāni sūpeyya -- paṇṇāni Vism 250. -- (n.) he who or that which is born: jātassa maraṇaŋ hoti Sn 742; jātassa jarā paññāyissati J i.59; jātaŋ+bhūtaŋ (opp. ajātaŋ abhūtaŋ) It 37. -- (b) "genuine," i.e. natural, true, good, sound (cp. kata, bhūta, taccha & opp. ajāta like akata, abhūta): see cpds. -- 2. As predicate, often in sense of a finite verb (cp. gata): born, grown (or was born, grew); become; occurred, happened Sn 683 (Bodhisatto hitasukhatāya jāto); bhayaŋ jātaŋ (arose) Sn 207; vivādā jātā Sn 828; ekadivase j. (were born on the same day) J iii.391; aphāsukaŋ jātaŋ (has occurred J i.291. -- So in loc. abs. jāte (jātamhi) "when . . . has arisen, when there is . . .," e. g. atthamhi Vin i.350=M iii.154=Dh 331; vādamhi Sn 832; oghe Sn 1092; kahāpaṇesu jātesu J i.121. -- 3. ˚jāta (nt.) characteristic; pada˚ pedal character S i.86; anga˚ the sexual organ Vin i.191; as adj. having become . . . (=bhūta); being like or behaving as, of the kind of . . ., sometimes to be rendered by an adj. or a pp. implied in the noun: cuṇṇakajātāni aṭṭhikāni (= cuṇṇayitāni) M iii.92; jālakajāta in bud A iv.117; chandajāta=chandika Sn 767; sujāta Sn 548 (well -- born, i. e. auspicious, blessed, happy); pītisomanassa˚ joyful & glad Sn p. 94; J i.60, etc.; gandhajāta a kind of perfume (see gandha). Often untranslatable: lābhappatto jāto J iii.126; vināsa -- ppaccayo jāto J i.256. -- 4. a Jātaka or Buddhist birth story DhA i.34.

-- āmaṇḍa the (wild) castor oil plant VvA 10; -- ovaraka the inner chamber where he was born VvA 158; J i.391 (so read for jāto varake). -- kamma the (soothsaying) ceremony connected w. birth, in ˚ŋ karoti to set the horoscope PvA 198 ( = nakkhatta -- yogaŋ uggaṇhāti); -- divasa the day of birth, birthday J iii.391; iv.38; -- mangala birth festival, i. e. the feast held on the birth of a child DhA ii.86; -- rūpa "sterling," pure metal, i. e. gold (in its natural state, before worked, cp. jambonada). In its relation to suvaṇṇa (worked gold) it is stated to be suvaṇṇavaṇṇo (i. e. the brightcoloured metal: VvA 9; DhA iv.32: suvaṇṇo jātarūpo); at DA i.78 it is expld by suvaṇṇa only & at Vin iii.238 it is said to be the colour of the Buddha: j. Satthu -- vaṇṇa. At A i.253 it is represented as the material for the suvaṇṇakāra (the "white" -- smith as opp. to "black" -- smith). -- Combd w. hirañña Pv ii.75; very freq. w. rajata (silver), in the prohibition of accepting gold & silver (D i.5)≈ as well as in other connections, e. g. Vin i.245; ii.294 sq.; S i.71, 95; iv.326 (the moral dangers of "money": yassa jātarūpa -- rajataŋ kappati pañca pi tassa kāmaguṇā kappanti); v.353, 407; Dhs 617. -- Other passages illustr. the use & valuation of j. are S ii.234 (˚paripūra); v.92 (upakkilesā); A i.210 (id.); iii.16 (id.); -- S i.93, 117; M i.38; A i.215; iii.38; iv.199, 281; v.290; J ii.296; iv.102; -- veda [cp. Vedic jātaveda=Agni] fire S i.168; Sn 462 (kaṭṭhā jāyati j.) Ud 93; J i.214; ii.326= iv.471; v.326; vi.204, 578; Vism 171; DA i.226; DhA i.44 (nirindhana, without fuel); -- ssara a natural pond or lake Vin i.111; J i.470; ii.57. -- 281 -- Jātaka
Jātaka1
(nt.) [jāta+ka, belonging to, connected with what has happened] 1. a birth story as found in the earlier books. This is always the story of a previous birth of the Buddha as a wise man of old. In this sense it occurs as the name of one of the 9 categories or varieties of literary composition (M i.133; A ii.7, 103, 108; Vin iii.8; Pug 43. See navanga). -- 2. the story of any previous birth of the Buddha, esp. as an animal. In this sense the word is not found in the 4 Nikāyas, but it occurs on the Bharhut Tope (say, end of 3rd cent. b.c.), and is frequent in the Jātaka book. -> 3. the name of a book in the Pāli canon, containing the verses of 547 such stories. The text of this book has not yet been edited. See Rh. Davids' Buddhist India, 189 -- 209, and Buddh. Birth Stories, introd., for history of the Jātaka literature. -- jātakaŋ niṭṭhapeti to wind up a Jātaka tale J vi.363; jātakaŋ samodhāneti to apply a Jātaka to the incident J i.106; DhA i.82. -> Note. The form jāta in the sense of jātaka occurs at DhA i.34.

-- atthavaṇṇanā the commentary on the Jātaka book, ed. by V. Fausböll, 6 vols. with Index vol. by D. Andersen, London, 1877 sq.; -- bhāṇaka a repeater of the J. book Miln 341. Jātaka
Jātaka2
(m.) [jāta+ka, belonging to what has been born] a son J i.239; iv.138. Jātatta
Jātatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. jāta] the fact of being born or of having grown or arisen Vism 250; DhA i.241. Jāti
Jāti
(f.) [see janati & cp. Gr. genea/, ge/nesis; Lat. gens; Goth. kind -- ins]. -- Instr. jātiyā (Sn 423) & jaccā (D ii.8; J iii.395; Dh 393); abl. jātiyā (S i.88) & jātito (by descent: D ii.8); loc. jātiyaŋ (PvA 10) & jātiyā (PvA 78). -- 1. birth, rebirth, possibility of rebirth, "future life" as disposition to be born again, "former life" as cause of this life. Defined (cp. the corresp. expln of jarā) as: yā tesaŋ tesaŋ sattanaŋ tamhi tamhi satta -- nikāye jāti sañjāti okkanti abhinibbatti khandhānaŋ pātubhāvo āyataṇānaŋ paṭilābho D ii.305 = S ii.3=Nd2 257. -- Jāti is a condition precedent of age, sickness & death, and is fraught with sorrow, pain & disappointment. It is itself the final outcome of a kamma, resting on avijjā, performed in anterior births; & forms thus the concluding link in the chain of the Paṭicca -- samuppāda. Under the first aspect it is enumd in various formulae, either in full or abbreviated (see Nd2 258), viz, (a) as (1) jāti, (2) jarā, (3) vyādhi, (4) maraṇa, (5) sokaparidevadukkhadomanass' upāyāsa in the dukkhaŋ ariyasaccaŋ (the noble truth of what is misfortune) Vin i.10; A i.176; iii.416; ˚dhamma destined to be born, etc. M i.161 sq., 173; -- A v.216; Nd2 258, 304, 630, etc., in var. connections (referring to some dukkha). -- (b) as Nos. 1 -- 4: Nd2 254, 494b; J i.168, etc. -- (c) as Nos. 1, 2, 4 (the standard quotation, implying the whole series 1 -- 5): S v.224; A v.144; jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇaŋ Vin i.1; D ii.31, 57, etc.; ˚ika A ii.11, 173; ˚īya M i.280; Nd2 40. -- (d) to this is sometimes added (as summing up) saŋsāra: Nd2 282f; cp. kicchaŋ loko āpanno jāyati ca jīyati ca mīyati ca cavati ca uppajjati ca D ii.30. -- (e) as Nos. 1+4: pahīna -- jātimaraṇa (adj.) (=free from life & death, i. e. saŋsāra) A i.162; ˚bhayassa pāraga A ii.15; ˚kovida Sn 484; atāri ˚ŋ asesaŋ Sn 355 (cp. 500); ˚assa pāraga Sn 32. -- (f)=e+saŋsāra (cp. d): sattā gacchanti saŋsāraŋ jātimaraṇagāmino A ii.12=52; jātimaraṇasaŋsāraŋ ye vajanti punappunaŋ . . . avijjāy' eva sā gati Sn 729. -- (g) as Nos. 1+2, which implies the whole series: atāri so jātijaraŋ A i.133= Sn 1048; jātijar' upaga Sn 725=It 106; saŋyojanaŋ jātijarāya chetvā It 42; -- Sn 1052, 1060; Dh 238, 348; cp. jāti ādinā nihīna PvA 198. -- Other phrases & applications: Various rebirths are seen by one who has perfect insight into all happening & remembers his former existences (D i.81; iii.50; A i.164; M ii.20). Arahantship implies the impossibility of a future rebirth: see formula khīṇā jāti (M i.139; Sn p. 16, etc.) and arahant ii.A: jātiyā parimuccati S i.88; jātiŋ bhabbo pahātuŋ A v.144 sq. -- antimā jāti the last rebirth D ii.15 (cp. carima); purimā j. a former existence PvA 1; atītajātiyaŋ in a former life (=pure) PvA 10. On jāti as dukkha see Vism 498 -- 501. -> 2. descent, race, rank, genealogy (cp. fuh/, genus), often combd w. gotta. Two grades of descent are enumd at Vin iv.6 as hīnā jāti (low birth), consisting of Candāḷa, Veṇa, Nesāda, Rathakāra & Pukkusa; and ukkaṭṭhā j. (superior birth), comprising Khattiyas & Brāhmaṇas. -- The var. meanings of jāti are given by Bdhgh at Vism 498, 499 in the foll. classification (with examples) bhava, nikāya, sankhata -- lakkhaṇa, paṭisandhi, pasūti, kula, ariya -- sīla. -- Kiŋ hi jāti karissati? What difference makes his parentage? D i.121; jāti -- rājāno kings of birth, genuine kings J i.338; na naŋ jāti nivāresi brahmalok' ûpapattiyā Sn 139; jātiŋ akkhāhi tell me the rank of his father & mother Sn 421, 1004; cp. 462; na jaccā vasalo hoti Sn 136; 142; id. w. brāhmaṇo Sn 650; with nāma & gotta in the description of a man jātiyā nāmena gottena, etc. Vin iv.6; jātito nāmato gottato by descent, personal & family name D ii.8; cp. jāti -- gotta -- kula J ii.3. See also j. -- vāda. -- 3. a sort of, kind of (cp. jāta 3): catujātigandha four kinds of scent J i.265; ii.291. -> 4. (jāti˚) by (mere) birth or nature, natural (opp. artificial); or genuine, pure, excellent (opp. adulterated, inferior), cp. jāta 1 (b): in cpds., like ˚maṇi, ˚vīṇā, etc.

-- kkhaya the destruction of the chance of being reborn S v.168; A i.167; Sn 209, 517, 743; Dh 423. -- khetta the realm of rebirth PvA 138 ( = dasa cakkavāḷasahassāni); -- thaddha conceited, proud of birth Sn 104 (+dhanatthaddha, gotta˚: proud of wealth & name); -- thera a Th. by rank D iii.218; -- nirodha the extermination of (the cause of) rebirth Vin i.1≈; -- pabhava the origin or root of existence Sn 728; -- puppha nutmeg J vi.367; -- bhaya the fear of rebirth A ii.121; -- bhūmi natural ground, in ˚bhūmaka, ˚bhūmika, ˚bhūmiya living on nat. gr. (vassaŋ vasati) M i.145; A iii.366; -- maṇi a genuine precious stone J ii.417; -- maya constituting birth, being like birth ThA 285; -- vāda reputation of birth, character of descent, parentage. The 1st of the 5 characteristics constituting a "well -- bred" brahmin: yāva sattamā pitāmahāyugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena "of unblemished parentage back to the 7th generation" D i.120, etc. (=DA i.281); A i.166; iii.152, 223; Sn 315, 596. Cp. gotta -- vāda (e. g. D i.99); -- vibhanga a characteristic of birth, a distinction in descent Sn 600; -- vīṇā a first -- class lute J ii.249; -- sampanna endowed with (pure) birth (in phrase khattiyo muddhâvasitto j.˚) A iii.152; -- sambhava the origin of birth A i.142; iii.311; J i.168; -- sambheda difference of rank DhA i.166; -- saŋsāra the cycle of transmigration, the saŋsāra of rebirths (see above 1 d. f.): pahīna left behind, overcome (by an Arahant) M i.139; A iii.84, 86; ˚ŋ khepetvā id. Th 2, 168; vitiṇṇo j.˚ n' atthi tassa punabbhavo Sn 746; -- sindhava a well -- bred horse J ii.97; -- ssara the remembrance of (former) births (˚ñāṇa) J i.167; iv.29; DhA ii.27; iv.51; cp. cutûpapāta -- ñāṇa); -- hingulaka (& hingulikā) natural vermilion J v.67; VvA 4, 168, 324. -- 282 -- Jātika
Jātika
( -- ˚) (adj.) 1. being like, being of, having, etc. (see jāta 3): duppañña˚ & sappañña˚ M i.225; dabba˚ A i.254; mukhara˚ Sn 275; viññū˚ Sn 294; māna˚ J i.88. -- 2. descended from, being of rank, belonging to the class of: maṇḍana˚ M ii.19; aviheṭhaka˚ Miln 219; samāna˚ (of equal rank) DhA i.390; veṇa˚ (belonging to the bamboo -- workers) PvA 175. Jātimant
Jātimant
(adj.) [jāti+mant] of good birth, having natural or genuine qualities, noble, excellent Sn 420 (vaṇṇārohena sampanno jātimā viya khattiyo); J i.342 (jātimanta -- kulaputtā). Of a precious stone: maṇi veḷuriyo subho j.˚ D i.76 = M ii.17; DA i.221; Miln 215. Sometimes in this spelling for jutimant Sn 1136= Nd2 259 (expld by paṇḍita paññavā). -- ajātima not of good birth J vi.356 (opp. sujātimant ibid.). Jātu
Jātu
(indeel.) [Vedic jātu, particle of affirmation. Perhaps for jānātu one would know, cp. Gr. oi)_mai, Lat. credo, P. maññe. But BR. and Fausböll make it a contraction of jāyatu "it might happen." Neither of these derivations is satisfactory] surely, undoubtedly (ekaŋsavacanaŋ SnA 348) usually in negative (& interrog.) sentences as na jātu, not at all, never (cp. also sādhu); mā jātu Vin ii.203; Sn 152, 348 (no ce hi jātu); J i.293, 374; iv.261; v.503. Na jātucca at J vi.60 is apparently for na jātu ca. Jāna
Jāna
(adj.) [to jñā, see jānāti] knowing or knowable, understandable J iii.24 ( = jānamāna). dujjāna difficult to understand D i.170, 187; M i.487; ii.43. su˚ recognizable, intelligible Pv iv.135 (=suviññeyya PvA 230). Cp. ājāna. Jānana
Jānana
(nt.) [fr. jñā] knowledge, cognizance, recognition; intelligence, learning, skill J i.145 (attānaŋ -- ˚kālato paṭṭhāya from the time of self -- recognition), 200 ( -- ˚manta knowledge of a spell, a spell known by: tumhākaŋ) ii.221; SnA 330; DhA ii.73 (˚sabhāva = ñatta); DA i.86 (akkhara˚); Vism 391 (˚atthāya in order to know), 436 (=pajānana). Cp. ājānana. -> ajānana not knowing (˚ -- ) J v.199; vi.177; not known J i.32 (˚sippa). Jānanaka
Jānanaka
(adj.) [Sk. *jñānaka, cp. jānana & Sk. jānaka (c. gen.) expert Av Ś ii.119, 120, as n. ib. i.216] knowing DhsA 394. Jānanatā
Jānanatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. jānana] the fact of knowing, knowledge KhA 144. Jānapada
Jānapada
(adj. -- n.) [fr. janapada] belonging to the country, living in the c.; pl. country -- folk (opp. negamā townsfolk) D i.136, 142; M ii.74; J ii.287, 388; DA i.297 ( = janapada -- vāsin). Jānāti
Jānāti
[Vedic jña, jānāti *genē & *gnē, cp. Gr. gignw/skw, gnwto/s, gnw_sis; Lat. nosco, notus, (i)gnarus (cp. E. i -- gnorant); Goth. kunnan; Ohg. kennan, Ags. cnāwan = E. know] to know.

I. Forms: The 2 Vedic roots jān˚ & jñā˚ are represented in P. by jān˚ & ñā˚ (ña˚) 1. jān: pres. jānāti; pot. jāneyya (Sn 781) & jaññā (A iv.366; Sn 116, 775; Dh 157, 352; J ii.346; iv.478) 2nd sg. jāneyyāsi (M. i.487; J i.288), 1st pl. jāniyāma (Sn 873) & (archaic) jānemu (Sn 76, 599; Vv 8311); -- imper. jānāhi (Sn 596, 1026; Pv ii.912), 3rd. sg. jānātu (It 28); -- ppr. jānanto & jānaŋ (D i.192; A i.128; Sn 722), ppr. med. jānamāna (J i.168); -- fut. jānissati (J ii.342; vi.364); -- aor. ajāni (Sn 536) & jāni (J i.125, 269), 3rd pl. jāniŋsu (J ii.105; VvA 113); -- ger. jānitvā (J i.293; iii.276); inf. jānituŋ (J i.125). Caus. jānāpeti (see below iv.2). -- 2. ñā: fut. ñassati (D i.165); -- aor. aññāsi (J i.271) & nāsi (Sn 471), 3rd pl. aññaŋsu (Vv 224). -- ger. ñatvā (freq.); -- grd. ñeyya A ii.135 (see below) & ñātabba (PvA 133); -- inf. ñātuŋ (freq.) -- pp. ñāta (q. v.). -> Pass. ñāyati to be called or named (Miln 25).

II. Cognate Forms: Nd2 s. v. explains jānāti by passati dakkhati adhigacchati vindati paṭilabhati, & ñatvā (No. 267) by jānitvā tulayitvā tirayitva vibhāvayitvā vibhūtaŋ katvā (very freq.) The 1st expln is also applied to abhijānāti, & the 2nd to passitvā, viditaŋ katvā, abhiññāya & disvā. The use of the emphatic phrase jānāti passati is very frequent. Yaŋ tvaŋ na jānāsi na passasi taŋ tvaŋ icchasi kāmesi? Whom you know not neither have seen, is it she that you love and long for? D i.193; Bhagavā jānaŋ jānāti passaŋ passati cakkhubhūto ñāṇabhūto M i.111; similarly A iv.153 sq. See further D i.2, 40, 84, 157 sq, 165, 192 sq., 238 sq.; A i.128; iii.338; v.226; Sn 908; Nd2 35, 413, 517; Vism 200.

III. Meaning: (1) Intrs. to know, to have or gain knowledge, to be experienced, to be aware, to find out: mayam pi kho na jānāma surely, even we do not know D i.216; te kho evaŋ jāneyyaŋ they ought to know ib.; jānantā nāma n' âhesuŋ "nobody knew" J iii.188; jānāhi find out J i.184; kālantarena jānissatha you will see in time PvA 13; ajānanto unawares, unsuspecting i.223; ajānamāna id. Pv ii.314. -- 2. Trs. to know recognize, be familiar with (usually c. acc., but also with gen.: J i.337; ii.243), to have knowledge of, experience, find; to infer, conclude, distinguish, state, define: yaŋ ahaŋ jānāmi taŋ tvaŋ jānāsi D i.88; aham p' etaŋ na jānāmi Sn 989; jānanti taŋ yakkhabhūtā Pv iv.135; paccakkhato ñatvā finding out personally J i.262; iii.168; cittam me Gotamo jānāti S i.178; jānāti maŋ Bhagavā S i.116; kathaŋ jānemu taŋ mayaŋ? How shall we know (or identify) him? Vv 8311; yathā jānemu brāhmaṇaŋ so that we may know what a b. is Sn 599; yath' âhaŋ jāneyyaŋ vasalaŋ Sn p. 21; ajānanto ignorant PvA 4; annapānaŋ ajāṇanto (being without bread & water) PvA 169; ittaraŋ ittarato ñatvā inferring the trifling from the trifle Pv i.1111; ingha me uṇh' odakaŋ jānāhi find me some hot water S i.174; seyyaŋ jānāhi Vin iv.16; phalaŋ pāpassa jānamāna (having experienced) J i.168; mantaŋ j. (to be in possession of a charm) J i.253; maggaŋ na j. Sn 441; pamāṇaŋ ajānitvā (knowing no measure) PvA 130. -- 3. With double acc.: to recognize as, to see in, take for, identify as, etc. (cp. Caus.): petaŋ maŋ jānāhi "see in me a Peta" Pv ii.912 ( = upadhārehi PvA 119); bhadd' itthiyā ti maŋ aññaŋsu (they knew me as=they called me) Vv 224.

IV. Various: 1. Grd. ñeyya as nt. = knowledge (cp. ñāṇa): yāvatakaŋ ñeyyaŋ tāvatakaŋ ñāṇaŋ (knowledge coincides with the knowable, or: his knowledge is in proportion to the k., i. e. he knows all) Nd2 2352m; ñāṇaŋ atikkamitvā ñeyyapatho n' atthi "beyond knowledge there is no way of knowledge" ib.; ñeyyasāgara the ocean of knowledge PvA 1. -- 2. Caus. jānāpeti to make known, to inform, or (with attānaŋ) to identify, to reveal oneself J i.107 (att. ajānāpetvā); vi.363; Vism 92 (att.); PvA 149 (att.); DhA ii.62. -- 283 -- Jāni
Jāni1
(f.) [from jahati, confused in meaning with jayati. See jahati & cp. janti] deprivation, loss, confiscation of property; plundering, robbery; using force, ill -- treatment D i.135 = A i.201 (vadhena vā bandhena vā jāniyā vā); S i.66 (hatajānisu), J i.55 (v. l. jāti), 212 (mahājānikara a great robber): iv.72 (dhana,˚ v. l. hāni); Dh 138 (=DhA iii.70 dhanassa jāni, v. l. hāni). Jāni
Jāni2
(f.) wife, in jānipatayo (pl.) wife & husband (cp. jāyā(m)pati) A ii.59 sq. Jānu
Jānu
(nt.) [Vedic jānu = Gr. go/nu, Lat. genu, Goth., Ohg., etc. kniu, E. knee] (also as jaṇṇu(ka), q.v.) the knee J ii.311; iv 41; vi.471; DA i.254.

-- maṇḍala the knee -- cap, the knee A i.67; ii.21; iii.241 sq.; PvA 179. Jānuka
Jānuka
(nt.) = jānu A iv.102. Jāpayati
Jāpayati
Caus. of jayati. Jāmātar
Jāmātar
(& jāmāta J iv.219) [Vedic jāmātar. Deriv. un- certain. BR. take it as jā+mātar, the builder up of the family, supposing the case where there is no son and the husband goes to live in the wife's family, a bīna marriage. More likely fr. ldg *gem, to marry. Cp. Gr. game/w; gambro/s, Lat. gener] daughter's husband, son -- inlaw Th 2, 422 ( = ThA 269 duhitu pati); J ii.63; v.442. Jāyati
Jāyati
(jāyate) [from jan, see janati] to be born, to be produced, to arise, to be reborn. Pres. 3rd pl. jāyare J iii.459; iv.53; Miln 337; ppr, jāyanto Sn 208; aor. jāyi J iii.391; inf. jātum J i.374. -- jāyati (loko), jīyati, miyati one is born, gets old, dies D ii.30; Vism 235. Kaṭṭhā jāyati jātavedo out of fire -- wood is born the fire Sn 462. -- Vin ii.95 = 305; Sn 114, 296, 657; Dh 58, 193, 212, 282; Pv iii.114 (are reborn as). Cp. vi˚. Jāyampatikā
Jāyampatikā
(pl.) [see jayampatikā & cp. jāyāpatī] wife & husband VvA 286. Jāyā
Jāyā
(f.) [from jan] wife Vin ii.259 = 264; J iv.285.

-- patī (pl.) husband & wife PvA 159; Dāvs v.2. Jāyikā
Jāyikā
f. (cp. jāyā) wife M i.451. Jāra
Jāra
[Vedic jāra] a paramour, adulterer J i.293; ii.309. f. ˚t adulteress Vin ii.259, 268; iii.83. Jāla
Jāla1
(nt.) [Vedic jāla, prob. from jaṭ to plait, make a tangle cp. jaṭita & jaṭā; on l:ṭ cp. phulla: sphuṭa; cāru: cāṭu; cela: ceṭa] a net; netting, entanglement (lit. or fig.): snare, deceptíon ( = māyā). -- A I.it. Nd2 260 (= suttajāla, a plaiting of threads); SnA 115, 263 (=suttamaya) D i.45 (anto -- jālikata caught in a net); Sn 62, 71, 213, 669; J i.52; vi.139. -- kinkiṇika˚ a row of bells D ii.183; muttā˚ a net of pearls J i.9; VvA 40; loha˚ PvA 153; hema˚ Vv 35; a fowler's net Dh 174; a spider's web Dh 347; nets for hair J vi.188; pabbata˚ a chain of mountains J ii.399; sirā˚ network of veins J v.69; PvA 68. -- Freq. in similes: see J.P.T.S. 1907, 90. -- B. Fig. Very often appld to the snares of Māra: S i.48 (maccuno); Sn 357 (id.); DhA iii.175 (Māra˚); Sn 527 (deception); taṇhā˚ the snare of worldly thirst (cp. ˚tanhā) M i.271; Th 1, 306; SnA 351; kāma˚ Th 1, 355; moha˚ S iii.83; mohasama Dh 251; diṭṭhi˚ the fallacies of heresy D i.46; J vi.220; ñāṇa˚ the net of knowledge VvA 63; DhA iii.171. bhumma˚ (vijjā) "earthly net," i.e. gift of clearsight extending over the earth SnA 353.

-- akkhi a mesh of a net J i.208: -- taṇhā the net of thirst Dhs 1059, 1136; DhsA 367; -- pūpa a "netcake"? DhA i.319; -- hatthapāda (adj.) having net -- like hands & feet (one of the 32 marks of a Mahāpurisa) prob. with reference to long nails D ii.17 (see Dial. ii.14, note 3), cp. jālitambanakhehi Vv 8116 (expld at VvA 315: jālavantehi abhilohita -- nakkehi. Tena jāli (v. l. jāla -- ) hatthataŋ mahāpurisa -- lakkhaṇaŋ tambanakhataŋ anuvyañ anañ ca dasseti). Jāla
Jāla2
[Sk. jvāla, from jalati] glow, blaze J v.326; PvA 52 ( = tejas), 154 (raŋsi˚); Miln 357; Vism 419 (kappavināsaka˚).

-- roruva N. of one of the two Roruva hells ("blazes") J v.271; -- sikhā a glowing crest i. e. a flame Nd2 11 ( = accī). Jālaka
Jālaka
(nt.) [jāla1+ka] 1. a net J vi.536; Dāvs v.51. - 2. a bud A iv.117 sq. (˚jāta in bud). -- f. jālikā chain armour Miln 199. Jālā
Jālā
(f.) [see jāla2] a flame J i.216, 322; Miln 148, 357. Jālin
Jālin
(adj. -- n.) "having a net," ensnaring, deceptive: (a) lit. a fisherman J ii.178. -- (b) fig. usually in f. ˚inī of tanhā (ensnarer, witch) S i.107 = Dh 180; A ii.211; Th 1, 162, 908; Dhs 1059; Vism 1; DhsA 363; cp. M Vastu i.166; iii.92. Jāleti
Jāleti
[caus. of jalati. See also jaleti] to cause to burn, to light, kindle J ii.104; iv.290; v.32. Ji
--
Ji (adj. -- suffix) [From jayati to conquer] winning, vic- torious: sangāma˚ victorious in fight, in sangāmaj' uttama "greatest of conquerors" Dh 103; sabba˚ S iv.83. Jigacchā
Jigacchā
(f.) see jighacchā. Jigiŋsaka
Jigiŋsaka
(adj.) [see next] one who wishes to gain, desirous of, pursuing Sn 690. Jigiŋsati
Jigiŋsati
[Desid. of ji, jayati. On etym. see also Kern, Toev. p. 44] to desire, to wish to acquire, to covet; Sn 700; J ii.285; iii.172 (v. l. BB. jigissaŋ); iv.406 (v. l. SS. jihiŋ˚, BB. jigī˚); v.372; vi.268. As jigīsati Th 1, 1110. Jigiŋsanatā
Jigiŋsanatā
(f.) [n. abstr. fr. jigiŋsati] desire for, covetous- ness Vbh 353 (v. l. BB. nijigīsanatā); cp. Vism. 29 Jigucchaka
Jigucchaka
(adj.) one who dislikes or disapproves of M i.327 (paṭhavī˚, āpa˚ etc.) Miln 343. Jigucchati
Jigucchati
[Desid. of gup] to shun, avoid, loathe, detest, to be disgusted with or horrified at (c. instr.) D i.213 (iddhi -- pāṭihāriyena aṭṭiyāmi harāyāmi j.): A iv.174 (kāyaduccaritena); Sn 215 (kammehi pāpakehi; SnA 266 = hiriyati); J ii.287; Pug. 36. -- ppr. jigucchamāna It 43; grd. jigucchitabba A i.126; pp. jigucchita Sn 901. -- See also jeguccha, jegucchin. Jigucchana
Jigucchana
(nt.) dislike, contempt, disgust Vism 159; PvA 120. Jigucchā
Jigucchā
(f.) disgust for, detestation, avoidance, shunning: tapo˚ (detesting asceticism) D i.174; S i.67; A ii.200; jigucchabībhaccha -- dassana detestable & fearful -- looking PvA 56. Note. A diff. spelling, digucchā, occurs at DhsA 210. Jighacchati
Jighacchati
[Desid. to ghasati, eat] to have a desire to eat, to be hungry D ii.266; pp. jighacchita DhA ii.145. -- 284 -- Jighacchā
Jighacchā
(f.) [from jighacchati] appetite, hunger, often combd with pipāsā, desire to drink, thirst, e. g. S i.18; A ii.143, 153; Miln 304. -- M i.13, 114; 364; iii.97, 136; A iii.163; Dh 203 (j. paramā rogā); J ii.445; iii.19; (˚abhibhūta = chāta); Miln 204, 304; Sdhp 118, 388. Cp. khudā & chāta. Note. A diff. spelling as dighacchā occurs at A ii.117. Jiñjuka
Jiñjuka
the Gunja shrub (Abrus precatorius) J iv.333 (akkhīni j. ˚phalasadisāni, cp. in same application guñjā); v.156 (j. ˚phalasannibha); DhA i.177 (˚gumba). Jiṇṇa
Jiṇṇa
[pp. of jarati] 1. decayed, broken up, frail, decrepit, old: vuḍḍha mahallaka andhagata vayo -- anupatta Nd2 261; jarājiṇṇatāya jiṇṇa DA i.283. -- Vin ii.189; D i.114; M ii.48 sq., 66; A ii.249; iv.173; Sn 1 (urago va jiṇṇaŋ tacaŋ jahāti); Pv i.121 (same simile); Sn 1120, 1144; J i.58; iii.22 ( -- pilotikā worn -- out rags); Dh 155, 260; Pv ii.114 (jarājiṇṇa PvA 147); Pug 33; Vism 119 (˚vihārā), 356 (˚sandamānikā), 357 (˚koṭṭha); ThA 213 ( -- ghara a tumble -- down house); PvA 40 ( -- goṇa = jaraggava), 55 (of a roof). Cp. ˚tara J iv.108. -- 2. digested J ii.362 Jiṇṇaka
Jiṇṇaka
(adj.) = jiṇṇa Sn 98, 124; J iv.178, 366; Sdhp 299 (sālā). Jiṇṇatā
Jiṇṇatā
(f.) [cp. jiṇṇa, jaratā & jīraṇatā] decrepitude DA i.283 (jarā˚). Jita
Jita
[pp. of jayati, conquer] conquered, subdued, mastered: (nt.) victory. jitā me pāpakā dhammā Vin i.8; -> Dh 40, 104 (attā jitaŋ seyyo for attā jito seyyo see DhA ii.228), 105, 179; Vv 6427 (jitindriya one whose senses are mastered, cp. guttindriya). -- Cp. vi˚. Jitatta
Jitatta
(nt.) [n. abstr. of jita] mastery, conquest VvA 284. Jina
Jina
[pp. med. of jayati] conquering, victorious, often of the Buddha, "Victor": jitā me pāpakā dhammā tasmâhaŋ Upaka jino ti Vin i.8 = M i.171; Vin v.217; Sn 379, 697, 989, 996. magga˚ conqueror of the Path Sn 84 sq.; saŋsuddha˚ (id.) Sn 372. Cp khetta˚. In other connections: Pv iv.333; Th 2, 419 (jin' amhase rūpinaŋ Lacchiŋ expld at ThA 268 as jinā amhase jinā vat' amha rūpavatiŋ Siriŋ).

-- cakka the Buddha's reign, rule, authority J iv.100; -- putta disciple of the B. Miln 177; -- bhūmi the ground or footing of a conqueror PvA 254; -- sāsana the doctrine of the B. Dpvs iv.3, 10. Jināti
Jināti
= jayati (jeti). See also vi˚. Jimha
Jimha
(adj.) [Vedic jihma] crooked, oblique, slant, fig. dishonest, false (cp. vanka, opp. uju | M i.31 (+vanka); A v.289, 290; J i.290 (spelled jima); iii.111 = v.222; vi.66; Vism 219 (ajimha=uju); PvA 51 (citta˚ vanka . . .; opp. uju). Cp. kuṭila. Jimhatā
Jimhatā
(f.) [n. abstr. to jimha] crookedness, deceit (opp. ujutā) Dhs 50, 51 (+vankatā); Vbh 359. Jimheyya
Jimheyya
(nt.) [from jimha] crookedness, deceit, fraud M i.340 (sāṭheyyāni kūṭeyyāni vankeyyāni j.˚); A iv.189 (id.) v.167. Jiyā
Jiyā
(f.) [Vedic jyā = Gr. bio/s bow, cp. also Lat. filum thread] a bow string M i.429 (five kinds); J ii.88; iii.323; Vism 150; DA i.207. -- kāra bowstring -- maker Miln 331. Jivhā
Jivhā
(f.) [Vedic jihvā, cp. Lat. lingua (older dingua); Goth. tuggo; Ohg. zunga; E. tongue] the tongue. -> (a) physically: Vin i.34; A iv.131; Sn 673, 716; Dh 65, 360; J ii.306; PvA 99 (of Petas: visukkha -- kanthaṭṭha j.), 152. -- Of the tongue of the mahāpurusha which could touch his ears & cover his forehead: Sn 1022; p. 108; & pahūta -- jivhatā the characteristic of possessing a prominent tongue (as the 27th of the 32 Mahāpurisa -- lakkhaṇāni) D i.106 = Sn p. 107; D ii.18. -- dujjivha (adj.) having a bad tongue (of a poisonous snake) A iii.260. -- (b) psychologically: the sense of taste. It follows after ghāna (smell) as the 4th sense in the enumn of sense -- organs (jivhāya rasaŋ sāyati Nd2 under rūpa; jivhā -- viññeyya rasa D i.245; ii.281; M ii.42) Vin i.34; D iii.102, 226; M i.191; Vism 444.

-- agga the tip of the tongue A iii.109; iv.137; DhA ii.33. -- āyatana the organ of taste D iii.243, 280, 290; Dhs 585, 609, 653; -- indriya the sense of taste D iii.239; Dhs 585, 609, 972; -- nittaddana (corr. to -- nitthaddhana) tying the tongue by means of a spell D i.11 (cp. DA i.96); -- viññāṇa the cognition of taste M i.112; D iii.243; Dhs 556, 612, 632; -- samphassa contact with the sense of taste S i.115; D iii.243; Dhs 585, 632, 787. Jīna
Jīna
[pp. of jīyati] diminished, wasted, deprived of (with acc. or abl.) having lost; with acc.: J iii.153, 223, 335; v.99 (atthaŋ: robbed of their possessions; Com. parihīna vinaṭṭha). -- with abl.: J v.401 (read jīnā dhanā). Jīyati
Jīyati
[Pass. of ji, cp. Sk. jyāti & jīryate] to become diminished, to be deprived, to lose (cp. jayati, jāni); to decay; to become old (cp. jarati, jiṇṇa) jīyasi J v.100; jīyanti J iii.336 (dhanā); jīyittha S i.54; J i.468; mā jīyi do not be deprived of (ratiŋ) J iv.107. Koci kvaci na jīyati mīyati (cp. jāyati) D ii.30; cakkhūni jīyare the eyes will become powerless J vi.528 ( = jīyissanti); grd. jeyya: see ajeyya2. Cp. parijīyati. Sometimes spelt jiyy˚: jiyyati J vi.150; jiyyāma J ii.75 (we lose= parihāyāma). Pp. jīna, q. v. Jīraka
Jīraka1
[Vedic jīra, lively, alert, cp. jīvati & Gr. diero/s, Lat. viridis] digestion, in ajīrakena by want or lack of digestion J ii.181. See ajīraka. Jīraka
Jīraka2
cummin -- seed Miln 63; J i.244; ii.363; VvA 186. Jīraṇa
Jīraṇa
(nt.) [fr. jīr] decaying, getting old Dhtp 252. Jīraṇatā
Jīraṇatā
(f.) [n. abstr. of jīr = jar, see jarati; cp. jarā & jiṇṇatā] the state of being decayed or aged, old age, decay, decrepitude M i.49; S ii.2; Nd2 252= Dhs 644; PvA 149. Jīrati & Jīrayati
Jīrati
& Jīrayati [Caus. of jarati] 1. to destroy, bring to ruin, injure, hurt Vin i.237 (jīrati); J v.501 (v. l. BB. for jarayetha, Com. vināseyya) = vi.375; PvA 57. -> 2. (cp. jīyati) to get old A iii.54 (jarā -- dhammaŋ mā jīri "old age may not get old," or "the law of decay may not work"); Vism 235 (where id. p. D ii.30 reads jīyati); DhA i.11 (cakkhūni jīranti). -- 3. (intrs.) to be digested Vism 101. Jīreti & Jīrāpeti
Jīreti
& Jīrāpeti [Verbal formation from jīra1] to work out, to digest J i.238, 274 (jīreti); DhA i.171. Appl. to bhati, wages: bhatiŋ ajīrāpetva not working off the w. J ii.309, 381; jīrāpeti as "destroy" at ThA 269 in expln of nijjareti (+vināseti). Jīva
Jīva1
(adj. -- n.) [Sk. jīva, Idg. *gṷīṷos = Gr. bi/os, Lat. vīvus, Goth. quius, Ohg. queck, E. quick, Lith. gyvas] 1. the soul. Sabbe jīvā all the souls, enumd with sattā pāṇā bhūta in the dialect used by the followers of Gosāla D i.53 (= DA i.161 jīvasaññī). "taŋ jīvaŋ taŋ sarīraŋ udāhu aññaŋ j. aññaŋ s." (is the body the soul, or is the body one thing and the soul another?) see D i.157, 188; ii.333, 336, 339; S iv.392 sq.; M i.157, 426 sq.; A ii.41. -- Also in this sense at Miln 30, 54, 86. -- Vin iv.34; S iii.215, 258 sq.; iv.286; v.418; A v.31, 186, 193. -- 2. life, in yāvajīvaŋ as long as life lasts, for life, during (his) lifetime D iii.133; Vin i.201; Dh 64; J ii.155; PvA 76.

-- gāhaŋ (adv.) taken alive, in phrase j.˚ gaṇhāti or gaṇhāpeti S i.84; J i.180; ii.404; cp. karamara; -- loka the animate creation J iii.394; -- sūla "life -- pale," a stake for execution J ii.443; -- sokin ( = sokajīvin) leading a life of sorrow J vi.509. -- 285 -- Jīva
Jīva2
(nt.) the note of the jīvaka bird Sum. V. on D iii.201. Jīvaka
Jīvaka
(adj.) = jīva, in bandhu˚ N. of a plant VvA 43. -- f. ˚ikā q. v. Jīvaŋjīvaka
Jīvaŋ
-- jīvaka (m. onom.) name of a bird, a sort of pheasant (or partridge?), which utters a note sounding like jīvaŋ jīva D iii.201; J v.406, 416; vi.276, 538 [Fausböll reads jīvajīvaka in all the Jātaka passages. Speyer AvŚ ii.227 has jīvañjīvaka]. With this cp. the Jain phrase jīvaŋjīveṇa gacchaï jīvaŋjīveṇaŋ ciṭṭhaï, Weber Bhagavatī pp. 289, 290, with doubtful interpretation ("living he goes with life"? or "he goes like the j. bird"?). Jīvati
Jīvati
[Vedic jīvati, cp. jinoti (jinvati); Dhtp 282: pāṇa- dhāraṇe *gṷei̯ē = Gr. bi/omai & zw/w, zh_n; Lat. vīvo: Goth. ga -- quiunan; Mhg. quicken, cp. E. quicken] to live, be alive, live by, subsist on (c. instr. or nissāya). Imper. pres. jīva Sn 427, very freq. with ciraŋ live long . . ., as a salutation & thanksgiving. ciraŋ jīva J vi.337; c. jīvāhi Sn 1029; Pv ii.333; c. jīvantu Pv i.55; -- pot. jīve Sn 440, 589; Dh 110; -- ppr. jīvaŋ Sn 427, 432; -> ppr. med. jīvamāna J i.307; PvA 39; -- inf. jīvituŋ J i.263; Dh 123. -- Sn 84 sq., 613 sq., 804; Dh 197; J iii.26; iv.137; vi.183 (jīvare); PvA 111. Jīvana
Jīvana
(nt.) living, means of subsistence, livelihood PvA 161. Spelt jīvāna (v. l. jīvino) (adj.) at J iii.353 (yācana˚). Jīvamānaka
Jīvamānaka
(adj.) [ppr. med. of jīvati+ka] living, alive Vism 194. Jīvikā
Jīvikā
(f.) [abstr. fr. jīvaka] living, livelihood S iii.93; A v.87, 210; J iv.459; Miln 122; SnA 466. Freq. in combn ˚ŋ kappeti to find or get one's living: J ii.209; PvA 40, etc.; ˚kappaka finding one's livelihood (c. ger. by) J ii.167. Cp. next. Jīvita
Jīvita
(nt.) [Vedic jīvita, orig. pp. of jīvati "that which is lived," cp. same formation in Lat. vīta = *vīvita; Gr. bio/th living, sustenace, & di/aita, "diet"] (individual) life, lifetime, span of life; living, livelihood (cp. jīvikā) Vin ii.191; S i.42; iv.169, 213; M ii.73 (appaŋ); A i.155, 255; iii.72; iv.136 (appakaŋ parittaŋ); Sn 181, 440, 574, 577, 931, 1077; Dh 110, 111, 130; J i.222; Pv i.1111 (ittaraŋ); ii.67 (vijahati); Dhs 19, 295; Vism 235, 236; Ps ii.245; PvA 40. -- jīvitā voropeti to deprive of life, to kill Vin iii.73; D iii.235; M ii.99; A iii.146, 436; iv.370 sq.; PvA 67.

-- āsā the desire for life A i.86; -- indriya the faculty of life, vitality Vin iii.73; S v.204; Kvu 8, 10; Miln 56; Dhs 19; Vism 32, 230 (˚upaccheda destruction of life), 447 (def.); DhA ii.356 (˚ŋ upacchindati to destroy life); VvA 72; -- kkhaya the dissolution of life, i. e. death J i.222; PvA 95, 111; -- dāna "the gift of life," saving or sparing life J i.167; ii.154; -- nikanti desire for life A iv.48; -- parikkhārā (pl.) the requisites of life M i.104 sq.; A iii.120; v.211; -- pariyādāna the cessation or consummation of life D i.46 ( = DA i.128); S ii.83; A iv.13; -- pariyosāna the end of life, i. e. death J i.256; PvA 73; -- mada the pride of life, enumd under the 3 madā; viz. ārogya, yobbana, j.: of health, youth, life D iii.220; A i.146; iii.72; -- rūpa (adj.) living (lifelike) J ii.190; -- sankhaya=˚khaya Sn 74; Dh 331; Nd2 262 (= ˚pariyosāna); -- hetu (adv.) on the ground of life, for the sake of life A iv.201, 270 Jīvin
Jīvin
(adj.) (usually -- ˚) living, leading a life (of . . .) S i.42, 61; Sn 88, 181; Dh 164; PvA 27. Cp. dīgha˚, dhamma˚. Juṇhā
Juṇhā
(f.) [Sk. jyotsnā, see also P. dosinā) moonlight, a moonlit night, the bright fortnight of the month (opp. kālapakkha) Vin i.138, 176; J i.165; iv.498 (˚pakkha). Juti
Juti
(f.) [Sk. jyuti & dyuti, to dyotate, see jotati] splendour, brightness, effulgence, light J ii.353; PvA 122, 137, 198. The spelling juti at M i.328 (in combn gati+juti) seems to be faulty for cuti (so as v. l. given on p. 557).

-- dhara (jutin˚) carrying or showing light, shining, resplendent, brilliant S i.121; J ii.353; DhA i.432. Jutika
Jutika
(adj.) ( -- ˚) having light, in mahā˚ of great splendour D ii.272; A i.206; iv.248. Jutimatā
Jutimatā
(f.) [fr. jutimant] splendour, brightness, prominence J 14; v.405 Jutimant
Jutimant
(adj.) [fr. juti] brilliant, bright; usually fig. as prominent in wisdom: "bright." distinguished, a great light (in this sense often as v. l. to jātimant) D ii.256 (ī); S v.24; Dh 89 ( = DhA ii.163 ñāṇajutiyā jotetvā); Sn 508; Pv iv.135 (=PvA 230 ñāṇajutiyā jutimā). Jutimantatā
Jutimantatā
(f.) [fr. jutimant] splendour SnA 453. Juhati
Juhati
[Sk. juhoti, *gheu(d); cp. Gr. xe/w, xu/tra, xu_los; Lat. fundo; Goth. giutan, Ohg. giozan] to pour (into the fire), to sacrifice, offer; to give, dedicate A ii.207 (aggiŋ); Sn 1046 ( = Nd2 263 deti cīvaraŋ, etc.); 428 (aggihuttaŋ jūhato), p. 79 (aggiŋ); Pug 56; fut. juhissati S i.166 (aggiŋ); caus. hāpeti2 pp. huta; see also hava, havi, homa. Juhana
Juhana
(nt.) [fr. juhati] offering, sacrifice D i.12, J ii.43. Jūta
Jūta
(nt.) [Sk. dyūta pp. of div, dīvyati, P. dibbati to play at dice] gambling, playing at dice D i.7 (˚ppamādaṭṭhāna cp. DA i.85)≈; iii.182, 186 (id.); J i.290; iii.198; vi.281; DhA ii.228. ˚ŋ kīḷati to play at d. J i.289; iii.187. -- See also dūta2.

-- gīta a verse sung at playing dice (for luck) J i.289, 293; -- maṇḍala dice board ( = phalaka J i.290) J i.293. -- sālā gambling hall J vi.281. Je
Je
(part.) exclamation: oh! ah! now then! Vin i.232, 292 (gaccha je); M i.126; VvA 187, 207; DhA iv.105. Jeguccha
Jeguccha
(adj.) & jegucchiya (J ii.437) [sec. der. fr. jigucchā] contemptible, loathsome, detestable J iv.305; Vism 250; Th 1, 1056; PvA 78, 192 (asuci+). Cp. pari˚. -- a˚ not despised Sn 852; Th 1, 961. Jegucchitā
Jegucchitā
(f.) [see jigucchita] avoidance, detestation, disgust Vin i.234; M i.30; A iv.182 sq. Jegucchin
Jegucchin
(adj.) one who detests or avoids (usually -- ˚) M i.77; (parama˚), 78 A iv.174, 182 sq., 188 sq., Miln 352 (pāpa˚). Jeṭṭha
Jeṭṭha
(adj.) [compar. -- superl. formation of jyā power. Gr. bi/a, from ji in jināti & jayati "stronger than others," used as superl. (& compar.) to vuḍḍha old -- elder, eldest. The compar. *jeyya is a grammarian's construction, see remarks on kaniṭṭha] better (than others), best, first, supreme; first -- born; elder brother or sister, elder, eldest D ii.15 (aggo jeṭṭho seṭṭho = the first, foremost & best of all); A i.108; ii.87; iii.152; iv.175; J i.138 (˚putta); ii.101 (˚bhātā), 128 (˚yakkhinī); iv.137.

-- apacāyin, in phrase kule -- j. -- apacāyin paying due respect to the clan -- elders D iii.72, 74; S v.468; Vism 415; DhA i.265. Same for ˚apacāyikā (f.) honour to . . . Nd2 294, & ˚apacāyitar D iii.70, 71, 145, 169. -- māsa N. of a month SnA 359. Jeṭṭhaka
Jeṭṭhaka
= jeṭṭha J i.253; ii.101 (˚tāpasa); iii.281 (˚kam māra: head of the silversmith's guild); iv.137, 161; v.282; Pv i.113 (putta=pubbaja PvA 57); DhA iii.237 (˚sīla); iv.111 (id.); PvA 36 (˚bhariyā), 42 (˚pesakāra head of the weaver's guild), 47 (˚vāṇija), 75. Jeti
Jeti
see jayati. Jevanīya
Jevanīya
(nt.) a kind of (missile) weapon A iv.107 = 110 (combd with āvudha & salāka; vv. ll. vedhanika, jeganika, jevanika). Jotaka
Jotaka
(adj.) [from juti] illuminating, making light; explaining J ii.420; Dpvs xiv.50; Miln 343 ( = lamp-lighter). -- f. ˚ikā explanation, commentary, N. of several Commentaries, e. g. the Paramatthajotikā on the Sutta Nipāta (KhA 11); cp. the similar expression dīpanī (Paramatthadīpanī on Th 2; Vv & Pv.). -> Jotika Np. DhA i.385 (Jotiya); Vism 233, 382. -- 286 -- Jotati
Jotati
[Sk. dyotate to shine, *dei̯ā; cp. Gr. de/atai shine, dh_los clear; also Sk. dī in dīpyate; Lat. dies. Dhtp 120 gives jut in meaning "ditti," i. e. light] to shine, be splendid Jˋ i.53; vi.100, 509; PvA 71 (jotantī = obhāsentī). Jotana
Jotana
(nt.) & jotanā (f.) [cp. Sk. dyotana] illumination, explanation J vi.542; Ps ii.112; VvA 17 (˚nā). Joti
Joti
(m. nt.) [Sk. jyotis (cp. dyuti) nt. to dyotate, see jotati] 1. light, splendour, radiance S i.93; A ii.85; Vv 162. -- 2. a star: see cpds. -- 3. fire S i.169; Th 1, 415; J iv.206; sajotibhūta set on fire S ii.260; A iii.407 sq.; J i.232.

-- parāyaṇa (adj.) attaining to light or glory S i.93; A ii.85; D iii.233; Pug 51; -- pāvaka a brilliant fire Vv 162 (expl. VvA 79: candima -- suriya -- nakkhatta tāraka -- rūpānaŋ sādhāraṇa -- nāmaŋ); -- pāsāṇa a burning glass made of a crystal DhA iv.209; -- mālikā a certain torture (setting the body on fire: making a fiery garland) M i.87 = A i.47=ii.122=Nd1 154=Nd2 604=Miln 197; -- rasa a certain jewel (wishing stone) VvA 111, 339; DhA i.198; Miln 118; -- sattha the science of the stars, astronomy: one of the 6 Vedic disciplines: see chaḷanga, cp. jotisā. Jotimant
Jotimant
(adj.) [joti+mant, cp. also P. jutimant] luminous, endowed with light or splendour, bright, excellent (in knowledge) Sn 348 ( = paññājoti -- sampanna SnA 348). Jotisā
Jotisā
(f.) [ = Sk. jyotiṣa (nt.)] astronomy Miln 3. Joteti
Joteti
[Caus. of jotati] (a) trs. to cause to shine, illuminate, make clear, explain A ii.51 = J v.509 (bhāsaye jotaye dhammaŋ; Gloss J v.510 katheyya for joteyya=jotaye) It 108; J ii.208; PvA 18. -- (b) intrs. to shine DhA ii.163 (ñāṇajutiyā jotetvā); pp. jotita resplendent PvA 53. -- Jh. Jhatta
Jhatta
[pp. of jhāpeti; cp. ñatta>*jñāpayati] set on fire, consumed, dried up (w. hunger or thirst: parched) combd w. chāta J ii.83; vi.347. Jhatvā
Jhatvā
see jhāpeti. Jhasa
Jhasa
(?) a window or opening in general J ii.334. Jhāna
Jhāna1
(nt.) [from jhāyati,1 BSk. dhyāna. The (popular etym -- ) expln of jhāna is given by Bdhgh at Vism 150 as follows: "ārammaṇ' ûpanijjhānato paccanīka -- jhāpanato vā jhānaŋ," i.e. called jh. from meditation on objects & from burning up anything adverse] literally meditation. But it never means vaguely meditation. It is the technical term for a special religious experience, reached in a certain order of mental states. It was originally divided into four such states. These may be summarized: 1. The mystic, with his mind free from sensuous and worldly ideas, concentrates his thoughts on some special subject (for instance, the impermanence of all things). This he thinks out by attention to the facts, and by reasoning. 2. Then uplifted above attention & reasoning, he experiences joy & ease both of body and mind. 3. Then the bliss passes away, & he becomes suffused with a sense of ease, and 4. he becomes aware of pure lucidity of mind & equanimity of heart. The whole really forms one series of mental states, & the stages might have been fixed at other points in the series. So the Dhamma -- saŋgani makes a second list of five stages, by calling, in the second jhāna, the fading away of observation one stage, & the giving up of sustained thinking another stage (Dhs 167 -- 175). And the Vibhaŋga calls the first jhāna the pañcaŋgika -- jhāna because it, by itself, can be divided into five parts (Vbh 267). The state of mind left after the experience of the four jhānas is described as follows at D i.76: "with his heart thus serene, made pure, translucent, cultured, void of evil, supple, ready to act, firm and imperturbable." It will be seen that there is no suggestion of trance, but rather of an enhanced vitality. In the descriptions of the crises in the religious experiences of Christian saints and mystics, expressions similar to those used in the jhānas are frequent (see F. Heiler Die Buddhistische Versenkung, 1918). Laymen could pass through the four jhānas (S iv.301). The jhānas are only a means, not the end. To imagine that experiencing them was equivalent to Arahantship (and was therefore the end aimed at) is condemned (D i.37 ff.) as a deadly heresy. In late Pali we find the phrase arūpajjhānā. This is merely a new name for the last four of the eight Vimokkhā, which culminate in trance. It was because they made this the aim of their teaching that Gotama rejected the doctrines of his two teachers. Āḷāra -- Kāḷāma & Uddaka -- Rāmaputta (M i.164 f.). -- The jhānas are discussed in extenso & in various combinations as regards theory & practice at: D i.34 sq.; 73 sq.; S ii. 210 sq.; iv.217 sq., 263 sq.; v.213 sq.; M i.276 sq., 350 sq., 454 sq.; A i.53, 163; ii.126; iii.394 sq.; iv.409 sq.; v.157 sq.; Vin iii.4; Nd2 on Sn 1119 & s.v.; Ps i.97 sq.; ii.169 sq.; Vbh 257 sq.; 263 sq.; 279 sq.; Vism 88, 415. -- They are frequently mentioned either as a set, or singly, when often the set is implied (as in the case of the 4th jh.). Mentioned as jh. 1 -- 4 e. g. at Vin i.104; ii.161 (foll. by sotāpanna, etc.); D ii.156, 186; iii.78, 131, 222; S ii.278 (nikāmalābhin); A ii.36 (id.); iii.354; S iv.299; v.307 sq.; M i.21, 41, 159, 203, 247, 398, 521; ii.15, 37; Sn 69, 156, 985; Dh 372; J i.139; VvA 38; PvA 163. -- Separately: the 1st: A iv.422; v.135; M i.246, 294; Miln 289; 1st -- 3rd: A iii.323; M i.181; 1st & 2nd: M ii.28; 4th: A ii.41; iii.325; v.31; D iii.270; VvA 4. -- See also Mrs. Rh. D. Buddh. Psych. (Quest Series) p. 107 sq.; Dhs. trsl. p. 52 sq.; Index to Saŋyutta N. for more refs.; also Kasiṇa.

-- anuyutta applying oneself to meditation Sn 972; -- anga a constituent of meditation (with ref. to the 4 jhānas) Vism 190. -- kīḷā sporting in the exercise of meditation J iii.45. -- pasuta id. (+dhīra) Sn 709; Dh 181 (cp. DhA iii.226); -- rata fond of meditation S i.53, 122; iv.117; It 40; Sn 212, 503, 1009; Vv 5015; VvA 38; -- vimokkha emancipation reached through jhāna A iii.417; v.34; -- sahagata accompanied by jh. (of paññābala) A i.42. Jhāna
Jhāna2
(nt.) [from jhāyati2] conflagration, fire D iii.94; J i.347. Jhānika
Jhānika
(adj.) [fr. jhāna1] belonging to the (4) medita- tions Vism 111. Jhāpaka
Jhāpaka
(adj.) one who sets fire to (cp. jhāpeti), an in- cendiary J iii.71. Jhāpana
Jhāpana
(nt.) setting fire to, consumption by fire, in sarīra˚ -- kicca cremation VvA 76. Jhāpita
Jhāpita
[pp. jhāpeti] set on fire Miln 47; Vism 76 (˚kāla time of cremation). Jhāpeti
Jhāpeti
[Caus. of jhāyati2] 1. to set fire to, to burn, to cook Vin iv.265; J i.255, 294; DhA ii.66; PvA 62. -- 2. to destroy, to bring to ruin, to kill (see Kern, Toev., p. 37 sq.) J iii.441 ( = ḍahati pīḷeti); VvA 38 (=jhāyati1, connected w. jhāna: to destroy by means of jhāna); inf. jhāpetuŋ J vi.300 (+ghātetuŋ hantuŋ); ger. jhatvā ref. S i.161 (reads chetvā)=Nett 145 (reads jhitvā, with v. l. chetvā). S i.19 (reads chetvā, vv. ll. ghatvā & jhatvā)=J iv.67 (T. jhatvā, v. l. chetvā; expld by kilametvā); S i.41 (v. l. for T. chetvā, Bdhgh says "jhatvā ti vadhitvā"); J ii.262 (+hantvā vadhitvā; expld by kilametvā); vi.299 (+vadhitvā); also jhatvāna J iv.57 (=hantvā). -- pp. jhatta & jhāpita. -- 287 -- Jhāma
Jhāma
(adj. -- n.) [jhāyati2] burning, on fire, conflagration, in ˚khetta charcoal -- burner's field J i.238; ii.92; ˚angāra a burning cinder PvA 90. By itself: J i.405; DhA ii.67. Jhāmaka
Jhāmaka
N. of a plant J vi.537; also in ˚bhatta (?) J ii.288. Jhāyaka
Jhāyaka
(adj.) one who makes a fire D iii.94. Jhāyati
Jhāyati1
[Sk. dhyāyati, dhī; with dhīra, dhīḥ from didheti shine, perceive; cp. Goth. filu -- deisei cunning, & in meaning cinteti>citta1] to meditate, contemplate, think upon, brood over (c. acc.): search for, hunt after D ii.237 (jhānaŋ); S i.25, 57; A v.323 sq. (+pa,˚ ni,˚ ava˚); Sn 165, 221, 425, 709, 818 ( = Nd1 149 pa˚, ni˚, ava˚); Dh 27, 371, 395; J i.67, 410; Vv 5012; Pv iv.166; Miln 66; SnA 320 (aor. jhāyiŋsu thought of). -- pp. jhāyita. Jhāyati
Jhāyati2
[Sk. kṣāyati to burn, kṣāy & kṣī, cp. khara & chārikā] to burn, to be on fire: fig. to be consumed, to waste away, to dry up D i.50 ( = jāleti DA i.151); iii.94 (to make a fire); J i.61, 62; Pv i.1110 (jhāyare v. l. BB. for ghāyire); Miln 47; PvA 33 (=pariḍayhati); -- aor. jhāyi DhA ii.240 sq. -- (fig.) Dh 155; J vi.189. -- Caus. jhāpeti. -- Cp. khīyati2. Jhāyana
Jhāyana1
(nt.) [der. fr. jhāyati1] meditating, in ˚sīla the practice of meditation (cp. Sk. dhyānayoga) VvA 38. Jhāyana
Jhāyana2
(nt.) [fr. jhāyati2] cremation, burning Pug A 187. Jhāyin
Jhāyin
(adj.) [see jhāyati1 & jhāna] pondering over (c. acc.) intent on: meditative, self -- concentrated, engaged in jhāna -- practice Vin ii.75; S i.46 = 52; ii.284; M i.334; A i.24; iii.355; iv.426; v.156, 325 sq.; Sn 85 (magga˚), 638, 719, 1009, 1105; It 71, 74, 112; J iv.7; Dh 23, 110, 387 (reminding of jhāyati2, cp. DhA iv.144); Nd2 264; Vv 58; Pv iv.132; Vbh 342. Nd1 226= Nd2 3422=Vism 26 (āpādaka˚). Jhitvā
Jhitvā
is reading at Nett 145 for jhatvā (see jhāpeti). -- Ñ. Ñatta
Ñatta
(nt.) [nomen agentis from jānāti] the intellectual faculty, intelligence Dh 72 ( = DhA ii.73: jānanasabhāva). Ñatti
Ñatti
(f.) [Sk. jñapti, from jñāpayati, caus of jñā] announce- ment, declaration, esp. as t. t. a motion or resolution put at a kammavācā (proceedings at a meeting of the chapter. The usual formula is "esā ñatti; suṇātu me bhante sangho": Vin i.340; iii.150, 173, 228; -- ˚ŋ ṭhapeti to propose a resolution Vin iv.152. -- Vin v.142, 217 (na c' âpi ñatti na ca pana kammavācā). This resolution is also called a ñattikamma: Vin ii.89; iv.152; v.116; A i.99. Two kinds are distinguished, viz. that at which the voting follows directly upon the motion, i. e. a ñatti -- dutiya -- kamma, & that at which the motion is put 3 times, & is then followed (as 4th item) by the decision, i. e. a ñ -- catuttha -- kamma. Both kinds are discussed at Vin i.56, 317 sq.; ii.89; iii.156; iv.152; & passim. Cp. Divy 356: jñapticaturtha. Cp. āṇatti, viññatti. Ñatvā
Ñatvā
etc.: see jānāti. Ñāṇa
Ñāṇa
(nt.) [from jānāti. See also jānana. *genē, as in Gr. gnw_ -- sis (cp. gnostic), gnw/mh; Lat. (co)gnitio; Goth. kunpi; Ogh. kunst; E. knowledge] knowledge, intelligence, insight, conviction, recognition, opp. añāṇa & avijjā, lack of k. or ignorance. -- 1. Ñāṇa in the theory of cognition: it occurs in intensive couple -- compounds with terms of sight as cakkhu (eye) & dassana (sight, view), e. g. in cakkhu -- karaṇa ñāṇa -- karaṇa "opening our eyes & thus producing knowledge" i. e. giving us the eye of knowledge (a mental eye) (see cakkhu, jānāti passati, & cpd. ˚karaṇa): Bhagavā jānaŋ jānāti passaŋ passati cakkhu -- bhūto ñāṇa -- bhūto ( = he is one perfected in knowledge) M i.111=Nd2 2353h; natthi hetu natthi paccayo ñāṇāya dassanāya ahetu apaccayo ñāṇaŋ dassanaŋ hoti "through seeing & knowing," i. e. on grounds of definite knowledge arises the sure conviction that where there is no cause there is no consequence S v.126. Cp. also the relation of diṭṭhi to ñāṇa. This implies that all things visible are knowable as well as that all our knowledge is based on empirical grounds; yāvatakaŋ ñeyyaŋ tāvatakaŋ ñāṇaŋ Nd2 2353m; yaŋ ñāṇaŋ taŋ dassanaŋ, yaŋ dassanaŋ taŋ ñāṇaŋ Vin iii.91; ñāṇa+dassana (i. e. full vision) as one of the characteristics of Arahantship: see arahant ii.D. Cp. BSk. jñānadarśana, e. g. AvŚ i.210. -- 2. Scope and character of ñāṇa: ñ. as faculty of understanding is included in paññā (cp. wisdom=perfected knowledge). The latter signifies the spiritual wisdom which embraces the fundamental truths of morality & conviction (such as aniccaŋ anattā dukkhaŋ: Miln 42); whereas ñ. is relative to common experience (see Nd2 2353 under cakkhumā, & on rel. of p. & ñ. Ps i.59 sq.; 118 sq.; ii.189 sq.). -- Perception (saññā) is necessary to the forming of ñāṇa, it precedes it (D i.185); as sure knowledge ñ. is preferable to saddhā (S iv.298); at Vin iii.91 the definition of ñ. is given with tisso vijjā (3 kinds of knowledge); they are specified at Nd2 266 as aṭṭhasamāpatti -- ñāṇa (consisting in the 8 attainments, viz. jhāna & its 4 succeeding developments), pañc' abhiññā˚ (the 5 higher knowledges, see paññā & abhi˚), micchā˚ (false k. or heresy). Three degrees of k. are distinguished at DA i.100, viz. sāvaka -- pāramī -- ñāṇa, paccekabuddha˚, sabbaññuta˚ (highest k. of a relig. student, k. of a wise man, & omniscience). Four objects of k. (as objects of truth or sammādiṭṭhi) are enumd as dhamme ñāṇaŋ, anvaye ñ., paricchede ñ., sammuti ñ. at D iii.226, 277; other four as dukkhe ñ. (dukkha -- ) samudaye ñ., nirodhe ñ., magge ñ. (i. e. the knowledge of the paṭicca -- samuppāda) at D iii.227; Ps i.118; Vbh 235 (= sammādiṭṭhi). Right knowledge (or truth) is contrasted with false k. (micchā -- ñāṇa=micchādiṭṭhi): S v.384; M ii.29; A ii.222; v.327; Vbh 392. -> 3. Ñāṇa in application: (a) Vin i.35; D ii.155 (opp. pasāda); S i.129 (cittamhi susamāhite ñāṇamhi vuttamānamhi); ii.60 (jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇan ti ñ.: see ñ -- vatthu); A i.219 (on precedence of either samādhi or ñ.); Sn 378, 789, 987 (muddhani ñāṇaŋ tassa na vijjati), 1078 (diṭṭhi, suti, ñ.: doctrine, revelation, personal knowledge, i. e. intelligence; differently expl. at Nd2 266), 1113; Pv iii.51 (Sugatassa ñ. is asādhāraṇaŋ) Ps i.194 sq.; ii.244; Vbh 306 sq. (ñ -- vibhanga), 328 sq. (kammassakataŋ ñ.); Nett 15 sq.; 161 (+ñeyya), 191 (id.). -- (b) ñāṇaŋ hoti or uppajjati knowledge comes to (him) i. e. to reason, to arrive at a conclusion (with iti=that . . .) S ii.124=iii.28 (uppajjati); D iii.278 (id.); A ii.211≈; iv.75; v.195; S iii.154. See also arahant ii.D. -- (c) Var. attributes of ñ.: anuttariya A v.37; aparapaccayā (k. of the non -- effect of causation through lack of cause) S ii.17, 78; iii.135; v.179, 422 sq. (= sammādiṭṭhi), same as ahetu -- ñāṇa S v.126; asādhāraṇa (incomparable, uncommon k.) A iii.441; PvA 197; akuppa D iii.273; ariya A iii.451; pariyodāta S i.198; bhiyyosomatta S iii.112; yathā bhūtaŋ (proper, definite, right k.) (concerning kāya, etc.) S v.144; A iii.420; v.37. -- (d) knowledge of, about or concerning, consisting in or belonging to, is expressed either by loc. or -- ˚ (equal to subj. or obj. gen.). -- (a) with loc.: anuppāde ñ. D iii.214, 274; anvaye D iii.226, 277; kāye D iii.274; khaye D iii.214, 220 (āsavānaŋ; cp. M i.23, 183, 348; ii.38), 275; S ii.30; Nett 15; cutûpapāte D iii.111, 220; dukkhe (etc.) D iiii.227; S ii.4; v.8, 430; dhamme D iii.226; S ii.58; nibbāne S ii.124 (cp. iv.86). -- (b) as -- ˚: anāvaraṇa˚ DA i.100; ariya S i.228; A iii.451; khanti Ps i.106; jātissara J i.167; cutûpapāta M i.22, 183, 347; ii.38, etc.; ceto -- pariya D iii.100, & ˚pariyāya S v.160; dibbacakkhu Ps i.114; dhammaṭṭhiti S ii.60, 124; Ps i.50; nibbidā Ps i.195; pubbe -- nivāsânusati M i.22, 248, 347; ii.38, etc.; Buddha˚ Nd2 2353; Ps i.133; ii.31, 195; DA i.100; sabbaññuta Ps i.131 sq.; DA i.99 sq.; PvA 197; sekha S ii.43, 58, 80, & asekha S iii.83. -- (e) aññāṇa wrong k., false view, ignorance, untruth S i.181; ii.92; iii.258 sq.; v.126; A ii.11; Sn 347, 839; Ps i.80; Pug 21; Dhs 390, 1061; see avijjā & micchādiṭṭhi.

-- indriya the faculty of cognition or understanding Dhs 157; -- ûpapanna endowed with k. Sn 1077 ( = Nd2 266b ˚upeta); -- karaṇa (adj.) giving (right) understanding, enlightening, in combn w. cakkhukaraṇa (giving (in) -- sight, cp. "your eyes shall be opened and ye shall be knowing good and evil" Gen. 35): kusalavitakkā anandha -- karaṇā cakkhu˚ ñāṇa˚ It 82; f. -- ī (of majjhimā -- paṭipadā) S iv.331; -- cakkhu the eye of k. PvA 166; -- jāla the net of k., in phrase ñāṇajālassa anto paviṭṭha coming within the net, i. e. into the range of one's intelligence or mental eye (clear sight) DhA i.26; ii.37, 58, 96; iii.171, 193; iv.61; VvA 63; -- dassana "knowing and seeing," "clear sight," i. e. perfect knowledge; having a vision of truth, i. e. recognition of truth, philosophy, (right) theory of life, all -- comprising knowledge. Defined as tisso vijjā (see above 2) at Vin iv.26; fully discussed at DA i.220, cp. also def. at Ps ii.244. -- Vin ii.178. (parisuddha˚;+ājīva, dhammadesanā, veyyākaraṇa); iii.90 sq.; v.164, 197; D i.76≈(following after the jhānas as the first step of paññā, see paññā -- sampadā); iii.134, 222 (˚paṭilābha), 288 (˚visuddhi); M i.195 sq.; 202 sq., 482; ii.9, 31; Nett 17, 18, 28; see also vimutti˚; -- dassin one who possesses perfect k. Sn 478; -- patha the path of k. Sn 868; -- phusanā experience, gaining of k. DhA i.230; -- bandhu an associate or friend of k. Sn 911; -- bhūta in comb" w. cakkhubhūta, having become seeing & knowing, i. e. being wise S ii.255; iv.94; A v.226 sq.; -- vatthūni (pl.) the objects or items of (right) knowledge which means k. of the paṭiccasamuppāda or causal connection of phenomena. As 44 (i. e. 4 X 11, all constituents except avijjā, in analogy to the 4 parts of the ariyasaccāni) S ii.56 sq., as 77 (7 X 11) S ii.59 sq.; discussed in extenso at Vbh 306 -- 344 (called ñāṇavatthu); -- vāda talk about (the attainment of supreme) knowledge D iii.13 sq.; A v.42 sq.; -- vippayutta disconnected with k. Dhs 147, 157, 270; -- vimokkha emancipation through k. Ps ii.36, 42; -- visesa distinction of k., superior k. PvA 196; -- sampayutta associated with k. Dhs 1, 147, 157, etc.; Vbh 169 sq., 184, 285 sq., 414 sq. -- 288 -- Ñāṇika
Ñāṇika
(adj.) in pañca˚ having five truths (of samādhi) D iii.278. Ñāṇin
Ñāṇin
(adj.) knowing, one who is possessed of (right) knowledge S ii.169; A ii.89 (sammā˚); iv.340. -- aññāṇin not knowing, unaware VvA 76. Ñāta
Ñāta
[pp. of jānāti = Gr. gnwto/s, Lat. (g)notus; ajñāta (P. aññāta) = a)/gnwtos= ignotus] known, well -- known; experienced, brought to knowledge, realized. In Nd2 s. v. constantly expl. by tulita tirita vibhūta vibhāvita which series is also used as expln. of diṭṭha & vidita A v.195; J i.266; Sn 343 (+yasassin); Miln 21 (id.). -- aññāta not known, unknown Vin i.209; M i.430; S ii.281; DhA i.208. Ñātaka
Ñātaka
[for *ñātika from ñāti] a relation, relative, kins- man Vin ii.194; M ii.67; Dh 43; Sn 263 ( = KhA 140: ñāyante amhākaŋ ime ti ñātakā), 296, 579; Pv ii.14 (Minayeff, but Hardy ˚ika); PvA 19, 21, 31, 62, 69; DA i.90. Ñāti
Ñāti
[see janati; cp. Sk. jñāti, Gr. gnwto/s, Lat. cognatus, Goth. knops] a relation, relative ( = mātito pitito ca sambandhā PvA 25;=bandhū PvA 86; specialized as ˚sālohitā, see below). Pl. ñātayo (Pv i.43; KhA 209, 214) and ñātī (M ii.73; KhA 210, cp. 213; acc. also ñātī Pv i.67); Sn 141; Dh 139, 204, 288; J ii.353; Pv i.53, 122; ii.313, 67. -- Discussed in detail with regard to its being one of the 10 paḷibodhā at Vism 94.

-- kathā (boastful) talk about relatives D i.7≈ (cp. DA i.90); -- gata coming into (the ties of) relationship J vi.307 (˚gataka ib. 308); -- ghara the paternal home J i.52; -- dhamma the duties of relatives Pv i.512; ( = ñātīhi ñātīnaŋ kattabba -- karaṇaŋ PvA 30); -- parivatta the circle of relations D i.61; M i.267; Pug 57≈; -- peta a deceased relation Pv i.54; -- majjhagata (adj.) in the midst of one's relations Pug 29; -- mittā (pl.) friends & relatives Dh 219; J iii.396; Pv i.126; -- vyasana misfortune of relatives (opp. ˚sampada) D iii.235; enum as one of the general misfortunes under dukkha (see Nd2 304F); -- sangha the congregation of kinsmen, the clan A i.152; Sn 589; -- sālohitạ a relation by blood (contrasted with friendship: mittāmaccā Sn p. 104), often with ref. to the deceased: petā ñ -- sālohitā the spirits of deceased blood -- relations M i.33; A v.132, 269; PvA 27, 28; -- sineha the affection of relationship PvA 29; -- hetusampatti a blessing received through the kinsmen PvA 27. Ñāpeti
Ñāpeti
[Caus. of jānāti, cp. also ñatti] to make known, to explain, to announce J ii.133. Cp. jānāpeti & āṇāpeti. Ñāya
Ñāya
[Sk. nyāya = ni+i] 1. method, truth, system, later =logic: ˚gantha book on logic Dāvs iii.41. -- 2. fitness, right manner, propriety, right conduct, often appld to the "right path" (ariyamagga=ariyañāya Vin i.10) D iii.120; S v.19, 141, 167 sq., 185; A ii.95; iv.426; v.194; Dh i.249; ariya ñ. S ii.68; v.387;= the causal law S v.388;=kalyāṇa -- kusala -- dhammatā A ii.36; used in apposition with dhamma and kusala D ii.151; M ii.181, 197; is replaced herein by sacca S i.240;=Nibbāna at Vism 219, 524; ñ. -- paṭipanna walking in the right path S v.343; A ii.56; iii.212, 286; v.183. Ñū
--
Ñū ( -- ññū) (adj. -- suffix) [Sk. -- jña, from jānāti, *gn: cp. P. gū>Sk. ga] knowing, recognizing, acknowledging, in ughaṭita˚, kata˚, kāla˚, khaṇa˚, matta˚, ratta˚, vara˚, vipacita˚, veda˚, sabba˚, etc. (q. v.) -- fem. abstr. ˚ñutā in same combinations. -- Ṭ. Ṭan
Ṭan
(?) (adv.) part of sound J i.287 (ṭan ti saddo). -- 289 -- -- Ṭh. ˚Ṭha
˚Ṭha
(˚ṭṭha) (adj. -- suffix) [from tiṭṭhati] standing, as opposed to either lying down or moving; located, being based on, founded on (e. g. appa˚ based on little D i.143): see kappa˚ (lasting a k.), kūṭa˚ (immovable), gaha˚ (founding a house, householder), dhamma˚, nava˚, vehāsa˚ ( = vihan -- ga). -- (n.) a stand i. e. a place for: goṭṭha a stable. Ṭhapana
Ṭhapana
(nt.) 1. setting up, placing, founding; establish- ment, arrangement, position Vin v.114; J i.99 (aggha˚ fixing prices); Miln 352 (pāda˚); DA i.294; ( = vidhārite); PvA 5 (kulavaŋsa˚). -- 2. letting alone, omission, suspension, in pāṭimokkha˚ Vin ii.241. Ṭhapanā
Ṭhapanā
(f.) 1. arrangement DA i.294. -- 2. application of mind, attention Pug 18, Vism 278 ( = appanā). Ṭhapita
Ṭhapita
[pp. of ṭhapeti] 1. placed, put down; set up, arranged, often simply pleonastic for finite verb ( = being): saŋharitvā ṭh. being folded up J i.265 (cp. similar use of gahetvā c. ger.): mukkhe ṭh. J vi.366; ˚sankāra (dustheap) PvA 82; pariccajane ṭh. appointed for the distribution of gifts PvA 124. -- 2. suspended, left over, set aside Vin ii.242 (pāṭimokkha). Ṭhapeti
Ṭhapeti
[Caus. of tiṭṭhati] to place, set up, fix, arrange, establish; appoint to (c. loc.); to place aside, save, put by, leave out Vin ii.32 (pavāraṇaŋ), 191 (ucce & nīce ṭhāne to place high or low), 276 (pavāraṇaŋ); v.193 (uposathaŋ), 196 (give advice); D i.120 (leaving out, discarding); Dh 40 (cittaŋ ṭh. make firm) J i.62, 138, 223, 293 (except); ii.132 (puttaṭṭhāne ṭh. as daughter); J ii.159; vi.365 (putting by); VvA 63 (kasiŋ ṭhapetvā except ploughing); PvA 4, 20 (varaŋ ṭhapetvā denying a wish), 39, 114 (setting up); Miln 13 (ṭhapetvā setting aside, leaving till later). -- inf. ṭhapetuŋ Vin ii.194; PvA 73 (saŋharitvā ṭh. to fold up: cp. ṭhapita); grd. ṭhapetabba J ii.352 (rājaṭṭhāne); PvA 97; & ṭhapaniya (in pañha ṭh. a question to be left standing over, i. e. not to be asked) D iii.229. -- ger. ṭhapetvā (leaving out, setting aside, excepting) also used as prep. c. acc. (before or after the noun): with the omission of, besides, except D i.105 (ṭh. dve); J i.179 (maŋ but for me), 294 (tumhe ṭh.); ii.154 (ekaŋ vaddhaŋ ṭh.); iv.142 (ṭh. maŋ); VvA 100 (ṭh. ekaŋ itthiŋ); PvA 93 (ṭh. maŋ). Cp. BSk. sthāpayitvā "except" AvŚ ii.111. -- Caus. ṭhapāpeti to cause to be set up; to have erected, to put up J i.266; DhA ii.191. Ṭhāna
Ṭhāna
(ṭṭhāna) (nt.) [Vedic sthāna, sthā, see tiṭṭhati; cp. Sk. sthāman Gr. staqmi/s, Lat. stamen] -- I. Connotation. As one of the 4 iriyāpathā (behaviours) 1. contrasted (a) as standing position with sitting or reclining; (b) as rest with motion; 2. by itself without particular characterization as location.

II. Meanings -- (1) Literal: place, region, locality, abode, part ( -- ˚ of, or belonging to) -- (a) cattāri ṭhānāni dassanīyāni four places (in the career of Buddha) to be visited D ii.140 = A ii.120; vāse ṭhāne gamane Sn 40 (expl. by SnA 85 as mahā -- upaṭṭhāna -- sankhāte ṭhāne, but may be referred to I. 1 (b)); ṭhānā cāveti to remove from one's place Sn 442; J iv.138; PvA 55 (spot of the body). -- (b) kumbha˚ (the "locality of the pitcher," i. e. the well) q. v.; arañña˚ (part of the forest) J i.253; PvA 32; nivāsana˚ (abode) PvA 76; phāsuka˚ J ii.103; PvA 13; vasana˚ J i.150, 278; VvA 66; virūhana˚ (place for the growing of . . .) PvA 7; vihāra (place of his sojourn) PvA 22; saka˚ (his own abode) J ii.129; PvA 66. -- (c) In this meaning it approaches the metaphorical sense of "condition, state" (see 2 & cp. gati) in: dibbāni ṭhānāni heavenly regions S i.21; tidivaŋ S i.96; saggaŋ ṭh. a happy condition Pv i.13; pitu gata˚ the place where my father went (after death) PvA 38; Yamassa ṭh.=pettivasaya PvA 59. -- (d) In its pregnant sense in combn with accuta & acala it represents the connotation I. 1 (b), i. e. perdurance, constancy, i. e. Nibbāna Vv 514; Dh 225. -- 2. Applied meanings-> (a) state, condition; also -- ˚ (in sg.) as collective -- abstract suffix in the sense of being, behaviour (corresponding to E. ending hood, ion, or ing), where it resembles abṡtr. formations in ˚tā & ˚ttaŋ (Sk. tā & tvaŋ), as lahuṭṭhāna=lahutā & collect. formations in ˚ti (Sk. daśati ten -- hood; devatāti godhead, sarvatāti=P. sabbattaŋ comprehensiveness; cp. also Lat. civitātem, juventūtem). -- S i.129 (condition) ii.27 (asabha˚)=M i.69; S iii.57 (atasitāyaŋ fearless state): A ii.118 sq. (four conditions); Ḍh 137 (dasannaŋ aññataraŋ th.˚ nigacchati he undergoes one of the foll. ten conditions, i. e. items of affliction, expld at DhA iii.70 with kāraṇa "labours"), 309 (states=dukkhakāraṇāni DhA iii.482, conditions of suffering or ordeals); hattha -- pasāraṇa-> -- ṭṭhāna condition of outstretched hands DhA i.298; loc. ṭhāne ( -- ˚) when required, at the occasion of . . . DhA i.89 (hasitabba˚, saŋvega˚, dātuŋ yutta˚); pubbe nibbatta -- ṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya "since the state (or the time) of his former birth" PvA 100. -- vibhūsanaṭṭhāna ornamentation, decoration, things for adornment D i.5; Sn 59 (DA i.77 superficially: ṭhānaŋ vuccati kāraṇaŋ; SnA 112 simply vibhūsā eva v -- ṭṭhānaŋ); jūta -- pamāda˚ (gambling & intoxication) D i.6≈ (cp. expl. at KhA 26); gata˚ & āgata˚ (her) going & coming J iii.188; -- pariccāga˚ distribution of gifts PvA 124. -- (b) (part=) attribute, quality, degree: aggasāvaka˚ (degrees of discipleship) VvA 2; esp. in set of 10 attributes, viz. rūpa (etc. 1 -- 5), āyu, vaṇṇa, sukha, yasa, ādhipateyya D iii.146; S iv.275; Pv ii.958, also collectively [see (a)] as dasaṭṭhānaŋ S i.193; out of these are mentioned as 4 attributes āyu, vaṇṇa, sukha, bala at Vv 327; other ten at A v.129 (pāsaŋsāni). -> (c) (counter -- part=) object ( -- ˚ for), thing; item, point; pl. grounds, ways, respects. With a numeral often=a (five)fold collection of . . . S iv.249 sq. (5 objects or things, cp. Ger. fünferlei); A iii.54 sq. (id.), 60 sq., 71 sq.; etehi tīhi ṭhānehi on these 3 grounds Dh 224; manussā tīhi ṭhānehi bahuŋ puññaŋ pasavanti: kāyena vācāya manasā (in 3 ways, qualities or properties) A 151 sq.; cp. ii.119 sq. (=saŋvutaŋ tīhi ṭhānehi Dh 391); catuhi ṭhānehi in Com. equals catuhi ākārehi or kāraṇehi pāmujjakaraṇaŋ ṭh. (object) Sn 256; ekaccesu ṭhānesu sameti ekaccesu na sameti "I agree in certain points, but not in others" D i.162; kankhaniya˚ doubtful point S iv.350, 399; -- n' atthi aññaŋ ṭhānaŋ no other means, nothing else DhA ii.90; agamanīya˚ something not to be done, not allowed VvA 72; cp. also kamma˚. -- (d) (standpoint=) ground for (assumption) reason, supposition, principle, esp. a sound conclusion, logic, reasonableness (opp. a˚ see 4): garayhaŋ th. āgacchati "he advocates a faulty principle" D i.161; catuhi ṭh. paññāpeti (four arguments) S iii.116; iv.380; ṭhāna -- kusala accomplished in sound reasoning S iii.61 sq. (satta˚); A ii.170 sq. Also with aṭṭhāna -- kusala: see below 4.

III. Adverbial use of some cases acc. ṭhānaŋ: ettakaŋ ṭh. even a little bit DhA i.389. -- abl. ṭhānaso: in combn w. hetuso with reason & cause, causally conditioned [see 2 (d)] S v.304; A iii.417; v.33; Nett 94 (ñāṇa); abs. without moving (see I. 1 (b) & cp. Lat. statim) i. e. without an interval or a cause (of change), at once, immediately, spontaneously, impromptu (cp. cpd.˚ uppatti) S i.193; v.50, 321, 381; Pv i.44 ( = khaṇaŋ yeva PvA 19). -- loc. ṭhāne instead= like, as dhītu ṭhāne ṭhapesi he treats her like a daughter VvA 209; puttaṭṭhāne as a son J ii.132.

IV. Contrasted with negation of term (ṭhāna & aṭṭhāna). The meanings in this category are restricted to those mentioned above under 1 [esp. 1 (c)] & 2 (d), viz. the relations of place>not place (or wrong place, also as proper time & wrong time), i. e. somewhere>nowhere, and of possibility>impossibility (truth> falsehood). (a) ṭhānaŋ upagacchati (pathaviyā) to find a (resting) place on the ground, to stay on the ground (by means of the law of attraction and gravitation) Miln 255; opp. na ṭhānaŋ upa˚ to find no place to rest, to go into nothingness Miln 180, 237, 270. -- (b) ṭhānaŋ vijjati there is a reason, it is logically sound, it is possible D i.163, 175; M iii.64; Ps ii.236 sq.; cp. M Vastu ii.448; opp. na etaŋ ṭhānaŋ vijjati it is not possible, feasible, plausible, logically correct Vin ii.284; D i.104, 239; M ii.10; iii.64; Miln 237; Nett 92 sq. -- (c) aṭṭhānaŋ an impossibility Sn 54 (aṭṭhāna, with elision of ŋ); aṭṭhāne at the wrong time J i.256; ṭhāna is that one of the gatis which is accessible to human influence, as regards gifts of relief or sacrifice (this is the pettivisaya), whilst aṭṭhāna applied to the other 4 gatis (see gati) PvA 27 sq. In cpd. ṭhānâṭhāna -- gata it means referring or leading to good & bad places (gatis): of sabbe khayadhammā (i. e. keci saggûpagā keci apāyûpagā) Nett 94. In combn apucchi nipuṇe pañhe ṭhānâṭhānagate (Miln 1) it may mean either questions concerning possibilities & impossibilities or truths & falsehoods, or questions referring to happy & unhappy states (of existence); ṭhānâṭhāna -- ñāṇa is "knowledge of correct & faulty conclusions" Nett 94, cp. Kvu 231 sq.; the same combn occurs with ˚kusala ˚kusalatā "accomplished or skilled (& skill) in understanding correct or faulty conclusions" D iii.212 (one of the ten powers of the Buddha); M iii.64; Dhs 1337, 1338 (trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. on p. 348 Dhs. trsl. as "skill in affirming or negating causal conjuncture"). In the same sense: ṭhānaŋ ṭhānato pajānāti (& aṭṭhānaŋ aṭṭhānato p.) to draw a logical inference from that which is a proper ground for inference (i. e. which is logical) S v.304; M i.69 sq. = A iii.417; v.33.

-- uppatti arising instantaneously (see ṭhānaso, above III.) VvA 37; J vi.308 (˚kāraṇavindana finding a means right on the spot); -- ka (adj.) on the spot, momentary, spontaneous J vi.304. -- 290 -- Ṭhānīya
Ṭhānīya
(adj.) [grd. of tiṭṭhati] standing, having a certain position, founded on or caused by ( -- ˚) Vin ii.194 ( -- nīca˚); A i.264 (chanda -- rāga -- dhamma˚). See also under tiṭṭhati. Ṭhāyika
Ṭhāyika
(adj.) at Miln 201 "one who gains his living or subsists on" (instr.) is doubtful reading. Ṭhāyin
Ṭhāyin
(adj. -- n.) [from tiṭṭhati] standing, being in, being in a state of ( -- ˚), staying with, dependent on (with gen.): pariyuṭṭhaṭṭhāyin "being in a state of one to whom it has arisen," i. e. one who has got the idea of . . . or one who imagines S iii.3 sq.; arūpa -- ṭṭhāyin It 62; Yamassa ṭhāyino being under the rule of Yama Pv i.119. Ṭhita
Ṭhita
[pp. of tiṭṭhati = Gr. stato/s, Lat. status, Celt. fossad (firm)] standing, i. e. (see ṭhāna I) either upright (opp. nisinna, etc.), or immovable, or being, behaving in general. In the latter function often (with ger.) pleonastic for finite verb (cp. ṭhapita); -- resting in, abiding in ( -- ˚ or with loc.); of time: lasting, enduring; fig. steadfast, firm, controlled: amissīkatam ev' assa cittaŋ hoti, ṭhitaŋ ānejjappattaŋ A iii.377=iv.404; tassa ṭhito va kāyo hoti thitaŋ cittaŋ (firm, unshaken) S v.74=Nd2 475 B2; -- D i.135 (khema˚); A i.152; Sn 250 (dhamme); It 116 sq. (ṭh. caranto nisinna sayāna); J i.167; 279; iii.53. -- with ger.: nahātvā ṭh. & nivāsetvā ṭh. (after bathing & dressing) J i.265; dārakaŋ gahetvā th. J vi.336. Cp. saṇ˚.

-- atta self -- controlled, composed, steadfast D i.57 (+gatatta yatatta; expl. at DA i.168 by suppatiṭṭhitacitto); S i.48; iii.46; A ii.5; iv.93, 428; Sn 370 (+parinibbuta), 359 (id. expl. at SnA 359 by lokadhammehi akampaneyya -- citta); Pug 62; -- kappin (adj.) (for kappa -- *ṭhitin) standing or waiting a whole kappa Pug 13 (expl. at Pug A 187 by ṭhitakappo assa atthī ti; kappaŋ ṭhapetuŋ samattho ti attho); -- citta (adj.) of controlled heart ( = ˚atta) D ii.157≈; -- dhamma (adj.) everlasting, eternal (of mahāsamudda, the great ocean) Vin ii.237= A iv.198. Ṭhitaka
Ṭhitaka
(adj.) = ṭhita in meaning of standing, standing up, erect Vin ii.165; D ii.17=iii.143; M ii.65; J i.53, 62; VvA 64. Ṭhitatā
Ṭhitatā
(f.) the fact of standing or being founded on ( -- ˚) S ii.25 = A i.286 (dhamma˚+dhamma -- niyāmatā). Ṭhitatta
Ṭhitatta
(nt.) standing, being placed; being appointed to, appointment J i.124. Ṭhiti
Ṭhiti
(f.) [from tiṭṭhati Sk. sthiti, Gr. sta/sis, Lat. statio (cp. stationary), Ohg. stat, Ags. stede] state (as opposed to becoming), stability, steadfastness; duration, continuance, immobility; persistence, keeping up (of: c. gen.); condition of ( -- ˚) relation S ii.11; iii.31; iv.14, 104, 228 sq., A v.96; Vism 32 (kāyassa); in jhāna: S iii.264, 269 sq., saddhammassa (prolongation of) S ii. 225; A i.59; ii.148; iii.177 (always with asammosa & anantaradhāna), cp. M ii.26 sq.; -- dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇa (state or condition of) S ii.124; Ps i.50 sq. -- n' atthi dhuvaŋ ṭhiti: the duration is not for long M ii.64 = Dh 147=Th 1, 769=VvA 77, cp. Th 2, 343 (=ThA 241); Sn 1114 (viññāṇa˚) PvA 198 (position, constellation), 199 (jīvita˚ as remainder of life, cp. ṭhitakappin); Dhs 11≈(cittassa), 19≈(+āyu=subsistence).

-- bhāgiya connected with duration, enduring, lasting, permanent (only appl. to samādhi) D iii.277; A iii.427; Nett 77; cp. samādhissa ṭhitikusala "one who is accomplished in lasting concentration" A iii.311, 427; iv.34. Ṭhiṭika
Ṭhiṭika
(adj.) [Der. fr. ṭhiti] standing, lasting, enduring; existing, living on ( -- ˚), e. g. āhāra˚ dependent on food Kh iii. (see āhāra); nt. adv. ṭhitikaŋ constantly VvA 75. Ṭhīyati
Ṭhīyati
see patiṭṭhīyati. -- 291 -- -- Ḍ. Ḍaŋsa
Ḍaŋsa
[see ḍasati] a yellow fly, gadfly (orig. "the bite") Nd2 268 ( = pingala -- makkhika, same at J iii.263 & SnA 101); usually in combn with other biting or stinging sensations, as ˚siriŋsapa Sn 52, & freq. in cpd. ḍaŋsa -- makasa -- vāt' ātapa -- siriŋsapa -- samphassa M i.10= A ii.117, 143=iii.163; A iii.388; v.15; Vin i.3; Nd2 s. v. (enumd under var. kinds of dukkhā); Vism 31 (here expld as ḍaŋsana -- makkhikā or andha -- makkhikā). Ḍaṭṭha
Ḍaṭṭha
[pp. of daŋśati or dasati to bite] bitten PvA 144. Ḍasati
Ḍasati
(& ḍaŋsati) [cp. Sk. da ati & daŋśati, Gr. da/knw, Ohg. zanga, Ags. tonge, E. tong] to bite (esp. of flies, snakes, scorpions, etc.), pres. ḍasati M i.519; pot. ḍaseyya M i.133; A iii.101 = iv.320 (where ḍaŋs˚) & ḍaŋseyya A iii.306; ppr. ḍasamāna J i.265 (gīvāya); fut. ḍaŋsayissāmi J vi.193 (v. l. ḍass˚); aor. aḍaŋsi Vv 808 (=Sk. adānkṣīt), ḍaŋsi PvA 62 & ḍasi J i.502; DhA ii.258; inf. ḍasituŋ J i.265; ger. ḍasitvā J i.222; ii.102; iii.52, 538; DhA i.358. -- Pp. daṭṭha; cp. also dāṭhā & saṇḍāsa. Ḍahati
Ḍahati
(& dahati) [Sk. dahati, pp. dagdha, cp. dāha, nidāgha (summer heat); Gr. te/fra ashes, Lat. favilla (glowing) cinders, Goth. dags, Ger. tag. E. day = hot time] to burn (trs.) consume, torment M i.365; ii.73; A v.110; J ii.44 (aor. 3 sg. med. adaḍḍha=Sk. adagdha); Dh 31, 71, 140; Miln 45, 112 (cauterize). Pp. daḍḍha -- Pass. ḍayhati S i.188 (kāmarāgena ḍayhāmi cittam me pariḍayhati); ib. (mahārāga: mā ḍayhittho punappunaŋ) M ii.73; S iii.150 (mahāpaṭhavī ḍayhati vinassati na bhavati) esp. in ppr. ḍayhamāna consumed with or by, burning, glowing Dh 371; It 23 (˚ena kāyena & cetasā Pv i.1110, 122; ii.23) (of a corpse being cremated); PvA 63, 152 (vippaṭisārena: consumed by remorse). See also similes J.P.T.S. 1907, 90. Cp. uḍ˚. Ḍāka
Ḍāka
(m. nt.) [Sk. sāka (nt.) on ś>ḍ cp. Sk. sākinī> dākinī] green food, eatable herbs, vegetable Vin i.246 (˚rasa), 248; Th 2, 1; Vv 206 (v. l. sāka); VvA 99 ( = taṇḍuleyyakādi -- sākavyañjana). Ḍāha
Ḍāha
[Sk. dāha, see ḍahati] burning, glow, heat D i.10 (disā˚ sky -- glow = zodiacal light?); M i.244; PvA 62; Miln 325. Sometimes spelt dāha, e. g. A i.178 (aggi˚); Sdhp 201 (id.); -- dava˚ a jungle fire Vin ii.138; J i.461. Ḍeti
Ḍeti
[Sk. *ḍayate = dīyati; ḍayana flying. The Dhtp gives the root as ḍī or ḷī with def. of "ākāsa -- gamana"] to fly; only in simile "seyyathā pakkhī sakuṇo yena yen' eva ḍeti . . ." D i.71=M i.180, 269=A ii.209= Pug 58; J v.417. Cp. dayati & dīyati, also uḍḍeti. -- T. T
--
T -- as composition -- consonant (see Müller pp. 62, 63, on euphonic cons.) especially with agge (after, from), in ajja -- t -- agge, tama -- t -- agge, dahara -- t -- agge A v.300; cp. deva ta -- t -- uttari for tad -- uttari A iii.287, 314, 316. Ta˚
Ta˚
[Vedic tad, etc.; Gr. to/n th/n to/; Lat. is -- te, tālis, etc.; Lith. tás tā; Goth. pata; Ohg. etc. daz; E. that] base of demonstr. pron. for nt., in oblique cases of m. & f., & in demonstr. adv. of place & time (see also sa). -> 1. Cases: nom. sg. nt. tad (older) Vin i.83; Sn 1052; Dh 326; Miln 25 & taŋ (cp. yaŋ, kiŋ) Sn 1037, 1050; J iii.26; acc. m. taŋ J ii.158, f. taŋ J vi.368; gen. tassa, f. tassā (Sn 22, 110; J i.151); instr. tena, f. tāya (J iii. 188); abl. tasmā (J i.167); tamhā Sn 291, 1138; (J iii.26) & tato (usually as adv.) (Sn 390); loc. tasmiŋ (J i.278), tamhi (Dh 117); tahiŋ (adv.) (Pv i.57) & tahaŋ (adv.) (J i.384; VvA 36); pl. nom. m. te (J ii.129), f. tā (J ii.127), nt. tāni (Sn 669, 845); gen. tesaŋ, f. tāsaŋ (Sn 916); instr. tehi, f. tāhi (J ii.128); loc. tesu, f. tāsu (Sn 670). -- In composition (Sandhi) both tad -- & taŋ -- are used with consecutive phonetic changes (assimilation), viz. (a) tad˚: (a) in subst. function: tadagge henceforth D i.93 taduṭṭhāya DhA iii.344; tadūpiya (cp. Trenckner, Notes 77, 78 = tadopya (see discussion under opeti), but cp. Sk. tadrūpa Divy 543 & tatrupāya. It is simply tad -- upa -- ka, the adj.-> positive of upa, of which the compar. -- superlative is upama, meaning like this, i. e. of this or the same kind. Also spelt tadūpikā (f.) (at J ii.160) agreeing with, agreeable, pleasant Miln 9; tadatthaŋ to such purpose SnA 565. -- With assimilation: taccarita; tapparāyaṇa Sn 1114; tappoṇa (=tad -- pra -- ava -- nata) see taccarita; tabbisaya (various) PvA 73; tabbiparīta (different) Vism 290; DhA iii.275; tabbiparītatāya in contrast to that Vism 450. -- (b) as crude form (not nt.) originally only in acc. (nt.) in adj. function like tad -- ahan this day, then felt as euphonic d, esp. in forms where similarly the euphonic t is used (ajja -- t -- agge). Hence ta -- is abstracted as a crude (adverbial) form used like any other root in composition. Thus: tad -- ah -- uposathe on this day's fast -- day=to -- day (or that day) being Sunday D i.47; Sn p. 139 (expld as tam -- ah -- uposathe, uposatha -- divase ti at SnA 502); tadahe on the same day PvA 46; tadahū (id.) J v.215 (=tasmiŋ chaṇa -- divase). tad -- anga for certain, surely, categorical (orig. concerning this cp. kimanga), in tadanga -- nibbuta S iii.43; tadanga -- samatikkama Nd2 203; tadanga -- vikkhambhana -- samuccheda Vism 410; tadanga -- pahāna DhsA 351; SnA 8; tadangena A iv.411. -- (b) tan˚: (a) as subst.: tammaya (equal to this, up to this) Sn 846 (=tapparāyana Nd2 206); A i.150. -- (b) Derived from acc. use (like a b) as adj. is tankhaṇikā (fr. taŋ khaṇaŋ) Vin iii.140 (=muhuttikā). -- (g) a reduced form of taŋ is to be found as ta˚ in the same origin & application as ta -- d -- (under a b) in combn ta -- y -- idaŋ (for taŋidaŋ>taŋ -- idaŋ>ta -- idaŋ>ta -- y -- idaŋ) where y. takes the place of the euphonic consonant. Cp. in application also Gr. tou_to & tau_ta, used adverbially as therefore (orig. just that) Sn 1077; Pv i.33; PvA 2, 16 (=taŋ idaŋ), 76. The same ta˚ is to be seen in tāhaŋ Vv 8315 (=taŋ -- ahaŋ), & not to be confused with tāhaŋ=te ahaŋ (see tvaŋ). -- A similar combn is taŋyathā Miln 1 (this is how, thus, as follows) which is the Sk. form for the usual P. seyyathā (instead of ta -- (y) -- yathā, like ta -- y -- idaŋ); cp. Trenckner, P.M. p. 75. -- A sporadic form for tad is tadaŋ Sn p. 147 (even that, just that; for tathaŋ?). -- II. Application: 1. ta˚ refers or points back to somebody or something just mentioned or under discussion (like Gr. ou(=tos, Lat. hic, Fr. ci in voici, cet homme -- ci, etc.): this, that, just this (or that), even this (or these). In this sense combd with api: te c' âpi (even these) Sn 1058. It is also used to indicate something immediately following the statement of the speaker (cp. Gr. o(/de, E. thus): this now, esp. in adv. use (see below); taŋ kiŋ maññasi D i.60; yam etaŋ pañhaŋ apucchi Ajita taŋ vadāmi te: Sn 1037; taŋ te pavakkhāmi (this now shall I tell you:) Sn 1050; tesaŋ Buddho vyākāsi (to those just mentioned answered B.) Sn 1127; te tositā (and they, pleased . . .) ib. 1128. -- 2. Correlative use: (a) in rel. sentences with ya˚ (preceding ta˚): yaŋ ahaŋ jānāmi taŋ tvaŋ jānāsi "what I know (that) you know" D i.88; yo nerayikānaŋ sattānaŋ āhāro tena so yāpeti "he lives on that food which is (characteristic) of the beings in N.; or: whichever is the food of the N. beings, on this he lives" PvA 27. -- (b) elliptical (with omission of the verb to be) yaŋ taŋ=that which (there is), what (is), whatever, used like an adj.; ye te those who, i. e. all (these), whatever: ye pana te manussā saddhā . . . te evam ahaŋsu . . . "all those people who were full of faith said" Vin ii.195; yena tena upāyena gaṇha "catch him by whatever means (you like)," i. e. by all means J ii.159; yaŋ taŋ kayirā "whatever he may do" Dh 42. -- 3. Distributive and iterative use (cp. Lat. quisquis, etc.): . . . taŋ taŋ this & that, i. e. each one; yaŋ yaŋ passati taŋ taŋ pucchati whomsoever he sees (each one) he asks PvA 38; yaŋ yaŋ manaso piyaŋ taŋ taŋ gahetvā whatever . . . (all) that PvA 77; yo yo yaŋ yaŋ icchati tassa tassa taŋ taŋ adāsi "whatever anybody wished he gave to him" PvA 113. So with adv. of ta˚: tattha tattha here & there (freq.); tahaŋ tahaŋ id. J i.384; VvA 36, 187; tato tato Sn 390. -- (b) the same in disjunctivecomparative sense: taŋ . . . taŋ is this so & is this so (too)=the same as, viz. taŋ jīvaŋ taŋ sarīraŋ is the soul the same as the body (opp. aññaŋ j. a. s.) A v.193, etc. (see jīva). -- 4. Adverbial use of some cases (locala, temporalb, & modalc): acc. taŋ (a) there (to): tad avasari he withdrew there D. ii.126, 156; (b) taŋ enaŋ at once, presently (=tāvad -- eva) Vin i.127 (cp. Ved. enā); (c) therefore (cp. kiŋ wherefore, why), that is why, now, then: S ii.17; M i.487; Sn 1110; Pv i.23 (=tasmā PvA 11 & 103); ii.716; cp. taŋ kissa hetu Nd2 on jhāna. -- gen. tassa (c) therefore A iv.333. -> instr. tena (a) there (direction=there to), always in correl. with yena: where -- there, or in whatever direction, here & there. Freq. in formula denoting approach to a place (often unnecessary to translate); e. g. yena Jīvakassa ambavanaŋ tena pāyāsi: where the Mangogrove of J. was, there he went=he went to the M. of J. D i.49; yena Gotamo ten' upasankama go where G. is D i.88; yena āvasathâgāraŋ ten' upasankami D ii.85 etc.; yena vā tena vā palāyanti they run here & there A ii.33; (c) so then, now then, therefore, thus (often with hi) J i.151, 279; PvA 60; Miln 23; tena hi D ii.2; J i.266; iii.188; Miln 19. -- abl. tasmā (c) out of this reason, therefore Sn 1051, 1104; Nd2 279 (=taŋ kāraṇaŋ); PvA 11, 103; tato (a) from there, thence Pv i.123; (b) then, hereafter PvA 39. -- loc. tahiŋ (a) there (over there>beyond) Pv i.57; (c) =therefore PvA 25; tahaŋ (a) there; usually repeated: see above II. 3 (a). -- See also tattha, tathā, tadā, tādi, etc. -- 292 -- Taka
Taka
a kind of medicinal gum, enumerated with two varieties, viz. takapattī & takapaṇṇī under jatūni bhesajjāni at Vin i.201. Takka
Takka1
[Sk. tarka doubt; science of logic (lit. "turning & twisting") *treik, cp. Lat. tricae, intricare (to "trick," puzzle), & also Sk. tarku bobbin, spindle, Lat. torqueo (torture, turn)] doubt; a doubtful view (often = diṭṭhi, appl. like sammā˚, micchā -- diṭṭhi), hair -- splitting reasoning, sophistry (= itihītihaŋ Nd2 151). Opp. to takka (=micchā -- sankappo Vbh 86, 356) is dhammatakka right thought (:vuccati sammā -- sankappo Nd2 318; cp. Dhs 7, 298), D i.16 (˚pariyāhata); M i.68 (id.); Sn 209 (˚ŋ pahāya na upeti sankhaŋ) 885 (doubt), 886; Dhs 7, 21, 298 (+vitakka, trsl. as "ratiocination" by Mrs. Rh. D.); Vbh 86, 237 (sammā˚) 356; Vism 189. See also vitakka.

-- āgama the way of (right) thought, the discipline of correct reasoning Dāvs v.22; -- âvacara as neg. atakkâvacarâ in phrase dhammā gambhīrā duddasā a˚ nipuṇā (views, etc.) deep, difficult to know, beyond logic (or sophistry: i. e. not accessible to doubt?), profound Vin i.4 = D i.12=S i.136=M i.487. Gogerley trsl. "unattainable by reasoning," Andersen "being beyond the sphere of thought"; -- āsaya room for doubt Sn 972; -- gahaṇa the thicket of doubt or sophistry J i.97; -- vaḍḍhana increasing, furthering doubt or wrong ideas Sn 1084 (see Nd2 269); -- hetu ground for doubt (or reasoning?) A ii.193=Nd2 151. Takka
Takka2
(nt.) [Should it not belong to the same root as takka1?] buttermilk (with 1/4 water), included in the five products from a cow (pañca gorasā) at Vin i.244; made by churning dadhi Miln 173; J i.340; ii.363; DhA ii.68 (takkâdi -- ambila). Takkaṇa
Takkaṇa
(nt.) thought, representation (of: -- ˚) J i.68 (ussāvabindu˚). Takkara
Takkara1
( = tat -- kara) a doer thereof D i.235, M i.68; Dh 19. Takkara
Takkara2
a robber, a thief J iv.432. Takkaḷa
Takkaḷa
(nt.) a bulbous plant, a tuberose J iv.46, 371 (biḷāli˚, expl. at 373 by takkala -- kanda) = vi.578. Takkārī
Takkārī
(f.) the tree Sesbania Aegyptiaca (a kind of acacia) Th 2, 297 ( = dālika -- laṭṭhi ThA 226). Takkika
Takkika
(adj.) [fr. takka1] doubting, having wrong views, foolish; m. a sophist, a fool Ud 73; J i.97; Miln 248. Takkin
Takkin
(adj. -- n.) [fr. takka1] thinking, reasoning, esp. sceptically; a sceptic D i.16≈(takkī vīmaŋsī); M i.520; DA i.106 ( = takketvā vitakketvā diṭṭhi -- gāhino etaŋ adhivacanaŋ), cp. pp. 114, 115 (takki -- vāda). Takketi
Takketi
[Denom. of tarka] to think, reflect, reason, argue DA i.106; DhsA 142. -- attānaŋ t. to have self -- confidence, to trust oneself J i.273, 396, 468; iii.233. Takkoṭaka
Takkoṭaka
[is reading correct?] a kind of insect or worm Vism 258. Reading at id. p. KhA 58 is kakkoṭaka. Takkola
Takkola
[Sk. kakkola & takkola] Bdellium, a perfume made from the berry of the kakkola plant J i.291; also as Npl. at Miln 359 (the Takola of Ptolemy; perhaps = Sk. karkoṭa: Trenckner, Notes, p. 59). Tagara
Tagara
(nt.) the shrub Tabernaemontana coronaria, and a fragrant powder or perfume obtained from it, incense Vin i.203; It 68 ( = Udānavarga p. 112, No. 8); Dh 54, 55, 56 (candana+); J iv.286; vi.100 (the shrub) 173 (id.); Miln 338; Dāvs v.50; DhA i.422 (tagara -- mallikā two kinds of gandhā). -- 293 -- Taggaruka
Taggaruka
= tad+garuka, see taccarita. Taggha
Taggha
[tad+gha, cp. in -- gha & Lat. ec -- ce ego -- met, Gr. e)gw/ -- ge] affirmative particle ("ekaŋsena" DA i.236; ekaŋsa -- vacana J v.66; ekaŋse nipāta J v.307): truly, surely, there now! Vin ii.126, 297; D i.85; M i.207, 463; iii.179; J v.65 (v. l. tagghā); Sn p. 87. Taca
Taca
(& taco nt.) [Vedic tvak (f.), gen. tvacaḥ] 1. bark. - 2. skin, hide (similar to camma, denoting the thick, outer skin, as contrasted with chavi, thin skin, see chavi & cp. J i.146). -- 1. bark: M i.198, 434, 488; A v.5. -- 2. skin: often used together with nahāru & aṭṭhi (tendons & bones), to denote the outer appearance (framework) of the body, or that which is most conspicuous in emaciation: A i.50 = Sdhp. 46; tacamaŋsâvalepana (+aṭṭhī nahārusaŋyutta) Sn 194= J i.146 (where ˚vilepana); SnA 247; aṭṭhi -- taca -- mattâvasesasarīra "nothing but skin & bones" PvA 201. -> Of the cast -- off skin of a snake: urago va jiṇṇaŋ tacaŋ jahāti Sn 1, same simile Pv i.121 (=nimmoka PvA 63). -- kañcanasannibha -- taca (adj.) of golden -- coloured skin (a sign of beauty) Sn 551; Vv 302=323; Miln 75; VvA 9. -- valita -- tacatā a condition of wrinkled skin (as sign of age) Nd2 252≈; Kh iii.; KhA 45; Sdhp 102.

-- gandha the scent of bark Dhs 625; -- pañcaka -- kammaṭṭhāna the fivefold "body is skin," etc, subject of kammaṭṭhāna -- practice. This refers to the satipaṭṭhānā (kāye kāy' ânupassanā:) see kāya I. (a) of which the first deals with the anupassanā (viewing) of the body as consisting of the five (dermatic) constituents of kesā lomā nakhā dantā, taco (hair of head, other hair, nails, teeth, skin or epidermis: see Kh iii.). It occurs in formula (inducing a person to take up the life of a bhikkhu): taca -- p -- kammaṭṭhānaŋ ācikkhitvā taŋ pabbājesi J i.116; DhA i.243; ii.87, 140, 242. Cp. also Vism 353; DhA ii.88; SnA 246, 247; -- pariyonaddha with wrinkled (shrivelled) skin (of Petas: as sign of thirst) PvA 172; -- rasa the taste of bark Dhs 629, -- sāra (a) (even) the best (bark, i. e.) tree S i.70 = 90= It 45; -- (b) a (rope of) strong fibre J iii.204 (=veṇudaṇḍaka). Taccarita
Taccarita
(adj.) in combn with tabbahula taggaruka tanninna tappoṇa tappabhāra freq. as formula, expressing: converging to this end, bent thereon, striving towards this (aim): Nd2 under tad. The same combn with Nibbāna -- ninna, N. -- poṇa, N. -- pabhāra freq. (see Nibbāna). Taccha
Taccha1
[Vedic takṣan, cp. taṣṭṛ, to takṣati (see taccheti), Lat. textor, Gr. te/ktwn carpenter (cp. architect), te/xnh art] a carpenter, usually as ˚ka: otherwise only in cpd. ˚sūkara the carpenter -- pig ( = a boar, so called from felling trees), title & hero of Jātaka No. 492 (iv.342 sq.). Cp. vaḍḍhakin. Taccha
Taccha2
(adj.) [Der. fr. tathā+ya = tath -- ya "as it is," Sk. tathya] true, real, justified, usually in combn w. bhūta. bhūta taccha tatha, D i.190 (paṭipadā: the only true & real path) S v.229 (dhamma; text has tathā, v. l. tathaŋ better); as bhūta t. dhammika (well founded and just) D i.230. bhūta+taccha: A ii.100=Pug 50; VvA 72. -- yathā tacchaŋ according to truth Sn 1096. which is interpreted by Nd2 270: tacchaŋ vuccati amataŋ Nibbānaŋ, etc. -- (nt.) taccha a truth Sn 327. -- ataccha false, unreal, unfounded; a lie, a falsehood D i.3 (abhūta+); VvA 72 (=musā). Tacchaka
Tacchaka
= taccha1. (a) a carpenter Dh 80 (cp. DhA ii.147); Miln 413. magga˚ a road -- builder J vi.348. -- (b)=taccha -- sūkara J iv.350. -- (c) a class of Nāgas D ii.258. -- f. tacchikā a woman of low social standing (=veṇī, bamboo -- worker) J v.306. Tacchati
Tacchati
[fr. taccha1, cp. taccheti] to build, construct; maggaŋ t. to construct or repair a road J vi.348. Taccheti
Taccheti
[probably a denom. fr. taccha1 = Lat. texo to weave (orig. to plait, work together, work artistically), cp. Sk. taṣṭṛ architect =Lat. textor; Sk. takṣan, etc., Gr. te/xnh craft, handiwork (cp. technique), Ohg. dehsa hatchet. Cp. also orig. meaning of karoti & kamma] to do wood -- work, to square, frame, chip J i.201; Miln 372, 383. Tajja
Tajja
[tad+ya, cp. Sk. tadīya] "this like," belonging to this, founded on this or that; on the ground of this (or these), appropriate, suitable; esp. in combn with vāyāma (a suitable effort as "causa movens") A i.207; Miln 53. Also with reference to sense -- impressions, etc. denoting the complemental sensation S iv.215; M i. 190, 191; Dhs 3 -- 6 (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 6 & Com. expl. anucchavika). -- PvA 203 (tajjassa pāpassa katattā: by the doing of such evil, v. l. SS tassajjassa, may be a contraction of tādiyassa otherwise tādisassa).

Note. The expln of Kern, Toev. ii.87 (tajja = tad+ja "arising from this") is syntactically impossible. Tajjanā
Tajjanā
(f.) [from tajjeti] threat, menace J ii.169; Vv 509; VvA 212 (bhayasantajjana). Tajjaniya
Tajjaniya
[grd. of tajjeti] to be blamed or censured Vism 115 (a˚); (n.) censure, blame, scorn, rebuke. M 50th Sta; Miln 365. As t. t. ˚kamma one of the sangha -- kammas: Vin i.49, 53, 143 sq., 325; ii.3 sq., 226, 230; A i.99. Tajjārī
Tajjārī
a linear measure, equal to 36 aṇu's and of which 36 form one rathareṇu VbhA 343; cp. Abhp 194 (tajjarī). Tajjita
Tajjita
[pp. of tajjeti] threatened, frightened, scared; spurred or moved by ( -- ˚) D i.141 (daṇḍa˚, bhaya˚); Dh 188 (bhaya˚); Pug 56. Esp. in combn maraṇabhaya˚ moved by the fear of death J i.150, 223; PvA 216. Tajjeti
Tajjeti
[Caus. of tarjati, to frighten. Cp. Gr. ta/rbos fright, fear, tarbe/w; Lat. torvus wild, frightful] to frighten, threaten; curse, rail against J i.157, 158; PvA 55. -> Pp. tajjita. -- Caus. tajjāpeti to cause to threaten, to accuse PvA 23 ( = paribhāsāpeti). Taṭa
Taṭa
[*t&lcircle;, see tala & cp. tālu, also Lat. tellus] declivity or side of a hill, precipice; side of a river or well, a bank J i.232, 303; ii.315 (udapāna˚); iv.141; SnA 519, DhA i.73 (papāta˚). See also talāka. Taṭataṭāyati
Taṭataṭāyati
[Onomatopoetic, to make a sound like taṭ- taṭ. Root *k&lcircle; (on ṭ for I̊ cp. taṭa for tala) to grind one's teeth, to be in a frenzy. Cp. ciṭiciṭāyāti. See note on gala and kiṇakiṇāyati] to rattle, shake, clatter; to grind or gnash one's teeth; to fizz. Usually said of people in frenzy or fury (in ppr. ˚yanto or ˚yamāna): J i.347 (rosena) 439 (kodhena); ii.277 (of a bhikkhu kodhana "boiling with rage" like a "uddhane pakkhitta -- loṇaŋ viya"); the latter trope also at DhA iv.176; DhA i.370 (aggimhi pakkhitta -- loṇasakkharā viya rosena t.); iii.328 (vātâhata -- tālapaṇṇaŋ viya); VvA 47, 121 (of a kodhâbhibhūto; v. l. kaṭakaṭāyamāna), 206 (+akkosati paribhāsati), 256. Cp. also kaṭakaṭāyati & karakarā. Taṭṭaka
Taṭṭaka
[Etym. unknown] a bowl for holding food, a flat bowl, porringer, salver J iii.10 (suvaṇṇa˚), 97, 121, 538; iv.281. According to Kern, Toev. s. v. taken into Tamil as taṭṭaŋ, cp. also Av. taśta. Morris (J.P.T.S. 1884, 80) compares Marathi tasta (ewer). Taṭṭikā
Taṭṭikā
(f.) [cp. kaṭaka] a (straw) mat Vin iv.40 (Bdhgh on this: teṭṭikaŋ (sic) nāma tālapaṇṇehi vā vākehi vā katataṭṭikā, p. 357); J i.141 (v. l. taddhika); Vism 97. -- 294 -- Taṇḍula
Taṇḍula
(*Sk. taṇḍula: dialectical] rice -- grain, rice husked & ready for boiling; freq. combd with tila (q. v.) in mentioning of offerings, presentations, etc.: loṇaŋ telaŋ taṇḍulaŋ khādaniyaŋ sakaṭesu āropetvā Vin i.220, 238, 243, 249; talitaṇḍulâdayo J iii.53; PvA 105. -- Vin i.244; A i.130; J i.255; iii.55, 425 (taṇḍulāni metri causa); vi.365 (mūla˚ coarse r., majjhima˚ medium r., kaṇikā the finest grain); Sn 295; Pug 32; DhA i.395 (sāli -- taṇḍula husked rice); DA i.93. Cp. ut˚.

-- ammaṇa a measure (handful?) of rice J ii.436. -- dona a rice -- vat or rice -- bowl DhA iv.15; -- pāladvārā "doors (i. e. house) of the rice -- guard" Npl. M ii.185; -- muṭṭhi a handful of rice PvA 131; -- homa an oblation of rice D i.9. Taṇḍuleyyaka
Taṇḍuleyyaka
[cp. Sk. taṇḍulīya] the plant Amaranthus polygonoides VvA 99 (enumd amongst various kinds of ḍāka). Taṇhā
Taṇhā
(f.) [Sk. tṛṣṇā, besides tarśa (m.) & ṭṛṣ (f.) = Av. tarśna thirst, Gr. tarsi/a dryness, Goth. paúrsus, Ohg. durst, E. drought & thirst; to *ters to be, or to make dry in Gr. te/rsomai, Lat. torreo to roast, Goth. gapaírsan, Ohg. derren. -- Another form of t. is tasiṇā] lit. drought, thirst; fig. craving, hunger for, excitement, the fever of unsatisfied longing (c. loc.: kabaḷinkāre āhāre "thirst" for solid food S ii.101 sq.; cīvare piṇḍapāte taṇhā= greed for Sn 339). Oppd to peace of mind (upekhā, santi). -- A. Literal meaning: khudāya taṇhāya ca khajjamānā tormented by hunger & thirst Pv ii.15 (= pipāsāya PvA 69). -- B. In its secondary meaning: taṇhā is a state of mind that leads to rebirth. Plato puts a similar idea into the mouth of Socrates (Phaedo 458, 9). Neither the Greek nor the Indian thinker has thought it necessary to explain how this effect is produced. In the Chain of Causation (D ii. 34) we are told how Taṇhā arises -- when the sense organs come into contact with the outside world there follow sensation and feeling, & these (if, as elsewhere stated, there is no mastery over them) result in Taṇhā. In the First Proclamation (S v.420 ff.; Vin i.10) it is said that Taṇhā, the source of sorrow, must be rooted out by the way there laid down, that is by the Aryan Path. Only then can the ideal life be lived. Just as physical thirst arises of itself, and must be assuaged, got rid of, or the body dies; so the mental "thirst," arising from without, becomes a craving that must be rooted out, quite got rid of, or there can be no Nibbāna. The figure is a strong one, and the word Taṇhā is found mainly in poetry, or in prose passages charged with religious emotion. It is rarely used in the philosophy or the psychology. Thus in the long Enumeration of Qualities (Dhs), Taṇhā occurs in one only out of the 1,366 sections (Dhs 1059), & then only as one of many subordinate phases of lobha. Taṇhā binds a man to the chain of Saŋsāra, of being reborn & dying again & again (2b) until Arahantship or Nibbāna is attained, taṇhā destroyed, & the cause alike of sorrow and of future births removed (2c). In this sense Nibbāna is identical with "sabbupadhi -- paṭinissaggo taṇhakkhayo virāgo nirodho" (see Nibbāna). -- 1. Systematizations: The 3 aims of t. kāma˚, bhava˚, vibhava˚, that is craving for sensuous pleasure, for rebirth (anywhere, but especially in heaven), or for no rebirth; cp. Vibhava. These three aims are mentioned already in the First Proclamation (S v.420; Vin i.10) and often afterwards D ii.61, 308; iii.216, 275; S iii.26, 158; It 50; Ps i.26, 39; ii.147; Vbh 101, 365; Nett 160. Another group of 3 aims of taṇhā is given as kāma˚, rūpa˚ & arūpa˚ at D iii.216; Vbh 395; & yet another as rūpa˚, arūpa˚ & nirodha˚ at D iii.216. -- The source of t. is said to be sixfold as founded on & relating to the 6 bāhirāni āyatanāni (see rūpa), objects of sense or sensations, viz. sights, sounds, smells, etc.: D ii.58; Ps i.6 sq.; Nd2 271i; in threefold aspects (as kāma -- taṇhā, bhava˚ & vibhava˚) with relation to the 6 senses discussed at Vism 567 sq.; also under the term cha -- taṇha -- kāyā (sixfold group, see cpds.) M i.51; iii.280; Ps i.26; elsewhere called chadvārika -- taṇhā "arising through the 6 doors" DhA iii.286. -- 18 varieties of t. (comprising worldly objects of enjoyment, ease, comfort & well-living are enumd at Nd2 271iii (under taṇhā -- lepa). 36 kinds: 18 referring to sensations (illusions) of subjective origin (ajjhattikassa upādāya), & 18 to sensations affecting the individual in objective quality (bāhirassa upādāya) at A ii.212; Nett 37; & 108 varieties or specifications of t. are given at Nd2 271ii (under Jappā)=Dhs 1059 =Vbh 361. -- Taṇhā as "kusalā pi akusalā pi" (good & bad) occurs at Nett 87; cp. Tālapuṭa's good t. Th i.1091 f. -- 2. Import of the term: (a) various characterizations of t.: mahā˚ Sn 114; kāma˚ Si.131; gedha˚ Si.15; bhava˚ D iii.274 (+avijjā); grouped with diṭṭhi (wrong views) Nd2 271iii, 271vi. T. fetters the world & causes misery: "yāya ayaŋ loko uddhasto pariyonaddho tantākulajāto" A ii.211 sq.; taṇhāya jāyatī soko taṇhāya jāyatī bhayaŋ taṇhāya vippamuttassa natthi soko kuto bhayaŋ Dh 216; taṇhāya uḍḍito loko S i.40; yaŋ loke piyarūpaŋ sātarūpaŋ etth' esā taṇhā . . . Vbh 103; it is the 4th constituent of Māra's army (M -- senā) Sn 436; M's daughter, S i.134. In comparisons: t.+jālinī visattikā S i.107; =bharâdānaŋ (t. ponobbhavikā nandirāga -- sahagatā) S iii 26; v.402: gaṇḍa=kāya, gaṇḍamūlan ti taṇhāy' etaŋ adhivacanaŋ S iv.83;=sota S iv.292 (and a khīṇāsavo=chinnasoto); manujassa pamatta -- cārino t. vaḍḍhati māluvā viya Dh 334. -- (b) taṇhā as the inciting factor of rebirth & incidental cause of saŋsāra: kammaŋ khettaŋ viññāṇaŋ bījaŋ taṇhā sineho . . . evaŋ āyatiŋ punabbhavâbhinibbatti hoti A i.223; t. ca avasesā ca kilesā: ayaŋ vuccati dukkha -- samudayo Vbh 107, similarly Nett 23 sq.; as ponobbhavikā (causing rebirth) S iii.26; Ps ii.147, etc.; as a link in the chain of interdependent causation (see paṭiccasamuppāda): vedanā -- paccayā taṇhā, taṇhā -- paccayā upādānaŋ Vin i.1, 5; D ii.31, 33, 56, etc.; t. & upadhi : taṇhāya sati upadhi hoti t. asati up. na hoti S ii.108; ye taṇhaŋ vaḍḍhenti te upadhiŋ vaḍḍhenti, etc. S ii.109; taṇhāya nīyati loko taṇhāya parikissati S i.39; taṇhā saŋyojanena saŋyuttā sattā dīgharattaŋ sandhāvanti saŋsaranti It 8. See also t. -- dutiya. -- (c) To have got rid of t. is Arahantship: vigata -- taṇha vigata -- pipāsa vigata -- pariḷāha D iii.238; S iii.8, 107 sq., 190; samūlaŋ taṇhaŋ abbuyha S i.16=63, 121 (Godhiko parinibbuto); iii.26 (nicchāto parinibbuto); vīta˚ Sn 83, 849, 1041 (+nibbuta); taṇhāya vippahānena S i.39 ("Nibbānan" iti vuccati), 40 (sabbaŋ chindati bandhanaŋ); taṇhaŋ mā kāsi mā lokaŋ punar āgami Sn 339; taṇhaŋ pariññāya . . . te narā oghatiṇṇā ti Sn 1082; ucchinna -- bhava -- taṇhā Sn 746; taṇhāya vūpasama S iii.231; t. -- nirodha S iv.390. -- See also M i.51; Dh 154; It 9 (vita˚+anādāna), 50 (˚ŋ pahantvāna); Sn 495, 496, 916; & cp. ˚khaya. -- 3. Kindred terms which in Commentaries are expld by one of the taṇhā -- formulae (cp. Nd2 271v & 271vii): (a) t. in groups of 5: (a) with kilesa saŋyoga vipāka duccarita; (b) diṭṭhi kilesa duccarita avijjā; (g) diṭṭhi kil˚ kamma duccarita. -- (b) quasi -- synonyms: ādāna, ejā, gedha, jappā, nandī, nivesana, pariḷāha, pipāsā, lepa, loluppa, vāna, visattikā, sibbanī. -- In cpds. the form taṇhā is represented by taṇha before double consonants, as taṇhakkhaya, etc.

-- âdhipateyya mastery over t. S iii.103; -- âdhipanna seized by t. S. i.29; Sn 1123; -- ādāsa the mirror of t. A ii.54; âbhinivesa full of t. PvA 267; -- āluka greedy J ii.78; -- uppādā (pl.) (four) grounds of the rise of craving (viz. cīvara, piṇḍapāta, senâsana, itibhavâbhava) A ii.10 = It 109; D iii.228; Vbh 375; -- kāyā (pl.) (six) groups of t. (see above B i) S ii.3; D iii.244. 280; Ps i.26; Vbh 380; -- kkhaya the destruction of the excitement of cravings, almost synonymous with Nibbāna (see above B2c): ˚rata Dh 187 (expld at DhA iii.241: arahatte c' eva nibbāne ca abhirato hoti); -> Vv 735 (expld by Nibbāna VvA 296); therefore in the expositionary formula of Nibbāna as equivalent with N. Vin i.5; S iii.133; It 88, etc. (see N.). In the same sense: sabbañjaho taṇhakkhaye vimutto Vin i.8= M i.171=Dh 353; taṇhākkhaya virāga nirodha nibbāna A ii.34, expld at Vism 293; bhikkhu arahaŋ cha ṭhānāni adhimutto hoti: nekkhammâdhimutto, paviveka˚, avyāpajjha˚, upādānakkhaya˚, taṇhakkhaya˚, asammoha˚ Vin i.183; cp. also Sn 70, 211, 1070, 1137; -- gata obsessed with excitement, i. e. a victim of t. Sn 776; -- gaddula the leash of t. Nd2 271ii≈; -- cchida breaking the cravings Sn 1021, 1101; -- jāla the snare of t. M i.271; Th 1, 306; Nd2 271ii; -- dutiya who has the fever or excitement of t. as his companion A ii.10= It 9=109=Sn 740, 741=Nd2 305; cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 278; -- nadī the river of t. Nd2 271ii; cp. nadiyā soto ti: taṇhāy' etaŋ adhivacanaŋ It 114; -- nighātana the destruction of t. Sn 1085; -- pakkha the party of t., all that belongs to t. Nett 53, 69, 88, 160; -- paccaya caused by t. Sn p. 144; Vism 568; -- mūlaka rooted in t. (dhammā: 9 items) Ps i.26, 130; Vbh 390; -- lepa cleaving to t. Nd2 271iii; (+diṭṭhi -- lepa); -- vasika being in the power of t. J iv.3; -- vicarita a thought of t. A ii.212; -- sankhaya (complete) destruction of t.; ˚sutta M i.251 (cūḷa˚), 256 (mahā˚): ˚vimutti salvation through cessation of t. M i.256, 270, & ˚vimutta (adj.) S iv.391; -- samudda the ocean of t. Nd 271ii; -- sambhūta produced by t. (t. ayaŋ kāyo) A ii.145 (cp. Sn p. 144; yaŋ kiñci dukkhaŋ sambhoti sabbaŋ taṇhāpaccayā); -- saŋyojana the fetter of t. (adj.) fettered, bound by t., in phrase t. -- saŋyojanena saŋyuttā sattā dīgharattaŋ sandhāvanti saŋsaranti It 8, & t. -- saŋyojanānaŋ sattānaŋ sandhāvataŋ saŋsarataŋ S ii.178=iii.149= PvA 166; A i.223; -- salla the sting or poisoned arrow of t. S i.192 (˚assa hantāraŋ vande ādiccabandhunaŋ), the extirpation of which is one of the 12 achievements of a mahesi Nd2 503 (˚assa abbuḷhana; cp. above). -- 295 -- Taṇhīyati
Taṇhīyati
[ = taṇhāyati, denom. fr. taṇhā, cp. Sk. tṛṣyati to have thirst] to have thirst for S ii.13 (for v. l. SS. tuṇhīyati; BB. tasati); Vism 544 (+upādiyati ghaṭ -> yati); cp. tasati & pp. tasita. Tata
Tata
[pp. of tanoti] stretched, extended, spread out S i. 357 (jāla); J iv.484 (tantāni jālāni Text, katāni v. l. for tatāni). Note: samo tata at J i.183 is to be read as samotata (spread all over). Tatiya
Tatiya
[Sk. tṛtīya, Av. þritya, Gr. tri/tos, Lat. tertius, Goth. pridja, E. third] Num. ord. the third. -- Sn 97 (parābhavo); 436 (khuppipāsā as the 3rd division in the army of Māra), 1001; J ii.353; Dh 309; PvA 69 (tatiyāya jātiya: in her third birth). Tatiyaŋ (nt. adv.) for the 3rd time D ii.155; Sn 88, 95, 450; tatiyavāraŋ id. DhA i.183; VvA 47 ( = at last); yāva tatiyaŋ id. Vin ii.188; J i.279; DhA ii.75; PvA 272 (in casting the lot: the third time decides); yāva tatiyakaŋ id. D i.95. Tato
Tato
[abl. of pron. base ta˚ (see ta˚ ii.4)] 1. from this, in this S iii.96 (tatoja); J iii.281 (tato paraŋ beyond this, after this); Nd2 664 (id.); DA i.212 (tatonidāna). -> 2. thence J i.278; Miln 47. -- 3. thereupon, further, afterwards J i.58; Dh 42; Miln 48; PvA 21, etc. Tatta
Tatta1
[pp. of tapati] heated, hot, glowing; of metals: in a melted state (cp. uttatta) A ii.122≈(tattena talena osiñcante, as punishment); Dh 308 (ayoguḷa); J ii.352 (id.); iv.306 (tattatapo "of red -- hot heat," i. e. in severe self -- torture); Miln 26, 45 (adv. red -- hot); PvA 221 (tatta -- lohasecanaŋ the pouring over of glowing copper, one of the punishments in Niraya). Tatta
Tatta2
(nt.) [tad+tva] truth; abl. tattato according to truth; accurately J ii.125 (ñatvā); iii.276 (ajānitvā not knowing exactly). Tattaka
Tattaka1
[tatta pp. of tappati2+ka] pleasing, agreeable, pleasant Miln 238 (bhojana). Tattaka
Tattaka2
(adj.) ( = tāvataka) of such size, so large Vism 184 (corresponding with yattaka); tattakaŋ kālaŋ so long, just that time, i. e. the specified time (may be long or short=only so long) DhA i.103 (v. l. ettakaŋ); ii.16 (=ettaka). Tattha
Tattha
[Sk. tatra adv. of place, cp. Goth. papro & also Sk. atra, yatra] A. 1. of place: (a) place where = there, in that place Sn 1071, 1085; Dh 58; J i.278; Pv i.1015; often with eva: tatth' eva right there, on the (very same) spot S i.116; J ii.154; PvA 27. In this sense as introduction to a comment on a passage: in this, here, in this connection (see also tatra) Dhs 584; DhA i.21; PvA 7, etc. (b) direction: there, to this place J ii.159 (gantvā); vi.368; PvA 16 (tatthagamanasīla able to go here & there, i. e. wherever you like, of a Yakkha). -- 2. as (loc.) case of pron. base ta˚= in this, for or about that, etc. Sn 1115 (etam abhiññāya tato tattha vipassati: SnA tatra); tattha yo manku hoti Dh 249 (=tasmiŋ dāne m. DhA iii.359); tattha kā paridevanā Pv i.123 ("why sorrow for this?"). -- 3. of time: then, for the time being, interim (=ettha, cp. tattaka2) in phrase tattha -- parinibbāyin, where corresp. phrases have antarā -- parinibbāyin (A ii.238 e. g.≈i.134; see under parinibbāyin) D i.156; A i.232; ii.5; iv.12; S v.357; M ii.52, etc. The meaning of this phrase may however be taken in the sense of tatra A 3 (see next). -- B. Repeated: tattha tattha here and there, in various places, all over; also corresponding with yattha yattha wherever . . . there It 115; Nett 96 (˚gāmini -- paṭipadā); VvA 297; PvA 1, 2, 33, 77, etc. -- See tatra. Tatra
Tatra
[Sk. tatra] = tattha in all meanings & applications, viz. A. 1. there: Dh 375; PvA 54. tatrâpi D i.81=It 22≈(tatrâpâsiŋ). tatra pi D i.1 (=DA i.42). tatra kho Vin i.10, 34; A v.5 sq.; 354 sq. (cp. atha kho). -> In explanations: PvA 19 (tatrâyaŋ vitthārakathā "here follows the story in detail"). -- 2. in this: Sn 595 (tatra kevalino smase); Dh 88 (tatr' abhirati: enjoyment in this). -- 3. a special application of tatra (perhaps in the same sense to be explained tattha A 3) is that as first part of a cpd., where it is to be taken as generalizing (=tatra tatra): all kinds of (orig. in this & that), in whatever condition, all -- round, complete (cp. yaŋ taŋ under ta˚ ii.2, yena tena upāyena): tatramajjhattatā (complete) equanimity (keeping balance here & there) Vism 466 (cp. tatra -- majjhatt' upekkhā 160); DhsA 132, 133 (majjh˚+tatra majjh˚); Bdhd 157. tatrûpāyaññū (=tatra upāyaññū) having all-round knowledge of the means and ways Sn 321 (correct reading at SnA 330); tatrupāyāya vīmaŋsāya samannāgatā endowed with genius in all kinds of means Vin iv.211 (or may it be taken as "suitable, corresponding, proportionate"? cp. tadūpiya). -- B. tatra tatra, in t. -- t. -- abhinandinī (of taṇhā) finding its delight in this & that, here & there Vin i.10; Ps ii.147; Nett 72; Vism 506. Tatha
Tatha
(adj.) [an adjectivized tathā out of combn tathā ti "so it is," cp. taccha] (being) in truth, truthful; true, real D i.190 (+bhūta taccha); M iii.70; Th 1, 347; Sn 1115 ( = Nd2 275 taccha bhūta, etc.). (nt.) tathaŋ=saccaŋ, in cattāri tathāni the 4 truths S v.430, 435; Ps ii.104 sq. (+avitathāni anaññathāni). As ep. of Nibbāna: see derivations & cp. taccha. abl. tathato exactly v. l. B for tattato at J ii.125 (see tatta2). -- yathā tathaŋ (cp. yathā tacchaŋ) according to truth, for certain, in truth Sn 699, 732, 1127. -- Cp. vitatha.

-- parakkama reaching out to the truth J v.395 ( = saccanikkama); -- vacana speaking the truth (cp. tathāvādin) Miln 401. -- 296 -- Tathatā
Tathatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. tathā>tatha] state of being such, such -- likeness, similarity, correspondence Vism 518. Tathatta
Tathatta
(nt.) [*tathātvaŋ] "the state of being so," the truth, Nibbāna; only in foll. phrases: (a) tathattāya paṭipajjati to be on the road to (i. e. attain) Nibbāna D i.175, similarly S ii.199; S ii.209 (paṭipajjitabba being conducive to N.); Miln 255; Vism 214. -- (b) tathattāya upaneti (of a cittaŋ bhāvitaŋ) id. S iv.294 = M i. 301; S v.90, 213 sq. -- (c) tathattāya cittaŋ upasaŋharati id. M i.468. -- abl. tathattā in truth, really Sn 520 sq. (cp. M Vastu iii.397). Tathā
Tathā
(adv.) [Sk. tathā, cp. also kathaŋ] so, thus (and not otherwise, opp. aññathā), in this way, likewise Sn 1052 (v. l. yathā); J i.137, etc. -- Often with eva: tath' eva just so, still the same, not different D iii.135 (taŋ tath' eva hoti no aññathā); J i.263, 278; Pv i.83; PvA 55. Corresponding with yathā: tathā -- yathā so -- that Dh 282; PvA 23 (tathā akāsi yathā he made that . . ., cp. Lat. ut consecutive); yathā -- tathā asso also Sn 504; J i.223; Pv i.123 (yath' āgato tathā gato as he has come so he has gone). -- In cpds. tath' before vowels.

-- ûpama such like (in comparisons, following upon a preceding yathā or seyyathā) Sn 229 ( = tathāvidha KhA 185), 233; It 33, 90; -- kārin acting so (corresp. w. yathāvādin: acting so as he speaks, cp. tāthāvādin) Sn 357; It 122; -- gata see sep.; -- bhāva "the being so," such a condition J i.279; -- rūpa such a, like this or that, esp. so great, such Vin i.16; Sn p. 107; It 107; DA i.104; PvA 5, 56. nt. adv. thus PvA 14. Cp. evarūpa; -- vādin speaking so (cp. ˚kārin) Sn 430; It 122 (of the Tathāgata); -- vidha such like, so (= tathārūpa) Sn 772, 818, 1073, 1113; Nd2 277 (=tādisa taŋsaṇṭhita tappakāra). Tathāgata
Tathāgata
[Derivation uncertain. Buddhaghosa (DA i.59 -- 67) gives eight explanations showing that there was no fixed tradition on the point, and that he himself was in doubt]. The context shows that the word is an epithet of an Arahant, and that non -- Buddhists were supposed to know what it meant. The compilers of the Nikāyas must therefore have considered the expression as pre -- Buddhistic; but it has not yet been found in any pre -- Buddhistic work. Mrs. Rhys Davids (Dhs. tr. 1099, quoting Chalmers J.R.A.S. Jan., 1898) suggests "he who has won through to the truth." Had the early Buddhists invented a word with this meaning it would probably have been tathaŋgata, but not necessarily, for we have upadhī -- karoti as well as upadhiŋ karoti. -- D i.12, 27, 46, 63; ii.68, 103, 108, 115, 140, 142; iii.14, 24 sq., 32 sq., 115, 217, 264 sq., 273 sq.; S i.110 sq.; ii.222 sq.; iii.215; iv.127, 380 sq.; A i.286; ii.17, 25, 120; iii.35, etc.; Sn 236, 347, 467, 557, 1114; It 121 sq.; KhA 196; Ps i.121 sq.; Dhs 1099, 1117, 1234; Vbh 325 sq., 340, etc., etc.

-- balāni (pl.) the supreme intellectual powers of a T. usually enumd as a set of ten: in detail at A v.33 sq. = Ps ii.174; M i.69; S ii.27; Nd2 466. Other sets of five at A iii.9; of six A iii.417 sq. (see bala); -- sāvaka a disciple of the T. D ii.142; A i.90; ii.4; iii.326 sq.; It 88; Sn p. 15. Tathiya
Tathiya
(adj.) [Sk. tathya = taccha] true, Sn 882, 883. Tadanurūpa
Tadanurūpa
(adj.) [cp. ta˚ i a] befitting, suitable, going well with J vi.366; DhA iv.15. Tadā
Tadā
(adv.) [Vedic; cp. kadā] then, as that time (either past or future) D ii.157; J ii.113, 158; Pv i.105; PvA 42. Also used like an adj.: te tadā -- mātāpitaro etarahi m˚ ahesuŋ "the then mother & father" J i.215 (cp. Lat. quondam); tadā -- sotāpanna -- upāsaka J ii.113. Tadūpika & Tadūpiya
Tadūpika
& Tadūpiya see ta˚ I. a. Tanaya & tanuya
Tanaya
& tanuya [at S i.7, v. l. tanaya, cp. BSk. tanuja AvŚ ii.200] offspring, son Mhvs vii.28. pl. tanuyā [ = Sk. tanayau] son & daughter S i.7. Tanu
Tanu
[Vedic tanu, f. tanvī; also n. tanu & tanū (f.) body *ten (see tanoti) = Gr. tanu -- , Lat. tenuis, Ohg. dunni, E. thin] 1. (adj.) thin, tender, small, slender Vv 162 (vara˚ graceful=uttamarūpa -- dhara VvA 79; perhaps to 2); PvA 46 (of hair: fine+mudhu). -- 2. (n. nt.) body (orig. slender part of the body= waist) Vv 537 (kañcana˚); Pv i.121; Vism 79 (uju+). Cp. tanutara.

-- karaṇa making thinner, reducing, diminishing Vin ii.316 (Bdhgh on CV. v.9, 2); -- bhāva decrease Pug 17; -- bhūta decreased, diminished Pug 17; esp. in phrase ˚soka with diminished grief, having one's grief allayed DhA iii.176; PvA 38. Tanuka
Tanuka
(adj.) = tanu; little, small Dh 174 (=DhA 175); Sn 994 (soka). Tanutara
Tanutara
the waist (lit. smaller part of body, cp. body and bodice) Vin iv.345 (sundaro tanutaro "her waist is beautiful"). Tanutta
Tanutta
(nt.) [n. -- abstr. of tanu] diminution, reduction, vanishing, gradual disappearance A i.160 (manussānaŋ khayo hoti tanuttaŋ paññāyati); ii.144 (rāga˚, dosa˚, moha˚); esp. in phrase (characterizing a sakadāgāmin) "rāga -- d. -- mohānaŋ tanuttā sakadāgāmī hoti" D i.156; S v.357 sq., 376, 406; A ii.238; Pug 16. Tanoti
Tanoti
[*ten; cp. Sk. tanoti, Gr. tei/nw, to/nos, te/tanos; Lat. teneo, tenuis, tendo (E. ex -- tend); Goth. panjan; Ohg. denen; cp. also Sk. tanti, tāna, tantra] to stretch, extend; rare as finite verb, usually only in pp. tata. -> Pgdp 17. Tanta
Tanta
(nt.) [Vedic tantra, to tanoti; cp. tantrī f. string] a thread, a string, a loom J i.356 (˚vitata -- ṭṭhāna the place of weaving); DhA i.424. At J iv.484 tanta is to be corrected to tata (stretched out).

-- âkula tangled string, a tangled skein, in phrase tantākulajātā guḷāguṇṭhikajāta "entangled like a ball of string & covered with blight" S ii.92; iv.158; A ii.211; Dpvs xii.32. See guḷā; -- āvuta weaving, weft, web S v.45; A i.286; -- bhaṇḍa weaving appliances Vin ii.135; -- rajjuka "stringing & roping," hanging, execution J iv.87; -- vāya a weaver J i.356; Miln 331; Vism 259; DhA i.424. Tantaka
Tantaka
(nt.) "weaving," a weaving -- loom Vin ii.135. Tanti
Tanti
(f.) [Vedic tantrī, see tanta] 1. the string or cord of a lute, etc.; thread made of tendon Vin i.182; Th 2, 390 (cp. ThA 257); J iv.389; DhA i.163; PvA 151. -- 2. line, lineage (+paveṇi custom, tradition) J vi.380; DhA i.284. -- dhara bearer of tradition Vism 99 (+vaŋsânurakkhake & paveṇipolake). -- 3. a sacred text; a passage in the Scriptures Vism 351 (bahu -- peyyāla˚); avimutta -- tanti -- magga DA i.2; MA i.2.

-- ssara string music Vin i.182; J iii.178. Tantu
Tantu
[Vedic tantu, cp. tanta] a string, cord, wire (of a lute) J v.196. Tandita
Tandita
(adj.) [pp. of tandeti = Sk. tandrayate & tandate to relax. From *ten, see tanoti] weary, lazy, giving way Miln 238 (˚kata). Usually a˚ active, keen, industrious, sedulous Dh 305, 366, 375; Vv 3322; Miln 390; VvA 142. Cp. next. Tandī
Tandī
(f.) [Sk. tanita] weariness, laziness, sloth S v.64; M i.464; A i.3; Sn 926, 942; J v.397 (+ālasya); Vbh 352 (id.). -- 297 -- Tapa & Tapo
Tapa
& Tapo [from tapati, cp. Lat. tepor, heat] 1. torment, punishment, penance, esp. religious austerity, selfchastisement, ascetic practice. This was condemned by the Buddha: Gotamo sabbaŋ tapaŋ garahati tapassiŋ lūkhajīviŋ upavadati D i.161 = S iv.330; anattha -- sañhitaŋ ñatvā yaŋ kiñci aparaŋ tapaŋ S i.103; J iv.306 (tattatapa: see tatta). -- 2. mental devotion, self -- control, abstinence, practice of morality (often= brahmacariyā & saŋvara); in this sense held up as an ideal by the Buddha. D iii.42 sq., 232 (attan & paran˚), 239; S i.38, 43; iv.118, 180; M ii.155, 199; D ii.49= Dh 184 (paramaŋ tapo), 194 (tapo sukho); Sn 77= S i.172 (saddhā bījaŋ tapo vuṭṭhi); Sn 267 (t. ca brahmacariyā ca), 655 (id.), 901; Pv i.32 (instr. tapasā= brahmacariyena PvA 15); J i.293; Nett 121 (+indriyasaŋvara); KhA 151 (pāpake dhamme tapatī ti tapo): VvA 114 (instr. tapasā); PvA 98.

-- kamma ascetic practice S i.103; -- jigucchā disgust for asceticism D i.174; iii.40, 42 sq., 48 sq.; A ii.200; -- pakkama = ˚kamma D i.165 sq. (should it be tapopakkama=tapa+upakkama, or tapo -- kamma?). -- vana the ascetic's forest Vism 58, 79, 342. Tapati
Tapati
[Sk. tapati, *tep, cp. Lat. tepeo to be hot or warm, tepidus = tepid] 1. to shine, to be bright, Dh 387 (divā tapati ādicco, etc.=virocati DhA iv.143); Sn 348 (jotimanto narā tapeyyuŋ), 687 (suriyaŋ tapantaŋ). -- ger. tapanīya: see sep. -- pp. tatta1. Tapana
Tapana
(adj. -- n.) [to tapati & tapa] burning, heat; fig. torment, torture, austerity. -- 1. (as nt.) PvA 98 (kāya ˚sankhāto tapo). -- 2. (as f.) tapanī J v.201 (in metaphorical play of word with aggi & brahmacārin; Com. visīvana -- aggiṭṭha -- sankhātā -- tapanī). Tapanīya
Tapanīya1
[grd. of tapati] burning: fig. inducing self- torture, causing remorse, mortifying A i.49 = It 24; A iv.97 (Com. tāpajanaka); v.276; J iv.177; Dhs i305. Tapanīya
Tapanīya2
(nt.) also tapaneyya (J v.372) & tapañña (J vi.218) [orig. grd. of tapati] shining; (n.) the shining, bright metal, i. e. gold ( = rattasuvaṇṇa J v.372; ThA 252) Th 2, 374; Vv 8416; VvA 12, 37, 340. Tapassin
Tapassin
(adj. -- n.) [tapas+vin; see tapati & tapa] one devoted to religious austerities, an ascetic (non -- Buddhist). Fig. one who exercises self -- control & attains mastery over his senses Vin i.234 = A iv.184 (tapassī samaṇo Gotamo); D iii.40, 42 sq., 49; S i.29; iv.330, 337 sq.; M i.77; Sn 284 (isayo pubbakā āsuŋ saññatattā tapassino); Vv 2210; Pv i.32 (˚rūpa, under the appearance of a "holy" man: samaṇa -- patirūpaka PvA 15); ii.614 (=saŋvāraka PvA 98; tapo etesaŋ atthī ti ibid.). Tappaṇa
Tappaṇa
(nt.) [Sk. tarpaṇa] satiating, refreshing; a restorative, in netta˚ some sort of eye -- wash D i.12 (in combn w. kaṇṇa -- tela & natthu -- kamma). Tappati
Tappati1
[Sk. tapyate, Pass. of tapati] to burn, to be tormented: to be consumed (by remorse) Dh 17, 136 (t. sehi kammehi dummedho = paccati DhA iii.64). Tappati
Tappati2
[Sk. tṛpyate, caus. tarpayati; *terp = Gr. te/rpw] (instr.) to be satiated, to be pleased, to be satisfied J i.185 (puriso pāyāsassa t.); ii.443; v.485=Miln 381 (samuddo na t. nadīhi the ocean never has enough of all the rivers); Vv 8413. -- grd. tappiya satiable, in atappiya -- vatthūni (16) objects of insatiability J iii.342 (in full). Also tappaya in cpd. dut˚ hard to be satisfied A i.87; Pug 26. -- pp. titta. -- Caus. tappeti to satisfy, entertain, regale, feed It 67 (annapānena); Pv ii.48 (id.) Miln 227; -- pp. tappita. Tappara
Tappara
(adj.) [Sk. tatpara] quite given to or intent upon ( -- ˚), diligent, devoted ThA 148 (Ap. 57, 66) (mānapūjana˚ & buddhopaṭṭhāna˚). Tappetar
Tappetar
[n. ag. to tappeti] one who satisfies, a giver of good things in combn titto ca tappetā ca: self -- satisfied & satisfying others A i.87; Pug 27 (of a Sammāsambuddha). Tab˚
Tab˚
in cpds. tabbisaya, tabbahula, etc. = taŋ˚, see under ta˚ I. a. Tama
Tama
(nt.) & tamo [Sk. tamas, tam & tim, cp. tamisra = Lat. tenebrae; also timira dark & P. tibba, timira; Ohg. dinstar & finstar; Ags. thimm, E. dim] darkness (syn. andhakāra, opp. joti), lit. as well as fig. (mental darkness= ignorance or state of doubt); one of the dark states of life & rebirth; adj. living in one of the dark spheres of life (cp. kaṇhajāta) or in a state of suffering (duggati) Sn 248 (pecca tamaŋ vajanti ye patanti sattā nirayaŋ avaŋsirā), 763 (nivutānaŋ t. hoti andhakāro apassataŋ), 956 (sabbaŋ tamaŋ vinodetvā); Vbh 367 (three tamāni: in past, present & future). adj.: puggalo tamo tama -- parāyaṇo D iii.233; A ii.85= Pug 51; J ii.17. -- tamā tamaŋ out of one "duggati" into another Sn 278 (vinipātaŋ samāpanno gabbhā gabbhaŋ t. t. . . . dukkaŋ nigacchati), cp. M Vastu ii.225, also tamāto tamaŋ ibid. i.27; ii.215. -- tamat. -- agge beyond the region of darkness (or rebirth in dark spheres), cp. bhavagge (& Sk. tamaḥ pāre) S v. 154, 163.

-- andhakāra (complete) darkness (of night) v. l. for samandha˚ at J iii.60 (Kern: tamondhakāra); -- nivuta enveloped in d. Sn 348; -- nuda (tama˚ & tamo˚), dispelling darkness, freq. as Ep. of the Buddha or other sages Sn 1133, 1136; It 32, 108; Nd2 281; Vv 352 ( = VvA 161); Miln 1, 21, etc.; -- parāyaṇa (adj.) having a state of darkness or "duggati" for his end or destiny S i.93; A ii.85=Pug 51. Tamāla
Tamāla
[Sk. tamāla] N. of a tree (Xanthochymus pic- torius) Pv iii.105 (+uppala). Tamba
Tamba
(nt.) [Sk. tāmra, orig. adj. = dark coloured, leaden; cp. Sk. adj. taŋsra id., to tama] copper ("the dark metal"); usually in combinations, signifying colour of or made of (cp. loha bronze), e. g. lākhātamba (adj.) Th 2, 440 (colour of an ox); ˚akkhin Vv 323 (timira˚) Sdhp 286; ˚nakhin J vi.290; ˚nettā (f.) ibid.; ˚bhājana DhA i.395; ˚mattika DhA iv.106; ˚vammika DhA iii.208; ˚loha PvA 95 (=loha). Tambūla
Tambūla
(nt.) [Sk. tambūla] betel or betel -- leaves (to chew after the meal) J i.266, 291; ii.320; Vism 314; DhA iii.219. -- ˚pasibbaka betel -- bag J vi.367. Taya
Taya
(nt.) [Sk. trayaŋ triad, cp. trayī; see also tāva- tiŋsa] a triad, in ratana -- ttaya the triad of gems (the Buddha, the Norm. & the Community) see ratana; e. g. PvA 1, 49, 141. -- piṭaka -- ttaya the triad of the Piṭakas SnA 328. Tayo
Tayo
[f. tisso, nt. tīṇi; Vedic traya, trī & trīṇi; Gr. trei_s, tria; Lat. trēs, tria; Goth. preis, prija; Ohg. drī; E. three, etc.] num. card. three.

nom. -- acc. m. tayo (Sn 311), & tayas (tayas su dhammā Sn 231, see KhA 188) f. tisso (D i.143; A v.210; It 99) nt. tīṇi (A i.138, etc.), also used as absolute form (eka dve tīṇi) Kh iii. (cp. KhA 79 & tīṇi lakkhaṇā for lakkhaṇāni Sn 1019); gen. m. nt. tiṇṇaŋ (J iii.52, 111, etc.), f. tissannaŋ; instr. tīhi (ṭhānehi Dh 224, vijjāhi It 101); loc. tīsu (janesu J i.307; vidhāsu Sn 842). -- In composition & derivation: ti in numerical cpds.: tidasa (30) q. v.; tisata (300) Sn 566 (brāhmaṇā tisatā); 573 (bhikkhavo tisatā); tisahassa (3000) Pv ii.951 (janā ˚ā); in numerical derivations: tiŋsa (30), tika (triad), tikkhattuŋ (thrice); tidhā (threefold). -- In nominal cpds.: see ti˚ te (a) in numerical cpds.: terasa (SnA 489; DhsA 333; VvA 72: terasī the 13th day) & teḷasa (S i.192 Sn pp. 102, 103) (13) [Sk. trayodaśa, Lat. tredecim]; tevīsa (23) VvA 5; tettiŋsa (33) J i.273; DhA i.267; tesaṭṭhi (63) PvA 111 (Jambudīpe tesaṭṭhiyā nagarasahassesu). -> (b) in nominal cpds.: see te˚. -- 298 -- Tara
Tara
[see tarati] (n.) crossing, "transit," passing over Sn 1119 (maccu˚). -- (adj.) to be crossed, passable, in duttara hard to cross S iv.157; Sn 174, 273 (oghaŋ t. duttaraŋ); Th 2, 10; It 57. Also as su -- duttara S i. 35; v.24.

-- esin wanting to pass over J iii.230 Taranga
Taranga
[tara+ga] a wave Vism 157. Taraccha
Taraccha
[Derivation unknown. The Sk. forms are tarakṣu & tarakṣa] hyena Vin iii.58; A iii.101; Miln 149, 267; Dh A 331; Mhbv 154. -- f. taracchi J v.71, 406; vi.562. Taraṇa
Taraṇa
(nt.) [see tarati] going across, passing over, traversing Vin iv.65 (tiriyaŋ˚); Ps i.15; ii.99, 119. Tarati
Tarati1
[Vedic tarati, *ter (tṛ) to get to the other side, cp. Lat. termen, terminus, Gr. te/rma, te/rqron; also Lat. trans = Goth. pairh=Ags. purh=E. through] (lit.) to go or get through, to cross (a river), pass over, traverse; (fig.) to get beyond, i. e. to surmount, overcome, esp. oghaŋ (the great flood of life, desire, ignorance, etc.) S i.53, 208, 214; v.168, 186; Sn 173, 273, 771, 1069; sangaŋ Sn 791; visattikaŋ Sn 333, 857; ubhayaŋ (both worlds, here & beyond) Pv iv.131 (=atikkameti PvA 278); Nd2 282 -- ppr. taranto Vin i.191 (Aciravati); grd. taritabba Vin iv.65 (nadī); aor. atari J iii.189 (samuddaŋ) & atāri Sn 355, 1047 (jāti -- maraṇaŋ), pl. atāruŋ Sn 1045. -- See also tāreti (Caus.), tāṇa, tāyate, tiro, tiriyaŋ, tīra, tīreti. Tarati
Tarati2
[tvarate, pp. tvarita; also turati, turayati from *ter to turn round, move quickly, perhaps identical with the *ter of tarati1; cp. Ohg. dweran = E. twirl; Gr. toru/nh=Lat. trua=Ger. quirl twirling -- stick, also Lat. torqueo & turba & perhaps Ger. stūren, zerstören; E. storm, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under trua] to be in a hurry, to make haste Th 1, 291; ppr. taramāna in ˚rūpa (adj.) quickly, hurriedly Sn 417; Pv ii.62; PvA 181 (=turita) & ataramāna Vin i.248; grd. taraṇīya Th 1, 293. -- See also tura, turita, turiya. Tarahi
Tarahi
(adv.) [Vedic tarhi, cp. carahi & etarahi] then, at that time Vin ii.189. Tari
Tari
(f.) [from tarati] a boat Dāvs iv.53. Taritatta
Taritatta
(nt.) [abstr. of tarita pp. of tarati1] the fact of having traversed, crossed, or passed through VvA 284. Taru
Taru
[Perhaps dialect. for dāru] tree, PvA 154 (˚gaṇā), 251. Taruṇa
Taruṇa
(adj.) [Vedic taruṇa, cp. Gr. te/rus, te/rhn; Lat. tener & perhaps tardus] 1. tender, of tender age, young; new, newly (˚ -- ) fresh. Esp. appld to a young calf: M i.459 (in simile); ˚vaccha, ˚vacchaka, ˚vacchī: Vin i.193; J i.191; DhA ii.35; VvA 200. -- Vin i.243 (fresh milk); D i.114 (Gotamo t. c' eva t. -- paribbājako ca "a young man and only lately become a wanderer"); PvA 3, 46 (˚janā), 62 (˚putta); Bdhd 93, 121. -- 2. (m. & nt.) the shoot of a plant, or a young plant Vin i.189 (tāla˚); M i.432; Vism 361 (taruṇa -- tāla). Tala
Tala
(nt.) [Derivation uncertain. Cp. Sk. tala m. & nt.; cp. Gr. thli/a (dice -- board), Lat. tellus (earth), tabula ( = table). Oir. talam (earth), Ags. pel (=deal), Ohg. dili=Ger. diele] (a) flat surface (w. ref. to either top or bottom: cp. Ger. boden), level, ground, base J i.60, 62 (pāsāda˚ flat roof); iii.60 (id.); paṭhavī˚ (level ground) J ii.111, cp. bhūmi˚ PvA 176; ādāsa˚ surface of a mirror Vism 450, 456, 489; salila˚ (surface of pond) PvA 157; VvA 160; heṭṭhima˚ (the lowest level) J i.202; PvA 281; -- J i.233 (base); 266 (khagga˚ the flat of the sword); ii.102 (bheri˚). -- (b) the palm of the hand or the sole of the foot J ii.223; Vism 250; & cpds. -- See also taṭa, tāla, tālu.

-- ghātaka a slap with the palm of the hand Vin iv.260, 261; -- sattika in ˚ŋ uggirati to lift up the palm of the hand Vin iv.147; DhA iii.50; cp. Vin. Texts i.51. Talika
Talika
(adj.) [from tala] having a sole, in eka -- ˚upāhanā a sandal with one sole J ii.277; iii.80, 81 (v. l. BB. paṭilika); cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 165. Taluṇa
Taluṇa
= taruṇa DhsA 333 (cp. Burnouf, Lotus 573). Taḷāka
Taḷāka
(nt.) [Derivation uncertain. Perhaps from taṭa. The Sk. forms are taṭaka, taṭāka, taḍāga] a pond, pool, reservoir Vin ii.256; J i.4, 239; PvA 202; DA i.273; Miln 1, 66 = 81, 246, 296, 359. Tasa
Tasa
(adj.) [from tasati2] 1. trembling, frightened J i.336 = 344 (vakā, expl. at 342 by tasita); perhaps the derived meaning of: -- 2. moving, running (cp. to meaning 1 & 2 Gr. tre/w to flee & to tremble), always in combn tasa -- thāvarā (pl.) movable & immovable beings [cp. M Vastu i.207 jangama -- sthāvara; ii.10 calaŋ sthāvara]. Metaphorically of people who are in fear & trembling, as distinguished from a thāvara, a selfpossessed & firm being (=Arahant KhA 245). In this sense t. is interpreted by tasati1 as well as by tasati2 (to have thirst or worldly cravings) at KhA 245: tasantī ti tasā, sataṇhānaŋ sabhayānañ c' etaŋ adhivacanaŋ; also at Nd2 479: tasa ti yesaŋ tasitā (tasiṇā?) taṇhā appahīnā, etc., & ye te santāsaŋ āpajjanti. -> S i.141; iv.117, 351; v.393; Sn 146, 629; Dh 405, Th 1, 876; J v.221; Nd2 479; DhA iv.175. Tasati
Tasati1
[Sk. tṛṣyati = Gr. te/rsomoi to dry up, Lat. torreo (=E. torrid, toast), Goth. gapairsan & gapaúrsnan, Ohg. derren; see also taṇhā & taṇhīyati] to be thirsty, fig. to crave for S ii.13; Miln 254. -- pp. tasita1. Cp. pari˚. Tasati
Tasati2
[Vedic trasati = Gr. tre/w, Lat. terreo (=terror); *ters fr. *ter in Sk. tarala, cp. also Lat. tremo (=tremble) and trepidus] to tremble, shake, to have fear; to be frightened Sn 394 (ye thāvarā ye ca tasanti loke); Nd2 479 (= santāsaŋ āpajjati); KhA 245 (may be taker as tasati1, see tasa). -- pp. tasita2 , cp. also tasa & uttasati. Tasara
Tasara
(nt.) [Vedic tasara, cp. tanta, etc.] a shuttle Sn 215, 464, 497; DhA i.424; iii.172. Cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1886, 160. Tasiṇā
Tasiṇā
(f.) [Diaeretic form of taṇhā, cp. dosiṇā > juṇhā, kasiṇa > kṛtsṇa, etc.] thirst; fig. craving (see taṇhā) S v.54, 58; Nd2 479 (to be read for tasitā?); Dh 342, 343. Tasita
Tasita1
[pp. of tasati1] dried up, parched, thirsty S ii.110, 118; Sn 980, 1014 (not with Fausböll = tasita2); J iv.20; Pv ii.936 (chāta+), 103 (=pipāsita PvA 143); iii.65 (=pipāsita PvA 127, 202); Miln 318 (kilanta+). Tasita
Tasita2
[pp. of tasati2] frightened, full of fear J i.26 (bhīta+). 342, iv.141 (id.): Nd2 479 (or = tasiṇā?). -> atasita fearless S iii.57. Tassapāpiyyasikā
Tassa
-- pāpiyyasikā (f.) (viz. kiriyā) N. of one of the adhi- karaṇa -- samathā: guilt (legal wrong) of such & such a character Vin i.325; in detail expl. M ii.249; + tiṇavatthāraka D iii.254; A i.99. ˚kammaŋ karoti to carry out proceedings against someone guilty of a certain legal offence Vin ii.85, 86; ˚kata one against whom the latter is carried out A iv.347. Tāṇa
Tāṇa
(nt.) [from Vedic root trā, variation of *ter in tarati. Orig. bringing or seeing through] shelter, protection, refuge, esp. as tt. of shelter & peace offered by the Dhamma. Mostly in combn with leṇa & saraṇa (also dīpa & abhaya), in var. contexts, esp. with ref. to Nibbāna (see Nd2 s. v.): D i.95 (˚ŋ, etc. gavesin seeking refuge); A i.155; S iv.315 (maŋtāṇa, etc. adj. protected by me, in my shelter). -- S i.2, 54, 55, 107 (˚ŋ karoti); iv.372 (˚gāmī maggo); A iv.184; Sn 668 (˚ŋ upeti); Dh 288; J i.412 ( = protector, expld by tāyitā parittāyitā patiṭṭhā); Sdhp 224, 289. Cp. tātar & tāyati. -- 299 -- Tāṇatā
Tāṇatā
(f.) [abstr. of tāṇa] protection, sheltering Dh 288. Tāta
Tāta
[Vedic tāta, Gr. ta/ta & te/tta, Lat. tata, Ger. tate, E. dad(dy); onomat.] father; usually in voc. sg. tāta (and pl. tātā) used as term of affectionate, friendly or respectful address to one or more persons, both younger & older than the speaker, superior or inferior. As father (perhaps = tātā, see next) at Th 2, 423, 424 (+ammā). tāta (sg.) in addr. one: J iii.54; iv.281 (amma tāta mammy & daddy) DhA ii.48 (=father); iii.196 (id.); PvA 41 (= father), 73 (a son), 74 (a minister); J i.179 (id.); Miln 15, 16, 17 (a bhikkhu or thera), in addr. several Vin i.249; J ii.133; PvA 50. tātā (pl.) J i.166; 263; iv.138. Tātar
Tātar
[from Vedic trā, n. ag. to trāyati to protect] pro- tector, saviour, helper DA i.229. For meaning "father" see tāta & cp. pitā = tāyitā at J i.412. Tādin
Tādin
(adj. n.) (nom. tādī & tādi, in cpds. tādi˚) [Vedic tādṛś from tad -- dṛś of such appearance] such, such like, of such (good) qualities, "ecce homo"; in pregnant sense appl. to the Bhagavant & Arahants, characterized as "such" in 5 ways: see Nd1 114 sq.; SnA 202 & cp. Miln 382. tādī: Sn 712, 803 (& 154 tādī no for tādino, see SnA 201 sq.); tādi Sn 488, 509, 519 sq.; Dh 95; gen. tādino Dh 95, 96; with ref. to the Buddha D ii. 157≈ (ṭhitacittasa tādino, in BSk. sthiracittasya tāyinaḥ AvŚ ii.199); Vv 186 (expln VvA 95: iṭṭhādisu tādilakkhaṇasampattiyā tādino Satthu: see Nd1 114 sq.), of Arahant A ii.34; Sn 154 (or tādī no); instr. tādinā Sn 697; Miln 382; acc. tādiŋ Sn 86, 219, 957; :loc. pl. tādisu Pv ii.971 ( = iṭṭhādisu tādilakkhaṇappattesu PvA 140, cp. VvA 95). -- See tādisa1.

-- bhāva "such -- ness," high(est) qualification Vism 5, 214. -- lakkhaṇa the characteristic of such (a being) J iii.98 (˚yoga, cp. nakkhatta -- yoga); SnA 200 (˚patta); VvA 95 (˚sampatti). Tādina
Tādina
(adj.) [enlarged form of tādin) = tādin, only in loc. tādine Vv 212 (= tādimhi VvA 106). Tādisa
Tādisa1
(adj.) [Vedic tādṛśa from tad -- dṛsa = tad -- rūpa; a reduction of this form in P. tādin] such like, of such quality or character, in such a condition J i.151; iii.280; Sn 112, 317, 459; Nd2 277 (in expl. of tathāvidha); It 68; Pv ii.94; PvA 69, 72; Miln 382. Also correlative tādisa -- tādisa the one -- the other VvA 288. -- f. tādisī [Sk. tādṛsī] Pv i.56 (vaṇijjā). Tādisa
Tādisa2
(adj.) [tvaŋ+disa. Cp. Sk. tvādṛśa] like you J i.167; v.107. Tādisaka
Tādisaka
(adj.) = tādisa1, of such character Sn 278; It 68. Tāpana
Tāpana
(nt.) [from tāpeti] burning, scorching, roasting; fig. tormenting, torture, self -- mortification VvA 20 (aggimhi t. udake vā temanaŋ). Cp. ā˚; upa˚; pari˚. Tāpasa
Tāpasa
[from tapa & tapas] one who practises tapas, an ascetic (brahmin). Eight kinds are enumd at DA i.270 & SnA 295. -- J ii.101, 102; v.201; PvA 153; ˚pabbajjā the life of an a. J iii.119; DhA iv.29; DA i.270. -- f. tāpasī a female ascetic Mhvs vii.11, 12. Tāpeti
Tāpeti
[Sk. tāpayati, Caus. to tapati] to burn out, scorch, torment, fig. root out, quench Sn 451 (attānaŋ); J v. 267 (janapadaŋ); VvA 114 (kilesaŋ t. in expl. of tapassin). Cp. pari˚. Tāma
Tāma
[Sk. tāma] desire, longing, greed in tāmatamada- sangha -- suppahīna Th 1, 310, an epithet of frogs, which perhaps (with Kern, Toev. ii.88) is to be read as tāma -- tamata -- suppahita; "horribly greedy" (Kern, gruwelijk vraatzuchtig). Tāyati
Tāyati
[Sk. trāyate & trāte, connected with *ter in tarati, orig. to see through, to save, cp. tāṇa, etc.] to shelter, protect, preserve, guard; bring up, nourish S iv.246 (rūpa -- balaŋ, bhoga˚, ñāti˚, putta˚); J iv.387; Sn 579 (paralokato na pitā tāyate puttaŋ ñātī vā pana ñātake); PvA 7 (khettaŋ tāyati bījaŋ). Tāyitar
Tāyitar
[n. ag. from tāyati] one who protects, shelters or guards J i.412 (in expl. of tāṇa, q. v.). Tārā
Tārā
(f.) [Sk. tārā = Gr. a)sth/r, a)/ston (=Lat. astrum, in E. disaster), Lat. stella, Goth. staírnō, Ohg. sterro (:E. star), perhaps loan word from Semitic sources] a star, a planet Sn 687 (tārāsabha the lord, lit. "the bull" of the stars, i. e. the Moon).

-- gaṇa (tāra˚) the host of stars Pv ii.967 (cando va t. -- gaṇe atirocati). -- maṇivitāna "star -- jewel -- awning"; canopy of jewelled stars Vism 76. Tārakā
Tārakā
(f.) [Sk. tārakā] 1. a star, a planet: osadhī viya tārakā like the morning -- star (Venus) Vv 92 = Pv ii.110; -- J i.108; tāraka -- rūpa the light (or sparkling) of the stars D iii.85, 90; S iii.156=It 19; S v.44; VvA 79; Dhs 617. -- 2. fig. sparkling, glitter, twinkle; akkhi˚ the pupil of the eye M i.80; udaka˚ sparkling of the water ibid. Tāreti
Tāreti1
[Caus. of tarati1] to make cross, to help over, to bring through, save, help, assist Sn 319 (pare tārayetuŋ), 321 (so tāraye tattha bahū pi aññe); It 123 (tiṇṇo tarayataŋ varo: "one who is through is the best of those who can help through"); J i.28 (v.203). aor. atārayi Sn 539, 540 & ṭāresi Sn 545. Tāreti
Tāreti2
[Caus. of tarati2] to make haste Th 1, 293. Tāla
Tāla
[Sk. tāla, cp. Gr. ta_lis & thleqa/w (be green, sprout up) Lat. talea shoot, sprout] 1. the palmyra tree (fan palm), Borassus flabelliformis; freq. in comparisons & similes M i.187; J i.202 (˚vana), 273 (˚matta as tall as a palm): VvA 162; PvA 100 (chinnamūlo viya tālo). -- 2. a strip, stripe, streak J v.372 ( = raji).

-- aṭṭhika a kernel of the palm fruit DhA ii.53, cp. 60 (˚aṭṭhi -- khaṇḍa); -- kanda a bulbous plant J iv.46 ( = kalamba); -- kkhandha the trunk of a palm J iv.351; VvA 227 (˚parimāṇā mukhatuṇḍā: beaks of vultures in Niraya); PvA 56; -- cchidda see tāḷa˚; -- taruṇa a young shoot of the p. Vin i.189; -- pakka palm fruit It 84; -- paṇṇa a palm -- leaf DhA i.391; ii.249; iii.328; Bdhd 62; also used as a fan (tālapattehi kata -- maṇḍalavījanī VvA 147) Vv 3343 (Hardy for ˚vaṇṭha of Goon. ed. p. 30); VvA 147 (v. l. ˚vaṇṭa q. v.); Nd2 562 (+vidhūpana); -- patta a palm -- leaf Vin i.189; VvA 147; -- miñja the pith of a p. J iv.402; -- vaṇṭa [Sk. tālavṛṇta] a fan Vin ii.130 (+vidhūpana), 137; J i.265; VvA 44, cp. ˚paṇṇa; -- vatthu (more correct tālâvatthu=tāla -- avatthu) in tālâvatthukata a palm rendered groundless, i. e. uprooted; freq. as simile to denote complete destruction or removal (of passions, faults, etc.). Nearly always in formula pahīna ucchinna -- mūla t˚ anabhāvaŋ -- kata "given up, with roots cut out, like a palm with its base destroyed, rendered unable to sprout again" (Kern, Toev. ii.88: as een wijnpalm die niet meer geschiḳt is om weêr uit te schieten). This phrase was misunderstood in BSk.: M Vastu iii.360 has kālavastuŋ. -- The readings vary: tālāvatthu e. g. at M i.370; S i.69; iv.84; A i.135; ii.38; J v.267; tālav˚ S iii.10; v.327; Th 2, 478 (ThA 286: tālassa chindita-> -- ṭṭhāna -- sadisa); Nd2 freq. (see under pahīna); tālāvatthukatā at Vin iii.3. -- In other combn tālāvatthu bhavati (to be pulled out by the roots & thrown away) J v.267 (=chinnamūla -- tālo viya niraye nibbattanti p. 273), cp. M i.250; -- vāra "palm -- time" (?) or is it tāḷa˚ (gong -- turn?) DhA ii.49 (note: from tala -- pratiṣṭhāyāŋ?). -- 300 -- Tālīsa
Tālīsa
(nt.) (also tālissa J iv.286, tālīsaka Miln 338) [cp. Sk. tālī, tālīśa & talāśā] the shrub Flacourtia cataphracta & a powder or ointment obtained from it Vin i.203 (+tagara); J iv.286 (id.); Miln 338. Tālīsa
Tālīsa2
(No. 40) is short for cattālīsa, e.g. Ap. 103, 234 and passim. Tālu
Tālu
[Sk. tālu, see tala] the palate Sn 716; J i.419; Vism 264 (˚matthaka top of p.); PvA 260. Tāḷa
Tāḷa1
[taḍ, cp. Sk. tāla a blow, or musical time; tālīyaka cymbal] beating, striking, the thing beaten or struck, i. e. a musical instrument which is beaten, an instr. of percussion, as a cymbal, gong, or tambourine (for tāḷa = gong cp. thāla): (a) gong, etc. J i.3; vi.60; Th 1, 893; DA i.85; DhsA 319 (kaŋsa˚). -- (b) music in general DhA iv.67.

-- âvacara musical time or measure, music, a musician D ii.159 (v. l. tāla˚); J i.60 (l); iv.41; VvA 257 (˚parivuta, of an angel). Tāḷa
Tāḷa2
(nt.) [Sk. tālaka = tāḍa AvŚ ii.56, tāḍaka Divy 577] a key (orig. a "knocker"?) Vin ii.148 (3 kinds: loha˚, kaṭṭha˚, visāṇa˚); Bdhd 1.

-- cchiggala a key -- hole S iv.290; v.453; Vism 500. -- cchidda id. Vin ii.120, 148, 153 (all tāla˚); iii.118; DhA iii.8 (l). Tāḷī
Tāḷī
(f.) a strike, a blow, in urattāḷiŋ karoti to strike one's chest (as a sign of grief) PvA 39, etc. (see ura). Tāḷeti
Tāḷeti
[Sk. tāḍayati, taḍ perhaps = tud] to strike a blow, flog, beat, esp. freq. in phrase kasāhi tāḷeti to flog with whips, etc. (in list of punishments, see kasā) M i.87; A ii.122; Nd2 604; PvA 4, etc. -- ppr. pass. taḍḍamāna (for *tāḍyamāna) J vi.60 (so read for taddamāna; Com poṭhīyamāna). -- pp. tāḷita J vi.60 (turiya˚); Vv 621 (id.); Sdhp 80. Cp. abhi˚. Tāva
Tāva
(adv.) [Sk. tāvat] so much, so long; usually correl. with yāva how long, how much; in all meanings to be understood out of elliptical application of this correlation. Thus I. yāva -- tāva as long as: yāva dve janā avasiṭṭhā ahesuŋ tāva aññamaññaŋ ghātayiŋsu J i. 254; yāva dukkhā nirayā idha tattha pi tāva ciraŋ vasitabbaŋ Sn 678. Neg. na tāva -- yāva na not until: M i.428; S v.261; A i.141≈(na t. kālaŋ karoti yāva na taŋ pāpakammaŋ byantihoti he does not die until his evil kamma is exhausted). II. Elliptical: 1. temporal: so long as, for the time (tāvakālikaŋ = yāvak˚tāvak˚; see below). -- 2. comparative: (such -- ) as, like, so, such, just so, rather, in such a degree, even; tāvabahuŋ suvaṇṇaŋ so much gold Vin i.209; t. -- mahanto so much J i.207; t. madhuraphala with such sweet fruit J ii.105; asītiyā tāva kimi -- kulānaŋ sādhāraṇa (of the body) or rather, i. e. Vism 235; vatthāni t. devapātubhūtāni PvA 44; paṭhamaŋ t. (even) at once, right away PvA 113, 132; gilānāya t. ayaŋ etissā rūpasobhā even in sickness she is so beautiful VvA 76; parittakassa kusalakammassa t.=quidem PvA 51; paŋsukūlikangaŋ t. in the first place Vism. 62. -- 3. concessive: (a) (absol.) as far as it goes, considering, because: yadi evaŋ pitā tāva purisabhāve na rodati, mātu nāma hadayaŋ mudukaŋ "even if the father as man does not weep, surely," &c., PvA 63. -- (b) with imper. in expr. like gaccha tāva go as long as you like (to go) (=gaccha tāva yāva gaccheyyāsi), i. e. if you like, cp. Ger. geh'immer; passa tāva just look=Lat. licet. Therefore sometimes=please or simply an emphatic imper. as "do go," etc. J ii.5 (ete t. aguṇā hontu let them be faulty), 133 (ehi t.), 352 (tiṭṭha t. leave off please), iii.53 (pāto va t. hotu only let it be to -- morrow, i. e. wait tillt -- m.); iv.2 taŋ t. me detha give me this though); VvA 289 (vīmaŋsatha t. just think); PvA 4 (t. ayyo āgametu yāvâyaŋ puriso pānīyaŋ pivissati may your honour wait till this man shall have drunk the water), 13 (therā t. gacchantu). With prohibitive: mā tāva ito agā please do not go from here Pv ii.322. -- 4. hortative, with 1st pers. fut. equal to imperative -- subjunctive or injunctive, cp. 3 (b): let me, well, now, then (cp. Lat. age in dic age, etc.). J i.62 (puttaŋ t. passissāmi please let me see the son), 263 (vīmaŋsissāmi t. let me think), 265 (nahāyissāmi t. just let me bathe). -> III. In other combinations: tāva -- na although -- yet= not even: ajjā pi t. me balaŋ na passasi not even to -- day have you yet seen my full strength J i.207; t. mahādhanassāmī na me dātuŋ piyaŋ ahu although lord of wealth yet I did not like to give Pv ii.76. na -- tāva (or tāva in neg. sentence) not yet, not even, not so much as (=Lat. ne -- quidem) Pv ii.112 (na ca tāva khīyati does not even diminish a bit); PvA 117 (attano kenaci anabhibhavanīyataŋ eva tāva: that he is not to be overpowered, even by anyone). tāva -- d -- eva just now, instantly, on the spot, at once Sn 30; J i.61, 151; iv.2; Pv ii.89 (=tadā eva PvA 109); PvA 23, 46, 74, 88, etc. tāvade (=tāva -- d -- eva) for all times Pv iv.338 (= PvA 255).

-- kālika (adj.) "as long as the time lasts," i. e. for the time being, temporary, pro tempore Vin ii.174; iii.66; iv.286; J i.121, 393; Vism 95; ThA 288; PvA 87 ( = na sassata). Tāvataka
Tāvataka
(adj.) [der. fr. tāva] just so much or just so long (viz. as the situation requires), with (or ellipt. without) a corresp. yāvataka Vin i.83 (yāvatake -- t. as many as): D ii.18 (yāvatakv' assa kāyo tāvatakv' assa vyāmo as tall as is his body so far can he stretch his arms: the 19th sign of a Mahāpurisa); instr. as adv. tāvatakena after a little time Miln 107; DhA iii.61. -- See also tattaka (contracted of tāvataka). Tāvatā
Tāvatā
(adv.) [from tāva] 1. so long (corr. to yāva) Dpvs iv.17. -- 2. on that account, thus D i.104 (v. l. ettāvatā); Dh 266. Tāvatiŋsa
Tāvatiŋsa
[tayo+tiŋsa. Cp. Vedic trayastriŋśat] No. 33, only in cpds. denoting the 33 gods, whose chief is Sakka, while the numeral 33 is always tettiŋsa. This number occurs already in the Vedas with ref. to the gods & is also found in Zend -- Avesta (see Haug, Language & Writings, etc., pp. 275, 276). The early Buddhists, though they took over the number 33, rejected the superstitious beliefs in the magical influence and mystic meaning of that & other simple numbers. And they altered the tradition. The king of the gods had been Indra, of disreputable character from the Buddhist point of view. Him they deposed, and invented a new god named Sakka, the opposite in every way to Indra (see for details Dial. ii.294 -- 298). Good Buddhists, after death in this world, are reborn in heaven (sagga), by which is meant the realm of the Thirty-three (D ii.209). There they are welcomed by the Thirty-three with a song of triumph (D ii.209, 211, 221, 227). The Thirty -- three are represented as being quite good Buddhists. Sakka their new chief and Brahmā address them in discourses suitable only for followers of the new movement (D ii.213, 221). See further Vin i.12; M i.252; ii.78; iii.100; A iii.287; iv.396 = VvA 18 (cpd with the people of Jambudīpa); v.59, 331, Vism 225, etc. -- See also tidasa.

-- devaloka the god -- world of the 33; freq. e. g. J i.202; Vism 399; DhA iii.8; -- bhavana the realm of the 33 gods J i.202; Vism 207 sq., 390, 416, and passim. Tāvata
Tāvata
(nt.) [abstr. fr. tāva] lit. "so -- much -- ness," i. e. relative extent or sphere, relatively Vism 481, 482. Tāsa
Tāsa
[see tasati2] terror, trembling, fear, fright, anxiety S iii.57; J i.342; iii.177, 202; Miln 24. Cp. san˚. Tāsaniya
Tāsaniya
(adj.) to be dreaded, dreadful, fearful Miln 149. -- 301 -- Tāhaŋ
Tāhaŋ
contraction of 1. taŋ ahaŋ: see ta˚; 2. te ahaŋ: see tvaŋ. Ti
Ti
(adv.) [cp. Sk. iti] the apostrophe form of iti, thus. See iti. Ti˚
Ti˚
[Vedic tris, Av. priś, Gr. tri/s, Lat. ter (fr. ters>*tris, cp. testis> *tristo, trecenti>*tricenti), Icl. prisvar, Ohg. driror] base of numeral three in compn; consisting of three, threefold; in numerical cpds. also = three (3 times).

-- kaṭuka threefold spices (kaṭuka -- bhaṇḍa) VvA 186; -- gāvuta a distance of 3/4 of a league (i. e. about 2 miles), DhA i.108 (less than yojana, more than usabha), 131, 396; ii.43, 61, 64, 69; iii.202, 269; VvA 227; B. on S i.52 (sarīra); -- catu three or four DhA i.173; -- cīvara (nt.) the 3 robes of a bhikkhu, consisting of: diguṇā sanghāṭi, ekacciya uttarāsanga, ekacciya antaravāsaka Vin i.289, 296; ii.302. ticīvarena avippavāsa Vin i.109 sq. -- Vism 60, 66; DhA iv.23. -- tālamattaŋ 3 palm -- trees high DhA ii.62. -- daṇḍa 1. a tripod as one of the requisites of a hermit to place the water -- pot on (kuṇḍikā) J i.8 (tidaṇḍakuṇḍikādike tāpasa -- parikkhārā), 9 (hanging from the kāja); ii.317 (see tedaṇḍika). -- 2. part of a chariot A iv.191 (v. l. daṇḍa only). -- diva the 3 heavens (that is the Tāvatiŋsa heaven) D ii.167, 272 (tidivûpapanna); S i.96 (˚ŋ ṭhānaŋ upeti), 181 (ākankha -- māno ˚ŋ anuttaraŋ). -- pada [cp. Vedic tripad or tripād, Gr. tri/pous, Lat. tripes: tripod] consisting of 3 feet or (in prosody) of 3 padas Sn 457 (w. ref. to metre Sāvittī); -- (p)pala threefold Vism 339; -- pallattha "turning in 3 ways," i. e. skilled in all occupations (Kern, Toev.: zeer listig) J i.163 (of miga; Com. expl. as lying on 3 sides of its lair); -- piṭaka the 3 Piṭakas Vism 62, 241; DhA i.382; -- peṭaka = tepiṭaka Miln 90; tipeṭakin at Vin v.3; -- maṇḍala (nt.) the 3 circles (viz. the navel & the 2 knees) Vin ii.213 (˚ŋ paṭicchādento parimaṇḍalaŋ nivāsento); cp. Vin. Texts i.155; -- yojana a distance of 3 leagues, i. e. 20 miles, or fig. a long dist.; Vism 392 (tiyojanika setacchatta); DhA ii.41 (˚magga); VvA 75 (˚mattake vihāraŋ agamāsi); PvA 216 (sā ca pokkharaṇī Vesaliyā ˚mattake hoti); ˚satika 300 cubits long J ii.3; -- loka the 3 worlds (i. e. kāma, rūpa, arūpa -- loka) Sdhp 29, 276, 491 (cp. tebhūmaka); -- vagga consisting of 3 divisions or books DA i.2 (Dīghāgamo vaggato t. hoti); -- (v)angika having 3 angas (of jhāna) Dhs 161; -- vassika for the 3 seasons ( -- gandha -- sālibhattaŋ bhuñjantā) DhA ii.9; J i.66 (id.); -- vidha 3 fold, of sacrifice (yañña) D i.128, 134, 143; of aggi (fire) J i.4 & Miln 97; Vism 147 (˚kalyāṇatā). -- visākha a three -- forked frown on the forehead S i.118; M i.109; -- sandhi consisting of 3 spaces J vi.397 (tāya senāya Mithilā t. -- parivāritā), expld as an army made up of elephants, chariots, cavalry, and infantry, with a space between each two. Tiŋsaŋ
Tiŋsaŋ
(tiŋsa˚) [Vedic triŋśat, cp. Lat. trīginta, Oir. tricha] the number 30 D i.81≈(tiŋsaŋ pi jātiyo); S ii.217 (t. -- mattā bhikkhū); dat. instr. tiŋsāya A v.305 (dhammehi samannāgato); Sn p. 87 (pi dadāmi) PvA 281 (vassasahassehi): t. -- yojana -- maggaŋ (āgato) DhA ii.76, 79; iii.172; PvA 154; ˚yojanika kantāra DhA ii. 193 (cp. 192); J v.46 (magga); DhA i.26 (vimāna); t. -- vassasahassāni āyuppamāṇaŋ (of Konāgamana Buddha) D ii.3; t. -- mattāni vassāni Miln 15; t. -- vassasahassāni PvA 281 = DhA ii.10. So of an immense crowd: tiŋsa bhikkhu -- sahassāni D ii.6; tiŋsa -- mattā sūkarā J ii.417; ˚sahassa -- bhikkhū DhA i.24. Tika
Tika
(adj. -- n.) [Vedic trika] consisting of 3, a triad S ii. 218 (t. -- bhojana); DhA iv.89 ( -- nipāta, the book of the triads, a division of the Jātaka), 108 (t. -- catukka -- jhāna the 3 & the 4 jhānas); Miln 12 (tika -- duka -- paṭimaṇḍitā dhammasanganī); Vism 13 sq.; DhsA 39 ( -- duka triad & pair). Tikicchaka
Tikicchaka
[fr. tikicchati] a physician, a doctor A v.219; J i.4 (adj. & vejja); iv.361; PvA 233. Tikicchati
Tikicchati
[also cikicchati = Sk. cikitsati. Desid. of cit, to aim at, think upon, in pregnant sense of endeavouring to heal] to treat medically, to cure Vin i.276; S i.222; Miln 172, 272, 302. Caus. tikicchāpeti J i.4. Tikicchā
Tikicchā
(f.) [from last] the art of healing, practice of medicine D i.10 (dāraka˚ infant healing); Sn 927 (˚ŋ māmako na seveyya). -- See also tekiccha. Tikkaŋ
Tikkaŋ
at J v.291 in "yāva majjhantikā tikkam āgami yeva" is to be read as "yāva majjhantik' âtikkamm'-> âgami yeva." Tikkha
Tikkha
(adj.) [ = tikhiṇa] sharp, clever, acute, quick (only fig. of the mind), in tikkh -- indriya (opp. mud -- indriya) Nd2 2353p=Ps i.121=ii.195; & tikkha -- paññatā A i.45. Tikkhattuŋ
Tikkhattuŋ
(adv.) [Sk. trikṛtvaḥ] three times (cp. tayo II. C 2), esp. in phrase vanditvā t. padakkhiṇaŋ katvā "having performed the reverent parting salutation 3 times" VvA 173, 219; t. sāvesi he announced it 3 times J ii.352; DhA ii.4; t. paggaṇhāpesi offered 3 times PvA 74. See also J iv.267; v.382; vi.71; DhA ii.5, 42, 65, 338; iv.122 & passim. Tikhiṇa
Tikhiṇa
(adj.) [Vedic tīkṣṇa of which t. is the diaeretic form, whereas the contracted forms are tiṇha (q. v.) & tikkha. Cp. also Sk. tikta pp. of tij, tejate. From *steg in Gr. sti/zw "stitch" & stikto/s, Lat. instīgo, Ohg. stehhan, Ger. stecken, E. stick] pointed, sharp, pungent, acrid; fig. "sharp," clever, cunning, acute (in this meaning only in contr. form tikkha) J v.264; DhA ii.9; iv.13; PvA 152, 221 ( = tippa). (ati -- ) tikhinatā Miln 278. See also tippa & tibba & cp. tejo. Tiṭṭha
Tiṭṭha
(adj.) [pp. of tasati1] dry, hard, rough J vi.212 (˚sela hard rock). Tiṭṭhati
Tiṭṭhati
[Frequentative of Vedic sthā, stand (cp. sthāna, Lat. sto: see ṭhāna) = Av. hiśtaiti, Gr. i(/sthmi, Lat. sisto] to stand, etc. -- I. Forms: pres. ind. tiṭṭhati (Sn 333, 434; Pv i.51); imper. 2nd tiṭṭha, 3rd tiṭṭhatu; ppr. tiṭṭhaŋ, tiṭṭhanto, tiṭṭhamāna; pot. tiṭṭhe (Sn 918, 968) & tiṭṭheyya (Sn. 942); fut. ṭhassati (J i.172, 217); aor. aṭṭhāsi (J i.279, pl. aṭṭhaŋsu J ii.129) & aṭṭhā (cp. agā, orig. impf.) (Sn 429; J i.188); inf. ṭhātuŋ (PvA 174); ger. ṭhatvā (Sn 887); grd. ṭhānīya (PvA 72). -- pp. ṭhita, Caus. ṭhapeti. An apparent Med. -- Pass. ṭhīyati, as found in cpd. pati -- ṭṭhīyati is to be expld as Med. of paṭi+sthyā (see thīna), and should be written paṭi -- tthīyati. See under patiṭṭhīyati. See also ṭhāna & ṭhiti. -- II. Meanings. -- 1. to stand, stand up, to be standing (see ṭhāna I. 1a): ṭhānakappana -- vacanaŋ nisajjādi -- paṭikkhepato PvA 24; opp. to walking or lying down: tiṭṭhaŋ caraŋ nisinno vā Sn 151, 193; tiṭṭhamānāya eva c' assā gabbhavuṭṭhānaŋ ahosi "she was delivered standing" J i.52; ekamantaŋ aṭṭhāsi PvA 68, etc.; cankamana -- koṭiyaŋ ṭhatvā PvA 79. -- 2. to stop, stay, abide; to last, endure, be at rest; fig. to remain in, abide by, acquiesce in (see ṭhāna I. 1b). In imper. tiṭṭhatu it approaches the meanings of ṭhapeti viz. leave it alone, let it be so, all right. yāva kāyo ṭhassati tāva naŋ dakkhinti deva -- manussā (as long as the body shall last) D i.46. tiṭṭhe shall he live on (cp. ṭhāna II.d Sn 1053, 1072 =Nd2 283, tiṭṭheyya saṭṭhikappasahassāni to stay on indefinitely); tiṭṭheyya kappaŋ D ii.103. tiṭṭhantī anto vimānasmiŋ "remaining inside the castle" Pv i.101; tiṭṭha tāva "stop please" J ii.352; tiṭṭhabhadantika one who bids the guest stay (combd w. ehi -- bh˚) D i.166; M i.342; A i.295; ii.206: ovāde ṭhatvā (abiding by) J i.153; vi.367; similarly J vi.336. -- Imper. tiṭṭhatu J iv.40; Miln 14; PvA 74. -- 3. to live (on=instr.), behave, exist, be (see ṭhāna I. 2); to be in a certain condition [gati, cp. ṭhāna II. (c)]. Often periphrastically for finite verb (with ger.: cp. gata & ṭhita) tiṭṭhantam enaŋ jānāti (he knows their "gati") Sn 1114 (see Nd2 283); āhārena tiṭṭhati PvA 27 (is supported by, cp. ṭhiti); yāvatāyukaŋ ṭhatvā (outliving their lives) PvA 66; karuṇa -- ṭhānīya (=*kāruṇayitabba) deserving pity PvA 72; yā tvaŋ tiṭṭhasi (how you are or look!) Vv 441, etc. -- with ger.: pharitvā aṭṭhāsi (pervaded) J vi.367; aṭṭhiŋ āhacca aṭṭhāsi (cut through to the bone) J iv.415; gehaŋ samparivāretvā aṭṭhaŋsu (encircled the house) PvA 22. -- 302 -- Tiṇa
Tiṇa
(nt.) [Vedic tṛṇa, from *ter (cp. tarati) to pierce, orig. "point" ( = blade); Goth. paúrnus, Ags. porn=E. thorn, Ger. dorn] grass, herb; weed; straw; thatch; hay, litter S iii.137 (tiṇa, kasā, kusa, babbaja, bīraṇa); satiṇakaṭṭhodaka full of grass, wood & water (of an estate) D i.87, 111, etc.; sītaŋ vā uṇhaŋ vā rajo vā tiṇaŋ vā ussāvo vā (dust & weeds) D ii.19; A i.145; t.+paṇṇa (grass & leaves1) A i.183; VvA 5. -- J i.108 (dabba˚), 295; iii.53; Pv i.81 (harita t.); iv.148; Vism 353 (kuṇṭha˚); DA i.77 (alla˚ fresh grass); PvA 7 (weed), 62 (grass), 112; DhA iv.121; Miln 47 (thatch), 224 (id.).

-- aṇḍupaka a roll of grass Vin i.208 = iii.249; -- āgāra a thatched cottage A i.101 (+naḷāgāra); -- ukkā a firebrand of dry grass or hay S ii.152; iii.185; J i.212, 296; Vism 428; DhA i.126; ThA 287; Bdhd 107; -- karala a wisp of grass DhA iii.38; -- kājaka a load of g. DhA iv.121; -- gahana a thicket of g., a jungle A i.153; -- cuṇṇa crushed & powdered (dry) grass or herbs Vin i.203; VvA 100 ( -- rajânukiṇṇa); -- jāti grass -- creeper VvA 162; -- dāya a grass -- jungle S ii.152; -- dosa damaged by weeds (khetta) Dh 356; PvA 7; -- pupphaka ( -- roga) sickness caused by the flowering of grass, hay -- fever Miln 216; -- purisaka a straw -- man, a scarecrow Miln 352; Vism 462; DhsA 111; -- bhakkha eating grass; of animals M iii.167; of ascetics D i.166; Pug 55; A i.241, 295; -- bhusa chaff, litter, dry grass VvA 47; -- rukkha a shrub; -- vatthāraka one of the seven Adhikaraṇasamathas (ways in which litigation may be settled). In case mutual complaints of breach of the rules have been brought before a chapter, then the chapter may decline to go into the details and, with the consent of the litigants, declare all the charges settled. See Vin. Texts, iii.30 -- 34. This is the "covering over as if with grass" Vin ii.87 (in detail, cp. also tassapāpiyyasikā); D iii.254; A i.99; M ii.250; -- santhāraka a mat of grass Vin i.286; ii.113, 116; J i.360. Tiṇava
Tiṇava
a sort of drum A ii.117. Tiṇḍuka
Tiṇḍuka
see tinduka. Tiṇṇa
Tiṇṇa
[pp. of tarati] one who has reached the other shore (always fig.) gone through, overcome, one who has attained Nibbāna. Ogha˚ gone through the great flood S i.3, 142; Sn 178, 823, 1082, 1101, 1145; D iii. 54; Sn 21 (+pāragata), 359 (+parinibbuta), 515, 545 (tiṇṇo tāres' imaŋ pajaŋ); It 123 (tiṇṇo tārayataŋ varo); Dh 195 ( -- sokapariddava); Nd2 282.

-- kathankatha (adj.) having overcome doubt, free from doubt Sn 17, 86, 367; -- vicikiccha = prec. Vin i.16; D i.110; ii.224, 229; Pug 68; DA i.211. Tiṇha
Tiṇha
[see tikhiṇa] sharp (of swords, axes, knives, etc.) D i.56 (sattha); S iv.160, 167 (kuṭhārī); A iv.171; Sn 667 (˚dhāra), 673 (asipattavana); J i.253; Sdhp 381. Titikkhati
Titikkhati
[Sk. titikṣate, Desid. of tij, cp. tijo & tikhiṇa to bear, endure, stand S i.221; Sn 623; Dh 321 = Nd2 475 B7; Dh 399 (titikkhissaŋ=sahissāmi DhA iv.3); J v.81, 368. Titikkhā
Titikkhā
(f.) [see last] endurance, forgiveness, long- suffering S i.7; v.4; Dh 184; Nd2 203. Titta
Titta
[pp. of tappati2] satisfied (with = instr.) enjoying (c. gen.), happy, contented A i.87=Pug 26 (+tappetar); Miln 249; VvA 86 (=pīṇita); PvA 46 (dibbâhārassa), 59 (=suhita), 109 (=pīṇita). -- atitta dissatisfied, insatiate J i.440; iii.275; Dh 48 (kāmesu). Tittaka
Tittaka
(adj.) [cp. Sk. tiktaka from tij] sharp, bitter (of taste) M i.80 (˚alābu), 315 (id.); PvA 47 (id.; so read for tintaka lābu) Dhs 629 = Nd2 540 (tittika; enumd between lavaṇa & kaṭuka); DhsA 320. Tittakatta
Tittakatta
(nt.) [abstr. to tittaka] bitterness, enumd with lavaṇattaŋ & kaṭukattaŋ at Miln 56 = 63 (cp. Nd2 540). Titti
Titti
(f.) [from tappati2] satisfaction (in = loc.) Dh 186 =ThA 287 (na kahāpaṇavassena t. kāmesu vijjati); n' atthi t. kāmānaŋ Th 2, 487; J v.486 (dhammesu); VvA 11; PvA 32 (˚ŋ gacchati find s.) 55 (paṭilabhati), 127. Tittika
Tittika
in sama˚ at D i.244, Vin i.230, brimful, of a river. Derivation & meaning doubtful. See the note at Buddhist Suttas, 178, 9. Tittimant
Tittimant
(adj.) [titti+mant] satisfied, contented, so read at J iii.70 & vi.508 for kittimant. Tittira
Tittira
[Onomat. cp. Vedic tittira & tittiri, Gr. tatu/ras pheasant, Lit. teterva heath -- cock; Lat. tetrinnio to cackle] partridge J i.218; iii.538. -- pattikā a kind of boot Vin i.186. Tittiriya
Tittiriya
(adj.) [fr. tittira] belonging to a partridge, like a partridge J i.219 (brahmacariya). Tittha
Tittha
(nt.) [Vedic tīrtha, from *ter, tarate, to pass through, orig. passage (through a river), ford] 1. a fording place, landing place, which made a convenient bathing place D ii.89 = Vin i.230 (Gotama˚ the G. ford); J i.339, 340 (titthāraṇa); ii.111; iii.228 (˚nāvika ferryman); 230 (nāvā˚ a ferry); iv.379; Pv ii.120; iii.64; iv.122 (su˚); Dāvs. v.59 (harbour). Titthaŋ jānāti to know a "fording place," i. e. a means or a person to help over a difficulty or doubt M i.223=A v.349 (neg.) 2. a sect (always with bad connotation. Promising to lead its votaries over into salvation, it only leads them into error).

-- âyatana the sphere or fold of a sect (cp. titthiya) Vin i.60, 69; ii.279; M i.483; A i.173; Pug 22; Dhs 381, 1003 (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 101n); DA i.118; Ledi Sadaw in J.P.T.S. 1913, 117 -- 118; -- kara a "ford -- maker," founder of a sect D i.47, 116; M i.198; Sn pp. 90, 92; Miln 4, 6, etc.; -- ññutā knowledge of a ford, in fig. sense of titthaŋ jānāti (see above) Nett 29, 80. Titthika
Titthika
(adj.) [Possible reading in Burmese MSS. for tittika. But the two compound letters (tt and tth) are so difficult to distinguish that it is uncertain which of the two the scribe really meant]. Titthiya
Titthiya
[from tittha 2, cp. Divy 817; AvŚ i.48; ii.20. An adherent of another sect (often as añña˚), an heretic Vin i.54, 84, 136, 159 (˚samādāna), 306 (˚dhaja), 320; S i.65; iv.37, 394; D iii.44, 46; Sn 381, 891; Nd2 38; Ps i.160; Pug 49; Vbh 247. añña˚ e. g. Vin i.101; D i.175 sq.; iii.130 sq.; J ii.415, 417. -- sāvaka a follower of an heretic teacher Vin i.172; J i.95; Vism 17. Tithi
Tithi
[Sk. tithi] a lunar day DhA i.174; PvA 198. Tidasa
Tidasa
(num.) [Vedic tridaśa] thirty (cp. tiŋsa), esp. the thirty deities (pl.) or belonging to them (adj.). It is the round figure for 33, and is used as equivalent to tāvatiŋsa. Nandanaŋ rammaŋ tidasānaŋ mahāvanaŋ Pv iii.119 = Vv 1813; devā tidasā sahindakā Vv 301; Sdhp 420.

-- âdhipati the Lord of the 30 (viz. Sakka) Vv 478; -- inda ruler of the 30 Sdhp 411, 478; -- gaṇa the company of the 30 Sn 679 (Com. tettiŋsa); Vv 416; -- gatin going to the 30 (as one of the gatis) Vv 3512 ( = tidasabhavanaŋ gata Tāvatiŋsadevanikāyaŋ uppanna VvA 164); -- pura the city of the 30, i. e. Heaven Miln 291; -- bhavana the state of the 30, i. e. heavenly existence VvA 164 (=Tāvatiŋsabhavana). -- 303 -- Tidhā
Tidhā
(adv.) [ti+dhā] in three ways or parts, threefold Miln 282 ( -- pabhinna nāgarājā). Tinta
Tinta
(adj.) [ = timita from temeti] wet, moist Miln 286; DhA ii.40 (˚mukha). Tintaka
Tintaka
at PvA 47 (˚alābu) is to be read as tittaka˚. Tintiṇa
Tintiṇa
(nt.) greed, desire; (adj.) greedy. Ep. of a pāpa- bhikkhu A v.149 (Com. tintiṇaŋ vuccati taṇhā, tāya samannāgato āsankābahulo vā); Vbh 351 (tintiṇaŋ tintiṇāyanā, etc. = loluppaŋ). Tintiṇāti & Tintiṇāyati
Tintiṇāti
& Tintiṇāyati [either = Sk. timirayati to be obscured, from tim in timira, or from stim (Sk. *tistimāyati>*stistim˚ after tiṣṭhati>*stiṣṭhati;=P. titiṇāyati) to become stiff, cp. timi, thīna and in meaning mucchati. The root tam occurs in same meaning in cpd. nitammati (q. v.=Sk. nitāmyati) at J iv.284, expld by atikilamati] to become sick, to swoon, to (stiffen out in a) faint J i.243 (tintiṇanto corresp. with mucchita); vi.347 (tintiṇāyamāna, v. l. tiṇāy˚). Tinduka
Tinduka
[Sk. tinduka] the tree Diospyros embryopteris D i.178 (v. l. tiṇḍ˚; J v.99; tiṇḍukāni food in a hermitage J iv.434; vi.532. -- tindukakandarā Npl. the T. cave Vin ii.76. -- See also timbaru & timbarūsaka. Tipu
Tipu
[cp. Sk. trapu, non -- Aryan?] lead, tin Vin i.190 (˚maya); S v.92; J ii.296; Miln 331 (˚kāra a worker in lead, tinsmith); Vism 174 (˚maṇḍala); DhA iv.104 (˚parikhā). Tipusa
Tipusa
(nt.) [Sk. trapusa] a species of cucumber J v.37; VvA 147. Tippa
Tippa
(adj.) [a variant of tibba = Sk. tīvra, presumably from tij (cp. tikhiṇa), but by Bdhgh connected w. tap (tapati, burn): tippā ti bahalā tāpana -- vasena vā tippā Com. to Anguttara (see M i.526)] piercing, sharp, acute, fierce; always & only with ref. to pains, esp. pains suffered in Niraya. In full combns sarīrikā vedanā dukkhā tippā kharā M i.10; A ii.116, 143, 153; ekantadukkhā t. kaṭukā ved. M i.74; bhayānaka ekantatippa Niraya Pv iv.19 (=tikhiṇadukkha˚ PvA 221); nerayikā sattā dukkhā t. kaṭukā ved˚ vediyamānā Miln 148. Tibba
Tibba
(adj.) probably a contamination of two roots of different meaning; viz. tij & tim (of tamas) or = stim to be motionless, cp. styā under thīna] 1. sharp, keen, eager: tibbagārava very devout A ii.21; Nett 112 (cp. tīvraprasāda AvŚ i.130); t. -- cchanda D iii.252, 283. -> 2. dense, thick; confused, dark, dim: t. -- rāga Dh 349 (=bahalarāga DhA iv.68); A ii.149; tibbo vanasaṇḍo avijjāya adhivacanaŋ S iii.109; tibbasārāga (kāmesu) S iii.93=It 90; A ii.30; tibbo manussaloko (dark, dense) Miln 7; ˚andhakāra dense darkness Vism 500 sq.; ˚kilesu deep blemish (of character) Vism 87. Timi
Timi
[Derivation unknown. Sk. timi] a large fish, a leviathan; a fabulous fish of enormous size. It occurs always in combn w. timingala, in formula timi timingala timitimingala, which should probably be reduced to one simple timitimingala (see next). Timingala
Timingala
[timi+gila, gl, see note on gala] in combn w. timi, timitimingala. Sk. has timingila & timingilagila: redupl. in 2nd syllable where P. has redupl. in 1st; fisheater, redupl. as intens. = greedy or monstrous fisheater, a fabulous fish of enormous size, the largest fish in existence Vin ii.238=A iv.200=Nd2 2353q; Ps ii.196; Miln 377. At Ud 54 sq. & Miln 262 we find the reading timi timingala timirapingala, which is evidently faulty. A Sanskritized form of t. is timitimingala at Divy 502. See timiratipingala, & cp. also the similar Sk. cilicima a sort of fish. Timira
Timira
(adj.) [Sk. timira fr. tim = tam (as in tamas), to which also belong tibba 2 & tintiṇāti. This is to be distinguished from tim in temeti to (be or) make wet. See tama] dark; nt. darkness Vv 323 (t. -- tamba); J iii.189 (t. -- rukkha); vanatimira a flower J iv.285; v.182. Timiratipingala
Timiratipingala
(nt.) a great ocean fish, DhsA 13, v. timin- gala. Timirāyittata
Timirāyittata
(nt.) [abstr. to timirāyita, pp. of timirayati to obscure, denom. to timira] gloom, darkness S iii.124 ( = Māra). Timisa
Timisa
(nt.) [Vedic tamisrā = tamas] darkness J iii.433 (andhakāra -- timissāya); Pug 30 (andh˚ -- timisāya); Miln 283 Timīsikā
Timīsikā
(f.) [timisa+ka] darkness, a very dark night Vv 96; J iv.98. Timbaru
Timbaru
a certain tree (Strychnos nux vomica or Dios- pyros) J vi.336; ˚tthanī (f.) "with breasts like the t. fruit" Sn 110; J vi.457 (SnA 172: taruṇadārikā); VvA 137 (t. -- nādasadisa). Timbarukkha
Timbarukkha
= timbarūsaka J vi.529. Timbarūsaka
Timbarūsaka
= timbaru (Diospyros or Strychnos) Vin iii.59; Vv 3327 (=tindukaphala VvA 147; tipusasadisā ekā vallijāti timbarūsakan ti ca vadanti); DhA iii.315. Tiraccha
Tiraccha
(adv.) [Vedic tiryañc, obliquely, from *ter (tarati). Goth. pairh, Ohg. durh, E. through; cp. tiriyaŋ] across, obliquely; in ˚bhūta deviating, going wrong, swerving from the right direction DA i.89 (see under tiracchāna -- kathā). Tiracchāna
Tiracchāna
[for ˚gata = Sk. tiraścīna (˚gata)=tiraśca; "going horizontally," i. e. not erect. Cp. tiraccha, tiriyaŋ, tiro] an animal It 92 (tiracchānaŋ ca yoniyo for tiracchāna -- yoniyo); Vbh 339 (˚gāminī paṭipadā leading to rebirth among beasts); VvA 23 (manussatiracchāna an animal -- man, wild man, "werwolf").

-- kathā "animal talk"; wrong or childish talk in general Vin i.188; D i.7, 178; iii.54; Vism 127; expld at DA i.89 by anīyānikattā sagga -- mokkha -- maggānaŋ tiraccha -- bhūtā kathā; -- gata an animal, a beast Vin iv.7; S iii.152 = DA i.23; (t. pāṇā) M iii.167 (t. pāṇā tiṇabhakkhā); Nd2 on Sn 72 (t. -- pāṇā); J i.459 (=vanagocara); Vbh 412 sq.; -- yoni the realm of the brute creation, the animals. Among the 5 gatis (niraya t. manussā devā pettivisaya) it counts as an apāyagati, a state of misery D i.228; iii.234; S i.34; iii.225 sq.; iv. 168, 307; A i.60; ii.127, 129; Pv iv.111; Vism 103, 427; PvA 27, 166; -- yonika (& yoniya A i.37) belonging to the realm of the animals S v.356; -- vijjā a low art, a pseudo -- science Vin ii.139; D i.9 sq. Tiriyaŋ
Tiriyaŋ
(adv.) [Vedic tiryañc (tiryak) to tiras, see tiro & cp. perhaps Ger. quer = E. thwart, all to *ter in tarati] transversely, obliquely, horizontally (as opp. to uddhaŋ vertically, above, & adho beneath), slanting, across. In combn uddhaŋ adho tiriyaŋ sabbadhi "in all directions whatever" D i.251=A ii.129; similarly uddhaŋ adho t. vâpi majjhe Sn 1055; with uddhaŋ & adho D i.23, 153; Vism 176 (where expld). -- A ii.48; Sn 150, 537; J i.96; It 120; DhA i.40 (dvāra -- majjhe t. across the doorway), 47 (sideways); DA i.312; KhA 248.

-- taraṇa ferrying across, adj. ˚ā nāvā, a vessel crossing over, a traject Vin iv.65. -- 304 -- Tiriyā
Tiriyā
(f.) a kind of grass or creeper A iii.240, 242 (tiriyā nāma tiṇajāti; Com. dabbatiṇa). Tirivaccha
Tirivaccha
a certain tree J v.46. Tirīṭa
Tirīṭa
(nt.) the tree Symplocos racemosa, also a garment made of its bark Vin i.306 (˚ka); D i.166 = A i.295; M i.343; Pug 51. Tiro
Tiro
(prep. & adv.) (always ˚ -- ) [Vedic tiras across, cross- ways, from *ter of tarati = to go through; cp. Av. tarō, Lat. trans, Cymr. tra] across, beyond, over, outside, afar. See also tiraccha & tiriyaŋ.

-- karaṇī (f.) a curtain, a veil (lit. "drawing across") Vin i.276; ii.152; -- kucchigata having left the womb D ii.13; -- kuḍḍa outside the fence or wall, over the wall Vin iv.265 (˚kuḍḍe uccāraŋ chaḍḍeti); D i.78 = A iii.280 (in phrase tirobhāvaŋ t. kuḍḍaŋ t. pākāraŋ t. -- pabbataŋ asajjamāno gacchati to denote power of transplacement); Pv i.51 (˚kuḍḍesu tiṭṭhanti: the Tirokuḍḍa -- Sutta, Khp VII.); Vism 176, 394; DhA i.104; PvA 23, 31; -- gāma a distant village Vin iii.135; -- chada "outside the veil," conspicuous J vi.60; -- janapada a distant or foreign country D i.116; -- pākāra beyond or over a fence (˚pākāraŋ or ˚pākāre) Vin iv.266; see also ˚kuḍḍa; -- bhāva (ŋ) beyond existence, out of existence, magic power of going to a far away place or concealment Vism 393 sq. (=a -- pākaṭa -- pāṭihāriya), see also under ˚kuḍḍa. -- raṭṭha a foreign kingdom D i.161 (=pararaṭṭha DA i.286). Tirokkha
Tirokkha
1. (adj.) one who is outside, or absent Vin iii.185. -- 2. (adv.) [ = tiras+ka, cp. tiraskāra disdain, abuse] in tirokkha -- vāca one who speaks abusively or with disregard J v.78. Tila
Tila
(m. nt.) [Vedic tila m.] the sesame plant & its seed (usually the latter, out of which oil is prepared: see tela), Sesamum Indicum. Often combd with taṇḍula, e. g. A i.130 = Pug 32; J i.67; iii.53. -- Vin i.212 (navātilā); A iv.108; Sn p. 126; J i.392; ii.352; Vism 489 (ucchu˚); DhA i.79; PvA 47 (tilāni pīḷetvā telavaṇijjaŋ karoti).

-- odana rice with sesame J iii.425; -- kakka sesame paste Vin i.205; -- tela ses. oil VvA 54 (˚ŋ pātukāma); DhA iii.29; Bdhd 105; -- piññāka tila seed -- cake, oilcake VvA 142; -- piṭṭha sesamum -- grinding, crushed s. seed Vin iv.341. -- muṭṭhi a handful of ses. J ii.278; -- rāsi a heap of t. seeds VvA 54; -- vāha a cartload of t. seeds A v.173 = Sn p. 126; -- sangulikā a ses. cake DhA ii.75. Tilaka
Tilaka
[tila+ka, from its resemblance to a sesame seed] 1. a spot, stain, mole, freckle M i.88; S i.170; VvA 253; DhA iv.172 (˚ŋ vā kālakaŋ vā adisvā). -- 2. a kind of tree Vv 67 ( = bandhu -- jīvaka -- puppha -- sadisa -- pupphā ekā rukkha -- jāti). Tilañchaka
Tilañchaka
at J. iv.364 acc. to Kern (Toev. ii.91) to be read as nilañchaka. Tisata
Tisata
(num.) [ti+sata] three hundred J vi.427 (˚mattā nāvā). See also under tayo. Tīra
Tīra
(nt.) [Vedic tiras from *ter, tarati; orig. the opposite bank, the farther side (of a river or ocean), cp. tittha] a shore, bank Vin i.1; D i.222, 244; A ii.29, 50; Dh 85; Sn 672; J i.212, 222, 279; ii.111, 159; Dhs 597; Vbh 71 sq.; Vism 512 (orima˚); PvA 142, 152. -- tīra -- dassin finding the shore S iii.164; A iii.368. -- a -- tīra -- dassanī (f.) not seeing the shore (nāvā a ship) J v.75. Tīraṇa
Tīraṇa
[from tīreti 2] measurement, judgment, recognition, Nd2 413 (v. l. tir˚); Nett 54 (+vipassanā), 82 (≈ñāṇa), 191; Vism 162. -- tīraṇa is one of the 3 pariññās, viz. t˚, pahāna˚, ñāta -- pariññā. See under pariññā. Tīriya
Tīriya
(adj.) [from tīra] dwelling on the banks of . . . Vin ii.287. Tīreti
Tīreti
[Caus. of tarati] 1. to bring through, to finish, to execute (business), to accomplish: karaṇīyaŋ Miln 7, PvA 203; kiccaŋ PvA 278. -- 2. to measure, judge, recognize, always in formula tūleti tīreti vibhāveti (Nd2 tul˚ tir˚, etc.) as interpretation of jānāti; pp. tīrita (Nd2 tirita) Ps ii.200; Nd2 under ñāta & No. 413. Tīvarā
Tīvarā
(pl.) N. of a people in the time of Buddha Kaku- sandha S ii.191. Tīhaŋ
Tīhaŋ
(adv.) [tri+aha] a period of three days, for 3 days; usually as cpd. dvīhatīhaŋ 2 or 3 days (see dvīha) J ii.103, etc. Tu
Tu
(indecl.) [Vedic tu, belonging to pron. base of 2nd sg. tvaŋ = Lat. tu; Gr. tu /, toi/=indeed, however (orig. ethical dat, of su/), toi/nun, toi/gar; Goth. pu, etc., cp. tuvaŋ] however, but, yet, now, then (similar in appl. to tāva); kin tu but (=quid nunc). Frequent in late verse: ante tu, J.P.T.S. 1884, 5, 31, 37 etc. J.P.T.S. 1913, 53; Bd's Man. 1152 &c. Usually combd with eva: tv eva however Sn p. 141; na tv eva not however, but not A v.173. Tunga
Tunga
(adj.) [Sk. tunga, tum to stand out, cp. Gr. tu/mbos hillock, Lat. tumeo & tumulus, Mir. tomm hill] high, prominent, long J i.89; iii.433 (pabbata, expld however by tikhiṇa, sharp, rough); Dāvs. iv.30.

-- nāsika one with a prominent or long nose S ii.284; cp. saṇha -- tunga -- sadisī nāsikā Th 2,258; -- vaṇṭaka having a long stalk; N. of a plant J vi.537. Tuccha
Tuccha
(adj.) [Sk. tuccha, prob. rel. to Lat. tesqua deserted place, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.] empty, vain, deserted; very often combd with ritta D i.55; iii.53 (˚kumbhi); M i.207; J i.209 (˚hattha, empty -- handed); vi.365; Sn 883; Pug 45, 46; Miln 5 (+palāpa), 10 (id.), 13; DhA ii.43; PvA 202; Sdhp 431. Tucchaka
Tucchaka
= tuccha; always combd w. rittaka D i.240; S iii.141; M i.329. Tujjati
Tujjati
Pass. of tudati. Tuṭṭha
Tuṭṭha
[pp. of tussati to be satisfied] pleased, satisfied; often combd w. haṭṭha (q. v.) i. e. tuṭṭha -- haṭṭha J i.19 or haṭṭha -- tuṭṭha J ii.240; cp. tuṭṭha -- pahaṭṭha J ii.240. -- Sn 683; It 103; J i.62 (˚mānasa), 87, 266 (˚citta), 308 (id.); iv.138. -- tuṭṭhabba (grd.) to be pleased with Vin iv.259. Tuṭṭhi
Tuṭṭhi
(f.) [from tussati] pleasure, joy, enjoyment S i.48; Dh 331 (nom. tuṭṭhī); J i.60, 207. Tuṇḍa
Tuṇḍa
(nt.) [Sk. tuṇḍa, prob. dial. for tunda which belongs to tudati] the beak of birds, the mouth, snout S v.148 (of a monkey); J i.222; iv.210; DhA i.394. Tuṇḍaka
Tuṇḍaka
(nt.) = tuṇḍa J i.222; iii.126. Tuṇḍika
Tuṇḍika
see ahi˚. Tuṇḍiya
Tuṇḍiya
(adj.) [from tuṇḍi] having a beak; n. a pecker, fig. a tax -- collector J v.102 ( = adhamma -- bali -- sādhaka 103). Tuṇhikkhaka
Tuṇhikkhaka
(adj.) [fr. tūṣṇīŋ, see next] silent J iv.25 ( = kiñci avadanto). Tuṇhī
Tuṇhī
(indecl.) [Sk. tūṣṇīŋ acc. sg. of fem. abstr. tūṣṇī, used adverbially, from tussati] silently, esp. in phrase tuṇhī ahosi he remained silent, as a sign of consent or affirmative answer (i. e. he had nothing to say against it) D ii.155; A v.194; Dh 227; Sn 720 (tuṇhī yāti mahodadhi); PvA 117.

-- bhāva silence, attitude of consent, usually in form. adhivāsesi tuṇhī -- bhāvena he agreed Vin i.17; Sn p. 104, etc. -- S ii.236, 273 (ariyo t. -- bhāvo); M i.161 (id.); A iv.153 (id.). -- Miln 15; PvA 17, 20, etc.; -- bhūta silent Sn p. 140; Vv 20; DhA 172, etc. -- 305 -- Tuṇhīyati
Tuṇhīyati
= taṇhāyati, misspelling at S ii.13. Tuṇhīra
Tuṇhīra
inorganic form for tūṇīra quiver J v.128, also as v. l. at J v.48. Tutta
Tutta
(nt.) [Sk tottra, from tudati to prick, push] a pike for guiding elephants, a goad for driving cattle (cp. tomara & patoda) D ii.266 (˚tomara); J iv.310; v.268; Cp. iii.5, 2 (t. -- vegahata). Tudati
Tudati
[Vedic tudati; *steud, enlarged fr. *steu, cp. Lat. tundo, tudes (hammer); Goth. stautan, Ohg. stozan (to push), E. stutter, Nhg. stutzen; Ags. styntan = E. stunt] to strike with an instrument; to prick, peck, pierce; to incite, instigate J iii.189 (=vijjhati). Pass. tujjati to be struck Th 1, 780; Vism 503 (cp. vitujjati); Sdhp 279. -- pp. tunna. See also tuṇḍa (beak=pecker), tutta (goad), tomara (lance=striker) & thūpa (point). Tudampatī
Tudampatī
(dual) husband & wife [tu˚ = dial. for du˚, Sk. dve; dampati from dama= domus, Sk. daŋpati=Gr. despo/ths; cp. also Kern, Toev. ii.93, who compares tuvantuva for duvanduva]. See under dampati. Tunna
Tunna1
[pp. of tudati] struck Th 2, 162 (vyādhimaraṇa˚ str. with sickness and death). Tunna
Tunna2
[from tudati] any pointed instrument as a stick, a goad, a bolt, or (usually) a needle Vin i.290 (+aggaḷa, means of fastening); J i.8 (id.).

-- kamma "needle -- work," tailoring, patching, sewing J iv.40; vi.366; Vism 112. -- kāra (& ˚ka) a (mending) tailor J iv.38 (v. l. ˚ka); VvA 251 (˚ka); PvA 120); -- vāya [Sk. tunnavāya] a "needle -- weaver," a tailor Vin ii.159; J vi.364, 368 (˚vesaŋ gahetvā in the disguise of a tailor); PvA 161 (id.); Pv ii.914 ( = tunnakāra PvA 120); Miln 331, 365. Tuma
Tuma
(pron. -- adj.) [most likely apostrophe form of ātuma = attā, Sk. ātman self; cp. also Sk. tman oneself. See Oldenberg, KZ. xxv.319. Less likely=Sk. tva one or the other (Kern, Toev. s. v.). Expld by Com. to A iii.124 as esa.] oneself, himself, etc.; every or anybody (=quisque) yaŋ tumo karissati tumo va tena paññāyissati (quid quisque faciat) Vin ii.186=A iii.124; Sn 890 (cp. ātumānaŋ v.888), 908; Pv iii.24 (=attānaŋ PvA 181). Tumula
Tumula
[Sk. tumala; to *teu, Lat. tumeo, tumulus, tumultus, etc. E. thumb (swelling), cp. tunga & tūla] tumult, uproar, commotion J vi.247 (by Com. expld as "andhakāra," darkness); Dpvs xvii.100. Tumba
Tumba
(m. nt.) [possibly = Sk. tumra swollen (of shape), same root as tumula] 1. a kind of water vessel (udaka˚ DA i.202), made of copper, wood or a fruit (like a calabash, cocoanut, etc., cp. kaṭāha, E. skull) Vin i.205 (loha˚, kaṭṭha˚, phala˚); ii.114 (˚kaṭāha of gourd); J iii.430 (udaka˚); iv.114; DhA ii.193 (udaka˚). -- 2. a measure of capacity, esp. used for grain J i.233 (mahā˚), 467 (=4 nāḷi p. 468); Miln 102. Tumhādisa
Tumhādisa
(pron. -- adj.) [tumhe+ādisa] like you, of your kind Sn 459; J vi.528; DA i.146. Tumhe
Tumhe
[pl. of pron. 2nd pers., see tuvaŋ]. Tura
Tura
(adj.) [Vedic tura, cp. tvaraṇa] swift, quick; only in composition with ˚ga, etc., "going swiftly," denoting the horse; viz. turaga VvA 279; turanga VvA 281; Miln 192 (gaja˚, etc.), 352 (id.) 364; turangama Dāvs v.56; turagamana PvA 57. Turati
Turati
[ = tarati2] to be in a hurry, to be quick, hasten J vi.229 (mā turittho, Prohib.). -- pp. turita. Cp. also tura, etc. Turita
Turita
[pp. of turati] hastening, speedy, quick; hastily, in a hurry Sn 1014; J i.69 (turita -- turita); Vv 808 ( = sambhamanto VvA 311); DA i.319; PvA 181. -- aturita leisurely, with leisure, slow J i.87. -- See also tuvaṭaŋ. Turiya
Turiya
(nt.) [Derivation uncertain, probably connected with tuleti, Sk. tūrya] sometimes tūriya (e. g. Vv 54); musical instruments in general, usually referred to as comprising 5 kinds of special instruments (pañcangika t. e. g. Vv 54; 391; VvA 181, 183, 210, 257), viz. ātata, vitata, ātata -- vitata, ghana, susira (VvA 37). Freq. in phrase nippurisehi turiyehi parivāriyamāna (or paricāriyamāna) "surrounded by (or entertained by) heavenly music" Vin i.15; D ii.21; A i.145; J i.58. -- Vv 384; 412; 5024, 645; Pv iii.81; DhA iii.460; VvA 92; PvA 74.

-- sadda the sound of music, music Mhvs vii.30. Turī
Turī
a hen Th 2, 381 ( = migī ThA 254) (v. l. korī, cp. Tamil kōḷi hen). Tula
Tula
(adj.) [see tuleti] only in negative atula incompar- able, not to be measured, beyond compare or description Vv 304 ( = anupama VvA 126); Pv ii.89 (= appamāṇa PvA 110); iii.32 (=asadisarūpa PvA 188); Miln 343. Tulanā
Tulanā
(f.) [see tuleti] weighing, rating; consideration, deliberation M i.480; ii.174; Nett 8, 41. Tulasi
Tulasi
[Derivation unknown] basil (common or sweet) J v.46 (˚gahana a thicket of b.; v. l. tūlasi); vi.536 (tuḷasi = tuḷasigaccha). Tulā
Tulā
(f.) [see tuleti. Vedic tulā; Gr. ta/las, ta/lanton (balance, weighing & weight = talentum), to/lma; Lat. tollo (lift); Goth. pulan (to carry patiently, suffer); Ger. geduld, etc.] 1. a beam or pole for lifting, carrying or supporting, a rafter Vin ii.122; VvA 188 (+gopānasī); DhsA 107. -- 2. a weighing pole or stick, scales, balance A i.88; J i.112; Dh 268; Miln 356 (t. nikkhepanāya). -- 3. fig. measure ("weighing," cp. tulanā), standard, rate S ii.236 (+pamāṇa).

-- kūṭa false weighing, false weight (often combd with kaŋsakūṭa & mānakūṭa, false coining & false measuring) D i.5 = A ii.209≈; DA i.79; DhA i.239; -- daṇḍa the beam or lever of a balance J i.113; -- puttaka a goldsmith (using scales) J v.424 (or should it be tulādhuttaka? ). Tulita
Tulita
[pp. of tuleti] weighed, estimated, compared, gauged, considered Th 2, 153 (yattakaŋ esā t. what she is worth = lakkhaṇaññūhi parichinna ThA 139); Nd2 under ñāta (as syn. of tirita); PvA 52 (in expln of mita, measured). Tuliya
Tuliya
[Sk.?] a flying fox J vi.537. Tuleti
Tuleti
[from tulā; Lat. tollo, etc.] to weigh, examine, compare; match, equal M i.480; Th 1, 107; J vi.283; -- ger. tulayitvā M i.480. -- grd. tuliya & tulya (see sep.). -- pp. tulita. Tulya & Tuliya
Tulya
& Tuliya (also tulla J iv.102) (adj.) [orig. grd. of tuleti] to be weighed, estimated, measured; matched, equal, comparable Sn 377; J iii.324; PvA 87 ( = samaka). Mostly in the negative atulya incomparable, not having its equal Sn 83, 683; J iv.102 (atulla); Miln 249 (atuliyā guṇā), 343 (id.) -- See also tula. Tuvaŋ & Tvaŋ
Tuvaŋ
& Tvaŋ [Sk. tvaŋ & (Ved.) tuaŋ, cp. also part. tu; Gr. tu/, su/; Lat. tu; Goth. pu; E. thou, etc.; Oir. tū] pron. of 2nd pers. in foll. forms & applications:-> 1. Full forms: 1. sg.: (a) tv˚, tu˚, tuyh˚: nom. tvaŋ (in prose & verse) Sn 179, 241, 1029, 1058; J i.279; ii.159; Pv i.84. Also for nom. pl. at J i.391, 395; vi.576; tuvaŋ (in verse) Sn 1064, 1102, 1121; J iii.278, 394; Pv i.33; ii.32; also for acc. Sn 377; Pv ii.81; tuyhaŋ (gen. & dat.) [Sk. tubhyaŋ] Sn 983, 1030; J i.279; PvA 3, 60, 73, etc. -- (b) ta˚, tay˚, taŋ (acc.) M i.487; Sn 31, 241, 1043, 1049; J i.222; ii.159; Pv i.101; ii.16; tayā (instr.) Sn 335, 344; J i.222; Pv ii.36 ( = bhotiyā PvA 86): PvA 71; tayi (loc.) Sn 382; J i.207; tava (gen.) Sn 1102, 1110; J ii.153; PvA 106. -- 2. pl.: tumh˚ [Sk. yuṣm˚]: tumhe (nom. & acc.) It 31; J i.221 (acc.); Pv i.112. Also as pl. majesticus in addressing one person J ii.102; iv.138; tumhaŋ (gen.) PvA 58 (for sg.), 78; tumhākaŋ (gen. dat.) S ii.65; It 32; J i.150; ii.102; tumhesu (loc.) J i.292 (for sg.); tumhehi (instr.) J ii.154; Pv i.512. -- II. Enclitic forms (in function of an ethical dative "in your interest," therefore also as possessive gen. or as instrumental, or any other case of the interested person according to construction). 1. sg. te D ii.127 (dat.); Sn 76, 120, 1099 (dat.), 1102 (dat.); J i.151; ii.159 (instr.); Pv i.23 (dat.); ii.32 (gen.), 46 (gen.). -- 2. pl. vo S iii.33 (instr.) Sn 135, 172 (dat.), 331 (dat.); J i. 222 (acc.); ii.133; iii.395 (gen.). -- 306 -- Tuvaṭaŋ
Tuvaṭaŋ
(adv.) [Sk. tvaritaŋ, cp. tūrta] quickly A v.342; J i.91; ii.61; vi.519 (as tvātaŋ); Miln 198; Vism 305, 313. Tuvaṭṭeti
Tuvaṭṭeti
(for *Sk. dvandvayati, denom. fr. dvandva] to share (with = loc. or abl.) Vin ii.10, 124; iv.288. Tuvantuva
Tuvantuva
(nt.) [Sk. dvandva, with dialect. t. (cp. tudam- pati), not (with Müller, P. Gr. 38) through confusion with pron. tvaŋ] quarrel, strife M i.110, 410. Tussati
Tussati
[Sk. tuṣyati to *teus to be quiet, contented, happy] to be satisfied, pleased or happy J iii.280; iv.138; Miln 210. Cp. tuṭṭha (pp.), tuṭṭhi, tuṇhī, tosa, tosana, toseti. Tussana
Tussana
(nt.) [Sk. toṣaṇa] satisfying, pleasing, in ˚kāraṇa cause for satisfaction or delight J iii.448. Tūṇira
Tūṇira
= tūṇī, Vism 251. Tūṇī
Tūṇī
(f.) [Sk. *tūṇa & tūṇī, to *tI̊n: see under tulā; cp. Lat. tollo. On ṇ>l. cp. cikkaṇa & cikkhala, guṇa> guḷa, kiṇi>kili, etc.] a quiver (lit. "carrier") J ii.403 (dhanuŋ tūṇiñ ca nikkhippa); v.47. Tūla
Tūla
(nt.) [Sk. tūla, to *teu, Sk. tavīti, to swell or be bushy, cp. Gr. tu/lh swelling; Ags. pol peg] a tuft of grass, cotton Vin ii.150 (3 kinds: rukkha˚, latā˚, poṭaki˚); Sn 591 = J iv.127 (vāto tūlaŋ va dhaŋsaye); DA i.87.

-- picu cotton -- wool Vism 282, 285, 404; DhA iii.202; KhA 173. -- puṇṇikā ("stuffed with tuft of cotton") a kind of shoe Vin i.186. Tūlikā
Tūlikā
(f.) [der. fr. tūla] a mattress (consisting of layers of grass or wool: tiṇṇaŋ tūlānaŋ aññatara -- puṇṇa -- tūlikā DA i.87) Vin i.192; ii.150; D i.7; A i.181. Tūlinī
Tūlinī
(f.) [Sk. tūlinī] the silk -- cotton tree M i.128. Te˚
Te˚
[Sk. trai˚] secondary base of numeral three (fr. ti) in compn: having a relation to a triad of, three -- ; in numerical cpds. also = three (see under tayo).

-- kaṭula containing 3 spices (of yāgu), viz. tila, taṇḍula, mugga Vin i.210; iii.66; -- cīvarika wearing three robes (cp. ticīvara) Vin i.253; Ud 42; Pug 69; Vism 60. -- daṇḍika carrying the tripod (see tidaṇḍa), Ep. of a brahmin ascetic A iii.276; J ii.316 ( = kuṇḍikaŋ ṭhapanatthāya tidaṇḍaŋ gahetvā caranto); -- dhātuka (nt.) the (worlds of the) threefold composition of elements=tiloka Nett 14, 63 (tedhātuke vimutti= sabbadhi vippamutta), 82; cp. Kvu 605; -- piṭaka versed in the three piṭakas (see piṭaka), Ep. of theras & bhikkhus J iv.219; Miln 18 sq.; DhA i.7, 384; iii.385; Dāvs v.22. Cp. Sk. tripiṭo bhikṣuḥ (AvŚ i.334 & Index to Divy); -- bhātika having 3 brothers DhA i.88, 97. -- bhūmaka belonging to the 3 stages of being (viz. the kāma, rūpa, arūpa existences; cp. ˚dhātuka & tiloka) DhA i.305; iv.72; DhsA 50, 214 (˚kusala), 291; -- māsa (nt.) 3 months, i. e. a season M i.438; Miln 15; DhA ii.192; PvA 20; -- vācika pronouncing the threefold formula (of the saraṇa -- gata) Vin i.18; -- vijja (adj.) possessed of the 3 fold knowledge (i. e. either the higher knowledge of the Brahmins, i. e. the 3 Vedas [cp. Sk. trayī vidyā=the knowledge of the Vedas] or of the Buddha & Arahants, as defined at A i.164 sq., viz. (1) remembrance of former births, (2) insight into the (future) destiny of all beings, (3) recognition of the origin of misery & of the way to its removal, i. e. of the Path): 1. brahmanic: D i.238; A i.163; also as tevijjaka (n.) D i.88, 107, 119. -- 2. buddhistic: Vin ii.161; M i.482; S i.194; A i.167 =It 100; Sn 594=VvA 10; Pug 14; DhA i.138; Sdhp 420. -- tevijjatā (abstr.) Vism 5. Tekiccha
Tekiccha
(adj.) [der. fr. tikiccha] curable; fig. one who can be helped or pardoned. Only in cpds. a˚ incurable, unpardonable VvA 322 (of a sick person); DhA i.25 (id.); Miln 322; of Devadatta w. ref. to his rebirth in Niraya Vin ii.202 = It 85; M i.393; & sa˚ pardonable Miln 192, 221, 344. Teja & Tejo
Teja
& Tejo [Vedic tejas (nt.) from tij to be sharp or to pierce = a (piercing) flame. See tejate; semantically (sharp>light) cp. Ger. strahl (ray of light)= Ags. strael (arrow). -- The nt. tejo is the usual form; instr. tejasā (Dh 387; Sn 1097) & tejena (J iii.53), cp. tapa & tapo] "sharpness," heat, flame, fire, light; radiance, effulgence, splendour, glory, energy, strength, power D ii.259 (personified as deva, among the 4 Elements paṭhavī, āpo, t., vāyo; cp. tejo -- dhātu); S iv.215; M i.327; Sn 1097 (glory of the sun compd with that of the Buddha); Dh 387 (sabbaŋ ahorattiŋ Buddho tapati tejasā); J iii.53 (sīla˚); i.93 (puñña˚ the power of merit); Vbh 426 (id.); Ps i.103; Vism 350 (def.); VvA 116.

-- kasiṇa fire -- contemplation for the purpose of kammaṭṭhāna practice (see kasiṇa) D iii.268; Dhs 203; Vism 171; DhA ii.49; iii.214; Bdhd 106; -- dhātu the element of flame (or fire), the 3rd of the 6 Elements, viz. paṭhavī āpo t. vāyo ākāsa viññāṇa (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 242) D iii.27, 228, 247; M i.188, 422; A i.176; ii.165; Dhs 588, 648, 964; Nett 74; Vism 363. Tejate
Tejate
[Vedic tejate from tij (*stij) = Lat. in -- stīgo (to spur), Gr. sti/zw, stikto/s, Ohg. stehhan, Nhg. stecken, E. stick] to be sharp or to make sharp, to prick, to incite, etc. -- See tikkha, tikhiṇa, tiṇha, titikkhati, tittaka, teja, etc. Tejana
Tejana
(nt.) [see tejate] the point or shaft of an arrow, an arrow Th 1, 29; Dh 80, 145; DhA ii.147. Tejavant
Tejavant
(adj.) [tejas+vant] 1. splendid, powerful, majestic DhA i.426. -- 2. in flames, heated, burning with ( -- ˚) Miln 148. Tejin
Tejin
(adj. -- n.) [see teja] having light or splendour, shining forth, glorious Sn 1097 ( = Nd2 286 tejena samannāgata). Tettiŋsa
Tettiŋsa
(num.) [tayo+tiŋsa] thirty -- three J i.273; DhA i.267 sq. See also under tayo & tāvatiŋsa. Temana
Temana
(nt.) [from temeti] wetting, moistening Vism 338; VvA 20 (aggimhi tāpanaŋ udake vā temanaŋ); DhA iii.420. Temeti
Temeti
[cp. Divy 285 tīmayati; Caus. of tim to moisten. There is an ancient confusion between the roots tim, tamas, etc. (to be dark), tim, temeti (to be wet), and stim to be motionless. Cp. tintiṇāyati, tinta, tibba ( = tamas), timira] to make wet, to moisten Vin i.47 (temetabba); ii.209 (temetvā); DhA i.220, 394 (id.); J i.88≈KhA 164; J ii.325 (temento); PvA 46 (sutemitvā for temetvā). -- 307 -- Terasa
Terasa
see under tayo. Terovassika
Terovassika
(adj.) [tiro+vassa+ika] lasting over or beyond a year (or season), a year old, dried up or decayed S iv.161 (thero vassiko in text) = 185 (of wood) M i.58 (of bones). Tela
Tela
(nt.) [from tila] sesamum -- oil (prepared from tila seeds), oil in general (tela = tilatelādika DA i.93): used for drinking, anointing & burning purposes Vin i.205, 220, 245, etc.; A i.209, 278 (sappi vā t. vā); ii.122≈ (tattena pi telena osiñcante; punishment of pouring over with boiling oil); J i.293; ii.104; Pv iv.148 (tiṇena telaŋ pi na tvaŋ adāsi: frequent as gift to mendicants); Pug 55; Dhs 646, 740, 815; PvA 80 (kaḷebarānaŋ vasā telañ ca: fat or oil in general). -- tila ˚ŋ pātukāma desire to drink tila -- wine VvA 54; pāka -- tela oil concoction VvA 68=DhA iii.311; J ii.397 (sata˚); iii.372 (sahassa˚ worth a thousand); v.376 (sata˚ worth a hundred); pādabbhañjana˚ oil for rubbing the feet VvA 44; sāsapa˚ (mustard seed & oil) PvA 198; sappi˚ (butter & oil) Sn 295; PvA 278 (also+madhu) as var. objects of grocery trade (dhañña).

-- koṭṭhāgāra oil store DhA i.220; -- ghaṭa oil jar DA i.144; -- cāṭī an oil tank DhA i.220; -- dhūpita spiced or flavoured with oil (of a cake) Vv 435; -- nāḷi a reed used for keeping oil in, an oil tube Vism 99; DhA ii.193 (+udakatumba); -- pajjota an oil lamp Vin i.16 = D i.85=A i.56=Sn p. 15; -- padīpa an oil lamp Vin i.15; S iii.126; v.319; VvA 198; -- pāka an oil decoction, mixed with spirits, oil -- wine Vin i.205; -- pilotikā (pl.) rags soaked in oil DhA i.221; -- makkhana anointing (the body) with oil Miln 11; -- miñjaka an oil -- cake PvA 51; -- vaṇijjā oil trade PvA 47; -- homa an oblation of oil D i.9. Telaka
Telaka
(nt.) = tela Vin i.204 ("a small quantity of oil"); ii.107 (sittha -- t. oil of beeswax). Teliya
Teliya
(adj.) oily J iii.522. Tevijja
Tevijja
see Vijjā. Tomara
Tomara
(m. nt.) [Sk. tomara from tud, see tudati] a pike, spear, lance, esp. the lance of an elephant -- driver D ii.266 (tutta -- t. a driving lance); M iii.133 (t. hattha); Vism 235; DA i.147. Toya
Toya
(nt.) [Vedic toya from *tā&uarc; to melt away; Lat. tabeo, tabes (consumption); Ags. pāwan = E. dew, Oir. tām= tabes; also Gr. th/kw, etc.] water (poetical for udaka); only in simile: puṇḍarīkaŋ (or padumaŋ) toyena na upalippati A ii.39=Sn 547; Sn 71=213; Th 1, 700; Nd2 287 (t. vuccati udakaŋ); -- Bdhd 67, 93. Toraṇa
Toraṇa
(nt.) [Sk. toraṇa, perhaps related to Gr. tu/rsis, tu/rris = Lat. turris (tower), cp. Hor. Od. i.47 "regumque turris"=palaces] an arched gateway, portal; Vin ii.154; D ii.83; Vv 351 (=dvārakoṭṭhaka -- pāsādassa nāmaŋ VvA 160); J iii.428; Dāvs v.48. Tosana
Tosana
(adj. -- n.) [see toseti] satisfying, pleasing; satis- faction Sn 971. Tosāpana
Tosāpana
(adj.) [ = tosana, in formation of a 2nd causative tosāpeti] pleasing, giving satisfaction J ii.249. Toseti
Toseti
[Caus. of tussati] to please, satisfy, make happy Sn 1127 ( = Nd2 288); J iv.274; Sdhp 304. -- pp. tosita contented, satisfied Sn 1128. Cp. pari˚. Tya
Tya
[Sk. tya˚, nt. tyad; perhaps to Gr. sh/meron to -- day, sh_tes in this year] base of demonstr. pron. = ta˚, this, that; loc. sg. tyamhi J vi.292; loc. pl. fem. tyāsu J v.368 (Com. tāsu). Tyassu
Tyassu
= te assu D ii.287, see su3. Tvaŋ
Tvaŋ
see tuvaŋ. Tvātaŋ
Tvātaŋ
see tuvaṭaŋ. -- Th. Thakana
Thakana
(nt.) [see next] covering, lid; closing up DhA iv.85 (saŋvara+). Thaketi
Thaketi
[Sk. sthagayati, Caus. to sthagati, from *steg to cover; cp. Gr. ste/gw cover, te/gh roof; Lat. tego, tegula (E. = tile), toga; Oir. tech house; Ohg. decchu cover, dah roof. On P. form cp. Trenckner, Notes, p. 62] to cover, cover up, close (usually of doors & windows) Vin ii.134 (kaṇṇagūthakehi kaṇṇā thakitā honti: the ears were closed up), 148 (kavaṭā na thakīyanti, Pass.), 209 (vātapāna); iv.54; J iv.4 (sabbe apihitā dvārā; api -- dhā=Gr. e)pi -- qh˚, cp. Hom. Od. 9, 243: h)li/baton pe/trhn e(pe/qhke qu/rhsin the Cyclops covered the door with a polished rock) v.214; DhA iv.180 (ṭhakesi, v. l. ṭhapesi); VvA 222; PvA 216 (dvārā) Dāvs iv.33; v.25 (chiddaŋ mālāguḷena th.). Thañña
Thañña
(nt.) [see thana] mother's milk Vin ii.255 = 289 (˚ŋ pāyeti); A iv.276; J iii.165; vi.3 (madhura˚) Th 2, 496. Thaṇḍila
Thaṇḍila
(nt.) [Vedic sthaṇḍila a levelled piece of ground prepared for a sacrifice. Cognate with sthala, level ground] bare, esp. hard, stony ground Pv iv.75 ( = kharakaṭhāna bhūmippadesa PvA 265).

-- sāyikā (f.) the act of lying on the bare ground (as a penance) [BSk. sthaṇḍila -- śāyikā] S iv.118; Dh 141 ( = DhA iii.77: bhūmisayana); -- seyyā (f.) a bed on bare ground D i.167≈(v. l. BB. taṇḍila˚) Miln 351; cp. Sk. sthaṇḍilaśayyā. Thaddha
Thaddha
[pp. of thambeti, Sk. stabhnāti to make firm, prop, hold up; cp. Av. stawra firm, Gr. a)stemfh/s, stafulh/; Goth. stafs, Ags. staef = E. staff; Ohg. stab. See also khambha & chambheti] 1. lit. hard, rigid, firm J i.293 (opp. muduka); Vism 351 (˚lakkhaṇa); PvA 139 (=ujjhangala). -- 2. fig. (a) hardened, obdurate, callous, selfish D i.118 (māna˚); iii.45 (+atimānin); A ii.26=It 113 (kuha th. lapa); Sn 104 (see gotta˚); J i.88 (māna˚) ii.136; Sdhp 90. -- (b) slow Miln 103 (opp. lahuka; cp. BSk. dhandha, on which Kern, Toev. ii.90). -- See thambha & thūṇa.

-- maccharin obdurate & selfish, or very selfish DhA iii.313; VvA 69; PvA 45; -- hadaya hard -- hearted J iii.68. Thana
Thana
[Vedic stana; cp. Gr. sthnion = sth_qos (Hesychius)] 1. the breast of a woman D ii.266; J v.205; vi.483; Sdhp 360. -- 2. the udder of a cow M i.343=Pug 56; DhA ii.67.

-- mukha the nipple J iv.37. -- sita -- dāraka [see sita] a child at the breast, a suckling Miln 364 = 408. Thanaka
Thanaka,
a little breast, the breast of a girl Th 2, 265 ( = ThA 212). -- 308 -- Thanita
Thanita
(nt.) [pp. of thaneti cp. Vedic (s)tanayitnu thunder = Lat. tonitrus, Ohg. donar, etc.] thundering, thunder J i.470; Th 1, 1108; Miln 377. Thanin
Thanin
(adj.) having breasts, -- breasted; in timbaru˚ Sn 110; J vi.457. -- pucimanda˚ J vi.269. Thaneti
Thaneti
[Vedic stanayati & stanati to thunder; cp. Gr. ste/nw, stena/zw to moan, groan, stonos; Lat. tono; Ags. stunian; Ger. stöhnen] to roar, to thunder D ii.262; S i.100, 154 (megho thanayaŋ), 154 (thaneti devo); It 66 (megho thanayitvā). -- pp. thanita. See also gajjati & thunati. Thapati
Thapati
[Vedic sthapati, to sthā+pati] 1. a builder, master carpenter M i.396 = S iv.223; M iii.144, -> 2. officer, overseer S v.348. Thabbha
Thabbha
is to be read for ˚tthambha in para˚ J iv.313. Thambha
Thambha
[see etym. under thaddha; occasionally spelt thamba, viz. A i.100; M i.324; PvA 186, 187] 1. a pillar, a post Vin i.276; D i.50 (majjhimaŋ ˚ŋ nissāya); ii.85 (id.); Sn 214; Vv 782 (veḷuriya˚, of the pillars of a Vimāna); Pv iii.31 (id.); DhA iv.203; VvA 188 (+tulā -- gopānasī); PvA 186. -- 2. (fig.) in all meanings of thaddha, applied to selfishness, obduracy, hypocrisy & deceit; viz. immobility, hardness, stupor, obstinacy (cp. Ger. "verstockt"): thambho ti thaddha -- bhāvo SnA 288, 333; th. thambhanā thambhittaŋ kakkhaliyaŋ phāruliyaŋ ujucittatā (an˚?) amudutā Vbh 350. -- Often combd w. māna ( = arrogance), freq. in set sāṭheyyaŋ th. sārambho māno, etc. A i.100, 299=Nd2 under rāga=Miln 289; cp. M i.15. -- A iii.430 (+māna); iv.350, 465 (+sāṭheyya); Sn 245 (+mada), 326, 437 (as one of Māra's combatants: makkho th. te aṭṭhamo); J i.202. -- 3. a clump of grass M i.324; cp. thambhaka. Thamhhaka
Thamhhaka
( = thambha 3) a clump of grass VvA 276 (=gumba). Thambhati
Thambhati
& thambheti, see upa˚, paṭi˚. Thambhanā
Thambhanā
(f.) [abstr. to thambha] firmness, rigidity, immobility Dhs 636 = 718; Vbh 350. Thambhitatta
Thambhitatta
(nt.) [abstr. to thambha] = thambha 2, viz. hardness, rigidity, obduracy, obstinacy Vbh 350. Note. Quite a late development of the term, caused by a misinterpretation of chambhitatta, is "fluctuation, unsteadiness, inflation" at Dhs 965 (in def. of vāyodhātu: chambhittattaŋ [?] thambhitattaŋ. See on this Dhs. trsl. p. 242), & at Vbh 168 (in def. of vicikicchā; v.l. chambhitatta), and at Asl. 338 (of vayo). None of these meanings originally belong to the term thambha. Thambhin
Thambhin
(adj.) obstinate Th 1, 952. Tharaṇa
Tharaṇa
(nt.) [Sk. staraṇa to stṛ] strewing, spreading. In cpds. like assa˚, bhumma˚, ratha˚, hattha˚, etc. the reading ass -- attharaṇa, etc. should be preferred ( = ā-> stṛ). See attharaṇa and cpds. Tharati
Tharati
[Sk. stṛṇoti] only in cpds. ā˚, ava˚, etc. Tharu
Tharu
[Sk. tsaru] the hilt or handle of a sword or other weapons, a sword A iii.152; J iii.221 ( = sword); Miln 178; DhA ii.249 (˚mūla); iv.66 (asi˚). -- tharusmiŋ sikkhati to learn the use of a sword Vin ii.10; Miln 66.

-- ggaha one who carries a sword -- (handle) Miln 331 (dhanuggaha+; not in corresponding list of occupations at D i.51); -- sippā training in swordsmanship Ud 31. Thala
Thala1
(nt.) [Vedic sthala, to sthā, orig. standing place; cp. Gr. ste/llw, sto /los; Ags. steall (place); also P. thaṇḍila] dry ground, viz. high, raised (opp. low) or solid, firm (opp. water) S iv.179. As plateau opp. to ninna (low lying place) at Sn 30 (SnA 42 = ukkūla); Dh 98; It 66=S i.100 (megho thalaŋ ninnañ ca pūreti); PvA 29 (=unnatapadesa). As dry land, terra firma opp. to jala at Dh 34; J i.107, 222; Pv iv.121; PvA 260. As firm, even ground or safe place at D i.234; Sn 946. -> Cp. J iii.53; iv.142; Vism 185.

-- gocara living on land J ii.159; -- ja sprung from land (opp. vārija Dh 34 or udakarūha Vv 356 = water -- plant); referring to plants A i.35; J i.51; Vv 356 (=yodhikādikā VvA 162); Miln 281; -- ṭṭha standing on firm ground A ii.241; -- patha a road by land (opp. jala˚ by water) J i.121; iii.188. Thala
Thala2
(nt.) [prob. dialect. variant of tharu] the haft of a sword, the scabbard J iii.221 (reading uncertain). Thava
Thava
[see thavati] praise, praising, eulogy Nett 161, 188, 192. Thavati
Thavati
[Sk. stauti, Av. staviti, cp. Gr. steu_tai] to praise, extol; inf. thutuŋ Sn 217 ( = thometuŋ SnA 272). -> Caus. thaveti [Sk. stavayati] pp. thavita Miln 361. See thuta, thuti, thoma, thometi. Thavikā
Thavikā
(f.) [derivation uncertain] a knapsack, bag, purse; esp. used for the carrying of the bhikkhu's strainer Vin i.209 (parissāvanāni pi thavikāyo pl pūretvā), 224 (patte+pariss˚+th.); J i.55 (pattaŋ thavikāya pakkhipitvā); vi.67 (pattaŋ thavikāya osāretvā); VvA 40 (patta -- thavikato parissāvanaŋ nīharitvā). Also for carrying money: sahassathavikā a purse of 1,000 pieces J i.54, 195, 506; VvA 33; Anvs 35. See also Vin ii.152, 217; Vism. 91. Thāma
Thāma
(& thāmo nt. in instr. thāmasā M i.498; S ii.278 = Th 1, 1165; iii.110, see below) [Vedic sthāman & sthāmas nt., sthā cp. Gr. sth/mwn, Lat. stamen (standing structure); Goth. stoma foundation] "standing power," power of resistance, steadfastness, strength, firmness, vigour, instr. thāmena (Miln 4; PvA 193); thāmasā (see above); thāmunā (J vi.22). Often combd with bala J i.63; Sn 68; with bala+java PvA 4; with bala+ viriya Nd2 289, 651; with java J i.62; VvA 104; with viriya J i.67. -- D iii.113; S i.78; ii.28; v.227; A i.50; ii.187 sq.; iv.192. J i.8, 265 (˚sampanna); ii.158 (id.); Dhs 13, 22; Vism 233 (˚mahatta); DhA iv.18; PvA 259. -- Instr. used as adv.: thāmena hard, very much PvA 193; thāmasā obstinately, perseveringly M i.257.

-- gatadiṭṭhika (adj.) one in whom heresy has become strong J i.83 = vi.220. Thāmaka
Thāmaka
(adj.) having strength Sn 1144 (dubbala˚ with failing strength); Nd1 12 (appa˚+dubbala). Thāmavant
Thāmavant
(adj.) [thāma+vant] strong, steadfast, power- ful, persevering S v.197, 225; A ii.250; iv.110, 234, 291; v.24; Nd2 131; Vv 51 ( = thira balavā VvA 35). Thāra
Thāra
see vi˚, san˚. Thāla
Thāla
(nt.) [from thala orig. a flat dish] a plate, dish, vessel D i.74; J i.69; Miln 282. Kaŋsa˚ a gong Miln 62; Vism 283 (in simile). See also thālī. Thālaka
Thālaka
(nt.) [thāla+ka] a small bowl, beaker Pv ii.18 (thālakassa pānīyaŋ), 119 (id.); Nett 79 (for holding oil: dīpakapallika Com.). Thālikā
Thālikā
(f.) = thālakaVin i.203, 240. See āḷhaka˚. Thālī
Thālī
(f.) (thāli˚ in cpds.) [Sk. sthālī, cp. thāla] an earthen pot, kettle, large dish; in -- dhovana washing of the dish A i.161 (+sarāva -- dhovana); -- pāka an offering of barley or rice cooked in milk Vin iii.15; D i.97 ( = DA i.267); S ii.242; v.384; A i.166; J i.186; Miln 249. Thāvara
Thāvara1
(adj.) [Vedic sthāvara, from sthā, cp. sthavira, Gr. stauro/s post, Lat. re -- stauro, Goth. stana judgment & stojan to judge] "standing still," immovable (opp. to tasa) firm, strong (Ep. of an Arahant: KhA 245) DhA iv.176. Always in connection with tasa, contrasting or comprising the movable creation (animal world) & the immovable (vegetable world), e. g. Sn 394 ("sabbesu bhūtesu nidhāya daṇḍaŋ ye thāvarā ye ca tasanti loke"); It 32 (tasaŋ vā thāvaraŋ vā). See tasa for ref. -- 309 -- Thāvara
Thāvara2
(nt.) [from thavira = thera, old] old age PvA 149 (thāvari -- jiṇṇa in expl. of therī, otherwise jarā -- jiṇṇa. Should we read thāvira -- jiṇṇa?). Thāvariya
Thāvariya
(nt.) [fr. thāvara] immobility, firmness, security, solidity, an undisturbed state; always in janapada˚ an appeased country, as one of the blessings of the reign of a Cakkavattin. Expld at DA i.250 as "janapadesu dhuvabhāvaŋ thāvarabhāvaŋ vā patto na sakkā kenaci cāletuŋ." D i.88; ii.16, 146, 169; S i.100; Sn p. 106; It 15. Thāvareyya
Thāvareyya
(nt.) [from thāvara2] the rank of a Thera. A i.38; ii.23. This has nothing to do with seniority. It is quite clear from the context that Thera is to be taken here in the secondary sense explained under Thera. He was a bhikkhu so eminently useful to the community that his fellow bhikkhus called him Thera. Thāsotu˚
Thāsotu˚
in thāsotujana savana at ThA 61 according to Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 81 it is to be read ṭhānaso tu jana˚. Thika
Thika
(adj.) [cp. Sk. styāyate to congeal, form a (solid) mass; see cognates under thīna & cp. theva] dropping, forming drops: madhutthika J iii.493; vi.529 ( = madhuŋ paggharantiyo madhutthevasadisā p. 530) "dropping honey." Thiṇṇa
Thiṇṇa
pp. of tharati, only in cpds. parivi˚, vi˚. Thira
Thira
(adj.) [Vedic sthira, hard, solid; from sthā or Idg. ster (der. of stā) to stand out = to be stiff; cp. Gr. stereo/s; Lat. sterilis (sterile=hardened, cp. Sk. starī); Ohg. storrēn, Nhg. starr & starren, E. stare; also Lat. strenuus] solid, hard, firm; strenuous, powerful J i.220; iv.106 (=daḷha); Miln 194 (thir -- âthira -- bhāva strength or weakness); VvA 212 (id.), 35 (= thāmavant); Sdhp 321. Thiratā
Thiratā
(f.) [fr. thira] steadfastness, stability DhA iv.176 (thiratāya thavarā; so read for ṭhira˚). Thī
Thī
(f.) [Vedic strī, on which see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under sero. This form thī is the normal correspondent to Vedic strī; the other, more usual (& dial.) form is itthi] a woman J i.295, 300; v.296 (thī -- pura), 397; vi.238. Thīna
Thīna
(nt.) [Sk. styāna; orig. pp. of styāyate to become hard, to congeal; stei̯ā (cp. also thira) = Gr. ste/as grease, tale; Lat. stīpo to compress; also Sk. stimita (motionless)=P. timi; stīma (slow), Mhg. stīm; Goth. etc. stains=E. stone; Gr. sti_fos (heap); Lat. stīpes (pale); Ohg. stīf=E. stiff] stiffness, obduracy, stolidity, indifference (cp. thaddha & tandī, closely related in meaning). Together with middha it is one of the 5 hindrances (nīvaraṇāni) to Arahantship (see below). Def. as cittassa akammaññatā, unwieldiness or impliability of mind (=immobility) at Nd2 290=Dhs 1156, 1236=Nett 86; as citta -- gelaññaŋ morbid state of mind ("psychosis") at DA i.211. -- Sn 942 (niddaŋ tandiŋ sahe thīnaŋ pamādena na saŋvase), 1106; Vbh 352 (=Nd2 290 as expln of līnatta); Vism 262 (˚sineha, where p. 361 reads patthinna˚).

-- middha sloth & drowsiness, stolidity & torpor; two of the 5 nīvaraṇāni ( Dhs. trsl. pp. 120, 310) Vin ii.200 (vigata˚); D i.71, 246; iii.49, 234, 269, 278; S i.99; iii.106; v.277 sq.; A iii.69 sq.; 421; Sn 437 (pañcamī senā Mārassa); It 27, 120; Ps. i.31, 45, 162; ii.12, 169, 179, 228; Pug 68; Dhs 1154, 1486; Vism 469; Sdhp 459. Thīyati
Thīyati
see patiṭṭhīyati. Thīyanā
Thīyanā
(f.) & thīyitatta (nt.) [abstr. formations from thīna] = thīna, in exegesis at Nd2 290≈(see thīna); Vbh 352. Thuta
Thuta
[cp. pp. of thavati] praised DhsA 198; J iv.101 (sada˚ = sadā thuto niccapasattho); Miln 278 (vaṇṇita th. pasattha). Thuti
Thuti
(f.) [cp. thavati] praise J iv.443 (thutiŋ karoti); VvA 158. Thunati
Thunati
[see thaneti] 1. to moan, groan, roar S v.148 (thunaŋ ppr.; v. l. thanaŋ); Vv 521 (of beings in Niraya, otherwise ghosenti), v.l.SS thananti (better?). -> 2. to proclaim; shout, praise (confused with thavati) Sn 884. Thulla
Thulla
see thūla. Thusa
Thusa
(nt.) [Vedic tuṣa (m.)] husk of grain, chaff A i.242 (together w. other qualities of corn); J iv.8; Vism 346.-> athusa D iii.199.

-- aggi a fire of husks Nett 23; -- odaka gruel ( = sabbasambhārehi kataŋ sovīrakaŋ Pug A 232) D i.166= A i.295=Pug 55; -- pacchi a bird stuffed with chaff, a straw -- bird J i.242; -- piṇḍa a lump of husks Vin ii.151; -- rāsi a heap of h. DhA i.309; -- homa an oblation of h. D i.9 (=DA i.93; v. l. BB kana, for kaṇa; cp. kaṇahoma D i.9). Thūṇā
Thūṇā
(f.) [Vedic sthūṇā from sthā, standing fast, as in thambha, thīna, etc. Nearest relation is thāvara ( = thūrā, on r: ṇ=l (thūla): n see tūṇī). Cp. Gr. stauro/s (post); Lat. restauro (to prop up again); Gr. stu_los pillar, "style"; Goth. stojan etc. (see thāvara); Ags. styran=E. steer, Ger. steuer] a pillar, prop, support A ii.198; Vv 541 (=thambha VvA 245); DA i.124. Esp. the sacrificial post in phrase thūṇûpanīta "lead to sacrifice" (yūpa -- sankhātuŋ thūṇaŋ upa˚ DA i.294): D i.127≈S i.76≈DhA ii.7; J iii.45. kumbhathūṇā a sort of drum D i.6 etc. (see kumbha, where also kumbha -- thūṇika Vin iv.285). -- eka -- thūṇaka with one support J iv.79. Thūṇira
Thūṇira
[der. fr. thūṇā] house -- top, gable Th 1, 184 ( = kan- ṇikā Com.). Thūpa
Thūpa
[Vedic stūpa, crown of the head, top, gable; cp. Gr. stu/pos (handle, stalk). Oicel. stūfr (stump), to *steud as in tudati] a stupa or tope, a bell -- shaped pile of earth, a mound, tumulus, cairn; dome, esp. a monument erected over the ashes of an Arahant (otherwise called dhātugabbha = dāgaba), or on spots consecrated as scenes of his acts. In general as tomb: Vin iv.308; J iii.156 (mattika˚)=Pv i.84; in special as tope: D ii.142, 161, 164 sq.; A i.77; M ii.244; J v.39 (rajata˚); VvA 156 (Kassapassa bhagavato dvādasayojanikaŋ kanaka˚); Ud 8; Pv iii.105. Four people are thūpârahā, worthy of a tope, viz. a Tathāgata, a Tathāgatasāvaka, a Paccekabuddha, a Cakkavattin D ii.143= A ii.245. -- At Dpvs vi.65 th. is to be corrected into dhūpaŋ. Thūpika
Thūpika
(adj.) [from thūpa. The ika applies to the whole compound] having domed roofs ("house -- tops") J vi.116 (of a Vimāna = dvādasayojanika maṇimayakañcanathūpika; cp. p. 117: pañcaṭhūpaŋ vimānaŋ, expld as pañcahi kūṭāgārehi samannāgataŋ). Thūpikata
Thūpikata
(adj.) [thūpa+kata] "made a heap," heaped of an alms -- bowl: so full that its contents bulge out over the top Vin iv.191. Thūla
Thūla
(a) & Thulla (b) (the latter usual in cpds.) (adj.) [Vedic sthūla (or sthūra); cp. Lith. storas (thick); Lat. taurus, Goth. stiur, Ags. steor (bull = strong, bulky); Ohg. stūri (strong). From sthā: see thīna, cp. thūṇā. To ūl: ull cp. cūḷa: culla] compact, massive; coarse, gross; big, strong, clumsy; common, low, unrefined, rough D i.223; Sn 146 (aṇuka˚), 633 (id.); Dh 31, 265, 409; J i.196 (b); Dhs 617; KhA 246; PvA 73, 74 (of a cloak); VvA 103; Sdhp 101, 346. -- thullāni gajjati to speak rough words J i.226 (=pharusavacanāni vadati).

-- anga (adj.) heavy -- limbed J i.420; -- accaya a grave offence Vin i.133, 167, 216; ii.110, 170 etc.; Vism 22. -- kacchā thick scurf Vin i.202; -- kumārī (Vin. v.129) & kumārikā a stout, fat girl J iii.147; iv.220 (Com. pañcakāmaguṇika -- rāgena thūlatāya thullak˚ ti vuccati); Vism 17. -- phusitaka (deva) (the rain -- god, probably with reference to the big drops of the rain cp. DA i.45) S iii.141; v.396; A i.243; ii.140 (a); v.114 sq.; DhA iii.243; -- vajja a grave sin Vin ii.87 (a); M ii.250; -- vattha a coarse garment J v.383; -- sarīra (adj.) fat, corpulent J i.420; iv.220 (opp. kisa thin); -- sāṭaka coarse cloth DhA i.393 (a). -- 310 -- Thūlatā
Thūlatā
(f.) [abstr. to thūla] coarseness, roughness, vile- ness J iv.220. Theta
Theta
(adj.) [Sk. from tiṭṭhita, Müller P. Gr. 7 = sthātṛ] firm, reliable, trustworthy, true D i.4 (DA i.73: theto ti thiro; ṭhita -- katho ti attho); M i.179; S iv.384; A ii.209=Pug 57; Nd2 623. -- abl. thetato in truth S iii.112. -- attheta J iv.57 (=athira). Thena
Thena
[Vedic stena & stāyu, besides which tāyu, the latter prob. original, cp. Gr. tu_ta/w to deprive; Oir. tāid thief, to a root meaning "conceal"] a thief adj. stealing: athenena not stealing, not stealthily, openly D i.4; DA i.72. f. athenī A iii.38. Cp. kumbhatthena Vin ii.256 (see k.). Thenaka
Thenaka
[ = prec.] a thief J vi.115. Theneti
Theneti
[Denom. fr. thena] to steal, to conceal J iv.114; DhA i.80. Theyya
Theyya
(nt.) [Vedic steya] theft Vin i.96; A i.129; Sn 119 (theyyā adinnaŋ ādiyati); 242, 967 (˚ŋ na kareyya); Vv 158 (: theyyaŋ vuccati thenabhāvo VvA 72); Miln 264, 265; Vism 43 (˚paribhoga); DA i.71; Sdhp 55, 61.

-- citta intending to steal Vin iii.58; -- saŋvāsaka one who lives clandestinely with the bhikkhus (always foll. by titthiyapakkantaka) Vin i.86, 135, 168, 320; v.222; Miln 310; -- sankhātaŋ (adv.) by means of theft, stealthily D iii.65 sq., 133; A iii.209; iv.370 sq.; v.264. Thera
Thera
[Vedic sthavira. Derivation uncertain. It may come from sthā in sense of standing over, lasting (one year or more), cp. thāvara old age, then "old = venerable"; (in meaning to be compared w. Lat. senior, etc. from num. sem "one" =one year old, i. e. lasting over one and many more years). Cp. also vetus=Gr. e)/tos, year, E. wether, one year old ram, as cpd. w. veteran, old man. Or it may come from sthā in der. *stheṷā in sthūra (sthūla: see etym. under thūla) thus, "strong= venerable"] t.t. only used with ref. to the bhikkhus of Gotama Buddha's community. -- (a) (adj.) senior, Vin i.47, 290 (th. bhikkhū opp. navā bh.), 159 (th. bhikkhu a senior bh. opp. to navaka bh. a novice), 187; ii.16, 212. Therânutherā bhikkhū seniors & those next to them in age dating not from birth, but from admission to the Order). Three grades are distinguished, thera bh., majjhima bh., nava bh., at D i.78. -- See also A ii.23, 147, 168; v.201, 348; D iii.123 sq., 218; Dh 260, 261. In Sangha -- thera, used of Bhikkhus not senior in the Order, the word thera means distinguished. Vin ii.212, 303. In Mahāthera the meaning, as applied to the 80 bhikkhus so called, must also have some similar meaning Dīpv iv.5 Psalms of the Brethren xxxvi.; J v.456. At A ii.22 it is said that a bhikkhu, however junior, may be called thera on account of his wisdom. It is added that four characteristics make a man a thera -- high character, knowing the essential doctrines by heart, practising the four Jhānas, and being conscious of having attained freedom through the destruction of the mental intoxications. It is already clear that at a very early date, before the Anguttara reached its extant shape, a secondary meaning of thera was tending to supplant that of senior -- that is, not the senior of the whole Order, but the senior of such a part of the Sangha as live in the same locality, or are carrying out the same function. -- Note. thera in thero vassiko at S iv.161 is to be read tero -- vassiko.

-- gāthā hymns of senior bhikkhus, N. of a canonical book, incorporated in the Khuddaka -- Nikāya. Theratara, very senior, oppd to navatara, novice D ii.154. -- vāda the doctrine of the Theras, the original Buddhist doctrine M i.164; Dpvs iv.6, 13. Theraka
Theraka
(adj.) strong (?), of clothes: therakāni vatthāni D ii.354 (vv. ll. thevakāni, dhorakāni, corakāni). Therī & Therikā
Therī
& Therikā (f.) [see thera] 1. an old woman (cp. sthavirikā M Vastu iii.283) Pv ii.116 ( = thāvarijiṇṇā PvA 149). -- 2. a female thera (see cpds.), as therikā at Th 2, 1; Dpvs xviii. 11.

-- gāthā hymns of the therīs, following on the Theragāthā (q. v.). Theva
Theva
(m.?) [see etym. under thīna, with which cp. in meaning from same root Gr. stoibh/ & Lat. stīria, both = drop. Cp. also thika. Not with Trenckner (Notes p. 70) fr. stip] a drop; stagnant water. In Vin. only in phrase: cīvaraŋ . . . na acchinne theve pakkamitabbaŋ Vin i.50, 53=ii.227, 230; J vi.530 (madhu -- ttheva a drop of honey). Thevati
Thevati
[fr. theva; orig. "to be congealed or thick"] to shine, glitter, shimmer (like a drop) J vi.529 ( = virocati p. 530). Thoka
Thoka
(adj.) [for etymology see under thīna] little, small, short, insignificant; nt. a trifle. A iv.10; J vi.366; PvA 12 (kāla): nt. thokaŋ as adv. = a little J i.220; ii.103, 159; v.198; PvA 13, 38, 43. -- thokaŋ thokaŋ a little each time, gradually, little by little Dh 121, 239; Miln 9; SnA 18; PvA 168. Thokaka
Thokaka
(adj.) = thoka; fem. thokikā Dh 310. Thoma
Thoma
[Vedic stoma a hymn of praise] praise. Thomana
Thomana
(nt.) & thomanā (f.) [see thavati] praising, praise, laudation J i.220 ( = pasaŋsa); Pug 53; PvA 27. Thometi
Thometi
[denom. fr. thoma; cp. thavati] to praise, extol, celebrate (often with vaṇṇeti) D i.240; Sn 679, 1046; Nd2 291; J vi.337; SnA 272 ( = thutuŋ); VvA 102; PvA 196. -- pp. thomita J i.9. -- 311 -- -- D. D
--
D -- euphonic consonant inserted to avoid hiatus: (a) orig. only sandhi -- cons. in forms ending in t & d (like tāvat, kocid, etc.) & thus restored in cpds. where the simplex has lost it; (b) then also transferred to & replacing other sandhi -- cons. (like puna -- d -- eva for punar eva). -> (a) dvipa -- d -- uttama Sn 995; koci -- d -- eva PvA 153; kincid -- eva ibid. 70; tāva -- d -- eva ib. 74; yāva -- d -- atthaŋ ib. 217; ahu -- d -- eva Miln 22 etc. -- (b) puna -- d -- eva Pv ii.113 (v. l. BB); DhA ii.76; samma -- d -- eva Sn p. 16; VvA 148; PvA 66 etc.; cp. SnA 284. bahu -- d -- eva J i.170. Da
--
Da (adj.) [Suffix of dā, see dadāti] giving, bestowing, presenting, only -- ˚, as anna˚, bala˚, vaṇṇa˚, sukha˚, Sn 297; vara˚ Sn 234; kāma˚ J vi.498; Pv ii.138; ambu˚ giving water, i. e. a cloud Dāvs v.32; amatamagga˚ Sdhp 1; uḷāraphala˚ ib. 26; maŋsa˚ Pgdp 49, etc. Daŋsaka
Daŋsaka:
see vi˚. Daŋseti
Daŋseti
(for dasseti): see upa˚; pavi˚, vi˚. Daka
Daka
(nt.) [ = udaka, aphaeretic from combns like sīto- daka which was taken for sīto+daka instead of sīt' odaka] Vin iii.112; S iii.85; A ii.33=Nd2 420 B3 (: the latter has udaka, but Nd1 14 daka).

-- āsaya (adj.) (beings) living in water A ii.33≈; -- ja (adj.) sprung from water, aquatic J i.18 (thalajā d pupphā); -- rakkhasa a water -- sprite J i.127, 170; vi.469. Dakkha
Dakkha1
(adj.) [Vedic dakṣa = Gr. a)ri -- dei/ketos & decio/s; dakṣati to be able; to please, satisfy, cp. daśasyati to honour, Denom. fr. *dasa=Lat. decus honour, skill. All to *dek in Lat. decet to be fit, proper, etc. On var. theories of connections of root see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under decet. It may be that *deks is an intens. formation fr. *diś to point (see disati), then the original meaning would be "pointing," i. e. the hand used for pointing. For further etym. see dakkhiṇa] dexterous, skilled, handy, able, clever D i.45, 74, 78; iii.190 (+analasa) M i.119; iii.2; S i.65; Nd2 141 (+analasa & sampajāna); J iii.247; DA i.217 (=cheka); Miln 344 (rūpadakkhā those who are of "fit" appearance). Dakkha
Dakkha2
(nt.) [dakkha1+ya, see dakkheyya] dexterity, ability, skill J iii.466. Dakkhati & Dakkhiti
Dakkhati
& Dakkhiti see dassati. Dakkhiṇa
Dakkhiṇa
(adj.) [Vedic dakṣiṇa, Av. dašinō; adj. forma- tion fr. adv. *deksi = *deksinos, cp. purāṇa fr. purā, viṣuṇa fr. viṣu, Lat. bīni (=bisni) fr. bis. From same root *deks are Lat. dexter (with compar. -- antithetic suffix ter=Sk. tara, as in uttara) & Gr. decitero/s; cp. also Goth. taihswa (right hand), Ohg. zeso & zesawa. See dakkha for further connections] 1. right (opp. vāma left), with a tinge of the auspicious, lucky & prominent: Vin ii.195 (hattha); PvA 112, 132 (id.); Ps i.125. hattha, pāda, etc. with ref. to a Tathāgata's body); J i.50 (˚passa the right side); PvA 178 (id.), 112 (˚bāhu); Sn p. 106 (bāha); PvA 179 (˚jānumaṇḍalena with the right knee: in veneration). -- 2. skilled, well-trained (=dakkha) J vi.512 (Com. susikkhita). -- 3. (of that point of the compass which is characterized through "orientation" by facing the rising sun, & then lies on one's right:) southern, usually in combn with disā (direction): D iii.180 (one of the 6 points, see disā), 188 sq. (id.); M i.487; ii.72; S i.145, etc.

-- āvattaka (adj.) winding to the right D ii.18 (of the hairs of a Mahāpurisa, the 14th of his characteristics or auspicious signs; cp. BSk. dakṣiṇāvarta a precious shell, i. e. a shell the spiral of which turns to the right AvŚ i.205; Divy 51, 67, 116); J v.380; -- janapada the southern country the "Dekkan" ( = dakkhiṇaŋ) D i.96, 153 (expld by Bdhgh as "Gangāya dakkhiṇato pākaṭa -- janapado" DA i.265); -- samudda the southern sea J i.202. Dakkhiṇā
Dakkhiṇā
(f.) [Vedic dakṣiṇā to dakṣ as in daśasyati to honour, to consecrate, but taken as f. of dakkhiṇa & by grammarians expl. as gift by the "giving" (i. e. the right) hand with popular analogy to dā to give (dadāti)] a gift, a fee, a donation; a donation given to a "holy" person with ref. to unhappy beings in the Peta existence ("Manes"), intended to induce the alleviation of their sufferings; an intercessional, expiatory offering, "don attributif" (Feer) (see Stede, Peta Vatthu, etc. p. 51 sq.; Feer Index to AvŚ p. 480) D i.51 = iii.66 (d. -- uddhaggikā), cp. A ii.68 (uddhaggā d.); A iii.43, 46, 178, 259; iv.64 sq., 394; M iii.254 sq. (cuddasa pāṭipuggalikā d. given to 14 kinds of worthy recipients) Sn 482, 485; It 19; J i.228; Pv i.44 (=dāna PvA 18), i.59 (petānaŋ d ˚ŋ dajjā), iv.151; Miln 257; Vism 220; PvA 29, 50, 70, 110 (pūjito dakkhiṇāya). guru -- d. teacher's fee VvA 229, 230; dakkhiṇaŋ ādisati (otherwise uddisati) to designate a gift to a particular person (with dat.) Vin i.229=D ii.88.

-- âraha a worthy recipient of a dedicatory gift Pv ii.86; -- odaka water to wash in (orig. water of dedication, consecrated water) J i.118; iv.370; DhA i.112; PvA 23; -- visuddhi. purity of a gift M iii.256 sq. = A ii.80 sq.=D iii.231, cp. Kvu 556 sq. Dakkhiṇeyya
Dakkhiṇeyya
(adj. -- n.) [grd. -- formation fr. dakkhiṇā as from a verb *dakṣiṇāti = pūjeti] one worthy of a dakkiṇā. The term is expl. at KhA 183, & also (with ref. to brahmanic usage) at Nd2 291; -- S i.142, 168, 220; M i.37, 236 sq.; 446; A i.63, 150; ii.44; iii.134, 162, 248; iv.13 sq.; D iii.5; It 19 (annañ ca datvā bahuno dakkhiṇeyyesu dakkhiṇaŋ . . . saggaŋ gacchanti dāyakā); Sn 227, 448 sq., 504, 529; Nd2 291 (as one of the 3 constituents of a successful sacrifice, viz. yañña the gift, phala the fruit of the gift, d. the recipient of the gift). Cp. i.105 (where also adj. to be given, of dāna). Pv iv.133; VvA 120, 155 (Ep. of the Sangha= ujubhūta); PvA 25, 125, 128, 262.

-- aggi the (holy) fire of a good receiver of gifts; a metaphor taken from the brahmanic rite of sacrifice, as one of the 7 fires ( = duties) to be kept up (or discarded) by a follower of the Buddha A iv.41, 45; D iii.217; -- khetta the fruitful soil of a worthy recipient of a gift PvA 92; -- puggala an individual deserving a donation J i.228; there are 7 kinds enumd at D iii.253; 8 kinds at D iii.255; -- sampatti the blessing of finding a worthy object for a dakkhiṇā PvA 27, 137 sq. Dakkhiṇeyyatā
Dakkhiṇeyyatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] the fact of being a dakkhiṇeyya Miln 240 (a˚). -- 312 -- Dakkhita
Dakkhita
[Vedic dīkṣita pp. of dīkṣ, Intens to daśayati: see dakkha1] consecrated, dedicated J v.138. Cp. dikkhita. Dakkhin
Dakkhin
(adj.) [fr. dakkhati, see dassati] seeing, perceiving; f. ˚ī in atīra -- dakkhiṇī nāvā a ship out of sight of land D i.222. Dakkheyya
Dakkheyya
(nt.) [cp. dakkha2] cleverness, skill J ii.237 (Com. kusalassa -- ñāṇa -- sampayuttaŋ viriyaŋ); iii.468. Daṭṭha
Daṭṭha
[pp. of daśati, see ḍasati] bitten J i.7; Miln 302; PvA 144. Daṭṭhar
Daṭṭhar
[n. ag. to dassati] one who sees A ii.25. Daṭṭhā
Daṭṭhā
(f.) [cp. dāṭhā] a large tooth, tusk, fang Miln 150 (˚visa). Daḍḍha
Daḍḍha
[Sk. dagdha, pp. of dahati, see ḍahati] burnt, always with aggi˚ consumed by fire Sn 62; Pv i.74; Miln 47; PvA 56 (indaggi˚).

-- ṭṭhāna a place burnt by fire J i.212; also a place of cremation (sarīrassa d.) PvA 163 ( = āḷāhana). Daḍḍhi˚
Daḍḍhi˚
[not with Trenckner, Notes p. 65 = Sk. dārḍhya, but with Kern, Toev. 113= Sk. dṛḍhī (from dṛḍha, see daḷha), as in compn dṛḍhī karoti & bhavati to make or become strong] making firm, strengthening, in kayādaḍḍhi -- bahula strengthened by gymnastics, an athlete J iii.310 (v. l. daḷhi˚), iv.219 (v. l. distorted kādaḷiphahuna). Daṇḍa
Daṇḍa
[Vedic daṇḍa, dial. = *dal[d]ra; (on ṇ: l cp. guṇa: guḷa etc.) to *del as in Sk. dala, dalati. Cp. Lat. dolare to cut, split, work in wood; delere to destroy; Gr. dai/dalon work of art; Mhg. zelge twig; zol a stick. Possibly also fr. *dan[d]ra (r=l freq., ṇ: l as tulā: tūṇa; veṇu: veḷu, etc. cp. aṇḍa, caṇḍa), then it would equal Gr. de/ndron tree, wood, & be connected with Sk. dāru] 1. stem of a tree, wood, wood worked into something, e. g. a handle, etc. J ii.102; 405 (v. l. dabba); Vism 313; PvA 220 (nimbarukkhassa daṇḍena [v. l. dabbena] katasūla). tidaṇḍa a tripod. -- 2. a stick, staff, rod, to lean on, & as support in walking; the walking -- stick of a Wanderer Vin ii.132 (na sakkoti vinā daṇḍena āhiṇḍituŋ), 196; S i.176; A i.138, 206; Sn 688 (suvaṇṇa˚); J iii.395; v.47 (loha˚); Sdhp 399 (eka˚, ˚dvaya, ti˚). daṇḍaŋ olubbha leaning on the st. M i.108; A iii.298; Th 2, 27. -- 3. a stick as means of punishment. a blow, a thrashing: daṇḍehi aññamaññaŋ upakkamanti "they go for each other with sticks" M i.86=Nd2 199; ˚ŋ dadāti to give a thrashing J iv.382; v.442; daṇḍena pahāraŋ dadāti to hit with a stick S iv.62; brahma˚ a certain kind of punishment D ii.154, cp. Vin ii.290 & Kern, Manual p. 87; pañca satāni daṇḍo a fine of 500 pieces Vin i.247; paṇīta˚ receiving ample p. Pv iv.166; purisa -- vadha˚ J ii.417; rāja -- daṇḍaŋ karoti (c. loc.) to execute the royal beating PvA 216. See also Dh 129, 131, 310, 405 -- 4. a stick as a weapon in general, only in cert. phrases & usually in combn w. sattha, sword. daṇḍaŋ ādiyati to take up the stick, to use violence: attadaṇḍa (atta=ā -- dā) violent Sn 935; attadaṇḍesu nibbuta Dh 406=Sn 630; a.+kodhâbhibhūta S iv.117: ādinna -- daṇḍa ādinnasattha Vin i.349; opp. daṇḍaŋ nidahati to lay down the stick, to be peaceful: sabbesu bhūtesu nidhāya daṇḍaŋ Sn 35, 394, 629; nihita -- d. nihita -- sattha using neither stick nor sword, of the Dhamma D i.4, 63; M i.287; A i.211; ii.208; iv.249; v.204. daṇḍaŋ nikkhipati id. A i.206. d. -- sattha parāmasana Nd2 576. daṇḍa -- sattha -- abbhukkirana & daṇḍa -- sattha -- abhinipātana Nd2 5764. Cp. paṭidaṇḍa retribution Dh 133. -> 5. (fig.) a means of frightening, frightfulness, violence, teasing. In this meaning used as nt. as M i.372; tīṇi daṇḍāni pāpassa kammassa kiriyāya: kāyadaṇḍaŋ vacī˚, mano˚; in the same sense as m. at Nd2 293 (as expld to Sn 35). -- 6. a fine, a penalty, penance in general: daṇḍena nikkiṇāti to redeem w. a penalty J vi.576 (dhanaŋ datvā Com.); daṇḍaŋ dhāreti to inflict a fine Miln 171, 193; daṇḍaŋ paṇeti id. Dh 310 (cp. DhA iii.482); DhA ii.71; aṭṭha -- kahāpaṇo daṇḍo a fine of 8 k. VvA 76. -- adaṇḍa without a stick, i. e. without force or violence, usually in phrase adaṇḍena asatthena (see above 4): Vin ii.196 (ad. as. nāgo danto mahesinā; thus of a Cakkavattin who rules the world peacefully: paṭhaviŋ ad. as. dhammena abhivijiya ajjhāvasati D i.89=A iv.89, 105, or dhammena -- manusāsati Sn 1002=S i.236.

-- âbhighata slaying w. cudgels PvA 58; -- âraha (adj.) deserving punishment J v.442; VvA 23; -- ādāna taking up a stick (weapon) (cp. above 4), combd with satth' ādāna M i.110, 113, 410; D iii.92, 93, 289; A iv.400; Vism 326. -- kaṭhina k. cloth stretched on a stick (for the purpose of measuring) Vin ii.116; -- kathālikā a large kettle with a handle Vin i.286; -- kamma punishment by beating, penalty, penance, atonement J iii.276, 527; v.89; Miln 8; ˚ŋ karoti to punish, to inflict a fine Vin i.75, 76, 84; ii.262; -- koṭi the tip of a branch or stick DhA i.60; -- dīpikā a torch J vi.398; Vism 39; DhA i.220, 399; -- ppatta liable to punishment Miln 46; -- paduma N. of a plant (cp. Sk. daṇḍotphala = sahadevā, Halāyudha) J i.51; -- parāyana supported by or leaning on a stick (of old people) M i.88; A i.138; Miln 282; -- parissāvana a strainer with a handle Vin ii.119; -- pahāra a blow with a stick D i.144; -- pāṇin carrying a staff, "staff in hand" M i.108; -- bali ( -- ādi) fines & taxes, etc. DhA i.251; -- bhaya fear of punishment A ii.121 sq.=Nd2 470=Miln 196; -- (m)antara among the sticks D i.166=A i.295=ii.206=M i.77, 238, 307, 342 = Pug 55; see note at Dial. i.228; -- yuddha a club -- fight D i.6; J iii.541; -- lakkhaṇa fortune -- telling from sticks D i.9; -- vākarā a net on a stick, as a snare, M i.153; -- veḷupesikā a bamboo stick J iv.382; -- sikkā a rope slung round the walking -- staff Vin ii.131; -- hattha with a stick in his hand J i.59. Daṇḍaka
Daṇḍaka
[Demin. of daṇḍa] 1. a (small) stick, a twig; a staff, a rod; a handle D i.7 (a walking stick carried for ornament: see DA i.89); J i.120 (sukkha˚ a dry twig); ii.103; iii.26; DhA iii.171; Vism 353. -- aḍḍha˚ a (birch) rod, used as a means of beating (tāḷeti) A i.47; ii.122 = M i.87=Nd2 604=Miln 197; ubhato˚ two handled (of a saw) M i.129=189; ratha˚ the flag -- staff of a chariot Miln 27; veṇu˚ a jungle rope J iii.204. -- See also kudaṇḍaka a twig used for tying J iii.204. -- 2. the crossbar or bridge of a lute J ii.252, 253.

-- dīpikā a torch J i.31; -- madhu "honey in a branch," a beehive DhA i.59. Daṇḍaniya
Daṇḍaniya
(adj.) [grd. formation from daṇḍa] liable to punishment Miln 186. Datta
Datta1
[pp. of dadāti] given ( -- ˚ by; often in Np. as Brah- madatta, Deva -- datta = Theo -- dor. etc.) Sn 217 (para˚) =SnA 272 (v. l. dinna). Datta
Datta2
(adj. -- n.) [prob. = thaddha, with popular analogy to datta1, see also dandha & cp. dattu] stupid; a silly fellow M i.383; J vi.192 (Com.: dandha lāḷaka). Datti
Datti
(f.) [from dadāti+ti] gift, donation, offering D i.166; M i.78, 342; A i.295; ii.206; Pug 55. Dattika
Dattika
(adj.) [der. fr. datta] given; J iii.221 (kula˚); iv.146 (id.); nt. a gift D i.103 ( = dinnaka DA i.271). Dattiya
Dattiya
= dattika, given as a present J ii.119 (kula˚); v.281 (sakka˚); vi.21 (id.): VvA 185 (mahārāja˚ by the King). Dattu
Dattu
(adj.?) [is it base of n. ag. dātar? see datta2] stupid, in d˚ -- paññatta a doctrine of fools D i.55 = M i.515; J iv.338. -- 313 -- Dada
Dada
( -- ˚) (adj. -- suff.) [Sk.˚ dad or ˚dada, cp ˚da & dadāti base 3] giving, to be given S i.33 (paññā˚); Kh viii.10 (kāma˚); Pv ii.91 (id. = dāyaka PvA 113); ii.124 (phala˚ =dāyin PvA 157); VvA 171 (puriŋ˚). -- duddada hard to give S i.19=iv.65=J ii.86=vi.571. Dadāti
Dadāti
[Redupl. formation dā as in Lat. do, perf. de -- di, Gr. di/dwmi; cp. Lat. dōs dowry, Gr. dw/s; Ohg. dati; Lith. důti to give] to give, etc. I. Forms. The foll. bases form the Pāli verb -- system: dā, dāy, dadā & di. -- 1. Bases dā & (reduced) da. -- (a) dā˚: fut. dassati J i.113, 279; iii.83; A iii.37; 1st sg. dassāmi J i.223; ii.160; PvA 17, 35, etc. -- dammi interpreted by Com. as fut. is in reality a contraction fr. dātuŋ īhāmi, used as a hortative or dubitative subjunctive (fr. dāhāmi, like kāhami I am willing to do fr. kātuŋ īhāmi) Sn p. 15 ("shall I give"); ii.112; iv.10 (varaŋ te dammi); Pv i.103; ii.324 (kin t' āhaŋ dammi what can I give thee = dassāmi PvA 88). -- pret. adā Sn 303; Pv ii.28 (=adāsi PvA 81); Mhvs vii.14; 2nd sg. ado J iv.10 (=adāsi Com.): Miln 384; 1st. pl. adamha J ii.71; Miln 10; 2nd pl. adattha J i.57 (mā ad.); Miln 10, & dattha J ii.181; -- aor. adāsi J i.150, 279; PvA 73, etc.; pl. adaŋsu Pv i.116. -- inf. dātuŋ J iii.53; PvA 17, 48 (˚kāma), etc. & dātave Sn 286. -- grd. dātabba J iii.52; PvA 7, 26, 88, etc. -> (b) da˚: pp. datta -- ger. datvā J i.152, 290 (a˚); PvA 70, 72, etc. & datvāna Pv i.113; also as ˚dā (for ˚dāya or ˚dāna) in prep. cpds., like an -- upādā, ādā, etc. Der. fr. 1. are Caus. dāpeti, pp. dāpita; n. ag. dātar; nt. dāna. See also suffix dā,˚ datti, dattikā, etc.; and pp. atta (=ā -- d[a]ta). -- 2. Bases dāy & (reduced) day, contracted into de. (a) dāy˚: only in der. dāya, dāyaka, dāyin and in prep. cpds. ā -- dāye (ger. of ādāti). -> (b) de˚: pres. ind. deti Sn 130; J ii.111, 154; PvA 8; 1st sg. demi J i.228, 307; 2nd desi J i.279; PvA 39. 1st pl. dema J i.263; iii.126; PvA 27, 75 (shall we give); 2nd detha J iii.127; 3rd denti Sn 244. -- imper. dehi Vin i.17; J i.223; iv.101; PvA 43, 73; 3rd sg. detu J i.263; ii.104; 2nd pl. detha It 66 J iii.126; PvA 29, 62, 76. -- ppr. dento J i.265; PvA 3, 11 etc. -- grd. deyya Mhvs vii.31. BtSk. deya. -- Other der. fr. base 2 are dayati & dayā (q. v.). -- 3. Base dadā: pres. ind. dadāti S i.18; Sn p. 87; 1st. sg. dadāmi J i.207; Sn 421; 3rd. pl. dadanti J iii.220; Dh 249. -- imper. dadāhi Pv ii.14. -- pot. dadeyya PvA 17; Miln 28 & dade Pv ii.322; Vv 625; 1st. sg. dadeyyaŋ J i.254, 265; 2nd. sg. dadeyyāsi J iii.276. Also contracted forms dajjā S i.18 (may he give); Dh 224; Pv i.41 (=dadeyya PvA 17); ii.940; 1st sg. dajjaŋ Vin i.232 (dajjâhaŋ=dajjaŋ ahaŋ). Cp. i.109 (dajjâhaŋ); J iv.101 (=dammi Com.); Pv ii.945; 2nd. pl. dajjeyyātha Vin i.232; 3rd y. dajjeyya & 3rd. pl. dajjuŋ in cpd. anupa˚. -- ppr. dadanto Sn p. 87. gen. etc. dadato It. 89; Dh 242; Pv ii.942; & dadaŋ Sn 187, 487; Pv ii.942; Vv 676. -- ppr. med. dadamāna J i.228, ii.154; PvA 129. -- aor. adadaŋ Vv 3411 (= adāsiŋ VvA 151); proh. 2nd. pl. mā dadiṭṭha DhA i.396; J iii.171. -- ger. daditvā Pv ii.89.ii (v. l. BB datvā): contr. into dajjā (should be read dajja) Pv ii.967 (=datvā PvA 139). -- Der. dada for ˚da. -> 4. (Passive) base di (& dī): pp. dinna pres. dīyati S i.18; Th 2, 475; PvA 26, & diyyati VvA 75; cp. ādiyati; pret. dīyittha DhA i.395; -- ppr. dīyamāna PvA 8, 26, 49, 110, 133, etc. -- Der. fr. 4 are Desid. dicchati, diti, etc. -- II. Meanings i. (trs.) with acc. to give, to present with: dānaŋ deti (w. dat. & abs.) to be liberal (towards), to be munificent, to make a present S i.18; It 89; Pv i.41; ii3; PvA 8, 27, etc. -- (fig.) okāsaŋ to give opportunity, allow J i.265; ovādaŋ to give advice PvA 11; jīvitaŋ to spare one's life J ii.154; paṭivacanaŋ to answer J i.279; sādhukāraŋ to applaud J i.223; paṭiññaŋ to promise PvA 76; -- to offer, to allow: maggaŋ i. e. to make room Vin ii.221; J ii.4; maggaŋ dehi let me pass J iv.101; -- to grant: varaŋ a wish J iv.10; Pv ii.940; -- to give or deal out: daṇḍaŋ a thrashing J iv.382; pahāraŋ a blow S iv.62. -- 2. with ger. to give out, to hand over: dārūni āharitvā aggiŋ katvā d. to provide with fire J ii.102; sāṭake āharitvā to present w. clothes J i.265; dve koṭṭhāse vibhajitvā d. to deal out J i.226; kuṭikāyo kāretvā adaŋsu had huts built & gave them PvA 42. -- 3. (abs.) with inf. to permit, to allow: khādituŋ J i.223; nikkhamituŋ J ii.154; pavisituŋ J i.263, etc. Daddabha
Daddabha
[onomatop.] a heavy, indistinct noise, a thud J iii.76 (of the falling of a large fruit), v. l. duddabhayasadda to be regarded as a Sk. gloss = dundubhyaśabda. See also dabhakka. Daddabhāyati
Daddabhāyati
[Denom. fr. prec.] to make a heavy noise, to thud J iii.77. Daddara
Daddara1
[onomat. from the noise, cp. next & cakora, with note on gala] partridge J iii.541. Daddara
Daddara2
[cp. Sk. dardara] a cert. (grinding, crashing) noise A iv.171; J ii.8; iii.461; N. of a mountain, expld as named after this noise J ii.8; iii.16, 461. Daddaḷhati
Daddaḷhati
[Sk. jājvalyati, Intens. of jval, see jalati] to blaze, to shine brilliantly; only in pp. med. daddaḷhamāna resplendent, blazing forth S i.127 = J i.469; Vv 173; 341; Pv ii.126; iii.35; VvA 89 (ativiya vijjotamāna); PvA 157 (at. virocamāna), 189 (at. abhijalanto). -- Spelling daddallamāna at J v.402; vi.118. Daddu
Daddu
(nt.) [Sk. dadru f. & dardru a kind of leprosy, dadruna leprous (but given by Halāyudha in the meaning of ringworm, p. 234 Aufrecht); fr. *der in Sk. dṛṇāti to tear, chap, split (see dara & dala); cp. Lat. derbiosus; Ohg. zittaroh; Ags. teter] a kind of cutaneous eruption Miln 298; Vism 345.

-- bandhana in d. -- bandhanādi -- bandhana at ThA 241 should be read daṇḍa˚. Daddula
Daddula1
a cert. kind of rice D i.166; M i.78, 343; A i.241, 295; ii.206; Pug 55. Daddula
Daddula2
(nt.) [Sk. dārdura?] in nahāru˚ (v. l. dala & dadalla) both at M i.188 (kukkuṭapattena pi. n -- daddulena pi aggiŋ gavesanti) & A iv.47 (kukkuṭapattaŋ vā n -- daddulaŋ vā aggimhi pakkhittaŋ paṭilīyati) unexplained; perhaps a muscle. Dadhi
Dadhi
(nt.) [Sk. dadhi, redpl. formation fr. dhayati to suck. Cp. also dhenu cow, dhīta, etc.] sour milk, curds, junket Vin i.244 (in enumn of 5 -- fold cow -- produce, cp. gorasa); D i.201 (id.); M i.316; A ii.95; J ii.102; iv.140; Miln 41, 48, 63; Dhs 646, 740, 875; Vism 264, 362.

-- ghaṭa a milk bowl J ii.102; -- maṇḍaka whey S ii.111; -- māla "the milk sea," N. of an ocean J iv.140; -- vāraka a pot of milk -- curds J iii.52. Danta
Danta1
[Sk. danta fr. acc. dantaŋ of dan, gen. datah = Lat. dentis. Cp. Av. dantan, Gr. o)do/nta, Lat. dentem, Oir. dēt; Goth. tunpus, Ohg. zand, Ags. tōot (=tooth) & tusc (=tusk); orig. ppr. to *ed in atti to eat="the biter." Cp. dāṭhā], a tooth, a tusk, fang, esp. an elephant's tusk; ivory Vin ii.117 (nāga -- d. a pin of ivory); Kh ii. (as one of the taca -- pañcaka, or 5 dermatic constituents of the body, viz. kesā, lomā nakhā d. taco, see detailed description at KhA 43 sq.); pankadanta rajassira "with sand between his teeth & dust on his head" (of a wayfarer) Sn 980; J iv.362, 371; M i.242; J i.61; ii.153; Vism 251; VvA 104 (īsā˚ long tusks); PvA 90, 152 (fang); Sdhp 360.

-- ajina ivory M ii.71 (gloss: dhanadhaññaŋ); -- aṭṭhika "teeth -- bone," ivory of teeth i. e. the tooth as such Vism 21. -- āvaraṇa the lip (lit. protector of teeth) J iv.188; vi.590; DhA i.387. -- ullahakaŋ (M iii.167) see ullahaka; -- kaṭṭha a tooth -- pick Vin i.46 = ii.223; i.51, 61; ii.138; A iii.250; J i.232; ii.25; vi.75; Miln 15; DhA ii.184; VvA 63; -- kāra an artisan in ivory ivory -- worker D i.78; J i.320; Miln 331; Vism 336; -- kūta tooth of a maimed bullock (?) (thus taking kūṭa as kūṭa4, and equivalent to kūṭadanta), in phrase asanivicakkaŋ danta -- kūṭaŋ D iii.44=47, which has also puzzled the translators (cp. Dial. iii.40: "munching them all up together with that wheel -- less thunderbolt of a jawbone," with note: "the sentence is not clear"). -- pāḷi row of teeth Vism 251; -- poṇa tooth -- cleaner, always combd with mukh' odaka water for rinsing the teeth Vin iii.51; iv.90, 233; J iv.69; Miln 15; SnA 272. The C. on Pārāj. ii.4, 17, (Vin iii.51) gives 2 kinds of dantapoṇa, viz. chinna & acchinna. -- mūla the root of a tooth; the gums J v.172; -- vakkalika a kind of ascetics (peeling the bark of trees with their teeth?) DA i.271; -- vaṇṇa ivory -- coloured, ivory -- white Vv 4510; -- valaya an iv. bangle DhA i.226; -- vikati a vessel of iv. D i.78; M ii.18; J i.320; Vism 336. -- vikhādana biting with teeth, i. e. chewing Dhs 646, 740, 875; -- vidaŋsaka (either=vidassaka or to be read ˚ghaŋsaka) showing one's teeth (or chattering?) A i.261 (of hasita, laughter); -- sampatti splendour of teeth DhA i.390. -- 314 -- Danta
Danta2
(adj.) [Sk. dānta] made of ivory, or iv. -- coloured J vi.223 (yāna = dantamaya).

-- kāsāva ivory -- white & yellow Vin i.287; -- valaya see danta1. Danta
Danta3
[Sk. dānta, pp. dāmyati to make, or to be tame, cp. Gr. dmhto/s, Lat. domitus. See dameti] tamed, controlled, restrained Vin ii.196; S i.28, 65, 141 (nāgo va danto carati anejo); A i.6 (cittaŋ dantaŋ); It 123 (danto damayataŋ seṭṭho); Sn 370, 463, 513, 624; Dh 35, 142 ( = catumagga -- niyamena d. DhA iii.83), 321 sq.=Nd2 475. -- sudanta well -- tamed, restrained Sn 23; Dh 159, 323.

-- bhūmi a safe place ( = Nibbāna), or the condition of one who is tamed S iii.84; Nd2 475 (in continuation of Dh 323); DhA iv.6. Dantaka
Dantaka
a pin of tooth or ivory; makara˚ the tooth of a sword -- fish Vin ii.113, 117; iv.47. See details under makara. Dandha
Dandha
(adj.) [Sk.? Fausböll refers it to Sk. tandra; Trenckner (Notes 65) to dṛḍha; see also Müller, P. Gr. 22, & Lüders Z.D.M.G. 58, 700. A problematic connection is that with thaddha & datta2 (q. v.)] slow; slothful, indocile; silly, stupid M i.453; S iv.190; Dh 116; J i.116, 143; ii.447; v.158; vi.192 (+laḷāka); Th 1, 293; Miln 59, 102, 251; DhA i.94, 251; iii.4. Vism 105, 257 (with ref. to the liver).

-- âbhiññā sluggish intuition D iii.106; A v.63; Dhs 176; Nett 7, 24, 50, 123 sq., cp. A ii.149 sq.; Vism 85. Dandhatā
Dandhatā
(f.) stupidity DhA i.250; as dandhattaŋ at D iii.106. Dandhanatā
Dandhanatā
(f.), in a˚ absence of sluggishness Dhs 42, 43. Dandhāyanā
Dandhāyanā
(f.) clumsiness Miln 105. Dandhāyitatta
Dandhāyitatta
(nt.) [der. fr. dandheti] stupidity ( = dan- dhatā) D i.249 (opp. vitthāyitatta); S ii.54; Miln 105; DA i.252. Dandheti
Dandheti
[Denom. fr. dandha] to be slow, to tarry Th 1, 293 (opp. tāreti). -- pp. dandhāyita see in der. ˚tta. Dapeti
Dapeti
Caus. fr. dā4 to clean, see pariyo˚; pp. dāta see ava˚. Dappa
Dappa
[Sk. darpa, to dṛpyati] wantonness, arrogance J ii.277; Miln 361, 414; Pgdp 50. Cp. ditta2. -- In def. of root gabb at Dhtm 289. Dappita
Dappita
(adj.) arrogant, haughty J v.232, 301. Dabba
Dabba1
(adj. -- n.) [Sk. dravya, nt. to dravati (dru)] (a) fit for, able, worthy, good, S i.187 = Th 1, 1218, cp. Pss. of the Brethren, 399, n. 4 (=Sk. bhavya, cp. Pāṇini v.3, 104 dravyaŋ ca bhavyaḥ). -- (b) material, substance, property; something substantial, a worthy object Pgdp 14.

-- jātika of good material, fit for, able M i.114; A i.254 (cp. Sk. pātrabhūta); Vism 196. -- saŋhāra collecting something substantial PvA 114 (should prob. be read sambhāra). -- sambhāra the collection of something substantial or worth collecting,; a gift worth giving J iv.311; v.48; vi.427; DhA i.321; ii.114. Dabba
Dabba2
(adj. -- n.) [Sk. dravya, of dru wood, see dāru] tree- like, wooden; a tree, shrub, wood J i.108 (d. -- tiṇagaccha a jungle of wood & grass); v.46 (d. -- gahana a thicket of shrubs & trees); Vism 353 (˚tiṇa). Dabbī
Dabbī
(f.) [Sk. darvī = *dāru -- ī made of wood, see dāru] a (wooden) spoon, a ladle; (met.) the hood of a snake (dabbimattā, phaṇapuṭakā DhA iv.132). -- Dh 64; gen. & instr, davyā J iii.218; Miln 365. -- In cpds. dabbi˚.

-- kaṇṇa the tip of the ladle DhA i.371; -- gāha holding a spoon, viz. for the purposes of offering M ii.157 (of a priest); Pv ii.953 ( = kaṭacchu -- gāhika PvA 135); -- mukha a kind of bird J vi.540 (=āṭa); -- homa a spoonoblation D i.9. Dabbha
Dabbha
[Sk. darbha to dṛbhati, to plait, interlace, etc. cp. Lith. darbas plaiting, crating] a bunch of kuśa grass (Poa Cynosuroides) D i.141; M i.344; A ii.207.

-- puppha "kuśa -- flower," Ep. of a jackal J iii.334. Dabhakkaŋ
Dabhakkaŋ
(?) (indecl.) = daddabhaŋ; a certain noise (of a falling fruit) J iii.77 (v. l. duddabha=daddabha). Dama
Dama
(adj. -- n.) (& of a nt. damo the instr. damasā) [Ved. dama; Ags. tam = E. tame, Ohg. zam to *demā in dameti] taming, subduing; self -- control, self -- command, moderation D i.53 (dānena damena saŋyamena=It 15; expl. at DA i.160 as indriya -- damena uposatha -- kammena) iii.147, 229; S i.4, 29, 168=Sn 463 (saccena danto damasā upeto); S iv.349; A i.151; ii.152 sq.; M iii.269 (+upasama); Sn 189, 542 (˚ppatta), 655; Dh 9, 25, 261; Nett 77; Miln 24 (sudanto uttame dame). duddama hard to tame or control Dh 159; PvA 280; Sdhp 367. -- arindama taming the enemy (q. v.). Damaka
Damaka
(adj. -- n.) [ = dama] 1. subduing, taming; converting; one who practises self -- control M i.446 (assa˚); iii.2 (id.) J i.349 (kula˚ bhikkhu), one who teaches a clan self -- mastery 505 (go˚, assa˚, hatthi˚); Th 2, 422 (=kāruññāya paresaŋ cittassa damaka ThA 268). -- 2. one who practises self -- mortification by living on the remnants of offered food (Childers) Abhp 467. Damatha
Damatha
[Sk. damatha] taming, subduing, mastery, restraint, control M i.235; D iii.54 (+samatha); Dh 35 (cittassa d.); PvA 265; Dpvs vi.36. Damana
Damana
(adj. -- nt.) taming, subduing, mastery PvA 251 (arīnaŋ d˚ -- sīla = arindama). Damaya
Damaya
(adj.) [Sk. damya, see damma] to be tamed: duddamaya difficult to tame Th 1, 5 (better to be read damiya). Damita
Damita
[Sk. damāyita = danta3; cp. Gr. a -- da/matos; Lat. domitus] subdued, tamed J v.36; PvA 265. Dametar
Dametar
[n. -- ag. to dameti = Sk. damayitṛ, cp. Sk. damitṛ=Gr. (pan)dama/twr dmhth/r; Lat. domitor] one who tames or subdues, a trainer, in phrase adantānaŋ dametā "the tamer of the untamed" (of a Buddha) M ii.102; Th 2, 135. -- 315 -- Dameti
Dameti
[Sk. damayati, caus. to dāmyati of *dam to bring into the house, to domesticate; Gr. dama/w, dmhto/s; Lat. domare; Oir. dam (ox); Goth. tamjan = Ohg. zemman=Ags. temian=E. tame; to *demā of dama house, see dampati] to make tame, chastise, punish, master, conquer, convert Vin ii.196 (daṇḍena); M ii.102; Dh 80, 305 (attānaŋ); It 123 (ppr. [danto] damayataŋ seṭṭho [santo] samayataŋ isi); Miln 14, 386; PvA 54 (core d.=converted). Dampati
Dampati
[Sk. dampati master of the house; dual: husband & wife; cp. also patir dan, *dam, as in Gr. dw_, dw_ma & des -- in despo/ths = dampati, short base of *dama house =Ved. dama, Gr. do/mos, Lat. domus to *demā (as also in dameti to domesticate) to build, cp. Gr. de/mw & de/mas; Goth. timrjan; Ohg. zimbar; E. timber] master of the house, householder, see tudampati & cp. gahapati. Damma
Damma
(adj.) [Sk. damya, grd. of dāmyati see dameti & cp. damaya (damiya)] to be tamed or restrained; esp. with ref. to a young bullock M i.225 (balagāvā dammagāvā the bulls & the young steers); It 80; also of other animals: assadamma -- sārathi a horse -- trainer A ii.112; & fig. of unconverted men likened to refractory bullocks in phrase purisa -- damma -- sārathi (Ep. of the Buddha) "the trainer of the human steer" D i.62 (misprint ˚dhamma˚) = ii.93= iii.5; M ii.38; A ii.112; Vv 1713 (nara -- vara -- d. -- sārathi cp. VvA 86. Dayati
Dayati1
= dayati (q. v.) to fly J iv.347 (+uppatati); vi.145 (dayassu=uyyassu Com.). Dayati
Dayati2
= [Ved. dayate of day to divide, share, cp. Gr. dai/omai, dai/numi, dai/ th, etc. to dā (see dadāti, base 2), & with p. Gr. dapa/nh, Lat. daps (see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.)] to have pity (c. loc.), to sympathize, to be kind J vi.445 (dayitabba), 495 (dayyāsi=dayaŋ kareyyāsi). Dayā
Dayā
(f.) [Ved. dayā, to dayati2] sympathy, compassion, kindness M i.78; Sn 117; J i.23; vi.495. Usually as anuddayā; freq. in cpd. dayāpanna showing kindness D i.4 ( = dayaŋ metta -- cittaŋ āpanno DA i.70); M i.288; A iv.249 sq.; Pug 57; VvA 23. Dara
Dara
[Sk. dara; see etym. connection under darī] fear, terror; sorrow, pain Vin ii.156 = A i.138 (vineyya hadaye daraŋ); S ii.101, 103; iv.186 sq.; Th 2, 32 (= cittakato kilesa -- patho ThA, 38); J iv.61; Vv 838 (=daratha VvA 327); Pv i.85 (=citta -- daratha PvA 41). -- sadara giving pain, fearful, painful M i.464; A ii.11, 172; S i.101. Cp. ādara & purindada. Daratha
Daratha
[Sk. daratha, der. fr. dara] anxiety, care, distress A ii.238; M iii.287 sq. (kāyikā & cetasikā d.); Sn 15 (darathajā: the Arahant has nought in him born of care Cy explains by pariḷāha fever); J i.61 (sabbakilesa -- d.) PvA 230 (id.); DhA ii.215; Miln 320; PvA 23, 41; VvA 327. Darī
Darī
(f.) [Sk. darī to dṛṇāti to cleave, split, tear, rend, caus. darayati *der = Gr. de/rw to skin, de/rma, dora/ skin); Lith. dirù (id.) Goth. ga -- taíran= Ags. teran (tear) =Ohg. zeran (Ger. zerren). To this the variant (r:l) *del in dalati, dala, etc. See also daddara, daddu, dara, avadīyati, ādiṇṇa, uddīyati, purindada (=puraŋ -- dara)] a cleavage, cleft; a hole, cave, cavern J i.18 (v. 106), 462 (mūsikā˚ mouse -- hole); ii.418 (=maṇiguhā); SnA 500 (=padara).

-- cara a cave dweller (of a monkey) J v.70; -- mukha entrance of a cave Vism 110. -- saya a lair in a cleft Cp. iii.71. Dala
Dala
(nt.) [Sk. dala, *del (var. of *der, see dara) in dalati (q. v.) orig. a piece chipped off = a chip, piece of wood, cp. daṇḍa, Mhg. zelge (branch); Oir delb (figure, form), deil (staff, rod)] a blade, leaf, petal (usually -- ˚); akkhi -- d. eyelid ThA 259; DA i.194; DhsA 378; uppala˚ DhsA 311; kamala˚ (lotus -- petal) VvA 35, 38; muttā˚ (?) DA i.252; ratta -- pavāḷa˚ J i.75. Dalati
Dalati
[Sk. dalati, del to split off, tear; Gr. daida/llw, Lat. dolare & delere. See dala & dara] to burst, split, break. -- Caus. dāleti Sn 29 (dalayitvā = chinditvā SnA 40); Miln 398. -- Pass. dīyati (Sk. dīryate) see uddīyati. Dalidda & Daḷidda
Dalidda
& Daḷidda (adj. -- n.) [Sk. daridra, to daridrāti, Intens. to drāti run (see dava), in meaning cp. addhika wayfarer = poor] vagrant, strolling, poor, needy, wretched; a vagabond, beggar -- (l:) Vin ii.159; S i.96 (opp. aḍḍha); A ii.57, 203; iii.351; iv.219; v.43; Pug 51; VvA 299 (ḷ:) M ii.73; S v.100, 384, 404; Vv201 (=duggata VvA 101); DA i.298; PvA 227; Sdhp 89, 528. Daḷiddatā
Daḷiddatā
(f.) [Sk. daridratā] poverty VvA 63. Daḷiddiya
Daḷiddiya
see dāḷiddiya. Daḷha
Daḷha
(adj.) [Sk. dṛḍha to dṛhyati to fasten, hold fast; *dhergh, cp. Lat. fortis (strong). Gr. tarfu/s (thick), Lith. dir̃žas (strap). For further relations see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under fortis] firm, strong, solid; steady, fast; nt. adv. very much, hard, strongly -- D i.245; S i.77; A ii.33; Sn 321 (nāvā), 357, 701, 821 (˚ŋ karoti to strengthen), 966 (id.); Dh 112; J ii.3; iv.106; DhA iv.48; KhA 184; VvA 212 ( = thira); PvA 94, 277. -- daḷhaŋ (adv.) Dh 61, 313.

-- dhamma strong in anything, skilled in some art, proficient S ii.266 = A ii.48 (of an archer); M i.82; J vi.77; Vv 631 acc. to Trenckner, Notes p. 60 (cp. also VvA 261)=dṛḍha -- dhanva, from dhanu=having a strong bow; -- nikkama of strong exertion Sn 68 (=Nd2 294); -- parakkama of strong effort, energetic M ii.95; A ii.250; Dh 23; Th 2, 160; -- pahāra a violent blow J iii.83; -- pākāra (etc.) strongly fortified S iv.194; -- bhattin firmly devoted to somebody DhsA 350. Daḷhī˚
Daḷhī˚
[f. of dṛḍha>daḷha in compn like dṛḍhī -- bhūta, etc.; cp. daḍḍhi] in kāya -- daḷhī -- bahula strong in body, athletic Vin ii.76, cp. Com. on p. 313; J iii.310; iv.219. daḷhīkaraṇa steadiness, perseverance SnA 290 (+ādhāraṇatā), 398 (id). In cpds. also daḷhi˚ viz. -- kamma making firm; strengthening Vin i.290; J v.254; Pug 18, 22; Vism 112. Dava
Dava1
[Sk. dava, to dunoti (q. v.); cp. Gr. dais fire -- brand] fire, heat J iii.260. -- See also dāva & dāya.

-- ḍāha ( = Sk. davāgni) conflagration of a forest, a jungle -- fire Vin ii.138; M i.306; J i.641; Cp. iii.93; Miln 189; Vism 36. Dava
Dava2
[Sk. drava to dravati to run, flow, etc. *dreu besides *drā (see dalidda) & *dram ( = Gr. dro/mos); cp. abhiddavati, also dabba=dravyaŋ] running, course, flight; quickness, sporting, exercise, play Vin ii.13; M i.273; iii.2; A i.114; ii.40, 145; iv.167; Pug 21, 25. -- davā (abl.) in sport, in fun Vin ii.101; davāya (dat.) id. Nd2 540; Miln 367; Dhs 1347, cp. DhsA 402. -- davaŋ karoti to sport, to play J ii.359, 363.

-- atthāya in joke, for fun Vin ii.113; -- kamyatā fondness for joking, Vin iv.11, 354; M i.565. Davya
Davya
[for *dravya] = dabba1, in sarīra˚ fitness of body, a beautiful body J ii.137. Dasa
Dasa1
[Sk. daśa = Av. dasa, Gr. de/ka, Lat. decem, Goth. taíhun, Oir. deich, Ags. tīen, Ohg. zehan fr. *dekm̊, a cpd. of dv+km̊="two hands"] the number ten; gen. dasannaŋ (Dh 137); instr. dasahi (Kh iii.) & dasabhi (Vin i.38). In cpds. ( -- ˚) also as ḷasa (soḷasa 16) & rasa (terasa 13; pannar˚ 15; aṭṭhār˚ 18).

Metaphorical meaning. (A) In the first place 10 is used for measurement (more recent & comprehensive than its base 5); it is the no. of a set or comprehensive unity, not in a vague (like 3 or 5), but in a definite sense. (B) There inheres in it the idea of a fixed measure, with which that of an authoritative, solemn & auspicious importance is coupled. This applies to the unit as well as its decimal combns (100, 1000). Ethically it denotes a circle, to fulfil all of which constitutes a high achievement or power.

Application (A) (based on natural phenomena): dasa disā (10 points of the compass; see disā): Sn 719, 1122; PvA 71, etc.; d. lokadhātuyo Pv ii.961 ( = 10X1000; PvA 138); d. māse (10 months as time of gestation) kucchiyā pariharitvā J i.52; PvA 43, 82. -- (B) (fig.) 1. a set: (a) personal (cp. 10 people would have saved Sodom: Gen. 18, 32; the 10 virgins (2X5) Matt. 25, 1): divase divase dasa dasa putte vijāyitvā (giving birth to 10 sons day by day) Pv i.6. -- (b) impersonal: 10 commandments (dasa sikkhāpadāni Vin i.83), cp. Exod. 34, 28; 10 attributes of perfection of a Tathāgata or an Arahant: Tathāgata -- balāni; with ref. to the Buddha see Vin i.38 & cp. Vin. Texts i.141 sq.; dasah' angehi samannāgato arahā ti vuccati (in memorizing of No. 10) Kh iii. dasahi asaddhammehi sam˚ kāko J iii.127; -- 10 heavenly attributes (ṭhānāni): āyu etc. D iii.146; S v.275; PvA 9, opp. 10 afflictions as punishment (cp. 10 plagues Exod. 7 -- 11): dasannaŋ aññataraŋ ṭhānaŋ nigacchati Dh 137 (=das. dukkha -- kāraṇānaŋ, enumd v. 138, 139) "afflicted with one of the 10 plagues"; cp. DhA iii.70. -- 10 good gifts to the bhikkhu (see deyyadhamma) Nd2 523; PvA 7; 10 rules for the king: PvA 161; -- dividing the Empire into 10 parts: PvA 111; etc. vassa -- dasa a decade: das' ev' imā vassa -- dasā J iv.396 (enumd under vassa); dasa -- rāja -- dhammā J ii.367; das' akkosa -- vatthūni DhA i.212. -- See on similar sets A v.1 -- 310; D iii.266 -- 271. -- 2. a larger unity, a crowd, a vast number (of time & space): (a) personal, often meaning "all" (cp. 10 sons of Haman were slain Esth. 9, 10; 10 lepers cleansed at one time Luke 17, 12): dasa bhātaro J i.307; dasa bhātikā PvA 111; dasa -- kaññā -- sahassa -- parivārā PvA 210 etc. -> (b) impersonal (cp. 10 X 10=many times, S.B.E. 43, 3): dasa -- yojanika consisting of a good many miles DhA iii.291. dasavassasahassāni dibbāni vatthāni paridahanto ("for ever and aye") PvA 76, etc.

-- kkhattuŋ [Sk. ˚kṛtvah] ten times DhA i.388; -- pada (nt.) a draught -- board (with 10 squares on each side); a pre -- Buddhistic game, played with men and dice, on such a board D i.6; Vin ii.10 = iii.180 (˚e kīḷanti); DA i.85. -- bala, [Sk. daśabala] endowed with 10 (supernormal) powers, Ep. of the Buddhas, esp. of Kassapa Buddha Vin i.38=J i.84; S ii.27; Vism 193, 391; DhA i.14; VvA 148, 206, etc. -- vidha tenfold DhA i.398. -- sata ten times a hundred Vin i.38 (˚parivāro); Sn 179 (yakkhā); DhsA 198 (˚nayano). -- sahassa ten times a thousand (freq.); ˚ī in dasa -- sahassi -- lokadhātu Vin i.12 (see lokadhātu). -- 316 -- Dasa
Dasa2
( -- ˚) [Sk. -- dṛśa; cp. dassa] seeing, to be seen, to be perceived or understood D i.18 (aññadatthu˚ sureseeing, all -- perceiving = sabbaŋ passāmī ti attho DA i.111); Sn 653 (paṭiccasamuppāda˚), 733 (sammad˚); J i.506 (yugamatta˚; v. l. dassa). -- duddasa difficult to be seen or understood D i.12 (dhammā gambhīrā d.; see gambhīra); M i.167, 487; Sn 938; Dh 252; also as sududdasa Dh 36. Dasaka
Dasaka
(nt.) 1. a decad, decade, a decennial J iv.397; DhsA 316. khiḍḍā˚ the decad of play Vism 619; cakkhu˚ etc. sense -- decads Vism. 553; Comp. 164, 250; kāya˚, Vism. 588. Dasana
Dasana
[Sk. daśana to ḍasati] a tooth Dāvs v.3 (d.- dhātu, the tooth relic of the Buddha). Dasā
Dasā
(f.) & dasa (nt.) [Sk. daśā] unwoven thread of a web of cloth, fringe, edge or border of a garment D i.7 (dīgha˚ long -- fringed, of vatthāni); J v.187; DhA i.180; iv.106 (dasāni). -- sadasa (nt.) a kind of seat, a rug (lit. with a fringe) Vin iv.171 ( = nisīdana); opp. adasaka (adj.) without a fringe or border Vin ii.301=307 (nisīdana). -- anta edge of the border of a garment J i.467; DhA i.180 sq., 391. Dasika
Dasika1
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [Sk. dṛśika, cp. dassin] to be seen, to behold, being of appearance, only in dud˚ or frightful app., fierce, ugly Si .94 & id. p. (q. v. under okoṭimaka); J i.504 (kodha, anger); PvA 24, 90 (of Petas). -- Note. The spelling is sometimes ˚dassika: A ii.85; Pug 51; PvA 90. Dasika
Dasika2
(adj.) [fr. dasā] belonging to a fringe, in dasika -- sutta an unwoven or loose thread Vin iii.241; DhA iv.206 (˚mattam pi not even a thread, i. e. nothing at all, cp. Lat. nihīlum = ne -- fīlum not a thread=nothing). See also dasaka under dasā. Dassa
Dassa
( -- ˚) [Sk. -- darśa; cp. dasa2] to see or to be seen, per- ceiving, perceived Sn 1134 (appa˚ of small sight, not seeing far, knowing little = paritta -- dassa thoka -- dassa Nd2 69). Cp. akkha˚ a judge Miln 114. -- su˚ easily perceived (opp. duddasa) Dh 252. *Dassati
*Dassati1
[Sk. *darś in dadarśa pref. to dṛś; caus. darśa- yati. Cp. Gr. de/ rkomai to see; Oir. derc eye; Ags. torht; Goth. ga -- tarhjan to make conspicuous. The regular Pāli Pres. is dakkhiti (younger dakkhati), a new formation from the aor. addakkhi = Sk. adrākṣīt. The Sk. Fut. draksyati would correspond formally to dakkhati, but the older dakkhiti points toward derivation from addakkhi. This new Pres. takes the function of the Fut.; whereas the Caus. dasseti implies a hypothetical Pres. *dassati. On dakkhati, etc. see also Kuhn, Beitr. p. 116; Trenckner, Notes pp. 57, 61; Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 554] to see, to perceive.

1. (pres.) base dakkh [Sk. drakṣ]: pres. (a) dakkhati Nd2 428 ( = passati), 1st dakkhāmi ibid. (=passāmi), 2nd dakkhasi S i.116; Pv ii.113 (v. l. BB adakkhi); imper. dakkha Nd2 428 (=passa). -- (b) dakkhiti Sn 909 (v. l. BB dakkhati), 3rd pl. dakkhinti Vin i.16≈Sn p. 15 (v. l. BB dakkhanti); D i.46. -- aor. addakkhi (Sk. adrakṣīt) Vin ii.195; S i.117; Sn 208 (=addasa SnA 257), 841, 1131; It 47; J iii.189; & dakkhi It 47; 1st sg. addakkhiŋ Sn 938. Spelling also adakkhi (v. l. BB at Pv ii.113) & adakkhiŋ (Nd2 423). -- inf. dakkhituŋ Vin i.179. -- Caus. p.p. dakkhāpita (shown, exhibited) Miln 119. -- Der. dakkhin (q. v.).

2. (pret.) base dass (Sk. darś & draś): aor. (a) addasa (Sk. adarśat) Sn 358, 679, 1016; J i.222; iv.2; Pv ii.323 (mā addasa = addakkhiŋ PvA 88); DhA i.26; PvA 73, & (older, cp. agamā) addasā Vin ii.192, 195; D i.112; ii.16; Sn 409 (v. l. BB addasa), 910 (id.); Miln 24, 1st sg. addasaŋ S i.101; Nd2 423 & addasaŋ Sn 837 (=adakkhiŋ Nd1 185), 1st pl. addasāma Sn 31, 178, 459, 3rd pl. (mā) addasuŋ Pv ii.76 (=mā passiŋsu PvA 102). -> (b) addasāsi, 1st sg. addasāsiŋ Sn 937, 1145; Vv 3552 (v. l. addasāmi), 3rd pl. addasāsuŋ Vin ii.195; D ii.16; M i.153. -- (c) shortened forms of aor. are: adda Th 1, 986; addā J vi.125, 126. -- inf. daṭṭhuŋ Sn 685 (daṭṭhukāma); J i.290; Pv iv.13 (=passituŋ PvA 219); PvA 48, 79; VvA 75. -- ger. daṭṭhu (=Sk. dṛṣṭvā) Sn 424 (in phrase nekkhammaŋ daṭṭhu khemato)=1098; 681. Expl. at Nd2 292 with expl. of disvā=passitvā, etc. -> grd. daṭṭhabba (to be regarded as) D ii.154; PvA 8, 9, 10, etc., Vism 464; & dassanīya (see sep.). Also in Caus. (see below) & in daṭṭhar (q. v.).

3. (med. -- pass.) base diss (Sk. dṛś): pres. pass. dissati (to be seen, to appear) Vin i.16; Sn 194, 441, 688 (dissare), 956; J i.138; Dh 304; Pv i.84; PvA 61 (dissasi you look, intrs.); ppr. dissamāna (visible) PvA 71, 6 (˚rūpa), 162 (id.); VvA 78 (˚kāya); Mhvs. vii.35, & der. dissamānatta (nt.) (visibility) PvA 103. -- ger. disvā Sn 48, 409, 687 sq. It 76; PvA 67, 68, etc., & disvāna Vin i.15; ii.195; Sn 299, 415, 1017; Pv ii.87, etc., also a ger. form diṭṭhā, q. v. under adiṭṭhā. -- pp. diṭṭha (q. v.).

4. Caus. (of base 2) dasseti (Sk. darśayati), aor. dassesi & (exceptional) dassayi, only in dassayi tumaŋ showed himself at Pv iii.24 ( = attānaŋ uddisayi PvA 181) & iii.216 (=attānaŋ dassayi dassesi pākaṭo ahosi PvA 185). 3rd pl. dassesuŋ; ger. dassetvā; inf. dassetuŋ to point out, exhibit, explain, intimate Dh 83; J i.84, 200, 263, 266; ii.128, 159; iii.53, 82; PvA 4, 8, 16 (ovādaŋ d. give advice), 24, 45, 73 etc. -- to point to (acc.) PvA 151 (sunakhaŋ), 257 (dārakaŋ). -- to make manifest, to make appear, to show or prove oneself; also intr. to appear J ii.154 (dubbalo viya hutvā attānaŋ dassesi: appeared weak); vi.116; Pv iii.23 (=sammukhībhāvaŋ gacchanti PvA 181); PvA 13 (mitto viya attānaŋ dassetvā: acting like a friend), Miln 271. Esp. in phrase attānaŋ dasseti to come into appearance (of Petas): PvA 32, 47, 68, 79, etc. (cp. above dassayi). -- pp. dassita. -- 317 -- Dassati
Dassati2
fut. of dadāti, q. v. Dassana
Dassana
(nt.) [Sk. darśana, see dassati1] -- 1. Lit. seeing, looking; noticing; sight of, appearance, look. Often equivalent to an infinitive "to see," esp. as dat. dassanāya in order to see, for the purpose of seeing (cp. dassana -- kāma = daṭṭhu -- kāma): [Bhagavantaŋ] dassanāya M ii.23, 46; A i.121; iii.381; Sn 325. -- (a) (nt.) "sight" D ii.157 (visūka˚, looking on at spectacles); A iii.202 (+savana hearing); iv.25 sq. (bhikkhu˚); Sn 207 (muni˚, may be taken as 2, cp. SnA 256), 266 (=pekkhaṇa KhA 148); Dh 206 (ariyānaŋ d., cp. ariyānaŋ dassāvin), 210 (appiyānaŋ), 274; Vv 342; VvA 138 (sippa˚ exhibition of art, competition). -> (b) adj. as ( -- ˚) "of appearance" (cp. ˚dasa) Sn 548 (cāru˚ lovely to behold); PvA 24 (bhayānaka˚ fearful to look at), 68 (bībhaccha˚). -- 2. Appld. (power of) perception, faculty of apperception, insight, view, theory; esp. (a) in combn ñāṇa -- dassana either "knowing & seeing," or perhaps "the insight arising from knowledge," perfect knowledge, realization of the truth, wisdom (cp. ñāṇa): S i.52; ii.30; v.28, 422; M i.195 sq., 241, 482 (Gotamo sabbaññū sabba -- dassāvī aparisesaŋ ñ -- d ˚ŋ paṭijānāti; id. ii.31); D iii.134; A i.220; ii.220; iv.302 sq.; cp. ñ -- d -- paṭilābha A i.43; ii.44 sq.; iii 323; ñ -- d -- visuddhi M i.147 sq. Also with further determination as adhideva -- ñ -- d˚ A iv.428; alam -- ariya˚ S iii.48; iv.300; v.126 sq.; M i.68, 71, 81, 207, 246, 440 sq., A i.9; iii.64, 430; v.88; parisuddha A iii.125; maggâmagga˚ A v.47; yathābhūta˚ A iii.19, 200; iv.99, 336; v.2 sq., 311 sq.; vimutti˚ S i.139; v.67; A iii.12, 81, 134; iv.99, 336; v.130; It 107, 108; Miln 338. See also vimutti. -- (b) in other contexts: ariyasaccāna -- dassana Sn 267; ujubhūta˚ S v.384, 404; dhamma˚ (the right doctrine) S v.204, 344, 404; A iii.263; pāpa˚ (a sinful view) Pv iv.355; viparīta˚ A iii.114; iv.226; v.284 sq. (and a˚), 293 sq. sammā˚ (right view) S iii.189; A iii.138; iv.290; v.199; sabbalokena d. S iv.127; sahetu d. S v.126 sq.; suvisuddha d. S iv.191. -- S iii.28, 49; M ii.46; iii.157; Sn 989 (wisdom: Jinānaŋ eta d. corresponding with ñāṇa in preceding line); Dhs 584, 1002 (insight: cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 256). -- (adj.) perceiving or having a view (cp. dasseti) S i.181 (visuddha˚); Th 1, 422. -- (c) as nt. from the Caus. dasseti: pointing out, showing; implication, definition, statement (in Com. style) PvA 72; often as ˚ākāra -- dassana: PvA 26 (dātabba˚), 27 (thomana˚), 35 (kata˚) & in dassanatthaŋ in order to point out, meaning by this, etc. PvA 9, 68. -- 3. adassana not seeing S i.168=Sn 459; invisibility J iv.496 (˚ŋ vajjati to become invisible); wrong theory or view A v.145 sq.; Sn 206; Pug 21.

-- anuttariya (nt.) the pre -- eminence or importance of (right or perfect) insight; as one of the 3 anuttariyāni, viz. d˚, paṭipadā˚, vimutta˚ at D iii.219, 250, 281; A iii.284, 325; -- kāma (adj.) desirous of seeing A i.150; iv.115; Miln 23; -- bhūmi the level or plane of insight Nett 8, 14, 50; -- sampanna endowed with right insight S ii.43 sq., 58. Dassanīya
Dassanīya
(adj.) [Sk. darśanīya; grd. formation of das- sana, also as dassaneyya] fair to behold, beautiful, good -- looking ( = dassituŋ yutta DA i.141), often in formula abhirūpa d. pāsādika paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgəta to express matchless physical beauty: D i.114; S ii.279; PvA 46 etc. Also with abhirūpa & pāsādika alone of anything fair & beautiful: D i.47. -- Vin iv.18; S i.95; J iii.394; Pug 52, 66; DA i.281; PvA 44 (=subha), 51 (= rucira). -- Comparative dassanīyatara S i.237; Sdhp 325: DhA i.119. Dassaneyya
Dassaneyya
(adj.) = dassanīya J v.203 (bhusa˚). Dassāvitā
Dassāvitā
(f.) [abstr. to dassāvin] seeing, sight ( -- ˚) Miln 140 (guṇavisesa˚). Dassāvin
Dassāvin
(adj. -- n.) [Sk. *darśavant] full of insight, seeing, perceiving, taking notice of. In combn with ˚ñū (knowing) it plays the part of an additional emphasis to the 1st term = knowing & seeing i. e. having complete or highest knowledge of, gifted with "clear" sight or intuition (see jānāti passati & cp. ñāṇa -- dassana). -> (a) As adj. -- ˚: seeing, being aware of, realizing; anicca˚ S iii.1; ādīnava˚ S ii.194; iv.332; M i.173; A v.181 sq.; pariyanta˚ A v.50 sq.; bhaya˚ S v.187: It 96; esp. in phrase anumattesu vajjesu bhaya˚ D i.63=It 118 (cp bhaya -- dassin); lokavajjabhaya˚ S i.138; sabba˚ (+sabbaññū) M i.482 (samaṇo Gotamo s˚ s˚); ii.31; Miln 74 (Buddho s˚ s˚); cp. M Vastu iii.51 sarvadarśāvin; sāra˚. Vin ii.139. -- (b) (n.) one who sees or takes notice of, in phrase ariyānaŋ dassāvī (+sappurisānaŋ dassāvī & kovido) M i.8; S iii.4; opp. adassāvī one who disregards the Noble Ones S iii.3, 113; M iii.17; Dhs 1003 (cp. DhsA 350). Dassika
Dassika
( -- ˚): see dasika1. Dassita
Dassita1
[Sk. darśita, pp. of dasseti1] shown, exhibited, performed Vin iv.365; J i.330. Cp. san˚. Dassita
Dassita2
at J vi.579 accord. to Kern (Toev. p. 114) = Sk. daŋśita mailed, armed. Dassin
Dassin
( -- ˚) (adj.) [Sk. ˚darśin] seeing, finding, realizing, per- ceiving. Only in cpds., like attha˚ Sn 385; ananta˚ S i.143; ādīnava˚ Sdhp 409; ekanga˚ Ud 69; jātikkhaya˚ Sn 209; It 40; ñāṇa˚ Sn 478 ( = sacchikatasabbaññuta -- ñāṇa SnA 411; cp. dassāvin); tīra˚ S iii.164 sq.; A iii.368, cp. tīra -- dakkhin; dīgha˚ (=sabbadassāvin) PvA 196; bhaya˚ Dh 31 (˚dassivā=dassī vā?), 317; It 40; DA i.181 (=bhaya dassāvin); viveka˚ Sn 474, 851. Dassimant
Dassimant
see attha˚. Dassu
Dassu
[Sk. dasyu, cp. dāsa] enemy, foe; robber, in dassu- khīla robber -- plague D i.135, 136 ( = corakhīla DA i.296). Dassetar
Dassetar
[Sk. darśayitṛ, n. agent to dasseti] one who shows or points out, a guide, instructor, teacher A i.62, 132 = It 110. Dasseti
Dasseti
Caus. of dassati1 (q. v.). Dasso
Dasso
n. pl. of dāsī. Daha
Daha
[Sk. draha, through metathesis fr. hrada, hlād, see hilādate] a lake D i.45 (udaka˚); J i.50; ii.104; v.412; Miln 259; PvA 152; Dpvs i.44. Dahati
Dahati1
(dahate) [Sk. dadhāti to put down, set up; *dhe = Gr. ti/qhmi, Lat. facio, Ohg. tuon, Ags. dōn= E. to do. See also dhātu] to put, place; take for (acc. or abl.), assume, claim, consider D i.92 (okkākaŋ pitāmahaŋ=ṭhapeti DA i.258); S iii.113 (mittato daheyya); A iv.239 (cittaŋ d. fix the mind on); Sn 825 (bālaŋ dahanti mithu aññamaññaŋ=passanti dakkhanti, etc. Nd1 163). Pass dhīyati (q. v.); grd. dheyya (q. v.). -> Note. dahati is more frequent in combn with prefixes & compositions like ā˚, upa˚, pari˚, sad˚, san˚, samā˚, etc. pp. hita. Dahati
Dahati2
= ḍahati to burn; as dahate Pv ii.98 (=dahati vināseti PvA 116). -- 318 -- Dahana
Dahana
[Sk. dahana, to dahati, orig. "the burner"] fire Vism 338 (˚kicca); ThA 256; Dāvs v.6; Sdhp 20. Dahara
Dahara
(adj.) [Sk. dahara & dahra for dabhra to dabhnoti to be or make short or deficient, to deceive] small, little, delicate, young; a young boy, youth, lad D i.80, 115; S i.131; ii.279 (daharo ce pi paññavā); M i.82; ii.19, 66; A v.300; Sn 216, 420 (yuvā+), 578 (d. ca mahantā ye bālā ye ca paṇḍitā sabbe maccuvasaŋ yanti); J i.88 (daharadahare dārake ca dārikāyo), 291 (˚itthī a young wife); ii.160, 353; iii.393; Dh 382; Pv iv.150 (yuvā); DhA i.397 (sāmaṇera); DA i.197 (bhikkhū), 223 ( = taruṇa), 284 (id.); PvA 148; VvA 76; ThA 239, 251. Opposed to mahallaka J iv.482; to vuḍḍha Vism 100. -> f. daharā Vv 315 (young wife) (+yuvā VvA 129) & daharī J iv.35; v.521; Miln 48 (dārikā). Daharaka
Daharaka
= dahara, young Miln 310. -- f. ˚ikā a young girl Th 2, 464, 483. Dāṭhā
Dāṭhā
(f.) [Sk. daŋṣṭrā to ḍasati (q. v.), cp. also daṭṭha] a large tooth, fang, tusk; as adj. ( -- ˚) having tusks or fangs D ii.18 (susukkha˚); J i.505 (uddhaṭa -- dāṭho viya sappo); iv.245 (nikkhanta˚); DhA i.215; PvA 152 (kaṭhina˚); Sdhp 286.

-- āvudha [Sk. daŋṣṭrāyudha] using a tusk as his weapon J v.172; -- danta a canine tooth KhA 44; -- balin one whose strength lies in his teeth (of a lion) Sn 72. Dāṭhikā
Dāṭhikā
(f.) [Sk. *dāḍhikā = Prk. for daŋṣṭrikā] beard, whiskers Vin ii.134 (na d. ṭhapetabbā, of the bhikkhus); J i.305; v.42 (tamba˚), 217 (mahā˚ having great whiskers); DA i.263 (parūḷha -- massu˚ with beard & whiskers grown long). Dāṭhin
Dāṭhin
(adj.) [cp. Sk. daŋṣṭrin] having tusks J ii.245; iv.348; Th 1, p. 1; Sdhp 286. Dātar
Dātar
[Sk. dāṭr, n. ag. of dadāti to give; cp. Gr. dw/twr & doth/r] a giver, a generous person Pgdp 50. -- adātā one who does not give, a miser Pv ii.82; otherwise as na dātā (hoti) A ii.203; It 65. Dātta
Dātta
(nt.) [Sk. dātra, to dā, Sk. dāti, dyati to cut, divide, deal out; cp. Gr. date/omai, dai/omai & see dāna, dāpeti, dāyati] sickle, scythe Miln 33. Dāna
Dāna
(nt.) [Ved. dāna, dā as in dadāti to give & in dāti, dyāti to deal out, thus: distribution (scil. of gifts); cp. Gr. da/nos (present), Lat. damnum (E. damages); Gr. dw_ron, Lat. donum; also Ags. tīd ( = E. tide, portion, i. e. of time), & tīma (=E. time). See further dadāti, dayati, dātta, dāpeti. Defn at Vism 60: dānaŋ vuccati avakhaṇḍanaŋ] (a) giving, dealing out, gift; almsgiving, liberality, munificence; esp. a charitable gift to a bhikkhu or to the community of bhikkhus, the Sangha (cp. deyyadhamma & yañña). As such it constitutes a meritorious act (puññaŋ) and heads the list of these, as enumerated in order, dānamaya puññaŋ, sīlamaya p., bhāvanāmaya p. viz. acts of merit consisting of munificence, good character & meditation (D iii.218 e. g.; cp. cāga, puñña, sīla). Thus in formula dānâdīni puññāni katvā J i.168; PvA 66, 105; cp. cpds. under ˚maya. -- (b) Special merit & importance is attached to the mahādāna the great gift, i. e. the great offering (of gifts to the Sangha), in character the buddhistic equivalent of the brahmanic mahāyajña the chief sacrifice. On 16 Mahādānas see Wilson Hindu Caste 413; on 4 Beal. Chinese Texts 88. -- A iv.246; J i.50, 74; v.383 (devasikaŋ chasatasahassa -- pariccāgaŋ karonto mahādānaŋ pavattesi "he gave the great largesse, spending daily 600,000 pieces"); PvA 19, 22, 75, 127, etc. -- (c) Constituents, qualities & characteristics of a dāna: 8 objects suitable for gifts form a standard set (also enumd as 10), viz. anna pāna vattha yāna mālā gandha -- vilepana seyyāvasatha padīpeyya (bread, water, clothes, vehicle, garlands, scented ointment, conveniences for lying down & dwelling, lighting facility) A iv.239; cp. Pv ii.49 & see ˚vatthu & deyyadhamma. Eight ways of giving alms at D iii.258= A iv.236, five ways, called sappurisa -- dāna (& asapp˚) at A iii.171 sq.; eight sapp˚ at A iv.243. Five manners of almsgiving metaphorically for sīlas 1 -- 5 at A iv.246= DA i.306. Five characteristics of a beneficial gift at A iii.172, viz. saddhāya dānaŋ deti, sakkaccaŋ d.d., kālena (cp. kāladāna A iii.41), anuggahitacitto, attānañ ca parañ ca anupahacca d.d. -- (d) Various passages showing practice & value of dāna: Vin i.236; D i.53 (+dama & saŋyama; cp. It 15; PvA 276); ii.356 sq. (sakkaccaŋ & a˚); A iv.392 sq. (id.); D iii.147 sq., 190 sq., 232; S i.98 (dānaŋ dātabbaŋ yattha cittaŋ pasīdati); A i.91=It 98 (āmisa˚ and dhamma˚, material & spiritual gifts); A i.161; iii.41 (dāne ānisaŋsā); iv.60; 237 sq. (mahapphala), 392 sq. (˚ssa vipāka); v.269 (petānaŋ upakappati); J i.8 (aggaḷa˚); ii.112 (dinna˚), iii.52 (id.); Sn 263, 713 (appaŋ dānaŋ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaŋ) PvA 54 (āgantuka˚ gift for the newcomer); Sdhp 211 -- 213. -- adāna withholding a gift, neglect of liberality, stinginess Pv ii.945; Miln 279; PvA 25; cp. ˚sīla under cpds.: atidāna excessive almsgiving Pv ii.945 (cp. PvA 129); Miln 277.

-- agga [Sk. dānāgara, cp. bhattagga, salākagga; see Trenckner, Notes p. 56] a house where alms or donations are given, a store -- house of gifts, fig. a source or giver of gifts, a horn of plenty J vi.487; DhA i.152, 189; Miln 2; PvA 121, 124, 127, 141. A possible connection w. agga = āgra is suggested by combn dānāni mahādānāni aggaññāni A iv.246; -- âdhikāra supervision or charge of alms -- distributing. PvA 124 (cp. Pv ii.927); -- ānisaŋsa praise of generosity PvA 9; cp. A iii.41; -- upakaraṇa means or materials for a gift PvA 105; -- upapatti (read uppatti at D iii.258) an object suitable for gifts, of which 8 or 10 are mentioned (see above c) A iv.239=D iii.258; -- kathā talk or conversation about (the merit & demerit of) almsgiving, one of the anupubbi -- kathā Vin i.15, 18; -- dhamma the duty or meritorious act of bestowing gifts of mercy (cp. deyyadhamma) PvA 9; -- pati "lord of alms," master in liberality, a liberal donor (def. by Bdhgh as: yaŋ dānaŋ deti tassa pati hutvā deti na dāso na sahāyo DA i.298) D i.137 (+saddho & dāyako, as one of the qualifications of a good king); A iii.39; iv.79 sq. (+saddho); Sn 487; Pv i.114 (+amaccharin); J i.199; Miln 279 sq.; Sdhp 275, 303; -- puñña the religious merit of almsgiving or liberality (see above a) PvA 73; -- phala the fruit of munificence (as accruing to the donor) A iii.39; iv.79; Pv ii.83 (˚ŋ hoti paramhi loke: is rewarded in the life to come, cp. It 19); PvA 8 (cp. Pv i.1); -- maya consisting in giving alms or being liberal (see above a) D iii.218 (puññakiriya -- vatthu); Vbh 135 (kusala -- cetanā), 325 (pañña); PvA 8 (puñña), 60 (id.), 9 (kusala -- kamma), 51, etc.; -- vaṭṭa alms J vi.333; -- vatthu that which constitutes a meritorious gift; almsgiving, beneficence, offering, donation D iii.258= A iv.236; PvA 20 (=annapānādika dasavidha dātabbavatthu PvA 7); -- veyyāvaṭika services rendered at the distribution of gifts DhA iii.19; -- saŋvibhāga liberal spending of alms D iii.145, 169; A i.150, 226; iii.53, 313; v.331; It 19; Vism 306; freq. with ˚rata fond of giving alms S v.351, 392; A iv.6 (vigatamalamaccherena cetasā), 266 (id.); -- salā a hall, built for the distribution of alms & donations to the bhikkhus & wanderers J i.231, 262; iv.402 (six); v.383 (id.); -- sīla liberal disposition PvA 89; usually as adāna -- sīla (adj.) of miserly character, neglecting the duty of giving alms Sn 244; Pv ii.83 (˚ā na saddahaṇti dānaphalaŋ hoti paramhi loke); PvA 45 (=adāyaka), 59 (+maccharin), 68 (id.). Dānava
Dānava
[Sk. dānava] a kind of Asuras or Titans, the offspring of Danu J iii.527; v.89; Miln 153; Dpvs xvii.98. -- 319 -- Dāni
Dāni
(adv.) [shortened form for idāni, q. v.] now, Vin i.180; ii.154; S i.200, 202; ii.123; iv.202; J ii.246; Miln 11, etc. Dāpana
Dāpana:
see vo˚. Dāpita
Dāpita
[Sk. dāpayita pp. of dāpeti1] given, sent PvA 6; Mhvs vii.26. Dāpeti
Dāpeti1
[Sk. dāpayati, dap fr. dā (see dadāti & dayati) = deal out, spend, etc., cp. Gr. da/ptw, dapa/nh (expenditure), dei_pnon (meal); Lat. daps (id.), damnum (expense fr. *dapnom). See also dātta & dāna] to induce somebody to give, to order to be given, to deal out, send, grant, dedicate J vi.485; PvA 46; aor. dāpesi J iv.138; DhA i.226, 393 (sent); PvA 5 (id.), 31; fut. dāpessati J ii.3; DhA 371. Cp. ava˚. Dāpeti
Dāpeti2
[Sk. drāvayati & drapayati, Caus. to dru, see davati] to cause to run J ii.404. Dāma
Dāma
(nt.) [Sk. dāman to dyati to bind (Gr. di/dhmi), *dē, as in Gr. de/sma (rope), dia/dhma (diadem), u(po/dhma (sandal)] a bond, fetter, rope; chain, wreath, garland S iv.163 (read dāmena for damena), 282, (id.); A iii.393 (dāmena baddho); Sn 28 ( = vacchakānaŋ bandhanatthāya katā ganthitā nandhipasayuttā rajjubandhanavisesā); Vism 108. Usually -- ˚, viz. anoja -- puppha˚ J i.9; vi.227; olambaka˚ VvA 32; kusuma˚ J iii.394; gandha˚ J i.178; VvA 173, 198; puppha˚ J i.397; VvA 198; mālā˚ J ii.104; rajata˚ J i.50; iii.184; iv.91; rattapuppha˚ J iii.30; sumana˚ J iv.455. Dāya
Dāya1
[Sk. dāva, conflagration of a forest; wood = easily inflammable substance; to dunoti (to burn) caus. dāvayati, cp. Gr. dai/w (to burn) & P. dava1] wood; jungle, forest; a grove Vin i.10 (miga˚), 15, 350; ii.138; S ii.152 (tiṇa˚); iv.189 (bahukaṇṭaka d.=jungle); A v.337 (tiṇa˚); J iii.274; vi.278. See also dāva.

-- pāla a grove keeper Vin i.350; M i.205. Dāya
Dāya2
[Sk. dāya, to dadāti, etc.] a gift, donation; share, fee D i.87≈(in phrase rājadāya brahmadeyya, a king's grant, cp. rājadattiya); J iv.138; v.363; vi.346. Cp. dāyāda & brahmadeyya. Dāyaka
Dāyaka
[Sk. dāyaka, dā as in dadāti & dāna] (adj.) giving, bestowing, distributing, providing (usually -- ˚); (n.) a donor, benefactor; a munificent person M i.236 sq.; A i.26, 161; ii.64, 80; iii.32, 336; iv.81; Sn p. 87; It 19 (ito cutā manussattā saggaŋ gacchanti dāyakā); J v.129 (kaṇḍa˚); Pv i.11 sq.; 12; 42; 55; DA i.298; PvA 113 ( = dada); Miln 258 (˚ānaŋ dakkhiṇā); Sdhp 276. -- f. dāyikā Vin ii.216 (bhikkhā˚), 289 (khīrassa). -- adāyaka a stingy person, one who neglects almsgiving (cp. adānasīla) Pv i.119; f. ˚ikā Pv i.93. Dāyajja
Dāyajja
(nt.) [Sk. dāyādya; see dāyāda] inheritance Vin i.82; D iii.189; A iii.43; J i.91; Vism 43 sq.; dowry J iii.8. -- (adj.) one who inherits Vin iii.66 (pituno of the father).

-- upasampadā, lit. the Upasampadā by way of inh., a particular form of ordination conferred on Sumana & Sopāka, both novices seven yrs. old DhA iv.137. Dāyati
Dāyati
[Sk. dāti & dyāti (dā) to cut, divide, etc.; cp. dayati, dātta, dāna] to cut, mow, reap, caus. dāyāpeti to cause to be cut or mowed DhA iii.285. Dāyana
Dāyana
(nt.) [see dayati] cutting; ˚agga the first of what has been cut (on fields) DhA i.98; ˚atthaŋ for the purpose of mowing DhA iii.285. Dāyāda
Dāyāda
[Sk. dāyāda = dāya+ā -- da receiving the (son's) portion, same formation on ground of sam̊e idea as Lat. heres=*ghero+ē -- do receiver of what is left: see Brugmann, Album Kern p. 29 sq.] heir M i.86=Nd2 199; S i.69, 90; iv.72; A iii.72 sq.; J iii.181; vi.151; Kh viii.5. Often fig. with kamma˚ one who inherits his own deeds (see kamma 3 A b & cpds.): M i.390 sq.; A v.289; & as dhamma˚ (spiritual heir) opposed to āmisa˚ (material h.): M i.12; It 101; also as dhamma˚ D iii.84; as brahma˚ M ii.84; D iii.83. -- adāyāda not having an heir S i.69; J v.267. See dāyajja & dāyādaka. Dāyādaka
Dāyādaka
[ = dāyāda] heir M ii.73; Th 1, 781, 1142; f. ˚ikā Th 2, 327 (= dāyajjarahā ThA 234). Dāyika
Dāyika
(adj.) = dāyaka PvA 157; Sdhp 211, 229. Dāyin
--
Dāyin (adj.) [Sk. dāyin, of dadāti] giving, granting, bestowing PvA 121 (icchit' icchita˚), 157 ( = [kāma] dada); Sdhp 214 (dānagga˚). Dāra & Dārā
Dāra
& Dārā (f.) [Sk. dāra (m.) & dārā (f.), more freq. dārā (m.pl.); instr. sg. dārena J iv.7; Pv iv.177, etc.; instr, pl. dārehi Sn 108 (sehi d. asantuṭṭho not satisfied with his own wife), loc. pl. dāresu Sn 38 (puttesu dāresu apekkhā), orig. "wives, womenfolk," female members of the household = Gr. dou_los (slave; Hesychius: dou=los=h( oi)ki/a; cp. also origin of Germ. frauenzimmer & E. womanhood). Remnants of pl. use are seen in above passage. fr. Sn.] a young woman, esp. married woman, wife. As dārā f. at Nd2 295 (d. vuccati bhariyā) & It 36; f. also dārī maiden, young girl Pv i.115. Otherwise as dāra (coll -- masc.): Dh 345; J i.120; ii.248; iv.7; v.104, 288; VvA 299 (˚paṭiggaha). -- putta -- dārā (pl.) wife & children Sn 108, 262; J i.262; cp. saputtadāra with w. & ch. Pv iv.347; putta ca dārā ca Sn 38, 123. Freq. in definition of sīla No. 3 (kāmesu micchācārin or abrahmacariyā, adultery) as sakena dārena santuṭṭha A iii.348; v.138; Sn 108 (a˚); Pv 177, etc. -- paradāra the wife of another M i.404 sq.; Dh 246, 309; Sn 396 (parassa d.) PvA 261. Dāraka
Dāraka
[Sk. dāraka, cp. dāra & Gr. dou = los (slave)] a (young) boy, child, youngster; a young man. f. dārikā girl (see next) Vin i.83; J i.88 (dārake ca dārikāyo boys & girls); ii.127; vi.336; Pv i.127 (=bāla˚ PvA 65); DhA i.99 (yasa˚=yasa -- kulaputta); Miln 8, 9; PvA 176. -- Freq. as gāmadārakā (pl.) the village -- boys, streeturchins J ii.78, 176; iii.275.

-- tikicchā the art of infant -- healing D i.12 ( = komārabhacca -- vejjakamma DA i.98). Dārikā
Dārikā
(f.) [Sk. dārikā, see dāraka] a young girl, daughter J iii.172; vi.364; Miln 48, 151; PvA 16 (daughter), 55, 67, 68. Dāru
Dāru
(nt.) [Sk. dāru, *dereṷo (oak) tree; cp. Av. dāuru (wood) Gr. do/ru (spear), drus (oak); Lat. larix (fr. *dārix) = larch; Oir. daur (oak); Goth. triu, Ags. treo= tree. Also Sk. dāruṇa, Lat. dūrus (hard) etc., Oir. dru strong. See also dabba2, dabbī & duma] wood, piece of wood; pl. woodwork, sticks A i.112; It 71; Dh 80; J ii.102; iii.54; vi.366; DhA i.393; PvA 76 (candana˚), 141.

-- kuṭikā a hut, log -- house Vin iii.43; -- kkhandha pile of wood PvA 62; -- gaha a wood yard Vin iii.42 sq.; -- ghaṭika wooden pitcher ThA 286. -- cīriya "woodbarked" Np, DhA ii.35. -- ja made of wood S i.77; Dh 345; -- dāha the burning of wood S i.169; -- dhītalikā a wooden doll Vin iii.36, 126; -- patta a wooden bowl Vin ii.112, 143; pattika one who uses a wooden bowl for collecting alms D i.157; iii.22; DA i.319; pādukā a wooden shoe, a clog Vin ii.143; -- bhaṇḍa wooden articles Vin ii.143 (specified), 170, 211; -- maṇḍalika a wooden disk DhA iii.180; -- maya wooden VvA 8, DhA i.192; -- yanta a wooden machine Vism 595; -- sanghāta ( -- yāna) "a vehicle constructed of wood," i. e. a boat J v.194; -- samādahāna putting pieces of wood together S i.169. Dāruka
Dāruka
(cp. dāru] a log S i.202 = Th 1, 62=DhA iii.460; adj. made of wood Th 2. 390 (˚cillaka, a wooden post, see ThA 257). -- 320 -- Dāruṇa
Dāruṇa
(adj.) [Ved. dāruṇa, to dāru ("strong as a tree"), cp. Gr. droo/n = i) sxuro/n Hesych; Lat. dūrus; Oir. dron (firm), Mir. dūr (hard) Ags. trum] strong, firm, severe; harsh, cruel, pitiless S i.101; ii.226; Sn 244; Dh 139; J iii.34; Pv iv.36 (=ghora PvA 251); Miln 117 (vāta); PvA 24, 52 (=ghora), 159 (sapatha a terrible oath= ghora), 181 (=kurūrin), 221 (˚kāraṇa); Sdhp 5, 78, 286. Dālana
Dālana
[f. dalati] see vi˚. Dālikā & Dālima
Dālikā
& Dālima [Sk. dālika the colocynth & dāḍima the pomegranate tree] in ˚laṭṭhi a kind of creeper; equivalent to takkāri (?) Th 2, 297 (dālikā) = ThA 226 (dālikā & dālima). Dāḷiddiya
Dāḷiddiya
(& daḷiddiya) (nt.) [Sk. *dāridrya] poverty D iii.65, 66; A iii.351 sq.; J i.228; Dāvs ii.60; Sdhp 78. Dāleti
Dāleti
see dalati. Dāva
Dāva
[Sk. dāva, see dava1 & daya1] in ˚aggi a jungle -- fire J i.213; iii.140; Vism 470; DhA i.281. Dāvika
Dāvika
(adj.) in piṇḍa˚, a cert. rank in the army (v. l. piṇḍa -- dāyika) D i.51 = Miln 331 (DA i.156: sāhasikamahāyodhā, etc., with popular expl. of the terms piṇḍa & davayati). Dāsa
Dāsa
[Ved. dāsa; orig. adj. meaning "non -- Aryan," i. e. slave (cp. Gr. ba/ rbaros, Ger. sklave = slave); Av. dāha= a Scythian tribe. Also connected w. dasyu (see dassukhīla)] a slave, often combd w. f. dāsī. Def. by Bdhgh as "antojāto" (DA i.300), or as "antojātadhanakkīta -- karamarânīta -- sāmaŋ dāsabyaŋ upagatānaŋ aññataro" (ibid. 168). -- In phrase dāsā ca kammakarā "slaves & labourers" Vin i.243, 272; ii.154; as dāso kammakaro "a slave -- servant" D i.60 (cp. d.-> kammakara). -- Vin i.72, 76 (dāso na pabbājetabbo: the slave cannot become a bhikkhu); D i.72; M ii.68 (fig. taṇhā˚); J i.200, 223; iii.343 (bought for 700 kahāpaṇas), 347; Pug 56; PvA 112.

-- kammakara (porisa) a slave -- servant, an unpaid labourer, a serf Vin i.240; A i.206; D iii.189; DhA iv.1; -- gaṇa a troop of slaves Pv iv.141; -- purisa a servant J i.385; -- porisa a servant, slave Sn 769 (cp. Nd1 11, where 4 kinds of d. are mentioned); -- lakkhaṇa fortunetelling from (the condition of) slaves D i.9. Dāsaka
Dāsaka
= dāsa in ˚putta a slave, of the sons of the slaves, mentioned as one of the sipp' āyatanas at D i.51≈ (expl. by Bdhgh as balavasinehā -- gharadāsa -- yodhā DA i.157). -- sadāsaka with slaves, followed by slaves Vv 324. -- f. dāsikā a female slave (=dāsī) M i.126; J vi.554. Dāsabyatā
Dāsabyatā
(f.) = dāsavya Sdhp 498. Dāsavya & Dāsabya
Dāsavya
& Dāsabya (nt.) [cp. Sk. dāsya] the condition of a slave, slavery, serfdom D i.73; M i.275 (b); J i.226; DA i.168 (b), 213; DhA iii.35; PvA 112, 152. Dāsitta
Dāsitta
(nt.) [Sk. dāsītva] the status of a (female) slave Miln 158. Dāsima
Dāsima
a species of tree J vi.536. Dāsiyā
Dāsiyā
= dāsikā, a female slave J vi.554. Dāsī
Dāsī
(f.) [Sk. dāsī, cp. dāsa. Nom. pl. dasso for dāsiyo J iv.53; in cpds. dāsi˚] a female servant, a handmaiden, a slave -- girl Vin i.217, 269, 291; ii.10 (kula˚), 78 = iii.161; M i.125; ii.62 (ñāti˚); Pv ii.321 (ghara˚); PvA 46, 61, 65. -- Cp. kumbha˚.

-- gaṇa a troop of slave -- girls J ii.127; -- dāsā (pl.) maid- & man -- servants DhA i.187; freq. to cpd. d -- d -- paṭiggahaṇa slave -- trading D i.5≈ (cp. DA i.78); -- puttâle; the son of a slave, an abusive term (gharadāsiyā va putto Dh i.257; cp. Sk. dāsīsuta) D i.93 (˚vāda); -- bhoga the possessions of a slave Vin iii.136. Dāha
Dāha
see ḍāha. Di˚
Di˚
secondary base of numeral "2," contracted fr. dvi: see under dvi B i.4. Dikkhita
Dikkhita
[Sk. dīkṣita "having commenced the prepara- tory rites for sacrifice"] initiated, consecrated, cira˚ initiated long since S i.226 = J v.138, 139 (where dakkhita, q. v.; Com. cira -- pabbājita). Digucchā
Digucchā
(f.) [ = jigucchā; Sk. jugupsā] disgust DhsA 210 (asuci˚). Dighacchā
Dighacchā
(f.) [ = jighacchā] hunger A ii.117. Dighañña
Dighañña
(adj.) [for jighañña = Sk. jaghanya fr. janghā] inferior, low, last, hindmost (i. e. westward) J v.24 (where the Com. seems to imply a reading jighacchaŋ with meaning of 1st sg. pot. intens. of ghas, but d. is evidently the right reading), 402, 403 (˚rattiŋ at the end of the night). Dicchati
Dicchati
[Sk. ditsati, Desid. fr. dadāti, base 4, q. v.] to wish to give, to be desirous of giving S i.18, 20 (dicchare 3rd pl.); J iv.64. Dija
Dija
see under dvi B i.4. Diṭṭha
Diṭṭha1
[Sk. dṛṣṭa, pp. of *dassati] 1. seen; a˚ not seen D i.222 (a˚+avedita asacchikata); M i.3 sq. (diṭṭhaŋ diṭṭhato sañjānāti); Sn 147 (diṭṭhā vā ye vā addiṭṭhā), 995 (na me diṭṭho ito pubbe na ssuto . . . Satthā); J ii.154; iii.278; Pv i.23 (sāmaŋ d. = seen by yourself); 33 (id.). -- nt. diṭṭhaŋ a vision J iii.416. -- Since sight is the principal sense of perception as well as of apperception (cp. cakkhu), that which is seen is the chief representation of any sense -- impression, & diṭṭha combd with suta (heard) and muta (sensed by means of smell, taste & touch), to which viññāta (apperceived by the mind) is often joined, gives a complete analysis of that which comprises all means of cognition & recognition. Thus diṭṭha+suta stands collectively for the whole series Sn 778, 812, 897, 1079; Pv iv.13; diṭṭha suta muta (see Nd2 298 for detail & cp. diṭṭhiyā sutiyā ñāṇena) Sn 790, 901, 914, 1082, 1086, 1122 (na tuyhaŋ adiṭṭhaŋ asutaŋ amutaŋ kiñcanaŋ atthi=you are omniscient); d. suta muta viññāta in the same sense as Sn 1122 in "yaŋ sadevakassa lokassa d. s. m. v. sabbaŋ taŋ Tathāgatena abhisambuddhaŋ" of the cognitive powers of the Tathāgata D iii.134=Nd2 276= It 121; D iii.232; Sn 1086, 1122. -- 2. known, understood M i.486; Sn 761; diṭṭha pañha a problem or question solved J vi.532. See also conclusion of No. 1. -- 3. (adj.) visible, determined by sight, in conn. with dhamma meaning the visible order of things, the world of sensation, this world (opp. samparāyika dhamma the state after death, the beyond). Usually in cpds. ( -- ˚): of this world, in this world. -- diṭṭhadhamma Vin ii.188; D iii.222 sq.; A i.249; ii.61; Nd2 297 (=ñātadhamma); DA i.278; Sdhp 470. -- ˚abhinibbuta attained to Nibbāna in this birth A i.142; Sn 1087 (see Nibbāna); ˚nibbāna earthly N. D i.36; DA i.121; ˚sukhavihāra (& ˚in) happy condition (or faring well) in this world Vin ii.188; M i.40, 331, 459; S ii.239; Dhs 577, 1283; DhsA 296; ˚vedanīya to be perceived in this condition A i.249, 251; PvA 145. -- Freq. in loc. diṭṭhe dhamme (in this world) It 17 (attha, opp. samparāyika attha), or diṭṭhe va dhamme (already or even in the present existence) D i.156, 167, 177, 196; iii.108; M i.341 sq., 485; ii.94, 103; A ii.155, 167; iii.429; Sn 141, 343, 1053; It 22, 23, etc. -- In the same sense diṭṭhadhammika (adj.) belonging or referring to this world or the present existence, always contrasted with samparāyika belonging to a future state: Vin i.179; iii.21; D iii.130; A i.47, 98; Nd2 26; It 16; VvA 149; PvA 131, etc.

-- ânugati imitation of what one sees, emulation, competition S ii.203; M i.16; A i.126; iii.108, 251, 422; Pug 33; DhA iv.39; -- āvikamma making visible or clear, open statement, confession Vin v.183, 187 sq.; -- kāla the time of seeing (anybody), opportunity VvA 120; -- ppatta one who has obtained (Nibbāna) in this world Nett 190; -- padā (pl.) visible signs or characteristics A iv.103; -- mangalika (adj.) of puccha, a question concerning visible omina. J iv.390; as ˚ikā (f.) Np at J iv.376 sq. = SnA 185 sq. -- saŋsandana Nd2 447=DhsA 55. -- 321 -- Diṭṭha
Diṭṭha2
[Sk. dviṣṭa, pp. of dveṣṭi dviṣ to hate] (n.) an enemy J i.280; cp. Sk. dviṣat. -- (adj.) poisoned, in diṭṭhagatena sallena with a p. arrow S ii.230; misreading for diddh -- agadena, q. v. The Cy. has diddhagatena with v. l. dibba -- gadena. Diṭṭhaka
Diṭṭhaka
(adj.) [ = diṭṭha1] seen, visible, apparent DhA ii.53, 90. Diṭṭhā
Diṭṭhā
(indecl.) [Sk. dṛṣṭyā, instr. of diṭṭhi] exclamation of joy, hurrah! D iii.73; J i.362. Diṭṭhi
Diṭṭhi
(f.) [Sk. dṛṣṭi; cp. dassana] view, belief, dogma, theory, speculation, esp. false theory, groundless or unfounded opinion. -- (a) The latter is rejected by the Buddha as pāpa˚ (A iv.172) and pāpikā d. (opp. bhaddikā: A v.212 sq.; It 26): Vin i.98, 323; Dh 164; Pv iv.354; whereas the right, the true, the best doctrine is as sammā d. the first condition to be complied with by anyone entering the Path. As such the sammā d. is opposed to micchā d. wrong views or heresy (see b). Equivalent with micchā d. is kudiṭṭhi (late) Dāvs ii.58. -- (b) Characterized more especially as: (a) sammā diṭṭhi right doctrine, right philosophy Vin i.10; S ii.17; v.11, 14, 30 sq., 458 sq., M i.315; ii.12, 29, 87; iii.72; Nd2 485; Vbh 104 sq. See magga. -- ujukā d. S v.143, 165; ujugatā d. M i.46 sq. -- (b) micchā d. wrong theory, false doctrine S i.145; ii.153 (caused by avijjā); M iii.71; Dh 167, 316; Nd2 271iiib; Vbh 361, 389. -- The foll. theories are to be considered as varieties of micchā d., viz. (in limited enumn) akiriyavāda S iii.208; iv.349; aññaŋ aññena S iii.211; antaggāhikā A i.154; ii.240; iii.130; antânantikā D i.22 sq. S iii.214, 258 sq.; assāda˚ A iii.447; ahetukavādā S iii.210; ucchedavādā D i.34; S ii.20; iii.99; 110 sq.; bhava˚ S iii.93; M i.65; A i.83; sakkāya˚ A iii.438; v.144; Sn 231 (cp. KhA 188); Nd2 271iiib (20 fold, as diṭṭhilepa); sassatavādā D i.13; S ii.20; iii.98, 213 sq., 258 sq. -- (c) Various theories & doctrines are mentioned & discussed at: Vin i.115; S i.133; ii.61 sq., 75 sq., 222; iii.215 sq., 258 sq.; iv.286; v.448 ( = D i.31); D iii.13 sq., 45, 246, 267; M i.40; A i.32; ii.252 sq.; iii.132, 289, 349; Th 2, 184; Ps i.135 sq.; Pug 22; Dhs 392, 1003 (cp. Dhs. trsl. pp. 257 sq., 293, 325); Vbh 145, 245, 341, 393 sq.; Sdhp 13, 333. -- (d) Miscellaneous: 4 diṭṭhiyo at Vbh 376; also at Vism 511 (sakkāya˚, uccheda˚, sassata˚, akiriya˚); 5 Vbh 378; 6 at M i.8; Vbh 382; 7 at Vbh 383; 20 see under sakkāya˚; 62 under diṭṭhigata. -- In series diṭṭhi khanti ruci laddhi characterizing "diṭṭhadhamma" at Nd2 299 & passim. Diṭṭhiyā sutiyā ñāṇena in def. of a theory of cognition at Nd2 300 as complementing taṇhā: see taṇhā B 3. Coupled with vācā & citta in formula (taŋ) vācaŋ appahāya cittaŋ appahāya diṭṭhiŋ appaṭinissajjitvā . . . (nikkhitto evaŋ niraye) at S iv.319= D iii.13, 15; combd with (& opposed to) sīla (as pāpaka & bhaddaka) at It 26, 27. -- diṭṭhiŋ āsevati to hold a view M i.323; ˚ŋ bhindati to give up a view J i.273; Dāvs ii.58.

-- ânugati a sign of speculation Vin ii.108; S ii.203; Pug 33. -- ânusaya inclination to speculation D iii.254, 282; S v.60; A iv.9; -- āsava the intoxicant of speculation, the 3rd of four āsavā, viz. kāma˚, bhava˚, d.˚, avijjā˚ Vin iii.5; Nd2 134; Dhs 1099, 1448; Vbh 373; cp. ˚ogha; -- upadānā taking up or adhering to false doctrines, the 2nd of the four upādānāni or attachments, viz. kāma˚, d.˚, sīlabbata˚, attavāda˚ D iii.230; Dhs 1215, 1536; -- ogha the flood of false doctrine, in set of four ogha's as under ˚āsava D iii.230, 276; Nd2 178; -- kantāra the wilderness of groundless speculation Dhs 381, 1003, 1099, etc.; see ˚gata; -- gaṇṭhi the web or tangle of sophisticism VvA 297; cp. ˚sanghāṭa; -- gata (nt.) "resorting to views," theory, groundless opinion, false doctrine, often followed by series of characterizing epithets: d. -- gahana, ˚kantāra, ˚visūka, ˚vipphandita, ˚saññojana, e. g. M i.8; Nd2 271iiib. Of these sophistical speculations 2 are mentioned at It 43, Ps i.129; 6 at Ps i.130; 62 (the usual number, expressing "great and small" sets, cp. dvi A ii.) at D i.12 -- 39 (in detail); S iv.286; Ps i.130; Nd2 271iiib; Nett 96, 112, 160. -> Vin i.49; D i.162, 224, 226; S i.135, 142; ii.230; iii.109, 258 sq. (anekavihitāni); iv.286 (id.); M i.8, 176, 256 sq. (pāpaka), 326 (id.), 426 sq.; A iv.68; v.72 sq., 194 (pāpaka); Sn 649, 834, 913; Pug 15; Dhs 277, 339, 392, 505; Vism 454. -- adj. ˚gatika adhering to (false) doctrine Dpvs vi.25; -- gahana the thicket of speculation Dhs 381, 1003; see ˚gata; -- jāla the net of sophistry D i.46; DA i.129; -- ṭṭhāna a tenet of speculative philosophy D i.16; M i.136; A v.198; Ps i.138 (eight); Miln 332; DA i.107; -- nijjhānakkhanti forbearance with wrong views S ii.115; iv.139; A i.189 sq.; ii.191; Nd2 151; -- nipāta a glance VvA 279; -- nissaya the foundation of speculation M i.137; D ii.137 sq.; -- pakkha the side or party of sophists Nett 53, 88, 160; -- paṭilābha the attainment of speculation M iii.46; -- paṭivedha = prec. D iii.253; -- patta one who has formed (a right or wrong) view D iii.105, 254; M i.439; A i.74; 118, iv.10; v.23; -- parāmasa perversion by false doctrine Dhs 1498; -- maṇḍala the circle of speculative dogmatics DhsA 109; -- vipatti failure in theory, the 3rd of the four vipattiyo viz. sīla˚, ācāra˚, d.˚, ājīva˚; opp. ˚sampadā Vin v.98; D iii.213; A i.95, 268; Pug 21; Dhs 1362; Vbh 361; -- vipallāsa contortion of views A ii.52; -- visaŋyoga disconnection with false doctrine D iii.230, 276; -- visuddhi beauty of right theory A i.95; M i.147 sq.; D iii.214, 288; -- visūka (nt.) the discord or disunion (lit. the going into parties) of theories, the (?) puppet -- show of opinion M i.8, 486; Sn 55 (=dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhigatāni), K S ii.44; Vv 8426; Pv iv.137; Nd2 301 (=vīsati -- vattukā sakkāyadiṭṭhi); cp. Nd2 25 (attānudiṭṭhi); Dhs 381 (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 101), 1003, 1099. See also ˚gata; -- vyasana failing or misfortune in theory (+sīla˚, in character) D iii.235; Nd2 304; -- saŋyojana the fetter or bond of empty speculation (cp. ˚anusaya) D iii.254; A iv.7 sq.; -- sanghāta the weft or tangle of wrong views (cp. ˚gaṇṭhi) Nd1 343; Nd2 503; -- samudaya the origin of wrong views A iv.68; -- sampadā success in theory, blessing of right views, attainment of truth D iii.213; 235 (opp. ˚vipatti), S v.30 sq.; A i.95, 269; iii.438; iv.238; Pug 25; Dhs 1364; VvA 297; -- sampanna endowed with right views S ii.43, 58, 80; v.11; A iii.438 sq.; iv.394; Vbh 366; Dialogues iii.206, n. 10; -- sārin (adj.) following wrong views Sn 911. Diṭṭhika
Diṭṭhika
(adj.) ( -- ˚) seeing, one who regards; one who has a view M iii.24 (āgamana˚ one who views the arrival, i. e. of guests); S ii.168 sq. (sammā˚ & micchā˚ hoḷding right & wrong theories); D iii.96 (vītimissa˚). See añña˚, micchā˚, sammā˚. Diṭṭhitā
Diṭṭhitā
(f.) [fr. diṭṭhi] the fact of having a (straight- forward) view (uju˚) Miln 257. Diṭṭhin
Diṭṭhin
(adj. -- n.) one who has a view, or theory, a follower of such & such a doctrine Ud 67 (evaŋ˚+evaŋ vādin). Diṇṇa
Diṇṇa
[Sk. dīrṇa, pp. of dṛ, dṛṇāti, see darī] broken, split, undone, torn, as neg. adiṇṇa unbroken D i.115 (so read for ādina -- khattiya -- kula; v. l. BB. abhinna˚); S v.74 (so read for ādīna -- mānaso, v. l. BB. adinā & SS ādina˚). Cp. also ādiṇṇa. -- 322 -- Ditta
Ditta1
[Sk. dīpta, dīp; cp. dīpa] blazing. Dāvs v.32. Usually in cpd. āditta. Ditta
Ditta2
[Sk. dṛpta; cp. dappa] proud, arrogant, insolent; wanton Th 1, 198; J ii.432; iii.256 = 485; v.17, 232; vi.90, 114. Diddha
Diddha
[Sk. digdha to dih, see deha] smeared J v.425 sq.; esp. smeared with poison, poisoned J iv.435 (sara, a poisoned arrow); perhaps to be read at It 68 for duṭṭha (scil. sara) and at S ii.230 for diṭṭha. Cp. san˚. Dina
Dina
(nt.) [Sk. dina; Lat. nun -- dinae (*noven -- dinom); Oir. denus; Goth. sin -- teins; cp. divasa] day Sdhp 239. -- duddinaŋ darkness Dāvs v.50 (d. sudinaŋ ahosi, cp. i.49, 51); also as f. duddinī Vin i.3. Dindibha
Dindibha
[cp. Sk. ṭiṭṭibha?] a kind of bird J vi.538. Dindima
Dindima
(nt.) [Sk. ḍiṇḍima, cp. dundubhi] a musical instrument, a small drum J vi.580; Bu i.32. See also deṇḍima. Dinna
Dinna
[Sk. dinna, pp. of dadāti] given, granted, presented etc., in all meanings of dadāti q. v.; esp. of giving alms Pv iv.326 ( = mahādāna PvA 253) & in phrase adinn'ādāna taking what is not given, i. e. stealing, adj. adinnâdāyin stealing, refraining from which constitutes the 2nd sīla (see under sīla). -- dinna: D i.55≈(n' atthi dinnaŋ the heretic view of the uselessness of almsgiving); J i.291; ii.128; Sn 191, 227, 240; Dh 356; PvA 68 (given in marriage). Used as finite tense freq., e. g. J i.151, 152; vi.366. -- adinna: M i.39, 404; Sn 119 (theyyā adinnaŋ ādiyati), 156, 395, 400, 633; PvA 33 etc.

-- ādāyin taking (only) what is given D i.4; DA i.72; -- dāna almsgiving J iii.52; DhA i.396; -- dāyin giving alms, liberal, munificent D iii.191. Dinnaka
Dinnaka
an adopted son, in enumn of four kinds of sons (atraja, khettaja, antevāsika, d.) Nd2 448; J i.135 ( = posāvanatthāya dinna). Dippati
Dippati
[Sk. dīpyate, see under dīpa1 & cp. jotati] to shine, to shine forth, to be illustrious Vin ii.285. Cp. pa˚. Dibba
Dibba
(adj.) [Ved. divya = P. divya in verse (q. v.), Gr. di_os (*divios), Lat. dīus (*divios)=divine. Cp. deva] of the next world, divine, heavenly, celestial, superb, magnificent, fit for exalted beings higher than man (devas, heroes, manes etc.), superhuman, opp. mānusaka human. Freq. qualifying the foll. "summa bona": cakkhu the deva -- eye, i. e. the faculty of clairvoyance, attr. in a marked degree to the Buddha & other perfect beings (see cakkhumant) D i.82, 162; ii.20 (yena sudaŋ samantā yojanaŋ passati divā c' eva rattiñ ca); iii.219; S i.196; ii.55 sq.; M ii.21; It 52; Th 2, 70; Ps i.114; ii.175; Vism 434; Sdhp 482; PvA 5 (of Moggallāna); Tikp 278; Dukp 54. sota the d. ear, matching the d. eye D i.79, 154; J v.456; also as sotadhātu A i.255; M ii.19; D iii.38, 281; Vism 430. rūpa D i.153. Āyu, vaṇṇa etc. (see dasa ṭhānāni) A i.115; iii.33; iv.242; PvA 9, 89. kāmā Sn 361; Dh 187; It 94; also as kāmaguṇā A v.273. Of food, drink, dress & other commodities: A i.182; J i.50, 202; iii.189; PvA 23, 50, 70, 76 etc. -> Def. as devaloke sambhūta DA i.120; divibhavattā dibba KhA 227; divibhāvaŋ devattabhāva -- pariyāpanna PvA 14. -- See further e. g. S i.105; D iii.146; Sn 176, 641; Dh 236, 417; Pug 60; Vism 407 (defn), 423.

-- osadha magical drugs Miln 283; -- kāmā (pl.) heavenly joys (see above) J i.138 (opp. mānusakā); -- cakkhuka endowed with the superhuman eye S ii.156; A i.23, 25; -- paṇṇākāra (dasavidha˚) the (tenfold) heavenly gift (viz. āyu, vaṇṇa etc.: see ṭhāna) DhA iii.292; -- bhāva divine condition or state PvA 110; -- yoga union with the gods S i.60; -- vihāra supreme condition of heart Miln 225; -- sampatti heavenly bliss J iv.3; DhA iii.292; PvA 16, 30. Dibbati
Dibbati
[Sk. dīvyati, pp. dyūta see jūta] to sport, to amuse oneself VvA 18 (in expl. of devī); to play at dice M ii.106 (akkhehi). Dirasaññu
Dirasaññu
(adj.) [Sk. dara -- saŋjña? See Kern, Toev. p. 118] one who has little common -- sense J vi.206, 207, 213, 214. Com. expls wrongly on p. 209 with "one who possesses two tongues" (of Agni), but has equivalent nippañña on p. 217 (text 214: appapañña+). Diva
Diva
[Sk. diva (nt.), weak base diṷ (div) of strong form di̯ē (see deva) to *dei̯eṷo to shine; cp. Sk. dyo heaven, divā adv. by day; Lat. biduum (bi -- divom) two days] (a) heaven J iv.134 (˚ŋ agā); v.123 (˚ŋ patta); PvA 74 (˚ŋ gata). -- (b) day Sn 507 (rattindivaŋ night & day); VvA 247 (rattindiva one night & one day, i. e. 24 hrs.); DhA ii.8 (divā -- divassa so early in the day). Also in divaŋ -- kara, daymaker, = sun, VvA 307; usually as divākara (q. v.). Cp. devasika; see also ajja.

-- santatta heated for a whole day J iv.118 (cp. divasa˚) Divasa
Divasa
(m; nt. only in expression satta divasāni 7 days or a week J iv.139; Miln 15) [Sk. divasa; see diva] a day A i.206 (˚ŋ atināmeti); J iii.52 (uposatha˚); PvA 31 (yāva sattadivasā a week long), 74 (sattamo divaso). Usually in oblique cases adverbially, viz. acc. divasaŋ (during) one day, for one day, one day long A iii.304 = iv.317; J i.279; ii.2; DhA iii.173 (taŋ d. that day); eka˚ one day J i.58; iii.26; PvA 33, 67. -- gen. divasassa (day) by day S ii.95 (rattiyā ca d. ca); J v.162; DA i.133. -- instr. divasā day by day J iv.310; divasena (eka˚) on the same day J i.59; sudivasena on a lucky day J iv.210. -- loc. divase on a day: eka˚ J iii.391; jāta˚ on his birth -- day J iii.391; iv.138; dutiya˚ the next day PvA 12, 13, 17, 31, 80 etc.; puna˚ id. J i.278; PvA 19, 38; sattame d. on the 7th day Sn 983; Miln 15; PvA 6; ussava˚ on the festive d. VvA 109; apara˚ on another day PvA 81. Also repeated divase divase day after day, every day J i.87; PvA 3. -> abl. divasato from the day ( -- ˚) J i.50; DA i.140.

-- kara the "day -- maker," i. e. the sun (cp. divākara) VvA 169, 271; -- bhāga the day -- part (opp. ratti˚ the night -- part), day -- time Miln 18 (˚ena); PvA 152 (˚ŋ), 206 (˚e = divā); -- santatta heated the livelong day S i.169; M i.453; A iv.70, cp. Vin i.225; Miln 325; cp. diva˚ Divā
Divā
(adv.) [Ved. divā, cp. diva] by day S i.183; M i.125; Dh 387; DA i.251; PvA 43, 142, 206 ( = divasa -- bhāge). Often combd & contrasted with rattiŋ (or ratto) by night; e. g. divārattiŋ by day & by night S i.47; divā c' eva rattiñ ca D ii.20; rattim pi divā pi J ii.133; divā ca ratto ca S i.33; Sn 223; Dh 296; Vv 314; VvA 128. -- divātaraŋ (compar. adv.) later on in the day M i.125; J iii.48, 498. -- atidivā too late S i.200; A iii.117.

-- kara ( = divaŋ kara) the day -- maker, the sun ThA 70 (=Ap. v.16); PvA 155; -- divassa (adv.) early in the day, at sunrise, at an early hour Vin ii.190; S i.89, 91, 97; A v.185; M ii.100, 112; J ii.1; vi.31; DhA ii.8; VvA 239, 242; -- vihāra the day -- rest, i. e. rest during the heat of the day Vin i.28, S i.129, 132, 146, 193=Th 1, 1241; Sn 679; -- saññā consciousness by day, daily c. D iii.223=A ii.45; -- seyyā=˚vihāra D i.112. Divi˚
Divi˚
an abstraction fr. divya constructed for etym. expln of dibba as divi -- bhava (˚bhāva) of divine existence or character, a divine being, in "divi -- bhavāni divyāni ettha atthī ti divyā" SnA 219; "divi -- bhavattā dibbā ti" KhA 227; "divibhāvaŋ devattabhāvapariyāpanno ti dibbo" PvA 14. Divilla
Divilla
a musical instrument Dpvs xvi.14. -- 323 -- Divya
Divya
[Sk. divya; the verse -- form for the prose -- form dibba (q. v.)] (adj.) divine Sn 153 (cp. SnA 219 under divi˚), 524 (+mānusaka); J vi.172. -- (nt.) the divinity, a divine being ( = devatā) J vi.150; SnA 219. Disa
Disa
[Sk. dviṣant & dviṣa ( -- ˚); dveṣṭi & dviśati to hate; cp. Gr. deino/s (corynthic dveini/a, hom. de/dvimen) fearful; Lat. dīrus = E. dire] an enemy Dh 42, 162; J iii.357; iv.217; v.453; Th i.874 -- 6; cp. Pss. Breth., 323, n. i. Disatā
Disatā1
(f.) [Sk. diśatā, see disā] direction, quarter, region, part of the world J iv.359; Pv ii.921 (kiŋ disataŋ gato "where in the world has he gone?"); Vv ii.32 (sādisatā the circle of the 6 directions, cp. VvA 102). Disatā
Disatā2
(f.) [Sk. *dviṣatā, see disa] state of being an enemy, a host of enemies J iv.295 ( = disasamūha, v. l. as gloss: verasamoha). Disati
Disati
[Ved. diśati, *deik to show, point towards; cp. Gr. dei/knumi (di/kh = diśā), Lat. dico (indico, index=pointer, judex), Goth. gateihan=Ger. zeigen, Ags. taecan=E. token] to point, show; to grant, bestow etc. Usually in combn with pref. ā, or in Caus. deseti (q. v.). As simplex only at S i.217 (varaŋ disā to be read for disaŋ; cp. Sk. adiśat). See also upa˚. Disā
Disā
(f.) [Ved. diś & diśā, to diśati "pointing out," point; cp. Gr. di/kh = diśā] point of the compass, region, quarter, direction, bearings. The 4 principal points usualy enumd are puratthimā (E) pacchimā (W) dakkhiṇā (S) uttarā (N), in changing order. Thus at S i.101, 145; ii.103; iii.84; iv.185, 296; Nd2 302; Pv ii.126 (caturo d.); PvA 52 (catūsu disāsu nirayo catūhi dvārehi yutto), and passim. -- To these are often added the two locations "above & below" as uparimā & heṭṭhimā disā (also as uddhaŋ adho S iii.124 e. g.; also called paṭidisā D iii.176), making in all 6 directions: D iii.188 sq. As a rule, however, the circle is completed by the 4 anudisā (intermediate points; sometimes as vidisā: S i.224; iii.239; D iii.176 etc.), making a round of 10 (dasa disā) to denote completeness, wide range & all pervading comprehensiveness of states, activities or other happening: Sn 719, 1122 (disā catasso vidisā catasso uddhaŋ adho: dasa disā imāyo); Th 2, 487; Ps ii.131; Nd2 239 (see also cātuddisa in this sense); Pv i.111; ii.110; Vism 408. sabbā (all) is often substituted for 10: S i.75; D ii.15; Pv i.21; VvA 184; PvA 71. -- anudisā (sg.) is often used collectively for the 4 points in the sense of "in between," so that the circle always implies the 10 points. Thus at S i.122; iii.124. In other combinations as 6 abbreviated for 10; four disā plus uddhaŋ & anudisaŋ at D i.222=A iii.368; four d.+uddhaŋ adho & anudisaŋ at S i.122; iii.124; A iv.167. In phrase "mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaŋ disaŋ pharitvā viharati" (etc. up to 4th) the all-comprehending range of universal goodwill is further denoted by uddhaŋ adho tiriyaŋ etc., e. g. D i.250; Vbh 272; see mettā. -- As a set of 4 or 8 disā is also used allegorically ("set, circle") for var. combinations, viz. the 8 states of jhāna at M iii.222; the 4 satipaṭṭhānā etc. at Nett 121; the 4 āhārā etc. at Nett 117. -> See also in other applications Vin i.50 (in meaning of "foreign country"); ii.217; S i.33 (abhayā), 234 (puthu˚); iii.106; v.216; D iii.197 sq.; It 103; Th 1, 874; Vv 416 (disāsu vissutā). -- disaŋ kurute to run away J v.340. diso disaŋ (often spelt disodisaŋ) in all directions (lit. from region to region) D iii.200; J iii.491; Th 1, 615; Bu ii.50; Pv iii.16; Miln 398. But at Dh 42 to disa (enemy), cp. DhA i.324=coro coraŋ. See also J.P.T.S. 1884, 82 on abl. diso=diśatah. Cp. vidisā.

-- kāka a compass -- crow, i. e. a crow kept on board ship in order to search for land (cp. Fick, Soc. Gl. p. 173; E. Hardy, Buddha p. 18) J iii.126, 267; -- kusala one who knows the directions Vin ii.217; -- cakkhuka "seeing" (i. e. wise) in all directions J iii.344; -- ḍāha "sky -- glow," unusual redness of the horizon as if on fire, polar light (?) or zodiacal light (?) D i.10; J i.374: vi.476; Miln 178; DA i.95; cp. BSk. diśodāha AvŚ ii.198; -- pati (disampati) a king S i.86; J vi.45; -- pāmokkha world -- famed J i.166; -- bhāga [Sk. digbhāga] direction, quarter Vin ii.217; -- mūḷha [Sk. diṅmūḍha] one who has lost his bearings Dpvs ix.15; -- vāsika living in a foreign country DhA iii.176. -- vāsin = ˚vāsika DhA iv.27. Dissati
Dissati
Pass. of *dassati, q. v. Dīgha
Dīgha
(adj. -- n.) [Ved. dīrgha, cp. Caus. drāghayati to lengthen, *dlāgh as in Gr. dolixo/s (shaft), e)ndelexh/s (lasting etc.; cp. E. entelechy); Lat. indulges; Goth. tulgus (enduring)] 1. (adj.) long D i.17; M i.429; S i.104 (˚ŋ addhānaŋ); Sn 146, 633 (opp. rassa); Dh 60, 409; Pv i.1011 (˚ŋ antaraŋ all the time); ii.955 (id.); Th 1, 646 (˚m -- antare); Dhs 617; KhA 245; PvA 27, 28, 33, 46. See def. at Vism 272. -- dīghato lengthways J vi.185; dīghaso in length Vin iv.279; atidīgha too long Vin iv.7, 8. -- 2. (m.) a snake (cp. M Vastu ii.45 dīrghaka) J i.324; ii.145; iv.330. -- 3. N. of the Dīgha Nikāya ("the long collection") Vism 96.

-- angulin having long fingers (the 4th of the marks of a Mahāpurisa) D ii.17; iii.143, 150; -- antara corridor J vi.349. -- āyu long -- lived (opp. app' āyu) D i.18; J v.71. Also as ˚ka D iii.150; DA i.135; Sdhp 511; -- āvu = ˚āyu in the meaning of āyasmant (q. v.) J v.120; -- jāti (f.) a being of the snake kind, a snake DhA iii.322; also as ˚ka at J ii.145; iii.250; iv.333; v.449; DA i.252; -- dasa having long fringes D i.7; -- dassin [Sk. dīrghadarśin] far -- seeing (=sabba -- dassāvin) PvA 196; -- nāsika having a long nose Vism 283. -- bhāṇaka a repeater or expounder of the Dīgha Nikāya J i.59; Vism 36, 266, 286; DA i.15, 131; -- rattaŋ (adv.) [Sk. *dīrgharātraŋ, see Indexes to AvŚ; Divy & Lal. V.; otherwise dīrgha -- kālaŋ] a long time D i.17, 206; A v.194; Sn 649; It 8; J i.12, 72; Pv i.44; ii.1311 (˚rattāya=˚rattaŋ PvA 165); Pug 15; DhA iv.24; -- loma long -- haired Vin iii.129; also as ˚ka at J i.484, f. ˚ikā S ii.228; -- sotthiya (nt.) long welfare or prosperity DhA ii.227. Dīghatta
Dīghatta
(nt.) [Sk. dīrghatvaŋ] length A i.54. Dīna
Dīna
(adj.) [Sk. dīna] poor, miserable, wretched; base, mean, low D ii.202 (?) (˚māna; v. l. ninnamāna); J v.448; vi.375; Pv ii.82 ( = adānajjhāsaya PvA 107); iv.81; Miln 406; PvA 120 (=kapaṇa), 260 (id.), 153; Sdhp 188, 324. Dīnatta
Dīnatta
(nt.) [Sk. *dīnatvaŋ] wretchedness, miserable state Sdhp 78. Dīpa
Dīpa1
[Ved. dīpa to Ved. dī, dīpyate; Idg. *dei̯ā to shine (see dibba, deva); cp. Gr. di/alos, dh_los; see also jotati] a lamp J ii.104 (˚ŋ jāleti to light a l.); DhA ii.49 (id.), 94 (id.)

-- acci the flame of a lamp ThA 154; -- āloka light of a l. J i.266; vi.391; DhA i.359; VvA 51; -- (˚ŋ)kara making light, shining, illuminating Nd2 399 ( = pabhaŋ kara Sn 1136; but cp. Dh 236 under dīpa2); Vism 203. -- tittira a decoy partridge (cp. dīpaka˚) J iii.64; -- rukkha lit. lamp -- tree, the stand of a lamp, candlestick DhA iv.120; -- sikhā the flame (lit. crest) of a l. Vism 171; DhA ii.49. Dīpa
Dīpa2
(m. & nt.) [Ved. dvīpa = dvi+ap (*sp.) of āpa water, lit. "double -- watered," between (two) waters] an island, continent (mahā˚, always as 4); terra firma, solid foundation, resting -- place, shelter, refuge (in this sense freq. combd w. tāṇa lena & saraṇa & expl. in Com. by patiṭṭhā) -- (a) lit. island: S v.219; J iii.187; VvA 19; Mhvs vii.7, 41. -- continent: cattāro mahādīpā S v.343; Vv 2010 (=VvA 104); VvA 19; PvA 74 etc. Opp. the 2000 paritta -- dīpā the smaller islands KhA 133. -- (b) fig. shelter, salvation etc. (see also tāṇa): S iii.42 (atta˚+attasaraṇa etc., not with S Index to dīpa1); v.154, 162 (id.) iv.315 (maŋ˚, not to dīpa1), 372; A i.55 sq. (+tāṇa etc.); Sn 501 (atta˚ selfreliant, self -- supported, not with Fausböll to dīpa1), 1092, 1094, 1145 (=Satthā); Nd2 303; Dh 236 (˚ŋ karohi= patiṭṭhā PvA 87); Pv iii.19 (id. PvA 174); J v.501=vi.375 (dīpañ ca parāyaṇaŋ); Miln 84, 257 (dhamma -- dīpa, Arahantship).

-- ālaya resting place J vi.432; -- gabbhaka same J vi.459, 460. -- 324 -- Dīpa
Dīpa3
[cp. Sk. dvīpa tiger's skin] a car covered with a panther's skin J i.259; v.259 = vi.48. Dīpaka
Dīpaka1
( = dīpa1) (a) f. dīpikā a lamp, in daṇḍa˚ a torch DhA i.220, 399, -- (b) (˚ -- ) an image of, having the appearance of, sham etc.; in -- kakkara a decoy partridge J ii.161; -- tittira same J iii.358; -- pakkhin a decoy bird J v.376; -- miga a d. antelope J v.376. Dīpaka
Dīpaka2
( = dīpa2) a (little) island J i.278, 279; ii.160. Dīpaka
Dīpaka3
in vaṇidīpaka PvA 120 for vanibbaka (q. v.). Dīpana
Dīpana
(adj.) illustrating, explaining; f. ˚ī explanation, commentary, N. of several Commentaries, e. g. the Paramattha -- dīpanī of Dhammapāla on Th 2; Pv & Vv. -- Cp. jotikā & uddīpanā. Dīpika
Dīpika
[fr. dīpin] a panther J iii.480. Dīpita
Dīpita
[pp. of dīpeti] explained Vism 33. Dīpitar
Dīpitar
[n. ag. fr. dīpeti] one who illumines Vism 211. Dīpin
Dīpin
[Sk. dvīpin] a panther, leopard, tiger Vin i.186 dīpicamma a leopard skin = Sk. dvīpicarman); A iii.101; J i.342; ii.44, 110; iv.475; v.408; vi.538. dīpi -- rājā king of the panthers Vism 270. -- f. dīpinī Miln 363, 368; DhA i.48. Dīpeti
Dīpeti
[Sk. dīpayati, Caus. to dīp, see dīpa1 & cp. dippati] to make light, to kindle, to emit light, to be bright; to illustrate, explain A v.73 sq.; Dh 363; Miln 40; PvA 94, 95, 102, 104 etc.; Sdhp 49, 349. Cp. ā˚. Du˚
Du˚1
(& before vowels dur˚) (indecl.) [Sk. duḥ & duṣ = Gr. du/s -- , Oir. du -- , Ohg. zur -- , zer -- ; antithetic prefix, generally opposed to su˚=Gr. eu) -- etc. Ultimately identical with du2 in sense of asunder, apart, away from= opposite or wrong] 1. syllable of exclamation (=duḥ) "bad, woe" (beginning the word du (j) -- jīvitaŋ) DhA ii.6, 10=PvA 280, cp. J iii.47; Bdhgh's expln of the syllable see at Vism 494. -- 2. prefix, implying perverseness, difficulty, badness (cp. dukkha). Original form *duḥ is preserved at dur -- before vowels, but assimilated to a foll. consonant according to the rules of Assimilation, i. e. the cons. is doubled, with changes of v to bb & usual lengthening dū before r (but also du˚). For purposes of convenience all cpds. with du˚ are referred to the simplex, e. g. dukkaṭa is to be looked up under kata, duggati under gati etc.

See: A. dur˚. akkhāta, accaya, atikkama, atta, adhiroha, anta, annaya, abhisambhava; āgata, ājāna, āyuta, āsada; itthi; ukkhepa, ubbaha. -- B. du˚: (k)kata, kara; (g)ga, gata, gati, gandha, gahīta; (c)caja, carita, cola; (j) jaha, jāna, jivha, jīvita; (t)tappaya, tara; (d)dama, dasika; (n)naya, nikkhaya, nikkhitta, niggaha, nijjhāpaya, nibbedha, nīta; (p)pañña, paṭiānaya, paṭinissaggin, paṭipadā, paṭivijjha, paṭivedha, pabhajja, pamuñca, pameyya, parihāra, payāta, pasu, peyya, posa; (p)phassa; (bb = b): bala, balika, budha; (bb=v): dubbaca=) vaca, vacana, vaṇṇa, vijāna, vidū, vinivijjha, visodha, vuṭṭhika; (b) bhaga, bhara, bhāsita, bhikkha; (m)mati, mana, manku, mukha, mejjha, medha; (y)yiṭṭha, yuja, yutta; (du+r)=du -- ratta, ropaya (dū+r): dū -- rakkha; (l)labha; (s)saddhapaya, sassa, saha, sīla; hara. Du˚
Du˚2
in cpds. meaning two˚; see dvi B II. Du
Du3
( -- ˚) (adj. -- suff.) [Sk. druha, druh, see duhana & duhitika] hurting, injuring, acting perfidiously, betraying, only in mitta˚ deceiving one's friends S i.225; Sn 244 expl. as mitta -- dūbhaka SnA 287, v. l. B mittadussaka; cp. mitta -- dubbhika & mitta -- dubbhin. Duka
Duka
(nt.) [see dvi B ii] a dyad DhsA 36, 343, 347, 406; Vism 11 sq. & in titles of books "in pairs, on pairs," e. g. Dukapaṭṭhāna; or chapters, e. g. J ii.1 (˚nipāta). Dukūla
Dukūla
[Sk. dukūla] a certain (jute?) plant; (nt.) [cp. Sk. dukūlaŋ woven silk] very fine cloth, made of the fibre of the d. plant S iii.145; A iv.393; J ii.21; iv.219; v.400; vi.72; Vism 257, 262; VvA 165; DA i.140; Dāvs v. 27. Dukkha
Dukkha
(adj. -- n.) [Sk. duḥkha fr. duḥ -- ka, an adj. forma- tion fr. prefix duḥ (see du). According to others an analogy formation after sukha, q. v.; Bdhgh (at Vism 494) expls dukkha as du+kha, where du = du1 and kha=ākāsa. See also def. at Vism 461.] A. (adj.) unpleasant, painful, causing misery (opp. sukha pleasant) Vin i.34; Dh 117. Lit. of vedanā (sensation) M i.59 (˚ŋ vedanaŋ vediyamāna, see also below iii.1 e); A ii.116=M. i.10 (sarīrikāhi vedanāhi dukkhāhi). -> Fig. (fraught with pain, entailing sorrow or trouble) of kāmā D i.36 (=paṭipīḷan -- aṭṭhena DA i.121); Dh 186 (=bahudukkha DhA iii.240); of jāti M i.185 (cp. ariyasacca, below B I.); in combn dukkhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā D iii.106; Dhs 176; Nett 7, 112 sq., cp. A ii.149 sq. ekanta˚ very painful, giving much pain S ii.173; iii.69. dukkhaŋ (adv.) with difficulty, hardly J i.215.

B. (nt.; but pl. also dukkhā, e. g. S i.23; Sn 728; Dh 202, 203, 221. Spelling dukha (after sukha) at Dh 83, 203). There is no word in English covering the same ground as Dukkha does in Pali. Our modern words are too specialised, too limited, and usually too strong. Sukha & dukkha are ease and dis-ease (but we use disease in another sense); or wealth and ilth from well & ill (but we have now lost ilth); or wellbeing and ill-ness (but illness means something else in English). We are forced, therefore, in translation to use half synonyms, no one of which is exact. Dukkha is equally mental & physical. Pain is too predominantly physical, sorrow too exclusively mental, but in some connections they have to be used in default of any more exact rendering. Discomfort, suffering, ill, and trouble can occasionally be used in certain connections. Misery, distress, agony, affliction and woe are never right. They are all much too strong & are only mental (see Mrs. Rh. D. Bud. Psy. 83 -- 86, quoting Ledi Sadaw).

I. Main Points in the Use of the Word. -- The recognition of the fact of Dukkha stands out as essential in early Buddhism. In the very first discourse the four socalled Truths or Facts (see saccāni) deal chiefly with dukkha. The first of the four gives certain universally recognised cases of it, & then sums them up in short. The five groups (of physical & mental qualities which make an individual) are accompanied by ill so far as those groups are fraught with āsavas and grasping. (Pañc' upādānakkhandhā pi dukkhā; cp. S iii.47). The second Sacca gives the cause of this dukkha (see Taṇhā). The third enjoins the removal of this taṇhā. And the fourth shows the way, or method, of doing so (see Magga). These ariyasaccāni are found in two places in the older books Vin i.10 = S v.421 (with addition of soka -- parideva . . . etc. [see below] in some MSS). Comments on this passage, or part of it, occur S iii.158, 159; with expln of each term (+soka) D i.189; iii.136, 277; M i.185; A i.107; Sn p. 140; Nd2 under sankhārā; It 17 (with dukkhassa atikkama for nirodha), 104, 105; Ps i.37; ii.204, 147; Pug 15, 68; Vbh 328; Nett 72, 73. It is referred to as dukkha, samudaya, nirodha, magga at Vin i.16, 18, 19; D iii.227; Nd2 304iib; as āsavānaŋ khaya -- ñāṇa at D i.83; Vin iii.5; as sacca No. 1+paṭiccasamuppāda at A i.176 sq. (+soka˚); in a slightly diff. version of No. 1 (leaving out appiyehi & piyehi, having soka˚ instead) at D ii.305; and in the formula catunnaŋ ariyasaccānaŋ ananubodhā etc. at D ii.90=Vin i.230.

II. Characterisation in Detail. -- 1. A further specification of the 3rd of the Noble Truths is given in the Paṭicca -- samuppāda (q.v.), which analyses the links & stages of the causal chain in their interdependence as building up (anabolic = samudaya) &, after their recognition as causes, breaking down (katabolic=nirodha) the dukkha -- synthesis, & thus constitutes the Metabolism of kamma; discussed e. g. at Vin 1; D ii.32 sq. =S ii.2 sq.; S ii.17, 20, 65= Nd2 680i.c; S iii.14; M i.266 sq.; ii.38; A i.177; mentioned e. g. at A i.147; M i.192 sq., 460; It 89 (=dukkhassa antakiriyā). -> 2. Dukkha as one of the 3 qualifications of the sankhārā (q. v.), viz. anicca, d., anattā, evanescence, ill, nonsoul: S i.188; ii.53 (yad aniccaŋ taŋ dukkhaŋ); iii.112 (id.) iii.67, 180, 222; iv.28, 48, 129 sq.; 131 sq. -- rūpe anicc' ânupassī (etc. with dukkh' & anatt') S iii.41. anicca -- saññā, dukkha˚ etc. D iii.243; A iii.334, cp. iv.52 sq. -- sabbe sankhārā aniccā etc. Nd2 under sankhārā. -- 3. Specification of Dukkha. The Niddesa gives a characteristic description of all that comes under the term dukkha. It employs one stereotyped explanation (therefore old & founded on scholastic authority) (Nd2 304i.), & one expln (304iii.) peculiar to itself & only applied to Sn 36. The latter defines & illustrates dukkha exclusively as suffering & torment incurred by a person as punishment, inflicted on him either by the king or (after death) by the guardians of purgatory (niraya -- pālā; see detail under niraya, & cp. below III. 2 b). -- The first expln (304i.) is similar in kind to the definition of d. as long afterwards given in the Sānkhya system (see Sānkhya -- kārikā -- bhāṣya of Gauḍapāda to stanza 1) & classifies the various kinds of dukkha in the foll. groups: (a) all suffering caused by the fact of being born, & being through one's kamma tied to the consequent states of transmigration; to this is loosely attached the 3 fold division of d. as dukkha˚, sankhāra˚, vipariṇāma˚ (see below III. 1 c); -- (b) illnesses & all bodily states of suffering (cp. ādhyātmikaŋ dukkhaŋ of Sānkhya k.); -- (c) pain & (bodily) discomfort through outward circumstances, as extreme climates, want of food, gnat -- bites etc. (cp. ādhibhautikaŋ & ādhidaivikaŋ d. of Sk.); -- (d) (Mental) distress & painful states caused by the death of one's beloved or other misfortunes to friends or personal belongings (cp. domanassa). -- This list is concluded by a scholastic characterisation of these var. states as conditioned by kamma, implicitly due to the afflicted person not having found his "refuge," i. e. salvation from these states in the 8 fold Path (see above B I.).

III. General Application, & various views regarding dukkha. -- 1. As simple sensation (: pain) & related to other terms: (a) principally a vedanā, sensation, in particular belonging to the body (kāyika), or physical pain (opp. cetasika dukkha mental ill: see domanassa). Thus defined as kāyikaŋ d. at D ii.306 (cp. the distinction between śarīraŋ & mānasaŋ dukkhaŋ in Sānkhya philosophy) M i.302; S v.209 (in def. of dukkhindriya); A ii.143 (sarīrikā vedanā dukkhā); Nett 12 (duvidhaŋ d.: kāyikaŋ = dukkhaŋ; cetasikaŋ= domanassaŋ); Vism 165 (twofold), 496 (dukkhā aññaŋ na bādhakaŋ), 499 (seven divisions), 503 (kāyika); SnA 119 (sukhaŋ vā dukkhaŋ vā Sn 67=kāyikaŋ sātāsātaŋ). Bdhgh. usually paraphrases d. with vaṭṭadukkha, e. g. at SnA 44, 212, 377, 505. -- (b) Thus to be understood as physical pain in combn dukkha+ domanassa "pain & grief," where d. can also be taken as the gen. term & dom˚ as specification, e. g. in cetasikaŋ dukkhaŋ domanassaŋ paṭisaŋvedeti A i.157, 216; iv.406; S ii.69; rāgajan d ˚ŋ dom ˚ŋ paṭisaŋvedeti A ii.149; kāmûpasaŋhitaŋ d ˚ŋ dom ˚ŋ A iii.207; d ˚ŋ dom ˚ŋ paṭisaŋvediyati S iv.343. Also as cpd. dukkhadomanassānaŋ atthangamāya A iii.326, & freq. in formula soka -- parideva -- d˚ -- domanass -- upāyāsā (grief & sorrow, afflictions of pain & misery, i. e. all kinds of misery) D i.36 (arising fr. kāmā); M ii.64; A v.216 sq.; It 89 etc. (see above B I. 4). Cp. also the combn dukkhī dummano "miserable and dejected" S ii.282. -- (c) dukkha as "feeling of pain" forms one of the three dukkhatā or painful states, viz. d. -- dukkhatā (painful sensation caused by bodily pain), sankhāra˚ id. having its origin in the sankhārā, vipariṇāma˚, being caused by change S iv.259; v.56; D iii.216; Nett 12. (d) Closely related in meaning is ahita "that which is not good or profitable," usually opposed to sukha & hita. It is freq. in the ster. expression "hoti dīgharattaŋ ahitāya dukkhāya" for a long time it is a source of discomfort & pain A i.194 sq.; M i.332 D iii.157; Pug 33. Also in phrases anatthāya ahitāya dukkhāya D iii.246 & akusalaŋ . . . ahitāya dukkhāya saŋvattati A i.58. -- (e) Under vedanā as sensation are grouped the 3: sukhaŋ (or sukhā ved.) pleasure (pleasant sensation), dukkhaŋ pain (painful sens.), adukkham -- asukhaŋ indifference (indifferent sens.), the last of which is the ideal state of the emotional habitus to be gained by the Arahant (cp. upekhā & nibbidā). Their rôle is clearly indicated in the 4th jhāna: sukhassa pahānā dukkhassa pahānā pubbe va somanassadomanassānaŋ atthangamā adukkham -- asukhaŋ upekhā parisuddhiŋ catutthaŋ jhānaŋ upasampajja viharati (see jhāna). -- As contents of vedanā: sukhaŋ vediyati dukkhaŋ v. adukkham -- asukhaŋ v. tasmā vedanā ti S iii.86, 87; cp. S ii.82 (vedayati). tisso vedanā: sukha, d˚, adukkham -- asukhā˚ D iii.275; S ii.53; iv.114 sq., 207, 223 sq., cp. M i.396; A i.173; iv.442; It 46, 47. yaŋ kiñc' āyaŋ purisa -- puggalo paṭisaŋvedeti sukhaŋ vā d ˚ŋ vā a ˚ŋ vā sabban taŋ pubbe katahetū ti= one's whole life -- experience is caused by one's former kamma A i.173=M ii.217. -- The combn (as complementary pair) of sukha+dukkha is very freq. for expressing the varying fortunes of life & personal experience as pleasure & pain, e. g. n' âlam aññamaññassa sukhāya vā dukkhāya vā sukhadukkhāya vā D i.56 =S iii.211. Thus under the 8 "fortunes of the world" (loka dhammā) with lābha (& a˚), yasa (a˚), pasaŋsā (nindā), sukha (dukkha) at D iii.260; Nd2 55. Regarded as a thing to be avoided in life: puriso jīvitukāmo . . . sukhakāmo dukkha -- paṭikkūlo S iv.172, 188. -- In similar contexts: D i.81≈; iii.51, 109, 187; S ii.22, 39; iv.123 sq.; A ii.158 etc. (cp. sukha).

2. As complex state (suffering) & its valuation in the light of the Doctrine: (a) any worldly sensation, pleasure & experience may be a source of discomfort (see above, I.; cp. esp. kāma & bhava) Ps i.11 sq. (specified as jāti etc.); dukkhaŋ = mahabbhayaŋ S i.37; bhārādānaŋ dukkhaŋ loke bhāra -- nikkhepanaŋ sukhaŋ (pain is the great weight) S iii.26; kāmānaŋ adhivacanaŋ A iii.310; iv.289; cp. A iii.410 sq. (with kāmā, vedanā, saññā, āsavā, kamma, dukkhaŋ). -- (b) ekanta˚ (extreme pain) refers to the suffering of sinful beings in Niraya, & it is open to conjecture whether this is not the first & orig. meaning of dukkha; e. g. M i.74; A ii.231 (vedanaŋ vediyati ekanta -- d˚ŋ seyyathā pi sattā nerayikā); see ekanta. In the same sense: . . . upenti Roruvaŋ ghoraŋ cirarattaŋ dukkhaŋ anubhavanti S i.30; niraya -- dukkha Sn 531; pecca d˚ŋ nigacchati Sn 278, 742; anubhonti d˚ŋ kaṭuka -- pphalāni Pv i.1110 (=āpāyikaŋ d˚ŋ PvA 60); PvA 67; mahādukkhaŋ anubhavati PvA 43, 68, 107 etc. atidukkhaŋ PvA 65; dukkhato pete mocetvā PvA 8. -- (c) to suffer pain, to experience unpleasantness etc. is expressed in foll. terms: dukkhaŋ anubhavati (only w. ref. to Niraya, see b); anveti Dh 1 (=kāyikaŋ cetasikaŋ vipāka -- dukkhaŋ anugacchati DhA i.24), upeti Sn 728; carati S i.210; nigacchati M i.337; Sn 278, 742; paṭisaŋvedeti M i.313 (see above); passati S i.132 (jāto dukkhāni passati: whoever is born experiences woe); vaḍḍheti S ii.109; viharati A i.202; ii.95; iii.3; S iv.78 (passaddhiyā asati d˚ŋ v. dukkhino cittaŋ na samādhiyati); vedayati, vediyati, vedeti etc. see above III. 1 e; sayati A i.137. -- (d) More specific reference to the cause of suffering & its removal by means of enlightenment: (a) Origin (see also above I. & II. 1): dukkhe loko patiṭṭhito S i.40; yaŋ kiñci dukkhaŋ sambhoti sabbaŋ sankhāra -- paccayā Sn 731; ye dukkhaŋ vaḍḍhenti te na parimuccanti jātiyā etc. S ii.109; d˚ŋ ettha bhiyyo Sn 61, 584; yo paṭhavī -- dhātuŋ abhinandati dukkhaŋ so abhin˚ Si i.174; taṇhā d ˚ssa samudayo etc. Nett 23 sq.; as result of sakkāyadiṭṭhi S iv.147, of chanda S i.22 of upadhi S ii.109, cp. upadhīnidānā pabhavanti dukkhā Sn 728; d˚ŋ eva hi sambhoti d˚ŋ tiṭṭhati veti ca S i.135. -- (b) Salvation from Suffering (see above I.): kathaŋ dukkhā pamuccati Sn 170; dukkhā pamuccati S i.14; iii.41, 150; iv.205; v.451; na hi putto pati vā pi piyo d ˚ā pamocaye yathā saddhamma -- savanaŋ dukkhā moceti pāṇinaŋ S i,210; na appatvā lokantaŋ dukkhā atthi pamocanaŋ A ii.49. Kammakkhayā . . . sabbaŋ d˚ŋ nijjiṇṇaŋ bhavissati M ii.217, cp. i.93. kāme pahāya . . . d˚ŋ na sevetha anatthasaŋhitaŋ S i.12=31; rūpaŋ (etc.) abhijānaŋ bhabbo d -- ˚kkhayāya S iii.27; iv.89; d˚ŋ pariññāya sakhettavatthuŋ Tathāgato arahati pūraḷāsaŋ Sn 473. pajahati d˚ŋ Sn 789, 1056. dukkhassa samudayo ca atthangamo ca S ii.72; iii.228 sq.; iv.86, 327. -- dukkhass' antakaro hoti M i.48; A iii.400 sq.; It 18; antakarā bhavāmase Sn 32; antaŋ karissanti Satthu sāsana -- kārino A ii.26; d ˚parikkhīṇaŋ S ii.133; akiñcanaŋ nânupatanti dukkhā S i.23; sankhārānaŋ nirodhena n' atthi d˚assa sambhavo Sn 731. -- muniŋ d˚assa pārayuŋ S i.195=Nd2 136v; antagū 'si pāragū d˚assa Sn 539. -- sang' ātiko maccujaho nirūpadhi pahāya d˚ŋ apunabbhavāya S iv.158; ucchinnaŋ mūlaŋ d˚assa, n' atthi dāni punabbhavo Vin i.231= D ii.91.

-- âdhivāha bringing or entailing pain S iv.70; -- anubhavana suffering pain or undergoing punishment (in Niraya) J iv.3; -- antagū one who has conquered suffering Sn 401; -- âbhikiṇṇa beset with pain, full of distress It 89; -- âsahanatā non -- endurance of ills Vism 325. -- indriya the faculty of experiencing pain, painful sensation S v.209, 211; Dhs 556, 560; Vbh 15, 54, 71; -- udraya causing or yielding pain, resulting in ill, yielding distress M i.415 sq.; A i.97; iv.43 (+dukkhavipāka); v.117 (dukh˚), 243; J iv.398; of kamma: Ps i.80; ii.79; Pv i.1110 (so read for dukkhandriya, which is also found at PvA 60); DhA ii.40 (˚uddaya); -- ûpadhāna causing pain Dh 291; -- ûpasama the allayment of pain or alleviation of suffering, only in phrase (aṭṭhangiko maggo) d -- ûpasama -- gāmino S iii.86; It 106; Sn 724 = Dh 191; -- (m)esin wishing ill, malevolent J iv.26; -- otiṇṇa fallen into misery S iii.93; M i.460; ii.10; -- kāraṇa labour or trials to be undergone as punishment DhA iii.70 (see Dh 138, 139 & cp. dasa1 B 1 b); -- khandha the aggregate of suffering, all that is called pain or affliction (see above B II. 1) S ii.134; iii.93; M i.192 sq.; 200 sq.; etc.; -- khaya the destruction of pain, the extinction of ill M i.93; ii.217 (kammakkhayā d -- kkhayo); S iii.27; Sn 732. Freq. in phrase (nīyāti or hoti) sammā -- d -- kkhayāya "leads to the complete extinction of ill," with ref. to the Buddha's teaching or the higher wisdom, e. g. of brahmacariyā S ii.24; of paññā D iii.268; A iii.152 sq.; of ariyā diṭṭhi D iii.264=A iii.132; of sikkhā A ii.243; of dhamma M i.72; -- dhamma the principle of pain, a painful object, any kind of suffering (cp. ˚khandha) D iii.88; S iv.188 (˚ānaŋ samudayañ ca atthagamañ ca yathābhūtaŋ pajānāti); It 38 (nirodha ˚anaŋ); -- nidāna a source of pain M ii.223; Dhs 1059, 1136; -- nirodha the destruction of pain, the extinction of suffering (see above B II. 1) M i.191; ii.10; A iii.410, 416; etc.; -- paṭikkūla averse to pain, avoiding unpleasantness, in combn sukhakāmo d -- p. S iv.172 (spelt ˚kulo), 188; M i.341; -- patta being in pain J vi.336; -- pareta afflicted by pain or misery S iii.93; It 89=A i.147; -- bhummi the soil of distress Dhs 985; -- vāca hurtful speech Pv i.32 (should probably be read duṭṭha˚); -- vipāka (adj.) having pain as its fruit, creating misery S ii.128; D iii.57, 229; A ii.172 (kamma); Ps ii.79 (id.); -- vepakka =˚vipāka Sn 537 (kamma); -- saññā the consciousness of pain Nett 27; -- samudaya the rise or origin of pain or suffering (opp. ˚nirodha; see above B II. 1) S iv.37; M i.191; ii.10; iii.267; Vbh 107 (taṇhā ca avasesā ca kilesā: ayaŋ vuccati d -- s.); -- samphassa contact with pain M i.507; Dhs 648; f. abstr. ˚tā Pug 33; -- seyya an uncomfortable couch DhA iv.8. -- 326 -- Dukkhatā
Dukkhatā
(f.) [cp. Sk. duḥkhatā, abstr. to dukkha] state of pain, painfulness, discomfort, pain (see dukkha B III. 1 c) D iii.216; S iv.259; v.56; Nett 12 (expl.). Dukkhati
Dukkhati
[fr. dukkha] to be painful Vism 264. Dukkhatta
Dukkhatta
(nt.) [Sk. *duhkhatvaŋ] = dukkhatā D iii.106 (+dandhatta). Dukkhāpana
Dukkhāpana
(nt.) [abstr. to dukkhāpeti] bringing sorrow, causing pain Miln 275 sq., 351. Dukkhāpita
Dukkhāpita
[pp. of dukkhāpeti] pained, afflicted Miln 79, 180. Dukkhāpeti
Dukkhāpeti
[caus. to dukkha] to cause pain, to afflict J iv.452; Miln 276 sq.; PvA 215. -- pp. dukkhāpita. Dukkhita
Dukkhita
(adj.) [Sk. duḥkhita; pp. of *dukkhāpeti] afflicted, dejected, unhappy, grieved, disappointed; miserable, suffering, ailing (opp. sukhita) D i.72 (puriso ābādhiko d. bāḷha -- gilāno); ii.24; S i.149; iii.11 = iv.180 (sukhitesu sukhito dukkhitesu dukkhito); v.211; M i.88; ii.66; Vin iv.291; Sn 984, 986; J iv.452; Miln 275; DhA ii.28; VvA 67. Dukkhin
Dukkhin
(adj. -- n.) [Sk. duḥkhin] 1. afflicted, grieved, miserable S i.103 sq., 129 sq., ii.282 (+dummano); iv.78; A iii.57. -- 2. a loser in the game J ii.160. Dukkhīyati
Dukkhīyati
[Sk. duḥkhīyati & duḥkhāyati Denom. fr. dukkha; cp. vediyati & vedayati] to feel pain, to be distressed DhA ii.28 ( = vihaññati). Dugga
Dugga
[du+ga] a difficult road Dh 327; Pv ii.78. dugge sankamanāni passages over difficult roads, usually combd with papā (water -- shed) S i.100; Vv 5222; Pv ii.925. Duṭṭha
Duṭṭha
(adj. -- n.) [Sk. duṣṭha, pp. of dussati, q. v.] spoilt, corrupt; bad, malignant, wicked Vin iii.118; S ii.259, 262; iv.339; A i.124 (˚âruka), 127 (id.), 157 sq.; It 68 (saro d., perhaps should be read as diddho); J i.187, 254 (˚brāhmaṇa); iv.391 (˚caṇḍāla); PvA 4 (˚corā: rogues of thieves); Sdhp 86, 367, 434. -- aduṭṭha not evil, good Sn 623; It 86; DhA iv.164. Cp. pa˚.

-- gahaṇika suffering from indigestion Vin i.206; -- citta evil -- minded Vin ii.192; M iii.65. Duṭṭhu
Duṭṭhu
(adv.) [Sk. duṣṭhu, cp. suṣṭhu] badly, wrong DhsA 384; SnA 396; VvA 337. Duṭṭhulla
Duṭṭhulla
(adj.) wicked, lewd Vin iv.128; S i.187 (˚bhāṇin "whose speech is never lewd," cp. Th 1, 1217 padulla -> gāhin, expld as duṭṭhullagāhin Psalms of Brethren 399 n. 3); M i.435; iii.159; Vism 313. -- (nt.) wicked -> ness Vin iii.21; kāya˚ unchastity M iii.151; Th 1, 114; Vism 151.

-- âduṭṭhulla that which is wicked & that which is not Vin v.130; -- āpatti a grave transgression of the Rules of the Order, viz. the 4 Pārājika & the 13 Sanghādisesa Vin iv.31 (opp. a˚ Vin iv.32). -- 327 -- Dutiya
Dutiya
(num. ord.) [Sk. dvitīya, with reduction of dvi to du, as in compn mentioned under dvi B II. For the meaning "companion" cp. num. ord. for two in Lat. secundusdeu/teros> deu/omai he who stays behind, also Sk. davīyas farther] (a) (num.) the second, the following J ii.102, 110; dutiyaŋ for the second time (cp. tatiyaŋ in series 1, 2, 3) Vin ii.188; D ii.155. -- (b) (adj. n.) one who follows or is associated with, an associate of; accompanying or accompanied by ( -- ˚); a companion, friend, partner Vin iv.225; S i.25 (saddhā dutiyā purisassa hoti = his 2nd self); iv.78 (id.) i.131; It 9; J v.400; Th 2, 230 (a husband); Sn 49 (=Nd2 305, where two kinds of associates or companions are distinguished, viz. taṇhā˚ & puggalo˚). taṇhā -- dutiyā either "connected with thirst" or "having thirst as one's companion" (see taṇhā) S iv.37; It 109=A ii.10; bilanga˚ kaṇājaka (rice with sour gruel) Vin ii.77; S i.90, 91. -- adutiya alone, unaccompanied PvA 161. Dutiyaka
Dutiyaka
(adj. -- n.) [Dimin. of dutiya] (a) the second, following, next J i.504 (˚cittavāre); ˚ŋ a 2nd time M i.83. -- (b) a companion; only in f. dutiyikā a wife or female compn Vin iv.230, 270 (a bhikkhunī as compn of another one); Freq. as purāṇa -- dutiyikā one's former wife Vin i.96; iii.16; S i.200; M ii.63; J i.210; v.152; DhA i.77. Cp. M Vastu ii.134 dvitīyā in the same sense. Dutiyyatā
Dutiyyatā
(f.) companionship, friendship, help J iii.169. Duddabha
Duddabha
see daddabha. Duddha
Duddha
(Sk. dugdha, pp. of duh, see dohati] milked, drawn Sn 18 (duddha -- khīra = gāvo duhitvā gahitakhīra SnA 27); M ii.186. -- (nt.) milk Dāvs v.26. Dudrabhi
Dudrabhi
[another form of dundubhi, cp. duddabha & dundubhya] a kettle -- drum, in Amata˚ the drum of Nibbāna Vin i.8 = M i.171 (dundubhi at the latter passage); PvA 189 (v. l. for dundubhi). Dundubhi
Dundubhi
(m. & f.) [Sk. dundubhi, onomat.; cp. other forms under daddabha, dudrabhi] a kettle -- drum, the noise of a drum, a heavy thud, thunder (usually as deva˚ in the latter meaning) Pv iii.34; J vi.465; PvA 40, 189 (v. l. dudrabhi). -- Amata˚ the drum of Nibbāna M i.171 = Vin i.8 (: dudrabhi); deva˚ thunder D ii.156; A iv.311. *Dunoti
*Dunoti
to burn, see der, dava, dāva & dāya. Dupaṭṭo
Dupaṭṭo
see dvi B II. Dubbaṇṇa
Dubbaṇṇa
see under vaṇṇa. Dubbuṭṭhika
Dubbuṭṭhika
see under vuṭṭhi. Dubbha
Dubbha
(& dūbha) (adj.) [Sk. dambha, see dubbhati] deceiving, hurting, trying to injure Vin ii.203 ( = It 86 where dubbhe); Pv ii.93 (mitta˚). adubbha one who does not do harm, harmless Pv ii.98 (˚pāṇin=ahiŋsakahattha). As nt. harmlessness, frankness, friendliness, good -- will Vin i.347 (adrūbhāya, but cp. vv. ll. p. 395: adubbhaya & adrabbhāvāya); S i.225 (adubbhāya trustily); J i.180 (id. as adūbhāya); spelt wrongly adrūbhaka (for adubbhaka, with v. l. adrabhaka in expl. of adubbha -- pāṇin) at J vi.311. Note: dabhāya (dat.) is also used in Sk. in sense of an adv. or infinitive, which confirms the etymology of the word. Cp. dobha. Dubbhaka
Dubbhaka
(adj.) [Sk. dambhaka] perfidious, insidious, treacherous Th 1, 214 (citta˚). Cp. dubbhaya & dūbhaka. Dubbhati
Dubbhati
(& dūbhati) [Sk. dabhnoti cp. J.P.T.S. 1889, 204: dabh (dambh), pp. dabdha; idg. *dhebh, cp. Gr. a)te/mbw to deceive. Cp. also Sk druh (so Kern, Toev. p. 11, s. v. padubbhati). See also dahara & dūbha, dūbhaka, dūbhi] to injure, hurt, deceive; to be hostile to, plot or sin against (either w. dat. J v.245; vi.491, or w. loc. J i.267; iii.212) S i.85 (ppr. adubbhanto), 225; It 86 (dubbhe = dusseyya Com.)=Vin ii.203 (where dubbho); Th 1, 1129; J ii.125; iv.261; v.487, 503. -- ppr. also dūbhato J iv.261; ger. dubbhitvā J iv.79; grd. dubbheyya (v. l. dūbheyya) to be punished J v.71. Cp. pa˚. Dubbhana
Dubbhana
(nt.) [Sk. *dambhana] hurtfulness, treachery, injury against somebody (c. loc.) PvA 114 ( = anattha). Dubbhaya
Dubbhaya
= dubbhaka, S i.107. Dubbhika
Dubbhika
= dubbhaka, Pv iii.113 (=mittadubbhika, mittānaŋ bādhaka PvA 175). Dubbhikkha
Dubbhikkha
see bhikkhā. Dubbhin
Dubbhin
(adj. -- n.) [Sk. dambhin] seeking to injure, deceit- ful; a deceiver, hypocrite J iv.41; Pv ii.98 (mitta˚); DhA ii.23 (mitta -- dūbhin). -- f. dubbhinī VvA 68 (so read for dubbinī). Dubha
Dubha
(num. -- adj.) [See dubhaya & cp. dvi B II.] both; only in abl. dubhato from both sides Th 1, 1134; Ps i.69; ii.35, 181; Vv 4621; VvA 281 (for Vv 6419 duvaddhato). Dubhaya
Dubhaya
(num. adj.) [a contaminated form of du(ve) & ubhaya; see dvi B II.] both (see ubhaya) Sn 517, 526, 1007, 1125; J iii.442; vi.110. Duma
Duma
[Sk. druma = Gr. drumo/s, see dāru] tree A iii.43; J i.87, 272; ii.75, 270; vi.249, 528; Vv 8414; Miln 278, 347; VvA 161.

-- agga 1. the top of a tree J ii.155. -- 2. a splendid tree Vv 354. -- 3. a tooth -- pick J v.156; -- inda "king of trees," the Bodhi tree Dpvs i.7; -- uttama a magnificent tree Vv 393; -- phala fruit of a tree M ii.74; Vism 231 (in comparison). Duyhati
Duyhati
Pass to dohati (q. v.). Dussa
Dussa1
(nt.) [Sk. dūrśa & dūṣya] woven material, cloth, turban cloth; (upper) garment, clothes Vin i.290; ii.128, 174; iv.159. D i.103; S v.71; M i.215; ii.92; A v.347; Sn 679; Pv i.103 ( = uttarīyaŋ sāṭakaŋ PvA 49); ii.314; Pug 55; PvA 73, 75. -- cīvara˚, q. v.; chava˚ a miserable garment D i.166; A i.295; ii.206; M i.78, 308.

-- karaṇḍaka a clothes -- chest S v.71 = M i.215; A iv.230; -- koṭṭhagāra a store -- room for cloth or clothes DhA i.220, 393; -- gahaṇa ( -- mangala) (the ceremony of) putting on a garment DhA ii.87; -- cālanī a cloth sieve Vin i.202; -- paṭṭa turban cloth Vin ii.266 (=setavattha -- paṭṭa Bdhgh.); S ii.102; -- phala having clothes as fruit (of magic trees, cp. kapparukkha) Vv 462 (cp. VvA 199); -- maya consisting in clothes Vv 467 (cp. VvA 199); -- yuga a suit of garments Vin i.278; M i.215=S v.71; Miln 31 (cp. M Vastu i.61); DhA iv.11; -- ratana "a pearl of a garment," a fine garment Miln 262. -- vaṭṭi fringed cotton cloth Vin ii.266. -- veṇi plaited cotton cloth Vin ii.266. Dussa
Dussa2
at J iii.54 is usually taken as = amussa (cp. amuka). C. expls as "near," & adds "asammussa." Or is it Sk. dūṣya easily spoilt? See on this passage Andersen Pali Reader ii.124. Dussaka
Dussaka
= dūsaka (q. v.). Dussati
Dussati
[Sk. duṣyati, Denom. fr. pref. duḥ (du˚); pp. duṣṭha, caus. dūṣayati] to be or become bad or cor. rupted, to get damaged; to offend against, to do wrong Vin ii.113; S i.13 = 164; Dh 125=PvA 116; Dh 137; It 84 (dosancyye na d.) cp. A iii.110 (dussanīye d.); J vi.9; Miln 101, 386. -- pp. duṭṭha (q. v.). -- Caus. dūseti (q. v.). See also dosa1 & dosaniya; & pa˚. -- 328 -- Dussanā
Dussanā
(f.) & Dussana (nt.) [Sk. dūṣana, cp. dussati] defilement, guilt A ii.225; Pug 18, 22; Dhs 418, 1060; DA i.195 (rajjana -- d. muyhana). Dussanīya
Dussanīya
(adj.) [cp. Sk. dveṣanīya, because of doṣa = dveṣa taken to dus] able to give offence, hateful, evil (always combd with rajanīya, cp. rāga dosa moha) A iii.110 (dusanīye dussati, where It 84 has dosaneyye); J vi.9; Miln 386. Dussassa
Dussassa
see sassa. Dussika
Dussika
a cloth merchant J vi.276; Miln 262, 331 sq. Dussitatta
Dussitatta
(nt.) [Sk. *dūṣitatva] = dussanā, Pug 18, 22. Duha
Duha
(adj. -- ˚.) [Sk. duh & duha; see dohati] milking; yielding, granting, bestowing: kāma˚ giving pleasures J iv.20; v.33. Duhati
Duhati
(to milk) see dohati. Duhana
Duhana
(adj. -- n.) [Sk. *druhana, to druh, druhyati to hurt, cp. Oir. droch; Ohg. triogan to deceive, traum = dream; also Sk. dhvarati. For further connections see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under fraus] one who injures, hurts or deceives; insidious, infesting; a robber, only in pantha˚ a dacoit D i.135; DA i.296. -- (nt.) waylaying, robbery (pantha˚) J ii.281 (text dūhana), 388 (text: panthadūbhana, vv. ll. duhana & dūhana); DhsA 220. -- Cp. maggadūsin. Duhitika
Duhitika
(adj.) [cp. Sk. druha, fr. druhyati] infested with robbers, beset with dangers S iv.195 (magga). -> Note. This interpretation may have to be abandoned in favour of duhitika being another spelling of dvīhitika = hard to get through (q. v.), to be compared are the vv. ll. of the latter at S iv.323 (S.S. dūhitika & dūhītika). Dūta
Dūta1
[Ved. dūta, prob. to dūra (q. v.) as "one who is sent (far) away," also perhaps Gr. dou = los slave. See Walde, Lat. Wtb. under dudum] a messenger, envoy Vin i.16; ii.32, 277; D i.150; S iv.194; Sn 411 (rāja˚), 417. -> deva˚ Yama's envoy, Death's messenger A i.138, 142; M ii.75 sq.; J i.138. -- ˚ŋ pāheti to send a messenger Miln 18, PvA 133. Dūta
Dūta2
(nt.) [Sk. dyūta, see jūta] play, gaming, gambling J iv.248. Dūteyya
Dūteyya
(nt.) [Sk. dūtya, but varying in meaning] errand, commission, messages A iv.196; J iii.134; DA i.78.-> ˚ŋ gacchati to go on an errand Vin ii.202; ˚ŋ harati to obtain a commission Vin iii.87; iv.23.

-- kamma doing a messenger's duty Vin i.359; -- pahiṇagamana sending & going on messages D i.5 = M iii.34; A ii.209; M i.180. Dūbha
Dūbha
(adj.) deceiving, see dubbha. Dūbhaka
Dūbhaka1
(adj.) [Sk. dambhaka] deceiving, treacherous, harmful SnA 287 (mitta˚); f. ˚ikā J ii.297. Dūbhaka
Dūbhaka2
[Sk. dambha, cp. dambholi] a diamond J i.363 = iii.207. Dūbhana
Dūbhana
(nt.) deceiving, pillaging, robbing etc. at J ii.388 is to be read as (pantha -- ) duhana. Dūbhin
Dūbhin
(adj.) -- dubbhin J ii.180 (vv. ll. dūbha & dubbhi), 327; iv.257; DhA ii.23. Dūbhī
Dūbhī
(f.) [cp. Sk. dambha, see dubbhati] perfidy, treachery, J i.412; iv.57 (v. l. dubhī); vi.59 ( = aparādha). Dūra
Dūra
(adj.) [Sk. dūra, Ved. duva (stirring, urging on), compar. davīyān, Av. dūrō (far), *dāu; cp. Ohg. zawen, Goth. taujan = E. do. Another form is *deṷā, far in respect to time, as in Gr. dh/n, dhro/n, Lat. dū -- dum (cp. dū -- rare= en -- dure). See also dutiya & dūta] far, distant, remote, opp. āsanna (J ii.154) or santika (Dhs 677; Vism 402). -- PvA 117. Often in cpds. (see below), also as dūri˚, e. g. dūri -- bhāva distance Vism 71, 377; DhsA 76. -- Cases mostly used adverbially, viz. acc. dūraŋ far J ii.154; DhA i.192. -- abl. dūrato from afar, aloof Vin i.15; ii.195; S i.212; Sn 511; Dh 219; J v.78 (dūra -- dūrato); Miln 23; PvA 107. dūrato karoti to keep aloof from PvA 17. -- loc. dūre at a distance, also as prep. away from, far from (c. abl.), e. g. Sn 468; J ii.155, 449 (=ārā); iii.189. -- Sn 772; Dh 304; J vi.364; Dhs 677. -- dūre -- pātin one who shoots far [cp. Sk. dūra -- pātin] A i.284; ii.170, 202. J iv.494. See also akkhaṇavedhin. -- atidūre too far Vin ii.215.

-- kantana at Th 1, 1123: the correct reading seems to be the v. l. durākantana, see ākantana; -- gata gone far away Pv ii.134 ( = paralokagata PvA 164); DhA iii.377 (durā˚). -- (ŋ)gama far -- going, going here & there Dh 37 (cp. DhA i.304); Pv ii.910; -- ghuṭṭha farrenowned Pv ii.82; -- vihāra ( -- vuttin) living far away Sn 220. Dūrakkha
Dūrakkha
[du1+rakkha] see rakkha & cp. du1. Dūratta
Dūratta
(adj.) [du1+ratta] reddish M i.36 (˚vaṇṇa). Dūsaka
Dūsaka
(adj. -- n.) [Sk. dūṣaka] corrupting, disgracing, one who defiles or defames; a robber, rebel A v.71 (bhikkhunī˚); J ii.270; iv.495; Sn 89 (kula˚ one who spoils the reputation of the clan); DhA ii.23 (kuṭi˚ an incendiary); Miln 20 (pantha˚). As dussaka at J v.113 (kamma˚); Sn A 287 (mitta˚, v. l. B. for dūbhaka). -- panthadūsaka a highwayman Miln 290. -- f. dūsikā J iii.179 (also as dūsiyā = dosakārikā); a˚ harmless Sn 312 (see a˚). Dūsana
Dūsana
(nt.) [see dūseti] spoiling, defiling J ii.270; Sdhp 453. Dūsita
Dūsita
[Sk. dūṣita, pp. of dūseti] depraved, sinful, evil PvA 226 (˚citta). Dūsin
Dūsin
(adj. -- n.) [Sk. dūṣin] = dūsạka, in magga˚ (cp. pantha -- dusaka) a highway robber Sn 84 sq Dūseti
Dūseti
[Sk. dūṣayati, caus. of dussati (q. v.). Also as dusseti PvA 82] to spoil, ruin; to injure, hurt; to defile, pollute, defame Vin i.79, 85, 86; iv.212 (maŋ so dūsetukāmo, said by a bhikkhunī), 316 (dūsetuŋ); A iv.169 sq.; J i.454; ii.270; DhA ii.22 (kuṭiŋ, damage, destroy). -- aor. dūsayi J ii.110 (fared ill). -- pp. dūsita. Cp. pa˚, pari˚. Dūhana
Dūhana1
(nt.) [see duhana] infesting, polluting, defaming; robbing, only in pantha˚ (with v. l. duhana) waylaying J ii.281, 388; Tikp 280. Dūhana
Dūhana2
(nt.) [Sk. dohana, see dohati] milking ( -- ˚), in kumbha˚ filling the pails with milk, i. e. giving much milk (gāvo; cp. Sk. droṇadughā a cow which yields much milk) Sn 309. Dūhitika
Dūhitika
see duhitika. Dejjha
Dejjha
( = dvejjha, see dvi B i.5] divided, in a˚ undivided- ness J iii.7 (com. abhejja), 274=iv.258 (dhanuŋ a ˚ŋ karoti to get the bow ready, v. l. BB. sarejjhaŋ C. expld jiyāya ca sarena ca saddhiŋ ekam eva katvā). Deḍḍubha
Deḍḍubha
[Sk. duṇḍubha] a water -- snake; salamander J iii.16; vi.194; Sdhp 292. See next. Deḍḍubhaka
Deḍḍubhaka
1. a sort of snake (see prec.) J i.361. -- 2. a kind of girdle (in the form of a snake's head) Vin ii.136 (expld by udaka -- sappi -- sira -- sadisa). -- 329 -- Deṇḍima
Deṇḍima
(m. nt.) [Sk. diṇḍima, cp. dindima] a kind of kettle -- drum D i.79 (v. l. dindima); Nd2 219 (˚ka, v. l. dind˚); J i.355; ( = paṭaha -- bheri); v.322= vi.217; vi.465=580. Depiccha
Depiccha
(adj.) [ = dvepiccha, see dvi B I. 5] having two tail -- feathers J v.339. Deyya
Deyya
(adj.) [Sk. deya, grd. of dā, see dadāti I. 2, b] (a) to be given (see below). -- (b) deserving a gift, worthy of receiving alms J iii.12 (a˚); Miln 87 (rāja˚) -- nt. a gift, offering Vin i.298 (saddhā˚).

-- dhamma a gift, lit. that which has the quality of being given; esp. a gift of mercy, meritorious gift S i.175; A i.150, 166; ii.264 (saddhā˚); Pv i.11; ii.318; PvA 5, 7 sq., 26, 92 (˚bīja), 103, 129; cp. AvŚ i.308. The deyyadhamma (set of gifts, that which it is or should be a rule to give) to mendicants, consists of 14 items, which are (as enumd at Nd2 523 under the old Brahman's term yañña "sacrifice") (1) cīvara, (2) piṇḍapāta, (3) senāsana, (4) gilāna -- paccaya -- bhesajja -- parikkhāra, (5) anna, (6) pāna, (7) vattha, (8) yāna, (9) mālā, (10) gandhā, (11) vilepana, (12) seyya, (13) āvasatha, (14) padīpeyya. A similar enumn in diff. order is found at Nd1 373. Deva
Deva
[Ved. deva, Idg. *dei̯ā to shine (see dibba & diva), orig. adj. *deiṷos belonging to the sky, cp. Av. daēvō (demon.), Lat. deus, Lith. dë̃vas; Ohg. & slashedZ;īo; Ags. Tīg, gen. Tīwes ( = Tuesday); Oir. dia (god). The popular etymology refers it to the root div in the sense of playing, sporting or amusing oneself: dibbanti ti devā, pañcahi kāmaguṇehi kīḷanti attano vā siriyā jotantī ti attho KhA 123] a god, a divine being; usually in pl. devā the gods. As title attributed to any superhuman being or beings regarded to be in certain respects above the human level. Thus primarily (see 1a) used of the first of the next -- world devas, Sakka, then also of subordinate deities, demons & spirits (devaññatarā some kind of deity; snake -- demons: nāgas, tree -- gods: rukkhadevatā etc.). Also title of the king (3). Always implying splendour (cp. above etym.) & mobility, beauty, goodness & light, & as such opposed to the dark powers of mischief & destruction (asurā: Titans; petā: miserable ghosts; nerayikā sattā: beings in Niraya). A double position (dark & light) is occupied by Yama, the god of the Dead (see Yama & below 1 c). Always implying also a kinship and continuity of life with humanity and other beings; all devas have been man and may again become men (cp. D i.17 sq.; S iii.85), hence "gods" is not a coincident term. All devas are themselves in saŋsāra, needing salvation. Many are found worshipping saints (Th i.627 -- 9; Th ii.365). -- The collective appellations differ; there are var. groups of divine beings, which in their totality (cp. tāvatiŋsa) include some or most of the well -- known Vedic deities. Thus some collect. designations are devā sa -- indakā (the gods, including Indra or with their ruler at their head: D ii.208; S iii.90, A v.325), sa -- pajāpatikā (S iii.90), sa -- mārakā (see deva -- manussaloka), sa -- brahmakā (S iii.90). See below 1 b. Lists of popular gods are to be found, e. g. at D ii.253; iii.194. -- A current distinction dating from the latest books in the canon is that into 3 classes, viz. sammuti -- devā (conventional gods, gods in the public opinion, i. e. kings & princes J i.132; DA i.174), visuddhi˚ (beings divine by purity, i. e. of great religious merit or attainment like Arahants & Buddhas), & upapatti˚ (being born divine, i. e. in a heavenly state as one of the gatis, like bhumma -- devā etc.). This division in detail at Nd2 307; Vbh 422; KhA 123; VvA 18. Under the 3rd category (upapatti˚) seven groups are enumerated in the foll. order: Cātummahārājikā devā, Tāvatiŋsā d. (with Sakka as chief), Yāmā d., Tusitā d., Nimmānaratī d., Paranimmita -- vasavattī d., Bṛahmakāyikā d. Thus at D i.216 sq.; A i.210, 332 sq.; Nd2 307; cp. S i.133 & J i.48. See also devatā.

1. good etc. -- (a) sg. a god, a deity or divine being, M i.71 (d. vā Māro vā Brahmā vā); S iv.180 = A iv.461 (devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā ti: I shall become a god or some one or other of the (subordinate gods, angels); Sn 1024 (ko nu devo vā Brahmā vā Indo vāpi Sujampati); Dh 105 (+gandhabba, Māra, Brahmā); A ii.91, 92 (puggalo devo hoti devaparivāro etc.); PvA 16 (yakkho vā devo vā). -- (b) pl. devā gods. These inhabit the 26 devalokas one of which is under the rule of Sakka, as is implied by his appellation S. devānaŋ indo (his opponent is Vepacitti Asur -- indo S i.222) S i.216 sq.; iv.101, 269; A i.144; Sn 346; PvA 22 etc. -- Var. kinds are e. g. appamāṇ' -- ābhā (opp. paritt' ābhā) M iii.147; ābhassarā D i.17; Dh 200; khiḍḍāpadosikā D i.19; gandhabba -- kāyikā S iii.250 sq.; cattāro mahārājikā S v.409, 423; Jat i.48; Pv iv.111; PvA 17, 272; naradevā tidasā S i.5; bhummā PvA 5; manāpa -- kāyikā A iv.265 sq.; mano -- padosikā D i.20; valāhaka -- kāyikā S iii.254. -- Var. attributes of the Devas are e. g. āyuppamāṇā A i.267; ii.126 sq.; iv.252 sq.; dīghāyukā S iii.86; A ii.33; rūpino manomayā M i.410, etc. etc. -- See further in general: D i.54 (satta devā); ii.14, 157, 208; S v.475=A i.37; Sn 258 (+manussā), 310 (id.); 404, 679; Dh 30, 56, 94, 230, 366; Ps i.83 sq.; ii.149; Vbh 86, 395, 412 sq.; Nett 23; Sdhp 240. -- (c) deva=Yama see deva -- dūta (expld at J i.139: devo ti maccu). -- atideva a pre -- eminent god, god above gods (Ep. of the Buddha) Nd2 307; DhsA 2 etc.; see under cpds. -- 2. the sky, but only in its rainy aspect, i. e. rain -- cloud, rainy sky, rain -- god (cp. Jupiter Pluvius; K.S. i.40, n. 2 on Pajjunna, a Catumahārājika), usually in phrase deve vassante (when it rains etc.), or devo vassati (it rains) D i.74 (: devo ti megho DA i.218); S i.65, 154 (cp. It 66 megha); Sn 18, 30; J v.201; DhA ii.58, 82; PvA 139. devo ekam ekam phusāyati the cloud rains drop by drop, i. e. lightly S i.104 sq., 154, 184; iv.289. -- thulla -- phusitake deve vassante when the sky was shedding big drops of rain S iii.141; v.396; A i.243; ii.140; v.114; Vism 259. -- vigata -- valāhake deve when the rain -- clouds have passed S i.65; M ii.34, 42. -- 3. king, usually in voc. deva, king! Vin i.272; iii.43; A ii.57; J i.150, 307; PvA 4, 74 etc.

devī (f.) 1. goddess, of Petīs, Yakkhiṇīs etc.; see etym. expl. at VvA 18. -- Pv ii.112; Vv 13 etc. -- 2. queen Vin i.82 (Rahulamātā), 272; D ii.14; A ii.57, 202 (Mallikā) J i.50 (Māyā); iii.188; PvA 19, 75.

-- accharā a divine Apsarā, a heavenly joy -- maiden Vism 531; PvA 46, 279; -- aññatara, in phrase devo vā d. vā, a god or one of the retinue of a god S iv.180 = A iv.461; PvA 16; -- âtideva god of gods, i. e. divine beyond all divinities, a super -- deva, of Buddha Nd2 307 & on Sn 1134; J iv.158=DhA i.147; Vv 6427; VvA 18; Miln 241, 258, 368, 384 & passim; cp. M Vastu i.106, 257, 283, 291; -- attabhāva a divine condition, state of a god PvA 14; -- ânubhāva divine majesty or power D ii.12; M iii.120; J i.59; -- āsana a seat in heaven It 76; -- âsurasangāma the fight between the Gods & the Titans D ii.285; S i.222; iv.201; v.447; M i.253; A iv:432 (at all passages in identical phrase); -- iddhi divine power Vv 313; VvA 7; -- isi a divine Seer Sn 1116; Nd2 310; -- ûpapatti rebirth among the gods PvA 6; -- orohaṇa descent of the gods DhA iii.443; -- kaññā a celestial maiden, a nymph S i.200; J i.61; VvA 37, 78; -- kāya a particular group of gods S i.200; It 77; Th 2, 31; -- kuñjara "elephant of the gods," of Indra J v.158; -- kumāra son of a god (cp. ˚putta) J iii.391; -- gaṇa a troop of gods J i.203; DhA iii.441; -- gaha a temple, chapel Vin iii.43; -- cārikā a visit to the gods, journeying in the devaloka VvA 3, 7, 165 etc.; -- ṭṭhāna heavenly seat J iii.55; a temple, sacred place Miln 91, 330; -- dattika given or granted by a god, extraordinary PvA 145; -- dattiya= ˚dattika J iii.37; DhA i.278; -- dāruka a species of pine J v.420; -- dundubhi the celestial drum, i. e. thunder D i.10; Miln 178; DA i.95; -- dūta the god's (i. e. Yama's see above 1˚) messenger A i.138, 142; M ii.75; iii.179; J i.138; DhA i.85 (tayo d.); Mhbv. 122 (˚suttanta); -- deva "the god of gods," Ep. of the Buddha (cp. devâtideva) Th 1, 533, 1278 (of Kappāyana); DhsA 1; PvA 140; -- dhamma that which is divine or a god A iii.277 (˚ika); DhA iii.74; -- dhītā a female deva or angel (cp. devaputta), lit. daughter of a god J ii.57; VvA 137, 153 (with ref. to Vimānapetīs); -- nagara the city of the Devas, heaven J i.168, 202; DhA i.280; -- nikāya a class, community or group of gods, celestial state or condition D ii.261 (sixty enumd); S iv.180; M i.102 sq.; A i.63 sq.; ii.185; iii.249 sq.; iv.55; v.18; -- pañha questioning a god, using an oracle D i.11 (=DA i.97: devadāsiyā sarīre devataŋ otāretvā pañha -- pucchanaŋ); -- parivāra a retinue of gods A ii.91; -- parisā the assembly of gods A ii.185; Tikp 241. -- putta "son of a god," a demi -- god, a ministering god (cp. f. deva -- dhītā), usually of Yakkhas, but also appld to the 4 archangels having charge of the higher world of the Yāmā devā (viz. Suyāma devaputta); the Tusitā d. (Santusita d.); the Nimmānaratī d. (Sunimmita d.); & the Paranimmitavasavattī d. (Vasavattī d.) D i.217 sq.; cp. J i.48. -- D ii.12, 14; S i.46 sq.; 216 sq.; iv.280; A i.278; It 76; J i.59 (jarā -- jajjara); iv.100 (Dhamma d.); vi.239 (Java d.); PvA 6, 9, 55, 92, 113 (Yakkho ti devaputto); Miln 23; -- pura the city of the gods, heaven S iv.202; Vv 6430 (= Sudassana -- mahānagara VvA 285); J iv.143; -- bhava celestial existence PvA 167; -- bhoga the wealth of the gods PvA 97; -- manussā (pl.) gods & men D i.46, 62≈, 99 (˚mānuse); M ii.38, 55; Sn 14 (sa˚), 236 (˚pūjita), 521; It 80 (˚seṭṭhā); Kh viii.10; KhA 196; PvA 17, 31, 117; -- ˚loka the world of gods and men. It comprises (1) the world of gods proper (Devas, i. e. Sakka, Māra & Brahmā; corresp. to sammuti -- devā, see above); (2) samaṇas & brāhmaṇas (cp. visuddhi -- devā); (3) gods & men under the human aspect (gati, cp. upapatti -- devā): Sn 1047, 1063; expl. at Nd2 309 & (with diff. interpretations) DA i.174 sq.; -- yāna leading to the (world of) the gods, i. e. the road to heaven Sn 139, also in ˚yāniya (magga) D i.215; -- rājā king of the devas, viz. Sakka Nd1 177; J iii.392 (=devinda); DhA iii.441; PvA 62; -- rūpa divine appearance or form PvA 92; -- loka the particular sphere of any devas, the seat of the devas, heaven; there exist 26 such spheres or heavens (see loka); when 2 are mentioned it refers to Sakka's & Brahma's heavens. A seat in a devaloka is in saŋsāra attained by extraordinary merit: Dh 177; J i.202, 203; iv.273; ThA 74; KhA 228; PvA 5, 9, 21, 66, 81, 89; Vism 415, etc.; -- vimāna the palace of a deva J i.58; VvA 173; -- sankhalikā a magic chain J ii.128; v.92, 94; -- sadda heavenly sound or talk among the devas It 75 (three such sounds). -- 330 -- Devaka
Devaka
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [deva+ka] belonging or peculiar to the devas; only in sa˚ -- loka the world including the gods in general D i.62; Nd2 309; Sn 86 377, 443, 760 etc.; Miln 234. See also devamanussa -- loka. Devata
Devata
(adj.) ( -- ˚) having such & such a god as one's special divinity, worshipping, a worshipper of, devotee of Miln 234 (Brahma˚+Brahma (garuka). -- f. devatā in pati˚ "worshipping the husband," i. e. a devoted wife J iii.406; VvA 128. Devatā
Devatā
(f.) [deva+tā, qualitative -- abstr. suffix, like Lat. juventa, senecta, Goth. hauhipa, Ohg. fullida cp. Sk. pūrṇatā, bandhutā etc.] "condition or state of a deva," divinity; divine being, deity, fairy. The term comprises all beings which are otherwise styled devas, & a list of them given at Nd2 308 & based on the principle that any being who is worshipped (or to whom an offering is made or a gift given: de -- vatā = yesaŋ deti, as is expressed in the conclusion "ye yesaŋ dakkhiṇeyyā te tesaŋ devatā") is a devatā, comprises 5 groups of 5 kinds each, viz. (1) ascetics; (2) domestic animals (elephants, horses, cows, cocks, crows); (3) physical forces & elements (fire, stone etc.); (4) lower gods (: bhumma devā) (nāgā, suvaṇṇā, yakkhā, asurā, gandhabbā); (5) higher gods (: inhabitants of the devaloka proper) Mahārājā, Canda, Suriya, Inda, Brahmā), to which are added the 2 aspects of the sky -- god as devadevatā & disā -- devatā). -- Another definition at VvA 21 simply states: devatā ti devaputto pi Brahmā pi devadhītā pi vuccati. -- Among the var. deities the foll. are frequently mentioned: rukkha˚ tree -- gods or dryads M i.306; J i.221; PvA 5; vatthu˚ earth gods (the four kings) Pv 41; PvA 17; vana˚ wood -- nymphs M i.306; samudda˚ water -- sprites J ii.112 etc. etc. -> D i.180 (mahiddhikā, pl.), 192; ii.8, 87, 139, 158; S i. sq.; iv.302; M i.245; ii.37; A i.64, 210, 211; ii.70 (sapubba˚); iii.77 (bali -- paṭiggāhikā), 287 (saddhāya samannāgatā); 309; iv.302 sq., 390 (vippaṭisāriniyo); v.331; Sn 45, 316, 458, 995, 1043; Dh 99; J i.59, 72, 223, 256; iv.17, 474; Vv 163; Pv ii.110; KhA 113, 117; PvA 44.

-- ânubhāva divine power or majesty J i.168; -- ânussati "remembrance of the gods," one of the 6 ânussatiṭṭhānāni, or subjects to be kept in mind D iii.250, 280, cp. A i.211; Vism 197. -- uposatha a day of devotion to the gods A i.211; -- paribhoga fit to be enjoyed by gods J ii.104; -- bali an offering to the gods A ii.68; -- bhāva at PvA 110 read as devattabhāva (opp. petattabhāva). Devati
Devati
[div] to lament, etc.; see pari˚. Cp. also parideva etc. Devatta
Devatta
(nt.) [deva+tta] the state of being a deva, divinity ThA 70; PvA 110 (˚bhāva as Yakkha, opp. petatta bhāva; so read for devatā -- bhāva). Devattana
Devattana
(nt.) [ = last] state or condition of a deva Th 1, 1127; cp. petattana in the foll. verse. Devara
Devara
[Sk. devṛ & devara Gr. da_h/r (*daivh/r), Lat. levir, Ohg. zeihhur, Ags. tācor] husband's brother, brother-in-law J vi.152; Vv 326 (sa˚), popularly expld at VvA 135 as "dutiyo varo ti vā devaro, bhattu kaniṭṭha bhātā." Devasika
Devasika
(adj.) [Der. fr. divasa] daily J v.383; DA i.296 (˚bhatta = bhattavetena); DhA i.187 sq., -- nt. ˚ŋ as adv. daily, every day J i.82, J i.149, 186; VvA 67, 75; DhA i.28; ii.41. Desa
Desa
[Ved. deśa, cp. disā] point, part, place, region, spot, country, Vin i.46; ii.211; M i.437; J i.308; DhsA 307 (˚bhūta); PvA 78 (˚antara prob. to be read dos˚), 153; KhA 132, 227. -- desaŋ karoti to go abroad J v.340 (p. 342 has disaŋ). -- kañcid -- eva desaŋ pucchati to ask a little point D i.51; M i.229; A v.39, sometimes as kiñcid -- eva d. p. S iii.101; M iii.15; v. l. at D i.51. -- desāgata pañha a question propounded, lit. come into the region of some one or having become a point of discussion Miln 262. Desaka
Desaka
(adj.) [Sk. deśaka] pointing out, teaching, advising Sdhp 217, 519 -- (nt.) advice, instruction, lesson M i.438. Desanā
Desanā
(f.) [Sk. deśanā] 1. discourse, instruction, lesson S v.83, 108; J iii.84; Pug 28; Nett 38; Vism 523 sq. (regarding Paṭiccasamuppāda); PvA 1, 2, 9, 11; Sdhp 213. 2. Freq. in dhamma˚ moral instruction, exposition of the Dhamma, preaching, sermon Vin i.16; A i.53; ii.182; iv.337 sq.; It 33; J i.106 etc. (a˚ gāminī āpatti), a Pārājika or Sanghādisesa offence Vin ii.3, 87; v.187. Cp. Vin. Texts ii.33. -- 3. (legal) acknowledgment Miln 344. -- Cp. ā˚.

-- avasāne (loc.) at the end of an instruction discourse or sermon DhA iii.175; PvA 54; -- pariyosāne = proc. PvA 9, 31 etc. -- vilāsa beauty of instruction Vism 524; Tikapaṭṭhāna 21. -- 331 -- Desika
Desika
(adj.) [Sk. deśika] = desaka, su˚ one who points out well, a good teacher Miln 195. Desita
Desita
[pp. of deseti] expounded, shown, taught etc., given, assigned, conferred Vin iii.152 (marked out); v.137; D ii.154 (dhamma); Dh 285 (nibbāna); PvA 4 (magga: indicated), 54 (given). Desetar
Desetar
[n. ag. to deseti] one who instructs or points out; a guide, instructor, teacher M i.221, 249; A i.266; iii.441; v.349. Deseti
Deseti
[Sk. deśayati, Caus. of disati, q. v.] to point out, indicate, show; set forth, preach, teach; confess. Very freq. in phrase dhammaŋ d. to deliver a moral discourse, to preach the Dhamma Vin i.15; ii.87, 188; v.125, 136; D i.241, A ii.185, v.194; It 111; J i.168; iii.394; Pug 57; PvA 6. -- aor. adesesi (S i.196 = Th 1 1254) & desesi (PvA 2, 12, 78 etc.) -- pp. desita (q. v.). Dessa & Dessiya
Dessa
& Dessiya (adj.) [Sk. dveṣya, to dvis, see disa] dis- agreeable, odious, detestable J i.46; ii.285; iv.406; vi.570, ThA 268, Miln 281. Dessati
Dessati
[Sk. dviṣati & dveṣṭi; see etym. under disa] to hate, dislike, detest SnA 168 ( = na piheti, opp. kāmeti). Dessatā
Dessatā
(f.) [Sk. dvesyatā] repulsiveness Miln 281. Dessin
Dessin
(adj.) [Sk. dveṣin] hating, detesting Sn 92 (dham- ma˚); better desin, cp. viddesin. Deha
Deha
[Sk. deha to *dheigh to form, knead, heap up (cp. kāya = heap), see diddha. So also in uddehaka. Cp. Kern, Toev. p. 75 s. v. sarīradeha. Cp. Gr. tei_xos (wall)=Sk. dehī; Lat. fingo & figura; Goth. deigan (knead)=Ohg. teig=E. dough] body A ii.18; PvA 10, 122. Usually in foll. phrases: hitvā mānusaŋ dehaŋ S i.60; Pv ii.956; pahāya m. d. S i.27, 30; jahati d. M ii.73; ˚ŋ nikkhipati Pv ii.615; (muni or khīṇāsavo) antima -- deha -- dhārin (˚dhāro) S i.14, 53; ii.278; Sn 471; Th ii.7, 10; It 32, 40, 50, 53. ˚nikkhepana laying down the body Vism 236. Dehaka
Dehaka
(nt.) = deha; pl. limbs Th 2, 392; cp. ThA 258. Dehin
Dehin
(adj. -- n.) that which has a body, a creature Pgdp 12, 16. Doṇa
Doṇa
[Sk. droṇa (nt.) conn. with *dereṷo tree, wood, wooden, see dabbi & dāru & cp. Sk. druṇī pail] a wooden pail, vat, trough; usually as measure of capacity (4 Āḷhaka generally) Pv iv.333 (mitāni sukhadukkhāni donehi piṭakehi). taṇḍula˚ a doṇa of rice DhA iii.264; iv.15. At J ii.367 doṇa is used elliptically for doṇamāpaka (see below).

-- pāka of which a d. full is cooked, a doṇa measure of food S i.81; DhA ii.8. -- māpaka (mahāmatta) (a higher official) supervising the measuring of the doṇa -- revenue (of rice) J ii.367, 378, 381; DhA iv.88; -- mita a d. measure full D i.54; M i.518. Doṇika
Doṇika
(adj.) [fr. doṇa] measuring a doṇa in capacity Vin i.240 (catu˚ piṭaka). Doṇikā
Doṇikā
(f.) = donī1, viz. a hollow wooden vessel, tub, vat Vin i.286 (rajana˚ for dyeing); ii.120 (mattikā to hold clay) 220 (udaka˚), 221 (vacca˚ used for purposes of defaecation). See also passāva˚. Donī
Donī1
(f.) [Sk. droṇī, see doṇa] 1. a (wooden) trough, a vat, tub S ii.259; A i.253; v.323; J i.450; Miln 56. -- tela˚ an oil vat A iii.58 (āyasā made of iron & used as a sarcophagus). -- 2. a trough -- shaped canoe (cp. Marāthi ḍon "a long flat -- bottomed boat made of unḍi wood," & Kanarese ḍoni "a canoe hallowed from a log"] J iv.163 ( = gambhīrā mahānāvā p. 164); PvA 189. -- 3. a hollow, dug in the ground Miln 397. -- 4. the body of a lute, the sounding -- board (?)] i.450; Miln 53; VvA 281. Doṇī
Doṇī2
(f.) [Sk. droṇi?] an oil -- giving plant (?) (or is it = donī1 meaning a cake made in a tub, but wrongly interpreted by Dhammapāla?) only in -- nimmiñjana oil -- cake Pv i.1010; as ˚nimmijjani at Vv 3338; expld by telamiñjaka at PvA 51 & by tilapiññāka at VvA 147. Dobbhagga
Dobbhagga
(nt.) [Sk. daurbhāgya fr. duḥ+bhāga] ill luck, misfortune Vin iv.277; DhA 281 (text: ˚dobhagga). Dobha
Dobha
[see dubbha] fraud, cheating D ii.243 (v. l. dobbha = dubbha). Domanassa
Domanassa
(nt.) [Sk. daurmanasya, duḥ+manas] dis- tress, dejectedness, melancholy, grief. As mental pain (cetasikaŋ asātaŋ cet. dukkhaŋ S v.209 = Nd2 312; cp. D ii.306; Nett 12) opp. to dukkha physical pain: see dukkha B III. 1 a). A synonym of domanassaŋ is appaccaya (q. v.). For defn of the term see Vism 461, 504. The freq. combn dukkha -- domanassa refers to an unpleasant state of mind & body (see dukkha B III. 1 b; e. g. S iv.198; v.141; M ii.64; A i.157; It 89 etc.), the contrary of somanassaŋ with which dom˚ is combd to denote "happiness & unhappiness," joy & dejection, e. g. D iii.270; M ii.16; A i.163; Sn 67 (see somanassa). -- Vin i.34; D ii.278, 306; S iv.104, 188; v.349, 451; M i.48, 65, 313, 340; ii.51; iii.218; A i.39 (abhijjhā˚ covetousness & dejection, see abhijjhā); ii.5, 149 sq.; iii.99, 207; v.216 sq.; Sn 592, 1106; Pug 20, 59; Nett 12, 29 (citta -- sampīḷanaŋ d.) 53, Dhs 413, 421, 1389; Vbh 15, 54, 71, 138 sq.; Dh i.121.

-- indriya the faculty or disposition to feel grief D iii.239 (+som˚); S v.209 sq.; -- upavicāra discrimination of that which gives distress of mind D iii.245; -- patta dejected, disappointed J ii.155. Dolā
Dolā
(f.) [Sk. dolā, *del as in Ags. tealtian = E. tilt, adj. tealt unstable=Sk. dulā iṣṭakā an unstable woman] a swing J iv.283; vi.341; Vism 280 (in simile). Dolāyati
Dolāyati
[Denom. of dolā] to swing, to move to & fro J ii.385. Dovacassa
Dovacassa
(nt.) [contamination of Sk. *daurvacasya evil speech & *daurvratya disobedience, defiance] unruliness, indocility, bad conduct, fractiousness S ii.204 sq. (˚karaṇā dhammā); M i.95 (id. specified); A ii.147; iii.178; Nett 40, 127. Dovacassatā
Dovacassatā
(f.) [2nd abstr. of dovacassa] unruliness, con- tumacy, stubbornness, obstinacy A i.83, iii.310, 448; v.146 sq.; D iii.212, 274; Pug 20; Dhs 1326 (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 344); Vbh 359, 369, 371. Dovacassiya
Dovacassiya
(nt.) = dovacassa Pug 20; Dhs 1325. Dovārika
Dovārika
[cp. Sk. dauvārika, see dvāra] gatekeeper, janitor Vin i.269; D ii.83; iii.64 sq., 100; S iv.194; M i.380 sq.; A iv.107, 110; v.194; J ii.132; iv.382 (two by name, viz. Upajotiya & Bhaṇḍa -- kucchi), 447; vi.367; Miln 234, 332; Vism 281; Sdhp 356. Dovila
Dovila
(adj.) [Sk.?] being in the state of fructification, budding J vi.529 (cp. p. 530); Miln 334. Dosa
Dosa1
[Sk. doṣa to an Idg. *deu(s) to want, to be inferior etc. (cp. dussati), as in Gr. de/omai, deu/omai] corruption, blemish, fault, bad condition, defect; depravity, corrupted state; usually -- ˚, as khetta˚ blight of the field Miln 360; tiṇa˚ spoilt by weeds Dh 356; PvA 7; visa˚ ill effect of poison Th 1, 758, 768; sneha˚ blemish of sensual affection Sn 66. Four kasiṇa -- dosā at Vism 123; eighteen making a Vihāra unsuitable at Vism 118 sq. -- J ii.417; iii.104; Miln 330 (sabba -- d. -- virahita faultless); DA i.37, 141. -- pl. dosā the (three) morbid affections, or disorder of the (3) humours Miln 43; adj. with disturbed humours Miln 172, cp. DA i.133. -- 332 -- Dosa
Dosa2
[Sk. dveṣa, but very often not distinct in meaning from dosa1. On dveṣa see under disa] anger, ill -- will, evil intention, wickedness, corruption, malice, hatred. In most freq. combn of either rāga (lust) d. & moha (delusion), or lobha (greed) d. moha (see rāga & lobha), to denote the 3 main blemishes of character. For defn see Vism 295 & 470. Interpreted at Nd2 313 as "cittassa āghāto paṭighāto paṭigho . . . kopo . . . kodho . . . vyāpatti." -- The distinction between dosa & paṭigha is made at DA i.116 as: dosa = dubbalakodha; paṭigha=balavakodha. -- In combn lobha d. moha e. g. S i.98; M i.47, 489; A i.134, 201; ii.191; iii.338; It 45 (tīṇi akusalamūlāni). With rāga & moha: Dh 20; It 2=6; with rāga & avijjā; It 57; rāga & māna Sn 270, 631 etc. -- See for ref.: Vin i.183; D iii.146, 159, 182, 214, 270; S i.13, 15, 70; v.34 sq.; M i.15, 96 sq., 250 sq., 305; A i.187; ii.172, 203; iii.181; Sn 506; It 2 (dosena duṭṭhāse sattā gacchanti duggatiŋ); Ps i.80 sq., 102; Pug 16, 18; Dhs 418, 982, 1060; Vbh 86, 167, 208, 362; Nett 13, 90; Sdhp 33, 43. -- Variously characterised as: 8 purisa -- dosā Vbh 387; khila, nīgha, mala S v.57; agati (4 agati -- gamanāni: chanda, d. moha, bhaya) D iii.228, cp. 133, 182; ajjhattaŋ A iii.357 sq.; its relation to kamma A i.134; iii.338; v.262; to ariyamagga S v.5, 8. -- sadosa corrupted, depraved, wicked D i.80; A i.112; adosa absence of ill-will, adj. kind, friendly, sympathetic A i.135, 195, 203; ii.192; Vbh 169, 210; Dhs 33 (cp. Dhs. trsl. 21, 99); VvA 14 (+alobha amoha).

-- aggi the fire of anger or ill -- will D iii.217; S iv.19 sq.; It 92 (+rāgaggi moh˚); J i.61; -- antara (adj.) bearing anger, intending evil in one's heart Vin ii.249; D iii.237; M i.123; A i.59; iii.196 sq.; v.81 (opp. metta -- citta); perhaps at PvA 78 (for des˚); -- kkhaya the fading away, dying out of anger or malice S iii.160, 191; iv.250; v.8; Vbh 73, 89; -- gata = dosa (+paṭigha) S iv.71; -- garu full of anger S i.24; -- dosa (: dosa1) spoilt by anger Dh 357; -- saññita connected with ill -- will It 78; -- sama like anger Dh 202; -- hetuka caused by evil intention or depravity A v.261 (pāṇātipāta). Dosaniya, Dosanīya & Dosaneyya
Dosaniya,
Dosanīya & Dosaneyya (adj.) [grd. -- formation either to dosa1 or dosa2, but more likely = Sk. *dūṣanīya=dūṣya (see dussa2 & dussati) influenced by dveṣaṇīya] corruptible; polluting, defiling; hateful, sinful S iv.307; A ii.120; It 84 (where A iii.110 has dussanīya in same context). Dosā
Dosā
(f.) [Sk. doṣā & doṣas, cp. Gr. du/w, du/omai to set (of the sun)] evening, dusk. Only in acc. as adv. dosaŋ ( = doṣāŋ) at night J vi.386. Dosin
Dosin
(adj.) [to dosa2] angry J v.452, 454. Dosinā
Dosinā
(f.) [Sk. jyotsnā, cp. P. juṇhā) a clear night, moon- light; only in phrase ramaṇīyā vata bho dosinā ratti. "lovely is the moonlight night" D i.47≈J i.509; J v.262; Miln 5, 19 etc. Expld in popular fashion by Bdhgh. as "dosâpagatā" ratti DA i.141.

-- puṇṇamāsī a clear, full moon night Th 1, 306, 1119; -- mukha the face of a clear night J vi.223. Doha
Doha1
[Sk. doha & dogha] milking, milk J v.63, 433. Doha
Doha2
(adj.) [Sk. droha] injuring ( -- ˚) DA i.296. Dohaka
Dohaka
[Sk. doha] a milk -- pail J v.105. Dohati
Dohati
[Sk. dogdhi, to which prob. duhitṛ daughter: see under dhītā & cp. dhenu] to milk. -- pres. 1 pl. dohāma & duhāma J v.105; pret. 1 pl. duhāmase ibid.; pot. duhe Jvi.211; ger. duhitvā SnA 27; pp. duddha (q. v.) -- Pass. duyhati S i.174 (so read for duhanti); J v.307; ppr. duyhamāna Miln 41. -- See also dūhana, doha1, dohin. Dohaḷa
Dohaḷa
[Sk. dohada & daurhṛda, of du+hṛd, sick longing, sickness, see hadaya. Lüders Gōttinger GelehrteNachrichten 1898, 1 derives it as dvi+hṛd] (a) the longing of a pregnant woman J iii.28, 333; DhA i.350; ii.139. -- (b) intense longing, strong desire, craving in general J ii.159, 433; v.40, 41; vi.263, 308; DhA ii.86 (dhammika d.). Dohaḷāyati
Dohaḷāyati
[Denom. fr. dohaḷa] to have cravings (of a woman in pregnancy) J vi.263. Dohaḷinī
Dohaḷinī
(adj. -- f.) a woman in pregnancy having cravings; a pregnant woman in general J ii.395, 435; iii.27; iv.334; v.330 ( = gabbhinī); vi.270, 326, 484; DhA iii.95. Dohin
Dohin
(adj. n.) one who milks, milking M i.220 sq. = A v.347 sq. (anavasesa˚ milking out fully). Drūbha
Drūbha
incorrect spelling for dubbha (q. v.) in adrūbhāya Vin i.347. Dva˚
Dva˚
in numeral composition, meaning two etc., see under dvi B III. Dvaya
Dvaya
(adj. -- n.) [Ved. dvaya; cp. dvi B I. 6] (adj.) (a) twofold Sn 886 (saccaŋ musā ti dvayadhammaŋ); Dh 384; Pv iv.129 (dvayaŋ vipākaŋ = duvidhaŋ PvA 228). -- advaya single A v.46. -- (b) false, deceitful Vin iii.21. -- nt. a duality, a pair, couple S ii.17 (˚ŋ nissito loko); J iii.395 (gātha˚); PvA 19 (māsa˚); DhA ii.93 (pada˚ two lines, "couplet").

-- kārin "doing both," i. e. both good & evil deeds (su˚ & duccaritaŋ) S iii.241, cp. 247 sq.; D iii.96. Dvā
Dvā
(cp. dva˚) see dvi B III. Dvāra
Dvāra
(nt.) [Ved. dvār (f.) & dvāra (nt.), base *dhvār, cp. Av. dvarəm; Gr. qu/ ra_, qurw/n; Lat. fores (gate), forum; Goth. daúr, Ohg. turi = Ger. tür, Ags. dor =E. door.] 1. lit. an outer door, a gate, entrance Vin i.15; S i.58, 138, 211; J i.346; ii.63; vi.330; Vbh 71 sq.; PvA 4, 67 (village gate), 79; Sdhp 54, 356. -- That d. cannot be used for an inner door see Vin ii.215; on knocking at a d. see DA i.252; cp. DhA i.145 (dvāraŋ ākoṭeti); to open a door: āvarati; to shut: pidahati; to lock: thaketi. dvāraŋ alabhamāna unable to get out Vin ii.220. -- mahā˚ the main or city gate J i.63; culla˚ J ii.114; catu˚ (adj.) having 4 doors (of niraya) Pv i.1013; cha˚ with 6d. (nagaraŋ, w. ref. to the 6 doors of the senses, see below) S iv.194; pure˚ the front d. J ii.153; pacchima˚ the back d. J vi.364; uttara˚ the E. gate (PvA 74); nagara˚ the city gate (J i.263; deva˚ DhA i.280); gāma˚ the village g. (Vin iii.52; J ii.110); ghara˚ (J iv.142; PvA 38) & geha˚ (PvA 61) the house door; antepura˚ the door of the inner chamber M ii.100; kula˚ the doors of the clan -- people Sn 288. -- metaph. of the door leading to Nibbāna: amata˚ S i.137; A v.346. -> 2. (fig.) the doors=in -- & outlets of the mind, viz. the sense organs; in phrase indriyesu gutta -- dvāra (adj.) guarding the doors with respect to the senses or faculties (of the mind): see gutta (e. g. S ii.218; iv.103 & cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 175). -- S iv.117, 194 (with simile of the 6 gates of a city); VvA 72 (kāya -- vacī˚). The nine gates of the body at Vism 346. Thus also in f. abstr. guttadvāratā the condition of well protected doors (see gutta).

-- kavāṭa a door post J i.63; ii.334; vi.444; PvA 280, -- koṭṭhaka [cp. Sk. dvārakoṣṭhaka Sp. AvŚ i.24, 31] gateway; also room over the gate Ud 52, 65; J i.290; iii.2; iv.63, 229; VvA 6, 160; DhA i.50; ii.27, 46; iv.204; Vism 22; Miln 10. -- bahidvārakoṭṭhake or ˚ā outside the gate M i.382; ii.92; A iii.31; iv.206; -- gāma a village outside the city gates, i. e. a suburb (cp. bahidvāragāma J i.361) J iii.126 (˚gāmaka), 188; iv.225; DhA ii.25 (˚ka); -- toraṇa a gateway J iii.431. -- pānantara at J vi.349 should be read ˚vātapānantara; -- pidahana shutting the door Vism 78. -- bāhā a door post S i.146; Pv i.51; DhA iii.273; -- bhatta food scattered before the door Sn 286; -- vātapāna a door -- window Vin ii.211; J vi.349; -- sālā a hall with doors M i.382; ii.61. -- 333 -- Dvārika
Dvārika
( -- ˚) (adj.) referring or belonging to the door of -- ; in cha ˚ā taṇhā, craving or fever, arising through the 6 doors (of the senses) DhA iv.221, & kāya˚ -- saŋvara control over the "bodily" door, i. e. over action (opp. speech) PvA 10 (so read for kāyañ cārika˚). Dvi
Dvi
[Sk. dvi, dva etc. -- Bases: I. dvi = Sk. dvi in dvipad =Lat. bipēs (fr. dṷipēs), Ags. twiféte; dvidant=bidens. Reduced to di (see B I.4) as in Gr. di\ pous (=dipad), Lat. diennium & pref. dis -- (cp. Goth. twis asunder, Ogh. zwisk between). -- II. du (=dvi in reduced grade, cp. Lat. du -- plex, dubius etc.). -- III. dvā (& dva)=Sk. dvāu, dvā, f. nt. dve (declined as dual, but the P. (plural) inflexion from base I. see B I.1); Gr. du/w, Lat. duo; Oir. dāu, dā, f. dī; Goth. twai, f. twōs; Ags. twā (=E. two); Ohg. zwēne, zwō zwei. Also in cpd. num. dva -- daśa twelve=Gr. d(*v)w/deka=Lat. duodecim. ] number two.

A. Meanings -- I. Two as unit: 1. with objective foundation: (a) denoting a combn (pair, couple) or a repetition (twice). In this conn. frequent both objective & impersonal in mentioning natural pairs as well as psychologically contrasted notions. E. g. dvipad (biped), nāgassa dve dantā (elephants' tusks), cakkhūni (eyes); dvija (bird), duvija (tooth), dijivha (snake). See also dutiya & dvaya. -- dve: kāmā, khiḍḍā, gatiyo (Sn 1001), dānāni (It 98), piyā, phalāni (Sn 896; It 39), mittā, sinehā etc. See Nd2 under dve, cp. A i.47-> 100; D iii.212 -- 214. -- (b) denoting a separation (in two, twofold etc.): see dvidhā & cpds. -- 2. with symbolic, sentimental meaning: (a) only two (i. e. next to one or "next to nothing"), cp. the two mites of the widow (Mark xii. 42), two sons of Rachel (Gen. 30): dumāsika not more than 2 months (Vin ii.107); dvemāsiko gabbho (Pv i.67); dvevācika; duvangula (see below). -- (b) a few -- more than one, some, a couple (often intermediate between 1 & 3, denoting more than once, or a comparatively long, rather long, but not like 3 a very long time): māsadvayaŋ a couple of months; dvisahassa dīpā 2000 islands ( = a large number); diyaḍḍhasata 150=very long etc.; dvīhatīha (2 or 3= a couple of days) q. v.; dvirattatiratta (id. of nights); dvīsu tīsu manussesu to some people (PvA 47); dvatikkhattuŋ soveral times; cp. dvikkhattuŋ (more than once), dutiyaŋ (for the 2nd time).

II. Two as unit in connection with its own & other decimals means a complex plus a pair, which amounts to the same as a large & a small unit, or so to speak "a year & a day." E. g. 12 (sometimes, but rarely = 10+2, see sep.); -- 32: rests usually on 4 X 8, but as No. of the Mahāpurisa -- lakkhaṇāni it denotes 30+2= the great circle plus the decisive (invisible) pair; -- 62: views of heresy: see diṭṭhi; also as a year of eternity= 60 kappas+2; -- 92: as measure of eternity=90+2 kappas=a year & a day.

III. Number twelve. 1. Based on natural phenomena it denotes the solar year (dvādasamāsako saŋvaccharo VvA 247). -- 2. Connected with the solar cult it is used with human arrangements to raise them to the level of heavenly ones and to impart to them a superior significance. Thus: (a) as denoting a set (cp. 12 months = companions of the Sun) it is the No. of a respectful, holy, venerable group (cp. 12 sons of Jacob Gen. 35, 22; cakes as shewbread Lev. 25, 5; stones erected Josh. 4, 8; apostles Math. 10, 2; patriarchs Acts 7, 8; companions of Odysseus Hom. Od. 9, 195; Knights of Arthur etc.): of theras, accompd by 12 bhikkhus PvA 67, 141. 179 etc.; dvādasa koṭisatāni Sn 677; five groups of 12 musicians VvA 96 (cp. 5 X 12 cromlechs in the outer circle of Stonehenge). -- (b) as measure of distance in space & time it implies vast extent, great importance, a climax, divine symmetry etc. 12 yojanas wide extends the radiance VvA 16; 12 y. as respectful distance PvA 137 (cp. 2000 cubits in same sense at Josh. 3, 4); 12 y. in extent (height, breadth & length) are the heavenly palaces of the Vimāna -- petas or Yakkhas Vv 551; J vi.116; VvA 6, 217, 244, 291, 298 etc. In the same connection we freq. find the No. 16: solasa -- yojanikaŋ kanaka -- vimānaŋ Vv 671; VvA 188, 289 etc. -- Of years: J iii.80; VvA 157 (dvādasa -- vassikā; in this sense also 16 instead of 12: soḷasa -- vassuddesika VvA 259 etc. See soḷasa).

B. Bases & Forms -- I. dvi; main base for numeral & nominal composition & derivation, in:

1. numeral dve (& duve) two: nom. acc. dve (Sn p. 107; It 98; J i.150; iv.137 etc.) & (in verse) duve (Sn 896, 1001); gen. dat. dvinnaŋ (It 39, 40, 98; J ii.154); instr. dvīhi (J i.87: v. l. dīhi; 151; ii.153); loc. dvīsu (J i.203; PvA 47) & duvesu (Vv 412).

2. as numeral base: -- sahassa 2000 (see A I. 2b) J i.57; VvA 261; PvA 74; also in dvittā and adv. dvikkhattuŋ twice & dvidhā in two parts. -- (b) as nominal base: -- (r)āvaṭṭa [Sk. dviḥ cp. Lat. bis] turning twice S i.32; -- ja "twice born," i. e. a bird J i.152 (gaṇā); -- jātin one who is born twice, i. e. a brāhmaṇa Th, 2, 430 (ThA 269 = brahmajātin); -- tālamatta of the size of 2 palms DhA ii.62; -- pad [Sk. dvipad, Lat. bipes, Gr. di/pous etc.] a biped, man S i.6; -- pala twofold Vism 339; -- pādaka=dvipad Vin ii.110; -- bandhu having two friends J vi.281; -- rattatiratta two or three nights Vin iv.16; also in dvīha two days (q. v.).

3. as diaeretic form duvi˚: -- ja (cp. dija) "growing again" i. e. a tooth J v.156.

4. as contracted form di˚: -- (y)aḍḍha one and a half (lit. the second half, cp. Ger. anderthalb) Dh 235; J i.72 (diyaḍḍha -- yojana -- satika 150 y. long or high etc.), 202; iv.293 (˚yāma); DhA i.395; DA i.17; Miln 243, 272; DhsA 12; -- guṇa twofold, double Vin i.289; Sn 714; J v.309; Miln 84; DhA ii.6; VvA 63, 120; -- ja (cp. dvija, duvija) (a) "twice -- born," a bird S i.224; Sn 1134 (d. vuccati pakkhī Nd2 296); J i.152, 203; ii.205; iv.347; v.157; Pv ii.124; Vv 358 (cp. VvA 178); Miln 295. -- (b) a brahmin ThA, 70, 73; -- jivha "twotongued," i. e. a snake (cp. du˚) J iii.347; -- pad ( -- pada or -- pa) a biped (cp. dvi˚) A i.22; v.21; Sn 83 (dipa -- duttama), 995 (id.) 998; Dh 273; -- pādaka = ˚pad Th 1, 453=Sn 205.

5. as sec. cpd. form (with guṇa) dve˚ (and de˚): -- caturanga twice fourfold -- eightfold Th 1, 520 (˚gāmin); -- patha a "double" path, a border path, the boundary between two villages Vv 5317 ( -- sīmantika -- patha VvA 241); -- piccha having two tail -- feathers J v.341 (cp. de˚); -- pitika having two feathers J v.424; -- bhāva doubling kacc. 21; -- māsika two months old Pv i.67; -- vācika pronouncing (only) two words, viz. Buddha & Dhamma (cp. tevācika, saying the whole saraṇa -- formula), Vin i.4; J i.81; -- sattaratta twice seven nights, a fortnight [cp. Sk. dvisapta] J vi.230. -- See also der. fr. numer. adv. dvidhā, viz. dvejjha (& dejjha), dvedhā˚, dveḷhaka.

6. as noun -- derivation dvaya a dyad (q. v.).

II. du; reduced base in numeral and nominal compn & dern:

-- (v)addhato from both sides (a distorted form of dubhato q. v.) Vv 6419 ( = dubhato VvA 281); -- (v)angika consisting of two parts Dhs 163; -- (v)angula & dvangula two finger -- breadths or depths, two inches long, implying a minimum measure (see above A I.2a) Vin ii.107; iv.262; usually in cpds. -- kappa the 2 inch rule, i. e. a rule extending the allotted time for the morning meal to 2 inches of shadow after mid day Vin ii.294 306; -- pannā wisdom of 2 finger -- breadths, i. e. that of a woman S i.129=Th 2, 60 (dvanguli˚, at ThA 66 as ˚saññā); -- buddhika=˚paññā VvA 96; -- jivha twotongued (cp. di˚); a snake J iv.330; v.82, 425; -- paṭṭa "double cloth" (Hind. dupaṭṭā; Kanarese dupaṭa, duppaṭa; Tamil tuppaṭṭā a cloak consisting of two cloths joined together, see Kern, Toev. i.179); J i.119; iv.114, 379 (ratta˚); DhA i.249 (suratta˚); iii.419 (˚cīvarā); -- matta (about) 2 in measure Miln 82; -- māsika 2 months old or growing for 2 months (of hair) Vin ii.107; -- vagga consisting of two Vin i.58; -- vassa 2 years old Vin i.59; -- vidha twofold, instr. duvidhena M iii.45 sq.; etc. -- Derivations from du˚ see sep. under duka (dyad), dutiya (the second), & the contamination forms dubha (to) & dubhaya (for ubha & ubhaya).

III. dvā (& reduced dva), base in numeral compn only: dvatikkhattuŋ two or three times J i.506; DA i.133, 264; DhA iv.38; dvādasa twelve (on meaning of this & foll. numerals see above A II. & III.) J iii.80; vi.116; DhA i.88; iii.210; VvA 156, 247 etc.; ˚yojanika J i.125; iv.499; dvāvīsati (22) VvA 139; dvattiŋsa (32) Kh ii. (˚ākāra the 32 constituents of the body); DhA ii.88; VvA 39 etc.; dvācattālīsa (42) Nd2 15; Vism 82; dvāsaṭṭhi (Nd2 271iii. & dvaṭṭhi (62) D i.54; S iii.211; DA i.162); dvānavuti (92) PvA 19, 21. -- Note. A singular case of dva as adv. = twice is in dvâhaŋ Sn 1116. -- 334 -- Dvikkhattuŋ
Dvikkhattuŋ
(adv.) [Sk. *dvikṛtvaḥ] twice Nd2 on Sn 1116 ( = dva); Nd2 296 (jāyati dijo). See dvi B I. 2a. Dvittā
Dvittā
(pl.) [Sk. dvitrā; see dvi B I. 2a] two or three S i.117 (perhaps we should read tad vittaŋ: Windisch, Māra & Buddha 108). Dvidhā
Dvidhā
(num. adv.) [Sk. dvidhā, see dvi B I. 2a] in two parts, in two M i.114; J i.253 (karoti), 254 (chindati), 298 (id.); iii.181; iv.101 (jāta disagreeing); vi.368 (bhindati). See also dvedhā & dveḷhaka.

-- gata gone to pieces J v.197; -- patha a twofold way, a crossing; only fig. doubt Siii.108; M i.142, 144; Ud 90. See also dvedhāpatha. Dvīha
Dvīha
(adv.) [Sk. dvis -- ahnah; see dvi B I.2b] two days; dvīhena in 2 days S ii.192; dvīha -- mata 2 days dead M i.88; iii.91.

-- tīha 2 or 3 days (˚ŋ adv.) (on meaning cp. dvi A I.2b) D i.190 (˚assa accayena after a few days); J ii.316; DhA iii.21 (˚accayena id., gloss: katipāh'-> accayena); DA i.190 (˚ŋ) 215; VvA 45. Dvīhika
Dvīhika
(adj.) every other day M i.78. Dvīhitika
Dvīhitika
(adj.) [du -- īhitika, of du1+īhati] to be gained or procured with difficulty (i. e. a livelihood which is hardly procurable), only in phrase "dubbhikkhā d. setaṭṭhikā salākavuttā," of a famine Vin iii.6, 15, 87; iv.23; S iv.323. On the term & its expln by Bdhgh. (at Vin iii.268: dujjīvikā īhī tī . . . dukkhena īhitaŋ ettha pavattatī ti) see Kern, Toev. i.122. -- Note. Bdhgh's expln is highly speculative, & leaves the problem still unsolved. The case of du1 appearing as du -- (and not as dur -- ) before a vowel is most peculiar; there may be a connection with druh (see duhana), which is even suggested by vv. ll. at S iv.223 as dūhitika = duhitika (q. v.). Dve & Dve˚
Dve
& Dve˚ see dvi B 1 & 5. Dvejjha
Dvejjha
(adj.) [Sk. dvaidhya; cp. dvi B I. 5] divided, twofold, only in neg. advejjha undivided, certain, doubtless; simple, sincere, uncontradictory A iii.403; J iv.77; Nd2 30 (+adveḷhaka); Miln 141. -- Cp. dejjha. Dvejjhatā
Dvejjhatā
(f.) [fr. prec.] in a˚ undividedness J iv.76. Dvedhā
Dvedhā
(adv.) [Sk. dvedhā, cp. dvidhā] in two J v.203, 206 (˚sira); DhA ii.50 (bhijji: broke in two, broke asunder). Dvedhāpatha
Dvedhāpatha
[cp. dvidhā & dvi B I.5] (a) a double, i. e. a branching road; a cross -- road DhA ii.192; Miln 17. -> (b) doubt Dh 282; Dhs 1004, 1161 Vism 313. Dveḷhaka
Dveḷhaka
(nt.) [Sk. *dvaidhaka fr. adv. dvidhā, cp. dvi B I. 5] doubt Vin iii.309; Dhs 1004, 1161; DA i.68; DhsA 259; ˚citta uncertain PvA 13; ˚jāta in doubt Vin iii.309; D iii.117 sq.; 210. -- adveḷhaka (adj.) sure, certain, without doubt Nd2 30 (+advejjha). -- Dh. Dhaŋsati
Dhaŋsati
[Ved. dhvaŋsati to fall to dust, sink down, perish; Idg. dheṷes to fly like dust, cp. Sk. dhūsara "dusky"; Ags. dust; Ger. dust & dunst; E. dusk & dust; prob. also Lat. furo] to fall from, to be deprived of (c. abl.), to be gone D iii.184 (with abl. asmā lokā dh.) A ii.67; v.76, 77; It 11; Th 1, 225, 610; J iii.260, 318, 441, 457; iv.611; v.218, 375. -- Caus. dhaŋseti [Sk. dhvaŋsayati, but more likely = Sk. dharṣayati (to infest, molest= Lat. infestare. On similar sound -- change P. dhaŋs˚> Sk. dharṣ cp. P. daŋseti>Sk. darśayati). Caus. of dhṛṣṇoti to be daring, to assault cp. Gr. qa/rsos audacious, bold, Lat. festus, Goth. gadars=E. dare; Ohg. gitar] to deprive of, to destroy, assault, importune D i.211; S iii.123; Sn 591; J iii.353; Miln 227; Sdhp 357, 434. Cp. pa˚, pari˚. Dhaŋsana
Dhaŋsana
(n. -- adj.) [Sk. dharṣana] destroying, bringing to ruin, only in kula˚ as v. l. to kula -- gandhana (q. v.) at It 64, and in dhaŋsanatā at DhA iii.353 in expln of dhaŋsin (q. v.). Dhaŋsin
Dhaŋsin
(adj. -- n.) [Sk. dharṣin to dhṛṣṇoti, see dhaŋseti] obtrusive, bold, offensive M i.236; A ii.182; Dh 244 ( = DhA iii.353 paresaŋ guṇaŋ dhaŋsanatāya dh.). Dhanka
Dhanka
[Sk. dhvānkṣa, cp. also dhunkṣā] a crow S i.207; ii.258; Sn 271 = Nd2 420; J ii.208; v.107, 270; vi.452; Pv iii.52 (=kāka PvA 198); VvA 334. Dhaja
Dhaja
[Sk. dhvaja, cp. Ohg. tuoh "cloth" (fr. *dwōko)] a flag, banner; mark, emblem, sign, symbol Vin i.306 (titthiya˚: outward signs of); ii.22 (gihi˚); S i.42; ii.280; A ii. 51; iii.84 sq. (panna˚); M i.139 (id.); A iii.149 (dhamma); J i.52 (+patākā); VvA 173 (id.); J i.65 (arahad ˚;)Th i.961; J v.49 = Miln 221; J v.509; vi.499; Nd1 170; Vv 361, 6428 (subhāsita˚=dhamma˚ VvA 284); Dhs 1116, 1233; Vism 469 (+paṭȧka, in comparison); PvA 282; VvA 31, 73; Miln 21; Sdhp 428, 594. Cp. also panna.

-- agga the top of a standard S i.219; A iii.89 sq.; Pug 67, 68; Vism 414 (˚paritta). -- ālu adorned with flags Th 1, 164 = J ii.334 (: dhajasampanna Com.); -- āhaṭa won under or by the colours, taken as booty, captured Vin iii.139, 140; Vism 63. -- baddha captured (=˚āhaṭa) Vin i.74 (cora). Dhajinī
Dhajinī
(f.) [Sk. dhvajinī, f. to adj. dhvajin] "bearing a standard," i. e. an army, legion Sn 442 ( = senā SnA 392). Dhañña
Dhañña1
(nt.) [Ved. dhānya, der. fr. dhana] grain, corn. The usual enumn comprises 7 sorts of grain, which is however not strictly confined to grain -- fruit proper ("corn") but includes, like other enumns, pulse & seeds. These 7 are sāli & vīhi (rice -- sorts), yava (barley), godhuma (wheat), kangu (millet), varaka (beans), kudrūsaka (?) Vin iv.264; Nd2 314; DA i.78. -- Nd2 314 distinguishes two oategories of dhañña: the natural (pubbaṇṇa) & the prepared (aparaṇṇa) kinds. To the first belong the 7 sorts, to the second belongs sūpeyya (curry). See also bīja -- bīja. -- Six sorts are mentioned at M i.57, viz. sāli, vīhi, mugga, māsa, tila, taṇḍula. -> D i.5 (āmaka˚, q. v.); A ii.209 (id.); M i.180; A ii.32 (+dhana); Th 1, 531; Pug 58; DhA i.173; VvA 99; PvA 29 (dhanaŋ vā dh ˚ŋ vā), 198 (sāsapa -- tela -- missitaŋ), 278 (sappi -- madhu -- tela -- dhaññādīhi vohăraŋ katvā). -- dhaññaŋ ākirati to besprinkle a person with grain (for good luck) Pv iii.54 ( = mangalaŋ karoti PvA 198, see also mangala).

-- āgāra a store house for grain Vin i.240; -- piṭaka a basket full of grain DhA iii.370; -- rāsi a heap of g. A iv.163, 170; -- samavāpaka grain for sowing, not more & not less than necessary to produce grain M i.451. -- 335 -- Dhañña
Dhañña2
(adj.) [Sk. dhānya, adj. to dhana or dhānya. Semantically cp. āḷhiya] "rich in corn," rich (see dhana); happy, fortunate, lucky. Often in combn dhanadhañña. -- DhA i.171; iii.464 (dhaññādika one who is rich in grains etc., i. e. lucky); DhsA 116. -- dhaññapuñña -- lakkhaṇa a sign of future good fortune & merit PvA 161; as adj. endowed with the mark of . . . J vi.3. See also dhāniya. Dhata
Dhata
[Sk. dhṛta, pp. of dharati; cp. dhara & dhāreti] 1. firm, prepared, ready, resolved A iii.114; Dāvs v.52. -- 2. kept in mind, understood, known by heart Vin ii.95; A i.36. Dhana
Dhana
(nt.) [Ved. dhana; usually taken to dhā (see dadhāti) as "stake, prize at game, booty," cp. pradhāna & Gr. qe/ma; but more likely in orig. meaning "grain, posses sion of corn, crops etc.," cp. Lith. dūna bread, Sk. dhānā pl. grains & dhañña = dhana -- like, i. e. corn, grain] wealth, usually wealth of money, riches, treasures. 1. Lit. D i.73 (sa˚); M ii.180.; A iii.222; iv.4 sq.; Nd2 135 (+yasa, issariya etc.) Th 2, 464 (+issariya); J i.225 (paṭhavigataŋ karoti: hide in the ground), 262, 289; ii.112; iv.2; Sn 60, 185, 302; Pv ii.610; DhA i.238. Often in combn aḍḍha mahaddhana mahābhoga to indicate immense wealth (see aḍḍha) PvA 3, 214 etc. (see also below ˚dhañña). -- 2. fig. Used in the expression sattavidha -- ariya -- dhana "the 7 fold noble treasure" of the good qualities or virtues, viz. saddhā, cāga etc. (see enumd under cāga) D iii.163, 164, 251; VvA 113; ThA 240.

-- agga the best treasure (i. e. the ariya -- dhana) D iii.164; -- atthika wishing for or desiring wealth Sn 987; -- āsā craving for wealth; -- kkīta bought for money DhA ii.3, -- thaddha proud of wealth, snobbish Sn 104; -- dhañña, usually Dvandva -- cpd. "money & money's worth," but as adj. (always in phrase pahūta˚) it may be taken as Tatpuruṣa "rich in treasures," otherwise "possessing money & money's worth" cp. pahūtadhanadhaññavā J i.3. As n. Pv i.1111; iii.104; PvA 60; Miln 2, 280; as adj. freq. "pahūtadhana -- dhañña" Vv 6313 = Pv ii.611: PvA 97. Thus in ster. formula of aḍḍha mahaddhana etc. D iii.163 sq.; S i.71; A ii.86; -- parājaya loss of money, as adj. appl. to kali: the dice marking loss in game Sn 659; -- lobha "greed of gold" J iv.1; -- lola= lobha J ii.212; -- viriya wealth & power Sn 422; -- hetu for the sake of wealth Sn 122. Dhanatta
Dhanatta
(nt.) [Sk. *dhanatvaŋ] being bent on having money J v.449. Dhanavant
Dhanavant
(adj.) [Sk. dhanavant] wealthy Nd2 462; J i.3. Dhanāyati
Dhanāyati
[Denom. to dhana] to desire (like money), to wish for, strive after M i.260 (perhaps better to be read vanāyati, see formula under allīyati, and note M i.552). Dhanika
Dhanika
[Sk. dhanika] a creditor, Th 2, 443, ThA, 271; PvA 276. Cp. dhaniya. Dhanita
Dhanita
[Sk. dhvanita, pp. of dhvan, cp. Ags. dyn noise = E. din; Ags. dynnan to sound loud] sounded; as nt. sonant (said of a letter) Miln 344. Dhaniya
Dhaniya
= dhanika Vin i.76. Dhanu
Dhanu
(nt.) [Sk. dhanus, to Ohg. tanna fir -- tree, also oak, orig tree in general, cp. dāru] a bow M i.429; J i.50, 150; ii.88; iv.327; PvA 285.

-- kalāpa bow & quiver Vin ii.192; M i.86; ii.99; A iii.94; PvA 154; -- kāra a bow maker Miln 331; -- kārika N. of a tree J v.420; -- kārin = prec. J v.422 (= ˚pāṭali); -- ggaha an archer D i.51; A ii.48; iv.107; J i.58, 356; ii.87, 88; iii.220 (dhanuggaha) J iii.322; v.129 (where 4 kinds are enumd); Vism 150 (in simile); DA i.156; -- takkāri (f.) a plant J vi.535; -- pāṭali N. of a tree J v.422; -- lakkhaṇa prophesying from marks on a bow D i.9. Dhanuka
Dhanuka
(nt.) [Sk. dhanuṣka] a (small) bow Vin ii.10; iii.180; D i.7; A iii.75; v.203; J vi.41; Miln 229; DA i.86. Dhanta
Dhanta
[Sk. dhvānta in meaning of either dhvanita fr. dhvan to sound, or dhamita fr. dhmā to blow, see dhameti] blown, sounded A i.253; J i.283, 284. Dhama
Dhama
( -- ˚) (adj.) [Sk. dhama, to dhamati] blowing, n. a blower, player (on a horn: sankha˚) D i.251; S iv.322. Dhamaka
Dhamaka
( -- ˚) (adj.) one who blows Miln 31; see vaŋsa˚, sankh˚, singa˚. Dhamati
Dhamati
[Ved. dhamati, dhmā, pp. dh amita & dhmāta, cp. Ohg. dampf "steam"] to blow, to sound (a drum); to kindle (by blowing), melt, smelt, singe A i.254; iv.169; J i.283, 284; vi.441; Nd1 478; Miln 262.-> ppr. dhamāna S i.106; Miln 67. -- Caus. dhameti to blow (an instrument) J ii.110; Miln 31, and dhamāpeti to cause to blow or kindle DhA i.442. -- pp. dhanta & dhanita (the latter to dhvan, by which dhamati is influenced to a large extent in meaning. Cp. uddhana). Dhamadhamāyati
Dhamadhamāyati
[cp. Sk. dadhmāti, Intens. to dhamati] to blow frequently, strongly or incessantly Miln 117. Dhamani
Dhamani
(f.) [Sk. dhamani, to dhamati, orig. a tube for blowing, a tubular vessel, pipe] a vein Th 1, 408. Usually in cpd.: -- santhata strewn with veins, with veins showing, i. e. emaciated (: nimmaŋsa -- lohitatāya sirājālehi vitthatagatta PvA 68) Vin iii.110; J iv.371; v.69; Dh 395 = Th 1, 243=Pv ii.113; Pv iv.101; DhA i.299, 367; iv.157; ThA 80. So also in Jain Pk. "kisa dhamaṇisaŋtata": Weber, Bhagavatī p. 289; cp. Lal. Vist. 226. -- Also as ˚santhatagatta (adj.) having veins showing all over the body for lack of flesh Vin i.55; iii.146; M ii.121; J i.346, ii.283; ThA 80. Dhamma
Dhamma1
(m. & rarely nt.) [Ved. dharma & dharman, the latter a formation like karman (see kamma for expln of subj. & obj. meanings); dhṛ (see dhāreti) to hold, support: that which forms a foundation and upholds = constitution. Cp. Gr. qro/nos, Lat. firmus & fretus; Lith. derme (treaty), cp. also Sk. dhariman form, constitution, perhaps=Lat. forma, E. form] constitution etc. A. Definitions by Commentators: Bdhgh gives a fourfold meaning of the word dhamma (at DA i.99= DhA i.22), viz. (1) guṇe (saddo), applied to good conduct; (2) desanāyaŋ, to preaching & moral instruction; (3) pariyattiyaŋ, to the 9 fold collection of the Buddh. Scriptures (see navanga); (4) nissatte ( -- nijjīvate), to cosmic (non -- animistic) law. -- No. 1 is referred to freq. in expls of the term, e. g. dhammiko ti ñāyena samena pavattatī ti DA i.249; dhamman ti kāraṇaŋ ñāyaŋ PvA 211; as paṭipatti -- dhamma at VvA 84; No. 3 e. g. also at PvA 2. Another and more adequate fourfold definition by Bdhgh is given in DhsA 38, viz. (1) pariyatti, or doctrine as formulated, (2) hetu, or condition, causal antecedent, (3) guṇa, or moral quality or action, (4) nissatta -- nijīvatā, or "the phenomenal" as opposed to "the substantial," "the noumenal," "animistic entity." Here (2) is illustrated by hetumhi ñāṇaṃ dhammapaṭisambhidā: "analytic knowledge in dhamma's means insight into condition, causal antecedent" Vibh 293, and see Niyama (dhamma˚). Since, in the former fourfold definition (2) and (3) really constitute but one main implication considered under the two aspects of Doctrine as taught and Doctrine as formulated, we may interpret Dhamma by the fourfold connotation: -- doctrine, right, or righteousness, condition, phenomenon. -- For other exegetic definitions see the Coms & the Niddesa, e. g. Nd1 94; for modern expls & analyses see e. g. Rhys Davids, Buddh. India pp. 292 -- 4; Mrs. Rh. Davids, Buddhism (1912) pp. 32 sq., 107 sq., 235 sq.; Dhs. trsl. xxxiii. sq.; and most recently the exhaustive monograph by M. & W. Geiger, Pāli Dhamma. Abhandlungen der Bayer. Akademie xxxi. 1; München 1920; which reached the editors too late to be made use of for the Dictionary.

B. Applications and Meaning. -- 1. Psychologically; "mentality" as the constitutive element of cognition & of its substratum, the world of phenomena. It is that which is presented as "object" to the imagination & as such has an effect of its own: -- a presentation (Vorstellung), or idea, idea, or purely mental phenomenon as distinguished from a psycho -- physical phenomenon, or sensation (re -- action of sense -- organ to sensestimulus). The mind deals with ideas as the eye deals with forms: it is the abstraction formed by mano, or mind proper, from the objects of sense presented by the sense -- organ when reacting to external objects. Thus cakkhu "faculty of sight" corresponds to rūpa "relation of form" & mano "faculty of thought" (citta & ceto its organ or instrument or localisation) corresponds to dhamma "mentalized" object or "idea" (Mrs. Rh. D. "mental object in general," also "state of mind") -- (a) subjective: mental attitude, thought, idea, philosophy, truth, & its recognition (anubodhi) by the Buddha, i. e. the Dhamma or worldwisdom = philosophy of the Buddha as contained & expounded in the Dialogues of the 5 Nikāyas (see below C.) -- Note. The idea of dhamma as the interpreted Order of the World is carried further in the poetical quasi -- personification of the Dh. with the phrase "dhammaja dh -- nimmita dh -- dāyāda" (born of the Norm, created by the Norm, heir of the Norm; see under cpds. and Dhammatā; also s. v. Niyama). That which the Buddha preached, the Dhamma kat) e)coxh/n, was the order of law of the universe, immanent, eternal, uncreated, not as interpreted by him only, much less invented or decreed by him, but intelligible to a mind of his range, and by him made so to mankind as bodhi: revelation, awakening. The Buddha (like every great philosopher & other Buddhas preceding Gotama: ye pi te ahesuŋ atītaŋ addhānaŋ Arahanto Sammāsambuddhā te pi dhammaŋ yeva sakkatvā S i.140) is a discoverer of this order of the Dhamma, this universal logic, philosophy or righteousness ("Norm"), in which the rational & the ethical elements are fused into one. Thus by recognition of the truth the knower becomes the incorporation of the knowable (or the sense of the universe= Dhamma) & therefore a perfect man, one who is "truly enlightened" (sammā -- sambuddha): so Bhagavā jānaŋ jānāti passaŋ passati cakkhu -- bhūto ñāṇa -- bhūto dhamma˚ brahma˚ & in this possession of the truth he is not like Brahmā, but Brahmā himself & the lord of the world as the "master of the Truth": vattā pavattā atthassa ninnetā Amatassa dātā dhammassāmī S iv.94; & similarly "yo kho Dhammaŋ passati so mam passati; yo mam passati so Dhammaŋ passati" =he who sees the Buddha sees the Truth S iii.120. Cp. with this also the dhamma -- cakka idea (see cpds.). On equation Dhamma=Brahman see esp. Geiger, Dhamma pp. 76 -- 80, where is also discussed the formula Bhagavato putto etc. (with dhammaja for the brahmanic brahmaja). -- In later (Abhidhamma) literature the (dogmatic) personification of Dhamma occurs. See e. g. Tikp A 366.

As 6th sense -- object "dhamma" is the counterpart of "mano": manasā dhammaŋ viññāya "apperceiving presentations with the mind" S iv.185 etc. (see formula under rūpa); mano -- viññeyyā dhammā S iv.73; cp. S iii.46; iv.3 sq.; v.74; D iii.226, 245, 269. Ranged in the same category under the anupassanā -- formula (q. v.) "dhammesu dhamm -- ânupassin" realising the mentality of mental objects or ideas, e. g. D ii.95, 100, 299; A i.39, 296; ii.256; iii.450; iv.301. Also as one of the 6 taṇhās "desire for ideas" D iii.244, 280. -- As spirituality opposed to materiality in contrast of dh. & āmisa: It 98 (˚dāna: a mat. & a spir. gift). -- (b) objective: substratum (of cognition), piece, constituent ( = khandha), constitution; phenomenon, thing, "world," cosmic order (as the expression of cosmic sense, as under a & 2). Thus applied to the khandhas: vedanādayo tayo kh. DhA i.35 (see Khandha B 3); to rūpa vedanā saññā sankhārā viññāna S iii.39;=sankhārā D iii.58, 77, 141. Freq. in formula sabbe dhammā aniccā (+dukkhā anattā: see nicca) "the whole of the visible world, all phenomena are evanescent etc." S iii.132 sq. & passim. diṭṭhe [va] dhamme in the phenomenal world (opp. samparāyika dh. the world beyond): see under diṭṭha (S iv.175, 205 etc.). -- ye dhammā hetuppabhavā tesaŋ hetuŋ Tathāgato āha "of all phenomena sprung from a cause the Buddha the cause hath told" Vin i.40 (cp. Isā Upanishad 14). -> lokadhammā things of this world (viz. gain, fame, happiness etc., see under lābha) D iii.260; Nd2 55. -> uttari -- manussa -- dh˚ā transcendental, supernormal phenomena D i.211, cp. D iii.4; abbhuta -- dh˚ā wonderful signs, portents Miln 8 (tayo acchariyā a. dh. pāturahesuŋ); PvA 2: hassa -- khiḍḍhā -- rati -- dh. -- samāpanna endowed with the qualities or things of mirth, play & enjoyment D i.19; iii.31; gāma˚ things or doings of the village D i.4 (cp. DA i.72).

2. Ratio -- ethically -- (a) objective: "rationality," anything that is as it should be according to its reason & logicality (as expressed under No. 1 a), i. e. right property, sound condition, norm, propriety, constitution as conforming to No. 1 in universal application i. e. Natural or Cosmic Law: yattha nāmañ ca rūpaŋ ca asesam uparujjhati, taŋ te dhammaŋ idhâññāya acchiduŋ bhavabandhanaŋ (recognising this law) S i.35 cittacetasikā dh˚ ā a term for the four mental khandhas, and gradually superseding them Dhs 1022 (cf. Compendium of Philosophy, 1); dasadhamma -- vidū Vin i.38 (see dasa); with attha, nirutti and paṭibhāna: one of the 4 Paṭisambhidās (branches of analytic knowledge A ii.160; Pṭs i.84, 88 etc.; Vibh. 293 f., Points of Controversy, p. 380. In this sense freq. -- ˚ as adj.: being constituted, having the inherent quality (as based on Natural Law or the rational constitution of the Universe), destined to be . . ., of the (natural) property of . . ., like (cp. Gr. -- eidh/s or E. -- able, as in change -- able = liable to change, also E. -- hood, -- ly & P. -- gata, -- ṭhita), e. g. khaya -- dhamma liable to decay (+vaya˚, virāga˚, nirodha˚), with ref. to the Sankhāras S iv.216 sq.; in the Paṭiccasamuppāda S ii.60; akkhaya imperishable Pv iv.152 (dānaŋ a -- dh. atthu). cavana˚ destined to shift to another state of existence D i.18; iii.31; It 76; VvA 54. jāti -- jarā -- maraṇa˚ under the law of birth, age, & death D iii.57; A i.147; iii.54; PvA 41 (sabbe sattā . . .); bhedana˚ fragile (of kāya) D i.76; S i.71; PvA 41 (bhijjana˚ of sankhārā). vipariṇāma˚ changeable A i.258; iv.157; PvA 60 (+anicca). a˚ unchanging D iii.31 sq. samudaya˚ & nirodha˚, in formula yaŋ kiñci s -- dh˚ŋ sabban tan n -- dh˚ŋ "anything that is destined to come into existence must also cease to exist" D i.110, 180; S iv.47 & passim. Cp. further: anāvatti˚ avinipāta˚ D i.156; iii.107, 132; A i.232; ii.89, 238; iv.12; anuppāda˚ D iii.270. -- (b) subjective: "morality," right behaviour, righteousness, practice, duty; maxim (cp. ṭhāna), constitution of character as conforming to No. 1 in social application, i. e. Moral Law. -- Often in pl.: tenets, convictions, moral habits; & as adj. that which is proper, that which forms the right idea; good, righteous, true; opp. adhamma false, unjust etc.; evil practice -- (a) Righteousness etc.: S i.86 (eko dh. one principle of conduct; ii.280 (dh. isinaŋ dhajo: righteousness is the banner of the Wise); kusala dh. D i.224; dhamme ṭhita righteous Vv 168; ñāti˚ duty against relatives PvA 30; deyya˚= dāna PvA 9, 70; sad˚ faith (q. v.) -- opp. adhamma unrighteousness, sin A ii.19; v.73 sq.; D iii.70 (˚rāga+ visama -- lobha & micchā -- dhamma); Pv iii.96 (˚ŋ anuvattisaŋ I practised wrong conduct). -- In the same sense: dh. asuddho Vin i.5=S i.137 (pāturahosi Magadhesu pubbe dh. a.); pāpa˚ (adj.) of evil conduct Vin i.3; aṭṭhita˚ unrighteous D iii.133; lobha˚ greedy quality D i.224, 230; methuna dh. fornication D iii.133. -- (b) (pl.) Tenets, practices etc. -- (aa) good: kusalā dh. D ii.223, 228; iii.49, 56, 82, 102 etc.; S ii.206; sappurisa˚ A v.245, 279; PvA 114; samaṇa˚ Wanderer's practice or observances DhA ii.55. brāhmaṇakaraṇā D i.244; yesaŋ dh˚ānaŋ Gotamo vaṇṇavādin D i.206; cp. sīlaŋ samādhi paññā ca vimutti ca anuttarā: anubuddhā ime dhammā Gotamena yasassinā D ii.123. dhammānaŋ sukusalo perfect in all (these) qualities D i.180; samāhite citte dhammā pātubhavanti "with composed mind appear true views" S iv.78; dhammesu patiṭṭhito S i.185; ananussutesu dh˚esu cakkhuŋ udapādi "he visualized undiscovered ideas" S ii.9. -> (bb) evil: āvaraṇīyā S iv.104; pāpakā Vin i.8; D i.70; A i.202; akusalā D iii.56, 57, 73, 91 etc.; lobha˚, dosa˚, moha˚ S i.70=It 45=Nd2 420; S i.43; M iii.40; dukkhavipākā vodanīyā saŋkilesikā ponobbhavikā D i.195; iii.57. -- (cc) various: gambhīrā duddasā etc. Vin i.4; D i.12; S i.136; -- Cp. S ii.15, 26; Nd2 320; It 22, 24; Ps i.5, 22, 28; Vbh 105, 228, 293 sq. etc. etc. -- (g) (adj.) good, pious, virtuous etc.: adhammo nirayaŋ neti dhammo pāpeti suggatiŋ "the sinners go to niraya, the good to heaven" Th 1, 304=DA i.99=DhsA 38= DhA i.22. kalyāṇa˚ virtuous A i.74, 108; ii.81, 91, 224 sq.; PvA 13. Opp. pāpa˚ Vin iii.90; cp. above a. -- (d) (phrases). Very freq. used as adv. is the instr. dhammena with justice, justly, rightly, fitly, properly Vin i.3; D i.122; S iv.331; Vv 3419 (=kāraṇena ñāyena vā VvA); Pv ii.930 (=yutten' eva kāraṇena PvA 125, as just punishment); iv.169 (=anurūpakāraṇena PvA 286). Esp. in phrase of the cakkavattin, who rules the world according to justice: adaṇḍena asatthena dhammena anusāsati (or ajjhāvasati) D i.89; ii.16; S i.236=Sn 1002; cp. Sn 554 (dhammena cakkaŋ vattemi, of the Buddha). Opp. adhammena unjustly, unfitly, against the rule Vin iv.37; S i.57; iv.331; DA i.236. -- dhamme (loc.) honourably J ii.159. -> dhammaŋ carati to live righteously Pv ii.334; see also below C 3 & dh. -- cariyā.

C. The Dhamma, i. e. moral philosophy, wisdom, truth as propounded by Gotama Buddha in his discourses & conversations, collected by the compilers of the 5 Nikāyas (dhamma -- vinayaŋ sangāyantehi dhammasangāhakehi ekato katvā VvA 3; cp. mayaŋ dh.˚ŋ ca vinayañ ca sangāyāma Vin ii.285), resting on the deeper meaning of dhamma as expld under B 1 a, & being in short the "doctrinal" portions of the Buddhist Tipiṭaka in contradiction to the Vinaya, the portion expounding the rules of the Order (see piṭaka). Dhamma as doctrine is also opposed to Abhidhamma "what follows on the Dhamma." -- (1) Dhamma and Vinaya, "wisdom & discipline," as now found in the 2 great Piṭakas of the B. Scriptures, the Vinaya and SuttantaPiṭaka (but the expression "Piṭako" is later. See Piṭaka). Thus bhikkhū suttantikā vinaya -- dharā dhamma kathikā, i. e. "the bhikkhus who know the Suttantas, remember the Vinaya & preach the Word of the Buddha" Vin ii.75 (≈i.169), cp. iv.67. Dhamma & Vinaya combd: yo 'haŋ evaŋ svâkkhāte Dh -- vinaye pabbajito S i.119; bhikkhu na evarūpiŋ kathaŋ kattā hoti: na tvaŋ imaŋ Dh -- v˚ŋ ājānāsi, ahaŋ imaŋ Dh -- v˚ŋ ājānāmi etc. S iii.12; imaŋ Dh -- v˚ŋ na sakkomi vitthārena ācikkhituŋ S i.9; samaṇā . . . imasmiŋ Dh -- v˚e gādhanti S iii.59. -- Thus in var. cpds. (see below), as Dh -- dhara (+V -- dh.) one who knows both by heart; Dh -- vādin (+V -- v.) one who can recite both, etc. -- See e. g. the foll. passages: Vin ii.285 (dh. ca v. ca pariyatta), 304; iii.19, 90; D i.8, 176, 229; ii.124 (ayaŋ Dh. ayaŋ V. idaŋ Satthu -- sāsanaŋ); iii.9, 12, 28, 118 sq.; S i.9, 119, 157; ii.21, 50, (dh -- vinaye assāsa); A iii.297 (id.); S ii.120; iii.91; iv.43 sq., 260; A i.34, 121, 185, 266; ii.2, 26, 117, 168; iii.8, 168 sq.; iv.36, 200 sq.; v.144, 163, 192; It 112; Sn p. 102; Ud 50. -> 2. Dhamma, Buddha, Sangha. On the principle expld in Note on B 1 a rests the separation of the personality of the teacher from that which he taught (the "Doctrine," the "Word," the Wisdom or Truth, cp. Dhamma -- kāyo Tathāgatassa adhivacanaŋ D iii.84). A person becoming a follower of the B. would conform to his teaching (Dh.) & to the community ("Church"; Sangha) by whom his teaching was handed down. The formula of Initiation or membership is therefore threefold, viz. Buddhaŋ saraṇaŋ upemi (gacchāmi), Dh ˚ŋ . . ., Sanghaŋ . . . i. e. I put myself into the shelter of the B., the Dh. & the S. (see further ref. under Sangha) S i.34 (Buddhe pasannā Dhamme ca Sanghe tibbagāravā: ete sagge pakāsenti yattha te upapajjare, i. e. those who adore the B. & his Church will shine in Heaven); D ii.152 sq., 202 sq., 352; S iv.270 sq. (˚saraṇagamana); DhA i.206; PvA 1 (vande taŋ uttamaŋ Dh ˚ŋ, B ˚ŋ, S ˚ŋ). Cp. Satthari, Dhamme, Sanghe kankhati, as 3 of the ceto -- khilā A iii.248≈. -- 3. Character of the Dhamma in var. attributes, general phraseology. -- The praise of the Dh. is expressed in many phrases, of which only a few of the more frequent can be mentioned here. Among the most famous is that of "dhammaŋ deseti ādi -- kalyāṇaŋ majjhe -- k˚, pariyosāna -- k˚, etc. "beautiful in the beginning, beautiful in the middle & beautiful in the end," e. g. D i.62; S i.105; iv.315; A ii.147, 208; iii.113 sq., 135, 262; D iii.96, 267; Nd2 316; It 79; VvA 87. It is welcome as a friend, beautifully told, & its blessings are immediate: sv' akkhāta, sandiṭṭhika, akālika, ehipassika etc. D ii.93; iii.5, 39, 45, 102; S i.9, 117; ii.199; iv.271; A iii.285 etc. It is mahā -- dh. S iv.128; ariya˚ S i.30; A v.241, 274; Sn 783; sammā˚ S i.129. It is likened to a splendid palace on a mountain -- top Vin i.5 = It 33, or to a quiet lake with sīla as its banks S i.169=183; and it is above age & decay: satan ca dhammo na jaram upeti S i.71. Whoever worships the Dh. finds in this worship the highest gratification: diyo loke sako putto piyo loke sako pati, tato piyatarā . . . dhammassa magganā S i.210; ye keci ariyadhamme khantiyā upetā . . . devakāyaŋ paripūressanti S i.30. Dh ˚ŋ garukaroti D iii.84. Opp. Dhamme agārava A iii.247, 340; iv.84: the slanderers of the Dh. receive the worst punishment after death S i.30 (upenti Roruvaŋ ghoraŋ). -- Var. phrases: to find the truth (i. e. to realize intuitively the Dh.)=dh˚ŋ anubodhati D ii.113; S i.137, or vindati D i.110, 148. To expound the Dh., teach the truth, talk about problems of ethics & philosophy: dh˚ŋ deseti Vin iv.134; S i.210 etc.; katheti PvA 41; bhāsati Vin i.101; bhaṇati Vin i.169; pakāseti S ii.28; iv.121. To hear the Dh., to listen to such an exposition: dh˚ŋ suṇāti S i.114, 137, 196, 210; A i.36; iii.163; DhA iii.81, 113. To attain full knowledge of it: dh ˚ŋ pariyāpuṇāti A ii.103, 185; iii.86, cp. 177 & ˚pariyatti. To remember the Dh.: dhāreti A iii.176 (for details of the 5 stages of the Dh. -- accomplishment); to ponder over the Dh., to study it: dh ˚ŋ viciṇāti S i.34=55, 214; A iv.3 sq. To enter a relation of discipleship with the Dh.: dh ˚ŋ saraṇaŋ gacchati (see above 2) Pv iv.348; dhammaŋ saraṇatthaŋ upehi Vv 532 (cp. VvA 232). -> See further Ps i.34, 78, 131; ii.159 sq.; Pug 58, 66; Vbh 293 sq., 329; Nett 11, 15, 31, 83, 112; & cp. cpds. -- 4. Dhamma and anudhamma. Childers interprets anudhamma with "lesser or inferior dhamma," but the general purport of the Nikāya passages seems to be something like "in conformity with, in logical sequence to the dhamma" i. e. lawfulness, righteousness, reasonableness, truth (see KS ii.202; Geiger, Pāli Dhamma pp. 115 -- 118). It occurs (always with Dh.) in the foll. contexts: dhammassa c' ânudh ˚ŋ vyākaroti "to explain according to the truth of the Dhamma" D i.161; iii.115; Ud 50; dhammassa hoti anudhammacārin "walking in perfect conformity to the Dh." A ii.8; dh. -- anudh ˚ŋ ācaranti id. D iii.154; dh. -- anudh˚ paṭipanna "one who has reached the complete righteousness of the Dh." D ii.224; iii.119; S iii.40 sq.; It 81; A iii.176 (where it forms the highest stage of the Dhammaknowledge, viz. (1) dh ˚ŋ suṇāti; (2) pariyāpuṇāti; (3) dhāreti; (4) atthaŋ upaparikkhati; (5) dh -- anudh ˚ŋ paṭipajjati). Further in series bahussuta, dhammadhara, dh -- anudh˚ -- paṭipanna D ii.104; S v.261; A ii.8; Ud 63; also in dhamma -- kathika, dh -- anudh˚ -- paṭi panna, diṭṭha -- dhamma -- nibbāna -- patta S ii.18=114= iii.163; & in atthaŋ aññāya, dhammaŋ aññāya, dhanudh˚ -- paṭipanna A i.36; ii.97.

-- akkhāna discussing or preaching of the Dhamma Nd1 91; -- atthadesanā interpretation of the Dh. Miln 21; -- âdhikaraṇa a point in the Dh. S iv.63 = v.346; -- âdhipa Lord of righteousness (+anudhamma -- cārin) A i.150; cp. ˚ssāmi; nt. abstr. ˚âdhipateyya the dominating influence of the Dh. A i.147 sq.; D iii.220; Miln 94; Vism 14. -- ânudhamma see above C 4; -- anuvattin acting in conformity with the moral law Dh 86, cp. DhA ii.161; -- ânusārin of righteous living D iii.105, 254 (+saddhā˚); M i.226, 479; A i.74; iv.215; iv.23; S v.200; Pug 15; Nett 112, 189; -- anvaya main drift of the faith, general conclusions of the Dh., D ii.83= iii.100; M ii.120; -- abhisamaya understanding of the Truth, conversion to the Dhamma [cp. dharmâbhisamaya Divy 200] S ii.134 (+dh. -- cakkhu -- paṭilābha): Pug 41; Miln 20; DhA i.27; iv.64; PvA 31 etc.; -- âmata the nectar of righteousness or the Dh. Miln 22 (˚meghena lokaŋ abhitappayanto), 346; -- ādāsa the mirror of the Dhamma D ii.93 (name of an aphorism) S v.357 (id.); Th 1, 395; ThA 179; -- āyatana the field of objects of ideation S ii.72; Dhs 58, 66, 147, 397, 572, 594; Vbh 70, 72 sq.; -- ārammaṇa: dh. as an object of ideation Dhs 146, 157, 365; cp. Dhs. trsl. 2; -- ārāma "one who has the Dh. as his pleasure -- ground," one who rejoices in the Dh. A iii.431; It 82 (+dh -- rata); Sn 327; Dh 364, cp. DhA iv.95; -- ālapana using the proper address, a fit mode of addressing a person as followed by the right custom. See Dial. i.193 -- 196; J v.418; -- āsana "the Dh -- seat," i. e. flat piece of stone or a mat on which a priest sat while preaching J i.53; DhA ii.31; -- ûposatha the fast day prescribed by the Dh. A i.208; -- okkā the torch of Righteousness J i.34; -- oja the essence or sap of the Dh. S v.162; DhA iv.169; -- osadha the medicine of the Dh. Miln 110, 335. -- kathā ethical discussion, fit utterance, conversation about the Dh., advice D iii.151; J i.217; VvA 6; PvA 50, 66; -- kathika (adj.) one who converses about ethical problems, one who recites or preaches the Dh., one who speaks fitly or properly. Often in combn. with Vinaya -- dhara "one who masters (knows by heart) the Vinaya," & bahussuta "one who has a wide knowledge of tradition": Vin iv.10, 13, 141; A iii.78; DhA ii.30; also with suttantika "one who is versed in the Suttantas": Vin i.169; ii.75; iv.67. The ability to preach the Dh. is the first condition of one who wishes to become perfected in righteousness (see dhamm -- ânudhamma, above C 4): S ii.18, 114=iii.163; M iii.40. -- A i.25 sq.; ii.138; Pug 42; J i.217; iv.2 (˚thera). Cp. also AvŚ ii.81; -- kathikatta (nt.) speaking about the Dh.; preaching M iii.40; A i.38 (+vinayadhara -- katta); -- kamma a legally valid act, or procedure in accordance with the Rules of the Order Vin iv.37, 136, 232; A i.74 (+vinaya˚); a˚ an illegal act Vin iv.232; A i.74; -- karaka a proper or regulation (standard) water -- pot, i. e. a pot with a filter for straining water as it was used by ascetics Vin ii.118, 177, 301; J i.395; vi.331; DhA iii.290, 452; VvA 220 (not ˚karaṇena); PvA 185; Miln 68; -- kāma a lover of the Dh. D iii.267; A v.24, 27, 90, 201; Sn 92. -- kāya having a body according to the Norm (the dhammatā of bodies). See Bdhgh as translated in Dial. iii. ad loc.; having a normal body (sic Bdhgh, esp. of the B. D iii.84; -- ketu the standard of the Dh., or Dh. as standard A i.109=iii.149; -- khan- dha the (4) main portions or articles of the Dh. (sīla, samādhi, paññā, vimutti) D iii.229; cp. Sp. AvŚ ii.155; -- gaṇa a body of followers of the Dh. PvA 194; -- gaṇḍikā (better gaṇṭhikā, q v.) a block of justice, i. e. of execution J i.150, 151; ii.124; vi.176; v.303; -- garu worshipping the Dh. S iv.123; DhA i.17 (˚ka); -- gariya a kind of acrobatic tumbler, lit. excellent t. (+brahma˚) Miln 191; -- gu one who knows the Dh. (analogous to vedagu) J v.222; vi.261; -- gutta protecting the Dh. or protected by the Dh. (see gutta) S i.222; J v.222 (+dhpāla); -- ghosaka ( -- kamma) praise of the Dh. DhA iii.81; -- cakka the perfection or supreme harmony of righteousness (see details under cakka), always in phrase dhcakkaŋ pavatteti (of the Buddha) "to proclaim or inaugurate the perfect state or ideal of universal righteousness" Vin i.8=M i.171; Vin i.11; S i.191; iii.86; Sn 556, 693; Miln 20, 343; DhA i.4; VvA 165; PvA 2, 67 etc.; besides this also in simile at S i.33 of the car of righteousness; -- cakkhu "the eye of wisdom," perception of the law of change. Freq. in the standing formula at the end of a conversation with the Buddha which leads to the "opening of the eyes" or conversion of the interlocutor, viz. "virajaŋ vītamalaŋ dhcakkhuŋ udapādi" D i.86, 110; ii.288; S iv.47; A iv.186; Vin i.11, 16, 40 etc. Expl. at DA i.237: dhammesu vā cakkhuŋ dhammamayaŋ vā cakkhuŋ. Cp. S ii.134 (˚paṭiĺābha;+dhammâbhisamaya); Dial. i.184; ii.176; -- cariyā walking in righteousness, righteous living, observance of the Dh., piety (=dānādi -- puññapaṭipatti VvA 282) S i.101 (+samacariyā kusalakiriyā); A ii.5; iii.448; v.87, 302; Sn 263 (=kāyasucaritâdi˚ Sn A 309), 274 (+brahma˚). a˚ evil way of living A i.55 (+visama -- cariyā); -- cārin virtuous, dutiful M i.289; ii.188; Dh 168; Miln 19 (+samacārin); -- cetiya a memorial in honour of the Dh. M ii.124; -- chanda virtuous desire (opp. kāma˚) DhsA 370; Vbh 208; -- ja born of the Dh. (see above, Note on B 1 a), in formula "Bhagavato putto oraso dh -- jo, dh -- nimmito, dh.dāyādo" (the spiritual child of the Buddha) D iii.84=S ii.221; It 101; -- jāla "net of the Dh.," name of a discourse (cp. ˚ādāsa & pariyāya) D i.46; -- jīvin living righteously It 108; Dh 24 (=dhammenā samena DhA i.239); -- ññū one who knows the Dh. J vi.261; -- ṭṭha standing in the Law, just, righteous S i.33 (+sīlasampanna); Sn 749; J iii.334; iv.211; ThA 244, -- ṭṭhita=˚ṭṭha D i.190; -- ṭṭhiti˚ having a footing in the Dh. S ii.60, 124, cp. ˚ṭṭhitatā: establishing of causes and effects S ii.25; -- takka right reasoning Sn 1107 (=sammāsankappa Nd2 318); -- dāna gift of; -- dāyāda heir of the Dh.; spiritual heir (cp. above note on B 1 a) D iii.84; S ii.221; M i.12; iii.29; It 101; -- dīpa the firm ground or footing of the Dh. (usually combd with atta -- dīpa: having oneself as one's refuge, self -- dependent) D ii.100; iii.58, 77; S v.154; -- desanā moral instruction, exposition of the Dh. Vin i.16; D i.110 etc. (see desanā); -- dessin a hater of the Dh. Sn 92; -- dhaja the banner of the Dh. A i.109= iii.149; Nd2 503; Miln 21; -- dhara (adj.) one who knows the Dh. (by heart); see above C 4. Combd w. Vinayadhara Vin i.127, 337; ii.8; A i.117, & bahussuta (ibid). Sn 58 (cp. SnA 110). -- See also A iii.361 sq., iv.310; Nd2 319; -- dhātu the mental object considered as irreducible element Dhs 58, 67, 147 etc.; Vbh 87, 89 (see above B 1); an ultimate principle of the Dh., the cosmic law D ii.8; M i.396; S ii.143 sq.; Nett 64 sq.; Vism 486 sq. -- dhāraṇa knowledge of the Dh. M ii.175; -- nāṭaka a class of dancing girls having a certain duty J v.279; -- nimmita see ˚ja; -- niyāma belonging to the order of the Norm D i.190; DA on D ii.12: dhammatā; (˚ka); -- niyāmatā, certainty, or orderliness of causes and effects S ii.25; Points of Controversy, 387; -- netti= niyāma Miln 328; DA i.31; cp. Sk. dharmanetrī M Vastu ii.357; iii.234, 238; -- pajjota the lamp of the Dh. Miln 21; -- pada (nt.) a line or stanza of the Dhamma, a sentence containing an ethical aphorism; a portion or piece of the Dh. In the latter meaning given as 4 main subjects, viz. anabhijjhā, avyāpāda, sammā -- sati, sammā -- samādhi D iii.229; A ii.29 sq. (in detail); Nett 170. -- S i.22 (dānā ca kho dh -- padaŋ va seyyo). 202 (dh -- padesu chando); A ii.185; Sn 88 (dh -- pade sudesite=nibbāna -- dhammassa padattā SnA 164); J iii.472 (=nibbāna); DhA iii.190 (ekaŋ dh -- padaŋ). As Np. title of a canonical book, included in the Khuddaka Nikāya; -- pamāṇa measuring by the (teaching of) Dh. Pug 53; DhA iii.114 (˚ikāni jātisatāni); -- pariyatti attainment of or accomplishment in the Dh., the collection of the Dh. in general A iii.86 (w. ref. to the 9 angas, see navanga); -- pariyāya a short discourse, or a verse, or a poem, with a moral or a text; usually an exposition of a single point of doctrine D i.46; ii.93; iii.116; M i.445; Vin i.40 (a single verse); A i.65; iv.63 (a poem Sn 190 -- 218, where also it is called a dh˚pariyāyo); A v.288, 291. Such a dh˚pariyāya had very often a special name. Thus Brahmajāla, the Wondrous Net D i.46; Dhammādāso dh˚p˚, the Mirror of the Law D ii.93=S v.357; Sokasallaharaṇa, Sorrow's dart extractor A iii.62; Ādittap˚ dh˚p˚, the Red -- hot lancet S iv.168; Lomahaŋsana˚ M i.83; Dhammatā -- dhamma˚ Miln 193, etc. -- pāla guardian of the Law or the Dh. J v.222, freq. also as Np.; -- pīti ( -- rasa) the sweetness of drinking in the Dh. (pivaŋ) Sn 257; Dh 79 (=dhammapāyako dhammaŋ pivanto ti attho DhsA ii.126); -- bhaṇḍāgārika treasurer of the Dh., an Ep. of Ānanda Th 1, 1048; J i.382, 501; ii.25; DhA iii.250; PvA 2. -- bhūta having become the Dh.; righteousness incorporated, said of the Buddhas D iii.84. Usually in phrase (Bhagavā) cakkhu -- bhūta . . . dh -- bhūta brahmabhūta A v.226 sq. (cp. cakkhu); Th 1, 491; see also above, note B 1 a; -- bheri the drum of the Dh. Miln 21; -- magga the path of righteousness Sn 696; Miln 21; -- maya made (built) of the Dh. (pāsāda) S i.137; -- yanta the (sugar -- ) mill of the Dh. (fig.) Miln 166. -- yāna the vehicle of the Law (the eightfold Noble Path) S v.5; -- rakkhita rightly guarded Sn 288; -- rata fond of the Law Sn 327; Dh 364; DhA iv.95; cp. dh. -- [gatā]rati Th i.742; Dhp. 354; -- rasa taste of Dhp. 354; -- rājā king of righteousness, Ep. of the Buddha S i.33=55; D i.88 (of a cakkavatti); A i.109; iii.149; Sn 554; J i.262; interpreted by Bdhgh at DA i.249 as "dhammena rajjaŋ labhitvā rājā jāto ti"=a king who gained the throne legitimately; -- laddha one who has acquired the Dh., holy, pious S ii.21; J iii.472; justly acquired (bhogā) Sn p. 87; -- vara the best of truths or the most excellent Doctrine Sn 233, 234; -- vādin speaking properly, speaking the truth or according to the Doctrine Vin ii.285; iii.175 (+Vinaya -- vādin); D iii.135 (id.); D i.4, 95 (of Gotama; DA i.76: nava -- lokuttara -- dhamma sannissitaŋ katvā vadati); S iv.252; A i.75; ii.209; -- vicaya investigation of doctrine, religious research Dhs 16, 20, 90, 309, 333, 555; Vbh 106; Vism 132; -- vitakka righteous thought A i.254; -- vidū one who understands the Dh., an expert in the Dh. J v.222; vi.261; -- vinicchaya righteous decision, discrimination of the truth Sn 327; Dh 144; DhA iii.86; -- vihārin living according to the Dh. A iii.86 sq.; -- saŋvibhāga sharing out or distribution of the Dh., i. e. spiritual gifts It 98 (opp. āmisa˚ material gifts); -- sangāhaka a compiler of the sacred scriptures, a diaskeuasth/s VvA 3, 169; -- saññā righteous thought, faith, piety PvA 3; -- sabhā a hall for the discussion of the Dh., a chapel, meetinghouse J vi.333; DhA i.31; ii.51; iv.91; PvA 38, 196; -- samaya a meeting where the Dh. is preached S i.26; -- samādāna acquisition of the Dh., which is fourfold as discussed at M i.305; D iii.229; -- saraṇa relying on or putting one's faith in the Dh. (see above C 3) D iii.58, 77; S v.154; -- savana hearing the preaching of the Dh., "going to church" Vin i.101; M ii.175; A ii.248, 381; iv.361; Sn 265; DhA iii.190; -- sākaccha conversation about the Dh. Sn 266; -- ssāmi Lord of the Truth, Ep. of the Buddha (see above B 1 a note) S iv.94; -- sāra the essence of the Dh. S v.402; -- sārathi in purisa -- dh. -- s˚ at D i.62 misprint for purisa -- damma -- s˚; -- sārin a follower of the Dh. S i.170; -- sudhammatā excellency of the Dh. S ii.199; Th 1, 24, 220, 270, 286; -- senāpati "captain of the Dhamma," Ep. of Sāriputta Th 1, 1083; J i.408; Miln 343; DhA iii.305; VvA 64, 65, 158; -- soṇḍatā thirst after justice J v.482; -- sota the ear of the Dh. S ii.43. -- 339 -- Dhamma
Dhamma2
(adj.) [Sk. *dhārma, cp. dhammika] only in f. -- ī in combn with kathā: relating to the Dhamma, viz. conversation on questions of Ethics, speaking about the Dh., preaching, religious discourse, sermon. Either as dhammī kathā Vin ii.161; iv.56 & in instr. -- abl. dhammiyā kathāya (sandasseti samādapeti samuttejeti saŋpahaŋseti: ster. formula) S i.114, 155, 210, iv.122, PvA 30 etc.; or as cpd. dhammī -- kathā D ii.1; M i.161; Sn 325; & dhammi -- kathā S i.155; PvA 38. Dhamma
Dhamma3
(adj.) [Sk. dhanvan] having a bow: see daḷha˚; also as dhammin in daḷha˚ S i.185 (see dhammin). Dhammatā
Dhammatā
(f.) [Sk. dharmitā] conformity to the Dhamma- niyāma (see niyāma), fitness, propriety; a general rule, higher law, cosmic law, general practice, regular phenomenon, usual habit; often used in the sense of a finite verb: it is a rule, it is proper, one should expect S i.140 (Buddhānaŋ dh. the law of the B.'s i. e. as one is wont to expect of the B.s), 215 (su˚); iv.216 sq. (khaya˚ etc.); D ii.12; A ii.36 (kusala˚); v.46; Th 1, 712; J i.245; ii.128; Nett 21, 50, cp. Miln 179; PvA 19; VvA 7. See also AvŚ Index. Dhammatta (nt.)
Dhammatta
(nt.) [Sk. *dharmatvaŋ] liability to be judged Vin ii.55 (& a˚). Dhammani
Dhammani
only found in S i.103, where the Comy. takes it as a locative, and gives, as the equivalent, "in a forest on dry land" (araññe thale). Cp. Kindred Sayings i.129, n. 2. Dhammika
Dhammika
(adj.) [ = Sk. dharmya, cp. dhammiya] lawful, according to the Dh. or the rule; proper, fit, right; permitted, legitimate, justified; righteous, honourable, of good character, just, esp. an attr. of a righteous King (rājā cakkavattī dhammiko dhammarājā) D i.86; ii.16; A i.109=iii.149; J i.262, 263; def. by Bdhgh as "dhammaŋ caratī ti dh." (DA i.237) & "dhammena caratī ti dh., ñāyena samena pavattalī ti" (ib. 249). -> Vin iv.284; D i.103; S ii.280 (dhammikā kathā); iii.240 (āhāra); iv.203 (dhammikā devā, adh˚ asurā); A i.75; iii.277; Sn 404; DhA ii.86 (dohaḷa); iv.185 (˚lābha); PvA 25 (=suddha, manohara). Also as saha -- dh˚ (esp. in conn. w. pañha, a justified, reasonable, proper question: D i.94; S iv.299 in detail) Vin iv.141; D i.161; iii.115; A i.174. -- a˚ unjust, illegal etc. Vin iv.285; S iv.203; A iii.243. Dhammin
Dhammin1
(adj.) [Sk. dharmin] only -- ˚: having the nature or quality of, liable to, consisting in, practising, acting like, etc. (as ˚dhamma B 2 a), viz. uppāda -- vaya˚ D ii.157; maraṇa˚ ( = maraṇadhamma) A i.147; pāpa˚ Pv i.117 of evil nature. Dhammin
Dhammin2
( -- ˚) only in daḷha -- dh˚, which is customarily taken as a dern from dhanu, bow = having a strong bow (see dhamma3); although some passages admit interpretation as "of strong character or good practice," e. g. S i.185. Dhammiya
Dhammiya
(adj.) [Sk. dharmya; cp. dhammika] in accord- ance with the Dhamma PvA 242 (also a˚); Vism 306 (˚lābha). Dhammilla
Dhammilla
[Sk. dhammilla] the braided hair of women Dāvs iv.9. Dhammī
Dhammī
in ˚kathā see dhamma2. *Dhayati
*Dhayati
to suck: see dhātī. Caus. dhāpayati, pp. dhāta (q. v.). Dhara
Dhara
(usually -- ˚, except at Miln 420) (adj.) [Sk. dhara, to dhr see dharati] bearing, wearing, keeping; holding in mind, knowing by heart. Freq. in phrase dhammadhara (knowing the Dhamma, q. v.), vinaya˚, mātikā˚ e. g. D ii.125. dhamma˚ also Sn 58; Th 1, 187; Nd2 319; vinaya˚ Miln 344; jaṭājina˚ Sn 1010. See also dhāra. -- 340 -- Dharaṇa
Dharaṇa
(adj.) bearing, holding, comprising VvA 104 (suvaṇṇassa pañcadasa˚ nikkha holding, i. e. worth or equal to 15 parts of gold). -- f. -- ī bearing, i. e. pregnant with Sn 26 (of cows: godharaṇiyo paveniyo = gabbhiniyo SnA 39). As n. the Earth J v.311; vi.526; Miln 34; dharaṇī -- ruha N. of a tree J vi.482, 497; Miln 376. Dharati
Dharati
[Sk. dharati, dhṛ as in Gr. qro/nos; Lat. firmus & fretus. See also daḷha, dhata, dhamma, dhiti, dhuva] to hold, bear, carry, wear; to hold up, support; to bear in mind, know by heart; to hold out, endure, last, continue, live Sn 385 (take to heart, remember); DhA ii.68; -- ppr. dharamāṇa living, lasting J i.75 (dh˚e yeva suriye while the sun was still up); ii.6; Miln 240, 291 (Bhagavato dh˚ -- kāle); -- grd. dhareyya, in dh˚divasa the day when a young girl is to be carried (into the house of her husband) ThA, 25; cp. dhāreyya Th 2, 472 = vivāha ThA 285. -- pp. dhata (q. v.) -- Caus. dhāreti (q. v.). Dhava
Dhava1
[Sk. dhava = madhuratvaca, Halāyudha] the shrub Grislea Tomentosa A i.202, 204; J iv.209; vi.528. Dhava
Dhava2
[Sk. dhava, a newly formed word after vidhava, widow, q. v.] a husband ThA 121 (dh. vuccati sāmiko tad abhāvā vidhavā matapatikā ti attho). Dhavala
Dhavala
(adj.) [Sk. dhavala, to dhavati, see dhāvati & dhovati] white, dazzling white VvA 252; Dāvs ii.123; v.26. Dhavalatā
Dhavalatā
(f.) whiteness VvA 197. Dhāta
Dhāta
[Sk. *dhāyita of dhayati to suck, nourish, pp. dhīta] fed, satiated; satisfied, appeased Vin i.222; J i.185; ii.247, 446; v.73; vi.555; Pv i.118 (so read for dāta) = PvA 59 (: suhita titta); Miln 238, 249. -- f. abstr. dhātatā satiation, fulness, satisfaction, in ati˚ J ii.293. Dhātar
Dhātar
[n. ag. fr. dhṛ] upholder J v.225. Dhātī
Dhātī
(f.) [Sk. dhātrī = Gr. tiqh/nh wet nurse, to dhayati suck, suckle; Idg. *dhēi as in Gr. qh_sqai to milk, qh_lus feeding, qhlh/ female breast; cp. Lat. felare, femina ("giving suck"), filius ("suckling"); Oir. dīnu lamb; Goth. daddjan; Ohg. tila breast. See also dadhi, dhītā, dhenu] wet nurse, fostermother D ii.19; M i.395; ii.97; J i.57; iii.391; PvA 16, 176. In cpds. dhāti˚, viz. -- cela swaddling cloth, baby's napkin S i.205= J iii.309. Dhātu
Dhātu
(f.) [Sk. dhātu to dadhāti, Idg. *dhē, cp. Gr. ti/qhmi, a)na/ -- qhma, Sk. dhāman, dhāṭr ( = Lat. conditor); Goth. gadēds; Ohg. tāt, tuom (in meaning -- ˚=dhātu, cp. E. serf -- dom "condition of . . .") tuon=E. to do; & with k -- suffix Lat. facio, Gr. (e)/)qhk(a), Sk. dhāka; see also dhamma] element. Closely related to dhamma in meaning B 1b, only implying a closer relation to physical substance. As to its gen. connotation cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 198. -- 1. a primary element, of which the usual set comprises the four paṭhavī, āpo, tejo, vāyo (earth, water, fire, wind), otherwise termed cattāro mahābhūtā(ni): D i.215; ii.294; iii.228; S i.15; ii.169 sq., 224; iv.175, 195; A ii.165; iii.243; Vbh 14, 72; Nett 73. See discussed at Cpd. 254 sq. -- A defn of dhātu is to be found at Vism 485. -- Singly or in other combns paṭhavī˚ S ii.174; tejo˚ S i.144; D iii.227; the four plus ākāsa S iii.227, plus viññāna S ii.248; iii.231; see below 2 b. -- 2. (a) natural condition, property, disposition; factor, item, principle, form. In this meaning in var. combns & applications, esp. closely related to khandha. Thus mentioned with khandha & āyatana (sensory element & element of sense -- perception) as bodily or physical element, factor (see khandha B 1 d & cp. Nd2 under dhātu) Th 2, 472. As such (physical substratum) it constitutes one of the lokā or forms of being (khandha˚ dhātu˚ āyatana˚ Nd2 550). Freq. also in combn kāma -- dhātu, rūpa˚ arūpa˚ "the elements or properties of k. etc." as preceding & conditioning bhava in the respective category (Nd2 s. v.). See under d. -- As "set of conditions or state of being ( -- ˚)" in the foll.: loka˚ a world, of which 10 are usually mentioned (equalling 10,000: PvA 138) S i.26; v.424; Pv ii.961; Vbh 336; PvA 138; KS ii.101, n. 1; -- nibbāna˚ the state of N. S v.8; A ii.120; iv.202; J i.55; It 38 (dve: see under Nibbāna); Miln 312. Also in the foll. connections: amata˚ It 62; bhū˚ the verbal root bhū DA i.229; ṭhapitāya dhātuyā "while the bodily element, i. e. vitality lasts" Miln 125; vaṇṇa˚ form, beauty S i.131; Pv i.31. In these cases it is so far weakened in meaning, that it simply corresponds to E. abstr. suffix -- hood or -- ity (cp. ˚hood=origin. "form": see ketu), so perhaps in Nibbāna˚=Nibbāna -- dom. Cp. dhātuka. -- (b) elements in sense -- consciousness: referring to the 6 ajjhattikāni & 6 bāhirāni āyatanāni S ii.140 sq. Of these sep. sota˚ D i.79; iii.38; Vbh 334; dibbasota˚ S ii.121, 212; v.265, 304; A i.255; iii.17, 280; v.199; cakkhu˚ Vbh 71 sq.; mano˚ Vbh 175, 182, 301; mano -- viññāṇa˚ Vbh 87, 89, 175, 182 sq. -> (c) various: aneka˚ A i.22; iii.325; v.33; akusala˚ Vbh 363; avijjā˚ S ii.132; ābhā˚ S ii.150; ārambha˚ S v.66, 104 sq.; A i.4; ii.338; ṭhiti˚ S ii.175; iii.231; A iii.338; dhamma˚ S ii.56; nekkhamma˚ S ii.151; A iii.447; nissāraṇiyā dhātuyo (5) D iii.239; A iii.245, 290. See further S i.134, 196; ii.153, 248 (aniccā); iii.231 (nirodha); iv.67; A i.176; ii.164; iv.385; Dhs 58, 67, 121; Nett 57, 64 sq.; ThA 20, 49, 285, -- (d) Different sets and enumerations: as 3 under kāma˚, rūpa˚, arūpa A i.223; iii.447; Ps i.137; Vbh 86, 363, 404 sq.; under rūpa˚, arūpa˚, nirodha˚ It 45. -- as 6 (pathavī etc.+ākāsa˚ & viññāṇa˚): D iii.247; A i.175 sq.; M iii.31, 62, 240; Ps i.136; Vbh 82 sq. -- as 7 (ābhā subha etc.): S ii.150. -- 18: Ps i.101, 137; ii.230, Dhs 1333; Vbh 87 sq., 401 sq.; Vism 484 sq. -- 3. a humour or affection of the body DA i.253 (dhātusamatā). -- 4. the remains of the body after cremation PvA 76; a relic VvA 165 (sarīra˚, bodily relic); Dāvs v.3 (dasana˚ the toothrelic). -- abl. dhātuso according to one's nature S ii.154 sq. (sattā sattehi saddhiŋ saŋsandanti etc.); It 70 (id.); S iii.65.

-- kathā N. of 3rd book of the Abhidhamma Vism 96. -- kucchi womb Miln 176; -- kusala skilled in the elements M iii.62; ˚kusalatā proficiency in the (18) elements D iii.212; Dhs 1333; -- ghara "house for a relic," a dagoba SnA 194. -- cetiya a shrine over a relic DhA iii.29; -- nānatta diversity of specific experience D iii.289; S ii.143; iv.113 sq., 284; -- vibhāga distribution of relics VvA 297; PvA 212. Dhātuka
Dhātuka
(adj.) (only -- ˚) having the nature, by nature, affected with, -- like (cp. ˚dhamma B 2a); often simply = first part of cpd. (cp. E. friend -- like= friendly=friend) J i.438 (kiliṭṭha˚ miserable), ii.31 (sama˚), 63 (badhira˚ deaf), 102 (paṇḍuroga˚ having jaundice), 114 (dhuttika˚); iv.137 (vāmanaka˚ deformed), 391 (muddhā˚); v.197 (āvāṭa˚); DhA i.89 (anattamana˚). Dhātura
Dhātura
(adj. -- ˚) [ = *dhātuya] in cha˚ consisting of six elements (purisa) M iii.239 (where āpodhātu omitted by mistake). See dhātu 2 c. Dhāna
Dhāna
(adj. -- n.) [Sk. dhāna, to dadhāti; cp. dhātu] (adj.) holding, containing ( -- ˚) M i.11 (ahi kaṇṭaka˚; cp. ādhāna & kaṇṭaka). -- (n.) nt. a receptacle Dh 58 (sankāra˚ dust -- heap = ṭhāna DhA i.445). f. dhānī a seat (= ṭhāna), in rāja˚ "the king's seat," a royal town. Often in comb with gāma & nigama (see gāma 3 a): Vin iii.89; J vi.397; Pv ii.1318. Dhāniya
Dhāniya
(adj.) [Sk. dhānya, cp. dhañña2] wealthy, rich, abundant in ( -- ˚) J iii.367 (pahūtadhana˚; v. l. BB ˚dhāritaŋ); (nt.) riches, wealth J v.99, 100. Dhāra
Dhāra
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [Sk. dhāra to dhāreti; cp. dhara] bearing, holding, having D i.74 (udaka -- rahado sītavāri˚); M i.281 (ubhato˚) Sn 336 (ukkā˚); It 101 (antimadeha˚), 108 (ukkā˚). See also dhārin. -- 341 -- Dhāraka
Dhāraka
(adj. -- n.) 1. bearing, one who holds or possesses DhA iii.93 (sampattiŋ). -- 2. one who knows or remembers A ii.97 (˚jātika); iv.296 sq., 328 (id.). Dhāraṇa
Dhāraṇa
(nt.) [cp. Sk. dhāraṇa, to dhāreti] 1. wearing, in mālā˚ (etc.) D i.5 = A ii.210=Pug 58; KhA 37; cīvara˚ A ii.104=Pug 45. -- 2. maintaining, sustaining, keeping up Miln 320 (āyu˚ bhojana). -- 3. bearing in mind, remembrance Vin iv.305; M ii.175 (dhamma˚). Dhāraṇaka
Dhāraṇaka
[der. fr. dhāraṇa] 1. a debtor (see dhāreti 4) J ii.203; iv.45. -- 2. a mnemonician Miln 79. Dhāraṇatā
Dhāraṇatā
(f.) 1. wearing, being dressed with ( = dhāraṇa 1) Miln 257. -- 2. mindfulness (=dhāraṇa 3) Nd2 628= Dhs 14. Dhāraṇā
Dhāraṇā
(f.) [to dhāraṇa] 1. memory Miln 79. -- 2. the earth ("the upholder," cp. dharaṇī) J vi.180. Dhārā
Dhārā1
(f.) [Sk. dhārā, from dhāvati 1] torrent, stream, flow, shower D i.74 (sammā˚ an even or seasonable shower; DA i.218 = vuṭṭhi); ii.15 (udakassa, streams); J i.31; Ps i.125 (udaka˚); Pv ii.970 (sammā˚); VvA 4 (hingulika˚); PvA 139; DhA iv.15 (assu˚); Sdhp 595 (vassa˚). Dhārā
Dhārā2
(f.) [Sk. dhārā, from dhāvati 2.] the edge of a weapon J i.455; vi.449; DhA 317; DA i.37. -- (adj.) ( -- ˚) having a (sharp) edge J i.414 (khura˚) Miln 105 (sukhuma˚); ekato˚ -- ubhato˚ single -- & double -- edged J i.73 (asi); iv.12 (sattha). Dhārin
Dhārin
(adj. -- ˚) [Sk. dhārin, see dhāreti & cp. ˚dhara, ˚dhāra] holding, wearing, keeping; often in phrase antimadeha˚ "wearing the last body" (of an Arahant) S i.14; Sn 471; It 32, 40. -- J i.47 (virūpa -- vesa˚); Dāvs v.15. -- f. ˚inī Pv i.108 (kāsikuttama˚). Dhāretar
Dhāretar
[n. ag. to dhāreti 3] one who causes others to remember, an instructor, teacher (cp. dhāraṇaka) A iv.196 (sotā sāvetā uggahetā dh.). Dhāreti
Dhāreti
[Caus. of dharati, q. v. for etym.] to hold, viz. 1. to carry, bear, wear, possess; to put on, to bring, give D i.166≈(chavadussāni etc.); Vin i.16 = D i.110≈ (telapajjotaŋ); D ii.19 (chattaŋ to hold a sunshade over a person); PvA 47 (id.); dehaŋ dh. to "wear," i. e. to have a body It 50, 53 (antimaŋ d.); J iv.3 (padumaŋ); vi.136; Pv i.31 (vaṇṇaŋ dh.=vahasi PvA 14); tassa kahāpaṇaŋ daṇḍaŋ dh. "to inflict a fine of a k. on him" Miln 171. -- 2. to hold back, restrain Vin iv.261 (kathaŋ dhāretha how do you suppress or conceal pregnancy?); Dh 222 (kodhaŋ). -- 3. to bear in mind, know by heart, understand: dhammaŋ to know the Dhamma A iii.176; tipiṭakaŋ buddhavacanaŋ to know the 3 Piṭakas Miln 18. -- D ii.2; Pug 41 (suṇāti, bhaṇati, dh.=remember). Cp. upadhāreti. -- With double acc.: to receive as, to take=believe, to take for, consider as, call: upāsakaŋ maŋ dhāretu Bhagavā "call me your disciple" Vin i.16 & passim; atthajālan ti pi naŋ dhārehi (call it . . .) D i.46; yathā pañhaŋ Bhagavā vyākaroti tathā naŋ dhareyyāsi (believe it) D i.222; yathā no (atthaŋ) Gotamo vyākarissati tathā naŋ dhāressāma D i.236; evaŋ maŋ dhārehi adhimuttacittaŋ (consider as) Sn 1149 (=upalakkhehi Nd2 323). -- 4. to admit, allow, allow for, take up, support (a cause); to give, to owe D i.125 (may allow), 126; A ii.69 (na kassa kiñci dh. pays no tribute); Miln 47 (atthaŋ). Dhāreyya
Dhāreyya
(nt.) [orig. grd. of dhāreti] the ceremony of being carried away, i. e. the marriage ceremony, marriage (cp. dhareyya under dharati) Th 2, 472 (text has vāreyya, but ThA, 285 explains dhāreyya = vivāha). Dhāva
Dhāva
[Sk. dhāva] running, racing M i.446. Dhāvati
Dhāvati
[Sk. dhāvati & dhāvate: 1. to flow, run etc.; cp. Gr. qe/w (both meanings); Ags. déaw = E. dew; Ohg. tou=Ger. tau; cp. also dhārā & dhunāti. -- 2. to clean (by running water) etc.=P. dhovati, q. v.] 1. to run, run away, run quickly Sn 939 (cp. Nd1 419); Dh 344; J i.308; vi.332; Nd1 405=Nd2 304iii.; Pv iv.161 =palāyati PvA 2841; DhA i.389 (opp. gacchati); PvA 4; Sdhp 378. -- 2. to clean etc.: see dhovati; cp. dhavala & dhārā2. Dhāvana
Dhāvana
(nt.) [Sk. dhāvana] running, galloping J ii.431; Miln 351. Dhāvin
Dhāvin:
see pa˚. Dhi & Dhī
Dhi1
& Dhī (indecl.) [Sk. dhik] an excln of reproach & disgust: fie! shame! woe! (with acc. or gen.) S v.217 (read dhī taŋ for dhītaŋ); Dh 389 (dhī = garahāmi DhA iv.148); J i.507; DhA i.179 (haŋ dhī), 216 (v. l. BB but text has haŋdi). An inorganic r replaces the sandhi -- cons. in dhī -- r -- atthu jīvitaŋ Sn 440; cp. Th i.1150; dhi -- r -- atthu jātiyā J i.59. Dhi
Dhi2
(f.) [Sk. dhīḥ to didheti, cp. Av. dī to see, Goth. (filu -- ) deisei cunning. See also dhīra] wisdom, only in Com. expl. of paññā: "dhi vuccati paññā" (exegesis of dhīra) at Nd1 44 = J ii.140=iii.38. Dhikkita
Dhikkita
(adj.) [Sk. dhikkṛta, of dhi1+kata] reproached, reviled; used also medially: blaming, censuring, condemning J i.155 ( = garahitā Com.); also in Com. expl. of dhīra (=dhikkita -- pāpa detesting evil) at Nd1 44=J ii.140=iii.38 (cp. dhi2). Dhiti
Dhiti
(f.) [Sk. dhṛti to dhṛ, see dharati] energy, courage, steadfastness, firm character, resolution. S i.122, 215 = Sn 188 (cp. SnA 237); J i.266, 280; iii.239; vi.373; Vbh 211; Dhs 13 (+thāma), 22, 289, 571; Miln 23, 329; Sdhp 574. Equivalent to "wisdom" (cp. juti & jutimant & Sk. dhīti) in expl. of dhīra as "dhitisampanna" Nd1 44≈(see dhi2); PvA 131. Dhitimant
Dhitimant
(adj.) [Sk. dhṛtimant; cp. also dhīmant] coura- geous, firm, resolute A i.25; Sn 462, 542; Th i,6; J ii.140; vi.286 (wise, cp. dhiti). Dhītar
Dhītar
and Dhītā (f.) [Sk. dhītā, orig. pp. of dhayati to suck (cp. Lat. filia): see dhāta & dhātī, inflūenced in inflection by Sk. duhitṛ, although etymologically different] daughter Th 2, 336 (in faith); J i.152, 253; vi.366; Pv i.115; DhA iii.171, 176; PvA 16, 21, 61, 105. deva˚ a female deva (see deva) VvA 137 etc.; nattu˚ a granddaughter PvA 17; mātula˚ a niece PvA 55; rāja˚ a princess J i.207; PvA 74. In compn dhītu.

-- kkama one who is desirous of a daughter J vi.307 ( = dhītu atthāya vicarati Com.; v. l. dhītu -- kāma); -- dhītā granddaughter PvA 16. Dhītalikā
Dhītalikā
(f.) [Dimin. of dhītā; cp. dhītikā & pottha- likā] a doll Vin iii.36, 126 (dāru˚); DhsA 321; PvA 16. Dhītikā
Dhītikā
(f.) [cp. dhītalikā] a doll Th 2, 374 ( = dhītalikā ThA 252). Dhīna
Dhīna
see adhīna. Dhīyati
Dhīyati
[Sk. dhīyate, Pass. to dahati1] to be contained ThA 13 (so read for dhiyati); PvA 71. Dhīra
Dhīra
(adj.) [combining in meaning 1. Sk. dhīra "firm" fr. dhārayati (see dharati & dhiti); 2. Vedic. dhīra "wise" fr. dīdheti (see dhi2). The fluctuation of connotation is also scen in the expls of Coms which always give the foll. three conventional etymologies, viz. dhikkitapāpa, dhiti -- sampanna, dhiyā ( = paññāya) samannāgata Nd144≈(see dhi2)] constant, firm, self -- relying, of character; wise, possessing the knowledge of the Dhamma, often=paṇḍita & Ep. of an Arahant D ii.128; S i.24 (lokapariyāyaŋ aññāya nibbutā dh.), 122, 221; Sn 45, 235 (nibbanti dhīrā), 913 (vippamutto diṭṭhigatehi dh.), 1052; It 68 (˚upasevanā, opp. bāla), 122 (dh. sabbaganthapamocano); Dh 23, 28, 177 (opp. bāla); Th 1, 4; 2, 7 (dhammā=tejussadehi ariyamaggadhammehi ThA 13); J iii.396; v.116; Pv ii.16; ii.945; Nd1 44, 55, 482; Nd2 324 (=jutimant); Miln 342; KhA 194, 224, 230; DhA iii.189 (=paṇḍita). -- 342 -- Dhuta
Dhuta
(& Dhūta) [cp. Sk. dhuta & dhūta, pp. of dhunāti] 1. shaken, moved Dāvs v.49 (vāta˚). -- 2. lit. "shaken off," but always expld in the commentaries as "one who shakes off" either cvil dispositions (kilese), or obstacles to spiritual progress (vāra, nīvaraṇa). The word is rare. In one constantly repeated passage (Vin i.45 = 305=ii.2=iii.21=iv.213) it is an adj. opposed to kosajja lazy, remiss; and means either scrupulous or punctilious. At D i.5 it is used of a pain. At Sn 385 we are told of a dhutadhamma, meaning a scrupulous way of life, first for a bhikkhu, then for a layman. This poem omits all higher doctrine and confines itself to scrupulousness as regards minor, elementary matters. Cp. Vism 61 for a defn of dhuta.

-- anga a set of practices leading to the state of or appropriate to a dhuta, that is to a scrupulous person First occurs in a title suffixed to a passage in the Parivāra deprecating such practices. The passage occurs twice (Vin v.131, 193), but the title, probably later than the text, is added only to the 2nd of the two. The passage gives a list of 13 such practices, each of them an ascetic practice not enjoined in the Vinaya. The 13 are also discussed at Vism 59 sq. The Milinda devotes a whole book (chap. vi.) to the glorification of these 13 dhutangas, but there is no evidence that they were ever widely adopted. Some are deprecated at M i.282, & examples of one or other of them are given at Vin iii.15; Bu i.59; J iii.342; iv.8; Miln 133, 348, 351; Vism 59 (˚kathā), 65 (˚cora), 72 (id.), 80 (defn); SnA 494; DhA i.68; ii.32 (dhūtanga); iv.30. Nd1 188 says that 8 of them are desirable. -- dhara mindful of punctiliousness Miln 342 (āraññaka dh. jhāyin). -- vata the vow to perform the dhutangas DhA vi.165. -- vāda one who inculcates punctiliousness S ii.156; A i.23; Miln 380; Vism 80; ThA 69; DhA ii.30. -- vādin = ˚vāda J i.130. Dhutatta
Dhutatta
(nt.) [Sk. *dhūtatvaŋ] the state of being punc- tilious Vin i.305 (of going naked). Dhutta
Dhutta
[Sk. dhūrta, from dhūrvati & dhvarati to injure, deceive, cp. Lat. fraus; Idg. *dhreu, an enlarged form of which is *dreugh in Sk. druhyati, drugdha = Ohg. triogan, troum etc.: see duhana] of abandoned life, wild, fast, cunning, crafty, fraudulent; wicked, bad. (m.) a rogue, cheat, evil -- minded person, scoundrel, rascal. There are three sorts of a wild life, viz. akkha˚ in gambling, itthi˚ with women, surā˚ in drink (Sn 106; J iv.255). -- Vin ii.277 (robber, highwayman); A iii.38 (a˚); iv.288 (itthi˚); J i.49 (surā˚), 290, 291; ii.416; iii.287; iv.223, 494 (surā˚); ThA 250 (itthi˚), 260 (˚purisa), 266 (˚kilesa); PvA 3, 5 (itthi˚, surā˚), 151. -> f. dhutti (dhuttī) J ii.114 (˚brāhmaṇī). Dhuttaka
Dhuttaka
= dhutta S i.131; Th 2, 366 (=itthi -- dhutta ThA 250); DhA iii.207; Dpvs ix.19. -- f. dhuttikā always in combn w. chinnikā (meretrix, q. v.) Vin iii.128; J ii.114; Miln 122. Dhunana
Dhunana
(nt.) [Sk. dhūnana] shaking, in ˚ka (adj.) con- sisting in shaking off, doing away with, giving up (kilesa˚) SnA 373. Dhunāti
Dhunāti
[Sk. dhunoti (dhūnoti), dhunāti & dhuvati, Caus. dhūnayati. Idg. *dhū to be in turbulent motion; cp. Gr. qu/w, qu/nw (to be impetuous), qu/ella (storm), qu/mos "thyme"; Lat. fūmus (smoke = fume), suffio; Lith. duja (dust); Goth. dauns (smoke & smell); Ohg. toum. Connected also w. dhāvate; see further dhūpa, dhūma, dhūsara, dhona & a secondary root Idg. *dheṷes in dhaŋsati] to shake, toss; to shake off, remove, destroy S i.156 (maccuno senaŋ); Th 1, 256= Miln 245; dhunāti pāpake dhamme dumapattaŋ va māluto Th i.2; J i.11 (v. 48); iii.44 (hatthe dhuniŋsu, wrung their hands); Vv 649 (=VvA 278 misprint dhumanti); aor. adhosi [=Sk. adhauṣīt] Sn 787 (micchādiṭṭhiŋ= pajahi SnA 523). pp. dhuta & dhūta (q. v.). Cp. nis˚, o˚. Dhuma
Dhuma
in ˚kaṭacchuka = druma˚ having a wooden spoon (see duma), cp. Mar. dhumārā? (Ed. in note) DhA ii.59. [Doubtful reading.] Dhura
Dhura
(m. & nt.) [Sk. dhur f. & dhura m.] 1. a yoke, a pole, the shaft of a carriage J i.192 (purima -- sakaṭa˚), 196; Cp. ii.8, 4. -- 2. (fig.) a burden, load, charge, office, responsibility Sn 256 (vahanto porisaŋ dh ˚ŋ "carrying a human yoke" = purisânucchavikā bhārā SnA 299), 694 (asama˚ one who has to bear a heavy burden=asamaviriya SnA 489); DhA ii.97 (sama˚); dve dhurāni two burdens (viz. gantha˚ & vipassanā, study & contemplation) DhA i.7; iv.37; asamadhura J i.193; vi.330. Three dhurā are enumd at J iv.242 as saddhā˚, sīla˚, and paññā˚. -- Sdhp 355 (saddhā˚), 392 (+viriya), 413 (paññā˚) dh ˚ŋ nikkhipati to take off the yoke, to put down a burden, to give up a charge or renounce a responsibility (see ˚nikkhepa): nikkhittadhura A i.71; ii.148; iii.65, 108, 179 sq.; a˚ S v.197, 225; Nd2 131; SnA 236 (=dhuravant). -- 3. the forepart of anything, head, top, front; fig. chief, leader, leading part. nāvāya dh. the forecastle of a ship J iii.127=iv.142; dh -- vāta head wind J i.100; ekaŋ dh ˚ŋ nīharati to set aside a foremost part DA i.135. -> 4. the far end, either as top or beginning J iii.216 (yāva dh -- sopānā); iv.265 (dh -- sopānaŋ katvā making the staircase end); v.458 (magga -- dhure ṭhatvā standing on the far end or other side of the road, i. e. opposite; gloss BB maggantare); VvA 44 (dh -- gehassa dvāre at the door of the top house of the village, i. e. the first or last house).

-- gāma a neighbouring village (lit. the first v. that one meets) J i.8, 237; iv.243; DhA iii.414; -- dhorayha a yoked ox S i.173 = Sn 79 (viriyam me dh -- dh ˚ŋ); SnA 150. -- nikkhepa the putting down of the yoke, the giving up of one's office J iii.243; Vism 413. -- bhatta a meal where a monk is invited as leader of other monks who likewise take part in it J i.449. v. l. (for dhuva˚); iii.97 (v. l. dhuva˚); Vism 66. -- yotta yoke -- tie, i. e. the tie fastening the yoke to the neck of the ox J i.192; vi.253; -- vahana bearing a burden (cp. dhorayha) DhA iii.472; -- vihāra a neighbouring monastery (cp. ˚gāma) J i.23; iv.243; DhA i.126 (Np.); iii.224 (id.); -- sampaggāha "a solid grip of the burden" (Mrs. Rh.D.) Dhs 13, 22 etc. (opp. nikkhepa); -- ssaha enduring one's yoke Th 1, 659. Cp. dhuratā. Dhuratā
Dhuratā
(f.) [abstr. fr. dhura] in cpd. anikkhitta -- dh. "a state of unflinching endurance" Nd2 394, 405 = Dhs 13 etc.=Vbh 350, 370 (+dhura -- sampaggāha); opp. nikkhitta -- dh. weakness of character, lack of endurance (= pamāda) ibid. Dhuravant
Dhuravant
(adj.) [cp. Sk. dhuradhara] one who has or bears his yoke, patient, enduring S i.214 = Sn 187 (: cetasikaviriya -- vasena anikkhittadhura SnA 236). Dhuva
Dhuva
(adj.) [Sk. dhruva, cp. Lith. drúta firm; Goth. triggws = Ohg. triuwi (Ger. treue, trost); Ags. tréowe= E. true, of Idg. *dheru, enlarged form of *dher, see dharati] stable, constant, permanent; fixed, regular, certain, sure D i.18; S i.142; iv.370; A ii.33; J i.19; v.121 (˚sassataŋ maraṇaŋ); iii.325; Bu ii.82; Miln 114 (na tā nadiyo dh -- salilā). 334 (˚phala); Vism 77; DA i.112 (maraṇaŋ apassanto dh.), 150 (=thāvara); DhA iii.170 (adhuvaŋ jīvitaŋ dhuvaŋ maraṇaŋ); ThA 241; Sdhp 331. -- nt. permanence, stability M i.326; Dh 147. Also Ep. of Nibbāna (see ˚gāmin). -- nt. as adv. dhuvaŋ continuously, constantly, always J ii.24=Miln 172; PvA 207; certainly J i.18, v.103. -- adhuva (addhuva) changing, unstable, impermanent D i.19 (anicca a. appāyuka); M i.326; S iv.302; J i.393; iii.19 (addhuva -- sīla); VvA 77.

-- gāmin leading to permanence, i. e. Nibbāna S iv.370 (magga); -- colā (f.) constantly dressed, of a woman Vin iii.129; -- ṭṭhāniya lasting (of shoes) Vin i.190; -- dhamma one who has reached a stable condition DhA iii.289; -- paññatta (a) permanently appointed (seat) Vin iv.274; -- bhatta a constant supply of food Vin i.25, 243; ii.15 (˚ika); J i.449 (where the v. l. dhura˚ seems to be preferable instead of dhuva˚, see dhurabhatta); cp. niccabhatta; -- yāgu constant (distribution of) rice-gruel Vin i.292 sq.; -- lohitā (f.) a woman whose blood is stagnant Vin iii.129; -- ssava always discharging, constantly flowing J i.6, v.35. -- 343 -- Dhūta & Dhūtanga
Dhūta
& Dhūtanga see dhuta. Dhūpa
Dhūpa
[Sk. dhūpa of Idg. *dhūp, enlarged fr. *dhū in dhunāti (q. v.)] incense J i.51, 64, 290 (gandha˚, dvandva, cpd.); iii.144; vi.42; PvA 141 (gandhap̄uppha˚). dh˚ŋ dadāti to incense (a room) J i.399. Sometimes misspelt dhūma, e. g. VvA 173 (gandhapuppha˚). Dhūpana
Dhūpana
(nt.) [Sk. dhūpana] incensing, fumigation; perfume, incense, spice J iii.144; iv.236; Pv iii.53 (sāsapa˚). Dhūpāyati & Dhūpayati
Dhūpāyati
& Dhūpayati [Sk. dhūpayati; caus. fr. dhūpa] to fumigate, make fragrant, perfume Vin i.180; S i.40 (dhūpāyita) = Th 1, 448; A ii.214 sq.; J i.73; Miln 333 (sīlagandhena lokaŋ dh.); DhA i.370 (aor. dhūpāyi); iii.38 (ppr. dhūpayamāna). -- pp. dhūpita. Dhūpita
Dhūpita
[pp. of dhūpāyati] fumigated, flavoured Vv 435 (tela˚ flavoured with oil). Cp. pa˚. Dhūma
Dhūma
[Vedic dhūma = Lat. fumus; Gr. qumo/s (mood, mind), qumia/w (fumigate); Ohg. toum etc. Idg. *dhu, cp. Gr. qu/w (burn incense), qu/os (incense). See also dhunāti] smoke, fumes Vin i.204 (aroma of drugs); M i.220 (dh ˚ŋ kattā); A v.352 (id.); A ii.53; iv.72 sq.; v.347 sq.; J iii.401, 422 (tumhākaŋ dh -- kāle at the time when you will end in smoke, i. e. at your cremation); DhA i.370 (eka˚ one mass of smoke); VvA 173 (for dhūpa, in gandhapuppha˚); PvA 230 (micchā -- vitakka˚ in expl. of vidhūma).

-- andha blind with smoke J i.216; -- kālika (cp. above dh. -- kāle) lasting till a person's cremation Vin ii.172, 288; -- ketu fire (lit. whose sign is smoke) J iv.26; v.63; -- jāla a mass of smoke J v.497; -- netta a smoke -- tube, i. e. a surgical instrument for sniffing up the smoke of medical drugs Vin i.204; ii.120; J iv.363; ThA 14; -- sikhā fire (Ep. of Agni; lit. smoke -- crested) Vv 352 (sikha) = VvA 161; Vism 416; also as sikhin J vi.206. Dhūmāyati & Dhūmayati
Dhūmāyati
& Dhūmayati [Sk. dhūmayati, Denom. fr. dhūma] to smoke, to smoulder, choke; to be obscured, to cloud over M i.142 (v. l. dhūpāyati); Pv i.64 (pariḍayhati+dh. hadayaŋ); DhA i.425 (akkhīni me dh. = I see almost nothing). pp. dhūmāyita. Dhūmāyanā
Dhūmāyanā
(f.) smoking, smouldering M i.143; Nett 24 (as v. l. to dhūpāyanā). Dhūmāyitatta
Dhūmāyitatta
(nt.) [abstr. to dhūmāyati] becoming like smoke, clouding over, obscuration S iii.124 (+timirāyitattaŋ). Dhūsara
Dhūsara
(adj.) [Sk. dhūsara, Ags. dust = E. dust & dusk, Ger. dust; see dhvaŋsati & dhunoti & cp. Walde, Lat. Wtb. under furo] dust -- coloured VvA 335. Dhenu
Dhenu
(f.) [Sk. dhenu, to dhayati to give suck, see dhātī & dhītar] a milch cow, a female animal in general J i.152 (miga˚ hind); Vv 806; DhA i.170; 396; PvA 112. In simile at Vism 313. Dhenupa
Dhenupa
[dhenu+pa from pibati] a suckling calf M i.79; Sn 26. Dheyya
Dheyya
( -- ˚) [Sk. dheya, orig. grd. of dhā, see dahati1] 1. in the realm of, under the sway or power of: anañña˚ J iv.110; kamma˚ A iv.285; maccu˚ (q. v.) S i.22; Sn 358, 1104; Th 2, 10 ( = maccu ettha dhīyati ThA 13); māra˚ A iv.228. -- 2. putting on, assigning, in nāma˚ Dhs 1307. Dhota
Dhota
[Sk. dhāuta, pp. of dhavati2, see dhovati] washed, bleached, clean J i.62 (˚sankha a bleached shell); ii.275; PvA 73 (˚vattha), 116 (˚hattha with clean hands), 274 (id.); Vism 224 (id.). Dhona
Dhona
(adj. -- n.) [either = dhota, Sk. dhauta, see dhovati or=dhuta, see dhuta & dhunana. Quite a diff. suggestion as regards etym. is given by Kern, Toev. 117, who considers it as a possible dern fr. (a)dho, after analogy of poṇa. Very doubtful] 1. purified M i.386; Sn 351, 786, 813, 834 (=dhutakilesa SnA 542); J iii.160 (˚sākha=patthaṭasākha Com.; v. l. BB vena˚); Nd1 77=176 (: dhonā vuccati paññā etc., dhuta & dhota used indiscriminately in exegesis following). -- 2. (pl.) the four requisites of a bhikkhu DhA iii.344 (: dhonā vuccati cattāro paccayā, in Com. on atidhonacārin Dh 240; gloss K. dhovanā, cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 100). Dhopati
Dhopati
[a variant of dhovati, taken as Caus. formation] to wash, cleanse D i.93 (dhopetha, imper.; v. l. B. dhovatḥa), 124 (dhopeyya; v. l. B. dhoveyya). Dhopana
Dhopana
(nt.) [a variant of dhovana, q. v.] 1. ceremonial washing of the bones of the dead D i. 6; aṭṭhi -- dhovana Bdhgh at DA i.84; A v.216 (see Commentary at 364). -> 2. Surgical washing of a wound J ii.117. -- 3. In vaŋsadhopana, apparently a feat by acrobats J iv.390. It is possible that the passage at D i. 6 really belongs here. See the note at Dial. i.9. Dhorayha
Dhorayha
[for *dhor -- vayha = Sk. *dhaurvahya, abstr. fr. dhurvaha; may also directly correspond to the latter] "carrying a yoke," a beast of burden S i.28; D iii.113 (purisa˚); A i.162.

-- vata (nt.) the practice of carrying a burden, the state of a beast of burden, drudgery S i.28; -- sīla accustomed to the yoke, enduring; patient Dh 208 ( = dhuravahana -- sīlatāya dh. DhA iii.272); -- sīlin= ˚sīla J ii.97 (=dhura -- vahanaka -- ācārena sampanna Com.). Dhoreyya
Dhoreyya
( -- ˚) [Sk. dhaureya, der. fr. dhura] "to be yoked," accustomed to the yoke, carrying a burden, in kamma˚ Miln 288. Dhova
Dhova
(adj. -- n.) [Sk. dhāva, see dhovati] washing, cleansing Bu ii.15. Dhovati
Dhovati
[Sk. dhāvati, see dhāvati] to rinse, wash, cleanse, purify Vin ii.208, 210, 214; Sn p. 104 (bhājanāni); J i.8; v.297. -- dhovi J vi.366; DhA iii.207. ger. dhovitvā J i.266; iv.2; VvA 33 (pattaŋ), 77 (id.); PvA 75, 144. inf. dhovituŋ Vin ii.120; iv.261 pp. dhota (q. v.) & dhovita J i.266. -- See also dhopati (*dhopeti). Dhovana
Dhovana
(nt.) [Sk. dhāvana; see also dhopana] washing Vin iv.262; S iv.316 (bhaṇḍa˚); A i.132, 161, 277; It 111 (pādānaŋ); J ii.129; vi.365 (hattha˚); Miln 11; Vism 343; PvA 241 (hattha -- pāda˚); DhA ii.19 (pāda˚); fig. (ariyaŋ) A v.216. -- 344 -- -- N. Na
Na1
[Sk. na (in cana) & nā (in nānā, vi -- nā) Idg. pron. base *no, cp. Gr. nh /, nai/; Lat. nē, nae surely, also encl. in ego -- ne & in question utruṁne, nam; fuller form *eno, as in Sk. anā (adv.) anena, anayā (instr. pron. 3rd); Gr. e)/nh "that day"; Lat. enim] expletive -- emphatic particle, often used in comparative -- indefinite sense: just so, like this, as if, as (see cana & canaŋ) J v.339 (Com. cttha na -- kāro upamāne). Also as naŋ (cp. cana> canaŋ) Vin ii.81, 186 (kathaŋ naŋ = kathaŋ nu); J ii.416; v.302; vi.213 (Com. p. 216: ettha eko na -- karo pucchanattho hoti); Th 1, 1204; Miln 177. Perhaps at Sn 148 (kattha -- ci naŋ, v. l. BB na; but Com. KhA 247= etaŋ). To this na belongs na3; see also nu & nanu. Na
Na2
[Ved. na = Idg. *ně; Lat. ne in n' unquam etc., Goth. ni; Sk. na ca=Lat. neque=Goth. nih. Also Sk. nā= Idg. *nē, cp. Lat. Goth. nē] negātive & adversative particle "not" (Nd2 326: paṭikkhepa; KhA 170: paṭisedhe) 1. often apostr. n': n' atthi, n' etaŋ etc.; or contracted: nāhaŋ, nāpi etc., or with cuphonic consonant y: nayidaŋ (It 29, J iv.3), nayidha (It 36, 37), nayimaŋ (It 15) etc. As double negation implying emphatic affirmation: na kiñci na all, everything J i.295. -- 2. In disjunctive clauses: na . . . na neither -- nor, so -- or not so. In question: karoti na karoti ("or not") J ii.133. Cp. mā in same use. -> Often with added pi (api) in second part: na -- nāpi neither -- nor ("not -- but also not") S ii.65; M i.246; Pv i.119. -- 3. In syntactic context mostly emphasized by var. negative & adversative particles, viz. nāpi (see under 2); n' eva indeed not, not for all that J iii.55; or not KhA 219; n' eva -- na neither -- nor D i.33, 35; M i.486; A v.193; J i.207, 279; Vin ii.185; DhA i.328; ii.65; DA i.186, 188; n' eva -- na pana id. D i.24; na kho not indeed J ii.134; na ca but not (=this rather than that) J i.153; na tāva=na kho Vv 3713; na nu (in quest.= noune) is it not? PvA 74, 136; na no surely not Sn 224; na hi [cp. Gr. ou/xi/ not at all; nai/xi certainly] certainly not Dh 5, 184; Sn 666; Kh vii.6; na hi jātu id. Sn 152. -- See also nu, nū, no. -- 4, na is also used in the function of the negative prefix a -- (an -- ) in cases where the word -- negation was isolated out of a sentence negation or where a negated verb was substantified, e. g. (a) nacira (=acira) short, napparūpa abundant, napuŋsaka neuter, neka (=aneka) several; (b) natthi, natthika etc. (q. v.). Na
Na3
[identical with na1] base of demonstr. pron. 3rd pers. ( = ta˚), only in foll. cases: acc. sg. naŋ (mostly enclitic), fuller form enaŋ him, her, that one etc. Sn 139, 201, 385, 418, 980, 1076; It 32; Dh 42, 230; J i.152, 172, 222; iii.281; KhA 220; DhA i.181; iii.173; PvA 3, 68, 73.

-- acc. pl. ne them It 110 (v. l. te); Sn 223 ( = te manusse KhA 169); J ii.417; iii.204; v.458; DhA i.8, 13, 61, 101, 390; VvA 299. -- gen. dat. pl. nesaŋ D i.175, 191; It 63; J i.153; DhA iv.41; VvA 37, 136.; PvA 54, 201, 207. See also cna; cp. nava2. Nakula
Nakula
[Ved. nakula, cp. nakra crocodile] a mungoose, Viverra Ichneumon A v.289 sq.; J ii.53; vi.538; Miln 118, 394. Nakkhatta
Nakkhatta
(nt.) [Ved. nakṣatra collect. formation from naktiḥ & naktā = Gr. nu/c, Lat. nox, Goth. nahts, E. night=the nightly sky, the heavenly bodies of the night, as opposed to the Sun: ādicco tapataŋ mukhaŋ Vin i.246] the stars or constellations, a conjunction of the moon with diff. constellations, a lunar mansion or the constellations of the lunar zodiac, figuring also as Names of months & determinant factors of horoscopic and other astrological observation; further a celebration of the beginning of a new month, hence any kind of festival or festivity. -- The recognised number of such lunar mansions is 27, the names of which as given in Sk. sources are the same in Pāli, with the exception of 2 variations (Assayuja for Aśvinī, Satabhisaja for Śatatāraka). Enumd at Abhp. 58 -- 60 as follows: Assayuja [Sk. Aśvinī] Bharaṇī, Kattikā, Rohiṇī, Magasiraŋ [Sk. Mṛgaśīrṣa] Addā [Sk. Ārdrā], Punabbasu, Phussa [Sk. Puṣya], Asilesā, Maghā, Pubba -- phaggunī [Sk. Pūrva -- phalgunī). Uttara˚, Hattha, Cittā [Sk. Chaitra], Sāti [Svātī], Visākhā, Anurādhā, Jeṭṭhā, Mūlaŋ, Pubb -- āsāḷha [˚āṣāḍha], Uttar˚, Savaṇa, Dhaniṭṭhā, Satabhisaja [Śatatāraka], Pubba -- bhaddapadā, Uttara˚, Revatī. -- It is to be pointed out that the Niddesa speaks of 28 N. instead of 27 (Nd1 382: aṭṭhavīsati nakkhattāni), a discrepancy which may be accounted by the fact that one N. (the Orion) bore 2 names, viz. Mṛgaśīrṣa & Agrahayanī (see Plunkett, Ancient Calendars etc. p. 227 sq.). -- Some of these Ns. are more familiar & important than others, & are mentioned more frequently, e. g. Āsāḷha (Āsālhi˚) J i.50 & Uttarāsāḷha J i.63, 82; Kattikā & Rohiṇī SnA 456. -- nakkhattaŋ ādisati to augur from the stars, to set the horoscope Nd1 382; oloketi to read the stars, to scan the constellations J i.108, 253; ghoseti to proclaim (shout out) the new month (cp. Lat. calandae fr. cālāre to call out, scil. mensem), and thereby announce the festivity to be celebrated J i.250; n. ghuṭṭhaŋ J i.50, 433; sanghuṭṭhaŋ PvA 73; ghositaŋ VvA 31; kīḷati to celebrate a (nakkhatta -- ) festival J i.50, 250; VvA 63; DhA i.393 (cp. ˚kīḷā below). n. ositaŋ the festival at an end J i.433. -- nakkhatta (sg.) a constellation Sn 927; collect. the stars Vv 811 (cando nparivārito). nakkhattāni (pl.) the stars: nakkhattānaŋ mukhaŋ chando (the moon is the most prominent of the lights of night) Th 2.143; Vin i.246=Sn 569 (but cp. expl. at SnA 456: candayogavasena "ajja kattikā, ajja Rohiṇī" ti paññāṇato ālokakāraṇato sommabhāvato ca nakkhattānaŋ mukhaŋ cando ti vutto); D i.10 (nakkhattānaŋ pathagamanaŋ & uppatha -- gamanaŋ a right or wrong course, i. e. a straight ascension or deviation of the stars or planets); ii.259; iii.85, 90; A iv.86; Th 2, 143 (nakkhattāni namassantā bālā).

-- kīḷana = kīḷā DhA iii.461; -- kīḷā the celebration of a festival, making merry, taking a holiday J i.50; ThA 137; VvA 109; -- ggāha the seizure of a star (by a demon: see gāha), the disappearance of a planet (transit?) D i.10 (expl. at DA i.95 as nakkhattasa angārakādi -- gahasamāyoga); -- patha "the course of the stars," i. e. the nocturnal sky Dh 208; -- pada a constellation Vin ii.217; -- pāṭhaka an astrologer, soothsayer, augur Nd1 382; -- pīḷana the failing or obscuration of a star (as a sign of death in horoscopy) DhA i.166; -- mālā a garland of stars VvA 167; -- yoga a conjunction of the planets, a constellation in its meaning for the horoscope J i.82 253; DhA i.174 (+tithi -- karaṇa); ˚ŋ oloketi to set the horoscope DhA i.166, ˚ŋ uggaṇhāti id. Pv iii.54. -- rājā the king of the nakkhattas (i. e. the moon) J iii.348. -- 345 -- Nakha
Nakha
[Ved. nakha, cp. Sk. anghri foot; Gr. o)/nuc (claw, nail), Lat. unguis = Oir. inga; Ohg. nagal=E. nail] a nail of finger or toe, a claw Vin ii.133; Sn 610 (na angulīhi nakhehi vā); J v.489 (pañcanakhā sattā five -- nailed or -- toed beings); Kh ii.=Miln 26, cp. taca (pañcatacakaŋ); KhA 43; VvA 7 (dasa -- nakhasamodhāna putting the 10 fingers together); PvA 152, 192; Sdhp 104. Nakhaka
Nakhaka
(adj.) belonging to, consisting of or resembling a claw, in hatthi˚ like elephants' claws, Ep. of a castle (pāsāda) Vin ii.169 (Bdhgh on p. 323: hatthikumbhe patiṭṭhitaŋ, evaŋ evaŋkatassa kir' etaŋ nāmaŋ) (?). Nakhin
Nakhin
(adj.) having nails J vi.290 (tamba˚ with copper- coloured nails). Naga
Naga
[Sk. naga tree & mountain, referred by Fausböll & Uhlenbeck to na+gacchati, i. e. immovable ( = sthāvara), more probably however with Lidén (see Walde under nāvis) to Ohg. nahho, Ags. naca "boat=tree"; semantically mountain= trees, i. e. forest] mountain S i.195= Nd2 136a (nagassa passe āsīna, of the Buddha); Sn 180 (=devapabbata royal mountain SnA 216; or should it mean "forest"?); Th 1, 41 (˚vivara), 525; Pv ii.961 (˚muddhani on top of the Mount, i. e. Mt. Sineru PvA 138; the Buddha was thought to reside there); Miln 327 (id.); Vv 166 (˚antare in between the (5) mountains, see VvA 82). Nagara
Nagara
(nt.) [Ved. nagara, Non -- aryan? Connection with agāra is very problematic] a stronghold, citadel, fortress; a (fortified) town, city. As seat of the government & as important centre of trade contrasted with gāma & nigama (village & market -- place or township) Vin iii.47 (˚bandhana), 184; cp. gāma 3 b. deva˚ deva -- city Ji. 3, 168, 202; DhA i.280 etc.; cp. yakkha˚ J ii.127. -- Vin i.277, 342, 344; ii.155, 184; D ii.7; S ii.105 sq.; iv.194 (kāyassa adhivacanaŋ); v.160; A i.168, 178; iv.106 sq. (paccantima); v.194 (id.) Dh 150 (aṭṭhīnaŋ); Sn 414, 1013 (Bhoga˚); J i.3, 50 (Kapilavatthu˚); ii.5; iii.188; vi.368 etc.; Pug 56; DhA iv.2; PvA 3, 39, 73; Dpvs xiv.51 (+pura). Cp. nāgara.

-- ûpakārikā a town fortified with a wall covered with cement at its base D i.105, cp. DA i.274; -- ûpama like a citadel (of citta) Dh 40, cp. DhA i.317 & Nagaropama sūtra Divy 340; -- kathā town -- gossip D i.7; -- guttika superintendent of the city police J iii.30, 436; iv.279; Miln 345 (dhammanagare n -- g.), DhA iv.55. Cp. Kern, Toev. p. 167; -- vara the noble town (of Rājagaha) Vv 166, cp. VvA 82; -- vīthi a city street J ii.416; -- sobhinī the city belle, a town courtesan J ii.367 (˚anā); iii.435 (Sulasā), 475 (˚anī); DhA i.174; ii.201; PvA 4 (Sulasā); Miln 350. Nagaraka
Nagaraka
(nt.) a small city D i.146 = 169, quoted J i.391. Nagga
Nagga
(adj.) [Ved. nagna = Lat. nudus (fr. *nogṷedhos) Goth. naqaps=Ohg. naccot, Ags. nacod=naked; Oir. nocht; perhaps Gr. gumno/s] naked, nude Vin ii.121; J i.307; Pv i.61 (=niccola PvA 32); ii.15; 81; PvA 68, 106.

-- cariyā going naked Dh 141; DhA iii.78; cp. Sk nagnacaryā Divy 339; -- bhogga one whose goods are nakedness, an ascetic J iv.160; v.75; vi.225. Naggatta
Naggatta
(nt.) [Sk. nagnatva] = naggiya nakedness PvA 106. Naggiya
Naggiya
(nt.) [Sk. *nagnyaŋ] naked state, nudity Vin i.292, 305; S iv.300; Sn 249. Naggiyā
Naggiyā
(adj. f.) [Sk. nagnikā] = naggā, naked Pv ii.312. Nangala
Nangala
(nt.) [Ved. lāngala; nangala by dissimilation through subsequent nasal, cp. Milinda>Menandros. Etym. unknown, prob. dialectical (already in RV iv. 574), because unconnected with other Aryan words for plough. Cp. Balūčī nangār] a plough S i.115; iii.155; A iii.64; Sn 77 (yuga˚ yoke & plough); Sn p. 13; J i.57; Th 2, 441 ( = sīra ThA 270); SnA 146; VvA 63, 65; PvA 133 (dun˚ hard to plough); DhA i.223 (aya˚); iii.67 (id.).

-- īsā the beam of a plough S i.104 (of an elephant's trunk); -- kaṭṭhakaraṇa ploughing S v.146 = J ii.59; -- phāla [mod. Ind. phār] ploughshare (to be understood as Dvandva) DhA i.395. Nangalin
Nangalin
(adj. -- n.) having or using a plough, ploughman, in mukha˚ "using the mouth as plough" Th 1, 101 (maulvergnügt, Neumann) (Mrs. Rh. D. harsh of speech). Nanguṭṭha
Nanguṭṭha
(nt.) [dial. for *nangūlya>*nanguḷhya?] = nangula A ii.245; J i.194 (of a bull); ii.19 (of an elephant); iii.16 (sūci˚), 480 (panther); iv.256 (of a deer); DhA i.275 (of a fish); ii.64. Nangula
Nangula
(nt.) [Sk. lāng&uhacekmacr;la to langa & lagati (q. v.). cp. Gr. lagga/ zw, Lat. langueo] a tail Th 1, 113 = 601 (go˚). Nacira
Nacira
(adj.) [Sk. nacira = na+cira] not of long duration, short Sn 694; gen nacirass' eva after a short time, shortly Sn p. 16; J iv.2, 392; Miln 250. Nacca
Nacca
(nt.) [Ved. nṛtya = Anglo -- Ind. nautch, etym. un- certain, cp. naccati & naṭati] (pantomimic) dancing; usually combd with singing (gīta, q. v.) & instrumental music (vādita). -- nacca: A i.261; D iii.183; J i.61, 207; DA i.77; PvA 231. -- nacca -- gīta: J i.61; Pv iv.72; DhA iii.129; VvA 131, 135. -- nacca -- gīta -- vādita (+visūkadassana): Vin i.83; D i.5, 6; KhA 36; cp. Vv 8110 (naccagīte suvādite). Naccaka
Naccaka
[Sk. *nṛtyaka, distinguished from but ultimately identical with naṭaka, q. v.] a dancer, (pantomimic) actor Miln 191, 331, 359 (naṭa˚). -- f. naccakī Vin ii.12. Naccati
Naccati
[Ved. nṛtyati nṛt, cp. nacca & naṭati] to dance, play Vin ii.10; J i.292; Vv 501 ( = naṭati VvA 210); 6421. -> pp. naccento D i.135; fut. naccissati Vin ii.12; aor. nacci J iii.127; inf. naccituŋ J i.207. -- Caus. naccāpeti to make play Vism 305 (so read for nacch˚). Naccana
Naccana
(nt.) [Ved. *nṛtyana, cp. naṭana] dance, dancing VvA 282, 315. Najjuha
Najjuha
[Sk. dātyūha] a kind of cock or hen J vi.528, 538. Naṭa
Naṭa
[Sk. naṭa dial. ṭ, cp. Prk. naḍa, of nṛt, see naccati] a dancer, player, mimic, actor Vin iv.285; S iv.306 sq.; DhA iv.60 (˚dhītā), 65 (˚karaka), 224 (˚kīḷā); Miln 359 (˚naccaka); Sdhp 380. -- Cp. naṭaka & nāṭaka. Naṭaka
Naṭaka
[Sk. naṭaka] = naṭa Vin iv.285; Miln 331; PvA 3. -- f. naṭikā DA i.239. Naṭati
Naṭati
[Sk. naṭati, of nṛt, with dial. ṭ, cp. naccati] to dance, play VvA 210 ( = naccati). Naṭṭha
Naṭṭha
[Sk. naṣṭha, pp. of nassati (naśyati), q. v.] perished, destroyed; lost A ii.249; J i.74; 267. Naṭṭhana
Naṭṭhana
(nt.) [Der. fr. naṭṭha] destruction Miln 180, 237. Naṭṭhāyika
Naṭṭhāyika
[cp. Sk. naṣṭhārtha, i. e. naṣṭha+artha] bank- rupt Miln 131, 201. Nata
Nata
[Sk. nata, pp. of namati, q. v.] bent (on) S i.186 (a˚); Sn 1143; Nd2 327. Nati
Nati
(f.) [Sk. nati of nam] bending, bent, inclination S ii.67; iv.59; M i.115. -- 346 -- Natta
Natta
(nt.) [Sk. nakta, see nakkhatta] night, acc. nattaŋ by night, in nattam -- ahaŋ by day & by night Sn 1070 (v. l. BB and Nd2 rattamahaŋ). Nattar
Nattar
[Sk. naptṛ, analogy -- formation after mātṛ etc. from Ved. napāt; cp. Lat. nepos; Ags. nefa = E. nephew; Ohg. nevo] grandson J i.60 (nattu, gen.), 88; Ud 91, 92; PvA 17 (nattu -- dhītā great -- grand -- daughter), 25 (nattā nom.). Natthika
Natthika
(adj. -- n.) [Sk. nāstika] one who professes the motto of "natthi," a sceptic, nihilist S i.96; usually in cpds.

-- diṭṭhi scepticism, nihilistic view, heresy Sn 243 ( = micchāditthi Com.); VvA 342; PvA 244; -- vāda one who professes a nihilistic doctrine S iii.73; M i.403; A ii.31; PvA 215 (+micchādiṭṭhika). Natthitā
Natthitā
(f.) [Sk. nāstitā, fr. n' atthi] nihilism S ii.17; J v.110. Natthibhāva
Natthibhāva
[n' atthi -- bhāva] non -- existence DhA iii.324. Natthu
Natthu
[cp. Sk. nas f. & nasta, see etym. under nāsā] 1. the nose J v.166 ( = nāsā Com.). -- 2.=˚kamma, medical treatment through the nose Vin iii.83 (deti).

-- kamma nose -- treatment, consisting in the application of hot oil (DA i.98: telaŋ yojetvā n -- karaṇaŋ) D i.12; Vin i.204; M i.511; DhA i.12; -- karaṇī a pockethandkerchief Vin i.204. Nadati
Nadati
[Ved. nadati, nad of unknown etym.] to roar, cry, make a noise (nadaŋ nadati freq.) Sn 552 (sīha), 684 (id.), 1015; J i.50, 150; ii.110; aor. nadi J iii.55 & anādisuŋ J iv.349. Caus. nadāpeti to make roar J ii.244. See also nadī & nāda, & cp. onadati. Nadana
Nadana
(nt.) [cp. Sk. nadanu] roaring J i.19 (sīhanāda˚ the sound of a lion's roar). Nadita
Nadita
(nt.) [cp. Sk. nādita, pp. of caus. nadayati] roar, noise J ii.110. Nadī
Nadī
(f.) [Ved. nadī, from nadati = "the roaring," cp. also nandati] a river; often characterised as mahā˚ in opp. to kun˚ rivulet; pl. nadiyo also collect. "the waters." -- D i.244 (Aciravatī nadī); S ii.32, 118, 135; v.390; A i.33, 136, 243 (mahā˚); ii.55, 140 (mahā˚); iii.52; iv.101 (m˚), 137; Sn 425, 433, 568, 720; Dh 251; J i.296; ii.102; iii.51; iii.91 (Kebukā); v.269 (Vetaraṇī˚); vi.518 (Ketumatī); Pv iv.354; Vism 468 (sīghasotā); PvA 256 (m˚); Sdhp 21, 194, 574. -- gen. sg. nadiyā J i.278; It 113; instr. nadiyā J i.278; PvA 46; pl. nom. nadiyo Miln 114 (na tā n. dhuva -- salilā), najjo PvA 29 (mahā˚); & najjāyo J vi.278; gen nadīnaŋ Vin i.246=Sn 569 (n. sāgaro mukhaŋ). -- kunnadī a small river S i.109; ii.32, 118; v.47, 63; A ii.140; iv.100; V.114 sq. -- On n. in similes see J.P.T.S. 1906, 100.

-- kuñja a river glen DA i.209; -- kūla the bank of a river Cp. iii.71; -- tīra = ˚kūla J i.278; -- dugga a difficult ford in a river S ii.198; -- vidugga= ˚dugga A i.35; iii.128. Naddha
Naddha
[Sk. naddha pp. of nah, see nayhati] tied, bound, fastened, put on J i.175 (rathavarattaŋ); Bu i.31 (camma˚, of a drum); Mhvs vii.16 (˚pañcāyudha); Miln 117 (yuga˚); DhsA 131. Cp. onaddha, vi˚, san˚. Nanandar
Nanandar
(f.) [Sk. nanāndṛ & nanāndā, to nanā "mother"] husband's sister J v.269 ( = sāmikassa bhaginī p. 275). Nanikāma
Nanikāma
(adj.) [na+nikāma = anikāma] disagreeable, unpleasant Dh 309 (˚seyyā an uncomfortable bed). Nanu
Nanu
(indecl.) [Ved. nanu] 1. part. of affirmation (cp. na1): surely, certainly Pv ii.67 (so to be read for nanda? v. l. BB nuna); Manor. Pūr. on A v.194 (Andersen P. R. 91). -- 2. part. of interrogation ( = Lat. nonne) "is it not" (cp. na2): J i.151; iii.393; DhA i.33. Nantaka
Nantaka
(nt.) [a contamination of namataka (Kern, Toev. p. 169), maybe Sk. naktaka "cover for nakedness" (Trenckner, Notes 811), unless it be non -- Aryan] a shred, rag, worn -- out cloth, usually expld by jiṇṇapilotika (J iii.22) or khaṇḍabhūtā pilotikā (PvA 185) or pilotika only (VvA 311). -- S v.342; A iii.187; iv.376 (˚vāsin as v. l.; text has nantikavāsin); Vv 807 (anantaka); Pv iii.214; J iii.22 (˚vāsin clad in rags). Nanda
Nanda
at Pv ii.67 used either as interj. ( = nanu, q. v.) or as voc. in the sense of "dear"; the first expln to be preferred & n. probably to be read as nanu (v. l. nuna) or handa (in which case nanu would be gloss). Nandaka
Nandaka
(adj.) [Sk. nandikā] giving pleasure, pleasing, full of joy; f. nandikā J iv.396 (+khiḍḍā), either as adj. or f. abstr. pleasure, rejoicing ( = abhindandanā Com.). Nandati
Nandati
[Ved. nandati, nand = nad (cp. vind>vid etc.) orig. to utter sounds of joy] to be glad, to rejoice, find delight in, be proud of (c. instr.) S i.110; A iv.94 sq.; Sn 33; Dh 18. -- Caus. nandeti to please, to do a favour J iv.107 (nandaya=tosehi Com.); PvA 139 (=toseti). -- ppr. nandayanto J vi.588. -- Cp. ānandati. Nandanā
Nandanā
(f.) [Sk. nandanā] rejoicing, delight, pleasure S i.6 = Sn 33. Nandi
Nandi1
& (freq.) Nandī (f.) [Sk. nandi, but cp. BSk. nandī Divy 37] 1. joy, enjoyment, pleasure, delight in (c. loc.) S i.16, 39, 54; ii.101 sq. (āhāre); iii.14 ( = upādāna); iv.36 sq.; A ii.10 (kāma˚, bhava˚, diṭṭhi˚), iii.246; iv.423 sq. (dhamma˚); Sn 1055 (+nivesana); Nd2 330 (=taṇhā); Pug 57; Dhs 1059≈(in def. of taṇhā); Vbh 145, 356, 361; DhsA 363; ThA 65, 167. -- For nandī at Miln 289 read tandī. -- 2. a musical instrument: joy -- drum [Sk. nandī] Vin iii.108 (= vijayabheri). Cp. ā˚.

-- (y)āvatta "turning auspiciously" (i. e. turning to the right: see dakkhiṇāvatta), auspicious, good Nett 2, 4, 7, 113 (always attr. of naya); -- ûpasecana (rāgasalla) sprinkled over with joy, having joy as its sauce Nett 116, 117; cp. maŋsûpasecana (odana) J iii.144 = vi.24; -- kkhaya the destruction of (finding) delight S iii.51; -- (ŋ)jaha giving up or abandoning joy Sn 1101 (+okañjaha & kappañjaha); Nd2 331; -- bhava existence of joy, being full of joy, in ˚parikkhīṇa one in whom joy is extinct (i. e. an Arahant), expld however by Com. as one who has rid himself of the craving for rebirth (tīsu bhavesu parikkhīnataṇha DhA iv.192=SnA 469) S i.2, 53; Sn 175, 637=Dh 413; -- mukhī (adj. -- f.) "joyfaced," showing a merry face, Ep. of the night (esp. the eve of the uposatha) Vin i.288 (ratti); ii.236 (id.); -- rāga pleasure & lust, passionate delight S ii.227; iii.51; iv.142, 174, 180; M i.145; Dhs 1059≈, 1136; esp. as attr. of taṇhā in phrase n -- r -- sahagata -- taṇhā (cp. M Vastu iii.332: nandīrāgasahagatā tr̥ṣṇā) Vin i.10; S iii.158; v.425 sq.; Ps ii.137; Nett 72; -- saŋyojana the fetter of finding delight in anything Sn 1109, 1115; Nd2 332; -- samudaya the rise or origin of delight M iii.267. Nandi
Nandi2
= nandhi. Nandin
Nandin
(adj.) [Sk. nandin] finding or giving delight, delighting in, pleasurable, gladdening S ii.53 (vedanā); A ii.59, 61; It 112. Nandha
Nandha
see yuga˚. Nandhati
Nandhati
[for nayhati, der. fr. naddha after analogy of baddha>bandhati] meaning not so much "to bind" as "to cover": see apiḷandhati, upanandhati, onandhati, pariyonandhati. Nandhi
Nandhi
(f.) (usually spelt nandi) [Sk. naddhrī to naddha, pp. of nah to bind] a strap, thong J i.175 (rathassa cammañ ca nandiñ ca); Sn 622 = Dh 398 (+varatta); SnA 400; DhA i.44, iv.160. -- 347 -- Napuŋsaka
Napuŋsaka
(adj.) [Ved. napuŋsaka = na+puŋs "not- male"] of no sex; lit. Vism 548, 553; ThA 260; Vbh 417; in gram. of the neuter gender Kacc. 50; PvA 266 (is reading correct?) Nabha
Nabha
(nt.) & Nabhas (in oblique cases) [Sk. nabhas; Gr. ne/fos & nefe/lh, Lat. nebula, Oir. nēl, Ags. nifol (darkness), Ohg. nebul. See also abbha] mist, vapour, clouds, sky A i.242; ii.50 (nabhā), iii.240, Sn 687 (nabhasi -- gama, of the moon); Vv 323, 352 ( = ākāsa VvA 161), 534 (id. 236), 6327 (id. 268); PvA 65; Mhvs vii.9 (nabhasā instr.). Nabbho
Nabbho
= nābhiyo, nom. pl. of nābhi (q. v.). Namataka
Namataka
(nt.) [word & etym. doubtful; cp. nantaka & Bdhgh. Vin ii.317: matakan (sic) ti satthakavedhanakaŋ ( = veṭhanakaŋ) pilotikakhaṇḍaŋ] a piece of cloth Vin ii.115 (satthaka), 123, 267 (˚ŋ dhāreti). Namati
Namati
[Ved. namati, Idg. *nem to bend; also to share out, cp. Gr. ne/mw, Goth. niman = Ger. nehmen. See cognates in Walde loc. cit. under nemus] to bend, bend down (trs. & instr.) direct, apply S i.137 (cittaŋ); Sn 806; J i.61 (aor. nami, cittaŋ). -- Caus. nameti (not nāmeti, Fsb. to Sn 1143 nāmenti, which is to be corrected to n' âpenti) to bend, to wield Dh 80=145 (namayati). As nāmeti at J vi.349. pp. namita (q. v.). Namana
Namana
(nt.) [a philosophical term constructed by Bdhgh. from nāma, cp. ruppana -- rūpa] naming, giving a name KhA 78; DhsA 52 (see nāma2); Vism 528. Namanā
Namanā
(f.) [abstr. to namati, cp. Sk. namana nt.] bent, application, industry Vbh 352. Namassati
Namassati
[Ved. namasyati, Denom. fr. namo] to pay honour to, to venerate, honour, do homage to (often with pañjalika & añjaliŋ katvā) Sn 236, 485, 598, 1058, 1063; Nd2 334; J iii.83; Pv ii.1220; KhA 196; pot. namasseyya It 110; Dh 392, 1st pl. namassemu Sn 995; ppr. namassaŋ Sn 334, 934; namassanto SnA 565, & (usually) namassamāna Sn 192, 1142; Nd1 400; J ii.73; VvA 7. -- aor. namassiŋsu Sn 287. -- ger. namassitvā J i.1. -- grd. (as adj.) namassaniya (venerable), Miln 278. Namassana
Namassana
(nt.) (?) veneration J i.1. Namassiyā
Namassiyā
(namassā) (f.) [Sk. namasyā] worship, venera- tion Miln 140. Namita
Namita
[pp. nameti] bent on, disposed to ( -- ˚), able or capable of J iii.392 (pabbajjāya -- namita -- citta); Miln 308 (phalabhāra˚). Namo
Namo
(nt.) & Nama (nt.) [Ved. namas, cp. Av. nəmo prayer; Gr. ne/mos, Lat. nemus (see namati)] nomage, veneration, esp. used as an exclamation of adoration at the beginning of a book (namo tassa Bhagavato Arahato Sammāsambuddhassa) Sn 540, 544; PvA 1, 67. Namuci
Namuci
(Np.) a name of Māra. Naya
Naya
(adj. -- n.) [from nayati, to lead, see neti] "leading"; usually m: way (fig.), method, plan, manner; inference; sense, meaning (in grammar); behaviour, conduct A ii.193 = Nd2 151 (˚hetu through inference); Nett 2 (method), 4 (id.), 7, 113; Miln 316 (nayena=nayahetu); KhA 74; VvA 112 (sense, context, sentence); PvA 1 (ways or conduct), 117 (meaning), 126 (id.), 136, 280. -- nayaŋ neti to draw a conclusion, apply an inference, judge, behave S ii.58=Vbh 329; J iv.241 (anayaŋ nayati dummedho: draws a wrong conclusion); PvA 227 (+anumināti). -- With ˚ādi˚ N. has the function of continuing or completing the context= "and similarly," e. g. ˚ādinaya -- pavatta dealing with this & the following VvA 2; . . . ti ādinā nayena thus & similarly, & so forth J i.81; PvA 30. -- Instr. nayena ( -- ˚) as adv. in the way of, as, according(ly): āgata˚ according to what has been shown or said in . . . J i.59; VvA 3; PvA 280; purima˚ as before J i.59; iv.140; vutta˚ as said (above) (cp. vutta -- niyāmena) PvA 13, 29, 36, 71, 92 etc. -- sunaya a sound judgment J iv.241; dunnaya a wrong principle, method or judgment, or as adj.: wrongly inferred, hard to be understood, unintelligible A iii.178=Nett 21; J iv.241. Nayati
Nayati
see neti. Nayana
Nayana
(nt.) [Sk. nayana, to nayati = the leader cp. also netra=P. netta] the eye Th 2, 381; Vv 353; Dhs 597; Vbh 71 sq.; Miln 365; ThA 255; VvA 161 (=cakkhu); PvA 40 (nettāni nayanāni), 152; Sdhp 448, 621. Nayhati
Nayhati
[Ved. nahyati, Idg. *nedh as in Lat. nodus & Ved. nahu] to tie, bind; only in comp. with prep. as upanayhati (cp. upāhanā sandal), pilandhati etc. -- pp. naddha (q. v.). See also nandhi, nāha; onayhati, unnahanā, piḷayhati. Nayhana
Nayhana
(nt.) [Sk. nahana] tying, binding; bond, fetter DhA iv.161. Nara
Nara
[Ved. nara, cp. nṛtu; Idg. *ner to be strong or valiant = Gr. a)nh/r, a)g -- h/nwr (valiant), drw/y (*nrw/y); Lat. neriosus (muscuḷar), Nero (Sabinian, cp. Oscan ner= Lat. vir); Oir. nert] man (in poetry esp. a brave, strong, heroic man), pl. either "men" or "people" (the latter e. g. at Sn 776, 1082; Pv i.1112). -- A i.130; ii.5; iii.53; Sn 39, 96, 116, 329, 591, 676, 865 etc.; Dh 47, 48, 262, 309, 341; J iii.295; Nd1 12=Nd2 335 (definition); VvA 42 (popular etymology: narati netī ti naro puriso, i. e. a "leading" man); PvA 116=Dh 125.

-- âdhama vilest of men Sn 246; -- âsabha "man bull," i. e. lord of men Sn 684, 996; -- inda "man lord," i. e. king Sn 836; J i.151; -- uttama best of men (Ep. of the Buddha) S i.23; D iii.147; Sn 1021; -- deva god -- man or man -- god (pl.) gods, also Ep. of the B. "king of men" S i.5; Pv iv.350; -- nārī (pl.) men & women, appl. to male & female angelic servants (of the Yakkhas) Vv 324, 337, 538; Pv ii.112; -- vīra a hero (?), a skilled man (?) Th 1, 736 (naravīrakata "by human skill & wit" Mrs. Rh. D.). -- sīha lion of men J i.89. Naraka
Naraka
[Sk. naraka; etym. doubtful, problematic whether to Gr. ne/rteros ( = inferus), Ags. nord=north as region of the underworld] 1. a pit D i.234; Th 1, 869; J iv.268 (˚āvāṭa PvA 225). -- 2. a name for Niraya, i. e. purgatory; a place of torment for the deceased (see niraya & cp. list of narakas at Divy 67) S i.209; Sn 706; PvA 52; Sdhp 492 (saŋsāraghora˚), 612.

-- angāra the ashes of purgatory Sdhp 32. Narada
Narada
(nt.) [Sk. nalada, Gr. na/rdos, of Semitic origin, cp. Hebr. nīrd] nard, ointment J vi.537. Nala & Naḷa
Nala
& Naḷa [Ved. naḍa & Sk. naḷa, with dial. ḍ (ḷ) for *narda, cp. Gr. na/ rdhc] a species of reed; reed in general Vin iv.35; A ii.73; Dh 337; Nd2 680ii; J i.223; iv.141, 396 (n. va chinno); Pv i.116 (id.); DhA iii.156; iv.43. See also nāḷa, nāḷī & nāḷikā.

-- âgāra a house built of reeds S i.156; iv.185 (+tiṇāgāra); A i.101 (+tiṇāgāra); Nd2 40d (id.), Miln 245; cp. AvŚ Index ii.228 (naḍāgāra); -- aggi a fire of reeds J vi.100 (˚vaṇṇaŋ pabbataŋ); -- kalāpī a bundle of r. S ii.114; -- kāra a worker in reeds, basket -- maker; D i.51 (+pesakāra & kumbhakāra); J v.291; ThA 28; PvA 175 (+vilīvakāra); DhA i.177; -- daṇḍaka a shaft of r. J i.170; -- maya made of r. Vin ii.115; -- vana a thicket of reeds J iv.140; Miln 342; -- sannibha reedcoloured J vi.537 (Com.: naḷa -- puppha -- vaṇṇa rukkhasunakha); -- setu a bridge of reeds Sn 4. Naḷapin
Naḷapin
a water -- animal J vi.537. Nalāṭa
Nalāṭa
(nt.) [Ved. lalāṭa = rarāṭa; on n>l cp. nangala] the forehead S i.118; J iii.393; iv.417 (nalāṭena maccuŋ ādāya: by his forelock); Vism 185; DhA i.253.

-- anta the side of the forehead J vi.331; -- maṇḍala the round of the f. D i.106; Sn p. 108. -- 348 -- Nalāṭikā
Nalāṭikā
(f.) [Sk. lalāṭikā] "belonging to the forehead," a frown Vin ii.10 (nalāṭikaŋ deti to give a frown). Nalinī
Nalinī
(f.) [Sk. nalinī] a pond J iv.90; Vism 84, 17. Nava
Nava1
(num.) [Ved. navan, Idg. *neṷn̊, cp. Lat. novem (*noven), Gr. e)nne/a, Goth. niun, Oir. nōin, E. nine. Connection with nava2 likely because in counting by tetrads (octo = 8 is a dual!) a new series begins with No. 9] number nine. gen. -- dat. navannaŋ (Sn p. 87); instr. -- abl. navahi (VvA 76), loc. navasu.

Meaning and Application: The primitive -- Aryan importance of the "mystic" nine is not found in Buddhism and can only be traced in Pali in folkloristic undercurrents (as fairy tales) & stereotype traditions in which 9 appears as a number implying a higher trinity = 32. 1. navabhūmaka pāsāda (a palace 9 stories high more freq. satta˚, 7) J i.58; nava -- hiraññakoṭīhi (w. 9 koṭis of gold) VvA 188; nava yojana DhA ii.65. -- 2. navangabuddhasāsana "the 9 fold teaching of Buddha," i. e. the 9 divisions of the Buddh. Scriptures according to their form or style, viz. suttaŋ geyyaŋ veyyākaraṇaŋ gāthā udānaŋ itivuttakaŋ jātakaŋ abbhutadhammaŋ vedallaŋ M i.133; A ii.103, 178; iii.86 sq., 177 sq.; Pug 43; Miln 344; Dpvs iv.15; PvA 2. Cp. chaḷanga. -- nava sattāvāsā "9 abodes of beings" Kh iv. (in exemplifying No. 9), viz. (see D iii.263=KhA 86, 87 cp. also A iv.39 sq.) (1) manussā, devā, vinipātikā; (2) Brahmakāyikā devā; (3) Ābhassarā; (4) Subhakiṇhā; (5) Asaññasattā; (6) Ākāsanañcâyatana -- upagā; (7) Viññāṇanañcâyatana˚; (8) Ākiñcaññāyatana˚; (9) Nevasaññâsaññâyatana˚. -- nava sotā (Sn 197) or nava dvārā (VvA 76; v. l. mukhā) 9 openings of the body, viz. (SnA 248) 2 eyes, ears, nostrils, mouth, anus & urethra (cp. S.B.E. 39, 180; 40, 259 sq.). -- nava vitakkā 9 thoughts Nd2 269 (q. v.). -- 3. a trace of the week of 9 days is to be found in the expression "navuti -- vassasatasahass -- āyukā" giving the age of a divinity as 9 million years (=a divine week) VvA 345. -- Cp. navuti. Nava
Nava2
(adj.) [Ved. nava, Idg. *neṷn̊ (cp. nava1) = Lat. novus, Gr. ne/os (*ne/ vos), Lith. navas; Goth. niujis etc.=E. new; also Sk. navya=Gr. nei_os, Lat. Novius. May be related to na3] 1. new, fresh; unsoiled, clean; of late, lately acquired or practised (opp. pubba & purāṇa). Often syn. with taruṇa. Sn 28, 235 (opp. purāṇaŋ), 944 (id.), 913 (opp. pubba); Pv i.92 (of clothes=costly); J iv.201 (opp. purāṇa); Miln 132 (salila fresh water). -- 2. young, unexperienced, newly initiated; a novice Vin i.47 (navā bhikkhū the younger bhs., opp. therā); S i.9 (+acira -- pabbajita); ii.218; Sn p. 93 (Gotamo navo pabbajjāya "a novice in the Wanderer's life"); DhA i.92 (bhikkhu).

-- kamma building new, making repairs, "doing up," mending Vin ii.119, 159; iii.81; J i.92; iv.378; Nd2 385; -- kammika an expert in making repairs or in building, a builder (cp. vaḍḍhaki) Vin ii.15; iv.211; -- ghata fresh ghee J ii.433 (v. l. ˚sappi). Navaka
Navaka
(adj. -- n.) [Sk. navaka] young; a young man, a newly ordained bhikkhu (opp. thera), novice (cp. Divy 404) J i.33 (sangha˚); PvA 76 (id.). -- Freq. in compar. navakatara a younger one, or the youngest (opp. theratara) D ii.154; J i.218; Miln 24. Navanīta
Navanīta
(nt.) & nonīta [cp. Ved. navanīta] fresh butter Vin i.244 (cp. gorasa); D i.201; M iii.141; Pv iii.55 (nonīta); Pug 69, 70; Miln 41, Dhs 646, 740; DhA i.417; PvA 199. Navama
Navama
(num. ord.) [Sk. navama = Oir. nōmad; cp. Lat. nonus; Gr. e)/natos, Goth. niunda with diff. superl. suffixes] the ninth Sn 109; f. ˚ī VvA 72. Naviya
Naviya
(adj.) [Sk. navya, either grd. of navate to praise; or = nava, q. v.] praiseworthy Miln 389. Navuti
Navuti
(num.) [Ved. navati] number ninety VvA 345 & in compn eka˚ 91 D ii.2 (i. e. 92 minus 1; in expr. ekanavuto kappo, v. l. ekanavuti kappe); dvā˚ 92 (see dvi A II. & B III.); PvA 19, 21; aṭṭhā˚ 98; Sn 311 (diseases sprung fr. orig. 3). Navutiya
Navutiya
(adj.) worth ninety J v.485. Cp. nāvutika. Nassati
Nassati
(v. intr.) [Ved. naś; naśyati & naśati, cp. Gr. ne/kus, nekro/s (corpse), ne/ktar ("overcoming death" = nec+tr̥, cp. tarati); Lat. neco, noceo, noxius] to perish, to be lost or destroyed, to disappear, come to an end Sn 666 (na hi nassati kassaci kammaŋ); It 90; J i.81, 116, 150; pret. nassaŋ (prohib.) Sn 1120, pl. anassāma M i.177; aor. nassi A iii.54 (mā nassi prohib.); J iv.137 (cakkhūni ˚iŋsu: the eyes failed); fut. nassisati J i.5; cond. nassissa J ii.112. -- Caus. nāseti (q. v.). See also pa˚. Nassana
Nassana
(nt.) [cp. Sk. naśana] disappearance, loss, destruction A iii.54 (˚dhamma adj. doomed to perish). Nahāta
Nahāta
[Sk. snāta, see nahāyati] one who has bathed Vin ii.221; J i.266; DhA iv.232 (˚kilesatā washed off moral stain). Nahātaka
Nahātaka
[Ved. snātaka, cp. nahāta & nahāyati] "one who has bathed," a brahmin who has finished the studies M i.280; A iv.144; Dh 422 (expl. at DhA iv.232 with ref. to perfection in the Buddha's teaching: catusaccabuddhatāya buddha); cp. Sn 521 (one who has washed away all sin), 646. Nahāna
Nahāna
(nt.) [Sk. snāna] bathing, a bath Vin i.47, 51 = ii.224; i.196 (dhuva˚ constant bathing), 197; S i.183; v.390 (fig.); J i.265; PvA 50; Vism 27.

-- kāla bathing time PvA 46; -- koṭṭhaka bath -- room DhA iii.88; -- garuka fond of bathing Vin i.196; -- cuṇṇa bath powder (cp. nahāniya˚) DhA i.398; -- tittha a shallow place for bathing DhA i.3; iii.79. Nahāniya
Nahāniya
(adj.) belonging to a bath, bath -- ; in ˚cuṇṇa bath -- powder PvA 46. Nahāpaka
Nahāpaka
[Sk. snāpaka, fr. Caus, nahāpeti; cp. nahāpita] a barber, bath attendant D i.74; A iii.25; DA i.157 ( = ye nahāpenti); PvA 127 (=kappaka). Nahāpana
Nahāpana
(nt.) bathing, washing (trs.) D i.7, 12; A i.62, 132; ii.70; iv.54; It 111 (ucchādana+); VvA 305 (udakadāna+). Nahāpita
Nahāpita
[Sk. only snāpaka (see nahāpaka); new formation fr. Caus. nahāpeti as n. ag. with a -- theme instead of ar -- , cp. sallakatta for sallakattar] a barber, who has also the business of preparing & giving baths (cp. Ger. "bader") a bath -- attendant (see kappaka). Barbers ranked as a low class socially, and rebirth in a barber's family was considered unfortunate. Vin i.249 (˚pubba who had formerly been a barber); D i.225; J i.137; ii.5; iii.451; iv.138 (eight kahāpaṇas as a barber's fee); DA i.157 ( = kappaka); VvA 207 (˚sālā a barber's shop). Nahāpeti
Nahāpeti
[Sk. snāpayati, Caus. of nahāyati] to wash, to give a bath, bathe J i.166; PvA 49; VvA 68, 305. Nahāmin
Nahāmin
(adj. -- n.) [ = nahāpaka; Kern, Toev. asks: should it be nahāpin?] a barber, a low -- class individual Pv iii.114 (=kappaka -- jātika PvA 176). Nahāyati
Nahāyati
(rarely nhāyati) [Ved. snāti & snāyati, snā = Gr. nh/xw (to swim), naro/ s, *nhreu/s (Nereid), nh_sos (island); Lat. nare (to swim); cp. also Sk. snauti, Gr. na/w, ne/w; Goth. sniwan] to bathe (trs. & intr.), to wash, to perform an ablution (esp. at the end of religious studentship or after the lapse of a lustrative period) Vin ii.280; J i.265; vi.336; PvA 93. ppr. nahāyanto (PvA 83) & nahāyamāna (Vin ii.105); inf. nahāyituŋ (Vin i.47; PvA 144); ger. nahāyitvā (J i.50; vi.367; PvA 42) & nahātvā (J i.265; iii.277; DhA iii.88; PvA 23, 62) (after mourning), 82; grd. nahāyitabba (Vin ii.220, 280). -- 349 -- Nahāru & Nhāru
Nahāru
& Nhāru [Sk. snāyu, Idg. *snē to sew, cp. Gr. ne/w, nh/qw, nh_ma (thread); Ohg. nājan; also Gr. neu_ron ( = Lat. nervus); Ags. sinu (=sinew); Ohg. senawa; Goth. nepla=Ags. nāēdl (=needle); Oir. snātha (thread); Ohg. snuor (cord)=Ags. snōd] sinew, tendon, muscle. In the anatomy of the body n. occupies the place between maŋsa (flesh, soft flesh) & aṭṭhi (bone), as is seen from ster. sequence chavi, camma, maŋsa, nahāru, aṭṭhi, aṭṭhi -- miñja (e. g. at Vin i.25; J iii.84). See also defn in detail at SnA 246 sq. & KhA 47. -> Vin i.25 (nh˚); M i.429 (used for bow strings); A i.50; iii.324; iv.47 sq. (˚daddula), 129; Kh 111.; Sn 194 (aṭṭhi˚) Nd2 97 (nh˚); DhA iii.118; ThA 257 (nh˚); PvA 68 (aṭṭhi -- camma˚), 80 (camma -- maŋsa˚); Sdhp 46, 103. Nahuta
Nahuta
(nt.) [Sk. nayuta (m. pl.) of unknown etym. Is it the same as navuti? The corresponding v>y>h is frequent, as to meaning cp. nava 3] a vast number, a myriad Sn 677; J i.25, 83; Pv iv.17; DhA i.88; PvA 22, 265. Nāga
Nāga
[Ved. nāga; etym. of 1. perhaps fr. *snagh = Ags. snaca (snake) & snaegl (snail); of 2 uncertain, perhaps a Non -- Aryan word distorted by popular analogy to nāga1] 1. a serpent or Nāga demon, playing a prominent part in Buddh. fairy -- tales, gifted with miraculous powers & great strength. They often act as fairies & are classed with other divinities (see devatā), with whom they are sometimes friendly, sometimes at enmity (as with the Garuḷas) D i.54; S iii.240 sq.; v.47, 63; Bu. i.30 (dīghāyukā mahiddhikā); Miln 23. Often with supaṇṇā (Garuḷas); J i.64; DhA ii.4; PvA 272. Descriptions e. g. at DhA iii.231, 242 sq.; see also cpds. -- 2. an elephant, esp. a strong, stately animal (thus in combn hatthi -- nāga characterising "a Nāga elephant") & freq. as symbol of strength & endurance ("heroic"). Thus Ep. of the Buddha & of Arahants. Popular etymologies of n. are based on the excellency of this animal (āguŋ na karoti=he is faultless, etc.): see Nd1 201=Nd2 337; Th 1, 693; PvA 57. -- (a) the animal D i.49; S i.16; ii.217, 222; iii.85; v.351; A ii.116; iii.156 sq.; Sn 543; Vv 55 (=hatthināga VvA 37); Pv i.113. mahā˚ A iv.107, 110. -- (b) fig.= hero or saint: S ii.277; iii.83; M i.151, 386; Dh 320; Sn 29, 53, 166, 421, 518. Of the Buddha: Sn 522, 845, 1058, 1101; Miln 346 (Buddha˚). -- 3. The Nāga -- tree (now called "iron -- wood tree," the P. meaning "fairy tree"), noted for its hard wood & great masses of red flowers (=Sk. nāgakesara, mesua ferrea Lin.): see cpds. ˚rukkha, ˚puppha, ˚latā.

-- âpalokita "elephant -- look" (turning the whole body), a mark of the Buddhas M i.337; cp. BSk. nāgâvalokita Divy 208; -- danta an ivory peg or pin, also used as a hook on a wall Vin ii.117 (˚ka Vin ii.114, 152); J vi.382; -- nāṭaka snakes as actors DhA iv.130; -- nāsūru (f.) (woman) having thighs like an elephant's trunk J v.297; -- puppha iron -- wood flower Miln 283; -- bala the strength of an elephant J i.265; ii.158; -- bhavana the world of snakes Nd1 448; J iii.275; DhA iv.14; -- māṇavaka a young serpent J iii.276; f. ˚ikā ib. 275; DhA iii.232; -- rājā king of the Nāgas, i. e. serpents J ii.111; iii.275; Sn 379 (Erāvaṇa, see detail SnA 368); DhA i.359; iii.231, 242 sq. (Ahicchatta); iv.129 sq. (Paṇṇaka); -- rukkha the iron -- wood tree J i.35 (cp. M Vastu ii.249); -- latā = rukkha J i.80 (the Buddha's toothpick made of its wood), 232; DhA ii.211 (˚dantakaṭṭha toothpick); -- vatta habits of serpents Nd1 92, also adj. ˚ika ibid. 89; -- vana elephant -- grove Dh 324; DhA iv.15; -- vanika cl. hunter M i.175; iii.132; -- hata one who strikes the el. (viz. the Buddha) Vin ii.195. Nāgara
Nāgara
[Sk. nāgara, see nagara] a citizen J i.150; iv.404; v.385; Dāvs ii.85; VvA 31; PvA 19; DhA i.41. Nāgarika
Nāgarika
(adj.) [Sk. nāgarika] citizen -- like, urbane, polite DA i.282. Nāṭaka
Nāṭaka
[Sk. nāṭaka; see naccati] 1. (m.) a dancer, actor, player J i.206; v.373; DhA iii.88; iv.59, 130; nāṭakitthi a dancing -- girl, nautch -- girl DhA iii.166; VvA 131. -- 2. (nt.) a play, pantomime J i.59; v.279, also used coll. = dancing -- woman J i.59 (?) ii.395. Nātha
Nātha
[Ved. nātha, nāth, to which Goth. nipan (to support), Ohg. gināda (grace)] protector, refuge, help A v.23, 89; Dh 160 (attā hi attano n.), 380; Sn 1131 (Nd2 has nāga); DhA iv.117; PvA 1. lokanātha Saviour of the world (Ep. of the Buddha) Sn 995; PvA 42. -- anātha helpless, unprotected, poor J i.6 (nāthânāthā rich & poor); PvA 3 (˚sālā poor house) 65. Cp. nādhati. Nāda
Nāda
[Sk. nāda, see nadati] loud sound, roaring, roar J i.19 (sīha˚), 50 (koñca˚), 150 (mahā˚). Cp. pa˚. Nādi
Nādi
(f.) = nāda, loud sound, thundering (fig.) Vv 6410. Nādhati
Nādhati
[Sk. nādhate = nāthate (see nātha), only in nadhamāna, cp. RV x.65, 5: nādhas] to have need of, to be in want of (c. gen.) J v.90 (Com. expls by upatappati milāyati; thinking perhaps of nalo va chinno). Nānatta
Nānatta
(nt. m.) [Sk. nānatva; abstr. fr. nānā] diversity, variety, manifoldness, multiformity, distraction; all sorts of (opp. ekatta, cp. M i.364: "the multiformity of sensuous impressions," M.A.). Enumn of diversity as nānattā, viz. dhātu˚ phassa˚ vedanā˚ saññā˚ sankappa˚ chanda˚ pariḷāha˚ pariyesanā˚ lābha˚ D iii.289; S ii.140 sq., cp. iv.113 sq., 284 sq.; Ps i.87. -- A iv.385; Ps i.63 sq., 88 sq.; S ii.115 (vedanā˚); Ps i.91 (samāpatti˚ & vihāra˚); J ii.265. In composition, substituted sometimes for nāna. Cp. Dialogues i.14, n. 2.

-- kathā desultory talk, gossip D i.8; ( = niratthakakathā DA i.90); S v.420; -- kāya (adj.) having a variety of bodies or bodily states (combd with or opp. to ekatta˚, nānatta -- saññin, & ekatta -- saññin), appl. to manussā, devā, vinipātikā (cp. nava sattâvāsā) A iv.39 sq.=Nd2 5702; D iii.253, 263, 282; -- saññā consciousness of diversity (Rh. D.: "idea of multiformity," Dial. ii.119; Mrs. Rh. D. "consciousness of the manifold") M i.3; S iv.113 sq.; D iii.224, 262 sq., 282; A i.41, 267; ii.184; iii.306; Ps ii.172; Dhs 265 (cp. trsl. p. 72); Vbh 342, 369; -- saññin having a varying consciousness (cp. ˚kāya), D i.31 (cp. DA i.119) 183; iii.263. Nānattatā
Nānattatā
(f.) [2nd abstr. to nānā] = nānatta, diversity (of states of mind). Seven sorts at Vbh 425: ārammaṇa˚ manasikāra˚ chanda˚ paṇidha˚ adhimokkha˚ abhinīhāra˚ paññā˚. Nānā
Nānā
(adv.) [Ved. nānā, a redupl. nā (emphatic particle, see na1) "so and so," i. e. various, of all kinds] variously, differently. 1. (abs.) A i.138 (on different sides, viz. right 1 285), 884 sq. -- 2. more frequently in cpds., as first part of adj. or n. where it may be trsld as "different, divers, all kinds of" etc. Before a double cons. the final ā is shortened: nānagga (for nānā+agga), nānappakāra etc. see below.

-- agga ( -- rasa) all the choicest delicacies J i.266 (˚bhojana, of food); vi.366; PvA 155 (˚dibbabhojana); -- âdhimuttikatā diversity of dispositions DA i.44; Nett 98; -- āvudhā (pl.) various weapons J i.150; -- karaṇa difference, diversity Vin i.339 (sangha˚); M ii.128; cp. Divy 222; -- gotta of all kinds of descent Pv ii.916; -- citta of varying mind J i.295 (itthiyo); -- jana all kinds of folk Sn 1102; Nd1 308 (puthu˚); -- titthiya of var. sects D iii.16 sq.; -- pakkāra various, manifold J i.52 (sakuṇā), 127, 278 (phalāni); DAi. 148 (āvudhā); PvA 50, 123, 135; -- ratta multi -- coloured Sn 287; J vi.230; -- rasā (pl.) all kinds of dainties Pv ii.911; -- vāda difference of opinion D i.236; -- vidha divers, various, motley PvA 53, 96, 113, and passim; -- saŋvāsaka living in a different part, or living apart Vin i.134 sq. (opp. samāna˚), 321; ii.162. -- 350 -- Nābhi & Nābhī
Nābhi
& Nābhī (f.) [Vedic nābhi, nābhī; Av. nabā; Gr. o)mfalo/s (navel); Lat. umbo & umbilicus; Oir. imbliu (navel); Ags. nafu; Ohg. naba (nave), Ger. nabel = E. nave & navel] 1. the navel A iii.240; J i.238; DA i.254 (where it is said that the Vessā (Vaiśyas) have sprung from the navel of Brahmā). -- 2. the nave of a wheel Vv 644 (pl. nabhyo & nabbho SS=nābhiyo VvA 276); J i.64; iv.277; Miln 115. Nāma
Nāma
(nt.) [Vedic nāman, cp. Gr. o)/noma (a)n -- w/numos without name); Lat. nomen; Goth. namō; Ags. noma, Ohg. namo] name. -- 1. Literal. nom. nāmaŋ S i.39; Sn 808; J ii.131; Miln 27; acc. nāmaŋ PvA 145 (likhi: he wrote her name). -- nāmaŋ karoti to give a name Sn 344; Nd2 466 (n' etaŋ nāmaŋ mātarā kataŋ on "Bhagavā"); J i.203, 262 (w. double acc.). -- nāmaŋ gaṇhāti to call by name, to enumerate J iv.402; PvA 18 (v. l. BB nāmato g.). Definitions at Vin iv.6 (two kinds : hīna˚ & ukkatṭha˚) and at Vism 528 ( = namanalakkhaṇa). -- 2. Specified. nāma as metaphysical term is opposed to rūpa, & comprises the 4 immaterial factors of an individual (arūpino khandhā, viz. vedanā saññā sankhāra viññāṇa; see khandha II. Ba). These as the noëtic principle combd with the material principle make up the individual as it is distinguished by "name & body" from other individuals. Thus nāmarūpa= individuality, individual being. These two are inseparable (aññamaññûpanissitā ete dhammā, ekato va uppajjanti Miln 49). S i.35 (yattha n. ca rūpañ ca asesaŋ uparujjhati taŋ te dhammaŋ idh' aññāya acchiduŋ bhavabandhanaŋ); Sn 1036, 1100; Nd1 435=Nd2 339 (nāma=cattāro arūpino khandhā); DhA iv.100 (on Dh 367): vedanādīnaŋ catunnaŋ rūpakkhandhassa cā ti pañcannaŋ khandhānaŋ vasena pavattaŋ nāmarūpaŋ; DhsA 52: nāmarūpa -- duke nāmakaraṇaṭṭhena nāmaṭṭhena namanaṭṭhena ca nāmaŋ ruppanaṭṭhena rūpaŋ. Cp. D i.223; ii.32, 34, 56, 62; S i.12 (taṇhā nrūpe), 23 (n -- rūpasmiŋ asajjamāna); ii.3, 4, 66 (nrūpassa avakkanti), 101 sq. (id.); M i.53; A i.83, 176; iii.400; iv.385 (˚ārammaṇa); v.51, 56; Sn 355, 537, 756, 909; Dh 367; It 35; Ps i.193; ii.72, 112 sq.; Vbh 294; Nett 15 sq., 28, 69; Miln 46. Nāma+rūpa form an elementary pair D iii.212; Kh iv. Also in the Paṭicca -- samuppāda (q. v.), where it is said to be caused (conditioned) by viññāṇa & to cause saḷāyatana (the 6 senses), D ii.34; Vin i.1 sq.; S ii.6 sq.; Sn 872 (nāmañ ca rūpañca paṭicca phassā; see in detail expld at Nd1 276). Synonymous with nāmarūpa is nāmakāya: Sn 1074; Nd2 338; Ps i.183; Nett 27, 41, 69, 77. -> In this connection to be mentioned are var. definitions of nāma as the principle or distinguishing mark ("label") of the individual, given by Coms, e. g. Nd1 109, 127; KhA 78; with which cp. Bdhgh's speculation concerning the connotation of nāma mentioned by Mrs. Rh. D. at Dhs. trsl. p. 341. -- 3. Use of Cases. Instr. nāmena by name PvA 1 (Petavatthū ti n.); Mhvs vii.32 (Sirīsavatthu n.). -- acc. nāma (the older form, cp. Sk. nāma) by name S i.33, 235 (Anoma˚); Sn 153, 177; J i.59 (ko nām' esa "who by name is this one"=what is his name), 149 (nāmena Nigrodhamigarājā n.), 203 (kiŋsaddo nāma esa); ii.4; iii.187; vi.364 (kā nāma tvaŋ). See also evaŋnāma, kinnāma; & cp. the foll. -- 4. nāma (acc.) as adv. is used as emphatic particle=just, indeed, for sure, certainly J i.222; ii.133, 160, 326; iii.90; PvA 6, 13, 63 etc. Therefore freq. in exclamation & exhortation ("please," certainly) J vi.367; DhA iii.171; PvA 29 (n. detha do give); in combn with interr. pron.=now, then J i.221 (kiŋ n.), 266 (kathaŋ n.); iii.55 (kiŋ); Kh iv. (ekaŋ n. kiŋ); with neg.=not at all, certainly not J i.222; ii.352; iii.126 etc. -- Often further emphasised or emphasising other part.; e. g. pi (=api) nāma really, just so Vin i.16 (seyyathā p. n.); Sn p. 15 (id.); VvA 22 (read nāma kāro); PvA 76; app' (=api) eva n. thus indeed, forsooth Vin i.16; It 89=M i.460; J i.168; Pv ii.26 (=api nāma PvA 80); eva nāma in truth PvA 2; nāma tāva certainly DhA i.392, etc.

-- kamma giving a name, naming, denomination Dhs 1306; Bdhd 83; -- karaṇa name -- giving, "christening" DhA ii.87; -- gahaṇa receiving a name, "being christened" J i.262 (˚divasa) -- gotta ancestry, lineage S i.43 (˚ŋ na jīrati); Sn 648, Nd2 385 (mātāpettikaŋ n.); -- dheyya assigning a name, name -- giving J iii.305; iv.449; v.496; Dhs 1306. -- pada see pada. -- matta a mere name Miln 25. Nāmaka
Nāmaka
(adj.) [fr. nāma] 1. ( -- ˚) by name S ii.282 (Thera˚); PvA 67, 96 (kaṇha˚). -- 2. consisting of a mere name, i. e. mere talk, nonsense, ridiculous D i.240. Nāmeti
Nāmeti
at Sn 1143 (Fsb.) is to be read as nâpenti. Otherwise see under namati. Nāyaka
Nāyaka
[BSk. nāyaka (cp. anāyaka without guide AvŚ i.210); fr. neti; cp. naya] a leader, guide, lord, mostly as Ep. of the Buddha (loka˚ "Lord of the World") Sn 991 (loka˚); Mhvs vii.1 (id.); Sdhp 491 (tilokassa); bala -- nāyakā gang leaders J i.103. Nārāca
Nārāca
[Sk. nārāca; perhaps for *nāḍāca & conn. with nālīka, a kind of arrow, to nāḷa] an iron weapon, an arrow or javelin M i.429; J iii.322; Miln 105, 244, 418. -- valaya an iron ring or collar (?) Mhvs vii.20 (Com. "vaṭṭita -- assanārāca -- pasa" = a noose formed by bending the ends of the n. into a circle). Nārī
Nārī
(f.) [Sk. nārī to nara man, orig. "the one belonging to the man"] woman, wife, female Sn 301, 836; Dh 284; J i.60; iii.395; iv.396 (˚gaṇa); Vv 61, 4416; Pv i.91 ( = itthi PvA 44). pl. nariyo (Sn 299, 304, 703), & nāriyo (Sn 703 v. l. BB; Pv ii.952). Combd with nara as naranārī, male & female (angels), e. g. Vv 538; Pv ii.112 (see nara). Nāla & Nāḷa
Nāla
& Nāḷa (nt.) [Sk. nāla, see nala] a hollow stalk, esp. that of the water lily A iv.169; J i.392 (˚pana v. l. ˚vana); VvA 43. See also nāḷikā & nālī. Nālaŋ
Nālaŋ
(adv.) [ = na alaŋ] not enough, insufficient It 37; J i.190; DA i.167. Nāḷikā
Nāḷikā
(f.) [Sk. nāḍikā & nālikā] a stalk, shaft; a tube, pipe or cylinder for holding anything; a small measure of capacity Vin ii.116 (sūci˚, cp. sūcighara, needle -- case); D i.7 ( = bhesajja˚ DA i.89); A i.210; J i.123 (taṇḍula˚ a nāḷi full of rice); vi.366 (aḍḍha -- n -- matta); Nd2 229. Cp. pa˚.

-- odana a nāḷi measure of boiled rice S i.82; DhA iv.17; -- gabbha an (inner) room of tubular shape Vin ii.152. Nāḷikera
Nāḷikera
[Sk. nārikera, nārikela, nalikera, nālikela: dialect, of uncertain etym.] the coconut tree Vv 4413; J iv.159; v.384; DA i.83; VvA 162. Nāḷikerika
Nāḷikerika
(adj.) belonging to the coconut tree J v.417. Nāḷī
Nāḷī
(f.) & (in cpds.) nāḷi [Sk. nāḍī, see nala] a hollow stalk, tube, pipe; also a measure of capacity Vin i.249; A iii.49; J i.98 (suvaṇṇa˚), 124 (taṇḍula˚), 419; iii.220 (kaṇḍa˚ a quiver); iv.67; DhA ii.193 (tela˚), 257. Cp. pa˚.

-- paṭṭa a covering for the head, a cap J vi.370, 444 (text ˚vaṭṭa); -- matta as much as a tube holds A ii.199; PvA 283; DhA ii.70; J i.419 (of aja -- laṇḍikā). Nāvā
Nāvā
(f.) [Ved. nāuḥ & nāvā, Gr. nau_s, Lat. navis] a boat, ship Vin iii.49 (q. v. for definition & description); S i.106 (eka -- rukkhikā); iii.155 = v.51=A iv.127 (sāmuddikā "a liner"); A ii.200; iii.368; Sn 321, 770, 771; Dh 369 (metaphor of the human body); J i.239; ii.112; iii.126; 188; iv.2, 21, 138; v.75 (with "500" passengers), 433; vi.160 (=nāvyā canal? or read nālaŋ?); Vv 61 (=pota VvA 42, with pop. etym. "satte netī ti nāvā ti vuccati"); Pv iii.35 (=doṇi PvA 189); Miln 261 (100 cubits long); Dāvs iv.42; PvA 47, 53; Sdhp 321. In simile Vism 690.

-- tittha a ferry J iii.230; -- sañcaraṇa (a place for) the traffic of boats, a port Miln 359. -- 351 -- Nāvāyika
Nāvāyika
[Sk. nāvāja = Gr. nauhgo/s, cp. Lat. navigo] a mariner, sailor, skipper Miln 365. Nāvika
Nāvika
[Sk. nāvika] 1. a sailor, mariner J ii.103; iv.142; Miln 359; Dāvs iv.43 (captain). -- 2. a ferryman J ii.111; iii.230 (Avariya -- pitā.). Nāvutika
Nāvutika
(adj.) [fr. navuti] 90 years old J iii.395 (˚ā itthi); SnA 172. Nāsa
Nāsa
[Sk. nāśa, see nassati] destruction, ruin, death J i.5, 256; Sdhp 58, 319. Usually vi˚, also adj. vināsaka. Cp. panassati. Nāsana
Nāsana
(nt.) [Sk. nāśana] destruction, abandoning, ex- pulsion, in ˚antika (adj.) a bhikkhu who is under the penalty of expulsion Vin i.255. Nāsā
Nāsā
(f.) [Vedic nāsā (du.); Lat. nāris, Ohg. nasa, Ags. nasu] 1. the nose, Sn 198, 608. -- 2. the trunk (of an elephant) J v.297 (nāga˚ -- uru); Sdhp 153.

-- puṭa "nose -- cup"; the outside of the nose, the nostril J vi.74; Vism 195 (nāsa˚), 264 (nāsa˚, but KhA 67 nāsā˚), 283 (nāsa˚). -- vāta wind, i. e. breath from the nostrils J iii.276. Nāsika
Nāsika
(adj.) [cp. Sk. nāsikya] belonging to the nose, nasal, in ˚sota the nostril or nose (orig. "sense of smell") D i.106; Sn p. 108. Nāsitaka
Nāsitaka
(adj.) [see nāsa & nāseti] one who is ejected Vin iv.140 (of a bhikkhu). Nāseti
Nāseti
[Sk. nāśayati, Caus. of nassati, q. v.] 1. to destroy, spoil, ruin; to kill J i.59; ii.105, 150; iii.279, 418. -> 2. to atone for a fault (with abl.) Vin i.85, 86, 173 etc. -> Cp. vi˚. Nāha
Nāha
(nt.) [cp. nayhati, naddha] armour J i.358 (sabba˚- sannaddha). Cp. onāha. Ni˚
Ni˚
[Sk. ni -- & nih -- , insep. prefixes: (a) ni down = Av. ni, cp. Gr. neio/s lowland, nei/atos the lowest, hindmost; Lat. nīdus (*ni -- zdos: place to sit down=nest); Ags. nēol, nider=E. nether; Goth. nidar=Ohg. nidar; also Sk. nīca, nīpa etc. -- (b) niḥ out, prob. fr. *seni & to Lat. sine without]. Nearly all (ultimately prob. all) words under this heading are cpds. with the pref. ni. -> A. Forms. 1. Pāli ni˚ combines the two prefixes ni & nis (nir). They are outwardly to be distinguished inasmuch as ni is usually followed by a single consonant (except in forms where double cons. is usually restored in composition, like ni -- kkhipati=ni+kṣip; nissita= ni+sri. Sometimes the double cons. is merely graphic or due to analogy, esp. in words where ni -- is contrasted with ud -- ("up"), as nikkujja>ukkujja, niggilati> uggilati, ninnamati>unnamati). On the other hand a compn with nis is subject to the rules of assimilation, viz. either doubling of cons. (nibbhoga=nir -- bhoga) where vv is represented by bb (nibbiṇṇa fr. nir -- vindati), or lengthening of ni to nī (nīyādeti as well as niyy˚; nīharati=nir+har), or single cons. in the special cases of r & v (niroga besides nīroga for nirroga, cp. duratta >dūrakkha; niveṭheti=nibbeṭheti, nivāreti=*nivvāreti=nīvāreti). Before a vowel the sandhi -- cons. r is restored: nir -- aya, nir -- upadhi etc. -- 2. Both ni & nis are base -- prefixes only, & of stable, well -- defined character, i. e. never enter combns with other prefixes as first (modifying) components in verb -- function (like saŋ, vi etc.), although nis occurs in such combn in noun -- cpds. negating the whole term: nir -- upadhi, nis -- saŋsaya etc. -> 3. ni is freq. emphasised by saŋ as saŋni˚ (tud, dhā, pat, sad); nis most freq. by abhi as abhinis˚ (nam, pad, vatt, har).

B. Meanings. 1. ni (with secondary derivations like nīca "low") is a verb -- pref. only, i. e. it characterises action with respect to its direction, which is that of (a) a downward motion (opp. abhi & ud); (b) often implying the aim ( = down into, on to, cp. Lat. sub in subire, or pref. ad˚); or (c) the reverting of an upward motion=back (identical with b); e. g. (a) ni -- dhā (put down), ˚kkhip (throw d.), ˚guh (hide d.), ˚ci (heap up), ˚pad (fall d.), ˚sad (sit d.); (b) ni -- ratta (at -- tached to), ˚mant (speak to); ˚yuj (ap -- point), ˚ved (ad -- dress), ˚sev (be devoted to) etc.; (c) ni -- vatt (turn back). -- 2. nis (a) as verb -- pref. it denotes the directional "out" with further development to "away from, opposite, without," pointing out the finishing, completion or vanishing of an action & through the latter idea often assuming the meaning of the reverse, disappearance or contrary of an action="un" (Lat. dis -- ), e. g. nikkhamati (to go out from) opp. pavisati (to enter into), ˚ccharati (nis to car to go forth), ˚ddhamati (throw out), ˚pajjati (result from), ˚bbattati (vatt spring out from), nīharati (take out), nirodhati (break up, destroy). -- (b) as nounpref. it denotes "being without" or "not having"= E. -- less, e. g. niccola without clothes, ˚ttaṇha (without thirst), ˚ppurisa (without a man), ˚pphala (without fruit); niccala motion -- less, ˚kkaruṇa (heartless), ˚ddosa (fault˚), ˚maŋsa (flesh˚), ˚saŋsaya (doubt˚) nirattha (useless), ˚bbhaya (fear˚). -- Bdhgh evidently takes ni -- in meaning of nis only, when defining: ni -- saddo abhāvaŋ dīpeti Vism 495. Nikacca
Nikacca
see nikati. Nikaṭṭha
Nikaṭṭha
(adj.) [cp. Sk. nikṛṣṭa, ni+kasati] brought down, debased, low. As one kind of puggala (n -- kāya+ncitta) A ii.137. loc. nikaṭṭhe (adv.) near J iii.438 = ThA 105 (v. 33) (=santike J iii.438). Nikaṇṇika
Nikaṇṇika
(adj.) under (4) ears, secret, cp. catukkaṇṇa J iii.124; nt. adv. secretly Vin iv.270, 271. Nikata
Nikata
(adj.) [Sk. nikṛta, ni+karoti "done down"] deceived, cheated M i.511 (+vañcita paladdha); S iv.307 (+vañcita paluddha). Nikati
Nikati
(f.) [Sk. nikṛti, see prec.] fraud, deceit, cheating D i.5 ( = DA i.80 paṭirūpakena vañcanaŋ); iii.176; Sn 242 (=nirāsaŋ -- karaṇaŋ SnA 286); J i.223; Pv iii.95 (+vañcana); Pug 19, 23, 58; VvA 114; PvA 211 (paṭirūpadassanena paresaŋ vikāro). -- instr. nikatiyā (metri causa) J i.223, nikatyā J ii.183, nikacca S i.24. Cp. nekatika. Nikanta
Nikanta
(adj.) [Sk. nikṛtta & nikṛntita (cp. Divy 537, 539), ni+kantati2] cut, (ab -- )razed M i.364 (of a fleshless bone). Nikantati
Nikantati
[Sk. ni -- kṛṇtati, see kantati2] to cut down, to cut up, cut off PvA 210 (piṭṭhi -- maŋsāni the flesh of the back, v. l. SS for ukkant˚); Pgdp 29. Nikanti
Nikanti
(f.) [Sk. nikānti, ni+kamati] desire, craving, longing for, wish Th 1, 20; Ps ii.72, 101; Dhs 1059, 1136; Vism 239, 580; DhsA 369; DhA iv.63; DA i.110; Dāvs iii.40. Nikara
Nikara
[Sk. nikara, ni+karoti] a multitude Dāvs v.25 (jātipuppha˚). Nikaraṇā
Nikaraṇā
(f. or is it ˚aŋ?) = nikati (fraud) Pug 19, 23 (as syn. of māyā). -- 352 -- Nikaroti
Nikaroti
[Sk. nikaroti, ni+karoti] to bring down, humiliate, to deceive, cheat Sn 138 (nikubbetha Pot. = vañceyya KhA 247). pp. nikata (q. v.). Nikasa
Nikasa
[Sk. nikasa, ni+kasati] a whetstone Dāvs iii.87 (˚opala). Nikasāva
Nikasāva
(adj.) [Sk. niṣkaṣāya nis+kasāva see kasāya 2d] free from impurity Vin i.3; opp. anikkasāva (q. v.) Dh 9≈. Nikāma
Nikāma
[Vedic nikāma, ni+kāma] desire, pleasure, longing: only in cpds.; see nanikāma.

-- kāra read by Kern (Toev. 174) at Th 1, 1271 for na kāmakāra but unjustified (see SnA on Sn 351); -- lābhin gaining pleasure S ii.278; M i.354; iii.110; A ii.23, 36; Pug 11, 12; Vbh 332. Nikāmanā
Nikāmanā
(f.) = nikanti, Dhs 1059. Nikāmeti
Nikāmeti
[Sk. ni -- kāmayati, ni+kāmeti] to crave, desire, strive after, ppr nikāmayaŋ S i.122, & nikāmayamāna Vin ii.108. Cp. nikanta & nikanti. Nikāya
Nikāya
[Sk. nikāya, ni+kāya] collection ("body") assem- blage, class, group; 1. generally (always -- ˚): eka˚ one class of beings DhsA 66; tiracchāna˚ the animal kingdom S iii.152; deva˚ the assembly of the gods, the gods D ii.261 (60); M i.102; S iv. 180; A iii.249; iv.461; PvA 136; satta˚ the world of beings, the animate creation, a class of living beings S ii.2, 42, 44; M i.49 (tesaŋ tesaŋ sattānaŋ tamhi tamhi s. -- nikāye of all beings in each class); Vbh 137; PvA 134. -- 2. especially the coll. of Buddhist Suttas, as the 5 sections of the Suttanta Piṭaka, viz. Dīgha˚, Majjhima˚, Saŋyutta˚, Anguttara˚ (referred to as D.M.S.A. in Dictionaryquotations), Khuddaka˚; enumd PvA 2; Anvs p. 35; DhA ii.95 (dhammāsanaŋ āruyha pañcahi nikāyehi atthañ ca kāraṇañ ca ākaḍḍhitvā). The five Nikāyas are enumd also at Vism 711; one is referred to at SnA 195 (pariyāpuṇāti master by heart). See further details under piṭaka. Cp. nekāyika. Nikāra
Nikāra
[Sk. nikāra in diff. meaning, ni+kāra] service, humility J iii.120 (nikāra -- pakāra, prob. to be read nipaccākāra, q. v.). Nikāsa
Nikāsa
(n. -- adj.) [ni+kaś] appearance; adj. of appearance, like J v.87 ( -- ˚), corresp. to ˚avakāsa. Nikāsin
Nikāsin
(adj.) [cp. Sk. nikāśin; fr. ni+kāsati] "shining," resembling, like J iii.320 (aggi -- nikāsinā suriyena). Nikiṇṇa
Nikiṇṇa
(adj.) [Sk. *nikīrṇa, pp. ni+kirati, cp. kiraṇa] "strewn down into," hidden away, sheltered J iii.529. Nikiḷita
Nikiḷita
(adj.) [Sk. *nikrīḍita, pp. of nikrīḍayati, ni+ kīḷati] engrossed in play J vi.313. Nikīḷitāvin
Nikīḷitāvin
(adj.) [fr. ni -- kīḷati] playful, playing or dallying with (c. loc.), finding enjoyment in S i.9 (a˚ kāmesu); iv.110 (id.). Nikujja
Nikujja
see nikkujja, q. v. also for nikujjita which is more correctly spelt k than kk (cp. Trenckner, Preface to Majjhima Nikāya & see ni˚ A 1). Nikujjati
Nikujjati
[ni+kujjati, see kujja & cp. nikkujja] to be bent down on, i. e. to attach importance to, to lay weight on D i.53 (as vv. ll. to be preferred to text reading nikkujj˚, cp. nikujja); DA i.160 (nikk˚). Nikuñja
Nikuñja
[Sk. nikuñja, ni+kuñja] a hollow down, a glen, thicket Dāvs iv.32. Nikūjati
Nikūjati
[ni+kūjati "to sing on"] 1. to chirp, warble, hum Th 1, 1270 (nikūjaŋ); ThA 211 (nikūji). -- 2. to twang, jingle, rustle J iii.323. -- pp. nikūjita. -- Cp. abhi˚. Nikūjita
Nikūjita
[see nikūjati] sung forth, warbled out Th 2, 261. Nikūṭa
Nikūṭa
[ni+kūṭa to kūṭa2] a corner, top, climax J i.278 (arahatta˚, where usually arahattena kūṭaŋ etc.); DA i.307 (id.). Niketa
Niketa
[Sk. niketa settlement, ni+cināti] 1. house, abode Dh 91 ( = ālaya DhA ii.170). -- 2. (fig.) company, association. (In this sense it seems to be interpreted as belonging to ketu "sign, characteristic, mark," and niketa -- sārin would have to be taken as "following the banner or flag of . . .," i. e. belonging or attached to, i. e. a follower of, one who is devoted to.) a˚ not living in company, having no house Sn 207; Miln 244 (+nirālaya).

-- vāsin (a˚) not living in a house, not associating with anybody Miln 201; -- sayana = ˚vāsin Miln 361; -- sārin (a˚) "wandering homeless" or "not living in company," i. e. not associating with, not a follower of . . . S iii.9 sq.=Nd1 198; Sn 844=S iii.9; SnA 255=S iii.10; Sn 970 (=Nd1 494 q. v.). Niketavant
Niketavant
(adj.) [to niketa] parting company with Miln 288 (kamma˚). Niketin
Niketin
(adj.) having an abode, being housed, living in Sn 422 (kosalesu); J iii.432 (duma -- sākhā -- niketinī f.). Nikkankha
Nikkankha
(adj.) [Sk. niḥśanka, nis+kankha, adj. of kankhā, cp. kankhin] not afraid, fearless, not doubting, confident, sure J i.58. Cp. nissaŋsaya. Nikkankhā
Nikkankhā
(f.) [Sk. niḥśankā, nis+kankhā] fearlessness, state of confidence, trust (cp. nibbicikicchā) S v.221. Nikkaḍḍhati
Nikkaḍḍhati
[Sk. niṣkarṣati, nis+kasati, cp. kaḍḍhati] to throw out Vin iv.274 (Caus. nikkaḍḍhāpeti ibid.); J i.116; ii.440; SnA 192. pp. nikkaḍḍhita. Nikkaḍḍhanā
Nikkaḍḍhanā
(f.) throwing out, ejection J iii.22 (a˚); v.234. ( = niddhamanā). Nikkaḍḍhita
Nikkaḍḍhita
(adj.) [Sk. *niṣkarṣita see nikkaḍḍhati] thrown out J ii.103 (gehā); PvA 179 (read ḍḍh for ḍḍ). Nikkaṇṭaka
Nikkaṇṭaka
(adj.) [Sk. niṣkaṇṭaka, nis+kaṇṭaka] free from thorns or enemies Miln 250; cp. akaṇṭaka. Nikkaddama
Nikkaddama
(adj.) [nis+kaddama] unstained, not dirty, free from impunity DA i.226. Nikkama
Nikkama
(n. -- adj.) [Sk. niṣkrama; nis+kama] exertion, strength, endurance. The orig. meaning of "going forth" is quite obliterated by the fig. meaning (cp. nikkhamati & nekkhamma) A i.4; iii.214; Vv 187 ( = viriya VvA 96); Dhs 13, 22, 219, 571; Vism 132; Miln 244 (+ārambha). -- (adj.) strong in ( -- ˚), enduring, exerting oneself S i.194 (tibba˚); v.66, 104 sq.; Sn 68 (daḷha˚, cp. Nd2 under padhānavā), 542 (sacca˚). Nikkamati
Nikkamati
[Sk. niṣkramati, nis+kamati, see also nikkha- mati & nekkhamma] to go out, to go forth; in fig. meaning: to leave behind lust, evil & the world, to get rid of "kāma" (craving), to show right exertion & strength Miln 245 (+arabhati)+S i.156 (kkh). Nikkaya
Nikkaya
[cp. Sk. niṣkraya, nis+kaya cp. nikkiṇāti] "buying off," redemption J vi.577. Nikkaruṇa
Nikkaruṇa
(adj.) [nis+karuṇa, adj. of karuṇā] without compassion, heartless Sn 244 ( = sattānaŋ anatthakāma); Sdhp 508. Nikkarunatā
Nikkarunatā
(f.) = following Vism 314. Nikkaruṇā
Nikkaruṇā
(f.) [Sk. niṣkaruṇatā; nis+karuṇā] heartless- ness PvA 55. Nikkasāva
Nikkasāva
see nikasāva. -- 353 -- Nikkāma
Nikkāma
(adj.) [Sk. niṣkāma, nis+kāma] without craving or lust, desireless Sn 1131 ( = akāmakāmin Nd2 340; pahīnakāma SnA 605 with v. l.: nikkāma). Cp. next. Nikkāmin
Nikkāmin
(adj.) [nis+kāmin] = nikkāma Sn 228 (=kata- nikkhamana KhA 184). Nikkāraṇā
Nikkāraṇā
(abl. = adv.) [Sk. niṣkāraṇā, nis+kāraṇaŋ] without reason, without cause or purpose Sn 75 (=akāraṇā ahetu Nd2 341). Nikkāsa
Nikkāsa
is Bdhgh's reading for ikkāsa (q. v.) Vin ii.151, with C. on p. 321. Nikkiṇati
Nikkiṇati
[Sk. niṣkriṇāti, nis+kiṇāti] to buy back, to redeem J vi.576, 585; Miln 284. Nikkiṇṇa
Nikkiṇṇa
(adj.) [Sk. niṣkīrṇa, nis+kiṇṇa, see kiraṇa] spread out, spread before, ready (for eating) J vi.182 ( = ṭhapita Com.). Nikkilesa
Nikkilesa
[nis+kilesa] freedom fr. moral blemish Nd1 340 = Nd2 under pucchā Nd2 185; as adj. pure, unstained DhA iv.192=SnA 469 (=anāvila). Nikkujja
Nikkujja
(adj.) [ni+kubja, better spelling is nikujja see nikkujjati] bent down, i. e. head forward, lying on one's face; upset, thrown over A i.130; S v.48; Pv iv.77 (k); Pug 31. Opp. ukkujja. Nikkujjati
Nikkujjati
[for nikujjati (q. v.) through analogy with opp. ukkujjati. Etym. perhaps to kujja humpback, Sk. kubja, but better with Kern, Toev. 1. p. 175 = Sk. nyubjati, influenced by kubja with regard to k.] to turn upside down, to upset Vin ii.113; A iv.344 (pattaŋ). -> pp. nikkujjita. Nikkujjita
Nikkujjita
(adj.) [pp. of nikkujjati; often (rightly) spelt nikujjita, q. v.] lying face downward, overturned, upset, fallen over, stumbled Vin i.16; D i.85, 110; 147, M i.24 (k.); A i.173; iii.238; Th 2, 28, 30 (k.); J iii.277; SnA 155 ( = adhomukha -- ṭhapita); DA i.228. Nikkuha
Nikkuha
(adj.) [nis+kuha] without deceit, not false A ii.26 = It 113; Sn 56; Nd2 342. Nikkodha
Nikkodha
(adj.) [nis+kodha] without anger, free from anger J iv.22. Nikkha
Nikkha
(m. & nt.) [Vedic niṣka; cp. Oir. nasc (ring), Ohg. nusca (bracelet)] 1. a golden ornament for neck or breast, a ring J ii.444; vi.577. -- 2. (already Vedic) a golden coin or a weight of gold (cp. a "pound sterling"), equal to 15 suvaṇṇas (VvA 104 = suvaṇṇassa pañcadasa -- dharaṇaŋ nikkhan ti vadanti) S ii.234 (suvaṇṇa˚ & singi˚); J i.84 (id.); A iv.120 (suvaṇṇa˚); Vv 208= 438 (v. l. SS nekkha) J vi.180; Miln 284. suvaṇṇanikkha -- sataŋ (100 gold pieces) J i.376; iv.97; v.58; ˚sahassaŋ (1000) J v.67; DhA i.393. -- See also nekkha. Nikkhanta
Nikkhanta
(adj.) [pp. of nis+kamati, see nikkhamati] gone out, departed from (c. abl.), gone away; also med. going out, giving up, fig. leaving behind, resigning, renouncing (fusing in meaning with kanta1 of kāmyati = desireless) S i.185 (agārasmā anagāriyaŋ); Sn 991 (Kapilavatthumhā n. lokanāyako); J i.149; ii.153; iv.364 (˚bhikkhā, in sense of nikkhāmita˚, v. l. nikkhitta˚, perhaps preferable, expld p. 366 nibaddha˚= designed for, given to); SnA 605 (fig.; as v. l. for nikkāma); DhA ii.39; PvA 61 (bahi); Nd2 under nissita; Nd2 107 (free, unobstructed). Nikkhama
Nikkhama
(adj.) [cp. Sk. niṣkrama] going out from PvA 80 (nāsikāya n. -- mala). dun˚ at Th 1, 72 is to be read dunnikkhaya, as indicated by vv. ll. See the latter. Nikkhamati
Nikkhamati
[Sk. niṣkramati, nis+kamati] to go forth from, to come out of (c. abl.), to get out, issue forth, depart, fig. to leave the household life behind (agārā n.), to retire from the world (cp. abhinikkhamati etc.), or to give up evil desire. -- (a) lit. (often with bahi outside, out; opp. pavisati to enter into: A v.195). D ii.14 (mātu kucchismā); J i.52 (mātukucchito). Imper. nikkhama Pv. i.103; ppr. nikkhamanto J i.52; ii.153; iii.26 (mukhato); PvA 90; aor. nikkhami J ii.154; iii.188; fut. ˚issati J ii.154; ger. nikkhamma J i.51, 61 (fig.) & nikkhamitvā J i.16, 138 (fig.), 265; iii.26; iv.449 (n. pabbajissāmi); PvA 14, 19 (fig.) 67 (gāmato), 74 (id.); inf. nikkhamituŋ J i.61 (fig.); ii.104; Pv i.102 (bahi n.); grd. nikkhamitabba Vin i.47. -> (b) fig. (see also nikkamati, & cp. nekkhamma & BSk. niṣkramati in same meaning, e. g. Divy 68 etc.) S i.156 (ārabbhati+) = Miln 245 (where nikkamati); J i.51 (agārā), 61 (mahābhinikkhamanaŋ "the great renunciation"), PvA 19 (id.). -- pp. nikkhanta; caus. nikkhameti (q. v.). Nikkhamana
Nikkhamana
[BSk. niṣkramaṇa, to nikkhamati] going out, departing J ii.153; VvA 71 (opp. pavesana); fig. renunciation KhA 184 (kata˚ as adj. = nikkāmin). See also abhi˚. Nikkhameti & Nikkhāmeti
Nikkhameti
& Nikkhāmeti [Caus. of nikkhamati] to make go out or away, to bring out or forth S ii.128; J i.264, ii.112. -- pp. nikkhāmita J iii.99 (+nicchuddha, thrown out, in expln of nibbāpita; v. l. BB. nikaḍhāpita). Nikkhaya
Nikkhaya
(adj.) [Sk. *niḥkṣaya, nis+khaya] liable to destruction, able to be destroyed, in dun˚ hard to destroy J iv.449 ( = dun -- nikkaḍḍhiya Com.); also to be read (v. l.) at Th 1, 72 for dunnikkhama. Cp. nikhīṇa. Nikkhitta
Nikkhitta
(adj.) [Sk. nikṣipta, see nikkhipati] laid down, lying; put down into, set in, arranged; in cpds. (˚ -- ) having laid down = freed of, rid of D ii.14 (maṇi -- ratanaŋ vatthe n. set into); It 13 (sagge: put into heaven); J i.53, 266; Pv iii.68; Miln 343 (agga˚ put down as the highest, i. e. of the highest praise; cp. BSk. agranikṣipta Lal. V. 167); PvA 148 (dhana n.= collected, v. l. SS. nikkita). nikkhitta -- daṇḍa (adj.) not using a weapon (cp. daṇḍa) S i.141 etc.; nikkhitta -- dhura unyoked, freed of the yoke A i.71; iii.108; cp. DhsA 145; -- su˚ well set, well arranged A ii.147 sq. (˚assa pada -- vyañjanassa attho sunnayo hoti); opp. dun˚ A i.59; Nett 21. Nikkhittaka
Nikkhittaka
(adj. -- n.) [fr. nikkhitta] one to whose charge something has been committed Dpvs iv.5 (agga˚ thera: original depositary of the Faith). Nikkhipati
Nikkhipati
[Sk. nikṣipati, ni+khipati] 1. to lay down (carefully), to put down, to lay (an egg) Vin ii.114; It 13, 14 (Pot. nikkhipeyya); Pug 34; J i.49 (aṇḍakaŋ). -- 2. to lay aside, to put away Vin i.46 (patta -- cīvaraŋ); A i.206 (daṇḍaŋ to discard the weapon; see daṇḍa); Mhvs 14, 10 (dhanu -- saraŋ). -- 3. to eliminate, get rid of, give up Pv ii.615 (dehaŋ to get rid of the body); DhsA 344 (vitthāra -- desanaŋ). -- 4. to give in charge, to deposit, entrust, save Pug 26; VvA 33 (sahassathavikaŋ). -- aor. nikkhipi D ii.161 (Bhagavato sarīraŋ) J ii.104, 111, 416; fut. ˚issati D ii.157 (samussayaŋ); ger. ˚itvā M iii.156 (cittaŋ); J ii.416; vi.366; grd. ˚itabba Vin i.46. -- pp. nikkhitta (q. v.). -- Caus. nikkhipāpeti to cause to be laid down, to order to be put down etc. PvA 215 (gosīsaṭṭhiŋ). Cp. abhi˚. Nikkhepa
Nikkhepa
[Sk. nikṣepa, see nikkhipati] putting down, laying down; casting off, discarding, elimination; giving up, renunciation; abstract or summary treatment DhsA 6, 344 (see under mātikā); in grammar: pada˚ the setting of the verse; i. e. rules of composition (Miln 381). Vin i.16 (pādukānaŋ = the putting down of the slippers, i.e. the slippers as they were, put down); J iii.243 (dhura˚ giving up one's office or charge), i.236 (sarīra ˚ŋ kāresi had the body laid out); Dpvs xvii.109 (id.). Vism 618 (=cuti); DhA ii.98 (sarīra˚); DA i.50 (sutta˚); DhsA 344; Miln 91. -- 354 -- Nikkhepana
Nikkhepana
(nt.) = nikkhepa S iii.26 (bhāra˚ getting rid of the load, opp. bhārâdānaŋ); Miln 356 (=comparison); Vism 236 (deha˚). Nikhanati & Nikhaṇati
Nikhanati
& Nikhaṇati [Sk. nikhanati, ni+khanati] to dig into, to bury, to erect, to cover up Vin ii.116; iii.78 (akkhiŋ = cover the eye, as a sign); J v.434=DhA iv.197 (id.); D ii.127 (ṇ); J i.264; SnA 519 (ṇ, to bury). -- pp. nikhāta. Nikhāta
Nikhāta
[pp. of nikhaṇati] 1. dug, dug out (of a hole), buried (of a body) SnA 519. -- 2. dug in, erected (of a post) Sn 28; DhA ii.181 (nagara -- dvāre n. indakhīla). See also a˚. Nikhādana
Nikhādana
(nt.) [Sk. *nikhādana, ni+khādati, cp. khā- dana] "eating down," a sharp instrument, a spade or (acc. to Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 83) a chisel Vin iii.149; iv.211; J ii.405 (so read for khādana); iv.344; v.45. Nikhila
Nikhila
(adj.) [Sk. nikhila cp. khila] all, entire, whole Dāvs v.40 (˚loka v. l. sakala˚). Nikhīṇa
Nikhīṇa
(adj.) [nis+khīṇa] having or being lost J vi.499 (˚patta without wings, deprived of its wings). Niga
Niga
in gavaya -- gokaṇṇa -- nig -- âdīnaŋ DhsA 331 is mis- print for miga. Nigacchati
Nigacchati
[Sk. nigacchati, ni+gacchati] to go down to, to "undergo," incur, enter, come to; to suffer esp. with dukkhaŋ & similar expressions of affliction or punishment S iv.70 (dukkhaŋ); M i.337 sq. (id.); A i.251 (bandhanaŋ); Dh 69 (dukkhaŋ = vindati, paṭilabhati DhA ii.50), 137; Nd2 1994 (maraṇaŋ+maraṇamattam pi dukkhaŋ) Pv iv.77 (pret. nigacchiṭṭha=pāpuṇi PvA 266). Nigaṇṭha
Nigaṇṭha
[BSk. nirgrantha (Divy 143, 262 etc.) "freed from all ties," nis+gaṇṭhi. This is the customary (correct?) etym. Prk. niggantha, cp. Weber, Bhagavatī p. 165] a member of the Jain order (see M i.370 -- 375, 380 & cp. jaṭila) Vin i.233 (Nātaputta, the head of that Order, cp. D i.57; also Sīho senāpati n -- sāvako); S i.78, 82 (˚bhikkhā); A i.205 sq. (˚uposatha), cp. 220; ii.196 (˚sāvaka); iii.276, 383; v.150 (dasahi asaddhammehi samannāgata); Sn 381; Ud 65 (jaṭilā, n., acelā, ekasātā, paribbājakā); J ii.262 (object to eating flesh); DA i.162; DhA i.440; iii.489; VvA 29 (n. nāma samaṇajāti). -- f. nigaṇṭhī D i.54 (nigaṇṭhi -- gabbha). Nigati
Nigati
(f.) [ni+gati, q. v.] destiny, condition, behaviour J vi.238. See also niyati & cp. niggatika. Nigama
Nigama
[Sk. nigama, fr. nigacchati = a meeting -- place or market, cp. E. moot -- hall=market hall] a small town, market town (opp. janapada); often combd with gāma (see gāma 2) Vin i.110 (˚sīma), 188 (˚kathā), 197 (Setakaṇṇika˚); D i.7 (˚kathā), 101 (˚sāmanta), 193, 237; M i.429, 488; Pv ii.1318; J vi.330; PvA 111 (Asitañjana˚, v. l. BB nagara). Cp. negama. Nigamana
Nigamana
(nt.) [Sk. nigamana] quotation, explanation, illustration Vism 427 (˚vacana quotation); PvA 255 (perhaps we should read niyamana); conclusion, e. g. Paṭṭh.A 366; VbhA 523. Nigaḷa
Nigaḷa
[Sk. nigaḍa, ni+gaḷa, cp. gala3] an (iron) chain for the feet J i.394; ii.153; vi.64 (here as "bracelet"). Nigāḷhika
Nigāḷhika
(better v. l. nigāḷhita) [Sk. nigāḍhita; ni+ gāḍhita, see gāḷha2] sunk down into, immersed in Th 1, 568 (gūthakūpe). Nigūḷha
Nigūḷha
[Sk. nigūḍha, but BSk. nirgūḍha (Divy 256); ni+gūḷha] hidden (down), concealed; (n.) a secret J i.461; Dāvs iii.39. Nigūhati
Nigūhati
[Sk. nigūhati, ni+gūhati] to cover up, conceal, hide J i.286; iii.392; iv.203; Pv.iii.43 (≈parigūhāmi, v. l. SS guyhāmi). pp. nigūḷha (q. v.). Nigūhana
Nigūhana
(nt.) [Sk. nigūhana, see nigūhati] covering, concealing, hiding VvA 71. Niggacchati
Niggacchati
[Sk. nirgacchati, nis+gacchati] to go out or away, disappear; to proceed from, only in pp. niggata (q. v.); at J vi.504 as ni˚. Niggaṇṭhi
Niggaṇṭhi
(adj.) [Sk. nirgranthi, nis+gaṇṭhi, cp. also nigaṇṭha] free from knots (said of a sword) Miln 105. See also nighaṇḍu. Niggaṇhāti
Niggaṇhāti
[Sk. nigṛhṇāti, ni+gaṇhāti] 1. to hold back, restrain Dh 326; J iv.97; Miln 184; Vism 133. -- Opp. paggaṇhāti. -- 2. to rebuke, censure (c. instr.) A iii.187; J iii.222; Miln 9 (musāvādena); DhA i.29. -> ger. niggayha, pp. niggahīta (q. v.). Cp. abhi˚. Niggata
Niggata
(adj.) [Sk. nirgata, see niggacchati] 1. going out, proceeding from (abl.): dahato niggatā nadī (a river issuing from a lake) PvA 152. -- 2. ( = nigata? or=nis+gata "of ill fate") destined, fateful; miserable, unfortunate PvA 223 (˚kamma=punishment in expln of niyassa kamma, v. l. SS. nigaha for niggata; see also niya & niyata); Sdhp 165 (of niraya=miserable), cp. niggatika & niggamana. Niggatika
Niggatika
[Sk. *nirgatika, nis+gati -- ka] having a bad "gati" or fate, ill -- fated, bad, unfortunate, miserable J iii.538 (v. l. BB as gloss, nikkāruṇika); iv.48 (v. l. BB nikatika). Niggama
Niggama
(n.) in logic, deduction, conclusion. Pts. of Controversy p. 1. Niggamana
Niggamana
[Sk. *nirgamana, of niggacchati] 1. going away DA i.94. -- 2. result, fate, consequence, outcome Sdhp 172, 173 (dun˚). -- 3. (log.) conclusion Kvu 4. Niggayhavādin
Niggayha
-- vādin (adj.) [see niggaṇhāti] one who speaks rebukingly, censuring, reproving, resenting Dh 76 (see expln in detail at DhA ii.107 & cp. M iii.118). Niggayhati
Niggayhati
[Sk. nigṛhyate, ni+gayhati, Pass. of niggaṇ- hāti] to be seized by (?), to be blamed for DhA i.295 (cittaŋ dukkhena n., in expln of dunniggaha). Niggaha
Niggaha
[Sk. nigraha, ni+gaha2; see niggaṇhāti] 1. restraint, control, rebuke, censure, blame Vin ii.196; A i.98, 174; v.70; J v.116 (opp. paggaha); vi.371 (id.); Miln 28, 45, 224. -- dun˚ hard to control (citta) Dh 35 (cp. expl. at DhA i.295). -- 2. (log.) refutation Kvu 3. Niggahaṇa
Niggahaṇa
(adj.) [Sk. *nirgahaṇa, cp. nirgṛha homeless; nis+gahaṇa] without acquisitions, i. e. poor J ii.367 (v. l. BB. as gloss nirāhāra). Niggahaṇatā
Niggahaṇatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. ni+gṛh, cp. next] restraint Vism 134 (cittassa). Opp. pagg˚. Niggahīta
Niggahīta
(adj.) [Sk. nigṛhīta, but cp. Divy 401: nigṛhīta; ni+gahita] restrained, checked, rebuked, reproved S iii.12; A i.175 (aniggahīto dhammo); J vi.493. Niggāhaka
Niggāhaka
(adj. -- n.) [ni+gāhaka, see niggaṇhāti] one who rebukes, oppresses, oppressor Sn 118 ( = bādhaka SnA 178, with v. l. ghātaka); J iv.362 (=balisādhaka Com.). Niggilati
Niggilati
(niggalati) [Sk. nigirati, ni+gilati] to swallow down (opp. uggilati to spit out, throw up) J iv.392 (sic as v. l.; text niggalati). Nigguṇa
Nigguṇa
(adj.) [Sk. nirguṇa, nis+guṇa] devoid of good qualities, bad Miln 180. Nigguṇḍi
Nigguṇḍi
(f.) [Sk. nirguṇḍī, of obscure etym.] a shrub (Vitex Negundo) Miln 223 (˚phala); Vism 257 (˚puppha). Niggumba
Niggumba
(adj.) [Sk. *nirgulma, nis+gumba] free from bushes, clear J i.187; Miln 3. Nigghātana
Nigghātana
(nt.) [Sk. nirghātana, nis+ghātana, but cp. nighāta] destruction, killing, rooting out Sn 1085 (taṇhā˚; SnA 576 = vināsana); Nd2 343 (v. l. nighātana). -- 355 -- Nigghosa
Nigghosa
[Sk. nirghoṣa, nis+ghosa] 1. "shouting out," sound; fame, renown; speech, utterance, proclamation; word of reproach, blame S i.190; A iv.88 (appa˚ noiseless, lit. of little or no noise); Sn 719, 818 ( = nindāvacana SnA 537), 1061; J i.64; vi.83; Vv 55; Nd1 150; Nd2 344; Dhs 621; VvA 140 (madhura˚); 334 (in quotation appa -- sadda, appa˚); Sdhp 245. -- 2. (adj.) noiseless, quiet, still Sn 959 (=appasadda appanigghosa Nd1 467). Nigrodha
Nigrodha
[Sk. nyagrodha; Non -- Aryan?] the banyan or Indian fig -- tree, Ficus Indica, usually as cpd. ˚rukkha Vin iv.35; D ii.4; Sn 272; J iii.188 (r.) DhA ii.14 (r.); PvA 5 (r.) 112, 244; Sdhp 270; -- pakka the fruit of the fig -- tree Vism 409. -- parimaṇḍala the round or circumference of the banyan D ii.18; iii.144, 162. Nigha
Nigha1
(nīgha) (adj. -- n.) is invented by Com. & scholiasts to explain the combn anigha (anīgha sporadic, e. g. S v.57). But this should be divided an -- īgha instead of a -- nīgha. -- (m.) rage, trembling, confusion, only in formula rāgo n. doso n. moho n. explaining the adj. anīgha. Thus at S iv.292 = Nd2 45; S v.57. -- (adj.) anigha not trembling, undisturbed, calm [see etym. under īgha= Sk. ṛgh of ṛghāyati to tremble, rage, rave] S i.54; iv.291; J v.343. Otherwise always combd with nirāsa: S i.12=23, 141; Sn 1048, 1060, 1078. Expld correctly at SnA 590 by rāgādi -- īgha -- virahita. Spelling anīgha J iii.443 (Com. niddukkha); Pv iv.134 (+nirāsa; expld by niddukkha PvA 230). anīgha also at It 97 (+chinnasaŋsaya); Ud 76; Dh 295 (v. l. aniggha; expld by niddukkha DhA iii.454). Nigha
Nigha2
(nt.) [prob. ni+gha = Sk. ˚gha of hanati (see also P. ˚gha), to kill; unless abstracted from anigha as in prec. nigha1] killing, destruction Th 2, 491 (=maraṇasampāpana ThA 288). Nighaŋsa
Nighaŋsa
[Sk. nigharṣa] rubbing, chafing DhsA 263, 308. Nighaŋsati
Nighaŋsati
[Sk. nigharṣati, ni+ghaŋsati1] 1. to rub, rub against, graze, chafe Vin ii.133; Vism 120; DhA i.396. -- 2. to polish up, clean J ii.418; iii.75. Nighaŋsana
Nighaŋsana
(nt.) [Sk. nigharṣana] = nighaŋsa Miln 215. Nighaṇḍu
Nighaṇḍu
[Sk. nighaṇṭu, dial. for nirgrantha from grath- nāti (see gaṇṭhi & ghaṭṭana), orig. disentanglement, unravelling, i. e. explanation; cp. niggaṇṭhi, which is a variant of the same word. -- BSk. nighaṇṭa (Divy 619; AvŚ ii.19), Prk. nighaṇṭu] an explained word or a word expln, vocabulary, gloss, usually in ster. formula marking the accomplishments of a learned Brahmin " sanighaṇḍu -- keṭubhānaŋ . . . padako" (see detail under keṭubha) D i.88; A i.163, 166; iii.223; Sn p. 105; Miln 10. Bdhgh's expln is quoted by Trenckner, Notes p. 65. Nighāta
Nighāta
[Sk. nighāta, ni+ghāta] striking down, suppressing, destroying, killing M i.430; Nett 189. Cp. nighāti. Nighāti
Nighāti
[ni+ghāti] "slaying or being slain," defeat, loss (opp. ugghāti) Sn 828. Cp. nighāta. Nicaya
Nicaya
[Sk. nicaya, ni+caya, cp. nicita] heaping up, accumulation; wealth, provisions S i.93, 97; Vin v.172 (˚sannidhi). See also necayika. Nicita
Nicita
(adj.) [Sk. nicita, ni+cita, of nicināti] heaped up, full, thick, massed, dense Th 2, 480 (of hair); PvA 221 (ussanna uparûpari nicita, of Niraya). Nicula
Nicula
[Sk. nicula] a plant (Barringtonia acutangula) VvA 134. Nicca
Nicca
(adj.) [Vedic nitya, adj. -- formation fr. ni, meaning "downward" = onward, on and on; according to Grassmann (Wtb. z. Rig Veda) originally "inwardly, homely"] constant, continuous, permanent D iii.31; S i.142; ii.109, 198; iv.24 sq., 45, 63; A ii.33, 52; v.210; Ps ii.80; Vbh 335, 426. In chain of synonyms: nicca dhuva sassata avipariṇāmadhamma D i.21; S iii.144, 147; see below anicca, -- nt. adv. niccaŋ perpetually, constantly, always (syn. sadā) M i.326; iii.271; Sn 69, 220, 336; Dh 23, 109, 206, 293; J i.290; iii.26, 190; Nd2 345 (=dhuvakālaŋ); PvA 32, 55, 134. -> Far more freq. as anicca (adj.; aniccaŋ nt. n.) unstable, impermanent, inconstant; (nt.) evanescence, inconstancy, impermanence. -- The emphatic assertion of impermanence (continuous change of condition) is a prominent axiom of the Dhamma, & the realization of the evanescent character of all things mental or material is one of the primary conditions of attaining right knowledge (: anicca -- saññaŋ manasikaroti to ponder over the idea of impermanence S ii.47; iii.155; v.132; Ps ii.48 sq., 100; PvA 62 etc. -- kāye anicc' ânupassin realizing the impermanence of the body (together with vayânupassin & nirodha˚) S iv.211; v.324, 345; Ps ii.37, 45 sq., 241 sq. See anupassanā). In this import anicca occurs in many combinations of similar terms, all characterising change, its consequences & its meaning, esp. in the famous triad "aniccaŋ dukkhaŋ anattā" (see dukkha ii.2), e. g. S iii.41, 67, 180; iv.28 (sabbaŋ), 85 sq., 106 sq.; 133 sq. Thus anicca addhuva appāyuka cavanadhamma D i.21. anicca+dukkha S ii.53 (yad aniccaŋ taŋ dukkhaŋ); iv.28, 31, v.345; A iv.52 (anicce dukkhasaññā); M i.500 (+roga etc.); Nd2 214 (id. cp. roga). anicca dukkha vipariṇāmadhamma (of kāmā) D i.36. aniccasaññī anattasaññī A iv.353; etc. -> Opposed to this ever -- fluctuating impermanence is Nibbāna (q. v.), which is therefore marked with the attributes of constancy & stableness (cp. dhuva, sassata amata, vipariṇāma). -- See further for ref. S ii.244 sq. (saḷāyatanaŋ a.), 248 (dhātuyo); iii.102 (rūpa etc.); iv.131, 151; A ii.33, 52; v.187 sq., 343 sq.; Sn 805; Ps i.191; ii.28 sq., 80, 106; Vbh 12 (rūpa etc.), 70 (dvādasâyatanāni), 319 (viññāṇā), 324 (khandhā), 373; PvA 60 (= ittara).

-- kālaŋ (adv.) constantly Nd2 345; -- dāna a perpetual gift D i.144 (cp. DA i.302); -- bhatta a continuous food-supply (for the bhikkhus) J i.178; VvA 92; PvA 54; -- bhattika one who enjoys a continuous supply of food (as charity) Vin ii.78; iii.237 ( = dhuva -- bhattika); iv.271; -- saññā (& adj. saññin) the consciousness or idea of permanence (adj. having etc.) A ii.52; iii.79, 334; iv.13, 145 sq.; Nett 27; -- sīla the uninterrupted observance of good conduct VvA 72; PvA 256. Niccatā
Niccatā
(f.) [abstr. to nicca] continuity, permanence, only as a˚ changeableness, impermanence S i.61, 204; iii.43; iv.142 sq., 216, 325. Niccatta
Niccatta
(nt.) = niccatā Vism 509. Niccamma
Niccamma
[Sk. niścarman, nis+camma] without skin, excoriated, in ˚ŋ karoti to flog skinless, to beat the skin off J iii.281. niccamma -- gāvī "a skinless cow," used in a well -- known simile at S ii.99, referred to at Vism 341 & 463. Niccala
Niccala
(adj.) [Sk. niścala, nis+cala] motionless J iv.2; PvA 95. Niccittaka
Niccittaka
(adj.) [Sk. niścitta, nis+citta (ka)] thoughtless J ii.298. Niccola
Niccola
(adj.) [nis -- cola] without dress, naked PvA 32 ( = nagga). Nicchanda
Nicchanda
(adj.) [nis+chanda] without desire or ex- citement J i.7. Nicchaya
Nicchaya
[Sk. niścaya, nis+caya of cināti] discrimination, conviction, certainty; resolution, determination J i.441 (˚mitta a firm friend); DhsA 133 (adhimokkha = its paccupaṭṭhāna); SnA 60 (daḷha˚ adj. of firm resolution). See vi˚. -- 356 -- Niccharaṇa
Niccharaṇa
(nt.) [fr. niccharati] emanation, sending out, expansion, efflux Vism 303. Niccharati
Niccharati
[Sk. niścarati, nis+carati] to go out or forth from, to rise, sound forth, come out It 75 (devasadda); Vv 382; J i.53, 176; DhA i.389; VvA 12, 37 (saddā). -> Caus. nicchāreti to make come out from, to let go forth, get rid of, emit, utter, give out D i.53 (anattamanavācam a˚ not utter a word of discontent); J iii.127; v.416 (madhurassaraŋ); Pug 33; Miln 259 (garahaŋ); Dāvs i.28 (vācaŋ). Nicchāta
Nicchāta
[Sk. *niḥpsāta, nis+chāta] having no hunger, being without cravings, stilled, satisfied. Ep. of an Arahant always in combn with nibbuta or parinibbuta: S iii.26 (tanhaŋ abbuyha); iv.204 (vedanānaŋ khayā); M i.341; 412, A iv.410; v.65 (sītibhūta); Sn 707 (aniccha), 735, 758; It 48 (esanānaŋ khayā); Th 2, 132 (abbūḷhasalla). -- Expld at Ps ii.243 by nekkhammena kāmacchandato n.; arahattamaggena sabbakilesehi n. muccati. Nicchādeti
Nicchādeti
see nicchodeti. Nicchāreti
Nicchāreti
Caus. of niccharati, q. v. Nicchita
Nicchita
(adj.) [Sk. niścita, nis+cita, see nicchināti] determined, convinced Mhvs 7, 19. Nicchināti
Nicchināti
[Sk. niścinoti, nis+cināti] to discriminate, con- sider, investigate, ascertain; pot. niccheyya Sn 785 (expld by nicchinitvā vinicchinitvā etc. Nd1 76); Dh 256 (gloss K vinicchaye). -- pp. nicchita. Nicchuddha
Nicchuddha
(adj.) [Sk. niḥkṣubdha, nis+chuddha, see nicchubhati] thrown out J iii.99 ( = nibbāpita, nikkhāmita); Miln 130. Nicchubhati
Nicchubhati
[Sk. *niḥkṣubhati, nis+khubhati or chu- bhati, cp. chuddha & khobha, also nicchodeti & upacchubhati and see Trenckner, Miln pp. 423, 424] to throw out J iii.512 ( = nīharati Com.; v. l. nicchurāti); Miln 187. -- pp. nicchuddha q. v. Nicchubhana
Nicchubhana
(nt.) [see nicchubhati] throwing out, ejection, being an outcaste Miln 357. Nicchodeti
Nicchodeti
(& v. l. nicchādeti) [shows a confusion of two roots, which are both of Prk. origin, viz. chaḍḍ & choṭ, the former = P. chaḍḍeti, the latter=Sk. kṣodayati or BSk. chorayati, Apabhraŋśa chollai; with which cp. P. chuddha] to shake or throw about, only in phrase odhunāti nidhunāti nicchodeti at S iii.155 =M i.229= 374=A iii.365, where S has correct reading (v. l. ˚choṭeti); M has ˚chādeti (v. l. ˚chodeti); A has ˚chedeti (v. l. ˚choreti, ˚chāreti; gloss nippoṭeti). The C. on A iii.365 has: nicchedetī ti bāhāya vā rukkhe vā paharati. -- nicchedeti (chid) is pardonable because of Prk. chollai "to cut." Cp. also nicchubhati with v. l. BB nicchurāti. For sound change P. chkṣ cp. P. chamā Nija Nija (adj.) [Sk. nija, wth dial. j. for nitya=P. nicca] own Dāvs ii.68. Cp. niya. Nijana
Nijana
(nt.) [fr. nij] washing, cleansing Vism 342 (v. l. nijj˚). Nijigiŋsati
Nijigiŋsati
[Sk. nijigīṣati, ni+jigiŋsati] to desire ardently, to covet DA i.92 ( = maggeti pariyesati). Nijigiŋsanatā
Nijigiŋsanatā
(f.) [fr. last] covetousness Vism 23 sq. (defined), 29 (id. = magganā), referring to Vbh 353, where T has jigiŋsanatā, with v. l. nijigīsanatā. Nijigiŋsitar
Nijigiŋsitar
(n. adj.) [n. ag. fr. prec.] one who desires ardently, covetous, rapacious D i.8 (lābhaŋ) A iii.111 (id.). Nijjaṭa
Nijjaṭa
(adj.) [Sk. *nirjaṭa, nis+jaṭa, adj. to jaṭā] dis- entangled J i.187; Miln 3. Nijjara
Nijjara
(adj.) [Sk. nirjara in diff. meaning, P. nis functioning as emphatic pref.; nis+jara] causing to decay, destroying, annihilating; f. ˚ā decay, destruction, death S iv.339; A i.221; ii.198; v.215 sq. (dasa -- n -- vatthūni); Ps i.5 (id.). Nijjareti
Nijjareti
[Sk. nir -- jarayati; nis+jarati1] to destroy, annihilate, cause to cease or exist M i.93; Th 2, 431 (nijjaressāmi = jīrāpessāmi vināsessāmi ThA 269). Nijjāleti
Nijjāleti
[nis+jāleti] to make an end to a blaze, to extinguish, to put out J vi.495 (aggiŋ). Nijjiṇṇa
Nijjiṇṇa
(adj.) [Sk. nirjīrṇa, nis+jiṇṇa] destroyed, over- come, exhausted, finished, dead D i.96; M ii.217 = A i.221 (vedanākkhayā sabbaŋ dukkhaŋ n. bhavissati); M i.93; A v.215 sq.; Nett 51. Nijjita
Nijjita
(adj.) [Sk. nirjita, nis+jita] unvanquished Miln 192 (˚kammasūrā), 332 (˚vijita -- sangāma); Sdhp 360. Nijjīvata
Nijjīvata
(adj.) [Sk. nirjīvita, nis+jīva1] lifeless, soulless DhsA 38; Miln 413. Nijjhatta
Nijjhatta
(adj.) [pp. of nijjhāpeti, *Sk. nidhyapta or nidhyāpita] satisfied, pacified, appeased J vi.414 ( = khamāpita Com.); Vv 6319 (=nijjhāpita VvA 265); Miln 209. See also paṭi˚ Nijjhatti
Nijjhatti
(f.) [abstr. to nijjhatta, cp. BSk. nidhyapti, formation like P. ñatti>Sk. jñapti] conviction, understanding, realization; favourable disposition, satisfaction M i.320; A iv.223; Ps ii.171, 176; Miln 210. Nijjhāna
Nijjhāna1
(nt.) [*Sk. nidhyāna, ni+jhāna1] understanding, insight, perception, comprehension; favour, indulgence ( = nijjhāpana), pleasure, delight J vi.207. Often as ˚ŋ khamati: to be pleased with, to find pleasure in: S iii.225, 228; M i.133, 480; Vv 8417. Thus also diṭṭhinijjhāna -- kkhanti delighting in speculation A i.189 sq.; ii.191. Cp. upa˚. Nijjhāna
Nijjhāna2
(nt.) [nis+jhāna2] conflagration, in anto˚ = nijjhāyana PvA 18 (cittasantāpa+in expln of soka). Nijjhāpana
Nijjhāpana
(nt.) [Sk. *nidhyāpana, ni+jhāpana, Caus. to jhāpeti] favourable disposition, kindness, indulgence J iv.495 (˚ŋ karoti = khamāpeti Com.; text reads nijjhapana). Nijjhāpaya
Nijjhāpaya
(adj.) [Sk. *ni -- dhyāpya, to nijjhāpeti] to be discriminated or understood, in dun˚ hard to . . . Miln 141 (pañha). Nijjhāpeti
Nijjhāpeti
[Sk. nidhāyayati, ni+jhāpeti, Caus. to jhāyati1; cp. Sk. nididhyāsate] to make favourably disposed, to win somebody's affection, or favour, to gain over Vin ii.96; M i.321; J iv.108; 414, 495; vi.516; Miln 264; VvA 265 (nijjhāpita = nijjhatta). Nijjhāma
Nijjhāma
(adj. n.) [Sk. niḥkṣāma, cp. niḥkṣīṇa, nis+ jhāma of jhāyati2 = Sk. kṣāyati] burning away, wasting away, consuming or consumed A i.295; Nett 77, 95 paṭipadā.

-- taṇha (adj.) of consuming thirst, very thirsty J i.44; -- taṇhika = ˚taṇha denoting a class of Petas (q. v.) Miln 294, 303, 357. Nijjhāyati
Nijjhāyati1
[Sk. nidhyāyati, ni+jhāyati1] to meditate, reflect, think S iii.140 sq. (+passati, cp. jānāti), 157; M i.334 (jhāyati n. apajjhāyati); iii.14 (id.). Cp. upa˚. Nijjhāyati
Nijjhāyati2
[ni+jhāyati2] to be consumed (by sorrow), to fret Nd1 433. Nijjhāyana
Nijjhāyana
(nt.) [Sk. *niḥkṣāyana, nis+jhāyana of jhā- yati2] burning away, consumption; fig. remorse, mortification in anto˚ J i.168 (cp. nijjhāna2). -- 357 -- Niṭṭha
Niṭṭha
(adj.) [Sk. niṣṭha, ni+˚tha; cp. niṭṭhā1] dependent on, resting on, intent upon S iii.13 (accanta˚); Nd1 263 (rūpa˚). Niṭṭhā
Niṭṭhā1
(f.) [Sk. niṣṭhā; ni+ṭhā, abstr. of adj. -- suff. ˚ṭha] basis, foundation, familiarity with Sn 864 (expl. SnA 551 by samiddhi, but see Nd1 263). Niṭṭhā
Niṭṭhā2
(f.) [Vedic niṣṭhā (niḥṣṭhā), nis+ṭhā from ˚ṭha] end, conclusion; perfection, height, summit; object, aim Vin i.255; S ii.186; A i.279 (object); Ps i.161. niṭṭhaŋ gacchati to come to an end; fig. to reach perfection, be completed in the faith M i.176; J i.201; Miln 310; freq. in pp. niṭṭhaŋ gata (niṭṭhangata) one who has attained perfection ( = pabbajitānaŋ arahattaŋ patta) DhA iv.70; S iii.99 (a˚); A ii.175; iii.450; v.119 sq.; Dh 351; Ps i.81, 161. Niṭṭhāti
Niṭṭhāti
[Sk. niṣṭiṣṭhati, nis+tiṭṭhati, the older *sthāti restored in compn] to be at an end, to be finished J i.220; iv.391; DhA i.393. -- pp. niṭṭhita, Caus. niṭṭhāpeti (q. v.). Niṭṭhāna
Niṭṭhāna
(nt.) [abstr. of niṭṭhāti] being finished, carrying out, execution, performance D i.141; ThA 19 ( = avasāya). Cp. san˚. Niṭṭhāpita
Niṭṭhāpita
(& niṭṭhapita) [pp. of niṭṭhāpeti] accomplished, performed, carried out J i.86, 172 (˚ṭha˚), 201. Niṭṭhāpeti
Niṭṭhāpeti
[Caus. to niṭṭhāti] to carry out, perform; prepare, make ready, accomplish J i.86, 290; vi.366; DhA iii.172. -- pp. niṭṭhāpita Cp. pari˚. Niṭṭhita
Niṭṭhita
(adj.) [Sk. niṣṭhita (niḥṣṭhita), nis+ṭhita, cp. niṭṭhāti] brought or come to an end, finished, accomplished; (made) ready, prepared (i. e. the preparations being finished) Vin i.35; D i.109 (bhattaŋ: the meal is ready); ii.127 (id.); J i.255 (id.); J ii.48; iii.537 (finished); VvA 188; PvA 81; & often at conclusion of books & chapters. aniṭṭhita not completed DhA iii.172. -- su˚ well finished, nicely got up, accomplished Sn 48, 240. Cp. pari˚. Niṭṭhubhati
Niṭṭhubhati
(& nuṭṭhubhati Vin i.271; J i.459; also niṭṭhu- haṭi) [Sk. niṣṭhubhati, but in meaning = Sk. niṣṭhīvati, nis+*thīv, stubh taking the function of ṣṭhīv, since stubh itself is represented by thavati & thometi] to spit out, to expectorate Vin i.271 (nuṭṭhuhitvā); iii.132 (id.); J ii.105, 117 (nuṭṭh˚); vi.367; DhA ii.36 (niṭṭhuhitvā). pp. nuṭṭhubhita Sdhp 121. -- Cp. oṭṭhubhati. Niṭṭhubhana
Niṭṭhubhana
(nt.) [Sk. niṣṭhīvana, see niṭṭhubhati & cp. Prk. niṭṭhuhana] spitting out, spittle J i.47; PvA 80 ( = kheḷa, v. l. SS niṭṭhuvana, BB niṭhūna). Niṭṭhurin
Niṭṭhurin
(adj.) [Sk. niṣṭhura or niṣṭhūra, ni+thūra = thūla; cp. Prk. niṭṭhura] rough, hard, cruel, merciless Sn 952 (a˚; this reading is mentioned as v. l. by Bdhgh at SnA 569, & the reading anuddharī given; vv. ll. SS anuṭṭhurī, BB anuṭṭharī, expld as anissukī. Nd1 440 however has aniṭṭhurī with expln of nitthuriya as under issā at Vbh 357). Niṭṭhuriya
Niṭṭhuriya
(nt.) [cp. Sk. niṣṭhuratva] hardness, harshness, roughness Nd1 440; Nd2 484 (in exegesis of makkha) = Vbh 357. Niḍḍāyati
Niḍḍāyati
[Sk. nirdāti, nis+dāyati, cp. Sk. nirdātar weeder] to cut out, to weed D i.231 (niddāyit˚); It 56 (as v. l. niddāta for niṇhāta, q. v.); J i.215. Caus. niḍḍāpeti to cause to weed, to have weeds dug up Vin ii.180. Niḍḍha
Niḍḍha
(nt.) [Vedic nīḍa resting -- place ni+sad "sitting down"] nest, place, seat Dh 148 (v. l. niḷa). Niṇhāta
Niṇhāta
(adj.) [Sk. *niḥsnāta, nis+nahāta] cleansed, purified It 56 (˚pāpaka = sinless; with several vv. ll. amongst which niddāta of niḍḍāyati=cleansed of weeds) =Nd1 58 (ninhāta˚)=Nd2 514 (ninhāta, v.l. SS ninnahāta). Nitamba
Nitamba
[Sk. nitamba; etym. unknown] the ridge of a mountain or a glen, gully DA i.209. Nitammati
Nitammati
[Sk. nitāmyati, ni+tam as in tama] to become dark, to be exhausted, faint; to be in misery or anxiety J iv.284 (Com.: atikilamati). Nitāḷeti
Nitāḷeti
[Sk. nitāḍayati, ni+tāḷeti] to knock down, to strike J iv.347. Nittaṇha
Nittaṇha
(adj.) [BSk. niṣṭṛṣṇa (Divy 210 etc.), nis+taṇhā] free from thirst or desire, desireless PvA 230 ( = nirāsa). f. abstr. nitthaṇhatā Nett 38. Nittaddana
Nittaddana
(better: nitthaddhana) (nt.) [Sk. *niṣṭambhana, abstr. fr. ni+thaddha = making rigid] paralysing D i.11 (jīvhā˚=mantena jivhāya thaddhakaraṇa DA i.96; v. l. (gloss) nibandhana). Nittāreti
Nittāreti
see nittharati. Nittiṇa
Nittiṇa
(adj.) [Sk. niṣṭṛṇa, nis+tiṇa] free from grass J iii.23. Nittiṇṇa
Nittiṇṇa
(pp.) [Sk. nistīrṇa, nis+tiṇṇa] got out of, having crossed or overcome D ii.275 ( -- ogha; v. l. BB nitiṇṇa); Nd1 159 (as v. l.; text has nitiṇṇa); Nd2 278 (t.). Cp. nittharati. Nittudana
Nittudana
(nt.) [nis+tudana, abstr. fr. tudati; cp. Sk. nistodā] pricking, piercing A i.65 (text: nittuddana); iii.403 sq. Nitteja
Nitteja
(adj.) [cp. Sk. nistejas only in meaning 1; nis+ teja] 1. without energy Vism 596. -- 2. "put out," abashed, put to shame, in ˚ŋ karoti to make blush or put to shame J ii.94 (lajjāpeti+). Nitthanati & Nitthunati
Nitthanati
& Nitthunati [Sk. nisstanati "moan out," nis +thaneti & thunati1] to moan, groan: (a) ˚thanati: J i.463; ii.362; iv.446; v.296; DA i.291. -- (b) ˚thunati Vin ii.222; J v.295, 389; Vism 311; VvA 224. Cp. nitthuna. Nitthanana
Nitthanana
(nt.) [nis+thanana, abstr. to thaneti] groaning, moaning DA i.291 (v. l. BB. ˚ṭhuna). As nitthu- nana Vism 504. Nittharaṇa
Nittharaṇa1
(nt.) [Sk. nistaraṇa, nis+taraṇa, cp. nittha- rati] getting across, ferrying over, traversing, overcoming S i.193 (oghassa); A ii.200 (id.); It 111 (id.); M i.134; J i.48 (loka˚); Dāvs ii.29 (id.); Vism 32; Sdhp 334 (bhava˚), 619 (tiloka˚). Nittharaṇa
Nittharaṇa2
(nt.) [Sk. nistaraṇa, ni+tharaṇa] "strewing or being strewn down," putting down, carrying, bearing S iv.177 (bhārassa, of a load, cp. nikkhepa); VvA 131 (so read for niddharaṇa, in kuṭumba -- bhārassa nsamatthā = able to carry the burden of a household). Nittharati
Nittharati
[Sk. nistarati, nis+tarati1] to cross over, get out of, leave behind, get over D i.73 (kantāraŋ). pp. nittiṇṇa q. v. Caus. nitthāreti to bring through, help over Nd2 630 (nittāreti). Nitthāra
Nitthāra
[Sk. nistāra; nis+tāra of tarati1] passing over, rescue, payment, acquittance, in ˚ŋ vattati to be acquitted, to get off scot -- free M i.442 (v. l. netth˚, which is the usual form). See netthāra. Nitthuna
Nitthuna
[Sk. *nis -- stanana & nistava to thunati] (a) (of thunati1) moan, groan DA i.291 (as v. l. BB for nitthanana) -- (b) (of thunati2) blame, censure, curse PvA 76 (˚ŋ karoti to revile or curse). Nitthunati
Nitthunati
etc., see nitthanati etc. -- 358 -- Nidassana
Nidassana
(nt.) [Sk. nidarśana, ni+dassana] "pointing at" evidence, example, comparison, apposition, attribute, characteristic; sign, term D i.223 (a˚ with no attribute); iii.217 (id.); S iv.370 (id.); A iv.305 sq. (nīla˚, pīta˚ etc.); Sn 137; Vbh 13, 64, 70 sq. (sa˚, a˚); VvA 12, 13; PvA 26, 121 (pucchanākāra˚) 226 (paccakkhabhūtaŋ n. "sign, token"). Nidassati
Nidassati
v. l. BB at Sn 785 for nirassati (q. v.) Nd1 76 has nid˚ in text, nir˚ as v. l. SS; SnA 522 reads nirassati. Nidassita
Nidassita
(pp.) [see nidasseti] pointed out, defined as, termed Pv i.512; PvA 30. Nidasseti
Nidasseti
[Sk. nidarśayati, ni+dasseti] to point out ("down"), explain, show, define VvA 12, 13 (˚etabbavacana the word to be compared or defined, correl. to nidassana -- vacana). -- pp. nidassita (q. v.). Nidahati
Nidahati
[Sk. nidadhāti, ni+dahati1] to lay down or aside, deposit; accumulate, hoard, bury (a treasure) Vin i.46 (cīvaraŋ); Miln 271; ger. nidahitvā PvA 97 (dhanadhaññaŋ) & nidhāya Dh 142, 405; Sn 35 (daṇḍaŋ), 394, 629; Nd2 348; pres. also nidheti KhA 217, 219; fut. nidhessati PvA 132. Pass. nidhīyati KhA 217. Caus. nidhāpeti PvA 130 (bhoge). See also nidāhaka, nidhāna & nidhi; also upanidhāya. Nidāgha
Nidāgha
[Sk. nidāgha, fr. nidahati, ni+dahati2, see ḍahati] heat, summer -- heat, summer, drought J i.221 ( -- samaya dry season); ii.80; Vism 259 (˚samaya, where KhA 58 reads sarada -- samaya); PvA 174 ( -- kāla summer). fig. J iv.285; v.404; Dāvs ii.60. Nidāna
Nidāna
(nt.) [Sk. nidāna, ni+*dāna of dā, dyati to bind, cp. Gr. de/sma, dh_ma (fetter) & see dāma] (a) (n.) tying down to; ground (lit. or fig.), foundation, occasion; source, origin, cause; reason, reference, subject ("sujet") M i.261; A i.134 sq.; 263 sq., 338; ii.196; iv.128 sq.; Dhs 1059 (dukkha˚, source of pain), 1136; Nett 3, 32; Miln 272 (of disease: pathology, aetiology), 344 (˚paṭhanakusala, of lawyers); PvA 132, 253. -> (b) (adj. -- ˚) founded on, caused by, originating in, relating to S v.213 sq. (a˚ & sa˚); A i.82 (id.); Sn 271 (ito˚), 866 (kuto˚), 1050 (upadhi˚ = hetuka, paccayā, kāraṇā Nd2 346); 872 (icchā˚) etc.; VvA 117 (vimānāni Rājagaha˚ playing at or referring to R.). -- (c) nidānaŋ (acc. as adv.) by means of, in consequence of, through, usually with tato˚ through this, yato˚ through which D i.52, 73; M i.112; Pv iv.161 (through whom=yaŋ nimittaŋ PvA 242); PvA 281; ito˚ by this Nd2 2912. Nidāhaka
Nidāhaka
(adj.) [fr. nidahati] one who puts away, one who has the office of keeper or warder (of robes: cīvara˚) Vin i.284. Nidda
Nidda
(nt.) [nis+dara, see darī] a cave Nd1 23 (Ep. of kāya). Niddanta
Niddanta
[so read for niddanna, v. l. niddhā = niddā; cp. supinanta]=niddā J vi.294. Niddaya
Niddaya
(adj.) [Sk. nirdaya, nis+dayā (adj.)] merciless, pitiless, cruel Sdhp 143, 159. Niddara
Niddara
(adj.) [nis+dara] free from fear, pain or anguish Dh 205 = Sn 257 (expld at DhA iii.269 by rāgadarathānaŋ abhāvena n.; at SnA 299 by kilesapariḷāhâbhāvena n.). Niddasa
Niddasa
see niddesa. Niddā
Niddā
(f.) [Vedic nidrā, ni+drā in Sk. drāti, drāyate, Idg. *dorē; cp. Gr. (hom.) e)/draqon, Lat. dormio] sleep A ii.48, 50; iii.251; Sn 926 (opp. jāgariyā), 942 (see expln at Nd1 423); J i.61, 192; ii.128. -- niddaŋ okkamati to fall asleep Vin i.15 (niddā?); J iii.538; iv.1; DhA i.9; VvA 65; PvA 47; ˚ŋ upagacchati id. PvA 43, 105, 128.

-- ārāma fond of sleep, slothful, sluggish It 72 (+kammarāma, bhassarata); -- ārāmatā fondness of sleep, laziness, sluggishness A iii.116, 293 sq., 309 sq.; iv.25 (+kamm˚, bhass˚); v.164; -- sīlin of drowsy habits, slothful, sleepy Sn 96. Niddāna
Niddāna
(nt.) [Sk. *nirdāna, nis+dāna of dayati2, Sk. dāti, cp. dātta] cutting off, mowing, destroying Sn 78 ( = chedana lunana uppāṭana SnA 148)=S i.172; K.S. i.319, cp. niḍḍāyati. Niddāyati
Niddāyati
[Denom. fr. niddā] to sleep D i.231; J i.192, 266; ii.103; v.68, 382; DhA iii.175; SnA 169. Niddāyitar
Niddāyitar
[n. ag. fr. niddāyati] a sleepy person Dh 325. Niddiṭṭha
Niddiṭṭha
(pp.) [see niddisati] expressed, explained, desig- nated Miln 3; DhsA 57; Vism 528; VvA 13. Niddisati
Niddisati
(& niddissati) [Sk. nir -- diśati, nis+disati, cp. Lat. distinguo] to distinguish, point out, explain, designate, define, express, to mean It 122 = Nd2 276f; Miln 123, 345; DhsA 57; DhA ii.59; PvA 87, 217 (˚itvā); aor. niddisi DhsA 57; SnA 61. -- grd. niddisitabba DhsA 56; Nett 96. Pass. niddissīyati PvA 163. -- pp. niddiṭṭha (q. v.). Niddukkha
Niddukkha
(adj.) [nis+dukkha] without fault or evil J iii.443 (in expln of anīgha); PvA 230 (id.); (in expln of mārisa) K.S. (S.A.) 1, 2, n. 1. Niddesa
Niddesa
[Sk. nirdeśa, fr. niddisati, cp. desa, desaka etc.] 1. description, attribute, distinction PvA 7 (ukkaṭṭha˚); ˚vatthu object of distinction or praise D iii.253 = A iv.15 (where reading is niddasa, which also as v. l. at D iii.253 & Ps i.5). -- 2. descriptive exposition, analytic explanation by way of question & answer, interpretation, exegesis Vin v.114 (sa˚); Nett 4, 8 38 sq.; Vism 26; DhsA 54; VvA 78; PvA 71, 147. -> 3. N. of an old commentary (ascribed to Sāriputta) on parts of the Sutta Nipāta (Aṭṭhaka -- vagga, interpreted in the Mahā -- Niddesa; Pārāyana -- vagga and, as a sort of appendix, the Khaggavisāṇa -- sutta, interpreted in the Culla -- Niddesa); as one of the canonical texts included in the Khuddaka Nikāya; editions in P.T.S. Quoted often in the Visuddhimagga, e. g. p. 140, 208 sq. etc. Niddosa
Niddosa1
(adj.) [Sk. nirdośa, nis+dosa1] faultless, pure, undefiled Sn 476; DhsA 2; PvA 189 ( = viraja); DhA i.41. Niddosa
Niddosa2
(adj.) [Sk. nirdveṣa, nis+dosa2] free from hatred J iv.10 (su˚; Com. "adussanavasena," foll. upon sunikkodha). Niddhana
Niddhana
(adj.) [nis+dhana] without property, poor J v.447. Niddhanta
Niddhanta
(adj.) [pp. of niddhamati, nis+dhanta, q. v.] blown off, removed, cleaned, purified A i.254 (jātarūpa "loitered," cp. niddhota); Sn 56 (˚kasāva -- moha; Com. vijahati); Dh 236 (˚mala, malānaŋ nīhaṭatāya DhA iii.336); Nd2 347 ( = vanta & pahīna); J vi.218 (of hair; Com. expls siniddharutā, v. l. BB siniddha -- anta, thus meant for Sk. snigdhānta). Niddhamati
Niddhamati
[in form = Sk. nirdhmāti, nis+dhamati, but in meaning the verb, as well as its derivations, are influenced by both meanings of niddhāvati (dhāvati1 & 2): see niddhāpeti, niddhamana, & niddhovati] to blow away, blow off; to clean, cleanse, purify; to throw out, eject, remove Sn 281=Miln 414 (kāraṇḍavaŋ); Sn 282 (˚itvā pāpicche), 962 (malaŋ=pajahati (Nd1 478); Dh 239 (id.); Miln 43. -- pp. niddhanta). Niddhamana
Niddhamana
(nt.) [of niddhamati or = *nirdhāvana= ˚dhovana to dhāvati2] drainage, drain, canal Vin ii.120 (udaka˚; dhovituŋ immediately preceding); J i.175, 409, 425; iii.415; iv.28; v.21 (udaka˚); DhA ii.37. -- 359 -- Niddhamanā
Niddhamanā
(f.) [either to niddhamati or to niddhāpeti] throwing out, ejection, expulsion J v.233 ( = nikkaḍḍhanā Com.). Niddharaṇa
Niddharaṇa
(nt.) not with Hardy (Index VvA) = Sk. nirdhāraṇa (estimation), but to be read as nittharaṇa (see nittharaṇa2). Niddhāpita
Niddhāpita
(adj.) [pp. of niddhāpeti, q. v.] thrown out J iii.99 (v. l. for nibbāpita). Niddhāpeti
Niddhāpeti
[Sk. nirdhāvayati, nis+dhāveti (dhāpeti), Caus. of dhāvati1; may also stand for niddhamāpeti, Caus. fr. niddhamati, cp. contamination niddhāmase at J iv.48, unless misread for niddhāpaye, as v. l. BB bears out] to throw out, chase away, expel J iv.41 (niddhāpayiŋsu), 48 (? for niddhāmase). pp. niddhāpita. Niddhāmase
Niddhāmase
at J iv.48 should probably be read niddhāpaye (as v. l. BB), q. v. Niddhunāti
Niddhunāti
[Sk. nirdhunoti, nis+dhunāti] to shake off S iii.155; A iii.365 (odhunāti+; spelt nidhunāti); M i.229; Th 1, 416; PvA 256 ( = odhunāti). Niddhuniya
Niddhuniya
(?) (nt.) [ = Sk. nihnuvana fr. nihnute with diff. derivation] hypocrisy Pug 18 (=makkha); cp. J.P.T.S. 1884, 83. Niddhūpana
Niddhūpana
(adj.) [nir+dhūpana] unscented J vi.21 (udaka). Niddhota
Niddhota
(adj.) [nis+dhota; pp. of niddhovati] washed, cleansed, purified Dāvs v.63 (˚rūpiya; cp. niddhanta). Niddhovati
Niddhovati
[Sk. nirdhāvati, nis+dhovati, cp. niddhamati] to wash off, clean, purify A i.253 (jātarūpaŋ, immediately followed by niddhanta). pp. niddhota. Nidhāna
Nidhāna
(nt.) [Vedic nidhāna, see nidahati] laying down, depositing, keeping; receptacle; accumulation, (hidden) treasure J iv.280 (nidhi˚); PvA 7 (udaka -- dāna -- nīharaṇa -- n˚), 97 (n -- gata dhana = hoarded, accumulated), 132 (˚ŋ nidhessāmi gather a treasure); DhsA 405 (˚kkhama). Nidhānavant
Nidhānavant
(adj.) forming or having a receptacle, worth treasuring or saving D i.4 ( = hadaye nidhātabba -- yuttavāca DA i.76). Nidhāpeti, Nidhāya & Nidhīyati
Nidhāpeti,
Nidhāya & Nidhīyati, see nidahati. Nidhi
Nidhi
[Vedic nidhi, ni+dhā, see nidahati] 1. "setting down," receptacle; (hidden) treasure Sn 285 (brahma n.); Dh 76; Kh viii.2 (see KhA 217 sq.: nidhīyatī ti nidhi, def. of n.), 9 (acorâharaṇo nidhi cp. "treasures in heaven, where thieves do not steal" Matt. 6, 20); Sdhp 528, 588. -- 2. "putting on," a cloak J vi.79 (expld as vākacīra -- nivāsanaŋ = a bark dress). Cp. sannidhi.

-- kumbhī a treasure -- pot, a treasure hidden in a pot = a hidden treasure DhA ii.107; iv.208; -- nidhāna laying up treasures, burying a treasure J iv.280; -- mukha an excellent treasure A v.346. Nidhura
Nidhura
see nīdhura. Nidheti
Nidheti
see nidahati. Nindati
Nindati
[Sk. nindati, nid as in Gr. o)/neidos (blame), Lith. naids (hatred), Goth. naitjan (to rail or blaspheme), Ohg. neizzan (to plague); cp. Goth. neip = Ohg. nīd (envy)] to blame, find fault with, censure A ii.3; v.171, 174; Sn 658; J vi.63; Dh 227; inf. nindituŋ Dh 230; grd. nindanīya SnA 477. pp. nindita (q. v.); cp. also nindiya. Nindana
Nindana
(nt.) [abstr. fr. nindati] blaming, reviling, finding fault DhA iii.328. Nindā
Nindā
(f.) [cp. Sk. nindā, to nindati] blame, reproach, fault -- finding, fault, disgrace S iii.73; A ii.188; iv.157 sq.; M i.362; Sn 213 (+pasaŋsā blame & praise); Dh 81 (id.); Sn 826, 895, 928; Dh 143, 309; Nd1 165, 306, 384; DhA ii.148. -- In compn nindi˚ see anindi˚. Nindita
Nindita
(adj.) [pp. of nindati] blamed, reproved, reviled; faulty, blameworthy Dh 228; Pv ii.334 (a˚ blameless = agarahita pasaŋsa PvA 89); Sdhp 254, 361. -- anindita J iv.106 (˚angin). Nindiya
Nindiya
(adj.) [Sk. nindya, orig. grd. of nindati] blameable, faulty, blameworthy Sn 658 ( = nindanīya SnA 477); Nett 132. pi nindiyā at PvA 23 is to be read as pīṇitindriyā. Ninna
Ninna
(adj. -- n.) [Vedic nimna, der. fr. ni down, prob. combd with ˚na of nam to bend, thus meaning "bent down," cp. unna & panna] 1. (adj.) bent down (cp. ninnata), low -- lying, deep, low, sunken J ii.3 (magga); PvA 29 (bhūmibhāga), 132 (ṭhāṇa); esp. freq. as -- ˚: bent on, inclining to, leading to, aiming at, flowing into etc. Often combd with similar expressions in chain taccarita tabbahula taggaruka tanninna tappoṇa tappabbhāra tadâdhimutta (with variation nibbāna˚, viveka˚ etc. for tad˚): Nd2 under tad; J ii.15; Ps ii.197; -- Vin ii.237 = A iv.198 (samuddo anupubba˚ etc.); A iv.224 (viveka˚); v.175 (id.); M i.493 (Nibbāna˚). Similarly: samudda˚ Gangā M i.493; nekkhamma˚ J i.45 (v.258); samādhi˚ Miln 38. -- 2. (acc. as adv.) downward: ninnaŋ pavattati to flow downward M i.117; Pv i.57; ninnagata running down Miln 259 (udaka); ninnaga Dāvs iv.28. -- 3. (nt.) low land, low ground, plain (opp. thala elevation, plateau): usually with ref. to a raincloud flooding the low country Sn 30 (mahamegho ˚ŋ pūrayaŋto); SnA 42 (=pallala); It 66 (megho ˚ŋ pūreti); Pv ii.945 (megho ˚ŋ paripūrayanto).

-- unnata low lying & elevated Miln 349 (desabhāga). Ninnata
Ninnata
(adj.) [ni+nata] bent down, bent upon, in nin- natattā (fem. abstr.) aim, purpose (?) DhsA 39 (is the reading correct?). Ninnāda
Ninnāda
(& Nināda Miln, Dāvs) [Sk. nināda, ni+nāda] sounding forth, sound, tune, melody A ii.117 (˚sadda); J vi.43; VvA 161; Miln 148; Dāvs v.31. Ninnādin
Ninnādin
(adj.) [fr. ninnāda] sounding (loud), resonant (of a beautiful voice) D ii.211 (cp. aṭṭhanga brahmassara & bindu). Ninnāmin
Ninnāmin
(adj.) [fr. ni+nam] bending downwards, descending A iv.237. Ninnāmeti
Ninnāmeti
[Caus. of ni+namati] to bend down, put out (the tongue) D i.106 (jivhaŋ = nīharati DA i.276); J i.163, 164; cp. Divy 7, 71 (nirṇāmayati). Ninnīta
Ninnīta
(adj.) [pp. of ninneti] lead down, lead away; drained, purified, free from (˚ -- ) A i.254 (ninnīta -- kasāva of gold: free fr. dross). Ninnetar
Ninnetar
[n. ag. to ni -- nayati = Sk. *ninayitṛ, cp. netar] one who leads down to, one who disposes of (c. gen.), bringer of, giver, usually in phrase atthassa n. (bringer of good: "Heilbringer") of the Buddha S iv.94; M i.111; A v.226 sq., 256 sq.; Ps ii.194. Ninneti
Ninneti
[Sk. ninayati, ni+nayati] to lead down, lead away; drain, (udakaŋ), desiccate Vin ii.180. -- pp. ninnīta, q. v. Ninhāta
Ninhāta
see niṇhāta. Nipa
Nipa
at J v.6 read as nīpa. Nipaka
Nipaka
(adj.) [cp. BSk. nipaka chief, fr. Sk. nipa, chief, master] intelligent, clever, prudent, wise S i.13, 52, 187; M i.339; A i.165 (+jhāyin); iii.24, 138; Sn 45≈Dh 328≈DhA i.62; Sn 283, 962, 1038; Nd2 349 ( = jātimā) =Nd1 478; Bu i.49; Vbh 426; Miln 34, 342, 411; Vism 3 (defn). -- 360 -- Nipakka
Nipakka
at Vin i.200 read nippakka. Nipaccākāra
Nipacc
-- ākāra [nipacca, ger. of nipatati+ākāra] obedience, humbleness, service S i.178; v.233; A v.66; J i.232; iv.133; VvA 22, 320; PvA 12. Nipaccavādin
Nipacca
-- vādin (adj.) [nipacca, ger. of nipāteti+vādin] speaking hurtfully Sn 217 ( = dāyakaŋ nipātetvā appiyavacanāni vattā SnA 272). Nipajjati
Nipajjati
[Sk. nipadyate, ni+pajjati] to lie down (to sleep) D i.246; A iv.332; J i.150; DhA i.40; PvA 280; aor. nipajji J i.279; ii.154; iii.83; VvA 75, 76; PvA 74, 75, 93; ger. nipajja J i.7 (v.44: ˚ṭṭhānacankama). -- Caus. nipajjāpeti to lay down, deposit J i.50, 253, 267; iii.26, 188; DhA i.50; VvA 76 (˚etvā rakkhāpetha). Cp. abhi˚. Nipatati
Nipatati
[Sk. nipatati, ni+patati] 1. (intrs.) to fall down, fly down, descend, go out Vin ii.192 (Bhagavato pādesu sirasā n. bending his head at the feet of Bh.); PvA 60 (id.); J i.278; v.467 (nippatissāmi = nikkhamissāmi Com.) Pv ii.89 (v. l. BB parivisayitvā)=nikkhamitvā PvA 109 (cp. nippatati). -- 2. (trs.) to bring together, to convene, in nipatāmase (pres. subj.) "shall we convene? " J iv.361. See also nipadāmase. -- Cp. abhi˚, san˚. Nipadāmase
Nipadāmase
at J iii.120 is an old misreading & is to be corrected into nipatāmase ( = let us gather, bring together=dedicate), unless it be read as nipphadāmase (=do, set forth, prepare, give), in spite of Com. expln p. 121: nikārapakārā (=nipaccakārā?) upasaggā (upasajja?) dāmase (dā) ti attho; endorsed by Müller, P.G. p. 97 & Kern, Toev. p. 175. It cannot be ni+pa+ dāmase, since ni is never used as secondary (modifying) verb -- component (see ni˚ A 2), & Bdhgh's expln is popular etym. Cp. nipatāmase at J iv.361 (see nipatati). Nipanna
Nipanna
(adj.) [pp. of nipajjati] lying down J i.151, 279; ii.103; iii.276 (˚kāle while he was asleep), iv.167; PvA 43, 75, 265 (spelt nippanna, opp. nikujja). Nipannaka
Nipannaka
(adj.) = nipanna Ps ii.209; J i.151. Nipalāvita
Nipalāvita
(pp.) (Com. reading for vipalāvita text) [Sk. viplāvita, see plavati] made to swim, immersed, thrown into water J i.326. Nipāka
Nipāka
(adj.) [Sk. nipāka, ni+pāka (pacati)] full grown, fully developed, in full strength J vi.327 (of a tree). Nipāta
Nipāta
[Sk. nipāta, ni+pāta, of nipatati] 1. falling down Dh 121 (udabindu˚); VvA 279 (diṭṭhi˚, a glance); PvA 45 (asa˚). -- 2. descending M i.453. -- 3. a particle, the gram. term for adverbs, conjunctions & interjections J v.243 (assu); PvA 11 (mā), 26 (vo), 40 (taŋ), 50 (ca). -- 4. a section of a book (see next). Cp. vi˚, san˚. Nipātaka
Nipātaka
(adj.) [to nipāta] divided into sections or chapters Dpvs iv.16. Nipātana
Nipātana
(nt.) [to nipatati] 1. falling upon DhA i.295. - 2. going to bed VvA 71 (pacchā˚ opp. pubbuṭṭhāna). Cp. nipātin. Nipātin
Nipātin
(adj.) [to nipatati] 1. falling or flying down, chancing upon Dh 35, 36 (yatthakāma˚ cittaŋ = yattha yattha icchati tattha tatth' eva nipatati DhA i.295). -> 2. going to bed D i.60 (pacchā˚ going to bed late). -> Cp. abhi˚. Nipāteti
Nipāteti
[ni+Caus. of patati] to let fall, throw down into (c. loc.); bring to fall, injure; fig. cast upon, charge with D i.91; M i.453 (ayokaṭāhe); J iii.359; SnA 272; PvA 152 (bhūmiyaŋ). pp. nipātita corrupt, evil, wicked Vin ii.182 (caṇḍa+; text nippātita, v. l. nipphātita). Nipuṇa
Nipuṇa
(adj.) [Sk. nipuṇa, dial. for nipṛṇa, to pṛṇoti, pṛ] clever, skilful, accomplished; fine, subtle, abstruse D i.26≈(n. gambhīra dhamma), 162 (paṇḍita+); M i.487 (dhamma); S i.33; iv.369; A iii.78; Sn 1126 ( = gambhīra duddasa etc. Nd2 350); Vbh 426; Miln 233, 276; DA i.117; VvA 73 (ariyasaccesu kusala+), 232; PvA 1, 16. Cp. abhinipuṇa. Nippakāra
Nippakāra
(adj.) [nis+pakāra 2] of no flavour, tasteless, useless J i.340. Nippakka
Nippakka
(adj.) [nis+pakka] boiled, infused Vin i.200. Nippajjati & Nipphajjati
Nippajjati
& Nipphajjati [Sk. niṣpadyate, nis+pajjati] to be produced, be accomplished, spring forth, ripen, result, happen DhA ii.4 (pph); PvA 19 ( = upakappati), 71 (phalaŋ ijjhati n.), 120 (id.). pp. nipphanna. See also nipphādeti & nipphatti etc.; cp. also abhi˚. Nippañña
Nippañña
(adj.) [nis+pañña] unwise, foolish PvA 40, 41 ( = dummati). Nippatati & Nipphatati
Nippatati
& Nipphatati [nis+patati] to fall out; rush out, come forth, go out from (c. abl.) Vin ii.151 (nipphaṭati, v. l. nippaṭati); J v.467 ( = nikkhamati Com.; or is it nipatati?). -- ger. nippacca (cp. BSk. nirpatya AvŚ i.209). Nippatta
Nippatta
(adj.) [nis+patta] 1. without wings, plucked (of a bird) Vin iv.259. -- 2. without leaves J iii.496 ( = patita -- patta); SnA 117 (˚puppha). -- Note nippatta at Dhs 1035 is to be read as nibbatta. Nippatti
Nippatti
see nipphatti. Nippadā
Nippadā
(?) at S i.225 read nipphādā (q. v.). Nippadesa
Nippadesa
[Sk. *niṣpradesa, nis+padesa] only in instr. & abl. = separately DhsA 2, 30, 37, 297. Nippanna
Nippanna
see nipanna & nipphanna. Nippapañca
Nippapañca
(adj.) [nis+papañca] free from diffuseness S iv.370; Dh 254 (Tathāgata); ˚ārāma not fond of delay M i.65 (Neumann trsl. i.119: "dem keine Sonderheit behagt"); A iii.431; iv.229 sq.; Miln 262. Nippabha
Nippabha
(adj.) [nis+prabhā] without splendour J ii.415; Miln 102. Nippariyāya
Nippariyāya
[nis+pariyāya] 1. without distinction or difference, absence of explanation or demonstration DhsA 317 (˚ena not figuratively), 403 (˚desanā); VvA 320. -- 2. unchangeable, not to be turned Miln 113, 123, 212. Nippalāpa
Nippalāpa
(adj.) [nis+palāpa] free from prattle or talk, not talking A ii.183 (apalāpa+; v. l. ˚palāsa). Nippalibodha
Nippalibodha
(adj.) [nis+palibodha] without hindrances, unobstructed Miln 11. Nippādeti
Nippādeti
see nipphādeti. Nippāpa
Nippāpa
(adj.) [nis+pāpa] free from sin Sn 257 = Dh 205. Nippitika
Nippitika
(adj.) [Sk. *niṣpaitṛka = fatherless or *niṣprī- tika?] a bastard J i.133 (v. l. nippītika q. v.). Nippipāsa
Nippipāsa
(adj.) [nis+pipāsā] without thirst or desire Sn 56; Nd2 351. Nippītika
Nippītika
(adj.) [nis+pīti+ka] 1. free from (feelings of) enjoyment (characteristic of 3rd jhāna, q. v.) D i.75; A i.81. -- 2. being unloved, a foster child etc. (?) see nippitika. -- 361 -- Nippīḷana
Nippīḷana
(nt.) [nis+pīḷana] squeezing, pressing; a blow J iii.160. Cp. abhinippīḷanā. Nippīḷeti
Nippīḷeti
[nis+pīḷeti] to squeeze, press, clench, urge J i.63, 223. Pass. nippīḷiyati, only in ppr. nippīḷiyamāna being urged Vin ii.303; VvA 138; PvA 31, 192. Cp. abhi˚. Nippurisa
Nippurisa
(adj.) [nis+purisa] 1. without men PvA 177. - 2. without men, executed by females (female devas) only (of turiyā = a female orchestra) Vin i.15; D ii.21; J v.506. Cp. M Vastu iii.165 (niṣpuruṣena nāṭakena) & AvŚ i.321 (niṣpuruṣena tūryeṇa; see also note in Index p. 229), whereas Divy 3 (see Index) has niṣparuṣa (soft), with v. l. niṣpuruṣa. Nippesika
Nippesika
[cp. Sk. niṣpeṣa clashing against, bounce, shock, niṣ+piṣ] one who performs jugglery, a juggler D i.8 ( = nippeso sīlaŋ etesan ti DA.i.91); A iii.111. Nippesikatā
Nippesikatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] jugglery, trickery (cp. Kern, Toev. p. 176) Vbh 353 (expld at Vism 29); Miln 383. Nippothana
Nippothana
(nt.) [nis+pothana of puth to crush] crushing, beating, destroying SnA 390. Nipphajjati
Nipphajjati
see nippajjati. Nipphajjana
Nipphajjana
(nt.) (or ˚nā f. ?) [n. abstr. fr. nipp(h)ajjati] resulting, procedure, achievement, plot J iv.83. Nipphatti
Nipphatti
(f.) [cp. Sk. niṣpatti] result, accomplishment, effect, end, completion, perfection J i.56, 335 (of dreams), 343, 456; iv.137 (sippe); vi.36; VvA 138 (sippa˚); DhA ii.6 (import, meaning, of a vision); DhsA 354; PvA 122, 282 (sippe); Nett 54. Cp. abhi˚. Nipphattika
Nipphattika
(adj.) [fr. nipphatti] having a result J iii.166 (evaŋ˚ of such consequence). Nipphanna
Nipphanna
(adj.) [pp. of nippajjati] accomplished, per- fected, trained S i.215 (˚sobhin, spelt nippanna); J iv.39 (˚sippa master of the art, M.A.); DhA iii.285 (sasse); DhsA 316; in phil. determined, conditioned Kvu xi.7; xxiii.5; Vism 450; Pts. of Controversy, 395. Cp. abhi˚, pari˚. See also Cpd. 156, 157. Nipphala
Nipphala
(adj.) [nis+phala] without fruit, barren in a˚ not without fruit, i. e. amply rewarded (dāyaka, the giver of good gifts) Pv i.42; 55, PvA 194; Sdhp 504. Nipphalita
Nipphalita
(adj.) [Sk. niṣphārita, pp. of nipphaleti, nis+ phaleti] broken out, split open J i.493 (lasī = nikkhantā Com.; v. l. nipphaḷita). Nipphāṇitatta
Nipphāṇitatta
(nt.) [nis+phāṇita+tva] state of being free from sugar or molasses J iii.409. Nipphādaka
Nipphādaka
(adj.) [fr. nipphādeti] producing, accomplishing DhsA 47; PvA 147 (sukha -- ˚ŋ puññaŋ). Nipphādana
Nipphādana
(nt.) [Sk. niṣpādana, to nipphādeti] accom- plishment Miln 356; DA i.195. Nipphādar
Nipphādar
[n. ag. = Sk. niṣpādayitṛ cp. nipphāditar] one who produces or gains S i.225 (atthassa; read nipphādā, nom. for nippadā). Nipphādita
Nipphādita
[pp. of nipphādeti] (having) produced, pro- ducing (perhaps = nipphāditar) VvA 113. Nipphāditar
Nipphāditar
[n. ag. to nipphādeti, cp. nipphādar] one who produces or accomplishes PvA 8 (read "so nipphāditā" for sā nipphādikā). Cp. nipphādita and nipphādaka. Nipphādeti
Nipphādeti
[Caus. of nippajjati] to bring forth, produce; accomplish, perform J i.185 (lābhasakkāraŋ); v.81; Miln 299; VvA 32, 72 (grd. nipphādetabba, n. of ablative case); Sdhp 319, 426. -- pp. nipphādita. Cp. abhinipphādeti. Nipphoṭana
Nipphoṭana
(nt.) [nis+pothanā] beating S iv.300 (v. l. ṭh.). Cp. nippothana. Nipphoṭeti
Nipphoṭeti
[nis+potheti] to beat down, smother, crush S i.101, 102. Nibaddha
Nibaddha
(adj.) [ni+baddha] bound down to, i. e. (1) fixed, stable, sure J iv.134 (bhattavetana); Miln 398 (a˚, unstable, ˚sayana). At DA i.243 two kinds of cārikā (wanderings, pilgrimages) are distinguished, viz. nibaddha˚ definite, regular and anibaddha˚ indefinite, irregular pilgrimage. -- (2) asked, pressed, urged J iii.277. -- (3) nibaddhaŋ (nt. as adv.) constantly, always, continually J i.100, 150; iii.325; v.95, 459; vi.161; PvA 267 (˚vasanaka); DhA ii.41, 52 sq. Nibandha
Nibandha
[Sk. nibandha, ni+bandha] binding, bond; attachment, continuance, continuity S ii.17; VvA 259, 260 (perseverance). acc. nibandhaŋ (often misspelt for nibaddhaŋ) continually VvA 75. Cp. vi˚. Nibandhati
Nibandhati
[ni+bandhati] 1. to bind Miln 79. -- 2. to mix, apply, prepare Vin ii.151 (anibandhanīya unable to be applied, not binding); J i.201 (yāgubhattaŋ). -> 3. to press, urge, importune J iii.277. Nibandhana
Nibandhana
(nt.) [ni+bandhana] tying, fastening; binding, bond; (adj.) tied to, fettered Sn 654 (kamma˚); Miln 78, 80. Nibodhati
Nibodhati
[ni+bodhati] to attend to, to look out for, to take J iii.151 ( = gaṇhati). -- Caus. nibodheti to waken, at Th 1, 22 is probably to be read as vibodheti. Nibbatta
Nibbatta
(pp.) [Sk. nirvṛtta, nis+vaṭṭa, pp. of nibbattati] existing, having existed, being reborn Vin i.215 (n. bījaŋ phalaŋ fruit with seed); J i.168; ii.111; PvA 10 (niraye), 35 (petayoniyaŋ), 100 (pubbe n. -- ṭhānato paṭṭhāya); Miln 268 (kamma˚, hetu˚ & utu˚). -- Cp. abhi˚. Nibbattaka
Nibbattaka
(adj.) [cp. nibbatta] producing, yielding PvA 26 (phala ˚ŋ kusalakammaŋ), 126 ( = sukha˚=sukhāvaha). Nibbattati
Nibbattati
[nis+vattati] to come out from (cp. E. turn out), arise, become, be produced, result, come into being, be reborn, ex -- ist ( = nir -- vatt) Dh 338; Pv i.11 (nibbattate); ThA 259 (=jāyati); DhA iii.173; PvA 8 (=uppajjati) 71 (id.); ger. nibbattitvā J ii.158 (kapiyoniyaŋ); PvA 68, 78; aor. nibbatti J i.221; PvA 14 (Avīcimhi), 67 (petesu), 73 (amaccakule). -- pp. nibbatta (q. v.). Caus. nibbatteti (q. v.). Cp. abhi˚. Nibbattana
Nibbattana
(nt.) [abstr. fr. nibbattati] growing, coming forth; (re)birth, existence, life J ii.105; PvA 5 (devaloke n -- araha deserving rebirth in the world of gods) 9, 67 etc. Nibbattanaka
Nibbattanaka
(adj.) [fr. nibbattana] 1. arising, coming out, growing ThA 259 (akkhidalesu n. pīḷikā). -- 2. one destined to be reborn, a candidate of rebirth J iii.304 (sagge). Nibbattāpana
Nibbattāpana
(nt.) [fr. nibbattāpeti, see nibbatteti] repro- duction Miln 97. Nibbatti
Nibbatti
(f.) [Sk. nirvṛtti, nis+vatti] constitution, product; rebirth J i.47; Nett 28, 79; Vism 199, 649; VvA 10. Cp. abhi˚. Nibbattita
Nibbattita
(adj.) [pp. of nibbatteti] done, produced, brought forth PvA 150 (a˚kusalakamma = akata). Nibbattin
Nibbattin
(adj.) [fr. nibbatti] arising, having rebirth, in neg. anibbattin not to be born again J vi.573. Nibbatteti
Nibbatteti
[nis+vatteti, Caus. of nibbattati] to produce, bring forth; practise, perform; to bring to light, find something lost (at Miln 218) Nd2 = jāneti (s. v.); J i.66, 140; iii.396 (jhānâbhiññaŋ); PvA 76 (jhānāni), 30; Miln 200; Sdhp 470. -- pp. nibbattita (q. v.); 2nd Caus. nibbattāpeti to cause rebirth DhA iii.484; see also nibbattāpana. -- Cp. abhi˚. -- 362 -- Nibbanka
Nibbanka
(adj.) [nis+vanka] not crooked, straight DhA i.288. Nibbajjeti
Nibbajjeti
[nis+vajjeti] to throw away, to do without, to avoid Th 1, 1105. Nibbana
Nibbana
(adj.) 1. [Sk. nirvana] without forest, woodless J ii.358. -- 2. [an abstr. fr. nibbāna, see nibbāna I.; cp. vana2. Freq. nibbāna as v. l. instead of nibbana] without cravings Sn 1131 (nikkāmo nibbano); Dh 283 (nibbanā pl.) Vv 5014 (better reading nibbāna, in phrase "vanā nibbānaŋ āgataŋ," as found at A iii.346 = Th 1, 691, although the latter has nibbanaŋ in text), expld by "nittaṇhabhāvaŋ nibbānam eva upagataŋ" VvA 213. Nibbanatha
Nibbanatha
(adj.) [nis+vanatha] free from lust or cravings Si.180, 186 (so 'haŋ vane nibbanatho visallo); Th 1, 526; Dh 344; Dāvs i.18. Nibbasana
Nibbasana
(adj.) [nis+vasana] no longer worn, cast off (of cloth) S ii.202, 221. Nibbahati
Nibbahati
[nis+bahati] to stretch out J iii.185 (asiŋ); to pull out J v.269 (jivhaŋ = jivhaŋ balisena n. 275). See also nibbāheti & nibbāhāpeti. Nibbāti
Nibbāti
[see nibbuta etym.; influenced in meaning by Sk. nirvāti, nis+vāti to blow, i. e. to make cool, see vāyati & nibbāpeti] (instr.) to cool off (lit. & fig.), to get cold, to become passionless Sn 235 (nibbanti dhīrā yathâyaŋ padīpo = vijjhāyanti; yathâyaŋ padīpo nibbuto evaŋ nibbanti KhA 194, 195), 915 (kathaŋ disvā nibbāti bhikkhu=rāgaŋ etc. nibbāpeti Nd1 344); J iv.391 (pāyāsaŋ). See also parinibbāti (e. g. Vbh 426). Nibbāna
Nibbāna
(nt.). -- I. Etymology. Although nir+vā "to blow". (cp. BSk. nirvāṇa) is already in use in the Vedic period (see nibbāpeti), we do not find its distinctive application till later and more commonly in popular use, where vā is fused with vṛ in this sense, viz. in application to the extinguishing of fire, which is the prevailing Buddhist conception of the term. Only in the older texts do we find references to a simile of the wind and the flame; but by far the most common metaphor and that which governs the whole idea of nibbāna finds expression in the putting out of fire by other means of extinction than by blowing, which latter process rather tends to incite the fire than to extinguish it. The going out of the fire may be due to covering it up, or to depriving it of further fuel, by not feeding it, or by withdrawing the cause of its production. Thus to the Pali etymologist the main reference is to the root vṛ (to cover), and not to vā (to blow). This is still more clearly evident in the case of nibbuta (q. v. for further discussion). In verbal compn. nis+vā (see vāyati) refers only to the (non -- ) emittance of an odour, which could never be used for a meaning of "being exhausted"; moreover, one has to bear in mind that native commentators themselves never thought of explaining nibbāna by anything like blowing (vāta), but always by nis+vana (see nibbana). For Bdhgh's defn of nibbāna see e. g. Vism 293. -- The meanings of n. are: 1. the going out of a lamp or fire (popular meaning). -- 2. health, the sense of bodily well -- being (probably, at first, the passing away of feverishness, restlessness). -- 3. The dying out in the heart of the threefold fire of rāga, dosa & moha: lust, ill -- will & stupidity (Buddhistic meaning). -> 4. the sense of spiritual well -- being, of security, emancipation, victory and peace, salvation, bliss.

II. Import and Range of the Term. A. Nibbāna is purely and solely an ethical state, to be reached in this birth by ethical practices, contemplation and insight. It is therefore not transcendental. The first and most important way to reach N. is by means of the eightfold Path, and all expressions which deal with the realisation of emancipation from lust, hatred and illusion apply to practical habits and not to speculative thought. N. is realised in one's heart; to measure it with a speculative measure is to apply a wrong standard. -- A very apt and comprehensive discussion of nibbāna is found in F. Heiler, "Die buddhistische Versenkung" (München2 1922), pp. 36 -- 42, where also the main literature on the subject is given. -- N. is the untranslatable expression of the Unspeakable, of that for which in the Buddha's own saying there is no word, which cannot be grasped in terms of reasoning and cool logic, the Nameless, Undefinable (cp. the simile of extinction of the flame which may be said to pass from a visible state into a state which cannot be defined. Thus the Saint (Arahant) passes into that same state, for which there is "no measure" (i. e. no dimension): "atthangatassa na pamāṇam atthi . . . yena naŋ vajju: taŋ tassa n' atthi" Sn 1076. The simile in v. 1074: "accī yathā vāta -- vegena khitto atthaŋ paleti, na upeti sankhaŋ: evaŋ munī nāmakāyā vimutto atthaŋ paleti, na upeti sankhaŋ"). Yet, it is a reality, and its characteristic features may be described, may be grasped in terms of earthly language, in terms of space (as this is the only means at our disposal to describe abstract notions of time and mentality); e. g. accutaŋ ṭhānaŋ, pāraŋ, amataŋ padaŋ, amata (& nibbāna -- ) dhātu. -- It is the speculative, scholastic view and the dogmatising trend of later times, beginning with the Abhidhamma period, which has more and more developed the simple, spontaneous idea into an exaggerated form either to the positive (i. e. seeing in N. a definite state or sphere of existence) or the negative side (i. e. seeing in it a condition of utter annihilation). Yet its sentimental value to the (exuberant optimism of the) early Buddhists (Rh. Davids, Early Buddhism, p. 73) is one of peace and rest, perfect passionlessness, and thus supreme happiness. As Heiler in the words of R. Otto (Das Heilige etc. 1917; quoted l. c. p. 41) describes it, "only by its concept Nirvāna is something negative, by its sentiment, however, a positive item in most pronounced form." -- We may also quote Rh. Davids' words: "One might fill columns with the praises, many of them among the most beautiful passages in Pāli poetry and prose, lavished on this condition of mind, the state of the man made perfect according to the B. faith. Many are the pet names, the poetic epithets, bestowed upon it, each of them -- for they are not synonyms -- emphasising one or other phase of this many -- sided conception -- the harbour of refuge, the cool cave, the island amidst the floods, the place of bliss, emancipation, liberation, safety, the supreme, the transcendental, the uncreated, the tranquil, the home of ease, the calm, the end of suffering, the medicine for all evil, the unshaken, the ambrosia, the immaterial, the imperishable, the abiding, the further shore, the unending, the bliss of effort, the supreme joy, the ineffable, the detachment, the holy city, and many others. Perhaps the most frequent in the B. texts is Arahantship, ʻ the state of him who is worthy ʼ; and the one exclusively used in Europe is Nirvana, the ʻ dying out, ʼ that is, the dying out in the heart of the fell fire of the three cardinal sins -- sensuality, ill -- will, and stupidity (Saŋyutta iv.251, 261)," (Early Buddhism pp. 72, 73.) And Heiler says (p. 42 l. c.): "Nirvāna is, although it might sound a paradox, in spite of all conceptional negativity nothing but ʻ eternal salvation, ʼ after which the heart of the religious yearns on the whole earth."

The current simile is that of fire, the consuming fire of passion (rāg -- aggi), of craving for rebirth, which has to be extinguished, if a man is to attain a condition of indifference towards everything worldly, and which in the end, in its own good time, may lead to freedom from rebirth altogether, to certain and final extinction (parinibbāna). -- Fire may be put out by water, or may go out of itself from lack of fuel. The ethical state called Nibbāna can only rise from within. It is therefore in the older texts compared to the fire going out, rather than to the fire being put out. The latter point of view, though the word nibbāna is not used, occurs in one or two passages in later books. See J i.212; Miln 346, 410; SnA 28; Sdhp 584. For the older view see M i.487 (aggi anāhāro nibbuto, a fire gone out through lack of fuel); Sn 1094 (akiñcanaŋ anādānaŋ etaŋ dīpaŋ anāparaŋ Nibbānaŋ iti); S i.236 (attadaṇḍesu nibbuto sādānesu anādāno); S ii.85 (aggikkhandho purimassa upādānassa pariyādānā aññassa ca anupāhārā anāhāro nibbāyeyya, as a fire would go out, bereft of food, because the former supply being finished no additional supply is forthcoming); sa -- upādāno devānaŋ indo na parinibbāyati, the king of the gods does not escape rebirth so long as he has within him any grasping S iv.102; pāragū sabbadhammānaŋ anupādāya nibbuto A i.162; pāragato jhāyī anup˚ nibbuto, a philosopher, freed, without any cause, source, of rebirth A iv.290 (etc., see nibbuta). dāvaggi -- nibbānaŋ the going out of the jungle fire J i.212; aggi nibbāyeyya, should the fire go out M i.487; aggikkhandho nibbuto hoti the great fire has died out Miln 304; nibbuto ginī my fire is out Sn 19. The result of quenching the fire (going out) is coolness (sīta); and one who has attained the state of coolness is sītibhūta. sītibhūto 'smi nibbuto Vin i.8; Pv i.87; sītibhūto nirūpadhi, cooled, with no more fuel (to produce heat) Vin ii.156; A i.138; nicchāto nibbuto sītibhūto (cp. nicchāta) A ii.208; v.65. anupādānā dīpacci viya nibbutā gone out like the flame of a lamp without supply of fuel ThA 154 (Ap. 153). -- nibbanti dhīrā yath' âyaŋ padīpo the Wise go out like the flame of this lamp Sn 235. This refers to the pulling out of the wick or to lack of oil, not to a blowing out; cp. vaṭṭiŋ paṭicca telapadīpo jāleyya S ii.86; Th 2, 116 (padīpass' eva nibbānaŋ vimokkho ahu cetaso). The pulling out of the wick is expressed by vaṭṭiŋ okassayāmi ( = dīpavaṭṭiŋ ākaḍḍhemi ThA 117) cp. on this passage Pischel, Leben & Lehre des Buddha 71; Mrs. Rh. Davids, Buddhism 176; Neumann, Lieder 298). pajjotass' eva nibbānaŋ like the going out of a lamp S i.159≈.

B. Since rebirth is the result of wrong desire (kāma, kilesa, āsava, rāga etc.), the dying out of that desire leads to freedom & salvation from rebirth and its cause or substratum. Here references should be given to: (1) the fuel in ethical sense (cp. A 1: aggi); (2) the aims to be accomplished (for instance, coolness = peace); (3) the seat of its realisation (the heart); (4) the means of achievement (the Path); (5) the obstacles to be removed. -- 1. Fuel= cause of rebirth & suffering: āsāva (intoxications). khīṇāsavā jutimanto to loke parinibbutā the wise who are rid of all intoxications are in this world the thoroughly free S v.29; sāvakā āsavānaŋ khayā viharanti A iv.83; kodhaŋ pahatvāna parinibbiŋsu anāsavā (are completely cooled) A iv.98; āsavakhīṇo danto parinibbuto Sn 370; saggaŋ sugatino yanti parinibbanti anāsavā those of happy fate go to heaven, but those not intoxicated die out Dh 126; nibbānaŋ adhimuttānaŋ atthangacchanti āsavā Dh 226; āsavānaŋ khayā bhikkhu nicchāto parinibbuto It 49; vimutti -- kusuma -- sañchanno parinibbissati anāsavo Th 1, 100. -- kāmā (cravings) nikkāmo nibbano Nāgo Sn 1131. -- kilesa -- (nibbāna) vice (only in certain commentaries). kilesa -- nibbānass' âpi anupādā parinibbānass' âpi santike DhA i.286; upādānaŋ abhāvena anupādiyitvā kilesa -- nibbānena nibbutā DhA iv.194. -- nibbidā (disenchantment). Nibbānaŋ ekanta -- nibbidāya virāgāya etc. saŋvattati S ii.223; nibbijjha sabbaso kāme sikkhe nibbānaŋ attano Sn 940. -- rāga virāgo nirodho nibbānaŋ S i.136≈; desento virajaŋ dhammaŋ nibbānaŋ akutobhayan S i.192; yo rāgakkhayo (dosa˚ . . . moha˚ . . .): idaŋ vuccati nibbānaŋ S iv.251, & same of Amata S v.8; chandarāga -- vinodanaŋ nibbānapadaŋ accutaŋ Sn 1086; kusalo ca jahati pāpakaŋ rāgadosamoha -- kkhayā parinibbuto Ud 85; ye 'dha pajahanti kāmarāgaŋ bhavarāgânusayañ ca pahāya parinibbānagatā Vv 5324. -- vana sabba -- saŋyojan' atītaŋ vanā nibbānaŋ āgataŋ A iii.346; nikkhantaŋ vānato ti nibbānaŋ KhA 151; taṇhā -- sankhāta -- vānâbhāvato nibbānaŋ SnA 253.

2. Aims: khema (tranquillity). ātāpī bhikkhu nibbānāya bhabbo anuttarassa yogakkhemassa adhigamāya It 27; ajaraŋ amaraŋ khemaŋ pariyessāmi nibbutiŋ J i.3; acala (immovable, not to be disturbed). patto acalaṭṭhānaŋ Vv 514; accuta (stable) patthayaŋ accutaŋ padaŋ S iii.143; chandarāga -- vinodanaŋ nibbānapadaŋ accutaŋ Sn 1086. nekkhamma (renunciation, dispassionateness). vanā nibbānaŋ āgataŋ kāmehi nekkhammarataŋ A iii.346. -- pāragū (victor). pāragū sabbadhammānaŋ anupādāya nibbuto A i.162 (cp. A iv.290 with tiṇṇo pāragato). -- santipada (calm, composure). santī ti nibbutiŋ ñatvā Sn 933; santimaggaŋ eva brūhaya nibbānaŋ sugatena desitaŋ Dh 285; s. = acala VvA 219. -- samatha (allayment, quietude). sabbasankhārasamatho nibbānaŋ S i.136≈. -- sotthi (welfare). saccena suvatthi hotu nibbānaŋ Sn 235.

3. The Heart: (a) attā (heart, self). abhinibbut -- atto Sn 456; thiṭatto frequent, e. g. parinibbuto ṭh˚ Sn 359; danto parinib˚ ṭh˚ Sn 370. -- (b) citta (heart). apariḍayhamāna -- citto SnA 347 (for abhinibbutatto Sn 343). -- (c) hadaya (heart) nibbānaŋ hadayasmiŋ opiya S i.199; mātuhadayaŋ nibbāyate J i.61; nibbāpehi me hadaya -- pariḷāhaŋ (quench the fever of my heart) Miln 318. -- (d) mano (mind). mano nibbāyi tāvade J i.27; disvā mano me pasīdi Vv 5014.

4. The Path: dhīra. lokapariyāyaŋ aññāya nibbutā dhīrā tiṇṇā etc. S i.24; nibbanti dhīrā . . . Sn 235 sabbâbhibhū dhīro sabbagantha -- ppamocano It 122 -> Recognition of anicca (transitoriness, see nicca). aniccasaññī . . . bhikkhu pāpuṇāti diṭṭh' eva dhamme nibbānaŋ A iv.353. -- paññā. nibbānaŋ ev' ajjhagamuŋ sapaññā S i.22; n' abhirato paññā S i.38. -> paṇḍita & nipaka. anupubbena n˚ŋ adhigacchanti paṇḍitā A i.162; nipakā asesaŋ parinibbanti It 93. -> vijjā. bhikkhu paṇihitena cittena avijjaŋ bhecchati vijjaŋ uppādessati n˚ŋ sacchikarissati the bhikkhu with devout heart will destroy ignorance, gain right cognition & realise Nibbāna A i.8; idh' aññāya parinibbāti anāsavo A iii.41; sabb' āsave pariññāya parinibbanti anāsavā Vbh 426.

5. The Obstacles: gantha (fetter). nibbānaŋ adhigantabbaŋ sabba -- g˚ -- pamocanaŋ S i.210; It 104; similarly It 122 (see above). gabbhaseyyā (rebirth). na te punam upenti gabbhaseyyaŋ, parinibbānagatā hi sītibhūtā Vv 5324 -- nīvaraṇa (obstacles). pañca n˚. anibbāna -- saŋvattanikā S v.97. -- punabbhava (rebirth). nibbāpehi mahārāgaŋ mā ḍayhittho punappunaŋ S i.188; vibhavañ ca bhavañ ca vippahāya vusitavā khīṇapunabbhavo sa bhikkhu Sn 514; bhava -- nirodha nibbānaŋ S ii.117. -- sankhārā (elements of life). sabbasankhāra -- samatho nibbānaŋ S i.136; N. = sabbasankhārā khayissanti A iii.443. -- saŋyojanāni (fetters). sabbas -- âtītaŋ vanā Nibbānaŋ āgataŋ A iii.346; s. pahāya n˚ŋ sacchikarissati A iii.423; saŋyojanānaŋ parikkhayā antarā -- parinibbāyī hoti S v.69.

III. Nibbāna: its ethical importance and general characterisation. 1. Assurance of N. (nibbānass' eva santike, near N., sure of N.): S i.33 (yassa etādisaŋ yānaŋ . . . sa etena yānena n. e. s.: with the chariot of the Dhamma sure of reaching N.); iv.75; A ii.39 (abhabbo parihānāya n. e. s. impossible to fail in the assurance of final release, of one "catuhi dhammehi samannāgato, viz. sīla, indriyaguttadvāratā, bhojanamattaññutā. jāgariyā"); iii.331 (id. with appamādagaru: ever active & keen); ii.40 = It 40 (id. with appamāda -- rato); Sn 822. -- 2. Steps and Means to N.: nibbāna -- sacchikiriyā, attainment of N., is mangalaŋ uttamaŋ & to be achieved by means of tapo, brahmacariyā and ariyasaccāna -- dassanaŋ Sn 267. -- brahmacariya (a saintly life) is n. -- parāyanā (leading to N.) S iii.189, cp. v.218; also called n. -- ogadhā (with similar states of mind, as nibbidā, virāgo, vimutti) ibid.; A ii.26=It 28, cp. It 29 (nibbān' -- ogadha -- gāminaŋ b˚ŋ). The stages of sanctification are also discussed under the formula " nibbidā virāgo vimutti . . . vimuttasmiŋ vimuttaŋ iti ñāṇaŋ hoti: khīṇā jāti etc." (i. e. no more possibility of birth) S ii.124=iv.86. -> dhamma: Buddha's teaching as the way to N.: "dhammavaraŋ adesayi n. -- gāmiŋ paramaŋ hitāya" Sn 233; ahaŋ sāvakānaŋ dhammaŋ desemi sattānaŋ visuddhiyā . . . n˚assa sacchikiriyāya A v.194, cp. 141; pubbe dh. -- ṭhiti -- ñāṇaŋ pacchā nibbāne ñāṇan ti S ii.124. -- magga: Those practices of a moral & good life embraced in the 8 fold Noble Path (ariyamagga). Sace atthi akammena koci kvaci na jīyati nibbānassa hi so maggo S i.217; ekāyano ayaŋ maggo sattānaŋ visuddhiyā . . . N˚assa sacchikiriyāya D ii.290; S v.167, 185; bhāvayitvā sucimaggaŋ n˚ -- ogadha -- gāminaŋ . . . Vbh 426; ādimhi sīlaŋ dasseyya, majjhe maggaŋ vibhāvaye , pariyosānamhi nibbānaŋ . . . DA i.176. -- N. -- gamanaŋ maggaŋ: tattha me nirato mano "my heart rejoices in the path to Nibbāna" S i.186; N. -- gāminī paṭipadā A iv.83 (the path to salvation). Cp. §§ 4 & 7. -- 3. The Search for N. or the goal of earnest endeavour. ārogya -- paramā lābhā nibbānaŋ paramaŋ sukhaŋ, aṭṭhangiko ca maggānaŋ khemaŋ amata -- gāminaŋ "N. is a higher bliss than acquisition of perfect health, the eightfold Path (alone) of all leads to perfect peace, to ambrosia" M i.508, cp. Dh 204 ("the fullest gain is for health etc.; N. is the highest happiness" DhA iii.267). Similarly: khantī paramaŋ tapo titikkhā, n˚ŋ paramaŋ vadanti buddhā D ii.49=Dh 184; n˚ŋ paramaŋ sukhaŋ: Dh 204=Sn 257=J iii.195; id.: Dh 203; jhānaŋ upasampajja . . . okkamanāya n.˚assa A iv.111 sq.; cp. 230 sq.; kaṭuviyakato bhikkhu . . . ārakā hoti N˚ā A i.281; n˚ŋ ajjhagamuŋ sapaññā S i.22; devalokañ ca te yanti . . . anupubbena n˚ŋ adhigacchanti paṇḍitā A i.162; n˚ŋ abhikankhati S i.198; abhipassati A i.147; tiṇṇakathankatho visallo n. -- âbhirato Sn 86; bhikkhu bhabbo anuttaraŋ sītibhāvaŋ sacchikātuŋ . . . paṇītâdhimutto hoti ṇ -- âbhirato ca A iii.435; n. -- âbhirato . . . sabbadukkhā pamuccati S i.38; n. -- ogadhaŋ brahmacariyaŋ vussati n. -- parāyaṇaŋ n. -- pariyosānaŋ S iii.189=v.218; n˚ŋ gavesanto carāmi (Bodhisat, J i.61). All means of conduct & all ideals of reason & intellect lead to one end only: Nibbāna. This is frequently expressed by var. similes in the phrase n. -- ninna, ˚poṇa, ˚pabbhāra, e. g. S v.75=134= 137=190; v.244; A v.75, 134, 190, 244= 291; Vv 8442. Saddahāno arahataŋ dhammaŋ n.-> pattiyā sussūsā labhate paññaŋ appamatto S i.214= Sn 186, cp. S i.48; Gotamo n. -- paṭisaŋyuttāya dhammiyā kathāya bhikkhū sandasseti S i.214=192= 210; Ud 80; n˚ŋ pariyesati A ii.247; n. -- pariyosānā sabbe dhammā A v.107; n. -- poṇaŋ me mānasaŋ bhavissati, saŋyojanā pahāṇaŋ gacchanti A iii.443; odhunitvā malaŋ sabbaŋ patvā n. -- sampadaŋ muccati sabba -- dukkhehi: sā hoti sabbasampadā A iv.239; nibbijjha sabbaso kāme sikkhe n˚ŋ attano Sn 940, cp. 1061. -- 4. Some Epithets of Nibbāna: akutobhayaŋ A ii.24=It 122; accutaŋ padaŋ (careyya āditta -- sīso va patthayaŋ a. p.) S iii.143; Sn 1086; pattā te acalaṭṭhānaŋ yattha gantvā na socare Vv 514; amataŋ A ii.247; M iii.224 (Bhagavā atthassa ninnetā a ˚assa dātā); Miln 319; Vv 6427 (apāpuranto a ˚assa dvāraŋ); VvA 85 (a -- rasa); Vv 5020 (amatogadha magga=nibb˚ -- gāminī paṭipadā); amosadhammaŋ Sn 758; khemaŋ appaṭibhayaŋ S iv.175; S i.189=Sn 454; Th 2, 350 (˚ṭṭhāne vimuttā te patta te acalaŋ sukhaŋ); M i.508 (+amatagāminaŋ); A ii.247 (yogakkhemaŋ anuttaraŋ); same at A iii.294; It 27; Dh 23. -- taṇhakkhaya Vv 735; ṭhānaŋ dud- dasaŋ S i.136 (=sabba -- sankhāra -- samatho); dhuvaŋ (q. v.); niccaŋ Kvu 121; nekkhammaŋ A i.147 (˚ŋ daṭṭhu khemato . . . nibbānaŋ abhipassanto); Vv 8442. sabba -- gantha -- pamocanaŋ (deliverance from all ties) S i.210; ii.278 (sabbadukkha˚); It 222=A ii.24; yathābhūtaŋ vacanaŋ S iv.195; yathāsukhaŋ (the Auspicious) A iv.415 sq.; (chanda -- ) rāga vinodanaŋ Sn 1086; rāgakkhayo (dosa˚, moha˚) S v.8; rāgavinayo (dosa˚, moha˚) ibid., santi (calm, peace) Vv 5021=Sn 204 (chandarāga -- viratto bhikkhu paññāṇavā ajjhagā amataŋ santiŋ nibbānapadaŋ accutaŋ); VvA 219 (=acala); santimaggaŋ eva brūhaya n˚ŋ Sugatena desitaŋ Dh 285=Nett 36; sandiṭṭhikaŋ akālikaŋ etc.; A i.158; samo bhūmibhāgo ramaṇīyo S iii.109; sassataŋ Kvu 34; suvatthi Sn 235. -- 5. N. is realisable in this world, i. e. in this life if it is mature (diṭṭhe va dhamme): S ii.18=115=iii.163=iv.141 (diṭṭha -- dh -- npatta); M ii.228; A iv.353=358, cp. 454. -- 6. Definitions with regard to the destruction of the causes or substrata of life (cp. above I.): taṇhāya vippahānena n˚ŋ iti vuccati S i.39=Sn 1109; as sabba -- sankhārasamatho (calming down of all vital elements) Vin i.5; S i.136; A ii.118=iii.164; iv.423; v.8, 110, 320, 354; akiñcanaŋ anādānaŋ etaŋ dīpaŋ anāparaŋ n˚ŋ iti nam brūmi jarāmaccu -- parikkhayaŋ Sn 1094; bhavanirodho n˚ŋ ti S ii.117; A v.9; rāga -- kkhayo (dosa˚, moha˚) S iv.251=261; virāgo nirodho n˚ŋ in typical & very freq. exposition at Nd2=S i.136≈. See also vana & cp. the foll.: taṇhā -- sankhāta -- vānâbhāvato n˚ŋ SnA 253; nikkhantaŋ vānato ti n˚ŋ KhA 151; kilesa -- n˚ ass' âpi anupādā parinibbānass' âpi santike yeva DhA i.286 (on Dh 32). -- 7. N. as perfect wisdom and what is conducive to such a state (saŋvattati). The foll. phrase is one of the oldest stereotype phrases in the Canon & very freq.; it is used of all the highest means & attainments of conduct & meditation & may be said to mark the goal of perfect understanding & a perfect philosophy of life. It is given in 2 variations, viz. in a simple form as "upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saŋvattati," with ref. to majjhimā paṭipadā at Vin i.10=S iv.331=v.421; of satta bojjhangā at S v.80; and in a fuller form as "ekanta -- nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya upasamāya etc. as above" at D i.189 (negative); ii.251 (of brahmacariyaŋ), 285; iii.130 (sukhallikânuyogā, neg.) 136 (avyākataŋ, neg.); S ii.223 (brahmacariya); v.82 (satta bojjhangā), 179 (satipaṭṭhānā), 255 (iddhipādā), 361 (ariyamagga), 438 A iii.83, 326 sq.; etc. -- Cp. n -- saŋvattanika S v.97 (upekhāsambojjhanga); Nd2 281 (neg. of tamo). -> 8. N. as the opposite of rāga (passion, lust). Freq. is the combn of virāga nirodha nibbāna, almost used as three synonyms, thus at S ii.18; Vin iii.20= 111; A ii.118=iii.164=iv.423=v.8=Nd2 under Nibbāna; A ii.34=It 88 (dhammānaŋ aggaŋ akkhāyati, madanimmadano pipāsa -- vinayo ālaya -- samugghāto vaṭṭûpacchedo taṇhakkhayo virāgo nirodha nibbānaŋ), cp. Vin iii.20≈. Similarly S i.192 (Sugataŋ payirupāsati desentaŋ virajaŋ dhammaŋ nibbānaŋ akutobhayaŋ). -> 9. Various Characterisations & Similes (cp. above II. A 4 & 5). sukkâbhijātiko samāno akaṇhaŋ asukkaŋ n˚ŋ abhijayati D iii.251; A iii.384 sq.; aniccā sabbe sankhārā dukkhā 'nattā ca sankhātā: nibbānañ c' eva paññatti anattā iti nicchayā Vin v.86. On anicca & anattā in rel. to N. see also S iv.133 sq.; A iv.353; dukkhato & sukhato n˚ŋ samanupassati A iii.442. On comparison with a lamp see e. g. S i.159=D ii.157= Th 1, 906 (pajjotass' eva nibbānaŋ vimokkho cetaso ahū), A iv.3 (pajjotass' eva n. vimokkho hoti cetaso); Sn 235 (. . . te khīṇabījā avirūḷhichandā nibbanti dhīrā yathâyaŋ padīpo).

-- abhirata fond of N. (cp. III. 3) S i.38; A iii.435; Sn 86 (visalla+); -- ogadha merging into N. (of brahmacariya) S iii.189; v.218; A ii.26 = It 28; Vbh 426, cp. amatogadha A v.107; -- gamana (magga; cp. III. 2) leading to N. D ii.223; S i.186, 217; A iv.83; (dhamma:) S v.11; Sn 233; -- dhātu the sphere or realm of N. always in phrase anupādisesāsaya n. -- dhātuyā parinibbāyate Vin ii.239; D iii.135; It 38, 121; Ps i.101; cp. rāgavinayo n. -- dhātuyā adhivacanaŋ S v.8. See parinibbāyin; -- ninna (+˚poṇa, ˚pabbhāra; cp. III. 3) converging into N. A iii.443; Vv 8442 & passim; -- paṭisaññuta (dhammikathā; cp. III. 2) relating or referring to N. S i.114=192=210; Ud 80; -- patta having attained N. (diṭṭha -- dhamma˚, see above III. 5) S ii.18=114= iii.163; -- patti attainment of N. S i.48, 214=Sn 186; -- pada=Nibbāna (see pada 3) Sn 204. -- pariyosāna ending in N. having its final goal in N. S iii.189; v.218; A v.107; -- saŋvattanika conducive to N.; contributing toward the attainment of N. S v.97; Nd2 281 (a˚); cp. above III. 7; -- sacchikiriyā realisation of N. (identical with ñāṇa and constituting the highest ideal; cp. above III. 2) Sn 267. Cp. also D ii.290; S v.167; A iii.423; v.141; -- saññā perception of N. A iii.443; -- sampatti successful attainment of N. Kh viii.13; -- sampadā the blessing of the attainment of N. A iv.239. -- 365 -- Nibbāpana
Nibbāpana
(nt.) [abstr. fr. nibbāpeti] means of extinguishing, extinction, quenching S i.188 (cittaŋ pariḍayhati: nibbāpanaŋ brūhi = allayment of the glow); A iv.320 (celassa n˚āya chandaŋ karoti: try to put out the burning cloth); Miln 302 (jhāyamāno n˚ŋ alabhamāno), 318 (pariḷāha˚). Nibbāpita
Nibbāpita
(adj.) [pp. of nibbāpeti] extinguished, put out, quenched J iii.99 ( = nicchuddha). Nibbāpeti
Nibbāpeti
[Sk. ni(r)vārayati, Caus. of ni(r)varati, influ- enced in meaning by nirvāpayati. Caus. of nirvāti = make cool by blowing (e. g. RV x.1613). See nibbuta on etym.] 1. to extinguish, put out, quench S i.188 (mahārāgaŋ); It 93 (rāg -- aggiŋ; & nibbāpetvā aggiŋ nipakā parinibbanti); cp. aggiŋ nijjāleti J vi.495; Pv i.85 (vārinā viya osiñcaŋ sabbaŋ daraŋ nibbāpaye); Miln 304 (aggikhandhaŋ mahāmegho abhippavassitvā n.), 318 (nibbāpehi me hadaya -- pariḷāhaŋ), 410 (megho uṇhaŋ n.); DhA ii.241 (fire); Sdhp 552 (bhavadukkh' aggiŋ). -- 2. to cleanse, purify (cittaŋ, one's heart) Vism 305. -- pp. nibbāpita. See also nibbāpana. Nibbāyati
Nibbāyati
[Sk. ni -- (or nir -- )vriyate, Pass. of ni(r)varati, influenced by nirvāyati intrs. to cease to blow; see on etym. & Pāli derivation nibbuta] 1. to be cooled or refreshed, to be covered up = to be extinguished, go out (of fire), to cease to exist, always used with ref. to fire or heat or (fig.) burning sensations (see nibbāna II. A end): aggikkhandho purimassa ca upādānassa puriyādānā aññassa ca anupāhārā anāhāro nibbāyeyya S ii.85 (opp. jāleyya); do. of telaŋ & vaṭṭiŋ paṭicca telappadīpo n. S ii.86=iii.126=iv.213= v.319; sace te purato so aggi nibbāyeyya jāneyyāsi tvaŋ: ayaŋ . . . aggi nibbuto M i.487; A iv.70 (papaṭikā n.); aggi udake tiṇukkā viya n. J i.212; mātuhadayaŋ n. J i.61; aggi upādāna -- sankhayā n. Miln 304. -- aor. nibbāyi [Sk. niravāri] J i.27 (mano n.: was refreshed) 212 (aggi udake n.: was extinguished); vi.349 (cooled down). -- 2. to go out (of light) Vism 430 (dīpā nibbāyiŋsu the lights went out); ThA 154 (dīpacci n. nirāsanā: went out). See also parinibbāyati & cp. nibbuta, nibbāpeti, nibbāpana. Nibbāyin
Nibbāyin
see pari˚. Nibbāhana
Nibbāhana
(adj. -- n.) [fr. nibbāheti] leading out, removing, saving; (nt.) removal, clearance, refuge, way out Miln 119, 198, 295, 309, 326 (˚magga). [Miln. the only references!] Nibbāhati
Nibbāhati
[nis+vahati] to lead out, carry out, save from, remove Miln 188. -- 2nd Caus. nibbāhāpeti to have brought out, to unload (a waggon) Vin ii.159 (hiraññaŋ); iii.43. See also nibbāhana & nibbuyhati. Nibbikappa
Nibbikappa
[nis+vikappa] distinction, distinguishing Vism 193. Nibbikāra
Nibbikāra
(adj.) [nis+vikāra] steady, unchanged, stead- fast; persevering J i.66; PvA 178, 253 (+nicca); SnA 189, 497; Vism 311. Nibbicikicchā
Nibbicikicchā
(f.) [nis+vicikicchā] surety, reliance, trust S ii.84; v.221 ( = nikkankhā); VvA 85 (=ekaŋsikā). Nibbijjhati
Nibbijjhati
[nis+vijjhati, vyadh] to pierce, transfix, wound S v.88 (+padāleti); Sdhp 153 (patodehi). ger. nibbijjha Sn 940 ( = paṭivijjhitvā Nd1 420). -- pp. nibbiddha. Cp. abhi˚. Nibbiṭṭha
Nibbiṭṭha
(pp.) [nis+viṭṭha, of nibbisati] gained, earned Vin iv.265; Sn 25; SnA 38. Nibbiṇṇa
Nibbiṇṇa
(adj.) [Sk. nirviṇṇa, pp. of nibbindati] tired of, disgusted with (c. instr. or loc.), wearied of, dissatisfied with, "fed up" J i.347; vi.62; Th 2, 478 ( = viratta ThA 286); DhA i.85 (˚hadaya); VvA 207 (˚rūpa); PvA 159 (tattha -- vāsena n -- mānaso tired of living there), 272 (˚rūpa), 283 (˚rūpa, tired of: purohite). Nibbidā
Nibbidā
(f.) [Sk. nirvid, f. (also BSk. e. g. Lal. V. 300) & nirveda; to nibbindati] weariness, disgust with worldly life, tedium, aversion, indifference, disenchantment. N. is of the preliminary & conditional states for the attainment of Nibbāna (see nibbāna II B 1) & occurs frequently together with virāga, vimutti & nibbāna in the formula: etaŋ ekanta -- nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya . . . sambodhāya nibbānāya saŋvattati "this leads to being thoroughly tired (of the world), to dispassionateness, to destruction (of egoism), to perfect wisdom, to Nibbāna," e. g. at D i.189; S v.82, 179, 255, 361; A iii.83; iv.143; v.216. -- In other connections: Vin i.15 (nibbidāya cittaŋ saṇṭhāsi); D iii.130 sq.; S ii.30; iii.40; 179, 189; iv.86, 141 (read nibbidāya for nibbindāya?); A i.51, 64; iii.19, 200, 325 sq.; iv.99, 336; v.2 sq., 311 sq.; J i.97; iv.471, 473; Sn 340; Ps i.195; ii.43 sq.; Vbh 330; Nett 27, 29; Vism 650. Cp. abhi˚. Nibbiddha
Nibbiddha
[pp. of nibbijjhati] 1. in phrase ˚pingala (with) disgustingly red (eyes) (perhaps = nibbiṇṇa?) J v.42 (of a giant). -- 2. with ref. to a road: broken up, i. e. much frequented, busy street J vi.276 (of vīthi, bazaar, in contrast with a -- nibbiddha -- raccha carriage -- road, which is not a thoroughfare. The reading patatthiyo at J vi.276, for which nibbiddha -- vīthiyo is the C. expln is to be corrected into pathaddhiyo). Nibbindati
Nibbindati
[nis+vindati, vid2] to get wearied of (c. loc.); to have enough of, be satiated, turn away from, to be disgusted with. In two roots A. vind: prs. nibbindati etc. usually in combn with virajjati & vimuccati (cp. nibbāna III. 2). Vin i.35; S ii.94; iv.86, 140; A v.3; Dh 277 sq.; It 33; J i.267; Miln 235, 244; Sdhp 612. ppr. nibbindaŋ S iv.86; PvA 36 (nibbinda -- mānasa); ger. nibbindiya J v.121 (˚kārin). -- B. vid: Pot. nibbide (v. l. BB nibbije) J v.368 ( = nibbindeyya Com.); ger. nibbijjitvā J i.82, & nibbijja Sn 448=S i.124 (nibbijjâpema=nibbijja pakkameyya SnA 393). -- pp. nibbiṇṇa. See also nibbidā. Nibbiriya
Nibbiriya
(adj.) [nis+viriya] lacking in strength, indolent, slothful, weak J iv.131; PvA 175 ( = alasa, kusīta]. Nibbivara
Nibbivara
(adj.) [nis+vivara] without holes or fissures, without omissions J v.429; VvA 275 ( = atīva sangata). Nibbisa
Nibbisa
[to nibbisati] earnings, wages Th 1, 606 = 1003= Miln 45 (cp. Manu vi.45); SnA 38. Nibbisanka
Nibbisanka
(adj.) [nis+visanka, Sk. viśankā] fearless, not hesitating, undaunted SnA 61. Nibbisati
Nibbisati
[nis+visati] to enter into; to earn, gain, find, enjoy, only in pp. anibbisaŋ not finding Th 2, 159 ( = avindanto ThA 142); J i.76=Dh 153. -- pp. nibbiṭṭha. See also nibbisa. -- 366 -- Nibbisaya
Nibbisaya
(adj.) [nis+visaya] having no residence, ban- ished, driven from ( -- ˚) J ii.401. Nibbisevana
Nibbisevana
(adj.) [nis+visevana] not self -- indulgent, self- denying, meek, tame, gentle J ii.210 (dametvā nibbisevanaŋ katvā), 351; v.34, 381, 456; vi.255; DhA i.288 (cittaŋ ujuŋ akuṭilaŋ n. karoti), 295; VvA 284 (˚bhava = jitindriya). Nibbisesa
Nibbisesa
(adj.) [nis+visesa] showing no difference, without distinction, equal, similar J ii.32; vi.355; Miln 249. Nibbujjhati
Nibbujjhati
[ni+yujjhati, yudh. Pāli form difficult to explain: niy˚ = niyy˚= nivv˚=nibb˚] to wrestle, to fight with fists Vin iii.180. -- pp. nibbuddha. Nibbuta
Nibbuta
(adj.) [Nibbuta represents Sk. nirvṛta (e. g. AvŚ i.48) as well as nivṛta, both pp. of vṛ, which in itself combines two meanings, as exhibited in cognate languages and in Sk. itself: (a) Idg. ṷer to cover, cover up (Lat. aperio = *apa -- veri̯o to cover up, Sk. varutram upper garment, "cover") and (b) *ṷel to resolve, roll, move (Lat. volvo=revolve; Gr. e(/lic, e)lu/w; Sk. vāṇa reed=Lat. ulva; Sk. ūrmi wave; P. valli creeper, valita wrinkled). *ṷer is represented in P. by e. g. vivarati to open, nivāreti to cover, obstruct, nīvaraṇa, nivāraṇa obstruction; *ṷel by āvuta, khandh -- āvāra, parivāra, vyāvaṭa (busy with=moving about), samparivāreti. Thus we gain the two meanings combd and used promiscuously in the one word because of their semantic affinity: (a) *nivṛta covered up, extinguished, quenched, and (b) *nirvṛta without movement, with motion finished (cp. niṭṭhita), ceasing, exhaustion, both represented by P. nibbuta. -- In derivations we have besides the rootform vṛ (=P. bbu˚) that with guṇa vṝ (cp. Sk. vārayati, vrāyati) or vrā=P.* bbā˚ (with which also cp. paṭivāṇa=*prativāraṇa). The former is in nibbuti (ceasing, extinction, with meaning partly influenced by nibbuṭṭhi=Sk. nirvṛṣṭi pouring of water), the latter in instr. nibbāti and nibbāyati (to cease or to go out) and trs. nibbāpeti (Caus.: to make cease, to stop or cool) and further in nibbāna (nt. instr. abstr.) (the dying out)] (lit.) extinguished (of fire), cooled, quenched (fig.) desireless (often with nicchāta & sītibhūta), appeased, pleased, happy. -- (a) (lit.) aggi anāhāro n. M i.487; Sn 19 (ginī n.=magga -- salila -- sekena n. SnA 28); J iv.391 (anibbute pāyāse); Miln 304 (aggikkhandha), 346 (mahāmeghena n˚ŋ pathaviŋ); ThA 154 (anupādānā dīp' accī); KhA 194 (padīpo n.). -- (b) (fig.) combd with sītibhūta (& nicchāta): Vin i.8; M i.341; A ii.208 =D iii.233=Pug 56, 61; A iv.410; v.65; Sn 593, 707; Pv i.87. -- In phrase anupādāya nibbuta: S ii.279; A i.162; iv.290=Dh 414=Sn 638. -- In other connections: attadaṇḍesu n. sādānesu anādāno S i.236= Dh 406=Sn 630; aññāya nibbutā dhīrā S i.24; tadangan. S iii.43; ejânugo anejassa nibbutassa anibbuto It 91; vītataṇho n. Sn 1041; tiṇṇa -- sokapariddavo n. Dh 196; rāg' aggimhi n. & n. mātā, pitā, nārī J i.60; n. veyyākaraṇena Miln 347; upādānānaŋ abhāvena . . . kilesanibbānena n. DhA iv.194. -- See also abhinibbuta and parinibbuta. Nibbuti
Nibbuti
(f.) [Sk. nirvṛti, abstr. to nibbuta] allayment, refreshment, cooling, peace, happiness J i.3 (khemaŋ pariyessāmi n˚ŋ); Sn 228 (nikkāmino n˚ŋ bhuñjamānā), 917, 933 (santī ti n˚ŋ ñatvā); Nd1 399; Pv i.74 (n˚ŋ n' âdhigacchāmi = quenching of hunger & thirst); KhA 185 (=paṭippassaddha -- kilesa -- daratha). Nibbuddha
Nibbuddha
[Sk. niyuddha, pp. of nibbujjhati] wrestling, fist -- fight D i.6 ( = mallayuddhaŋ DA i.85); DhsA 403. Nibbuyhati
Nibbuyhati
[Sk. niruhyate, nis+vuyhati, Pass. of vahati, cp. nibbāhati] to be led out to (c. acc.): susānaŋ Th 2, 468 ( = upanīyati ThA 284); to be led out of= to be saved S i.1, cp. RV i.117, 14; vi.62, 6. Nibbusitattā
Nibbusitattā
(nibbusitattan?) [Sk. *nir -- vasit -- ātman or *nirvasitatvaŋ (nt. abstr.), to nis -- vasati, cp. nirvāsana = nibbisaya] a dislocated or disconcerted mind, unrest, uneasiness D i.17. Nibbecikicchā
Nibbecikicchā
= nibbicikicchā certainty, doubtlessness Nd2 185 (opp. savicikicchā). Nibbejaniya
Nibbejaniya
at S i.124 should probably be read as nibbe- ṭhaniya (rejecting, evading). Nibbeṭhana
Nibbeṭhana
(nt.) [Sk. nirveṣṭana, nis+veṭhana] unwinding, fig. explanation Miln 28. Nibbeṭhita
Nibbeṭhita
[pp. of nibbeṭheti] explained, unravelled, made clear Miln 123 (su˚). Nibbeṭheti
Nibbeṭheti
[Sk. nirveṣṭate, nis+veṭheti, to twist round] 1. to unravel, untwist, unwind; to explain, make clear D i.54 (nibbeṭhiyamāna, v. l. BB nibbedh˚); Pv iv.329 (˚ento = niveṭhīyamāna PvA 253 v. l. BB nibbedh˚); Miln 3; Sdhp 153. -- 2. to deny, reject Vin ii.79; D i.3 (=apanetabba Com.); S iii.12 (v. l. BB ˚dh˚). -> 3. to give an evasive answer Vin iii.162. -- See also nibbejaniya. -- pp. nibbeṭhita, q. v. Nibbedha
Nibbedha
[nis+vedha, to vyadh] penetration, insight; adj.: penetrating, piercing, scrutinising, sharp. Freq. in phrase nibbedha -- bhāgiya (sharing the quality of penetration), with ref. to samādhi, saññā etc. [cp. BSk. nirvedha˚ Divy 50; but also nirbheda˚ AvŚ ii.181, of kusalamūlāni; expld as lobhakkhandhassa (etc.) nibbijjhanāni at Nett 274] D iii.251, 277; A iii.427; Vbh 330; Nett 21, 48, 143 sq., 153 sq.; Vism 15, 88; DhsA 162. -- Also in nibbedha -- gāminī (paññā) It 35; & dunnibbedha (hard to penetrate, difficult to solve Miln 155, 233 (pañha); spelt dunniveṭha at Miln 90). Nibbedhaka
Nibbedhaka
(adj.) [nis+vedhaka, to vyadh] piercing, sharp, penetrating, discriminating; only in f. nibbedhikā (cp. āvedhikā), appld to paññā (wisdom) D iii.237, 268; S v.197, 199; M i.356; A i.45; ii.167; iii.152; 410 sq., 416; v.15; Ps ii.201; Nd2 235, 3a (+tikkha -- paññā), 415, 689; J ii.9, 297; iv.267. Nibbematika
Nibbematika
(adj.) [nis+vimati+ka] not disagreeing, of one accord, unanimous Vin ii.65; DhA i.34. Nibbhacceti
Nibbhacceti
[Sk. nirbhartsayati, nis+bhaccheti] to threaten, revile, scorn J iii.338. Nibbhaya
Nibbhaya
(adj.) [nis+bhaya] free from fear or danger, fearless, unafraid J i.274; iii.80; v.287; Vism 512. Nibbhujati
Nibbhujati
[Sk. ni -- or nirbhujati, nis+bhujati] to twist round, bend, wind, contort oneself Miln 253. Cp. vi˚. Nibbhoga
Nibbhoga
(adj.) [Sk. nirbhoga, nis+bhoga1] deprived of enjoyment; deserted, being of no avail, useless J vi.556; Pv i.12. Cp. vi˚. Nibbhoga
Nibbhoga
[ni+bhoga2] bending, contortion J ii.264 (oṭṭha˚). Nibyaggha
Nibyaggha
see nivyaggha. Nibha
Nibha
(adj.) [Sk. nibha, to bhāti] shining; like, equal to, resembling ( -- ˚) J v.372; Vv 401; Pv iv.312; VvA 122 (vaṇṇa˚ = vaṇṇa); Nd2 608. Nibhatā
Nibhatā
(f.) [abstr. to nibha] likeness, appearance VvA 27. Nibhā
Nibhā
(f.) [to nibha] shine, lustre, splendour VvA 179 (nibhāti dippatī ti nibhā). Nibhāti
Nibhāti
[ni+bhāti] to shine VvA 179 ( = dippati). Nimajjhima
Nimajjhima
(adj.) the middle one J v.371. Nimantaka
Nimantaka
(adj. -- n.) one who invites Miln 205. -- 367 -- Nimantana
Nimantana
(nt.) [to nimanteti] invitation Vin i.58 = ii.175; D i.166; M i.77; A i.295; J i.116 (ṇ), 412; Pug 55. Nimantanika
Nimantanika
(adj.) inviting; (nt.) N. of a Suttanta M i.331; quoted at Vism 393. Nimantita
Nimantita
[pp. of nimanteti] invited Sn p. 104; PvA 22 (bhattena to the meal), 86 ( = āmantita), 141. Nimanteti
Nimanteti
[Sk. nimantrayati, ni+manteti] to send a message, to call, summon, invite, coax (to = c. instr.) Sn 981 (nimantayi aor., āsanena asked him to sit down); J vi.365; Nd2 342; DhA iii.171 (˚ayiŋsu); DA i.169; VvA 47 (pānīyena invite to a drink); PvA 75, 95. -> pp. nimantita, q. v. -- Cp. abhi˚. Nimitta
Nimitta
(nt.) [cp. Sk. nimitta, to mā, although etym. un- certain] 1. sign, omen, portent, prognostication D i.9 (study of omens = n. satthaŋ DA i.92, q. v. for detailed expln); J i.11 (caturo nimitte nâddasaŋ); Miln 79, 178. Esp. as pubba˚ signs preceding an event, portents, warnings, foreshadowings S v.154, 278, 442; It 76 (cp. Divy 193, of the waning of a god); J i.48, 50 (32 signs before birth, some at DA i.61), 59; Miln 298; Vism 577. -> 2. outward appearance, mark, characteristic, attribute, phenomenon (opp. essence) D iii.249; A i.256; iii.319, 375 sq.; iv.33, 418 sq.; J i.420; Ps i.60, 91 sq., 164, 170; ii.39, 64; Vbh 193 sq. -- Mental reflex, image (with ref. to jhāna) Vism 123, cp. DhsA 167. -- Specified e. g. as foll.: oḷārika S v.259; pasādaniya S v.156; paccavekkhana˚ D iii.278; Vbh 334; bahiddhā -- sankhārā˚ Ps i.66 sq.; bāla˚ (opp. paṇḍita˚) M iii.163; A i.102; mukha˚ (=face) D i.80; S iii.103; v.121; A v.92, 97 sq., 103; rūpa˚, sadda˚ etc. S iii.10; M i.296; Ps i.92, 112; samatha˚ D iii.213; samādhi˚ etc. A i.256 sq.; subha˚ (& asubha˚) S v.64, 103 sq.; A i.3 sq., 87, 200; v.134; Vism 178 sq. nimittaŋ gaṇhāti to make something the object of a thought, to catch up a theme for reflection Vin i.183, cp. S v.150 sq. (˚ŋ uggaṇhāti); M i.119 (=five sorts of mental images); Nd2 659; DhsA 53 (=ākāra). See below n -- gāhin & animitta.-> nimittaŋ parivajjeti to discard the phenomenal S i.188; Sn 341. -- 3. mark, aim: in nimittaŋ karoti to pick out the aim, to mark out J v.436; Nd2 235, 1d; Miln 418. -> 4. sexual organ (cp. lakkhaṇa) Vin iii.129 (n. & a˚, as term of abuse); see also kāṭa & koṭacikā. -- 5. ground, reason, condition, in nimittena (instr.) and nimittaŋ (acc.) as adv.=by means of, on account of DhA iii.175 (instr.) PvA 8, 97 (jāti -- nimittaŋ), 106 (kiŋ n˚ŋ=kissa hetu), 242 (yaŋ n˚ŋ= yato nidānaŋ). gahita -- nimittena "by means of being caught" Vism 144=DhsA 116 (read trsln 154 accordingly!). adj. nimitta ( -- ˚) caused by, referring to PvA 64 (maraṇa -- nimittaŋ rodanaŋ). -- animitta free from marks or attributes, not contaminated by outward signs or appearance, undefiled, ụnaffected, unconditioned (opp. sa˚) S i.188; iv.225 (phassa), 268, 360 (samādhi); M i.296 (cetovimutti); A i.82; iii.292; iv.78; Vin iii.129; Th 1, 92; D iii.219, 249; Dh 92; Sn 342; Ps i.60, 91; ii.36, 59 sq. (vimokha), 65 sq., 99; Dhs 530 (read a˚ for appa˚); Vism 236; DhsA 223 (absence of the 3 lakkhaṇas); Miln 333, 413; DhA ii.172; ThA 50. See also Cpd. 199, 2115. sanimitta S v.213 sq.; A i.82.

-- ânusārin following outward signs ( = ˚gāhin) A iii.292; Nett 25; -- kamma prognostication, prophecy Vin v.172; Vbh 353; -- karaṇa=gāhin S iv.297; -- gāhin "taking signs," enticed or led away by outward signs, entranced with the general appearance, sensuously attracted D i.70 (cp. Dialogues i.80); iii.225; S iv.104, 168; A ii.16; iii.99; v.348; Pug 20, 24, 58; Dhs 1345; Miln 367, 403. Cp. Vism 151, 209. Nimināti
Nimināti
[Sk. niminoti in diff. meaning, the P. meaning being influenced by mā; ni+mināti, mi to fix, measure cp. Sk. nimaya barter, change] to turn round, change; to barter, exchange for (c. instr.): pres. imper. niminā J v.343 ( = parivattehi Com.); pres. 1st pl. nimimhase J ii.369, pot. nimineyya J iii.63; fut. nimissati J v.271, 453 (devatāhi nirayaŋ); aor. nimmini J iii.63; ger. niminitvā Milo 279. Nimisa
Nimisa
[cp. Vedic nimiṣ f. & nimiṣa nt.] winking, shutting the eyes; animisa not winking Dāvs v.26. See also nimesa. Nimisatā
Nimisatā
(f.) [abstr. to nimisati] winking J vi.336 (a˚). Nimisati
Nimisati
[Sk. nimiṣati, ni+misati] to wink D ii.20 (animi- santo, not winking; v. l. BB animm˚; J iii.96 (ummisati+). Cp. nimisatā. Nimīlati
Nimīlati
(& Nimmīlati) [ni+mīlati] to shut, close (the eyes) J i.279; DhA ii.6 (akkhīni nimmīlituŋ nâsakkhi). Caus. nim(m)īl -- eti id. M i.120; DhA ii.28 (paralokaŋ; opp. ummīleti); J i.279; Vism 292 (akkhīni ni˚). Nimugga
Nimugga
(adj.) [cp. Sk, nimagna, pp. of nimujjati] plunged, immersed in, sunk down or fallen into ( -- ˚) (c. loc.) Vin iii.106 (gūthakūpe sasīsakaŋ n.); D i.75; J i.4; iii.393 (gūthakalale), 415; Nd1 26; Pug 71; Miln 262; Sdhp 573. Nimujjā (nimmujjā)
Nimujjā
(nimmujjā) [Sk. *nimajj -- yā] diving, immersion, in cpd. ummujja -- nimujja(ŋ karoti) D i.78. See ummujjā. Nimujjati
Nimujjati
[Sk. nimajjati, ni+mujjati] to sink down, plunge into (with loc.), dive in, be immersed A iv.11; Pug 74; J i.66, 70; iii.163, 393 (kāmakalale); iv.139; aor. nimujji J ii.293; PvA 47 (udake). -- Caus. nimujjeti (so read for nimujjati J v.268) & nimujjāpeti to cause to sink or dive, to drown J -- iii.133; iv.142 (nāvaŋ). -- pp. nimugga q. v. Nimujjana
Nimujjana
(nt.) [Sk. nimajjana] diving, ducking; bathing PvA 47. Nimesa
Nimesa
[ = nimisa, cp. Vedic nimesa] winking Miln 194. Nimokkha
Nimokkha
= vimokkha S i.2 (v. l. SS vi˚, preferable). Nimba
Nimba
[Sk. nimba, non -- Aryan] the Nimb tree (Azadi- rachta Indica), bearing a bitter leaf, & noted for its hard wood Vin i.152 (˚kosa), 284 (id.), 201 (˚kasāva); A i.32; v.212; Vv 3336 (˚muṭṭhi, a handful of N. leaves); J ii.105, 106; DhA i.52 (˚kosa); DhsA 320 (˚paṇṇa, the leaf of the N. as example of tittaka, bitter taste); VvA 142 (˚palāsa); PvA 220 (˚rukkhassa daṇḍena katasūla). Nimmaŋsa
Nimmaŋsa
(adj.) [nis+maŋsa] fleshless M i.58, 364; PvA 68. Nimmakkha
Nimmakkha
(adj.) [nis+makkha, cp. Sk. nirmatsara] without egotism, not false, not slandering Sn 56 (cp. Nd2 356 makkha = niṭṭhuriya; see also SnA 108; paraguṇa -- vināsana -- lakkhaṇo makkho). Nimmakkhika
Nimmakkhika
(adj.) [Sk. nirmakṣika] free from flies J i.262; DhA i.59. Nimmajjana (Nimmiñjana?)
Nimmajjana
(Nimmiñjana?) [*mṛd -- yana? perhaps non- Aryan] a kind of (oil -- ) cake Vv 3338 (nimmajjani = tilapiññāka VvA 147); Pv i.1010 (˚miñjana, v. l. BB ˚majjani); PvA 47 (doṇi˚). Nimmathana
Nimmathana
(nt.) [nis+mathana] crushing J iii.252; Vism 234 (sattu˚); DhA iii.404; VvA 284. Nimmatheti
Nimmatheti
[nis+matheti] to crush out, suppress, destroy J i.340. Cp. abhimatthati. Nimmadana
Nimmadana
(nt.) [to nimmādeti] touching, touch, crushing, subduing A ii.34 (mada -- nimmadana, crushing out pride; may, however, be taken as nis+mada of mad = "de -- priding," lit. disintoxication); Bu i.81; Vism 293. -- 368 -- Nimmadaya
Nimmadaya
(adj.) [Sk. nirmṛdya, grd. of nimmadeti] suppressible D ii.243. Nimmaddana
Nimmaddana
(nt.) [nis+mṛd] touching, crushing Miln 270 (na vāto hattha -- gahaṇaŋ vā nimmaddanaŋ vā upeti: the wind cannot be grasped). Nimmanussa
Nimmanussa
(nt.) [nis+manussa+ya] void of men, absence of men J iii.148. Nimmala
Nimmala
(adj.) [nis+mala] free from impurity, stainless, clean, pure A iv.340; Dh 243; Nd2 586; Vism 58; Sdhp 250. Nimmātapitika
Nimmāta
-- pitika (adj.) [nis+māta -- pitika] one who has neither mother nor father, an orphan DhA ii.72. Nimmātar
Nimmātar
[Sk. nirmātṛ, n. ag. of nimmināti] maker, builder, creator D i.18, 56 (in formula: brahmā . . . kattā nimmātā . . .). Nimmādeti
Nimmādeti
[either = Sk. nirmṛdayati (mṛd) or *nirmādayati to nirmada. free from pride=nirmāna] to crush, subdue, humiliate; insult D i.92 (v. l. ˚maddeti;=DA i.257 nimmadati nimmāne karoti), 93, 96. Nimmāna
Nimmāna1
(nt.) [Sk. nirmāṇa, see nimmināti] measuring; production, creation, work; issara -- n -- hetu caused by God M ii.122; A i.173; Vbh 367. N. -- ratī devā a class of devas, e. g. at D i.218; It 94; Vism 225; DA i.114; ThA 169; VvA 149. Cp. (para -- ) nimmita. Nimmāna
Nimmāna2
(adj.) [Sk. nirmāna, nis+māna] free from pride, humble DA i.257. Nimmāniyati
Nimmāniyati
[Pass. to nimmāna, of nis+māna] to be abased, to be mocked Vin ii.183. Nimmita
Nimmita
(adj. -- pp.) [pp. of nimmināti] measured out, planned, laid out; created (by supernatural power, iddhi); measured, stately D i.18, 56 (iddhiyā pi DA i.167), 219 (Su˚ devaputta. Np.), ibid. (Paranimmitavasavattī devā a class of devas, lit. "created by others," but also possessed of great power: VvA 79, 80); also one of the 5, or the 3 spheres (kāmûpapattiyo) in the kāmaloka, viz. paccupaṭṭhita -- kāmā, nimmānarati˚ (or nimmita˚), paranimmita˚. It 94; Dhs 1280 (cp. kāma); D iii.218; J i.59, 146 (kāyo n' eva deva˚ na brahma˚), 232, Nd2 202a, also under pucchā; P ii.119 (su˚, well constructed, i. e. symmetrical); Vism 228 (Mārena nimmitaŋ Buddharūpaŋ); VvA 36 ( = mitaŋ gacchati vāraṇo), 79; ThA 69, 70; Miln 1, 242. See also abhinimmita. Nimmināti
Nimmināti
[cp. Sk. nirmimīti & nirmāti, nis+mināti, mā; cp. nimināti] to measure out, fashion, build, construct, form; make by miracle, create, compose; produce, lay out, plan, aor. nimmini J i.232; PvA 245; DhA iv.67; ger nimminitvā J i.32; VvA 80, & nimmāya Vv 163. -- pp. nimmita See also nimmātar and nimmāna. Cp. abhi˚. Nimmīleti
Nimmīleti
see nimīlati. Nimmūla
Nimmūla
(adj.) [nis+mūla] without root, rootless J vi.177. Nimmoka
Nimmoka
[Sk. nirmoka fr. nis+moceti] the slough or cast- off skin of a snake PvA 63. Niya
Niya
(adj.) [Sk. nija, q. v.] one's own Sn 149 (˚putta = orasaputta KhA 248); niyassakamma at A i.99 & Pv iv.113 (v. l. Minayeff tiyassa) is to be read as nissayakamma (q. v.). Niyaka
Niyaka
(adj.) [ = niya] one's own Th 2, 469; ThA 284; DhsA 169, 337; DA i.183; Vbh 2; Vism 349. Niyata
Niyata
(adj.) [pp. of ni+yam] restrained, bound to, con- strained to, sure (as to the future), fixed (in its consequences), certain, assured, necessary D ii.92 (sambodhiparāyanā), 155; iii.107; Sn 70 ( = ariyamaggena niyāmappatta SnA 124, cp. Nd2 357); Dh 142 (=catumagga-> niyamena n. DhA iii.83); J i.44 (bodhiyā); Pug 13, 16, 63; Kvu 609 sq.; Dhs 1028 sq. (micchatta˚ etc.; cp. Dhs. trsl. 266, 267), 1414, 1595; Vbh 17, 24, 63, 319, 324; Miln 193; Tikp 168 (˚micchādiṭṭhi); DhA iii.170; PvA 211. Discussed in Pts. of Contr. (see Index). -> aniyata see separately. Niyati
Niyati
(f.) [cp. Sk. niyati, ni+yam] necessity, fate, destiny D i.53; DA i.161; VvA 341; PvA 254. Niyama
Niyama
[cp. Sk. niyama, ni+yam; often confused with niyāma] 1. restraint, constraint, training, self -- control Miln 116 (yama+); PvA 98 (yama+). -- 2. definiteness, certainty, limitation DhA iii.83 (catumagga˚, v. l. niyāma); SnA 124 (niyāma); DhsA 154; PvA 166 (ayaŋ n. saŋsāren' atthi: law, necessity). -- aniyama indefiniteness, choice, generality DhsA 57; VvA 16 (yaŋ kiñci = aniyame, i. e. in a general sense), 17 (same of ye keci); PvA 175 (vā saddo aniyamattho= indefinite). -- niyamena (instr.) adv. by necessity, necessarily PvA 287; niyamato (abl.) id. DhsA 145, 304 (so read). -> 3. natural law, cosmic order; in Commentarial literature this was fivefold: utu -- , bīja -- , kamma -- , ćitta -- , dhammaDA on D ii.11; Dial. ii.8; DhsA 272; trs. 360. Niyamana
Niyamana
(nt.) [Sk. niyamana, to niyameti] fixing, settling, definition, explanation in detail Miln 352 (lakkha -- n˚ aiming at the target); VvA 22 (visesattha˚); 231, PvA 255 (so read for nigamana?). Niyameti
Niyameti
[cp. Sk. niyamayati, ni+yamati] to tie down, to fix; explain in detail, exemplify PvA 265; Vism 666. -> pp. niyamita see a˚. Niyāteti
Niyāteti
see niyyādeti. Niyāma
Niyāma
[Sk. niyama & niyāma] way, way to an end or aim, esp. to salvation, right way (sammatta˚); method, manner, practice S i.196; iii.225 (sammatta˚); A i.122; Sn 371 (˚dassin = sammatta -- niyāmabhūtassa maggassa dassāvin SnA 365); Nd1 314 (˚avakkanti); Nd2 358 (=cattāro maggā); Ps ii.236 sq. (sammatta˚ okkamati); Pug 13, 15; Vbh 342. -- niyāmena (instr.) adv. in this way, by way of, according to J i.278; iv.139, 414 (suta˚ as he had heard); DhA i.79; ii.9, 21; VvA 4; PvA 260; Kvu trs. 383. -- aniyāmena (see also aniyāmena) without order, aimlessly, at random J v.337. Niyāmaka
Niyāmaka1
(adj.) [either to niyama or niyāma] sure of or in, founded in, or leading to, completed in D i.190 (dhamma -- n. paṭipadā, cp. niyamatā). Niyāmaka
Niyāmaka2
(see niyyāmaka) ship's captain Vism 137 (simile). Niyāmatā
Niyāmatā
(f.) [abstr. to niyāma, influenced in meaning by niyama] state of being settled, certainty, reliance, surety, being fixed in ( -- ˚) S ii.25 (dhamma˚+dhammaṭṭhitatā); A i.286 (id.), J i.113 (saddhammassa n. assurance of . . .); Kvu 586 (accanta˚ final assurance). Niyāmeti
Niyāmeti
[Denom. fr. niyāma or niyama] to restrain, control, govern, guide Miln 378 (nāvaŋ). Niyujjati
Niyujjati
[Pass. of niyuñjati] to be fit for, to be adapted to, to succeed, result, ensue PvA 49 ( = upakappati). Niyutta(ka)
Niyutta(ka)
(adj.) [pp. of niyuñjati] tied to, appointed to (with loc.), commissioned, ordered DhsA 47; PvA 20 (janapade), 124 (dānâdhikāre), 127 (dāne). Niyoga
Niyoga
[ni+yoga] command, order; necessity. abl. niyogā "strictly speaking" Dhs 1417. Niyojeti
Niyojeti
[Caus. of niyuñjati] to urge, incite to (with loc.) Vin ii.303; A iv.32; Pv ii.14; Miln 229. Niyyati = Nīyati
Niyyati
= Nīyati (Pass. of nayati). Niyyatta
Niyyatta
(nt.) [cp. Sk. niryaṇa] escape J i.215. -- 369 -- Niyyāta
Niyyāta
(pp.) = niyyādita M i.360. Niyyātana
Niyyātana
(nt.) [fr. niyyāti] returning, return to ( -- ˚) J v.497 (saka -- raṭṭha˚); Vism 556; DA i.234. Niyyātar
Niyyātar
[n. ag. to niyyāma] a guide, leader M i.523 sq. Niyyāti
Niyyāti
[Sk. niryāti, nis+yāti] to go out, get out (esp. of saŋsāra); S v.6 (niyyanti dhīrā lokamhā); SnA 212; aor. niyyāsi D i.49, 108; J i.263; Sn 417; 3rd pl. niyyiŋsu A v.195; fut. niyyassati A v.194. -- See also niyyāna & niyyānika. Niyyādita
Niyyādita
[pp. of niyyādeti] assigned, presented, given, dedicated PvA 196 (dhana nī˚). As niyyātita at Vism 115. Niyyādeti
Niyyādeti
(niyyāteti, nīyādeti) [cp. Sk. ni -- or nir -- yātayati, Caus. of ni (r)yatati] to give (back), give into charge, give over, assign, dedicate, to present, denote S i.131 (niyyātayāmi); iv.181 (sāmikānaŋ gāvo), 194; J i.30, 66, 496; ii.106, 133; Vv 468 niyyādesi = sampaṭicchāpesi, adāsi VvA 199); Pv iii.211 (niyātayiŋsu=adaŋsu PvA 184); Vism 115 (t); DhA i.70; ii.87; VvA 33, 67; PvA 20 (vihāraŋ nīyādetvā), 25 (=uddissati dadāti), 42, 81, 276 (at all PvA passages as nī˚). -- pp. niyyādita. Cp. similarly paṭiyādeti & paṭiyādita. Niyyāna
Niyyāna
(nt.) [nis+yāna, cp. niyyāti] 1. going out, depar- ture D i.9 ( = niggamana DA i.94). -- 2. way out, release, deliverance Sn 170, 172 ("magga -- saccaŋ bhāvento lokamhā niyyāti" SnA 212); Ps i.163, 176; Nett 119. Cp. niyyānika. -- aniyyāna DhA ii.209. Niyyānika
Niyyānika
(adj.) [to niyyāna] leading out (of saŋsāra), leading to salvation, salutary, sanctifying, saving, profitable D i.235, 237; S i.220; v.82, 166, 255, 379 sq.; J i.48 (a˚), 106; Dhs 277, 339, 505 (cp. Dhs. trsl. pp. 82, 335); Vbh 12, 19, 56, 319, 324; Nett 29, 31, 63, 83; DhA iv.87. -- Also found in spelling nīyānika e. g. A iii.132 (ariyā diṭṭhi n. nīyāti takkarassa sammādukkha -- khayāya); DA i.89 (anīyānikattā tiracchanabhūtā kathā). Niyyāma(ka)
Niyyāma(ka)
[Sk. niyāmaka & niryāma(ka). Cp. also P. niyāmaka] a pilot, helmsman, master mariner, guide J i.107 (thala˚); iv.137, 138; Miln 194, 378 sq.; Dāvs iv.42. Niyyāsa
Niyyāsa
[cp. Sk. niryāsa, Halāyudha 5, 75] any exudation (of plants or trees), as gum, resin, juice, etc. Vism 74 (˚rukkha, one of the 8 kinds of trees), 360 (paggharitan. -- rukkha). Cp. nivāyāsa. Niyyūha
Niyyūha
[Sk. niryūha (& nirvyūha?), perhaps to vah] a pinnacle, turret, gate M i.253; DA i.284 (pāsāda+). Nirankaroti
Nirankaroti
(& nirākaroti) [Sk. nirākaroti, nis+ā kṛ] to think little of, despise, neglect, disregard, repudiate; throw away, ruin, destroy Th 1, 478; It 83 (nirākare); J iii.280 = v.498; iv.302; Pv iii.96 (=chaḍḍeti pajahati PvA 211); VvA 109. -- pp. (a)nirākata It 39. Niraggala
Niraggala
(niraggaḷa) (adj.) [nis+aggala] unobstructed, free, rich in result S i.76 = It 21; A ii.43; iv.151; M i.139; Sn 303; Nd2 284 Ca; Vv 6431 (=VvA 285). Niraggika
Niraggika
(adj.) [nis+aggi+ka] without fire Miln 324 (˚okāsa). Nirajjati
Nirajjati
[Pass. of nirajati, nis+ajati, Vedic nirajati to drive out cattle] to be thrown out, to be expelled, to lose (with abl.) J vi.502, 503 (raṭṭhā); v. l. BB nirajhati; Com. ni(g)gacchati; Th 2, 93 (aor. nirajji 'haŋ = na jānim ahaŋ ThA, 90. Kern (wrongly) proposes reading virajjhi). Nirata
Nirata
(adj.) [pp. of niramati] fond of, attached to ( -- ˚) S i.133; DA i.250; PvA 5 (duccarita˚), 89, 161 (hitakaraṇa˚). Niratta
Niratta1
(adj. -- nt.) [Sk. *nirātman, nis+attan] soulless; view of soullessness or unsubstantiality; thus interpreted (in preference to niratta2) by Com. on Sn 787, 858, 919. See foll. Niratta
Niratta2
(adj.) [Sk. nirasta, pp. of nirasyati, see nirassati] rejected, thrown off, given up Sn 1098; Nd2 359. -> Note. At Sn 787, 858, 919 the interpretation of Nd1 82 = 248=352 and also Bdhgh assume a cpd. of nis+attan (= nirātman): see niratta1. Nirattha
Nirattha
(adj.) [nis+attha] useless, groundless, unpro- ficient, vain (opp. sāttha profitable) Sn 582 (nt. as adv.), 585 (niratthā paridevanā); Dh 41; J iii.26; PvA 18 (˚bhāva uselessness), 83 ( = duḥ). Niratthaka
Niratthaka
(adj.) = nirattha; VvA 324; PvA 18, 40, 63, 102 etc. -- f. ˚ikā ThA 258; Miln 20; Sdhp 68. Nirantara
Nirantara
(adj.) [nis+antara] having no interval, con- tinuous, uninterrupted PvA 135. Usually in nt. as adv. nirantaraŋ always, incessantly, constantly; immediately, at once DhsA 168; PvA 52, 80, 107, 110 ( = satataŋ), 120; DhA i.13. Niraparādha
Niraparādha
(adj.) [nis+aparādha] without offence, guilt- less, innocent J i.264. Nirapekkha
Nirapekkha
(adj.) [nis+apa+īkṣ] not heeding, unsus- pecting, disregarding, indifferent, reckless VvA 27, 47 (jīvitaŋ); PvA 62; DA i.177; Miln 343 (jīvitaŋ). Nirabbuda
Nirabbuda1
(m. nt.) [cp. BSk. nirarbuda & abbuda 3] a vast number; also N. of a hell S i.149 = A ii.3=v.171 (expld at 173 as "seyyathā pi vīsati abbudā nirayā evam eko nirabbudo nirayo"); J iii.360 (Com.: vīsati abbudāni ekaŋ nirabbudaŋ). Nirabbuda
Nirabbuda2
(adj.) [nis+abbuda2] free from boils or tumours, healthy (also fig.) Vin iii.18 (of the Sangha). Niraya
Niraya
[BSk. niraya, nis+aya of i = to go asunder, to go to destruction, to die, cp. in meaning Vedic nirṛti. The popular etym. given by Dhammapāla at PvA 53 is "n' atthi ettha ayo sukhan ti"=there is no good; that given by Bdhgh at Vism 427 "n' atthi ettha assādasaññito ayo" (no refreshment)] purgatory, hell, a place of punishment & torture, where sin is atoned (i. e. kamma ripens=paccati, is literally boiled) by terrible ordeals (kāraṇāni) similar to & partly identical with those of Hades & Tartarus. There are a great number of hells, of which the most fearful is the Avīcimahāniraya (see Avīci). Names of other purgatories occur frequently in the Jātaka collection, e. g. Kākola vi.247; Khuradhāra v.269 sq.; Dhūma -- roruva v.271; Patāpana v.266, 271, 453; Paduma iv.245; Roruva iii.299; v.266; vi.237; Sanghāta v.266; Sañjīva ibid.; Sataporisa v.269; Sattisūla v.143. As the principal one n. is often mentioned with the other apāyas (states of suffering), viz. tiracchānayoni (animal world) & pittivisaya (the manes), e. g. at Nd1 489; Nd2 517, 550; Pv iv.11; ThA 282; PvA 27 sq. (see apāya). -- There is a great variety of qualifying adjectives connected with niraya, all of which abound in notions of fearful pain, awful misery & continuous suffering, e. g. kaṭuka, ghora, dāruṇa, bhayānaka, mahābhitāpa, sattussada etc. -- Descriptions of N. in glowing terms of frightfulness are freq. found from the earliest books down to the late Peta -- Vatthu, Pañcagati -- dīpana & Saddhammopāyana. Of these the foll. may be quoted as characteristic: S i.152 (10 nirayas); M iii.183; A i.141; Sn p. 126=A v.173; Nd1 404 sq.=Nd2 304iii.c; J iv.4 (Mittavindaka); Vv 52 (Revatī); Pv i.10; iii.10; iv.1; 7; DhA i.148. -- See on the whole subject, esp. L. Scherman, Materialen zur indischen Visionsliteratur, Leipzig 1792; & W. Stede, Die Gespenstergeschichten des Peta Vatthu, Leipzig 1914, pp. 33 -- 39. -- References: Vin i.227 (apāya duggati vinipāta niraya); D i.82, 107 (id.); Vin ii.198 (yo kho sanghaŋ bhindati kappaŋ nirayamhi paccati), 204; ii.203=It 86; D i.228 (+tiracchānayoni), 54 (read nirayasate for niriyasate); iii.111; S iv.126; v.356, 450; M i.73, 285, 308, 334; ii.86, 149, 186; iii.166, 203, 209; A iv.405; v.76, 182, 184; Sn 248 (patanti sattā nirayaŋ avaŋsirā), 333, 660 sq., 677 sq.; Dh 126, 140, 306, 311, 315; Th 1, 304 (adhammo nirayaŋ neti dhammo pāpeti suggatiŋ)=DhsA 38=DA i.99 =DhA i.22; Th 2, 456; It 12; J iv.463; Pug 60; Ps i.83 (Avīci˚); Vbh 86, 337; Vism 102; Miln 148; DhA i.22; iii.71; Sdhp 7, 285. -- See also nerayika.

-- gāmin (adj.) leading to purgatory (magga) Sn 277; -- dukkha the pain of H. Sn 531; -- pāla a guardian of P., a devil A i.138, 141; M iii.179; Nd1 404; VvA 226. Names of guardians (after their complexion) e. g. Kāḷa (black) & Upakāḷa (blackish) J vi.248. -- bhaya the fear of P. J i.168; Vism 392; -- saŋvattanika conducive to P. Nd1 489. -- 370 -- Niravasesa
Niravasesa
(adj.) [nis+avasesa] without remainder, com- plete, inclusive Nett 14, 15, cp. Miln 91, 182. Nirasana
Nirasana
(adj.) [nis+asana2] without food or subsistence, poor J iv.128. Nirassati
Nirassati
[cp. Sk. nirasyati, nis+assati, as to throw] to throw off, despise, neglect Sn 785, 954; Nd1 76 (so read for nidassati, v. l. SS nir˚), 444; SnA 522. -- pp. niratta2. Nirassāda
Nirassāda
(adj.) [nis+assāda] without taste, insipid, dull Vism 135. Cp. nirāsāda. Nirākaroti
Nirākaroti
see nirankaroti. Nirākula
Nirākula
(adj.) [nis+ākula] unconfused, clear, calm, un- disturbed J i.17 (v. 94). Nirātanka
Nirātanka
(adj.) [nis+ātanka] healthy Miln 251 (of paddy). Nirādīnava
Nirādīnava
(adj.) [nis+ādīnava] not beset with dangers, not in danger, unimperilled Vin iii.19. Nirāma
Nirāma
(adj.) [nis+āma, cp. nirāmaya] healthy, unde- praved, without sin, virtuous Sn 251, 252 (˚gandha = nikkilesayoga SnA 293), 717 (id.=nikkilesa SnA 499). Nirāmaya
Nirāmaya
(adj.) [nis+āmaya] not ill, healthy, good, without fault PvA 164. Nirāmisa
Nirāmisa
(adj.) [nis+āmisa] having no meat or prey; free from sensual desires, disinterested, not material S i.35, 60; iv.219, 235; v.68, 332; A iii.412; D iii.278; Vbh 195; Vism 71; Sdhp 475, 477. Nirārambha
Nirārambha
(adj.) [nis+ārambha] without objects (for the purpose of sacrificing), i. e. without the killing of animals (of yañña) S i.76; A ii.42 sq. Nirālamba
Nirālamba
(adj.) [nis+ālamba] unsupported Miln 295 (ākāsa). Nirālaya
Nirālaya
(adj.) [nis+ālaya] houseless, homeless Miln 244 ( = aniketa). At DhA iv.31 as expln of appossukka. -> f. abstr. nirālayatā homelessness Miln 162, 276, 420. Nirāsa
Nirāsa
(adj.) [nis+āsā] not hungry, not longing for any- thing, desireless S i.12, 23, 141; A i.107 sq.; Sn 1048 (anigha+), 1078 (id.); Nd2 360; Pug 27; Pv iv.133 ( = nittaṇha PvA 230). See also amama. Nirāsaŋsa
Nirāsaŋsa
(adj.) [nis+āsaŋsa, śaŋs] without wishes, ex- pectations or desires, desireless Sn 1090 (Nd2 reading for nirāsaya); Nd2 361 (cp. DhA iv.185 nirāsāsa = *nirāsaŋsa, v. l. for nirāsaya). Nirāsanka
Nirāsanka
(adj.) [nis+āsankā] without apprehension, unsuspicious, not doubting J i.264; Vism 180. Nirāsankatā
Nirāsankatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. nirāsanka] the not hesitating J vi.337. Nirāsattin
Nirāsattin
(adj.) [adj. to pp. āsatta1 with nis] not hanging on to, not clinging or attached to (c. loc.) Sn 851 ( = nittaṇha SnA 549); Nd1 221. Nirāsaya
Nirāsaya
(adj.) [nis+āsaya, fr. śri] without (outward) support, not relying on (outward) things, without (sinful) inclinations Sn 56 (: Nd2 360 b reads nirāsasa), 369, 634, 1090 (Nd2 361 reads nirāsaŋsa); Dh 410; DhA iv.185 (v. l. BB nirāsāsa; expld by nittaṇha). Nirāsava
Nirāsava
(adj.) [nis+āsava] without intoxication, un- defiled, sinless ThA 148. Nirāsāda
Nirāsāda
(adj.) [nis+assāda] tasteless, yielding no enjoy- ment Th 1, 710. Cp. nirassāda. Nirāhāra
Nirāhāra
(adj.) [nis+āhāra] without food, not eating, fasting J iv.225; Sdhp 389. Niriñjana
Niriñjana
(adj.) [nis+iñjanā, fr. iñjati] not moving, stable, unshaken Vism 377 ( = acala, āneñja). Nirindhana
Nirindhana
(adj.) [nis+indhana] without fuel (of fire), ThA 148 (aggi); DhA i.44 (jātaveda). Nirīha(ka)
Nirīha(ka)
(adj.) [nis+īha] inactive, motionless, without impulse ThA 148 (˚ka); Miln 413 (+nijjīvata); Vism 484, 594 sq. Nirujjhati
Nirujjhati
[Pass. of nirundhati (nirodhati) ni+rundhati] to be broken up, to be dissolved, to be destroyed, to cease, die Vin i.1; D i.180 sq., 215; ii.157; S iii.93 (aparisesaŋ); iv.36 sq., 60, 98, 184 sq.; 294, 402; v.213 sq.; A iii.165 sq. (aparisesaŋ); v.139 sq.; J i.180; Pug 64; Sdhp 606. -- pp. niruddha. Cp. nirodha. Niruttara
Niruttara
(adj.) [nis+uttara] making no reply PvA 117. Nirutti
Nirutti
(f.) [Sk. nirukti, nis+vac] one of the Vedāngas (see chaḷanga), expln of words, grammatical analysis, etymological interpretation; pronunciation, dialect, way of speaking, expression Vin ii.139 (pabbajitā . . . sakāya niruttiyā Buddhavacanaŋ dūsenti); D i.202 (loka˚, expression); M iii.237 (janapada˚); S iii.71 (tayo n -- pathā); A ii.160 (˚paṭisambhidā); iii.201; Dh 352 (˚padakovida = niruttiyañ ca sesapadesu cā ti catūsu pi paṭisambhidāsu cheko ti attho DhA iv.70; i. e. skilled in the dialect or the original language of the holy Scriptures); Ps i.88 sq.; ii.150 (˚paṭisambhidā); Nd2 563; Dhs 1307; Nett 4, 8, 33, 105; Miln 22; Vism 441; SnA 358; PvA 97. Nirudaka
Nirudaka
(adj.) [nis+udaka] without water, waterless M i.543; Nd2 630. Niruddha
Niruddha
(pp.) [pp. of nirundhati, cp. nirujjhati] ex- pelled, destroyed; vanished, ceased S iii.112; Dhs 1038. Nirundhati
Nirundhati
see nirujjhati, niruddha, nirodha & nirodheti. Cp. parirundhati. Nirupakāra
Nirupakāra
(adj.) [nis+upakāra] useless J ii.103. Nirupaghāta
Nirupaghāta
(adj.) [nis+upaghāta] not hurt, not injured or set back Miln 130. Nirupatāpa
Nirupatāpa
(adj.) [nis+upatāpa] not harassed (burnt) or afflicted (by pain or harm) Th 2, 512. Nirupaddava
Nirupaddava
(adj.) [nis+upaddava] without affliction or mishap, harmless, secure, happy J iv.139; PvA 262 (sotthi). Nirupadhi
Nirupadhi
(adj.) (in verse always nirūpadhi) [nis+upadhi, cp. upadhīka] free from passions or attachment, desireless, controlled Vin ii.156; S i.194 (vippamutta+); iv.158; A i.80, 138 (sītibhūta+); Dh 418 (id.); Th 1, 1250; 2, 320 (vippamutta+; expld by niddukkha ThA 233); It 46, 50, 58, 62; Sn 33, 34, 642 (sītibhūta+); Pv iv.134; DhA iv.225 ( = nirupakkilesa); PvA 230. -- 371 -- Nirupama
Nirupama
(adj.) [nis+upama] without comparison, in- comparable SnA 455 ( = atitula). Nirumbhati
Nirumbhati
[Sk. ? Trenckner, Notes p. 59 ni+rudh (?)] to suppress, hush, silence J i.62 (text nirumhitvā, v. l. SS nirumbhitvā, cp. san -- nirumhitvā VvA 217). Niruḷha
Niruḷha
(adj.) [cp. Sk. nirūḍha, pp. of niruhati] grown, risen; usual, customary, common VvA 108. Nirussāsa
Nirussāsa
(adj.) [cp. Sk. nirucchvāsa, nis+ussāsa] breath- less J iii.416; iv.121, cp. vi.197; vi.82. Nirussukka
Nirussukka
(adj.) [nis+ussukka], careless, unconcerned, indifferent to (c. loc.) ThA 282. Niroga
Niroga
see nīroga. Niroja
Niroja
(adj.) [nis+oja] tasteless, insipid J ii.304; iii.94; vi.561. Nirodha
Nirodha
[BSk. nirodha, to nirundhati, cp. nirujjhati & niruddha] oppression, suppression; destruction, cessation, annihilation (of senses, consciousness, feeling & being in general: sankhārā). Bdhgh's expln of the word is: "ni -- saddo abhāvaŋ, rodha -- saddo ca cārakaŋ dīpeti Vism 495. -- N. in many cases is synonymous with nibbāna & parinibbāna; it may be said to be even a stronger expression as far as the active destruction of the causes of life is concerned. Therefore frequently combd with nibbāna in formula "sabbasankhāra -- samatho . . . virāgo nirodho nibbānaŋ," e. g. S i.136; It 88. Nd2 s. nibbāna (see nibbāna iii.6). Also in combn with nibbidā, e. g. S iii.48, 223; iii.163 sq.; v.438. -- The opposite of nirodha is samudaya, cp. formula "yaŋ kiñci samudaya -- dhammaŋ sabban taŋ nirodha -- dhammaŋ" e. g. Nd2 under sankhārā & passim. (a) Vin i.1, 10; D ii.33, 41, 57 sq., 112; iii.130 sq., 136 sq., 226 sq.; J i.133; ii.9 sq., 223; iii.59 sq., 163; v.438; M i.140, 263, 410; A i.299; iv.456 ( = āsavānaŋ parikkhaya); Th 2, 6 (=kilesanirodha ThA 13), 158; It 46=Sn 755 (nirodhe ye vimuccanti te janā maccuhāyino); It 62=Sn 754; Sn 731, 1037; Ps i.192; ii.44 sq., 221; Pug 68; Vbh 99 sq., 229; Nett 14, 16 sq.; Vism 372; VvA 63; PvA 220 (jīvitassa). -- (b) (as -- ˚): anupubba˚ D iii.266; A iv.409, 456; abhisaññā˚ D i.180; asesavirāga˚ S ii.4, 12; iv.86; v.421 sq.; A i.177; ii.158, 161; upādāna˚ S iii.14; kāma˚ A iii.410 sq.; jāti˚ S iv.86; taṇhā˚ D iii.216; dukkha˚ D iii.136; S iii.32, 60; iv.4 sq., 14, 384; A i.177; nandi˚ S iii.14; iv.36; bhava˚ (=nibbāna) S ii.117; iii.14; A v.9; Ps i.159; sakkāya˚ D iii.240; S v.410; A ii.165 sq.; iii.246, 325 sq.; v.238 sq.; saññāvedayita˚ D iii.262, 266; S iv.217, 293 sq.; v. 213 sq.; A i.41; iii.192; iv.306; v.209.

-- dhamma subject to destruction, able to be destroyed, destructible (usually in formula of samudaya -- dhamma, see above) Vin i.11; D i.110; S iv.47, 107, 214; M iii.280; A v.143 sq.; -- dhammatā liability to destruction S iv.217; -- dhātu the element or condition of annihilation, one of the 3 dhātus, viz. rūpa, arūpa˚ n˚. D iii.215; It 45; Nett 97; -- saññā perception or consciousness of annihilation D iii.251 sq., 283; A iii.334; -- samāpatti attainment of annihilation Ps i.97, 100; Miln 300; Vism 702. Nirodhika
Nirodhika
(adj.) [fr. nirodha] obstructing, destroying It 82 (paññā˚), cp. M i.115. Nirodheti
Nirodheti
[Denom. fr. nirodha] to oppress, destroy Vism 288 (in expln of passambheti). Nilaya
Nilaya
[fr. ni+lī] a dwelling, habitation, lair, nest J iii.454. Nilicchita
Nilicchita
see nillacchita. Nilīna
Nilīna
(adj.) [pp. of nilāyati] sitting on (c. loc.), perched; hidden, concealed, lying in wait J i.135, 293; iii.26; VvA 230. Nilīyati
Nilīyati
[ni+līyati] to sit down (esp. for the purpose of hiding), to settle, alight; to keep oneself hidden, to lurk, hide J i.222, 292; Miln 257; PvA 178. aor. nilīyi J i.158; iii.26; DhA ii.56; PvA 274. -- pp. nilīna. Caus. II. nilīyāpeti to conceal, hide (trs.) J i.292. Nilīyana
Nilīyana
(nt.) [abstr. fr. nilīyati, cp. Sk. nilayana] hiding J v.103 (˚ṭṭhāna hiding -- place). Nilenaka
Nilenaka
(nt.) [cp. Sk. nilayana, fr. ni+lī] settling place, hiding -- place, refuge J v.102 (so read for nillenaka; expld by nilīyanaṭṭhāna p. 103). Nillacchita
Nillacchita
(adj.) [Sk. *nirlāñchita, nis+lacchita of nillaccheti] castrated Th 2, 440; written as nilicchita at J vi.238 (v. l. BB as gloss niluñcita). expld by "vacchakakāla . . . nibbījako kato, uddhaṭabījo" (p. 239). Nillaccheti
Nillaccheti
[nis+laccheti of lāñch, cp. lakkhaṇa] to deprive of the marks or characteristics (of virility), to castrate Th 2, 437 ( = purisa -- bhāvassa lacchana -- bhūtāni bījakāni nillacchesi nīhari ThA 270). See also nillañchaka & nillacchita. Nillajja
Nillajja
(adj.) [nis+lajjā] shameless Sdhp 382. Ni(l)lañchaka
Ni(l)lañchaka
(adj. -- n.) [cp. Sk. nirlāñchana, of nirlāñcha- yati = nis+laccheti] one who marks cattle, i. e. one who castrates or deprives of virility J iv.364 (spelt tilañchaka in text, but right in v. l.), expld as "tisūlâdi -- ankakaraṇena lañchakā ca lakkhaṇakārakā ti attho" (p. 366). cp. nillacchita. Nillapa
Nillapa
(adj.) [nis+lapa] without deceit, free from slander A ii.26 = It 113. Nillāḷeti & Nilloḷeti
Nillāḷeti
& Nilloḷeti [nis+lul, cp. Sk. laḍayati & loḍayati] to move (the tongue) up & down S i.118; M i.109; DA i.42 (pp. nillāḷita -- jivhā); DhA iv.197 (jivhaŋ nilloleti; v. l. nillāleti & lilāḷeti) = J v.434 (v. l. nillelati for ˚lo˚). Nillekha
Nillekha
(adj.) [nis+lekha] without scratches, without edges (?) Vin ii.123 (of jantāghara). Nillokana
Nillokana
(adj. -- n.) [nis+lokana] watching out; watchful, careful J v.43, 86 (˚sīla). Nilloketi
Nilloketi
[nis+loketi] to watch out, keep guard, watch, observe Vin ii.208. Nillopa
Nillopa
[cp. Sk. nirlopa, nis+lup] plundering, plunder D i.52; A i.154; Nd1 144 (˚ŋ harati); Nd2 1997; Tikp 167, 280; DA i.159. Nillobha
Nillobha
(adj.) [nis+lobha] free from greed J iv.10. Nillolup(p)a
Nillolup(p)a
(adj.) [nis+loluppā] free from greed or desires Sn 56 ( = Nd2 362 nittaṇha); J v.358. Nivatta
Nivatta
(pp.) [pp. of nivattati] returned, turning away from, giving up, being deprived of, being without (˚ -- ) Vin ii.109 (˚bīja); J i.203; VvA 72. Nivattati
Nivattati
[Vedic nivartati, ni+vattati] to turn back, to return (opp. gacchati), to turn away from, to flee, vanish, disappear Vin i.46; D i.118; J i.223; ii.153; iv.142; Sn p. 80; Pv ii.934; iv.107; SnA 374; PvA 74, 161. aor. nivatti J ii.3; PvA 141. pp. nivatta (q. v.). -- Caus. I. nivatteti to lead back, to turn from, to make go back, to convert J i.203; VvA 110; PvA 204 (pāpato from sin). Cp. upa˚, paṭi˚, vi˚. -- Caus. II. nivattāpeti to send back, to return PvA 154. -- 372 -- Nivattana
Nivattana
(nt.) [fr. nivattati] 1. returning, turning, fig. turning away from, giving up, "conversion" PvA 120 (pāpato). -- 2. a bend, curve (of a river), nook J i.324; ii.117, 158; iv.256; v.162. Nivattanīya
Nivattanīya
(adj.) [grd. formation fr. nivattana] only neg. a˚ not liable to return, not returning DhA i.63. Nivatti
Nivatti
(f.) [fr. ni+vṛt] returning, return PvA 189 (gati˚ going & coming). Nivattha
Nivattha
(pp.) [pp. of ni+vasati1] clothed in or with ( -- ˚ or acc.), dressed, covered S i.115; J i.59 (su˚), 307 (sāṭakaŋ); PvA 47, 49 (dibbavattha˚), 50. Nivapati
Nivapati
[ni+vapati] to heap up, sow, throw (food) M i.151 sq. (nivāpaŋ). -- pp. nivutta (q. v.). Nivaraṇa
Nivaraṇa
see vi˚. Nivarati
Nivarati
[ni+varati] only in Caus. nivāreti (q. v.), pp. nivuta. Nivasati
Nivasati
[ni+vasati2] to live, dwell, inhabit, stay Vin ii.11. -- pp. nivuttha, cp. also nivāsana2 & nivāsin. Nivaha
Nivaha
[fr. ni+vah] multitude, quantity, heap Dāvs iv.53; v.14, 24, 62. Nivāta
Nivāta1
(adj.) [Sk. nivāta, ni+vāta "wind -- down"] with the wind gone down, i. e. without wind, sheltered from the wind, protected, safe, secure Vin i.57, 72; M i.76 = A i.137 (kūṭāgāra); A i.101 (id.); It 92 (rahada); Th 1, 1 (kuṭikā); 2, 376 (pāsāda). -- (nt.) a calm (opp. pavāta) Vin ii.79. Nivāta
Nivāta2
[identical with nivāta1, sheltered from the wind = low] lowliness, humbleness, obedience, gentleness M i.125; Sn 265 (=nīcavattana KhA 144); J vi.252; Pv iv.712. Cp. M Vastu ii.423. Freq. in cpd. nivātavutti (id.) A iii.43; Sn 326 (=nīcavutti SnA 333); J iii.262; Miln 90, 207; VvA 347. Nivātaka
Nivātaka
[fr. nivāta1] a sheltered place, a place of escape, opportunity (for hiding) J i.289 = v.435; cp. Miln 205 (where reading is nimantaka, with v. l. nivātaka, see note on p. 426). See Com. on this stanza at J v.437. Nivāpa
Nivāpa
[cp. Sk. nivāpa, ni+vap, cp. nivapati] food thrown (for feeding), fodder, bait; gift, portion, ration M i.151 sq. (Nivāpa -- sutta); J i.150; iii.271; DhA i.233 (share); iii.303; VvA 63 (diguṇaŋ ˚ŋ pacitvā cooking a double portion). Cp. nevāpika.

-- tiṇa grass to eat J i.150; -- puṭṭha fed on grains Dh 325 ( = kuṇḍakâdinā sūkara -- bhattena puṭṭho DhA iv.16=Nett 129=Th 1, 17; -- bhojana a meal on food given, a feeding M i.156). Nivāyāsa
Nivāyāsa
(?) oozing of trees; Bdhgh's expln of ikkāsa at Vin ii.321. See niyyāsa. Nivāraṇa
Nivāraṇa
(nt. & adj.) [fr. nivāreti] warding off, keeping back, preventing; refusal Sn 1034, 1035, 1106 ( = Nd2 363 āvāraṇa rakkhaṇa gopana); DhsA 259; PvA 102, 278; Sdhp 396. Nivāraya
Nivāraya
(adj.) [grd. of nivāreti] in dun˚ hard to check or keep back Miln 21 (+durāvaraṇa). Nivārita
Nivārita
(adj.) [pp. of nivāreti] unobstructed, open PvA 202 ( = anāvaṭa). Nivāretar
Nivāretar
[n. agent to nivāreti] one who holds back or refuses (entrance) (opp. pavesetar) D ii.83 = S iv.194= A v.194 (dovāriko aññātānaŋ nivāretā ñātānam pavesetā). Nivāreti
Nivāreti
[Caus. of nivarati] to keep back, to hold back from (c. abl.), to restrain; to refuse, obstruct, forbid, warn Vin i.46; ii.220; S i.7 (cittaŋ nivāreyya), 14 (yato mano nivāraye); iv.195 (cittaŋ); Dh 77, 116 (pāpā cittaŋ nivāraye); J i.263; Pv iii.74; VvA 69; PvA 79, 102; DhA i.41. Nivāsa
Nivāsa
[fr. nivasati2] stopping, dwelling, resting -- place, abode; living, sheltering J i.115 (˚ŋ kappeti to put up); ii.110; PvA 76, 78. Usually in phrase pubbe -- nivāsaŋ anussarati "to remember one's former abode or place of existence (in a former life)," characterising the faculty of remembering one's former birth D i.13, 15, 16, 81; S i.167, 175, 196; ii.122, 213; v.265, 305; A i.25, 164; ii.183; iii.323, 418 sq.; iv.141 sq.; v.211, 339. Also in pubbenivāsaŋ vedi It 100; Sn 647 = Dh 423; p -- n -- paṭisaŋyuttā dhammikathā D ii.1; p -- n -- anussatiñāṇa D iii.110, 220, 275; A iv.177. Cp. nevāsika. Nivāsana
Nivāsana1
(adj. -- nt.) [fr. nivāseti] dressed, clothed; dressing, clothing, undergarment (opp. pārupana) Vin i.46; ii.228; J i.182 (manāpa˚), 421; iii.82; PvA 50, 74, 76, 173 (pilotikakkhaṇḍa˚ dressed in rags). Nivāsana
Nivāsana2
(nt.) [fr. nivasati2] dwelling, abode PvA 44 (˚ṭṭhāna place of abode), 76 (id.). Nivāsika
Nivāsika
(adj.) [fr. nivāsa] staying, living, dwelling J ii.435 ( = nibaddha -- vasanaka C.). Nivāsin
Nivāsin
(adj. -- n.) [to nivasati] dwelling, staying; (n.) an inhabitant Dāvs v.45. Nivāseti
Nivāseti
[Caus. of nivasati1] to dress oneself, to put on (the undergarment), to get clothed or dressed. Freq. in ster. phrase "pubbaṇhasamayaŋ nivāsetvā patta-cīvaram ādāya . . .," describing the setting out on his round of the bhikkhu; e. g. D i.109, 178, 205, 226. -> Vin i.46; ii.137, 194; D ii.127; J i.265; Pug 56; Pv i.103; PvA 49, 61, 75, 127 (nivāsessati+pārupissati), 147 ( = pārupāmi). -- Caus. II. nivāsāpeti to cause or order to be dressed (with 2 acc.) J i.50; iv.142; DhA i.223. Nivicikicchā
Nivicikicchā
see nibbicikicchā; M i.260. Nivijjha
Nivijjha
see vi˚. Niviṭṭha
Niviṭṭha
(adj.) [pp. of nivisati] settled, established (in); confirmed, sure; fixed on, bent on, devoted to (loc.) Sn 57 ( = satta allīna etc. Nd2 364), 756, 774, 781 (ruciyā), 824 (saccesu), 892; Nd1 38, 65, 162; It 35, 77; J i.89, 259 (adhammasmiŋ); Miln 361; VvA 97 (˚gāma, built, situated); DA i.90 (su˚ & dun˚ of a street=well & badly built or situate). Cp. abhi˚. Nivisati
Nivisati
[ni+visati] to enter, stop, settle down on (loc.), to resort to, establish oneself Vin i.207; J i.309 = iv.217 (yasmiŋ mano nivisati). -- pp. niviṭṭha ger. nivissa (q. v.). Caus. niveseti. Nivissavādin
Nivissa
-- vādin (adj. -- n.) [nivissa (ger. of nivisati)+vādin] "speaking in the manner of being settled or sure," a dogmatist Sn 910, 913, expld at Nd1 326 as "sassato loko idam eva saccaŋ, mogham aññan ti"; at SnA 560 as "jānāmi passāmi tath' eva etan ti." Nivuta
Nivuta
(adj.) [pp. of nivarati (nivāreti) cp. nivārita] sur- rounded, hemmed in, obstructed, enveloped D i.246; S ii.24; iv.127; Sn 348 (tamo˚), 1032, 1082; It 8; Nd2 365 ( = ophuṭa, paṭicchanna, paṭikujjita); Miln 161; SnA 596 (= pariyonaddha). Nivutta
Nivutta1
(pp.) [pp. of ni+vac] called, termed, designated PvA 73 (dasavassa -- satāni, vassa -- sahassaŋ n. hoti). Nivutta
Nivutta2
(pp.) [Sk. *nyupta, pp. of vapati1 to shear] shorn, shaved, trimmed Sn 456 (˚kesa = apagatakesa, ohāritakesamassu SnA 403). Nivutta
Nivutta3
(pp.) [Sk. *nyupta, pp. of vapati2 to sow] sown, thrown (of food), offered, given M i.152; J iii.272. -- 373 -- Nivuttha
Nivuttha
(pp. of nivasati) inhabited; dwelling, living; see san˚. Niveṭha
Niveṭha
in pañhe dunniveṭha at Miln 90 see nibbedha. Niveṭhana
Niveṭhana
see vi˚. Niveṭheti
Niveṭheti
see nibbeṭheti. Nivedaka
Nivedaka
(adj.) [to nivedeti] relating, admonishing J vi.21. Nivedeti
Nivedeti
[ni+vedeti, Caus. of vid.] to communicate, make known, tell, report, announce J i.60, 307; PvA 53, 66 (attānaŋ reveal oneself); Dāvs v 42. Nivesa
Nivesa
[Vedic niveśa, fr. ni+viś] 1. entering, stopping, settling down; house, abode Vv 82 ( = nivesanāni kacchantarāni VvA 50). -- 2.=nivesana 2, in diṭṭhi˚ Sn 785 (=idaŋ -- sacchâbhinivesa -- sankhātāni diṭṭhi -- nivesanāni SnA 522). Nivesana
Nivesana
(nt.) [Vedic niveśana, fr. nivesati, cp. niviṭṭha] 1. entering, entrance, settling; settlement, abode, house, home D i.205, 226; ii.127; J i.294; ii.160 (˚ṭṭhāna); PvA 22, 81, 112. -- 2. (fig.) (also nivesanā f.: Nd2 366) settling on, attachment, clinging to (in diṭṭhi˚ clinging to a view = dogmatism cp. nivissa -- vādin) Sn 1055 (nandi+; =taṇhā Nd2 366); Dh 40 (diṭṭhi˚); Nd1 76, 110. See also nivesa. Nivesita
Nivesita
(adj.) [pp. of nivesati] settled, arranged, designed, built VvA 82 ( = sumāpita). Niveseti
Niveseti
[Caus. of nivesati] to cause to enter, to establish; to found, build, fix, settle; (fig.) to establish in, exhort to (c. loc.), plead for, entreat, admonish D i.206; S v.189; Dh 158, 282 (attānaŋ); It 78 (brahmacariye); Th 2, 391 (manaŋ); J v.99; Pv iii.77 (saŋyame nivesayi); DA i.273 (gāmaŋ); PvA 206. Nivyaggha
Nivyaggha
(adj.) [nis+vyaggha] free from tigers J ii.358 (v. l. nibbyaggha). Nisagga
Nisagga
(& Nissagga) [ni or nis+sṛj] giving forth, bestowing; natural state, nature S i.54 (˚ss˚). Cp. nisaṭṭha. Nisankhiti
Nisankhiti
(f.) [Sk. ni -- saŋskṛti, ni+saŋ+kṛ] deposit (of merit or demerit), accumulation, effect (of kamma) Sn 953 ( = Nd1 442 abhisankhārā). Nisajjā
Nisajjā
(f.) [Sk. *niṣadyā of ni sad] sitting down, oppor- tunity for sitting, seat Pv iv.12 (seyyā+); J i.217; PvA 24 (˚ādipaṭikkhepa -- ṭṭhāna), 219 (pallankâbhujanādi -- lakkhaṇā nisajjā). Cp. nesajjika. Nisajjeti
Nisajjeti
[sic MSS. for niss˚; Sk. niḥsarjayati, nis+sajjeti, Caus. of sṛj] to spend, bestow, give, give up PvA 105 (dānûpakaraṇā nisajjesi read better as ˚karaṇǡni sajjesi). See also nissajjati. Nisaṭṭha
Nisaṭṭha
(pp.) [nis+saṭṭha of sṛj] given up, spent, lost Th 2, 484 (v. l. ˚ss˚); ThA 286 ( = pariccatta). Cp. nisajjeti & nisagga. Nisada & Nisadā
Nisada
& Nisadā (f.) [Sk. dṛṣad f.; for n: d cp. P. nijjuha = Sk. dātyūha etc.] a grindstone, esp. the understone of a millstone Vin i.201; (˚pota id.); Miln 149; Vism 252 (˚pota, where KhA at id. p. reads ˚putta). Cp. ā˚. Nisanti
Nisanti
(f.) [Sk. *niśānti, ni+śam] careful attention or observation A ii.97; iii.201; iv.15 (dhamma˚), 36 (id.), 296; v.166 (dhamma˚); Dpvs i.53 (˚kāra). Cp. nisamma & nisāmeti. Nisabha
Nisabha
[Sk. nṛ+ṛṣabha, cp. usabha. On relation of usabha: vasabha: nisabha see SnA 40] "bull among men," i. e. prince, leader; "princeps," best of men; Ep. of the Buddha S i.28, 48, 91; M i.386; J v.70; vi.526; Vv 167 (isi˚), cp. VvA 83 for expln; Vv 637 (isi˚ = ājānīya VvA 262). Nisamma
Nisamma
(adv.) [orig. ger. of nisāmeti, Sk. niśamya, śam] carefully, considerately, observing Sn 54; Nd2 367 = 481 b (=sutvā). Esp. in phrase n. -- kārin acting considerately Dh 24 (=DhA i.238); J iii.106; vi.375; Miln 3; cp. n. kiriyāya Miln 59. Cp. nisanti. Nisā
Nisā
(f.) [Sk. niś & niśā, prob. with niśītha (midnight) to ni+śi = lying down] night Vv 352 (loc. nise); VvA 161 (loc. nisati, v. l. nisi=rattiyaŋ); Miln 388 (loc. nisāya); Dāvs ii.6; v.2 (nisāyaŋ). See also nisītha. Nisātaka
Nisātaka
in koka˚ J vi.538, a certain wild animal; the meaning is not clear, etymologically it is to be derived fr. Sk. niśātayati to strike, to fell. See Kern, Toev. 1. p. 152, s. v. koka. The v. l. is ˚nisādaka, evidently influenced by nisāda. Nisāda
Nisāda
[cp. Sk. niṣāda, a Non -- Aryan or barbarian] a robber J iv.364. Cp. nesāda. Nisādana
Nisādana
[ = ni+śātana] grinding DhA i.308. Nisādika
Nisādika
(adj.) [cp. Sk. niṣādin, ni+sad] fit for lying down, suitable for resting Vin i.239 (go˚). Nisādin
Nisādin
(adj.) [fr. ni+sad] lying down D iii.44, 47. Nisāna
Nisāna
[ni+śā to sharpen, to whet, cp. nisita] a hone on which to sharpen a knife Miln 282. Nisāmaka
Nisāmaka
(adj.) [cp. Sk. niśāmana] observant, listening to, attending to, careful of A v.166, 168 (dhammānaŋ). Nisāmeti
Nisāmeti
[ni+sāmeti] to attend to, listen to, observe, be careful of, mind J iv.29 (anisāmetvā by not being careful); v.486; DhA i.239 (+upadhāneti); PvA 1 (imper. nisāmayatha). Cp. nisanti, nisamma. Nisāra
Nisāra
(adj. -- n.) [ni+sāra] full of sap, excellent, strong (of a tree) Vv 631 ( = niratisaya sārassa nisiṭṭhasārassa rukkhassa VvA 261). Nisiñcati
Nisiñcati
[ni+siñcati] to besprinkle Mhvs vii.8. Nisita
Nisita
(adj.) [Sk. niśita, ni+pp. of śā to whet] sharp M i.281 (āvudhajāta pīta˚?); J iv.118 (su˚); VvA 233; PvA 155, 192, 213. Nisinna
Nisinna
(adj.) [Sk. niṣanna, pp. of nisīdati] sitting down, seated J i.50, 255; iii.126; KhA 250; PvA 11, 16, 39 & passim. -- Often combd & contrasted with tiṭṭhaŋ (standing), caraŋ (walking) & sayaŋ (sayāna; lying down), e. g. at Sn 151, 193; It 82. Nisinnaka
Nisinnaka
(adj.) = nisinna; M i.333; J i.163; DhA iii.175. Nisītha
Nisītha
[Sk. niśītha, see nisā] midnight, night Th 1, 3 (aggi yathā pajjalito nisīthe; v. l. BB nisive), 524 (v. l. nisive); J iv.432; v.330, 331 (v. l. BB nisive), 506 ( = rattibhāga Com.). Nisīdati
Nisīdati
[Sk. niṣīdati, ni+sīdati] to sit down, to be seated, to sit, to dwell Nd2 433; J iii.392; vi.367; Pv ii.93 (nisīdeyya Pot.); PvA 74. aor. nisīdi Vin i.1; J ii.153; PvA 5, 23, 44; 3rd pl. nisīdiŋsu (J i.307) & nisīdisuŋ (Mhvs vii.40); ger. nisīditvā (J ii.160; PvA 5, 74), nisajja D ii.127) and nisīditvāna (Sn 1031); grd. nisīditabba Vin i.47. pp. nisinna (q. v.). -- Caus. II. nisīdāpeti [cp. Sk. niṣādayati] to cause to sit down, to make one be seated, to invite to a seat J iii.392; vi.367; PvA 17, 35 (there āsane); Miln 20. Cp. abhi˚, san˚. Nisīdana
Nisīdana
(nt.) [Sk. niṣadana, fr. nisīdati] sitting down, occasion or opportunity to sit, a mat to sit on Vin i.295; ii.123 (˚ena vippavasati); S v.259 (˚ŋ gaṇhāti). ˚paccattharaṇa a mat for sitting on Vin i.47, 295; ii.209, 218. Nisumbhati
Nisumbhati
[ni+sumbh (subhnāti)] to knock down Th 2, 302 ( = pāteti ThA 227). Nisūdana
Nisūdana
(nt.) [ni+sūd] destroying, slaughtering Miln 242. -- 374 -- Nisedha
Nisedha
(adj. -- n.) [fr. ni+sedh] holding back, restraining; prevention, prohibition Dh 389; DhA iv.148; hirī˚ restrained by shame S i.168 = Sn 462; Dh 143. Nisedhaka
Nisedhaka
(adj.) [fr. nisedha] prohibiting, restraining; one who prohibits, an obstructer J ii.220. Nisedhanatā
Nisedhanatā
(f.) [abstr. to nisedheti] refusing, refusal, prohibition Miln 180 (a˚). Nisedheti
Nisedheti
[Caus. of ni+sedh] to keep off, restrain, prohibit, prevent S i.121 (nisedha, imper.); J iii.83, 442; ThA 250; VvA 105 (nirayûpapattiŋ). -- Cp. nisedha. Nisevati
Nisevati
[ni+sev] to resort to, practise, pursue, follow, indulge in J ii.106; Sn 821 ( = Nd1 157); Pv ii.319 (=karoti PvA 87); Miln 359. -- pp. nisevita. Nisevana
Nisevana
(nt. also -- ā f.) [Sk. niṣevana, cp. nisevati] prac- tising, enjoying; pursuit Pug 20, 24; Sdhp 406. Nisevita
Nisevita
(adj.) [pp. of nisevati] frequented, practised, en- joyed, indulged in M i.178; Sdhp 373. Nissaŋsaya
Nissaŋsaya
(adj.) [nis+saŋsaya] having no doubt, free from doubt Miln 237. -- acc. as adv. without doubt, undoubtedly Pv iv.81; DhA i.106; PvA 95. Nissakka
Nissakka
[fr. nis+sakkati = sakk] "going out from," ttg. a name of the ablative case J v.498; VvA 152, 154, 180, 311; PvA 147, 221. Nissakkana
Nissakkana
(nt.) [Sk. *niḥsarpana, nis+sakk, confused with sṛp, see Trenckner, Notes p. 60 & cp. apassakkati, o˚, pari˚] going out, creeping out; only in biḷāra˚ at D ii.83 (v. l. BB as gloss nikkhamana)+S iv.194 = A v.195. Nissaggiya
Nissaggiya
(adj.) [Sk. *niḥsārgya grd. of nis+sajjeti, not = Sk. naisargika] to be given up, what ought to be rejected or abandoned Vin i.196, 254; iii.195 sq. Nissanga
Nissanga
(adj.) [nis+sanga] unattached, unobstructed, disinterested, unselfish Sdhp 371, 398, 411 etc.; Tikp 10; f. abstr. ˚tā disinterestedness J i.46. Nissajjati
Nissajjati
[nis+sajjati, sṛj. See also nisajjeti] to let loose, give up, hand over, give, pour out Vin ii.188; ger. nissajja [Sk. niḥsṛjya] Sn 839 (v. l. nisajja); Nd1 189 (id.); SnA 545. pp. nisaṭṭha & nissaṭṭha (q. v.). Cp. nissaggiya & paṭi˚. Nissaṭa
Nissaṭa
(adj.) [pp. of nis+sarati, sṛ] flown or come out from, appeared; let loose, free, escaped from S iii.31; iv.11 sq.; A i.260; iv.430 (a˚); v.151 sq.; J iii.530; vi.269; Nd2 under nissita; Ps ii.10 sq.; Miln 95, 225 (bhava˚). See also nissaraṇa. Cp. abhi˚. Nissaṭṭha
Nissaṭṭha
(adj.) [pp. of nissajjati] dismissed, given up, left, granted, handed over, given Vin iii.197 (˚cīvara); M i.295; ii.203; VvA 341. See also nisaṭṭha & paṭi˚. Nissatta
Nissatta
(adj.) [Sk. *niḥsattva, nis+satta] powerless, unsubstantial; f. abstr. ˚tā absence of essence, unsubstantiality (see dhamma A) DhsA 38, 139, 263; cp. Dhs. trsl. pp. xxxiii. & 26. Nissadda
Nissadda
(adj.) [nis+sadda] noiseless, soundless, silent J i.17 (v.94); DhA iii.173. Nissantāpa
Nissantāpa
(adj.) [nis+santāpa] without grief or self- mortification PvA 62. Nissanda
Nissanda
[Sk. nisyanda & niṣyanda, ni+syand (syad), see sandati] flowing or trickling down; discharge, dropping, issue; result, outcome, esp. effect of Kamma A iii.32; J i.31, 205, 426 (sarīra˚); DhA i.395; ii.36, 86; VvA 14 (puñña -- kammassa n -- phala); PvA 47 (puññakammassa), 58 (id.); Miln 20. 117; Pgdp 102. Nissama
Nissama
[ni+sama] exertion, endeavour J v.243. Nissaya
Nissaya
[Sk. niśraya, of ni+śri, corresp. in meaning to Sk. āśraya] that on which anything depends, support, help, protection; endowment, resource, requisite, supply; foundation, reliance on (acc. or -- ˚) Vin i.58 (the four resources of bhikkhu, viz. piṇḍiyālopa -- bhojanaŋ, paŋsukūla -- cīvaraŋ, rukkhamūla -- senāsanaŋ, pūtimuttabhesajjaŋ); ii.274, 278; D iii.137, 141; A i.117; iii.271; iv.353; v.73; Sn 753, 877; Nd1 108 (two n.: taṇhā˚ & diṭṭhi˚), 190, cp. Nd2 s. v.; Nd2 397A (the requisites of a bhikkhu in diff. enumeration); Ps ii.49 sq., 58 sq., 73 sq.; ii.220; Nett 7, 65; Vism 12, 535. nissayaŋ karoti to rely on, to be founded on to take one's stand in Sn 800. -- Cp. nissāya & nissita.

-- kamma giving assistance or help, an (ecclesiastical) act of help or protection Vin i.49, 143, 325; ii.226; A i.99; Pv iv.11 (so to be read at the 2 latter passages for niyassa˚). -- sampanna finding one's strength in A iv.353. Nissayatā
Nissayatā
(f.) [abstr. to nissaya] dependence, requirement, resource Sn 856; Nd1 245. Nissayati
Nissayati
[Sk. niśrayati, but in meaning = āśrayati, ni+ śri] to lean on, a foundation on, rely on, trust, pursue, Sn 798 (sīlabbataŋ; SnA 530= abhinivisati); VvA 83 (katapuññaŋ). Pass. nissīyati VvA 83. pp. nissita; ger. nissāya (q. v.). Nissaraṇa
Nissaraṇa
(nt.) [Sk. niḥsaraṇa, to nis+sarati, cp. BSk. nissaraṇa giving up (?) AvŚ ii.193] going out, departure; issue, outcome, result; giving up, leaving behind, being freed, escape (fr. saŋsāra), salvation Vin i.104; D iii.240, 248 sq.; S i.128, 142; ii.5; iii.170 (catunnaŋ dhātūnaŋ); iv.7 sq. (id.); v.121 sq.; A i.258, 260; ii.10 (kāmānaŋ etc.); iii.245 sq.; iv.76 (uttariŋ); v.188; M i.87 (kāmānaŋ), 326 (uttariŋ); iii.25; It 37, 61; Ps ii.180, 244; Vbh 247; Vism 116; ThA 233; DhsA 164; Sdhp 579. Cp. nissaṭa & nissaraṇīya.

-- dassin wise in knowing results, prescient, able to find a way to salvation S iv.205; -- pañña (adj.) = ˚dassin D i.245 (a˚); iii.46; S ii.194; iv.332; A v.178 (a˚), 181 sq.; Miln 401. Nissaraṇīya
Nissaraṇīya
(adj.) [grd. of nissarati, with relation to nis- saraṇa] connected with deliverance, leading to salvation, able to be freed. The 3 n. dhātuyo (elements of deliverance) are nekkhamma (escape from cravings), āruppa (from existence with form), nirodha (from all existence), in detail at It 61 (kāmānaŋ n. nekkhammaŋ, rūpānaŋ n. āruppaŋ, yaŋ kiñci bhūtaŋ sankhataŋ n. nirodho). The 5 n -- dh. are escape fr. kāma, vyāpāda, vihesā, rūpa, sakkāya: A iii.245; cp. A i.99; iii.290.

Note. The spelling is often nissāraṇīya, thus at Vin iv.225; D iii.239 (the five n -- dhātuyo), 247, 275. Nissarati
Nissarati
[nis+sarati] to depart, escape from, be freed from (c. abl.) A i.260 (yasmā atthi loke nissaraṇaŋ tasmā sattā lokamhā nissaranti). -- pp. nissaṭa, grd. nissaraṇīya (q. v.); cp. also nissaraṇa & paṭi˚. Nissāya
Nissāya
(prep. c, acc.) [ger. of nissayati, Sk. *niśrāya, BSk niśritya, ni+śri] leaning on (in all fig. meanings) Nd2 368 ( = upanissāya, ārammaṇaŋ ālambanaŋ karitvā). -> 1. near, near by, on, at J i.167 (pāsānapiṭṭhaŋ), 221 (padumasaraŋ); PvA 24 (bāhā), 134 (taŋ=with him). -> 2. by means of, through, by one's support, by way of J i.140 (rājānaŋ: under the patronage of the k.); iv.137 (id.); ii.154 (tumhe); Miln 40 (kāyaŋ), 253 (id.); PvA 27 (ye=yesaŋ hetu), 154 (nadī˚ alongside of). -- 3. because of, on account of, by reason of, for the sake of J i.203 (amhe), 255 (dhanaŋ), 263 (maŋ); PvA 17 (kiŋ), 67 (namaŋ), 130 (taŋ). -- Cp. nissaya, nissita. Nissāra
Nissāra
(adj.) [nis+sāra] sapless, worthless, unsubstan- tial J i.393; Sdhp 51, 608, 612. -- 375 -- Nissārajja
Nissārajja
(adj.) [Sk. niḥ+śārada+ya] without diffidence, not diffident, confident J i.274 (+nibbhaya). Nissāraṇa
Nissāraṇa
(nt.) [fr. nissarati] going or driving out, expul- sion Miln 344 (osāraṇa -- n. -- paṭisāraṇa), 357. Nissita
Nissita
(adj.) [Sk. niśrita, pp. of nissayati, corresp. in meaning to Sk. āśrita] hanging on, dependent on, inhabiting; attached to, supported by, living by means of, relying on, being founded or rooted in, bent on. As -- ˚ often in sense of a prep. = by means of, on account of, through, esp. with pron. kiŋ˚ (= why, through what) Sn 458; taŋ˚ (therefore, on acct. of this) S iv.102. -> For combn with var. synonyms see Nd2 s. v. & cp. Nd1 75, 106. -- S ii.17 (dvayaŋ; cp. iii.134); iv.59, 365; v.2 sq., 63 sq.; A iii.128; Dh 339 (rāga˚); Sn 752, 798, 910; J i.145; Nd1 283; Pv i.86 (sokaŋ hadaya˚ lying in); ii.66 (paṭhavi˚ supported by); Vbh 229; Nett 39 (˚citta); Miln 314 (inhabiting); PvA 86 (māna˚). -- anissita unsupported, not attached, free, emancipated Sn 66, 363, 753, 849, 1069 (unaided); J i.158; Miln 320, 351. -- Cp. apassita. Nissitaka
Nissitaka
(adj. -- n.) [fr. prec.] adherent, supporter (orig. one who is supported by), pupil J i.142, 186; DhA i.54. Nissitatta
Nissitatta
(nt.) [fr. nissita] dependence on, i. e. interference by, being too near, nearness Vism 118 (pantha˚). Cp. san˚. Nissirīka
Nissirīka
(adj.) [nis+sirī] having lost his (or its) splendour or prosperity J vi.225 (ājīvika), 456 (rājabhavana). Nissīma
Nissīma
(adj.) [cp. Sk. niḥsīman with diff. meanings ("boundless"), nis+sīma] outside the boundary Vin i.255 (˚ṭṭha), 298 (˚ŋ gantuŋ); ii.167 (˚e ṭhito). Nissuta
Nissuta
(adj.) [fr. nis+sru, see savati] flown out or away, vanished, disappeared M i.280. Nisseṇi
Nisseṇi
(f.) [fr. nis+śri, orig. that which leans against, or leads to something, cp. Sk. śreṇī a row] a ladder, a flight of stairs D i.194, 198; J i.53; ii.315; iii.505; Miln 263; Vism 244, 340 (in simile); DhA i.259. Nissesa
Nissesa
(adj.) [nis+sesa] whole, entire; nt. acc. as adv. nissesaŋ entirely, completely Nd2 533. Nissoka
Nissoka
(adj.) [nis+soka] free from sorrow, without grief, not mourning PvA 62; KhA 153. Nihata
Nihata
(adj.) [pp. of nihanti, ni+han] "slain"; put down, settled; destroyed; dejected, humiliated; humble Vin ii.307 (settled); J v.435 (˚bhoga one whose fortunes are destroyed).

-- māna "with slain pride," humiliated, humble S iv.203; Th 2, 413 ( = apanīta -- māna ThA 267); J ii.300; vi.367. Niharati
Niharati
see nīharati. Nihita
Nihita
(adj.) [Sk. nihita, pp. of ni+dhā, see dahati] put down, put into, applied, settled; laid down, given up, renounced. As ˚ -- often in the sense of a prep. = without, e. g. ˚daṇḍa ˚sattha without stick & sword (see daṇḍa . . .) D i.70 (˚paccāmitta); Pv iv.326 (su˚ well applied); PvA 252 (bhasma -- nihita thrown into the ashes); Sdhp 311. Nihīna
Nihīna
(adj.) [Sk. nihīna, pp. of nihīyati or nihāyati] lost; degraded, low, vile, base; inferior, little, insignificant S i.12; Sn 890; Nd1 105, 194; PvA 198 (jāti˚ low -- born); Sdhp 86. Opp. to seyya J vi.356 sq.

-- attha one who has lost his fortune, poor Pv iv.15; -- kamma of low action Sn 661 = It 43; Dh 306; J ii.417; -- citta low -- minded PvA 107 (=dīna); -- jātika of inferior birth or caste PvA 175; -- pañña of inferior wisdom Sn 890 (=paritta -- pañña Nd1 299); -- sevin of vile pursuit A i.126. Nihīnatā
Nihīnatā
(f.) [abstr. to nihīna] lowness, inferiority; vileness, baseness D i.98, 99. Nihīyati
Nihīyati
[ni+hīyati, Pass. of hā, see jahāti] to be left, to come to ruin, to be destroyed A i.126 = J iii.324 (=vināsaŋ pāpuṇāti). pp. nihīna (q. v.). Nihuhunka
Nihuhunka
(adj.) [fr. nī˚ = nis+huhunka] one who does not confide in the sound huŋ Vin i.3 (cp. J.P.T.S. 1901, 42). Nīka
Nīka
[Sk. nyanku? Doubtful reading] a kind of deer (or pig) J v.406 (vv.ll. nika, ninga). Nīgha
Nīgha
(in anīgha) see nigha1. Nīca
Nīca
(adj.) [Vedic nīca, adj. -- formation fr. adv. ni˚, cp. Sk. nyañc downward] low, inferior, humble (opp. ucca high, fr. adv. ud˚) Vin i.46, 47; ii.194; D i.109, 179, 194; A v.82; SnA 424 (nīcaŋ karoti to degrade); & passim.

-- kula of low clan J i.106; Sn 411; -- (˚ā) kulīna belonging to low caste Sn 462; -- cittatā being humble -- hearted Dhs 1340; DhsA 395; -- pīṭhaka a low stool DhA iv.177; -- mano humble Sn 252 ( = nīcacitto SnA 293); -- seyyā a low bed A i.212 (opp. uccâsayana). Nīceyya
Nīceyya
(adj.) [compar. of nīca (for ˚īya?), in function of ˚eyya as "of the kind of," sort of, rather] lower, inferior, rather low M i.329; Sn 855, 918; Nd1 244, 351. Nīta
Nīta
(pp.) [pp. of neti] led, guided; ascertained, inferred A i.60 (˚attha); J i.262; ii.215 (kāma˚); Nett 21 (˚attha, natural meaning, i. e. the primarily inferred sense, opp. neyyattha); Sdhp 366 (dun˚). Cp. vi˚. Nīti
Nīti
(f.) [Sk. nīti, fr. nīta] guidance, practice, conduct, esp. right conduct, propriety; statesmanship, polity PvA 114 (˚mangala commonsense), 129 (˚sattha science of statecraft, or of prudent behaviour), 130 (˚cintaka a lawgiver), 131 (˚naya polity & law), 132 (˚kusala versed in the wisdom of life); Miln 3 (here meaning the Nyāyaphilosophy, cp. Trenckner, Notes p. 58). Nīdha
Nīdha
= nu idha, see nu. Nīdhura
Nīdhura
(?) [Sk. ? Cp. keyura] bracelet, bangle J vi.64, ( = valaya; v. l. BB nivara). Also given as nīyura (cp. Prk. neura & P. nūpura). Nīpa
Nīpa
(adj.) [Vedic nīpa, contr. fr. ni+āpa "low water"] lit. lying low, deep, N. of the tree Nauclea cadamba, a species of Asoka tree J i.13 (v. 61) = Bu ii.51; J v.6 (so read for nipa). Nībhata
Nībhata
[cp. Sk. nirbhṛta, pp. of nis+bhṛ] bought out J iii.471. Nīyati
Nīyati
[Sk. nīyati, Pass. of neti] to be led or guided, to go, to be moved S i.39 (cittena nīyati loko); Dh 175; Pv i.111 ( = vahīyati PvA 56); J i.264 (ppr. nīyamāna); PvA 4 (id.); DhA iii.177; Sdhp 292, 302. Also found in spelling niyyati at Sn 851; Nd1 223 (=yāyati, vuyhati), 395. -- In the sense of a Med. in imper. nīyāmase (let us take) Pv ii.91 (=nayissāma PvA 113). Nīyāti
Nīyāti
see niyyāti. Nīyādita, Nīyādeti
Nīyādita,
Nīyādeti see niyy˚. Nīyānika
Nīyānika
see niyy˚. Nīraja
Nīraja
(adj.) [Sk. nīraja, nis+raja] free from passion Sdhp 370. Nīrava
Nīrava
(adj.) [Sk. nīrava, nis+rava] soundless, noiseless, silent DA i.153 (tuṇhī+). Nīrasa
Nīrasa
(adj.) [Sk. nīrasa, nis+rasa] sapless, dried up, withered, tasteless, insipid J iii.111. -- 376 -- Nīruja
Nīruja
(adj.) [Sk. nīruja, nis+rujā] = nīroga Sdhp 496. Nīroga
Nīroga
(adj.) [Sk. nīroga, nis+roga] free from disease, healthy, well, unhurt J i.421; iii.26; iv.31; PvA 198 (ni˚). Cp. nīruja. Nīla
Nīla
(adj.) [Vedic nīla, perhaps conn. with Lat. nites to shine, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.] dark -- blue, blue -- black, blue -- green. Nīla serves as a general term to designate the "coloured -- black," as opposed to the "colouredwhite" (pīta yellow), which pairs (nīla -- pīta) are both set off against the "pure" colour -- sensations of red (lohitaka) & white (odāta), besides the distinct black or dark (see kaṇha). Therefore n. has a fluctuating connotation (cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Buddh. Psych. p. 49 & Dhs. trsl. p. 62), its only standard combn being that with pīta, e. g. in the enumn of the ten kasiṇa practices (see kasiṇa): nīla pīta lohita odāta; in the description of the 5 colours of the Buddha's eye: nīla pītaka lohitaka kaṇha odāta (Nd2 235, Ia under cakkhumā); which goes even so far as to be used simply in the sense of "black & white," e. g. VvA 320. Applied to hair (lomāni) D ii.144; M ii.136. See further enumn at VvA 111 & under kaṇha. -- A iii.239; iv.263 sq., 305, 349; v.61; Vism 110, 156, 173; ThA 42 (mahā˚ great blue lotus); Dhs 617; Pv ii.25; PvA 32, 46, 158; Sdhp 246, 270, 360.

-- abbha a black cloud Pv iv.39. -- abhijāti a dark (unfortunate) birth (cp. kaṇh˚) A iii.383; -- uppala blue lotus J iii.394; Vv 454 ( = kuvalaya); DhA i.384; -- kasiṇa the "blue" kasiṇa (q. v.) D iii.248; Dhs 203; (Vam 172 etc.; -- gīva "blue neck," a peacock Sn 221 =maṇi -- daṇḍa -- sadisāya gīvāya n. ti SnA 277); -- pupphī N. of plant ("blue -- blossom") J vi.53; -- bījaka a waterplant ("blue -- seed") Bdhgh at Vin iii.276; -- maṇi a sapphire ("blue -- stone") J ii.112; iv.140; DhA iii.254; -- vaṇṇa blue colour, coloured blue or green J iv.140 (of the ocean); Dhs 246. Nīlaka
Nīlaka
(adj.) for nīla M ii.201; see vi˚. Nīliya
Nīliya
[fr. nīlī] an (indigo) hair dye J iii.138 (Com. nīli- yaka). Nīlī
Nīlī
(f.) [Sk. nīlī] the indigo plant, indigo colour A iii.230, 233. Nīḷa
Nīḷa
[Vedic nīḍa] a nest (J v.92): see niḍḍha: cp. ˚pacchi bird cage J ii.361; roga˚ It 37; vadharoga˚ Th i.1093. Nīvaraṇa
Nīvaraṇa
(nt. occasionally m.) [Sk. *nivāraṇa, nis+ varaṇa of vṛ (vṛṇoti), see nibbuta & cp. nivāraṇa] an obstacle, hindrance, only as tt. applied to obstacles in an ethical sense & usually enumd or referred to in a set of 5 (as pañca nīvaraṇāni and p. āvaraṇāni), viz. kāmacchanda, (abhijjhā -- )vyāpāda, thīna -- middha, uddhaccakukkucca, vicikicchā i. e. sensuality, ill -- will, torpor of mind or body, worry, wavering (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 310): D i.73 (˚e, acc. pl.), 246; ii.83, 300; iii.49 sq., 101, 234, 278; S ii.23; iii.149; v.60, 84 sq., 93 sq., 145, 160, 226, 327, 439; M i.60, 144, 276; iii.4, 295; A i.3, 161; iii.16, 63, 230 sq.; 386; iv.457; v.16, 195, 322; Sn 17; Nd1 13; Nd2 379; Ps i.31, 129, 163; Pug 68; Dhs 1059, 1136, 1495; Vbh 199, 244, 378; Nett 11, 13, 94; Vism 146, 189; DA i.213; Sdhp 459, 493 and passim. -> Other enumns are occasionally found e. g. 10 at S v.110; 8 at M i.360 sq.; 6 at Dhs 1152. Nīvaraṇiya
Nīvaraṇiya
(adj.) [fr. nīvaraṇa] belonging to an obstacle, forming a hindrance, obstructing Dhs 584, 1164, 1488; Vbh 12, 30, 66, 130 etc. Nīvāra
Nīvāra
[Sk. nīvāra, unexplained] raw rice, paddy D i.166; A i.241, 295; ii.206; Pug 55; J iii.144 (˚yāgu). Nīhaṭa
Nīhaṭa
[pp. of nīharati = Sk. nirhṛta] thrown out, removed; in f. abstr. ˚tā ejection, removal [cp. Sk. nirhṛti] DhA iii.336 (malānaŋ n. the extirpation of impurity or removal of stain). Nīharaṇa
Nīharaṇa
(nt.) [fr. nīharati] taking out, carrying away, removing DA i.296; PvA 7. Nīharati
Nīharati
[nis+hṛ] to take out, to throw out, drive out J i.150, 157; iii.52; vi.336; Nd2 1997 (ni˚); VvA 222, 256; PvA 73, 254; Miln 8, 219. aor. nīhari D i.92; J i.293; ii.154; PvA 41, 178 (gehato taŋ n.). grd. nīharitabba DhA i.397 (opp. pavesetabba). -- pp. nīhaṭa. -- Caus. nīharāpeti to have thrown out, to order to be ejected VvA 141. Nīhāra
Nīhāra
[cp. Sk. nirhāra] way, manner Vin i.13; J i.127; DhA iv.7. At Vin i.13 also in nīhāra -- bhatta ( = nīhāraka). Nīhāraka
Nīhāraka
(adj. -- n.) [fr. nīhāra, cp. nīharaṇa] one who carries away Vin i.13 (nīhāra -- bhatta); S v.12, 320, 325 (piṇḍapāta). Nu
Nu
(indecl.) [Ved. nu, Idg. *nu, orig. adv. of time = now; cp. Lat. num (to nunc, now), see nūna] affirm. -- indef. part. "then, now." -- 1. most freq. combd with interr. pron. and followed by kho, as kin nu kho J ii.159; kacci J i.279; kaccin nu (for kaccid nu) J ii.133; kathan nu (kho) Vin i.83; kattha PvA 22; etc. -- 2. as interr. part. (=Lat. ne, num) in enclitic position Vin i.17; J iii.52; Sn 866, 871, 1071; etc. As such also combd with na=nanu (Lat. nonne), which begins the sentence: Vin ii.303. (nanu tvaŋ vuḍḍho vīsativasso 'sī ti?); Pv i.84; PvA 39, 136 etc. -- Often combd with other emphatic or dubitative particles, like api nu Vin ii.303; D i.97; nu idha, contr. to nīdha Vv 836 or with sandhi as nu -- v -- idha D i.108 (v. l. nu khv idha). Cp. na1, nūna, no. Nuṭṭhubhati
Nuṭṭhubhati
see niṭṭhubhati. (aor. nuṭṭhubhi, e. g. J ii.105). Nuda
Nuda
( -- ˚) (adj.) [Sk. ˚nud & ˚nuda, to nudati] expelling, casting out, dispelling; in tamo˚ dispelling darkness Sn 1133; Vv 352 ( = viddhaŋsana VvA 161). Nudaka
Nudaka
or Nūdaka ( -- ˚) = nuda J v.401 (āsa -- nūdaka). Nudati
Nudati
[Vedic nudati; Idg. *(s)neu to push, cp. Sk. navate, Gr. neu/w & nu/ssw, Lat. nuo; Ags. neosian, Low Ger. nucken] to push, impel; expel, drive away, reject Dh 28; J iv.443; DhA i.259. aor. nudi Nd2 281. Cp. apa˚, pa˚, vi˚. -- pp. nunna (nuṇṇa). Nunna (nuṇṇa)
Nunna
(nuṇṇa) [pp. of nudati] thrust, pushed, driven away, removed Nd2 220 (ṇṇ) = khitta, cp. panuṇṇa A ii.41. Nūtana
Nūtana
(adj.) [Vedic nūtana, adj. -- formation fr. adv. nū, cp. nūna. In formation cp. Sk. śvastana (of to -- morrow), Lat. crastinus etc.] "of now," i. e. recent, fresh, new Dāvs iv.47. Nūna
Nūna
(& nūnaŋ DhsA 164) (indecl.) [Ved. nūnaŋ = Gr. nu/n, Lat. nunc (cp. num); Goth. nu, Ger. nun, cp. E. now. See also nu] affirmative -- dubitative particle with Pot. or Ind., viz. 1. (dubit. -- interrog.) is it then, now, shall I etc. (=Lat. subjunctive, hortative & dubitative) D i.155 (=Lat. num, cp. nu). Esp. freq. with rel. pron. yaŋ=yaŋ nūna what if, shall I, let me (Lat. age) Sn p. 80 (yaŋ nūn' âhaŋ puccheyyaŋ let me ask, I will ask); J i.150, 255; iii.393; PvA 5 (y. n. âhaŋ imassa avassayo bhaveyyaŋ=let me help him). -- 2. (affirm.) surely, certainly, indeed Sn 1058 (api nūna pajaheyyuŋ); A v.194; J i.60; v.90; Pv ii.924 (nuna); Miln 20; DhsA 164; PvA 95 (nuna as v. l.; text reads nanda). Nūpura
Nūpura
[Sk. nūpura; Non -- Aryan. Cp. Prk. ṇeura & nīdhura (nīyura)] an ornament for the feet, an anklet Th 2, 268; DA i.50. -- 377 -- Ne, Nesan
Ne,
Nesan see na3. Neka
Neka
(adj.) [Sk. naika = na eka, cp. aneka] not one, several, many Sn 308; Vv 536 (˚citta variegated=nānāvidhacitta VvA 236), 641 (id.=anekacitta VvA 275); Tikp 366. Nekatika
Nekatika
(adj.) [fr. nikati] deceitful, fraudulent; a cheat D iii.183; Th 1, 940; Miln 290; PvA 209; J iv.184. Nekada
Nekada
= anekadā (frequently). Nekāyika
Nekāyika
(adj.) [fr. nikāya] versed in the 4 (or 5) Nikāyas Miln 22; cp. Cunningham, Stupa of Bharhut 142, 52. Nekkha
Nekkha
[Vedic niṣka; cp. nikkha] a golden ornament, a certain coin of gold S i.65; A i.181; ii.8, 29; Dh 230 ( = DhA iii.329 jambonada nikkha); Vism 48; v. l. at Vv 208, 438. Nekkhamma
Nekkhamma
(nt.) [formally a derivation fr. nikkhamma (ger. of nikkhamati) = Sk. *naiṣkramya, as shown also by its semantic affinity to nikkhanta, in which the metaphorical sense has entirely superseded the literal one. On the other hand, it may be a bastard derivation fr. nikkāma=Sk. *naiṣkāmya, although the adj. nikkāma does not show the prevailing meaning & the wide range of nikkhanta, moreover formally we should expect nekkamma. In any case the connection with kāma is pre -- eminently felt in the connotation of n., as shown by var. passages where a play of word exists between n. & kāma (cp. kāmānaŋ nissaraṇaŋ yad idaŋ nekkhammaŋ It 61, cp. Vin i.104; A iii.245; also M i.115). The use of the similar term abhinikkhamana further warrants its derivation fr. nikkhamati] giving up the world & leading a holy life, renunciation of, or emancipation from worldliness, freedom from lust, craving & desires, dispassionateness, self -- abnegation, Nibbāna Vin i.18 (˚e ānisaŋsa); D i.110 (id.), iii.239, 275, 283; M iii.129; A i.147 (=khema, i. e. nibbāna); iii.245; iv.186 (ānisaŋsa), 439 sq.; Sn 424 (˚ŋ daṭṭhu khemato); Dh 181; Ps i.107 sq.; ii.169 sq.; Nd2 370; Vism 116, 325; J i.19; 137; Vv 8442 (=nibbāna VvA 348); Nett 53, 87, 106 sq.; Miln 285 (˚ŋ abhinikkhanta); DhA iii.227; ThA 266.

-- âdhimutta bent on self -- abnegation (enumd with 5 other ideals of Arahantship: paviveka, avyāpajjha, upādānakkhaya, taṇhakkhaya, asammoha) Vin i.183; A iii.376; -- âbhirata fond of renunciation A iv.224; v.175; Ps ii.173; -- dhātu the sphere or element of dispassionateness S ii.152; Vbh 86; Nett 97; Vism 487. -- ninna merging into or bent on a holy life S iii.233; -- vitakka a thought of self -- abnegation S ii.152; A i.275; ii.252; It 82; -- sankappa = prec. S ii.152; A iii.146; Vbh 104, 235; -- sita based or bent on a holy life (opp. geha˚ q. v.) S iv.232; -- sukha the joy or happiness of Arahantship M iii.110; A i.80; Dh 267, 272; DhA iii.400. Negama
Negama
(adj. -- n.) [fr. nigama] the inhabitant of a (small) town; citizen; also collect. = jana, people Vin i.268, 273; D i.136, 139; J iv.121; vi.493; Dāvs iii.3; DA i.297. Often combd with ˚jānapadā (pl.) "townsmen & countryfolk" S i.89; D iii.148, 172; J 149. Necayika
Necayika
(adj.) [fr. nicaya] rich, wealthy D i.136, 142 (read nevāsika cp. naivasika M Vastu iii.38); A v.149 (v. l. BB nerayika, Com. nevāsiko ti nivāsakaro). Netar
Netar
[Vedic netṛ, n. ag. of neti] a leader, guide, fore- runner Sn 86, 213; Nd1 446. Neti (nayati)
Neti
(nayati) [Vedic nayati, nī] to lead, guide, conduct; to take, carry (away); fig. to draw a conclusion, to understand, to take as Dh 80, 145, 240, 257; J i.228; iv.241 (nayaŋ n. to draw a proper conclusion); VvA 42 (narati = nayati); imper. naya Pv ii.113, & nehi J ii.160; PvA 147; poetic imper. nayāhi see in paṭi˚; pot. naye Dh 256 (to lead a cause=vinicchineyya DhA iii.381). fut. nessāmi J ii.159; Pv ii.45; aor. nayi J iv.137. ger. netvā PvA 5, 6, etc. inf. netuŋ PvA 123, 145 (˚kāma), & netave J i.79=Dh 180. grd. neyya (see sep.), pp. nīta. Pass. nīyati (q. v.). Cp. naya, nīti, netta etc.; also ā˚, upa˚, paṭi˚, vi˚. Netta
Netta1
[Sk. netra, fr. neti] a guide J iii.111; Nett. 130. Netta
Netta2
(nt.) [Sk. netra] guidance, anything that guides, a conductor, fig. the eye. S i.26 (sārathī nettāni gahetvā = the reins); Vin i.204 (dhūma˚ for smoke); J iv.363 (id.); D i.12 (˚tappana, set t. & cp. DA i.98); Sn 550 (pasanna˚), 1120; Nd2 371 (=cakkhu), 669; J vi.290 (tamba˚ with red eyes); Pv i.83 (eyes= nayanāni Com.); Dhs 597; Vbh 71 sq. Netti
Netti
(f.) [Vedic netrī, f. to netṛ] a guide, conductor; support ( = nettika2) It 37 (āhāra˚ -- pabhava), 38 (bhava˚), 94 (netticchinna bhikkhu=Arahant). Cp. nettika2 & dhamma˚, bhava˚. Nettiŋsa
Nettiŋsa
[cp. Sk. nistriŋśa, Halāyudha 2, 317; very doubtful, whether nis+triŋśa (thirty), prob. a dial. distortion] a sword J ii.77 (˚vara -- dhārin; C. nettiŋsā vuccanti khaggā); iv.118 (C. gives it as adj. = nikkaruṇa, merciless; & says "khaggassa nāmaŋ"); vi.188 (˚varadhārin). Nettika
Nettika
(adj. -- n.) [netta+ika] 1. having as guide or fore- runner, in Bhagavaŋ˚' dhamma M i.310; A i.199; iv.158, 351; v.355. -- 2. a conduit for irrigation; one who makes conduits for watering Dh 80 ( = udakaŋ nenti nettikā), 145; fig. that which supplies with food or water, in bhava˚ ("the roots of existence, clinging to existence") D i.46 (ucchinna˚ with the roots of existence cut); sanettika clinging to existence, a bad man A ii.54. Cp. netti. Netthar
Netthar
[see nittharati; does any connection exist with Vedic neṣṭṛ?] only in phrase netthāraŋ vattati to behave in such a way as to get rid of blame or fault Vin ii.5; iii.183; M i.442. -- Bdhgh on Vin ii.5 (p. 309) explains: nittharantānaŋ etan ti netthāraŋ yena sakkā nissāraṇā nittharituŋ taŋ aṭṭhārasa -- vidhaŋ sammāvattuŋ vattantī ti attho. Nepakka
Nepakka
(nt.) [fr. nipaka] prudence, discrimination, care- fulness; usually as sati˚ S v.197 sq.; M i.356; A iii.11; iv.15; Nd2 629 B; Vbh 244, 249; Vism 3 ( = paññā); DhA iv.29. Nepuñña
Nepuñña
(nt.) [fr. nipuṇa] experience, skill, cleverness Pug 25, 35; Dhs 16, 292; DhsA 147. Nema
Nema
[cp. nemi] edge, point; root S v.445; A iv.404; gambhīra˚ (adj.) with deeply rooted point, firmly established S v.444; A iv.106. Nemantaṇika
Nemantaṇika
(adj.) [fr. nimantana] one who lives by invitations M i.31. Nemi
Nemi
(f.) [Vedic nemi, perhaps to namati] the circum- ference of a wheel, circumference, rim, edge (cp. nema) A i.112; Vv 645; Miln 238, 285; Vism 198 (fig. jarāmaraṇa˚, the rim of old age & death, which belongs to the wheel of Saŋsāra of the chariot of existence, bhavaratha); DhA ii.124 (˚vaṭṭi); VvA 277. Nemitta
Nemitta
[Sk. naimitta, fr. nimitti] a fortune -- teller, astrologer D ii.16, 19; A iii.243. Nemittaka & Nemittika
Nemittaka
& Nemittika [Sk. naimittika, fr. nimitta] an astrologer, fortune -- teller, soothsayer D i.8 (i) = DA i.91; A iii.111; J iv.124; Miln 19 (i), 229; Vism 210 (i); DhA ii.241 (a). Nemittikatā
Nemittikatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. nemittika] = nimitta -- kammaŋ, i. e. prognostication; inquisitiveness, insinuation Vbh 352=Vism 23; expld at Vism 28. -- 378 -- Nemiya
Nemiya
(adj.) [ = nemika] ( -- ˚) having a circumference etc. J vi.252. Neyya
Neyya
(adj.) [grd. of neti; Sk. neya] to be led, carried etc.; fig. to be instructed; to be inferred, guessed or understood Sn 55, 803, 846, 1113; Nd1 114, 206; Nd2 372; Pug 41; Nett 9 sq., 125; -- attha the meaning which is to be inferred (opp. nītattha) A i.60; Nett 21. Nerayika
Nerayika
(adj.) [fr. niraya, cp. BSk. nairayika Divy 165] belonging to niraya or purgatory, hellish; one doomed to suffering in purgatory (n. satta = inhabitant of n.) Vin ii.205 (āpāyiko n. kappaṭṭho); iv.7; D iii.6, 9, 12; A i.265; ii.231 (vedanaŋ vediyati . . . seyyathā pi sattā nerayikā); iii.402 sq.; Sn 664; Nd1 97 (gati); Vv 521, J iv.3 (sattā); Pug 51; Vbh 412 sq.; Vism 415 (˚sattā), 424; Miln 148 (sattā); PvA 27 (id.), 52 (˚bhāva), 255; VvA 23; Sdhp 193, 198. Nerutta
Nerutta
(adj. -- n.) [fr. nirutti] based on etymology; an etymologist or philologist ThA 153; Nett 8, 9, 32, 33. Neḷa
Neḷa
(& Nela) (adj.) [na+eḷa = Sk. anenas, of enas fault, sin. The other negated form, also in meaning "pure, clean," is aneḷa (& aneḷaka), q. v. On ḷ: n. cp. lāngala; nangala; tulā: tūṇa etc.] 1. without fault or sin, blameless, faultless; not hurting, humane, gentle, merciful, innocuous D i.4 (Bdhgh explains: elaŋ vuccati doso; n' assā (i. e. vācāya) elan ti nelā; niddosā ti attho. "Nelango setapacchādo" ti ettha vuttanelaŋ viya; DA i.75); A ii.209; v.205; J v.156; Vv 5018, 636 (=niddosa VvA 262); Pug 29, 57; Dhs 1343 (vācā)= niddosa DhsA 397. -- 2. (somewhat doubtful) "clean," with ref. to big cats (mahā -- biḷārā nelamaṇḍalaŋ vuccati), whereas young ones are called "elephants, cubs" (something like "pigs") (taruṇā bhinka -- cchāpamaṇḍalaŋ) J v.418.

-- anga of faultless limbs or parts, of a chariot (ratha) = running perfectly S iv.291=Ud 76 (nelagga text, nelanga v. l.)=DA i.75=DhsA 397. -- patī (f.)= neḷavatī (of vācā) humane, gentle J vi.558 (na elapatī elapāta -- rahitā madhurā Com.). Neva
Neva
(indecl.) [na+eva] see na2. -- nevasaññā -- nâsañña (being) neither perception nor non -- perception, only in cpd. ˚āyatana & in nevasaññī -- nâsaññin: see saññā. Nevāpika
Nevāpika
(adj. -- n.) [fr. nivāpa] a deer -- feeder M i.150 sq. Nevāsika
Nevāsika
(adj.) [fr. nivāsa, cp. BSk. naivāsika AvS i.286, 287] one who inhabits, an inmate; living in a place, local J i.236 sq.; DhA ii.53 sq. Cp. necayika. Nesajjika
Nesajjika
(adj.) [fr. nisajjā] being & remaining in a sitting position (as an ascetic practice) A iii.220; Th 1, 904, 1120; Nd2 587; J iv.8; Pug 69; Vism 79; Miln 20, 342. The n -- ˚anga is one of the dhūtanga -- precepts, enjoining the sitting posture also for sleeping, see Vin v.193, Vism 61, & dhūtanga. Nesāda
Nesāda
[fr. nisāda; cp. Sk. niṣāda & naiṣāda = one who lies in wait] a hunter; also a low caste Vin iv.7 (+veṇa & rathakāra); S i.93 (˚kula); A i.107; ii.85; J ii.36; iii.330; iv.397, 413; v.110, 337; vi.71; Pug 51 (˚kula); Miln 311; DhA iii.24; PvA 176. No
No1
(indecl.) affirm. & emphatic part. = nu (cp. na1): indeed, then, now Sn 457, 875, 1077; J v.343 (api no= api nu), 435 (=nipātamattaŋ p. 437). No
No2
(indecl.) [Sk. no = na+u, a stronger na; cp. na2) negative & adversative particle=neither, nor, but not, surely not, indeed not. -- (a) in neg. sentences: Sn 852, 855, 1040; It 103 (but not); Pv ii.313 (but not). as answer: no hi etaŋ "indeed not, no indeed" Vin i.17; D i.3; no hi idaŋ D i.105. -- no ca kho "but surely not" D i.34, 36; A v.195. -- Often emphasized by na, as no na not at all J i.64; na no Sn 224 (="avadhāraṇe" KhA 170); disjunctively na hi . . . no neither -- nor Sn 813; na no . . . na neither -- nor (notnor) Sn 455. -- (b) in disjunctive questions: "or not," as evaŋ hoti vā . . . no vā (is it so -- or not) D i.61, 227; kacci . . . no (is it so -- or not; Lat. ne -- annon) D i.107; nu kho . . . no udāhu (is it that -- or not; or rather) D i.152. -- (c) noce (no ce=Sk. no ced) if not (opp. sace) Sn 348, 691, 840; J i.222; vi.365; VvA 69. Also in sense of "I hope not" J v.378. No
No3
[Sk. naḥ] enclitic form, gen. dat. acc. pl. of pron. 1st (we) = amhākaŋ, see vayaŋ; cp. na3. Nodeti
Nodeti
[fr. nud] see vi˚. Nonīta
Nonīta
see navanīta. Nhāru
Nhāru
see nahāru. Found e. g. at Vin i.25. -- P. Pa˚
Pa˚
(indecl.) [Ved. pra, Idg. *pro, cp. Gr. pro/, Lat. pro, Goth. fra, Lith. pra, prō, Oir. ro -- ] directional prefix of forward motion, in applied sense often emphasising the action as carried on in a marked degree or even beyond its mark (cp. Ger. ver -- in its function of Goth. fra & Ger. vor). Thus the sphere of pa -- may be characterised in foll. applications: 1. forth, forward, out: papatati fall forward, i. e. down; ˚neti bring forth (to); ˚gaṇhāti hold out; ˚tharati spread forth; ˚dhāvati run out; ˚bajati go forth; ˚sāreti stretch out; etc. -- 2. (intensive) in a marked degree, more than ordinarily (cp. E. up in cut up, heap up, fill up; thus often to be trsld by "up," or "out," or "about"): pakopeti up -- set; ˚chindati cut up; ˚bhañjati break up; ˚cinati heap up; ˚kiṇṇaka scattered about; ˚nāda shouting out; ˚bhāti shine forth; ˚bhavati grow up, prevail; ˚dūseti spoil entirely; ˚jahati give up entirely; ˚tapeti make shine exceedingly (C. ativiya dīpeti); ˚jalati blaze up; ˚jānāti know well. -- In this meaning often with adjectives like patanu very thin; ˚thaddha quite stiff; ˚dakkhiṇa right in pre -- eminence; ˚bala very strong. -- 3. "onward": paṭṭhāya from . . . onward; pavattati move on; fig. "further, later": paputta a later (secondary) son, i. e. grandson. -- 4. "in front of," "before": padvāra, before the door. -- 5. Sometimes in trs. (reflexive) use, like pakūjin singing out to (each other, cp Ger. besingen, an -- rufen). -- The most frequent combination with other (modifying) prefixes is sam -- ppa; its closest relatives (in meaning 2 especially) are ā and pari. The double (assimilation) p is restored after short vowels, like appadhaŋsiya (a+pa˚). ˚Pa
˚Pa
(adj.) [Cp. Ved. ˚pa, adj. base of pā to drink, as ˚ga fr. gam or ˚ṭha fr. sthā] drinking; only in foll. cpds.: dhenu˚ drinking of the cow, suckling calf M i.79; Sn 26 ( = dhenuŋ pivanto SnA 39); -- pāda˚ a tree (lit. drinking with its feet, cp. expln at PvA 251 "pādasadisehi mūl' âvayavehi udakassa pivanato pādapo ti") Pv iv.39; -- majja˚ drinking intoxicants Sn 400; Pv iv.177 (a˚). Paŋsu
Paŋsu
[cp. Ved. pāŋsu] dust, dirt, soil S v.459; A i.253; Pv ii.37. -- paŋsvāgārakā playmates S iii.190; saha-> paŋsukīḷitā id. (lit. playing together with mud, making mud pies) A ii.186; J i.364; PvA 30. Cp. BSk. sahapāŋśukrīḍita MVastu iii.450.

-- kūla rags from a dust heap (cp. Vin. Texts ii.156) Vin i.58; M i.78; S ii.202; A i.240, 295; ii.206; iv.230; It 102 = A ii.26; Dh 395; Pug 69; PvA 141, 144. A quâsi definition of p. -- k. is to be found at Vism 60. -- kūlika one who wears clothes made of rags taken from a dust heap M i.30; S ii.187; A iii.187, 219, 371 sq.; Vin iii.15; iv.360; Ud 42; Pug 55; DhA iv.157; ˚attan (nt. abstr.) the habit of wearing rags M i.214; iii.41; A i.38; iii.108. -- guṇṭhita (vv. ll. ˚kuṇḍita, ˚kuṇṭhita) covered with dust or dirt S i.197; J vi.559; Pv ii.35. -- pisācaka a mud sprite (some sort of demon) J iii.147; iv.380; DhA ii.26. -- muṭṭhi a handful of soil J vi. 405. -- vappa sowing on light soil (opp. kalalavappa sowing on heavy soil or mud) SnA 137. -- 379 -- Paŋsuka
Paŋsuka
(adj.) [Epic Sk. pāŋśuka; Ved. pāŋsura] dusty; (m.) a dusty robe KhA 171 (v. l. paŋsukūla). Pakaṭṭhaka
Pakaṭṭhaka
[pa+kaṭṭha+ka; kaṭṭha pp. of kṛṣ, cp. Sk. prakarṣaka of same root in same meaning, but cp. also kaṭṭha2] (adj.) troublesome, annoying; (m.) a troubler, worrier S i.174 (v. l. pagaṇḍaka; C. rasagiddha; trsl. "pertinacious"). Pakaṭṭhita
Pakaṭṭhita
see pakk˚. Pakata
Pakata
[pp. of pa+kṛ] done, made; as -- ˚ by nature (cp. pakati) Sn 286; J iv.38; Pv i.68; ii.316; iii.105 (pāpaŋ = samācaritaŋ PvA 214); Miln 218; DhA ii.11 (pāpaŋ); PvA 31, 35, 103 (ṭ), 124. -- icchāpakata covetous by nature A iii.119, 219 sq.; Pug 69; Vism 24 (here however taken by Bdhgh as "icchāya apakata" or "upadduta"); issāpakata envious by nature S ii.260; PvA 46, cp. macchariyā pakata afflicted with selfishness PvA 124. On pakata at It 89 see apakata. -- pakatatta (pakata+ attan) natural, of a natural self, of good behaviour, incorrupt, "integer" Vin ii.6, 33, 204; J i.236 (bhikkhu, +sīlavā, etc.). At Vin ii.32 the pakatatta bhikkhu as the regular, ordained monk is contrasted with the pārivāsika bh. or probationer. Pakati
Pakati
(f.) [cp. Ved. prakṛti] 1. original or natural form, natural state or condition (lit. make -- up); as ˚ -- : primary, original, real Vin. i.189; ii.113; J i.146 (˚vesena in her usual dress); KhA 173 (˚kammakara, ˚jeṭṭhaputta); VvA 12 (˚pabhassara), 109 (˚bhaddatā). -- instr. pakatiyā by nature, ordinarily, as usual Ps ii.208; VvA 78; PvA 215, 263. -- 2. occasion, happening, opportunity, (common) occurrence D i.168 (trsl. "common saying"); Pv ii.89 ( = ˚pavutti PvA 110). -- Der. pakatika & pākatika.

-- upanissaya sufficing condition in nature: see Cpd. 194 n. 3. -- gamana natural or usual walk DhA i 389. -- citta ordinary or normal consciousness Kvu 615 (cp. Kvu trsl. 359 n. 5, and BSk. prakṛti -- nirvāṇatva Bodhicary. at Poussin 256). -- yānaka ordinary vehicle DhA i.391. -- sīla natural or proper virtue DA i.290. Pakatika
Pakatika
(adj.) [fr. pakati] being by nature, of a certain nature J ii.30; Miln 220; DA i.198; PvA 242 ( = rūpa); DhsA 404. Pakattheti
Pakattheti
[pa+kattheti] talk out against, denounce J v.7 (mā ˚katthāsi; C. akkosi garahi nindi; gloss paccakkhāsi). Should it be 'pakaḍḍhāsi? Pakappanā
Pakappanā
(f.) [fr. pakappeti] fixing one's attention on, planning, designing, scheme, arrangement Sn 945 (cp. Nd1 72 186, where two pakappanā's, viz. taṇhā˚ & diṭṭhi˚; at Nd1 429 it is synonymous with taṇhā; Bdhgh has reading pakampana for ˚kapp˚ and expld by kampa -- karaṇa SnA 568). Pakappita
Pakappita
[pp. of pakappeti] arranged, planned, attended to, designed, made Sn 648 ( = kata SnA 471). 784, 786 (diṭṭhi "prejudiced view" Fausböll; cp. Nd1 72 and pakappanā), 802, 838 (=kappita abhisankhata saṇṭhapita Nd1 186), 902, 910. Pakappeṭi
Pakappeṭi
[pra+Caus. of kḷp, cp. Ved. prakalpayitar] to arrange, fix, settle, prepare, determine, plan S ii.65 (ceteti p. anuseti); Sn 886 (pakappayitvā = takkayitvā vitakkayitvā saŋkappayitvā Nd1 295). -- pp. pakappita (q. v.). Pakampati
Pakampati
[pa+kampati. Cp. BSk. prakampati Jtm 220; Mvyutp. 151 = kampati.] to shake, quake, tremble J i.47 (v. 269); PvA 199. -- Caus. pakampeti S i.107. Pakampana
Pakampana
see pakappanā. Pakampita
Pakampita
[pp. of pa+kamp] shaken, trembling S i.133 = Th 2, 200. Pakaraṇa
Pakaraṇa
(nt.) [fr. pa+kṛ] 1. performance, undertaking paragraph (of the law) D i.98 ("offence"? see Dial. i.120); S iii.91; Miln 189. -- 2. occasion Vin i.44; ii.75; iii.20. -- 3. exposition, arrangement, literary work, composition, book; usually in titles only, viz. Abhidhamma˚ J i.312; Dpvs v.37; Kathāvatthu˚ Paṭṭhāna˚ Miln 12; Netti˚ one of the Canonical books (see netti). Pakaroti
Pakaroti
[pa+kṛ, Ved. prakaroti] to effect, perform, prepare, make, do S i.24 (pakubbati); Sn 254 (id.), 781, 790 (ppr. med. pakubbamāna; cp. Nd1 65); It 21 (puññaŋ); SnA 169 (pakurute, corresponding with sevati). -- pp. pakata (q. v.). Pakāra
Pakāra
[pa+kṛ, cp. last; but Sk. prakāra "similarity"] 1. make -- up, getting up, fixing, arrangement, preparation, mode, way, manner J ii.222; DA i.132; PvA 26, 109, 123, 135, 178, 199; Sdhp 94, 466. -- 2. ingredient, flavour, way of making (a food) tasty Sn 241 (kathappakāro tava āmagandho); Miln 63. -- 3. ( -- ˚) of a kind, by way of, in nānā˚ (adj.) various, manifold J i.52 (sakuṇā), 278 (phalāni); PvA 50; vutta˚ as said, the said Vism 42, 44; PvA 136. Pakāraka
Pakāraka
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. pakāra] of that kind S ii.81; J vi.259. Pakāreti
Pakāreti
[Denom. fr. pakāra] to direct one's thought towards (dat.) J vi.307. Pakāsati
Pakāsati
[pa+kāś] to shine forth, to be visible, to become known Sn 445, 1032 ( = bhāsati tapati virocati Nd2 373). -- Caus. pakāseti to show up, illustrate, explain, make known, give information about Vin ii.189; S i.105; It 111 (brahmacariyaŋ); Dh 304; Sn 578, 1021; Pug 57; J vi.281 (atthaŋ to explain the meaning or matter); DhA ii.11 (id.); PvA 1, 12 (ānisaŋsaŋ) 29 (atthaŋ upamāhi), 32 (attānaŋ), 40 (adhippāyaŋ), 42 (saccāni) 72 etc. -- grd. pakāsaniya to be made known or announced in ˚kamma explanation, information, annunciation Vin ii.189 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.239). -- pp. pakāsita (q. v.). Pakāsana
Pakāsana
(nt.) [pa+kāś, cp. pakāsati] explaining, making known; information, evidence, explanation, publicity Ps i.104 (dhamma˚); Miln 95; SnA 445; PvA 2, 50, 103 (expln of āvi). Pakāsita
Pakāsita
[pp. of pakāseti] explained, manifested, made known S i.161, 171 sq.; ii.107 (su˚); PvA 53, 63. Pakiṇāti
Pakiṇāti
[pa+kiṇāti] to deal in Vin ii.267 (grd. ˚kiṇitabba). Pakiṇṇaka
Pakiṇṇaka
(adj.) [pa+kiṇṇa (pp. of kirati)+ka] scat- tered about; fig. miscellaneous, particular, opp. to sādhāraṇa KhA 74; cp. Cpd. 13, 952; Vism 175 (˚kathā); 317 sq. (id.). -- As Np. name of the xivth book of the Jātakas. Pakitteti
Pakitteti
[pa+kitteti] to proclaim J i.17 (v. 85). Pakirati
Pakirati
[pa+kirati] 1. to let down (the hair), scatter, let fall D ii.139 = 148 (ger. pakiriya); J v.203 (so read for parikati); vi.207 (aor ˚kiriŋsu). -- ger. pakira (=pakiritvā) J vi.100 (read pakira -- cārī, cp. C. on p. 102), 198 (read p. -- parī). -- Caus. pakireti 1. to throw down, upset Vin iv.308 (thūpaŋ); S i.100; It 90 (v. l. kīrati). -- 2. to scatter S i.100=It 66; Pug 23. -- pp. pakiṇṇa (see ˚ka). -- 380 -- Pakiledeti
Pakiledeti
[Caus of pa+kliś, cp. kelideti] to make wet, moisten (with hot water) J vi.109 ( = temetvā khipati C.). Pakujjhati
Pakujjhati
[pa+krudh] to be angry S i.221, 223 (˚eyyaŋ). Pakuṭa
Pakuṭa
(?) [v. l. pakuṭṭa] an inner verandah Vin ii.153; cp. Vin. Texts iii.175. -- Kern. Toev. s. v. expld it as miswriting for pakuṭṭha ( = Sk. prakoṣṭha an inner court in a building, Prk. paoṭṭha, cp. P. koṭṭha1 & koṭṭhaka1). Spelling pakulla at Nd2 485 B (for magga, v. l. makula). Pakuppati
Pakuppati
[pa+kup] to be angry J iv.241. Pakubb˚
Pakubb˚
see pakaroti. Pakūjin
Pakūjin
(adj.) [pa+kūj] to sing out to (each other) (añ- ñamaññaŋ) J vi.538. Pakopa
Pakopa
[pa+kopa] agitation, effervescence, anger, fury Dhs 1060; Vism 235, 236. Pakopana
Pakopana
(adj.) [pa+kopana, of kup] shaking, upsetting, making turbulent It 84 (moho citta -- pakopano). Pakka
Pakka
(adj.) [Ved. pakva, a pp. formation of pac to cook, Idg. *peqṷo = Lat. coquo "cook," Av. pac -- , Obulg. pekaͅ, Lith. kepû, Gr. pe/ssw, a)rtoko/pos baker, pe/pwn ripe; also pp. of pacati pakta=Gr. pepto/s, Lat. coctus] 1. ripe (opp. āma raw, as Vedic,; and apakka) and also "cooked, boiled, baked" S i.97 (opp. āmaka); iv.324 (˚bhikkhā); Sn 576; J v.286. -- nt. pakkaŋ that which is ripe, i. e. a fruit, ripe fruit Pug 44, 45; often in connection with amba˚ i. e. a (ripe) mango fruit J ii.104, 394; Pv iv.123; DhA iii.207; PvA 187. -- apakka unripe PugA 225; Sdhp 102. -- 2. ripe for destruction, overripe, decaying, in phrase ˚gatta (adj.) having a decaying body, with putrid body [BSk. pakvagātra Divy 82], combd with arugatta at M i.506; S iv.198; Miln 357 (cp. Miln trsl. ii.262), 395. -- 3. heated, glowing Dpvs i.62.

-- āsaya receptacle for digested food, i. e. the abdomen (opp. āmāsaya) Vism 260, 358; KhA 59. -- odana (adj.) having cooked one's rice Sn 18 ( = siddhabhatta SnA 27), cp. J iii.425. -- jjhāna "guessing at ripeness," i. e. foretelling the number of years a man has yet to live; in list of forbidden crafts at D i.9, expld at DA i.94 as "paripāka -- gata -- cintā." -- pakka ripe fruit KhA 59. -- pūva baked cake J iii.10. -- vaṇṇin of ripe appearance Pug 44, 45, cp. PugA 225. -- sadisa ripe -- like, appearing ripe PugA 225. Pakkaṭhati
Pakkaṭhati
[pa+kaṭhati of kvath] to cook, boil up; only in Caus. II. pakkaṭṭhāpeti (with unexpld ṭṭh for ṭh) to cause to be boiled up J i.472 (v. l. pakkuṭṭh˚, cp. J.P.T.S. 1884, 84). -- pp. pakkaṭhita (q. v.). Pakkaṭhita (pakkuthita)
Pakkaṭhita
(pakkuthita) [also spelt with ṭṭh instead of ṭh or th, perhaps through popular etym. pakka+ṭṭhita for pa+kaṭhita. To kvath, P. kuthati & kaṭhati, appearing in pp. as kaṭhita, kuthita, kaṭṭhita and kuṭṭhita, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 42] cooked up, boiled, boiling hot, hot Thūpavaŋsa 4833; J v.268 (pakaṭṭh˚ vv. ll. pakkudh˚ & jakankaṭhi); vi.112 (˚kaṭṭh˚), 114 (id.; v. l. BB ˚kuṭhita); DhA i.126 (kaṭṭh˚, v. l. pakkanta), 179 (kaṭṭh˚, v. l. pakuṭṭh˚); ii.5 (kaṭṭh˚, vv. ll. pakuṭṭh˚ & pakkuth˚); iii.310 (1st passage kaṭṭh˚, v. l. pakuṭṭh˚, pakkuṭṭh˚, pakkuthita; = pakkuṭṭhita at id. p. VvA 67; in 2nd passage kaṭṭh˚, v. l. pakuṭṭh˚ & pakkuthita, left out at id. p. VvA 68); ThA 292 (pakkuthita). Pakkaṭṭhī
Pakkaṭṭhī
(f.) [fr. pa+kvat, evidently as abstr. to pak- kaṭṭhita; reading uncertain] a boiling ( -- hot) mixture (of oil?) M i.87, expld by C. as katita -- ( = kaṭh˚) gomaya, boiling cow -- dung, v. l. chakaṇakā see p. 537. The id. p. at Nd2 199 reads chakaṇaṭī, evidently a bona fide reading. The interpretation as "cow -- dung" is more likely than "boiling oil." Pakkanta
Pakkanta
[pp. of pakkamati] gone, gone away, departed S i.153; Sn p. 124; J i.202 (spelt kkh); PvA 78. Pakkandati
Pakkandati
[Ved. prakrandati, pra+krand] to cry out, shout out, wail Sn 310 (3rd pret. pakkanduŋ) J vi.55 (id.), 188 (id.), 301 (id.). Pakkama
Pakkama
[fr. pa+kram] going to, undertaking, beginning D i.168 (tapo˚; trsl. "all kinds of penance"). Pakkamati
Pakkamati
[Ved. prakramati, pra+kram] 1. to step forward, set out, go on, go away, go forth M i.105; Pug 58; DA i.94; PvA 13. -- pret. 3 sg. pakkāmi S i.92, 120; Sn pp. 93, 124; PvA 5 (uṭṭhāy'āsanā), 19 (id.); 3rd pl. pakkamuŋ Sn 1010, and pakkamiŋsu S i.199. -- pp. pakkanta (q. v.). -- 2. to go beyond (in archery), to overshoot the mark, miss the aim Miln 250. Pakkava
Pakkava
[etym. ?] a kind of medicinal plant Vin i.201 (cp. paggava). Pakkula
Pakkula
see pākula. Pakkosati
Pakkosati
[pa+kosati, kruś] to call, summon J i.50; ii.69, 252 ( = avheti); v.297; vi.420; DhA i.50; PvA 81 (v. l. ˚āpeti). -- Caus. II. pakkosāpeti to call, send for, order to come J i.207; PvA 141, 153; DhA i.185. Pakkha
Pakkha1
[Ved. pakṣa in meanings 1 and 3; to Lat. pectus, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.] 1. side of the body, flank, wing, feathers (cp. pakkhin), in cpds. ˚biḷāla a flying fox (sort of bat) Bdhgh on ulūka -- camma at Vin i.186 (MV. v.2, 4; cp. Vin. Texts ii.16 where read ulūka˚ for lūka?); J vi.538; and ˚hata one who is struck on (one) side, i. e. paralysed on one side, a cripple (cp. Sk. pakṣāghāta) Vin ii.90; M iii.169; A iii.385; Pug 51 ( = hatapakkho pīṭhasappi PugA 227); Miln 245, 276 (cp. Miln trsl. ii.62, 117) -- also as wing of a house at DhsA 107; and wing of a bird at S ii.231; SnA 465 (in expln of pakkhin). -- 2. side, party, faction; adj ( -- ˚) associated with, a partisan, adherent Vin ii.299; Sn 347 (aññāṇa˚), 967 (kaṇhassa p.=Māra˚ etc., see Nd1 489; Nett 53 (taṇhā˚ & diṭṭhi˚) 88 (id.), 160 (id.); DA i.281; DhA i.54; PvA 114 (paṭiloma˚). pakkhasankanta gone over to a (schismatic) faction Vin i.60; iv.230, 313. -- pakkhaŋ dāpeti to give a side, to adhere to (loc.) J i.343. -- 3. one half of the (lunar) month, a fortnight. The light or moon -- lit fortnight is called sukka -- pakkha (or juṇha˚), the dark or moonless one kāḷa˚ (or kaṇha˚) M i.20 (cātuddasī pañcadasī aṭṭhamī ca pakkhassa 14th, 15th & 8th day of the fortnight) ≈ Sn 402; A i.142 (aṭṭhamī pakkhassa), 144=Vv 156 (cātuddasī etc.; cp. VvA 71): A v.123 sq. (kāḷa˚, juṇha˚); Th 2, 423 (= aḍḍhamāsa -- mattaŋ ThA 269); Pv ii.955 (bahumāse ca pakkhe ca=kaṇha -- sukka -- bheda p. PvA 135); Vism 101 (dasâhaŋ vā pakkhaŋ vā); VvA 314 (sukka˚); PvA 55 (kāḷa˚). -- 4. alternative, statement, loc. pakkhe ( -- ˚) with regard or reference to KhA 80 (tassa pañhassa vyākaraṇapakkhe); SnA 168 (id.). Pakkha
Pakkha2
(adj.) [cp. Ved. prakhya clear, & Sk. ( -- ˚) prakhya like, of pra+khyā ] visible, clear; -- ˚ resembling, like Miln 75 (mātu˚ and pitu˚). Pakkha
Pakkha3
[cp. Sk. phakka (?)] a cripple. Cp iii.6, 10; J vi.12 ( = pīṭha -- sappī C.). Note BSk. phakka is enumd at Mvyut. 271120 with jātyaṇḍa, kuṇḍa & pangu, reminding of the combn kāṇo vā kuṇi vā khañjo vā pakkhahato vā Vin ii.90=S i.94 =A ii.85; iii.385.=Pug 51. -- 381 -- Pakkhaka
Pakkhaka
(& ˚ika) (nt.?) [fr. pakkha1] a dress made of wings or feathers, in cpd. ulūka˚ of owl's wings (see ulūka˚) Vin iii.34 (˚ŋ nivāsetvā); A ii.206 ≈ (˚ika). Pakkhatta
Pakkhatta
(nt.) [fr. pakkha1] being a partner of, siding in with Vism 129, 130. Pakkhanta
Pakkhanta
at DA i.38 read as pakkanta. Pakkhandaka
Pakkhandaka
(adj.) = pakkhandin SnA 164. -- f. pak- khandikā [Ved. (?) praskandikā, BR. without refs.] diarrhoea, dysentery D ii.127 (lohita˚); J iii.143; v.441 (lohita˚); Miln 134. Pakkhandati
Pakkhandati
[pa+khandati, of skand] to spring forward, to jump on to M i.86; J i.461; Vv 8412 (ger. pakkhandiyāna = pakkhanditvā anupavisitvā VvA 338); to be after someone in pursuit DhA i.198; usually fig. to rejoice in, find pleasure or satisfaction in (loc.), to take to, in phrases cittaŋ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati M i.186; S iii.133; cp. Miln 326 (nibbāne); A ii.165; iii.245 (avyāpāde); iv.442 (adukkha -- m -- asukhe); It 43 (dhamme); and na me tattha mānasaŋ p. Miln 135. -> pp. pakkhanna (q. v.). Pakkhandana
Pakkhandana
(nt.) [fr. pakkhandati] 1. leaping, springing J ii.32; Ps 1. 194 (pariccāga -- & pakkh˚ -- nissagga). -> 2. attack, assault, chasing DhA i.198. Pakkhandin
Pakkhandin
(adj. n.) [fr. pakkhandati] 1. (adj.) bold, braggart, lit. jumping on or forth Dh 244; Sn 89 ( = pakkhandaka SnA 164). -- 2. a military scout, lit. an onrusher, a bravo D i.51 (cp. Dial. i.68); DA i.157; J ii.32, 281. Pakkhanna
Pakkhanna
[pp. of pakkhandati; often wrongly spelt pakkhanta] jumped on, fallen on to or into, chanced upon, acquired M i.39; Th 1, 342 (diṭṭhigahanā˚); J v.471; Miln 144 (saŋsaya˚), 156, 390 (kupatha˚). Pakkhara
Pakkhara
[cp. Sk. prakṣara & prakhara "ein Panzer für Pferde" BR.] bordering, trimming J vi.223 (of a carriage). Pakkhalati
Pakkhalati1
[pa+kṣal] to wash, cleanse J v.71 (ger. pak- khalya = dhovitvā C. p. 74). Caus. pakkhāleti (q. v.). Pakkhalati
Pakkhalati2
[pa+khalati, of skhal] to stumble, trip, stagger J iii.433; vi.332; DA i.37; DhsA 334. Pakkhāyati
Pakkhāyati
[pa+khyā, Ved. prakhyāyate; cp. khāyati & pakkha2] to appear, shine forth, to be clearly visible D ii.99 (cp. Th 1, 1034, where pakkhanti for pakkhāyanti metri causâ); M ii.32; S iv.144; v.153, 162; A iii.69 sq. Pakkhāleti
Pakkhāleti
[Caus. of pa+ksal, cp. khaleti] to wash, cleanse Vin i.9 (pāde); D ii.85 (id.); M i.205; S i.107; J vi.24 (pāde); VvA 261. Pakkhika
Pakkhika
(adj.) [for pakkhiya = Ved. pakṣya of pakkha1 3] 1. belonging or referring to the (2) lunar fortnights, fortnightly, for a fortnight or in the (specified) fortnight of the month (cp. Vin. Texts iii.220). As one special provision of food mentioned in enumn of five bhojanāni, viz. niccabhatta, salākabhatta, pakkhika, uposathika, pāṭipadika, Vin i.58=ii.175; iv.75; J ii.210; Vism 66. -- 2. (cp. pakkha 2 & pakkhin 2) contributing to, leading to, associated with, siding with ( -- ˚) Vism 130, in phrase vighāta˚ anibbāna -- saŋvattanika associated with destruction, etc. M i.115; DhsA 382. Also in mūga˚ leading to deafness J i.45 (v.254). -> DhA i.82 (paramattha -- sacca˚). Pakkhitta
Pakkhitta
[pp. of pakkhipati] put down into, thrown into (loc.) Sn p. 15 (pāyāso udake p.); PvA 58 (ātave p. naḷo is perhaps better read ātāpe paditto), 153 (pokkharaṇiyaŋ p.). Pakkhin
Pakkhin
(adj. n.) [fr. pakkha1 = pakkhānaŋ atthitāya pakkhī ti vuccati SnA 465; Ved. pakṣin bird] 1. winged, the winged one, a bird D i.71 (+sakuṇa=pakkhayutto sakuṇo DA i.208)=A ii.209=v.206=Pug 58, S ii.231; Sn 606 (=sakuṇo SnA 465); Pv iii.53 (˚gaṇā =sakuṇagaṇā PvA 198). -- 2. (cp. pakkha 2) participating in, contributing to S v.97 (vighāta˚ for the usual ˚pakkhika). Pakkhipati
Pakkhipati
[pa+kṣip, in sense of putting down carefully cp. nikkhipati & BSk. prakṣipati to start a ship Divy 334] 1. to put down into (with loc. of receptacle), place into, enclose in (often used for ceremony of putting a corpse into a shell or mount) D ii.162 (tela -- doṇiyā Bhagavato sarīraŋ p.); S ii.85; J ii.210 (mukhe); Miln 247 (Amat' osadhaŋ); PvA 41 (atthikāni thūpe p.); DhA i.71 (the corpse into the fire). -- 2. to throw into, hurl into, in Niraya -- passage at M iii.183 = A i.141= Nd2 304iii; cp. nikkhipati. -- 3. (fig.) to include in, insert, arrange, interpolate Miln 13 (Abhidhammapiṭakaŋ kusalā dhammā, akusalā dh., avyākatā dh. ti tīsu padesu p.). -- Caus. II. pakkhipāpeti J i.467; DA i.136. -- pp. pakkhitta (q. v.). Pakkhima
Pakkhima
[ = pakkhin] a bird Th 1, 139 (read ˚me for ˚maŋ); J v.339. Pakkhiya
Pakkhiya
(adj. n.) [fr. pakkha1 2; cp. pakkhikā] siding with, associating with; m. part, side; only in phrase (satta -- tiŋsa -- ) bodhi -- pakkhiya -- dhammā the 37 parts of enlightenment It 75 (satta only); J i.275; Vism 678 sq.; SnA 164; VvA 95; see Cpd. 179 and note 1. -> pakkhiya at Th 2, 425 is not clear (expld at ThA 269 by vaccha, v. l. sacca). Pakkhepa
Pakkhepa
(m.) & ˚na (nt.) [fr. pa+kṣip] throwing, hurling; being thrown into (loc.) PvA 221 (lohakumbhi˚ in passage of ordeals in Niraya); DhA i.357 (nadiyaŋ visa -- pakkhepana). Pakhuma
Pakhuma
[Ved. pakṣman, diaeretic form for the con- tracted form pamha, the latter prepondering in poetry, while pakhuma is mostly found in prose. Similar doublets are sukhuma & saṇha; as regards etym. cp. Av. pasnem eyelid, Gr. pe/ ktw to comb, po/kos fleece, Lat. pecto to comb, pecten comb, Ohg. fahs hair] an eyelash, unsally as adj.: having eyelashes ( -- ˚) D ii.18 (go˚); S i.132 (˚antarikāyaŋ between the lashes); J v.216 (visāla˚ for alārapamha T.); ThA 255 (dīgha˚ for āyatapamha Th 2, 383); VvA 162, 279. Pagaṇḍaka
Pagaṇḍaka
see pakaṭṭhaka. Pagabbha
Pagabbha
(adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. pragalbha] bold, daring, forward, reckless M i.236; S i.201 (sup˚); A iii.433; Sn 89, 852 (ap˚ = na pagabbha KhA 242, cp. also Nd1 228); Dh 244 (=kāyapāgabbhiyâdīhi samannāgata DhA iii.354); J ii.32, 281, 359; v.448; Miln 389; Dāvs iii.26. -- apagabbha at Vin. iii.3 is used in quite a diff. sense, viz. "one who has no more connection with a womb" (a+pa+*garbha) Pagabbhatā
Pagabbhatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. pagabbha, cp. Sk. pragalbhatā] resoluteness, boldness, decision J vi.273. See also pāgabbhiya. Pagabbhin
Pagabbhin
(adj.) [ = pagabbha] bold J vi.238. Pagama
Pagama
[fr. pra+gam] going forth from ( -- ˚) DhsA 329. Pagāḷha
Pagāḷha
[pp. of pagāhati] sunk into, immersed in (loc.) Sn 441, 772 ( = ogāḷha ajjhogāḷha nimugga Nd1 26). Pagāhati
Pagāhati
[pa+gāhati] to dive into, sink into Sn 819 (≈ ajjhogāha SnA 537; = ogāhati ajjhogāhati pavisati Nd1 152). -- pp. pagāḷha. Pagiddha
Pagiddha
(adj.) [pa+giddha] greedy after, clinging to, finding delight in (loc.) J v.269 ( = gadhita mucchita C. on p. 274). -- 382 -- Paguṇa
Paguṇa
(adj.) [pa+guṇa cp. Sk. praguṇa straight, der. "kind"] learned, full of knowledge, clever, well-acquainted, familiar D iii.170; Vv 532 ( = nipuṇa VvA 232); J ii.243; iv.130; v.399; Vism 95 (Majjhimo me paguṇo: I am well versed in the M.), 242 (dve tayo nikāyā paguṇā); DA i.95; SnA 195; KhA 73. -- paguṇaŋ karoti, to make oneself familiar with, to learn by heart, to master thoroughly J ii.166; iii.537 (tayo vede); Miln 12 (Abhidhamma -- piṭakaŋ).

-- bhāva familiarity with, acquaintance, efficient state, cleverness in, experience. knowledge (cp. pāguñña) J iii.537; Dhs 48, 49. Paguṇatā
Paguṇatā
(f.) & Paguṇatta (nt.) (doubtful) abstr. to paguṇa in expln of pāguññatā at Dhs 48 & 49 (trsl. fitness, competence). Pagumba
Pagumba
[pa+gumba] a thicket, bush, clump of trees Sn 233. Pageva
Pageva
(adv.) [page = Sk. prage+eva, but BSk. prāgeva] (how) much more or much less, a fortiori, lit. "right at the earliest" J i.354; v.242; Miln 91; Vism 93, 259, 322; VvA 258, PvA 115, 116, 117. -- Compar. pagevataraŋ M iii.145; atippage too early J iii.48; atippago id. M i.84; S ii.32; A v.48. Paggaṇhāti
Paggaṇhāti
[pa+gaṇhāti] 1. to stretch forth, hold out or up, take up D i.123 (sujaŋ the sacrificial ladle), 125 (añjaliŋ stretch out the hollow hands as a token of respectful greeting); S i.141; ii.280; J i.89 (paveṇiŋ); PvA 74 (turiyāni). ger. paggayha taking up, raising up, stretching forth Sn 350 ( = uttāretvā SnA 349); Dh 268 (tulaŋ); Pv ii.917 (bāhuŋ); iv.74 (uccaŋ p.); VvA 7 (añjaliŋ). Often in phrase bāhā paggayha kandati to wail or lament with outstretched arms (a special pose of mourning) J v.267; vi.188; PvA 92 (= pasāreti). -- 2. to take up, take care of, favour, support, befriend (opp. niggaṇhāti) J i.511; ii.21; v.116, 369; Miln 185, 186; PvA 114 (sappurisa -- dhammaŋ). -- 3. to put to, exert, strain, apply vigorously (cittaŋ one's mind) S v.9; Ps ii.20 (paggaṇhanto viriyena carati). -- pp. paggahita (q. v.). -- Caus. paggaheti to exert Miln 390 (mānasaŋ). -- Caus. II. paggaṇhāpeti to cause to hold up or out, to cause to uphold or support Miln 21 (dhamma -- dhajaŋ); J v.248; PvA 74 (turiyāni). Paggalita
Paggalita
[pp. of pa+gal] dripping PvA 56 (v. l. for T. vigalita). Paggava
Paggava
[etym?] a medicinal plant with bitter fruit J ii.105 (v. l. pakkava). Paggaha & Paggāha
Paggaha
& Paggāha [fr. paggaṇhāti] 1. exertion, energy; (a) paggaha: D iii.213 (v. l. paggāha, also ˚nimitta); Ps ii.8 (˚cariyā), 20 (˚ṭṭha); DA i.63 (viriy -- indriyassa ˚lakkhaṇa); (b) paggāha: A i.83, 256 (˚nimitta); Dhs 277 (trsl. "grasp"), 336, 1359 (˚nimitta); DhsA 406. -> 2. (paggaha) favour, kindness, patronage [same meaning in Ep. Sk.] Vin iii.145 = A iii.66; J v.116 (opp. niggaha); vi.371 (id.). Paggahaṇa
Paggahaṇa
(nt.) [fr. pa+gṛh, cp. paggaṇhāti] stretching forth, lifting, holding out; of the hands as sign of respectful salutation (cp. añjaliŋ paggaṇhāti) J iii.82. -- Abstr. ˚tā = paggaha 1. Vism 134. Paggahita
Paggahita
[pp. of paggaṇhāti, cp. BSk. pragṛhīta lofty Divy 7, 102] holding up, or (being) held up Vin ii.131 (chatta˚ holding up a parasol,) 207 (id.); J vi.235; SnA 175 ( = Sn p. 21). Paggāha
Paggāha
see paggaha. Paggāhika
Paggāhika
(adj.) [paggāha+ika] belonging to, receiving (or trading?) in cpd. ˚sālā a shop Vin ii.291 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.383: "would he set up as a hawker in cloth, or would he open a shop"). Paggharaṇa
Paggharaṇa
(adj. -- n.) [fr. paggharati] trickling, oozing, dripping J i.146; vi.187 (a˚); f. ˚ī D i.74 ( = bindubinduŋ udakaŋ paggharati DA i.218); the ʻ mark ʼ of liquid DhsA 332. Paggharaṇaka
Paggharaṇaka
(adj.) [fr. paggharati] flowing, trickling, oozing out J vi.187 (app˚ -- velā), 531; DhA i.126 (lohitaŋ); Vism 262. Paggharati
Paggharati
[pa+gharati, which stands for kṣarati, also appearing as jharati, cp. Sk. nirjhara, Prk. pajjharati Mālatī -- M. p. 51. BSk. pragharati Divy 57, 409; AvŚ i.282] to flow forth or out, to ooze, trickle, drip S i.150; Sn p. 125 (pubbañ ca lohitañ ca. p.); J vi.328; Pv i.67 (gabbho pagghari = vissandi PvA 34); ii.911 (=vissandati PvA 119); ii.926 (akkhīni p.=vissandanti PvA 123, sic lege!); Miln 180; VvA 76 (navahi dvārehi puḷuvakā pagghariŋsu). -- pp. paggharita (q. v.). Paggharita
Paggharita
[pp. of paggharati] flowing, trickling S ii.179; Th 2, 466; PvA 198 (khīra). Paghaṇa
Paghaṇa
(nt.) [cp. Sk. praghaṇa] a covered terrace before a house Vin ii.153 ("paghanaŋ nāma yaŋ nikkhamantā ca pavisantā ca pādehi hananti. tassa vihāra -- dvāre ubhato kuṭṭaŋ niharitvā katapadesass' etaŋ adhivacanaŋ" Bdhgh, quoted Vin. Texts iii.175). Panka
Panka
[cp. Epic Sk. panka, with k suffix to root *pene for *pele, as in Lat. palus; cp. Goth. fani mire, excrements, Ohg, fenna "fen," bog; also Ital. fango mud, Ohg. fūht wet. See Walde Lat. Wtb. under palus. BSk. panka, e. g. Jtm 215 panka -- nimagna] mud, mire; defilement, impurity S i.35, 60; iii.118; A iii.311; iv.289; Sn 970 (˚danta rajassira with dirt between their teeth and dust on their heads, from travelling); iii.236 (id.); iv.362 (id.); Sn 535, 845, 945, 1145 (Nd2 374: kāma -- panko kāma -- kaddamo etc.); Dh 141, 327; Nd1 203; Pv iii.33; iv.32; Miln 346; Dhs 1059, 1136. Panga
Panga
[?] only in cpd. pangacīra (nt.) at D i.6 "blowing through toy pipes made of leaves" (Dial. i.10, where is cpd. Sinhalese pat -- kulal and Marathī pungī after Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 205). Bdhgh explns as "p. vuccati paṇṇa -- nāḷikā; taŋ dhamantā kīḷanti" DA i.86. Pangu
Pangu
(adj.) [Sk. pangu; etym.?] lame, crippled, see pakkha3 and next. Pangula
Pangula
(adj.) [fr. pangu] lame J vi.12; Vism 280. Pacati
Pacati
[Ved. pacati, Idg. *peqṷō, Av. pac -- ; Obulg. peka to fry, roast, Lith, kepū bake, Gr. pe/ssw cook, pe/pwn ripe] to cook, boil, roast Vin iv.264; fig. torment in purgatory (trs. and intrs.): Niraye pacitvā after roasting in N. S ii.225, PvA 10, 14. -- ppr. pacanto tormenting, gen. pacato (+Caus. pācayato) D i.52 (expld at DA i.159, where read pacato for paccato, by pare daṇḍena pīḷentassa). -- pp. pakka (q. v.). -> Caus. pacāpeti & pāceti (q. v.). -- Pass. paccati to be roasted or tormented (q. v.). Pacana
Pacana
(nt.) [fr. pac, su pacati] cooking J̄ iii.425 (˚thā- likā); v.385 (˚bhājana); ThA 29 (bhatta˚); DA i.270; PvA 135. Pacarati
Pacarati
[pa+carati] to go after, walk in; fig. practise, perform, observe Vv 329 (v. l. pavarati, cp. VvA 136). Pacala
Pacala
[fr. pa+cal] shaking, trembling, wavering DhsA 378. Pacalati
Pacalati
[pa+calati] to dangle VvA 36 (v. l. BB paj˚). Pacalāyati
Pacalāyati
[quasi -- denom. or caus. fr. pacala, pa+cal, cp. daṇḍāyati and pacāleti] to make (the eyelid) waver, to wink, to be sleepy, nod, begin to doze A iii.343 = iv.344; iv.85 (quot. at DhsA 236); J i.384 (˚āyituŋ ārabbhi); Vism 300. -- 383 -- Pacalāyikā
Pacalāyikā
(f.) [abstr. fr. pacalāyati] nodding, wavering (of the eyelids), blinking, being sleepy Dhs 1157 ( = akkhidalādīnaŋ pacalabhāvaŋ karoti DhsA 378). Pacalita
Pacalita
[pp. of pacalati] shaken, wavering, unstable Th 1, 260. Pacāpeti
Pacāpeti
[Caus. of pacati] to cause to be cooked, to cook Vin iv.264; J i.126 (āhāraŋ); ii.15 (bhattaŋ), 122. Pacāreti
Pacāreti
[pa+cāreti, Caus. of car] to go about in (acc.), to frequent, to visit A i.182, 183 (pacārayāmi, gloss sañcarissāmi). Pacālaka
Pacālaka
(adj.) [fr. pacāleti] swinging, shaking; nt. acc. as adv. in kāya -- (& bāhu˚) ppacālakaŋ after the manner or in the style of swaying the body (or swinging the arms) Vin ii.213. Pacāleti
Pacāleti
[pa+Caus. of cal] to swing, sway, move about Th 1, 200 (mā pacālesi "sway and nod" Trsln). Pacinati
Pacinati
[or ˚cināti) [pa+cināti, cp, ācināti] 1. to pick, pluck, gather, take up, collect, accumulate S iii.89; iv.74 (dukkhaŋ = ācināti p. 73); Dh 47, 48 (pupphāni= ocinati DhA i.366); J iii.22; fut. pacinissati DhA i.361. -- 2. to pick out (mentally), to discern, distinguish, realise, know Sn 837 (ppr. pacinaŋ=pacinanto vicinanto tulayanto tīrayanto Nd1 185;=pavicinati SnA 545); fut. pacessati Dh 44, 45 (sic F.; MSS. vijessati, & vicessati the latter perhaps preferable to pac˚; expld at DhA i.334 by vicinissati upaparikkhissati paṭivijjhissati sacchikarissati). -- Pass. pacīyati to be heaped up, to increase, accumulate S iv.74 (opp. khīyati). Pacuṭa
Pacuṭa
is doubtful reading at DA i.164 (with vv. ll. pamuṭa, pamuca, papuṭa) for D i.54, T. paṭuva (vv. ll. pamuṭa, samudda) and is expld by gaṇṭhika, i. e. block or knot. The whole passage is corrupt; see discussed under pavuṭā. Pacura
Pacura
(adj.) [cp. late Sk. pracura] general, various, any; abundant, many J v.40 ( = bahu salabha C.); Miln 408 (˚jana) Dāvs iv.11, 50; VvA 213 (˚jano for yādisakīdiso Vv 5011). See also pasura. Pacessati
Pacessati
see pacinati. Pacca˚
Pacca˚
is contracted form of paṭi before a˚, like pac- cakampittha pret. fr. paṭikampati. Paccakkosati
Paccakkosati
[paṭi+ā+kruś] to curse in return S i.162; A ii.215. Paccakkosana
Paccakkosana
(nt.) [fr. paṭi+ā+kruś] cursing in return DhA iv.148 (a˚). Paccakkha
Paccakkha
(adj.) [paṭi+akkha3, cp. Ved. pratyakṣa] "before the eye," perceptible to the senses, evident, clear, present DhsA 254; PvA 125; Sdhp 416. Often in obl. cases, viz. instr. ˚ena personally J i.377; abl. ˚ato from personal experience J v.45, 195, 281; appaccakkhāya without seeing or direct perception, in expln of paccaya at Vism 532; also in phrase paccakkhato ñatvā having seen or found out for himself, knowing personally J i.262; iii.168.

-- kamma making clear, i. e. demonstration, realisation, only neg. a˚ not realising etc. S iii.262; Dhs 390 (trsl. "inability to demonstrate"; cp. DhsA 254). Paccakkhāta
Paccakkhāta
[pp. of paccakkhāti] rejected, given up, abandoned, repudiated Vin ii.244, 245 (sikkhā); iii.25 (id.); J iv.108; DhA i.12. Cp. Vin. Texts i.275. Paccakkhāti
Paccakkhāti
[paṭi+akkhāti = ā+khyā] lit. to speak against, i. e. to reject, refuse, disavow, abandon, give up, usually in connection with Buddhaŋ, dhammaŋ, sikkhaŋ or similar terms of a religious -- moral nature Vin iii.25; S ii.231, 271; A iv.372. -- ger. paccak- khāya, in foll. conns ācariyaŋ J iv.200; sikkhaŋ Vin iii.23, 34 (a˚); S ii.231; iv.190; Pug 66, 67; sabbaŋ S iv.15; ariyasaccaŋ S v.428. paccakkhāsi at J v.8 is gloss for pakatthāsi. -- pp. paccakkhāta (q. v.). -> Intens. paccācikkhati (q. v.). Paccakkhāna
Paccakkhāna
(nt.) [fr. paṭi+ā+khyā] rejection, refusal J vi.422. Paccagū
Paccagū
(adj. -- n.) [a difficult word, composed of pacca+ gū, the latter a by -- form of ˚ga, as in paṭṭhagū, vedagū pāragū. pacca may be praṭya, an adv. formn of prep. praṭi, and paṭṭha its doublet. It is not certain whether we should read paṭṭhagū here as well (see paṭṭhagū). The form may also be expld as a substantivised pl. 3rd pret. of praṭi+gacchati = paccaguŋ] "one who goes toward," a pupil S i.104 (Mārassa); vv. ll. baddhabhū, paṭṭhagū. Windisch, Māra & Buddha trsls "unter M's Herrschaft," and refers paṭṭhagu to Sk., pātyagāḥ. Bdhgh (see Kindred Sayings, 1, p. 319) reads baddhagū and explns by bandhavara sissa antevāsika. Paccaggaḷa
Paccaggaḷa
(adj.) [pratyak+gaḷa] in phrase paccaggaḷe aṭṭhāsi "stuck in his throat" M i.333. Paccaggha
Paccaggha
(adj.) [paṭi+aggha, cp. Sk. pratyagra of diff. derivation] recent, new, beautiful, quite costly Vin i.4; J i.80; ii.435; Pv ii.316 ( = abhinava mahaggha vā PvA 87); iii.105 (=abhinava PvA 214); Dāvs v.25; PvA 44. Paccanga
Paccanga
(nt.) [paṭi+anga] lit. "by -- limb," small limb, only in compd angapaccangāni limbs great and small, all limbs: see anga. Paccañjana
Paccañjana
(nt.) [paṭi+añjana] anointing, ointment, unction D i.12 = M i.511; DA i.98 (=bhavanīya -- sītalabhessajj' añjanaŋ). Paccati
Paccati
[Pass. of pacati, cp. BSk. pacyate Divy 422] to be boiled, fig. to be formented or vexed, to suffer. Nearly always applied to the torture of boiling in Niraya, where it is meant literally. -- S i.92; v.344 (kālena paccanti read for kāle na p.); A i.141 (phenuddehakaŋ p. niraye); Sn 670, 671; Dh 69, 119, 120 (pāpaŋ suffer for sin, cp. DhA iii.14); J v.268; Pv iv.129 ( = dukkhaŋ pāpuṇanti PvA 228); iv.339 (niraye paccare janā=paccanti PvA 255); DhA iii.64 (expln for tappati). Paccatta
Paccatta
(adj.) [paṭi+attan] separate, individual; usually acc. ˚ŋ adv. separately, individually, singly, by himself, in his own heart D i.24 (yeva nibbuti viditā); DA on D ii.77 = attano attano abbhantare; M i.251, 337 (˚vedaniya N. of a purgatory), 422; S ii.199; iii.54 sq., iv.23, 41 sq., 168, 539; Sn 611, 906; Dh 165; Pv iii.106 (˚vedanā separate sufferings, =visuŋ visuŋ attanā anubhūyamānā mahādukkhavedanā PvA 214); Dhs 1044 (ajjhatta+; trsld "self referable"); Miln 96 (˚purisa -- kāra); DhsA 169; VvA 9, 13; PvA 232.

-- vacana expression of separate relation, i. e. case of reference, or of the direct object, reflexive case, N. of the acc. case SnA 303; VvA 281; PvA 30, 35; KhA 213, 236; in lieu of karaṇa KhA 213, of sāmin SnA 594. Paccatthata
Paccatthata
[pp. of gaṭi+ā+stṛ] spread out D ii.211. Paccattharaṇa
Paccattharaṇa
(nt.) [pati+ā+stṛ, cp. BSk. pratyāsta- raṇa Divy 19] something spread against, i. e. under or over, a cover, spread, rug, cushion or carpet to sit on, bedding of a couch (nisīdana˚) Vin i.47, 295, 296; ii.208, 218; D i.7 (kadali -- miga -- pavara˚, cp. DA i.87); A i.137 (id.); iii.50 (id.); J i.126; iv.353 (uṇṇāmaya); PvA 141, 137. Paccatthika
Paccatthika
(adj. n.) [paṭi+attha+ka, lit. opposite to useful, cp. Sk. pratyanīka & pratyarthin] an opponent, adversary, enemy Vin ii.94 sq. (atta˚ personal enemy); A v.71 (id.; T. attha˚); D i.50, 70, 137; It 83; PvA 62. Cp. paccāmitta. -- 384 -- Paccana
Paccana
(nt.) [fr. paccati, cp. pacana] being boiled, boiling. torture, torment J v.270; SnA 476 (˚okāsa). Paccanika, Paccanīya
Paccanika,
Paccanīya (adj. n.) [cp. Sk. pratyanīka & see paccatthika] 1. contrary, adverse, opposed; (1) m. enemy, adversary, opponent M i.378; S i.179; iv.127 = Sn 761; Ps ii.67 sq.; SnA 288. Cp. vi.˚ -- 2. (in method) reverse, negative, opp. to anuloma. Tikp 71 passim; cp. paṭiloma.

-- gāthā response, responding verse (cp. paṭigāthā) SnA 39. Paccanubhāsati
Paccanubhāsati
[paṭi+anubhāsati, cp. BSk. pratyava- bhāṣate to call to Divy 9] to speak out or mention correspondingly, to enumerate KhA 78, 79 sq. Paccanubhoti
Paccanubhoti
[paṭi+anu+bhū, BSk. pratyanubhavati Divy 54, 262 etc.] to experience, undergo, realise M i.295; S v.218, 264 sq., 286 sq. 353; A iii.425 sq.; It 38; PvA 26, 44, 107 (dukkhaŋ). -- fut. paccanubhossati D ii.213; S i.133, 227; Pv iii.56. -- Pass. paccanubhavīyati PvA 146 (for upalabbhati). -- pp. paccanubhūta M ii.32; S ii.178; It 15. Paccanusiṭṭha
Paccanusiṭṭha
[paṭi+anusiṭṭha] advised, admonished D ii.209 = 225. Paccanta
Paccanta
(adj. n.) [paṭi+anta, cp. Sk. pratyanta] adj. adjoining, bordering on, neighbouring, adjacent Dh 315; J i.11 (v.47, ˚desa), 377 (˚vāsika); PvA 201 (˚nagara); DhA iii.488 (id.); Sdhp 11 (˚visaya). -> (m.) the border, outskirts, neighbourhood Vin i.73; J i.126 (vihāra˚); ii.37; Miln 314 (˚e kupite in a border disturbance); DhA i.101 (id.); PvA 20 (id.). ˚ŋ vūpasāmeti to appease the border PvA 20. -- P. in sense of "heathen" at Vism 121. Paccantima
Paccantima
(adj.) [fr. paccanta, cp. BSk. pratyantima frontier Divy 21, 426] bordering, adjoining, next to Vin. ii.166; Sdhp 5. Paccabhiññāṇa
Paccabhiññāṇa
(nt.) [paṭi+abhi+ñāṇa] recognition DhsA 110. Paccaya
Paccaya
[fr. paṭi+i, cp. Ved. pratyaya & P. pacceti, paṭicca] lit. resting on, falling back on, foundation; cause, motive etc. See on term as t.t. of philosophy Tikapaṭṭhāna I, foreword; J.P.T.S. 1916, 21 f.; Cpd. 42 sq. & esp. 259 sq. -- 1. (lit.) support, requisite, means, stay. Usually with ref. to the 4 necessaries of the bhikkhu's daily life, viz. cīvara, piṇḍapāta, senāsana, (gilānapaccaya -- ) bhesajja, i. e. clothing, food as alms, a dwelling -- place, medicine: see under cīvara. Sn 339 (paccaya = gilāna -- paccaya SnA 342); Miln 336; Mhvs 3, 15. -- 2. (appld) reason, cause, ground, motive, means, condition M i.259 (yaŋ yad eva paccayaŋ paṭicca by whatever cause or by whichever means); S ii.65; Nett 78 sq.; DA i.125; PvA 104. The fourfold cause (catubbidho paccayo) of rūpa (material form) consists of kamma, citta, utu, āhāra: Vism 600. Var. paccayas discussed at VbhA 166 sq. (twofold, with ref. to paṭisandhi), 183 (eightfold), 202, 205 sq. 254 (4). sappaccaya founded, having a reason or cause S v.213 sq.; A i.82; Nd2 mūla; Dhs 1084, 1437. -- yathā paccayaŋ karoti do as he likes Nd2 p. 280=S iii. 33. Often coupled with hetu, e. g. at S iv.68 sq.; A. i.66; iv.151 sq.; D iii.284; Nd2 under mūla; Ps ii.116 sq., paccaya came to be distinguished from hetu as the genus of which hetu was the typical, chief species. I. e. paccaya became synonymous with our "relation," understood in a causal sense, hetu meaning condition, causal antecedent, and 23 other relations being added as special modes of causality. Later still these 24 were held reducible to 4 Tikp 1 f. (and foreword); Cpd. 197. Cp. Paṭṭhāna. -- Abl. paccayā as adv. by means of, through, by reason of, caused by D i.45 (vedanā ˚taṇhā etc., see paṭicca -- samuppāda); M i.261 (jātippaccayā jarāmaraṇaŋ); Pv i.52 (kamma˚); iv.150 (tap˚); PvA 147 (kamma˚). -- 3. ground for, belief, confidence, trust, reliance J i.118, 169; apara˚ without relying on anyone else S iii.83, 135; A iv.186, 210; PvA 226.

-- ākāra the mode of causes, i. e. the Paṭiccasamuppāda DhsA 2, 3; VbhA 130 sq. (cp. Vism 522 sq.). Paccayatā
Paccayatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. paccaya] the fact of having a cause, causation, causal relation, in phrase idappaccayatā (adv.) from an ascertained cause, by way of cause Vin i.5; D i.185; S i.136; ii.25. Paccayika
Paccayika
(adj.) [fr. paccaya] trustworthy D i.4; S i.150; A ii.209; J vi.384 (paccāyika); Pug 57; DA i.73; SnA 475. Paccaladdhaŋsu
Paccaladdhaŋsu
see paṭilabhati. Paccavidhuŋ & Paccavyādhiŋ
Paccavidhuŋ
& Paccavyādhiŋ see paṭivijjhati. Paccavekkhati
Paccavekkhati
[paṭi+avekkhati] to look upon, consider, review, realise, contemplate, see M i.415; S iii.103; 151 sq., iv.111, 236 sq.; J v.302; Vbh 193, 194 (cp. A iii.323); Miln 16; PvA 62, 277; VvA 6, 48. Paccavekkhana
Paccavekkhana
(nt.) & ˚nā (f.) [paṭi+avekkhana, cp. late Sk. pratyaveksana & ˚nā] looking at, consideration, regard, attention, reflection, contemplation, reviewing (cp. Cpd. 58) M i.415; D iii.278; A iii.27; Pug 21 (a˚); Dhs 390 (a˚ = dhammānaŋ sabhāvaŋ pati na apekkhati DhsA 254, trsl. "inability to consider"); Miln 388; Nett 85; VbhA 140; Vism 43 (twofold); Sdhp 413. Paccavekkhā
Paccavekkhā
(f.) [cp. late Sk. pratyavekṣā] imagination Mbhv 27. Paccasāri
Paccasāri
see paṭisarati. Paccassosi
Paccassosi
see patissuṇāṭi. Paccākata
Paccākata
[pp. of paṭi+a+kṛ] rejected, disappointed Vin iv.237, 238. Paccākoṭita
Paccākoṭita
[pp. of paṭi+ākoṭeti] flattened or smoothed out, pressed, ironed (ākoṭita+of the robes) M i.385; S ii.281; DhA i.37. Paccāgacchati
Paccāgacchati
[paṭi+āgacchati] to fall back on, return again, to go back to (acc.), withdraw, slide back from (˚ to) Vin i.184; M i.265; iii.114; Nd1 108, 312; Kvu 624 (spelt wrongly pacchā˚); PvA 14, 109, 250. Cp. pacceti. Paccāgata
Paccāgata
[pp. of paccāgacchati] gone back, withdrawn J v.120; Miln 125. Paccāgamana
Paccāgamana
(nt.) [fr. paṭi+ā+gam] return, going back, backsliding Miln 246. Paccācamati
Paccācamati
[paṭi+ā+camati; often spelt ˚vamati, but see Trenckner, Miln 425] to swallow up, resorb S v.48 = A v.337; J i.311; Miln 150; Caus. ˚camāpeti Miln 150. Paccācikkhati
Paccācikkhati
[Intens. of paccakkhāti, paṭi+ā+cikkhati of khyā] to reject, repudiate, disallow D iii.3; M i.245, 428; Vin iv.235. Paccājāta
Paccājāta
[pp. of paccājāyati] reborn, come to a new existence D i.62; iii.264; M i.93; Pug 51. Paccājāyati
Paccājāyati
[paṭi+ā+jāyati] to be reborn in a new existence M iii.169; S ii.263; v.466, 474. -- pp. paccājāta (q. v.). Paccāneti
Paccāneti
[paṭi+ā+neti] to lead back to (acc.) Pv ii.116 ( = punar āneti C.). Paccābhaṭṭha
Paccābhaṭṭha
[pp. of paccābhāsati] recited, explained J ii.48. -- 385 -- Paccābhāsati
Paccābhāsati
[paṭi+ābhāsati] to retort, recite, explain, relate PvA 57 (sic lege for pacchā˚). -- pp. paccābhaṭṭha. Paccāmitta
Paccāmitta
[paccā = Sk. pratyak, adv.;+mitta, cp. Ep. Sk. pratyamitra] lit. "back -- friend," adversary, enemy D i.70; A iv.106; J i.488: DA i.182; PvA 155. Paccāropeti
Paccāropeti
[paṭi+āropeti] to show in return, retort, explain M i.96; A iv.193. Cp. paccabhāsati. Paccāsati
Paccāsati
[fr. paṭi+āśā or = paccāsaŋsati or ˚siŋsati?] to ask, beg, pray Pv iv.56 (˚anto for ˚āsaŋsanto? C. explnns by āsiŋsanto). Paccāsanne
Paccāsanne
(adv.) [paṭi+āsanne] near by PvA 216 = 280 Paccāsā
Paccāsā
f. [paṭi+āśā, cp. Sk. pratyāśā] expectation Vin iv.286. Paccāsāreti
Paccāsāreti
[paṭi+ā+sāreti, Caus. of sṛ] to make go (or turn) backward M i.124 = A iii.28 (=paṭinivatteti C.); Vism 308 (sāreti pi p. pi). Paccāsiŋsati
Paccāsiŋsati
[paṭi+āsiŋsati] to expect, wait for, desire, hope for, ask D ii.100; A iii.124; J i.346, 483; iii.176; v.214; DhA i.14; ii.84; DA i.318; VvA 336, 346; PvA 22, 25, 63, 260. Paccāharati
Paccāharati
[paṭi+āharati] to bring back, take back Vin ii.265; iii.140; J iv.304. Paccukkaḍḍhati
Paccukkaḍḍhati
[paṭi+ukkaḍḍhati] to draw out again Vin ii.99. Paccukkaḍḍhana
Paccukkaḍḍhana
(nt.) [fr. preceding] drawing out again Vin v.222. Paccuggacchati
Paccuggacchati
[paṭi+ud+gam] to go out, set out, go out to meet Vin ii.210; M i.206; Sn 442 ( = abhimukho upari gacchati SnA 392). Paccuggata
Paccuggata
[pp. of paccuggacchati] illustrious J vi.280. Paccuggamana
Paccuggamana
(nt.) [fr. preceding] going out to, meeting, receiving J iv.321; PvA 61, 141 (˚ŋ karoti). Paccuṭṭhapanā
Paccuṭṭhapanā
(f.) [paṭi+ud+Caus. of sthā] putting against, resistance, opposition Sn 245 ( = paccanīkaṭ ṭhapanā SnA 228). Paccuṭṭhāti
Paccuṭṭhāti
[paṭi+ud+sthā] to rise, reappear, to rise from one's seat as a token of respect; always combd with abhivadati D i.61 (Pot. ˚uṭṭheyya), 110 (Fut. ˚uṭṭhassati). Paccuṭṭhāna
Paccuṭṭhāna
(nt.) [fr. preceding] rising from one's seat, reverence D i.125. Paccuttarati
Paccuttarati
[paṭi+uttarati, but cp. BSk. pratyavatarati to disembark Divy 229] to go out again, to withdraw S i.8; A iii.190. Cp. paccupadissati. Paccudāvattati
Paccudāvattati
[paṭi+ud+ā+vattati] to return again to (acc.) S i.224; ii.104; A v.337. Paccudāvattana
Paccudāvattana
(nt.) [fr. preceding] coming back, return DhsA 389. Paccudāharati
Paccudāharati
[paṭi+ud+ā+hṛ] recite in reply Th 2, 40. Paccudeti
Paccudeti
[paṭi+ud+i] go out towards J vi.559. Paccuddharati
Paccuddharati
[paṭi+uddharati] to wipe off or down (with a cloth, colakena) Vin ii.122 (udakapuñchaniŋ; trsl. Vin. Texts ii.152 "to wear out a robe"), 151 (gerukaŋ; trsl. Vin. Texts ii.151 "to wipe down"). Paccuddhāra
Paccuddhāra
[paṭi+uddhāra] taking up, casting (the lot) again Vin iv.121. Paccupaṭṭhahati
Paccupaṭṭhahati
[paṭi+upa+sthā] "to stand up before," to be present; only in pp. paccupaṭṭhita and in Caus. paccupaṭṭhāpeti (q. v.). Paccupaṭṭhāna
Paccupaṭṭhāna
(nt.) [fr. paṭi+upa+sthā; cp. Cpd. 13 & Lakkhaṇa] 1. (re) appearance, happening, coming on, phenomenon J iii.524; Nett 28; SnA 509; DhsA 332; ThA 288. 2. tending D iii.191. 3. vv. ll. gilānupaṭṭhāna. Paccupaṭṭhāpeti
Paccupaṭṭhāpeti
[Caus. of paccupaṭṭhahati] 1. to bring before or about, to arrange, provide, instal, fix S iv.121; J iii.45; iv.105; v.211. 2. to minister to, wait upon D iii.189 sq. Paccupaṭṭhita
Paccupaṭṭhita
[pp. of paccupaṭṭhahati; cp. BSk. pratyu- pasthita, Divy Index] (re)presented, offered, at one's disposal, imminent, ready, present D iii.218 (˚kāmā); It 95 (id.); Sn p. 105; It 111; Kvu 157, 280; Miln 123. Paccupadissati
Paccupadissati
[reading uncertain; either paṭi+upadissati, or fut. of paṭi+upadisati, cp. upadaŋseti. It is not to be derived fr. ˚upadadāti] to accept, receive; or: to show, point out J v.221 (v. l. paccuttarissati to go through, perhaps preferable; C. on p. 225 expls by sampaṭicchissati). Paccupalakkhaṇā
Paccupalakkhaṇā
(f.) [paṭi+upalakkhaṇā] differentiation S iii.261 (a˚) Dhs 16 = Pug 25; Dhs 292, 555, 1057. Paccupekkhaṇā
Paccupekkhaṇā
(f.) = paccavekkhaṇā S iii.262 (a˚). Paccupeti
Paccupeti
[pati+upeti] to go up or near to, to approach, serve, beset J iii.214. fut. ˚upessati J iv.362 (gloss upasevati). Paccuppanna
Paccuppanna
[pp. of paṭi+uppajjati, cp. Sk.pratyutpanna] what has arisen (just now), existing, present (as opposed to atīta past & anāgata future) M i.307, 310; iii.188; 190, 196; S i.5; iv.97; A i.264; iii.151, 400; D iii.100, 220, 275; It 53; Nd1 340; Pv iv.62; Dhs 1040, 1043; VbhA 157 sq.; PvA 100. See also atīta. Paccuyyāti
Paccuyyāti
[paṭi+ud+yā] to go out against, to go to meet somebody S i.82, 216. Paccūsa˚
Paccūsa˚
[paṭi+Ved. uṣas f.; later Sk. pratyūṣa nt.] "the time towards dawn," morning, dawn; always. in compn with either ˚kāle (loc.) at morning DhA iv.61; DA i.168; or ˚velāyaŋ (loc.) id. VvA 105, 118, 165; PvA 61; or ˚samaye (loc.) id. S i.107; J i.81, 217; SnA 80; PvA 38. Paccūha
Paccūha
[cp. late Sk. pratyūha, prati+vah] an impedi- ment, obstacle S i.201 (bahū hi saddā paccūhā, trsl. "Ay there is busy to -- and -- fro of words." C. expls by paṭiloma -- saddā); J vi.571. Pacceka
Pacceka
(adj.) [paṭi+eka, cp. BSk. pratyeka Divy 335, 336] each one, single, by oneself, separate, various, several D i.49 (itthi); ii.261 (˚vasavattin, of the 10 issaras); S i.26 (˚gāthā a stanza each), 146 (˚brahma an independent Brahma); A ii.41 (˚sacca); v.29 (id.); Sn 824 (id.), 1009 (˚gaṇino each one having followers = visuŋ visuŋ gaṇavanto SnA 583); J iv.114 (˚bodhiñāṇa); Nd1 58 (˚muni); DA i.148 (paccekā itthiyo); SnA 52 (˚bodhisatta one destined to become a Paccekabuddha), 67 (id.), 73 (˚sambodhi), 476 (niraya a separate or special purgatory); PvA 251 (id.), Sdhp 589 (˚bodhi). -- paccekaŋ (adv.) singly, individually, to each one VvA 282. See also pāṭekka.

-- buddha one enlightened by himself, i. e. one who has attained to the supreme and perfect insight, but dies without proclaiming the truth to the world. M iii.68; S i.92 ("Silent Buddha" trsln); J iii.470; iv.114; Ud 50 (P. Tagarasikhi); Nett 190; KhA 178, 199; SnA 47, 58, 63; DhA i.80, 171, 224, 230; iv.201; PvA 144, 263, 265 ( = isi), 272, 283. Pacceti
Pacceti
[paṭi+i] to come on to, come back to, fig. fall back on, realise, find one's hold in D i.186 ("take for granted," cp. note Dial. i.252); M i.309 (kaŋ hetuŋ), 445 (id.); S i.182 ("believe in," C. icchati pattheti); Sn 662, 788, 800, 803, 840 = 908; Dh 125 (=paṭieti DhA iii.34); Nd1 85, 108 (=paccāgacchati), 114; Pv ii.320 (=avagacchati PvA 87); Nett 93; Miln 125, 313; PvA 116 (bālaŋ), 241 (agree to=paṭijānāti). -> ger. paṭicca (q. v.). Cp. paccāgacchati -- pp. paṭīta (q. v.). -- 386 -- Paccoḍḍita
Paccoḍḍita
[paṭi+oḍḍita] laid in return (of a snare) J ii.183 (v. l. paccoṭṭita). Paccora
Paccora
(adj.) [paṭi+avara, cp. Sk. pratyavara] lower, rt. lower part, hindquarter, bottom (?) A iv.130; DhA i.189. Paccorohaṇī
Paccorohaṇī
(f.) [fr. paccorohati] the ceremony of coming down again (?), approaching or descending to (acc.), esp. the holy fire A v.234 sq., 249 sq., v. 251. Cp. orohaṇa & Sk. pratyavarohaṇa "descent," N. of a cert. Gṛhya celebration (BR.). Paccorohati
Paccorohati
[paṭi+orohati] to come down again, descend D i.50; ii.73; A v.65, 234. Paccosakkati
Paccosakkati
[paṭi+osakkati which is either ava+sakkati (of ṣvaṣk Geiger, P.Gr. § 282 or sṛp Trenckner Notes 60), or apa+sakkati] to withdraw, retreat, go away again D i.230; J i.383; Mhvs 25, 84. Paccosakkanā
Paccosakkanā
(f.) [abstr. fr. paccosakkati] withdrawal, retreat, going back, shrinking from DhsA 151. Pacchaḍḍana
Pacchaḍḍana
(nt.) [pa+chaḍḍana] vomiting, throwing out Sdhp 137. Pacchato
Pacchato
(adv.) [abl. formation fr. *paccha = Ved. paścā & paścāt, fr. Idg. *pos as in Lith. pàs near by, pastaras the last; cp. Av. pasca behind, Lat. post, after] behind, after Dh 348 (=anāgatesu khandhesu DhA iv.63; opp. pure); PvA 56, 74; DhA iii.197 (˚vatti). Often doubled pacchato pacchato, i. e. always or close behind, J ii.123 (opp. purato purato). -- Cp. pacchā & pacchima. Pacchada
Pacchada
[fr. pa+chad, cp. Sk. pracchada] a cover, wrapper; girdle Th 2, 378 ( = uracchada ThA253); DhsA 397 (v. l. for ˚cchāda). Pacchanna
Pacchanna
[pa+channa, of chad] covered, wrapped, hidden Th 1, 299; J iii.129. Pacchā
Pacchā
(adv.) [Vedic paścā & paścāt see pacchato] behind, aft, after, afterwards, back; westward D i.205; Sn 645, 773, 949; Nd1 33 ( = pacchā vuccati anāgataŋ, pure vuccati atītaŋ); Nd2 395; Dh 172, 314, 421; Pv i.111, 115 (opp. purato); ii.99 (=aparabhāge PvA 116); PvA 4, 50, 88; VvA 71.

-- ânutappati [fr. ânutāpa] to feel remorse Pv ii.712; J v.117. -- ânutāpa [cp. Sk. paścattāpa] remorse, repentance Sdhp 288. -- āsa (nt.) [āsa2] "eating afterwards, " i. e. aftermath S i.74 -- gacchati at Kvu 624 see paccā˚. -- gataka going or coming behind J vi.30. -- jāta ( -- paccaya), 11th of the 24 paccayas, q. v. causal relation of posteriority in time. -- nipātin one who retires to rest later than another (opp. pubb' uṭṭhāyin getting up before others) D i.60; iii.191; A iii.37; iv.265, 267 sq.; DA i.168. -- bāhaŋ "arm behind," i. e. with arms (tied) behind one's back D i.245; J i.264; DhA ii.39. -- bhatta "after -- meal," i. e. after the midday meal, either as ˚ŋ (acc. -- adv.) in the afternoon, after the main meal, usually combd with piṇḍapāta. paṭikkanta "returning from the alms -- round after dinner" A iii.320; PvA 11, 16, 38 and passim (cp. BSk. paścādbhakta -- piṇḍapāta -- pratikrānta, see Indexes to AvŚ. & Divy), or as ˚kicca the duties after the midday meal (opp. purebhatta˚) DA i.47 (in detail); SnA 133, 134. -- bhattika one who eats afterwards, i. e. afternoon, when it is improper to eat A iii.220 (khalu˚, q. v.). -- bhāga hind or after part J ii.91; PvA 114. -- bhāsati see paccā˚. -- bhūma belonging to the western country S iii.5. -- bhūmaka id. S iv.312 = A v.263. -- mukha looking westward M iii.5; D ii.207; Th 1, 529; DhA iii.155 (opp. pācīna eastern). -- vāmanaka dwarfed in his hind part J iv.137. -- samaṇa [BSk. paścācchramaṇa & opp. purahśramaṇa AvŚ ii.67, 150; Divy 154, 330, 494] a junior Wanderer or bhikkhu (Thera) who walks behind a senior (Thera) on his rounds. The one accompanying Gotama Buddha is Ānanda Vin i.46; iii.10 (Ānanda); iv.78 (id.); Ud 90 (Nāgasamāla); J iv.123; Miln 15 (Nāgasena); PvA 38, 93 (Ānanda). Pacchāda
Pacchāda
[pa+chāda] cover, covering, wrapper, in phrase nelango setappacchādo S iv.291 = Ud 76=DA i.75= DhsA 397. Pacchānutappati
Pacchānutappati
see under pacchā. Pacchāyā
Pacchāyā
(f.) [pa+chāyā] a place in the shade, shaded part Vin i.180; ii.193; D i.152 ( = chāyā DA i.310); ii.205; A iii.320. Pacchāḷiyaŋ
Pacchāḷiyaŋ
at A iii.76 is of uncertain reading & meaning; in phrase p. khipanti: either "throw into the lap" (?) or (better) read pacchiyaŋ, loc. of pacchi "into the basket" (of the girls & women). Pacchāsa
Pacchāsa
[cp. pacchāli? perhaps fr. pacchā+aś] after- math S i.74. Pacchi
Pacchi
(f.) [etym. doubtful] a basket J i.9, 243; ii.68; iii.21; vi.369 (paṇṇa˚), 560 (phala˚); DhA ii.3; iv.205 (˚pasibbaka). Pacchijjati
Pacchijjati
[pa+chijjati, Pass. of chid] to be cut short, to be interrupted J i.503 (lohitaŋ p.). Pacchijjana
Pacchijjana
(nt.) [fr. last] stopping, interruption J iii.214 (read assu -- pacchijjana -- divaso? passage corrupt.). Pacchita
Pacchita
[pa+chita, Sk. pracchita, pp. of chā, only in combn with prefixes] cut off, skinned J vi.249. Pacchindati
Pacchindati
[pa+chindati] 1. to break up, cut short, put an end to Vin iv.272; J i.119 (kathaŋ ˚itvā), 148 (kathaŋ ˚ituŋ); iv.59; PvA 78 (dānavidhiŋ ˚i). -- 2. to bring up (food), to vomit DhA i.183 (āhāraŋ). Pacchima
Pacchima
(adj.) [Sk. paścima, superl. formation fr. *paśca, cp. pacchato & pacchā] 1. hindmost, hind -- , back -- , last (opp. purima), latest D i.239; M i.23 (˚yāma the last night watch); DA i.45 sq. (id. ˚kicca duties or performances in the 3rd watch, corresp. to purima˚ & majjhima˚); Sn 352; J iv.137 (˚pāda); vi.364 (˚dvāra); PvA 5, 75. -- 2. western (opp. purima or puratthima) D i.153 (disā); S i.145. -- 3. lowest, meanest Vin ii.108; M i.23; S ii.203. Pacchimaka
Pacchimaka
(adj.) [fr. pacchima] 1. last, latest (opp. purimaka) Vin ii.9; Nd2 284 D. = Th 1, 202; DhsA 262; J vi.151. -- 2. lowest, meanest J i.285 (pacchimakā itthiyo). Pacchedana
Pacchedana
(nt.) [fr. pa+chid] breaking, cutting DA i.141. Pajagghati
Pajagghati
[pa+jagghati] to laugh out loud J vi.475. Pajappati
Pajappati
[pa+jappeti] to yearn for, crave, to be greedy after S i.5 = J vi.25 (anāgataŋ=pattheti C.). Pajappā
Pajappā
(f.) [pa+jappā] desire, greed for, longing J vi.25 (anāgata˚); Sn 592; Dhs 1059, 1136. Pajappita
Pajappita
[pp. of pajappeti] desired, longed for S i.181; J vi.359. Pajaha
Pajaha
(adj.) [pa+jaha, pres. base of jahati] only neg. a˚ not giving anything up, greedy A iii.76. Pajahati
Pajahati
(˚jahāti) [pa+jahati of hā] to give up, renounce, forsake, abandon, eliminate, let go, get rid of; freq. as synonym of jahati (see Nd2 under jahati with all forms). Its wide range of application with reference to all evils of Buddhist ethics is seen from exhaustive Index at S vi.57 (Index vol.). -- Pres. pajahati S i.187; iii.33 = Nd2 680, Q 3 (yaŋ na tumhākaŋ taŋ pajahatha); It 32 (kiŋ appahīnaŋ kiŋ pajahāma); 117; A iv.109 sq. (akusalaŋ, sāvajjaŋ); Sn 789 (dukkhaŋ), 1056, 1058; Ps i.63; ii.244. ppr. pajahaŋ S iii.27; fut. pahāssaŋ (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 1511) M ii.100. -- aor. pajahi & pahāsi Vin i.36; S i.12=23 (sankhaŋ); Sn 1057. -- ger. pahāya S i.12 (kāme), 23 (vicikicchaŋ), 188 (nīvaraṇāni), Sn 17, 209, 520 & passim; Nd2 430; PvA 16, 122 (=hitvā), 211; pahatvāna Sn 639, and pajahitvā. fut. pajahissati S ii.226. -- grd. pahātabba M i.7; Sn 558; VvA 73, & pajahitabba -- pp. pahīna (q. v.). -- Pass. pahīyati (q. v.). -- 387 -- Pajā
Pajā
(f.) [Ved. prajā, pra+jan] progeny, offspring, genera- tion, beings, men, world (of men), mankind (cp. use of Bibl. Gr. ge/nnhma in same meaning) D ii.55; S v.346, 362 sq.; A ii.75 sq.; iv.290; v.232 sq., 253 sq.; Sn 298, 545, 654, 684, 776, 936, 1104 ( = sattā Nd2 377); Dh 28, 85, 254, 343 (=sattā DhA iv.49); Nd1 47, 292; Pv ii.117; iv.334; Pug 57; Vism 223 (=pajāyana -- vasena sattā); DhA i.174; PvA 150, 161. -- Very freq. in formula sassamana -- brāhmaṇī pajā "this world with its samaṇas and brāhmans" D i.250; S i.160, 168, 207; ii.170; iii.28, 59; iv.158; v.204, 352; A ii.130; v.204; Sn p. 15; It 121 etc. Pajānanā
Pajānanā
(f.) [fr. pajānāti] knowledge, understanding, discernment; used in exegetical literature as syn. of paññā Nd2 380 = Dhs 16, 20, 555; Pug 25; Nett 28, 54. As nt. ˚a at Vism 436. Pajānāti
Pajānāti
[pa+jānāti] to know, find out, come to know, understand, distinguish D i.45 (yathābhūtaŋ really, truly), 79 (ceto paricca), 162, 249; Sn 626, 726 sq., 987; It 12 (ceto paricca); Dh 402; Pv i.1112 ( = jānāti PvA 60); J v.445; Pug 64. -- ppr. pajānaŋ Sn 884, 1050, 1104 (see expln at Nd1 292=Nd2 378); It 98; Pv iv.164; and pajānanto Sn 1051. -- ger. paññāya (q. v.) -- Caus. paññāpeti; pp. paññatta; Pass. paññāyati & pp. paññāta (q. v.). Cp. sampajāna. Pajāpati
Pajāpati
(˚ī) 1. (adj.) together with his wife Vin i.23, 342; iv.62; J i.345; PvA 20. (m.) [Ved. prajāpati, prajā+pati Lord of all created beings, Lord of Creation] Prajāpati (Np.), the supreme Lord of men, only mentioned in one formula together with Inda & Brahmā, viz. devā saindakā sabrahmakā sapajāpatikā in sense of foll. Also at VbhA 497 with Brahmā. -- 2. prajāpati (f.) [of Ved. prajāvant, adj. -- n. fr. prajā "having (or rich in) progeny," with p for v, as pointed out by Trenckner Notes 6216] "one who has offspring," a chief wife of a man of the higher class (like a king, in which case = "chief queen") or a gahapati, in which case simply "wife"; cp. BSk. prajāpatī "lady" Divy 2, 98. -- Vin i.23; iii.25; iv.18, 258; S ii.243; A i.137 (catasso ˚iyo); iv.210, 214; Vv 416 (=one of the 16,000 chief queens of Sakka VvA 183); DhA i.73; PvA 21, 31. sapajāpatika (adj.) together with his wife Vin i.23, 342; iv.62; J i.345; PvA 20. Pajāyati
Pajāyati
[pa+jāyati] to be born or produced J v.386; vi.14. Pajāyana
Pajāyana
(nt.) [fr. pa+jan] being born Vism 223. Pajja
Pajja1
[cp. Sk. padya] a path, road Sn 514; DA i.262. Pajja
Pajja2
(nt.) [cp. Sk. padya & pādya belonging to the feet, Lat. acupedius swift -- footed; Gr. pezo/s foot -- soldier, see also pattika1] foot -- oil, foot -- salve Vin i.205; D ii.240; J iii.120; iv.396; v.376 ( = pādabbhañjana C.). Pajjati
Pajjati
[pad, Vedic padyate only in meaning "to come to fall," later Sk. also "to go to"] to go, go to; usually not in simplex, but only in compn with prefixes; as āpajjati, uppajjati, nipajjati etc. -- Alone only in one doubtful passage, viz. A iv.362 (vv. ll. paccati, pabbati, gacchati.). -- pp. panna (q. v.). Pajjalati
Pajjalati
[pa+jalati of jval] to burn (forth), blaze up, go into flame Vin i.180; Sn 687 (sikhi pajjalanto); J i.215; ThA 62; PvA 38. -- pp. pajjalita (q. v.). Pajjalita
Pajjalita
[pp. of pajjalati] in flames, burning, blazing S i.133; Sn p. 21 (aggi); Dh 146; PvA 43 (sāṭakā). Pajjunna
Pajjunna
[Ved. parjanya, for etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under quercus & spargo] rain -- cloud J i.332 (p. vuccati megho); iv.253. Otherwise only as Np. of the Rain God D ii.260; S i.29; J i.331. Pajjota
Pajjota
[cp. Ved. pradyota, pra+dyut] light, lustre, splendour, a lamp S i.15, 47; A ii.140; Sn 349; Pug 25; Sdhp 590. -- telapajjota an oil lamp Vin i.16 = D i.85= A i.56 ≈; Sn p. 15. -- dhammapajjota the lamp of the Dhamma Miln 21. paññā -- pajjota the torch of knowledge Dhs 16, 20, 292, 555; VbhA 115. pajjotassa nibbānaŋ the extinguishing of the lamp D ii.157; S i.159; A iv.3. Pajjhāyati
Pajjhāyati
[pa+jhāyati2] to be in flames, to waste, decay, dry up; fig. to be consumed or overcome with grief, disappointment or remorse Vin iii.19; iv.5; A ii.214, 216; iii.57; J iii.534 (pajjhāti metri causa; C = anusocati)=Miln 5. -- ppr. pajjhāyanto downcast, in formula tuṇhībhūto mankubhūto pattakkhandho adhomukho p. M i.132, 258 and passim. Pañca
Pañca
(adj. -- num.) [Ved. pañca, Idg. *penqṷe; cp. Gr. pe/nte, Lat. quīnque, Goth. fimf, Lith. penki, Oir. coic] number 5. -- Cases: gen. dat. pañcannaŋ, instr. abl. pañcahi, loc. pañcasu; often used in compositional form pañca˚ (cp. Ved. pañcāra with 5 spokes i.16413; Gr. pempw/bolos, Lat. quinqu -- ennis etc.). -- 1. Characteristics of No. 5 in its use, with ref, to lit. & fig. application. "Five" is the number of "comprehensive and yet simple" unity or a set; it is applied in all cases of a natural and handy comprehension of several items into a group, after the 5 fingers of the hand, which latter lies at the bottom of all primitive expressions of No. 5 (see also below pañc' angulika. The word for 5 itself in its original form is identical with the word for hand *prəq, cp. Lat. com˚, decem, centum etc.) -

A. No. 5, appld (a) with ref. to time: catupañcāhaŋ 4 or 5 days J ii.114 (cp. quinque diebus Horace Sat i.316); maraṇaŋ tuyhaŋ oraŋ māsehi pañcahi after 5 months Vv 6310, p. māse vasitvā DA i.319 (cp. qu. menses Hor. Sat. ii.3289). -- (b) of space: ˚yojanaṭṭhāna J iii.504; ˚yojan -- ubbedho gajavaro VvA 33; ˚bhūmako pāsādo J i.58 (cp. the house of Death as 5 stories high in Grimm, Mārchen No. 42 ed. Reclam). -- (c) of a group, set, company, etc. (cp. 5 peoples RV iii.379; vi.114; viii.92 etc.; gods x.553; priests ii.3414; iii.77; leaders of the Greek ships Hom. Iliad 16, 171; ambassadors Genesis 472; quinque viri Hor. Sat. ii.555; Epist. ii.124): p. janā J v.230; p. amaccā J v.231; p. hatthino DhA i.164; pañca nāriyo agamiŋsu Vv 322; p. puttāni khādāmi Pv i.63. -- Note. No. 5 in this appln is not so frequent in Pāli as in older literature (Vedas e. g.); instead of the simple 5 we find more freq. the higher decimals 50 and 500. See also below §§ 3, 4.

B. No. 15 in two forms: pañcadasa (f. ˚ī the 15th day of the month Vv 156 = A i.144; Sn 402) VvA 67 (˚kahāpaṇa -- sahassāni dāpesi), and paṇṇarasa (also as f. ī of the 15th or full -- moon day Pv iii.31; DhA i.198; iii.92; iv.202; VvA 314; SnA 78) Sn 153 (pannaraso uposatho); Vv 642 (paṇṇarase va cando; expld as paṇṇarasiyaŋ VvA 276); DhA i.388 (of age, 15 or 16 years); DA i.17 (˚bhedo Khuddaka -- nikāyo); SnA 357 (pannarasahi bhikkhu -- satehi=1500, instead of the usual 500); PvA 154 (˚yojana). The appln is much the same as 5 and 50 (see below), although more rare, e. g. as measure of space: ˚yojana DhA i.17 (next in sequence to paṇṇāsa -- yojana); J i.315; PvA 154 (cp. 15 furlongs from Jerusalem to Bethany John 11, 18; 15 cubits above the mountains rose the flood Gen. 7. 20).

C. No. 25 in two forms: pañcavīsati (the usual) e. g. DhsA 185 sq.; Miln 289 (citta -- dubbalī -- karaṇā dhammā); paṇṇa -- vīsati, e. g. J iv.352 (nāriyo); Th 2, 67, and paṇṇuvīsaŋ (only at J iii.138). Similarly to 15 and 25 the number 45 (pañca -- cattāḷīsa) is favoured in giving distances with ˚yojana, e. g. at J i.147, 348; DhA i.367. -- Application: of 25: (1) time: years J iii.138; DhA i.4; (2) space: miles high and wide DhA ii.64 (ahipeto); VvA 236 (yojanāni pharitvā pabhā).

2. Remarks on the use of 50 and 500 (5000). Both 50 and 500 are found in stereotyped and always recurring combinations (not in Buddhist literature alone, but all over the Ancient World), and applied to any situation indiscriminately. They have thus lost their original numerical significance and their value equals an expression like our "thousands," cp. the use of Lat. mille and 600, also similarly many other high numerals in Pāli literature, as mentioned under respective units (4, 6, 8 e. g. in 14, 16, 18, etc.). Psychologically 500 is to be expld as "a great hand," i. e. the 5 fingers magnified to the 2nd decade, and is equivalent to an expression like "a lot" (originally "only one," cp. casting the lot, then the one as a mass or collection), or like heaps, tons, a great many, etc. -- Thus 50 (and 500) as the numbers of "comm -- union" are especially freq. in recording a company of men, a host of servants, animals in a herd, etc., wherever the single constituents form a larger (mostly impressive, important) whole, as an army, the king's retinue, etc. -- A. No. 50 (paññāsa; the by -- form paṇṇāsa only at DhA iii.207), in foll. applns: (a) of time: does not occur, but see below under 55. -- (b) of space (cp. 50 cubits the breadth of Noah's ark Gen. 6. 15; the height of the gallows (Esther 5. 14; 7. 9) J i.359 (yojanāni); DhA iii.207 (˚hattho ubbedhena rukkho); Vism 417 (paripuṇṇa ˚yojana suriyamaṇḍala); DhA i.17 (˚yojana). -- (c) of a company or group (cp. 50 horses RV ii.185; v.185; wives viii.1936; men at the oars Hom. Il. 2. 719; 16. 170, servants Hom. Od. 7, 103, 22, 421) J iii.220 (corā); v.161 (pallankā), 421 (dijakaññāyo); Sn p. 87; SnA 57 (bhikkhū). -- Note. 55 (pañcapaññāsa) is used instead of 50 in time expressions (years), e. g. at DhA i.125; ii.57; PvA 99, 142; also in groups: DhA i.99 (janā). -- B. No. 500 (pañcasata˚, pañcasatā, pañcasatāni). -- (a) of time: years (as Peta or Petī) Vv 8434; Pv ii.15; PvA 152 (with additional 50). (b) of space: miles high Pv iv.328; J i.204 (˚yojana -- satikā); Vism 72 (˚dhanu -- satika, 500 bows in distance). -- (C) of groups of men, servants, or a herd, etc. (cp. 500 horses RV x.9314; witnesses of the rising of Christ 1 Cor. 15 -- 6; men armed Vergil Aen. 10. 204; men as representatives Hom. Od. 3. 7; 500 knights or warriors very frequently in Nibelungenlied, where it is only meant to denote a "goodly company, 500 or more") Arahants KhA 98; Bhikkhus very frequent, e. g. D i.1; Vin ii.199; J i.116, 227; DhA ii.109, 153; iii.262, 295; iv.184, 186; Sāvakas J i.95; Upāsakas J ii.95; PvA 151; Paccekabuddhas DhA iv.201; PvA 76; Vighāsâdā J ii.95; DhA ii.154; Sons PvA 75; Thieves DhA ii.204; PvA 54; Relatives PvA 179; Women -- servants (parivārikā itthiyo) Pv ii.126; VvA 69, 78, 187; PvA 152; Oxen A iv.41; Monkeys J iii.355; Horses Vin iii.6. -- Money etc. as present, reward or fine representing a "round -- sum" (cp. Nibelungen 314: horses with gold, 317: mark; dollars as reward Grimm No. 7; drachms as pay Hor. Sat. ii.743) kahāpaṇas Sn 980, 982; PvA 273; blows with stick as fine Vin i.247. -- Various: a caravan usually consists of 500 loaded wagons, e. g. J i.101; DhA ii.79; PvA 100, 112; chariots VvA 78; ploughs Sn p. 13. Cp. S i.148 (vyagghī -- nisā); Vin ii.285 (ūna -- pañcasatāni); J ii.93 (accharā); v.75 (vāṇijā); DhA i.89 (suvaṇṇasivikā), 352 (rāja -- satāni); iv.182 (jāti˚) KhA 176 (paritta -- dīpā). Also BSk. pañ'opasthāyikā -- śatāni Divy 529; pañca -- mātrāṇi strī -- śatāni Divy 533. -- Note. When Gotama said that his "religion" would last 500 years he meant that it would last a very long time, practically for ever. The later change of 500 to 5,000 is immaterial to the meaning of the expression, it only indicates a later period (cp. 5,000 in Nibelungeniled for 500, also 5,000 men in ambush Joshua 8. 12; converted by Peter Acts 4. 4; fed by Christ with 5 loaves Matthew 14. 21). Still more impressive than 500 is the expression 5 Koṭis (5 times 100,000 or 10 million), which belongs to a comparatively later period, e. g. at DhA i.62 (ariya -- sāvaka -- koṭiyo), 256 (˚mattā -- ariyasāvakā); iv.190 (p. koti -- mattā ariya -- sāvakā).

3. Typical sets of 5 in the Pali Canon. ˚aggaŋ first fruits of 5 (kinds), viz. khett˚, rās˚, koṭṭh˚, kumbhi˚, bhojan˚ i. e. of the standing crop, the threshing floor, the granary, the pottery, the larder SnA 270. ˚angā 5 gentlemanly qualities (of king or brahmin): sujāta, ajjhāyaka, abhirūpa, sīlavā, paṇḍita (see anga; on another combn with anga see below). The phrase pañc' angasamannāgata & ˚vippahīna (S i.99; A v.16) refers to the 5 nīvaraṇāni: see expld at Vism 146. ˚angikaturiya 5 kinds of music: ātata, vitata, ātata -- vitata, ghana, susira. ˚abhiññā 5 psychic powers (see Cpd. 209). ˚ānantarika -- kammāni 5 acts that have immediate retribution (Miln 25), either 5 of the 6 abhiṭhānas (q. v.) or (usually) murder, theft, impurity, lying, intemperance (the 5 sīlas) cp. Dhs trsl. 267. ˚indriyāni 5 faculties, viz. saddhā, viriya, sati, samādhi, paññā (see indriya B. 15 -- 19). ˚vidhaŋ (rāja -- ) kakudhabhaṇḍaŋ, insignia regis viz. vāḷavījanī, uṇhīsa, khagga, chatta, pādukā. ˚kalyāṇāni, beauty -- marks: kesa˚, maŋsa˚, aṭṭhi˚, chavi˚, vaya˚. ˚kāmaguṇā pleasures of the 5 senses ( = taggocarāni pañc' āyatanāni gahitāni honti SnA 211). ˚gorasā 5 products of the cow: khīra, dadhi, takka, navanīta, sappi. ˚cakkhūni, sorts of vision (of a Buddha): maŋsa˚ dibba˚ paññā˚ buddha˚ samanta˚. ˚taṇhā cravings, specified in 4 sets of 5 each: see Nd2 271v. ˚nikāyā 5 collections (of Suttantas) in the Buddh. Canon, viz. Dīgha˚ Majjhima˚ Saŋyutta˚, Anguttara˚ Khuddaka˚, e. g. Vin ii.287. ˚nīvaraṇāni or obstacles: kāmacchanda, abhijjhā -- vyāpāda, thīnamiddha, uddhacca -- kukkucca, vicikicchā. ˚patiṭṭhitaŋ 5 fold prostration or veneration, viz. with forehead, waist, elbows, knees, feet (Childers) in phrase ˚ena vandati (sometimes ˚ŋ vandati, e. g. SnA 78, 267) J v.502; SnA 267, 271, 293, 328, 436; VvA 6; DhA i.197; iv.178, etc. ˚bandhana either 5 ways of binding or pinioning or 5 fold bondage J iv.3 (as "ure pañcangika -- bandhanaŋ" cp. kaṇṭhe pañcamehi bandhanehi bandhitvā S iv.201); Nda 304iii.b2 (rājā bandhāpeti andhu -- bandhanena vā rajju˚, sankhalika˚, latā˚, parikkhepa˚), with which cp. Śikṣāsamucc. 165: rājñā pañcapāśakena bandhanena baddhaḥ. -- There is a diff. kind of bandhana which has nothing to do with binding, but which is the 5 fold ordeal (obligation: pañcavidhabandhana -- kāraṇaŋ) in Niraya, and consists of the piercing of a red hot iron stake through both hands, both feet and the chest; it is a sort of crucifixion. We may conjecture that this "bandhana" is a corruption of "vaddhana" (of vyadh, or viddhana?), and that the expression originally was pañcaviddhana -- kāraṇa (instead of pañca -- vidha -- bandhana -- k˚). See passages under bandhana & cp. M iii.182; A i.141; Kvu 597; SnA 479. ˚balāni 5 forces: saddhā˚ viriya˚ sati˚ samādhi˚ paññā˚ D ii.120; M ii.12; S iii.96; A iii.12 (see also bala). ˚bhojanāni 5 kinds of food: odāna, kummāsa, sattu, maccha, maŋsa Vin iv.176. ˚macchariyāni 5 kinds of selfishness: āvāsa˚ kula˚ lābha˚ vaṇṇa˚ dhamma˚. ˚rajāni defilements: rūpa˚, sadda˚ etc. (of the 5 senses) Nd1 505; SnA 574. ˚vaṇṇā 5 colours (see ref. for colours under pīta and others), viz. nīla, pītaka, lohitaka, kaṇha, odāta (of B's eye) Nd2 235I.a; others with ref. to paduma -- puṇḍarīka VvA 41; to paduma DhA iii.443; to kusumāni DA i.140; DhA iv.203. ˚vaṇṇa in another meaning (fivefold) in connection with pīti (q. v.). ˚saŋyojanāni fetters (q. v.). ˚sangā impurities, viz. rāga, dosa, moha, māna, diṭṭhi (cp. taṇhā) DhA iv.109. ˚sīla the 5 moral precepts, as sub -- division of the 10 (see dasasīla and Nd2 under sīla on p. 277).

4. Other (not detailed) passages with 5: Sn 660 (abbudāni), 677 (nahutāni koṭiyo pañca); Th 2, 503 (˚kaṭuka = pañcakāmaguṇa -- rasa ThA 291); DhA ii.25 (˚mahānidhi); SnA 39 (˚pakāra -- gomaṇḍala -- puṇṇabhāva). Cp. further: guṇā Miln 249; paṇṇāni Vin i.201 (nimba˚, kuṭaja˚, paṭola˚, sulasi˚, kappāsika˚); Paṇḍu -- rāja -- puttā J v.426; pabbagaṇṭhiyo Miln 103; pucchā DhsA 55; mahā -- pariccāgā DhA iii.441; mahā -- vilokanāni DhA i.84; vatthūni Vin ii.196 sq.; vāhanāni (of King Pajjota) DhA i.196; suddhāvāsā Dhs A 14. In general see Vin v.128 -- 133 (var. sets of 5).

-- anga five (bad) qualities (see anga 3 and above 3), in phrase vippahīna free from the 5 sins D iii.269; Nd2 284 C; cp. BSk. pañcānga -- viprahīna. Ep. of the Buddha Divy 95, 264 & ˚samannāgata endowed with the 5 good qualities A v.15 (of senāsana, expld at Vism 122): see also above. -- angika consisting of 5 parts, fivefold, in foll. combns: ˚jhāna (viz. vitakka, vicāra, pīti, sukha, cittass' ekaggatā) Dhs 83; ˚turiya orchestra S i.131; Th 1, 398; 2, 139; Vv 364; DhA i.274, 394; ˚bandhana bond J iv.3. -- angula = ˚angulika J iv.153 (gandha˚); SnA 39 (usabhaŋ nahāpetvā bhojetvā ˚ŋ datvā mālaŋ bandhitvā). -- angulika (also ˚aka) the 5 finger -- mark, palm -- mark, the magic mark of the spread hand with the fingers extended (made after the hand & 5 fingers have been immersed in some liquid, preferably a solution of sandal wood, gandha; but also blood). See Vogel, the 5 finger -- token in Pāli Literature, Amsterdam Akademie 1919 (with plates showing ornaments on Bharhut Tope), cp. also J.P.T,S. 1884, 84 sq. It is supposed to provide magical protection (esp. against the Evil Eye). Vin ii.123 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.116); J i.166, 192; ii.104 (gandha ˚ŋ deti), 256 (gandhaā, appld to a cetiya); iii.23, 160 (lohita˚); Vv 3318 (gandha˚ŋ adāsiŋ Kassapassa thūpasmiŋ); Mhvs 32, 4 (see trsl. p. 220); DhA iii.374 (goṇānaŋ gandha -- ˚āni datvā); SnA 137 (setamālāhi sabba -- gandha -- sugandhehi p˚akehi ca alankatā paripuṇṇa -- angapaccangā, of oxen). Cp. MVastu i.269 (stūpeṣu pañcangulāni; see note on p. 579). Quotations of similar use in brahmanical literature see at Vogel p. 6 sq. -- āvudha (āyudha) set of 5 weapons (sword, spear, bow, battle -- axe, shield, after Childers) Miln 339 (see Miln trsl. ii.227), cp. p˚ sannaddha J iii.436, 467; iv.283, 437; v.431; vi.75; sannaddha -- p˚ J iv.160 (of sailors). They seem to be different ones at diff. passages. -- âhaŋ 5 days Vin iv.281; J ii.114. -- cūḷaka with 5 topknots J v.250 (of a boy). -- nakha with 5 claws, N. of a five -- toed animal J v.489 (so read for pañca na khā, misunderstood by C.). -- paṭṭhika at Vin ii.117, 121, 152; is not clear (v. l. paṭika). Vin. Texts iii.97 trsl. "cupboards" and connect it with Sk. paṭṭikā, as celapattikaŋ Vin ii.128 undoubtedly is ("strip of cloth laid down for ceremonial purposes," trsl. iii.128). It also occurs at Vin iv.47. -- patikā (f.) having had 5 husbands J v.424, 427. -- mālin of a wild animal J vi.497 (=pancangika -- turiya -- saddo viya C., not clear). -- māsakamattaŋ a sum of 5 māsakas DhA ii.29. -- vaggiya (or ˚ika SnA 198) belonging to a group of five. The 5 brahmins who accompanied Gotama when he became an ascetic are called p. bhikkhū. Their names are Aññākondañña, Bhaddiya, Vappa, Assaji, Mahānāma. M i.170; ii.94; S iii.66; PvA 21 (˚e ādiŋ katvā); SnA 351; cp. chabbaggiya. -- vidha fivefold J i.204 (˚ā abhirakkhā); vi.341 (˚paduma), ˚bandhana: see this. -- sādhāraṇa -- bhāva fivefold connection J iv.7. -- seṭṭha (Bhagavā) "the most excellent in the five" Sn 355 (=pañcannaŋ paṭhamasissānaŋ pañcavaggiyānaŋ seṭṭho, pañcahi vā saddhādīhi indriyehi sīlādīhi vā dhamma -- khandhehi ativisiṭṭhehi cakkhūhi ca seṭṭho SnA 351). -- hattha having 5 hands J v.431. -- 389 -- Pañcaka
Pañcaka
(adj.) [fr. pañca] fivefold, consisting of five J i.116 (˚kammaṭṭhāna); Dhs. chapters 167 -- 175 (˚naya fivefold system of jhāna, cp. Dhs. trsln 52); SnA 318 (˚nipāta of Anguttara). -- nt. pañcakaŋ a pentad, five Vin i.255 (the 5 parts of the kaṭhina robe, see Vin. Texts ii.155), cp. p. 287; pl. pañcakā sets of five Vism 242. The 32 ākāras or constituents of the human body are divided into 4 pañcaka's (i. e. sets of 5 more closely related parts), viz. taca˚ "skin -- pentad," the 5 dermatoid constituents: kesā, lomā, nakhā, dantā, taco; vakka˚ the next five, ending with the kidneys; papphāsa˚ id. ending with the lungs & comprising the inner organs proper; matthalunga˚ id. ending with the brain, and 2 chakka's (sets of 6), viz. meda˚ & mutta˚. See e. g. VbhA 249, 258. Pañcakkhattuŋ
Pañcakkhattuŋ
(adv.) five times. Pañcadhā
Pañcadhā
(adv.) in five ways, fivefold DhsA 351. Pañcama
Pañcama
(adj.) [compar. -- superl. formation fr. pañca, with ˚ma as in Lat. supremus, for the usual ˚to as in Gr. pe/mptos, Lat. quintus, also Sk. pañcathaḥ] num. ord. the fifth D i.88; Sn 84, 99, 101; VvA 102; PvA 52 (˚e māse in the 5th month the Petī has to die); DhA iii.195 (˚e sattāhe in the 5th week). -- f. pañcamā PvA 78 (ito ˚āya jātiyā) and pañcamī Sn 437 (senā); PvA 79 (jāti). Pañcamaka
Pañcamaka
(adj.) = pañcama J i.55. Pañcaso
Pañcaso
(adv.) by fives. Pañja
Pañja
[is it to be puñja?] heap, pile A ii.75 (meaning different?); Cp. i.1016. Pañjara
Pañjara
(m. & nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. pañjara, which probably belongs to Lat. pango, q. v. Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.] a cage, J i.436; ii.141; iii.305 (sīha˚); iv.213; v.232 (sīha), 365; vi.385 (sīha˚), 391; Miln 23 (˚antaragata gone into the c.); 27; DhA i.164 (nakha˚), where meaning is "frame"; VbhA 238; +sīha˚ meaning window. Pañjali
Pañjali
(adj.) [pa+añjali. Cp. Ep. Sk. prāñjali] with outstretched hands, as token of reverence Sn 1031; in cpd. pañjalī -- kata (cp. añjalīkata; añjali+pp. of kṛ) raising one's folded hands Sn 566, 573; Th 1, 460; J vi.501. Cp. BSk. prāñjalīkṛta MV astu ii.257, 287, 301. Pañjalika
Pañjalika
(adj.) [fr. pañjali] holding up the clasped hands as token of respectful salutation S i.226; Sn 485, 598. Pañjasa
Pañjasa
(adj.) [pa+añjasa] in the right order, straight A ii.15. Pañña
Pañña
( -- ˚) (adj.) [the adj. form of paññā] of wisdom, en- dowed with knowledge or insight, possessed of the highest cognition, in foll. cpds.: anissaraṇa˚ D i.245; S ii.194; iv.332; anoma˚ Sn 343; appa˚ S i.198; J ii.166; iii.223, 263; avakujja˚ A i.130; gambhīra˚ S i.190; javana˚ S i.63; Nd2 235; tikkha˚; dup˚ D iii.252, 282; S i.78, 191; ii.159 sq.; M iii.25; A ii.187 sq.; Dh 111, 140; Pug 13; DhA ii.255; nibbedhika˚ S i.63; A ii.178; Nd2 235; puṭhu˚ ibid.; bhāvita˚ S iv.111; A v.42 sq.; bhūri˚ S iii.143; iv.205; manda˚ VbhA 239; mahā˚ S i.63, 121; ii.155; A i.23, 25; ii.178 sq.; Nd2 235; SnA 347; sap˚ S i.13, 22, 212; iv.210; A iv.245; Pv i 88; 115; PvA 60 ( = paṇḍita), 131 (+buddhimant); suvimutta˚ A v.29 sq.; hāsa˚ S i.63, 191; v.376; Nd2 235. By itself (i. e. not in cpd.) only at Dh 208 (=lokiyalokuttara -- paññāya sampanna DhA iii.172) and 375 (=paṇḍita DhA iv.111). Paññatā
Paññatā
(f.) [secondary abstract formation fr. paññā, in meaning equal to paññāṇa] having sense, wisdom A iii.421 (dup˚ = foolishness) v.159 (id.); mahā˚, puthu˚, vipula˚ A i.45. See also paññatta2. Paññatta
Paññatta1
[pp. of paññāpeti, cp. BSk. prajñapta] pointed out, made known, ordered, designed, appointed, ordained S ii.218; A i.98, 151; iv.16, 19; v.74 sq.; Pv iv.135; DhA i.274; VvA 9 (su˚ mañca -- pītha), 92 (niccabhatta); PvA 78. Esp. freq. in ster. formula paññatte āsane nisīdi he sat down on the appointed (i. e. special) chair (seat) D i.109, 125, 148; S i.212; Dh 148; SnA 267; PvA 16, 23, 61. -- 390 -- Paññatta
Paññatta2
(nt.) [abstr. fr. paññā] wisdom, sense etc. S v.412 (v. l. paññatā). See also paññatā. Paññatti
Paññatti
(f.) [fr. paññāpeti, cp. paññatta1] making known, manifestation, description, designation, name, idea, notion, concept. On term see Cpd. 3 sq., 198, 199; Kvu trsln 1; Dhs trsln 340. -- M iii.68; S iii.71; iv.38 (māra˚), 39 (satta˚, dukkha˚, loka˚); A ii.17; v.190; Ps ii.171, 176; Pug 1; Dhs i.309; Nett 1 sq., 38, 188; KhA 102, 107; DA i.139; SnA 445, 470; PvA 200. The spelling also occurs as paṇṇatti, e. g. at J ii.65 (˚vahāra); Miln 173 (loka˚); KhA 28; adj. paṇṇattika (q. v.). Paññavant
Paññavant
(adj.) [paññā+vant, with reduction of ā to a see Geiger, P.Gr. § 23] possessed of insight, wise, intelligent, sensible Vin i.60; D iii.237, 252, 265, 282, 287; M i.292; iii.23; S i.53, 79; ii.159 sq., 207, 279 (daharo ce pi p.); iv.243; v.100, 199, 392, 401; A ii.76, 187, 230; iii.2 sq., 127, 183; iv.85, 217, 271, 357; v.25, 124 sq.; Sn 174; Nd2 259; Dh 84; J i.116; Pug 13; DhA ii.255; KhA 54; VbhA 239, 278; PvA 40. Cp. paññāṇavant. Paññā
Paññā
(f.) [cp. Vedic prajñā, pa+jñā] intelligence, comprising all the higher faculties of cognition, "intellect as conversant with general truths" (Dial. ii.68), reason, wisdom, insight, knowledge, recognition. See on term Mrs. Rh. D. "Buddhism" (1914) pp. 94, 130, 201; also Cpd. 40, 41, 102 and discussion of term at Dhs. trsl. 17, 339, cp. scholastic definition with all the synonyms of intellectual attainment at Nd2 380 = Dhs 16 (paññā pajānanā vicayo etc.). As tt. in Buddhist Psych. Ethics it comprises the highest and last stage as 3rd division in the standard "Code of religious practice" which leads to Arahantship or Final Emancipation. These 3 stages are: (1) sīla -- kkhandha (or ˚sampadā), code of moral duties; (2) samādhi -- kkhandha (or cittasampadā) code of emotional duties or practice of concentration & meditation; (3) paññā -- kkhandha (or ˚sampadā) code of intellectual duties or practice of the attainment of highest knowledge. (See also jhāna1.) They are referred to in almost every Suttanta of Dīgha 1. (given in extenso at D i.62 -- 85) and frequently mentioned elsewhere, cp. D ii.81, 84, 91 (see khandha, citta & sīla). -- D i.26=162 (˚gatena caranti diṭṭhigatāni), 174 (˚vāda), 195 (˚pāripūrin); ii.122 (ariyā); iii.101, 158, 164, 183, 230, 237, 242, 284 sq.; S i.13=165 (sīla, citta, paññā), 17, 34, 55; ii.185 (sammā˚), 277; v.222 (ariyā); M i.144 (id.); iii.99 (id.), 245 (paramā), 272 (sammā˚); A i.61, 216; ii.1 (ariyā); iv.105 (id.); iii.106 (sīla, citta, p.), 352 (kusalesu dhammesu); iv.11 (id.); v.123 sq.; It 35, 40 (˚uttara), 51 (sīlaṃ samādhi p. ca), 112 (ariyā˚); Sn 77, 329, 432, 881, 1036 and passim; Dh 38, 152, 372; Nd1 77; Nd2 380; Ps i.53, 64 sq., 71 sq., 102 sq., 119; ii.150 sq., 162, 185 sq.; Pug 25, 35, 54 (˚sampadā); Dhs 16, 20, 555; Nett 8, 15, 17, 28, 54, 191; VbhA 140, 396; PvA 40 (paññāya abhāvato for lack of reason); Sdhp 343. On paññāya see sep. article. See also adhipanna (adhisīla, adhicitta+).

-- âdhipateyya the supremacy of wisdom A ii.137. -- indriya the faculty of reason (with sati˚ & samādhi˚) D iii.239, 278; Dhs 16, 20 etc.; Nett. 7, 15 sq; 191. -- obhāsa the lustre of wisdom Ps i.119; Dhs 16, 20 etc. -- kkhandha the code of cognition (see above) Vin i.62; D iii.229, 279; It 51; Nd1 21; Nett 70, 90, 128. It is always combd with sīla˚ & samādhi -- kkhandha. -- cakkhu the eye of wisdom (one of the 5 kinds of extraordinary sight of a Buddha: see under cakkhumant) D iii.219; S v.467; It 52; Nd1 354; Nd2 235. -- dada giving or bestowing wisdom S i.33; Sn 177. -- dhana the treasure of perfect knowledge (one of the 7 treasures, see dhana) D iii.163, 251; A iii.53; VvA 113. -- nirodhika tending to the destruction of reason S v.97; It 82. -- paṭilābha acquisition of wisdom S v.411; A i.45; Ps ii.189. -- pāsāda the stronghold of supreme knowledge Dh 28 ( = dibba -- cakkhuŋ sankhātaŋ ˚ŋ). -- bala the power of reason or insight, one of the 5 powers D iii.229, 253; M iii.72; A iv.363; Sn 212; Dhs 16, 20 etc.; Nett 54, 191; VvA 7. -- bāhulla wealth or plenty of wisdom S v.411; A i.45. -- bhūmi ground or stage of wisdom; a name given to the Paṭicca -- samuppāda by Bdhgh at Vism xvii, pp. 517 sq. (˚niddesa). -- ratana the gem of reason or knowledge Dhs 16, 20 etc. -- vimutta freed by reason D ii.70; iii.105, 254; M i.35, 477; A i.61; ii.6; iv.452; Sn 847; Nd1 207; Kvu 58; Nett 199. -- vimutti emancipation through insight or knowledge (always paired with ceto -- vimutti) D i.156, 167; iii.78, 102, 108, 132, 281; It 75, 91; Sn 725, 727; Nett 7, 40, 81, 127; DA i.313; VbhA 464. -- visuddhi purity of insight D iii.288. -- vuddhi increase of knowledge S v.97, 411; A i.15, 45; ii.245. -- sampadā the blessing of higher knowledge (see above) A i.62; ii.66; iii.12 sq., 182 sq.; iv.284, 322. -- sīla conduct and (higher) intelligence Dh 229 (˚samāhita=lokuttarapaññāya c' eva pārisuddhisīlena ca samannāgata DhA iii.329); Vv 3423 id.=ariyāya diṭṭhiyā ariyena sīlena ca sāmannāgata VvA 155). Often used with yathābhūtaŋ q. v. Cp. paññāya. Paññāṇa
Paññāṇa
(nt.) [pa+ñāṇa, cp. Vedic prajñāno in both meanings & paññā] 1. wisdom, knowledge, intelligence D i.124 (sīla+); S i.41; A iv.342; Sn 96, 1136; DA i.171, 290. -- 2. mark, sign, token J v.195. Paññāṇavant
Paññāṇavant
(adj.) [paññāṇa+vant] reasonable, sensible, wise Sn 202, 1090; J v.222; vi.361; Nd2 382. Paññāta
Paññāta
[pp. of pajānāti] known, renowned DA i.143; ap˚ unknown, defamed Vin iv.231; S iv.46; A iii.134 (where also der. appaññātika). Paññāpaka
Paññāpaka
(adj. n.) [fr. paññāpeti] one who advises, assigns or appoints Vin ii.305 (āsana˚). Paññāpana
Paññāpana
(nt.) [fr. paññāpeti] disclosure, discovering M iii.17; S iii.59; declaration DhsA 11. Paññāpetar
Paññāpetar
[n. ag. of paññāpeti] one who imparts know- ledge, discloser of truths, discoverer D ii.223. Paññāpeti
Paññāpeti
[Caus. of pajānāti] 1. to make known, declare, point out, appoint, assign, recognise, define D i.119 (brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇaŋ), 180, 185, 237; It 98 (tevijjaŋ brāhmaṇaŋ), Pug 37, 38; PvA 61 (āsanaŋ). -- 2. to lay down, fold out, spread PvA 43 (sanghāṭiŋ). -- pp. paññatta (q. v.). -- Caus. II. paññāpāpeti J iii.371. Paññāya
Paññāya
(indecl.) [ger. of pajānāti, in relation ˚ñāya: ñatvā as uṭṭhāya: ṭhatvā; so expld by P. Commentators, whereas modern interpreters have taken it as instr. of paññā] understanding fully, knowing well, realising, in full recognition, in thorough realisation or understanding. Used most frequently with yathābhūtaŋ (q. v.) S i.13 (bhāveti), 44 (lokasmiŋ pajjoto), 214 (parisujjhati); ii.7 sq. (uppajjati), 68 (suppaṭividdho); iii.6 (id.); v.324 (ajjhupekkhati); A i.125 (anuggahissati); iii.44 (vaḍḍhati); iv.13 sq. (pariyogāhamāna); v.39 (disvā) Sn 1035 (see Nd2 380ii); It 93 (moh'aggiŋ, v. l. saññāya); PvA 60 (upaparikkhitvā, as expln of ñatvā), 140 = viceyya. Paññāyati
Paññāyati
[Pass. of pajānāti] to be (well) known, to be clear or evident, to be perceived, seen or taken for, to appear It 89; DhA i.14, 95 (fut. paññāyissatha you will be well known); ii.75; PvA 83 (pālito eva), 166 (dissati+); ppr. paññāyamāna DhA i.29; PvA 96 ( = perceivable). -- aor. paññāyi PvA 172 (paccakkhato). -- 391 -- Pañha
Pañha
[Ved. praśna, for details of etym. see pucchati] mode of asking, inquiry, investigation, question D i.11 (deva˚) M i.83; iii.30; A i.103, 288; iii.81, 191 sq., 419 sq.; v.50 sq.; Sn 512, 957, 1005, 1024, 1148 etc., Nd1 464; Miln 28, 340; DA i.97. pañhaŋ pucchati to ask a question Nd2 under pucchā (q. v.).

-- paṭibhāna an answer to a question M i.83; Miln 28. -- vīmaŋsaka one who tests a question Sn 827; Nd1 166; SnA 538. -- vyākaraṇa mode of answering questions, of which there are 4, viz. ekaŋsa "direct," vibhajja "qualified," paṭipucchā "after further questioning," ṭhapanīya "not to be answered or left undecided," thus enumd at D iii.229; A i.197 sq.; ii.46; Miln 339. Paṭa
Paṭa
[cp. Epic Sk. paṭa, etym. unknown, prob. dialec- tical] cloth; cloak, garment S ii.219 (˚pilotika); Th 1, 1092 (bhinna -- paṭan -- dhara "wearing the patchwork cloak" trsl.); J iv.494; KhA 45, 58 (˚tantu); DA i.198; DhA ii.45 (puppha˚); iii.295 ˚kañcuka, v. l. kaṭak˚); Vism 16 (bhinna -- paṭa -- dhara in defn of bhikkhu); VbhA 327 (id.); DhsA 81 (paṭa -- paṭa sadda); VvA 73, 201; PvA 185. Cp. paṭikā & paṭalikā; also kappaṭa. Paṭaggi
Paṭaggi
[paṭi+aggi] counter -- fire Vin ii.138; J i.212; kacc. 31. Paṭanga
Paṭanga
[cp. *Sk. phaḍingā, but influenced by Sk. pataga a winged animal, bird] a grasshopper Sn 602; J vi.234, 506; Miln 272, 407; DhA iv.58; PvA 67; Pgdp 59. Paṭaccarin
Paṭaccarin
(adj.) [paṭa+carin but cp. Sk. pāṭaccara a shoplifter Halāyudha 2, 185] poor (lit. dressed in old clothes): so read perhaps at J vi.227 (vv. ll paḷaccari & paṭiccari). Paṭala
Paṭala
(nt.) [connected with paṭa, cp. Sk. paṭala in meaning "section" Vedic, in all other meanings later Sk.] 1. a covering, membrane, lining, envelope, skin, film Vism 257 (maŋsa˚ of the liver, where KhA 54 reads maŋsa -- piṇḍa), 359 (phaṇa˚); DhsA 307 (7 akkhi˚ membranes of the eye); KhA 21 (samuppaṭana), 55 (udara˚ mucous membrane of the stomach), 61 (id.); DhsA 330 (id.); SnA 248 (id.); PvA 186 (eka˚ upāhanā, singlelined, cp. paṭalika & palāsika & see Morris J.P.T.S. 1887, 165); Vism 446 (kappāsa˚ film of cotton seed); Bdhd 66 (id.). -- 2. roof, ceiling PvA 52 (ayo˚ of iron). -> 3. a heap, mass (esp. of clouds) J i.73 (megha˚); DhsA 239 (abbha˚). -- madhu˚ honey comb J i.262; DhA i.59; iii.323. -- 4. cataract of the eye Dāvs v.27. Paṭalika
Paṭalika
(adj.) [fr. paṭala] belonging to a cover or lining, having or forming a cover or lining, as adj. said of sandals (eka˚ with single lining) J ii.277 (v. l. for ekatalika); iii.80, 81 (id.). -- as n. f. paṭalikā a woven cloth, a woollen coverlet (embroidered with flowers), usually combd with paṭikā Vin i.192; ii.162; D i.7 ( = ghana -- puppho uṇṇāmayo attharako. So āmilākapaṭṭo ti pi vuccati DA i.87); A i.137, 181; iii.50, iv.94, 231, 394. Paṭaha
Paṭaha
[cp. Epic Sk. paṭaha, dial.] a kettle -- drum, war drum, one of the 2 kinds of drums (bheri) mentioned at DhsA 319, viz. mahā -- bheri & p. -- bheri; J i.355; Dpvs 16, 14; PvA 4. Paṭāka
Paṭāka
(nt.) [cp. Sk. paṭāka, connected with paṭa] a flag M i.379; Miln 87; Vism 469; ThA 70. Paṭāṇi
Paṭāṇi
at Vin iv.46 (paṭāṇi dinnā hoti) is not clear, it is expld by Bdhgh as "mañcapidhānaŋ (for ˚pīṭhānaŋ) pādasikhāsu āṇi dinno hoti." At DA i.77 we find the foll. . "visūkaŋ paṭāni (sic.) -- bhūtaŋ dassanan ti visūkadassanaŋ, " and at DhsA 393: "paṭāni -- gahaṇaŋ gahetvā ekapaden' eva taŋ nissaddaŋ akāsiŋ." Paṭi
Paṭi
(indecl.) [Ved, prati, to Idg. *preti as in Lat. pretium (fr. *pretios)" price" (cp. precious), i. e. equiva- lent; Gr. pre/s (aeol.), proti/, pro/s against] directional prefix in well -- defined meaning of "back (to), against, towards, in opposition to, opposite." As preposition (with acc. and usually postponed) towards, near by, at; usually spelt pati (cp. sampati & sampaṭika) Sn 291 (?), 425 (Nerañjaram (pati); Th 1, 628 (suriyass' uggamanam p.); 2, 258 (abhiyobbanam p.), 306 (Nerañjaram p.); J i.457 (paṭi suriyaŋ thatvā standing facing the sun); iv.93; vi.491; Pv ii.941 (suriy' uggamanam p.); Miln 116 (dānam p.); PvA 154 (paṭi Gangaŋ against the G.). -- Most freq. combns are: paṭi+ā (patiyā˚), patisaŋ˚; vi+paṭi˚, sampaṭi˚. The composition (assimilation -- ) form before vowels is pacc˚ (b. v.). -- Meanings. I. (lit.) "back," in the sense of: (1) against, in opposition (opp. anu, see below III.), contrary: viz. (a) often with the implication of a hostile attack (anti -- . against): ˚kaṇṭaka, ˚kosati (re -- ject), ˚kūla, ˚khipati (re -- fuse, op -- pose), ˚gha, ˚codeti (re -- prove), thambhati, ˚disā, ˚deseti, ˚pakkha, ˚patha, ˚piŋsati, ˚pīḷita, ˚magga, ˚manteti, ˚yodha (at -- tack), ˚vacana (re -- ply), ˚vadati, ˚vedeti, ˚sattu (enemy), ˚suṇāti, ˚hata; -- (b) warding off, protecting against (counter -- , anti -- ): ˚kara (antidote), ˚sedhati (ward -- off). -- (c) putting against, setting off in a comparison (counter -- , rival): ˚puggala (one's equal), ˚purisa (rival), ˚bala (adequate), ˚bimba (counterpart), ˚bhāga (id.); ˚malla (rival wrestler), ˚sama, ˚sāsana, ˚sūra, ˚seṭṭha; -- (d) close contact (against, be -- ): ˚kujjita (covered), ˚gādha, ˚channa ("be -- deckt") ˚vijjhana. -- (2) in return, in exchange (in revenge) ˚akkosati, ˚āneti, ˚katheti, ˚karoti, ˚kūṭa1, ˚kkamati, ˚khamāpeti, ˚gāti (sing in response), ˚gīta, ˚daṇḍa (retribution), ˚dadāti, ˚dāna, ˚nivāsana, ˚paṇṇa (in reply), ˚pasaŋsati, ˚piṇḍa, ˚pucchati (ask in return), ˚māreti (kill in revenge), ˚bhaṇḍa (goods in exchange), ˚bhaṇḍati (abuse in return) ˚rodana, ˚roseti, ˚vera (revenge), ˚sammodeti, ˚sātheyya. -- (3) (temporal) again, a second time (re -- ): ˚dasseti (re -- appear), ˚nijjhatta, ˚nivattati, ˚pavesati, ˚pākatika (re -- stored), ˚bujjhati, ˚vinicchinati, ˚sañjīvita (re -- suscitated), ˚sandhi (re -- incarnation), ˚sammajjati. -- (4) away from, back to (esp. in compn paṭivi˚): ˚kuṭati (shrink back), ˚ghāta (repulsion), ˚dhāvati, ˚neti, ˚paṇāmeti (send away), ˚bandhati (hold back), ˚bāhati (id.), ˚vijacchati, ˚vineti, ˚vinodeti (drive out), ˚virata, ˚saŋharati, ˚sallīna, ˚sutta, ˚sumbhita. -- II. (applied, in reflexive sense): (1) to, on to, up to, towards, at -- : ˚oloketi (look at), ˚gijjha (hankering after) ˚ggaha, ˚jānāti ˚pūjeti, ˚peseti (send out to), ˚baddha (bound to), ˚bhaya, ˚yatta, ˚rūpa, ˚laddha, ˚labhati (at -- tain), ˚lābha ˚lobheti, ˚sāmeti, ˚sevati (go after), ˚ssata. (2) together (con -- , com -- ), esp. combd with ˚saŋ˚; ˚saŋyujati; ˚passaddha, ˚maṇḍita, ˚sankharoti, ˚santhāra. -- (3) asunder, apart ("up"): ˚kopeti (shake up), ˚viŋsa (part), ˚vibhatta (divided up). (4) secondary, complementary, by -- , sham (developed out of meaning I. 1 c.): ˚nāsikā (a false nose), ˚sīsaka (sham top knot); esp. freq. in redupl. (iterative) cpds., like anga -- paccanga (limb & by -- limb, i. e. all kinds of limbs), vata -- paṭivatta (duties & secondary duties, all duties). In the latter application paṭi resembles the use of ā, which is more frequent (see ā5). -- III. The opposite of pati in directional meaning is anu, with which it is freq. combd either (a) in neg. contrast or (b) in positive emphasis, e. g. (a) anuvātaŋ paṭivātaŋ with and against the wind; anuloma+paṭiloma with and against the grain; ˚sotaŋ w. & against the stream; (b) anumasati paṭimasati to touch cloesly (lit. up & down). -- Note. The spelling pati for paṭi occurs frequently without discrimination; it is established in the combn with sthā (as patiṭṭhāti, patiṭṭhita etc.). All cases are enumd under the respective form of paṭi˚, with the exception of patiṭṭh˚ Paṭiāneti
Paṭi
-- āneti [paṭi+ā+nī] to lead or bring back, in dup- paṭi -- ānaya difficult to bring back J iv.43. Paṭiorohati
Paṭi
-- orohati [paṭi+ava+ruh] to descend from DA i.251 (˚itvā). -- 392 -- Paṭikankhati
Paṭikankhati
[paṭi+kānkṣ] to wish for, long for S i.227. adj. ˚kankhin M i.21. See also pāṭikankhin. Paṭikacca
Paṭikacca
(indecl.) [so read for ˚gacca as given at all passages mentioned, see Trenckner Miln p. 421, & Geiger Pr. § 381. -- ger. fr. paṭikaroti (q.v.), cp. Sk. pratikāra in same meaning "caution, remedy"] 1. previously (lit. as cautioned) Vin iv.44; Miln 48 (v. l. ˚kacca) usually as paṭigacc' eva, e.g. Vin i.342; D ii.118. -- (2) providing for (the future), preparing for, with caution, cautiously Vin ii.256; S i.57; v.162; A ii.25; D ii.144; Th 1, 547; J iii.208; iv.166 (in expln of paṭikata & paṭikaroti); v.235. Paṭikaṇṭaka
Paṭikaṇṭaka
[paṭi+kantaka4] an enemy, adversary, robber, highwayman J i.186; ii.239; DhA iii.456 (v. l. ˚kaṇḍaka). Paṭikata
Paṭikata
[pp. of paṭikaroti] "done against," i. e. provided or guarded against J iv.166. Paṭikatheti
Paṭikatheti
[paṭi+katheti] to answer, reply J vi.224; DA i.263. Paṭikampati
Paṭikampati
[paṭi+kampati] to shake; pret. paccakam- pittha J v.340. Paṭikamma
Paṭikamma
(nt.) [paṭi+kamma, cp. paṭikaroti] redress, atonement A i.21 (sa˚ & a˚ āpatti) Miln 29; DA i.96. Paṭikara
Paṭikara
[fr. paṭi+kṛ] counteracting; requital, compensa- tion Vin iv.218 (a˚); D i.137 (ovāda˚ giving advice or providing for? v. l. pari˚); iii.154. Paṭikaroti
Paṭikaroti
[paṭi+karoti) 1. to redress, repair, make amends for a sin, expiate (āpattiŋ) Vin i.98, 164; ii.259; iv.19; S ii.128 = 205; A v.324; DhA i.54. -- 2. to act against, provide for, beware, be cautious J iv.166. -> 3. to imitate J ii.406. -- ger. paṭikacca (q. v.). -- pp. paṭikata (q. v.). Paṭikassana
Paṭikassana
(nt.) [paṭi+kṛṣ] drawing back, in phrase mūlāya p. "throwing back to the beginning, causing to begin over & over again" Vin ii.7, 162; A i.99. Paṭikassati
Paṭikassati
[paṭi+kassati] to draw back, remove, throw back Vin i.320 (mūlāya); ii.7 (id.). Paṭikā
Paṭikā
(f.) [Sk. paṭikā dial. fr. paṭa cloth] a (white) woollen cloth (: uṇṇāmayo set' attharako DA i.86) D i.7; A i.137, 181; iii.50; iv.94, 231, 394; Dāvs v.36. See also paṭiya. Paṭikāra
Paṭikāra
[paṭi+kṛ] counteraction, remedy, requital Sdhp 201, 498; usually neg. app˚ adj. not making good or which cannot be made good, which cannot be helped Vin iv.218 ( = anosārita p. 219); PvA 274 (maraṇa) Cp. foll. Paṭikārika
Paṭikārika
(adj.) [fr. preceding] of the nature of an amend- ment; app˚ not making amends, not making good J v.418. Paṭikiṭṭha
Paṭikiṭṭha
inferior, low, vile A i.286 = Dh i.144; in meaning "miserable" at DhA ii.3 is perhaps better to be read with v. l. as pakkiliṭṭha, or should it be paṭikuṭṭha? Paṭikibbisa
Paṭikibbisa
(nt.) [paṭi+kibbisa] wrong doing in return, retaliation J iii.135. Paṭikirati
Paṭikirati
[paṭi+kirati] to strew about, to sprawl Pv iv.108 (uttānā paṭikirāma = vikirīyamān'angā viya vattāma PvA 271). Paṭikiliṭṭha
Paṭikiliṭṭha
(adj.) [paṭi+kiliṭṭha] very miserable PvA 268 (v. l.); and perhaps at DhA ii.3 for paṭikiṭṭha (q. v.). Paṭikujjati
Paṭikujjati[paṭi+kubj,
see kujja & cp. patikuṭati] to bend over, in or against, to cover over, to enclose D ii.162; M i.30; A iii.58. Caus. ˚eti J i.50, 69. -- pp. paṭikujjita (q. v.). Paṭikujjana
Paṭikujjana
(nt.) [fr. paṭi+kubj] covering, in ˚phalaka covering board, seat KhA 62 (vacca -- kuṭiyā). Paṭikujjita
Paṭikujjita
[pp. of paṭikujjeti] covered over, enclosed A i.141; Th 1, 681; J i.50, 69; v.266; Pv i.1013 ( = upari pidahita PvA 52); DhsA 349. Paṭikujjhati
Paṭikujjhati
[paṭi+krudh] to be angry in return S i.162 = Th 1, 442. Paṭikuṭati
Paṭikuṭati
[paṭi+kuṭ as in kuṭila, cp. kuc & paṭikujjati] to turn in or over, to bend, cramp or get cramped; fig. to shrink from, to refuse A iv.47 sq. (v. l. ˚kujjati); Miln 297 (pati˚; cp. Miln trsln ii.156); Vism 347 (v. l. BB; T. ˚kuṭṭati); DhA i.71; ii.42. -- Caus. patikoṭṭeti (q. v.). -- pp. paṭikuṭita (q. v.). See also paṭilīyati. Paṭikuṭita
Paṭikuṭita
[pp. of paṭikuṭati] bent back, turned over (?) Vin ii.195 (reading uncertain, vv. ll. paṭikuṭṭiya & paṭikuṭiya). Paṭikuṭṭha
Paṭikuṭṭha
[pp. of paṭi+kruś, see paṭikkosati & cp. BSk. pratikruṣṭa poor Divy 500] scolded, scorned, defamed, blameworthy, miserable, vile Vin i.317; PvA 268 (v. l. paṭikiliṭṭha); as neg. app˚ blameless, faultless S iii.71-> 73; A iv.246; Kvu 141, 341. See also paṭikiṭṭha. Paṭikuṇika
Paṭikuṇika
(adj.) [for ˚kuṭita?] bent, crooked PvA 123 (v. l. kuṇita & kuṇḍita). Paṭikuṇṭhita
Paṭikuṇṭhita
[cp. kuṇṭhita] = pariguṇṭhita (q. v.); covered, surrounded J vi.89. Paṭikuttaka
Paṭikuttaka
[or uncertain etym.; paṭi+kuttaka?] a sort of bird J vi.538. Paṭikubbara
Paṭikubbara
[paṭi+kubbara] the part of the carriage -- pole nearest to the horse(?) A iv.191. Paṭikulyatā
Paṭikulyatā
(f.) [fr. paṭikūla, perhaps better to write patik- kulyatā] reluctance, loathsomeness M i.30; A v.64. Other forms are paṭikūlatā, pāṭikkūlyatā, & pāṭikulyā (q. v.). Paṭikūṭa
Paṭikūṭa
(nt.) [paṭi+kūṭa1] cheating in return J ii.183. Paṭikūlatā
Paṭikūlatā
(f.) [fr. paṭikkūla] disgustiveness Vism 343 sq. Paṭikeḷanā
Paṭikeḷanā
see parikeḷanā; i. e. counter -- playing Dh i.286. Paṭikoṭṭeti
Paṭikoṭṭeti
[paṭi+koṭṭeti as Caus. of kuṭati] to bend away, to make refrain from M i.115; S ii.265 (cp. id. p. A iv.47 with trs. ˚kuṭati & v. l. ˚kujjati which may be a legitimate variant). The T. prints pati˚. Paṭikopeti
Paṭikopeti
[paṭi+kopeti] to shake, disturb, break (fig.) J v.173 (uposathaŋ). Paṭikkanta
Paṭikkanta
[pp. of paṭikkamati] gone back from ( -- ˚), returned (opp. abhi˚) D i.70 (abhikkanta+); A ii.104, 106 sq., 210; Pv iv.143 (cp. PvA 240); DA i.183 ( = nivattana); VvA 6 (opp. abhi˚) PvA 11 (piṇḍapāta˚), 16 (id.). For opp. of paṭikkanta in conn. with piṇḍāya see paviṭṭha. Paṭikkantaka
Paṭikkantaka
[fr. last] one who has come or is coming back DhA i.307. Paṭikkama
Paṭikkama
[fr. paṭi+kram] going back Pv iv.12 (abhik- kama+"going forward and backward"; cp. PvA 219). Paṭikkamati
Paṭikkamati
[paṭi+kram] to step backwards, to return (opp. abhi˚) Vin ii.110, 208; M i.78; S i.200, 226; ii.282; Sn 388 (ger. ˚kkamma = nivattitvā SnA 374); SnA 53. -- Caus. paṭikkamāpeti to cause to retreat J i.214 Miln 121. -- pp. paṭikkanta (q. v.). Paṭikkamana
Paṭikkamana
(nt.) [fr. paṭikkamati] returning, retiring, going back Dh i.95; in ˚sālā meaning "a hall with seats of distinction" SnA 53. -- 393 -- Paṭikkūla
Paṭikkūla
(adj.) [paṭi+kūla] lit. against the slope; averse, objectionable, contrary, disagreeable Vin i.58 (˚kūla); D iii.112, 113; M i.341 (dukkha˚); S iv.172 (id.); J i.393; VvA 92 (K.); PvA 77; VbhA 250 sq. -- app˚ without objection, pleasant, agreeable Vv 532 (K.); Vism 70 (k). -- nt. ˚ŋ loathsomeness, impurity VvA 232. See also abstr. pāṭikkūlyatā (paṭi˚).

-- gāhitā as neg. a˚ "refraining from contradiction" (Dhs trsln) Pug 24 (k.); Dhs 1327 (k.). -- manasikāra realisation of the impurity of the body DhA ii.87 (˚kkula); VbhA 251. -- saññā (āhāre) the consciousness of the impurity of material food D iii.289, 291; S v.132; A iv.49; adj. ˚saññin S i.227; v.119, 317; A iii.169. Paṭikkosati
Paṭikkosati
[paṭi+kruś] to blame, reject, revile, scorn Vin i.115; ii.93; M iii.29; D i.53 ( = paṭibāhati DA i.160); S iv.118 (+apavadati); Sn 878; Dh 164; J iv.163; Miln 131, 256; DhA iii.194 (opp. abhinandati). -- pp. paṭikuṭṭha (q. v.). Paṭikkosana
Paṭikkosana
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. paṭikkosati] protest Vin i.321; ii.102 (a˚). Paṭikkhati
Paṭikkhati
[paṭi+īks] to look forward to, to expect Sn 697 (paṭikkhaŋ sic ppr. = āgamayanā SnA 490). Paṭikkhitta
Paṭikkhitta
[pp. of paṭikkhipati] refused, rejected D i.142; M i.78, 93; A i.296; ii.206; J ii.436; Nett 161, 185 sq.; DhA ii.71. Paṭikkhipati
Paṭikkhipati
[paṭi+khipati] to reject, refuse, object to, oppose J i.67; iv.105; Miln 195; DA i.290; DhA i.45; ii.75; PvA 73, 114, 151, 214 (aor. ˚khipi = vāresi). -- appaṭikkhippa (grd.) not to be rejected J ii.370. -> Contrasted to samādiyati Vism 62, 64 & passim. Paṭikkhepa
Paṭikkhepa
[fr. paṭi+kṣip] opposition, negation, contrary SnA 228 for "na"), 502; PvA 189 (˚vacana the opp. expression). ˚to (abl.) in opposition or contrast to PvA 24. Paṭikhamāpita
Paṭikhamāpita
[pp. of paṭi+khamāpeti, Caus. of khamati] forgiven DhA ii.78. Paṭigacca
Paṭigacca
see paṭikacca. Paṭigacchati
Paṭigacchati
to give up, leave behind J iv.482 (gehaŋ); cp. paccagū. Paṭigandhiya
Paṭigandhiya
only as neg. appaṭi˚ (q. v.). Paṭigāthā
Paṭigāthā
(f.) [paṭi+gāthā] counter -- stanza, response SnA 340. Cp. paccanīka -- gāthā. Paṭigādha
Paṭigādha
[paṭi+gādha2] a firm stand or foothold A iii.297 sq.; Pug 72 = Kvu 389. Paṭigāyati (˚gāti)
Paṭigāyati
(˚gāti) [paṭi+gāyati] to sing in response, to reply by a song J iv.395 (imper. ˚gāhi). Paṭigijjha
Paṭigijjha
(adj.) [paṭi+gijjha, a doublet of giddha, see gijjha2] greedy; hankering after Sn 675 (SnA 482 reads ˚giddha and explns by mahāgijjha). Paṭigīta
Paṭigīta
(nt.) [paṭi+gīta] a song in response, counter song J iv.393. Paṭiguhati (˚gūhati)
Paṭiguhati
(˚gūhati) [paṭi+gūhati] to concert, keep back Cp. i.918. Paṭiggaṇhanaka
Paṭiggaṇhanaka
(adj. -- n.) [paṭiggaṇhana ( = paṭiggahaṇa) +ka] receiving, receiver PvA 175. Paṭiggaṇhāti (paṭigaṇhāti)
Paṭiggaṇhāti
(paṭigaṇhāti) [paṭi+gaṇhāti] to receive, accept, take (up) D i.110 (vatthaŋ), 142; Vin i.200; ii.109, 116 (a sewing -- needle); S iv.326 (jātarūpa -- rajataŋ); Sn 479, 689, 690; Dh 220; J i.56, 65; DA i.236; PvA 47. In special phrase accayaŋ paṭiggaṇhāti to accept (the confession of) a sin, to pardon a sin Vin ii.192; D i.85; M i.438; J v.379. -- pp. paṭiggahita (q. v.). -- Caus. ˚ggaheti Vin ii.213; M i.32. Paṭiggaha
Paṭiggaha
[fr. paṭiggaṇhāti] 1. receiving, acceptance; one who receives, recipient J i.146; ii.9; vi.474; Pv iii.111. -- 2. friendly reception J vi.526. -- 3. receptacle (for water etc.) Vin ii.115, 213 (udaka˚). -- 4. a thimble Vin ii.116. Paṭiggahaṇa
Paṭiggahaṇa
(nt.) [fr. paṭigganhāti] acceptance, receiving, taking M iii.34; S v.472; SnA 341. -- accaya˚ acceptance of a sin, i. e. pardon, absolution J v.380. Paṭiggahita
Paṭiggahita
[pp. of paṭigganhāti] received, got, accepted, appropriated, taken Vin i.206, 214; J vi.231. -- As appaṭiggahitaka (nt.) "that which is not received" at Vin iv.90. Paṭiggahītar
Paṭiggahītar
[n. ag. of paṭiggaṇhāti] one who receives, recipient D i.89. Paṭiggāha
Paṭiggāha
see patiṭṭhāha. Paṭiggāhaka
Paṭiggāhaka
(adj. -- n.) [fr. paṭiggaṇhāti] receiving, accepting; one who receives, recipient Vin ii.213; D i.138; A i.161; ii.80 sq.; iii.42, 336; J i.56; PvA 7, 128, 175 (opp. dāyaka); VvA 195; Sdhp 268. Paṭiggāhaṇa
Paṭiggāhaṇa
(nt.) [fr. paṭiggaṇhāti] reception, taking in J vi.527. Paṭigha
Paṭigha
(m. & nt.) [paṭi+gha, adj. suffix of ghan = han, lit. striking against] 1. (ethically) repulsion, repugnance, anger D i.25, 34; iii.254, 282; S i.13; iv.71, 195, 205, 208 sq.; v.315; A i.3, 87, 200; Sn 371, 536; Dhs 1060; Miln 44; DA i.22. -- 2. (psychologically) sensory reaction D iii.224, 253, 262; S i.165, 186; A i.41, 267; ii.184; Dhs 265, 501, 513, 579; VbhA 19. See on term Dhs trsln 72, 204, 276 and passim. -- appaṭigha see separately s. v. Note. How shall we read paṭighaṭṭha nānighaŋso at DhsA 308? (paṭigha -- ṭṭhāna -- nighaŋso, or paṭighaṭṭana -- nighaŋso?) Paṭighavant
Paṭighavant
(adj.) [fr. paṭigha] full of repugnance, showing anger S iv.208, 209. Paṭighāta
Paṭighāta
[paṭi+ghāta, of same root as paṭigha] 1. (lit.) warding off, staying, repulsion, beating off D iii.130; M i.10; A i.98; iv.106 sq.; J i.344; Vism 31 ( = paṭihanana); Miln 121; DhA ii.8; PvA 33. -- 2. (psych.) resentment Dhs 1060, cp. Dhs trsl. 282. Paṭighosa
Paṭighosa
[paṭi+ghosa] echo Vism 554. Paṭicamma
Paṭicamma
in ˚gataŋ sallaŋ at J vi.78 to be expld not with C. as from paṭi+camati (cam to wash, cp. ācamati), which does not agree with the actual meaning, but according to Kern, Toev. ii.29, s. v. as elliptical for paṭibhinna -- camma, i. e. piercing the skin so as to go right through (to the opp. side) which falls in with the C. expln "vāmapassena pavisitvā dakkhiṇapassena viniggatan ti." Paṭicaya
Paṭicaya
& (paṭiccaya) [paṭi+caya] adding to, heaping up, accumulation, increase Vin ii.74; iii.158 (pati˚); S iii.169; A iii.376 sq. (v. l. pati˚); iv.355; v.336 sq.; Th 1, 642; Ud 35 (pati˚); Miln 138. Paṭicarati
Paṭicarati
[paṭi+carati) 1. to wander about, to deal with Miln 94. -- 2. to go about or evade (a question), to obscure a matter of discussion, in phrase aññena aññaŋ p. "to be saved by another in another way," or to from one (thing) to another, i. e. to receive a diff, answer to what is asked D i.94; Vin iv.35; M i.96, 250, 442; A iv.168 (v. l. paṭivadati); expld at DA i.264 by ajjhottharati paṭicchādeti "to cover over," i. e. to conceal (a question). See on expression Dialogues i.116. Paṭicaleti
Paṭicaleti
[Caus. of paṭicalati] to nudge J v.434. Paṭicāra
Paṭicāra
[fr. paṭi+car] intercourse, visit, dealing with Miln 94. -- 394 -- Paṭicodana
Paṭicodana
(nt.) [abstr. fr. paṭicodeti] rebuking, scolding (back) DhsA 393. Paṭicodeti
Paṭicodeti
[paṭi+codeti] to blame, reprove M i.72; Vin iv.217; Ud 45. Paṭicca
Paṭicca
[ger. of pacceti, paṭi+i; cp. BSk. pratītya] grounded on, on account of, concerning, because (with acc.) M i.265 (etaŋ on these grounds); S iii.93 = It 89 (atthavasaŋ); J ii.386 (=abhisandhāya); Sn 680, 784, 872, 1046; SnA 357; DhA i.4; PvA 64 (maraṇaŋ), 164, 181 (kammaŋ), 207 (anuddayaŋ). See also foll.

-- vinīta trained to look for causality M iii.19. Paṭiccasamuppanna
Paṭicca
-- samuppanna [p.+samuppana] evolved by reason of the law of causation D iii.275; M i.500; S ii.26; A v.187; Ps i.51 sq., 76 sq.; Vbh 340, 362. Cp. BSk. pratitya samutpanna MVastu iii.61. Paṭiccasamuppāda
Paṭicca
-- samuppāda [p.+samuppāda, BSk. prātītya- samutpāda, e. g. Divy 300, 547] "arising on the grounds of (a preceding cause)" happening by way of cause, working of cause & effect, causal chain of causation; causal genesis, dependent origination, theory of the twelve causes. -- See on this Mrs. Rh. D. in Buddhism 90 f., Ency. Rel. & Ethics, s. v. & KS ii., preface. Cpd. p. 260 sq. with diagram of the "Wheel of Life"; Pts. of Controversy, 390 f. -- The general formula runs thus: Imasmiŋ sati, idaŋ hoti, imass' uppādā, idaŋ uppajjati; imasmiŋ asati, idaŋ na hoti; imassa nirodhā, idaŋ nirujjhati. This being, that becomes; from the arising of this, that arises; this not becoming, that does not become: from the ceasing of this, that ceases M ii.32; S ii.28 etc. The term usually occurs applied to dukkha in a famous formula which expresses the Buddhist doctrine of evolution, the respective stages of which are conditioned by a preceding cause & constitute themselves the cause of resulting effect, as working out the next state of the evolving (shall we say) "individual" or "being," in short the bearer of evolution. The respective links in this chain which to study & learn is the first condition for a "Buddhist" to an understanding of life, and the cause of life, and which to know forward and backward (anuloma -- paṭilomaŋ manas' âkāsi Vin i.1) is indispensable for the student, are as follows. The root of all, primary cause of all existence, is avijjā ignorance; this produces sankhārā: karma, dimly conscious elements, capacity of impression or predisposition (will, action, Cpd.; synergies Mrs. Rh. D.), which in their turn give rise to viññāṇa thinking substance (consciousness, Cpd.; cognition Mrs. Rh. D.), then follow in succession the foll. stages: nāmarūpa individuality (mind & body, animated organism Cpd.; name & form Mrs. Rh. D.), saḷāyatana the senses (6 organs of sense Cpd.; the sixfold sphere Mrs. Rh. D.), phassa contact, vedanā feeling, taṇhā thirst for life (craving), upādāna clinging to existence or attachment (dominant idea Cpd.; grasping Mrs. Rh. D.), bhava (action or character Cpd.; renewed existence Mrs. Rh. D.), jāti birth (rebirth conception Cpd.), jarāmaraṇa (+soka -- parideva -- dukkhadomanass' ûpayāsā) old age & death (+tribulation, grief, sorrow, distress & despair). The BSk. form is pratītya -- samutpāda, e. g. at Divy 300, 547.

The Paṭicca -- samuppāda is also called the Nidāna ("basis," or "ground," i. e. cause) doctrine, or the Paccay' ākāra ("related -- condition"), and is referred to in the Suttas as Ariya -- ñāya ("the noble method or system"). The term paccay' ākāra is late and occurs only in Abhidhamma -- literature. -- The oldest account is found in the Mahāpadāna Suttanta of the Dīgha Nikāya (D ii.30 sq.; cp. Dial. ii.24 sq.), where 10 items form the constituents of the chain, and are given in backward order, reasoning from the appearance of dukkha in this world of old age and death towards the original cause of it in viññāṇa. The same chain occurs again at S ii.104 sq. -- A later development shows 12 links, viz. avijjā and sankhārā added to precede viññāṇa (as above). Thus at S ii.5 sq. -- A detailed exposition of the P. -- s. in Abhidhamma literature is the exegesis given by Bdhgh at Vism xvii. (pp. 517 -- 586, under the title of Paññā -- bhūmi -- niddesa), and at VbhA 130 -- 213 under the title of Paccayākāra -- vibhanga. -> Some passages selected for ref.: Vin i.1 sq.; M i.190, 257; S i.136; ii.1 sq., 26 sq., 42 sq., 70, 92 sq., 113 sq.; Ai.177; v.184; Sn. 653; Ud 1 sq.; Ps i.50 sq.; 144; Nett 22, 24, 32, 64 sq.; DA i.125, 126.

-- kusala skilled in the (knowledge of the) chain of causation M iii.63; Nd1 171; f. abstr. ˚kusalatā D iii.212. Paṭicchaka
Paṭicchaka
(adj.) [fr. paṭicchati) receiving J vi.287. Paṭicchati
Paṭicchati
[paṭi+icchati of iṣ2; cp. BSk. pratīcchati Divy 238 and sampaṭicchati] to accept, receive, take A iii.243 (udakaŋ); Vin iv.18; Th 2, 421; J i.233; ii.432; iii.171; iv.137; v.197; DhA iii.271. -- pp. paṭicchita (q. v.). Caus. II. paṭicchāpeti to entrust, dedicate, give J i.64, 143, 159, 383, 506; ii.133; PvA 81. Paṭicchanna
Paṭicchanna
[pp. of paṭicchādeti] covered, concealed, hidden Vin ii.40; A i.282; Sn 126, 194; Pv i.102 (kesehi = paṭicchādita PvA 48); ii.102 (kesehi); DA i.276, 228; SnA 155; KhA 53; VbhA 94 (˚dukkha); PvA 43, 103. -- appaṭicchanna unconcealed, open, unrestrained Vin ii.38; J i.207.

-- kammanta of secret doing, one who acts underhand or conceals his actions A ii.239; Sn 127. Paṭicchavi
Paṭicchavi
in appaṭicchavi at Pv ii.113 read with v. l. as sampatitacchavi. Paṭicchāda
Paṭicchāda
[fr. paṭi+chad] 1. covering, clothes, clothing Pv ii.116 ( = vattha PvA 76). -- 2. deceiving, hiding; concealment, deception Sn 232. Paṭicchādaka
Paṭicchādaka
= prec. DhsA 51. Paṭicchādana
Paṭicchādana
(nt.) [fr. paṭicchādeti] covering, hiding, concealment M i.10; A iii.352; Vbh 357 = SnA 180. Paṭicchādaniya
Paṭicchādaniya
(nt.) [fr. paṭicchādeti] the flavour of meat, flavouring, meat broth or gravy Vin i.206, 217; Miln 291. Paṭicchādita
Paṭicchādita
[pp. of paṭicchādeti, cp. paṭicchanna] covered, concealed, hidden J vi.23 ( = paṭisanthata) PvA 48. Paṭicchādī
Paṭicchādī
(f.) [fr. paṭicchādeti] 1. covering, protection Vin ii.122. -- 2. antidote, remedy, medicine (or a cloth to protect the itch) Vin i.296; iv.171. Paṭicchādeti
Paṭicchādeti
[paṭi+chādeti, Caus. of chad] 1. to cover over, conceal, hide S i.70, 161; DA i.264; VvA 65 (dhanaŋ); KhA 191; PvA 76, 88, 142 (kesehi), 194 ( = parigūhati). -- 2. to clothe oneself Vin i.46. -- 3. to dress (surgically), to treat (a wound) M i.220. -- 4. to conceal or evade (a question) DA i.264. -- pp. paṭicchādita & paṭicchanna (q. v.). Paṭicchita
Paṭicchita
[pp. of paṭicchati] accepted, taken up Sn 803 (pl. ˚tāse, cp. Nd1 113 & SnA 531). Paṭijaggaka
Paṭijaggaka
(adj.) [fr. paṭijaggati] fostering, nursing, taking care of J v.111. Paṭijaggati
Paṭijaggati
[paṭi+jaggati, cp. BSk. pratijāgarti Divy 124, 306] lit. to watch over, i. e. to nourish, tend, feed, look after, take care of, nurse Dh 157; J i.235, 375; ii.132, 200, 436; Vism 119; DhA i.8, 45, 99, 392; iv.154; PvA 10, 43. -- pp. paṭijaggita (q. v.). -- Caus. ˚jaggāpeti. Paṭijaggana
Paṭijaggana
(nt.) [fr. paṭijaggati] rearing, fostering, tending; attention, care J i.148; Miln 366; DhA i.27; ii.96. -- 395 -- Paṭijagganaka
Paṭijagganaka
(adj.) [fr. paṭijaggana] to be reared or brought up J vi.73 (putta). Paṭijaggāpeti
Paṭijaggāpeti
[Caus. II. of paṭijaggati] to make look after or tend Vism 74. Paṭijaggita
Paṭijaggita
[pp. of paṭijaggati] reared, cared for, looked after, brought up J v.274, 331. Paṭijaggiya
Paṭijaggiya
(adj.) [grd. of paṭijaggati] to be nursed DhA i.319. Paṭijānāti
Paṭijānāti
[paṭi+jānāti] to acknowledge, agree to, approve, promise, consent D i.3, 192; S i.68, 172; ii.170; iii.28; v 204, 423; Sn 76, 135, 555, 601, 1148; J i.169; DhA i.21; PvA 223 (pot. paṭiññeyya), 226 (id.), 241; ger. paṭiññāya Vin ii.83 (a˚). -- pp. paṭiññāta (q. v.). Patijīvan
Patijīvan
( -- ˚) in phrase jīva -- paṭijīvaŋ at J ii.15 is to be taken as a sort of redupl. cpd. of jīva, the imper. of jīvati "live," as greeting. We might translate "the greeting with ʻ jīva ʼ and reciprocating it." Paṭiñña
Paṭiñña
(adj.) [ = paṭiññā] acknowledged; making belief, quâsi -- ; in phrase samaṇa˚ a quâsi -- Samaṇa, pretending to be a Samaṇa A i.126; ii.239; cp. Sakyaputtiya˚ S ii.272; sacca˚ J iv.384, 463; v.499. Paṭiññā
Paṭiññā
(f.) [fr. paṭi+jñā; cp. later Sk. pratijñā] acknow- ledgment, agreement, promise, vow, consent, permission D iii.254; J i.153; Pv iv.112, 144; Miln 7; DhA ii.93: PvA 76, 123; SnA 397, 539. -- patiññaŋ moceti to keep one's promise DhA i.93. Paṭiññāta
Paṭiññāta
[pp. of paṭijānāti] agreed, acknowledged, pro- mised Vin ii.83, 102; D i.88; A i.99; iv.144; PvA 55. Paṭita
Paṭita
(adj.) satisfied, happy DhA ii.269 (˚ācāra) Paṭitiṭṭhati (paṭiṭṭhahati)
Paṭitiṭṭhati
(paṭiṭṭhahati) etc. see pati˚. Paṭitittha
Paṭitittha
(nt.) [paṭi+tittha] opposite bank (of a river) J v.443. Paṭitthambhati
Paṭitthambhati
[paṭi+thambhati] to stand firm (against) Miln 372. Paṭidaṇḍa
Paṭidaṇḍa
[paṭi+daṇḍa] retribution Dh 133, cp. DhA iii.57, 58. Paṭidadāti
Paṭidadāti
[paṭi+dadāti] to give back, to restore J i.177; iv.411 (˚diyyare); PvA 276 (ger. ˚datvā). Paṭidasseti
Paṭidasseti
[paṭi+dasseti] to show oneself or to appear again, to reappear Pv iii.227. Paṭidāna
Paṭidāna
(nt.) [paṭi+dāna] reward, restitution, gift PvA 80. Paṭidisā
Paṭidisā
(f.) [paṭi+disā] an opposite (counter -- ) point of the compass, opposite quarter D iii.176 (disā ca p. ca vidisā ca). Paṭidissati
Paṭidissati
[paṭi+dissati; usually spelt pati˚] to be seen, to appear J iii.47 = PvA 281; Sn 123; J iv.139; SnA 172. Paṭidukkhāpanatā
Paṭidukkhāpanatā
(f.) [paṭi+abstr. of dukkhāpeti, Caus. -- Denom. fr. dukkha] the fact of being afflicted again with súffering Miln 180. Paṭideseti
Paṭideseti
[paṭi+deseti] to confess Vin ii.102. See also pāṭidesaniya. Paṭidhāvati
Paṭidhāvati
[paṭi+dhāvati] to run back to (acc.) M i.265 ≈ S ii.26 (pubbanṭaŋ; opp. aparantaŋ ādhāvati M, upadhāvati S); Sdhp 167. Paṭinandati
Paṭinandati
[paṭi+nandati] to accept gladly, to greet in return S i.189. Paṭinandita
Paṭinandita
[pp. of paṭi+nand] rejoicing or rejoiced; greeted, welcomed Sn 452 (pati˚); J vi.14, 412. Paṭināsikā
Paṭināsikā
(f.) [paṭi+nāsikā] a false nose J i.455, 457. Paṭinijjhatta
Paṭinijjhatta
(adj.) [paṭi+nijjhatta] appeased again J vi.414. Paṭiniddesa
Paṭiniddesa
[paṭi+niddesa] coming back upon a subject Nett 5. Paṭinivattati
Paṭinivattati
[paṭi+nivattati] to turn back again Vin i.216; J i.225; Miln 120, 152 (of disease), 246; PvA 100, 126. -- Caus. ˚nivatteti to make turn back PvA 141; C. on A iii.28 (see paccāsāreti). Paṭinivāsana
Paṭinivāsana
(nt.) [paṭi+nivāsana1] a dress given in return Vin i.46 = ii.223. Paṭinissagga
Paṭinissagga
[paṭi+nissagga of nissajjati, nis+sṛj, Cp. BSk. pratinisarga AvŚ ii.118, pratiniḥsarga ib. ii.194; MVastu ii.549; pratinissagga MVastu iii.314, 322] giving up, forsaking; rejection, renunciation Vin iii.173; M iii. 31; S v. 421 sq.; A i.100, 299; iv.148, 350; Ps i.194 (two p., viz. pariccāga˚ and pakkhandana˚); Pug 19, 21, 22. -- ādāna˚ S v.24; A v.233, 253 sq.; upadhi˚ It 46, 62; sabbûpadhi˚ S i.136; iii.133; v.226; A i.49; v.8, 110, 320 sq.; ˚ânupassanā Ps ii.44 sq.; ˚ânupassin M iii.83; S iv.211; v.329; A iv.88, 146 sq.; v.112, 359. Paṭinissaggin
Paṭinissaggin
(adj.) [fr. paṭinissagga] giving up, renouncing, or being given up, to be renounced, only in cpd. duppaṭi˚ (sup˚) hard (easy) to renounce D iii.45; M i.96; A iii.335; v.150. Paṭinissajjati
Paṭinissajjati
[paṭi+nissajjati, cp. BSk. pratinisṛjati AvŚ ii.190] to give up, renounce, forsake Vin iii.173 sq.; iv.294; S ii.110; A v.191 sq. -- ger. paṭinissajja S i.179; A iv.374 sq.; Sn 745, 946 (cp. Nd1 430). -- pp. paṭinissaṭṭha (q. v.). Paṭinissaṭṭha
Paṭinissaṭṭha
[pp. of paṭinissajjati, BSk. pratiniḥsṛṣṭa Divy 44 and ˚nisṛṣṭa Divy 275] given up, forsaken (act. & pass.), renouncing or having renounced Vin iii.95; iv.27, 137; M i.37; S ii.283; A ii.41; It 49; Nd1 430, 431 (vanta pahīna p.); PvA 256. Paṭinissarati
Paṭinissarati
[paṭi+nissarati] to depart, escape from, to be freed from Nett 113 ( = niyyāti vimuccati C.). Paṭineti
Paṭineti
[paṭi+neti] to lead back to (acc.) Vv 5217; Th 2, 419; Pv ii.1221 (imper. ˚nayāhi); PvA 145, 160. Paṭipakkha
Paṭipakkha
(adj. -- n.) [paṭi+pakkha] opposed, opposite; (m.) an enemy, opponent (cp. pratipakṣa obstacle Divy 352) Nd1 397; J i.4, 224; Nett 3, 112, 124; Vism 4; DhA i.92; SnA 12, 21, 65, 168, 234, 257, 545; PvA 98; DhsA 164; Sdhp 211, 452. Paṭipakkhika
Paṭipakkhika
(adj.) [fr. paṭipakkha] opposed, inimical Sdhp 216. Paṭipajjati
Paṭipajjati
[paṭi+pad, cp. BSk. pratipadyate] to enter upon (a path), to go along, follow out (a way or plan), to go by; fig. to take a line of action, to follow a method, to be intent on, to regulate one's life D i.70 (saŋvarāya). 175 (tathattāya); S ii.98 (kantāramaggaŋ); iv.63 (dhammass' anudhammaŋ); v.346 (id.); iv.194 (maggaŋ); A i.36 (dhammânudhammaŋ); ii.4; Sn 317, 323, 706, 815, 1129 (cp. Nd2 384); Dh 274 (maggaŋ); Pug 20 (saŋvarāya); PvA 43 (maggaŋ), 44 (ummaggaŋ), 196 (dhanaŋ); Sdhp 30. -- 3rd sg. aor. paccāpādi J iv.314. -- ger. pajjitabba to be followed PvA 126 (vidhi), 131 (id.), 281. -- pp. paṭipanna (q. v.). -- Caus. paṭipādeti (q. v.). Paṭipajjana
Paṭipajjana
(nt.) [fr. paṭipajjati] a way or plan to be followed, procedure, in ˚vidhi method, line of action PvA 131 (v. l. BB), 133. -- 396 -- Paṭipaṇāmeti
Paṭipaṇāmeti
[paṭi+pa+Caus. of nam] to make turn back, to send back, ward off, chase away M i.327 (siriŋ); S iv.152 (ābādhaŋ); Miln 17 (sakaṭāni). Paṭipaṇṇa
Paṭipaṇṇa
(nt.) [paṭi+paṇṇa] a letter in return, a written reply J i.409. Paṭipatti
Paṭipatti
(f.) [fr. paṭi+pad] "way," method, conduct, practice, performance, behaviour, example A i.69; v.126 (dhammânudhamma˚), 136; Ps ii.15; Nd1 143; Nd2 s. v.; Miln 131, 242; DhA ii.30; DhA iv.34 (sammā˚ good or proper behaviour); PvA 16 (parahita˚), 54, 67; DA i.270; Sdhp 28, 29, 37, 40, 213, 521. Paṭipatha
Paṭipatha
[paṭi+patha] a confronting road, opposite way Vin ii.193 (˚ŋ gacchati to go to meet); iii.131; iv.268; Miln 9; Vism 92; DhA ii.88. Paṭipadā
Paṭipadā
(f.) [fr. paṭi+pad] means of reaching a goal or destination, path, way, means, method, mode of progress (cp. Dhs. trsln 53, 82, 92, 143), course, practice (cp. BSk. pratipad in meaning of pratipatti "line of conduct" AvŚ ii.140 with note) D i.54 (dvatti p.), 249 (way to); S ii.81 (nirodhasāruppa -- gāminī p.); iv.251 (bhaddikā), 330 (majjhimā) v.304 (sabbattha -- gāminī), 361 (udaya -- gāminī sotāpatti˚), 421; D iii.288 (ñāṇadassana -- visuddhi˚); A i.113, 168 (puñña˚) ii.76, 79, 152 (akkhamā); Vbh 99, 104 sq., 211 sq., 229 sq., 331 sq. -- In pregnant sense The path (of the Buddha), leading to the destruction of all ill & to the bliss of Nibbāna (see specified under magga, ariyamagga, sacca), thus a quâsi synonym of magga with which freq. combd (e.g. D i.156) Vin i.10; D i.157; iii.219 (anuttariya); M ii.11; iii.251, 284; S i.24 (daḷhā yāya dhīrā pamuccanti); A i.295 sq. (āgālhā nijjhāmā majjhimā); Sn 714 (cp. SnA 497), 921; Ps ii.147 (majjhimā); Nett 95 sq.; Pug 15, 68; VvA 84 (˚sankhāta ariyamagga). Specified in various ways as follows: āsava -- nirodha -- gāminī p. D i.84; dukkha -- nirodha -- g˚. D i.84, 189; iii.136; S v.426 sq.; A i.177; Ps i.86, 119; Dhs 1057; lokanirodha -- g˚ A ii.23; It 121; with the epithets sammā˚ anuloma˚ apaccanīka˚ anvattha˚ dhammânudhamma˚ Nd1 32, 143, 365; Nd2 384 etc. (see detail under sammā˚). -- There are several groups of 4 paṭipadā mentioned, viz. (a) dukkhā dandhâbhiññā, sukhā & khippâbhiññā dandh˚ & khipp˚, i. e. painful practice resulting in knowledge slowly acquired & quickly acquired, pleasant practice resulting in the same way D iii.106; A ii.149 sq., 154; v.63; SnA 497; (b) akkhamā, khamā, damā & samā p. i. e. want of endurance, endurance, self -- control, equanimity. Paṭipanna
Paṭipanna
[pp. of paṭipajjati] (having) followed or following up, reaching, going along or by (i. e. practising), entering on, obtaining S ii.69; iv.252; A i.120 (arahattāya); iv.292 sq. (id.), 372 sq.; It 81 (dhammânudhamma˚); Sn 736; Dh 275 (maggaŋ); Vv 3423 ( = maggaṭṭha one who has entered the path VvA 154)=Pv iv.349; Pug 63; Miln 17; DA i.26; PvA 78, 112 (maggaŋ), 130, 174 (sammā˚), 242; (dhammiyaŋ paṭipadaŋ); DhA i.233 (magga˚ on the road, wandering). Paṭipannaka
Paṭipannaka
(adj. n.) [fr. paṭipanna] one who has entered upon the Path (ariyamagga) Pug 13 ( = maggaṭṭhaka, phalatthāya paṭipannattā p. nāma PugA 186); Miln 342, 344; Nett 50; DhsA 164. See also Miln trsl. ii.231, 237. Paṭiparivatteti
Paṭiparivatteti
[paṭi+p.] to turn back or round once more M i.133. Paṭipaviṭṭha
Paṭipaviṭṭha
[pp. of paṭipavisati] gone inside again Sn 979. Paṭipavisati
Paṭipavisati
[paṭi+pavisati] to go in(to) again; Caus. ˚paveseti to make go in again, to put back (inside) again Vin i.276. -- pp. paṭipaviṭṭha (q. v.). Paṭipasaŋsati
Paṭipasaŋsati
[paṭi+pasaŋsati] to praise back or in return J ii.439. Paṭipaharati
Paṭipaharati
[paṭi+paharati] to strike in return DhA i.51. Paṭipahiṇati
Paṭipahiṇati
[paṭi+pahinati] to send back (in return) DhA i.216. Paṭipākatika
Paṭipākatika
(adj.) [paṭi+pākatika] restored, set right again, safe and sound J iii.167 ( = pākatika at PvA 66); iv.407; vi.372; PvA 123, 284. Paṭipāṭi
Paṭipāṭi
(f.) [paṭi+pāṭi] order, succession Vin i.248 (bhatta˚); Vism 411 (khandha˚); usually in abl. paṭipāṭiyā adv. successively, in succession, alongside of, in order Vism 343 = J v.253 (ghara˚ from house to house); ThA 80 (magga˚); DhA i.156; ii.89; iii.361; SnA 23, 506; PvA 54; VvA 76, 137. Paṭipāṭika
Paṭipāṭika
(adj.) [fr. last] being in conformity with the (right) order ThA 41. Paṭipādaka
Paṭipādaka
[fr. paṭi+pad] the supporter (of a bed) Vin i.48; ii.208. Paṭipādeti
Paṭipādeti
[Caus. of paṭipajjati, cp. BSk. pratipādayati in same meaning AvŚ i.262, 315] to impart, bring into, give to, offer, present M i.339; J v.453, 497; Pv ii.81 (vittaŋ). Paṭipiŋsati
Paṭipiŋsati
[paṭi+piŋsati] to beat against S ii.98 (ure); J vi.87; Vism 504 (urāni). Paṭipiṇḍa
Paṭipiṇḍa
[paṭi+piṇḍa] alms in return J ii.307; v.390 (piṇḍa˚ giving & taking of alms); Miln 370. Paṭipīta
Paṭipīta
in asuci˚ at A iii.226 is not clear (v. l. ˚pīḷita perhaps to be preferred). Paṭipīḷana
Paṭipīḷana
(nt.) [fr. paṭipīḷeti] oppression Miln 313, 352. Paṭipīḷita
Paṭipīḷita
(adj.) [paṭi+pp. of pīḍ] pressed against, oppressed, hard pressed Miln 262, 354. Paṭipuggala
Paṭipuggala
[paṭi+puggala] a person equal to another, compeer, match, rival M i.171 = Miln 235; S i.158; Sn 544; It 123 (natthi te paṭipuggala). -- appaṭipuggala without a rival, unrivalled, without compare S i.158; iii.86; Th 2, 185; J i.40; Miln 239 (cp. Miln trsl. ii.43). Paṭipuggalika
Paṭipuggalika
(adj.) [fr. paṭipuggala] belonging to one's equal, individual Dhs 1044. Perhaps read pāṭi˚ (q. v.). Paṭipucchati
Paṭipucchati
[paṭi+pucchati] to ask (in return), to put a question to, to inquire D i.60; M i.27; S iii.2; Sn p. 92; J i.170; iv.194; PvA 32, 56, 81; A i.197; ii.46; also neg. appaṭipucchā (abl. adv.) without inquiry Vin i.325. Paṭipucchā
Paṭipucchā
(f.) [paṭi+pucchā] a question in return, inquiry; only ˚ -- (as abl.) by question, by inquiry, by means of question & answer in foll. cpds.: ˚karaṇīya Vin i.325; ˚vinīta A i.72; ˚vyākaraṇīya (pañha) D iii.229. Paṭipurisa
Paṭipurisa
[paṭi+purisa] a rival, opponent Nd1 172. Paṭipūjana
Paṭipūjana
(nt.) or ˚ā (f.) [fr. paṭi+pūj] worship, reverence, honour Miln 241. Paṭipūjeti
Paṭipūjeti
[paṭi+pūjeti] to honour, worship, revere Sn 128; Pv i.13; Miln 241. Paṭipeseti
Paṭipeseti
[paṭi+peseti] to send out to PvA 20. Paṭippaṇāmeti
Paṭippaṇāmeti
[paṭi+paṇāmeti] to bend (back), stretch out DhsA 324. Paṭippassaddha
Paṭippassaddha
[pp. of paṭippassambhati] allayed, calmed, quieted, subsided S iv.217, 294; v.272; A i.254; ii.41; J iii.37, 148; iv.430; Ps ii.2; Pug 27; KhA 185; PvA 23, 245, 274. Note. The BSk. form is pratiprasrabdha Divy 265. Paṭippassaddhi
Paṭippassaddhi
(f.) [fr. paṭippassaddha] subsidence, calming, allaying, quieting down, repose, complete ease Vin i.331 (kammassa suppression of an act); Ps ii.3, 71, 180; Nett 89; Dhs 40, 41, 320; SnA 9. Esp. frequent in the Niddesas in stock phrase expressing the complete calm attained to in emancipation, viz. vūpasama paṭinissagga p. amata nibbāna, e. g. Nd2 429. -- 397 -- Paṭippassambhati
Paṭippassambhati
[paṭi+ppa+sambhati of śrambh. Note however that the BSk. is ˚praśrambhyati as well as ˚srambhyati, e. g. MVastu i.253, 254; Divy 68, 138, 494, 549, 568] to subside, to be eased, calmed, or abated, to pass away, to be allayed S i.211; v.51; aor. ˚ssambhi DhA ii.86 (dohaḷo); iv.133 (ābādho). -- pp. paṭippassaddha (q. v.). -- Caus. paṭippassambheti to quiet down, hush up, suppress, bring to a standstill, put to rest, appease Vin i.49 (kammaŋ), 144 (id.), 331 (id.); ii.5 (id.), 226 (id.); M i.76; J iii.28 (dohaḷaŋ). Paṭipassambhanā
Paṭipassambhanā
(f.) & ˚ppassambhitatta (nt.) are exe- getical (philosophical) synonyms of paṭippassaddhi at Dhs 40, 41, 320. Paṭippharati
Paṭippharati
[paṭi+pharati] to effulge, shine forth, stream out, emit, fig. splurt out, bring against, object M i.95 sq.; A iv.193 (codakaŋ); J i.123, 163; Nd1 196 (vādaŋ start a word -- fight); Miln 372; DhA iv.4 (vacanaŋ). Paṭibaddha
Paṭibaddha
(adj.) [paṭi+baddha, pp. of bandh] bound to, in fetters or bonds, attracted to or by, dependent on D i.76; Vin iv.302 (kāya˚); A v.87 (para˚); Dh 284; Miln 102 (āvajjana˚); PvA 134 (˚jīvika dependent on him for a living). -- Freq. in cpd. ˚citta affected, enamoured, one's heart bound in love Vin iii.128; iv.18; Sn 37 (see Nd2 385), 65; PvA 46, 145 (˚tā f. abstr.), 151, 159 (rañño with the king). Paṭibandha
Paṭibandha
(adj.) [paṭi+bandha] bound to, connected with, referring to Ps i.172, 184. Paṭibandhati
Paṭibandhati
[paṭi+bandhati] to hold back, refuse J iv.134 (vetanaŋ na p. = aparihāpetvā dadāti). Paṭibandhu
Paṭibandhu
[paṭi+bandhu] a connection, a relation, relative Dhs 1059, 1136, 1230; DhsA 365. Paṭibala
Paṭibala
(adj.) [paṭi+bala] able, adequate, competent Vin i.56, 342; ii.103, 300; iii.158; A v.71; Miln 6. Paṭibāḷha
Paṭibāḷha
[pp. of paṭibāhati, though more likely to paṭi+ vah2] (op)pressed, forced, urged Vbh 338 = Miln 301. Paṭibāhaka
Paṭibāhaka
[of paṭi+bādh] antidote Miln 335; repelling, preventing J vi.571. Paṭibāhati
Paṭibāhati
[paṭi+*bāh of bahis adv. outside] to ward off, keep off, shut out, hold back, refuse, withhold, keep out, evade Vin i.356; ii.162, 166 sq., 274; iv.288; J i.64, 217; DhA ii.2 (rañño āṇaŋ), 89 (sītaŋ); VvA 68; PvA 96 (maraṇaŋ), 252, 286 (grd. appaṭibāhanīya). Caus. ˚bāheti in same meaning J iv.194; DhA ii.71; PvA 54. -- pp. paṭibāḷha (q. v.). Paṭibāhana
Paṭibāhana
exclusion, warding off, prevention Miln 81; Vism 244. Paṭibāhiya
Paṭibāhiya
(adj.) [grd. of paṭibāhati] to be kept off or averted, neg. ap˚ J iv.152. Paṭibāhira
Paṭibāhira
(adj.) [paṭi+bāhira] outside, excluded Vin ii.168. Paṭibimba
Paṭibimba
(nt.) [paṭi+bimba] counterpart, image, reflec- tion Vism 190; VvA 50; VbhA 164. Paṭibujjhati
Paṭibujjhati
[paṭi+bujjhati] to wake up, to understand, know, A iii.105 sq.; ThA 74; PvA 43, 128. -- pp. paṭibuddha (q. v.). Paṭibuddha
Paṭibuddha
[pp. of paṭibujjhati] awakened, awake Sn 807. Paṭibodha
Paṭibodha
[fr. paṭi+budh, cp. paṭibujjhati] awaking, waking up Vv 5024. Paṭibhajati
Paṭibhajati
[paṭi+bhaj] to divide M iii.91. Paṭibhaṇḍa
Paṭibhaṇḍa
[paṭi+bhaṇḍa, cp. BSk. pratipanya Divy 173, 271, 564] merchandise in exchange, barter J i.377; PvA 277. Paṭibhaṇḍati
Paṭibhaṇḍati
[paṭi+bhaṇḍati] to abuse in return S i.162 (bhaṇḍantaŋ p.); A ii.215 (id.); Nd1 397 (id.). Paṭibhaya
Paṭibhaya
[paṭi+bhaya] fear, terror, fright S iv.195; PvA 90; Dāvs iv.35. Freq. in cpd. ap˚ & sap˚, e. g. Vin iv.63; M i.134; iii.61. Paṭibhāga
Paṭibhāga
[paṭi+bhāga] 1. counterpart, likeness, resem- blance Nd2 s. v.; Vism 125 (˚nimitta, imitative mental reflex, memory -- image); SnA 65, 76, 83, 114, 265; PvA 46, 178, 279. -- 2. rejoinder J vi.341 (pañha˚). -- 3. counterpart, opposite, contrary M i.304. -- appaṭibhāga (adj.) unequalled, incomparable, matchless Miln 357 (+appaṭiseṭṭha); DhA i.423 ( = anuttara). Paṭibhāti
Paṭibhāti
[paṭi+bhā] to appear, to be evident, to come into one's mind, to occur to one, to be clear (cp. Vin. Texts ii.30) S i.155 (˚tu taŋ dhammikathā); v.153 (T. reads patibbāti); Sn 450 (p. maŋ = mama bhāgo pakāsati Sna 399); Nd1 234=Nd2 386 (also fut. ˚bhāyissati); J v.410; VvA 78=159 (maŋ p. ekaŋ pañhaŋ pucchituŋ "I should like to ask a question"). Paṭibhāna
Paṭibhāna
(nt.) [paṭi+bhāna. Cp. late Sk. pratibhāna, fr. Pali] understanding, illumination, intelligence; readiness or confidence of speech, promptitude, wit (see on term Vin. Texts iii.13, 172; Pts. of Controversy, 378 f.) D i.16, 21, 23; S i.187; A ii.135, 177, 230; iii.42; iv.163; v.96; Ps ii.150, 157; J vi.150; Pug 42; Vbh 293 sq.; VbhA 338, 394, 467; Miln 21; DA i.106. -- appaṭibhāna (adj.) bewildered, not confident, cowed down Vin ii.78 = iii.162; M i.258; A iii.57; J v.238, 369; vi.362. Paṭibhānavant
Paṭibhānavant
(adj.) [fr. paṭibhāna] possessed of intelli- gence or ready wit A i.24; Sn 58, 853, 1147; Nd1 234 = Nd2 386; SnA 111 (pariyatti˚ & paṭivedha˚). Paṭibhāneyyaka
Paṭibhāneyyaka
(adj.) [ger. formation+ka fr. paṭibhāna] = paṭibhānavant Vin i.249 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.140); A i.25. Paṭibhāsati
Paṭibhāsati
[paṭi+bhās] to address in return or in reply S i.134; Sn 1024. Paṭimaŋsa
Paṭimaŋsa
(adj.) [for paṭimassa = Sk. *pratimṛśya, ger. of prati+mṛś, cp. in consonants haŋsa for harṣa etc.] as neg. app˚ not to be touched, untouched; faultless Vin ii.248 (acchidda+); A v.79. Paṭimagga
Paṭimagga
[paṭi+magga, cp. similarly paṭipatha] the way against, a confronting road; ˚ŋ gacchati to go to meet somebody J iv.133; vi.127. Paṭimaṇḍita
Paṭimaṇḍita
[pp. of paṭi+maṇḍ] decorated, adorned with J i.8, 41, 509; PvA 3, 66, 211. Paṭimantaka
Paṭimantaka
[fr. paṭi+mant] one who speaks to or who is spoken to, i. e. (1) an interlocutor J iv.18 ( = paṭivacana -- dayaka C.); -- (2) an amiable person (cp. Lat. affabilis=affable) M i.386. Paṭimanteti
Paṭimanteti
[paṭi+manteti] to discuss in argument, to reply to, answer, refute; as pati˚ at Vin ii.1; D i.93 (vacane), 94; Dh i.263; J vi.82, 294. Paṭimalla
Paṭimalla
[paṭi+malla] a rival wrestler S i.110; Nd1 172. Paṭimasati
Paṭimasati
[paṭi+masati of mṛś, cp. paṭimaŋsa] to touch (at) D i.106; Sn p. 108 (anumasati+). -- Caus. paṭimāseti (q. v.). Paṭimā
Paṭimā
(f.) [fr. paṭi+mā] counterpart, image, figure J vi.125; Dāvs v.27; VvA 168 ( = bimba); DhsA 334. -- appaṭima (adj.) without a counterpart, matchless, incomparable Th 1, 614; Miln 239. -- 398 -- Paṭimānita
Paṭimānita
[pp. of paṭimāneti] honoured, revered, served PvA 18. Paṭimāneti
Paṭimāneti
[paṭi+Caus. of man] to wait on, or wait for, look after, honour, serve Vin ii.169; iv.112; D i.106; J iv.2, 203; v.314; Miln 8; PvA 12; DA i.280. -- pp. paṭimānita (q. v.). Paṭimāreti
Paṭimāreti
[paṭi+Caus. of mṛ] to kill in revenge J iii.135. Paṭimāseti
Paṭimāseti
[Caus. of patimasati] to hold on to, to restrain, keep under control; imper. paṭimāse (for ˚māsaya) Dh 379 (opp. codaya; expld by ˚parivīmaŋse "watch" DhA iv.117). Paṭimukka
Paṭimukka
(adj.) [pp. of paṭimuñcati; cp. also paṭimutta & ummukka, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 197] fastened on, tied to, wound round, clothed in S iv.91; M i.383; It 56; Th 2, 500 (? v. l. paripuṇṇa, cp. ThA 290); J i.384; vi.64; Miln 390; DhA i.394 (sīse); VvA 167 (so read for ˚mukkha), 296. Paṭimukha
Paṭimukha
(adj.) [paṭi+mukha] facing, opposite; nt. ˚ŋ adv. opposite SnA 399 (gacchati). Paṭimuñcati
Paṭimuñcati
[paṭi+muc] 1. to fasten, to bind (in lit. as well as appld sense), to tie, put on Vin i.46; S i.24 (veraŋ ˚muñcati for ˚muccati!); J i.384; ii.22, 88, 197; iv. 380 (ger. ˚mucca, v. l. ˚muñca), 395; v.25 (attain), 49; vi.525; DhA iii.295. -- Pass. paṭimuccati to be fastened, aor. ˚mucci J iii.239; vi.176. -- 2. to attain, obtain, find J iv.285 = vi.148. Paṭimutta
Paṭimutta
(& ˚ka) (adj.) [pp. of paṭimuñcati, cp. paṭi- mukka] in sup˚ well purified, cleansed, pure J iv.18 (˚kambu = paṭimutta -- suvaṇṇ' ālankāra C.); v.400; Pv iv.133 (˚ka -- suṭṭhu paṭimuttabhāṇin PvA 230). Paṭimokkha
Paṭimokkha
[fr. paṭi+muc] 1. a sort of remedy, purgative D i.12 osadhīnaŋ p. expld at DA i.98 as "khārâdīni datvā tad -- anurūpo khaṇe gate tesaŋ apanayanaŋ." Cp. Dial. 26. -- 2. binding, obligatory J v.25 (sangaraŋ p. a binding promise). Cp. pāṭimokkha. Paṭiya
Paṭiya
(nt.) [ = paṭikā] a white woollen counterpane J iv.352 (=uṇṇāmaya -- paccattharaṇāni setakambalāni pi vadanti yeva C.). Paṭiyatta
Paṭiyatta
[pp. of paṭi+yat] prepared, got ready, made, dressed Vin iv.18 (alankata˚); J iv.380 (C. for pakata), PvA 25 (C. for upaṭṭhita), 75 (alankata˚), 135 (id.), 232 (id.), 279 (id.); KhA 118 (alankata˚). Paṭiyāti
Paṭiyāti
[paṭi+yā, cp. pacceti] to go back to, reach J vi.149 (C. for paṭimuñcati). Paṭiyādita
Paṭiyādita
[pp. of paṭiyādeti] given, prepared, arranged, dedicated Miln 9; DhA ii.75. Paṭiyādeti
Paṭiyādeti
[for *paṭiyāteti = Sk. pratiyātayati, Caus. of paṭi+yat, like P. niyyādeti=Sk. niryātayati] to prepare, arrange, give, dedicate SnA 447. -- pp. paṭiyādita (q. v.). -- Caus.II. paṭiyādāpeti to cause to be presented or got ready, to assign, advise, give over Vin i.249 (yāguŋ); Sn p. 110 (bhojaniyaŋ); P.vA 22, 141. Paṭiyālokaŋ
Paṭi
-- y -- ālokaŋ gacchati "to go to the South" Vin iv.131, 161. Paṭiyodha
Paṭiyodha
[paṭi+yodha] counterfight J iii.3. Paṭiyoloketi
Paṭiyoloketi
(T. paṭi -- oloketi) [paṭi+oloketi] to look at, to keep an eye on, observe J ii.406. Paṭirava
Paṭirava
[paṭi+rava] shouting out, roar Dāvs iv.52. Paṭirājā
Paṭirājā
[paṭi+rājā] hostile king, royal adversary J vi.472; DhA i.193. Paṭiruddha
Paṭiruddha
[pp. paṭi+rudh] obstructed, hindered, held back, caged J iv.4 (oruddha -- paṭiruddha sic.). Paṭirūpa
Paṭirūpa
(adj.) [paṭi+rūpa] fit, proper, suitable, befitting, seeming D i.91; Vin ii.166 (seyyā); M i.123; S i.214; ii.194 (ap˚); Th 2, 341; Pv ii.1215; J v.99; Pug 27; DhA iii.142; PvA 26, 122 ( = yutta), 124. -- ˚desavāsa living in a suitable region D iii.276=A ii.32; Nett 29, 50. -- Spelt pati˚ at Dh 158; Sn 89, 187, 667; SnA 390. Cp. pāṭirūpika. Paṭirūpaka
Paṭirūpaka
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. paṭirūpa] like, resembling, dis- guised as, in the appearance of, having the form of S i.230; DhA i.29 (putta˚); PvA 15 (samaṇa˚). As pati˚ at SnA 302, 348, 390. -- nt. an optical delusion DhA iii.56. Paṭirūpatā
Paṭirūpatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. paṭirūpa] likeness, semblance, appearance, pretence PvA 268 ( = vaṇṇa). Paṭirodati
Paṭirodati
[paṭi+rodati of rud] to cry in return, to reply by crying J iii.80; pp. paṭirodita = paṭirodana. Paṭirodana
Paṭirodana
(nt.) [paṭi+rodana] replying through crying J iii.80. Paṭirodeti
Paṭirodeti
[paṭi+Caus. of rud] to scold back S i.162. Paṭirosati
Paṭirosati
[paṭi+rosati] to annoy in return, to tease back S i.162; A ii.215; Nd1 397. Paṭiladdha
Paṭiladdha
[pp. of paṭilabhati] received, got, obtained PvA 15 ( = laddha), 88. Paṭilabhati
Paṭilabhati
[paṭi+labhati] to obtain, receive, get It 77; J i.91; Nd2 427 (pariyesati p. paribhuñjati); Pug 57; VvA 115; PvA 6, 7, 16, 50, 60, 67 etc. -- pret. 3rd pl. paccaladdhaŋsu S i.48 (so v. l. & C. T. ˚latthaŋsu), expld by paṭilabhiŋsu cp. K. S. 319. -- aor. 1st sg. paṭilacchiŋ J v.71. -- Caus. paṭilābheti to cause to take or get, to rob J v.76 (paṭilābhayanti naŋ "rob me of him"). Paṭilābha
Paṭilābha
[fr. paṭi+labh] obtaining, receiving, taking up, acquisition, assumption, attainment D i.195; M i.50; A ii.93, 143; Ps ii.182, 189; Nd1 262; Dh 333; Pug 57; VvA 113; PvA 50, 73, 74. -- attabhāva˚ obtaining a reincarnation, coming into existence S ii.256; iii.144; A ii.159, 188; iii.122 sq. -- See also paribhoga. Paṭilika
Paṭilika
v. l. BB together with paṭalika for talika at J iii.80 (cp. A iii 36?). Paṭilīna
Paṭilīna
[pp. of paṭilīyati] having withdrawn, keeping away S i.48 (˚nisabha "expert to eliminate"; reading pati˚); with reading pati also; A ii.41; iv.449; Sn 810, 852; Nd1 130, 224 (rāgassa etc. pahīnattā patilīno). Paṭilīyati
Paṭilīyati
[paṭi+līyati of lī] to withdraw, draw back, keep away from, not to stick to A iv.47 = Miln 297 (+paṭikuṭati paṭivaṭṭati; Miln & id. p. at S ii.265 print pati˚); Vism 347 (+paṭikuṭṭati pativaṭṭati). -- pp. paṭilīna; Caus. paṭileṇeti (q. v.). Paṭileṇeti
Paṭileṇeti
[Sec. dern fr. pp. paṭilīna in sense of Caus.; cp. Sk. ˚lāpayati of lī] to withdraw, to make keep away, not to touch S ii.265 (pati˚, as at Miln 297 patilīyati). Paṭilobheti
Paṭilobheti
[paṭi+Caus. of lubh] to fill with desire, to entice J v.96. Paṭiloma
Paṭiloma
(adj.) [paṭi+loma] "against the hair," in reverse order, opposite, contrary, backward; usually combd with anuloma i. e. forward & backward Vin i.1; A iv.448; etc (see paṭiccasamuppāda); J ii.307. -- ˚pakkha opposition PvA 114 (cp. paṭipakkha). Paṭivacana
Paṭivacana
(nt.) [paṭi+vacana] answer, reply, rejoinder J iv.18; Miln 120; PvA 83 (opp. vacana); ThA 285. -- 399 -- Paṭivaṭṭati
Paṭivaṭṭati
(& ˚vattati) [paṭi+vr̥t] (intrs.) to roll or move back, to turn away from A iv.47 = Miln 297 (paṭilīyati paṭikutati p.); Caus. paṭivaṭṭeti in same meaning trs. (but cp. Childers s. v. "to knock, strike") S ii.265 (T. spells pati˚, as also at Miln 297). -- grd. paṭivattiya only in neg. ap˚ (q. v.). -- pp. paṭivatta (q. v.). Paṭivatta
Paṭivatta
(nt.) [pp. of paṭivattati] moving backwards, only in cpd. vatta -- paṭivatta -- karaṇa "moving forth or backwards, " performance of different kinds of duties; doing this, that & the other DhA i.157. Paṭivattar
Paṭivattar
[paṭi+vattar, n. ag. of vac] one who contra- dicts S i.222. Paṭivadati
Paṭivadati
[paṭi+vadati] to answer, reply A iv.168 (v. l. for paṭicarati); Sn 932; Dh 133; Nd1 397; PvA 39. Paṭivasati
Paṭivasati
[paṭi+vasati] to live, dwell (at) D i.129; Vin ii.299; S i.177; J i.202; SnA 462; PvA 42, 67. Paṭivāṇa, Paṭivāṇitā, Paṭivāṇī
Paṭivāṇa,
Paṭivāṇitā, Paṭivāṇī etc. occur only in neg. form app˚, q. v. Paṭivātaŋ
Paṭivātaŋ
(adv.) [paṭi+vātaŋ, acc. cp. Sk. prativāta & prativātaŋ] against the wind (opp. anuvātaŋ) Vin ii.218; S i.13; Sn 622; Dh 54, 125; PvA 116; Sdhp 425. Paṭivāda
Paṭivāda
[paṭi+vāda] retort, recrimination Miln 18 (vāda˚ talk and counter -- talk). Paṭivāpeti
Paṭivāpeti
[Caus. of paṭi+vap] to turn away from, to free from, cleanse M i.435 = A iv.423; DhsA 407. Paṭivāmeti
Paṭivāmeti
[paṭi+Caus. vam] to throw out again DA i.39.

Cp. J.P.T.S. 1886, p. 160, suggesting paṭivādh˚, or paṭibādhayamāno, and referring to Th 1, 744. Paṭiviŋsa
Paṭiviŋsa
[paṭi -- aŋsa with euphonic consonant v instead of y (paṭi -- y -- aŋsa) and assimilation of a to i (paṭiyiŋsa> paṭiviŋsa)] lit. "divided part," sub -- part, share, bit, portion, part Vin i.28; iii.60 (T. reads paṭivisa); J ii.286; DhsA 135; DhA i.189; iii.304; VvA 61 (˚vīsa), 64 (v. l. ˚vīsa), 120 (id.). Paṭiviŋsaka
Paṭiviŋsaka
[prec.+ka] part share, portion DhA ii.85. Paṭivigacchati
Paṭivigacchati
[paṭi+vi+gacchati] to go apart again, to go away or asunder A iii.243; Miln 51. Paṭivijānāti
Paṭivijānāti
[paṭi+vi+jānāti] to recognise Vin iii.130; Nd2 378 (ājānāti vijānāti p. paṭivijjhati); Miln 299. Paṭivijjha
Paṭivijjha
(adj.) [grd. of paṭivijjhati] in cpd. dup˚ hard to penetrate (lit. & fig.) S v.454. Paṭivijjhati
Paṭivijjhati
[paṭi+vijjhati of vyadh] to pierce through, penetrate (lit. & fig.), intuit, to acquire, master, comprehend Vin i.183; S ii.56; v.119, 278, 387, 454; A iv.228, 469; Nd2 378; J i.67, 75; Ps i.180 sq.; Miln 344; DhA i.334. -- aor. paṭivijjha Sn 90 ( = aññāsi sacchākāsi SnA 166), and paccavyādhi Th 1, 26=1161 (˚byādhi); also 3rd pl. paccavidhuŋ A iv.228. -- pp. paṭividdha (q. v.). On phrase uttariŋ appaṭivijjhanto. See uttari. Paṭivijjhanaka
Paṭivijjhanaka
(adj.) [paṭi+vijjhana+ka,of vyadh] only in neg. ap˚ impenetrable DhA iv.194. Paṭividita
Paṭividita
[pp. of paṭi+vid] known, ascertained D i.2; Ps i.188. Paṭividdha
Paṭividdha
[pp. of paṭivijjhati] being or having penetrated or pierced; having acquired, mastering, knowing M i.438; S ii.56 (sup˚); Ps ii.19, 20; J i.214; VvA 73 (˚catusacca = saccānaŋ kovida). -- appaṭividdha not pierced, not hurt J vi.446. Paṭivinaya
Paṭivinaya
[paṭi+vi+nī] repression, subdual, only in cpd. āghāta˚ D iii.262, 289; A iii.185 sq. See āghāta. Paṭivinicchinati
Paṭivinicchinati
[paṭi+vinicchinati] to try or judge a case again, to reconsider J ii.187. Paṭivinīta
Paṭivinīta
[pp. of paṭivineti] removed, dispelled, subdued S ii.283; v.76, 315. Paṭivineti
Paṭivineti
[paṭi+vi+nī] to drive out, keep away, repress, subdue S i.228; M i.13; A iii.185 sq.; J vi.551; PvA 104 (pipāsaŋ). Cp. BSk. prativineti MVastu ii.121. -- pp. paṭivinīta (q. v.). Paṭivinodana
Paṭivinodana
(nt.) [fr. paṭivinodeti] removal, driving out, explusion A ii.48, 50; Miln 320. Paṭivinodaya
Paṭivinodaya
(adj. -- n.) [fr. paṭivinodeti] dispelling, sub- duing, riddance, removal; dup˚ hard to dispel A iii.184 sq. Paṭivinodeti
Paṭivinodeti
[paṭi+vi+Caus. of nud, Cp. BSk. prativinu- dati Divy 34, 371 etc.] to remove, dispel, drive out, get rid of D i.138; M i.48; Pv iii.58; Pug 64; VvA 305; PvA 60. Paṭivibhajati
Paṭivibhajati
[paṭi+vibhajati] to divide off, to divide into (equal) parts M i.58 (cp. iii.91; paṭibhaj˚ & v. l. vibhaj˚). Paṭivibhatta
Paṭivibhatta
(adj.) [paṭi+vibhatta] (equally) divided M i.372; A iv.211; VvA 50. On neg. ap˚ in cpd. ˚bhogin see appaṭivibhatta. Paṭivirata
Paṭivirata
(adj.) [pp. of paṭiviramati, cp. BSk. prativi- ramati Divy ii, 302, 585] abstaining from, shrinking from (with abl.) D i.5; M iii.23; S v.468; It 63; Pug 39, 58; DA i.70; PvA 28, 260. -- app˚ not abstaining from Vin ii.296; S v.468; It 64. Paṭivirati
Paṭivirati
(f.) [fr. paṭivirata] abstinence from Dhs 299; M iii.74; PvA 206. Paṭiviramati
Paṭiviramati
[paṭi+viramati] to absṭain from M i.152. Paṭivirujjhati
Paṭivirujjhati
[paṭi+vi+rudh] to act hostile, to fall out with somebody, to quarrel (saddhiŋ) J iv.104. -- pp. paṭiviruddha (q. v.). Paṭiviruddha
Paṭiviruddha
[pp. of paṭivirujjhati, cp. BSk. prativiruddha rebellious Divy 445] obstructed or obstructing, an adversary, opponent J vi.12; DA i.51 (˚ā satta = pare); Miln 203, 403. Paṭivirūhati
Paṭivirūhati
[paṭi+virūhati] to grow again Vism 419. Paṭivirodha
Paṭivirodha
[paṭi+virodha] hostility, enmity, opposition Dhs 418, 1060; Pug 18; Miln 203. Paṭivisiṭṭha
Paṭivisiṭṭha
[paṭi+visiṭṭha] peculiar M i.372. Paṭivisesa
Paṭivisesa
[paṭi+visesa] sub -- discrimination J ii.9. Paṭivissaka
Paṭivissaka
(adj.) [fr. paṭi+*veśman or *veśya] dwelling near, neighbouring M i.126; J i.114, 483; iii.163; iv.49; v.434; DhA i.47 (˚itthi), 155, 235 (˚dārakā). Paṭivutta
Paṭivutta
(paṭi+vutta, pp. of vac] said against, replied Vin iii.131, 274. Paṭivekkhiya
Paṭivekkhiya
see ap˚. Paṭivedeti
Paṭivedeti
[paṭi+vedeti, Caus. of vid] to make known, declare, announce Vin i.180; S i.101, 234; Sn 415 (aor. ˚vedayi); DA i.227; PvA 6 (pītisomanassaŋ). Paṭivedha
Paṭivedha
[fr. paṭi+vyadhī cp. paṭivijjhati & BSk. prati- vedha MVastu i.86] lit. piercing, i. e. penetration, comprehension, attainment, insight, knowledge A i.22, 44; D iii.253; Ps i.105; ii.50, 57, 105, 112, 148, 182; Vbh 330; Miln 18; SnA 110, 111; Sdhp 65. -- appaṭivedha non -- intelligence, ignorance Vin i.230; S ii.92; iii.261; v.431; A ii.1; Dhs 390, 1061, 1162; Pug 21. -- duppaṭivedha (adj.) hard to pierce or penetrate; flg. difficult to master Miln 250. -- maggaphala˚ realisation of the fruit of the Path DhA i.110. -- 400 -- Paṭivera
Paṭivera
[paṭi+vera] revenge DhA i.50. Paṭivellati
Paṭivellati
[paṭi+vellati] to embrace, cling to J v.449. Paṭivyāharati
Paṭivyāharati
[paṭi+vyāharati] to desist from, aor. pacca- vyāhāsi D ii.232. Paṭivyūhati
Paṭivyūhati
(pati˚) [paṭi+vyūhati] to heap up against (?) SnA 554. Paṭisaŋyamati
Paṭisaŋyamati
[paṭi+saŋyamati] to restrain, to exercise self -- control J iv.396. Paṭisaŋyujati
Paṭisaŋyujati
[paṭi+saŋ+yuj] to connect with, fig. to start, begin (vādaŋ a discussion or argument) S i.221 (bālena paṭisaŋyuje = paṭipphareyya C.; "engage himself to bandy with a fool" K.S. 284); Sn 843 (vādaŋ p.= paṭipphareyya kalahaŋ kareyya Nd1 196). -- pp. paṭisaŋyutta (q. v.). Paṭisaŋyutta
Paṭisaŋyutta
[pp. of paṭisaŋyujati] connected with, coupled, belonging to Vin iv.6; S i.210 (nibbāna ˚dhammikathā); Th 1, 598; It 73; VvA 6, 87; PvA 12. Paṭisaŋvidita
Paṭisaŋvidita
[pp. of paṭi+saŋ+vid; same (prati) at MVastu iii.256] apperceived, known, recognised, in phrase "pubbe appaṭisaŋvidita pañho" S ii.54. Paṭisaŋvedin
Paṭisaŋvedin
(adj.) [fr. paṭisaŋvedeti; BSk. pratisaŋ- vedin Divy 567] experiencing, feeling, enjoying or suffering M i.56; S i.196; ii.122; iv.41; v.310 sq.; A i.164 (sukhadukkha˚); iv.303 (id.); v.35 (id.); It 99; Ps i.95, 114 (evaŋsukhadukkha˚), 184, 186 sq.; Pug 57, 58. Paṭisaŋvedeti
Paṭisaŋvedeti
[paṭi+saŋ+vedeti, Caus. of vid] to feel, experience, undergo, perceive D i.43, 45; A i.157 (domanassaŋ); iv.406 (id.); Pug 59; PvA 192 (mahādukkhaŋ). There is also a by -- form, viz. paṭisaŋvediyati S ii.18, 75, 256 (attabhāva -- paṭilābhaŋ); It 38 (sukkha -- dukkhaŋ; v. l. ˚vedeti). Paṭisaŋharaṇa
Paṭisaŋharaṇa
(nt.) [fr. paṭisaŋharati] removing Nett 27, 41. Paṭisaŋharati
Paṭisaŋharati
[paṭi+saŋ+hṛ, cp. BSk. pratisaŋharati MVastu i.82] to draw back, withdraw, remove, take away, give up Vin ii.185 (sakavaṇṇaŋ); D i.96; S v.156; PvA 92 (devarūpaŋ). Paṭisakkati
Paṭisakkati
[paṭi+sakkati] to run back Vin ii.195; A iv.190. Paṭisankhayanto
Paṭisankhayanto
is ppr. of paṭi+saŋ+kṣi, to be pacified Th 1, 371. Paṭisankharoti
Paṭisankharoti
[paṭi+saŋ+kṛ] to restore, repair, mend Vin ii.160; A ii.249; J iii.159 (nagaraŋ). Caus. II. paṭisankhārāpeti to cause to repair or build up again M iii.7; J vi.390 (gehāni). Paṭisankhā
Paṭisankhā
(f.) [paṭi+sankhā of khyā] reflection, judg- ment, consideration Vin i.213; S iv.104 (˚yoniso); Ps i.33, 45, 57, 60, 64; Pug 25, 57; Dhs 1349. appaṭisankhā (see also ˚sankhāti) want of judgment, inconsideration Ps i.33, 45; Dhs 1346 = Pug 21. -- Note. In combn paṭisankhā yoniso "carefully, with proper care or intention" p. is to be taken as ger. of paṭisankhāti (q. v.). This connection is frequent, e. g. S iv.104; A ii.40; Nd1 496; Nd2 540. Paṭisankhāti
Paṭisankhāti
[paṭi+saŋ+khyā] to be careful, to think over, reflect, discriminate, consider; only in ger. paṭisankhā (as adv.) carefully, intently, with discrimination Vin i.213; M i.273; iii.2; J i.304; Nd2 540; Pug 25; cp. paṭisankhā (+yoniso); also ger. paṭisankhāya Sddp 394. -- Opp. appaṭisankhā inconsiderately, in phrase sahasā app˚ rashly & without a thought M i.94; S ii.110, 219. -- Cp. paṭisañcikkhati. Paṭisankhāna
Paṭisankhāna
(nt.) [fr. paṭisankhāti] carefulness, mind- fulness, consideration J i.502; VvA 327; DhsA 402 (˚paññā); Sdhp 397. -- ˚bala power of computation A i.52, 94; ii.142; D iii.213, 244; Ps ii.169, 176; Dhs 1354 (cp. Dhs trsln 354); Nett 15, 16, 38. Paṭisankhārika & ˚ya
Paṭisankhārika
& ˚ya (adj.) [fr. paṭisankharoti] serving for repair Vin iii.43 (dārūni); PvA 141 (id.; ˚ya). Paṭisañcikkhati
Paṭisañcikkhati
[paṭi+saŋ+cikkhati of khyā; cp. paṭi- sankhāti & BSk. pratisañcikṣati MVastu ii.314] to think over, to discriminate, consider, reflect Vin i.5; D i.63; M i.267, 499; iii.33; S i.137; A i.205; Pug 25; Vism 283. Paṭisañjīvita
Paṭisañjīvita
[pp. of paṭi+saŋ+jīv] revived, resurrected M i.333. Paṭisatena
Paṭisatena
(adv.) [paṭi+instr. of sataŋ] by the hundred, i. e. in front of a hundred (people) Vin i.269. Paṭisattu
Paṭisattu
[paṭi+sattu] an enemy (in retaliation) J ii.406; Nd1 172, 173; Miln 293. Paṭisanthata
Paṭisanthata
[pp. of paṭisantharati] kindly received (covered, concealed? C.) J vi.23 ( = paṭicchāditaŋ guttaŋ paripuṇṇaŋ vā C.). Paṭisantharati
Paṭisantharati
[paṭi+saŋ+tharati of stṛ] to receive kindly, to welcome, Miln 409; DhsA 397. ger. ˚santhāya J vi.351. -- pp. paṭisanthata (q. v.). Paṭisanthāra
Paṭisanthāra
[fr. paṭi+saŋ+stṛ] lit. spreading before, i. e. friendly welcome, kind reception, honour, goodwill, favour, friendship D iii.213, 244; A i.93; iii.303 sq.; iv.28, 120; v.166, 168 (˚aka adj. one who welcomes); J ii.57; Dh 376 (expld as āmisa˚ and dhamma˚ at DhA iv.111, see also DhsA 397 sq. & Dhs trsl. 350); Dhs 1344; Vbh 360; Miln 409. paṭisanthāraŋ karoti to make friends, to receive friendly PvA 12, 44, 141, 187. Paṭisandahati
Paṭisandahati
[paṭi+sandahati] to undergo reunion (see next) Miln 32. Paṭisandhi
Paṭisandhi
[fr. paṭi+saŋ+dhā] reunion (of vital principle with a body), reincarnation, metempsychosis Ps i.11 sq., 52, 59 sq.; ii.72 sq.; Nett 79, 80; Miln 140; DhA ii.85; VvA 53; PvA 8, 79, 136, 168. A detailed discussion of p. is to be found at VbhA 155 -- 160. -- appaṭisandhika see sep. Paṭisama
Paṭisama
(adj.) [paṭi+sama] equal, forming, a counter- part Miln 205 (rāja˚); neg. appaṭisama not having one's equal, incomparable J i.94; Miln 331. Paṭisambhidā
Paṭisambhidā
(f.) [paṭi+saŋ+bhid; the BSk. pratisaŋvid is a new formation resting on confusion between bhid & vid, favoured by use & meaning of latter root in P. paṭisaŋvidita. In BSk. we find pratisaŋvid in same application as in P., viz. as fourfold artha˚ dharma˚ nirukti˚ pratibhāna˚ (?). MVastu iii.321] lit. "resolving continuous breaking up," i. e. analysis, analytic insight, discriminating knowledge. See full discussion & expln of term at Kvu trsln 377 -- 382. Always referred to as "the four branches of logical analysis" (catasso or catupaṭisambhidā), viz. attha˚ analysis of meanings "in extension"; dhamma˚ of reasons, conditions, or causal relations; nirutti˚ of [meanings "in intension" as given in] definitions paṭibhāna˚ or intellect to which things knowable by the foregoing processes are presented (after Kvu trsln). In detail at A ii.160; iii.113. 120; Ps i.88, 119; ii.150, 157, 185, 193; Vbh 293 -- 305; VbhA 386 sq. (cp. Vism 440 sq.), 391 sq. -- See further A i.22; iv.31; Nd2 386 under paṭibhānavant; Ps i.84. 132, 134; ii.32, 56, 116, 189; Miln 22 (attha -- dh˚nirutti -- paṭibhāna -- pāramippatta), 359; VvA 2; DhA iv.70 (catūsu p -- ˚ āsu cheka). p˚ -- patta one who has attained mastership in analysis A i.24; iii.120; Ps ii.202. -- Often included in the attainment of Arahantship, in formula "saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaŋ pāpunāti," viz. Miln 18; DhA ii.58, 78, 93. -- 401 -- Paṭisammajjati
Paṭisammajjati
[paṭi+sammajjati] to sweep over again Miln 15. Paṭisammodeti
Paṭisammodeti
[paṭi+saŋ+Caus. of mud] to greet friendly in return J vi.224 ( = sammodanīya -- kathāya paṭikatheti C.). Paṭisaraṇa
Paṭisaraṇa
(nt.) [paṭi+saraṇa1] refuge in ( -- ˚), shelter, help, protection M i.295 (mano as p. of the other 5 senses); iii.9; S iv.221; v.218; A i.199 (Bhagavaŋ˚); ii.148 (sa˚ able to be restored); iii.186 (kamma˚); iv.158, 351; v.355; J i.213; vi.398. -- appaṭisaraṇa (adj.) without shelter, unprotected Vin ii.153 (so read for appaṭiss˚). -- Note. In meaning "restoration" the derivation is prob. fr paṭi+sṛ to move (Sk. saraṇa and not saraṇa protection). Cp. paṭisāraṇiya. Paṭisarati
Paṭisarati1
[paṭi+sṛ] to run back, stay back, lag behind Sn 8 sq. (opp. atisarati; aor. paccasāri expld by ohiyyi SnA 21). Paṭisarati
Paṭisarati2
[paṭi+smṛ] to think back upon, to mention DA i.267. Paṭisallāna
Paṭisallāna
(& ˚āṇa, e. g. S v.320) (nt.) [for *paṭisallayana, fr. paṭi+saŋ+ lī , cp. paṭilīna & paṭilīyati, also BSk. pratisaŋlayana Divy 156, 194, 494] retirement for the purpose of meditation, solitude, privacy, seclusion D iii.252; M i.526; S i.77; iii.15; iv.80, 144; v.12, 398, 414; A ii.51, 176; iii.86 sq., 116 sq., 195; iv.15, 36, 88; v.166, 168; Sn 69 (cp. Nd2 s. v.); J ii.77 (pati˚); Vbh 244, 252; Miln 138, 412.

-- ārāma fond(ness) of solitude or seclusion (also ˚rata) A iii.261 sq.; It 39; Nd2 433. -- sāruppa very suitable for seclusion Vism 90. Paṭisalliyati
Paṭisalliyati
(˚līyati) [fr. paṭi+saŋ+ lī, cp. paṭilīyati] to be in seclusion (for the purpose of meditation) Vin iii.39 (inf. ˚salliyituŋ); D ii.237; S v.12 (id.), 320, 325; Miln 139. -- pp. paṭisallīna (q. v.). Paṭisallīna
Paṭisallīna
[pp. of paṭisalliyati; cp. BSk. pratisaŋlīna Divy 196, 291.] secluded, retired, gone into solitude, abstracted, plunged in meditation, separated Vin i.101 (rahogata+); D i.134, 151; S i.71, 146 sq. (divāvihāragata+), 225; ii.74 (rahogata+); iv.80, 90, 144; v.415; A ii.20; SnA 346 (pati˚); J i.349; Miln 10, 138 sq.; VvA 3; DA i.309 (pati˚). Paṭisāṭheyya
Paṭisāṭheyya
(nt.) [paṭi+sāṭheyya] a deceit in return (cp. paṭikūṭa) J ii.183. Paṭisāmita
Paṭisāmita
[pp. of paṭisāmeti] arranged, got ready Vism 91. Paṭisāmeti
Paṭisāmeti
[paṭi+Caus. of śam, samati to make ready; cp. BSk. pratiśāmayati Divy passim] to set in order, arrange, get ready Vin ii.113, 211, 216; M i.456; J iii.72; Miln 15 (pattacīvaraŋ); VvA 118 (v. l. ˚yāpeti), 157 (v. l. ˚nameti). Paṭisāyati
Paṭisāyati
[paṭi+sāyati] to taste, eat, partake of food Vin ii.177. Paṭisāra
Paṭisāra
[paṭi+smṛ] see vi˚. Paṭisārana
Paṭisārana
(nt.) [fr. paṭi+sāreti] act of protection, expia- tion, atonement Miln 344 (in law); appld. Paṭisāraṇiya
Paṭisāraṇiya
(adj. nt.) [a grd. formation fr. paṭi+sāreti, Caus. of sṛ to move] only as t.t. in combn with kamma (official act, chapter), i. e. a formal proceeding by which a bhikkhu expiates an offence which he has committed against someone, reconciliation (cp. Vin. Texts ii.364) Vin i.49 (one of the 5 Sangha -- kammas, viz. tajjaniya˚, nissaya˚, pabbājaniya˚, p.˚, ukkhepaniya˚), 143 (id.), 326; ii.15 -- 20, 295; A i.99; iv.346; DhA ii.75. Paṭisārin
Paṭisārin
(adj.) [fr. paṭi+sṛ, cp. paṭisāraniya & paṭisaraṇa Note] falling back upon, going back to, trusting in, leaning on ( -- ˚) D i.99 (gotta˚); S i.153 (id.); ii.284 (id.). Paṭisāsana
Paṭisāsana
(nt.) [paṭi+sāsana] counter -- message, reply DhA i.392. Paṭisibbita
Paṭisibbita
[pp. of paṭi+sibbati] sewn, embroidered VvA 167 (pati˚). Paṭisīsaka
Paṭisīsaka
[paṭi+sīsaka] a false top -- knot, "chignon" (?) J ii.197 (˚ŋ paṭimuñcitvā); v.49 (id.); Miln 90 (muṇḍaka˚). Paṭisutta
Paṭisutta
[pp. of paṭi+svap] sunk into sleep Th 1, 203. Paṭisumbhita
Paṭisumbhita
[pp. of paṭi+śumbh] fallen down Pv iii.18 ( = patita PvA 174). Paṭisūra
Paṭisūra
[paṭi+sūra] a rival hero or fighter, an opponent in fight Sn 831 ( = paṭipurisa paṭisattu paṭimalla Nd1 172); Nd1 173 (id.). Paṭiseṭṭha
Paṭiseṭṭha
(adj.) [paṭi+seṭṭha] having a superior; neg. app˚ incomparable, unsurpassed Miln 357 (appaṭibhāga+). Paṭisedha
Paṭisedha
[fr. paṭi+sidh1, sedhati drive off] warding off, prohibition Miln 314 ("resubjugation"); SnA 402 (with ref. to part "na"); KhA 170 (id.); PvA 11 (˚nipāta = "mā"); VvA 224. Paṭisedhaka
Paṭisedhaka
(adj. n.) [fr. paṭisedha] warding off, one who prevents or puts a stop to S i.221; Miln 344. Paṭisedhati
Paṭisedhati
& (Caus.) ˚sedheti [paṭi+sedhati] to ward off, prohibit, prevent, refuse S iv.341; PvA 11. Paṭisedhana
Paṭisedhana
(nt.) [cp. paṭisedha] warding off, refusal, prohibition, stopping S i.221, 223; PvA 11, 25; Sdhp 397. Paṭisedhitar
Paṭisedhitar
[n. ag. fr. paṭisedhati] one who prohibits or refuses J ii.123. = v.91. Paṭisena
Paṭisena
[paṭi+sena, of either sī or śri, cp. usseneti] repulsion, opposition, enmity, retaliation; only in compn with kṛ as ˚senikaroti to make opposition, to oppose, retaliate Sn 932, cp. Nd1 397; -- ˚senikattar (n. ag.), one who repulses, fighter, retaliator, arguer Sn 832, cp. Nd1 173. Paṭiseneti
Paṭiseneti
[paṭi+seneti, see usseneti] to repel, push away, be inimical towards, retaliate (opp. usseneti) A ii.215 (paṭisseneti); Sn 390 (˚seniyati). Paṭisevati
Paṭisevati
[paṭi+sevati, cp. BSk. pratisevate Divy 258 in same meaning] to follow, pursue, indulge in (acc.), practise Vin ii.296 (methunaŋ dhammaŋ); M i.10; A ii.54 (methunaŋ); J i.437; vi.73, 505; Dh 67; Nd1 496; Pug 62; Miln 224; DhA ii.40; PvA 130; Sdhp 396. -> Note. paṭisevati is spelt pati˚ at Dh 67, 68; J iii.275, 278. Paṭisevana
Paṭisevana
(nt.) [fr. paṭisevati] going after, indulging in, practice M i.10. Paṭisevitar
Paṭisevitar
[n. ag. of paṭisevati] one who practises, pur- sues or indulges in (acc.) A iii.143 sq. (bhesajjaŋ). Paṭisotaŋ
Paṭisotaŋ
(adv.) [paṭi+sotaŋ, acc. of sota] against the stream (opp. anusotaŋ) It 114; J i.70; PvA 154. -> paṭisotagāmin going against the stream, toiling, doing hard work S i.136; A ii.6 (opp. anu˚), 214 sq. Paṭissata
Paṭissata
[paṭi+sata, pp. of smṛ] recollecting, thoughtful, mindful, minding Sn 283 = Miln 411; Dh 144 (t); Vv 2110; and with spelling pati˚ at S iii.143; iv.74, 322, 351; A iii.24; It 10, 21, 81; Sn 283, 413. Paṭissati
Paṭissati
(f.) [paṭi+sati of smṛ] mindfulness, remembrance, memory M i.36 sq.; Dhs 23; Pug 25. app˚ lapse of memory Dhs 1349. -- 402 -- Paṭissatika
Paṭissatika
(adj.) [fr. paṭissati] mindful, thoughtful Th 1, 42. Paṭissava
Paṭissava
[fr. paṭi+śru] assent, promise, obedience J vi.220; VvA 351 (cp. paṭissaya VvA 347). Paṭissavatā
Paṭissavatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. paṭissava] obedience; neg. appaṭissavatā want of deference Dhs 1325 = Pug 20. Paṭissā & Patissā
Paṭissā
& Patissā (f.) [paṭi+śru, cp. paṭissuṇāti & paṭis- sāvin; in BSk. we find pratīsā which if legitimate would refer the word to a basis different than śru. The form occurs in cpd. sapratīśa respectful Divy; also MVastu i.516; ii.258; besides as sapratisa MVastu iii.345] deference, obedience, only in cpd. sappaṭissa (q. v.) obedient, deferential It 10 (sappatissa); Vv 8441 (cp. VvA 347), & appaṭissa disobedient, not attached to S i.139; ii.224 sq.; A ii.20; iii.7, 247, 439; J ii.352 (˚vāsa anarchy; reading t); PvA 89. Paṭissāvin
Paṭissāvin
(adj.) [fr. paṭi+śru] assenting, ready, obedient, willing D i.60; S iii.113 (kinkāra -- paṭi˚). Paṭissuṇāti
Paṭissuṇāti
[paṭi+śru] to assent, promise, agree aor. paccassosi Vin i.73; D i.236; S i.147, 155; Sn p. 50, and paṭisuṇi SnA 314; ger. ˚suṇitvā freq. in formula "sādhū ti patissuṇitvā" asserting his agreement, saying yes S i.119; PvA 13, 54, 55; & passim; also paṭissutvā S i.155. -- f. abstr. paṭissutavatā SnA 314. Paṭisseneti
Paṭisseneti
see paṭiseneti. Paṭihaŋsati
Paṭihaŋsati
[for ghaŋsati?] to beat, knock against PvA 271 (for ghaṭṭeti Pv iv.108; v. l. paṭipisati). Paṭihankhati
Paṭihankhati
[fut. of paṭihanti] only in one stock phrase viz. purāṇañ ca vedanaŋ paṭihankhāmi navañ ca vedanaŋ na uppādessāmi "I shall destroy any old feeling and not produce any new" S iv.104 = A ii.40= iii.388=iv.167=Nd1 496=Nd2 5402; Vism 32, 33. Paṭihata
Paṭihata
[pp. of paṭihanti] stricken, smitten, corrupted Pv iii.79; PvA 20 (˚citta), 207 (id.). -- app˚ unobstructed DhA ii.8; VvA 14. Paṭihanana
Paṭihanana
(nt.) [fr. paṭi+han] repulsion, warding off Vism 31. Paṭihananaka
Paṭihananaka
(adj.) [fr. paṭi+han] one who offers resist- ance DhA i.217. Paṭihanati
Paṭihanati
[paṭi+han] to strike against, ward off, keep away, destroy M i.273; Miln 367; ppr. paṭihanamāna meeting, impinging on, striking against Vism 343. -> ger. paṭihacca S v.69, 237, 285; fut. paṭihankhati; pp. paṭihata (q. v.). -- Pass. paṭihaññati It 103; J i.7; DhsA 72. Paṭiharati
Paṭiharati
[paṭi+hṛ] to strike in return Vin ii.265; D i.142; S iv.299. -- Caus. paṭihāreti to repel, avoid J vi.266, 295. -- Cp. pāṭihāriya etc. Paṭu
Paṭu
(adj.) [cp. Epic. Sk. paṭu] sharp, pungent; fig. keen, wise, clever, skilful Vism 337 (˚saññākicca), 338. Cp. paddha1 & pāṭava. Paṭuppādana
Paṭuppādana
(nt.) [paṭa (?) +upp˚] subtraction (opp. sankalana) DA i.95. The word is not clear (cp. Dial. i.22). Paṭuva
Paṭuva
at D i.54 is read as pacuṭa by Bdhgh. & trsln (see Dial. i.72). See under pavuṭā. Paṭola
Paṭola
[dial.?] a kind of cucumber, Trichosanthes Dioeca Vin i.201 (˚paṇṇa). Paṭṭa
Paṭṭa
[cp. late Sk. paṭṭa, doubtful etym.] 1. slab, tablet, plate, in cpds. ayo˚ iron plate A iv.130, 131; J iv.7 (suvaṇṇa˚); PvA 43 (ayomaya˚); loha˚ brass plate PvA 44; silā˚ stone slab J i.59 etc. When written on, it is placed into a casket (mañjūsā) J ii.36; iv.335. -> 2. a bandage, strip (of cloth) Vv 3341 (āyoga˚) = VvA 142. -- 3. fine cloth, woven silk, cotton cloth, turban ( -- cloth) Vin ii.266 (dussa˚=setavattha -- paṭṭa Bdhgh, see Vin. Texts iii.341); S ii.102 (id.) J i.62 (sumana˚ cloth with a jasmine pattern); vi.191 (˚sāṭaka), 370 (nāḷi˚); KhA 51 (˚bandhana); DA i.87 (āmilāka); DhA i.395 (˚vattha); ii.42 (rajata˚). -- dupaṭṭa "double" cloth, see under dvi B ii. Paṭṭaka
Paṭṭaka
(adj. n.) [fr. paṭṭa] made of or forming a strip of cloth; a bandage, strip (of cloth), girdle Vin ii.136 (paṭṭikā); A i.254 ( = paṭṭikā C.); J v.359 (aya˚ an iron girdle), VbhA 230 (paṭṭikā). Pattana
Pattana
(nt.) [*Sk. paṭṭana] a place, city, port J i.121; iv.16, 137, v.75; PvA 53. -- ˚ka a sort of village J vi.456. Paṭṭikā
Paṭṭikā
see paṭṭaka. Paṭṭoli
Paṭṭoli
in yāna˚ at Vism 328 is doubtful. It might be read as yāna -- kaḷopi (on account of combn with kumbhimukha), or (preferably) as putoḷi (with v. l. BB), which is a regular variant for mutoli. The trsln would be "provision bag for a carriage." See further discussed under mutoḷi. Paṭṭha
Paṭṭha
(adj.) [fr. pa+sthā, see patthahati] "standing out," setting out or forth, undertaking, able (clever?) Vin iii.210 (dhammiŋ kathaŋ kātuŋ); iv.60 (cīvarakammaŋ kātuŋ), 254 (dhammiŋ kathaŋ kātuŋ) 285, 290; Nd2 p. 46 (for Sn prose part puṭṭha; v. l. seṭṭha); Nd2 no. 388 (in expln of paṭṭhagū Sn 1095; here it clearly means "being near, attending on, a pupil or follower of"). See also paddha1 and paddhagu. Paṭṭhapita
Paṭṭhapita
[pp. of paṭṭhahati; cp. BSk. prasthapita Divy 514] established, or given PvA 119 (cp. patiṭṭhāpitatta). Paṭṭhahati
Paṭṭhahati
[pa+sthā = P. tiṭṭhati, with short base *ṭṭha for *tiṭṭha in trs. meaning, see patiṭṭhahati] to put down, set down, provide; ppr. paṭṭhayamāna PvA 128 (varamāna+; v. l. paṭṭhap˚); aor. paṭṭhayi Pv ii.934 (dānaŋ; v. l. paṭṭhapayi, expld by paṭṭhapesi PvA 126). ger. paṭṭhāya see sep. -- Caus. II. paṭṭhapeti to put out or up, to furnish, establish, give S ii.25; Pv ii.924 (fut. ˚ayissati dānaŋ, v. l. paṭṭhayissati; expld by pavattessati PvA 123); J i.117; PvA 54 (bhattaŋ), 126 (dānaŋ). -- pp. paṭṭhapita (q. v.). Paṭṭhāna
Paṭṭhāna
(nt.) [fr. pa+sthā, cp. paṭṭhahati] setting forth, putting forward; only in cpd. sati˚ setting up of mindfulness (q. v. and see discussion of term at Dial ii.324). Besides in later lit. meaning "origin," starting point, cause, in title of the 7th book of the Abhidhamma, also called Mahāpakaraṇa. See Ledi, J.P.T.S. 1915 -- 16, p. 26; Mrs. Rh. D., Tika p. 1, vi. -- At Sdhp 321 it has the Sk. meaning of "setting out" (?). Paṭṭhāya
Paṭṭhāya
(indecl.) [ger. fr. paṭṭhahati] putting down, starting out from, used as prep. (with abl.) from . . . onward, beginning with, henceforth, from the time of, e. g. ajjato p. from to -- day VvA 246; ito p. from here, henceforth J i.60, 63, 150; cp. J i.52 (mūlato); vi.336 (sīsato); PvA 11 (galato), 13 (gihīkālato). paṭṭhāyayāva (with acc.) from -- up to Vism 374. Paṭṭhika
Paṭṭhika
in pañca˚ see under pañca. Paṭhati
Paṭhati
[paṭh to read, Sk. paṭhati] to read (of a text) VvA 72; PvA 58, 59, 70 etc.; see also pāṭha. Paṭhana
Paṭhana
(nt.) [fr. paṭhati] reading (textual) Miln 344. Paṭhama
Paṭhama
(adj.) [Ved. prathama, cp. Av. fratəma; also Ved. prataraŋ further, Gr. pro/teros superl. formation fr. prep. *pro, Sk. pra etc. see pa˚] num. ord. "the first," in foll. meanings: (1) the first, foremost, former Sn 93, 436, 1031; J ii.110; KhA i.192; DhA iii.5, 196 (˚vaya, contrasted with majjhima & pacchima); PvA 5, 13, 56. nt. acc. paṭhamaŋ at first, for the first time Vin i.16; D ii.14; Dh 158; J i.222; ii.103, 153; often as first part of cpd. ˚ -- , meaning either "first" or "recently, newly, just" Vin i.1 (˚âbhisambuddha having just attained Buddhaship); D iii.253 (˚âbhinibbatta), Sn 420 (˚uppattika "in his first youth"); J iii.394 (˚uggata newly sprung up). -- A second compar. formation is paṭhamatara, only as adv. ˚ŋ at the (very) first, as early as possible, first of all Vin i.30; J vi.510; DhA i.138; VvA 230; PvA 93. -- 403 -- Paṭhavatta
Paṭhavatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. paṭhavī] earthliness M i.329. Paṭhavant
Paṭhavant
(adj. -- n.) [fr. paṭhavī] a wayfarer S i.37. Paṭhavī
Paṭhavī
(f.) [Ved. pṛthivī, doublets in Pāli pathavī, puthavī, puthuvī, puṭhuvī, see Geiger, P.Gr. §§ 124, 17n. To ad., pṛthu: see puthu, prath to expand, thus lit. the broad one, breadth, expansion. Not (as Bdhgh at Vism 364: patthaṭattā pathavī, cp. Cpd. 155 even modern linguists!) to be derived fr. pattharati] the earth. Acc. to Nd2 389 syn. with jagati. It figures as the first element in enumn of the 4 elements (see dhātu 1), viz. p., āpo, tejo, vāyo (earth, water, fire, wind or the elements of the extension, cohesion, heat and motion: Cpd. 155). At D iii.87 sq.≈ Vism 418 rasa˚ is opposed to bhūmi -- pappaṭaka. Otherwise it is very frequent in representing the earth as solid, firm, spacious ground. See D ii.14, 16; M i.327 sq.; S i.113 (p. udrīyati), 119 (id.), 186; ii.133, 169 sq.; v.45, 78, 246, 456 sq.; A ii.50; iv.89, 374, v.263 sq.; Sn 307, 1097; It 21; Dh 41, 44, 178 (pathavyā); Pv ii.66; Miln 418; PvA 57, 75, 174. -- mahā˚ M i.127; S ii.179, 263; iii.150; J i.25, 74; iii.42; Miln 187; aya˚ iron soil (of Avīci) DhA i.148. In compn both paṭhavī˚ & pathavi˚.

-- ojā (paṭhavojā) sap or essence of the earth DhA ii.154. -- kampa shaking the earth, an earthquake DA i.130. -- kampana = kampa J i.47. -- kasiṇa the earth artifice (see Dhs trsl 43) D iii.286. -- dhātu the earth element (see above) D i.215; ii.294; iii.228, 247; M i.185; 421; S ii.170; Dhs 588, 648, 962 (cp. Dhs. trsln 241); Nett 73, 74; VbhA 55; -- maṇḍala the circle of the E. D i.134; S i.101; A iv.90. -- rasa taste of earth S i.134; SnA 5. -- lekha writing on (or in) carth A i.283; Pug 32. -- saññā earth consciousness M. ii.105; A iv.312; v.7 sq., 318 sq. 353 sq. -- sama like the earth M i.127, 423; Dh 95. Paḍayhati
Paḍayhati
v. l. at PvA 60 for T. pariḍayhati. Paṇa
Paṇa
[in this meaning unknown in Sk; only in one faulty var. lect. as "house"; see BR s. v. paṇa. Usual meaning "wager"] a shop J iv.488 [v. l. pana]. Paṇaka
Paṇaka
see paṇṇaka. -- paṇaka (comb) see phaṇaka. Paṇati
Paṇati
[cp. Sk. paṇati] to sell, barter, bargain, risk, bet J v.24 ( = voharati attānaŋ vikkiṇati C.). -- See also paṇitaka & paṇiya. Paṇamati
Paṇamati
[pa+nam] to bend, to be bent or inclined Ps i.165, 167; -- pp. paṇata ibid. -- Caus. panāmeti (q. v.). Paṇaya
Paṇaya
[classical Sk. praṇaya, fr pra+nī] affection J vi.102. Paṇava
Paṇava
[cp. Ep. Sk. paṇava, dial; accord. to BR a cor- ruption of praṇava] a small drum or cymbal D i.79; S ii.128; iv.344; A ii.117, 241; J iii.59 (of an executioner; PvA 4 in id. p. has paṭaha); Th 1, 467; Bu i.32; Vv 8110; Dhs 621 (˚sadda); DhA i.18. Paṇāma
Paṇāma
[fr. pa+nam, see paṇamati] bending, salutation, obeisance (cp. paṇāmeti 1) VvA 321 (˚ŋ karoti = añjaliŋ karoti). -- As paṇāmana nt. at J iv.307. Paṇāmita
Paṇāmita
[pp. of paṇāmeti] 1. ( = paṇāmeti 1) raised, bent or stretched out Sn 352 (añjalī sup˚). -- 2. (=paṇāmeti 3) dismissed, given leave Vin i.54; M i.457 (bhikkhusangho); Miln 209 (id.), 187. Paṇāmeti
Paṇāmeti
[Caus. of paṇamati] 1. to bend forth or over, stretch out, raise, in phrase añjaliŋ p. to raise the hands in respectful salutation Vin ii.188; D i.118; Sn p. 79. -> 2. to bend to or over, to shut, in kavāṭaŋ p. to shut the door Vin i.87; ii.114, 207; pattaŋ Vin ii.216. -> 3. to make go away, to turn someone away, give leave, dismiss Vin i.54; ii.303; S i.7; Th 1, 511, 557; J v.314; Miln 187 (parisaŋ); Pass. paṇāmīyati (ibid.) -- pp. paṇāmita (q. v.). Paṇitaka
Paṇitaka
(adj. nt.) [fr. paṇita -- pp. of paṇati] staked, wagered, bet, wager, stake at play J vi.192 (so read for paṇīta˚). Paṇidahati
Paṇidahati
[pa+ni+dhā] to put forth, put down to, apply, direct, intend; aspire to, long for, pray for S v.156 (atthāya cittaŋ paṇidahiŋ). ger. paṇidhāya S i.42 = Sn 660 (vācaŋ manañ ca pāpakaŋ); S i.170 (ujuŋ kāyaŋ); A iii.249 (deva -- nikāyaŋ p.); iv.461 sq. (id.); Vbh 244 (ujuŋ kāyaŋ p.)=DA i.210. Also lit. (as prep with acc.) "in the direction of, towards" M i.74 (angārā -- kāsuŋ). -- pp. paṇihita (q. v.). Paṇidhāna
Paṇidhāna
(nt.) [fr. paṇidahati; cp. philosophical literature & BSk. praṇidhāna] aspiration, longing, prayer VvA 270; Sdhp 344. Paṇidhi
Paṇidhi
(f.) [fr. paṇidahati; cp. BSk. praṇidhi Divy 102, 134, in same meaning. The usual Sk. meaning is "spy"] aspiration, request, prayer, resolve D iii.29, 276; S ii.99, 154; iii.256 (ceto˚); iv.303; A ii.32; iv.239 sq. (ceto˚); v.212 sq.; Sn 801; Vv 4712; Nd1 109; Dhs 1059, 1126; SnA 132 ( = paṇidhāna); DhA ii.172; DhsA 222 (rāga -- dosa -- moha˚).

-- kamma (in deva cult) payment of a vow D i.12, cp. DA i.97 (which Kern, however, Toev. s. v., interprets as "application of an enema," comparing Sk. pranidheya to be injected as a clyster). Paṇipatati
Paṇipatati
[pa+ni+pat] to fall down before Th 1, 375. Paṇipāta
Paṇipāta
[fr. pa+ni+pat] prostration, adoration Dāvs v.53. Paṇipātika
Paṇipātika
(adj.) [fr. paṇipāta] consisting of a footfall, humbling or humble, devotional SnA 157. Paṇiya
Paṇiya
(adj.) [ger. formation fr. paṇ, see paṇati & cp. BSk. paṇya in tara -- paṇya fare AvŚ i.148] to be sold or bought, vendible, nt. article of trade, ware A ii.199; Vv 847 ( = bhaṇḍa VvA 337); J iv.363 (=bhaṇḍa C. 366). Paṇihita
Paṇihita
[pp. of paṇidahati] applied, directed, intent, bent on, well directed, controlled S iv.309 (dup˚); A i.8; v.87; Dh 43; (sammā ˚ŋ cittaŋ); Sn 154 (su˚ mano = suṭṭhu ṭhapito acalo SnA 200); Ps ii.41 (vimokkha); Miln 204, 333; 413. -- appaṇihita in connection with samādhi & vimokkha seems to mean "free from all longings," see Vin iii.93=iv.25; S iv.295, 309, 360; Ps ii.43 sq., 100; Miln 337. Paṇāma
Paṇāma
[fr. pa+nam, see paṇamati] bowing, bow, obei- sance Th 2, 407 (˚ŋ karoti). Paṇīta
Paṇīta
(adj.) [pp. of pa+neti in same application BSk.; cp. Divy 385] 1. (lit.) brought out or to, applied, executed; used with ref. to punishment (see paṇeti daṇḍaŋ) Pv iv.166 (˚daṇḍa receiving punishment = ṭhapita -- sarīra -- daṇḍa PvA 242). -- 2. (appld) brought out or forth, (made) high, raised, exalted, lofty, excellent; with ref. to food (very often used in this sense) "heaped up, plentiful, abundant." Synonymous with uttama (DA i.109, 171), uḷāra (PvA 25, 228), atuḷa (PvA 110); opp. hīna (D iii.215; A iii.349; v.140; Vism 11), lūkha (S ii.153; VvA 64). -- D i.12 (dhammā gambhīrā . . . paṇītā . . .), 109 (khādaniya); ii.127 (id.) iii.215 (with hīna & majjhima -- dhātu); S i.136 (dhammo gambhīro etc.); ii.153 (dhātu), 154 (paṇidhi); iii.47; iv.360; v.66 (dhammā), 226 (etaŋ padaŋ), 266 (sattā); A i.284; ii.171, 190; iv.10, 332, 423; v.8, 36 and passim; Sn 240, 389; It 44; Pv i.53; iv.127; Pug 28 (˚âdhimutta having high aspirations), 30, 60; Dhs 269, 1027, 1411; PvA 12, 35 (āhāra), 42 (id.); DhA ii.154 (bhojana). Compar. paṇītatara, often combd with abhikkantatara, e. g. D i.62, 74, 216; S i.80; A i.119, 171; v.37, 140, 203 sq. -- 404 -- Paṇītaka
Paṇītaka
[perhaps = Sk. paṇita, or paṇ (see paṇa), as P. formation it may be taken as pa+nīta+ka, viz. that which has been produced] a gambler's stake J vi.192. See paṇitaka. Paṇudati, Paṇunna
Paṇudati,
Paṇunna see panudati etc. Paṇeti
Paṇeti
[pa+nī] to lead on to, bring out, adduce, apply, fig. decree (a fine or punishment), only used in phrase daṇḍaŋ paṇeti to give a punishment D ii.339 = Miln 110; M ii.88; Dh 310; J ii.207; iii.441; iv.192; Miln 29; DhA iii.482. -- pp. paṇīta (q. v.). Paṇḍa
Paṇḍa
see bhaṇḍati. Paṇḍaka
Paṇḍaka
[cp late (dial.) Sk. paṇḍa & paṇḍaka; for etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under pello] a eunuch, weakling Vin i.86, 135, 168, 320; iv.20, 269; A iii.128; v.71; Sdhp 79. -- With ref. to the female sex as paṇḍikā at Vin ii.271 (itthi˚). Paṇḍara
Paṇḍara
(adj) [Ved. pāṇḍara; cp. paṇḍu, q. v. for etym.] white, pale, yellowish J ii.365; v. 340; Nd1 3; Dhs 6 = Vbh 88 (Dhs trsl. "that which is clear"? in def. of citta & mano) Dhs 17, 293, 597; Miln 226; DhA iv.8; VvA 40; PvA 56 (= seta); Sdhp 430. Paṇḍicca
Paṇḍicca
(nt.) [fr. paṇḍita] erudition, cleverness, skill, wisdom J i.383; Ps ii.185; Pug 25; Dhs 16 ( = paṇḍitassa bhāvo DhsA 147), 292, 555. As pandicciya J vi.4. Paṇḍita
Paṇḍita
(adj.) [cp. Ved. paṇḍita] wise, clever, skilled, circumspect, intelligent Vin ii.190 (+buddhimanto); D i.12 (˚vedaniya comprehensible only by the wise), 120 (opp. duppañña); iii.192; M i.342; iii.61, 163, 178; S iv.375 (+viyatta medhāvin); v.151 (+vyatta kusala); A i.59, 68, 84, 101 sq., 162 (paṇḍitā nibbānaŋ adhigacchanti); ii.3 sq., 118, 178, 228; iii.48 = It 16; Sn 115, 254, 335, 523, 721, 820, 1007, 1125 (Ep. of Jatukaṇṇī); It 86; Dh 22, 28, 63 (˚mānin), 79, 88, 157, 186, 238, 289; J iii.52 (sasa˚); Nd1 124; Pv iv.332 (opp. bāla; =sappañña PvA 254); Dhs 1302; Miln 3, 22; DA i.117; DhA iv.111; VvA 257; PvA 39, 41, 60 (=pañña), 93, 99. Paṇḍitaka
Paṇḍitaka
(adj.) [paṇḍita+ka] a pedant D i.107. Paṇḍu
Paṇḍu
(adj.) [cp. Ved. pāṇḍu, palita, pāṭala (pale -- red); Gr. pelitno/s, pello/s, po/lios (grey); Lat. palleo (to be pale), pullus (grey); Lith. patvas (pale -- yellow), pilkas (grey); Ohg. falo (pale, yellowish, withered); E. pale] pale -- red or yellow, reddish, light yellow, grey; only at Th 2, 79 (kisā paṇḍu vivaṇṇā), where paṇḍu represents the usual up -- paṇḍ' -- uppaṇḍuka -- jātā: "thin, pale and colourless" see ThA 80). Otherwise only in cpds., e. g.

-- kambala a light red blanket, orange -- coloured cloth S i.64 ( = ratta -- kambala C.); A i.181; Sn 689 (=ratta SnA 487); also a kind of ornamental stone, Sakka's throne (p. -- k. -- silā) is made of it J i.330; ii.93; ii.53, (˚silāsana); v.92 (id.); Pv ii.960 (˚silā=p. -- k -- nāmaka sīlāsana PvA 138); VvA 110 (id.); KhA 122 (˚varāsana); DhA i.17 (˚silāsana). -- palāsa a withered leaf Vin i.96=iii.47; iv.217; Dh 233, VbhA 244; KhA 62; on ˚palāsika (DA i.270) see J.P.T.S. 1893, 37. -- mattikā yellow loam, clay soil KhA. 59. -- roga jaundice Vin i.206 (˚ābādha) 276 (id.); J i.431; ii.102; DhA i.25. -- rogin suffering from jaundice J ii.285; iii.401. -- vīṇā yellow flute (of Pañcasikha): see beluva. -- sīha yellow lion, one of the 4 kinds SnA 125 (cp. Manor. -- pūr. on A ii.33). -- sutta orange -- coloured string D i.76. Paṇḍuka
Paṇḍuka
( -- roga) perhaps to be read with v. l. at M ii.121 for bandhuka˚. Paṇṇa
Paṇṇa
(nt.) [Ved. parṇa, cp. Ags. fearn, E. fern] 1. a leaf (esp. betel leaf) Vin i.201 (5 kinds of leaves recommended for medicinal purposes, viz. nimba˚ Azadirachta Indica, kuṭaja˚ Wrightia antidysenterica, paṭola˚ Trichosanthes dioeca, sulasi˚ or tulasi˚ basil, kappāsika˚ cotton, see Vin. Texts ii.46) A i.183 (tiṇa+) Sn 811 (p. vuccati paduma -- pattaŋ Nd1 135); J i.167; ii.105 (nimba)˚; KhA 46 (khitta -- p. -- kosa -- saṇṭhāna); PvA 115 ( = patta) tālapaṇṇa a fan of palm leaves Vv 3343 (=tālapattehi kata -- maṇḍala -- vījanī VvA 147); haritapaṇṇa greens, vegetable SnA 283; sūpeyyapaṇṇa curry leaf J i.98. -- 2. a leaf for writing upon, written leaf, letter; donation, bequest (see below paṇṇākāra) J i.409 (cp. paṭipaṇṇa); ii.104; iv.151 (ucchangato p. ˚ŋ nīharati); DhA i.180; PvA 20 (likhā˚ written message). paṇṇaŋ āropeti to send a letter J i.227; pahiṇati id. J iv.145; v.458; peseti id. J i.178; iv.169. paṇṇaŋ likhati to write a letter J ii. 174; vi.369 (paṇṇe wrote on a leaf), 385 iṇa˚ a promissory note J i.230; iv.256. -- p. as ticket or label at DhsA 110. -- 3. a feather, wing see su˚.

-- ākāra "state or condition of writing" (see ākāra 1), i. e. object of writing; that which is connected or sent with a letter, a special message, donation, present, gift J i.377; ii.166; iii.10; iv.316, 368; vi. 68, 390; SnA 78; DhA .184 326, 392, 339: ii.80; iii.292 (dasavidha dibba˚, viz. āyu etc.: see ṭhāna); iv.11. -- kuṭi a hut of leaves D iii.94; S i.226; J ii.44; Pv iii.220; DA i.318. -- chatta a fan of leaves J ii.277. -- chattaka a leaf -- awning S i.90, 92. -- dhāra a holder made of leaves J v.205. -- pacchi leaf -- basket, a b. for greens J vi.369. -- puṭa a palm -- leaf basket PvA 168. -- saññā a mark of leaves (tied up to mark the boundary of a field) J i.153. -- santhāra a spreading leaf, leaf cover, adj. spread with leaves A i.136; J vi.24. -- sālā a hut of leaves, a hermitage J i.6, 7, 138; ii.101 sq.; vi.30, 318 (nala -- bhittikaŋ ˚ŋ katvā); vi.24. -- susa (& sosa) drying the leaves (said of the wind) KhA 15. Paṇṇaka
Paṇṇaka
[paṇṇa+ka] 1. green leaves (collectively), vegetable, greens J vi.24 (kāra˚ vegetable as homage or oblation); Pv iii.33 (panko paṇṇako ca, expld as "kaddamo vā udakacchikkhalo vā" PvA 189, but evidently misunderstood for "withered leaves"); PvA 256 (tiṇakaṭṭha -- paṇṇaka -- sala, is reading correct?). -- 2. N. of a water plant, most likely a kind of fern (see Kern, Toev. ii.16 q. v.). Often combd with sevāla (Blyxa Octandra), e. g. at J ii.324; v.37. -- The spelling is also paṇaka, even more frequent than paṇṇaka and also combd with sevāla, e. g. Vin iii.177 (in combn saṇkha -- sevāla˚, where Bdhgh explains "sankho ti dīghamūlako paṇṇasevālo vuccati, sevālo ti nīlasevālo, avaseso udaka -- pappaṭaka -- nīla -- bījak' ādi sabbo 'ti paṇako ti sankhaŋ gacchati"); S v.122; A iii.187, 232, 235; J iv.71 (sevāla˚); Miln 35 (sankha -- sevāla -- p. which the Manor -- pūṛ explns by udaka -- pappaṭaka, and also as "nīlamaṇḍūkapiṭṭhivaṇṇena udakapiṭṭhiŋ chādetvā nibattapaṇakaŋ" see Trenckner, Miln 421 and cp. Miln. trsln i.302), 210 (suvaṇṇa˚), 401 (cakkavāko sevāla paṇaka -- bhakkho); KhA 61 (sevāla˚; cp. Schubring's kalpasūtra p. 46 sq.). -- 3. (see paṇṇa 2) a written leaf, a ticket DhsA 110. Paṇṇatti
Paṇṇatti
see paññatti. Paṇṇattika
Paṇṇattika
(adj.) [fr. paṇṇatti] having a manifestation or name, in a˚ -- bhāva state without designation, state of non -- manifestation, indefinite or unknown state (with ref. to the passing nature of the phenomenal world) DhA i.89; ii.163. -- 405 -- Paṇṇarasa & Paṇṇavīsati
Paṇṇarasa
& Paṇṇavīsati see pañca 1. B, & C. Paṇṇāsa
Paṇṇāsa
see pañca 2. A. Paṇṇi
Paṇṇi
(f.) [ = paṇṇa] a leaf Vin i.202 (taka˚). Paṇṇika
Paṇṇika
[paṇṇa+ika] one who deals with greens, a florist or greengrocer J i.411; ii.180; iii.21 (˚dhītā); Miln 331. Paṇṇikā
Paṇṇikā
(f.) [to paṇṇaka; cp. Sk. parṇikā; meaning un- certain, cp. Kern, Toev. p. 17 s. v.] greens, green leaves, vegetable Vin ii.267 (na harītaka ˚ŋ pakinitabbaŋ, trsl. at Vin. Texts iii.343 by "carry on the business of florist and seedsman," thus taken as paṇṇika, cp. also Vin. Texts iii.112); J i.445 (paṇṇikāya saññaŋ adāsi is faulty; reading should be saṇṇikāya "with the goad," of saṇ(ṇ)ikā = Sk. sṛṇi elephant -- driver's hook). Paṇhi
Paṇhi
(m. & f.) [Ved. pārṣṇi, Av. paṣṇā, Lat. perna, Gr. pte/rna, Goth. fairzna, Ohg. fersana = Ger. ferse] the heel Vin ii.280 (˚samphassa); J ii.240; v.145; Sdhp 147, 153. See next. Paṇhikā
Paṇhikā
(f.) [fr. paṇhi] the heel J i.491; KhA 49 (˚aṭṭhi); Vism 253 (id.); PvA 185. Paṇhin
Paṇhin
(adj.) [fr. paṇhi] having heels D ii.17 (āyata˚ having projecting heels, the 3rd of the 32 characteristics of a Mahāpurisa). Patati
Patati
[Ved. patati, Idg. *pet "to fly" as well as "to fall." Cp. Av. pataiti fly, hurry; Gr. pe/tomai fly, w)kupe/ths quick, pi/ptw fall; Lat. praepes quick, peto to go for, impetus, attack etc.] to fall, jump, fall down on (loc., acc. & instr.), to alight J i.278 (dīpake); Sn 248 (nirayaŋ); Pv iv.108 (1st pl. patāmase); Miln 187; PvA 45, ppr. patanto J i.263 (asaniyā); iii.188 (nāvāya); fut. patissati J iii.277; aor. pati Sn 1027 (sirasā); J iii.55; Pv i.78; ger. patitvā J i.291; iii.26; PvA 16; DhA iii.196 (vv. ll. papāta & papatā the latter aor. of papatati, q. v.); ger. patitvā J i.291; iii.26; PvA 16. -> pp. patita (q. v.). -- Caus. pāteti (q. v.). Pass. (Caus.) patīyati is brought to fall also intrs. rush away J iv.415 ( = palāyati C.); Miln 187. Patatthi
Patatthi
at J vi.276 is misprint for pathaddhi (q. v.). Patana
Patana
(nt. adj.) [fr. patati] falling, falling out, ruin, destruction J i.293 (akkhīni); ii.154; iii.188 (geha˚); vi.85 (usu˚ range of his arrow). Patanaka
Patanaka
(adj.) [fr. patana] on the point of falling, going to fall, falling J vi.358. Patanu
Patanu
(adj.) [pa+tanu] very thin J vi.578 (˚kesa); Dhs 362 (˚bhāva) = DhsA 238; Kvu 299 (id.). Patara
Patara
[Vedic pradara, pa+dṛ, with t. for d.; see Trenckner, Notes 6216; Geiger, P.Gr. § 39, 4] a split, a slit J iv.32. Patarati
Patarati
[pa+tarati] 1. to go through or forth, to run out, to cross over D i.248; J iii.91 (aor. patari). -- 2. to overflow, boil over (of water) Miln 260. -- Caus. patāreti (q. v.). Patākā
Patākā
(f.) [cp. later Sk. patākā] a flag, banner (cp. dhaja) J i.52; VvA 31, 173. Patāpa
Patāpa
[fr. pa+tap] splendour, majesty Vv 408 ( = tejas, ānubhāvo VvA 180). Patāpavant
Patāpavant
(adj.) [fr. patāpa] splendid, majestic Sn 550 ( = jutimantatāya p. SnA 453); Th 1, 820. Patāpeti
Patāpeti
[pa+tāpeti, Caus. of tap] scorch, burn fiercely Vv 795 ( = ativiya dīpeti VvA 307). Sdhp 573. Patāyati
Patāyati
[in form = pa+tāyati, diff. in meaning; not sufficiently expld, see Kern, Toev. p. 29 s. v. It is probably a distorted *sphāṭayati: see under pharati, phalaka and phāteti] to be spread out, intrs. to spread (?) A iv.97 (kodho p., as if fr. pat); J iii.283 (C. nikkhamati, as if fr. tṛ, Kern. trsls "to be for sale"). Patāreti
Patāreti
[Caus. of patarati] to make go forth, to bring over or through M i.225; A iii.432 (v. l. M. pakaroti). -- aor. patārayi in meaning "strive" at J iii.210 ( = patarati vāyamati C. but Rhys Davids. "to get away from"); as "assert" at J v.117. Pati
Pati1
[Ved. pati, Av. paitis lord, husband; Gr. po/sis husband, Lat. potis, potens, possum, hos -- pes; Goth. brūp -- faps bridegroom, hunda faps centurion, Lith. pāts husband] lord, master, owner, leader. -- 1. in general D iii.93 (khettānaŋ p. gloss adhipati). Mostly -- ˚; see under gavam˚, gaha˚, dāna˚, yūtha˚, senā˚. -- 2. husband S i.210; Sn 314; J iii.138; PvA 161. See also sapatika (with her husband), patibbatā & patika.

-- kula her husband's clan ThA 283; VvA 206; -- devatā a devoted wife J iii.406; VvA 128. Pati
Pati2
(indecl.) [Vedic prati etc.) a doublet of paṭi; both often found side by side; pati alone always as prep. (with acc.) and as prefix with sthā (paṭiṭṭhāti, patiṭṭhita etc.). All cases are referred to the form with paṭi˚, except in the case of patiṭṭh˚. The more frequent cases are the foll.: patikāra, ˚kuṭati, ˚caya, ˚dissati, ˚nandati, ˚manteti, ˚māneti, ˚ruddha, ˚rūpa, ˚līna, ˚sallāna, etc. ˚sibbati, ˚sevati, ˚ssata, ˚ssaya, ˚ssava. Patika
Patika
(adj.) [only f. patikā and only as -- ˚] having a husband in mata˚ "with husband dead," a widow Th 2, 221 ( = vidhuva ThA 179); J v.103 (ap˚ without husband, v. l. for appatīta, C. explns by assāmika). pavuttha˚ (a woman) whose husband lives abroad Vin ii.268; iii.83; Miln 205 (pavuttha˚). See also pañcapatika & sapatika. Patika
Patika
at Vism 28 is to be read pātika (vessel, bowl, dish). Patiṭṭhahati
Patiṭṭhahati
(& Patiṭṭhāti) [paṭi+sthā] to stand fast or firmly, to find a support in (loc.), to be established (intrs.), to fix oneself, to be set up, to stay; aor. patiṭṭhahi DhA iii.175 (sotāpattiphale), PvA 42 (id.), 66 (id.); VvA 69 (sakadāgāmiphale); and patiṭṭhāsi Miln 16. -- fut. ˚ṭṭhahissati J v.458 (˚hessati); DhA iii.171. -- ger. patiṭṭhāya Sn 506; J ii.2 (rajje); iii.52; v.458 (rajje); Miln 33; PvA 142. -- pp. patiṭṭhita (q. v.). -> Caus. patiṭṭhāpeti (q. v.). Patiṭṭhā
Patiṭṭhā
(f.) [fr. pati+sthā. Cp. Ved. pratiṣṭhā support, foundation] support, resting place, stay, ground, help, also (spiritual) helper, support for salvation S i.1 (ap˚); ii.65; iii.53; Sn 173; Dh 332; J i.149; iv.20; Miln 302; DhsA 261; VvA 138; PvA 53, 60 ( = dīpa), 87 (=dīpa), 141 (su˚), 174 (su˚=dīpa). Patiṭṭhāna
Patiṭṭhāna
(nt.) [fr. paṭi+sthā cp. late Sk. pratiṣṭhāna] fixing, setting up, support, help, ground (for salvation) Sn 1011: PvA 123. Patiṭṭhāpita
Patiṭṭhāpita
[pp. of patiṭṭhāpeti] put down, set down, established PvA 139. Patiṭṭhāpitar
Patiṭṭhāpitar
[n. ag. of patiṭṭhāpeti] one who establishes A v.66. Patiṭṭhāpeti
Patiṭṭhāpeti
[Caus. of patiṭṭhahati, cp. BSk. praṭiṣṭhā- payati Jtm 224] to establish, set up, fix, put into, instal D i.206; S i.90; J i.152; 168, 349 (sotāpatti -- phale); PvA 22 (id.), 38 (id.) 50 (saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca), 223 (id.), 76 (ceṭiyaŋ), 78 (upāsakabhāve), 131, 132 (hatthe). -- aor. patiṭṭhāpesi J i.138. -- pp. patiṭṭhāpita (q. v.). -- 406 -- Patiṭṭhāha
Patiṭṭhāha
[fr. patiṭṭhahati] having one's footing in, hold on, tenacity Dhs 381 = Nd2 271iii DhsA 253. The v. l. at Nd2 is paṭiggāha which is also read by Dhs. Patiṭṭhita
Patiṭṭhita
[pp. of patiṭṭhahati] established in (loc.), settled, fixed, arrayed, stayed, standing, supported, founded in D iii.101 (supatiṭṭhita -- citta); M i.478; S i.40, 45, 185 (dhammesu); It 77; Sn 409, 453; J i.51 (kucchimhi), 262 (rajje); Pv i.44; ii.969 (dussīlesu); Miln 282; VvA 110 (˚gabbhā), 259 (˚saddha); PvA 34 (jāta+) -- nt. ˚ŋ arrangement, settling, in pañca˚ the fivefold array, a form of respectful greeting, see under pañca. Patiṭṭhīyati
Patiṭṭhīyati
[only apparently (Pass.) to patiṭṭhahati, of sthā, but in reality = Sk. prati -- sthyāyate, of sthyā, see thīna. Ought to be paṭitthīyati; but was by popular analogy with patiṭṭhāya changed to patiṭṭhīyati] to be obdurate, to offer resistance A i.124; ii.203; iii.181 sq.; J iv.22 (aor. ˚ṭṭhīya); Pug 36; KhA 226. Patita
Patita
[pp. of patati] fallen Dh 68, 320; J i.167; Miln 187; PvA 31 (read pātita), 56. Patitaka
Patitaka
(adj.) [fr. last] thrown or fallen into (loc.), dropped Vism 62. Patitiṭṭhati
Patitiṭṭhati
[paṭi+titthati] to stand up again Th 1, 173. Patittha
Patittha
[pa+tittha] a bank of a river or lake, su˚ (adj.) with beautiful banks S i.90; Pv ii.120 ( = sundaratittha PvA 77). Patibbatā
Patibbatā
(f.) [pati+vatā] a devoted wife (cp. patidevatā) J ii.121; vi.533; VvA 56, 110. Patissata
Patissata
see paṭi˚. Patīta
Patīta
[pp. of pacceti] pleased, delighted Dh 68; Sn 379, 679; Vv 8410 ( = pahaṭṭha VvA 337). -- neg. appatīta displeased M i.27; J v.103 (v. l. appatika, C explns by assāmika, i. e. without husband). Patīyati
Patīyati
see patati. Pateyya
Pateyya
in phrase alam -- pateyya at D iii.71 (kumārikā alam -- pateyyā), 75 (id.) means "surely fit to have husbands, ripe for marriage" (?) Patoda
Patoda
[fr. pa+tud cp. Ved. pratoda] a goad, driving stick, prick, spur M i.124; iii.97; S iv.176; A ii.114; iii.28; iv.91; v.324; Th 1, 210; J i.57, 192; Dhs 16, 20, 292; Pug 25; SnA 147; ThA 174; Sdhp 367.

-- laṭṭhi a driver's stick, goad -- stick [cp. BSk. pratodayaṣṭi Divy 7, 76, 463, 465] D i.105, 126; J vi.249; Miln 27; DhA i.302; ii.38; iv.216; VvA 64. As ˚yaṭṭhi at Dpvs xi.30. Patodaka
Patodaka
(adj. n.) [fr. pa+tud] lit. pushing, spurring; only in phrase anguli˚ nudging with one's fingers Vin iii.84 = iv.110 (here to be taken as "tickling"); D i.91 (cp. Dial. i.113); A iv.343. Patta
Patta1
(nt.) [Ved. patra, to *pet as in patati (q. v. & see also paṇṇa); cp. Gr. ptero/n wing, pte/ruc id.; Lat. penna feather = Ger. fittig.; acci -- piter; Ohg. fedara=E. feather etc.] 1. the wing of a bird, a feather Vin iv.259; D i.71. kukkuṭa˚ a hen's quill (for sewing) Vin ii.215. -- 2. a leaf M i.429; Sn 44=64 (sañchinna˚, see Nd2 625); 625 (pokkhara˚ lotus l.); Dh 401 (id.); Nd1 135 (paduma˚); Pv ii.95 (=paṇṇa PvA 15); VvA 147 (tāla˚); ThA 71; PvA 283 (nigrodha˚). asi -- patta -- vana "sword -- leaf -- forest" (a forest in Niraya) Sn 673; PvA 221. -- 3. a small thin strip of metal at the lute Miln 53; VvA 281.

-- āḷhalka a toy measure made of palm -- leaves Vin ii.10; iii.180; D i.6 (cp. DA i.86); M i.266; A v.203; Miln 229. -- gandha odour of leaves Dhs 625. -- nāḷī rib of a feather DhA i.394. -- phala leaf -- fruit, a leaf and fruit, vegetables Sn 239 ( = yaŋ kiñci harita -- pannaŋ SnA 283); PvA 86. -- yāna having wings as vehicle, "winggoer," i. e. a bird Sn 606 (=pattehi yantī ti pattayānā SnA 465); J ii.443. -- rasa taste of leaves Dhs 629; juice of leaves Vin i.246 (+puppharasa & ucchurasa). -- salākā leaf -- ticket DhA iv.65. Patta
Patta2
(m. & nt.) [Ved. pātra, fr. Idg. *pōtlom = Lat. pocu- lum beaker, Oir. ōl. See pāna & pibati] a bowl, esp. the alms -- bowl of a bhikkhu Vin i.46, 50, 51, 61, 224 (patte pūresuŋ); ii.111, 126, 224, 269; S i.112; A iv.344; Sn 413, 443; J i.52, 55 (pattaŋ thavikāya pakkhipati), 69; iii.535 (puṇṇa ˚ŋ deti to give a full bowl, i. e. plenty); v.389 (pl. pattāni); Vism 108 (āṇigaṇṭhik' āhato ayopatto); DhA iv.220 (˚ŋ pūreti); PvA 35, 61, 76, 88, 141. -- Two kinds of bowls are mentioned at Vin iii.243, viz. ayo˚ of iron & mattikā˚ of clay, dāru˚ a wooden bowl Vin ii.112, 143. uda˚ a bowl of water or a water -- bowl M i.100; S v.121; A iii.230 sq. cp. odapattakinī. -- pattassa mukhavaṭṭi J v.38. -- fut. pātī (q. v.).

-- ādhāraka bowl support, bowl -- hold Vin ii.113. -- kaṇḍolikā a wicker -- work stand for a bowl Vin ii.114 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.86). -- gata gone into the bowl, alms given Th 1, 155; Pv iv.73. -- gāhāpaka one who is going to take a bowl, a receiver of a b. Vin ii.177 (+sāṭiya˚ etc.); A iii.275. -- cīvara bowl and robe (see note in Dial ii.162) Vin i.46; ii.78, 194; S i.76; J iii.379; Pv ii.1316; DA i.45, 186; PvA 61. -- tthavikā a bag to carry a bowl in Vin ii.114; J iii.364; VvA 40, 63; KhA 45. -- dhovana "bowl -- washing," (the water used for) washing the bowl Vin ii.214. -- pāṇin hand on bowl, bowl in hand Sn 713; It 89 = S iii.93≈; onīta˚ removing the hand from the bowl: see onīta. -- piṇḍika "eating from one vessel only" A iii.220. -- maṇḍala a circular artificial bottom of a bowl Vin ii.112. -- māḷaka a raised parapet (?) on which to put the bowl Vin ii.114 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.86). -- mūla the bottom of the bowl Vin ii.269. -- vaṭṭi the brim of a bowl S iv.168. -- saññin paying attention to one's bowl Vin ii.214. Patta
Patta3
[pp. of pāpuṇāti] obtained, attained, got, reached (pass. & med.) Sn 55, 138, 478, 517, 542, 992; Dh 134 (nibbānaŋ) 423; J i.255 (vināsaŋ); iv.139 (samuddaŋ); PvA 4 (anayavyasanaŋ), 5 (sīsacchedaŋ), 71 (manussabhāvaŋ). Very frequent as -- ˚ and in meaning equal to finite verb or other phrase, when spelling ˚ppatta is restored (Sk. prāpta), e. g. ummādappatta out of mind PvA 6; jara˚ old J iii.394; dukkha˚ afflicted with pain J vi.336; domanassa˚ dejected J ii.155; patti˚ attained one's (possible) share It 32; bala˚ (become) strong D ii.157; vaya˚ (become) old, come of age J ii.421 (+soḷasa -- vassa -- kāle); PvA 68; somanassa˚ pleased J iii.74; haritu˚ covered with green M i.343; J i.50, 399. Also as ˚ -- , but less frequent, meaning often equal to prep. "with," "after," etc., as pattâbhiseka after consecration DhA iv.84; SnA 484; pattuṇṇa with wool SnA 263; ˚dhamma mastering the Dh. Vin i.16; the same at DhA iv.200 in meaning of patti˚, i. e. "merit attained"; ˚mānasa (?) It 76 (v. l. satta˚); ˚sambodhi It 97 (v. l. satta˚). -- Opp. appatta not obtained (see also patti 2), i. e. without Dh 272 (cp. DhA iii.58); Pug 51 (˚pānabhojana, so read for appanna˚). -- Cp. sam Patta
Patta4
at Dpvs xi.18 for pattin or pattika, foot -- man, infantry. Pattakkhandha
Patta
-- kkhandha [perhaps patta1+khandha, thus "leaf- shouldered," i. e. with shoulders drooping like leaves; the Commentators explain patta as contracted form of patita fallen, thus "with shoulders falling." We may have to deal with an old misspelling for panna ( = pa+ nam bent down, put down), which expln would suit the sense better than any other] downcast, dejected, disappointed Vin ii.77=iii.162 (trsld "with fallen hearts," expld as patita, see Vin. Texts iii.13); S i.124; M i.132, 258; iii.298; A iii.57; J v.17; Miln 5. -- 407 -- Pattaka
Pattaka
(nt.) [fr. patta2] a (little) bowl Th 2, 28. Pattatta
Pattatta
(nt.) ( -- ˚) [abstr. fr. patta3] the fact of being furnished or possessed with Vism 524. Pattabba
Pattabba
(adj.) [grd. of pāpuṇāti] to be gained or attained; nt. that which can be attained or won SnA 443. See also pattiya2. Pattali
Pattali
(˚lī) (f.) [according to Kern, Toev. s. v. to be read as either sattali or sattalā] plantain Th 2, 260 ( = kadali ThA 211). Patti
Patti1
[Ved. patti, *pad (of pada)+ti] on foot, one who is on foot, a foot -- soldier Vin iv.105 (as one of the 4 constituents of a senā or army, viz. hatthī elephants, assā, horses, rathā chariots, pattī infantry); J iv.494 (hatthī, assā, rathā, pattī); 463 (hatthī assā rathā, pattī senā padissate mahā); Vism 19. Cp. pattika1.

-- kāya a body of foot soldiers, infantry S i.72 (cp. BSk. same, at Jtm 215 with hasty -- aśva -- ratha˚). -- kārika (for ˚kārika, of prec.) a foot soldier, lit. one of a body of infantry J iv.134; v.100; vi.15 (hatthāruhā anīkaṭṭhā rathikā pattikārikā), 21, 463 (hatthī assā rathikā p.). Patti
Patti2
(f.) [Classical Sk. prāpti fr. pa+āp, cp. patta3] 1. ( -- ˚) obtaining, acquiring, getting, entering into, state of S i.189 = Th 1, 1230 (nibbāna˚); Sn 68 (paramattha˚), 186 (nibbāna˚); PvA 5 (vyasana), 112 (id.); Sdhp 379. -- 2. attainment, acquisition S ii.29 (aggassa); Sn 425 (yogakkhemassa); Nd2 390 (= lābhā paṭilābhā adhigamo phusanaŋ sacchikiriyā); esp. in phrase apattassa patti "attt of the unattained" D iii.255= A iv.332; S i.217; ii.29; A ii.148; iii.179; Kvu 581. -> 3. gaining, gain, profit, advantage S i.169 (brahma˚ "best vantage ground"). -- 4. merit, profit, in special sense of a gift given for the benefit of someone else (as a "dakkhiṇǡ"), accrediting, advising, transference of merit, a gift of merit J ii.423, 425 (=dakkhiṇā); iv.21; DhA i.270 (opp. to mūla price); ii.4; iv.200 sq. (opp. to mūla). See also cpds. ˚dāna & ˚dhamma. -- 5. that which obtains (as a rule), occasion, happening, state, place, as gram. t. t. loc. pattiyaŋ or pattiyā ( -- ˚) in lieu of SnA 310, 317. -- See sam˚.

-- dāna an assigned or accredited gift, giving of merit (as permanent acquisition), transference of merit VvA 188, 190; PvA 9 (˚vasena dānadhamma -- pariccāgo), 49 ( = dakkhiṇā) 88 (id.); Sdhp 229. -- dhamma the practice of transferred merit, see Kvu trsln 1611, 170, & cp. pattadhamma. -- patta, one who has obtained what can be obtained, or the highest gain (i. e. Nibbāna) Sn 536 (=pattabbaŋ patto pattabbaŋ arahattaŋ patto ti vuttaŋ hoti SnA 433), 537, 540. Patti
Patti3
(f.) [for patta1?] leaf, leafy part of a plant Vin i.201 (taka, taka -- patti, taka -- paṇṇi). Pattika
Pattika1
[fr. patti1 cp. pajja2] on foot, a pedestrian or soldier on foot, D i.50, 89, 106, 108; ii.73; A ii.117 (hatth' -- āruha, assāruha, rathika, p.); J vi.145; Vism 396 (manussā pattikā gacchanti); Sn 418; a form pattikārika is found, e. g. at J iv. 134; v.100; vi.15, 463; Ap. 316. Pattika
Pattika2
[fr. patti2] having a share, gain or profit; a partner, donor DhA i.270, 271. Pattika
Pattika3
(adj. -- n.) [fr. patta2] in dāru˚ (collecting alms) with a wooden bowl, man with a wooden bowl D i.157 (cp. DA i.319). Pattikā
Pattikā
(f.) [fr. patta1 or patti3] a leaf, in tāla˚ palm -- leaf S ii.217, 222. Pattin
Pattin
(adj. n.) [fr. patta3, Sk. *prāptin] attaining, one who obtains or gains Sn 513 (kiŋ˚ = kiŋ patta, adhigata SnA 425). Pattiya
Pattiya1
(adj. n.) [for *pratyaya = paccaya, cp. Trenckner, Notes 73, 9] believing, trusting, relying J v.414 (para˚); (m.) belief, trust J v.231 (parapattiyena by relying on others), 233 (id.), 414 (id.). Pattiya
Pattiya2
(adj.) [grd. of pāpuṇāti; cp. pattabba] to be attained, to be shared or profited Pv ii.931 (para˚ profitable to others, see expln at PvA 125). Pattiyāyati
Pattiyāyati
[denom. fr. pattiya1] to believe, trust, rely on J i.426; v.403; DA i.73. Pattiyāyana
Pattiyāyana
(nt.) [fr. pattiyāyati] belief J v.402. Pattīyati
Pattīyati
[denom. fr. patti2] to gain, to profit from (acc.) Miln 240 (attānaŋ na p. does not profit from himself). Pattha
Pattha1
[fr. pa+sthā. Cp. Epic Sk. prastha plateau] a lonely place, in cpd. vana˚ D i.71; Pug 59 etc., a wilderness in the forest, expld by Bdhgh as "gāmantaŋ atikkamitvā manussānaŋ anupacāra -- ṭṭhānaŋ yattha na kasanti na vapanti" DA i.210; Ud 43 (patthañ ca sayan' āsanaŋ, ed.; but better with id. p. Dh 185 as pantañ, which is expld at DhA iii.238 by "vivittaŋ," i, e. separately). Cp. with this Sk. vana -- prastha a forest situated on elevated land. Pattha
Pattha2
[cp. late Sk. prastha] a Prastha (certain measure of capacity) = 1/4 of an Āḷhaka; a cooking utensil containing one Prastha DhA ii.154; SnA 476 (cattāro patthā āḷhakaŋ). Patthaṭa
Patthaṭa
[pp. of pattharati] stretched, spread out J i.336; Vism 364; DA i.311. Patthaṇḍila
Patthaṇḍila
[pa+thandila] hermitage M ii.155. Patthaddha
Patthaddha
[pa+thaddha] (quite) stiff Vin ii.192; Th 1, 1074. Patthanā
Patthanā
(f.) [of ap+arth, cp. Sk. prārthayati & prārthana nt., prārthanā f.] aiming at, wish, desire, request, aspiration, prayer S ii.99, 154; A i.224; iii.47; v.212; Nd1 316, 337 (p. vuccati taṇhā); Nd2 112; Nett 18, 27; Dhs 1059; Miln 3; SnA 47, 50; DhA ii.36; PvA 47. -- patthanaŋ karoti to make a wish J i.68; DhA i.48; ˚ŋ ṭhapeti id. DhA i.47; ii.83; iv.200. Patthara
Patthara
[cp. late Sk. prastara. The ord. meaning of Sk. pr. is "stramentum"] 1. stone, rock S i.32. -- 2. stoneware Miln 2. Pattharati
Pattharati
[pa+tharati] to spread, spread out, extend J i.62; iv.212; vi.279; DhA i.26; iii.61 (so read at J vi.549 in cpd ˚pāda with spreading feet, v. l. patthaṭa˚). -- pp. patthaṭa (q. v.). -- Caus. patthāreti with pp. patthārita probably also to be read at Th 1, 842 for padhārita. Pattharika
Pattharika
[fr. patthara] a merchant Vin ii.135 (kaŋsa˚). Patthita
Patthita
[pp. of pattheti] wished for, desired, requested, sought after Sn 836; Miln 227, 361; DhA iv.201; PvA 47 (˚ākāra of the desired kind, as wished for); Sdhp 79 (a˚). Patthīna
Patthīna
[pa+thīna] stiff D ii.335; DhsA 307. Also as patthinna at Vin i.286 ( = atirajitattā thaddha Bdhgh, on p. 391); Vism 361 (=thīna p. 262); VbhA 67 (˚sneha). Pattheti
Pattheti
[pa+arth, cp. Sk. prārthayati] to wish for, desire, pray for, request, long for S iv.125; v.145; Sn 114, 899; Th 2, 341; Nd1 312, 316; PugA 208 (āsaŋsati+); PvA 148; Sdhp 66, 319; ppr. patthento PvA 107; patthayanto J i.66 (paramâbhisaŋbodhiŋ); patthayaŋ Sn 70 ( = icchanto patthayanto abhijappanto Nd2 392); patthayamāna M i.4; Sn 902; J i.259; DhA iii.193; PvA 226 (=āsiŋsamāna); & patthayāno Sn 900; It 67, 115. -- grd. patthetabba PvA 96, patthayitabba PvA 95, and patthiya which only occurs in neg. form apatthiya what ought not to be wished J iv.61; Pv ii.67 (= apatthayitabbaŋ PvA 95); DhA i.29; also as napatthiya (med.) one who does not wish for himself Sn 914 (cp. Nd2 337). -- pp. patthita (q. v.). -- 408 -- Patvā
Patvā
see pāpuṇāti. Patha
Patha
[of path, Ved. pathi with the 3 bases pathi, path˚ and panth˚, of which only the last two have formed independent nouns, viz. patha and pantha (q. v.)] 1. path, road, way D i.63; Sn 176 (loc. pathe), 385, 540, 868; Nd2 485 B (+pantha, in expln of magga); J i.308 (loc. pathe); ii.39; vi.525 (abl. pathā); Th 1, 64; Pug 22, 57; Mhvs 21, 24 (pathe); 36, 93 (loc. pathi, see Geiger, Gr. § 89); Sdhp 241. -- 2. Very frequent as -- ˚, where it is sometimes pleonastic, and acts in the function of an abstract formation in ˚tā or ˚ttaŋ (cp. similar use of anta: see anta1 5; and pada: see pada 3), e. g. anila˚ (air) J iv.119; anupariyāya˚ A iv.107; ādicca˚ (path of the sun, sky) DhA iii.177; ummagga˚ S i.193; kamma˚ DhA i.36; gaṇana˚ (range of) calculation Miln 20; cakkhu˚ J iv.403 ( = cakkhūnaŋ etaŋ nāmaŋ C.); catummahā˚ A iii.28, 42, 394; dve˚ Vv 5317; nakkhatta˚ Dh 208; yañña˚ (=yañña) Nd2 524; yogga˚ A iii.122; rajā˚ S ii.219; rāga˚ (sensuality) S iv.70; vacana˚ (way of saying, speech) Vv 6317 (=vacana VvA 262), etc. See also cakkhu˚, ñeyya˚, dveḷhā˚, manussa˚, yañña˚, vāda˚, sagga˚, hattha˚; der. pātheyya. -- See also byappatha. -- apatha where there is no way or road, wrong way J ii.287; ThA 255; VvA 337.

-- addhan "the journey or stretch of the path": see under addhan. -- addhi (?) so perhaps to be read for patatthi, according to Fausböll J vi.276. Unclear in meaning, expld by nibbiddha vīthi (frequented road?) -- gamana "going on their course," of the stars D i.10 (see Dial. i.20 "their usual course"). Pathabya
Pathabya
[fr. pathavi = paṭhavi] belonging to the earth, ruler of the earth (?) A iv.90 (reading uncertain). Pathavi
Pathavi
see paṭhavi. Pathāvin
Pathāvin
[fr. patha] a traveller Vin iv.108; J vi.65; DA i.298. Pada
Pada
(nt.) [Ved. pad, pād (m.) foot, and also pāda; pada (nt.) step. Cp. Gr. pw /s (pou/s) = Lat. pēs, Goth. fōtus =Ohg fuoz=E. foot; further Arm. het track, Gr. peda/ after, pe/don field, pezo/s on foot, etc.; Lith. péda track; Ags. fetvan= E. fetch. -- The decl. in Pāli is vocalic (a), viz. pada; a trace of the consonant (root) decl. is instr. sg. padā (Th 1, 457; Sn 768), of cons. (s) decl. instr. padasā with the foot, on foot (D i.107; J iii.371; DhA i.391). -- Gender is nt., but nom. pl. is frequently found as padā, e. g. at Dh 273; Nett 192 (mūla˚)] 1. foot Dh 273=SnA 366 (? saccānaŋ caturo padā); DA i.85; usually -- ˚, like hatthipadaŋ elephant's foot M i.176, 184; S i.86; v.43, 231; and with numerals dvi˚ & di˚, catup˚, aṭṭha˚ (q. v.). In aṭṭha˚ also meaning "square of a chessboard." -- 2. step, footstep, track Dh 179 (of a Buddha, cp. DhA iii.194 & 197) J i.170 (footmark) ii.154; in redupl. -- iterative formation padāpadaŋ step by step Sn 446 (v. l. padânupadaŋ), and pade padaŋ Sn p. 107 (cp. SnA 451). -- 3. (Often synonymous with ˚patha i. e. way, kind, & sometimes untranslatable) (a) lit. way, path, position, place Vin ii.217 (nakkhatta˚ constellation); J i.315 (assama˚ =assama); v.75 (id.), 321 (id.); vi.76 (id.); vi.180 (v. l. patha; C. mahāmagga); mantapada=manta D i.104 (cp. DA i.273). See also janapada, saggapada. -- (b) in appld meaning (modal): case, lot, principle, part, constituent, characteristic, ingredient, item, thing, element M i.176 (cattāri padāni 4 characteristics); S i.7 (pade pade "now in this thing, now in that" C. ārammaṇe ārammaṇe), 212 (amataŋ p.=nibbāna); ii.280 (id.); A ii.51 (id.), It 39 (p. asankhataŋ=nibbāna); Sn 88 (dhammapade sudesite; expld as nibbānadhamma SnA 164; dhammapada=Dhamma), ibid. (anavajja -- padāni sevamāna=principles), 700 (moneyyaŋ uttamaŋ padaŋ, thing; but SnA 491 expls as uttama -- paṭipadaŋ), 765; Dh 21, 93, 114 (amataŋ), 254, 368 (santaŋ= nibbānass' etaŋ nāmaŋ, santakoṭṭhāsaŋ DhA iv.108); Pv iv.348 (amataŋ); Nett 2= 192 (nava padāni kusalāni); SnA 397 (nāmādi p.); Sdhp 47 (accutaŋ santaŋ p.), 615 (paramaŋ). See further dhamma˚, nibbāna˚, santi˚, sikkhā˚. -- 4. a word, verse (or a quarter of a verse), stanza, line, sentence S ii.36 (ekena padena sabbo attho vutto); S iv.379=A v.320 (agga˚); A ii.182 (+vyañjana & desanā); 189 (attha˚ text, motto); iii.356 (id.); Sn 252 (=dhamma -- desanā SnA 293), 374; Dh 273; J i.72 (atireka -- pada -- satena); Nett 4 (akkharaŋ padaŋ vyañjanaŋ, cp. nāmādīhi padehi at SnA 397, which is to be understood as nāma, pada & vyañjana, i. e. word, sentence & letter, cp. Mvyutp. 104, 74 -- 76); Miln 148 (āhacca˚); KhA 169; SnA 409 (ubhaya˚), 444; VvA 3, 13; PvA 10, 26, 117 (word, term). abl. padaso (adv.) sentence by stce or word by word Vin iv.14 (dhammaŋ vāceti=anupadaŋ C.; cp. KhA 190 p. ˚dhamma). At MA i.2 pada (sentence or division of a sentence) is contrasted with akkhara (word), when it is said that the Majjhima Nikāya consists of 80,523 padas and 740,053 akkharas. -- Neg. apada (1) without feet, footless A iv.434 (Māra; v. l. apara); It 87 (sattā,+ dvipada etc.). -- (2) trackless, leaving no footprint, fig. having no desires (i. e. signs of worldliness) Dh 179 (rāga, etc., as padāni DhA iii.197, but cp. also p. 194.)

-- attha meaning of a word KhA 81, 84; SnA 91. -- ânupadaŋ (adv.) on the track DhA ii.38. -- ânupadika following one's footsteps J ii.78; DhA ii.94 (therānaŋ); nt. adv. ˚ŋ close behind DhA i.290. -- ānupubbatā (or ˚ta) succession of words Nd1 140 (in expln of "iti"; cp. SnA 28); Nd2 137 (id.; reading ˚ka). -- uddhāra synopsis of a verse SnA 237 (atthuddhāra+). -- kusala clever at following a trail J iii.501, 505. -- cārikā a female (foot -- ) servant J iv.35. -- cetiya "step -- shrine," a holy footprint, a miraculous footprint left on the ground by a holy man DhA iii.194. -- ccheda separation of words, parsing SnA 150. -- jāta (nt.) pedal character S i.86. -- ṭṭhāna [cp. Sk. padasthāna footprint] "proximate cause" (Cpd. 13, 23) Nett 1 sq., 27 sq., 40 sq., 104; Vism 84. -- dvaya twofold part (of a phrase), i. e. antecedent and subsequent DhsA 164. -- parama one whose highest attainment is the word (of the text, and not the sense of it) A ii.135; J vi.131; Pug 41 ("vyañjanapadam eva paramaŋ assā ti" PugA 223. -- pāripūrī (f.) expletive particle Nd2 137; SnA 28. -- pūraṇa filling out a verse; as tt. g. expletive particle SnA 590 (a), 139 (kho), 137 (kho pana), 378 (tato), 536 (pi), 230 (su), 416 (ha), 377 (hi); KhA 219 (tam), 188 (su); VvA 10 (maya). -- bhājana dividing of words, i. e. treating each word (of a phrase) separately DhsA 234. -- bhājaniya division of a phrase DhsA 54. -- bhāṇa reciting or preaching (the words of the Scriptures) DhA ii.95; iii.345; iv.18. -- vaṇṇanā expln of a pada or single verse SnA 65, 237; KhA 125, 132, 228. -- valañja a footprint, track J vi.560; DhA ii.38; iii.194. -- viggaha separation of words, resolution of a compound into its components VvA 326. -- vibhāga separation of words, parsing SnA 269; PvA 34. -- saŋsagga contact of words Nd1 139; Nd2 137; SnA 28. -- sadda sound of footsteps Sn p. 80; J iv.409. -- sandhi euphonic combination of words Nd1 445; Nd2 137; KhA 155, 224; SnA 28, 40, 157 etc.; PvA 52. -- silā a stone for stepping on, flag Vin ii.121 = 154. Padaka
Padaka1
(adj.) [fr. pada4] one who knows the padas (words or lines), versed in the padapāṭha of the Veda (Ep. of an educated Brahmin) D i.88 = Sn p. 105 (where AvŚ ii.19 in id. p. has padaśo=P. padaso word by word, but Divy 620 reads padako; ajjheti vedeti cā ti padako); M i.386; A i.163, 166; Sn 595; Miln 10, 236. -- 409 -- Padaka
Padaka2
(nt.) = pada 3, viz. basis, principle or pada 4, viz. stanza, line J v.116 (=kāraṇa -- padāni C.). Padaka
Padaka2
(nt.) [fr. pada1] in cpd. aṭṭha˚ an "eight -- foot," i. e. a small inset square (cp. aṭṭha -- pada chess -- board), a patch (?) Vin i.297. See also padika. Padakkhiṇa
Padakkhiṇa
(adj.) [pa+dakkhiṇa] 1. "to the right," in phrase padakkhiṇaŋ karoti (with acc. of object) to hold (a person, etc.) to one's right side, i. e. to go round so as to keep the right side turned to a person, a mode of reverential salutation Vin i.17; S i.138; A i.294; ii.21, 182; iii.198; Sn 1010; J i.50, 60; iii.392. -> 2. "(prominent) with the right," i. e. skilful, clever, quick in learning J iv.469 ( = susikkhita C.). -- 3. lucky, auspicious, turning out well or favourable J v.353 (=sukha -- nipphattin vuddhi -- yutta C.).

-- ggāhin "right -- handed," i. e. cleverly taking up (what is taught), good at grasping or understanding A iii.79, 180, v.24 sq., 90, 338; DhA ii.105. -- Opp. appadakkhiṇaggāhin "left -- handed," unskilled, untrained (cp. Ger. "linkisch") S ii.204 sq.; J iii.483. -- ggāhitā skilfulness, quick grasp, cleverness KhA 148. Padatta
Padatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. pada] being or constituting a lot, part or element SnA 164. Padara
Padara
(nt.) [pa+dara of dṛ, cp. dabba, darati, dāru] 1. a cleft, split, fissure, crevice M i.469; S ii.32; Sn 720 ( = darī SnA 500); combd with kandara at Miln 36, 296, 411; PvA 29. -- 2. a board, plank J ii.10 91 (˚sakaṭa) 112; iii.181; v.47 sq.; vi.432 (˚cchanna); SnA 330 (dabba˚ oar), 355; DhA ii.55; iii.296. -- 3. Wrong spelling for badara at J iv.363 (beluvā p˚āni ca) & vi.529.

-- sañcita filled with clefts (?) Vin iv.46. -- samācāra refractiousness, disobedience (?) M i.469. Padahati
Padahati
[pa+dhā] 1. to strive, exert D iii.221 (cittaŋ paggaṇhāti p.); PvA 31 (yoniso p.). -- 2. to confront, take up, fight against, stand J vi.508 (usīraŋ muñjapubbajaŋ urasā padahessāmi "I shall stand against the grasses with my chest"; C. expls by dvedhā katvā purato gamissāmi, i. e. break and go forward). -> Note. padahasi at J iv.383 read pade hasi (see Windisch, Māra & B. p. 124 & Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 51. Windisch takes padahasi as pa+dah to burn, & translates "du willst das Feuer brennen," i. e. you attempt something impossible, because the fire will burn you). -- pp. pahita (q. v.). Padahana
Padahana
see padhāna. Padātar
Padātar
[n. ag. of padāti] extravagant, a squanderer Pdgp. 65, 68. Padāti
Padāti
(padadāti, padeti) [pa+dā] 1. to give, bestow Pv i.116 (ger. padatvā, perhaps better to read ca datvā, as v. l. BB); J iii.279 (fut. padassati); v.394 (id.). -> 2. to acquire, take, get J i.190 (inf. padātave, C. gahetuŋ). -- Pass padīyati (q. v.). Padāna
Padāna
(nt.) [fr. pa+dā] giving, bestowing; but appears to have also the meaning of "attainment, characteristic, attribute" A i.102 (bāla˚ & paṇḍita˚); J i.97 (sotāpattimagg' ādi˚); PvA 71 (anubala˚); ThA 35 (anupattidhammatā˚). -- At Th 1, 47 Kern (Toev. ii.138) proposes to read tuyhaŋ padāne for T. tuyh' âpadāne, and translates padāna by "footstep, footprint." See also sampadāna. Padāraṇa
Padāraṇa
(nt.) [pa+dṛ] splitting, tearing Th 1, 752. Padālana
Padālana
(nt.) [fr. padāleti] cleaving, bursting open, breaking Nett 61, 112 (mohajāla˚); ThA 34 (mohakkhandha˚). Padālita
Padālita
[pp. of padāleti] broken, pierced, destroyed S i.130; iii.83; A v.88 (appadālita -- pubbaŋ lobhakkhandhaŋ); Sn 546 (āsavā te p.; quoted at VvA 9); ThA 34 (as A. v.88 with moha˚). Padālitatta
Padālitatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. padālita] the fact of having (med.) or being (pass.) pierced or broken, abl. padālitattā on account of having broken Miln 287. Padāletar
Padāletar
[n. ag. to padāleti] one who pierces or destroys, a destroyer, breaker, in phrase mahato kāyassa padāletā the destroyer of a great body (or bulk) A i.284 sq. (in sequence dūre -- pātin, akkhaṇavedhin, m. k. p.); ii.170 sq., 202; cp. padāleti1. Padāleti
Padāleti
[Caus. of pa+dal] 1. to cleave, break, pierce, destroy, in combn ˚khandhaŋ padāleti to destroy the great mass of . . ., e. g. tamo˚ It 8 (padālayuŋ); Th 2, 28 (ger. padāliya = moha˚ padālitvā ThA 34); lobha˚ S v.88; avijjā˚ A i.285. -- 2. to break, break down, tear down, burst open J i.73 (pabbata -- kūṭāni); iv.173 (matthakaŋ p˚etvā uṭṭhita -- singā); v.68 (silāya matthakaŋ); Miln 332 (diṭṭhi -- jālaŋ); DA i.37 (Sineruŋ). See also sam˚ -- pp. padālita (q. v.). Padika
Padika
(adj.) [fr. pada 1; cp. padaka3] consisting of feet or parts, -- fold; dvādasa˚ twelve fold J i.75 (paccayākāra). Paditta
Paditta
[pp. of pa+dīp, cp. Sk. pradīpta] kindled, set on fire, blazing S iii.93 ≈ (chav' âlataŋ ubhato padittaŋ); J vi.108; Sdhp 208 (˚angārakāsuŋ). Padippati

Padippati
[pa+dippati] to flame forth, to blaze Cp iii 93 (davaḍāho p.). -- pp. paditta (q. v.). -- Caus. padīpeti (q. v.). Padissa
Padissa
(adj.) [grd. of padissati] being seen, to be seen, appearing D ii.205 (upasantappa˚). Padissati
Padissati
[pa+dissati, Pass. of dṛś] to be seen Sn 108 (doubtful; v. l. padussati; expld at SnA 172 by paṭidissati, v. l. padussati, cp. p. 192); Cp i.102 J vi.89; Sdhp 427. Padīpa
Padīpa
[cp. Epic Sk. pradīpa] 1. a light Dh 146; Vv 462 (jalati blazes); Tikp 14; Miln 40; VvA 51 (padīpaŋ ujjāletvā lighting a lamp, making a light); PvA 38; Sdhp 250. -- 2. a lamp Sn 235 (nibbanti dhīrā yath' âyaŋ p.); DhA ii.163 (anupādāno viya p.). ˚ŋ karoti to make a light, to light up Vin i.118; ˚ŋ ujjāleti see under 1. Usually as tela -- padīpa an oil lamp Vin i.15; S ii.86 (telañ ca vaṭṭiñ ca telapadīpo jhāyati) = iv.213; v.319; A i.137; VvA 198. -- appadīpa where there is no light, obscure Vin iv.268.

-- kāla lighting time Vv 96. Padīpita
Padīpita
[pp. of padīpeti] lit, burning, shining Miln 40. Padīpiya & Padīpeyya
Padīpiya
& Padīpeyya (nt.) [padīpa+(i) ya] that which is connected with lighting, material for lighting a lamp, lamps & accessories; one of the gifts forming the stock of requisites of a Buddhist mendicant (see Nd2 523: yañña as deyyadhamma). The form in ˚eyya is the older and more usual one, thus at A ii.85, 203; iv.239; It 65; Pug 51; VvA 51. -- The form in ˚iya at Vv 225, 266, 376; J vi.315; VvA 295. Padīpeti
Padīpeti
[Caus. of padippati] to light a light or a lamp Vin i.118 (padīpeyya, padīpetabba); Miln 40; ThA 72 (Ap. v. 46); Sdhp 63, 332, 428. -- pp. padīpita (q. v.). Padīyati
Padīyati
[Pass. of padāti] to be given out or presented; Pv ii.916; Sdhp 502, 523. -- 410 -- Paduṭṭha
Paduṭṭha
[pp. of padussati] made bad, spoilt, corrupt, wicked, bad (opp. pasanna, e. g. at A i.8; It 12, 13) D iii.32 (˚citta); M iii.49; A ii.30; Sn 662; Dh 1; J ii.401; DhA i.23 (opp. pasanna); PvA 34, 43 (˚manasa). -- appaduṭṭha good, not corrupt D i.20; iii.32; M iii.50; S i.13; Pv iv.710. Padubbhati
Padubbhati
[pa+dubbhati] to do wrong, offend, plot against J i.262 (ger. ˚dubbhitvā). Paduma
Paduma
(nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. padma, not in RV.] the lotus Nelumbium speciosum. It is usually mentioned in two varieties, viz. ratta˚ and seta˚, i. e. red and white lotus, so at J v.37; SnA 125; as ratta˚ at VvA 191; PvA 157. The latter seems to be the more prominent variety; but paduma also includes the 3 other colours (blue, yellow, pink?), since it frequently has the designation of pañcavaṇṇa -- paduma (the 5 colours however are nowhere specified), e. g. at J i.222; v.337; vi.341; VvA 41. It is further classified as satapatta and sahassapatta -- p., viz. lotus with 100 & with 1,000 leaves: VvA 191. Compared with other species at J v.37, where 7 kinds are enumd as uppala (blue, red & white), paduma (red & white), kumuda (white) and kallahāra. See further kamala and kuvalaya. -- (1) the lotus or lotus flower M iii.93; S i.138, 204; A i.145; ii.86 sq.; iii.26, 239; Sn 71, 213; J i.51 (daṇḍa˚ N. of a plant, cp. Sk. daṇḍotphala), 76 (khandha˚, latā˚, daṇḍaka˚, olambaka˚); iv.3; vi.564; Dh 458; Nd1 135; Vv 354 ( = puṇḍarīka VvA 161); 4412 (nānā -- paduma -- sañchanna); Pv ii.120 (id.); ii.122 (id.); Pug 63; Vism 256 (ratta˚); DA i.219; KhA 53; SnA 97; Sdhp 359. -- (2) N. of a purgatory (˚niraya) S i.151 -- 152; Sn 677; p. 126; SnA 475 sq.

-- acchara (heavenly) lotus -- maiden SnA 469. -- uttara N. of Buddha SnA 341, 455 etc. -- kaṇṇikā a peak in the shape of a lotus VvA 181. -- kalāpa a bunch of lotuses VvA 191. -- gabbha the calyx of a l. ThA 68 (˚vaṇṇa). -- patta a l. leaf Nd1 135 ( = pokkhara); DhA iv.166 (=pokkhara -- patta). -- puñja a l. cluster J iii.55. -- puppha a lotus flower Nd2 393; SnA 78. -- rāga "lotus hued," a ruby VvA 276. -- vyūha one of the 3 kinds of fighting, viz. p.˚; cakka˚, sakaṭa˚ J ii.406= iv.343 (cp. Sk. p. -- vyūha -- samādhi a kind of concentration, & see J trsln ii.275). -- sara a lotus pond J i.221; v.337; SnA 141. Padumaka
Padumaka
[fr. paduma] 1. the Paduma purgatory S i.152. -- 2. a lotus J ii.325. Padumin
Padumin
(adj. -- n.) [cp. Sk. padmin, spotted elephant] having a lotus, belonging to a lotus, lotus -- like; N. of (the spotted) elephant Sn 53 (expld at SnA 103 as "padumasadisa -- gattatāya vā Padumakule uppannatāya vā padumī," cp. Nd2 p. 164). -- f. paduminī [cp. Sk. padminī lotus plant] 1. a lotus pond or pool of lotuses D i.75; ii.38; M iii.93; S i.138; A iii.26. -- 2. the lotus plant Nelumbium speciosum J i.128 (˚paṇṇa); iv.419 (˚patta); SnA 369; KhA 67 (˚patta); PvA 189. Padulla
Padulla
[?] in cpd. padulla -- gāhin is perhaps misreading; trsl. "clutching at blown straws (of vain opinion)," expld by C. as duṭṭhullagāhin; at id. p. S i.187 we find duṭṭhullabhāṇin "whose speech is never lewd" (see Psalms of Brethren 399, n. 3). Padussati
Padussati
[pa+dussati] to do wrong, offend against (with loc.), make bad, corrupt DA i.211 (see padosa); Sn 108 (v. l. for padissati); aor. padussi J ii.125, 401. -- pp. paduṭṭha; Caus. padūseti (q. v.). Padūsita
Padūsita
[pp. of padūseti] made bad, corrupted, spoilt It 13 (v. l. padussita). Padūseti & Padoseti
Padūseti
& Padoseti [Caus. of padussati, but the latter probably Denom. fr. padosa2] to defile, pollute, spoil, make bad or corrupt [cp. BSk. pradūṣyati cittaŋ Divy 197, 286] D i.20; M i.129; It 86; DA i.211 (see padosa1); ThA 72 (Ap. v. 40; to be read for paduse, Pot. = padoseyya); J v.273 (manaŋ p., for upahacca). -- padusseti read also at A iv.97 for padasseti (dummanku 'yam padusseti dhūm' aggimhi va pāvako). -- As padoseti at PvA 212 (cittāni padosetvā) and in stock phrase manaŋ padosaye (Pot.) in sense of "to set upon anger" (cp. padosa2) S i.149 ("sets his heart at enmity")=A ii.3; v.171, 174=Sn 659 (=manaŋ padoseyya SnA 477)= Nett 132; S iv.70; SnA 11 (mano padoseyya). -- pp. padūsita (q. v.). Padesa
Padesa
[fr. pa+diś, cp. late Sk. pradeśa] indication, loca- tion, range, district; region, spot, place S ii.227, 254; v.201; A ii.167 (cattāro mahā˚); Dh 127 (jagati˚), 303; J ii.3, 158 (Himavanta˚); iii.25 (id.), 191 (jāti -- gottakula˚); SnA 355; PvA 29, 33 (hadaya˚), 36 (so read for padase), 43, 47; Sdhp 252.

-- kārin effecting a limited extent S v.201. -- ñāṇa knowledge within a certain range, limited knowledge S v.457. -- bodhisatta a limited Bodhisatta Kvu 283 (cp. Kvu trsln 1393, 1662). -- rajja principality over a district, local government It 15; ThA 26 (Ap. v. 10). -- rājā a local or sub -- king Vism 301 (cakkavatti+). -- lakkhaṇa regional or limited characteristics Kvu 283. -- vassin raining or shedding rain only locally or over a (limited) district It 64 -- 66. Padesika
Padesika
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. padesa] belonging to a place of indication, indicating, regional, reaching the index of, only with numerals in reference to age (usually soḷasavassa˚ at the time of 16 years) J i.259 (id.) 262 (id.) ii.277 (id.). -- See also uddesika in same application. Padosa
Padosa1
[pa+dosa1, Sk. pradoṣa] defect, fault, blemish, badness, corruption, sin D i.71 ( = padussati paraŋ vā padūseti vināsetī ti padoso DA i.211); M iii.3; S iv.322 (vyāpāda˚); A i.8 (ceto˚); iii.92 (vyāpāda); It 12; J v.99; Pug 59, 68; Dhs 1060. -- Note. At ThA 72 we find reading "apace paduse (padose?) pi ca" as uncertain conjecture for v. l. BB "amacce manase pi ca." Padosa
Padosa2
[pa+dosa2, Sk. pradveṣa, see remarks to dosa2] anger, hatred, ill -- will; always as mano˚ "anger in mind" M i.377; Sn 328 ( = khāṇu -- kaṇṭak' ādimhi p. SnA 334), 702; J iv.29; Miln 130; Vism 304; SnA 477. Padosika
Padosika
(adj.) [fr. padosa1] sinful, spoiling or spoilt, full of fault or corruption, only in 2 phrases, viz. khiḍḍā˚ "debauched by pleasure" D i.19; and mano˚ "debauched in mind" D i.20, 21. Padosin
Padosin
(adj.) [fr. padosa1] abusing, damaging, spoiling, injuring S i.13 (appaduttha˚); Pv iv.710. Padoseti
Padoseti
see padūseti. Paddha
Paddha1
(adj.) [cp. Sk. prādhva (?) in diff. meaning "being on a journey," but rather prahva] 1. expert in (loc.) J vi.476 (v. l. patha = paṭṭha; C. cheko paṭibalo). -> 2. subject to, serving, attending J iv.35 (p. carāmi, so read for baḍḍha, see Kern, Toev. s. v.; C. padacārikā). Paddha
Paddha2
(adj.) [cp. Sk. prārdha] half (?) J iii.95 (probably = paddha1, but C. explns as aḍḍha upaḍḍha). Paddhagu
Paddhagu
(adj. n.) [cp. Sk. prādhvaga] 1. going, walking J iii.95 (T. na p' addhaguŋ, but C. reads paddhaguŋ). -- 2. humble, ready to serve, servant, attendant, slave S i.104 (so read for paccagu); Sn 1095 (T. for paṭṭhagu, q. v. -- Nd2 reads paṭṭhagu but SnA 597 paddhagu and explns by paddhacara paricārika); J vi.380 (hadayassa); Th 1, 632. Paddhacara
Paddhacara
(adj. -- n.) [paddha1+cara, cp. Sk. prādhva and prahva humble] ready to serve, subject to, ministering; a servant S i.144 (T. baddhacara, v. l. paṭṭha˚; trsl. "pupil"); J iv.35 (read paddhacarā 'smi tuyhaŋ for T. baddha carāmi t., as pointed out by Kern, Toev. s. v. baddha. The Cy. misunderstood the wrong text reading and expld as "tuyhaŋ baddha carāmi," but adds "veyyāvaccakārikā padacārikā"); v.327 (as baddhañcara; C. veyyāvacca -- kara); vi.268 (˚ā female servant = C. pāda -- paricārikā); Nd1 464 (+paricārika); SnA 597 (+paricāraka, for paddhagū). -- 411 -- Padma
Padma
see paduma. Padmaka
Padmaka
(m. & nt.) [Sk. padmaka] N. of a tree, Costus speciosus or arabicus J v.405, 420; vi.497 (reading uncertain), 537. Padvāra
Padvāra
(nt.) [pa+dvāra] a place before a door or gate J v.433; vi.327.

-- gāma suburb Dāvs v. 3. Padhaŋsa
Padhaŋsa
see appadhaŋsa. Padhaŋsati
Padhaŋsati
[pa+dhaŋsati] to fall from (abl.), to be de- prived of Vin ii.205 (yogakkhemā p.; so read for paddh˚). -- Caus. padhaŋseti to destroy, assault, violate, offend J iv.494. ( = jīvitakkhayaŋ pāpeti); PvA 117. -> grd. padhaŋsiya in cpds. su˚ & dup˚ easily (or with difficulty) overwhelmed or assaulted Vin ii.256= S ii.264. Also neg. appadhaŋsiya (& ˚ka) (q. v.). -> pp. padhaŋsita (q. v.). Padhansita
Padhansita
[pp. of padhaŋseti] offended, assaulted J ii.422. See also app˚. Padhāna
Padhāna
(nt.) [fr. pa+dhā, cp. padahati] exertion, ener- getic effort, striving, concentration of mind D iii.30, 77, 104, 108, 214, 238; M ii.174, 218; S i.47; ii.268; iv.360; v.244 sq.; A iii.65 -- 67 (5 samayā and 5 asamayā for padhāna), 249; iv.355; v.17 sq.; Sn 424, 428; It 30; Dh 141; J i.90; Nd2 394 ( = viriya); Vbh 218 (citta -- samādhi p˚ etc.); Nett 16; DA i.104; DhA i.85 (mahā -- padhānaŋ padahitvā); ThA 174; PvA 134. Padhāna is fourfold, viz. saŋvara˚, pahāna˚, bhāvana˚, anurakkhaṇā˚ or exertion consisting in the restraint of one's senses, the abandonment of sinful thoughts, practice of meditation & guarding one's character. These 4 are mentioned at D iii.225; A ii.16; Ps i.84; ii.14 sq., 56, 86, 166, 174; Ud 34; Nd1 45, 340; Sdhp 594. -> Very frequently termed sammappadhāna [cp. BSk. samyak -- pradhāna MVastu iii.120; but also samyakprahāṇa, e. g. Divy 208] or "right exertion," thus at Vin i.22; S i.105; iii.96 (the four); A ii.15 (id.); iii.12; iv.125; Nd1 14; Ps i.21, 85, 90, 161; SnA 124; PvA 98. -- As padahana at Ps i.17, 21, 181. Padhānavant
Padhānavant
(adj.) [fr. padhāna] gifted with energy, full of strength (of meditation etc.), rightly concentrated S i.188, 197; Sn 70 (cp. Nd2 394), 531. Padhānika
Padhānika
(adj.) [fr. padhāna] making efforts, exerting oneself in meditation, practising "padhāna" DA i.251. Padhāniya
Padhāniya
(adj.) [fr. padhāna] belonging to or connected with exertion, worthy of being pursued in cpd. ˚anga (nt.) a quality to be striven after, of which there are 5, expressed in the attributes of one who attains them as saddho, appābādho, asaṭho, āraddha -- viriyo, paññavā D iii.237 = M ii.95, 128=A iii.65; referred to at Miln trsln i.188. Besides these there is the set called pārisuddhi -- padhāniy' angāni and consisting either of 4 qualities (sīla˚, citta˚, diṭṭhi˚, vimutti˚) A ii.194, or of 9 (the four+kankhā -- vitaraṇa˚, maggâmagga -- ñāṇa˚ paṭipadāñāṇa -- dassana˚, ñāṇa -- dassana˚ paññā˚) D iii.288; Ps i.28. Padhārita
Padhārita
("born in mind") read patthārita at Th 1, 842 (see pattharati). -- padhārehi (v. l. F.) at Sn 1149 read dhārehi. -- padhārita in meaning of "considered, understood" in cpd. su˚ at S iii.6; v.278. Padhāvati
Padhāvati
[pa+dhāvati] to run out or forth Pv iii.17 (ger. ˚itvā = upadhāvitvā PvA 173). Padhāvin
Padhāvin
(adj.) [fr. padhāvati] rushing or running out or forth M ii.98. Padhūpāti
Padhūpāti
( = padhūpāyati) [pa+dhūpāyati] to blow forth smoke or flames Vin i.25 (aor. padhūpāsi); iv.109 (id.); Vism 400 (id.), (so read for padhūmāsi T., v. l. SS padhūpāyi & padhūmāyi). -- pp. padhūpita (q. v.). Padhūpita
Padhūpita
[pa+dhūpita, latter only in meaning "in- censed," cp. dhūpa etc.] fumigated, reeking, smoked out S i.133 (trsld "racked [wrapt] in flames"; C. santāpita); VvA 237 (so read with v. l. SS. for T. pavūsita; meaning: scented, filled with scent). Padhota
Padhota
(adj.) [pa+dhota] cleansed, in cpd. sup˚ well cleansed D ii.324. Pana
Pana
(indecl.) [doublet of Sk. puna(ḥ) wiṭh diff. meaning (see puna), cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 34] adversative & interrogative particle, sometimes (originally, cp. puna "again, further") merely connecting & continuing the story. -- (1) (adversative) but, on the contrary J i.222; ii.159; VvA 79 (correl. with tāva). ca pana "but" J i.152; atha ca pana "and yet" D i.139; J i.279; na kho pana "certainly not" J i.151; vā pana "or else" Vin i.83; Dh 42; Sn 376, 829. -- (2) (in questions) then, now J ii.4 (kiŋ p.), 159 (kahaŋ p.); VvA 21 (kena p.); PvA 27 (katamaŋ p.). -- (3) (conclusive or copulative) and, and now, further, moreover D i.139 (siyā kho p. be it now that . . .); Sn 23, 393, 396, 670; J i.278; PvA 3. Panaccati
Panaccati
[pa+naccati] to dance (forth), to dance ThA 257 (ppr. panaccanta). -- pp. panaccita (q. v.). Panaccita
Panaccita
[pp. of panaccati] dancing, made to dance Th 2, 390. Panasa
Panasa
[cp. late Sk. panasa, Lat. penus stores, Lith. pẽnas fodder, perhaps Goth. fenea] the Jack or bread -- fruit tree (Artocarpus integrifolia) and its fruit J i.450; ii.160; v.205, 465; Vv 4413; KhA 49, 50, 58 (˚phala, where Vism 258 reads panasa -- taca); SnA 475; VvA 147. Panassati
Panassati
[pa+nassati, cp. also BSk praṇāśa Divy 626] to be lost, to disappear, to go to ruin, to cease to be M i.177; S ii.272 (read panassissati with BB); J v.401; vi.239; Th 1, 143. Panāda
Panāda
[pa+nāda] shouting out, shrieks of joy J vi.282. Panādeti
Panādeti
[Caus. of pa+nad] to shout out, to utter a sound Th 1, 310. Panāḷikā
Panāḷikā
(f.) [fr. panāḷī] a pipe, tube, channel, water course DA i.244. Panāḷī
Panāḷī
(f.) [pa+nāḷī] a tube, pipe A iv.171 (udapāna˚). Panigghosa
Panigghosa
in cpd. appanigghosa is wrongly registered as such in A Index (for A iv.88); it is to be separated appa + nigghosa (see nigghosa). Panudati
Panudati
[pa+nudati] to dispel, repel, remove, push away S i, 167 sq., 173; Dh 383; Sn 81, 928 (pot. panudeyya or metri causa panūdeyya = pajaheyya etc. Nd1 385); J vi.491 (1. pl. panudāmase). -- ger. panuditvā SnA 591, & panujja Sn 359, 535, 1055 (expld at Nd2 395 as imper. pres.=pajaha, cp. SnA 591=panudehi); J iii.14; v.198 (=pātetvā C.). -- Fut. panudahissati Th 1, 27, 233. -- Pass. panujjati, ppr. panujjamāna in phrase "api panujjamānena pi" even if repulsed M i.108, cp. A iv.32 & Nett 164 (v. l. to be substituted for T. pamajjamānena). -- pp. panunna & panudita (q. v.). Panudita
Panudita
[pp. of panudati] dispelled, driven out Sn 483 (panūdita metri causa, v. l. panudita). See also panunna. -- 412 -- Panunna (Paṇunna & Panuṇṇa)
Panunna
(Paṇunna & Panuṇṇa) [pp. of panudati] (med. & pass.) put away, rejected or rejecting, dispelled, driven away, sent A ii.29; v.31; Sn 469 (˚kodha); J vi.247, 285; Kvu 597 (ito p., trsld "ending here").

-- paccekasacca one who has rejected each of the four false truths (the 5th of the 10 noble states, ariyavāsā: see Vin. Texts i.141) D iii.269, 270; A ii.41; v.29 sq. Panūdana
Panūdana
(nt.) [fr. panudati] removal, dispelling, rejection Sn 252 (sabba -- dukkhâpanūdana SnA 293 should be read as sabba -- dukkha -- apanūdana, as at Vin ii.148 = J i.94), 1106 (=pahānaŋ etc. Nd2 396). Panta
Panta
(adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. prānta edge, margin, border, pra+anta; also BSk. prānta in meaning of Pali, e. g. MVastu iii.200; Divy 312 (prānta -- śayan -- āsana -- sevin)] distant, remote, solitary, secluded; only in phrase pantaŋ senāsanaŋ (sayanāsanaŋ) or pantāni senāsanāni "solitary bed & chair" M i.17, 30; A i.60; ii.137; iii.103; v.10, 202; Sn 72 (cp. Nd2 93), 338, 960 (˚amhi sayanāsane), 969 (sayanamhi pante); Dh 185 ( = vivitta DhA iii.238); Ud 43 (so read for patthañ); J iii.524 (˚amhi sayanāsane); Vism 73 (panta -- senāsane rata); SnA 263 (v. l. pattha).

-- sena (adj.) one who has his resting place far away from men, Ep. of the Buddha M i.386. Panti
Panti
(f.) [Ved. pankti set or row of five, group in general] a row, range, line Vism 392 (tisso sopāna -- pantiyo); DhA iii.219 (uddhana˚); ThA 72 (satta pantiyo); VvA 198 (amba˚). Pantha
Pantha
[base panthan˚, Ved. panthāḥ, with bases path˚ panth˚ and pathi. Same as patha (q. v.). For etym. cp. Gr. po/ntos sea( -- path), pa/tos path, Av. pantā˚, also Goth. finpan = E. find, of Idg *pent to come or go (by)] a road, roadway, path S i.18 (gen. pl. panthānaŋ= kantāramagga C; "jungle road" trsl.); Sn 121 (loc. panthasmiŋ); Nd2 485 B (+patha in expln of magga), Miln 157 (see panthaŋ)

-- gū a traveller (lit. going by road) S i.212 (v. l. addhagū, as at id. p. Th 2, 55); J iii.95 (v. l.). -- ghāta highway robbery J i.253; iv.184. -- duhana waylaying, robbery; m. a robber D i.135 (see DA i.296); J ii.281, 388; D iii.68, and Tikp 280 (˚dūhana). -- dūbhin a highwayman J ii.327. -- dūsaka a robber Miln 20. -- devatā a way spirit, a spirit presiding over a road, road -- goddess J vi.527. -- makkaṭaka a (road) spider Miln 364, 407. -- sakuṇa a "road -- bird," i. e. a bird offered (as a sacrifice) to the goddess presiding over the roads, propitiation; it is here to be understood as a human sacrifice J vi.527 (vv. ll. pattha˚ & bandha˚). Panthāna
Panthāna
(for saṇṭhāna) at SnA 20: see saṇṭhāna 3. Panthika
Panthika
[fr. pantha, formation panthika: panthan = addhika: addhan] a traveller Miln 20. Panna
Panna
[pp. of pajjati but not satisfactorily expld as such, for pajjati & panna never occur by themselves, but only in cpds. like āpajjati, āpanna, upp˚, upa˚, sam˚, etc. Besides, the word is only given in lexic. literature as pp. of pajjati, although a tendency prevails to regard it as pp. of patati. The meaning points more to the latter, but in form it cannot belong to pat. A more satisfactory expln (in meaning and form) is to regard panna as pp. of pa+nam, with der. fr. short base. Thus panna would stand for panata (paṇata), as unna for unnata, ninna for ninnata, the double nn to be accounted for on analogy. The meaning would thus be "bent down, laid down," as panna -- ga = going bent, panna -- dhaja=flag bent or laid down, etc. Perhaps patta of patta -- kkhandha should belong here as panna˚] fallen, gone, gone down; also: creeping, only in foll. cpds.:

-- ga a snake Th 1, 429 (˚inda chief of snake -- demons); J v.166; Miln 23. -- gandha with gone down (i. e. deteriorated) smell, ill -- smelling, or having lost its smell J v.198 ( = thokaŋ duggandha C.). -- dhaja one whose flag gone or is lost, i. e. whose fight is over (Ep. of the Buddha), cp. BSk. prapātito māna -- dhvajaḥ Lal. V. 448 (with derivation from pat instead of pad, cp. papātana) M i.139 sq., 386; A iii.84 sq.; in eulogy on the Buddha (see exegesis to mahesi Nd1 343; Nd2 503) reference is made to mānadhaja (˚papātanaŋ) which is opposed to dhamma -- dhaja ( -- ussapana); thus we should explain as "one who has put down the flag of pride." -- bhāra one who has put down his burden, one whose load has gone, who is delivered or saved M i.139; A iii.84; S i.233; Dh 402 (= ohitakhandha -- bhāra DhA iv.168); Sn 626, 914 (cp Nd1 334); Th 1, 1021. -- bhūmi state of one who has fallen DA i.103 (opp. to jina -- bhūmi, one of the 8 purisa -- bhūmiyo. -- cp. D i.54 & Dial. i.722). -- loma one whose hairs have fallen or are put down (flat, i. e. do not stand erect in consequence of excitement), subdued, pacified (opp. haṭṭha loma) Vin ii.184 (cp. Vin ii.5 & Bdhgh on p. 309 lomaŋ pāteti, Bdhgh pādeti; also Vin. Texts ii.339); iii.266; M i.450; J i.377. Another form is palloma (q. v. & cp. J.P.T.S. 1889, 206). See also remarks on parada -- vutta. Pannaka
Pannaka
(adj.) [fr. panna] silent (?) DA i.163. Pannarasa
Pannarasa
(adj. num.) [see pañcadasa & paṇṇarasa under pañca] fifteen (and fifteenth), usually referring to the 15th day of the lunar month, i. e. the full -- moon day Sn 153 (pannaraso uposatho); pannarase on the 15th day S i.191 = Th 1, 1234; M iii.20; Sn 502, 1016; f. loc. pannarasāya id. S i.233. See also paṇṇarasa. Pannarasama
Pannarasama
(num. ord.) [fr. pannarasa] the 15th SnA 366 (gāthā). Pannarasika
Pannarasika
(adj.) [fr. pannarasa] belonging to the 15th day (of the lunar month) Vin iv.315. Papa
Papa
(nt.) [see pibati, pānīya etc. of pā] water J i.109 (āpaŋ papaŋ mahodakan ti attho). The word is evidently an etym. construction. See also papā. Papaccati
Papaccati
[Pass. of pa+pacati] to be cooked, to become ripe PvA 55 (˚itvā). Papañca
Papañca
[in its P. meaning uncertain whether identical with Sk. prapañca (pra+pañc to spread out; meaning "expansion, diffuseness, manifoldedness"; cp. papañceti & papañca 3) more likely, as suggested by etym. & meaning of Lat. im -- ped -- iment -- um, connected with pada, thus perhaps originally "pa -- pad -- ya," i. e. what is in front of (i. e. in the way of) the feet (as an obstacle)] 1. obstacle, impediment, a burden which causes delay, hindrance, delay DhA i.18; ii.91 (kathā˚). ˚ŋ karoti to delay, to tarry J iv.145; ˚ŋ akatvā without delay J i.260; vi.392. -- ati˚ too great a delay J i.64; ii.92. -- 2. illusion, obsession, hindrance to spiritual progress M i.65; S i.100; iv.52, 71; A ii.161 sq.; iii.393 sq.; Sn 530 ( = taṇhā -- diṭṭhi -- mānabheda -- p. SnA 431; and generally in Commentaries so resolved, without verbal analysis); Ud 77 (as f. papañcā); Th 1, 519, 902, 989 (cp. Brethren 344, 345 & J.R.A.S. 1906, 246 sq.; Neumann trsls "Sonderheit," see Lieder p. 210, 211 & Mittlere Sammlung i.119 in trsl. of M i.65 nippapañca); Dh 195, 254 (˚âbhiratā pajā, nippapañcā Tathāgatā; =taṇhādisu p˚ esu abhiratā DhA iii.378); J i.9; Pv iv.134 (=taṇh' -- ādi -- p. PvA 230); Nett 37, 38; SnA 495 (gihi). -- nippapañca (q. v.) without obsession. -> 3. diffuseness, copiousness SnA 40.

-- sankhā sign or characteristic of obsession Sn 874 (cp. SnA 553; = taṇhā˚ diṭṭhi˚ and māna˚ Nd1 280), 916 (=avijjādayo kilesā mūlaŋ SnA 562). -- saññā (˚sankhā) idea of obsession, idée fixe, illusion D ii.277 (cp. Dial ii.312); M i.109, 112, 271, 383; S iv.71. -- 413 -- Papañcita
Papañcita
[pp. of papañceti] obsessed, illusioned SnA 495 (a˚ gihipapañ -- cena). -- nt. obsession, vain imagination, illusion S iv.203≈Vbh 390. Papañceti
Papañceti
[Denom. fr. papañca] 1. to have illusions, to imagine, to be obsessed M i.112; DhA i.198 (tesaŋ suvaṇṇa -- lobhena papañcentānaŋ). -- 2. to be profuse. to talk much, to delay on SnA 136. -- pp. papañcita. Papaṭā
Papaṭā
(papatā) (f.) [fr. papāta? Cp. papaṭikā] a broken -- off piece, splinter, fragment; also proclivity, precipice, pit (?) S ii.227 (papatā ti kho lābha -- sakkāra -- silokass' etaŋ adhivacanaŋ; cp. S iii.109: sobbho papāto kodh' ûpāyāsass' etaŋ adhivacanaŋ); So 665 ( = sobbha SnA 479; gloss papada). See also pappaṭaka. Papaṭikā
Papaṭikā
(f.) [cp. Sk. prapāṭikā (lexic. & gram.) young shoot, sprout; and parpharīka (RV.) one who tears to pieces; also Sk. parpaṭa N. of a plant] 1. a splinter, piece, fragment, chip Vin ii.193 (read tato pap.˚); A iv.70 sq. (of ayophāla); J v.333 (same as Vin passage); Miln 179. -- 2. the outer dry bark or crust of a tree, falling off in shreads; also shoots, sprouts M i.78, 192 sq., 488; A i.152; iii.19 sq., 44, 200, 360; iv.99, 336; v.4 sq., 314 sq.; J iii.491. Cp. pheggu. Papatati
Papatati
[pa+patati] to fall forward, to fall down, off or from, to fall into (acc.) Vin ii.284; M i.79, 80; S i.48 (visame magge), 187 ( = Th 1, 1220 patanti); 100, ii.114; v.47; Dh 336; J v.31; Pv i.1012 (nirayaŋ papatiss' ahaŋ, cp. PvA 52; v. l. SS niray' ûpapatiss' âhaŋ). -- aor. papatā Vin iii.17, cp. ii.126; J vi.566. See also patati. Papatana
Papatana
(nt.) [fr. pa+pat] falling down Sn 576 = J iv.127 (abl. papatanā papatanato C.). Papada
Papada
(or Papadā?) [pa+pada] tip of the foot. toes; but in diff. meaning (for papaṭā or papāta to pat) "falling down, abyss, pit" at Sn 665 (gloss for papaṭa; expld at SnA 479 by "mahāniraya"). Papā
Papā
(f.) [Ved. prapā, pa+pā] a place for supplying water, a shed by the roadside to provide travellers with water, a well, cistern D iii.185; S i.33 = Kvu 345 (=pānīyadāna -- sālā SA); S i.100 (read papañ ca vivane); J i.109; DhA iii.349=J i.302 (=pānīya -- cāṭī C.); Vv 5222 (+udapāna); Pv ii.78 (n. pl. papāyo=pānīya -- sālā PvA 102); ii.925 (+udapāna). Papāta
Papāta
[cp. Epic. Sk. prapāta, of pra+pat] 1. falling down, a fall Vin ii.284 (chinna -- papātaŋ papatanti); S v.47. -> 2. a cliff, precipice, steep rock M i.11; S iii.109 (sobbho p. kodh' upāyāsass' etaŋ adhivacanaŋ; cp. papaṭā); A iii.389 (sobbho p.); J iii.5; 530; v.70; vi.306, 309; Vism 116; PvA 174; Sdhp 208, 282, 353. -- adj. falling off steeply, having an abrupt end Vin ii.237 = A iv.198, 200 (samuddo na āyatakena p.).

-- taṭa a rocky or steep declivity DhA i.73. Papātin
Papātin
(adj.) [fr. papatati] falling or flying forward, flying up J iii.484 (uccā˚ flying away). Papitāmaha
Papitāmaha
[pa+pitāmaha] a paternal great -- grandfather Dāvs iii.29. Papīyana
Papīyana
(nt.) [fr. pā, ger. pa -- pīya] drinkable, to be drunk, drinking J i.109 (udakaŋ papīyana -- bhāvena papā ti). Papīliṭa
Papīliṭa
[pa+pīḷita] worn out, rubbed through (of the sole of sandals) J ii.223. Paputta
Paputta
[pa+putta, cp. Sk. praputra (BR.: "doubtful") Inscr.] a grandson J vi.477. Papupphaka
Papupphaka
(adj.) [pa+pupphaka] "with flowers in front," flower -- tipped (of the arrows of Māra) Dh 46 (but expld at DhA i.337 as "p.˚ sankhātāni tebhūmakāni vaṭṭāni," i. e. existence in the 3 stages of being). Pappaṭaka
Pappaṭaka
[etym. uncertain] 1. a broken bit, splinter, small stone (?) (Rh. D. in Dial. iii.83 "outgrowth") D iii.87 (bhūmi ˚ŋ paribhuñjati); Vism 418 (≈), Nett 227 (Com.) (˚ojaŋ khādāpento). -- 2. a water plant: see paṇṇaka 2; cp, also papaṭikā2 & Sk. parpaṭa N. of medicinal plant. Pappoṭheti
Pappoṭheti
[pa+poṭheti; sometimes spelt papphoṭeti] to strike, knock, beat, flap (of wings) Vin i.48; ii.208, 217; M i.333 (papph˚); J ii.153 (pakkhe); iii.175 (papoṭh˚ = sañcuṇṇeti C.); Miln 368 (papph˚); DA i.7; Vism 283 (pph). Pappoti
Pappoti
[the contracted form of pāpuṇāti, Sk. prāpnoti] to obtain, get, gain, receive, attain D iii.159, 165; Sn 185, 187, 584; Dh 27; DhA i.395. -- Pot. 1st pl. pappomu J v.57 ( = pāpuṇeyyāma C.). -- ger. pappuyya S i.48; Sn 482 (or pot?), 593, 829 (=pāpuṇitvā Nd1 170). -- For further ref. see pāpuṇāti. Papphāsa
Papphāsa
(nt.) [fr. sound -- root* phu, not corresponding directly to Sk. pupphusa (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 34), to which it stands in a similar relation as *ghur (P.) to *ghar (Sk.) or phurati>pharati. From same root Gr. fusa/w to blow and Lat. pustula bubble, blister; see Walde under pustula] the lungs D ii.293; M i.185, 421; iii.90; Sn 195 = J i.146; Kh iii. (cp. KhA 56); Miln 26. Pabandha
Pabandha
(adj.) (˚ -- ) [pa+bandha] continuous Vism 32. Pabala
Pabala
(adj.) [cp. Sk. prabala] very strong, mighty Sdhp 75. Pabāḷha
Pabāḷha1
[pp. of pabāhati] pulled out, drawn forth D i.77 (T. reads pavāḷha). See pavāḷha. Pabāḷha
Pabāḷha2
(adj.) [pa+bāḷha] strong, sharp (of pain) D ii.128; J v.422, Miln 174. Pabāhati
Pabāhati
[pa+bṛh to pull, see abbahati] to pull out, draw forth D i.77 (T. reads pavāhati, v. l. pabbāḷhati, evidently fr. pabāḷha); cp. Śatapatha -- brāhmaṇa iv.3, 3, 16. -- pp. pabāḷha1 (q. v.). Pabujjhati
Pabujjhati
[pa+bujjhati] to wake up (intrs.), awake S i.4, 209; Dh 296 sq.; It 41 (suttā p.); J i.61; ii.103; iv.431 (opp. niddāyati); DA i.140. -- pp. pabuddha (q. v.). Pabuddha
Pabuddha
[pp. of pabujjhati] awakened S i.143 (sutta˚ from sleep awakened), J i.50; VvA 65. Pabodhati
Pabodhati
[pa+bodhati] to awake, also trs. awaken, stir up, give rise to (or: to recognise, realise?); only in one phrase (perhaps corrupt), viz. yo nindaŋ appabodhati S i.7 = Dh 143 (=nindaŋ apaharanto bujjhati DhA iii.86; trsl. KS 13 "forestalleth blame"). -> Caus. pabodheti (1) to enlighten, instruct, give a sign J i.142; iii.511. -- (2) to set going, arouse J i.298; v.390. -- (3) to render oneself conspicuous J v.8. Pabodhana
Pabodhana
(adj. -- nt.) [fr. pabodhati] 1. (nt.) awakening waking, arising DhA i.232 (˚codana -- kamma). -- 2. (adj.) arousing (or realising?) Vv 6422 ( = kata -- pīti -- pabodhano VvA 282); awaking Th 1, 893 (samma -- tāḷa˚). Pabba
Pabba
(nt.) [Ved. parvan] 1. a knot (of a stalk), joint, section Vin iv.35; M i.80; J i.245 (veḷu˚); Vism 358 (id.; but nāḷika p. 260); VbhA 63 (id.); Th 1, 243. -- angula˚ finger joint Vin iv.262, M i.187; DA i.285. -- pabba -- pabbaŋ knot for knot DhsA 11. -- 2. the elbow S iv.171. -- 3. section, division, part Vism 240 (14 sections of contemplation of the body or kāyagatāsati); VbhA 275, 286.

-- gaṇṭhi a knot Miln 103. -- valli a species of Dūrvā J v.69; -- vāta intermittent ague Vin i.205. Pabbaja
Pabbaja
[Sk. balbaja, cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 39. 6] a species of reed. bulrush Vin i.190 (T. reads babbaja); S i.77; ii.92; iii.137 (v. l. babbaja), 155 (˚lāyaka); Th 1, 27; J ii.140, 141; v.202; vi.508. For further refs. see babbaja. -- 414 -- Pabbajati
Pabbajati
[cp. Sk. pravrajati, pra+vraj] to go forth, to leave home and wander about as a mendicant, to give up the world, to take up the ascetic life (as bhikkhu, samaṇa, tapassin, isi etc.). S i.140, 141; Sn 157, 1003; imper. pabbaja DhA i.133. Pot. pabbajeyya J i.56; Pug 57. -- Fut. pabbajissati Sn 564; DhA i.133; iv.55. Aor. pabbaji M iii.33; S i.196 = Th 1, 1255; Sn 405; Vv 826; PvA 76; ger. pabbajitvā J i.303; PvA 21 and ˚vāna Sn 407. -- (agārasmā) anagāriyaŋ pabbajati to go forth into the homeless state Vin iii.12; M iii.33; S i.196; A v.204; Pv ii.1316. sāsane p. to become an ascetic in (Buddhas) religion, to embrace the religion (& practice) of the Buddha J i.56; PvA 12. pabbajjaŋ pabbajati to go into the holy life (of an ascetic friar, wanderer etc.): see pabbajjā. -- Caus. pabbājeti (q. v.). -- pp. pabbajita. Pabbajana
Pabbajana
(nt.) [fr. pabbajati] going into an ascetic life J iii.393 (a˚). Pabbajita
Pabbajita
[pp. of pabbajati, cp. BSk. pravrājita Divy 236] one who has gone out from home, one who has given up worldly life & undertaken the life of a bhikkhu recluse or ascetic, (one) ordained (as a Buddhist friar), gone forth (into the holy life or pabbajjā) Vin iii.40 (vuḍḍha -- pabbajito bhikkhu); iv.159; D i.131 (agārasmā anagāriyaŋ p.), 157; iii.31 sq., 147 sq.; M i.200, 267, 345, 459; ii.66, 181; iii.261; S i.119 (dhammavinaye p.); iv.260, 330; v.118 sq., 421; A i.69, 107, 147, 168; ii.78, 143; iii.33, 78 (vuḍḍha˚), 244, 403 (acira˚); iv.21 (cira˚); v.82, 348 sq.; Sn 43 (see Nd2 397), 274, 385, 423; Dh 74, 174, 388; J i.56; Pv ii.81 ( = samaṇa PvA 106); ii.111 (bhikkhu=kāmādimalānaŋ pabbajitattā paramatthato pabbajito PvA 146); ii.1317 (=pabbajjaŋ upagata PvA 167); Miln 11; DA i.270; DhA i.133; PvA 5, 55. Pabbajjā
Pabbajjā
(f.) [fr. pa+vraj, cp. pabbajati, Epic & BSk. pravrajyā] leaving the world, adopting the ascetic life; state of being a Buddhist friar, taking the (yellow) robe, ordination. -- (1) ordination or admission into the Buddha's Order in particular: Vin iii.13; S i.161 etc. -- sāmanera˚ ordination of a Novice, described in full at Vin i.82. -- pabbajjaŋ yācati to beg admission Vin iv.129; labhati to gain admission to the Order Vin i.12, 17, 32; D i.176; S iv.181. -- (2) ascetic or homeless life in general D iii.147 sq.; M iii.33 (abbhokāso p.); S v.350 (id.; read pabbajjā); A v.204 (id.); S ii.128 (read ˚jjā for ˚jā); iv.260; A i.151, 168; iv.274 sq.; Sn 405, 406, 567; It 75 (pabbajjāya ceteti); Miln 19 (dhamma -- cariya -- samacariy' atthā p.); DhA i.6; SnA 49, 327, 423; ThA 251. -- pabbajjaŋ upagata gone into the homeless state PvA 167 (for pabbajita); agārasmā anagāriyaŋ p. the going forth from home into the homeless state Vin ii.253; M ii.56; pabbajjaŋ pabbajati to undertake or go into the ascetic life, in foll. varieties: isi˚ of a Saint or Sage J i.298, 303; DhA iv.55; PvA 162 (of the Buddha); tāpasa˚ of a Hermit J iii.119; DA i.270 (described in detail); DhA iv.29; PvA 21; samaṇa˚ of a Wanderer PvA 76. -> Note. The ceremony of admission to the priesthood is called pabbajjā (or pabbajana), if viewed as the act of the candidate of orders, and pabbājana (q. v.), if viewed as the act of the priest conferring orders; the latter term however does not occur in this meaning in the Canon. Pabbata
Pabbata
[Vedic parvata, fr. parvan, orig. knotty, rugged, massive] (1) a mountain ( -- range), hill, rock S i.101, 102, 127, 137; ii.32, 185, 190; A i.243; ii.140; iv.102 (dhūpāyati); Sn 413, 417, 543, 958, 1014; Nd1 466; Dh 8, 127 (˚ānaŋ vivaro) = PvA 104; Dh 188 (n. pl. ˚āni), 304; DA i.209; Miln 346 (dhamma˚); PvA 221 (angāra˚) Sdhp 352, 545, 574. -- The 7 mountains round Veḷuvana are enumd at J v.38. -- Names of some (real or fictitious) mountains, as found in the Jātaka literature: Cakkavāḷa J vi.282; Caṇḍoraṇa J iv.90; Canda J iv.283; v.38, 162; Daṇḍaka -- hirañña J ii.33; Daddara J ii.8; iii.16; Nemindhara J vi.125; Neru J iii.247; v.425; Paṇḍava Sn 417; SnA 382 sq.; Mahāneru J iv.462; Mahindhara Vv 3210 (cp. VvA 136); Meru J i.25; iv.498; Yugandhara PvA 137; Rajata J i.50; Vipula J vi.518; Sineru S ii.139; J i.48 & passim; Suvaṇṇa J i.50; vi.514 (˚giritāla). -- (2) [cp. Sk. pārvata mountainous] a mountaineer Miln 191.

-- utu the time (aspect) of the mountain (in prognostications as to horoscope) DhA i.165 (megha -- utu, p.-> utu, aruṇa -- utu). -- kaccha a mountain meadow (opp. nadī -- kaccḥa) SnA 33. -- kandara a m. cave S ii.32; v.396, 457 sq.; A v.114 sq.; -- kūṭa m. peak Vin ii.193; J i.73. -- gahaṇa m. thicket or jungle PvA 5. -- ṭṭha standing on a m. Dh 28. -- pāda the foot of a m. J iii.51; DhA iv.187; PvA 10. -- muddhā mountain top Vin i.5. -- raṭṭha m. -- kingdom SnA 26. -- rājā "king of the mountain," Ep. of Himavā S i.116; ii.137 sq., 276; iii.149; v.47, 63, 148; A i.152; iii.240; iv.102; PvA 143. -- sankhepa top of a m. D i.84 ( = p. -- matthaka DA i.226). -- sānu m. -- glen Vv 3210 (cp. VvA 136). -- sikhara mountain -- crest J v.421. Pabbataka
Pabbataka
[fr. pabbata] a mountain J i.303. Pabbateyya
Pabbateyya
(adj.) [fr. pabbata] belonging to mountains, mountain -- born (of a river) A iii.64 (nadī p˚ā sīghasotā hārahārinī); iv.137 (id.); Vism 231 (id.), 285 (nadī). Pabbaniya
Pabbaniya
(adj.) [fr. pabba] forming a division or section, consisting of, belonging to KhA 114 (khaya˚) (?). Pabbājana
Pabbājana
(nt.) [fr. pa+Caus. of vraj, see pabbajati & pabbājeti] keeping out or away, removing, banishment, exiling D i.135; iii.93; Miln 357; Dh i.296 ( = nīharaṇa); DhA iv.145. Pabbājaniya
Pabbājaniya
(adj.) [fr. pabbājana] belonging to banishment, deserving to be exiled Miln 186; also in cpd. ˚kamma excommunication, one of the 5 ecclesiastical acts enumd at Vin i.49, 143. See also A i.79; DhA ii.109. Pabbājita
Pabbājita
[pp. of pabbājeti] taken into the order, made a bhikkhu M ii.62. Pabbājeti
Pabbājeti
[Caus. of pabbajati] 1. to make go out or away, drive out, banish, exile D i.92 (raṭṭhasmā out of the kingdom; = nīharati DA i.258); M ii.122; Dh 388 (attano malaŋ pabbājayaŋ, tasmā pabbajito ti vuccati); DhA iv.145 (explns as "attano rāgādimalaŋ pabbājento vinodento") J i.262 (raṭṭhā); iii.168 (id.); vi.350, 351; DhA ii.41; PvA 54 (core). -- 2. to make go forth (into the homeless state), to make somebody take up the life of an ascetic or a bhikkhu, to take into the (Buddha's) order, to ordain Vin i.82 (description of ordination of a novice), 97; iii.12; iv.129; DhA i.19, 133. -- pp. pabbājita (q. v.). Pabbedha
Pabbedha
[pa+vedha of vyadh, cp. BSk. pravedha in same phrase at Divy 56, viz. ṣoḍaśa -- pravedho] piercing through (measuring) an arrow shot Th 1, 164 -- J ii.334 (soḷasa˚ = soḷasa -- kaṇḍa -- pāta -- vitthāro C.). -- Note. pabbedha owes its bb to analogy with ubbedha. It also corresponds to the latter in meaning: whereas ubbedha refers to the height, pabbedha is applied to the breadth or width. Pabbhamati
Pabbhamati
[pa+bhamati] to roam forth or about J v.106 ( = bhamati C.). Pabbhāra
Pabbhāra
[cp. BSk. prāg -- bhāra Divy 80 etc.] 1. (m.) a decline, incline, slope J i.348; adj. (usually -- ˚) bending, inclining, sloping; fig. tending or leading to (cp. E. "bearing on") M i.493 (samudda˚); S i.110 (id.); v.38, 216, 219; A iv.198 (anupubba˚), 224 (viveka˚); Miln 38 (samādhi˚). Very frequent in combn with similar expressions, e. g. ninna, poṇa (cp. PvA ninnapoṇa -- pabbhāraŋ cittaŋ): see further ref. under ninna; with adhimutta & garuka at Vism 117 (Nibbāna˚). -- apabbhara (sic.) not slanting or sloping J v.405 ( = samatittha C.). -- 2. (m. & nt.) a cave in a mountain Miln 151; J v.440; DhA ii.59 (nt.), 98.

-- ṭṭhāna a slope J i.348; DhsA 261. -- dasaka the decade (period) of decline (in life), which in the enum˚ of the 10 decades (vassadasā) at J iv.397 is given as the seventh. -- 415 -- Pabrūṭi
Pabrūṭi
[pa+brūti] to speak out, proclaim, declare (publicly) Sn 131, 649, 870, 952 and passim (cp. Nd1 211, 273; Nd2 398, 465). Pabha
Pabha
is adj. form ( -- ˚) of pabhā (q. v.). Pabhaŋsana
Pabhaŋsana
(adj. -- nt.) [fr. pa+bhraŋś, cp. nāva -- pra- bhraŋśana Npl. A.V.] causing to fall or disappear, depriving, taking away, theft, in maṇi˚ jewel -- theft J vi.383. (Rh. D. "polishing"?) Kern in Toev. s. v. takes pabhaŋsana as a der. fr. pa+bhrās to shine, i. e. making bright, polishing (as Rh. D.). Pabhagga
Pabhagga
[pp. of pabhañjati, cp. Sk prabhagna] broken up, destroyed, defeated Vin iii.108. Pabhankara
Pabhankara
[pabhaŋ, acc. of pabhā,+kara] one who makes light, one who lights up, light -- bringer (often as Ep. of the Buddha) S i.51 (quoted at VvA 116), 210; A ii.51 sq.; It 80; J iii.128; Sn 991, 1136 ( = ālokakara obhāsakara etc. Nd2 399); Vv 214 (=ñāṇ' obhāsa -- kara VvA 106); 3425 (=lokassa ñāṇ' āloka -- kara VvA 115). Pabhanga
Pabhanga
[fr. pa+bhañj] destruction, breaking up, brittleness Ps ii.238 (calato pabhangato addhuvato); but id. p. at Nd2 214ii and Miln 418 read "calato pabhanguto addhuvato." Pabhangu, Pabhanguṇa & ˚gura
Pabhangu,
Pabhanguṇa & ˚gura (adj.) [fr. pa+bhanj, cp. BSk. prabhanguṇatā destruction, perishableness MVastu iii.338] brittle, easily destroyed, perishable, frail. (a) pabhangu: S iii.32; v.92; A i.254, 257 sq.; iii.16; DhsA 380; Sdhp 51, 553. -- (b) ˚guṇa: It 37; J i.393 (ittarā addhuvā pabhanguno calitā; reading may be pabhanguṇā); Dh 139 (as n.; = pabhangubhāva, pūtibhāva, DhA iii.71), 148 (=pūtikāya ibid. 111). -- (c) ˚gura Dh 148 (v. l.); ThA 95; Sdhp 562, 605. -- See also pabhanga. Pabhañjati
Pabhañjati
[pa+bhañj] to break up, destroy J iv.494. - pp. pabhagga (q. v.). Pabhava
Pabhava
(m. & nt.) [fr. pa+bhu, cp. Ved. prabhava] production, origin, source, cause M i.67; S i.181; ii.12; It 37 (āhāra -- netti˚); Sn 728, 1050; Nd2 under mūla (with syn. of sambhava & samuṭṭhāna etc.); J iii.402 = vi.518. Pabhavati
Pabhavati
see pahoti. Pabhassati
Pabhassati
[pa+bhraŋś; cp. Sk. prabhraśyate] to fall down or off, drop, disappear Vin ii.135 (pret. pabhassittha); iv.159 (id.). -- Cp. pabhaŋsana. Pabhassara
Pabhassara
(adj.) [fr. bhās] shining, very bright, resplendent S i.145; v.92, 283; A i.10, 254, 257 sq., iii.16; Sn 48 ( = parisuddha pariyodāta Nd2 402); J v.202, 170; Vv 171 (rucira+); Pv iii.31 (rucira+); Vism 223; 377; DhA i.28; VvA 12 (pakati˚ bright by nature). Pabhā
Pabhā
(f.) [fr. pa+bhā, cp. Epic Sk. prabhā] light, radiance, shine A ii.139; v.22; It 19, 20; PvA 56 (sarīra˚), 137 (id.), 71, 176; Sdhp 250. -- canda -- ppabhā moonshine It 20; DhsA 14. -- adj. pabha ( -- ˚), radiating, lucid, in cpd. sayam˚ self -- lucid or self -- radiant D i.17 ( = attano attano va tesaŋ pabhā ti DA i.110); A v.60; Sn 404. Pabhāṇin
Pabhāṇin
at Kern, Toev. s. v. is wrongly given with quot. J v.421 (in meaning "speaking") where it should be read manāpa -- bhāṇin, and not manā -- p˚. Pabhāta
Pabhāta
[pp. of pabhāti] become clear or light, shining, dawning Sn 178 (sup˚); esp. in phrase pabhātāya rattiyā when night had become light, i.e. given way to dawn, at daybreak J i.81, 500. -- (nt.) daybreak, morning S i.211; SnA 519 (pabhāte); atipabhāte in broad daylight J i.436. Pabhāti
Pabhāti
[pa+bhā] to shine forth, to become light, gleam, glitter J v.199 (said of a river; = pavattati C.). -- pp. pabhāta. Pabhāva
Pabhāva
[fr. pa+bhū] might, power, strength, majesty, dignity J v.36; vi.449. Pabhāvita
Pabhāvita
[pp. of pabhāveti] increased, furthered, promoted Th 1, 767 (bhava -- netti˚); expld by samuṭṭhita C. Pabhāveti
Pabhāveti
[Caus. of pabhavati] to increase, augment, foster Pv ii.964 = DhA iii.220 (dakkhiṇeyyaŋ). -- pp. pabhāvita. Pabhāsa
Pabhāsa
[fr. pa+bhās] shining, splendour, beauty S i.67; sap˚ with beauty S v.263; Miln 223; ap˚ without beauty Miln 299. Pabhāsati
Pabhāsati
[pa+bhaṣ] to tell, declare, talk Th 1, 582. Pabhāseti
Pabhāseti
[Caus. of pa+bhās] to illumine, pervade with light, enlighten Dh 172 ( = obhāseti DhA iii.169), 382 (=obhāseti ekālokaŋ karoti DhA iv.137); J i.87; Pv i.109 (so read for ca bh˚); ii.112; Ps i.174; Miln 336; PvA 10 (=obhāseti). Pabhindati
Pabhindati
[pa+bhindati] to split asunder (trs.), break, destroy Sn 973 ( = bhindati sambhindati Nd1 503); ger. pabhijja S i.193=Th 1, 1242. -- Pass. pabhijjati to be broken, to burst (open), to split asunder (intrs.), to open S i.150 (aor. pabhijjiŋsu); Sn p. 125 (id.); Vv 413 (break forth=pabhedaŋ gacchanti VvA 183; gloss pavajjare for pabhijjare); SnA 475 (=bhijjati). Also "to open, to be developed" (like a flower) Miln 93 (buddhi p.). -- pp. pabhinna . Pabhinna
Pabhinna
[pp. of pabhindati] 1. to burst open, broken (like a flower or fruit), flowing with juice; usually appld to an elephant in rut, mad, furious M i.236 (hatthi˚); Dh 326 (hatthi˚ = mattahatthi DhA iv.24)= Th 1, 77; J iv.494; vi.488; Pv i.112 (read chinnapabhinna -- gatta); Miln 261, 312 (hatthināgaŋ tidhāpabhinnaŋ); DA i.37 (˚madaŋ caṇḍa -- hatthiŋ). -- 2. developed, growing Miln 90 (˚buddhi). Pabhuti
Pabhuti
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [Vedic prabhṛti] beginning, in meaning of: since, after, subsequently; tato p. from that time, henceforth VvA 158. Pabhutika
Pabhutika
(adj.) [fr. pabhuti] dating from, derived or coming from (abl.) D i.94 (kuto p.). Pabhu
Pabhu
[fr. pa+bhū] iord, master, ruler, owner DA i.250. Pabheda
Pabheda
[fr. pa+bhid, cp. pabhindati] breaking or splitting up, breaking, opening VvA 183; akkhara˚ breaking up of letters, word -- analysis, phonology D i.88 ( = sikkhā ca nirutti ca DA i.247=SnA 447). -- adj. ( -- ˚) breaking up into, i. e. consisting of, comprising, of various kinds J i.84; PvA 8 (paṭisandhi -- ādi˚), 130 (saviññāṇak' âviññāṇaka˚). Pabhedana
Pabhedana
(nt.) [cp. pabheda] breaking up, destruction Sn 1105 (avijjāya˚ = bhedanaŋ pahānaŋ etc. Nd2 403). Pabhoti
Pabhoti
etc. see pahoti. Pamajjati
Pamajjati1
[pa+mad] 1. to become intoxicated S i.73. -- 2. to be careless, slothful, negligent; to neglect, waste one's time S iv.125, 133; Sn 676, 925, 933; cp. Nd1 376 & Nd2 70; Dh 168, 172, 259; J iii.264 (with acc.); iv.396 (with gen.); Pv i.1112 (dāne na p.); iv.13 (jāgaratha mā p.); Sdhp 16, 620. -- aor. 2 pl. pamādattha M i.46; A iii.87; iv.139. Other noteworthy forms are aor. or precative (mā) pamādo S iv.263; Th 1, 119; Dh 371 (see Geiger P.Gr. § 161 b), and cond. or aor. pamādassaŋ M iii.179; A i.139 (see Geiger l. c. 170 & Trenckner Notes 752). -- appamajjanto (ppr.) diligent, eager, zealous PvA 7. -- pp. pamatta (q. v.). -- 416 -- Pamajjati
Pamajjati2
[pa+mṛj] 1. to wipe off, rub off, sweep, scour Vin i.47; ii.209 (bhūmi˚ itabbā); M i.383. -- 2. to rub along, stroke, grope, feel along (with one's hands) Vin ii.209 (cīvara -- rajjuŋ ˚itvā; cp. Vin. Texts iii.279). ->

Note. pamajjamāna in phrase gale pi p˚ ānena at Nett 164 is after the example of similar passages M i.108 and A iv.32 and as indicated by v. l. preferably to be read as "api panujjamānena pi" (see panudati). Pamajjanā
Pamajjanā
(f.) & ˚itatta (nt.) are abstr. formations fr. pa+mad, in the sense of pamāda carelessness etc., & occur as philological synonyms in exegesis of pamāda at Vbh 350 = Nd1 423; Nd2 405. Also at DhA i.228 (˚bhāva=pamāda). Pamaññā
Pamaññā
(f.) [abstr. fr. pamāṇa, for *pamānyā, grd. form. of pa+mā for the usual pameyya] only neg. ap˚ immeasurableness Vbh 272 sq. (catasso appamaññāyo, viz. mettā, karuṇā, muditā, upekhā). See appamaññā. Pamaṭṭa
Pamaṭṭa
in cpd. luñcita -- pamaṭṭā kapotī viya (simile for a woman who has lost all her hair) at PvA 47 is doubtful, it should probably be read as luñcita -- pakkhikā k. viya i. e. like a pigeon whose feathers have been pulled out (v. l. ˚patthaka). Pamatta
Pamatta
[pp. of pamajjati] slothful, indolent, indifferent, careless, negligent D iii.190; S i.61 = 204; A i.11, 139; iv.319; v.146; Sn 57, 70, 329 sq., 399, 1121; Dh 19, 21, 29, 292, 309 (=sati -- vossaggena samannāgata DhA iii.482), 371; Nd2 404; PvA 276 (quot. ˚ŋ ativattati). appamatta diligent, careful, eager, mindful S i.4, 140, 157; A v.148; Th 1, 1245; Pv iv.138; PvA 66 (dānaŋ detha etc.), 219, 278. See also appamatta2.

-- cārin acting carelessly Dh 334 ( = sati -- vossagga -- lakkhaṇena pamādena p. -- c. DhA iv.43). -- bandhu friend of the careless (Ep. of Māra) S i.123, 128; Sn 430; Nd2 507. Pamattaka
Pamattaka
(adj.) = pamatta, only in neg. form ap˚ careful, mindful PvA 201. Pamathita
Pamathita
[pp. of pa+mathati to crush] crushed, only in cpd. sam˚ (q. v.). Pamadā
Pamadā
(f.) [Classical Sk. pramadā, fr. pra+mad, cp. pamāda] a young (wanton) woman, a woman Sn 156, 157 (gloss for pamāda cp. SnA 203); J iii.442 (marapamadānaŋ issaro; v. l. samuddā), 530 (v. l. pamuda, pamoda). Pamaddati
Pamaddati
[pa+mṛd] to crush down, destroy, overcome, defeat; pp. pamaddita J vi.189 (mālutena p. corresponding with vāta -- pahaṭa). Pamaddana
Pamaddana
(adj. nt.) [fr. pamaddati] crushing, defeating, overcoming D i.89 (˚parasena˚); Sn p. 106 (id. = maddituŋ samattho SnA 450); Sn 561 (Mārasena˚); DA i.250. Pamaddin
Pamaddin
(adj.) [fr. pa+mṛd] crushing, able to crush, powerful, mighty J iv.26 ( = maddana -- samattha C.). Pamāṇa
Pamāṇa
(nt.) [of pa+mā, Vedic pramāṇa] 1. measure, size, amount S ii.235; A i.88; iii.52, 356 sq.; v.140 sq.; Miln 285 (cp. trsl. ii.133, n. 2); SnA 137; VvA 16; PvA 55 (ghaṭa˚), 70 (ekahattha˚), 99 (tālakkhandha˚), 268 (sīla˚). -- 2. measure of time, compass, length, duration PvA 136 (jīvitaŋ paricchinna ˚ŋ); esp. in cpd. āyu˚ age S i.151; A i.213; ii.126 sq. and passim (cp. āyu). -- 3. age (often by Com. taken as "worldly characteristic," see below rūpa˚ and cp. Nd2 406 on Sn 1076); DhA i.38. -- 4. limit PvA 123, 130 (dhanassa). -- 5. (appld meaning) standard, definition, description, dimension S iv.158≈Sn 1076 (perhaps ("age"). pamāṇaŋ karoti set an example DhA iii.300 (maŋ p. katvā). -- adj. ( -- ˚) of characteristic, of the character of, measuring or measured by, taking the standard of, only in cpd. rūpa˚ measuring by (appearance or) form, or held in the sphere of form (defined or Pug A 229 as "rūpa -- ppamāṇ' ādisu sampattiyuttaŋ rūpaŋ pamāṇaŋ karotī ti") A ii.71 = Pug 53; Nd2 406. -- appamāṇa without a measure, unlimited, immeasurable, incomparable D i.31; ii.12 (+uḷāra); M iii.145 (ceto -- vimutti); A i.183, 192; ii.73; iii.52; v.299 sq., 344 sq.; Sn 507; PvA 110 (=atula). See also appamāṇa.

-- kata taken as standard, set as example, being the measure, in phrase p. -- kataŋ kammaŋ D i.251; S iv.322. Pamāṇavant
Pamāṇavant
(adj. n.) [fr. pamāṇa] having a measure, finite; or: to be described, able to be defined Vin ii.110; A ii.73. Pamāṇika
Pamāṇika
(adj. n.) [fr. pamāṇa] 1. forming or taking a measure or standard, measuring by ( -- ˚) DhA iii.113 (rūpa˚ etc., see A ii.71); (n.) one who measures, a critic, judge A iii.349 sq.; v.140; Sdhp 441 (as pamāṇaka). -- 2. according to measure, by measure Vin iii.149; iv.279. Pamāda
Pamāda
[cp. Vedic pramāda, pa+mad] carelessness, negli- gence, indolence, remissness D i.6 (jūta˚, see DA i.85); iii.42 sq., 236; M i.151; S i.18, 20, 25, 146, 216; ii.43, 193; iv.78, 263; v.170, 397; A i.212 (surāmerayamajja˚) = S ii.69; A i.16 sq.; ii.40; iii.6, 421, 449; iv.195, 294, 350; v.310, 361; Sn 156, 157 (gloss pamadā, cp. SnA 203), 334, 942, 1033; Dh 21, 30 sq., 167 (= satiossagga -- lakkhaṇa p. DhA iii.163), 241, 371; Th 1, 1245=S i.193; It 86; Nd1 423=Nd2 405; Ps ii.8 sq., 169 sq., 197; Pug 11, 12; Nett 13, 41; Miln 289 (māna atimāna mada+); SnA 339 (=sati -- vippavāsa); DhA i.228; PvA 16 (pamādena out of carelessness); Sdhp 600. -- appamāda earnestness, vigilance, zeal D iii.236; S i.158; ii.29; Dh 21.

-- pāṭha careless reading (in the text) Nett Ṭ. (see introd. xi. n. 1); KhA 207; PvA 25. Pamādavatā
Pamādavatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. pamāda+vant, adj.] remissness A i.139. Pamādin
Pamādin
(adj.) [fr. pamāda] infatuating, exciting, in phrase citta˚ Th 2, 357 (trsln "leading to ferment of the mind"; vv. ll. ˚pamaddin & ˚pamāthin, thus "crushing the heart," cp. ThA 243). Pamāya
Pamāya1
[ger. of pamināti i. e. pa+mā] having measured, measuring Sn 894 (sayaŋ p. = paminitvā Nd1 303); J iii.114. Pamāya
Pamāya2
[ger. of pamināti i. e. pa+mṛ, Sk. pramārya of pramṛṇāti] crushing, destroying Sn 209 (bījaŋ; = hiŋsitva vadhitvā SnA 257). See on this passage Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 45. Pamāyin
Pamāyin
(adj.) [fr. pa+mā] measuring, estimating, defining S i.148 (appameyyaŋ p. "who to th' illimitable limit lays" trsl.; corresponds with paminanto). Pamāreti
Pamāreti
[pa+māreti, Caus. of mṛ, marati to die] to strike dead, maltreat, hurt DhA iii.172. Pamināti
Pamināti
[pa+mināti to mā with pres. formation fr. mi, after Sk. minoti; see also anumināti] to measure, estimate, define A iii.349, 351; v.140, 143; Sdhp 537. -- ppr. paminanto S i.148; inf. paminituŋ VvA 154; ger. paminitvā Nd1 303, and pamāya (q. v.); grd. paminitabba VvA 278; aor. 3rd sg. pāmesi J v.299, 3rd pl. pamiŋsu A ii.71; Th 1, 469 (pāmiŋsu). -- 417 -- Pamilāta
Pamilāta
[pp. of pa+mlā] faded, withered, languished Miln 303. Pamukha
Pamukha1
(adj.) [pa+mukha, cp. late Sk. pramukha] lit. "in front of the face," fore -- part, first, foremost, chief, prominent S i.234, 235; Sn 791 (v. l. BB and Nd1 92 for pamuñca); J v.5, 169. loc. pamukhe as adv. or prep. "before" S i.227 (asurindassa p.; v. l. sammukhe); Vism 120. As -- ˚ having as chief, headed by, with NN at the head D ii.97; S i.79 (Pasenadi˚ rājāno); PvA 74 (setacchatta˚ rājakakudhabhaṇḍa); freq. in phrase Buddha˚ bhikkhusangha, e. g. Vin i.213; Sn p. 111; PvA 19, 20. Cp. pāmokkha. Pamukha
Pamukha2
(nt.) [identical with pamukha1, lit. "in front of the face," i. e. frontside, front] 1. eyebrow (?) only in phrase alāra˚ with thick eyebrows or lashes J vi.503 (but expld by C. as "visāl' akkhigaṇḍa); PvA 189 (for aḷāra -- pamha Pv iii.35). Perhaps we should read pakhuma instead. Pamuccati
Pamuccati
Pass. of pamuñcati (q. v.). Pamucchita
Pamucchita
[pa+mucchita] 1. swooning, in a faint, fainting (with hunger) Pv iii.18 ( = khuppipāsādidukkhena sañjāta -- mucchā PvA 174); iv.108. -- 2. infatuated S i.187 (v. l.; T. samucchita)=Th 1, 1219; J iii.441. Pamuñca
Pamuñca
[fr. pa+muc] loosening, setting free or loose, in cpd. ˚kara deliverer S i.193 = Th 1, 1242 (bandhana˚). -- adj. dup˚ difficult to be freed S i.77;Sn 773; Dh 346; J ii.140. Pamuñcati
Pamuñcati
[pa+muñcati of muc] 1. to let loose, give out, emit Sn 973 (vācaŋ; = sampamuñcati Nd1 504); J i.216 (aggiŋ). -- 2. to shake off, give up, shed Dh 377 (pupphāni). Perhaps also in phrase saddhaŋ p. to renounce one's faith, although the interpretation is doubtful (see Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 46 sq. & cp. Dial. ii.33) Vin i.7=D ii.39=S i.138 (C. vissajjati, as quoted KS p. 174). -- 3. to deliver, free Sn 1063 (kathan kathāhi=mocehi uddhara etc. Nd2 407a), 1146 (pamuñcassu=okappehi etc. Nd2 407b). -- Pass. pamuccati to be delivered or freed S i.24, 173; Sn 80, 170 sq. (dukkhā); Dh 189 (sabbadukkhā), 276 (fut. pamokkhati), 291 (dukkhā), 361. -- pp. pamutta (q. v.). -- Caus. pamoceti to remove, liberate, deliver, set free S i.143, 154, 210; Th 2, 157 (dukkhā); Cp. ii.75; iii.103 sq. Caus. II. pamuñcāpeti to cause to get loose DA i.138. Pamuṭṭha
Pamuṭṭha
[pp. of pamussati] being or having forgotten Vin i.213; Ps i.173 (a˚); J iii.511 (T. spells pamm˚); iv.307 (id.); Miln 77. Cp. parimuṭṭha. Pamutta
Pamutta
[pp. of pamuñcati] 1. let loose, hurled J vi.360 (papātasmiŋ). -- 2. liberated, set free S i.154; Sn 465, 524 sq. Pamutti
Pamutti
(f.) [fr. pa+muc] setting free, release S i.209; Th 2, 248; J iv.478; Nett 131 ( = S i.209; but read pamutty atthi); PvA 103 (dukkhato). Pamudita
Pamudita
(& ˚modita) [pp. of pamodati] greatly delighted, very pleased M i.37; S i.64; A iii.21 sq.; Sn 512; J iii.55; DA i.217, ThA 71; PvA 77, 132. -- Spelt pamodita at Sn 681, J i.75; v.45 (āmodita+). Pamuyhati
Pamuyhati
[pa+muyhati of muh] to become bewildered or infatuated J vi.73. -- pp. pamūḷha (q. v.). Pamussati
Pamussati
[pa+mṛṣ, Sk. mṛṣyati = P. *mussati] to forget J iii.132, 264 (pamajjati+); iv.147, 251. -- pamuṭṭha (q. v.). Pamūḷha
Pamūḷha
[pp. of pamuyhati] bewildered, infatuated Sn 774; Nd1 36 ( = sammūḷha), 193 (+sammūḷha). Pameyya
Pameyya
( -- ˚) (adj.) [grd. of pamināti, like Epic Sk. pra- meya] to be measured, measurable, only in foll. cpd. appameyya not to be measured, illimitable, unfathomable S i.148; v.400; M iii.71, 127; A i.266; Vv 3419 ( = paminituŋ asakkhuṇeyya VvA 154); 377 (expld as before at VvA 169); duppameyya hard to be gauged or measured A i.266; Pug 35; opp. suppameyya ibid. Pamokkha
Pamokkha
[fr. pa+muc, see pamuñcati] 1. discharging, launching, letting loose, gushing out; in phrases itivāda˚ pouring out gossip M i.133; S v.73; A ii.26; DA i.21; and caravāda˚ id. S iii.12; v.419. -- 2. release, deliverance S i.2; PvA 103 (pamutti+); abl. pamokkhā for the release of, i. e. instead of (gen.) J v.30 (pituno p. = pamokkha -- hetu C.). Pamocana
Pamocana
(adj. n.) [fr. pa+muc] loosening, setting free; deliverance, emancipation S i.172 = Sn 78; A ii.24, 37, 49 sq.; Sn 166 (maccupāsā, abl.=from), 1064 (pamocanāya dat.=pamocetuŋ Nd2); It 104 (Nibbānaŋ sabbagantha ˚ŋ). At Dh 274 we should read pamohanaŋ for pamocanaŋ. Pamoceti
Pamoceti
Caus. of pamuñcati (q. v.). Pamoda
Pamoda
[fr. pa+mud, cp. Vedic pramoda] joy, delight Sdhp 528, 563. See also pāmojja. Pamodati
Pamodati
[pa+mud] to rejoice, enjoy, to be delighted, to be glad or satisfied S i.182; A iii.34 (so read for ca modati); Dh 16, 22; Pv i.113, 115; VvA 278 ( = āmodati). -- Caus. pamodeti id. Sdhp 248. -- pp. pamudita (& pamodita) (q. v.). Cp. abhippamodati. Pamodanā
Pamodanā
(f.) [fr. pa+mud] delight, joy, satisfaction Dhs 9, 86, 285 (āmodanā+). Pamoha
Pamoha
[pa+muh, cp. Epic Sk. pramoha] bewilderment, infatuation, fascination Sn 841 (v. l. Nd1 sammoha); Nd1 193 (+sammoha andhakāra); J vi.358; J vi.358; Pug 21; Dhs 390, 1061. Pamohana
Pamohana
[fr. pa+muh] deceiving, deception, delusion Dh 274 (T. reads pamocana; DhA iii.403 expls by vañcana). Pampaka
Pampaka
[etym? Cp. Sk. pampā N. of a river (or lake), but cp. ref. in BR. under pampā varaṇ -- ādi] a loris (Abhp. 618) i. e. an ape; but probably meant for a kind of bird (cp. Kern, Toev. s. v.) J vi.538 (C. reads pampuka & expls by pampaṭaka). Pamha
Pamha
(nt.) [the syncope form of pakhuma = Sk. pakṣman used in poetry and always expld in C. by pakhuma] eye -- lash, usually in cpd. aḷāra˚ having thick eyelashes, e. g. at J v.215; Vv 357; 6411; Pv iii.35; asāyata˚ at Th 2, 383. Pamhayati
Pamhayati
[pa+smi, Sk. prasmayate] to laugh; Caus. pamhāpeti to make somebody laugh J v.297 ( = parihaseti C.), where it is syn. with the preceding umhāpeti. Paya
Paya
(nt.) [Ved. payas, nt, of pī] milk, juice J i.204; vi.572. Payacchati
Payacchati
[pa+yacchati of yam] to offer, present, give Dpvs xi.28; Pgdp 63, 72, 77 sq. -- pp. payata (q. v.). Payata
Payata
[pp. of payacchati] restrained, composed, purified, pure D i.103 ( = abhiharitvā dinna); A iii.313; Th 1, 348, 359 (˚atta); It 101 (˚pāṇin)=Miln 215; Sn 240 (=sakkāra -- karaṇena p. alankata SnA 284); Vism 224 (˚pāṇin= parisuddha -- hattha); Sdhp 100. -- 418 -- Payatana
Payatana
(nt.) [cp. Sk. prayatna, of yat] striving after, effort, endeavour KhA 108. Payatta
Payatta
[pp. of pa+yat] making effort, taking care, being on one's guard, careful Miln 373. Payāta
Payāta
[pp. of payāti] gone forth, set out, proceeded Pv iv.56 ( = gantuŋ āraddha PvA 260); J iii.188, 190. Strange is "evaŋ nānappayātamhi" at Th 1, 945 (Mrs. Rh. D. "thus when so much is fallen away"; Neumann "in solcher Drangsal, solcher Not"). -- duppayāta going or gone wrong, strayed Vv 849 (=duṭṭhu payātha apathe gata VvA 337). Payāti
Payāti
[pa+yā] to go forward, set out, proceed, step out, advance, only aor pāyāsi J i.146, 223, 255; 3rd pl. pāyiŋsu J i.253 and pāyesuŋ J iv.220. -- pp. payāta, (q. v.). See also pāyāti. Payirudāharati
Payirudāharati
[pari+ud+āharati with metathesis payir˚ for pariy˚] to speak out, to proclaim aor payirudāhāsi D ii.222 (vaṇṇe); J i.454 (vyañjanaŋ). Payirupāsati
Payirupāsati
[pari+upa+ās, with metathesis as in payi- rudāharati] 1. "to sit close round," i. e. to attend on (acc.), to honour, pay homage, worship D i.47; ii.257; M ii.117, S i.146; A i.124, 126, 142; iv.337; Dh 64, 65; Th 1, 1236; J vi.222 (imper. ˚upāsaya); Pv ii.961; Pug 26, 33; SnA 401; VbhA 457 (here defd by Bdhgh as "punappunaŋ upasankamati"). -- ppr. ˚upāsanto S v.67 = It 107; PvA 44; and upāsamāna DhA ii.32. -- aor. ˚upāsiŋ A iv.213 (Bhagavantaŋ); PvA 50. -> ger. ˚upāsiya D ii.287. -- 2. to visit Vin i.214 (ger. ˚upāsitvā); iv.98. -- pp. payirupāsiṭa (q. v.). Payirupāsana
Payirupāsana
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. payirupāsati] attending to, worshipping: worship, homage M ii.176; S v.67 = It 107; DA i.142; PvA 138. Payirupāsika
Payirupāsika
[fr. payirupāsati] a worshipper ThA 200. Payirupāsita
Payirupāsita
[pp. of payirupāsati] worshipped PvA 116 ( = upaṭṭhita), 205 (= purakkhata). Payuñjati
Payuñjati
[pa+yuj] to harness, yoke, employ, apply; Pass. payujjati to be applied to Sdhp 400 (ppr. ˚māna). -- pp. payutta (q. v.). -- Caus. payojeti (q. v.). Payuta
Payuta
[pp. of pa+yu, cp. Sk. pra+yuta united, fastened to, increased] (wrongly) applied, at random, careless: "misdirected" A i.199; Sn 711 (˚ŋ vācaŋ = obhāsaparikathā -- nimitta -- viññatti -- payuttaŋ ghāsesana -- vācaŋ SnA 497), 930 (=cīvarādīhi sampayutta tadatthaŋ vā payojita SnA 565; Nd1 389 however reads payutta and expls as "cīvarapayutta" etc.). Payutta
Payutta
[pp. of payuñjati] 1. yoked Sn p. 13 ( = yottehi yojita SnA 137). -- 2. applied, intent on, devoted to, busy in (acc., loc., or -- ˚) J v.121 (ajjhattaŋ); Pv iii.710 (sāsane); SnA 497 (viññatti˚). -- 3. applicable (either rightly or wrongly); as su˚ well -- behaved, acting well Miln 328; by itself (in bad sense), wrongly applied, wasted (cp. payuta) A ii.81 sq.; Sn 930 (see Nd1 389). -- 4. planned, schemed, undertaken Vin ii.194 (Deva dattena Bhagavato vadho p.). Payuttaka
Payuttaka
(adj. n.) [payutta+ka] one who is applied or put to a (bad) task, as spy, hireling; bribed J i.262 (˚cora), 291 (˚dhutta). Payoga
Payoga
[Vedic prayoga, fr. pa+yuj, see payuñjati] 1. means, instrument J vi.116 ( = karaṇa); SnA 7; DhsA 215 (sa˚). -- 2. preparation, undertaking, occupation, exercise, business, action, practice Vin iv.278; Ps ii.213 (sammā˚); Miln 328 (sammā˚); KhA 23, 29 sq.; PvA 8 (vapana˚), 96 (manta˚), 103, 146 (viññatti˚; cp. payutta 2), 285 (sakkhara -- kkhipana˚). payogaŋ karoti to exert oneself, to undertake, to try PvA 184 (=parakkamati).

-- karaṇa exertion, pursuit, occupation DhA iii.238 -- vipatti failure of means, wrong application PvA 117, 136. -- sampatti success of means VvA 30, 32. -- suddhi excellency of means, purity in application DhsA 165; VvA 60. -- hīna deficient in exertion or application Miln 288. Payogatā
Payogatā
(f.) [fr. payoga] application (to) Vism 134 (majjhatta˚). Payojana
Payojana
(nt.) [fr. pa+yuj] 1. undertaking, business PvA 201. -- 2. appointment J i.143. -- 3. prescript, injunction DhsA 403. -- 4. purpose, application, use Sdhp 395. Payojita
Payojita
[pp. of payojeti] 1 connected with, directed to, applied SnA 565. -- 2. instigated, directed Miln 3. Payojeti
Payojeti
[Caus. of payuñjati] 1. to undertake, engage in, begin D i.71 (kammante "set a business on foot"); A ii.82 (kammantaŋ); Sn 404 (vaṇijjaŋ); J i.61; PvA 130 (kammaŋ). -- 2. to prepare, apply, use, put to, employ PvA 46 (bhesajjaŋ cuṇṇena saddhiŋ). -> 3. to engage, take into service, set to, hire J i.173; ii.417. -- 4. to engage with, come to close quarters J. ii.10. -- 5. to put out at interest (vaḍḍhiyā) DA i.270. -- pp. payojita (q. v.). Payyaka
Payyaka
[pa+ayyaka] (paternal) great -- grandfather J i.2 (ayyaka˚); PvA 107 (id.). Para
Para
(adv. -- adj.) [fr. Idg. *per, *peri (cp. pari); Ved. para, parā, paraŋ; Lat. per through, Gr. pe/ra & pe/ran beyond; see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under per & also pari, pubba, pura, purāṇa] 1. (adv. & prep.) beyond, on the further side of (with abl. or loc.), over PvA 168 (para Gangāya, v. l. ˚āyaŋ). See in same meaning & application paraŋ, paro and parā & cp. cpds. like paraloka. -- 2. (adj.) para follows the pron. declension; cases: sg. nom. paro Sn 879, acc. paraŋ Sn 132, 185, gen. dat. parassa Sn 634; Pv ii.919, instr. parena PvA 116, loc. paramhi Sn 634, and pare Pv ii.943; pl. nom. pare Dh 6, acc. pare Dh 257; PvA 15, gen. dat. paresaŋ D i.3; Th 1, 743; J i.256; Sn 818, instr. parehi Sn 240, 255; PvA 17. -- Meanings: (a) beyond, i. e. "higher" in space (like Ved. para as opp. to avara lower), as well as "further" in time (i. e. future, to come, or also remote, past: see loc. pare under c.), freq. in phrase paro loko the world beyond, the world (i. e. life) to come, the beyond or future life (opp. ayaŋ loko) Sn 185 (asmā lokā paraŋ lokaŋ na socati), 634 (asmiŋ loke paramhi ca); Dh 168 (paramhi loke); Pv ii.83 (id. = paraloke PvA 107); but also in other combn, like santi -- para (adj.) higher than calm Dh 202. Cp. paraloka, paraŋ and paro. -- (b) another, other, adj. as well as n., pl. others Sn 396 (parassa dāraŋ nâtikkameyya), 818 (paresaŋ, cp. Nd1 150); Dh 160 (ko paro who else), 257 (pare others); Pv ii.919 (parassa dānaŋ); ii.943 (pare, loc.= paramhi parassa PvA 130); DhA iv.182 (gen. pl.); PvA 15, 60 (paresaŋ dat.), 103, 116, 253 (parassa purisassa & paraŋ purisaŋ). Often contrasted with and opposed to attano (one's own, oneself), e. g. at M i.200 (paraŋ vambheti attānaŋ ukkaŋseti); Sn 132 (attānaŋ samukkaŋse paraŋ avajānāti); J i.256 (paresaŋ, opp. attanā); Nd2 26 (att -- attha opp. par -- attha, see cpds. ˚ajjhāsaya & ˚attha). -- paro . . . paro "the one . . . the other" D i.224 (kiŋ hi paro parassa karissati); paro paraŋ one another Sn 148 (paro paraŋ nikubbetha). -> In a special sense we find pare pl. in the meaning of "the others," i. e. outsiders, aliens (to the religion of the Buddha), enemies, opponents (like Vedic pare) D i.2 (=paṭiviruddhā sattā DA i.51); Vin i.349; Dh 6. -- (c) some oblique cases in special meaning and used as adv.: paraŋ acc. sg. m. see under cpds., like parantapa; as nt. adv. see sep. In phrase puna ca paraŋ would be better read puna c' aparaŋ (see apara). -- parena (instr.) later on, afterwards J iii.395 (=aparena samayena C.). -- pare (loc.); cp. Gr. parai/ at; Lat. prae before; Goth. faúra= E, for, old dat. of *per) in the past, before, yet earlier J ii.279 (where it continues ajja and hiyyo, i. e. to -- day and yesterday, and refers to the day before yesterday. Similarly at Vin iv.63 pare is contrasted with ajja & hiyyo and may mean "in future," or "the day before yesterday." It is of interest to notice the Ved. use of pare as "in the future" opp. to adya & śvas); J iii.423 (the day before yesterday). At DhA i.253 (sve vā pare vā) and iv.170 in the sense of "on the day after tomorrow." -- parā (only apparently abl., in reality either para+a˚ which represents the vocalic beginning of the second part of the cpd., or para+ā which is the directional prefix ā, emphasizing para. The latter expln is more in the spirit of the Pali language): see separately. -- paro (old abl. as adv.=Sk. paras) beyond further: see sep. -- parato (abl.) in a variety of expressions and shades of meaning, viz. (1) from another, as regards others A iii.337 (attano parato ca); Nett 8 (ghosa), 50 (id.). -- (2) from the point of view of "otherness," i. e. as strange or something alien, as an enemy M i.435 (in "anicca" -- passage); A iv.423; Nd2 214ii; Ps ii.238; Kvu 400; Miln 418 and passim; in phrase parato disvā "seen as not myself" Th 1, 1160; 2, 101; S i.188 (sankhāre parato passa, dukkhato mā ca attato). -> (3) on the other side of, away from, beyond J ii.128; PvA 24 (kuḍḍānaŋ). -- (4) further, afterwards, later on S i.34; J i.255; iv.139; SnA 119, 482. -- Note. The compounds with para˚ are combinations either with para 1 (adv. prep.), or para 2 (adj. n.). Those containing para in form parā and in meaning "further on to" see separately under parā˚. See also pāra, pārima etc.

-- ajjhāsaya intent on others (opp. att˚) SnA 46. -- attha (parattha, to be distinguished from adv. parattha, q. v. sep.) the profit or welfare of another (opp. attattha) S ii.29; A iii.63; Dh 166; Nd2 26. -- âdhīna dependent on others D i.72 ( = paresu adhīno parass' eva ruciyā pavattati DA i.212); J vi.99; ThA 15 (˚vuttika); VvA 23 (˚vutti, paresaŋ bhāraŋ vahanto). -- ûpakkama aggression of an enemy, violence Vin ii.194. -- ûpaghāta injuring others, cruelty Vv 8440. -- ûpaghātin killing others Dh 184 (=paraŋ upahananto p. DhA iii.237). -- ûpavāda reproaching others Sn 389. -- kata see parankata. -- kamma service of others, ˚kārin serving others Vv 3322. -- kāra see below under parankāra. -- kula clan of another, strange or alien clan Sn 128; Dh 73. -- kkanta [para˚ or parā˚ *krānta?] walked (by another? or gone over?) J vi.559 (better to be read with v. l. on p. 560 as pada˚ i. e. walked by feet, footprint). -- kkama (parā+kram] exertion, endeavour, effort, strife D i.53; iii.113; S i.166 (daḷha˚); ii.28 (purisa˚); v.66, 104 sq.; A i.4, 50 (purisa˚); iv.190; Sn 293; Dh 313; Nd1 487; J i.256; ii.153; Dhs 13, 12, 289, 571; Miln 244; DhA iv.139; Sdhp 253; adj. ( -- ˚) sacca˚ one who strives after the truth J iv.383. -- kkamati [*parakramati] to advance, go forward, exert oneself, undertake, show courage Sn 966 (ger. parakkamma); Dh 383 (id.); Pv iii.213 (imper. parakkāma, v. l. parakkama); Pug 19, 23; PvA 184 (=payogaŋ karoti); Sdhp 439. -- kkaroti [either for parā+kṛ or more likely paras+kṛ, cp. paro] lit. "to put on the opposite side," i. e. to remove, do away with J iv.26 (corresponding to apaneti, C. explns as "parato kāreti," taking parato in the sense of para 2 c 3), 404 (mā parākari=mā pariccaji C.). -- gatta alien body, trsl. "limbs that are not thou" Th 1, 1150. -- gavacaṇḍa violent against the cows of another A ii.109=Pug 47 (opp. sakagavacaṇḍa, cp. PugA 226: yo attano gogaṇaŋ ghaṭṭeti, paragogaṇe pana so rato sukhasīlo hoti etc.). -- (n)kata made by something or somebody else, extra -- self, extraneous, alien S i.134 (nayidaŋ attakataŋ bimbaŋ nayidaŋ parakataŋ aghaŋ); with ref. to loka & dukkha and opposed to sayankata D iii.137 sq.; S ii.19 sq., 33 sq., 38 sq.; Ud 69 sq. -- (n)kāra condition of otherness, other people, alienity Ud 70 (opp. ahankara selfhood). -- citta the mind or heart of others A v.160. -- jana a stranger, enemy, demon, fig. devil (cp. Sk. itarajana) M i.153, 210. -- tthaddha [parā+tthaddha] propped against, founded on, relying on (with loc.) J vi.181 (= upatthadda C.). -- tthabbha is to be read for ˚tthambha at J iv.313, in meaning =˚tthaddha (kismiŋ). -- dattûpajīvin living on what is given by others, dependent on another's gift Sn 217; Miln 294. -- davutta see sep. under parada -- dāra the wife of another, somebody else's wife M i.87; A ii.71, 191; Sn 108, 242 (˚sevanā); Dh 246, 309 (˚upasevin, cp. DhA iii.482); J vi.240; DhA iii.481 (˚kamma). -- dārika (better to be read as pāra˚) an adulterer S ii.188, 259; J iii.43. -- dhammika "of someone else's norm," one who follows the teaching of another, i. e. of an heretic teacher Sn 965 (Nd1 485: p˚ ā vuccanti satta sahadhammika ṭhapetvā ye keci Buddhe appasannā, dhamme appa nnā, sanghe appasannā). -- niṭṭhita made ready by others S i.236. -- nimmita "created by another," in ˚vasavattin having power under control of another, N. of a class of Devas (see deva) D i.216 sq.; A i.210; It 94; Pug 51; DA i.114, 121; KhA 128; VvA 79. -- neyya to be led by another, under another's rule Sn 907 Nd1 321 (=parapattiya parapaccaya). -- (n)tapa worrying or molesting another person (opp. attantapa) D iii.232; M i.341, 411; ii.159; Pug 56. -- paccaya resting, relying, or dependent on someone else Nd1 321; usually neg. a˚ independent of another Vin i.12, 181 and passim. -- pattiya=prec. Nd1 321. -- pāṇa other living beings Sn 220. -- puggala other people D iii.108. -- putta somebody else's son A iv.169; Sn 43. -- pessa serving others, being a servant Sn 615 (= paresaŋ veyyāvacca SnA 466). -- pessiyā a female servant or messenger, lit. to be sent by others J iii.413 (=parehi pesitabbā pesanakārikā C.). -- ppavāda [cp. BSk. parapravādin "false teacher" Divy 202] disputation with another, challenge, opposition in teaching (appld to Non -- Buddhistic systems) S v.261; A ii.238; Miln 170, 175. -- bhāga outer part, precinct part beyond PvA 24. -- bhuta [Sk. parabhṛta] the Indian cuckoo (lit. brought up by another) J v.416 (so read for parābhūta). -- bhojana food given by others Sn 366 (=parehi dinnaŋ saddhādeyyaŋ SnA 364). -- loka [cpd. either with para 1. or para 2. It is hardly justified to assume a metaphysical sense, or to take para as temporal in the sense of paraŋ (cp. paraŋmaraṇā after death), i. e. the future world or the world to come] the other world, the world beyond (opp. ayaŋ loko this world or idhaloka the world here, see on term Stede, Peta Vatthu p. 29 sq.) D i.27, 58, 187; ii.319; S i.72, 138; Sn 579, 666, 1117; Nd1 60; Nd2 214 (v. l. for paloka in anicca -- passage) 410 (=manussalokaŋ ṭhapetvā sabbo paraloko); Ps i.121; Vv 845 (=narakaŋ hi sattānaŋ ekantânatthatāya parabhūto paṭisattubhūto loko ti visesato paraloko ti VvA 335); PvA 5, 60 (=pettivisaya parattha), 64, 107, 253 (idhalokato p. natthi); SnA 478 (=parattha); Sdhp 316, 326, 327. -- vambhitā contempt of others M i.19 (a˚). -- vambhin contempting others M i.19, 527. -- vasatta power (over others) Dāvs iv.19. -- vāda (1) talk of others, public rumour S i.4; Sn 819 (cp. Nd1 151); SnA 475. (2) opposition Miln 94 sq. -- vādin opponent Miln 348. visaya the other world, realm of the Dead, Hades Pv iv.87 (=pettivisaya PvA 268). -- vediya to be known by others, i. e. heterodox D ii.241; Sn 474 (=parehi ñāpetabba SnA 410). -- sattā (pl.) other beings A i.255=iii.17 (+parapuggalā). -- suve on the day after tomorrow DhA iv.170 (v. l. SS for pare, see para 2 c.). -- sena a hostile army D i.89=ii.16= iii.59=Sn p. 106 ≈ (cp. DA i.250=SnA 450). -- hattha the hand of the enemy J i.179. -- hiŋsā hurting others Pv iii.73. -- hita the good or welfare of others (opp. attahita) D iii.233; PvA 16, 163. -- hetu on account of others, through others Sn 122 (attahetu+); Pug 54. -- 420 -- Paraŋ
Paraŋ
(param˚) (adv.) [orig. nt. of para] further, away (from); as prep. (w. abl.) after, beyond; absolute only in phrase ito paraŋ from here, after this, further, e. g. KhA 131; SnA 160, 178, 412, 512, 549; PvA 83, 90; also in tato paraŋ J iii.281.

-- parā (f.) [adv. converted into a noun paraŋ+abl. of para] lit. "after the other," i. e. succession, series Vin ii.110; iv.77, 78 (parampara -- bhojana "taking food in succession," successive feeding, see under bhojana, and cp. C. at Vin iv.77, 78 and Vin Texts i.38); D i.239; M i.520; A ii.191 (paramparāya in phrase anussavena p. itikirāya, as at Nd2 151); Bu i.79; J i.194; iv.35 (expld by C. as purisa˚, viz. a series of husbands, but probably misunderstood, Kern, Toev. s. v. interperts as "defamation, ravishing"); Nett 79 (˚parahetu); Miln 191, 276; DhsA 314; SnA 352; DhA i.49 (sīsa˚). -- maraṇā (adv.) after death; usually in combn with kāyassa bhedā p. after the dissolution of the body, i. e. after death S i.231; D i.245; PvA 27, 133; absolutely only in phrase hoti Tathāgato p. D i.188, 192; A v.193. -- mukhā (adv.) in one's absence, lit. with face turned away (opp. sammukhā in presence, thus at J iii.263 where parammukhā corresponds to raho and sam˚ to āvi; PvA 13) D i.230 (parammukhin?); DhA ii.109. Parajjhati
Parajjhati
see parājeti. Parattha
Parattha
(adv.) [Vedic parastāt beyond] elsewhere, hereafter, in the Beyond, in the other world S i.20; Sn 661 = It 42=Dh 306; Dh 177; J ii.417; Pv i.1110 (= paraloke PvA 60); iii.120 (=samparāye PvA 177); SnA 478 (=paraloke). Parada
Parada
(adj.) [for uparada (?) = uparata, pp. of upa+ ram] finding pleasure in, fond of, only in two (doubtful) cpds. viz. ˚vutta [unexpld, perhaps v for y, as daya> dava through influence of d in parada˚; thus=parata+ yutta?] "fond of being prepared," adapted, apt, active, alert; only in one stock phrase (which points to this form as being archaic and probably popular etymology, thus distorting its real derivation), viz. appossukka pannaloma +Vin ii.184 (Vin. Texts iii.232 trsl. "secure," cp. Vin ii.363); M i.450; ii.121 (v. l. BB paradatta˚), -- and ˚samācāra living a good (active) life M i.469. Parama
Parama
(adj.) [Vedic parama; superl. formation of para, lit. "farthest," cp. similarly, although fr. diff. base, Lat. prīmus] highest, most excellent, superior, best; paraphrased by agga seṭṭha visiṭṭha at Nd2 502 A = Nd1 84, 102 (the latter reading viseṭṭha for visiṭṭha); by uttama at DhA iii.237; VvA 78. -- D i.124 (ettaka˚); M ii.120 (˚nipacca); S i.166; ii.277; v.230; A v.64 (˚diṭṭha -- dhamma -- nibbāna); Sn 138 (yasaŋ paramaŋ patto), 296 (˚ā mittā), 788 (suddhaŋ ˚ŋ arogaŋ), 1071 (saññāvimokhe ˚e vimutto); Dh 184 (nibbānaŋ ˚ŋ vadanti Buddhā). 203, 243; Vv 161 (˚alankata= paramaŋ ativiya visesato VvA 78) Pv ii.910 (˚iddhi); Pug 15, 16, 66; SnA 453 (˚issara); PvA 12 (˚nipacca). 15 (˚duggandha), 46. -- At the end of a cpd. ( -- ˚) "at the outmost, at the highest, at most; as a minimum, at least" Vin iv.263 (dvangula -- pabba˚); esp. freq. in phrase sattakkhattu˚ one who will be reborn seven times at the outmost, i. e. at the end of the 7 rebirthinterval S ii.185 (sa˚); v.205; A i.233; iv.381; v.120; It 18; Kvu 469. See pāramī & pāramitā.

-- attha [cp. class. Sk. paramārtha] the highest good, ideal; truth in the ultimate sense, philosophical truth (cp. Kvu trsl. 180; J.P.T.S. 1914, 129 sq.; Cpd. 6, 81); Arahantship Sn 68 ( = vuccati Amataŋ Nibbānaŋ etc. Nd2 409), 219 (˚dassin); Nd2 26; Miln 19, 31; ˚dīpanī Exposition of the Highest Truth, N. of the Commentary on Th, Vv and Pv; mentioned e. g. at PvA 71; ˚jotikā id., N. of the C. on Kh and Sn, mentioned e. g. at KhA 11. -- As ˚ -- , in instr. and abl. used adverbially in meaning of "in the highest sense, absolutely, kat) e)coxh/ n, primarily, ideally, in an absolute sense," like ˚pāramī Bu i.77 ˚visuddhi A v.64; ˚saññita Th 2, 210; ˚suñña Ps ii.184; ˚suddhi SnA 528; abl. paramatthato Miln 28; VvA 24 (manusso), 30 (bhikkhu), 72 (jīvitindriyaŋ); PvA 146 (pabbajito, corresponding to anavasesato), 253 (na koci kiñci hanati=not at all); instr. paramatthena Miln 71 (vedagū), 268 (sattûpaladdhi). -- gati the highest or best course of life or future exsitence Vv 3512 (=anupādisesa -- nibbāna VvA 164). paramajjadhamma
paramajja
-- dhamma [cp. Vedic parama -- jyā] the most influential or ruling doctrine M iii.7. Paramatā
Paramatā
(f.) [fr. parama, Vedic paramatā highest posi- tion] the highest quantity, measure on the outside, minimum or maximum D i.60 (ghāsa -- cchādana -- paramatāya santuṭṭho contented with a minimum of food & clothing; DA i.169 expls by uttamatāya); M i.10 (abyābajjha˚); S i.82 (nāḷik' odana -- paramatāya on a nāḷi of boiled rice at the most); freq. in phrase sattakkhattuŋ p. interval of seven rebirths at the outside (cp. parama), being reborn seven times at the most S ii.134 sq.; v.458; Kvu 469 (cp. Kvu trsl. 2683). Parasupahāra
Parasupahāra
at S v.441 is to be corrected to pharasu˚. Parā˚
Parā˚
(prefix) [para+ā, not instr. of para: see para 2 c; in some cases it may also correspond to paraŋ˚] prep. meaning "on to," "over" (with the idea of mastering), also "through, throughout." The ā is shortened before double consonant, like parā+kṛ = parakkaroti, parā+ kram=parakkamati (see under cpds. of para). Parākaroti
Parākaroti
see parakkaroti (paraŋ˚? or parā?). Parājaya
Parājaya
[parā+ji, opp. of jaya] 1. defeat D i.10; J vi.209; VvA 139. -- 2. defeat in game, loss, losing at play S i.149 (dhana˚) = A v.171=Sn 659; J vi.234 (˚gāha sustainment of a loss). Parājita
Parājita
[pp. of parājeti] defeated, having suffered a loss Vin iv.5; S i.224; A iv.432; Sn 440, 681; Dh 201 ( = parena parājito DhA iii.259, where Bdhgh takes it evidently as instr. of para=parā); J i.293; ii.160 (sahassaŋ), 403. Parājeti
Parājeti
[parā+jeti of ji, cp. jayati] to defeat, conquer; in gambling: to make lose, beat PvA 151 (sahassaŋ p. by 1,000 coins). -- aor. parāji in 3rd pl. ˚jiŋsu, only in one stock phrase referring to the battle of the Gods & Titans, viz. at D ii.285 = M i.253 (˚jiniŋsu)=S i.221= 224 (v. l. ˚jiniŋsu)=A iv.432 (˚jiyiŋsu, with v. l. ˚jiniŋsu), where a Pass. is required ("were defeated, lost") in opp. to jiniŋsu, and the reading ˚jiyiŋsu as aor. pass. is to be preferred. -- Pass. ˚jīyati to be defeated, to suffer defeat S i.221 (Pot. parājeyya, but form is Active); J i.290; and parajjhati (1st pl. parajjhāma) J ii.403; aor. parājiyi: see above parāji. -- pp. parājita (q. v.). Parābhava
Parābhava
[fr. parā+bhu Vedic parābhava] defeat, destruction, ruin, disgrace S ii.241; A ii.73; iv.26; Sn 91 -- 115; J iii.331; SnA 167. Parābhavati
Parābhavati
[parā+bhū] 1. to go to ruin Sn 91 ( = pari- hāyati vinassati). -- 2. to win through, to surpass Th 1, 1144 (cp. trsl. 3814). -- pp. parābhūta (q. v.). See also parābhetvā. Parābhūta
Parābhūta
[pp. of parābhavati] ruined, fallen into dis- grace M ii.210 (avabhūta+). -- Note. parābhūta at J v.416 is to be read parabhuta (q. v.). Parābhetvā
Parābhetvā
at J v.153 is not clear (C.: hadayaŋ bhinditvā olokento viya . . .); perhaps we have here a reading parābh˚ for parāg˚ (as bheṇḍuka wrongly for geṇḍuka), which in its turn stands for parādhetvā (cp. similarly BSk. ārāgeti for ārādheti), thus meaning "propitiating." -- 421 -- Parāmaṭṭha
Parāmaṭṭha
[pp. of parāmasati] touched, grasped, usually in bad sense: succumbing to, defiled, corrupted D i.17; for a different, commentarial interpretation see Parāmāsa (evaŋ˚ so acquired or taken up; cp. DA i.107: nirāsanka -- cittatāya punappuna āmaṭṭha); S ii.94; Nd2 152 (gahita p. abhiniviṭṭha; cp. gahessasi No. 227); Dhs 584, 1177, 1500; Sdhp 332. -- dup˚ wrongly grasped, misused S i.49. -- apparāmaṭṭha [cp. BSk. aparāmṛṣta not affected Mvyutp. p. 84] untarnished, incorrupt D ii.80 (cp. Dial ii.85); iii.245; S ii.70; A iii.36. Parāmasa
Parāmasa
[parā+mṛś, but see parāmāsa] touching, seizing, taking hold of M i.130 (v. l. ˚māsa which reading is probably to be preferred, cp. Trenckner on p. 541); S iii.46 (v. l. ˚māsa). -- neg. aparāmasa not leading astray, not enticing D i.17 (˚to), 202. -- Perhaps we should read parāmāsa altogether. Parāmasati
Parāmasati
[para+masati of mṛś] to touch, hold on to, deal with, take up, to be attached or fall a victim to (acc.) Vin ii.47, 195, 209; D i.17; M i.257; S iii.110; J iv.138; in combn with gaṇhāti & nandati (abhiniveseti) at Nd2 227. -- ger. parāmassa D ii.282; M i.130, 498 (but cp. p. 541); grd. parāmasitabba J i.188. -- pp. parāmaṭṭha (q. v.). Parāmasana
Parāmasana
(nt.) [fr. parāmasati] touching, seizing, taking up Nd2 576 (daṇḍa -- sattha˚); DhsA 239 (angapaccanga˚); PvA 159 (kiriyā˚). Parāmāsa
Parāmāsa
[parā+mṛś, cp. Epic Sk. parāmarśa being affected by; as philos. term "reflection"] touching, contact, being attached to, hanging on, being under the influence of, contagion (Dhs. trsl. 316). In Asl. 49, Bdhgh analyses as parato āmasantīti parāmāsā: p. means "they handle dhamma's as other" (than what they really are, e. g. they transgress the real meaning of anicca etc. and say nicca). Hence the renderings in Asl. trs. "Reversion," in Dialogues iii.28, 43, etc. "perverted" (parāmasāmi parāmaṭṭha) -- S iii.46, 110; A ii.42 (sacca˚); iii.377 (sīlabbata˚), 438 (id.); v.150 (sandiṭṭhi˚); D iii.48; Th 1, 342; It 48 (itisacca˚, cp. idaŋsaccabhinivesa under kāyagantha); Pug 22; Dhs 381, 1003, 1175 (diṭṭhi˚ contagion of speculative opinion), 1498 (id.). It is almost synonymous with abhinivesa; see kāyagantha (under gantha), and cp. Nd2 227 (gāha p. abhinivesa) and Nd2 under taṇhā iii. 1 C. -- See also parāmasa. Parāmāsin
Parāmāsin
(adj.) [fr. parāmāsa] grasping, seizing, perverting D iii.48; M i.43, 96 (sandiṭṭhi˚). Parāyana (Parāyaṇa)
Parāyana
(Parāyaṇa) (nt.) [fr. parā+i, cp. Vedic parā- yaṇa highest instance, also BSk. parāyaṇa e. g. Divy 57, 327] 1. (n.) final end, i. e. support, rest, relief S i.38; A i.155, 156 (tāṇa lena dīpa etc.); J v.501 = vi.375 (dīpañ ca p.). -- 2. (adj. -- ˚) (a) going through to, ending in, aiming at, given to, attached to, having one's end or goal in; also: finding one's support in (as daṇḍa˚ leaning on a stick M i.88; A i.138), in foll. phrases prevalent: Amata˚ S v.217 sq.; tama˚ Pug 51; Nibbāna˚ S iv.373; v.218; brahmacariya˚ S i.234; Maccu˚ S v.217; sambodhi˚ D i.156; ii.155; Pug 16. Cp. also Sn 1114 (tap˚=tad˚, see Nd2 411); Miln 148 (ekantasoka˚); DhA i.28 (rodana, i. e. constantly weeping). -> (b) destined to, having one's next birth in., e. g. Avīci˚ J iii.454; iv.159; duggati˚ PvA 32; devaloka˚ J i.218; brahmaloka˚ J iii.396; Miln 234; sagga˚ J vi.329; PvA 42, 160; sugati˚ PvA 89 similarly nīlamañca˚ Pv ii.25. See also pārāyana. Parāyika
Parāyika
see sam˚. Parāyin
Parāyin
(adj.) [fr. parāyana] having one's refuge or resort (in), being supported, only neg. aparāyinī (f.) without support J iii.386. Pari˚
Pari˚
(indecl.) [Idg. *peri to verbal root *per, denoting completion of a forward movement (as in Sk. pṛ2, piparti. to bring across, promote; cp. Vedic pṛc to satisfy, pṛṇāti to fill, fulfill. See also P. para). Cp. Vedic pari, Av. pairi, Gr. pe/ri, Lat. per (also in adj. per -- magnus very great); Obulg. pariy round about, Lith. per̃ through, Oir er -- (intensifying prefix), Goth. faír, Ohg. fir, far = Ger. ver -- ] prefix, signifying (lit.) around, round about; (fig.) all round, i. e. completely, altogether. The use as prep. (with acc.=against, w. abl.=from) has entirely disappeared in Pāli (but see below 1a). As adv. "all round" it is only found at J vi.198 (parī metri causa; combd with samantato). -> The composition form before vowels is pariy˚, which in combn with ud and upa undergoes metathesis, scil. payir˚. Frequent combns with other preps. are pari +ā (pariyā˚) and pari+ava (pariyo˚); sampari˚. Close affinities of p. are the preps. adhi (cp. ajjhesati> pariyesati, ajjhogāhati> pariyogāhati) and abhi (cp. abhirādheti>paritoseti, abhitāpa>paritāpa, abhipīḷita>pari˚, abhipūreti>pari˚, abhirakkhati>pari˚), cp. also its relation to ā in var. combns. -- Meanings. 1. (lit.) (a) away from, off (cp. Vedic pari as prep. c. abl.:) ˚kaḍḍhati to draw over, seduce, ˚cheda cutting off, restriction, ˚puñchati wipe off. -- (b) all round, round (expld by samantato, e. g. at Vism 271 in pallanka): ˚anta surrounded, ˚esati search round, ˚kiṇṇa covered all round (i. e. completely, cp. expln as "samantato ākiṇṇa"), ˚carati move round, ˚jana surrounding people, ˚dhāvati run about, ˚dhovati wash all round, ˚paleti watch all round, fig. guard carefully, ˚bhamati roam about, ˚maṇḍala circular (round), ˚sā assembly (lit. sitting round, of sad). -- 2. (fig.) (a) quite, completely, very much, kat) ecoxh/n: ˚ādāna consummation, ˚āpanna gone completely into, ˚odāta very pure, ˚osāna complete end, ˚gūhati to hide well, ˚toseti satisfy very much, ˚pūreti fulfil, ˚bhutta thoroughly enjoyed, ˚yañña supreme sacrifice, ˚suddha extremely clean. -- (b) too much, excessively (cp. ati˚ and adhi˚): ˚tāpeti torment excessively, ˚pakka over -- ripe. -- A derivation (adv.) from pari is parito (q. v.). On its relation to Sk. pariṣ see parikkhāra. A frequently occurring dialectical variant of pari˚ is pali˚ (q. v.). -- Note. The expln of P. Commentators as regards pari is "pariggahaṭṭho" Ps i.176; "paricca" SnA 88; "parito" VvA 316; PvA 33. Parikaḍḍhati
Parikaḍḍhati
[pari+k˚, cp. BSk. parikaḍḍhati MVastu ii.255] to draw over or towards oneself, to win over, seduce D ii.283 (purisaŋ); Miln 143 (janapadaŋ). Cp. parikassati and samparikaḍḍhati. Parikaḍḍhana
Parikaḍḍhana
(nt.) [fr. prec.] drawing, dragging along J ii.78; Miln 154. Parikati
Parikati
[*parikṛti of kṛ (?)] arrangement, preparation, getting up J v.203. Parikatta
Parikatta
[pp. of pari+kantati2; corresponds to Sk, kṛtta, which is usually represented in P. by kanta2] cut round, cut off Miln 188. Parikathā
Parikathā
(f.) [pari+kathā, cp. BSk. parikathā Divy 225, 235] 1. "round -- about tale," exposition, story, esp religious tale D ii.204; Vism 41 ( = pariyāya -- kathā) -- 2. talk about, remark, hint Vin i.254 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.154); Vbh 353=Vism 23 (with obhāsa & nimitta); SnA 497. -- 3. continuous or excessive talk Vism 29. Parikanta
Parikanta1
[pari+kanta2 of kantati2] cut open Vin iii.89 (kucchi p.). See also parikatta & cp. Kern, Toev. s. v. (misreading for ˚katta?). -- Note. Reading parikantaŋ upāhanaŋ at J vi.51 is with v. l. to be changed to pariyantaŋ. Parikanta
Parikanta2
at Vin ii.80 (bhāsita˚) is probably to be read as pārikata [pp. of parikaroti]. Bdhgh explns as parik-> kametvā kata, but it is difficult to derive it fr. parikkamati. Vin. Texts iii.18 trsl. "as well in speech as in act" and identify it with parikanta1, hardly justified. Cp. also Kern. Toev. s. v. The passage is evidently faulty. -- 422 -- Parikantati
Parikantati1
[pari+kantati1] to wind round, twist J iii.185 (pāso pādaŋ p.; but taken by C. as parikantati2, expld as "cammādīni chindanto samantā kantati"). Parikantati
Parikantati2
[pari+kantati2] to cut (round), cut through, pierce M i.244 (vātā kucchiŋ p.); J iii.185 (see parikantati1). Parikappa
Parikappa
[fr. pari+kalp] 1. preparation, intention, strata- gem Th 1, 940. -- 2. assumption, supposition, surmise A i.197; v.271; DhsA 308. Parikappita
Parikappita
[pp. of parikappati] inclined, determined, decided, fixed upon Sdhp. 362, 602. Parikamma
Parikamma
(nt.) [pari+kamma] "doing round," i. e. doing up, viz 1. arrangement, getting up, preparation Vin ii.106 (˚ŋ kārāpeti), 117 (geruka˚ plastering with red chalk) 151 (id.). parikammaŋ karoti to make (the necessary) preparation, to set to work Vism 395 and passim (with ref. to iddhi). Usually in form parikammakata arranged, prepared Vin ii.175 (bhūmi), as -- ˚ "with," viz. geruka˚ plastered with red chalk Vin i.48; ii.209; lākhā˚ J iii.183; iv.256; su˚ beautifully arranged or prepared, fitful, well worked Miln 62 (dāru), 282 (maṇiratana); VvA 188. In special sense used with ref. to jhāna, as kasiṇa˚ processes whereby jhāna is introduced, preparations for meditation J i.141; iv.306; v.162, 193; DhsA 168; cp. Cpd. 54; DhA i.105. -- 2. service, attention, attending Vin i.47; ii.106, 220; S i.76; Th 2, 376 ( = veyyāvacca ThA 253); Pug 56; DhA i.96, 333, chiefly by way of administering ointments etc. to a person, cp. J v.89; DhA i.250. sarīra˚ attending the body DA i.45, 186; SnA 52.

-- kāraka one who ministers to or looks after a person, attendant; one who makes preparations Th 2, 411 (f. -- ikā = paricārikā ThA 267); J i.232. Parikara
Parikara
[fr. pari+kṛ; a similar formation belonging to same root, but with fig. meaning is to be found in parikkhāra, which is also expld by parivara cp. parikaroti = parivāreti] "doing round," i. e. girdle, loincloth J iv.149; DhA i.352. -- In cpd. ovāda˚ it is v. l. SS at D i.137 for paṭikara (q. v.). Parikaroti
Parikaroti
[pari+kṛ] to surround, serve, wait upon, do service for J. iv 405 ( = parivāreti C.); v. 353 (id.), 381; vi.592. Cp. parikara & parikkhāra. Parikassati
Parikassati
[pari+kṛṣ, cp BSk. parikarṣayati to carry about Divy 475, and parikaḍḍhati] 1. to drag about S i.44, cp. DhsA 68. -- 2. sweep away, carry away DhA ii.275 (mah' ogho viya parikassamāno, v. l. ˚kaḍḍhamāno). -- Pass. parikissati (q. v.). Parikiṇṇa
Parikiṇṇa
[pp. of parikirati] scattered or strewn about, surrounded J iv.400; vi.89, 559; Pv i.61 (makkhikā˚ = samantato ākiṇṇa PvA 32); Miln 168, 285; DA i.45 (spelt parikkhiṇṇa). Cp. sampari˚. Parikittita
Parikittita
[pp. of parikutteti] declared, announced, made public Sdhp 601. Parikitteti
Parikitteti
[pari+kitteti] to declare, praise, make public Miln 131, 141, 230, 383. -- pp. parikittita (q. v.). Parikirati
Parikirati
[pari+kirati] to strew or scatter about, to surround S i.185 = Th 1, 1210; aor. parikiri J vi.592 (v. l. for parikari, see parikaroti). -- pp. parikiṇṇa (q. v.). Parikiraṇa
Parikiraṇa
[fr. pari+kirati] strewing about, trsld "con- secrating sites" D i.12 (vatthu -- kamma+vatthu˚; v. l. paṭi˚; expld at DA i.98 as "idañ c' idañ ca āharathā ti vatvā tattha balikamma -- karaṇaŋ"). The BSk. form appears to be parīkṣā, as seen in phrase vatthuparīkṣā at Divy 3 & 16. See under parikkhā. Parikilanta
Parikilanta
[pp. of parikilamati] tired out, exhausted Miln 303. Parikilamati
Parikilamati
[pari+kilamati] to get tired out, fatigued or exhausted J v.417, 421. -- pp. parikilanta (q. v.). Parikilissati
Parikilissati
[pari+kilissati] to get stained or soiled; fig. get into trouble or misery (?) see parikissati. -- pp. parikiliṭṭha see parikkiliṭṭha. Parikilesa
Parikilesa
[pari+kilesa] misery, calamity, punishment ThA 241 (for ˚klesa, q. v.). Parikissati
Parikissati
[most likely Pass. of parikassati; maybe Pass. of kisa ( = Sk. kṛśa) to become emaciated. Mrs. Rh. D. at K.S. 319 takes it as contracted form of kilissati] to be dragged about or worried, to be harassed, to get into trouble S i.39 (trsl. "plagues itself"); A ii.177; iv.186; Sn 820 (v. l. Nd1 ˚kilissati; expld at Nd1 154 as kissati parikissati parikilissati, with vv. ll. kilissati pakirissati). Parikujati
Parikujati
at Sdhp 145, meaning? Cp. palikujjati. Parikupita
Parikupita
[pp. of pari+kup] greatly excited, very much agitated A ii.75; Miln 253. Parikeḷanā
Parikeḷanā
(f.) [pari+keḷanā] adornment, adorning one- self, being fond of ornaments Nd2 5852 (v. l. parilepanā); DA i.286 has paṭikelanā instead, but Vbh id. p. 351 parikeḷanā with v. l. parikelāsanā. Parikopeti
Parikopeti
[Caus. of pari+kup] to excite violently Miln 253. Parikkamana
Parikkamana
(nt.) [pari+kram] walking about M i.43, 44; adj. sa˚ having (opportunity for) walking about, i. e. accessible, good for rambling in, pleasant, said of the Dhamma A v.262 (opp. a˚). Parikkita
Parikkita
at J v.74 is probably to be read parikkhita (pari+ukṣ): see okkhita "sprinkled, strewn," unless it is misreading for parikiṇṇa. Parikkiliṭṭha
Parikkiliṭṭha
[pp. of parikilissati] soiled, stained Vin ii.296 (for parikiliṭṭha, cp. Kern, Toev. s. v.); id. p, at A ii.56 has paṭikiliṭṭha, cp. upakkiliṭṭha Vin ii.295. Parikkha
Parikkha
( -- ˚) see parikkhā. Parikkhaka
Parikkhaka
(adj.) [fr. parikkhati] investigating, examining, experienced, shrewd PvA 131 (lokiya˚ experienced in the ways of the world, for agarahita). Parikkhaṇa
Parikkhaṇa
(nt.) [fr. parikkhati; cp. Class. Sk. parīkṣaṇa] putting to the test, trying Sdhp 403 (sarīra˚, or should we read parirakkhaṇa? Cp. parirakkhati). Parikkhata
Parikkhata1
[pp. of pari+kṣan] wounded, hurt, grazed J iii.431; PvA 272 (a˚). Parikkhata
Parikkhata2
[pp. of *parikkharoti; cp. Sk. pariṣkṛta] made up, prepared, endowed with, equipped, adorned D ii.217; M iii.71; Miln 328. Parikkhatatā
Parikkhatatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. parikkhata2] "making up," pretence, posing, sham Pug 19 (23) = Vbh 351 (358). Parikkhati
Parikkhati
[pari+īkṣ] to look round, to inspect, investi- gate, examine A i.162 (vaṇṇaŋ parikkhare 3rd pl.). See also parikkhaka, parikkhavant & parikkhā. Parikkhattiya
Parikkhattiya
read pāri˚ ( = parikkhatatā) q. v. *Parikkharoti
*Parikkharoti
[pariṣ+kṛ] lit. to do all round, i. e. to make up, equip, adorn (cp. parikaroti); pp. parikkhata2 (q. v.); see also parikkhāra. -- 423 -- Parikkhaya
Parikkhaya
[fr. pari+kṣi2, cp. Epic Sk. parikṣaya] ex- haustion, waste, diminution, decay, loss, end D i.156; M i.453; iii.37 sq.; S i.2, 90, 152; v.461; A i.100, 299; ii.68; iii.46 (bhogā ˚ŋ gacchanti); iv.148, 350; Th 1, 929; Sn 374, 749, 1094 ( = pahānaŋ etc. Nd2 412); Dh 139; J i.290; Pv ii.615; Pug 16, 17, 63; Miln 102; DhA iv.140 (˚ŋ gacchati to come to waste, to disappear= atthaŋ gacchati of Dh 384); ThA 285; PvA 3 (dhanasannicayo ˚ŋ na gamissati). In the latter phrase freq. combd with pariyādāna (q. v.). Parikkhavant
Parikkhavant
(adj.) [fr. parikkhati] circumspect, elever, experienced J iii.114. Parikkhā
Parikkhā
(f.) [fr. pari+īkṣ, cp. BSk. parīksā Divy 3 & 16 in vastu˚, ratna˚ etc. with which cp. P. vatthu -- parikirana] examination, investigation, circumspection, prudence J iii.115; Nett 3, 4, 126 (cp. Index p. 276); Sdhp. 532 (attha˚). Parikkhāra
Parikkhāra
[fr. *parikkharoti, cp. late Sk. pariṣkāra] "all that belongs to anything," make -- up, adornment (so Nd2 585 bāhirā p. of the body). -- (a) requisite, accessory, equipment, utensil, apparatus Vin i.50, 296 (˚colaka cloth required for water -- strainers & bags, cp. Vin. Texts ii.229); ii.150 (senāsana˚ -- dussa clothrequirement of seat & bed); iv.249 sq., 284; D i.128, 137 (yaññassa p. = parivāra DA i.297); M i.104 (jīvita˚); iii.11; S ii.29; A iv.62 (citt' ālankāraŋ citta -- parikkhār' atthaŋ dānaŋ), 236 (id.); J iii.470 (sabba˚ -- sampannaŋ dānaŋ with all that belongs to it); v.232; Sn 307; Nd2 585; Nett 1 sq.; 4, 108; DA i.294, 299; DhA i.38, 240 (geha˚), 352 (v. l. for parikara); PvA 81 (sabba˚). -- saparikkhāra together with the (other) requisites, i. e. full of resources; used with reference to the samādhiparikkhārā (see below) D ii.217; M iii.71. -- (b) In a special sense and in very early use it refers to the "set of necessaries" of a Buddhist monk & comprises the 4 indispensable instruments of a mendicant, enumd in stock phrase "cīvara -- piṇḍapāta -- senāsana -- gilānapaccayabhesajja -- p." i. e. robe, alms -- bowl, seat & bed, medicine as help in illness. Thus freq. found in Canon, e. g. at Vin iii.132; D iii.268; S iv.288, 291; Nd2 523 (as 1st part of "yañña"); also unspecified, but to be understood as these 4 (different Vin Texts iii.343 which take it to mean the 8 requisites: see below) at Vin ii.267. -- Later we find another set of mendicants' requisites designated as "aṭṭha parikkhārā," the 8 requirements. They are enumd in verse at J i.65= DA i.206, viz. ticīvaraŋ, patto, vāsi, sūci, (kāya -- ) bandhanaŋ, parissāvana, i. e. the 3 robes, the bowl, a razor, a needle, the girdle, a water -- strainer. They are expld in detail DA i.206 sq. Cp. also J iv.342 (aṭṭhaparikkhāra -- dhara); v.254 (kāyabandhana -- parissāvanasūci -- vāsi -- satthakāni; the last -- named article being "scissors" instead of a razor); DhA ii.61 (˚dhara thera). -- (c) In other combns: satta nagara˚ A iv.106 sq. (cp. nagarûpakārikā D i.105); satta samādhi˚ D ii.216; M iii.71; A iv.40; soḷasa˚ (adj.) of yañña: having sixteen accessories D i.134 (cp. Dial. i.174, 177), bahu˚ having a full equipment, i. e. being well -- off Vin iii.138; J i.126. -- Note. A set of 12 requisites (1 -- 8 as under b and 4 additional) see detailed at DA i.207. Parikkhārika
Parikkhārika
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. parikkhāra] one who has the parikkhāras (of the mendicant). Usually the 8 p. are understood, but occasionally 12 are given as in the detailed enumn of p. at DA i.204 -- 207. Parikkhiṇṇa
Parikkhiṇṇa
at DA i.45 is to be read parikiṇṇa (q. v.). Parikkhitta
Parikkhitta
[pp. of parikkhipati] thrown round, over- spread, overlaid, enclosed, fenced in, encircling, surrounded by ( -- ˚) M iii.46; A iv.106 (su˚); S i.331 (read valligahana˚); Pv iv.336 (v. l. for pariyanta as in i.1013); Vism 71 (of gāma); ThA 70; DhA i.42 (pākāra˚); PvA 52 ( = pariyanta i.1013), 283 (sāṇī -- pākāra˚); Sdhp 596. Parikkhipati
Parikkhipati
[pari+kṣip] to throw round, encircle, sur- round Vin ii.154; J i.52 (sāṇiŋ), 63, 150, 166; ii.104; iii.371; DhA i.73. -- pp. parikkhitta (q. v.). -- Caus. II. parikkhipāpeti J i.148 (sāṇiŋ); ii.88 (sāṇi -- pākāraŋ). Parikkhīṇa
Parikkhīṇa
[pp. of parikkhīyati] exhausted, wasted, decayed, extinct Vin iv.258; M iii.80; S i.92; ii.24; v.145, 461; D iii.97, 133 (˚bhava -- saŋyojana); It 79 (id.); A iv.418, 434 (āsavā); Sn 175, 639, 640; Dh 93; Pug 11, 14; Miln 23 (˚āyuka); PvA 112 (˚tiṇodak'-> āhāra). Parikkhīṇatta
Parikkhīṇatta
(nt.) [abstr. of parikkhīṇa] the fact of being exhausted, exhaustion, extinction, destruction DA i.128 (jīvitassa); PvA 63 (kammassa), 148 (id.). Parikkhīyati
Parikkhīyati
[pari+khīyati of kṣi2] to go to ruin, to be wasted or exhausted Th 2, 347 ( = parikkhayaŋ gacchati ThA 242). -- pp. parikkhīṇa (q. v.). Parikkhepa
Parikkhepa
[fr. pari+kṣip] 1. closing round, surrounding, neighbourhood, enclosure Vin iv.304; J i.338; iv.266; SnA 29 (˚dāru etc.). -- 2. circumference J i.89; v.37; Vism 205; KhA 133; SnA 194. -- 3. "closing in on," i. e. fight, quarrel It 11, 12. Pariklesa
Pariklesa
[pari+klesa] hardship, misery, calamity S i.132 = Th 2, 191; Th 2, 345 (=parikilesa ThA 241). Parikhā
Parikhā
(f.) [fr. pari+khan, cp. Epic Sk. parikhā] a ditch, trench, moat Vin ii.154; D i.105 (ukkiṇṇa -- parikha adj. with trenches dug deep, combd with okkhittapaligha; expld by khāta -- parikha ṭhapita -- paligha at DA i.274); M i.139 (sankiṇṇa˚ adj. with trenches filled, Ep. of an Arahant, combd with ukkhittapaligha) = A iii.84 sq.= Nd2 284 C (spelt kkh); A iv.106 (nagara˚); J i.240, 490; iv.106 (ukkiṇṇ' antaraparikha); vi.276, 432; Cp II.13 (spelt kkh); Miln 1 (gambhīra˚); SnA 519 (˚taṭa); PvA 201 (˚piṭṭhe), 261 (id.), 278 (id., v. l. ˚parikkhāṭa -- tīre). Parigaṇhana
Parigaṇhana
(nt.) [fr. parigaṇhāti] comprehension J ii.7 (˚paññā comprehensive wisdom). Parigaṇhāti
Parigaṇhāti
(& Pariggaheti Caus.) [pari+gṛh] 1. to em- brace, seize, take possession of, hold, take up M i.80, 137; J iii.189; DA i.45. -- 2. to catch, grasp DhA i.68. -- 3. to go all round DhA i.91 (sakala -- jambudīpaŋ). -- Caus. ˚ggaheti (aor. ˚esi, ger. ˚etvā, inf. ˚etuŋ) 1. to embrace, comprehend, fig. master Vin ii.213; J ii.28; iii.332; SnA 549 (mantāya); DhA iii.242; PvA 68 (hattesu), 93; VvA 75. -- 2. to explore, examine, find out, search J i.162; ii.3; iii.85, 268 (˚ggahetuŋ), 533; v.93, 101; DhA ii.56. -- Caus. II. parigaṇhāpeti J i.290. -- 3. to comprise, summarise KhA 166, 167. -- pp. pariggahita (q. v.). Parigalati
Parigalati
[pari+galati, see gaḷati] to sink down, slip or glide off J iv.229, 250; v.68. Parigilati
Parigilati
[pari+gilati] to swallow J i.346. Parigūhati
Parigūhati
[pari+gūhati] to hide, conceal A i.149; iv.10, 31; Pv iii.43 ( = paṭicchādeti PvA 194). Parigūhanā
Parigūhanā
(f.) [fr. patigūhati] hiding, concealment, deception Pug 19, 23. Pariggaha
Pariggaha
[fr. pari+gṛh] 1. wrapping round, enclosing Th 1, 419 (? cp. Brethren 217 n. 6). -- 2. taking up, seizing on, acquiring, acquisition, also in bad sense of "grasping" Sn 779 ( = taṇhā and diṭṭhi˚ Nd1 57); Ps i.172; ii.182 (nekkhamma˚ etc.); Nd1 11 (itthi˚ acquiring a wife); J vi.259; Miln 244 (āhara˚ abstinence in food), 313 (id.). -- 3. belongings, property, possessions D ii.58; iii.289=A iv.400; M i.137 (quoted at Nd1 122); S i.93; Sn 805; J iv.371; vi.259; PvA 76 (˚bhūta belonging to, the property of); VvA 213, 321. sa˚ with all (its) belongings S i.32. -- 4. a wife ThA 271; PvA 161 (kata˚ wedded), 282; ThA 271. sapariggaha>apariggaha married> unmarried (in general, with ref. to the man as well as the woman) D i.247; J iv.190; vi.348, 364. -- 5. grace, favour DA i.241 (āmisa˚ material grace). -- 424 -- Pariggahita
Pariggahita
[pp. of parigaṇhāti] taken, seized, taken up, haunted, occupied Vin iii.51 (manussānaŋ p. by men); iv.31, 278; DhA i.13 (amanussa˚ by ghosts); PvA 87, 133; Sdhp 64. -- f. abstr, ˚tā being possessed (Vism 121 (amanussa˚). Pariggāhaka
Pariggāhaka
(adj.) [fr. pariggaha] including, occupying Nett 79 ( = upathambhaka C. as quoted in Index p. 276). Parigha
Parigha
[Vedic parigha, of which the usual P. representa- tive is paligha (q. v.)] a cross -- bar ThA 211 (˚daṇḍa). Parighaŋsati
Parighaŋsati
[pari+ghaŋsati1] to rub (too) hard, scrub, scratch, only in ppr. aparighaŋsanto Vin i.46; ii.208. Paricakkhitar
Paricakkhitar
[n. ag. fr. pari+cakṣ, cp. akkhi & cakkhu] one who looks round or enquires, neg. a˚ J v.77. Paricaya
Paricaya
[fr. pari+ci] familiarity, acquaintance J vi.337; Vism 153; PvA 74. -- adj. ( -- ˚) acquainted with, versed in (loc.) J ii.249 (jāta˚), VvA 24 (kata˚); PvA 4 (id.), 129 (id.). Paricaraṇa
Paricaraṇa
(nt.) [fr. pari+car] 1. going about, mode of life DhA i.382 (gihīnaŋ ˚ṭṭhānaŋ, v. l. for vicaraṇa˚). -> 2. attending to, looking after, worshipping DhA i.199 (aggi -- p˚ -- ṭṭhāna fire -- place). -- 3. enjoyment, pleasure (indriyānaŋ) PvA 16. See also paricāraṇā. Paricaraṇaka
Paricaraṇaka
[fr. paricaraṇa] servant, attendant DA i.269. Paricarati
Paricarati
[pari+carati] to move about, in var. senses, viz. 1. to go about, look after A iii.94 (upaṭṭhahati+) J v.421; PvA 175. -- 2. to worship (only in connection aggin p. to worship the fire) D i.101; S i.166; Dh 107; J i.494; Sn p. 79 ( = payirupāsati SnA 401). -- 3. to roam about, to feast one's senses, to amuse oneself, play, sport PvA 77 (indriyāni=kīḷāmi Pv ii.121). -- We often find reading pariharati for paricarati, e. g. at DhA ii.232; cp. paricāreti for ˚hāreti PvA 175; paricaraṇā for ˚haraṇā PvA 219. -- pp. pariciṇṇa; Caus. paricāreti (q. v.). Paricariyā
Paricariyā
(f.) [fr. paricarati] going about, service, minis- tration, worship S i.182; A i.132; DhA ii.232 (aggi˚). Occurs also as pāricariyā (q. v.), e. g. at J v.154. See also paricārikā. Paricāra
Paricāra
fr. [paricāreti] serving, attendance; (m.) servant, attendant Th 1, 632 (C. on this stanza for paddhagū). Paricāraka
Paricāraka
(adj. -- n.) [fr. paricāreti] attending, serving honouring; (m.) attendant, worshipper, follower (cp. BSk. paricāraka attendant AvŚ i.170; ii.167] D i.101; ii.200; Th 1, 475; Sn p. 218 (Nd2 reads ˚cārika); J i.84; iv.362; Pv iv.87 (not ˚vāraka); DA i.137, 269. See also paricārika. Paricāraṇā
Paricāraṇā
(f.) [fr. paricāreti] care, attention, looking after; pleasure, feasting, satisfaction Pv ii.12 (gloss for ˚cārika); PvA 219. Paricārika
Paricārika
(adj. -- n.) = paricāraka (servant, attendant) A v.263 (aggi˚ fire -- worshipper); Pv ii.620 (amacca˚ minister & attendant); ThA 267; SnA 597. -- f. ˚carikā (1) a maid -- servant, handmaiden, nurse, (personal) attendant M i.253; cp. S i.125; J i.204 (pāda˚), 291; ii.395; iv.35 (veyyāvacca -- kārikā p.), 79; v.420; Pv ii.126 (=veyyāvacca -- kārinī PvA 157); PvA 46. -- (2) care, attention; pleasure, pastime (so here, probably another form of paricāriyā) Pv iv.12 (=indriyānaŋ pariharaṇā PvA 219; gloss ˚cāraṇā). Paricārita
Paricārita
[pp. of paricāreti] served by; delighted by, indulging in M i.504. Paricārin
Paricārin
(adj. n.) [fr. paricāreti] serving, attending, f. a maid -- servant J ii.395. Paricāreti
Paricāreti
[Caus. of paricarati] 1. to serve, wait on, attend upon, honour, worship [cp. BSk. paricārayati Divy 114 sq., 421] S i.124 (pāde); DhA iii.196 (id.); J i.81 (˚cāritabba -- ṭṭhāna place of worship); iv.274; v.9. -> Pass. paricāriyati, ppr. ˚iyamāna M i.46, 504; J i.58. In this sense it may also be taken as "being delighted or entertained by." -- 2. to amuse oneself, gratify one's senses, to have recreation, find pleasure [cp. BSk. paricārayati Divy 1, and freq. phrase pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samarpitā samangibhūtā p. e. g. MVastu i.32] Vin ii.290; iii.72 (pañcahi kamaguṇehi samappitā etc.); D i.36 (id.), 104 (id.); M i.504 (id.); Th 1, 96 (saggesu); Pv i.116 ( = yathā sukkhaŋ cārenti indriyāni PvA 58); iv.129 (read ˚cārayanti for ˚vārayanti, cp. PvA 228 indriyāni p.). -- pp. paricārita q. v. See also parivāreti. Pariciṇṇa
Pariciṇṇa
[pari+ciṇṇa, pp. of carati] 1. surrounded, attended J v.90. -- 2. worshipped M i.497; S iv.57 (me Satthā p.), cp. Th 1, 178 (Satthā ca p. me) & 891 (p. mayā Satthā). -- 3. practised, performed Miln 360. Paricita
Paricita1
[pp. of pari+ci, cinoti, P. cināti] gathered, accu- mulated, collected, increased, augmented M iii.97; S i.116; ii.264; iv.200; A ii.67 sq., 185; iii.45, 152; iv.282, 300; v.23; Th 1, 647; Ps i.172 (expld); PvA 67; Sdhp 409. Paricita
Paricita2
[pp. of pari+ci, ciketi, P. cināti; but perhaps identical with paricita1] known, scrutinized, accustomed, acquainted or familiar with, constantly practised Vin ii.95 (vācasā p.), 109 (aggi˚ etc. read aggiparijita); ThA 52; Miln 140 (iddhipādā p.); Dāvs iv.19. -- aparicita unfamiliar DhA i.71. Paricumbati
Paricumbati
[pari+cumbati] to kiss (all round, i. e. from all sides), to cover with kisses M ii.120; S i.178, 193; A iv.438; DhA i.330. Paricca
Paricca
(indecl.) [ger. of pari+i, cp. Sk. (Gr.) parītya & P. pariyeti] lit. "going round," i. e. having encircled, grasped, understood; grasping, finding out, perceiving; freq. in phrase cetasā ceto paricca (pajānāti) grasping fully with one's mind, e. g. at D i.79; M i.445; iii.12; S ii.121, 233; It 12; Vbh 329; Vism 409 ( = paricchinditvā). See pariyeti. Pariccajati
Pariccajati
[pari+cajati of tyaj] to give up, abandon, leave behind, reject S i.44; It 94; J ii.335; vi.259 ( = chaḍḍeti) Miln 207; DhA iv.204; PvA 121, 132, 221 (read jīvitaŋ pariccajati for parivajjati; cp. BSk. jīvitaŋ parityakṣyāmi AvŚ i.210); Sdhp 539. -- pp. pariccatta (q. v.). Pariccajana
Pariccajana
(nt.) & ˚nā (f.) [fr. pariccajati] 1. giving up, rejection, leaving It 11, 12. -- 2. giving out, bestowing, giving a donation PvA 124. Pariccajanaka
Pariccajanaka
[fr. prec.] one who gives (up) or spends, a giver, donor PvA 7. Pariccatta
Pariccatta
[pp. of pariccajati; cp. BSk. parityakta in meaning "given to the poor" AvŚ i.3] given up, abandoned, thrown out, left behind J i.69, 174, 477; Miln 280; PvA 178, 219 ( = virādhita); Sdhp 374. Pariccāga
Pariccāga
[fr. pariccajati] 1. giving up, abandonment, sacrifice, renunciation A i.92 (āmisa˚ & dhamma˚ material & spiritual); Ps ii.98; J i.12 (jīvita˚); DhA iii.441 (pañca mahāpariccāgā the five great sacrifices, i. e. the giving up of the most valuable treasures of wife, of children, of kingdom, of life and limb). -- 2. expense DhA ii.231 (sahassa˚ expenditure of a thousand coins). -- 3. giving (to the poor), liberality DhsA 157; SnA 295 (mahā˚, corresponding to mahādāna); PvA 7 sq.; 27, 120 sq., 124. -- 425 -- Paricchada
Paricchada
[fr. pari+chad] a cover, covering J i.341, 466. Paricchanna
Paricchanna
[pari+channa, pp. of chad] enveloped, covered, wrapped round Vin iv.17. Paricchāta
Paricchāta
[pari+chāta] very much seared, scorched (?) Sdhp 102 (˚odara -- ttaca). Paricchādanā
Paricchādanā
(f.) [fr. pari+chad] covering, hiding, con- cealing Pug 19 = 23=Vbh 358. Paricchindati
Paricchindati
[pari+chindati] 1. to mark out VvA 291 (vasana -- ṭṭhānaŋ). -- 2. to determine, to fix accurately, to decide J i.170 (padaŋ the track), 194 (nivāsavetanaŋ); iii.371; iv.77; Miln 272; Vism 184, 409; SnA 434 (paññāya p.). -- 3. to limit, restrict, define Miln 131; DA i.132. -- pp. paricchinna (q. v.). Paricchindana
Paricchindana
(nt.) [fr. paricchindati] "cutting up," definition, analysis VvA 114. Paricchindanaka
Paricchindanaka
(adj.) [fr. pari+chind] marking out, defining, analysing, DhsA 157 (ñāṇa). Paricchinna
Paricchinna
[pp. of paricchindati] 1. restricted, limited, small DhA i.58; PvA 136 (˚ppamāṇa). -- 2. divided, measured Vism 184; PvA 185 ( = mita). Pariccheda
Pariccheda
[fr. pari+chid; late Sk: (philos.) in same meaning] 1. exact determination, circumscription, range, definition, connotation, measure J iii.371; Vism 184 (as one of the nimittas of the body), 236 (referring to the 5 nimittas of the life -- principle); SnA 160, 229, 231, 376, 408, 503; KhA 182 (gaṇana˚); VvA 194 (id.); DhsA 3; DhA ii.73 (avadhi˚); PvA 254 (kāla˚), 255 (āyuno p.); VbhA 417 (citta˚, for citta -- paricce ñãṇa Vbh 330). -- 2. limit, boundary Miln 131, 405; J iii.504 (˚nadī -- tīra). -- 3. limitation, restriction DhA ii.88, 98; PvA 20 (˚ŋ karoti to restrict). -- 4. division (of time), in ratti˚ & divā˚, night -- & day -- division Vism 416. -- 5. (town) -- planning, designing VbhA 331. Paricchedaka
Paricchedaka
(adj.) [fr. pariccheda] determining, fixing VbhA 346 (uṭṭhāna -- velā ˚ā saññā). Parijana
Parijana
[pari+jana] "the people round," i. e. atten- dants, servants, retinue, suite Vin i.15; J i.72, 90; DhA iii.188; VvA 63; PvA 58, 62. -- saparijana with one's servants Cp ii.82 (T. saparijjana metri causâ). Parijapati
Parijapati
[pari+japati, cp. BSk. parijapta enchanted Divy 397] to mutter (spells), to practise divination J iii.530; Miln 200 (vijjaŋ). Parijapana
Parijapana
(nt.) [fr. parijapati] mumbling, uttering spells Miln 356 (mantaŋ). Parijānanā
Parijānanā
(f.) [pari+jānanā = jānana] cognition, recog- nition, knowledge Nett 20 (as paraphrase of pariññā). Parijānāti
Parijānāti
[pari+jānāti] to know accurately or for certain, to comprehend, to recognise, find out M i.293; S i.11, 24; ii.45, 99, iii.26, 40, 159; iv.50; v.52, 422; A iii.400 sq.; Sn 202, 254, 943; Nd1 426; J iv.174; Th 1, 226; Miln 69; DhA iv.233 ˚jānitvā). -- ppr. parijānaŋ S iii.27; iv.89; It 3 sq. -- pp. pariññāta (q. v.). ger. pariññāya see under pariññā1. Parijiṇṇa
Parijiṇṇa
[pp. of pari+jar, i. e. decayed; Kern Toev. s. v. proposes reading ˚jīna of ji, i. e. wasted, see parijīyati] worn out, gone down, decayed, reduced J i.111 (seṭṭhi -- kulaŋ p.); v.99, 100 (bhoga˚); vi.364; Dh 148; DhA ii.272 (˚kula). Parijita
Parijita
[pp. of pari+ji, jayati; Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes reading parijīta, Sk. form of P. parijīna, pp. of pari+ jīyati, but hardly necessary, see also Vin. Texts iii.75] overpowered, injured, damaged Vin ii.109 (so read for paricita). Parijīyati
Parijīyati
[pari+jīyati] to become worn out, to decay, fade, S i.186; J iv.111. Spelt ˚jiyyati at Th 1, 1215. -> pp. parijīna (see parijiṇṇa). Parijegucchā
Parijegucchā
(f.) [pari+jegucchā] intense dislike of, disgust with ( -- ˚) D i.25, cp. DA i.115. Parijjanā
Parijjanā
is doubtful reading at A iii.38 (v. l. parivajjanā) = iv.266 (T. reads parijjana, cp. parijana; vv. ll. parivajjanā & parijanā); meaning?. Pariñña
Pariñña
( -- ˚) [the adj. form of pariññā, cp. abhiñña] knowing, recognising, understanding It 44 (bhūta˚ so, or should we read bhūtapariññāya?); also in cpd. pariññacārin (to be expd as shortened gr. pariññā?) Sn 537 ( = paññāya paricchinditvā caranto living in full knowledge, i. e. rightly determining); also (abstr.) pariññatthaŋ at It 29 (abhiññatthaŋ+), cp. S iv.253. Pariññā
Pariññā1
(f.) [cp. Epic Sk. parijñāna; the form parijñā given by BR only with the one ref. Vyutp. 160; fr. pari+jñā] accurate or exact knowledge, comprehension, full understanding M i.66, 84; S iii.26 (yo rāgakkhayo dosā˚ moha˚ ayaŋ vuccati p.), 159 sq., 191; iv.16, 51, 138, 206, 253 sq.; v.21, 55 sq., 145, 236, 251, 292; A i.277 (kāmānaŋ rūpānaŋ vedanānaŋ), 299; v.64; Pug 37; Nett 19, 20, 31; KhA 87; SnA 251. -- In exegetical literature three pariññās are distinguished, viz. ñāta˚, tīraṇa˚ pahāna˚, which are differently interpreted & applied according to the various contexts. See e. g. the detailed interpretation at Nd1 52 sq.; Nd2 413; J vi.259 (where ñāṇa˚ for ñāta˚); DhA ii.172 (in ref. to food); mentioned at SnA 517. -- adj. pariñña. -- The form pariññāya is an apparent instr., but in reality (in form & meaning) the ger. of parijānāti (like abhiññāya>abhijānitvā) for the usual parijānitvā. It is freq. found in poetry & in formulas (like yathābhūtaŋ p.); its meaning is "knowing well in right knowledge": S v.182; Sn 455, 737, 778 ( = parijānitvā Nd1 51 sq.), 1082 (corresp. with pahāya, cp. similar phrase pahāya parijānitvā DhA iv.232); It 62; J vi.259. Pariññā
Pariññā2
(indecl.) [ger. of parijānāti for *parijñāya, cp. same short forms of ādā & abhiññā] having full knowledge or understanding of Sn 779 ( = parijānitvā Nd1 56 & SnA 518); It 4 (perhaps to be read pariññāya for pariññā so). Pariññāta
Pariññāta
[pp. of parijānāti] well understood, thoroughly known Th 2, 106; M i.1 sq.; S ii.99; v.182; PvA 1, 287. With ref. to food (˚bhojana & ˚āhāra) it means food understood according to the three pariññās (q. v.); Dh 92 (˚bhojano adj. one who lives on recognised food or takes the right view of the food he eats, cp. DhA ii.172); Miln 352 (˚āhāro); contrasted with bhāvita: consciousness is to be well studied, insight is to be made to grow M i.293. Pariññātatta
Pariññātatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. pariññāta] the fact of having full or exact knowledge S v.182. Pariññātāvin
Pariññātāvin
(adj.) [fr. pariññāta] one who has correct knowledge S iii.159 sq., 191 (puggala). Pariññeyya
Pariññeyya
(adj.) [grd. of parijānāti] knowable, perceivable, to be known (accurately) M i.4; S iii.26; iv.29; DhA iv.233 (cp. Nd2 under abhiññeyya). Pariḍahati
Pariḍahati
[pari+ḍadati] to burn: Pass. pariḍayhati to be burnt or scorched M i.422; S i.188 = Th 1, 1224; A i.137; iii.95, 98; Sn 63; Ps i.128 (ḷ); Pv i.64 (= parito jhāyati PvA 33); Miln 303; PvA 60. Cp. pariḷāha. -- 426 -- Pariṇata
Pariṇata
[pp. of pariṇamati] 1. bent down, crooked VvA 222 (˚dāṭhā fangs, or does it mean "long"?). -- 2. changed S iii.40. -- 3. ripened, matured, hatched, ripe J iii.174, 286, 431, VvA 288; DhA i.47 (gabbha). Pariṇamati
Pariṇamati
[pari+namati] 1. to change (trs. & intrs.), lit. to bend round, to turn (round), to be transformed into (acc.) S iii.3 (reading pariṇamati once, at other passages vi˚, cp. p. 40); Miln 136 (bhojanaŋ visamaŋ p. food changes, i. e. turns bad), 277 (id.); VvA 13; PvA 144 (for parivattati Pv ii.105), 194 (id. iii.44). -- 2. to change into a diff. state, to ripen, mature (often said of the foetus) Miln 93, 358. -- pp. pariṇata (q. v.). -> Caus. pariṇāmeti (q. v.). Pariṇāma
Pariṇāma
[fr. pari+nam, cp. class Sk. pariṇāma in all meanings] "bending round," i. e. 1. change, alteration, in utu˚ (sudden) change of season, unseasonable weather, with ref. to illnesses caused by such (˚ja ābādhā) = illness arising from the change of season A ii.87; iii.131; v.110; Nd2 3041; Miln 112, 135 sq., 304; Vism 31. -- 2. alteration of food, digestion, in phrase sammā -- pariṇāmaŋ gacchati M i.188; S i.168; A iii.30; cp. MVastu i.211. -- 3. ripening Miln 93. -> 4. course, development, fulfilment, in special sense: dispensation, destiny J v.171; Pv iv.325; PvA 252, 254. -- Cp. vi˚. Pariṇāmana
Pariṇāmana
(nt.) [fr. parinamati] diverting to somebody's use Vin iv.157. Pariṇāmita
Pariṇāmita
[pp. of pariṇāmeti] 1. bent down J vi.269 (of trees, overladen with fruit, C. expls as "entangled"). -- 2. issued, apportioned, destined J v.171; PvA 254. Pariṇāmitar
Pariṇāmitar
[n. ag. of pariṇāmeti] one who destines or makes develop, fate, destiny J vi.189. Pariṇāmin
Pariṇāmin
(adj.) [fr. pariṇāma] ending in, resulting in ( -- ˚) M i.11, 526; iii.88. Pariṇāmeti
Pariṇāmeti
[Caus. of parinamati] to bend to, to change into, to turn to use for somebody, to procure for, obtain, appropriate D i.92; Vin iii.259 (puttassa rajjaŋ p. for his son); iv.156; PvA 281. -- ppr. ˚ṇāmayamāna J v.424. See also āvajjeti. -- pp. pariṇāmita (q. v.). Pariṇāyaka
Pariṇāyaka
[fr. pari+ni, cp. pariṇeti] a leader, guide, adviser; one of the 7 treasures (ratanāni) of a great king or Cakkavattin (according to Bdhgh on D ii.177; the eldest son; in the Lal. Vist. a general cp. Divy 211, 217; Senart, Lég. de Buddha p. 42), i. e. a wonderful Adviser D i.89; ii.17, 177; M i.220; ii.175; A iii.151; Sn p. 106 (cp. SnA 450 = DA i.250); J i.155; iv.93; Miln 38, 314. -- f. pariṇāyikā. Ep. of wisdom, synonymous with paññā, i. e. insight, cleverness Dhs 1057; Pug 25; Vism 3; DhsA 148. Pariṇāha
Pariṇāha
[fr. pari+nah] compass, circumference, breadth, extent, girth S ii.206 (of the moon) = A v.19; J iii.192, 277, 370; v.299; Pug 53; Miln 282, 311; SnA 382 (āroha+). Pariṇeti
Pariṇeti
[pari+neti] to lead round or about S ii.128. Paritajjita
Paritajjita
[pari+tajjita] scared (exceedingly), frightened Sdhp 147. Paritatta
Paritatta
[pp. of paritappati] tormented, worried, vexed, grieved Miln 313. Paritappati
Paritappati
[Pass. of pari+tap] to be vexed, to grieve, worry, sorrow Th 2, 313 ( = santappati ThA 233); Miln 313. -- pp. paritatta (q. v.). Paritasita
Paritasita
(nt.) [pari+tasita1 or tasita2] worry, excite- ment D i.40 (v. l. ˚tassita, cp. Dial i.53). Paritassati (˚tasati)
Paritassati
(˚tasati) [pari+tasati1, in form clearly = Sk. paritṛṣyati, but freq. confused with tasati2, cp. tasa. Sn 924 is the only example of paritasati representing tasati2] to be excited, to be tormented, to show a longing after, to be worried D ii.68; M i.36, 67, 151; S ii.82, 194; iii.43, 55; iv.23, 65, 168; A ii.27; iii.133 sq.; Sn 621 (=taṇhāya na bhāyati SnA 467, thus combining tasati1 & tasati2), 924 (Pot. parittase, interpreted by Nd1 373 as taseyya, uttaseyya, bhāyeyya, thus taken as tasati2); Miln 253, 400; Dh 397 (=taṇhāya na bhāyati DhA iv.159); Sdhp 476. -- ppr. aparitassaŋ D ii.68; M i.67; S ii.82; iii.55; It 94. -> pp. paritasita (q. v.). Paritassanā
Paritassanā
(f.) [fr. paritassati, q. v. for meaning] trem- bling, fear; nervousness, worry; excitement, longing D i.17 ( = ubbijjanā phandanā etc. DA i.111); M i.136; iii.227; S iii.15 sq., 133; Miln 253, 400. -- neg. a˚ S iii.15; M i.136. Paritassin
Paritassin
(adj.) [fr. paritassati] trembling, excited, worrying, only neg. a˚ A iv.108, 111, 230 sq. Paritāpa
Paritāpa
= foll. Miln 313 (ātāpa+). Paritāpana
Paritāpana
(nt.) [pari+tāpana, of tap] tormenting, torture, affliction, mortification M i.78, 341 -- 344; A i.151, 296; ii.205 sq. (atta˚ self -- mortification, opp. para˚); Pug 55, 56, 61; PvA 18 (atta˚), 30 (id.). Often combd with ātāpana (q. v.). Paritāpeti
Paritāpeti
[pari+tapeti] to burn, scorch, molest, trouble, torture, torment M i.341 (ātāpeti+), 506; S iv.337; A iii.54, 380; J v.420 (mā paritāpi). Parituleti
Parituleti
[pari+tuleti] to weigh, consider, estimate, think Vism 522. -- VbhA 130. Parito
Parito
(adv.) [fr. pari, cp. Sk. paritaḥ] round about, around, on every side, everywhere, wholly Vin ii.194; SnA 393; VvA 316; PvA 33. Paritoseti
Paritoseti
[pari+toseti] to please, appease, satisfy, make happy J i.262; iii.386; v.216; PvA 213 (v. l. SS+ āsiñcati). Paritta
Paritta1
(adj.) [BSk. parītta, pari+pp. of dā in short form *tta, like ātta for ādatta. The development of meaning however causes difficulties, paridatta meaning given up, transmitted, cp. Divy 388, whereas P. paritta means trifling. The BSk. form parītta (e. g. Divy 204, 498, 504; AvŚ i.329; ii.137) may be a re -- translation of P. paritta, which may correspond to Sk, prarikta, pp. of pra+ ric, meaning "that which is exceeded," i. e. left (over or behind)] small, little, inferior, insignificant, limited, of no account, trifling Vin i.270; D i.45; M iii.148 (˚ābha of limited splendour, opp. appamāṇ'-> ābha); S ii.98; iv.160 (opp. adhimatta); A iv.241; v.63; It 71; Sn 61, 390 (˚pañña of inferior wisdom, cp. Nd2 415), 1097 (id.); J i.221; Dhs 181, 584, 1018, 1034 (cp. Dhs trsl. 265, 269); DA i.119; KhA 133 (˚dīpā the 2,000 inferior islands), 176 (500 do.); PvA 198; Sdhp 251, 261. Synonyms: appaka, omaka, lāmaka, dukkha Nd2 414; catukka Nd2 415 (opp. mahā); appaka PvA 48, 60; appama taka PvA 262; ittara PvA 60; oma SnA 347; oraka SnA 489; lāmaka SnA 347. Paritta
Paritta2
(nt.) & Parittā (f.) [fr. pari+trā, cp. tāṇa, tāyati & also parittāna] protection, safeguard; (protective) charm, palliative, amulet Vin ii.110 (atta˚ f. personal protection) iv.305 (gutt' atthāya ˚ŋ pariyāpuṇāti); A ii.73 (rakkhā+parittā); J i.200 (manto+parittaŋ+ vaḍḍhiŋ), 396 (paccekabuddhehi ˚ŋ kārāpeti makes them find a safeguard through the P.); iv.31 (osadhaŋ vā ˚ŋ vā); Miln 150 (f. & nt.). -- Var. parittās in the way of Suttantas are mentioned at Vism 414 (Khandha˚; Dhajagga˚: S i.218 sq.; Āṭānāṭiya˚: D iii.195 sq.; Mora˚: J ii.33). Cf. Dialogues iii.185.

-- vālikā sand worn on the head as an amulet J i.396, 399. -- suttaka a thread worn round the head as a charm J i.396, 399. -- 427 -- Parittaka
Parittaka
[paritta1+ka] small, insignificant, little Nd1 306 (for appaka etc. as at Nd2 414); Pv i.1011; ii.967; Miln 121 (a˚), 253; DA i.170 (for appa); PvA 51; Sdhp 42. -- f. parittikā Th 1, 377. Parittāṇa
Parittāṇa
(nt.) [pari+tāṇa. Cp. Epic Sk. paritrāṇa] pro- tection, shelter, refuge, safeguard, safety D i.9 (sara˚ from an arrow, i. e. a shield); iii.189; J vi.455; PvA 284; Sdhp 396.

-- kitikā a protecting arrangement Vin ii.152, cp. Vin. Texts iii.174. Parittāyaka
Parittāyaka
(adj.) [fr. pari+tāyati] safeguarding against, sheltering against, keeping away from Vism 376 (angāra -- vassaŋ p. thero). Parittāsin
Parittāsin
(adj.) [pari+tāsin, fr. tāsa of tasati2] being in dread of ( -- ˚) S i.201. Paridaṇḍa
Paridaṇḍa
(adj.) [pari+daṇḍa] "with a stick around," i. e. surrounded by a stick; only in one phrase viz. "saparidaṇḍā iṭṭhi" a woman protected by a stick, or liable to punishment (?), in stock phrase enumerating 10 kinds of women M i.286 = iii.46=Vin iii.139=A v.264= VvA 73. Paridamana
Paridamana
(nt.) [pari+damana] controlling, taming Vism 375. Paridameti
Paridameti
[pari+dameti] to control, tame, keep under Vism 376. Paridahati
Paridahati
[pari+dahati, of dhā] to put round, put on, clothe Dh 9 (fut. ˚dahessati); J ii.197; v.434 (ger. ˚dahitvā); vi.500; Pv ii.118; PvA 76 (vatthāni), 77, 127 (˚dahissati for paridhassati Pv ii.936, which read for T. parivassati). ger also paridayha J v.400 ( = nivāsetvā cp pārupitvā ca C.). -- pp. paridahita (q. v.). -> Caus. II. paridahāpeti to cause to be clothed PvA 49 (=acchādeti). Paridahita
Paridahita
[pp. of paridahati] put round, put on (of clothing) PvA 43. Paridīpaka
Paridīpaka
(adj.) [fr. paridīpeti, cp, dīpaka1] illuminating, explaining, explanatory SnA 40 Paridīpana
Paridīpana
(nt.) [pari+dīpana] illuminating, elucidating, explanation Miln 318; KhA 111; SnA 394 sq. Paridīpanā
Paridīpanā
(f.) [fr. paridīpeti, cp. paridīpana] explanation, illustration Miln 131. Paridīpita
Paridīpita
[pp. of paridīpeti] 1. in flames, set ablaze Th 2, 200 ( = punappunaŋ ādīpitatāya p. ThA 170), -- 2. explained, made clear, illuminated Vism 58; KvuA 8; Sdhp 305. Paridīpeti
Paridīpeti
[pari+dīpeti] to make bright, to illustrate, to explain Miln 131; Sdhp 491. -- pp. paridīpita (q. v.). Paridūseti
Paridūseti
[pari+dūseti] to spoil altogether, to ruin, corrupt, defile Sdhp 409. Parideva
Parideva
[pari+deva of div, devati; only in one passage of Epic Sk. (Mbhār. vii.3014); otherwise paridevana nt.] lamentation, wailing M i.200; S ii.1; iii.3 sq.; A i.144; ii.195; Sn 328, 592, 811, 923, 969; J i.146; vi,188, 498; Nd1 128, 134, 370, 492; Ps i.11 sq., 38, 59, 65; Vbh 100, 137; Nett 29. It is exegetically paraphrased at D ii.306 = Nd2 416 (under pariddava) with synonyms ādeva p. ādevanā paridevanā ādevitattaŋ paridevitattaŋ; often combd with soka grief, e. g. at D i.36; Sn 862; It 89; PvA 39, 61. -- Bdhgh at DA i.121 explns it as "sokaŋ nissita -- lālappana -- lakkhaṇo p." Paridevati
Paridevati
[pari+devati, div] to wail, lament D ii.158 (mā socittha mā paridevittha); Sn 582, 774 = Nd1 38 (as ˚devayati), 166; J vi.188, 498; PvA 18 (socati+); ger. ˚devamāna S i.199, 208; J v.106; PvA 38, & ˚devayamāna Sn 583. -- grd. ˚devaniya Nd1 492; SnA 573, & ˚devaneyya Sn 970 (=ādevaneyya Nd1 493). -- pp. paridevita (q. v.). Paridevanā
Paridevanā
(f.) = parideva, Sn 585; Nd2 416 (see under parideva) Pv i.43 (=vācā -- vippalāpa PvA 18); i.123; PvA 41. Paridevita
Paridevita
(nt.) [pp. of paridevati] lamentation, wailing Sn 590; Pv i.123 ( = ruditaŋ PvA 63); Miln 148 (kanditap.˚ -- lālappita -- mukha). Paridevitatta
Paridevitatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. paridevita] lamentation etc.; only exegetical construction in expln of parideva at D ii.306 = Nd2 416. Pariddava
Pariddava
[according to Trenckner M i.532 (on M i.56, where SS read p., whereas BB have parideva) the metrical substitute for parideva; therefore not = Sk. paridrava, which is only a late re -- translation of the P. word]=parideva M i.56 (soka˚); A i.221; Th 2, 345 (soka˚); Sn 1052, cp. Nd2 416 (see parideva). Paridhaŋsaka
Paridhaŋsaka
(adj.) [fr. paridhaŋsati] destructive, ruinous PvA 15 (˚vacano speaking destructively, scandalmonger). Paridhaŋsati
Paridhaŋsati
[pari+dhaŋsati] to be deprived, to lose, to come to ruin It 90; Miln 249, 265. -- Caus. paridhaŋseti in same meaning at Nd1 5. It is almost synonymous with paripatati & parihāyati. Paridhāvati
Paridhāvati
[pari+dhāvati] to run about J i.127 (ādhā- vati+), 134 (id.), 158 (id.); ii.68 (id.) = ThA 54; v.106. Paridhota
Paridhota
[pp. of paridhovati] washed, rinsed, cleansed, purified D i.124. Paridhovati
Paridhovati
[pari+dhovati] to wash (all round), cleanse, clean Vin i.302. -- pp. paridhota. Pariniṭṭhāna
Pariniṭṭhāna
(nt.) [pari+niṭṭhāna] 1. end PvA 287. - 2. accomplishment J v.400. Pariniṭṭhāpeti
Pariniṭṭhāpeti
[pari+niṭṭhāpeti] to bring to an end, attain, accomplish DhsA 363. Pariniṭṭhita
Pariniṭṭhita
(adj.) [pari+niṭṭhita] accomplished M iii.53; Th 2, 283; DhA ii.78. Parininna
Parininna
(adj.) [pari+ninna] deeply hollowed, sunken Sdhp 103. Parinipphanna
Parinipphanna
(adj.) [pari+nipphanna] predetermined Kvu 459 (v. l. ˚nibbāna), 626 (a˚); cp. Kvu trsl. 2616, 3681. Parinibbāna
Parinibbāna
(nt.) [pari+nibbāna] "complete Nibbāna" in two meanings: 1. complete extinction of khandhalife; i. e. all possibility of such life & its rebirth, final release from (the misery of) rebirth and transmigration, death (after the last life -- span of an Arahant). This is the so -- called "an -- upādi -- sesa Parinibbāna," or "extinction with no rebirth -- substratum left." -- 2. release from cravings & attachment to life, emancipation (in this life) with the assurance of final death; freedom of spirit, calm, perfect well -- being or peace of soul. This is the so -- called "sa -- upādisesa -- P.," or "extinction (of passion) with some substratum left." -- The two kinds are distinguished by Bdhgh at DhA ii.163 as follows: "arahatta -- pattito paṭṭhāya kilesa -- vaṭṭassa khepitattā sa -- upādi -- sesena, carima -- citta -- nirodhena khandhavaṭṭassa khepitattā an -- upādi -- sesena cā ti dvīhi pi parinibbānehi parinibbutā, an -- upādāno viya padīpo apaṇṇattika -- bhāvaŋ gatā." -- 1. D ii.72 sq. (the famous Mahā -- parinibbāna -- suttanta or "Book of the Great Decease"); M iii.127, 128; A ii.79 (˚samaye); iii.409 (˚dhamma, contrasted with āpāyika nerayika, cp. DhA iv.42); Mhvs 7, 1 (˚mañcamhi nipanna); VvA 158; PvA 244. -- 2. D iii.55; A v.64; Sn 514 (˚gata+ vitiṇṇa -- kankho); Vv 5324 (˚gata+sītibhūta). This state of final emancipation (during life) has also received the determination of anupādā -- parinibbāna, i. e. emancipation without ground. for further clinging (lit. without fuel), which corresponds to Bdhgh's term "kilesavaṭṭassa khepitattā sa -- upādi -- sesa p." (see above); thus at M i.148; S iv.48; v.29; A i.44; v.65 (nicchāto nibbuto sītibhūto etc).; A v.233 = 253=Dh 89 (+khīṇāsava). -- 428 -- Parinibbānika
Parinibbānika
(adj.) [fr. parinibbāna] one who is destined to or that which leads to complete extinction D iii.264; 265 (opasamika+). Parinibbāpana
Parinibbāpana
(nt.) [pari+nibbāpana] refreshing, cooling, quenching; controlling, subduing, training Ps i.174 (atta -- damatha, atta -- samatha, atta -- p.). Parinibbāpetar
Parinibbāpetar
[n. ag. fr. parinibbāpeti] one who pacifies, a calmer, trainer M ii.102 (dametar sametar p.). Parinibbāpeti
Parinibbāpeti
[pari+nibbāpeti] to bring to complete coolness, or training (see next), emancipation or cessation of the life -- impulse, to make calm, lead to Nibbāna, to exercise self -- control, to extinguish fever of craving, or fire of rāga, dosa, moha. Always coupled with the quâsi synonyms sameti & dameti (cp. damatha samatha parinibbāpana) D iii.61 = A iii.46 (attānaŋ dameti, sameti, p.); M i.45 (fut. ˚bbapessati); A ii.68 (attānaŋ d. s. p.). -- pp. parinibbuta (see p. No. 3) & parinibbāpita (only in n. ag. ˚āpetar, q. v.). Parinibbāyati
Parinibbāyati
(& ˚nibbāti) [pari+nibb˚ cp. BSk. pari- nirvāti Divy 150 (Buddhā Bhagavantaḥ parinirvānti) & ger. parinirvātavya ibid. 402] 1. to be completed, perfected, in any work or art, e. g. of a trained horse, M i.446. Cp. teleio/w. -- 2. to die without being reborn, to reach complete extinction of existence Vin ii.194 (Tathāgathā ˚āyanti); M iii.128 (aor ˚nibbāyi); S v.152 (˚nibbāyeyyaŋ), 261 (˚nibbāyissāmi); A ii.120 (anupādisesāya nibbāna -- dhātuyā p.); iv.202 (id.), 313 (id.), Miln 175 (id.); J i.28 (id.), 55 (id.); VvA 158 (fut. ˚nibbāyissāmi); PvA 21, 283 (of a Paccekabuddha). -> 2. to become emancipated from all desire of life D ii.68 (cp. Dial. ii.65 & Brethren 417); S iv.102 (diṭṭh' eva dhamme), ibid. (sa -- upādāno devānaŋ indo na parinibbāyati), 168; A iii.41 = Vin ii.148, 164 (parinibbāti anāsavo); A iv.98 (aor. ˚nibbiŋsu anāsavā) Th 1, 100 (fut. ˚nibbissati anāsavo), 364; It 93 (˚nibbanti), cp. 95; Dh 126 (˚nibbanti anāsavā perhaps better taken to No. 1!); Vbh 426 (sabbāsave pariññāya parinibbanti anāsavā); Sdhp 584 (˚nibbanti mahoghen' eva aggino). -- pp. parinibbuto (q. v.). -> Caus. parinibbāpeti (q. v.). Parinibbāyana
Parinibbāyana
(nt.) [abstr. fr. parinibbāyin] passing away, see parinibbāyin 2 b. Parinibbāyin
Parinibbāyin
[fr. parinibbāyati] one who attains Pari- nibbāna. Of the 2 meanings registered under parinibbāna we find No. 1 only in a very restricted use, when taken in both senses of sa -- and an -- upādisesa parinibbāna; e. g. at A ii.155 sq., where the distinction is made between a sa -- sankhāra p. and an a -- sankhāra p., as these two terms also occur in the fivefold classification of "Never -- returners" (i. e. those who are not reborn) viz. antarā -- parinibbāyin, upahacca˚, sasankhāra˚, uddhaŋsota, akaniṭṭhagāmin. Thus at D iii.237; S v.201, 237; A i.233; iv.14, 71 sq., 146, 380; v.120; Pug 16, 17. -- 2. In the sense of Parinibbāna No. 2 (i. e. sa -- upādisesa p.) we find parinibbāyin almost as an equivalent of arahant in two combns, viz. (a) tattha˚ (always combd with opapātika, i. e. above the ordinary cause of birth) [cp. BSk. tatra -- parinirvāyin anāgāmin Divy 533]. It is also invariably combd with anāvattidhamma, e. g. at D i.156; iii.108, 132; M ii.56, 146; A i.232; 245, 290; ii.5, 89, 238; iv.12, 399, 423; v.343; S v.346 (cp. 406), 357; Pug 16, 62, 83. See also Kvu trsl. 742. -- (b) antara˚ [cp. BSk. antarāparinirvāyin MVastu i.33] one who passes away in the middle of his term of life in a particular heaven; an Anāgāmin (cp. Bdhgh's expln at PugA 198 as "āyuvemajjhassa antarā yeva parinibbāyanato a. p.") S v.69 = A iv.70; S v.201= 204, 237, 285, 314, 378; A ii.134; Ps i.161; Pug 16; Nett 190 (cp. A iv.380). Parinibbuta
Parinibbuta
(adj.) [pari+nibbuta] completely calmed, at peace, at rest (as to the distinction of the twofold application see parinibbāna and cp., Mrs. Rh.D. Buddhism p. 191; Cpd. p. 168), viz. -- 1. gone out, or passed away without any remaining cause of rebirth anywhere, completely extinct, finally released (fr. rebirth & trans migration), quite dead or at rest [cp. BSk. parinirvṛta Divy 79]. It is usually applied to the Buddha, or the Tathāgatha, but also to Theras & Arahants who have by means of moral & intellectual perfection destroyed all germs of further existence. With ref. to Gotama Buddha: Vin ii.284 (atikkhippaŋ Bhagavā p.), 294 (vassasata˚ e Bhagavati); v.119, 120; D i.204 (acira -- ˚e Bhagavati); S i.158 (Tathāgato p. ii.191); v.172 (˚e Tathāgate); Vv iii.97 (˚e Gotame = anupādisesāya nibbāna -- dhātuyā parinibbuto VvA 169); PvA 140 (Satthari p.), 212 (Bhagavati). Of others: S i.121, 122 (Godhika); iii.124 (Vakkali); iv.63 (Puṇṇa); Sn p. 59, 60 (a Thera); Miln 390 (Arahant); VvA 158; PvA 76; DhA ii.163; iv.42. -- 2. emancipated, quite free (from earthly bonds), calm, serene, at peace, perfected Vin ii.156=A i.138 "spiritually free" Vin. Texts iii.182); D ii.123 (cp. Dial. ii.132); iii.55; M i.235; ii.102; S i.1 (+tiṇṇo loke visattikaŋ), 7=iv.179 (aheṭhayāno+); i.54 (+tiṇṇo loke visattikaŋ); 187 (p. kankhati kālaŋ); Sn 359 (+ṭhitatta), 370 (id.), 467 (p. udaka -- rahado va sīto); Th 1, 5 (cp. Brethren 113); J iv.303, 453; Ud 85 (rāga -- dosa -- moha -- kkhayā p.); Miln 50 (˚atta), Freq. in combn with kindred terms like sītibhūta (cooled), e. g. Vin ii.156=A i.138; Vv 5324; or nicchāta (without hunger), e. g. S iii.26; iv.204= It 46; Sn 735 sq.; It 48 (esanānaŋ khayā), 49 (āsavānaŋ khayā). -- 3. (to be understood as pp. of parinibbāpeti) calmed, well trained, domesticated M i.446 (of a horse). Parinimmita
Parinimmita
at Dhs 1280 read para˚. Paripakka
Paripakka
(adj.) [pari+pakka] 1. (quite) ripe, ripened, matured, developed D i.54; S iv.105 = DA i.50; A iv.357; Dh 260; J i.91, 231; vi.1 (ap˚); Ud 36 (id.); Miln 194, 288; DhA iii.338; KhA 56; ThA 273; PvA 274 (su˚). -- 2. overripe, rotten Miln 223. Paripakkata
Paripakkata
[pp. of pari+pakkirati] scattered Th 2, 391 (reading doubtful). Paripaccati
Paripaccati
[pari+paccati] to become ripe, to heal (of a wound) Miln 112. Paripaccana
Paripaccana
(nt.) [pari+paccana] ripening, healing (of a wound) Miln 112. Paripañhati
Paripañhati
[denom. fr. pari+pañha] to question A v.16. Paripaṭati
Paripaṭati
[doublet of paripatati] to go to ruin, to come to fall, to come to naught Miln 91 (opp. sambhavati); combd with paridhaŋsati at Nd1 5; Miln 249, 265. Paripatati
Paripatati
[pari+patati, cp. nipatati] to fall down, to fall off from (abl.) Vin ii.152 sq.; J v.417, 420; Pv iv.53 (bhūmiyaŋ) DA i.132; PvA 37, 47, 55, 62. -- Caus. paripāteti (q. v.). -- See also paripaṭati. Paripantha
Paripantha
[pari+pantha] 1. "way round," edge, border; paripanthe in ambush (near a road) M i.87; J iii.65. -> 2. obstacle, hindrance, danger. It refers esp. to danger arising out of mishaps to or bad conditions of roads in the forests. D i.52; S i.43; A i.153; iii.252; v.136; Ps i.162; J i.395; iii.268; iv.17; vi.57 (n. pl. ˚ayo = kilesaparipanthā C.), 75; DhA i.14 (magga˚), 16 (id.), 51, 69; migānaŋ p. danger to the crops from (the nuisance of) deer J i.143, 154. -- saparipantha full of danger DhA i.63. See also palipatha. -- 429 -- Paripanthika
Paripanthika
(adj.) [fr. paripantha] forming or causing an obstacle A i.161. The usual form is pāri˚ (q. v.). Paripanna
Paripanna
see palipanna. Paripāka
Paripāka
[fr. pari+pac] 1. ripeness, maturity, develop- ment, perfection D i.9 (cp. DA i.94); Ud 36 (pañca dhammā paripākāya saŋvattanti); J i.142, 148; vi.236; Miln 288; Vism 116 (bodhi˚), 199; DhA i.89 (˚gatatta nt. state of perfection); ThA 79; PvA 276. -- 2. overripeness, decay, collapse, only in phrase "indriyānaŋ p.," i. e. decay of the (mental) faculties, in formula defining jarā (old age) at D ii.305; M i.49; S ii.2, 42 sq.; A v.203; Nd2 252; Dhs 644; cp. BSk. indriyaparipāka AvŚ ii.110. Paripācana
Paripācana
(nt.) [pari+pācana1] ripening, maturing, digestion Vims 351, 363, 365. Paripācaniya
Paripācaniya
(adj.) [fr. paripācana] bringing to maturity, leading to perfection, accomplishing, only in phrase vimuttiparipācaniyā dhammā (5) things achieving emancipation (see Ud 36) S iv.105 = DA i.50; ThA 273. Paripāceti
Paripāceti
[pari+pāceti, Caus. of pacati] to bring to maturity, to cause to ripen, to develop, prepare J vi.373 (atthaŋ p. ˚ācayitvā = vaḍḍhetvā C.); Miln 232, 285, 288, 296. -- pp. paripācita Vism 365. Paripātita
Paripātita
[pp. of paripāteti] attacked, pursued, brought into difficulty VvA 336. Paripāteti
Paripāteti
(or ˚pāṭeti) [Caus. of paripatati. Cp. BSk. pari- pāṭayati to destroy Divy 417] to cause to fall down, to bring to ruin, to attack, pursue Vin iv.115; J ii.208; iii.380; Miln 279, 367; KhA 73 (see App. II. p. 353 n. 9). -- pp. paripātita (q. v.). Paripālita
Paripālita
[pp. of paripāleti] guarded Vism 74. Paripāleti
Paripāleti
[pari+pāleti] to watch, guard (carefully) PvA 130 ( = rakkhati). -- pp. paripālita (q. v.). -- Pass. ˚pāliyati Nett 105 (=rakkhitaŋ). Paripīta
Paripīta
(adj.) [pari+pīta] very dear, highly valued Sdhp 571. Paripīḷita
Paripīḷita
(adj.) [pari+pīlita, pp. of pīḍ] oppressed, vexed, injured Miln 97 (aggi -- santāpa -- pariḷāha˚), 303 jighacchāya). Paripuochaka
Paripuochaka
(adj.) [fr. pari+prc̣h] asking a question, enquiring Nd1 234 = Nd2 386; Sdhp 90. -- f. abstr. paripucchakatā questioning Vism 132 (one of the 7 constituents of dhamma -- vicaya -- sambojjhanga). Paripucchati
Paripucchati
[pari+pucchati] to ask a question, to interro- gate, inquire Vin i.47 = 224; ii.125; S i.98; A v.16; Sn 380, 696 (˚iyāna ger.), 1025; Pug 41; Miln 257, 408; SnA 111. Paripucchā
Paripucchā
(f.) [pari+pucchā] question, interrogation Vin i.190 (uddesa+); ii.219 (id.); A i.285; Nd1 234 = Nd2 386 (cp. SnA iii). See also uddesa. Paripuñchati
Paripuñchati
[pari+puñchati] to wipe off, stroke down Vin iii.14 (pāṇinā gattāni p.). Paripuṇṇa
Paripuṇṇa
(adj.) [pp. of paripūrati] 1. (quite) full, fulfilled, complete, finished, satisfied M i.200 (˚sankappa), iii.276; S ii.283; iv.104; v.315; Ps i.172 ( = pariggah' aṭṭhena parivār' aṭṭhena, paripūr' aṭṭhena p., i. e. acquiring, keeping, fulfilling); Sn 889 (˚mānin=samatta -- mānin Nd1 298), 904; It 40 (˚sekha); Pv iv.163; Vism 45 (˚sankappa): PvA 13, 54 (˚vassa whose years are completed, i. e. old enough for ordination), 68 (˚gabbha ready to be delivered), 77 (vārinā). -- 2, complete, i. e. not defective, perfect, sound, healthy Sn 548 (˚kāya= lakkhaṇehi puṇṇatāya ahīn' anga -- paccangatāya ca paripuṇṇa -- sarīro SnA 452); Miln 249. Paripuṇṇatā
Paripuṇṇatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. paripuṇṇa] fullness, complete- ness SnA 452. Paripūra
Paripūra
(adj.) [pari+pṛ] full, complete, perfected, accom- plished D i.75; i.133; iii.94; S ii.32; iv.247; v.269 (f. ˚ī); A ii.77; v.10 sq.; Sn 205, 1017; Ps i.15, 18, 49, 172; ii.122; Pug 35, 36. -- aparipūra not completed, imperfect, incomplete A ii.77; iv.314 sq.; v.10 sq; It 107; Pug 35, 36.

-- kāritā completion M i.64, 66 sq. -- kārin completing, fulfilling, making complete, doing to the full M i.33 sq., 64; S v.201; A ii.136; iii.215; iv.380; v.131 sq.; Pug 37; Miln 243. Paripūraka
Paripūraka
(adj.( ( -- ˚) one who fills, filling Vism 300 (ni- raya˚). Paripūraṇa
Paripūraṇa
(nt.) [fr. paripūreti] fulfilment, completion Vism 3 (sīla˚). See pāripūraṇa. Paripūrati
Paripūrati
[pari+pūrati] to become full or perfect Dh 38; J iv.273 (devaloko p.); Miln 395 (sāmaññaŋ); fut. paripūrissati DhA i.309. -- Pass. paripūriyati to be fulfilled or perfected DhA i.309. -- pp. paripuṇṇa (q. v.). -- Caus. paripūreti (q. v.). Paripūratta
Paripūratta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. paripūra] fullness, complete- ness, completion S v.200 sq. (+samatta). Paripūrita
Paripūrita
[pp. of paripūreti] filled (to overflowing), full PvA 216. Paripūrī
Paripūrī
(f.) [fr. paripūra, but better spelt pāripūrī, q. v.] fulfilment, completion S i.139. Paripūreti
Paripūreti
[Caus. of paripūrati] to fulfil; to fill (up), make more full, supplement, fill out, add to D i.74 (parisandeti p. parippharati; DA i.217 explns as "vāyunā bhastaŋ viya pūreti"); ii.221; M iii.92; S i.27 (devakāyaŋ) = 30; ii.29, 32; iii.93 (sāmaññatthaŋ)=A ii.95= It 90; Pv ii.945 (ppr. ˚ayanto); Pug 31, 35; Miln 349 (lekhaŋ); PvA 29 (sāgaraŋ), 30 (ñātidhammo ˚pūretabbo), 136 (vassasahassāni); Sdhp 371. -- ppr. med. ˚pūramāna D i.103. -- pp. paripūrita (q. v.). Paripothita
Paripothita
[pp. of paripotheti] beaten, whipped Miln 188 (laguḷehi). Parippharati
Parippharati
[pari+sphur] to pervade D i.74 ( = samantato phusati DA i.217); M iii.92 sq. See also paripūreti -> pp. paripphuta & ˚pphuṭṭha (q. v.). Paripphuṭṭha
Paripphuṭṭha
[pp. of parippharati] filled, pervaded D i.75; M iii.94 (spelt here paripphuta). Cp. BSk. parisphuṭa MVastu ii.349; iii.274; Lal. Vist. 33, 385. Paripphosakaŋ
Paripphosakaŋ
(adv.) [either with Kern. Toev, s. v. ger. of paripphoseti (i. e. paripphosa)+kaŋ or preferably with Trenckner, Notes 80 absolutive in ˚aka (i. e. nt. formation fr. adj. paripphosa, as phenuddeha+kaŋ etc.). Cp. also Geiger P.Gr. § 62. 1] sprinkled all round D i.74; M i.276; ii.15; iii.92; expld as "siñcitvā" at DA i.218. Paripphosita
Paripphosita
[pp. of paripphoseti] sprinkled all round J vi.51, 481 (candana sāra˚). Paripphoseti
Paripphoseti
[pari+Caus. of pruṣ] to sprinkle over, Vin ii.209 (udakena ˚pphositvā; so read for ˚ppositvā); A i.257; J vi.566; Pv iii.102 (˚itvā = āsiñcitvā PvA 231). -- pp. paripphosita (q. v.). -- 430 -- Pariplava
Pariplava
[fr. pari+plu] unsteady, wavering, swerving about Dh 38 ( = upplavana DhA i.309). Pariplavati
Pariplavati
[pari+plu] to quiver, roam about, swerve J iii.484 (ppr. pariplavanto = upplavamāna C. -- pp. paripluta (q. v.). Paripluta
Paripluta
[pp. of pariplavati] immersed, drenched J vi.78 ( = nimugga C.); Dāvs iii.34. Pariphandati
Pariphandati
[pari+spand] to tremble, quiver, throb, waver Sn 776 (cp. Nd1 46 sq.), 1145; Dh 34 ( = saṇṭhātuŋ na sakkoti DhA i.289); J iv.93; Miln 91, 249. -> pp. pariphandita (q.v.). Pariphandita
Pariphandita
[pp. of pariphandati] wavered, trembled, quivered J iii.24. Paribandha
Paribandha
at ThA 242 is C. reading for paripantha at Th 2, 352; also at Vism 147, 152. Paribādheti
Paribādheti
[pari+bādh] to oppress, attack PvA 193 ( = hiŋsati). Paribāhati
Paribāhati
[pari+bāhati or preferably bāheti: see bahati3] to keep out, keep away from, hinder J i.204 (ger. ˚bāhiya); PvA 214 (˚bāhire). Paribāhira
Paribāhira
(adj.) [pari+bāhira] external, alien to; an outsider Vin ii.140; iv.283; S i.126; J i.482; iii.213; Nd1 144; (parimussati p. hoti, in expln of mussati) Vism 54; PvA 131; ThA 204; DA i.30. Paribbajati
Paribbajati
[pari+vraj] to wander about (as a religious mendicant) Sn 74, 639; It 109; Dh 346, 415; J iv.452. Paribbaya
Paribbaya
[pari+vaya, i. e. *vyaya] 1. earned money, earnings, wages J i.156 (˚ŋ datvā), 296 (id.), 433; iv.170; DhA iv.196. -- 2, expense, expenditure J ii.213, (nivāsa˚ expense for a lodging), 249, 368; iii.287 (˚ŋ karoti to invest); vi.383; VvA 75; PvA 3 (sahassaŋ sahassaŋ ˚ŋ karoti), 97 (nicca˚); Dāvs v.66. Paribbasāna
Paribbasāna
(adj.) [ppr. med. of pari+vas] abiding, staying by Sn 796 ( = vasamāna SnA 529; sakāya diṭṭhiyā vasanti Nd1 102), 878, 880, 895. Paribbāja
Paribbāja
= paribbājaka S i.49; Sn 134; Dh 313; DhA iii.485. ˚vata the vow of a p. ThA 73. Paribbājaka
Paribbājaka
[fr. pari+vraj] a wandering man, a Wanderer, wandering religious mendicant, not necessarily Buddhist (cp. Muir, J.R.A.S. 1866, 321; Lassen, Ind. Alt ii.114, 277, 468; Vin. Texts i.41) Vin i.342; iv.285 (bhikkhuñ ca sāmaṇerañ ca ṭhapetvā yo koci paribbājaka -- samāpanno); D i.157; iii.1 sq., 35 sq., 53 sq., 130 sq.; M i.64, 84; S i.78; ii.22, 119, 139; iii.257 sq.; iv.230, 251, 391 sq.; A i.115, 157, 185, 215; ii.29 sq., 176; iv.35 sq., 338, 378; v.48 sq.; Sn 537, 553; J i.85; Ud 14, 65; DA i.35; PvA 31. -- f. paribbājikā Vin iv.285; M i.305; S iii.238 sq.; Ud 13, 43 sq. Paribbājana
Paribbājana
(nt.) [fr. paribbajati] wandering about or practising the customs of a mendicant SnA 434. Paribbājayitar
Paribbājayitar
[n. ag. of paribbajati] one who indulges in the practice of a Wanderer, fig. one who leads a virtuous ascetic life Sn 537 (T. ˚vajjayitā). Perhaps we should read ˚bājayitvā for ˚bājayitā, cp. SnA 434 nikkhamet[v]ā niddhamet[v]ā. Paribbūḷha
Paribbūḷha
(adj.) [pp. of paribrūhati] encompassed, pro- vided with, surrounded A iii.34; Sn 301 ( = parikiṇṇa SnA 320); J iv.120; v.68, 322, 417; vi.452. Paribbhamati
Paribbhamati
[pari+bhamati] 1. to walk or roam about PvA 6, 47 (ito c' ito), 63 (saŋsāre), 100, 166 (saŋsare). -> 2. to reel about J iii.288; iv.407. -- Caus. ˚bbhameti to make reel round J vi.155. Paribyattatā
Paribyattatā
(f.) [pari+vyatta+tā] great distinction, clearness; wide experience, learnedness Miln 349. Paribrahaṇa
Paribrahaṇa
(nt.) [to bṛh, see paribrūhati & cp. late Sk. paribarhaṇā] growth, increase, promotion Th 1, p. 2n. Cp. paribrūhana. Paribrūhati
Paribrūhati
[pari+brūhati of bṛh2] to augment, increase, do with zest VvA 115. -- Caus. ˚brūheti [cp. Sk. paribṛnhayati] to make strong, increase J v.361 (aparibrūhayi aor. med. with a˚ neg., i. e. was weakened, lost his strength; but expld by C. as "atibrūhesi mahāsaddaŋ nicchāresi," thus taking it to brū to speak, which is evidently a confusion). -- pp. paribbūḷha & paribrūhita (q. v.). Paribrūhana
Paribrūhana
(nt.) [fr. paribrūhati, cp. upabrūhana] augmentation, increase Nett 79. Paribrūhita
Paribrūhita
[pp. of paribrūheti] increased, furthered, strengthened ThA 245. Paribhaṭṭha
Paribhaṭṭha1
[pp. of paribhassati of bhraś] fallen, dropped J i.482; Th 1, p. 12n. Paribhaṭṭha
Paribhaṭṭha2
[pp. of paribhāsati] abused, censured, scolded J vi.187. Paribhaṇḍa
Paribhaṇḍa
[for paribandha, dialectical, see Kern, Toev. i.36, who compares Tamil panda "a surrounding wall" = P. bandha. The meaning is rather uncertain, cp. notes in Vin. Texts ii.154; iii.85, 213] 1. a binding along the back Vin i.254, 297; ii.116; J v.254 (v. l. ˚daṇḍa). -- 2. a girdle, belt J vi.125; DhA ii.174. -> 3. a plastered flooring Vin ii.113, 172, 220; J iii.384; iv.92; v.437, 440. -- 4. slough of a serpent (?) J vi.339. -- 5. (˚ -- ) adj. encircling, comprehensive, in ˚ñāṇa Vism 429. Paribhata
Paribhata
[pp. of pari+bhṛ] nurtured, nourished M ii.56 (sukha˚). Also in expln of pāribhaṭyatā (q. v.). Paribhava
Paribhava
[pari+bhū] contempt, disrespect Vin iv.241; A iii.191; J v.436; vi.164; Vbh 353 sq.; PvA 257. Paribhavana
Paribhavana
(nt.) = paribhava DA i.255. Paribhavati
Paribhavati
[pari+bhū], also paribhoti to treat with contempt, to neglect, despise S i.69; A iii.174 sq. (˚bhoti); J iii.16; v.442; Miln 23, 259; PvA 266. -> grd. paribhotabba S i.69; Sn p. 93. ( = paribhavitabba SnA 424). -- Caus. paribhāveti; pp. paribhūta (q. v.). Paribhāvanā
Paribhāvanā
(f.) [fr. paribhāveti] permeation, penetration DhsA 163 ( = vāsanā). Paribhāvita
Paribhāvita
[pp. of paribhāveti] 1. penetrated, supplied, filled with, trained, set D ii.81 (saddhā -- p. cittaŋ, sīla˚ etc.; trsl. "set round with," cp. Dial. ii.86), cp. S v.369; Sn 23 (cittaŋ p.; SnA 37 saŋvāsiya); Miln 361; PvA 139 (˚aya bhāvanāya codito). -- 2. compounded of, mixed with J i.380, cp. iv.407; PvA 191. -- 3. fostered, treated, practised Miln 394 (bhesajjena kāyaŋ); PvA 257. -- 4. sat on (said of eggs), being hatched M i.104; S iii.153; A iv.125 sq., 176. Paribhāveti
Paribhāveti
[Caus. of paribhavati] to cause to be per- vaded or penetrated, to treat, supply Vin i.279 (uppalahatthāni bhesajjehi p.); J iv.407. -- pp. paribhāvita (q. v.). Paribhāsa
Paribhāsa
[fr. pari+bhāṣ] censure, abuse, blame J v.373; PvA 175. Paribhāsaka
Paribhāsaka
(adj.) [fr. paribhāsa, cp. BSk. paribhāṣaka Divy 38] reviling, abusing, abusive S i.34; A iv.79; Pv i.116 ( = akkosaka PvA 58); iv.84; VvA 69. See also akkosaka. -- 431 -- Paribhāsati
Paribhāsati
[pari+bhāṣ, cp. BSk. paribhāṣate Divy 38] to abuse, scold, revile, censure, deiame S i.221; iv.61; Vin iv.265; Sn 134, 663; J i.112, 384 (for ˚hāsiŋsu) 469; iii.421; iv.285 (read paribhāsentī for aribhāsentī); v.294; vi.523; Pv ii.108; Pug 37; Miln 186; PvA 43. -- aor. ˚bhāsissaŋ Pv iv.85, pl. ˚bhāsimhase Pv iii.111. grd. ˚bhāsaniya Miln 186. -- Very frequently combd with akkosati (+p.), e. g. at Vin ii.14, 296; Ud 44; Pv i.93; PvA 10. -- pp. paribhaṭṭha2 (q. v.). -- Caus. II. ˚bhāsāpeti id. Pv i.67. Paribhindati
Paribhindati
[pari+bhid] 1. to break up, split, create dis- sension, to set at variance J i.439; iv.196; v.229; vi.368; PvA 13. -- 2. to break (see ˚bhinna). -- pp. paribhinna. Paribhinna
Paribhinna
[pp. of paribhindati] 1. broken, broken up M i.190 (a˚); VvA 184 (˚vaṇṇa of broken up appearance, i. e. crumbly.). -- 2. set at variance, disconcerted, split Vin iii.161; J ii.193; DhsA 308; PvA 13. -- Cp. vi˚ Paribhuñjati
Paribhuñjati
[pari+bhuj] 1. to enjoy, to use, to enjoy the use of Vin ii.109; M i.153 (nivāpaŋ p.), 207, S ii.29; Sn 240, 241, 423; Pv i.12; i.94; iv.52 ( = khādituŋ PvA 259); Nd2 427 (pariyesati paṭilabhati paribhuñjati); Miln 366, 395 (ālopaŋ ˚bhuñjisaŋ); Pv 3, 5 (modake eat up), 8, 13, 23, 47; Sdhp 394. -- grd. ˚bhuñjiya J i.243 (dup˚); & ˚bhuñjitabba PvA 71 (with nt. abstr. ˚tabbatta). -- Pass. ˚bhuñjiyati, ppr. ˚iyamāna S i.90. -- 2. [see bhuñjatī2] to purify, clean, cleanse M i.25; J vi.75. -- pp. paribhutta (q. v.). Paribhuñjana
Paribhuñjana
(nt.) [fr. paribhuñjati] eating PvA 35. Paribhutta
Paribhutta
[pp. of paribhuñjati, cp. BSk. paribhukta Divy 277] used, employed, made use of Vin ii.109 (su˚); J iii.257 (a˚); DA i.261 (sayaŋ ˚bhesajja); SnA 19. Paribhūta
Paribhūta
[pp. of paribhavati] treated with contempt, disregarded, despised Vin iv.6; S ii.279; Miln 229, 288. Paribheda
Paribheda
[fr. pari+bhid, see paribhindati] 1. breaking, breaking up, falling to pieces Dhs 738, 874. -- 2. bursting, breaking open PvA 55. Paribhedaka
Paribhedaka
(adj.) [fr. paribheda in sense of paribhindati] breaking; a disturber of peace, breedbate J ii.173; iii.168; v.245; vi.437. Paribhoga
Paribhoga
[fr. pari+bhuj] 1. material for enjoyment, food, feeding J i.243; ii.432; Miln 156, 403; DhA ii.66; SnA 342. -- 2. enjoyment, use Vin iv.267; S i.90; Nd1 262; Vism 33 (with pariyesana & paṭiggahana); DhA i.60; PvA 25, 26, 220. -- Four paribhogas are distinguished at J v.253 and at Vism 43, viz. theyya˚, iṇa,˚ dāyajja˚, sāmi˚. Paribhoga discussed in relation to paṭilābha at Vism 43.

-- cetiya a tree, shrine etc., used by the Buddha, & consequently sacred KhA 222. -- dhātu a relic consisting of something used by the dead Saint (opp. sarīradhātu, remains of the body) Mhvs 15, 163. (cp. pāribhogika -- dhātu); SnA 579. Paribhojaniya
Paribhojaniya
(or ˚īya) (nt.) [orig. grd. of paribhunjati 2] that which is used for cleaning, water for washing Vin ii.76, 208, 216 (˚ghaṭa), 226 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.8); iii.119 (pāniyaŋ); J i.416; vi.75; DhA i.58. Parima
Parima
= parama (cp. Geiger P.Gr. 191) M iii.112. Parimajjaka
Parimajjaka
(adj.) [fr. pari+marj] touching, reaching (up to) Miln 343 (candasuriya˚, cp. MVastu II, candramasūrya -- parimārjako maharddhiko etc.). Parimajjati
Parimajjati
[pari+majjati] 1. to wipe away, wipe off or out M i.78. -- 2. to touch, stroke D i.78; M iii.12; S ii.121; Dh 394; J i.192, 305; ii.395 (piṭṭhiŋ). -- 3. to rub, polish, groom (a horse) A v.166, 168. -- pp. parimaṭṭha (q. v.). Parimajjana
Parimajjana
(nt.) [fr. parimajjati] 1. wiping off or out Pug 33 (ukkhali˚). -- 2. rubbing, grooming (a horse) A v.166, 168 (ājānīya˚). Parimaṭṭha
Parimaṭṭha
[pp. of parimajjati] rubbed, stroked, polished, in su˚ well polished S ii.102. See also palimaṭṭha. Parimaṇḍala
Parimaṇḍala
(adj.) [pari+maṇḍala] 1. round, circular J i.441; ii.406 (āvāṭa); vi.42; Pv iv.328 (guḷa˚); Dhs 617 (expld at DhsA 317 as "egg -- shaped," kukkuṭ -- aṇḍasaṇṭhāna). -- nt. as adv. in phrase ˚ŋ nivāseti to dress or cover oneself all round Vin i.46; ii.213; iv.185 ( = nābhimaṇḍalaŋ jānu -- maṇḍalaŋ paṭicchādentena C.; cp. timaṇḍala). -- 2. rounded off, i. e. complete, correct, pleasant, in phrase ˚āni padavyañjanāni well sounding words and letters, correct speech Vin ii.316; M i.216; A i.103; DA i.282; SnA 177, 370. Parimaddati
Parimaddati
[pari+mṛd] 1. to rub, crush, rub off, treat, shampoo, massage J iv.137 (sarīraŋ examine the body); Miln 241. -- Of leather (i. e. treat) M. i.128. -- 2. to go together with, to frequent DhA i.90 (samayaŋ p.). -- pp. parimaddita (q. v.). Parimaddana
Parimaddana
(nt.) [fr. pari+mṛd] rubbing, kneading, shampooing, massage; usually in stock phrase (kāyo) anicc' -- ucchādana -- parimaddana -- bhedana -- viddhaŋsanadhammo D i.76 (cp. DA i.88, but trsld at Dial. i.87 as "subject to erasion, abrasion, dissolution and disintegration"); M i.500; S iv.83; J i.416. See further D i.7; A i.62; iv.54 (ucchādana -- p. -- nahāpana -- sambāhana); Miln 241 (ucchādana˚); Sdhp 578. Parimaddita
Parimaddita
[pp. of parimaddati] crushed, rubbed, treated M i.129 (su˚ well -- treated). Parimaddhita
Parimaddhita
[pp. of pari+maddheti, Caus. of mṛdh to neglect] brought to an end or standstill, destroyed J i.145 (˚sankhāra). Parimasati
Parimasati
[pari+mṛś] to touch, stroke, grasp (usually combd with parimajjati), D i.78; ii.17; M i.34, 80; iii.12; S ii.121; iv.173; A iii.70. -- pp. parimaṭṭha (same as pp. of parimajjati), q. v. Parimāṇa
Parimāṇa
(nt.) [of pari+mā] measure, extent, limit, as adj. ( -- ˚) measuring, extending over, comprising J i.45; SnA 1 (pariyatti˚); PvA 113 (yojana˚), 102 (anekabhāra˚). -- neg. aparimāṇa without limit, immeasurable, very great Vin ii.62, 70; S v.430; A ii.182; KhA 248; DA i.288 (˚vaṇṇa); PvA 110, 129. Parimārita
Parimārita
[pp. of pari+māreti, Caus. of mṛ] mortified, only in phrase ˚indriya J i.361; iii.515; iv.9, 306; v.152; Dāvs i.16. Parimita
Parimita
[pp. of parimināti] measured, restricted, limited, only in neg. a˚ measureless Pv ii.811; Miln 287, 343. Parimitatta
Parimitatta
(nt.) [fr. parimita] the condition of being measured PvA 254. Parimināti
Parimināti
[pari+mā] to measure, mete out, estimate, limit, restrict; inf. ˚metuŋ Miln 192; ThA 26; and ˚minituŋ Miln 316; grd. ˚meyya (q. v.). -- pp. parimita (q. v.). Parimeyya
Parimeyya
(adj.) [grd. of parimināti] to be measured, neg. a˚ countless, immeasurable Miln 331, 388; PvA 212. Parimukha
Parimukha
(adj.) [pari+mukha] facing, in front; only as nt. adv. ˚ŋ in front, before, in phrase parimukhaŋ satiŋ upaṭṭhapeti "set up his memory in front" (i. e. of the object of thought), to set one's mindfulness alert Vin i.24; D ii.291; M i.56, 421; S i.170; A iii.92; It 80; Ps i.176 (expld); Pug 68; DA i.210. Also in phrase ˚ŋ kārāpeti (of hair) Vin ii.134 "to cut off (?) the hair in front" (i. e. on the breast) Vin. Texts iii.138, where is quoted Bdhgh's expln "ure loma -- saŋharaṇaŋ." -- 432 -- Parimuccati
Parimuccati
[Pass. of pari+muc] to be released, to be set free, to escape Vin ii.87; M i.8; S i.88, 208; ii.24, 109; iii.40, 150, 179; Miln 213, 335 (jātiyā etc.) aor. ˚mucci M i.153. -- pp. parimutta; Caus. parimoceti (q. v.). Parimuṭṭha
Parimuṭṭha
[pari+muṭṭha, pp. of mussati, cp. pamuṭṭha] forgetful, bewildered Vin i.349 = J iii.488 (=muṭṭhassati C.); cp. Vin. Texts ii.307. Parimutta
Parimutta
[pp. of parimuccati] released, set free, delivered S iii.31. Parimutti
Parimutti
(f.) [fr. pari+muc] release J i.4 (v. 20); Miln 112, 227; PvA 109. Parimussati
Parimussati
[pari+mussati] to become bewildered or disturbed, to vanish, fall off Nd1 144. Parimoceti
Parimoceti
[Caus. of parimuccati] to set free, deliver, release D i.96; J i.28 (v. 203); Miln 334; DA i.263; DhA i.39. Parimohita
Parimohita
(adj.) [pp. of pari+Caus. of muh] very con- fused, muddled, dulled, bewildered, infatuated Sdhp 206. Pariya
Pariya
[either short form of pariyāya, or ger. of pari+ī substantivised (for the regular form paricca) representing an ending -- ya instead of -- tya. -- Bdhgh at Vism 409 takes pariya as nt., but seems to mix it with the idea of a ppr. by defining it as "pariyātī ti pariyaŋ, paricchindatī ti attho"] encompassing, fathoming, comprehending (as ger.); penetration, understanding (as n.). Only in phrase ceto -- pariya -- ñāṇa knowledge encompassing heart or mind (cp. phrase cetasā ceto paricca) D ii.82 sq. (v. l. ˚āya); iii.100 (v. l. ˚āye); DA i.223 (corresp. with pubbe -- nivāsa -- ñāṇa); with which alternates the phrase indriya -- paro -- pariya -- ñāṇa in same meaning (see indriya cpds. & remark on paropariya) J i.78. -- See also pariyatta1 pariyatti, pariyāya 3, and cpds. of ceto. Pariyañña
Pariyañña
[pari+yañña] supreme or extraordinary offering or sacrifice SnA 321, 322. Pariyatta
Pariyatta1
(nt.) [abstr. fr. pariya (pari+i) but confused with pariyatta2 & pariyatti fr. pari+āp] learning, understanding, comprehension, only in phrase indriyaparo pariyatta ( -- ñāṇa) (knowledge of) what goes on in the intentions of others A v.34, 38; Ps i.121 sq.; Vbh 340. Pariyatta
Pariyatta2
(adj.) [cp. Sk. paryāpta. pp. of pari+āp, see pāpuṇāti] (a) capable of, mastered, kept in mind, learned by heart; only in phrase dhammo ca vinayo ca p. Vin ii.285 = KhA 92; D iii.241 sq. (yathā sutaŋ yathā p˚ŋ dhammaŋ). -- (b) sufficient, enough PvA 33 (=alaŋ) Pariyatti
Pariyatti
(f.) [fr. pari+āp, cp. Epic Sk. paryāpti & P. pariyāpuṇāti] adequacy, accomplishment, sufficiency, capability, competency; indriya -- paro˚ efficiency in the (knowledge of) thoughts of others S v.205; Nett 101. Three accomplishments are distinguished at DA i.21 sq., viz. alagadd -- ûpamā (like a serpent), nissaraṇatthā (on account of salvation) and bhaṇḍâgārika˚ (of a treasurer), apariyatti -- kara bringing no advantage DhA i.71. -- 2. accomplishment in the Scriptures, study (learning by heart) of the holy texts Vism 95. Also the Scriptures themselves as a body which is handed down through oral tradition. In this meaning the word is only found in later, dogmatic literature; -- tīsu piṭakesu tividho pariyatti -- bhedo DA i.21. At SnA 494 it is classed with paccaya dhutanga & adhigama; as a part of paṭibhāna at Nd1 234 = Nd2 386. pariyattiŋ uggaṇhāti to undertake the learning (of the Scriptures) DhA ii.30; cp. KhA 91 (tipiṭaka -- sabba -- p. -- pabheda -- dhara); J ii.48 (˚ŋ ṭhapetvā leaving the learning aside); Miln 115, 215, 345, 411 (āgama˚). -- abl. pariyattito through learning by heart SnA 195 (opp. to atthato according to the meaning).

-- dhamma that which belongs to the holy study, part or contents of the Scriptures, the Tipiṭaka comprising the nine divisions (see navanga Buddha -- sāsana) KhA 191, 193; SnA 328; PvA 2; cp. ˚sāsana. -- dhara knowing the Scriptures by heart Miln 21. -- dhura ( = ganthadhura): see vāsadhura. -- paṭibhānavant possessed of intelligence as regards learning the Scriptures SnA 111. -- parimāṇa extent of study SnA 1, 608. -- bahula clever in the study of the Dhamma A iii.86. -- bahussuta versed in the Scriptures SnA 110. -- sāsana object, instruction of the Scriptures, code of the holy Texts (cp. ˚dhamma) Nd1 143; DhA iv.39. Pariyanta
Pariyanta
[pari+anta, cp. Sk. paryanta] 1. limit, end, climax, border S i.80 (manāpa˚ "limit -- point in enjoyment"; cp. C. nipphattikaŋ koṭikaŋ K.S. 320); J i.149 (hattha -- pāda˚ hoofs), 221 (udaka˚), 223 (sara˚); ii.200 (angana˚); Pv ii.1312; DhA iii.172 (parisa˚). -> 2. limit, boundary, restriction, limitation Vin ii.59, 60 (āpatti˚); Nd1 483 (distinguishes between 4 pariyantā with ref. to one's character, viz. sīlasaŋvara˚ indriyasaŋvara˚, bhojane mattaññutā˚, jāgariyânuyoga˚). -> 3. (adj. -- ˚) bounded by, limited by, surrounded, ending in Vin iv.31; M iii.90; S ii.122 (āyu˚); A i.164 (id.); Sn 577 (bhedana˚); Pv i.1013 (parikkhitta PvA 52). -- apariyanta (adj.) boundless, limitless PvA 58, 166.

-- kata restricted, limited, bounded Nd2 taṇhāiii (with sīmakata & odhikata; v. l. pariyanti˚, cp. BSk. paryantīkṛta "finished" Divy 97, 236). -- cārin living in selfrestriction Sn 964 (cp. Nd1 483). -- dassāvin seeing the limit A v.50. -- rahita without limits DhA iii.252. Pariyantavant
Pariyantavant
(adj.) [fr. pariyanta] having a limit, having a set or well -- defined purpose; f. ˚vatī (vācā) discriminating speech D i.4 = M iii.49=Pug 58; expld as "paricchedaŋ dassetvā yatha 'ssa paricchedo paññāyati, evaŋ bhāsatī ti attho" DA i.76=PugA 238. Pariyantika
Pariyantika
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. pariyanta] ending in, bounded or limited by S ii.83 = A ii.198 (kāya -- p. ˚ā & jīvita -- p. ˚ā vedanā); Vism 69 (bhojana˚, udaka˚, āsana˚); Sdhp 440 (kāla˚ sīla). Pariyaya
Pariyaya
[cp. Epic Sk. paryaya, pari+i; the usual P. form is pariyāya, but at the foll. passages the short a is required metri causa] revolution, lapse of time, period, term J iii.460 ( = kālapariyāya C.); v.367 (kāla˚). Pariyā
Pariyā
(f.) [fr. pari+yā] winding round, turning round; of a tree, branch J vi.528 (duma˚; read ˚pariyāsu with v. l. instead of T. pariyāyesu; C. expls by sākhā). Pariyāgata
Pariyāgata
[pari+ā+gata] having come to, reached, attained J vi.237 (phalaŋ; C = upagata), 238 (kusalaŋ; C.=pariyāyena attano vārena āgata). Pariyāgāra
Pariyāgāra
(adj.) [pari+āgāra] having the house all round, entirely surrounded by the house Vin iii.119 (of gabbha). Pariyāti
Pariyāti
[pari+yā] 1. to go round (acc.) J i.307. -- 2. to come near J ii.440. Pariyādāti
Pariyādāti
[pari+ādāti] to take up in an excessive degree, to exhaust. Only in secondary forms of med -- pass. ādiyati, pp. ˚ādinna, ger. ādāya (q. v.). Pariyādāna
Pariyādāna
(nt.) [pari+ādāna, opp. upādāna] "taking up completely," i. e. using up, consummation, consumption, finishing, end M i.487 (kaṭṭha˚, opp. to upādāna); S i.152; iii.16 sq. (cetaso p., cp. pariyādāya & ˚dinna); iv.33 (sabb' upādāna˚) A ii.139; J v.186. Cp. BSk. paryādāna Divy 4, 55, 100. -- Esp. in foll. phrases: āsava˚ & jīvita˚ D i.46 (jīvita -- pariyādānā abl., expld at Dh i.128 as "jīvitassa sabbaso pariyādinnattā parikkhīṇattā puna appaṭisandhika -- bhāvā ti attho"); S ii.83 = A ii.198; S iii.126; iv.213; A iv.13, 146; Pug 13; Miln 397; and combd with parikkhaya in ˚ŋ gacchati to be exhausted or consummated A v.173= Sn p. 126; Miln 102; PvA 147, cp. BSk. parikṣayaŋ paryādānaŋ gacchati Divy 567; AvŚ i.48; ii.193. -- 433 -- Pariyādāya
Pariyādāya
(indecl.) [ger. of pariyādati] 1. taking all round, summing up, completely Nd2 533 (in expln of ye keci, as synonymous with sabbato, i. e. for completeness, exhaustively). -- 2. exhausting, overpowering, enticing, taking hold of, as cittaŋ p. "taking hold of the mind" M i.91; It 19; DhA i.15. -- 3. losing control over, giving out (cittaŋ) S iii.16; iv.125. In absolute sense perhaps at S v.51 = A iv.127 (with vv. ll. pariyenāya & pariyāya). Pariyādinna
Pariyādinna
[often spelt ˚diṇṇa, e. g. in vv. ll. at D ii.8; M ii.172; iii.118. -- pp. of pariyādiyati] 1. (Pass.) exhausted, finished, put an end to, consummated Vin i.25 (tejo); D ii.8 = M iii.118; S ii.133 sq. (dukkhaŋ; parikkhīṇaŋ+); v.461 sq. -- neg. apariyādinna not finished, not exhausted M i.79 (muttakarīsaŋ ˚ādiṇṇaŋ), 83 (dhammadesanā ādiṇṇā); S ii.178 sq. -- 2. (Med.) having exhausted, lost control over, being overcome (usually ˚citta adj.) Vin ii.185; M ii.172; S ii.228; Nd2 32; PvA 279. Pariyādinnatta
Pariyādinnatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. pariyādinna] exhaustion, consummation DA i.128. Pariyādiyati
Pariyādiyati
[sometimes spelt ˚diyyati, e. g. Nd2 s. v.; pari+ādiyati, q. v. for etym. ref.] 1. to put an end to, exhaust, overpower, destroy, master, control S iii.155 (rāgaŋ); Nd2 under parisahati. -- Pot. ˚ādiyeyyaŋ Vin i.25 (tejaŋ). -- ger. ˚adiyitvā Vin i.25 (tejaŋ); iv.109 (id.); S i.84 (trsl. "confiscate"). -- 2. to become exhausted, give out J v.186 (udakaŋ); Miln 297 (cittaŋ p.; opp. to parivaḍḍhati). -- pp. pariyādinna (q. v.). Pariyāpajjati
Pariyāpajjati
[pari+āpajjati] to be finished A iv.339. - pp. pariyāpanna (q. v.). -- Caus. pariyāpādeti (q. v.). Pariyāpadāna
Pariyāpadāna
(nt.) [pari+apadāna, the latter for ava˚, and metrical lengthening of a] good advice, application, trick, artfulness, artifice J v.361, 369. (C. explns as parisuddha after v. l. pariyodāta which was prob. misread for pariyodāna), 370. Pariyāpanna
Pariyāpanna
[pari+āpanna, cp. adhipanna] 1. "gone completely into," included in, belonging to, got into Vin i.46 (patta˚ that which has been put into the bowl); D i.45 ( = ābaddha DA i.127); SnA 397 (milakkhabhāsa˚ etc.); KhA 136 (vinaya˚), 191 (sangha˚); DhA i.158 (idhaloka -- paraloka˚); PvA 14, 33, 59, 129 (devaloka˚), 150. -- 2. accomplished (i. e. gone into the matter), thorough, mastering (said of vācā) S ii.280 =A ii.51. -- 3. (˚ā dhammā) the Included, viz. all that is contained in the threefold cycle of existence (i. e. the worlds of sense, form & formless) Dhs 1268; Vbh 12, 15, 19 & passim; DhsA 50. Opp. apariyāpannā (dhammā) the Unincluded (viz. all that is exempt from this cycle) Ps i.101; Dhs 583 (cp. Dhs trsln 165, 254, 329, 332), 992, 1242; Kvu 507. Pariyāpannatta
Pariyāpannatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. pariyāpanna] includedness SnA 174. Pariyāpādeti
Pariyāpādeti
[Caus. of pariyāpajjati] to finish off, i. e. put to death completely S iv.308 sq. = A iii.94. Pariyāpuṇana
Pariyāpuṇana
(nt.) [abstr. formn fr. pariyāpuṇāti] mastery over, accomplishment in (gen.) Vism 442 (Buddhavacanassa). Pariyāpuṇāti
Pariyāpuṇāti
[pari+āp, cp. BSk. paryavāpnoti Divy 613] 1. to learn (by heart), to master, to gain mastership over, to learn thoroughly Vin iv.305 (parittaŋ a charm); D i.117 ( = jānāti DA i.117); A iii.86 (dhammaŋ); fut. pariyāpuṇissati DhA i.382 (dhammaŋ); ger. pariyāpuṇitvā S i.176; ii.120; SnA 195 (nikāyaŋ). -- 2. (with inf.) to know (to do something), to be able to Vin ii.109 (aor. ˚iŋsu), 121. -- pp. pariyāputa and pariyatta (q. v.). Pariyāputa
Pariyāputa
[pp. of pariyāpuṇāti] 1. learned by heart, known Nd1 234 = Nd2 386 (Buddhavacana). -- 2. learned, accomplished DA i.21. -- See also pariyatta2. Pariyāya
Pariyāya
[fr. pari+i, cp. Class. Sk. paryāya in all meanings, already Vedic in meaning of "formula," in liturgy, cp. below 4] lit. "going round" analysed by Bdhgh in 3 diff. meanings, viz. vāra (turn, course), desanā (instruction, presentation), and kāraṇa (cause, reason, also case, matter), see DA i.36 and cp. Kindred Sayings i.320. -- 1. arrangement, disposition, in phrase ˚ŋ karoti to arrange D i.179 (trsln takes it literally "departure," i. e. going out of one's way, détour; or change of habit, see Dial i.245); M i.252, 326; iii.7, 62; S i.142 (trsl. "make occasion" [for coming]). -> 2. order, succession, turn, course ( = vāra) D i.166 ≈ (˚bhatta i. e. feeding in turn or at regular intervals; expld as vāra -- bhatta PugA 232); M i.78, 282, 481; S ii.51 sq.; A ii.206; J v.153 (=vāra); PvA 242 (aparā˚). -- 3. what goes on, way, habit, quality, property S i.146 (ceto˚ habits of mind, thoughts, but see also pariya ); A v.160 (citta˚, see ceto). -- 4. discussion, instruction, method (of teaching), discourse on ( -- ˚), representation of ( -- ˚) (=desanā); thus āditta˚ (of Vin i.34) DhA i.88; esp. in cpd. dhamma˚ disquisition on the Dhamma D i.46; ii.93; M i.83; iii.67; S ii.74; v.357; A iii.62; iv.166, 381; Sn p. 218; also in foll.: vitakka˚ M i.122; deva˚ A iii.402 sq.; peta˚ PvA 92; cp. Vism 41 (˚kathā). -- 5. in Abhidhamma terminology, specifically: pariyāyena, the mode of teaching in the Suttanta, ad hominem, discursively, applied method, illustrated discourse, figurative language as opposed to the abstract, general statements of Abhidhamma=nippariyāyena, nippariyāyato Vism 473, 499; cp. DhsA 317 (figuratively). -- 6. mode, manner, reason, cause, way (=kāraṇa) D i.185 (iminā ˚ena), 186 (id.); ii.339 (ayaŋ p. yena ˚ena); DA i.106 (tena tena ˚ena in some way or other); DhsA 366 (iminā ˚ena for this reason); esp. in phrase aneka -- pariyāyena in many (or various) ways Vin i.16, 45; D i.1 (cp. DA i.36), 174; M i.24; A i.56; Sn p. 15. -- 7. winding round (of a tree: branch), in doubtful reading at J vi.528 (see pariyā). -- See also nippariyāya. Pariyāhata
Pariyāhata
[pari+āhata] struck out, affected with ( -- ˚), only in phrase takka˚ "beaten out by argumentations" D i.16 (cp. DA i.106); M i.520. Pariyāhanana
Pariyāhanana
(nt.) [fr. pari+ā+han] striking, beating Vism 142 (āhanana˚ in exposition of vitakka) = DhsA 114 ("circumimpinging" Expos. 151). Pariyiṭṭha
Pariyiṭṭha
[pp. of pariyesati] sought, desired, looked for S iv.62 (a˚); Miln 134; Vism 344 (˚āhāra). Pariyiṭṭhi
Pariyiṭṭhi
= pariyeṭṭhi Sn 289 (SnA 316 reads pariyeṭṭhi). Perhaps we should read pariyeṭṭhuŋ (see pariyesati). Pariyukkhaṇṭhati
Pariyukkhaṇṭhati
[pari+ukkaṇṭhati] to have great longing, to be distressed J v.417, 421 (mā ˚kaṇṭhi). Pariyuṭṭhati
Pariyuṭṭhati
[pari+uṭṭhāti] to arise, pervade; intrs. to become prepossessed, to be pervaded DhsA 366 (cittaŋ p.; corā magge pariyuṭṭhiŋsu). -- pp. pariyuṭṭhita (q. v.). Pariyuṭṭhāna
Pariyuṭṭhāna
(nt.) [pari+uṭṭhāna, it is doubtful whether this connection is correct, in this case the meaning would be "over -- exertion." BSk. paryavasthāna points to another connection, see Divy 185] state of being possessed (or hindered) by ( -- ˚), prepossession, bias, outburst M i.18, Kvu xiv.6 (thīnamiddha˚), 136; A i.66 (˚ajjhosāna); v.198 (adhiṭṭhāna -- ˚samuṭṭhāna); Nd2 under taṇhāii ( = Dhs 1059, where trsln is "pervading," based on expln at DhsA 366: uppajjamānā [scil. taṇhā] cittaŋ pariyuṭṭhāti, and allegorical interpretation ibid.: the heart becomes possessed by lust as a road by highwaymen); Pug 21 (avijjā˚); Vbh 383 (where 7 pariyuṭṭhānā [sic! pl. m.] are enumd in the same set as under headings of anusaya & saŋyojana, thus placing p. into the same category as these two); Dhs 390, 1061 (avijjā˚), 1162 (id.); Nett 13, 14, 18, 37, 79 sq.; DhsA 238; ThA 80; Vism 5 (with vītikkama & anusaya). Cp. also adhiṭṭhāna. -- 434 -- Pariyuṭṭhita
Pariyuṭṭhita
[pari+uṭṭhita, with v. l. at D ii.104 pari- vuṭṭhita and BSk. rendering paryavasthita: see remarks on pariyuṭṭhāna and Dial. ii.111] possessed by (the C. expln as given K.S. 320 is "abhibhūta"), biassed, taken up by, full of ( -- ˚) M i.18; iii.14; S iv.240 (maccheramala˚ ceto); A i.281; ii.58; It 43 (diṭṭhigatehi); Kvu i.91 (kāma -- rāga˚); ThA 78; Sdhp 581.

-- citta whose heart is possessed by ( -- ˚) D ii.104 (Mārena); PvA 142 (maccheramala˚), 195 (id.), 279 (kilesasamudācārena). -- ṭṭhāyin being rooted in prepossession, affected by bias, S iii.3 sq. (so read for pariyuṭṭhaṭṭhāyin? ). Pariyudāharati
Pariyudāharati
[pari+udāharati] to utter solemnly, to proclaim aloud DhsA 1 (aor. ˚āhāsi). Pariyeṭṭhi
Pariyeṭṭhi
[pari+eṭṭhi of esati, ā+iṣ] search for D i.222; A i.93 (āmisa˚ & dhamma˚); iii.416; Sn 289 (vijjācaraṇa˚) J i.14; Nett 1, 5; DA i.271. Pariyeti
Pariyeti
[pari+i] to go about, to go round, encircle, encompass; ger. paricca (q. v.). The pp. is represented by pareta, see also pareti which seems to stand for pariyeti. Pariyena
Pariyena
[fr. pari+i, cp. Sk. *paryayana] going round, walking round; of a ship: sailing round, tour, voyage S v.51 (pariyenāya, v. l. pariyādāya) = A iv.127 (reads pariyādāya v. l. pariyāya). Reading is doubtful. Pariyesati
Pariyesati
[pari+esati, cp. BSk. paryeṣate to investigate AvŚ i.339. The P. word shows confusion between esati & icchati, as shown by double forms ˚iṭṭhuŋ etc. See also anvesati] to seek for, look, search, desire D i.223 (˚esamāna ppr.); Sn 482 (id.); S i.177, 181; iv.62; A ii.23, 25, 247; Nd1 262; Nd2 427 (+paṭilabhati and paribhuñjati); J i.3, 138; Miln 109, 313; DhA iii.263 (ppr. ˚esanto); PvA 31; Sdhp 506. -- grd. ˚esitabba S ii.130; inf. ˚esituŋ SnA 316; and ˚eṭṭhuŋ (conj. ˚iṭṭhuŋ?) Sn 289 (cp. SnA 316 which gives reading ˚eṭṭhuŋ as gloss); ger. ˚esitvā SnA 317, 414; -- pp. pariyesita & pariyiṭṭha (q. v.). Cp. for similar formation & meaning ajjhesati with pp. ajjhesita & ajjhiṭṭha. -- Cp. vi˚. Pariyesanā
Pariyesanā
(f.) & ˚na (nt.) [fr. pariyesati] search, quest, inquiry (a) (˚nā) D ii.58, 61, 280 (twofold, viz. sevitabbā and asevitabbā); iii.289; M i.161 (twofold, viz. ariyā & anariyā); A ii.247 (id.); S i.143; ii.144, 171; iii.29; iv.8 sq. (assāda˚ & ādīnava˚); A i.68 (kāma˚), 93. -- (b) (˚na) Nd1 262 (˚chanda,+paṭilābha˚ & paribhoga˚); DhA iii.256 (kāmaguṇe ˚ussukka). With paṭiggahaṇa & paribhoga at DhA i.75. Pariyesita
Pariyesita
[pp. of pariyesati] searched, sought for, desired It 121. See also pariyiṭṭha. Pariyoga
Pariyoga
[fr. pari+yuj] cauldron (see Kern, Toev. s. v.) Miln 118. Pariyogāya
Pariyogāya
at M i.480 is contracted form (ger.) of pari- yogāhitvā (so expld by C.). Pariyogāḷha
Pariyogāḷha
[pp. of pariyogāhati, see also ogādha1] dived into, penetrated into, immersed in (loc.) Vin i.181; D i.110; M i.380; S ii.58; iv.328; Vbh 329; Miln 283.

-- dhamma one who has penetrated into the Dhamma Vin i.16; A iv.186, 210; Ud 49. Pariyogāha
Pariyogāha
[pari+ogāha] diving into, penetration; only in cpd. dup˚ hard to penetrate, unfathomable S iv.376; Miln 70. Pariyogāhati & ˚gāheti
Pariyogāhati
& ˚gāheti [pari+ogāhati] to penetrate, fathom, scrutinise A ii.84; iv.13, 145 sq. (paññāya); J i.341; Pug 33 (a˚), 48 sq. Cp. ajjhogāhati. Pariyogāhana
Pariyogāhana
(nt.) & ā (f.) [pari+ogāhana] plunging into, penetration Ps i.106, 112; ii.183; Dhs 390 (a˚), 425 (a˚); Pug 21 (a˚); DhsA 260. Pariyottharati
Pariyottharati
[pari+ottharati] to spread all over (intrs.) Miln 197. Pariyodapana
Pariyodapana
(nt.) & ā (f.) [fr. pariyodapeti], cleansing, purification A i.207 (cittassa); Dh 183 ( = vodāpana DhA iii.237); Nett 44. In BSk. distorted to paryādapana MVastu iii.12 (=Dh 183). Pariyodapita
Pariyodapita
[pp. of pariyodapeti] cleansed, purified Nett 44 (cittaŋ). Pariyodapeti
Pariyodapeti
[pari+odapeti, of Caus. of dā4 to clean] to cleanse, purify M i.25; Dh 88 ( = vodapeti parisodheti) DhA ii.162; Nett 44; ThA 237 (indriyāni). -- pp. pariyodāta & pariyodapita (q. v.). Pariyodāta
Pariyodāta
(adj.) [pari+odāta, cp. pariyodapeti] 1. very clean, pure, cleansed, mostly combd with parisuddha (+) D i.75, 76 (+); M i.26; S i.198; iii.235 (+); v.301; A iii.27 (+); iv.120 sq.; J v.369 (+; see pariyāpadāna); Pug 60; DA i.219; DhA iv.72 (+); VvA 138. -- 2. very clever, accomplished, excellent [cp. BSk. paryavadāta in same meaning at Divy 100] J iii.281 (˚sippa); Vism 136 (id.). Pariyodāpaka
Pariyodāpaka
(adj.) [fr. pariyodapeti] cleansing, purifying Vism 149 (ñāṇa). Pariyodha
Pariyodha
[pari+yodha] defence A i.154. Pariyonaddha
Pariyonaddha
[pp. of pariyonandhati, cp. onaddha & BSk. paryavanaddha "overgrown" Divy, 120, 125] covered over, enveloped D i.246; iii.223 (a˚); M i.25; S v.263; A ii.211 (uddhasta+); iv.86; J i.30; Miln 161; SnA 596 ( = nivuta); DhA iii.199; PvA 172 (taca˚). Pariyonandhati
Pariyonandhati
[pari+avanandhati] to tie down, put over, envelop, cover up Vin ii.137; S v.122; J iii.398; DhA iii.153. -- pp. pariyonaddha (q. v.). Pariyonandhana
Pariyonandhana
(nt.) [fr. above] covering DA i.135; DhA iii.198. Pariyonāha
Pariyonāha
[pari+onāha] enveloping, covering D i.246 ( = nīvaraṇa); Dhs 1157 (cp. Dhs trsl. 311); Miln 300. Pariyosāna
Pariyosāna
(nt.) [pari+osāna of ava+sā] 1. end, finish, conclusion J i.106 (sacca˚ = desanā˚); PvA 9 (desanā˚ and passim), 136 (āyūha˚), 162 (id.), 281 (= anta). Often contracted with ādi beginning & majjha middle (see e. g. SnA 327), esp. in phrase ādi -- kalyāṇa majjhe kalyāṇa ˚kalyāṇa with reference to the Dhamma (expld as "ekagāthā pi hi samanta -- bhaddakattā dhammassa paṭhamapadena ādik˚ dutiyatatiya -- padehi majjhe k˚ pacchima -- padena pariyosānak˚" etc. at SnA 444), e. g. D i.62; It 111 & passim. -- 2. end, i. e. perfection, ideal, Arahantship (see on these fig. meanings and its appln to Nibbāna DA i.175, 176) D i.203 (brahmacariya +); ii.283 (cp. Dial. ii.316); iii.55 (brahmacariya+); S v.230; A iii.363 (nibbāna˚), 376 (brahmacariya˚); Vism 5. -- 435 -- Pariyosāpeti
Pariyosāpeti
[Caus. of pari+ava+sā, Sk. syati, of which pp. pariyosita cp. osāpeti] 1. to make fulfil Vin iii.155; DA i.241; ThA 159 (for khepeti Th 2, 168). -- 2. to bring to an end, to finish Vism 244. Pariyosita
Pariyosita
1. [pp. of pari+ava+sā] finished, concluded, satisfied, D ii.224; M i.12 (paripuṇṇa+). -- 2. [pp. of pari+ava+śri, cp. ajjhosita] fixed on, bent on Miln 140 (˚sankappa). Parirakkhaṇa
Parirakkhaṇa
(nt.) [fr. pari+rakṣ] guarding, preserving, keeping Miln 356, 402; PvA 130. Parirakkhati
Parirakkhati
[pari+rakṣ, cp. abhirakkhati] to guard, protect; preserve, maintain Sn 678 (pot. ˚rakkhe); Miln 410; Sdhp 413, 553 (sīlaŋ). Parirañjita
Parirañjita
[pari+rañjita] dyed, coloured; fig. marked or distinguished by (instr.) Miln 75. Pariḷāha
Pariḷāha
[pari+ḍāha of ḍah, cp. pariḍahati. On change of ḍ and ḷ see Geiger, P.Gr. § 423] burning, fever; fig. fever of passion, consumption, distress, pain D iii.238 (avigata˚), 289 (˚nānatta); M i.101 (kāme); S ii.143 sq. (˚nānatta), 151 (kāma˚; vyāpāda˚, vihiŋsā˚); iii.7 sq. (taṇhā, pipāsā, p.), 190 (vigata˚); iv.387; v.156 (kāyasmiŋ), 451 (jāti˚, jarā˚); A i.68 (kāma˚), 137 (rāgaja, mohaja etc.); ii.197 (vighāta); iii.3, 245 sq., 388 sq.; iv.461 sq.; Sn 715 ( = rāgajo vā dosajo vā appamattako pi p. SnA 498); Dh 90 (cp. DhA ii.166: duvidho p. kāyiko cetasiko ca); Nd2 374 (kāma˚); J ii.220; Miln 97, 165, 318; ThA 41, 292; VvA 44; PvA 230. Parillaka
Parillaka
[cp. Sk. pirilī, pirillī Bṛh. Saŋh. 86, 44] N. of a bird (C. on Th 1, 49). Parivaccha
Parivaccha
(nt.) [formation from ger. of pari+vrt, corresp. to *parivṛtyaŋ (?)] being active, preparation, outfit J v.46; vi.21 (gamana˚); DhA i.207 (gloss & v. l. gamana -- parisajja), 395 (v. l. parisajja).

Note. According to Kern, Toev. s. v. parivaccha is wrong spelling for parivacca which is abstr. from pariyatta (*pariyatya), with va for ya as in pavacchati, pavecchati = Sk. prayacchati. Parivajjana
Parivajjana
(nt.) [fr. pari+vṛj] avoiding, avoidance M. i.7, 10; A iii.387, 389; Miln 408; Vism 33. As f. ˚ā at Vism 132, and ibid. as abstr. parivajjanatā . Parivajjeti
Parivajjeti
[pari+vajjeti, Caus. of vṛj] to shun, avoid, keep away from (acc.) M i.10; S i.69, 102, 188, 224; Sn 57 ( = vivajjeti Nd2 419), 395 sq., 768 (kāme, cp. Nd1 6), 771; It 71; Dh 123 (pāpāni), 269; J iv.378 (fut. ˚essati); Pv iv.146 (nivesanaŋ); iv.177 (loke adinnaŋ ˚ayassu); Miln 91 (grd. ˚ajjayitabba), 300, 408; PvA 150 (v. l. ˚ajjati), 221 (jīvitaŋ, for vijahati, better read with v. l. pariccajati). Parivaṭuma
Parivaṭuma
(?) (adj.) [doubtful spelling & expln; perhaps "parivaṭṭin?] forming a circle, circular D i.22 (trsld "a path could be traced round it" Dial. i.36). Can it be misspelling for pariyanta? Kern, Toev. s. v. equals it to Sk. parivartman, and adds reference ˚kata "bounded" (syn. paricchinna) Miln 132. Parivaṭṭa
Parivaṭṭa
[fr. pari+vṛt, cp. parivattana] round, circle, succession, mainly in two phrases, viz. catu˚ fourfold circle M iii.67; S iii.59 (pañcupādāna -- kkhandhe, cp. aṭṭha -- parivaṭṭa -- adhideva -- ñāṇadassana A iv.304); and ñāti˚ circle of relatives D i.61 ( = ñāti DA i.170; cp. expln ābandhan' atthena ñāti yeva ñāti -- parivaṭṭo DA i.181=PugA 236); ii.241; M iii.33; Pug 57; ThA 68; VvA 87. -- See further at DA i.143 (rāja˚), 283 (id., but spelt ˚vatta); SnA 210. Parivaḍḍhati
Parivaḍḍhati
[pari+vṛdh] to increase, to be happy or pros- perous Miln 297 (cittaŋ p.; opp. pariyādiyati). Parivaṇṇita
Parivaṇṇita
[pp. of parivaṇṇeti] extolled, praised Sdhp 557. Parivaṇṇeti
Parivaṇṇeti
[pari+vaṇṇeti] to describe, praise, extol J vi.213 (ppr. ˚vaṇṇayanto). -- pp. ˚vaṇṇita. Parivatta
Parivatta
(adj.) [fr. pari+vṛt] changing round, twisting, turning; f. pl.˚āyo J v.431. Parivattaka
Parivattaka
[fr. parivatta] circle (lit. turning round) J i.101; cp. parivattika in phrase paligha˚ (q. v.). Parivattati
Parivattati
[pari+vṛt] 1. to turn round, twist (trs. & intrs.), go about Vin ii.220; J v.431 (singaŋ); Pv iv.53 ( = pariyāti PvA 260); Miln 118; DA i.265. -- 2. (intrs.) to change about, move, change, turn to Pv ii.105 (=pariṇamati PvA 144); iii.44 (id. 194); iii.65; PvA 178. -- Caus. parivatteti (q. v.). Cp. vipari˚. Parivattana
Parivattana
(nt.) [fr. parivattati] setting going, keeping up, propounding J i.200 (˚manta adj. one who knows a charm); Nett 1 sq., 106. Parivattita
Parivattita
[pp. of parivatteti] 1. turned round, twisted J iv.384. -- 2. recited Vism 96. Parivatteti
Parivatteti
[Caus. of parivattati] 1. to turn round (trs.), to turn over J i.202; ii.275 (sarīraŋ); v.217; DA i.244. -- 2. to deal with, handle, set going, put forth, recite Vism 96, in phrase mantaŋ p. to recite, practise a charm J i.200, 253; Pv ii.613 ( = sajjhāyati vāceti PvA 97); cp. mantaŋ pavatteti & pavattar; saraŋ p. to make a sound J i.405; adhippāyaŋ speak out, propound, discuss PvA 131. -- 3. to change, exchange Vin ii.174; J iii.437. -- pp. parivattita (q. v.). Parivadentikā
Parivadentikā
(f.) [pari+vadento+ikā; vadento being ppr. Caus. of vad] making resound, resounding, in cpd. godhā˚ "string -- resounding," i. e. a string instrument, lute J vi.580 (cp. Sk *parivāda an instrument with which the lute is played). -- Another parivadentikā we find at J vi.540 (C. reading for T. ˚vadantikā, with v. l. ˚devantikā) denoting a kind of bird (ekā sakuṇajāti). Parivasati
Parivasati
[pari+vas2] to stay, dwell, to live under pro- bation Vin iii.186 (grd. ˚vatthabba); iv.30, 127; D i.176; M i.391; S ii.21; Sn 697 ( = pabbajitvā tāpasavesena vasati SnA 490). -- ppr. med. paribbasāna; pp. parivuṭṭha & parivuttha (q. v.). Parivassati
Parivassati
at Pv ii.936 is to be read as paridhassati (see paridahati). Parivahati
Parivahati
[pari+vahati] to carry about Th 2, 439 (dā- rake). Parivāta
Parivāta
( -- ˚) [pp. of pari+vā] blown round or through, i. e. filled with, stirred by Miln 19 (isi -- vāta˚). Parivādinī
Parivādinī
(f.) [fr. pari+vad, late Sk. the same] a lute of seven strings Abhp. 138. -- See parivadentikā. Parivāra
Parivāra
[fr. pari+vṛ] 1. surrounding, suite, retinue, followers, entourage, pomp J i.151; iv.38; vi.75; PvA 21, 30 (˚cāga -- cetana, read pariccāga -- cetana?); usually as adj. -- ˚ surrounded by, in company of Vin i.38 (dasasata˚); A ii.91 (deva˚ & asura˚); J i.92 (mahā -- bhikkhusangha˚); Pug 52 (pheggu sāra˚; with expln PugA 229: rukkho sayaŋ -- pheggu hoti, parivāra -- rukkhā pan' assa sārā honti); Miln 285 (dvisahassa -- paritta -- dīpa -- p˚ ā, cattāro mahā dīpā); Vism 37; DhA iii.262 (pañcasatabhikkhu˚); PvA 53 (accharā -- sahassa˚), 74 (dvisahassadīpa˚); sa˚ with a retinue (of . . .) J i.49 (cattāro dīpe); PvA 20. -- 2. followers, accompaniment or possession as a sign of honour, and therefore meaning "respect," attendance, homage, fame (cp. paricāra) A i.38 ˚sampadā) Ps i.172 (pariggaha, p., paripūra); DhA ii.77; ThA 241 (dhana+, riches and fame); VbhA 466; PvA 137 (sampatti = yaso); VvA 122 (= yaso). -- 3. ingredient, accessories (pl.), requisite J i.266 (pañca -- sugandhika˚); Miln 290 (sa˚ dāna); DA i.297 (=parikkhārā). -- 4. as N. it is the name of the last book of the Vinaya Piṭaka ("The Accessory"), the Appendix,a sort of résumé and index of the preceding books SnA 97 (sa -- parivāraka Vinaya -- piṭaka); VbhA 432. -- 436 -- Parivāraka
Parivāraka
(adj.) [parivāra+ka] accompanying, forming a retinue J v.234. See also parivāra 4 and paricāraka. Parivāraṇa
Parivāraṇa
(nt.) [fr. pari+vṛ] 1. covering, drapery (so trsl. at K.S. p. 45) S i.33. -- 2. (adj.) ( -- ˚) surrounded by J v.195 ( = parikkhitta C.). Parivārita
Parivārita
[pp. of parivāreti] surrounded, fig. honoured S i.166, 192 = Th1,1235; J ii.48; purakkhata+); DhA iv.49 (=purakkhata Dh 343); DhsA 1 (devānaŋ gaṇena); Dāvs i.16 (v. l. for parimārita). Parivāreti
Parivāreti
[Caus. of pari+vṛ] to cover, encompass, sur- round J i.181 (nagaraŋ ˚ayiŋsu); ii.102 (fut. ˚essati); iii.371 (rukkhaŋ); iv.405 (for parikaroti); vi.179. -> ger. parivāretvā used as prep. "round" J i.172 (pokkharaṇiŋ). -- In meaning "to serve, attend upon," also "to attend upon oneself, to amuse oneself," parivāreti is often erroneously read for paricāreti, e. g. at D ii.13; Pv iv.129 (v. l. ˚cāreti); PvA 228; in ppr. med. ˚vāriyamāna (with v. l. ˚cāriyamāna) at D ii.21; A i.145; J i.58; VvA 92. -- See also anuparivāreti. -- pp. parivārita (q. v.). Parivāsa
Parivāsa
[fr. pari+vas2, cp. Epic Sk. parivāsa only in meaning 1] 1. sojourn; stay, in phrase vipassanā˚ DhA iii.118; DhsA 215. -- 2. period under probation, (living under) probation Vin iii.186 (˚ŋ vasati, cp. parivuttha); iv.30; S ii.21 (˚ŋ vasati). ˚ŋ deti to allow probation Vin i.49; ii.7; iv.30, 127; ˚ŋ yācati to ask for probation Vin iv.30, 127. -- samodhāna˚ inclusive probation Vin ii.48 sq.; suddhanta˚ probation of complete purification Vin ii.59 sq. -- 3. period, time (lit. stay), interval, duration Ud 7 (eka -- ratti˚).

-- dāna the allowance of probation A i.99. Parivāsika
Parivāsika
(adj.) [fr. pari+vas2, see parivasati] 1. "staying," i. e. usual, accustomed, common SnA 35 (˚bhatta; or is it "fermented," and thus to be taken to No. 3?); a˚ unusual, new, uncommon J ii.435 (where it is combd with abhinava , which should be substituted for readings accuṇha, abbhuṇha & abhiṇha according to similar expln of paccaggha at PvA 87), with v. l. samparivāsita (well -- seasoned?). -- 2. a probationer Vin ii.162. In this meaning usually spelt pāri˚ (q. v.). -- 3. in combn cira˚ (with ref. to food) it may be interpreted either as "staying long, being in use for a long time," i. e. stale; or it may be derived fr. vāsa3 (odour, perfume or seasoning) and translated (so Mrs. Rh. D. in Expositor 63, 64) "long -- fermented" (better "seasoned"?) DhsA 48 (˚vāsika & vāsiya); ThA 29. Parivāsita
Parivāsita
(adj.) [pari+pp. of vāseti fr. vāsa3] perfumed (all round) J i.51 (v. l. ˚vārita); cp. samparivāsita (well-seasoned?), which is perhaps to be read at J ii.435 for aparivāsika. Parivitakka
Parivitakka
[pari+vitakka, cp. BSk. parivitarka Divy 291] reflection, meditation, thought, consideration M ii.170 (ākāra˚), Vin ii.74; S ii.115 (id.); A ii.193 (id.); Miln 13; DhA ii.62; DhsA 74; VvA 3; PvA 282 (vutta -- ˚e nipāta in expln of nūna). Usually in phrase cetasā ceto -- parivitakka mental reflection, e. g. D i.117; ii.218; S i.121, 178; iii.96; v.294; A iii.374; and cetasoparivitakka, e. g. D i.134; S i.71, 103, 139; ii.273; iii.96, 103; iv.105; v.167; A ii.20. Parivitakkita
Parivitakkita
[pp. of parivitakketi] reflected, meditated, thought over M i.32; S i.193. -- nt. ˚ŋ reflection, thinking over PvA 123 (˚e with ref. to nūna, i. e. particle of reflection). Parivitakketi
Parivitakketi
[pari+vitakketi] to consider, reflect, meditate upon J iii.277. -- pp. ˚vitakkita (q. v.). Parivitthiṇṇa
Parivitthiṇṇa
[pari+vitthiṇṇa, Sk. vīstīrṇa, pp., of vi+ stṛ] spread out wide Miln 99. Parivisaka
Parivisaka
(adj.) [fr. parisati] providing, serving food Vism 108. Parivisati
Parivisati
[pari+viṣ, viveṣti; same use of parivise (inf.) in R. V. x.6110] to serve (with food = instr.), wait upon, present, offer Vin i.240 (bhatṭena); ii.77 (kaṇājakena bilangadutiyena); D ii.127; J i.87, 90; ii.277; iv.116; Pv ii.84 (= bhojeti PvA 107); ii.88 (id. 109); Vism 108, 150 (sūdo bhattāraŋ p.); VvA 6; PvA 42, 78. Parivīmaŋsati
Parivīmaŋsati
[pari+vīmaŋsati, Desid. of pari+man, cp. vīmaŋsā for mīmāŋsā] to think over, consider thoroughly, examine, search S ii.80 sq.; It 42 = Sn 975 (ppr. dhammaŋ ˚vīmaŋsamāna, cp. Nd1 508); DA i.134; DhA iv.117 (attānaŋ). Parivīmaŋsá
Parivīmaŋsá
(f.) [pari+vīmaŋsā] complete inquiry, thorough search or examination M iii.85; S iii.331; v.68; SnA 173. Parivuṭṭha & ˚vuttha
Parivuṭṭha
& ˚vuttha [pp. of parivasati] staying (a period), living (for a time), spending (or having spent) one's probation (cp. BSk. paryuṣita -- parivāsa AvŚ i.259) Vin iii.186 (tth); S ii.21 (ṭṭh). Parivuta
Parivuta
[pp. of pari+vṛ] surrounded by ( -- ˚ or instr.) S i.177; J i.152 (miga -- gaṇa˚), 203 (devagaṇena); ii.127 (dāsi -- gaṇa˚); iii.371 (mahā -- jana˚); vi.75; Vv 165 ( = samantato p. VvA 81); PvA 3 (dhutta -- jana˚), 62 (parijana˚), 140 (deva -- gaṇa˚). Pariveṭhita
Pariveṭhita
[pp. of pari+veṣṭ] enveloped, covered Miln 22. Opp. nibbeṭṭhita (q. v.). Pariveṇa
Pariveṇa
(nt.) [etym.?] 1. all that belongs to a castle, a mansion and its constituents Vv 8453 (expld at VvA 351 as follows: veṇiyato pekkhitabbato pariveṇaŋ pāsāda -- kūtâgāra -- ratti -- ṭṭhān' ādisampannaŋ pākāraparikkhittaŋ dvārakoṭṭhaka -- yuttaŋ āvāsaŋ); DhA i.260 (pāsāda˚). -- 2. a cell or private chamber for a bhikkhu (cp. Vin. Texts iii.109, 203) Vin i.49 = ii.210 (p. koṭṭhaka upaṭṭhāna -- sālā); i.216 (vihārena vihāraŋ pariveṇena pariveṇaŋ upasankamitvā), 247 (id.); ii.167 (vihāra+); iii.69, 119 (susammaṭṭhaŋ); iv.52, 252 (˚vāsika); J i.126; Miln 15 (˚ŋ sammajjati), 19; Vism 90; DhA ii.179 (˚dvāra); iv.204; VbhA 13. Pariveṇi
Pariveṇi
(f.) = pariveṇa 2; Vin i.80 (anu pariveṇiyaŋ each in their own cell), 106 (id.). Parivesaka
Parivesaka
(adj.) [fr. pari+viṣ] waiting, serving up meals Vism 109. -- f. ˚ikā ThA 17. Parivesanā
Parivesanā
(f.) [fr. pari+vis] distribution of food, feeding, serving meals Vin i.229; S i.172; Sn p. 13 ( = bhattavissagga SnA 140); Miln 247, 249; DhA iv.162; PvA 109 (˚ṭṭhāna), 135 (id.). Parivyatta
Parivyatta
(adj.) [pari+vyatta] quite conspicuous or clear Vism 162. Parisaŋsibbita
Parisaŋsibbita
[pari+pp. of saŋsibbati] sewn together, en- twined DhA iii.198 (v. l. for saŋsibbita+). Parisakkati
Parisakkati
[pari+sakkati] to go about to (with inf. or dat.), to endeavour, undertake try Vin ii.18 = A iv.345 (alābhāya); J i.173 (vadhāya); ii.394; Pv iv.52 (=payogaŋ karoti PvA 259). Parisankati
Parisankati
[pari+sankati] to suspect, fear, have apprehension J iii.210, 541; DhA i.81. -- pp. ˚sankita (q. v.). Cp. āsankati. Parisankā
Parisankā
(f.) [fr. pari+śank] suspicion, misgiving Vin iv.314; D iii.218. Cp. āsankā. -- 437 -- Parisankita
Parisankita
[pp. of parisankati] suspecting or suspected, having apprehensions, fearing Vin ii.243 (diṭṭha -- suta˚); A iii.128; J iv.214; v.80; Miln 372; DhA i.223 (āsankita˚). -- Cp. āsankita & ussankita. Parisanku
Parisanku
in ˚patha the region round the path of stakes & sticks, N. of a path leading up to Gijjha -- pabbata (see expln at J iii.485) J iii.484. Parisangāhāpeti
Parisangāhāpeti
[pari+Caus. of sangaṇhāti] to induce someone to mention or relate something J vi.328. Parisaṭha
Parisaṭha
(adj.) [pari+saṭha] very fraudulent or crafty Pug 23 (saṭha+). Parisaṇṭhāti
Parisaṇṭhāti
[pari+saṇṭhāti] to return into the former state, to be restored; aor. ˚saṇṭhāsi J iii.341. Parisaṇha
Parisaṇha
(adj,.) [pari+saṇha] very smooth or soft Miln 198. Parisandeti
Parisandeti
[pari+Caus. of syad] to make flow round, to make overflow, to fill, in phrase kāyaŋ abhisandeti p. D i.75, 214; M iii.92 sq. etc. expld as "samantato sandeti" at DA i.217. -- pp. parisanna (q. v.). Parisanna
Parisanna
[pp. of parisandati, cp. parisandeti] surrounded or filled with water, drenched, well -- watered D i.75 = M iii.94. Parisappati
Parisappati
[pari+sṛp] to run about, crawl about, to be frightened Dh 342, 343 ( = saŋsappati bhāyati DhA iv.49). Parisappanā
Parisappanā
(f.) [fr. parisappati] running about, fear, hesitation, doubt, always combd with āsappanā and only found with ref. to the exegesis of "doubt" (vicikicchā or kankhā) Nd2 1; Dhs 425 (cp. Dhs trsl. 116 and DhsA 260); DA i.69. Parisamantato
Parisamantato
(adv.) [pari+samantato] from all sides VvA 236. Parisambāhati
Parisambāhati
[pari+sambāhati] to stroke, to rub from all sides M ii.120; S i.178, 194; A v.65. Parisarati
Parisarati
[pari+smr, but according to Kern, Toev. s. v. pari here fr. Prk. paḍi = Sk. prati, thus for pratismarati] to remember, recollect J vi.199 (read parissaraŋ). Parisahati
Parisahati
[pari+sahati] to overcome, conquer, master, get the better of S iv.112; exegetically in formula sahati p. abhibhavati ajjhottharati etc. Nd1 12, 361 = Nd2 420. Parisā
Parisā
(f.) [cp. Vedic pariṣad; in R. V. also pariṣad as adj. surrounding, lit. "sitting round," fr. pari+sad. -- In Pāli the cons. stem has passed into a vocalic ā -- stem, with the only preservation of cons. loc. sg. parisati Vin iv.285; A ii.180 (ī); J v.61; DA i.141 and parisatiŋ M i.68; A ii.180 (v. l.); J v.332, besides the regular forms parisāyaŋ (loc. sg.) Vin ii.296; A v.70; and parisāsu (loc. pl.) S ii.27; It 64] surrounding people, group, collection, company, assembly, association, multitude. Var. typical sets of assemblies are found in the Canon, viz, eight assemblies (khattiya˚, brāhmaṇa˚, gahapati˚, samaṇa˚, Cātummahārājika˚, Tāvatiŋsa˚, Māra˚, Brahma˚, or the assemblies of nobles, brahmins, householders, wanderers, of the angel hosts of the Guardian Kings, of the Great Thirty -- Three, of the Māras, and of the Brahmās) D ii.109; iii.260; M i.72; A iv.307. -> four assemblies (the first four of the above) at D iii.236; Nd1 163; other four, representing the Buddha's Order (bhikkhu˚, bhikkhunī˚, upāsaka˚, upāsikā˚, or the ass. of bhikkhus, nuns, laymen and female devotees; cp. same enumn at Divy 299) S ii.218; A v.10; cp. J i.40 (catu -- parisa -- majjhe), 85 (id.), 148 (id.). -- two assemblies (viz. Brahma˚, Māra˚) at D iii.260; allegorically two groups of people (viz. sāratta -- rattā & asāratta -- rattā) M ii.160 = A i.70 sq. -- For var. uses of the word see the foll. passages: Vin ii.188, 296 (rājaparisā); iii.12 (Bhagavā mahatiyā parisāya parivuto surrounded by a great multitude); iv.153 (gen. parisāya); M i.153 (nevāpika˚); ii.160; iii.47; S i.155 (brahma˚), 162 sarājikā p.), 177; A i.25 (mahā˚), 70 (uttānā p.), 71 (ariya˚), 242 (tisso p.); ii.19 (˚āya mando), 133, 183, 185 (deva˚); iii.253 (khattiya˚); iv.80, 114; It 64 (upāsakā ˚sāsu virocare); Sn 349, 825 sq.; J i.151, 264; vi.224 (omissaka˚); Pv iii.96; Miln 187, 249, 359 (38 rāja -- parisā, or divisions of the royal retinue); PvA 2, 6, 12, 21, 78 and passim; Sdhp 277. saparisa together with the assembly Vin iv.71; adv. ˚ŋ ThA 69. -- Note. The form of parisā as first part of a cpd. is parisa˚ (=*parisad, which laṭter is restored in cpd. parisaggata=*parisad -- gata). -- See also pārisagga.

-- antare within the assembly J iii.61. -- âvacara one who moves in the society, i. e. the Brotherhood of the Bhikkhus A iv.314; v.10. -- gata (ggata) having entered a company Sn 397 ( = pūga -- majjha -- gata SnA 377); Pug 29. -- ññū knowing the assembly A iii.148; iv.113 (+kālaññū puggalaññū), cp. D iii.252. -- dussana defilement of the Assembly A ii.225 (opp. ˚sobhaṇā). -- pariyanta the outer circle of the congregation DhA i.67; iii.172. -- majjhe in the midst of the assembly J i.267; ii.352; PvA 11. -- sārajja being afraid of the a. Miln 196=Nd2 470 (so read for parisārajja). Parisiñcati
Parisiñcati
[pari+siñcati] to sprinkle all over, to bathe M i.161; S i.8 (gattāni); Sdhp 595. Parisibbita
Parisibbita
[pp. of pari+sibbati] sewn round, bordered Vin i.186; J v.377. Parisukkha
Parisukkha
(adj.) [pari+sukkha] dried up, very dry J i.215 (of fields); Miln 302 (of the heart); PvA 64 (˚sarīra). Parisukkhita
Parisukkhita
[pp. of pari+ṡukṣ. Intens. of śuṣ] dried up, withered Miln 303 (˚hadaya). Parisujjhati
Parisujjhati
[Pass. of pari+śudh] to become clear or clean, to be purified S i.214; Sn 183, 184. -- pp. parisuddha (q. v.). Parisuddha
Parisuddha
(adj.) [pari+pp. of śudh] clean, clear, pure, perfect Vin ii.237; M i.26; iii.11; S ii 199 (˚dhammadesanā); iii.235; v.301, 354; A iii.125 (˚ñāṇa -- dassana); iv.120 sq.; J i.265; Vism 2 (accanta˚); Pug 68 (samāhite citte parisuddha); Miln 106; DA i.177, 219; SnA 445 (apanetabbassa abhāvato niddosa -- bhāvena p.); PvA 44, 70. Very freq. combd with pariyodāta (q. v.). -- aparisuddha unclean Vin ii.236, M i.17.

-- ājīva (adj.) of pure livelihood D i.63 (see DA i.181); A iii.124 (cp. pārisuddhi). Parisuddhatta
Parisuddhatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. parisuddha] purity, clean- liness, perfection M i.36; Miln 103 sq.; Vism 168. -- As f. pari -- suddhatā at Vism 30. Parisuddhi
Parisuddhi
(f.) [fr. pari+śudh] purity, purification S i.169. The usual spelling is pārisuddhi (q. v.). Parisumbhati
Parisumbhati
[pari+sumbhati] to strike, hit, throw down J iii.347 ( = paharati C.); vi.370, 376 (id. C.). Parisumbhana
Parisumbhana
(nt.) [fr. pari+śumbh] throwing down J vi.508 (bhūmiyā p.). Parisussati
Parisussati
[pari+sussati] to dry quite up, waste quite away J ii.5, 339, 437. -- Caus. parisoseti (q. v.). Parisussana
Parisussana
(nt.) [fr. pari+śuṣ] drying up completely, withering J v.97. Parisedita
Parisedita
[pp. of pari+Caus. of svid, Sk. parisvedita in slightly diff. use] heated, hatched, made ripe M i.104 (bījāni); S iii.153; Vin iii.3; Aiv. 125 (aṇḍāni), 176. -- 438 -- Parisesa
Parisesa
[pari+sesa] remnant, remainder, rest; only neg. aparisesa (adj.) without remainder, complete, entire M i.92, 110; A iii.166 = Pug 64; A iv.428 (˚ñāṇadassana). Parisoka
Parisoka
[pari+soka] great grief, severe mourning Ps i.38 (anto˚ in def. of soka). Parisodhana
Parisodhana
(nt.) [fr. parisodheti] cleansing, purification Miln 215. Parisodhita
Parisodhita
[pp. of parisodheti] cleaned, cleansed, purified Miln 415; Sdhp 414. Parisodheti
Parisodheti
[pari+Caus. of śudh] to cleanse, clean, purify M iii.3, 35 (aor. ˚sodhesi); Sn 407 (aor. ˚sodhayi); DhA ii.162 (vodapeti+). -- Freq. in phrase cittaŋ p. to cleanse one's heart (from = abl.) D iii.49; S iv.104; A ii.211; iii.92; Nd1 484; Pug 68. -- pp. parisodhita (q. v.). Parisosa
Parisosa
[fr. pari+śuṣ] becoming dried up, dryness, withering away S i.91. Parisosita
Parisosita
[pp. of parisoseti] dried up, withered away Sdhp 9. Parisoseti
Parisoseti
[Caus. of parisussati] to make dry up, to ex- haust, make evaporate (water) Miln 389. -- pp. parisosita (q. v.). Parissañjati
Parissañjati
(˚ssajati?) [pari+svaj] to embrace, enfold, J i.466; vi.156 (˚itvā, v. l. ˚ssajitvā & palisajjitvā). Parissanta
Parissanta
[pp. of parissamati] tired, fatigued, exhausted Pv ii.936; VvA 305; Sdhp 9, 101. Parissama
Parissama
[fr. pari+śram] fatigue, toil, exhaustion, VvA 289, 305 (addhāna˚ from journeying); PvA 3, 43, 113, 127. Parissaya
Parissaya
(m. & nt.) [fr. pari+śri? Etym. doubtful, cp. Weber, Ind. Streifen iii.395 and Andersen, Pāli Reader ii.167, 168] danger, risk, trouble M i.10 (utu˚); A iii.388 (id.); Sn 42, 45, 770, 921, 960 sq.; Dh 328 (˚ayāni = sīha -- vyaggh' -- ādayo pākaṭa -- parissaye, rāga -- bhaya -- dosabhay' ādayo paṭicchanna -- parissaye DhA iv.29); Nd1 12=Nd2 420 (where same division into pākaṭa˚ & paṭicchanna˚); Nd1 360, 365; J i.418; ii.405; v.315, 441 (antarāmagga p. cp. paripantha in same use); Vism 34 (utu˚); SnA 88 (expld as paricca sayantī ti p.); DhA iii.199 (˚mocana); PvA 216, DhsA 330. Parissāvana
Parissāvana
(nt.) [fr. pari+Caus. of sru] a water strainer, filter (one of the requisites of a bhikkhu) Vin i.209, ii.119 and passim; J i.198; iii.377; Nd1 226; DhA iii.260 (udaka˚); VvA 40, 63; Sdhp 593. Parissāvanaka
Parissāvanaka
(adj. -- n.) [fr. parissāvana] only neg. a˚: 1. one who has no strainer Vin ii.119; J i.198. -- 2. not to be filtered, i. e. so that there is nothing left to be filtered J i.400 (so read for ˚ssavanaka). Or is it "not overflowing"? Parissāvita
Parissāvita
[pp. of parissāveti] strained, filtered J i.198 (udaka). Parissāveti
Parissāveti
[Caus. of pari+sru] to strain or filter J i.198 (pānīyaŋ); DA i.206 (udakaŋ); iii.207 (pānīyaŋ). -- pp. parissāvita (q. v.). Parissuta
Parissuta
[pp. of pari+sru] overflowing J vi.328 ( = ati- puṇṇattā pagharamāna). Parihaṭa
Parihaṭa
(˚hata) [pp. of pariharati] surrounded by ( -- ˚) encircled; only in phrase sukha -- parihaṭa (+sukhe ṭhita) steeped in good fortune Vin iii.13 (corr. sukhedhita accordingly!); J ii.190 (pariharaka v. l. BB); vi.219 ( = sukhe ṭhita). Parihaṭṭha
Parihaṭṭha
[pp. of pari+hṛṣ] gladdened, very pleased PvA 13. Pariharaka
Pariharaka
(adj. n.) [fr. pari+hṛ] 1. surrounding or sur- rounded, having on one's hands J ii.190 (sukha˚, v. l. for ˚parihaṭa). -- 2. an armlet, bracelet VvA 167 (v. l. ˚haraṇa; expld as hatthâlankāra.) See also parihāraka. Pariharaṇa
Pariharaṇa
(nt.) [fr. pari+hṛ] 1. protection, care Vism 500 (gabbha˚); KhA 235; DA i.207 (kāya˚); DhA ii.179 (kāyassa). -- 2. keeping up, preservation, keeping in existence; in phrase khandha˚ DhA iii.261, 405. Cp. foll. Pariharaṇā
Pariharaṇā
(f.) [ = pariharaṇa] 1. keeping up, preserving, care, attention, pleasure PvA 219 (with v. l. ˚caraṇā; for paricārikā Pv iv.12). -- 2. keeping secret, guarding, hiding, deceiving Vbh 358=Pug 23. Pariharati
Pariharati
[pari+hṛ] 1. to take care of, to attend to (acc.), shelter, protect, keep up, preserve, look after Vin i.42; ii.188; D ii.100 (sanghaŋ); D ii.14 (gabbhaŋ kucchinā); M i.124, 459; S iii.1; A iii.123; J i.52 (kucchiyā), 143, 170; Miln 392, 410 (attānaŋ) 418; SnA 78; DhA ii.232 (aggiŋ, v. l. paricarati, which is the usual); PvA 63 (kucchiyā), 177. Cp. BSk. pariharati in same meaning e. g. AvŚ i.193, 205. -- 2. to carry about D ii.19 (ankena); M i.83; Sn 440 (muñjaŋ parihare, 1 sg. pres. med.; SnA 390 takes it as parihareyya); Miln 418 (āḷakaŋ p.). -- 3. (intrs.) to move round, go round, circle, revolve M i.328; A i.277 (candima -- suriyā p.; cp. A v.59) = Vism 205; J i.395; iv.378; vi.519; DA i.85; PvA 204. -- 4. to conceal Vin iii.52 (sunkaŋ). -> 5. to set out, take up, put forward, propose, only in phrase (Com. style) uttān' atthāni padāni p. to take up the words in more explicit meaning SnA 178, 419, 437, 462. -- pp. parihaṭa. Pass. parihīrati (q. v.). -- See also anupariharati. Pariharitabbatta
Pariharitabbatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. grd. of pariharati] neces- sity of guarding Vism 98. Parihasati
Parihasati
[pari+has] to laugh at, mock, deride J i.457. - Caus. parihāseti to make laugh J v.297. Parihāna
Parihāna
(nt.) [fr. pari+hā] diminution, decrease, wasting away, decay S ii.206 sq.; A ii.40 (abhabbo parihānāya), iii.173, 309, 329 sq., 404 sq. (˚dhamma); v.103 (id.), 156 sq.; It 71 (˚āya saŋvattati); Dh 32 (abhabbo p. ˚āyo); Pug 12, 14. Parihāni
Parihāni
(f.) [fr. pari+hā] loss, diminution (opp. vuddhi) S ii.206; iv.76, 79; v.143, 173; A i.15; iii.76 sq.; iv.288; v.19 sq., 96, 124 sq.; J ii.233; DhA iii.335; iv.185. Parihāniya
Parihāniya
(adj.) [parihāna+ya] connected with or causing decay or loss D ii.75 sq. (˚ā dhammā conditions leading to ruin); A iv.16 sq.; Vbh 381; VbhA 507 sq. -- a˚ S v.85. Parihāpeti
Parihāpeti
[Caus. of parihāyati] 1. to let fall away, to lose, to waste S ii.29; J iv.214 (vegaŋ); Miln 244 (cittaŋ to lose heart, to despair); PvA 78. -- 2. to set aside, abandon, neglect, omit Vin i.72 (rājakiccaŋ); J ii.438; iv.132 (vaṭṭaŋ); v.46; Miln 404 (mūḷakammaŋ). -- Neg. ger. aparihāpetvā without omission DhsA 168; ppr. aparihāpento not slackening or neglecting Vism 122. Parihāyati
Parihāyati
[pari+hā] to decay, dwindle or waste away, come to ruin; to decrease, fall away from, lack; to be inferior, deteriorate Vin i.5; M iii.46 sq. (opp. abhivaḍḍhati); S i.120, 137; iii.125; iv.76 sq.; A iii.252; Dh 364; Sn 767; J ii.197; iv.108; Nd1 5 (paridhaŋsati+) Miln 249 (id.); Pug 12 (read ˚hāyeyya for ˚hāreyya); SnA 167 (+vinassati); PugA 181 (nassati+); PvA 5, 76 (v. l.), 125 (˚hāyeyyuŋ). -- pp. parihīna, Pass. parihiyyati, Caus. parihāpeti (q. v.). -- 439 -- Parihāra
Parihāra
[fr. pari+hṛ, cp. pariharati] 1. attention, care (esp. -- ˚), in cpds. like gabbha˚ care of the foetus DhA i.4; dāraka˚ care of the infant J ii.20; kumāra˚ looking after the prince J i.148, ii.48; DhA i.346; dup˚ hard to protect J i.437; Vism 95 (Majjhimo d. hard to study?) -- 2. honour, privilege, dignity Vin i.71; J iv.306 (gārava˚). -- 3. surrounding (lit.), circuit of land J iv.461. -- 4. surrounding (fig.), attack; in cpd. visama˚ being attacked by adversities A ii.87; Nd2 304ic; Miln 112, 135. -- 5. avoidance, keeping away from J i.186.

-- patha "circle road," i. e. (1) a roundabout way DhA ii.192. (2) encircling game D i.6 = Vin ii.10 (expld as "bhūmiyaŋ nānāpathaŋ maṇḍalaŋ katvā tattha pariharitabbaŋ pariharantānaŋ kīḷanaŋ" DA i.85; trsld as "keeping going over diagrams" Dial. i.10, with remark "a kind of primitive hop -- scotch"). Parihāraka
Parihāraka
(adj. -- n.) [fr. pari+hṛ] surrounding, encircling; a guard A ii.180. Parihārika
Parihārika
[fr. parihāra] keeping, preserving, protecting, sustaining D i.71 (kāya˚ cīvara, kucchi˚ piṇḍapāta; expld as kāya -- pariharaṇa -- mattakena & kucchi˚ at DA i.207; correct reading accordingly); M i.180; iii.34; Pug 58; Vism 65 (kāya˚, of āvara). Parihārin
Parihārin
(adj.) [fr. parihāra] taking care of, (worth) keeping S iv.316 (udaka -- maṇika). Parihāsa
Parihāsa
[fr. pari+has, cp. parihasati] laughter, laughing at, mockery J i.116 (˚keḷi), 377; DhA i.244. Parihāsiŋsu
Parihāsiŋsu
at J i.384 is to be read ˚bhāsiŋsu. Parihiyyati
Parihiyyati
[Pass. of parihāyati, Sk. ˚hīyate] to be left, to be deserted, to come to ruin ( = dhaŋsati) J iii.260. Parihīna
Parihīna
[pp. of parihāyati] fallen away from, decayed; deficient, wanting; dejected, destitute S i.121; A iii.123; Sn 827, 881 (˚pañña); J i.112, 242; iv.200; Nd1 166, 289; Miln 249, 281 (a˚); PvA 220 ( = nihīna). Parihīnaka
Parihīnaka
(adj.) [parihīna+ka] one who has fallen short of, neglected in, done out of (abl. or instr.) D i.103. Parihīrati
Parihīrati
[Pass. of pariharati, Sk. parihriyate in develop- ment ˚hriyate> *hiriyati>*hiyirati>˚hīrati] to be carried about (or better "taken care of," according to Bdhgh's expln SnA 253; see also Brethren 226) Sn 205 = Th 1, 453. Parīta
Parīta
see vi˚. Parūpa˚
Parūpa˚
as para+upa˚ (in parūpakkama, parūpaghāta etc.) see under para. Parūḷha
Parūḷha
(adj.) [pp. of pa+ruh, cp. BSk. prarūḍha ( -- śma- śru) Jtm 210] grown, grown long, mostly in phrase ˚kaccha -- nakha -- loma having long nails, & long hair in the armpit, e. g. at S i.78; Ud 65; J iv.362, 371; vi.488; Miln 163 (so read for p. -- kaccha -- loma); Sdhp 104. -> Kern, Toev. ii.139 s. v. points out awkwardness of this phrase and suspects a distortion of kaccha either from kesa or kaca, i. e. with long hairs (of the head), nails & other hair. -- Further in foll. phrases: mukhaŋ p. bearded face J iv.387; ˚kesa -- nakha -- loma J i.303; ˚kesa -- massu with hair & beard grown long J iv.159; ˚kaccha with long grass J vi.100; ˚massu -- dāṭhika having grown a beard and tooth DA i.263. Pare
Pare
(adv.) see para 2 c. Pareta
Pareta
[pp. of pareti, more likely para+i than pari+i, although BSk. correspondent is parīta, e. g. śokaparīta Jtm 3194] gone on to, affected with, overcome by ( -- ˚), syn. with abhibhūta (e. g. PvA 41, 80). Very frequent in combn with terms of suffering, misadventure and passion, e. g. khudā˚, ghamma˚, jighacchā˚, dukkha˚, dosa˚, rāga˚, soka˚, sneha˚, Vin i.5; D ii.36; M i.13, 114, 364, 460; iii.14, 92; S ii.110; iii.93; iv.28; A i.147 = It 89; A iii.25, 96; Sn 449, 736, 818 (=samohita samannāgata pihita Nd1 149) 1092, 1123; J iii.157; Pv i.86; ii.24; Miln 248; PvA 61, 93. Pareti
Pareti
[in form = parā+i but more likely pari+i, thus= pariyeti] to set out for, go on to, come to (acc.) S ii.20; A v.2, 139 sq., 312; J v.401 (=pakkhandati C.). pp. pareta (q. v.). Paro
Paro
(adv.) [cp. Vedic paras; to para] beyond, further, above, more than, upwards of; only ˚ -- in connection with numerals (cp. Vedic use of paras with acc. of numerals), e.g. paropaññāsa more than 50 D ii.93; parosataŋ more than 100 J v.203, 497; parosahassaŋ over 1,000 D ii.16; S i.192 = Th 1, 1238; Sn p. 106 (=atireka -- sahassaŋ SnA 450). See also parakkaroti. Parokkha
Parokkha
(adj.) [paro+akkha = Vedic parokṣa (paraḥ+ akṣa)] beyond the eye, out of sight, invisible, imperceptible, Miln 291. -- abl. parokkhā (adv.) behind one's back, in the absence of J iii.89 (parammukhā C.; opp. sammukhā). Parodati
Parodati
[pa+rud] to cry out (for) J i.166; PvA 16, 257. Paropariya
Paropariya
(˚ñāṇa) see under indriya˚. The form is paro +pariya, paro heŕe taking the place of para. Yet it would be more reasonable to explain the word as para+ apara (upara?)+ya, i. e. that which belongs to this world & the beyond, or everything that comes within the range of the faculties. Cp. parovara. Parovara
Parovara
(adj. -- n.) [para+avara, sometimes through sub- stitution of apa for ava also paropara. We should expect a form *parora as result of contraction: see Nd2 p. 13] high & low, far & near; pl. in sense of "all kinds" (cp. uccâvaca). The word is found only in the Sutta Nipāta, viz. Sn 353 (v. l. BB varāvaraŋ, varovaraŋ; expld as "lokuttara -- lokiya -- vasena su̇ndar' âsundaraŋ dūre -- santikaŋ vā" SnA 350), 475 (˚ā dhammā; v. l. BB paroparā; expld as "parâvarā sundar' âsundarā, parā vā bāhirā aparā ajjhattikā" SnA 410), 704 (kāme parovare; v. l. BB paropare; expld as sundare ca asundare ca pañca kāmaguṇe" SnA 493), 1048 (reading paroparāni Nd2; see expln Nd2 422b; expld as "parāni ca orāni ca, par' attabhāva -- sak' attabhāv' ādīni parāni ca orāni ca" SnA 590), 1148 (paroparaŋ Nd2; see Nd2 422a; expld as "hīna -- ppaṇītaŋ" SnA 607). -- Note. Already in RV. we find para contrasted with avara or upara; para denoting the farther, higher or heavenly sphere, avara or upara the lower or earthly sphere: see e. g. RV. i.128, 3; i.164, 12. -- On paropara see further Wackernagel, Altind. Gr. ii.121 d. Pala
Pala
( -- ˚) [classical Sk. pala] a certain weight (or measure), spelt also phala (see phala2), only in cpd. sata˚ a hundred (carat) in weight Th 1, 97 (of kaŋsa); J vi.510 (sataphala kaŋsa = phalasatena katā kañcana -- pātī C.). Also in combn catuppala -- tippala -- dvipala -- ekapala -- sāṭikā Vism 339. Palaka
Palaka
[cp. late Sk. pala, flesh, meat] a species of plant J vi.564. Palagaṇḍa
Palagaṇḍa
[cp. Sk. palagaṇḍa Halāyudha ii.436; BSk. palagaṇḍa AvŚ i.339; Aṣṭas. Pār. 231; Avad. Kalp. ii.113] a mason, bricklayer, plasterer M i.119; S iii.154 (the reading phala˚ is authentic, see Geiger, P.G. § 40); A iv.127. Palaṇḍuka
Palaṇḍuka
[cp. Epic Sk. palāṇḍu, pala (white)+aṇḍu ( = aṇḍa? egg)] an onion Vin iv.259. Paladdha
Paladdha
[pp. of pa+labh] taken over, "had," overcome, deceived M i.511 (nikata vañcita p. where v. l. and id. p. S iv.307 however reads paluddha); J iii.260 (dava˚ = abhibhūta C.). -- 440 -- Palapati
Palapati
[pa+lapati] to talk nonsense J ii.322. Cp. vi˚. Palambati
Palambati
[pa+lambati] to hang down ThA 210; Sdhp 110. -- pp. palambita (q. v.). See also abhi˚. Palambita
Palambita
[pp. of palambati] hanging down Th 2, 256, 259; ThA 211. Palambheti
Palambheti
[pa+lambheti] to deceive D i.50, cp. DA i.151. Palaḷita
Palaḷita
[pa+laḷita] led astray S iv.197 (v. l. ˚lāḷita). At A iii.5 we read palāḷita, in phrase kāmesu p. ("sporting in pleasures"? Or should we read palolita?). Palavati
Palavati
[Vedic plavati, plu] to float, swim Vin iv.112; Dh 334; Th 1, 399; J iii.190. Palasata
Palasata
[according to Trenckner, Notes p. 59, possibly fr. Sk. parasvant] a rhinoceros J vi.277 (v. l. phalasata; expld as "khagga -- miga," with gloss "balasata"); as phalasata at J vi.454 (expld as phalasata -- camma C.). See palāsata. Palahati
Palahati
[pa+lahati] to lick Pv iii.52 = PvA 198. Palāta
Palāta
[contracted form of palāyita, pp. of palāyati, cp. Prk. palāa ( = *palāta) Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 567] run away J vi.369; Vism 326; VvA 100; DhA ii.21. Palātatta
Palātatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. palāta] running away, escape J i.72. Palāpa
Palāpa1
[Vedic palāva, cp. Lat. palea, Russ pelëva; see also Geiger, P.Gr. § 396, where pralāva is to be corr. to palāva] chaff of corn, pollard A iv.169 (yava˚); J. i.467, 468; iv.34; SnA 165 (in exegesis of palāpa2; v. l. BB palāsa), 312 (id.); J iv.34, 35 (perhaps better to read kula -- palāso & palāsa -- bhūta for palāpa). Palāpa
Palāpa2
[Vedic pralāpa, pa+lap; taken by P. Com. as identical with palāpa1, their example followed by Trenckner, Notes 63, cp. also Miln. trsl. ii.363 "chaff as frivolous talk"] prattling, prattle, nonsense; adj. talking idly, chaffing, idle, void M iii.80 (a˚); S i.166 (not palapaŋ), 192 = Th 1, 1237; A iv.169 (samaṇa˚ in allegory with yava˚ of palāpa1); Sn 89 (māyāvin asaŋyata palāpa=palāpa -- sadisattā SnA 165), 282= Miln 414 (here also expld as palāpa1 by SnA 312); VbhA 104. In phrase tuccha palāpa empty and void at Miln 5, 10. Palāpin
Palāpin
in apalāpin "not neglectful" see palāsin. Palāpeti
Palāpeti1
[Caus. of palāyati] to cause to run away, to put to flight, drive away J ii.433; DhA i.164, 192; iii.206. Palāpeti
Palāpeti2
[Caus. of pa+lap, cp. palāpa to which it may be referred as Denom.] to prattle, talk J i.73, 195. Palāyati
Palāyati
[cp. Vedic palāyati, palāy] to run (away) Vin iii.145 (ubbijjati uttasati p.); A ii.33 (yena vā tena vā palayanti); Sn 120; J ii.10; DhA i.193; PvA 253, 284 ( = dhāvati). -- ppr. palāyanto S i.209=Th 2, 248 =Pv ii.717=Nett 131=DhA iv.21; aor. palāyi S i.219; J i.208; ii.209, 219, 257; iv.420; DhA iii.208; DA i.142; PvA 4, 274; ger. palāyitvā J i.174; PvA 154; inf. palāyituŋ J i.202; vi.420. -- Contracted forms are: pres. paleti (see also the analogy -- form pāleti under pāleti, to guard) D i.54 (spelt phaleti, expld DA i.165 by gacchati); Sn 1074, 1144 (=vajati gacchati Nd2 423); Dh 49; Nd1 172; J v.173, 241; Vv 8436 (=gacchati VvA 345); Pv i.111 (gacchati PvA 56); aor. palittha J v.255; fut. palehiti Th 1, 307; imper. palehi Sn 831 (=gaccha SnA 542) -- pp. palāta & palāyita; Caus. palāpeti1 (q. v.). Palāyana
Palāyana
(nt.) [fr. palāy] running away DhA i.164. See also pālana. Palāyanaka
Palāyanaka
(adj.) [fr. palāy] running away J ii.210 (˚ŋ karoti to put to flight). Palāyin
Palāyin
(adj.) [fr. palāy] running away, taking to flight S i.221 = 223. -- Usually neg. apalāyin S i.185, and in phrase abhīru anutrāsin apalāyin S i.99; Th 1, 864; J iv.296 and passim. See apalāyin & apalāsin. Palāla
Palāla
(m. & nt.) [cp. Ved. & Epic Sk. palāla] straw J i.488; DhA i.69.

-- channaka a roof of thatch Th 1, 208. -- piṇḍa a bundle of straw Vism 257 = KhA 56. -- pīṭhaka "straw foot -- stool," a kind of punishment or torture M i.87= A ii.122=Miln 197 (see Miln trsl. i.277 "Straw Seat," i. e. being so beaten with clubs, that the bones are broken, and the body becomes like a heap of straw); Nd1 154; Nd2 604; J v.273. -- puñja a heap of straw D i.71; M iii.3; A i.241; ii.210; Pug 68; VbhA 367. -- puñjaka same as puñja Miln 342. Palāḷita
Palāḷita
see palaḷita. Palāsa
Palāsa1
(m. & nt.) [Vedic palāśa] 1. the tree Butea fron- dosa or Judas tree J iii.23 (in Palāsa Jātaka). -- 2. a leaf; collectively (nt.) foliage, pl. (nt.) leaves S ii.178; J i.120 (nt.); iii.210, 344; PvA 63 (˚antare; so read for pās' antare), 113 (ghana˚), 191 (sāli˚). puppha˚ blossoms & leaves DhA i.75; sākhā˚ branches & leaves M i.111; J i.164; Miln 254; paṇḍu˚ a sear leaf Vin i.96; iii.47; iv.217; bahala˚ (adj.) thick with leaves J i.57. -- palāsāni (pl.) leaves J iii.185 ( = palāsapaṇṇāni C.); PvA 192 (=bhūsāni). Palāsa
Palāsa2
& (more commonly) Paḷāsa [according to Trenckner, Notes 83, from ras, but BSk. pradāśa points to pa+ dāśa = dāsa "enemy" this form evidently a Sanskritisation] unmercifulness, malice, spite. Its nearest synonym is yuga -- ggāha (so Vbh 357; Pug 18, where yuddhaggāha is read; J iii.259; VvA 71); it is often combd with macchera (Vv 155) and makkha (Miln 289). -> M i.15, 36, 488; A i.79; J ii.198; Vbh 357; Pug 18 (+paḷāsāyanā, etc.). -- apaḷāsa mercifulness M i.44. Palāsata
Palāsata
[so read for palasata & palasada; cp. Vedic parasvant given by BR. in meaning "a certain large animal, perhaps the wild ass"] a rhinoceros J v.206, 408; vi.277. Palāsika
Palāsika
(adj.) [fr. palāsa1] 1. in cpd. paṇḍu˚ one who lives by eating withered leaves DA i.270, 271. -- 2. in cpd. eka˚ (upāhanā) (a shoe) with one lining (i. e. of leaves) Vin i.185 ( = eka paṭala Bdhgh; see Vin. Texts ii.13). Palāsin
Palāsin
(paḷāsin) (adj.) [fr. palāsa2] spiteful, unmerciful, malicious M i.43 sq., 96; A iii.111; combd with makkhin at Vin ii.89 (cp. Vin Texts iii.38); J iii.259. apaḷāsin D iii.47 (amakkhin+); M i.43; A iii.111; Pug 22; see also separately. Pali˚
Pali˚
[a variant of pari˚, to be referred to the Māgadhī dialect in which it is found most frequently, esp. in the older language, see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 257; Geiger, P.Gr. § 44] round, around ( = pari) only as prefix in cpds. (q. v.). Often we find both pari˚ & pali˚ in the same word. Palikujjati
Palikujjati
[pali+kujjati] to bend oneself over, to go crooked M i.387. Palikuṇṭhita
Palikuṇṭhita
[a var. of paliguṇṭhita, q. v. & cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 391] covered, enveloped, smeared with J ii.92 (lohita˚). Palikha
Palikha
[a variant of paligha on kh for gh see Geiger, P.Gr. § 392] a bar J vi.276 (with palighā as gloss). -- 441 -- Palikhaṇati
Palikhaṇati
[pali+khaṇ, cp. parikhā] to dig up, root out S i.123; ii.88 (so read for paliŋ˚ & phali˚) = A i.204; ger. palikhañña Sn 968 (=uddharitvā Nd1 490); palikhāya S i.123 (cp. KS 320); & palikhaṇitvā S ii.88; SnA 573. -- pp. palikhata (q. v.). Palikhata
Palikhata
[pp. of palikhaṇati] dug round or out S iv.83 (so read with v. l. for T. palikhita). Palikhati
Palikhati
[pa+likh] to scratch, in phrase oṭṭhaŋ p. to bite one's lip J v.434 = DhA iv.197. Palikhādati
Palikhādati
[pali+khādati] to bite all round, to gnaw or peck off M i.364 (kukkuro aṭṭhikankalaŋ p.). Paligijjhati
Paligijjhati
[pali+gijjhati] to be greedy Nd2 77 (abhi- gijjhati+). Paliguṇṭhita
Paliguṇṭhita
[pali+guṇṭhita, variant palikuṇṭhita, as kuṇṭhita & guṇḍhita are found] entangled, covered, enveloped Sn 131 (mohena; v. l. BB ˚kuṇṭhita); J ii.150 = DhA i.144 (v. l. ˚kuṇṭh˚); iv.56; Miln ii. Expld by pariyonaddha J ii.150, by paṭicchādita J iv.56. Cp. pāliguṇṭhima. Paligedha
Paligedha
[pali+gedha but acc. to Geiger, P.Gr. § 10 = parigṛddha] greed, conceit, selfishness A i.66; Nd2 taṇhā ii (gedha+); Dhs 1059, 1136. Paligedhin
Paligedhin
(adj.) [fr. paligedha, but Geiger, P.Gr. § 10 takes it as *parigṛddhin, cp. giddhin] conceited, greedy, selfish A iii.265. Paligha
Paligha
[pari+gha of (g)han, cp. P. & Sk. parigha] 1. a cross -- bar Vin ii.154; Th 2, 263 (vaṭṭa˚ = parighadaṇḍa ThA 211); J ii.95; vi.276. -- 2. an obstacle, hindrance D ii.254=S i.27. -- (adj) ( -- ˚) in two phrases: okkhitta˚ with cross -- bars erected or put up D i.105 (=ṭhapita˚ DA i.274), opp. ukkhitta˚ with cross -- bars (i. e. obstacles) withdrawn or removed M i.139=A iii.84=Nd2 284 C.; Sn 622 (=avijjā -- palighassa ukkhittattā SnA 467); cp. parikhā.

-- parivattika turning round of the bar the "Bar Turn," a kind of punishment or torture (consisting in "a spike being driven from ear to ear he is pinned to the ground" Hardy, E.M. 32, cp. Miln trsl. i.277) M i.87 = A i.47=ii.122=Nd1 154= Nd2 604 B (reads palingha, v. l. paligha)=Miln 197. Palita
Palita
(adj.) [cp. Vedic palita; Gr. pelitno/s, pelio/s black -- grey; Lith. pilkas grey; Ags. fealu = Ohg. falo, E. fallow, Ger. fahl; also Sk. pāṇḍu whitish; P. paṇḍu, pāṭala pink] grey, in cpd. ˚kesa with grey (i. e. white) hair M i.88 (f. ˚kesī); A i.138; J i.59, 79; abs. only at J vi.524. The spelling phalita also occurs (e. g. PvA 153). -- Der. pālicca. Palitta
Palitta
[pp. of palippati] smeared Th 2, 467 ( = upalitta ThA 284). Palipa
Palipa
fr. [pa+lip] sloppiness, mud, marsh M i.45; Th 1, 89; 2, 291 ( = panka ThA 224); J iii.241 (read palipo, cp. C.=mahākaddamo ibid.)=iv.480. Palipatha
Palipatha
[for paripatha = ˚pantha (q. v.), the bases path˚ & panth˚ frequently interchanging. Trenckner (Notes 80) derives it fr. pa+lip] danger, obstacle (or is it "mud, mire"=palipa?) A iv.290; Sn 34=638 (= rāga˚ SnA 469)=Dh 414 (=rāga˚ DhA iv.194). Palipadaka
Palipadaka
see pāli˚. Palipanna
Palipanna
[for paripanna, pp. of paripajjati] fallen, got or sunk into ( -- ˚ or loc.) Vin i.301 (muttakarīse); D ii.24 (id.); M i.45 (palipa˚) = Nd2 651 B; M i.88; J vi.8; Vism 49 (muttakarīse). Palippati
Palippati
[Med. -- Pass. of pa+lip; often spelt palimpati] to be smeared; to stick, to adhere to Pv iv.15 (˚amāna read for palimpamāna). -- pp. palitta (q. v.). Palibujjhati
Palibujjhati
see palibuddhati. Palibujjhana
Palibujjhana
(nt.) [fr. palibujjhati] obstruction DhA iii.258. Palibuddha
Palibuddha
[pp. of palibujjhati] obstructed, hindered, stopped; being kept back or delayed, tarrying J ii.417; Nd2 107 (paliveṭhita+); Miln 388 (ākāso a˚) 404; DhA iii.198. Often in phrase lagga laggita p. Nd2 88, 107, 332, 596, 597, 657. Palibuddhati
Palibuddhati
[the etym. offered by Andersen, Pāli Reader s. v. palibuddha, viz. dissimilation for pari+ruddhati (rudh) is most plausible, other explns like Trenckner's (Notes 66 for pari+bādh, med -- pass. bajjhati = *bādhyate, seemingly confirmed by v. l. Nd2 74 & 77 ˚bajjhati for ˚bujjhati) and Kern's (Toev. s. v. =Ogh. firbiotan, Ger. verbieten) are semantically not satisfactory. Cp. avaruddhati & avaruddha] 1. to obstruct, refuse, keep back, hinder, withhold Vin ii.166; iv.42, 131; J i.217 (cp. paṭibāhati ibid.); iii.138 (aor. ˚buddhi.); iv.159; Miln 263. -- 2. to delay Miln 404 (or should we read ˚bujjhati i. e. sticks, tarries, is prevented?). -> Pass. palibujjhati [this word occurs only in Commentary style & late works. In the Niddesa the nearest synonym is lag, as seen from the freq. combn palibuddha+lagga, palibodha+laggana: see Nd2 p. 188 under nissita] to be obstructed or hindered, to be kept by (instr. or loc.) to stick or adhere to, to trouble about, attend to Nd2 74, 77 (paligijjhati+), 88, 107, 597, 657; Miln 263. -- pp. palibuddha (q. v.). Palibodha
Palibodha
[see palibuddhati] obstruction, hindrance, obstacle, impediment, drawback J i.148; iii.241 (a˚ non -- obstruction), 381 (id.); Nett 80; also in var. phrases, viz. kāma˚ Nd2 374 (+kāmapariḷāha); kula˚ cīvara˚ Nd2 68, cp. Miln 388 (kule p.); ghar'āvāsa˚, putta -- dāro etc. Nd1 136; Nd2 172a B, 205, cp. J ii.95 (ghara˚); KhA 39 (enumd as set of dasa palibodhā which are also given and expld in detail at Vism 90 sq.); cp. DhsA 168, and in combn laggana bandhana p. Nd2 332, 620. Two palibodhas are referred to at Vin i.265, viz. āvāsa˚ and cīvara˚ (cp. Vin. Texts ii.157) and sixteen at Miln 11. Cp. Cpd. 53. -- The minor obstacles (to the practice of kammaṭṭhāna) are described as khuddaka˚ at Vism 122 & referred to at DhsA 168. -- See also sam˚. Palibhañjana
Palibhañjana
(nt.) [pari+bhañjana] breaking up Nd2 576 (sambhañjana+; v. l. pari˚). See also sam˚. The spelling phali˚ occurs at ThA 288. Palimaṭṭha
Palimaṭṭha
[pp. of pari+mṛj] polished J v.4. Cp. pari- maṭṭha. See also sam˚. Paliveṭhana
Paliveṭhana
(adj. nt.) [fr. pari+veṣṭ] wrapping, surrounding, encircling, encumbrance J iv.436; Pug 34; Vism 353 (˚camma); DhsA 366. Paliveṭhita
Paliveṭhita
[pp. of paliveṭheti] wrapped round, entwined, encircled, fettered Nd2 107 (˚veṭṭh˚, combd with laggita & palibuddha); J iv.436; vi.89. Cp. sam˚. Paliveṭheti
Paliveṭheti
[pari+veṣṭ] to wrap up, cover, entwine, encircle M i.134; J i.192; ii.95; DhA i.269; DhsA 366. -- Pass. paliveṭhīyati Miln 74. -- pp. paliveṭhita (q. v.). See also sam˚. Palisajjati
Palisajjati
[pari+sṛj] to loosen, make loose S ii.89 (mū- lāni). Palissajati
Palissajati
[pari+svaj] to embrace D ii.266; J v.158 (aor. palissaji = ālingi C). 204, 215; vi.325. Palissuta
Palissuta
[pp. of pari+sru] flowing over J vi.328. Palugga
Palugga
[pp. of palujjati, Sk. *prarugṇa] broken up, crushed, crumbled Bu ii.24; Miln 217. -- 442 -- Palujjati
Palujjati
[Pass. of palujati = pa+ruj] to break (intrs.) to fall down, crumble, to be dissolved Vin ii.284; D ii.181; M i.488; S ii.218; iii.137; iv.52=Nd2 550 (in exegesis of "loka"); Miln 8; Vism 416. -- pp. palugga (q. v.). Cp. BSk. pralujyati MVastu ii.370. Palujjana
Palujjana
(nt.) [fr. palujjati] breaking up, destruction SnA 506. Paluddha
Paluddha
[pp. of pa+lubh] seduced, enticed S iv.307 (where id. p. M i.511 reads paladdha); J i.158; vi.255, 262. See also palobheti & palobhita. Palumpati
Palumpati
[pa+lup] to rob, plunder, deprive of A i.48. Paleti
Paleti
see palāyati. Palepa
Palepa
[fr. pa+lip] smearing; plaster, mortar Th 2, 270; ThA 213. Palepana
Palepana
(nt.) [fr. pa+lip] smearing, anointing; adj. ( -- ˚) smeared or coated with M i.429 (gāḷha˚ thickly smeared). Paloka
Paloka
[fr. pa+*luj = ruj, thus standing for *paloga, cp. roga] breaking off or in two, dissolution, decay Vin ii.284; M i.435=Miln 418 (in formula aniccato dukkhato rogato etc., with freq. v. l. paralokato; cp. A iv.423; Nd2 214; Ps ii.238); S iii.167 (id.) iv.53; v. 163. Palokin
Palokin
(adj.) [fr. paloka] destined for decay or destruc- tion S iv.205 = Sn 739 (acc. palokinaŋ=jarā -- maraṇehi palujjana -- dhamma SnA 506); Th 2, 101 (acc. pl. palokine, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 952). Palobha
Palobha
[fr. pa+lubh] desire, greed PvA 265. Palobhana
Palobhana
(nt.) = palobha J i.196, 210; ii.183; Miln 286. Palobhita
Palobhita
[pp. of palobheti] desired PvA 154. Palobheti
Palobheti
[Caus. of pa+lubh] to desire, to be greedy Sn 703; J i.79, 157, 298; vi.215; SnA 492; DhA i.123, 125; PvA 55. -- pp. palobhita (q. v.). Pallanka
Pallanka
[pary+anka, cp. Class Sk. palyanka & Māgadhī paliyanka] 1. sitting cross -- legged, in instr. pallankena upon the hams S i.124, 144; and in phrase pallankaŋ ābhujati "to bend (the legs) in crosswise" D i.71; M i.56; A iii.320; J i.17, 71; Ps i.176; Pug 68; Miln 289; DhA ii.201. -- This phrase is expld at Vism 271 and VbhA 368 as "samantato ūru -- baddh' āsanaŋ bandhati." -- 2. a divan, sofa, couch Vin ii.163, 170 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.209, which is to be corrected after Dial. i.12); D i.7; S i.95; J i.268; iv.396; v.161; Vv 311; Pv ii.127; iii.32; DhA i.19; PvA 189, 219. Pallati
Pallati
(pallate), is guarded or kept, contracted (poetical) form of pālayate (so Cy.) J v.242. Pallattha
Pallattha
[Sk. *paryasta, pari+pp. of as to throw, cp. Prk pallattha Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 285] the posture of sitting or squatting or lolling J i.163 (here in expln of tipallattha: pallatthaŋ vuccati sayanaŋ, ubhohi passehi ujukam eva ca go -- nisinnaka -- vasenā ti tīh'ākārehi pallatthaŋ etc.; see under ti˚). Cp. ti˚, vi˚. Pallatthikā
Pallatthikā
(f.) [fr. pallattha] same meaning as pallattha Vin ii.213; iii.162 (cp. Vin. Texts i.62; iii.141); Vism 79 (dussa˚). Pallatthita
Pallatthita
[doubtful, perhaps we should read paliyattha, see Kern, Toev. s. v.] perverse J v.79. Pallala
Pallala
(nt.) [cp. Class Sk. palvala = Lat. palus; Ohg. felawa = Ger. felber willow; Lith. pélkè moor; BSk. also palvala, e. g. Divy 56] 1. marshy ground M i.117; S iii.108 sq. -- 2. a small pond or lake Vin i.230= D ii.89; J ii.129; v.346. Pallava
Pallava
(nt.) [cp. Class Sk. pallaka] a sprout J i.250; ii.161. See also phallava. Pallavita
Pallavita
(adj.) [fr. pallava] having sprouts, burgeoning, budding Miln 151; VvA 288 (sa˚ full of sprouts). Pallāsa
Pallāsa
see vi˚. Palloma
Palloma
[a contraction of pannaloma, see J.P.T.S. 1889, 206] security, confidence D i.96; M i.17; cp. DA i.266 "loma -- haŋsa -- mattam pi 'ssa na bhavissati." Pavakkhati
Pavakkhati
[fut. of pa+vac] only in 1st sq. pavakkhāmi "I will declare or explain" Sn 701, 963 = 1050 (cp. Nd1 482 & Nd2 under brūmi). Pavacchati
Pavacchati
[Sk. prayacchati] see anu˚, & cp. pavecchati. Pavajati
Pavajati
[pa+vraj] to wander forth, go about, peram- bulate; ppr. pavajamāna S i.42 (but may be pavajjamāna "being predicated" in play of word with act. pavadanto in same verse). Pavajjati
Pavajjati
[Pass. of pavadati] to sound forth to be played (of music) J i.64 (pavajjayiŋsu, 3rd pl. aor.); VvA 96 (pavajjamāna ppr. med.). Pavajjana
Pavajjana
(nt.) [fr. pavajjati, Pass. of pavadati] sounding, playing of music VvA 210. Pavaḍḍha
Pavaḍḍha
[pp. of pavaḍḍhati] grown up, increased, big, strong J v.340 (˚kāya of huge stature; so read for pavaddha˚; expld as vaḍḍhita -- kāya). Pavaḍḍhati
Pavaḍḍhati
[pa+vṛdh] to grow up, to increase M i.7; S ii.84, 92; Sn 306 (3rd sg. praet. ˚atha); Dh 282, 335, 349; Pug 64; PvA 8 (puññaŋ). -- pp. pavaḍḍha & pavuddha. Pavati
Pavati1
[pa+vā] to blow forth, to yield a scent Th 1, 528 ( = gandhaŋ vissajjati C.). See pavāti. Pavati
Pavati2
[of plu, cp. Vedic plavate to swim & Epic Sk. pravate to jump] to hurry on, to rush VvA 42 (but better read with v. l. patati as syn. of gacchati). Pavatta
Pavatta
(adj.) [pp. of pavattati] 1. (adj.) happening, going on, procedure, resulting Th 2, 220 (assu ca pavattaŋ, taken by Mrs. Rh. D. as "tears shed"); ThA 179; PvA 35, 83 (gāthāyo), 120, esp. with ref. to natural products as "that which comes," i. e. normal, natural, raw; ˚phala ready or natural, wild fruit (gained without exertion of picking), in cpds. ˚phalika SnA 295 sq.; ˚bhojana (adj.) J i.6; iii.365; Vism 422, and, ˚bhojin one who lives on wild fruit (a certain class of ascetics, tāpasā) D i.101; M i.78, 343; A i.241; ii.206; cp. DA i.269 sq. & SnA 295, 296. ˚maŋsa fresh or raw meat (flesh) Vin i.217 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.81). -- 2. (nt.) "that which goes on," i. e. the circle or whirl of existence Miln 197, 326 (cp. Miln trsln ii.200 "starting afresh in innumerable births," quot. fr. C.), opp. appavatta freedom from Saŋsāra, i. e. Nibbāna ibid. -- 3. founded on, dealing with, relating to, being in S iv.115 (kuraraghare p. pabbata); DA i.92 (ādinaya˚), 217 (˚pīti -- sukha being in a state of happiness). Pavattati
Pavattati
[pa+vattati, vṛt] (intrs.) 1. to move on, go forward, proceed Pv i.57; PvA 8, 131; of water: to flow S ii.31; J ii.104; PvA 143, 154, 198. -- 2. to exist, to be, continue in existence J i.64; PvA 130 (opp. ucchijjati). -- 3. to result, to go on PvA 45 (phalaŋ), 60 (vippaṭisār' aggi). -- pp. pavatta; Caus. pavatteti (q. v.). Pavattana
Pavattana
(adj. nt.) [fr. pavattati] 1. moving forward, doing good, beneficial, useful; f. ˚i M i.214; Pug 35 (spelt pavattinī in T. as well as Pug A 218). -- 2. execution, performance, carrying out Miln 277 (āṇā,˚ cp. pavatti). -- 443 -- Pavattayitar
Pavattayitar
[n. ag. to pavatteti] one who sets into motion or keeps up DA i.273 (see foll.). Pavattar
Pavattar
[n. ag. of either pa+vac or pa+vṛt, the latter more probable considering similar use of parivatteti. The P. commentators take it as either] one who keeps up or keeps going, one who hands on (the tradition), an expounder, teacher D i.104 (mantānaŋ p. = pavattayitar DA i.273); S iv.94; Dh 76 (nidhīnaŋ p.=ācikkhitar DhA ii.107). Pavattāpanatta
Pavattāpanatta
(nt.) [fr. Caus. II. of pavatteti = pavattā- peti] making continue, keeping going, preservation, upkeep Vism 32 (T. ˚attha). Pavatti
Pavatti
(f.) [fr. pa+vṛt] 1. manifestation, wielding, exe- cution, giving, in āṇā˚ royal authority J iii.504; iv.145; ThA 283. -- 2. happening, incident, news J i.125, 150; ii.416; Vism 91; PvA 6, 17, 29, 35, 92, 152, 242, etc.; DhA i.80 (v. l. pavutti). Cp. pavutti. Pavattita
Pavattita
[pp. of pavatteti] set going, inaugurated, established Vin i.11 (dhammacakka); M iii.29, 77; S i.191; Sn 556, 557 (dhammacakka); PvA 67 (id.), 140 (sangīti); SnA 454. Pavattin
Pavattin
(adj.) [fr. pa+vṛt] 1. advancing, moving for- ward, proceeding, effective, beneficial; only in phrase dhammā pavattino A i.279; DA i.4 = PvA 2; and in suppavattin (good -- flowing, i. e. well -- recited?) A iv.140 (of pātimokkha; trsld as "thoroughly mastered" J.P.T.S. 1909, 199, v.71 (id.). -- 2. going on, procedure (in f. ˚inī) Vin ii.271 sq., 277. Pavatteti
Pavatteti
[Caus. of pavattati] (trs.) 1. to send forth, set going Vin i.87 (assūni); S ii.282 (id.) J i.147 (selagulaŋ pavaṭṭ˚); esp. in phrase dhammacakkaŋ p. to inaugurate the reign of righteousness Vin i.8, 11; M i.171; S iii.86; Sn 693; Miln 20, 343; VvA 165; PvA 21, etc. -- 2. to cause, produce, make arise J ii.102 (mah' oghaŋ); Miln 219. -- 3. to give forth, bestow, give ( dānaŋ a gift) Vin iv.5 (spelt ṭṭ); PvA 19, 123, 139. -- 4. to continue, keep on, practise, go on with DhA i.257; PvA 29 (attabhāvaŋ), 42 (kammante). -- 5. to move about, behave, linger DhA i.14 (ṭṭ). -> 6. to display, execute, wield, enforce Miln 189 (āṇaŋ; cp. āṇāpavatti). -- pp. pavattita (q. v.). Pavadati
Pavadati
[pa+vad] to speak out, speak to, talk, dispute; ppr. pavadanto S i.42 (trsl. "predicate"); Nd1 293. -- aor. pāvādi ThA 71. -- Cp. pāvadati. Pavana
Pavana1
(nt.) [cp. Sk. pavana & pāvana, of pū] winnowing of grain Miln 201 (read pavanena ṭṭhāyiko who earned his living by winnowing gṛain). Pavana
Pavana2
(nt.) [cp. Vedic pravaṇa; not with Müller, P.Gr. 24 = upavana; perhaps= Lat. pronus "prone"] side of a mountain, declivity D ii.254; M i.117; S i.26; ii.95, 105; Th 1, 1092; J i.28; ii.180; vi.513; Cp. i.15, 101; iii.131; Miln 91, 198 sq., 364, 408; Vism 345. Cp. Pavananagara SnA 583 (v. l. BB for Tumbavanagara=Vanasavhaya). Note. Kern, Toev. s. v. defends Müller's (after Subhūti) interpretation as "wood, woodland," and compares BSk. pavana MVastu ii.272, 382. Pavana
Pavana3
at Vin ii.136 in cpd. pavan -- anta refers to the end of the girdle (kāyabandhana), where it is tied into a loop or knot. Bdhgh on p. 319 (on C.V. v.29, 2) expls it by pās' anta. Pavapati
Pavapati
[pa+vap] to sow out Th 2, 112. Pavayha
Pavayha
(adv.) [ger. of pavahati] carrying on, pressing, urgently, constantly, always repeated as pavayha pavayha M iii.118 = DhA ii.108; M i.442, 444. Pavara
Pavara
(adj.) [pa+vara] most excellent, noble, distin- guished S iii.264; Sn 83, 646, 698 (muni˚); Dh 422; Pug 69; Miln 246; PvA 2 (˚dhamma -- cakka), 67 (id.), 39 (˚buddh'āsana); Sdhp 421. Pavasati
Pavasati
[pa+vas] to "live forth," i. e. to be away from home, to dwell abroad Sn 899; J ii.123 ( = pavasaŋ gacchati); v.91. -- pp. pavuttha (q. v.). Cp. vi˚. Pavassati
Pavassati
[pa+vṛṣ] to "rain forth," to begin to rain, shed rain S i.100; Sn 18 sq. (imper. pavassa), 353 (v. l.); J vi.500 ("cry"), 587 (aor. pāvassi). -- pp. pavaṭṭha & pavuṭṭha: see abhi˚. Pavassana
Pavassana
(nt.) [fr. pa+vṛṣ] beginning to rain, raining Miln 120. Pavāta
Pavāta
(nt.) [pa+vāta, cp. Vedic pravāta] a draught of air, breeze Vin ii.79 (opp. nivāta). Pavāti
Pavāti
[pa+vā] to diffuse a scent Dh 54; Th 1, 528; J v.63 (disā bhāti p. ca). See also pavāyati. Pavāda
Pavāda
[pa+vad, cp. Epic Sk. pravāda talk, saying] talk, disputation, discussion D i.26, 162; M i.63; Sn 538. Pavādaka
Pavādaka
(adj.) [fr. pavāda] 1. belonging to a discussion, intended for disputation D i.178 (samaya˚ "debating hall"). -- 2. fond of discussing Miln 4 (bhassa˚ "fond of wordy disputation"). Cp. pavādiya. Pavādiya
Pavādiya
(adj.) [fr. pavāda, cp. pavādaka] belonging to a disputation, disputing, arguing, talking Sn 885 (n. pl. ˚āse, taken by Nd1 293 as pavadanti, by SnA 555 as vādino). Pavāyati
Pavāyati
[pa+vā] to blow forth, to permeate (of a scent), to diffuse J i.18 (dibba -- gandho p.); Vism 58 (dasa disā sīla -- gandho p.). Cp. pavāti. Pavāraṇā
Pavāraṇā
(f.) [pa+vṛ, cp. BSk. pravāraṇā Divy 91, 93; whereas Epic Sk. pravāraṇa, nt., only in sense of "satisfaction"] 1. the Pavāraṇā, a ceremony at the termination of the Vassa Vin i.155, 160 (where 2 kinds: cātuddasikā & pannarasikā), ii.32. 167; D ii.220; S i.190. pavāraṇaŋ ṭhapeti to fix or determine the (date of) P. Vin ii.32, 276. Later two kinds of this ceremony (festival) are distinguished, viz. mahā˚ the great P. and ˚sangaha, an abridged P. (see DA i.241) J i.29, 82, 193 (mahā˚); Vism 391 (id.); SnA 57 (id.); VvA 67 (id.); PvA 140 (id.); -- 2. satisfaction Vism 71. Pavārita
Pavārita
[pp. of pavāreti] 1. satisfied M i.12 (+pari- puṇṇa pariyosita); Miln 231; Vism 71. -- 2. having come to the end of the rainy season Vin i.175. -- Freq. in formula bhuttāvin pavārita having eaten & being satisfied Vin i.213 (cp. Vin. Texts i.39); ii.300; iv.82; PvA 23. Pavāreti
Pavāreti
[Caus. of pa+vṛ, cp. BSk. pravārayati Divy 116, 283, etc.] 1. to invite, offer, present, satisfy S i.190; A iv.79; J iii.352. -- 2. to celebrate the Pavāraṇā (i. e. to come to the end of the Vassa) Vin i.160 sq.; ii.255; DhA i.87; J i.29, 215; iv.243 (vuttha -- vassa p.); Vism 90; SnA 57. -- pp. pavārita (q. v.) See also sam˚. Pavāla & Pavāḷa
Pavāla
& Pavāḷa (m. & nt.) [cp. Class Sk. prabāla, pra- vāḍa & pravāla] 1. coral J i.394 (˚ratta -- kambala); ii.88; iv.142; Miln 267 (with other jewels), 380 (id.); SnA 117; VvA 112 (˚ratana). -- 2. a sprout, young branch, shoot J iii.389, 395 (kāḷa -- valli˚); v.207; Nett 14 (˚ankura); SnA 91 (id.). Pavāḷha
Pavāḷha
[apparently pp. of pavahati (pavāheti), but in reality pp. of pa+bṛh1, corresp. to Sk. prabṛdha (pravṛdha), cp. abbūlha & ubbahati (ud+bṛh1), but cp. also ubbāḷha which is pp. of ud+bādh. At D i.77 (where v. l. pabbāḷha = pabūḷha, unexpld by Bdhgh) it is synonymous with uddharati=ubbahati] 1. carried away (?), turned away, distracted, dismissed S iii.91 (bhikkhu -- sangho p.). -- 2. drawn forth, pulled out, taken out D i.77=Ps ii.211=Vism 406 (muñjamhā isīkā p.); J vi.67 (muñjā v'isikā p.). -- 444 -- Pavāsa
Pavāsa
[fr. pa+vas, cp. Vedic pravāsa in same meaning] sojourning abroad, being away from home J ii.123; v.434; vi.150; Miln 314. -- Cp. vi˚. Pavāsita
Pavāsita
1. (perhaps we should read pavārita?) given as present, honoured J v.377 ( = pesita C.). -- 2. (so perhaps to be read for pavūsita T.) scented, permeated with scent [pp. of pavāseti] VvA 237 (v. l. padhūpita preferable). Pavāsin
Pavāsin
(adj.) [fr. pavāsa] living abroad or from home, in cira˚ long absent Dh 219 ( = cirappavuttha DhA iii.293). Pavāhaka
Pavāhaka
(adj.) [fr. pa+vah] carrying or driving away Th 1, 758. Pavāhati
Pavāhati
[Caus. fr. pa+vah] 1. to cause to be carried away, to remove; freq. with ref. to water: to wash away, cleanse M i.39; S i.79, 183 (pāpakammaŋ nahānena); ii.88; Th 1, 349; J i.24; iii.176, 225, 289; iv.367; v.134; vi.197; 588; Miln 247; Dāvs ii.59; PvA 256. -> 2. to pull out, draw out D i.77 (better to be read as pabāhati). Pavāhitatta
Pavāhitatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. pavāhita, pp. of pavāheti] the fact of being removed or cleansed J v.134. Pavāhana
Pavāhana
(adj. & nt.) [fr. pa+vah] 1. carrying off, putting away, Th 1, 751. -- 2. wiping off J iii.290. Pavikatthita
Pavikatthita
[pp. of pa+vi+katthati] boasted J i.359. Pavicaya
Pavicaya
[fr. pa+vicinati] investigation Sn 1021; Th 1, 593; Pug 25; Nett 3, 87. Pavicarati
Pavicarati
[pa+vicarati] to investigate thoroughly M iii.85; S v.68. Pavicinati
Pavicinati
[pa+vicinati] to investigate, to examine M iii.85; S v.68, 262; Nett 21; SnA 545. grd. paviceyya J iv.164, & pavicetabba Nett 21. Pavijjhati
Pavijjhati
[pa+vyadh] to throw forth or down Vin ii.193 (silaŋ cp. J i.173 & v.333); iii.82, 178, 415; DA i.138, 154. -- pp. paviddha (q. v.). Pavijjhana
Pavijjhana
(nt.) [fr. pavijjhati] hurling, throwing J v.67 (Devadattassa silā˚, cp. Vin ii.193); J i.173; v.333. Paviṭṭha
Paviṭṭha
[pp. of pavisati] entered, gone into (acc.), visited S i.197; ii.19; Dh 373; DA i.288; PvA 12, 13. Pavitakka
Pavitakka
[pa+vitakka] scepticism, speculation, con- troversy Sn 834; Nd1 176. Pavidaŋseti
Pavidaŋseti
[pa+vi+Caus. of dṛś; daŋseti = dasseti] to make clear, to reveal J v.326 (aor. pavidaŋsayi). Paviddha
Paviddha
[pp. of pavijjhati] thrown down, fig. given up, abandoned Th 1, 350 (˚gocara). Pavineti
Pavineti
[pa+vineti] to lead or drive away, expel Sn 507 = J v.148. Pavibhajati
Pavibhajati
[pa+vi+bhaj. Cp. Class Sk. pravibhāga division, distribution] to distribute, to apportion S i.193 (˚bhajjaŋ, ppr., with jj metri causa) = Th 1, 1242 (˚bhajja ger.). Pavilīyati
Pavilīyati
[pa+vi+lī] to be dissolved, to melt or fade away S iv.289 (pavilīyamānena kāyena with their body melting from heat; so read for paveliyamānena). Paviloketi
Paviloketi
[pa+viloketi] to look forward or ahead J vi.559. Pavivitta
Pavivitta
[pp. of pa+vi+vic] separated, detached, secluded, singled M i.14, 77, 386; ii.6; S ii.29; Vism 73; PvA 127 DhA ii.77. Often in phrase appiccha santuṭṭha pavivitta referring to an ascetic enjoying the satisfaction of seclusion Nd2 225 = Nd1 3421b=Vism 25; J i.107; Miln 244, 358, 371 (with appa -- sadda appanigghosa). Paviveka
Paviveka
[fr. pa+vi+vic] retirement, solitude, seclusion Vin i.104; ii.258 (appicchatā santuṭṭhi+; cp. pavivitta); D i.60; M i.14 sq.; S ii.202; v.398; A i.240; Sn 257; Dh 205 (˚rasa, cp. DhA iii.268); Th 1, 597; J i.9; Ps ii.244; Vism 41, 73 (˚sukha -- rasa); Sdhp 476; DA i.169. Pavivekatā
Pavivekatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. paviveka] = paviveka Vism 81 (appicchatā etc. in enumn of the 5 dhuta -- dhammas). Pavivekiya
Pavivekiya
(adj.) [fr. paviveka] springing from solitude Th 1, 669. Pavisati
Pavisati
[pa+viś] to go in, to enter (acc.) Sn 668, 673; DhA ii.72 (opp. nikkhamati); PvA 4, 12, 47 (nagaraŋ). Pot. ˚vise Sn 387 imper. pavisa M i.383; S i.213; fut. pavisissati Vin i.87; J iii.86; pavissati (cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 652) J ii.68; Cp. i.956, and pavekkhati S iv.199; J vi.76 (nāgo bhūmiyaŋ p.); Dāvs iii.26; aor. pāvisi Vin ii.79 (vihāraŋ); M i.381; J i.76 (3rd pl. pāvisuŋ), 213; J ii.238; Vism 42 (gāmaŋ) PvA 22, 42, 161, 256; and pavisi J ii.238; PvA 12, 35; ger. pavisitvā S i.107; J i.9 (araññaŋ); Vism 22; PvA 4, 12, 46, 79 & pavissa S i.200; Dh 127 = PvA 104. -- pp. paviṭṭha (q. v.).-> Caus. paveseti (q. v.). Pavisana
Pavisana
(nt.) [fr. pa+viś] going in, entering, entrance J i.294; ii.416; vi.383; DhA i.83. Cp. pavesana. Pavīṇa
Pavīṇa
(adj.) [cp. Class. Sk. pravīṇa] clever, skilful Dāvs v.33; VvA 168 (v. l. kusala). Pavīnati
Pavīnati
[pa+vī to seek, Sk. veti, but with diff. formation in P. cp. Trenckner, Notes 78 (who derives it fr. veṇ) & apaviṇāti. The form is doubtful; probably we should read pacināti] to look up to, respect, honour J iii.387 (T. reading sure, but v. l. C. pavīrati). Pavīhi
Pavīhi
[pa+vīhi] in pl. diff. kinds of rice J v.405 ( = nānap- pakārā vīhayo). Pavuccati
Pavuccati
[Pass. of pavacati] to be called, said, or pro- nounced Sn 436, 513, 611 & passim; Dh 257; Pv iv.347; PvA 102. The form pavuccate also occurs, e. g. at Sn 519 sq. -- pp. pavutta1 (q. v.). Pavuṭā
Pavuṭā
at M i.518 is unexplained. The reading of this word is extremely doubtful at all passages. The vv. ll. at M i.518 are pavudhā, pavujā, paṭuvā, *phutā, and the C. expln is pavuṭā = gaṇṭhikā (knot or block?). The identical passage at D i.54 reads paṭuvā (q. v.), with vv. ll. pamuṭā, pamuvucā, while DA i.164 expls pacuṭā =gaṇṭhikā (vv. ll. pamuṭā, pamucā, papuṭā). Dial. i.72 reads pacuṭa, but leaves the word untranslated; Franke, Dīgha, p. 58 ditto. Pavuṭṭha
Pavuṭṭha
(pavaṭṭha) [pp. of pavassati] see abhi˚. Pavutta
Pavutta1
[pp. of pa+vac, but sometimes confounded with pavatta, pp. of pa+vṛt, cp. pavutti] said, declared, pronounced D i.104 (mantapada p.; v.l. ˚vatta which is more likely; but DA i.273 expls by vutta & vācita); S i.52; Sn 383 (su˚ = sudesita SnA 373), 868 (=ācikkhita desita, etc. Nd1 271). Pavutta
Pavutta2
[pp. of pa+vap] scattered forth, strewn, sown S i.227. Pavutti
Pavutti
[fr. pa+vṛt, cp. Class. Sk. pravṛtti] happening, proceeding, fate, event PvA 31 (v. l. pavatti), 46, 53, 61, 78, 81 and passim (perhaps should be read pavatti at all passages). -- 445 -- Pavuttha
Pavuttha
[pp. of pavasati] dwelling or living abroad, staying away from home D ii.261 (˚jāti one who dwells away from his caste, i. e. who no longer belongs to any caste); J v.434; DhA iii.293. Freq. in phrase pavutthapatikā itthi a woman whose husband dwells abroad Vin ii.268; iii.83; Miln 205. Pavūsita
Pavūsita
at VvA 237 is misreading either for pavāsita or (more likely) for padhūpita (as v. l. SS.), in meaning "blown" i. e. scented, filled with scent. Pavekkhati
Pavekkhati
is fut. pavisati. Pavecchati
Pavecchati
[most likely (as suggested by Trenckner, Notes 61) a distortion of payacchati (pa+yam) by way of *payecchati>pavecchati (cp. sa -- yathā> seyyathā). Not with Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 43 fr. pa+vṛṣ, nor with Müller P.Gr. 120 fr. pa+viṣ (who with this derivation follows the P. Commentators, e. g. J iii.12 pavesati, deti; SnA 407 (pavesati paṭipādeti); Geiger P.Gr. § 152, note 3 suggests (doubtfully) a Fut. stem (of viś?)] to give, bestow S i.18; Sn 463 sq., 490 sq.; Th 2, 272; J i.28; iii.12 (v. l. pavacchati), 172; iv.363; vi.502, 587 (vuṭṭhi -- dhāraŋ pavecchanto devo pāvassi tāvade; v.l. pavattento); Pv ii.943 ( = deti PvA 130); ii.970 (=pavatteti ibid. 139); ii.107 (=deti ibid. 144); Miln 375.

another dern suggested by Dr. Barnett in J.R.A.S. 1924, 186 is = Sk. pra -- vṛścati. Paveṇi
Paveṇi
(f.) [pa+veṇi; cp. late Sk. praveṇi in meanings 1 & 2] 1. a braid of hair, i. e. the hair twisted & unadorned A iii.56 -- 2. a mat, cover D i.7 ≈ (see ajina˚). -- 3. custom, usage, wont, tradition J i.89; ii.353; v.285; vi.380 (kula -- tanti, kula -- paveṇi); Dpvs xviii.1; Miln 134 (˚upaccheda break of tradition), 190, 226 (+vaŋsa), 227; DhA i.284 (tanti+); PvA 131. -- 4. succession, lineage, breed, race Sn 26 (cp. SnA 39); DhA i.174.

-- pālaka guardian of tradition Vism 99 (tanti -- dhara, vaŋsanurakkhaka+); DhA iii.386. Pavedana
Pavedana
(nt.) [fr. pa+vid] making known, telling, proc- lamation, announcement only in stanza "nisīd' ambavane ramme yāva kālappavedanā," until the announcement of the time (of death) Th 1, 563 (trsln "until the hour should be revealed") = J i.118=Vism 389=DhA i.248. Pavedita
Pavedita
[pp. of pavedeti] made known, declared, taught M i.67 (su˚ & du˚); S i.231; Dh 79, 281; Sn 171, 330, 838; Nd1 186. Pavedeti
Pavedeti
[Caus. of pa+vid] to make known, to declare, communicate, relate S i.24; iv.348; Dh 151; Sn p. 103 ( = bodheti ñāpeti SnA 444); PvA 33, 58, 68 (attānaŋ make oneself known), 120. -- pp. pavedita (q. v.). Pavedhati
Pavedhati
[pa+vyath, cp. pavyatheti] to be afflicted, to be frightened, to be agitated, quiver, tremble, fear Sn 928 ( = tasati etc. Nd1 384); Vism 180 (reads pavedheti) ThA 203 (allavatthaŋ allakesaŋ pavedhanto, misreading for pavesento); DhA ii.249. -- Freq in ppr. med. pavedhamāna trembling M i.88; Pv iii.55 (=pakampamāna PvA 199); J i.58; iii.395. -- pp. pavedhita & pavyadhita (q. v.). Pavellati
Pavellati
[pa+vell] to shake, move to & fro, undulate S iv.289 (paveliyamānena kāyena); J iii.395. -- pp. pavellita (q. v.). Pavellita
Pavellita
[pp. of pavellati] shaken about, moving to & fro, swinging, trembling J vi.456. Pavesa
Pavesa
( -- ˚) [fr. pa+viś] entrance ThA 66 (Rājagaha˚); DhA iv.150. Pavesana
Pavesana
(nt.) [fr. paveseti] 1. going in, entering, entrance J i.142; PvA 79 (v. l. for T. ˚vesa), 217, 221 (asipattavana˚). -- 2. beginning VvA 71 (opp. nikkhamana). -> 3. putting in, application J ii.102 (daṇḍe p.). -- 4. means of entry, as adj. able to enter J vi.383. Pavesetar
Pavesetar
[n. ag. of paveseti] one who lets in or allows to enter, an usher in S iv.194; A v.195. Paveseti
Paveseti
[Caus. of pavisati] 1. to make enter, allow to enter, usher in M i.79; J i.150 (miga -- gaṇaŋ uyyānaŋ), 291; vi.179; Vism 39; PvA 38, 44, 61 (gehaŋ), 141 (id.); DhA i.397. -- 2. to furnish, provide, introduce, procure, apply to (acc. or loc.) J iii.52 (rajjukaŋ gīvāya); vi.383 (siriŋ); Miln 39 (gehe padīpaŋ), 360 (udakaŋ); DA i.218. Perhaps at ThA 203 for pavedheti. -> Caus. II. pavesāpeti J i.294 (mātugāmaŋ aggiŋ). Pavyatheti
Pavyatheti
[Caus. of pa+vyath] to cause to tremble, to shake J v.409. Cp. pavedhati. -- pp. pavyadhita (q. v.). Pavyadhita
Pavyadhita
[pp. of pa+vyath; the dh through analogy with pavedhita] afflicted, frightened, afraid J vi.61, 166. Pasaŋsaka
Pasaŋsaka
[fr. pasaŋsati] flatterer M i.327; J ii.439; Sdhp 565. Pasaŋsati
Pasaŋsati
[pa+saŋs] to speak out, praise, commend, agree D i.163; S i.102, 149, 161; J i.143; ii.439; v.331; It 16; Sn 47, 163, 390, 658, 906; Dh 30; Pv ii.942; DA i.149; PvA 25, 131 ( = vaṇṇeti). -- pp. pasattha & pasaŋsita (q. v.). Cp. paṭipasaŋsita. Pasaŋsana
Pasaŋsana
(nt.) [fr. pa+śaŋs] praising, commendation Pug 53; Sdhp 213; PvA 30. Pasaŋsā
Pasaŋsā
(f.) [fr. pa+śaŋs; cp. Vedic praśaŋsā] praise, applause D iii.260; S i.202; Th 1, 609; Sn 213, 826, 895; Miln 377; SnA 155. In composition the form is pasaŋsa˚, e. g. ˚āvahana bringing applause Sn 256; ˚kāma desirous of praise Sn 825, cp. Nd1 163; ˚lābha gain of praise Sn 828. As adj. pasaŋsa "laudable, praiseworthy" it is better taken as grd. of pasaŋsati ( = pasaŋsiya); thus at Pv iv.713 (pāsaŋsa Minayeff); PvA 8, 89 (=anindita). Pasaŋsita
Pasaŋsita
[pp. of pasaŋsati, cp. pasattha] praised S i.232; Sn 829, 928; Dh 228, 230; Nd1 169; PvA 116 ( = vaṇṇita) 130. Pasaŋsiya
Pasaŋsiya
(adj.) [grd. of pasaŋsati, cp. Vedic praśaŋsia] laudable, praiseworthy S i.149; iii.83; A ii.19; Sn 658; J i.202; Sdhp 563. Cp. pasaŋsā. Pasakkati
Pasakkati
[pa+sakkati] to go forth or out to; ger. pasak- kiya S i.199 = Th 1, 119; Th 1, 125. Pasakkhita
Pasakkhita
at J iv.365 is doubtful; perhaps we should read pasakkita (pp. of pasakkati); the C. expls as "lying down" (nipanna acchati, p. 367); Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes change to pamakkhita on ground of vv. ll. vamakkhita & malakita. Pasankanta
Pasankanta
[pp. of pa+sankamati, of kram] gone out to, gone forth PvA 22. Pasankamati
Pasankamati
[pa+saŋ+kram] to go out or forth to (acc.) Sdhp 277. -- pp. pasankanta. Pasanga
Pasanga
[fr. pa+sanj. Class Sk. prasanga in both meanings] 1. hanging on, inclination, attachment to KhA 18; PvA 130. -- 2. occasion, event; loc. pasange at the occasion of ( -- ˚), instead of KhA 213 (karaṇavacana˚, where PvA 30 in id. p. reads karaṇ' atthe). Pasajati
Pasajati
[pa+sṛj] to let loose, produce; to be attached to Sn 390 ( = allīyati SnA 375). Pasaṭa
Pasaṭa
[pp. of pa+sṛ] let out, produced D iii.167; SnA 109 (conj. for pasava in expln of pasuta). Pasata
Pasata1
(adj.) [Vedic pṛṣant, f. pṛṣatī] spotted, only in cpd. ˚miga spotted antelope J v.418 (v. l. pasada˚). The more freq. P. form is pasada˚, e. g. S ii.279 (gloss pasata˚); J v.24, 416; vi.537; SnA 82. -- 446 -- Pasata
Pasata2
(nt.) [etym.? Late Sk. pṛṣat or pṛṣad a drop; cp. phusita1 rain -- drop = pṛṣata; BR. under pṛṣant= pasata1, but probably dialectical & Non -- Aryan] a small measure of capacity, a handful (seems to be applied to water only) J i.101 (˚mattaŋ udakaŋ); iv.201 (udaka˚); v.382 (˚mattaŋ pānīyaŋ). Often redupl. pasataŋ pasataŋ "by handfuls" M i.245, J v.164. At DA i.298 it is closely connected with sarāva (cup), as denoting the amount of a small gift. Pasattha
Pasattha
(& Pasaṭṭha) [pp. of pasaŋsati] praised, extolled, commended S i.169; J iii.234; Vv 4421; Miln 212, 361. As pasaṭṭha at Pv ii.973 (so to be read for paseṭṭha); iv.152 ( = vaṇṇita PvA 241); DhsA 124. Pasada
Pasada.
See pasata1. Pasanna
Pasanna1
(adj) [pp. of pasīdati] 1. clear, bright Sn 550 (˚netta); KhA 64 & 65 (˚tilatelavaṇṇa, where Vism 262 reads vippasanna˚); Vism 409 (id.). -- 2. happy, gladdened, reconciled, pleased J i.151, 307; Vism 129 (muddha˚). -- 3. pleased in one's conscience, reconciled, believing, trusting in (loc.), pious, good, virtuous A iii.35 (Satthari, dhamme sanghe); S i.34 (Buddhe); v.374; Vv 59; Sn 698; Dh 368 (Buddha -- sāsane); J ii.111; DhA i.60 (Satthari). Often combd with saddha (having faith) Vin ii.190; PvA 20, 42 (a˚), and in cpd. ˚citta devotion in one's heart Vin i.16; A vi.209; Sn 316, 403, 690; Pv ii.16; SnA 490; PvA 129; or ˚mānasa Sn 402; VvA 39; PvA 67; cp. pasannena manasā S i.206; Dh 2. See also abhippasanna & vippasanna. Pasanna
Pasanna2
[pp. of pa+syad] flowing out, streaming, issuing forth; in assu -- pasannaŋ shedding of tears S ii.179. Pasannā
Pasannā
(f.) [late Sk. prasannā] a kind of spirituous liquor (made from rice) J i.360. Pasammati
Pasammati
[pa+Śam] to become allayed, to cease, to fade away Th 1, 702. Pasayha
Pasayha
is ger. of pasahati (q. v.). Pasaraṇa
Pasaraṇa
(nt.) [fr. pa+sṛ] stretching, spreading, being stretched out PvA 219 (piṭṭhi˚). See also pasāraṇa. Pasava
Pasava
[fr. pa+su] bringing forth, offspring S i.69. Pasavati
Pasavati
[pa+su] to bring forth, give birth to, beget, produce; mostly fig. in combn with the foll. nouns: kibbisaŋ to commit sin Vin ii.204; A v.75; pāpaŋ id. Pv iv.150; puññaŋ to produce merit S i.182, 213; A v.76; PvA 121; opp. apuññaŋ Vin ii.26; S i.114; veraŋ to beget hatred S ii.68; Dh 201. -- Caus. pasaveti in same meaning J vi.106 (pāpaŋ) -- pp. pasūta (q. v.). Pasavana
Pasavana
(nt.) [fr. pa+su] 1. giving birth PvA 35. - 2. producing, generating, effecting PvA 31 (puñña˚). Pasaha
Pasaha
[fr. pa+sah] overcoming, mastering, in dup˚ (adj.) hard to overcome J ii.219; Miln 21. Pasahati
Pasahati
[pa+sah] to use force, subdue, oppress, over- come M ii.99; Sn 443; Dh 7, 128; DhA iii.46; J iv.126, 494; v.27. -- ger. pasayha using force, forcibly, by force D ii.74 (okkassa+); A iv.16 (id.); S i.143; Sn 72; J i.143; Pv ii.92; ii.910; (read appasayha for suppasayha); Miln 210 (okassa+; for okkassa?). Also in cpd. pasayha -- kārin using force J iv.309; v.425. Pasākha
Pasākha
(m. & nt.) [pa+sākhā; Epic Sk. praśākhā branch] 1. a smaller branch J vi.324 (sākha˚). -- 2. branch -- like wood, i. e. hard wood Th 1, 72. -- 3. the body where it branches off from the trunk, i. e. abdomen & thighs; the lower part of the body Vin iv.316 ( = adho -- nābhi ubbha -- jānu -- maṇḍalaŋ C.). Cp. Suśruta ii.31, 10. -> 4. the extremities (being the 5th stage in the formation of the embryo) S i.206. Pasāda
Pasāda
[fr. pa+sad, cp. Vedic prasāda] 1. clearness, brightness, purity; referring to the colours ("visibility") of the eye J i.319 (akkhīni maṇiguḷa -- sadisāni paññāyamāna pañca -- ppasādāni ahesuŋ); SnA 453 (pasanna -- netto i. e. pañca -- vaṇṇa -- ppasāda -- sampattiyā). In this sense also, in Abhidhamma, with ref. to the eye in function of "sentient organ, sense agency" sensitive surface (so Mrs Rh. D. in Dhs. tsrl. 174) at DhsA 306, 307. -- 2. joy, satisfaction, happy or good mind, virtue, faith M i.64 (Satthari); S i.202; A i.98, 222 (Buddhe etc.); ii.84; iii.270 (puggala˚); iv.346; SnA 155, PvA 5, 35. -- 3. repose, composure, allayment, serenity Nett 28, 50; Vism 107, 135; ThA 258. -- Note. pasāda at Th 2, 411 is to be read pāsaka (see J.P.T.S. 1893 pp. 45, 46). Cp. abhi˚. Pasādaka
Pasādaka
(adj.) [fr. pasāda] 1. making bright Miln 35 (udaka˚ maṇi). -- 2. worthy, good, pious PvA 129 (a˚). Cp. pāsādika. Pasādana
Pasādana
(nt.) [fr. pa+sad] 1. happy state, reconcilia- tion, purity PvA 132. -- 2. granting graces, gratification DhA iii.3 (brahmaṇo mama p. ˚ṭṭhāne pasīdati he is gracious instead of me giving graces). -- Cp. sam˚. Pasādaniya
Pasādaniya
(adj.) [fr. pasāda] inspiring confidence, giving faith S v.156; Pug 49, 50; VbhA 282 (˚suttanta); Sdhp 543; the 10 pāsādaniyā dhammā at M iii.11 sq. Cp. sam˚. Pasādiyā
Pasādiyā
at J vi.530 is doubtful; it is expld in C. together with saŋsādiyā (a certain kind of rice: sūkara -- sāli), yet the C. seems to take it as "bhūmiyaŋ patita"; v. l. pasāriya. Kern, Toev. s. v. takes it as rice plant & compares Sk. *prasātikā. Pasādeti
Pasādeti
[Caus. of pa+sad, see pasīdati] to render calm, appease, make peaceful, reconcile, gladden, incline one's heart (cittaŋ) towards (loc.) D i.110, 139; S i.149; A v.71; Pv ii.942 (cittaŋ); Miln 210; PvA 50, 123 (khamāpento p.). -- Cp. vi˚. Pasādhana
Pasādhana
(nt.) [fr. pa+sādh; cp. Class. Sk. prasādhana in same meaning] ornament, decoration, parure J ii.186 (rañño sīsa ˚kappaka King's headdress -- maker i. e. barber); iii.437; iv.3 (ura -- cchada˚); DhA i.227 (˚peḷikā), 342 (˚kappaka), 393; ThA 267; VvA 165, 187; PvA 155. Pasādhita
Pasādhita
[pp. of pasādheti] adorned, arrayed with ornaments, embellished, dressed up J i.489 (maṇḍita˚); ii.48 (id.); iv.219 (id.); v.510 (nahāta˚). Pasādheti
Pasādheti
[Caus. of pa+sādh] to adorn, decorate, array Mhvs vii.38; DhA i.398. -- pp. pasādhita (q. v.). Pasāraṇa
Pasāraṇa
(nt.) [fr. pa+sṛ, cp. pasaraṇa] stretching out DA i.196 (opp. sammiñjana); DhA i.298 (hattha˚). Pasārita
Pasārita
[pp. of pasāreti] 1. stretched out, usually in contrast with sammiñjita, e. g. at D i.222; Vin i.230; M iii.35, 90; S i.137; Vism 19; VvA 6. -- 2. put forth, laid out, offered for sale Miln i.336. Pasāreti
Pasāreti
[Caus. of pa+sṛ] 1. to cause to move forwards, to let or make go, to give up J vi.58 (pasāraya, imper.). -- Pass. pasāriyati Vism 318; PvA 240 (are turned out of doors). -- 2. to stretch out, hold out or forth, usually with ref. to either arm (bāhuŋ, bāhaŋ, bāhā) S i.137 (opp. sammiñjeti); DA i.196; PvA 112, 121; or hand (hatthaŋ) J v.41; vi.282; PvA 113; or feet (pāde, pādaŋ) Th 2, 44, 49, cp. ThA 52; DhsA 324 ( = sandhiyo paṭippanāmeti). -- 3. to lay out, put forth, offer for sale Vin ii.291; DhA ii.89. -- pp. pasārita (q. v.), Cp. abhi˚ Pasásati
Pasásati
[pa+śās] 1. to teach, instruct S i.38; J iii.367, 443. -- 2. to rule, reign, govern D ii.257; Cp. iii.141; PvA 287. -- 447 -- Pasāsana
Pasāsana
(nt.) [fr. pa+śās] teaching, instruction J iii.367. Pasibbaka
Pasibbaka
(m. nt.) [fr. pa+siv, late Sk. prasevaka> P. pasebbaka>pasibbaka, cp. Geiger. P.Gr. 151] a sack, Vin iii.17; J i.112, 351; ii.88, 154; iii.10, 116, 343 (camma˚ leather bag); iv.52, 361; v.46 (pūpa˚), 483; vi.432 (spelling pasippaka); DA i.41; DhA iv.205. Pasibbita
Pasibbita
[pp. of pa+siv] sewn up, enveloped by ( -- ˚) Th 1, 1150 (maŋsa -- nahāru˚). Pasīdati
Pasīdati
[pa+sad] 1. to become bright, to brighten up PvA 132 (mukha -- vaṇṇo p.). -- 2. to be purified, reconciled or pleased; to be clear & calm, to become of peaceful heart (mano or cittaŋ p.); to find one's satisfaction in (loc.), to have faith D ii.202; S i.98; ii.199 (sutvā dhammaŋ p.); A iii.248; Sn 356, 434, 563; Nd2 426 ( = saddahati, adhimuccati okappeti); Vv 5014 (mano me pasīdi, aor.); Vism 129; Miln 9; DhA iii.3 (=he is gracious, i. e. good); VvA 6 (better v. l. passitvā); PvA 141. -- pp. pasanna (q. v.). See also pasādeti & vippasīdati. Pasīdana
Pasīdana
(nt.) [fr. pasīdati] calming, happiness, purifica- tion Ps ii.121 (SS passādana). Pasu
Pasu
[Vedic paśu, cp. Lat. pecu & pecunia, Gr. pe/kos fleece, Goth. vieh, E. fee] cattle M i.79; J v.105; Pv ii.1312 (˚yoni); Miln 100; PvA 166 (˚bhāva); n. pl. pasavo S i.69; Sn 858; gen. pl. pasūnaŋ Sn 311; Pv ii.25. -- dupasu bad cattle Th 1, 446. Pasuka
Pasuka
= pasu Vin ii.154 (ajaka+). Pasuta
Pasuta
[pp. of pa+sā or si, Sk. prasita, on change of i to u see Geiger, P.Gr. § 193. In meaning confounded with pasavate of pa+su] attached to (acc. or loc.), intent upon ( -- ˚), pursuing, doing D i.135 (kamma˚); Sn 57 (see Nd2 427), 709, 774, 940, Dh 166, 181; Vism 135 (doing a hundred & one things: aneka -- kicca˚); DhA iii.160; PvA 151 (puñña -- kammesu), 175 (kīḷanaka˚), 195, 228 (pāpa˚). Pasura
Pasura
(adj.) [reading doubtful] many, abundant J vi.134 ( = rāsi, heap C.). We should probably read pacura, as at J v.40 (=bahu C.). Pasūta
Pasūta
[pp. of pasavati] produced; having born, delivered PvA 80. Pasūti
Pasūti
(f.) [fr. pa+su] bringing forth, birth, in ˚ghara lying -- in chamber Nd1 120; Vism 235; KhA 58 (where Vism 259 reads sūtighara). Paseṭṭha
Paseṭṭha
at Pv ii.973 is to be read pasaṭṭha (see pasattha). Pasodheti
Pasodheti
[pa+Caus. of śudh] to cleanse, clean, purity D i.71 (cittaŋ). Passa
Passa1
[cp. Sk. paśya, fr. passati] seeing, one who sees Th 1, 61 (see Morris, in J.P.T.S. 1885, 48). Passa
Passa2
(m. & nt.) [Vedic pārśva to parśu & pṛṣṭi rib, perhaps also connected with pārṣṇi side of leg, see under paṇhi] 1. side, flank M i.102; iii.3; A v.18; Sn 422; J i.264; iii.26. Pleonastic in piṭṭhi˚ (cp. E. backside) the back, loc. behind J i.292; PvA 55. -- 2. (mountain -- ) slope, in Himavanta˚ J i.218; v.396 (loc. pasmani = passe C.). Passati
Passati
[Vedic paśyati & *spaśati (aor. aspaṣṭa, Caus. spāśayati etc.); cp. Av. spasyeiti, Gr. ske/ptomai, (E. "scepsis"); Lat. species etc.; Ohg. spehon = Ger. spāhen (E. spy). -- The paradigm pass˚, which in literary Sk. is restricted to the pres. stem (paś) interchanges with the paradigm dakkh˚ & dass˚ (dṛś): see dassati1] 1. to see -- Pres. passati Vin i.322; S i.69, 132, 198; ii.29; Sn 313, 647, 953, 1063, 1142 (cp. Nd2 428); Pv i.23; Miln 218; PvA 11, 102; 1st pl. passāma Sn 76, 153, 164; Pv i.101 (as future); imper. sg. passa Sn 435, 580, 588, 756; J i.223; ii.159; Pv ii.116, 119; PvA 38; pl. passatha S ii.25; Sn 176 sq., 777, & passavho (cp. Sk. paśyadhvaŋ) Sn 998. -- ppr. passaŋ (see Geiger, P.Gr. 972) M ii.9; Sn 739, 837, 909; & passanto J iii.52; PvA 5, 6; f. passantī S i.199. -- grd. passitabba J iv.390 (a˚). -- fut. passissati Pv ii.46; PvA 6. -- aor. passi J ii.103, 111; iii.278, 341. -- 2. to recognise, realise, know: only in combn with jānāti (pres. jānāti passati; ppr. jānaŋ passaŋ): see jānāti 11. -- 3. to find Sn 1118 (=vindati paṭilabhati Nd2 428b); J iii.55; Pv ii.99. -- Cp. vi˚. Passaddha
Passaddha
[pp. of passambhati, cp. BSk. praśrabdha Divy 48] calmed down, allayed, quieted, composed, aṭ ease. Almost exclusively with ref. to the body (kāya), e. g. at Vin i.294; D iii.241, 288; M i.37; iii.86; S i 126; iv.125; A i.148; v.30; Vism 134; VbhA 283 (˚kāyapuggala). -- In lit. appln ˚ratha when the car had slowed down J iii.239. See also paṭi˚. Passaddhatā
Passaddhatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. passaddha] calmness, repose Nd2 166. Passaddhi
Passaddhi
(f.) [fr. pa+śrambh] calmness, tranquillity, repose, serenity M iii.86; S ii.30; iv.78; v.66; A iv.455 sq.; Ps ii.244; Dhs 40 (kāya˚), 41 (citta˚), cp. Dhs. trsl. 23; Vism 129; VbhA 314 (kāya˚, citta˚); DhsA 150 ( = samassāsa -- ppatta). Often combd with pāmujja & pīti, e. g. D i.72, 73, 196; Nett 29, 66. Six passaddhis at S iv.217 (with ref. to vācā, vitakka -- vicārā, pīti, assāsa -- passāsā, saññā -- vedanā, rāga -- dosa -- moha, through the 4 jhānas etc.). Passaddhi is one of the 7 sambojjhangas (constituents of enlightenment): see this & cp. M iii.86; Vism 130, 134=VbhA 282 (where 7 conditions of this state are enumd). Passanā
Passanā
see anu˚, vi˚. Passambhati
Passambhati
[pa+śrambh] to calm down, to be quiet Vin i.294 (fut ˚issati); D i.73; M iii.86; S v.333; A iii.21. -- pp. passaddha; Caus. passambheti (q. v.). Passambhanā
Passambhanā
(f.) [fr. passambhati] allayment, calmness, composure Dhs 40, 41, 320. Passambhati
Passambhati
[Caus. of passambhati] to calm down, quiet, allay M i.56, 425; S iii.125; Vism 288 ( = nirodheti). ppr. passambhayaŋ M i.56; iii.82, 89. Passaya
Passaya
[fr. pa+śri, cp. Class. Sk. praśraya reverence] refuge Cp. iii.104. --

Note. ˚passaya in kaṇṭakapassaya J iii.74, & kaṇṭakāpassayika D i.167 (kaṇṭh˚); J iv.299 (kaṇṭaka˚) is to be read as ˚apassaya (apa+śri). Passavati
Passavati
[pa+sru] to flow forth, to pour out Miln 180. Passasati
Passasati
[pa+śvas] to breathe in D ii.291; M i.56; iii.82; J iii.296; v.43; Vism 271; DhA 1.215. See also assasati & remarks under ā1 3. Passāva
Passāva
[fr. passavati] urine (lit. flowing out) Vin ii.141; iv.266 (p. muttaŋ vuccati); D i.70 (uccāra+); M iii.3, 90; J i.164 (uccāra -- passāvaŋ vissajjeti), 338; v.164, 389; Vism 235 (uccāra˚).

-- doṇikā a trough for urine Vin ii.221; Vism 235. Passāsa
Passāsa
[fr. pa+śvas] inhaled breath, inhalation S i.106, 159; Ps i.95, 164 sq., 182 sq. Usually in combn assāsapassāsa (q. v.). At Vism 272 passāsa is expl1 as "ingoing wind" and assāsa as "outgoing wind." Passāsin
Passāsin
(adj.) [fr. passāsa] breathing; in ghuru -- ghuru˚ snoring S i.117. Passika
Passika
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. imper. passa of passati, +ka] only in cpd. ehipassika (q. v.). Passupati
Passupati
[pa+svap] to sleep, rest, aor. passupi; fut. passupissati J v.70. 71. -- 448 -- Paha
Paha1
(nt.) [?] flight of steps from which to step down into the water, a ghat ( = tittha Bdhgh) D i.223. The meaning is uncertain, it is trsld as "accessible" at Dial. i.283 (q. v. for further detail). Neumann (Majjhima trsln i.513) trsls "ganz und gar erloschen" (pabhā?). It is not at all improbable to take pahaŋ as ppr. of pajahati (as contracted fr. pajahaŋ like pahatvāna for pajahitvāna at Sn 639), thus meaning "giving up entirely." The same form in the latter meaning occurs at ThA 69 (Ap. v.3). Paha
Paha2
(adj.) = pahu, i. e. able to (with inf.) J v.198 (C. pahū samattho). Pahaŋsati
Pahaŋsati1
[pa+haŋsati1 = ghaŋsati1, of ghṛṣ to rub, grind] to strike, beat (a metal), rub, sharpen (a cutting instrument, as knife, hatchet, razor etc.) J i.278; ii.102 (pharasuŋ); DhA i.253 (khuraŋ pahaŋsi sharpened the razor; corresponds to ghaṭṭeti in preceding context). -- pp. pahaṭṭha1 & pahaŋsita1 (q. v.). Pahaŋsati
Pahaŋsati2
[pa+haŋsati2 = hassati, of hṛṣ to be glad, cp. ghaŋsati2] to be pleased, to rejoice; only in pp. pahaṭṭha2 & pahaŋsita2 (q. v.), and in Pass. pahaŋsīyati to be gladdened, to exult Miln 326 (+kuhīyati). See also sam˚. Pahaŋsita
Pahaŋsita1
[pp. of pahaŋsati] struck, beaten (of metal), refined J vi.218 (ukkā -- mukha˚), 574 (id.). Pahaŋsita
Pahaŋsita2
[pp. of pahaŋsati2] gladdened, delighted, happy DhA i.230 (˚mukha); VvA 279 (˚mukha SS pahasita at Miln 297 is better to be taken as pp. of pahasati, because of combn haṭṭha pahaṭṭha hasita pahasita. Pahaṭa
Pahaṭa
[pp. of paharati] assailed, struck, beaten (of musical instruments) J ii.102, 182; vi.189; VvA 161 (so for pahata); PvA 253. Of a ball: driven, impelled Vism 143 (˚citra -- geṇḍuka) = DhsA 116 (so read for pahaṭṭha -- citta -- bheṇḍuka and correct Expositor 153 accordingly). The reading pahaṭa at PvA 4 is to be corrected to paṭaha. Pahaṭṭha
Pahaṭṭha1
[pp. of pahaŋsati1] struck, beaten (of metal) J vi.217 (suvaṇṇa). Pahaṭṭha
Pahaṭṭha2
[pp. of pahaŋsati2] gladdened, happy, cheerful, delighted Vin iii.14; J i.278 (twice; once as ˚mānasa, which is wrongly taken by C. as pahaṭṭha1), 443; ii.240 (tuṭṭha˚); Vism 346 (haṭṭha˚); DhA i.230 (tuṭṭha˚); VvA 337. In its original sense of "bristling" (with excitement or joy), with ref. to ear & hair of an elephant in phrase pahaṭṭha -- kaṇṇa -- vāla at Vin ii.195 = J v.335 (cp. Sk. prahṛṣṭa -- roman, N. of an Asura at Kathāsaritsāgara 47, 30). Pahata
Pahata
[pp. of pa+han] killed, overcome M iii.46; S ii.54; J vi.512. Paharaṇa
Paharaṇa
(nt.) [fr. paharati] striking, beating SnA 224; PvA 285. Paharaṇaka
Paharaṇaka
(adj.) [fr. paharaṇa] striking, hitting J i.418. Paharati
Paharati
[pa+hṛ] to strike, hit, beat J iii.26, 347; vi.376; VvA 65; PvA 4; freq. in phrase accharaŋ p. to snap one's finger, e. g. J ii.447; see accharā1. aor. pahāsi (cp. pariyudāhāsi) Vv 292 ( = pahari VvA 123). -- pp. pahaṭa (q. v.). Caus. paharāpeti. -- 1. to cause to be assailed J iv.150. -- 2. to put on or join on to J vi.32 (˚hārāpesi). Pahasati
Pahasati
[pa+has] to laugh, giggle J v.452 (ūhasati+). See also pahassati & pahāsati. -- pp. pahasita (q. v.). Pahasita
Pahasita
[pp. of pahasati or ˚hassati] laughing, smiling, joyful, pleased Miln 297; J i.411 (nicca˚ mukha); ii.179. Pahassati
Pahassati
[pa+has, perhaps pa+hṛṣ, Sk. harṣati, cp. pahaŋsati2] to laugh, be joyful or cheerful Sn 887 ( = haṭṭha pahaṭṭha Nd1 296; cp. SnA 555 hāsajāta). The pp. pahasita (q. v.) is derived fr. pres. pahasati, which makes the equation pahassati=pahaŋsati2 all the more likely. Pahāna
Pahāna
(nt.) [fr. pa+hā, see pajahati] giving up, leaving, abandoning, rejection M i.60, iii.4, 72; S i.13, 132 (dukkha˚); ii.170; iii.53; iv.7 sq.; D iii.225, 246; A i.82, 134; ii.26, 232 (kaṇhassa kammassa ˚āya).; iii.431; Sn 374, 1106 ( = vūpasama paṭinissagga etc. Nd2 429); Dh 331; J i.79; Ps i.26; ii.98, 156; Pug 16; Dhs 165, 174, 339; Nett 15 sq., 24, 192; Vism 194 (nīvaraṇa -- santāpa˚); DhsA 166, 345; VvA 73. -- ˚pariññā see pariññā; -- ˚vinaya avoidance consisting in giving up (coupled with saŋvara -- vinaya avoidance by protection, prophylaxis), based on the 5 qualities tadanga -- pahāna, vikkhambhana˚, samuccheda˚, paṭippassaddhi˚, nissaraṇa˚ DhsA 351; SnA 8. Pahāya
Pahāya
is ger. of pajahati (q. v.). Pahāyin
Pahāyin
(adj.) [fr. pa+hā, see pajahati] giving up, aban- doning Sn 1113, 1132, cp. Nd2 431; Sdhp 500. Pahāra
Pahāra
[fr. pa+hṛ, Class. Sk. prahāra, see paharati] 1. a blow, stroke, hit D i.144 (daṇḍa˚); M i.123, 126; Pv iv.167 (sālittaka˚); M i.123; DhA iii.48 (˚dāna -- sikkhāpada the precepts concerning those guilty of giving blows, cp. Vin iv.146); PvA 4 (ekappahārena with one stroke). 56 (muggara˚), 66 (id.) 253. -- ekappahārena at Vism 418 as adv. "all at once." pahāraŋ deti to give a blow Vin iv.146; S iv.62; A iii.121; Vism 314 (pahārasatāni); PvA 191 (sīse). -- 2. a wound J iv.89; v.459 (˚mukha). Pahāraṇa
Pahāraṇa
see abhi˚. Pahārin
Pahārin
(adj.) [fr. paharati] striking, assaulting J ii.211. Pahāsa
Pahāsa
[fr. pa+has, cp. Class. Sk. prahāsa] laughing, mirth Dhs 9, 86, 285; VvA 132; Sdhp 223. Pahāsati
Pahāsati
in pahāsanto saparisaŋ at ThA 69 should preferably be read as pahāsayanto parisaŋ, thus taken as Caus. of pa+has, i. e. making one smile, gladdening. Pahāsi
Pahāsi
is 3rd sg. aor. of paharati; found at Vv 298 (musa- lena = pahari VvA 113); and also 3rd sg. aor of pajahati, e. g. at Sn 1057 (=pajahi Nd2 under jahati) Pahāseti
Pahāseti
[Caus. of pahasati] to make laugh, to gladden, to make joyful Vism 289 (cittaŋ pamodeti hāseti pahāseti). Pahiṇa
Pahiṇa
(adj. -- n.) [fr. pa+hi] sending; being sent; a messenger, in ˚gamaṇa going as messenger, doing messages D i.5; M i.345; J ii.82; Miln 370; DA i.78. See also pahana. Pahiṇaka
Pahiṇaka
(nt.) [fr. pahiṇati?] a sweetmeat A iii.76 (v. l. pahenaka). See also paheṇaka. The (late) Sk. form is prahelaka. Pahiṇati
Pahiṇati
[pa+hi, Sk. hinoti] to send; Pres. pahiṇati. Vin iii.140 sq.; iv.18; DhA ii.243; aor. pahiṇi J i,60 (sāsanaŋ); v.458 (paṇṇāni); VvA 67; DhA i.72; ii.56, 243; ger. pahiṇitva VvA 65. -- pp. pahita2 (q. v.). There is another aor.pāhesi (Sk. prāhaiṣīt) in analogy to which a new pres. pāheti has been formed, so that pāhesi is now felt to be a der. fr. pāheti & accordingly is grouped with the latter. All other forms with he˚ (pahetuŋ e. g.) are to be found under pāheti. Pahiṇana
Pahiṇana
(nt.) [fr. pahiṇati] sending, dispatch DhA ii.243. Pahtta
Pahtta1
[pp. of padahati] resolute, intent, energetic; only in cpd. pahitatta of resolute will (cp. BSk. prahitātman Divy 37) M i.114; S i.53 (expld by Bdhgh with wrong derivation fr. peseti as "pesit -- atta" thus identifying pahita1 & pahita2, see K.S. 320); ii.21, 239; iii.73 sq.; iv.60, 145, v.187, A ii.14, iii.21, iv.302 sq.; v.84; Sn 425, 432 sq., 961; It 71; Nd1 477; Th 2, 161 (expld at ThA 143, with the same mistake as above, as pesita citta); Nd1 477 (id.; pesit -- atta); Miln 358, 366, 406. -- 449 -- Pahita
Pahita2
[pp. of pahiṇati] sent J i.86 (sāsana); DhA ii.242; iii.191 (interchanging with pesita). Pahīna
Pahīna
[pp. of pajahati] given up, abandoned, left, eliminated Vin iii.97 = iv.27; S ii.24; iii.33; iv.305; Sn 351 (˚jāti -- maraṇa), 370, 564, 1132 (˚mala -- moha); It 32; Nd2 s. v.; Ps i.63; ii.244; Pug 12, 22. Pahīyati
Pahīyati
[Pass. of pajahati] to be abandoned, to pass away, vanish M i.7; S i.219 (fut. ˚issati); ii.196 (ppr. ˚īyamāna); v.152; Sn 806; Nd1 124; VbhA 271. Spelt pahiyyati at S v.150. Pahū
Pahū
(adj.) [cp. Vedic prabhū, fr. pa+bhū] able Sn 98; J v.198; Nd2 615˚. Pahūta
Pahūta
(adj.) [pp. of pa+bhū, cp. Vedic prabhūta] sufficient, abundant, much, considerable Sn 428, 862 sq.; Pv i.52 ( = anappaka, bahu, yāvadattha C.; Dhp at PvA 25 gives bahuka as inferior variant); i.117 (=apariyanta, uḷāra; v. l. bahū); ii.75 (v. l. bahūta); PvA 145 (dhana; v. l. bahuta); SnA 294 (id.), 321 (id.). See also bahūta.

-- jivha large tongued D ii.18; iii.144, 173. -- jivhatā the characteristic of a large tongue Sn p. 107. -- dhañña having many riches J iv.309. -- dhana id. Th 2, 406 (C. reading for T. bahuta -- ratana). -- pañña rich in wisdom Sn 359, 539, 996. -- bhakkha eating much, said of the fire S i.69. -- vitta = ˚dhañña D i.134; Sn 102; PvA 3. Pahūtika
Pahūtika
(adj.) = pahuta PvA 135 (v. l. BB bahuta; in expln of bahu). Paheṇaka
Paheṇaka
(nt.) [cp. BSk. praheṇaka in sense of "sweet- meat" at Divy 13, 258; the *Sk. form is prahelaka] a present J vi.369 (so here, whereas the same word as pahiṇaka at A iii.76 clearly means "sweetmeat"). Pahena
Pahena
(nt.) [paheṇa?] same as pahiṇa in ˚gamana going on errands J ii.82. Pahoti
Pahoti
& (in verse) pabhavati [pa+bhu, cp. Vedic pra- bhavati in meaning "to be helpful"] 1. to proceed from (with gen.), rise, originate D ii.217; M iii.76; S ii.184; as pabhavati at Sn 728 = 1050 (cp. Nd2 401); (perf. med.) pahottha it has arisen from (gen.), i. e. it was the fault of J v.102. -- 2. to be sufficient, adequate or able (with inf.) D i.240; M i.94; S i.102; Sn 36, 867; J v.305; DA i.192; iii.254 (fut. pahossati); VvA 75; Dāvs iv.18. Neg. both with na˚ & a˚ viz. nappahoti J vi.204; DhA iii.408; nappahosi J i.84; appahoti DhA iv.177; appabhonto PvA 73; in verse appabhavaŋ J iii.373 (=appahonto C.). -- pp. pahūta (q. v.). Pahona
Pahona
in ˚kāla at J iii.17 read as pahonaka˚. Pahonaka
Pahonaka
(adj.) [fr. pahoti] sufficient, enough J i.346; ii.122; iii.17 (so read for pahona˚); iv.277; Vism 404; DhA i.78, 219; VvA 264; PvA 81. Pāka
Pāka
[Vedic pāka, see pacati] that which is cooked, cooking, quantity cooked J vi.161 (tīhi pākehi pacitvā); VvA 186. Esp. in foll. combn tela˚ "oil cooking," an oil decoction Vin ii.105; thāli˚ a th. full of cooking J i.186; doṇa˚ a d. full S i.81; DhA ii.8; sosāna˚ Dhātumañjūsā 132 (under kaṭh). On pāka in appld meaning of "effect, result" see Cpd. 883. -- As nt. in stanza "pākaŋ pākassa paccayo; apākaŋ avipākassa" at VbhA 175. -- Cp. vi˚.

-- tela an oil concoction or mixture, used for rubbing the body; usually given with its price worth 100 or 1,000 pieces, e. g. sata˚ J ii.397; v.376; VvA 68 = DhA iii.311; sahassa˚ J iii.372. -- vaṭṭa subsistence, livelihood, maintenance Mhvs 35, 120; DhA ii.29; VvA 220. -- haŋsa a species of water bird J v.356; vi.539; SnA 277. Pākata
Pākata
(adj.) [ = pakata; on ā for a see Geiger, P.Gr. § 331. Cp. Sk. prakaṭa Halāyudha. The spelling is sometimes pākaṭa] 1. common, vulgar, uncontrolled, in phrase pākat -- indriya of uncontrolled mind S i.61 (=saŋvarâbhāvena gihikāle viya vivaṭa -- indriya K.S. 320), 204; iii.93; v.269; A i.70, 266, 280; iii.355, 391; Th 1, 109 (C. asaŋvuta, see Brethren 99); Pug 35. -- At Miln 251 pākatā is to be read pāpakā. -- 2. open, common, unconcealed J i.262 (pākaṭo jāto was found out); Sn A 343; PvA 103 (for āvi). -- 3. commonly known, familiar Vism 279; PvA 17 (devā), 23, 78 (su˚), 128; VvA 109 (+paññāta); ˚ŋ karoti to make manifest Vism 287; ˚bhāva being known DhsA 243; PvA 103. -- 4. renowned, well -- known DA i.143; PvA 107. Pākatika
Pākatika
(adj.) [fr. pakati, cp. BSk. prākṛtaka (loka) Bodhicaryâvatāra v. 3, ed. Poussin] natural, in its original or natural state J v.274; Miln 218 (maṇiratana); DhA i.20; VvA 288; PvA 66 (where id. p. J iii.167 reads paṭipākatika), 206; pākatikaŋ karoti to restore to its former condition, to repair, rebuild J i.354, also fig. to restore a dismissed officer, to reinstate J v.134. Pākāra
Pākāra
[cp. Epic Sk. prākāra, pa+ā+kṛ] an encircling wall, put up for obstruction and protection, a fence, rampart Vin ii.121 (3 kinds: made of bricks, of stone, or of wood, viz. iṭṭhakā˚, silā, dāru˚); iv.266 (id.); M iii.11; S iv.194 (˚toraṇa); A iv.107; v.195; J i.63; ii.50; vi.330 (mahā˚), 341 (+parikhā & aṭṭāla); Pv i.1013 (ayo˚); Miln 1; Vism 394 ( = parikkhepa -- pākāra); DhA iii.441 (tiṇṇaŋ pākārānaŋ antare); PvA 24, 52; sāṇi˚ screen -- fencing J ii.88; PvA 283.

-- iṭṭhakā brick or tile of a wall J iii.446 (T. iṭṭhikā). -- parikkhitta surrounded by a wall DA i.42. -- parikkhepa a fencing Vism 74. Pākāsiya
Pākāsiya
(adj.) [fr. pa+ā+kāś, cp. pakāsati & Class. Sk. prākāśya] evident, manifest, open, clear J vi.230 (opp. guyha; C. pākāsika). Pākula
Pākula
(adj.) [pa+ākula] read at Ud 5 in combn akkula- pakkula ( = ākula -- pākula) "in great confusion"; read also in gāthā 7 pākula for bakkula. Cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1886, 94 sq. Pāgabbhiya
Pāgabbhiya
(nt.) [fr. pagabbha] boldness, impudence, forwardness Sn 930; Nd1 228 sq. (3 kinds, viz. kāyika, vācasika, cetasika), 390 sq.; J ii.32; v.449 (pagabbhiya); SnA 165; KhA 242; DhA iii.354 (pa˚); VvA 121. Pāguññatā
Pāguññatā
(f.) [abstr. of pāguñña, which is der. fr. paguna] being familiar with, experience Dhs 48, 49; Vism 463 sq., 466. Pāgusa
Pāgusa
[cp. Sk. vāgusa, a sort of large fish Halāyudha 3, 37] a certain kind of fish J iv.70 (as gloss, T. reads pāvusa, SS puṭusa, BB pātusa & pāvuma; C. explns as mahā -- mukha -- maccha). Pācaka
Pācaka
(adj. -- n.) [fr. pac, cp. pāceti] one who cooks, a cook; f. ˚ikā J i.318. Pācana
Pācana1
(nt.) [fr. pac, Caus. pāceti] bringing to boil, cooking J i.318 (yāgu˚). Cp. pari˚. Pācana
Pācana2
(nt.) [for pājana, cp. pāceti2 & SnA 147] a goad, stick S i.172; Sn p. 13; v.77; J iii.281; iv.310.

-- yaṭṭhi driving stick, goad stick S i.115. -- 450 -- Pācariya
Pācariya
( -- ˚) [pa+ācariya] only as 2nd part of a (redupl.) compound ācariya -- pācariya in the nature of combns mentioned under a1 3 b: "teacher upon teacher" (expld by Cs as "teacher of teachers") D i.90 (cp. DA i.254); ii.237, etc. (see ācariya). Pācittiya
Pācittiya
(adj.) [most likely prāk+citta+ika, i. e. of the nature of directing one's mind upon, cp. pabbhāra = *prāg+bhāra. So expld also by S. Lévi J.As. x.20, p. 506. Geiger, P.Gr. § 27, n. 1 inclines to etym. prāyaś+cittaka] requiring expiation, expiatory Vin i.172, 176; ii.242, 306 sq.; iv.1 sq., 258 sq.; A ii.242 (dhamma); Vism 22. -- It is also the name of one of the books of the Vinaya (ed. Oldenberg, vol. iv.). See on term Vin. Texts i.18, 32, 245. Pācīna
Pācīna
(adj.) [Vedic prācīna, fr. adv. prāc bent forward] eastern i. e. facing the (rising) sun (opp. pacchā) J i.50 (˚sīsaka, of Māyādevī's couch), 212 (˚lokadhātu); Miln 6; DA i.311 (˚mukha facing east); DhA iii.155 (id.); VvA 190; PvA 74, 256. The opposite apācīna (e. g. S iii.84) is only apparently a neg. pācīna, in reality a der. fr. apa (apa+ac), as pācīna is a der. fr. pra+ac . See apācīna. Pāceti
Pāceti1
[Caus. of pacati] to cause to boil, fig. to cause to torment D i.52 (ppr. pācayato, gen., also pācento). Cp. vi˚. Pāceti
Pāceti2
[for pājeti, with c. for j (see Geiger, P.Gr. § 393); pra+aj: see aja] to drive, urge on Dh 135 (āyuŋ p. -> gopālako viya . . . peseti DhA iii.60). Pājana
Pājana
(nt.) [fr. pa+aj, cp. pācana2] a goad SnA 147. Pājāpeti
Pājāpeti
[Caus. of pājeti] to cause to drive or go on J ii.296 (sakaṭāni); iii.51 (so read for pajāpeti; BB pāceti & pājeti). Pājeti
Pājeti
[Caus. of pa+aj, cp. aja] 1. to drive (cp. pāceti2) J ii.122, 143, iii.51 (BB for T. pājāpeti); v.443 (nāvaŋ); vi.32 (yoggaŋ); SnA 147; DhA iv.160 (goṇe). -- 2. to throw (the dice) J vi.281. -- Caus. II. pājāpeti (q. v.). Pāṭankī
Pāṭankī
(f.) "sedan chair" (?) in phrase sivikaŋ pāṭankiŋ at Vin i.192 (MV v.10, 3) is not clear. The vv. ll. (p. 380) are pāṭangin, pāṭangan pāṭakan. Perhaps pallankaŋ? Pāṭala
Pāṭala
(adj.) [cp. Class. Sk. pāṭala, to same root as palita & pāṇḍu: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under palleo & cp. paṇḍu] pale red, pink J iv.114. Pāṭalī
Pāṭalī
(f.) [cp. Class. Sk. pāṭalī, to pāṭala] the trumpet flower, Bignonia Suaveolens D ii.4 (Vipassī pāṭaliyā mūle abhisambuddho); Vv 359; J i.41 (˚rukkha as the Bodhi tree); ii.162 (pāṭali -- bhaddaka sic. v. l. for phālibhaddaka); iv.440; v.189; vi.537; Miln 338; VvA 42, 164; ThA 211, 226. Pāṭava
Pāṭava
(nt.) [cp. late Sk. pāṭava, fr. paṭu] skill KhA 156. Pāṭikankha
Pāṭikankha
(adj.) [grd. of paṭikankhati, Sk. *pratikānk- ṣya] to be desired or expected M i.25; iii.97; S i.88; ii.152; A iii.143 = Sn p. 140 (=icchitabba SnA 504); Ud 36; DhA iv.2 (gati ˚ā) PvA 63 (id.). Pāṭikankhin
Pāṭikankhin
( -- ˚) (adj. -- n.) [fr. paṭi+kānka, cp. patikan- khin] hoping for, one who expects or desires D i.4; M iii.33; A ii.209; J iii.409. Pāṭikā
Pāṭikā
(f.) [etym. unknown; with pāṭiya cp. Sk. pāṣya?] half -- moon stone, the semicircular slab under the staircase Vin i.180 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.3). As pāṭiya at J vi.278 ( = piṭṭhi -- pāsāṇa C.). Pāṭikulyā
Pāṭikulyā
(f.) [fr. paṭi(k)kūla] = pātikkūlyatā (perhaps to be read as such) J v.253 (nava, cp. Vism 341 sq.). Pāṭikkulyatā
Pāṭikkulyatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. paṭikkūla] loathsomeness, objectionableness A iii.32; iv.47 sq.; v.64. Cp. paṭikulyatā, paṭikūlatā & pāṭikulyā. Pāṭidesanīya
Pāṭidesanīya
(adj.) [grd. of paṭideseti with pāṭi for pāṭi in der.] belonging to confession, (a sin) which ought to be confessed Vin i.172; ii.242; A ii.243 (as ˚desanīyaka). Pāṭipada
Pāṭipada1
(adj.) [the adj. form of paṭipadā] following the (right) Path M i.354 = It 80 (+sekha). Pāṭipada
Pāṭipada2
[fr. paṭi+pad, see patipajjati & cp. paṭipadā] lit, "entering, beginning"; the first day of the lunar fortnight Vin i.132; J iv.100; VvA 72 (˚sattamī). Pāṭipadaka
Pāṭipadaka
(adj.) [fr. pāṭipada2] belonging to the 1st day of the lunar fortnight; only with ref. to bhatta (food) & in combn with pakkhika & uposathika, i. e. food given on the half -- moon days, on the 7th day of the week & on the first day of the fortnight Vin i.58 = ii.175; iv.75; (f. ˚ikā), 78. Pāṭipuggalika
Pāṭipuggalika
(adj.) [fr. paṭipuggala] belonging to one's equal M iii.254 sq. (dakkhiṇā). Pāṭibhoga
Pāṭibhoga
[for paṭibhoga (?); difficult to explain, we should suspect a ger. formation *prati -- bhogya for *bhujya i. e. "counter -- enjoyable," i. e. one who has to be made use of in place of someone else; cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 24] a sponsor A ii.172; Ud 17; It 1 sq.; J ii.93; Vism 555 sq.; DhA i.398; VbhA 165. Pātimokkha (pāti)˚
Pātimokkha
(pāti)˚ (nt.) [with Childers plausibly as paṭi+ mokkha, grd. of muc (Caus. mokṣ˚) with lengthening of paṭi as in other grd. like pāṭidesaniya. Thus in reality the same as paṭimokkha 2 in sense of binding, obligatory, obligation, cp. J v.25. The spelling is freq. pāti˚ (BB pāṭi˚). The Sk. prāṭimokṣa is a wrong adaptation fr. P. pātimokkha, it should really be pratimokṣya "that which should be made binding." An expln of the word after the style of a popular etym. is to be found at Vism 16] a name given to a collection of various precepts contained in the Vinaya (forming the foundation of the Suttavibhanga, Vin vols. iii & iv., ed. Oldenberg), as they were recited on Uposatha days for the purpose of confession. See Geiger, P. Lit. c. 7, where literature is given; & cp. Vin. Texts i.27 sq.; Franke, Dighanikāya p. 66 sq.; -- pāṭimokkhaŋ uddisati to recite the P. Vin i.102, 112, 175; ii.259; iii.8; iv.143; Ud 51; opp. ˚ŋ ṭhapeti to suspend the (recital of the) P. Vin ii.240 sq. -- See Vin i.65, 68; ii.95, 240 sq. 249; S v.187; Sn 340; Dh 185, 375; Nd1 365; Vism 7, 11, 16 sq., 36, 292; DhA iii.237 ( = jeṭṭhakasīla); iv.111 (id.); Sdhp 342, 355, 449. -- uddesa recitation of the P. Vin i.102; D ii.46; M ii.8; SnA 199. -- uddesaka one who recites the P. Vin i.115, cp. Vin. Texts i.242. -- ṭhapana suspension of the P. Vin ii.241 sq.; A v.70. -- saŋvara "restraint that is binding on a recluse" (Dial. i.79), moral control under the P. Vin iv.51; D i.62; ii.279; iii.77, 266, 285; A iii.113, 135, 151; iv.140; v.71, 198; It 96, 118; Ud 36; Vism 16 (where expld in detail); VbhA 323; cp. saŋvuta -- pāṭimokkha (adj.) Pv iv.132. Pāṭiyekka
Pāṭiyekka
see pāṭekka. Pāṭirūpika
Pāṭirūpika
(adj.) [fr. paṭirūpa, cp. paṭirūpaka] assuming a disguise, deceitful, false Sn 246. Pāṭihāra
Pāṭihāra
[ = pāṭihāra, with pāṭi after analogy of pāṭi- hāriya] striking, that which strikes (with ref. to marking the time) J i.121, 122 (v. l. SS pāṭihāriya) Pāṭihārika
Pāṭihārika
[ = pāṭihāriya or der. fr. pātihāra in meaning of ˚hāriya] special, extraordinary; only in cpd. ˚pakkha an extra holiday A i.144; Vv 156 (cp. VvA 71, 109); ThA 38. -- 451 -- Pāṭihāriya
Pāṭihāriya
(adj.) [grd. formation fr. paṭi+hṛ (paṭihāra) with usual lengthening of paṭi to pāṭi, as in ˚desanīya, ˚mokkha etc. Cp. pāṭihīra; BSk. prātihārya] striking, surprising, extraordinary, special; nt. wonder, miracle. Usually in stock phrase iddhi˚, ādesanā˚, anusāsanī˚ as the 3 marvels which characterise a Buddha with regard to his teaching (i. e. superhuman power, mind reading, giving instruction) D i.212; iii.3 sq.; S iv.290; A i.170; v.327; Ps ii.227. -- Further: Vin i.34 (aḍḍhuḍḍha˚ sahassāni); Vism 378, 390 (yamaka˚); VvA 158 (id.); PvA 137 (id.). For yamaka -- pāṭihāriya (or ˚hīra) see yamaka. -- Two kinds of p. are given at Vism 393, viz. pākaṭa˚ and apākaṭa˚. -- sappāṭihāriya (with ref. to the Dhamma) wonderful, extraordinary, sublime, as opposed to appāṭi˚ plain, ordinary, stupid M ii.9 (where Neumann, Majjhima Nikāya ii.318 trsls sa˚ "intelligible" and a˚ "incomprehensible," referring to Chāndogyopaniṣat i.11, 1); D ii.104; cp. also Windisch, Māra 71.

-- pakkha an extra holiday, an ancient festival, not now kept S i.208 (cp. Th 2, 31); Sn 402 (cp. expln at SnA 378, where var. opinions are given); J iv.320; vi.118. See also Kern's discussion of the term at Toev. ii.30. Pāṭihīra
Pāṭihīra
(adj.) [contracted form of pāṭihāriya viâ meta- thesis *pāṭihāriya> *pāṭihēra>paṭihīra] wonderful; nt. a wonderful thing, marvel, miracle Ps i.125 (yamaka˚); ii.158 (id.); Mhvs 5, 118; Miln 106; Dāvs i.50; DhA iii.213. -- appātihīrakathā stupid talk D i.193, 239; Kvu 561 (diff. Kern. Toev. ii.30); opp. sa˚ ibid. Pāṭī
Pāṭī
(f.) [?] at VvA 321 in phrase sukka -- pakkha -- pāṭiyaŋ "in the moonlight half" is doubtful. Hardy in Index registers it as "part, half -- ," but pakkha already means "half" and is enough by itself. We should probably read paṭipāṭiyaŋ "successively." Note that the similar passage VvA 314 reads sukka -- pakkhe pannarasiyaŋ. Pāṭuka & Pāṭubha
Pāṭuka
& Pāṭubha only neg. a˚ (q. v.). Pāṭukamyatā
Pāṭukamyatā:
see pātu˚. Pāṭekka (Pāṭiyekka)
Pāṭekka
(Pāṭiyekka) (adj.) [paṭi+eka; the diaeretic form of pacceka: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 24] several, distinct, single Vin i.134; iv.15; J i.92 (T. pāṭiekka, SS pāṭiyekka); Vism 249 (pāṭiyekka, SS pāṭiekka), 353, 356, 443, 473; DhA iv.7 (pāṭiy˚ SS pāṭieka). -- nt. ˚ŋ (adv.) singly, separately, individually Vism 409 (pāṭiy˚); VvA 141. Pāṭeti
Pāṭeti
[Caus. of paṭ] to remove; Pass. pāṭiyati Pv iv.147 (turned out of doors); v. l. pātayati (bring to fall). Prob, in sense of Med. at Miln 152 in phrase visaŋ pāṭiyamāno (doubtful, cp. Kern, Toev. ii.139, & Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 87). Pāṭha
Pāṭha
[fr. paṭh] reading, text -- reading; passage of a text, text. Very freq. in Commentaries with phrase "ti pi pāṭho," i. e. "so is another reading," e. g. KhA 78, 223; SnA 43 (˚ŋ vikappeti), 178, 192, 477; PvA 25 (pamāda˚ careless text), 48, 58, 86 and passim. Pāṭhaka
Pāṭhaka
( -- ˚) [fr. pāṭha] reciter; one who knows, expert Nd1 382 (nakkhatta˚); J i.455 (asi -- lakkhaṇa˚); ii.21 (angavijjā˚), 250 (id.); v.211 (lakkhaṇa˚ fortune -- teller, wise man). Pāṭhīna
Pāṭhīna
[cp. Sk. pāṭhīna Manu 5, 16; Halāyudha 3, 36] the fish Silurus Boalis, a kind of shad J iv.70 (C: pāṭhīna -- nāmakaŋ pāsāṇa -- macchaŋ); v.405; vi.449. Pāṇa
Pāṇa
[fr. pa+an, cp. Vedic prāṇa breath of life; P. apāna, etc.] living being, life, creature D iii.48, 63, 133; S i.209, 224; v.43, 227, 441 (mahā -- samudde); A i.161; ii.73, 176, 192; Sn 117, 247, 394, 704; Dh 246; DA i.69, 161; KhA 26; ThA 253; PvA 9, 28, 35; VvA 72; DhA ii.19. -- pl. also pāṇāni, e. g. Sn 117; Dh 270. -> Bdhgh's defn of pāṇa is "pāṇanatāya pāṇā; assāsapassās' āyatta -- vuttitāyā ti attho" Vism 310.

-- âtipāta destruction of life, murder Vin i.83 (in "dasa sikkhāpadāni," see also sīla), 85, 193; D iii.68, 70, 149, 182, 235; M i.361; iii.23; Sn 242; It 63; J iii.181; Pug 39 sq.; Nett 27; VbhA 383 (var. degrees of murder); DhA ii.19; iii.355; DA i.69; PvA 27. -- âtipātin one who takes the life of a living being, destroying life D iii.82; M iii.22; S ii.167; It 92; DhA ii.19. -- upeta possessed or endowed with life, alive [cp. BSk. prāṇopeta Divy 72, 462 etc.] S i.173; Sn 157; DA i.236. -- ghāta slaying life, killing, murder DA i.69; -- ghātin = âtipātin DhA ii.19. -- bhu a living being J iv.494. -- bhūta=˚bhu M iii.5; A ii.210; iii.92; iv.249 sq.; J iv.498. -- vadha=âtipāta DA i.69. -- sama equal to or as dear as life J ii.343; Dpvs xi.26; DhA i.5. -- hara taking away life, destructive M i.10=iii.97; S iv.206; A ii.116, 143, 153; iii.163. Pāṇaka
Pāṇaka
(adj. -- n.) (usually -- ˚) [fr. pāṇa] a living being, endowed with (the breath of) life S iv.198 (chap˚); DhA i.20 (v. l. BB mata˚); sap˚ with life, containing living creatures J i.198 (udaka); ap˚ without living beings, lifeless Vin ii.216; M i.13, 243; S i.169; Sn p. 15 (udaka); J i.67 (jhāna). Pāṇana
Pāṇana
(nt.) [fr. pāṇa] breathing Vism 310 (see pāṇa); Dhātupāṭha 273 ("baḷa" pāṇane). Pāṇi
Pāṇi
[Vedic pāṇi, cp. Av. pərənā hand, with n -- suffix, where we find m -- suffix in Gr. pala/mh, Lat. palma, Oir lām, Ohg. folma = Ags. folm] the hand Vin iii.14 (pāṇinā paripuñchati); M i.78 (pāṇinā parimajjati); S i.178, 194; Sn 713; Dh 124; J i.126 (˚ŋ paharati); PugA 249 (id.); PvA 56; Sdhp 147, 238. As adj. ( -- ˚) "handed," with a hand, e. g. alla˚ with clean hand Pv ii.99; payata˚ with outstretched hand, open -- handed, liberal S v.351; A iii.287; iv.266 sq.; v.331.

-- tala the palm of the hand D ii.17. -- bhāga handshare, division by hands VvA 96. -- matta of the size of a hand, a handful PvA 70, 116, 119. -- ssara hand sound, hand music, a cert. kind of musical instrument D i.6; iii.183; DA i.84 (cp. Dial i.8), 231; J v.390, 506; cp. BSk. pāṇisvara MVastu ii.52. Also adj. one who plays this instrument J vi.276; cp. BSk. pāṇisvarika MVastu iii.113. Pāṇikā
Pāṇikā
(f.) [fr. pāṇi; Sk. *pāṇikā] a sort of spoon Vin ii.151. Cp. puthu -- pāṇikā (˚pāṇiyā?) Vin ii.106. Pāṇin
Pāṇin
(adj. -- n.) [fr. pāṇa] having life, a living being S i.210, 226, Sn 220 (acc. pl. pāṇine, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 952), 587 (id.), 201, 575; PvA 287; DhA ii.19. Pāta
Pāta
( -- ˚) [fr. pat] 1. fall DA i.95 (ukkā˚); PvA 45 (asani˚). The reading "anatthato pātato rakkhito" at PvA 61 is faulty we should prefer to read apagato (apāyato?) rakkhito. -- 2. throwing, a throw Sn 987 (muddha˚); PvA 57 (akkhi˚). See also piṇḍa. Pātana
Pātana
(nt.) [fr. pāteti] bringing to fall, destroying, killing, only in gabbha˚ destroying the foetus, abortion (q. v.) DhA i.47 and passim. Pātar
Pātar
(adv.) [Vedic prātar, der. fr. *prō, *prā, cp. Lat. prandium (fr. prām -- edi̯om = pātar -- āsa); Gr. prwi/ early; Ohg. fruo=Ger. früh] early in the morning, in foll. forms: (1) pātar (before vowels), only in cpd. ˚āsa morning meal, breakfast [cp. BSk. prātar -- aśana Divy 631] D iii.94; Sn 387; J i.232; VvA 294, 308; SnA 374 (pāto asitabbo ti pātar -- āso piṇḍa -- pātass' etaŋ nāmaŋ). -- katapātarāsa (adj.) after breakfast J i.227; vi.349 (˚bhetta); Vism 391. -- (2) pāto (abs.) D iii.94; DhA ii.60; PvA 54, 126, 128; pāto va right early J i.226; vi.180. -- (3) pātaŋ S i.183; ii.242; Th 2, 407. -> Note. Should piṇḍa -- pāta belong here, as suggested by Bdhgh at SnA 374 (see above)? See detail under piṇḍa. -- 452 -- Pātavyatā
Pātavyatā
(f.) [fr. pāt, see pāteti] downfall, bringing to fall, felling M i.305; A i.266; Vin iv.34 (˚by˚); VbhA 499. Pātāpeti
Pātāpeti
[Caus. II. of pāteti] to cause to fall, to cause an abortus Vin ii.108; DA i.134. Pātāla
Pātāla
[cp. Epic Sk. pātāla an underground cave] proclivity, cliff, abyss S i.32, 127, 197; iv.206; Th 1, 1104 (see Brethren 418 for fuller expln); J iii.530 (here expld as a cliff in the ocean). Pāti
Pāti
[Vedic pāti of pā, cp. Gr. pw_u herd, poimh/n shepherd, Lat. pāsco to tend sheep] to watch, keep watch, keep J iii.95 (to keep the eyes open, C. ummisati; opp. nimisati); Vism 16 ( = rakkhati in def. of pāṭimokkha). Pātika
Pātika
= pātī, read at Vism 28 for patika. Pātita
Pātita
[pp. of pāteti] brought to fall, felled, destroyed Sn 631; Dh 407; J iii.176; PvA 31 (so read for patita). Pātin
Pātin
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. pāta] throwing, shooting, only in cpd. dūre˚ throwing far A i.284; ii.170. See akkhaṇa -- vedhin. Pātimokkha
Pātimokkha
see pāṭi˚. Pātī & Pāti
Pātī
& Pāti (f.) [the femin. of patta, which is Vedic pātra (nt.); to this the f. Ved. pātrī] a bowl, vessel, dish Vin i.157 (avakkāra˚), 352 (id.); ii.216 (id.); M i.25 (kaŋsa˚), 207; S ii.233; A iv.393 (suvaṇṇa˚, rūpiya˚, kaŋsa˚); J i.347, 501; ii.90; v.377 (suvaṇṇa˚) vi.510 (kañcana˚); VvA 65; PvA 274. Pātukamyatā
Pātukamyatā
is frequent v. l. for cāṭu -- kamyatā, which is probably the correct reading (see this). The meaning (according to Vism 27 = VbhA 483) is "putting oneself low," i. e. flattery, "fawning" (Vism trsl. 32). A still more explicit defn is found at VbhA 338. The diff. spellings are as follows: cāṭukamyatā Vism 17, 27; KhA 236; VbhA 338, 483; cāṭukammatā Miln 370; pāṭukamyatā Vbh 246; pātukamyatā Nd2 39. See standing phrase under mugga -- sūpyatā. Pātur
Pātur
( -- ˚) (˚pātu) (indecl.) [cp. Vedic prāduḥ in prādur+ bhu; on t for d see Geiger, P.Gr. § 394. As regards etym. Monier Williams suggests prā = pra+dur, door, thus "before the door, openly"; cp. dvāra] visible, open, manifest; only in compn with kṛ and bhū, and with the rule that pātu˚ appears before cons., whereas pātur˚ stands before vowels. (1) with kṛ (to make appear): pres. pātukaroti Sn 316; J iv.7; Pug 30; SnA 423; aor. pātvākāsi S ii.254; DhA ii.64; pp. pātukata Vv 8441. -- (2) with bhū (to become manifest, to appear): pres. pātubhavati D i.220; D ii.12, 15, 20, 226; M i.445; S iv 78; Pv ii.941 (pot. ˚bhaveyyuŋ); aor. pāturahosi [cp. BSk. prādurabhūt Jtm. 211] Vin i.5; D i.215; ii.20; S i.137; Pv ii.86; Miln 10, 18; VvA 188; pl. pāturahaŋsu J i.11, & ˚ahiŋsu J i.54. -> pp. pātubhūta S iii.39; Dhs 1035; PvA 44.

-- kamma making visible, manifestation S ii.254; DhA iv.198. -- bhāva appearance, coming into manifestation M i.50; S ii.3; iv.78; A i.266; ii.130; Sn 560, 998; J i.63; Nd2 s. v.; Vism 437. Pāteti
Pāteti
[Caus. of pat] 1. to make fall, drop, throw off S i.197 (sakuṇo rajaŋ); J i.93 (udakaŋ); Miln 305 (sāraŋ). -- 2. to bring to fall J v.198; Miln 187. -- 3. to kill, destroy, cut off (the head) J i.393; iii.177; PvA 31, 115. -- pp. pātita. Caus. II. pātāpeti (q. v.). -- Cp. abhi˚. Note. In meaning 3 it would be better to assume confusion with pāṭeti (for phāṭeti = Sk. sphāṭayati to split [sphuṭ=(s)phal], see phāleti & phāṭeti In the same sense we find the phrase kaṭṭhaŋ pāteti to split firewood M i.21 (MA ereti), besides phāleti. Pātheyya
Pātheyya
(nt.) [grd. form. fr. patha] "what is necessary for the road," provisions for a journey, viaticum Vin i.244; S i.44; Dh 235, 237; J v.46, 241; DA i.288; DhA i.180; iii.335; PvA 5, 154. Pātheyyaka
Pātheyyaka
(nt.) = patheyya PvA 126. Pāda
Pāda
[Vedic pāda, see etym. under pada] 1. the foot, usually pl. pādā both feet, e. g. Vin i.9, 34, 188; It 111; Sn 309, 547, 768, 835, 1028; J ii.114; iv.137; DhA iii.196; PvA 4, 10, 40, 68; VvA 105. In sg. scarce, and then specified as eka˚ & dutiya˚, e. g. at Nd2 304iii; J vi.354. -- 2. foot or base of a mountain Vism 399 (Sineru˚); DhA i.108 (pabbata˚). -- 3. the fourth part ("foot") of a verse (cp. pada 4) SnA 239, 273, 343, 363; ThA 23. -- 4. a coin Vin iii.47; VvA 77 (worth here 1/4 of a kahāpaṇa and double the value of māsaka; see also kākaṇikā).

-- anguṭṭha a toe M i.337. -- anguṭṭhaka same J ii.447; Vism 233. -- anguli same PvA 125 (opp. to hatth' anguli finger). -- aṭṭhika bone of the foot M i.58, 89; iii.92; KhA 49. -- âpacca offspring fr. the foot (of Brahmā): see bandhu. -- ûdara "(using) the belly as feet," i. e. a snake Sn 604. -- odaka water for washing the feet Vin i.9. -- kathalika (˚iya) acc. to Bdhgh either a foot stool or a towel (adhota -- pāda -- ṭhapanakaŋ pāda -- ghaŋsanaŋ vā, see Vin. Texts i.92; ii.373) Vin i.9, 46; ii.22; iv.310; Kvu 440; VvA 8; DhA i.321. -- kudārikā holding the feet like an axe (?) Pv iv.147 (expld at PvA 240 by pādasankhātā kudārikā; does k. here represent kuṭhārikā? The reading & meaning is uncertain). -- khīla a corn in the foot Vin i.188 (as ˚ālādha, cp. Vin Texts ii.19). -- ghaŋsanī a towel for rubbing the feet (dry) Vin ii.130. -- cāra moving about on feet J iv.104. -- tala the sole of the foot Vin i.179; M iii.90; D iii.143, 148; PvA 74. -- dhovana cleaning or washing one's feet DhA ii.9. -- pa "drinking with the foot," N. for tree Pv iv.39 (cp. PvA 251); Miln 117, 376; Vism 533; VvA 212; Sdhp 270. -- paricārikā "serving on one's feet," i. e. a wife (cp. S i,125) J iii.95; vi.268; DhA iii.194. -- pīṭha a foot -- stool Vin i.9 (cp. Vin. Texts i.92); iv.310; DhA iii.120 = 186; VvA 291. -- puñchana(ka) wiping one's feet (with a towel) Vism 358 (˚rajju -- maṇḍalaka, in comparison=VbhA 62); VbhA 285 (˚coḷaka); KhA 144; SnA 333; DhA i.415 (˚ka). -- puñchanī a towel for the feet Vin ii.174. -- bbhañjana ointment for the feet, foot -- salve Vin i.205; J v.197, 376; PvA 44, 78; anointing the feet VvA 44 (˚tėla), 295 (id.). -- mūla the sole of the foot, the foot J iv.131. Cp. mūla. -- mūlika "one who sits at one's feet," a foot -- servant, lackey J i.122, 438; ii.300 sq. (Gāmaṇicaṇḍa); iii.417; v.128; vi.30. -- lola loafing about, one who lingers after a thing, a greedy person Sn 63, 972; Nd1 374; Nd2 433; abstr. f. ˚lolatā SnA 36, & ˚loliya Nd2 433. -- visāṇa "a horn on the foot," i. e. an impossibility J vi.340. -- sambāhana massaging the feet DhA i.38. Pādaka
Pādaka
(adj. n.) [fr. pāda] 1. having a foot or basis Vin ii.110 (a˚); Sn 205; ThA 78. -- 2. fundamental; pādakaŋ karoti to take as a base or foundation Vism 667. -- 3. (nt.) basis, foundation, base PvA 167. -> pādaka -- jjhāna meditation forming a basis (for further introspective development) Vism 390, 397, 412 sq., 428, 667. -- Cp. āhacca˚. Pādāsi
Pādāsi
is aor. of padāti. Pāduka
Pāduka
[ = pādaka] a little foot J vi.554. Pādukā
Pādukā
(f.) [cp. Epic Sk. pāduka & pādukā] a shoe, slipper, clog Vin i.190; ii.142, 222; J iii.327; iv.129, 379; v.298; vi.23; Miln 330; DA i.136; DhA iii.451 (muñja˚). -- At Vin ii.143 (according to Rh. D.) pādukā (dāru˚) is a kind of stool or stand in a privy. Pāna
Pāna
[Vedic pāna, fr. pā, pibati = Lat. bibo, pp. pīta, Idg. *po[i], cp. Gr. pi/ nw to drink, po/tos drink; Obulg. piti to drink, pivo drink; Lith. penas milk; Lat. potus drink, poculum drinking vessel (=Sk. pātra, P. patta)] drink, including water as well as any other liquid. Often combd with anna˚ (food), e. g. Sn 485, 487; Pv i.52; and ˚bhojana (id.) e. g. Dh 249; J i.204. Two sets of 8 drinks are given in detail at Nd1 372. -- Vin i.245, 249 (yāgu˚); S v.375 (majja˚); Sn 82, 398, 924; J i.202 (dibba˚); Pug 51; PvA 7, 8, 50.

-- âgāra a drinking booth, a tavern Vin ii.267; iii.151; J i.302 ( = surā -- geha C.); Vbh 247; VbhA 339. -- 453 -- Pānaka
Pānaka
(nt.) [fr. pāna] a drink J ii.285; iv.30; Dāvs v.2; DhA iii.207 (amba˚); VvA 99, 291. -- Der. pānakatta (abstr. nt.) being provided with drink J v.243 (a˚). Pānada
Pānada
in cpd. pānad' ûpama at J ii.223 is faulty. The meaning is "a badly made sandal," and the reading should probably be (with v. l. & C.) "dupāhan' ûpama," i. e. du(ḥ)+upāhanā. The C. expls as "dukkatupāhan' ûpama." Pānīya
Pānīya
(adj. nt.) [Vedic pānīya, fr. pāna] 1. drinkable S ii.111. -- 2. drink, be erage, usually water for drinking Vin ii.207; iv.263; J i.198, 450; iii.491; v.106, 382; Pv i.107; ii.119, 710; PvA 4, 5. A reduced form pāniya (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 23) is also found, e. g. Vin ii.153; D i.148; Pv ii.102.

-- ghata a pot for drinking water Vin ii.216; J vi.76, 85. -- cāṭika drinking vessel DhA iv.129. -- cāṭī id. J i.302. -- ṭhālika drinking cup Vin ii.214; iv.263. -- bhājana id. Vin ii.153. -- maṇḍapa water reservoir (BSk. id. e. g. AvŚ ii.86) Vin ii.153. -- māḷaka (?) J vi.85 (Hardy: Flacourtia cataphracta). -- sālā a hall where drinking water is given Vin ii.153; PvA 102; cp. papā. Pānudi
Pānudi
see panudati. Pāpa
Pāpa
(adj. nt.) [Vedic pāpa, cp. Lat. patior≈E. passion etc.; Gr. ph_ma suffering, evil; talai/pwros suffering evil] 1. (adj.) evil, bad, wicked, sinful A ii.222 sq. (and compar. pāpatara); Sn 57; Dh 119 (opp. bhadra). Other compar -- superl. forms are pāpiṭṭha S v.96; pāpiṭṭhatara Vin ii.5; pāpiyyasika D iii.254. See pāpiya. -- 2. unfertile (of soil) S iv.315. -- 3. (nt.) evil, wrong doing, sin Sn 23, 662; Dh 117 (opp. puñña) 183; Pv i.66; 112; iv.150; DhA ii.11. -- pp. pāpāni Sn 399, 452, 674; Dh 119, 265.

-- iccha having bad wishes or intentions Vin i.97; D iii.246; S i.50; ii.156; A iii.119, 191, 219 sq.; iv.1, 22, 155; v.123 sq.; Sn 133, 280; It 85; Nd2 342; Vism 24 (def.); VbhA 476; -- icchatā evil intention A iv.160, 165; DhA ii.77. -- kamma evil doing, wickedness, sin, crime D iii.182; It 86; Sn 407; Dh 127; Vism 502; VbhA 440 sq.; PvA 11, 25, 32, 51, 84. -- kammanta evil -- doer, villain S i.97. -- kammin id. M i.39 Dh 126. -- kara id. Sn 674. -- karin id. Dh 15, 17. -- dassana sinful view Pv iv.355. -- dhamma wickedness, evil habit Dh 248, 307; Pug 37; DhA iii.4; PvA 98; as adj. at PvA. 58. -- dhammin one of evil character or habits Pv i.117. -- parikkhaya decay or destruction of demerit (opp. puñña˚) Pv ii.615. -- mitta an evil associate, a bad companion (opp. kalyāṇa˚) M i.43, 470; D iii.182. -- mittatā bad company, association with wicked people A i.13 sq., 83; iv.160, 165; D iii.212; Dhs 13, 27; Vbh 359, 369, 371. -- sankappa evil thought Sn 280. -- sīla bad morals Sn 246. -- supina an evil dream (opp. bhaddaka) Vism 312; DhA iii.4. Pāpaka
Pāpaka
(adj.) [fr. pāpa] bad, wicked, wretched, sinful Vin i.8; S i.149, 207; v.418 (p. akusala citta); Sn 127, 215, 664; Dh 66, 78, 211, 242; J i.128; Pv ii.716 ( = lāmaka C.); ii.93; Pug 19; Dhs 30, 101; Miln 204 (opp. kalyāṇa); Vism 268 (=lāmaka), 312 (of dreams, opp. bhaddaka). -- f. pāpikā Dh 164, 310; a˚ without sin, innocent, of a young maiden (daharā) Th 2, 370; Vv 314; 326 (so expld by VvA, but ThA explns as faultless, i. e. beautiful). Pāpaṇika
Pāpaṇika
(adj. n.) [pa+āpaṇa+ika] belonging to a shop, i. e. 1. a shopkeeper A i.115 sq. -- 2. laid out in the shop (of cīvara) Vin i.255; Vism 62 ( = āpaṇa -- dvāre patitaka). See also Vin. Texts ii.156. Pāpika
Pāpika
= pāpaka D i.90 (cp. DA i.256); A iv.197. Pāpita
Pāpita
[pp. of pāpeti1, in meaning = pāpika] one who has done wrong, sinful, evil M ii.43 (where D i.90 at id. p. has pāpika); DA i.256 (for pāpika, v. l. vāpita). Pāpimant
Pāpimant
(adj. n.) [fr. pāpa, cp. Vedic pāpman] sinful; a sinner, esp. used as Ep. of Māra, i. e. the Evil, the wicked one S i.103; A iv.434; Ud 64; Sn 430; Th 1, 1213; Miln 155 sq.; DhA iv.32. Pāpiyo
Pāpiyo
(adj.) [compar. of pāpa, cp. Sk. pāpīyas] worse, more evil or wicked S i.162, 202; Sn 275; Dh 42, 76; J i.158; iv.303; Miln 155; DhA ii.108. Pāpuṇana
Pāpuṇana
(nt.) [fr. pāpuṇāti] attainment J iv.306. Pāpuṇāti
Pāpuṇāti
[pa+āp; cp. Sk. prāpnoti] to reach, attain, arrive at, obtain, get to learn. -- pres. pāpuṇāti Vin ii.208; J iv.285; vi.149; Pug 70; DA 21; PvA 74, 98, 125, 195; and pappoti S i.25; Dh 27; Vism 501; DhA i.395; pot. pāpuṇe Sn 324; Dh 138; J v.57 (1st pl. pāpuṇeyyāma for T. pappomu); DhA iv.200. aor. apāpuṇi ThA 64, and pāpuṇi J ii.229. pret. apattha J v.391 (proh. mā a.). fut. pāpuṇissati J i.260. ger. pāpuṇitvā S ii.28; patvā Sn 347, 575, and pappuyya S i.7 (cp. Vin ii.56; A i.138), 181, 212. inf. pappotuŋ Si. 129 = Th 2, 60, and pāpuṇituŋ VbhA 223. -- grd. pattabba S i.129; ii.28; SnA 433. -- pp. patta; Caus. pāpeti2 (q. v.). Pāpuraṇa
Pāpuraṇa
(nt.) [through *pāvuraṇa fr. pra+vṛ, cp. Sk. prāvaraṇa] cover, dress, cloak S i.175; Miln 279; DhA iii.1. See also pārupana. Pāpurati
Pāpurati
[fr. pa+ā+vṛ, cp. Vedic pravṛṇoti] to cover, veil; shut, hide; only neg. a˚ and only in phrase apāpurati Amatassa dvāraŋ to open the door of Nibbāna Vin i.5; Vv 6427 ( = vivarati VvA 284). Pāpeti
Pāpeti1
[Denom. fr. pāpa] to make bad, bring into dis- grace Vin iv.5. -- pp. pāpita. Pāpeti
Pāpeti2
[Caus. of pāpuṇāti] to make attain, to let go to, to cause to reach, to bring to J iv.494; v.205, 260; DA i.136. imper. pāpaya S i.217, and pāpayassu J iv.20. fut. pāpessati J i.260 and pāpayissati J v.8. Pābhata
Pābhata
[pa+ābhata] brought, conveyed DA i.262; SnA 356 (kathā˚). Pābhati
Pābhati
(nt.) [pa+ā+pp. of bhṛ] "that which has been brought here," viz. 1. a present, bribe DA i.262. -> 2. money, price J i.122; v.401, 452. -- kathā˚ "a tale brought," occasion for something to tell, news, story J i.252, 364, 378; SnA 356. Pāmanga
Pāmanga
(nt.) [etym.?] a band or chain Vin ii.106; iii.48; Mhvs 11, 28; Dpvs xii.1; DhA iv.216. See on this Vin. Texts iii.69 & Mhvs trsl. 797. Pāmujja
Pāmujja
(nt.) [grd. form. tr. pa+mud, see similar forms under pāmokkha] delight, joy, happiness; often combd with pīti. -- D i.72, 196; S iii.134; iv.78 = 351; v.156, 398; A iii.21; v.1 sq., 311 sq., 339, 349; Sn 256; Nett 29; DA i.217; Sdhp 167. See also pāmojja. Pāmokkha
Pāmokkha
(adj.) [a grd. form. fr. pamukha, with length- ening of a as frequently in similar forms like pāṭidesanīya, pāṭimokkha, pāmojja] 1. chief, first, excellent, eminent, (m.) a leader. -- A ii.168 (sanga sa˚); Pug 69, 70; Miln 75 (hatthi˚ state elephant). disā˚ worldfamed J i.166, 285; ii.278; vi.347. -- Freq. in series agga seṭṭha pāmokkha attama, in exegesis of mahā (at Nd2 502 A e. g., when A ii.95 reads mokkha for p.). See mahā. Defd as "pamukhe sādhū ti" at VbhA 332. -- 2. facing east Pv iv.353 ( = pācīna -- dis' âbhimukha). -- 454 -- Pāmojja
Pāmojja
= pāmujja [Cp. BSk. prāmodya Divy 13, 82, 239] D ii.214; iii.288; M i.37, 98; S i.203; ii.30; v.157; Dh 376, 381; Ps i.177; Dhs 9, 86; Miln 84; Vism 2, 107, 177 (T. pa˚); DhA iv.111 (˚bahula). Pāya
Pāya
[fr. pa+ā+yā] setting out, starting S ii.218 (nava˚ newly setting out); instr. pāyena (adv.) for the most part, commonly, usually J v.490; DA i.275 (so read for pāṭhena). Pāyaka
Pāyaka
( -- ˚) [fr. pā to drink] drinking J i.252 (vāruṇi˚) Pāyāta
Pāyāta
[pp of pāyāti] gone forth, set out, started J i.146. Pāyāti
Pāyāti
[pra+ā+yā] to set out, start, go forth DhA ii.42; aor. 3rd sg. pāyāsi D ii.73; J i.64, 223; iii.333; VvA 64; PvA 272; 3rd pl. pāyesuŋ J iv.220, and pāyiŋsu D ii.96; J i.253; DhA iii.257. -- pp. pāyāta (q. v.). See also the quasi synonymous abhiyāti. Pāyāsa
Pāyāsa
[cp. Class. Sk. pāyāsa] rice boiled in milk, milk -- rice, rice porridge S i.166; Sn p. 15; J i.50, 68; iv.391; v.211; Vism 41; SnA 151; DhA i.171; ii.88; VvA 32. Pāyin
Pāyin
(adj. n.) [fr. pā, see pivati] drinking J iii.338. Pāyeti
Pāyeti
[Caus. fr. pā, see pibati] 1. to give to drink, to make drink D ii.19; Sn 398 (Pot. pāyaye); Miln 43, 229; DhA i.87 (amataŋ); VvA 75 (yāguŋ); PvA 63; aor. apāyesi S i.143; ger. pāyetvā J i.202 (dibba -- pānaŋ); ii.115 (lohitaŋ); iii.372 (phāṇīt' odakaŋ); iv.30 (pānakaŋ); vi.392 (suraŋ). -- 2. to irrigate J i.215. -- ppr. f. pāyamānā a woman giving suck, a nursing woman D i.166; M i.77; A i.295; ii.206; iii.227; Pug 55; DhA i.49. -- Caus. II. pāyāpeti J v.422. Pāra
Pāra
(adj. -- nt.) [fr. para] 1. as adv. (˚ -- ) beyond, over, across, used as prep. with abl., e. g. pāra -- Gangāya beyond the G. S i.207, 214; SnA 228. See under cpds. -- 2. as nt. the other side, the opposite shore S i.169, 183; Sn 1059; Nd1 20 ( = amataŋ nibbānaŋ); Dh 385; DhA iv.141 aparā pāraŋ gacchati to go from this side to the other (used with ref. to this world & the world beyond) S iv.174; A v.4; Sn 1130; pāraŋ gavesino M ii.64=Th 1, 771 -- 3. Cases adverbially: acc. pāraŋ see sep.; abl. pārato from the other side Vin ii.209. -- 3. the guṇa form of para, another: see cpds.:

-- atthika (pār') wishing to cross beyond D i.244. -- ga "going beyond," traversing, crossing, surmounting S iv.71 (jātimaraṇassa); Sn 32, 997. -- gata one who has reached the opposite shore S i.34; ii.277; iv.157; A iv.411; Sn 21, 210, 359; Dh 414; Vv 531 (cp. VvA 231); one who has gone over to another party Th 1, 209. -- gavesin looking for the other shore Dh 355; DhA iv.80. -- gāmin = gata S i.123; A v.232 sq., 253 sq.; DhA ii.160. -- gū (a) gone beyond, i. e. passed, transcended, crossed S i.195=Nd2 136a (dukkhassa), iv.210 (bhavassa); A ii.9 (id.); iii.223; It 33 (jarāya); Dh 348. (b) gone to the end of (gen. or. -- ˚), reached perfection in, well -- versed in, familiar with, an authority on Sn 992 (sabbadhammānaŋ), 1105 (cp. Nd2 435); D i.88 (tiṇṇaŋ vedānaŋ); DhA iii.361 (id.). -- dārika an adulterer, lit. one of another's wife S ii.259; J iii.43 (so read for para˚); DhA ii.10. Pāraŋ
Pāraŋ
(adv. -- prep.) [acc. of pāra] beyond, to the other side D i.244; M i.135; Sn 1146 (Maccu -- dheyya˚, vv. ll. ˚dheyassa & ˚dheyya˚), expld by Nd2 487 as amataŋ nibbānaŋ; VvA 42.

-- gata (cp. pāragata) gone to the other side, gone beyond, traversed, transcended M i.135; S ii.277; Sn 803; Nd1 114; Nd2 435; Pug 72; Vism 234. -- gamana crossing over, going beyond S v.24, 81; A v.4, 313; Sn 1130. Pāramitā
Pāramitā
(f.) [pāramī+tā] = pāramī Nett 87. Pāramī
Pāramī
(f.) [abstr. fr. parama, cp. BSk. mantrāṇāŋ pāra- miŋ gata Divy 637] completeness, perfection, highest state Sn 1018, 1020; Pug 70; DhA i.5; VvA 2 (sāvakañāṇa˚); PvA 139; Sdhp 328. In later literature there is mentioned a group of 10 perfections (dasa pāramiyo) as the perfect exercise of the 10 principal virtues by a Bodhisatta, viz. dāna˚, sīla˚, nekkhamma˚, paññā˚, viriya˚, khanti˚, sacca˚, adhiṭṭhāna˚, mettā˚, upekhā˚ J i.73; DhA i.84.

-- ppatta (pārami˚) having attained perfection M iii.28; Nd2 435; Miln 21 22; cp. Miln trsl. i.34. Pārājika
Pārājika
[etym. doubtful; suggested are parā+aj (Bur- nouf); para+ji; pārācika (S. Lévi, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 38, n. 3; also Childers s. v.)] one who has committed a grave transgression of the rules for bhikkhus; one who merits expulsion (see on term Vin. Texts i.3; Miln trsln i.268; ii.78) Vin i.172; ii.101, 242; A ii.241; iii.252; v.70; J vi.70, 112; Miln 255; Vism 22; KhA 97, DhA i.76 (as one of the divisions of the Suttavibhanga, see also Vin iii.1 sq.). Pārāpata
Pārāpata
[Epic Sk. pārāvata] a dove, pigeon J i.242; v.215; VvA 167 (˚akkhi); Pgdp 45. See the doublet pārevata. Pārāyana
Pārāyana
(nt.) [late Sk. pārāyaṇa, the metric form of parāyana] the highest (farthest) point, final aim, chief object, ideal; title of the last Vagga of the Sutta Nipāta A iii.401; Sn 1130; Nd2 438; SnA 163, 370, 604. Pārikkhattiya
Pārikkhattiya
= parikkhattatā, Pug 19=VbhA 358. Pāricariyā
Pāricariyā
(f.) same as paricariya serving, waiting on, service, ministration, honour (for = loc.) D iii.189, 250, 281; M ii.177; S iv.239; A ii.70; iii.284, 325, 328; J iii.408; iv.490; v.154, 158 (kilesa˚); PvA 7, 58, 128. Cp. BSk. pāricāryā MVastu ii.225. Pāricchatta
Pāricchatta
= pāricchattaka, Sn 64 (˚ka Nd2 439; expld as koviḷāra); J v.393. Pāricchattaka
Pāricchattaka
[Epic Sk. pārijāta, but P. fr. pari+chatta +ka, in pop. etym. "shading all round"] the coral tree Erythmia Indica, a tree in Indra's heaven Vin i.30; A iv.117 sq.; Vv 381 (expld as Māgadhism at VvA 174 for pārijāta, which is also the BSk. form); J i.40; ii.20; KhA i.122; SnA 485; DhA i.273; iii.211; DhsA 1; VvA 12, 110; PvA 137. Pārijāta
Pārijāta
= pāricchattaka, VvA 174. Pārijuñña
Pārijuñña
(nt.) [abstr. fr. parijuṇṇa, pp. of pari+jur] 1. decay, loss M ii.66; DhA i.238; VvA 101 (bhoga˚). -- 2. loss of property, poverty PvA 3. Pāripanthika
Pāripanthika
[fr. paripantha] 1. highwayman, robber S ii.188; J v.253. -- 2. connected with danger, threatening, dangerous to ( -- ˚) Vism 152; PugA 181 (samādhi˚, vipassanā˚). Pāripūrī
Pāripūrī
(f.) [abstr. fr. pari+pūr, cp. BSk. pāripūri AvŚ ii.107] fulfilment, completion, consummation S i.139; A v.114 sq.; Sn 1016; J vi.298; Nd2 137 (pada˚); SnA 28 (id.); Pug 53; Dhs 1367; DhA i.36; PvA 132, 133; VbhA 468 (˚mada conceit of perfection). Pārima
Pārima
(adj.) [superl. form. fr. pāra] yonder, farther, only combd with ˚tīra the farther shore D i.244; M i.134, 135; S iv.174; Miln 269; DhA ii.100. Cp. BSk. pārimaŋ tīraŋ AvŚ i.148. Pāribhaṭya
Pāribhaṭya
(nt.) (& der.) [fr. pari+bhṛ] "petting (or spoiling) the children" ( Miln trsl. ii.287) but perhaps more likely "fondness of being petted" or "nurture" (as Vism trsl. 32) (being carried about like on the lap or the back of a nurse, as expln at Vism 28 = VbhA 483). The readings are different, thus we find ˚bhaṭyatā at Vbh 240; VbhA 338, 483; ˚bhatyatā at Vism 17, 23, 27 (vv. ll. ˚bhaṭṭatā & ˚bbhaṭṭatā); ˚bhaṭṭakatā at Miln 370; ˚bhaṭṭatā at Vbh 352; KhA 236; Nd2 39. The more det. expln at VbhA 338 is "alankāra -- karaṇ' ādīhi dāraka -- kīḷāpanaŋ etaŋ adhivacanaŋ." -- See stock phrase under mugga -- sūpyatā. -- 455 -- Pāribhogika
Pāribhogika
(adj.) [fr. paribhoga] belonging to use or enjoyment, with ref. to relics of personal use J iv.228 (one of the 3 cetiyas, viz. sarīrika, pāribhogika, uddesika); Miln 341 (id.). Pārivattaka
Pārivattaka
(adj.) = pari˚; changing, turning round (of cīvara) Vin iv.59, 60. Pārivāsika=pari˚
Pārivāsika
= pari˚ (a probationer), Vin i.136; ii.31 sq., where distinguished from a pakatatta bhikkhu, a regular, ordained bh. to whom a pārivāsika is inferior in rank. Pārisajja
Pārisajja
[fr. parisā] belonging to an assembly, pl. the members of an assembly, esp. those who sit in council, councillors (cp. BSk. pāriṣadya councillor Divy 291) Vin i.348; D i.136; iii.64, 65; M i.326; S i.145, 222; A i.142; Miln 234; DA i.297. Pārisuddhi
Pārisuddhi
(f.) [fr. parisuddha] purity Vin i.102, 136 (cp. Vin. Texts i.242, 280); M iii.4; A ii.194 sq. (˚padhāniy' angāni, the four, viz. sīlapārisuddhi, citta˚, diṭṭhi˚, vimutti˚); Nd1 475; Ps i.42 (˚sīla); Dhs 165; Miln 336 (ājīva˚, and in 4th jhāna); Vism 30 ( = parisuddhatā), 46 (˚sīla), 278; DhA iii.399 (catu˚ -- sīla); iv.111 (ājīva˚); Sdhp 342. Pārihāriya
Pārihāriya
(adj.) [fr. parihāra] connected with preserva- tion or attention, fostering, keeping Vism 3 (˚paññā), 98 (˚kammaṭṭhāna); SnA 54 (id.). Pāruta
Pāruta
[pp. of pārupati] covered, dressed S i.167, 175; Th 1, 153; J i.59, 347; SnA 401; PvA 48, 161. -- duppāruta not properly dressed (without the upper robe) Vin i.44; ii.212; S ii.231, 271. See also abhipāruta. Note. The form apāruta is apparently only a neg. pāruta, in reality it is apa+ā+vṛta. Pārupati
Pārupati
[metathesis fr. pāpurati = Sk. prāvṛṇoti, pra+ vṛ; see also pāpurati etc.] to cover, dress, hide, veil D i.246; Vin iv.283; M iii.94; S ii.281; J ii.24, 109; Pv ii.112 (=nivāseti PvA 147); Mhvs 22, 67; Vism 18; DhA iii.325; VvA 44, 127; PvA 73, 74, 77. -- pp. pāruta (q. v.). Pārupana
Pārupana
(nt.) [fr. pārupati] covering, clothing; dress J i.126, 378; iii.82; Miln 279; DhA i.70, 164; PvA 74, 76. Pāreti
Pāreti
[Denom. fr. pāra; cp. Lat. portare] to make go through, to bore through, pierce, break (?) J iii.185 (reading uncertain). Pārevata
Pārevata
[the Prk. form (cp. Māgadhi pārevaya) of the Sk. pārāpata, which appears also as such in P.] 1. a dove, pigeon A i.162 (dove -- coloured); Vv 363 (˚akkhi = pārāpat' akkhi VvA 167); J vi.456. -- 2. a species of tree, Diospyros embryopteris J vi.529, 539. Pāroha
Pāroha
[fr. pra+ruh, cp. Sk. *prāroha] 1. a small (side) branch, new twig (of a Nigrodha tree) J v.8, 38, 472; vi.199; SnA 304; PvA 113. -- 2. a shoot, sprout (from the root of a tree, tillering) S i.69 (see C. expln at K.S. 320); J vi.15; DhA ii.70; VbhA 475; 476. Pāla
Pāla
( -- ˚) [fr. pā, see pāleti] a guard, keeper, guardian, protector S i.185 (vihāra˚); J v.222 (dhamma˚); VvA 288 (ārāma˚); Sdhp 285. See also go˚, loka˚. Pālaka
Pālaka
( -- ˚) [fr. pā] a guardian, herdsman M i.79; S iii.154; A iv.127; J iii.444. Pālana
Pālana
(nt.) (& pālanā?) [fr. pāleti 2, to all likelihood for palāyana through *pālāna, with false analogy] moving, running, keeping going, living, in phrase vutti pālana yapana etc. at Vism 145; DhsA 149 167; also in defn of bhuñjati1 as "pālan' ajjhohāresu" by eating & drinking for purposes of living, at Dhtp 379. As pālanā at the Dhs passages of same context as above (see under yapana). Pālanā
Pālanā
(f.) [fr. pāleti cp. Ep. Sk. pālana nt.] guarding, keeping J i.158; Dhs 19, 82,295. Pāli (Pāḷi)
Pāli
(Pāḷi) (f.) [cp. Sk. pālī a causeway, bridge Halāyudha iii.54] 1. a line, row Dāvs iii.61; iv.3; Vism 242 (dvattiŋs' ākāra˚), 251 (danta˚); SnA 87. -- 2. a line, norm, thus the canon of Buddhist writings; the text of the Pāli Canon, i. e. the original text (opp. to the Commentary; thus "pāliyaŋ" is opposed to "aṭṭhakathāyaŋ" at Vism 107, 450, etc). It is the literary language of the early Buddhists, closely related to Māgadhī. See Grierson, The Home of Lit. Pāli (Bhandarkar Commemoration vol. p. 117 sq.), and literature given by Winternitz, Gesch. d. Ind. Litt., ii.10; iii.606, 635. The word is only found in Commentaries, not in the Piṭaka. See also Hardy, Introd. to Nett, p. xi. -- J iv.447 (˚nayena accord. to the Pāli Text); Vism 376 (˚nay' anusārena id.), 394, 401, 565 (˚anusārato accord. to the text of the Canon); 607, 630, 660 sq., 693, 712; KhA 41; SnA 333, 424, 519, 604; DhsA 157, 168; DhA iv.93; VvA 117, 203 (pālito+aṭṭhuppattito); PvA 83, 87, 92, 287; and freq. elsewhere.

-- vaṇṇanā is explanation of the text (as regards meaning of words), purely textual criticism, as opposed to vinicchaya -- kathā analysis, exegesis, interpretation of sense Vbh 291; Vism 240 (contrasted to bhāvanāniddesa). Pāliguṇṭhima
Pāliguṇṭhima
(adj.) [doubtful, fr pali+guṇṭh, see pali- guṇṭhita; hapax legomenon] covered round (of sandals) Vin i.186 (Vin. Texts ii.15: laced boots); v. l. BB ˚gunṭhika. Pālicca
Pālicca
(nt.) [fr. palita] greyness of hair M i.49; S ii.2, 42; A iii.196; Dhs 644, 736, 869; VbhA 98. Pālibhaddaka
Pālibhaddaka
[fr. palibhadda = pari+bhadda, very aus- picious] the tree Butea frondosa J iv.205; Nd2 680Aii; Vism 256 (˚aṭṭhi); VbhA 239 (id.); KhA 46, 53; DhsA 14; DhA i.383. As phālibhaddaka ( -- vana) at J ii.162 (v. l. pātali˚). Pāleti
Pāleti
[cp. (Epic) Sk. pālayati, fr. pā] 1. to protect, guard, watch, keep Sn 585; J i.55; iv.127; vi.589; Miln 4 (paṭhavī lokaŋ pāleti, perhaps in meaning "keeps, holds, encircles," similar to meaning 2); Sdhp 33. -> 2. (lit. perhaps "to see through safely"; for palāyati by false analogy) to go on, to move, to keep going, in defn of carati as viharati, iriyati, vattati, pāleti, yapeti, yāpeti at Nd2 237; Vbh 252; DhsA 167. Cp. pālana. So also in phrase atthaŋ pāleti (so read for paleti?) "to come home" i. e. to disappear Sn 1074 (see expld Nd2 28). See other refs. under palāyati. -> pp. pālita. See also abhi˚ & pari˚. A contracted (poetical) form is found as pallate at J v.242, expld by C. as pālayati (pālayate), used as Med. -- Pass. Pāvaka
Pāvaka
(adj. n.) [fr. pu, Vedic pāvaka] 1. (adj.) pure, bright, clear, shining J v.419. -- 2. (m.) the fire S i.69; A iv.97; Dh 71, 140; J iv.26; v.63 ( = kaṇha -- vattanin) vi.236 (=aggi C.); Pv i.85; Vism 170 (=aggi). Pāvacana
Pāvacana
(nt.) [pa+vacana, with lengthening of first a (see Geiger, P.Gr. § 331)] a word, esp. the word of the Buddha D i,88; S ii.259; Th 1, 587; 2, 457. Pāvadati
Pāvadati
[ = pavadati] to speak out, to tell, show J ii.439; Pv iv.148; PvA 118. -- 456 -- Pāvassi
Pāvassi
see pavassati. Pāvāra
Pāvāra
[fr. pa+vṛ] 1. a cloak, mantle Vin i.281; J v.409 (expld as pavara -- dibba -- vattha!). -- 2. the mango tree KhA 58 (˚puppha; Vism 258 at id. p. has pāvāraka˚). Pāvārika
Pāvārika
[fr. pāvāra] a cloak -- seller (?) Vin iv.250. Pāvāḷa
Pāvāḷa
[see pavāḷa] hair; only in cpd. ˚nipphoṭanā pulling out one's hair S iv.300. Pāvisa & Pāvekkhi
Pāvisa
& Pāvekkhi see pavisati. Pāvuraṇa
Pāvuraṇa
(nt.) [fr. pa+ā+vṛ; see pāpuraṇa & pārupana] cloak, mantle M i.359; Vin iv.255, 289; ThA 22. Pāvusa
Pāvusa
[pa+vṛṣ, cp. Vedic prāvṛṣa & pravarṣa] 1. rain, the rainy season (its first 2 months) Th 1, 597; J v.202, 206. -- 2. a sort of fish J iv.70 (gloss pāgusa, q. v.). Pāvussaka
Pāvussaka
(adj.) [fr. pāvusa] raining, shedding rain M. i.306; S v.51; A iv.127; J i.95, 96; Miln 114. Pāsa
Pāsa1
[Vedic pāśa] a sling, snare, tie, fetter S i.105, 111; A ii.182; iv.197; Vin iv.153 (? hattha˚); Sn 166; It 36 (Māra˚); J iii.184; iv.414; PvA 206. On its frequent use in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 111. Pāsa
Pāsa2
[Class. Sk. prāsa fr. pra+as] a spear, a throw Sn 303; A iv.171 (kuṭhāri˚ throw of an axe). -- asi˚ a class of deities Miln 191. Pāsa
Pāsa3
(a stone?) at PvA 63 (pās' antare) is probably a misreading and to be corrected to palāsa (palās' antare, similarly to rukkh' antare, kaṭṭh' -- and mūl' antare), foliage. Pāsaŋsa
Pāsaŋsa
(adj.) [grd. fr. pasaŋsati with pā for pa as in similar formations (see pāmokkha)] to be praised; praiseworthy M i.15, 404; ii.227 (dasa ˚ṭṭhānāni); A v.129 (id.); J iii.493; Pv iv.713; Nett 52. Pāsaka
Pāsaka1
[fr. pāsa1] a bow, for the dress Vin ii.136; for the hair Th 2, 411 (if Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 45, 46, is right to be corr. fr. pasāda). Pāsaka
Pāsaka2
[fr. pāsa2] a throw, a die J vi.281. Pāsaka
Pāsaka3
lintel Vin ii.120 = 148 (see Vin. Texts iii.144). Pāsaṇḍa
Pāsaṇḍa
[cp. late Sk. pāṣaṇḍa] heresy, sect S i.133, A ii.466; Th 2, 183 Miln 359; ThA 164. -- ˚ika heretic, sectarian Vin iv.74. Pāsati
Pāsati
(?) only in "sammaŋ pāsanti" at SnA 321 as expln of sammāpāsa (q. v.). Pāsāṇa
Pāsāṇa
[Epic Sk. pāṣāṇa] a rock, stone A i.283; Sn 447; J i.109, 199; v.295; Vism 28, 182, 183; VbhA 64 (its size as cpd with pabbata); DhA iii.151; DhsA 389; VvA 157; Sdhp 328.

-- guḷa a ball of (soft) stone, used for washing (pumice stone?) A ii.200 (sāla -- laṭṭhiŋ . . . taccheyya . . . likheyya . . . pāsāṇaguḷena dhopeyya . . . nadiŋ patāreyya), cp. M i.233; and Vism 28 "bhājane ṭhapitaŋ guḷapiṇḍaŋ viya pāsāṇaŋ." -- cetiya a stone Caitya DhA iii.253. -- tala a natural plateau J i.207. -- piṭṭhe at the back of a rock Vism 116. -- pokkharaṇī a natural tank Vism 119. -- phalaka a slab of stone J iv.328. -- macchaka a kind of fish (stone -- fish) J iv.70; vi.450. -- lekha writing on a stone Pug 32. -- sakkharā a little stone, fragment of rock S ii.137; A iv.237. -- sevāla stone Vallisneria J v.462. -- vassa rain of stones SnA 224. Pāsāṇaka
Pāsāṇaka
= pāsāṇa Vin ii.211. Pāsāda
Pāsāda
[pa+ā+sad, cp. Class. Sk. prāsāda] a lofty plat- form, a building on high foundations, a terrace, palace Vin i.58, 96, 107, 239; ii.128, 146, 236 (cp. Vin. Texts i.174; iii.178); D ii.21; S i.137; A i.64; Sn 409; It 33; Pv ii.125; J ii.447; iv.153 (pillars); v.217; Vism 339 (˚tala); DhsA 107; SnA 502; ThA 253, 286; VvA 197; PvA 23, 75, 279 (cp. upari˚); Sdhp 299. -- satta -- bhū- maka˚ a tower with 7 platforms J i.227, 346; iv.323, 378; v.426, 577. The Buddha's 3 castles at D ii.21; A i.145; J vi.289. See also J.P.T.S. 1907, 112 (p. in similes). Pāsādika
Pāsādika
(adj.) [fr. pasāda] 1. pleasing, pleasant, lovely, amiable Vin iv.18; D iii.141; S i.95; ii.279; A ii.104 sq., 203; iii.255 sq.; DhA i.119; ThA 266, 281; DA i.141, 281; VvA 6; PvA 46, 186, 187, 261. -- samanta˚ lovely throughout A i.24; v.11. -- 2. comfortable Vism 105. Pāsāvin
Pāsāvin
(adj.) [fr. pasavati] bringing forth S v.170; J i.394. Pāsuka
Pāsuka
[for the usual phāsuka] a rib Vin ii.266. (loop? Rh.D.). Pāsuḷa
Pāsuḷa
[for phāsuka] a rib Vin iii.105. Pāssati
Pāssati
fat. of pibati (for pivissati). Pāhuna
Pāhuna
(m. nt.) [fr. pa+ā+hu, see also āhuna & der.] 1. (m.) a guest A iii.260; J vi.24, 516. -- 2. (nt.) meal for a guest D i.97 = M ii.154; Vism 220; DA i.267. Pāhunaka
Pāhunaka
(m. -- nt.) [fr. pāhuna] 1. (m.) a guest J i.197; iv.274; Miln 107; DA i.267, 288; DhA ii.17. -- 2. (nt.) meal for a guest S i.114. Pāhuṇeyya
Pāhuṇeyya
(adj.) [fr. pāhuna, see also āhuneyya] worthy of hospitality, deserving to be a guest D iii.5; S i.220; ii.70; A ii.56; iii.36, 134, 248, 387; iv.13 sq.; v.67, 198; It 88; Vism 220. Pāhuneyyaka
Pāhuneyyaka
= pāhuṇeyya J iii.440. Pāheti
Pāheti
[secondary form. after aor. pāhesi fr. pahiṇati] to send J i.447; Miln 8; PvA 133. Pi
Pi
(indecl.) [the enclitic form of api (cp. api 2a); on simi- larities in Prk. see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 143] emphatic particle, as prefix only in pidahati and pilandhati, where api˚ also is found (cp. api 1b). -- 1. also, and also, even so D i.1; Vin iv.139 (cara pi re get away with you: see re); J i.151, 278. -- 2. even, just so; with numbers or num. expressions "altogether, in all, just that many" J i.151; iii.275; iv.142. -- cattāro pi J iii.51; ubho pi J i.223; sabbe pi Sn 52; J i.280. -> 3. but, however, on the other hand, now (continuing a story) J i.208; iv.2. -- 4. although, even if J ii.110 (ciram pi kho . . . ca although for a long time . . . yet). -- 5. perhaps, it is time that, probably Sn 43; J i.151; ii.103. -- 6. pi . . . pi in correlation (like api . . . api): (a) both . . . and; very often untranslatable Sn 681 (yadā pi . . . tadā pi when . . . then), 808 (diṭṭhā pi sutā pi); J i.222 (jale pi thale pi); (b) either . . . or J i.150; ii.102. Piŋsa
Piŋsa
[pp. of piŋsati2] crushed, ground, pounded DhA iii.184 (v. l. piṭṭha, perhaps preferable). Piŋsati
Piŋsati1
[piś or piŋś, cp. Vedic piŋśati, with two bases viz. Idg. *peig, as in P. piñjara & pingala; Lat. pingo to paint, embroider; and *peik, as in Sk. piŋśati, peśaḥ; Av. paes -- to embellish; Gr. poiki/los many -- coloured; Goth. fēh, Ags. fāh id. See detail in Walde, Lat. Wtb. under pingo] to adorn, form, embellish; orig. to prick, cut. Perhaps piŋsare (3. pl. med.) J v.202 belongs here, in meaning "tinkle, sound" (lit. prick), expld in C. by viravati. Other der. see under pingala. piñjara, pesakāra. Piŋsati
Piŋsati2
[piṣ or piŋṣ, Vedic pinaṣṭi, cp. Lat. pinso to grind, pīla = pestle, pistillum=pistil; Lith. paisýti to pound barley; Gr. pti/ssw id.; Ohg. fesa= Nhg. fese] 1. to grind, crush, pound J i.452; ii.363; iv.3 (matthakaŋ), 440 (akaluñ candanañ ca silāya p.); Miln 43; DhA iii.184 (gandhe piŋsissati; BB pisissati). -- 2. to knock against each other, make a sound J v.202: see piŋsati1. -- pp. piŋsa & piṭṭha1. See also pisati and paṭi˚. -- 457 -- Pinka
Pinka
[for pinga yellow, brownish, tawny] a young shoot, sprout J iii.389 (v. l. singa, which also points to pinga; expld by pavāla). Pinga
Pinga
see pinka. Pingala
Pingala
(adj.) [see piŋsati1, cp. Vedic pingala] 1. reddish- yellow, brown, tawny S i.170; J vi.199 ( = pingiya). -> 2. red -- eyed, as sign of ugliness J iv.245 (as Np.; combd with nikkhanta -- dāṭha); v.42 (tamba -- dāṭhika nibbiddha -- pingala); Pv ii.41 (=˚locana PvA 90; +kaḷāra -- danta).

-- kipillaka the red ant DhA iii.206. -- cakkhutā redeyedness PvA 250. -- makkhikā the gadfly J iii.263 ( = ḍaŋsa) Nd2 268=SnA 101 (id.); SnA 33 (where a distinction is made between kāṇa -- makkhikā and pingala˚), 572 (=ḍaŋsa). Pingiya
Pingiya
(adj.) [fr. Vedic pinga] reddish -- brown, yellow J vi.199. Pingulā
Pingulā
(f.) [a var. of Sk. pingalā, a kind of owl] a species of bird J vi.538. Picu
Picu1
[cp. Class. Sk. picu] cotton Vin i.271; usually in cpds, either as kappāsa˚ S v.284, 443, or tūla˚ S v.284, 351 (T. thula˚), 443; J v.480 (T. tula˚).

-- paṭala membrane or film of cotton Vism 445. -- manda the Nimb or Neem tree Azadizachta Indica Pv iv.16 (cp. PvA 220); the usual P. form is pucimanda (q. v.). Picu
Picu2
[etym. unknown, prob. Non -- Aryan] a wild animal, said to be a kind of monkey J vi.537. Piccha
Piccha
(nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. piccha & puccha tail, to Lat. pinna, E. fin. Ger. finne] tail -- feather, esp. of the peacock Vin i.186 (mora˚). -- dve˚ (& de˚) having two tail -- feathers J v.339, 341 (perhaps to be taken as "wing" here, cp. Halāyudha 2, 84 = pakṣa). Cp. piñcha & piñja. Picchita
Picchita
in su˚ J v.197 is not clear, C. expl5 by suphassita, i. e. pleasing, beautiful, desirable, thus dividing su -- picch˚. Picchila
Picchila
(adj.) [cp. Class. Sk. picchila] slippery Vism 264; VbhA 247 (lasikā = p -- kuṇapaŋ); DhA iii.4 (˚magga). Piñcha
Piñcha
= piccha, i. e. tail -- feather, tail Vin ii.130 (mora˚). Cp. piñja. Piñja
Piñja
(nt.) [ = piccha] a (peacock's) tail -- feather J i.38 (mora˚ kalāpa), 207 (=pekkhuṇa); iii.226 (BB piccha & miccha); DA i.41 (mora˚); DhA i.394 (id.); VvA 147 (mayūra˚; BB piñcha, SS pakkha); PvA 142 (mora˚ kalāpa). Piñjara
Piñjara
[cp. Class. Sk. piñjara; for etym. see piŋsati1] of a reddish colour, tawny J i.93; DA i.245; VvA 165, 288.

-- odaka fruit of the esculent water plant Trapa Bispinosa J vi.563 (v. l. ciñcarodaka), expld by singhāṭaka. Piñjita
Piñjita
(adj.) [fr. piŋsati1, cp. Sk. piñjana] tinged, dyed Miln 240. On expression see Kern, Toev. s. v. Piññāka
Piññāka
(nt.) [to piŋsati2, cp. Class. Sk. piṇyāka] ground sesamum, flour of oil -- seeds M i.78, 342; Vin iv.341. (p. nāma tilapiṭṭhaŋ vuccati); VvA 142 (tila˚ seed cake); PvA 48.

-- bhakkha feeding on flour of oil -- seeds D i.166; A i.241, 295; ii.206; Nd1 417; Pug 55. Piṭaka
Piṭaka
[cp. Epic Sk. piṭaka, etym. not clear. See also P. peḷā & peḷikā] 1. basket Vin i 225 (ghaṭa p. ucchanga), 240 (catudoṇika p.); Pv iv.333; Vism 28 (piṭake nikkhitta -- loṇa -- maccha -- phāla -- sadisaŋ phaṇaŋ); dhañña˚ a grain -- basket DhA iii.370; vīhi˚ a rice basket DhA iii.374. Usually in combn kuddāḷa -- piṭaka "hoe and basket," wherever the act of digging is referred to, e. g. Vin iii.47; D i.101; M i.127; S ii.88; v.53; A i.204; ii.199; J i.225, 336; DA i.269. -- 2. (fig.) t.t. for the 3 main divisions of the Pāli Canon "the three baskets (basket as container of tradition Winternitz, Ind. Lit. ii.8; cp. peḷā 2) of oral tradition," viz. Vinaya˚, Suttanta˚, Abhidhamma˚; thus mentioned by name at PvA 2; referred to as "tayo piṭakā" at J i.118; Vism 96 (pañca -- nikāya -- maṇḍale tīṇi piṭakāni parivatteti), 384 (tiṇṇaŋ Vedānaŋ uggahaṇaŋ, tiṇṇaŋ Piṭakānaŋ uggahaṇaŋ); SnA 110, 403; DhA iii.262; iv.38; cp. Divy 18, 253, 488. With ref. to the Vinaya mentioned at Vin v.3. -- Piṭaka is a later collective appellation of the Scriptures; the first division of the Canon (based on oral tradition entirely) being into Sutta and Vinaya (i. e. the stock paragraphs learnt by heart, and the rules of the Order). Thus described at D ii.124; cp. the expression bhikkhu suttantika vinayadhara Vin ii.75 (earlier than tepiṭaka or piṭakadhara). Independently of this division we find the designation "Dhamma" applied to the doctrinal portions; and out of this developed the 3rd Piṭaka, the Abhidhammap. See also Dhamma C. 1. -- The Canon as we have it comes very near in language and contents to the canon as established at the 3rd Council in the time of King Asoka. The latter was in Māgadhī. -- The knowledge of the 3 Piṭakas as an accomplishment of the bhikkhu is stated in the term tepīṭaka "one who is familiar with the 3 P." (thus at Miln 18; Dāvs v.22; KhA 41 with v. l. ti˚; SnA 306 id.; DhA iii.385). tipetakī (Vin v.3 Khemanāma t.), tipeṭaka (Miln 90), and tipiṭaka -- dhara KhA 91. See also below ˚ttaya. In BSk. we find the term trepiṭaka in early inscriptions (1st century a.d., see e. g. Vogel, Epigraphical discoveries at Sārnāth, Epigraphia Indica viii. p. 173, 196; Bloch, J. As. Soc. Bengal 1898, 274, 280); the term tripiṭaka in literary documents (e. g. Divy 54), as also tripiṭa (e. g. AvŚ i.334; Divy 261, 505). -- On the Piṭakas in general & the origin of the P. Canon see Oldenberg, in ed. of Vin 1; and Winternitz, Gesch. d. Ind. Litt. 1913, ii.1 sq.; iii.606, 635. -- Cp. peṭaka.

-- ttaya the triad of the Piṭakas or holy Scriptures SnA 328. -- dhara one who knows (either one or two or all three) the Piṭaka by heart, as eka˚, dvi˚, ti˚ at Vism 62, 99. -- sampadāya according to the P. tradition or on the ground of the authority of the P. M i.520 (itihītiha etc.); ii.169 (id.); and in exegesis of itikirā (hearsay -- tradition) at A i.189 = ii.191=Nd2 151. Piṭṭha
Piṭṭha1
(nt.) [pp. of piŋsati2. cp. Sk. piṣṭa] what is ground, grindings, crushed seeds, flour. Vin i.201, 203; iv.261, 341 (tila˚ = piññāka); J ii.244 (māsa˚). As piṭṭhi at J i.347.

-- khādaniya "flour -- eatables," i. e. pastry Vin i.248 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.139). -- dhītalikā a flour -- doll, i. e. made of paste or a lump of flour PvA 16, 19 (cp. uddāna to the 1st vagga p. 67 piṭṭhi & reading piṇḍa˚ on p. 17). -- piṇḍi a lump of flour Vism 500 (in comp.). -- madda flour paste Vin ii.151 (expld in C. by piṭṭha -- khali; cp. piṭṭhi -- madda J iii.226, which would correspond to piṣṭī). -- surā (intoxicating) extract or spirits of flour VvA 73. Piṭṭha
Piṭṭha2
(nt.) [identical in form with piṭṭha3] a lintel (of a door) Vin i.47 (kavāṭa˚); ii.120 (˚sanghāṭa, cp. Vin. Texts iii.105), 148, 207. Piṭṭha
Piṭṭha3
(nt.) [cp. Vedic pṛṣṭha, expld by Grassmann as pra -- stha, i. e. what stands out] back, hind part; also surface, top J i.167 (pāsāṇa˚ top of a rock). Usually in oblique cases as adv., viz. instr. piṭṭhena along, over, beside, by way of, on J ii.111 (udaka˚); iv.3 (samudda˚), loc. piṭṭhe by the side of, near, at: parikhā˚ at a ditch PvA 201; on, on top of, on the back of (animals): ammaṇassa p. J vi.381 (cp. piṭṭhiyaŋ); tiṇa˚ J iv.444; panka˚ J i.223; samudda˚ J i.202. -- assa˚ on horseback D i.103; similarly: vāraṇassa p. J i.358; sīha˚ J ii.244; haṭṭhi˚ J ii.244; iii.392. See also following. -- 458 -- Piṭṭhi & Piṭṭhī
Piṭṭhi
& Piṭṭhī (f.) [ = piṭṭha3, of which it has taken over the main function as noun. On relation piṭṭha> piṭṭhi cp. Trenckner, Notes 55; Franke, Bezzenberger's Beiträge xx.287. Cp. also the Prk. forms piṭṭha, piṭṭhī & piṣṭī, all representing Sk. prṣṭḥa: Pischel, Prk. Gram. §53] 1. the back Vin ii.200 (piṭṭhī); M i.354; J i.207; ii.159, 279. piṭṭhiŋ (paccāmittassa) passati to see the (enemy's) back, i. e. to see the last of somebody J i.296, 488; iv.208. piṭṭhi as opposed to ura (breast) at Vin ii.105; Sn 609; as opposed to tala (palm) with ref. to hand & foot: hattha (or pada -- ) tala & ˚piṭṭhi: J iv.188; Vism 361. -- abl. piṭṭhito as adv. (from) behind, at the back of Sn 412 (+anubandhati to follow closely); VvA 256; PvA 78 (geha˚). piṭṭhito karoti to leave behind, to turn one's back on J i.71 (cp. pṛṣṭhato -- mukha Divy 333). piṭṭhito piṭṭhito right on one's heels, very closely Vin i.47; D i.1, 226. -- 2. top, upper side (in which meaning usually piṭṭha3), only in cpd. ˚pāsāṇa and loc. piṭṭhiyaŋ as adv. on top of J v.297 (ammaṇa˚) piṭṭhi at VvA 101 is evidently faulty reading.

-- ācariya teacher's understudy, pupil -- teacher, tutor J ii.100; v.458, 473, 501. -- kaṇṭaka spina dorsi, backbone M i.58, 80, 89; iii.92; Vism 271; VbhA 243; KhA 49 sq.; Sdhp 102. -- koṭṭhaka an upper room (bath room?) DhA ii.19, 20. -- gata following behind, foll. one's example Vism 47. -- paṇṇasālā a leaf -- hut at the back J vi.545. -- parikamma treating one's back (by rubbing) Vin ii.106. -- passe (loc.) at the back of, behind J i.292; PvA 55, 83, 106. -- pāda the back of the foot, lit. foot -- back, i. e. the heel Vism 251; KhA 51, (˚aṭṭhika); DA i.254. -- pāsāṇa a flat stone or rock, plateau, ridge J i.278; ii.352; vi.279; DhA ii.58; VbhA 5, 266. -- bāha the back of the arm, i. e. elbow (cp. ˚pāda) KhA 49, 50 (˚aṭṭhi): -- maŋsa the flesh of the back PvA 210; SnA 287. -- maŋsika backbiting, one who talks behind a person's back Sn 244 ( = ˚maŋsakhādaka C.); J ii.186 (of an unfair judge); v.1; Pv iii.97 (BB; T. ˚aka). As ˚maŋsiya at J v.10. -- maŋsikȧtā backbiting Nd2 39. -- roga back -- ache SnA 111. -- vaŋsa back bone, a certain beam in a building DhA i.52. Piṭṭhika
Piṭṭhika
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. piṭṭhi] having a back, in dīgha˚ with a long back or ridge Sn 604; mudu˚ having a flexible back Vin iii.35. Piṭṭhikā
Piṭṭhikā
(f.) = piṭṭhi; loc. piṭṭhikāya at the back of, behind J i.456 (maṇḍala˚). Piṭṭhimant
Piṭṭhimant
(adj.) [fr. piṭṭhi] having a back, in f. piṭṭhi- matī (senā) (an army) having troops on (horse -- or, elephant -- ) back J vi.396. Piṭhara
Piṭhara
(m. & nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. piṭhara] a pot, a pan Miln 107 (spelt pīthara). As piṭharaka [cp. BSk. piṭharikā Divy 496; so read for T. piparikā] at KhA 54 to be read for T. pivaraka according to App. SnA 869. Piṇḍa
Piṇḍa
[cp. Vedic piṇḍa; probably connected with piṣ i. e. crush, grind, make into a lump; Grassmann compares pīḍ to press; on other attempts at etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. puls] 1. a lump, ball, thick (& round) mass S i.206 (aṭṭhīyaka˚); Pv iii.55 (nonīta˚); VvA 62 (kummāsa˚), 65; Sdhp 529 (ayo˚). -- 2. a lump of food, esp. of alms, alms given as food S i.76; Sn 217, 388, 391; J i.7 (nibbuta˚ cooled); Miln 243 (para ˚ŋ ajjhupagata living on food given by others). piṇḍāya (dat.) for alms, freq. in combn with carati, paṭikkamati, (gāmaŋ) pavisati, e. g. Vin ii.195; iii.15; M iii.157; Sn 386; SnA 141, 175; PvA 12, 13, 16, 47, 81, 136 and passim. -- 3. a conglomeration, accumulation, compressed form, heap, in akkhara˚ sequence of letters or syllables, context DhA iv.70.

-- attha condensed meaning, résumé J i.233, 275, 306; KhA 124, 192. Cp. sampiṇḍanattha. -- ukkhepakaŋ in the manner of taking up lumps (of food), a forbidden way of eating Vin ii.214 = iv.195, cp. Vin. Texts i.64 (=piṇḍaŋ piṇḍaŋ ukkhipitvā C.). -- gaṇanā counting in a lump, summing up DA i.95. -- cāra alms -- round, wandering for alms Sn 414. -- cārika one who goes for alms, begging Vin ii.215; iii.34, 80; iv.79; J i.116; VvA 6. -- dāyika (& ˚dāvika) one who deals out food (as occupation of a certain class of soldiers) D i.51 (˚dāvika); A iv.107 (v. l. ˚dāyaka); Miln 331; cp. DA i.156. See also Geiger, P.Gr. 46, 1; Rh. D. Dial. i.68 (trsl. "camp -- follower"); Franke, Dīgha trsl. 531 trsl. "Vorkämpfer" but recommends trsl. "Klossverteiler" as well). -- dhītalikā a doll made of a lump of dough, or of pastry PvA 17; cp. piṭṭha˚. -- paṭipiṇḍa (kamma) giving lump after lump, alms for alms, i. e. reciprocatory begging J ii.82 (piṇḍa -- paṭipiṇḍena jīvikaŋ kappesuŋ), 307 (piṇḍapāta -- paṭipiṇḍena jīvikaŋ kappenti); v.390 (mayaŋ piṇḍa -- paṭipiṇḍa -- kammaŋ na karoma). -- pāta food received in the alms -- bowl (of the bhikkhu), alms -- gathering (on term see Vism 31 yo hi koci āhāro bhikkhuno piṇḍolyena patte patitattā piṇḍapāto ti vuccati, and cp. BSk. piṇḍapāta -- praviṣṭha AvŚ i.359; piṇḍapāta -- nirhāraka Divy 239) Vin i.46; ii.32 (˚ŋ nīharāpeti), 77, 198, 223; iii.80, 99; iv.66 sq., 77; M iii.297; S i.76, 92; A i.240; ii.27, 143; iii.109, 145 sq.; v.100; Sn 339; J i.7, 149, 212, 233; Pug 59; Vism 31, 60; VbhA 279 (˚âpacāyana); SnA 374; PvA 11 sq., 16, 38, 240. -- pātika one who eats only food received in the alms -- bowl; ˚anga is one of the dhutanga ordinances (see dhutanga) Vin i.253; ii.32 (˚anga), 299 (+paŋsukūlika); iii.15 (id.); M i.30; iii.41; A iii.391; Pug 59, 69; SnA 57 (˚dhutanga). -- piṇḍapātika bhikkhu a bh. on his alms -- round Vism 246 (in simile); VbhA 229 (id.). Cp. BSk. piṇḍapātika AvŚ i.248. -- pātikatta (abstr. to prec.) the state of eating alms -- food, a characteristic of the Buddhist bhikkhu M iii.41; S ii.202, 208 sq.; A i.38; iii.109. Piṇḍaka
Piṇḍaka
[fr. piṇḍa] (alms) -- food A iv.185 (SS piṇḍapāta); in phrase na piṇḍakena kilamati not go short of food Vin iii.15, 87; iv.23, in ukka -- piṇḍaka meaning a cluster of msects or vermin Vin i.211 = 239 (v. l. piṇḍuka). Piṇḍi
Piṇḍi
(f.) [cp. piṇḍa & Sk. piṇḍī] a lump, round mass, ball, cluster D i.74 = A iii.25 (nahāniya˚ ball of fragrant soap; DA i.218: piṇḍa); M iii.92; J i.76 (phala˚); ii.393; iii.53 (amba˚); Miln 107; Vism 500 (piṭṭha˚); DhA iii.207 (amba˚). Piṇḍika
Piṇḍika
( -- ˚) in chatta˚ -- vivara is a little doubtful, the phrase prob. means "a crevice in the covering (i. e. the round mass) of the canopy or sunshade" J vi.376. -> Dutoit (J. trsln vi.457) translates "opening at the back of the sunshade," thus evidently reading "piṭṭhika." Piṇḍita
Piṇḍita
(adj.) [pp. of piṇḍeti, cp. BSk. piṇḍitamūlya lump -- sum Divy 500] 1. made into a lump, massed together, conglomerated, thick Th 2, 395. -- 2. "ball-like," close, compact; of sound: J ii.439; vi.519. Pindiyālopa
Pindiyālopa
[piṇḍi+ālopa] a morsel of food Vin i.58 (˚bhojana), 96 (id.); A ii.27; It 102. Piṇḍeti
Piṇḍeti
[Denom. fr. pinḍa] to ball together, mix, put together Pv ii.952 ( = pisana -- vasena yojeti PvA 135). -> pp. piṇḍita. Piṇḍola
Piṇḍola
[etym. unclear] one who seeks alms S iii.93 = It 89; cp. Np. ˚bhāradvāja SnA 346, 514, 570. Piṇḍolya
Piṇḍolya
(nt.) [fr. piṇḍola] asking for alms, alms -- round S iii.93 = It 89; Vism 31. Pitar
Pitar
[Vedic pitṛ, pitar -- ; cp. Gr. path/r; Lat. pater, Jup- piter, Dies -- piter = *zeu\s path/r; Goth. fadar=Ger. vater= E. father; Oir. athir etc. to onomat. syllable *pa -- pa, cp. tāta & mātā] father. -- Cases: sg. nom. pitā S i.182; Dh 43; J v.379; SnA 423; acc. pitaraŋ Dh 294; & pituŋ Cp. ii.93; instr. pitarā J iii.37, pitunā, petyā J v.214; dat. gen. pitu M iii.176; J iv.137; vi.365, 589; & pituno Vin i.17 (cp. Prk. piuṇo); abl. pitarā J v.214; loc. pitari. -- pl. nom. pitaro Sn 404; J iv.1; PvA 38, 54 (mātā˚); acc. pitaro PvA 17, pitare, & pitū Th 2, 433; instr. pitarehi & pitūhi; dat. gen. pitunnaŋ J iii.83; (mātā˚); vi.389 (id.); Pv ii.84; pitūnaŋ It 110; loc. pitusu Th 2, 499; J i.152 (mātā˚); and pitūsu PvA 3 (mātā˚). Further: abl. sg. pitito by the father's side D i.113 (+mātito); A iii.151; J v.214. -- A i.62, 132, 138 sq.; Sn 296, 579 (paralokato na pitā tāyate puttaŋ); Nd2 441 (=yo so janako); J i.412 (=tāta); v.20; VbhA 108 (where pretty popular etym. is given with "piyāyatī ti pitā"), 154 (in simile). -> Of Brahmā: D i.18, cp. DA i.112; of Inda J v.153. There is sometimes a distinction made between the father as such and the grandfather (or ancestors in gen.) with culla˚ (cūḷa˚), i. e. little and mahā˚ i. e. grand -- father, e. g. at J i.115 (+ayyaka); PvA 107. The collective term for "parents" is mātāpitaro (pl. not dual), e. g. Sn 404; J i.152; iii.83; iv.1; PvA 107. On similes of father and son op. J.P.T.S. 1907, 112. In cpds. there are the 3 bases pitā, piti˚ & pitu˚. (a) pitā˚: ˚putta father & son J i.253; pl. ˚puttā fathers & sons, or parents & children J iv.115; vi.84. ˚mahā grandfather Pv ii.84; J ii.263; DA i.281; PvA 41; ˚mahāyuga age of a grandfather (i. e. a generation of ancestors) D i.113 (see det. expln DA i.281=SnA 462); Sn p. 115; KhA 141; petti -- pitā -- mahā great -- grandfathers, all kinds of ancestors J ii.48 (=pitu -- vitā mahā C.). -> (b.) piti˚: ˚kicca duty of a father J v.153; ˚ghāta parricide J iv.45 (BB pitu˚); ˚pakkha father's side DhA i.4; ˚pitāmahā (pl.) fathers & grandfathers, ancestors J v.383; ˚vadha parricide DA i.135. -- (c) pitu˚: ˚ja originating from the father J vi.589 (+mātuja); ˚ghātaka parricide (+mātughātaka) Vin i.88, 136, 168, 320; ˚nāma fathers name SnA 423; ˚pitāmahā (pl.) ancestors (cp. piti˚) A iv.61; J i.2; ii.48. ˚rakkhita guarded by a father M iii.46. ˚santaka father's possession J i.2. ˚hadaya father's heart J i.61. -- 459 -- Pitika
Pitika
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. pitā] one who has a father, having a father VvA 68 (sa˚ together with the f.); PvA 38 (mata˚ whose f. was dead): cp. dve˚ with 2 fathers J v.424. Pitucchā
Pitucchā
(f.) [pitu+svasā, cp. Sk. pitṛ -- ṣvasṛ] father's sister, aunt; decl. similarly to pitā & mātā DhA i.37; acc. sg. pitucchasaŋ [Sk. *svasaŋ instead of *svasāraŋ] J iv.184.

-- dhītā aunt's daughter, i. e. (girl) cousin DhA i.85. -- putta aunt's son, i. e. (boy) cousin S ii.282 (Tisso Bhagavato p.); iii.106 (id.); J ii.119, 324. Pitta
Pitta
(nt.) [cp. Vedic pitta] 1. the bile, gall; the bile also as seat of the bilious temperament, excitement or anger. Two kinds are distinguished at KhA 60 = Vism 260, viz. baddha˚ & abaddha˚, bile as organ & bile as fluid. See also in detail Vism 359; VbhA 65, 243. -- In enumerations of the parts or affections of the body pitta is as a rule combd with semha (cp. Vin ii.137; Kh 111; Vism 260, 344; Miln 298). -- Vin ii.137; M iii.90; S iv.230, 231 (+semha); A ii.87; iii.101, 131; Sn 198 (+semha), 434 (id., expld as the two kinds at SnA 388); Nd1 370; J i.146 (+semha); ii.114 (pittan te kupitaŋ your bile is upset or out of order, i. e. you are in a bad mood); Miln 112 (vāta -- pittasemha . . .), 304 (roga,+semha), 382 (+semha); DhsA 190 (as blue -- green); DhA iii.15 (cittaŋ n' atthi pittaŋ n' atthi has no heart and no bile, i. e. does not feel & get excited; vv. ll. vitta & nimitta). -- 2. [according to Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 4 for *phitta=phīta, Sk. sphīta] swelling, a gathering Vin ii.188 (Vin. Texts iii.237 "a burst gall, i. e. bladder"); S ii.242. The passage is not clear, in C. on Ud i.7 we read cittaŋ, see Morris loc. cit. May the meaning be "muzzle"?

-- kosaka gall -- bladder KhA 61; Vism 263; VbhA 246. Pittika
Pittika
(adj.) [fr. pitta] one who has bile or a bilious humoui, bilious Miln 298 (+semhika). Pittivisaya
Pittivisaya
[Sporadic reading for the usual petti˚] the realm of the departed spirits M i.73; J i.51; Nd1 489. Pittivisayika
Pittivisayika
(adj.) [fr. pittivisaya] belonging to the realm of the departed Nd1 97 (gati; v. l. petti˚). Pithīyatī
Pithīyatī
(pithiyyati) [Pass. of pidahati, cp. api -- dahati, Sk. apidhīyate] to be covered, obscured or obstructed; to close, shut M ii.104; iii.184; Sn 1034, 1035; Nd2 442 (BB pidhiyyati; expld by pacchijjati); Th 1, 872; Dh 173; J i.279 (akkhīni pithīyiŋsu the eyes shut); ii.158 ( = paticchādiyati); vi.432. The spelling of the BB manuscripts is pidhīyati (cp. Trenckner, Notes 62). Pidalaka
Pidalaka
[etym.? Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests diminutive- formation fr. Sk. bidala split bamboo] a small stick, skewer Vin ii.116, cp. Bdhgh on p. 317: "daṇḍakathina -- ppamāṇena kaṭasārakassa pariyante paṭisaŋharitvā duguṇa -- karaṇa." See also Vin Texts iii.94. Pidahati
Pidahati
[api+dhā, cp. apidahati & Prk. piṇidhattae = Sk. apinidhātave] to cover, to close, conceal, shut M i.117, 380 (dvāraŋ); J i.292; iii.26; v.389; Miln 139 (vajjaŋ); DhA i.396; ii.4, 85; iv.197 (ūruŋ); Sdhp 321; aor. pidahi J iv.308 (kaṇṇe); ger. pidahitvā Pv ii.76 (dvāraŋ); Vism 182 (nāsaŋ); DA i.136, pidhatvā Th 2, 480, & pidhāya J i.150 (dvāraŋ), 243 (id.); ThA 286; DhA ii.199 (dvārāni). -- Pass. pithīyati; pp. pihita (q. v.). The opp. of p. is vivarati. Pidahana
Pidahana
(nt.) [fr. api+dhā, cp. apidahana] covering up, shutting, closing Vism 20; DhA iv.85 ( = thakana). Pidhara
Pidhara
[fr. api+dhṛ] a stick (or rag?) for scraping (or wiping?) Vin ii.141 (avalekhana˚), 221 (id.). Meaning doubtful. Pidhāna
Pidhāna
(nt.) [ = pidahana] cover J vi.349. -- ˚phalaka covering board Vism 261 (where KhA in same passage reads paṭikujjana -- phalaka)=VbhA 244. Pināsa
Pināsa
[cp. Sk. pīnasa] cold in the head, catarrh, in enumn of illnesses under dukkha, at Nd2 3041 ≈ (kāsa, sāsa, pināsa, etc.). Pipati
Pipati
[dial. form for pibati, pivati, usually restricted to Gāthā Dial., cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 132] to drink, only in imper. pres. pipa M i.316; S i.459, and ppr. pipaŋ J v.255, gen. pl. pipataŋ Sn 398. Pipāsā
Pipāsā
(f.) [Desid. form. fr. pā, pibati>pipati, lit. desire to drink] 1. thirst Nd2 443 ( = udaka -- pipāsā); Miln 318; VbhA 196 (in comparison); PvA 23, 33, 67 sq.; Sdhp 288. Often combd with khudā (hunger) e. g. Sn 52, 436 (khup˚); PvA 67; or jighacchā (id.), e. g. M i.10; S i.18; A ii.143, 153; Miln 304. -- 2. longing (for food), hunger J ii.319. -- 3. desire, craving, longing D iii.238 (avigata˚); S iii.7, 108, 190; iv.387; A ii.34 (pipāsavinaya; expld at Vism 293); iv.461 sq. Pipāsita
Pipāsita
(adj.) [pp. of pipāsati, Desid. fr. pā, cp. pipāsā] thirsty S i.143; ii.110 (surā˚); J vi.399; Miln 318 (kilantatasita -- p.); Vism 262; PvA 127; Sdhp 151. Pipāsin
Pipāsin
(adj.) [fr. pipāsā] thirsty D ii.265. Pipi
Pipi
(adj.) [fr. pā, see pivati] drinking (?) in su˚ good to drink (?) J vi.326 (v. l. BB sucimant). Or is it "flowing" (cp. Vedic pipiṣvat overflowing)? Pipīlikā
Pipīlikā
(f.) & pipillika [cp. Vedic pipīlikā, pipīlaka & pipīlika; BSk. pipīlaka AvŚ ii.130 (kunta˚). See also kipillikā] ant J iii.276 (BB kipillikā); Sdhp 23; as pipillikā at J i.202. -- 460 -- Pippala
Pippala
[for the usual P. pipphalī, Sk. pippalī] pepper Vin i.201, cp. Vin. Texts ii.46. Pipphala
Pipphala
[cp. Epic Sk. pippala, on ph for p see pipphalī] the fruit of Ficus religiosa, the holy fig tree J vi.518 (Kern's reading, Toev. s. v. for T. maddhu -- vipphala, C. reads madhuvipphala & explns by madhuraphala). Pipphalaka
Pipphalaka
(nt.?) [etym.? BR give Sk. *pippalaka in meaning "thread for sewing"] scissors (? so ed.) DA i.70. Pipphalī
Pipphalī
(f.) [with aspirate ph for p, as in Sk. pippalī, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 62. See also pippala. Etym. loan words are Gr. pe/peri = Lat. piper=E. pepper, Ger. pfeffer] long pepper S v.79; J iii.85; Vv 436; DhA i.258 (˚guhā Npl.); iv.155. Piya
Piya1
(adj.) [Vedic priya, prī, cp. Gr. proprow/n; Goth. frijōn to love, frijonds loving = E. friend; Ger. frei, freund; Ohg. Frīa=Sk. priyā, E. Friday, etc.] dear, in two applications (as stated Nd1 133=Nd2 444, viz. dve piyā: sattā vā piyā sankhārā vā piyā, with ref. to living beings, to sensations): 1. dear, beloved (as father, mother, husband, etc.) S i.210 (also compar. ˚tara); Dh 130, 157, 220; Vism 296, 314 sq.; often combd with manāpa (pleasing, also in 2), e. g. D ii.19; iii.167; J ii.155; iv.132. -- 2. pleasant, agreeable, liked Sn 452, 863: Dh 77, 211; often combd (contrasted) with appiya, e. g. Sn 363, 450 (see also below). nt. piyaŋ a pleasant thing, pleasantry, pleasure S i.189; Sn 450, 811; DhA iii.275. -- appiya unpleasant M i.86; Kh viii.5. appiyatā unpleasantness J iv.32. See also pīti & pema.

-- âpāya separation from what is dear to one, absence of the beloved A iii.57; Dh 211. -- âppiya pleasant & unpleasant D ii.277 (origin of it); Dh 211. -- kamya friendly disposition Vin iv.12. -- ggāhin grasping after pleasure Dh 209, cp. DhA iii.275. -- cakkhu a loving eye D iii.167. -- dassana lovely to behold, goodlooking D iii.167. -- bhāṇin speaking pleasantly, flattering J v.348. -- manāpatā belovedness M i.66. -- rūpa pleasant form, an enticing object of sight D i.152 (cp. DA i.311); S ii.109 sq.; A ii.54; It 95, 114; Sn 337, 1086 (cp. Nd2 445); Vbh 103; Nett 27. -- vacana term of endearment or esteem, used with ref. to āyasmā Nd2 130; SnA 536, etc.; or mārisa SnA 536. -- vācā pleasant speech S i.189; Sn 452. -- vādin speaking pleasantly, affable D i.60 (manāpacārin+); A iii.37; iv.265 sq. -- vippayoga separation from the beloved object Sn 41 (cp. Nd2 444); PvA 161 (here with ref. to the husband); syn. with appiya -- sampayoga, e. g. at Vism 504 sq. Piya
Piya2
[sporadic for phiya, q. v.] oar; usually so in cpd. piyâritta (nt.) oar & rudder S i.103; A ii.201; J iv.164. Piyaka
Piyaka
[cp. Class. Sk. priyaka] a plant going under various names, viz. Nauclea cadamba; Terminalia tomentosa; Vitex trifolia J v.420 ( = setapuppha C.); vi.269. Piyangu
Piyangu
(f.) [cp. Vedio priyangu] 1. panic seed, Panicum Italicum Vv 537; J i.39; PvA 283. Mixed with water and made into a kind of gruel (piyangûdaka) it is used as an emetic J i.419. See also kangu. -- 2. a medicinal plant, Priyangu J v.420. Piyatta
Piyatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. piya1] belovedness, pleasantness A v.164 sq.; Sdhp 66. Piyāyati
Piyāyati
[Denom. fr. piya1] to hold dear, to like, to be fond of (acc.), to be devoted to S i.210; J i.156; ii.246; vi.5; VbhA 108 (in etym. of pitā, q. v.); DhA iv.125; SnA 78; VvA 349; PvA 71. -- pp. piyāyita. Note. A ppr. piyaŋ is found at SnA 169 for Sn 94 adj. piya, and is expld by pīyamāna tussamāna modamāna. Piyāyanā
Piyāyanā
(f.) [fr. piyāyati] love, fondness for (loc.) S i.210. Piyāyita
Piyāyita
[pp. of piyāyati] held dear, fondled, loved, liked Sn 807; Nd1 126. Piyāla
Piyāla
[cp. Class. Sk. priyāla] the Piyal tree, Buchanania latifolia J v.415. -- (nt.) the fruit of this tree, used as food J iv.344; v.324. Pire
Pire
at Vin iv.139 is to be separated (cara pi re get away with you), both pi and re acting as part. of exclamation. The C. expln (p. 362) by "pire (voc.?) = para, amāmaka" is an artificial construction. Pilaka
Pilaka
[cp. Class. Sk. piḍakā] a boil Sn p. 124 (piḷaka, v. l. pilaka); Vism 35 (pīḷaka); DhA i.319 (v. l. piḷaka).-> See also piḷakā. Pilakkha
Pilakkha
[cp. Vedic plakṣa] the wave -- leaved fig tree, Ficus infectoria Vin iv.35; DA i.81. As pilakkhu [cp. Prk. pilakkhu Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 105] at S v.96; J iii.24, 398. Pilandha
Pilandha
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. pilandhati] adorning or adorned Miln 336, 337. Cp. apiḷandha. Pilandhati
Pilandhati
[see apilandhati, api+nah] to adorn, put on, bedeck Miln 337; J v.400. Caus. II. pilandhāpeti J i.386. Pilandhana & Piḷandhana
Pilandhana
& Piḷandhana (nt.) [ = apilandhana] putting on ornaments, embellishment, ornament, trinkets A i.254, 257; iii.16; Th 2, 74; Vv 6417 (ḷ); J i.386 (ḷ); v.205; VbhA 230 (˚vikati; ḷ); VvA 157 (ḷ), 167 (ḷ); PvA (ḷ); Sdhp 243. Pilava & Plava
Pilava
& Plava [fr. plu, cp. Vedic plava boat, Russ. plov ship] 1. swimming, flowing, floating J v.408 (suplav -- atthaŋ in order to swim through well = plavana C.). -- 2. a kind of duck [so Epic Sk.] Vv 358 (cp. VvA 163); J v.420. Pilavati & Plavati
Pilavati
& Plavati [cp. Vedic plavati; plu, as in Lat. pluo to rain, pluvius rain, Gr. ple/w swim, plu/nw wash; Ohg. flouwen etc. to rinse = E. flow] to move quickly (of water), to swim, float, sway to & fro Th 1, 104; Miln 377; VvA 163; DhsA 76. As plavati at J i.336 (verse); Dh 334 (v. l. SS; T. palavati). As palavati at Th 1, 399. -- See also uppalavati (uppluta), opilāpeti, paripalavati. Pilavana & Palavana
Pilavana
& Palavana (nt.) [fr. plu] swimming, plunging J v.409 (pl˚). Pilāpanatā
Pilāpanatā
(f.) [fr. plu, see pilavati] superficiality Dhs 1349, cp. DhsA 405. Pilāla
Pilāla
at J i.382 (˚piṇḍa+mattikā -- piṇḍa) is doubtful. Fausböll suggests mistake for palala straw, so also Ed. Müller, P.Gr. 6. Pilotikā
Pilotikā
(f.) [cp. Class. Sk. plota (BR = prota), Suśr. i.15, 3; 16, 7 & passim] a small piece of cloth, a rag, a bandage Vin i.255, 296 (khoma˚ cp. Vin. Texts ii.156); M i.141 (chinna -- ˚o -- dhammo laid bare or open); S ii.28 (id.), 219 (paṭa˚); J i.220; ii.145; iii.22 (jiṇṇa˚), 511; vi.383; Miln 282; Vism 328; KhA 55; DhA i.221 (tela˚ rags dipped in oil); VvA 5; PvA 185; -- As m. at J iv.365. The BSk. forms vary; we read chinna -- pilotika at AvŚ i.198; MVastu iii.63; pilotikā (or ˚ka) at MVastu iii.50, 54. Besides we have ploti in karmaploti (pūrvikā k.) Divy 150 etc. AvŚ i.421.

-- khaṇḍa a piece of rag DhA iv.115; ThA 269; PvA 171. Pillaka
Pillaka
[cp. Sk. *pillaka] the young of an animal, sometimes used as term for a child J ii.406 (sūkara˚); DhA iv.134 (as an abusive term; vv. ll. SS kipillaka; gloss K pitucūḷaka, BB cūḷakaniṭṭha); Sdhp 164, 165. -- As pillika at J i.487 (godha˚, v. l. BB godha -- kippillika). Piḷakā
Piḷakā
(f.) [cp. Class. Sk. piḍakā] 1. a small boil, pustule, pimple Vin i.202; S i.150; J v.207, 303; Nd1 370; Miln 298; DA i.138. -- 2. knob (of a sword) J vi.218. -- Cp. pilaka. Piḷayhati
Piḷayhati
[api+nayhati, cp. Sk. pinahyate] to fasten on, put on, cover, dress, adorn J v.393 (piḷayhatha 3rd sg. imper. = pilandhatu C.). -- 461 -- Piḷhaka
Piḷhaka
(v. l. miḷhakā) at S ii.228 is to be read as mīḷhakā "cesspool" (q. v.). The C. quoted on p. 228 expls incorrectly by "kaŋsalak' ādi gūthapāṇakā," which would mean "a low insect breeding in excrements" (thus perhaps = paṭanga?). The trsl. (K.S. ii.155) has "dung -- beetle." Pivati & Pibati
Pivati
& Pibati [Vedic pāti & pibati, redupl. pres. to root Idg. *poi & pī, cp. Lat. bibo (for * pibo); Gr. pi_uw to drink, po/tos drink; Obulg. piti to drink, also Lat. pōtus drink, pōculum beaker ( = pātra, P. patta). See also pāyeti to give drink, pāna, pānīya drink, pīta having drunk] to drink. -- pres. pivati D i.166; iii.184; J iv.380; v.106; PvA 55. -- 1st pl. pivāma Pv i.118; 2nd pl. pivatha PvA 78 & pivātha Pv i.112; 3rd pl. med. piyyare J iv.380. -- imper. piva PvA 39, & pivatu Vin iv.109. -- ppr. pivaŋ Sn 257; Dh 205, & pivanto SnA 39. -- fut. pivissati J vi.365; PvA 5, 59; pissāmi J iii.432; pāssati J iv.527. -- aor. pivi J i.198; apivi Mhvs 6, 21; pivāsiŋ Ud 42; apāyiŋha J i.362 (or ˚siŋha?); apaŋsu A i.205. -- ger. pivitvā J i.419; iii.491; vi.518; PvA 5, 23; pītvā Sn 257; Dh 205; J i.297; pītvāna J ii.71; pitvā Pv i.118. -- grd. pātabba Vin ii.208; peyya; see kāka.˚ -- inf. pātuŋ J ii.210; Pv i.64. -- pp. pīta (q. v.). -- Of forms with p for v we mention the foll.: pipati M i.32; DhsA 403 (as v. l.); imper. pipa J i.459; ppr. pipaŋ M i.316, 317. -- Caus. pāyeti & pāyāpeti (q. v.). Pivana
Pivana
(nt.) [fr. pivati] drinking PvA 251. Pivaraka
Pivaraka
see piṭharaka. Pisati
Pisati
[ = piŋsati] to grind, crush, destroy; Pass. pisīyati to perish VvA 335 (+vināseti). -- pp. pisita. Pisana
Pisana
(nt.) [fr. piŋsati?] grinding, powder see upa˚. Pisāca
Pisāca
[cp. Sk. piśāca & Vedic piśāci; to same root as pisuna = Vedic piśuna, & Lat. piget, Ohg. fēhida enmity=Ags. faehp ("feud"), connected with root of Goth. fijan to hate; thus pisāca=fiend] 1. a demon, goblin, sprite D i.54 (T. pesācā, v. l. pisācā, expld at DA i.164 as "pisācā mahanta -- mahantā sattā ti vadati"), 93; S i.209; A iii.69; Ud 5; J i.235; iv.495 (yakkha p. peta); Miln 23; VvA 335; PvA 198; Sdhp 313. -- f. pisācī J v.442. -- 2. [like pisāca -- loha referring to the Paiśāca district, hailing from that tribe, cp. the term malla in same meaning and origin] a sort of acrobat, as pl. pisācā "tumblers" Miln 191.

-- nagara town of goblins (cp. yakkha -- nagara) Vism 531. -- loha [connected with the tribe of the Paiśāca's: Mhbh vii.4819; cp. Paiśācī as one of the Prākrit dialects: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 3] a kind of copper VbhA 63 (eight varieties). Pisācaka = pisāca
Pisācaka
= pisāca, only in cpd. paŋsu˚ mud -- sprite J iv.380, 496; DA i.287; DhA ii.26. Pisācin
Pisācin
(adj. n.) [fr. pisāca, lit. having a demon] only f. pisācinī a witch ( = pisācī) Th 1, 1151. Pisācillikā
Pisācillikā
(f.) [fr. pisāca] a tree -- goblin Vin i.152; ii.115, 134; SnA 357; cp. Vin. Texts i.318. Pista
Pista
[pp. of pisati] crushed, ground Vism 260 ( = piṭṭha KhA id. p.); VbhA 243. Pisīyati
Pisīyati
Pass. of pisati (q. v.). Pisīla
Pisīla
(nt.) [Sk. piśāla] a dial. expression for pātī or patta "bowl" M iii 235 (passage quite misunderstood by Neumann in his trsln iii.414). Pisuṇa
Pisuṇa
(adj.) [Vedic piśuṇa, see etym. under pisāca] back- biting, calumnious, malicious M iii.33, 49; J i.297; Pug 57; PvA 15, 16. Usually combd with vācā malicious speech, slander, pisuṇavācā and pisuṇāvācā D i.4, 138; iii.70 sq., 171, 232, 269; M i.362; iii.23; adj. pisuṇāvāca & M iii.22, 48; S ii.167; Pug 39. -- Cp. pesuna. Pisodara
Pisodara
[pṛṣa, i. e. pṛṣant+udara, see pasata1] having a spotted belly KhA 107 (ed. compares pṛṣodarādi Pāṇini vi.3, 109). Pihaka
Pihaka
(nt.) [cp. Sk. plihaṇaka & plīhan (also Vedic plāśi?), Av. spərəƶan; Gr. splh/n, spla/gxna entrails; Lat. lien spleen] the spleen M iii.90; Sn 195; J v.49. In detail at Vism 257; VbhA 240. Pihana
Pihana
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. piheti] envying Dhs 1059; SnA 459 (˚sīla). Pihayati & Piheti
Pihayati
& Piheti [cp. Vedic spṛhayati, spṛh] 1. to desire, long for (with acc.) Vin ii.187; S ii.242 (pihāyittha 2nd pl. aor.); J i.401; iv.198 (pattheti+); Th 2, 454; Vv 8445 ( = piyāyati VvA 349). -- 2. to envy (with gen. of person & object), covet M i.504; S i.202, 236; Th 1, 62; Sn 823, 947; It 36; Dh 94 (=pattheti DhA 177), 181 (id. iii.227), 365 (ppr. pihayaŋ=labhaŋ patthento DhA iv.97); J i.197 (aor. mā pihayi); Miln 336. -- pp. pihayita. Pihayita
Pihayita
[pp. of pihayati] desired, envied, always combd with patthita Miln 182, 351. Pihā
Pihā
(f.) [fr. spṛh, cp. Sk. spṛhā] envy, desire M i.304; J i.197; Vism 392 (Bhagavantaŋ disvā Buddha -- bhāvāya pihaŋ anuppādetvā thita -- satto nāma n' atthi). -- adj. apiha without desire S i.181. Pihāyanā
Pihāyanā
(f.) = pihanā Nett 18. Pihālu
Pihālu
(adj.) [cp. Sk. spṛhālu, fr. spṛh, but perhaps = Ved. piyāru malevolent. On y>h cp. P. paṭṭhayati for paṭṭhahati] covetous, only neg. a˚ S i.187=Th 1, 1218; Sn 852; Nd1 227. Pihita
Pihita
[pp. of pidahati] covered, closed, shut, obstructed (opp. vivaṭa) M i.118; iii.61; S i.40; A ii.104; Nd1 149; J i.266; Miln 102 (dvāra), 161; Vism 185; DA i.182 (˚dvāra). Pīṭha
Pīṭha
(nt.) [cp. Fpic Sk. pīṭha] a seat, chair, stool, bench. -- 4. kinds are given at Vin iv.40 = 168, viz. masāraka, bundikābaddha, kuḷirapādaka, āhaccapādaka (same categories as given under mañca). -- Vin i.47, 180; ii.114, 149, 225; A iii.51 (mañca˚, Dvandva); iv.133 (ayo˚); Ps i.176; Vv 11 (see discussed in detail at VvA 8); VvA 295 (mañca˚). -- pāda˚ footstool J iv.378; VvA 291; bhadda˚ state -- chair, throne J iii.410.

-- sappin "one who crawls by means of a chair or bench," i. e. one who walks on a sort of crutch or support, a cripple (pīṭha here in sense of "hatthena gahana -- yogga" VvA 8; exlpd by Bdhgh as "chinn' iriyāpatha" Vin. Texts i.225) J i.76, 418; v.426 (khujja+) vi.4, 10; Miln 205, 245, 276; Vism 596 (& jaccandha, in simile); DhA i.194; ii.69; PugA 227; PvA 282. Pīṭhaka
Pīṭhaka
[fr. pīṭha] a chair, stool VvA 8, 124. See also palāla˚. Pīṭhikā
Pīṭhikā
(f.) [fr. pīṭha] a bench, stool Vin ii.149 ("cushioned chair" Bdhgh; see Vin. Texts iii.165); J iv.349; DA i.41; VvA 8. Pīṇana
Pīṇana
(nt.) [fr. prī, cp. pīti] 1. gladdening, thrill, satis- faction Vism 143 = DhsA 115. -- 2. embellishment Vism 32 (=maṇḍana). Pīṇita
Pīṇita
[pp. of pīṇeti] pleased, gladdened, satisfied Vv 1613 ( = tuṭṭha VvA 84); Miln 238, 249, 361; usually in phrase pīṇitindriya with satisfied senses, with joyful heart M ii.121; PvA 46, 70. Pīṇeti
Pīṇeti
[cp. Vedic prīṇāti, prī, see piya. The meaning in Pāli however has been partly confused with pī, pinvati (see pīna), as suggested by Bdhgh in DA i.157: "pīṇentī ti pīṇitaŋ thāma -- bal' ûpetaŋ karonti"] to gladden, please, satisfy, cheer; to invigorate, make strong, often in phrase (attānaŋ) sukheti pīṇeti "makes happy and pleases" D i.51; iii.130 sq.; S i.90; iv.331; PvA 283: cp. DhsA 403 (sarīraŋ p.). It also occurs in def. of pīti (pīṇayatī ti pīti) at Vism 143 = DhsA 115. -- pp. pīṇita. -- 462 -- Pīta
Pīta1
[pp. of pivati] 1. having drunk or (pred.) being drunk (as liquid) S i.212 (madhu˚); J i.198; PvA 25 (with asita, khāyita & sāyita as fourfold food). -> 2. soaked or saturated with ( -- ˚), in kasāyarasa˚ J ii.98 (or = pīta2?) and visapīta (of an arrow) J v.36; Vism 303, 381; which may however be read (on acct. of v. l. visappīta) as visappita "poison -- applied" (see appita). Does M i.281 pīta -- nisita belong here (=visapīta)? -> 3. (nt.) drink M i.220 sq.=A v.347 sq.; A v.359; Th 1, 503; Pv ii.710; Nett 29, 80. Pīta
Pīta2
(adj.) [Epic Sk. pīta, etym. unclear] yellow, golden- coloured Vin i.217 (virecana); D i.76 (nīla p. lohita odāta); iii.268 (˚kasiṇa); M i.281 (pīta -- nisita, belonging here or under pīta1?), cp. 385 (below); A iii.239; iv.263, 305, 349; v.61; J vi.185 (nīla p. lohita odāta mañjeṭṭhaka), 449 (˚alankāra, ˚vasana ˚uttara, cp. 503); Dhs 203 (˚kasiṇa), 246, 247 (nīla p. lohitaka, odāta); Vism 173 (˚kasiṇa). -- pīta is prominent (in the sense of golden) in the description of Vimānas or other heavenly abodes. A typical example is Vv 47 (Pītavimāna v.1 & 2), where everything is characterised as pīta, viz. vattha, dhaja, alankāra, candana, uppala, pāsāda, āsana, bhojana, chatta, ratha, assa, bījanī; the C. expln of pīta at this passage is "suvaṇṇa"; cp. Vv 361 ( = parisuddha, hemamaya VvA 166); 784 (=suvaṇṇamaya C. 304).

-- antara a yellow dress or mantle Vv 36 ( = pītavaṇṇā uttarīyā C. 166). -- aruṇa yellowish red Th 2, 479. -- âvalepana "golden -- daubed" M i.385. Pītaka
Pītaka
(adj.) [fr. pīta] yellow Vin iv.159; Th 2, 260; J ii.274; Pv iii.13 ( = suvaṇṇavaṇṇa PvA 170); Dhs 617 (nīla p. lohitaka odāta kāḷaka mañjeṭṭhaka); ThA 211. -- pītakā (f.) saffron, turmeric M i.36. Pīti
Pīti
(f.) [cp. Class. Sk. prīti & Vedic prīta pp. of prī, see pīneti & piya] emotion of joy, delight, zest, exuberance. On term see Dhs. trsl. 11 and Cpd. 243. Classed under sankhārakkhandha, not vedanā˚. -- D i.37, 75; iii.241, 265, 288; M i.37; S ii.30; iv.236; A iii.26, 285 sq.; iv.411, 450; v.1 sq., 135, 311 sq., 333 sq.; Sn 257, 687, 695, 969, 1143 ( = Bhagavantaŋ ārabbha p. pāmujjaŋ modanā pamodanā citti -- odagyaŋ etc. Nd2 446); Nd1 3, 491; Pug 68; Dhs 9, 62, 86, 172, 584, 999; Nett 29; Vism 145 (& sukha in contrasted relation), 212, 287 (in detail); DA i.53 (characterised by ānanda); DhA i.32; Sdhp 247, 461. On relation to jhāna see the latter. In series pīti passaddhi samādhi upekkhā under sambojjhanga (with eleven means of cultivation: see Vism 132 & VbhA 282). -- Phrase pītiyā sarīraŋ pharati "to pervade or thrill the body with joy" (aor. phari), at J i.33; v.494; DhA ii.118; iv.102; all passages refer to pīti as the fivefold pīti, pañcavaṇṇā pīti, or joy of the 5 grades (see Dhs. trsl. 11, 12, and Cpd. 56), viz. khuddikā (slight sense of interest), khaṇikā (momentary joy), okkantikā (oscillating interest, flood of joy), ubbegā (ecstasy, thrilling emotion), and pharaṇā pīti (interest amounting to rapture, suffusing joy). Thus given at DhsA 115 & Vism 143, referred to at DhsA 166. -- pīti as nirāmisa (pure) and sāmisa (material) at M iii.85; S iv.235.

-- gamanīya pleasant or enjoyable to walk M i.117. -- pāmojja joy and gladness A iii.181. 307 (˚pāmujja); Dh 374; DhA iv.110; KhA 82. -- pharaṇatā state of being pervaded with joy, joyous rapture, ecstasy D iii.277; Ps i.48; Vbh 334; Nett 89. -- bhakkha feeding on joy (Ep. of the Ābhassara Devas) D i.17; iii.28, 84, 90; A v.60; Dh 200; A i.110; DhA iii.258; Sdhp 255. -- mana joyful -- hearted, exhilarated, glad of heart or mind M i.37; iii.86; S i.181; A iii.21; v.3; Sn 766; Nd1 3; J iii.411; Vbh 227. -- rasa taste or emotion of joy VvA 86. -- sambojjhanga the joy -- constituent of enlightenment M iii.86; D iii.106, 226, 252, 282. Eleven results of such a state are enumd at DhsA 75, viz. the 6 anussatis, upam' ânussati, lūkhapuggalaparivajjanatā, siniddha -- pug. -- sevanatā, pasādanīyasuttanta -- paccavekkhaṇatā, tadadhimuttatā (cp. Vism 132 & VbhA 282). -- sahagata followed or accompanied by joy, bringing joy Dhs 1578 (dhammā, various things or states); Vism 86 (samādhi). -- sukha zest and happiness, intrinsic joy (cp. Cpd. 56, 243) S i.203; D iii.131, 222; Dhs 160; Vism 158; ThA 160. According to DhsA 166 "rapture and bliss," cp. Expositor 222. -- somanassa joy and satisfaction J v.371; Sn 512; PvA 6, 27, 132. Pītika
Pītika
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. pīti] belonging to joy; only as sappī- tika & nippītika bringing joy & devoid of joy, with & without exuberance (of sukha) A iii.26; iv.300, 441. Pītin
Pītin
(adj.) [fr. pīta1) drinking, only at Dh 79 in cpd. dhamma˚ drinking in the Truth, expld as dhammapāyako, dhammaŋ pivanto at DhA ii.126. Pīna
Pīna
(adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. pīna of pī to swell up (with fat); to which also Vedic pīvan & pīvara fat, Gr. pimelh/ & pi\on fat, Lat. opīmus fat, Ger. feist & fett = E. fat] fat, swollen Th 2, 265 (of breasts). Pīḷaka
Pīḷaka
[fr. pīd?] a (sort of) boil Vism 35; see pilaka. Pīḷana
Pīḷana
(nt.) [fr. pīḍ, cp. pīḷā] oppression, injury, suffering (from dukkha) Vism 212 = 494; also in nakkhatta˚ harm to a constellation, i. e. occultation DhA i.166 sq. Pīḷā
Pīḷā
(f.) [cp. Class. Sk. pīḍā fr. pīḍ] 1. pain, suffering J i.421; Miln 278; Vism 42. -- 2. oppression, damage, injury SnA 353; DA i.259. Pīlikoḷikā
Pīlikoḷikā
(f.) [reading not quite sure, cp. koḷikā] eye- secretion Th 2, 395 ( = akkhigūthaka ThA 259, q. v. for fuller expln; see also J.P.T.S. 1884, 88). Pīḷita
Pīḷita
[pp. of pīḷeti] crushed, oppressed, molested, harassed Vin iv.261; Vism 415 (dubbhikkha˚); DhA iv.70; ThA 271. Cp. abhi˚, pa˚. Pīḷeti
Pīḷeti
[cp. Vedic pīḍayati, pīḍ, cp. Gr. pie/zw (*pisediw?) to press, oppress (lit. sit upon?)] 1. to press, press down Vin ii.225 (coḷakaŋ). -- 2. to weigh down heavily J i.25 (ppr. pīḷiyamāna), 138. -- 3. to press, clench Miln 418 (muṭṭhiŋ pīḷayati); DhA iv.69 (anguliyā pīḷiyamānāya). -- 4. to crush, keep under, subjugate Miln 277 (janaŋ). -- 5. to molest VvA 348 (pīḷanto ppr. for pīḷento?). -- pp. pīḷita. Puŋ
Puŋ
as a term for Purgatory (niraya): see Bdhgh's etym. of puggala Vism 310, as quoted under puggala. Puŋs
Puŋs
[Vedic puŋs (weak base) and pumāŋs (strong base), often opp. to strī (woman, female); cp. putra & potaka]. Of the simplex no forms are found in Pāli proper. The base puŋ occurs in pukusa (?), puggala (?), pungava, pullinga; puŋs in napuŋsaka (cp. Prk. napuŋsaveya Pischel, Gram. § 412). The role of puŋs as contrast to itthi has in Pāli been taken over by purisa, except in itthi -- pumā at the old passage D iii.85. The strong base is in P. puman (q. v.). See also posa1. Pukkusa
Pukkusa
[non -- Aryan; cp. Epic Sk. pukkuśa, pukkaśa pulkasa. The "Paulkāsa" are mentioned as a mixed caste at Vājasaneya Saŋhitā 30, 17 (cp. Zimmer, Altind. Leben 217)] N. of a (Non -- Aryan) tribe, hence designation of a low social class, the members of which are said (in the Jātakas) to earn their living by means of refuseclearing. On the subject see Fick, Sociale Gliederung 206, 207. -- Found in foll. enumerations: khattiyā brāhmaṇā vessā suddā caṇḍāla -- pukkusā A i.162 = iii.214; J iii.194 (expld by C. chava -- chaḍḍaka -- caṇḍālā ca puppha -- chaḍḍaka -- pukkusā ca); iv.303; Pv ii.612; Miln 5. Further as pukkusakula as the last one of the despised clans (caṇḍālakula, nesāda˚, veṇa˚, rathakāra˚, p.˚) at M iii.169; S i.94; A ii.85; Vin iv.6; Pug 51. With nesāda at PvA 176. -- Cp. M iii.169. -- 463 -- Puggala
Puggala
[cp. Class. Sk. pudgala, etym. connected with puŋs, although the fantastic expln of native Commentators refers it to puŋ "a hell" and gal; so at Vism 310: "pun ti vuccati nirayo, tasmiŋ galantī ti puggalā"] 1. an individual, as opposed to a group (sangha or parisā), person, man; in later philosophical (Abhidhamma) literature = character, soul (=attan). -> D i.176; M iii.58; S i.93 sq.; iii.25; A i.8, 197; ii.126 sq.; Sn 544, 685; Dh 344; Ps i.180 sq.; ii.1 sq., 52; Pv ii.325 (cp. PvA 88); ii.97; PvA 40, 132. -- pl. puggalā people VvA 86 (=sattā), 149. -- para -- puggala another man D i.213; S ii.121; v.265; Vism 409. -- purisa -- puggala individual man, being, person S ii.206; iv.307; A i.173=M ii.217. Characterised as an individual in var. ways, e. g. as agga˚ Sdhp 92, 558; abhabba˚ J i.106; ariya˚ Vin v.117; asura -- parivāra˚ A ii.91; kodhagaru˚ A ii.46; gūtha˚, puppha˚ madhubhāṇī˚ A i.128; dakkhiṇeyya˚ VvA 5; diṭṭhisampanna˚ A i.26 sq.; iii.439 sq.; iv.136; nibbiriya kusīta˚ J iv.131; pāsāṇalekh' ûpama˚ etc. A i.283; valāhak' ûpama A ii.102 sq.; saddha, asaddha Ps i.121; ii.33; sivāthik' upama A iii.268; suppameyya etc. A i.266 sq. [a] sevitabba A iv.365; v.102, 247, 281; hīna majjhima paṇīta S ii.154. -- Groups of characters: (2) A i.76, 87; (3) gilān' ûpama etc. A i.121 sq.; avuṭṭhika -- sama padesa -- vassin, sabbatth' âbhivassin It 64 sq.; satthar, sāvaka, sekha It 78; sekha asekha n' eva -- sekha -- nāsekha D iii.218; (4) D iii.232, 233; S i.93; J iv.131; (5) Nett 191; (6) rāga -- carita, dosa˚, moha˚, saddhā˚, buddha˚, vitakka˚ Vism 102; (7) ubhato -- bhāga -- vimutta, paññāvimutta etc. D iii.105; (8) A iii.212; S v.343 (19) Nett 190; (26) Nett 189, 190. -- See also paṭipuggala. -> 2. (in general) being, creature Miln 310 (including Petas & animals).

-- ñū knowing individuals D iii.252, 283. -- paññatti descriptions of persons, classification of individuals D iii.105 (cp. Dial. iii.101); also N. of one of the canonical books of the Abhidhamma -- piṭaka. -- vemattatā difference between individuals S ii.21; v.200; Sn p. 102 ( = ˚nānatta SnA 436). Puggalika
Puggalika
(adj.) [fr. puggala] belonging to a single person, individual, separate Vin i.250; ii.270. The BSk. paudgalika at Divy 342 is used in a sense similar to the Vin passages. Divy Index gives, not quite correctly, "selfish." Punkha
Punkha
[cp. Epic Sk. punkha, etym. puŋ (base of puŋs)+ kha (of khan), thus "man -- digging"?] the feathered part of an arrow J ii.89. Cp. ponkha. Pungava
Pungava
[puŋ+gava (see go), cp. Class. Sk. pungava in both meanings] a bull, lit "male -- cow," A i.162; ii.75 sq.; Sn 690; J iii.81, 111; v.222, 242, 259, 433; SnA 323. As -- ˚ in meaning "best, chief" Vism 78 (muni˚); ThA 69 (Ap v.5) (nara˚). Pucimanda
Pucimanda
[fr. picumanda] the Nimba tree, Azadirachta Indica J iii.34; iv.205; vi.269 (˚thanī, of a woman = nimba -- phala -- saṇṭhāna -- thana -- yuggalā C.). Puccaṇḍatā
Puccaṇḍatā
(f.) [pūti+aṇḍa+tā, viâ *pūtyaṇḍatā] state of a rotten egg M i.357. Puccha
Puccha
(nt.) [cp. Vedic puccha (belonging with punar to Lat. puppis) & P. piccha] a tail DhsA 365 (dog's tail). See puñcikata. Pucchaka
Pucchaka
(adj.) [fr. pṛch] asking, questioning DhsA 2, 3 (pañha˚). Pucchati
Pucchati
[pṛcch, cp. Vedic pṛcchati = Lat. posco, postulo, with which connected also Lat. precor=Goth. fraihnan; Ohg. frāgōn; Vedic praśna=P. pañha] 1. to ask, to question S i.207, 214; Vin ii.207; Sn 995; Nd1 341 etc. -- Pres. 1st sg. pucchāmi Sn 83, 241, 682, 1043, 1049; Nd2 447: Pv ii.112. -- 1st pl. pucchāma Sn 1052; Imper. puccha Sn 460; DA i.155; pucchatha D ii.154; pucchassu Sn 189, 993; Pot. puccheyyāmi D i.51; puccheyya A i.199; PvA 6; ppr. pucchanto Sn 1126; aor. 1st sg. apucchissaŋ Sn 1116, pucchisaŋ Vv 3011, apucchiŋ VvA 127; 2nd sg. apucchasi Sn 1050; 3rd sg. apucchi Sn 1037, apucchasi Nd2 447; pucchi Sn 981, 1031; PvA 6, 39, 68; apucchatha Sn 1017; 1st. pl. apucchimha Sn 1052. 3rd pl. pucchiŋsu J i.221; pucchisuŋ Mhvs 10, 2. Fut. pucchissāmi J vi.364. Inf. pucchituŋ Vin i.93; Sn 510; puṭṭhuŋ Sn 1096, 1110; pucchitāye J v.137. Grd. pucchavho Sn 1030; Pass. pucchiyati DhA i.10. -- Caus. II. pucchāpeti Mhvs 10, 75. -- pp. puṭṭha & pucchita (q. v.). -- 2. to invite to (instr.), to offer, to present to somebody (acc.), lit. to ask with Vin ii.208, 210 (pāniyena); iii.161 (odanena, sūpena etc.); D ii.240. -- See also anu˚, abhi˚, sam˚. Pucchana
Pucchana
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. pṛch] asking, enquiring, questioning Sn 504 (ā); PvA 121, 223. Pucchā
Pucchā
(f.) [cp. Class. Sk. pṛcchā = Ohg. forsca question] a question Sn 1023; SnA 46, 200, 230. A system of questions ("questionnaire") is given in the Niddesa (and Commentaries), consisting of 12 groups of three questions each. In full at Nd1 339, 340=Nd2 under pucchā (p. 208). The first group comprises the three adiṭṭha -- jotanā pucchā, diṭṭha -- saṃsandanā p., vimaticchedanā p. These three with addition of anumati p. and kathetu -- kamyatā p. also at DA i.68=DhsA 55. The complete list is referred to at SnA 159. -- apuccha (adj.) that which is not a question, i. e. that which should not be asked Miln 316. -- puccha -- vissajjanā question and answer PvA 2. -- At Nett 18 p. occurs as quâsi synonym of icchā and patthanā. Pucchita
Pucchita
[pp. of pucchati] asked Sn 76, 126, 383, 988, 1005; Nd1 211; KhA 125 (˚kathā); PvA 2, 13, 51. -> Cp. puṭṭha. Pucchitar
Pucchitar
[n. ag. to pucchita] one who asks, a questioner M i.472; S iii.6 sq.; Sn p. 140. Pujja
Pujja
(adj.) [grd. of pūj, cp. Sk. pūjya] to be honoured M iii.38 sq., 77 sq.; A iii.78 (v. l.); Nett 52, 56 ( = pūjaniya C.). Compar. pujjatara M i.13; & see pūja. Puñcikatā
Puñcikatā
is wrong reading at Dhs 1059 in taṇhā para- phrase (pattern 1 Nd2 taṇhā) for mucchañcikatā. The readings of id. p. are puñcikatā Dhs 1136, 1230; Vbh 351, 361 (v. l. pucchañji˚); mucchañci˚ at Nd1 8 (v. l. BB mucchañji˚, SS suvañci˚); Nd2 p. 152 (v. l. BB pucchiñci˚, SS pupañci˚); pucchañjikatā VbhA 477. The translation of Dhs gives "agitation" as meaning. The C. (DhsA 365) reads puñcikạtā (vv. ll. puñcaŋ vikatā; pucañcikaka; pucchakatā) and connects it with pucchaŋ cāleti (wagging of a dog's tail, hence "agitation"); Expositor ii.470 gives "fluster." The C. on Vbh (VbhA 477) expls as "lābhan' âlābhanaka -- ṭṭhāne vedhanā kampanā nīcavuttatā," thus "agitation." Puñchati
Puñchati
[cp. Sk. *proñchati, but BSk. poñcchate (v. l. puñchati & pocchate) Divy 491: upânahān mūlāc ca p.] to wipe off, clean Vin ii.208 (upāhanā), 210; A iv.376 (rajoharaṇaŋ suciŋ p., asuciŋ p. etc.); J i.392 (akkhīni); Vism 63 (gabbha -- malaŋ), 415 = KhA 120= J i.47 (assūni hatthehi p.); KhA 136 (paŋsukaŋ). The reading puñjati occurs at J i.318 (akkhīni); v.182; vi.514, also as v. l. at A iv.376 (v. l. also muñcati: cp. puñcikatā). -- Caus. II. puñchāpeti Vism 63. Cp. pari˚. Puñchana
Puñchana
(adj. nt.) [fr. proñch] wiping Vin i.297 (mukha˚- colaka); ii.208 (upāhana˚ -- colaka), 210. Cp. puñchanī. -- 464 -- Puñchanī
Puñchanī
(f.) [see puñchana] a cloth for wiping, a towel Vin ii.122; Th 1, 560 (pāda˚ napkin for the feet). See Vin. Texts iii.114. Puñja
Puñja
(usually -- ˚) [cp. Epic Sk. puñja] a heap, pile, mass, multitude Vin ii.211; J i.146 (sabba -- rogānaŋ). As -- ˚ in foll. cpds.: aṭṭhi˚ It 17 (+aṭṭhikandala); kaṭṭha˚ A iii.408; iv.72; J ii.327; gūtha˚ J ii.211; tiṇa˚ A iii.408; palāla˚ D i.71; M iii.3; A i.241; ii.210; maŋsa˚ D i.52; vālika˚ J vi.560; sankhāra˚ S i.135.

-- kata (& ˚kita) for puñjikata; cf. Sk. puñjīkṛta, with i for a in compn with kṛ & bhū heaped up, heaped together Vin ii.208 (puñjakita); M i.58, 89 (id. but id. p. M iii.92 puñjakajāta); A iii.324 (puñjakata; v. l. puñjakita & puñjanika); J ii.408 (puñjakata, v. l. pancalikata); vi.111 (id., v. l. puñca˚). Puñjaka
Puñjaka
= puñja M iii.92 (˚jātāni aṭṭhikāni, where M i.89 at id. p. reads puñjakitāni); Miln 342 (palāla˚). Puñjati
Puñjati
is a variant of puñchati (q. v.). Puñña
Puñña
(nt.) [cp. (late) Vedic puṇya favourable, good; etym. not clear, it may be dialectical. The word is expld by Dhammapāla as "santānaŋ punāti visodheti," i. e. cleaning the continuation (of life) VvA 19, thus taken to pu. The expln is of course fanciful] merit, meritorious action, virtue. Always represented as foundation and condition of heavenly rebirth & a future blissful state, the enjoyment (& duration) of which depends on the amount of merit accumulated in a former existence. With ref. to this life there are esp. 3 qualities contributing to merit, viz., dāna, sīla & bhāvanā or liberality, good conduct & contemplation. These are the puñña -- kiriya -- vatthūni (see below). Another set of ten consists of these 3 and apaciti, veyyāvacca, patti -- anuppadāna, abbhanumodanā, desanā, savana, diṭṭh' ujjuka -- kamma. The opp. of puñña is either apuñña (D iii.119; S i.114; ii.82; A i.154; iii.412; Sdhp 54, 75) or pāpa (Sn 520; Dh 39; Nett 96; PvA 5). The true Arahant is above both (Pv ii.615). See on term also Kvu trsl. 201. -- (a) Passages (selected): D iii.58, 120; M i.404; ii.191, 199; S i.72; ii.82; iv.190; iv.190; v.53; A i.151, 155 sq.; iii.412; Sn 427 sq., 547, 569, 790; Dh 18, 116 sq., 196, 220, 267, 331, 412; Nd1 90; Pv 1.2; i.512; Pug 55; Vism 541 (puññānaŋ paccayo duvidhā); DhA iv.34; PvA 6, 8 30, 69 sq.; Sdhp 4, 19 sq. -- (b) Var. phrases & characterisations: Merit is represented as great (uḷāra DA i.110; PvA 5; anappaka Pv i.512) or little (paritta DA i.110; appa S ii.229); as adj. ( -- ˚) mahā˚ S i.191, opp. appa˚ M ii.5. puñña is defined at Nd1 90 as follows: "puññaŋ vuccati yaŋ kiñci tedhātukaŋ kusal' âbhisankhāraŋ; apuññaŋ vuccati sabbaŋ akusalaŋ. " It is defined as "dāna -- sīl' -- ādi -- pabheda" & "sucaritaŋ kusala -- kammaŋ" at VvA 19; considered as leading to future happiness: Vv 13; PvA 58; consisting mainly in dāna (dānamayaŋ p.) PvA 8, 51, 60, 66, 73, but also in vandana PvA 1. To do good = puññaŋ (puññāni) karoti D i.137; S iv.331; A v.177; Pv i.119; or pasavati S i.182, 213; A i.89; ii.3 sq.; iii.244; v.249, 282; PvA 121, cp. puññaŋ pasutaŋ Pv i.512; VvA 289. Other phrases: ˚ŋ ākankhati S i.18, 20; pavaḍḍhati S i.33; corehi duharaŋ S i.36; puññānaŋ vipāko A iv.89; āgamo S iii.209 iv.349; opadhikaŋ S i.233; It 78; purāṇaŋ & navaŋ S i.92; sayaŋ katāni puññāni S i.37; puññassa dhārā S i.100; v.400.

-- atthika desirous of merit Sn 487 sq. -- ânubhāva the majesty of merit PvA 58. -- âbhisankhāra accumulation of merit D iii.217; S ii.82; Nd1 90, 206, 442; Vism 557 sq., 571; VbhA 142 sq., 166, 184. -- âbhisanda (+kusalâbhisanda) meritorious results A ii.54 sq.; iii.51, 337; iv.245. -- assaya seat of merit DA i.67. -- iddhi the magic power of m. PvA 117. -- kata one who has done a deed of m. A ii.32. -- kamma good works, righteousness, merit S i.97, 143; DA i.10; VvA 32; PvA 54, 87; Sdhp 32. -- kāma (adj.) desirous of doing good works S v.462. -- kiriyā a good or meritorious action S i.87 (˚kriyā), 101; PvA 54; usually as ˚kiriyavatthu item of m. action (of which 3 are usually enumd: see above) D iii.218; A iv.241; It 51; Nett 50, 128. -- kkhandha mass of merit (only as mahā˚) S v.400; A iii.337. -- kkhaya decay (or waning of the effect) of merit D i.18 (cp. āyukkhaya & DA i.110). -- kkhetta field of m., Ep. of the Sangha or any holy personalities, doing good (lit. planting seeds of merit) to whom is a source of future compensation to the benefactor. Usually with adj. anuttara unsurpassed field of m. (see also sangha) D iii.5, 227; M i.446; iii.80; S i.167, 220; v.343, 363, 382; A i.244; ii.34 sq., 56, 113; iii.158, 248, 279 sq., 387; iv.10 sq., 292; It 88; Sn 486; Vv 5031 (cp. VvA 216); Pv iv.133 (of a bhikkhu); Vism 220; VvA 286; PvA 1 (ariyasangha), 5 (Moggallāna), 6 (arahanto), 132, 140, 214 and passim. Cp. BSk. puṇyakṣetra Divy 63, 395 (+udāra). -- paṭipadā the meritorious path, path of m. A i.168; Nett 96. -- pasavana creation of m. PvA 31. -- pekkha looking for merit (i. e. reward), intent upon m. S i.167; Sn 463 sq., 487 sq.; Dh 108 (cp. DhA ii.234). -- phala the fruit (or result) of m. action S i.217; Pug 51; DhA ii.4; PvA 8, 50, 52. -- bala the power of m. PvA 195. -- bhāga taking part in meritorious action S i.154. -- bhāgiya having share in m. M iii.72 sq.; Nett 48. -- maya = puñña J iv.232 (˚iddhi); cp. BSk. puñyamaya AvŚ i.183. Puññavant
Puññavant
(adj.) [fr. puñña] possessing merit, meritorious, virtuous Ps ii.213; Vism 382; DhA i.340; PvA 75. Puṭa
Puṭa
[etym. unknown, prob. dialectical, as shown by N. of Pāṭaliputta, where putta = puṭa since unfamiliar in origin] orig. meaning "tube," container, hollow, pocket. -- 1. a container, usually made of leaves (cp. J iv.436; v.441; vi.236), to carry fruit or other viands, a pocket, basket: ucchu˚ basket for sugar J iv.363; paṇṇa˚ leaf -- basket PvA 168; phala˚ fruit basket J iv.436= vi.236; phānita(ssa)˚ basket of molasses, sugar -- basket S i.175 (KS.: jar); J iv.366; DhA iv.232; mālā˚ basket for garlands or flowers DhA iii.212 (baddha made, lit. bound). In puṭa -- baddha -- kummāsa VvA 308 perhaps meaning "cup." -- 2. a bag or sack, usually referring to food carried for a journey, thus "knapsack" (or directly "provisions," taking the container for what it contains DA i.288 puts puṭaŋsa= pātheyya), in bhatta˚ bag with provisions J ii.82 (with bandhati), 203; iii.200; DA i.270. Also at J iv.375 "bag" (tamba -- kipillaka˚). See below ˚aŋsa & ˚bhatta. -- 3. a tube, hollow, in nāsā˚ (nāsa˚) nostril J vi.74; Vism 195, 263, 362; KhA 65; hattha˚ the hollow of the hand Miln 87; vatthi˚ bladder( -- bag) Vism 264; sippi -- puṭa oyster shell J v.197, 206. puṭaŋ karoti to form a hollow VbhA 34. -- 4. box, container, see ˚bheda & ˚bhedana, in pāṭali -- puṭa seed box for the P. flower.

-- aŋsa "bag -- shoulder" (for "shoulder -- bag," cp. aŋsapuṭa (assapuṭa) & Ger. rucksack = knapsack. Rightly expld by Bdhgh at DA i.288), a bag carrying provisions on journeys, hence "provision," in phrase puṭaŋsena with provisions (v. l. at all places puṭosena) D i.117; M iii.80; A ii.183; cp. Dialogues i.150; see also mutoḷī. -- pāka something cooked in a bag (like a meal -- pudding) Vism 500. -- baddha kind of moccasins Vin i.186, see Vin. Texts ii.15. Spelt puṭa -- bandha at Vism 251=VbhA 234. -- bhatta "bag -- food," viaticum, provisions for journey J ii.423; KhA 46. -- bheda the breaking of the container (i. e. seed boxes of the Sirīsa plant) VvA 344 (in vatthu where Sirīsa refers to Pāṭaliputta, cp. Vv 8452, 53). -- bhedana breaking of the (seed -- ) boxes of the Pāṭali plant, referring primarily to the N. of Pāṭali -- putta, where putta represents a secondary Pālisation of Sk. ˚putra which again represents P. (or Non -- Aryan) puṭa (see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 238 & 292). Through popular etym. a wrong conception of the expression arose, which took puṭa in the sense of "wares, provisions, merchandise" (perhaps influenced by puṭaŋsa) and, based on C. on Ud 88 (bhaṇḍakānaŋ mocara -- ṭṭhānaŋ vuttaŋ hoti) gave rise to the (wrong) trsln Dial. ii.92 "a centre for interchange of all kinds of wares." See also Miln trsln i.2; Buddh. Suttas xvi. -- Vin i.229=D ii.87=Ud 88. After the example of Pāṭaliputta applied to the city of Sāgala at Miln 1 (nānā -- puṭa -- bhedanaŋ S˚ nagaraŋ). Here clearly meant for "merchandise." -- Rh. D. in a note on puṭabhedana gives expln "a town at the confluence or bend of a river" (cp. Jaina Sūtras 2, 451). -- 465 -- Puṭaka
Puṭaka
(nt.) [fr. puṭa] a bag, pocket, knapsack or basket J ii.83 (˚bhatta = provisions); DA i.263; DhA ii.82 (v. l. piṭaka & kutaka); iv.132 (pockets of a serpent's hood). Cp. bhatta. Puṭṭha
Puṭṭha1
[pp. of puṣ (see poseti), Vedic puṣṭa] nourished, fed, strengthened, brought up Sn 831; J iii.467. Puṭṭha
Puṭṭha2
[pp. of pucchati, Vedic pṛsṭa] asked S ii.36; Sn 84, 122, 510 sq., 1036; DhA iv.132; PvA 10 (after acc.) 68, 72 with samāno A i.197. See also pucchita. Puṭṭha
Puṭṭha3
see phuṭṭha [ = Sk. spṛṣṭa, cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 311]. Puṭṭhatta
Puṭṭhatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. puṭṭha1] the fact of being fed or brought up by J ii.405 (vaḍḍhakinā ˚ā). Puṭṭhavant
Puṭṭhavant
[fr. puṭṭha3, cp. same form in Prk. AMg. puṭṭhavaŋ = Sk. spṛṣṭavān: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 569] one who has touched or come in direct contact with ThA 284. Puṇḍarīka
Puṇḍarīka
(nt.) [Non -- Aryan (?). Cp. Vedic puṇḍarīka] the white lotus D i.75 = A iii.26 (in sequence uppala, padụma, p.); D ii.4 (Sikhī puṇḍarīkassa mūle abhisambuddho); M iii.93; S i.138, 204=J iii.309; A i.145 (uppala paduma p.); ii.86 sq. (samaṇa˚ adj.); Sn 547; J v.45, 215 (˚ttac' angī=ratta -- paduma -- patta -- vaṇṇasarīrā); Vv 4412 (=seta -- kamala VvA 191); Pv ii.122; iii.33 (pokkharaṇī bahu ˚ā); Pug 63; DA i.219, 284 (sankho elo uppalo puṇḍarīko ti cattāro nidhayo). N. of a hell S i.152; Sn p. 126 (here in sq. Uppalaka, Puṇḍ˚, Paduma). Puṇḍarīkinī
Puṇḍarīkinī
(f.) [adj. pundarīkin, of puṇḍarīka] a pool or pond of white lotuses D i.75≈(M iii.93; S i.138). Puṇṇa
Puṇṇa
[pp. of pṛ, Vedic pṛṇāti, Pass. pūryate, *pelē to fill; cp. Sk. prāṇa & pūrṇa = Av. pərəna; Lith. pílnas; Lat. plēnus; Goth fulls=E. full=Ger voll] full, seldom by itself (only passage so far pannarase puṇṇāya puṇṇamāya rattiyā D i.47=Sn p. 139). nor -- ˚ (only Sn 835 muttakarīsa˚), usually in cpds., and there mostly restricted to phrases relating to the full moon.

-- ghaṭa a full pitcher (for feeding the bhikkhus, as offering on festive days, cp. J.P.T.S. 1884) DhA i.147; KhA 118 (v. l. suvaṇṇaghaṭa); DA i.140 (˚paṭimaṇḍita ghara). -- canda the full moon J i.149, 267; v.215. -- patta a full bowl (as gift, ˚ŋ deti to give an ample gift) J iii.535. -- baddha at Miln 191 should be read as ˚bhadda. -- bala at DA i.110 read puñña -- bala. -- bhadda worshipper of Puṇṇabhadda, perhaps a Yakkha (father of the Yakkha Harikesa) Nd1 92 (Vāsuvadeva, Baladeva, P. and Maṇibhadda, cp. p. 89); Miln 191 (pisācā maṇibhaddā p.). -- mā the full moon (night) D i.47 (komudiyā cātumāsiniyā puṇṇāya puṇṇamāya rattiyā, cp. DA i.140); Sn p. 139 (similar); M iii.21; J v.215 (dve p -- māyo); Vism 292 (puṇṇa -- m -- uposatha = puṇṇa -- māuposatha), 418 (Phagguṇa -- puṇṇama -- divase); VvA 66 (āsāḷhi p.); PvA 137 (id.); DA i.140; DhA iii.461 (komudi). -- māsa=˚mā only in loc. puṇṇamāse Vv 811 (=puṇṇa -- māsiyaŋ sukka -- pakkhe pannarasiyaŋ VvA 314; the similar pass. at VvA 321 reads, prob. by mistake, sukka -- pakkha -- pāṭiyaŋ: see pāṭī); J v.215 (=puṇṇa candāya rattiyā C.). -- māsī (f.; fr. ˚māsa)= mā J i.86 (Phagguṇi p.); VvA 314; cp. BSk. pūrṇamāsī AvŚ i.182. Puṇṇatā
Puṇṇatā
(f.) [abstr. to puṇṇa] fulness DA i.140 (māsa˚ full -- moon). Puṇṇatta
Puṇṇatta
(nt.) [abstr. ro puṇṇa] fulness SnA 502. Putolī
Putolī
see muṭolī. Putta
Putta
[Vedic putra, Idg. *putlo = Lat. pullus (*putslos) young of an animal, fr. pōu, cp. Gr. pau=s, pai/s child, Lat. puer, pubes, Av. pupra, Lith. putýtis (young animal or bird), Cymr. wyr grandchild; also Sk. pota(ka) young animal and base pu -- in pumaŋs, puŋs "man"] 1. a son S i.210; Sn 35, 38, 60, 557, 858; Dh 62, 84, 228, 345; J iv.309; Vism 645 (simile of 3 sons); PvA 25, 63, 73 sq.; DA i.157 (dāsaka˚). Four kinds of sons are distinguished in the old Cy. viz. atraja p., khettaja, dinnaka, antevāsika, or born of oneself, born on one's land, given to one, i. e. adopted, one living with one as a pupil. Thus at Nd1 247; Nd2 448; J i.135. Good and bad sons in regard to lineage are represented at J vi.380. -- Metaph. "sons of the Buddha" S i.192= Th 1, 1237 (sabbe Bhagavato puttā); It 101 (me tumhe puttā orasā mukhato jātā dhammajā), J iii.211. -- The parable of a woman eating her sons is given as a punishment in the Peta condition at Pv i.6 (& 7). -> pl. puttāni Pv i.63. -- aputta -- bhāvaŋ karoti to disinherit formally J v.468. -- 2. (in general) child, descendant, sometimes pleonastic like E. ˚man, ˚son in names: see putta -- dāra; so esp. in later literature, like ludda˚ hunter's son=hunter J ii.154; ayya˚=ayya, i. e. gentleman, lord J v.94; PvA 66. See also rāja˚. -- Of a girl Th 2, 464. -- mātucchā˚ & mātula˚ cousin (from mother's side), pitucchā˚ id (fr. father's side). On putta in N. Pāṭali˚ see puṭa. -- f. puttī see rāja˚.

-- jīva N. of a tree: Putranjiva Roxburghii J vi.530. -- dāra child & wife (i. e. wife & children, family) D iii.66, 189, 192; S i.92; A ii.67; Pv iv.348 (sa˚ together with his family); J iii.467 (kiŋ ˚ena what shall I do with a family?); v.478. They are hindrances to the development of spiritual life: see Nd2 under āsiŋsanti & palibodha. -- phala a son as fruit (of the womb) J v.330. -- maŋsa the flesh of one's children (sons) a metaphor probably distorted fr. pūta˚ rotten flesh. The metaphor is often alluded to in the kasiṇa -- kammaṭṭhāna, and usually coupled with the akkha -- bbhañjana (& vaṇapaticchādana) -- simile, e. g. Vism 32, 45; DhA i.375; SnA 58, 342. Besides at S ii.98 (in full); Th 1, 445 (˚ūpamā); 2, 221. -- mata a woman whose sons (children) are dead M i.524. Puttaka
Puttaka
[fr. putta] 1. a little son S i.209, 210. -- 2. a little child Th 2, 462 (of a girl). -- 3. a young bird ( = potaka) J ii.154. Puttatta
Puttatta
(nt.) [fr. putta] sonship DhA i.89. Puttavant
Puttavant
(adj.) [fr. putta] having sons S iv.249. Trenck- ner, Notes 6216 gives a f. *puttapatī for puttavatī, but without ref. Puttimant
Puttimant
(adj.) [fr. *puttamant] having sons S i.6; Sn 33. Puttiya
Puttiya
( -- ˚) in Sakya˚ is compound Sakyaputta+iya "belonging to the son of the Sakyas" (i. e. to the Sakya prince) PvA 43. -- asakyaputtiya dhamma Vin ii.297. Puthavī & Puthuvī
Puthavī
& Puthuvī (f.) [doublets of paṭhavī] the earth; as puthavi at S i.186; J i.14 (v. l. puthuvi); iv.233, & in cpds. ˚nābhi the navel of the earth (of the bodhimaṇḍa, the Buddha's seat under the holy fig tree) J iv.232; ˚maṇḍala the round of the earth Sn 990. -- As puthuvī at A ii.21, and in cpd. puthuvi -- agga SnA 353. -- 466 -- Puthu
Puthu
(adj.) [both Vedic pṛthak & pṛthu, lit. spread out, far & wide, flat, of Idg. *plēt broad, Sk. prath to expand, pṛthaḥ palm of hand Av. frapah breadth, cp. Gr. platu/s broad, pla/tanos plane tree, Lith. platùs broad, Lat. planta sole of foot, Ohg. flado pancake, Ags. flet ground, E. flat] 1. ( = pṛthak) separated, individual, adv. separated, individual, adv. separately, each (also given as puthag eva Kacc. 29) S i.75 (puthu attā individual self); Th 1, 86; J iv.346 (=visuŋ visuŋ C.); Miln 4. See further under cpds. -- 2. (=pṛthu). The forms (pl.) are both puthu & puthū, both as adj. & n.; puthū more freq. found in metre. -- numerous, various, several, more, many, most D i.185 (puthu saññaggā; opp. ekaŋ); S i.181 (puthū), 207 (id.); Sn 769 (puthū kāme=bahū Nd1 11); 1043, 1044 (puthū= bahukā Nd2 449b); Th 2, 344 (puthu=puthu sattā ThA 241); J vi.205 (puthū). nt. adv. puthu & puthuŋ greatly, much, in many ways Sn 580 (=aneka -- ppakāraŋ SnA 460); Vv 624 (=mahantaŋ VvA 258).

-- gumba experienced in many crafts J vi.448 ( = aneka -- sippa -- ññu C.). -- jja (puthu 1, but see remarks on puthujjana) common, ordinary Sn 897, 911 (= puthujjanehi janita Nd1 308). -- titthakara a common sectarian D i.116 (thus to puthu 1, but DA i.287= bahū t.) -- ddisā (puthu 1) each separate quarter "all the diverse quarters" S i.234. -- pañña (adj.) of wide wisdom (p. 2) A i.130; ii.67 (v. l. hāsa˚). -- paññatā wide wisdom A i.45. -- pāṇiya ordinary (p. 1) mode of shampooing with the hand Vin ii.106 (Bdhgh on p. 316 explns pudhu -- pāṇikan ti hattha parikammaŋ vuccati "manual performance," thus not identical with pāṇikā on p. 151). -- bhūta (p. 2) widely spread S ii.107; but cp. BSk pṛṭhag bhavati to be peculiar to Divy 58, 100. -- mati wide understanding S i.236. -- loma "flat fin," N of a fish "the finny carp" (Mrs. Rh. D.) Vv 4411 (=dibba -- maccha VvA 191); Th 2, 508 (=so -- called fish ThA 292); J iv.466. -- vacana "speaking in many (bad) ways," or "people of various speech" (so expld Nd1 397) Sn 932 (prob. better "speaking ordinary talk"=puthu 1). -- sattā (pl.)=puthujjanā, common people, the masses S i.44; Pv iii.73. Puthuka
Puthuka
[fr. puthu, cp. (late) Vedic pṛthuka "flat corn," also "young of an animal," with which cp. perhaps Gr. parqe/nos: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under virgo] rice in the ear DhA i.98 (˚agga as first gift of the field). Puthujjana
Puthujjana
[*prthag -- jana, thus puthu 1+jana, but from the point of Pali identical in form and meaning with puthu 2, as shown by use of puthu in similar cpds. and by C. explns. One may even say that puthu 1 = pṛthak is not felt at all in the P. word. Trenckner (Notes 76) already hinted at this by saying "puthujjana, partly confounded with puthu"; a connection which also underlies its expln as "one -- of -- the -- many -- folk" at Kvu trsln 807 & 2913. It is felt to belong to puthu 2 in the same sense as Ger. "die breite Masse," or Gr. oi( polloi/. The expln at Nd1 308=328 is puthu -- nānā -- janā. A long and detailed etym. -- speculation expln of the term is found at DA i.59, trsld at Dhs trsln 258. The BSk. form is pṛthagjana Divy 133 etc.] an ordinary, average person (4 classes of ordinary people are discussed at Cpd. 49, 50), a common worldling, a man of the people, an ordinary man M i.1, 7, 135, 239, 323; iii.64, 227; S i.148; ii.94 sq. (assutạvā), 151 (id.); iii.46, 108, 162; iv.157, 196, 201 (assutavā), 206 sq.; v.362 (opp. to sotāpanna); A i.27, 147 (maraṇa -- dhammin), 178, 267; ii.129, 163; iii.54; iv.68, 97, 157, 372; Sn 351, 455, 706, 816, 859; Dh 59, 272; Vv 826 (=anariya VvA 321,+anavabodha); Nd1 146, 248; Ps i.61 sq., 143, 156; ii.27; Dhs 1003 (cp. DhsA 248 sq.); Vism 311 (=anariya); VbhA 133 (avijj' âbhikhūta, bhava -- taṇh' âbhibhūta), 186 (ummat -> taka, opposed to upabrūhita -- ñāṇa -- purisa, exemplifying upādāna and kamma); DhA i.5 (opp. ariyasāvaka), 445; Sdhp 363.

-- kalyāṇaka (cp. BSk. pṛthagjana -- kalyāṇaka Divy 419, 429) an ordinary man striving after his spiritual good Nd1 477; Ps i.176; ii.190, 193. -- bhikkhu a bh. of the common sort DA i.269; VbhA 383. -- sukha ordinary happiness M i.454. Puthujjanatā
Puthujjanatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. puthujjana] common -- place character S i.187 = Th 1, 1217. Puthujjanika
Puthujjanika
(adj.) [fr. puthujjana] common, ordinary J i.360 (of iddhi). Puthutta (Puthatta)
Puthutta
(Puthatta) (nt.) [fr. puthu, cp. Sk. *pṛthutva; not with Kern, Toev. s. v. = Sk. pṛthaktva, speciality, peculiarity] being at variance, diversity S ii.77 (opp. ekatta; v. l. SS puthatta). At A iv.97 we have to read puth' attānaŋ for puthuttānaŋ which has nothing to do with puthutta, but is puthu+attānaŋ as borne out by v. l. puthujj' attānaŋ, and by AA: puthu nānākāraṇehi attānaŋ hanti. Puthula
Puthula
(adj.) [fr. puthu] broad, large, flat J iii.16 (˚sīsa flat -- headed); vi.171 (˚antaraŋsa flat -- chested); Miln 121 (of a river); VvA 301 (˚gambhīra). -- abl. puthulato (as adv.) across DhA i.396. Puthuso
Puthuso
(adv.) [abl. of puthu] broadly, i. e. diversely, at variance Sn 891, 892 ( = puthu -- diṭṭhi -- gata Nd1 301). Pudava (poddava?)
Pudava
(poddava?) see gāma˚ (Vin ii.105 with Bdhgh note on p. 315). Puna
Puna
(indecl.) [cp. Vedic punar, punaḥ, to base *pŭ (related to *apo: see apa), as in puccha tail, Lat. puppis, poop, Gr. pu/matos the last; orig. meaning "behind"] again. There are several forms of this adv., but puna has to be considered as the orig. Pali form. The form puno is doubtful; if authentic, a Sanskritisation; only found at ThA 71 (Ap. v. 38; v. l. puna) & 72 (Ap. v. 41, v. l. puna). The sandhi r is preserved only in metre and in compn.. That it is out of fashion even in metre is shown by a form punā where ā is the regular metrical lengthening instead of ar (J iii.437: na hi dāni punā atthi; v. l. puna). Besides this the r is apparent in the doubling of the first consonants of cpds. (punappunaŋ, punabbhava); it is quite lost in the enclitic form pana. -- We find r in punar āgami Sn 339; punar āgato J i.403 ( = puna āgato J i.403 (= puna āgato, ra -- kāro sandhivasena vutto C.); in cpds.: punar -- abhiseka see J.P.T.S. 1885, 49; a -- punar -- āvattitā the fact of not turning back Miln 276 (cp. Prk. apuṇar -- avatti Pischel, § 343). Otherwise r stands on the same level as other sandhi (euphonic) consonants (like m. & d., see below), as in puna -- r -- eva Dh 338; Pv ii.87; ii.116. We have m in puna -- m -- upāgamuŋ Sn 306; puna by itself is rarely found, it is usually combd with other emphatic part, like eva and api. The meaning is "again," but in enclitic function (puna still found Sn 677, 876, otherwise pana); it represents "however, but, now" (cp. same relation in Ger. abermals: aber), similar to the development in Prk. puṇo vi & puṇar avi "again": puna "now" (Pischel Gr. § 342). -- puna by itself at SnA 597; PvA 3, 45; Mhvs 14, 12. doubled as punappunaŋ S i.174; Th 1, 531, 532; Sn 728, 1051; Dh 117, 118, 325, 337; J v.208; SnA 107; PvA 45, 47; punappuna at DhA ii.75; as puna -- d -- eva at D i.60, 142; Pv ii.113 (v. l.); Vism 163; DhA ii.76; puna -- m -- eva Pv ii.113; puna pi once more J i.279; PvA 67, 74; puna -- p -- pi J v.208. The phrase puna c' aparaŋ "and again something else" stands on the same level as the phrase aparo pi (apare pi), with which one may compare the parallel expressions puna -- divase: aparadivase, all of which show the close relation between pi, puna, apara, but we never find para in these connections. Trenckner's (& following him Oldenberg in Vin. and Hardy in A etc.) way of writing puna ca paraŋ (e. g. Miln 201, 388, 418 etc.) is to be corrected to puna c' aparaŋ, cp. punâpara Sn 1004; Cp iii.61.

-- āgamana coming again, return S i.22 (a˚). -- āvāsa rebirth S i.200. -- divase on the following day J i.278; PvA 19, 38. -- nivattati to turn back again S i.177. -- bbhava renewed existence, new birth D ii.15; S i.133; It 62; S iv.201 (āyati˚); Sn 162, 273, 502, 514, 733; Nd2 s. v.; Nett 28, 79 sq.; PvA 63, 200; cp. ponobhavika; a˚ no more rebirth S i.174, 208; Nd2 64; ˚âbhinibbatti birth in a new existence M i.294; S ii.65; A i.223; Vin iii.3; PvA 35. -- vacana repetition SnA 487. -- vāre (loc.) another time J v.21. -- 467 -- Punāti
Punāti
[cp. Vedic pavate, punāti, pū to cleanse, as in Lat. purus clean, purgo, Ohg. fowen to sift also Gr. pu_r (cp. P. pāvaka) = Ohg. fūir=E. fire, Armen. hur, lit. "cleansing," see also puñña] 1. to clean, cleanse VvA 19 (+visodheti, in def. of puñña). -- 2. to sift J vi.108 (angāraŋ p.=attano sīse angāre p. okirati C.; so read with v. l. for phunati T.); DA i.268 (bhusaŋ pumanto viya like sifting the chaff, winnowing). Cp. puneti. Puneti
Puneti
[Caus. fr. puna? or = punāti?] to experience (over & over) again: in this meaning at It 1 sq. & Nd1 202= Nd2 337 (kilese na p. na pacceti etc.); perhaps also at Th 1, 533 (sattayugaŋ), although Kern, Toev. s. v. takes it=punāti and Mrs. Rh. D. translates "lifts to lustrous purity." Punnāga
Punnāga
[dial.?] a species of tree J i.9 (˚puppha); vi.530; KhA 50 (aggacchinna˚ -- phala), 53 (id.). Puppha
Puppha1
(nt.) [Vedic puṣpa according to Grassmann for *puṣka fr. puṣ (?) see poseti] a flower Vin ii.123; S i.204 = J iii.308; Sn 2, 5; Dh 47 sq.; 377; Vism 430; SnA 78 (paduma˚); VvA 73; PvA 127; Sdhp 550. -- pupphāni (pl.) VbhA 255 (of 32 colours, in simile), 292 sq. (for Cetiya -- worship). -- adj. ˚puppha in ghana˚ thick with flowers DA i.87. -- Cp. pokkharatā.

-- âbhikiṇṇa decked with flowers Vv 6429; Pv ii.112 -- ādhāna "a ledge (on a Tope) where offerings of flowers are laid down" (Geiger, Mhvs p. 355; cp. Mhvs trsl. p. 2022) Mhvs 30, 51, 56, 60; 33, 22 Reading uncertain. -- āveḷā flower -- garland VvA 125. -- āsava wine made from flowers, flower -- liquor J iv.117; KhA 26. -- gandha odour of flowers Dh 54; Dhs 625. -- cumbaṭaka a fl. cushion. -- chaḍḍaka a remover of (dead) flowers, a rubbish -- remover, a low occupation, including cleaning of privies & bins etc. Vin iv.6; Th 1, 620; J v.449 ( = vacca -- ṭṭhāna -- sodhaka C.); Miln 331; Vism 194 (in simile). Cp. J.P.T.S. 1884, 89 and Miln trsl. ii.211. -- cchatta a parasol with flowers DhA i.110. -- dāna offering of flowers VbhA 336. -- dāma a wreath or garland of fls. J i.397; VvA 198. -- dhara bearing flowers Pv ii.124 (so read for T. ˚dada). -- pañjara a cage (ornamented) with flowers J v.365. -- paṭa a cloth (embroidered) with flowers J iv.283; DhA ii.45. -- palāsa a fl. heap DhA i.75. -- bhāṇin "speaking flowers," i. e. speaking the truth Pug 29. -- mālā garland of fls. SnA 78. -- muṭṭhi a handful of fl. Vism 432 (in simile). -- rasa (wine -- ) juice made of fls., flower -- liquor Vin i.246; taste of fls. Dhs 629. -- rāsi a heap of fls. Dh 53. Puppha
Puppha2
(nt.) [cp. Class. Sk. puṣpa "les fleurs" in strī˚ the menses Am. Kośa 3, 4, 30, 233 and Mārk. Pur. 51, 42. Similarly phala is used in the sense of "menstruation": see BR s. v. phala 12] blood: see pupphaka & pupphavatī. With ref. to the menses at J v.331. Pupphaka
Pupphaka
(nt.) [fr. puppha2] blood J iii.541 (v. l. pubbaka; C. = lohita); Miln 216 (tiṇa˚ -- roga, a disease, Kern. "hay -- fever"). Kern, Toev. s. v. trsls the J passage with "vuil, uitwerpsel." Pupphati
Pupphati
[puṣp] to flower J i.76 (aor. ˚iŋsu); PvA 185 ( = phalati). -- pp. pupphita. Pupphavatī
Pupphavatī
(f.) [fr. puppha2, but cp. Vedic puṣpavat flowering] a menstruous woman Miln 126. Pupphita
Pupphita
[pp. of pupphati] flowering, in blossom S i.131 = Th 2, 230 (su˚); Vv 354; J i.18; Miln 347; ThA 69 (Ap. v. 12); DhA i.280; ii.250 (su˚). Pupphin
Pupphin
(adj.) [fr. puppha1 cp. Vedic puṣpin] bearing flowers; in nīlapupphī (f.) N. of a plant ("with blue flowers") J vi.53. Pubba
Pubba1
[Vedic pūya>*pūva>*puvva>pubba (Geiger, P.Gr. § 461); cp. pūyati to smell rotten, Lat. pūs = E. pus, Gr. pu/qw to rot, pu/on matter; Vedic pūti smelling foul; Goth. fūls=E. foul] pus, matter, corruption M i.57; iii.90; S i.150; ii.157; A i.34; J ii.18; Miln 382; PvA 80. -- In detail discussed (as one of the 32 ākāras) at Vism 261, 360; KhA 62; VbhA 244. -- Often in combn pubba -- lohita matter & blood, e. g. Sn p. 125; Sn 671; J v.71; DhA i.319; as food of the Petas Pv i.69; i.91 (lohita -- pubba); i.118; ii.26. pubba -- vaṭṭi a lump of matter DhA iii.117. Pubba
Pubba2
(adj.) [Vedic pūrva, to Idg. *per, see pari & cp. Goth. fram = from; Gr. pro/mos first, Goth. fruma=As. formo first, Av. pourvō, also Sk. pūrvya=Goth. frauja =Ohg. frō Lord, frouwa=Ger. frau. See also Lat. prandium, provincia] previous, former, before. The adj. never occurs in abs. forms by itself (for which see pubbaka), it is found either as -- ˚ or ˚ -- or in cases as adv. The phrase pubbam antam anissita Sn 849 is poetical for pubbantam. -- 1. ( -- ˚) having been before J iii.200; na diṭṭha˚ not seen before Nd1 445; mātabhūta˚ formerly (been) his mother PvA 79; vuttha˚ (gāma) formerly inhabited DhA i.15; as adv. bhūtapubbaŋ before any beings (existed) Vin i.342; DhA i.102 and passim (see bhūta). -- 2. (neg.) apubba (nt.) what has not been before, something new VvA 117, 287. acc. as adv. in phrase apubbaŋ acarimaŋ not earlier, not after, i. e. simultaneously M iii.65; Pug 13 (=apure apacchā, ekappahāren' evâti attho PugA 186). -> 3. (cases adverbially) instr. pubbena in ˚âpara gradual M iii.79; acc. pubbaŋ see 1, 2, with abl. as prep.= before SnA 549 (=purā); loc. pubbe in earlier times (also referring to previous births, cp. pure), in the past, before S iv.307; Sn 831, 949 (with pacchā & majjhe, i. e. future & present); Pv i.31; ii.22; SnA 290, 385, 453; PvA 4, 10, 39, 40, 100. With abl. as prep.= before S ii.104. In compn with ˚nivāsa see sep. An old acc. f. *pūrvīŋ (cp. Prk. puvviŋ Pischel, Gr. § 103) we find in Cpd. anupubbikathā (q. v.). The compar. pubbatara ("quite early") occurs abs. at S iv. 117 as nom. pl. "ancestors" (cp. Gr. oi( pro/teroi), as loc. adv. at S i.22.

-- angin in f. ˚angī (cāru˚) at J v.4 & vi.481 read sabbangin. -- aṇṇa "first grain," a name given to the 7 kinds of grain, as distinguished from aparaṇṇa, the 7 sorts of vegetables, with which it is usually combined; Vin iii.151; iv.267; Nd1 248 (where the 7 are enumd); Nd2 314; J ii.185; Miln 106; DA i.78, 270; DhA iv.81 etc. (see aparaṇṇa). See also bīja -- bīja. -- aṇha the former part of the day, forenoon, morning (as contrasted with majjhaṇha & sāyaṇha) D i.109, 226; A i.294; iii.344; S i.76 (˚samayaŋ); SnA 139 (id.); DhA iii.98; PvA 61, 216. The spelling pubbanha M i.528 (cp. Trenckner, Notes 80). -- anta (1) the East J i.98 (˚ato aparantaŋ aparantato pubbantaŋ gacchati from E. to W. from W. to E.); v.471. -- (2) the Past (opp. aparanta the Future) D i.12 sq.; S ii.26; Nd1 212; Dhs 1004. pubbam antaŋ for pubbantaŋ is poetical at Sn 849. -- ˚ânudiṭṭhi theory concerning the past or the beginning of things D i.13 (cp. DA i.103); M ii.233; S iii.45; Dhs 1320. -- aḷha(ka) (āḷhaka) at Th 2, 395 is doubtful. T. reads bubbuḷaka, Mrs. Rh. D. translates "bubble of film"; ThA 259 explns by "ṭhita -- jalapubbaḷha -- sadisa." -- ācariya (1) an ancient teacher, a scholar of previous times A i.132; ii.70; It 110; Vism 523 = VbhA 130; KhA 11, 64, 65. -- (2) a former teacher SnA 318. -- āciṇṇa ( -- vasena) by way of former practice, from habit SnA 413. -- âpara (1) what precedes and what follows, what comes first and what last (with ref. to the successive order of syllables and words in the text of the Scriptures) A iii.201 (˚kusala); Dh 352; Nett 3 (˚ânusandhi); cp. BSk. pūrvāpareṇa vyākhyānaŋ karoti "expld in due order" AvŚ ii.20. -- (2) ˚rattaŋ "as in the former, so in the foll. night," i. e. without ceasing, continuous Th 1, 413. cp. pub baratt -- âparattaŋ DhA iv.129. -- âpariya former & future, first & last Ud 61 (˚vivesa); -- ābhoga previous reflection ThA 30. -- ārāma "Eastern Park," N. of a locality east of Sāvatthi A iii.344; Sn p. 139 (cp. Sn A 502). -- āsava former intoxication Sn 913, cp. Nd1 331. -- uṭṭhāna getting up before (someone else) either applied to a servant getting up before the master, or to a wife rising before her husband VvA 71, 136. -- uṭṭnāyin "getting up earlier" (with complementary Ep. pacchā -- nipātin "lying down later"), see above D i.60; iii.191; A iii.37; iv.265 sq.; DA i.168. -- abstr. ˚uṭṭhāyitā J iii.406 (˚ādīhi pañcahi kalyāṇa dhammehi samannāgatā patidevatā)=v.88; KhA 173. -- uttara (1) preceding and following Kacc. 44. 47. -- (2) "eastnorthern," i. e. north -- eastern J v.38 (˚kaṇṇa N.E. corner); vi.519 (id.). -- kamma a former deed, a deed done in a former existence Cp. iii.113. -- kārin "doing before," i. e. looking after, obliging, doing a favour A i.87; Pug 26 (=paṭhamaŋ eva kāraka PugA 204) PvA 114. -- kicca preiiminary function Vin v.127 (cattāro pubbakiccā); cp. Cpd. 53. -- koṭṭhaka "Eastern Barn," Npl. A iii.345. -- (n)gama (1) going before, preceding A iii.108 (okkamane p.); M iii.71 sq. -> (2) "allowing to go before"; controlled or directed by, giving precedence Dh 2 (mano˚ dhammā=tena paṭhama -- gāminā hutvā samannāgatā DhA i.35); Nd2 318; Pug 15 (paññā˚ ariyamagga=paññaŋ pure -- cārikaŋ katṿā PugA 194); Sdhp 547 (paññā˚). Cp. BSk. pūrvangama Divy 333 ("obedient" Index). -- carita former life SnA 382, 385. -- ja born earlier, i. e. preceding in age PvA 57 (=jeṭṭhaka). -- ñāti former relative PvA 24. -- deva a former god, a god of old, pl. the ancient gods (viz. the Asuras) S i.224. -- devatā an ancient deity A ii.70; It 110 (v. l. ˚deva). -- nimitta "previous sign," a foregoing sign, prognostic, portent. forecast It 76 (the 5 signs of decay of a god); J i.11 (the 32 signs at the conception of a Buddha, given in detail on p. 51), 48; Miln 298 (of prophetic dreams, cp. Cpd. p. 48); VbhA 407 (in dreams); DhA ii.85. -- pada the former, or antecedent, part (of a phrase) DhsA 164. -- parikamma a former action SnA 284 (opp. to pacchā -- parikamma). -- purisa ancestor D i.93, 94. -- peta a deceased spirit, a ghost (=peta) D i.8 (˚kathā, cp. DA i.90 & Dial. i.14). pubbe pete is poetical at Pv i.41 for pubbapete. Cp. BSk. pūrvapreta AvŚ i.149 (see Index p. 230); Divy 47, 97. -- bhāga "former part," i. e. previous PvA 133 (˚cetanā opp. apara -- bhāga -- cetanā. SS omit bhāga). -- bhāsin speaking obligingly (cp. pubbakārin) D i.116 (trsl. "not backward in conversation"), DA i.287 (bhāsanto va paṭhamataraŋ bhāsati etc.). -- yoga "former connection, " i. e. connection with a former body or deed, former action (and its result) J v.476; vi.480; Miln 2 (pubbayogo ti tesaŋ pubba -- kammaŋ). Kern, Toev. s. v. remarks that it is frequent in BSk. as pūrvayoga (yoga=yuga; syn. with pūrvakalpa), e. g. Saddh. Puṇḍ. ch. vii.; MVastu ii.287; iii.175; and refers to Ind. Studien 16, 298; J.R.A.S. 1875, 5. -- rattâparattaŋ the past and future time, the whole time, always A iii.70; DhA iv.129. -- vāsana an impression remaining in the mind from former actions Sn 1009; ThA 31 (Ap. v. 8). -- videha Eastern Videha KhA 123, 176; SnA 443. -- sadisa an old (former) friend DhA i.57 -- 468 -- Pubbaka
Pubbaka
(adj.) [fr. pubba2] 1. former, ancient, living in former times D i.104 (isayo), 238 (id.); Sn 284 (id.); S ii.105; iv.307 (ācariya -- pācariyā); Th 1, 947. -> 2. ( -- ˚; cp. pubba2 1) having formerly been, previous J i.182 (suvaṇṇakāra˚ bhikkhu), cp. BSk. ˚pūrvaka in same use at AvŚ i.259, 296, 322. -- 3. ( -- ˚) accompanied or preceded by ThA 74 (guṇ' âbhitthavana˚ udāna); PvA 122 (puññânumodana˚ maggācikkhana); cp. āśvāsana -- pūrvaka Jtm 210. Pubbāpeti
Pubbāpeti
[Denom. fr. pubba2] occurs only in one phrase (gattāni pubbāpayamāno) at M i.161 & A iii.345≈402 in meaning "drying again"; at both A pass. the vv. ll. (glosses) are "sukkhāpayamāno" and "pubba -- sadisāni kurumāno"; to the M. pass. cp. Trenckner's notes on p. 543, with the BB expln of the word ( = pubbabhāvaŋ gamayamāno), also Neumann, Majjh. trsln i.260. The similar passage at S i.8, 10 has "gattāni sukkhāpayamāno" as T. reading and "pubbāpayamāno" as v. l. BB. Pubbe
Pubbe
(˚ -- ) [loc. of pubba2, see pubba2 3] in cpds.: "in a former existence": ˚kata (nt.) deeds done in a past life M ii.217 = A i.173 (˚hetu); J v.228 (˚vādin fatalist); Nett 29 (˚punnata). ˚nivāsa [cp. BSk. pūrve -- nivāsasaŋprayuktaŋ MVastu iii.224, otherwise as pūrvanivāsa Divy 619] abode in a former life, one's former state of existence D ii.1, 2; iii.31 sq., 50 sq., 108 sq, 230, 281; M i.278; ii.21; iii.12; S i.167; A i.164 sq.; It 100; Sn 647; Dh 423; Pug 61; Vism 411 (remembered by 6 classes of individuals); ThA 74, 197. -> pubbe -- nivās' ânussati ( -- ñāṇa) (knowledge of) remembrance of one's former state of existence, one of the faculties of an Arahant (cp. A i.164 sq., and Cpd. 64) D iii.110, 220; M i.35, 182, 248, 278, 496; Dhs 1367; Nett 28, 103; Vism 433; VbhA 373 sq., 401, 422; Tikp. 321. -- See also under nivāsa and cp. Vism ch. xiii, pp. 410 sq. Pumati
Pumati
[onomat. *pu to blow, cp. Gr. fu = sa blowing, bubble, fusa/w blow, Lat. pustula=pustule, Sk. *pupphusa=P. papphasa lung, phutkaroti blow, etc., see Uhlenbeck Ai. Wtb. s. v. pupphusa] to blow, aor. pumi J i.171; ger. pumitvā J i.172. See J.P.T.S. 1889, 207 (?). Puman
Puman
(Pumā) [see puŋs] a male, a man, nom sg. pumo D n.273; Cp. ii.62; instr. pumunā J vi.550. nom. pl. pumā D iii.85 (itthi -- pumā men & women; v. l. K. ˚purisā); J iii.459; acc. sg. pumaŋ J v.154 (gata, cp. purisantara -- gata). -- On decl. cp. Müller, P.Gr. p. 79; Greiger, P.Gr. § 935. *Pura
*Pura
[on etym. see purā, purāṇa, pure] base of adv. & prep. denoting "before"; abl. purato (adv. & prep.) in front of (with gen.), before (only local) Vin i.179; ii.32; D ii.14 (mātu); S i.137; Pv i.111, 113 (opp. pacchā); ii.86 (janâdhipassa); DA i.152; PvA 5 (purisassa), 22, 39 (tassa). Often repeated (distributively) purato purato each time in front, or in front of each, or continuously in front Vin ii.213; Vism 18; cp. pacchato pacchato. -- Otherwise *pura occurs only in foll. der.: (1) adverbial: *puraḥ in purakkharoti, purekkhāra, purohita; purā, pure, puratthaŋ, puratthato. -> (2) adjectival: purāṇa, puratthima, purima. Pura
Pura
(nt.) [Vedic pur. f., later Sk. puraŋ nt. & purī f.] 1. a town, fortress, city Vin i.8 = M i.171 (Kāsinaŋ puraŋ); J i.196, 215; Sn 976, 991, 1012 (˚uttama),1013; J vi.276 (=nagara C); Mhvs 14, 29. -- avapure below the fortress M i.68. -- devapura city of the Gods S iv.202; Vv 6430 (=Sudassana -- mahā -- nagara VvA 285). See also purindada. -- 2. dwelling, house or (divided) part of a house (=antepura), a meaning restricted to the Jātakas, e. g. v.65 (= nivesana C.); vi.251, 492 (=antepura). Cp. thīpura lady's room, harem, also "lady" J v.296, and antepura. -- 3. the body [cp. Sk. pura body as given by Halāyudha 2, 355, see Aufrecht p. 273] Th 1, 279 1150 (so read for pūra, cp. Kern, Toev. s. v. & under sarīradeha). -- Cp. porin. -- 469 -- Purakkhata
Purakkhata
[pp. of purakkharoti] honoured, esteemed, preferred D i.50; M i.85; S i.192, 200; Sn 199, 421, 1015; Nd1 154; Dh 343 ( = parivārita DhA iv.49); J ii.48 (˚parivārita); Pv iii.71 (=payirupāsita PvA 205); DA i.152 (=purato nisinna); ThA 170. Cp. purekkhata. Purakkharoti
Purakkharoti
[fr. puraḥ, cp. Ved. puras -- karoti, see pure] to put in front, to revere, follow, honour; only in foll. sporadic forms: ppr. purakkharāna holding before oneself, i. e. looking at S iii.9 sq.; aor. 3rd pl. purakkharuŋ Miln 22; ger. purakkhatvā M i.28; Sn 969; Nd1 491; J v.45 ( = purato katvā C.); PvA 21, 141. -> purakkhata pp. (q. v.). See also purekkhāra. Puratthaŋ
Puratthaŋ
(adv.) [for Vedic purastāt, fr. puraḥ, see *pura] 1. before S i.141 (na pacchā na puratthaŋ = no after, no before). -- 2. east D i.50 (˚âbhimukha looking eastward.) Puratthato
Puratthato
(adv.) [fr. puratthaŋ, cp. BSk. purastataḥ MVastu ii.198] in front, coram Sn 416 (sic, v. l. BB purakkhato); J vi.242. Puratthima
Puratthima
(adj.) [fr. *pura, cp. Prk. (AMg.) puratthima, acc. to Pischel, Gr. § 602 a der. fr. purastāt ( = P. puratthaŋ) as *purastima, like *pratyastima (= paccatthima) fr. *pratyastaŋ] eastern D i.153; S i.144; J i.71 (˚âbhimukha: Gotama facing E. under the Bo tree). Purā
Purā
(indecl.) [Vedic purā; to Idg. *per, cp. Goth. faúr = Ags. for=E. (be -- ) fore; also Lat. prae=Gr. parai/=Sk. pare] prep. c. abl. "before" (only temporal) Vin iv.17 (purāruṇā=purā aruṇā before dawn); Sn 849 (purā bhedā before dissolution (of the body), after which the Suttanta is named Purābhedasutta, cp. Nd1 210 sq.; expld by sarīra -- bhedā pubbaŋ at SnA 549). Purāṇa
Purāṇa
(adj.) [Venic purāṇa, fr. *per, cp. Sk. parut in former years, Gr. pe/ rusi = Lith. pernai, Goth. fairneis, Ohg. firni=Ger. firn (last year's snow), forn formerly, ferro far] 1. ancient, past Sn 312, 944 (=Nd1 428 atītaŋ, opp. nava=paccuppannaŋ); Dh 156 (=pubbe katāni C.); with ref. to former births or previous existences: p. kammaŋ S ii.64=Nd1 437=Nd2 680 Q. 2; puññaŋ S i.92. -- 2. old (of age), worn out, used (opp. nava recent) D i.224 (bandhanaŋ, opp. navaŋ); Vin ii.123 (udakaŋ p.˚ŋ stale water); S ii.106 (magga); Sn 1 (tacaŋ); J ii.114 (f. purāṇī, of an old bow string, applied jokingly to a former wife); iv.201 (˚paṇṇa old leaf, opp. nava); v.202 (a˚ not old, of years); vi.45 (apurāṇaŋ adv. recently); VbhA 363 (udaka stale water). -> 3. former, late, old in cpds. as ˚dutiyikā the former wife (of a bhikkhu) Vin i.18, 96; iv.263; S i.200; Ud 5; J i.210; ˚rājorodhā former lady of the harem Vin iv.261; ˚sālohita former blood -- relation Sn p. 91; Ud 7; DhA ii.210. Cp. porāṇa. Purātana
Purātana
(adj.) [fr. purā, cp. sanātana in formation] belonging to the past, former, old Nett A 194. Purindada
Purindada
[distorted fr. Vedic puraŋ -- dara, pura+dṛ to break, see darī, thus "breaker of fortresses," Ep. of Indra (& Agni). The P. Commentator (VvA 171) of course takes it popularly as "pure dānaŋ dadātī ti Purindado ti vuccati," thus pure+dā; see also Trenckner, Notes 596; Geiger, P.Gr. § 443] "townbreaker," a name of Sakka (Indra) D ii.260; S i.230; Vv 374, 622; PvA 247. Purima
Purima
(adj.) [compar. -- superl. formation fr. *pura, cp. Sk. purima] preceding, former, earlier, before (opp. pacchima) D i.179; Sn 773, 791, 1011; Nd1 91; J i.110; SnA 149 (˚dhura); PvA 1, 26. In sequence p. majjhima pacchima; past, present, future (or first, second, last) D i.239 sq.; DA i.45 sq. and passim. -- purimatara = purima J i.345 (˚divase the day before).

-- attabhāva a former existence VvA 78; PvA 83, 103, 119. -- jāti a previous birth PvA 45, 62, 79, 90. Purimaka
Purimaka
(adj.) [fr. purima] previous, first Vin ii.167 (opp. pacchimaka). f. ˚ika Vin i.153. Purisa
Purisa
[according to Geiger, Gr. § 303 the base is *pūrṣa, from which the Vedic form puruṣa, and the Prk. -- P. form purisa. The further contraction *pussa *possa yielded posa (q. v.). From the Prk. form puliśa (Māgadhī) we get pulla] man (as representative of the male sex, contrasted to itthi woman, e. g. at A iii.209; iv.197; J i.90; v.72; PvA 51). Definitions of the C. are "puriso nāma manussa -- puriso na yakkho na peto etc." (i. e. man kat) e)coxh/n) Vin iv.269 (the same expln for purisa -- puggala at Vin iv.214); "seṭṭh' aṭṭhena puri setī ti puriso ti satto vuccati" VvA 42 -- 1. man D i.61 (p. kassaka "free man"); ii.13; S i.225; A i.28, 126; ii.115; iii.156; Sn 102, 112, 316, 740, 806 and passim; Dh 117, 152, 248; Nd1 124; PvA 3, 4, 165, 187; VvA 13 (majjhima˚, paṭhama˚, as t.t. g.?). uttama˚ S ii.278; iii.61, 166; iv.380; It 97; mahā˚ S v.158; A ii.35; iii.223; iv.229 (see also under mahā); sappurisa (q. v.). Var. epithets of the Buddha e. g. at S. i.28 sq. -- Kāpurisa a contemptible man; kimpurisa a wild man of the woods ("whatever man"), f. kimpurisī J v.215. -- purisa as "a man, some one, somebody" as character or hero in var. similes, e. g. angārakāsuyaŋ khipanaka˚ Vism 489; asucimhi patita Vism 465; āgantuka˚ VbhA 23; dubbala Vism 533; papāte patanto VbhA 23 (cannot be a help to others; similarly with patita at VbhA 170 = Vism 559); bhikkhusanghaŋ disvā Vism 333; maṇḍapa -- lagga Vism 339 sq.; lakuṇṭaka -- pāda & dīghapāda VbhA 26; cp. the foll.: of a man pleasing the king VbhA 442 sq.; a man wishing to perform a long journey in one day Vism 244; a man breathing when exhausted Vism 274. Frequently elsewhere. -- 2. an attendant, servant, waiter Vin ii.297; D i.60 (dāsa+), 72 (id.); J i.385 (dāsa˚); vi.462. Cp. porisa, posa.

-- atthika one who seeks a servant Vin ii.297. -- anta = purisādhama Sn 664 (anta=Sk. antya; Sn A 479 explns by antimapurisa). -- antaragatā touched by a man (lit. gone in by . . .), a woman who has sexual intercourse, a woman in intercourse with a man D i.166 (cp. Dial. i.228); M i.77; A i.295; ii.206; Vin iv.322; Pug 55 (=he does not accept food, lest their intercourse should be broken: rati antarāyo hoti PugA 231); DA i.79 (=itthi, as opp. to kumārikā). Cp. pumaŋ gata, J v.154. -- allu (& ālu) N. of certain monstrous beings, living in the wilderness J v.416 (=vaḷavā -- mukhayakkhinī, a y. with the face of a mare), 418; vi.537 (˚ālu=vaḷavā -- m. -- pekkhī C.). -- ājañña "a noble steed of a man," a thorough -- bred or remarkable man S iii.91; A v.325 sq., Sn 544; Dh 193; as -- ājāneyya at DhA i.310; -- ājāniya at A i.290; ii.115; iv.397 sq.; v.324. -- āda a bad man ("man -- eater") a wild man, cannibal J v.25 (cp. puruṣāda Jtm 3141); ˚ādaka J v.30. -- ādhama a wicked man Dh 78; J v.268. -- indriya male faculty, masculinity S v.204; A iv.57; Dhs 634, 715, 839, 972; Vism 447, 492. -- uttama "the highest of men," an excellent man A v.16, 325 sq.; Sn 544; Dh 78; DhA ii.188. -- usabha (purisusabha) "a bull of a man," a very strong man Vin iii.39. -- kathā talk about men D i.8. -- kāra manliness D i.53 (cp. DA i.161); Miln 96. -- thāma manly strength D i.53; S ii.28; A ii.118; iv.190. -- dammasārathi guide of men who have to be restrained, Ep. of the Buddha [cp. BSk. puruṣa -- damyasārathi Divy 54 and passim] S ii.69; A i.168, 207; ii.56, 112, 147; Sn p. 103 (=vicitrehi vinayan' ûpāyehi purisadamme sāretī ti SnA 443); It 79; Pug 57; Vism 207; ThA 178. -- dosā (pl.) faults or defects in a man; eight are discussed in detail at A iv.190 sq.; Ps i.130; eighteen at J vi.542, 548. -- dhorayha a human beast of burden S i.29. -- parakkama manly energy D i.53; S ii.28. -- puggala a man, a human character D iii.5, 227 (eight); S i.220 (8); ii.69, 82, 206; iv.272 sq. = It 88 (8) (expld at Vism 219); A i.32, 130, 173, 189; ii.34, 56; iii.36, 349; iv.407 (8); v.139, 183 (8), 330 (8); Vin iv.212 sq. (=male); VbhA 497; -- bhava state of being a man, manhood, virility J iii.124; Dhs 634, 415, 839; PvA 63. -- bhūmi man's stage, as "eight stages of a prophet's existence" (Dial. i.72) at D i.54, in detail at DA i.162, 163. -- medha man -- sacrifice, human sacrifice S i.76; A ii.42; iv.151; It 21; Sn 303. -- yugāni (pl.) (4) pairs of men S iv.272 sq.; A i.208; ii.34, 56; iii.36; iv.407; v.330; D iii.5, 227; It 88; in verse Vv 4421; expld Vism 219 (see under yuga). -- lakkhaṇa (lucky) marks on a man D i.9. -- linga (see also pullinga) a man's characteristic, membrum virile Vin iii.35; Dhs 634, 715, 839; Tikp 50; Vism 184. -- viriya manly vigour S ii.28. -- vyañjana the membrum virile (=˚linga) Vin ii.269. -- 470 -- Purisaka
Purisaka
(n. -- adj.) [fr. purisa] 1. a (little) man, only in ˚tiṇa doll effigy made of grass (straw), scarecrow Miln 352; Vism 462; DhsA 111. -- 2. (adj.) having a man, f. ˚ikā in eka˚ (a woman) having intercourse with only one man J i.290. Purisatta
Purisatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. purisa] manhood, virility Dhs 634, 715, 839. Purisattana
Purisattana
(nt.) [ = purisatta, cp. Trenckner, Notes 7037] manhood Miln 171. Pure
Pure
(indecl.) [is the genuine representative (with Mā- gadhī e) of Vedic puraḥ, which also appears as *puro in purohita, as *pura in purakkharoti. It belongs to base Idg. *per (cp. pari), as in Cr. pa/ros before, earlier, pre/ sbus "preceding in life," i. e. older; Ohg. first] before (both local & temporal), thus either "before, in front" or "before, formerly, earlier." In both meanings the opp. is pacchā -- (a) local S i.176 (pure hoti to lead); J ii.153 (opp. pacchima) -- (b) temporal S i.200; Sn 289, 311, 541, 645, 773 ( = atītaŋ Nd1 33; opp. pacchā); Dh 348 (opp. pacchato); J i.50 (with abl. pure puṇṇamāya). Often meaning "in a former life," e. g. Vv 348, 3413; Pv i.21 (= pubbe atītajātiyaŋ PvA 10); ii.32 (cp. purima); ii.42; ii.74 (=atītabhāve PvA 101); ii.913. -- apure apacchā neither before nor after, i. e. simultaneously PugA 186 (see apubbaŋ): -- puretaraŋ (adv.) first, ahead, before any one else DhA i.13, 40. -- (c) modal, meaning "lest" DA i.4; cp. purā in same sense Jtm. 28.

-- cārika going before, guiding, leading, only in phrase ˚n katvā putting before everything else, taking as a guide or ideal J i.176 (mettā -- bhāvanaŋ); iii.45 (id.), 180 (khantiñ ca mettañ ca); vi.127 (Indaŋ); PugA 194 (paññaŋ). -- java [cp. BSk. purojava attendant Divy 211, 214, 379; also Vedic puroyāva preceding] preceding, preceded by, controlled by ( = pubbangama) S i.33 (sammādiṭṭhi˚); Sn 1107 (dhamma -- takka˚, cp. Nd2 318). -- jāta happening before, as logical category (˚paccaya) "antecedence"; Vism 537 (elevenfold)= Tikp. 17; freq. in Dukp. & Tikp. (as ārammaṇa˚ & vatthu˚), cp. VbhA 403 (˚ārammaṇa & ˚vatthuka). -- dvāra front door J ii.153. -- bhatta the early meal, morning meal, breakfast [cp. BSk. purobhaktakā Divy 307] VvA 120; PvA 109; ˚ŋ in the morning VvA 51; PvA 78; ˚kicca duties after the morning meal DA i.45 sq.; SnA 131 sq. -- bhava "being in front," i. e. superior DA i.75 (in exegesis of porī). -- samaṇa one who wanders ahead of someone else Vin ii.32 (opp. pacchā˚). Purekkhata
Purekkhata
= purakkhata Sn 849, 859, (a˚); Nd1 73, 214. Purekkharoti
Purekkharoti
[for purakkharoti, pure = Sk. puraḥ] to honour etc. Sn 794=803; ppr. purekkharāna Sn 844, 910. Purekkhāra
Purekkhāra
[for purakkhāra, puraḥ+kṛ, see pure] defer- ence, devotion, honour; usually -- ˚ (adj.) devoted to, honouring D i.115; Vin iii.130; iv.2, 277; Nd1 73, 214; Dh 73 ( = parivāra DhA ii.77); Vv 3414 (attha˚= hitesin VvA 152); VbhA 466 (˚mada); VvA 72. Purekkhāratā
Purekkhāratā
(f.) [abstr. fr. purekkhāra] deference to ( -- ˚) DhA iv.181 (attha˚). Purohita
Purohita
[purah+pp. of dhā, ch. Vedic purohita] 1. placed in front, i. e. foremost or at the top, in phrase devā Inda -- purohitā the gods with Inda at their head J vi.127 ( = Indaŋ pure -- cārikaŋ katvā C.). -- 2. the king's headpriest (brahmanic), or domestic chaplain, acting at the same time as a sort of Prime Minister D i.138; J i.210; v.127 (his wife as brāhmaṇī); Pug 56 (brāhmaṇa p.); Miln 241, 343 (dhamma -- nagare p.); PvA 74. Pulaka
Pulaka
[cp. Sk. pulāka, Halāyudha 5, 43; not Sk. pulaka, as Kern, Toev. s. v. for which see also Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. pilus] shrivelled grain Miln 232 (sukka -- yava˚ of dried barley); DhA ii.154 (SS; T. reads mūlakaŋ, which is expld by Bdhgh as "nitthusaŋ katvā ussedetvā gahita -- yava -- taṇḍula vuccanti" ibid). Here belongs pulasa -- patta of J iii.478. (vv. ll. pulā˚, mūlā˚, mulā˚; expld by C. as "saṇhāṇi pulasa -- gaccha -- paṇṇāni," thus taking pulasa as a kind of shrub, prob. because the word was not properly understood). Puḷava
Puḷava
[etym.? dial; cp. Class. Sk. pulaka erection of the hairs of the body, also given by lexicographers (Hemachandra 1202) in meaning "vermin"] a worm, maggot M iii.168; Sn 672; J iii.177; vi.73; Miln 331, 357; Vism 179 ( = kimi) DhA iii.106, 411. See next. Puḷavaka
Puḷavaka
(BB puḷuvaka) = puḷava DhA iv.46; VvA 76; PvA 14. One of the (asubha) kammaṭṭhānas is called p. "the contemplation (˚saññā idea) of the worminfested corpse" S v.131; Dhs 264; Vism 110, 179 (puḷu˚), 194 (id.; as asubha -- lakkhaṇa); DhA iv.47. See also asubha. Pulasa
Pulasa
see pulaka. Pulina
Pulina
(& Puḷina) (nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. pulina, also Halā- yudha 3, 48] 1. a sandy bank or mound in the middle of a river J ii.366 (vālika˚); iii.389 (id.); v.414; Miln 297 (ḷ); Dāvs iv.29; Vism 263 (nadī˚); VvA 40 (paṇḍara˚). -- 2. a grain of sand Miln 180 (l). Pulla
Pulla
[a contracted form of purisa (q. v.)] man, only in cpd. pullinga ( = purisa -- linga) membrum virile, penis J v.143 (where expld by C. as uṇha -- chārikā pl. "hot embers"; the pass. is evidently misunderstood; v. l. BB phull˚). Pussa˚
Pussa˚
at Nd1 90 in cpds. ˚tila, ˚tela, dantakaṭṭha, mat- tikā, etc. is probably to be read with v. l. phussa˚; meaning not quite clear ("natural, raw"?). Pussaka
Pussaka
at A i.188 is to be read as phussaka (see phussa3) cuckoo. Pussaratha
Pussaratha
at J vi.39 read phussa˚ (q. v.). Pūga
Pūga1
(nt.) [etym.? cp. Vedic pūga in meaning of both pūga1 & pūga2] heap, quantity; either as n. with gen. or as adj. = many, a lot Sn 1073 (pūgaŋ vassānaŋ = bahūni vassāni Nd2 452); Pv iv.79 (pūgāni vassāni); VbhA 2 (khandhaṭṭha, piṇḍ˚, pūg˚). Pūga
Pūga2
(m.) [see preceding] corporation, guild Vin ii.109, 212; iv.30, 78, 226, 252; M iii.48; A iii.300; Ud 71; Pug 29 ( = seṇi PugA 210).

-- āyatana guild's property J vi.108 ( = pūga -- santaka dhana C.). -- gāmaṇika superintendant of a guild, guildmaster A iii.76. -- majjhagata gone into a guild A i.128=Pug 29; SnA 377. Pūga
Pūga3
[Class. Sk. pūga] the betel -- palm, betel nut tree J v.37 (˚rukkha -- ppamāṇaŋ ucchu -- vanaŋ). -- 471 -- Pūja
Pūja
(adj.) [Epic Sk. pūjya, cp. pujja] to be honoured, honourable A iii.78 (v. l.; T. pūjja); J iii.83 (apūja = apūjanīya C.); pūjaŋ karoti to do homage Vism 312. -> See also pūjiya. Pūjanā
Pūjanā
(f.) [fr. pūjeti] veneration, worship A ii.203 sq.; Dh 106, 107; Pug 19; Dhs 1121; Miln 162. Pūjaneyya & Pūjanīya
Pūjaneyya
& Pūjanīya [grd. of pūjeti] to be honoured, entitled to homage S i.175; SnA 277; -- īya J iii.83; Sdhp 230, 551. Pūjā
Pūjā
(f.) [fr. pūj, see pūjeti] honour, worship, devotional attention A i.93 (āmisa˚, dhamma˚); v.347 sq.; Sn 906; Dh 73, 104; Pv i.55; i.512; Dpvs vii.12 (cetiya˚); SnA 350; PvA 8; Sdhp 213, 230, 542, 551.

-- âraha worthy of veneration, deserving attention Dh 194; DhA iii.251. -- karaṇa doing service, paying homage PvA 30. -- kāra = karaṇa DhA ii.44. Pūjita
Pūjita
[pp. of pūjeti] honoured, revered, done a service S i.175, 178; ii.119; Th 1, 186; Sn 316; Ud 73 (sakkata mānita p. apacita); Pv i.42 ( = paṭimānita C.); ii.810. Pūjiya
Pūjiya
[ = pūja, Sk. pūjya] worthy to be honoured Sn 527; J v.405; Sdhp 542. Pūjetar
Pūjetar
[n. ag. fr. pūjeti] one who shows attention or care A v.347 sq., 350 sq. Pūjeti
Pūjeti
[pūj, occurring in Rigveda only in śācipūjana RV viii.16, 12] to honour, respect, worship, revere Sn 316 (Pot. pūjayeyya), 485 (imper. pūjetha); Dh 106, 195; DA i.256; PvA 54 (aor. sakkariŋsu garukkariŋsu mānesuŋ pūjesuŋ); Sdhp 538. -- pp. pūjita (q. v.). Pūti
Pūti
(adj.) [cp. Sk. pūti, pūyati to fester; Gr. pu/qw, pu_on = pus; Lat. pūtidus putrid; Goth. fūls=Ger. faul, E. foul] putrid, stinking, rotten, fetid D ii.353 (khaṇḍāni pūtīni); M i.73, 89=iii.92 (aṭṭhikāni pūtīni); Vin iii.236 (anto˚); S iii.54; Pv i.32; i.61 (=kuṇapagandha PvA 32); Vism 261 (=pūtika at KhA 61), 645 (˚pajā itthi, in simile); PvA 67; Sdhp 258. -- See also puccaṇḍatā.

-- kāya foul body, mass of corruption, Ep. of the human body M ii.65; S i.131; iii.120; Th 2, 466; ThA 283; SnA 40; DhA iii.111. -- kummāsa rotten junket Vism 343. -- gandha bad smell, ill -- smelling Pv i.31 ( = kuṇapa˚ PvA 15); J v.72. -- dadhi rancid curds Vism 362; VbhA 68; cp. pūti -- takka Vism 108. -- deha=˚kāya S i.236. -- maccha stinking fish M iii.168 (+˚kuṇapa & ˚kummāsa); in simile at It 68=J iv.435 =vi.236=KhA 127. -- mukha having a putrid mouth SnA 458 (āsīvisa); PvA 12, 14. -- mutta strong -- smelling urine, usually urine of cattle used as medicine by the bhikkhu Vin i.58=96 (˚bhesajja); M i.316; It 103; VvA 5 (˚harītaka). -- mūla having fetid roots M i.80. -- latā "stinking creeper," a sort of creeper or shrub (Coccolus cordifolius, otherwise gaḷoci) Sn 29=Miln 369; Vism 36, 183; KhA 47 (˚saṇṭhāna); DhA iii.110, 111 (taruṇā galoci -- latā pūtilatā ti vuccati). -- lohitaka with putrid blood Pv i.78 (=kuṇapa˚ PvA 37). -- sandeha=˚kāya Dh 148. Pūtika
Pūtika
(adj.) = pūti M i.449; S v.51; A i.261; J i.164; ii.275; Miln 252; DhA i.321; iii.111; VvA 76. -- apūtika not rotten, fresh M i.449; A i.261; J v.198; Miln 252. Pūpa
Pūpa
[cp. Epic Sk. pūpa; "a rich cake of wheaten flour" Hȧlāyudha, 2, 164; and BSk. pūpalikā Av.Ś ii.116] a special kind of cake, baked or boiled in a bag J v.46 (˚pasibbaka cake -- bag); DhA i.319 (jāla˚ net -- cake; v. l. pūva). See also pūva. Pūra
Pūra
(adj.) [cp. Class. Sk. pūra; fr. pṛ, see pūreti] full; full of (with gen.) D i.244 (nadī); M i.215; iii.90, 96; A iv.230; Sn 195, 721; Ud 90 (nadī); J i.146; Pv iv.313 ( = pānīyena puṇṇa PvA 251); Pug 45, 46; PvA 29. -- dup˚ difficult to fill J v.425. -- pūraŋ ( -- ˚) nt. as adv. in kucchi -- pūraŋ to his belly's fill J iii.268; Vism 108 (udara -- pūra -- mattaŋ). Pūraka
Pūraka
(adj.) [ = pāra+ka] filling ( -- ˚) Vism 106 (mukha˚). Pūraṇa
Pūraṇa
(adj. n.) [fr. pūreti] 1. (adj.) filling Sn 312 (? better read purāṇa with SnA 324); PvA 70 (eka -- thālaka˚), 77 (id.). As Np. in Pūraṇa Kassapa, which however seems to be distorted from Purāṇa K. (D i.47; Sn p. 92, cp. KhA 126, 175; SnA 200, 237, 372). The expln (popular etym.) of the name at DA i.142 refers it to pūreti ("kulassa ekūnaŋ dāsa -- sataŋ pūrayamāno jāto" i. e. making the hundred of servants full). -> 2. (nt.) an expletive particle (pada˚ "verse -- filler"), so in C. style of "a" SnA 590; "kho" ib. 139; "kho pana" ib. 137; "taŋ" KhA 219; "tato" SnA 378; "pi" ib. 536; "su" ib. 230; "ha" ib. 416; "hi" ib. 377. See pada˚. Pūratta
Pūratta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. pūra] getting or being full, fulness Vin ii.239 (opp. unattaŋ). Pūraḷāsa
Pūraḷāsa
[cp. Vedic puroḍāśa] sacrificial cake (brahmanic), oblation Sn 459 ( = carukañ ca pūvañ ca SnA 405), 467, 479 (=havyasesa C.), 486. Pūrita
Pūrita
[pp. of pūreti] filled with ( -- ˚), full Pv ii.120 ( = pari- puṇṇa PvA 77); PvA 134. Pūreti
Pūreti
[Caus. of pṛ, pṛṇāti to fill, intrs. pūryate, cp. Lat. pleo; Gr. pi/m -- plhmi, plh/qw, polu/s much, Goth. filu = Ger. viel; Ohg. folc=folk] 1. to fill (with=gen. or instr.) S i.173; Sn 30, 305; J i.50 (pāyāsassa), 347; ii.112 (pret. pūrayittha); iv.272 (sagga -- padaŋ pūrayiŋsu filled with deva world); DhA ii.82 (sakaṭāni ratanehi); iv.200 (pattaŋ); PvA 100 (bhaṇḍassa), 145 (suvaṇṇassa). -- 2. to fulfil DhA i.68. -- 3. (Caus.) to make fill Vism i 37 (lakāraŋ). -- pp. puṇṇa. See also pari˚. Caus. II. pūrāpeti to cause to fill S ii.259: J i.99. Pūva
Pūva
[cp. Sk. pūpa; with v for p] a cake, baked in a pan (kapalla) A iii.76; J i.345 (kapalla˚ pan -- cake), 347; iii.10 (pakka˚); Vv 136; 296 ( = kapalla -- pūva VvA 123); Pv iv.313 (=khajjaka PvA 251); Vism 108 (jāla˚ net -- cake, cp. jāla -- pūpa), 359 (pūvaŋ vyāpetvā, in comp.); VbhA 65, 255 (simile of woman going to bake a cake); KhA 56; DA i.142; VvA 67, 73 (˚surā, one of the 5 kinds of intoxication liquors, see surā); PvA 244. See also Vin. Texts i.39 (sweetmeats, sent as presents). Pūvika
Pūvika
[fr. pūva] a cake -- seller, confectioner Miln 331. Pe
Pe
is abbreviation of peyyāla (q. v.); cp. la. Pekkha
Pekkha1
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [cp. Sk. prekṣā f. & prekṣaka adj.; fr. pa+īks] looking out for, i. e. intent upon, wishing; usually in puñña˚ desirous of merit S i.167; Dh 108 ( = puññaŋ icchanto DhA ii.234); Vv 3421 (=puññaphalaŋ ākankhanto VvA 154); PvA 134. Pekkha
Pekkha2
(adj.) [grd. of pekkhati, Sk. prekṣya] to be looked for, to be expected, desirable J vi.213. Pekkhaka
Pekkhaka
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. pekkha1] seeing, looking at; wishing to see ThA 73 (Ap. v.59), f. ˚ikā S i.185 (vihāra˚). Pekkhaṇa
Pekkhaṇa
(nt.) [fr. pa+īkṣ] seeing, sight, look DA i.185, 193; KhA 148 ( = dassana). Pekkhati
Pekkhati
[pa+īkṣ] to behold, regard, observe, look at D ii.20; S iv.291; J vi.420. -- ppr. pekkhamāna Vin i.180; Sn 36 sq. ( = dakkhamāna Nd2 453), 1070, 1104; Pv ii.37; Vism 19 (disā -- vidisaŋ). gen. pl. pekkhataŋ Sn 580 (cp. SnA 460). -- Caus. pekkheti to cause one to behold, to make one see or consider Vin ii.73≈ A v.71. -- Cp. anu˚. Pek(k)havant
Pek(k)havant
[fr. pekkhā] desirous of (loc.) J v.403. -- 472 -- Pek(k)hā
Pek(k)hā
(f.) [fr. pa+īkṣ] 1. consideration, view Vbh 325, 328. -- 2. desire J v.403 (p. vuccati taṇhā). -- 3. (or (pekkhaŋ?) show at a fair D i.6 ( = naṭa -- samajjā DA i.84); see Dial. i.7, n. 4 and cp. J.R.A.S. 1903, 186. Pekkhin
Pekkhin
(adj.) [fr. pekkhati] looking (in front), in phrase yugamattaŋ p. "looking only the distance of a plough" Miln 398. Pekhuṇa
Pekhuṇa
(pekkh˚) (nt.) [not with Childers fr. *pakṣman, but with Pischel, Gr. § 89 fr. Sk. prenkhaṇa a swing, Vedic prenkha, fr. pra+īnkh, that which swings, through *prenkhuṇa>prekhuṇa>pekhuṇa] 1. a wing Th 1, 211 (su˚ with beautiful feathers), 1136; J i.207. -- 2. a peacock's tail -- feathers J vi.218 ( = morapiñja C.), 497 (citrapekkhuṇaŋ moraŋ). Pecca
Pecca
[ger. of pa+i, cp. BSk. pretya Jtm 3154] "after having gone past," i. e. after death, having departed S i.182; iii.98; A ii.174 sq.; iii.34, 46, 78; Sn 185, 188, 248, 598, 661; It 111; Dh 15, 131 ( = paraloke DhA hi.51); J i.169; v.489, Pv i.119; iii.75 (v. l. pacca). The form peccaŋ under influence of Prk. (AMg.) peccā (see Pischel, Prk. Gr. 587) at J vi.360. Peṭaka
Peṭaka
(adj.) [fr. piṭaka] "what belongs to the Piṭaka," as title of a non -- canonical book for the usual Peṭak' opadesa "instruction in the Piṭaka." dating from the beginning of our era (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. p. 18), mentioned at Vism 141 DhsA 165. Cp. tipeṭaka, see also piṭaka. Peṇāhikā
Peṇāhikā
(f.) [dial.; etym. uncertain] a species of bird (crane?) Miln 364, 402; shortened to peṇāhi at Miln 407 (in the uddāna). Cp. Miln trsl. ii.343. Peṇṇakata
Peṇṇakata
is v. l. for paṇṇakata Npl. at Vv 455 sq. (see VvA 197). Peta
Peta
[pp of pa+ī, lit. gone past, gone before] dead, departed, the departed spirit. The Buddhistic peta represents the Vedic pitaraḥ (manes, cp. pitṛyajña), as well as the Brāhmaṇic preta. The first are souls of the "fathers," the second ghosts, leading usually a miserable existence as the result (kammaphala) or punishment of some former misdeed (usually avarice). They may be raised in this existence by means of the dakkhiṇā (sacrificial gift) to a higher category of mahiddhikā petā (alias yakkhas), or after their period of expiation shift into another form of existence (manussa, deva, tiracchāna). The punishment in the Nirayas is included in the peta existence. Modes of suffering are given S ii.255; cp K.S. ii, 170 p. On the whole subject see Stede, Die Gespenstergeschichten des Peta Vatthu, Leipzig 1914; in the Peta Vatthu the unhappy ghosts are represented, whereas the Vimāna Vatthu deals with the happy ones. -- 1. (souls of the departed, manes) D iii.189 (petānaŋ kālakatānaŋ dakkhiṇaŋ anupadassati); A iii.43 (id.); i.155 sq.; v.132 (p. ñātisalohita); M i.33; S i.61 = 204; Sn 585, 590, 807 (petā -- kālakatā=matā Nd1 126); J v.7 (=mata C.); Pv i.57; i.121; ii.610. As pubba -- peta ("deceased -- before") at A ii.68; iii.45; iv.244; J ii.360. -- 2. (unhappy ghosts) S ii.255 sq.; Vin iv.269 (contrasted with purisa, yakkha & tiracchāna -- gata); A v.269 (dānaŋ petānaŋ upakappati); J iv.495 sq. (yakkhā pisācā petā, cp. preta -- piśācayoḥ MBhār. 13, 732); Vbh 412 sq.; Sdhp 96 sq. -- manussapeta a ghost in human form J iii.72; v.68; VvA 23. The later tradition on Petas in their var. classes and states is reflected in Miln 294 (4 classes: vantāsikā, khuppipāsā, nijjhāma -- taṇhikā, paradatt' ûpajīvino) & 357 (appearance and fate); Vism 501 =VbhA 97 (as state of suffering, with narakā, tiracchā, asurā); VbhA 455 (as nijjhāmataṇhikā, khuppipāsikā, paradatt' upajīvino). -> 3. (happy ghosts) mahiddhikā petī Pv i.101; yakkha mahiddhika Pv iv.154; Vimānapeta mahiddhika PvA 145; peta mahiddhika PvA 217. [Cp. BSk. pretamahardhika Divy 14]. -- f. petī Vin iv.20; J i.240; Pv i.62; PvA 67 and passim. Vimānapetī PvA 47, 50, 53 and in Vimāna -- vatthu passim.

-- upapattika born as a peta PvA 119. -- katha (pubba˚) tales (or talk) about the dead (not considered orthodox) D i.8, cp. DA i.90; A v.128. -- kicca duty towards the deceased (i. e. death -- rites) J ii.5; DhA i.328. -- rājā king of the Petas (i. e. Yama) J v.453 (˚visayaŋ na muñcati "does not leave behind the realm of the Petaking"); C. expls by petayoni and divides the realm into petavisaya and kālakañjaka -- asura -- visaya. -- yoni the peta realm PvA 9, 35, 55, 68, 103 and passim. -- loka the peta world Sdhp 96. -- vatthu a peta or ghost -- story; N. of one (perhaps the latest) of the canonical books belonging to the Suttanta -- Piṭaka KhA 12; DA i.178 (Ankura˚). Petattana
Petattana
(nt.) [abstr. fr. peta] state or condition of a Peta Th 1, 1128. Pettanika
Pettanika
[fr. pitar] one who lives on the fortune or power inherited from his father A iii.76 = 300. Pettāpiya
Pettāpiya
[for pettāviya (Epic Sk. pitṛvya), cp. Trenckner, Notes 6216, 75] fatḥer's brother, paternal uncle A iii.348; v.138 (gloss pitāmaho). Pettika
Pettika
(adj.) [fr. pitar, for pētika, cp. Epic Sk. paitṛka & P. petteyya] paternal Vin iii.16; iv.223; D ii.232; S v.146 = Miln 368 (p. gocara); (sake p. visaye ʻ your own home -- grounds ʼ) D iii.58; S v.146; J ii.59; vi.193 (iṇa). Also in cpd. mātā -- pettika maternal & paternal D i.34, 92; J i.146. Pettivisaya
Pettivisaya
(& Pitti˚) [Sk. *paitrya -- viṣaya & *pitrya- viṣaya, der. fr. pitar, but influenced by peta] the world of the manes, the realm of the petas (synonymous with petavisaya & petayoni) D iii.234; It 93; J v.186; Pv ii.22; ii.79; Miln 310; DhA i.102; iv.226; Vism 427; VbhA 4, 455; PvA 25 sq., 29, 59 sq., 214, 268; Sdhp 9. Petteyya
Petteyya
(adj.) [fr. pitar; cp. Vedic pitrya] father -- loving, showing filial piety towards one's father D iii.72, 74; S v.467; A i.138; J iii.456; v.35; Pv ii.718. See also matteyya. Petteyyatā
Petteyyatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. petteyya] reverence towards one's father D iii.70 (a˚), 145, 169; Dh 332 ( = pitari sammāpaṭipatta DhA iv.34); Nd2 294. Cp. matteyyatā. Petyā
Petyā
(adv.) [fr. pitar, for Sk. pitrā; cp. Trenckner, Notes 564] from the father's side J v.214 ( = pitito). Pema
Pema
(nt.) [fr. prī, see pīṇeti & piya & cp. BSk. prema Jtm 221; Vedic preman cons. stem] love, affection D i.50; iii.284 sq.; M i.101 sq.; S iii.122; iv.72, 329; v.89, 379; A ii.213; iii.326 sq.; Sn 41; Dh 321; DA i.75. -- (a)vigata -- pema with(out) love or affection D iii.238, 252; S iii.7 sq., 107 sq., 170; iv.387; A ii.174 sq.; iv.15, 36, 461 sq. Pemaka
Pemaka
(m. or nt.) [fr. pema] = pema J iv.371. Pemanīya
Pemanīya
(adj.) [fr. pema as grd. formation, cp. BSk., premaṇīya MVastu iii.343] affectionate, kind, loving, amiable, agreeable D i.4 (cp. DA i.75); ii.20 (˚ssara); A ii.209; Pug 57; J iv.470. Peyya
Peyya1
[grd. of pibati] to be drunk, drinkable, only in compn or neg. apeyya undrinkable A iii.188; J iv.205, 213 (apo apeyyo). maṇḍa˚ to be drunk like cream, i. e. of the best quality S ii.29. manāpika˚ sweet to drink Miln 313. duppeyya difficult to drink Sdhp 158. See also kākapeyya. Peyya
Peyya2
= piya, only in cpds. vajja˚ [*priya -- vadya] kindness of language, kind speech, one of the 4 sangaha -- vatthus (grounds of popularity) A ii.32, 248; iv.219, 364; D iii.190, 192, 232; J v.330. Cp. BSk. priya -- vādya MVastu i.3; and ˚vācā kind language D iii.152; Vv 8436 (=piyavacana VvA 345). -- It is doubtful whether vāca -- peyya at Sn 303 (Ep. of sacrifice) is the same as ˚vācā (as adj.), or whether it represents vāja -- peyya [Vedic vāja sacrificial food] as Bdhgh expls it at SnA 322 (=vājam ettha pivanti; v. l. vāja˚), thus peyya= peyya1. -- 473 -- Peyyāla
Peyyāla
(nt.?) [a Māgadhism for pariyāya, so Kern, Toev. s. v. after Trenckner, cp. BSk. piyāla and peyāla MVastu iii.202, 219] repetition, succession, formula; way of saying, phrase ( = pariyāya 5) Vism 46 (˚mukha beginning of discourse), 351 (id. and bahu˚ -- tanti having many discourses or repetitions), 411 (˚pāḷi a row of successions or etceteras); VvA 117 (pāḷi˚ vasena "because of the successive Pāli text"). -- Very freq. in abridged form, where we would say "etc.," to indicate that a passage has be to repeated (either from preceding context, or to be supplied from memory, if well known). The literal meaning would be "here (follows) the formula (pariyāya)." We often find pa for pe, e. g. A v.242, 270, 338, 339, 355; sometimes pa+pe combd, e. g. S v.466. -- As pe is the first syllable of peyyāla so la is the last and is used in the same sense; the variance is according to predilection of certain MSS.; la is found e. g. S v.448, 267 sq.; or as v. l. of pe: A v.242, 243, 354; or la+pe combd: S v.464, 466. -- On syllable pe Trenckner, Notes 66, says: "The sign of abridgment. pe, or as it is written in Burmese copies, pa, means peyyāla which is not an imperative ʻ insert, fill up the gap, ʼ but a substantive, peyyālo or peyyālaŋ, signifying a phrase to be repeated over & over again. I consider it a popular corruption of the synonymous pariyāya, passing through *payyāya, with -- eyy -- for -- ayy -- , like seyyā, Sk. śayyā." See also Vin. Texts i.291; Oldenberg, K.Z. 35, 324. Perita
Perita
is Kern's (Toev. s. v.) proposed reading for what he considered a faulty spelling in bhaya -- merita (p for m) J iv.424 = v.359. This however is bhaya -- m -- erita with the hiatus -- m, and to supplant perita (=Sk. prerita) is unjustified. Pelaka
Pelaka
[etym.?] a hare J vi.538 ( = sasa C.). Peḷa
Peḷa
[a Prk. form for piṇḍa, cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 122 peḍhāla] a lump, only in yaka˚ the liver ( -- lump) Sn 195 ( = yakana -- piṇḍa SnA 247)=J i.146. Peḷā
Peḷā
[cp. Class. & B. Sk. peṭa, f. peṭī & peṭā, peḍā Divy 251, 365; and the BSk. var. phelā Divy 503; MVastu ii.465] 1. a (large) basket J iv.458; vi.185; Cp. ii.25; Miln 23, 282; Vism 304; KhA 46 (peḷāghata, wrong reading, see p. 68 App.); ThA 29. -- 2. a chest (for holding jewelry etc.) Pv iv.142; Mhvs 36, 20; DhsA 242 (peḷ -- opamā, of the 4 treasure -- boxes). -- Cp. piṭaka. Peḷikā
Peḷikā
(f.) [cp. peḷā] a basket DhA i.227 (pasādhana˚, v. l. pelakā). Pesa
Pesa
is spurious spelling for pessa (q. v.). Pesaka
Pesaka
[fr. pa+iṣ, cp. Vedic preṣa order, command] employer, controller, one who attends or looks after Vin ii.177 (ārāmika˚ etc.); A iii.275 (id.). Pesakāra
Pesakāra
[pesa+kāra, epsa = Vedic peśaḥ, fr. piś: see piŋsati1] weaver D i.52; Vin iii.259; iv.7; J iv.475; DhA i.424 (˚vīthi); iii.170 sq.; VbhA 294 sq. (˚dhītā the weaver's daughter; story of -- ) PvA 42 sq., 67. Pesana
Pesana
(nt.) [fr. pa+iṣ, see peseti] sending out, message; service J iv.362 (pesanāni gacchanti); v.17 (pesane pesiyanto.)

-- kāraka a servant J vi.448; VvA 349. -- kārikā (a girl) doing service, a messenger, servant J iii 414; DhA i.227. Pesanaka
Pesanaka
(adj.) [fr. pesana] "message sender," employing for service, in ˚corā robbers making (others) servants J i.253. Pesanika (˚iya)
Pesanika
(˚iya) (adj.) [fr. pesana] connected with messages, going messages, only in phrase jangha˚ messenger on foot Vin iii.185; J ii.82; Miln 370 (˚iya). Pesala
Pesala
(adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. peśala; Bdhgh's pop. etym. at SnA 475 is "piya -- sīla"] lovable, pleasant, well -- behaved, amiable S i.149; ii.387; A iv.22; v.170; Sn 678; Sn p. 124; Miln 373; Sdhp 621. Often as Ep. of a good bhikkhu, e. g. at S i.187; Vin i.170; ii.241; J iv.70; VvA 206; PvA 13, 268. Pesāca
Pesāca
is reading at D i.54 for pisāca (so v. l.). Pesi (pesī)
Pesi
(pesī) (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. peśī] 1. a lump, usually a mass of flesh J iii.223 = DhA iv.67 (pesi=maŋsapesi C.). Thus maŋsapesi, muscle Vin ii.25 ≈ (maŋsapes' ûpamā kāmā); iii.105; M i.143, 364; S ii.256; iv.193 (in characteristic of lohitaka); Vism 356; PvA 199. -> 2. the foetus in the third stage after conception (between abbuda & ghana) S i.206; J iv.496; Nd1 120; Miln 40; Vism 236. -- 3. a piece, bit (for pesikā), in veḷu˚ J iv.205. Pesikā
Pesikā
(f.) ( -- ˚) [cp. Sk. *peśikā] rind, shell (of fruit) only in cpds. amba˚ Vin ii.109; vaŋsa˚ J i.352; veḷu˚ (a bit of bamboo) D ii.324; J ii.267, 279; iii.276; iv.382. Pesita
Pesita
[pp. of peseti] 1. sent out or forth Sn 412 (rāja- dūta p.) Vv 217 ( = uyyojita VvA 108); DhA iii.191. pesit -- atta is the C. expln at S i.53 (as given at K.S. 320) of pahit -- atta (trsln "puts forth all his strength"); Bdhgh incorrectly taking pahita as pp. of pahiṇati to send whereas it is pp. of padahati. -- 2. ordered, what has been ordered, in pesit -- âpesitaŋ order and prohibition Vin ii.177. Pesuṇa
Pesuṇa
(nt.) [fr. pisuṇa, cp. Epic Sk. paiśuna] = pesuñña S i.240; Sn 362, 389, 862 sq., 941; J v.397; Pv i.33; PvA 16; Sdhp 55, 66, 81.

-- kāraka one who incites to slander J i.200, 267. Pesuṇika
Pesuṇika
(adj.) [fr. pesuṇa] slanderous, calumnious PvA 12, 13. Pesuṇiya & Pesuṇeyya
Pesuṇiya
& Pesuṇeyya (nt.) = pesuñña; 1. (pesuṇiya) Sn 663, 928; Pv i.32. -- 2. (pesuṇeyya) S i.228, 230; Sn 852; Nd1 232. Pesuñña
Pesuñña
(nt.) [abstr. fr. pisuṇa, cp. Epic Sk. paiśunya. The other (diaeretic) forms are pesuṇiya & pesuṇeyya] backbiting, calumny, slander M i.110; D iii.69; A iv.401; Vin iv.12; Nd1 232, 260; PvA 12, 15. Peseti
Peseti
[pa+iṣ to send] to send forth or out, esp. on a message or to a special purpose, i. e. to employ as a servant or (intrs.) to do service (so in many derivations) 1. to send out J i.86, 178, 253; iv.169 (paṇṇaŋ); v.399; vi.448; Mhvs 14, 29 (rathaŋ); DhA iii.190; PvA 4, 20, 53. -- 2. to employ or order (cp. pesaka), in Pass. pesiyati to be ordered or to be in service Vin ii.177 (ppr. pesiyamāna); J v.17 (ppr. pesiyanto). -- pp. pesita. See also pessa & derivations. Pessa
Pessa
[grd. formn fr. peseti, Vedic preṣya, f. preṣyā. This is the contracted form, whilst the diaeretic form is pesiya, for which also pesika] a messenger, a servant, often in combn dāsā ti vā pessā ti vā kammakarā ti vā, e. g. D i.141; S i.76, 93 (slightly diff. in verse); A ii.208 (spelt pesā); iv.45; DhA ii.7. See also A iii.37; iv.266, 270; J v.351; Pug 56; DA i.300. At Sn 615 pessa is used in the sense of an abstr. n. = pessitā service (=veyyavacca SnA 466). So also in cpds.

-- kamma service J vi.374; -- kāra a servant J vi.356. Pessitā
Pessitā
(f.) [abstr. fr. pessa, Sk. *preṣyatā] being a servant, doing service J vi.208 (para˚ to someone else). Pessiya & ˚ka
Pessiya
& ˚ka [see pessa] servant; m. either pessiya Vv 8446 (spelt pesiya, expld by pesana -- kāraka, veyyāvaccakara VvA 349); J vi.448 ( = pesana -- kāraka C.), or pessika Sn 615, 651; J vi.552; f. either pessiyā (para˚) Vv 185 (spelt pesiyā, but v. l. SS pessiyā, expld as pesaniyā paresaŋ veyyāvacca -- kārī VvA 94); J iii.413 (=parehi pesitabbā pesana -- kārikā C. 414), or pessikā J vi.65. -- 474 -- Pehi
Pehi
is imper. 2nd sg. of pa+i, "go on," said to a horse A iv.190 sq., cp. S i.123. Pokkhara
Pokkhara
(nt.) [cp. Vedic puṣkara, fr. pus, though a certain relation to puṣpa seems to exist, cp. Sk. puṣpapattra a kind of arrow (lit. lotus -- leaf) Halāyudha 2, 314, and P. pokkhara -- patta] 1. a lotus plant, primarily the leaf of it, figuring in poetry and metaphor as not being able to be wetted by water Sn 392, 812 (vuccati paduma -- pattaŋ Nd1 135); Dh 336; It 84. -- 2. the skin of a drum (from its resemblance to the lotus -- leaf) S ii.267; Miln 261 (bheri˚). As Np. of an angel (Gandhabba) "Drum" at Vv 189. -- 3. a species of waterbird (crane): see cpd. ˚sataka.

-- ṭṭha standing in water (?) Vin i.215 (vanaṭṭha+), 238 (id.). -- patta a lotus leaf Sn 625; Dh 401 ( = paduma -- patta DhA iv.166); Miln 250. -- madhu the honey sap of Costus speciosus (a lotus) J v.39, 466. -- vassa "lotus -- leaf rain," a portentous shower of rain, serving as special kind of test shower in which certain objects are wetted, but those showing a disinclination towards moisture are left untouched, like a lotus -- leaf J i.88; vi.586; KhA 164; DhA iii.163. -- sātaka a species of crane, Ardea Siberica J vi.539 (koṭṭha+); SnA 359. Cp. Np. Pokkharasāti Sn 594; Sn p. 115; SnA 372. Pokkharaṇī
Pokkharaṇī
(f.) [fr. puṣkara lotus; Vedic puṣkariṇī, BSk. has puskiriṇī, e. g. AvŚ i.76; ii.201 sq.] a lotuspond, an artificial pool or small lake for water -- plants (see note in Dial. ii.210) Vin i.140, 268; ii.123; D ii.178 sq.; S i.123, 204; ii.106; v.460; A i.35, 145; iii.187, 238; J ii.126; v.374 (Khemī), 388 (Doṇa); Pv iii.33; iv.121; SnA 354 (here in meaning of a dry pit or dugout); VvA 160; PvA 23, 77, 152. pokkharaññā gen. Pv ii.129; instr. S i.233; loc. Vin ii.123. pokkharaṇiyāyaŋ loc. A iii.309. -- pl. pokkharaṇiyo Vin i.268; VvA 191; PvA 77; metric pokkharañño Vv 4411; Pv ii.119: ii.78. Pokkharatā
Pokkharatā
(f.) [is it fr. pokkhara lotus (cp. Sk. pauṣkara), thus "lotus -- ness," or founded on Vedic puṣpa blossom? The BSk. puṣkalatā (AvŚ ii.201) is certainly a misconstruction, if it is constructed fr. the Pali] splendidness, "flower -- likeness," only in cpd. vaṇṇa -- pokkharatā beauty of complexion D i.114; Vin i.268; S i.95; ii.279; A i.38, 86; ii.203; iii.90; DA i.282; KhA 179; VvA 14; PvA 46. The BSk. passage at AvŚ ii.202 reads "śobhāŋ varṇaŋ puṣkalatāŋ ca." Ponkha
Ponkha
[increment form of punkha] arrow, only in redupl. (iterative) cpd. ponkh' ânuponkhaŋ (adv.) arrow after arrow, shot after shot, i. e. constantly, continuously S v.453, 454; Nd2 631 (in def. of sadā); DA i.188; VvAh 351. The expln is problematic. Poṭa
Poṭa
[fr. sphuṭ] a bubble J iv.457 (v. l. poṭha). See also phoṭa. Poṭaki (˚ī?)
Poṭaki
(˚ī?) (m. f.?) [etym. uncertain, prob. Non -- Aryan] a kind of grass, in ˚tūla a kind of cotton, "grass -- tuft," thistle -- down (?) Vin ii.150; iv.170 (id., 3 kinds of cotton, spelt potaki here). Poṭakila
Poṭakila
[etym. unknown, cp. poṭaki & (lexic.) Sk. poṭa- gala a kind of reed; the variant is poṭagala] a kind of grass, Saccharum spontaneum Th 1, 27 = 233; J vi.508 (=p.˚ -- tiṇaŋ nāma C.). Poṭṭhabba
Poṭṭhabba
is spurious reading for phoṭṭhabba (q. v.). Poṭha
Poṭha
[fr. puth, cp. poṭhana & poṭheti] is anguli˚ snap- ping of one's fingers (as sign of applause) J v.67. Cp. poṭhana & phoṭeti. Poṭhana
Poṭhana
(& Pothana) (nt.) [fr. poṭheti] 1. striking, beating J ii.169 (tajjana˚); v.72 (udaka˚); vi.41 (kappāsa˚dhanuka). At all J passages th. -- 2. (th) snapping one's fingers J i.394 (anguli˚, +celukkhepa); ThA 76 (anguli˚, for accharā -- sanghāta Th 2, 67). Cp. nippothana. Poṭhita
Poṭhita
(& Pothita) [pp. of poṭheti] beaten, struck Miln 240 (of cloth, see Kern, Toev. s. poṭheti); J iii.423 (mañca; v. l. BB pappoṭ˚) KhA 173 (˚tulapicu cotton beaten seven times, i. e. very soft; v. l. pothita, see App. p. 877); DhA i.48 (su˚); PvA 174. -- Cp. paripothita. Poṭheti
Poṭheti
(& Potheti) [fr. puth = sphuṭ] 1. to beat, strike Sn 682 (bhujāni= appoṭheti SnA 485); J i.188, 483 (th) ii.394; vi.548 (=ākoṭeti); DhA i.48; ii.27 (th), 67 (th); VvA 68 (th); PvA 65 (th). -- 2. to snap one's fingers as a token of annoyance D ii.96; or of pleasure J iii.285 (anguliyo poṭhesi). -- pp. poṭhita. -- Caus. II. poṭhāpeti (poth˚) to cause to be beaten or flogged Miln 221; DhA i.399. -- Cp. pappoṭheti. Poṇa
Poṇa1
(nt.) [ = poṇa2?] only in cpd. danta˚ a tooth pick Vin iv.90; J iv.69; Miln 15; SnA 272. As dantapoṇaka at Dāvs i.57. -- kūṭa -- poṇa at Vism 268 read ˚goṇa. Poṇa
Poṇa2
(adj.) [fr. pa+ava+nam, cp. ninna & Vedic pra- vaṇa] 1. sloping down, prone, in anupubba˚ gradually sloping (of the ocean) Vin ii.237 = A iv.198 sq.=Ud 53. -- 2. ( -- ˚) sloping towards, going to, converging or leading to Nibbāna; besides in var. phrases, in general as tanninna tappoṇa tappabbhāra, "leading to that end." As nibbāna˚ e. g. at M i.493; S v.38 sq.; A iii.443; cp. Vv 8442 (nekkhamma˚ -- nibbāna -- ninna VvA 348); taŋ˚ Ps ii.197; ṭhāne PvA 190; viveka˚ A iv.224, 233; v.175; samādhi˚ Miln 38; kiŋ˚ M i.302. Poṇika
Poṇika
(adj.) [fr. poṇa2] that which is prone, going prone; DA i.23 where the passage is "tiracchāna -- gata -- pāṇāpoṇika -- nikāyo cikkhallika -- nikāyo ti," quoted from S iii.152, where it runs thus: "tiracchāna -- gata pāṇā te pi bhikkhave tiracchānagatā pāṇā citten' eva cittatā." The passage is referred to with poṇika at KhA 12, where we read "tiracchāna -- gatā pāṇā poṇika -- nikāyo cikkhallika -- nikāyo ti." Thus we may take poṇikanikāya as "the kingdom of those which go prone" (i. e. the animals). Pota
Pota1
[cp. Epic Sk. pota, see putta for etym.] the young of an animal J ii.406 (˚sūkara); Cp. i.102 (udda˚); SnA 125 (sīha˚). Pota
Pota2
[Epic Sk. pota; dial. form for plota (?), of plu] a boat Dāvs v.58; VvA 42. Pota
Pota3
[etym.?] a millstone, grindstone, only as nisada˚ Vin i.201; Vism 252. Potaka
Potaka
( -- ˚) [fr. pota1] 1. the young of an animal M i.104 (kukkuṭa˚); J i.202 (supaṇṇa˚), 218 (hatthi˚); ii.288 (assa˚ colt); iii.174 (sakuṇa˚); PvA 152 (gaja˚). -- f. potikā J i.207 (haŋsa˚); iv.188 (mūsika˚). -- 2. a small branch, offshoot, twig; in twig; in amba˚ young mango sprout DhA iii.206 sq.; araṇi˚ small firewood Miln 53. Pottha
Pottha1
[?] poor, indigent, miserable J ii.432 ( = potthaka- pilotikāya nivatthatā pottho C.; v. l. poṭha). See also *ponti, with which ultimately identical. Pottha
Pottha2
[later Sk. pusta, etym. uncertain; loan -- word?] modelling, only in cpd. ˚kamma plastering (i. e. using a mixture of earth, lime, cowdung & water as mortar) J vi.459; carving DhsA 334; and ˚kara a modeller in clay J i.71. Cp. potthaka1. Potthaka
Potthaka1
[cp. Class. Sk. pustaka] 1. a book J i.2 (aya˚ ledger); iii.235, 292; iv.299, 487; VvA 117. -- 2. anything made or modelled in clay (or wood etc.), in rūpa˚ a modelled figure J vi.342; ThA 257; DA i.198; Sdhp 363, 383. Cp. pottha2. -- 475 -- Potthaka
Potthaka2
(nt.) [etym.?] cloth made of makaci fibre Vin i.306 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.247); A i.246 sq.; J iv.251 ( = ghana -- sāṭaka C.; v. l. saṇa˚); Pug 33. Potthanikā
Potthanikā
(f.) [fr. puth?] a dagger ( = potthanī) Vin ii.190=DA i.135 (so read here with v. l. for T. ˚iyā). Potthanī
Potthanī
(f.) [fr. puth?] a butcher's knife J vi.86 (maŋsa- koṭṭhana˚), 111 (id.). Pothujjanika
Pothujjanika
(adj.) [fr. puthujjana] belonging to ordinary man, common, ordinary, in 2 combns viz. (1) phrase hīna gamma p. anariya Vin i.10; S iv.330; A v.216; (2) with ref. to iddhi Vin ii.183; J i.360; Vism 97. -> Cp. Vin. Texts iii.230. The BSk. forms are either pārthag -- janika Lal. Vist 540, or prāthug -- janika MVastu iii.331. Pothetvā
Pothetvā
at J ii.404 (ummukkāni p.) is doubtful. The vv. ll. are yodhetvā & sodhetvā (the latter a preferable reading). Poddava
Poddava
see gāma˚. Ponobhavika
Ponobhavika
(adj.) [fr. punabbhava, with preservation of the second o (puno> punaḥ) see puna] leading to rebirth M i.48, 299, 464, 532; S iii.26; iv.186; D iii.57; A ii.11 sq., 172; iii.84, 86; v.88; Nett 72; Vism 506; VbhA 110. Ponti
Ponti
(vv. ll. poṭhi, sonti) Th 2, 422, 423 is doubtful; the expln at ThA 269 is "pilotikākhaṇḍa," thus "rags (of an ascetic)," cp. J.P.T.S. 1884. See also pottha1, with which evidently identical, though misread. Porāṇa
Porāṇa
(adj.) [ = purāṇa, cp. Epic Sk. paurāṇa] old, ancient, former D i.71, 238; S ii.267; Sn 313; Dh 227 (cp. DhA iii.328); J ii.15 (˚kāle in the past); VbhA 1 (˚aṭṭhakathā), 523 (id.); KhA 247 (˚pāṭha); SnA 131 (id.); DhA i.17; PvA 1 (˚aṭṭhakathā), 63. -- Porāṇā (pl.) the ancients, ancient authorities or writers Vism passim esp. Note, 764; KhA 123, 158; SnA 291, 352, 604; VbhA 130, 254, 299, 397, 513. Porāṇaka
Porāṇaka
(adj.) [fr. porāṇa] 1. ancient, former, of old (cp. purāṇa 1) J iii.16 (˚paṇḍitā); PvA 93 (id.), 99 (id.); DhA i.346 (kula -- santaka). -- 2. old, worn, much used (cp. purāṇa 2) J iv.471 (magga). Porin
Porin
(adj.) [fr. pora = Epic Sk. paura citizen, see pura. Semantically cp. urbane>urbanus>urbs; polite= poli/ths>po/lis. For pop. etym. see DA i.73 & 282] belonging to a citizen, i. e. citizenlike, urbane, polite, usually in phrase porī vācā polite speech D i.4, 114; S i.189; ii.280=A ii.51; A iii.114; Pug 57; Dhs 1344; DA i.75, 282; DhsA 397. Cp. BSk. paurī vācā MVastu iii.322. Porisa
Porisa1
(adj. -- n.) [abstr. fr. purisa, for *pauruṣa or *puru- ṣya)] 1. (adj.) human, fit for a man Sn 256 (porisa dhura), cp. porisiya & poroseyya. -- 2. (m.) = purisa, esp. in sense of purisa 2, i. e. servant, used collectively (abstract formn like Ger. dienerschaft, E. service= servants) "servants" esp. in phrase dāsa -- kammakaraporisa Vin i.240; A i.145, 206; ii.78; iii.45, 76, 260; DhA iv.1; dāsa˚ a servant Sn 769 (three kinds mentioned at Nd1 11, viz. bhaṭakā kammakarā upajīvino); rāja˚ king's service, servant of the king D i.135; A iv.286, 322; sata˚ a hundred servants Vism 121. For purisa in uttama˚ (=mahāpurisa) Dh 97 (cp. DhA ii.188). Cp. posa. Porisa
Porisa2
(nt.) [abstr. fr. purisa, *pauruṣyaŋ, cp. porisiya and poroseyya] 1. business, doing of a man (or servant, cp. purisa 2), service, occupation; human doing, activity M i.85 (rāja˚); Vv 6311 ( = purisa -- kicca VvA 263); Pv iv.324 (uṭṭhāna˚=purisa -- viriya, purisa -- kāra PvA 252). -- 2. height of a man M. i.74, 187, 365. Porisatā
Porisatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. porisa], only in neg. a˚ inhuman or superhuman state, or: not served by any men (or servants) VvA 275. The reading is uncertain. Porisāda
Porisāda
[fr. purisa+ad to eat] man -- eater, cannibal J v.34 sq., 471 sq., 486, 488 sq., 499, 510. Porisādaka
Porisādaka
= porisāda J v.489. Cp. pursādaka J v.91. Porisiya
Porisiya
(adj.) [fr. purisa, cp. porisa & poroseyya] 1. of human nature, human J iv.213. -- 2. Of the height of man Vin ii.138. Poroseyya
Poroseyya
= porisiya (cp. porisa1 1) fit for man, human M i.366. The word is somewhat doubtful, but in all likelihood it is a derivation fr. pura (cp. porin; Sk. *paura), thus to be understood as *paurasya>*porasya >*poraseyya> *poroseyya with assimilation. The meaning is clearly "very fine, urbane, fashionable"; thus not derived from purisa, although C. expls by "puris' ânucchavikaŋ yānaŋ" (M. i.561). The passage runs "yānaŋ poroseyyaŋ pavara -- maṇi -- kuṇḍalaŋ"; with vv. ll. voropeyya & oropeyya. Neumann accepts oropeyya as reading & translates (wrongly) "belüde": see Mittl. Slg. 21921; vol. ii. pp. 45 & 666. The reading poroseyya seems to be established as lectio difficilior. On form see also Trenckner, Notes 75. Porohita=purohita
Porohita
= purohita; DhA i.174 (v. l. BB pur˚). Porohacca
Porohacca
(nt.) [fr. purohita] the character or office of a family priest D ii.243. As porohicca at Sn 618 ( = purohita -- kamma SnA 466). Cp. Trenckner, Notes 75. Posa
Posa1
[contraction of purisa fr. *pūrṣa>*pussa>*possa> posa. So Geiger, P.Gr. 303] = purisa, man (poetical form, only found in verse) Vin i.230; S i.13, 205= J iii.309; A iv.266; Sn 110, 662; Dh 104, 125 (cp. DhA iii.34); J v.306; vi.246, 361. -- poso at J iii.331 is gen. sg. of puŋs=Sk. puŋsaḥ. Posa
Posa2
(adj.) [ = *poṣya, grd. of poseti, puṣ] to be fed or nourished, only in dup˚ difficult to nourish S i.61. Posaka
Posaka
(adj.) [fr. posa2] nourishing, feeding A i.62, 132 = It 110 (āpādaka+); f. ˚ikā a nurse, a female attendant Vin ii.289 (āpādikā+). Posatā
Posatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. posa2] only -- ˚, in su˚ & dup˚ easy & difficult support Vin ii.2. Posatha
Posatha
= uposatha [cp. BSk. poṣadha Divy 116, 121, and Prk. posaha (posahiya= posathika) Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 141] J iv.329; vi.119. Posathika
Posathika
= uposathika J iv.329. Cp. anuposathika & anvaḍḍhamāsaŋ. Posana
Posana
(nt.) [fr. puṣ] nourishing, feeding, support VvA 137. Posāpeti & Posāveti
Posāpeti
& Posāveti [Caus. II. fr. poseti] to have brought up, to give into the care of, to cause to be nourished Vin i.269 (pp. posāpita) ≈ DA i.133 (posāvita, v. l. posāp˚). Posāvanika & ˚ya
Posāvanika
& ˚ya (adj. -- nt.) [fr. posāvana = posāpana of Caus. posāpeti] 1. (adj.) to be brought up, being reared, fed Vin i.272; J iii.134, 432. -- ˚iya DhA iii.35; J iii.35; J iii.429 (&˚iyaka). -- 2. (nt.) fee for bringing somebody up, allowance, money for food, sustenance J ii.289; DhA iv.40; VvA 158 (˚mūla). -- ˚iya J i.191. -- 476 -- Posita
Posita
[pp. of poseti] nourished, fed Cp. iii.32; VvA 173 (udaka˚). Posituŋ
Posituŋ
at Vin ii.151 stands for phusituŋ "to sprinkle," cp. Vin. Texts iii.169. See phusati2. Posin
Posin
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. poseti] thriving (on), nourished by Vin i.6; D i.75; S i.138; Sn 65 (anañña˚ cp. Nd2 36), 220 (dāra˚); DA i.219. Poseti
Poseti
[puṣ] to nourish, support, look after, bring up, take care of, feed, keep Vin i.269; S i.181; A i.117; J i.134; iii.467; Nd2 36; Vism 305; VvA 138, 299. -- pp. posita. -- Caus. posāpeti. -- Ph. Phaggu
Phaggu
[in forṃ = Vedic phalgu (small, feeble), but in meaning different] a special period of fasting M i.39= DA i.139. See also pheggu. Phagguṇa
Phagguṇa
& Phagguṇī (f.) [cp. Vedic phālguna & ˚ī] N. of a month (Feb. 15th -- March 15th), marking the beginning of Spring; always with ref. to the spring full moon, as phagguṇa -- puṇṇamā at Vism 418; phagguṇi˚ J i.86. Phaṇa
Phaṇa
[cp. Epic Sk. phaṇa] the hood of a snake Vin i.91 (˚hatthaka, with hands like a snake's hood); J iii.347 (patthaṭa˚); DhA iii.231 (˚ŋ ukkhipitvā); iv.133. Freq. as phaṇaŋ katvā (only thus, in ger.) raising or spreading its hood, with spread hood J ii.274; vi.6; Vism 399; DhA ii.257. Phaṇaka
Phaṇaka
[fr. phaṇa] an instrument shaped like a snake's hood, used to smooth the hair Vin ii.107. Phaṇijjaka
Phaṇijjaka
[etym.?] a kind of plant, which is enumd at Vin iv.35 = DA i.81 as one of the aggabīja, i. e. plants propagated by slips or cuttings, together with ajjuka & hirivera. At J vi.536 the C. gives bhūtanaka as expln. According to Childers it is the plant Samīraṇa. Phandati
Phandati
[spand, cp. Gr. sfada/cw to twitch, sfodro/s violent; Lat. pendeo "pend" i. e. hang down, cp. pendulum; Ags. finta tail, lit. mover, throbber] 1. to throb, palpitate D i.52 = M i.404, cp. DA i.159; Nd1 46. -- 2. to twitch, tremble, move, stir J ii.234; vi.113 (of fish wriggling when thrown on land). -- Caus. II. phandāpeti to make throb D i.52=M i.404. -- pp. phandita (q. v.). Cp. pari˚, vi˚, sam˚. The nearest synonym is calati. Phandana
Phandana
[fr. phandati, cp. Sk. spandana] 1. (adj.) throbbing, trembling, wavering Dh 33 (phandanaŋ capalaŋ); J vi.528 (˚māluvā trembling creeper); DhA i.50 (issa˚ throbbing with envy). -- 2. (m.) N. of a tree Dalbergia (aspen?) A i.202; J iv.208 sq.; Miln 173. -- 3. (nt.) throb, trembling, agitation, quivering J vi.7 (˚mattaŋ not even one throb; cp. phandita); Nd1 46 (taṇhā etc.). Phandanā
Phandanā
(f.) [fr. phandati] throbbing, agitation, move- ment, motion SnA 245 (calanā+); DA i.111; Nett 88 C.; cp. iñjanā. Phandita
Phandita
(nt.) [pp. of phandati] throbbing, flashing; throb M ii.24 (˚mattā "by his throbbings only"); pl. phanditāni "vapourings," imaginings Vbh 390 (where VbhA 513 only says "phandanato phanditaŋ") cp. Brethren 344. Phanditatta
Phanditatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. phandita] = phandanā S v.315 (=iñjitatta). Pharaṇa
Pharaṇa
(adj. -- nt.) [fr. pharati] 1. (adj.) pervading, suffused (with), quite full (of) Miln 345. -- 2. (nt.) pervasion, suffusion, thrill J i.82 (˚samattha mettacitta); Nett 89 (pīti˚ etc., as m., cp. pharaṇatā); DhsA 166 (˚pīti all -- pervading rapture, permeating zest; cp. pīti pharaṇatā). -- Cp. anu˚. Pharaṇaka
Pharaṇaka
(adj.) [fr. pharaṇa] thrilling, suffusing, pervading, filling with rapture VvA 16 (dvādasa yojanāni ˚pabho sarīra -- vaṇṇo). Pharaṇatā
Pharaṇatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. pharaṇa] suffusion, state of being pervaded (with), only -- ˚ in set of 4 -- fold suffusion, viz. pīti˚ of rapture, sukha˚ of restful bliss, ceto˚ of [telepathic] consciousnss, āloka˚ of light, D iii.277; Ps i.48; Vbh 334; Nett 89. Pharati
Pharati
[sphur & sphar, same root as in Gr. spai/rw to twitch; Lat. sperno "spurn" lit. kick away; Ags. speornan to kick; spurnan = spur] 1. (trs.) to pervade, permeate, fill, suffuse Pv i.1014 (=vyāpetvā tiṭṭhati PvA 52); J iii.371 (sakala -- sarīraŋ); v.64 (C. for pavāti); PvA 14 (okāsaŋ), 276 (obhāsaŋ). To excite or stimulate the nerves J v.293 (rasa -- haraṇiyo khobhetvā phari: see under rasa). -- Often in standard phrase mettā -- sahagatena cetasā ekaŋ (dutiyaŋ etc.) disaŋ pharitvā viharati D ii.186; S v.115 and passim, where pharitvā at Vism 308=VbhA 377 is expld by phusitvā ārammaṇaŋ katvā. Cp. BSk. ekaŋ disāŋ spharitvopasampadya viharati MVastu iii.213. Also in phrase pītiyā sarīraŋ pharati (aor. phari) to thrill the body with rapture, e. g. J i.33; v.494; DhA ii.118; iv.102. -- 2. [in this meaning better to be derived from sphar to spread, expand, cp. pharita & phālita] to spread, make expand J i.82 (metta -- cittaŋ phari). -- 3. [prob. of quite a diff. origin and only taken to pharati by pop. analogy, perhaps to phal=sphaṭ to split; thus kaṭṭh'atthaŋ pharati=to be split up for fuel] to serve as, only with ˚atthaŋ in phrases āhāratthaŋ ph. (after next phrase) to serve as food Miln 152; kaṭṭhatthaŋ ph. to serve as fuel A ii.95=S iii.93=It 90=J i.482; khādaniyatthaŋ & bhojaniyatthaŋ ph. to serve as eatables Vin i.201 (so to be read in preference to ˚attaŋ). -- pp. pharita, phurita & phuṭa; cp. also phuṭṭha; see further anu˚, pari˚. Pharasu
Pharasu
[cp. Vedic paraśu = Gr. pe/lekus; on p>ph cp. Prk. pharasu & parasu, Pischel Gr. § 208; Geiger, Gr. § 40] hatchet, axe A iii.162; J i.199, 399; ii.409; v.500; DhA ii.204; PvA 277. The spelling parasu occurs at S v.441 & J iii.179. Pharita
Pharita
[pp. of pharati] 1. being pervaded or permeated (by) VvA 68 (mettāya). -- 2. spread (out) J vi.284 (kittisaddo sakala -- loke ph.). -- Cp. phuṭṭha & phālita. Pharusa
Pharusa
(adj.) [cp. Vedic paruṣa, on ph.>p see pharasu, on attempt at etym. cp. Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fario] 1. (lit.) rough Pv ii.41. -- 2. (fig.) harsh, unkind, rough (of speech) Vin ii.290 (caṇḍa+); Pv ii.34; iii.57; J v.296; Kvu 619. In combn with vācā we find both pharusa -- vācā and pharusā -- vācā D i.4, 138; iii.69 sq., 173, 232; M i.42 (on this and the same uncertainty as regards pisuṇā -- vācā see Trenckner, at M i.530). pharusa vacana rough speech PvA 15, 55, 83. -- 3. cruel Pv iv.76 (kamma = daruṇa PvA 265). -- 477 -- Phala
Phala1
(nt.) [cp. Vedic phala, to phal [sphal] to burst, thus lit. "bursting," i. e. ripe fruit; see phalati] 1. (lit.) fruit (of trees etc.) Vv 8414 (dumā nicca -- phal' ûpapannā, not to phalu, as Kern, Toev. s. v. phalu); Vism 120. -- amba˚ mango -- fruit PvA 273 sq.; dussa˚ (adj.) having clothes as their fruit (of magic trees) Vv 462 (cp. VvA 199); patta˚ leaves & fruits, vegetables Sn 239; PvA 86 pavatta˚ wild fruit D i.101; puppha˚ flower & fruit J iii.40. rukkha˚ -- ûpama Th 1, 490 (in simile of kāmā, taken fr. M i.130) lit. "like the fruit of trees" is expld by ThA 288 as "anga -- paccangānaŋ p(h)alibhañjan' aṭṭhena, and trsld according to this interpretation by Mrs. Rh. D. as "fruit that brings the climber to a fall." -- Seven kinds of medicinal fruits are given at Vin i.201 scil. vilanga, pippala, marica, harītaka, vibhītaka, āmalaka, goṭhaphala. At Miln 333 a set of 7 fruits is used metaphorically in simile of the Buddha's fruit -- shop, viz. sotāpatti˚, sakadāgāmi˚, anāgāmi˚, arahatta˚, suññata˚ samāpatti (cp. Cpd. 70), animitta˚ samāpatti, appaṇihita˚ samāpatti. -- 2. a testicle J iii.124 (dantehi ˚ŋ chindati = purisabhāvaŋ nāseti to castrate); vi.237 (uddhita -- pphalo, adj.,=uddhaṭa -- bījo C.), 238 (dantehi phalāni uppāṭeti, like above). -> 3. (fig.) fruit, result, consequence, fruition, blessing. As t.t. with ref. to the Path and the progressive attainment (enjoyment, fruition) of Arahantship it is used to denote the realization of having attained each stage of the sotāpatti, sakadāgāmi etc. (see the Miln quot. under 1 and cp. Cpd. 45, 116). So freq. in exegetical literature magga, phala, nibbāna, e. g. Tikp 155, 158; VbhA 43 & passim. -- In general it immediately precedes Nibbāna (see Nd2 no 645b and under satipaṭṭhāna), and as agga -- phala it is almost identical with Arahantship. Frequently it is combd with vipāka to denote the stringent conception of "consequence," e. g. at D i.27, 58; iii.160. Almost synonymous in the sense of "fruition, benefit, profit" is ānisaŋsā D iii.132; phala at Pv i.125=ānisaŋsa PvA 64 -- Vin i.293 (anāgāmi˚); ii.240 (id.); iii.73 (arahatta˚); D i.51, 57 sq. (sāmañña˚); iii.147, 170 (sucaritassa); M i.477 (appamāda˚); S i.173 (Amata˚); Pv i.1110 (kaṭuka˚); ii.83 (dāna˚); iv.188 (mahap˚ & agga˚); Vism 345 (of food, being digested); PvA 8 (puñña˚ & dāna˚), 22 (sotāpatti˚), 24 (issā -- macchariya˚).

-- atthika one who is looking for fruit Vism 120. -- āpaṇa fruit shop Miln 333. -- âphala [phala+aphala, see ā4; but cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 331] all sorts of fruit, lit. what is not (i. e. unripe), fruit without discrimination; a phrase very freq. in Jātaka style, e. g. J i.416; ii.160; iii.127; iv.220; 307, 449, v.313; vi.520; DhA i.106. -- āsava extract of fruit VvA 73. -- uppatti ripening PvA 29. -- esin yielding fruit J i.87 = Th 1, 527, cp. phalesin MVastu iii.93. -- gaṇḍa see palagaṇḍa. -- ṭṭha "stationed in fruition," i. e. enjoying the result or fruition of the Path (cp. Cpd. 50) Miln 342. -- dāna gift of fruit VbhA 337. -- dāyin giver of fruit Vv 676. -- pacchi fruit -- basket J vi.560. -- pañcaka fivefold fruit Vism 580; VbhA 191. -- puṭa fruit -- basket J vi.236. -- bhājana one who distributes fruit, an official term in the vihāra Vin iv.38, cp. BSk. phalacāraka. -- maya see sep. -- ruha fruit tree Mbvs 82. -- sata see palasata. Phala
Phala2
is spelling for pala (a certain weight) at J vi.510. See pala & cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 40. Phala
Phala3
[etym.? Sk. *phala] the point of a spear or sword S ii.265 (tiṇha˚). Cp. phāla2. Phalaka
Phalaka
[fr. phal = *sphal or *sphaṭ (see phalati), lit. that which is split or cut off (cp. in same meaning "slab"); cp. Sk. sphaṭika rock -- crystal; on Prk. forms see Pischel, Prk. Gr. §206. Ved. phalaka board, phāla ploughshare; Gr. a) /spalon, spola/s, yali/s scissors; Lat. pellis & spolium; Ohg. spaltan=split, Goth, spilda writing board, tablet; Oicel. spjald board] 1. a flat piece of wood, a slab, board, plank J i.451 (a writing board, school slate); v.155 (akkhassa ph. axle board); vi.281 (dice -- board). pidhāna˚ covering board VbhA 244= Vism 261; sopāna˚ staircase, landing J i.330 (maṇi˚); Vism 313; cp. MVastu i.249; ˚āsana a bench J i.199; ˚kāya a great mass of planks J ii.91. ˚atthara -- sayana a bed covered with a board (instead of a mattress) J i.304, 317; ii.68. ˚seyya id. D i.167 ("plank -- bed"). -- 2. a shield J iii.237, 271; Miln 355; DhA ii.2. -> 3. a slip of wood or bark, used for making an ascetic's dress (˚cīra) D i.167, cp. Vin i.305. ditto for a weight to hang on the robe Vin ii.136. -- 4. a post M iii.95 (aggaḷa˚ doorpost); ThA 70 (Ap. v.17). Phalagaṇḍa
Phalagaṇḍa
is spurious writing for palagaṇḍa (q. v.). Phalatā
Phalatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. phala] the fact or condition of bearing fruit PvA 139 (appa˚). Phalati
Phalati
[phal to split, break open = *sphal or *sphaṭ, cp. phāṭeti. On etym. see also Lüders, K.Z. xlii, 198 sq.] 1. to split, burst open (intrs.) A i.77 (asaniyā phalantiyā); usually in phrase "muddhā sattadhā phaleyya," as a formula of threat or warning "your (or my) head shall split into 7 pieces," e. g. D i.95; S i.50; Sn 983; J i.54; iv.320 (me); v.92 (=bhijjetha C.); Miln 157 (satadhā for satta˚); DhA i.41 (m. te phalatu s.); VvA 68; whereas a similar phrase in Sn 988 sq. has adhipāteti (for *adhiphāṭeti=phalati). -- Caus. phāleti (& phāṭeti). -- pp. phalita & phulla. -- 2. to become ripe, to ripen Vin ii.108; J iii.251; PvA 185. Phalamaya
Phalamaya
stands in all probability for phalika -- maya, made of crystal, as is suggested by context, which gives it in line with kaṭṭha -- maya & loha -- maya (& aṭṭhi˚, danta˚, veḷu˚ etc.). It occurs in same phrase at all passages mentioned, and refers to material of which boxes, vessels, holders etc. are made. Thus at Vin i.203 (of añjani, box), 205 (tumba, vessel); ii.115 (sattha -- daṇḍa, scissors -- handle), 136 (gaṇṭhikā, block at dress). The trsln "made of fruits" seems out of place (so Kern, Toev. s. v.), one should rather expect "made of crystal" by the side of made of wood, copper, bone, ivory, etc. Phalavant
Phalavant
(adj.) [fr. phala] bearing or having fruit J iii.251. Phalasata
Phalasata
see palasata. -- At J vi.510 it means "gold- bronze" (as material of which a "sovaṇṇa -- kaŋsa" is made). Phalika
Phalika1
[fr. phala] a fruit vendor Miln 331. Phalika & ˚kā
Phalika2
& ˚kā (f.) [also spelt with ḷ; cp. Sk. sphaṭika; on change ṭ>ḷ see Geiger, P.Gr. § 386. The Prk. forms are phaḷiha & phāḷiya, see Pischel, Gr. § 206] crystal, quartz Vin ii.112; J vi.119 (˚kā = phaḷika -- bhittiyo C.); Vv 351 (=phalika -- maṇi -- mayā bhittiyo VvA 160); 783 (˚kā); Miln 267 (ḷ), 380 (ḷ). Phalita
Phalita1
(adj.) [sporadic spelling for palita] grey -- haired PvA 153. Phalita
Phalita2
[pp. of phal to burst, for the usual phulla, after analogy with phalita3] broken, only in phrase hadayaŋ phalitaŋ his heart broke DhA i.173; hadayena phalitena with broken heart J i.65. Phalita
Phalita3
[pp. of phal to bear fruit] fruit bearing, having fruit, covered with fruit (of trees) Vin ii.108; J i.18; Miln 107, 280. Phalin
Phalin
(adj.) [fr. phala] bearing fruit J v.242. Phalina
Phalina
(adj.) [fr. phala, phalin?] at J v.92 is of doubtful meaning. It cannot very well mean "bearing fruit," since it is used as Ep. of a bird (˚sakuṇī). The Cy. expln is sakuṇa -- potakānaŋ phalinattā (being a source of nourishment?) phalina -- sakuṇī." The v. l. SS is phalīna & palīna. -- 478 -- Phalima
Phalima
(adj.) [fr. phala] bearing fruit, full of fruit J iii.493. Phalu
Phalu
[cp. Vedic paru] a knot or joint in a reed, only in cpd. ˚bīja (plants) springing (or propagated) from a joint D i.5; Vin iv.34, 35. Phaleti
Phaleti
at D i.54 is spurious reading for paleti (see palā- yati), expld by gacchati DA i.165; meaning "runs," not with trsln "spreads out" [to sphar]. Phallava
Phallava
is spelling for pallava sprout, at J iii.40. Phassa
Phassa1
[cp. Ved. sparśa, of spṛś: see phusati] contact, touch (as sense or sense -- impression, for which usually phoṭṭhabbaŋ). It is the fundamental fact in a senseimpression, and consists of a combination of the sense, the object, and perception, as expld at M i.111: tiṇṇaŋ (i. e. cakkhu, rūpā, cakkhu -- viññāṇa) sangati phasso; and gives rise to feeling: phassa -- paccayā vedanā. (See paṭicca -- samuppāda & for expln Vism 567; VbhA 178 sq.). -- Cp. D i.42 sq.; iii.228, 272, 276; Vism 463 (phusatī ti phasso); Sn 737, 778 (as fundamental of attachment, cp. SnA 517); J v.441 (rājā dibba -- phassena puṭṭho touched by the divine touch, i. e. fascinated by her beauty; puṭṭho = phutto); VbhA 177 sq. (in detail), 193, 265; PvA 86 (dup˚ of bad touch, bad to the touch, i. e. rough, unpleasant); poet. for trouble Th 1, 783. See on phassa: Dhs. trsl. 5 & introd. (lv.) lxiii.; Cpd. 12, 14, 94.

-- āyatana organ of contact (6, referring to the several senses) PvA 52. -- āhāra "touch -- food," acquisition by touch, nutriment of contact, one of the 3 āhāras, viz. phass˚, mano -- sañcetanā˚ (n. of representative cogitation) and viññāṇ˚ (of intellection) Dhs 71 -- 73; one of the 4 kinds of āhāra, or "food," with ref. to the 3 vedanās Vism 341. -- kāyā (6) groups of touch or contact vîz. cakkhu -- samphasso, sota˚, ghāna˚, kāya˚, mano˚ D iii.243. -- sampanna endowed with (lovely) touch, soft, beautiful to feel J v.441 (cp. phassita). Phassa
Phassa2
(adj.) [grd. fr. phusati, corresp. to Sk. spṛśya] to be felt, esp. as a pleasing sensation; pleasant, beautiful J iv.450 (gandhehi ph.). Phassati
Phassati
stands for phusati at Vism 527 in def. of phassa ("phassatī ti phasso"). Phassanā
Phassanā
(f.) [abstr. fr. phassa] touch, contact with DhsA 167 (jhānassa lābho . . . patti . . . phassanā sacchikiriyā). Phassita
Phassita
(adj.) [pp. of phasseti = Sk. sparśayati to bring into contact] made to touch, brought into contact, only in cpd. suphassita of pleasant contact, beautiful to the touch, pleasant, perfect, symmetrical J i.220 (cīvara), 394 (dantā); iv.188 (dant' āvaraṇaŋ); v.197 (of the membrum muliebre), 206 (read ˚phassita for ˚phussita), 216 (˚cheka -- karaṇa); VvA 275 (as expln of atīva sangata Vv 642). -- Note. Another (doubtful) phassita is found at J v.252 (dhammo phassito; touched, attained) where vv. ll. give passita & phussita. Phasseti
Phasseti
[Caus. of phusati1] to touch, attain J v.251 (rājā dhammaŋ phassayaŋ = C. phassayanto; vv. ll. pa˚ & phu˚); Miln 338 (amataŋ, cp. phusati), 340 (phassayeyya Pot.). -- Pass. phassīyati Vin ii.148 (kavāṭā na ph.; v. l. phussiy˚). -- pp. phassita & phussita3. *Phāṭeti
*Phāṭeti
is conjectured reading for pāteti in phrase kaṭṭhaŋ pāteti M i.21, and in adhipāteti to split (see adhipāta & vipāta). The derivation of these expressions from pat is out of place, where close relation to phāleti (phalati) is evident, and a derivation from phaṭ = sphat, as in Sk. sphāṭayati to split, is the only right expln of meaning. In that case we should put phal=sphaṭ, where l =ṭ, as in many Pali words, cp. phalikaP.Gr. § 386). The Prk. correspondent is phāḍei (Pischel, Gr. § 208). Phāṇita
Phāṇita
(nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. phāṇita] 1. juice of the sugar cane, raw sugar, molasses (ucchu -- rasaŋ gahetvā kataphāṇitaŋ VvA 180) Vin ii.177; D i.141; Vv 3525; 404; J i.33, 120, 227; Miln 107; DhA ii.57. phāṇitassa puṭaŋ a basket of sugar S i.175; J iv.366; DhA iv.232. -- 2. (by confusion or rightly?) salt J iii.409 (in expln of aloṇika = phāṇita -- virahita).

-- odaka sugar water J iii.372, -- puṭa sugar basket J iv.363. Phāti
Phāti
(f.) [cp. Sk. sphāti, fr. sphāy, sphāyate to swell, increase (Idg. *spē (i), as in Lat. spatium, Ohg. spuot, Ags. spēd = E. speed; see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. spatium), pp. sphīta=P. phīta] swelling, increase J ii.426 (=vaḍḍhi); Vism 271 (vuddhi+). Usually combd with kṛ, as phāti -- kamma increase, profit, advantage Vin ii.174; VbhA 334 & phāti -- karoti to make fat, to increase, to use to advantage M i.220=A v.347; A iii.432. Phāruka
Phāruka
(adj.) at VvA 288 is not clear; meaning something like "bitter," combd with kasaṭa; v. l. pāru˚. Probably = phārusaka. Phāruliya
Phāruliya
at Vbh 350 (in thambha -- exegesis) is faulty spelling for phārusiya (nt.) harshness, unkindness, as evidence of id. passage at VbhA 469 shows (with expln "pharusassa puggalassa bhāvo phārusiyaŋ"). Phārusaka
Phārusaka
[fr. pharusa, cp. Sk. *pāruṣaka Mvyut 103, 143] 1. a certain flower, the (bitter) fruit of which is used for making a drink Vin i.246; Vv 3331 = DhA iii.316. -> 2. N. of one of Indra's groves J vi.278, similarly Vism 424; VbhA 439. Phāla
Phāla1
(m. & nt.) [cp. Vedic phāla] ploughshare S i.169; Sn p. 13 & v.77 (expld as "phāletī ti ph." SnA 147); J i.94; iv.118; v.104; Ud 69 (as m.); DhA i.395. Phāla
Phāla2
[to phala3] an (iron) board, slab (or ball?), maybe spear or rod. The word is of doubtful origin & meaning, it occurs always in the same context of a heated iron instrument, several times in correlation with an iron ball (ayogula). It has been misunderstood at an early time, as is shown by kapāla A iv.70 for phāla. Kern comments on the word at Toev. ii.139. See Vin i.225 (phālo divasantatto, so read; v. l. balo corr. to bālo; corresp. with guḷa); A iv.70 (divasa -- santatte ayokapāle, gloss ayogule); J v.268; v.109 (phāle ciraratta -- tāpite, v. l. pāle, hale, thāle; corresp. with pakaṭṭhita ayogula), id. v.113 (ayomayehi phālehi pīḷeti, v. l. vālehi). Phāla
Phāla3
in loṇa -- maccha˚ a string (?) or cluster of salted fish Vism 28. Phālaka
Phālaka
(adj.) [fr. phāleti] splitting; one who splits Vism 413 (kaṭṭha˚). Phālana
Phālana
(nt.) [fr. phāleti] splitting J i.432 (dāru˚); Vism 500 (vijjhana˚). Phālita
Phālita
[ = Sk. sphārita, sphar] 1. made open, expanded, spread J iii.320 (+vikasita). -- 2. split [fr. phāleti phal], split open Vism 262=VbhA 245 (˚haliddi -- vaṇṇa). Phāliphulla
Phāliphulla
[either Intensive of phulla, or Der. fr. pari- phulla in form phaliphulla] in full blossom M i.218; J i.52. Phālibhaddaka
Phālibhaddaka
is spurious spelling for pāli˚ at J ii.162 (v. l. pātali -- bhaddaka). Cp. Prk. phālihadda ( = pāribhadra Pischel, Gr. § 208). Phālima
Phālima
(adj.) [either fr. Caus. of phal1 (phāleti), or fr. sphar (cp. phārita, i. e. expanded), or fr. sphāy (swell, increase, cp. sphāra & sphārī bhavati to open, expand)] expanding, opening, blossoming in cpd. aggi -- nikāsi -- phālima paduma J iii.320 (where Cy. explns by phālita vikasita). -- 479 -- Phāleti
Phāleti
[Caus. of phalati, phal; a variant is phāṭeti fr. sphaṭ, which is identical with *(s)phal] to split, break, chop, in phrases 1. kaṭṭhaŋ phāleti to chop sticks (for firewood) Vin i.31; J ii.144; Pv ii.951, besides which the phrase kaṭṭhaŋ *phāṭeti. 2. sīsaŋ (muddhā) sattadhā phāleti (cp. adhipāteti & phalati) DhA i.17 (perhaps better with v. l. phal˚), 134. -- 3. (various:) A i.204 = S ii.88; J ii.398; Nd2 483; Vism 379 (kucchiŋ; DhA iv.133 (hadayaŋ). -- pp. phālita. Caus. II. phālāpeti to cause to split open J iii.121; Miln 157 (v. l. phāḷāp˚). Phāsu
Phāsu
(adj.) [etym.? Trenckner, Notes 82 (on Miln 1417: corr. J.P.T.S. 1908, 136 which refers it to Miln 1315) suggests connection with Vedic prāśu enjoying, one who enjoys, i.e. a guest, but this etym. is doubtful; cp. phāsuka. A key to its etym. may be found in the fact that it never occurs by itself in form phāsu, but either in composition or as ˚ka] pleasant, comfortable; only neg. a˚ in phrase aphāsu -- karoti to cause discomfort to (dat.) Vin iv.290; and in cpds. ˚kāma anxious for comfort, desirous of (others) welfare D iii.164; ˚vihāra comfort, ease Vin ii.127; D i.204; Dhs 1348 = Miln 367 (cp. DhsA 404); Miln 14; Vism 33; VbhA 270; PvA 12. Phāsu
Phāsu
at Miln 146 (cp. p. 425) "bhaggā phāsū" is un certain reading, it is not phāsuka; it may represent a pāsa snare, sling. The likeness with phāsukā bhaggā (lit.) of J i.493 is only accidental. Phāsuka
Phāsuka
(adj.) [fr. phāsu. Cp. Prk. phāsuya; acc. to Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 208 Jain Sk. prāsuka is a distortion of P. phāsuka. Perhaps phāsu is abstracted from phāsuka] pleasant, convenient, comfortable J iii.343; iv.30; DhA ii.92; PvA 42. -- aphāsuka unpleasant, uncomfortable, not well J ii.275, 395; DhA i.28; ii.21. -- Note. It seems probable that phāsuka represents a Sk. *sparśuka (cp. Pischel § 62), which would be a der. fr. spṛś in same meaning as phassa2 ("lovely"). This would confirm the suggestion of phāsu being a secondary formation. Phāsukā
Phāsukā
(f.) [cp. Sk *pārśukā & Ved. pārśva, see passa2] a rib, only in pl. phāsukā Vin i.74 (upaḍḍha˚ bhañjitabbā), in phrase sabbā te phāsukā bhaggā J i.493 (lit.), which is fig. applied at Dh 154 (expld as "sabbā avasesa -- kilesa -- phāsukā bhaggā" at DhA iii.128), with which cp. bhaggā phāsū at Miln 146; both the latter phrases prob. of diff. origin. -- (adj.) ( -- ˚) in phrase mahā˚passa the flank (lit. the side of the great ribs) J i.164, 179; iii.273; abs. mahā˚ with great ribs J v.42; uggata˚ with prominent ribs PvA 68 (for upphāsulika adj. Pv ii.11). -- in cpds. as phāsuka˚, e. g. ˚aṭṭhīni the rib -- bones (of which there are 24) Vism 254 (v. l. pāsuka˚); VbhA 237; ˚dvaya pair of ribs Vism 252; VbhA 235. -- See also pāsuka, pāsuḷa & the foll. Phāsulikā
Phāsulikā
(f.) [fr. phāsuḷi] rib, only in cpd. upphāsulika (adj.) Pv ii.11. Phāsuḷā
Phāsuḷā
[for phāsukā] rib S ii.255 (phāsuḷ -- antarikā). Phāsuḷī
Phāsuḷī
[cp. phāsukā & phāsuḷā] a rib M i.80. Phiya
Phiya
[etym. unknown] oar Sn 321 (+aritta rudder, expld by dabbi -- padara SnA 330); J iv.21 (˚ârittaŋ). See also piya2 which is the more freq. spelling of phiya. Phīta
Phīta
[pp. of sphāy, cp. Sk. sphīta & see phāti] opulent, prosperous, rich; in the older texts only in stock phrase iddha ph. bahujana (rich & prosperous & well -- populated) D i.211 (of the town Nālandā); ii.146 (of Kusāvatī); M i.377; (of Nālandā) ii.71 (of country); S ii.107 (fig. of brahmacariyaŋ; with bahujañña for ˚jana); A iii.215 (of town). By itself & in other combn in the Jātakas, e. g. J iv.135 ( = samiddha); vi.355 (v. l. pīta). With iddha & detailed description of all classes of the population (instead of bahujana) of a town Miln 330. Phuṭa
Phuṭa1
[pp. of pharati] 1. (cp. pharati1) pervaded, per- meated, thrilled (cp. pari˚) D i.73, 74 (pītisukhena; T. prints phuta; v. l. phuṭa; v. l. at DA i.217 p(h)uṭṭha); M i.276; J i.33 (sarīraŋ pītiyā ph.); DhA ii.118 (pītiyā phuṭa -- sarīro); SnA 107 (referring to the nerves of taste). -- 2. (cp. pharati2) expanded, spread out, spread with (instr.) Vin i.182 (lohitena); J v.266 (in nirayapassage T. reads bhūmi yojana -- sataŋ phuṭā tiṭṭhanti, i. e. the beings fill or are spread out over such a space; C. 272 explns by "ettakaŋ ṭhānaŋ anupharitvā tiṭṭhanti." The id. p. at Nd1 405 = Nd2 304iii d reads bh. yojana -- sataŋ pharitvā (intrs.: expanding, wide) tiṭṭhati, which is the more correct reading). -- See also ophuṭa & cp. phuta3. Phuṭa
Phuṭa2
[pp. of sphuṭ to expand, blossom] blossoming out, opened, in full bloom Dāvs iv.49 (˚kumuda). Cp. phuṭita. Phuṭa
Phuṭa3
at M i.377 (sabba -- vāri˚, in sequence with vārita, yuta, dhuta) is unnecessarily changed by Kern, Toev. s. v. into pūta. The meaning is "filled with, spread with," thus = phuṭa1, cp. sequence under ophuṭa. The v. l. at M i.377 is puṭṭha. On miswriting of phuṭṭa & puṭṭha for phuṭa cp. remark by Trenckner, M i.553. A similar meaning ("full of, occupied by, overflowing with") is attached to phuṭa in Avīci passage A i.159 (Avīci maññe phuṭo ahosi), cp. Anāgata Vaŋsa (J.P.T.S. 1886, v.39) & remarks of Morris's J.P.T.S. 1887, 165. -- The same passage as M i.377 is found at D i.57, where T. reads phuṭṭa (as also at DA i.168), with vv. ll. puṭṭha & phuṭa. Phuṭita
Phuṭita
[for phoṭita, pp. of *sphoṭayati, sphuṭ] 1. shaken, tossed about, burst, rent asunder, abstr. nt. phutitattaŋ being tossed about Miln 116 (v. l. put ˚). -> 2. cracked open, chapped, torn (of feet) Th 2, 269 (so read for T. phuṭika, ThA 212 explns by bāhita & has v. l. niphuṭita). Phuṭṭha
Phuṭṭha
[pp. of phusati1] touched, affected by, influenced by; in specific sense (cp. phusati1 2) "thrilled, permeated" Vin i.200 (ābādhena); A ii.174 (rogena); J i.82 (mettacittena, v. l. puṭṭha); v.441 (dibbaphassena); Vism 31 (˚samphassa contact by touch), 49 (byādhinā); VvA 6 (in both meanings, scil. pītiyā & rogena). On phuṭṭha at D i.57 see phuṭa3. Cp. sam˚. Phunati
Phunati
[?] to shake, sprinkle, of doubtful spelling, at J vi.108 (angārakāsuŋ ph.; v. l. punanti perhaps better; C. explns by vidhunati & okirati). Perhaps we should read dhunati. Phulaka
Phulaka
( = pulaka) a kind of gem VvA 111. Phulla
Phulla1
[pp. of phalati, or root formation fr. phull, cp. phalita3] blossoming, in blossom J v.203. Also as Intensive phāliphulla "one mass of flowers" M i.218; J i.52. Note. phulla1 may stand for phuṭa2. Phulla
Phulla2
[pp. of phalati, cp. phalita2] broken, in phrase akhaṇḍa -- phulla unbroken (q. v.), Pv iv.176 and passim. Phullita
Phullita
[pp. of phullati] in flower, blossoming J v.214 (for phīta = rich), 216 (su˚ -- vana). Phusati
Phusati1
[spṛś, fr. which sparśa = phassa; cp. also phas- sati] 1. (lit.) to touch Vism 463 (phusatī ti phasso); DA i.61 (aor. phusī=metri causa for phusi); Miln 157 (grd. aphusa not to be touched). -- 2. (fig.) [see on this term of Buddhist ecstatic phraseology Cpd. 1332. In this meaning it is very closely related to pharati, as appears e. g. from the foll. explns of Cys.: D i.74 parippharati=samantato phusati DA i.217; D ii.186 ≈ pharitvā=phusitvā ārammaṇaŋ katvā Vism 308] to attain, to reach, only in specific sense of attaining to the highest ideal of religious aspiration, in foll. phrases: ceto -- samādhiŋ ph. D i.13=iii.30, 108 etc.; nirodhaŋ D i.184; samatha -- samādhiŋ Vv 169 (reads āphusiŋ but should prob. be aphusiŋ as VvA 84, expld by adhigacchiŋ); phalaŋ aphussayi (aor. med.) Pv iv.188; cp. PvA 243; amataŋ padaŋ Pv iv.348; amataŋ Miln 338 (but T. reads khippaŋ phasseti a.); in bad sense kappaṭṭhitikaŋ kammaŋ Miln 108 (of Devadatta). -- pp. phuṭṭha . Cp. upa˚. -- 480 -- Phusati
Phusati2
this is a specific Pali form and represents two Sk. roots, which are closely related to each other and go back to the foll. 2 Idg. roots: 1. Idg. *sp(h)ṛj, burst out, burst (forth), spring, sprinkle, as in Sk. sphūrjati burst forth, parjanya rain cloud; Gr. sfarage/w; Ags. spearca = E. spark, E. spring, sprinkle. This is an enlargement of sphur (cp. pharati, phuṭṭha, phuta). -> 2. Idg. *spṛk to sprinkle, speckle, as in Sk. pruṣ, pṛśni speckled, pṛṣan, pṛṣatī spotted antelope, pṛṣata raindrop; Gr. perkno/s of dark (lit. spotted) colour; Lat. spargere=Ger. sprengen. To this root belong P. pasata, phoseti, paripphosaka, phussa, phusita. -- Inf. phusituŋ, conjectured reading at Vin i.205 for T. phosituŋ (vv. ll. posituŋ & dhovituŋ), & Vin ii.151 for T. posituŋ; Vin. Texts iii.169 translate "bespatter." Phusana
Phusana
(nt.) [abstr. fr. phusati1 1] touch Vism 463. Phusanā
Phusanā
(f.) [abstr. fr. phusati1 2] attainment, gaining, reaching Vism 278 ( = phuṭṭha -- ṭṭhāna); DhA i.230 (ñāṇa˚); VvA 85 (samādhi˚). Phusāyati
Phusāyati
[Caus. of pruṣ, but formed fr. P. phusati2] to sprinkle (rain), to rain gently, drizzle S i.104 sq., 154, 184 (devo ekaŋ ekaŋ ph. "drop by drop"). See also anuphusāyati (so read for ˚phusīyati). Phusita
Phusita1
(nt.) [either pp. of phusati2 or direct correspon- dent of Sk. pṛṣata (see pasata2)] rain -- drop M iii.300; S ii.135; DhA iii.243. The Prk. equivalent is phusiya (Pischel, Gr. § 208), cp. Ger. sprenkeln> E. sprinkle. Phusita
Phusita2
[pp. of phusati2 2. i. e. pruṣ, cp. Sk. pruṣita sprinkled, pṛṣatī spotted antelope] spotted, coloured, variegated (with flowers) Sn 233 (˚agga = supupphit' agga -- sākha KhA 192). Phus(s)ita
Phus(s)ita3
[ = phassita2, Kern. Toev. s. v. takes it as pp. of *puŋsayati] touched, put on, in ˚aggaḷa with fastened (clinched) bolts (or better: door -- wings) M i.76 (reads phassit˚; cp. v. l. on p. 535 phussit˚); A i.101; Th 1, 385; J vi.510. Phusitaka
Phusitaka
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. phusita1) having raindrops, only in phrase thulla˚ deva (the sky) shedding big drops of rain S ii.32 (reads phulla -- phusitaka); iii.141; A i.243; ii.140; v.114; Vism 259. Phussa
Phussa1
[fr. puṣ to blossom, nourish, etc. cp. Ved. puṣya] 1. see phussa3 2. -- 2. N. of a month (Dec. -- Jan.) J i.86. N. of a lunar mansion or constellation Vv 534 ( = phussa -- tārakā VvA 236). -- Frequent as Np., cp. Vism 422, and combns like ˚deva, ˚mitta. Phussa
Phussa2
[ger. of phusati1] touching, feeling, realising; doubled at D i.45, 54. Phussa
Phussa3
(adj. -- n.) [grd. formation fr. phusati2 2; scarcely fr. Sk. puṣya (to puṣ nourish, cp. poseti), but meaning rather "speckled" in all senses. The Sk. puṣyaratha is Sanskritisation of P. phussa˚] 1. speckled, gaily -- coloured, ˚kokila the spotted cuckoo [Kern, Toev. s. v. phussa however takes it as "male -- cuckoo," Sk. puŋs -- kokila] J v.419, 423; VvA 57. -- As phussaka at A i.188 (so read for pussaka). -- 2. in sense of "clear, excellent, exquisite" (or it is puṣya in sense of "substance, essence" of anything, as Geiger, P. Gr. § 40 1a?) in ˚ratha [cp. Sk, puṣpa˚, but prob. to be read puṣya˚?] a wonderful state carriage running of its own accord J ii.39; iii.238; iv.34; v.248; vi.39 sq.) v. l. pussa˚); PvA 74. -- rāga [cp. Sk. puṣpa -- rāga] topaz Miln 118; VvA 111. -- At Nd1 90 as v. l. to be preferred to pussa˚ in ˚tila, ˚tela, ˚dantakaṭṭha, etc. with ref. to their use by Brahmins. Pheggu
Pheggu
[cp. Vedic phalgu & P. phaggu in form] acces- sory wood, wood surrounding the pith of a tree, always with ref. to trees (freq. in similes), in sequence mūla, sāra, pheggu, taca, papaṭikā etc. It is represented as next to the pith, but inferior and worthless. At all passages contrasted with sāra (pith, substance). Thus at M i.192 sq., 488; D iii.51; S iv.168; A i.152 (pheggu+ sāra, v. l. phaggu); ii.110 = Pug 52; A iii.20; J iii.431 (opp. sāra); Miln 267, 413 (tacchako phegguŋ apaharitvā sāraŋ ādiyati). Phegguka
Phegguka
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. pheggu] having worthless wood, weak, inferior M i.488 (apagata˚, where ˚ka belongs to the whole cpd.); J iii.318 (a˚+sāramaya). Pheggutā
Pheggutā
(f.) [abstr. fr. pheggu] state of dry wood; lack of substance, worthlessness Pug A 229. Pheṇa
Pheṇa
[cp. Vedic phena, with *ph fr. sp˚, connected with Lat. spūma, scum, Ags. fām = Ger. feim=E. foam] scum, foam, froth, only in cpds. viz.:

-- uddehakaŋ (adv.) (paccamāna, boiling) with scum on top, throwing up foam M iii.167; A i.141; Nd2 304iii c; J iii.46; Miln 357. -- paṭala a film of scum Vism 359; VbhA 65. -- piṇḍa a lump or heap of foam S iii.140 sq. = Vism 479 (in simile of rūpa); Nd2 680 Aii; Vism 40 (in comp); VbhA 32 sq. bubbuḷaka a bubble of scum Vism 171, 259, 345; VbhA 242. -- mālā a wreath or garland of scum Miln 117. -- mālin with a wreath of scum Miln 260. -- missa mixed with froth Vism 263. -- vaṇṇa colour of scum Vism 263. Pheṇaka
Pheṇaka
= pheṇa Vism 254; VbhA 237. Phoṭa
Phoṭa
[fr. sphuṭ, cp. Sk. sphoṭa] swelling, boil, blister J iv.457; vi.8 (v. l. pota & poṭha); cp. poṭa bubble. Phoṭaka = phoṭa
Phoṭaka
= phoṭa Vism 258; VbhA 242. Phoṭana
Phoṭana
"applause," in brahma -- pphoṭana at DhA iii.210 should be taken as ā +phoṭana ( = apphoṭana). Phoṭeti
Phoṭeti
[Caus. of sphuṭ, if correct. Maybe mixed with sphūrj. The form apphoṭesi seems to be ā+phoṭeti = Sk. āsphoṭayati] to shake, toss (or thunder?) only at two places in similar formula, viz. devatā sādhukāraŋ adaŋsu, brahmāno apphoṭesuŋ (v. l. appoṭh˚) Miln 13, 18; Sakko devarājā appoṭhesi (v. l. appoṭesi), Mahābrahmā sādhukāraŋ adāsi J vi.486. Perhaps we should read poṭheti (q. v.), to snap one's fingers (clap hands) as sign of applause. At DhA iii.210 we read fut. apphoṭessāmi (i. e. ā+phoṭ). Phoṭṭhabba
Phoṭṭhabba
(nt.) [grd. of phusati] tangible, touch, con- tact; it is synonymous with phassa, which it replaces in psychol. terminology. Phoṭṭhabbaŋ is the senseobject of kāya (or taca) touch ("kāyena phoṭṭhabbaŋ phusitvā" D iii.226, 250, 269; Nd2 p. 238 under rūpa). See also āyatana. -- D iii.102 (in list of ajjhattikabāhirāni āyatanāni: kāyo c' eva phoṭṭhabbā ca; with pl. like m.); VbhA 79 (˚dhātu). Phosita
Phosita
[pp. of phoseti, cp. Sk. pruṣita] sprinkled J vi.47 (candana˚, v. l. pusita). Phoseti
Phoseti
[Caus. of phusati2, cp. Sk. pruṣāyati = P. phusa- yati] to sprinkle (over) Vin ii.205 (inf. phosituŋ). -> pp. phosita. Cp. pari˚. -- 481 -- -- B. Ba
Ba
(indecl.) the sound (& letter) b, often substituted for or replaced by p (& ph): so is e. g. in Bdhgh's view pahuta the word bahuta, with p for b (KhA 207), cp. bakkula, badara, badālatā, baddhacara, bandhuka 2, bala, balīyati, bahuka, bahūta, billa, bella; also paribandha for paripantha; phāla2. Also substituted for v, cp. bajjayitvā v.l. vajjetvā DAI, 4, and see under Nibb -- . Baka
Baka
[cp. Epic Sk. baka] 1. a crane, heron Cp. iii.102; J i.205 (˚suṇikā), 221, 476; ii.234; iii.252. -- 2. N. of a dweller in the Brahma world M i.326; S i.142. Bakula
Bakula
[cp. Class. Sk. bakula, N. of the tree Mimusops elengi, and its (fragrant) flower] in milāta˚ -- puppha is v. l. KhA 60 (see App. p. 870 Pj.) for ˚ākuli˚, which latter is also read at Vism 260. Bakkula
Bakkula
[ = vyākula? Morris, J.P.T.S. 1886, 94] a demon, uttering horrible cries, a form assumed by the Yakkha Ajakalāpaka, to terrify the Buddha Ud 5 (see also ākulī, where pākula is proposed for bakkula). Bajjha
Bajjha
see bandhati. Bajjhati
Bajjhati
Pass. of bandhati (q. v.). Battiŋsa
Battiŋsa
(num. card.) [for dvat -- tiŋsa] thirty -- two J iii.207. Badara
Badara
(m. & nt.) [cp. Ved. badara & badarī] the fruit of the jujube tree (Zizyphus jujuba), not unlike a crabapple in appearance & taste, very astringent, used for medicine A i.130 = Pug 32; A iii.76; Vin iv.76; J iii.21; DhsA 320 (cited among examples of acrid flavours); VvA 186. Spelling padara for b˚ at J iv.363; vi.529.

-- aṭṭhi kernel of the j. SnA 247. -- paṇḍu light yellow (fresh) jujube -- fruit A i.181 (so read for bhadara˚). -- missa mixture or addition of the juice of jujube -- fruits Vin iv.76. -- yūsa juice of the j. fruit VvA 185. Badarī
Badarī
(f.) [cp. Sk. badarī] the jujube tree J ii.260. Badālatā
Badālatā
(f.) [etym. uncertain, may it be *padālatā, pa+ n. ag. of dal Caus., lit. "destroyer"?] a creeper (with thorns Kern, Toev. s. v.) D iii.87 = Vism 418; Bdhgh says (see Dial. iii.84) "a beautiful creeper of sweet taste." Baddha
Baddha1
[pp. of bandhati] 1. bound, in bondage M i.275; S i.133; iv.91; Sn 957 (interpreted as "baddhacara" by Nd1 464); Dh 324. -- 2. snared, trapped J ii.153; iii.184; iv.251, 414. -- 3. made firm, settled, fastened, bound (to a cert. place) KhA 60 (˚pitta, opp. abaddha˚). -- 4. contracted, acquired Vin iii.96. -- 5. bound to, addicted or attached to Sn 773 (bhavasāta˚, cp. Nd1 30). -- 6. put together, kneaded, made into cakes (of meal) J iii.343; v.46; vi.524. -- 7. bound together, linked, clustered DhA i.304 kaṇṇika˚ (of thoughts). -- 9. set, made up (of the mind) DhA i.11 (mānasaŋ te b.). -> Cp. ati˚, anu˚, a˚, ni˚, paṭi˚, vini˚, sam˚.

-- añjalika keeping the hands reverently extended Dāvs iii.30. -- rāva the cry of the bound (or trapped) J iv.279, 415 (v. l. bandhana˚). -- vera having contracted an enmity, hostile, bearing a grudge DhA i.324. Baddha
Baddha2
(nt.) [fr. bandhati] a leather strap, a thong Vin i.287 (T. bandha perhaps right, cp. ābandhana 3); PvA 127. Baddhacara
Baddhacara
see paddhacara. Badhira
Badhira
(adj.) [cp. Vedic badhira, on etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fatuus, comparing Goth. baups and M. Irish bodar] deaf Vin i.91, 322; Th 1, 501 = Miln 367; J i.76 (jāti˚); v.387; vi.7; DhA i.312. See also mūga.

-- dhātuka deaf by nature J ii.63; iv.146; DhA i.346. Bandha
Bandha
(adj.) [cp. Vedic bandha, fr. bandh] 1. bond, fetter It 56 (abandho Mārassa, not a victim of M.); Nd1 328 (taṇhā˚, diṭṭhi˚); ThA 241. -- 2. one who binds or ties together, in assa˚ horsekeeper, groom J ii.98; v.441, 449; DhA i.392. -- 3. a sort of binding: maṇḍala˚ with a circular b. (parasol) Vin iv.338, salāka˚ with a notched b. ibid. -- 4. a halter, tether Dpvs i.76. -- Cp. vinibandha. Bandhaka
Bandhaka
as v. l. of vaṭṭaka see aŋsa˚. Bandhakī
Bandhakī
(f.) [fr. bandhaka, cp. Epic Sp. bandhukī a low woman = pāŋśukā & svairinī Halāy 2, 341] an unchaste woman (lit. binder) Vin iv.224 (pl. bandhakiniyo), 265 (id.); J v.425, 431 (va˚). Bandhati
Bandhati
[Vedic badhnāti, later Sk. bandhati, Idg. *bhendh, cp. Lat. offendimentum i. e. band; Goth. bindan = Ohg, bintan, E. bind; Sk. bandhu relation; Gr. penqero/s father-in-law, pei_sma bond, etc.] to bind etc. -- 1. Forms: Imper. bandha D ii.350; pl. bandhantu J i.153. Pot. bandheyya S iv.198; Vin iii.45; Fut. bandhayissati Mhvs 24. 6; Aor. abandhi J iii.232, & bandhi J i.292; DhA i.182. Ger. bandhitvā Vin i.46; S iv.200; J i.253, 428, & bandhiya Th 2, 81. Inf. bandhituŋ Th 2, 299. Caus. bandheti (see above Fut.) & bandhāpeti (see below). -- II. Meanings -- 1. to bind S iv.200 (rajjuyā). fig. combine, unite DhA ii.189 (gharāvāsena b. to give in marriage). -- 2. to tie on, bind or put on to (loc.) DhA i.182 (dasante). fig. to apply to, put to, settle on DhA ii.12 (mānasaŋ paradāre). -- 3. to fix, prepare, get up, put together J iv.290 (ukkā); also in phrase cakk' âticakkaŋ mañc' âtimañcaŋ b. to put wheels upon wheels & couches upon couches J ii.331. iv.81; DhA iv.61. fig. to start, undertake, begin, make, in phrases āghātaŋ b. to bear malice DhA ii.21; and veraŋ b. to make enmity against (loc.) J ii.353. -- 4. to acquire, get J iii.232 (atthaŋ b.= nibbatteti C.). -- 5. to compose Miln 272 (suttaŋ); J ii.33; v.39. -- Caus. II. bandhāpeti to cause to be bound (or fettered) Vin iv.224, 316 (opp. mocāpeti); Nd2 304iii. b (bandhanena); PvA 4, 113. -- Pass. bajjhati Nd2 74 (for bujjhati, as in palābujjhati to be obstructed: see palibuddhati). I. Forms Ind. 3rd pl. bajjhare Th 1, 137; pret. 3rd pl. abajjhare J i.428. Imper. bajjhantu S iv.309; A v.284. Pot. bajjheyya S ii.228. Aor. bajjhi J ii.37; iv.414. Ger. bajjha J iv.441, 498, & bajjhitvā J ii.153; iv.259; v.442. -> II. Meanings. -- 1. to be bound, to be imprisoned Sn 508 (cp. SnA 418); J iv.278. -- 2. to be caught (in a sling or trap) J iii.330; iv.414. -- 3. to incur a penalty (with loc., e. g. bahudaṇḍe) J iv.116. -- 4. to be captivated by, struck or taken by, either with loc. J i.368 (bajjhitvā & bandhitvā in Pass. sense); v.465; or with instr. J i.428; iv.259. -- pp. baddha (q. v.). -- Cp. ati˚, anu˚, ā, o˚, paṭi˚, sam˚. -- 482 -- Bandhana
Bandhana
(nt.) [fr. bandh, cp. Vedic bandhana] 1. binding, bond, fetter Vin i.21; D i.226, 245 (pañca kāma- guṇā); iii.176; M ii.44; S i.8, 24 (Māra˚), 35, 40; iv.201 sq. (5 fold) to bind the king of the Devas or Asuras, 291; Sn 532, 948; Th 1, 414; 2, 356 (Māra˚) Dh 345 sq.; J ii.139, 140; iii.59 = PvA 4; v.285; Nd2 304iii. b (var. bonds, andhu˚, rajju˚ etc. cp. Nd1 433); DA i.121 (with ref. to kāmā). -- 2. binding, tying, band, ligature; tie (also fig.) Vin i.204 (˚suttaka thread for tying) ii.135 (kāya˚ waistband); ii.117 (˚rajju for robes); S iii.155 (vetta˚ ligatures of bamboo; cp. v.51); Sn 44 (gihi˚, cp. Nd2 228: puttā ca dāsī ca); DhA i.4 (ghara˚ tie of the house); KhA 51 (paṭṭa˚). -- 3. holding together, composition, constitution Vin i.96 (sarīra˚), cp. iii.28. -- fig. composition (of literature) J ii.224 (gāthā˚). -- 4. joining together, union, company DhA ii.160 (gaṇa˚ joining in companies). -- 5. handle Vin ii.135. -- 6. piecing together Vin i.254 (˚mattena when it, i. e. the stuff, has only been pieced together, see Vin. Texts ii.153 n.). -- 7. strap (?) doubtful reading in aŋsa˚ (q. v.) Vv 3340, where we should prefer to read with v. l. ˚vaṭṭaka. -- 8. doubtful in meaning in cpd. paŋca -- vidha -- bandhana "the fivefold fixing," as one of the torments in Niraya. It is a sort of crucifixion (see for detail pañca 3) Nd2 304iii. c=Nd1 404; J i.174; PvA 221; VbhA 278. In this connection it may mean "set," cp. mūla˚. -- On use of bandhana in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 115. Cp. vini˚.

-- âgāra "fetter -- house," prison D i.72; M i.75; Vin iii.151; J iii.326; DhA ii.152; VvA 66; PvA 153. -- âgārika prison -- keeper, head -- jailer A ii.207. Bandhanīya
Bandhanīya
(adj.) [grd. of bandhati] 1. to be bound or fettered Miln 186. -- 2. apt to bind, binding, constraining D ii.337 (cp. Dial. ii.361); Th 2, 356. Bandhava
Bandhava
[cp. Class. Sk. bāndhava] 1. kinsman, member of a clan or family, relative A iii.44; Sn 60 (pl. bandhavāni in poetry; cp. Nd2 455); Dh 288 (pl. bandhavā); J ii.316; v.81; DA i.243. -- 2. ( -- ˚) one who is connected with or belongs to Sn 140 (manta˚, well-acquainted with Mantras; cp. SnA 192; vedabandhū veda -- paṭisaraṇā ti vuttaŋ hoti); J v.335 (bodhaneyya˚); cp. bandhu 3. Bandhu
Bandhu
[Vedic bandhu, see bandhati & cp. bandhava] 1. a relation, relative, kinsman; pl. bandhū J iv.301; PvA 86 ( = ñātī) & bandhavo Nd2 455 (where Nd1 11 in id. p. reads bandhū). -- Ādicca˚ kinsman of the Sun, an Ep. of the Buddha Vin ii.296; A ii.17; Sn 54, 915, 1128, cp. Nd2 152b; Vv 2413; 7810, cp. VvA 116. -> Four kinds of relations enumd at Nd1 11. viz. ñāti˚, gotta˚, manta˚ (where Nd2 455 reads mitta˚), sippa˚. -- 2. Ep. of Brahmā, as ancestor of the brahmins DA i.254: see below ˚pāda. -- 3. (˚ -- ) connected with, related to, dealing with [cp. Vedic amṛta -- bandhu RV x.725] S i.123 (pamatta˚); 128; Sn 241, 315, 430, 911; J iv.525; Miln 65 (kamma˚); SnA 192 (veda˚.). -- f. bandhunī J vi.47 (said of the town of Mithilā (rāja˚); expld by C. as "rāja -- ñātakeh'eva puṇṇā").

-- pāda the foot of Brahma, from which the Śūdras are said to have originated (cp. Sk. pādaja), in cpd. bandhupād'apacca "offering from the foot of our kinsman," applied as contemptuous epithet to the Samaṇas by a Brahmin D i.90; M i.334; S iv.117. Bandhuka
Bandhuka
(adj.) [fr. bandhu] 1. the plant Pentapetes phoenicea J iv.279 (˚puppha, evidently only a contraction of bandhu -- jīvaka, cp. C. bandhujīvaka -> puppha; although Sk. bandhūka is given as syn. of bandhujīva at Halāyudha 2, 53). -- 2. in bandhukaroga M ii.121 prob. to be read paṇḍuka˚, as v. l. BB; see paṇḍuroga. Bandhujīvaka
Bandhujīvaka
[cp. Class. Sk. bandhujīva] the plant Pentapetes phoenicea M ii.14 (˚puppha); D ii.111 (id.); J iv.279; Vism 174; DhsA 14; VvA 43, 161. Bandhumant
Bandhumant
(adj.) [fr. bandhu, cp. Vedic bandhumant] having relatives, rich in kinsmen; only as Np. m bandhumā N. of father of the Buddha Vipassin D ii.11 = Vism 433; f. bandhumatī N. of mother of the Buddha Vipassin ibid.; also N. of a town D ii.12 (capital of king Bandhumā); SnA 190=J iv.388 (where the latter has Vettavatī), and a river SnA 190= J iv.388 (: Vettavatī). Bandhuvant
Bandhuvant
(adj.) [bandhu+vant] having relatives, rich in relatives J vi.357. Babbaja
Babbaja
[cp. Vedic balbaja, doubtful whether it belongs to Lat. bulbus; for the initial b. very often p. is found: see pabbaja] a sort of coarse grass or reed, used to make slippers, etc. Vin i.190; D ii.55; S ii.92; iii.137; iv.158; A ii.211; Dh 345; DhA iv.55.

-- pādukā a slipper out of b. grass DhA iii.451. -- lāyaka cutter or reaper of grass S iii.155; A iii.365. Babbu
Babbu
(& ˚ka) Epic [Sk. babhruka a kind of ichneumon; Vedic babhru brown, cp. Lat. fiber = beaver, further connection "bear," see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fiber] a cat J i.480 (=biḷāra C.)=DhA ii.152. Babbhara
Babbhara
[onomat., cp. Sk. balbalā -- karoti to stammer or stutter, barbara = Gr. ba/rbaros stuttering, people of an unknown tongue, balbūtha Np. "stammerer"; also Lat. balbas, Ger. plappern, E. blab; babbhara is a redupl. formation fr. *bhara -- bhara=barbara, cp. J.P.T.S. 1889, 209; Geiger, P.Gr. § 20] imitation of a confused rumbling noise M i.128. -- Cp. also P. mammana and sarasara. Barihin
Barihin
[cp. Sk. barhin] a peacock J iv.497. Barihisa
Barihisa
(nt.) [Vedic barhis] the sacrificial grass D i.141; M i.344; A ii.207; Pug 56. Bala
Bala1
(nt.) [Vedic bala, most likely to Lat. de -- bilis "with- out strength" (cp. E. debility, P. dubbala), and Gr. be/ltistos (superl.) = Sk. baliṣṭha the strongest. The Dhātupāṭha (273) defines b. with pāṇane. At DhsA 124 bala is understood as "na kampati"] 1. strength, power, force D ii.73; A i.244; Th 1, 188; Dh 109 (one of the 4 blessings, viz. āyu, vaṇṇa, sukha, bala; cp. DhA ii.239); Pv i.512 (=kāya -- bala PvA 30); i.76; VvA 4 (iddhi˚); PvA 71 (id.), 82 (kamma˚). -- Of cases used as adv. balasā (instr.) is mentioned by Trenckner at Miln 430 (notes), cp. Prk. balasā (Pischel, Gr. § 364). yathā balaŋ according to one's power, i. e. as much as possible PvA 1, 54. The compn form of bala in conn. with kṛ is balī˚, e. g. dubbalīkaraṇa making weak M iii.4; Pug 59, 68; ˚karaṇin id. D iii.183. -- adj. bala strong J v.268, abala weak Sn 770, 1120, dubbala id. S i.222; J ii.154; Nd1 12; PvA 55; compar. ˚tara M i.244, nt. n. abalaŋ weakness S i.222. -- 2. an army, military force Mhvs 25, 57; SnA 357. See cpds. below. -- Eight balāni or strong points are 1. of young children (ruṇṇa -- balaŋ). -- 2. of womanhood (kodha˚). -- 3. of robbers (āvudha˚). -- 4. of kings (issariya˚), -- 5. of fools (ujjhatti˚). -- 6. of wise men (nijjhatti˚). -- 7. of the deeply learned (paṭisankhāna˚). -- 8. of samaṇas & brāhmaṇas (khanti˚) A iv.223 (where used as adj. -- ˚ strong in . . .); cp. Sn 212, 623. -- Five balāni of women are: rūpabalaŋ, bhoga˚, ñāti˚, putta˚, sīla˚ S iv.246 -- 8. The five -- fold force (balaŋ pañca -- vidhaŋ) of a king J v.120, 121 consists of bāhābalaŋ strength of arms, bhoga˚ of wealth, amacca˚ of counsellors, abhijacca˚ of high birth, paññā˚ the force of wisdom; in the religious sense five balāni or powers are commonly enumd: saddhābalaŋ, viriya˚, sati˚, samādhi˚, paññā˚ A iii.12; D ii.120; M ii.12, iii.296; S iii.96, 153; iv.366, v.219, 249; Ps ii.56, 86, 166, 174, 223; ii.84, 133, 168 etc. They correspond to the 5 indriyāni and are developed with them. S v.219, 220; Nett 31; they are cultivated to destroy the five uddhambhāgiyāni saŋyojanāni S v.251. They are freq. referred to in instructions of the Buddha about the constituents of the "Dhamma," culminating in the eightfold Path, viz. cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, samappadhānā, cattāro iddhipādā, pañcindriyani, p. balāni, sattabojjhangāni, ariyo aṭṭhangiko maggo e. g. S iii.96; Ps ii.56; Nd1 13=360 =Nd2 420; Nd2 s. v. satipaṭṭhāna; and passim. [Cp. BSk. catvāra ṛddhipādāḥ pañc' endriyāni p. balāni, sapta bodhyangāni etc. Divy 208.] Two balāni are specially mentioned A i.52 (paṭisankhānabalaŋ and bhāvanā˚), also D iii.213, followed here by the other "pair" satibalaŋ and samādhi˚. There are four balāni of the ariyasāvaka, by which he overcomes the five fears (pañca bhayāni q. v.); the four are paññābalaŋ, viriya˚, anavajja˚ sangāha˚ A iv.363 sq., as given at A ii.141, also the foll. 3 groups of cattāri balāni:-> (1) saddhābalaŋ, viriya˚, sati˚, samādhi˚, cp. D iii.229. -- (2) sati˚ samādhi, anavajja˚, sangāha˚. (3) paṭisankhāna˚, bhāvanā˚, anavajja˚, sangāha˚. -- For 4 balāni see also D iii.229 note, and for paṭisankhānabala (power of computation) see Dhs. trsl. 1353. The ten balāni of the Tathāgata consist of his perfect comprehension in ten fields of knowledge A v.32 sq.; M i.69; Nd2 466; Miln 105, 285; VbhA 397. -- In a similar setting 10 powers are given as consisting in the knowledge of the Paṭiccasamuppāda at S ii.27, 28. -> The balāni of the sāvaka are distinct from those of the Tathāgatha: Kvu 228 sq. -- There are seven balāni D iii.253, and seven khīṇāsava -- balāni 283 i. e. saddhābalaŋ, viriya˚, sati˚, samādhi˚, paññā˚, hiri˚ and ottappa˚. The same group is repeated in the Abhidhamma; Dhs 58, 95, 102; DhsA 126. The Ps. also enumerates seven khīṇāsavabalāni i.35; and sixty -- eight balāni ii.168 sq.

-- agga front of an army, troops in array D i.6; Vin iv.107, cp. DA i.85. -- ânīka (adj.) with strong array Sn 623; Dh 399 (cp. DhA iv.164). -- kāya a body of troops, an army cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung p. 52 note; (also in BSk. e. g. Divy 63, 315) A i.109; iv.107, 110; S i.58; J i.437 (˚ŋ saŋharati to draw up troops); ii.76; iii.319; v.124; vi.224, 451; DhA i.393; PugA 249. -- koṭṭhaka fortress, camp J i.179; Mhvs 25, 29. -- (k)kāra application of force, violence J i.476; ii.421; iii.447; instr. ˚ena by force PvA 68, 113. -- gumba a serried troop J ii.406. -- cakka wheel of power, of sovereignty Dpvs vi.2. -- ṭṭha a military official, palace guard, royal messenger Miln 234, 241, 264, 314; Mhvs 34, 17. -- da strength -- giving S i.32; Sn 297. -- dāyin id. A ii.64. -- deva "God of strength" N. of the elder brother of Kaṇha J iv.82; Nd1 89, 92 (Vāsudeva+); Vism 233 (id). -- (p)patta gṙown -- strong DhsA 118 (v. l. phala˚). -- vāhana troops, an army J ii.319, iv.170, 433; vi.391, 458. -- vīra a hero in strength Vv 531, cp. VvA 231. -- sata for palāsata, q. v. (cp. J.P.T.S. 1908, 108 note). -- 483 -- Bala
Bala2
[cp. *Sk. bala: Halāyudha 5, 23; & P. balākā] a species of carrion crow J v.268; also in cpd. bal'ankapāda having crow's feet, i. e. spreading feet (perhaps for balāka˚?) J vi.548 (C. explns by pattharita -- pāda, read patthārita˚). Balaka
Balaka
(adj.) [fr. bala] strong; only in kisa˚ of meagre strength, weakly M i.226; and dub˚ weak M i.435. Cp. balika. Balatā
Balatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. bala] strength, lit. strength -- quality M i.325. Balati
Balati
[fr. bal, as in bala] to live KhA 124 (in def. of bālā as "balanti anantī ti bālā"). Balatta
Balatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. bala, cp. balatā] strength, only in cpd. dubbalatta weakness J ii.154. Balavatā
Balavatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. balavant; cp. Epic Sk. balavattā] strength, force (also in military sense) J ii.369 (ārakkhassa b.); Miln 101 (kusalassa & akusalassa kammassa b.). Balavant
Balavant
(adj.) [fr. bala] strong, powerful, sturdy M i.244 (purisa) S i.222; J ii.406; DhA ii.208; VvA 35; PvA 94. Comparative balavatara Miln 131; f. ˚a(n) tarī Sdhp 452. In compn balava˚, e. g. ˚gavā sturdy oxen M i.226; ˚vippaṭisāra deep remorse PvA 14, ˚balava very strong J ii.406. -- balavaŋ as nt. adv. "exceedingly," in cpd. balav' âbalavaŋ very (loud and) strong Vin ii.1 ( = suṭṭhu balavaŋ C.), and ˚paccūse very early in the morning Vism 93, and ˚paccūsa -- samaye id. J i.92; DhA i.26. Balasata
Balasata
see palasata. Balākā
Balākā
(f.) [cp. Vedic balākā, perhaps to Lat. fulica, Gr. falari/s a water fowl, Ohg. pelicha = Ger. belche] a crane Th 1, 307; J ii.363; iii.226; Miln 128 (˚ānaŋ megha -- saddena gabbhâvakkanti hoti); Vism 126 (in simile, megha -- mukhe b. viya); DA i.91 (v. l. baka). Bali
Bali
[cp. Vedic bali; regarding etym. Grassmann connects it with bhṛ] 1. religious offering, oblation D ii.74 (dhammika); A iv.17, 19; Sn 223; Mhvs 36, 88 (particularly to subordinate divinities, cp. Mhvs. trsln 263); DhA ii.14 (v. l. ˚kamma). -- pañca˚ the fivefold offering, i. e. ñāti˚, atithi˚, pubbapeta˚, rāja˚, devatā˚, offering to kinsfolk, guests, the departed, the king, the gods; A ii.68; iii.45. -- 2. tax, revenue (cp. Zimmer, Altind. Leben 166 & Fick, Sociale Gliederung 75) D i.135, 142; J i.199 (daṇḍa˚ fines & taxes), 339; DhA i.251 (daṇḍa˚). -- 3. Np. of an Asura D ii.259.

-- kamma offering of food to bhūtas, devas & others J i.169, 260; ii.149, 215; iv.246 (offering to tutelary genii of a city. In this passage the sacrifice of a human being is recommended); v.99, 473; SnA 138; Mhbv 28. -- karaṇa oblation, offering of food PvA 81; VvA 8 (˚pīṭha, reading doubtful, v. l. valli˚). -- kāraka offering oblations J i.384. -- ˚nkatā one who offers (the five) oblations A ii.68. -- paṭiggāhaka receiving offerings, worthy of oblations J ii.17 (yakkha; interpreted by Fick, Sociale Gliederung 79 as "tax -- collector," hardly justified); f. ˚ikā A iii.77 (devatā), 260 (id.), cp. BSk. balipratigrāhikā devatā Divy 1. -- pīḷita crushed with taxes J v.98. -- puṭṭha a crow (cp. Sk. balipuṣṭa "fed by oblations") Abhp 638. -- vadda (cp. Sk. balivarda, after the Pali?) an ox, esp. an ox yoked to the plough or used in ploughing (on similes with b. see J.P.T.S. 1907, 349) S i.115, 170; iv.163 sq., 282 sq.; A ii.108 sq.; Sn p. 13 (cp. SnA 137); Dh 152 = Th 1, 1025; J i.57; v.104 (Sāliyo b. phālena pahaṭo); Vism 284 (in simile of their escape from the ploughman); DhA i.24 (dhuraŋ vahanto balivaddassa, v. l. balibaddassa); VvA 258 (vv. ll. ˚baddha & ˚bandha). The spelling balibadda occurs at Vin iv.312. -- sādhaka tax collector, tax gatherer J iv.366; v.103 sq. -- haraṇa taking oblations A v.79 (˚vanasaṇḍa). Balika
Balika
(adj.) [fr. bala] strong; only in der. balikataraŋ (compar.) adv. in a stronger degree, more intensely, more Miln 84; & dubbalika weak ThA 211. Cp. balaka. Balin
Balin
(adj.) [fr. bala] strong Th 1, 12 (paññā˚); Vv 647; Dh 280; J iii.484; vi.147. Balisa & Baḷisa
Balisa
& Baḷisa (m. & nt.) [cp. Sk. baḍiśa] a fish-hook S ii.226 = iv.158 (āmisa -- gataŋ b.); Nd2 374 (kāma˚, v. l. palisa); J i.482 sq.; iii.283; iv.195; v.273 sq., 389; vi.416; Miln 412; SnA 114 (in expln of gaḷa Sn 61); ThA 280, 292; VbhA 196 (in comparison); Sdhp 610. On use in similes cp. J.P.T.S. 1907, 115.

-- maŋsikā (f.) "flesh-hooking," a kind of torture M i.87; iii.164; A i.47; ii.122; Nd1 154; Nd2 604; Miln 197. -- yaṭṭhi angling rod DhA iii.397. -- 484 -- Balī˚
Balī˚
= bala˚ in combn with bhū & kṛ, see bala. Balīyati
Balīyati
[Denom. fr. bala, cp. BSk. balīyati MVastu i.275] to have strength, to grow strong, to gain power, to overpower Sn 770 ( = sahati parisahati abhibhavati Nd1 12, cp. 361); J iv.84 (vv. ll. khalī˚ & paliyy˚; C. expls by avattharati)= Pv ii.61 (=balavanto honti vaḍḍhanti abhibhavanti PvA 94); J vi.224 (3rd pl. balīyare; C. abhibhavati, kuppati, of the border provinces); Nett 6 (vv. ll. bali˚, pali˚; C. abhibhavati). Balya
Balya1
(nt.) [der. fr. bala] belonging to strength, only in cpd. dub˚ weakness M i.364; Pug 66; also spelt dubballa M i.13. -- abl. dubbalyā as adv. groundlessly, without strong evidence Vin iv.241 (cp. J.P.T.S. 1886, 129). Balya
Balya2
[fr. bāla, cp. P. & Sk. bālya] foolishness, stupidity Dh 63 (v. l. bālya); J iii.278 (C. bālya); DhA ii.30. Baḷavā
Baḷavā
(f.) [cp. Vedic vaḍavā] a mare, only in cpd. ˚mukha the mare's mouth, i. e. an entrance to Niraya (cp. Vedic vaḍavâgni & vaḍavāmukha) Th 1, 1104 (trsl. "abyss -- discharged mouth," cp. Brethren, p. 418). Baḷīyakkha
Baḷīyakkha
[etym.?] a species of birds J vi.539. Bahati
Bahati1
[bṛh1] to pull, see ab˚, ub˚, nib˚, & cp. udabbahe, pavāḷha. Bahati
Bahati2
[baŋh doublet of bṛh2] to strengthen, increase, see brūhana (upa˚); otherwise only in pp. bāḷha (q. v.). The Dhtp (344, cp. Dhtm 506) explns "baha braha brūha: vuddhiyaŋ." Bahati
Bahati3
[a Pali root, to be postulated as der. fr. bahi in sense of "to keep out"] only in Caus. formations: to keep outside, lit. to make stay outside or away. See bāhā 2; bāheti, paribāhati. Bahala
Bahala
(adj.) [cp. Class. Sk. bahala & Ved. bahula] dense, thick Vin ii.112; J i.467 (˚palāpa -- tumba a measure thickly filled with chaff); ii.91; Miln 282; Vism 257 (˚pūva, where KhA 56 omits bahala), 263 (opp. tanuka); KhA 62 (˚kuthita -- lākhā thickly boiled, where in id. p. Vism 261 has accha -- lākhā, i. e. clear); DhA iv.68; VvA 162 ( = aḷāra). -- subahala very thick Miln 258 (rajojalla). Bahalatta
Bahalatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. above] thickness, swollen con- dition, swelling J i.147. Bahi
Bahi
(adv.) [cp. Vedic bahis & bahir; the s(ḥ) is restored in doubling of cons. in compn like bahig -- gata Vv 5015, in bahiddhā and in lengthening of i as bahī J v.65] outside: 1. (adv.) J i.361 (˚dvāre -- gāma a village outside the city gates); Pv i.102; DhA iii.118; PvA 24, 61. -> 2. (prep.) with acc. (direction to) J i.298 (˚gāmaŋ); with loc. (place where) ˚dvāra -- koṭṭhake outside the gate M ii.92; A iii.31; ˚nagare outside the city J ii.2; PvA 39. 47; ˚vihāre outside the monastery DhA i.315.

-- gata gone outside (i. e. into worldly affairs, or according to VvA 213 engaged with the bahiddh' ārammaṇāni) Vv 5015 (abahiggata -- mānasa with his mind not gone outside himself). -- nikkhamana going outside of (abl.), leaving Vism 500 (mātukucchito bahinikkhamanaŋ mūlakaŋ dukkhaŋ). Bahiddhā
Bahiddhā
(adv.) [fr. bahi, cp. Vedic bahirdhā, formation in ˚dhā, like ekadhā, sattadhā etc. of numerals] outside (adv. & prep.) D i.16; ii.110; S i.169; iii.47, 103; iv.205; v.157; Vin iii.113 (˚rūpa opp. ajjhatta -- rūpa : Sn 203; VbhA 260 (kāye); DhA i.211 (c. gen); iii.378 (sāsanato b.); DhsA 189. -- ajjhatta˚ inside & outside, personal -- external see ajjhatta. -- The bahiddh' ārammaṇāni (objects of thought concerning that which is external) are the outward sense -- objects in the same meaning as bāhirāni āyatanāni are distinguished fr. ajjhattikāni āyatanāni (see āyatana 3 and ārammaṇa 3). They are discussed at Vism 430 sq.; cp. Dhs 1049. -- The phrase "ito bahiddhā" refers to those outside the teaching of the Buddha ("outside this our doctrine"), e. g. at D i.157; S i.133; A iv.25; Dhs 1005. Bahu
Bahu
(adj.) [Vedic bahu, doubtful whether to Gr. paxu/s; fr. bṛh2 to strengthen, cp. upabrūhana, paribbūḷha] much, many, large, abundant; plenty; in compn also: very, greatly (˚ -- ) instr. sg. bahunā Dh 166; nom. pl. bahavo Vin iii.90; Dh 307, & bahū Dh 53; J iv.366; v.40; vi.472; Bu 2, 47; Pv iv.14; Mhvs 35, 98; PvA 67; nt. pl. bahūni Sn 665, 885; gen. dat. bahunnaŋ S i.196; Sn 503, 957, & bahūnaŋ J v.446; Kvu 528 (where id. p. M i.447 reads bahunnaŋ); instr. bahūhi PvA 241; loc. bahūsu PvA 58. -- nt. nom. bahu Dh 258; bahuŋ PvA 166, & bahud in compn bahud -- eva (d may be euphonic) J i.170; Bu 20, 32. As nt. n. bahuŋ a large quantity A ii.183 (opp. appaŋ); abl. bahumhā J v.387. As adv. bahu so much Pv ii.1311. -- Compar. bahutara greater, more, in greater number A i.36 (pl. bahutarā, opp. appakā); ii.183; S v.457, 466; J ii.293; vi.472; Pv ii.117; Miln 84; PvA 38, 76. -- In composition with words beginning with a vowel (in sandhi) bahu as a rule appears as bavh˚ (for bahv˚, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 49, 1), but the hiatus form bahu is also found, as in bahu -- itthiyo J i.398 (besides bahutthika); bahuamaccā J i.125; bahu -- āyāsa (see below). Besides we have the contracted form bahû as in bahûpakāra, etc.).

-- ābādha (bavh˚) great suffering or illness, adj. full of sickness, ailing much M ii.94; A i.107; ii.75, 85; Miln 65; Sdhp 89 (cp. 77). -- āyāsa (bahu˚) great trouble Th 2, 343. -- (i)tthika (bahutthika) having many women Vin ii.256; S ii.264. -- ûdaka containing much water J iii.430 (f. bahūdikā & bahodikā). -- ûpakāra of great service, very helpful, very useful S iv.295; v.32; M iii.253; It 9; Vin v.191; J i.121; Pv iv.156; PvA 114. -- odaka (bavh˚) = ˚ûdaka Th 1, 390. -- kata (a.) benevolent, doing service Vin iv.57, 212. (b) much moved or impressed by (instr.), paying much attention to Vin i.247. -- karaṇīya having much to do, busy D ii.76; Vin i.71; S ii.215; A iii.116; DA i.237. -- kāra (a) favour Dāvs iv.39 (b) doing much, of great service, very helpful M i.43, 170; A i.123, 132; ii.126; S v.67; Pv ii.1219; J iv.422; Miln 264. -- kāratta service, usefulness KhA 91. -- kicca having many duties, very busy Vin i.71; D i.106; ii.76; S ii.215; A iii.116; DA i.237. -- khāra a kind of alkali (product of vegetable ash) J vi.454. -- jañña see bāhu˚. -- jana a mass of people, a great multitude, a crowd, a great many people D i.4; It 78; J vi.358; Pug 30, 57; Pv ii.77; PvA 30. At some passages interpreted by Bdhgh as "the unconverted, the masses," e. g. D i.47, expld at DA i.143 by "assutavā andha -- bāla puthujjana"; Dh 320 (bahujjana), expld at DhA iv.3 by "lokiya -- mahājana." -- jāgara very watchful Dh 29 (=mahante sativepulle jāgariye ṭhita DhA i.262); Sn 972 (cp. Nd1 501). -- jāta growing much, abundant J vi.536. -- ṭhāna ( -- cintin) of far -- reaching knowledge, whose thoughts embrace many subjects J iii.306; iv.467; v.176. -- dhana with many riches PvA 97. -- patta having obtained much, loaded with gifts Vin iv.243. -- pada many -- footed, a certain order of creatures, such as centipedes, etc. Vin ii.110; iii.52; A ii.34; It 87. -- (p)phala rich in fruit Sn 1134, cp. Nd2 456. -- (b)bīhi t.t.g., name of cpds. with adj. sense, indicating possession. -- bhaṇḍa having an abundance of goods, well -- to -- do Vin iii.138; KhA 241. -- bhāṇika= ˚bhāṇin PvA 283. -- bhāṇitā garrulousness PvA 283. -- bhāṇin garrulous A iii.254, 257; Dh 227. -- bhāva largeness, richness, abundance DhA ii.175. -- bherava very terrible A ii.55. -- maccha rich in fish J iii.430. -- mata much esteemed, venerable Cp. vi.7; PvA 117. -- manta very tricky DhA ii.4 (v. l. māya). -- māna respect, esteem, veneration J i.90; PvA 50, 155, 274. -- māya full of deceit, full of tricks J v.357 (cp. ˚manta). -- vacana (tt.g.) the plural number J iv.173; PvA 163. -- vāraka the tree Cordia myxa Abhp 558. -- vighāta fraught with great pain Th 2, 450. -- vidha various, multiform Cp. xv.7; Pgdp 37. -- sacca see bāhu˚. -- (s)suta having great knowledge, very learned, well-taught D i.93, 137; iii.252, 282; J i.199; iv.244; A i.24; ii.22, 147, 170, 178; iii.114; Sn 58 (see Nd2 457); It 60, 80; Th 1, 1026; Dh 208; Vin ii.95; J i.93; Miln 19; ThA 274, 281; SnA 109, 110. -- (s)sutaka of great knowledge (ironical) D i.107 (see Dial. i.132). -- 485 -- Bahuka
Bahuka
(adj.) [fr. bahu] great, much, many, abundant J. iii.368 (b. jano most people, the majority of p.); v.388; iv.536; Mhvs 36, 49; PvA 25 (gloss for pahūta Pv i.52); DhA ii.175. -- nt. bahukaŋ plenty, abundance A ii.7 = Pug 63; Vism 403 (opp. thokaŋ). Compar. bahukataraŋ more J ii.88 (v. l. bahutaraŋ). Bahukkhattuŋ
Bahukkhattuŋ
(adv.) [bahu+khattuŋ, like sattakkhat- tuŋ, ti˚ etc.] many times Miln 215. Bahutta
Bahutta
(nt.) [cp. Sk. bahutvaŋ] multiplicity, manifoldedness VbhA 320 (cetanā˚). Bahudhā
Bahudhā
(adv.) [fr. bahu, cp. Vedic bahudhā] in many ways or forms S v.264 (hoti he becomes many), 288; M i.34; Sn 966; Pv iv.152 ( = bahūhi pakārehi PvA 241); Mhvs 31, 73; Dāvs v.68. Bahula
Bahula
(adj.) [usually -- ˚, as ˚ -- only in cpd. ˚ājīva] much, abundant, nt. abundance (˚ -- ); full of, rich in, fig. given to, intent on, devoted to D ii.73; S i.199, 202; A iii.86 (pariyatti˚), 432 (āloka˚); iv.35; It 27, 30; J iv.5 (vināsa˚), 22; PvA 80 (chārik' angāra˚). -- sayana˚ as much as "particular in one's choice of resting place" Miln 365 nt. bahulaŋ ( -- ˚) in the fullness of, full of S iii.40 (nibbidā˚). The compn form with karoti (& kamma) is bahulī˚ (q. v.). Cp. bāhulla.

-- ājīva living in abundance (opp. lūkh' ājīvin) D iii.44, 47. Bahula
Bahula
(nt.) [ = preceding] N. of a lucky die J vi.281. Bahulī˚
Bahulī˚
[rare in Ep. Sk.; when found, diff. in meaning] in compn with kar = bahula (adj.)+kar, lit. "to make much of," i. e. to practise, in foll. words: ˚kata (pp.) practised (frequently), usually combd with bhāvita S ii.264; iv.200, 322; v.259; A i.6; Vism 267 (=punappunaŋ kata); ˚katatta (nt.) practice D ii.214; ˚kamma continuous practice, an act often repeated M i.301; DhsA 406 (=punappuna -- karaṇa); ˚karoti to take up seriously, to practise, devote oneself to (acc.) M i.454; A i.275; iii.79; S iv.322; DhA iii.356 (sevati+); VbhA 291; ˚kāra zealous exercise, practice M iii.25 sq. (tab -- bahulī˚ to this end). Bahuso
Bahuso
(adv.) [cp. Sk. bahuśaḥ] repeatedly PvA 107. Bahūta
Bahūta
(adj.) [for pahūta = Sk. prabhūta] abundant, much Th 2, 406 (˚ratana, so read for bahuta˚), 435 (for bahutadhana); J iii.425 (bahūtam ajjaŋ "plenty of food"; ajja=Sk. ādya, with Kern, Toev. s. v. bahūta for T. bahūtamajjā, which introd. story takes as bahūtaŋ =balaŋ ajja, with ajjā metri causâ. C. expls however as mataka -- bhattaŋ); vi.173 (˚tagarā mahī); Pv ii.75 (v. l. for pahūta, cp. pahūtika). Bahūtaso
Bahūtaso
(adv.) [der. fr. bahūta, cp. Sk. prabhūtaśaḥ] in abundance J iii.484 (where C. expln with bahūtaso is faulty and should perhaps be read pahūtaso); vi.538. Bākucī
Bākucī
(f.) [cp. *Sk. bākucī] the plant Vernonia anthel- minthica Abhp 586. Bāṇa
Bāṇa
[cp. Vedic bāṇa] an arrow Mbhv 19. Bādha
Bādha
[fr. bādh] lit. pressing (together), oppression, hin- drance, annoyance J vi.224. Cp. sam˚. Bādhaka
Bādhaka
(adj.) [fr. bādh] oppressing, harassing, injurious Vism 496 (dukkhā aññaŋ na ˚ŋ); VvA 214; PvA 175. Bādhakatta
Bādhakatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. bādhaka] the fact of being oppressive or injurious Vism 496. Bādhati
Bādhati
[Vedic bādhate, bādh; Idg. *bheidh to force, cp. Goth. baidjan, Ohg. beitten. See Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fido. In Pali there seems to have taken place a confusion of roots bādh and bandh, see bādheti & other derivations] to press, weigh on; oppress, hinder, afflict, harm D ii.19; J i.211; iv.124; Vism 400; DhA i.24. grd. bādhitabba ThA 65; Pass. bādhiyati to be afflicted, to become sore, to suffer SnA 481; ThA 282; ppr. bādhiyamāna PvA 33 (so read for ˚ayamāna), 69. -- Caus. bādheti; pp. bādhita (q. v.). Cp. vi˚. Bādhana
Bādhana
(nt.) [fr. bādh] 1. snaring, catching (of animals etc.) S v.148; J i.211. -- 2. hindrance DA i.132. -> 3. affliction, injury, hurting Vism 495; PvA 116. Bādhita
Bādhita
[pp. of bādhati] oppressed, pressed hard, harassed Dh 342 (but taken by C. as "trapped, snared," baddha DhA iv.49); ThA 65. Bādhin
Bādhin
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. bādh] (lit. oppressing), snaring; as n. a trainer Vin ii.26 (Ariṭṭha gaddha˚ -- pubba); iv.218 (id.). Bādheti
Bādheti
[Caus. of bādhati; the confusion with bandhati is even more pronounced in the Caus. According to Kern, Toev. s. v. we find bādhayati for bandhayati in Sk. as well] 1. to oppress, afflict, hurt, injure J vi.224; PvA 198 (bādheyya = heṭhayeyya). grd. bādhanīya PvA 175. Cp. paribādheti in same sense. -- 2. to bind, catch, snare Th 1, 454; 2, 299; J ii.51 (aor. bādhayiŋsu); iv.342; v.295, 445 (pot. bādhaye= bādheyya C. on p. 447; vv. ll. baddh˚, bandh˚). grd. bādhetabba S iv.298. Bārāṇaseyyaka
Bārāṇaseyyaka
(adj.) [fr. Bārāṇasī] of Benares, coming fr. B. (a kind of muslin) D ii.110; iii.260. Bāla
Bāla1
(adj.) [cp. Sk. bāla (rarely Vedic, more freq. in Ep. & Class. Sk.); its orig. meaning is "young, unable to speak," cp. Lat. infans, hence "like a child, childish; infantile"] 1. ignorant (often with ref. to ignorance in a moral sense, of the common people, the puthujjana), foolish (as contrasted with paṇḍita cp. the Bālapaṇḍita -- sutta M iii.163 sq.; D ii.305 sq.; Vism 499, and contrasts at Sn 578; Dh 63, 64; Pv iv.332; Dhs 1300), lacking in reason, devoid of the power to think & act right. In the latter sense sometimes coupled with andha (spiritually blind), as andhabāla stupid & ignorant, mentally dull, e. g. at DhA i.143; ii.89; PvA 254. -- A fanciful etym. of b. at KhA 124 is "balanti ananti ti bālā." Other refs.: D i.59, 108; S i.23; A i.59, 68, 84; ii.51, 180; Sn 199, 259, 318, 578, 879; It 68; Dh 28, 60 sq., 71 sq., 206 sq., 330; J i.124 (lola˚ greedy -- foolish); v.366 (bālo āmaka -- pakkaŋ va); Vv 835; Pv i.82; iv.129; Pug 33; Nd1 163, 286 sq., 290; SnA 509 ( = aviddasu); PvA 193. Compar. bālatara J iii.278, 279; VvA 326. -- 2. young, new; newly risen (of the sun): ˚ātāpa the morning sun DA i.287; DhA i.164; Mhbv 25; ˚vasanta "early spring" (= Citramāsa), N. of the first one of the 4 summer months (gimha -- māsā) KhA 192; -- suriya the newly risen sun J v.284; PvA 137, 211. -- 3. a child; in wider application meaning a youth under 16 years of age (cp. Abhp 251) DA i.134. Cp. bālaka.

-- nakkhatta N. of a certain "feast of fools," i. e. carnival DhA i.256. -- sangatacārin one who keeps company with a fool Dh 207. -- 486 -- Bāla
Bāla2
[for vāla] the hair of the head PvA 285 (˚koṭi- matta not even one tip of the hair; gloss BB vālagga˚). Bālaka
Bālaka
[fr. bāla] 1. boy, child, youth S i.176; ThA 146 (Ap. v.44: spelt ˚akka); Sdhp 351. -- f. bālikā young girl ThA 54 (Ap. v.1). -- 2. fool DhsA 51 (˚rata fond of fools). Bālakin
Bālakin
(adj.) [fr. bālaka] having fools, consisting of fools; f. ˚inī M i.373 (parisā). Bālatā
Bālatā
(f.) [abstr. to bāla] foolishness J i.101, 223. Bālisika
Bālisika
[fr. balisa] a fisherman S ii.226; iv.158; J i.482; iii.52 (cp. Fick. Sociale Gliederung p. 194); Miln 364, 412; DhA iii.397. Bālya
Bālya
(nt.) [fr. bāla] 1. childhood, youth S iii.1. -- 2. ignor- ance, folly Dh 63; J ii.220 ( = bāla -- bhāva); iii.278 (balya); PvA 40. Also used as adj. in compar. bālyatara more foolish, extremely foolish Vv 836 sq.=DhA i.30 (= bālatara, atisayena bāla VvA 326). -- 3. weakness (?) J vi.295 (balya, but C. bālya=dubbala -- bhāva). Bāḷha
Bāḷha
(adj.) [Vedic bāḍha, orig. pp. of bahati2] strong; only as adv. ˚ŋ and ˚ -- , viz. -- 1. bāḷhaŋ strongly, very much, excessively, too much, to satiety J ii.293; vi.291 (i. e. too often, C. punappunaŋ); Miln 407; PvA 274. Comparative bāḷhataraŋ in a higher degree, even more, too much Vin ii.270, 276; Miln 125. -- 2. (˚ -- ) in bāḷha -- gilāna very ill, grievously sick D i.72; A ii.144; S v.303; DA i.212. Bāḷhika
Bāḷhika
(adj.) [fr. bāḷha], only in su˚ having excess of good things, very prosperous J v.214 (C. expls by suṭṭhu aḍḍha). Bāvīsati
Bāvīsati
(num.) [bā = dvā,+vīsati] twenty -- two Kvu 218; Miln 419; DhsA 2. Bāhati
Bāhati
see bāheti. Bāhā
Bāhā
(f.) [a specific Pali doublet of bāhu, q. v. It is on the whole restricted to certain phrases, but occurs side by side of bāhu in others, like pacchā -- bāhaŋ & ˚bāhuŋ, bāhaŋ & bāhuŋ pasāreti] 1. the arm A ii.67 = iii.45 (˚bala); Vin ii.105; J iii.62; v.215 (˚mudu). pacchā -- bāhaŋ arm(s) behind (his back) D i.245 (gāḷhabandhanaŋ baddha). bāhaŋ pasāreti to stretch out the arm D i.222=M i.252≈. bāhāyaŋ gahetvā taking (him or her) by the arm D i.221 sq.; M i.365 (nānā -- bāhāsu g.); PvA 148. bāhā paggayha reaching or stretching out one's arms (as sign of supplication) D ii.139; J v.267; PvA 92 and passim. -- 2. not quite certain, whether "post" of a door or a "screen" (from bahati3), the former more likely. Only -- ˚ in ālambana˚ post to hold on to, a balustrade Vin ii.120, 152; dvāra˚ doorpost D ii.190; Pv i.51. Cp. bāhitikā.

-- aṭṭhi (bāh˚) arm -- bone KhA 50. -- paramparāya arm in arm Vin iii.126. Bāhika
Bāhika
(adj.) [ = bāhiya] foreign in ˚raṭṭha -- vāsin living in a foreign country J iii.432 (or is it N.? Cp. J vii. p. 94). Bāhitatta
Bāhitatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. bāhita] keeping out, exclusion Nd2 464 (in expln of word brāhmaṇa). Bāhitikā
Bāhitikā
(f.) [fr. bāhita, pp. of bāheti1] a mantle, wrapper (lit. "that which keeps out," i. e. the cold or wind) M ii.116, 117. Bāhiteyya
Bāhiteyya
[unclear; grd. of bāheti1, but formed fr. pp.?] to be kept out (?) M i.328. The reading seems to be corrupt; meaning is very doubtful; Neumann trsls "musst (mir) weichen." Bāhiya
Bāhiya
(adj.) [fr. bahi, cp. bāhira and Vedic bāhya] foreign J i.421; iii.432. Bāhira
Bāhira
(adj.) [fr. bahi, as Sk. bāhya fr. bahis, cp. also bāhiya] 1. external, outside (opp. abbhantara inside), outer, foreign D ii.75; A iv.16; Dh 394 (fig. in meaning of 2); J i.125 (antara˚ inside & outside); 337 (out of office, out of favour, of ministers); vi.384 (bāhiraŋ karoti to turn out, turn inside out); Pv iv.11 (nagarassa b.); Miln 281 (˚abbhantara dhana); VvA 68 (˚kittibhāva fact of becoming known outside). -- santara˚ (adj.) [ = sa -- antara] including the inward & outward parts D i.74; A iii.25; Th 1, 172; J i.125. -- 2. external to the individual, objective (opp. ajjhattika subjective) M iii.274 (cha āyatanā); J iv.402 (˚vatthuŋ ayācitvā ajjhattikassa nāmaŋ gaṇhāti); Dhs 674 (cp. trsl. p. 207); Vbh 13; Miln 215; Vism 450. -- 3. heretical, outsider in religious sense, non -- Buddhist, freq. applied to the Brahmanic religion & their practice (samaya) Kvu 251 (+puthujjana -- pakkhe ṭhita); DhA iii.378 (=mana, i. e. Bhagavato sāsanato bahiddhā). -- Cases as adv. bāhirato from outside, from a foreign country J i.121; bāhire outside (the Buddhist order) Dh 254.

-- assāda finding his enjoyment in outward things A i.280 (Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests "inclined towards heretic views"). -- āsa one whose wishes are directed outwards, whose desires are turned to things external Th 1, 634. -- kathā non -- religious discourse, profane story Miln 24 (applied to the introductory chapter, thus "outside story" may be translated). -- tittha doctrine of outsiders J iii.473. -- dāna gift of externals, gift of property as opposed to gift of the person J iv.401; vi.486; Dāvs iii.33. -- pabbajjā the ascetic life outside the community of the Buddha; Brahmanic saintly life (thus equal to isi -- pabbajjā. cp. bāhiraka˚). J iii.352; iv.305. -- bhaṇḍa property, material things, objects J iv.401. -- mantā ritualistic texts (or charms) of religions other than the Buddha's J iii.27. -- rakkhā protection of external means S i.73. -- lomi with the fleece outside (of a rug) Vin ii.108. -- samaya doctrine of the outsiders, i. e. Brahmins DhA iii.392. Bāhiraka
Bāhiraka
(adj.) [ = bāhira, but specialised in meaning bāhira 3] outsider, non -- religious, non -- Buddhist, heretic, profane S ii.267; A i.73; iii.107; Kvu 172 (isayo); VvA 67 (itthi).

-- kathā unreligious discussion, profane story KhA 118 (cp. bāhirakathā). -- tapa = foll. J i.390. -- pabbajjā the ascetic life as led by disciples of other teachers than the Buddha, esp. Brahmanic (cp. bāhira˚ and BSk. bāhirako mārgaḥ, e. g. MVastu i.284; ii.210; ii.223) J iii.364; DhA i.311. Bāhiratta
Bāhiratta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. bāhira] being outside (of the individual), externality Vism 450. Bāhirima
Bāhirima
(adj.) [fr. bāhira, compar. -- adversative formation] outer, external, outside Vin iii.149 (b. māna external measure; opp. abbhantarima); J v.38 (opp. abbhantarima). Bāhu
Bāhu
[cp. Vedic bāhu, prob. to bahati2; cp. Gr. ph_xus in same meaning, Ohg. buoc. It seems that bāhu is more frequent in later literature, whereas the by -- form bāhā belongs to the older period] the arm J iii.271 (bāhumā bāhuŋ pīḷentā shoulder to shoulder); Vism 192. -- ˚ŋ pasāreti to stretch out the arm (cp. bāhaŋ) PvA 112; pacchā -- bāhuŋ (cp. bāhaŋ) PvA 4 (gāḷha -- bandhanaŋ bandhāpetvā).

-- (p)pacālakaŋ (adv.) after the manner of one who swings his arms about Vin ii.213 (see expln at Vin iv.188). Bāhujañña
Bāhujañña
(adj.) [fr. bahu+jana, cp. sāmañña fr. sa- maṇa] belonging to the mass of people, property of many people or of the masses D ii.106, 219; S ii.107 = v.262; J i.29 (v.212). Note. The expression occurs only in stock phrase iddha phīta vitthārika bāhujañña. -- 487 -- Bāhulya
Bāhulya
(nt.) [fr. bahula, the Sk. form for P. bāhulla] abundance Sdhp 77. Bāhulla
Bāhulla
(nt.) [fr. bahula] 1. abundance, superfluity, great quantity M i.171; A iv.87 (˚kathā) A iv.87; Ps i.197; J i.81. -- 2. luxurious living, swaggering, puffed up frame of mind Vin i.9, 59, 209; ii.197; iii.251. -- See also bāhulya & bāhullika. Bāhullika
Bāhullika
(adj.) [fr. bāhulla] living in abundance, swaggering, luxurious, spendthrift Vin i.9 (+padhāna -- vib- bhanto, as also J i.68, with which Kern, Toev. s. v. compares MVastu ii.241 & iii.329); ii.197; iii.250; M i.14; iii.6; A i.71; iii.108, 179 sq.; J i.68; iii.363. The reading is often bāhulika. Bāhusacca
Bāhusacca
(nt.) [fr. bahu+sacca, which latter corresponds to a Sk. śrautya fr. śru, thus b. is the abstract to bahussuta. See on expln of word Kern, Toev. s. v.] great learning, profound knowledge M i.445; A i.38 (so read for bahu˚); ii.218; Vin iii.10; Dh 271; Vv 639. Bāheti
Bāheti1
[Caus. of bahati3 or Denom. fr. bahi] to keep away, to keep outside, to ward off; only with ref. to pāpa (pāpaka) to keep away (from) sin S i.141 (bāhetvā pāpāni); Sn 519 = Nd2 464a (bāhetvā pāpakāni); Dh 267; a popular etymology of brāhmaṇa (pāpaŋ bahenti) D iii.94 (bāhitvā, better bāhetvā, expld by panuditvā DhA iii.393; v. l. K vāh˚). -- pp. bāhita (q. v.). See also nib˚, pari˚. Bāheti
Bāheti2
[Caus. of bahati4, cp. Sk. vāhayati] to carry, see sam˚ (sambāhana, meaning rubbing, stroking). Whether atibāheti belongs here, is doubtful. Bidala
Bidala
(adj. n.) [cp. Sk. vidala in same meaning, fr. vi+dal] 1. a kind of pulse, split pea J iv.353 ( = mugga), in ˚sūpa haricot soup J iv.352. -- 2. a split bamboo cane, in ˚mañcaka a bedstead made of laths of split bamboo, the use of which is given as one of the characteristic features of the ascetic life Vin ii.149; J i.9; DhA i.135. Bindu
Bindu
[cp. Vedic bindu & vindu] 1. a drop, usually a drop of water Sn 392, 812 (uda˚); J i.100; Vism 531 (madhu˚); ThA 281; PvA 98 (udaka˚). -- 2. a spot (cp. SBE xvii.155) Vism 222 (˚vicitvā gāvī a spotted cow). -> 3. (as adj.) one of the eight qualities of perfect sound (brahma -- ssara, with ref. to the voice of Brahmā and of Buddha, cp. aṭṭhanga), which are given at D ii.211 = 227 as (saro hoti) vissaṭṭho ca viññeyyo ca mañjū ca savanīyo ca bindu [vv. ll. bandu & bhindu] ca avisārī ca gambhīro ca ninnādī ca. We may translate by "full, close, compact" (Dial. ii.245 "continuous"). See also below ˚ssara.

-- tthanī having breasts round as a bubble J v.215. -- bindu(ŋ) drop by drop DA i.218. -- matī (f.) Np. of a courtesan of Pāṭaliputta in the time of Asoka Miln 121 sq. -- matta measuring a drop, even a drop PvA 100, 104 (eka ˚ŋ). -- sāra Np. of king of India, father of Asoka Dpvs v.101; vi.15; Mhvs v.18, 19. -- ssara a full rounded voice Sn 350 (referred by SnA to a Mahāpurisa); adj. having a full voice (see above bindu 3) Pv iii.34 (T. vindu˚, BB bindu˚; PvA explns by avissaṭṭha -- ssara sampiṇḍita -- ssara, i. e. "continuous"); J ii.439 ( = bindhunā avisaṭena piṇḍitena sarena samannāgata C.); v.204, 299 (= sampiṇḍita -- ghana -- ssara); vi.518=581 (=piṇḍita -- ssara C.). Bimba
Bimba
(nt.) [cp. Class. Sk. bimba] 1. shape, image ( = pa- ṭimā VvA 168) S i.134 (trsl. "puppet"); v.217 (vimba); J v.452. In phrase cittakataŋ bimbaŋ it refers to the human body ("the tricked -- out puppet -- shape" Brethren 303): M ii.64 = Th 1, 769 = Dh 147=VvA 47, cp. DhA iii.109 (=attabhāva). -- 2. the red fruit of Momordica monadelpha, a species of Amaranth [cp. Sk. bimba & bimbī, a kind of gourd] J iii.478; vi.457, 591; Vv 366 (kañcana˚ -- vaṇṇa of the colour of the golden Bimba Dhp. at VvA 168 takes it as bimba1=paṭimā; DhA i.387 (˚phala, with ref. to red lips). bimboṭṭha (f. ˚ī) (having) red lips J iii.477; vi.590 (nigrodhapatta -- bimb' oṭṭhī) ThA 133 (Ap. v.57). The Sk. vimbī according to Halāyudha 2, 48 is equal to oṣṭhī, a plant (Bryonia grandis?).

-- oṭṭhi see above 2. -- ohana [second part either = *ūhana vāhana "carrying," or contracted form of odahana fr. ava+dhā, i. e. *odhana *ohana "putting down," or still more likely for ūhana as seen in ūhanati2 2 fr. ud+hṛ raising, lifting up] a pillow Vin i.47 (bhisi˚); ii.76, 150, 208, 200, 218; iii.90, 119 (bhisi˚); iv.279; S ii.268; A iii.240; VbhA 365; Vism 79. See also bhisi1. -- jāla [BR. bimbajā?] the Bimba tree, Momordica monadelpha (lit. net of b. fruits) J i.39; vi.497 (cp. p. 498 ratt' ankura -- rukkhaŋ probably with v. l. to be read ratta -- kuravaka˚, see bimbi -- jāla); Bu xvi.19. Bimbaka
Bimbaka
= bimba 2; VvA 168. Bimbi
Bimbi
(or bimbī) [ = Sk. bimbī, see bimba] gold, of golden colour DA i.280=SnA 448 (in Bdhgh's fanciful etym. of king Bimbisāra, viz. bimbī ti suvaṇṇaŋ, sārasuvaṇṇa -- sadisa -- vaṇṇatāya B.).

-- jāla the red amaranth tree, the Bodhi tree of the former Buddha Dhammadassin J i.39; v.155. At J vi.497, 498 the form is bimbajāla. The C. expln gives ratta -- kuravaka as a synonym. Bila
Bila1
(nt.) [Vedic bila, perhaps fr. bhid to break, cp. K.Z. 12, 123. Thus already expld by Dhtp 489: bila bhedane] a hole, den, cave A ii.33 = S iii.85; Th 1, 189; Nd1 362; J i.480; ii.53; vi.574 (=guhā C.); Miln 151; Sdhp 23. -- kaṇṇa˚ orifice of the ear Vism 195; vammīka˚ ant's nest J iv.30; sota˚=kaṇṇa˚ DhsA 310.

-- āsaya (adj.) living in holes, a cave -- dweller, one of the four classes of animals (bil˚, dak˚, van˚, rukkh˚) S iii.85 = A ii.33; Nd1 362; Bu ii.97; J i.18. Bila
Bila2
(nt.) [identical with bila1] a part, bit J vi.153 (˚sataŋ 100 pieces); abl. bilaso (adv.) bit by bit M i.58 = iii.91 (v. l. vilaso). At J v.90 in cpd. migābilaŋ (maŋsaŋ) it is doubtful whether we should read mig'ābilaŋ (thus, as we have done, taking ābila=āvila), or migā -- bilaŋ with a lengthened metri causâ, as the C. seems to take it (migehi khādita -- maŋsato atirittaŋ koṭṭhāsaŋ).

-- kata cut into pieces, made into bits J v.266 (read macchā bilakatā yathā for macchābhīlā katā y.). The C. here (p. 272) expls as koṭṭhāsa -- kata; at J vi.111 however the same phrase is interpreted as puñja -- kata, i. e. thrown into a heap (like fish caught by a fisherman in nets). Both passages are applied to fish and refer to tortures in Niraya. Bila
Bila3
[cp. Sk. viḍa] a kind of salt Vin i.202; M ii.178, 181. Bilanga
Bilanga
[etym. doubtful; one compares both Sk. viḍanga the plant Embelia ribes, and vilanga the plant Erycibe paniculata] sour gruel J vi.365 ( = kañjiya); usually in stock phrase kaṇājaka bilanga -- dutiya (seed -- cake?) accompanied by sour gruel Vin ii.77, 78; S i.90; A i.145; iv.392; J i.228; iii.299; SnA 94; DhA iii.10 (v. l. pilanka -- ˚akaŋ); iv.77; VvA 222, 298 (bilanka˚).

-- thālika a certain torture, called "gruel -- pot" (should there be any relation to bila -- kata under bila2?) A i.47; ii.122; Nd2 604 (v. l. khil˚); Miln 197, 290, 358 (all passages in standard setting). Bilangika
Bilangika
(adj.) living on sour gruel; N. of a class of brāhmaṇas at Rājagaha S i.164. Billa
Billa
[cp. Ved. bilva] fruit of the Bilva tree, Aegle mar- melos or Bengal quince, only in one stock phrase where its size is compared with sizes of smaller fruits, and where it is preceded by āmalaka S i.150 = A iv.170 (vv. ll. villa, bila, beḷu, bilāla)=Sn p. 125 (vv. ll. pillā billā, billa; T. reading after SS billi). Cp. derivations bella & beluva. -- 488 -- Biḷāra
Biḷāra
[etym. uncertain, prob. a loan -- word; cp. late Sk. biḍāla & see also P. biḷāla. The Prk. forms are birāla & virāla, f. birālī] a cat D ii.83; M i.128, 334; S ii.270; A iii.122 (viḷāra); v.202, 289; Th 1, 1138; J i.461 (as representing deceit), 480; v.406, 416, 418; Miln 118; DhA ii.152; PugA 225. On biḷāra in similes cp. J.P.T.S. 1907, 116.

-- nissakkana ( -- matta) (large enough) for a cat to creep through A v.195. -- bhastā (a bag of) catskin M i.128 (expld by Bdhgh as "biḷāra -- camma -- pasibbako"); Th 1, 1138. At both passages in similes. Biḷārikā
Biḷārikā
(f.) [cp. Sk. biḍālikā] a she -- cat J iii.265. Biḷāla
Biḷāla1
[see biḷāra] a cat J i.110; ii.244; vi.593. pakkha a flying fox J vi.538. Biḷāla
Biḷāla2
[see bila3] a kind of salt Abhp 461. Biḷālī
Biḷālī
(f.) [f. of biḷāla = biḷāra, cp. Sk. biḍālī, also N. of a plant, see on Prk. chira -- birālī=Sk. kṣīra -- biḍālī Pischel Gr. § 241] a bulbous plant, a tuber J iv.46 (=˚vallīkanda, cp. gloss latātanta on kalamba), 371 (=˚kanda Com. p. 373); vi.578. Cp. takkaḷa. Biḷibiḷikā
Biḷibiḷikā
(f.) [onomat. cp. E. babble] tittle -- tattle S i.200 = Th 1, 119. Mrs. Rh. D. (Brethren 106 n.) trsl "finglefangle," noting the commentator's paraphrase "vilivilikriyā" (lit. sticky -- sticky -- action?). Bīja
Bīja
(nt.) [cp. Vedic bīja] 1. seed, germ, semen, spawn. Used very frequently in figurative sense: see on similes J.P.T.S. 1907, 116. -- D i.135 (˚bhatta seed -- corn & food); iii.44 (the five kinds: see below under ˚gāma); M i.457; S i.21, 134, 172, 227; iii.54, 91; iv.315; A i.32 (ucchu˚), 135, 223, 229, 239; iii.404; iv.237; v.213 (ucchu˚); Sn 77 (saddhā bījaŋ tapo vuṭṭhi, cp. SnA 142 sq., where a detailed discussion on bīja is found), 209, 235 (khīṇa˚ adj. fig.); J i.242 (tiṇa˚ -- ādīni grass and other seeds), 281; Pv i.11; Vism 555 (in simile); KhA 194 (on Sn 235, in another comparison); Sdhp 24, 270 sq., 318. nibbatta˚ (or nivatta˚) (adj.) that which has dropped its seed (hence a lawful food) Vin i.215, cp. ii.109; iv.35. -- 2. element, in udaka˚ whose element is the water J vi.160.

-- gāma seed -- group, seed -- kingdom, seed -- creation (opp. bhūta -- gāma). There are 5 kinds of seeds usually enumd, e. g. at D i.5 (expld at DA i.77, trsln at Dial. i.6 and passim), viz. mūla˚, khandha˚, phalu˚, agga˚, bija˚, or plants propagated by roots, cuttings, joints, buddings, shoots, seeds (Dial. iii.40: tubers, shoots, berries, joints, seeds). The same set occurs at D iii.44, 47; Vin iv.34; SnA 144. -- Without ref. to the 5 kinds at M iii.34; S v.46; Miln 33. -- jāta species of seed S iii.54. -- bīja one of the 5 groups of edible or useful plants, falling under bījagāma. It is expld at Vin iv.35 & DA i.81 by the terms pubbaṇṇa (i. e. the seven dhaññāni or grains, sāli, vīhi, yava, godhūma, kangu, varaka, kudrūsa) and aparaṇṇa (i. e. beans and other leguminous plants, and gourds such as mugga, māsa, tila, kulattha, alābu, kumbhaṇḍa). -- sakaṭa a cart ( -- load) of seeds SnA 137. Bījaka
Bījaka
[fr. bīja] scion, offspring Vin iii.18. -- nīla˚ a water- plant Vin iii.276 (C. on Vin iii.177). Bījati & Bījanī
Bījati
& Bījanī are by -- forms of vījati & vījanī (q. v.). Bījin
Bījin
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. bīja] having seed, only in cpd. eka˚ having one seed (for only one future life) left A i.233; S v.205; Nett 189, cp. A. iv.380; Kvu ii.471, see also KvuA in J.P.T.S. 1889, 137. Bībhaccha
Bībhaccha
(adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. bībhatsa, bībhatsate to feel disgust. Not a des. fr. bādhate: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fastidium] disgusting, awful, horrible, dreadful J ii.276; iv.71 (˚vaṇṇa), Sdhp 603. ˚dassana a disgusting sight, horrible to behold J i.171; PvA 32, 56, 68, 99 (: all with ref. to Petas). -- The spelling bhībhaccha (after bhī) is sometimes found, e. g. at J i.61; iv.491; v.42. Bīraṇa
Bīraṇa
[cp. Sk. vīraṇa & vīraṇī -- mūla = uśīra Halāyudha 2, 467] a fragrant grass, Andropogon muricatum S iii.137; (here represented as larger than the kusa & babbaja grasses, smaller than a tree). Bujjhaka
Bujjhaka
(adj.) [fr. budh] intelligent, prudent, judicicus, in a˚ Dpvs ix.17, foolish, imprudent, unmindful of their own interest (trsln suggested by E. Hardy as preferable to Oldenberg's "unnoticed"). Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 69 suggests "not fighting," thus making abujjhaka = avujjh˚=ayujjh˚ (of yudh). Bujjhati
Bujjhati
[budh, y -- formation, corresp. to Sk. budhyate for the usual bodhate. The sense is that of a Med., but is also used as Act. with acc. of object, e. g. saccāni bujjhi he recognised the truths Vism 209. -- The Dhtp (414) and Dhtm (652) explain budh by "avagamane" (understanding, see ogamana), Dhtm (242) also by "bodhane" (awakening). Bdhgh's expln of the meaning is "kilesa -- santāna -- niddāya uṭṭhahati cattāri vā ariyasaccāni paṭivijjhati Nibbānam eva vā sacchikaroti" DhsA 217, cp. trsln at Expos. 294 "to rise from the slumber of the continuum of the lower nature, or a penetrating the Ariyan Truths, or a realizing Nibbāna"] to be awake, to be enlightened in (acc.), to perceive, to know, recognise, understand D ii.249; S i.74, 198; Dh 136, 286; Th 1, 146; J iii.331; iv.49, 425; Miln 165, 348 (pot. bujjheyya); Dpvs i.14 (with gen.) KhA 219 (so attho sukhaŋ b.). 3rd pl. bujjhare Th 2, 453; Bu ii.183. imper. bujjhassu Bu ii.183. -> fut. bujjhissati Bu ii.65; aor. abujjhi Bu ii.211, and bujjhi J iv.425; Vism 209; pret. 3rd sg. abujjhatha Bu vii.22. -- ppr. bujjhamāna Sn 395; Bu vii.22; DhA i.93. -- pp. buddha (q. v.). -- Caus. I. bodheti (q. v.). -- Caus. II. bujjhāpeti to lead to knowledge or recognition J i.407. Two infinitives formed fr. bodh, but belonging to budh are bodhuŋ J v.341, and boddhuŋ Th 1, 167. Bujjhana
Bujjhana
(nt.) [fr. budh] awakening, attaining to know- ledge, recognition Ps i.18; Miln 194; DA i.51. Bujjhanaka
Bujjhanaka
(adj.) [fr. bujjhana] endowed with know- ledge, having the elements of bodhi, being enlightened DhsA 217. Bujjhitar
Bujjhitar
[n. ag. of bujjhati] one who becomes enlight- ened or recognises Nd1 457 = Ps i.174=Vism 209 (bujjhitā saccāni, of the Buddha). Buḍḍha
Buḍḍha
[for vuḍḍha, pp. of vṛdh, see vaḍḍhati] aged, old D ii.162; J i.164 (˚pabbajita one who has become an ascetic in his old age). Compar. buḍḍhatara DhA ii.239 (v. l. K.B.S. vuḍḍhatara). Buddha
Buddha1
(adj.) [med. -- pass. pp. of bujjhati, cp. Epic Sk. buddha] (a) understood S i.35 = 60 (su -- dub -- buddha very difficult to understand). -- (b) having attained enlightenment, wise A iv.449; PvA 16 (buddh' ādayo), 60 (= ariya). Usually appld to the Bhagavant (Gotama) M i.386 (one of the adj. describing Gotama to Nigaṇṭha Nāthaputta); Sn 993. The true brāhmaṇa is buddha, e. g. Sn 622, 643, 646. Buddha
Buddha2
[ = buddha1] A. one who has attained enlighten- ment; a man superior to all other beings, human & divine, by his knowledge of the truth, a Buddha. At A ii.38 the Buddha declares himself to be neither a god (deva) nor a Gandharva, nor a Yakṣa nor a man. -> The word Buddha is an appellative, not a proper name (na mātarā kataŋ etc., vimokkh' antikaŋ etaŋ buddhānaŋ Bhagavantānaŋ bodhiyā mūle . . . paññatti) Nd1 458 & Ps i.174. -- There are 2 sorts of B's, viz. Pacceka -- buddhas or Buddhas who attain to complete enlightenment, but do not preach the way of deliverance to the world, and Sammāsambuddhas, who are omniscient and endowed with the 10 powers (see bala), and whose mission is to proclaim the saving truth to all beings (cp. Miln 106). In this function the B's are Satthāro or teachers, Masters. In his rôle of a preeminent man a Buddha is styled Bhagavā or Lord: Buddho so Bhagavā M i.235; Pv ii.960=DhA iii.219. -- Besides the 18 dhammā and the 10 balāni they are gifted with the 4 vesārajjāni (A ii.9, cp. Miln 106). These teachers appear upon the earth from time to time; the approach of the birth of a B. (buddh' -- uppāda) is hailed by the acclamation of the worlds, they live the houseless life and found an Order (Buddha -- pamukha bhikkhu -- sangha Sn p. 111; Sn 81, 386; Miln 212; DA i.242; PvA 19). The news that a B. has appeared upon earth is a cause of the greatest rejoicing: opportunity to see him is eagerly sought (Vin ii.155; S i.210; DA i.248). The B. is always born in a brāhmaṇa or khattiya family. It is impossible here to give all the references for the Buddhas or Buddhahood in general; see e. g. Vin iii.24 sq.; Dh 182 sq., 194, 195 (=sammā sambuddhā DhA iii.252), 387; J i.51; iii.128; Vism 442 (pubba -- buddhā); PvA 20. -- The remembrance of former births a B. shares with other classes of privileged beings, only in a different (higher) degree. This faculty (in an ascending scale) is possessed by the foll. 6 classes: titthiyā, pakati -- sāvakā, mahā -- sāvaka, agga -- sāvakā, pacceka -- buddhā, buddhā (see Vism 411). -- B. The word Buddha is specially applied to the Buddha of the present world -- age, Gotama by family -- name. He is said to be the 25th of the series of former Buddhas (pubbā buddhā) S i.109, 140; iv.52. -- Seven Buddhas are mentioned in the earlier texts & frequently referred to (cp. the 7 Rishis of the Vedic period, see also under satta, No. 7). They are Vipassī, Sikhī, Vessabhū, Kakusandha, Konāgamana, Kassapa and Gotama (D ii.5 -- 7; S ii.5 -- 11; cp. Th 1, 491; J ii.147). They are also mentioned in an old formula against snake -- bites (Vin ii.110). The (allegorical) names of the predecessors of these in former ages are Dīpankara, Kondañña, Mangala, Sumana, Revata, Sobhita, Anomadassī, Paduma, Narada, Padumuttara, Sumedha, Sujāta, Piyadassī, Atthadassī, Dhammadassī, Siddhattha, Tissa, Phussa. -- The typical career of a Buddha is illustrated in the life of Gotama and the legends connected with his birth, as they appear in later tradition. Before his last existence he practised the 10 perfections (pāramitā, q. v.) for many ages, & finally descended from the Tusita Heaven (see Buddhavaŋsa). He was born in a khattiya family and was distinguished by the 32 signs of a great man (Mahāpurisa -- lakkhaṇāni see D ii.17 sq. and similar passages; cp. Ud 48). His mother Māyā bore him painlessly and died seven days after his birth M iii.118 sq. -- The story of each of the 25 Buddhas is given in the Buddhavaŋsa, quoted in the introductory chapters of the Jātak' aṭṭhakathā. -- Convinced that asceticism was not the way to enlightenment, he renounced austerities. He became enlightened when seated in meditation under an Assattha tree (Ficus religiosa, hence called Bodhi or Bo tree). At the supreme moment he was tempted by Māra, but vanquished the evil one. He was then ready to depart, but resolved to remain in the world and preach the truth (M i.169; Vin i.6; a rather diff. account A ii.20). That day he knew and proclaimed himself to be the Buddha and his career as a teacher began (M i.171; Vin i.9; Sn 558). -- Like all the other Sammā -- sambuddhas he founded an Order, converting and gladdening men by his discourses. After a long life of teaching he attained Nibbāna (nibbānaŋ adhigacchi), and passed utterly away: S i.210; D ii.156; Sn 83, 513, 1133 sq.; Miln 96. -- The Epithets attributed to all the Buddhas are naturally assigned also to Gotama Buddha. Out of the almost endless series of these we only give a few. He is adored as the highest and holiest of men (S i.47; iii.84; loke anuttaro, lokassa aggo; Miln 70). He is the supremely wise, the conqueror of the powers of darkness, the teacher of gods (devas and yakkhas) and men S i.50, 132, 206. 301; A i.142; ii.33; iii.65; Sn 157 sq. He is the ādicca -- bandhu kinsman of the sun S i.186; and compared to a universal monarch (rājā cakkavattī) A i.76; iii.150 and to the lion (sīha), the king of the animals A iii.122. He is buddha -- vīra Th 1, 47; the refuge of all beings M ii.305; DA i.233; Miln 95; further appaṭipuggala S i.134; his teaching leads to enlightenment, to self -- conquest, to security & deliverance M i.235; Sn 454, 993; DA i.230. He himself is not to be reborn (antima -- sarīro with his last body) S i.210; he is vimutto, freed & has come to the end of sorrow A iv.258; S iii.65; full of compassion for all beings S i.25, 51; M ii.100; he is bhisakko the physician A iv.340; magga -- ññu, magga -- vidū, maggakovido S iii.66. -- Under Buddh' anussati (Vism 198 sq.) we find the famous formula Bhagavā Arahaŋ Sammāsambuddho vijjā -- caraṇa -- sampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisa -- damma -- sārathi Satthā devamanussānaŋ buddho Bhagavā (D i.49≈), analysed & exegetically discussed. Here (p. 209) "Buddha" is expld with the formula as found at Ps i.174; Nd1 457. More explicitly with var. epithets at the latter passage. This formula is one of the highest & most comprehensive characterisations of a Buddha, & occurs frequently in the Canon, e. g. M i.179; S ii.69; v.343. -- A khattiya by birth he is called a brāhmaṇa because he carries on the sacred tradition, and because he excels in wisdom, self -- control and virtue Miln 225.

-- ânubuddha enlightened after the Enlightened one Th 1, 679, 1246 (trsld "who next to our Great Waked one was awoke"). -- ânubhāva the majestic power of the B. PvA 38, 171. -- ânussati mindfulness of the B., one of the 6 anussatis (B.˚, dhamma˚, sangha˚, sīla˚, cāga˚, devatā˚) D iii.250, 280; Vism 132 (where followed by upasamânussati and 4 other qualities making up the pīti -- sambojjh'anga; see anussati), 197 sq. (the 10, as mentioned under anussati). -- ankura a nascent (lit. sprouting) Buddha, one who is destined to be a B. DhA i.83. -- antara a Buddha -- interval, the period between the appearance of one Buddha & the next Miln 3; DhA i.201 (the 4 last ones); iv.201; PvA 10, 14, 21, 47, 191. -- ārammaṇa having its foundation or cause in the B., in ˚pīti joy, caused by contemplation of a B. J iii.405; Vism 143 (here as ubbegā -- pīti). -- ûpaṭṭhāna B. -- worship DhA i.101; PvA 93. -- uppāda the coming into existence of a Buddha, time or age in which a B. was born (opp. buddh' antara), a Buddha -- period J i.59; Mhbv 12; VbhA 50; ThA 28. -- kara making a B., bringing about Buddhahood J i.20. -- kāraka = ˚kara Mhbv 9. -- kāla the time of a B. Vism 91 (Buddhakālo viya pavattati it is like the time of the B.) -- kula Buddha -- clan SnA 532 (B. -- pitā, ˚mātā ibid.). -- kolāhala the announcement of a Buddha, one of the 5 kolāhalas (q. v.) KhA 121, cp. J i.48. -- khetta field or region of (or for the existence of) a Buddha Vism 414 (divided into 3 spheres: jātikkhetta, āṇākkhetta, visayakkhetta, see khetta). -- gata directed or referring to the B. S i.211 (sati); Dh 296. -- guṇa quality of a B., virtue, character of a Buddha J i.27; ii.147; Bu ii.177; Mbhv 80; KhA 121 (cp. App.). -- cakkhu the eye of a Buddha, i. e. an eye (or the faculty) of complete intuition Vin i.6; ThA 2; see discussed in detail at Nd1 359=Nd2 2354; cp. cakkhu. -- ñāṇa knowledge of a B., which is boundless (cp. Saddh. 73, J.P.T.S. 1887, 40) Bu i.64 (appameyya); x.5 (cuddasa). -- dhamma Buddhahood Miln 276; pl. condition or attributes of a B. J i.20; referred to as 6 at Nd1 143= Nd2 466 (bhāgī channaŋ ˚ānan ti Bhagavā), as 18 at Miln 105, 285. Kern (Manual & Grundriss iii.8, p. 63) gives (after Lal. Vist. 183, 343) the foll. 18 āveṇikadharmas ("extraordinary qualities") as such: (1) seeing all things past, (2) present, (3) future, (4) propriety of actions of the body, (5) of speech, (6) of thought, (7) firmness of intuition, (8) of memory, (9) of samādhi, (10) of energy, (11) of emancipation, (12) of wisdom, (13) freedom from fickleness, (14) noisiness, (15) confusedness, (16) hastiness, (17) heedlessness, (18) inconsiderateness. -- pañha the name given to one question asked by Sāriputta, which the paribbājikā Kuṇḍalakesī was unable to answer DhA ii.225. -- pasanna finding one's happiness, or believing in the B. Vin iv.39. -- putta son of the B. said of bhikkhus or arahants Miln 143, cp. S iii.83: puttā Buddhassa orasā. -- bala the force of a B. (iddibala & paññā˚) Bu i.3. -- bījankura a future B. Bu ii.71. -- bhāva condition of a B. enlightenment J i.14, 147 (abuddhabhāva un -- buddhahood, of Devadatta); DA i.1. -- bhūmi the ground of Buddhahood Bu ii.175. -- manta mystic verses of a B. DA i.248. -- māmaka devotedly attached to the B. DhA i.206 (+Dhamma˚, Sangha˚). -- rakkhita saved by the B. (Np.) SnA 534 (+Dhamma˚). -- rasmi (pl. ˚iyo) rays shining forth from the person of the Buddha; they are of 6 colours J i.501; SnA 132; Mhbv 6, 15, 38; VvA 207; DhsA 13. -- rūpa form or figure of the B. Vism 228 (Mārena nimmita, cp. Divy 162, 166; Buddha -- nirmāṇa the magic figure of the B.). -- līḷha (& ˚līḷhā) deportment, ease, grace of a Buddha J i.54; Mhbv 39; DhA i.33; ii.41. -- vacana the word (teaching) of the Buddha Miln 17; KhA 13; SnA 274, 331. -- visaya the sphere (of wonder), the range, scope or power of a Buddha (cp. buddha -- khetta) DhA i.33; ii.199; SnA 154, 228. -- veneyya one able to be led to enlightenment, accessible to Buddha's teaching SnA 15, 331. -- sāsana the teaching (instructions) of the B. Dh 368, 381. -- sukumāla delicate, sensitive (to fatigue), as Buddhas are DhA i.5. -- 490 -- Buddhaka
Buddhaka
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. buddha] in cpd. dvangula -- buddhikā (f.) possessing insight as much as 2 finger -- breadths VvA 96. -- The ˚ka belongs to the whole cpd. Buddhatā
Buddhatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. buddha] enlightenment, wisdom DhA iv.228; ThA 4 (Buddha -- subuddhatā). -- Cp. buddhatta. Buddhati
Buddhati
to obstruct, withhold etc.: see pali˚. Buddhatta
Buddhatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. buddha] state of (perfect) enlightenment, (attainment of) Buddhahood J iii 363 (sabbadhammānaŋ b.); Vism 209 (buddhattā Buddho); Mhbv 12. Cp. buddhatā and abhisambuddhatta. Buddhi
Buddhi
(f.) [fr. budh; cp. Class. Sk. buddhi] wisdom, in- telligence D iii.165 (in sequence saddhā sīla suta b. cāga etc.); J iii.369; v.257; Miln 349; Sdhp 263. The ref. Vism 439 should be read vuddhi for b˚.

-- carita one whose behaviour or character is wisdom Vism 104 ( = paññavā). -- sampanna endowed with (highest) wisdom PvA 39. Buddhika
Buddhika
(adj.) [ -- ˚) [fr. buddhi] intelligent, in cpds a˚ unintelligent & sa˚ possessed of wisdom Miln 76. Buddhimant
Buddhimant
(adj.) [fr. buddhi] possessing insight, full of right knowledge Vin ii.195; J v.257; Miln 21, 294; PvA 131 (paṇḍita, b., sappañña -- jātika). Bunda
Bunda
[Vedic budhna] the root of a tree Abhp 549. Bundika
Bundika
in cpd. ˚ābaddha is of uncertain origin; the whole means a sort of seat or bedstead (fixed up or tied together with slats?) Vin ii.149; iv.40, 357. Bubbuḷa
Bubbuḷa
(& Bubbula) [cp. Epic Sk. budbuda] a bubble. On similes cp. J.P.T.S. 1907, 117. -- Usually of a waterbubble udaka˚ S iii.141; A iv.137; J v.216; Miln 117; Vism 109; DhA iii.209; VbhA 33 (as unsubstantial to which vedanā are likened). In other connection at J i.68 (of cooking gruel). Bubbuḷaka
Bubbuḷaka
= bubbuḷa, viz. 1. a bubble DhA iii.166; Miln 118. -- 2. the iris of the eye Th 2, 395 (cp. Morris, in J.P.T.S. 1884, 89, but according to ThA 259 the reading pubbaḷhaka is to be preferred.) Bubhukkhita
Bubhukkhita
[pp. of bubhukkhati, Desid. of bhuñjati] wishing to eat, hungry J ii.14; v.70; Miln 66; Dāvs iii.32. Būḷha
Būḷha
[for vūḷha, cp. Sk. vyūḍha for the usual vyūha, q. v.] array of troops J i.387. Būha
Būha
see vyūha. Beluva & Beḷuva
Beluva
& Beḷuva [the guṇa -- form of billa, in like meaning. It is the diaeretic form of Sk. *bailva or *vailva, of which the contracted form is P. bella] 1. the Vilva tree, Aegle marmelos M i.108; ii.6; J iv.363, 368; vi.525, 560. -- 2. wood of the Vilva tree S i.22; D ii.264; Mhbv 31.

-- pakka ripe fruit of the Vilva J v.74. -- paṇḍu( -- vīṇā) a yellow flute made of Vilva wood, representing a kind of magic flute which according to SnA 393 first belonged to Māra, and was then given to Pañcasikha, one of the Heavenly Musicians, by Sakka. See Vism 392 (attributed to Pañcasikha); DhA i.433 (of Māra; v. l. veḷuvadaṇḍa -- vīṇā); iii.225 (of P.); SnA 393 (v. l. veluva˚). -- laṭṭhi a young sprout of the Vilva tree KhA 118. -- salāṭuka the unripe fruit of the Vilva, next in size to the smaller kola, surpassed in size by the ripe billa or billi S i.150 = A iv.170=Sn p. 125. Bella
Bella
(m. & nt.) [ = beluva, q. v.] the fruit of the Vilva tree (a kind of citron?) J iii.77 (C. beluva); vi.578. Also in doubtful passage at J iii.319 (v. l. mella, phella). Bojjha
Bojjha
(nt.) [orig. grd. of bujjhati or bodheti] a matter to be known or understood, subject of knowledge or understanding Nett 20. Bojjhanga
Bojjhanga
[bodhi+anga; cp. BSk. bodhyanga, e. g. Lal. Vist. 37, where the 7 are given at Divy 208] a factor or constituent of knowledge or wisdom. There are 7 bojjhangas usually referred to or understood from the context. There are enumd at several places, e. g. at D iii.106, where they are mentioned in a list of qualities (dhammā) which contribute to the greatest happiness of gods and man, viz. the 4 satipaṭṭhānā, 4 sammapadhānā, 4 iddhipādā, 5 indriyāni, 5 balāni & the 7 bojjhangas and ariya aṭṭhangika magga, 37 in all. The same list we find at Divy 208. -- The 7 b. (frequently also called sambojjhangā) are sati, dhamma -- vicaya, viriya, pīti, passaddhi, samādhi, upekhā or mindfulness, investigation of the Law, energy, rapture, repose, concentration and equanimity (DhsA 217, cp. Expositor ii.294). -- D ii.79, 83, 120, 303; iii.101, 128, 284; M i.11, 61; ii.12; iii.85, 275; S i.54; v.82, 110; A i.14; iv.23; Nd1 14, 45, 171 (˚kusala), 341; Kvu i.158; Dhs 358, 528, 1354; Vbh 199 sq., 227 sq.; Vism 160; Miln 340; DhA i.230; VbhA 120, 310; ThA 27, 50, 160. They are counted among the 37 constituents of Arahantship, viz. the 30 above -- mentioned qualities (counting magga as one), with addition of sīlesu paripūrikāritā, indriyesu gutta -- dvāratā, bhojane mattaññutā, jāgariy' ânuyoga, sati -- sampajaññaŋ (see e. g. Nd1 14; Nd2 s. v. satipaṭṭhāna & sīla); cp. Th 1, 161, 162; Th 2, 21 (maggā nibbāna -- pattiyā); DhsA 217 (bodhāya saŋvattantī ti bojjhangā etc.; also def. as "bodhissa ango ti pi bojjhango sen' angarath' ang' ādayo viya). They are also called the paribhoga -- bhaṇḍāni or "insignia" of the Buddha Miln 330.

-- kosalla proficiency in the constituents of wisdom Vism 248. -- 491 -- Bodha
Bodha1
[fr. budh; the usual] form is sambodha = bodhi, viz. knowledge, wisdom, enlightenment, Buddhaship D iii.54 (v. l. sam˚); DhsA 217; in phrase bodhāya maggo J i.67; Miln 244, 289; and in bodha -- pakkhiyadhammā (for which usually bodhi˚) SnA 164 (where given as 37); complementary to santi (arousing, soothing) Th 1, 342. bodhangama leading to enlightenment (dhammā) Nett 31, 83 (v. l. bojjh˚). Bodha
Bodha2
see pali˚. Bodhana
Bodhana
(nt.) [fr. bodheti] 1. knowing Miln 168 (cp. S v.83). -- 2. (adj.) enlightening, teaching Bu 26, 22 (pacchima -- jana˚). Bodhanīya
Bodhanīya
(adj.) [grd. fr. bodheti] capable of being en- lightened, worthy to be taught Bu 5, 31. See also bodhaneyya. Bodhaneyya
Bodhaneyya
(adj.) [fr. bodheti, see bodhanīya] capable of being enlightened, to be taught the truth Bu 2, 195 (jana); Miln 169 (yena yogena bodhaneyyā sattā bujjhanti tena y. bodheti); otherwise in combn bodhaneyya -- bandhavo the (Buddha's) relations (or fellowmen) who are able to be enlightened J i.345 = DhA i.367; J v.335. Bodhi
Bodhi1
(f.) [fr. budh, cp. Vedic bodhin -- manas having an attentive mind; RV v.75, 5; viii.82, 18] (supreme) knowledge, enlightenment, the knowledge possessed by a Buddha (see also sambodhi & sammā -- sambodhi) M i.356; ii.95 = D iii.237 (saddho hoti, saddahati Tathāgatassa bodhiŋ); D iii.159 (anuttaraŋ pappoti bodhiŋ), 165 (id.); S i.103, 196; v.197 sq.; A ii.66; VbhA 310 (def.). Bodhi consists of 7 elements called bojjhangā or sambojjhangā, and is attained by the accomplishment of the perfections called bodhi -- pācanā dhammā (see under cpds. & cp. bodhi -- pakkhiya -- dhammā). The Buddha is said to have found the Path followed by former Buddhas, who "catusu satipaṭṭhānesu supatiṭṭhitacittā satta -- bojjhange yathābhūtaŋ bhāvetvā anuttaraŋ sammā -- sambodhiŋ abhisambujjhiŋsu" S v.160. The moment of supreme enlightenment is the moment when the Four Truths (ariya -- saccāni) are grasped S v.423. Bodhi is used to express the lofty knowledge of an ascetic (Bodhi -- paribbājaka Np. J v.229 sq.), and the stage of enlightenment of the Paccekabuddha (paccekabodhi J iii.348; pacceka -- bodhi -- ñāṇa J iv.114; paccekasambodhi SnA 73), as distinguished from sammāsambodhi.

-- ṭṭhāna the state of Bodhi, state of enlightenment. Dpvs 2.61. -- pakkhika = pakkhiya (& pakkhika, e. g. A iii.70=300; Th 1, 900; cp. bodha˚) belonging to enlightenment, usually referred to as the 37 bodhipakkhiyā dhammā qualities or items constituting or contributing to Bodhi, which are the same as enumd under bojjhanga (q. v.). They are enumd & discussed at Vism 678 sq. and mentioned at many other passages of the Abhidhamma, e. g. Vbh 244, 249; Nett 31, 197, 240, 261; and in the Commentaries, e. g. J i.275; iii.290; v.483; DhA i.230. When they are increased to 43 they include the above with the addition of aniccasaññā; dukkha˚, anatta˚, pahāna˚, virāga˚, nirodhasaññā, thus at Nett 112, 237. In the older texts we do not find any numbered lists of the b. -- p. -- dhammā. At A iii.70 only indriyesu guttadvāratā, bhojane mattaññutā and jāgariy' ânuyoga are mentioned in connection with bodhipakkhikā dhammā in general. At S v.227, 239 sq. (so read in Vbh preface xiv. for 327, 337!) the term is applied to the 5 indriyas: saddh' indriyaŋ, viriy˚, sati˚, samādhi˚, paññ˚. A more detailed discussion of the bodhi -- p -- dhammā and their mention in the Piṭakas is found in Mrs. Rh. D.'s preface to the Vbh edition, pp. xiv. -- xvi. Of BSk. passage may be mentioned Divy 350 (saptatriŋśad -- bodhi -- pakṣān dharmān amukhī -- kṛtya pratyekāŋ bodhiŋ sākṣātkṛtavantah) & 616 (bodhipakṣāŋs tān dharmān Bhagavān saŋprakāśayati sma). -- paripāka the maturing of enlightenment Vism 116. -- pācana ripening of knowledge (of a Buddha); adj. leading to enlightenment Bu ii. 121 sq.; Cp i.11 (cp. J i.22). It is a late term. The b. dhammā are the 10 perfections (pāramiyo), i. e. dāna˚, sīla˚, nekkhamma˚, paññā˚, viriya˚, khanti˚, sacca˚, adhiṭṭhāna˚, mettā˚, upekhā˚. -- satta (1) a "bodhi -- being," i. e. a being destined to attain fullest enlightenment or Buddhaship. A Bodhisatta passes through many existences & many stages of progress before the last birth in which he fulfils his great destiny. The "amhākaŋ Bodhisatto," or "our Bodhisatta" of the Buddhist Texts (e. g. Vism 419 (imasmiŋ kappe ayam eva Bhagavā Bodhisatta -- bhūto); DA i.259) refers to Gotama, whose previous existences are related in the Jātaka collection. These tales illustrate the wisdom & goodness of the future Buddha, whether as an animal, a god, or a human being. In his last existence before attaining Buddhahood he is a man. Reference is made to a Bodhisatta or the B. at very many places throughout the Canon. See e. g. M i.17, 163, 240; S ii.5; iii.27; iv.233; v.263, 281, 317; A ii.130; iii.240; iv.302, 439; Vism 15, 116, 499; SnA 52 (pacceka˚), 67, 72. -- (2) N. of the author of a Pali grammar, used by Kaccāyana (not extant): see Windisch, Proceedings of XIVth Or. Congress, Vol. i.290. -- sambhāra (pl.) conditions (lit. materials) necessary for the attainment of bodhi J i.1; vi.595; Mbvs 12. Bodhi
Bodhi2
[ = bodhi1] the tree of wisdom, the sacred Bo tree, the fig tree (Assattha, Ficus religiosa) under which Gotama Buddha arrived at perfect knowledge. The tree is near the spot where Buddhagāya is now, about 60 miles fr. Patna. It is regarded by pilgrims as the centre of the world (cp. pathavī -- nābhi mahā -- bodhimaṇḍo Mbvs 79). It is also spoken of as Mahābodhi (e. g. J iv.228; Vism 403). -- Vism 72, 299, 342; DhA i.105; ThA 62; VbhA 473.

-- angaṇa the courtyard in which the Bo tree stands DA i.191; Vism 188 (˚vatta); VbhA 349. -- tala "Bodhifoundation," i. e. the place or ground of the B. tree, otherwise bodhi -- maṇḍa J i.105; Mhbv 9; DhA i.117. -- pakka fruit of the Bo tree J iv.229. -- pādapa the Bodhi tree Mbhv 1. -- pūjā veneration of, or offerings to the Bo tree Mhbv 81. -- maṇḍa (for ˚maṇḍala) the ground under the Bodhi tree, hence the spot (or "throne"), on which the Buddha was seated at the time of attaining highest enlightenment. The term is only found in very late canonical and post -- canonical literature. Bu ii.65, 183; Vism 203; J iv.228, 232; Mhbv 79; SnA 2, 30, 225, 258, 281, 340, 391, 441; DhA i.86; ii.69; iv.72; ThA 2. Cp. BSk. bodhimaṇḍa Divy 392. -- maha feast in honour of the Bo tree J iv.229. -- mūla the root or foot of the Bo tree SnA 32, 391; cp. Bodhiyā mūle Nd1 172, 458 = Ps i.174. -- rukkha the Bodhi tree Vin i.1. Bodhetar
Bodhetar
[n. ag. fr. bodheti] awakener, enlightener Nd1 457; Ps i.174; Vism 209. Bodheti
Bodheti
[Caus. of bujjhati] 1. to awaken to the truth, to enlighten S i.170; Bu ii.195. aor. bodhesi Vism 209, abodhayi Bu ii.196 & bodhayi Bu v.31; xxv.6 inf. bodhuŋ: see bujjhati, & bodhetuŋ J iv.393. grd. bodhabba D ii.246; A iv.136. -- 2. to make aware (of), to make known J vi.412; SnA 444. Bondi
Bondi
[etym. doubtful, one proposed by Morris, J.P.T.S. 1889, 207 derives it fr. bandh = bundh to bind, which is an erroneous comparison; on his hint "probably cognate with E. body" cp. Walde, Lat. Wtb. under fidelia. The orig. meaning may have been, as Morris suggests, "trunk." It certainly is a dial. word] body Pv iv.332; J i.503; ii.160; iii.117; PvA 254. Bya˚
Bya˚
etc. (byā˚, byu˚) words not found under these initials are to be looked up under vya˚ etc. -- 492 -- Byagā
Byagā
3rd sg. aor. of vi+gam, to depart, to be lost, perish Th 1, 170. Byaggha
Byaggha
[cp. Sk. vyāghra] a tiger J ii.110; Sdhp 388. f. byagghinī Miln 67. Byañjana
Byañjana
(nt.) [cp. Sk. vyañjana] 1. sign, mark: see vyañjana. -- 2. the letter, as compared with attha, the spirit or meaning; thus in phrase atthato byañjanato ca according to the meaning & the letter Miln 18, 345; Nett 23. As vyañjana is the more usual (& classical) form, other refs. will be found under vyañjana. Byatta
Byatta
(adj.) [cp. P. vyatta; Sk. vyakta] experienced, learned Miln 21. Byattatā
Byattatā
(f.) [fr. byatta] experience, learning Miln 349. See also pari˚. Byanti˚
Byanti˚
in ˚bhavati, bhāva etc. see vyanti˚. Byapagata
Byapagata
[ = vy -- apa -- gata] departed, dispelled Miln 225. Byappatha
Byappatha
[so for byappattha; according to Kern, Toev. s. v. the word is a distortion fr. *vyāpṛta (for which usually P. vyāvaṭa) of vy+ā+pṛ3, pṛṇoti to be busy or active] busy, active. Thus Kern, but the trsln is not satisfactory. It occurs only at 2 passages; Vin iv.2, where combd with vācā, girā, vacībheda, and meaning "mode of speech," and at Sn 961, where it has the same meaning & is referred by Nd1 472 to a mode of speech & expld by SnA 572 by vacana. Thus the derivation fr. pṛ with vyā˚ can hardly be claimed to be correct for Bdhgh's conception of the word; to him it sounded more likely like vy+ā+patha (cp. cpds. vacana -- patha & vāda -- patha), thus "way of speaking." Byamha
Byamha
[cp. vyamha] a celestial mansion, a Vimāna Vv 523. As vyamha at J iv.464. Byasana
Byasana
see vyasana. Byā
Byā
(indecl.) [distorted fr. iva = eva, with metathesis & diaeresis *veyya> *veyyā>*vyā>byā] intensive particle: "just so, certainly, indeed" only in phrase "evaŋ byā kho" Vin ii.26; iv.134=DA i.27; M i.130 (evaŋ vyā kho ti evaŋ viya kho C.), 257. Byādhi
Byādhi
[cp. Sk. vyādhi; lit. "upset" fr. vy+ā+dhā] sickness, disease A i.146; Kvu ii.457; Miln 351. Byādhita
Byādhita
[pp. fr. byādheti] afflicted with disease Th 1, 73; Miln 168. Byādheti
Byādheti
[Caus. fr. byādhi] to cause to waver, unsettle, agitate, trouble S i.120; Th 1, 46, 1211. Pass. byādhiyati Kvu ii.457 (aor. byādhiyiŋsu). -- pp. byādhita. Byāpajjha
Byāpajjha
[fr. vy -- ā -- pad] 1. trouble, opp. a˚ relief M i.10. -- 2. malevolence; neg. a˚ benevolence Vin i.3; M i.38; cp. avyāpajjha S iv.296, 371. Byāpanna
Byāpanna
[fr. vyāpajjati] malevolent Sdhp 70; otherwise vy˚, e. g. S ii.168 (˚citta). Byāpāda
Byāpāda
[fr. vy+ā+pad] ill -- will, malevolence, one of the 5 "obstructions" (āvaraṇāni, see e. g. S v.94; Nd2 379); and of the 4 "bonds" (kāya -- ganthā see e. g. Nd1 98). -- M i.434; S i.99; It 119; Ps i.31; ii.12; Nd1 149, 207, 386.

-- vitakka a malevolent or angry thought M i.11; S i.203; ii.151; iii.93; v.417; Nd1 501; Kvu 113. Byābādha
Byābādha
[vy+ā+bādh] evil, wrong, hurt; usually referred to as 3 fold: atta˚, para˚, ubhaya˚, or against oneself, against others, & both -- M i.416; S iv.159 (vyā˚), 339. Byābādheti
Byābādheti
[Denom. fr. byābādha] to injure, hurt, oppress S v.393 (na kiñci byābādhemi tasaŋ vā thāvaraŋ vā). Byābhangī
Byābhangī
(f.) [vy+ā+bhañj] 1. a pole for carrying burdens Th 1, 623. -- 2. a flail S iv.201. Byāma
Byāma
[cp. Vedic & P. vyāma cp. Śatap. Br. i.2, 5, 14 a fathom, measured by both hands being extended to their full length, only in phrase ˚ppabhā a halo extending for a fathom around the Buddha J i.12, 90; Bu i.45; Miln 75; VvA 213. Byāruddha
Byāruddha
[pp. of vy+ā+rundh; reading by˚ in Nd1; vy˚ in Sn & SnA; v. l. BB] obstructed, opposed, hindered Sn 936 (aññam -- aññehi b. in enmity with each other; = paṭiviruddha Nd1 408), 938 (412 id.; SnA 566=āhata -- citta). Byāvaṭa
Byāvaṭa
[vy+ā+vṛ] covered, adorned with VvA 213 (rūpakāya byāvaṭa jana; v. l. byāgata).

the meaning (wrongly given as "adorned") is to be deleted. The reading at VvA 213 is doubtful. It may be kāyavyāvaṭa, but dassana -- vyāvaṭa is to be preferred (see under vyāvaṭa). Byāsatta
Byāsatta
[pp. of vy+ā+sañj, cp. āsatta1] attached to, clinging to, in cpd. ˚mānasa possessed with longing Dh 47 ( = sampatte vā asampatte vā lagga -- mānasa DhA i.361), 287 (cp. DhA iii.433; lagganatāya sattamānasa). Byūha
Byūha
[cp. Sk. & P. vyūha fr. vi+vah] 1. the array or arrangement of troops in particular positions, order of parade or battle DA i.85. Three formations of troops are mentioned at J ii.404 & 406, viz. paduma -- vyūha (lotus formation), cakka˚ (wheel formn), sakaṭa˚ (cart formn). -- 2. a heap, collection, in byūhaŋ karoti to put into a (well -- arranged) heap Miln 2 (kacavaraŋ). -> 3. a (blind) alley, cul -- de -- sac Vin iv.271 (byūhan nāma yen' eva pavisanti ten' eva nikkhamanti). Byūhati
Byūhati
[Denom. fr. byūha] to stand in array (like a troop) VvA 104 (byūhanto, v. l. brahmanto). Brahant
Brahant
(adj.) [cp. Vedic bṛhant, of bṛh2 to increase, to be great or strong; paribṛdha solid (cp. brūha, paribrahaṇa & paribrūhana), Av. bərəƶat high; Arm. barjr high; Oir. brī, Cymr. bre mountain; Goth. baurgs "borough," Ohg. etc. burg "burgh," i. e. fortress; Ger. berg mountain. -- The fundamental notion is that of an increase above normal or the ordinary: vuddhi (of vṛdh) is used in explns of the term; thus Dhtp 344 (Dhtm 506) baha braha brūha = vuddhiyaŋ; VvA 278 brahā=vuddhā. Its use is almost entirely restricted to poetry] very great, vast, high, lofty, gigantic; nom. sg. brahā Sn 410, 550; Th 1, 31; J iii.117 (= dīgha C.); iv.111 (su˚); 647; Pv iv.310 (of a huge tree), acc. sg. brahantaŋ A iii.346; VvA 182; nom. pl. also brahantā Vv 524 (=mahantā VvA 224; of the Yama -- dūtā or Death's giant messengers). -- f. brahatl J v.215 (=uḷārā C.); also given as N. of a plant Abhp 588. -- Superl. brahaṭṭha (=Sk. barhiṣṭha; on inversion bar>bra cp. Sk. paribarhanā>P. paribrahaṇa) in ˚puppha a large or fully developed blossom J v.416.

-- arañña woodlands, vast forest A i.187. -- vana the wild wood, immense forest A i.152; iii.44; Vv 633; J v.215. -- sukha ( -- vihāra -- jjhāna -- jhāyin) (a thinker enjoying his meditations in) immense happiness Miln 226 (in characterisation of the term "brāhmaṇa"). Brahma & Brahmā
Brahma
& Brahmā [fr. bṛh, see brahant. Perhaps less with regard to the greatness of the divine principle, than with ref. to the greatness or power of prayer or the ecstatic mind (i. e. holy enthusiasm). On etym. see Osthoff, "Bezzenberger's Beiträge" xxiv.142 sq. ( = Mir. bricht charm, spell: Oicel. bragr poetry)] -- I. Brahman (nt.) [cp. Vedic bráhman nt. prayer; nom. sg. bráhma] 1. the supreme good; as a buddhistic term used in a sense different from the brahmanic (save in controversy with Brahmans); a state like that of Brahmā (or Brahman) A ii.184 (brahmappatta). In cpds. brahma˚. -- 2. Vedic text, mystic formula, prayer DA i.244 (brahmaŋ aṇatī ti brāhmaṇo).

II. Brahmā [cp. Vedic brahmán, m., one who prays or chants hymns, nom. sg. Brahmā] 1. the god Brahmā chief of the gods, often represented as the creator of the Universe (vasavattī issaro kattā nimmātā) D i.18; iii.30, also called Mahābrahmā (D i.235 sq., 244 sq.; iii.30; It 15; Vism 578; DhA ii.60); and Sahampati (Vin i.5; D ii.157; S i.136 sq.; Vism 201; KhA 171; SnA 56) and Sanaŋkumāra (D ii.226; iii.97). The duration of his life is given as being 1 kalpa (see Kvu 207, 208). -- nom. Brahmā Vin i.5; D ii.46; J vi.486; Miln 224; Vism 2 (brahmānaŋ atibrahmā, Ep. of Buddha Bhagavā); SnA 229 (B. mahānubhāvo); gen. abl. Brahmano D ii.209; Vism 205; SnA 177; instr. Brahmanā D i.252; ii.239; Dh 105, 230; Vism 48, 405; DhA ii.60; acc. Brahmānaŋ D ii.37; voc. Brahme S i.138. -- 2. a brahma god, a happy & blameless celestial being, an inhabitant of the higher heavens (brahma -- loka; in which to be reborn is a reward of great merit); nom. sg. brahmā S i.142 (Baka br.); M i.327 (id.); A iv.83; PvA 138 (˚devatā for brahma˚?); gen. abl. brahmuno S i.142, 155; instr. brahmunā D iii.147, 150 & brahmanā PvA 98; voc. sg. brahme M i.328. pl. nom. brahmāno Miln 13, 18 (where J vi.486 has Mahā -- brahmā in id. p.); DhsA 195; gen. brahmānaŋ Vism 2; Mhbv 151. -- paccekabrahmā a br. by himself S i.149 (of the name of Tudu; cp. paccekabuddha). -- sabrahmaka (adj.) including the brahma gods D i.62; A ii.70; Vin i.11; DA i.174.

III. brahma (adj. -- n.) [cp. brahmā II. 2; Vedic brahma˚ & Sk. brāhma] 1. holy, pious, brahmanic; (m.) a holy person, a brahmin -- (adj.) J ii.14 (br. vaṇṇa = seṭṭha vaṇṇa C.); KhA 151 (brahma -- cariyaŋ= brahmaŋ cariyaŋ). -- (m.) acc. brahmaŋ Sn 285; voc. brahme (frequent) Sn 1065 (=brahmā ti seṭṭhavacanaŋ SnA 592); J ii.346; iv.288; vi.524, 532; Pv i.129 (=brāhmaṇa PvA 66). -- 2. divine, as incorporating the highest & best qualities, sublime, ideal, best, very great (see esp. in cpds.), A i.132 (brahmā ti mātāpitaro etc.), 182; iv.76. -- 3. holy, sacred, divinely inspired (of the rites, charms, hymns etc.) D i.96 (brahme mante adhiyitvā); Pv ii.613 (mantaŋ brahmacintitaŋ) =brāhmaṇānaŋ atthāya brahmaṇā cintitaŋ) PvA 97, 98). -- Note. The compn form of all specified bases (I. II. III.) is brahma˚, and with regard to meaning it is often not to be decided to which of the 3 categories the cpd. in question belongs.

-- attabhāva existence as a brahma god DhA iii.210. -- ujjugatta having the most divinely straight limbs (one of the 32 marks of a Great Man) D ii.18; iii.144, 155. -- uttama sublime DhsA 192. -- uppatti birth in the brahma heaven S i.143. -- ûposatha the highest religious observance with meditation on the Buddha & practice of the uposatha abstinence A i.207. -- kappa like Brahmā Th 1, 909. -- kāya divine body D iii.84; J i.95. -- kāyika belonging to the company of Brahmā, N of a high order of Devas in the retinue of Br. (cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie pp. 191, 193, 197) D i.220; ii.69; A iii.287, 314; iv.40, 76, 240, 401; Th 1, 1082; Vism 225, 559; KhA 86. -- kutta a work of Brahmā D iii.28, 30 (cp. similarly yaŋ mama, pitrā kṛtaŋ devakṛtaŋ na tu brahmakṛtaŋ tat Divy 22). See also under kutta. -- giriya (pl.) name of a certain class of beings, possibly those seated on Brahmagiri (or is it a certain class of performers, actors or dancers?) Miln 191. -- ghaṭa ( = ghaṭa2) company or assembly of Brahmans J vi.99. -- cakka the excellent wheel, i. e. the doctrine of the Buddha M i.69; A ii.9, 24; iii.417; v.33; It 123; Ps ii.174; VbhA 399 (in detail); -- cariya see separate article. -- cārin leading a holy or pure life, chaste, pious Vin ii.236; iii.44; S i.5, 60; ii.210; iii.13; iv.93, A ii.44; M iii.117; Sn 695, 973; J v.107, 382; Vv 3411 (acc. pl. brahmacāraye for ˚cārino); Dh 142; Miln 75; DA i.72 (brahmaŋ seṭṭhaŋ ācāraŋ caratī ti br. c.); DhA iii.83; a˚ S iv.181; Pug 27, 36. -- cintita divinely inspired Pvi i.613=Vv 6316 (of manta); expln at PvA 97, as given above III.3, differs from that at VvA 265, where it runs: brahmehi Aṭṭhak' ādīhi cintitaŋ paññācakkhunā diṭṭhaŋ, i. e. thought out by the divine (seer) Aṭṭhaka and the others (viz. composers of the Vedic hymns: v. s. brāhmaṇa1, seen with insight). -- ja sprung from Brahmā (said of the Brāhmaṇas) D iii.81, 83; M ii.148. Cp. dhammaja. -- jacca belonging to a brahman family Th 1, 689. -- jāla divine, excellent net, N. of a Suttanta (D No. 1) Vism 30; VbhA 432, 516; KhA 12, 36, 97; SnA 362, 434. -- daṇḍa "the highest penalty," a kind of severe punishment (temporary deathsentence? ) Vin ii.290; D ii.154; DhA ii.112; cp. Kern, Manual p. 87. -- dāyāda kinsman or heir of Brahmā D iii.81, 83. -- deyya a most excellent gift, a royal gift, a gift given with full powers (said of land granted by the King) D i.87 (=seṭṭha -- deyyaŋ DA i.246; cp. Dial. i.108 note: the first part of the cpd. (brahma) has always been interpreted by Brahmans as referring to themselves. But brahma as the first part of a cpd. never has that meaning in Pali; and the word in our passage means literally "a full gift." -- Cp. id. p. Divy 620, where it does not need to mean "gift to brahmans," as Index suggests); D i.114; J ii.166=DhA iii.125 (here a gift to a br., it is true, but not with that meaning); J vi.486 (sudinnaŋ+); Mhbv 123. We think that both Kern (who at Toev. s. v. unjustly remarks of Bdhgh's expln as "unjust") and Fick (who at "Sociale Gliederung" p. 126 trsls it as "gift to a Brahman") are wrong, at least their (and others') interpretation is doubtful. -- devatā a deity of the Brahmaloka PvA 138 (so read for brahmā˚). -- nimantanika "addressing an invitation to a brahma -- god," title of a Suttanta M i.326 sq., quoted at Vism 393. -- nimmita created by Brahmā D iii.81, 83. -- patta arrived at the highest state, above the devas, a state like the Br. gods M i.386; A ii.184. -- patti attainment of the highest good S i.169, 181; iv.118. -- patha the way to the Br. world or the way to the highest good S i.141; A iii.346; Th 1, 689. Cp. Geiger, Dhamma 77. -- parāyana devoted to Brahmā Miln 234. -- parisā an assembly of the Brahma gods D iii.260; M i.330; S i.155; A iv.307. -- pārisajja belonging to the retinue of Br., N. of the gods of the lowest Rūpa -- brahmaloka S i.145, 155; M i.330; Kvu 207; cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie 191, 194. -- purohita minister or priest to Mahābrahmā; ˚deva gods inhabiting the next heaven above the Br. -- pārisajjā devā (cp. Kirfel loc. cit.) Kvu 207 (read ˚purohita for ˚parohita!). -- pphoṭana [a -- pphoṭana; ā+ph.] a Brahmaapplause, divine or greatest applause DhA iii.210 (cp. Miln 13; J vi.486). -- bandhu "brahma -- kinsman," a brāhmaṇa in descent, or by name; but in reality an unworthy brahman, Th 2, 251; J vi.532; ThA 206; cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung p. 140. -- bhakkha ideal or divine food S i.141. -- bhatta a worshipper of Br. J iv.377 sq. -- bhavana Br. -- world or abode of Br. Nd1 448. -- bhūta divine being, most excellent being, said of the Buddha D iii.84; M i.111; iii.195, 224; S iv.94; A v.226; It 57; said of Arahants A ii.206; S iii.83. -- yāna way of the highest good, path of goodness (cp. brahma -- patha) S v.5; J vi.57 (C. ariyabhūmi: so read for arāya˚). -- yāniya leading to Brahmā D i.220. -- loka the Br. world, the highest world, the world of the Celestials (which is like all other creation subject to change & destruction: see e. g. Vism 415=KhA 121), the abode of the Br. devas; Heaven. -- It consists of 20 heavens, sixteen being worlds of form (rūpa -- brahmaloka) and four, inhabited by devas who are incorporeal (arūpa˚). The devas of the Br. l. are free from kāma or sensual desires. Rebirth in this heaven is the reward of great virtue accompanied with meditation (jhāna) A i.227 sq.; v.59 (as included in the sphere called sahassī cūḷanikā lokadhātu). -- The brahmās like other gods are not necessarily sotāpannā or on the way to full knowledge (sambodhi -- parāyaṇā); their attainments depend on the degree of their faith in the Buddha, Dhamma, & Sangha, and their observance of the precepts. -- See e. g. D iii.112; S i.141, 155, 282; A iii.332; iv.75, 103; Sn 508, 1117; J ii.61; Ps i.84; Pv ii.1317; Dhs 1282; Vbh 421; Vism 199, 314, 367, 372, 390, 401, 405, 408, 415 sq., 421, 557; Mhbv 54, 83, 103 sq., 160; VbA 68; PvA 76; VbhA 167, 433, 437, 510. See also Cpd. 57, 141 sq.; Kirfel, Kosmographie 26, 191, 197, 207, and cp. in BSk. literature Lal. Vist. 171. The Br. -- l. is said to be the one place where there are no women: DhA i.270. -- yāva Brahmalokā pi even unto Br.'s heaven, expression like "as far as the end of the world" M i.34; S v.265, 288. -- ˚ûpaga attaining to the highest heaven D ii.196; A v.342; Sn 139; J ii.61; Kvu 114. -- ˚ûpapatti rebirth in Heaven Sn 139. -- ˚parāyana the Br. -- loka as ultimate goal J ii.61; iii.396. -- ˚sahavyatā the company of the Br. gods A iv.135 sq. -- yāna the best vehicle S v.5 (+dhammayāna). -- vaccasin with a body like that of Mahābrahmā, combd with -- vaṇṇin of most excellent complexion, in ster. passage at D i.114, 115; M ii.167, cp. DA i.282: ˚vaccasī ti Mahābrahmuṇo sarīra -- sadisena sarīrena samannāgato; ˚vaṇṇī ti seṭṭhavaṇṇī. -- vāda most excellent speech Vin i.3. -- vimāna a palace of Brahmā in the highest heaven D iii.28, 29; It 15; Vism 108. -- vihāra sublime or divine state of mind, blissful meditation (exercises on a, altruistic concepts; b, equanimity; see on these meditations Dial i.298). There are 4 such "divine states," viz. mettā, karuṇā, muditā, upekkhā (see Vism 111; DhsA 192; and cp. Expositor 258; Dhs trsl. 65; BSk. same, e. g. Divy 224); D ii.196; iii.220 (one of the 3 vihāra's: dibba˚, brahma˚, ariya˚); Th 1, 649; J i.139 (˚vihāre bhāvetvā . . . brahmalok' ûpaga), ii.61; Dhs 262; Vism 295 sq. (˚niddesa), 319. -- veṭhana the head -- dress of a brahmin SnA 138 (one of the rare passages where brahma˚=brahma III. 1). -- sama like Brahmā Sn 508; SnA 318, 325; DhsA 195. -- ssara "heavenly sound," a divine voice, a beautiful and deep voice (with 8 fine qualities: see enumd under bindu) D ii.211=227; J i.96; v.336. -- 494 -- Brahmaka
Brahmaka
(adj.) only in cpd. sa˚ with Brahmā (or the Br. world). q. v. Brahmacariya
Brahmacariya
(nt.) [brahma+cariya] a term (not in the strictly Buddhist sense) for observance of vows of holiness, particularly of chastity: good & moral living (brahmaŋ cariyaŋ brahmāṇaŋ vā cariyaŋ = brahmacariyaŋ KhA 151); esp. in Buddh. sense the moral life, holy life, religious life, as way to end suffering, Vin i.12, 19, renouncing the world, study of the Dhamma D i.84, 155; ii.106; iii.122 sq., 211; M i.77, 147, 193, 205, 426, 463, 492, 514; ii.38; iii.36, 116; S i.38, 43, 87, 105, 154, 209; ii.24, 29, 120, 219, 278, 284 (˚pariyosāna); iii.83, 189; iv.51, 104, 110, 126, 136 sq., 163, 253, v.7 sq., 15 sq., 26 sq., 54 sq., 233, 262, 272, 352; A i.50, 168, 225; ii.26, 44, 185; iii.250, 346; iv.311; v.18, 71, 136; Sn 267, 274 (vas -- uttama), 566, 655, 1128; Th 1, 1027, 1079; It 28, 48, 78, 111; Dh 155, 156, 312; J iii.396; iv.52; Pv ii.913; DhA iv.42 (vasuttamaŋ); VbhA 504. -- brahmacariyaŋ vussati to live the religious life A i.115 (cp. ˚ŋ vusitaŋ in formula under Arahant II. A); ˚assa kevalin wholly given up to a good life A i.162; ˚ŋ santānetuŋ to continue the good life A iii.90; DhA i.119; komāra˚ the religious training of a well -- bred youth A iii.224; Sn 289. -- abrahmacariya unchastity, an immoral life, sinful living M i.514; D i.4; Sn 396; KhA 26.

-- antarāya raping DhA ii.52. -- ânuggaha a help to purity A i.167; iv.167; Dhs 1348. -- ûpaddava a disaster to religious life, succumbing to worldly desires M iii.116. -- vāsa state of chastity, holy & pure life; adj. living a pure life A i.253; J iii.393; Kvu 93; DhA i.225. Brahmacariyaka
Brahmacariyaka
(adj.) [fr. brahmacariya] only in phrase ādi˚ leading to the highest purity of life D i.189, 191; iii.284; A iv.166. Brahmacariyavant
Brahmacariyavant
(adj.) [fr. brahmacariya] leading the religious life, pure, chaste S i.182; Dh 267. Brahmañña
Brahmañña
(adj.) [fr. brāhmaṇa] brahman, of the brah- man rank; brahmanhood, of higher conduct, leading a pure life D i.115 (at which passage DA i.286 includes Sāriputta, Moggallāna & Mahākassapa in this rank); M ii.167; A i.143. -- abstr. der. brāhmaññā (nt.) higher or holy state, excellency of a virtuous life D i.166; Vin iii.44; J iv.362 ( = brāhmaṇa dhamma C.); brahmañña (nt.) D ii.248; brahmaññā (f.) D iii.72, 74; A i.142; & brahmaññattha (nt.) S iii.192; v.25 sq., 195; A i.260 (brāhmaññattha). Brahmaññatā
Brahmaññatā
(& brāh˚) [fr. brahma or brāhmaṇa] state of a brahman D iii.145, 169; Dh 332, cp. DhA iv.33. -- Neg. a˚ D iii.70, 71. Brahmaññattha
Brahmaññattha
see brahmañña. Brahmatta
Brahmatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. brahma] state of a Brahma god, existence in the Br. world Vbh 337; Vism 301; VbhA 437; DhA i.110. brahmattabhāva is to be read as brahm' attabhāva (see under brahma). Brahmattara
Brahmattara
at J iii.207 (of a castle) is probably to be read brahmuttara "even higher than Brahmā," i. e. unsurpassed, magnificent. C. explns by suvaṇṇa- pāsāda. Brahmavant
Brahmavant
(adj.) [fr. brahma] "having Brahmā," possessed or full of Brahmā; f. brahmavatī Np. Vism 434. Brāhmañña. brāhmaññatā & brāhmaññattha
Brāhmañña.
brāhmaññatā & brāhmaññattha see brahmañ˚. Brāhmaṇa
Brāhmaṇa1
[fr. brahma; cp. Vedic brāhmaṇa, der. fr. brahmán] a member of the Brahman caste; a Br. teacher. In the Buddhist terminology also used for a man leading a pure, sinless & ascetic life, often even syn. with arahant. -- On brāhmaṇas as a caste & their representation in the Jātaka collection see Fick, Sociale Gliederung; esp. ch. 8, pp. 117 -- 162. -- Var. fanciful etymologies, consisting of a word -- play, in P. definitions are e. g. "sattannaŋ dhammānaŋ bāhitattā br." (like def. of bhikkhu) Nd1 86 = Nd2 464a (cp. Sn 519); ye keci bho -- vādikā Nd1 249=Nd2 464b; brahā -- sukhavihāra -- jhāna -- jhāyin Miln 226; pāpaŋ bāhesuŋ D iii.94; bāhita -- pāpattā br. DhA iii.84; ariyā bāhita -- pāpattā br. DA i.244. -- pl. brāhmaṇāse Sn 1079 sq. -- Var. ref8 in the Canon to all meanings of the term: D i.90, 94, 104, 119 sq., 136 (mahāsālā), 150 (˚dūta), 247; iii.44 sq., 61, 83 sq., 94 sq. (origin of), 147, 170, 258 (˚mahāsālā), 270; M i.271 (˚karaṇā dhammā), 280; ii.84, 148, 177; iii.60, 270 (a bhikkhu addressed as br.); S i.47, 54, 94 sq., 99 (˚kumāra), 117, 125, 160 sq.; ii.77, 259; iv.157; v.194; A i.66, 110, 163 (tevijjā); 166; ii.176; iii.221 sq. (brāhmaṇa -- vagga); It 57 sq., 60, 98, 101; J iii.194; iv.9; vi.521 sq.; Vbh 393 sq. For br. with the meaning "arahant" see also: Vin i.3; ii.156 (br. parinibbuta); Th 1, 140, 221 (brahma -- bandhu pure āsiŋ, idāni kho 'mhi brāhmaṇo); Dh 383 sq.; Sn passim (e.g. v. 142 kammanā hoti brāhmaṇo; 284 sq.); J iv.302 sq.; Miln 225. Ten kinds of Br. are pronounced to be apetā brahmaññā degraded fr. brahmanship J iv.361 sq. Diff. schools of br. teachers are enumd at D i.237 sq. (Tevijja Sutta). -- brāhmaṇānaŋ pubbakā isayo mantānaŋ kattāro "the ten inspired Seers of old times, who composed the Vedic hymns"; their names are Aṭṭhaka, Vāmaka, Vāmadeva, Vessāmitta, Yamataggi, Angirasa, Bhāradvāja, Vāseṭṭha, Kassapa, Bhagu Vin i.245; D i.104; A iii.224; iv.61; cp. VvA 265. -- f. brāhmaṇī (n. or adj.) the wife of a brāhmaṇa D i.193; J v.127 (of a purohita or high priest); DhA i.33; iv.176; PvA 55, 61, 64. Freq. in combn brāhmaṇī pajā this generation of brāhmaṇas, e. g. D i.249; A i.260; ii.23 (see pajā).

-- ibbhā Brahmins & Vaiśyas J vi.228 sq. -- kumārikā a brahmin young girl J iii.93. -- kula a br. clan or family J ii.85, 394, 411; iii.147, 352; PvA 21, 61. -- gahapatikā priests & laymen ("clerk & yeoman" Rh. D. in S.B.E. xi.258) D ii.178; iii.148, 153, 170 sq.; S i.59, 184; A i.110; Vin i.35; J i.83. -- gāma a br. village Vin i.197; D i.87, 127; S i.111; J ii.368; iii.293; iv.276. -- dhamma duty of a br.; see on contrast between Brahmaṇic & Buddhist view J iv.301 sq., cp. also SnA 312 -- 325 (br. -- dhammika -- suta) & Fick, l. c. 124. -- putta son of a br. PvA 62. -- bhojana giving food (alms) to brahmans Vin i.44. -- māṇava a young brahmin J iv.391. -- rūpa (in) form of a br. PvA 63. -- vaḍḍhakī a br. carpenter J iv.207. -- vaṇṇin having the appearance of a brahmin Cp. x.10. -- vācanaka a br. disputation, some sort of elocution show J i.318; iv.391. -- vāṭaka circle of brahmins DhA iv.177 (v. l. ˚vādaka). -- vāṇija a br. merchant PvA 113. -- sacca a brahmanic (i. e. standard, holy) truth A ii.176 (where the Buddha sets forth 4 such br. -- saccāni, diff. from the usual 4 ariyasaccāni). -- 495 -- Brāhmaṇa
Brāhmaṇa2
(nt.) [for brahmañña] state of a true brahman, "holiness supreme" Th 1, 631. Brūti
Brūti
[brū, Sk. bravīti, Med. brūte; cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 1412. Expld by Dhtp 366 as "vacane," by Dhtm 593 as "vācāyaŋ, viyattiyaŋ"] to say, tell, call; show, explain D i.95; Sn 308 sq.; Dh 383 sq.; Cp. vi.8; Miln 314, 327. -- Constructed with double acc. or with dat. of person & acc. of thing said (cp. Miln 233). -- Forms: Pres. 1st sg. brūmi It 33, 40; S 1033, 1042 sq. (expld as ācikkhāmi desemi paññāpemi etc. by Nd.); Pv i.23 ( = kathemi PvA 11); Th 1, 214; 2nd sg. brūsi Sn 457, 1032, 1081; J ii.48; Th 2, 58; 3rd sg. brūti Sn 122; imper. brūhi Th 1, 1266; Sn 1018, 1034, 1043; Miln 318. -- pret. abravi Sn 981; Th 1, 1275; J vi.269; Pv ii.964 (v. l. abruvi); PvA 264; abruvi J iii.62, and bravi J v.204; 3rd sg. med. bravittha Vv 5310 (=kathesi VvA 240); 1st sg. also abraviŋ Cp. ii.68; 3rd pl. abravuŋ J v.112. Brūmeti
Brūmeti
[possible Caus. fr. brūti, but as Geiger, P.Gr. 1412, rightly remarks "not critically sound"] to say D i.95 (expld as "brūmetū ti vadatu" DA i.265). Brūhana
Brūhana
(nt.) [fr. brūheti] expansion, increasing, spreading; cultivation, development (trs. & intrs.) Miln 313 (Kern, Toev. s. v. "amusement"); DhsA 332; VvA 20 (sukha˚). Cp. upa˚. Brūhetar
Brūhetar
[n. ag. of brūheti] increaser; one who practises, is devoted to; in phrase brūhetā suññâgārānaŋ frequenter of solitary places; given up to solitary meditation M i.33, 213. Brūheti
Brūheti
[cp. Sk. bṛŋhayati; fr. brh2 to increase; Dhtp 346 & Dhtm 505: vuddhiyaŋ. Cp. brahant] to cause to grow, increase; hence: to promote, develop, practise, to put or devote oneself to; to look after, to foster, make enjoy; practically syn. with sevati; S i.198 (saddhaŋ); Sn 324 (kammāni); Dh 285 (imper. brūhaya = vaḍḍhaya DhA iii.429); Ud 72; J i.289; Miln 313 (saddena sotaŋ br.); PvA 168 (vaḍḍheti+, for ābhāveti). -- Cp. anu˚, pari˚. -- Bh. Bha
Bha
(indecl.) the letter or sound (syllable) bh; figuring in Bdhgh's exegesis of the N. Bhagavā as representing bhava, whereas ga stands for gamana, va for vanta KhA 109. -- Like ba˚ we often find bha˚ mixed up with pa˚; -- see e. g. bhaṇḍa bhaṇḍati; bh represents b. in bhasta = Sk. basta, bhisa=Sk. bisa, bhusa= Sk. buśa. -- bha -- kāra the sound (or ending) ˚bha, which at Vin iv.7 is given as implying contempt or abuse, among other low terms (hīnā akkosā). This refers also to the sound (ending) ˚ya (see ya -- kāra). The expln for this probably is that ˚bha is abstracted from words ending thus, where the word itself meant something inferior or contemptible, and this shade of meaning was regarded as inhering in the ending, not in the root of the word, as e. g. in ibbha (menial). Bhakuṭi
Bhakuṭi
(f.) [cp. Epic Sk. bhrakuṭi from older bhṛkuti, bhrukuṭi or bhrūkuṭi] superciliousness Sn 485. J iii.99; Vism 26 (˚karaṇa); SnA 412. Der. bhākuṭika (q. v.). See also bhūkuṭi. Bhakkha
Bhakkha
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. bhakṣ] 1. eating, feeding on D iii.41 (sāka˚ etc.); S i.69 (pahūta˚ voracious, of fire), 238 (kodha˚); Pv i.91 (lohita -- pubba˚); Pug 55 (tiṇa˚); Sdhp 388 (tiṇa˚). -- 2. eatable, to be eaten; nt. ˚ŋ food, prey, in cpd. appa -- bhakkha offering no food Vv 843 (appodaka+). -- pl. also bhakkhā (eatables) J ii.14; iv.241 (similar context; = bhojana C.); Pv ii.941 (= āhārā PvA 129). It is to be pointed out that bhakkhā occurs in poetry, in stock phrase "dibbā bhakkhā pātubhavanti"; cp. Vedic bhakṣa (m) feeding, partaking of food, esp. drink (of Soma), thus something extraordinary. Bhakkhati
Bhakkhati
[bhakṣ fr. bhaj, cp. Sk. bhakṣati & bhakṣayati; Dhtp 17 & 537 explns by "adana"] to eat, to feed upon Pv ii.25 (pubba -- lohitaŋ); DhA ii.57 (vātaŋ). -> inf. bhakkhituŋ J ii.14. -- Caus. bhakkheti in same meaning J iv.349 (aor. bhakkhesuŋ); cp. BSk. bhakṣayati Divy 276. Bhaga
Bhaga
[Vedic bhaga, bhaj, see bhagavant etc.] luck, lot, fortune, only in cpd. dub˚ (adj.) unhappy, unpleasant, uncomfortable It 90; DA i.96 (˚karaṇa). -- bhaga (in verse "bhagehi ca vibhattavā" in exegesis of word "Bhagava") at DA i.34 read bhava, as read at id. p. Vism 210. Bhagandala
Bhagandala
(& ā) [cp. late Sk. bhagandara] an ulcer, fistula Vin i.216, 272; Nd1 370. Has expln at Dhtm 204 "bhaganda secane hoti" ("comes from sprinkling") anything to do with our word? Bhagalavant
Bhagalavant
[of uncertain origin] N. of a mountain SnA 197 (loc. Bhagalavati pabbate). Occurs also as an assembly -- hall under the N. of Bhagalavatī at D iii.201. Cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie 196. Bhagavant
Bhagavant
(adj. n.) [cp. Vedic bhagavant, fr. bhaga] fortunate, illustrious, sublime, as Ep. and title "Lord." Thus applied to the Buddha (amhākaŋ Bh.) and his predecessors. Occurs with extreme frequency; of fanciful exegetic explns of the term & its meaning we mention e. g. those at Nd1 142 = Nd2 466; Vism 210 sq.; DA i.33 sq. Usual trs. Blessed One, Exalted One. Bhaginī
Bhaginī
(f.) [Epic Sk. bhaginī] a sister J vi.32. The popular etym. of bh. as given at VbhA 108 is the same as that for bhātar, viz. "bhagatī ti bh." -- Cpd. bhagini -- māla a "sister garland" (?) N. of a tree J vi.270 ( = upari -- bhaddaka). -- 496 -- Bhagga
Bhagga1
[pp. of bhañj, Sk. bhagna] broken, in phrases "sabbā te phāsukā bhaggā" J i.493, which is applied metaphorically at Dh 154 (phāsukā = pāpakā?), expld DhA iii.128 (artificially) by "avasesa -- kilesa -- phāsukā bhaggā"; further "bhaggā pāpakā dhammā" Vism 211; bhaggā kilesā Miln 44; and bhagga -- rāga, ˚dosa etc. (in def. of Bhagavā) at Nd1 142=Nd2 466 B, quoted at Vism 211. Bhagga
Bhagga2
(nt.) [fr. bhaga; cp. Sk. & P. bhāgya] fortune, good luck, welfare, happiness Vism 210 (akāsi ˚ŋ ti garū ti Bhāgyavā etc.). Bhaggava
Bhaggava
[cp. Sk. *bhārgava, a der. fr. bhṛgu, & bhargaḥ, of same root as Lat. fulgur lightning; Gr. flo/c light; Ger. blitzen, blank; Ags. blanca white horse, all of the idea of "shining, bright, radiant." -- How the meaning "potter" is connected with this meaning, is still a problem, perhaps we have to take the word merely as an Epithet at the one passage where it occurs, which happens to be in the Kumbhakāra -- jātaka, v. 6, 7. i. e. the "Jātaka of the potter"] potter (?) J iii.381, 382, in voc. bhaggava (m.) & bhaggavī (f.). The terms are not expld in C., evidently because somewhat obscure. According to Kern, Toev. s. v. the Sk. form in this meaning occurs at MBh. i.190, 47; Saddhp. 191 sq., MVastu iii.347. Bhaggavant
Bhaggavant
(adj. n.) [fr. bhagga2, cp. Sk. & P. bhāgya- vant] having good luck or auspices, fortunate; in def. of "Bhagavā" at Vism 210 = DA i.34 ("bhāgyavā bhaggavā yutto"); with ref. to the 4 qualities implied in the word "bhagavā," which passage is alluded to at VvA 231 by remark "bhāgyavantat' ādīhi catūhi kāraṇehi Bhagavā." Bhanga
Bhanga1
(nt.) [cp. Sk. bhanga, which occurs already Atharva -- veda xi. 6. 15 (see Zimmer. Altind. Leben 68), also Av. baŋha, Polish pienka hemp. On its possible etym. connection with Vedic śaṇa (Ath. Veda ii. 4. 5) = P. saṇa & sāṇa hemp (=Gr. ka/nnabis, Ger. hanf, E. hemp) see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. cannabis] hemp; coarse hempen cloth Vin i.58 (where combd with sāṇa). Bhanga
Bhanga2
(nt.) [cp. Class. Sk. bhanga, fr. bhañj: see bhañ- jati] 1. (lit.) breaking, breaking off, in sākhā˚ a layer of broken -- off branches J iii.407. -- 2. (fig.) breaking up, dissolution, disruption (see on form Cpd. 25, 66) Ps i.57 sq. (˚ânupassanā insight into disruption), quoted & expld at Vism 640 sq.; VbhA 27 (˚khaṇa); Sdhp 48, 78 (āsā˚). Cp. vi˚. Bhangana & Bhangaloka
Bhangana
& Bhangaloka [to bhanga1?] are vv. ll. of Npl. at Nd1 155 for Gangaṇa & Angaṇeka respectively. With misspelling bh>g, cp. bheṇḍaka>geṇḍaka. Bhacca
Bhacca
(adj.) [grd. fr. bhṛ, cp. Sk. bhṛtya] to be carried, kept or sustained A iii.46 ( = a dependant) J iv.301 (C. bharitabba). As Kern. Toev. s. v. bhacca points out this gāthā "bhaccā mātā pitā bandhū, yena jāto sa yeva so" is a distortion of MBh i.74, 110, where it runs "bhastrā mātā, pituḥ putro, yena jāto sa eva saḥ" (or is it bhrastā?). Bhajati
Bhajati
[bhaj to divide, partake etc.: see Caus. bhājeti & cp. vi˚] to associate with (acc.), keep companionship with, follow, resort to; to be attached to (acc.), to love. Freq. syn. of sevati. The Dhtp & Dhtm mark the fig. meaning (bhaj2) by sevāyaŋ (Dhtp 61), sevāputhakkare (Dhtm 523) & saŋsevane (ib. 76), whilst the lit. (bhaj1) is expressed by vibhājane. -- Sn 958 (bhajato rittaŋ āsanaŋ; gen. sq. ppr. = sevato etc. Nd1 466); Dh 76, 303; Pug 26, 33; J i.216=iii.510 (disā bh.) vi.358; Sdhp 275. -- Pot. bhaje Dh 76, 78, and bhajetha Dh 78 (=payirupāsetha), 208 in sense of imper.; hence 2nd sg. formed like Caus. as bhajehi J iii.148 (C. bhajeyyāsi; cp. Geiger, P.Gr. 1392). -> -- grd. bhajitabba Nd2 s. v. kāmaguṇā B (sevitabba, bh., bhāvetabba). Bhajanā
Bhajanā
(f.) [fer. bhaj] resorting to, familiarity with Pug 20 = Dhs 1326, cp. sam˚ & Dhs trsl. 345. Bhajin
Bhajin
(adj.) [fr. bhajati] loving, attached to, worshipping Nd1 142 (in expln of "Bhagavā"). Bhajjati
Bhajjati
[Vedic bhṛjjati, cp. Gr. fru/gw to roast, fru/ganon dry wood; Lat. frīgo to make dry] to roast, toast Vin iv.264; Dhtp 79 & Dhtm 94, expld by "pāke." -> Caus. bhajjāpeti to have, or get roasted Vin iv.264; DhA i.224 (v. l. K. paccāpeti). Bhañjaka
Bhañjaka
(adj.) [fr. bhañjati] breaking, spoiling, destroying (attha˚ -- visaŋvāda; cp. bhañjanaka) J iii.499. Bhañjati
Bhañjati
[bhañj, cp. Vedic bhañjati & bhanakti, roots with & without r, as Lat. frango = Goth. brikan=Ohg. brehhan, E. break, Sk. giri -- bhraj breaking forth from the mountain; and Sk. bhanga, bhañji wave. -- The Dhtp. 68 paraphrases by "omaddana," Dhtm 73 by "avamaddana"] 1. (trs. & intrs.) to break Vin i.74 (phāsukā bhañjitabbā ribs to be broken); Dh 337 (mā bhañji=mā bhañjatu C.). Pv ii.93 (sākhaŋ bhañjeyya =chindeyya PvA 114); PvA 277 (akkho bhañji the axle broke, intrs.). -- 2. to fold or furl (the lip): oṭṭhaŋ bh. J ii.264. -- 3. (fig.) to break up, spoil, destroy, in atthaŋ bh. to destroy the good S iv.347 (cp. bhañjanaka). -- pp. bhagga1 (q. v.). Bhañjana
Bhañjana1
(nt.) [fr. bhañjati] breakage, breaking down, break, only in cpd. akkha˚ break of the axle Vism 32, 45; DhA i.375; PvA 277. Bhañjana
Bhañjana2
(nt.) [for byañjana, in composition; maybe graphical mistake] anointing, smearing, oiling, in gatta˚ and pāda˚ -- bbhañjana -- tela oil for rubbing the body and the feet Vism 100; VvA 295. Bhañjanaka
Bhañjanaka
(nt.) [fr. bhañjana1] destroying, hurting, spoiling, in phrase attha˚ destroying the welfare (with ref. to the telling of lies) DhA iii.356; VvA 72; cp. bhañjaka. Bhañjanin
Bhañjanin
(adj.) [fr. bhañj] breaking, destroying, in cakka˚ breaking the wheel, fig. breaking the state of harmony J v.112. Bhaññam
Bhaññam
(J v.317) see bhā. Bhaṭa
Bhaṭa
[cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhaṭa, fr, dial. bhaṭ to hire; originally the same as bhṛtya fr. bhṛta & bhṛti of bhṛ Dhtp 94, Dhtm 114. -- bhaṭa = bhatyaŋ i. e. bhṛtyaŋ] servant, hireling, soldier Miln 240; VvA 305 (bhattavetana˚). As to suggestion of bhaṭa occurring in phrase yathā -- bhaṭaŋ (Kern. Toev. s. v. yathābhaṭaŋ) see discussion under yathā bhataŋ.

-- patha service, employment, salary Vin iv.265; SnA 542. Bhaṭṭha
Bhaṭṭha1
[pp. of bhraŋś, see bhassati] dropped, fallen down J i.482; iv.222, 382; v.444. Cp. pari˚. Bhaṭṭha
Bhaṭṭha2
[pp. of bhaṇ, for bhaṇita] spoken, said Vv 6319 (su˚ = subhāsita VvA 265). See also paccā˚ & pari˚; cp. also next. Bhaṭṭha
Bhaṭṭha3
(?) [perhaps for bhatta?] wages, tip, donation J iv.261 (by C. expld as kathita, thus same as bhattha2). v. l. bhatta. Cp. Sk. bhāṭa & BSk. bhāṭaka MVastu iii.37. Bhaṇati
Bhaṇati
[bhaṇ; cp. Sk. bhaṇati; Ohg. ban = E. ban etc. "proclamation." See connections in Walde, Lat. Wtb. under fabula. -- Expld by Dhtp 111 as "bhaṇana." by Dhtm 162 as "bhāsana"] to speak, tell, proclaim (the nearest synonym is katheti: see Nd2 s. v. katheti) Dh 264; Pug 33, 56; DhA ii.95. -- ppr. bhaṇanto Sn 397. Pot. bhaṇe Sn 1131 (=bhaṇeyya Nd2 469); Dh 224 (saccaŋ; = dīpeyya vohareyya DhA iii.316). Also bhaṇeyya Sn 397. An old subjunctive form is bhaṇā- mase S i.209 (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 126). Prohib. mā bhāṇi. A Caus. form is bhāṇaye (Pot.) Sn 397. -- 497 -- Bhaṇana
Bhaṇana
(nt.) [fr. bhaṇati] telling, speaking DhA iv.93 (˚sīla, adj. wont to speak); Dhtp 111. Bhaṇe
Bhaṇe
(indecl.) [orig. 1st sg. pres. Med. of bhaṇati] "I say," used as an interjection of emphasis, like "to be sure," "look here." It is a familiar term of address, often used by a king to his subjects Vin i.240 (amhākaŋ kira bhaṇe vijite Bhaddiya -- nagare), 241 (gaccha bhaṇe jānāhi . . .) Miln 21 (atthi bhaṇe añño koci paṇḍito . . .). Bhaṇḍa
Bhaṇḍa
(nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. bhāṇḍa] 1. stock in trade; collectively goods, wares, property, possessions, also "object" S i.43 (itthi bhaṇḍānaŋ uttamaŋ woman is the highest property), Nd2 38; J iii.353 (yācita˚ object asked, = yāca); ThA 288 (id.); Vism 22. -- bhaṇḍaŋ kiṇāti to buy goods VbhA 165. -- bhaṇḍaŋ vikkiṇati to sell goods J i.377 (+paṭibhaṇḍaŋ dāpeti to receive goods in return); vikkiṇiya -- bh. goods for sale DhA i.390. -- assāmika˚ ownerless goods, unclaimed property J vi.348; ābharaṇa˚ trinkets, jewelry J iii.221; piya˚ best goods, treasure J iii.279; bahu˚ having many goods, rich in possessions Vin iii.138; KhA 241 (of a bhikkhu); vara˚ best property or belongings Vin iv.225. -- 2. implement, article, instrument Vin ii.142, 143 (where 3 kinds are distinguished: of wood, copper, & of earthenware), 170 (id.); Dāvs iv.50 (turiya˚). -- In assa(hatthi˚) -- bhaṇḍa Vin i.85 sq., the meaning "horse (elephant -- ) trader (or owner)" does not seem clear; should we read paṇḍaka? Cp. bhaṇḍa=paṇḍa under bhaṇḍati.

-- âgāra store house, warehouse, only in der. -- âgārika keeper of stores Vin i.284; ii.176; surveyor of the (royal) warehouses, royal treasurer (a higher court office: cp. Fick. Sociale Gliederung 101 sq.) J iii.293; iv.43; v.117; Miln 37; DA i.21; PvA 2, 20. -- āhāraka (trader) taking up goods DhA iv.60. Bhaṇḍaka
Bhaṇḍaka
(adj. in sense of collect. nt.) [fr. bhaṇḍa] 1. article, implement; kīḷā˚ toys J vi.6. -- 2. belongings, property Vin iv.225. -- 3. trappings, in assa˚ horsetrappings J ii.113. Bhaṇḍati
Bhaṇḍati
[bhaṇḍ, cp. "paṇḍa bhaṇḍa paribhāse" Dhtp 568; Dhtm 798] to quarrel, abuse Vin i.76 (saddhiŋ); iv.277; Th 1, 933; SnA 357 (aññamaññaŋ). Bhaṇḍana
Bhaṇḍana
(nt.) [fr. bhaṇḍ, cp. BSk. bhāṇḍana Divy 164] quarrel, quarrelling, strife It 11; J iii,149; Nd1 196; DhA i.55, 64. Bhaṇḍi
Bhaṇḍi
[?] a certain plant or flower J v.420. Reading uncertain. Bhaṇḍikā
Bhaṇḍikā
(f.) [fr. bhaṇḍaka, in collect. sense] collection of goods, heap, bundle; bhaṇḍikaŋ karoti to make into a heap J iii.221, 437; or bhaṇḍikaŋ bandhati to tie into a bundle DhA ii.254; VvA 187. sahassa˚ a heap of 1,000 kahāpaṇas J ii.424; iii.60; iv.2. -- Note. bhaṇḍika is v. l. at J iii.41 for gaṇḍikā. Bhaṇḍu
Bhaṇḍu
(adj.) [etym. uncertain, dialectical or = paṇḍu?] bald -- headed, close shaven Vin i.71 (˚kamma shaving), 76 (kammāra˚); J iii.22; vi.538 (+tittira); Miln 11, 128. Bhata
Bhata
(adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. bhṛta] 1. supported, fed, reared, maintained A iii.46 (bhatā bhaccā "maintained are my dependents"); J v.330 (kicchā bh.), given by Kern, Toev. s. v. in meaning "full" with wrong ref. J vi.14. Cp. bharita. Bhataka
Bhataka
[cp. Epic Sk. bhṛtaka] a hired servant, hireling, servant Th 1, 606, 685, 1003; J iii.446; Miln 379; DhA i,119, 233 (˚vīthi servant street). See also Fick. Sociale Gliederung 158, 195, 196. Bhati
Bhati
(f.) [cp. Vedic bhṛti, fr. bhṛ] wages, fee, pay J i.475; iii.325, 446; DhA i.21, 70; Dhtp 94 (in expln of root bhaṭ, see bhaṭa). Bhatikā
Bhatikā
(f.) [fr. bhati] fee J iv.184. Bhatta
Bhatta
(nt.) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhakta, orig. pp. of bhajati] feeding, food, nourishment, meal Dh 185; Pug 28, 55; J ii.15; v.170 (bhatta -- manuñña -- rūpaŋ for bhattaŋ -- ); Vism 66 (where 14 kinds enumd, i. e. sangha˚, uddesa˚ etc.); Sdhp 118. -- ucchiṭṭha˚ food thrown away PvA 173; uddesa˚ special food Vin i.58 = 96, cp. ii.175; devasika˚ daily food (as fee or wages) DA i.296 (=bhatta -- vetana); dhura˚ a meal to which a bhikkhu is invited as leader of others, i. e. a responsible meal J i.449; iii.97 (v. l. dhuva˚); dhuva˚ constant supply of food Vin i.25, 243.

-- agga [cp. BSk. bhaktāgra Divy 335; MVastu ii.478] a refectory Vin i.44; M i.28; J v.334. -- ammaṇa food trough J vi.381. -- âbhihāra gift of food S i.82. -- uddesaka (thera) (an elder) who supervises the distribution of food, a superintendent of meals Vism 388, DhA i.244. -- kāraka one who prepares the meal or food, a cook, butler J i.150 sq.; v.296; vi.349; DA i.157. -- kicca "meal -- performance," meal (cp. BSk. bhaktakṛtya Divy 185) J i.87; Miln 9; Vism 278 (kata˚ after the meal, cp. kata ii.1. a); PvA 76. -- kilamatha fatigue after eating SnA 58 (cp. ˚sammada). -- gāma a village giving tribute or service DhA i.398. -- dāna gift of a meal PvA 54. -- puṭa a bag with food J ii.82, 203; iii.200; DA i.270. Cp. puṭabhatta. -- puṭaka same KhA 44; VbhA 234; Vism 251. -- bhoga enjoyment of food S i.92. -- randhaka a cook J iv.431. -- vissagga serving a meal, meal -- function, participation at a meal Vin iv.263; Pv iii.29 (so read for vissatta; expld at PvA 184 by bhattakicca & bhuñjana); Miln 9; SnA 19, 140. -- vetana service for food, food as wages (cp. bhaktā -- dāsa a slave working for food Manu viii.415, see Fick. Sociale Gliederung p. 197), in general "hire, wages," also "professional fee" D iii.191; Vin iii.222 (rañño bh -- v. -- āhāro "in the King's pay"); J iv.132 sq., Miln 379; DhA i.25 (to a physician); VvA 305. -- velā meal -- time SnA 111. -- sammada drowsiness after a meal S i.7; J vi.57; Vbh 352; Vism 278, 295. -- sālā hall for meals, refectory Vism 72. Bhattar
Bhattar
[Vedic bhartṛ to bhṛ] a husband; nom. sg. bhattā Th 2, 413; J v.104, 260 (here in meaning "supporter"); vi.492; gen. bhattu J v.169, 170; acc. bhattāraŋ Th 2, 412. Bhattavant
Bhattavant
(adj.) [fr. *bhakta, pp. of bhajati] possessing reverence or worship (pers), worshipful, adored; in a (late) verse analysing fancifully the word "Bhagavant," at DA i.34 = Vism 210 sq. Expld at Vism 212 by "bhaji -- sevi -- bahulaŋ karoti." Bhatti
Bhatti
(f.) [cp. Vedic & Class. Sk. bhakti, fr. bhaj: see bhajati] 1. devotion, attachment, fondness Pug 20 = Dhs 1326 (cp. Dhs trsl. 345); Pug 65; J v.340 (= sineha C.); vi.349; VvA 353, 354. -- 2. in bhatti -- kata Th 2, 413 it means "service," thus "doing service" (or "rendered a servant"?). -- 3. of uncertain meaning in bhatti -- kamma, probably "making lines, decoration, ornamentation" Vin ii.113 (˚kamma -- kata decorated), i.51. The reading is uncertain, may be bhati˚ (? Kern, Toev. s. v. trsls "patchwork"?). Cp. vi˚. Bhattika
Bhattika
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. bhatta] in dhuva˚ being in constant supply of food, being a regular attendant (servant) or adviser Vin ii.15. Also at ThA 267 in meaning "being a servant, working for food" in expln of bhattikatā ( = kata -- sāmi -- bhattikā), said of a toiling housewife. Bhattimant
Bhattimant
(adj.) [from bhatti] 1. devoted? 2. discerning, analytical, perspicacious? Th 1, 370; Com. has: yathānusiṭṭhaŋ paṭipattiyā tattha bhattimā nāma. Bhadanta (Bhaddanta)
Bhadanta
(Bhaddanta) [a secondary adj. formation from address bhaddaŋ ( = bhadraŋ) te "hail to thee," cp. "bhaddaŋ vo" under bhadda 1] venerable, reverend. mostly in voc. as address "Sir, holy father" etc., to men of the Order. voc. sg. bhadante S i.216 (v. l. bhaddante); voc. pl. bhadantā DhA iii.414. -- A contracted form of bhadante is bhante (q. v.). Note. In case of bhadanta being the corresp. of Sk. *bhavanta (for bhavān) we would suppose the change v>d and account for dd on grounds of pop. analogy after bhadda. See bhante. The pl. nom. from bhadantā is formed after bhadante, which was felt as a voc. of an a -- stem with -- e for -- a as in Prk. Māgadhī. -- 498 -- Bhadantika
Bhadantika
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. bhadanta] only in cpd. ehi˚, lit. "one belonging to the (greeting) ʻ come hail to thee, ʼ" i. e. one who accepts an invitation D iii.40, M ii.161; A i.295; ii.206; Pug 55. See also under ehi. Bhadara
Bhadara
in ˚paṇḍu at A i.181 is to be read as badara˚. Bhadda & Bhadra
Bhadda(a)
& Bhadra(b) (adj.) [cp. Vedic bhadra, on diff. forms see Geiger, P.Gr. § 532. Dhtp 143, 589 expls bhadd by "kalyāṇe"; whereas Dhtm 205 & 823 gives bhad (bhadd) with expln "kalyāṇa kammāni"] 1. auspicious, lucky, high, lofty, august, of good omen, reverend (in address to people of esteem), good, happy, fortunate D ii.95(a); S i.117(b); Dh 143 sq.(b) (of a good, well -- trained horse), 380(b) (id.); J vi.281(b) (24 bhadrā pāsakā or lucky throws of the dice); DhA i.33(a) (voc. bhadde = ayye). -- bhadraŋ (nt.) something bringing luck, a good state, welfare; a good deed (=kalyāṇaŋ) Dh 120 (=bhadra -- kamma, viz. kāyasucarita etc. DhA iii.14); PvA 116 (=iṭṭhaŋ). Also as form of address "hail to thee," bhaddaŋ vo J v.260. -- 2. a kind of arrow (cp. Sk. bhalla) J ii.275 (v. l. bhadra; so Kern, Toev. s. v.; but C. takes it as bhadda lucky, in neg. sense "unlucky, sinister," & expls by bībhaccha=awful). -- 3. bull (cp. Sk. bhadra, Halāyudha 5, 21) Th 1, 16, 173, 659.

-- mukha one whose face brings blessings, a complimentary address, like "my noble &c friend!" [cp. BSk. bhadramukha; Divy frequent: see Index], M ii.53; S i.74 (cp. K.S. i.100n) J ii.261 (v. l. bhadda˚); Vism 92 (v. l. SS bhadda˚). -- muttaka [cp. Sk. bhadramusta] a kind of fragrant grass (Cyperus rotundus) DA i.81; Abhp 599. -- yuga a noble pair DhA i.95 (Kolita & Upatissa), -- vāhana the auspicious (royal) vehicle (or carriage) Miln 4. Bhaddaka & Bhadraka
Bhaddaka(a)
& Bhadraka(b) [fr. bhadda] 1. good, of good quality (opp. pāpaka) A iv.169(a). -- 2. honoured, of high repute J iii.269(a) ( = sambhāvita C.). -- 3. (m. nt.) a good thing, lucky or auspicious possession, a valuable. Appld to the 8 requisites (parikkhārā) of a Samaṇa at J v.254(b). -- On upari -- bhaddaka (N. of a tree J vi.269; C.=bhagini -- mālā) see upari. -- At A iv.255 bhaddaka is given as one of the eight ingredients of the sun & moon; it may be gold (? cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie 190), or simply a term for a very valuable quality. Bhanta
Bhanta
[pp. of bham] swerving, swaying, staggering, deviating; always used of an uncontrolled car (ratha or yāna) Dh 222 (ratha = ativegena dhāvanta DhA iii.301); (yāna=adanta akārita aviṇīta Nd1 145); DhsA 260 (˚yāna). Cp. vi˚. Bhantatta
Bhantatta
(nt.) [fr. bhanta] turmoil, confusion Dhs 429 ( = vibhanti -- bhāva DhsA 260, so read for vibhatti˚); cp. Dhs trsl. 120. Bhante
Bhante
[would correspond either to Sk. *bhavantaḥ (with ending ˚e as Māgadhism for ˚aḥ) = bhavān, or to P. bhadanta. In both cases we have a contraction. The expln bhante=bhadante (bhadantaḥ) is advocated by Pischel, Prk. Gr. §§ 165, 366b, intimated also by Weber, Bhagavatī 156 n. 3 (unable to explain -- e); the expln bhante=bhavantah (see bhavaŋ) by Geiger, P.Gr. 983; hinted at by Weber loc. cit. (bhavantaḥ=bhagavantaḥ)] voc. of polite address: Sir, venerable Sir, used like bhadante. Either abs. as voc.: Vin i.76; D ii.154, 283; J ii.111; iii.46; Miln 19; or with another voc.: Miln 25; or with other oblique cases, as with nom. D i.179; DhA i.62. with gen. D i.179. Bhabba
Bhabba
(adj.) [grd of bhū, Sk. bhavya] 1. able, capable, fit for ( -- ˚ or with dat. or inf.); abhabba unfit, incapable; Vin i.17; S iii.27 (dukkha -- kkhayāya); iv.89 (id.); Pug 12, 13; Vism 116 (bhikkhu), neg. It 106 (antakiriyāya), 117 (phuṭṭhuŋ sambodhiŋ); J i.106 (˚puggala a person unfit for the higher truths & salvation). bhabbâbhabba nt & unfit people Nd2 2353 = Vism 205, expld at Vbh 341, 342 by "bhabbā niyāmaŋ okkamituŋ kusalesu dhammesu sammattaŋ." -- 2. possible (& abhabba impossible) M iii.215 (kammaŋ bhabbaābhāsa apparently possible). -- See also abhabba. Bhabbatā
Bhabbatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. bhabba] possibility; neg. a˚ im- possibility Sn 232; KhA 191; VvA 208. Bhamati
Bhamati
[bhram; on etym. see K.Z. iv.443; vi.152. Expld at Dhtp 219 by "anavaṭṭhāne," i. e. unsettledness] to spin (of a wheel), to whirl about, to roam Dh 371 (mā te kāmaguṇe bhamassu cittaŋ); J i.414; iii.206 = iv.4 (cakkaŋ matthake); iv.6 (kumbha -- kāra -- cakkaŋ iva bh.); v.478. -- pp. bhanta. -- Caus. bhameti to make whirl Vism 142 (cakkaŋ). Bhamara
Bhamara
[cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhramara; either to bhram (semantically quick, unsteady motion = confused noise), cp. Gr. fo/rmigc zither; or perhaps for *bramara to Ohg. bremo=Ger. bremse gadfly, bremen=brummen to hum; Gr. bro/mos thunder, Lat. fremo to growl, roar: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fremo] 1. a bee J v.205 (˚vaṇṇa bee -- coloured, i. e. of black colour, in expln of kaṇha); Th 2, 252. Usually in similes, e. g. at Dh 49 (cp. DhA i.374 sq.); Vism 142, 152; SnA 139. -- 2. in bhamara -- tanti "the string that sounds," one of the seven strings of the lute J ii.253, cp. VvA 140. Bhamarikā
Bhamarikā
(f.) [fr. bhamara] a humming top J v.478. Bhamu
Bhamu
(f.) [secondary formation after bhamuka] eyebrow J vi.476 (ṭhita˚), 482 (nīla˚). Bhamuka
Bhamuka
(& Bhamukha) (f.) [cp. Vedic bhrū; the Pali word is possibly a compn of bhrū+mukha with dissimilation of first u to a] eyebrow Th 11, 232 = S i.132 pamukh -- ; J iv.18 (in expln of su -- bbhū=su -- bhamukhā in C., Fausböll puts "bhamuka"? Kern on this passage quotes BSk. bhrūmukha, see Toev. s. v.); vi.503 (aḷāra˚ for pamukha); DhA iii.102; iv.90, 197=J v.434; SnA 285. Bhaya
Bhaya
(nt.) [fr. bhī, cp. Vedic bhaya, P. bhāyati] fear, fright, dread A ii.15 (jāti -- maraṇa˚); D iii.148, 182; Dh 39, 123, 212 sq., 283; Nd1 371, 409; Pug 56; Vism 512; KhA 108; SnA 155; DhA iii.23. There are some lengthy enumns of objects causing fear (sometimes under term mahabbhaya, mahā -- bhaya), e. g. one of 17 at Miln 196, one of 16 (four times four) at A ii.121 sq., the same in essence, but in different order at Nd2 470, and at VbhA 502; one of 16 (with remark "ādi," and so on) at Vism 645. Shorter combns are to be found at Sn 964 (5, viz. ḍaŋsā, adhipātā, siriŋsapā, manussaphassā, catuppādā); Vbh 379 (5, viz. ājīvika˚, asiloka˚, parisa -- sārajja˚, maraṇa˚, duggati˚, expld at VbhA 505 sq.), 376 (4: jāti˚, jarā˚, vyādhi˚, maraṇa˚) 367 (3: jāti˚, jarā˚, maraṇ˚); Nd1 402 (2: diṭṭha -- dhammikaŋ & samparāyikaŋ bh.). -- abhaya absence of fear, safety Vin i.75 (abhay -- ûvara for abhaya -- vara?); Dh 317; J i.150; DhA iii.491.

-- ñāṇa insight into what is to be feared: see Cpd. 66. -- dassāvin seeing or realising an object of fear, i. e. danger Vbh 244, 247 and passim. -- dassin id. Dh 31, 317. -- bherava fear & dismay M i.17 ( = citt' uttrasassa ca bhayānak' ārammaṇassa adhivacanaŋ MA 113), N. of Suttanta No. 4 in Majjhima (pp. 16 sq.), quoted at Vism 202; SnA 206. -- 499 -- Bhayānaka
Bhayānaka
(adj.) [fr. bhaya, cp. Epic Sk. bhayānaka] frightful, horrible J iii.428; MA 113; PvA 24 (as ˚ika); Sdhp 7, 208. -- nt. ˚ŋ something awful Nd2 470 (in def. of bhaya). Bharabhara
Bhara
-- bhara, a word imitating a confused sound M i.128; otherwise contracted to babbhara (q. v.). Bhara
Bhara
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. bhṛ] "bearing" in act. & pass. meaning, i. e. supporting or being supported; only in cpd. dubbhara hard to support A v.159, 161 (v. l. dubhara), and subhara easy to support Th 1, 926 (trsl. "of frugal ways"). Bharaṇa
Bharaṇa
(nt.) [fr. bhṛ, Epic Sk. bharaṇa] bearing, sup- porting, maintenance Dhtm 346 (in expln of bhṛ); Abhp 1053. Bharatā
Bharatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. bhara] only in cpd. dub˚ difficulty to support, state of being hard to maintain, synonymous with kosajja at A iv.280, and kuhanā at A v.159, 161. -- opp. subharatā A iv.280. Bharati
Bharati
[bhṛ, cp. Lat. fero, Gr. fe/rw, Av. baraiti, Oir. berim, Goth. bairan = to bear, Ger. gebāren. Dhtm expls simply by "bharena"] to bear, support, feed, maintain J v.260 (mama bharatha, ahaŋ bhattā bhavāmi vo; C. explns as "maŋ icchatha"). -- pp. bhata. See also bhaṭa, bhara, bharita, and Der. fr. bhār˚. A curious Passive form is anu -- bhīramāna (ppr.) M iii.123 (chatta: a parasol being spread out), on which see Geiger, P.Gr. § 52, 5; 175 n. 3, 191. Bharita
Bharita
(adj.) [lit. made to bear, i. e. heavy with etc. Cp. formations bhār˚, fr. bharati] filled with ( -- ˚) J i.2 (suvaṇṇa -- rajata˚ gabbha); iv.489 (udaka˚); v.275 (kimi˚); SnA 494 (vāta˚); ThA 283 (kuṇapa˚). Bhariyā
Bhariyā
(f.) [fr. bhṛ, Vedic bhāryā] a wife (lit. one who is supported) D iii.190; It 36; J iii.511; DhA i.329. Bharu
Bharu
[a dial. (inscription) word, cp. Kern, Toev. s. v.] sea, in two names for a town and a kingdom viz. Bharukaccha Nd1 155; J ii.188; iv.137, and Bharu -- raṭṭha J ii.169 sq., a kingdom which is said to have been swallowed up by the sea. -- Also in N. of the King of that country Bharu -- rājā J ii.171 (v. l. Kuru˚). -- Der. Bhārukacchaka an inhabitant of Bharukaccha DhsA 305 (so read at Expos. ii.401). Bhallaka
Bhallaka
[lit. from the Bhalla people] a kind of copper, enumd under the eight pisāca -- lohāni, or copper coming from the Piśāca country VbhA 63 (is reading correct?). It is doubtful whether we should not read mallaka, cp. malla. Bhallāṭaka
Bhallāṭaka
[cp. Epic Sk. bhallātaka] the marking nut plant Semicarpus anacardium J vi.578. Bhava
Bhava
[cp. Sk. bhava, as philosophical term late, but as N. of a deity Vedic; of bhū, see bhavati] "becoming," (form of) rebirth, (state of) existence, a "life." There are 3 states of existence conventionally enumd as kāma˚, rūpa˚, arūpa˚ or sensual existence, deva -- corporeal, & formless existence (cp. rūpa) D ii.57; iii.216; S ii.3; iv.258; A ii.223; iii.444; Nd1 48; Nd2 s. v. dhātu B.; Vism 210 = DA i.34; Vism 529; VbhA 204. -- Another view is represented by the division of bhava into kamma˚ and upapatti˚ (uppatti˚), or the active functioning of a life in relation to the fruitional, or resultant way of the next life (cp. Cpd. 43) Vbh 137; Vism 571; VbhA 183; also in def. of bhava at Nd2 471 (kamma˚ and paṭisandhika punabbhava). -- In the "causal chain" (Paṭicca -- samuppāda, q. v.) bhava is represented as condition of birth (jāti), or resultant force for new birth. -- See Sn 361, 514, 742, 839, 923, 1055, 1133; Dh 348; Nd1 274; Vbh 294, 358; Vism 556 sq.; DhA iv.221; Sdhp 33, 333, 335. -- On itibhav'-> âbhava see iti, and add ref. Vbh 375. -- A remarkable use of bhava as nt. (obstr.) to bhū (in cpd.) is to be noted in the def. given by Bdhgh. of divya=divi bhavaŋ (for divi -- bhū) KhA 227; SnA 199; and mānasaŋ= manasi bhavaŋ (for manasi -- bhū) KhA 248, cp. Pāṇini iv.3, 53. Similarly āroga bhava health DhA i.328 for ˚bhava. -- Cp. anu˚, vi˚, sam˚.

-- agga the best (state of) existence, the highest point of existence (among the gods) J iii.84; Vbh 426; Miln 132; KhA 179, 249; SnA 17, 41, 507; often as highest "heaven" as opposed to Avīci, the lowest hell; thus at J iv.182; vi.354; Miln 336. -- anga constituent of becoming, function of being, functional state of subconsciousness, i. e. subliminal consciousness or subconscious life -- continuum, the vital continuum in the absence of any process [of mind, or attention] (thus Mrs. Rh. D. in Expos. 185 n.), subconscious individual life. See on term Cpd. 26 sq., 265 -- 267; & cp. Dhs trsl. 134. -- J vi.82; Miln 299 sq.; Vism 164, 676; DhsA 72, 140, 269; DhA i.23; VbhA 81, 156 sq., 406. -- antaga "gone to the ends of existence," past existence, Ep. of the Bhagavan Buddha Vism 210. -- antara an existence interval, i. e. transition fr. one life to another, a previous or subsequent life Vism 553 sq. -- âbhava this or that life, any form of existence some sort of existence Sn 1060, 1068; Nd1 48, 109, 284; Nd2 472, 664 A; Th 1, 784 (ThA mahantāmahanta bh.) ThA 71 (Ap. v. 30); VbhA 501. -- āsava the intoxicant of existence D iii.216; Vbh 364, 373. -- uppatti coming into (a new) ex. -- Four such bh. -- uppattis lead to rebirth among the foll. gods: the paritt' -- ābhā devā, the appamāṇ'ābhā d., the sankiliṭṭh' -- ābhā d., the parisuddh' -- ābhā d. M iii.147. -- esanā longing for rebirth D iii.216, 270. -- ogha the flood of rebirth (see ogha) Nd1 57, 159; Vism 480. -- cakka the wheel or round of rebirth, equivalent to the Paṭicca -- samuppāda Vism 529, 576 sq.; in the same context at VbhA 138, 194 sq. -- carimakā the last rebirth Vism 291. -- taṇhā craving for rebirth D iii.212, 216, 274; S v.432; Sn 746; Vbh 101, 358, 365; Th 2, 458; ThA 282; VbhA iii.133. -- netti [cp. BSk. bhava -- netrī M. Vastu ii.307; ˚netrika iii.337] leader to renewed ex., guide to ex. Vin i.231; It 38; Dhs 1059≈ (cp. DhsA 364 = bhava -- rajju). -- saŋyojana the fetter of rebirth: see arahant II. C. -- salla the sting or dart of rebirth Dh 351 (=sabbāni bhavagāmīni sallāni DhA iv.70). -- sāta (pl. sātāni) the pleasures of ex., variously enumd in sets of from one to six at Nd1 30. -- ssita at J v.371 read with v. l. as ghaṭa -- ssita. Bhavati
Bhavati
[bhū to become, cp. Sk. bhūmi earth; Gr. fu/sis nature (physical), fu/ omai to grow; Lat. fui I have been, futurus = future; Oir. buith to be; Ags. būan =Goth. bauan to live, Ger. bauen, also Ags. bȳldan=to build; Lith. búti to be, būtas house Dhtp 1: bhū sattāyaŋ] to become, to be, exist, behave etc. (cp. Nd2 474= sambhavati jāyati nibbattati pātu -- bhavati). -- I. Forms. There are two bases used side by side, viz. bhav˚ and (contracted) ho˚, the latter especially in the (later) Gāthā style and poetry in general, also as archaic in prose, whereas bhav˚ forms are older. On compounds with prepositions, as regards inflection, see Geiger, P.Gr. §§ 1312, 1513; and cp. anubhavati, abhibhavati, abhisaŋ˚, pa˚ (also pahoti, pahūta), pari˚, vi˚, saŋ˚. -- 1. Pres. ind. bhavāmi Sn 511 & homi J iii.260; 2nd bhavasi & hosī M iii.140; Vv 8420; 3rd bhavati freq.; Sn 36 (where Nd2 474 with v. l. BB of Sn reads bhavanti; Divy p. 294 also reads bhavanti snehāḥ as conjecture of Cowell's for MSS. bhavati); Dh 249, 375; & hoti freq.; 1st pl. homa Pv i.118; 2nd hotha J i.307; 3rd bhavanti & honti freq. -- imper. 2nd sg. bhava Sn 337, 340, 701; Dh 236; Th 2, 8; bhavāhi Sn 510; hohi Sn 31; M iii.134; J i.32; PvA 89. 3rd sg. hotu Sn 224; J iii.150; PvA 13; Miln 18. pl. 1st med. bhavāmase Th 1, 1128; Sn 32; 2nd pl. bhavatha J ii.218, bhavātha Sn 692; Dh 144; hotha Dh 243; Dh ii.141; J ii.302; DhA i.57; 3rd pl. bhavantu Sn 145; hontu J ii.4. Pot. 1st sg. bhaveyyaŋ J vi.364; 2nd bhaveyyāsi Ud 91; PvA 11; 3rd bhave Sn 716, bhaveyya J ii.159; DhA i.329, & hupeyya Vin i.8 (for huveyya: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 396 & 1312); pl. 1st bhaveyyāma; 2nd bhavetha Sn 1073, 3rd bhaveyyuŋ Sn 906. -- ppr. bhavaŋ Sn 92, & bhavanto Sn 968; f. hontī PvA 79. -- fut. 1st sg. bhavissāmi PvA 49, hessāmi Th 2, 460 (ThA 283 reads bhavissāmi), & hessaŋ Th 1, 1100; J iii.224; Pv i.105; 2nd bhavissasi PvA 16, hohisi Pv i.33; 3rd bhavissati Dh 228, 264; DhA ii.82, hessati J iii.279 & med. hessate Mhvs 25, 97, hehitī Bu ii.10=A i.4; Vv 6332; & hossati (in pahossati fr. pahoti DhA iii.254); 1st pl. bhavissāma Dh 200; 2nd hessatha S iv.179; 3rd bhavissanti freq. -- Cond. 1st sg. abhavissaŋ J i.470; 2nd abhavissa J ii.11; iii.30; 3rd abhavissa It 37; Vin i.13; D ii.57; M iii.163; J i.267; ii.112 (na bhavissa=nābhavissa?); 3rd pl. abhavissaŋsu Vin i.13. 1st aor. (orig. pret. of *huvati, cp. hupeyya Pot.; see Geiger P.Gr. 1312, 1622): 1st sg. ahuvā S i.36, with by -- form (see aor.) ahuvāsiŋ Vv 826; 2nd ahuvā ibid., 3rd ahuvā Vv 8124; J ii.106; iii.131; 1st pl. ahuvāma M i.93; ii.214, & ahuvamha ibid.; 2nd ahuvattha S iv.112; M i.445; DhA i.57. -> 2nd aor. (simple aor., with pret. endings): 1st sg. ahuŋ Pv ii.32 (v. l. BB ahu) (=ahosiŋ PvA 83); 2nd ahu (sk. abhūḥ) Pv ii.35; 3rd ahū (Sk. abhūt) Sn 139, 312, 504 and passim; Pv i.23, & ahu Pv i.93; i.113; & bhavi DhA i.329 (pātubhavi); 1st pl. ahumhā (Sk. abhūma) Pv i.116, & ahumha J i.362; DhA i.57. -- 3rd aor. (s aor.) 1st sg. ahosiŋ Th 1, 620; J i.106; VvA 321: PvA 10 (=āsiŋ); 2nd ahosi J i.107; 3rd ahosi Sn 835; Vin i.23; 1st pl. ahesumha M i.265; 3rd ahesuŋ D ii.5; Vv 744; J i.149; DhA i.327; & bhaviŋsu (Sk. abhāviṣuḥ) DhA iv.15. -- Of medial forms we mention the 1st pl. pres. bhavāmahe Mhvs i.65, and the 3rd sg, pret. ahuvattha VvA 103. -- Inf. bhavituŋ Sn 552, & hetuye Bu ii.10. -- ger. bhavitvā Sn 56, hutvā Sn 43, & hutvāna Sn 281. -- grd. bhavitabba J i.440; vi.368; hotabba Vin i.46; bhabba (Sk. bhavya); see sep.; bhuyya see cpd. abhibhuyya. -- Caus. bhāveti see sep. -- pp. bhūta. Note. In compn with nouns or adjectives the final vowel of these is changed into ī, as in combn of the same with the root kṛ, e. g. bhasmībhavati to be reduced to ashes, cp. bhasmī -- karaṇa s. v. bhasma, etc. -- II. Meanings. In general the meaning "to become, to get" prevails, but many shades of it are possible according to context & combinations. It is impossible & unnecessary to enumerate all shades of meaning, only a few idiomatic uses may be pointed out. -- 1. to happen, to occur, to befall J vi.368. -- 2. The fut. bhavissati "is certainly," "must be" DhA iii.171 (sātthikā desanā bh.); Miln 40 (mātā ti pi na bh.). -> 3. Imper. hotu as adv. "very well" Miln 18 (hotu bhante very well, sir). -- 4. aor. in meaning and as substitute of āsiŋ, pret. of as to be; etad ahosi this occurred to him DhA i.399 (assā etad ahosi "this thought struck her"). -- 500 -- Bhavatta
Bhavatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. bhū] the fact of being, state, con- dition KhA 227. Bhavana
Bhavana
(nt.) [fr. bhū] dwelling, sphere, world, realm S i.206, Sn 810 (see expln Nd1 132: nerayikānaŋ nirayo bh. etc. & SnA 534: niray' ādi -- bhede bhavane); Nd1 448 (Inda˚ the realm of Indra); J iii.275 (nāga˚ the world of the Nāgas). Bhavant
Bhavant
[cp. Sk. (& Vedic) bhavant, used as pron. of the 2nd; but constructed with 3rd person of the verb. Probably a contraction fr. bhagavant, see Whitney, Altind. Gr. 456] pron. of polite address "Sir, Lord," or "venerable, honourable," or simply "you." Cases as follows (after Geiger, P.Gr. § 983): sg. nom. bhavaŋ Sn 486; D i.249; M i.484. nt. bhavaŋ M iii.172. acc. bhavantaŋ Sn 597; D ii.231; instr. bhotā D i.93, 110; S iv.120. gen. bhoto Sn 565; M i.486; voc. bhavaŋ D i.93 & bho D i.93; M i.484; J ii.26. See bho also sep. -- pl. nom. bhavanto Sn p. 107 (only as v. l.; T. bhagavanto), & bhonto ibid.; M ii.2; Miln 25; acc. bhavante M ii.3; instr. bhavantehi M iii.13; gen. bhavataŋ M ii.3; voc. bhonto Th 1, 832; M ii.2; -- f. bhotī: sg. nom. bhotī Sn 988; J iii.95; acc. bhotiŋ J vi.523; loc. bhotiyā ibid. voc. bhoti ibid.; D ii.249. -- On form bhante see this. Bhaveyya
Bhaveyya
[cp. Class. Sk. bhavya] a sort of tree, perhaps Averrhoa carambola J vi.529. Bhasati
Bhasati
[cp. Epic Sk. bhaṣate] to bark (of dogs) J iv.182 (aor. bhasi; so read for T. bhusi). -- pp. bhasitaŋ (as n.) bark ibid. (mahā -- bhasitaŋ bhasi, read for bhusita). See also bhusati. Bhasita
Bhasita
1. see bhasati. -- 2. pp. of bhas "crumbled to ashes" see bhasma. Bhasta
Bhasta
[cp. Vedic basta] a he -- goat J iii.278. Bhastā
Bhastā
(f.) & bhasta (nt.) [cp. Class. Sk. bhastrā (also one MBh. passage), orig. n. ag. fr. bhas (to bark?), lit. bellower, blower] 1. a bellows Th 1, 1134; J vi.12 (vāta -- puṇṇa -- bhasta -- camma, skin of bellows full of wind); SnA 171 (vāta -- pūrita -- bhastrā viya), 494 (vātabharita˚); DhA i.442 (bhastaŋ dhamāpeti); Vism 287. -- 2. a sack Th 1, 1151; 2, 466 (T. reads gatta, but ThA 283 reads bhasta & expls as "camma -- pasibbaka"); J iii.346 (sattu˚ = sattu pasibbaka flour sack); v.45; ThA 212 (udaka˚). biḷāra -- bhastā a bag of catskin M i.128 (=biḷāra -- camma -- pasibbaka Bdhgh); Th 1, 1138. Bhasma(n)
Bhasma(n)
(nt.) [cp. Vedic bhasman (adj.); Sk. bhasman (n.), originally ppr. of bhas to chew & thus n -- stem. It has passed into the a -- decl. in Pali, except in the loc. bhasmani (S i.169). Etymologically & semantically bhasman is either "chewing" or "anything chewed (small)," thus meaning particle, dust, sand, etc.; and bhas is another form of psā (cp. Sk. psā morsel of food, psāta hungry = P. chāta). Idg. *bhsā & *bhsam, represented in Gr. yw/xw to grind, ya/ mmos & yw_xos sand; Lat. sabulum sand. The Dhtp 326 & Dhtm 452 explain bhas by bhasmīkaraṇa "reduce to ashes," a pp. of it is bhasita; it also occurs in Sk. loc. bhasi] ashes S i.169=Nd2 576 (loc. bhasmani); Vv 8444; J iii.426; Vism 469 (in comparison).

-- antāhuti (bhasm' ant' āhuti) "whose sacrifice ends in ashes" D i.55 (so read for bhassant˚, according to DA i.166, & cp. Franke, Dīgha Nikāya p. 60); M i.515; S iii.207. -- âcchanna covered by ashes Dh 71 ( = chārikāya paṭichanna DhA ii.68); J vi.236 (. . . va pāvaka). -- puṭa a sack for ashes DA i.267 (as expln for assa -- puṭa of D. i.98; fanciful; see assa1). -- bhāva "ashy" state, state of being crumbled to dust VvA 348. Bhassa
Bhassa
(nt.) [cp. Class. Sk. bhāṣya, of bhāṣ] speech, conversation, way of talking, disputation Sn 328 (v. l. for hassa); It 71; Miln 90; Vism 127 (grouped into fit talk, as the 10 kathā -- vatthus, and unfit talk or gossip, as the 32 tiracchāna -- kathā).

-- kāraka one who makes talk, i. e. invites disputation, or one who gossips Vin i.1; Nd1 142; f. ˚kārikā Vin iv.230. -- pavādaka one who proposes disputation, one who is fond of debate & discussions M i.161, 227 (˚ika); Miln 4. -- pavedin one experienced in debating Miln 90. -- samācāra (good) conduct in speech, proficiency in disputation D iii.106. -- samussaya grandiloquence, proud talk Sn 245 (cp. SnA 288 = att'ukkaŋsanatā ti vuttaŋ hoti). Bhassati
Bhassati
[bhranś, Sk. bhraśyate] to fall down, drop, to droop (Dhtp 455 & Dhtm 695: adho -- patane & adhopāte) J iv.223; vi.530. ppr. bhassamāna Miln 82; pret. 3rd sg. bhassittha J ii.274 (cp. pabhassittha Vin ii.135), & abhassittha S i.122 (so read for abhassatha). -- pp. bhaṭṭha1. Bhassara
Bhassara
(adj. n.) [fr. bhās] 1. (adj.) shining, resplendent J v.169 (C. pabhassara). -- 2. N. of a bird J vi.538 ( = sata -- haŋsa C.). -- Cp. ā˚, pa˚. -- 501 -- Bhā
Bhā
(f.) [cp. Vedic bhā & bhāḥ nt.] light, splendour; given as name of a jewel at an extremely doubtful passage J v.317, 318, where T. reads "vara taŋ bhañ ñam icchasi," & C. expls.: "bhā ti ratanass' etaŋ nāmaŋ." The v. l. for bhaññaŋ is bhuñjaŋ; the passage may be corrupt from "varatu bhavaŋ yam icchasi." Bhākuṭika
Bhākuṭika
(adj.) [fr. bhakuṭi] knitting the eyebrows, frowning, only in redupl. cpd. bhākuṭika -- bhākuṭiko frowning continually, supercilious Vin ii.11 = iii.181 (manda -- mando+); Nd2 342 (korajika -- korajiko+); Vism 26 (id.). -- f. bhākuṭikā a frown, frowning, superciliousness, def. at Vism 26 as "padhāna -- parimathitabhāva -- dassanena bhākuṭi [read bhakuṭi] -- karaṇaŋ mukha -- sankoco ti vuttaŋ hoti." It occurs in stock phrase bhākuṭikā bhākuṭiyaŋ kuhanā kuhāyanā in def. of kuhanā at Vbh 352=Vism 23, 25 (cp. Nd1 225), and at Nd2 342 D. See also VbhA 482 (bhākuṭikaraṇaŋ sīlam assā ti bhākuṭiko). The form bhākuṭiyaŋ (nt.) is originally the same as bhākuṭikā, only differentiated in C. -- style. The def. at Vism 26 is "bhākuṭikassa bhāvo bhākuṭiyaŋ." The v. l. ibid. is bhākuṭitā. -- bhākuṭikaŋ karoti to make a frowning face, to act superciliously Vism 105 (as a quality of one "dosa -- carita"). Bhāga
Bhāga
[cp. Vedic bhāga, fr. bhaj, bhajati] 1. part, portion, fraction, share Vin i.285; Sn 427 (sahassa -- bhāgo maraṇassa = sahassaŋ bhāgānaŋ assā ti SnA 387; a thousand times a share of death, i. e. very near death, almost quite dead), 702 (v. l. SnA 492 for Sn samāna -- bhāva, evenness, proportionate -- ness); Vv 146 (=kummāsa -- koṭṭhāsa VvA 62); Pv i.115 (aḍḍhi˚ one half); Vin iv.264. -- Cp. vi˚. -- bhāgaso (abl. -- adv.) in parts, by parts, by portions, esp. in even portions, i. e. evenly, in proportion S i.193 (according to each one's share; cp. Th 1, 1242); M iii.183; Vv 72; Miln 330, 415 (aneka˚ hundredfold or more). bhāgaso mita (of cities or dwelling -- places etc.) evenly planned, well laid out, i. e. in squares Sn 300, 305 (nivesanāni suvibhattāni bhāgaso); J v.266 (cp. C. on p. 272)=Nd2 304iii. d; Pv i.1013 (= bhāgato mita PvA 52). -- bhāgabhatta apportioned food, ration DhA i.134. -- Cp. dobbhagga "disproportionateness," i. e. bad luck. -- 2. apportioned share (of money), fee, remuneration, always in term ācariya˚ (ācariyassa) the teacher's fee (usually consisting in 1,000 kahāpaṇas) J i.273; v.457; vi.178; Miln 10; DhA i.253. -- 3. division of space, quarter, side, place, region: disā˚ quarter of the compass Vin ii.217; para˚ outside part KhA 206 =PvA 24 (kuḍḍānaŋ parabhāgā=tiro -- kuḍḍā); pacchābhāgaŋ (acc. adv.) at the back part, behind PvA 114. -- fig. way, respect, in ubhato -- bhāga -- vimutta "free in both ways" D ii.71; M i.477 (see Dial ii.70; i. e. free both by insight and by the intellectual discipline of the 8 stages of Deliverance, the aṭṭha vimokkhā). -- 4. division of time, time, always -- ˚, e. g. pubba˚ the past, apara˚ the future PvA 133; obl. cases adverbially: tena divasa -- bhāgena (+ratti bhāgena) at that day (& that very night) Miln 18; apara -- bhāge (loc.) in future J i.34; PvA 116. Bhāgavant
Bhāgavant
(adj.) [fr. bhāga, equal to bhāgin] sharing in, partaking of (gen.) Dh 19, 20 (sāmaññassa). Bhāgin
Bhāgin
(adj.) [fr. bhāga. Cp. Vedic bhāgin] sharing in, partaking of (with gen.), endowed with; getting, receiving A ii.80; iii.42 (āyussa vaṇṇassa etc.); J i.87 (rasānaŋ); Miln 18 (sāmaññassa); Vism 150 (lābhassa); DhA ii.90; VbhA 418 sq. (paññā as hāna -- bhāginī, ṭhiti˚, visesa˚ & nibbedha˚). -- Also in def. of term Bhagavā at Nd1 142 = Nd2 466=Vism 210. -- pl. bhāgino Pv iii.112 (dukkhassa); PvA 18 (dānaphalassa), 175. -- Cp. bhāgavant, bhāgimant, bhāgiya. Bhāgineyya
Bhāgineyya
[fr. bhaginī, Cp. Epic Sk. bhāgineya] sister's son, nephew Sn 695; J i.207; ii.237; DhA i.14; PvA 215. Bhāgimant
Bhāgimant
(adj.) [a double adj. formation bhāgin+ mant] partaking in, sharing, possessing (with gen.) Th 2, 204 (dukkhassa); ThA 171 ( = bhāgin). Bhāgiya
Bhāgiya
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. bhāga, cp. bhāgin] connected with, conducive to, procuring; in foll. philos. terms: kusala˚ A i.11; hāna˚, visesa˚ D iii.274 sq.; hāna˚, ṭhiti˚, visesa˚, nibbedha˚ Vism 15 (in verse), 88 = Ps i.35. -> Cp. BSk. mokṣa bhāgīya, nirvedha˚ Divy 50; mokṣa˚ ibid. 363. Bhāgya
Bhāgya
(nt.) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhāgya; fr. bhaga, see also contracted form bhagga2] good luck, fortune J v.484. Bhāgyavant
Bhāgyavant
(adj.) [same as bhaggavant, only differentiated as being the Sk. form and thus distinguished as sep. word by Commentators] having good luck, auspicious, fortunate, in def. of term "Bhagavā" at DA i.34 = Vism 210; also at VvA 231, where the abstr. bhāgyavantatā is formed as expln of the term. bhāgyavatā (f.) at Vism 211. Bhājaka
Bhājaka
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. bhajeti] distributing, one who distributes or one charged with the office of distributing clothes, food etc. among the Bhikkhus Vin i.285 (cīvara˚); A iii.275 (cīvara˚, phala˚, khajjaka˚). Bhājana
Bhājana1
(nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. bhājana, fr. bhāj] a bowl, vessel, dish, usually earthenware, but also of other metal, e. g. gold (suvaṇṇa˚) DA i.295; copper (tamba˚) DhA i.395; bronze (kaŋsa˚) Vism 142 (in simile). -> Vin i.46; Sn 577 (pl. mattika -- bhājanā); J ii.272 (bhikkhā˚); iii.366 (id.), 471; v 293 (bhatta˚); Miln 107; VvA 40, 292 (v. l. bhojana); PvA 104, 145, 251; Sdhp 571.

-- vikati a special bowl J v.292 (so read for T. bhojana˚); Vism 376. Bhājana
Bhājana2
(nt.) [fr. bhāj] division, dividing up, in pada˚ dividing of words, treating of words separately DhsA 343; similarly bhājaniyaŋ that which should be classed or divided DhsA 2, also in pada˚ division of a phrase DhsA 54. Bhājita
Bhājita
[pp. of bhājeti] divided, distributed; nt. that which has been dealt out or allotted, in cpd. bhājit -- âbhājita A iii.275. Bhājeti
Bhājeti
[Caus. of bhajati, but to be taken as root by itself; cp. Dhtm 777 bhāja = puthakkare] to divide, distribute, deal out Vin iv.223 (ppr. bhājiyamāna); J i.265; DhsA 4 (fut. bhājessati) grd. bhājetabba Vin i.285. -- pp. bhājita. Bhāṇa
Bhāṇa
[fr. bhaṇati] reciting or preaching, in pada˚ reciting the verses of the Scriptures DhA ii.95 (v. l. paṭibhāna); iii.345; iv.18.

-- vāra a section of the Scriptures, divided into such for purposes of recitation, "a recital" Vin i.14; ii.247; DA 13; MA 2 (concerning the Bh. of Majjhima Nikāya); SnA 2 (of Sutta Nipāta), 608 (id.); DhsA 6 (of Dhammasangaṇī, cp. Expos. 8 n. 3), and frequently in other Commentaries & Expositionary Works. Bhāṇaka
Bhāṇaka1
(adj. -- n.) [fr. bhaṇati] speaking; (n.) a reciter, repeater, preacher (of sections of the Scriptures), like Anguttara˚ Vism 74 sq.; Dīgha˚ DA i.15, 131; J i.59; Vism 36, 266; Jātaka˚ etc. Miln 341 sq.; Majjhima˚ Vism 95 (Revatthera), 275, 286, 431; Saŋyutta˚ Vism 313 (Cūḷa -- Sivatthera). Unspecified at SnA 70 (Kalyāṇavihāravāsi -- bhāṇaka -- dahara -- bhikkhu; reading doubtful). -- f. bhāṇikā Vin iv.285 (Thullanandā bahussutā bhāṇikā); also in cpd. mañju -- bhāṇikā sweet -- voiced, uttering sweet words J vi.422. Bhāṇaka
Bhāṇaka2
[cp. Sk. bhāṇḍaka a small box: Kathāsarits. 24, 163; & see Müller, P.Gr. p. 48] a jar Vin ii.170 (loha˚); iii.90. -- 502 -- Bhāṇin
Bhāṇin
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. bhaṇati] speaking, reciting Sn 850 (manta˚ a reciter of the Mantras, one who knows the M. and speaks accordingly, i. e. speaking wisely, expld by SnA 549 as "mantāya pariggahetvā vācaŋ bhāsitā"); Dh 363 (id.; expld as "mantā vuccati paññā, tāya pana bhaṇana -- sīlo" DhA iv.93). -- ativela˚ speaking for an excessively long time, talking in excess J iv.247, 248. Bhāṇeti
Bhāṇeti
Caus. of bhaṇati (q. v.) with 3rd praet. bhāṇi & pot. bhāṇaye. Bhātar
Bhātar
[cp. Vedic bhrātar = Av. bratar, Gr. fra/twr, Lat. frater, Goth. brōpar= Ohg. bruoder, E. brother] brother, nom. sg. bhātā Sn 296; J i.307; PvA 54, 64; gen. sg. bhātuno ThA 71 (Ap. v.36), & bhātussa Mhvs 8, 9; instr. bhātarā J i.308; acc. bhātaraŋ Sn 125; J i.307; loc. bhātari J iii.56. -- nom. pl. bhātaro J i.307, & bhātuno Th 2, 408; acc. bhāte Dpvs vi.21. -> In cpds. both bhāti˚ (. bhātisadisa like a brother J v.263), and bhātu˚ (: bhātu -- jāyā brother's wife, sister-in-law J v.288; Vism 95). Cp. bhātika & bhātuka. On pop. etym. see bhaginī. Bhāti
Bhāti
[bhā Dhtp 367, Dhtm 594: dittiyaŋ; Idg. *bhē, cp. Sk. bhāḥ nt. splendour, radiance, bhāsati to shine forth; Gr. fa/os light, fai/nw to show etc.; Ags. bonian to polish = Ger. bohnen; also Sk. bhāla shine, splendour, =Ags. bael funeral pile] to shine (forth), to appear D ii.205; Vv 352; J ii.313. -- pp. bhāta: see vi˚. Bhātika
Bhātika
(& Bhātiya) [fr. bhātar, cp. Class. Sk. bhrātṛka] lit. brotherly, i. e. a brother, often˚ -- : "brother" -- (a) bhātika: J i.253 (jeṭṭhaka˚); vi.32; DhA i.14 (˚thera my Thera -- brother or br. -- thera), 101, 245; PvA 75. -> (b) bhātiya: Vism 292 (dve ˚therā two Th. brothers). -- Cp. bhātuka. Bhātuka
Bhātuka
[ = bhātika, fr. Sk. bhrātṛka] brother, usually -- ˚, viz. pati˚ brother-in-law, husband's brother J vi.152; putta˚ son & brother DhA i.314; sa˚ with the brother ThA 71 (Ap. v.36). Bhānu
Bhānu
(adj.) [cp. Vedic bhānu (m.) shine, light, ray; Epic Sk. also "sun"] light, bright red J iii.62 (of the kaṇavera flower); VvA 175 (˚raŋsi). Bhānumant
Bhānumant
(adj.) [fr. bhānu, ray of light Vedic bhānu- mant, Ep. of Agni; also Epic Sk. the sun] luminous, brilliant; mostly of the sun; nom. bhānumā S i.196 = Th 1, 1252; Vv 6417, 787 (=ādicca VvA 304); J i.183. acc. bhānumaŋ Sn 1016. -- The spelling is sometimes bhāṇumā. Bhāyati
Bhāyati
[cp. Sk. bhayate, bhī, pres. redupl. bibheti; Idg. *bhei, cp. Av. bayente they frighten; Lith. bijotis to be afraid; Ohg. bibēn = Ger. beben. Nearest synonym is tras] to be afraid. Pres, Ind. 1st sg. bhāyāmi Th 1, 21; Sn p. 48; 2nd sg. bhāyasi Th 2, 248; 1st pl. bhāyāma J ii.21; 3rd pl. bhāyanto Dh 129; Imper. 2nd pl. bhāyatha Ud 51; J iii.4; Pot. 3rd sg. bhāye Sn 964 & bhāyeyya Miln 208; 3rd pl. bhāyeyyuŋ Miln 208. -> Aor. 1st sg. bhāyiŋ DhA iii.187; 2nd sg. bhāyi Th 1, 764; DhA iii.187; & usually in Prohib. mā bhāyi do not be afraid S v.369; J i.222; DhA i.253. -- grd. bhāyitabba Nd2 s.v. kāmaguṇā B; DhA iii.23. -> Caus. I. bhāyayate to frighten J iii.99 (C.: utraseti); Caus. II. bhāyāpeti J iii.99, 210. -- pp. bhīta. Bhāyitabbaka
Bhāyitabbaka
(adj.) [grd. of bhāyati+ka] to be feared, dreadful, fearful, Sdhp 95. Bhāra
Bhāra
[fr. bhṛ, Vedic bhāra; cp. bhara] 1. anything to carry, a load Vin iii.278 (Bdhgh; dāru˚ a load of wood). bhāraŋ vahati to carry a load A i.84; VvA 23. -- garu˚ a heavy load, as "adj." "carrying a heavy load" J v.439 (of a woman, = pregnant). -- bhāratara (adj.-> compar.) forming a heavier load Miln 155. -- Cp. ati˚, sam˚. -- 2. a load, cartload (as measure of quantity) VvA 12 (saṭṭhi -- sakaṭa˚ -- parimāṇa); PvA 102 (aneka˚parimāṇa). -- 3. (fig.) a difficult thing, a burden or duty, i. e. a charge, business, office, task, affair Vism. 375; J i.292; ii.399; iv.427; vi.413; DhA i.6, 111. Several bhārā or great tasks are mentioned exemplifying the meaning of "gambhīra" & "duddasa" (saccāni) at VbhA 141, viz. mahā -- samuddaŋ manthetvā ojāya nīharaṇaŋ; Sineru -- pādato vālikāya uddharaṇaŋ; pabbataŋ pīḷetvā rasassa nīharaṇaŋ. -- 4. (fig.) in metaphors for the burden of (the factors of renewed) existence (the khandhas and similar agents). Esp. in phrase panna -- bhāra "one whose load (or burden) has been laid down," one who has attained Arahantship M i.139; A iii.84; S i.233; Dh 402 (=ohita -- khandha -- bhāra DhA iv.168); Sn 626 (same expln at SnA 467), 914 (expld as patita -- bhāra, oropita˚, nikkhitta˚ Nd1 334, where 3 bhāras in this sense are distinguished, viz. khandha˚, kilesa˚, abhisankhāra˚); Th 1, 1021. So at Vism 512 with ref. to the ariya -- saccāni, viz. bhāro= dukkha -- saccaŋ, bhār' ādānaŋ=samuda -- saccaŋ, bhāranikkhepanaŋ=nirodha -- s., bhāra -- nikkhepan'upāya = magga -- s. -- On bhāra in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 118.

-- ādāna the taking up of a burden S iii.25. -- (m)oropana "laying down the load," i. e. delivery of a pregnant woman Bu ii.115. -- ṭṭha contained in a load, carried as a burden Vin iii.47. -- nikkhepana the laying down or taking off of a burden S iii.25. -- mocana delivery (of a pregnant woman) J i.19. -- vāhin "burden-bearer," one who carries an office or has a responsibility A iv.24 (said of a bhikkhu). -- hāra load -- carrier, burden-bearer S iii.25 sq. Bhāraka
Bhāraka
( -- ˚) [fr. bhāra] a load, only in cpd. gadrabha˚ a donkey -- load (of goods) J ii.109; DhA i.123. Bhārataka
Bhārataka
[fr. bhara] "the petty descendants of Bhārata" or: load -- carrier, porter (?) Ś iv.117 (indignantly applied to apprentices and other low class young men who honour the Mahā -- Kaccāna). Bhārika
Bhārika
(adj.) [fr. bhāra] 1. loaded, heavy J v.84, 477; Miln 261. -- 2. full of, loaded down with ( -- ˚) VvA 314 (sineha˚ hadaya). -- 3. grievous, serious, sorrowful PvA 82 (hadaya). -- 4. important Miln 240, 311. -- See bhāriya. Bhārin
Bhārin
(adj.) [fr. bhṛ, cp. bhāra] carrying, wearing, only in cpd. mālā˚ (māla˚), wearing a garland (of flowers) J iv.60, 82; v.45; where it interchanges with ˚dhārin (e. g. Vv.323; v. l. at PvA 211; cp. BSk. ˚dhārin MVastu i.124). -- f. ˚bhārinī J iii.530; VvA 12; and ˚bhārī Th 1, 459 (as v. l.; T. ˚dhārī). See also under mālā. Bhāriya
Bhāriya
(adj.) [fr. bhāra Vedic bhārya to be nourished or supported; bhāryā wife] 1. heavy, weighty, grave, serious; always fig. with ref. to a serious offence, either as bhāriyaŋ pāpaŋ a terrible sin PvA 195, or bh. kammaŋ a grave deed, a sin DhA i.298, 329; ii.56; iii.120; VvA 68; or bhāriyaŋ alone (as nt.), something grave, a sin DhA i.64. Similarly with ati˚ as atibhāriyaŋ kammaŋ a very grave deed DhA i.70, or atibhāriyaŋ id. DhA i.186. -- 2. bhāriyā ( = bhārikā, f. of bhāraka) carrying, fetching, bringing J vi.563 (phala˚). Bhārukacchaka
Bhārukacchaka
see bharu˚. Bhāva
Bhāva
[fr. bhū, cp. Vedic bhāva] 1. being, becoming, condition, nature; very rarely by itself (only in later & C. literature, as e. g. J i.295 thīnaŋ bhāvo, perhaps best to be translated as "women's character," taking bhāva = attabhāva); usually -- ˚, denoting state or condition of, and representing an abstr. der. from the first part of the cpd. e. g. gadrabha˚ ʻ asininity ʼ J ii.109. Thus in connection with (a) adjectives: atthika˚ state of need PvA 120; ūna˚ depletion SnA 463; ekī˚ loneliness Vism 34; sithill˚ (for sithila˚ in conn. with kṛ & bhū ) relaxation Vism 502. -- (b) adverbs. upari˚ high condition M i.45; pātu˚ appearance Sn 560; vinā˚ difference Sn 588. (c) nouns & noun -- derivations: atta˚ individual state, life, character Sn 388 (=citta SnA 374); asaraṇa˚ state of not remembering DhA iii.121; samaṇa˚ condition of a recluse Sn 551. -- (d) forms of verbs: nibbatta˚ fact of being reborn DhA iii.121; magg' ārūḷha˚ the condition of having started on one's way VvA 64; baddha˚ that he was bound; suhita˚ that they were well J iv.279. The translation can give either a full sentence with "that it was" etc. (VvA 64: "that he had started on his way"), or a phrase like "the fact or state of," or use as an English abstract noun ending in -- ness (atthika -- bhāva needfulness, eki˚ loneliness), -- ion (ūna˚ depletion, pātu˚ manifestation). -- hood (atta˚ selfhood), or -- ship (samaṇa˚ recluseship). -> Similarly in Com. style: sampayutta -- bhāvo (m.) DhA iii.94, for *sampayuttattaŋ (abstr.); bhākuṭikassa bhāvo=bhakuṭiyaŋ Vism 26; sovacassassa bhāvo= sovacassatā KhA 148; mittassa bh.=mettaŋ KhA 248. Here sometimes bhava for bhāva. -- 2. (in pregnant, specifically Buddhistic sense) cultivation or production by thought, mental condition, esp. a set mental condition (see der. bhāvanā). Sometimes (restricted to Vin & J) in sense "thinking of someone," i. e. affection, love, sentiment. -- (a) in combn khanti, diṭṭhi, ruci, bhāva at Vin ii.205; iii.93; iv.3, 4. -- (b) in Jātaka passages: J v.237; vi.293 (bhāvaŋ karoti, with loc., to love). -- abhāva (late, only in C. style) not being, absence, want PvA 25; abl. abhāvato through not being, in want of PvA 9, 17. -- sabhāva (sva+bhāva) see sep. -- 503 -- Bhāvanā
Bhāvanā
(f.) [fr. bhāveti, or fr. bhāva in meaning of bhāva 2, cp. Class. Sk. bhāvanā] producing, dwelling on something, putting one's thoughts to, application, developing by means of thought or meditation, cultivation by mind, culture. -- See on term Dhs trsl 261 ( = 2 240); Expos. i.217 (=DhsA 163); Cpd. 207 n. 2. -> Cp. pari˚, vi˚, sam˚. -- Vin i.294 (indriya˚); D iii.219 (three: kāya˚, citta˚, paññā˚), 221, 225, 285, 291; S i.48; Dh 73, 301; J i.196 (mettā˚); iii.45 (id.); Nd1 143 (saññā˚); Nett 91 (samatha -- vipassanaŋ); Vbh 12, 16 sq., 199, 325; Vism 130 (karaṇa, bhāvanā, rakkhaṇa; here bh.=bringing out, keeping in existence), 314 (karuṇā˚), 317 (upekkhā˚); Miln 25 (˚ŋ anuyuñjati); Sdhp 15, 216, 233, 451.

-- ânuyoga application to meditation Vbh 244, 249. -- ārāma joy of or pleasure in self culture A ii.28. -- bala power to increase the effect of meditation, power of self -- culture A i.52; D iii.213. -- maya accomplished by culture practice; brought into existence by practice (of cultured thought), cp. Cpd. 207. D iii.218, 219; Nett 8; with dānamaya & sīlamaya at It 19, 51; Vbh 135, 325. -- vidhāna arrangement of process of culture DhsA 168 = Vism 122. Bhāvanīya
Bhāvanīya
(adj.) [grd. fr. bhāveti, but taken by Bdhgh as grd. formation fr. bhāvanā] "being as ought to be," to be cultivated, to be respected, in a self -- composed state (cp. bhāvitatta) M i.33 (garu+; expld by Bdhgh as "addhā 'yam āyasmā jānaŋ jānāti passaŋ passatī ti evaŋ sambhāvanīyo" MA 156); S v.164; A iii.110; Miln 373; PvA 9. See also under manobhāvanīya. Bhāvita
Bhāvita
[pp. of bhāveti] developed, made to become by means of thought, cultured, well-balanced A v.299 (cittaŋ parittaŋ abhāvitaŋ; opp. cittaŋ appamāṇaŋ subhāvitaŋ); Sn 516, 558. Bhāvitatta
Bhāvitatta1
(adj.) [bhāvita+attan] one whose attan (ātman) is bhāvita, i. e. well trained or composed. Attan here = citta (as PvA 139), thus "self -- composed, well -- balanced" A iv.26; Sn 277, 322, 1049; Dh 106, 107; Nd2 142; Nd2 475 B (indriyāni bh.); J ii.112 (˚bhāvanāya when the training of thought is perfect); Vism 185 (˚bhāvana, adj. one of well -- trained character), 267, 400 (+bahulī -- kata); DhA i.122 (a˚); ThA 164 (indriya˚). See foll. Bhāvitatta
Bhāvitatta2
(nt.) [abstr. fr. bhāvita = *bhāvitattvaŋ] only neg. a˚ the fact of not developing or cultivating S iii.153, 475; Pv ii.966. Bhāvin
Bhāvin
(adj.) [fr. bhāva, Epic Sk. bhāvin "imminent"] "having a being," going to be, as -- ˚ in avassa˚ sure to come to pass, inevitable J i.19. -- f. bhāvinī future VvA 314 (or is it bhāvanīya? cp. v. l. S bhāvaniyā). Bhāveti
Bhāveti
[Caus. of bhū, bhavati] to beget, produce, increase, cultivate, develop (by means of thought & meditation), The Buddhist equivalent for mind -- work as creative in idea, M i.293; cp. B.Psy p. 132. -- D ii.79; M ii.11 (cattāro sammappadhāne & iddhipāde); S i.188 (cittaŋ ekaggaŋ), Th 1, 83, 166 (ppr. bhāvayanto); Sn 341 (cittaŋ ekaggaŋ), 507 (ppr. bhāvayaŋ), 558 (grd. bhāvetabba), 1130 (ppr. bhāvento = āsevanto bahulī -- karonto Nd2 476); Dh 87, 350, 370; J i.264 (mettaŋ), 415, ii.22; Nd2 s. v. kāmaguṇā (p. 121) (where grd. in sequence "sevitabba, bhajitabba, bhāvetabba, bahulī -- kātabba"); Pug 15, DhA iii.171; Sdhp 48, 495. -- Pass. ppr. bhāviyamāna A ii.140; KhA 148. -- pp. bhāvita. Bhāsa
Bhāsa
[cp. Epic Sk. bhāsa] -- sakuṇa a bird of prey, a vulture [Abhp. 645, 1049]; as one of the lucky omens enumd (under the so -- called mangala -- kathā) at KhA 118 (with v. l. SS. cāta˚ & vāca˚, BB cāba˚) = Nd1 87 (on Sn 790) (T. reads vāta˚; v. l. SS vāpa˚, BB chapa˚). Bhāsaka
Bhāsaka
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. bhāṣ] speaking DA i.52 (avaṇṇa˚ uttering words of blame). Bhāsati
Bhāsati1
[bhāṣ; Dhtp 317: vacane; Dhtm 467; vācāya] to speak, to say, to speak to, to call M i.227, Sn 158, 562, 722; Dh 1, 246, 258; also bhāsate Sn 452. -- Pot. bhāseyya Vin ii.189; Sn 451, 930; SnA 468 (for udīraye Dh 408); bhāse Dh 102; Sn 400; & bhāsaye A ii.51 = J v.509 (with gloss katheyya for joteyya= bhāseyya). -- Aor. abhāsi Vin iv.54; PvA 6, 17, 23, 69; 1st sg. also abhāsissaŋ (Cond.) Pv i.68 (=abhāsiŋ PvA 34); imper. pres. bhāsa Sn 346; ppr. bhāsamāne A ii.51= J v.509; Sn 426; Dh 19; J iv.281 (perhaps better with v. l. as hasamāna); v.63; & bhāsanto Sn 543. -- grd. bhāsitabba A iv.115; Vism 127. -- Med. ind. pres. 2nd sg. bhāsase Vv 342; imper. pres. 2nd sg. bhāsassu M ii.199. -- An apparent ger. form abhāsiya It 59, 60 (micchā vācaŋ abhāsiya) is problematic. It may be an old misspelling for ca bhāsiya, as a positive form is required by the sense. The vv. ll. however do not suggest anything else but abhāsiya; the editor of It suggests pa˚. -- Cp. anu, o˚, samanu˚. Bhāsati
Bhāsati2
[bhās Dhtm 467: dittiyaŋ] to shine, shine forth, fill with splendour Sn 719 (2nd sg. fut. bhāsihi = bhāsissasi pakāsessasi SnA 499). Usually with prep. prefix pa˚ (so read at Pv i.109 for ca bh.). Cp. o˚, vi˚. Bhāsana
Bhāsana
(nt.) [fr. bhāṣ] speaking, speech Dhtm 162; Sdhp 68. Bhāsā
Bhāsā
(f.) [cp. Epic Sk. bhāṣā] speech, language, esp. vernacular, dialect J iv.279 (manussa˚ human speech), 392 (caṇḍāla˚); KhA 101 (saka -- saka˚ -- anurūpa); SnA 397 (Milakkha˚); DA i.176 (Kirātā -- Yavanâdi -- Millakkhānaŋ bhāsā); MA i.1 (Sīhaḷa˚); VbhA 388 (18 dialects, of which 5 are mentioned; besides the Māgadhabhāsā). Bhāsita
Bhāsita
[pp. of bhāsati1] spoken, said, uttered A v.194; Miln 28; DhA iv.93. -- (nt.) speech, word Dh 363; M i.432. Usually as su˚ & dub˚ (both adj. & nt.) well & badly spoken, or good & bad speech Vin i.172; M ii.250; A i.102; ii.51 (su˚; read bhāsita for bāsita); vi.226; Sn 252, 451, 657; J iv.247, 281 (su˚, well spoken or good words); Pv ii.620 (su˚); PvA 83 (dub˚). Bhāsitar
Bhāsitar
[n. ag. fr. bhāṣ] one who speaks, utters; a speaker S i.156; Pug 56; SnA 549. -- 504 -- Bhāsin
Bhāsin
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [cp. Epic Sk. bhāṣin] speaking A i.102 (dubbhāsita -- bhāsin). Bhāsura
Bhāsura
(adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. bhāsura fr. bhas] bright, shining, resplendent ThA 139, 212; VvA 12. Bhiŋsa
Bhiŋsa
(adj.) [ = Vedic bhīṣma, of which there are 4 P. forms, viz. the metathetic bhiŋsa, the shortened bhisma, the lengthened bhesma, and the contracted bhīsa (see bhīsana). Cp. also Sk. -- P. bhīma; all of bhī] terrible; only in cpd. ˚rūpa (nt. & adj.) an awful sight; (of) terrific appearance, terrible, awful J iii.242, 339; iv.271, 494. Bhiŋsana & ˚ka
Bhiŋsana
& ˚ka (adj.) [the form with ˚ka is the canonic form, whereas bhiŋsana is younger. See bhiŋsa on connections] horrible, dreadful, awe -- inspiring, causing fear. (a) bhiŋsanaka (usually combd with lomahaŋsa) D ii.106 = A iv.311; D ii.157; Vin iii.8; PvA 22; ThA 242 (˚sabhāva=bhīmarūpa); J v.43. -- (b) bhiŋsana Pv iv.35 (+lomahaŋsa). Bhiŋsā
Bhiŋsā
(f.) [fr. bhiŋsa] terror, fright; mahā -- bhiŋsa (adj.) inspiring great terror D ii.259. Cp. bhismā. Bhiŋsikā
Bhiŋsikā
(f.) [fr. bhiŋsa] frightful thing, terror, terrifying omen Mhvs 12, 12 (vividhā bhiŋsikā kari he brought divers terrors to pass). Bhikkhaka
Bhikkhaka
[fr. bhikkhu, Cp. Epic Sk. bhikṣuka & f. bhikṣukī] a beggar, mendicant S i.182 (bh. brāhmaṇa); J vi.59 (v. l. BB. ˚uka); VbhA 327. Bhikkhati
Bhikkhati
[cp. Vedic bhikṣate, old desid. to bhaj; def. Dhtp 13 "yācane"] to beg alms, to beg, to ask for S i.176, 182 (so read for T. bhikkhavo); Dh 266; VbhA 327. -- ppr. med. bhikkhamāna Th 2, 123. Bhikkhā
Bhikkhā
(f.) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhaikṣa of bhikṣ, adj. & nt.] begged food, alms, alms -- begging; food Vin iv.94; Cp i.14; Vv 704 (ekāhā bh. food for one day); Miln 16; PvA 3, 75, 131 (kaṭacchu˚); bhikkhāya carati to go out begging food [cp. Sk. bhaikṣaŋ carati] J iii.82; v.75; PvA 51 & passim. -- subhikkha (nt.) abundance of food D i.11. dubbhikkha (nt.) (& ˚ā f.) scantiness of alms, famine, scarcity of food, adj. famine -- stricken (cp. Sk. durbhikṣaŋ) Vin ii.175; iii.87 (adj.); iv.23 (adj.); S iv.323, 324 (dvīhitikaŋ); A i.160; iii.41; J ii.149, 367; v.193; vi.487; Cp i.33 (adj.); Vism 415 (˚pīḷita), 512 (f. in simile); KhA 218; DhA i.169; ii.153 (f.); iii.437 (˚bhaya).

-- āhāra food received by a mendicant J i.237 ( = bhikkhu -- āhāra?). -- cariyā going about for alms, begging round Sn 700; PvA 146. -- cāra=˚cariyā Mhbv 28. -- paññatti declaration of alms, announcement that food is to be given to the Sangha, a dedication of food Vin i.309. Bhikkhu
Bhikkhu
[cp. later Sk. bhikṣu, fr. bhikṣ] an almsman, a mendicant, a Buddhist monk or priest, a bhikkhu. -> nom. sg. bhikkhu freq. passim; Vin iii.40 (vuḍḍhapabbajita); A i.78 (thera bh., an elder bh.; and nava bh. a young bh.); iii.299 (id.); iv.25 (id.); Sn 276, 360, 411 sq., 915 sq., 1041, 1104; Dh 31, 266 sq., 364 sq., 378; Vv 801; acc. bhikkhuŋ Vin iii.174; Dh 362, & bhikkhunaŋ Sn 87, 88, 513; gen. dat. bhikkhuno A i.274; Sn 221, 810, 961; Dh 373; Pv i.1010; & bhikkhussa A i.230; Vin iii.175; instr. bhikkhunā Sn 389. pl. nom. bhikkhū Vin ii.150; iii.175; D iii.123; Vism 152 (in sim.); VbhA 305 (compared with amaccaputtā) & bhikkhavo Sn 384, 573; Dh 243, 283; acc. bhikkhu Sn p. 78; M i.84; Vv 2210; & bhikkhavo Sn 384, 573; gen. dat. bhikkhūnaŋ Vin iii.285; D iii.264; Sn 1015; Pv ii.17; & bhikkhunaŋ S i.190; Th 1, 1231; instr. bhikkhūhi Vin iii.175; loc. bhikkhūsu A iv.25, & bhikkhusu Th 1, 241, 1207; Dh 73; voc. bhikkhave (a Māgadhī form of nom. bhikkhavaḥ) Vin iii.175; Sn p. 78; VvA 127; PvA 8, 39, 166; & bhikkhavo Sn 280, 385.

There are several allegorical etymologies (definitions) of the word bhikkhu, which occur frequently in the commentaries. All are fanciful interpretations of the idea of what a bhikkhu is or should be, and these qualities were sought and found in the word itself. Thus we mention here the foll. (a) bhikkhu = bhinnakilesa ("one who has broken the stains" i. e. of bad character) VbhA 328; VvA 29, 114, 310; PvA 51. -> (b) Another more explicit expln is "sattannaŋ dhammānaŋ bhinnattā bhikkhu" (because of the breaking or destroying of 7 things, viz. the 7 bad qualities, leading to rebirth, consisting of sakkāyadiṭṭhi, vicikicchā, sīlabbata -- parāmāsa, rāga, dosa, moha, māna). This def. at Nd1 70=Nd2 477a. -- (c) Whereas in a & b the first syllable bhi( -- kkhu) is referred to bhid, in this def. it is referred to bhī (to fear), with the further reference of (bh -- ) ikkh(u) to īkṣ (to see), and bhikkhu defined as "saŋsāre bhayaŋ ikkhati ti bh." Vism 3, 16 (saŋsāre bhayaŋ ikkhaṇatāya vā bhinna -- paṭa -- dharaditāya vā). -- A very comprehensive def. of the term is found at Vbh 245 -- 246, where bhikkhu -- ship is established on the ground of 18 qualities (beginning with samaññāya bhikkhu, paṭiññāya bh., bhikkhatī ti bh., bhikkhako ti bh., bhikkhācariyaŋ ajjhupagato ti bh., bhinna -- paṭa -- dharo ti bh., bhindati pāpake dhamme ti bh., bhinnattā pāpakānaŋ dhammānan ti bh. etc. etc.). -- This passage is expld in detail at VbhA 327, 328. -- Two kinds of bhikkhus are distinguished at Ps i.176; Nd1 465=Nd2 477b, viz. kalyāṇa [ -- ka -- ]puthujjana (a layman of good character) and sekkha (one in training), for which latter the term paṭilīnacara (one who lives in elimination, i. e. in keeping away from the dangers of worldly life) is given at Nd1 130 (on Sn 810).

-- gatika a person who associates with the bhikkhus (in the Vihāra) Vin i.148. -- bhāva state of being a monk, monkhood, bhikkhuship D i.176; Sn p. 102; -- sangha the community of bhikkhus, the Order of friars D iii.208; Sn 403, 1015; Sn p. 101, 102; Miln 209; PvA 19 sq. & passim. Bhikkhuka
Bhikkhuka
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. bhikkhu] belonging to a Buddhist mendicant, a bhikkhu -- , a monk's, or of monks, in sa˚ with monks, inhabited by bhikkhus Vin iv.307, 308; opp. a˚ without bhikkhus, ibid. Bhikkhunī
Bhikkhunī
(f.) [fr. bhikkhu, cp. BSk. bhiksuṇī, but classical Sk. bhikṣukī] an almswoman, a female mendicant, a Buddhist nun D iii.123 sq., 148, 168 sq., 264; Vin iv.224 sq., 258 sq. (˚sangha); S i.128; ii.215 sq., iv.159 sq.; A i.88, 113, 279; ii.132 (˚parisā), 144; iii.109; iv.75; Miln 28; VbhA 498 (dahara˚, story of); VvA 77. Bhinka
Bhinka
[cp. Vedic bhṛnga large bee] the young of an animal, esp. of an elephant, in its property of being dirty (cp. pigs) Vin ii.201 = S ii.269 (bhinka -- cchāpa); J v.418 (with ref. to young cats: "mahā -- biḷārā nelamaṇḍalaŋ vuccati taruṇā bhinka -- cchāpa -- maṇḍalaŋ," T. ˚cchāca˚, vv. ll. bhiñjaka -- cchāca; taruṇa -- bhiga -- cchāpa; bhinga -- cchāja). Bhinkāra
Bhinkāra1
(& ˚gāra) [cp. late Sk. bhṛngāra] a water jar, a (nearly always golden) vase, ceremonial vessel (in donations) Vin i.39 (sovaṇṇa -- maya); D ii.172; A iv.210 = 214 (T. ˚gāra, v. l. ˚kāra); Cp. i.35; J i.85, 93; ii.371; iii.10 (suvaṇṇa˚); Dpvs xi.32; PvA 75; KhA 175 (suvaṇṇa˚; v. l. BB ˚gāra), Sdhp 513 (soṇṇa˚). Bhinkāra
Bhinkāra2
[?] cheers, cries of delight (?) Bu i.35 (+sādhu kāra). Bhinkāra
Bhinkāra3
[cp. Sk. bhṛnga bee, bhṛngaka & bhṛnga -- rājā] a bird: Lanius caerulescens J v.416. Bhijjati
Bhijjati
[Pass. of bhindati, cp. Sk. bhidyate] to be broken, to be destroyed; to break (instr.); pres. bhijjati Dh 148, ppr. bhijjamāna: see phrase abhijjamāne udake under abhijj˚, with which cp. phrase abhejjantyā pathavyā J vi.508, which is difficult to explain (not breaking? for abhijjantī after abhejja & abhedi, and *abhijjanto for abhijjamāna, intrs.?). imper. bhijjatu Th 1, 312. -- praet. 2nd pl. bhijjittha J i.468; aor. abhedi Ud 93 (abhedi kāyo). -- fut. bhijjhissati DA i.266; grd. bhijjitabba J iii.56; on grd. ˚bhijja see pabhindati; grd. bhejja in abhejja not to be broken (q. v.). -- 505 -- Bhijjana
Bhijjana
(nt.) [fr. bhijjati] breaking up, splitting, perishing; destruction J i.392; v.284; vi.11; DhA i.257 (kaṇṇā bhijjan' ākāra -- pattā); ThA 43 (bhijjana -- sabhāva of perishable nature; expln of bhidura Th 2, 35); PvA 41 (˚dhammā destructible, of sankhārā). -- Der. abhijjanaka see sep. Bhitti
Bhitti
(f.) [fr. bhid, cp. *Sk. bhitta fragment, & Class. Sk. bhitti wall] a wall Vin i.48; D ii.85; S ii.103; iv.183; v.218; J i.491; Vism 354 = VbhA 58 (in comparison); ThA 258; VvA 42, 160, 271, 302; PvA 24.

-- khīla a pin (peg) in the wall Vin ii.114, 152. -- pāda the support or lower part of a wall J iv.318. Bhittika
Bhittika
(adj.) [fr. bhitti] having a wall or walls J iv.318 (naḷa ˚ā paṇṇasālā ); vi.10 (catu˚ with 4 walls). Bhidura
Bhidura
(adj.) [fr. bhid] fragile, perishable, transitory Th 2, 35 ( = bhijjana -- sabhāva ThA 43). Bhindati
Bhindati
[bhid, Sk. bhinatti; cp. Lat. findo to split, Goth. beitan = Ger. beissen. Def. at Dhtp 381, 405 by "vidāraṇe" i. e. splitting] to split, break, sever, destroy, ruin. In two bases: *bhid (with der. *bhed) & *bhind. -- (a) *bhid: aor. 3rd sg. abhida (=Sk. abhidat) D ii.107; J iii.29 (see also under abhida); abbhidā J i.247; ii.163, 164. -- fut. bhecchati (Sk. bhetsyati) A i.8. -- ger. bhetvā (Sk. bhittvā) Th 1, 753; Sn 62 (v. l. BB bhitvā). -- grd. bhejja : only neg. abhejja (q. v.). See also der. bheda, bhedana. -- pp. bhinna & Pass. bhijjati. -- (b) *bhind: pres. bhindati Nd1 503; DhA i.125 (kathaŋ bh. to break a promise); Sdhp 47. -- ppr. bhindanto Mhvs 5, 185. -- Pot. bhinde Vism 36 (sīlasaŋvaran). -- fut. bhindissati Vin ii.198. -- aor. bhindi J i.467 (mitta -- bhāvaŋ), & abhindi A iv.312 (atta -- sambhavaŋ). -- ger. bhinditvā J i.425, 490; PvA 12; also in phrase indriyāni bhinditvā breaking in one's senses, i. e. mastering, controlling them J ii.274; iv.104, 114, 190. -- Caus. I. bhedeti: see vi˚. Caus. II. bhindāpeti to cause to be broken J i.290 (sīlaŋ); vi.345 (pokkharaṇiŋ) and bhedāpeti Vin iii.42. -- See also bhindana. Bhindana
Bhindana
(adj.) [fr. bhindati] breaking up, brittle, falling into ruin S i.131 (kāya). Bhindivāla
Bhindivāla
[Non -- Aryan; Epic Sk. bhindipāla spear, but cp Prk bhiṇḍi -- māla & ˚vāla, Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 248; see also Geiger, P.Gr. § 38] a sort of spear J vi.105, 248; Abhp 394. Bhinna
Bhinna
[pp. of bhindati] 1. broken, broken up (lit. & fig.) Sn 770 (nāvā); J i.98 (abhinna magga an unbroken path); iii.167 (uda -- kumbha); PvA 72 (˚sarīra -- cchavi). -- 2. (fig.) split, fallen into dissension, not agreeing D iii.117 = 210, 171. -- Usually in cpds., & often to be translated by prep. "without," e.g. bhinnahirottappa without shame. -- Cp. sam˚.

-- ājīva without subsistence, one who has little means to live on, one who leads a poor mode of living Miln 229 sq. (opp. parisuddh' ājīva); Vism 306. -- nāva ship -- wreeked J iv.159. -- paṭa a torn cloth, in cpd. ˚dhara "wearing a patchwork cloth," i. e. a bhikkhu (see also s. v. bhikkhu) Th 1, 1092. -- plava ship -- wrecked J iii.158. -- manta disobeying (i. e. breaking) a counsel J vi.437. -- sira with a broken head J iv.251. -- sīmā (f.) one who has broken the bounds (of decency) Miln 122. -- sīla one who has broken the norm of good conduct Vism 56. -- hirottappa without shame, shameless J i.207. Bhinnatta
Bhinnatta
(nt.) [fr. bhinna] state of being broken or destroyed, destruction A iv.144. Bhiyyo
Bhiyyo
(Bhīyo, Bhīyyo) [Vedic bhūyas, compar. form fr. bhū, functioning as compar. to bhūri. On relation Sk. bhūyaḥ: P. bhiyyo cp. Sk. jugupsate: P. jigucchati] 1. (adj.) more Sn 61 (dukkham ettha bhiyyo), 584 (id.), 306 (bh. taṇhā pavaḍḍhatha); Dh 313 (bh. rajan ākirate), 349 (bh. taṇhā pavaḍḍhati). -- 2. (adv.) in a higher degree, more, repeatedly, further S i.108 (appaŋ vā bhīyo less or more); Sn 434 (bh. cittaŋ pasīdati); Dh 18 (bh. nandati = ativiya n. C.); Miln 40. -- See also bhiyyoso, yebhuyyena.

-- kamyatā desire for more, greed Vin ii.214. -- bhāva getting more, increase, multiplication D iii.221; Vin iii.45; S v.9, 198, 244; A i.98; v.70; VbhA 289. Bhiyyoso
Bhiyyoso
(adv.) [abl. formation fr. bhiyyo 1] still more, more and more, only in cpd. ˚mattāya [cp. BSk. bhūyasyā mātrāya MVastu ii.345; Divy 263 & passim] exceedingly, abundantly A i.124 = Pug 30 (expld at PugA 212 by "bhiyyoso -- mattāya uddhumāyana -- bhāvo daṭṭhabbo"); J i.61; PvA 50. Bhisa
Bhisa
(nt.) [cp. Vedic bisa, with bh for b: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 40 1a] the sprout (fr. the root) of a lotus, the lotus fibres, lotus plant S i.204; ii.268; J i.100; iv.308.

-- puppha the lotus flower Sn 2 ( = paduma -- puppha SnA 16). -- muḷāla fibres & stalk of the lotus J v.39; Vism 361. Bhisakka
Bhisakka
[cp. Vedic bhiṣaj physician, P. bhesajja medicine & see Geiger, P.Gr. § 631] a physician M i.429; A iii.238; iv.340; It 101; Miln 169, 215, 229, 247 sq., 302; Vism 598 (in simile); DA i.67, 255. Bhisi
Bhisi1
(f.) [cp. Epic Sk. bṛṣī & bṛsī, with bh for b, as in Prk. bhisī, cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 209] a bolster, cushion, pad, roll Vin i.287 sq. (cīvara˚ a robe rolled up); ii.150, 170; iii.90; iv.279. Five kinds are allowed in a Vihāra, viz. uṇṇa -- bhisi, cola˚, vāka˚, tiṇu˚, paṇṇa˚, i. e. bolsters stuffed with wool, cotton -- cloth, bark, grass, or talipot leaves, Vin ii.150 = VbhA 365 (tiṇa˚).

-- bimbohana bolster & pillow Vin i.47; ii.208; DhA i.416; VbhA 365. Bhisi
Bhisi2
[etym.?] a raft Sn 21. -- Andersen, Pali Reader, Glossary s. v. identifies it with bhisi1 and asks: "Could it also mean a sort of cushion, made of twisted grass, used instead of a swimming girdle?" Bhisikā
Bhisikā
(f.) [fr. bhisi1] a small bolster Vin ii.148 (vāta- pāna˚ a roll to keep out draughts); KhA 50 (tāpasa˚, v. l. Kk kapala -- bhitti, see Appendix to Indexes on Sutta Nipāta & Pj.). Bhismā
Bhismā
(f.) [ = bhiŋsā] terror, fright D ii.261 (˚kāya adj. terrific). Bhīta
Bhīta
[pp. of bhāyati] frightened, terrified, afraid Dh 310; J i.168 (niraya -- bhaya˚); ii.110 (maraṇa -- bhaya˚), 129; iv.141 (+tasita); PvA 154, 280 (+tasita). Cp. sam˚. Bhībhaccha
Bhībhaccha
see bībhaccha. Bhīma
Bhīma
(adj.) [fr. bhī, cp. Vedic bhīma] dreadful, horrible, cruel, awful J iv.26; Miln 275.

-- kāya of horrible body, terrific J v.165. -- rūpa of terrifying appearance Th 2, 353. -- sena having a terrifying army J iv.26; vi.201. Also Np. of one of the 5 sons of King Paṇḍu J v.426; Vism 233. Bhīmala
Bhīmala
(adj.) [fr. bhīma] terrifying, horrible, awful J v.43 (T. bhīmūla, but read bhīmala; C. expls by bhiŋsanaka -- mahāsadda). Bhīrati
Bhīrati
Pass. to bharati, only in cpd. ppr. anubhīramāna M iii.123 (chatta: being brought up,or carried behind). Neumann, M. trsl.2 iii.248 translates "über ihm schwebt," & proposes reading (on p. 563) anu -- hīramāna (fr. hṛ). This reading is to be preferred, & is also found at D ii.15. -- 506 -- Bhīru
Bhīru
(adj. n.) [fr. bhī; cp. Vedic bhīru] 1. fearful, i. e. having fear, timid, afraid, shy, cowardly Sdhp 207 (dukkha˚); usually in neg. abhīru not afraid, without fear, combd with anutrāsin: see utrāsin. -- 2. fearful, i. e. causing fear, awful, dreadful, terrible Pv ii.41 (˚dassana terrible to look at). -- 3. (m.) fear, cowardice Sn 437 ( = utrāsa SnA 390).

-- ttāṇa refuge for the fearful, adj. one who protects, those who are in fear A ii.174; It 25; Sdhp 300. Bhīruka
Bhīruka
(adj.) [fr. bhīru] afraid, shy, cowardly, shunning ( -- ˚) Vism 7 (pāpa˚), 645 (jīvitu -- kāma bhīruka -- purisa). Bhīsana
Bhīsana
(adj.) = bhiŋsana (q. v.) Pv iv.35 (v. l. in PvA 251), expld by bhayajanana PvA 251, where C. reading also bhīsana. Bhukka
Bhukka
(adj.) [fr. onomat. root *bhukk, dialectical, cp. Prk. bhukkai to bark, bhukkiya barking, bhukkana dog (Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 209); the root bhukk (bukk) is given by Hemacandra 4, 98 in meaning "garjati" (see P. gajjati), cp. also Prk. bukkaṇa crow] barking, n. a barker, i. e. dog; only in redupl. intens. formation bho -- bhu -- kka (cp. E. bow -- wow), lit. bhu -- bhu -- maker (: kka fr. kṛ?) J vi.354 (C.: bhun -- karaṇa). See also bhussati. Bhunkaraṇa
Bhunkaraṇa
(adj. -- nt.) [bhu+kṛ, see bhukka] making "bhu," i. e. bow -- wow, barking J vi.355 (˚sunakha); v. l. bhu -- bhukka -- sadda -- karaṇa. Bhucca
Bhucca
(adj.) [ger. of bhū in composition, corresponding to *bhūtya>*bhutya, like pecca (*pretya) fr. pra+i. In function equal to bhūta] only in cpd. yathā -- bhuccaŋ (nt. adv.) as it is, that which really is, really ( = yathā bhūtaŋ) Th 2, 143. See under yathā. Bhuja
Bhuja1
(m. & nt.) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhuja m. & bhujā; bhuj, bhujate to bend, lit. "the bender"; the root is expld by koṭilya (koṭilla) at Dhtp 470 (Dhtm 521). See also bhuja3. Idg. *bheng, fr. which also Lat. fugio to flee = Gr. feu/gw, Lat. fuga flight=Sk. bhoga ring, Ohg. bouc; Goth. biugan to bend=Ger. beugen & biegen; Ohg. bogo=E. bow. Semantically cp. Lat. lacertus the arm, i. e. the bend, fr. *leq to bend, to which P. laguḷa a club (q. v. for etym.), with which cp. Lat. lacerta=lizard, similar in connotation to P. bhujaga snake] the arm Sn 48 (expld by Nd2 478 as hattha, hand); 682 (pl. bhujāni); J v.91, 309; vi.64; Bu i.36; Vv 6418. Bhuja
Bhuja2
[fr. bhuñjati2] clean, pure, bright, beautiful J vi.88 (˚dassana beautiful to look at; C. explns by kalyāṇa dassana). Bhuja
Bhuja3
(adj.) [fr. bhuj to bend] bending, crooked, in bhuja -- laṭṭhi betel -- pepper tree J vi.456 (C.: bhujangalatā, perhaps identical with bhujaka?), also in cpd. bhuja -- ga going crooked, i. e. snake Miln 420 (bhujaginda king of snakes, the cobra); Dāvs. 2, 17; also as bhujanga Dāvs 2, 56, & in der. bhujanga -- latā "snake-creeper," i. e. name of the betel -- pepper J vi.457; and bhujangama S i.69. -- Cp. bhogin2. Bhujaka
Bhujaka
[fr. bhuj, as in bhuñjati2; or does it belong to bhuja3 and equal to bhuja -- laṭṭhi?] a fragrant tree, growing (according to Dhpāla) only in the Gandhamādana grove of the Devaloka Vv 355; VvA 162. Bhujissa
Bhujissa
[cp. BSk. bhujiṣya Divy 302, according to Mhvyut § 84 meaning "clean"; thus fr. bhuj (see bhuñjati2) to purify, sort out] 1. (n. m.) a freed slave, freeman; a servant as distinguished from a slave Vin i.93; J ii.313; PvA 112. -- bhujissaŋ karoti to grant freedom to a slave J v.313; vi.389, 546; DhA i.19; ThA 200. -- f. bhujissā Vin ii.271 (in same sequence as bhujissa at Vin i.93). -- 2. (adj.) freeing fr. slavery, productive of freedom D ii.80 (cp. Dial. ii.80); iii.245; S ii.70; iv.272; A iii.36, 132, 213; Vism 222 (with exegesis). Cp. bhoja & bhojaka.

-- bhāva state of being freed fr. slavery, freedom ThA 200. Bhuñjaka
Bhuñjaka
(adj.) [fr. bhuñjati1] eating, one who eats or enjoys, in ˚sammuti definition of "eater," speaking of an eater, declaration or statement of eating VbhA 164. Bhuñjati
Bhuñjati1
[bhuj to Lat. fruor, frūx = E. fruit, frugal etc.; Goth. brūkjan=As. brūkan=Ger. brauchen. The Dhtp 379 (& Dhtm 613) explns bhuj by "pālan' ajjhohāresu," i. e. eating & drinking for the purpose of living] to eat (in general), to enjoy, make use of, take advantage of, use Sn 102, 240, 259, 619; Dh 324; Pug 55. Pot. bhuñjeyya Sn 400; Dh 308, 2nd pl. bhuñjetha Dh 70; Mhvs 25, 113. Imper. 2nd med. bhuñjassa S v.53; 3rd act. bhuñjatu S i.141; Sn 479; bhuñjassu Sn 421; ppr. bhuñjanto J iii.277: bhuñjamāna Th 1, 12; Sn 240. Fut. 1st sg. bhokkhaŋ [Sk. bhoksyāmi] J iv.117. Aor. 1st sg. bhuñjiŋ Miln 47; 3rd sg. bhuñji J iv.370; 3rd pl. abhuñjiŋsu Th 1, 922; abhuñjisuŋ Mhvs 7, 25. Ger. bhutvā J iii.53 (=bhuñjitvā C.); DhA i.182; bhutvāna Sn 128. Grd. bhuñjitabba Mhvs 5, 127. Inf. bhottuñ: see ava˚. -> pp. bhutta. -- Caus. bhojeti (q. v.). Cp. bhoga, bhojana, bhojanīya, bhojja; also Desid. pp. bubbhukkhita; & ābhuñjati. Bhuñjati
Bhuñjati2
[bhuj to purify, cleanse, sift, not given in this meaning by the Dhātupāṭha. Cp. Av. buxti purification buj to clean, also Lat. fungor (to get through or rid of, cp. E. function), Goth. us -- baugjan to sweep; P. paribhuñjati 2, paribhojaniya & vinibbhujati. See Kern, Toev. p. 104, s. v. bhujissa] to clean, purify, cleanse: see bhuja2 and bhujissa, also bhoja & bhojaka. Bhuñjana
Bhuñjana
(nt.) [fr. bhuñjati1] taking food, act of eating, feasting J iv.371 (˚kāraṇa); PvA 184.

-- kāla meal -- time DhA i.346. Bhutta
Bhutta
[pp. of bhuñjati1; Sk. bhukta] 1. (Pass.) eaten, being eaten Sn p. 15; Dh 308; impers. eating Vin iv.82 (bhuttaŋ hoti). Also ˚geha eating house J v.290, and in phrase yathā -- bhuttaŋ bhuñjatha "eat according to eating," i. e. as ought to be eaten, eating in moderation D ii.173 (where Rh. D., Dial. ii.203, trsls "ye shall eat as ye have eaten") = iii.62, 63 (where Rh. D., Dial. iii.64 trsls "enjoy your possessions as you have been wont to do"; see note ibid.). We should favour a translation in the first sense. -- dubbhuttaŋ, indigestible. -- 2. (Med. cp. bhuttar) having eaten, one who has eaten Miln 370 (sace bhutto bhaveyy' âhaŋ); also in phrase bhutta -- pātar -- āsa after having eaten breakfast J ii.273; DhA iv.226.

-- âvasesa the remainder of a meal Vin ii.216. Bhuttar
Bhuttar
[n. ag. fr. bhuj, cp. Sk. bhoktṛ already Vedic & Epic] one who eats or has eaten, or enjoys (cp. bhutta 2) J v.465 (ahaŋ bhuttā bhakkhaŋ ras' uttamaŋ). Bhuttavant
Bhuttavant
(adj.) [bhutta+vant] having eaten, one who has eaten J v.170 ( = kata -- bhatta -- kicca); VvA 244. Bhuttāvin
Bhuttāvin
(adj.) [bhutta+suffix ˚āvin, corresponding to Vedic ˚āyin] having eaten, one who has had a meal; nom. sg. bhuttāvī Vin iv.82; Miln 15 (+onīta -- pattapāṇi); PvA 23 (+pavārita); SnA 58; instr. bhuttāvinā Vin iv.82; gen. dat. bhuttavissa D ii.195. acc. bhuttāviŋ Vin i.213; Sn p. 111 (+onīta -- pattapāṇiŋ); J v.170; nom. pl. bhuttāvī Vin iv.81, & bhuttāvino S iv.289. Bhumma
Bhumma
(adj. -- n.) [fr. bhūmi, Vedic bhūmya] 1. belonging to the earth, earthly, terrestrial; nt. soil, ground, floor Sn 222 (bhūtāni bhummāni earthly creatures, contrasted with creatures in the air, antalikkhe), 236 (id.); Sdhp 420 (sabba -- bhummā khattiyā). pl. bhummā the earthly ones, i. e. the gods inhabiting the earth, esp. tree gods (Yakkhas) Vv 842 ( = bhumma -- deva VvA 334). -- nt. ground: Pv ii.102 (yāva bhummā down to the ground); v. l. BB bhūm(i). -- 2. the locative case KhA 106, 111, 224; SnA 140, 210, 321, 433; PvA 33.

-- attharaṇa "earth -- spread," a ground covering, mat, carpet Vin i.48; ii.208; iv.279. -- antara "earth -- occasion," i. e. (1) sphere of the earth, plane of existence Miln 163; DhsA 296. -- (2) in ˚pariccheda discussion concerning the earth, i. e. cosmogony DhsA 3. -- antalikkha earthly and celestial, over earth & sky (of portents) Miln 178. The form would correspond to Sk. *bhaum -- āntarīkṣa. -- jāla "terrestrial net (of insight) gift of clear sight extending over the globe (perhaps to find hidden treasures) SnA 353 (term of a vijjā, science or magic art). Cp. bhūrikamma & bhūrivijjā. -- ṭṭha (a) put into the earth, being in the earth, found on or in the earth, earthly Vin iii.47. (b) standing on the earth Dh 28. -- (c) resting on the earth Miln 181. Also as ˚ka living on earth, earthly (of gods) J iii.87. -- deva a terrestrial deva or fairy A iv.118; Ps ii.149; VbhA 12; DhA i.156; VvA 334; PvA 5, 43, 55, 215, 277. -- devatā = ˚deva J iv.287 (=yakkha); KhA 120. -- 507 -- Bhummi
Bhummi1
(f.) [fr. bhumma] that which belongs to the ground, i. e. a plane (of existence), soil, stage (as t.t. in philosophy) DhsA 277 (˚y -- āpatti), 339 (id.), 985 (dukkha˚), 1368, 1374 sq. (see Dhs trsl.2 231). Bhummi
Bhummi2
[old voc. of bhumma] a voc. of friendly address "my (dear) man" (lit. terrestrial) Vin ii.304 ( = piyavacanaŋ Bdhgh). Bhuyya
Bhuyya
the regular P. representative of Sk. bhūyas (compar.); for which usually bhiyya (q. v.). Only in cpd. yebhuyyena (q. v.). Bhuvi
Bhuvi
see bhū. Bhusa
Bhusa1
[cp. Vedic busa (nt.) & buśa (m.)] chaff, husks A i.241 (˚āgāra chaff -- house); Dh 252 (opuṇāti bhusaŋ to sift husks); Ud 78; Pv iii.41; iii.107; VvA 47 (tiṇa˚ litter). Bhusa
Bhusa2
(adj.) [cp. Vedic bhṛśa] strong, mighty, great Dh 339 (taṇhā = balavā DhA iv.48); J v.361 (daṇḍa= daḷha, balavā C.). -- nt. bhusaŋ (adv.) much, exceedingly, greatly, vehemently. In cpds. bhusaŋ˚ & bhusa˚. -- S i.69; J iii.441; iv.11; v.203 (bhusa -- dassaneyya); vi.192; Vv 69; Pv 338; iv.77; Miln 346; SnA 107 ("verbum intensivum"); Sdhp 289. Bhusati, Bhussati
Bhusati,
Bhussati [perhaps a legitimate form for Sk. bhaṣate (see P. bhasati), with u for a, so that the suggested correction of bhusati to bhasati (see under bhasati) is unfounded] to bark DA i.317 (bhusati; vv. ll. bhussati & bhūsati); DhA i.171, 172. -- See also bhasati & bhukka; -- pp. bhusita. Bhusikā
Bhusikā
(f.) [fr. bhusa1] chaff A i.242; Vin ii.181. Bhusita
Bhusita
[pp. of bhusati] barking J iv.182 (˚sadda, barking, noise). See also bhasita. Bhuseti
Bhuseti
[Denom. fr. bhusa2 = *bhṛśayati; but not certain, may have to be read bhūseti, to endeavour, cp. Sk. bhūṣati] to make strong, to cause to grow (?) J v.218 (C. explns by "bhusaŋ karoti, vaḍḍheti" p. 224). Bhū
Bhū1
[fr. bhū] (adj.) being, (n.) creature, living being in pāṇa -- bhū a living being (a breathing being) J v.79 ( = pāṇa -- bhūta C.). Bhū
Bhū2
(f.) [fr. bhū, otherwise bhūmi] the earth; loc. bhuvi according to Kaccāyana; otherwise bhuvi is aor. 3rd sg.; of bhū: see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 516; Geiger, Pali Gr. § 865. Bhūkuṭi
Bhūkuṭi
(f.) [a different spelling of bhakuṭi, q. v. -- Cp. Sk. bhṛkuti & bhrukuṭi] frown, anger, superciliousness M i.125 (v. l. bhakuṭi & bhā˚); J v.296. Bhūja
Bhūja
[cp. late Sk. bhūrja, with which related Lat. fraxinus ash, Ags. beorc = E. birch, Ger. birke] the Bhūrja tree, i. e. a kind of willow J v.195, 405 (in both places=ābhujī), 420. Bhūta
Bhūta
[pp. of bhavati, Vedic etc. bhūta] grown, become; born, produced; nature as the result of becoming. -> The (exegetical) definition by Bdhgh of the word bhūta is interesting. He (at MA i.31) distinguishes the foll. 7 meanings of the term: (1) animate Nature as principle, or the vital aggregates (the 5 Khandhas), with ref. M i.260; (2) ghosts (amanussā) Sn 222; (3) inanimate Nature as principle, or the Elements (the 4 dhātus) S iii.101 (mahābhūtā); (4) all that exists, physical existence in general (vijjamānaŋ) Vin iv.25 (bhūtaŋ); (5) what we should call a simple predicative use, is exemplified by a typical dogmatic example, viz. "kālaghaso bhūto," where bhūta is given as meaning khīṇāsava (Arahant) J ii.260; (6) all beings or specified existence, animal kingdom (sattā) D ii.157; (7) the vegetable kingdom, plants, vegetation (rukkh' ādayo) Vin iv.34 (as bhūta -- gāma). -- Meanings: 1. bhūtā & bhūtāni (pl.) beings, living beings, animate Nature Sn 35 (expld at Nd2 479 as 2 kinds, viz. tasā & thāvarā, movable & immovable; S. ii.47 (K.S. ii.36) mind and body as come -- to -- be; Dh 131 (bhūtāni), 405; M i.2 sq. (paṭhavī, āpo etc., bhūtā, devā, Pajāpatī etc.), 4; MA i.32. The pl. nt. bhūtāni is used as pl. to meaning 2; viz. inanimate Nature, elements, usually enumd under term mahā -- bhūtāni. -- 2. (nt.) nature, creation, world M i.2 (bhūte bhūtato sañjānāti recognises the beings from nature, i. e. from the fact of being nature); DhsA 312 (˚pasāda -- lakkhaṇa, see Expos. 409). See cpds. ˚gāma, ˚pubba (?). -- 3. (nt. adj.) that which is, i. e. natural, genuine, true; nt. truth; neg. abhūta falsehood, lie Sn 397; PvA 34. See cpds. ˚bhāva, ˚vacana, ˚vāda. -- 4. a supernatural being, ghost, demon, Yakkha; pl. bhūtā guardian genii (of a city) J iv.245. See cpds. ˚vijja, ˚vejja. -- 5. ( -- ˚) pp. in predicative use (cp. on this meaning Bdhgh's meaning No. 5, above): (a) what has been or happened; viz. mātu -- bhūtā having been his mother PvA 78; abhūtapubbaŋ bhūtaŋ what has never happened before happened (now) DA i.43 (in expln of abbhuta); -- (b) having become such & such, being like, acting as, being, quâsi (as it were), consisting of, e. g. andha˚ blind, as it were J vi.139; aru˚ consisting of wounds DhA iii.109; udapāna˚ being a well, a well so to speak PvA 78; opāna˚ acting as a spring A iv.185; hetu˚ as reason, being the reason PvA 58; cp. cakkhu˚ having become an eye of wisdom. Sometimes bhūta in this use hardly needs to be translated at all.

-- kāya body of truth DhA i.11. -- gāma vegetation, as trees, plants, grass, etc. Under bhūtagāma Bdhgh understands the 5 bīja -- jātāni (5 groups of plants springing from a germinative power: see bīja), viz. mūla -- bījaŋ, khandha˚, phala˚, agga˚, bīja˚. Thus in C. on Vin iv.34 (the so -- called bhūtagāma -- sikkhāpada, quoted at DhA iii.302 & SnA 3); cp. M iii.34; J v.46; Miln 3, 244. -- gāha possession by a demon Miln 168 (cp. Divy 235). -- ṭṭhāna place of a ghost KhA 170. -- pati (a) lord of beings J v.113 (of Inda); vi.362 (id.); Vv 641 (id.). (b) lord of ghosts, or Yakkhas J vi.269 (of Kuvera). -- pubba (a) as adj. ( -- ˚) having formerly been so & so, as mātā bhūtapubbo satto, pitā etc., in untraced quotation at Vism 305; also at SnA 359 (Bhagavā kuṇāla -- rājā bhūtapubbo). -- (b) as adv. (bhūtapubbaŋ) meaning: before all happening, before creation, at a very remote stage of the world, in old times, formerly Vin ii.201; D i.92; ii.167, 285, 337; M i.253; iii.176; S i.216, 222, 227; iv.201; v.447; A iv.136 = Vism 237; A iv.432; J i.394; DhA i.56. -- bhavya past and future D i.18. -- bhāva truthful character, neg. a˚ PvA 14. -- vacana statement of reality or of the truth SnA 336. -- vādin truthful, speaking the truth M i.180; D iii.175; Pug 58; a˚ untruthful Dh 306; J ii.416. -- vikāra a natural blemish, fault of growth, deformity SnA 189 (opp. nibbikāra). -- vijjā knowledge of demons, exorcism D i.9; Dh i.93, cp. Dial. i.17). -- vejja a healer of harm caused by demons, an exorcist Vin iv.84; J ii.215; iii.511; Miln 23. -- 508 -- Bhūtatta
Bhūtatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. bhūta] the fact of having grown, become or being created (i. e. being creatures or part of creation) Vism 310 (in def. of bhūtā); MA i.32 (id.). Bhūtanaka
Bhūtanaka
[cp. *Sk. bhūtṛna] a fragrant grass; Andropogon schoenanthus J vi.36 ( = phanijjaka); Vism 543 (so v. l. for T. bhūtinaka). Bhūtika
Bhūtika
(adj.) ( -- ˚) in cpd. cātummahā˚ belongs to the whole expression, viz. composed of the 4 great elements M i.515. Bhūnaha
Bhūnaha
[difficult to expln; is it an old misspelling for bhūta+gha? The latter of han?] a destroyer of beings Sn 664 (voc. bhūnahu, expld by SnA 479 as "bhūti -- hanaka vuddhi -- nāsaka"; vv. ll. bhūnahaṭa, bhūnahoṭa, bhūhata, all showing the difficulty of the archaic word); J v.266 (pl. bhūnahuno, expld by C. 272 as "isīnaŋ ativattāro attano vaḍḍhiyā hatattā bh."). Cp. M i.502 ("puritanical" suggested by Lord Chalmers). Bhūma
Bhūma
( -- ˚) [ = bhūmi] 1. (lit.) ground, country, district S iii.5 (pacchā˚ the western district). -- 2. (fig.) ground, reason for, occasion; stage, step Sn 896 (avivāda˚ ground of harmony; according to SnA 557 Ep. of Nibbāna). Bhūmaka
Bhūmaka
(& ˚ika) (adj.) (only -- ˚) [from bhūma, or bhūmi] 1. having floors or stories (of buildings) as dve˚ pāsāda DhA i.414; pañca˚ pāsāda a palace with 5 stories J i.58, 89; satta˚ with 7 stories (pāsāda) DhA ii.1, 260. The form ˚ika at DhA i.182 (dve˚ geha). -> 2. belonging to a place or district, as jāti˚ from the land of (their) birth M i.147; pacchā˚ from the western country S iv.312 (brāhmaṇā). -- 3. being on a certain plane or in a certain state, as paritta˚ & mahā˚ Vbh 340 te˚ in 3 planes SnA 4 (of the 5 Khandhas), 510 (˚vaṭṭa); DhA i.36 (kusala), 305 (˚vaṭṭa); iv.69 (tebhūmaka -- vaṭṭa -- sankhātaŋ Māra -- bandhanaŋ), 72 (dhammā); catu˚ in 4 planes DhsA 296 (kusala); DhA i.35 (citta). The form ˚ika at DhA i.288 (with ref. to citta). Bhūmi
Bhūmi
(f.) [cp. Vedic bhūmi, Av. būmiš soil, ground, to bhū, as in bhavati, cp. Gr. fu/sis etc. See bhavati] 1. (lit.) ground, soil, earth Vin ii.175; Sn 418 (yāna˚ carriage road); Pv i.1014≈; SnA 353 (heṭṭhā -- bhūmiyaŋ under the earth); DhA i.414 (id., opp. upari -- bhūmiyaŋ). -- 2. place, quarter, district, region M i.145 (jāti˚ district of one's birth); Sn 830 (vighāta˚); Nd2 475 (danta˚); DhA i.213 (āpāna˚); PvA 80 (susāna˚). -- uyyāna˚ garden ( -- place or locality) Vv 6419; Pv ii.129; J i.58. -- 3. (fig.) ground, plane, stage, level; state of consciousness, Vin. i.17; Vbh 322 sq.; Vism 126, 442 (with ref. to the 4 Paṭisambhidā, as sekha -- bhūmi & asekha -- bhūmi), 517 (paññā˚ -- niddesa). Usually -- ˚: indriya˚ Nett 192; dassana˚ plane of insight Nett 8, 14, 50; sukha˚ ground for happiness Dhs 984 (cp. DhsA 214). -- bhūmi -- ttaya the 3 stages, viz. kāmâvacara, rūpâvacara, lokuttara Vism 493. -- pl. bhūmiyo Ps ii.205 = Vism 384 (appld to the 4 jhānas); purisa˚ (aṭṭha p. bh. eight stages of the individual; viz. manda -- bhūmi, khiḍḍā˚, vīmaŋsana˚, ujugata˚, sekha˚, samaṇa˚, jina˚, panna˚, or as trsld by Rh. D. in Dial. i.72, under "eight stages of a prophet's existence"; babyhood, playtime, trial time, erect time, learning time, ascetic time, prophet time & prostrate time. Cp. the 10 decades of man's life, as given by Bdhgh at Vism 619). -- Bdhgh, when defining the 2 meanings of bhūmi as "mahā -- paṭhavī" and as "cittuppāda" (rise of thought) had in view the distinction between its literal & figurative meaning. But this def. (at DhsA 214) is vague & only popular. -- An old loc. of bhūmi is bhumyā, e. g. J i.507; v.84. Another form of bhūmi at end of cpds. is bhūma (q. v.).

-- kampa shaking of the ground, earthquake Miln 178. -- gata "gone into the soil," i. e. hiding, stored away J i.375. -- ghana thick soil SnA 149, cp. paṭhavi -- ghana ibid. 146. -- tala ground ( -- surface) PvA 186. -- padesa place or region upon the earth J vi.95. -- pappaṭaka outgrowths in the soil D iii.87 = Vism 418. -- pothana beating the ground DhA i.171. -- bhāga division of the earth, district J i.109; v.200; VvA 125; PvA 29, 154. -- laddh'(uppanna) acquired on a certain stage of existence SnA 4. -- saya lying or sleeping on the ground DhA ii.61. Bhūri
Bhūri1
(f.) [cp. late Sk. bhūr] the earth; given as name for the earth (paṭhavi) at Ps ii.197; see also def. at DhsA 147. Besides these only in 2 doubtful cpds., both resting on demonology, viz. bhūrikamma D i.12, expld as "practices to be observed by one living in a bhūrighara or earth -- house" (?) DA i.97, but cp. Vedic bhūri -- karman "much effecting"; and bhūrivijjā D i.9, expld as "knowledge of charms to be pronounced by one living in an earth -- house" (?) DA i.93. See Dial. i.18, 25. The meaning of the terms is obscure; there may have been (as Kern rightly suggests: see Toev. s. v.) quite a diff. popular practice behind them, which was unknown to the later Commentator. Kern suggests that bhūri -- vijjā might be a secret science to find gold (digging for it: science of hidden treasures), and ˚kamma might be "making gold" (alchemistic science). Perhaps the term bhumma -- jāla is to be connected with these two. Bhūri
Bhūri2
(adj.) [cp. Vedic bhūri] wide, extensive, much, abundant, DhsA 147 (in def. of the term bhūri1, i. e. earth); otherwise only in cpds.: ˚pañña (adj.) of extensive wisdom, very wise S iv.205; Sn 346, 792, 1097, 1143; Pv iii.55; Ps ii.197 ("paṭhavī -- samāya vitthatāya vipulāya paññāya samannāgato ti bhūripañño," with other definitions); Nd1 95 (same expln as under Ps ii.197); Nd2 415 C. (id.). ˚paññāṇa (adj.) same as ˚pañña Sn 1136 ≈ (cp. Nd2 480). ˚medhasa (adj.) very intelligent S i.42, 174; iii.143; A iv.449; Sn 1131, 1136; Th 1, 1266; Pv iii.77. Bhūrī
Bhūrī
(f.) [is it original? Cp. BSk. bhūri in same sense at Lal. V. 444, 541; MVastu iii.332] knowledge, understanding, intelligence Dh 282, quoted at DhsA 76 (expld as termed so because it is as widespread as the earth; Dhs 16; DhA iii.421; same expln at DhsA 148); J vi.415. Bhūsana
Bhūsana
(nt.) [fr. bhūṣ] ornament, decoration Vism 10 (yatino -- sīla -- bhūsana -- bhūsitā contrasted to rājāno muttāmaṇi -- vibhūsitā). Bhūsā
Bhūsā
(f.) [fr. bhūṣ] ornament, decoration, only in cpd. bhūsa -- (read bhūsā -- )dassaneyya beautiful as an ornament Pv iii.32. Bhūseti
Bhūseti
[Caus. of bhūṣ, to be busy; in meaning "to adorn" etc. Expld at Dhtp. 315, 623 by "alankāra"] to adorn, embellish, beautify. Only in pp. bhūsita adorned with ( -- ˚) Pv ii.952, 127; iii.35; J vi.53. Cp. vi˚. Bheka
Bheka
[cp. Vedic bheka, onomat.] a frog Th 1, 310; J iii.430; iv.247; vi.208. Bhecchati
Bhecchati
is fut. of bhindati (q. v.). Bhejja
Bhejja
(adj.) [grd. of bhindati] to be split, only in neg. form abhejja not to be split or sundered Sn 255; J i.263; iii.318; Pug 30; Miln 160, 199. Bhejjanaka
Bhejjanaka
(adj.) [fr. bhejja] breakable; like bhejja only in neg. form abhejjanaka indestructible J i.393. Bheṇḍi
Bheṇḍi
[perhaps identical with & only wrong spelling for bheṇḍu = kaṇḍu2] a kind of missile used as a weapon, arrow Vin iii.77 (where enumd with asi, satti & laguḷa in expln of upanikkhipana). -- 509 -- Bheṇḍu
Bheṇḍu
[with v. l. geṇḍu, of uncertain reading & meaning. Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 107 gives giṇḍu & remarks that this cannot be derived fr. kaṇḍuka (although kaṇḍu may be considered as gloss of bheṇḍu at Th 1, 164: see kaṇḍu2), but belongs with Prk. geṇḍui play & P. geṇḍuka and the originally Sk. words genduka, ginduka, geṇḍu, geṇḍuka to a root gid, giḍ, Prk. giṇḍai to play. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 90 says: "I am inclined to read geṇḍu in all cases & to compare it with geḍuka & geṇḍuka a ball"] a ball, bead; also a ball -- shaped ornament or turret, cupola Th 1, 164 (see kaṇḍu2) J i.386 (also ˚maya ball -- shaped); iii.184 (v. l. geṇḍu). Bheṇḍuka
Bheṇḍuka1
[in all probability misreading for geṇḍuka. The v. l. is found at all passages. Besides this occur the vv. ll. keṇḍuka ( = kaṇḍuka?) & kuṇḍika] a ball for playing J iv.30, 256; v.196; vi.471; DhsA 116. See also geṇḍuka. Bheṇḍuka
Bheṇḍuka2
[fr. bheṇḍu, identical with bheṇḍuka1] a knob, cupola, round tower J i.2 (mahā -- bh˚ -- pamāṇa). Bhettar
Bhettar
[n. ag. fr. bhid] a breaker, divider A v.283. Bheda
Bheda
[fr. bhid, cp. Ved. & Class. Sk. bheda in same meanings] 1. breaking, rending, breach, disunion, dissension Vism 64 sq. (contrasted with ānisaŋsa), 572 sq. (with ref. to upādāna & bhava); VbhA 185 (id.); Sdhp 66, 457, 463. -- mithu˚ breaking of alliance D ii.76; J iv.184; Kvu 314. -- vacī˚ breaking of [the rule as to] speech Miln 231. -- sangha˚ disunion in the Sangha Vin ii.203. -- sīla˚ breach of morality J v.163. -- abl. bhedā after the destruction or dissolution in phrase kāyassa bhedā param maraṇā, i. e. after the breaking up of the body & after death: see kāya I. e. & cp. D iii.52, 146 sq., 258; Dh 140; Pug 51. -- 2. ( -- ˚) sort, kind, as adj. consisting of, like J ii.438; vi.3 (kaṭuk' ādi˚); DhA iii.14 (kāya -- sucarit' -- ādi˚ -- bhadra -- kammāni); SnA 290 (Avīci -- ādi -- ˚ niraya).

-- kara causing division or dissension Vin ii.7; iii.173; v.93 (cp. Vin i.354 & Vin. Texts iii.266 for the 18 errors in which the Sangha is brought into division by bhikkhus who are in the wrong); DhsA 29 (aṭṭhārasa bheda -- kara -- vatthūni the 18 causes of dissension). Bhedaka
Bhedaka
(adj. n.) [fr. bheda] breaking, dividing, causing disunion; (m.) divider Vin ii.205; J vi.382. -- nt. adv. bhedakaŋ, as in ˚nakha in such a way as to break a nail DA i.37. Bhedana
Bhedana
(nt.) [fr. bhid, as in Caus. bhedeti] 1. breaking (open), in puṭa˚ breaking of the seed -- boxes (of the Pāṭali plant), idiomatic for "merchandise" Miln 1. See under puṭa. -- 2. (fig.) breach, division, destruction A iv.247; Dh 138; Bu ii.7; J i.467 (mittabhāva˚).

-- dhamma subject to destruction, fragile, perishable A iv.386; J i.146, 392; ThA 254. -- saŋvattanika leading to division or dissension Vin iii.173. Bhedāpeti & Bhedeti
Bhedāpeti
& Bhedeti are Causatives of bhindati (q. v.). Bheraṇḍaka
Bheraṇḍaka
[cp. *Sk. bheruṇḍa] a jackal J v.270; the nom. probably formed after the acc. in phrase bheraṇḍakaŋ nadati to cry after the fashion of, or like a jackal A i.187. Bherava
Bherava
(adj.) [fr. bhīru, cp. Epic Sk. bhairava] fearful, terrible, frightful Th 1, 189; Sn 959, 965, 984; Nd1 370, 467; J vi.520; Dpvs 17, 100; Pgdp 26, 31. -- bahu˚ very terrible A iii.52; stricken with terror J vi.587. -- (n) terror, combd with bhaya fear & dismay M i.17; A iv.291; v.132; Th 1, 367, 1059. -- pahīna -- bhayabherava having left behind (i. e. free from) fear & terror S iii.83.

-- rāva cry of terror Miln 254. Bheri
Bheri
(f.) [cp. Epic Sk. bherī] a kettle -- drum (of large size; DhsA 319 distinguishes 2 kinds: mahā˚ & paṭaha˚) D i.79; A ii.185; Vv 8110; J vi.465; DhA i.396; Sdhp 429. -- issara˚ the drum of the ruler or lord J i.283; paṭaha˚ kettle -- drum Dpvs 16, 14; DhsA 319; PvA 4; yāma˚ ( -- velāya) (at the time) when the drum sounds the watch J v.459. -- bheriŋ vādeti to sound the drum J i.283. -- bheriyo vādentā (pl.) beating (lit. making sound) the drums J ii.110. bheriñ carāpeti to make the drum go round, i. e. to proclaim by beat of drum J v.41; vi.10.

-- caraṇa the carrying round of the drum (in proclamations), in cpds. ˚magga the proclamation road DhA ii.43; & ˚vīthi id. DhA ii.45. -- tala the head of the drum Vism 489 (in comparison); VbhA 80 (id.). -- paṇava drum & tabor (in battle) A ii.117. -- vāda drum -- sound, fig. for a loud voice PvA 89 (bherivādena akkosati rails like drum). -- vādaka a drummer J i.283. -- saññā sign of the drum DhA i.396. -- sadda sound of the drum J i.283. Bhesajja
Bhesajja
(nt.) [cp. Vedic bhaiṣajya = bheṣaja, fr. bhiṣaj; see also P. bhisakka] a remedy, medicament, medicine Vin i.278; D ii.266; M i.30; SnA 154, 446; Sdhp 393. -- bhesajjaŋ karoti to treat with a medicine DhA i.25; mūla -- bhesajjāni the principal medicines Miln 43; pañca bhesajjāni the 5 remedies (allowed to bhikkhus) DhA i.5.

-- kapālaka medicine bowl VbhA 361. -- sikkhāpada the medicine precepts VbhA 69. Bhesma
Bhesma
(adj.) [cp. Vedic bhīṣma of which the regular P. form is bhiŋsa, of bhī; bhesma would correspond to a form *bhaiṣma] terrible, awful Vin ii.203 = It 86 ("bhesmā hi udadhī mahā," so read for Vin. bhasmā, with v. l. bhesmā, and for It tasmā, with v. l. BB bhesmā, misunderstood by ed. -- Bdhgh Vin ii.325 on Vin. passage expls by bhayānaka); J v.266; vi.133 (v. l. bhasma). Bho
Bho
(indecl.) [voc. of bhavant, cp. Sk. bhoḥ which is the shortened voc. bhagoḥ of Vedic bhagavant; cp. as to form P. āvuso>Sk. āyuṣmaḥ of āyuṣmant] a familiar term of address (in speaking to equals or inferiors): sir, friend, you, my dear; pl. sirs D i.88, 90, 93, 111; M i.484; Sn 427, 457, 487; with voc. of noun: bho purisa my dear man J i.423; bho brahmaṇā oh ye brahmans J ii.369. Double bho bho DhA iv.158.

-- vādika = ˚vādin Nd1 249. -- vādin a brahman, i. e. one who addresses others with the word "bho," implying some superiority of the speaker; name given to the brahman, as proud of his birth, in contrast to brāhmaṇa, the true brahman Sn 620; Dh 396; J vi.211, 214; DhA iv.158. Bhokkhaŋ
Bhokkhaŋ
is fut. of bhuñjati (q. v.). Bhokkhi
Bhokkhi
at VbhA 424, in phrase sucikāmo bh. brāhmaṇo is a kind of Desider, formation fr. bhuj˚ (bhuñj), appearing as *bhukṣ = bhokkh (cp. bhokkhaŋ), with ending ˚in; meaning "wishing to eat." It corresponds to Sk. bhoktu -- kāma. Cp. also n. ag. bhoktṛ of *bhukṣ, enjoyer, eater. P. bhokkhi might be Sk. bhoktrī, if it was not for the latter being f. The word is a curiosity. Bhoga
Bhoga1
[fr. bhuñj: see bhuñjati] 1. enjoyment A iv.392 (kāmaguṇesu bh.). -- 2. possession, wealth D iii.77; Sn 301, 421; Dh 139, 355; Pug 30, 57; Sdhp 86, 228, 264. -- appa˚ little or no possession Sn 114.

-- khandha a mass of wealth, great possessions D ii.86 (one of the 5 profits accruing from virtue). -- gāma "village of revenue," a tributary village, i. e. a village which has to pay tribute or contributions (in food etc.) to the owner of its ground. The latter is called gāmabhojaka or gāmapati "landlord" J ii.135. Cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung 71, 112. -- cāgin giving riches, liberal A iii.128.. -- pārijuñña loss of property or possessions VvA 101. -- mada pride or conceit of wealth VbhA 466. -- vāsin, as f. vāsinī "living in property," i. e. to be enjoyed or made use of occasionally, one of the 10 kinds of wives: a kept woman Vin iii.139, 140; cp. M i.286. -- 510 -- Bhoga
Bhoga2
[fr. bhuj to bend, cp. bhuja3 & Sk. bhoga id. Hāla- yudha 3, 20] the coil of a snake J iii.58. See also nib˚. Bhogatā
Bhogatā
( -- ˚) (f.) [abstr. fr. bhoga] condition of prosperity, having wealth or riches, in uḷāra˚ being very rich, M iii.38. Bhogavant
Bhogavant
(adj.) [fr. bhoga] one who has possessions or supplies, wealthy J v.399; Mhvs 10, 20; Sdhp 511. Bhogika
Bhogika
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. bhoga] having wealth or power, in antara˚ an intermediate aristocrat Vin iii.47. Bhogin
Bhogin1
( -- ˚) (adj. -- n.) [fr. bhoga] enjoying, owning, abounding in, partaking in or devoted to (e. g. to pleasure, kāma˚) D ii.80; iii.124; S i.78; iv.331, 333; A iii.289; v.177. -- m. owner, wealthy man M i.366. Bhogin
Bhogin2
(adj.) [fr. bhuj, see bhuja3] having coils, of a snake J iii.57; vi.317. Bhogiya
Bhogiya
is diaeretic form of Sk. bhogya = P. bhogga2 with which identical in meaning 2, similar also to bhogika. Bhogga
Bhogga1
(adj.) [fr. bhuj to bend, pp. corresp. to Sk. bhugna] bent, crooked M i.88; D ii.22; A i.138; J iii.395. Bhogga
Bhogga2
(adj.) [grd. of bhuñj to enjoy, thus = Sk. bhogya] 1. to be enjoyed or possessed, n. property, possession, in cpd. rāja˚ (of an elephant) to be possessed by a king, serviceable to a king, royal D i.87; A i.244, 284; ii.113, 170; J ii.370; DhA i.313 (royal possessions in general); DA i.245. Cp. BSk. rājabhogya MVastu i.287. See in detail under rāja -- bhogga. -- naggabhogga one who possesses nothing but nakedness, i. e. an ascetic J iv.160; v.75; vi.225. -- 2. (identical with bhogika & bhogiya & similar in meaning to bhojarājā) royal, of royal power, entitled to the throne, as a designation of "class" at Vin iii.221 in sequence rājā rāja -- bhoggā brāhmaṇā, etc., where it takes the place of the usual khattiya "royal noble." Bhoja
Bhoja
[lit. grd. of bhuñjati2, to be sorted out, to be raised from slavery; thus also meaning "dependence," "training," from bhuj, to which belongs bhujissa] one who is getting trained, dependent, a freed slave, villager, subject. Only in cpds. like bhojisiyaŋ [bhoja+isi+ ya = issariya] mastery over dependence, i. e. independence S i.44, 45; bhojājānīya a well -- trained horse, a thoroughbred J i.178, 179; bhojaputta son of a villager J v.165; bhojarājā head of a village ( -- district) a subordinate king Sn 553=Th 1, 823. -- In the latter phrase however it may mean "wealthy" kings, or "titled" kings (khattiyā bh -- r., who are next in power to and serve on a rājā cakkavatti). The phrase is best taken as one, viz. "the nobles, royal kings." It may be a term for "vice -- kings" or substitute -- kings, or those who are successors of the king. The expln at SnA 453 takes the three words as three diff. terms and places bhojā= bhogiyā as a designation of a class or rank (=bhogga). Neumann in his trsln of Sn has "Königstämme, kühn and stolz," free but according to the sense. The phrase may in bhoja contain a local designation of the Bhoja princes (N. of a tribe), which was then taken as a special name for "king" (cp. Kaiser> Caesar, or Gr. basileu/s). With the wording "khattiyā bhoja -- rājāno anuyuttā bhavanti te" cp. M iii.173: "paṭirājāno te rañño cakkavattissa anuyuttā bhavanti," and A v.22: "kuḍḍarājāno" in same phrase. -- Mrs. Rh. D. at Brethren, p. 311, trsls "nobles and wealthy lords." Bhojan
Bhojan
is ppr. of bhojeti, feeding J vi.207. Bhojaka
Bhojaka
[fr. bhuj, bhojeti] 1. one who provides food, attendant at meals J v.413. -- 2. (is this from bhuñjati2 & bhujissa?) one who draws the benefit of something, owner, holder, in gāma˚ landholder, village headman (see Dial. i.108 n. & Fick, Sociale Gliederung 104 sq.) J i.199, 354, 483; ii.135 ( = gāmapati, gāmajeṭṭhaka); v.413; DhA i.69. Cp. bhojanaka. Bhojana
Bhojana
(nt.) [fr. bhuñjati] food, meal, nourishment in general J ii.218; iv.103, 173; J i.178; iv.223; Sn 102, 128, 242, 366, 667; Dh 7, 70; Pug 21, 55; Miln 370; Vism 69, 106; Sdhp 52, 388, 407. Some similes with bhojana see J.P.T.S. 1907, 119. -- tika˚ food allowed for a triad (of reasons) Vin ii.196. dub˚ having little or bad food J ii.368; DhA iv.8. paṇīta˚ choice & plentiful meals Vin iv.88. sabhojane kule in the family in which a bhikkhu has received food Vin iv.94. -- bhojane mattaññu(tā) knowing proper measure in eating (& abstr.); eating within bounds, one of the 4 restricttions of moral life S ii.218; A i.113 sq.; Nd1 483. -> 5 bhojanāni or meals are given at Vin iv.75, viz. niccabhatta˚, salākabhatta˚, pakkhikaŋ, uposathikaŋ, pāṭipadikaŋ. -- As part of the regulations concerning food, hours of eating etc. in the Sangha there is a distinction ascribed to the Buddha between gaṇabhojanaŋ, parampara -- bhojanaŋ, atirittabhojanaŋ, anatirittabhojanaŋ mentioned at Kvu ii.552; see Vin iv.71, 77. All these ways of taking food are forbidden under ordinary circumstances, but allowed in the case of illness (gilāna -- samaye), when robes are given to the Bhikkhus (cīvarasamaye) and several other occasions, as enumd at Vin iv.74. -- The distinction is made as follows: gaṇabhojanaŋ said when 4 bhikkhus are invited to partake together of one of the five foods; or food prepared as a joint meal Vin iv.74; cp. ii.196; v.128, 135; paramparabhojanaŋ said when a bhikkhu, invited to partake of one of the 5 foods, first takes one and then another Vin iv.78; atirittabhojanaŋ is food left over from that provided for a sick person, or too great a quantity offered on one occasion to bhikkhus (in this case permitted to be eaten) Vin iv.82; anatirittabhojanaŋ is food that is not left over & is accepted & eaten by a bhikkhu without inquiry Vin iv.84.

-- aggadāna gift of the best of food SnA 270. -- atthika in need of food, hungry Pv ii.929. -- pariyantika restricting one's feeding Vism 69. -- vikati at J v.292 is to be read as bhājana˚ (q. v.). Bhojanaka
Bhojanaka
= bhojaka, in ˚gāma owner or headman of the village J ii.134. Bhojaniya, Bhojanīya, Bhojaneyya
Bhojaniya,
Bhojanīya, Bhojaneyya [grd. of bhuj, Caus. bhojeti. Cp. bhuñjitabba] what may be eaten, eatable, food; fit or proper to eat. -- bhojaniya: food Vin iv.92 (five foods: odana rice, kummāsa gruel, sattu meal, flour, maccha fish, maŋsa meat). Soft food, as distinguished from khādaniya hard food J i.90. See also khādaniya. bhojanīya: eatable S i.167, cp. pari˚. bhojaneyya: fit to eat DA i.28; a˚ unfit to be eaten Sn 81; J v.15. Bhojin
Bhojin
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. bhuj] feeding on, enjoying A iii.43; M i.343; Sn 47; J ii.150; Pug 55. Bhojeti
Bhojeti
[Caus. of bhuñjati] to cause to eat, to feed, entertain, treat, regale Vin i.243; iv.71; J vi.577; DhA i.101. -- 511 -- Bhojja
Bhojja
(adj.) [grd. of bhuñjati] to be eaten, eatable; khajja˚ what can be chewed & eaten DA i.85. ˚yāgu "eatable rice -- gruel," i. e. soft gruel, prepared in a certain way Vin i.223, 224. Bhojjha
Bhojjha
a good horse, a Sindh horse J i.180. Bhoti
Bhoti
f. of bhavant (q. v.) DhA iii.194. Bhottabba & Bhottuŋ
Bhottabba
& Bhottuŋ are grd. & inf. of bhuñjati (q. v.); bhottabba to be eaten J v.252, 253; bhottuŋ to eat J ii.14. Bhobhukka
Bhobhukka
[intens -- redupl. of bhukk = bukk, to bark: see bhukka & cp. Sk. bukkati, bukkana] one making a barking sound, barker, i. e. dog J vi.345 (= bhunkaraṇa C.). -- M. M
--
M -- euphonic consonant inserted between two vowels to avoid hiatus, as agga -- m -- agga the best of all Vin iv.232; anga -- m -- angāni limb by limb Vin iii.119; Vv 382, etc. See also S iii.254 (yena -- m -- idh' ekacco); Dh 34 (oka -- mokata ubbhato); Sn 765 (aññatra -- m -- ariyehi); Nd1 269 (dvaye -- m -- eva); J i.29 (asīti -- hattha -- m -- ubbedha, for hatth' ubbedha); iii.387 (katattho -- m -- anubujjhati); v.72 (orena -- m -- āgama); vi.266 (pacchā -- m -- anutappati); SnA 309 (rāg' ādi -- m -- anekappakāraŋ). -- On wrong syllable division through Sandhi -- m -- , and thus origin of specific Pali forms see māsati. Ma
Ma
( -- kāra) the letter or sound m J iii.273 (sandhi -- vasena vutta put in for the sake of euphony); v.375 (ma -- kāro sandhikaro); KhA 155, 224; SnA 181, 383, 404. Maŋsa
Maŋsa
(nt.) [cp. Vedic māŋsa, fr. Idg. *memsro -- , as in Gr. mhro/s thigh, Lat. membrum limb ("member"); Goth. mims flesh; Oir mīr bite, bit (of flesh)] flesh, meat S ii.97 (putta˚); Dh 152; J iii.184; Pug 55; Vism 258, 357 (in compar.); DhA i.375 (putta˚); ii.51 (alla˚ living flesh); VbhA 58, 61 (pilotika -- paliveṭhita). Described and defined in detail as one of the 32 ākāras or constituents of the human body at Vism 252, 354; KhA 46; VbhA 235.

-- ûpasecana sauce for meat J iii.144 = vi.24; DhA i.344. -- kalyāṇa beauty of flesh, one of the 5 beauties of a girl (see kalyāṇa) J i.394; DhA i.387. -- khādaka flesh -- eater J vi.530. -- cakkhu the bodily eye, one of the 5 kinds of the sense of sight (see cakkhu III) D iii.219; Nd1 100, 354. -- dhovanī odaka water for washing meat KhA 54. -- piṇḍika a meat -- ball, lump of flesh Vism 256. -- puñja a heap of flesh Vism 361 (in comp.); VbhA 67. -- pesi a piece of flesh or meat (see on simile J.P.T.S. 1907, 122) Vin ii.25; iii.105 (˚ŋ vehāsaŋ gacchantiŋ addasaŋ); M i.143; A iii.97; Miln 280; Vism 195, 252, 468; DhA i.164; VbhA 235; -- lohita flesh & blood Dh 150. Maŋsi
Maŋsi
(f.) [cp. Sk. māŋsī] a certain plant Nardostychus jatamansi J vi.535. Maŋsika
Maŋsika
[fr. maŋsa; cp. *Sk. māŋsika] 1. a dealer in meat, meat -- seller Miln 331. -- 2. in piṭṭhi˚ the ˚ka belongs to the whole cpd., thus: one who is a backbiter, a slanderer Sn 244 ( = piṭṭhi -- maŋsa -- khādaka SnA 287). Similarly piṭṭhi -- maŋsikatā (q. v.) Nd2 391. Makaci
Makaci
[etym.?] a kind of cloth, material, fibre DhA iii.68 (vākakhaṇḍa).

-- pilotikā rough cloth (used for straining) J ii.96; DhA ii.155. Cp. makkhi -- vāla. -- vāka m. bark Vism 249 (+akkavāka); VbhA 232. Makara
Makara
[cp. Epic Sk. makara] a mythical fish or sea monster, Leviathan (cp. Zimmer, Altind. Leben 97) J ii.442; iii.188; Miln 131, 377; ThA 204. -- f. makarinī Miln 67.

-- dantaka the tooth of a sword fish, used as a pin Vin ii.113, cp. p. 315. -- as a design in painting or carving Vin ii.117. 121, 152; iv.47. In these latter passages it occurs combd with latākamma & pañcapaṭṭhika (q. v.). The meaning is not quite clear. Makaranda
Makaranda
[cp. Class. Sk. makaranda] the nectar of a flower J vi.530. Makasa
Makasa
[fr. Vedic maśaka viâ *masaka>makasa: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 472] mosquito Vin ii.119; S i.52 (a˚ free from m.); A ii.117; Sn 20; J i.246; Sdhp 50. See also cpd. ḍaŋsa˚.

-- kuṭikā mosquito net or curtain Vin ii.119, 130. -- vījanī mosquito fan Vin ii.130. Makuṭa
Makuṭa
(f.) [cp. BSk. makuṭa Divy 411] a crest Abhp 283 (kirīṭa+, i. e. adornment). Makula
Makula
[cp. Sk. makula] 1. a bud (Hardy in Index to VvA gives "Mimusops elengi" after BR) Th 2, 260; Vv 4526; J i.273; ii.33; iv.333; v.207 (makuḷa), 416; Vism 230 (ḷ); 256 (paduma˚); VvA 177 (kaṇavīra˚), 194 (makuḷa), 197 (id.); VbhA 228, 239 (where Vism 256 has makulita, & KhA 53 mukulita). -- 2. a knob J i.31; ii.90; Vism 253 (kandala˚). -- 3. v. l. at Nd2 485 B for pakulla ( = pakuṭa). Makkaṭa
Makkaṭa
[cp. Epic Sk. markaṭa] 1. a monkey J i.385; ii.267; DhA ii.22; VbhA 408 (˚niddā, a m.'s sleep, said to be quickly changing); KhA 73 (in simile); SnA 522 (cp. Sn 791). Names of monkeys famous in Jātaka tales: Sālaka J ii.268; Kālabāhu J iii.98 sq.; on the monkey as a figure in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 119, to which add VbhA 228 & 259 (tālavana˚), cp. Vism 245. -- 2. a spider: see ˚sutta.

-- chāpaka the young of a monkey M i.385; J i.218. -- sutta spider's thread J v.47; Vism 136 (in simile); DhA i.304. Makkaṭaka
Makkaṭaka
[cp. Sk. markaṭaka; der. fr. markaṭa = mak- kaṭa] a spider (see on similes J.P.T.S. 1907, 119) Dh 347 (cp. DhA iv.58); J ii.147 (=uṇṇanābhi); iv.484 (aptly called Uṇṇanābhi); v.47, 469; Miln 364, 407 (pantha˚ road spider, at both passages). -- ˚sutta spider's thread Vism 285. Makkaṭiya
Makkaṭiya
(nt.) [fr. makkhaṭa+ya] monkey grimace J ii.448 (mukha˚). The same as mukha -- makkaṭika at J ii.70. Makkaṭī
Makkaṭī
(f.) [of makkaṭa] a female monkey Vin iii.33, 34; J i.385; DhA i.119. Makkha
Makkha1
[fr. mṛkṣ, lit. smearing over. Cp. BSk. mrakṣa Śikṣ 198. 8, in cpd. māna -- mada -- mrakṣa -- paridāha etc.] hypocrisy; usually combd with paḷāsa (see also palāsa) M i.15; A i.95, 100, 299; iv.148, 456; v.39, 156, 209, 310, 361; It 3; Sn 56, 437, 631, 1132 (cp. Nd2 484 = makkhāyanā makkhāyitattaŋ niṭṭhuriya -- kammaŋ, i. e. hardness, mercilessness); Dh 150, 407; J v.141; Vbh 357, 380, 389; Pug 18, 22; Miln 289, 380; DhA iii.118; vi.181.

-- vinaya restraining fr. hypocrisy S ii.282; A v.165 sq. -- 512 -- Makkha
Makkha2
[probably = makkha1, but BSk. differentiates with mrakṣya Divy 622, trsl. Index "ill -- feeling"? Böhtlingk -- Roth have: mrakṣya "wohlgefühl"] anger, rage Vin i.25. Makkhaṇa
Makkhaṇa
(nt.) [fr. mṛkṣ, cp. *Sk. mrakṣaṇa] smearing, oil J iii.120; Miln 11 (tela˚); Dhtp 538. Makkhāyanā
Makkhāyanā
(f.) & Makkhāyitatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. makkha] the fact of concealment, hypocrisy: in exegesis of makkha at Nd2 484; Pug 18, 22. Makkhikā
Makkhikā
(f.) [cp. Vedic makṣika & makṣikā] a fly M iii.148; Nd1 484; J ii.275 (nīla˚); iii.263 (pingala˚ gadfly), 402; SnA 33 (pingala˚), 572 (id.); DhA iv.58; Sdhp 396, 529. Makkhita
Makkhita
[pp. of makkheti] smeared with ( -- ˚), soiled; anointed M i.364 (lohita˚); J i.158 (madhu˚); iii.226 (piṭṭhi -- maddena); v.71 (ruhira˚); vi.391. Makkhin
Makkhin
(adj.) [fr. makkha] concealing, hypocritical; harsh, merciless; often combd with palāsin (e. g. at Vin ii.89; J iii.259) D iii.45, 246. a˚ (+apalāsin) D iii.47; A iii.111; Sn 116; Pug 22. Makkhivāla
Makkhi
-- vāla [cp. makaci -- pilotikā] a cloth of hair for straining J ii.97. Makkheti
Makkheti
[Caus. of mṛkṣ; Dhtp 538: makkhaṇa] to smear, paste, soil, anoint J iii.225, 314; Pug 36; Miln 268; Vism 344; DhA ii.65. -- Pass makkhīyati Miln 74. -> Caus. II. makkhāpeti to cause to be anointed J i.486; DhA i.400. -- pp. makkhita. Maga
Maga
[another form of miga = Sk. mṛga, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. 124] 1. animal for hunting, deer, antelope M i.173 (in simile); S i.199 (id.); A i.70; ii.23; Th 1, 958, 989; Sn 275, 763, 880; J v.267. -- 2. a stupid person J vi.206, 371. Magga
Magga
[cp. Epic Sk. mārga, fr. mṛg to track, trace] 1. a road (usually high road), way, foot -- path Vism 708 (maggaŋ agata -- pubba -- purisa, simile of); VbhA 256 (tiyojana˚, simile of a man travelling); DhA i.229. -- addhāna˚ high road Vin iv.62; M iii.158; see under addhāna; antāra -- magge on the road Miln 16; ujuka˚ a straight way S i.33; DhA i.18; ummagga (a) a conduit; (b) a devious way: see ummagga, to which add refs. J v.260; Th 2, 94; kummagga a wrong path: see kum˚, to which add S iv.195; Th 1, 1174. passāva˚ & vacca˚ defecation & urination Vin iii.127; visama˚ a bad road S i.48. -- 2. the road of moral & good living, the path of righteousness, with ref. to the moral standard (cp. the 10 commandments) & the way to salvation. The exegetic (edifying) etym. of magga in this meaning is "nibbān' atthikehi maggīyati (traced by those who are looking for N.), nibbānaŋ vā maggeti, kilese vā mārento gacchatī ti maggo" (VbhA 114). -> Usually designated (a) the "ariya aṭṭhangika magga" or the "Noble Eightfold Path" (see aṭṭhangika). It is mentioned at many places, & forms the corner -- stone of the Buddha's teaching as to the means of escaping "dukkha" or the ills of life. It consists of 8 constituents, viz. sammā -- diṭṭhi, sammā -- sankappa, ˚vācā, ˚kammanta, ˚ājīva, ˚vāyāma, ˚sati, ˚samādhi, or right views, right aspirations, right speech, right conduct, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, right rapture. The 7 first constituents are at D ii.216 & M iii.71 enumd as requisites for sammā -- samādhi. The name of this table of ethical injunctions is given as "maggam uttamaŋ" at Sn 1130, i. e. the Highest Path. See for ref. e. g. Vin iii.93; iv.26; D ii.353; iii.102, 128, 284, 286; It 18; Nd1 292; Nd2 485; Vbh 104 sq. 235 sq., VbhA 114 sq. (its constituents in detail), 121, 216; Vism 509 sq. (where the 8 constituents are discussed). -- (b) as ariya magga: M iii.72; Pug 17; DA i.176 sq., 225 sq., 233; VbhA 373 sq.; ThA 205. -> (c) as pañcangika or the Path of 5 constituents (the above first 2 and last 3): Dhs 89; Vbh 110 sq., 237 sq. -- (d) other expressions of same import: dhamma˚ Miln 21; magga alone; S i.191 (Bhagavā maggassa uppādetā etc.) = M iii.9=S iii.66; Sn 429, 441, 724 sq., 1130; Dh 57, 273 sq., It 106; VbhA 53, 73. As the first condition & initial stage to the attainment of Arahantship (Nibbāna) it is often found in sequence of either magga -- phala -- nirodha (e. g. Vism 217, cp. Nd2 under dukkha II. p. 168), or magga, phala, nibbāna (e. g. Tikp. 155 sq., 158; VbhA 43, 316, 488). -- magga as entrance to Arahantship is the final stage in the recognition (ñāṇa, pariññā, paññā) of the truth of the causal chain, which realises the origin of "ill," the possibility of its removal & the "way" to the removal. These stages are described as dukkhe ñāṇaŋ, samudaye ñāṇaŋ nirodhe ñāṇaŋ and magge ñāṇaŋ at D iii.227, Ps i.118. At the latter passage the foll. chapter (i.49) gives dukkha -- nirodha gāminī paṭipadā as identical with magga. -- Note. On the term see Cpd. 41 sq., 66 sq., 175, 186; Dhs trsl.2 58, 299 sq., 362 sq.; Expos. 216, 354n. On passages with aṭṭhangika magga & others where magga is used in similes see Mrs. Rh. D. in J.P.T.S. 1907, pp. 119, 120. -- 3. Stage of righteousness, with ref. to the var. conditions of Arahantship divided into 4 stages, viz. sotāpatti -- magga, sakadāgāmi˚, anāgāmi˚, arahatta˚, or the stage of entering the stream (of salvation), that of returning once, that of the never -- returner, that of Arahantship. -- At DhA i.110 magga -- phala "the fruit of the Path" (i. e. the attainment of the foundation or first step of Arahantship) is identical with sotāpattiphala on p. 113 (a) in general: arahatta˚ S i.78; A iii.391; DA i.224. -- (b) in particular as the 4 paths: Nd2 612 A; Vbh 322 sq., 328, 335; Vism 453, 672-> 678; DhA iv.30; VbhA 301. -- 4. In the Tikapaṭṭhāna (under magga -- paccaya -- niddesa p. 52) 12 constituents of magga are enumd; viz. paññā, vitakka, sammāvācā, s -- kammanta, s -- ājīva, viriya, sati, samādhi, micchā -- diṭṭhi, micchā -- vācā, m -- kammanta, m -- ājīva.

-- angāni the constituents of the Ariyan Path VbhA 120. -- âmagga which is the (right) road and which is not M i.147; Vism ch. xx (˚ssa kovida) = Sn 627; S iii.108 (id.); DhA iv.169 (id.); A v.47 (˚ssa ñāṇadassana); Dh 403. -- udaka water found on the road Vism 338 (simile). -- kilanta wearied by the road J i.129. -- kusala one who is clever as regards the road, one who knows the road well S iii.108; Nd1 171; VbhA 332 (in simile); KhA 70, 126. -- kovida=˚kusala Nd1 446. -- kkhāyin (should be ˚akkhāyin) one who tells the (right) way M iii.5; Nd1 33. -- jina Conqueror of the paths Sn 84 sq. -- jīvin who lives in the right path Sn 88. -- jjhāyin reflecting over the Path Sn 85. -- ñāṇa knowledge of the Path VbhA 416. -- ññū knows the Path Nd1 446. -- ṭṭhāna one who stands in the Path, attains the P. see Cpd. 23, 50. -- ttaya the triad of the paths (i. e. the first 3 of the 4 Paths as given above under 3) DhA iv.109. -- dūsin highway robber Sn 84. -- desaka one who points out the way, a guide Sn 84; J iv.257; as ˚desika at DhA ii.246. -- desin=˚desaka Sn 87. -- dhamma the rule of the Path, i. e. righteous living Sn 763. -- dhīra wise as regards the Path Nd1 45. -- paṭipanna -- 1. one on the road, i. e. wandering, tramping DhA i.233. -- 2. one who has entered the Path Pv iv.349. -- parissaya danger of the road VvA 200. -- bhāvanā cultivation of the Path (i. e. righteousness) Nd1 323. -- mūḷha one who has lost the way VvA 332. -- vaṇṇa praise of the Path DhA i.115. -- vidū one who knows the Path Nd1 446. -- sacca the truth concerning the Path VbhA 114, 124. -- sira N. of a month DA i.241. Maggana
Maggana
(nt.) & magganā (f.) [fr. magg] tracking, search for, covetousness Vism 29 (syn. for nijigiŋsanatā & gaveṭṭhi); Dhtp 298 (& gavesana). Maggika
Maggika
[fr. magga] wayfarer, tramp DhA i.233. -- 513 -- Maggati
Maggati
& (spurious) mageti [Denom. fr. magga, cp. Sk. margayati. The Dhtp. gives both mag & magg in meaning "anvesana," i. e. tracking, following up; see Dhtp Nos. 21, 540, 541] to track, hunt for, trace out, follow, seek M i.334 (ppr. magayamana); S ii 270 (pp. maggayamāna); Th 2, 384 (cp. ThA 255 = pattheti); J v.102 (where T. reads maggheyya, which is expld by C. as vijjheyya to pierce, hurt, & which is doubtful in meaning, although Kern, Toev. s. v. defends it. The v. l. reads magg˚. Same on p. 265 where one ought to read phasseyya in C. instead of passeyya. The form pp. magga (?) on p. 102 must belong to the same root); DhsA 162 (=gavesati). -- Caus. II. maggāpeti PvA 112. -- Pass. maggīyati VbhA 114. Magghati
Magghati
see maggeti. Maghavant
Maghavant
[cp. Epic Sk. maghavā, on etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. Maia] N. of Indra, or another angel (devaputta) S i.221 (voc. maghavā; so read for mathavā), 229; Dh 30. Cp. māgha. Maghā
Maghā
(f.) [cp. *Sk. maghā] N. of a nakkhatta, in cpd. ˚deva SnA 352 (cp. M ii.74, n. 6, where spelling Makkādeva; we also find Makhadeva at Śatapatha -- brāhmaṇa xiv. i. 1). Mankati
Mankati
is given as root mank (aor. maki) at Dhtm 13, in meaning maṇḍana, i. e. adornment. It is meant to be an expln of mankato? Mankato
Mankato
(adv.) [for Sk. mat -- kṛte, Cp. E. Müller, P.Gr. 12] on my account, for me Miln 384. Manku
Manku
(adj.) [cp. Vedic manku; see on meaning Hardy in preface to Anguttara v. p. vi] staggering, confused, troubled, discontented Vin ii.118; S v.74; Dh 249; Nd1 150; DhA iii.41, 359 (with loc.). -- f. pl. mankū Vin i.93. -- dummanku "staggering in a disagreeable manner," evil -- minded A i.98; iv.97 (read line as "dummanku' yaŋ padusseti dhūm' aggamhi va pāvako" he, staggering badly, is spoilt like the fire on the crest of smoke); v.70; Vin ii.196; iii.21; iv.213; S ii.218; Nett 50.

-- bhāva discontent, moral weakness J iv.49; Miln 227; DhA iii.359. -- bhūta discontented, troubled, confused Vin ii.19; D ii.85; A i.186; Dh 263; J v.211; vi.362; DhA ii.76; a˚ self -- possessed A iii.40; Miln 21, 339. Mankuna
Mankuna
(& ˚ṇa) [cp. late Sk. matkuṇa, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 63] an insect, bug or flea J i.10; iii.423; Vism 109 (where kīla -- mankula ought to be read as kīṭamankuna); DhA ii.12. Mangala
Mangala
(adj.) [cp. Vedic mangala. Expld by Dhtp 24 with root mang, i. e. lucky; see also mañju] auspicious, prosperous, lucky, festive Nd1 87, 88; KhA 118 sq.; SnA 273, 595; Sdhp 551. -- nt. mangalaŋ good omen, auspices, festivity Sn 258; Vin ii.129; PvA 17. A curious popular etymology is put forth by Bdhgh at KhA 123, viz. "maŋ galanti imehi sattā ti" mangalāni. -- mangalaŋ karoti lit. to make an auspicious ceremony, i. e. to besprinkle with grains etc. for luck (see on this PvA 198), to get married DhA i.182; mangalaŋ vadati to bless one J iv.299; DhA i.115. Three (auspicious) wedding -- ceremonies at DhA i.115 viz. abhiseka˚ consecration, geha -- ppavesana˚ entering the house, vivāha˚ wedding. -- Certain other general signs of good luck or omina kat) e)coxh/n are given at J iv.72, 73 and KhA 118 sq. (see also mangalika). -- Several ceremonious festivities are mentioned at DhA ii.87 with regard to the bringing up of a child, viz. nāma -- karaṇa -- mangala the ceremony of giving a name; āhāra -- paribhoga˚ of taking solid food; kaṇṇa -- vijjhana˚ of piercing the ears; dussa -- gahaṇa˚ of taking up the robe: cūḷā -- karaṇa˚ of making the top -- knot. -- Cp. abhi˚.

-- usabha an auspicious bull SnA 323. -- chaṇa a merry time, fair J ii.48; DhA i.392. -- kicca auspicious function, festivity SnA 175, 323. -- kiriyā festivity, wedding SnA 69; finding good omens J iv.72. -- kolāhala the lucky, or most auspicious, foreboding, one of the 5 kolāhalas (q. v.) KhA 121. -- pañha see mangalika. -- divasa a lucky day J iv.210; DhA iii.467. -- vappa ploughing festival SnA 137. Cp. vappa -- mangala. -- sindhava state horse J i.59. -- silāpaṭṭa auspicious slab (of stone) J i.59; vi.37; PvA 74. -- supina lucky dream J vi.330. -- hatthi state elephant Mhvs 35, 21; DhA i.389. Mangalika
Mangalika
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. mangala] 1. one who is feasting in, one whose auspices are such & such; fond of; only in kotūhala˚ fond of excitement J i.372; Miln 94 (apagata˚, without passion for excitement). -- 2. superstitious, looking out for lucky signs Vin ii.129 (gihī), 140 (id.). At J iv.72, 73; three sets of people are exemplified, who believe in omina as either diṭṭhaŋ (seen) or sutaŋ (heard) or mutaŋ (sensed); they are called diṭṭha -- mangalikā, suta˚ & muta˚ respectively. The same group is more explicitly dealt with in the Mangala -- sutta KhA 118 sq. (cp. Nd1 89); diṭṭhamangalika pañha "a question concerning visible omina" J iv.73 (correct meaning given under diṭṭha1, vol. ii.1561!), 390 (?). The Np. diṭṭha -- mangalikā at J iv.376 sq. Mangalya
Mangalya
(nt.) [fr. mangala] auspiciousness, good luck, fortune Dhtp 24. Mangura
Mangura
(adj.) [etym.? or = mangula? See J.R.A.S. 1903, 186 the corresponding passage to M i.246 in Lal. v. 320 has madgura.] golden; in cpd. ˚cchavi of golden colour, f. cchavī D i.193, 242; M i.246, 429; ii.33; Vism 184. Mangula
Mangula
(adj.) [cp. mangura] sallow; f. mangulī woman of sallow complexion S ii.260 = Vin iii.107; Vin iii.100. Macca
Macca
(adj. -- n.) [orig. grd. of marati, mṛ corresponding to Sk. martya. A diaeretic form exists in P. mātiya (q. v.)] mortal; (m.) man, a mortal S i.55; Sn 249, 577, 580, 766; J iii.154; iv.248; v.393; Dh 53, 141, 182; Vv 6312; Kvu 351. -- See also refs. under jāta. Maccu
Maccu
[in form = Vedic mṛtyu, fr. mṛ; in meaning differentiated, the Ved. -- Sk. meaning "death" only] the God of Death, the Buddhist Māra, or sometimes equivalent to Yama S i.156; Sn 357 (gen. maccuno), 581 (instr. maccunā), 587; Th 1, 411; Dh 21, 47, 128, 135, 150, 287; VbhA 100; SnA 397; DhA iii.49; Sdhp 295, 304.

-- tara one who crosses or overcomes death Sn 1119 ( = maraṇaŋ tareyya Nd2 486). -- dheyya the realm of Māra, the sphere of Death S i.4; adj. belonging to death or subject to death (=Māradheyya, maraṇadheyya Nd2 487b). -- Sn 358, 1104 (with expln "m. vuccanti kilesā ca khandhā ca abhisankhārā ca" Nd2 487a), 1146 (˚pāra -- maccudheyyassa pāraŋ vuccati amataŋ nibbānaŋ Nd2 487); Th 2, 10 (= maccu ettha dhīyati ThA 13); Dh 86; DhA ii.161. -- parāyaṇa surmounting death Sn 578; pareta id. Sn 579. -- pāsa the sling or snare of Māra Sn 166; J v.367. -- bhaya the fear of death Mhvs 32, 68. -- maraṇa dying in death M i.49 (cp. C. on p. 532: maccu -- maraṇan ti maccu -- sankhātaŋ maraṇaŋ tena samuccheda -- maraṇ' ādīni nisedheti. -- See also def. of maraṇa s.v.). -- mukha the mouth of death Sn 776; Nd1 48. -- rājā the king of death Sn 332, 1118 (=Maro pi Maccurājā maraṇaŋ pi Nd2 488); Dh 46, 170; KhA 83. -- vasa the power of death 3 i.52: Sn 587, 1100 (where maccu is expld by maraṇa & Māra). -- hāyin leaving death behind, victorious over death It 46=Sn 755; Th 1, 129. Maccha
Maccha
[cp. Vedic matsya] fish A iii.301; Sn 605, 777, 936; J i.210, 211; v.266 (in simile); vi.113 (phandanti macchā, on dry land); Pug 55; Sdhp 610. -- maccha is given at Nd2 91 as syn. of ambucārin. -- pūti˚ rotten fish M iii.168; & in simile at It 68 = J iv.435=vi.236 =KhA 127. Cp. J.P.T.S. 1906, 201. bahu˚ rich in fish J iii.430. loṇa˚ salt fish Vism 28. rohita˚ the species Cyprinus rohita J ii.433; iii.333; DhA ii.132. On maccha in simile see J.P.T.S. 1907, 121. Of names of fishes several are given in the Jātaka tales; viz.Ānanda (as the king of the fishes or a Leviathan) J i.207; ii.352; v.462; Timanda & Timirapingala J v.462; Mitacintin J i.427; Bahucintin J i.427.

-- maŋsa the flesh of fishes Sn 249. -- bandha one who sets net to catch fish, a fisherman A iii.301; Vism 379. -- bhatta food for fishes, devoured by fishes J v.75. -- vālaka a garment made in a particular fashion (forbidden to bhikkhus) Vin ii.137. -- sakalika "a bit of fish" (fish -- bone?) in description of constitution of the finger nails at Vism 250 = KhA 43=VbhA 233. -- 514 -- Macchara
Macchara
(adj.) [Vedic matsara & matsarin enjoyable; later period also "envious," cp. maccharin] niggardly, envious, selfish Pgdp ii.49. -- maccharaŋ (nt.) avarice, envy A iv.285; Sn 811, 862, 954 (vīta -- macchara, adj.). Maccharāyati
Maccharāyati
[Demon. fr. macchariya] to be selfish, greedy or envious J vi.334; DhA ii.45, 89. Maccharāyanā
Maccharāyanā
(f.) & Maccharāyitatta (nt.) the condition of selfishness, both expressions in defn of macchariya at Dhs 1122; Pug 19, 23; DhsA 375. Maccharin
Maccharin
(adj.) [cp. Vedic matsarin, fr. mat+sṛ, i. e. "reflecting to me"] selfish, envious, greedy (cp. Dhs trsl.2 p. 320); A ii.82; iii.139, 258, 265; D iii.45, 246; Dh 263; Sn 136, 663; Nd1 36; J i.345; v.391; Vv 5226; Pug 20; DhsA 394; DhA ii.89; Sdhp 89, 97. -- a˚ unselfish D iii.47; A iv.2; Sn 852, 860; It 102. Macchariya & Macchera
Macchariya
& Macchera (nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. mātsarya] avarice, stinginess, selfishness, envy; one of the principal evil passions & the maịn cause of rebirth in the Petaloka. -- 1. macchariya: A i.95, 299; iii.272; Dh iii.44 (issā˚), 289; Sn 863 (˚yutta), 928; Pug 19, 23; Vbh 357, 389, 391. -- Five sorts of selfishness are mentioned: āvāsa˚, kula˚, lābha˚, vaṇṇa˚, dhamma˚ D iii.234; Nd1 118, 227; A iv.456; Dhs 1122 (cp. Dhs tsrl.2 p. 276); Vism 683; DhsA 373, 374. Selfishness is one of the evil conditions which have to be renounced as habits of mind by force of intelligence A v.40, 209; Miln 289; PvA 87, 124. -- 2. macchera A i.105 (˚mala), 281; Dh 242; It 18; Nd1 260; Sdhp 313, 510. At A ii.58 and elsewhere the state called vigata -- mala -- macchera "with the stain of avarice vanished," is freq. mentioned as a feature of the blameless life and a preparation for Arahantship. -- Note. The (etym.) expln of macchariya at VbhA 513 is rather interesting: "idaŋ acchariyaŋ mayhaŋ eva hotu, mā aññassa acchariyaŋ hotū ti pavattattā macchariyan ti vuccati" (from the Purāṇas? ). Macchika
Macchika
[fr. maccha] a fish -- catcher, fisherman A iii.301; J v.270; vi.111; Miln 331. Macchī
Macchī
(f.) [of maccha] a female fish J ii.178. Macchera
Macchera
see macchariya. Majja
Majja
(nt.) [fr. mad, cp. Vedic mada & madya] 1. intoxicant, intoxicating drink, wine, spirits Vin i.205; D iii.62, 63; Sn 398 (+pāna = majjapāna); VvA 73 (=surā ca merayañ ca); Sdhp 267. -- 2. drinking place J iv.223 (=pān' āgāra).

-- pa one who drinks strong drink, a drunkard A iv.261; Sn 400; Pv iv.176 (a˚); ThA 38. -- pāna drinking of intoxicating liquors Vv 158; VvA 73; Sdhp 87. -- pāyaka = majjapa J ii.192 (a˚). -- pāyin=˚pāyaka Sdhp 88. -- vikkaya sale of spirits J iv.115. Majjati
Majjati1
[majj to immerse, submerge, cp. Lat. mergo] is represented in Pali by mujjati, as found esp. in cpds. ummujjati & nimujjati. Majjati
Majjati2
[mṛj to clean, polish; connected with either Lat. mergo (cp. Gr. a)me/ rgw) or Lat. mulgeo to wipe, stroke, milk (cp. Gr. a)me/lgw, Mir. mlich = milk etc.) -- Dhtp 71 gives root majj with meaning "saŋsuddhiyaŋ"] to wipe, polish, clean VvA 165. Cp. sam˚. -- pp. majjita & maṭṭha. Majjati
Majjati3
[mad, Sk. mādyati; Vedic madati; see mada for etym.] to be intoxicated; to be exultant, to be immensely enjoyed or elated S i.73, 203; A iv.294; Sn 366 (Pot. majje = majjeyya SnA 364), 676 (id., T. reads na ca majje, SnA 482 reads na pamajje); J ii.97; iii.87 (majjeyya). aor. majji in cpd. pamajji Mhvs 17, 15. -- pp. matta. Majjāra
Majjāra
[cp. Epic Sk. mārjāra; dialectical] a cat Miln 23. -- f. majjārī (majjāri˚) Vin i.186 (˚camma cat's skin); DhA i.48; Pgdp 49. Majjika
Majjika
[fr. majja] a dealer in strong drink. a tavern- keeper Miln 331. Majjita
Majjita
[pp. of majjati2] cleaned, polished VvA 340 (suṭṭhu m. for sumaṭṭha Vv 8417). See also maṭṭha. Majjha
Majjha
(adj.) [Vedic madhya, cp. Lat. medius, Gr. me/ssos, Goth. midjis = Ohg. mitti, E. middle] middle, viz. 1. of space: of moderate height D i.243 (contrasted with ucca & nīca). -- 2. of time: of middle age Sn 216 (contrasted with dahara young & thera old). -- 3. often used adv. in loc. majjhe in the middle; i. e. (a) as prep. in between, among ( -- ˚ or with gen.) Pv i.111, 114; J i.207 (sakuṇānaŋ); DhA i.182 (vasana -- gāmassa); PvA 11 (parisā˚). majjhe chetvā cutting in half J v.387. -- (b) in special dogmatic sense "in the present state of existence," contrasted with past & future existences (the latter combd as "ubho antā" at Sn 1040). The expln of majjhe in this sense is at Nd1 434: "majjhaŋ vuccati paccuppannā rūpā" etc. (similarly at Nd2 490). -- Sn 949 (in sequence pubbe majjhe pacchā), 1099 (id.); Dh 348 (pure majjhe pacchato; i. e. paccuppannesu khandhesu DhA iv.63). -- 4. (nt.) majjhaŋ the middle DhA i.184 (tassa uramajjhaŋ ghaŋsentī). Majjhaka
Majjhaka
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. majjha] lying or being in the midst of . . ., in pācīna -- yava˚ (dakkhiṇa˚, pacchima˚, uttara˚) nigama, a market -- place lying in the midst of the eastern corn -- fields (the southern etc.): designation of 4 nigamas situated near Mithilā J vi.330. Majjhatta
Majjhatta
(adj. -- n.) [for majjha -- ṭṭha, which we find in Prk. as majjhattha: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 214; majjha+ sthā] 1. (adj.) "standing in the middle," umpire, neutral, impartial, indifferent J i.300; ii.359 (parama˚, +upekkhā -- pārāmī); vi.8; Miln 403; Vism 230; Mhvs 21, 14. -- 2. indifference, balance of mind, equanimity; almost synonymous with upekkhā: Vism 134, 296; VbhA 283 (˚payogatā); DhA ii.214 (˚upekkhā); PvA 38 (so read for majjhattha). See also following. -> Note. A similar term is found in BSk. as mṛdu -- madhyā kṣānti "state of spiritual calm" Divy 271; see Yoga Sūtra ii.34. Majjhattatā
Majjhattatā
(f.) [abstr. from prec.] impartiality, indifference, balance of mind Nd2 166 (in expln of upekkhā, with syn. passaddhatā); Vbh 230; Vism 134; VbhA 285 (satta˚ & sankhāra˚), 317 (def.); DhsA 133. Majjhantika
Majjhantika
[majjha+anta+ika] midday, noon; used either absolutely Vin iv.273; S iv.240; J v.213 (yāva upakaṭṭha -- majjhantikā); v.291 (read majjhantik' âtikamm' āgami); Vism 236; Miln 3; or as apposition with kāla & samaya S i.7 (kāla); Pv iv.32 (id.); Nd2 977 (samaya); DA i.251 (id.). Majjhāru
Majjhāru
[etym. doubtful] a certain kind of plant Vin i.196 (v. l. majjāru); doubtful whether designation (like Sk. mārjāra) of Plumbago rosea. -- 515 -- Majjhima
Majjhima
(adj.) [Vedic madhyama, with sound change ˚ama>˚ima after Geiger, P.Gr. 191, or after analogy with pacchima, with which often contrasted] 1. middle, medium, mediocre, secondary, moderate. -- Applied almost exclusively in contrast pairs with terms of more or less, in triplets like "small -- medium -- big," or "first -- middle -- last" (cp. majjha 3b); viz. (a) of degree: hīna -- m -- paṇīta D iii.215 (tisso dhātuyo); Dhs 1205-> 1027 (dhammā); Vism 11 (sīlaŋ); h. m. ukkaṭṭha Vism 308; omaka m. ukkaṭṭha Vin iv.243; khuddaka m. mahā Vism 100; lāmaka m. paṇīta (i. e. lokuttara) DhsA 45 (dhammā); paritta -- m -- uḷāra Sdhp 260. -> (b) of time: paṭhame yāme majjhima˚ pacchima˚ J i.75; id. with vaye PvA 5. -- 2. (nt.) majjhimaŋ the waist, in cpd. su -- majjhimā (f.) a woman with beautiful waist J v.4. Mañca
Mañca
[cp. Epic Sk. mañca stand, scaffolding, platform] a couch, bed Vin iv.39, 40 (where 4 kinds are mentioned, which also apply to the defn of pīṭha, viz. masāraka, bundikābaddha, kuḷīra -- pādaka, āhacca -- pādaka; same defn at VbhA 365); Sn 401; J iii.423; DhA i.89 (˚ŋ bandhati to tie a bed or two together), 130; iv.16; VbhA 20; VvA 291; PvA 93. -- heṭṭhā mañce underneath the bed J i.197 (as place where domestic pigs lie); ii.419 (id.); ii.275 (where a love -- sick youth lies down in the park).

-- atimañca bed upon bed, i. e. beds placed on top of each other serving as grand stands at a fair or festival J iii.456; vi.277; DhA iv.59. -- parāyaṇa ending in bed, kept in bed Pv ii.25 (nīla˚, fig. for being buried); DhA i.183 (with v. l. maccu˚, just as likely, but see maccuparāyaṇa). -- pīṭha couch and chair Vin ii.270 sq.; A iii.51; VvA 9, 220, 295. -- vāna stuffing of a couch DhA i.234. Mañcaka
Mañcaka
[fr. mañca] bed, couch, bedstead Vin i.271; S i.121 = iii.123; J i.91; iii.423; Th 2, 115; Miln 10; DhA ii.53. Mañjari
Mañjari
(f.) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. mañjarī] a branching flower -- stalk, a sprout J v.400, 416. Mañjarikā
Mañjarikā
(f.) = mañjari, Vin iii.180. Mañjarita
Mañjarita
(adj.) [fr. mañjari] with (full -- grown) pedicles, i. e. in open flower Miln 308 (˚patta in full bloom). Mañjīra
Mañjīra
[cp. late Sk. mañjīra nt.] an anklet, foot -- bangle Abhp 228. Mañju
Mañju
(adj.) [cp. Class Sk. mañju, also mangala, cp. Gr. ma/gganon means of deceiving, Lat. mango a dealer making up his wares for sale. See further cognates at Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. mango] pleasant, charming, sweet, lovely (only with ref. to the voice) D ii.211, 227 (one of the 8 characteristics of Brahmā's & the Buddha's voice: see bindu & aṭṭhanga); J ii.150. -- (nt.) a sweet note J vi.591 (of the deer in the forest); VvA 219 (karavīka ruta˚).

-- bhāṇaka sweet -- voiced, speaking sweetly J ii.150 = DhA i.144; f. bhāṇikā J vi.418, 420. -- bhāṇin id. J ii.150. Mañjuka
Mañjuka
(adj.) [mañju+ka] sweet voiced Vin i.249; J ii.350; iii.266; vi.412, 496. Mañjūsaka
Mañjūsaka
( -- rukkha) [fr. mañjūsa] N. of a celestial tree, famed for its fragrancy Vv 386; SnA 52, 66, 95, 98; VvA 175. Mañjūsā
Mañjūsā
(f.) [cp. Epic Sk. mañjūṣā] a casket; used for keeping important documents in J ii.36 (suvaṇṇapaṭṭaŋ mañjūsāya nikkhipāpesi); iv.335 (suvaṇṇapaṭṭaŋ sāra -- mañjūsāyaŋ ṭhapetvā kālam akāsi). Mañjeṭṭha
Mañjeṭṭha
(adj.) [cp. *Sk. mañjiṣṭhā Indian madder] light (bright) red, crimson, usually enumd in set of 5 principal colours with nīla, pīta, lohitaka, odāta; e. g. at Vin i.25; S ii.101 (f. mañjeṭṭhā); Vv 221 (Hardy in T. reads mañjaṭṭha, as twice at VvA 111, with vv. ll. ˚jiṭṭha & ˚jeṭṭha, cp. Corrections & Addns on p. 372); Miln 61. Mañjeṭṭhaka
Mañjeṭṭhaka
(adj.) [fr. mañjeṭṭha, after lohita+ka] crimson, bright red, fig. shining Vv 391 (cp. defn at VvA 177: like the tree Vitex negundo, sindhavāra, or the colour of the Kaṇavīra -- bud; same defn at DhsA 317, with Sinduvāra for Sindha˚); usually in sequence nīla, pīta, mañjeṭṭhaka, lohitaka, odāta as the 5 fundamental colours: M i.509 (has ˚eṭṭhika in T. but v. l. ˚eṭṭhaka); J vi.185; Dhs 617. -- f. mañjeṭṭhikā a disease of sugar cane Vin ii.256. Mañjeṭṭhī
Mañjeṭṭhī
(f.) [ = Sk. mañjiṣṭhā] Bengal madder DA i.85. Maññati
Maññati
[man, Vedic manyate & manute, Av. mainyeite; Idg. *men, cp. Gr. me/nos mood, anger = Sk. manah mind; me/mona to think of, wish to, Lat. memini to think of, mens>mind, meneo; Goth. munan to think, muns opinion; Oisl. man, Ags. mon; Ohg. minna love, Ags, myne intention. Dhtp 427: man=ñāṇe, 524= bodhane] 1. to think, to be of opinion, to imagine, to deem Sn 199 (sīsaŋ . . . subhato naŋ maññati bālo), 588 (yena yena hi maññanti, tato taŋ hoti aññathā); J ii.258 (maññāmi ciraŋ carissati: I imagine he will have to wander a long time). -- With (double) acc.: to take for, to consider as; na taŋ maññāmi mānusiŋ I deem you are not human Pv ii.41; yassa dāni kālaŋ maññati for this now may he think it time (in a phrase of departure), let him do what he thinks fit, we wait the Buddha's pleasure, i. e. let it be time to go [so also BSk. manyate kālaŋ, e. g. Divy 50, 64 etc.] D i.189. -> Esp. in phrase taŋ kiŋ maññasi (maññatha 2. pl.) what do you think of this? (the foll.), what is your opinion about this? D i.60; S iii.104 & passim. -- Pot. 1st sg. maññeyyaŋ I should think PvA 40; 3rd sg. maññeyya S iii.103, and maññe Sn 206. The short form 1st sg. maññe is used like an adv. as affirmative particle & is inserted without influencing the grammatical or syntactical construction of the sentence; meaning: methinks, for certain, surely, indeed, I guess, presumably. E. g. D i.137 (patapati m. paccatthike yasasā); S i.181 (m. 'haŋ); iv.289 (paveliyamānena m. kāyena); J ii.275; Miln 21; Vism 90, 92 (mato me m. putto); DhA i.107; ii.51; PvA 40 (m. goṇo samuṭṭhahe), 65 (tasmā m. sumuttā). -- na maññe surely not DhA ii.84; PvA 75 (n. m. puññavā rājā). -- 2. to know, to be convinced, to be sure Sn 840 (= jānāti Nd1 192), 1049, 1142; Nd2 491 (=jānāti); DhA i.29 (maññāmi tuvaŋ marissasi). -- 3. to imagine, to be proud (of), to be conceited, to boast Sn 382 (ppr. maññamāna), 806, 813, 855 (maññate); J iii.530 (aor. maññi 'haŋ, perhaps maññe 'haŋ? C. explns by maññāmi). -- pp. mata. -- Note. Another Present form is munāti (q. v.), of which the pp. is muta. Maññanā
Maññanā
(f.) [fr. man] conceit Nd1 124 (taṇhā˚, diṭṭhi˚, māna˚, kilesa˚ etc.); Dhs 1116 1233; Nett 24; Vism 265 (for mañcanā?). Maññita
Maññita
(nt.) [pp. of maññati] illusion, imagination M i.486. Nine maññitāni (the same list is applied to the phanditāni, the papañcitāni & sankhatāni) at Vbh 390: asmi, ayam aham asmi, bhavissaŋ, na bhavissaŋ, rūpī bhavissaŋ, arūpī bh., saññī bh., asaññī bh., nevasaññī -- nâsaññī -- bh. Maññitatta
Maññitatta
(nt.) [fr. maññita] self -- conceit, pride Dhs 1116; DhsA 372. Maṭaja
Maṭaja
(nt.) [doubtful] a certain weapon M i.281 (˚ŋ nāma āvudhajātaŋ; Neumann trsls "Mordwaffe"). Maṭāhaka
Maṭāhaka
(adj.) [doubtful spelling & meaning] short (?) Vin ii.138 (ati˚ = atikhuddaka C.). -- 516 -- Maṭṭa & Maṭṭha
Maṭṭa
& Maṭṭha [pp. of mṛj, see majjati2] wiped, polished, clean, pure. -- (a) maṭṭa: D ii.133 (yugaŋ maṭṭaŋ dhāraṇīyaŋ: "pair of robes of burnished cloth of gold and ready for wear" trsl.); Vism 258 (v. l. maṭṭha). Cp. sam.˚ -- (b) maṭṭha: Vv 8417 (su˚); Miln 248; DhA i.25 (˚kuṇḍalī having burnished earrings); VvA 6 (˚vattha). Cp. vi˚.

-- sāṭaka a tunic of fine cloth J i.304; ii.274; iii.498; Vism 284 (ṭṭh). Maṇi
Maṇi
[cp. Vedic maṇi. The connection with Lat. monile (pendant), proposed by Fick & Grassmann, is doubted by Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. monile, where see other suggestions. For further characterisation of maṇi cp. Zimmer, Altindisches Leben pp. 53, 263] 1. a gem, jewel. At several places one may interpret as "crystal." -> D i.7 (as ornament); Dh 161; J vi.265 (agghiya, precious). In simile at D i.76 (maṇi veḷuriyo). On maṇi in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 121. -- udaka -- pasādaka maṇi a precious stone (crystal?) having the property of making water clear Miln 35 (cp. below Vism 366 passage); cintā˚ a "thought -- jewel," magic stone (crystal?) J iii.504; VvA 32; cūḷā˚ a jewelled crest or diadem, the crown -- jewel J v.441 sq.; jāti˚ a genuine precious stone J ii.417; Vism 216 (in comparison); tārā˚ ( -- vitāna) (canopy) of jewelled stars Vism 76; nīla˚ a dark blue jewel J ii.112; iv.140; DhA iii.254. The passage "amaṇiŋ udakaŋ maṇiŋ katvā" at Vism 366 (+asuvaṇṇaŋ leḍḍuŋ suvaṇṇaŋ katvā) refers clearly to meaning "jewel" (that the water is without a jewel or crystal, but is made as clear as crystal; a conjuror's trick, cp. Miln 35). Whether meaning "waterpot" (as given at Abhp 1113 & found in der. maṇika) is referred to here, is not to be decided. -- 2. a crystal used as burning -- glass Miln 54.

-- kāra a jeweller Miln 331; DhA ii.152. -- kuṇḍala a jewelled earring, adj. wearing an (ear) ornament of jewels Vin ii.156 (āmutta˚ adorned with . . .); Vv 208 (id.); 438 (id.); Pv ii.951 (id.); Th i.187; Dh 345 (maṇi -- kuṇḍalesu = manīsu ca kuṇḍalesu ca maṇicittesu vā kuṇḍalesu, i. e. with gem -- studded earrings DhA iv.56). -- kuṭṭima at VvA 188 is probably to be read as ˚kuṇḍala (v. l. ˚kundima). -- khandha "jewel-bulk," i. e. a tremendous jewel, large gem, functioning in tales almost like a magic jewel J iii.187; v.37 (˚vaṇṇaŋ udakaŋ water as clear as a large block of crystal), 183 (˚pilandhana). -- guhā a jewelled cave, cave of crystal J ii.417 (where pigs live); SnA 66 (one of three, viz. suvaṇṇa -- guhā, m.˚, rajata˚. At the entrance of it there grows the Mañjūsaka tree). -- canda "the jewelled moon," i. e. with a crest like the (glittering) moon Vv 646 (=maṇi -- maya -- maṇḍalânuviddha -- candamaṇḍala -- sadisa maṇi VbA 277). -- cchāyā reflection of a jewel J vi.345. -- thūṇā, a jewelled pillar, adj. with jewelled pillars Vv 541, 671. -- pabbata mountain of gems SnA 358. -- pallanka a jewelled pallanquin DhA i.274. -- bandha (place for) binding the jewel(led) bracelet, the wrist Vism 255=VbhA 238=KhA 50 (˚aṭṭhi). -- bhadda N. of one of 20 classes of people mentioned Miln 191; trsld by Rh. D. Miln trsl. i.266 by "tumblers." The term occurs also at Nd1 89 & 92. Cp. Sk. Maṇibhadra, N. of a brother of Kuvera & prince of the Yakṣas. -- maya made of, consisting of, or caused by jewels Pv ii.64; VvA 280; DhA i.29. -- ratana a precious stone or mineral, which is a gem (jewel); i. e. maṇi as a kind of ratana, of which there are seven Vism 189 (in sim.); Miln 218. -- rūpaka a jewelled image DhA i.370; -- lakkhaṇa fortune -- telling from jewels D i.9; SnA 564.

-- vaṇṇa the colour or appearance of crystal; i. e. as clear as crystal (of water) J ii.304 (pasanna+). -- sappa a kind of poisonous snake (i. e. a mysterious, magic snake) DA i.197. Maṇika
Maṇika
[cp. Class. Sk. maṇika] a waterpot M ii.39. Usually in cpd. udaka˚ Vin i.277; M i.354; S iv.316; A iii.27; Miln 28; DhA i.79. Whether this is an original meaning of the word remains doubtful; the connection with maṇi jewel must have been prevalent at one time. Maṇīkā
Maṇīkā
(f.) [f. of maṇika, adj. fr. maṇi] N. of a charm, the Jewel -- charm, by means of which one can read other people's minds D i.214 (m. iddhi -- vijjā), cp. Dial. i.278, n. 3.). Maṇila
Maṇila
[cp. *Sk. maṇila dewlap?] a kind of tree Vism 313. Maṇḍa
Maṇḍa
[later Sk. maṇḍa, perhaps dial. from *mranda, cp. Sk. vi -- mradati to soften. Attempts at etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. mollis. Cp. also mattikā] the top part, best part of milk or butter, etc. i. e. cream, scum; fig. essence of, the pick of, finest part of anything. parisā˚ the cream of a gathering, the pick of the congregation, excellent congregation A i.72 (or for ˚maṇḍala?); bodhi˚ essence of enlightenment, highest state of enlightenment; in later literature objectively "the best place of enlightenment, the Throne of Enlightenment or of the Buddha" (does it stand for ˚maṇḍala in this meaning?) J iv.233 (cp. puthavi -- maṇḍa ibid. & puthavi -- maṇḍala Sn 990); DhA i.86; ii.69; iv.72. sappi˚ "cream of butter," the finest ghee (cp. AvŚ i.1513 sarpimaṇḍa) D i.201; A ii.95; Pug 70; Miln 322. -- maṇḍaŋ karoti to put into the best condition, to make pleasant SnA 81. -- manda at DhsA 100 is to be read baddha (v. l. BB). Cp. Expos. 132n.

-- khetta best soil, fertile ground Miln 255. -- peyya to be drunk like cream, i. e. of the finest quality, first -- class S ii.20 (˚ŋ idaŋ brahmacariyaŋ). Maṇḍaka
Maṇḍaka
[fr. maṇḍa] 1. the cream of the milk, whey, in dadhi˚ whey S ii.111. -- 2. the scum of stagnant water, i. e. anything that floats on the surface & dirties the water, water -- weeds, moss etc. J ii.304 (gloss sevāla). Maṇḍana
Maṇḍana
(nt.) [fr. maṇḍ] ornament, adornment, finery D i.5, 7; J vi.64; Pug 21, 58; Vbh 351; VbhA 477; Dhtm 13. See under mada.

-- ânuyoga practice of ornamenting, fondness of finery Vin i.190. -- jātika of an ornament ( -- loving) nature, fond of dressing D i.80 = Vin ii.255=M ii.19, 32. Maṇḍapa
Maṇḍapa
[cp. late Sk. maṇḍapa] a temporary shed or hall erected on special or festive occasions, an awning, tent Vin i.125; Vism 96, 300 (dhamma -- savaṇa˚), 339 sq. (in simile); DhA i.112; ii.45; iii.206 (˚kāraka); PvA 74, 171, 194; VvA 173. Maṇḍala
Maṇḍala
[cp. Vedic maṇḍala] 1. circle D i.134 (paṭhavi˚, cp. puthavi˚ Sn 990); Vism 143 (˚ŋ karoti to draw a circle, in simile), 174 (tipu˚ & rajata˚ lead -- & silver circle, in kasiṇa practice); VvA 147 (of a fan = tālapattehi kata˚ -- vījanī). -- 2. the disk of the sun or moon; suriya˚ VvA 224, 271 (divasa -- kara˚); canda˚ Vism 174; PvA 65. -- 3. a round, flat surface, e. g. jānu˚ the disk of the knee, i. e. the knee PvA 179; naḷāta˚ the (whole of the) forehead D i.106; Sn p. 108. -- 4. an enclosed part of space in which something happens, a circus ring; e. g. M i.446 (circus, race -- ring); assa˚ horse -- circus, raceground, Vism 308; āpāna˚ drinking circle, i. e. hall; kīḷa˚ play -- circle, i. e. games J vi.332, 333; DhA iii.146; keḷi˚ dice board (?) J i.379; gā˚ Th i.1143, cp. trs. ib. n. 3; go˚ ox -- round Sn 301; jūta˚ dicing table J i.293; yuddha˚ fightingring Vism 190; ranga˚ play -- house VvA 139; vāta˚ tornado J i.73. -- 5. anything comprised within certain limits or boundaries, a group J v.418 (chāpa˚ litter of young animals). -- 6. border as part of a bhikkhu's dress, hem, gusset Vin i.287; ii.177.

-- agga [cp. Sk. maṇḍal' āgra Halāyudha 2, 317 at Aufrecht p. 301] a circular sword or sabre Miln 339. -- māla (sometimes māḷa) a circular hall with a peaked roof, a pavilion D i.2, 50 (ḷ); Miln 16 (ḷ); Sn p. 104; SnA 132 (Npl.); VvA 175. -- 517 -- Maṇḍalika
Maṇḍalika
(adj. -- n.) [fr. maṇḍala, cp. maṇḍalaka -- rājā "the king of a small country" Mvyut 94] a district officer, king's deputy Vin iii.47 f. maṇḍalikā = maṇḍala 4, i. e. circus, ring, round, in assa˚ race court Vin iii.6. Maṇḍalin
Maṇḍalin
(adj.) [fr. maṇḍala] 1. circular Th 1, 863 (maṇḍali -- pākāra). -- 2. having a disk, orbed (of the sun) S i.51 = VvA 116. Maṇḍita
Maṇḍita
[pp. of maṇḍeti] adorned, embellished, dressed up Sdhp 244, 540. In cpd. ˚pasādhita beautifully adorned at J i.489; ii.48; vi.219. -- Cp. abhi˚. Maṇḍūka
Maṇḍūka
[Vedic maṇḍūka] a frog Vv 512; J iv.247; v.307; vi.164; KhA 46; VvA 217, 218; Sdhp 292. f. mandūkī J i.341. -- Mandūka is the name of an angel (devaputta) at Vism 208.

-- chāpī a young (female) frog J vi.192. -- bhakkha eating frogs, frog eater (i. e. a snake) J iii.16. Maṇḍeti
Maṇḍeti
[maṇḍ to adorn, related to Lat. mundus world, cp. in meaning Gr. ko/ smos = ornament Dhtp 103 bhūsane, 566: bhūsāyaŋ] to adorn, embellish, beautify J iii.138; DhA ii.86. -- pp. maṇḍita. Mata
Mata1
[pp. of maññati] thought, understood, considered (as = -- ˚), only late in use Vbh 2 (hīna˚ paṇīta˚, doubtful reading); Sdhp 55; Mhvs 25, 55 (tassā matena according to her opinion); 25, 110 (pasu -- samā matā, pl. considered like beasts). Cp. sam˚. -- Note. Does mata -- sāyika at Th 1, 501 (=Miln 367) belong under this mata? Then mata would have to be taken as nt. meaning "thought, thinking," but the phrase is not without objection both semantically & syntactically. Mrs. Rh. D. (Brethren, p. 240) trsls "nesting -- place of thought." Mata
Mata2
[pp. of marati, mṛ] dead M i.88 (ekāha˚ dead one day); iii.159 (matam eyya would go to die); Sn 200, 440; J v.480. Neg. amata see separate article. -- Note. mata at PvA 110 is to be corrected into cuta.

-- kicca duty towards the dead, rites for the dead PvA 274. Mataka
Mataka
[fr. mata2] dead, one who is dead DhA ii.274.

-- ākāra condition of one who is dead J i.164 (˚ŋ dassati pretends to be dead). -- bhatta a meal for the dead, food offered to the manes J iv.151; DhA i.326 ( = petakicca p. 328); iii.25. Mati
Mati
(f.) [Vedic mati, fr. man: cp. Av. maitiš, Lat. mens, mentem (cp. E. mental); Goth. ga -- munds, gaminpi, Ohg. gi -- munt, E. mind] mind, opinion, thought; thinking of, hankering after, love or wish for Vin iii.138 (purisa˚ thought of a man); Mhvs 3, 42 (padīpa lamp of knowledge); 15, 214 (amala˚ pure -- minded); PvA 151 (kāma+). -- su˚ (adj.) wise, clever Mhvs 15, 214; opp. du˚ (adj.) foolish J iii.83 ( = duppañña C.); Pv i.82 (=nippañña PvA 40); Sdhp 292. Matikata
Matikata
(adj.) [cp. Sk. matī -- kṛta, fr. matya, nt., harrow = Lat. mateola, Ohg. medela plough] in su˚ well-harrowed (field) A i.229, 239 (khetta). Matimant
Matimant
(adj.) [mati+mant] sensible, intelligent, wise, metri causâ as matīmā (fr. matimanto, pl.) at Sn 881 ( = matimā paṇḍitā Nd1 289). Matta
Matta1
( -- ˚) (adj.) [i. e. mattā used as adj.] "by measure," measured, as far as the measure goes, i. e. -- (1) consisting of, measuring (with numerals or similar expressions): appamatto kali Sn 659; pañcamattā sata 500 DA i.35; saṭṭhimatte saṭṭhimatte katvā SnA 510; māsamattaŋ PvA 55; ekādasa˚ ib. 20; dvādasa˚ 42; satta˚ 47; tiŋsamattehi bhikkhūhi saddhiŋ 53. -- (2) (negative) as much as, i. e. only, a mere, even as little as, the mere fact (of), not even (one), not any: aṇumattena pi puññena Sn 431; kaṭacchumattaŋ (not) even a spoonful Miln 8; ekapaṇṇa˚ PvA 115; citta ˚ŋ pi (not) even as much as one thought ib. 3; nāma˚ a mere name Miln 25; phandana ˚ŋ not even one throb J vi.7; phandita˚ the mere fact of . . . M ii.24, bindu˚ only one drop PvA 100; rodita˚ M ii.24. -- (3) (positive) as much as, so much, some, enough (of); vibhava˚ riches enough J v.40; kā pi assāsa -- mattā laddhā found some relief? PvA 104 (may be = mattā f.). -- (4) like, just as what is called, one may say (often untranslateable): sita˚ -- kāraṇā just because he smiled VvA 68; bhesajja -- mattā pītā I have taken medicine D i.205 (=mattā f.?) okāsa -- ˚ŋ (nt.) permission Sn p, 94; putta˚ like children A ii.124; maraṇa˚ (almost) dead M i.86; attano nattumatte vandanto Dha iv.178. f. mattī (=mattin?) see mātu˚. -- (5) as adv. (usually in oblique cases): even at, as soon as, because of, often with other particles, like api, eva, pi, yeva: vuttamatte eva as soon as said DhA i.330; cintitamatte at the mere thought DhA i.326; naŋ jātamattaŋ yeva as soon as he was born PvA 195; anumodana -- mattena because of being pleased PvA 121; upanītamattam eva as soon as it was bought PvA 192; nimujjana -- matte yeva as soon as she ducked her head under PvA 47. -- na mattena . . . eva not only . . . but even PvA 18 (n. m. nipphalā, attano dānaphalassa bhāgino eva honti). Matta
Matta2
[pp. of madati] intoxicated (with), full of joy about ( -- ˚), proud of, conceited Sn 889 (mānena m.); J iv.4 (vedanā˚, full of pain, perhaps better with v. l. ˚patta for ˚matta); VvA 158 (hatthi matto elephant in rut); DhA iv.24 (id.); PvA 47 (surā˚), 86 (māna -- mada˚), 280 (bhoga -- mada˚).

-- kāsinī see matthak' āsinī. Mattaka
Mattaka
(adj.) [fr. matta1] 1. of the size of Sdhp 238 (pāṇi˚). -- 2. only as much as, mere D i.12 (appa˚, ora˚, sīla˚); J iv.228 (mana˚); DhA iv.178 (pitumattakaŋ gahetvā). Mattatta
Mattatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. matta] (the fact of) consisting of, or being only . . . PvA 199 (maŋsa -- pesi˚). Mattā
Mattā
(f.) [Vedic mātrā, of mā] measure, quantity, right measure, moderation Sn 971 (mattaŋ so jaññā); Dh i.35 (mattā ti pamāṇaŋ vuccati). -- Abl. mattaso in ˚kārin doing in moderation, doing moderately Pug 37 ( = pamānena padesa -- mattam eva karontī ti). -- In cpds. shortened to matta˚.

-- aṭṭhiya (mattaṭṭhiya = ˚atthika) desirous of moderation, moderate Th 1, 922. -- ññu knowing the right measure, moderate, temperate (bhojane or bhojanamhi in eating) A ii.40; Sn 338; Pug 25; Dh 8. Cp. jāgariyā. -- ññutā moderation (in eating) D iii.213; Nd1 483; Dh 185; Pug 25; Vbh 249, 360; Dhs 1348; DhA ii.238. -- sukha (metri causâ: mattā -- sukha) measured happiness, i. e. small happiness Dh 290 (cp. DhA iii.449). Matti
Matti
( -- sambhava) [for *māti˚ = mātu˚=*mātṛ, after pitti˚=pitu˚=*pitṛ] born (from a mother) Sn 620 (=mātari sambhūta SnA 466)=Dh 396 (=mātu santike udarasmiŋ sambhūta DhA iv.158). Mattika
Mattika
(adj.) (˚ -- ) [fr. mattikā] made of clay, clay -- ; only in cpds.:

-- kuṇḍala clay earring S i.79 (v. l. mattikā˚). -- bhājana clay or earthenware vessel Sn 577; Vism 231 (in comparison); DhA i.130. -- vāka clay fibre DhsA 321 (v. l. ˚takka, perhaps gloss = takku spindle, see takka1). Mattikā
Mattikā
(f.) [cp. Vedic mṛttikā, der. fr. Vedic mṛt (mṛd) soil, earth, clay; with P. maṇḍa, Sk, vimradati. Gr. bladaro/s soft, Osil. mylsna dust, Goth. mulda, Ags. molde (E. mould, mole = mouldwarp), to same root mṛd as in Sk. mṛdu= Lat. mollis soft, Gr. a)maldu/nw to weaken, Sk. mardati & mṛdnāti to crush, powder, Caus. mardayati; also in cognate ˚mḷd as appearing in Gr. me/ldw to melt=Ags meltan, Ohg. smëlzan] 1. clay J vi.372; Mhvs 29, 5 sq. -- tamba˚ red clay DhA iv.106; PvA 191. mattikā pl. kinds of clay (used in cosmetics, like Fuller's earth) J v.89 (nānā -- cunṇāni+ mattikā; see also cuṇṇa). -- 2. loam, mud M iii.94 (alla˚ fresh loam or mud); Vism 123 (aruṇa -- vaṇṇā); KhA 59 (paṇḍu); VvA 65; PvA 216 (aruṇa -- vaṇṇā).

-- thāla bowl of clay DhA iv.67. -- piṇḍa a lump of clay or loam DA i.289; same trope at PvA 175. -- 518 -- Matteyya
Matteyya
(& metteyya) (adj.) [fr. mātā, *mātreyya> *matteyya] reverential towards one's mother, motherloving D iii.74; Pv ii.718 ( = mātu hita PvA 104; v. l. mett˚). Spelling at D iii.72 is metteyya. It is difficult to decide about correct spelling, as metteyya is no doubt influenced by the foll. petteyya, with which it is always combined. Matteyyatā
Matteyyatā
(& mett˚) (f.) [abstr. fr. matteyya] filial love towards one's mother; always combd with petteyyatā D iii.145 (v. l. mett˚); Nd2 294 (mett˚), Dh 332; DhA iv.33. Mattha
Mattha
[cp. Vedic masta(ka) skull, head, Vedic mastiṣka brains; perhaps to Lat. mentum chin, Cymr. mant jawbone; indirectly also to Lat. mons mountain] the head, etc. Only in cpd. mattha -- lunga [cp. Sk. mastulunga] the brain Vin i.274; Sn 199; Kh iii.; J i.493; KhA 60; Vism 260 (in detail) 264, 359; VbhA 63, 243, 249; DhA ii.68; PvA 78, 80. -- See also matthaka. Matthaka
Matthaka
[cp. mattha] the head, fig. top, summit J iii.206 = iv.4; iv.173, 457; v.478; DA i.226 (pabbata˚); Pv iv.163; DhA i.184. matthaka -- matthakena (from end to end) J i,202; iii.304. Loc. matthake as adv. (1) at the head DhA i.109; (2) at the distance of ( -- ˚) DhA i.367; (3) on top of ( -- ˚) J v.163 (vammīka˚); Mhvs 23, 80 (sīsa˚); Yugandhara˚ Miln 6; DhA ii.3 (uddhana˚).

-- āsin sitting on top (of the mountain) J vi.497 ( = pabbata -- matthake nisinna C.; gloss matta -- kāsin i. e. wildly in love, expld by kāma -- mada -- matta). The reading is not clear. -- tela oil for the head KhA 64 (=muddhani tela Vism 262). Mathati
Mathati
[Vedic math, manth to twirl, shake about, stir etc.; cp. Lat. mamphur part of the lathe = Ger. mandel ("mangle"), E. mandrel; Lith. mentùris churning stick, Gr. mo/qos tumult mo/qoura shaft of rudder. -> The Dhtp (126) gives both roots (math & manth) and expls by "viḷolana," as does Dhtm (183) by "viḷoṭana"] to churn, to shake, disturb, upset. Only in Caus. matheti to agitate, crush, harass, upset (cittaŋ) S iv.210; Sn 50 (=tāseti hāpeti Nd2 492); Pv iv.71 (kammānaŋ vipāko mathaye manaŋ; C 264: abhibhaveyya); Miln 385 (vāyu pādape mathayati; . . . kilesā mathayitabbā). -- pp. mathita. See also abhimatthati (sic) & nimmatheti. Mathana
Mathana
(adj. nt.) [fr. math] shaking up, crushing, harassing, confusing Miln 21 (+maddana); DhA i.312; PvA 265. Mathita
Mathita.
[pp. of matheti] 1. (churned) buttermilk Vin ii.301 (amathita -- kappa). -- 2. upset, mentally unbalanced state, disturbance of mind through passion, conceit, etc. M i.486 (maññita+). Neumann trsls "Vermutung" i. e. speculation, guessing (v. l. matth˚). Mada
Mada
[Vedic mada, mad (see majjati), Idg. *mad, as in Av. mata intoxication, drink, mad, to get intoxicated orig. meaning "drip, be full of liquid or fat"; cp. Gr. mada/w dissolve, masto/s breast (mazo/s>Amazone), Lat. madeo to be wet, Ohg. mast fattening, Sk. meda grease, fat, Gr. me/zea; mesto/s full; Goth. mats eatables, Ags. mōs, Ohg. muos = gemüse, etc. Perhaps connected with *med in Lat. medeor to heal. For further relations see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. madeo. -- The Dhtp (412) & Dhtm (642) explain mad by "ummāde" Dhtm 210 also by "muda, mada= santose"] 1. intoxication, sensual excess, in formula davāya madāya maṇḍanāya (for purposes of sport, excess, personal charm etc.) M i.355=A ii.40= Nd1 496= Nd2 540=Pug 21=Dhs 1346, 1348. The commentator's explns bearing directly or indirectly on this passage distinguish several kinds of mada, viz. māna -- mada & purisa -- mada (at DhsA 403; Vism 293), or muṭṭhika -- mall' ādayo viya madatthaŋ bala -- mada -- nimittaŋ porisa -- mada -- nimittañ cā ti vuttaŋ (at Vism 31). Sn 218 (mada -- pamāda on which passage SnA 273 comments on mada with jāti -- mad' ādi -- bhedā madā). -- 2. (as mental state or habit) pride, conceit Miln 289 (māna, m., pamāda); Vbh 345 (where 27 such states are given, beginning with jāti˚, gotta˚, ārogya˚, yobbana˚, jīvita -- mada), 350 (where mada is paraphrased by majjanā majjitattaŋ māno . . . uṇṇati . . . dhajo sampaggāho ketukamyatā cittassa: same formula, as concluding exegesis of māna at Nd2 505 & Dhs 1116); sometimes more def. characterised with phrase mada -- matta elated with the pride or intoxication of . . . ( -- ˚). e. g. A i.147 (yobbana˚, ārogya˚, jīvita˚); PvA 86 (māna˚), 280 (bhoga˚). -- The traditional exegesis distinguishes only 3 mada's, viz. ārogya-mada the pride of health, yobbana˚ of youth, jīvita˚ of life: D iii.220; A i.146.

-- nimmadana "disintoxication from intoxication," freedom from pride or conceit A ii.34; Bu i.81; Vism 293. Madana
Madana
(nt.) [fr. mad] lit. making drunk, intoxication Nd2 540 C. (in formula davāya madāya madanāya, instead of maṇḍanāya: see under mada 1); in cpd. ˚yuta intoxicated, a name for the Yakkhas J i.204. -> Cp. nimmadana. Madanīya
Madanīya
(adj. nt.) [orig. grd. of madati] 1. intoxicating D ii.185 (sadda vaggu rajanīya kāmanīya m.). -- 2. intoxication VvA 73. Madirā
Madirā
(f.) [of adj. Vedic madira intoxicating] intoxicating drink, spirit J v.425; DhsA 48. Madda
Madda
1. [fr. mṛd, Sk. marda] crushing etc.; kneading, paste, in piṭṭha paste of flower Vin ii.151; J iii.226 (piṭṭhi˚). -- 2. [dialectical, cp. Sk. madra] N. of a country & its inhabitants, in ˚raṭṭha SnA 68 sq.; ˚rājakula KhA 73.

-- viṇā a sort of girdle Vin ii.136. Maddati
Maddati
[cp. Vedic mṛd to crush: see etym. under mat- tikā] 1. to tread on, trample on (acc.), crush J iii.245, 372 (ppr. maddamāna); DhA ii.66. -- 2. to defeat, destroy Sn 770 ( = abhibhavati Nd1 12); Nd2 85 (madditvā=abhibhuyya); SnA 450; Mhvs 1, 41. -- fig. to crush a heresy: vādaŋ m. Mhvs 36, 41. -- 3. to neglect (an advice), spurn J iii.211 (ovādaŋ). -- 4. to mix up, knead, jumble together DhA ii.155. -- 5. to thresh J i.215. -- 6. to break down, upset J i.500 (vatiŋ, a fence). -- 7. to draw together (a net) J i.208. -- Caus. I. maddeti to cause to be trampled on Mhvs 29. 4 (aor. maddayi). -- Caus. II. maddāpeti to cause to be threshed Vin ii.180. -- pp. maddita. See also pari˚. Maddana
Maddana
(nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. mardana, fr. mṛd] 1. crushing, grinding, destroying J iv.26; Miln 21 (adj.,+mathana); Sdhp 449; Dhtp 156. -- 2. threshing Miln 360. -- See also nimmaddana, pamaddana, parimaddana. Maddarī
Maddarī
(f.) [?] a species of bird, in cpd. ambaka˚ A i.188. Maddava
Maddava
(adj. nt.) [fr. mṛdu, cp. Epic Sk. mārdava] 1. mild, gentle, soft, suave Dhs 1340; Vbh 359; Miln 229 (cittaŋ mudukaŋ m. siniddhaŋ), 313 (mudu˚), 361 (among the 30 best virtues, with siniddha & mudu). -> 2. (fr. madda) as Np. name of a king, reigning in Sāgala, the capital of Madda. -- 3. withered Dh 377 ( = milāta DhA iv.112). -- nt. maddavaŋ mildness, softness, gentleness Sn 250 (ajjava+), 292 (id.); J iii.274 (as one of the 10 rāja -- dhammā); v.347 (= mettacittaŋ); DhsA 151. See also sūkara˚. -- 519 -- Maddavatā
Maddavatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. maddava] gentleness, softness, suavity Dhs 44, 1340; DhsA 151. Maddālaka
Maddālaka
[etym.?] a kind of bird J vi.538. Maddita
Maddita
[pp. of maddeti, see maddati] 1. kneaded, mixed, in su˚ Vism 124. -- 2. crushed, defeated, in su˚ Miln 284. -- Cp. pa˚, pari˚. Maddin
Maddin
(adj.) [fr. mṛd, cp. Sk. mardin = mardana] crushing, destroying Sdhp 218. Cp. pamaddin. Maddhita
Maddhita
[of mṛdh] see pari˚. Madhu
Madhu
[cp. Vedic madhu, Gr. me/qu wine, Lith. medùs honey, midùs wine, Ohg. metu = Ger. met wine. Most likely to root *med to be full of juice: see under madati] honey J i.157 sq.; iv.117; Dh 69 (madhū vā read as madhuvā); Mhvs 5, 53; DhsA 330; DhA ii.197 (alla˚ fresh honey). -- pl. madhūni Mhvs 5, 31. -- The Abhp (533) also gives "wine from the blossom of Bassia latifolia" as meaning. -- On madhu in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 121.

-- atthika (madh˚) at J iii.493 is with v. l. to be read madhu -- tthika (q. v. below). The proposal of Kern's (Toev. s. v.) to read madh' aṭṭhika "with sweet kernels" cannot be accepted. The C. explns rightly by "madhura -- phalesu pakkhitta -- madhu viya, madhura -- phalo hutvā." -- atthika (madhu˚) desirous of honey, seeking honey J iv.205; Mhvs 5, 50. -- āpaṇa (madhv˚) honey shop Mhvs 5, 52. -- āsava (madhv˚) honey extract, wine from the flower of Bassia latifolia VvA 73 (as one of the 5 kinds of intoxicating liquors). -- kara "honey -- maker," bee J iv.265; Vism 136 (in simile); DhA i.374. -- gaṇḍa honey -- comb Mhvs 22, 42; 34, 52. -- tthika [madhu+thika, which latter stands for thīya, fr. styā to congeal, drip; see thika, thīna, thīya and theva] dripping with honey, full of honey J iii.493 (so read for madh -- atthika); vi.529 ( = madhuŋ paggharanto C.). Kern, Toev. s. v. unnecessarily reads as ˚atthika which he takes=˚aṭṭhika. -- da giving honey, liberal Mhvs 5, 60 (Asoka). -- paṭala honey -- comb J i.262; DhA i.59; iii.323. -- piṇḍikā a ball of honey (to eat), honey -- food, a meal with honey Vin i.4; M i.114. -- pīta having drunk honey, drunk with honey S i.212. -- (b)bata "courting honey," a bee Dāvs iii.65. -- bindu a drop of honey Vism 531; VbhA 146 (˚giddha, in comparison). -- makkhitā smeared with honey J i.158. -- madhuka dripping with honey, full of honey J vi.529. -- mehika referring to a particular disease madhumeha ("honey -- urine," diabetes?) Vin iv.8. -- laṭṭhikā liquorice (no ref.?); cp. Laṭṭhi -- madhukavana J i.68. -- lāja sweet corn J iv.214, 281. -- vāṇija honey seller Mhvs 5, 49. -- ssava flowing with honey Pv ii.911. Madhuka
Madhuka
(adj. n.) [fr. madhu] connected with honey. 1. (n.) the tree Bassia latifolia (lit. honey tree) Vin i.246; J v.324, 405; vi.529; Miln 165. -- 2. the fruit of that tree J iv.434. -- 3. (adj.) ( -- ˚) full of honey J vi.529 (madhu˚ containing honey). -- 4. connected with an intoxicating drink, given to the drink of ( -- ˚) J iv.117 (surā -- meraya˚).

-- aṭṭhika the kernel (of the fruit) of Bassia latifolia Vism 353 = KhA 43 (which latter reads madhukaphal' aṭṭhi; in the description of the finger nails). -- puppha the flower of Bassia latifolia from which honey is extracted for liquor Vin i.246 (˚rasa liquorice juice); J i.430. Madhukā
Madhukā
(f.) [fr. madhuka] honey drink, sweet drink, liquor Mhvs 5, 52. Madhura
Madhura
(adj.) [fr. madhu] 1. sweet Sn 50; J iii.493; v.324; Pv ii.67; PvA 119, 147. -- 2. of intoxicating sweetness, liquor -- like, intoxicating J iv.117. -- 3. (nt.) sweetness, sweet drink Dh 363; J i.271 (catu˚ the 4 sweet drinks, used as cure after poison); Dhs 629; DhsA 320. -- 4. (nt.) flattery, praise SnA 287 (opp. avaṇṇa).

-- rasa sweet (i. e. honey -- ) juice, sweet liquor DhA ii.50; PvA 119. -- ssara sweet -- sounding VvA 57; PvA 151; Mhvs 5, 32. Madhuraka
Madhuraka
(adj.) [fr. madhura, cp. similarly madhuka> madhu] full of sweet drink, intoxicated, in phrase madhuraka -- jātokāyo viya "like an intoxicated body," i. e. without control, weak. The usual translation has been "become languid or weak" ("erschlafft" Ger.). Franke, Dīgha Übs. 202 (where more literature) translates: "Ich fūhlte mich schwach, wie ein zartes Pflänzchen," hardly justifiable. -- D ii.99; M i.334; S iii.106, A iii.69. The description refers to a state of swooning, like one in a condition of losing consciousness through intoxication. Rh. D. (Dial. ii.107) translates "my body became weak as a creeper," hardly correct.

taken as noun also by Winternitz (Rel. gesch. Lesebuch 301): "wohl eine zarte Pflanze mit schwachen Stengel." F. L. Woodward follows me in discarding trsln "creeper" and assuming one like "intoxicated" (so also UdA, 246): see his note on S iii.106 trsln (K.S. iii.90). Madhuratā
Madhuratā
(f.) [abstr. fr. madhura] sweetness J i.68. Madhuratta
Madhuratta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. madhura] sweetness Mhvs 2, 13. Manaŋ
Manaŋ
(adv.) [cp. Class. Sk. manāk, "a little (of something)" prob. derived from Vedic manā f. a. gold weight = Gr. mna_] "by a certain weight," i. e. a little, somewhat, almost, well -- nigh, nearly. Combd with vata in exclamation: M ii.123 (m. v. bho anassāma); DhA iii.147 (m. v. therī nāsitā). Often in phrase man' amhi (with pp.). "I nearly was so & so," e. g. Vin i.109 (vuḷho); J i.405 (upakūḷito); iii.435 (matā), 531 (mārāpito). Cp. BSk. manāsmi khāditā MVastu ii.450. Manatā
Manatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. mano] mentality DhsA 143 (in expln of attamanatā). Manasa
Manasa
(adj.) [the -- ˚ form of mano, an enlarged form, for which usually either ˚mana or ˚mānasa] having a mind, with such & such a mind Sn 942 (nibbāna˚ "a nibbāna mind," one who is intent upon N., cp. expln at SnA 567); Pv i.66 (paduṭṭha -- manasā f., maybe ˚mānasā; but PvA 34 explns "paduṭṭha -- cittā paduṭṭhena vā manasā). See also adhimanasa under adhimana. Manassa
Manassa
(nt.) [*manasyaŋ, abstr. der. fr. mana(s)] of a mind, only in cpds. do˚ & so˚ (q. v.). Manāti
Manāti
[cp. Sk. mṛṇāti, mṛ2] to crush, destroy; only in Commentator's fanciful etymological analysis of veramaṇī at DhsA 218 (veraŋ manāti (sic.) vināsetī ti v.) and KhA 24 (veraŋ maṇātī ti v., veraŋ pajahati vinodeti etc.). Manāpa
Manāpa
(adj.) [cp. BSk. manāpa] pleasing, pleasant, charming Sn 22, 759; Dh 339 (˚ssavana); VvA 71; PvA 3, 9. Often in combn piya manāpa, e. g. D ii.19; iii.167; J ii.155; iv.132. -- Opp. a˚, e. g. Pug 32. Manāpika
Manāpika
= manāpa, Vbh 380; Miln 362. Manuja
Manuja
[manu+ja, i. e. sprung from Manu, cp. etym. of manussa s. v.] human being; man A iv.159; Sn 458, 661, 1043 sq.; Dh 306, 334. Nd2 496 (explns as "manussa" & "satta").

-- âdhipa lord of men Mhvs 19, 32. -- inda king of men, great king Sn 553; J vi.98. Manuñña
Manuñña
(adj.) [cp. Class. Sk. manojña] pleasing, delight- ful, beautiful Vv 8417 ( = manorama VvA 340); J i.207; ii.331; Pv ii.122; iv.121; Miln 175, 398; VvA 11, 36; PvA 251; adv. ˚ŋ pleasantly, delightfully J iv.252. -> Opp. a˚ unpleasant J vi.207. -- 520 -- Manute
Manute
[Med. form of maññati] to think, discern, understand DhsA 123. Manussa
Manussa
[fr. manus, cp. Vedic manuṣya. Connected etym. with Goth. manna = man] a human being, man. The popular etym. connects m. with Manu(s), the ancestor of men, e. g. KhA 123: "Manuno apaccā ti manussā, porāṇā pana bhaṇanti ʻ mana -- ussannatāya manussa ʼ; te Jambudīpakā, Aparagoyānikā, Uttarakurukā, Pubbavidehakā ti catubbidhā." Similarly with the other view of connecting it with "mind" VvA 18: "manassa ussannatāya manussā" etc. Cp. also VvA 23, where manussa -- nerayika, ˚peta, ˚tiracchāna are distinguished. -- Sn 75, 307, 333 sq., 611 sq.; Dh 85, 188, 197 sq., 321; Nd1 97 (as gati), 340, 484 (˚phassa of Sn 964); Vism 312; VbhA 455 (var. clans); DhA i.364. -- amanussa not human, a deva, a ghost, a spirit; in cpds. "haunted," ilke ˚kantāra J i.395, ˚ṭṭhāna Vv 843 (cp. VvA 334 where expld); ˚sadda DhA i.315. See also separately amanussa.

-- attabhāva human existence PvA 71, 87, 122. -- itthi a human woman PvA 48, 154. -- inda lord of men S i.69; Mhvs 19, 33. -- khādaka man eater, cannibal (usually appld to Yakkhas) VbhA 451. -- deva (a) "god of men," i. e. king Pv ii.811; (b) men & gods (?) VvA 321 (Hardy, in note takes it as "gods of men," i. e. brāhmaṇā). -- dhamma condition of man, human state VvA 24. See also uttari -- manussa dhamma. -- bhūta as a human, in human form Pv i.112; ii.112. -- loka the world of men Sn 683. Manussatta
Manussatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr, manussa] human existence, state of men It 19; Vv 3416; SnA 48, 51; Sdhp 17 sq. Manussika
Manussika
(adj.) [fr. manussa] see under a˚. Manesikā
Manesikā
(f.) [mano+esikā2] "mind -- searching," i. e. guessing the thoughts of others, mind -- reading; a practice forbidden to bhikkhus D i.7 ( = m. nāma manasā cintita -- jānana -- kīḷā DA i.86); Vin ii.10. Mano & Mana(s)
Mano
& Mana(s) (nt.) [Vedic manaḥ, see etym. under maññati] I. Declension. Like all other nouns of old s -- stems mano has partly retained the s forms (cp. cetah>ceto) & partly follows the a -- declension. The form mano is found throughout in cpds. as mano˚, the other mana at the end of cpds. as ˚mana. From stem manas an adj. manasa is formed and the der. mānasa & manassa ( -- ˚). -- nom. mano freq.; & manaŋ Dh 96, acc. mano Sn 270, 388; SnA 11, and freq.; also manaŋ Sn 659 = A ii.3; v.171=Nett 132; Sn 678; Cp i.85; Vism 466; gen. dat. manaso Sn 470, 967; Dh 390 (manaso piya); Pv ii.111 (manaso piya=manasā piya PvA 71); instr. manasā Sn 330, 365, 834 (m. cintayanto), 1030; M iii.179; Dh 1; Pv ii.97 (m. pi cetaye); also manena DhA i.42; DhsA 72; abl. manato S iv.65; DhA i.23; Vism 466; loc. manasmiŋ S iv.65; manamhi Vism 466; also mane DhA i.23, & manasi (see this in compn manasi karoti, below). -- II. Meaning: mind, thought D iii.96, 102, 206, 226, 244, 269, 281; S i.16, 172; ii.94; M iii.55; A iii.443; v.171; Sn 77, 424, 829, 873; Dh 116, 300; Sdhp 369. -- 1. Mano represents the intellectual functioning of consciousness, while viñnāṇa represents the field of sense and sense -- reaction ("perception"), and citta the subjective aspect of consciousness (cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Buddhist Psychology p. 19) -- The rendering with "mind" covers most of the connotation; sometimes it may be translated "thought." As "mind" it embodies the rational faculty of man, which, as the subjective side in our relation to the objective world, may be regarded as a special sense, acting on the world, a sense adapted to the rationality (reasonableness, dhamma) of the phenomena, as our eye is adapted to the visibility of the latter. Thus it ranges as the 6th sense in the classification of the senses and their respective spheres (the āyatanāni or relations of subject and object, the ajjhattikāni & the bāhirāni: see āyatana 3). These are: (1) cakkhu (eye) which deals with the sight of form (rūpa); (2) sota (ear) dealing with the hearing of sound (sadda); (3) ghāna (nose) with the smelling of smells (gandha); (4) jivhā (tongue), with the tasting of tastes (rasa); (5) kāya (touch), with the touching of tangible objects (phoṭṭhabba); (6) mano, with the sensing (viññāya) of rational objects or cognisables (dhamma). Thus it is the sensus communis (Mrs. Rh. D. Buddh. Psych. 140, 163) which recognises the world as a "mundus sensibilis" (dhamma). Both sides are an inseparable unity: the mind fits the world as the eye fits the light, or in other words: mano is the counterpart of dhammā, the subjective dh. Dhamma in this sense is the rationality or lawfulness of the Universe (see dhamma B. 1), Cosmic Order, Natural Law. It may even be taken quite generally as the "empirical. world" (as Geiger, e. g. interprets it in his Pali Dhamma p. 80 -- 82, pointing out the substitution of vatthu for dhamma at Kvu 126 sq. i. e. the material world), as the world of "things," of phenomena in general without specification as regards sound, sight, smell, etc. -- Dhamma as counterpart of mano is rather an abstract (pluralistic) representation of the world, i. e. the phenomena as such with a certain inherent rationality; manas is the receiver of these phenomena in their abstract meaning, it is the abstract sense, so to speak. Of course, to explain manas and its function one has to resort to terms of materiality, and thus it happens that the term vijānāti, used of manas, is also used of the 5th sense, that of touch (to which mano is closely related, cp. our E. expressions of touch as denoting rational, abstract processes: warm & cold used figuratively; to grasp anything; terror -- stricken; deeply moved feeling>Lat. palpare to palpitate, etc.). We might say of the mind "sensing," that manas "senses" (as a refined sense of touch) the "sensibility" (dhamma) of the objects, or as Cpd. 183 expresses it "cognizable objects." See also kāya II.; and phassa. -- 2. In Buddhist Psychological Logic the concept mano is often more definitely circumscribed by the addition of the terms (man -- ) āyatana, (man -- )indriya and (mano -- )dhātu, which are practically all the same as mano (and its objective correspondent dhammā). Cp. also below No. 3. The additional terms try to give it the rank of a category of thought. On mano -- dhātu and m -- āyatana see also the discourse by S. Z. Aung. Cpd. 256 -- 59, with Mrs. Rh. D.'s apt remarks on p. 259. -- The position of manas among the 6 āyatanas (or indriyas) is one of control over the other 5 (pure and simple senses). This is expressed e. g. at M i.295 (commented on at DhsA 72) and S v.217 (mano nesaŋ gocara -- visayaŋ paccanubhoti: mano enjoys the function -- spheres of the other senses; cp. Geiger, Dhamma 81; as in the Sānkhya: Garbe, Sānkhya Philosophie 252 sq.). Cp. Vin i.36; "ettha ca te mano na ramittha rūpesu saddesu atho rasesu." -- 3. As regards the relation of manas to citta, it may be stated, that citta is more substantial (as indicated by translation "heart"), more elemental as the seat of emotion, whereas manas is the finer element, a subtler feeling or thinking as such. See also citta2 I., and on rel. to viññāṇa & citta see citta2 IV. 2b. In the more popular opinion and general phraseology however manas is almost synonymous with citta as opposed to body, cittaŋ iti pi mano iti pi S ii.94. So in the triad "thought (i. e. intention) speech and action" manas interchanges with citta: see kāya III. -- The formula runs kāyena vācāya manasā, e. g. M iii.178 (sucaritaŋ caritvā); Dh 391 (natthi dukkaṭaŋ), cp. Dh 96; santaŋ tassa manaŋ, santā vācā ca kamma ca. Besides with citta: kāyena vācāya uda cetasā S i.93, 102; A i.63. rakkhitena k. vācāya cittena S ii.231; iv.112. -- It is further combd with citta in the scholastic (popular) definition of manas, found in identical words at all Cy. passages: "mano" is "cittaŋ mano mānasaŋ hadayaŋ, paṇḍaraŋ, man -- āyatanaŋ . . . mano -- viññāna -- dhātu" (mind sensibility). Thus e. g. at Nd1 3 (for mano), 176 (id.); Nd2 494 (which however leaves out cittaŋ in exegesis of Sn 1142, 1413, but has it in No. 495 in exegesis of Sn 1039); Dhs 6 (in defn of citta), 17 (of man' indriyaŋ), 65 (of man -- āyatanaŋ), 68 (of mano -- viññṇa -- dhātu). -> The close relation between the two appears further from their combn in the formula of the ādesanā -- pāṭihāriyaŋ (wonder of manifestation, i. e. the discovery of other peoples' thoughts & intentions), viz. evam pi te mano ittham pi te mano iti pi te cittaŋ: "so & so is in your mind . . . so & so are your emotions"; D i.213= iii.103=A i.170. -- At S i.53 both are mutually influenced in their state of unsteadiness and fear: niccaŋ utrastaŋ idaŋ cittaŋ (heart), niccaŋ ubbiggaŋ idaŋ mano (mind). The same relation (citta as instrument or manifestation of mano) is evident from J i.36, where the passage runs: sīho cittaŋ pasādesi. Satthā tassa manaŋ oloketva vyākāsi . . . At PvA 264 mano (of Pv iv.71) is expld by cittaŋ; pīti mano of Sn 766 (glad of heart) expld at SnA 512 by santuṭṭha -- citto; nibbānamanaso of Sn 942 at SnA 567 by nibbāna -- ninna -- citto. In the phrase yathā -- manena "from his heart," i. e. sincerely, voluntarily DhA i.42, mano clearly acts as citta. -- 4. Phrases: manaŋ uppādeti to make up one's mind, to resolve DhA ii.140 (cp. citt' uppāda); manaŋ karoti: (a) to fix one's mind upon, to give thought to, find pleasure or to delight in (loc.) J iv.223 (rūpe na manaŋ kare=itthi -- rūpe nimittaŋ na gaṇheyyāsi C. Cp. the similar & usual manasi -- karoti in same sense); vi.45 (Pass. gīte karute mano); (b) to make up one's mind DhA ii.87; manaŋ gaŋhāti to "take the mind," take the fancy, to please, to win approval J iv.132; DhA ii.48. -- III. ˚mana: dhamm -- uddhacca -- viggahita˚ A ii.157 (read ˚mano for ˚manā); sankiliṭṭha -- manā narā Th 2, 344; atta˚ pleased; gedhita˚ greedy Pv ii.82; dum˚ depressed in mind, sad or sick at heart D ii.148; S i.103; Vin i.21; A ii.59, 61, 198; Th 2, 484; J i.189; opp. sumana elated, joyful Pv ii.948 (=somanassajāta PvA 132); pīti˚ glad or joyful of heart Sn 766 (expld by tuṭṭha -- mano, haṭṭha -- mano, attamano etc. at Nd1 3; by santuṭṭha -- citto at SnA 512). -- IV. manasi -- karoti (etc.) to fix the mind intently, to bear in mind, take to heart, ponder, think upon, consider, recognise. -- 1. (v.) pres. 1st pl. ˚karoma Vin i.103; imper. 2nd sg. ˚karohi, often in formula "suṇāhi sādhukaŋ m. -- k." "harken and pay attention" D i.124, 157, 249; cp. M. i.7; A i.227; pl. 2nd ˚karotha A i.171; D i.214 (+vitakketha); Pot. ˚kareyyātha D i.90 (taŋ atthaŋ sādhukaŋ k.); ppr. ˚karonto DhsA 207; ger. ˚katvā A ii.116 (aṭṭhikatvā+. . . ohitasoto suṇāti); Pv iii.25 (a˚=anāvajjetvā PvA 181); VvA 87, 92; PvA 62; grd. ˚kātabba Vism 244, 278; DhsA 205; aor. manas -- âkāsi M ii.61; 2nd pl. (Prohib.) (mā) manasâkattha D i.214; A i.171. Pass. manasi -- karīyati Vism 284. -- 2. (n.) manasikāra attention, pondering, fixed thought (cp. Cpd. 12, 28, 40, 282) D iii.104, 108 sq., 112, 227 (yoniso), 273 (ayoniso); M i.296; S ii.3 (cetanā phasso m.); iv.297 (sabba -- nimittānaŋ a˚ inattention to all outward signs of allurement); Nd1 501 (ayoniso); Vbh 320, 325, 373 (yoniso), 425; Vism 241 (paṭikūla˚); VbhA 148 (ayoniso), 248 sq. (as regards the 32 ākāras), 251 (paṭikkūla˚), 255 (n'âtisīghato etc.), 270 (ayoniso), 500; DhA ii.87 (paṭikkula˚); DhsA 133. -- sammā manasikāraŋ anvāya by careful pondering D i.13, 18≈. As adj. (thoughtful) at ThA 273. -- The defn of m. at Vism 466 runs as follows: "kiriyā -- kāro, manamhi kāro m. purima -- manato visadisaŋ manaŋ karotī ti pi m. Svāyaŋ: ārammaṇa -- paṭipādako vīthi -- paṭipādako javana -- p.˚ ti ti -- ppakāro." -- Cpds.: -- kusalatā proficiency in attention D iii.211; -- kosalla id. VbhA 56 (in detail), 224, 226 sq.; Vism 241 (tenfold), 243 (id., viz. anupubbato, nâtisīghato, nâtisāṇikato etc.); PvA 63 (yoniso˚); -- vidhāna arrangement of attention VbhA 69, 71; -- vidhi rule or form of attention Vism 278 (eightfold, viz. gaṇanā, anubandhanā, phusanā, ṭhapanā, sallakhaṇā, vivaṭṭanā, pārisuddhi, tesañ ca paṭipassanā ti). -- The composition form of manas is mano˚, except before vowels, when man' takes its place (as man -- āyatana VbhA 46 sq.).

-- angaṇa (man˚) sphere of ideation (Dhs. trsl. § 58) D iii.243, 280 and passim. -- āvajjana representative cognition: Cpd. 59. -- indriya (man˚) mind -- faculty, category of mind, faculty of ideation (cp. Dhs. trs. § 17; Cpd. pp. 183, 184) D i.70 (with other senses cakkh -- undriyaŋ etc.) iii.226, and passim. -- kamma work of the mind, mental action, associated with kāyakamma (bodily action) and vacī˚ (vocal action) A i.32, 104; Pug 41; Dhs 981 (where omitted in text). -- java [cp. Vedic manojava] swift as thought Vv 6329; PvA 216 (assājāniya). -- daṇḍa "mind -- punishment" (?) corresponding to kāya˚ & vacī -- daṇḍa, M i.372 sq. (Neumann, trsls "Streich in Gedanken"). -- duccarita sin of the mind or thoughts Dh 233; Nd1 386; Pug 60. -- dosa blemish of mind A i.112. -- dvāra door of the mind, threshold of consciousness VbhA 41; DhsA 425, cp. Dhs. trsl. 3 (2p. 2); Cpd. 10. -- dhātu element of apprehension, the ideational faculty (cp. Dhs. trsl. 129, 2p. 119, 120; and p. 2lxxxv sq.) Dhs 457 sq.; Vbh 14, 71, 87 sq., 144, 302; Vism 488; VbhA 80, 81, 239 (physiological foundation), 405; DhsA 263, 425; KhA 53. -- padosa anger in mind, ill -- will D iii.72; M i.377; Sn 702; J iv.29; Dhs 1060 (cp. DhsA 367: manaŋ padussayamāno uppajjatī ti, i. e. to set one's heart at anger). -- padosika (adj.) debauched in mind (by envy & ill -- will), N. of a class of gods D i.20; VbhA 498, 519. Cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie, p. 193 & Kern (Toev. i.163), slightly different: from looking at each other too long. -- pasāda tranquillity of the mind, devotional feeling (towards the Buddha) DhA i.28. -- pubbangama directed by mind, dominated by thought (see pubba2) Dh 1, 2; cp. DhA i.21, 35. -- bhāvanīya of right mind -- culture, self -- composed S iii.1; M iii.261; Vv 3413 (cp. VvA 152: mana -- vaḍḍhanaka); Miln 129. Kern, Toev. i.163 trsls "to be kept in mind with honour." -- mattaka, in phrase mana -- mattakena (adv.) "by mere mind," consisting of mind only, i. e. memorial, as a matter of mind J iv.228. -- maya made of mind, consisting of mind, i. e. formed by the magic power of the mind, magically formed, expld at Vism 405 as "adhiṭṭhāna -- manena nimmitattā m."; at DA i.120 as "jhāna -- manena nibbatta"; at DhA i.23 as "manato nipphanna"; at VvA 10 as "bāhirena paccayena vinā manasā va nibbatta." -- Dh 1, 2; J vi.265 (manomayaŋ sindhavaŋ abhiruyha); Sdhp 259; as quality of iddhi: Vism 379, 406. -- Sometimes a body of this matter can be created by great holiness or knowledge; human beings or gods may be endowed with this power D i.17 (+pītibhakkha, of the Ābhassaras), 34 (attā dibbo rūpī m. sabbanga -- paccangī etc.), 77 (id.), 186 (id.); Vin ii.185 (Koliya -- putto kālaŋ kato aññataraŋ mano -- mayaŋ kāyaŋ upapanno); M i.410 (devā rūpino m.); S iv.71; A i.24; iii.122, 192; iv.235; v.60. -- ratha desired object (lit. what pleases the mind), wish Vism 506 (˚vighāta+icchā -- vighāta); ˚ŋ pūreti to fulfil one's wish Mhvs 8, 27 (puṇṇa -- sabbamanoratha). Manoratha -- pūraṇī (f.) "the wish fulfiller" is the name of the Commentary on the Anguttara Nikāya. -- rama pleasing to the mind, lovely, delightful Sn 50, 337, 1013; Dh 58; Pv ii.958 (phoṭṭhabba), Mhvs 18, 48; VvA 340. -- viññāṇa representative cognition, rationality Vism 489; VbhA 150 (22 fold); DhsA 304, cp. Dhs. trsl. 170 (2p. 157); -- dhātu (element of) representative intellection, mind cognition, the 6th of the viññāṇadhātus or series of cognitional elements corresponding to and based on the 12 simple dhātus, which are the external & internal sense -- relations ( = āyatanāni) Dhs 58; Vbh 14, 71, 87, 89, 144, 176 and passim. See also above II. 3 and discussions at Dhs. trsl. 132 (2p. 122) & introd. p. 53 sq.; Cpd. 1232, 184. -- viññeyya to be comprehended by the mind (cp. Dialogues ii.281n) D ii.281; M iii.55, 57; J iv.195. -- vitakka a thought (of mind) S i.207=Sn 270 (mano is in C. on this passage expld as "kusala -- citta" SnA 303). -- sañcetan' āhāra "nutriment of representative cogitation" ( Dhs. trsl. 31) S ii.11, 13, 99; Dhs 72; Vism 341. -- satta "with mind attached," N. of certain gods, among whom are reborn those who died with minds absorbed in some attachment M i.376. -- samācāra conduct, observance, habit of thought or mind (associated with kāya˚ & vacī˚) M ii.114; iii.45, 49. -- silā (cp. Sk. manaḥ -- śila) red arsenic, often used as a powder for dying and other purposes; the red colour is frequently found in later (Cy.) literature, e. g. J v.416 (+haritāla yellow ointment); Vism 485; DhA iv.113 (id. as cuṇṇa); ThA 70 (Ap. v.20); Mhvs 29, 12; SnA 59 (˚piṇḍa in simile); DhA ii.43 (˚rasa); VvA 288 (˚cuṇṇa -- pịñjara -- vaṇṇa, of ripe mango fruit); PvA 274 (˚vaṇṇāni ambaphalāni); -- tala a flat rock, platform (=silātala) SnA 93, 104; as the platform on which the seat of the Buddha is placed & whence he sends forth the lion's roar: J ii.219; vi.399; VvA 217; as a district of the Himavant: J vi.432; SnA 358. -- hara charming, captivating, beautiful Mhvs 18, 49; N. of a special gem (the wishing gem?) Miln 118, 354. -- 522 -- Manta
Manta
[cp. Vedic mantra, fr. mantray] orig. a divine saying or decision, hence a secret plan [cp. def. of mant at Dhtp 578 by "gutta -- bhāsane"], counsel; hence magic charm, spell. In particular a secret religious code or doctrine, esp. the Brahmanic texts or the Vedas, regarded as such (i. e. as the code of a sect) by the Buddhists. -- 1. with ref. to the Vedas usually in the pl. mantā (the Scriptures, Hymns, Incantations): D i.96; M ii.166 (brahme mante adhiyitvā; mante vāceti); Sn 249 ( = devā SnA 291), 302 (mante ganthetvā, criticised by Bdhgh as brahmanic (: heretic) work in contrast with the ancient Vedas as follows: "vede bhinditvā dhammayutte porāṇa -- mante nāsetvā adhamma -- yutte kūṭa -- mante ganthetvā" SnA 320), 1000 (with ref. to the 32 signs of a Mahāpurisa), 1018; Dh 241 (holy studies); J ii.100; iii.28 (maybe to be classed under 2), 537. -- Sometimes in sg.: mantaŋ parivattenti brahma -- cintitaŋ Pv ii.613 (=veda PvA 97)=Vv 6316 (=veda VvA 265); -- n. pl. also mantāni, meaning "Vedas": Miln 10. -- 2 (doubtful, perhaps as sub group to No. 3) holy scriptures in general, sacred text, secret doctrine S i.57 (mantā dhīra "firm in doctrine" K.S. thus taking mantā as instr.; it may better be taken as mantar); Sn 1042 (where Nd2 497 expls as paññā etc.); Mhvs 5, 109 (Buddha˚ the "mantra" of the B.), 147 (id.). -- 3. divine utterance, a word with supernatural power, a charm, spell, magic art, witchcraft Miln 11 (see about manta in the Jātakas: Fick, Sociale Gliederung 152, 153). At PvA 117 m. is combined with yoga and ascribed to the devas, while y. is referred to men. -- J i.200 (+paritta); iii.511 (˚ŋ karoti to utter a charm, cast a spell); DhA iv.227. There are several special charms mentioned at var. places of the Jātakas, e. g. one called Vedabbha, by means of which under a certain constellation one is able to produce a shower of gems from the air J i.253 (nakkhatta -- yoge laddhe taŋ mantaŋ parivattetvā ākāse ulloki, tato ākāsato satta -- ratana -- vassaŋ vassati). Others are: paṭhavī -- jaya m. (by means of which one conquers the earth) J ii.243; sabba -- rāva -- jānana˚ (of knowing all sounds, of animals) iii.415; nidhi -- uddharana˚ (of finding secret treasures) iii.116; catukaṇṇa˚ (four -- cornered) vi.392, etc. -- 4. advice, counsel, plan, design Vin iv.308 (˚ŋ saŋharati to foil a plan); J vi.438. -- 5. (adj.) ( -- ˚) parivattana˚ a charm that can be said, an effective charm J i.200; bahu˚ knowing many charms, very tricky DhA ii.4; bhinna˚ one who has neglected an advice J vi.437, 438.

-- ajjhāyaka one who studies the Mantras or Holy Scriptures (of the Brahmins) J i.167; DhA iii.361 (tinnaŋ vedānaŋ pāragū m. -- a. brāhmaṇo). -- ajjhena study of the Vedas SnA 314. -- pada = manta 1. D i.104 (=veda -- sankhāta m. DA i.273. -- pāraga one who masters the Vedas; in buddh. sense: one who excels in wisdom Sn 997. manta in this sense is by the Cys. always expld by paññā, e. g., Nd2 497 (as mantā f.); DhA iv.93 (id.), SnA 549 (mantāya pariggahetvā). -- pāragū one who is accomplished in the Vedas Sn 251 (= vedapāragū SnA 293), 690 (=vedānaŋ pāragata SnA 488), 976. -- bandhava one acquainted with the Mantras Sn 140 (=vedabandhū SnA 192); Nd1 11 (where Nd2 455 in same connection reads mitta˚ for manta˚: see under bandhu). -- bhāṇin reciter of the Holy Texts (or charms) Th ii.281; fig. a clever speaker Sn 850 (but Nd1 219 reads manta˚; see mantar) Dh 363 (cp. DhA iv.93; paññāya bhaṇana -- sīla) Th 1, 2. -- yuddka a weird fight, a bewitched battle Mhvs 25, 49 ("cunningly planned b." trsl. Geiger; "diplomatic stratagem," Turnour). Mantanaka
Mantanaka
(adj.) [fr. mantanā] plotting J v.437. Mantanā
Mantanā
f. (& ˚ṇā) [fr. mant] counsel, consultation, de- liberation, advice, command D i.104; A i.199; Vin v.164; J vi.437, 438; Miln 3 (ṇ); DA i.273. Mantar
Mantar
[n. ag. of mant, cp. Sk. *mantṛ a thinker] a sage, seer, wise man, usually appositionally nom. mantā "as a sage," "like a thinker," a form which looks like a fem. and is mostly expld as such by the Commentaries. Mantā has also erroneously been taken as instr. of manta, or as a so -- called ger. of manteti, in which latter two functions it has been expld at "jānitvā." The form has evidently puzzled the old commentators, as early as the Niddesa; through the Abhp (153, 979) it has come down at mantā "wisdom" to Childers. Kern, Toev. s. v. hesitates and only comes half near the truth. The Index to Pj. marks the word with? -> S i.57 (+dhīra; trsln "firm in doctrine"); Sn 159 ("in truth," opp. to musā; SnA 204 explns m. = paññā; tāya paricchinditvā bhāsati), 916 (mantā asmī ti, expld at SnA 562 by "mantāya"), 1040=1042 (=Nd2 497 mantā vuccati paññā etc.); Vv 636 (expld as jānitvā paññāya paricchinditvā VvA 262). -- Besides this form we have a shortened manta (nom.) at Sn 455 (akiñcano+), which is expld at SnA 402 as mantā jānitvā. It is to be noted that for manta -- bhāṇin at Sn 850 the Nd1 219 reads mantā and expls customarily by "mantāya pariggahetvā vācaŋ bhāsati." Mantita
Mantita
[pp. of manteti] 1. considered Th 1, 9; Miln 91. -- 2. advised, given as counsel J vi.438; DA i.273. Mantin
Mantin
(adj. -- n.) [fr. manta] 1. (adj.) giving or observing counsel S i.236. -- 2. (n.) counsellor, minister J vi.437 (paṇḍita m.). Manteti
Manteti
[cp. Vedic mantrayati; mant is given at Dhtp in meaning of gutta -- bhāsana, i. e. "secret talk"] to pronounce in an important (because secret) manner (like a mantra), i. e. 1. to take counsel (with = instr. or saddhiŋ) D i.94, 104 (mantanaŋ manteyya to discuss) 122 (2nd pl. imper. mantavho, as compared with mantayavho J ii.107 besides mantavho ibid. Cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 126); ii.87, 239; Vin iv.308 (mantesuŋ aor.; perhaps "plotted"); Sn p. 107 (= talk privately to); Sn 379; J i.144; vi.525 (mantayitvāna ger.); DA i.263 (imper. mantayatha); PvA 74 (aor. mantayiŋsu). -- 2. to consider, to think over, to be of opinion A i.199 (Pot. mantaye); Miln 91 (grd. mantayitabba & inf. mantayituŋ). -- 3. to announce, advise; pronounce, advise Sn 126; Pv iv.120 (=kathemi kittayāmi PvA 225); SnA 169. -- pp. mantita. -- Cp. ā˚. -- 523 -- Mantha
Mantha
[fr. math] a churning stick, a sort of rice -- cake ( = satthu) Vin i.4, [cp. Vedic mantha "Rührtrank"= homeric kukew/n "Gerstenmehl in Milch verrührt," Zimmer, Altind. Leben 268]. Manda
Manda
(adj.) [cp. late -- Vedic & Epic manda] 1. slow, lazy, indolent; mostly with ref. to the intellectual faculties, therefore: dull, stupid, slow of grasp, ignorant, foolish M i.520 (+momuha); Sn 666, 820 ( = momūha Nd1 153), 1051 (=mohā avidvā etc. Nd2 498); Dh 325 (=amanasikārā manda -- pañña DhA iv.17); J iv.221; Pug 65, 69; KhA 53, 54. -- 2. slow, yielding little result, unprofitable (of udaka, water, with respect to fish; and gocara, feeding on fishes) J i.221. -- 3. [in this meaning probably=Vedic mandra "pleasant, pleasing," although Halāyudha gives mandākṣa as "bashful"] soft, tender (with ref. to eyes), lovely, in cpds. ˚akkhin having lovely (soft) eyes J iii.190; and ˚locana id. Th 2, 375 (kinnari -- manda˚=manda -- puthu -- vilocana ThA 253); Pv i.115 (miga -- manda˚=migī viya mand' akkhī PvA 57); Vv 6411 (miga -- m˚=miga -- cchāpikānaŋ viya mudu siniddha -- diṭṭhi -- nipāta). -- 4. In cpd. picu (or puci˚) manda the Nimb tree, it means "tree" (?) see picu -- manda & puci -- manda. -- 5. In composition with bhū it assumes the form mandī˚, e. g. mandībhūta slowed down, enfeebled, diminished J i.228; VbhA 157.

-- valāhakā a class of fairies or demi -- gods D ii.259 ("fragile spirits of the clouds" trsl.). Mandaka
Mandaka
[?] according to Kern, Toev. s. v. = *mandra (of sound: deep, bass)+ka; a sort of drum J vi.580. Mandatā
Mandatā
(f.) = mandatta Sdhp 19. Mandatta
Mandatta
(nt.) [fr. manda] stupidity M i.520; Pug 69. Mandākinī
Mandākinī
(f.) N. of one of the seven great lakes in the Himavant, enumd at A iv.101; J v.415; Vism 416; SnA 407; DA i.164. (Halāyudha 3, 51 gives m. as a name for the Ganges.) Mandāmukhi
Mandāmukhi
(f.) [dialectical? reading a little doubtful] a coal -- pan, a vessel for holding embers for the sake of heating Vin i.32 ( = aggi -- bhājana C.); VvA 147 (mandamukhī, stands for angara -- kapalla p. 142 in expln of hattha -- patāpaka Vv 3332). Mandārava
Mandārava
[cp. Sk. mandāra] the coral tree, Erythrina fulgens (considered also as one of the 5 celestial trees). The blossoms mentioned D ii.137 fall from the next world. -- D ii.137; Vv 222 (cp. VvA 111); J i.13, 39; Miln 13, 18 (dibbāni m. -- pupphāni abhippavassiŋsu). Mandālaka
Mandālaka
[etym.?] a water -- plant (kind of lotus) J iv.539; vi.47, 279, 564. Mandiya
Mandiya
(nt.) [cp. Sk. māndya] 1. laziness, slackness S i.110. -- 2. dullness of mind, stupidity J iii.38 ( = manda -- bhāva). Mandira
Mandira
(nt.) [cp. late Sk. mandira] a house, edifice, palace Sn 996, 1012; J v.480; vi.269, 270; Dāvs ii.67 (dhātu˚ shrine). Mandī˚
Mandī˚
see manda 5. Mama
Mama
gen. dat. of pers. pron. ahaŋ (q. v.) used quasi independently (as substitute for our "self -- ") in phrase mama -- y -- idaŋ Sn 806 thought of "this is mine," cp. S i.14, i. e. egoism, belief in a real personal entity, expld at Nd1 124 by maññanā conceit, illusion. Also in var. phrases with kṛ in form mamaŋ˚, viz. mamankāra etc. -- As adj. "self -- like, selfish" only neg. amama unselfish Sn 220 ( = mamatta -- virahita SnA 276); Pv iv.134 (=mamankāra -- virahita PvA 230); J iv.372; vi.259. See also amama, cp. māmaka. Mamankāra
Mamankāra
[mamaŋ ( = mama)+kāra, cp. ahaŋ+kāra] selfish attachment, self -- interest, selfishness PvA 230. In canonic books only in combn with ahankāra & mān' ânusaya (belief in an ego and bias of conceit), e. g. at M iii.18, 32; S iii.80, 103, 136, 169; iv.41, 197, 202; A i.132 sq.; iii.444. See also maminkāra. Mamankāraṇa
Mamankāraṇa
(nt.) [fr. mamaŋ+kṛ] treating with tender- ness, solicitude, fondness J v.331. Mamatta
Mamatta
(nt.) [fr. mama] selfishness, self -- love, egoism; conceit, pride in ( -- ˚), attachment to ( -- ˚). Sn 806, 871, 951; Th 1, 717; Nd1 49 (two: taṇhā & diṭṭhi˚); Nd2 499 (id. but as masc.); SnA 276; DhsA 199; PvA 19. Mamāyati
Mamāyati
[Denom. fr. mama, cp. Sk. mamāyate in same meaning (not with Böhtlingk & Roth: envy) at MBh xii.8051 and Aṣṭas Prajñā Pāramitā 254] to be attached to, to be fond of, to cherish, tend, foster, love M i.260; S iii.190; Th 1, 1150; Sn 922 (mamāyetha); Nd1 125 (Bhagavantaŋ); J iv.359 ( = piyāyati C.); Miln 73; VbhA 107 (mamāyatī ti mātā: in pop. etym. of mātā); DhA i.11; SnA 534; Mhvs 20, 4. -- pp. mamāyita. Mamāyanā
Mamāyanā
(f.) = mamatta (selfishness) J vi.259 (˚taṇhā- rahita in expln of amama). Mamāyita
Mamāyita
[pp. of mamāyati] cherished, beloved; as n. nt. attachment, fondness of, pride. -- (adj. or pp.) S ii.94 (etaŋ ajjhositaŋ, m., parāmaṭṭhaŋ); Sn 119; DhA i.11. -- (nt.:) Sn 466, 777, 805, 950 = Dh 367 (expld as: yassa "ahan" ti vā "maman" ti vā gāho n' atthi DhA iv.100); Sn 1056 (cp. Nd2 499). Maminkaroti
Maminkaroti
[mama(ŋ)+kṛ "to make one's own"] to be fond of, to cherish, tend, foster J v.330. Maminkāra
Maminkāra
[for maman˚, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 19] self -- love, self -- interest, egoism M i.486; iii.32 (at both places also ahinkāra for ahankāra). Mamma
Mamma
(nt.) [Vedic marman, fr. mṛd] soft spot of the body, a vital spot (in the Vedas chiefly between the ribs near the heart), joint. A popular etym. and expln of the word is given at Expos. 132n3 (on DhsA 100). -- J ii.228; iii.209; DhsA 396.

-- ghaṭṭana hitting a vital spot (of speech, i. e. backbiting. Cp. piṭṭhi -- maŋsika) DhA iv.182. -- chedaka breaking the joints (or ribs), violent (fig. of hard speech) DhA i.75; DhsA 100. Mammana
Mammana
(adj.) [onomat. cp. babbhara. With Sk. marmara rustling to Lat. fremo to roar = Gr. bre/mw to thud, bronth/ thunder, Ger. brummen. Cp. also Sk. murmura =P. mummura & muramurā, Lat. murmur] stammering, stuttering Vin ii.90 (one of the properties of bad or faulty speech, combd with dubbaca & eḷagalavāca). Maya
Maya
(adj.) ( -- ˚ only) [Vedic maya] made of, consisting of. -- An interesting analysis (interesting for judging the views and sense of etymology of an ancient commentator) of maya is given by Dhammapāla at VvA 10, where he distinguishes 6 meanings of the word, viz. 1. asma -- d -- atthe, i. e. "myself" (as representing mayaŋ!). -- 2. paññatti "regulation" (same as 1. according to example given, but constructed syntectically quite diff. by Dhp.). -- 3. nibbatti "origin" (arising from, with example mano -- maya "produced by mind"). -- 4. manomaya "spiritually" (same as 3). -- 5. vikār' atthe "alteration" (? more like product, consistency, substance), with example "sabbe -- maṭṭikāmaya -- kuṭikā." -- 6. pada -- pūraṇa matte to make up a foot of the verse (or add a syllable for the sake of completeness, with example "dānamaya, sīlamaya" ( = dana; sīla). -- 1. made of: aṭṭhi˚ of bone Vin ii.115; ayo˚ of iron Sn 669; Pv i.104; J iv.492; udum- bara˚ of Ud. wood Mhvs 23, 87; dāru˚ of wood, VvA 8; loha˚ of copper Sn 670; veḷuriya˚ of jewels Vv 21. -- 2. consisting in: dāna˚ giving alms PvA 8, 9; dussa˚ clothes Vv 467; dhamma˚ righteousness S i.137. -- 3. (more as apposition, in the sense as given by Dhp. above under 6) something like, a likeness of, i. e. ingredient, substance, stuff; in āhāra˚ food -- stuff, food J iii.523; utu˚ something like a (change in) season Vism 395; sīla˚ character, having sīla as substance (or simply -- consisting of) It 51 (dāna˚, sīla˚, bhāvanā˚). -- 524 -- Mayaŋ
Mayaŋ
[1st pl. of ahaŋ, for vayaŋ after mayā etc. See ahaŋ] we Vin ii.270; Sn 31, 91, 167; Dh 6; KhA 210. Mayūkha
Mayūkha
[Vedic mayūkha in diff. meaning, viz. a peg for fastening a weft etc., Zimmer Altind. Leben 254] a ray of light Abhp. 64; Dhp. A 426 (old citation, unverified). Mayūra
Mayūra
[Vedic mayūra] a peacock D iii.201; S ii.279; Th 1, 1113; J ii.144, 150 (˚gīva) = DhA i.144; J iv.211 (˚nacca); v.304; vi.172, 272, 483; Vv 111, 358 (= sikhaṇḍin VvA 163); VvA 27 (˚gīva -- vaṇṇa); Sdhp 92. -> The form mayūra occurs nearly always in the Gāthās and is the older form of the two m. and mora . The latter contracted form is found in Prose only and is often used to explain the old form, e, g. at VvA 57. See also mora. Mara
Mara
(adj.) [fr. mṛ] dying; only neg. amara not dying, immortal, in phrase ajarāmara free from decay & death Th ii.512; Pv ii.611. See also amara. Maraṇa
Maraṇa
(nt.) [fr. mṛ] death, as ending this (visible) exist- ence, physical death, in a narrower meaning than kālakiriyā; dying, in cpds. death. -- The customary stock definition of maraṇa runs; yaŋ tesaŋ tesaŋ sattānaŋ tamhā tamhā satta -- nikāyā cuti cavanatā bhedo antaradhānaŋ, maccu maraṇaŋ kālakiriyā, khandhānaŋ bhedo, kaḷebarassa nikkhepo M i.49; Nd1 123, 124 (adds "jīvit' indriyass' upacchedo"). Cp. similar defns of birth and old age under jāti and jarā. -- S i.121; D iii.52, 111 sq., 135 sq., 146 sq., 235, 258 sq.; Sn 32, 318, 426 sq., 575 sq., 742, 806; Nd2 254 ( = maccu); Pug 60; Vbh 99 sq.; VbhA 100 (defn and exegesis in det., cp. Vism 502), 101 (var. kinds of, cp. Vism 229), 156 (lahuka), 157; DhA iii.434; PvA 5, 18, 54, 64, 76, 96; Sdhp 292, 293. -- kāla˚ timely death (opp. akāla˚); khaṇika˚ sudden death Vism 229.

-- anta having death as its end (of jīvita) Dh 148 (cp. DhA ii.366: maraṇa -- sankhāto antako). -- ânussati mindfulness of death Vism 197, 230 sq. (under 8 aspects). -- cetanā intention of death DhA i.20. -- dhamma subject to death PvA 41. -- pariyosana ending in death (of jīvita, life) DhA iii.111, 170. -- pāra "the other side of death," Np. at Nd1 154 (vv. ll. BB purāpuraŋ; SS parammukhaŋ). -- bhaya the fear of death J i.203; vi.398; Vbh 367. -- bhojana food given before death, the last meal J i.197; ii.420. -- mañca death -- bed Vism 47, 549; ˚ka J iv.132. -- mukha the mouth of d. PvA 97 (or should we read ˚dukkha?). -- sati the thought (or mindfulness) of death, meditation on death SnA 54; DhA iii.171; PvA 61, 66. -- samaya the time of death VbhA 157 -- 159 (in var. conditions as regards paṭisandhi). Marati
Marati
[mṛ = Idg. *mer, Vedic mriyate & marate; cp. Av. miryeite, Sk. marta=Gr. broto/s mortal, man; māra death; Goth. maurpr=Ags. mort=Ger. mord; Lith. mir̃ti to die; Lat. morior to die, mors death. The root is identical with that of mṛṇāti to crush: see maṇāti, and mṛdnāti (mardati) same: see mattikā. -- The Dhtp (No. 245) defines mṛ by "pāṇa -- cāge," i. e. giving up breathing] to die. -- pres. marati Mhvs v. spur. after 5, 27; 36, 83; Pot. mareyyaŋ J vi.498; 2nd mareyyāsi J iii.276. ppr. maramāna Mhvs 36, 76. -- aor. amarā J iii.389 (=mata C.; with gloss amari). -- amari Mhvs 36, 96. -- Fut. marissati J iii.214. -- ppr. (=fut.) marissaŋ J iii.214 (for *mariṣyanta). -- Inf. marituŋ D ii.330 (amaritu -- kāma not willing to die); Vism 297 (id.); VvA 207 (positive); and marituye Th 2, 426. -> The form miyyati (mīyati) see separately. -- Caus I. māreti to kill, murder Mhvs 37, 27; PvA 4. Pass. māriyati PvA 5 (ppr. māriyamāna); Sdhp 139 (read mār˚ for marīy˚). -- Caus. II. mārāpeti to cause to be killed J iii.178; Mhvs 37, 28. Cp. pamāreti. Marica
Marica
(nt.) [cp. scientific Sk. marica] black pepper Vin i.201 (allowed as medicine to the bhikkhus); Miln 63.

-- gaccha the M. -- shrub J v.12. -- cuṇṇa powdered pepper, fine pepper J i.455. Mariyādā
Mariyādā
(f.) [cp. Vedic maryādā; perhaps related to Lat. mare sea; s. Walde, Lat. Wtb. under mare] 1. boundary, limit, shore, embankment Vin iii.50; A iii.227 (brāhmaṇānaŋ); D iii.92 = Vism 419; J v.325; vi.536 (tīra˚); Mhvs 34, 70; 36, 59 (vāpi˚); Miln 416. -- 2. strictly defined relation, rule, control J ii.215; Vism 15. -- adj. keeping to the lines (or boundaries), observing strict rules A iii.227 (quoted SnA 318, 325). ˚bandha keeping in control Vin i.287. -- Cp. vimariyādi. Marīci
Marīci
(f.) [Vedic marīci; cp. Gr. marmai/rw to shimmer, glitter, mai_ra dog star, a)maru/ssw sparkle; Lat. merus clear, pure; perhaps also mariyādā to be taken here] 1. a ray of light VvA 166. -- 2. a mirage J vi.209; Vism 496; VbhA 34, 85; often combd with māyā (q. v.), e. g. Nd2 680 Aii; J ii.330.

-- kammaṭṭhāna the "mirage" station of exercise DhA iii.165. -- dhamma like a mirage, unsubstantial J vi.206; Dh 46; DhA i.337. Marīcikā
Marīcikā
(f.) = marīci 2; S iii.141; Vism 479 (in comp.); Dh 170 (=māyā DhA iii.166). Maru
Maru1
[cp. Epic Sk. maru] a region destitute of water, a desert. Always combd with ˚kantāra: Nd1 155 (as Name); J i.107; VbhA 6; VvA 332; PvA 99, 112. Maru
Maru2
[Vedic marut, always in pl. marutaḥ, the gods of the thunder -- storm] 1. pl. marū the genii, spirits of the air Sn 681, 688; Miln 278 (nāga -- yakkha -- nara -- marū; perhaps in meaning 2); Mhvs 5, 27. -- 2. gods in general (˚ -- ) Mhvs 15, 211 (˚gaṇā hosts of gods); 18, 68 (˚narā gods and men). -- Cp. māruta & māluta. Marumba
Marumba
[etym.?] a sort of (sweet -- scented) earth or sand Vin ii.121, 142, 153 (at these passages used for besprinkling a damp living -- cell); iv.33 (pāsāṇā, sakkharā, kaṭhalā, marumbā, vālikā); Mhvs 29, 8; Dpvs 19, 2; Miln 197 (pāsāṇa, sakkhara, khara, m.). Maruvā
Maruvā
(f.) [cp. Sk. mūrvā, perhaps connected with Lat. malva] a species of hemp (Sanseveria roxburghiana) M i.429. At J ii.115 we find reading marūdvā & marucavāka (C.), of uncertain meaning? Mala
Mala
(nt.) [Vedic mala, see etym. under malina. The Dhtm (395) only knows of one root mal or mall in meaning "dhāraṇa" supporting, thus thinking of māḷaka] anything impure, stain (lit. & fig.), dirt. In the Canon mostly fig. of impurities. On mala in similes see J.P.T.S., 1907, 122. -- S i.38 (itthi malaŋ brahmacariyassa), 43 (id.); A i.105 (issā˚); Sn 378, 469, 962, 1132 ( = rāgo malaŋ etc. Nd2 500); Nd1 15, 478 sq.; Dh 239 sq.; Vbh 368 (tīṇi malāni), 389 (nava purisa -- malāni); Pv ii.334 (macchera˚); PvA 45 (id.), 80 (id.), 17 (citta˚); Sdhp 220. -- Compar. malatara a greater stain A iv.195=Dh 243. -- See also māla.

-- âbhibhū overcoming one's sordidness S i.18; J iv.64. -- majjana "dirt wiper," a barber Vin iv.308 (kasāvaṭa m. nihīnajacca); J iii.452; iv.365. -- 525 -- Malina
Malina
(adj.) [fr. mal, *mel to make dirty, to which belongs mala. -- Cp. Lat. mulleus reddish, purple; Gr. me/las black, molu/nw to stain, me/ltos reddish; Lith. mulvas yellowish, mélynas blue; Ohg. māl stain] dirty, stained, impure, usually lit. -- J i.467; Miln 324; DhA i.233; VvA 156; PvA 226; VbhA 498. Malinaka
Malinaka
(adj.) [malina+ka] dirty; with ref. to loha, a kind of copper, in the group of copper belonging to Pisāca VbhA 63. Malya
Malya
(nt.) [for *mālya, fr. māla] flower, garland of flowers Vv 11 ( -- dhara); 21; J v.188 (puppha˚), 420. -> The reading at Pv iii.33 (pahūta˚, adj. having many rows of flowers) is mālya. Malla
Malla
[cp. Sk. malla, perhaps a local term, cp. Cānura] a wrestler Vin ii.105 (˚muṭṭhika) J iv.81 (two, named Cānura and Muṭṭhika "fister"); Vism 31 (muṭṭhika+, i. e. boxing & wrestling as amusements: see mada 1). Perhaps as "porter" Bdhgh on CV v.29. 5 (see Vin ii.319). At Miln 191 the mallā are mentioned as a group or company; their designation might here refer to the Mallas, a tribe, as other tribes are given at the same passage (e. g. Atoṇā, Pisācā). Cp. Bhallaka.

-- gaṇa troop of professional wrestlers Miln 331. -- muṭṭhika boxer Vin ii.105. -- yuddha wrestling contest Miln 232; DhA ii.154; DA i.85. -- yuddhaka a professional wrestler J iv.81. Mallaka
Mallaka
[cp. Sk. mallaka & mallika] 1. a bowl, a vessel (?) used in bathing Vin ii.106 (mallakena nahāyati; or is it a kind of scrubber? Bdhgh's expln of this passage (CV v. i.4) on p. 315 is not quite clear; mallakaŋ nāma makara -- dantike chinditvā mūllakamūla -- saṇṭhānena kata -- mallakaŋ vuccati; akata˚ danta achinditvā kataŋ). It may bear some ref. to malla on p. 105 (see malla) & to mallika -- makula (see below mallikā). -- 2. a cup, drinking vessel A i.250 (udaka˚). -- 3. a bowl J iii.21 (kaŋsa˚ = taṭṭaka). -- 4. in kheḷa˚ a spittoon Vin i.48; ii.175. -- Note. W. Printz in "Bhāsa's Prākrit." p. 45, compares Śaurasenī maḷḷaa, Hindī maḷḷ(a) "cup," maliyā "a small vessel (of wood or cocoanut -- shell) for holding the oil used in unction," mālā "cocoanut -- shell," and adds: probably a Dravidian word. Mallikā
Mallikā
(f.) [cp. Epic Sk. mallikā, Halāyudha 2, 51; Daṇḍin 2, 214] Arabian jasmine Dh 54 (tagara˚); J i.62; iii.291; v.420; Miln 333, 338; DhsA 14; KhA 44. mallika -- makula opening bud of the jasmine Visni 251 = VbhA 234 (˚saṇṭhāna, in descr, of shape of the 4 canine teeth). -- See also mālikā. Maḷorikā
Maḷorikā
(f.) [prob. dialectical for māḷaka: cp. mallaka] a stand, (tripod) for a bowl, formed of sticks Vin ii.124 ( = daṇḍ' ādhāraka Bdhgh on p. 318). Masa
Masa
in line "āsadañ ca masañ jaṭaŋ" at J vi.328 is to be combd with ca, and read as camasañ, i. e. a ladle for sacrificing (C.: aggi -- dahanaŋ). Masati
Masati
[mṛś] to touch: only in cpd. āmasati. The root is expld at Dhtp 305 as "āmasana." Another root masu [mṛś?] is at Dhtm 444 given in meaning "macchera." Does this refer to Sk. mṛṣā ( = P. micchā)? Cp. māsati, māsana etc. Masāṇa
Masāṇa
(nt.) [etym.? prob. provincial & local] a coarse cloth of interwoven hemp and other materials D i.166; M i.308, 345; A i.241, 295; Pug 55. At all passages as a dress worn by certain ascetics. Masāraka
Masāraka
[fr. masāra?] a kind of couch (mañca) or long- chair; enumd under the 4 kinds of mañcā at Vin iv.40. -- See also Vin ii.149; iv.357 (where expld as: mañcapāde vijjhitvā tattha aṭṭaniyo pavesetvā kato: made by boring a hole into the feet of the bed & putting through a notched end); VvA 8, 9. Masāragalla
Masāragalla
(m. & nt.) [cp. Sk. masāra emerald+galva crystal & musāragalva] a precious stone, cat's eye; also called kabara -- maṇi (e. g. VvA 304). It occurs in stereotyped enumn of gems at Vin ii.238 (where it is said to be found in the Ocean) = Miln 267; and at Miln 118, where it always stands next to lohitanka. The same combn (with lohit.) is found at Vv 363; 783=813; 8415. Masi
Masi.
[cp. Class. Sk. maṣi & masi] 1. the fine particles of ashes, in angara˚ charcoal -- dust VvA 67 = DhA iii.309; (agginā) masiŋ karoti to reduce to powder (by fire), to burn to ashes, turn to dust S ii.88=iv.197=A i.204= ii.199. -- 2. soot J i.483 (ukkhali˚ soot on a pot). Masūraka
Masūraka
[connected with masāraka] a bolster J iv.87; vi.185. Massu
Massu
[Vedic śmaśru] the beard D ii.42; Pug 55; J iv.159. -- parūḷha˚ with long -- grown beard DA i.263; bahala˚ thick -- bearded J v.42.

-- kamma beard -- dressing J iii.114; DhA i.253. -- karaṇa shaving DhA i.253; DA i.137. -- kutti [m.+ *kḷpti] beard -- trimming J iii.314 (C. = ˚kiriyā). Massuka
Massuka
(adj.) [fr. massu] bearded; a˚ beardless (of a woman) J ii.185. Maha
Maha
(m. & nt.) [fr. mah, see mahati & cp. Vedic nt. mahas] 1. worthiness, venerableness Miln 357. -- 2. a (religious) festival (in honour of a Saint, as an act of worship) Mhvs 33, 26 (vihārassa mahamhi, loc.); VvA 170 (thūpe ca mahe kate), 200 (id.). mahā˚ a great festival Mhvs 5, 94. bodhi˚ festival of the Bo tree J iv.229. vihāra˚ festival held on the building of a monastery J i.94; VvA 188. hatthi˚ a festival called the elephant f. J iv.95. Mahati
Mahati
[mah; expld by Dhtp 331 as "pūjāyaŋ"] to honour, revere Vv 4711 (pot. med. 1 pl. mahemase, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 129; expld as "mahāmase pūjāmase" at VvA 203). Caus. mahāyati in same sense: ger. mahāyitvāna (poetical) J iv.236. -- Pass. mahīyati Vv 621 ( = pūjīyati VvA 258); 6422 (ppr. mahīyamāna= pūjiyamāna VvA 282). pp. mahita. Mahatta
Mahatta
(nt.) [fr. mahat˚ cp. Sk. mahattva] greatness J v.331 ( = seṭṭhatta C.); Vism 132, 232 sq.; VbhA 278 (Satthu˚, jāti˚, sabrahmacārī˚); DA i.35; VvA 191. Mahant
Mahant
(adj.) [Vedic mahant, which by Grassmann is taken as ppr. to mah, but in all probability the n is an original suffix. -- cp. Av. mazant, Sk. compar. mahīyān; Gr. me/gas (compar. mei/zwn), Lat. magnus, Goth. mikils = Ohg. mihhil=E. much] great, extensive, big; important, venerable. -- nom. mahā Sn 1008; Mhvs 22, 27. Shortened to maha in cpd. pitāmaha (following a -- decl.) (paternal) grandfather PvA 41; & mātāmaha (maternal) grandfather (q. v.). -- instr. mahatā Sn 1027. -- pl. nom. mahantā Sn 578 (opp. daharā). -- loc. mahati Miln 254. -- f. mahī -- 1. one of the 5 great rivers (Np.). -- 2. the earth. See separately. -- nt. mahantaŋ used as adv., meaning "very much, greatly" J v.170; DhA iv.232. Also in cpd. mahantabhāva greatness, loftiness, sublimity DhsA 44. -- Compar. mahantatara DhA ii.63, and with dimin. suffix ˚ka J iii.237. -- The regular paraphrase of mahā in the Niddesa is "agga, seṭṭha, visiṭṭha, pāmokkha, uttama, pavara," see Nd2 502.

Note on mahā & cpds. -- A. In certain cpds. the combn with mahā (mah˚) has become so established & customary (often through politeness in using mahā˚ for the simple term), that the cpd. is felt as an inseparable unity and a sort of "antique" word, in which the 2nd part either does not occur any more by itself or only very rarely, as mah' aṇṇava, which is more freq. than aṇṇava; mah' âbhisakka, where abhisakka does not occur by itself; cp. mahânubhāva, mahiddhika, mahaggha; or is obscured in its derivation through constant use with mahā, like mahesī [mah+esī, or īsī], mahesakkha [mah+esakkha]; mahallaka [mah+*ariyaka]; mahāmatta. Cp. E. great -- coat, Gr. a)rx˚ in a)rx -- iatro/s = Ger. arzt. Only a limited selection of cpd. -- words is given, consisting of more frequent or idiomatic terms. Practically any word may be enlarged & emphasized in meaning by prefixing mahā. Sometimes a mahā˚ lends to special events a standard (historical) significance, so changing the common word into a noun proper, e. g. Mah -- âbhinikkhammana, Mahāpavāraṇa. -- B. Mahā occurs in cpds. in (a) an elided form mah before a & i; (b) shortened to maha˚ before g, d, p, b with doubling of these consonants; (c) in the regular form mahā˚: usually before consonants, sometimes before vowels. This form is contracted with foll. i to e and foll. u to o. In the foll. list of cpds. we have arranged the material according to these bases.

mah˚: -- aggha very costly, precious Pug 34; Mhvs 27, 35; PvA 77, 87; Sdhp 18. -- agghatā costliness, great value Pug 34, Sdhp 26. -- aṇṇava the (great) ocean Mhvs 19, 17. -- atthiya (for ˚atthika) of great importance or use, very useful, profitable J iii.368. -- andhakāra deep darkness Vism 417. -- assāsin fully refreshed, very comfortable S i.81.

maha˚: -- ggata "become great," enlarged, extensive, fig. lofty, very great M i.263; ii.122; A ii.63, 184; iii.18; VvA 155; J v.113; Dhs 1020 (trsln: "having a wider scope") Vbh 16, 24, 62, 74, 126, 270, 326; Tikp. 45; Vism 410, 430 sq. (˚ārammaṇa); VbhA 154 (id.), 159 (˚citta); DhsA 44. See on term Cpd. 4, 12, 55, 1014; [cp. BSk. mahadgata Divy 227]. -- gghasa eating much, greedy, gluttonous A iv.92; P iii.111 ( = bahubhojana PvA 175); Miln 288; Dh 325 (cp. DhA iv.16). -- ddhana having great riches (often combd with mahābhoga) Dh 123; J iv.15, 22. -- pphala much fruit; adj. bearing much fruit, rich in result A iv.60, 237 sq.; Sn 191, 486; Dh 312, 356 sq. -- bbala (a) a strong force, a great army Mhvs 10, 68 (v. l., T. has mahā -- bala); (b) of great strength, mighty, powerful J iii.114; Mhvs 23, 92; 25, 9. -- bbhaya great fear, terror S i.37; Sn 753, 1032, 1092, ep. Nd2 501.

mahå˚: -- anas kitchen Mhvs 5, 27 (spurious stanza). -- anasa kitchen J ii.361; iii.314; v.368; vi.349; DhA iii.309; ThA 5. -- anila a gale Mhvs 3, 42. -- ānisaŋsa deserving great praise (see s. v.), [cp. BSk. mahānuśaŋsa MVastu iii.221]. -- ānubhāva majesty, adj. wonderful, splendid J i.194; J vi.331; Pv iii.31; PvA 117, 136, 145, 272. -- aparādhika very guilty J i.114. -- abhinikkhamaṇa the great renunciation DhA i.85. -- abhisakka [abhi+śak] very powerful Th 1, 1111. -- amacca chief minister Mhvs 19, 12. -- araha costly Mhvs 3, 21; 5, 75; 27, 39; PvA 77, 141, 160.

mahā˚: -- alasa great sloth DhA iii.410. -- avīci the great Purgatory Avīci, freq. -- isi in poetry for mahesi at J v.321. -- upaṭṭhāna great state room (of a king) SnA 84. -- upāsikā a great female follower (of the Buddha) VvA 5. -- karuṇā great compassion DhA i.106, 367. -- kāya a great body Miln 16. -- gaṇa a great crowd or community DhA i.154. -- gaṇḍa a large tumour VbhA 104. -- gedha great greed Sn 819; Nd1 151. -- cāga great liberality, adj. munificent Mhvs 27, 47. As ˚paricāga at SnA 295 ( = mahādāna). -- jana a great crowd, collectively for "the people," a multitude PvA 6, 19, 78; Mhvs 3, 13. -- taṇha (adj.) very thirsty J ii.441. -- tala "great surface," the large flat roof on the top of a palace (=upari -- pāsāda -- tala) J vi.40. -- dāna (see under dāna) the great gift (to the bhikkhus) a special great offering of food & presents given by laymen to the Buddha & his followers as a meritorious deed, usually lasting for a week or more Mhvs 27, 46; PvA 111, 112. -- dhana (having) great wealth PvA 3, 78. -- naraka (a) great Hell, see naraka. -- nāga a great elephant Dh 312; DhA iv.4. -- nāma N. of a plant Vin i.185; ii.267. -- niddā deep sleep PvA 47. -- nibbāna the great N. DhA iv.110. -- niraya (a) great hell SnA 309, 480; PvA 52. See Niraya & cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie 199, 200. -- nīla sapphire VvA 111. -- pañña very wise D iii.158; A iii.244; Dh 352; DhA iv.71. -- patha high road D i.102; Sn 139; Dh 58; Vism 235; DhA i.445. -- paduma a great lotus J v.39; also a vast number & hence a name of a purgatory, cp. Divy 67; Kirfel, Kosmographie 205. -- pitā grandfather PvA 107. -- purisa a great man, a hero, a man born to greatness, a man destined by fate to be a Ruler or a Saviour of the World. A being thus favoured by fate possesses (32) marks (lakkhaṇāni) by which people recognise his vocation or prophesy his greatness. A detailed list of these 32 marks (which probably date back to mythological origin & were originally attributed to Devas) is found at D ii.17, 19, passim. -- D iii.287; Sn 1040 sq.; Dh 352; Miln 10; SnA 184, 187 sq., 223, 258, 357, 384 sq.; ˚lakkhaṇāni: D i.88, 105, 116; Sn 549, 1000 sq.; Vism 234; VvA 315; DhA ii.41. -- bhūta usually in pl. ˚bhūta(ni) (cattāro & cattā) the 4 great elements (see bhūta), being paṭhavī, āpo, tejo, vāyo, D i.76; Nd1 266; Vbh 13, 70 sq.; Vism 366 sq.; Tikp 39, 56 sq., 74 sq., 248 sq.; VbhA 42, 169, 253. -- See Cpd. 154, 268 sq., & cp. dhātu 1. -- bhoga great wealth, adj. wealthy PvA 3, 78. -- maccha a great fish, seamonster J i.483. -- mati very wise, clever Mhvs 14, 22; 19, 84 (f. ˚ī); 33, 100 (pl. ˚ī). -- matta [cp. Sk. mahāmātra] a king's chief minister, alias Prime Minister, "who was the highest Officer -- of -- State and real Head of the Executive" (Banerjea, Public Administration in Ancient India, 1916). His position is of such importance, that he even ranges as a rājā or king: Vin iii.47 (rājā . . . akkhadassā mahāmattā ye vā pana chejjabhejjaŋ anusāsanti ete rājāno nāma). -- Note. An acc. sg. mahā -- mattānaŋ we find at A i.154 (formed after the prec. rājānaŋ). -- Vin i.74 (where two ranks are given: senā -- nāyakā m. -- mattā the m. of defence, and vohārikā m. -- m. those of law); D i.7; iii.88; iii.64 (here with Ep. khattiya); A i.154, 252, 279; iii.128; Vin iv.224; Vism 121; VbhA 312 (in simile of two m.), 340; PvA 169. Cp. Fick. Sociale Gliederung 92, 99, 101. -- muni great seer Sn 31. -- megha a big cloud, thunder cloud M ii.117; Sn 30; Vism 417. -- yañña the great sacrifice D i.138 sq., 141 (cp. A ii.207≈). -- yasa great fame Vv 216; Mhys 5, 22. -- ranga [cp. Sk. m. -- rajana], safflower, used for dyeing Vin i.185 (sandals); ii 267 (cloaks). -- rājā great king, king, very freq.: see rājā. -- rukkha a great tree Vism 413 (literally); Miln 254 (id.), otherwise the plant euphorbia tortilis (cp. Zimmer, Altind. Leben 129). -- lātā ( -- pasādhana) a lady's parure called "great creeper" DhA i.392; VvA 165 ( -- pilandhana); same SnA 520. -- vātapāna main window DhA iv.203. -- vīṇā a great lute Vism 354; VbhA 58. -- vīra (great) hero Sn 543, 562. -- satta "the great being" or a Bodhisatta VvA 137 (v. l. SS. bodhisatta). [Cp. BSk. mahāsattva, e. g. Jtm 32]. -- samudda the sea, the occean Mhvs 19, 18; Vism 403; SnA 30, 371; PvA 47. -- sara a great lake; usually as satta -- mahāsarā the 7 great lakes of the Himavant (see sara), enumd e. g. at Vism 416. -- sāra (of) great sap, i. e. great wealth, adj. very rich J i.463 (˚kula, perhaps to be read mahāsāla -- kula). -- sāla (adj.) having great halls, Ep. of rich people (especially brāhmaṇas) D i.136, 235; iii.16, 20; J ii.272 (˚kula); iv.237 (id.), 325 (id.); v.227 (id.); Pug 56; VbhA 519; DhA iii.193. -- sāvaka [cp. BSk. mahāśrāvaka Divy 489] a great disciple Vism 98 (asīti ˚ā); DhA ii.93. -- senagutta title of a high official (Chancellor of the Exchequer?) J v.115; vi.2. -- hatthi a large elephant M i.184 (˚pada elephant's foot, as the largest of all animal feet), referred to as simile (˚opama) at Vism 243, 347, 348.

mahi˚ [mah' i˚]: -- iccha full of desire, lustful, greedy A iv.229; Th 1, 898; It 91; J i.8; ii.441. -- icchatā arrogance, ostentatiousness A iv.280; VbhA 472. -- iddhika [mahā+iddhi+ka] of great power, always combd with mah -- ânubhāva to denote great influence, high position & majesty Vin i.31; ii.193; iii.101; D i.78, 180 (devatā), 213; S i.145 sq.; ii.155, 274 sq., 284 sq.; iv.323; v.265, 271 sq., 288 sq.; A v.129; J vi.483 (said of the Ocean); PvA 6, 136, 145. -- inda (ghosa) lit. the roar of the Great Indra, Indra here to be taken in his function as sky (rain) god, thus: the thunder of the rain -- god Th 1, 1108. [Cp. BSk. māhendra in ˚bhavana "the abode of the Great Indra," and vaṛṣa "the rain of the Gr. I." (here as rain -- god), both at AvŚ i.210]. -- issāsa [Sk. maheṣvāsa] great in the art of the bow, a great archer S i.185; DhA i.358.

mahe˚ [mahā+i]: -- esakkha [mahā+īsa+khyaŋ; fr. īś] possessing great power or authority A ii.204; iii.244; Nd2 5032; Vism 419; Sdhp 511. The BSk. form is maheṣākhya evidently differing in its etymology. The P. etym. rests on the same grounds as esitatta in mahesi DhA iv.232. -- esi [mahā+isi; Sk. maharṣi] a great Sage A ii.26; Sn 208, 481, 646, 915, 1057, 1061; Th 1, 1132; 2, 149; Dh 422 (expld at DhA iv.232 as "mahantaŋ sīla -- kkhandh' ādīnaŋ esitattā m." cp. the similar expln at Nd2 503); Nd1 343; Vism 505; VbhA 110; PvA 1. -- esiyā = mahesī J vi.483. -- esī [in P. to be taken as mah+iś, as f. to īsa, but in Sk. (Vedic) as f. of mahiṣa, buffalo] chief queen, king's first wife, king's consort; also the wife of a great personage J ii.410; v.45; vi.425; Pug 56; Mhvs 2, 22 (pl. mahesiyo); VvA 184 (sixteen). Usually as agga -- mahesī, e. g. J i.262; iii.187, 393; v.88. -- esitta state of chief consort, queenship J v.443; Pv ii.1310; ThA 37; VvA 102. -- eseyya=˚esitta J v.91.

-- maho [mahā+u, or+o]: -- ogha the great flood (see ogha) Sn 4, 945; Dh 47, 287; DhA iii.433. -- odadhi the (great) ocean, the sea Sn 720, 1134; Miln 224; Mhvs 18, 8. -- odara big belly J vi.358 (addressing a king's minister). -- odika full of water, having much water; deep, full (of a river) Sn 319; J ii.159; Miln 346. -- oraga [m+uraga] a great snake J v.165. -- 527 -- Mahantatā
Mahantatā
(f.) [fr. mahant˚] greatness DhA ii.62. At M iii.24 the spelling is mahattatā (tt misread for nt?), at M i.184 however mahantatta (nt.). Mahallaka
Mahallaka
(adj. n.) [a distorted mah -- ariyaka> ayyaka> allaka; cp. ayyaka] old, venerable, of great age; an old man D i.90 (opp. taruṇa), 94, 114, 247; Sn 313, 603; Nd2 261 (vuḍḍha m. andhagata etc.) J iv.482 (opp. dahara young); Vv 461 ( = mahanto VvA 199); DhA i.7, 278; ii.4, 55, 91; SnA 313. Compar. mahallakatara DhA ii.18. -- f. mahallikā an old woman Miln 16; Mhvs 21, 27; VvA 105; PvA 149 (=addhagata). -- [The BSk. form is mahalla, e. g. Divy 329, 520.] Mahikā
Mahikā
(f.) [cp. *Sk. mahikā] fog, frost, cold ( = himaŋ DhsA 317) Vin ii.295= Miln 273; Sn 669; Miln 299; VvA 134 (fog). -- As mahiyā at A ii.53. Mahita
Mahita
[pp. of mahati or mahīyati] honoured, revered M ii.110; Miln 278; Sdhp 276. Mahanīya
Mahanīya
(adj.) [grd. of mahati] praiseworthy VvA 97. Mahilā
Mahilā
(f.) [*Sk. mahilā] woman, female Vin ii.281 (˚titthe at the women's bathing place); J i.188; Dpvs ix.4; ThA 271. Mahisa, Mahīsa, Mahiŋsa
Mahisa,
Mahīsa, Mahiŋsa [cp. Vedic mahiṣa, an enlarged form of mahā; the P. etym. evidently to be connected with mahā+īś, because of mahīsa>mahiŋsa] a buffalo. -- mahisa: D i.6 (˚yuddha b. -- fight), 9; J iii.26 (vana˚ wild b.); Mhvs 25, 36 (T. māhisaŋ). -- mahīsa J vi.110. -- mahiŋsa Vism 191, & in Np. mahiŋsaka -- maṇḍala the Andhra country J i.356, cp. Mahiŋsaka -- raṭṭha VbhA 4; as Mahisa -- maṇḍala at Mhvs 12, 29. -- Note. The P. pop. etym. is propounded by Bdhgh as "mahiyaŋ setī ti mahiso" (he lies on the ground, that is why he is a buffalo) DhsA 62. Mahī
Mahī
(f.) [f. of mah, base of mahant, Vedic mahī] the earth (lit. Great One) Mhvs 5, 266; Sdhp 424, 472; loc. mahiyā Miln 128; mahiyaŋ DhsA 62. -- Note. As mahī is only found in very late P. literature, it must have been re -- introduced from Sk. sources, and is note a direct correspondent of Vedic mahī.

-- tala the ground (of the earth) Mhvs 5, 54. -- dhara mountain Miln 343; Mhvs 14, 3; 28, 22 (v. l. mahin˚). -- pa king (of the earth) Mhvs 14, 22. -- pati king Mhvs 5, 48; 33, 32. -- pāla king Mhvs 4, 38; 5, 265. -- ruha tree ("growing out of the earth") Mhvs 14, 18, 18, 19. Mā
Mā
(indecl.) [cp. Vedic mā, Gr. mh/] prohibition particle: not, do not, let us hope not, I wish that . . . not [cp. Lat. utinam & ne]. Constructed with various tenses, e. g. 1. with aor. (prohibitive tense): mā evaŋ akattha do not thus DhA i.7; mā abhaṇi speak not Pv i.33; mā cintayittha do not worry DhA i.12; mā parihāyi I hope he will not go short (or be deprived) of . . . M i.444; mā bhāyi fear not J ii.159; mā mariŋsu I hope they will not die J iii.55; mā (te) rucci may it not please (you), i. e. please do not Vin ii.198; mā evaŋ ruccittha id. DhA i.13. -- 2. with imper.: mā gaccha J i.152; mā detha J iii.275. mā ghāta do not kill: see māghāta. -- 3. with pot.: mā anuyuñjetha Dh 27; mā bhuñjetha let him not eat Mhvs 25, 113; mā vadetha J vi.364. -> 4. with indic. pres.: mā paṭilabhati A v.194. -- A peculiar use is found in phrase ānemi mā ānemi shall I bring it or not? J vi.334. -- 5. mā = na (simple negation) in māsakkhimhā we could not Vin iii.23. Mā
--
Mā [the short form of māsa, direct dern fr. mā: see mināti] see puṇṇa -- mā. Māgadha
Māgadha
[fr. Magadha] scent -- seller, (lit. "from Magadha") Pv ii.937 ( = gandhin PvA 127). Māgadhaka
Māgadhaka
(nt.) [māgadha+ka, lit. "from Magadha"] garlic Vin iv.259 (lasuṇaŋ nāma māgadhakaŋ vuccati). Māgavika
Māgavika
[guṇa -- form to *mṛga = P. miga; Sk. mārga- vika] a deerstalker, huntsman A ii.207; Pug 56; Miln 364, 412; PvA 207. Māghāta
Māghāta
(nt.) [lit. mā ghāta "kill not"] the injunction not to kill, non -- killing order (with ref. to the killing of animals J iii.428 (˚bheri, the drum announcing this order); iv.115; vi.346 (uposatha˚). Māngalya
Māngalya
(adj.) [fr. mangala] auspicious, fortunate, bringing about fulfilment of wishes J vi.179. Māṇava
Māṇava
[cp. Sk. māṇava] a youth, young man, esp. a young Brahmin Sn 1022, 1027, 1028; J iv.391 (brāhmaṇa˚); DA i.36 = satto pi coro pi taruṇo pi; DhA i.89. pl. māṇavā men Th 2, 112. -- The spelling mānava occurs at Sn 456, 589, & Pv i.87 (=men Th ii.112; kumāra PvA 41). Māṇavaka
Māṇavaka
[fr. māṇava] a young man, youth a Brahmin Miln 101; in general: young, e. g. nāga˚ a young serpent J iii.276; f. ˚ikā a Brahmin girl J i.290; Miln 101; nāga˚ a young female serpent J iii.275; DhA iii.232. Mātanga
Mātanga
[cp. Epic Sk. mātanga, dial.] an elephant Dh 329, 330 (here as Ep. of nāga); J iii.389; vi.47; Vv 439; Miln 368. -- 2. a man of a low class [cp. BSk. mātangī Divy 397] SnA 185 sq. (as Np.). Mātar
Mātar
(f.) [Vedic mātā, stem mātar˚, Av. mātar -- , Gr. mh/thr (Doric ma/thr) Lat. māter, Oir. māthir, Ohg. muoter, Ags. modor = mother; Cp. further Gr. mh/tra uterus, Lat. mātrix id., Sk. mātṛkā mother, grandmother, Ger. mieder corset. From Idg. *ma, onomat. part., cp. "mamma"] mother. -- Cases: nom. sg. mātā Sn 296; Dh 43; J iv.463; v.83; vi.117; Nd2 504 (def. as janikā); gen. mātu Th 1, 473; Vin i.17; J i.52; mātuyā J i.53; Mhvs 10, 80; PvA 31; and mātāya J i.62; dat. mātu Mhvs 9, 19; acc. mātaraŋ Sn 60, 124; Dh 294; instr. mātarā Th 2, 212; loc. mātari Dh 284 -- pl. does not occur. In combn with pitā father, mātā always precedes the former, thus mātā -- pitaro (pl.) "mother & father" (see below). -- mātito (abl. -- adv.) from the mother's side (cp. pitito) D i.113; A iii.151; PvA 29. -- On mātā in simile see J.P.T.S. 1907, 122; cp. Vism 321 (simile of a mother's solicitude for her children). Similarly the pop. etym. of mātā is given, with "mamāyatī ti mātā" at VbhA 107. -- The 4 bases of m. in compn are: mātā˚, māti˚, mātu˚, & matti˚. -- 1. mātā˚: -- pitaro mother & father D iii.66, 188 sq.; Sn 404; Miln 12. See also pitā. -- pitika having mother & father DhA ii.2. -- pitiṭṭhāna place of m. & f. DhA ii.95. -- pettika having m. & f., of m. & f. Nd2 385 (nāma -- gotta). -- petti -- bhāra supporting one's m. & f. S i.228; J i.202; vi.498. -- maha maternal grandfather J iv.146; DhA i.346. -- 2. māti˚: -- devatā protector or guardian of one's mother J iii.422 (gloss: mātu -- devatā viya). -- pakkha the mother's side DhA i.4 (+pitipakkha). -- posaka supporting one's m. J iii.422 (v. l. mātu˚). -- 3. mātu˚: -- upaṭṭhāna (spelt mātupaṭṭh˚) reverence towards one's m. DhA iv.14. -- kucchi m's womb D ii.12; Vism 560 (˚gata); VbhA 96; DhA i.127. -- gāma "genex feminarum," womanfolk, women (collectively cp. Ger, frauen -- zimmer) A ii.126; Vin iv.175; M i.448, 462; iii.126; S iv.239 sq.; J i.201; iii.90, 530. (pl. ˚gāmā p. 531); Pug 68; SnA 355; PvA 271; VvA 77. -- ghāta & (usually) ˚ka a matricide (+pitu -- ghātaka; see abhiṭhāna) Vin i.168, 320; Miln 310; Tikp 167 sq.; VbhA 425. -- ghātikamma matricide Tikp. 281. -- bhūta having been his mother PvA 78. -- mattin (see matta1 4) whatever is a mother S iv.110 (˚īsu mātucittaŋ upaṭṭhapeti foster the thought of mother towards whatever is a mother, where in sequence with bhaginī -- mattin & dhītumattin). -- hadaya a mother's heart PvA 63. -- 4. matti˚: see matti -- sambhava. -- 528 -- Mātika
--
Mātika (adj.) [fr. mātā, Sk. mātṛka] -- mother; in mata˚ one whose mother is dead, lit. a "dead -- mother -- ed," J ii.131; iii.213. Also neg. amātika without a mother J v.251. Mātikā
Mātikā
(f.) [*Sk. mātṛkā] 1. a water course Vism 554 (˚âtikkamaka); Mhvs 35, 96; 37, 50; SnA 500 ( = sobbha); DhA ii.141 (its purpose: "ito c' ito ca udakaŋ haritvā attano sassa -- kammaŋ sampādenti"); VvA 301. -- 2. tabulation, register, tabulated summary, condensed contents, esp. of philosophical parts of the Canonical books in the Abhidhamma; used in Vinaya in place of Abhidhamma Piṭaka; probably the original form of that (later) Piṭaka Vin i.119, 337; ii.8 [cp. semantically in similar sense Lat. mātrix=E. matric, i. e. register. In BSḳ. mātrikā Divy 18, 333] A i.117 (Dhamma -- dhara, Vinaya -- dhara, Mātikā -- dhara; here equivalent to Abhidhamma); Vism 312 (so pañcavasso hutvā dve mātikā paguṇaŋ katvā pavāretvā); SnA 15; KhA 37, 99, 117.

-- nikkhepa putting down of a summary, tabulation Vism 536, 540. The summary itself is sometimes called nikkhepa, e. g. the 4th part of the Atthasālinī (DhsA pp. 343 -- 409) is called nikkhepa -- kaṇḍa or chapter of the summary; similarly m. -- nikkhepa vāra at Tikp. 11. Mātiya
Mātiya
(adj. n.) [the diaeretic form of macca, used in verse, cp. Sk. martya & Vedic (poetical) martia] (a) mortal J vi.100 (C. macca; gloss māṇava). Mātu˚
Mātu˚
see mātā. Mātuka
Mātuka
(nt.) [cp. Sk. māṭṛka, fr. mātṛ = mātar] "genetrix," matrix, origin, cause Th 1, 612. Mātucchā
Mātucchā
(f.) [Sk. mātṛ -- ṣvasā] mother's sister, maternal aunt Vin ii.254, 256; J iv.390; Miln 240. -- putta aunt's son, male first cousin (from mother's sister's side) S ii.281; Ud 24; DhA i.119. Cp. mātula -- dhītā. Mātula
Mātula
[cp. Epic Sk. mātula & semantically Lat. matruus, i. e. one who belongs to the mother] a mother's brother, an uncle J i.225; DhA i.15; PvA 58, 60.

-- dhītā (the complement of mātucchā -- putta) uncle's daughter, female first cousin (from mother's brother's side) J ii.119; DhA iii.290; PvA 55. Mātulaka
Mātulaka
= mātula DhA i.182. Mātulānī
Mātulānī
(f.) [Sk. mātulānī, semantically cp. Lat. mater tera] a mother's brother's wife, an aunt J i.387; iv.184; PvA 55, 58. Mātulunga
Mātulunga
(nt.) [cp. Class. Sk. mātulunga; dialectical?] a citron J iii.319 ( = mella; v. l. bella). Mādisa
Mādisa
(adj.) [Epic & Class. Sk. mādṛś & mādṛśa, maŋ+ dṛś] one like me Sn 482; Mhvs 5, 193; VvA 207; DhA i.284; PvA 76, 123. Māna
Māna
[late Vedic & Epic Sk. māna, fr. man, orig. meaning perhaps "high opinions" (i. e. No. 2); hence "pride" (No. 1). Def. of root see partly under māneti, partly under mināti] 1. pride, conceit, arrogance (cittassa uṇṇati Nd1 80; Vbh 350). Māna is one of the Saññojanas. It is one of the principal obstacles to Arahantship. A detailed analysis of māna in tenfold aspect is given at Nd1 80 = Nd2 505; ending with defn "māno maññanā . . . ketukamyatā" etc. (cp. Vbh 350 & see under mada). On term see also Dhs § 1116; Dhs trsl. 298 (= 2275) sq. -- D iii.234; S i.4; Sn 132, 370; 469, 537, 786, 889, 943, Dh 74, 150, 407; Nd1 298; Pug 18; Vbh 345 sq., 353 sq., 383 (7 fold), 389 (9 fold); VbhA 486 sq. ("seyyo 'ham asmī ti" etc.); Tikp 166, 278; DhA iii.118, 252; Sdhp 500, 539. -- asmi˚ pride of self, as real egoism D iii.273. -- 2. honour, respect J v.331 (+pūjā). Usually in cpd. bahumāna great respect Mhvs 20, 46; PvA 50. Also as māni˚ in compn with karoti: see mānikata. Cp. vi˚, sam˚

-- âtimāna pride & conceit, very great (self -- ) pride. or all kinds of conceit (see 10 fold māna at Nd1 80 = Nd2 505) D iii.86; Sn 245, 830, 862; Nd1 170, 257. -- atthe at Th 1, 214 read mânatthe=mā anatthe. -- ânusaya the predisposition or bad tendency of pride M i.486; D iii.254, 282; Sn 342. Cp. mamankāra. -- âbhisamaya full grasp (i. e. understanding) of pride (with sammā˚) M i.122 (which Kern. Toev. s. v. interprets wrongly as "waanvoorstelling"); S iv.205 sq., 399; Sn 342 (=mānassa abhisamayo khayo vayo pahānaŋ SnA 344). -- jātika proud by nature J i.88. -- thaddha stubborn in pride, stiff -- necked J i.88, 224. -- da inspiring respect Mhvs 33, 82. -- mada ( -- matta) (drunk with) the intoxicating draught of pride J ii.259; PvA 86. -- saññojana the fetter of pride or arrogance D iii.254; Dhs 1116=1233. See under saññojana & cp. formulae under mada 2. -- satta cleaving to conceit Sn 473. -- salla the sting or dart of pride Nd1 59 (one of the 7 sallāni, viz. rāga, dosa, moha etc., expld in detail on p. 413. See other series with similar terms & māna at Nd2 p. 237 s. v. rāga). Māna
Māna2
(nt.) [fr. mā: see mināti; Vedic māna has 2 meanings, viz. "measure," and "building" (cp. māpeti)] 1. measure Vin iii.149 (abbhantarima inner, bāhirima outer); DA i.140. -- ˚kūṭa cheating in measure, false measure Pug 58; PvA 278. -- 2. a certain measure, a Māna (cp. mānikā & manaŋ) J i.468 (aḍḍha˚ half a M., according to C. equal to 8 nāḷis). Mānatta
Mānatta
(nt.) [a doubtful word, prob. corrupted out of something else, maybe omānatta, if taken as der. fr. māna1. If however taken as belonging to māna2 as an abstr. der., it might be expld as "measuring, taking measures," which suits the context better. The BSk. form is still more puzzling, viz. mānāpya "something pleasant": Mvyut § 265] a sort of penance, attached to the commission of a sanghādisesa offence DhsA 399 (+parivāsa). ˚ŋ deti to inflict penance on somebody Vin ii.7 (+parivāsaŋ deti); iv.225. mānatt' âraha deserving penance Vin ii.55, 162 (parivāsika+). See on term Vin. Texts ii.397. -- 529 -- Mānana
Mānana
(nt.) & Mānanā (f.) [fr. māna1] paying honour or respect; reverence, respect S i.66; J ii.138; Pug 19, 22; Miln 377 (with sakkāra, vandana, pūjana & apaciti); Dhs 1121; DhsA 373. -- Cp. vi˚, sam˚. Mānava
Mānava
see [Māṇava] . Mānavant
Mānavant
(adj.) [fr. māna1] possessed of pride, full of conceit; neg. a˚ not proud Th 1, 1222. Mānasa
Mānasa
(nt.) [a secondary formation fr. manas = mano, already Vedic lit. "belonging to mind"] intention, purpose, mind (as active force), mental action. Almost equivalent to mano Dhs § 6. In later language mānasa is quite synonymous with hadaya. The word, used absolutely, is more a t. t. in philosophy than a living part of the language. It is more frequent as -- ˚ in adj. use, where its connection with mano is still more felt. Its absolute use probably originated from the latter use. -- DhsA 140 (=mano); Vbh 144 sq. (in definition of viññāṇa as cittaŋ, mano, mānasaŋ, hadayaŋ etc.: see mano ii.3); DhA ii.12 (paradāre mānasaŋ na bandhissāmi "shall have no intention towards another's wife," i. e. shall not desire another's wife); Mhvs 4, 6 (sabbesaŋ hita -- mānasā with the intention of common welfare); 32, 56 (rañño hāsesi mānasaŋ gladdened the heart of the king). -- As adj. ( -- ˚): being of such & such a mind, having a . . . mind, with a . . . heart; like: ādīna˚ with his mind in danger S v.74 (+apatiṭṭhitacitta); uggata˚ lofty -- minded VvA 217; pasanna˚ with settled (peaceful) mind Sn 402 and frequently; mūḷha˚ infatuated Mhvs 5, 239; rata˚ PvA 19; sañcodita˚ urged (in her heart) PvA 68; soka -- santatta˚ with a heart burning with grief PvA 38. Mānasāna
Mānasāna
(adj.) [fr. mānasa, secondary formation] = mānasa in adj. use Sn 63 (rakkhita˚). Mānassin
Mānassin
(adj. n.) [prob. fr. manassin (*manasvin) under influence of māna. Cp. similar formation mānavant] proud Vin ii.183 (expld by Bdhgh in a popular way as "mana -- ssayino māna -- nissitā"). The corresponding passage at J i.88 reads māna -- jātikā māna -- tthaddhā. Mānikata
Mānikata
[pp. of a verb māni -- karoti, which stands for māna -- karoti, and is substituted for mānita after analogy of purakkhata, of same meaning] lit. "held in high opinion," i. e. honoured, worshipped S ii.119 (garukata m. pūjita). Mānikā
Mānikā
(f.) [cp. māna2 2] a weight, equal to 4 Doṇas SnA 476 (catudoṇaŋ mānikā). Cp. BSk. mānikā, e. g. Divy 293 sq. Mānita
Mānita
[pp. of māneti] revered, honoured Ud 73 (sakkata m. pūjita apacita). -- A rather singular by -- form is mānikata (q. v.). Mānin
Mānin
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. mana1] proud (of) Sn 282 (samaṇa˚), 889 (paripuṇṇa˚); Dh 63 (paṇḍita˚ proud of his cleverness, cp. DhA ii.30); J i.454 (atireka˚); iii.357 (paṇḍita˚); Sdhp 389, 417. -- f. māninī Mhvs 20, 4 (rūpa˚ proud of her beauty). Mānusa
Mānusa
(adj. n.) [cp. Vedic mānuṣa; fr. same base (manus) as manussa] 1. (adj.) human Sn 301 (bhoga); It 94 (kāmā dibbā ca mānusā); Pv ii.921 (m. deha); 956 (id.). -- amānusa divine Vv 356; Pv ii.1220; ghostly ( = superhuman) Pv iv.36; f. amānusī Pv iii.7.9 -- 2. (n. m.) a human being, a man Mhvs 15, 64; f. mānusī a (human) woman J iv.231; Pv ii.41. -- amānusa a superhuman being Pv iv.157. -- pl. mānusā men Sn 361, 644; Pv ii.117. As nt. in collective sense=mankind Pv ii.113 (v. l. mānussaŋ; C.=manussaloka). Mānusaka=mānusa
Mānusaka
= mānusa, viz. 1. (adj.) human: A i.213 (sukhaŋ); Sn 524 (brahma -- khettaŋ); Dh 417 (yogaŋ= m. kāyaŋ DhA iv.225); Vv 356; J i.138 (kāmā). -- f. manusikā Vism 407. -- 2. a human being, man Pv iv.157. Also nt. (collectively) pl. mānusakāni human beings, men DhA i.233. Māneti
Māneti
[Caus. of man, cp. Sk. mānayati, Lat. moneo to admonish. Ger. mahnen, Ags. manian. The Dhtp 593 gives root as mān in meaning "pūjā"] to honour, revere, think highly of PvA 54 (aor. mānesuŋ,+garukariŋsu+pūjesuŋ). -- pp. mānita. Māpaka
Māpaka
( -- ˚) (adj. n.) [fr. māpeti] one who measures, only in doṇa˚ (a minister) measuring the d. revenue (of rice) J ii.367, 381; DhA iv.88; and in dhañña˚ measuring corn or grain J iii.542 (˚kamma, the process of . . .); Vism 278 (in comparison). Māpeti
Māpeti
[Caus. of mā, see mināti. The simplex mimīte has the meaning of "erect, build" already in Vedic Sk.] 1. to build, construct S ii.106 (nagaraŋ); Mhvs 6, 35 (id.); Vv 8453; VvA 260. -- 2. to create, bring about, make or cause to appear by supernatural power (in folkoristic literature, cp. nimmināti in same sense) J ii.111 (sarīraŋ nāvaŋ katvā māpesi transformed into a ship); iv.274; Mhvs 28, 31 (maggaŋ caused a road to appear). -- 3. to measure out (?), to declare (?), in a doubtful passage J iv.302, where a misreading is probable, as indicated by v. l. BB (samāpassiŋsu for T. tena amāpayiŋsu). Perhaps we should read tena -- māsayiŋsu. Māmaka
Māmaka
(adj.) [fr. mama] lit. "mine," one who shows affection (not only for himself), making one's own, i.e. devoted to, loving Sn 806 ( = Buddha˚, Dhamma˚, Sangha˚ Nd1 125; =mamāyamāna SnA 534), 927 (same expln at Nd1 382); Miln 184 (ahiŋsayaŋ paraŋ loke piyo hohisi māmako ti), -- Buddha˚ devoted to the B. J i.299; DhA i.206. f. ˚māmikā J iii.182. -> In voc. f. māmike at Th 2, 207 (cp. ThA 172) "mother," we may perhaps have an allusion to mā "mother" [cp. Sk. māma uncle, Lat. mamma mother, and mātā]. -- amāmaka see sep.; this may also be taken as "not loving." Māyā
Māyā
(f.) [cp. Vedic māyā. Suggestions as to etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. manticulor] 1. deceptive appearance, fraud, deceit, hypocrisy Sn 245, 328 (˚kata deceit), 469, 537, 786, 941 (: māyā vuccati vañcanikā cariyā Nd1 422); Vbh 357, 361, 389; Miln 289; Vism 106 (+sātheyya, māna, pāpicchatā etc.), 479 (māyā viya viññāṇaŋ); VbhA 34 (in detail), 85, 493 (def.). Is not used in Pali Abhidhamma in a philosophical sense. -> 2. mystic formula, magic, trick M i.381 (āvaṭṭanī m.). khattiya˚ the mystic formula of a kh. J vi.375; Miln 190; DhA i.166. In the sense of "illusion" often combd with marīci, e. g. at J ii.330; v.367; Nd2 680a ii. -- 3. jugglery, conjuring Miln 3. -- On māyā in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 122; on term in general Dhs trsl.2 255 ("ilḷusion"); Expos. 333, 468n. -- As adj. in amāya (q. v.) & in bahu -- māye rich in deceit SnA 351. -- Note. In the word maŋ at KhA 123 (in pop. etym. of man -- gala) the ed. of the text sees an acc. of mā which he takes to be a contracted form of māyā ( = iddhi).

-- kāra a conjurer, magician S iii.142; Vism 366 (in comparison); VbhA 196. Māyāvin
Māyāvin
(adj.) [fr. māyā, cp. Vedic māyāvin] deceitful, hypocritical D iii.45, 246; Sn 89, 116, 357; Pug 19, 23; PvA 13. See also amāyāvin. -- 530 -- Māyu
Māyu
[*Sk. māyu] bile, gall Abhp 281. Māra
Māra
[fr. mṛ, later Vedic, māra killing, destroying, bringing death, pestilence, cp. Lat. mors death, morbus illness, Lith. māras death, pestilence] death; usually personified as Np. Death, the Evil one, the Tempter (the Buddhist Devil or Principle of Destruction). Sometimes the term māra is applied to the whole of the worldly existence, or the realm of rebirth, as opposed to Nibbāna. Thus the defn of m. at Nd2 506 gives "kammâbhisankhāra -- vasena paṭisandhiko khandha-māro, dhātu˚, āyatana˚. -- Other general epithets of M (quasi twin -- embodiments) are given with Kaṇha, Adhipati, Antaka, Namuci, Pamattabandhu at Nd1 489 = Nd2 507; the two last ones also at Nd1 455. The usual standing epithet is pāpimā "the evil one," e. g. S i.103 sq. (the famous Māra -- Saŋyutta: see Windisch, Māra & Buddha); Nd1 439; DhA iv.71 (Māravatthu) & freq. -- See e. g. Sn 32, 422, 429 sq., 1095, 1103; Dh 7, 40, 46, 57, 105, 175, 274; Nd1 475; Vism 79, 228, 376; KhA 105; SnA 37, 44 sq., 225, 350 sq., 386 sq.; Sdhp 318, 449, 609. Further refs. & details see under Proper Names.

-- âbhibhū overcoming M. or death Sn 545 = 571. -- kāyika a class of gods Miln 285; KvuA 54. -- dhītaro the daughters of M. SnA 544. -- dheyya being under the sway of M.; the realm or kingdom of Māra A iv.228; Sn 764; Dh 34 (=kilesa -- vaṭṭa DhA i.289). -- bandhana the fetter of death Dh 37, 276, 350 (=tebhūmaka -- vaṭṭasankhātaŋ DhA iv.69). -- senā the army of M. Sn 561, 563; SnA 528. Māraka
Māraka
( -- ˚) [fr. māreti] one who kills or destroys, as manussa˚ man -- killer J ii.182; hatthi˚ elephant -- killer DhA i.80. -- m. in phrase samāraka (where the -- ka belongs to the whole cpd.) see under samāraka. Māraṇa
Māraṇa
(nt.) [fr. Caus. māreti] killing, slaughter, death D ii.128; Sdhp 295, 569. Māratta
Māratta
(nt.) [*Māra -- tvaŋ] state of, or existence as a Māra god, Māraship Vbh 337. Mārāpita
Mārāpita
[pp. of mārāpeti] killed J ii.417; iii.531. Mārāpitatta
Mārāpitatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. mārāpita] being incited to kill DhA i.141. Mārāpeti
Mārāpeti
[Caus. II. of mṛ]: see marati. -- pp. mārāpita. Mārita
Mārita
[pp. of māreti] killed S i.66; Vin iii.72; J ii.417 (aññehi m. -- bhāvaŋ jānātha). Mārisa
Mārisa
(adj.) [perhaps identical with mādisa] only in voc. as respectful term of address, something like "Sir," pl. "Sirs." In sg. mārisa M i.327; A iii.332; Sn 814, 1036, 1038, 1045 etc.; Nd1 140 = Nd2 508 (here expld by same formula as āyasmā, viz. piya -- vacanaŋ garu -- vacanaŋ etc.); J v.140; Pv ii.133; Mhvs 1, 27. -- pl. mārisā Sn 682; J i.47, 49; Vism 415; PvA 75. Explained by Buddhaghosa to mean niddukkha K.S. i.2 n. Māruta
Māruta
[for the usual māluta] the wind S i.127; Mhbv 8. Māretar
Māretar
[n. ag. to māreti] one who kills, slayer, destroyer S iii.189. Māreti
Māreti
[Caus. of mṛ] to kill: see under marati. -- pp. mārita. Māla (māḷa)
Māla
(māḷa) [?] 1. mud [is it mis -- spelling of mala?], in pakka -- m˚ -- kalala (boiling mud) J vi.400. Kern, Toev. s. v. believes to see the same word in phrase mālā -- kacavara at J ii.416 (but very doubtful). -- 2. perhaps = froth, dirty surface, in pheṇa˚ Miln 117 (cp. mālin 2), where it may however be māla ("wreaths of foam"). -> 3. in asi˚ the interpretation given under asi (as "dirt" see above p. 88) has been changed into "sword -- garland," thus taking it as mālā. Mālaka (Māḷaka)
Mālaka
(Māḷaka) [fr. māla or māḷa] a circular (conse- crated) enclosure, round, yard (cp. Geiger, Mhvs. trsl. 99: "m. is a space marked off and usually terraced, within which sacred functions were carried out. In the Mahāvihāra (Tiss' ārāma) at Anurādhapura there were 32 mālakas; Dpvs xiv.78; Mhvs 15, 192. The sacred Bodhi -- tree e. g. was surrounded by a malaka"). -- The word is peculiar to the late (Jātaka -- ) literature, & is not found in the older texts. -- J i.449 (vikkama˚); iv.306; v.49 (visāla˚), 138 (id., spelling maḷaka); Mhvs 15, 36 (Mahā -- mucala˚); 16, 15; 32, 58 (sanghassa kamma˚, encl. for ceremonial acts of the S., cp. 15, 29); DhA iv.115 (˚sīmā); Vism 342 (vitakka˚). Mālatī
Mālatī
(f.) [fr. mālā] the great -- flowered jasmine Abhp 576. Cp. mālikā. Mālā
Mālā
(f.) [cp. Epic Sk. mālā] garland, wreath, chaplet; collectively = flowers; fig. row, line Sn 401; Pug 56; Vism 265 (in simile); Pv ii.316 (gandha, m., vilepana, as a "lady's" toilet outfit); ii.49 (as one of the 8 or 10 standard gifts to a bhikkhu: see dāna, deyyadhamma & yañña); PvA 4=J iii.59 (ratta -- kaṇavera˚ a wreath of red K. flowers on his head: apparel of a criminal to be executed. Cp. ratta -- māla -- dhara wearing a red garland J iii.179, an ensign of the executioner); PvA 51, 62. -- asi ˚ -- kamma the sword -- garland torture (so correct under asi!) J iii.178; Dāvs iii.35; dīpa˚ festoons of lamps Mhvs 5, 181; 34, 77 (˚samujjota); nakkhatta˚ the garland of stars VvA 167; puppha˚ a garland or wreath of flowers Mhvs 5, 181. -- On mālā in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 123. In compn māla˚ sometimes stands for mālā˚.

-- kamma garland -- work, garlands, festoons VvA 188. -- kāra garland -- maker, florist, gardener (cp. Fick, Sociale Gleiderung 38, 182) J v.292; Miln 331; DhA i.208, 334; VvA 170, 253 (˚vīthi). -- kita adorned with garlands, wreathed Vin i.208. -- guṇa "garland -- string," garlands, a cluster of garlands Dh 53 ( = mālā -- nikaṭi "makeup" garlands DhA i.419; i. e. a whole line of garlands made as "ekato -- vaṇṭika -- mālā" and "ubhato -- v. -- m.," one & two stalked g., cp. Vin iii.180). mālā guṇaparikkhittā one adorned with a string of gs., i. e. a marriageable woman or a courtesan M i.286=A v.264. -- guḷa a cluster of gs., a bouquet Vin iii.139; SnA 224; VvA 32, 111 (v. l. guṇa). -- cumbaṭaka a cushion of garlands, a chaplet of flowers DhA i.72. -- dāma a wreath of flowers J ii.104. -- dhara wearing a wreath J iii.179 (ratta˚, see also above). -- dhārin wearing a garland or wreath (on the head) Pv iii.11 (kusuma˚; v. l. BB ˚bhārin); PvA 169 (v. l. ˚bhārin); f. dhārinī Vv 323 (uppala˚, of a Petī. See also bhārin). -- puṭa a basket for flowers DhA iii.212. -- bhārin wearing a wreath (chaplet) [the reading changes between ˚bhārin & ˚dhārin; the BSk. prefers ˚dhārin, e. g. MVastu i.124 & ˚dhāra at Divy 218] J iv.60, 82; v.45; PvA 211 (v. l. ˚dhārin); f. ˚bhārinī J iii.530; VvA 12; & bhārī Th 1, 459 (as v. l.; T. reads ˚dhārī). Cp. ˚dhārin. -- vaccha [vaccha here= vṛḳṣa] a small flowering tree or plant, an ornamental plant Vin ii.12; iii.179; Vism 172 (v. l. ˚gaccha); DhA ii.109 (q. v. for expln: taruṇarukkha -- puppha). Mālika
Mālika1
(nt.) [fr. mālā or mala?] name of a dice J vi.281. Mālika
Mālika2
[fr. mālā] a gardener, florist Abhp 507. Mālikā
Mālikā
(f.) [fr. mālā] double jasmine Dāvs 5, 49. Mālin
Mālin
(adj.) [fr. mālā] 1. wearing a garland (or row) of flowers (etc.) Pv iii.91 ( = mālābhārin PvA 211); f. mālinī Vv 362 (nānā -- ratana˚); Mhvs 18, 30 (vividhadhaja˚ mahābodhi). -- 2. (perhaps to māla) bearing a stain of, muddy, in pheṇa˚ with a surface (or is it garland? ) of scum Miln 260. -- 3. what does it mean in pañca˚, said at J vi.497 of a wild animal? (C. not clear with expln "pañcangika -- turiya -- saddo viya"). -- 531 -- Māluka
Māluka
(m. or f.?) [of uncertain origin] a kind of vessel, only in camma˚ leather bag (?) J vi.431 (where v. l. reads camma -- pasibbakāhi vālukādīhi), 432 (gloss c.-> pasibbaka). Māluta
Māluta
[the proper Pali form for māruta, the a -- stem form of maru2 = Vedic marut or māruta] wind, air, breeze S iv.218; Th i.2; ii.372; J i.167; iv.222; v.328; vi.189; Miln 319; Vism 172 (=vāyu); VvA 174, 178.

-- īrita (contracted to māluterita) moved by the wind, fanned by the breeze Th 1, 754; ii.372; Vv 4412 = 816; Pv ii.123. See similar expressions under īrita. Māluvā
Māluvā
(f.) [cp. BSk. mālu] a (long) creeper M i.306; S i.207; A i.202 sq.; Sn 272; Dh 162, 334; J iii.389; v.205, 215, 389; v.205, 215, 389; vi.528 (phandana˚); DhA iii.152; iv.43. -- On maluvā in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 123. Mālūra
Mālūra
[late Sk.] the tree Aegle marmelos Abhp 556. Mālya
Mālya
see malya. Māḷa
Māḷa
(& Māla) [Non -- Aryan, cp. Tamil māḍam house, hall] a sort of pavilion, a hall D i.2 (maṇḍala˚, same at Sn p. 104, which passage SnA 447 explns as "savitānaŋ maṇḍapaŋ"); Vin i.140 (aṭṭa, māla, pāsāda; expld at Vin iii.201. In the same sequence of Vbh 251 expld at VbhA 366 as "bhojana -- sālā -- sadiso maṇḍala -- māḷo; Vinay' aṭṭha -- kathāyaŋ pana eka -- kūṭasangahito caturassa -- pāsādo ti vuttaŋ"); Miln 46, 47. -- Cp. mālaka. -- [The BSk. form is either māla, e. g. MVastu ii.274, or māḍa, e. g. Mvyut 226, 43.] Māḷaka
Māḷaka
[a Non -- Aryan word, although the Dhtm 395 gives roots mal & mall in meaning "dhāraṇa" (see under mala). Cp. malorika] a stand, viz. for alms -- bowl (patta˚) Vin ii.114, or for drinking vessel (pānīya˚) J vi.85. Māsa
Māsa1
[cp. Vedic māsa, & mās; Gr. mh/n (Ionic mei/s); Av. māh (moon & month); Lat. mensis; Oir. mī; Goth. mēna = moon; Ohg. māno, mānōt month. Fr. *mē to measure: see mināti] a month, as the 12th part of the year. The 12 months are (beginning with what chronologically corresponds to our middle of March): Citta (Citra), Vesākha, Jeṭṭha, Āsāḷha, Sāvaṇa, Poṭṭhapāda, Assayuja, Kattika, Māgasira, Phussa, Māgha, Phagguna. As to the names cp. nakkhatta. Usually in acc., used adverbially; nom. rare, e. g. aḍḍha -- māso half -- month VvA 66; Āsāḷhi -- māsa VvA 307 (=gimhānaŋ pacchima māsa); pl. dve māsā PvA 34 (read māse); cattāro gimhāna -- māsā KhA 192 (of which the 1st is Citra, otherwise called Paṭhama -- gimha "1st summer" and Bāla -- vasanta "premature spring"). -- Instr. pl. catūhi māsehi Miln. 82; PvA i.1012. -- acc. pl. as adv.: dasamāse 10 months J i.52; bahu -- māse PvA 135; also nt. chammāsāni 6 months S iii.155. Freq. acc. sg. collectively: a period of . . ., e. g. temāsaŋ 3 months DhsA 15; PvA 20; catu˚ DA i.83; PvA 96; satta˚ PvA 20; dasa˚ PvA 63; aḍḍha˚ a fortnight Vin iv.117. -- On māsa (& f. māsī), as well as shortened form ˚ma see puṇṇa.

-- puṇṇatā fullness or completion of the month DA i.140; -- mattaŋ (adv.) for the duration of a month PvA 19. Māsa
Māsa2
[Vedic māṣa, Phaseolus indica, closely related to another species: mudga Phaseolus mungo] a bean (Phaseolus indica or radiata); usually combd with mugga , e. g. Vin iii.64; Miln 267, 341; DA i.83. Also used as a weight (or measure?) in dhañña -- māsa, which is said to be equal to 7 lice: VbhA 343. -- pl. māse Vv 806 ( = māsa -- sassāni VvA 310).

-- odaka bean -- water KhA 237. -- khetta a field of beans VvA 808; VvA 308. -- bīja bean -- seed DhA iii.212. -- vana plantation J v.37 (+mugga˚). Māsa
Māsa3
[identical with māsa2] a small coin ( = māsaka) J ii.425 (satta māsā=s. māsakā C.). Māsaka
Māsaka
[fr. māsa2+ka = māsa3] lit. a small bean, used as a standard of weight & value; hence a small coin of very low value. Of copper, wood & lac (DhsA 318; cp. KhA 37; jatu˚, dāru˚, loha˚); the suvaṇṇa˚ (golden m.) at J iv.107 reminds of the "gold" in fairy tales. That its worth is next to nothing is seen from the descending progression of coins at DhA iii.108=VvA 77, which, beginning with kahāpaṇa, aḍḍha -- pāda, places māsaka & kāhaṇikā next to mudhā "gratis." It only "counts" when it amounts to 5 māsakas. -- Vin iii.47, 67; iv.226 (pañca˚); J i.112 (aḍḍha -- māsakaŋ na agghati is worth nothing); iv.107; v.135 (first a rain of flowers, then of māsakas, then kahāpaṇas); DhA ii.29 (pañca -- m. -- mattaŋ a sum of 5 m.); PvA 282 (m+aḍḍha˚ half -- pennies & farthings, as children's pocket -- money). Māsakkhimhā
Māsakkhimhā
at Vin iii.23 is for mā asakkhimhā "we could not"; mā here stands for na. Māsati, Māsana, Māsin
Māsati,
Māsana, Māsin [fr. mṛṣ, for massati etc.; see masati| touch, touching, etc. in sense of eating or taking in. So is probably to be read for āsati etc. in the foll. passages, where m precedes this ā in all cases. Otherwise we have to refer them to a root ās = as (to eat) and consider the m as partly euphonic. -- dumapakkāni -- māsita J ii.446 (C. reads māsita & explns by asita, dhāta); visa -- māsita Milo 302 (T. reads visamāsita) having taken in poison; visa -- māsan -- ûpatāpa (id.) Vism 166; tiṇa -- māsin eating grass J vi.354 (= tiṇakhādaka C.). -- A similar case where Sandhi -- m -- has led to a wrong partition of syllables and has thus been lost through syncope may be P. eḷaka1, as compd with Sk. methi (cp. Prk. meḍhi), pillar, post. Māsalu
Māsalu
[reading uncertain] only instr. māsalunā Miln 292, Trenckner says (note p. 428): "m. is otherwise unknown, it must mean a period shorter than 5 months. Cp. Sk. māsala." -- Rh. D. (trsl. ii.148) translates "got in a month," following the Sinhalese gloss. -> The period seems to be only a little shorter than 5 months; there may be a connection with catu in the word. Māsācita
Māsācita
[māsa1+ācita] filled by the (say 6 or more) month(s), i. e. heavy (alluding to the womb in advanced pregnancy), heaped full M i.332 (kucchi garu -- garu viya māsācitaŋ maññe ti; Neumann trsls "wie ein Sack voll Bohnen," thus taking m. = māsa2, and ācita as "heap" which however is not justified). This passage has given rise to a gloss at Vbh 386, where māsācitaŋ maññe was added to kāyo garuko akammañño, in meaning "heavy, languid." The other enumns of the 8 kusīta -- vatthūni (A iv.332; D iii.255) do not give m. m. It may be that the resemblance between akam-> mañño and maññe has played a part in reminding the Commentator of this phrase. The fact that Bdhgh comments on this passage in the VbhA (p. 510) shows, that the reading of Vbh 386 is a very old one. Bdhgh takes māsa in the sense of māsa2 & expls māsācita as "wet bean" (tinta māso), thus omitting expln of ācita. The passage at VbhA 510 runs: "ettha pana māsācitaŋ nāma tintamāso, yathā tintamāso garuko hoti, evaŋ garuko ti adhippāyo." Māsika
Māsika
(adj.) [fr. māsa1] 1. of a month, i. e. a month old Miln 302. -- 2. of a month, i. e. consisting of months, so many months (old) ( -- ˚), as aḍḍha˚ at intervals of half a month D i.166; M i.238, 343; Pug 55; dve˚ two months old Pv i.67. -- 3. monthly, i. e. once a month Th 1, 283 (bhatta). -- Cp. māsiya. Māsiya
Māsiya
(adj.) [ = māsika] consisting of months D ii.327 (dvādasa˚ saŋvacchara the year of 12 months). -- 532 -- Miga
Miga
[Vedic mṛga, to mṛj, cp. magga, meaning, when characterised by another attribute "wild animal" in general, animal of the forest; when uncharacterised usually antelope] 1. a wild animal, an animal in its natural state (see cpds.). -- 2. a deer, antelope, gazelle. Various kinds are mentioned at J v.416; two are given at Nd2 509, viz. eṇi (antelope) & sarabha (red deer): see under eṇi & sarabha. -- Sn 39, 72; J i.154; iii.270 (called Nandiya); PvA 62, 157. On miga in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 123, where more refs. are given.

-- âdhibhū king of beasts (i. e. the lion) Sn 684. -- inda king of beasts (id.) Sdhp 593. -- chāpaka young of a deer VvA 279. -- dāya deer park J iv.430 (Maddakucchi); VvA 86 (Isipatana). -- dhenu a hind J i.152; DhA iii.148. -- bhūta (having become) like a wild animal, M i.450 (˚bhūtena cetasā). -- mandalocana the soft eye of the deer Vv 6411; Pv i.115. See under manda. -- rājā king of the beasts (the lion) D iii.23 sq. -- luddaka deer -- hunter J i.372; iii.49, 184; DhA ii.82; VbhA 266 (in simile). -- vadha deer -- slaying J i.149. -- vittaka, amateur of hunting J iv.267. -- visāna a deer's horn Pug 56. -- vīthi deer -- road J i.372. Migavā
Migavā
(f.) [ = Sk. mṛgayā, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 461] hunt, hunting, deer -- stalking PvA 154 (˚padesa). Usually in devasikaŋ migavaŋ gacchati to go out for a day's hunting J iv.267; or as pp. ekadivasaŋ migavaŋ gata VvA 260; ekāhaŋ m. g. Mhvs 5, 154. Migī
Migī
(f.) [f. of miga, cp. Epic Sk. mṛgī] a doe Th 1, 109; J v.215; vi.549; DhA i.48. Micchatta
Micchatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. micchā] item of wrong, wrong- ness. There are 8 items of wrong, viz. the 8 wrong qualities as enumd under (an -- ) ariya -- magga (see micchā), forming the contrary to the sammatta or righteousness of the Ariyan Path. These 8 at D ii.353; iii.254; A ii.221; iv.237; Vbh 387; Vism 683. Besides these there is a set of 10, consisting of the above 8 plus micchā -- ñāṇa and ˚vimutti wrong knowledge & wrong emancipation: D iii.290; Vbh 391; Vism 683 (where ˚ñāṇa & ˚viratti for vimutti). -- See further D iii.217 (˚niyata); Pug 22; Dhs 1028 (cp. Dhs. trsl. §1028); Vbh 145; Tikp. 32 (˚niyata -- citta), 325 (˚tika), 354 (id.). Micchā
Micchā
(adv.) [Sk. mithyā, cp. Vedic mithaḥ interchanging, separate, opposite, contrary (opp. saṃyak together: see samma); mithū wrongly; see also mithu] wrongly, in a wrong way, wrong -- , false Sn 438 (laddho yaso), 815 (paṭipajjati leads a wrong course of life, almost syn. with anariyaŋ. Illustrated by "pāṇaŋ hanati, adinnaŋ ādiyati, sandhiŋ chindati, nillopaŋ harati, ekāgārikaŋ karoti, paripanthe tiṭṭhati, paradāraŋ gacchati, musā bhaṇati" at Nd1 144); VbhA 513 (˚ñāṇa, ˚vimutti). -- micchā˚ often in same combns as sammā˚, with which contrasted, e. g. with the 8 parts of (an -- ) ariya -- magga, viz. ˚diṭṭhi (wrong) views (D iii.52, 70 sq., 76, 111, 246, 269, 287, 290, Dh 167, 316 sq.; Pug 39; Vism 469 (def.) PvA 27, 42, 54, 67; cp. ˚ka one who holds wrong views D iii.45, 48, 264; Vism 426); ˚sankappa aspiration (D iii.254, 287, 290 sq., Dh 11); ˚vācā speech (ibid.); ˚kammanta conduct (ibid.); ˚ājīva living (D iii.176 sq., 254, 290; A ii.53, 240, 270, iv.82); ˚vāyāma effort (D iii.254, 287, 290 sq.); ˚sati mindfulness (ibid.); ˚samādhi concentration (ibid.); see magga 2, and cp. the following:

-- gahaṇa wrong conception, mistake J iii.304. -- cāra wrong behaviour Pug 39 (& adj. cārin); VbhA 383 (var. degrees). -- paṭipadā wrong path (of life) Pug 49 (& adj.: ˚paṭipanna, living wrongly). -- paṇihita (citta) wrongly directed mind Dh 42 = Ud 39 [cp. BSk. mithyāpraṇidhāna Divy 14]. -- patha wrong road, wrong course Vbh 145 (lit. & fig.; in exegesis of diṭṭhi, cp. Nd2 taṇhā iii.; Dhs 381; DhsA 253). Miñja
Miñja
(nt.) & miñjā (f.) [Vedic majjan (fr. majj?); on form see Geiger. P.Gr. § 91, & cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. §§ 74, 101] marrow, pith, kernel Vin i.25 (in sequence chavi, camma, maŋsa, nahāru, aṭṭhi, miñjā); Vism 235 (id.); Kh iii. (aṭṭhi˚, f. cp. KhA 52, nt.); J iv.402 (tāla˚ pith of the palm); Mhvs 28. 28 (panasa˚, f., kernels of the seeds of the jak -- fruit).

-- rāsi heap of marrow Vism 260 ( = matthalunga). Miñjaka
Miñjaka
= miñja, only in tela˚ inner kernels of tila -- seed, made into a cake PvA 51. See doṇī2. Mita
Mita
[Vedic mita, pp. of mā, mināti, to measure; also in meaning "moderate, measured," cp. in same sense Gr. me/trios] measured, in measure D i.54 (doṇa˚ a doṇa measure full); Sn 300 (bhāgaso m. measured in harmonious proportions, i. e. stately); Pv i.1013 (id.); J iii.541. -- amita unlimited, without measure, boundless, in Ep. amit -- ābha of boundless lustre Sdhp 255. Also N. of a Buddha.

-- āhāra measured, i. e. limited food Sn 707. -- bhāṇin speaking measuredly, i. e. in moderation Dh 227; J iv.252. Mitta
Mitta
(m. nt.) [cp. Vedic mitra, m. & nt., friend; Av. mipro, friend] friend. Usually m., although nt. occurs in meaning "friend," in sg. (Nett 164) & pl. (Sn 185, 187); in meaning "friendship" at J vi.375 ( = mittabhāva C.). The half -- scientific, half -- popular etym. of mitta, as given at VbhA 108, is "mettāyantī ti mittā, minantī ti vā m.; sabba -- guyhesu anto pakkhipantī ti attho" (the latter: "they enclose in all that is hidden"). -- Two kinds of friends are distinguished at Nd2 510 (in exegesis of Sn 37 & 75), viz. āgārika˚ (a house -- or lay -- friend) and anāgārika˚ (a homeless -- or clericalfriend). The former is possessed of all ordinary qualities of kindness and love, the latter of special virtues of mind & heart. -- A friend who acts as a sort of Mentor, or spiritual adviser, is called a kalyāṇa -- mitta (see under kalyāṇa). -- Mitta is often combd with similar terms, devoting relationship or friendship, e. g. with amaccā colleagues and ñāti -- sālohita˚ blood -- relations, in ster. phrase at Vin ii.126; A i.222; Sn p. 104; PvA 28; cp. ñāti -- mittā relatives & friends Pv i.59; suhada ("dear heart") D iii.187 (four types, cp. m. paṭirūpaka); suhajja one who is dear to one's heart PvA 191; sahāya companion PvA 86. The neut. form occurs for kind things D iii.188; S i.37. -- Opp. sapatta enemy PvA 13; amitta a sham friend or enemy Sn 561 (= paccatthika SnA 455); D iii.185. pāpa -- mitta bad friend PvA 5. -- For refs. see e. g. Sn 58, 255, 296, 338; Dh 78, 375.

-- âbhirādhin one who pleases his friends J iv.274 ( = mittesu adubbhamāno C.) -- ddu [cp. Sk. mitra -- druha] one who injures or betrays his friends S i.225; Sn 244; J iv.260; also in foll. forms: ˚dubbha Pv ii.93 (same passage at J iv.352; v.240; vi.310, 375); ˚dūbha J iv.352; vi.310; ˚dūbhin [cp. Sk. ˚drohin] J iv.257; v.97 (˚kamma); vi.375; DhA ii.23. -- paṭirūpaka a false friend, one pretending to be a friend D iii.185 (four types: añña -- d -- atthu -- hara, vacī -- parama, anuppiyabhāṇin, apāya -- sahāya, i. e. one who takes anything, one who is a great talker, one who flatters, one who is a spendthrift companion.) -- bandhava a relation in friendship, one who is one's relative as a friend Nd2 455 (where Nd1 11 has manta -- bandhava). -- bheda see mithu -- bheda -- vaṇṇa pretence of friendship, a sham friendship Pv iv.86 (=mitta -- rūpa, m. -- paṭirūpatā PvA 268). Mittatā
Mittatā
(f.) -- (˚) [abstr. fr. mitta] state of being a friend, friendship, in kalyāṇa˚ being a good friend, friendship as a helper (see kalyāṇa) D iii.274; Vism 107. Mitti
Mitti
(f.) [a by -- form of metti] friendship J i.468 ( = metti C.). Mithu
Mithu
(adv.) [cp. Vedic mithū & P. micchā; mith, cp. mithaḥ alternately, Av. miqō wrongly; Goth. misso one another, missa -- leiks different; Ger. E. prefix mis -- i. e. wrongly: Ger. missetat wrong doing = misdeed; Lat. mūto to change, mutuus reciprocal; Goth. maipms present=Ags. mapum; mith in Vedic Sk. is "to be opposed to each other," whereas in Vedic mithuna the notion of "pair" prevails. See also methuna] opposite, reciprocally, contrary Sn 825, 882 (taken by Nd1 163 & 290, on both passages identically, as n. pl. of adj. instead of adv., & expld by "dve janā dve kalaha -- kāraka" etc.).

-- bheda [evidently in meaning of mitta -- bheda "break of friendship," although mithu means "adversary," thus perhaps "breaking, so as to cause opposition"] breaking of alliance, enmity D ii.76; J iv.184 (here with v. l. mitta˚); Kvu 314. -- 533 -- Middha
Middha
(nt.) [orig. pp. perhaps to Vedic mid (?) to be fat = medh, as DhsA 378 gives "medhatī ti middhaŋ." -- More likely however connected with Sk. methi (pillar=Lat. meta), cp. Prk. medhi. The meaning is more to the point too, viz. "stiff." Thus semantically identical with thīna. -- BSk. also middha, e. g. Divy 555] torpor, stupidity, sluggishness D i.71 (thīna˚); Sn 437; A v.18; Dhs 1157; Miln 299, 412 (appa˚ not slothful, i. e. diligent, alert); Vism 450 (˚rūpa; +rogarūpa, jātirūpa, etc., in def. of rūpa); DA i.211 (expld as cetasika gelañña: see on this passage Dhs trsl. §1155); Sdhp 459. -- See thīna. Middhin
Middhin
(adj.) [fr. middha] torpid, drowsy, sluggish Dh 325 ( = thīnamiddh' âbhibhūta DhA iv.16). Midha
Midha
[does it refer to mī2 as in mināti2, or to middha?] is given as root in meaning "hiŋsana," to hurt at Dhtm 536 (with var. v.v ll.), not sure. Minana
Minana
(nt.) [fr. mi to measure, fix, construct] measuring, surveying DA i.79; DhsA 123. Mināti
Mināti1
[roots (Vedic) mā & mi; pres. minūte & minoti; Idg. *me, cp. Sk. mātra measure, māna; Av. mā -- , mitiḥ measure; Gr. ma/tion small measure, mh_tis counsel Lat.; metior, mensis, modus; Goth. mēla bushel; Ags. maed measure (cp. E. mete, meet = fitting); Lith. mẽtas year. -- The Dhtm 726 gives mi in meaning "pamāṇa"] to measure VbhA 108 (see etym. of mitta); Pot. mine J v.468 (=mineyya C.); fut. minissati Sdhp 585. ger. minitvā Vism 72; grd. minitabba J v.90. -- Pass. mīyati: see anu˚, -- pp. mita. -- Cp. anu˚, abhi˚, ni˚, pa˚, vi˚. Caus. māpeti (q. v.). Mināti
Mināti2
[Vedic mināti, mī (or mi), to diminish; cp. Gr. minu/w diminish; Lat. minor = E. minor; Goth. mins (little), compar, minniza, superl. minnists=Ger. mindest. -- The Dhtp 502 gives mi with "hiŋsā," the Dhtm 725 with "hiŋsana." It applies the same interpretation to a root midh (Dhtm 536), which is probably abstracted fr. Pass. mīyati] to diminish; also: to hurt, injure. Very rare, only in some prep. combns. -- See also mīyati. Miyyati
Miyyati
(& Mīyati) [corresponding to Vedic mriyate, fr. mr, viâ *mīryate> miyyati. See marati] to die. -- (a) miyyati: Sn 804; Nett 23. med. 3rd pl. miyyare Sn 575; pot. miyye J vi.498; ppr. miyyamāna M iii.246; Vism 49; fut. miyyissati M iii.246. -- (b) mīyati (influenced in form by jīyati & mīyati of mināti2): M iii.168 (jāyati jīyati mīyati); J iii.189; Dh 21; pot. mīyetha D ii.63. ppr. mīyamāna S i.96. -- pp. mata. Milakkha
Milakkha
[cp. Ved. Sk. mleccha barbarian, root mlecch, onomat. after the strange sounds of a foreign tongue, cp. babbhara & mammana] a barbarian, foreigner, outcaste, hillman S v.466; J vi.207; DA i.176; SnA 236 (˚mahātissa -- thera Np.), 397 (˚bhāsā foreign dialect). The word occurs also in form milakkhu (q. v.). Milakkhu
Milakkhu
[the Prk. form (A -- Māgadhī, cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. 105, 233) for P. milakkha] a non -- Aryan D iii.264; Th 1, 965 (˚rajana "of foreign dye" trsl.; Kern, Toev. s. v. translates "vermiljoen kleurig"). As milakkhuka at Vin iii.28, where Bdhgh expls by "Andha -- Damil' ādi." Milāca
Milāca
[by -- form to milakkha, viâ *milaccha>*milacca> milāca: Geiger, P.Gr. 622; Kern, Toev. s. v.] a wild man of the woods, non -- Aryan, barbarian J iv.291 (not with C. = janapadā), cp. luddā m. ibid., and milāca -- puttā J v.165 (where C. also expls by bhojaputta, i. e. son of a villager). Milāta
Milāta
[pp. of milāyati] faded, withered, dried up J i.479; v.473; Vism 254 (˚sappa -- piṭṭhi, where KhA 49 in same passage reads "milāta -- dham(m)ani -- piṭṭhi"); DhA i.335; iv.8 (sarīra), 112; SnA 69 (˚mālā, in simile); Mhvs 22, 46 (a˚); Sdhp 161. Milātatā
Milātatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. milāta] only neg. a˚ the (fact of) not being withered J v.156. Milāyati
Milāyati
[Vedic mlā, to become soft; ldg. *melā & *mlei, as in Gr. blac, blakeu /w to languish; Lat. flaccus withered ( = flaccid); Lith. blakà weak spot; also Gr. blhxro/s weak. -- Dhtp 440: "milā=gatta -- vimāne" (i. e. from the bent limbs); Dhtm 679 id.] to relax, languish, fade, wither S i.126; It 76; J i.329; v.90. -- Caus. milāpeti [Sk. mlāpayati] to make dry, to cause to wither J i.340 (sassaŋ); fig. to assuage, suppress, stifle J iii.414 (taṇhaŋ). -- pp. milāta. Millikā
Millikā
at PvA 144 in passage paŋsukūlaŋ dhovitv -- âbhi- siñcimillikañ ca katvā adāsi is to be read either as "abhisiñci cimillikañ ca k." or "abhisiñcitvā mudukañ ca k." Miḷhakā
Miḷhakā
at S ii.228 is to be read mīḷhakā (q. v.). Misati
Misati
[miṣ, Vedic miṣati, root given as misa at Dhtm 479, with expln "mīlane"] to wink (one's eyes): see ni˚. Missa
Missa
(adj.) [orig. pp. of miś, cp. Vedic miśra. Sk. miśra- yati, mekṣayati; Gr. mi/gnumi & mi/sgw; Lat. misceo, mixtus; Ags. miscian = mix; Ohg. miskan. -- Dhtp 631 "sammissa"] 1. mixed (with: -- ˚); various Vin i.33 (kesa˚, jatā˚ etc. =a mixture of, various); Th 1, 143; J iii.95, 144 (udaka -- paṇṇa˚ yāgu); Pv i.92 (missā kiṭakā). nt. missaŋ as adv. "in a mixed way" Vism 552=VbhA 161 (+dvidhā). -- 2. accompanied by ( -- ˚), having company or a retinue, a title of honour in names, also as polite address [cp. Sk. miśra & āraya miśra] J v.153 (voc. f. misse), 154 (f. missā). -- 3. missa˚ is changed to missī in compn with kṛ and bhū (like Sk.), thus in missī -- bhāva (sexual) intercourse, lit. mixed state, union J ii.330; iv.471; v.86; VbhA 107; and missī -- bhūta mixed, coupled, united J v.86 (=hatthena hatthaŋ gahetvā kāya -- missībhāvaŋ upagata C.). Cp. sam.˚

-- kesī (f.) "mixed hair," Ep. of a heavenly maiden or Apsaras Vv 6014 (expld at VvA 280 as "ratta -- mālādīhi missita -- kesavaṭṭī"). The m. missa -- kesa occurs as a term for ascetics (with muṇḍa) at Vism 389. Missaka
Missaka
(adj. n.) [fr. missa] 1. mixed, combined J ii.8 (phalika˚ rajata -- pabbata mountain of silver mixed with crystal); VbhA 16 (lokiya -- lokuttara˚); usually ˚ -- , like ˚āhāra mixed food DhA ii.101; ˚uppāda mixed portents, a main chapter of the art of prognosticating (cp. Bṛhat -- Saŋhitā ch. 86: miśrak' âdhyāya) Miln 178; ˚bhatta = ˚āhāra SnA 97; Mhbv 27. -- 2. (m.) an attendant, follower; f. missikā DhA i.211 (Sāmāvati˚). -> 3. (nt.) N. of a pleasure grove in heaven (lit. the grove of bodily union), one of the 3: Nandana, M., Phārusaka J vi.278; Vism 424. -- 4. (pl. missakā) a group of devas, mentioned at D ii.260 in list of popular gods (cp. missa 2 and missakesī). -- 534 -- Missakatta
Missakatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. missaka] mixing, mixture, combination with ( -- ˚) Tikp 291. Missana
Missana
(nt.) [fr. misseti] mixing Dhtp 338. Missita
Missita
[pp. of misseti] mixed, intermingled Sn 243; J v.460; PvA 198 (dhañña sāsapa -- tela˚); VvA 280 (see under missa -- kesī). Misseti
Misseti
[Caus. of miś, Vedic miśrayati] 1. to mix Miln 126 (mayaŋ missayissāma); PvA 191 (palāse sālīhi saddhiŋ). -- 2. to bring together in cohabitation, to couple J v.154 (C.: kilesana misseti). -- pp. missita. Mihati
Mihati
is given as root mih in 2 meanings at Dhtp, viz. (1) īsa -- hasana (No. 328), i. e. a kind of laugh, for smi, as in mihita. (2) secana (No. 342). Mihita
Mihita
(nt.) [pp. of smi; this is the inverted -- diaeretic (Pāli) form (smita> *hmita>*mhita>mihita) for the other (Sk.) form smita (q. v.). The Dhtp (328) puts root down as mih] a smile J iii.419; v.452; vi.504. -- mihita -- pubba with smiles Th 1, 460 (spelt mhita˚); J vi.221 ( = sita C.). -- Cp. vimhaya, vimhāpaka, vimhita. Mīyati
Mīyati
see miyyati (Pass. of marati). Mīlati
Mīlati
[mīl, given at Dhtp 267 & 614 with "nimīlane"] to wink, only in cpd. nimīlati to close the eyes (opp. um˚). Mīḷha
Mīḷha
[pp. of mih, Vedic mehati to excrete water, i. e. urine, only with ref. to the liquid; Sk. mīḍha = Lat. mictus, pp. of mingo, to urinate. Cp. Av. maēƶaiti to urinate, meƶ urine; Gr. o)mixei_n & o)/mixma id.; Ags. mīgan to ur.; in Ohg. mist & Ags. miox the notion refers more to the solid excrement, as in Pāli. -- A related root *meigh to shed water is found in megha, cloud (watershedder), q. v. for further cognates] excrement M i.454 =iii.236 (˚sukhaŋ vile pleasure); A iii.241, 242; Th 1, 1152; J ii.11; vi.112; Vv 5211 (with ref. to the gūthaniraya); Pv iii.45 (=gūtha PvA 194); DhA ii.53 (˚ŋ khādituŋ).

-- kūpa pit of excr., cesspool Pgdp 22. Mīḷhakā
Mīḷhakā
(f.) [fr. mīḷha; cp. BSk. mīḍha -- ghaṭa] cesspool S ii.228 (so read for T. piḷhakā; v. l. BB miḷhakā). See also piḷhakā. The trsl. (K.S. ii.155) gives "dungbeetle." Mukula
Mukula
[cp. Sk. mukula] a bud; see makula (where also see mukulita). -- Abhp 811, 1116. Mukka
Mukka
[pp. of muc, Sk. mukta, for the usual P. mutta; cp. Prk. mukka, Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 566] only in um˚ & paṭi˚ (q. v.), and as v. l. at M iii.61. Mukkhaka
Mukkhaka
at J i.441 should be read as mokkhaka, meaning "first, principal, foremost"; cp. mokkha2. Mukha
Mukha
(nt.) [Vedic mukha, fr. Idg. *mu, onomat., cp. Lat. mu facere, Gr. muka/ omai, Mhg. mūgen, Lat. mūgio to moo (of cows), to make the sound "moo"; Ohg. māwen to cry, muckazzen to talk softly; also Gr. mu_qos word, "myth"; Ohg. mūla = Ger. maul; Ags. mule snout, etc. Vedic mūka silent, dumb=Lat. mutus=E. mute] 1. the mouth Sn 608, 1022 (with ref. to the long tongue, pahūta -- jivha, of the Buddha or Mahāpurisa); J ii.7; DA i.287 (uttāna˚ clear mouthed, i. e. easy to understand, cp. D i.116); PvA 11, 12 (pūti˚), 264 (mukhena). -- 2. the face J vi.218 (uṇṇaja m.); PvA 74, 75, 77; ˚ŋ karoti to make a face (i. e. grimace) Vism 343. -- adho˚ face downward Vin ii.78; opp. upari˚ (q. v.); assu˚ with tearful face Dh 67; PvA 39; see assu. -- dum˚ (adj.) sad or unfriendly looking J ii.393; vi.343; scurrilous J v.78; bhadra˚ brightfaced PvA 149; ruda˚ crying Pv i.112. -- 3. entrance, mouth (of a river) Mhvs 8, 12; āya˚ entrance (lit. opening), i. e. cause or means of income DA i.218; ukkā˚ the opening of a furnace, a goldsmith's smelting pot A i.257; Sn 686; J vi.217; 574. ubhato -- mukha having 2 openings M i.57. sandhi˚ opening of the cleft PvA 4. Hence: -- 4. cause, ways, means, reason, by way of J iii.55 by way of a gift (dānamukhe); iv.266 (bahūhi mukhehi). -- apāya˚ cause of ruin or loss A ii.166; iv.283. -- 5. front part, front, top, in īsā˚ of the carriage pole S i.224=J i.203. Hence: -- 6. the top of anything, front, head, best part; adj. topmost, foremost Sn 568 (aggihutta -- mukhā yaññā), 569 (nakkhattānaŋ mukhaŋ cando; cp. Vin i.246); VbhA 332 (=uttamaŋ, mukha -- bhūtaŋ vā). -- Der. adj. mokkha & pāmokkha (q. v.). Note. A poetical instr. sg. mukhasā is found at Pv i.23 & i.32, as if the nom. were mukho (s -- stem). -- The abl. mukhā is used as adv. "in front of, before," in cpd. sam˚ & param˚, e. g. PvA 13. See each sep.

-- ādhāna (1) the bit of a bridle M i.446; (2) setting of the mouth, i. e. mouth -- enclosure, rim of the m.; in m. siliṭṭhaŋ a well -- connected, well -- defined mouth -- contour DhsA 15 (not with trsl. "opens lightly," but better with note "is well adjusted," see Expos. 19, where write ˚ādhāna for ˚ādāna). -- āsiya (? cp. āsita1) to be eaten by the mouth DhsA 330 (mukhena asitabba). -- ullokana looking into a person's face, i. e. cheerful, bright, perhaps also flattering DhA ii.193 (as ˚olokana). -- ullokika flattering (cp. above) Nd1 249 (puthu Satthārānaŋ m. puthujjana); PvA 219. -- odaka water for rinsing the mouth Nd2 391 = Miln 370; VvA 65; DhA ii.19; iv.28. -- ja born in (or from) the mouth, i. e. a tooth J vi.219. -- tuṇḍa a beak VvA 227 [cp. BSk. mukhatuṇḍaka Divy 387]. -- dugga one whose mouth is a difficult road, i. e. one who uses his mouth (speech) badly Sn 664 (v. l. ˚dukkha). -- dūsi blemishes of the face, a rash on the face DA i.223 (m. -- dosa ibid.). -- dvāra mouth opening PvA 180. -- dhovana -- ṭṭhāna place for rinsing the mouth, "lavatory" DhA ii.184. -- puñchana wiping one's mouth Vin i.297. -- pūra filling the mouth, a mouthful, i. e. as much as to fill the mouth J vi.350. -- pūraka mouth -- filling Vism 106. -- bheri a musical instrument, "mouth -- drum," mouthorgan (?) Nd2 219 B; SnA 86. -- makkaṭika a grimace (like that of a monkey) of the face J ii.70, 448 (T. makkaṭiya). -- vaṭṭi "opening -- circumference," i. e. brim, edge, rim DhA ii.5 (of the Lohakumbhi purgatory, cp. J iii.43 lohakumbha -- mukhavaṭṭi); DhA iii.58 (of a gong). -- vaṇṇa the features PvA 122, 124. -- vikāra contortion of the mouth J ii.448. -- vikūṇa (=vikāra) grimace SnA 30. -- sankocana distortion or contraction of the mouth, as a sign of displeasure DhA ii.270; cp. mukha -- sankoca Vism 26. -- saññata controlling one's mouth (i. e. speech) Dh 363, cp. DhA iv.93. Mukhara
Mukhara
(adj.) [cp. Sk. mukhara; fr. mukha] garrulous, noisy, scurrilous S i.203; v.269; A i.70; iii.199, 355; Th 1, 955; Sn 275; J iii.103; DhA ii.70 (ati˚); PvA 11. -- opp. amukhara M i.470; Th 1, 926; Pug 35; Miln 414. Mukharatā
Mukharatā
(f.) [fr. mukhara] talkativeness, garrulousness, noisiness DhA ii.70. Mugga
Mugga
[Vedic mudga, cp. Zimmer, Altind. Leben 240] a kind of kidney -- bean, Phaseolus mungo, freq. combd with māsa2 (q. v.). On its size (larger than sāsapa, smaller than kalāya) see A v.170 & cp. kalāya. -- D ii.293; M i.57 (+māsa); S i.150; J i.274, 429; iii.55; vi.355 (˚māsā); Miln 267, 341; SnA 283.

-- sūpa bean -- soup Vism 27. -- sūpyatā "bean -- soupcharacter," or as Vism trsl. 32 has it "bean -- currytalk"; fig. denoting a faulty character, i. e. a man who behaves like bean -- soup. The metaphor is not quite transparent; it is expld by Bdhgh as meaning a man speaking half -- truths, as in a soup of beans some are only half -- boiled. The expln is forced, & is stereotype, as well as is the combn in which it occurs. Its origin remains to be elucidated. Anyhow it refers to an unevenness in character, a flaw of character. The passage (with var. spellings) is always the foll.: cāṭukamyatā (pātu˚ Nd2; ˚kammatā Miln; pāṭu˚ Vbh) mugga -- sūpyatā (˚sūpatā Nd2; ˚suppatā Miln & KhA 236; ˚sūpatā and suppatā Vbh & VbhA 338; supyatā Vism) pāribhaṭṭatā (˚bhatyatā Vism.; ˚bhaṭṭakatā Miln; ˚bhaṭyatā & ˚bbhaṭṭatā Vbh). At Nd2 391 it is used to explain sāvajja -- bhogin, at Vism 17 & Vbh 246 anācāra; at Vbh 352 lapanā; at Miln 370 it is used generally (cp. Miln trsl. ii.287). The C. expln of the Vbh passage, as given at (VbhA 483 &) Vism 17 runs as follows: "mugga -- sūpa -- samānāya sacc' âlikena jīvita kappanatāy' etaŋ adhivacanaŋ. Yathā hi muggasūpe paccante bahū muggā pākaŋ gacchanti, thokā na gacchanti, evam eva saccâlikena jīvitakappake puggale bahuŋ alikaŋ hoti, appakaŋ saccaŋ." The text at VbhA 483 is slightly different, although the sense is the same. Similarly at Vism 27. -- 535 -- Muggatiya
Muggatiya
(nt.?) [fr. mugga?] a plant, according to C. a species of bean J vi.536. Muggara
Muggara
[cp. Sk. mudgara] a club, hammer, mallet J i.113; ii.196, 382; v.47; vi.358; Miln 351; Vism 231; DhA i.126; ii.21; PvA 4, 55 (ayo˚), 56 (˚pahāra), 66, 192. The word is specifically peculiar to the so -- called Jātaka style. Mucala
Mucala
occurs as simplex only in Np. Mahā -- mucala -- mālaka Mhvs 15, 36. It refers to the tree mucalinda, of which it may be a short form. On the other hand mucal -- inda appears to the speaker of Pāli a cp. noun, viz. king of the mucala(s) (trees). Its (late?) Sk. correspondent is mucilinda, of which the P. form may be the regular representative (cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 34). -- 1. the tree Barringtonia acutangula (Nicula*, of which it may be a dialectical distortion: *Abhp 563 nicula>*mucula> *mucala) Vin i.3; J v.405 (˚ketakā, Dvandva); vi.269 (id.). -- 2. N. of a nāga (serpent) king Vin i.3. -- 3. N. of a great lake J vi.534, 535. Mucchati
Mucchati
[murch, an enlargement of Vedic mūr to get stiff (as in mūra stupid, dull, cp. Gr. mwro/s; Sk. mūrakha foolish). Used in 2 senses, viz. (a) to become stiff & (b) (Caus.) to harden, increase in tone, make louder. From (a) a fig. meaning is derived in the sense of to become dulled or stupid, viz. infatuated, possessed. -> See also Lüders in K.Z. xlii.194 a. How far we are justified to connect Dhtp 216 mū & 503 mu ("bandhane") with this root is a different question. These 2 roots seem to be without connections. -- mūrch itself is at Dhtp 50 defined with "mohe"] 1. (spelt muccati) to become stiff, congeal, coagulate, curdle Dh 71; DhA ii.67. -- 2. to become infatuated D iii.43 (majjati+). -- 3. only in Caus. muccheti to make sound, to increase in tone J ii.249 (vīṇaŋ); iii.188 (id.). -- pp. mucchita. Mucchanā
Mucchanā
(f.) [fr. mucchati 2] swelling or rising in tone, increase of sound J ii.249 (vīṇaŋ uttama -- mucchanāya mucchetvā vādesi). Mucchañcikatā
Mucchañcikatā
(˚añji˚) is probably the correct reading for puñcikatā. -- We find puñcikatā at Dhs 1136, 1230; Vbh 351, 361 (v. l. pucchañji˚); DhsA 365; mucchañci˚ at Nd1 8 & Nd2 p. 152; pucchañji˚ at VbhA 477. The meaning is "agitation," as seen from expln of term at DhsA 365 ("wagging of a dog's tail," pucchaŋ cāleti), and VbhA 477 ("lābhan' âlābhanaka -- ṭhāne vedhanā kampanā nīcavuttatā"). -- The etym. expln is difficult; we may take it as a (misunderstood) corruption of *mucch -- angi -- kata i. e. mucchā+anga+kṛ "being made stiff -- of -- limbs," or "swoon." Psychologically we may take "swoon" as the climax of agitation, almost like "hysterics." A similar case of a similar term of swooning being interpreted by Bdhgh as "wavering" (cal) is chambhitatta "paralysis," expld as "sakalasarīra calanaŋ" at DA i.50. -- The expression mucchañcikatā reminds us of the term kaṭukañcukatā. Mucchā
Mucchā
[fr. mūrch] 1. fainting, swoon PvA 174. -- 2. in- fatuation A ii.10 (kāma˚). Sn 328; Dhs 1059. Mucchita
Mucchita
[pp. of mucchati] 1. fainted, swooning, in a faint J i.243; DhA ii.112; PvA 62, 174, 258. -- 2. distraught, infatuated S i.61, 204; A i.274; D iii.46 (a˚); It 92; J iii.432; v.274 (C. for pagiddha & gadhita). -> Cp. pa˚. Mujjati
Mujjati
[The P. form of the Sk. majj] to sink, dive, be submerged Dhtp 70 (mujja = mujjana). Only in cpds. um˚ & ni˚. Muñcati
Muñcati
[Vedic muñcati; muc, to release, loosen; with orig. meaning "strip off, get rid of," hence also "glide" as in Lith. mūkti to escape, Ags. smūgan to creep, Ger. schmiegen to rub against. See further connections in Walde, Lat. Wtb., s. v. emungo. The Dhtp 376 expls by mocane, Dhtm 609 id.; 631: moce; 765: pamocane] I. Forms. The 2 bases muñc˚ & mucc˚ are differentiated in such a way, that muñc˚ is the active base, and mucc˚ the passive. There are however cases where the active forms (muñc˚) are used for the passive ones (mucc˚), which may be due simply to a misspelling, ñc & cc being very similar. -- A. Active. pres. muñcati J i.375; iv.272; v.453; Vv 6418; pot. muñcetha Dh 389; imper. muñca Dh 348; ppr. muñcanto Sn 791; aor. muñci J v.289; Mhvs 19, 44; pl. muñciŋsu J iv.142; ger. muñciya Mhvs 25, 67; mutvā J i.375; & muñcitvā ibid.; PvA 43; inf. muñcituŋ D i.96. -- Caus. II. muñcāpeti D i.148. -- B. Passive. pres. muccati Sn 508; ppr. muccanto J i.118; imper, sg. muccassu Th 2, 2; pl. muccatha DhA ii.92; pot. muñceyya Pv ii.26; PvA 104; Dh 127; fut. muccissati J i.434 (where also muñcissati in same sense); DhA i.105; iii.242; PvA 53, 105; also mokkhasi Vin i.21 = S i.111; pl. mokkhanti Dh 37; aor. mucci(ŋsu) S iii.132; iv.20; J ii.66; inf. muccituŋ Th 1, 253; DhA i.297. -- Caus. moceti & mocāpeti (q. v.). -- pp. mutta. -- II. Meanings. 1. to release, deliver (from=abl.), set free (opp. bandhati) Sn 508 (sujjhati, m., bajjhati); S iii.132 (cittāni mucciŋsu their hearts were cleansed), Th 2, 2 (muccassu); Dh 127 (pāpakammā, quoted at PvA 104); Pv ii.26; PvA 53 (niray' ûpapattito muccissati), 105; DhA i.297 (dukkhā muccitu -- kāma desirous of being delivered from unpleasantness; v. l. muñc˚); ii.92 (dukkhā). -> 2. to send off, let loose, drop, give J iv.272 (saraŋ an arrow); Vism 313 (dhenu vacchakassa khīra -- dhāraŋ m.); Mhvs 25, 63 (phalakaŋ). -- 3. to let out of the yoke, to unharness, set free D i.148 (satta usabhasatāni muñcāpeti); PvA 43 (yoggāni muñcitvā). -> 4. to let go, emit, send forth (light) J v.289 (obhāsaŋ muñci); Mhvs 19, 44 (rasmiyo). -- 5. to send forth (sound); to utter, emit (words etc.) J i.375 (vācaŋ); Vv 6418 (mālā m. ghosaŋ=vissajjenti VvA 281). -> 6. (from 4 & 5 in general) to undertake, to bestow, send forth, let loose on Dh 389: "na brāhmaṇassa pahareyya nâssa muñcetha brāhmaṇo," where DhA iv.148 supplements veran na muñcetha (i. e. kopaŋ na kareyya). In this case veraŋ muñcati would be the same as the usual veraŋ bandhati, thus opposite notions being used complementarily. The interpretation "give up" (enmity) instead of "undertake" is possible from a mere grammatical point of view. L. v. Sohroeder (Worte der Wahrheil) trsls "noch stürzt der Priester auf den Feind"! -- 7. to abandon, give up, leave behind Dh 348 (muñca, viz. taṇhaŋ DhA iv.63); J v.453 (peta -- rāja -- visayaŋ). -- 8. An idiomatic (late) use of the ger. muñciya (with acc.) is in the sense of an adv. (or prep.), meaning "except, besides," e. g. maŋ m. Mhvs 25, 67; imaŋ m. (besides this Mhvs 14, 17). -- Cp. pa˚, paṭi˚, vi˚. Note. At Dh 71 muccati stands for muccheti (=Sk. mūrchati) to become stiff, coagulate, curdle; cp. DhA ii.67. -- 536 -- Muñcana & Muccana
Muñcana
& Muccana (nt.) [abstr. fr. muc] 1. release, being freed, deliverance J iv.478 (mucc˚); ˚ākāra (muñc˚) means of deliverance (dukkhato from ill) DhA i.267; ˚kāla time of release (dukkhā from suffering) DhA ii.11 (mucc˚, v. l. muñc˚). -- 2. letting loose, emitting, giving, bestowing VbhA 249 (speaking, shouting out; Vism reading p. 265 is to be corrected fr. mañcana!); PvA 132 (v. l. dāna). Muñcanaka
Muñcanaka
(adj.) [fr. muñcana] sending out or forth, emitting VvA 303 (pabhā˚). Muñja
Muñja
[Vedic muñja, cp. Zimmer, Altind. Leben 72] 1. a sort of grass (reed) Saccharum munja Roxb. Sn 440. ˚kesa having a dark mane (like m. grass) D ii.174. ˚pādukā slipper made of m. grass DhA iii.451. ˚maya made of m. grass Sn 28. -- The reed itself is called isīkā (q. v.). -- 2. a sort of fish J iv.70 (+rohita, taken as Dvandva by C.); vi.278 (id.). Muṭa
Muṭa
see mutoḷī. Otherwise occurring in Np. Muṭa -- siva at Mhvs 11, 4. Muṭṭha
Muṭṭha
[pp. of mussati, mṛṣ] having forgotten, one who forgets; only in two cpds., viz. ˚sacca [der. fr. foll.: muṭṭha+sati+ya] forgetfulness, lit. forgotten -- mindedness, usually combd with asampajañña, D iii.213; A v.149; Pug 21; Dhs 1349 (where read: yā asati ananussati . . . adhāraṇatā pilāpanatā sammussanatā); Vbh 360, 373; Vism 21; DhA iv.85; & ˚sati(n) (adj.) "forgetful in mindfulness," i. e. forgetful, careless, bewildered [cp. BSk. amuṣitasmṛti Lal. V. 562, to all appearance (wrongly) derived from P. musati to rob, mus, muṣṇāti] D iii.252, 282; S i.61 (+asampajāna); Pug 21, 35 (neither passage expld in PugA!); J iii.488; VbhA 275. As ˚satika at Miln 79. -- Note. muṭṭhasati with var. (unsuccessful) etym. is discussed in detail also by Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, pp. 92 -- 94. Muṭṭhi
Muṭṭhi
(f.) [Vedic muṣṭi, m. f. Does defn "muṭ = mad- dane" at Dhtm 125 refer to muṭṭhi?] the fist VvA 206. muṭṭhī katvā gaṇhāti to take by making a fist, i. e. clutch tightly, clenching one's fist J vi.331. -- muṭṭhiŋ akāsi he made a fist (as sign) J vi.364. As -- ˚ often meaning "handful." -- ācariya -- muṭṭhi close -- fistedness in teaching, keeping things back from the pupil D ii.100; S v.153; J ii.221, 250; VvA 138; SnA 180, 368. kuṇḍaka˚ handful of rice powder VvA 5; DhA i.425. taṇḍula˚ handful of rice PvA 131. tila˚ do. of tilaseeds J ii.278. paŋsu˚ do. of soil J vi.405. ritta˚ an empty fist SnA 306=DhA iv.38 (˚sadisa alluding to ignorance).

-- yuddha fist -- fight, boxing D i.6. -- sammuñjanī "fistbroom" a short broom DhA ii.184. Muṭṭhika
Muṭṭhika
[fr. muṭṭhi] 1. a fist -- fighter, wrestler, boxer Vin ii.105 (malla˚); J iv.81 (Np.); vi.277; Vism 31 (+malla). -- 2. a sort of hammer J v.45. Muṇḍa
Muṇḍa
(adj.) [cp. BSk. muṇḍa] bald, shaven; a shaven, (bald -- headed) ascetic, either a samaṇa, or a bhikkhu or (f.) bhikkhunī S i.175 (m. sanghāṭi -- pāruta); Vin iv.265 (f.); Sn p. 80 ( = muṇḍita -- sīsa SnA 402). -- kaṇṇa˚ with cropped or shorn ears (appld to a dog) Pv ii.1210, cp. muṇḍaka.

-- pabbataka a bare mountain J i.303 (Hatthimatta); VvA 302 (v. l. for T. muṇḍika -- pabbata). -- vaṭṭin "shaven hireling" (?), a king's servant, probably porter Vin ii.137. The expln given by Bdhgh on p. 319 (on CV. v. 29. 5) is twofold, viz. malla -- kammakar' ādayo viya kacchaŋ banditvā nivāsenti; and muṇḍa -- veṭṭhī (sic) ti yathā rañño kuhiñci gacchanto parikkhāra -- bhaṇḍavahana -- manussā ti adhippāyo. Maybe that reading veṭi is more correct. -- sira shaven head DhA ii.125. Muṇḍaka
Muṇḍaka
= muṇḍa; cp. BSk. muṇḍaka Divy 13. -- Sn p. 80; Dh 264 (=sīsa -- muṇḍana -- matta DhA iii.391, qualification of a shaveling); VvA 67 (˚samaṇā, Dvandva). -- aḍḍha˚ shaven over one half the head (sign of loss of freedom) Mhvs 6, 42. -- kaṇṇa˚ "with blunt corners," N. of one of the 7 great lakes: see under kaṇṇa. -- paṭisīsaka the chignon of a shaveling, in phrase: kāsāyaŋ nivāsetvā muṇḍaka -- paṭisīsakaŋ sīse paṭimuñcitvā fastening the (imitation) top -- knot of a shaveling to his head Miln 90; cp. J ii.197 (paccekabuddha -- vesaŋ gaṇhitvā paṭisīsakaŋ paṭimuñcitvā), similarly J v.49. Muṇḍatta
Muṇḍatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. muṇḍa] the fact of being shaven or shorn PvA 106. Muṇḍana
Muṇḍana
(nt.) [fr. muṇḍa] shaving, tonsure DhA iii.391 Muṇḍika
Muṇḍika
( -- pabbata) bare (mountain), uncertain T. reading at VvA 302 for v. l. SS muṇḍa -- pabbata (q. v.). Muṇḍita
Muṇḍita
[pp. of muṇḍeti] shaven SnA 402 (˚sīsa). Muṇḍiya
Muṇḍiya
[abstr. fr. muṇḍa] baldness, shaven condition (of ascetics & bhikkhus) M i.515; Sn 249; Kvu i.95; Sdhp 374. Muṇḍeti
Muṇḍeti
[Denom. -- Caus. from muṇḍa] to shave Mhbv 103. -- pp. muṇḍita. -- The BSk. has only Caus. II. muṇḍāpayati, at Divy 261. Should Dhtp 106 "muṇḍ = khaṇḍha" be the defn of muṇḍati? -- At J iii.368 we find muṇḍati for muṇḍeti (kuṇṭha -- satthena muṇḍanto viya), which should prob. be read muṇḍento. Muta
Muta
[for mata, cp. Geiger. P.Gr. § 18] thought, supposed, imagined (i. e. received by other vaguer sense impressions than by sight & hearing) M i.3; Sn 714 ( = phusan' arahaŋ SnA 498), 812; J v.398 (=anumata C.); Vbh 14, 429 sq. -- Often in set diṭṭha suta muta what is seen, heard & thought (? more likely "felt," cp. Nd2 298: diṭṭha=cakkhunā d., sutaŋ=sotena s., mutaŋ=ghānena ghāyitaŋ, jivhāya sāyitaŋ, kāyena phuṭṭaŋ, and viññātaŋ=manasā v.; so that from the interpretation it follows that d. s. m. v. refer to the action (perception) of the 6 senses, where muta covers the 3 of taste, smell & touch, and viññāta the function of the manas) S i.186 (K.S. i.237 note); iv.73; Th i.1216. Similarly the psychol. analysis of the senses at Dhs 961: rūp' āyatanaŋ diṭṭhaŋ; sadd -- āyat. sutaŋ; gandh˚, ras˚, phoṭṭhabb˚ mutaŋ; sabbaŋ rūpaŋ manasā viññātaŋ. See on this passage Dhs trsl. § 961 note. In the same sense DhsA 388 (see Expositor, ii.439). -- D iii.232; Sn 790 (cp. Nd1 87 sq. in extenso) 793, 798, 812, 887, 901, 914, 1086, 1122. Thus quite a main tenet of the old (popular) psychology.

-- mangalika one who prophesies from, or derives lucky auspices from impressions (of sense; as compd with diṭṭha -- mangalika visible -- omen -- hunter, and suta -- m. sound -- augur) J iv.73 (where C. clearly expls by "touch"); KhA 119 (the same expln more in detail). -- visuddhika of great purity, i. e. orthodox, successful, in matters of touch Nd1 89, 90. -- suddhi purity in matter of touch Nd1 104, 105. Muti
Muti
(f.) [for mati, cp. muta] sense -- perception, experience, understanding, intelligence Sn 864; Nd1 205 (on Sn 846 = hearsay, what is thought); Vbh 325 (diṭṭhi, ruci, muti, where muti is expld at VbhA 412 as "mudatī ti muti"!) 328; Sdhp 221. Cp. sam˚. Mutinga
Mutinga
[Sk. mṛdanga on d>t. cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 23] a small drum, tabour D i.79; Vin i.15; S ii.266 sq. (a famous mythological drum, called Ānaka; same also at J ii.344); J iv.395 (bheri+); KhA 49. Spelling mudinga at S ii.266; J iv.395; Vism 250; VbhA 232; VvA 210 (v. l. SS mutinga), 340 (id.).

-- sadda sound of the drum J i.3 (one of the 10 sounds, hatthi˚, assa˚ etc.). -- 537 -- Mutimant
Mutimant
(adj.) [fr. muti] sensible, intelligent, wise Sn 539; as mutīmā at Sn 61, 321, 385; pl. 881; J iv.76 (as mutīmā & mutimā); Nd2 511 = 259. Cp. matimant. Mutoḷī
Mutoḷī
[?] a doubtful word occurring only in one stock phrase, viz. "ubhato -- mukhā m. pūrā nānā -- vihitassa dhaññassa" at M i.57 (vv. ll. putoḷi, mūṭolī) = iii.90 (mūtoḷī)=D ii.293 (T. mutoli, v. l. muṭoli; gloss K pūtolī). The Dial. ii.330 trsl. "sample bag" (see note on this passage; with remark "spelling uncertain"). Neumann, Mittlere Sammlung i.101 trsls "Sack." -> Kern, Toev. s. v. mutoḷī tries to connect it with BSk. moṭa (Hindi moṭh), bundle, which (with vv. ll. mūḍha, muṭa, mūṭa) occurs only in one stock phrase "bharaiḥ motaiḥ piṭakaiḥ" at Divy 5, 332, 501, 524. The more likely solution, however, is that mutoḷī is a distortion of puṭosā (puṭosa), which is found as v. l. to puṭaŋsa at all passages concerned (see puṭaŋsa). Thus the meaning is "bag, provision -- bag." The BSk. moṭa (muṭa) remains to be elucidated. The same meaning "provision -- bag" fits at Vism 328 in cpd. yāna˚, where spelling is T. ˚paṭṭoli, v. l. BB ˚putoḷi, but which is clearly identical with our term. We should thus prefer to read yāna -- puṭosi "carriage -- bag for provisions." Mutta
Mutta1
[pp. of muñcati; Sk. mukta] 1. released, set free, freed; as -- ˚ free from Sn 687 (abbhā˚ free from the stain of a cloud); Dh 172 (id.), 382 (id.). -- Dh 344; Pv iv.134; PvA 65 (su˚). -- 2. given up or out, emitted, sacrificed Vin iii.97 = iv.27 (catta, vanta, m.) A iii.50 (catta+). Cp. vi˚. -- 3. unsystematised. Comp. 9, 137 (vīthi˚).

-- ācāra of loose habits D i.166 = iii.40=Pug 55 (where expld at PugA 231, as follows: vissatth' ācāro. Uccārakamm' ādīsu lokiya -- kulaputt' ācārena virahito ṭhitako va uccāraŋ karoti passāvaŋ karoti khādati bhuñjati). -- paṭibhāna of loose intelligence, or immoderate promptitude (opp. yutta˚), quick -- tempered Pug 42 (cp. PugA 223); SnA 110, 111; -- saddha given up to faith Sn 1146 (=saddhâdhimutta Nd2 512). -- sirā (pl.) with loose (i. e. confused) heads KhA 120=Vism 415. Mutta
Mutta2
(nt.) [cp. Vedic mūtra; Idg. *meud to be wet, as in Gr. mu/zw to suck, muda/w to be wet; Mhg. smuz ( = Ger. schmutz), E. smut & mud, Oir. muad cloud (= Sk. mudira cloud); Av. muprem impurity, Mir. mūn urine; Gr. miai/nw to make dirty] urine Vin iv.266 (passāvo muttaŋ vuccati); Pv i.91 (gūthañ ca m.); PvA 43, 78. Enumd under the 32 constituents of the body (the dvattiŋs -- ākāraŋ) at Kh iii. (cp. KhA 68 in detail on mutta; do. Vism 264, 362; VbhA 68, 225, 248 sq.) =M iii.90=D ii.293 etc.

-- ācāra see mutta1. -- karaṇa "urine -- making," i. e. pudendum muliebre, cunnus Vin iv.260. -- karīsa urine & faeces, i. e. excrements Vin i.301; S iii.85; A ii.33; Sn 835; Nd1 181; J vi.111; Vism 259, 305, 342, 418 (origin of). -- gata what has become urine DhsA 247 (gūtha˚+). -- vatthi the bladder Vism 345. Muttaka
Muttaka
(adj.) [mutta1+ka] only in cpd. antarā˚ one who is released in the meantime Vin ii.167. Muttakā
Muttakā
(f.) = muttā; ˚maya made of pearls Mhvs 27, 33. Muttatā
Muttatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. mutta1] state of being liberated, freedom J v.480. Muttā
Muttā
(f.) [cp. Sk. muktā] a pearl Vv 377 (˚ācita); Pv ii.75 (+veḷuriya); Mhvs 30, 66. Eight sorts of pearls are enumd at Mhvs. 11, 14, viz. haya -- gaja -- rath' āmalakā valay'anguli -- veṭhakā kakudha -- phala -- pākatikā, i.e. horse -- , elephant -- , waggon -- , myrobalan -- , bracelet -- , ring -- , kakudha fruit -- , and common pearls.

-- āhāra a string or necklace of pearls J i.383; vi.489; DhA i.85; SnA 78 (simile); Vism 312. -- jāla a string (net) of pearls J iv.120; Mhvs 27, 31; VvA 198. -- dāma garland or wreath of p. Mhvs 30, 67 (so T. for v. l. ˚maya). -- vali string of pearls VvA 169. -- sikkā string of pearls VvA 244. Mutti
Mutti
(f.) [fr. muc, cp. Sk. mukti] release, freedom, emancipation Sn 344 (muty -- apekho); Nd1 88, 89 (+vimutti & parimutti); PvA 35, 46; Sdhp 492. -- Cp. vi˚. Muttika
Muttika
[fr. muttā] a pearl vendor, dealer in pearls Miln 262. Mudati
Mudati
[for modati?] in exegetical expln of "muti" at VbhA 412: mudatī ti muti. See muti. Mudayantī
Mudayantī
(f.) [cp. Sk. modayantī] a certain plant, perhaps Ptychotis ajowan J vi.536. Mudā
Mudā
(f.) [fr. mud, see modati] joy, pleasure D ii.214 (v. l. pamudā); Sdhp 306, 308. Mudinga
Mudinga
see mutinga. Mudita
Mudita
[pp. of mud, modati] pleased, glad, satisfied, only in cpd. ˚mana (adj.) with gladdened heart, pleased in mind Sn 680 (+udagga); Vv 8315 (+pasanna -- citta). Cp. pa˚. Muditā
Muditā
(f.) [abstr. fr. mudu, for the usual mudutā, which in P. is only used in ord. sense, whilst muditā is in pregnant sense. Its semantic relation to mudita (pp. of mud) has led to an etym. relation in the same sense in the opinion of P. Commentators and the feeling of the Buddhist teachers. That is why Childers also derivers it from mud, as does Bdhgh. -- BSk. after the Pali: muditā Divy 483] soft -- heartedness, kindliness, sympathy. Often in triad mettā ("active love" SnA 128), karuṇā ("preventive love," ibid.), muditā ("disinterested love": modanti vata bho sattā modanti sādhu sutthū ti ādinā mayena hita -- sukh' âvippayogakāmatā muditā SnA 128); e. g. at D i.251; S v.118; A i.196 etc. (see karuṇā). -- Cp. also Sn 73; D iii.50, 224, 248; Miln 332 (˚saññā;+mettā˚, karuṇā˚); Vism 318 (where defined as "modanti tāya, taŋ -- samangino, sayaŋ vā modati etc."); DhsA 192. See on term Dhs trsl. §251 (where equalled to sugxairosu/nh); Cpd. 24 (called sympathetic & appreciative), 97 (called "congratulatory & benevolent attitude"); Expos. 200 (interpretation here refers to mudutā DhsA 151 "plasticity"). Mudu
Mudu
(adj.) [Vedic mṛdu, fr. mṛd: see maddati; cp. Lat. mollis (fr. *moldṷis); Gr. a)maldu/nw to weaken, Cymr. blydd soft] soft, mild, weak, tender D ii.17 = iii.143 (+taluṇa); A ii.151 (pañcindriyāni mudūni, soft, blunt, weak: opp. tikkha); S ii.268 (˚taluṇa -- hatthapādā); Sn 447 (=muduka SnA 393); Th 1, 460 (=loving); Pv i.92; Vism 64; PvA 46, 230. Compar. mudutara S v.201.

-- indriya (mud˚) weak, slow minded, of dull senses Ps i.121 = ii.195; Vism 87. -- citta a tender heart PvA 54. -- cittatā kind (soft) heartedness DhA i.234. -- piṭṭhika having a soft (i. e. pliable) back Vin iii.35. -- bhūta supple, malleable D i.76 (+kammaniya); Pug 68. -- maddava soft & tender (said of food taken by young women to preserve their good looks) DhsA 403. -- hadaya tender -- hearted DhA ii.5. Muduka
Muduka
(adj.) [fr. mudu] = mudu. -- 1. flexible, pliable, soft S ii.221 (sanghāṭi); Vism 66 (giving in easily, cpd. with ukkaṭṭha & majjhima); KhA 49 (˚aṭṭhikāni soft bones); Mhvs 25, 102 (sayana); bhūmi Miln 34. -- 2. soft, mild, gentle, kindly, tender -- hearted J v.83 (m. hadaya), 155; Miln 229 (cittaŋ m.); SnA 84 (˚jātika), 393; DhA i.249 (citta); PvA 243. -- 3. soft, weak, pampered, spoilt S ii.268 (of the Licchavi princes). -- See also maddava, & cp. ati˚. Mudutā
Mudutā
(f.) [cp. Sk. mṛdutā; abstr. fr. mudu. See also muditā] softness, impressibility, plasticity A i.9; D iii.153 (trsln "loveliness"); Dhs 44 (+maddavatā); 1340 (id.); Vism 463 sq.; DhsA 151 ( = mudubhāva); cp. Dhs. trsl. §1340. -- 538 -- Muddā
Muddā
(f.) [cp. (late?) Sk. mudrā] 1. a seal, stamp, impression; -- rāja˚ the royal seal DhA i.21. Also with ref. to the State Seal at Miln 280, 281 in cpds. muddakāma (amacca) & mudda -- paṭilābha. -- 2. the art of calculation mentioned as a noble craft (ukkaṭṭhaŋ sippaŋ) at Vin iv.7 (with gaṇanā & lekhā), as the first of the sippāni (with gaṇanā) at M i.85 = Nd2 199. Further at Miln 3, 59, 78 sq., 178. Cp. BSk. mudrā in same sense (e. g. at Divy 3, 26, 58 in set lipyā, sankhyā, gaṇanā, m.). Bdhgh's expln of muddā D i.11 m.+gaṇanā (see DA i.95) as "hattha -- muddā -- gaṇanā" is doubtful; since at Miln 78 sq. muddā & gaṇanā are two quite diff. things. See also Franke, Dīgha trsl. p. 18, with note (he marks muddā "Finger -- Rechnen" with?); and cp. Kern, Toev. i.166 s. v. muddā. The Dial. i.21 trsl. "counting on the fingers" (see Dial. i.21, 22 with literature & more refs.). -- hattha˚ is signlanguage, gesture (lit. hand -- arithmetic), a means of communicating (question & answer) by signs, as clearly evident fr. J vi.364 (hattha -- muddāya naŋ pucchissāmi . . . muṭṭhiŋ akāsi, sā "ayaŋ me . . . pucchati" ti ñatvā hatthaŋ vikāsesi, so ñatvā . . .; he then asks by word of mouth). -- hattha -- muddaŋ karoti to make a sign, to beckon J iii.528; cp. Vin v.163: na hatthavikāro kātabbo, na hattha -- muddā dassetabbā.

-- âdhikaraṇa the office of the keeper of the Privy Seal, Chancellorship Miln 281. Muddika
Muddika
(adj. n.) [fr. muddā] one who practises muddā (i. e. knowledge of signs) D i.51 (in list of occupations, combd with gaṇaka & trsld Dial. i.68 by "accountant"; cp. Franke, Dīgha p. 53, "Finger -- rechner"?) Vin iv.8 (m., gaṇaka, lekhaka); S iv.376 (gaṇaka, m., sankhāyaka). Muddikā
Muddikā1
(f.) [fr. muddā] a seal ring, signet -- ring, finger- ring J i.134; iii.416; iv.439; DhA i.394; ii.4 (a ring given by the king to the keeper of the city gates as a sign of authority, and withdrawn when the gates are closed at night); iv.222. anguli˚ finger -- ring, signetring Vin ii.106; J iv.498; v.467. -- Similarly as at DhA ii.4 (muddikaŋ āharāpeti) muddikā is fig. used in meaning of "authority," command; in phrase muddikaŋ deti to give the order, to command Miln 379 (with ref. to the captain of a ship). Muddikā
Muddikā2
(f.) [fr. mudu, cp. *Sk. mṛdvīkā] a vine or bunch of grapes, grape, grape wine Vin i.246 (˚pāna); J iv.529; DhA ii.155. Muddha
Muddha1
[pp. of muh, for the usual mūḷha, corresp. to Sk. mugdha. Not = mṛddha (of mṛdh to neglect) which in P. is maddhita: see pari˚; nor=mṛdhra disdained] infatuated, bewildered, foolish J v.436.

-- dhātuka bewildered in one's nature, foolish(ly) J iv.391 (v. l. luddha˚); DhA iii.120 (v. l. danta˚ & mūḷa˚). Muddha & Muddhā
Muddha2
& Muddhā [Vedic mūrdhan, the P. word shows a mixture of a -- and n -- stem] the head; top, summit. -> m. sg. muddhā Sn 983, 1026, & muddhaŋ Sn 989; acc muddhaŋ D i.95; Sn 987 sq., 1004, 1025; Dh 72 ( = paññāy' etaŋ nāmaŋ DhA ii.73); & muddhānaŋ M i.243; iii.259=S iv.56; instr. muddhanā Mhvs 19, 30; loc. muddhani Sn 689, 987; M i.168; Vism 262; Mhvs 36, 66, in meaning "on the top of (a mountain)": Vin i.5 (here spelt pabbata -- muddhini)=S i.137; J iv.265 (Yugandhara˚); Pv ii.961 (Naga˚=Sineru˚ PvA 138); Vism 304 (vammika˚ on top of an ant -- hill). -- Freq. in phrase muddhā (me, or no, or te) sattadhā phaleyya , as an oath or exclamn of desecration or warning: "(your) head shall split into 7 pieces," intrs. spelt both phal˚ & phāl˚ at J v.92 (te s. phal˚); Miln 157; DhA i.17 (me . . . phāl˚), 41 (te phalatu s.), 42 (ācariyassa m. s. phalissati); iv.125 (no . . . phāleyya); VvA 68 (me s. phal˚). -- In compn muddha˚.

-- (n)aṭṭhi (muddhan -- aṭṭhi) bone of the head KhA 51. -- âdhipāta head -- splitting, battering of the head Sn 988 sq., 1004, 1025; -- âdhipātin head -- splitting (adj.) Sn 1026. -- âra head (top) spoke KhA 172. -- âvasitta "head -- anointed" a properly anointed or crowned king D iii.60 sq., 69; Pug 56; Miln 234. -- pāta = ˚âdhipāta. Muddhatā
Muddhatā
(f.) [fr. muddha1] foolishness, stupidity, infatua- tion J v.433 (v. l. muṭhatā, muddatā). Mudhā
Mudhā
(adv.) [Class. Sk. mudhā] for nothing, gratis VvA 77. Munana
Munana
(nt.) [fr. munāti, almost equal to mona] fathoming, recognising, knowing; a C. word to explain "muni," used by Dhpāla at VvA 114 (mahā -- isibhūtaŋ . . . mahanten' eva ñāṇena munanato paricchindanato mahā muniŋ), & 231 (anavasesassa ñeyyassa munanato muni). Munāti
Munāti
[ = manyate, prob. corresponding to Sk. med. manute, with inversion *munati and analogy formation after jānāti as munāti, may be in allusion to Sk. mṛṇāti of mṛ to crush, or also mā mināti to measure out or fathom. The Dhtm 589 gives as root mun in meaning "ñāṇa." The word is more a Com. word than anything else, formed from muni & in order to explain it] to be a wise man or muni, to think, ponder, to know Dh 269 (yo munāti ubho loke munī tena pavuccati), which is expld at DhA iii.396 as follows: "yo puggalo . . . tulaŋ āropetvā minanto viya ime ajjhattikā khandhā ime bāhirā ti ādinā nayena ime ubho pi atthe mināti munī tena pavuccati." Note. The word occurs also in Māgadhī (Prk.) as muṇaï which as Pischel (Prk. Gr. § 489) remarks, is usually taken to man, but against this speaks its meaning "to know" & Pāli munāti. He compares maṇaï with Vedic mūta in kāma -- mūta (driven by kāma; mūta=pp. of mū=mīv) and Sk. muni. Cp. animo movere. Muni
Muni
[cp. Vedic muni, originally one who has made the vow of silence. Cp. Chh. Up. viii.5, 2; Pss. of the Br. 132 note. Connected with mūka: see under mukha. This etym. preferred by Aufrecht: Halāyudha p. 311. Another, as favoured by Pischel (see under munāti) is "inspired, moved by the spirit." Pāli explns (popular etym.) are given by Dhammapāla at VvA 114 & 231: see munana] a holy man, a sage, wise man. I. The term which was specialised in Brahmanism has acquired a general meaning in Buddhism & is applied by the Buddha to any man attaining perfection in self -- restraint and insight. So the word is capable of many -- sided application and occurs frequently in the oldest poetic anthologies, e. g. Sn 207 -- 221 (the famous Muni -- sutta, mentioned Divy 20, 35; SnA 518; expld SnA 254 -- 277), 414, 462, 523 sq., 708 sq., 811 sq., 838, 844 sq., 912 sq., 946, 1074 & passim (see Pj. Index p. 749); Dh 49, 225, 268 sq., 423. -- Cp. general passages & explns at Pv ii.113; ii.133 (expld at PvA 163 by "attahitañ ca parahitañ ca munāti jānātī ti muni"); Miln 90 (munibhāva "munihood," meditation, self -- denial, abrogation); DhA iii.521 (munayo = moneyya -- paṭipadāya maggaphalaŋ pattā asekha -- munayo), 395 (here expld with ref. to orig. meaning tuṇhībhāva "state of silence" =mona). -- II. The Com. & Abhidhamma literature have produced several schedules of muni -- qualities, esp. based on the 3 fold division of character as revealed in action, speech & thought (kāya˚, vacī˚, mano˚). Just as these 3 are in general exhibited in good or bad ways of living (˚sucaritaŋ & ˚duccaritaŋ), they are applied to a deeper quality of saintship in kāya -- moneyya, vacīmoneyya, mano -- moneyya; or Muni -- hood in action, speech & thought; and the muni himself is characterised as a kāya -- muni, vacī˚ & mano˚. Thus runs the long exegesis of muni at Nd2 514a= Nd1 57. Besides this the same chapter (514b) gives a division of 6 munis, viz. agāra -- muni, anagāra˚ (the bhikkhus), sekha˚, asekha˚ (the Arahants), pacceka˚ (the Paccekabuddhas), muni˚ (the Tathāgatas). -- The parallel passage to Nd2 514a at A i.273 gives a muni as kāya -- muni, vācā˚ & ceto˚ (under the 3 moneyyāni). -- 539 -- Mummura
Mummura
[*Sk. murmura, lit. crackling, rustling; cp. Lat. murmur = E. murmur, Gr. mormu/rw to rustle, Ohg. murmurōn & murmulōn=Ger. murmeln; all to Idg. *mrem, to which Sk. marmara: see P. mammara & cp. murumurā] crackling fire, hot ashes, burning chaff J ii.134. Muyhati
Muyhati
[Vedic muhyati, muh; defn Dhtp 343: mucchā- yaŋ; 460: vecitte; cp. moha & momuha] to get bewildered, to be infatuated, to become dull in one's senses, to be stupified. Just as rāga, dosa & moha form a set, so do the verbs rajjati, dussati, muyhati, e. g. Miln 386 (rajjasi rajjanīyesu, dussanīyesu dussasi, muyhase mohaniyesu). Otherwise rare as finite verb; only DhsA 254 (in defn of moha) & Sdhp 282, 605 (so read for mayhate). -- pp. mūḷha & muddha1. Muyhana
Muyhana
(nt.) [fr. muyhati] bewilderment, stupefaction, infatuation DA i.195 (rajjana -- dussana -- m.). Muraja
Muraja
[cp. Epic. & Class. Sk. muraja, Prk. murava: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 254] 1. a small drum, tambourine J v.390; Vv 353 ( = bheri VvA 161); 8418 (=mudinga VvA 340); SnA 370. -- 2. a kind of girdle Vin ii.136. Murumurā
Murumurā
(indecl.) [onomat. to sound root mṛ, see mammara & mummura] the grinding, crackling sound of the teeth when biting bones, "crack"; in phrase m. ti khādati to eat or bite up to bits J i.342; v.21 (of a Yakkhinī, eating a baby). Murumurāpeti
Murumurāpeti
= murumurāyati J ii.127; iii.134; v.196 (˚etvā khādati). Murumurāyati
Murumurāyati
[Denom. fr. murumurā] to munch, chew, bite up with a cracking sound J iv.491. Muḷāla & Muḷālī
Muḷāla
& Muḷālī (f.) [cp. Vedic mulālin. Zimmer, Altind Leben 70 mentions Bisa, Śāluka & Mulālin as edible roots of lotus kinds. -- Geiger, P.Gr. 12 & 43 puts muḷāla = Sk. mṛṇāla] the stalk of the lotus: muḷālī Vin i.215 (bhisa+); muḷāli J vi.530 (=muḷālaka C.); muḷālikā Vin i.215 (bhisa+); bhisa -- muḷālaŋ (nt.) (collective cpd.) fibre & stalks Vin ii.201=S ii.269; iv.94; v.39; Vism 361; VbhA 66. -- muḷāli -- puppha a lotus Th 1, 1089. Musati
Musati
[in this connection = mṛṣ in an active sense, as quâsi Denom. fr. musā. Not to muṣ to steal, which is given at Dhtp 491 with "theyya"] to betray, beguile, bewilder, dazzle, in cakkhūni m. D ii.183 (but trsln "destructive to the eyes"); musati 'va nayanaŋ Vv 353 (cp. VvA 161). Musala
Musala
(m. nt.) [cp. Vedic musala. The etym. is probably to be connected with mṛd (see maddati)] 1. a pestle (whilst udukkhala is "mortar," cp. J ii.428 & see udukkhala) D i.166 = Pug 55; DhA ii.131 (+suppa). -> 2. a club A ii.241; VvA 121. -- 3. a crowbar J i.199; PvA 258 (˚daṇḍa). Musalaka
Musalaka
(nt.) [fr. musala] a little pestle, a toy for little girls DhsA 321. Musalika
Musalika
only in cpd. danta˚ (an ascetic) who uses his teeth as a pestle J iv.8 (an aggi -- pakkaŋ khādati, eats food uncooked, only crushed by his teeth). Musā
Musā
(adv.) [Vedic mṛṣā, fr. mṛṣ, lit. "neglectfully"] falsely, wrongly; uṣually with verbs vadati, bhanati, bhāsati & brūti to speak falsely, to tell a lie. -- A i.149 (opp. saccaŋ); Sn 122, 158, 397, 400, 757, 883, 967, 1131; Nd1 291; Pv i.33; VvA 72 ( = abhūtaŋ atacchaŋ); SnA 19; PvA 16, 152.

-- vāda lying, a falsehood, a lie D i.4, 25; iii.68 sq.; 92 sq., 106, 170, 195, 232, 269; M i.414; Sn 129, 242 (cp. D ii.174); Dh 246; Pug 57; Nd1 268; Vv 158; Pv i.68; VbhA 383 (var. degrees); PvA 16; Sdhp 65; explicitly at Nd1 152, 394; Nd2 515. Cp. mosavajja. -- vādin speaking falsely, lying D i.138; iii.15, 82; Dh 176; Pug 29, 38. Mussati
Mussati
[ = mṛṣ, mṛṣyati; to which musā "wrongly," quite diff. in origin fr. micchā: mṛṣā>mithyā. Dhtm 437 defines by "sammose," i. e. forgetfulness] v. intrs.: to forget, to pass into oblivion, to become bewildered, to become careless D i.19 (sati m.); J v.369 (id.); Sn 815 (=nassati SnA 536;= parimussati, paribāhiro hoti Nd1 144). -- pp. muṭṭha. Cpp. pa˚, pari˚. Muhutta
Muhutta
(m. & nt.) [Vedic muhūrta, fr. muhur suddenly] a moment, a very short period of time, an inkling, as we should say "a second." -- Its duration may be seen from descending series of time -- connotations at PvA 198 (under jātakamma, prophesy by astrologers at the birth of a child): rāsi, nakkhatta, tithi, m.; and from defn at Nd2 516 by "khaṇaŋ, layaŋ, vassaŋ, atthaŋ." -> Usually in oblique cases: muhuttena in a short time, in a twinkling of an eye PvA 55; muhuttaŋ (acc.) a moment, even a second Sn 1138 (m. api); Dh 65 (id.), 106; PvA 43. Muhuttika
Muhuttika
(adj.) [fr. muhutta] only for a moment; ˚ā (f.) a temporary wife, in enumn of several kinds of wives at Vin iii.139 & VvA 73. Syn. tan -- khaṇikā. Mū
Mū
is given as root as Dhtp 216 in meaning "bandhana." Mūga
Mūga
(adj.) [Vedic mūka; see etym. under mukha] dumb Vin i.91 (andha, m., badhira); Sn 713; DhA ii.102 (andha, m., badhira); SnA 51 (in simile); Sdhp 12. Freq. combd with eḷa, deaf (q. v.). Mūla
Mūla
(nt.) [Vedic mūra & mūla. The root is given as mūl in 2 meanings, viz. lit. "rohane" Dhtm 859, and fig. "patiṭṭhāyaŋ" Dhtm 391] 1. (lit.) root A ii.200 = M i.233; DhA i.270; iv.200 (opp. patti); Vism 270 (rukkha˚=rukkha -- samīpaŋ); Pv ii.96 (sa˚ with the root); PvA 43 (rukkhassa mūle at the foot of). -- 2. foot, bottom Vin ii.269 (patta˚); PvA 73 (pāda˚), 76 (id.). rukkha˚ foot of a tree: see under rukkha for special meaning. -- 3. (appld) ground for, reason, cause, condition, defd as "hetu, nidāna, sambhava" etc. at Nd2 s. v.; Sn 14=369 (akusalā mũlā n. pl.=ākāra or patiṭṭhā SnA 23); Pv ii.333 (sa˚ with its cause); Dukp 272, 297, 312, 320; Miln 12 (& khandha -- yamaka, with ref. to the Yamaka). Very freq. in this sense as referring to the three lobha, dosa, moha as conditioning akusala (& absence of them=kusala), e. g. at D iii.214, 275; A i.201; 203; Vbh 106 sq., 169, 361; Yam i.1; Vism 454; cp. Nd2 517; VbhA 382. -- 4. origin, source, foundation, root (fig.) Vin i.231=D ii.91 (dukkhassa); Vin ii.304; Sn 916, 968 (cp. Nd1 344, 490); Th 1, 1027 (brahmacariyassa); Dh 247, 337. Freq. in formula (may be taken to no. 1) [pahīna] ucchinna -- mūla tālâvatthukata etc. with ref. to the origin of saŋsāra, e. g. at S ii.62, 88; iii.10, 27, 161, 193; iv.253, 292, 376. See Nd2 p. 205 s. v. pahīna, in extenso. -- 5. beginning, base, in mūladivasa the initial day DA i.311; also in phrase mūlakāraṇato right from the beginning VvA 132 (cp. BSk. mūlaŋ kramataś ca id. Divy 491). -- 6. "substance," foundation, i. e. worth, money, capital, price, remuneration Miln 334 (kamma˚); DhA i.270 (?); PvA 273; Mhvs 27, 23. amūla unpaid Mhvs 30, 17 (kamma labour). -- iṇa˚ borrowed capital D i.71.

-- kanda eatable tuber DhA iii.130; iv.78 (mūlaka˚). See also kanda. -- kammaṭṭhāna fundamental k. or k. of causes SnA 54. -- ghacca radically extirpated Dh 250, 263. -- ṭṭha one who is the cause of something, an instigator Vin iii.75. -- dassāvin knowing the cause or reason Sn 1043, cp. Nd2 517. -- phala (eatable) fruit, consisting of roots; roots as fruit Sn 239. -- bandhana fundamental bond (?) or set of causes (?) Sn 524 sq., 530 sq., cp. SnA 429 -- 431. -- bīja having seeds in roots, i. e. propagated by roots, one of the classes of plants enumd under bījagāma (q. v.). -- rasa taste of roots, or juice made fr. roots VbhA 69; see under rasa. -- 540 -- Mūlaka
Mūlaka
(adj. nt.) [fr. mūla] 1. (adj.) (a) ( -- ˚) being caused by, having its reason through or from, conditioned by, originating in Vbh 390 (taṇhā˚ dhammā); Tikp. 233 sq., 252 sq., 288 sq. & passim; VbhA 200 sq., 207 sq. (sankhāra˚, avijjā˚ etc. with ref. to the constituents of the Paṭicca -- samuppāda); PvA 19. -- (b) having a certain worth, price, being paid so much, dear Mhvs 27, 23 (a ˚ŋ kammaŋ unpaid labour); DhA i.398 (nahāna -- cuṇṇa ˚ŋ catu -- paṇṇāsa -- koṭi dhanaŋ, as price); ii.154 (pattha -- pattha -- mūlakā bhikkhā); iii.296 (kiŋ mūlakaŋ how dear?). -- 2. (nt.) = mūla, i. e. root, bulb, radish, only in cpd. mūlaka -- kanda radish ( -- root) J iv.88, 491; DhA iv.78. -- See also pulaka. Mūlika
Mūlika
(adj. n.) [fr. mūla] 1. (m.) root -- vendor Miln 331. -- 2. (adj. -- ˚) belonging to the feet (pāda˚), a footman, lackey J i.122, 438; ii.300 sq. (N. of the king of Janasandha, Gāmaṇi -- caṇḍa); iii.417; v.128; vi.30. -- 3. in rukkha˚ one who lives at the foot of a tree: see under rukkha, where also ˚mūlikatta. Mūḷha
Mūḷha
[Vedic mūḍha, pp. of muh; cp. also muddha1 = Vedic mugdha] 1. gone astray, erring, having lost one's way (magga˚) D i.85 ≈ (˚ssa maggaŋ ācikkhati); Pv iv.148 (id. with pāvadati); PvA 112 (magga˚). -- 2. confused, infatuated, blinded, erring, foolish D i.59; Pv iv.334 (sa˚, better to be written sam˚).

-- gabbhā (f.) a woman whose "foetus in utero" has gone astray, i. e. cannot be delivered properly, a woman difficult to be delivered J i.407 = DhA iv.192; Miln 169; VbhA 96. -- rūpa foolish Dh 268; DhA iii.395. Mūsika
Mūsika
(m.) & mūsikā (f.) [Vedic mūṣikā, fr. mūṣ] a mouse D ii.107 = Pug 43 (f.); Vism 109 (m.), 252= KhA 46 (m.); Mhvs 5, 30 (m.); VbhA 235.

-- cchinna (auguries from the marks on cloth (gnawed by mice) D i.9 (mūsikā˚; DA i.92 mūsika˚ = undurakhāyitaŋ; cp. Dial. i.17). -- darī a mouse -- hole J i.462 (mūsikā˚, so read for musikā˚). -- patha "Mouseroad" N. of a road Nd1 155, 415 (here mūsikā˚). -- potikā the young of a mouse J iv.188 (mūsika˚). -- vijjā mouse craft D i.9 (cp. DA i.93). Mūsī
Mūsī
(f.) [Venic mūṣ & mūḥ mouse or rat; cp. Lat. mūs Gr. mu_s, Ohg. mūs = E. mouse. Not to muṣ to steal, but to same root as Lat. moveo, to move] a mouse S ii.270 (mudu˚ a tender, little m.). Me
Me
is enclitic form of ahaŋ in var. cases of the sg. See under ahaŋ. Mekhalā
Mekhalā
(f.) [cp. Vedic mekhalā] a girdle J v.202, 294 (su˚, adj.); vi.456; ThA 35; KhA 109; DhA i.39; PvA 46. Mekhalikā
Mekhalikā
(f.) [fr. mekhalā] a girdle Vin ii.185 (ahi˚, consisting of a snake). Megha
Megha
[Vedic megha; not to mih, mehati (see mīḷha), but to Idg. *meigh -- , fog, rain; cp. Sk. miḥ mist; Av. maēga cloud; Gr. o)mi/xlh fog, Lith. mighá fog, Dutch miggelen to drizzle, also Ags. mist = Oicel mistr "mist"] a cloud Pv ii.945; Vism 126; esp. a thundercloud, storm, S i.100 (thaneti), 154; Th i.307 (as kāḷa); It 66; J i.332 (pajjunna vuccati megha); DhA i.19; SnA 27 (˚thanita -- sadda). In this capacity often called mahā -- megha, e. g. Sn 30; DhA i.165; KhA 21; PvA 132. -- On megha in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 124, 125.

-- nātha having clouds as protectors (said with ref. to grass -- eating animals) J iv.253. -- maṇḍala cloud -- circle, a circle of clouds SnA 27. -- vaṇṇa cloud -- coloured J v.321 (C. for megha -- sannibha); ˚pāsāṇa a sort of ornamental building stone Mhvs 30, 59 (v. l., T. meda˚; trsl. fat -- coloured stones). See meda˚. Mecaka
Mecaka
(adj.) [cp. Vedic mecaka] black, dark blue DhsA 13. Mejjati
Mejjati
[cp. Vedic midyati, to mid, see meda Dhtp 160, 413 & Dhtm 641 give mid with meaning "snehane"] to be fat, to be full of fat; fig. to be in love with or attracted by, to feel affection (this meaning only as a "petitio principii" to explain mettā) DhsA 192 (v. l. mijjati; = siniyhati). Mejjha
Mejjha
(adj. -- nt.) [*medhya; fr. medha] 1. (adj.) [to medha1] fit for sacrifice, pure; neg. a˚ impure Sdhp 363. 2. (nt.) [to medha2 & medhāvin] in dum˚ foolishness Pug 21 = Dhs 390 (expld at DhsA 254 by "yaŋ . . . citta -- santānaŋ mejjhaŋ bhaveyya suci -- vodānaŋ taŋ duṭṭhaŋ mejjhaŋ iminā ti dummejjhaŋ"). Meṇḍa
Meṇḍa
[dial., cp. Prk. měṇṭha & miṇṭha: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 293. The Dhtm (156) gives a root meṇḍ (meḍ) in meaning of "koṭilla," i. e. crookedness. The Ved. (Sk.) word for ram is meṣa] 1. a ram D i.9; J iv.250, 353 (˚visāṇa -- dhanu, a bow consisting of a ram's horn). -- ˚patha Npl. "ram's road" Nd1 155 = 415. -- ˚yuddha ram fight D i.6. -- 2. a groom, elephant -- driver in cpd. hatthi˚ elephants' keeper J iii.431; v.287; vi.489. Meṇḍaka
Meṇḍaka
(adj.) [fr. meṇḍa] 1. made of ram(s) horn, said of a (very strong) bow J ii.88 (˚dhanu); v.128 (˚singadhanu). -- 2. belonging to a ram, in meṇḍaka -- pañha "question about the ram" Miln 90 alluding to the story of a ram in the Ummagga -- jātaka (J vi.353 -- 55), which is told in form of a question, so difficult & puzzling that nobody "from hell to heaven" (J vi.354) can answer it except the Bodhisatta. Cp. Trenckner's remark Miln 422. Metta
Metta
(adj. nt.) [cp. Vedic maitra "belonging to Mitra"; Epic Sk. maitra "friendly," fr. mitra] friendly, benevolent, kind as adj. at D iii.191 (mettena kāya -- kammena etc.), 245 (˚ŋ vacī -- kammaŋ); as nt. for mettā in cpds. of mettā (cp. mettaŋsa) and by itself at D i.227 (mettaŋ+cittaŋ), perhaps also at Sn 507. Mettā
Mettā
(f.) [abstr. fr. mitra = mitta, cp. Vedic maitraŋ. According to Asl. 192 (cp. Expos. 258) derived fr. mid to love, to be fat: "mejjati mettā siniyhatī ti attho"] love, amity, sympathy, friendliness, active interest in others. There are var. defns & explns of mettā: the stereotype "metti mettāyanā mettāyitattaŋ mettā cetovimutti" Vbh 86=272; occurring as "metti mettāyanā mettāyitattaŋ anudā anudāyana anudāyitattaŋ hitesitā anukampā abyāpādo . . . kusalamūlaŋ" at Nd1 488 & Dhs 1056 (where T. mettaŋ for metti, but see Dhs trsl.2 253). By Bdhgh at SnA 128 expld in distinction fr. karuṇā (which is "ahita -- dukkh -- âpanayakāmatā") as "hita -- sukh -- ûpanaya -- kāmatā," i. e. desire of bringing welfare & good to one's fellow -- men. Cp. defn of mettā at Vism 317. -- Sn 73 (see Nd2 p. 232), 967; D iii.247 sq., 279; Vism 111, 321 sq.; SnA 54; PvA 66 (khanti, m., anudaya); Sdhp 484, 487. -> Phrases occurring frequently: mettā ceto -- vimutti D i.251; S ii.265; A iv.150; It 20; Vbh 86 and passim. mettā -- sahagatena cetasā with a heart full of love D i.250; ii.186; iii.49 sq., 78, 223 sq.; S v.115; A i.183; ii.129; iv.390; v.299, 344; expld in detail at Vism 308. mettaŋ karoti (loc.) to be friendly or sympathize with Mhvs 12, 23. -- In cpds. usually mettā˚, but shortened to metta˚ in metta -- cittaŋ kindly thought, a heart full of love D i.167; iii.237; Sn 507; Pv ii.1317; J vi.71; and metta -- jhāna love -- meditation, as expln of m. -- citta at SnA 417; PvA 167.

-- aŋsa (mettaŋsa) sympathetic, showing love towards It 22 (v. l. ˚āsa); J iv.71 ( = metta -- koṭṭhāsa mettacitta C.). -- kammaṭṭhāna the k. of sympathy DhA iv.108. -- bhāvanā cultivation or development of friendliness (towards all living beings) J i.176; iii.45; Miln 199; Vism 295. -- vihārin abiding in kindliness Dh 368; DhA iv.108; Nett 25; Vism 324; PvA 230. -- 541 -- Mettāyati
Mettāyati
[Denom. fr. mettā] to feel friendly, to show love, to be benevolent A iv.151; DhsA 194; VbhA 75. With loc. to show friendship or be affectionate towards J i.365; iii.96; Dāvs iii.34. Mettāyanā
Mettāyanā
(f.) & Mettāyitatta (nt.) [abstr. formations fr. mettā]: see defn of mettā. Metti & Mettī
Metti
& Mettī (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. maitrī] love, friendship J iii.79; v.208; VbhA 75. See also defn of mettā. Metteyyattā
Metteyyattā
(f.) is occasional spelling for matteyyatā (q. v.), in analogy to petteyyatā; e. g. Nd2 294. Methuna
Methuna
(adj. -- nt.) [fr. Vedic mithuna pair, der. fr. mithu. Cp. micchā] 1. (adj.) relating to sexual intercourse, sexual, usually with dhamma, sex intercourse, in phrase ˚ŋ dhammaŋ paṭisevati to cohabit Vin i.96; D ii.133; Sn 291, 704; Nd1 139; Vism 418; SnA 536. -- (m.) an associate J vi.294 (na rājā hoti methuno). -- 2. (nt.) sexual intercourse [Vedic maithuna] D i.4; iii.9, 88 sq., 133; Sn 400, 609, 814, 835 = DhA i.202; Nd1 139, 145; Pug 67; Vism 51. Methunaka
Methunaka
[fr. methuna] 1. one concerned with (illicit) sexual intercourse, a fornicator Nd1 139 (in a wider sense). -- 2. an associate Vin iii.66. -- 3. (nt.) coitus J ii.360 ( = methuna -- dhamma C.). Meda
Meda
[Vedic medas (nt.) fr. mid, see etym. under mada] fat S i.124; Sn 196; J iii.484 (ajakaraŋ medaŋ = ajakara -- medaŋ C.); Kh iii. (expld at Vism 262 as "thīnasineha" thick or coagulated fluid or gelatine); Vism 361; VbhA 66, 225, 245, 249.

-- kathālika a cooking pot or saucepan for frying fat A iv.377 (in simile with kāya); DhA ii.179 (similar); Vism 195 (in compar.). -- gaṇṭhi (as medo -- gaṇṭhi, Sk. influence!) an abscess of fat, fatty knot or tumour, mentioned as a disease at Miln 149. -- vaṇṇa fatcoloured; in cpd. ˚pāsāna a stone of the (golden) colour of fat found in the Himālaya mountains Sn 447 ( = medapiṇḍa -- sadisa SnA 393); Mhvs 1, 39; 30, 57 sq., 96; 31, 121; see Geiger's note Mhvs (P.T.S. ed.) p. 355, who puts it beyond doubt, that meda˚ is the correct reading for the v. l. megha˚ at all places. Medaka
Medaka
[meda+ka] in go˚ a precious stone of light -- red (or golden) colour (cp. meda -- vaṇṇa -- pāsāṇa) VvA 111. Medinī
Medinī
(f.) [of adj. medin, fr. meda fat, but cp. Vedic medin an associate or companion fr. mid in meaning to be friendly] the earth (also later Sk.) Mhvs 5, 185; 15, 47; Vism 125. Medeti
Medeti
[Denom. fr. meda] to become fat M i.238. Medha
Medha
[Vedic medha, in aśva, go˚, puruṣa˚ etc.] sacrifice only in assa˚ horse -- sacrifice & purisa˚ human s. (q. v.). e.g. at A iv.151; Sn 303. -- Cp. mejjha. Medhaga
Medhaga
(& ˚ka) [cp. Sk. methana abusive speech; Vedic methati fr. mith to scold] quarrel, strife Vin ii.88 (˚ka); Th 2, 344; Sn 893, 894 ( = kalaha, bhaṇḍana, viggaha, vivāda Nd1 302, 303), 935 (T. ˚ka; Nd1 402 & 406 ˚ga. with v. l. SS ˚ka); Dh 6; J iii.334 (˚ka; C.=kalaha), 488 (˚ga; C. ˚ka expln kalaha); DhA i.65. Medhasa
Medhasa
(adj.) [ = Vedic medhas, as a -- base] having wisdom or intelligence, wise, only in cpds. bhūri˚ of great wisdom Sn 1131; & su˚ [Ved. sumedhas] very wise Vv 222 (=sundara -- pañña VvA 111); Pv iii.77 (both combd as bhūri -- su -- medhasa, hardly correct; v. l. M. bhūrimedhasa PvA 205). Medhā
Medhā
(f.) [Vedic medhā & medhas, perhaps to Gr. maq˚ in manqa/nw ("mathematics")] wisdom, intelligence, sagacity Nd1 s. v. (m. vuccati paññā); Pug 25; Dhs 16, DhsA 148; PvA 40 ( = paññā). -- adj. sumedha wise, clever, intelligent Sn 177; opp. dum˚ stupid Pv i.82. -- khīṇa -- medha one whose intelligence has been impaired, stupefied J vi.295 (=khīṇa -- pañña). Medhāvitā
Medhāvitā
(f.) [abstr. fr. medhāvin] cleverness, intelligence VvA 229. Medhāvin
Medhāvin
(adj.) [medhā+in = *medhāyin>medhāvin; already Vedic, cp. medhasa] intelligent, wise, often combd with paṇḍita & bahussuta: D i.120; S iv.375; A iv.244; Vin iv.10, 13, 141; Sn 323 (acc. medhāvinaŋ +bahussutaŋ) 627, 1008 (Ep. of Mogharājā), 1125 (id.); Nd2 259 (s. v. jātimā, with var. other synonyms); Dh 36; J vi.294; Miln 21; DhA i.257; ii.108; iv.169; VvA 131; PvA 41. Medhi
Medhi
(f.) [Vedic methī pillar, post (to bind cattle to); BSk. medhi Divy 244; Prk. meḍhi Pischel Gr. § 221. See for etym. Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. meta] pillar, part of a stūpa [not in the Canon?]. Medhin
Medhin
(adj. -- n.) = medha in adj. use; only in cpd. dum- medhin (=dum -- medha) foolish, ignorant Dh 26 (bālā dummedhino janā;=nippaññā DhA i.257). Meraya
Meraya
(nt.) [Epic Sk. maireya, cp. Halāyudha 2, 175 (Aufrecht p. 314); prob. dial.] a sort of intoxicating liquor, spirits, rum, usually combd with surā. D i.146-> 166; M i.238; Pug 55; Dh 247; J iv.117 (pupphāsav -- ādi, i. e. made fr. flowers, cp. defn dhātakī -- puṣpaguḍa -- dhāny -- āmla -- sanskṛtaŋ by Mādhava, Halāy. p. 314). Five kinds are given by Dhpāla at VvA 73, viz. pupph -- āsava, phal' āsava, madhv˚, guḷ˚, sambhārasaŋyutta. Merita
Merita
in bhayamerita J iv.424 = v.359 is to be read as bhaya -- m -- erita driven by fear; there is no need to change it with Kern, Toev. to perita. Mella
Mella
[dial. or uncertain reading?] citron ( = mātulunga) J iii.319 (gloss bella ). Mokkha
Mokkha1
[late Vedic & Epic Sk. mokṣa, fr. muc, see muñcati. Dhtp 539 mokkha = mocana; Dhtm 751= moca] 1. (lit.) release, freedom from, in bandhanā m. D i.73= M i.276. -- 2. (fig.) release, deliverance, salvation Vbh 426 (jarā -- maraṇa˚ from old age & death); DhA i.4 (˚magga+sagga -- magga, the way to heaven & salvation), 89, 90 (˚dhamma=salvation) Mhvs 5, 61. -- 3. (lit.) (act.) letting loose, emission, uttering (of speech) J i.375. -- 4. it may (& prob. ought to) be taken as adj. (=*mokṣya, grd. of Caus. of muc) at Sn 773 (añña˚, either=1, as "deliverance for others," or=4, as "to be delivered by others." Bdhgh at SnA 516 gives both explns: aññe mocetuŋ (na) sakkonti, kāraṇa -- vacanaŋ vā etaŋ: aññena mocetabbā (na) honti). Mokkha
Mokkha2
(adj.) [fr. mukha 6; Vṛddhi form = *maukhya] the headmost, first, foremost, in series aggo seṭṭho m. uttamo A ii.95, where the customary tradition reads pāmokkha (see under mahā & cp. Nd2 502A). Mokkhaka
Mokkhaka
= mokkha2; thus we should read at J i.441 for mukkhaka. Mokkhacika
Mokkhacika
(m. or ˚ā f.) [see on attempt at etym. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1885, 49 who takes mokkha as fr. muc "tumbling" & cika = "turning" fr. cak=cik. The word remains obscure, it must be a dialectical expression, distorted by popular analogy & taken perhaps from a designation of a place where these feats or toys had their origin. More probable than Morris' etym. is an analysis of the word (if it is Aryan) as mokkha= mokkha2, in meaning "head, top," so that it may mean "head over," top -- first" & we have to separate *mokkhac -- ika the ˚ika representing ˚iya "in the manner of, like" & -- ac being the adv. of direction as contained in Sk. prāñc=pra -- añc.] tumbling, turning somersaults, an acrobatic feat; in list of forbidden amusements at D i.6 (cp. DA i.86; samparivattaka -- kīḷanaŋ, i. e. playing with something that rolls along, continuously turning? The foll. sentence however seems to imply turning head over heels: "ākāse vā daṇḍaŋ gahetvā bhūmiyaŋ vā sīsaŋ ṭhapetvā heṭṭh -- upariya (so read!) -- bhāvena parivattana -- kīḷanaŋ"; i. e. trapeze -- performing. Cp. Dial. i.10 & Vin. Texts ii.184). The list re -- occurs at Vin ii.10 (˚āya: f.! kīḷanti); iii.180; M i.266≈and A v.203 (with important v. l. mokkhaṭika, which would imply mokkha & ending tiya, and not ˚cika at all. The Cy. on this passage expls as: daṇḍakaŋ gahetvā heṭṭh -- uppariya (sic. as DA i.86; correct to upariya?) -- bhāvena parivattana -- kīḷanaŋ). The word is found also at Vin i.275, where the boy of a Seṭṭhi in Bārāṇasī contracts injuries to his intestines by "mokkhacikāya kīḷanto," playing (with a) m. -- According to its use with kīḷati & in instr. mokkhacikena (Nd2 219) may be either a sort of game or an instrument (toy), with which children play. -- 542 -- Mokkhati
Mokkhati
see under muñcati. Mogha
Mogha
(adj.) [the Vedic mogha for the later Sk. moha, which is the P. noun moha; fr. muh. BSk. mohapuruṣa e. g. at AvŚ ii.177; MVastu iii.440] empty, vain, useless, stupid, foolish D i.187 (opp. to sacca), 199; Sn 354; Dh 260 (˚jiṇṇa grown old in vain; C. expls as tuccha -- jiṇṇa DhA iii.388); DhA i.110 (patthanā a futile wish); PvA 194. -- Opp. amogha S i.232; J vi.26; DhA ii.34 (˚ŋ tassa jīvitaŋ: not in vain).

-- purisa a stupid or dense fellow Vin iv.126, 144. Moca
Moca1
[cp. *Sk. moca & mocā] the plantain or banana tree' Musa, sapientum Vin i.246 (˚pāna drink made fr. M. s.; one of the 8 permitted drinks); J iv.181; v.405, 465. Moca
Moca2
[root -- noun of moc, Caus. of muc] delivery, setting free Dhtm 631, 751, where Dhtp in same context reads mocana. Mocana
Mocana
(nt.) [fr. moceti] 1. setting free, delivering DhA iii.199 (parissayā˚); Dhtp 376, 539; Dhtm 609. Cp. moca2. -- 2. letting loose, discharging, in assu˚ shedding tears PvA 18. Cp. vi˚. Mocaya
Mocaya
(adj.) [quâsi grd. formation fr. moceti] to be freed, able to escape, in dum˚ difficult to obtain freedom J vi.234. Mocāpana
Mocāpana
(nt.) [fr. Caus. II. mocāpeti] causing one's freedom, deliverance J vi.134. Mocetar
Mocetar
[M. ag. fr. moceti] one who sets free, a deliverer Nd1 32. Moceti
Moceti
[Caus. of muñcati] 1. to deliver, set free, release, cause one's release or deliverance from (abl.). imper. praes. mocehi Pv ii.16 (duggatiyā); PvA 12; aor. mocesi PvA 112 (dāsavyato); ger. mocetvā PvA 8, 77; inf. mocetuŋ PvA 45 (petalokato). -- 2. to discharge, emit (semen in coitu) Vin iii.36, 39 (as Caus II.), 110. -- 3. to let loose, set into motion, stir: padaŋ m. to run J iii.33. -- 4. to discharge, fulfil: paṭiññaŋ one's promise DhA i.93. -- 5. to unharness DhA i.67. -- 6. to detach S i.44. -- Caus. II. mocāpeti to cause to be freed, to give freedom, to let loose Vin iv.316 (opp. bandhāpeti). Moṭa
Moṭa
[BSk. moṭa, Prk. mrḍa: Pischel § 166, 238] see mutoḷī. Motar
Motar
[n. ag. fr. munāti, more likely direct der. fr. muta, pp. of man, q. v.] one who feels (or senses) that which can be felt (or sensed), in phrase "mutaŋ na maññati motabbaŋ (so read) na maññati motāraŋ" he does not identify what is sensed with that which is not sensed, nor with what is to be sensed (motabba) nor with him who senses A ii.25; where motar & motabba correspond to sotar & sotabba & daṭṭhar & daṭṭhabba. The word does not occur in the similar passage M i.3. Modaka
Modaka
[cp. Epic. Sk. modaka in meaning 1] 1. a sort of sweetmeat S i.148; A i.130; iii.76; Pug 32; PvA 4. -> 2. receptacle for a letter, an envelope, wrapper or such like J vi.385 (paṇṇaŋ ˚assa anto pakkhipitvā). May, however, be same ạs 1. Modati
Modati
[mud, cp. Vedic moda joy Dhtp 146: tose] to rejoice, to enjoy oneself, to be happy A iii.40; Sn 561; Pv i.54; ii.121. -- pp. mudita (q. v.). For mohayamāna at DhA i.275 the better reading is modayamāna rejoicing, a ppr. med. Modana
Modana
(nt.) [fr. mud] satisfaction, rejoicing Sdhp 229. Cp. sam˚. Modanā
Modanā
(f.) [fr. mud] blending (?); Cy. expln at DhsA 143 of term āmodanā. Modara
Modara:
In modara at J v.54 (of elephant's teeth) Kern, Toev. s. v. sees a miswriting for medura (full of, beset with), which however does not occur in Pali. The C. expln is "samantato obhāsento," i. e. shining. Mona
Mona
(nt.) [fr. muni, equal to *maunya taken by Nd as root of moneyya] wisdom, character, self -- possession Sn 540 (˚patha = ñāṇa -- patha SnA 435), 718, 723; Nd1 57; Nd2 514 A (=ñāṇa & paññā); Th 1, 168 (what is monissaŋ? fut. 1st sg. of ?). Moneyya
Moneyya
(nt.) [fr. muni, cp. Vedic moneya] state of a muni, muni -- hood; good character, moral perfection. This is always represented as 3 fold, viz. kāya˚, vacī˚, mano˚ (see under muni), e. g. at D iii.220; A i.273; Nd1 57; Nd2 514 A (where also used as adj.: moneyyā dhammā properties of a perfect character). Cp. also Sn 484, 698, 700 sq. On moneyya -- kolāhala (forebodings of the highest wisdom) see the latter. Momūha
Momūha
(adj.) [intens. -- redupl. formation fr. moha & muh] dull, silly, stupid, infatuated, bewildered (cp. Cpd. 833) D i.27; A iii.164 sq.; Sn 840, 841, 1120; Nd1 153 ( = manda), 192; Nd2 521 (=avidvā etc.); Pug 65. Momūhatta
Momūhatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. momūha] silliness, foolishness, bewilderment of the mind M i.520; A iii.119, 191, 219 ( = mandatta); Pug 69. Mora
Mora
[the contracted, regular P. form of *Sk. mayūra, viâ *ma -- ūra>mora. See also Geiger, P.Gr. § 27 & Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 166. -- Vedic only mayūrī f. pea -- hen] a peacock J ii.275 (˚upasevin, see C. on this passage); vi.218, 497; PvA 142; DhA i.394. A peacock's tail (sometimes used as a fan) is denoted in var. terms in cpds., as mora -- kalāpa DhA i.387; -- piccha Vin i.186; -- piñcha Vin ii.130; -- pīñja PvA 142, 176; VvA 147; -- sikali (?) KhA 49; -- hattha Vv 3344 ( = mayūra -- piñjehi kataŋ makasa -- vījaniŋ); Pv iii.117. Perhaps also as morakkha "a peacock's eye" at VbhA 63 (morakkhaka loha, a kind of copper, grouped with pisācaloha). It is more likely however that morakkha is distorted fr. *mauryaka, patronymic of mura, a local (tribal) designation (cp. murala), then by pop. etym. connected with mora peacock. With this cp. Sk. moraka "a kind of steel" BR. Moragu
Moragu
[cp. (scientific) Sk. mayūraka] a tender grass (Achyranthes aspera) Vin i.196. Morinī
Morinī
(f.) [fr. mora] a peahen Miln 67. -- 543 -- Moli
Moli
(m. & f.) [cp. Epic Sk. mauli, fr. mūla] a chignon; crest, turban J i.64; v.431; Mhvs 11, 28; DA i.136 (v. l. moḷi). Also found (as molin, adj.?) in Np. Yama -- moli: see under yakkha 5.

-- galla (?) fat Vin i.85 (expld by thūla -- sarīra; vv. ll. moḷi˚ & mukalla). -- baddha one who has his hair tied into a top -- knot 128, 243, 348. Mosa
Mosa
(˚ -- ) (adj. -- nt.) [the guṇa (compn) form of musā] belonging to or untruth, false -- ; only in cpds. -- dhamma of a deceitful nature, false, A v.84 (kāma); Sn 739, 757; & -- vajja [fr. musā -- vāda] false -- speaking, lie, untruth S i.169; Sn 819, 866, 943; Nd1 152, 265; Nd2 515; Vv 126. Mosalla
Mosalla
(adj.) [fr. musala] worthy of being slain (with clubs), punishable A ii.241. Moha
Moha
[fr. muh, see muyhati; cp. Sk. moha & Vedic mogha] stupidity, dullness of mind & soul, delusion, bewilderment, infatuation D iii.146, 175, 182, 214, 270; Vin iv.144, 145; Sn 56, 74, 160, 638, 847; Vbh 208, 341, 391, 402; Pug 16; Tikp 108, 122, 259. -- Defd as "dukkhe aññāṇaŋ etc., moha pamoha, sammoha, avijj' ogha etc.," by Nd2 99 & Vbh 362; as "muyhanti tena, sayaŋ vā muyhati, muyhana -- mattaŋ eva vā tan ti moho" and "cittassa andha -- bhāva -- lakkhaṇo, aññāṇalakkhaṇo vā" at Vism 468. -- Often coupled with rāga & dosa as one of the 3 cardinal affects of citta, making a man unable to grasp the higher truths and to enter the Path: see under rāga (& Nd2 p. 237, s. v. rāga where the wide range of application of this set is to be seen). Cp. the 3 fires: rāg -- aggi, dos -- aggi, moh -- aggi It 92; D iii.217 also rāga -- kkhaya, dosa˚, moha˚ VbhA 31 sq. -- On combn with rāga, lobha & dosa see dosa2 and lobha. -- On term see also Dhs trsl. §§ 33, 362, 441; Cpd 16, 18, 41, 113, 146. -- See further D i.80 (samoha -- cittaŋ); Nd1 15, 16 (with lobha & dosa); VvA 14; PvA 3. -- amoha absence of bewilderment Vbh 210 (+alobha, adosa; as the 3 kusala -- mūlāni: cp. mūla 3), 402 (id., as kusala -- hetu). -- Cp. pa˚, sam˚.

-- antara (personal) quality of bewilderment (lit. having m. inside) Sn 478 (taken by C. as "cause of m.," i. e. ˚kāraṇa, ˚paccaya SnA 411; cp. antara = kāraṇa under antara I 2 b.). -- ussada quality of dullness Nd1 72, 413. -- kkhaya destruction of infatuation Vbh 73; VbhA 51. -- carita one whose habit is infatuation Nett 90 (+rāgacarita & dosacarita). -- tama the darkness of bewilderment MA 1. -- dhamma anything that is bewildering or infatuating Sn 276. -- pāruta covered or obstructed by delusion Pv iv.334. -- magga being on the road of infatuation Sn 347. -- salla the sting of bewilderment Nd1 59. Mohatta
Mohatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. moha] infatuation, bewilderment A ii.120; iii.376. Mohana
Mohana
(nt.) [fr. muh as Caus. formn] making dull or stupid, infatuation, enticement, allurement Sn 399, 772 ( = mohanā vuccanti pañca kāmaguṇā Nd1 26). The Sk. meaning is also "sexual intercourse" (cp. Halāyudha p. 315), which may apply to the Sn passages SnA 517 (on Sn 772) expls "mohanaŋ vuccati kāmaguṇā, ettha hi deva -- manussā muyhanti." Mohanaka
Mohanaka
(adj.) [fr. mohana] leading astray, bewildering, leading into error Vin iv.144. Mohaneyya & Mohanīya
Mohaneyya
& Mohanīya (adj.) [grd. formn fr. moha] leading to infatuation A ii.120; iii.110; J iii.499. Moheti
Moheti
[Caus. fr. muh, see muyhati & cp. moha] to deceive, to befool, to take in, surprise, delude, aor. 2nd sg. amohayi Sn 352; 3rd sg. amohayi S iv.158 = It 58 (maccu -- rājan; vv. ll. asamohayi & asamohari); reading somewhat doubtful, cp. similar context Sn 1076 with "sabbesu dhammesu samūhatesu" (v. l. samoha˚). -- 3rd sg. (poet.) also amohayittha Sn 332 (mā vo pamatte viññāya maccurājā amohayittha vasānuge, cp. Sn ed. p. 58). -- On mohayamāna DhA i.275 see modati. -- Y. Y
--
Y -- combn consonant (sandhi), inserted (euphonically) between 2 vowels for the avoidance of hiatus. It has arisen purely phonetically from i as a sort of "gliding" or semi -- vowel within a word, where the syllable division was in regular speech more openly felt than in the written language, e. g. pari -- y -- āpanna (Pāli) corresponds to Sk. pary -- āpanna, similarly pari -- y -- osāna = Sk. paryosāna. Thus inserted after a before i or e: chay -- imā disā D iii.188; ta -- y -- idaŋ Sn 1077; Pv i.33; tava -- y -- idaŋ Sn 352; na -- y -- idaŋ S ii.278; mama -- y -- idaŋ Sn 806; na -- y -- idha Sn 790; mā -- y -- idha Vin i.54; yassay -- etādisī pajā D ii.267 (v. l. ss for T yassa -- s -- etādisī); satiyā -- y -- etaŋ adhivacanaŋ M ii.260; na -- y -- imassa Pv iv.12. -- After i before a: pāvisi -- y -- assamaŋ J v.405; khaṇi -- y -- asmani J iii.433; yā -- y -- aññaŋ J i.429 (where C. expls: ya -- kāro paṭisandhi -- karo). -- Cp. yeva for eva. -- Note. At J vi.106 ya -- y -- ime jane is to be taken as ye ime jane; the spelling ay for e being found elsewhere as well. Cp. the following ta -- y -- ime jane. Ya˚
Ya˚
[pron. rel. base; Vedic yaḥ = Gr. o(/s who; cp. Goth. jabai if, -- ei rel. part. An amplification of the dem. pron. base *i -- , *ei -- (cp. ayaŋ). See on detail Brugmann, "Die indogerm. Pronomina" in Ber. d. sächs. Ges. LX. 41 sq.] I. Forms. (See inflection also at Geiger, P.Gr. § 110.) The decl. is similar to that of ta˚; among the more rarely found forms we only mention the foll.: sg. nom. m. yo with by -- form (in hiatus) yv -- , as yv'âyaŋ=yo ayaŋ M i.258; yv'âssa=yo assa M i.137. Notice the lengthening of the subsequent vowel. -> An unsettled ya is to be found at J v.424 (Fausböll remarks "for yassā"?; perhaps to be combd with preceding pañcapatikā; C. on p. 427 expls ya -- kāro nipātamatto) -- abl. yasmā in adv. use; yamhā Dh 392. -- loc. yamhi Dh 261, 372, 393. -- f. loc. yassaŋ A iii.151 (see below). See further adv. use of cases (below ii.5). -- At Pv ii.16 yāhi is doubtful (perhaps imper.=yajahi, of yajati; C. leaves it unexpld).

Special mention must be made of the nt. n. acc. sg., where both yaŋ and yad are found. The (Vedic) form yad (Ved. yat) has been felt more like ya+expletive (Sandhi -- ) d, and is principally found in adv. use and certain archaic phrases, whereas yaŋ represents the usual (Pali) form (like tad and taŋ). See more under II. -- A Māgadhized form is ye (after se = taŋ), found at D ii.278 (see Geiger § 1052 & 1102. Cp. Trenckner, Notes 75.). The expression ye -- bhuyyena may belong under this category, if we explain it as yad+bhuyyena (bhuyyena equivalent to bhiyyoso). It would then correspond to seyyathā (= sad+yathā, cp. sayathā, sace, taŋyathā). See refs. under yebhuyyena. -- The expression yevāpanaka is an adj. formn from the phrase ye -- vā -- pana (=yaŋ vā pana "whatever else there is"), i. e. belonging to something of the same kind, i. e. corresponding, reciprocal, as far as concerned, respective. (See s. v.) -- In adv. use it often corresponds to E. as; see e. g. yad -- icchakaŋ, yad -- idaŋ (under ii.2 b; ii.4 b.).

II. Meaning: "which," in correspondence to a following demonstr. pron. (ta˚); whichever (generalizing); nt. what, whatever. In immediate combn with the demonstr. pron. it is qualifying and specifying the person, thing or subject in discussion or question (see below 4).

1. Regular use as correl. pron., when ya˚ (+noun) is followed by ta˚ (+noun). Sometimes (in poetry) the reverse is the case, e. g. at It 84 where ta˚ (m. sa) is elliptically omitted: atthaŋ na jānāti yaŋ lobho sahate naraŋ "he does not know good, whom greed overcomes." -- Otherwise regular, e. g.: yassa jātarūparajataŋ kappati pañca pi tassa kāmaguṇā kappanti S iv.326. In a generalizing sense (cp. below ii.3): yo vā so vā "der erste beste," some or other, whoever, any J iv.38; v.362; yaŋ vā taŋ vā karotu let her do whatever she likes VvA 208; yasmiŋ vā tasmiŋ vā on every occasion S i.160 na yo vā so vā yakkho not this or that yakkha i. e. not any (ordinary) kind of Yakkha (but Inda) DA i.264. -- The same use (ordinary correlative) applies to the nt. forms yaŋ & yad in correl. to taŋ and tad. (See sep. under II. 2.)

2. Use of nt. forms. -- (a) nt. yaŋ (a) as pronoun: S iii.44 (yaŋ dukkhaŋ . . . tad anattā); It 78 (yañ c' aññaŋ whatever else); VbhA 54 (yaŋ labbhati yañ ca na labbhati taŋ sabbaŋ pucchitvā). See also under 3 a (yaŋ kiñci, yaŋ yaŋ). -- (b) as adj. adv.: yaŋmukha facing what, turned where (?) J v.475 (but C. reads & expls sammukha!); yaŋ -- vipāka having what or which kind of fruit D ii.209. yaŋ vā . . . yaŋ vā whether . . . or S ii.179; yaŋ no . . . na tv' eva neither . . . nor S ii.179 -- 180. -- yaŋ with pot.: "so that," that (corresp. to Lat. ut consecutivum) S iii.41 (yaŋ rūpe anatt' ânupassī vihareyya). J v.339 (n' esa dhammo yaŋ taŋ jahe that I should leave you). -- In the function of other conjunctions e. g. as temporal = when, since, after: J iv.319 (yaŋ maŋ Suruci -- m -- ānayi that, or since, S. married me). As conditional or causal =if, even if, because: Vin i.276 (yaŋ te sakkā . . . arogaŋ kātuŋ, taŋ karohi if it is possible . . . do it; or may be taken in sense of "in whatever way you can do it, do"); J iii.206=iv.4 (yaŋ me sirasmiŋ ūhacca cakkaŋ bhamati matthake= because; C.: yena pāpena). -- (c) as adv. deictive "so," in combn with var. other (emphatic) particles as e. g. yaŋ nūna used in an exhortative sense "well, now"; or "rather, let me"; or "so now," always in phrase yaŋ nūn' âhaŋ "now then let me" (do this or that) very freq., either with foll. pot., e. g. "y. n. âhaŋ araññaŋ paviseyyaŋ" DhA ii.91. "y. n. â. katakammaŋ puccheyyaŋ" VvA 132; dasseyyaŋ VvA 138; pabbajjeyyaŋ M ii.55; āneyyaŋ DhA i.46, vihareyyaŋ ibid. 56; etc. cp. J i.14, 150, 255; iii.393; DhA i.91; PvA 5 (avassayo bhaveyyaŋ). -- Similarly yañ hi "well then, now then" (with Pot.) S ii.210, 221 (taŋ vadeyya). Cp. yagghe. yañ ca & yañ ce [Sk. yac ca, or cet, ca here=ce see ca. & cp. sace=sa+ce] (rather) than that: yañ ca Th 2, 80; J i.210; yañce (with Pot.) S i.176; It 43; Th 1, 666. sangāme me mataŋ seyyo yañ ce jīve parājito (than that I live vanquished) Sn 440 (cp. the intricate expln at SnA 390); similarly J iv.495: me maraṇaŋ seyyo yañ ce jīve tayā vinā. -- (b) nt. yad: (a) as pron in regular relative use e. g. S iii.44 (yad aniccaŋ taŋ dukkhaŋ); It 59 (yad eva diṭṭhaŋ tad ev' âhaŋ vadāmi). (b) as adv., e. g. yad -- agge (loc.) from what on, i. e. from which time, since what time D i.152 (=mūladivasato paṭṭhāya yaŋ divasaŋ aggaŋ patvā DA i.311); Vv 8433 (=yato paṭṭhāya VvA 344). Also as yad -- aggena (instr.) Vin ii.257 (y. Mahāpajāpati -- gotamiyā aṭṭha garudhammā paṭiggahitā tad eva sā upasampannā); VbhA 387. -- yad -- atthaŋ for what, why Th 2, 163. yad -- atthiya as much as necessary, as required, sufficient, proper Th 1, 12; 1274 ("which, for the goal desirous, he led" trsl.; refers to brahmacariyaŋ). The same verse occurs at Sn 354. The latter passage is mentioned in P.D. under atthiya with meaning "on account of what" (cp. kim -- atthiyaŋ S iii.189). The Sn passage is not expld in SnA. -- yad -- icchakaŋ whatever is pleasant, i. e. according to liking, as he pleases A iii.28; Pug 11, 12; J i.141 (y. bhutta eaten heartily); Vism 154 (+yavadicchaka); VvA 341. Cp. yen' icchakaŋ below II. 5. -- yad -- icchita see under yathā -- icchita! -- yadidaŋ: see below II. 4 b.

3. Generalizing (or distributive) use of ya: There are two modes of generalization, viz. (a) by repeating ya˚: yassa yass' eva sālassa mūle tiṭṭhasi, so so muñcati pupphāni; "at the foot of whichever tree you stand, he (in all cases concerned) sheds flowers" Vv 393; yaŋ yaŋ hi manaso piyaŋ "whatever is pleasant to the senses" Pv ii.118; yaŋ yaŋ passati taŋ taŋ pucchati "whomsoever he sees, him he asks" J iii.155; yassaŋ yassaŋ disāyaŋ viharati, sakasmiŋ yeva vijite viharati" in whichever region he lives, he lives in his own realm" A iii.151; yo yo yaŋ yaŋ icchati tassa tassa adāsi "whatever anybody wished he gave to him" PvA 113; yaŋ yaŋ padesaŋ bhajati tattha tatth' eva assa lābhasakkāro nibbattati "whichever region he visits, there (in each) will he have success" DhA ii.82. -- (b) by combination with ko -- ci (cp. the identical Lat. qui -- cun -- que): yassa kassaci rāgo pahīno ayaŋ vuccati . . . "the lust of whosoever is abandoned he is called so & so" It 56. yāni kānici vatthūni . . . sabbāni tāni . . . It 19; ye keci ārabbha "with ref. to whosoever" PvA 17; yaŋ kiñci whatever Pv i.41.

4. Dependent & elliptic use of ya (with pron. demonstr.). This represents a sort of deictic (emphatic) use, with ref. to what is coming next or what forms the necessary compliment to what is just being said. Thus it introduces a general truth or definition, as we would say "just this, namely, i. e.," or Ger. "so wie, und zwar." -- (a) The usual combns are those of ya+sa (nt. taŋ) and of ya+ayaŋ (nt. idaŋ), but such with amu (nt. aduŋ) also occur: yaŋ aduŋ khettaŋ aggaŋ evam eva mayhaŋ bhikkhu -- bhikkhuniyo "as there is one field which is the best, thus to me the bh. & bhikkhunīs" S iv.315. Cp. the foll.: ya+sa e. g. at M. i.366 (yo so puriso paṭhamaŋ rukkhaŋ ārūḷho sace so na khippam eva oroheyya "just that man, who climbed up the tree first, if he does not come down very quickly"); J ii.159 (yena tena upāyena with every possible means); Pv i.91 (yā tā [so read for yā ca!] "just she over there; who as such, i. e. such as she is"); cp. also the foll.: yā sā sīmā . . . taŋ sīmaŋ Vin i.109; ye te dhammā ādikalyāṇā etc. . . . sātthaŋ brahmacariyaŋ abhivadanti tathā rūpā 'ssa dhammā honti . . . M iii.11; yāni etāni yānāni (just) these DhA iv.6. -- ya+ayaŋ e. g. at M i.258 (yv' āyaŋ vado vedeyyo tatra tatra . . . vipākaŋ paṭisaŋvedeti); It 35 = 93 (nibbāpenti moh'aggiŋ paññāya yā 'yaŋ nibbedha -- gāminī: "as it is also penetrating, which as such, or in this quality, or as we know, is penetrating"); Vin iv.134 (ye 'me antarāyikā dhammā vuttā . . . te paṭisevato n' âlaŋ antarāyāya "just those which, or whichever"). Th 1, 124 (panko ti hi naŋ avedayuŋ yâyaŋ vandanapūjanā; here=yā ayaŋ); Dh 56 (appamatto ayaŋ gandho yâyaŋ tagara -- candanī; here=yo ayaŋ); M ii.220 (yaŋ idaŋ kammaŋ . . . taŋ). -- (b) nt. yadidaŋ lit. "as that," which is this (i. e. the following), may be translated by "viz.," that is, "i. e." in other words, so to speak, just this, "I mean"; e. g. kāmānaŋ etaŋ nissaraṇaŋ yad idaŋ nekkhammaŋ "there is an escape from the lusts, viz. lustlessness"; or: "this is the abandoning of lusts, in other words lustlessness" It 61; dve dānāni āmisa˚ dhamm˚, etad aggaŋ imesaŋ yad idaŋ dhamma˚ "this is the best of them, I mean dh -- d." It 98=100; supaṭipanno sāvaka -- sangho, y. i. cattāri purisa -- yugāni etc. M i.37. Instead of yadidaŋ we also find yāvañ c' idaŋ. See also examples given under yāvatā.

5. Cases used adverbially: Either locally or modally; with regards to the local adverbs it is to be remarked that their connotation is fluctuating, inasmuch as direction and place (where) are not always distinguished (cp. E. where both meanings = where & where -- to), but must be guessed from the context. (a) instr. yena: (local) where (i. e. at which place) D i.71 (yena yena wherever), 220 (yattha yena yahiŋ=whence, where, whither; not with trsln Dial. I. 281: where, why, whence!), 238 (id.); yenatena where (he was) -- there (he went) D i.88, 106, 112 & passim; cp. D ii.85 (yena âvasath' âgāraŋ ten' upasankami); A ii.33 (yena vā tena vā here & there or "hither & thither"). -- (modal) Dh 326 (yen' icchakaŋ ii. 2 b.); Pv i.112 (kiŋ akattha pāpaŋ yena pivātha lohitaŋ: so that). -- loc. yahiŋ where (or whither) Vv 8429 (yahiŋ yahiŋ gacchati tahiŋ tahiŋ modati); & yasmiŋ: yasmiŋ vā tasmiŋ vā on every occasion S i.160. -- abl. yasmā (only modal) because A i.260; It 37 (corresp. to tasmā). On yasmā -- t -- iha see Geiger, P.Gr. 735. -- 545 -- Yakana
Yakana
(nt.) [fr. gen. yaknaḥ or sec. stem yakan -- of Vedic yakṛt; cp. Av. yākars; Gr. h( = par, Lat. jecur. In formation cp. P. chakana fr. Ved. śakṛt.] the liver Kh iii.; M i.57, 421; D ii.293; A v.109; Miln 26; Vism 257, 356; VbhA 60, 240. The old n -- stem is to be seen in cpd. yaka -- peḷa (q. v.). Yakapeḷa
Yaka
-- peḷa [see peḷa] the lump of the liver Sn 195 ( = ya- kana -- piṇḍa SnA 247)=J i.146. Dines Andersen suggests: "Could y. -- p. possibly be an old error for sakapeḷa, cp. Sk. śaka -- piṇḍa & śakṛt -- piṇḍa?" Cp. paṭala (ref. Vism 257). Yakāra
Ya
-- kāra [ya+kāra] 1. the letter (or sound) y: J i.430 (padasandhikara); iii.433 (vyañjana -- sandhi -- vasena gahita). -- 2. the letter (or syllable) ya: J v.427 (nipāta -- matta). It is referred to at Vin iv.7 as an ending implying ridiculing or insult, together with the ending ˚bha. The Cy. means words like dāsiya, gumbiya, bālya etc. where -- ya either denotes descendency or property, or stands for -- ka as diminutive (i. e. (disparaging) ending. The same applies to ˚bha. Here at Vin iv.7 this way of calling a person by means of adding -- ya -- or -- bha to his name (cp. E. -- y in kid> kiddy etc.) is grouped with a series of other terms of insult (hīnā akkosā). Yakkha
Yakkha
[Vedic yakṣa, quick ray of light, but also "ghost"; fr. yaks to move quickly; perhaps: swift creatures, changing their abode quickly and at will. -- The customary (popular) etym. of Pali Commentators is y. as quâsi grd. of yaj, to sacrifice, thus: a being to whom a sacrifice (of expiation or propitiation) is given. See e. g. VvA 224: yajanti tattha baliŋ upaharantī ti yakkhā; or VvA 333: pūjanīya -- bhavato yakkho ti vuccati. -- The term yakṣa as attendants of Kubera occurs already in the Upanishads.] 1. name of certain non -- human beings, as spirits, ogres, dryads, ghosts, spooks. Their usual epithet and category of being is amanussa, i. e. not a human being (but not a sublime god either); a being half deified and of great power as regards influencing people (partly helping, partly hurting). They range in appearance immediately above the Petas; many "successful" or happy Petas are in fact Yakkhas (see also below). They correspond to our "genii" or fairies of the fairy -- tales and show all their qualities. In many respects they correspond to the Vedic Piśācas, though different in many others, and of diff. origin. Historically they are remnants of an ancient demonology and of considerable folkloristic interest, as in them old animistic beliefs are incorporated and as they represent creatures of the wilds and forests, some of them based on ethnological features. See on term e. g. Dial. iii.188; on their history and identity Stede, Gespenstergeschichten des Peta Vatthu chap. v.; pp. 39 -- 44. -- They are sometimes called devatā: S i.205; or devaputtā: PvA 113, 139. A female Yakkha is called yakkhinī (q. v.).

2. Their usual capacity is one of kindness to men (cp. Ger. Rūbezahl). They are also interested in the spiritual welfare of those humans with whom they come into contact, and are something like "tutelary genii" or even "angels" (i. e. messengers from another world) who will save prospective sinners from doing evil (cp. Pv iv.1). They also act as guides in the "inferno": Pv iv.11, cp. iv.3. A somewhat dangerous "Mentor" is represented at D i.95, where the y. Vajirapāṇī threatens to slay Ambaṭṭha with an iron hammer, if he does not answer the Bhagavā. He is represented as hovering in the air; Bdhgh. (DA i.264) says on this: na yo vā so vā yakkho, Sakko devarājā ti veditabbo: it is to be understood not as this or that y., but as Sakka the king of devas. -- Whole cities stand under the protection of, or are inhabited by yakkhas; D ii.147 (ākiṇṇa -- yakkha full of y.; thus Āḷakamandā may here mean all kinds of supra -- mundane beings), cp. Lankā (Ceylon) as inhabited by y.: Mhvs 7, 33. -- Often, however, they are cruel and dangerous. The female yakkhas seem on the whole more fearful and evil-natured than the male (see under yakkhinī). They eat flesh and blood: J iv.549; devour even men: D ii.346; J ii.15 -- 17, or corpses: J i.265; mentioned under the 5 ādīnavā (dangers) at A iii.256. A yakkha wants to kill Sāriputta: Ud 4.

3. Var. classes of y. are enumd at D ii.256, 257; in a progressive order they rank between manussa and gandhabba at A ii.38; they are mentioned with devas, rakkhasas, dānavas, gandhabbas, kinnaras and mah'oragas at J v.420. According to VvA 333 Sakka, the 4 great kings (lokapālā), the followers of Vessavaṇa (alias Yama, the yakkhas proper) and men (see below 7) go by the name of yakkha. -- Sakka, the king of the devas, is often named yakkha: J iv.4; DA i.264. Some are spirits of trees (rukkha -- devatā): J iii.309 345; Pv i.9; ii.9; PvA 5; are also called bhumma -- devā (earthly deities) PvA 45, 55. Their cult seems to originate primarily from the woods (thus in trees: Pv ii.9; iv.3), and secondarily from the legends of sea -- faring merchants (cp. the story of the flyingDutchman). To the latter origin point the original descriptions of a Vimāna or fairy -- palace, which is due to a sort of mirage. These are usually found in or at the sea, or in the neighbourhood of silent lakes, where the sense of hauntedness has given rise to the fear of demons or supernatural witchcraft. Cp. the entrances to a Vimāna by means of a dried -- up river bed (Pv i.9; ii.12) and the many descriptions of the Vimānas in the Lake -- districts of the Himavant in Vv. (See Stede, Peta Vatthu trsln p. 104 sq.)

4. Their names too give us a clue as to their origin and function. These are taken from (a) their bodily appearance, which possesses many of the attributes of Petas, e. g. Khara "Rough -- skin" or "Shaggy" Sn p. 48 ( = khara -- samphassaŋ cammaŋ SnA 302), also as Khara -- loma "Rough -- hair" Vism 208; Khara -- dāṭhika "Rough -- tooth" J i.31. Citta "Speckled" Mhvs 9, 22; 10, 4; also as Citta -- rājā J ii.372; Mhvs 10, 84. Silesa -- loma "Sticky -- hair" J i.273. Sūci -- loma "Needlehair" Sn p. 47, 48; S i.207; Vism 208; SnA 302. -- (b) places of inhabitance, attributes of their realm, animals and plants, e. g. Ajakalāpaka "Goat -- bundle" Ud 1. Āḷavaka "Forest -- dweller" J iv.180; vi.329; Mhvs 30, 84: Vism 208. Uppala "Lotus" DhA iv.209. Kakudha "K. -- tree" (Terminalia arjuna) S i.54. Kumbhīra "Crocodile" J vi.272. Gumbiya either "One of a troop" (soldier of Yama) or "Thicket -- er" (fr. gumba thicket) J iii.200, 201. Disāmukha "Sky-facer" DhA iv.209. Yamamoli "Yamachignon" DhA iv.208. Vajira "Thunderbolt" DhA iv.209; alias Vajira -- pāṇī D i.95, or Vajira -- bāhu DhA iv.209. Sātāgira "Pleasant -- mount" D ii.256; Sn 153; J iv.314; vi.440. Serīsaka "Acacia -- dweller" VvA 341 (the messenger of Vessavaṇa). -- (c) qualities of character, e. g. Adhamma "Unrighteous" Miln 202 (formerly Devadatta). Katattha "Well -- wisher" DhA iv.209. Dhamma "Righteous" Miln 202 (=Bodhisatta). Puṇṇaka "Full( -- moon?)" J vi.255 sq. (a leader of soldiers, nephew of Vessavaṇa). Māra the "Tempter" Sn 449; S i.122; M i.338. Sakata "Waggon -- load" (of riches) DhA iv.209 -- (d) embodiments of former persons, e. g. Janavasabha "Lord of men" D ii.205. Dīgha M i.210. Naradeva J vi.383, 387. Paṇḍaka "Eunuch" Mhvs 12, 21. Sīvaka S i.241=Vin ii.156. Serī "Self -- willed" S i.57. -- Cp. the similar names of yakkhinīs.

5. They stand in a close relationship to and under the authority of Vessavaṇa (Kuvera), one of the 4 lokapālas. They are often the direct servants (messengers) of Yama himself, the Lord of the Underworld (and the Peta -- realm especially). Cp. D ii.257; iii.194 sq.; J iv.492 (yakkhinī fetches water for Vessavaṇa); vi.255 sq. (Puṇṇaka, the nephew of V.); VvA 341 (Serīsaka, his messenger). In relation to Yama: dve yakkhā Yamassa dūtā Vv 522; cp. Np. Yamamolī DhA iv.208. -- In harmony with tradition they share the rôle of their master Kuvera as lord of riches (cp. Pv ii.922) and are the keepers (and liberal spenders) of underground riches, hidden treasures etc., with which they delight men: see e. g. the frame story to Pv ii.11 (PvA 145), and to iv.12 (PvA 274). They enjoy every kind of splendour & enjoyment, hence their attribute kāma -- kāmin Pv i.33. Hence they possess supernatural powers, can transfer themselves to any place with their palaces and work miracles; a frequent attribute of theirs is mah' iddhika (Pv ii.910; J vi.118). Their appearance is splendid, as a result of former merit: cp. Pv i.2; i.9; ii.11; iv.317. At the same time they are possessed of odd qualities (as result of former demerit); they are shy, and afraid of palmyra leaf & iron: J iv.492; their eyes are red & do not wink: J v. 34; vi.336, 337. -- Their abode is their self -- created palace (Vimāna), which is anywhere in the air, or in trees etc. (see under vimāna). Sometimes we find a communion of yakkhas grouped in a town, e. g. Āḷakamandā D ii.147; Sirīsa -- vatthu (in Ceylon) Mhvs 7, 32.

6. Their essential human character is evident also from their attitude towards the "Dhamma." In this respect many of them are "fallen angels" and take up the word of the Buddha, thus being converted and able to rise to a higher sphere of existence in saŋsāra. Cp. D iii.194, 195; J ii.17; VvA 333; Pv ii.810 (where "yakkha" is expld by Dhpāla as "pet -- attabhāvato cuto (so read for mato!) yakkho ataŋ jāto dev -- attabhāvaŋ patto" PvA 110); SnA 301 (both Sūciloma & Khara converted). -- See in general also the foll. passages: Sn 153, 179, 273, 449; S i.206 -- 15; A i.160; Vism 366 (in simile); Miln 23.

7. Exceptionally the term "yakkha" is used as a philosophical term denoting the "individual soul" [cp. similar Vedic meaning "das lebendige Ding" (B.R.) at several AV. passages]; hence probably the old phrase: ettāvatā yakkhassa suddhi (purification of heart) Sn 478, quoted VvA 333 (ettāvat' aggaŋ no vadanti h' eke yakkhassa sudhiŋ idha paṇḍitāse). Sn 875 (cp. Nd1 282: yakkha = satta, nara, puggala, manussa).

-- ânubhāva the potency of a yakkha J i.240. -- āviṭṭha possessed by a y. J vi.586. -- iddhi (yakkh˚) magic power of a y. PvA 117, 241. -- gaṇa the multitude of ys. J vi.287. -- gaha = following DhA iii.362. -- gāha "yakkha -- grip," being seized by a y. S i.208; PvA 144. -- ṭṭhāna the dwelling -- place of a y. -- dāsī "a female temple slave," or perhaps "possessed by a demon" (?) J vi.501 (v. l. BB devatā -- paviṭṭhā cp. p. 586: yakkh' āviṭṭhā.) -- nagara city of ys. J ii.127 (=Sirīsavatthu); cp. pisāca -- nagara. -- pura id. Mhvs 7.32. -- bhavana the realm or abode of the y. Nd1 448. -- bhūta a yakkha -- being, a ghost Pv iii.52 (=pisāca -- bhūta vā yakkha -- bh. vā PvA 198); iv.135. -- mahiddhi=˚iddhi; Pv iv.154. -- yoni the y. -- world, realm of the y. SnA 301. -- samāgama meeting of the y. PvA 55 (where also devaputtā join). -- sūkara a y. in the form of a pig VbhA 494. -- senā army of ys. D iii.194; SnA 209. -- senāpati chief -- commander of the yakkha -- army J iv.478; SnA 197. -- 546 -- Yakkhatta
Yakkhatta
(nt.) [fr. yakkha] condition of a higher demon or yakkha D ii.57; A ii.39; PvA 117. Yakkhinī
Yakkhinī
(f.) [fr. yakkha, perhaps corresponding directly to Vedic yakṣiṇī, f. of yakṣin; adj. persecuting, taking vengeance, appld to Varuṇa at RV. vii.884] a female yakkha, a vampire. Their character is usually fierce & full of spite & vengeance, addicted to man -- & beast-murder (cp. yakkha 2). They are very much like Petīs in habits. With their names cp. those of the yakkhas, as enumd under yakkha 4. -- Vin iii.37; iv.20 (where sexual intercourse with y. is forbidden to the bhikkhus); S i.209 (Piyankara -- mātā); J i.240 (as a goat), 395 sq.; ii.127; iii.511; v.21 (eating a baby), 209 (eaten by a y.); vi.336 (desirous of eating a child); Vism 121 (singing), 382 (four: Piyankara -- mātā, Uttaramātā, Phussa -- mittā, Dhammaguttā), 665 (in simile); Mhvs 7, 11 (Kuvaṇṇā, i. e. bad -- coloured); 10, 53 (Cetiyā); 12, 21 (Hāritā "Charming" or fr. harita "green" (?)); DhA i.47; ii.35, 36 (a y. in the form of a cow, eating 4 people in successive births). Note. A by -- form of yakkhinī is yakkhī.

-- bhāva the state of being a yakkhinī J i.240; ii.128 (yakkhini˚). Yakkhī
Yakkhī
(f.) [direct formation fr. yakkha, like petī fr. peta; form older than yakkhinī (?)] = yakkhinī S i.11; Vin iii.121; iv.20; J iv.492; Mhvs 7, 26. Yagghe
Yagghe
(indecl.) [similar in formation & meaning to tagghe (q. v.). It is yaŋ (yad)+gha, the latter in a Māgadhised form ghe, whereas taggha ( = tad+gha) only occurs as such] hortative part, used in addressing a (superior) person in the voc., followed by Pot. of jānāti, either 2nd jāneyyāsi, or 3rd sg. jāneyya; to be trsld somewhat like "look here, don't you know," surely, you ought to know; now then; similarly to part. yaŋ nu, yaŋ nūna & yaŋ hi. The part. is found in the language of the Nikāyas only, thus indicating part of the oldest & original dialect. E. g.: y. bhante jāneyyāsi Vin i.237; yagghe deva jāneyyāsi yo te puriso dāso . . . so . . . pabbajito do you know, Oh king D i.60 (trsl.: "if it please your majesty, do you know . . ."; DA i.169 expls as "codan' at11>the nipāto"); y. ayye jāneyyāsi M ii.62; mahārāja j. M ii.71; id. S i.101; y. bhavan jāneyya S i.180. -- The passage M ii.157 is somewhat doubtful where we find y. with the ind. and in var. forms (see v. l.) of yagghi & taggha: "jānanti pana bhonto yagghe . . .," with reply "na jānāma yagghe . . ." Perhaps the reading taggha would be preferable. Yajati
Yajati
[yaj, cp. Vedic yajati, yajus, Yajur -- veda. To Av. yaƶaitē to sacrifice, Gr. a(/zomai to revere, worship. On etym. cp. also Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. aestimo. -- The Dhtp (62) defines root by "deva -- pūjā, sangati -- karaṇa, dānesu," i. e. "said of deva -- worship, of assembling, and of gifts." Similarly Dhtm 79] to sacrifice, to make an offering (yaññaŋ); to give alms or gifts -- In the P. literature it refers (with yañña, sacrifice) either (when critical) to the Brahmanic rites of sacrificing to the gods according to the rules initiated in the Vedas & Vedic literature; or (when dogmatical) to the giving of alms to the bhikkhu. In the latter sense it implies liberal donation of all the necessities of a bhikkhu (see enumd under yañña). The latter use is by far the more frequent. -- The construction is with the acc. of the deity honoured and the instr. of the gift. -- Pres. yajati D i.139; A i.168; ii.43, 44; Sn 505, 509; DA i.160. -- ppr. yajanto D i.52; M i.404; Miln 21; gen. pl. yajataŋ Sn 569 ( = Vin i.246, where reading is jayataŋ). -- ppr. med. yajamāna D i.138 (mahayaññaŋ); Sn 506; S i.233; J vi.502, 505. -- imper. 3rd sg. yajatu DA i.297; med. yajataŋ D i.138 (=detu bhavaŋ DA i.300). 2nd sg. yajāhi J iii.519; PvA 280, and perhaps at Pv ii.16 (for T. yāhi). 2nd med. yajassu Sn 302, 506; J v.488 (yaññaŋ), 490 (id.) -- Pot. 1st sg. yajeyyaŋ D i.134; 3rd pl. yajeyyuŋ J vi.211, 215; 3rd sg. med. yajetha Dh 106 (māse māse sahassena yo y.=dānaŋ dadeyya DhA ii.231), 108; It 98; A ii.43; Sn 463. -- Fut. 2nd sg. yajissasi J iii.515; 1st sg. yajissāmi J vi.527 (pantha -- sakuṇaŋ tuyhaŋ maŋsena); 3rd pl. yajissanti J iv.184; 1st pl. yajissāma J vi.132. -> aor. 1st sg. yajiŋ Th 1, 341; 3rd sg. ayajī It 102; yaji Miln 219, 221. -- inf. yajituŋ Miln 220; yiṭṭhuŋ D i.138 (yiṭṭhu -- kāma wishing to sacrifice), and yaṭṭhuŋ in ˚kāma D ii.244; Sn 461. -- ger. yajitvā D i.143; A ii.44; Sn 509; J vi.137 (puttehi), 202; Pv ii.956 (datvā+, i. e. spending liberally; cp. PvA 136); yajitvāna Sn 303, 979. -- grd. yajitabba J vi.133 (sabbacatukkena). -- pp. yajita & yiṭṭha. -- Caus. I. yājeti; Caus. II. yajāpeti (q. v.). -- 547 -- Yajana
Yajana
(nt.) [late formation fr. yaj, yajati, for the earlier yañña] the act of sacrificing J iii.518; vi.133; Cp. I. 72; Vism 224; PvA 135. Yajanaka
Yajanaka
(adj.) [fr. yajana] one who sacrifices J vi.133. Yajāpeti
Yajāpeti
[Caus. II. of yajati] to cause a sacrifice to be held A i.168 (yajati+). Yajita
Yajita
[pp. of yajati] sacrificed Miln 219; J iv.19. Yajubbeda
Yajubbeda
[fr. Vedic yajus the sacrificial formula,+veda] the Yajurveda, the 2nd of the Vedas, dealing with sacrifice Miln 178; DA i.247; SnA 447. As yajuveda at Dpvs v.62, where the 3 Vedas are enumd as iruveda, yaju˚ and sāma˚. Yañña
Yañña
[Vedic yajña, fr. yaj: see yajati. The metric reading in the Veda is sometimes yajana, which we are inclined to look upon as not being the source of the P. yajana] 1. a brahmanic sacrifice. -- 2. almsgiving, charity, a gift to the Sangha or a bhikkhu. The brahmanic ritual of Vedic times has been given a changed and deeper meaning. Buddhism has discarded the outward and cruel form and has widened its sphere by changing its participant, its object as well as the means and ways of "offering," so that the yañña now consists entirely in a worthy application of a worthy gift to a worthy applicant. Thus the direct and as it were self -- understood definition of yañña is at Nd2 523 given with "yañño vuccati deyyadhammo," and as this the 14 constituents of the latter are enumd; consisting of the 4 paccayas, and of anna, pāna, vattha, yāna, mālā, gandhā, vilepana, seyya, avasatha, padīpeyya. Cp. Nd1 373. -- The term parikkhāra, which refers to the requisites of the bhikkhu as well (see DA i.204 -- 207), is also used in the meaning of "accessory instrument" concerning the brahmanic sacrifice: see D i.129 sq., 137 sq. They are there given as 16 parikkhāras, as follows: (4) cattāro anumati -- pakkhā viz. the 4 groups khattiyas, ministers, brahmans and householders, as colleagues by consent; (8) aṭṭhangāni of a king -- sacrificer; (4) cattār' angāni of a purohita. -> The term mahāyañña refers to the brahmanic ritual (so at M ii.204; DhsA 145, cp. Expositor 193); its equivalent in Buddhist literature is mahādāna, for which yañña is also used at Pv ii.950 (cp. PvA 134). -> The Jātakas are full of passages referring to the ineffectiveness and cruelty of the Brahmanic sacrifice, e. g. J iii.518 sq.; vi.211 sq., & cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung, p. 146 sq. One special kind of sacrifice is the sabba -- catukkayañña or the sacrifice of tetrads, where four of each kind of gifts, as elephants, horses, bulls, and even men were offered: J i.335; iii.44, 45; PvA 280. The number 4 here has the meaning of evenness, completeness, or harmony, as we find it freq., in the notion of the square with ref. to Vimānas & lotus ponds (in J., Vv & Pv etc.); often also implying awfulness & magic, as attached e. g. to cross -- roads. Cp. the Ep. of niraya (Purgatory) "catu -- dvāra" (esp. at Pv i.10). See cpds. of catur. -- It may also refer to the 4 quarters of the sky, as belonging to the 4 Guardians of the World (lokapālā) who were specially worth offering to, as their influence was demonic (cp. Pv i.4).

The prevailing meaning of yañña in the Suttapiṭaka is that of "gift, oblation to the bhikkhu, alms-giving." Cp. Sn 295, 461, 484, 1043. At Vv 3426 the epithets "su -- dinna, su -- huta, su -- yiṭṭha" are attributed to dāna. -- The 3 constituents which occur under dāna & deyyadhamma as the gift, the giver and the recipient of the gift (i. e. the Sangha: cp. opening stanza Pv i1) are similarly enumd under yañña (or yaññapatha) as "ye yaññaŋ (viz. cīvaraŋ etc.) esanti" those who wish for a gift, "ye yaññaŋ abhisankharonti" those who get it ready, and "ye yaññaŋ denti" those who give it, at Nd2 70 (under appamatta). Similarly we find the threefold division of "yañña" ( = cīvara etc.), "yaññayājaka" (=khattiyā, brāhmaṇā etc., including all 8 classes of men: see Nd2 p. 129 s. v. khattiya, quoted under janab), and "dakkhiṇeyya" (the recipient of the gift, viz. samaṇa -- brāhmaṇā, kapaṇ'addhikā vanibbakā, yācakā) at Nd2 449b (under puthū). -- Cp. the foll. (mixed) passages: D i.97, 128 -- 144 (brahmanic criticised); ii.353, 354 (profitable and unprofitable, criticised); M i.82 (brahm.); S i.76, 160; ii.42 sq., 63, 207; iii.337; iv.41; A i.166; ii.43 (nirārambhaŋ yaññaŋ upasankamanti arahanto, cp. DhsA 145); Sn 308 (brahm.), 568 (aggihutta -- mukhā yaññā: the sacrifices to Agni are the best; brahm.); Th 1, 341; J i.83, 343; iii.517 (˚ŋ yajati; brahm.); iv.66; v.491, 492; vi.200 (yañña -- kāraka -- brāhmaṇa), 211 sq.; DA i.267; DhA ii.6.

-- âgāra a hall for sacrifices Pug 56 ( = yañña -- sālā PugA 233). -- āvāṭa the sacrificial pit D i.142, 148; J i.335; iii.45, 517; vi.215 (where reading yaññavāṭa, cp. yaññavāṭaka at Cp. i.72). It has been suggested by Kern, Toev, s. v., and it seems more to the sense, to read yañña -- vāṭa for yanñ' āvāṭa, i. e. enclosed place for sacrifice. Thus at all passages for ˚āvāṭa. -- kāla a suitable (or the proper) time for sacrifice D i.137; Sn 458, 482; DA i.297. -- upanīta one who has been brought to the sacrifice S i.168 (trsl. K.S. 211 not quite to the point: "the oblation is brought." Reading is uncertain; v. l. ˚opanīta which may be read as opavīta "wearing the sacrificial cord": see foll.). -- opavīta (?) [see upavīta] in phrase yaññ' opavīta -- kaṇṭhā "having the (sacrificial, i. e.) alms -- cord wound round their necks" SnA 92 (v. l. BB yaññ -- opacita -- kammā). Cp. yañña -- suttaka. -- patha [cp. patha2] (way of) sacrificing, sacrifice Sn 1045; Nd2 524 (yañño y' eva vuccati yañña -- patho); J vi.212, 215. -- vaṇṇa praise of sacrifice J vi.200. -- vidhāna the arrangement or celebration of a sacrifice J vi.202. -- sampadā success of the sacrifice D i.128 sq. (in its threefold mode), 134, 143, 144; Sn 505, 509. -- sāmin lord or giver of a sacrifice D i.143. -- suttaka "sacrificial string," i. e. alms -- cord (the sign of a mendicant) DhA ii.59. Cp. above: ˚opavīta. Yaññatā
Yaññatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. yañña] "sacrificiality," the function or ceremony of a sacrifice J vi.202 ( = yañña -- vidhāna C.). Yaṭṭhi
Yaṭṭhi
(f.) [cp. Vedic yaṣṭi. Another Pali form is laṭṭhi] 1. a staff, stick, pole M iii.133 (tomara˚ goad); S i.115 (pācana˚ driving stick, goad); Miln 2; DhA iii.140 (kattara˚ a mendicant's staff); PvA 241; VbhA 241 (yantacakka˚); Mhvs 11, 10 (veḷu˚ a bamboo pole). -> 2. a stem, stalk (of a plant), cane in ucchu˚ sugarstick, sugar -- cane DhA iii.315 ( = ucchu -- khaṇḍika at Vv 3326); iv.199. -- 3. a measure of length (=7 ratanas) VbhA 343.

-- koṭi the end of the stick or staff DhA i.15. -- madhukā ("cane -- sweetness") liquorice Mhvs 32, 46. -- luddaka "stick -- hunter" at J iv.392 means a hunter with a lasso. -- 548 -- Yata
Yata
[pp. of yam] held, checked, controlled, restrained, careful S ii.15, 50; Sn 78, 220, 1079 ( = yatta, paṭiyatta, gutta etc. Nd2 525); J vi.294 (C. appamatta; Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes reading yatta for yata Vism 201 (?). Esp. in two phrases: yat -- atta (yata+attan) selfcontrolled, one whose heart is kept down D i.57 (cp. Dial. i.75); Sn 216, 490, 723; DA i.168. -- yata -- cārin living in self -- restraint, living or behaving carefully Sn 971 (=yatta paṭiyatta gutta etc. Nd1 498); Miln 300 (+samāhita -- citta, where Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes to read yatta -- cārin for yata˚). A similar passage at Th 1, 981 reads yathā -- cārin (q. v. for further expln). -> Cp. saŋyata & see also yatta. Yatati
Yatati1
[yat, given by Dhtp 121 in meaning "yatana," by Dhtm 175 as "paṭiyatana"] to exert oneself, strive, endeavour, to be cautious or careful; ppr. yataŋ It 120 (care, tiṭṭhe, acche etc.; Seidenstūcker trsls "gezügelt," thus taking it in meaning of yata). -- pp. yatta. Yatati
Yatati2
[unidentified, perhaps as expln of yati?] is given in meaning of "lead out" (?) at Dhtp 580 ("niyyātane") and Dhtm 813 (id.). Yatana
Yatana
(nt.) [fr. yat, cp. Epic Sk. yatna] endeavour, under- taking J v.346 (C. expls samosaraṇa -- ṭṭhāna?); Dhtp 121 (in expln of yatati1). Yati
Yati
[fr. yat, cp. Vedic yati leader, guide] a Buddhist monk Mhvs 5, 37 (racchāgataŋ yatiŋ); 25, 4; 30, 26 (mattikā -- dāyakaŋ yatiŋ); 32, 32 (khīṇāsavassa yatino); Dāvs iv.33 (yatī); Vism 79 (vikampeti Mārassa hadayaŋ yatī); PvA 287 (instr. muni -- vara -- yatinā). Yato
Yato
(adv.) [the abl. case of ya˚, used as conjunction, Cp. Vedic yataḥ wherefrom, by which, out of which] 1. (local) from where D i.240 (uggacchanti candima -- suriyā; opp. yattha where). -- 2. (temporal) whence, since, when, from which time VvA 344 (yato paṭṭhāya). -- 3. (modal) from which, out of what cause, because, in as far as D i.36 sq. (yato . . . ettāvatā because . . . therefore); Sn p. 113 (id.) Dh 374, 390 (doubled = from whichever source). -- Freq. in two combns: yatvâdhi -- karaṇaŋ (yato+adhikaraṇaŋ) because (lit. by reason of which; cp. kim -- ādhikaraṇaŋ, see adhik.) D i.70; D i.113; M i.269; Dhs 1346; cp. similarly BSk. yato adhikaraṇaŋ MVastu iii.52; and yato -- nidānaŋ on account of which, from which (or what) reason, because M i.109; Sn 273, 869; Pv iv.161 (cp. PvA 242). -- Note. yaticchita at PvA 265 is to be read yadicchita. Yatta
Yatta
[pp. of yatati1] strenuous, making an effort, watchful Nd2 525 (+paṭiyatta, in exegesis of yata); J iv.222 (+paṭiyatta); vi.294 (Kern's reading for yata; vv. ll. saŋyata & sata, thus warranting yata); Miln 373 (˚payatta), 378 (id. = in keen effort). -- Note. Kern, Toev. s. v. would like to equal yatta=Sk. yatna effort. Yattaka
Yattaka
(adj.) [fr. yāvant, a late formation; cp. Trenckner, Notes, 80] however much, whatever, as many (in correlation with ta˚ or tattaka) J v.74 ( = yāvant); Vism 184 (yattakaŋ ṭhānaŋ gaṇhāti . . . tattakaŋ . . .), 293 (yattakā=yāvatā); DA i.118 (yattaka . . . tattaka as long as); DhA ii.50 (˚ŋ kālaŋ as long), 128; VbhA 73 (yattakaŋ ṭhānaŋ . . . tattakaŋ), 391 (yattakāni kusala -- cittāni . . . tesaŋ sabbesaŋ); VvA 175 (yattakāni . . . tāni as many . . . so many, i. e. whatever), 285 (yattakā āhuneyyā nāma . . . tesu sabbesu . . .). -- instr. yattakena as adv. "because, on account of" DhA iii.383, 393. Yattha
Yattha
(adv.) [the regular P. form of Ved. yatra. See also P. yatra] rel. adv. of place "where," at which spot; occasionally "at which time," when; with verbs of motion = "whereto." -- D i.240 (whither); Sn 79, 170 (here closely resembling yatra in meaning="so that"), 191, 313, 445, 995, 1037; Dh 87, 127 (yattha ṭhita, cp. PvA 104) 150, 171, 193, PvA 27. -- yattha vā tattha vā wherever (or whenever) DhA iv.162; similarly yattha yattha wherever (he likes) A ii.64. yattha kāmaŋ (cp. yathākāmaŋ in same meaning) where to one's liking, i. e. wherever Dh 35 (=yattha katthaci or yattha yattha icchati DhA i.295, 299), 326. Similarly we find yatth -- icchakaŋ, almost identical (originally variant?) with yadicchakaŋ and yāvadicchakaŋ at Vism 154. Yatra
Yatra
(adv.) [the (older?) reconstituted Sk. form of P. yattha, cp. Vedic yatra in which, where. The P. form is younger than the Vedic, as the P. meaning is doubtful for the V. period. It is merely a differentiation of forms to mark a special meaning in the sense of a causal conjunction, whereas yattha is adv. (of place or time) only] in which, where, since; only in phrase yatra hi nāma (in emphatic exclamations) with Fut.; "as indeed, inasmuch as, that" S ii.255 (ñāṇabhūtā vata sāvakā y. h. n. savako ñassati etc.); J i.59 (dhir -- atthu vata bho jātiyā y. h. n. jātassa jarā paññāyissati "woe to birth that old age is to be noticed in that which is born!"); Miln 13 (acchariyaŋ vata bho . . . y. h. n. me upajjhāyo ceto -- parivitakkaŋ jānissati). Yathā
Yathā
(adv.) [fr. ya˚; Vedic yathā; cp. kathā, tathā] as, like, in relation to, after (the manner of). -- As prep. (with acc.): according (to some condition, norm or rule): yathā kāmaŋ (already Vedic) according to his desire, after his liking PvA 113, 136; y. kālaŋ in time, timely PvA 78; matiŋ to his own mind or intention Pv iv.167; ruciŋ to his satisfaction, amply, satisfactorily PvA 88, 126, 242; vibhavaŋ acc. to their wealth, i. e. plentifully PvA 53; sukhaŋ as they liked or pleased PvA 133. Sometimes with loc.: yathā padese "according to place," in the right place J iii.391. Or instr.: y. sattiyā as much as you can DhA i.92; y. manena from his heart, sincerely, voluntarily DhA i.42. -- Also with ger. yathā haritvā according to his taking (or reward: see under cpd. ˚bhata) It 14 (y. h. nikkhipeyya, which Seidenstücker, not doing justice to context translates "so wie man etwas nimmt und dann wegwirft"). With foll. adj. expressing something like "as it were" and often untranslateable (see cpds.) -- As conjunction: "as if," or "so that": yathā mata like dead Dh 21; yathā na "in order that not": Vism 31 (y. sarīre ābādhaŋ na uppādeti, evaŋ tassa vinodan' atthaŋ); DhA i.311 (y. assa patitaṭthānaŋ na passāmi, tathā naŋ chaḍḍessāmi: so that I shall not see . . ., thus shall I throw him). -- As adv. just, as, so, even; in combn with other particles: yathā kathaŋ pana how so then, how is it then that S ii.283 (cp. yathā tathaŋ under cpds.); yathā kiŋ viya somewhat like this Miln 91; yathā pana like as DhA i.158; yatha -- r -- iva (for yathā -- iva) just as D i.90; yathā pi . . . evaŋ just as . . . so Dh 51 -- 52. -- yatha -- yidaŋ (for yathā -- idaŋ) positive: "as just this," "so that," "e. g.," "like," "i. e."; after negation "but" It 8, 9 (na aññaŋ . . . yathayidaŋ); Sn 1092 (tvañ ca me dīpam akkhāhi, yathayidaŋ n' âparaŋ siyā "so that there be no further ill"; cp. SnA 597). See also the enlarged forms seyyathā & seyyathīdaŋ. -- In correlation with tathā: the same . . . as, like . . . as, as . . . so; Pv i.123 (yath' āgato tathā -- gato as he has come so has he gone). Often elliptically in direct juxtaposition: yathā tathā in whatever way, in such & such a manner; so and so, according to the occasion; also "correctly, truly, in reality" Sn 504 (tvaŋ h' ettha jānāsi y. t. idaŋ); PvA 199 (y. t. vyākāsi). See yathā-tathaŋ under cpds. About phrase yathā taŋ see yathātaŋ. -- For further refs. on the use of yathā see Indexes to Saŋyutta (S vi.81 s. v. yathābhūtaŋ); Anguttara (A. vi.91 ibid.); Sutta -- Nipāta (Index p. 751); & Dhammapada.

-- ânudhammaŋ according to the rules (leading to enlightenment) Sn 963, cp. Nd1 481. -- ânurūpa suitable, proper Mhvs 28, 42. -- ânusiṭṭhaŋ in accordance with what has been taught DhA i.158. -- âbhirantaŋ (adv. nt. of ppr.) to (their) heart's content, as much (or as long) as one likes Vin iii.145; Sn 53; DhA i.385; VvA 181. -- āraddha [ = ālabdha] as much as was to be had, sufficient Vin iii.160. -- ârahaŋ (nt. adv.) as is fit or proper, seeming, fitful, appropriately, duly (cp. Cpd. 1111, 1182) S i.226; Sn 403; Pv ii.923; PvA 78, 132 (yathā codanaŋ v. l. SS), 287; VvA 139. So to be read at all Pv & PvA passages for T. yathā rahaŋ. Very freq. in Mhvs. e. g. 3, 27; 5, 148; 7, 70; 14, 54; 20, 8; 22, 58. -- âlankata dressed as he was, in full (state -- ) dress DhA iii.79. -- âvajjaŋ "as if to be blamed," i. e. (imitating) whatever is faulty, mimicry of deformities (as a forbidden pastime) D i.7 (=kāṇakuṇi -- khañj' ādīnaŋ yaŋ yaŋ vajjaŋ taŋ taŋ payojetvā dassana -- kīḷā DA i.86); Vin ii.10. -- icchitaŋ according to one's wish, as he liked, after his heart's content J i.27 (v. 188)=Bu ii.179; is preferably to be read as yad -- icchitaŋ at all PvA passages, e. g. PvA 3 (˚ŋ dento), 110 (˚ṭhāna whichever place I like), 265 (where T. has yat˚). The ed. of Mhvs however reads yath˚ throughout; e. g. 7, 22; 22, 50. -- odhi as far as the limit, final, utmost M i.37; J iii.302. -- odhika to (its or their) full extent, altogether, only in phrase yathodhikāni kāmāni Sn 60 (cp. Nd2 526); J iii.381 (C. not quite to the point with expln "attano odhivasena ṭhitāni," giving variant yatodhikāni, with expln "yato uparato odhi etesan ti yatodhikāni uparata -- koṭṭhāsāni"); iv.487 (with better C. expln: "yena yena odhinā thitāni tena tena ṭhitān' eva jahissāmi, na kiñce avasissāmī ti attho"); v.392 (C.: "yathāṭhita -- koṭṭhasāni"). -- kamma 11>(ŋ) according to one's karma or action J i.57, 109; iv.1. Freq. in phrase yathā -- kamm -- ûpage satte (pajānāti) "(he recognises) the beings passing away (or undergoing future retribution) acc. to their deeds" D i.82; M i.482; ii.21; iii.178; S ii.122; A iv.141, 178, 422; v.35; Sn 587; It 99; and yathā -- kamm -- ûpaga -- ñāṇa "the knowledge of specific retribution" Vism 433 sq.; Tikp 321; VbhA 373 sq. (˚catuttha). -- kāmaŋ according to wish, at random (see above); ˚ -- karaṇiya to be done or dealt with ad lib., i. e. a victim, prey S ii.226; iv.91, 159; It 56. -- kārin as he does It 122 (corresp. to tathāvādin). -- kālaŋ according to time, in one time Mhvs 5, 180. -- kkamaŋ acc. to order, in one order or succession Mhvs 4, 54; Sdhp 269. -- cārin virtuous (for the usual yatacārin as indicated by C. expln yata kāyādīhi sanyati: see Brethren, p. 342!) Th 1, 981 (trsl. "Whoso according to his powers is virtuous"). -- ṭhita so -- being, such & such, as they are, as they were J v.392; VvA 256. -- tathaŋ according to truth, true & real (corresponding to yathā tathā adv.: see above) It 122 (here as nom. sg.: as he is in one respect, so in the other, i. e. perfect); Sn 1127 (=yathā ācikkhitabbaŋ tathā ācikkhi Nd2 527); Th 1, 708 (diṭṭhe dhamme yathātathe: is reading correct? perhaps better as yathātathā, cp. trsln Brethren 292: "the truths are seen e'en as they really are"); Dpvs iii.2 (so read for yathā -- kathaŋ; v. l. has ˚tathaŋ); v.64 (pañhaŋ byākarohi yathātathaŋ). -- dhamma (used as adj. & adv. ˚ŋ) "one according to the law," i. e. as the rule prescribes; nt. according to the rule put down. See Vin. Texts i.203; Geiger, Dhamma, p. 19, 67. -> Vin i.135 (yo uddiseyya, yathā -- dhammo kāretabbo), 168 (yo pavāreyya, y. -- dhammo kāretabbo), 191 (yo māreyya y. -- dh. k.); ii.67 (ubho pi yathādhammaŋ kārāpetabbā), 132 (yo ajjhohareyya, y. -- dhammo kāretabbo); iv.126 (yo jānaŋ (i. e. knowing) yathādhammaŋ nihat' âdhikaraṇaŋ punakammāya ukkoṭeyya, pācittiyan ti i. e. a dispute settled in proper form; with expln: y. -- dhammaŋ nāma dhammena vinayena satthu sāsanena kataŋ), 144 (na tassa . . . mutti atthi yañ ca tattha āpattiŋ āpanno tañ ca yathādhammo kāretabbo, uttari c' assa moho āropetabbo). Cp. the foll. passages; as adj.: Vin i.205; ii.132, 142, 263; M iii.10; Miln 195; as adv.: with paṭikaroti (to atone, make amends) Vin i.173, 315; ii.126; iv.19; D i.85; iii.55; M iii.247; S ii.128, 205; A i.103, 238; ii.146; iv.377; cp. yathādhammaŋ paṭigaṇhāti S i.239; A i.59, 103. At S iii.171 yathādhammaŋ is used in the sense of "according to the truth, or reality," where yathā -- bhūtaŋ takes its place; similarly at Th 1, 188. -- dhota as if it were washed (so to speak), clean, unsoiled DhA i.196; cp. MVastu i.301 yathā -- dhauta. -- pasādhanaŋ according to a clear state of mind, to one's gratification Dh 249 (= attano pasād' ânurūpaŋ DhA iii.359). -- puggalaŋ according to the individual, individually Pv iii.51 (read yathāpu˚). -- pūrita as full as could be, quite full J i.101. -- phāsuka comfortable, pleasant DhA i.8. -- balaŋ according to one's power or means DhA i.107 (v. l. ˚satti); Sdhp 97; Mhvs 5, 180. -- buḍḍha see ˚vuḍḍha. -- bhataŋ is an unexpld a(/pac legome/non, difficult of analysis because occurring in only one ster. phrase, viz. yathā bhataŋ nikkhitto evaŋ niraye (& sagge) at M i.71; S iv.325 (where T. has yathāhataŋ, v. l. bhataŋ); A i.8, 105, 292, 297; ii.71, 83; It 12, 14, 26. We have analyzed it as y. bhataŋ in Corr. to pt. 3; vol. ii.100 ("according to his upbringing"), but we should rather deviate from this expln because the P. usage in this case would prefer the nom. instead of the (adv.) acc. nt. It remains doubtful whether we should separate yathā or yath' ābhataŋ. Suggestions of a trsln are the foll. (1) "as soon as brought or taken" (see Dict. s. v. ābhata); (2) "as one has brought" (merit or demerit); thus taking ābhataŋ as irregular ger. of ā+bhar, trsln suggested by the reading āharitvā (yathâharitvā) in the complementary stanzas at It 12 & 14; (3) "according to merit or reward," after Kern's suggestion, Toev. s. v. to read yathā bhaṭaŋ, the difficulty being that bhaṭa is nowhere found as v. l. of bhata in this phrase; nor that bhaṭa occurs in the meaning of "reward." -- There is a strong likelihood of (ā)bhata resembling āhata (āhaṭa?) in meaning "as brought," on account of, cp. It context and reading at S iv.325; still the phrase remains not sufficiently cleared up. -- Seidenstūcker's trsln has been referred to above (under haritvā) as unbefitting. -- The suspicion of yathābhataŋ being a veiled (corrupted) yathābhūtaŋ has presented itself to us before (see vol. I. under ābhata). The meaning may suggest something like the latter, in as far as "in truth," "surely" is not far off the point. Anyhow we shall have to settle on a meaning like "according to merit," without being able to elucidate the phrase in all its details. -- There is another yathābhataŋ in passage . . . ussavo hoti, yathābhataŋ lasuṇaŋ parikkhayaŋ agamāsi "the garlic diminished as soon as it was brought" Vin iv.258. Here ābhata stands in rel. to harāpeti (to have it fetched & brought) and is clearly pp. of ābharati. -- bhucca as is the case, i. e. as one might expect, evident, real, in conformity with the truth D i.12; ii.222; Miln 183, 351; Th 2, 159 (=yathābhūtaŋ ThA 142); PvA 30, 31 (˚guṇā). -- bhutta see bhutta. -- bhūta(ŋ) in reality, in truth, really, definitely, absolutely; as ought to be, truthfully, in its real essence. Very freq. in var. combnns which see collected & classified as regards Saŋyutta & Anguttara -- Nikāyas in Index vols to these texts. E. g. S iv.195 (vacanaŋ, Ep. of Nibbāna); v.440 (abhisamaya); Sn 194, 202, 653; Dh 203; PvA 215 (guṇa). yathābhūtaŋ pajānāti he knows as an absolute truth or in reality D i.83, 162; S iv.188; v.304 & passim; ditto yathābhūtaŋ jānāti passati Ps ii.62. Similarly with noun: yathābhūta -- ñāṇa absolute knowledge S v.144; Ps ii.63= Vism 605 (+sammādassana); Vism 438, 629, 695; VbhA 459 (=maggañāṇa); also as ˚ñāṇa -- dassana in same meaning: A iii.19, 200; iv.99, 336; v.2 sq., 311 sq.; Ps i.33, 43 sq.; ii.11 sq.; Nett 29. -- mano according to (his) mind Sn 829; Nd1 170 (expld as nom.=yathācitto, yathāsankappo, yathāviññāṇo). -- ruciŋ according to pleasure or liking Mhvs 4, 43 (ruci T.; ruciŋ v. l.; thus generally in Mhvs.); 5, 230 (˚ruci); 22, 58 (˚ruci). -- vādin as speaking, as he speaks (followed by tathā -- kārin so doing) D ii.224, 229; Sn 357; It 122. -- vidhi(ŋ) duly, fitly Mhvs 10, 79. -- vihita as appointed or arranged Mhvs 10, 93. -- vuḍḍhaŋ according to seniority Vin ii.221; Mhbv 90 (T. reads ˚buḍḍhaŋ). -- vutta(ŋ) as is said, i. e. as mentioned, aforesaid, of this kind Mhvs 34, 57; PvA 45, 116 (˚o puggalo). -- saka(ŋ) each his own, according to his (or her) own, respective(ly) Vism 525; SnA 8, 9; VvA 7; Mhvs 5, 230 (here simply "their own"). -- sata saintly (?), mindful Th 1, 981 (cp. yathā cārin & Brethren p. 342). -- satti(ŋ) according to one's power S iv.348 (+yathābalaŋ); DhA i.107 (v. l. for ˚balaŋ); Sdhp 97. -- satthaŋ according to the precepts, as law ordains M iii.10 (perhaps an error for yathāsaddha? ). -- saddhaŋ acc. to faith, as is one's faith Dh 249. -- santhatika accepting whatever seat is offered D i.167; A iii.220; Pug 69; Th 1, 855 -- ˚anga one of the 13 dhutangas Miln 342, 359; Vism 61, 78. -- sukhaŋ according to ease, at ease, at will Th 1, 77; Dh 326. -- 550 -- Yathātaŋ
Yathātaŋ
(adv.) [yathā+taŋ] as it is, as, as if Vin iii.5; S i.124; M i.253. The spelling in our books is yathā taŋ (in two words). Yathāva
Yathāva
(adj.) [der. fr. yathā, as yathā+vant, after analogy of yāvant, but following the a -- decl., cp. Epic Sk. yathāvat] having the character of being in accordance with (the truth or the occasion), real, true, just It 44 (santaŋ paṇītaŋ yathāvaŋ, nt.); Th 1, 188, 422 (˚āloka -- dassana seeing the real light); Miln 171 (˚lakkhaṇa true characteristics); Vism 588 (as yāthāvasarasa), 639 (id.). -- abl. yathāvato (also found as yāthāvato, probably more correctly, being felt as a der. fr. yathā) according to fitness, fitfully, duly, truly, sufficiently PvA 60 (so read for yathā vato), 128 (all MSS. yāthāvato!); ThA 256 (yā˚; the expln given by Morris, J.P.T.S. 1889, 208 is not correct). Yathāvaka
Yathāvaka
(adj.) [fr. yathāva] being according to reality or sufficiency, essential, true, real, sufficient Th 1, 347; VbhA 409 (˚vatthu, referring to the "māna" -- division of the Khuddaka -- vatthu Vbh 353 sq., cp. Nd2 505≈) Should we read yāthāvaka˚? Yad, Yadidaŋ
Yad,
Yad -- idaŋ etc., see ya˚ 4b. Yadā
Yadā
(adv.) [Vedic yadā; old instr. of ya˚] when Sn 200 (y. ca so mato seti), 681, 696 (here as yada, expld as yadā), 923; Dh 28, 69, 277 sq., 325, 384, 390; It 77 (y devo devakāyā cavati); PvA 54, 67. Cp. kadā & tadā. Yadi
Yadi
(indecl.) [adv. formation, orig. loc., fr. ya˚; cp. Vedic yadi] 1. as conjunction: if; constructed either with pres. indic., as: Sn 189; "yadi bodhiŋ pattuŋ icchasi" J i.24 (v. 167); "yadi dāyako dānaŋ deti . . . etaŋ bījaŋ hoti" PvA 8; or pot.; or with a participle, as: "yadi evaŋ sante" that being so, if this is so D i.61; "gahito yadi sīho te" if the lion is caught by you Mhvs 6, 27. -- With other particles, e. g. yādi āsanamattaŋ pi even if only a seat VvA 39; yadi . . . atha kasmā if . . . how then Miln 4. yadi evaŋ . . . (tu) even if . . . yet (but) PvA 63 (y. e. pitā na rodati, mātu nāma hadayaŋ mudukaŋ). -- yadi va "or" (cp. Vedic yadi vā "or be it that") Dh 195 ( = yadi vā athavā DhA iii.252). So yadi vā at J i.18 (v. 97: latā vā yadi vā rukkhā etc. Sn 119 (gāme vā yadi vâraññe). -- 2. as a strong particle of exhortation: yadi evaŋ if so, in that case, let it be that, alright, now then PvA 54 (y. e. yaŋ mayhaŋ desitaŋ ekassa bhikkhuno dehi), 217 (y. e. yāvadatthaŋ gaṇhāhi: take as much as you like). Yanta
Yanta
(nt.) [Vedic yantra, a kind of n. ag. formation fr. yam to hold by means of a string or bridle, etc. Idg. *em & *i̯em, as in Lat. emo to take & red -- imio.] a means for holding, contrivance, artifice, instrument, machine, mechanism; fig. instrumentality (as perhaps in, kamma˚ at Th passages). -- Referring to the machinery (outfit) of a ship (as oars, helm, etc.) J iv.163 (sabbayant' ûpapanna = piy' -- ârittā etc. C.); Miln 379. To mechanism in general (mechanical force) J v.333 (˚vegena=with the swiftness of machinery). To a sugar -- mill Miln 166; usually as ucchu -- yanta J i.25, 339 (˚yante gaṇṭhikā), cp. ucchūnaŋ yanta DhA iv.199. -- tela -- yanta ( -- cakka) (the wheel of) an oil mill J i.25. -- dāru -- yanta a wooden machine (i. e. a mechanical man with hands & feet moved by pulling of strings) DA i.197; Vism 595 (quoted as simile). -- kamma -- yanta the machinery of Kamma Th 1, 419 (i. e. its instrumentality, not, as trsln "car"; cp. Brethren 217: "it breaks in pieces K's living car," evidently influenced by C. expln "attabhāva -- yanta"), 574 (similarly: see discussed under yantita). Note. yantāni at Nd2 529 (on Sn 48 sanghaṭṭa -- yantām) is expld as "dhuvarāni." The spelling & meaning of the latter is not clear. It must refer to bracelets. -> Cp. SnA 96 valayāni.

-- ākaḍḍhana pulling the machine Vism 258 = VbhA 241. -- cakkha -- yaṭṭhi the stick of the wheel of a (sugar -- ) mill VbhA 60. -- nāḷi a mechanical tube DhA iii.215. -- pāsāṇa an aerolite (?) J iii.258 (read ˚pāsāṇo). -- phalakāni the boards of a machine Vism 258. -- yutta combined by machinery J vi.432. -- sutta the string of a machine (or mill). Vism 258 (as ˚ka)=VbhA 241. -- hatthi a mechanical (automatic) elephant DhA i.192 (of King Caṇḍa -- pajjota; cp. the horse of Troy). Yantaka
Yantaka
(nt.) [fr. yanta] a bolt Vin ii.148 (vihārā aguttā honti . . . anujānāmi yantakaŋ sūcikan ti), cp. Vin. Texts iii.162; DA i.200 (kuñcikā+); DhA i.220 (yantakaŋ deti to put the bolt to, to lock up). Yanti
Yanti
is 3rd pl. pres. of yā: see yāti. -- Note. At D ii.269 we should combine yanti with preceding visamā & sambādhā, thus forming denom. verbs: visamāyanti "become uneven" and sambādhāyanti "become oppressed or tight." The trsln Dial ii.305 gives just the opposite by reading incorrectly. Yantita
Yantita
[pp. of yanteti] made to go, set into motion, im- pelled Th 1, 574: evâyaŋ vattati kāyo kamma -- yantena yantito "impelled by the machinery of Karma"; trsln Brethren 261 not quite to the point "carried about on Karma's car." Kern, Toev. s, v. quite out of place with "fettered, held, restrained," in analogy to his trsln of yanta id. loc. with "fetter." He may have been misled by Dhtm defn of yant as "sankocana" (see yanteti). Yanteti
Yanteti
[denom. fr. yanta. Dhtm 809 gives a root yant in meaning of "sankocane," i. e. contraction] to set into motion, to make go, impel, hurl J i.418 (sakkharaŋ anguliyā yantetvā); pp. yantita. Yannūna
Yannūna
see ya˚ 2˚. Yapana
Yapana
see yāpana. Yapeti
Yapeti
see yāpeti. Yabhati
Yabhati
[one passage in Atharva Veda; cp. Gr. oi)/fw "futuo," Lat. ibex (see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.)] to cohabit, futuere, only given as root yabh with defn "methune" at Dhtp 215 & Dhtm 308. Yama
Yama1
[fr. yam] restraint PvA 98 (+niyama). Yama
Yama2
[Vedic Yama] the ruler of the kingdom of the dead. See details in Dicty. of Names. In cpds. often in general sense of "death" or "manes," or "petā"; e. g.

-- dūta Death's messenger Sdhp 287; cp. Yamassa dūtā Vv 522 (see VvA 224), or deva -- dūta A i.138 (see under dūta), alias niraya -- pāla A i.138 and passim. -- purisa (a) = ˚dūta Dh 235 (cp. DhA iii.335); VvA 223; (b) ˚purisā Yama -- people, i. e. Petas Pv iv.38 (cp. PvA 251). -- loka the yama -- world or world of the Petas Dh 44, 45; PvA 107 & freq. -- visaya=˚loka Pv ii.82 & passim. -- sādana Y's kingdom, or the realm of the dead J vi.267, 304; vi.457, 505. -- 551 -- Yama
Yama3
(m. nt.) [Vedic yama = yama2; fr. yam in meaning "to combine," cp. Av. yə̄ma twin, Mir. emuin id.] (nt.) a pair, (m.) a twin Abhp 628. See der. yamaka. Yamaka
Yamaka
[fr. yama3] 1. (adj.) double, twin; only in foll. combns: ˚pāṭihāriya (& ˚hīra) the miracle of the double appearances, a miracle performed by the Buddha in Sāvatthī to refute the heretical teachers (cp. Vin iii.332, Samanta -- pāsādika; and in detail DA i.57). It consisted in the appearance of phenomena of opposite character in pairs, as e. g. streaming forth of fire & water. (Cp. Mhvs trsln 120). The miracle was repeatedly performed by the Buddha & is often referred to, e. g. at Ps i.125 (˚hīra); J i.77, 88, 193; Miln 106 (˚hīraŋ), 349 (˚hāriyaŋ); Mhvs 17, 44, 50; 30, 82; 31, 99; Dāvs i.50 (˚hīraŋ); DhA iii.213 (id.); SnA 36; Vism 390; PvA 137. -- sālā the pair of Sal willows in between of which the Buddha passed away VvA 165; PvA 212. -- 2. (adj. or m.) a twin, twin child Mhvs 6, 9 (yamake duve puttaŋ ca dhītaraŋ janesi), 37 (soḷasakkhattuŋ yamake duve duve putte janayi); DhA i.353 (same, with vijāyi). -- 3. (nt.) a pair, couple, N. of one of the Abhidhamma canonical books, also called Yamaka -- ppakaraṇa; Tikp 8. -- The Yamakasutta refers to the conversion of the bhikkhu Yamaka and is given at S iii.109 sq.; mentioned at Vism 479 & VbhA 32. The phrase yamakato sammasana at Vism 626 may mean "in pairs" (like kalāpato "in a bundle" ibid.), or may refer to the Yamaka -- sutta with its discussion of anicca, dukkha, anatta. Yamataŋ
Yamataŋ
at S i.14 (sa vītivatto yamataŋ sumedho) we should read (with Mrs. Rh. D.'s emendation K.S. p. 320) as yaŋ mataŋ (Cy.: maññanaŋ; trsl. "he rich in wisdom hath escaped beyond conceits and deemings of the errant mind"). Yamati
Yamati
[yam, given in meaning "uparame" i. e. cessa- tion, quieting at Dhtp 226 & Dhtm 322, at the latter with additional "nāse." On etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. redimio and emo: cp. yanta] to restrain, suppress, to become tranquil; only in stanza Dh 6 = Th i.275=J iii.488 as 1st pl. med. yamāmase in imper. sense: "pare ca na vijānanti mayaŋ ettha yamāmase," which is expld both at DhA i.65, Th 1 A, & J iii.489 in connection with yama,2 viz. "yamāmase: uparamāma nassāma satataŋ samitaŋ maccu -- santikaŋ gacchāmā ti na jānanti," i. e. let us go continually into the presence of death. A little further at DhA i.66 the expln of it is "bhaṇḍ'-> ādīnaŋ vuddhiyā vāyamāmā ti na vijānanti." The meaning is "to control oneself," cp. saŋyamāmase S i.209. Leop. v. Schroeder however trsls. "Und mancher Mann bedenket nicht: wir alle müssen sterben hier" (Worte der Wahrheit, p. 2.). -- yameyyātha at S i.217 is wrongly separated from the preceding vā, which ought to be read as vāyameyyātha (so K.S. i.281). Yamala
Yamala
[fr. yama3] a pair Abhp 628. -- yamalī occurs in BSk. only as a kind of dress, at Divy 276; AvŚ i.265. Yava
Yava
[Vedic yava, corn; see Zimmer, Altind. Leben 239. Cp. Gr. zea/ spelt; Lith. javaī corn; Oir. eorna barley] corn (in general), barley (in particular) Vin iv.264; S iv.220; A iv.169.

-- karaṇa the preparation of corn A iv.169. -- kalāpī (or ˚inī) a sheaf of barley S iv.201. -- kāraṇḍava chaff of corn (or barley) A iv.169. -- kummāsa barley -- gruel VvA 62. -- khetta corn -- field Vin iv.47, 266; VvA 294. -- dūsin spoiling the corn A iv.169. -- majjhaka lying in the midst of a corn -- field, in pācīna˚ of the c. -- f. on the E. side (+dakkhiṇa˚ S.; pacchima˚ W.; uttara˚ N.); names of 4 market -- places near Mithilā J vi.330. -- sūka the awn or beard of corn (barley) A i.8; S v.10, 48. Yavaka
Yavaka
(nt.) [yava+collect. ending ˚ka] in cpd. sāli˚ (whatever there is of) rice & corn (i. e. rice -- and cornfields C.) J iv.172. Cp. yāvaka. Yavasa
Yavasa
(nt.) [fr. yava; Vedic yavasa] grass, hay, fodder J i.338. Yasavant
Yasavant
(adj.) [cp. Vedic yaśasvat] famous, having renown A ii.64 (dīghāyu+). Yasassin
Yasassin
(adj.) [Vedic yaśasvin] glorious, famous, renowned, having all endowments or comforts of life (as expld at Nd2 530: yasappatta, sakkata, lābhī etc.) D i.48 (ñāta+); A ii.34; Sn 179, 298, 343, 1117; Pv i.41; iii.117; iii.35; iii.108; Vv 159 ( = kittimant parivāravant VvA 73); DA i.143; PvA 10; Sdhp 420. -- f. yasassinī shining, resplendent J v.64. Yasassimant
Yasassimant
(adj.) [double adj. ending; yasas+vin+ mant] splendid, glorious, full of splendour J v.63 (pāvako yasassimā = teja -- sampattiyā yassassinīhi accīhi yutto C.). Yaso & Yasa
Yaso
& Yasa (nt.) [Vedic yaśaḥ (nt.). The word follows the a˚ declension, but preserves & favours the instr. yasasā after the s˚ decl. (like mano, ceto etc,), e. g. at J i.134. -- In the nom. & acc. sg. both forms yaso & yasa(ŋ) occur; in cpds. the form yasa˚ is the usual; yaso as masc. is found at Sn 438] glory, fame, repute, success, high position. On term as used with ref. to the brahmin see Fick, Sociale Gliederung 128, 129 -> The prevailing idea of Dhammapāla is that yaso consists of a great retinue, & company of servants, followers etc. This idea is already to be found at D i.118 = 126 where y. is founded on parisā (cp. DA i.143 on D i.48; DA i.298: yasasā ti āṇā -- ṭhapana -- samatthatāya). See e. g. VvA 122 (yaso=parivāra); PvA 137 (yasasā= mahati parivāra -- sampattiyā); cp. J i.134 (rājā mahantena yasena uppanaŋ gacchati). -- D i.137 (as quality of a king); iii.260, 286; J iv.275 sq. (dibba y. as one of the 10 qualities of greatness, viz. divine duration of life, complexion, happiness, fame, power, and the 5 sense -- objects rūpa, sadda, gandha, rasa, phoṭṭhabba. The same 10 are found at Pv ii.958, 59); A i.15; ii.32, 66, 188; iii.31, 47 sq.; iv.95, 195 sq.; Dh 24, 303 (+bhoga); Th 1, 554; Nd1 147; Pv iii.35 (=dev' iddhi PvA 189); Vv 291; J i.134; vi.468; Miln 291 (bhoga+); Vism 393; Sdhp 306, 518. -- yasaŋ deti to give credit J i.180. mahā -- yaso great fame J i.46 (v. 266), cp. yas -- agga the highest (of) fame J i.51, where coupled with lābh -- agga the greatest gain. The latter combn is stereotype in the Niddesa (see e. g. Nd2 55), where the 4 worldly ideals are given in sequence lābha, yaso, pasaŋsā, sukha. -- With kitti we find yaso at Sn 817 (see defn & exegesis at Nd1 147). -- Opp. ayasa D iii.260, 286; A ii.188; iv.157 sq.

-- dāyika giving (or a giver of) repute J vi.285. -- mada pride of fame VbhA 467. -- mahatta greatness of fame Vism 233. -- lābha the gain of fame J iii.516 (+dhanalābha). Yahiŋ
Yahiŋ
(adv.) [after kuhiŋ] where, wherever Mhvs 15, 209 (corresp. to yattha in v. 210). Yāga
Yāga
[fr. yaj, *Sk. yāga, cp. yañña & yaja] 1. a (brah- manic) sacrifice, known otherwise as mahāyāga (or pl. ˚yāgā), and consisting of the 4: assamedha, purisamedha, sammāpāsa, vāja -- peyya. Thus mentioned at S i.76 & Sn 303. -- 2. In Buddhistic sense: gift, alms-giving, charity; expense or expenditure of giving (almost syn. with cāga) A i.91 (here given in line with dāna & cāga, with distinction of āmisa˚ & dhamma˚, i. e. the material sacrifice, as under 1, and the spiritual sacrifice or help); with the same contrast of ā˚ & dh.˚ at D iii.155; It 98, 102; J v.57, 65; DhA i.27. -- J iv.66 (sahassena yāgaŋ yajanto); Miln 21 (dhamma˚); VvA 155; PvA 135 (mahā˚ -- saññita yañña), 136 (mahā˚). -- suyiṭṭha yāga sampadā "well -- given is the perfection of charity" ThA 40 (Ap. v. 7) = 230 (id.).

-- piṇḍa the sacrificial oblation consisting in a ball of meat or flour (cp. piṇḍa -- pitṛ -- yajña) J vi.522 (with v. l. yāgu˚). -- 552 -- Yāgin
Yāgin
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. yāga] sacrificing, giving, spending S i.19 = J iv.66 (sahassa˚ giving the worth of a thousand pieces). Yāgu
Yāgu
(f.) [cp. Vedic yavāgū; on form see Geiger, P.Gr. § 274] rice -- gruel, rice -- milk (to drink). See Vin. Texts ii.89. -> Vin i.46 = ii.223 (sace yāgu hoti, bhājanaŋ dhovitvā yāgu upanametabbā; yāguŋ pītassa udakaŋ datvā . . .), 51 (id.), 61 (id.), 84, 210 (Bhagavato udara -- vāt -- ābādho tekaṭulāya yāguyā dhuva -- yāguŋ dātuŋ; i. e. a constant supply of rice -- gruel), 339 (na mayaŋ iminā bhikkhunā saddhiŋ yāgupāne nisīdissāma); iv.311; A iii.250 (ānisaŋsā: 5 good qualities: it is good for hunger, for thirst, allays wind, cleans the bladder, helps to digest any undigested food); J i.186; ii.128 (for drink); PvA 12, 23, 274. -- Often combd (and eaten) with cakes (khajjaka) & other soft food (bhojja), e. g. yāgukhajjaka J i.270; iii.20; DhA iv.20; Mhvs 14, 55 (˚khajja -- bhojja); 36, 100 (+khajja -- bhojja).

-- pāna a drink of rice -- milk Vin i.84. -- piṇḍa see yāga˚. -- bhājaka one who distributes the rice -- gruel Vin ii.176 (pañcah' angehi samannāgataŋ; together with cīvarabhājaka, phala -- bhājaka & khajja -- bhājaka); iv.38 (yāgu˚, phala˚, khajja˚), 155 (id.); A iii.275. Yāca
Yāca
(nt.) [fr. yāc] anything asked for, donation, alms, begging J iii.353; v.233, 234.

-- yoga (y.+*yogga; perhaps yāja˚ the original. The variant yājayoga is old & well established: cp. Vism 224) accessible to begging, one ready to comply with another's request, devoted to liberality, open -- handed. Freq. in ster. phrase mutta -- cāga payata -- pāṇī vossaggarata yāca -- yoga dāna -- saŋvibhāga -- rata to denote great love of liberality, e. g. at A i.226; ii.66; iii.313. See also A iii.53, 313 = Vism 223, 224 (where expld as follows: yaŋ yaŋ pare yācanti tassa tassa dānato yācanayogo ti attho; yājayogo ti pi pāṭho; yājana -- sankhātena yājena yutto ti attho); A iv.6, 266 sq., 271, 284; v.331, 336; Sn p. 87 (cp. expln SnA 414: "yācituŋ yutto, yo hi yācake disvā bhakuṭiŋ katvā pharusavacan' ādīni bhanati, so na yācayogo hoti" etc.); Sn 487, 488, 489, 509; J iii.307 (expld in C. as "yaŋ yaŋ āgantukā yācanti tassa tassa yutto anucchaviko bhavitvā, sabbaŋ tehi yācita -- yācitaŋ dadamāno ti attho"); iv.274 ("yācitabba -- yuttaka" C.); vi.98 (=yācana -- yuttaka or yañña -- yuttaka; "ubhayath' âpi dāyakass' ev' etaŋ nāma" C.); Miln 215, 225. -- The form yājayoga at Sn 1046 (expld at Nd2 531 as "yāje yutta"); and mentioned at Vism 224 (see above). -> On diff. meaning of yācayoga see Kern, Toev. s. v. with unidentified ref. Cp. also Mvyut. 140, 4. Yācaka
Yācaka
(adj. n.) [fr. yāca, cp. Epic & later Sk. yācaka] requesting, one who begs, a recipient of alms, a beggar J iii.353; Pv ii.938; PvA 78, 102 ( = yācanaka); Sdhp 324, 331. Freq. in combn with similar terms of wayfaring people in phrase samaṇa -- brāhmaṇa -- kapaṇ' iddhika -- vaṇibbaka -- yācakā e. g. at D i.137; It 64. See single terms. -- yācaka at Sn 618 (as Fick, Soc.Gliederung 144 quotes yācaka) is to be read yājaka. Yācati
Yācati
[Vedic yācati; yāc, with which cp. Lat. jocus (dial. juca "prayer"); Ohg. jehan to confess, etc.: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. jocus. -- Dhtp (38) only expls yāca = yācane] to beg, ask for, entreat Vin iv.129 (pabbajjaŋ); Sn 566, 980, 983; J iii.49, 353; v.233, 404. -- aor. 3rd pl. yāciŋsu PvA 13, 20, 42; ayācisuŋ Mhvs 33, 76 (v. l. ayācayuŋ). -- inf. yācituŋ PvA 29, 120. -- ger. yāciya Sn 295; yācitvā M i.365; yācitvāna Mhvs 17, 58. -> pp. yācita. Yācana
Yācana
(dt.) [fr. yāc] begging, asking, entreaty J iii.353; SnA 161 (inghā ti yācan' atthe nipāto) 551 (id.); PvA 113 ( = sādhuka).

-- jīvāna living by begging J iii.353. Yācanaka
Yācanaka
[cp. BSk. yācanaka Divy 470, 585] = yācaka A iii.136 (ati˚); Pv ii.76; 916; 946; J iii.49; DA i.298. Yācanā
Yācanā
(f.) = yācana; J iii.354=Miln 230; J v.233, 404. Yācita
Yācita
[pp. of yācati] begged, entreated, asked (for) A iii.33; Dh 224; J iii.307; PvA 39. -- Cp. yācitaka. Yācitaka
Yācitaka
(adj.) [yācita+diminutive (disparaging) ending ˚ka] asked, begged, borrowed M i.365 (˚ŋ bhogaŋ); J iv.358 = vi.127 (˚ŋ yānaŋ and ˚ŋ dhanaŋ, alluding to M i.365 -- 366), with expln J iv.358: "yaŋ parena dinnattā labbhati taŋ yācita -- sadisam eva hoti." -- (nt.) anything borrowed, borrowed goods: yācitak' ûpamā kāmā (in app' assādā kāmā passage) "the pleasures of the senses are like borrowed goods" Vin ii.25=M i.130= A iii.97=Th 2, 490=Nd2 71 (correct yācitan'); expld in detail at M i.365. -- See also DhA i.403 (ye y. gahetvā na paṭidenti); ThA 288 (kāmā=yācitaka -- bhaṇḍasadisā tāvakālik' aṭṭhena). Yāja
Yāja
[fr. yaj; cp. yāja & yājeti] sacrificing, giving alms, liberality (felt as synonymous with cāga, thus influenced by tyaj, cp. Sk. tyājana): see yācayoga; -- Nd2 531 (yāye yutta); Vism 224. Yājaka
Yājaka
(adj.) [fr. yaj in its Caus. form yājeti] sacrificing, one who sacrifices, a priest Sn 312, 313 ( = yanna -- yājino janā SnA 324), 618 (of a purohita; v. l. BB yācaka). Yājana
Yājana
(nt) = yāja; Vism 224: see yācayoga. Yājin
Yājin
(adj.) [fr. yāja] sacrificing SnA 324 (yañña˚). Yājetar
Yājetar
[n. ag. to yājeti] one who superintends a sacrifice or causes it to be performed D i.143. Yājeti
Yājeti
[Caus. I. of yajati] to cause to sacrifice, to make a priest give an offering (to the gods or otherwise) J vi.211, 215; ppr. yājento M i.404; Pot. 2nd sg. yājeyya J iii.515; 3rd pl. yājeyyuŋ J vi.215 (aññaŋ brāhmaṇaŋ); also yājayeyyuŋ J vi.211. -- ger. yājetvā D i.143. Yāta
Yāta
[pp. of yāti] going, gone, proceeded; habit, custom; only in cpd. yāt'ânuyāyin going on according to what (or as it) has gone, i. e. following old habits J vi.309, 310; expld by C. as "pubba -- kārinā yātassa puggalassa anuyāyī, paṭhamaŋ karonto yāti nāma pacchā karonto anuyāyati." The usual Sk. phrase is gat -- ânugatika. Cp. yātrā, yānikata. Yāti
Yāti
[Vedic yāti, or yā, which represents Idg *i̯ā, an amplified *ē as in eti (q. v.). Cp. Lat. janua door & the Np. Janus ( = January); Lith. jóti to ride, Mir. āth ford. -- The Dhtp 368 expls yā more in appld meaning as "papuṇane," cp. Dhtm 596: pāpuṇe] to go, go on, to proceed, to go away; -- pres. 1st yāmi Pv ii.88 (=gacchāmi PvA 107), Mhvs 10, 3; 2nd yāsi J i.291; Mhvs 10, 2 (kuhiŋ yāsi?); 3rd yāti Sn 720 (tuṇhī y. mahodadhi); Dh 29, 179, 294, 295; J vi.311; Mhvs 5, 47; DhA i.18; 1st pl. yāma Mhvs 6, 12 (kiŋ na y., v. l. kiŋ nu y.); 2nd yātha=imper.; 3rd yanti Sn 179, 578, 714; Dh 126, 175, 225 (see also note s. v. yanti); Pv ii.916 (=gacchanti PvA 120). -- imper. 2nd sg. yāhi Pv ii.16 (read yajāhi?); Mhvs 13, 15; 3rd sg. yātu Mhvs 29, 17; 2nd pl. yātha Mhvs 14, 29; DhA i.93. -> ppr. yanto Mhvs 36, 60 (pacchā y. walking behind) gen. yantassa Mhvs 22, 57 (assavegena y.). -- inf. yātave Sn 834. -- Another formation fr. yā is yāyati (see Geiger, P.Gr. § 138), in an intensive meaning of "to drive, to move on quickly or by special means," e. g. in phrase yānena yāyati to drive in a carriage Vin i.191 (Pot. yāyeyya); ii.276; Sn 654 (ppr.: rathass' āṇī va yāyato) 418 (ger.: yānabhūmiŋ yāyitvā yānā oruyha); J vi.125. As "march" at J vi.449. In special meaning "to drive," i. e. "to be driven or affected by" in expln of the ending of ppr. med kāma-> yamāne Sn 767 (or kāma -- yāna) at Nd1 4, viz. "taṇhāya yāyati niyyati vuyhati saŋhariyati." Cp. yāna as ending. -- pp. yāta. Caus. yapeti & yāpeti (q. v.). -> See also anupari˚, ā˚, upa˚, uy˚, pa˚ (aor. pāyāsi) paccuy˚, pari˚; and anuyāyati. -- 553 -- Yātrā
Yātrā
(f.) [fr. yā, Class. Sk. yātrā, a n. ag. formation like nettī, meaning something like "vehicle," that which keeps going] 1. travel, going on, proceeding, good habit (like yāta; cp. yātrā = anuvṛtti Halāyudha 5, 33) S i.33; S i.16=63 (trsln K.S., perhaps wrongly, "egress": it is more a question of going on through life!). Perhaps to be classed under foll. meaning as well. -- 2. going on, livelihood, support of life, maintenance in stock phrase occurring at many places of the Canon, viz. "purāṇaŋ vedanaŋ paṭihankhāmi, navañ ca vedanaŋ na uppādessāmi, yātrā ca me bhavissati etc." where DhsA 404 explains yātrā by yāpanā, as may be inferred also from context. Thus at M i.10 (where Neumann translates: "ein Fortkommen haben," i. e. progress), 355; S iv.104; A ii.40; iii.388; Nd1 496; Nd2 540 (correct devanaŋ into vedanaŋ!); Pug 25; Dhs 1348; Miln 367: all passages identical. The whole passage is expld in detail at Vism 31 sq. where yātrā is given with "cira -- kāla -- gamana -- sankhātā yātrā," Bdhgh. thus taking it as "keeping going," or "continued subsistence" (longevity trsḷn). -- In one other passage yātrā is conjectured for sātrā, viz. at SnA 322 in reading y. -- yāga for sātrā yāga, where meaning y. might be taken as "customary." The ed. compares Sk. yātsattra, a certain ceremony. Yāthāva
Yāthāva
(adj.) [see yathāva. It is a combn of a guṇa- der. fr. yathā and an adj. -- der. of ˚vant] sufficient (lit. "just as much"; i. e. such as it is), sufficiently founded, logical, consistent, exact, definite, true Nd2 275 (where tatha is expld by taccha, bhūta, yāthāva, aviparīta); DhsA 248 (where micchā -- diṭṭhi is expld as incorrect or illogical view. -- yāthāvato (abl.) exactly, truly, consistently DA i.65; ThA 256; VvA 232. See also yathāvato. -- The nearest synonyms of yāthāva are aviparīta (i. e. definite) and yathābhūtaŋ. See also yathāva and yathāvaka.

-- nāma having the name of exactitude PvA 231 (+aviparīta -- nāma). -- māna pride of sufficiency or consistency VbhA 487 sq. (and a˚). -- lakkhaṇa possessing the characteristic of definiteness or logic Miln 171; Nett 27 (where avijjā is called "sabba dhammayāthāva -- asampaṭivedha -- lakkhaṇā"). -- vacana exact, logical or true speech Miln 214 (taccha -- vacana, yāthāvav. , aviparīta -- v.). -- sarasa logical and with its essential (sa+rasa) properties Vism 588, 639. Yādicchakaŋ
Yādicchakaŋ
at VvA 341 read as yadicchakaŋ (see ya˚). Yādisa
Yādisa
(adj.) [Vedic yādṛś & yādṛsa, yad+dṛśa] which like, what like, whichever, how much; in neg. sentence: any, whatever little. -- Pv. ii.119 ( = yāva mahanto PvA 77). -- Often combd with kīdisa in meaning "any one, this or that, whoever," e. g. Vv 5014 (=yo vā so vā pacura -- jano ti attho VvA 213). As adj.: yādisi (sic!=Sk. yādṛśī) -- kīdisā jīvikā (no livelihood, whatever little) J vi.584 (v.728; Trenckner, Miln p. 423 gives v. 732!), expld by C as "yā vā sā vā, lāmakā ti attho"; yādisaŋ kīdisaŋ dānaŋ a gift of whatever kind Miln 278. So also with tādisa: yādisā vā tādisā vā (viz. kāmā) of whichever kind A iii.5. Yādisaka
Yādisaka
= yādisa; in correlation (generalising sense) yādisaka -- tādisaka whatsoever . . . such, any whatsoever A iv.308; S v.96. Yāna
Yāna
(nt.) [fr. yā, as in yāti. Cp. Vedic yāna and Lat. Janus] 1. going, proceeding J vi.415 (+ayāna, opposed to ṭhāna). -- 2. means of motion, carriage, vehicle. Different kinds of carriages are enumd at Nd1 145 (on Sn 816) with hatthi˚ (elephant -- ), go˚ (cow -- ), aja˚ (goat -- ), meṇḍaka˚ (ram -- ), oṭṭha˚ (camel -- ?), khara˚ (donkey -- ). Cp. Miln 276. -- yāna is one of the requisites (carriage or other means of locomotion) of the bhikkhu & as such included in the deyya -- dhamma or 14 gifts (see yañña & deyya -- dh.). Thus mentioned with anna pāna vattha etc. at S i.94; A ii.85; Pug 51. -- Cp. the defn & application of the term yāna as given below under yāna -- sannidhi. -- See e. g. the foll. passages: Vin i.191 (bhikkhū yānena yāyanti . . . na bhikkhave yānena yāyitabbaŋ; yo yāyeyya etc.: here a "carriage" is expressly forbidden to the bhikkhu!), 231 (Ambapālī bhadrāni -- bhadrāni yānāni yojāpetvā bhadraŋ yānaŋ abhirūhitvā . . .), 242 (same phrase with Meṇḍaka gahapati); D i.7, 89, 106; M i.366 (yānaŋ poroseyyaŋ pavara -- maṇi -- kuṇḍalaŋ, where vv. ll. on p. 561 read voropeyya and oropeyya, which Neumann (unwarrantedly) adopts in his trsln: Mittl. Sammlung2 1921, ii.666; the C. accepts reading poroseyya with expln "puris -- anucchavikaŋ yānaŋ"); Dh 323 ( = hatthiyānādīni DhA iv.6); J iii.525 sq.; v.59; vi.223 (=ratha); Kvu 599 (Erāvaṇo hatthināgo sahassa -- yuttaŋ dibbaŋ yānaŋ; trsld as "the wondrous elephant E., the thousand -- wise yoked celestial mount." trsl. p. 347 (lit. vehicle) Pv iii.228 (=ratha or vayha etc. PvA 186); PvA 113. -- iddhi -- yāna carriage of magic power Miln 276; deva˚ godly carriage Miln 276; applied to the 8 fold Aryan Path at Sn 139 (= devalokaŋ yāpetuŋ samatthatā . . . aṭṭha -- samāpatti -- yānaŋ SnA 184). Similarly of the Path: magg' aṭṭhangika -- yāna ( -- yāyinī) Th 2, 389 (= aṭṭhangika -- magga -- sankhāta ariya -- yāna ThA 257); and brahma -- yāna dhamma -- yāna "the very best & excellent carriage" as Ep. of magga S v.5, cp. J iv.100. Cp. the later terms mahā and hīna -- yāna. See also yānikata.

-- ugghata shaking or jolting of the carriage Vin ii.276; DhA iii.283. -- gata having ascended the carriage D i.126. -- puṭosā (˚puṭoḷī) provision bag on a carriage (provision for the journey?) Vism 328 (so read for paṭṭoli). -- bhūmi carriage -- ground, i. e. the road as far as accessible to a carriage D i.89; Sn 418. -- sannidhi storing up of carriages or means of locomotion D i.6 (with expln at DA i.82 as follows: yānaŋ nāma vayhaŋ ratho sakaṭaŋ sandamānikā patankī ti. Na pan' etaŋ pabbajitassa yānaŋ, upāhanā yānaŋ pana); Sn 924 ( = anna -- pāna -- vattha -- yāna -- sannidhi Nd1 372). -- sukha pleasures of riding and driving Kvu 209; cp. Kvu trsl. 127. Yānaka
Yānaka
(nt.) [fr. yāna] a (small) cart, carriage, waggon, vehicle J iii.49 (˚ŋ pūretvā, or a hunter's cart); iv.45; DhA i.325 (sukha˚), 391 (pakati˚, an ordinary waggon). -- ˚ŋ pājeti to drive a cart J ii.112, 143; iii.51.

-- upatthambha(na) waggon -- prop KhA 44 (˚ni v. l., see Appendix to Index Pj.); VbhA 234 (˚nika; illustrating the shape of the teeth). Yānika & Yāniya
Yānika
& Yāniya (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. yāna] 1. (lit.) leading to, conducive to, as ˚yāniya in deva˚ magga D i.215, & Brahma˚ magga the way leading to the Brahma -- world D i.220. -- 2. (in appld meaning, cp. yānikata) ˚yānika one who has become used to, whose habit it is . . ., in vipassanā˚ & samatha˚ at Vism 588. Yānikata
Yānikata
[yāna+kata, with i for a in compn with kṛ, perhaps also in analogy with bahulī -- kata] made a habit of, indulged in, acquired, mastered (cp. expln Ps i.172: "yattha yattha ākankhati tattha tattha vasippatto hoti balappatto etc."). The expression is to be compared with yatânuyāgin & yātrā, similarly to which it is used only in one stock phrase. It comes very near yātrā in meaning "that which keeps one going," i. e. an acquired & thoroughly mastered habit, an "altera natura." It is not quite to the point when Dial ii.110 (following Childers?) translate as "to use as a vehicle." -- Occurring with identical phraseology, viz. bahulīkata yāni -- kata vatthu -- kata anuṭṭhita paricita susamāraddha in application to the 4 iddhipādā at D ii.103; A iv.309; S v.260; Miln 140; to mettā at M iii.97; S i.116; ii.264; iv.200; v.259; A v.342; J ii.61; Miln 198. Expld at Ps i.172, cp. ii.122, 130. -- 554 -- Yānin
Yānin
(adj.) [fr. yāna] one who drives in a carriage J iii.525 = iv.223 (where read yānī va for yān iva). At the latter passage the C. somewhat obscurely expls as "sappi -- tela -- yānena gacchanto viya"; at iii.526 the expln is simply "yānena gacchanto viya." Yāpana
Yāpana
(& yapana) (nt.) [fr. yāpeti. Cp. Epic & Class. Sk. yāpana] keeping going, sustenance, feeding, nourishment, existence, living. Esp. in one standing combn respecting the feeding and keeping of the body "kāyassa ṭhitiyā yāpanāya etc." (for the maintenance of the body) in yātrā passage: see yātrā 2; in which it is expld at Vism 32 by "pavattiyā avicched' atthaŋ, cira -- kāla -- ṭṭhit' atthaŋ" i. e. for the preservation of life. -- Further at J i.66 (alam me ettakaŋ yāpanāya); v.387 (thokaŋ mama yāpana -- mattaŋ eva); DhA iv.210 (yāpana -- mattaŋ dhanaŋ); PvA 28. -- Used more freq. together with shortened form yapana; in standard phrase vutti pālana, yapana yāpana cāra (cp. yapeti) at Vism 145; DhsA 149, 167. Or similarly as f. with spelling yapanā & yāpanā: yapanā yāpanā iriyanā vattanā pālanā at Dhs 19, 82, 295, 380, 441, 716. At DhsA 404 yāpanā is used as syn. of yātrā. Yāpanīya
Yāpanīya
(adj.) [grd. formation fr. yāpeti] fit or sufficient for supporting one's life Vin i.59, 212, 253. -- Cp. BSk. yāpanīyatara a more healthy state Divy 110. Yāpeti
Yāpeti
(& yapeti) [Caus. of yāti] 1. (lit.) -- (a) in caus.- intensive as well as intrs. sense; in the latter also with short ă as yapeti and then combd with yāpeti, in stock phrase defining carati "to go," "to be" (or viharati) with synonyms iriyati vattati pāleti yapeti yāpeti at Nd2 237; Vbh 252; DhsA 167. Besides singly (yapeti) at DhsA 149. -- (b) to cause to go, to make someone go (to), to bring to, lead to (acc.) J vi.458 (sasenāvāhanaŋ yāpesi); SnA 184 (devalokaŋ yāpetuŋ samattha fit to bring one to the d -- world). -- (c) to get on, move, to be active DhA i.10 (sarīre yāpente); iv.17 (iriyāpathena). -- 2. (fig.) to keep going (both trs. & intrs.), to keep up, esp. to keep oneself going or alive, to live by (instr.) [cp. BSk. yāpayati Divy 93, 150, 196, 292, 293, 471, 488, AvŚ i.209] D i.166 (ekissā dattiyā on only one alms); Pug 56; J ii.204; iii.67; iv.125; vi.532 (uñchena); Pv i.57 (ito dinnena yāpenti petā); i.117; iii.28 (tava dinnena yāpessanti kurūrino); PvA 27, 29 ( = attabhāvaŋ yāpeti=upajīvati). Yāpya
Yāpya
(adj.) [shortened grd. -- formation for yāpanīya. *Sk. yāpya in slightly diff. meaning] 1. (lit.) fit for movement or locomotion: in ˚yāna sedan -- chair, palanquin Abhp. 373. -- 2. (fig.) concerning the preservation of life, vital, in ˚rogin one who suffers from a vital disease, lit. a disease concerning the upkeep of the body Vism 33 (trsln Path of Purity 39: "patient of long -- suffering," from a different point of view, viz. of time only, like Bdhgh.). Yāma
Yāma
[fr. yam in both meanings of yamati & yama3] 1. restraint, only as cpd. cātu -- yāma 4 -- fold restraint D i.57; iii.48; S i.66; M i.377; Vism 416. Cp. Dial. i.751. -- 2. a watch of the night. There are 3 watches, given as paṭhama, majjhima & pacchima (first, middle & last) Nd1 377 sq.; or purima, m. & pacchima Nd2 631 (under sadā). -- A i.114; iv.168; Dh 157 (one of the 3; interpreted as the 3 vayas at DhA iii.138); J i.243 (tīsu yāmesu ekasmiŋ yāme); Mhvs 21, 33; PvA 217, 280. -- 3. (usually pl. Yāmā devā) one who belongs to Yama or the ruler of the Underworld; a subject of Yama; the realm of Yama; -- pl. inhabitants of Yamaloka A i.210 (yāmā devā); SnA 244 (˚bhavana the abode of the Y.); KhA 166 (Yāmato yāva Akaniṭṭhaŋ from the Underworld to the Highest Heaven); Vism 225 (Yāmā); VbhA 519 (Yāmā); VvA 246 (id.); ThA 169 (Y. devā).

-- kālika of a restricted time, for a (relatively) short period (lit.) only for one watch of the night, but longer than yāva -- kālika temporary. It is one of the three regulation -- terms for specified food, viz. y. -- k., sattāhakālika & yāvajīvika, or short period, of a week's duration, and life -- long food Vin iv.83, 86, 176, 311; to which is added yāva -- kālika, temporary at Vin i.251 (where mutual relations of the 4 are discussed). -- gaṇḍika(ŋ) koṭṭeti to beat the block of restraint (?), i. e. exercise self -- control (?) (or does it belong to yāma 3?) KhA 233. Yāyati
Yāyati
see yāti. Yāyin
Yāyin
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. yā, see yāti] going, going on to; in yāna -- yāyinī (f.) Th 2, 389 (maggaṭṭhangika˚ having ascended the carriage of the 8 -- fold Path; expld by "ariya -- yāyena nibbāna -- puraŋ yāyinī upagatā" ThA 257). Yāva
Yāva
(adv.) [Vedic yāvat as nt. of yāvant used as adv. in meanings 1 & 2. The final t is lost in Pāli, but restored as d in certain combinations: see below 2. -- Cp. tāva & kīva]. 1 (as prep.) up to (a point), as far as, how far, so far that (cp. tāva I), both temporal and local, used either with absolute form of noun or adj. (base), or nom., or abl. or acc. -- (a) absolute: y. sahassa up to 1000. PvA 21; y. sattama up to the seventh D i.238. -> (b) nom.: y. deva -- bhava -- sampatti up to the attainment of a deva existence PvA 167; y. satta divasā up to 7 days, as long as 7 days PvA 31. (c) with abl.: y. brahmalokā up to the highest heaven A iii.17; y. mekhalā down to her girdle PvA 46; yāva āyu -- pariyosānā up to the end of life PvA 200; y. ajjadivasā till the present day Mhvs 32, 23; y. kapp' âvasānā up to the end of the world Vism 688 (where SnA 5 in same passage reads acc. ˚âvasānaŋ); y. kāla -- ppavedanā J i.118+DhA i.248; y. mukhasmā up to the brim Miln 238; yāva bhumm' âvalambare hang down to the ground Pv ii.102. -- (d) with acc. y. Bodhimaṇḍaŋ as far as the Bodhimaṇḍa Mhvs 30, 88; y. tatiyakaŋ for the 3rd time (i. e. the last time; ascending scale!) D i.95; y. tatiyaŋ id. Vin iv.236 samanubhāsitabba); Sn 1116; J iv.126. -- Freq. in phrase yāva jīvaŋ (see under cpds.). Sattamāsaŋ cha pañca cattāro ti vatvā yāva temāsaŋ yāciŋsu "after having said 7, 6, 5, 4, months they begged down to 3 months" PvA 20. -- With startingpoint, local: pādatalato . . . yāvakesaggaŋ from the sole of the foot to the tip of the hair ("from tip to toe") DhA i.70; (in modal sense:) paṭhavī -- kasiṇato paṭṭhāya yāva odāta -- kasiṇaŋ "from the one to the other" Vism 374. Similarly in correlation yāva -- tāva (see tāva 1.) as far -- so far, until -- so long: y. rājā āgacchati tāva ubho ramissāma J iv.190; heṭṭhā pi yāva Avīci upari yāva Akaniṭṭha -- bhavanaŋ, tāva addasa Vism 392; yāva naŋ ānemi tāva idh' eva tiṭṭha DhA iii.194. -- 2. (as adv.) how, how much, to which or what extent, as great or as much (as) (cp. tāva ii.2), usually in combn yāva mahā (mahantaŋ), e. g. yāva mahantaŋ how big PvA 77 ( = yādisaŋ of Pv ii.119); VvA 325=DhA i.29 (yāva mahantaŋ). Also in other combns, like yāva dukkhā nirayā how (or as) many painful purgatories Sn 678; yāva dukkhā tiracchānayoni M iii.169; yāva pāpo ayaŋ Devadatto alakkhiko . . . "how very wicked is this D." Vin ii.196 Further in combn with attha(ŋ), and eva, in which cases the final d is restored, or may be regarded as euphonic. Thus yāvad -- atthaŋ as far as need be, as much as you like (with imper.) Pv iv.57 (khādassu y.); UbhA 504 (=yattakaŋ icchati tattakaŋ); J v.338; PvA 217 (gaṇhāhi). Cp. Vin iii.37 (yāvadatthaŋ katvā "pleasing herself"). -- As adj. sufficient, plenty M i.12 (paripuṇṇa . . . suhita y.); PvA 24 (=pahūta). yāvad -- eva [cp. the similar tāva -- d. -- eva] "as much as it is (in extent)" i. e. with limitation as far as is necessary, up to (i. e. not further or more than), ever so much, as much as you like, at least; (then:) as far as, in short, altogether, indeed. -- The same idea as our defn is conveyed by Bdhgh's at SnA 503 (on Sn p. 140) "paricched' âvadhāraṇa -- vacanaŋ," and at DhA ii.73 "avadhiparicchedana": giving a limitation, or saying up to the limit. S ii.276; Sn p. 140; Dh 72; and in stock phrase "n'eva davāya . . . yāvad eva imassa kāyassa ṭhitiyā . . ." ("in short"); see passages under yātrā. The expln of yāvad eva in this phrase as given at DhsA 403 runs: "āhār' āharaṇe payojanassa pariccheda -- niyamadassanaŋ," of which the trsln Expos. ii.512 is "so as to suffice signifies the limit of the result of taking food." Ṉeumann's trsln at M i.10 is "but only." -- Note. In the stock phrase of the Buddha's refusal to die until his teaching has been fully proclaimed (Mahāparinibbānasutta) "among gods and men" D ii.106 (=114, 219; iii.122; A iv.311) "yāva -- deva -- manussehi suppakāsitaŋ" (trsln Dial. ii.113: "until, in a word, it shall have been well proclaimed among men") we are inclined to consider the reading yāva deva˚ as original and better than yāvad -- eva, although Rhys Davids (Dial. ii.236) is in favour of the latter being the original. Cf. K.S. ii.75 n. The phrase seems to require yāva only as continuation of the preceding yāva's; moreover the spirit of the message is for the whole of the worlds Cp. BSk. yāvad -- deva manusyebhaḥ Divy 201. It is not a restriction or special definition of meaning at this passage. But may it not be taken as a summing up= "in short"? It is left doubtful. If it is=yāva, then we should expect yāva na, as in the preceding sentence, if it is yāvad eva the meaning "not more than made known by men" seems out of place; in this case the meaning "at least" is preferable. A similar case of insertion of a euphonic consonant m (or is it the a -- stem nt in ˚ŋ instead of ˚t as in yāvat?) we find in the phrase yāvam pi at J v.508 (with Pot. tiṭṭheyya; see below 3; C. expln by yattakaŋ kālaŋ). -- The form yāvade (for yāvad eva) also occurs (like tāvade for tāvad eva) at M ii.207. -- For yad -- idaŋ we find yāvañ c' idaŋ at A iii.34; M iii.169. -- The latter form (yāvaŋ, as above J v.508) is better to be grouped directly under yāvant, where more & similar cases are given. -- 3. (as conj.) so long as, whilst, until (cp. tāva ii.3, 4; iii.); either with Fut. or Pot. or Prohibitive. E.g. 'S i.202 (ahu pure dhammapadesu chando y. virāgena samāgamimha; trsln "until I met with that Pure thing and Holy"); J vi.266 (y. āmantaye); PvA 4 (tāva ayyo āgametu yāva ayaŋ puriso . . . pānīyaŋ pivissati or: "you shall wait please, until he shall drink"). Neg. yāva . . . na not until, unless, as long as not D ii.106 (na paribbāyissāmi . . . yāva . . . na bhavissati); S i.47 (y. na gādhaŋ labhati); Dh 69 (yattakaŋ kālaŋ na . . . DhA ii.50).

-- kālika (cp. tāva ii.1) "as far as the time or occasion goes," occasional, temporary, at Vin i.251 in foll. context (cp. yāmakālika): "kappati . . . yāvakālikena, yāmakālikaŋ na kappati, kappati yāvakālikena sattāha kālikaŋ na k. etc. with foll. yāvajīvikaŋ & the same with kappati yāma -- kālikena, sattāha -- kālikenana k.; kappati satt˚, yāvajīv, na k." The reply of the Buddha is: yāvakālikena yāmakālikaŋ tadahu paṭiggahitaŋ kāle kappati vikāle na kappati (same with sattāhakālikaŋ & yāvajīvikaŋ); followed by yāmakālikena . . . sattāhakālikaŋ & yāvajīvikaŋ; sattāhakālikena . . . jāvajīvikaŋ." -- jivaŋ (adv.) for the length of one's life, life -- long, all one's life, for life ( -- time) Vin i.80; ii.197; iii.23; It 78; Dh 64, 284; Vism 94; DhA i.45; PvA 76, 110 ( = satataŋ). Cp. BSk. yāvajīva -- sukhya AvŚ ii.37. -- tajjanī ( -- vinīta) led only as long as kept under a threat A i.285 (one of the 3 parisā's; so read with v.l. for T. yāvatajjhā˚). -- tatiyaka "as much as 3 times," name of the last 4 Sanghādisesa offences, because before the punishment is inflicted warning must have been given 3 times: see passage of Vin iii.186 under yāva t -- ihaŋ. -- tihaŋ (read as yāvat -- ihaŋ, the latter=aha2 day) as many days as . . .; in foll. passage: uddiṭṭhā . . . terasa sanghādisesā dhammā, nava patham -- āpattikā cattāro yāvatatiyakā, yesaŋ bhikkhu aññataraŋ vā aññataraŋ vā āpajjitvā yāvatihaŋ jānaŋ paṭicchādeti tāvatihaŋ tena bhikkhunā akāmā parivatthabbaŋ (for as many days as he knowingly conceals his sin, for so many days . . .), parivuttha -- parivāsena bhikkhunā uttariŋ chārattaŋ bhikkhumānattāya paṭipajjitabbaŋ. Vin iii.186. -- 555 -- Yāvaka
Yāvaka
[ = yavaka] a dish prepared of barley J vi.373 (=yavataṇḍula -- bhatta C.). Yāvataka
Yāvataka
(adj.) [fr. yāva, as tāvataka fr. tāva] as much as, as many as, as far as, whatever; usually in correl. with tāvataka e.g. Vin i.83 (yāvataka . . . t.); D ii.18 (y. kāyo t. vyāmo); Nd2 2353 (y ˚ŋ ñeyyaŋ t ˚ŋ ñāṇaŋ); or similarly M i.397 (y. kathā -- sallāpo . . . sabbaŋ taŋ . . .); PvA 103 (yāvatakā = yāvanto). -> f. yāvatikā: yāvatikā gati tāvatikaŋ gantvā A i.112; y. nāgassa bhūmi as far as there was ground for the elephant D i.50; similarly: y. yānassa bh. as far as the carriage -- road D i.89, 106, 108; y. ñāṇassa bh. Nett 25. Yāvatā
Yāvatā
(indecl.) [abl. of yāvant in adv. use cp. tāvatā) as far as, like as, in comparison with, regarding, because Dh 258 (na tena paṇḍito hoti y. bahu bhāsati = yattakena kāraṇena DhA iii.383), 259, 266 (similarly, C.= yattakena); Sn 759 (yāvat' atthī ti vuccati; expld at SnA 509 as "yāvatā ete cha ārammaṇā ʻ atthī ʼ ti vuccanti, vacana -- vyattayo veditabbo"); yāvatā ariyaŋ paramaŋ sīlaŋ, nâhaŋ tattha attano sama -- samaŋ samanupassāmi kuto bhiyyo "compared with this sīla I do not see anyone quite equal to myself, much less greater." D i.74 yāvatā ariyaŋ āyatanaŋ yavatā vanippatho idaŋ agga -- nagaraŋ bhavissati Pātaliputtaŋ puṭa -- bhedanaŋ Vin i.229=Ud 88=D ii.87 (concerning a most splendid site, and a condition for trade, this Pāṭ. will be the greatest town; trsln Dial. as far as Aryan people resort, as far as merchants travel . . .). yāvatā satt' āvāsā yāvatā bhavaggaŋ ete aggā ete saṭṭhā [read seṭṭhā] lokasmiŋ yad idam arahanto "as far as the abodes of beings, as far as heaven, these are the highest, these are the best, I mean the Arahants." S iii.84. yāvatā dhammā sankhatā vā asankhatā vā virāgo . . . aggam akkhāyati, yad -- idaŋ mada -- nimmadano . . . A ii.34=It 88; "of all the things definite or indefinite: passionlessness deserves the highest praise, I mean the disintoxication of pride etc." The expln at Vism 293 takes yāvatā (grammatically incorrectly) as n. pl.= yattakā. -- yāvatā jagato gati as far as (like as) the course of the world It 120. Yāvant
Yāvant
(pron. rel.) [cp. Sk. yāvant; same formation as demonstr. pron. tāvant, of which the P. uses the adv. nt. tāva (t) form more frequently than the adj. tāvant. The only case so far ascertained where tāvant occurs as adj. is J v.72 (see below)] 1. yāvant as adj.: as many (as) Dh 337 (hāvant' ettha samāgatā as many as are assembled here); J v.72 (yāvanto uda -- bindūni . . . tāvanto gaṇḍū jāyetha; C. on p. 74 expls by yattakāni; yāvatā pl. as many as Pv ii.116; yāvanto Pv ii.716 ( = yāvatakā PvA 103); J v.370 (detha vatthāni . . . yavanto eva icchati as many as he wants). -- 2. yāvat (nt.) used adverbially. The examples and meanings given here are really to be combined with those given under yāva2 (yāvad˚). It is hardly possible to distinguish clearly between the 2 categories; the t may well have been reduced to d or been replaced by another sandhi consonant. However, the specific Pāli use of yāva (like tāva) justifies a separate treatment of yāva in that form only. -- yāvat occurs only in combn with ca (where we may assume either a peculiar nt. form yāvaŋ: see yāva 2; or an assimilation of t to ñ before c. -- The form yāva mahantaŋ may originally have been a yāvaŋ m.) as yāvañ ca "and that," "i. e.," how much, however much, so great S i.149 (passa yāvañ ca te idaŋ aparaddhaŋ: see how great a mistake you have made in this); It 91, 92 (passa yāvañ ca ārakā & santike: see how far and near). yāvañ c' idaŋ stands for yad -- idaŋ (see ya˚ 4) in peculiar use of restriction at M. III.169; S ii.178; A iii.34. -- 3. The nt. form yāvat further occurs in foll. cpds.: ˚āyukaŋ (better as yāvat˚ than yāvatā˚) as long as life lasts, for a lifetime Mhvs 3, 41; VvA 196 (as adj. ˚āyukā dibba -- sampatti); PvA 66, 73, 133; ˚icchakaŋ as much as is desired, according to one's wishes Pug 12, 25; Vism 154 (here spelt yāvad -- icchakaŋ); ˚ihaŋ see under yāva (cpds.) -- instr. yavatā: see sep. -- 556 -- Yāvetadohi
Yāvetadohi
at M ii.47 is an obscure expression. The reading is established; otherwise one might think of a corrupted yāv(a) etad ahosī(pi) or yāva -- d -- ev' -- ahosi "was it really so?" or: "did you really have that thought?" Neumann, Mittl. Sammlung2 1921; ii.381, trsls "gar so sehr drängt es dich" (are you in such a hurry?), and proposes reading (on p. 686, note) yāv' etado hi pi, leaving us wondering what etado might be. -- Could it be a distorted yāyetar (n. ag. of yāyeti, Caus. yā)? Yiṭṭha
Yiṭṭha
[pp. of yajati with a petrified sandhi y.; Vedic iṣṭa] med.: having sacrificed D i.138 (mahā -- yaññaŋ y. rājā). -- pass.: sacrificed, (nt.) sacrifice D i.55 (dinna, y. huta); expld at DA i.165 by "mahāyāga" Vbh 328, (id.); J i.83 (y.+huta); iv.19 ( = yajita C.); v.49; vi.527. -- duyyiṭṭha not properly sacrificed, a sacrifice not according to rites J vi.522. In specific Buddhistic sense "given, offered as alms, spent as liberal gift" Vin i.36; J i.168=A ii.44; M i.82. Dh 108 (yaŋ kiñci yiṭṭhaŋ va hutaŋ va; DhA ii.234= yebhuyyena mangalakiriya -- divasesu dinna -- dānaŋ). -- suyiṭṭha well given or spent A ii.44; ThA 40; Vv 3426 (in both senses; VvA 155 expls "mahā -- yāga -- vasena yiṭṭhaŋ"). Yidha
Yidha
in mā yidha at Vin i.54 is to be read mā -- y -- idha, the y being an euphonic consonant (see y.). Yuga
Yuga
(nt.) [fr. yuj; Vedic yuga (to which also yoga) = Gr. zugo/n; Lat. jugum= Goth. juk; Ohg. juh; E. yoke; Lith. jungas] 1. the yoke of a plough (usually) or a carriage DhA i.24 (yugaŋ gīvaŋ bādhati presses on the neck); PvA 127 (ratha˚); Sdhp 468 (of a carriage). Also at Sn 834 in phrase dhonena yugaŋ samāgamā which Bdhgh. (SnA 542) expls as "dhuta -- kilesena buddhena saddhiŋ yugaggāhaŋ samāpanno," i. e. having attained mastery together with the pure Buddha. Neumann, Sn trsln not exactly: "weil abgeschüttelt ist das Joch" (but dhona means "pure"). See also below ˚nangala. -- 2. (what is yoked or fits under one yoke) a pair, couple; appld to objects, as -- ˚: dussa˚ a pair of robes S v.71.; DhA iv.11; PvA 53; sāṭaka˚ id. J i.8, 9; PvA 46; vattha˚ id. J iv.172. -- tapassi˚ a pair of ascetics Vv 2210; dūta˚ a pair of messengers S iv.194; sāvaka˚ of disciples D ii.4; S i.155; ii.191; v.164; in general: purisa˚ (cattāri p. -- yugāni) (4) pairs of men S iv.272 sq.=It 88; in verse at Vv 4421 and 533; expld at Vism 219 as follows: yugaḷa -- vasena paṭhamamagga -- ṭṭho phala -- ṭṭho ti idam ekaŋ yugaḷan ti evaŋ cattāri purisa -- yugaḷāni honti. Practically the same as "aṭṭha purisa -- puggalā." Referring to "pairs of sins" (so the C.) in a somewhat doubtful passage at J i.374: sa mangala -- dosa -- vītivatto yuga -- yog' âdhigato na jātum eti; where C. expls yugā as kilesā mentioned in pairs (like kodho ca upanāho, or makkho ca paḷāso), and yoga as the 4 yojanas or yogas (oghas?), viz. kāma˚, bhava˚, diṭṭhi˚, avijjā˚. -- Also used like an adj. num. in meaning "two," e. g. yugaŋ vā nāvaŋ two boats Dpvs i.76. -- 3. (connected by descent) generation, an age D i.113 (yāva sattamā pitāmahā -- yugā "back through seven generations." Cp. DA i.281: āyuppamāṇa); KhA 141 (id.); J i.345 (purisa˚). There are also 5 ages (or stages) in the [life of the] sāsana (see Brethren, p. 339): vimutti, samādhi, sīla, suta, dāna.

-- anta ( -- vāta) (storm at) the end of an age (of men or the world), whirlwind J i.26. -- ādhāna putting the yoke on, harnessing M i.446. -- ggāha "holding the yoke," i. e. control, dominance, domineering, imperiousness; used as syn. for palāsa at Vbh 357 = Pug 19 (so read for yuddha˚), expld by sama -- dhura -- ggahaṇaŋ "taking the leadership altogether" at VbhA 492. See further Nd1 177; VvA 71 (yugaggāha -- lakkhaṇo paḷāso); SnA 542; DhA iii.57 (˚kathā= sārambhakathā). -- ˚ŋ ganhāti to take the lead, to play the usurper or lord J iii.259 (C. for T. palāsin); DhA iii.346. -- ggāhin trying to outdo somebody else, domineering, imperious VvA 140. -- cchidda the hole of a yoke Th 2, 500 (in famous simile of blind turtle). -- nangala yoke and plough (so taken by Bdhgh. at SnA 135) Sn 77= S i.172 ("plough fitted with yoke" Mrs. Rh.D.). -- nandha (with v. l. ˚naddha, e. g. at Ps ii.92 sq.; KhA 27 in T.) putting a yoke on, yoking together; as adj. congruous, harmonious; as nt. congruity, association, common cause Ps ii.98=Vism 682; Ps ii.92 sq. (˚vagga & ˚kathā); KhA 27 (nt.); Vism 149 (˚dhammā things fitting under one yoke, integral parts, constituents). -- mattaŋ (adv.) "only the distance of a plough," i. e. only a little (viz. the most necessary) distance ahead, with expressions of sight: pekkhati Sn 410 ("no more than a fathom's length" Rh.D. in Early Buddhism 32); pekkhin Miln 398; ˚dassāvin Vism 19 (okkhitta -- cakkhu+) pekkhamāna SnA 116 (as expln of okkhittacakkhu). -- sāṭaka (=s. -- yuga) a pair of robes, two robes Dpvs vi.82. Yugala & Yugaḷa
Yugala
& Yugaḷa (nt.) [Class. Sk. yugala; in relation to yuga the same as Lat. jugulum ("yoke -- bone") to jugum. Cp. also Gr. zeu/glh yoking strap] a pair, couple J i.12 (yugaḷa -- yugaḷa -- bhūtā in pairs), 500 (bāhu˚); vi.270 (thana˚ the 2 breasts); Vism 219; VbhA 51 (yugaḷato jointly, in pairs); the six "pairs of adaptabilities" or "words," Yog. 18 -- 23, Mystic 30 sq.; cp. Dhs 40 sq. Also used as adj. (like yuga) in phrase yugalaŋ karoti to couple, join, unite Dpvs i.77; VvA 233. Yugalaka
Yugalaka
(nt.) [fr. yugala] a pair Tikp 66; VbhA 73. Yuja
Yuja
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [either a direct root -- derivation fr. yuj, corresponding to Sk. yuj (or yuk, cp. Lat. con -- jux "conjugal," Gr. o(mo/ -- zuc companion, su/ -- zuc = conjux; Goth. ga -- juka companion); or a simplified form of the grd. *yujya>*yujja>yuja] yoked or to be yoked, applicable, to be studied, only in cpd. duyyuja hard to be mastered, difficult J v.368 (atthe yuñjati duyyuje he engages in a difficult matter; C. reads duyyuñja). Yujjha
Yujjha
(adj.) [grd. of yujjhati] to be fought; neg. a˚ not to be fought, invincible M ii.24 (so read for ayojjha). Yujjhati
Yujjhati
[cp. Vedic yudhyate, yudh, given in meaning "sampahāra" at Dhtp 415. -- Etymologically to Idg. *ieudh to shake, fr. which in var. meanings Lat. jubeo to command, juba horse's mane; Gr. u(smi/nh battle, Lith. jundù, jùdra whirlwind; cp. also Av. yaošti agility] to fight, make war. Rare in older literature; our refs. only from the Mahāvaŋsa; e. g. 22, 82 (fut. yujjhissāma, with instr.: Damiḷehi); 25, 23 (aor. ayujjhi); 25, 58 (ppr. yujjhamāna); 33, 41 (aor. yujjhi). To which add DhA ii.154 (mallayuddhaŋ yujjhanto); iii.259 (Ajātasattunā saddhiŋ yujjhanto). -- pp. yuddha. -- Caus. yodheti (q. v.). Yujjhana
Yujjhana
(nt.) [fr. yujjhati] fighting, making war J iii.6, 82. -- 557 -- Yujjhāpana
Yujjhāpana
(nt.) [fr. yujjhati Caus.] making somebody fight, inciting to war Miln 178. Yuñjati
Yuñjati
[Vedic yunakti, yuñjati & yuñkte, yuj; cp. Gr. zeu/gnumi, Lat, jungo to unite, put together (pp. junctus = Sk. yukta, cp. E. junct -- ion); Lith. jùngin. The Idg. root *i̯eug is an enlarged form of *i̯eṷe "to unite," as in Sk. yanti, yuvati, pp. yuta; f. yuti, to which also Lat. jūs=P. yūsa. The Dhtp gives several (lit. & fig.) meanings of yuj, viz. "yoge" (No. 378), "samādhimhi" (399), "saŋgamane" (550)] (lit.) to yoke; (fig.) to join with (instr. or loc.), to engage in (loc.), to exert oneself, to endeavour. All our passages show the applied meaning, while the lit. meaning is only found in the Caus. yojeti. -- Often expld by and coupled with the syn. ghaṭati & vāyamati, e.g. at J iv.131; v.369; DhA iv.137. -- Forms: pres. yuñjati Dh 382; J v.369; 2nd pl. yuñjatha Th 2, 346 (kāmesu;=niyojetha ThA 241); ppr. yuñjanto J iv.131 (kammaṭṭhāne); imper. yuñja S i.52 (sāsane); ThA 12; med. imper. yuñjassu Th 2, 5. -- Pass. yujjati (in grammar or logic) is constructed or applied, fits (in), is meant KhA 168; SnA 148, 403, 456. -- Caus. I. yojeti & II. yojāpeti (q.v.). -- pp. yutta. Yuta
Yuta
[pp. of yu, yauti to fasten but Dhtp 338: "missane"] fastened to (loc.), attracted by, bent on, engaged in D. i.57 (sabba -- vārī˚); Sn 842 (pesuṇeyye; Nd1 233 reads yutta in exegesis, do. at p. 234, with further expln āyutta, payutta etc.), 853 (atimāne); Dāvs v.18 (dhiti˚). -- Note. yuta is doubtful in phrase tejasā -- yuta in Niraya passage at A i.142 = M iii.183=Nd1 405=Nd2 304iii =J v.266. The more likely reading is either tejas' āyuta (so BSk. M.Vastu 9), or tejasā yutta (so Nd2 & PvA 52), i. e. endowed with, furnished with, full of heat. -- We find a similar confusion between uyyuta & uyyutta. Yutta
Yutta
[pp. of yuñjati; Vedic yukta, cp. Lat. junctus, Gr. zeukto/s, Lith. jùnktas] 1. (lit.) yoked, harnessed (to = loc.) Pv i.114 (catubbhi yutta ratha); Mhvs 35, 42 (goṇā rathe yattā); DhA i.24 (dhure yuttā balivaddā). -- 2. coupled; connected with; (appld) devoted to, applied to, given to, engaged in ( -- ˚, instr. or loc.) Sn 820 (methune), 863 (macchiriya˚), 1144 (tena, cp. Nd2 532); It 93 (Buddha -- sāsane); J vi.206 (yoga˚). -- 3. furnished; fixed, prepared, in order, ready Sn 442 (Māra; =uyyutta SnA 392); PvA 53. -- 4. able, fit (to or for=inf.), suitable, sufficient Sn 826 (cp. Nd1 164); J v.219; DA i.141 (dassituŋ yutta=dassanīya); VvA 191 (=alaŋ); PvA 74. -- 5. proper, right PvA 159. -- 6. due to ( -- ˚, with a grd., apparently superfluous) J iii.208 (āsankitabba˚); cp. yuttaka. -- 7. (nt.) conjunction, i. e. of the moon with one or other constellation Vin ii.217. -- ayutta not fit, not right, improper PvA 6 (perhaps delete), 64. -- suyutta well fit, right proper, opp. duyutta unbefitting, in phrase suyuttaŋ duyuttaŋ ācikkhati J i.296 (here perhaps for dur -- utta?). du˚ also lit. "badly fixed, not in proper condition, in a bad state" at J iv.245 (of a gate).

-- kāra acting properly PvA 66. -- kārin acting rightly Miln 49. -- paṭibhāṇa knowledge of fitness Pug 42 (cp. PugA 223). -- payutta intent on etc. PvA 150. -- rūpa one who is able or fit (to = inf.) J i.64. -- vāha justified VvA 15. Yuttaka
Yuttaka
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. yutta] proper, fit (for); nt. what is proper, fitness: dhamma -- yuttakaŋ katheti to speak righteous speech J iv.356. -- Usually combd with a grd., seemingly pleonastically (like yutta), e. g. kātabba˚ what had to be done PvA 81; DhA i.13 (as kattabba˚); āpucchitabba˚ fit to be asked DhA i.6. Yutti
Yutti
[cp. Vedic yukti connection, fr. yuj] "fitting," i. e. 1. application, use Miln 3 (opamma˚). -- 2. fitness, vāda˚, KVA 37; in instr. yuttiyā in accordance with Mhvs 10, 66 (vacana˚); Sdhp 340 (sutti˚); and abl. yuttito Sdhp 505. -- 3. (logical) fitness, right construction, correctness of meaning; one of the 16 categories (hārā), appld to the exposition of texts, enumd in the 1st section of the Netti; e. g. at Nett 1 -- 3, 103; KhA 18; SnA 551, 552. Thus abl. yuttito by way of correctness or fitness (contrasted to suttato) VbhA 173 = Vism 562; and yutti -- vasena by means of correctness (of meaning) SnA 103 (contrasted to anussava). -- 4. trick, device, practice J vi.215.

-- kata combined with; (nt.) union, alloy VvA 13. Yuddha
Yuddha
(nt.) [orig. pp. of yujjhati; cp. Vedic yuddha (pp.) and yudh (f.) the fight] war, battle, fight D i.6 (daṇḍa˚ fighting with sticks or weapons); J iii.541 (id.); Sn 442 (dat. yuddhāya); J vi.222; Miln 245 (kilesa˚, as pp.: one who fights sin); Mhvs 10, 45 (˚atthaŋ for the sake of fighting); 10, 69 (yuddhāya in order to fight); 25, 52 (yuddhāy' āgata); 32, 12 (yuddhaŋ yujjhati); 32, 13 (maccu˚ fight with death); 33, 42; DhA ii.154 (malla˚ fist -- fight). -- The form yudhāya at Sn 831 is to be taken as (archaic) dat. of Vedic yudh (f.), used in sense of an inf. & equal to yuddhāya. Nd1 172 expls as "yuddh' atthāya."

-- kāla time for the battle Mhvs 10, 63. -- ṭṭha engaged in war S i.100 (so read for ˚ttha). -- maṇḍala fightingring, arena J iv.81; Vism 190; VbhA 356 (in comparison). Yuddhaka
Yuddhaka
[fr. yuddha, for the usual yodha (ka)] a fighter, in malla˚ fist -- fighter, pugilist J iv.81. Yudhikā
Yudhikā
(f.) [doubtful] N. of a tree J v.422 (for T. yodhi, which appears as yodhikā in C. reading). The legitimate reading is yūthikā (q. v.), as is also given in vv.ll. Yuvan
Yuvan
[Vedic yuvan; cp. Av. yavan = Lat. juvenis, Lith. jáunas young; Lat. juvencus "calf"; juventus youth; Goth. junda, Ohg. jugund & jung, E. young. -- The n. -- stem is the usual, but later Pāli shows also decl. after a -- stem, e. g. gen. yuvassa Mhvs 18, 28] a youth. -- nom. sg. yuvā D i.80=yobbanena samannāgata DA i.223; Sn 420; Dh 280 (=paṭhama -- yobbane ṭhita DhA iii.409); Pv iii.71 (=taruṇa PvA 205). -- Cp. yava, yuvin & yobbana. Yuvin
Yuvin
(adj. -- n.) [ = yuvan with diff -- adj. ending] young J iv.106, 222. Yūtha
Yūtha
(nt.) [Vedic yūtha] a flock, herd of animals Sn 53 (of elephants); J i.170 (monkeys), 280 (id.); SnA 322 (go˚, of oxen).

-- pa the leader of a herd Th 2, 437 (elephants). -- pati same J iii.174 (elephant); DhA i.81 (id.). Yūthikā
Yūthikā
(f.) [cp. later Sk. yūthikā] a kind of jasmine, Jasminum auriculatum J vi.537; Miln 338. So is also to be read at J v.420 (for yodhi) & 422 (yodhikā & yudhikā). See also yodhikā. Yūpa
Yūpa
[Vedic yūpa] 1. a sacrificial post D i.141; A iv.41; J iv.302; vi.211; Miln 21 (dhamma˚); SnA 321, 322; DA i.294. -- 2. a pāsāda, or palace Th 1, 163 = J ii.334.

-- ussāpana the erection of the sacr. post DhsA 145 (cp. Miln 21). Yūsa
Yūsa
[Vedic yūṣan, later Sk. yūṣa; fr. base Idg. *i̯ūs, cp. Lat. jūs soup, Gr. zu/mh yeast, ferment, zwmo/s soup; Obulg. jucha = Ger. jauche manure; Swedish ōst cheese; an enlargement of base *i̯eu to mix, as in Sk. yu to mix: see yuta, to which further *i̯eṷe, as in yuñjati] 1. juice Vin i.206 (akaṭa˚ natural juice); Mhvs 28, 26; VvA 185 (badara˚ of the jujube); Vism 195 (seda˚ sweaty fluid). -- 2. soup, broth. Four kinds of broths are enumd at M i.245, viz. mugga˚ bean soup, kulattha˚ of vetch (also at Vism 256), kaḷāya˚ (chick -- ) pea soup, hareṇuka˚ pea soup; Miln 63 (rañño sūdo yūsaŋ vā rasaŋ vā kareyya). Yebhuyya
Yebhuyya
(adj.) [ye = yad in Māgadhī form; thus yad bhūya=yad bhiyya "what is more or most(ly)"] abundant, numerous, most. Not found as adj. by itself, except in phrase yebhuyya -- vasena mostly, as a rule ThA 51 and PvA 136, which is identical with the usual instr. yebhuyyena occurring as adv. "as according to most," i. e. (1) almost all, altogether, practically (as in our phrase "practically dead"), mostly D i.105 (addasā dvattiŋsa lakkhanāṇi y. ṭhapetvā dve: all except two)= 109; Vin iii.29 sq.; J i.246 (gāmako y. andha -- bāla -- manussehi yeva ussanno the village was peopled by mostly foolish folk); v.335 (y. asīti -- mahātherā, altogether). -- (2) as it happens (or happened), usually, occasionally, as a rule, ordinarily D i.17 (saŋvaṭṭamāne loke y. [as a rule] sattā Ābhassarasaŋvaṭṭanikā honti; expld by half allegorical, half popular etym. at DA i.110 as follows: "ye upari Brahma -- lokesu vā Āruppesu vā nibbattanti, tadavasese sandhāya vuttaŋ"); D ii.139: yebhuyyena dasasu loka -- dhātusu devatā sannipatitā (as a rule); Sn p. 107 (=bahukāni SnA 451); Miln 6 (y. Himavantam eva gacchanti: usually); DA i.280 (ordinarily); VvA 234 (occasionally), 246 (pihita -- dvāram eva hoti: usually); PvA 2 (Sattari tattha tattha viharante y. tāya tāya atth' uppattiyā), 46 (tassā kesa -- sobhaŋ disvā taruṇa -- janā y. tattha paṭibaddha -- cittā adesuŋ invariably). -- na yebhuyyena not as a rule, usually not (at all): nâpi y. ruditena kāci attha -- siddhi PvA 63. -- 558 -- Yebhuyyasikā
Yebhuyyasikā
(f.) [formation fr. yebhuyya like tassa- pāpiyya -- sikā. Originally adj., with kiriyā to be understood] lit. "according to the majority," i. e. a vote of majority of the Chapter; name of one of the adhikaraṇa -- samathas, or means of settling a dispute. -- Vin. ii.84 (anujānāmi bh. adhikaraṇaŋ yebhuyyasikāya vūpasametuŋ), 93 (vivād' âdhikaraṇaŋ dvīhi samathehi sammati: sammukhā -- vinayena ca yebhuyyasịkāya ca). As one of the 7 methods of settling a dispute mentioned at Vin iv.207 = 351 (the seven are: sammukhā -- vinaya, sati -- vinaya, amūḷha˚, paṭiññā, yebhuyyasikā, tassa -- pāpiyyasikā, tīṇ' avatthāraka). Expld in detail at M ii.247: if the bhikkhus cannot settle a dispute in their abode, they have to go to a place where there are more bh., in order to come to a vote by majority. Cp. D iii.254 (the seven enumd); A i.99; iv.144. Yeva
Yeva
(indecl.) [ = eva with accrudescent y from Sandhi. On form and relation between eva & yeva cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 66, 1. See also eva 2. -- The same form in Prākrit: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 336] emphatic particle, meaning "even, just, also"; occurring most frequently (for eva) after palatal sounds, as ŋ: Sn 580 (pekkhataŋ yeva), 822 (vivekaŋ); DhA ii.20 (saddhiŋ); PvA 3 (tasmiŋ), 4 (imasmiŋ), 13 (tumhākaŋ); -- further after o: PvA 39 (apanīto yeva); -- after ā : Sn 1004 (manasā yeva); -- after i: S ii.206 (vuddhi yeva); PvA 11 (ahosi); -- after e: J i.82 (vihāre yeva; pubbaṇhe y.); VbhA 135 (na kevalaŋ ete yeva, aññe pi "not only these, but also others"). Cp. Mhvs 22, 56; VvA 222; PvA 47. Yevāpana(ka)
Yevāpana(ka)
(adj.) [not connected with yeva, but an adj. formation from phrase ye vā pana; ye here standing (as Māgadhism) for yaŋ: cp. yebhuyya] corresponding, reciprocal, respective, in corresponding proportion, as far as concerned; lit. "whatever else." The expression is peculiar to exegetical (logical) literature on the Abhidhamma. See e. g. DhsA 152 (yevāpanā, pl. and ˚kā); Vism 468, 271 sq.; VbhA 63, 70 sq.; cp. Dhs. trsl.1 p. 5 and introd. p. 56. -- Note. The expression occurring as phrase shows ye as nom. pl., e. g. Dhs 1, 58, 151 -- 161 & passim: ye vā pana tasmiŋ samaye aññe pi dhammā; but cp. in § 1: yaŋ yaŋ vā pan' ārabbha, in same sense. Yoga
Yoga
[Vedic yoga, see etym. under yuga & yuñjati. Usually m.; pl. nt. yogāni occurs at D ii.274 in meaning "bonds"] lit. "yoking, or being yoked," i. e. connection, bond, means; fig. application, endeavour, device. -- 1. yoke, yoking (rare?) J vi.206 (meant here the yoke of the churning -- sticks; cp. J vi.209). -- 2. connection with ( -- ˚), application to; (natural) relation (i. e. body, living connection), association; also conjunction (of stars). mānusaka yoga the relation to the world of men (the human body), opp. dibba yoga: S i.35 = 60; Sn 641; Dh 417; expld at DhA iv.225 as "kāya." -> association with: D iii.176; application: Vism 520 (+uppāda). yogato (abl.) from being connected with, by association with PvA 40 (bālya˚), 98 (sammappadhāna˚). -- pubba˚ connection with a former body, one's former action or life -- history J v.476; vi.480; Miln 2. See pubbe1. -- aḍḍhayoga a "half -- connected" building, i. e. a half -- roofed monastery Vin i.239; Vism 34. -- nakkhatta˚ a conjunction of planets, peculiar constellation (in astrology) J i.82, 253 (dhana -- vassāpanaka suitable for a shower of wealth); iii.98; DhA i.174; DhsA 232 (in simile). -- 3. (fig.) bond, tie; attachment (to the world and its lusts), or what yokes to rebirth (Cpd. 1712). There are 4 yogas, which are identical with the 4 oghas viz. kāma˚, bhava˚, diṭṭhi˚, avijjā˚, or the bonds of craving, existence, false views, and ignorance; enumd in detail at A ii.10; D iii.230, 276; J i.374; cp. Ps i.129 (catūhi yogehi yutto lokasannivāso catu -- yoga -- yojito); VbhA 35. Mentioned or referred to at S v.59; Dhs 1059 (ogha+, in defn of taṇhā), cp, Dhs trsln 308; Nett 31 (with ogha), 114 (id.); as sabba -- (or sabbe) yogā at Th 2, 4; 76; S i.213; DhA iii.233; severally at It 95 (bhava -- yoga -- yutta āgāmī hoti, +kāma˚); ogha+yoga: Pug 21 (avijjā˚); Vism 211, 684; cp. also D ii.274 (pāpima -- yogāni the ties of the Evil one); It 80 (yogā pamocenti bahujanaŋ). -- 4. application, endeavour, undertaking, effort DhA iii.233, 234 (=samma -- ppadhāna). yogaŋ karoti to make an effort, to strive after (dat.) S ii.131; A ii.93 (āsavānaŋ khayāya y. karaṇīya); Miln 35. yogaŋ āpajjati to show (earnest) endeavour, to be active S iii.11 sq.; Vbh 356 (attanā). -- dhamma˚ one who is devoted to the Dhamma A iii.355; yutta˚ (bent on, i. e.) earnest in endeavour J i.65; yāca˚ given to making offerings: see yāca. -- 5. pondering (over), concentration, devotion M i.472; Dh 209 (=yoniso manasikāra DhA iii.275), 282 (same expln at DhA iii.421); Miln 3; Vbh 324 (yoga -- vihitesu kamm' & sipp' -- āyatanesu; VbhA 410 expls: y. vuccati paññā; -- perhaps better to above 4?). -- 6. (magic) power, influence, device, scheme J vi.212 (yoga -- yogena practice of spells etc. =tāya tāya yuttiyā C.); PvA 117 (combd with manta, ascribed to devas). -- 7. means, instrument, remedy J i.380 (vamana˚ an emetic); vi.74 (ekaŋ yogaŋ datvā; but we better read bhesajjaŋ tassa datvā for vatvā, and ekaŋ yogaŋ vatvā for datvā; taking yoga in meaning of "charm, incantation"); Miln 109 (yena yogena sattānaŋ guṇa -- vaḍḍhi . . . tena hitaŋ upadahati).

-- âtiga one who has conquered the yoke, i. e. bond of the body or rebirth It 61 (muni), 81 (id.). -- âtigāmin = ˚âtiga; A ii.12 (same as sabba -- yoga -- visaŋyutta). -- âvacara "one at home in endeavour," or in spiritual (esp. jhāna -- ) exercises; one who practises "yoga"; an earnest student. The term is peculiar to the Abhidhamma literature. -- J i.303, 394, 400; iii.241 (saŋsārasāgaraŋ taranto y.); Ps ii.26; KvuA 32; Miln 33 sq., 43, 366, 378 sq.; Vism 245 (as hunter) 246 (as begging bhikkhu), 375 (iddhi -- study), 587, 637, 666, 708; DhA ii.12 (padhānaŋ padahanto y.); iii.241 (˚bhikkhu); DhsA 187 (ādhikammika), 246 (˚kulayutta); VbhA 115, 220, 228 (as bhikkhu on alms -- round), 229 (as hunter), 258, 331; KhA 74; SnA 20, 374. -- kkhema [already Vedic yoga -- kṣema exertion & rest, acquisition & possession] rest from work or exertion, or fig. in scholastic interpretation "peace from bondage," i. e. perfect peace or "uttermost safety" (K.S. ii.132); a freq. epithet of nibbāna [same in BSk.: yogakṣema, e. g. Divy 98, 123, 303, 498] M i.117 (˚kāma), 349, 357, (anuttara); S i.173 (˚adhivāhana); ii.195 (anuttara), 226; iii.112 (˚kāma, neg.); iv.125; v.130 sq.; A i.50 (anuttara); ii.40, 52 (a˚), 87, 247; iii.21, 294 sq., 353; D iii.123, 125, 164 (˚kāma); Vin ii.205=It 11 (˚ato dhaŋsati, whereas Vin ˚ā padhaŋsati); It 9, 27 (abhabbo ˚ssa adhigamāya); Th 2, 6; Sn 79 (˚adhivāhana), 425; Dh 23 (anuttara, cp. DhA i.231); Ps i.39; ii.81; Vbh 247 (kulāni y -- kh -- kāmāni, which VbhA 341 expls: catūhi yogehi khemaŋ nibbhayaŋ icchanti); ThA 13. -- kkhemin finding one's rest, peace, or salvation; emancipated, free, an Arahant S iii.13 (accanta˚); iv.85; A ii.12; iv.310 (patta˚); v.326 (accanta˚); DhA iii.233, 234 (=sabba -- yoga -- visaŋyutta); neg. a˚ not finding one's salvation A ii.52 (in verse)=Ps ii.80; It 50. -- ññu knowing the (right) means Miln 169 sq. -- bahula strong in exertion A iii.432. -- yutta (Mārassa) one who is tied in the bonds (of Māra) A ii.52 (so read for ˚gutta; the verse also at Ps ii.80, 81, and It 50). -- vibhāga dividing (division) of the relation (in grammar: to yoga 2) SnA 266. -- 559 -- Yoganīya
Yoganīya
(adj.) [fr. yoga; grd. formation] of the nature of trying, acting as a bond, fetter -- ish Dhs 584; DhsA 49 (cp. Dhs. trsl. 301). The spelling is also yoganiya, cp. oghaniya. Yogin
Yogin
(adj. -- n.) [fr. yoga, cp. Class. Sk. yogin] 1. ( -- ˚) applying oneself (to), working (by means of), using Vism 70 (hattha˚ & patta˚ using the hand or the bowl; but trsln p. 80: "hand -- ascetic" & "bowl -- ascetic"). -> 2. one who devotes himself to spiritual things, an earnest student, one who shows effort (in contemplation), a philosopher, wise man. The word does not occur in the four Nikāyas. In the older verses it is nearly synonymous with muni. The oldest ref. is Th 1, 947 (pubbake yogī "Saints of other days" Mrs. Rh. D.). Freq. in Miln, e. g. pp. 2, 356 (yogi -- jana); at pp. 366, 393, 404, 417, 418 in old verses. Combd with yogâvacara Miln 366, 404. -- Further passages are Nett 3, 10, 61; Vism 2, 14, 66, 71 (in verse), 150, 320, 373, 509, 620, 651, 696; DhsA 195, 327. Yogga
Yogga1
(nt.) [Vedic yogya; a grd. formation fr. yoga in meaning of yoga 1] "what may be yoked," i. e. 1. a coach, carriage, waggon (usually large & covered, drawn by bullocks) J vi.31 sq. (paṭicchanna), 368 (mahā˚); DhA ii.151 (mahā˚ & paṭicchanna). -- 2. a draughtbullock, ox Vv 848; Pv ii.936 ( = ratha -- yuga -- vāhana PvA 127); J vi.221. yoggāni muñcati to unharness the oxen PvA 43, 100. Yogga
Yogga2
(nt. & adj.) [same as last, in meaning of yoga 7] 1. (nt.) a contrivance J iv.269 (yoggaŋ karoti, may be in meaning "training, practice" here: see yoggā); VvA 8 (gahaṇa˚). -- 2. (adj.) fit for ( = yutta), adapted to, suitable; either -- ˚ or with inf.: VvA 291; PvA 25 (here spelt yogya), 135 (bhojana˚), 152 (kamma -- vipāk' ânubhavana˚), 154 (gamana˚ passable, v. l. yogya), 228 (anubhavana˚). Yoggā
Yoggā
(f.) [Vedic and Epic Sk. yogyā; same as yogga2, fr. yoga] training, practice J ii.165 (yoggaŋ karoti to practise); iv.269 (id.); DhA i.52 (lakkha -- yoggaŋ karoti to practise shooting). -- adj. ( -- ˚) katayogga well-practised, trained S i.62, 98 (neg.). Only at these passages, missing at the other daḷha -- dhamma -- passages, e. g. at S ii.266; M i.82; A ii.48.

-- ācariya a groom, trainer S iv.176 = M i.124; M iii.97, 222; Th 1, 1140; J i.505. Yojana
Yojana
(nt.) [Vedic yojana] 1. the yoke of a carriage J vi.38, 42 ( = ratha -- yuga). -- 2. a measure of length: as much as can be travelled with one yoke (of oxen), a distance of about 7 miles, which is given by Bdhgh. as equal to 4 gāvutas (DhA ii.13). It occurs in descending scale of yojana -- tigāvuta -- usabha at DhA i.108. -> Dh 60; J v.37 (yojana -- yojana -- vitthatā each a mile square); SnA 194. More favoured combns of yojana with numbers are the foll.: 1/2 (aḍḍha˚): DA i.35; DhsA 142. -- 3: DhA ii.41. -- 4: PvA 113. -- 5: VvA 33. -- 15: DhA i.17; J i.315; PvA 154. -- 18: J i.81, 348. -- 20: DhA iv.112 (20 X 110, of a wilderness). -- 25: VvA 236. -- 45: J i.147, 348; DhA i.367. -- 50: Vism 417. -- 100: D i.117; It 91; Pv i.1014. -- 500: J i.204. -- 1,000: J i.203. -- Cp. yojanika. Yojanā
Yojanā
(f.) [*Sk. yojanā, fr. yojeti] (grammatical) con- struction; exegesis, interpretation; meaning KhA 156, 218, 243; SnA 20, 90, 122 sq., 131 sq., 148, 166, 177, 248, 255, 313; PvA 45, 50, 69, 73, 139 (attha˚), and passim in Commentaries. Yojanika
Yojanika
(adj.) [fr. yojana] a yojana in extent J i.92 (vihāra); Dpvs 17, 108 (ārāma); DhA i.274 (maṇipallanka). Yojita
Yojita
[pp. of yojeti] yoked, tied, bound Ps i.129 (catu- yoga˚ fettered by the four bonds); SnA 137 (yottehi y.). Yojitaka
Yojitaka
(adj.) [fr. yojita] connected with, mixed; neg. a˚ not mixed (with poison), unadulterated J i.269. Yojeti
Yojeti
[Caus. of yuñjati] 1. to yoke, harness, tie, bind Pv ii.936 (vāhana, the draught -- bullock); Mhvs 35, 40 (yojayi aor.; v. l. for yojāpayi); PvA 74 (sindhave). -> 2. to furnish (with), combine, unite, mix, apply J i.252 (suraŋ), 269 (id.); Mhvs 22, 4 (ambaŋ visena y. to poison a mango); 36, 71 (visaŋ phalesu poison the fruit). -> 3. to prepare, provide, set in order, arrange, fix, fit up Mhvs 30, 39 (pāde upānāhi fitted the feet with slippers); dvāraŋ to put a door right, to fix it properly J i.201; iv. 245 (cp. yojāpeti). -- 4. to engage, incite, urge, commission, put up to, admonish Mhvs 17, 38 (manusse); 37, 9 (vihāraŋ nāsetuŋ y. incited to destroy the v.); PvA 69. -- 5. to construct, understand, interpret, take a meaning SnA 148 (yojetabba); PvA 98 (id.), 278 (id.). -- Caus. II. yojāpeti to cause some one to yoke etc.: D ii.95 (yānāni, to harness); J i.150 (dvāraŋ, to set right); Mhvs 35, 40 (rathe, to harness). -- Pass. yojīyati to become yoked or harnessed J i.57 (nangalasahassaŋ y.). -- pp. yojita. Yojjha
Yojjha
in a˚ M ii.24 read yujjha (of yudh). Yotta
Yotta
(nt.) [Vedic yoktra, cp. Lat. junctor, Gr. zeukth_res yoke -- straps; Epic Sk. yoktṛ one who yokes] the tie of the yoke of a plough or cart S i.172 = Sn 77; S iv.163, 282; J i.464; ii.247 (camma˚); iv.82; v.45 (cammay. -- varatta), 47; Vism 269; DhA i.205; SnA 137. As dhura -- yotta at J i.192; vi.253. Yottaka
Yottaka
(nt.) [yatta+ka] a tie, band, halter, rope J vi.252; Miln 53; Vism 254, 255; DhA iii.208. Yodha
Yodha
[cp. Vedic yodha; fr. yudh] a warrior, soldier, fighter, champion Vin i.73 (yodhā yuddh' âbhinandino . . . pabbajjaŋ yāciŋsu); J i.180; Miln 293.

-- ājīva one who lives by battle or war, a soldier S iv.308 = A iii.94; A i.284; ii.170, 202; iii.89 sq. (five kinds); Sn 617, 652; Pug 65, 69. -- hatthin a war elephant DhA i.168. Yodhi
Yodhi
= yodhikā J v.420. Yodhikā
Yodhikā
(f.) [a var. reading of yūthikā (q. v.)] a special kind of jasmine Vv 354; J iv.440 (yoth˚), 442; v.422; VvA 162 (as thalaja and a tree). Yodhin
Yodhin
[ = yodha] a warrior; camma˚ a warrior in cuirass, a certain army grade D i.51; A iv.107. Yodheti
Yodheti
[Caus. of yujjhati] to attack, to fight against (acc.) Dh 40 (yodhetha = pahareyya DhA i.317); J v.183. Yoni
Yoni
(f.) [Vedic yoni] 1. the womb. -- 2. origin, way of birth, place of birth, realm of existence; nature, matrix. There are four yonis or ways of being born or generation, viz. aṇḍaja oviparous creation, jalābuja viviparous, saŋsedaja moisture -- sprung, opapātika spontaneous: M i.73; D iii.230; Miln 146; Vism 552, 557 sq.; cp. VbhA 203 sq. -- Freq. in foll. combns: tiracchāna˚ the class of animals, the brute creation A i.37, 60; v.269; It 92; Pv iv.111; Vism 103, 427; PvA 27, 166; nāga˚ birth among the Nāgas S iii.240 sq. (in ref. to which the 4 kinds of birth, as mentioned above, are also applied); Vism 102 (niraya -- nāga -- yoni); pasu˚ = tiracchāna˚ Pv ii.1312; pisāca˚ world of the Pisācas S i.209; peta˚ the realm of the Petas PvA 68 (cp. peta). -- kamma˚ K. as origin A iii.186. -- yoni upaparikkhitabba (=kiŋjātikā etc.) S iii.42. -- ayoni unclean origin Th 1, 219. -- 3. thoroughness, knowledge, insight Nett 40. -- ayoni superficiality in thought S i.203 ("muddled ways" Mrs. Rh. D.). -- yoniso (abl.) "down to its origin or foundation," i. e. thoroughly, orderly, wisely, properly, judiciously S i.203 ("in ordered governance" K.S. i.259); D i.118 (wisely); It 30 (āraddha āsavānaŋ khayāya); Pug 25; Vism 30, 132, 599; PpA 31. Opp. ayoniso disorderly improperly Pug 21; DhA i.327; PvA 113, 278. -- Esp. frequent in phrase yoniso manasikāra "fixing one's attention with a purpose or thoroughly," proper attention, "having thorough method in one's thought" (K.S. i.259) Ps i.85 sq.; It 9; J i.116; Miln 32; Nett 8, 40, 50, 127; Vism 132; PvA 63. See also manasikāra. -- Opp. ayoniso manasikāra disorderly or distracted attention D iii.273; VbhA 148; ThA 79. In BSk. the same phrase: yoniśo manasikāraḥ Divy 488; AvŚ i.122; ii.112 (Speyer: "the right & true insight, as the object of consideration really is"). See further on term Dial. iii.218 ("systematized attention"); K.S. i.131; ii.6 ("radical grasp").

-- ja born from the womb Sn 620; Dh 396. -- pamukha principal sort of birth D i.54; M i.517. -- 560 -- Yobbana
Yobbana
(nf.) [cp. late Vedic & Epic Sk. yauvana, fr. yuvan] youth D i.115; A i.68; iii.5, 66, 103; Dh 155, 156; Sn 98, 110, 218; Pv i.76; DhA iii.409; PvA 3.

-- mada pride of youth D iii.220; A i.146; iii.72; VbhA 466. -- R. R
--
R -- the letter (or sound) r, used as euphonic consonant to avoid hiatus. The sandhi -- r -- originates from the final r of nouns in ˚ir & ˚ur of the Vedic period. In Pali it is felt as euphonic consonant only, like other sandhi consonants (y for instance) which in the older language were part of the noun itself. Thus r even where it is legitimate in a word may interchange with other sandhi -- consonants in the same word, as we find punam -- eva and puna -- d -- eva besides the original puna -- r -- eva ( = Vedic punar eva). At J i.403 we read "punar āgata," where the C. expls "puna āgata, ra -- kāro sandhivasena vutto." Similarly: Sn 81 (vutti -- r -- esā), 214 (thambho -- r. -- iva), 625= Dh 401 (āragge -- r -- iva), 679 (ati -- r -- iva), 687 (sarada -- r -- iva), 1134 (haŋsa -- r -- iva); Vv 6422 (Vajir' āvudho -- r -- iva); Pv ii.87 (puna -- r -- eva) ii.116 (id.); PvA 77 (su -- r -- abhigandha). In the latter cause the r has no historical origin, as little as in the phrase dhir atthu (for *dhig -- atthu) Sn 440; J i.59. Raŋsi & Rasmi
Raŋsi
& Rasmi [Vedic raśmi. The form raŋsi is the proper Pali form, originating fr. raśmi through metathesis like amhi for asmi, tamhā for tasmā etc. Cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 502. The form rasmi is a Sanskritism and later] a rein, a ray. -- 1. In meaning "rein" only as rasmi, viz. at M i.124; Dh 222; J i.57; iv.149. -- 2. In meaning "ray" both raŋsi and rasmi: (a) raŋsi (in poetry) Sn 1016 (vīta˚? perhaps pīta˚? See note in P.T.S. ed.); Vv 535 (pl. raŋsī = rasmiyo VvA 236); 6327 (sahassa˚ having a thousand rays;=suriya VvA 268); Sdhp 124. Also in cpd. raŋsi -- jāla a blaze of rays J i.89; PvA 154; VvA 12 (˚sammujjala), 14 (id.), 166 (id.). -- (b) rasmi (in prose, late) DhA i.27 (˚ŋ vissajjesi); DhsA 13 (nīla -- rasmiyo); VvA 125 (candima -- suriya˚). Also in cpd. buddha -- rasmi the ray of enlightenment, the halo around a Buddha, consisting of 6 colours (chabbaṇṇa) J i.444, 501 (˚rasmiyo vissajjento); SnA 132; VvA 207, 234, 323; Mhbv 6, 15, 38. Raŋsika
Raŋsika
(adj.) [raŋsi+ka] having rays, radiant, in sahassa˚ having 1000 rays Vv 645 ( = suriya -- maṇḍala viya VvA 277). Raŋsimant
Raŋsimant
(adj.) [fr. raŋsi] having rays, radiant; n. sg. raŋsimā the sun Vv 812 ( = suriya VvA 314). Rakkha
Rakkha
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. base rakkh] guarding or to be guarded; -- (a) act.: dhamma˚ guardian of righteousness or truth Miln 344. -- (b) pass.: in cpd. dū˚, v. l. du˚ hard to guard DhA i.295. ˚kathā, s. l. rukkha -- ˚, warding talk ThA 1, in Brethren, 185, cp. note 416. Rakkhaka
Rakkhaka
(adj. n.) [fr. rakkha] 1. guarding, protecting, watching, taking care PvA 7; f. ˚ikā (dāsī) DhA iv.103 (a servant watching the house). -- 2. observing, keeping J i.205 (sīla˚). -- 3. a cultivator J ii.110. -- 4. a sentry J i.332. Rakkhati
Rakkhati
[Vedic raksati, rakṣ to Idg. *ark (cp. Lat. arceo etc.) in enlarged form *aleq = Gr. a)le/cw to protect (Alexander!); a)lkh/ strength; Ags. ealgian to protect, Goth. alhs=Ags. ealh temple. Cp. also base *areq in P. aggala. The Dhtp 18 expls rakkh by "pālana"] 1. to protect, shelter, save, preserve Sn 220; J iv.255 (maŋ rakkheyyātha); vi.589 (=pāleti); Pv ii.943 (dhanaŋ); Miln 166 (rukkhaŋ), 280 (attānaŋ rakkheyya save himself); PvA 7. -- grd. rakkhiya to be protected Mhvs 33, 45. Neg. arakkhiya & arakkheyya (in meaning 3) see separately. -- Pass. ppr. rakkhiyamāna J i.140. -- 2. to observe, guard, take care of, control (with ref. to cittaŋ the heart, and sīlaŋ good character or morals) It 67 (sīlaŋ); DhA i.295 (cittaŋ rakkha, equivalent with cittaŋ dama), 397 (ācāraŋ); J iv.255 (vācaŋ); VvA 59 (sīlāni rakkhi); PvA 66 (sīlaŋ rakkhatha, uposathaŋ karotha). -- 3. to keep (a) secret, to put away, to guard against (i. e. to keep away from) Sn 702 (mano -- padosaŋ rakkheyya); Miln 170 (vacīduccaritaŋ rakkheyya). -- pp. rakkhita. See also parīpāleti & parirakkhati . Rakkhana
Rakkhana
(nt.) [fr. rakkh] 1. keeping, protection, guarding Nett 41; Mhvs 35, 72 (rahassa˚ -- atthāya so that he should keep the secret); PvA 7. -- 2. observance, keeping VvA 71 (uposatha -- sīla˚); PvA 102 (sīla˚), 210 (uposatha˚). Rakkhanaka
Rakkhanaka
(adj.) [fr. rakkhana] observing, keeping; one who observes J i.228 (pañca -- sīla˚; so read for rakkhānaka). Rakkhasa
Rakkhasa
[cp. Vedic rakṣa, either fr. rakṣ to injure, or more likely fr. rakṣ to protect or ward off (see details at Macdonell, Vedic Mythology pp. 162 -- 164)] a kind of harmful (nocturnal) demon, usually making the water its haunt and devouring men Th 1, 931; Sn 310 (Asura˚); J i.127 (daka˚ = udaka˚), 170 (id.); vi.469 (id.); DhA i.367 (˚pariggahita -- pokkharaṇī); iii.74 (udaka˚); Sdhp 189, 313, 366. -- f. rakkhasī J iii.147 (r. pajā); Mhvs 12, 45 (rudda˚, coming out of the ocean). -- 561 -- Rakkhā
Rakkhā
(f.) [verb -- noun fr. rakkh] shelter, protection, care A ii.73 (+parittā); Mhvs 25, 3; J i.140 (bahūhi rakkhāhi rakkhiyamāna); PvA 198 (˚ŋ saŋvidahati). Often in combn rakkhā+āvaraṇa (+gutti) shelter & defence, e. g. at Vin ii.194; D i.61 (dhammikaŋ r. -- v.-> guttiŋ saŋvidaheyyāma); M ii.101; J iv.292. -- Cp. gorakkhā. -- Note. rakkhā at J iii.144 is an old misreading for rukkhā. Rakkhita
Rakkhita
[pp. of rakkhati] guarded, protected, saved S iv.112 (rakkhitena kāyena, rakkhitāya vācāya etc.); A i.7 (cittaŋ r.); Sn 288 (dhamma˚), 315 (gottā˚); VvA 72 (mātu˚, pitu˚ etc.); PvA 61, 130. -- Note. rakkhitaŋ karoti at Mhvs 28, 43 Childers trsls "take under protection," but Geiger reads rakkhike and trsls "appoint as watchers."

-- atta one who guards his character S i.154; J i.412; SnA 324. -- indriya guarding one's senses Sn 697. -- mānasāna guarding one's mind Sn 63 ( = gopitamānasāno -- rakkhita -- citto Nd2 535). Ranga
Ranga1
[fr. raj1, rajati, to be coloured or to have colour] colour, paint Miln 11 (˚palibodha).

-- kāra dyer Miln 331. -- jāta colour M i.385; VbhA 331. -- ratta dyed crimson Vin i.185 = 306. Ranga
Ranga2
[fr. raj2, irajyati, to straighten, order, direct etc.: see uju. The Dhtp (27) only gives one raj in meaning "gamana"] a stage, theatre, dancing place, playhouse Vv 331; J ii.252. -- rangaŋ karoti to play theatre DhA iv.62. -- rangamajjha the stage, the theatre, usually in loc. ˚majjhe, on the stage, S iv.306; J iv.495; DhA iii.79; same with ˚maṇḍale J ii.253. Racati
Racati
[rac, later Sk.] to arrange, prepare, compose. The root is defined at Dhtp 546 by "paṭiyattane" (with v. l. car), and given at No. 542 as v. l. of pac in meaning "vitthāre." -- pp. racita. Racanā
Racanā
(f.) [fr. rac] 1. arrangement (of flowers in a gar- land) VvA 354. -- 2. composition (of a book) Sdhp 619. Racita
Racita
[pp. of racati] 1. arranged J v.157 (su˚ in C. for samocita; v. l. sucarita). -- 2. strung (of flowers) Mhvs 34, 54. -- Cp. vi˚. Racchā
Racchā
(f.) [Sk. rathyā. This the contracted form. The diaeretic forms are rathiyā & rathikā (q.v.)] a carriage road Vin ii.194; iii.151; iv.271 ( = rathiyā); v.205 (raccha -- gata); J i.425; v.335; vi.276 (in its relation to vīthi); Dāvs v.48; PvA 24 (koṇa˚). Rajaka
Rajaka
[fr. rajati] a dyer (& "washerman" in the same function), more correctly "bleacher." See remarks of Kern's at Toev. ii.45 on distinction of washerman & dyer. -- D i.51 (in list of occupations); Vin iii.45; S ii.101 = iii.152 (in simile; combd with cittakāra, here perhaps "painter"?); S iii.131; J v.186; VbhA 331 (in simile). Rajakkha
Rajakkha
( -- ˚) (adj.) [rajo+ending ka, in combn *rajas -- ka = rajakkha, like *puras -- kata=purakkhata. The ˚ka belongs to the whole cpd.] only in combn with appa˚ and mahā˚ i. e. having little (or no) and much defilement (or blemish of character) M i.169; S i.137 (here further combd with ˚jātika; cp. BSk. alpa -- rajaskajātīya MVastu iii.322); Vin i.5 (id.); Ps i.121; ii.33, 195; Nd1 358; Nd2 235 No. 3 p2; Vbh 341; Miln 263; Vism 205; VbhA 458. Rajakkhatā
Rajakkhatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. rajakkha] is Kern's (proble- matic) proposed reading (Toev. s. v.) for rājakhāda at Sn 831 (rājakhādāya phuṭṭho), which is however unjustified, as the original reading is well -- attested and expld in the Niddesa as such. The term as proposed would not occur by itself either (like rajakkha, only -- ˚). Rajata
Rajata
(nt.) [Vedic rajata; see etym. under rajati] silver D i.5 (expld at DA i.78 as a general name for all coins except gold: kahāpaṇas etc.); S i.92; Sn 962 (in simile; expld at Nd1 478 as jātarūpa), J v.50; 416 (hema˚ gold & silver); Vv 351 (˚hema -- jāla); DhA ii.42 (˚paṭṭa silver tablet or salver); iv.105 (˚gabbha silver money box or cabinet for silver, alongside of kahāpaṇa -- gabbha and suvaṇṇa˚); VbhA 64 (expld as "kahāpaṇa"); PvA 95 (for rūpiya). Rajati
Rajati
[raj & rañj to shine, to be coloured or light ( -- red); to Idg. *areg to be bright, as in Lat. argus, Gr. a)rgh/s & a)rgo/s light; Sk. arjuna (see ajjuna); to which also rajati silver = Lat. argentum, Gr. a)/rguros; Gallic Argento -- ratum (N. of Strassburg); Oir argat.] usually intrs. rajjati (q.v.). As rajitabba (grd.) in meaning "to be bleached" (dhovitabba+) only in meaning "bleach" (as compared with dhovati clean, & vijaṭeti to disentangle, smoothe) Vin iii.235 (ppr. fr. pl. dhovantiyo rajantiyo etc.); J i.8 (rajitabba, grd.; dhovitabba+). -- Somehow it is difficult to distinguish between the meanings "bleach" and "dye" (cp. rajaka), in some combns with dhovati it clearly means "dye," as at Vin i.50 (forms: rajati, rajitabba, rajiyetha 3 sg. Pot. Med.); Vism 65 (forms: rajitvā, rajitabba, rajituŋ). -- Another grd. rajanīya in diff. meaning (see sep.). Caus. rajeti to paint, colour Th 1, 1155 (inf. rajetave: (see Geiger, P.Gr. § 204, 1. a). Caus. also rañjeti (see under rañjati). Med. Pass. rajjati (q. v.). -- Caus. II. rajāpeti to cause to be bleached Vin iii.206 (dhovāpeyya rajāpeyya ākoṭāpeyya), 235 (dhovapeti r. vijaṭāpeti); J ii.197 (ovaṭṭikaŋ sibbāpetvā rajāpetvā). Rajana
Rajana
(nt.) [fr. raj] colouring, dye D i.110 (suddhaŋ vatthaŋ . . . sammadeva rajanaŋ paṭigaṇheyya); Vin i.50 = 53 ii.227; Vin i.286 (6 dyes allowed to the bhikkhus: mūla˚, khandha˚, taca˚, patta˚, puppha˚, phala˚, or made of the root, the trunk, bark, leaf, flower, fruit of trees) Th 1, 965; S ii.101 (here either as f. or adj.); J i.220 (washing?).

-- kamma (the job of) dyeing J i.118; Vism 65. -- pacana boiling the dye Vism 389 (cp. rajana -- pakka Vin. Texts ii.49). -- bhājana dye -- vessel Vin i.286. -- sālā colouringworkshop, dyeing -- hall Vism 65. Rajani
Rajani
(f.) [fr. raj, cp. rajanīya 2] the night Dāvs i.39; Abhp 69; PvA 205. Rajanīya
Rajanīya
(adj.) [grd. of rajati] of the nature of rajas, i. e. leading to lust, apt to rouse excitement, enticing, lustful. -- 1. As Ep. of rūpa (vedanā saññā etc.) S iii.79; also at D i.152 sq. (dibbāni rupāni passāmi piya -- rūpāni kām' ûpasaŋhitāni rajanīyāni; & the same with saddāni). In another formula (relating to the 5 kāmaguṇā): rūpā (saddā etc.) iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kām' ûpasaŋhitā rajanīyā D i.245; M i.85. The expln of this passage at DA i.311 is: r. = rāgajanaka. -- The expression rajanīyā dhammā "things (or thoughts) causing excitement" is contrasted with vimocaniyā dh. "that which leads to emancipation" at A ii.196. The same takes the places of lobhanīyā dhammā in combn with dosanīyā & mohanīyā dh. at S iv.307; A ii.120; iii.169. Another pair is mentioned at Nett 18, viz. r. dhammā and pariyuṭṭhāniyā dh. -> 2. In diff. connections it means simply "delightful, lovely" and is e. g. an Ep. of the night. So at Pv iii.71, where the passage runs "yuvā rajanīye kāmaguṇehi sobhasi": youthful thou shinest with the qualities of enjoyment in the enjoyable (night), which at PvA 205 is expld in a twofold manner viz. first as "ramaṇīyehi rāguppatti -- hetu -- bhūtehi" (viz. kāmagunehi), referring to a v. l. rajanīyehi, and then as "rajanī ti vā rattīsu, ye ti nipātamattaŋ" and "virocasi rattiyaŋ." Thus rajanī is here taken directly as "night" (cp. Abhp 69). -- At Pv iv.62 the passage runs "pamattā rajaniyesu kām' assād' âbhinandhino" i. e. not heeding the enjoyment of the taste of craving at nights; here as m. & not f. -- The meaning "lovely" is appld to sounds at Th 1, 1233 (sarena rajanīyena); VvA 37 (r. nigghosa). -- 562 -- Rajo
Rajo
(rajas) & Raja (nt.) [raj, see rajati & rañjati. Vedic rajaḥ meaning: (a) space, as region of mist & cloud, similar to antarīksa, (b) a kind of (shiny) metal (cp. rajata); see Zimmer, Altind. Leben 55]. A Forms. Both rajo & rajaŋ occur as noun & acc. sg., e. g. rajo at D ii.19; Sn 207, 334; Dhs 617; rajaŋ at Sn 275; It 83; once (in verse) rajo occurs as m, viz. Sn 662. The other cases are formed from the a -- stem only, e. g. rajassa Sn 406; pl. rajāni Sn 517, 974. In compn we find both forms, viz. (1) rajas either in visarga form rajah, as (a) rajo -- , (b) raja -- and (c) rajā -- (stressed), or in s -- form (d) rajas -- ; (2) raja -- , appearing apostrophied as (e) raj -- . B Meanings. (1) (lit.) dust, dirt; usually wet, staining dust D ii.19 (tiṇa+); Sn 662 = PvA 116 (sukhumo rajo paṭivātaŋ khitto); It 83; Dhs 617 (dhūmo+). adj. rāja˚: in sa˚ & a˚ vāta Vin ii.209; Vism 31. The meaning "pollen" [Sk. raja, m.] may be seen in "raja -- missakaŋ rasaŋ" at DhA i.375. -> 2. (fig.) stain, dirt, defilement, impurity. Thus taken conventionally by the P. commentators as the 3 -- fold blemish of man's character: rāga, dosa, moha, e. g. Nd1 505; SnA 255; DhA iii.485; or as kilesa -- raja at SnA 479. -- Sn 207 (niketā jāyate rajo), 334, 665 (rajaŋ ākirasi, metaph.), 974 (pañca rajāni loke, viz. the excitement caused by the 5 bāhirāni āyatanāni Nd1 505. Also in stanza rāgo rajo na ca pana reṇu vuccati (with dosa & moha the same) Nd1 505=Nd2 590 (slightly diff.)=J i.117=Vism 388, cp. Divy 491 with interesting variation. -- adj. raja˚ in two phrases apagata˚ VvA 236 & vigata˚ Nd1 505 ≈ free from defilement. -- On raja in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 126. Cp. vi˚. -- C. Compounds. (a) rajo -- : ˚jalla dust and (wet) dirt, muddy dirt D ii.18; Vin iii.70; J iv.322; v.241; Miln 133, 195, 258, 410; SnA 248, 291. -- jallika living in dirty mud, designation of a class of ascetics M i.281; J i.390. -- dhātu "dust -- element" (doubtful trsln) D i.54, which DA i.163 explns as "raja -- okiṇṇa -- ṭṭhānāni," i. e. dusty places. Dial. trsl. "places where dust accumulates," Franke, Dīgha p. 57 as "Staubiges" but rightly sees a deeper, speculative meaning in the expression (Sānkhya doctrine of rajas?). -- mala dust & dirt J i.24. -- vajalla [this expression is difficult to explain. It may simply be a condensed phrase rajo 'va jalla, or a redupl. cpd. rajo+avajalla, which was spelt raj -- ovajalla for ava˚ because of rajo, or represents a contamination of raj -- avajalla and raj -- ojalla, or it is a metric diaeresis of rajo -- jalla] dust and dirt Dh 141 (=kaddama -- limpan' ākārena sarīre sannicita -- rajo DhA iii.77). -- haraṇa dirt -- taking, cleaning; wet rag, floor -- cloth, duster Vin ii.291; A iv.376; J i.117; DhA i.245. -- (b) raja -- : -- reṇu dirt and dust J iv.362; -- vaḍḍhana indulgence in or increase of defilement Th 2, 343 ("fleshly lusts" trsl.); ThA 240 (=rāga -- raj' ādi -- saŋvaḍḍhana). -- (c) rajā -- : ˚patha dusty place, dustiness, dust -- hole D i.62, 250; S ii.219; DA i.180 (here taken metaphorically: rāga -- raj' ādīnaŋ uṭṭhāna -- ṭṭhānaŋ). -- (d) rajas -- : ˚sira with dusty head Sn 980; J iv.184, 362, 371. See pankadanta. -- (e) raj -- : -- ˚agga a heap of dust, dirt J v.187 (= rajakkhandha C.); fig.=kilesa Pug 65, 68 (here perhaps nt. of a distorted rajakkha? So Kern, Toev. s. v.). -- ˚upavāhana taking away the dust (or dirt) Sn 391, 392. Rajja
Rajja
(nt.) [Sk. rājya, fr. rāj] kingship, royalty, kingdom, empire; reign, throne; (fig.) sovereignty A iii.300 (˚ŋ kāreti); Sn 114, 553 (˚ŋ kāreti to reign); J i.57; 64 (ekarattena tīṇi rajjāni atikkamma; 3 kingdoms); iii.170 (˚ŋ amaccānaŋ niyyādetvā), 199 (dukkhaseyyaŋ api rajjaŋ pi kāraye); iv.96, 105, 393 (nava rajja new kingship, newly (or lately) crowned king); vi.4 (rajjato me sussitvā maraṇam eva seyyo: death by withering is better than kingship); VvA 314 ( = J i.64 as above); PvA 73 sq.; Mhvs 10, 52 (rājā rajjaŋ akārayi). -- cakkavatti˚ rule of a universal king DhA iii.191; deva˚ reign amongst gods KhA 227; padesa˚ local sovereignty It 15; Kh viii.12 (cp. KhA 227).

-- siri -- dāyikā (devatā) (goddess) giving success to the empire DhA ii.17. -- sīma border of the empire Vism 121. Rajjati
Rajjati
[cp. Sk. rajyati, raj or rañj, Med. of rajati] to be excited, attached to (loc.), to find pleasure in S iv.74 (na so rajjati rūpesu; = viratta -- citta); Sn 160, 813 (contrasted with virajjati); Ps i.58, 77 sq., 130, 178; Nd1 138; Miln 386 (rajjasi rajanīyesu etc.: in combn with dosa & moha or derivations, representing rāga or lobha, cp. lobhanīya); VbhA 11. -- ppr. rajjamāna PvA 3; Pot. rajjeyya Miln 280 (kampeyya+); grd. rajjitabba Miln 386 (rajanīyesu r.; with dussanīyesu and muyhanīyesu; followed by kampitabba); fut. rajjissati DhsA 194; aor. arañji Vin i.36=J i.83 (na yiṭṭhe na hute arañjiŋ). -- pp. ratta. Rajjana
Rajjana
(nt.) [fr. rajjati] defilement DA i.195. Cp. muyhana. Rajju
Rajju
(f.) [Vedic rajju, cp. Lat. restis rope, Lith. rẽƶgis wicker, basket] a cord, line, rope S ii.128; Vin ii.120, 148 (āviñchana˚); Nd2 304; J i.464, 483 (fisherman's line); v.173; Mhvs 10, 61; DhA iv.54; VbhA 163; KhA 57; VvA 207; Sdhp 148, 153.

-- kāra rope -- maker Miln 331. -- gāhaka "rope -- holder," (king's) land -- surveyor J ii.367 = DhA iv.88 (see Fick, Sociale Gliederung 97). Rajjuka
Rajjuka
[rajju+ka] 1. a rope, line J i.164 (bandhana˚); ThA 257. -- 2. = rajjugāhaka, king's land surveyor J ii.367. Rañjati
Rañjati
[rañj = raj: see rajati & rajjati -- Dhtp 66 & 398 defines rañja=rāge] 1. to colour, dye J i.220. -> 2. (=rajjati) to find delight in, to be excited Sn 424 (ettha me r. mano; v. l. BB rajjati). -- Caus. rañjeti to delight or make glad D iii.93 (in etym. of rājā (q. v.). -- pp rañjita. -- Caus. II. rañjāpeti to cause to be coloured or dyed DhA iv.106 (v. l. raj˚). Rañjana
Rañjana
(nt.) [fr. rañjati] delighting, finding pleasure, excitement DhsA 363 (rañjan' aṭṭhena rāgo; v. l. rajano˚; perhaps better to be read rajjana˚). Rañjita
Rañjita
[pp. of rañjeti] coloured, soiled, in raja˚ affected with stain, defiled J i.117. -- See also anu˚ & pari˚. Raṭati
Raṭati
[raṭ; Dhtp 86: "paribhāsane"] to yell, cry; shout (at), scold, revile: not found in the texts. Raṭṭha
Raṭṭha
(nt.) [Vedic rāṣṭra] reign, kingdom, empire; country, realm Sn 46 (expld at Nd2 536 as "raṭṭhañ ca janapadañ ca koṭṭhāgārañ ca . . . nagarañ ca"), 287, 444, 619; J iv 389 (˚ŋ araṭṭhaŋ karoti); PvA 19 (˚ŋ kāreti to reign, govern). Pabbata˚ mountain -- kingdom SnA 26; Magadha˚ the kingdom of Magadha PvA 67.

-- piṇḍa the country's alms -- food (˚ŋ bhuñjati) Dh 308 (saddhāya dinnaŋ); A i.10; S ii.221; M iii.127; Th 2, 110; It 43, 90. -- vāsin inhabitant of the realm, subject DhA iii.481 Raṭṭhaka
Raṭṭhaka
(adj.) [Sk. rāṣṭraka] belonging to the kingdom, royal, sovereign J iv.91 (senāvāhana). -- Cp. raṭṭhika. Raṭṭhavant
Raṭṭhavant
(adj.) [raṭṭha+vant] possessing a kingdom or kingship Pv ii.611 (˚nto khattiyā). Raṭṭhika
Raṭṭhika
[fr. raṭṭha, cp. Sk. rāṣṭrika] 1. one belonging to a kingdom, subject in general, inhabitant J ii.241 (brāhmaṇa gahapati -- r. -- do ārik' ādayo). -- 2. an official of the kingdom [op Sk. rāṣṭriya a pretender; also king's brother in -- law] A iii.76 = 300 (r. pettanika senāya senāpatika). Raṇa
Raṇa
[Vedic raṇa, both "enjoyment," and "battle." The Dhtp (115) only knows of ran as a sound -- base saddatthā ( = Sk. ran2 to tinkle)] 1. fight, battle; only in Th 2, 360 (raṇaŋ karitvā kāmānaŋ): see discussed below; also late at Mhvs 35, 69 (Subharājaŋ raṇe hantvā). -- 2. intoxication, desire, sin, fault. This meaning is the Buddhist development of Vedic raṇa= enjoyment. Various influences have played a part in determining the meaning & its expln in the scholastic terms of the dogmatists and exegetics. It is often expld as pāpa or rāga. The Ṭīkā on DhsA 50 (see Expos. 67) gives the foll. explns (late & speculative): (a)=reṇu, dust or mist of lust etc.; (b) fight, war (against the Paths); (c) pain, anguish & distress. -- The trsln (Expos. 67) takes raṇa as "cause of grief," or "harm," hence araṇa "harmless" and saraṇa "harmful" (the latter trsld as "concomitant with war" by Dhs. trsl. of Dhs 1294; and asaraṇa as opp. "not concomitant"; doubtful). At S i.148 (rūpe raṇaŋ disvā) it is almost syn. with raja. Bdhgh. expls this passage (see K.S. 320) as "rūpamhi jāti -- jarā -- bhanga -- sankhātaŋ dosaŋ," trsln (K.S. 186): "discerning canker in visible objects material."

The term is not sufficiently cleared yet. At Th 2, 358 we read "(kāmā) appassādā raṇakarā sukkapakkha -- visosanā," and v. 360 reads "raṇaŋ karitvā kāmānaŋ." ThA 244 expls v 358 by "rāg' ādi sambandhanato"; v. 360 by "kāmānaŋ raṇaŋ te ca mayā kātabbaŋ ariyamaggaŋ sampahāraŋ katvā." The first is evidently "grief," the second "fight," but the trsln (Sisters 145) gives "stirring strife" for v. 358, and "fight with worldly lusts" for v. 360; whereas Kern, Toev. s. v. raṇakara gives "causing sinful desire" as trsl.

The word araṇa (see araṇa2) was regarded as neg. of raṇa in both meanings (1 & 2); thus either "freedom fr. passion" or "not fighting." The trsln of DhsA 50 (Expos. 67) takes it in a slightly diff. sense as "harmless" (i. e. having no grievous causes) -- At M iii.235 araṇa is a quâsi summing up of "adukkha an -- upaghāta anupāyāsa etc.," and saraṇa of their positives. Here a meaning like "harmfulness" & "harmlessness" seems to be fitting. Other passages of araṇa see under araṇa.

-- jaha (raṇañjaha) giving up desires or sin, leaving causes of harmfulness behind. The expression is old and stereotype. It has caused trouble among interpreters: Trenckner would like to read raṇañjaya "victorious in battle" (Notes 83). It is also BSk., e. g. Lal. Vist. 50; AvŚ ii.131 (see Speyer's note 3 on this page. He justifies trsln "pacifier, peace -- maker"). At foll. passages: S i.52 (trsln "quitting corruption"); It 108 (Seidenstücker trsls: "dem Kampfgewühl entronnen"); Miln 21; Nett 54; Sdhp 493, 569. -- 563 -- Rata
Rata
[pp. of ramati] delighting in (loc. or -- ˚), intent on, devoted to S iv.117 (dhamme jhāne), 389 sq. (bhava˚ etc.); Sn 54 (sangaṇika˚) 212, 250, 327, 330 (dhamme), 461 (yaññe), 737 (upasame); Mhvs. 1, 44 (mahākāruṇiko Satthā sabba -- loka -- hite rato); 32, 84 (rato puññe); PvA 3, 12, 19 (˚mānasa). Ratana
Ratana1
(nt.) [cp. Vedic ratna, gift; the BSk. form is ratna (Divy 26) as well as ratana (AvŚ ii.199)] 1. (lit.) a gem, jewel VvA 321 (not = ratana2, as Hardy in Index); PvA 53 (nānāvidhāni). -- The 7 ratanas are enumd under veḷuriya (Miln 267). They are (the precious minerals) suvaṇṇa, rajata, muttā, maṇi, veḷuriya, vajira, pavāḷa. (So at Abhp 490.) These 7 are said to be used in the outfit of a ship to give it more splendour: J ii.112. The 7 (unspecified) are mentioned at Th 2, 487 (satta ratanāni vasseyya vuṭṭhimā "all seven kinds of gems"); and at DhA i.274, where it is said of a ratana -- maṇḍapa that in it there were raised flags "sattaratana -- mayā." On ratana in similes see J.P.T.S. 1909, 127. -- 2. (fig.) treasure, gem of ( -- ˚) Sn 836 (etādisaŋ r.= dibb' itthi -- ratana SnA 544); Miln 262 (dussa˚ a very fine garment). -- Usually as a set of 7 valuables, belonging to the throne (the empire) of a (world -- ) king. Thus at D ii.16 sq.; of Mahā -- Sudassana D ii.172 sq. They are enumd singly as follows: the wheel (cakka) D ii.172 sq., the elephant (hatthi, called Uposatha) D ii.174, 187, 197; the horse (assa, Valāhaka) ibid.; the gem (maṇi) D ii.175, 187; the woman (itthi) ibid.; the treasurer (gahapati) D ii.176, 188; the adviser (pariṇāyaka) ibid. The same 7 are enumd at D i.89; Sn p. 106; DA i.250; also at J iv.232, where their origins (homes) are given as: cakka˚ out of Cakkadaha; hatthi from the Uposatha -- race; assa˚ from the clan of Valāhassarāja, maṇi˚ from Vepulla, and the last 3 without specification. See also remarks on gahapati. Kern, Toev. s. v. ratana suspects the latter to be originally "major domus" (cp. his attributes as "wealthy" at MVastu i.108). As to the exact meaning of pariṇāyaka he is doubtful, which mythical tradition has obscured. -- The 7 (moral) ratanas at S ii.217 & iii.83 are probably the same as are given in detail at Miln 336, viz. the 5: sīla˚, samādhi˚, paññā˚, vimutti˚, vimutti -- ñāṇadassana (also given under the collective name sīla -- kkhandha or dhamma -- kkhandha), to which are added the 2: paṭisambhidā˚ & bojjhanga˚. These 7 are probably meant at PvA 66, where it is said that Sakka "endowed their house with the 7 jewels" (sattar. -- bharitaŋ katvā). -- Very frequent is a Triad of Gems (ratana -- ttaya), consisting of Dhamma, Sangha, Buddha, or the Doctrine, the Church and the Buddha [cp. BSk. ratna -- traya Divy 481], e. g. Mhvs 5, 81; VbhA 284; VvA 123; PvA 1, 49, 141.

-- ākara a pearl -- mine, a mine of precious metals Th 1, 1049; J ii.414; vi.459; Dpvs i.18. -- kūṭa a jewelled top DhA i.159. -- paliveṭhana a wrapper for a gem or jewel Pug 34. -- vara the best of gems Sn 683 ( = vararatana -- bhūta SnA 486). -- sutta the Suttanta of the (3) Treasures (viz. Dhamma, Sangha, Buddha), representing Sutta Nipāta ii.1 (P.T.S. ed. pp. 39 -- 42), mentioned as a parittā at Vism 414 (with 4 others) and at Miln 150 (with 5 others), cp. KhA 63; SnA 201. Ratana
Ratana2
[most likely = Sk. aratni: see ratani] a linear measure (which Abhp p. 23 gives as equal to 12 angula, or 7 ratanas=1 yaṭṭhi: see Kirfel, Kosmographie, p. 335. The same is given by Bdhgh. at VbhA 343: dve vidatthiyo ratanaŋ; satta r. yaṭṭhi) J v.36 (vīsaŋr -- sataŋ); vi.401 (˚mattaŋ); VvA 321 (so given by Hardy in Index as "measure of length," but to be taken as ratana1, as indicated clearly by context & C.); Miln 282 (satta -- patiṭṭhito aṭṭha -- ratan' ubbedho nava -- ratan' āyāma -- pariṇāho pāsādiko dassanīyo Uposatho nāgarājā: alluding to ratana1 2!). Ratanaka
Ratanaka
( -- ˚) (adj.) [ratana+ka, the ending belonging to the whole cpd.] characteristic of a gem, or a king's treasure; in phrase aniggata -- ratanake "When the treasure has not gone out" Vin iv.160, where the chief queen is meant with "treasure." Ratani
Ratani
[Sk. aratni "elbow" with apocope and diaeresis; given at Halāyudha 2, 381 as "a cubit, or measure from the elbow to the tip of the little finger." The form ratni also occurs in Sk. The etym. is fr. Idg. *ole (to bend), cp. Av. arəpna elbow; Sk. arāla bent; of which enlarged bases *olen in Lat. ulna, ond *oleq in Lat. lacertus, Sk. lakutaḥ = P. laguḷa. See cognates in Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. lacertus] a cubit Miln 85 (aṭṭha rataniyo). Ratanika
Ratanika
(adj.) [fr. ratana] a ratana in length J i.7 (aḍḍha˚); Miln 312 (aṭṭha˚). Rati
Rati
(f.) [Classic Sk. rati, fr. ram] love, attachment, pleasure, liking for (loc.), fondness of S i.133 (˚ŋ paccanubhavati), 207; iii.256; Sn 41 ( = anukkhaṇṭhit' adhivacanaŋ Nd2 537), 59 (id.), 270, 642, 956 (=nekkhamma -- rati paviveka˚, upasama˚ Nd1 457); J iii.277 (kilesa˚); DhA iv.225; PvA 77. -- arati dislike, aversion S i.7, 54, 128, 180, 197; v.64; Sn 270 (+rati), 642 (id.); Dh 418 (rati+); Th 2, 339; DhsA 193; PvA 64; Sdhp 476. -- ratiŋ karoti to delight in, to make love Vism 195 (purisā itthīsu). -- 564 -- Ratin
Ratin
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. rati] fond of, devoted to, keen on, fostering; f. ratinī J iv.320 (ahiŋsā˚). Ratta
Ratta1
[pp. of rañjati, cp. Sk. rakta] 1. dyed, coloured M i.36 (dūratta -- vaṇṇa difficult to dye or badly dyed; MA 167 reads duratta and expls as durañjita -- vaṇṇa; opp. suratta ibid.); Sn 287 (nānā -- rattehi vatthehi); Vism 415 (˚vattha -- nivattha, as sign of mourning); DhA iv.226 (˚vattha). -- 2. red. This is used of a high red colour, more like crimson. Sometimes it comes near a meaning like "shiny, shining, glittering" (as in ratta -- suvaṇṇa the glittering gold), cp. etym. & meaning of rajati and rajana. It may also be taken as "bleached" in ratta -- kambala. In ratta -- phalika (crystal) it approaches the meaning of "white," as also in expln of puṇḍarīka at J v.216 with ratta -- paduma "white lotus." -- It is most commonly found in foll. combns at foll. passages: Miln 191 (˚lohita -- candana); Vism 172 (˚kambala), 174 (˚koraṇḍaka), 191 (˚paṭākā); J i.394 (pavāla -- ratta -- kambala); iii.30 (˚puppha -- dāma); v.37 (˚sālivana), 216 (˚paduma); 372 (˚suvaṇṇa); DhA i.393 (id.), 248 (˚kambala); iv.189 (˚candanarukkha red -- sandal tree); SnA 125 (where paduma is given as "ratta -- set' ādivasena"); VvA 4 (˚dupaṭṭa), 65 (˚suvaṇṇa), 177 (˚phalika); PvA 4 (˚virala -- mālā; garland of red flowers for the convict to be executed, cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung 104), 157 (˚paduma), 191 (˚sāli); Mhvs 30, 36 (˚kambala); 36, 82 (rattāni akkhīni bloodshot eyes). With the latter cp. cpd. rattakkha "with red eyes" (fr. crying) at PvA 39 (v. l. BB.), and Np. rattakkhin "Red -- eye" (Ep. of a Yakkha). -> 3. (fig.) excited, infatuated, impassioned S iv.339; Sn 795 (virāga˚); It 92 (maccā rattā); Miln 220. Also in combn ratta duṭṭha mūḷha: see Nd2 s. v. chanda; cp. bhava -- rāga -- ratta. Ratta
Ratta2
(nt.) & (poet.) rattā (f.) [Epic Sk. rātra; Vedic rātra only in cpd. aho -- rātraŋ. Semantically an abstr. formation in collect. meaning "the space of a night's time," hence "interval of time" in general. Otherwise rātri: see under ratti] (rarely) night; (usually) time in general. Occurs only -- ˚, with expressions giving a definite time. Independently (besides cpds. mentioned below) only at one (doubtful) passage, viz. Sn 1071, where BB MSS. read rattam -- ahā for rattaŋ aho, which corresponds to the Vedic phrase aho -- rātraŋ ( = P. ahorattaŋ). The P.T.S. ed. reads nattaŋ; SnA 593 reads nattaŋ, but expls as rattin -- divaŋ, whereas Nd2 538 reads rattaŋ & expls: "rattaŋ vuccati ratti, ahā (sic lege!) ti divaso, rattiñ ca divañ ca." -- Otherwise only in foll. adv. expressions (meaning either "time" or "night"): instr. eka -- rattena in one night J i.64; satta˚ after one week (lit. a seven -- night) Sn 570. -- acc. sg. cira -- rattaŋ a long time Sn 665; dīgha˚ id. [cp. BSk. dīrgha -- rātraŋ freq.] Sn 22; M i.445; aḍḍha˚ at "halfnight," i. e. midnight A iii.407; pubba -- ratt' âpararattaŋ one night after the other (lit. the last one and the next) DhA iv.129. -- acc. pl. cira rattāni a long time J v.268. -- loc. in var. forms, viz. vassa -- ratte in the rainy season J v.38 (Kern, Toev. s. v. gives wrongly iii.37, 143; aḍḍha -- ratte at midnight PvA 152; aḍḍha-> rattāyaŋ at midnight Vv 8116 (=aḍḍharattiyaŋ VvA 315); divā ca ratto ca day & night Vv 315 (= rattiyaŋ VvA 130); cira -- rattāya a long time J v.267; Pv i.94.

-- andhakāra the dark of night, nightly darkness Vin iv.268 (oggate suriye); M i.448. -- ûparata abstaining from food at night D i.5 (cp. DA i.77). -- ññu of long standing, recognised D i.48 (in phrase: r. cira -- pabbajito addhagato etc.; expld at DA i.143 as "pabbajjato paṭṭhāya atikkantā bahū rattiyo jānātī ti r."); A ii.27 (here the pl. rattaññā, as if fr. sg. ratta -- ñña); Sn p. 92 (therā r. cira -- pabbajitā; the expln at SnA 423 is rather fanciful with the choice of either = ratana -- ññu, i. e. knowing the gem of Nibbāna, or=bahu -- ratti -- vidū, i. e. knowing many nights); ThA 141. A f. abstr. ˚ññutā "recognition" is found at M i.445 (spelt rataññūtā, but v. l. ˚utā). -- samaye (loc., adv.) at the time of (night) J i.63 (aḍḍha -- ratta˚ at midnight), 264 (id.); iv.74 (vassa˚ in the rainy season); PvA 216 (aḍḍha˚). Ratti
Ratti
(f.) [Vedic rātrī & later Sk. rātri. -- Idg *lādh as in Gr. lh/qw = Lat. lateo to hide; Sk rāhu dark demon; also Gr. *lhtw/ (=Lat. Latona) Goddess of night; Mhg. luoder insidiousness; cp. further Gr. lanqa/nw to be hidden, lh/qh oblivion (E. lethargy). -- The by -- form of ratti is ratta2] night D i.47 (dosinā). gen. sg. ratyā (for *rattiyā) Th 1, 517; Sn 710 (vivasane=ratti -- samatikkame SnA 496); J vi.491. abl. sg. rattiyā in phrases abhikkantāya r. at the waning of night D ii.220; Vin i.26; S i.16; M i.143; & pabhātāya r. when night grew light, i. e. dawn J i.81, 500. instr. pl. rattīsu Vin i.288 (hemantikāsu r.). A loc. ratyā (for *rātryām) and a nom. pl. ratyo (for *rātryaḥ) is given by Geiger, P.Gr. § 583. -- Very often combd with and opp. to diva in foll. combns: rattin -- diva [cp. BSk. rātrindiva=Gr. nuxqh/meron, AvŚ i.274, 278; ii.176; Divy 124] a day & a night (something like our "24 hours"), in phrase dasa rattindivā a decade of n. & d. (i. e. a 10 -- day week) A v.85 sq.; adverbially satta -- rattin -- divaŋ a week DhA i.108. As adv. in acc. sg.: rattin -- divaŋ night and day A iii.57; Sn 507, 1142; It 93; J i.30; or rattiñ ca divañ ca Nd2 538, or rattiŋ opposed to adv. divā by night -- by day M i.143; PvA 43. -- Other cases as adv.: acc. eka rattiŋ one night J i.62; Pv ii.97; PvA 42; taŋ rattiŋ that night Mhvs 4, 38; imaŋ r. this night M i.143; yañ car. . . . yañ car. . . . etasmiŋ antare in between yon night and yon night It 121; rattiŋ at night Miln 42; rattiŋ rattiŋ night after night Mhvs 30, 16. -- gen. rattiyā ca divasassa ca by n. & by day S ii.95. -- loc. rattiyañ by night VvA 130, 315 (aḍḍha˚ at midnight); PvA 22; and ratto in phrase divā ca ratto ca Sn 223; Th 2, 312; Dh 296; Vv 315; 8432; S i.33.

-- khaya the wane of night J i.19. -- cāra (sabba˚) allnight wandering S i.201 (trsl. "festival"). -- cheda interruption of the probationary period (t. t.) Vin ii.34 (three such: sahavāsa, vippavāsa, anārocanā). -- dhūmāyanā smouldering at night Vism 107 (v. l. dhūp˚), combd with divā -- pajjalanā, cp. M i.143: ayaŋ vammīko rattiŋ dhūmāyati divā pajjalati. -- pariyanta limitation of the probationary period (t. t.) Vin ii.59. -- bhāga night -- time J iii.43 (˚bhāge); Miln 18 (˚bhāgena). -- bhojana eating at night M i.473; DA i.77. -- samaya night -- time, only in loc. aḍḍha -- ratti -- samaye at midnight VvA 255; PvA 155. Ratha
Ratha1
[Vedic ratha, Av. rapa, Lat. rota wheel, rotundus ("rotund" & round), Oir. roth = Ohg rad wheel, Lith. rãtas id.] a two -- wheeled carriage, chariot (for riding, driving or fighting S i.33 (ethically); A iv.191 (horse & cart; diff. parts of a ratha); M i.396; Sn 300, 654; Vism 593 (in its compn of akkha, cakka, pañjara, īsā etc.); J iii.239 (passaddha˚ carriage slowing up); Th 2, 229 (caturassaŋ rathaŋ, i. e. a Vimāna); Mhvs 35, 42 (goṇā rathe yuttā); VvA 78 (500), 104, 267 (=Vimāna), PvA 74. -- assatarī˚ a chariot drawn by a she -- mule Vv 208=438; Pv i.111; J vi.355. -- Phussa -- ratha state carriage J iii.238; vi.30 sq. See under ph. -- On ratha in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 127.

-- atthara (rathatthara) a rug for a chariot D i.7; Vin i.192; ii.163. -- anīka array of chariots Vin iv.108. -- īsā carriage pole A iv.191. -- ûpatthara chariot or carriage cover D i.103; DA i.273. -- esabha (ratha+ ṛṣabha, Sk. rathārṣabha) lord of charioteers. Ratha here in meaning of "charioteer"; Childers sees rathin in this cpd.; Trenckner, Notes 59, suggests distortion from rathe śubha. Dhpāla at PvA 163 clearly understands it as ratha -- = charioteer explaining "rathesu usabha -- sadiso mahā -- ratho ti attho"; as does Bdhgh. at SnA 321 (on Sn 303): "mahā -- rathesu khattiyesu akampiy' aṭṭhena usabha -- sadiso." -- Sn 303 -- 308, 552; Pv ii.131; Mhvs 5, 246; 15, 11; 29, 12. -- kāra carriagebuilder, chariot -- maker, considered as a class of very low social standing, rebirth in which is a punishment (cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung 56, 207, 209 sq.) S i.93; Vin iv.9 (as term of abuse, enumd with other low grades: caṇḍāla veṇa nesāda r. pukkusa), 12 (˚jāti); M ii.152, 183 f.; as kārin at Pv iii.113 (expld as cammakārin PvA 175). As Npl. name of one of the 7 Great Lakes in the Himālaya (Rathakāradaha), e. g. at Vism 416; SnA 407. -- cakka wheel of a chariot or carriage Vism 238 (in simile, concerning its circumference); PvA 65. -- pañjara the body (lit. "cage" or "frame") of a carriage Vv 831 (=rath' ûpattha VvA 326); J ii.172; iv.60; DhA i.28. -- yuga a chariot yoke J vi.42. -- reṇu "chariot -- dust," a very minute quantity (as a measure), a mite. Childers compares Sk. trasareṇu a mote of dust, atom. It is said to consist of 36 tajjāri's, and 36 ratha -- reṇu's are equal to one likkhā: VbhA 343. -- vinīta "led by a chariot," a chariot -- drive (Neumann, "Eilpost"), name of the 24th Suttanta of Majjhima (M i.145 sq.), quoted at Vism 93, 671 and SnA 446. -- sālā chariot shed DhA iii.121. -- 565 -- Ratha
Ratha2
[fr. ram, cp. Sk. ratha] pleasure, joy, delight: see mano˚. Rathaka
Rathaka1
(nt.) [fr. ratha, cp. Sk. rathaka m.] a little carriage, a toy cart D i.6 (cp. DA i.86: khuddakarathaŋ); Vin ii.10; iii.180; M i.226; Miln 229. Rathaka
Rathaka2
(adj.) [ratha+ka] having a chariot, neg. a˚ without a chariot J vi.515. Rathika
Rathika
[fr. ratha] fighter fr. a chariot, charioteer M i.397 (saññāto kusalo rathassa anga -- paccangānaŋ); D i.51 (in list of var. occupations, cp. DA i.156); J vi.15 (+patti -- kārika), 463 (id.). Rathikā & Rathiyā
Rathikā
& Rathiyā (f.) [Vedic rathya belonging to the chariot, later Sk. rathyā road. See also racchā] a carriage -- road. -- (a) rathikā: Vin ii.268; Vism 60; PvA 4, 67. -- (b) rathiyā: D i.83; Vin i.237, 344; M ii.108; iii.163; S i.201; ii.128; iv.344. In compn rathiya˚, e. g. rathiya -- coḷa "street -- rag" Vism 62 (expld as rathikāya chaḍḍita -- coḷaka). Rada
Rada
at ThA 257 in cpd. "sannivesa -- visiṭṭha -- rada -- visesa- yutta" is not quite clear ("splitting"?). Radati
Radati
[rad: see etym. at Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. rado ("rase"). Given in meaning "vilekhana" at Dhtp 159 & Dhtm 220. Besides this it is given at Dhtm 224 in meaning "bhakkhana"] to scratch Dhtp 159; cp. rada & radana tooth Abhp 261. Randha
Randha1
[for Sk. raddha, pp. of randhati 2] cooked J v.505; vi.24; Miln 107. Randha
Randha2
[Sk. randhra, fr. randhati 1; the P. form viâ *randdha: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 581] opening, cleft, open spot; flaw, defect, weak spot A iv.25; Sn 255, 826 randhamesin looking for somebody's weak spot; cp. Nd1 165 ("virandham˚ aparandham˚ khalitam˚ gaḷitam˚ vivaram -- esī ti"); J ii.53; iii.192; SnA 393 (+vivara); DhA iii.376, 377 (˚gavesita). Randhaka
Randhaka
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. randhati 2] one who cooks, cooking, a cook J iv.431 (bhatta˚). Randhati
Randhati
[radh or randh, differentiated in Pāli to 2 meanings & 2 verbs according to Dhtm: "hiŋsāyaŋ" (148), and "pāke" (827). In the former sense given as raṇḍ, in the latter randh. The root is freq. in the Vedas, in meaning 1. It belongs perhaps to Ags. rendan to rend: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s, v. lumbus] to be or make subject to, (intrs.) to be in one's power; (trs.) to harass, oppress, vex, hurt (mostly Caus. randheti = Sk. randhayati). Only in Imper. randhehi J i.332, and in Prohib. mā randhayi J v.121, and pl. mā randhayuŋ Dh 248 (=mā randhantu mā mathantu DhA iii.357). See also randha2. -- 2. to cook (cp. Sk. randhi & randhana) Miln 107 (bhojanaŋ randheyya). -- pp. randha1. Rapati
Rapati
[rap] to chatter, whisper Dhtp 187 ("vacane"); Dhtm 266 ("akkose"). See also lapati. Rabhasa
Rabhasa
[rabh = labh, which see for etym. Cp. also Lat rabies. -- Dhtp 205 expls rabh (correctly) by ārambha & Dhtm 301 by rābhassa] wild, terrible, violent D i.91, expld by "bahu -- bhāṇin" at DA i.256. There are several vv. ll. at this passage. Rama
Rama
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. ram] delighting, enjoyable; only in cpd. dū˚ ( = duḥ) difficult to enjoy, not fit for pleasures; as nt. absence of enjoyment Dh 87=S v.24; and mano˚ gladdening the mind (q. v.). Ramaṇa
Ramaṇa
(adj.) [fr. ramati; cp. Sk. ramaṇa] pleasing, charming, delightful DhA ii.202 (˚ṭṭhāna). Ramaṇaka
Ramaṇaka
(adj.) = ramaṇa J iii.207. Ramaṇīya
Ramaṇīya
(& ˚nīya) (adj.) [grd. of ramati] delightful, pleasing, charming, pleasant, beautiful D i.47 (˚ṇīyā dosinā ratti, cp. DA i.141); Sn 1013; Mhvs 15, 69 (ṇ); PvA 42, 51 (expln for rucira). As ramaṇeyya at S i.233. Cp. rāmaṇeyya(ka). Ramati
Ramati
[ram; defd by Dhtp 224 & Dhtm 318 by "kīḷā- yaŋ"] 1. to enjoy oneself, to delight in; to sport, find amusement in (loc.) S i.179; Vin 197 (ariyo na r. pāpe); Sn 985 (jhāne); Dh 79 (ariya -- ppavedite dhamme sadā r. paṇḍito); subj. 1st pl. ramāmase Th 2, 370 (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. 126); med. 1st sg. rame J v.363; imper. rama Pv ii.1220 (r. deva mayā saha; better with v. l. as ramma); -- fut. ramissati PvA 153. -- ger. ramma Pv ii.1220 (v. l. for rama). grd. ramma & ramanīya (q. v.). -- pp. rata. -- Caus. I. rameti to give pleasure to, to please, to fondle Th 1, 13; J v.204; vi.3 (pp. ramayamāna); Miln 313. -- pp. ramita (q. v.). -> Caus. II. ramāpeti to enjoy oneself J vi.114. Ramita
Ramita
[pp. of rameti] having enjoyed, enjoying, taking delight in, amusing oneself with (loc. or saha) Sn 709 (vanante r. siyā); Dh 305 (id. = abhirata DhA iii.472); Pv ii.1221 ('mhi tayā saha). Rambati
Rambati
(& lambati) [lamb] to hang down. Both forms are given with meaning "avasaŋsane" at Dhtp 198 and Dhtm 283. Rambhā
Rambhā
(f.) [Sk. rambhā] a plantain or banana tree Abhp 589. Ramma
Ramma
(adj.) [grd. of ramati] enjoyable, charming, beau- tiful Sn 305; ThA 71 (v. 30); Mhvs 1, 73; 14, 47; Sdhp 248, 512. Rammaka
Rammaka
(adj.) [Sk ramyaka] N. of the month Chaitra J v.63. Raya
Raya
[fr. ri, riṇāti to let loose or flow, which is taken as ray at Dhtp 234, defd as "gamana," and at Dhtm 336 as "gati." The root ri itself is given at Dhtm 351 in meaning "santati," i. e. continuation. -- On etym. cp. Vedic retaḥ; Lat. rivus river = Gall, Rēnos "Rhine." See Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. rivus] speed, lit. current Abhp 40. See rava1. Rava
Rava1
[for raya, with v. for y as freq. in Pāli, Dhtm 352: ru "gate"] speed, exceeding swiftness, galloping, in combn with dava running at Vin ii.101; iv.4; M i.446 (better reading here dav' atthe rav' atthe for dhāve ravatthe, cp. vv. ll. on p. 567 & Neumann, Mittl. Sammlg. ii.672 n. 49). Note. At the Vin passages it refers to speaking & making blunders by over -- hurrying oneself in speaking. -- The Dhtm (No. 871) gives rava as a synonym of rasa (with assāda & sneha). It is not clear what the connection is between those two meanings. -- 566 -- Rava
Rava2
[fr. ru, cp. Vedic rava] loud sound, roar, shout, cry; any noise uttered by animals J ii.110; iii.277; DhA i.232 (sabba -- rava -- ññu knowing all sounds of animals); Miln 357 (kāruñña˚). See also rāva & ruta. Ravaka
Ravaka
= rava, in go˚ a cow's bellowing M i.225. Ravaṇa
Ravaṇa
(adj. -- nt.) [fr. ravati] roaring, howling, singing, only in cpd. ˚ghaṭa a certain kind of pitcher, where meaning of ravaṇa is uncertain. Only at identical passages (in illustration) Vism 264 = 362=KhA 68 (reading peḷā -- ghaṭa, but see App. p. 870 ravaṇa˚)= VbhA 68 (where v. l. yavana˚, with?). Ravati
Ravati
[ru: Idg. *re & *reu, cp. Lat. ravus "raw, hoarse," raucus, rūmor "rumour"; Gr. w)ruo/mai to shout, w)rudo/n roaring, etc.; Dhtp 240: ru "sadde"] to shout, cry, make a (loud) noise Miln 254. -- aor. ravi J i.162 (baddha -- rāvaŋ ravi); ii.110; iii.102; PvA 100; arāvi Mhvs 10, 69 (mahā -- rāvaŋ); and aravi Mhvs 32, 79. -> pp. ravita & ruta. -- Cp. abhi˚, vi˚. Ravi
Ravi
[cp. Sk. ravi] the sun J ii.375 (taruṇa˚ -- vaṇṇa- ratha).

-- inda "king of the sun," N. of the lotus Dāvs iii.37. -- haŋsa "sun -- swan," N. of a bird J vi.539. Ravita
Ravita
[pp. of ravati] shouted, cried, uttered Miln 178 (sakuṇa -- ruta˚). Rasa
Rasa1
[Vedic rasa; with Lat. ros "dew," Lith. rasā id., and Av Ranhā N. of a river, to Idg. *eres to flow, as in Sk. arṣati, Gr. a)/yorros (to r(e/w); also Sk. ṛṣabha: see usabha1. -- Dhtp 325 defines as "assādane" 629 as "assāda -- snehanesu"; Dhtm 451 as "assāde." -- The decl. is usually as regular a -- stem, but a secondary instr. fr. an s -- stem is to be found in rasasā by taste A ii.63; J iii.328] that which is connected with the sense of taste. The defn given at Vism 447 is as follows: "jivhā -- paṭihanana -- lakkhaṇo raso, jivhā -- viññāṇassa visaya -- bhāvo raso, tass' eva gocara -- paccupaṭṭhāno, mūla -- raso khandha -- raso ti ādinā nayena anekavidho," i. e. rasa is physiologically & psychologically peculiar to the tongue (sense -- object & sense -- perception), and also consists as a manifold object in extractions from roots, trunk etc. (see next). -- The conventional encyclopaedic defn of rasa at Nd1 240; Nd2 540, Dhs 629 gives taste according to: (a) the 6 -- fold objective source as mūla -- rasa, khandha˚, taca˚, patta˚, puppha˚, phala˚, or taste (i. e. juice, liquid) of root, trunk, bark, leaf, flower & fruit; and -- (b) the 12 -- fold subjective (physiological) sense -- perception as ambila, madhura, tittika, kaṭuka loṇika, khārika, lambila (Miln 56: ambila), kasāva; sādu, asādu, sīta, uṇha, or sour, sweet, bitter, pungent, salt, alkaline, sour, astringent; pleasant, unpleasant, cold & hot. Miln 56 has the foll.: ambila, lavaṇa, tittaka, kaṭuka, kasāya, madhura. -- 1. juice [as applied in the Veda to the Soma juice], e.g. in the foll. combns: ucchu˚ of sugar cane, extract of sugar, cane syrup Vin i.246; VvA 180; patta˚ & puppha˚ of leaf & flower Vin i.246; madhura˚ of honey PvA 119. -- 2. taste as (objective) quality, the sense -- object of taste (cp. above defns). In the list of the āyatanas, or senses with their complementary sense -- objects (sentient and sensed) rasa occupies the 4th place, following upon gandha. It is stated that one tastes (or "senses") taste with the tongue (no reference to palate): jivhāya rasaŋ sāyitvā (or viññeyya). See also āyatana 3 and rūpa. -- M iii.55 (jivhā -- viññeyya r.), 267; D iii.244, 250; Sn 387; Dhs 609; PvA 50 (vaṇṇagandha -- rasa -- sampanna bhojana: see below 5). -- 3. sense of taste, as quality & personal accomplishment. Thus in the list of senses marking superiority (the 10 ādhipateyyas or ṭhāṇas), similar to rasa as special distinction of the Mahāpurisa (see cpd. ras -- agga) S iv.275 = Pv ii.958; A iv.242. -- 4. object or act of enjoyment, sensual stimulus, material enjoyment, pleasure (usually in pl.) Sn 65 (rasesu gedha, see materialistic exegesis at Nd2 540), 854 (rase na anugijjhati; perhaps better rasesu, as SnA); A iii.237 (puriso agga˚ -- parititto: perhaps to No. 2). -- 5. flavour and its substance (or substratum), e. g. soup VvA 243 (kakkaṭaka˚ crabsoup), cp. S v.149, where 8 soup flavours are given (ambila, tittaka, kaṭuka, madhura, khārika, akhārika, loṇika, aloṇika); Pv ii.115 (aneka -- rasa -- vyañjana "with exceptionally flavoured sauce"); J v.459, 465. gorasa "flavour of cow, i. e. produce of cow: see under go. Also metaphorically: "flavour, relish, pleasure": Sn 257 (pariveka˚, dhamma -- pīṭi˚, cp. SnA 299 "assād' aṭṭhena" i. e. tastiness); PvA 287 (vimutti˚ relish of salvation). So also as attha˚, dhamma˚, vimutti˚ Ps ii.89. -- 6. (in grammar & style) essential property, elegance, brightness; in dramatic art "sentiment" (flavour) (see Childers s. v. naṭya -- rasa) Miln 340 (with opamma and lakkhaṇa: perhaps to No. 7); PvA 122 (˚rasa as ending in Np. Angīrasa, expld as jutiyā adhivacanaŋ, " i. e. brightness, excellency). -- 7. at t. t. in philosophy "essential property" (Expos. 84), combd with lakkhaṇa etc. (cp. Cpd. 13, 213), either kicca˚ function or sampatti˚ property DhsA 63, 249; Vism 8, 448; Miln 148. -- 8. fine substance, semi -- solid semiliquid substance, extract, delicacy, fineness, dust. Thus in paṭhavī˚ "essence of earth," humus S i.134 (trsln "taste of earth," rather abstract); or rasapaṭhavī earth as dust or in great fineness, "primitive earth" (before taking solid shape) D iii.86 sq. (trsl. "savoury earth," not quite clear), opp. to bhūmipappaṭaka; Vism 418; pabbata -- rasa mountain extract, rock -- substance J iii.55; suvaṇṇa˚ gold dust J i.93. -> 9. (adj. -- ˚) tasting Vv 1611 (Amatarasā f.=nibbānarasāvinī VvA 85).

-- agga finest quality (of taste), only in further compn with ˚aggita (ras -- agga -- s -- aggita) most delicate sense trsln Dial.) D iii.167, and ˚aggin (ras -- agga -- s -- aggin, cp. MVastu ii.306: rasa -- ras' âgrin) of the best quality (of taste, cp. above 2), said of the Mahāpurisa D ii.18 = iii.144 (cp. trsln Dial. ii.15 "his taste is supremely acute"). The phrase & its wording are still a little doubtful. Childers gives etym. of rasaggas -- aggin as rasa -- ggas -- aggin, ggas representing gras to swallow (not otherwise found in Pāli!), and expls the BSk. ras'âgrin as a distortion of the P. form. -- añjana a sort of ointment (among 5 kinds), "vitriol" (Rh. D.) Vin i.203. -- âda enjoying the objects of taste M iii.168. -- āyatana the sphere of taste D iii.243, 290; Dhs 629, 653, 1195 (insert after gandha˚, see Dhs. trsl. 319). -- ārammaṇa object of taste Dhs 12, 147, 157. -- āsā craving for tastes Dhs 1059. -- garuka bent on enjoyment SnA 107. -- taṇhā thirst for taste, lust of sensual enjoyment D iii.244, 280; J v.293; Dhs 1059; DhA iv.196. -- saññā perception of tastes D iii.244 (where also ˚sañcetanā). -- haraṇī (f.) [ph. ˚haraṇiyo, in compn haraṇi˚] taste -- conductor, taste -- receiver; the salivary canals of the mouth or the nerves of sensation; these are in later literature given as numbering 7000, e. g. at J v.293 (khobhetvā phari); DhA i.134 (anuphari); KhA 51 (only as 7!); SnA 107 (paṭhama -- kabaḷe mukhe pakkhitta -- matte satta rasa -- haraṇi -- sahassāni amaten' eva phutāni ahesuŋ). Older passages are: Vin ii.137; D iii.167 (referring to the Mahāpurisa: "sampajjasā r -- haranī susaṇṭhitā," trsln: erect taste -- bearers planted well [in throat]). -- 567 -- Rasa
Rasa2
( -- ˚) is a dial. form of ˚dasa ten, and occurs in Classic Pāli only in the numerals for 13 (terasa), 15 (paṇṇa -- rasa, pannarasa), 17 (sattarasa) & 18 (aṭṭhārasa, late). The Prk. has gone further: see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 245. Rasaka
Rasaka
[fr. rasa, cp. Classic Sk. rasaka] a cook J v.460, 461, 507. Rasati
Rasati
[ras] to shout, howl J ii.407 (vv. ll. rayati, vasati; C. expls as "nadati") = iv.346 (v. l. sarati). Rasatta
Rasatta
(nt.) [fr. rasa] taste, sweetness SnA 299. Rasavatī
Rasavatī
(f.) [rasa+vant] "possessing flavours" i. e. a kitchen Vin i.140. Rasāvin
Rasāvin
(adj. [fr. rasa] tasting VvA 85 (nibbāna˚). Rasīyati
Rasīyati
[Pass. -- Demon. -- formation fr. rasa] to find taste or satisfaction in (gen.), to delight in, to be pleased A iv.387 (bhāsitassa), 388 (C.: tussati, see p. 470). Rasmi
Rasmi
see raŋsi. Rassa
Rassa
(adj.) [cp. Sk. hrasva: Geiger, P.Gr. § 492. The Prk. forms are rahassa & hassa: Pischel § 354] short (opp. dīgha) D i.193 (dīghā vā r. vā majjhimā ti vā), 223 (in contrast with d.); Sn 633; Dh 409; J i.356; Dhs 617; Vism 272 (def.); DhA iv.184. -- Cp. ati˚.

-- ādesa reduction of the determination (here of vowel in ending) J iii.489. -- sarīra (adj.) dwarfish, stunted J i.356. Rassatta
Rassatta
(nt.) [fr. rassa] shortness, reduction (of vowel) DhsA 149. Rahati
Rahati
[rah, defd at Dhtp 339 & 632 by "cāga," giving up, also at Dhtm 490 by "cāgasmiŋ," 876 by cāga and gata] to leave, desert: see pp. rahita & der. rahas, rahassa. Rahada
Rahada
[Vedic hrada, with diaeresis & metathesis *harada >rahada; the other metathetic form of the same hrada is *draha>daha] a (deep) pond, a lake D i.50 (˚ŋ iva vippasannaŋ udānaŋ); S i.169 = 183 (dhammo rahado sīla -- tittho); Sn 721 =Miln 414 (rahado pūro va paṇḍito); It 92 (rahado va nivāto), 114 (r. sa -- ummi sāvaṭṭo sagaho); DhA ii.152. -- As udaka˚ at D i.74, 84; A iii.25 (ubbhid -- odako); Pug 47. -- On r. in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 127. Rahas & Raho
Rahas
& Raho (nt.) [Vedic rahas. The Pāli word is restricted to the forms raho and rahā˚ ( = *rahaḥ); a loc. rahasi is mentioned by Childers, but not found in the Canon. -- To rahati] lonely place, solitude, loneliness; secrecy, privacy. -- 1. raho: occurring only as adv. "secretly, lonely, in secret," either absolutely, e. g. S i.46; Sn 388; Pv ii.716 (opp. āvi openly); iv.140 (raho nisinna); Vism 201 (na raho karoti pāpāni: arahaŋ tena vuccati); or in cpds. e. g. ˚gata being in private, being alone D i.134 (+paṭisallīna); Sn p. 60. See also under paṭisallīna; ˚gama "secret convention, secret intercourse," fig. a secret adviser J vi.369 (after Kern, not found!); ˚vāda secret talk M iii.230. See also anu˚. -- 2. rahā˚, only in cpd. rahā -- bhāva secrecy, in defn of arahant at DA i.146=Vism 201 (rahābhāvena ten' esa arahan ti). See also der. rāha -- seyyaka. Note. Hardy's reading yathā rahaŋ at Pv ii.923 & PvA 78 is not correct, it should be yath' ârahaŋ (cp. similarly pūj -- âraha). In the same sense we would preferably read agg' āsan' ādi -- arahānaŋ "of those who merit the first seat etc." at J i.217, although all MSS. have aggāsanādi -- rahānaŋ, thus postulating a form raha=araha. Rahassa
Rahassa
(adj. nt.) [Sk. rahasya] secret, private; nt. secrecy, secret Mhvs 35, 64 (vatvā rahassaŋ); instr. rahassena (as adv.) secretly Mhvs 36, 80; acc. rahassaŋ id. Pv iv. 165.

-- kathā secret speech, whispered words J i.411; ii.6. Rahassaka
Rahassaka
(adj.) [fr. rahassa] secret Miln 91 (guyhaŋ na kātabbaŋ na rahassakaŋ). Rahāyati
Rahāyati
[Denom. fr. rahas; not corresponding to Sk. rahayati, C. of rahati to cause to leave] to be lonely, to wish to be alone M ii.119. Rahita
Rahita
[pp. of rah] 1. lonely, forsaken Th 2, 373 (gantum icchasi rahitaŋ bhiŋsanakaŋ mahāvanaŋ). -- 2. deprived of, without ( -- ˚) J iii.369 (buddhiyā rahitā sattā); DA i.36 (avaṇṇa˚); PvA 63 (bhoga˚), 67 (ācāra˚), 77 (gandha˚).

Note. samantarahita is to be divided as sam -- antarahita. Rāga
Rāga
[cp. Sk. rāga, fr. raj: see rajati] 1. colour, hue; colouring, dye Vin ii.107 (anga˚ "rougeing" the body: bhikkhū angarāgaŋ karonti); ThA 78; SnA 315 (nānāvidha˚). -- 2 (as t. t. in philosophy & ethics) excitement, passion; seldom by itself, mostly in combn with dosa, & moha, as the three fundamental blemishes of character: passion or lust (uncontrolled excitement), ill -- will (anger) and infatuation (bewilderment): see dosa2 & moha; cp. sarāga. -- These three again appear in manifold combns with similar terms, all giving var. shades of the "craving for existence" or "lust of life" (taṇhā etc.), or all that which is an obstacle to nibbāna. Therefore the giving up of rāga is one of the steps towards attaining the desired goal of emancipation (vimutti). -- Some of the combns are e. g. the 3 (r. d. m.)+kilesa; +kodha; very often fourfold r. d. m. with māna, these again with diṭṭhi: see in full Nd2 s. v. rāga (p. 237), cp. below ussada. -- Of the many passages illustrating the contrast rāga> nibbāna the foll. may be mentioned: chandarāga vinodanaŋ nibbānapadaŋ accutaŋ Sn 1086; yo rāgakkhayo (etc.): idaŋ vuccati amataŋ S v.8; yo rāgakkhayo (etc.): idaŋ vuccati nibbānaŋ S iv.251; ye 'dha pajahanti kāmarāgaŋ bhavararāganu -- sayañ ca pahāya . . . parinibbāna -- gatā Vv 5324; kusalo jahati pāpakaŋ . . . rāga dosa -- mohakkhayā parinibbuto Ud 85. -- Personified, Rāga (v. l. Ragā), Taṇhā & Arati are called the "daughters of Māra" (Māradhītā): Sn 835; DhA iii.199; Nd1 181. -- For further detail of meaning & application see e. g. -- (1) with dosa & moha: D i.79, 156; iii.107, 108, 132; S i.184; iv.139, 195, 250, 305; v.84, 357 sq.; M ii.138 (rasa˚ the excitement of taste); A i.52, 156 sq., 230 sq.; ii.256; iii.169, 451 sq.; iv.144; It 56, 57; Vism 421; VbhA 268, 269 (sa˚ & vīta˚). -- (2) in other connection: D iii.70, 74, 146, 175, 217, 234 (arūpa˚), 249 (cittaŋ pariyādāya tiṭṭhati); S ii.231 = 271 (cittaŋ anuddhaŋseti); iii.10; iv.72, 329; v.74 (na rāgaŋ jāneti etc.); A ii.149 (tibba -- rāga -- jātiko rāgajaŋ dukkhaŋ paṭisaŋvedeti); iii.233, 371 (kāmesu vīta˚); iv.423 (dhamma˚); Sn 2, 74, 139, 270=S i.207 (+dosa); Sn 361, 493, 764, 974, 1046; Dh 349 (tibba˚= bahala -- rāga DhA iv.68); Ps i.80 sq.; ii.37 (rūpa˚), 95 (id.); Vbh 145 sq. (=taṇhā), 368 (=kiñcana), 390; Tikp 155, 167; DA i.116. -- Opp. virāga.

-- aggi the fire of passion D iii.217; S iv.19; It 92 (r. dahati macce ratte kāmesu mucchite; +dosaggi & mohaggi); J i.61 (˚imhi nibbute nibbutaŋ nāma hoti). -- ânusaya latent bias of passion (for = dat.) S iv.205 (the 3 anusayas: rāga˚, paṭigha˚, avijjā˚); It 80 (yo subhāya dhātuyā rāgo so padūyati). -- ussada conceit of lust, one of the 7 ussadas (r. d. m., māna, diṭṭhi, kilesa, kamma) Nd1 72. -- kkhaya the decay (waning) of p. S iii.51, 160: iv.142, 250, 261; v.8, 16, 25; VbhA 51 sq. -- carita one whose habit is passion, of passionate behaviour Miln 92; Vism 105 sq. (in det.), 114 (+dosa˚, moha˚), 193; KhA 54 (colour of the blood of his heart, cp. Vism 409) -- ṭṭhānīya founded on passion A i.264; AA 32. -- patha way of lust, lustfulness, passion, sensuality S iv.70; Sn 370, 476 (with expln "rāgo pi hi duggatīnaŋ pathattā rāgapatho ti vuccati" SnA 410). -- rati passionate or lustful delight DhA iii.112; -- ratta affected with passion S i.136; Sn 795 (as ˚rāgin, cp. Nd1 100=kāma -- guṇesu ratta). -- 568 -- Rāgin
Rāgin
( -- ˚) [fr. rāga] one who shows passion for, possessed of lust, affected with passion Sn 795 (cp. Nd1 100); S i.136; Vism 193, 194 (with var. characterisations). Rājaka
Rājaka
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [rāja+ka, the ending belonging to the whole cpd.] characteristic of the king, king -- ; in cpds. arājaka without a king J vi.39 (raṭṭhe); sarājaka including the king Tikp 26; f. sarājikā Vin i.209 (parisā). Also in phrase anikkhanta -- rājake (loc. abs.) when the king has not gone out Vin iv.160. Rājañña
Rājañña
[fr. rājā, cp, Vedic rājanya] "royalty"; a high courtier, a khattiya ( = rājabhogga, cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung 100) D i.103 (Pasenadi rājā . . . uggehi vā rājaniyehi vā kañcid eva mantanaŋ manteyya); DA i.273 (=anabhisittā kumārā, i. e. uncrowned princes); Miln 234; VvA 297 (Pāyāsi r.). Rājatā
Rājatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. rājā] state of being a king, kingship, sovereignty J i.119 (anuttara -- dhamma˚ being a most righteous king). Rājati
Rājati
[rāj, cp. rajati & rañjati] to shine VvA 134 ( = vij- jotati). Cp. vi˚. Rājā (Rājan)
Rājā
(Rājan) [cp. Vedic rājā, n -- stem. To root *reg, as in Lat. rego (to lead, di -- rect, cp. in meaning Gr. h(gemw/n): see etym. under uju. Cp. Oir. rī king, Gallic Catu -- rīx battle king, Goth reiks = Ohg. rīhhi=rich or Ger. reich. Besides we have *reig in Ags. rāēcean= reach; Ger. reichen. -- The Dhtp only knows of one root rāj in meaning "ditti" i. e. splendour] king, a ruling potentate. The defn at Vin iii.222 is "yo koci rajjaŋ kāreti." The fanciful etym. at D iii.93= Vism 419 is "dhammena pare rañjetī ti rājā" i. e. he gladdens others with his righteousness. -- At the latter passage the origin of kingly government is given as the third stage in the constitution of a people, the 2 preceding being mahā -- sammata (general consent) and khattiya (the land -- aristocrats). -- Cases. We find 3 systems of cases for the original Sk. forms, viz. the contracted, the diaeretic and (in the pl.) a new formation with -- ū -- . Thus gen. & dat. sg. rañño [Sk. rājñaḥ] Vin iii.107; iv.157; J ii.378; iii.5; Vv 744; and rājino Sn 299, 415; Th 2, 463; J iv.495; Mhvs 2, 14; instr. sg. raññā Vin iii.43; J v.444; DhA i.164; PvA 22; VbhA 106; and rājinā [Sk. rajña] Mhvs 6, 2; acc. sg. rājānaŋ Vin iv.157; loc. raññe PvA 76; voc. rāja Sn 422, 423. pl. nom. rājāno A i.68; gen. dat. raññaŋ [Sk. rājñaŋ] D ii.87; Mhvs 18, 32; and rājūnaŋ Vin i.228; Ud 11; J ii.104; iii.487; SnA 484; PvA 101, 133; instr. raññāhi A i.279 rājūhi Ud 41; M ii.120; J i.179; iii.45; Mhvs 5, 80; 8, 21; and rājubhi D ii.258. Cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 921. -- 1. rājā is a term of sovereignship. The term rājā as used in Buddhist India does not admit of a uniform interpretation and translation. It is primarily an appellative (or title) of a khattiya, and often the two are used promiscuously. Besides, it has a far wider sphere of meaning than we convey by any trsln like "king" or even "sovereign," or "prince." We find it used as a designation of "king" in the sense of an elected or successory (crowned) monarch, but also in the meaning of a distinguished nobleman, or a local chieftain, or a prince with var. attributes characterizing his position according to special functions. From this we get the foll. scheme: (a) [based on mythological views: the king as representing the deity, cp. deva= king. Note that rājā never takes the place of deva in the meaning king, but that mahārāja is used in voc. equivalent to deva] a world -- king, over -- lord, a so -- called cakkavatti rājā. This is an office (as "Universal King") peculiar to the Mahāpurisa or the (mythol.) "Great Man," who may become either the Saviour of men in the religious sense, a Sammā -- sambuddha, or a just Ruler of the earth in the worldly sense, a King of Righteousness. These are the 2 gatis of such a being, as described at var. places of the Canon (e. g. Sn p. 106; Sn 1002, 1003; D iii.142; A i.76). His power is absolute, and is described in the standard phrase "c. dhammiko dhamma -- rājā cāturanto vijitāvī janapadatthāvariya -- ppatto satta -- ratana -- samannāgato," e. g. D iii.59. Dhammapāla gives the dignity of a C. as the first "human sovereign powers" (PvA 117). -> The four iddhi's of a C. are given (quite crudely) at M iii.176: he is beautiful, lives longer than others, is of a healthier constitution than others, he is beloved by the brahmins and householders. Other qualities: how his remains should be treated=D ii.141; deserves a thūpa D ii.142 sq.; his four qualities D ii.145 (the 4 assemblies of khattiyas, brāhmaṇas, gahapatis & samaṇas are pleased with him). See under cakkavatti & ratana. -- In a similar sense the term dhamma -- rājā is used as Ep. of the Buddha Sn 554 (rāj' âham asmi dh -- .r. anuttaro); J i.262; and a reflection of the higher sphere is seen in the title of politeness (only used in voc.) mahārāja, e. g. Sn 416 (addressed to Bimbisāra) PvA 22 (id.); J vi.515. -- (b) [in a larger constitutional state] the crowned (muddhâvasitta) monarch (i. e. khattiya) as the head of the principality or kingdom. The defn of this (general) rājā at Nd2 542 is significant of the idea of a king prevalent in early Buddhist times. It is: "khattiyo muddh' âbhisitto vijita -- sangāmo nihata -- paccāmitto laddh' adhippāyo paripuṇṇa -- koṭthāgāro," i. e. "a crowned noble, victorious in battle, slaying his foes, fulfilling his desires, having his storehouses full." This king is "the top of men" (mukhaŋ manussānaŋ) Vin i.246=Sn 568. Cp. D i.7; Sn 46 (raṭṭhaŋ vijitam pahāya); J v.448 and passim. See also below 3. 4 & 6. -- In similes: see J.P.T.S. 1907, 128; & cp. Vism 152 (r. va saddh' antagato), 336 (wishing to become an artisan). Here belongs the title of the king of the devas (Sakka) "deva -- rājā ," e. g. DhA iii.269, 441; PvA 62. -- (c) [in an oligarchic sense] member of a kula of khattiyas, e. g. the kumāras of the Sakiyans and Koliyans are all called rājāno of the rājakulānaŋ in J. v.413 sq., or at least the heads of those kulas. Cp. B. Ind. p. 19. -- (d) [in a smaller, autocratic state] a chieftain, prince, ruler; usually (collectively) as a group: rājāno, thus indicating their lesser importance, e. g. A v.22 (kuḍḍa -- rājāno rañño cakkavattissa anuyuttā bhavanti: so read for anuyantā); Sn 553 (bhoja˚ similar to rāja -- bhoggā or bhogiyā as given at SnA 453); A ii.74 sq. (dhammikā & a˚); J iv.495. Similarly at Vin i.228 we find the division into the 3 ranks: mahesakkhā rājāno, majjhimā r., nīcā r. Here also belongs the designation of the 4 lokapālā (or Guardians of the World) at cattāro mahā -- rājāno, the mahā˚ being added for sake of politeness (cp. Note A on mahā), e. g. A iv.242. See also paṭirājā & cp. below 4 c. -- (e) A wider range of meaning is attached to several sub -- divisions (with rājā or without): officials and men who occasionally take the place of the king (royal functionaries), but are by public opinion considered almost equal to the king. Here belongs the defn of what is termed "rājāno" (pl. like d) at Vin iii.47, viz. rājā, padesa -- rājā, maṇḍalikā, antarabhogikā, akkhadassā, mahāmattā, ye vā pana chejjabhejjaŋ anusāsanti (i. e. those who have juridical power). See also below 4 b, and ˚putta, ˚bhogga [& other cpds.]. -- 2. It would fill a separate book, if we were to give a full monograph of kingship in and after the Buddha's time; we therefore content ourselves with a few principal remarks. The office of king was hereditary: kula -- santakaŋ rajjaŋ J i.395; ii.116; iv.124; but we sometimes read of a king being elected with great pomp: J i.470; PvA 74. He had the political and military power in his hand, also the jurisdiction, although in this he is often represented by the mahāmatta, the active head of the state. His 10 duties are mentioned at several places (see below under ˚dhammā). Others are mentioned e. g. at D i.135, where it is said he gives food and seed -- corn to the farmer, capital to the trader, wages to the people in government service. His qualifications are 8 fold (see D i.137): well -- born ("gentleman," khattiya), handsome, wealthy, powerful (with his army), a believer, learned, clever, intelligent. -> His wealth is proverbial and is characterized in a stock phrase, which is also used of other ranks, like seṭṭhi's & brāhmaṇa's, viz. "aḍḍha mahaddhana mahābhoga pahūta -- jātarūpa -- rajata pahūta -- vitt' ûpakaraṇa pahūtadhana -- dhañña paripuṇṇa -- kosa -- koṭṭhāgāra," e. g. D i.134. For a late description of a king's quality and distinction see Miln 226, 227. -- His disciplinary authority is emphasized; he spares no tortures in punishing adversaries or malefactors, esp. the cora (see below 4 c). A summary example of these punishments inflicted on criminals is the long passage illustrating dukkha (bodily pain) at Nd2 304iii; cp. M iii.163 (here also on a cora). -- 3. The king (rājā or khattiya) in the popular opinion, as reflected in language, heads several lists, which have often been taken as enumerating "castes," but which are simply inclusive statements of var. prominent ranks as playing a rôle in the social life of the state, and which were formulated according to diff. occasions. Thus some show a more political, some a more religious aspect. E. g. khattiya amacca brāhmaṇa gahapati D i.136; rājā brāhmaṇa gahapatika A i.68, where another formula has khattiya br. g. A i.66; J i.217; and the foll. with an intermediate "rank" (something like "royalty," "the royal household") between the king and the brahmins: rājā rājaputtā brāhmaṇā gahapatikā negama -- jānapadā A ii.74 sq.; rājāno rāja -- mahāmattā khattiyā br., gah., titthiyā D iii.44 (trsln Dialogues too weak "rājas & their officials"); rājā rājabhogga br., gah. Vin iii.221. -- 4. Var. aspects illustrating the position of the king in relation to other prominent groups of the court or populace: (a) rājā & khattiya. All kings were khattiyas. The kh. is a noble kat)e)coxh/n (cp. Gr. h(gemw/n) as seen fr. defn jāti -- khattiya at SnA 453 and var. contexts. Already in the Rig Veda the kṣatriya is a person belonging to a royal family (RV x.109, 3), and rājanya is an Ep. of kṣatriya (see Zimmer, Altindisches Leben 213). -- rājā khattiyo muddhâvassito "a crowned king" D i.69; iii.61 sq.; Vin iv.160; A i.106 sq.; ii.207 (contrasted with brāhmaṇa mahāsāla); iii.299 (if lazy, he is not liked by the people); M iii.172 sq. (how he becomes a cakkavatti through the appearance of the cakka -- ratana). -- Without muddhâvasitta: rājāno khattiyā Dh 294=Nett 165. Cp. khattiyā bhoja -- rājāno the khattiyas, the (noble or lesser?) kings (as followers of the cakkavatti) Sn 553 (see bhoja). At J vi.515. rājāno corresponds directly to khattiyā on p. 517 (saṭṭhisahassa˚); cp. expression khattiya -- kula J i.217 as equivalent to rāja -- kula. (b) rājā & mahāmatta. The latter occupies the position of "Premier," but is a rank equal to the king, hence often called rājā himself: Vin iii.47 where styled "akkhadassa mahāmatta." Otherwise he is always termed rāja -- mahāmatta "royal minister," or "H.R.H. the Premier," e. g. Vin i.172; A i.279; Vin i.228 (also as Magadha -- mahāmatta), and called himself a khattiya D iii.44. -- (c) rājā & cora. A prominent figure in the affairs of State is the "robber -- chief" (mahā -- cora). The contrast -- pair rajāno (so always pl.) & cora is very frequent, and in this connection we have to think of rājāno as either smaller kings, knights or royals (royalists), i. e. officers of the kings or "the king's Guards." Thus at J iii.34 the C. expln as rāja -- purisā. It is here used as a term of warning or frightening "get up, robber, so that the kings (alias ʻ policeman ʼ) won't catch you": uṭṭhehi cora mā taŋ gahesuŋ rājāno. Other passages are e. g.: D i.7 (rāja -- kathā & corakathā)=Vin i.188; M iii.163 (rājāno coraŋ āgucāriŋ gahetvā); A i.68, 154; It 89 (rāj' âbhinīta+cor˚); & in sequence rājāno corā dhuttā (as being dangerous to the bhikkhus) at Vin i.150, 161. -- 5. On the question of kingship in Ancient India see Zimmer, Altind. Leben pp. 162 -- 175, 212 sq.; Macdonell & Keith, Vedic Index ii.210 sq.; Fick, Soc. Gl. 63 -- 90; Foy, Die Königl. Gewalt nach den altind. Rechtsbüchern (Leipzig 1895); Rh. Davids, Buddhist India pp. 1 -- 16; Hopkins, E. W., The social and military position of the ruling caste in A. I. in J.A.O.S. 13, 179 sq.; Banerjea, Public Administration in A. I. 1916, pp. 63 -- 93. -- 6. Kings mentioned by name [a very limited & casual list only, for detailed refs. see Dict'y of Names]: Ajātasattu; Udena (DhA i.185); Okkāka; Dīghī (of Kosala; Vin i.342); Parantapa (of Kosambī; DhA i.164;) Pasenadi (of Kosala; D i.87, 103; Vin iv.112, 157); Bimbisāra (of Magadha; Vin iv.116 sq.; Sn 419); Bhaddiya; etc. -- 7. (fig.) king as sign of distinction ("princeps"), as the lion is called rājā migānaŋ Sn 72; Vism 650; the Himavant is pabbata -- rājā A i.152; iii.44; and Gotama's horse Kaṇthaka is called assa -- rājā J i.62=VvA 314. -- Note. The compn form of rājā is rāja˚.

-- âgāra a king's (garden -- or pleasure -- ) house D i.7 (˚ka); DA i.42. -- anga royal mark, characteristic or qualification; king's property Vin i.219 (rājangaŋ hatthī: the elephants belong to the king), cp. A i.244: assājāniyo rañño angan t' eva sankhaŋ gacchati is called king's property. -- angana royal court PvA 74. -- āṇatti king's permission Tikp 26 (in simile). -- āṇā (1) the king's command J iii.180; cp. PvA 217 "rañño āṇā"; (2) the king's fine or punishment, i. e. a punishment inflicted by the king (cp. Fick, Soc. Gl. 74), synonymous with rāja -- daṇḍa: J i.369, 433 (rājāṇaŋ karoti to inflict); ii.197; iii.18, 232, 351; iv.42; vi.18; PvA 242. -- ânubhāva king's power, majesty, authority, pomp J iv.247; PvA 279. -- antepura the royal harem A v.81, 82 (the 10 risks which a bhikkhu is running when visiting it for alms). -- âbhinīta brought by a king It 89 (+corâbhinīta). -- âbhirājā "king of kings" Sn 553; DhsA 20. -- âmacca royal minister J v.444 (˚majjhe). -- āyatana N. of a tree: "Kingstead tree," the royal tree (as residence of a king of fairies), Buchanania latifolia Vin i.3 sq. (where MVastu iii.303 reads kṣīrikā, i. e. milk -- giving tree); J i.80; iv.361 sq.; DhsA 35; VbhA 433 (˚cetiya). -- iddhi royal power PvA 279. -- isi a royal seer, a king who gives up his throne & becomes an ascetic (cp. Sk. rājarṣi, freq. in Mhbhārata & Rāmā yana) Th 1, 1127 (read rāja -- d -- isi); It 21 (rājīsayo, with var vv. ll. not quite the same meaning); J vi.116, 124, 127, 518; DhA iv.29. Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes reading rājīsi. -- upaṭṭhāna attendance on the king, royal audience Vin i.269; J i.269, 349; iii.119, 299; iv.63. -- ûpabhoga fit for use by the king Miln 252. -- uyyāna royal garden or pleasure ground J iii.143; Mhvs 15, 2. -- orodhā a lady from the king's harem, a royal concubine Vin iv.261. -- kakudha -- bhaṇḍa an ensign of royalty (5: khagga, chatta, uṇhīsa, pādukā, vālavījanī) DhA i.356. See under kakudha. -- kathā talk about kings (as tiracchānakathā in disgrace), combd with corakathā (see above 4 c) D i.7; iii.36, 54; Vin i.188. -- kammika a royal official, one employed by the king J i.439; iv.169. -- kuṭumba the king's property J i.439. -- kuṇḍa a "crook of a king" DhA iii.56. -- kumāra a (royal) prince (cp. khattiya -- kumāra) Vin i.269; J iii.122; VbhA 196 (in comparison). -- kumbhakāra a "royal potter," i. e. a potter being "purveyor to the king" J v.290. -- kula the king's court or palace A i.128; ii.205; Vin iv.265; J ii.301; DhA ii.44, 46; iii.124. -- khādāya puṭṭha at Sn 831 is according to Kern, Toev. to be read as rajakkhatāya ph. (fr. rajakkha). The old Niddesa, however, reads ˚khādāya & explns the word (Nd1 171) by rājabhojanīyena, i. e. the king's food, which is alright without being changed. -- guṇa "virtue of a king" M i.446 (trick of a circus horse; +rāja -- vaŋsa). -- daṇḍa punishment ordered by the king PvA 216, 217. -- dāya a royal gift D i.127; DA i.246. -- dūta king's messenger Sn 411, 412; in meaning of "message," i. e. calling somebody to court, summons at J ii.101, 305. -- dhamma "king's rule," i. e. rule of governing, norm of kingship; usually given as a set of 10, which are enumd at J iii.274 as "dāna, sīla, pariccāga, ajjava, maddava, tapo, akkodha, avihiŋsā, khanti, avirodhana," i. e. alms -- giving, morality, liberality, straightness, gentleness, self -- restriction, non -- anger, non -- hurtfulness, forbearance non -- opposition. These are referred to as dasa rājadhammā at J i.260, 399; ii.400; iii.320; v.119, 378; usually in phrase "dasa rāja -- dhamme akopetvā dhammena rajjan kāresi": he ruled in righteousness, not shaking the tenfold code of the king. Another set of 3 are mentioned at J v.112, viz. "vitathaŋ kodhaŋ hāsaŋ nivāraye" (expld as giving up musāvāda, kodha & adhamma -- hāsa). -- dhānī a royal city (usually combd with gāma & nigama) A i.159; ii.33; iii.108; Vin iii.89; J v.453; Pv 1318. -- dhītā king's daughter, princess J i.207; PvA 74. -- nivesana the king's abode, i. e. palace DhA iv.92. -- parisā royal assembly Vin ii.296. -- pīla (?) DhA i.323. -- putta lit. "king's son," prince, one belonging to the royal clan (cp. similarly kulaputta), one of royal descent, Rājput Sn 455; Miln 331; VbhA 312, 319 (in simile); PvA 20. f. ˚puttī princess J iv.108; v.94. -- purisa "king's man," only in pl. ˚purisā the men of the king, those in the king's service (as soldiers, body -- guard, policeman etc.) J iii.34; VbhA 80 (˚ânubandha -- corā), 109. -- porisa (m. & nt.) servant of the king, collectively: king's service, those who devote themselves to Govt. service D i.135; M i.85 = Nd2 199; A iv.281, 286. See also porisa. -- bali royal tax J i.354. -- bhaṭa king's hireling or soldier Vin i.74, 88; SnA 38 (in simile) -- bhaya fear of the king('s punishment) Vism 121. -- bhāga the king's share J ii.378. -- bhogga 1. royal, in the service of the king, in foll. phrases: rāja -- bhoggaŋ raññā dinnaŋ rāja -- dāyaŋ brahma -- deyyaŋ D i.87, of a flourishing place. Dial. i.108 trsls "with power over it as if he were king," and expls with: "where the king has proprietary rights." The C. rather unmeaningly expls as "rāja -- laddha" (DA i.245). The BSk. has a curious version of this phrase: "rājñā -- agni- dattena brahmadeyyaŋ dattaŋ" (given by the king in the place of agni?) Divy 620. -- Further at Vin iii.221 in sequence rājā r -- bhogga, brāhmaṇa, gahapatika, where the C. expls (on p. 222) as "yo koci rañño bhatta -- vetan' āhāro." (We should be inclined to take this as No. 2.) -- Thirdly, in stock phrase "rājâraha rājabhogga rañño angan t' eva sankhaŋ gacchati," i. e. worthy of a king, imperial, he justifies the royal qualification, said of a thoroughbred horse at A i.244= ii.113; of a soldier (yodh' ājīva) at A i.284; of an elephant at J ii.370 (where it is expld as "rāja paribhoga"). Also as "royal possessions" in general at DhA i.312. 13. -- Fick, Soc. Gl. 99 does not help much, he takes it as "king's official." -- 2. royal, of royal power, one entitled to the throne. Either as bhogga, bhogiya (SnA 453) or (khattiyā) bhoja -- rājāno (Sn 553). Thus at Vin iii.221, where it takes the place of the usual khattiya "royal noble" & Sn 553, where it is combd (as bhoja rājano) with khattiyā. See also bhoja & cp. (antara) bhogika and rājañña. -- mahāmatta king's prime minister (see above 4 b, to which add:) D iii.44; A i.154, 252, 279; iii.128; VbhA 312 (simile of 2), 340. -- mālakāra royal gardener J v.292. -- muddā the royal seal DhA i.21. -- muddikā id. SnA 577. -- ratha the king's chariot DhA iii.122. -- rukkha "royal tree," Cathartocarpus fistula VvA 43. -- vara the best king, famous king Vv 321 (= Sakka VvA 134). -- vallabha the king's favourite, or overseer Mhvs 37, 10; VbhA 501 (in simile). -- vibhūti royal splendour or dignity PvA 216, 279. -- haŋsa "royal swan," a sort of swan or flamingo Vism 650 (suvaṇṇa˚, in simile). -- 570 -- Rāji
Rāji1
[cp. Sk. rāji] a streak, line, row Sn p. 107 (nīla -- vana˚ = dark line of trees, expld as nīla -- vana rukkha -- panti SnA 451); Vv 644 (nabhyo sata -- rāji -- cittita "coloured with 100 streaks"; VvA=lekhā); 646 (veḷuriya˚); pabbata˚ a mountain range J ii.417; dīgha˚ (adj.) of long lineage PvA 68; dvangula˚ a band 2 inches broad Dāvs v.49; roma˚ a row of hair (on the body) J v.430. Rāji
Rāji2
[fr. rāga?] dissension, quarrel, in phrase sangha˚ (+sanghabheda) Vin ii.203 (quoted at VbhA 428); iv.217. Rājikā
Rājikā
(f.) [cp. Sk. rājikā] a certain (gold) weight (a seed- corn of Sinapis ramosa) Th 1, 97 = 862 (kaŋsa sata˚ 100 mustard seeds in weight, i. e. very costly); J vi.510 (kaŋse sovaṇṇe satarājike). Rājita
Rājita:
see vi˚. Rājin
Rājin
(adj.) [fr. rāji] having streaks or stripes, in uddhagga˚ having prominent stripes (of a lion) J iv.345. Rājimant
Rājimant
(adj.) [fr. rāji1] having streaks or stripes; f. rājimatī shining, radiant Vv 321 (v. l. rājāputti), expld at VvA 134 as follows: "rājati vijjotatī ti rājī: rājī ti matā paññātā rājimatī" (thus connecting ˚mant with man). Rājula
Rājula
[cp. Sk. rājila] a certain reptile Abhp 651. Rāti
Rāti
[Sk. rā to give, bestow; given at Dhtp 369 & Dhtm 597 in meaning "ādāne," with doublet lā] to take up: no refs. Rādheti
Rādheti1
[Caus. of rādh to succeed, rādhyate. The root is given at Dhtp 420 & Dhtm 656 in meaning "saŋsiddhiyaŋ," i. e. of success. See etym. at Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. reor.] to please: see cpds. abhi˚ apa˚, ā˚, vi˚. Rādheti
Rādheti2
[rādh? Given at Dhtp 424 & Dhtm 656 in meaning "hiŋsāyaŋ," i. e. of hurting] no refs. Rāma
Rāma
[fr. ram; cp. Vedic rāma] pleasure, sport, amuse- ment; ˚kara having pleasure, sporting, making love J v.448. Rāmaṇeyyaka
Rāmaṇeyyaka
(adj. nt.) [orig. grd. of rāmeti, ram, cp. Sk. rāmaṇīya. On e for ī see Geiger, P.Gr. § 10] pleasant, agreeable, lovely A i.35, 37; Dh 98 ( = ramaṇīya DhA iii.195); nt. delightfulness, lovely scenery M i.365 (four seen in a dream: ārāma˚, vana˚, bhūmi˚ pokkharaṇī˚). Rāva
Rāva
[fr. ravati, cp. rava] crying, howling; shout, noise J i.162 (baddha˚ the cry of one who is caught); iv.415 (id.); vi.475 (of the cries of animals, known to an expert); Miln 254 (bherava -- rāvaŋ abhiravati); Mhvs 10, 69 (mahā -- rāvaŋ arāvi). Rāsi
Rāsi
[Vedic r̄āśi] 1. heap, quantity, mass It 17; usually -- ˚, e. g. angāra˚ heap of cinders J i.107; kaṇikārapuppha˚ of k. flowers VvA 65; kahāpaṇa˚ of money PvA 162, tila˚ of seeds VvA 54; dhañña˚ of corn A iv.163, 170; etc. -- rāsiŋ karoti to make a heap, to pile up Mhvs 29, 28; VvA 157. -- 2. (store of) wealth, riches; in ˚agga -- dāna gift of the best treasures (of one's property), one of the 5 "donations of the best," viz. khett˚, rās˚, koṭṭh˚, kumbhi˚, bhojan˚: SnA 270. See also ˚vaḍḍhaka -- 3. a sign of the Zodiac (the 12, as given at Abhp 61 are: mesa, usabha, methuna, kakkata, sīha, kaññā, tulā, vicchikā, dhanu, makara, kumbha, mīna; or the ram, bull, twins, crab, lion, virgin, balance, scorpion bow, capricorn, waterpot, fish) PvA 198. -- 4. (fig.) at t. t. in logic: group, aggregate, category, congery; freq. in Abhidhamma -- literature, where 3 "accumulations" are spoken of, viz. micchatta -- niyato rāsi, sammatta -- niyato r., anivato r. or "wrong doing entailing immutable evil results, that of well -- doing entailing immutable good results, and that of everything not so determined" (Dialogues iii.210); D iii.217; Kvu 611; Nett 96; cp. Kvu trsl. 356 Dhs trsl. 26, 253. In the 5 factors of individuality (body and mind) khandhā are explained as meaning rāsi, e. g. Asl. 141; B. Psy. 42. In other connections: S v.146 (kusala˚, akusala˚), 186; A iii.65 (akusala˚); Tikp 45. --

Note. In BSk. we find only 2 of the 3 categories mentioned at MVastu i.175, viz. mithyātvaniyato & aniyato rāśih.

-- vaḍḍhaka one who increases wealth, i. e. a treasurer D i.61 (trsln: "increases the king's wealth"; DA i.170 simply defines "dhañña -- rāsiñ ca dhana -- rāsiñ ca vaḍḍhetī ti r. v."); J i.2; Mhbv 78. -- 571 -- Rāsika
Rāsika
(nt.) [fr. rāsi] revenue, fisc D i.135. Rāhaseyyaka
Rāhaseyyaka
(adj.) [rahas+seyya+ka or rāha (for rahā˚)+seyyaka] "having one's bed in loneliness," living in seclusion or secrecy, in manussa˚ "fit to lie undisturbed by men" Vin i.39 (+paṭisallāna -- sāruppa); M ii.118. Rāhu
Rāhu
[Vedic rāhu] N. of an Asura: see under Proper Names. -- rāhumukha "mouth of Rāhu," designation of a certain punishment for criminals (M i.87; iii.164; Nd1 154 (in list of tortures) = Nd2 604=Miln 197. Riṇāti
Riṇāti
see under raya. Riñcati
Riñcati
[ric, in Vedic & Sk. rinakti; cp. Av. irinaxti to leave; Gr. lei/pw id., loipo/s left; Lat. linquo id.; Goth. leihwan = Ohg. līhan to lend; Ags lāēn= loan, cp. E. leave etc. -- The defn of the root at Dhtp is given in two forms, viz. ric as "virecane" (No. 396; cp. Dhtm 517 "kharaṇe," i. e. flowing; 610 "recane"), and riñc as "riñcane" (No. 44)] to leave, abandon, leave behind, give up, neglect Vin i.190 (also fut. riñcissati); M i.155 (riñcissati), 403; S iv.206; A iii.86 sq., 108 sq., 343 sq., 366 sq., 437; Th 1, 1052; Sn 156; Miln 419; J v.403. -- ppr. med. with neg.: ariñcamāna Sn 69; ger. riñcitvā (for Sk. riktvā) Th 2, 93. -- pp. ritta. -- Pass. riccati [Sk. ricyate] to be left: see ati˚. Riñcana
Riñcana
(nt.) [fr. riñc] leaving behind, giving up Dhtp 44. Ritta
Ritta
[pp. of riñcati; cp. atireka] devoid, empty, free, rid (of) M i.207 (+tuccha), 414; Vin i.157 = ii.216; Sn 823 (emancipated: ritto muni=vivitta etc. Nd1 158), 844 (opp. to aritta); Th 2, 265 (see rindi); J i.29 (v. 222); iii.492; Miln 383.

-- assāda finding one's taste in empty things A i.280 (+bāhir -- assāda. Kern, Toev. s. v. reads rittāsa and trsls "impure (of food)," not according to the sense at all). -- āsana an empty seat Sn 963 (expld at Nd1 481 as "opportunity for sitting down which is free from unbefitting sights"). -- pesuṇa free fr. slander Sn 941 (expld at Nd1 422: "yassa pesuññaŋ pahīnaŋ" etc.). -- muṭṭhi an empty fist (˚sadisa: comparing someone as regards ignorance) SnA 306 = DhA iv.38. -- hattha (adj.) empty -- handed J v.46; Sdhp 309. Rittaka
Rittaka
(adj.) [ritta+ka] empty, void, without reality Th 1, 41; 2, 394 ( = tucchaka anto -- sāra -- rahita ThA 258); Pv iii.65 (of a river=tuccha PvA 202); PvA 139 (=suñña, virahita). Usually in combn with tucchaka as a standing phrase denoting absolute emptiness & worthlessness, e. g. at D i.240; M i.329; S iii.141. Rindī
Rindī
at Th 2, 265 is doubtful. The T. reading is "te rindī va lambante 'nodaka," said of breasts hanging down in old age. The C. compares them with leather water bottles without water (udaka -- bhastā viya). We have to read either with Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 94 "rittī va" ( = rittā iva), "as it were, empty," or (preferably) with ThA 212 "therī ti va" ("like an old woman"). The trsln (Sisters, p. 124) takes the C. expln of udaka -- bhastā as equivalent to T. reading rindi, in saying "shrunken as skins without water"; but rindī is altogether doubtful & it is better to read therī which is according to the context. We find the same meaning of therī ("old woman") at Pv ii.116. Rissati
Rissati
[Vedic riṣ, riṣyati] to be hurt, to suffer harm M i.85 (ḍāŋsa -- makasa -- vāt' ātapa -- siriŋsapa -- samphassehi rissamāno; where Nd2 199 in same passage reads samphassamāna). Ruka
Ruka
in cpd. aḍḍha˚ at Vin ii.134, referring to the shape of a beard, is doubtful. The v. l. is "duka." Could it correspond to Vedic rukma (a certain ornament worn on the chest)? Rukkha
Rukkha
[Vedic vṛkṣa. See Geiger, P.Gr. § 13, with note. Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 320 puts rukkha to Sk. rukṣa (shining which as Pischel, following Roth. says has also the meaning "tree" in Ṛgveda). The Prk. form is rukkha. Cp. Wackernagel, Altind. Gr. 1, § 184 b. We find a byform rakkha at J iii.144. Cp. Brethren, pp. 185, 416, where the Bn MS. has rukkha kathā the meaning being rakkha˚] a tree. In the rukkha -- mūlik' anga (see below) Bdhgh at Vism 74 gives a list of trees which are not to be selected for the practice of "living at the root of a tree." These are sīmantarika -- rukkha, cetiya˚, niyyāsa˚, phala˚, vagguli˚, susira˚, vihāra -- majjhe ṭhita˚, or a tree standing right on the border, a sacred tree, a resinous tree, a fruit t., a tree on which bats live, a hollow tree, a tree growing in the middle of a monastery. The only one which is to be chosen is a tree "vihāra -- paccante ṭhita," or one standing on the outskirt of the Vihāra. He then gives further advice as to the condition of the tree. -- Various kinds of trees are given in the defn of r. at Vism 183, viz. assattha, nigrodha, kacchaka, kapitthaka; ucca, nīca, khuddaka, mahanto; kāḷa, seta. -- A very complete list of trees mentioned in the Saŋyutta Nikāya is to be found in the Index to that Nikāya (vol. vi. p. 84, 85). On rukkha in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, pp. 128 -- 130. -- See also the foll. refs.: A i.137; ii.109, 207; iii.19, 200, 360; iv 99, 336; v.4 sq., 314 sq.; Sn 603, 712; J i.35 (nāga˚); Vism 688 (in simile: mahārukkhe yāva kapp' âvasānā bījaparamparāya rukkha -- paveṇiŋ santāyamāne ṭhite); VbhA 165 = Vism 555 (rukkha phalita); VbhA 196 (in compn: jātassa avassaŋ jarā -- maraṇaŋ, uppannassa rukkhassa patanaŋ viya), 334 sq. (as garu -- bhaṇḍa); SnA 5 ("pathavi -- ras' ādim iva rukkhe": with same simile as at Vism 688, with reading kappâvasānaŋ and santānente); DhA iii.207 (amba˚); VvA 43 (rāja˚), 198 (amba˚); DhA iv.120 (dīpa˚); PvA 43.

-- antara the inside of a tree PvA 63. -- koṭṭaka ( -- sakuṇa) the wood -- pecker J iii.327 ( = java sakuṇa). -- gahana tree -- thicket or entanglement A i.154 (so for ˚gahaṇa). -- devatā a tree spirit, dryad, a yakkha inhabiting a tree (rukkhe adhivatthā d. Vin iv.34; J ii.385; kakudhe adhivatthā d. Vin i.28) J i.168, 322; ii.405, 438 sq. (eraṇḍa˚), 445; iii.23; iv.308 (vanajeṭṭhaka -- rukkhe nibbatta -- devatā); DhA ii.16; PvA 5 (in a Nigrodha tree), 43 (in the Vindhya forest). -> They live in a Nigrodha tree at the entrance of the village (J i.169), where they receive offerings at the foot of the tree (cp. iv.474), and occasionally one threatens them with discontinuance of the offerings if they do not fulfil one's request. The trees are their vimānas (J i.328, 442; iv.154), occasionally they live in hollow trees (J i.405; iii.343) or in tree tops (J i.423). They have to rely on the food given to them (ibid.); for which they help the people (J iii.24; v.511). They assume various forms when they appear to the people (J i.423; ii.357, 439; iii.23); they also have children (Vin iv.34; J i.442). -- paveṇi lineage of the tree Vism 688. -- pāṇikā a wooden spoon Vism 124 (opp. to pāsāṇa˚). -- mūla the foot of a tree (taken as a dwelling by the ascetics for meditation: D i.71, where several such lonely places are recommended, as arañña, r -- m., pabbata, kandara, etc. -- DA i.209 specifies as "yaŋ kiñci sanda -- cchāyaŋ vivittaŋ rukkha -- mūlaŋ"); A ii.38; iv.139, 392; S i.199 (˚gahana); It 102; Sn 708, 958; Nd1 466; Pug 68; PvA 100 (v. l. sukkha -- nadī), 137 (Gaṇḍamba˚, with ref. to the Buddha). -- ˚gata one who undertakes living at the foot of a tree (as an ascetic) A iii.353; v.109 sq., 207, 323 sq.; Pug 68. -- ˚senāsana having one's bed & seat at the foot of a tree for meditative practices as a recluse Vin i.58 (as one of the 4 nissayas: piṇḍiy' ālopa -- bhojana, paŋsukūla -- cīvara, r. -- m. s., pūti -- mutta bhesajja), 96 (id.); A iv.231. -- mūlika (a) one who lives at the foot of a tree, an open air recluse M i.282; iii.41; A iii.219; J iv.8 (āraññaka, paṇṇasālaŋ akatvā r., abbhokāsika); (b) belonging to the practice of a recluse living under a tree "tree rootman's practice" (Vism trsln 84); as ˚anga one of the (13) dhutanga -- practices; i. e. practices for a scrupulous way of living Vism 59, 74, 75 (mentioned between the ārannik' anga & the abbhokāsik'- anga). -- mūlikatta the practice of living (alone) under a tree M iii.41 (mentioned with paŋsukūlikatta & piṇḍapātikatta); A iii.109 (id.). -- sunakha "tree dog," a cert. animal J vi.538 (C. in expln of naḷa -- sannibha "reed -- coloured"). -- susira a hollow tree PvA 62. -- 572 -- Ruca
Ruca
( -- rukkha) & Rucā (f.) [fr. ruc] N. of a plant, or tree, alias "mukkhaka" (read mokkhaka) "principal" J i.441, 443 (gloss mangala -- rukkha). Rucaka
Rucaka
(nt.) [cp. Sk. rucaka a golden ornament] (gold) sand Vv 351; VvA 160 ( = suvaṇṇa -- vālikā). Ruci
Ruci
(f.) [fr. ruc, cp. Vedic ruc (f.) light, Classic Sk. ruci in meaning "pleasure"] 1. splendour, light, brightness Sn 548 (su˚ very splendid; SnA 453 = sundara -- sarīrappabha). -- 2. inclination, liking, pleasure PvA 59 (˚ŋ uppādeti to find pleasure, to be satisfied). -- aruci aversion, dislike Th 2, 472. -- ruci object of pleasure J v.371. -- ruciyā (abl.) in the pleasure (of), by the liking (of) (cp. No. 3), in phrases attano ruciyā (attano citta -- ruciyā: so read for ˚ruciyaŋ!); as one pleases, by one's own free will, ad lib. J i.106; iv.281; PvA 59; parassa r. pavattati to live by the pleasure (gratiâ) of somebody else, i. e. to be dependent on others DA i.212. -- yathā ruciŋ according to liking or satisfaction, fully, amply Mhvs 4, 43; 5, 230; PvA 88, 126, 242. -> 3. In dogmatic language used in the sense of "will" or "influence" in combn diṭṭhi, khanti, ruci one's views, indulgence & pleasure (= will), i. e. one's intellectual, emotional & volitional sphere, e. g. Vin i.70; Sn 781 (without khanti, but see defn at Nd1 65); also with saddhā, anussavo, ākāraparivitakke, diṭṭhinijjhānakhanti M ii.170, 218; 234; contrasted with dhamma D iii.40; Vbh 245 (in defn of "idha": cp. same at Ps i.176 and Nd2 145), 325, 328. aññatra ruciyā under the influence of someone else's will S ii.115; iv.138. See also bhāva 2a. Rucika
Rucika
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. ruci 3] belonging to the pleasure (of); only in phrase añña˚ being dependent on someone else's will or under another's influence, together with aññadiṭṭhika and añña -- khantika characterizing the various sides of personality (see ruci 3) with ref. to one's intellect, feeling & will D i.187 = M i.487. Rhys Davids (Dial. i.254) trsls: "holding different views, other things approving themselves to you, setting diff. aims before yourself"; thus differing in interpretation of añña, taking it subjectively. Neumann (Majjhima Übs. ii.250) quite wrongly: "ohne Deutung, ohne Geduld, ohne Hingabe" (without explanation, patience, devotion). Rucira
Rucira
(adj.) [fr. ruc, cp. Sk. rucira] brilliant, beautiful, pleasant, agreeable Pv i.109 ( = ramaṇīya dassanīya PvA 51); J i.207; v.299; Vv 402 (so read for rurira); Mhvs 11, 11; 18, 68; Dāvs iv.29; Miln 2, 398; DhA i.383 (= sobhana); VvA 12; PvA 156 (=vaggu). Ruccati
Ruccati
[*rucyati Med. of ruc: see rocati. Same in Prk. -- Originally Caus. formation like Epic Sk. rocyate for rocayate] to find delight or pleasure in (loc.), to please, to indulge in, set one's mind on Sn 565 (etañ ce r. bhoto buddha -- sāsanaŋ); with khamati to be pleased and to approve of, M ii.132; often used by Bdhgh in C. style: yathā r. tathā paṭhitabbaŋ KhA 78; "yaŋ r. taŋ gahetabbaŋ SnA 23, 43, 136, 378" "to take, whichever one pleases" (in giving the choice of 2 readings or interpretations). -- ger. ruccitvā VvA 282 (r. pūresi "to find thorough delight in," expln for abhirocesi). -> pret. 1st pl. ruccādimhase Pv i.118 ( = ruccāma ruciŋ uppādema, taŋ attano ruciyā pivissāmā ti attho PvA 59). -- Prohibitive mā rucci (pl. mā rucittha) as an entreaty not to pursue an aim (=please do not do that, please don't) Vin ii.198 (alaŋ Devadatta mā te rucci sangha -- bhedo); DhA i.13 (mā vo āvuso evaŋ ruccittha). Ruccana
Ruccana
(& ā˚ f.) (nt.) [fr. ruccati] choice, pleasure DhA i.387 (tava ˚ṭṭhāne according to your own liking); DA i.106 (˚ā). Ruccanaka
Ruccanaka
(adj.) [fr. ruccana, cp. Sk. rucya] pleasing, satisfying; nt. satisfaction J i.211 (˚maccha the fish you like); ii.182 (tava ˚ŋ karosi you do whatever you like). a˚ unpleasant, distasteful DhA i.251 (attano aruccanakaŋ kiñci kammaŋ adisvā). Rujaka
Rujaka
[fr. ruj?] a lute -- player J vi.51, 52, given by Kern, Toev. s. v. as conjecture (vīṇaŋ) va rujaka for virujaka. The conjecture is based on C. reading "rujaka = vīṇāvādaka." Rujati
Rujati
[ruj, representing an Idg. *leug, as in Gr. leugale/os, lugro/s sad, awful; Lat. lugeo to mourn; Lith. lúžti to break; German lücke, loch etc. -- A specific Pāli l -- form is lujjati. A der. fr. ruj is roga illness. -- The Dhtp (469) defines ruj by "bhanga" i. e. breaking] to break, crush; lit. to (cause) pain, to afflict, hurt (trs. & intrs.) J i.7 (pādā rujanti), 396 (pādā me rujanti my feet ache); iv.208 (khandhena rujantena with hurting back); vi.3 (ūrū rujanti); Mhvs 10, 15 (pādā me r.); Miln 26 (pādā r.); DhA i.10, 21 (akkhīni me rujiŋsu); ii.3. -- fut. rucchiti [cp. Sk. roḳsyate] J vi.80 (v. l. B.B. rujjati; C. takes wrongly as "rodissati," of rodati). -- pp. lugga. -- Cp. lujjati & combns. Rujana
Rujana
(nt.) [fr. ruj, cp. rujā] hurting, feeling pain J ii.437 (roga = rujana -- sabhāvattaŋ); J iv.147 (yāva piṭṭhiyā rujana -- ppamāṇaŋ until his back ached). Rujanaka
Rujanaka
(adj.) [fr. rujana] aching, hurting DhA iv.69 (anguli). Rujā
Rujā
(f.) [fr. ruj, see rujati; cp. Sk. rujā] disease, pain Miln 172 (rujaŋ na karoti); Vism 69; DhA iv.163 (accha˚ a bad pain). Rujjhati
Rujjhati
[Pass. of rundhati] to be broken up, to be destroyed J iii.181 (pāṇā rujjhanti; C. expls by nirujjhati). Cp. upa˚, vi˚. Ruṭṭha
Ruṭṭha
[pp. of ruṣ; Sk. ruṣṭa] vexed, cross, enraged J iv.358 (opp. to tuṭṭha v. l. atuṭṭha) v.211 (gloss kuddha); Dāvs iii.37. Ruṭhati
Ruṭhati
see luṭhati & cp. rudda. Ruṇ
Ruṇ
a sound -- particle, denoting a heavy fall, something like "thud" J i.418. Ruṇṇa & Roṇṇa
Ruṇṇa
& Roṇṇa [pp. of rudati for Sk. rudita, after analogy of other roots in -- d, as tud>tunna, pad>panna, nud> nunna. The BSk. forms are both ruṇḍa (MVastu ii.218, 224) and ruṇṇa (MVastu iii.116); Prk. ruṇṇa (Pischel § 566). See rudati & cp. āruṇṇa] 1. (pp.) crying, in combn ruṇṇa -- mukha with tearful face J vi.525 (C. rudam˚); Miln 148. -- 2. (nt.) weeping, crying, lamentation Th 1, 554; A i.261; Sn 584 (+soka); Pv i.43; Milo 357. As roṇṇa at A iv.197, 223; Th 1, 555; J iii.166. -- 573 -- Ruta
Ruta
(nt.) [pp. of ravati: see rava & ravati] noise, sound- (ing); cry, singing Th 1, 1103; J i.207 (T. reading ruda is expld in C. as ruta with ˚da for ˚ta: ta -- kārassa dakāro kato); iii.276 (sabba -- ruta -- jānana -- manta: spell of knowing all animal -- sounds; T. reads rūta; cp. sabbarāva -- jānana J iii.415); vi.475 (rudaññu = ruta -- jña C.; same meaning); Miln 178 (sakuṇa -- ruta -- ravita); VvA (karavīka˚). Rutta
Rutta
in du˚ & su˚ at DhsA 396 is to be read as dur -- and su(r) -- utta (see utta). Ruda
Ruda
stands for ruta (cry) at 2 Jātaka passages, viz. J i.207; vi.475 (ruda -- ññu knowing the cries of all animals, expld as "ruta -- jña, sabba -- rāvaŋ jānāti" C.). Rudati & Rodati
Rudati
& Rodati [rud, the usual Sk. pres. being rodati, but forms fr. base rud˚ are Vedic and are later found also in Prk. (cp. Pischel Prk. Gr. § 495): ruyai besides royai & rodasi. -- The Idg. root is *reud, being an enlargement of *reu , as in ravati (q. v.). Cp. cognates Lat. rudo to cry, shout, bray; Lith. raudà wailing; Ohg. riozan = Ags. reotan. -- The Dhtp expls rud by "rodane" (144), the Dhtm by "assu -- vimocane" (206)] to cry, lament, weep, wail. -- Forms I. rud˚ (the older form): pres. rudati (not yet found); ppr. rudanto D i.115; Sn 675, 691; rudamāna M i.341; A ii.95; Pug 62; Miln 275; Sdhp 281; and rudaŋ Pv i.84; also in cpd. rudam -- mukha with weeping face J vi.518 (assu -- netta+); Pv i.112; ger. ruditvāna Mhvs 35, 24; fut. rucchati J v.366 and rucchiti J vi.550 (=rodissati C.; see also rujati). -> II. rod˚ (the younger form & the one peculiar to prose): pres. rodati J i.55; iii.169 (socati+); Pv i.87 (socati+); i.124; PvA 17, 18; Pot. rode Pv i.85 (=rodeyyaŋ PvA 64); ppr. rodanto J i.65; f. rodantī PvA 16; med. rodamāna PvA 6; DA i.284. -- aor. rodi J i.167; DhA ii.17 (+hasi); fut. rodissati J vi.550; ger. roditvā Mhvs 9, 7; inf. rodituŋ J i.55. -- Caus. ii. rodāpeti to make someone cry DhA ii.86. -- pp. ruṇṇa, rudita & rodita. Rudita
Rudita
(nt.) [pp. of rudati, equivalent to ruṇṇa] crying, weeping PvA 18 (+assu -- mocana, in expln of ruṇṇa), 63 ( = paridevita). Rudda
Rudda
(adj.) [cp. Sk. raudra & Vedic rudra (a fierce demon or storm -- deity; "the red one," with Pischel from rud to be ruddy. See Macdonell, Vedic Mythology 74 -- 77). The usual Pāli form is ludda. At Dhtp 473 & Dhtm 135 a root ruṭh (or luṭh) is given in meaning "upaghāte" i. e. killing, which may represent this rud: see luṭhati] fierce, awful, terrible J iv.416 (so luddako rudda -- rūpo; v. l. ludda˚); v.425, 431 (su -- ruddho, spelling for su -- ruddo, very fierce, expld as su -- luddo supharuso); Mhvs 12, 45 (rudda -- rakkhasī, prob. with ref. to the demon Rudra; trsln "fearsome female demon"; vv. ll. ruda˚, ruddha˚, dudda˚). Ruddha
Ruddha
[pp. of rundhati] 1. obstructed, disturbed Dāvs 4, 46. -- 2. at J v.425 & 431 in cpd. su -- ruddha it stands for rudda (q. v.). -- Cp. upa˚, ni˚, paṭi˚ paṭivi˚, vi˚. Rudhira
Rudhira
(nt.) [late Vedic rudhira. Etym. connected with Lat. ruber red; Gr. e) ruqro/s red; Oicel. rodra blood, Goth. raups = Ger. rot=E. red] blood DhA i.140; PvA 34 (for lohita; v. l. ruhira). See the more freq. words rohita & lohita; a form ruhira (q. v.) occurs e. g. at Pv i.91. Rundhati
Rundhati
[rundh or rudh, both roots in Vedic Sk. -- Dhtp (375, 425) expls by "āvaraṇe"; id. Dhtm (608, 662).] 1. to restrain, hinder, prevent, obstruct, keep out Cp. iii.107; Miln 313 (+upa˚). -- 2. to conceal, hide, cover up Th 2, 238 (ppr. rundhanto); PvA 88 (ppr. rundhamāna). -- 3. in phrase nagaraŋ r. to surround or besiege a town J i.409 (aor. rundhi); iii.159 (˚itvā); iv.230 (˚iŋsu). -- Pass rujjhati; pp. ruddha & rūḷha. -> See also upa˚, paṭi˚ paṭivā, vi˚, Note. The roots rudh & rundh are also found in Prk. (see Pischel § 507); besides we have a by -- form rubh in Prk. as well as in Pāli: see Pischel, § 266, 507, and P. rumbhati. Ruppa
Ruppa
in ruppa -- rūpakaŋ (nt.) Th 2, 394 is not clear. It refers to something which is not rūpa, yet pretends to be rūpa, i. e. a sham performance or show. Thus ruppa may correspond to *rūpya & with rūpaka mean "having the form (i. e. the appearance) of form, i. e. substantiality. " The Cy. (ThA 259) interprets as "rūpiya -- rūpasadisaŋ sāraŋ sāraŋ upaṭṭhahantaŋ asāran ti attho"; and Mrs. Rh. D. (Sisters, p. 154) trsls: "deluded by puppet shows (seen in the midst of the crowd)." Ruppati
Ruppati
[rup = lup, one of the rare cases of P. r. representing a Sk. 1., whereas the opposite is frequent. The same sound change Idg., as Lat. rumpo to break corresponds to Sk. lumpati. Besides we find the Sk. form ropayati to break off. -- The root has nothing to do with rūpa, although the P. Commentators combine these two. -- Cp. also Sk. ropa hole; Ags. rēofan to break, rēaf (theft)= Ger. raub, rauben, and many other cognates (see Walde s. v. rumpo). -- The root rup is defd at Dhtm by nās, i. e. to destroy; another rup is given at Dhtm 837 in meaning "ropana"] to be vexed, oppressed, hurt, molested (always with ref. to an illness or pain) Sn 767 (salla -- viddho va r.) 1121; Nd1 5 (=kuppati, ghaṭṭiyati, pīḷiyati); Nd2 543 (=kuppati pīḷayati ghaṭayati). -- ppr. gen. ruppato S i.198 (salla -- viddhassa r.; expld at K.S. 320 by "ghaṭṭan -- atthena")= Sn 331 (reads salla -- viddhāna ruppataŋ, i. e. pl. instead of sg.); Th 1, 967 (salla -- viddhassa ruppato (C. sarīravikāraŋ āpajjato, Brethren, 338); J ii.437 (C. ghaṭṭiyamāna pīḷiyamāna)=Vism 49 (dukkhitassa r.); J iii.169 (salla -- viddhassa r.=ghaṭṭiyamāna C.). -- ruppati to Pāli exegesis with its fondness of allegorical ("orthodox") interpretation, is the etym. base of rūpa, thus at S iii.86: "ruppatī ti tasmā rūpan ti vuccati kena r.? sītena, uṇhena etc. (all kinds of material dukkha: dukkha ii.3b) ruppati." -- Or at Sn 1121 (ruppanti rūpena), & at other passages given under rūpa (A). See also ruppana. Ruppana
Ruppana
(nt.) [fr. rup) molestation, vexation, trouble J iii.368 ( = ghaṭṭana dūsana kuppana C.). Frequent in allegorical exegesis of rūpa, e. g. at DhsA 52 (naman' aṭṭhena nāmaŋ ruppan' aṭṭhena rūpaŋ), 303 (rūp' ādīhi ruppana -- bhāva -- dīpana); VbhA 4 (ruppan' aṭṭhena rūpaŋ in expln of passage S iii.86 (mentioned under ruppati); KhA 78, 79 (ruppan' aṭṭhena . . . rūpaŋ rūpaŋ ti vuccati). Rumbhati
Rumbhati
[so read for rumhati (Trenckner, Notes 599; the root is another form of rudh (as in Prk.): see rundhati. The Dhtm (547) defines by "uppīḷana"] to obstruct, surround, besiege ( = rundhati 3) J vi.391 (where spelling rumhati; in phrase nagaraŋ r.). See also ni˚, sanni˚. -- pp. rūḷha. Rumma
Rumma
(adj.) [put down (rightly) by Geiger, P.Gr. § 53 as different fr. Sk. rukma (shining); Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 12 tried the etym. rumma = Sk. rumra "tawny," oṛ rukma (rukmin) shiny. It is still an unsolved problem. It may not be far off to trace a relation (by miswriting, dissimilation or false analogy) to ruppa in sense of ruppati, or to ruj, or even rudda. The C. expln of all the rumma -- & rummin passages is anañjita, i. e. unkempt] miserable, dirty, poorly, in cpds. ˚rūpin J iv.387 (=lūkhavesa C.), with v. l. duma˚; and ˚vāsin poorly dressed J iv.380. -- 574 -- Rummin = rumma
Rummin
= rumma (dirty -- soiled) J iv.322 (v. l. dummi); vi.194 (do.). Rumhaniya
Rumhaniya
at M i.480 is doubtful in spelling. The meaning is clearly "furthering growth, making or being prosperous, bringing luck" (combd with ojavant), as also indicated by v. l. ruḷh˚. Thus it cannot belong to rumbh, but must represent either rup, as given under ruppati in meaning "ropana" (Dhtm 837), or ruh (see rūhati). Kern, Toev. s. v. trsls "tot groei geschikt" (i. e. able to grow), Neumann, "erquickend" (i. e. refreshing). Ruyhati
Ruyhati
is Med. of rūhati (rohati), q. v. Rurira
Rurira
at Vv 402 is misprint for rucira. Ruru
Ruru
[Vedic ruru: RV vi.75, 15] a sort of deer, a stag; usually called ruru -- miga J iv.256, 261; v.406 (pl. rohitā rurū), 416. Cp. ruruva. Rusita
Rusita
[pp. of ruṣ to be vexed. The Dhtp defines by "rose" (306, 450), "pārusiye" (626); Dhtm has 2 roots viz. one with "ālepe" (442), the other with "hiŋsāyaŋ" (443)] annoyed, irritated, offended Sn 932, 971 (expld by Nd1 498 as "khuŋsita, vambhita, ghaṭṭita" etc.). See rosa, roseti etc. Rusṣati
Rusṣati
at SnA 121 for dussati. Ruha
Ruha1
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. ruh: see rūhati] growing, a tree, in cpds.: jagati˚, dharaṇi˚, mahī˚, etc. Ruha
Ruha2
[poetical for ruhira (rohita) = lohita] blood, in cpd. ruhaŋghasa blood -- eater, a name for panther J iii.481 (=ruhira -- bhakkha lohita -- pāyin C.). Ruhira
Ruhira
(nt.) [fr. rudhira] blood M iii.122; Th 1, 568; Vin ii.193; Miln 125, 220; Sdhp 38.

-- akkhita (ruhir' akkhita) "besmeared with blood" J iv.331, is to be read as ruhir' ukkhita of ukṣ). Rūta
Rūta
at J iii.276 read ruta (q. v.). Rūpa
Rūpa
(nt.) [cp. Vedic rūpa, connected etymologically with varpa (Grassmann). -- The nom. pl. is rūpā & rūpāni] form, figure, appearance, principle of form, etc. -- A. Definitions. According to P. expositors rūpa takes its designation fr. ruppati, e. g. "ruppanato rūpaŋ" Vism 588; "ruppan' aṭṭhena r." VbhA 3; "rūpa -- rūpaŋ = ruppana sabhāvena yuttaŋ" Cpd. 1567 (where ruppati is, not quite correctly, given as "change"), "ruppatī ti: tasmā rūpan ti vuccati" S iii.86; other defns are "rūpayatī ti rūpaŋ" (with cakkhu & the other 10 āyatanas) VbhA 45; and more scientifically: "paresu rūp' ādisu cakkhu -- paṭihanana lakkhaṇaŋ rūpaŋ" Vism 446. -- Of modern interpretations & discussions see e. g. Dhs. trsl. introd. ch. vi. (pp. 41 -- 63, or 248 -- 71); Dial. ii.244; Expos. 67n; Cpd. 270 sq. (where objections are raised to trsln "form," and as better (philosophical) terms "matter," "material quality" are recommended). See also loka for similar etym. -- B. (lit.) appearance, form, figure Dhs 597 sq. (=form either contrasted with what is unseen, or taken for both seen and unseen), 751; Mhvs 27, 30 (sīha -- vyagghādirūpāni representations of lions, tigers etc.); 30, 68 (ravicanda -- tāra -- rūpāni id.); 36, 31 (loha˚ bronze statue); ThA 257. -- Esp. beautiful form, beauty S iv.275= Pv ii.958 (as one of the 10 attributes, with sadda etc., of distinction: see also below D ii.a); Miln 285; Mhvs 20, 4 (rūpa -- māninī proud of her beauty); PvA 89. -- surūpa very beautiful ThA 72; durūpa of evil form, ugly A ii.203 sq. (dubbaṇṇa+). -- In phrase rūpaŋ sikkhati Vin i.77=iv.129 the meaning is doubtful; it may be "to study drawing, or arts & craft," or (with Mrs. Rh. D.) "weights & measures," or (w. Hardy) "money changing." It is said that through this occupation the eyes become bad; it is opposed to gaṇanā. -- C. ( -- ˚) of such & such a form, like, kind, of a certain condition or appearance. In this appln very frequent & similar to E. -- hood, or Ger. -- heit, i. e. an abstract formation. Often untranslatable because of the latter character. It is similar to kāya (cp. expln of ātura-> rūpa Vv 8314 by abhitunna -- kāya Vva 328), but not so much with ref. to life & feeling as to appearance and looks. E. g. aneka˚ Sn 1079 (=anekavidha Nd2 54); adissamāna˚ invisible PvA 6 (lit. with invisible form); ummatta˚ as if mad, under the appearance of madness, like a madman Pv i.81; ii.63; eva˚ in such a condition Pv ii.15; tapassī˚ appearing to be an ascetic Pv i.32; tāraka˚ the (shapes of the) stars Dhs 617; deva˚ as a deva PvA 92. Pleonastically e. g. in: anupatta˚ attaining Pv iv.166; taramāna˚ quickly Pv ii.62; yutta˚ fit PvA 157; sucitta˚ variegated Pv i.109. -- Cases ad verbially: citta -- rūpaŋ according to intention Vin iii.161; iv.177; cetabba -- rūpaŋ fit to be thought upon J iv.157. (=˚yuttakaŋ C.). -- atta -- rūpena on my own account S iv.97; godha -- rūpena as an iguana Mhvs 28, 9. -- D. (as philos. t. t.) principle of (material) form, materiality, visibility. -- There are var. groups of psychological and metaphysical systematizations, in which rūpa functions as the material, gross factor, by the side of other, more subtle factors. In all these representations of rūpa we find that an element of moral psychology overshadows the purely philosophical & speculative aspect. A detailed (Abhidhammatic) discussion of rūpa in var. aspects is to be found at Dhs § 585 -- 980. -> 1. rūpa as āyatana or sense object. It is the object of the activity or sphere of the organ of sight (cakkhu). As such it heads the list of the 6 bāhirāni āyatanāni (see e. g. Nd2 p. 238 A -- E & āyatana3) with "cakkhunā rūpaŋ disvā" (the others: sota>sadda, ghāna>gandha, jivhā>rasa, kāya>phoṭṭhabba, mano> dhamma), cp. cakkhu -- viññeyyā rūpā iṭṭhā kantā etc. D i.245; M i.266; cakkhunā rūpaŋ passati iṭṭha -- rūpaŋ kanta -- rūpaŋ etc. S iv.126; -- see further: Vin i.34 (sabbaŋ ādittaŋ: cakkhuŋ ādittaŋ, rūpa ādittā etc. with sequence of other āyatanas); D ii.308 sq., 336 sq.; M iii.18 (yaŋ kho rūpaŋ paṭicca uppajjati sukhaŋ somanassaŋ, ayaŋ rūpe assādo; cp. Ps ii.109 sq.), 291 (ye te cakkhu -- viññeyyesu rūpesu avīta -- rāgā etc.); Ps i.79; ii.38 (rūpī rūpāni passatī ti vimokkho); Dhs 617, 653, 878; Tikp 28. -> 2. (metaphysically) as the representative of sensory or material existence: (a) universally as forming the corporeal stratum in the world of appearance or form (rūpa-bhava) as compared with the incorporeal (arūpa -- bhava), being itself above, and yet including the kāma -- bhava. (The kāmabhava is a subdivision of rūpabhava, which has got raised into a third main division.) This triad is also found in combns with loka or dhātu (see dhātu 2 a & d), or avacara. See e. g. D i.17; iii.215 (˚dhātu), 216 (˚bhava); Kvu 370 sq. (˚dhātu); Dhs 499 (˚âvacara), 585 (˚dhātu); Vbh 17 (˚āvacara), 25 (as garu -- pariṇāma & dandha -- nirodha compd with arūpa). A similar sequence rūpa arūpa & nirodha (i. e. nibbāna) in old verses at Sn 755; It 45, 62 (rūpehi arūpā santatarā, arūpehi nirodho santataro). On indriya -- rūpa "faculty as form" see indriya B. -- (b) individually in the sphere of saŋsāra as one (i. e. the material quality) of the substrata of sensory individual existence or the khandhas. They are the 5: rūpa -- kkhandha, vedanā˚, saññā˚, sankhārā˚, viññāṇa˚; otherwise called rūp' ûpādāna -- kkhandha etc. (e. g. D iii.223, 278; Vism 443). See khandha ii. B. -- In this property rūpa consists of 28 subdivisions, viz. the 4 (great) dhātūs (mahābhūtāni or else bhūta -- rūpa primary matter) and 24 upādārūpāni (i. e. derivative forms or accidentals). These are given in extenso in the rūpakkhandha section of the Vism (pp. 443 -- 450), also at Dhs 585; the 24 consist of: cakkhu, sota, ghāna, jivhā, kāya, rūpa, sadda, gandha, rasa, itthindriya, purisindriya, jīvitindriya, hadaya-> vatthu, kāya -- viññatti, vacī -- viññatti, ākāsa -- dhātu, (rūpassa) lahutā mudutā kammaññatā, upacaya santati jaratā aniccatā, kabaḷinkār' -- āhāra; cp. defn at Nett 73: cātu -- mahābhūtikaŋ rūpaŋ catunnaŋ ca mahābhūtānaŋ upādāya rūpassa paññatti. The rūpakkhandha shares with the others the qualities of soullessness, evanescence and ill (anattā, anicca, dukkha); e. g. rūpañ ca h' idaŋ attā abhavissa, na y' idaŋ rūpaŋ ābadhāya saŋvatteyya Vin i.13, cp. similarly M iii.282 sq.; S iii.66; quoted and expld in detail at Vism 610; rūpaŋ aniccaŋ Vin i.14; M i.228; iii.18 (also expld at Vism 610); S iii.48, 66, 88; rūpe anicc' ânupassanā Ps ii.186 sq. -- See also D ii.301; iii.233; Ps i.23, 53, 104; ii.96, 102, 109 (rūpassa ādīnavo); Vbh 1. sq., 12 sq. (in detail); Kvu 11 sq.; Vism 443 sq.; Tikp 33; VbhA 2, 3, 32 sq.=S iii.142 (with var. similes); DhA iv.100. -- (c) in the making up of the individuality as such (nāma -- rūpa), where in contrast with nāma (as abstract, logical, invisible or mind -- factor) rūpa represents the visible (material) factor, resembling kāya (cp. phrase nāma -- kāya in same sense). The foll. are current defns of nāma -- rūpa: nāma -- (kāya)=vedanā, saññā, cetanā, phassa, manasikāra (otherwise citta -- sankhārā), rūpa( -- kāya)=cattāro mahā -- bhūtā catunnaŋ m -- bhūtānaŋ upādāya rūpaŋ (otherwise kāya -- sankhārā) S ii.4; iii.59 sq.; Ps i.183; with explns at Vism 558 & VbhA 169. Defined at Nett 15: "ye phassa -- pañcamakā dhammā: idaŋ nāmaŋ, yāni pañc' indriyāni rūpāni: idaŋ rūpaŋ, tad ubhayaŋ nāmarūpaŋ viññāṇa -- sampayuttaŋ." Discussed in detail also at Vism 562 (=VbhA 173, 174), 587 -- 597; cp. DhsA 392 (Expos. 500, where "mind -- matter" is given as corresp. couple in trsln, do. Cpd. 271 sq. "mind and body"). See also under paṭicca -- samuppāda. -- 3. various references: D iii.102, 212, 225, 244, 273; M i.84 (Gotamo kāmānaŋ pariññaŋ paññāpeti, rūpānaŋ, vedanānaŋ); S ii.198; iii.11 (evaŋ -- rūpo siyaŋ, evaŋ vedano etc.), 101 (id., & the khandhas); Sn 867, 874, 943, 1037, 1121; Nd1 425; Tikp 36, 38, 54, 262; Vism 625 (uppajjanaka˚).

-- ārammaṇa a visible thing as object Dhs 146, 365; DhsA 310 (cp. Expos. 407). -- âvacara world of form, sphere of matter (cp. Expos. 67, 216n, 264) PvA 163. -- ûpaga (satta) (a being) living in (bodily) form It 62; Sn 754. -- ūpajīvinī f. a woman living on her beauty, i. e. a harlot PvA 46, 201. -- ññu knowing (var.) bodily forms M i.220 = A v.347. -- taṇhā craving after form D ii.309; iii.216, 244, 280; VbhA 179 (in det.). -- dakkha one clever in forms, viz. an artist (accountant?) Miln 344 (in the Dhamma -- nagara). -- dhātu the element of form, material element Vism 486; Nett 32, 97. See above D 2. -- nimitta sign of form Ps i.92. -- patta beautiful J i.61. -- pamāṇika measuring by form (outward appearance), one of the 4 kinds of measurements which the world takes of the Tathāgata (see A ii.71 & Pug 53), viz. rūpa˚, ghosa˚, lūkha˚, dhamma˚ DhA iii.113; the same four similarly at SnA 242. -- pātubhāva appearance of form (also as ˚antara˚ intermediate form) SnA 245. -- bhava material existence: see above D 2. -- rāga lust after rebirth in rūpa D iii.234 (+arūpa˚); Nett 28 (pañc' indriyāni rūpīni rūpa -- rāgassa padaṭṭhānaŋ. -- rūpa material form (mutable material quality?) Cpd. 156, doubtful trsln & expln -- saññā perception of material qualities, notion of form D i.34; ii.112 (expld in det. at Vism 328); iii.224, 244, 253; Nd2 545; DhsA 200 (cp. Expos. 269). -- saññin perceiving form D iii.260; Ps ii.38; Sn 1113. -- santati duration of material form Vism 431; VbhA 21. -- samussaya accumulation of form, complex form ThA 98. -- samāpatti attainment of beauty J i.406. -- sampatti beauty J iii.187. -- siri personal splendour J i.60. -- 575 -- Rūpaka
Rūpaka
(nt.) [fr. rupa] form, figure; likeness of, image ( -- ˚); representation Vin ii.113 (rūpak' okiṇṇāni pattāni, of painted bowls); Th 2, 394 (see ruppa˚); DhA i.370 (maṇi˚ jewelled image); ii.69 (assa˚ toy horse); Mhvs 25, 26 (rāja˚); 27, 30 (devatā˚ shape of devas); VvA 213. -- dūrūpaka of squalid appearance J ii.167; cp. durūpa. Rūpatā
Rūpatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. rūpa] (being) shape(d), appearance; accordance, conformity, in phrase bhavya -- rūpatāya "by appearance of likelihood" A ii.191 (in hearsay formula, where it is missing in id. passage at Nd2 151). Rūpatta
Rūpatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. rūpa] lit. "form -- hood," i. e. shaping (being) shape(d) S iii.87 (rūpaŋ rūpattāya sankhātaŋ). Rūpavant
Rūpavant
(adj.) [rūpa+vant] 1. having bodily form S iii.16 & passim (in formula of sakkāya -- diṭṭhi); Dhs 1003. -- 2. having the form of ( -- ˚) Mhvs 14, 3 (gokaṇṇa˚). -- 3. beautiful Mhvs 10, 30 (f. rūpavatī). Rūpika
Rūpika
(adj.) [fr. rūpa] having shape; neg. a˚ formless Sdhp 236 (rūp' ârūpika). Rūpin
Rūpin
(adj.) [fr. rūpa] 1. having material qualities, possessed of form or shape or body or matter, belonging to the realm of form. rūpī is nearly always combd & contrasted with arūpī formless, incorporeal (see rūpa D 2 a), cp. combn rūpī arūpī saññī asaññī nevasaññinâsaññī Nd2 617 and similarly It 87 = Miln 217. -- D i.34 (attā dibbo rūpī), 77 (kāyo r. manomayo), 186 (attā etc.), 195 (attapaṭilābho r. manomayo); iii.111, 139; M ii.229; S iii.46 (r. arūpī saññī etc.); iv.202, 402; A ii.34; Nd1 97, 137; Ps ii.38 (rūpī rūpāni passati); Dhs 635, 1091, 1444; Vbh 123, 342 (read rūpī); Nett 28 (pañc' indriyāni rūpīni), 69 (five rūpīni indriyāni & five arūpīni); DA i.119 (attā); DhsA 304 (rūpino dhammā); VbhA 511 sq. (attā). -- 2. ( -- ˚) having the appearance of, resembling: see rumma˚. Rūpiya
Rūpiya1
(nt.) [cp. Sk. rūpya, lit. of splendid appearance, cp. name for gold jātarūpa] silver Vin iii.239 (here collectively for any transactions in "specie," as expld by C. p. 240: rūpiyaŋ nāma satthu -- vaṇṇo kahāpaṇo lohamāsako dārumāsako jatumāsako; i. e. copper, wood & lac); S i.104 (suddhaŋ r.); ii.233; Dhs 584.

-- maya made of silver Vin ii.112; S iii.144 (sovaṇṇamaya+); Pv ii.64 (where in sequence sovaṇṇa˚, maṇi˚, loha˚ r.; expld as "rajatamaya" PvA 95); DhA i.29. Rūpiya
Rūpiya2
see ruppa. Rūpeti
Rūpeti
[Caus. Denom. fr. rūpa] 1. to put into shape, to make appear, to make grow (?) SnA 132, 143 (v. l. ropeti). -- 2. to be formed, to appear, to come to notice, in defn of rūpa at VbhA 45: "rūpayatī ti rūpaŋ." Rūḷa
Rūḷa
[doubtful spelling; perhaps for rūḷha, evidently identical with rudda, as Trenckner suggests in Notes 6319] awful, terrible Miln 275 (synonymous with bhīma). Rūḷha
Rūḷha1
[pp. of rohati; of ruh; Sk. rūḍha] 1. grown Sn 20 (˚tiṇa). -- 2. (see rūhati) healed up Miln 291 (˚vaṇa one whose wound has healed): cp. rūhanā. Rūḷha
Rūḷha2
at Miln 217 & 218 is a by -- form of ruddha, pp. of rundhati (rumbhati) to obstruct; thus meaning "obstructed, difficult" (of a road, together with lugga palugga). Kern, Toev. s. v. trsls (as rūḷha1) by "overgrown." Rūḷhi
Rūḷhi
(f.) [fr. rūḷha, pp. of rohati, cp. Sk. rūḍhi] lit. ascent, growth see vi˚. -- fig. what has grown by custom, tradition, popular meaning of a word (˚sadda). The fig. meaning is the one usually found in Pāli, esp. in Abhidhamma and Commentary literature; e. g. rūḷhiyaŋ by tradition, usually, commonly, VbhA 1 (as category with the 3 other: rāsi, guṇa, paṇṇatti); rūḷhito id. VbhA 2; rūḷhiyā id. SnA 430; PvA 163; also rūḷhi -- vasena VvA 42; or with sadda: rūḷhi -- sadda usual meaning Vism 333; DhsA 205; ˚saddena in popular language, in ordinary speech, customarily, commonly speaking Tikp 253; Vism 310; DA i.239, 294: SnA 135, 400. -- 576 -- Rūhati
Rūhati1
[the specific P. form of the usual Sk. P. rohati (q. v.). The root ruh is given at Dhtp 334 with meaning "janana" i. e. causing, which refers more to the compounds with prefixes] 1. to grow, spread It 67; J iv.408 (akkhīni rūhiŋsu; also ppr. med. ruyhamāna); v.368; vi.360. -- 2. to heal (of a wound), close up Vin i.206 (vaṇo na rūhati); -- 3. to have effect in (loc.), to be effective Vin ii.203 = It 87 (vādo tamhi na rūhati). -- pp. rūḷha2. See also rūhita (pp. of Caus. rūheti=roheti). Rūhati
Rūhati2
[for rundh (rumbh, rudh) or Pass. rujjh˚; see also rumbhati & ropeti2] to be broken or (fig.) to be suspended Vin ii.55 (dhammattā rūhati the liability is cancelled). -- pp. rūḷha1. Rūhanā
Rūhanā
(f.) [cp. Sk. rohaṇa, fr. ruh: rūhati1] 1. growth J ii.322 (virūhanā C.). -- 2. healing (of a wound) Miln 112. Rūhita
Rūhita
(nt.) [fr. rūhati1] a boil, a diseased growth (lit. "healed") Vin iv.316 (expld as "yaŋ kiñci vaṇo"; v. l. rudhita). Re
Re
(indecl.) [shortened for are, q. v.] a part. of exclama- tion, mostly implying contempt, or deprecation, (DA i.276) "hīḷanavasena āmantanaŋ" i. e. address of disdain: heigh, go on, get away, hallo. -- D i.96, 107; J iii.184 (C. = āmantaṇe nipāto); often combd with similar particles of exhortation, like cara pi re get away with you! M ii.108; Vin iv.139 (so read for cara pire which the C. takes as "para," amamaka); or ehi re come on then! J i.225; ha re look out! here they are! PvA 4; aho vata re wish I would! Pv ii.945 (re ti ālapanaŋ PvA 131); no ca vata re vattabbe but indeed, good sir . . . (Kvu 1). Rekhā
Rekhā
(f.) [fr. rikh, for which the Pāli form is likh, cp. Sk. rekhā, Lat. rīma, Ohg. rīga row] line, streak Abhp 539. See lekhā. Recana
Recana
(nt.) [fr. ric] letting loose, emission Dhtm 610. Cp. vi˚. Reṇu
Reṇu
[cp. Vedic reṇu] 1. dust; pl. reṇū particles of dust. -- Vin i.32 (˚hatā bhūmi); Vism 338 = Nd1 505=J i.117 (rāgo rajo na ca pana reṇu vuccati); J iv.362 (okiṇṇā raja -- reṇūhi; C. expls by "paŋsūhi"); Miln 274 (pl.); SnA 132 (reṇuŋ vūpasāmeti allays). -- 2. pollen (in this meaning found only in the so -- called Jātaka -- style) J i.233 (mahā -- tumba -- matta), 349 (pupphato reṇuŋ gaṇhāti); iii.320; v.39 (puppha˚); vi.530 (padumakinjakkha˚); DhA iv.203 (˚vaṭṭhi). Reruka
Reruka
[etym.? Probably dialectical] "elephant's tooth," ivory J ii.230 ( = hatthi -- danta C.). Roga
Roga
[Vedic roga: ruj (see rujati), cp. Sk. rujā breakage, illness] illness, disease. -- The defn of roga at J ii.437 is "roga rujana -- sabhāvattaŋ." There are many diff. enumerations of rogas and sets of standard combns, of which the foll. may be mentioned. At sn 311 (cp. D iii.75) it is said that in old times there were only 3 diseases, viz. icchā, anasanaŋ, jarā, which gradually, through slaughtering of animals, increased to 98. Bdhgh at SnA 324 hints at these 98 with "cakkhu -- rog' adinā -- bhedena." Beginning with this (cakkhuroga affection of the eye) we have a list of 34 rogas at Nd1 13 (under pākaṭa -- parissayā or open dangers = Nd1 360= Nd2 420) & Nd2 3041 B, viz. cakkhu˚ & the other 4 senses, sīsa˚, kaṇṇa˚, mukha˚, danta˚; kāsa, sāsa, pināsa, ḍāha, jara; kucchiroga, mucchā, pakkhandikā, sūlā, visūcikā; kuṭṭhaŋ, gaṇḍo, kilāso, soso, apamāro; daddu, kaṇḍu, kacchu, rakhasā, vitacchikā, lohita -> pittaŋ, madhumeho, aŋsā, piḷakā, bhagandalā. This list is followed by list of 10 ābādhas & under "dukkha" goes on with var. other "ills," which however do not make up the number 98. The same list is found at A v.110. The 10 ābādhas (Nd2 3041 C.) occur at A ii.87 & Miln 308 (as āgantuka -- rogā). The 4 "rogas" of the Sun (miln 273, cp. Vin ii.295) are: abbha, mahikā, megha, Rāhu. -- Another mention of roga together with plagues which attack the corn in the field is given at J v.401, viz. visa -- vāta; mūsika -- salabha -- suka -- pāṇaka; setaṭṭhika -- roga etc., i. e. hurtful winds, mice, moths & parrots, mildew. -- The combn roga, gaṇḍa, salla is sometimes found, e. g. M ii.230; Vism 335. Of other single rogas we mention: kucchi˚ (stomach -- ache) J i.243; ahivātaka˚ Vin i.78; J ii.79; iv.200; DhA i.231; paṇḍu˚ jaundice Vin i.206; J ii.102; DhA i.25; tiṇapupphaka˚ hay -- fever Miln 216. -- See also ātanka & ābādha. On roga in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 130. -> D i.11, 73; iii.182; S iii.32; iv.64; A ii.128, 142 sq.; iv.289,; Nd1 486; Vism 236 (as cause of death), 512 (in simile); VbhA 88 (in sim. of dukkha etc.); ThA 288; VvA 6 (rogena phuṭṭha), 75 (sarīre r. uppajji); PvA 86 (kacchu˚), 212 (rogena abhibhūta). -- Opp. aroga health: see sep.

-- ātanka affliction by illness A ii.174 sq.; v.169, 318. -- niḍḍha the nest or seat of disease Dh 148 (cp. DhA iii.110); as ˚nīḷa at It 37. -- mūla the root of disease Sn 530. -- vyasana distress or misfortune of disease D iii.235 (one of the 5 vyasanāni: ñāti˚, bhoga˚, roga˚, sīla˚, diṭṭhi˚); Miln 196 (id.). Rogin
Rogin
(adj.) [fr roga] having a disease, suffering from ( -- ˚); one who has a disease Vism 194 (ussanna -- vyādhi dukkhassa); Sdhp 86. -- paṇḍu˚ one who has the jaundice J ii.285; iii.401. Rocati
Rocati
[Vedic rocate, ruc, Idg. *leuq, as in Lat. luceo to be bright (cp. lūx light, lūmen, lūna etc.); Sk. rocana splendid, ruci light, roka & rukṣa light; Av. raocantshining; Gr. amfi -- lu/kh twi -- light, leuko/s white; also with 1: Sk. loka world, locate to perceive, locana eye; Lith. laukti to await; Goth. liuhap light = Ohg. lioht, E. light; Oir lōche lightning. -- The Dhtp (& Dhtm) gives 2 roots ruc, viz. the one with meaning "ditti" (Dhtp 37), the other as " rocana" (Dhtp 395), both signifying "light" or "splendour," but the second probably to be taken in sense of "pleasing"] 1. to please, i. e. it pleases (with dat. of person) Th 2, 415 (rocate); Mhvs 15, 9 (nivāso rocatu). Cp. BSk. rocyate AvŚ ii.158. -- 2. to find pleasure in (loc.) Miln 338 (bhave). -- Caus. roceti: 1. to be pleased, to give one's consent DhA i.387 (gloss K rucitha ruceyyātha). -> 2. (with acc. of object) to find pleasing, to find delight in, to be attached to, to approve of, to choose S i.41 (vadhaŋ); J i.142 (Devadattassa laddhiŋ r.); v.178 (pabbajjaŋ roc' ahaŋ=rocemi C.), 226 (kammaŋ). -> Freq. with dhammaŋ to approve of a doctrine or scheme, e. g. at Vin ii.199 (Devadattassa dhammaŋ); S i.133; Sn 94 (asataŋ dh.), 398 (dhammaŋ imaŋ rocaye); J iv.53 (dh. asataŋ na rocayāma). -- Cp. abhi˚, ā˚, vi˚. Roṇṇa
Roṇṇa
see ruṇṇa. Rodati
Rodati
see rudati. Rodana
Rodana
(nt.) [fr. rud] crying, weeping DhA i.28; PvA 63, 64; Dhtp 144. Rodha
Rodha1
[fr. rudh] obstruction, stopping, in cpd. para- pāṇa˚ stopping the life of somebody else; life -- slaughter, murder Sn 220; J ii.450. Cp. anu˚, ni˚, vi˚. Rodha
Rodha2
(nt.) [fr. rudh] bank, dam A iii.128 (where id. p. at A. i.154 reads gedha, cave; v. l. also gedha, cp. v. l. rodhi˚ for gedhi˚ at Nd2 585). Rodhana
Rodhana
(nt.) [fr. rudh] obstructing J v.346; Sdhp 57. -- 577 -- Ropa
Ropa
( -- ˚) [fr. rop = Caus. of ruh] plantation; in vana˚ & ārāma˚ S i.33. Ropaka
Ropaka
[ropa+ka] sapling J ii.346 (rukkha˚). Ropana
Ropana
(nt.) & ropanā (f.) [fr. ropeti1] 1. planting PvA 151 (ārāma˚); Mhvs 15, 41. -- 2. healing S iv.177 (vaṇa˚). -- 3. furthering, making grow Ps ii.115 (buddhi˚). -> 4. (f.) accusation Vin iv.36. Ropaya
Ropaya
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [for *ropya, fr. ropeti1] to be healed, only in cpd. du˚ hard to heal (of a wound) Vin i.216 (vaṇa). Ropāpeti
Ropāpeti
see ropeti1. Ropita
Ropita
[pp. of ropeti1] 1. planted Pv ii.78. -- 2. growing up Pv 970 (read "pi ropitaŋ" for viropitaŋ). -- 3. furnished with, powdered with ( -- ˚) Vv 6415 (Ed. vosita; VvA 280 expls by ullitta, vicchurita). -- 4. accused, brought forward (of a charge) Vin iv.36. Ropima
Ropima
(nt.) [fr. ropeti1] 1. what has been planted Vin iv.267. -- 2. a kind of arrow M i.429 (contrasted with kaccha; Neumann trsls ropima by "aus Binsen"). -> 3. (adj.) at Vv 4413 aropima ("not planted"?) is an attribute of trees. It is not expld in VvA. Ropeti
Ropeti1
[Caus. of rūhati1] 1. to plant or sow J i.150 (nivāpa- tiṇaŋ); Mhvs 15, 42 (amb' aṭṭhikaŋ); 19, 56; DhA ii.109. -- 2. to put up, fix J i.143 (sūlāni). -- 3. to further, increase, make grow Sn 208 (Pot. ropayeyya). -- 4. (fig.) to fix, direct towards, bring up against: see ropeti2 2. -- pp. ropita. Caus. II. ropāpeti to cause to be planted D ii.179; J vi.333; Mhvs 34, 40; DhA ii.109. -- Cp. abhi˚, abhini˚, ā˚. Ropeti
Ropeti2
[Caus. of rūhati2. See lumpati] 1.to cause to break off, to cause to suspend or cancel; to pass off, refuse Vin ii.261 (bhikkhūhi bhikkhunīnaŋ kammaŋ ropetvā bhikkhunīnaŋ niyyādetuŋ, i. e. by the bhikkhus is an act of the nuns to be passed off and to be referred to the nuns). -- 2. to make confess or accuse of (acc.: āpattiŋ a guilt) Vin ii.2 (first codeti, then sāreti, then ropeti & lastly (sanghaŋ) ñāpeti), 85 (id.); iv.36, (aññavādakaŋ ropeti to bring the charge of heresy against someone). No. 2 perhaps better to ropeti1. Cp. Vin. Texts ii.334. -- To ropeti2 belong the cpds. oropeti (cut off) & voropeti (deprive). They are better to be taken here than to ava+ruh. Roma
Roma
(nt.) [Vedic roman; the usual P. form is loma (q. v.)] the hair of the body J v.430 (where in roma -- rājiyā maṇḍita -- udarā as expln of loma -- sundarī); Sdhp 119 (˚kūpa), Romaka
Romaka
(adj.) [fr. roma] feathered (?) J ii.383 (C. wrong!). Romañca
Romañca
(?) [fr. roma, cp. Vedic romaśa] hairy (?) Dāvs v.14 (˚kancuka). Romanthaka
Romanthaka
(adj.) [fr. romanthati] chewing the cud, ruminating Vin ii.132. Romanthati & Romantheti
Romanthati
& Romantheti [to romantha; cp. Lat. rumen & ruminare = E. ruminate] to chew the cud, to ruminate Vin ii.132 (˚ati); J iv.392 (˚eti). Romanthana
Romanthana
(nt.) [fr. romanthati] ruminating Vin ii.321. Rorava
Rorava
[fr. ru, cp. Sk. raurava, N. of a purgatory] 1. a sort of hart (i. e. ruru) M i.429. -- 2. N. of a naraka (purgatory): see Dictionary of Names. E.g. J iii.299; Dāvs iii.12; Sdhp 195. Cp. BSk. raurava Divy 67. Rosa
Rosa
[cp. Sk. roṣa, of ruṣ] 1. anger, angry feeling M i.360. -- 2. quarrel J iv.316. Rosaka
Rosaka
(adj.) [fr. rosa; cp. BSk. roṣaka Divy 38] angry, wrathful S i.85, 96; Sn 133; Vv 528 ( = paresaŋ ros' uppādanena r. VvA 226); J ii.270. Rosanā
Rosanā
(f.) [abstr. fr. rosati] making angry, causing anger, being angry Vbh 86 (hiŋsanā+), expld at VbhA 75 by ghaṭṭanā. Cp. BSk. roṣaṇī AvŚ i.178. Rosaneyya
Rosaneyya
(adj.) [grd. formation fr. rosa] apt to be angry or cause anger; neg. a˚ not to be angered, not irritable Sn 216. Rosita
Rosita
[pp. of rus, to smear: Sk. rūṣita; given as root rus at Dhtm 442 with meaning "ālepa"] smeared (with), anointed J iv.440 ( = vilitta C.). Roseti
Roseti
[Caus. of rosati, ruṣ; see rusita] to make angry, to annoy, to irritate S i.162; A ii.215 (so read for rosati); iii.38; Sn 125, 130, 216; J i.432; iv.491. Rohañña
Rohañña
(adj.) [fr. roha = rohita] red J v.259 (rohaññā pungav'ūsabhā; C. expls by ratta -- vaṇṇā). Kern. Toev. s. v. proposes rohiñño=*rohiṇyah, (cp. pokkharaṇī for ˚iṇī) red cows. Rohati
Rohati:
for the Sk. rohati of ruh to grow we find the regular P. correspondent rūhati: see rūhati1. The Caus. of this verb is ropeti (to make grow): see ropeti! -- Another root, restricted to the Pāli, is seen in rūhati2 (with pp. rūḷha) and is equal to rundh (rudh, rumbh) to break. The Caus. of this root ( ropeti2) is either an indirect formation from it or (more likely) a direct representative of rup = lup as in P. lumpati. To the latter belong the prep. cpds. oropeti & voropeti. Rohicca
Rohicca
[fr. rohita, perhaps directly fr. Vedic rohita ewe, lit. the red one] a kind of deer J vi.537 (˚sarabhā migā). Rohiṇī
Rohiṇī
(f.) [cp. Vedic rohiṇī red cow or mare] 1. a red cow A i.162 = iii.214. -- 2. N. of a nakkhatta or constellation ("red cow") SnA 456; Mhvs 19, 47. -- 3. N. of a river SnA 357. Rohita
Rohita
(adj.) [Vedic rohita; cp. the usual P. word lohita red & blood. See also rudhira & ruhira] red, as attribute of fishes at J v.405 (i. e. a special kind of fish), and of deer at J v.406 in same passage (i. e. a special kind of deer). Otherwise only in standing term rohita -- maccha the "red fish," viz. Cyprinus Rohita, which is freq. mentioned in the "Jātaka" literature, e. g. J ii.433; iii.333; DhA ii.132 (four), 140; KhA 118. -- 578 -- -- L. La
La
syllable of abbreviation, corresponding to our "etc.": see peyyāla. Lakaṭṭhika
Lak
-- aṭṭhika at VvA 222 is doubtful; aṭṭhika means "kernel," lak˚ may be a misspelling for labujak˚ (?). Lakanaka
Lakanaka
(nt.?) [fr. lag, with k for g, as lakuṭa: laguḷa etc. Would correspond to Sk. *lagnaka, cp. Trenckner. Notes 62; Geiger, P.Gr. § 391] ship's anchor (nāvā˚) Miln 377 (v. l. lagganaka), 378. Lakāra
Lakāra
[for alankāra, lit. "fitting up," cp. Hindī & Marāthī langara, Tamil ilankaran "in meaning anchor."] a sail J ii.112; Miln 378; Dāvs iv.42; Vism 137 (v. l. BB. lankāra). Lakuṭa
Lakuṭa
[see laguḷa for etym.] a club, cudgel Miln 255 (in sequence daṇḍa -- leḍḍu -- lakuṭa -- muggara), 301, 367, 368. See also laguḷa. Lakuṇṭaka
Lakuṇṭaka
[dialectical] a dwarf Mhvs 23, 50 (˚sarīratta); VbhA 26 (˚pāda -- purisa, cpd. with arūpa); PugA 227; C. on S i.237. Lakuṇṭakatta
Lakuṇṭakatta
(nt.) [fr. lakuṇṭaka] dwarfishness J vi.337. Laketi
Laketi
[for laggeti, see lakanaka] to hold fast (lit. to make adhere) Miln 377. Lakkha
Lakkha
(nt.) [fr. lakṣ (see lakkhaṇa), or (after Grassmann) lag "to fix," i. e. to mark. Cp. Vedic lakṣa price at gambling (Zimmer, Altind. Leben 287)] 1. a mark Miln 102. -- 2. a target Miln 418; DhA i.52 (˚yoggā target practice, i. e. shooting). -- 3. a stake at gambling J vi.271. -- 4. a high numeral, a lac or 100,000 (but cp. PvA 255, where lakkha of Pv iv.338 is taken as a "period of time," equal to 100 koṭis); Dāvs v.66. Lakkhañña
Lakkhañña
(adj.) [fr. lakkhaṇa, cp. BSk. lakṣaṇya diviner Divy 474] connected with auspices, auspicious, in phrase "lakkhaññā vata bho dosinā ratti" (how grand a sign, friends, is the moonlight night! trsln) D i.47 = J i.509 (expld at DA i.141 as "divasa -- mās' -- ādīnaŋ lakkhaṇaŋ bhavituŋ yuttā"); J v.370 (˚sammata considered auspicious). Lakkhaṇa
Lakkhaṇa
(nt.) [Vedic lakṣman nt. sign; adj. lakṣmaṇa; later Sk. lakṣmaṇa nt. In the defn of grammarians syn. with anka brand, e. g. Dhtp 536 "anka lakkhaṇe lakkha dassane," or Dhtm 748 "lakkha = dassanaanke"; cp. J i.451 lakkhaṇena anketi to brand. -> The Sk. Np. Lakṣmaṇa appears also in Prk. as Lakkhaṇa: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 312] 1. sign, characteristic, mark; esp. a sign as implying something extraordinary or pointing to the future, therefore a prognosticative mark (cp. talisman), a distinguishing mark or salient feature, property, quality (as Rh. D. in Dial. i.19 somewhat lengthily, after Bdhgh, trsls lakkhaṇa by "signs of good & bad qualities in the foll. things and of the marks in them denoting the health or luck of their owners") D i.9 (a long list, as forbidden practice of fortune -- telling, like maṇi˚ from jewels, daṇḍa˚ from sticks, asi˚ from marks on swords etc.); Sn 360 (pl. lakkhanā, here as fortune -- telling together with supina telling fr. dreams, cp. SnA 362: daṇḍa˚, vattha˚ etc. referring to D i.9), 927 (with Āthabbana, supina & nakkhatta, all kinds of secret sciences; expld at SnA 564 as "maṇi -- lakkhaṇâdi") 1018 (gottaŋ brūhi sa˚ "with its distinguishing marks"); J vi.364 (sign of beauty); Miln 171 (yathāva˚ just characterization); Mhvs 35, 109 (itthi˚ auspicious signs in women); PvA 161, 219; SnA 386. A long enumn of all sorts of (perfect) marks (tatha -- lakkhaṇāni) is found at DA i.62 sq. Cp. tādi -- lakkhaṇa marks of such (a being), with ref. to good luck etc. J iii.98; SnA 200; VvA 95. -- 2. mark on the body, esp. when serving a def. purpose, e. g. as the branding (of slaves), or the marks of a fortunate being, pointing towards his future greatness: (a) brand J i.451, cp. cpd. ˚āhata. -- (b) the (32) marks of a mahā -- purisa or a great being, either destined to be a rājā cakkavatti, or a sammā -- sambuddha. These are given at Sn 1019 (pl. lakkhanā), 1021, 1022 as only 3 (viz. mukhaŋ jivhāya chādeti, uṇṇ' assa bhamuk' antare, kos' ohitaŋ vattha -- guyhaŋ with ref. to his tongue, the hair between the eyebrows & the sexual organ); more completely as 32 at D ii.16 sq.; iii.142 sq. (the Lakkhaṇa Suttanta); referred to at D i.88, 105; J i.56; Mhvs 5, 91; cp. paripuṇṇa -- kāya Sn 548 (with expln lakkhaṇehi puṇṇatāya at SnA 452). -- 3. (in spec. sense:) pudendum J v.197 (subha˚, the male member), 366. -- 4. (adj.) ( -- ˚) having the marks (of), characterized by, of such & such character A i.102 (kamma˚; bāla˚ & paṇḍita˚, together with bāla -- & paṇḍitanimitta); Miln 111 (sata -- puñña˚, of the Buddha); VvA 71 (para -- sampatti -- usuyyā -- lakkhaṇā issā); PvA 17, 120. -- 5. (as t. t. in philosophy) specific attribute, characteristic (mark). In contrast to nimitta more a substantial attribute or primary characteristic (cp. VbhA 261). Compared with other terms of definition we get the foll.: rasa essential property, paccupaṭṭhāna recurring phenomenon, padatṭhāna immediate occasion DhsA 63 (trsln Expos. i.84), cp. Cpd. 13 (where padaṭṭhāna is trsld as "proximate cause"). -- Ps i.54 sq. (khandhānaŋ); ii.108 (saccānaŋ), VbhA 85, 136 (with ref. to the Paṭiccasamuppāda, cp. Vism 528), 261 (fourfold, of kesā etc.); Vism 278 (with ref. to kammaṭṭhāna) 351 (4, of the dhātus: thaddha˚, ābandhana˚, paripācana˚, vitthambhana˚), 363 sq. (id.), 495 (ariya -- saccānaŋ); VvA 38 (compd with ārammaṇa with ref. to jhāna). -- The 3 properties (tilakkhaṇaŋ) of existing things or of the phenomenal world are anicca, dukkha, anatta, or impermanence, suffering, unreality: thus at J i.48 (dhamma -- desanā ti -- l -- ˚muttā), 275; iii.377 (through contemplating them arises vipassanā & pacceka -- bodhi -- ñāṇa). -- abl. lakkhaṇato "by or qua characteristic," "in its essential qualification," often found in exegetical analysis in Commentary style combd with var. similar terms (atthato, kamato, nimittato etc.), e. g. Vism 351, 363, 495, 528; VbhA 46, 76, 83, 131, 261 (where Vism 351 has paripācana for uṇhatta); SnA 343. -- Cp. upa˚, vi˚, sa˚.

-- āhata affected with a mark (of punishment or disgrace), branded Vin i.76; VvA 66. -- kusala clever at interpreting bodily marks or at fortune -- telling from signs (cp. nemittaka) M i.220; J i.272. -- kusalatā cleverness at (telling people's fortune by) signs VvA 138. -- paṭiggāhaka one who reads the signs, a soothsayer, wise man J i.56. -- pāṭhaka an expert in (interpreting) signs, fortune -- teller J i.455; ii.194; v.211. -- manta the secret science of (bodily) marks Sn 690 (but expld at SnA 488 as "lakkhaṇāni ca vedā ca," thus taking it as Dvandva); DhA iii.194. -- sampatti excellency of marks J i.54. -- sampanna endowed with (auspicious) signs Sn 409; J i.455.

the 3 lakkhaṇas at Sn 1022 refer to the brahmin Bāvari. -- 579 -- Lakkhika & ˚ya
Lakkhika
& ˚ya (adj.) [fr. lakkhī] belonging to auspices, favoured by good luck Sdhp 105 (˚ya); usually neg. alakkhika unlucky, unfortunate, ill -- fated; either with appa -- puñña of no merit, e. g. S v.146 = J ii.59; Vv 508 (= nissirīka, kālakaṇṇi VvA 212); or pāpa wicked Vin ii.192 (of Devadatta). Lakkhita
Lakkhita
[pp. of lakkheti] see abhi˚. Lakkhī
Lakkhī
(f.) [Sk. lakṣmī] 1. luck, good fortune, success, personal welfare J iii.443 (combd with sirī splendour; expld by parivāra -- sampatti & paññā respectively); iv.281 (expld as "sirī pi puññam pi paññā pi"). -> 2. splendour, power Dāvs i.6 (rajja˚ royal splendour); iv.38 (id.). -- 3. prosperity Dāvs v.35 (˚nidhāna Anurādhapura). Lakkheti
Lakkheti
[Denom. fr. lakkha] to mark, distinguish, characterize Nett 30. -- pp. lakkhita. -- Cp. upa˚. Lagati & Laggati
Lagati
& Laggati [with variant langati; the spelling with gg is the usual one. Root lag, as in Vedic lakṣa etc.; Sk. lagati, pp. lagna (from the pp. lagga the double g has been generalized in P.: but see Geiger, P.Gr. § 136); perhaps to Lat. langueo, E. languid, from meaning "to lag," but doubtful: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. langueo. -> The Dhtp 23 gives lag in meaning "sanga," which is the customary syn. in the commentaries. Cp. langī] to adhere to, stick (fast) to (loc.), to hang from Vin i.202; J iii.120; DhA i.131; iii.298 (ppr. alaggamāna); DA i.257 (for abhisajjati); aor. laggi PvA 153 (tīre); ger. laggitva J iii.19; DhA iv.25; PvA 280 (but better to be read laggetvā making fast; as v. l.). -- pp. lagga & laggita. -- Caus. laggeti to make stick to, to fasten, tie, hang up Vin i.209; ii.117, 152; J iii.107; v.164, 175; Mhvs 7, 9 (suttañ ca tesaŋ hatthesu laggetvā); DhA i.138. -> Caus. II. laggāpeti to cause to fasten or stick, to make stick, to obstruct J iii.241; Mhvs 33, 11; 34, 48 (kalāpaŋ); DhA iv.183. -- Cp. ālaggeti. Lagana & Laggana
Lagana
& Laggana (nt.) [fr. lag] 1. adhering J i.46 (g.; v.281); with gg: J iii.202 ( = sanga); Nd2 p. 188 (s. v. nissita, in sequence l., bandhana, palibodha); Miln 105; DhA iii.433. -- 2. slinging round, making fast VvA 212. Laguḷa
Laguḷa
[cp. Sk. laguḍa, Marāthī lākūḍa, Hindī lakuṭa stick. The word is really a dialect word (Prk.) and as such taken into Sk. where it ought to be *lakṛta = lakuṭa. Other etym. connections are Lat. lacertus (arm), Gr. le/krana, la/c; Old Prussian alkunis elbow; and distantly related E. leg. See Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. lacertus. Cp. P. bhuja1 & ratana] a club, cudgel Vin iii.77 (enumd with var. weapons of murder, like asi, satti, bheṇḍi, pāsāṇa etc.); Miln 152, 351 (kodaṇḍa -- laguḷa -- muggara), 355 (kilesa˚); J vi.394; Vism 525 (˚abhighāta). Lagga
Lagga
(adj.) [pp. of lag(g)ati] sticking; stuck, attached; obstructed, hindered Nd2 107; Miln 346 (laggaŋ disvā mahiŋ); DhsA 127 (alagga -- bhāva); DhA i.361 (˚mānasa). Neg. alagga unobstructed (lit. not sticking or being stuck to), in phrase ākāso alaggo asatto apatiṭṭhito apalibuddho Miln 388 and elsewhere. -- Cp. olagga. Laggāpana
Laggāpana
(nt.) [fr. laggāpeti: see lagati] making stick, causing obstruction J iii.241. Laggita
Laggita
[pp. of lag(g)ati] stuck, adhering; obstructed J iv.11. Often in exegetical style in sequence lagga, laggita, palibuddha, e. g. Nd2 p. 188 (s. v. nissita), cp. No. 107. Laghima
Laghima
(langhima) in phrase aṇima -- laghim' ādikaŋ is doubtful in reading & meaning at KhA 108 = Vism 211 (spelt langh˚ here). Lankāra
Lankāra
see lakāra. Langī
Langī
(f.) [fr. lag] bolt, bar, barrier, obstruction, only metaphorically with ref. to avijjā M i.142, 144; Pug 21; Dhs 390; VbhA 141. Langula
Langula
(nt.) [cp. Sk. lāngula & lāngūla; also the ordinary P. forms nangula & nanguṭṭha, to lag] the tail of an animal Mhvs 6, 6 (lāḷento langulaŋ; v. l. nangulaŋ). See also nangula & (concerning l>n) landhati ( = nandhati); nalāṭa (for laḷāta). Langhaka
Langhaka
[fr. langh] a jumper, tumbler, acrobat J ii.142; Miln 34, 191, 331. f. langhikā Vin iv.285 (with naṭakā & sokajjhāyikā). Langhati
Langhati
[langh, a by -- form of lagh, as in laghu (see lahu) light, quick; Idg. *legh & *lengh, with meanings of both "quick" & "light" (or "little") from the movement of jumping. Here belong Gr. elaxu/s little, e)lafro/s quick; Lat. levis (fr. *leghṷis), Goth. leihto = E. light; Ohg. lungar quick, Ger. ge -- lingen to succeed. Further Lat. limen threshold. Perhaps also the words for "lungs," viz. Ger. lunge, E. lights etc. -- The Dhtp 33 defines lagh (langh) by "gati -- sosanesu"] 1. to jump over (acc.) step over, to hop J iii.272; v.472 (langhamāno yāti); Miln 85. -- 2. to make light of, disregard, neglect, transgress PvA 15; VvA 138. -- Cp. abhilanghati, ullanghati. -- Caus. langheti (=langhati) to jump over (acc.), lit. to make jump J v.472 (vatiŋ); Th 2, 384 (Meruŋ langhetuŋ icchasi); Miln 85. -- ger. langhayitvā ThA 255, & (poet.) langhayitvāna J i.431 (=attānaŋ langhitvā C.); Mhvs 25, 44 (pākāraŋ). -> Cp. olangheti. Langhana
Langhana
(nt.) [fr. langh] jumping, hopping J i.430 (˚naṭaka a tumbler, jumper, acrobat, cp. Fick, Soc. Gliederung 188, 190, 192); ii.363, 431. Cp. ullanghanā, olanghanā. Langhamayā
Langhamayā
(pl.) at J v.408 is problematic. We should expect something like langhiyo or langhimayā in meaning "deer," as it is combd with eneyyaka. The C. reads langhimayā ("like deer; jumping"?) & expls by nānā -- ratana -- mayā "made of var. jewels," rather strange. Langhāpana
Langhāpana
(nt.) [fr. Caus. of langh] making jump, raising, lifting Vism 143 ("launching"). Langhi (Langhī)
Langhi
(Langhī) (f.) [fr. langh] 1. a kind of deer (?) J vi.537. -- 2. doubtful of meaning & origin in phrase langhī -- pitāmahā at J ii.363 = iii.226: "whose grandfather was a deer, or a jumper" (?); used in disparagingly addressing a crane. The C. to J ii.363 expls rather strangely as follows: langhī vuccati ākāse langhanato megho "(a) jumping deer is called the cloud because of its jumping in the air," balākā ca nāma megha -- saddena gabbhaŋ gaṇhantī ti "the cranes conceive by the sound of the cloud," meghasaddo balākānaŋ pitā megho pitāmaho ti "the sound of the cloud is the father of the cranes & the cloud the grandfather. " Lajjati
Lajjati
[lajj; Dhtp 72: lajjane] 1. to be ashamed or abashed, to be modest or bashful PvA 48 (for harāyati); ppr. lajjamāna DhA i.188; PvA 88; fut. lajjissati J iii.218; inf. lajjituŋ DhA i.72; ger. lajjitvā J i.208; grd. lajjitabba (nt.) what one has to be ashamed of, something disgraceful J vi.395; also (an odd form) lajjitāya (so read: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 203 against Trenckner, Notes, 6627) Dh 316. -- 2. to have regard of (gen.), to consider, to respect J iv.128. -- Caus. II. lajjāpeti to cause to be ashamed, to put to the blush J iii.137; v.296. -- pp. lajjita. -- 580 -- Lajjana
Lajjana
(nt.) [fr. lajj] being ashamed Dhtp 72. Lajjanaka
Lajjanaka
(nt.) [fr. lajjana] causing shame, humiliating, disgraceful J vi.395. Lajjava
Lajjava
(nt.) [fr. lajj] shamefacedness D iii.213 (where Dhs 1340 has maddava); cp. A i.94. Lajjā
Lajjā
(f.) [fr. lajj] shame, bashfulness, modesty M i.414; DA i.70; DhA ii.90; instr. lajjāya out of shame PvA 47, 112, 283. Cp. nillajja. Lajjāpanikā
Lajjāpanikā
(f.) [fr. lajjāpeti, Caus. II. of lajjati] making ashamed, putting to shame, disgracing J v.284 (kula˚ bringing disgrace on the clan). Lajjita
Lajjita
[pp. of lajjati] ashamed, bashful Sdhp 35. -- f. lajjitā as n. abstr. "bashfulness" DhA i.188. Lajjitabbaka
Lajjitabbaka
(nt.) [grd. of lajjati+ka] something to be ashamed of, a cause of shame, disgrace J vi.395. Lajjin
Lajjin
(adj.) [fr. lajj] feeling shame, modest, afraid, shy, conscientious (expld as "one who has hiri & ottappa" by C. on S i.73: see K.S. 320 & cp. Dhs. trstln p. 18) D i.4, 63; iii.15; S i.73; A ii.208; iv.249 sq.; Pug 57; Pv ii.915 (expld as one who is afraid of sin); Miln 373; DA i.70. -- pl. lajjino Vin i.44.

-- dhamma (lajji˚) modesty, feeling of shame Vin ii.53 sq. Lacchati
Lacchati
fut. of labhati (q. v.). Lañca
Lañca
[cp. Sk. lañca] a present, a bribe J i.201; ii.186; v.184; vi.408 (gahita, bribes received); DhA i.269 (˚ŋ adāsi); iv.1; PvA 209. The word is a word peculiar to the "Jātaka" literature.

-- khādaka "eater of bribes," one who feeds on bribes J ii.196; v.1. -- ggāha taking of bribes J v.109. -- daṇḍaka a staff given as a present (?) J vi.450 (v. l. volañjanaka˚). -- dāna gift of bribes, bribery J iii.205. -- vittaka one who gets rich through bribes J i.339. Lañcaka
Lañcaka:
Hardy in ed. of Netti, p. 278 suggests writing lañjaka & trsld "making known," "exposition" (cp. Sk. lañj to declare], found only at Miln 137 & 217 in cpd. Saŋyutta -- nikāya -- vara -- lañcaka (trln Rh. D.: "most excellent"); at Miln 242 & 258 in Majjhimanikāya vara˚; at Miln 362 in Ekuttara -- nikāya -- vara˚; and at Nett 2 in cpd. nayalañjaka. Trenckner (Miln ed. p. 424) translates it as "excellent gift (to mankind)." Lañcana
Lañcana
in "kārāpesi tilañcanaŋ" at Dpvs 20, 10 is not clear. We may have to correct reading into lañchanaŋ or lañchakaŋ. Oldenberg in his trsln (p. 211) leaves the word out and remarks: "Probably this passage refers to the three pupphayāna mentioned in the Mahāvaŋsa (33, 22, where Geiger reads "pupphādhānāni tīṇi," with trsln "3 stone terraces for offerings of flowers"), though I do not know how to explain or to correct the word used here (tilañcanaŋ)." Lañcha
Lañcha
[fr. lañch] a mark, an imprint J ii.425; VbhA 52. Lañchaka
Lañchaka
[fr. lañcha; doubtful] one who makes marks (expld by Cy. as "lakkhaṇa -- kāraka") J iv.364, 366 (ti˚, so expld by Cy. v. l. ni˚). See nillañchaka & cp. lañcana (ti˚). Lañchati
Lañchati
[lañch Dhtp 54 "lakkhaṇe"] to stamp, to seal DhA i.35 (sāsanaŋ rāja -- muddāya lañchanto). -- Caus. lañcheti. -- 1. to seal J i.452 (spelt lañjetvā); ii.326; vi.385; SnA 577 (rāja -- muddikāya); DhA i.21. -- 2. to mark, paint, smear Vin ii.107 = 266 (mukhaŋ). -> Caus. II. lañchāpeti to have marked or sealed (by king's command) Vism 38 ("had his seal put to this order"; trsl.). -- Cp. nillaccheti. Lañchana
Lañchana
(nt.) [fr. lañch] 1. stamp, mark, imprint VvA 89 (sasa˚, of the moon); Dāvs ii.23 (pada˚). -- 2. the seal (of a letter or edict) SnA 172. -- Cp. lañcana. Lañchita
Lañchita
[pp. of lañcheti] sealed J i.227 (pihita -- lañchitā vā loha -- cātiyo). Lañjaka
Lañjaka
[see lañcaka] in dīpa˚ stands as equivalent of dīpavaŋsa thus "story of the island" Dpvs 18, 2. Oldenberg (trsln p. 204) translates "the island of Lankā." Lañjeti
Lañjeti
see lañchati and valañjeti. Laṭukikā
Laṭukikā
(f.) [Dimin. fr. laṭvāka; dial.] the Indian quail, Perdix chinensis D i.91; M i.449 (l. sakuṇikā); J iii.44, 174 sq. (quoted at SnA 358 & DhA i.55); v.121; Miln 202; DA i.257. -- Cp. Cunningham, Bharhut Tope, p. 58. Laṭṭhaka
Laṭṭhaka
(adj.) [Kern, Toev. s. v. compares Sk. laṭaha, laḍaha, dialectical] beautiful, auspicious, lovely J iii.464, 493; iv.1, 477; DA i.284. Laṭṭhi
Laṭṭhi
(f.) [Sk. yaṣṭi, with l for y; also in Prk. see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 255 & cp. Geiger, P. Gr. § 462. The doublet yaṭṭhi also in Pāli] 1. a staff, stick D i.105 (patoda˚ goad), 126 (id.); VvA 64 (id.); J iv.310 (laṭṭhī hata = laṭṭhiyā hata G.); v.280; Miln 27. -- 2. stick of sugar cane (ucchu˚) PvA 257. -- 3. sprout of a plant, offshoot J iii.161 (in simile); usually -- ˚, as in anga˚ sprout ThA 226; dālika˚ of the d. creeper Th 2, 297; beḷuva˚ of the Vilva tree KhA 118; sala˚ of the Sal tree A ii.200. Found also in names of places, as Laṭṭhivana (J i.83 etc.).

-- madhu(ka) "cane -- honey," i. e. liquorice J iv.537; DhA iv.171 (˚ka). Laṭṭhikā
Laṭṭhikā
(f.) = laṭṭhi, only in Npl. as -- ˚ (cp. laṭṭhi 3), e. g. Amba˚ the grove of mango sprouts DA i.41. Laṇḍa
Laṇḍa
(nt.) [cp. Sk. laṇḍa (dial.). The Dhtm under No. 155 gives a root laḍ in meaning "jigucchana," i. e. disgust] excrement, dung of animals, dirt; mostly used with ref. to elephants (haṭṭhi˚), e. g. at J ii.19; DhA i.163, 192; iv.156 (here also as assa˚ horse dung.) Cp. laṇḍikā. Laṇḍikā
Laṇḍikā
(f.) [fr. laṇḍa], only in aja˚ goat's dirt, pellet of goat's dung J i.419; PvA 283. Latā
Latā
(f.) [cp. Sk. latā, connected with Lat. lentus flexible; Ohg. lindi soft, E. lithe; also Ohg. lintea lime tree; Gr. e)la/th fir tree] 1. a slender tree, a creeping plant, creeper A i.202 (māluvā˚); Vv 355 ( = vallī VvA 162); 474 (kosātakī l.); J i.464 (rukkha˚, here perhaps better "branch"); DhA i.392 (˚pasādhana: see under mahā˚); Miln 253, 351; VvA 12 (kappa˚); PvA 51, 121; Vism 183 (where the foll. kinds are given: lābu, kumbhaṇḍī, sāmā, kāḷavallī, pūtilatā). -- nāga˚ the iron wood tree: see under nāga; pūti˚ a sort of creeper (q. v.). On latā in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 130. -- 2. (fig.) an epithet of taṇhā (greed), as much as it strangles its victim Dhs 1059, 1136; Nett 24, 121. -- 3. (fig.) streak, flash, in vijjul -- latā flash of lightning J i.103.

-- kamma creeper -- work (combd with mālā -- kamma) Vin ii.117, 152. Laddha
Laddha
[pp. of labhati] (having) obtained, taken, received Sn 106, 239; J v.171; Mhvs 5, 133 (kiñci laddhaŋ); 10, 37 (kaññā laddhā); PvA 5. -- laddhatvaŋ at J iv.406. is to be corrected to uddhatvā. -- Cp. upa˚, pa˚.

-- adhippāya one who obtains his wishes Nd2 542. -- assāsa getting one's breath again, coming to (out of a swoon) J iv.126. -- upasampada one who has obtained ordination PvA 54. -- jaya victorious Mhvs 25, 98. -- jīvika revived PvA 40. -- nāma so -- called ThA 292 (puthulomo laddhanāmo maccho); PvA 33 (yamaloka l -- n. petaloka), 52 (niraya l -- n. naraka), 57 (kuñjara l -- n. hatthi), 107 (sūcikā jighacchā), 119 (Purindada = Sakka), 143 (Himavanto=pabbata -- rājā), etc. -- 581 -- Laddhā
Laddhā
is ger. and 3rd sg. aor.; laddhāna ger. of labhati (q. v.). Laddhi
Laddhi
(f.) [fr. labh] religious belief, view, theory, esp. heretical view; a later term for the earlier diṭṭhi (cp. Kvu trsl. introd. p. 47) J i.142 (Devadattassa), 425; iii.487; v.411; Dāvs ii.86 (dulladdhi wrong view); DA i.117; PvA 254; Sdhp 65. Cp. upa˚. Laddhika
Laddhika
( -- ˚) [fr. laddhi] having a (wrong) view or belief, schismatic J i.373 (evaŋ˚); Dpvs vii.35 (puthu˚). Landhati
Landhati
see nandhati & pilandhana. Concerning l>n cp. langula. Lapa
Lapa
(adj. n.) [fr. lap: see lapati] talkative, talking, prattling; a talker, tattler, prattler, chatterer A ii.26; Th 1, 959 = It 112; Vism 26 (doubled: lapa -- lapa)= Nd1 226 (as lapaka -- lapaka). Lapaka
Lapaka
[fr. lap] one who mutters, a droner out (of holy words for pay) D i.8 (cp. Dial. i.15); A iii.111; J iii.349; Miln 228; DA i.91. Lapati
Lapati
[lap, cp. Russ. lépet talk, Cymr. llêf voice. The Dhtp 188 & 599 defines lap with "vacana"] to talk, prattle, mutter Sn 776; It 122; Pv i.81; ii.63. -- Cp. ullapati, palapati, samullapati. -- Caus. lapeti (and lāpeti, metri causâ) to talk to, to accost, beg S i.31 (here meaning "declare"); Sn 929 (janaŋ na lāpayeyya = na lapayeyya lapanaŋ pajaheyya Nd1 389); DhA ii.157. -> Infin. lapetave (only in Gāthā language cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 204) Ud 21. -- pp. lapita. -- Caus. II. lapāpeti DhA ii.157. Lapana
Lapana
(nt.) & lapanā (f.) 1. talking, muttering; esp. prattling or uttering indistinct words for the sake of begging, patter D i.8; A ii.26; iii.430; Nd1 389; Nett 94; Miln 383. As f. lapanā at Vbh 352; Vism 23 & 27 (def.); VbhA 482. -- 2. the mouth, in cpd. lapana -- ja "mouth born," i. e. tooth J vi.218 ( = mukhaja C.). -> Cp. ālapana ālapanatā, ullapana. Lapāpana
Lapāpana
(nt.) [fr. Caus. II. lapāpeti of lap] causing to speak, speaking ThA 78. Lapita
Lapita
[pp. of lapati] talked, uttered, muttered It 98. Lapila
Lapila
see lambila. Labuja
Labuja
[cp. Sk. labuja] the bread -- fruit tree, Artocarpus lacucha or incisa D i.53; J iv.363; v.6, 417; PvA 153 (sa˚, read as salaḷa˚, like Vv 355, expld at VvA 162). Labbhamanatta
Labbhamanatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. ppr. med. of labhati] the fact of being taken PvA 56. Labbhā
Labbhā
(indecl.) [best to be taken, with Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 465, as an old Opt. 3rd sg., like sakkā which corresponds to Vedic śakyāt. Thus labbhā = *labhyāt, as in Māgadhī] allowable, possible (with inf.); usually neg. (thus= Prohibitive!) Sn 393 na l. phassetuŋ; SnA p. 376 expls by "sakkā"), 590; Pv ii.610; J i.64 (na l. tayā pabbajituŋ), 145 (id.), PvA 96 (=laddhuŋ sakkā). Labha
Labha
( -- ˚) (adj.) [a base -- formation fr. labh] receiving, to be received, to get; only in dul˚ hard to get Sn 75; S i.101; J i.307; Pug 26; Miln 16; Sdhp 17, 27; and su˚ easy to obtain Pv ii.319. Labhati
Labhati
[later Vedic labh for older rabh, cp. rabhate, rabha, rabhasa. Related are Gr. lamba/nw to get, la/furon booty; Lat. rabies = E. rabies; Lith. lõbis wealth. -- The Dhtp (204) simply defines as "lābhe." On the Prk. forms see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 484. -- See also rabhasa] 1. (the very freq. & ordinary meaning) to get, to receive, obtain, acquire. -- 2. (fig.) to obtain permission, to receive an opportunity, etc., as "pabbajituŋ sace lacchāmi" if I am allowed to receive the pabbajjā Mhvs 18, 5; or "labhamāno niccam pi khāditu -- kāmo 'mhi" if I get the chance I should always like to eat J i.478; and passim (cp. Pass. labbhati below). The paradigma of labhati shows a great variety of forms owing to its frequent occurrence (cp. E. "get"). We have selected the most interesting ones. Pres. Ind. labhati rare (late, e. g. Vism 136); usually med labhate Th 1, 35; Sn 185, 439; 1st sg. labhe Pv i.64; 2nd sg. labhase J ii.220; 3rd pl. labhare S i.110. -- ppr. med. labhamāna S i.122 (otāraŋ a˚, cp. iv.178; M i.334); also in Pass. sense "getting taken" PvA 71. -- Opt. 3rd sg. labhe Sn 458, & (med.) labhetha Sn 45, 46, 217; Pv ii.97; also (usual form) labheyya PvA 115. 2nd sg. med. labhetho (=Sk. ˚thāh) Sn 833. -- Imper. 2nd sg. labha It 77; 3rd labhatu PvA 112; med. 2nd sg. labhassu Th 2, 432; 3rd sg. labhataŋ D ii.150; 1st pl. (as Hortative) labhāmase Pv i.55 (= labhāma PvA 27); & labhāmhase Pv iii.224. -- Fut. 3rd sg. lacchasi (Sk. lapsyati) S i.114; Pv ii.46; iii.37; J ii.60 (Māro otāraŋ l.), 258; Miln 126; DhA i.29; SnA 405; ThA 69 (Ap.); 1st sg. lacchāmi M ii.71; 2nd sg. lacchasi Vv 835; Pv iv.160; 1st pl. lacchāma J i.54; iv.292; & lacchāmase (med.) Vv 329. Also (the Com. form) labhissati PvA 190; VvA 136. -- Cond. 1st pl. alabhissāma J iii.35; med. 3rd sg. alabhissatha D ii.63. -- Pret. (& aor.) (a) 3rd sg. alattha D i.176 (alattha pabbajjaŋ); M ii.49; S iv.302; J iv.310; VvA 66, 69; 1st sg. alatthaŋ D ii.268; Vv 8122; Th 1, 747; DhA iii.313; 2nd sg. alattha S i.114; 1st pl. alatthamha M ii.63; 3rd pl. alatthuŋ D ii.274, & alatthaŋsu S i.48. -- (b) (Prohib.) mā laddhā (3rd sg. med.) shall not receive (Sk. alabdha) J iii.138. -> (c) labhi Sn 994; 1st sg. labhiŋ Th 1, 218; 2, 78; J ii.154; VvA 68; & alabhitthaŋ Th 1, 217; 3rd sg. alabhittha Pv i.77 (spelt bbh); 1st pl. labhimhā (for labhimha) D ii.147. -- Inf. laddhuŋ J ii.352; DhA iii.117; PvA 96. -- Ger. laddhā (poet.) Sn 306, 388, 766, 924; laddhāna (poet.) Sn 67 (= laddhā, labhitvā Nd2 546); It 65; and (ord.) labhitva J i.150; iii.332; PvA 95. -> Grd. (a): labbhiya (only neg. alabbhiya what cannot be got) J iv.86; Pv ii.69; labbhaneyya (a˚) (in Com. style as expln of labbhanīya) J iv.86 (˚ṭhāna); PvA 65 (˚vatthu), 96 (id.); and labbhanīya (as a˚ -- ṭṭhānāni impossible things) A iii.54 sq. (five such items), 60 sq. (id.); J iv.59. -- (b): laddhabba J iii.332; PvA 112, 252. -- (c): laddheyya Pv iv.325. -- Caus. labbheti (for *lābheti, a diff. formn fr. Sk. lambhayati, which is found in P. pa -- lambheti) to make someone get, to procure, in 1st sg. aor. alabbhesi Vin iv.5=J i.193; DhA iii.213 (v. l. labh˚); and in pres. 3rd sg. labbheti J iii.353 (=adhigameti C.). -- Pass. labbhati (fig.) to be permitted, to be possible or proper; (or simply:) it is to be Mhvs 30, 43; KhA 192 (vattuŋ), 207 (id.). -- pp. laddha. -- Cp. upa˚, pati˚, vi˚. Labhana
Labhana
(nt.) [fr. labh] taking, receiving, gift, acquisition DhA iii.271 (˚bhāva); PvA 73 (˚ṭṭhāna), 121 (id.). Lamba
Lamba
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. lamb] hanging down, drooping, pendulous S iv.341, 342 (˚cūḷakā bhaṭa hirelings with large or drooping top -- knots); J ii.185 (˚tthana with hanging breasts); iii.265 (˚cūla -- vihangama); Dāvs ii.61. -- alamba not drooping, thick, short J v.302; vi.3 (˚tthaniyo). -- Cp. ā˚, vi˚ & ālambana. Lambati
Lambati
[lamb; cp. Lat. limbus "limb," which may be also in E. limp, lit. "hanging down." -- The Dhtp defines the root as "ramba lamba avasaŋsane" (No. 199), as does Dhtm 284] to hang down, to droop, fall Mhvs 32, 70 (laggāni lambiŋsu), 71 (ākāse lambamānāni). -> Fut. lambahīti (poet.) J v.302 ( = lambissati). -- Caus. lambeti to cause to hang up or to be suspended, to hang up Mhvs 34, 48. -- Caus. II. lambāpeti id. Mhvs 21, 15. -- pp. lambita. -- Cp. abhi˚, pa˚, vi˚. -- 582 -- Lambita
Lambita
[pp. of lambeti] hanging down, suspended Mhvs 27, 38; 30, 67. Lambin
Lambin
(adj.) [fr. lamb] hanging down, able to hang or bend down (with ref. to the membrum virile) Vin iii.35 ("tassa bhikkhussa angajātaŋ dīghaŋ hoti lambati, tasmā lambī ti vutto" Sam. Pās. i.278). Lambila
Lambila
(adj.) [reading not quite certain, cp. ambila] sour, acrid, astringent (of taste) Nd1 240; Nd2 540; Dhs 629; DhsA 320 (reads lapila, v. l. lampila; expld as "badara -- sāḷava -- kapiṭṭha -- sāḷav' ādi"); Miln 56 (reads ambila). Lambheti
Lambheti
[Caus. of labh, for which usually labbheti (q. v. under labhati). The Sk. form is lambhayati. -- The Dhtm. (840) puts it down as a special root, although it occurs only in cpd. pa˚ in this special meaning: "labhi vañcane"] see palambheti (to deceive, dupe). It may be possibie that reading lampetvā at A ii.77 (v. l. lambitvā) is to be corrected to lambhetvā (combd with hāpetvā). -- alambhavissa at S v.146 is to be read alam abhavissa, as at J ii.59. Laya
Laya
[cp. Sk. laya: see līyati] 1. a brief measure of time, usually combd with other expressions denoting a short moment, esp. frequent as khaṇa laya muhutta Vin i.12; iii.92; A iv.137; cp. Dpvs i.16 (khaṇe khaṇe laye Buddho sabbalokaŋ avekkhati). -- Vism 136 (īsakam pi layaŋ yantaŋ paggaṇheth' eva mānasaŋ). -- 2. time in music, equal time, rhythm Dāvs iv.50; VvA 183 (dvādasannaŋ laya -- bhedānaŋ vasena pabheda). Laḷati
Laḷati
[lal, onomat;. cp. Lat. lallo "lull"; Sk. lalallā; Gr. la/los talkative; lale/w talk; Ger. lallen. The Dhtp distinguishes 2 roots: lal ( = icchā) & laḷ (= vilāsa & upasevā)] to dally, sport, sing J ii.121 (ppr. laḷamānā); VvA 41 (laḷantī; with kīḷati), 57 (id.). -- Caus. laḷeti J i.362 (ppr. lāḷentā); Vism 365; cp. upa˚ -- pp. laḷita: see pa˚. Lalāṭa
Lalāṭa
see nalāṭa (cp. langula). Lava
Lava
[fr. lū] a small particle, a drop VvA 253 (lavanka a small mark); Sdhp 105 (˚odaka). Lavaka
Lavaka
[fr. lū] a cutter, reaper SnA 148 (v. l. lāvaka). See lāvaka. Lavaṇa
Lavaṇa
(nt.) [cp. late Vedic lavaṇa, cp. Zimmer, Altind. Leben 54] salt, lotion Miln 112; Sdhp 158. See loṇa. Lavana
Lavana
(nt.) [fr. lunāti] cutting, reaping Miln 360. Lavāpeti
Lavāpeti
Caus. of lunāti (q. v.). Lasagata
Lasagata
(hattha) at A ii.165 is to be read (with v. l.) as lepagata, i. e. sticky (opp. suddha). Lasati
Lasati
[represents las to gleam, shine; sport, play; as well as laṣ to desire, long for. Cp. Lat. lascivus; Gr. lilai/omai; Goth. lustus = E., Ger. lust etc. -- The Dhtp 324 defs. las as "kanti"] to desire, long; to dance, play, sport; to shine; to sound forth. See lāsana, abhilāsa, upaḷāseti, alasa, vilāsa. -- Caus. lāseti to sport, to amuse (oneself) Vin ii.10 (with vādeti, gāyati, naccati). Lasikā
Lasikā
(f.) [cp. Sk. *lasikā] the fluid which lubricates the joints, synovic fluid Vin i.202; D ii.293; M iii.90; S iv.111; Sn 196; J i.146; Miln 382. In detail at Vism 264, 362; VbhA 247. Lasī
Lasī
(f.) [etym.?] brains J i.493 ( = matthalunga C.)= DhA i.145. Lasuṇa & Lasuna
Lasuṇa
& Lasuna (nt.) [cp. Sk. laśuna] garlic Vin ii.140; iv.258; J i.474; Vv 436; VvA 186. Lahati
Lahati
to lick: see ullahaka, palahati, & lehati. Lahu
Lahu
(adj.) [Sk. laghu & raghu: see etym. under langhati] light, quick A i.10, 45. -- lahuŋ karoti to make light, to be frivolous J ii.451. -- nt. lahuŋ (adv.) quickly Pv iv.160; Dpvs i.53; Mhvs 4, 17. -- Usually as lahuka (q. v.).

-- citta light -- minded S i.201; J iii.73. -- ṭṭhāna lightness of body, bodily vigour, good health M i.437, 473; D i.204; Ud 15; Miln 14. [Cp. BSk. laghūtthānatā Divy 156.] -- parivatta quickly or easily changing VbhA 408. Lahukā
Lahukā
(adj.) [lahu+ka] 1. light (opp. garuka); trifling Vin i.49; A ii.48 (āpatti); iv.137 (jīvitaŋ parittaŋ l.); Miln 344 (āpatti). -- 2. light, buoyant Th 1, 104 (kāyo); Dhs 648; Miln 105; PvA 280. atilahukaŋ (adv.) too soon Vin ii.215. -- 3 (as tt. in grammar) light (of letters or syllables), opp. garuka DA i.177 (with ref. to the 10 fold vyañjana of the dhamma). Lahutā
Lahutā
(f.) [fr. lahu] lightness, buoyancy Dhs 42, 322, 585; Vism 448. Lahusa
Lahusa
(adj.) [fr. lahu] easily offended, touchy D i.90; expld by DA i.256 as follows: "lahusā ti lahukā, appaken' eva tussanti vā russanti vā udaka -- piṭṭhe lābukaṭāhaŋ viya appakena pi uppilavanti." Cp. rabhasa. Lahuso
Lahuso
(adv.) [orig. abl. of lahu] quickly A iv.247 (sabba˚); Vism 238. Lākhā
Lākhā
(f.) [cp. Sk. dākṣā] lac; lac -- dye; enumd with other colourings at M i.127 = S ii.101=A iii.230. -- SnA 577; Vism 261 (as colour of blood).

-- ācariya expert in lac -- dyeing SnA 577. -- guḷaka a ball of lac SnA 80. -- goḷaka id. SnA 577. -- tamba copper coloured with lac Th 2, 440 ( = lākhā -- rasarattehi viya tambehi lomehi samannāgata ThA 270). -- rasa essence of lac, used for dyeing; lac -- colouring J v.215 (˚ratta -- succhavi); vi.269 (id.); KhA 62, 63; ThA 270. Lāja & Lājā
Lāja
& Lājā (f.) [cp. Vedic lāja: Zimmer, Altind. Leben 269] 1. fried grain, parched corn: occurring only in combn madhu -- lāja fried grain with honey, sweet corn J iii.538; iv.214, 281. -- 2. the flower of Dalbergia arborea, used for scattering in bunches (with other flowers making 5 kinds or colours) as a sign of welcome & greeting, usually in phrase lāja -- pañcamāni pupphāni ("a cluster of flowers with lāja as the fifth") DhA i.112; VvA 31; J i.55 (˚pañcamakāni p.); cp. J ii.240 (vippakiṇṇa -- lāja -- kusuma -- maṇḍita -- talā); vi.42 (vippakiṇṇa -- lāja -- kusuma -- vāsa -- dhūp' andhakāra); DhA i.140 (vippakiṇṇa -- valikaŋ pañcavaṇṇa -- kusuma -- lāja -- puṇṇaghaṭa -- paṭimaṇḍita). Lājeti
Lājeti
[fr. lāja] to fry or have fried J vi.341 (v. l. lañc˚, lañj˚), 385 (lañchetvā; v. l. lañci˚, lañje˚). Lāpa
Lāpa1
[fr. lap] talk: see cpds. abhi˚, pa˚, sal˚. Lāpa
Lāpa2
[also fr. lap, lit. "talker," cp. similar semantics of E. quail>Ger. quaken, quicken; E. quack. The P. form rests on pop. etym., as in Sk. we find corresponding name as lāba] a sort of quail, Perdix chinensis S v.146 = J ii.59. As lāpaka -- sakuṇa also at J ii.59. -- Another name for quail is vaṭṭaka. Lāpana
Lāpana
(nt.) [fr. lāpeti, Caus. of lap] muttering, utterance, speech It 98; A i.165 (lapita˚). Perhaps also to be read at Th 2, 73. -- Cp. upa˚. Lāpin
Lāpin
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. lap] talking (silly) S iii.143 (bāla˚). -- 583 -- Lāpu
Lāpu
(f.) [short for alāpu or âlābu, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 396] a kind of cucumber J i.336, 341. See also lābuka.

-- latā the cucumber creeper or plant Miln 374. Lāpeti
Lāpeti:
see lapati & cp. upalāpeti. Lābu
Lābu
(f.) & Lābuka = lāpu (alābu) gourd or pumpkin, often used as receptacle J i.158 (˚ka), 411 (˚kumbhaṇḍa vesseḷ made of the gourd); v.37 (˚ka), 155 (addha -- lābu -- samā thanā); DhA ii.59 (˚ka); SnA 227 (lābumhi catumadhuraŋ pūretukāmo).

-- kaṭāha a gourd as receptacle Vism 255, 359; VbhA 63. Lābha
Lābha
[fr. labh] receiving, getting, acquisition, gain, possession; pl. possessions D i.8; ii.58, 61; M i.508 (ārogya -- paramā lābhā); iii.39; A i.74; iv.157 sq., 160 (lābhena abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto Devadatto, cp. J i.185 sq.); Sn 31, 438, 828, 854, 1014, 1046 (cp. Nd2 548); It 67 (vitta˚); J iii.516 (yasa˚, dhana˚); Vism 93, 136 (˚ŋ labhati), 150 (˚assa bhāgin getting riches); PvA 113, 280. -- A dat. sg. lābhā (for lābhāya) is used adverbially with foll. genitive in meaning of "for my (our) gain," "it is profitable," "good for me that" etc.; e. g. Miln 17 (lābhā no tāta, suladdhaŋ no tāta), 232 (lābhā vata tāsaŋ devatānaŋ); A iii.313 (lābhā vata me suladdhaŋ vata me), expld at Vism 223; DhA i.98 (lābhā vata me, elliptically); ii.95 (l. vata no ye mayaŋ . . . upaṭṭhahimha).

-- agga highest gain J iii.125; Miln 21. -- āsā desire for gain A i.86. -- kamyā (abl. out of desire for gain Sn 854, 929 ( = lābha -- hetu Nd1 389). -- taṇhā craving for possession DhA iv.38. -- macchariya selfishness in acquisitions A iii.273; D iii.234; Pug 19, 23; Dhs 1122. -- mada pride of gain VbhA 466. -- sakkāra gain and honour, usually combd with ˚siloka fame; the two first e. g. at Vin ii.196; It 73; J i.185, 186; v.75; the three combd e. g. at M i.192; S ii.227, 237; A ii.73; iii.343 sq., 377; Vbh 352 sq.; lābha -- siloka alone at Vism 67. Lābhaka
Lābhaka
(adj. nt.) [fr. lābha] one who receives; reception; a˚ not getting, non -- receiving Vin iii.77. Lābhā
Lābhā
see under lābha. Lābhin
Lābhin
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. labha] receiving, getting, having, possessed of M iii.39 (as n. "a receiver, recipient"); A i.24; ii.85; iv.400; Pug 51; Vbh 332 (nikāma˚); J i.140. -- 2. one who has intuition either in reasoning (or logical argument) or psychically, and who may therefore take certain premises for granted (opp. alābhin a denier) DA i.106, 120. Lāmaka
Lāmaka
(adj.) [seems to be a specific Pāli word. It is essentially a C. word & probably of dialectical origin. Has it anything to do with omaka?] insignificant, poor, inferior, bad, sinful. The usual syn. is pāpa. -- Vin ii.76; Vism 268 ( = pāpaka); DhsA 45; KhA 243 (=khudda); PugA 229 (nīca lāmaka= oṇata); KhA 150 (˚desanā, cp. ukkaṭṭha); DhA ii.77; iv.44 (˚bhāva); VvA 116; PvA 15 (for pāpa); 103 (=pāpaka), 125 (˚purisa=kāpurisa); Sdhp 28, 253, 426, 526 (opp. ukkaṭṭha). -- f. lāmikā J i.285; ii.346 (for itarā); DhA ii.61 (pāpikā l. diṭṭhi). -- Cp. Dhs. trsl.2 § 1025. Lāmajjaka
Lāmajjaka
(lāmañjaka) (nt.) [cp. Sk. lāmajjaka] the root of Andropogon muricatus Vv 436 (v. l. ˚añc˚); VvA 186, (˚añj˚) 187. Lāyaka
Lāyaka
( -- ˚) [fr. lāyati] cutter, reaper A iii.365 = S iii.155 (read babbaja˚). Lāyati
Lāyati.
[for. *lāvati, lū, for which the ordinary form is lunāti (q. v.), y for v as freq. in Pāli: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 462. -- The Dhtp. has a root lā in meaning "ādāna" (No. 370)] to cut (off), mow, reap; ger. lāyitvā A iii.365; J i.215; iii.226; Vin iii.64; Pv i.81 ( = lāvitvā PvA 40). -- pp. lāyita. Lāyana
Lāyana
(nt.) [fr. lāyati] cutting J v.45 (tiṇa -- lāyana asi, sickle); DhA iii.285 (v. l. for dāyana). Lāyita
Lāyita
[pp. of lāyati, lāyeti] cut, reaped J iii.130 (tiṇaŋ na lāyita -- pubbaŋ); Vism 419 (˚ṭṭhāna place where one has reaped). Lāla
Lāla
(adj.) [fr. lal, see laḷati] talking without sense, silly, foolish J vi.360, 417 (ḷ). Cp. alālā. Lālaka
Lālaka
[lala+ka] a wag, silly person, fool J i.205; iv.210. Lālapati & Lālappati
Lālapati
& Lālappati [Intens. of lapati] to talk much, to talk silly, to lament, wail Sn 580; Pv iv.52 ( = vilapati PvA 260); J iii.217; Miln 148, 275; Mhvs 32, 68. -> pp. lālappita. Lālappa
Lālappa
[fr. lālappati] talking much, excited or empty talk, wailing Vbh 100, 138; Ps i.38; Nett 29; VbhA 104 ( = punappunaŋ lapanaŋ). Lāla(p)pana
Lāla(p)pana
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) = lālappa, together with lāla(p)- pitatta (nt.) in exegesis of parideva at Nd2 416; Vbh 100, 138; VbhA 104; DA i.121. Lālappita
Lālappita
[pp. of lālappati] 1. talking much, wailing Miln 148 (paridevita -- l. -- mukha). -- 2. (nt.) much talk, excited talk, talking J vi.498. Lālā
Lālā
(f.) [cp. laḷati] saliva J i.61, 248; vi.357; Vism 259; DhA i.307 (mukhato lālā galati). Lāḷana
Lāḷana
(nt.) [fr. lal] swaying, dalliance, sport DA i.197; Sdhp 387; as lāḷanā at ThA 243. Lāḷeti
Lāḷeti
see laḷati. Lāvaka
Lāvaka
[fr. lāvati] a cutter, reaper Miln 33 (yava˚); Mhvs 10, 31; SnA 148 (v. l. BB. for lavaka). Lāvati & Lāveti
Lāvati
& Lāveti [the latter the usual form, as Caus. of lunāti. lāvati is the simple Pāli formation fr. lū. Another Caus. II. is lavāpati (q. v.). See also lāyati] to cut, to mow PvA 40 (lāvitvā), Mhvs 10, 30 (lāvayati). Lāsa
Lāsa
[of las] sporting, dancing: see abhi˚, vi˚. Lāsikā
Lāsikā
(f.) [fr. las] a dancer, Miln 331. Lāseti
Lāseti
see lasati. Likkhā
Likkhā
(f.) [*Sk. likṣā egg of a louse, as measure equal to 8 trasareṇu (BR.). -- Connected with Lat. ricinus a kind of vermin (see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.)] a kind of measure VbhA 343 (36 rattareṇus equal to one likkhā, 7 likkhās equal to 1 ūkā); KhA 43 (˚matta). Likhati
Likhati
[likh; Vedic likhati, also rikh in Ved. ārikhati (R.V. vi.53, 7), cp. with palatal riśati, liśati. Connected with Gr. e)rei/kw to tear; Lith. rë̃kti to cut bread, to plough; Ohg. rīga = Ags. rāw=E. row. -- Dhtp 467 simply expls by "lekhane"] 1. to scratch; to cut, carve; write, inscribe M i.127 (rūpāni); J ii.372 (suvaṇṇa -- patte); iv.257 (id.), 488, 489 (jāti -- hingulakena); DhA i.182; PvA 145 (nāmaŋ likhi wrote his name). -- paṇṇaŋ l. to write a letter J ii.174; vi.369 (paṇṇe on a leaf). -- 2. to shave (off), plane Vin ii.112 (inf. likhituŋ). -- pp. likhita. -- Cp. vi.˚ -- Caus. I. lekheti (q. v.). Caus. II. likhāpeti to cause to be cut or carved [cp. BSk. likhāpayati Divy 547] Vin ii.110; SnA 577; to cause to be written Miln 42. Likhana
Likhana
(nt.) [cp. late Sk. likhana; fr. likh] scratching, cutting, writing J v.59 (a golden tablet for writing on). Cp. ullikhana. Likhā
Likhā
in likhā -- paṇṇa at PvA 20 is faulty for lekhā˚ (lekha˚) letter, cp. lekha -- pattra letter Mālatīm 172, 7. -- 584 -- Likhita
Likhita
[pp. of likhati] 1. carved, cut, worked (in ivory etc.), in cpd. sankha˚ brahmacariya the moral life, like a polished shell D i.63; S ii.219, expld at DA i.181 as "likhita -- sankha -- sadisa dhota -- sankha -- sappaṭibhāga."-> 2. written, inscribed J iv.7 (likhitāni akkharāni); Miln 42 (lekha l.). -- 3. made smooth, shaved J vi.482 (cāpa). -- 4. marked, proscribed, made an outlaw Vin i.75. -> Cp. ullikhita. Likhitaka
Likhitaka
(adj.) [likhita+qualifying ending ka] one who has been proscribed, an outlaw Vin i.75 (cora). Linga
Linga
(nt.) [fr. ling; late Vedic & (pre -- eminently) Class. Sk. linga] 1. characteristic, sign, attribute, mark, feature M i.360; S v.278; Sn 601 sq. ( = saṇṭhāna SnA 464); Vin iv.7 (two: hīna & ukkaṭṭha); J i.18; iv.114 (gihi˚), 130; Miln 133 (sāsana˚), 162 (dve samaṇassa lingāni), 405 (lingato ca nimittato ca etc.); Vism 184; DhsA 64 (=saṇṭhāna Tīkā: Expos. 86). -- 2. mark of sex, sexual characteristic, pudendum (male as well as female, as neither m. nor f.) Vin iii.35 (purisa˚); J v.197 (˚saṇṭhāna); KhA 110 (itthi˚); SnA 48 (˚sampatti), 51 (id.), 300 (itthi˚); DhsA 321 sq. (itthi˚). -- 3. (in grammar) mark of sex, (characteristic) ending, gender SnA 397. ˚vipallāsa change or substitution of gender PvA 7, 33, 58, 87, 157. Lingāla
Lingāla
[cp. Sk. lingālikā a kind of mouse] antelope (?) Pgdp 10. Lingika
Lingika
(adj.) [fr. linga] having or being a characteristic Vism 210 (of nāma); KhA 107 (id.). Lingeti
Lingeti
[Denom. fr. ling] 1. to embrace, in poet. ger. lingiya (as if fr. lingati) Th 2, 398 ( = ālingetvā ThA 260). See ā˚. -- 2. to characterize: see ul˚. Lipi
Lipi
[fr. lip; late Sk. lipi] the alphabet; a letter of the alphabet; writing Miln 79. Limpati
Limpati
[lip, cp. repa stain, lepa ointment, stain; Gr. li/pos grease, fat, liparo/s fat, a)lei/fw to anoint; Lat. lippus; Lith. limpû to stick, Goth. bi -- leiban, Ohg. bilīban to stay behind, to stay, E. leave & live, Ger. leben. The Dhtp (385) simply expls by "limpana"] to smear, plaster, stain; usually in pass. (or med.) sense "to get soiled, to dirty oneself" Th 2, 388; PvA 215. Doubtful in Sn passages, where both limpati & lippati are found as readings, e. g. Sn 778 in Text lippati, but Niddesa reading limpati (Nd1 55); Sn 811 lipp˚, Nd1 133 limp˚; Sn 1040, 1042 lipp˚, Nd2 549 limp.˚ -- Pass. lippati to be soiled (by), to get stained (in character) Sn 250, 547, 625, 778, 913, 1040; cp. Sn 71 (alippamāna ppr.). -- pp. litta: see ava˚, ul˚, vi.˚ -- Cp. also ālimpeti, palimpeti, vilimpati. -- Caus. I. lepeti to cause to be plastered J vi.432. -- Caus. II. limpāpeti to cause to be plastered or anointed Mhvs 34, 42 (cetiyaŋ ˚āpetvāna). Limpana
Limpana
(nt.) [fr. lip] soiling, smearing Dhtp 385. Lisati
Lisati
[cp. dial. Sk. liśate = Vedic riśate] to break off, tear off, pull; only at Dhtp 444 expld by "lesa." Lihati
Lihati
[lih, Sk. leḍhi or līḍhe, also lihati. Cp. Lat. lingo, Gr. lei/xw; Goth. bilaigōn, Ags. liccian = E. lick, Ger. lecken. -- The Dhtp 335 expls lih by "assādane," i. e. taste] to lick; pres. lehati J ii.44; aor. lehayiŋsu PvA 198 (v. l. for palahiŋsu). Cp. parilehisaŋ Vv 8121; VvA 316; ger. lehitvā DA i.136 (sarīraŋ); VvA 314. -> pp. līḷha (?). Cp. leyya. Līna
Līna
[pp. of līyati] clinging, sticking; slow, sluggish; shy, reserved, dull, A i.3; Vism 125. Definitions at Vbh 352, 373; Dhs 1156, 1236; S v.277, 279 (ati˚). Often combd with uddhata as "sluggish or shy" and "unbalanced," e. g. at S v.112; Vism 136; VbhA 310. alīna active, open, sincere Sn 68 (˚citta), 717 (id.); J i.22 (v. 148; ˚viriya sīha). Līnatā
Līnatā
(f.) [abstr. formation fr. līna instead of līy˚] = līyanā Vism 469. alīnatā open -- mindedness, sincerity J i.366; SnA 122. Līnatta
Līnatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. līna] sluggishness, shyness; only in phrase cetaso līnattaŋ immobility of mind S v.64, 103; A i.3 = iv.32; v.145 sq.; Nett 86, 108; VbhA 272 (=cittassa līn' ākāra). Līyati
Līyati
[lī, Vedic līyati; *lei to stick to or cleave: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. lino, which he separates in meaning fr. *lei to smear, polish] to stick. The Dhtp evidently favours the separation when interpreting lī by "silesana -- dravīkaraṇa," i. e. to make slip or run (Dhtp 441; Dhtm 681)] 1. to stick, adhere, cling to: see cpds. all˚, o˚, ni˚, paṭisal˚. -- 2. to melt, slip: see cpd. pavi˚ (to dissolve). -- pp. līna. Līyana
Līyana
(nt.) [fr. līyati] sticking to, adhering, resting Sdhp 190 (˚ṭṭhāna resting -- place). Līyanā
Līyanā
(f.) = līyana; cleaving to, sluggishness, shyness Dhs 1156. Līyitatta
Līyitatta
(nt.) [abstr. formation after similar synonymical chains, like bhāvitatta] = līyanā Dhs 1156. Līlā
Līlā
(līḷā) (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. līlā or *līḍā] play, sport, dal- liance; probably for līḷhā at J v.5 & 157, both times combd with vilāsa.

-- aravinda a lotus serviceable for sport VvA 43 (līḷ˚). Līḷhā
Līḷhā
(f.) [abstr. of līḷha, Sk. līḍha, pp. of lih, lit. being polished, cp. ullīḍha polished] grace, ease, charm, adroitness; always used with ref. to the Buddha (Buddhalīḷhā), e. g. J i.155; DhA i.33; iii.79. So in phrase Buddhalīḷhāya dhammaŋ deseti "to expound the doctrine with the Buddha's mastery" J i.152, 155; iii.289; VvA 217 (spelling wrongly līḷāya). Of the B's gait: J i.93, 149; DhA ii.41. The combn with vilāsa, as mentioned by Childers, applies to līlā (q. v.), which may stand for līḷhā at the passages mentioned, although not used of the Buddha. Lugga
Lugga
[pp. of rujati; corresponding to Sk. rugṇa] broken (up), rugged (of a path) Miln 217, 218. Cp. vi˚. Lujjati
Lujjati
[Pass. of ruj, corresponding to Sk. rujyate. Dhtp 400 gives luj as sep. root with meaning vināsa. See rujati] to be broken up, to break (up), to be destroyed; to go asunder, to fall apart A i.283 = Pug 32 (here equal to "be wiped out," but it is unnecessary to assume, as Kern, Toev. s. v. lujjati does, a by -- form of luc, luñcati. The Pug C. 215 expls by "nassati"); Vin i.297; ii.123; S iv.52 (in etymologizing interpretation of loka: "lujjati kho loko ti vuccati"; quoted at Nd2 550 on Sn 1119); Th 1, 929. -- Cp. olujjati, palujjati. -- pp. lugga. Lujjana
Lujjana
(nt.) [fr. lujjati; a word peculiar to Pali dog- matics] breaking up, crumbling away, dissolution DhsA 47 (in etym. of loka = lujjana -- palujjan' aṭṭhena vaṭṭaŋ), 308 (id.); Vism 427 (id.). Luñcati
Luñcati
[Vedic luñcati, luc or luñc, to Lat. runco to pull up weeds; Gr. r(uka/ nh plane. The Dhtp 43 expls by apanayana] to pull out, pluck (a bird), tear, peel J i.244, 476; ii.97, 363; iii.314; iv.191; v.463; Mhvs 23, 46 (aor. aluñci ); 28, 26 (ger. luñcitvā); Vism 248 (kese). -- Caus. II. luñcāpeti DhA ii.53 (kese), and loceti Th 1, 283 (kesamassuŋ alocayiŋ). -- pp. luñcita. Luñcita
Luñcita
[pp. of luñcati] plucked, pulled Miln 240 (i. e. combed, of wool; Rh. D. trsls "pressed"; Nyānatiloka "cut"); PvA 47 (vilūna -- kesa+). Luṭhati
Luṭhati
[cp. later Sk. luṭhati to plunder, which is one of the dial. variants luṭh, lunṭh, loṭh of lul to shake. The Dhtp (474) & Dhtm (136) both give ruṭh & luṭh with meaning "upaghāte"] to rob, plunder. -- 585 -- Luta
Luta
seems to be a legitimate spelling representing either lutta or lūna, in meaning "cut, cut off" [cp. lu for lū under lunāti]. Thus at S i.5 (nalo va harito luto) = 126=J vi.25; and at Sn 532 (lutāni bandhanāni; vv. ll. lūtāni & lunāni; expld as "chinnāni padālitāni" at SnA 432). Lutta
Lutta
[cp. Epic Sk. lupta; pp. of lumpati] broken, cut off; as t. t. in grammar "elided" VvA 13 (of ca), 111 (of iti), 122 (id.). Ludda
Ludda
(adj.) [the usual P. form of rudda, corresponding to Sk. raudra] 1. fierce, terrible; cruel, gruesome S i.143; A ii.174 (pāpa, l., kibbisa); v.149; Pug 56; Vv 845 ( = dāruṇā pisāc' -- ādino VvA 335); J v.243 (ṭhānaŋ= niraya); Sdhp 286. The spelling ludra occurs at J iv.46=vi.306, which is ludda at J v.146. -- 2. a hunter, sportsman Sn 247 (dussīla˚; SnA 289: luddā ca kurūra -- kammantā lohita -- pāṇitāya, macchaghātakamigabandhaka -- sākuṇik'ādayo idha adhippetā); Vv 631; J ii.154 (˚putta=luddaka); iii.432 (Bharata by name); Pug 56 (māgavika, sākuṇika, l., macchaghātaka etc.; expld by dāruṇa kakkhaḷa at Pug A 233); Vism 245= VbhA 259; VbhA 228. Luddaka
Luddaka
= ludda 2, i. e. hunter Vin i.220; J iv.416; Pv iii.72 (miga˚; expld as "dāruṇa" PvA 206); Miln 222; VbhA 266 (miga˚, in simile); PvA 34, 168. Cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung 143, 207. Note. The expression sunakha -- luddako at DhsA 273 is not quite clear ("doghunter"?). It applies to a female & Maung Tin (Expositor ii.361) reads "luddhikā" (sic), with trsln "dog -- mistress," remarking that Pyī reads luddako "hunter -- dog" (?). Luddha
Luddha
[pp. of lubbhati] greedy, covetous A iii.433 (with pharusa -- vāca & samphappalāpin); It 84; Miln 92 (duṭṭha, mūḷha, l.); J i.124. Lunana
Lunana
(nt.) [for lūna(na), cp. lavana] cutting, severing SnA 148 (niddānan ti chedanaŋ lunanaŋ uppāṭanaŋ). Lunāti
Lunāti
[lū, given as lu at Dhtp 504 ("chedana") & Dhtm 728 ("paccheda"). For etym. cp. Gr. lu/w to loosen, Lat. luo to pay a fine, Goth. fraliusan to lose; Ger. los, E. lose & loose] to cut, cut off, mow, reap Miln 33 (yavalāvakā yavaŋ lunanti); DhsA 39. -- pp. lūna (& luta). -- Caus I. lāvayati Mhvs 10, 30; Caus. II. lavāpeti to cause to mow Vin ii.180. -- A Pass. lūyati [fr. lu] is found at D i.141 (aor. lūyiŋsu) and at corresponding passage Pug 56 (imper. lūyantu, where dubbā is to be corrected to dabbhā). -- See lava, lavaka, lavana, lāyati, lavati. Lubbhati
Lubbhati
[Vedic lubhyate, lubh, cp. Lat. lubet & libet it pleases, libido longing; Goth. liufs = Ger. lieb & lob; E. love, etc. -- Dhtp 434: lobhe] to be lustful or greedy, to covet, long for, desire It 84 (lobhaneyye na lubbhati); Vism 465, 468. -- ger. lubbha (?) in olubbha is to be referred to lamb rather than lubh. A grd. formation in lobhaneyya or lobhanīya (q. v.). -- pp. luddha. Lubbhana
Lubbhana
(nt.) [fr. lubh] being greedy, greediness, a scho- lastic word, only found in exegesis of word lobha, e. g. at Dhs 32 (where also the enlarged abstr. formation lubbhitatta) & Vism 465, 468 (lubbhana -- mattaŋ lobha). Lumpati
Lumpati
[lup, Epic Sk. lumpati, found also as rup in Pali: see ruppati. Connected with Lat. lugeo to be sorry (cp. rujati, roga; Gr. lu/ph sorrow) and rumpo to break. Defns at Dhtp 386 & 433 (chedana) and at Dhtm 618 & 669 (cheda, vināsa)] to break, harm, injure; to attack, plunder; with a strong touch of affection (sympathy or desire) lubh in it [cp. lup: Gr. lu/ph; ruj: roga], which is still more evident in Intens. loluppa (q. v.). -- DhsA 365 (in expln of loluppa). -- pp. lutta. -- Cp. ullumpana, ullopa, lopa, vilumpati, vilopa. Luḷati & Luṭati
Luḷati
& Luṭati [cp. Ep. Sk. loṭh to move & dial. luḍ, loḍayati, to stir, agitate, which is a by -- form of lul, lolati to move, Caus. lolayati to set in motion. Etym. connected with Slavonic ljuljati to rock, Ags. lāēl a (flexible) rod, rood; root due to onomat. formation. -> Another form is luṭhati. The Dhtm (117) expls luṭ by "loṭane" (cp. viloṭana & viloḷana), and luḷ (510) by "manthane"] to stir, shake, agitate, upset; intrs. to be in motion, to be stirred Miln 259 (calati khubbhati l. āvilati). -- pp. luḷita. Luḷita
Luḷita
[pp. of luḷati] stirred, moved, disturbed; lively; turbid (of water) S v.123 = A iii.233; (udapatta āvila l.); D ii.128=Ud 83 (udakaŋ parittaŋ luḷitaŋ āvilaŋ); J vi.63; Nd1 488 (āvila+); Miln 35, 177, 220 (˚citta), 383 (a˚); DhsA 328 (indriyāni paripakkāni alulitāni avisadāni). Lūka
Lūka
[apocope form of ulūka, arisen through wrong syllable -- division] owl J vi.497 ( = ulūka C.). Lūkha
Lūkha
(adj.) [Vedic rūkṣa; Prk. lūha & lukkha; BSk. lūha, e. g. Divy 13 (praheṇaka), 81 (˚cīvara), 425, 427] 1. rough, coarse, unpleasant; poor, bad (usually appld to dress or food); mediocre, meȧgre, wretched. Opp. paṇīta (e. g. Vin i.212; S ii.153; A iv.10; J i.228; VvA 64). -- S iv.337 sq.; A iv.232 sq.; Vin i.55; Th 1, 923; J i.228 (cittasmiŋ paṇīte . . . dānaŋ lūkhaŋ na hoti); Nd2 342 (p. 182, in exegesis of nikkuha, where practices of ascetics are referred to as "lūkhaŋ cīvaraŋ dhāreti, l. piṇḍapātaŋ bhuñjati, l. senāsanaŋ paṭisevati" etc.); VvA 298, 335 sq.; PvA 180. -- 2. (of men) low, wretched, rough, miserable, offensive Vin i.199; iii.110 (kisa l. dubbaṇṇa); S i.175 ( = jiṇṇa C, see K.S. 320; trsln "looking worn"); M i.77=J i.390. -- lūkhapuggala a miserable, offensive character (opp. siniddhapuggala) Vism 132; VbhA 282.

-- ājīvin leading a hard or rough life D i.161; iii.44, 47; S ii.200; A v.190. -- cīvara (adj.) wearing a shabby robe, badly clad Vin iii.263; Miln 342 (cp. cīvara lūkha bad condition of clothes A ii.71 = Pug 53; lūkhacīvara -- dhara A i.25). -- ppamāṇa (& ˚ika) taking unpleasantness or misery as one's standard A ii.71= Pug 53 (cp. PugA 229); DhA iii.114; SnA 242; cp. rūpa -- ppamāṇa. -- ppasanna believing in shabbiness or mediocrity, having (bodily) wretchedness as one's faith Vin ii.197; A ii.71=Pug 53. -- pāpuraṇa miserably clad S i.175; DhA iv.8, 9. Lūkhatā
Lūkhatā
(f.) [fr. lūkha] unpleasantness, wretchedness, poorness, misery PugA 229. Lūkhasa
Lūkhasa
(adj.) [fr. lūkha] rough, harsh; miserable, self- mortifying Sn 244 ( = nīrasa atta -- kilamath' ânuyutta SnA 287). Lūtā
Lūtā
(f.) [*Sk. lūtā] spider Abhp 621. Lūna
Lūna
[pp. of lunāti] cut, mowed, reaped Th 2, 107 (˚kesī); J ii.365; Dāvs i.32. Cp. vi˚. Lūyati
Lūyati:
Pass. of lunāti (q. v.). Lekha
Lekha
[fr. likh, cp. Sk. lekha & lekhā] 1. writing, inscrip- tion, letter, epistle J vi.595 (silā˚ inscription on rock); Mhvs 5, 177 (lekhe sutvā); 27, 6; 33, 40 (˚ŋ vissajjayi); Dāvs 5, 67 (cāritta˚); Miln 42; SnA 164 (˚vācāka reciting), 577. -- 2. chips, shavings Vin ii.110 (v. l. likha). Lekhaka
Lekhaka
[fr. lekha] one who knows the art of writing, a scribe, secretary Vin iv.8 (as a profession); iv.10 ( = muddikā & gaṇakā, pl.); Miln 42. Lekhaṇī
Lekhaṇī
(f.) [fr. likh; cp. Epic Sk. lekhaṇī stencil Mbh 1, 78] an instrument for scratching lines or writing, a stencil, pencil A ii.200; J i.230. -- 586 -- Lekhana
Lekhana
(nt.) [fr. likh] scratching, drawing, writing Dhtp 467. Lekhā
Lekhā
(f.) [fr. likh; Vedic lekhā. See also rekhā & lekha] 1. streak, line VvA 277 ( = rāji); canda˚ crescent moon [cp. Epic candralekhā Mbh 3, 1831] Vism 168; DhsA 151. -- 2. a scratch, line A i.283; Pug 32; J vi.56 (lekhaŋ kaḍḍhati). -- 3. writing, inscription, letter Vin iii.76 (˚ŋ chindati destroy the letter); J i.451 (on a phalaka); Miln 349 (˚ācariya teacher of writing); PvA 20 (˚paṇṇa, letter so read for likhā˚). -- 4. the art of writing or drawing [=lipi Hemacandra], writing as an art. It is classed as a respectable (ukkaṭṭha) profession (sippa) Vin iv.7; and mentioned by the side of muddā and gaṇanā Vin iv.7, 128=i.77; cp. Vin iv.305. Lekhita
Lekhita
[pp. of lekheti] drawn (of lines), pencilled Th 2, 256. Lekheti
Lekheti
[Caus. of likhati or Denom. of lekha] to (make a) scratch J iv. 402. -- pp. lekhita. Leḍḍu
Leḍḍu
[dial. Sk. leṣṭu>*leṭṭhu>*leṭṭu>leḍḍu; also Prk. leḍu & leṭṭhu: Pischel, § 304; cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 62] a clod of earth S v.146 = J ii.59 (˚ṭṭhāna); J i.19, 175; iii.16; vi.405; Miln 255; SnA 222 (ākāse khitta, in simile); Vism 28 (trsln "stone"), 360 (˚khaṇḍ'ādīni), 366 (containing gold), 419; VbhA 66 (˚khaṇḍā); VvA 141; PvA 284. -- The throwing of clods (stones?) is a standing item in the infliction of punishments, where it is grouped with daṇḍa (stick) and sattha (sword), or as leḍḍu -- daṇḍ'ādi, e. g. at M i.123; D ii.336, 338 (v. l. leṇḍu); J ii.77; iii.16; vi.350; Vism 419; DhA i.399 (v. l. leṇḍu); iii.41; iv.77; VvA 141. -- Note. leḍḍūpaka in cuṇṇaŋ vā telaŋ vā leḍḍūpakena etc. at DhsA 115 read as vālaṇḍupakena, as at Vism 142.

-- pāta "throw of a clod," a certain measure of (not too far) a distance Vin iv.40; Vism 72; DhsA 315 (trsln "a stone's throw"). Leḍḍuka
Leḍḍuka
= leḍḍu; Vism 28. Leṇa
Leṇa
(& lena) (nt.) [*Sk. layana, fr. lī in meaning "to hide," cp. Prk. leṇa] 1. a cave (in a rock), a mountain cave, used by ascetics (or bhikkhus) as a hermitage or place of shelter, a rock cell. Often enumd with kuṭi & guhā, e. g. Vin iv.48; Miln 151; Vbh 251 (n.). At Vin ii.146 it is given as collective name for 5 kinds of hermitages, viz. vihāra, aḍḍhayoga, pāsāda, hammiya, guhā. The expln of leṇa at VbhA 366 runs as follows: "pabbataŋ khaṇitvā vā pabbhārassa appahonakaṭṭhāne kuḍḍaŋ uṭṭhāpetvā vā katasenāsanaŋ," i. e. opportunity for sitting & lying made by digging (a cave) in a mountain or by erecting a wall where the cave is insufficient (so as to make the rest of it habitable). Cp. Vin i.206 = iii.248 (pabbhāraŋ sodhāpeti leṇaŋ kattukāmo) Mhvs 16, 12; 28, 31 sq. (n); Miln 200 (mahā˚). -- 2. refuge, shelter, (fig.) salvation (sometimes in sense of nibbāna). In this meaning often combd with tāṇa & saraṇa, e. g. at D i.95; S iv.315 (maŋ -- leṇa refuge with me;+maŋtāṇa); iv.372 (=nibbāna); A i.155 sq. (n); J ii.253; DA i.232. Cp. Vin iii.155. leṇ'atthaŋ for refuge Vin ii.164 (n); J i.94. -- aleṇa without a refuge Ps i.127; ii.238; Pv ii.25 (= asaraṇa PvA 80).

-- gavesin seeking shelter or refuge J ii.407 = iv.346. -- guhā a mountain cave J iii.511. -- dvāra the door of the (rock) hermitage Vism 38; DhA iii.39. -- pabbhāra "cave -- slope," cave in a mountain DhA iv.170. Lepa
Lepa
[fr. lip, see limpati; cp. Classic Sk. lepa stain, dirt] 1. smearing, plastering, coating over Vin iv.303 (bāhira˚); J ii.25 (mattikā˚). -- 2. (fig.) plaster, i. e. that which sticks, affection, attachment, etc., in taṇhā˚ the stain of craving, & diṭṭhi˚ of speculation Nd1 55; Nd2 271iii. -- Note. lasagata at A ii.165 read with v. l. as lepa -- gata, i. e. sticky. -- Cp. ā˚, pa˚ Lepana
Lepana
(nt.) [fr. lip] smearing, plastering, anointing Vin ii.172 (kuḍḍa˚); A iv.107 (vāsana˚), 111 (id.); J ii.117. Cp. abhi˚, ā˚, pa˚ Lepeti
Lepeti
see limpati. Leyya
Leyya
(adj. nt.) [grd. of lih: see lihati] to be licked or sipped; nt. mucilaginous food (opp. peyya liquid) A iv.394 (+peyya); Miln 2 (id.). Lesa
Lesa
[cp. Sk. leśa particle; as Kern, Toev. s. v. points out, it occurs in Sk. also in the P. meaning at Mbh v.33, 5 although this is not given in BR. -- As "particle" only at Dhtp 444 in defn of lisati] sham, pretext, trick Vin iii.169 (where ten lesas are enumd, viz. jāti˚, nāma˚, gotta˚, linga˚, āpatti˚, patta˚, cīvara˚, upajjhāya˚, ācariya˚, senāsana˚); J ii.11; vi.402. -- lesa -- kappa pretext Vin ii.166; Vv 8443 ( = kappiya -- lesa VvA 348); Th 1, 941; DA i.103. Lehati
Lehati
see lihati. Loka
Loka
[cp. Vedic loka in its oldest meaning "space, open space." For etym. see rocati. To the etym. feeling of the Pāli hearer loka is closely related in quality to ruppati (as in pop. etym. of rūpa) and rujati. As regards the latter the etym. runs "lujjati kho loko ti vuccati" S iv.52, cp. Nd2 550, and loka = lujjana DhsA 47, 308: see lujjana. The Dhtp 531 gives root lok (loc) in sense of dassana] world, primarily "visible world," then in general as "space or sphere of creation," with var. degrees of substantiality. Often (unspecified) in the comprehensive sense of "universe." Sometimes the term is applied collectively to the creatures inhabiting this or var. other worlds, thus, "man, mankind, people, beings." -- Loka is not a fixed & def. term. It comprises immateriality as well as materiality and emphasizes either one or the other meaning according to the view applied to the object or category in question. Thus a trsln of "sphere, plane, division, order" interchanges with "world." Whenever the spatial element prevails we speak of its "regional" meaning as contrasted with "applied" meaning. The fundamental notion however is that of substantiality, to which is closely related the specific Buddhist notion of impermanence (loka=lujjati). -- 1. Universe: the distinctions between the universe (cp. cakkavāḷa) as a larger whole and the world as a smaller unit are fluctuating & not definite. A somewhat wider sphere is perhaps indicated by sabba -- loka (e. g. S i.12; iv.127, 312; v.132; It 122; Mhvs 1, 44; cp. sabbāvanta loka D i.251; iii.224), otherwise even the smaller loka comprises var. realms of creation. Another larger division is that of loka as sadevaka, samāraka, sabrahmaka, or the world with its devas, its Māra and its Brahmā, e. g. S i.160, 168, 207; ii.170; iii.28, 59; iv.158; v.204; A i.259 sq.; ii.24 sq.; iii.341; iv.56, 173; v.50; It 121; Nd1 447 (on Sn 956), to which is usually added sassamaṇa -- brāhmaṇī pajā (e. g. D i.250, see loci s. v. pajā). With this cp. Dh 45, where the divisions are paṭhavī, Yamaloka, sadevaka (loka), which are expld at DhA i.334 by paṭhavī=attabhāva; Yamaloka=catubbidha apāyaloka; sadevaka=manussaloka devalokena saddhiŋ. -- The universe has its evolutional periods: saŋvaṭṭati and vivaṭṭati D ii.109 sq. The Buddha has mastered it by his enlightenment: loko Tathāgatena abhisambuddho It 121. On loka, lokadhātu (=cosmos) and cakkavāḷa cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie p. 180, 181. -> 2. Regional meaning. -- (a) in general. Referring to this world, the character of evanescence is inherent in it; referring to the universe in a wider sense, it implies infinity, though not in definite terms. There is mention of the different metaphysical theories as regards cosmogony at many places of the Canon. The antânantikā (contending for the finitude or otherwise of the world) are mentioned as a sect at D i.22 sq. Discussions as to whether loka is sassata or antavā are found e. g. at M i.426, 484; ii.233; S iii.182, 204; iv.286 sq.; A ii.41; v.31, 186 sq.; Ps i.123, 151 sq.; Vbh 340; Dhs 1117. Views on consistency of the world (eternal or finite; created or evolved etc.) at D iii.137; cp. S ii.19 sq. Cp. also the long and interesting discussion of loka as suñña at S iv.54 sq.; Ps ii.177 sq.; Nd2 680; -- as well as M ii.68 (upanīyati loko addhuvo, and "attāṇo loko, assakoloko" etc.); "lokassa anto" is lit. unattainable: A ii.50=S i.62; iv.93; but the Arahant is "lok'antagū," cp. A iv.430. -- As regards their order in space (or "plane") there are var. groupings of var. worlds, the evidently popular one being that the world of the devas is above and the nirayas below the world of man (which is "tiriyaŋ vâpi majjhe"): Nd2 550. The world of men is as ayaŋ loko contrasted with the beyond, or paro loko: D iii.181; S iv.348 sq.; A i.269; iv.226; Sn 779 (n'āsiŋsati lokaŋ imaŋ parañ ca); or as idhaloka D iii.105. The defn of ayaŋ loko at Nd1 60 is given as: sak'attabhāva, saka -- rūpa -- vedanā etc., ajjhatt' āyatanāni, manussa -- loka, kāmadhātu; with which is contrasted paro loko as: parattabhāva, para -- rūpavedanā, bāhir'āyatanāni, devaloka, rūpa -- & arūpadhātu. -- The rise and decay of this world is referred to as samudaya and atthangama at S ii.73; iii.135; iv.86; A v.107. -- Cp. D iii.33 (attā ca loko ca); Mhvs 1, 5 (lokaŋ dukkhā pamocetuŋ); 28, 4 (loko 'yaŋ pīḷito); PvA 1 (vijjā -- caraṇa -- sampannaŋ yena nīyanti lokato). -- Other divisions of var. kinds of "planes" are e. g. deva˚ A i.115, 153; iii.414 sq.; Brahma˚ Vbh 421; Mhvs 19, 45; Yama˚ Dh 44; S i.34; nara˚ Mhvs 5, 282. See also each sep. head -- word, also peta˚ & manussa˚. -> The division at Nd1 550 is as follows: niraya˚, tiracchāna˚, pittivisaya˚, manussa˚, deva˚ (=material); upon which follow khandha˚, dhātu˚, āyatana˚ (=immaterial). Similarly at Nd1 29, where apāya˚ takes the place of niraya˚, tiracchāna˚, pittivisaya˚. -- Another threefold division is sankhāra˚, satta˚, okāsa˚ at Vism 204, with explns: "sabbe sattā āhāra -- ṭṭhitikā" ti= sankhāraloka; "sassato loko ti vā asassato loko" ti= sattaloka; "yāvatā candima -- suriyā pariharanti disā 'bhanti virocamānā" etc. (=M i.328; A i.227; cp. J i.132) =okāsaloka. The same expln in detail at SnA 442. -- Another as kāma˚, rūpa˚, arūpa˚: see under rūpa; another as kilesa˚, bhava˚, indriya˚ at Nett 11, 19. Cp. sankhāra -- loka VbhA 456; dasa lokadhātuyo (see below) S i.26. -- 3. Ordinary & applied meaning. -- (a) division of the world, worldly things S i.1, 24 (loke visattikā attachment to this world; opp. sabba -- loke anabhirati S v.132). -- loke in this world, among men, here D iii.196 (ye nibbutā loke); It 78 (loke uppajjati); DA i.173 (id.); Vbh 101 (yaŋ loke piya -- rūpaŋ etc.); Pv ii.113 (=idaŋ C.); KhA 15, 215. See also the diff. defns of loke at Nd2 552. -- loka collectively "one, man": kicchaŋ loko āpanno jāyati ca jīyati ca, etc. D ii.30. Also "people": Lanka -- loka people of Ceylon Mhvs 19, 85; cp. jana in similar meaning. Derived from this meaning is the use in cpds. (˚ -- ) as "usual, every day, popular, common": see e. g. ˚āyata, ˚vajja, ˚vohāra. -- (b) "thing of the world," material element, physical or worldly quality, sphere or category (of "materiality"). This category of loka is referred to at Vbh 193, which is expld at VbhA 220 as follows: "ettha yo ayaŋ ajjhatt' ādi bhedo kāyo pariggahīto, so eva idha -- loko nāma." In this sense 13 groups are classified according to the number of constituents in each group (1 -- 12 and No. 18); they are given at Nd2 551 (under lokantagū Sn 1133) as follows: (1) bhavaloka; (2) sampatti bhavaloka, vipatti bhavaloka; (3) vedanā; (4) āhārā; (5) upādāna -- kkhandhā; (6) ajjhattikāni āyatanāni (their rise & decay as "lokassa samudaya & atthangama" at S iv.87); (7) viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo; (8) loka -- dhammā; (9) satt'āvāsā; (10) upakkilesā; (11) kāmabhavā; (12) āyatanāni; (18) dhātuyo. They are repeated at Ps i.122=174, with (1) as "sabbe sattā āhāra -- ṭṭhitikā; (2) nāmañ ca rūpañ ca; and the remainder the same. Also at Vism 205 and at SnA 442 as at Ps i.122. Cp. the similar view at S iv.95: one perceives the world ("materiality": loka -- saññin and loka -- mānin, proud of the world) with the six senses. This is called the "loka" in the logic (vinaya) of the ariyā. -- A few similes with loka see J.P.T.S. 1907, 131.

-- akkhāyikā (f., scil. kathā) talk or speculation about (origin etc. of) the world, popular philosophy (see lokāyata and cp. Dialogues i.14) Vin i.188; D i.8; M i.513; Miln 316; DA i.90. -- agga chief of the world. Ep. of the Buddha ThA 69 (Ap. v.11). -- anta the end (spatial) of the world A ii.49 (na ca appatvā lokantaŋ dukkhā atthi pamocanaŋ). -- antagū one who has reached the end of the world (and of all things worldly), Ep. of an Arahant A ii.6, 49 sq.; It 115, Sn 1133; Nd2 551. -- antara the space between the single worlds J i.44 (v.253: Avīcimhi na uppajjanti, tathā lokantaresu ca). -- antarika (scil. Niraya) a group of Nirayas or Purgatories situated in the lokantara (i. e. cakkavāl, antaresu J i.76), 8,000 yojanas in extent, pitch dark, which were filled with light when Gotama became the Buddha J i.76; VbhA 4; Vism 207 (lokantariya˚); SnA 59 (˚vāsa life in the l. niraya); cp. BSk. lokântarikā Divy 204 (andhās tamaso 'ndhakāra -- tamisrā). -- âdhipa lord or ruler of the world A i.150. -- âdhipateyya "rule of the world," dependence on public opinion, influence of material things on man, one of the 3 ādhipateyyas (atta˚, loka˚, dhamma˚) D iii.220; Vism 14. -- ânukampā sympathy with the world of men [cp. BSk. lokânugraha Divy 124 sq.] D iii.211; It 79. -- āmisa worldly gain, bait of the flesh M i.156; ii.253; Th 2, 356. -- āyata what pertains to the ordinary view (of the world), common or popular philosophy, or as Rhys Davids (Dial. i.171) puts it: "name of a branch of Brahman learning, probably Nature -- lore "; later worked into a quâsi system of "casuistry, sophistry." Franke, Dīgha trsln 19, trsls as "logisch beweisende Naturerklärung" (see the long note on this page, and cp. Dial. i.166 -- 172 for detail of lokāyata). It is much the same as lok -- akkhāy(ika) or popular philosophy. -> D i.11, 88; Vin ii.139; Sn p. 105 ( = vitaṇḍa -- vādasattha SnA 447, as at DA i.247); Miln 4, 10, 178; A i.163, 166; iii.223. Cp. BSk. lokāyata Divy 630, 633, and lokāyatika ibid. 619. See also Kern's remarks at Toev. s. v. -- āyatika (brāhmaṇa) one who holds the view of lokāyata or popular philosophy S ii.77 (trsln K.S. 53: a Brahmin "wise in world -- lore"); Miln 178; J vi.486 (na seve lokāyatikaŋ; expld as "anatthanissitaŋ . . . vitaṇḍa -- sallāpaŋ lokāyatika -- vādaŋ na seveyya," thus more like "sophistry" or casuistry). -- issara lord of the world Sdhp 348. -- uttara see under lokiya. -- cintā thinking about the world, worldphilosophy or speculation S v.447; A ii.80 (as one of the 4 acinteyyāni or thoughts not to be thought out: buddha -- visaya, jhāna -- visaya, kamma -- vipāka, l -- c.). Cp. BSk. laukika citta Divy 63, 77 etc. -- dhammā (pl.) common practice, things of the world, worldly conditions S iii.139 sq.; Sn 268 (expln loke dhammā; yāva lokappavatti tāva -- anivattikā dhammā ti vuttaŋ hoti KhA 153, cp. J iii.468); Miln 146. Usually comprising a set of eight, viz. lābha, alābha, yaso, ayaso, nindā, pasaŋsā, sukhaŋ, dukkhaŋ D iii.260; A iv.156 sq.; v.53; Nd2 55; Ps i.22, 122; Vbh 387; Nett 162; DhA ii.157. -- dhātu constituent or unit of the Universe, "world -- element"; a world, sphere; another name for cakkavāla. Dasa -- sahassi -- lokadhātu the system of the 10,000 worlds Vin i.12; A i.227. -- D iii.114; Pv ii.961; Kvu 476; Vism 206 sq.; Vbh 336; Nd1 356 (with the stages from one to fifty lokadhātu's, upon which follow: sahassī cūḷanikā l -- dh.; dvisahassī majjhimikā; tisahassī; mahāsahassī); J i.63, 212; Miln 237; VbhA 430, 436. See also cūḷanikā. -- nātha saviour of the world, Ep. of the Buddha Sn 995; Vism 201, 234; VvA 165; PvA 42, 287. -- nāyaka guide or leader of the world (said of the Buddha) Sn 991; Ap 20; Mhvs 7, 1; Miln 222. -- nirodha destruction of the world It 121 (opp. ˚samudaya). -- pāla (˚devatā) guardian (governor) of the world, which are usually sepcified as four, viz. Kuvera (=Vessavaṇa), Dhataraṭṭha, Virūpakkha, Virūḷhaka, alias the 4 mahārājāno Pv i.42; J i.48 (announce the future birth of a Buddha). -- byūha "world -- array," pl. byūhā (devā) N. of a class of devas J i.47; Vism 415 (kāmâvacara -- deva's). -- mariyādā the boundary of the world VvA 72. -- vajja common sins Miln 266; KhA 190. -- vaṭṭa "world -- round," i. e. saŋsāra (opp. vivaṭṭa =nibbāna) Nett 113, 119. See also vaṭṭa. -- vidu knowing the universe, Lp. of the Buddha D iii.76; S i.62; v.197, 343; A ii.48; Sn p. 103; Vv 3426; Pug 57; expld in full at SnA 442 and Vism 204 sq. -- vivaraṇa unveiling of the universe, apocalypse, revelation Vism 392 (when humans see the devas etc.). -- vohāra common or general distinction, popular logic, ordinary way of speaking SnA 383, 466; VbhA 164. -- 588 -- Lokiya
Lokiya
(& lokika) (adj.) [fr. loka; cp. Vedic laukika in meaning "worldly, usual"] 1. (ordinarily) "belonging to the world," i. e. -- (a) world -- wide, covering the whole world, famed, widely known Th 1, 554; J vi.198. -> (b) ( -- ˚) belonging to the world of, an inhabitant of (as lokika) Pv i.62 (Yama˚). -- (c) common, general, worldly Vism 89 (samādhi); DhA iv.3 (˚mahājana) PvA 131 (˚parikkhaka), 207 (sukha), 220 (˚sabhāva). See also below 3. -- 2. (special meaning) worldly, mundane, when opposed to lokuttara. The term lokuttara has two meanings -- viz. (a) in ordinary sense: the highest of the world, best, sublime (like lokagga, etc.), often applied to Arahantship, e. g. lokuttaradāyajja inheritance of Arahantship J i.91; DhA i.117; ideal: lokuttara dhamma (like parama dhamma) the ideal state, viz. Nibbāna M ii.181; pl. l. dhammā M iii.115. -- (b) (in later canonical literature) beyond these worlds, supra -- mundane, transcendental, spiritual. In this meaning it is applied to the group of nava lokuttarā dhammā (viz. the 4 stages of the Path: sotāpatti etc., with the 4 phala's, and the addition of nibbāna), e. g. Dhs 1094. Mrs. Rh. D. tries to compromise between the two meanings by giving lokuttara the trsln "engaged upon the higher ideal" (Dhs. tsrl. Introd. p. 98), since meaning (b) has too much of a one -- sided philosophical appearance. On term cp. Cpd. 913. -- 3. lokiya (in meaning "mundane") is contrasted with lokuttara ("transcendental") at many passages of the Abhidhamma, e. g. at Ps ii.166; Dhs. 505, 1093, 1446; Vbh 17 sq., 93, 106, 128, 229 sq., 271, 322; Kvu 222, 515, 602; Pug 62; Tikp 41 sq., 52 sq., 275; Dukp 304, 324; Nett 10, 54, 67, 77, 111, 161 sq., 189 sq.; Miln 236, 294 (lokika), 390; Vism 10, 85, 438; DA i.331; DhsA 47 sq., 213; VbhA 128, 373; DhA i.76 (lokika); ii.150; iii.272; iv.35. Locaka
Locaka
(adj.) [fr. loc. Caus. of luñc; cp. Sk. luñcaka] one who pulls out D i.167 (kesa -- massu˚, habit of cert. ascetics); M i.308 (id.). Locana
Locana1
[fr. loc or lok to see; Dhtp 532 & Dhtm 766: loc = dassana] the eye; adj. ( -- ˚) having eyes. (of . . .) Pv i.115 (miga -- manda˚); PvA 57, 90 (pingala˚). Locana
Locana2
(nt.) [fr. loc. Caus. of luñcati] pulling, tearing out D i.167 (kesa -- massu˚); A i.296; Pug 55. Loceti
Loceti
see luñcati. Loṭana
Loṭana
(nt.) [luṭ, cp. *Sk. lolana & viloḷana] shaking, upsetting Dhtm 117. Cp. vi˚. Loṇa
Loṇa
(nt.) [cp. Sk. lavaṇa, for which see also lavaṇa. The Prk. form is loṇa] salt; as adj., salty, of salt, alkaline. -- Vin i.202 (loṇāni bhesajjāni alkaline medicine, among which are given sāmuddaŋ kāḷaloṇaŋ sindhavaŋ ubbhidaŋ bilaŋ as var. kinds of salt), 220 = 243 (as flavouring, with tela, taṇḍula & khādaniya); A i.210, 250; iv.108; Miln 63; DhA iv.176 (in simile see below); VvA 98, 100, 184 (aloṇa sukkha -- kummāsa, unsalted). On loṇa in similes cp. J.P.T.S. 1907, 131.

-- ambila acid and salt J i.505; ii.171, 394. -- odaka salt water J vi.37; VvA 99 (˚udaka). -- kāra salt -- maker Vin i.350 (˚gāma); A ii.182 (˚dāraka); J vi.206 (kara); Miln 331. -- ghaṭa a pitcher with salt S ii.276. See also App. to KhA 68 (in Sn Index 870, 871) on Vism passage with loṇaghaṭaka. -- dhūpana salt -- spicing VbhA 311 (viya sabba vyañjanesu; i. e. the strongest among all flavourings). -- phala a crystal of (natural) salt [phala for phaṭa = *sphaṭa, cp. phalaka] A i.250 (in simile). -- rasa alkaline taste A iv.199, 203. -- sakkhara a salt crystal (cp. ˚phala), a (solid) piece of (natural) salt S ii.276 (in simile, cp. A i.250); SnA 222 (aggimhi pakkhitta l -- s., in the same simile at DhA iv.176: uddhane pakkhitta -- loṇa). -- sakkharikā a piece of salt -- crystal, used as a caustic for healing wounds Vin i.206. -- sovīraka salted sour gruel Vin i.210; VvA 99. Loṇika & Loṇiya
Loṇika
& Loṇiya (adj.) [fr. loṇa] salty, alkaline Dhs 629. -- loṇiya -- teliya prepared with salt & oil J iii.522; iv.71. -- aloṇika unsalted 426 (˚aka); VvA 184; J i.228; iii.409. Lodda
Lodda
[cp. *Sk. rodhra; on sound changes see Geiger, P.Gr. 44, 622] N. of a tree J v.405; vi.497. Lopa
Lopa
[fr. lup: see lumpati] taking away, cutting off; as tt. g. apocope, elision (of the final letter) VbhA 164 (sabba -- loka -- vohāra˚); SnA 12, 303, 508; VvA 79; often in anunāsika˚ dropping of (final) ŋ SnA 410; VvA 154, 275. At S v.342 read piṇḍiy 'ālopena for piṇḍiyā lopena. -- Cp. ālopa, nillopa, vilopa, vilopiya. Lobha
Lobha
[cp. Vedic & Epic Sk. lobha; fr. lubh: see lub- bhati] covetousness, greed. Defined at Vism 468 as "lubbhanti tena, sayaŋ vā lubbhati, lubbhana -- mattam eva vā taŋ," with several comparisons following. -> Often found in triad of lobha, dosa, moha (greed, anger, bewilderment, forming the three principles of demerit: see kusala -- mūla), e. g. at A iv.96; It 83, 84; Vism 116; Dukp 9, 18 sq. See dosa & moha. -- D iii.214, 275; S i.16, 43, 63, 123 (bhava˚); v.88; A i.64 (˚kkhaya), 160 (visama˚), cp. D iii.70 sq.; ii.67; Sn 367, 371, 537 (˚kodha), 663, 706, 864, 941 (˚pāpa); Nd1 15, 16, 261; J iv.11 (kodha, dosa, l.); Dhs 982, 1059; Vbh 208, 341, 381, 402; Nett 13, 27; Vism 103; VbhA 18; PvA 7, 13, 17, 89 (+dosa), 102; VvA 14; Sdhp 52 (˚moha), 266. -- alobha disinterestedness D iii.214; Dhs 32.

-- dhammā (pl.) affection of greed, things belonging to greed; (adj.) (of) greedy character M i.91; iii.37; D i.224, 230; S iv.111; A iii.350; J iv.11. -- mūla the root of greed Vism 454 (eightfold; with dosa -- mūla & moha -- mūla). Lobhana
Lobhana
(nt.) [fr. lobha] being greedy Th 2, 343 ( = lobh' uppāda ThA 240). Lobhaniya (˚īya, ˚eyya)
Lobhaniya
(˚īya, ˚eyya) (adj.) [grd. formation fr. lobha] 1. belonging to greed "of the nature of greed" causing greed It 84 (˚eyya). See rajaniya. -- 2. desirable Miln 361 (paduma). Loma
Loma
(nt.) [cp. Vedic roman. The (restituted) late P. form roma only at J v.430; Abhp 175, 259; Sdhp 119] the hair of the body (whereas kesa is the hair of the head only) D ii.18 (ekeka˚, uddhagga˚, in characteristics of a Mahāpurisa); S ii.257 (asi˚, usu˚, satti˚ etc.); A ii.114; Vin iii.106 (usu˚ etc.); Sn 385; J i.273 (khaggo lomesu allīyi); VbhA 57; DhA i.126; ii.17 (˚gaṇanā); ThA 199; VvA 324 (sūkara˚); PvA 152, 157; Sdhp 104. A detailed description of loma as one of the 32 ākāras of the body (Kh iii.; pl. lomā) is found at Vism 250, 353; VbhA 233; KhA 42, 43. -- aloma hairless J vi.457; puthu˚ having broad hair or fins, name of a fish J iv.466; Vv 4411. haṭṭha˚ with hairs erect, excited Mhvs 15, 33. -- On loma in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 131. -- lomaŋ pāteti to let one's hair drop, as a sign of subduedness or modesty, opp. to horripilation [pāteti formed fr. pat after wrong etym. of panna in panna -- loma "with drooping hairs," which was taken as a by -- form of patita: see panna -- loma]: Vin ii.5 ( = pannalomo hoti C.); iii.183; M i.442. -> Cp. anu˚, paṭi˚, vi˚.

-- kūpa a pore of the skin J i.67; KhA 51, 63; SnA 155 (where given as 99,000) Vism 195 (id.). -- padmaka a kind of plant J vi.497 (reading uncertain; v. l. lodda˚). -- sundarī (f.) beautiful with hairs (on her body) J v.424 (Kurangavī l.; expld on p. 430 as "roma -- rājiyā maṇḍita udarā"). -- haŋsa horripilation, excitement with fear or wonder, thrill D i.49; A iv.311 sq. (sa˚); Sn 270; Vbh 367; Miln 22; Vism 143; DA i.150. -- haŋsana causing horripilation, astounding, stupendous Sn 681; J iv.355 (abbhuta+); Pv iii.93; iv.35; Miln 1; Mhvs 17, 55 (abbhuta+). -- haṭṭha having the hair standing on end, horrified, thunderstruck, astounded D i.95; S v.270; Sn p. 15; Miln 23; SnA 155; cp. haṭṭha -- loma above. -- 589 -- Lomaka
Lomaka
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. loma] having hair, in cpd. caturanga˚ having fourfold hair (i. e. on the diff. parts of the body?) Vin iv.173. It may refer to the 5 dermatoid constituents of the body (see pañcaka) & thus be characteristic of outward appearance. We do not exactly see how the term caturanga is used here. -- Cp. anulomika. Lomasa
Lomasa
(adj.) [cp. Vedic romaśa] hairy, covered with hair, downy, soft M i.305; Pv i.92. At J iv.296 lomasā is expld as pakkhino, i. e. birds; reading however doubtful (vv. ll. lomahaŋsa & lomassā). Lomin
Lomin
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. loma] having hair, in cpds. ekanta˚ & uddha˚, of (couch -- ) covers or (bed) spreads: being made of hair altogether or having hair only on top Vin i.192 = ii.163; D i.7; cp. DA i.87. Lola (Loḷa)
Lola
(Loḷa) (adj.) [fr. luḷ: see luḷati; cp. Epic & Classic Sk. lola] wavering, unsteady, agitated; longing, eager, greedy S iv.111; Sn 22, 922; J i.49 (Buddha -- mātā lolā na hoti), 111, 210, 339 (dhana -- loḷa); ii.319 (˚manussa); iii.7; Pug 65; Nd1 366; Dāvs iv.44; Miln 300. -- alola not greedy, not distracted (by desire), self -- controlled S v.148; Sn 65.

-- bhava greediness, covetousness ThA 16. Lolatā
Lolatā
(f.) [fr. lola] longing, eagerness, greed Miln 93; SnA 35 (āhāra˚). Lolita
Lolita
[pp. of loleti] agitated, shaken Th 2, 373 ( = ālolita ThA 252). Lolupa
Lolupa
(adj.) [fr. lup, a base of lumpati but influenced by lubh, probably also by lola. See lumpati] covetous, greedy, self -- indulgent Dāvs ii.73. a˚ not greedy, temperate Sn 165. Cp. nil˚. -- f. lolupā as N. of a plant at J vi.537. Loluppa
Loluppa
(nt.) [abstr. fr. lolupa] greediness, covetousness, self -- indulgence, desire; in the language of the Abhidhamma often syn. with jappā or taṇhā. At DhsA 365 loluppa is treated as an adj. & expld at "punappuna visaye lumpati ākaḍḍhatī ti," i. e. one who tears again & again at the object (or as Expos. ii.470: repeated plundering, hauling along in the fields of sense). -- J i.340, 429; DhsA 365; Vism 61; & with exegetical synonyms loluppāyanā & loluppāyitattaŋ at Dhs 1059, 1136. Loleti
Loleti
[Caus. fr. luḷ, see luḷati] to make shake or unsteady A iii.188 (khobheti+). -- pp. lolita. Loḷī
Loḷī
see āloḷi. Loha
Loha
(nt.) [Cp. Vedic loha, of Idg. *(e)reudh "red"; see also rohita & lohita] metal, esp. copper, brass or bronze. It is often used as a general term & the individual application is not always sharply defined. Its comprehensiveness is evident from the classification of loha at VbhA 63, where it is said lohan ti jātilohaŋ, vijāti˚, kittima˚, pisāca˚ or natural metal, produced metal, artificial (i. e. alloys), & metal from the Pisāca district. Each is subdivided as follows: jāti˚ = ayo, sajjhaŋ, suvaṇṇaŋ, tipu, sīsaŋ, tambalohaŋ, vekantakalohaŋ; vijāti˚=nāga -- nāsika˚; kittima˚=kaŋsalohaŋ, vaṭṭa˚, ārakūṭaŋ; pisāca˚=morakkhakaŋ, puthukaŋ, malinakaŋ, capalakaŋ, selakaŋ, āṭakaŋ, bhallakaŋ, dūsilohaŋ. The description ends "Tesu pañca jātilohāni pāḷiyaŋ visuŋ vuttān' eva (i. e. the first category are severally spoken of in the Canon). Tambalohaŋ vekantakan ti imehi pana dvīhi jātilohehi saddhiŋ sesaŋ sabbam pi idha lohan ti veditabbaŋ." -- On loha in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 131. Cp. A iii.16=S v.92 (five alloys of gold: ayo, loha, tipu, sīsaŋ, sajjhaŋ); J v.45 (asi˚); Miln 161 (suvaṇṇam pi jātivantaŋ lohena bhijjati); PvA 44, 95 (tamba˚= loha), 221 (tatta -- loha -- secanaŋ pouring out of boiling metal, one of the five ordeals in Niraya).

-- kaṭāha a copper (brass) receptacle Vin ii.170. -- kāra a metal worker, coppersmith, blacksmith Miln 331. -- kumbhī an iron cauldron Vin ii.170. Also N. of a purgatory J iii.22, 43; iv.493; v.268; SnA 59, 480; Sdhp 195. -- guḷa an iron (or metal) ball A iv.131; Dh 371 (mā ˚ŋ gilī pamatto; cp. DhA iv.109). -- jāla a copper (i. e. wire) netting PvA 153. -- thālaka a copper bowl Nd1 226. -- thāli a bronze kettle DhA i.126. -- pāsāda "copper terrace," brazen palace, N. of a famous monastery at Anurādhapura in Ceylon Vism 97; DA i.131; Mhvs passim. -- piṇḍa an iron ball SnA 225. -- bhaṇḍa copper (brass) ware Vin ii.135. -- maya made of copper, brazen Sn 670; Pv ii.64. -- māsa a copper bean Nd1 448 (suvaṇṇa -- channa). -- māsaka a small copper coin KhA 37 (jatu -- māsaka, dāru -- māsaka+); DhsA 318. -- rūpa a bronze statue Mhvs 36, 31. -- salākā a bronze gong -- stick Vism 283. Lohatā
Lohatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. loha] being a metal, in (suvaṇṇassa) aggalohatā the fact of gold being the best metal VvA 13. Lohita
Lohita
(adj. -- nt.) [cp. Vedic lohita & rohita; see also P. rohita "red"] 1. (adj.) red: rarely by itself (e. g. M ii.17), usually in cpds. e. g. ˚abhijāti the red species (q. v.) A iii.383; ˚kasiṇa the artifice of red D iii.268; A i.41; Dhs 203; Vism 173; ˚candana red sandal (unguent) Miln 191. Otherwise rohita. -- 2. (nt.) blood; described in detail as one of the 32 ākāras at KhA 54 sq.; Vism 261, 360; VbhA 245. -- Vin i.203 (āmaka˚), 205 (˚ŋ mocetuŋ); A iv.135 (saṭṭhi -- mattānaŋ bhikkhūnaŋ uṇhaŋ l. mukhato uggañchi; cp. the similar passage at Miln 165); Sn 433; Pv i.67; i.91 (expld as ruhira PvA 44); Vism 261 (two kinds; sannicita˚ and saŋsaraṇa˚), 409 (the colour of the heartblood in relation to states of mind); VbhA 66; PvA 56, 78, 110.

-- akkha having red (blood -- shot) eyes (of snakes & yakkhas) Vv 522 (cp. VvA 224: ratta -- nayanā; yakkhānaŋ hi nettāni ati -- lohitāni honti); J vi.180. -- uppāda (the crime of) wounding A Tathāgata, one of the anantariya -- kammas VbhA 427; cp. Tathāgatassa lohitaŋ uppādeti Miln 214. -- uppādaka one who sheds the blood of an Arahant Vin i.89, 136, 320; v.222. -- kumbhi a receptacle for blood Ud 17 (with ref. to the womb). -- doṇi a bloody trough Vism 358; VbhA 62. -- pakkhandikā (or ˚pakkhandik' ābādha) bloody diarrhoea, dysentery M i.316; D ii.127; Ud 82; J ii.213; Miln 134, 175; DhA iii.269. -- homa a sacrifice of blood D i.9; DA i.93. -- 590 -- Lohitaka
Lohitaka
(adj.) [fr. lohita] 1. red M ii.14; A iv.306, 349; Ap. 1; Dhs 247, 617. -- ˚upadhāna a red pillow D i.7; A i.137; iii.50; iv.94, 231, 394; ˚sāli red rice Miln 252. -- 2. bloody Pv i.78 (pūti˚ gabbha); Vism 179, 194. Lohitanka
Lohitanka
[lohita+anka] a ruby A iv.199, 203; Ap 2; Vv 363; VvA 304. See masāragalla for further refs. -> Note. The word is not found in Vedic and Class. Sk.; a later term for "ruby" is lohitaka. In the older language lohitānga denotes the planet Mars. -- Ḷ. Ḷīyati
Ḷīyati
is given at Dhtp 361 as a variant of ḍī to fly (see ḍeti), and expld as "ākāsa -- gamana." Similarly at Dhtm 586 as "vehāsa -- gamana." -- V. V
--
V -- euphonic (sandhi -- ) consonant, historically justified after u (uv from older v), as in su -- v -- ānaya easy to bring (S i.124); hence transferred to i, as in ti -- v -- angika threefold (Dhs 161), and ti -- v -- angula three inches wide (Vism 152, 408); perhaps also in anu -- v -- icca (see anuvicca). Va
Va1
the syllable "va" KhA 109 (with ref. to ending ˚vā in Bhagavā, which Bdhgh expls as "va -- kāraŋ dīghaŋ katvā," i. e. a lengthening of va); SnA 76 (see below va3). Va
Va2
(indecl.) [the enclitic, shortened form of iva after long vowels. Already to be found for iva in RV metri causâ] like, like as, as if; only in poetry (as already pointed out by Trenckner, Miln 422): It 84 (tālapakkaŋ va bandhanā), 90 (chavālātaŋ va nassati); Dh 28; Sn 38 (vaŋso visālo va: see C. expln under va3); Pv i.81 (ummatta -- rūpo va; = viya PvA 39); i.116 (naḷo va chinno); Miln 72 (chāyā va anapāyinī); J iii.189 (kusamuddo va ghosavā); iv.139 (aggîva suriyo va); DhA iii.175. Va
Va3
(indecl.) [for eva, after long vowels] even, just (so), only; for sure, certainly Dh 136 (aggi -- daḍḍho va tappati); J i.138, 149 (so pi suvaṇṇa -- vaṇṇo va ahosi), 207; SnA 76 (vakāro avadhāraṇ' attho eva -- kāro vā ayaŋ, sandhi -- vasen' ettha e -- kāro naṭṭho: wrong at this passage Sn 38 for va2 = iva!); PvA 3 (eko va putto), 4 (ñātamattā va). Va
Va4
is (metrically) shortened form of vā, as found e. g. Dh 195 (yadi va for yadi vā); or in correlation va -- va either -- or: Dh 108 (yiṭṭhaŋ va hutaŋ va), 138 (ābādhaŋ va cittakkhepaŋ va pāpuṇe). Vaŋsa
Vaŋsa
[Vedic vaŋśa reed, bamboo (R.V.)] 1. a bamboo Sn 38 (vaŋso visālo va; vaŋso expld at Nd2 556 as "veḷugumba," at SnA 76 as "veḷu"), ibid. (˚kaḷīra); J vi.57; Vism 255 (˚kaḷīra); KhA 50 (id.). -- 2. race, lineage, family A ii.27 (ariya˚ of noble family); S v.168 (caṇḍāla˚); J i.89, 139; iv.390 (caṇḍāla˚); v.251 (uju˚); Mhvs 4, 5 (pitu -- ghātaka -- vaŋso a parricidal race). -- 3. tradition, hereditary custom, usage, reputation Miln 148 (ācariya˚), 190 (Tathāgatānaŋ); KhA 12 (Buddha˚); Dpvs 18, 3 (saddhamma˚ -- kovidā therā). -- vaŋsaŋ nāseti to break family tradition J v.383; vaŋsaŋ ucchindati id. J v.383; or upacchindati J iv.63; opp. patiṭṭhāpeti to establish the reputation J v.386. -- 4. dynasty Mhvs 36, 61 (kassa v. ṭhassati). -- 5. a bamboo flute, fife Miln 31; VvA 210. -- 6. a certain game, at D i.6 in enumn of pastimes and tricks (caṇḍālavaŋsa -- dhopana), a passage which shows an old corruption. Bdhgh at DA i.84 takes each word separately and expls vaŋsa as "veṇuŋ ussāpetvā kīḷanaŋ" (i. e. a game consisting in raising a bamboo; is it climbing a pole? Cp. vaŋsa -- ghatikā "a kind of game" Divy 475), against Dial. i.9 "acrobatic feats by Caṇḍālas." Cp. J iv.390 in same passage. Franke (Dīgha trsln) has "bamboo -- tricks"; his conjecture as "vaŋsa -- dhamanaŋ," playing the bamboo pipe (cp. Miln 31: "vaŋsadhamaka"), as oldest reading is to be pointed out. -> On vaŋsa in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 134.

-- āgata come down fr. father to son, hereditary Mhvs 23, 85. -- ânupālaka guarding tradition Sdhp 474 (ariya˚). -- ânurakkhaka preserving the lineage, carrying on the tradition J iv.444; Vism 99 (+paveṇi -- pālaka); DhA iii.386. -- coraka N. of a certain kind of reed (cp. coraka: plant used for perfume) J v.406 (C. for veḷuka). -- ja belonging to a race Mhvs 1, 1 (suddha˚). -- ñña born of good family A ii.27. -- dhara upholding tradition Miln 164. -- dharaṇa id. Miln 226. -- nalaka bamboo reed KhA 52, 59 (with note Sn Index p. 870: naḷaka). -- nāḷa id. Miln 102. -- rāga the colour of bamboo, a term for the veḷuriya gem J iv.141. -- vaṇṇa the veḷuriya gem Abhp 491. -- 591 -- Vaŋsika
Vaŋsika
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. vaŋsa] descended from, belonging to a family (of) S v.168 (caṇḍāla˚). Vaka
Vaka1
[Vedic vṛka, Idg. *ṷI̊qṷo = Lat. lupus, Gr. lu/kos, Lith. vilkas, Goth. wulfs=E. wolf etc.] wolf, only in poetry Sn 201; J i.336; ii.450; v.241, 302. Vaka
Vaka2
(indecl.): a root vak is given at Dhtp 7 & Dhtm 8 in meaning "ādāne," i. e. grasping, together with a root kuk as synonym. It may refer to vaka1 wolf, whereas kuk would explain koka wolf. The notion of voraciousness is prevalent in the characterization of the wolf (see all passages of vaka1, e. g. J v.302). Vakula
Vakula
[cp. *Sk. vakula] a tree (Mimusops elengi) J v.420. Vakka
Vakka1
(adj.) [Vedic vakra; the usual P. form is vanka] crooked J i.216. Vakka
Vakka2
(nt.) [Vedic vṛkka] the kidney Sn 195; Kh iii.; Miln 26; DhsA 140. In detail described as one of the 32 ākāras at Vism 255, 356; VbhA 60, 239, 356.

-- pañcaka the series of five (constituents of the body) beginning with the kidney. These are vakka, hadaya, yakana, kilomaka, pihaka: VbhA 249. Vakkanga
Vakkanga
[vakkaŋ+ga] a term for bird, poetically for sakuṇa J i.216 (tesaŋ ubhosu passesu pakkhā vankā jātā ti vakkangā C.). Vakkhati
Vakkhati
is fut. of vac: he will say, e. g. at Vin ii.190; iv.238. See vatti. Vakkala
Vakkala
[cp. BSk. valkala (e. g. Jtm 210): see vāka] 1. the bark of a tree J ii.13 (˚antara); iii.522. -- 2. a bark garment (worn by ascetics): see vakkali. Vakkalaka
Vakkalaka
("bark -- like," or "tuft"?) is at KhA 50 as the Vism reading, where KhA reads daṇḍa. The P.T.S. ed. of Vism (p. 255) reads wrongly cakkalaka. Vakkali
Vakkali
[in compn for in] wearing a garment of bark, an ascetic, lit. "barker" J ii.274 (˚sadda the sound of the bark -- garment -- wearer). See also Np. Vakkali. Vakkalika
Vakkalika
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. vakkala] in danta˚ peeling bark with one's teeth, designation of a cert. kind of ascetics DA i.271. Vagga
Vagga1
[Vedic varga, fr. vṛj; cp. Lat. volgus & vulgus ( = E. vulgar) crowd, people] 1. a company, section, group, party Vin i.58 (du˚, ti˚), 195 (dasa˚ a chapter of 10 bhikkhus). -- 2. a section or chapter of a canonical book DhA i.158 (eka -- vagga -- dvi -- vagga -- mattam pi); DhsA 27.

-- uposatha celebration (of the uposatha) in groups, "incomplete congregation" (trsln Oldenberg) Dpvs 7, 36. More likely to vagga2! -- gata following a (sectarian) party (Bdhgh identifies this with the 62 diṭṭhigatikā SnA 365) S i.187; Sn 371. -- bandha, in instr. ˚ena group by group Mhvs 32, 11. -- bandhana banded together, forming groups DhA iv.93, 94. -- vagga in crowds, confused, heaped up J vi.224; PvA 54. -- vādaka taking somebody's part Vin iii.175. -- sārin conforming to a (heretic) party Sn 371, 800, 912; Nd1 108, 329. Vagga
Vagga2
(adj. -- nt.) [vi+agga, Sk. vyagra; opposed to samagga] dissociated, separated; incomplete; at difference, dissentious Vin i.111 sq., 129, 160; iv.53 (sangha); A i.70 (parisā); ii.240. -- instr. vaggena separately, secessionally, sectariously Vin i.161; iv.37, 126.

-- ārāma fond of dissociation or causing separation M i.286; It 11 (+adhamma -- ṭṭha; trsln Seidenstücker not quite to the point: rejoicing in parties, i. e. vagga1) = Vin ii.205. -- kamma (ecclesiastical) act of an incomplete chapter of bhikkhus Vin i.315 sq. (opp. sam-> agga -- kamma). -- rata=˚ārāma. Vaggati
Vaggati
[valg, to which belong Oicel. valka to roll; Ags. wealkan = E. walk] to jump Vv 649 (expld at VvA 278 as "kadāci pade padaŋ" [better: padāpadaŋ?] nikkhipantā vagganena gamane [read: vagga -- gamanena] gacchanti); J ii.335, 404; iv.81, 343; v.473. Vaggatta
Vaggatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. vagga2] distraction, dissension, secession, sectarianism Vin i.316 (opp. samaggatta). Vaggana
Vaggana
see vaggati (ref. of Vv 649). Vaggiya
Vaggiya
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. vagga1] belonging to a group, forming a company, a party of ( -- ˚), e. g. pañcavaggiyā therā J i.57, 82; bhikkhū M i.70; ii.94; chabbaggiyā bhikkhū (the group of 6 bh.) Vin i.111 sq., 316 sq. & passim; sattarasa -- vaggiyā bhikkhū (group of 17) Vin iv.112. Vaggu
Vaggu
(adj.) [cp. Vedic valgu, fr. valg; freq. in combn with vadati "to speak lovely words"] lovely, beautiful, pleasant, usually of sound (sara) D ii.20 (˚ssara); S i.180, 190; Sn 350, 668; Vv 53, 361, 364 (˚rūpa), 5018 (girā), 636, 6410 (ghoso suvaggu), 6420, 672, 8417; Pv i.113; ii.121; iii.34; J ii.439; iii.21; v.215; Sdhp 245. The foll. synonyms are frequently given in VvA & PvA as explns of vaggu: abhirūpa, cāru, madhura, rucira, savanīya, siniddha, sundara, sobhaṇa.

-- vada of lovely speech or enunciation Sn 955 ( = madhura -- vada, pemaniya -- vada, hadayangama˚, karavīkaruda -- mañju -- ssara Nd1 446). Vagguli & ˚ī
Vagguli
& ˚ī (m. & f.) [cp. Sk. valgulī, of valg to flutter] a bat Vin ii.148; Miln 364, 404; Vism 663 (in simile); DhA iii.223.

-- rukkha a tree on which bats live Vism 74. -- vata "bat -- practice," a certain practice of ascetics J i.493; iii.235; iv.299. Vanka
Vanka
(adj. -- n.) [cp. Vedic vanka & vakra bending; also Ved. vanku moving, fluttering, walking slant; vañcati to waver, walk crooked. Cp. Lat. con -- vexus "convex," Ags. wōh "wrong," Goth. wāhs; Ohg. wanga cheek, and others. -- The Dhtp 5 gives "koṭilya" as meaning of vank. Another Pāli form is vakka (q. v.). The Prk. forms are both vakka & vanka: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 74], I. (adj.). -- 1. crooked, bent, curved M i.31 (+jimha); S iv.118 (read v -- daṇḍā); Vin ii.116 (suttā vankā honti); J i.9 (of kāja); iv.362 (˚daṇḍa), PvA 51. With ref. to a kind of vīṇā at VvA 281. -- 2. (fig.) crooked, deceitful, dishonest J iii.313 (of crows: kākānaŋ nāmaŋ C.); vi.524; Pv iv.134 (a˚); Sn 270 (probably to be read dhanka as SnA 303, = kāka). -- 3. doubtful, deceitful, deceptive, i. e. haunted Vv 843, cp. VvA 334. -- II. (m.) -- 1. a bend, nook, curve (of ponds) J ii.189; vi.333 (sahassa˚). -- 2. a hook J v.269. -- 3. a fish-hook D ii.266; Th 1, 749; J vi.437. -- On vanka in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 131.

-- angula a crooked finger A iii.6. -- âtivankin having curves upon curves (in its horns), with very crooked antlers J i.160 (said of a deer). -- gata running in bends or crooked (of a river) J i.289. -- ghasta (a fish) having swallowed the hook D ii.266; J vi.113. -- chidda a crooked hole DA i.112. -- dāṭha having a bent fang (of a boar) J ii.405. Vankaka
Vankaka
(nt.) [fr. vanka] a sort of toy: Rh. D. "toy- plough" (Dial. i.10); Kern "miniature fish-hook" (Toev. s. v.). Rh. D. derives it fr. Sk. vṛka (see P. vaka1). Bdhgh at DA i.86 takes it as "toy-plough." See D i.6; Vin ii.10 (v. l. vangaka & vankata); iii.180 (v.l. cangaka); A v.203 (T. vanka; v. l. vankaka); Miln 229. At ThA 15 vankaka is used in general meaning of "something crooked" (to explain Th 2, 11 khujja), which is specified at Th 1, 43 as sickle, plough and spade. Vankatā
Vankatā
(f.) & Vankatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. vanka] crookedness A 1 112 (tt); Dhs 1339; VbhA 494. -- 592 -- Vankeyya
Vankeyya
(adj.) [grd. formation fr. vanka] "of a crooked kind," crooked -- like; nt. twisting, crookedness, dishonesty M i.340; A iv.189; v.167. Vanga
Vanga
at DA i.223 is syn. with kaṇa and means some kind of fault or flaw. It is probably a wrong spelling for vanka. Vangati
Vangati
[cp. *Sk. vangati, to which belongs vañjula. Idg. *ṷag to bend; cp. Lat. vagor to roam, vagus = vague; Ohg. wankon to waver] to go, walk, waver; found only in Dhtp (No. 29) as root vang in meaning "gamana." Perhaps confused with valg; see vaggati. Vaca
Vaca
(nt.) a kind of root Vin i.201 = iv.35. Cp. vacattha. Vacatā
Vacatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. vaco] is found only in cpd. dub- bacatā surliness J i.159. *Vacati
*Vacati
[vac] see vatti. Vacattha
Vacattha
(nt.) a kind of root Vin i.201 = iv.35. Vacana
Vacana
(nt.) [fr. vac; Vedic vacana] 1. speaking, utter- ance, word, bidding S ii.18 (alaŋ vacanāya one says rightly); iv.195 (yathā bhūtaŋ); A ii.168; Sn 417, 699, 932, 984, 997; Miln 235; Pv ii.27; SnA 343, 386. -- mama vacanena in my name PvA 53. -- dubbacana a bad word Th 2, 418 ( = dur -- utta -- vacana ThA 268). -- vacanaŋ karoti to do one's bidding J i.222, 253. -> 2. (t. t. g.) what is said with regard to its grammatical, syntactical or semantic relation, way of speech, term, expression, as: āmantana˚ term of address KhA 167; SnA 435; paccatta˚ expression of sep. relation, i. e. the accusative case SnA 303; piya˚ term of endearment Nd2 130; SnA 536; puna˚ repetition SnA 487; vattamāna˚ the present tense SnA 16, 23; visesitabba˚ qualifying (predicative) expression VvA 13; sampadāna˚ the dative relation SnA 317. At SnA 397 (combd with linga and other terms) it refers to the "number," i. e. singular & plural.

-- attha word -- analysis or meaning of words Vism 364; SnA 24. -- kara one who does one's bidding, obedient; a servant Vv 165; 8421; J ii.129; iv.41 (vacanaŋ -- kara); v.98; PvA 134. -- khama gentle in words S ii.282; A iv.32. -- paṭivacana speech and counterspeech (i. e. reply), conversation DhA ii.35; PvA 83, 92, 117. -- patha way of saying, speech M i.126 (five ways, by which a person is judged: kālena vā akālena vā, bhūtena & a˚, saṇhena & pharusena, attha -- saŋhitena & an˚, mettacittā & dosantarā); A ii.117, 153; iii.163; iv.277, cp. D iii.236; Vv 6317 ( = vacana VvA 262); SnA 159, 375. -- bheda variance in expression, different words, kind of speech SnA 169, cp. vacanamatte bhedo SnA 471. -- vyattaya distinction or specification of expression SnA 509. -- sampaṭiggaha "taking up together," summing up (what has been said), résumé KhA 100. -- sesa the rest of the words PvA 14, 18, 103. Vacanīya
Vacanīya
(adj.) [grd. formation fr. vacana] to be spoken to, or to be answered D i.175; Sn p. 140. Vacasa
Vacasa
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [the adj. form of vaco = vacas] having speech, speaking, in cpd. saddheyya˚ of credible speech, trustworthy Vin iii.188. Vacī
Vacī
(˚ -- ) [the composition form of vaco] speech, words; rare by itself (and in this case re -- established from cpds.) and poetical, as at Sn 472 (yassa vacī kharā; expld at SnA 409 by "vācā"), 973 (cudito vacīhi = vācāhi SnA 574). Otherwise in cpds, like: -- gutta controlled in speech Sn 78. -- para one who excels in words (not in actions), i. e. a man of words J ii.390. -- parama id. D iii.185. -- bheda "kind of words," what is like speech, i. e. talk or language Vin iv.2; Miln 231 (meaning here: break of the vow of speech?); various saying, detailed speech, specification KhA 13; SnA 464, 466. See also vākya -- bheda & vācaŋ bhindati. -- viññatti intimation by language Vism 448; Miln 370; Dhs 637. -- vipphāra dilating in talk Miln 230, 370. -- samācāsa good conduct in speech M ii.114; iii.45; D iii.217. -> Often coupled (as triad) with kāya˚ & mano˚ (=in deed & in mind; where vācā is used when not compounded), e. g. in (vacī) -- kamma (+kāya˚ & mano˚) deed by word M i.373, 417; iii.207; D iii.191, 245; ˚duccarita misbehaviour in words (four of these, viz. musāvāda, pisuṇā vācā, pharusā vācā, samphappalāpa A ii.141 D iii.52, 96, 111, 214, 217; Nd1 386; Pug 60; DhA i.23; iii.417; ˚sankhāra antecedent or requisite for speech M i.301; A iii.350; S iv.293; VbhA 167; Vism 531; ˚sañcetanā intention by word VbhA 144; ˚sucarita good conduct in speech A ii.141 (the 4: sacca -- vācā, apisuṇā vācā, saṇhā vācā, mantā bhāsā). Vaco
Vaco
(& vaca) (nt.) [Vedic vacas, of vac] speech, words, saying; nom. & acc. vaco Sn 54, 356, 988, 994, 1006, 1057, 1110, 1147; J i.188; Nd1 553 ( = vacana byāpatha desanā anusandhi); Pv i.1112. instr. vacasā Vin ii.95 (dhammā bahussutā honti dhatā v. paricitā); iii.189; S i.12 (+manasā); Sn 365, 663, 890 (=vacanena Nd1 299); Vism 241; Mhvs 19, 42. -- As adj. ( -- ˚) vaca in combn with du˚ as dubbaca having bad speech, using bad language, foul -- mouthed M i.95; S ii.204; A ii.147; iii.178; v.152 sq.; J i.159; Pug 20; Sdhp 95, 197. Opp. suvaca of nice speech M i.126; A v.24 sq.; Pv iv.133 (=subbaca PvA 230). -- Cp. vacī & vācā. Vacca
Vacca
(nt.) [cp. BSk. vaccaḥ AvŚ i.254] excrement, faeces Vin ii.212; iv.229, 265; Vism 250 (a baby's); VbhA 232 (id.), 243; PvA 268. -- vaccaŋ osajjati, or karoti to ease oneself J i.3; PvA 268.

-- kuṭī (& kuṭi) a privy Vin ii.221; J i.161; ii.10; Vism 235, 259, 261; VbhA 242; DhA ii.55, 56; PvA 266, 268. -- kūpa a cesspool Vin ii.221; J v.231; Vism 344 sq.; DhA i.180. -- ghaṭa a pot for excrements, chamber utensil, commode Vin i.157 = ii.216; M i.207. -- doṇikā id. Vin ii.221. -- magga "the way of faeces," excrementary canal, opening of the rectum Vin ii.221; iii.28 sq., 35; J i.502; iv.30. -- sodhaka a privy -- cleaner, night -- man Mhvs 10, 91. Vaccasin
Vaccasin
(adj.) [cp. Sk. varcasvin & Ved. varcin, having splendour, might or energy, fr. Vedic varcas] energetic, imposing D i.114 (brahma˚; Dial. i.146 "fine in presence," cp. DA i.282). See also under brahma. -> Note. The P. root vacc is given at Dhtm 59 in meaning of "ditti," i. e. splendour. Vaccita
Vaccita
[pp. of vacceti, Denom. of vacca] wanting to ease oneself, oppressed with vacca Vin ii.212, 221. Vaccha
Vaccha1
[Vedic vatsa, lit. "one year old, a yearling"; cp. Gr. e)/tos year, Sk. vatsara id., Lat vetus old, vitulus calf; Goth. wiprus a year old lamb = Ohg. widar=E. wether] a calf Dh 284; J v.101; Vism 163 (in simile), 269 (id.; kūṭa˚ a maimed calf); DhsA 62 (with popular etym. "vadatī ti vaccho"); VvA 100, 200 (taruṇa˚). -> On vaccha in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 131.

-- giddhinī longing for her calf S iv.181. -- gopālaka a cow -- herd Vism 28. -- danta "calf -- tooth," a kind of arrow or javelin M i.429; J vi.448. -- pālaka cow -- herd Vv 512. Vaccha
Vaccha2
[ = rukkha, fr. vṛkṣa] a tree; only in mālā˚ an ornamental plant Vin ii.12; iii.179; Vism 172; DhA ii.109. Vacchaka
Vacchaka
[Demin. fr. vaccha1] a (little) calf J iii.444; v.93, 433; Miln 282 (as go -- vacchaka).

-- pālaka a cow -- herd J iii.444. -- sālā cow -- shed, cowpen J v.93; Miln 282. Vacchatara
Vacchatara
[fr. vaccha; the compar. suffix in meaning "sort of, -- like." Cp. Sk. vatsatara] a weaned calf, bullock D i.127, 148; S i.75; A ii.207; iv.41 sq.; Pug 56; DA i.294. -- f. vacchatarī D i.127; S i.75; Vin i.191; Pug 56. -- 593 -- Vacchati
Vacchati
is fut. of vasati to dwell. Vacchara
Vacchara
[cp. Class. Sk. vatsara] year Sdhp 239. See the usual saŋvacchara. Vacchala
Vacchala
(adj.) [cp. Sk. vatsala] affectionate, lit. "loving her calf" ThA 148 (Ap v.64). Vaja
Vaja
[Vedic vraja: see vajati] a cattle -- fold, cow -- pen A iii.393; J ii.300; iii.270, 379; Vism 166, 279; DhA i.126, 396. -- giribbaja a (cattle or sheep) run on the mountain J iii.479; as Npl. at Sn 408. Vajati
Vajati
[Vedic vraj, cp. Ved. vraja ( = P. vaja) & vṛjana enclosure=Av. vərəƶə̄na -- , with which cp. Gr. ei)/rgnumi to enclose, ei(rgmo/s, Lat. vergo to turn; Gaelic fraigh hurdle; Ags. wringan=E. wring=Ger. ringen, E. wrinkle =Ger. renken, and many others, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. vergo. -- The Dhtp (59) defines vaj (together with aj) by "gamana"] to go, proceed, get to (acc.), lit. to turn to (cp. vṛj, vṛṇakti, pp. vṛkta, which latter coincides with vṛtta of vṛt in P. vatta: see vatta1 & cp. vajjeti to avoid, vajjita, vajjana etc.) Sn 121, 381, 729 (jātimaraṇa -- saŋsāraŋ), 1143; J iii.401; iv.103 (nirayaŋ); Pv iv.172 (Pot. vajeyya); Nd2 423 (=gacchati kamati); Mhvs 11, 35 (imper. vaja as v. l.; T. reads bhaja). See cpds. anubbajati, upabb˚, pabb˚, paribb˚. Vajalla
Vajalla
see rajo -- vajalla. Vajira
Vajira1
[cp. Vedic vajira, Indra's thunderbolt; Idg. *ṷeĝ = Sk. vaj, cp. Lat. vegeo to thrive, vigeo>vigour; Av. vaƶra; Oicel. vakr=Ags. wacor=Ger. wacker; also E. wake etc. See also vājeti] a thunderbolt; usually with ref. to Sakka's (=Indra's) weapon D i.95=M i.231 (ayasa); Th 1, 419; J i.134 (vajira -- pūritā viya garukā kucchi "as if filled with Sakka's thunderbolt." Dutoit takes it in meaning vajira2 and trsls "with diamonds"); SnA 225 (˚āvudha the weapon of Sakka).

-- pāṇin having a thunderbolt in his hand (N. of a yakkha) D i.95 = M. i.231. Vajira
Vajira2
(m. & nt.) [cp. Sk. vajra = vajira1] a diamond A i.124 (˚ûpamacitta)=Pug 30; Dh 161; J iv.234; Miln 118, 267, 278; Mhvs 30, 95; KhA 110 (˚sankhāta -- kāya); DhA i.387 (˚panti row of diamonds), 392 sq. Vajuḷa
Vajuḷa
[cp. Sk. vañjula. Given as vañjula at Abhp 553] N. of several plants, a tree (the ratan: Halāyudha 2, 46) J v.420. See also vangati. Vajja
Vajja1
(nt.) [grd. of vajjati, cp. Sk. varjya] that which should be avoided, a fault, sin D ii.38; S i.221; Vin ii.87 (thūla˚ a grave sin); A i.47, 98; iv.140; Ps i.122; Dh 252; VbhA 342 (syn. with dosa and garahitabba); KhA 23 (paṇṇatti˚ & pakati˚), 24 (id.), 190 (loka˚); DA i.181 ( = akusala -- dhamma). Freq. in phrase: aṇumattesu vajjesu bhaya -- dassāvin "seeing a source of fear even in the slightest sins" D i.63; S v.187 and passim. -- ˚dassin finding fault Dh 76 (expld in detail at DhA ii.107). -- anavajja & sāvajja, the relation of which to vajja is doubtful, see avajja. Vajja
Vajja2
(adj. -- nt.) [cp. Sk. vādya, grd. of vad] 1. "to be said," i. e. speaking D i.53 (sacca˚ = sacca -- vacana DA i.160). See also mosa -- vajja. -- 2. "to be sounded," i. e. musical instrument J i.500 (˚bheri). Vajja, vajjā, vajjuŋ
Vajja,
vajjā, vajjuŋ: Pot. of vad, see vadati. Vajjati
Vajjati1
[vṛj, Vedic vṛṇakti & varjati to turn; in etym. related to vajati. Dhtp 547: "vajjane"] to turn etc.; only as Pass. form vajjati [in form = Ved. vṛjyate] to be avoided, to be excluded from (abl.) Miln 227; KhA 160 (˚itabba, in pop. etym. of Vajjī). -- Caus. vajjeti (*varjayati) to avoid, to abstain from, renounce Sdhp 10, 11, 200. Cp. pari˚, vi˚. Vajjati
Vajjati2
Pass of vad, see vadati. Vajjana
Vajjana
(nt.) [fr. vajjati] avoidance, shunning Vism 5 (opp. sevana); DhA iii.417. Vajjanīya
Vajjanīya
(adj.) [grd. formation fr. vajjati1] to be avoided, to be shunned; improper Miln 166 (i. e. bad or uneven parts of the wood), 224. Vajjavant
Vajjavant
(adj.) [vajja1+vant] sinful S iii.194. Vajjha
Vajjha
(adj.) [grd. of vadhati] to be killed, slaughtered or executed; object of execution; meriting death Vin iv.226; Sn 580 (go vajjho viya); J ii.402 (cora); vi.483 ( = vajjhappatta cora C.); Vism 314; KhA 27. -- avajjha not to be slain, scathless Sn 288 (brāhmaṇa); Miln 221=J v.49; Miln 257 (˚kavaca invulnerable armour).

-- ghāta a slaughterer, executioner Th 2, 242 (cp. ThA 204). -- cora a robber (i. e. criminal) waiting to be executed PvA 153. -- paṭaha -- bheri the execution drum PvA 4. -- bhāvapatta condemned to death J i.439. -- sūkariyo (pl.) sows which had no young, barren sows (read vañjha˚!) J ii.406. Vajjhaka
Vajjhaka
(adj.) ( -- ˚) = vajjha DhsA 239. Vajjhā
Vajjhā
(f.) [cp. Sk. vadhyā] execution; only in cpd. (as vajjha˚) ˚ppatta condemned to death, about to be executed Vin iv.226; J ii.119, 264; vi.483. Vajjheti
Vajjheti
[Denom. fr. vajjha] to destroy, kill J vi.527 (siro vajjhayitvāna). Kern, Toev. s. v. vaddh˚ proposes reading vaddhayitvāna (of a root vardh to cut), cutting off is perhaps better. The expression is hapax legomenon. Vañcati
Vañcati
[vañc: see etym. under vanka. -- The Dhtp distinguishes two roots vañc, viz. "gamane" (46) and "palambhane" (543), thus giving the lit. & the fig. meanings] 1. to walk about J i.214 (inf. ˚ituŋ = pādacāra -- gamanena gantuŋ C.). -- 2. Caus. vañceti to cheat, deceive, delude, elude D i.50; Sn 100, 129, 356; J iii.420 (aor. avañci=vañcesi C.); vi.403 (˚etu -- kāma); Pv iii.42; Miln 396; Mhvs 25, 69 (tomaraŋ avañcayi). -> pp. vañcita. Vañcana
Vañcana
(nt.) [fr. vañc, cp. Epic Sk. vañcana] deception, delusion, cheating, fraud, illusion D i.5; iii.176; A ii.209; Sn 242; Pv iii.95; Pug 19; J iv.435; DhsA 363 (for māyā Dhs 1059); DA i.79; DhA iii.403; PvA 193. -- vañcana in lit. meaning of vañcati 1 is found in avañcana not tottering J i.214. Vañcanika
Vañcanika
(adj.) [fr. vañcana] deceiving; a cheat D iii.183; Th 1, 940; Miln 290. Vañcaniya
Vañcaniya
(adj.) [grd. formation fr. vañcana, cp. MVastu ii.145: vañcanīya] deceiving, deluding Th 2, 490. Vañcita
Vañcita
[pp. of vañceti] deceived, cheated J i.287 (vañcit' ammi = vañcitā amhi). Vañjula
Vañjula
see vajuḷa. Vañjha
Vañjha
(adj.) [cp. Epic & later Sk. bandhya] barren, sterile D i.14, 56; M i.271; S ii.29 (a˚); iv.169; v.202 (a˚); Pv iii.45 (a˚ = anipphala C.); J ii.406 (˚sūkariyo: so read for vajjha˚); Miln 95; Vism 508 (˚bhāva); DhA i.45 (˚itthi); DA i.105; PvA 31, 82; VvA 149; Sdhp 345 (a˚). Vaṭa
Vaṭa
[cp. Epic Sk. vaṭa. A root vaṭ, not connected with this vaṭa is given at Dhtm 106 in meaning "veṭhana": see vaṭaŋsa] the Indian fig tree J i.259 (˚rukkha); iii.325; Mhvs 6, 16; DhA i.167 (˚rukkha); PvA 113. Vaṭa
Vaṭa
at Pug 45, 46 (tuccho pi hito pūro pi vaṭo) read ti pihito pūro vivaṭo. See vivaṭa. -- 594 -- Vaṭaŋsa
Vaṭaŋsa
[for avaṭaŋsa: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 661; cp. Sk. avataŋsa with t; Prk. vaaŋsa] a kind of head ornament, perhaps ear -- ring or garland worn round the forehead Mhvs 11, 28 (C. expls as "kaṇṇapilandhanaŋ vaṭaŋsakan ti vuttaŋ hoti"). Usually as vaṭaŋsaka Vin ii.10; iii.180; Th 1, 523; Vv 385 (expld as "ratanamayā kaṇṇikā" (pl.) at VvA 174); J vi.488; VvA 178, 189, 209. -- Note. The root vaṭ given as "veṭhana" at Dhtm 106 probably refers to vaṭaŋsa. Vaṭaka
Vaṭaka
[cp. *Sk. vaṭaka, fr. vaṭa rope] a small ball or thickening, bulb, tuber; in muḷāla˚ the (edible) tuber of the lotus J vi.563 (C. kaṇḍaka). Vaṭākara
Vaṭākara
[probably distorted by metathesis from Sk. vaṭārakā. Fr. vaṭa rope. On etym. of the latter see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. volvo] a rope, cable J iii.478 (nāvā sa -- vaṭākarā). Vaṭuma
Vaṭuma
(nt.) [cp. Vedic vartman, fr. vṛt] a road, path D ii.8; S iv.52 (chinna˚); J iii.412; Vism 123 (sa˚ & a˚). Cp. ubbaṭuma & parivaṭuma. Vaṭṭa
Vaṭṭa1
(adj. -- nt.) [pp. of vṛt, Sk. vṛtta in meaning of "round" as well as "happened, become" etc. The two meanings have become differentiated in Pāli: vaṭṭa is not found in meaning of "happened." All three Pāli meanings are specialized, just as the pres. vaṭṭati is specialized in meaning "behoves"] 1. round, circular; (nt.) circle PvA 185 (āyata+); KhA 50 (˚nāli). See cpd. ˚anguli. -- 2. (fig.) "rolling on," the "round" of existences, cycle of transmigrations, saŋsāra, evolution ( = involution) (as forward or ascending circle of existences, without implying a teleological idea, in contrast to vivaṭṭa "rolling back" or devolution, i. e. a new (descending) cycle of existence in a new aeon with inverted [vi -- ] motion, so to speak) S iii.63; iv.53 (pariyādiṇṇa˚), cp. M iii.118; Th 1, 417 (sabba˚: "all constant rolling on" trsln); SnA 351 (=upādāna); DhsA 238. -- There are 3 vaṭṭas, (te -- bhūmaka vaṭṭa, see also tivaṭṭa) embracing existence in the stages of kamma -- vaṭṭa, kilesa˚ and vipāka˚, or circle of deed, sin & result (found only in Commentarial literature): KhA 189; SnA 510 (tebhūmaka˚); DhA i.289 (kilesa˚); iv.69 (tebhūmaka˚). See also Māra; and ˚dukkha, ˚vivaṭṭa below. -- 3. "what has been proffered," expenditure, alms (as t. t.) J vi.333 (dāna˚ alms -- gift); DhA ii.29 (pāka˚ cooked food as alms); VvA 222 (id.); Mhvs 32, 61 (alms -- pension); 34, 64 (salāka -- vaṭṭabhatta). -- Cp. vi˚.

-- anguli a rounded (i. e. well -- formed) finger; adj. having round fingers Vv 6413 ( = anupubbato v., i. e. regularly formed, VvA 280); J v.207, 215. -- angulika same as last J v.204. -- ânugata accompanied by (or affected with) saŋsāra J i.91 (dhana). -- ûpaccheda destruction of the cycle of rebirths A ii.34=It 88; A iii.35; Vism 293. -- kathā discussion about saŋsāra Vism 525; DA i.126; VbhA 133. -- kāra a worker in brass. The meaning of vaṭṭa in this connection is not clear; the same vaṭṭa occurs in ˚loha ("round" metal?). Kern, Toev. s. v. compares it with Sk. vardhra leather strap, taking vaṭṭa as a corruption of vaḍḍha, but the connection brass>leather seems far -- fetched. It is only found at Miln 331. -- dukkha the "ill" of transmigration (a Commentary expression) Vism 315; DhA iv.149; VvA 116. -- paṭighātaka(ŋ) (vivaṭṭaŋ) (a devolution) destroying evolution, i. e. salvation from saŋsāra SnA 106. -- bhaya fear of saŋsāra VbhA 256. -- mūla the root of saŋsāra DhA iii.278. -- vivaṭṭa (1) evolving and devolving; going round and back again, i. e. all round (a formation after the manner of reduplicative cpds. like cuṇṇa -- vicuṇṇa in intensive -- iterative meaning), ˚vasena in direct and inverse succession, all round, completely J i.75. Cp. also vatta -- paṭivatta. -- (2) saŋsāra in ascending and descending lines, evolution ("involution") and devolution, or one round of transmigration and the other. It is dogmatically defined at Nett 113 as "vaṭṭaŋ saŋsāro vivaṭṭaŋ nibbānaŋ" (similarly, opposed to vaṭṭa at DA i.126) which is however not the general meaning, the vivaṭṭa not necessarily meaning a nibbāna stage. See SnA 106 (quoted above); VvA 68. We have so far not found any passage where it might be interpreted in the comprehensive sense as meaning "the total round of existences, " after the fashion of cpds. like bhavâbhava. -- loha "round metal" (?), one of the 3 kittima -- lohāni mentioned at VbhA 63 (kaŋsa˚, vaṭṭa˚, ārakūṭa); also at Miln 267 (with kāḷa˚, tamba˚ & kaŋsa˚, where in the trsln Rh. D. does not give a def. expln of the word). Vaṭṭa
Vaṭṭa2
("rained"): see abhivaṭṭa and vaṭṭha (vuṭṭha); otherwise only at DhA ii.265. Vaṭṭaka
Vaṭṭaka
(nt.) [fr. vṛt, or P. vaṭṭa] a cart, in haṭṭha˚ hand- cart Vin ii.276. Vaṭṭakā
Vaṭṭakā
(f.) (& vaṭṭaka˚) [cp. Sk. vartakā & Ved. vartikā] the quail M iii.159 sq.; J i.172, 208 (vaṭṭaka -- luddaka); iii.312; DhA iii.175 (loc. pl. vaṭṭakesu). -- The Vaṭṭaka -- jātaka at J i.208 sq. (cp. J v.414). Vaṭṭati
Vaṭṭati
[Vedic vṛt. The representative of vattati ( = Sk. vartate) in specialized meaning. The regular meaning of *vartate (with vaṭṭana), viz. "turning round," is attached to vaṭṭati only in later Pāli & sometimes doubtful. It is found also in the Caus. vaṭṭeti. The defn of vaṭṭ (literal meaning) at Dhtp 89 is "vaṭṭana," and at Dhtm 107 "āvattana"] 1. to turn round, to move on: doubtful in "kattha vaṭṭaŋ na vaṭṭati" S i.15; preferably with v. l. as vaḍḍhati. -- Caus. I. vaṭṭeti to turn or twist J i.338 (rajjuŋ); to cause to move or go on (in weaving; tasaraŋ v. to speed the shuttle) SnA 265, 266. Should we read vaḍḍheti? Cp. āvaṭṭeti. -- Caus. II. vaṭṭāpeti to cause to turn J i.422. -- 2. to be right or fit or proper, to behove; it ought to (with infin.); with instr. of person who ought to do this or that, e. g. sīlācāra -- sampannena bhavituŋ vaṭṭati J i.188; kataññunā bhavituŋ v. J i.122. -- See e. g. J i.376; ii.352, 406; Miln 9; Vism 184; DhA ii.38, 90, 168; SnA 414 (vattuŋ to say); VvA 63, 69, 75; PvA 38 (dātuŋ). The noun to vaṭṭati is vatta (not vaṭṭa!). Vaṭṭana
Vaṭṭana
(nt.) [fr. vṛt, vaṭṭati] turning round Dhtp 89 (in defn of vaṭṭati). Cp. āvaṭṭana. Vaṭṭanā
Vaṭṭanā
(f.) [fr. vṛt] in ˚valī is a line or chain of balls ("rounds," i. e. rings or spindles). Reading somewhat doubtful. It occurs at M i.80, 81 (seyyathā v. evaŋ me piṭṭhi -- kaṇṭako unnat' âvanato hoti; Neumann trsls "wie eine Kugelkette wurde mein Rückgrat mit den hervor -- und zurücktretenden Wirbeln") and at J v.69 (spelt "vaṭṭhanā -- vali -- sankāsā piṭṭhi te ninnat' unnatā," with C. expln "piṭṭhika -- ṭṭhāne āvuṇitvā ṭhāpitā vaṭṭhanā -- vali -- sadisā"). The J trsln by Dutoit gives "einer Reihe von Spinnwirteln dein Rücken gleicht im Auf und Nieder"; the E. tsrln has "Thy back like spindles in a row, a long unequal curve doth show." Vaṭṭani
Vaṭṭani
(f.) [cp. Vedic vartani circumference of a wheel, course] a ring, round, globe, ball Th 2, 395 (vaṭṭani -- riva; expld at ThA 259 as "lākhāya guḷikā viya," trsln Sisters 154: "but a little ball"). Vaṭṭi
Vaṭṭi
(f.) [represents both Epic Sk. varti and vṛtti, differ- entiated derivations from vṛt, combining the meanings of "turning, rolling" and "encircling, round"] 1. a wick S ii.86 = iii.126=iv.213; J i.243 (dīpa˚); DhA 393; ThA 72 (Ap. v.45: nom. pl. vaṭṭīni); Mhvs 32, 37; 34, 35. -- 2. enclosure, lining, film, skin Vism 258 (anta˚ entrails), 262 (udara˚); J i.260 (anta˚, so read for ˚vaddhi). -- 3. edge, rim, brim, cireumference Vin ii.120 (aggala˚ of the door), 148 (id.); S iii.141 (patta˚ of a vase or bowl); iv.168 (id.); DhA ii.124 (nemi˚). Often as mukha -- vaṭṭi outer rim, border, lining, e. g. cakkavāḷa˚ J i.64, 72; DhA i.319; iii.209; patt˚ J v.38; pāsāda˚ DhsA 107. -- 4. strip, fringe Vin ii.266 (dussa˚); J v.73 (camma˚); Mhvs 11, 15. -- 5. a sheath, bag, pod J iii.366 (tiṇa˚); Mhvs 26, 17 (marica˚ red pepper pod); DhA iv.203 (reṇu˚). -- 6. a lump, ball DhA iii.117 (pubba˚, of matter). -- 7. rolling forth or along, a gush (of water), pour J i.109 (or to vṛṣ?). -- 595 -- Vaṭṭikā
Vaṭṭikā
(f.) [vaṭṭi+kā, cp. Class. Sk. vartikā] 1. a wick Mhvs 30, 94. -- 2. a brim Mhvs 18, 28. -- 3. a pod Mhvs 26, 16 (marica˚). Vaṭṭin
Vaṭṭin
( -- ˚) (adj.) in muṇḍa˚ porter (?) is not clear. It is a dern fr. vaṭṭi in one or the other of its meanings. Found only at Vin ii.137, where it is expld by Bdhgh as "veṭṭhin." It may belong to vaṭaŋsa or vaṭa (rope): cp. Dhtm 106 "veṭhana" for vaṭaŋsa. Vaṭṭula
Vaṭṭula
(adj.) [fr. vṛt, cp. late Sk. vartula] circular Abhp 707. Vaṭṭha
Vaṭṭha
[pp. of vassati, for the usual vuṭṭha] rained, in nava˚ newly rained upon DhA i.19 (bhūmi). Vaṭhara
Vaṭhara
(adj.) [cp. BSk. vaṭhara MVastu ii.65. A root vaṭh is given at Dhtm 133 in meaning "thūlattane bhave" i. e. bulkiness] bulky, gross Abhp 701. Vaḍḍha
Vaḍḍha
(nt.) [fr. vṛdh] wealth, riches J iii.131 (vaḍḍhaŋ vaḍḍhataŋ, imper.). Or should we read vaṭṭa? -> Vaḍḍha is used as Np. at KhA 119, perhaps in meaning "prosperous." Vaḍḍhaka
Vaḍḍhaka
[fr. vaḍḍheti] 1. augmenting, increasing, i. e. looking after the welfare of somebody or something, one who superintends J i.2 (rāsi˚ the steward of an estate). -- 2. a maker of, in special sense (cīvara˚ robecutter, perhaps fr. vardh to cut: see vaddheti) a tailor J i.220. Vaḍḍhaki
Vaḍḍhaki
(& ˚ī) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. vardhaki & vardha- kin; perhaps from vardh to cut: see vaddheti] a carpenter, builder, architect, mason. On their craft and guilds see Fick, Sociale Gliederung 181 sq.; Mrs. Rh. D. Cambridge Hist. Ind. i.206. -- The word is specially characteristic of the Jātakas and other popular (later) literature J i.32, 201, 247; ii.170; vi.332 sq., 432; Ap. 51; DhA i.269; iv.207; Vism 94; PvA 141; Mhbv 154. -- iṭṭha˚ a stonemason Mhvs 35, 102; nagara˚ the city architect Miln 331, 345; brāhmaṇa˚ a brahmin carpenter J iv.207; mahā˚ chief carpenter, master builder Vism 463. In metaphor taṇhā the artificer lust DhA iii.128.

-- gāma a carpenter village J ii.18, 405; iv.159. Vaḍḍhati
Vaḍḍhati
[Vedic vardhati, vṛdh, cp. Av. vərədaiti to increase. To this root belongs P. uddha "high up" ( = Gr. orqo/s straight). Defd at Dhtp 109 simply as "vaḍḍhane"] primary meaning "to increase" (trs. & intrs.); hence: to keep on, to prosper, to multiply, to grow S i.15 (read vaḍḍh˚ for vaṭṭ˚); ii.206 (vaṇṇena); iv.73, 250; A v.249 (paññāya); Sn 329 (paññā ca sutañ ca); J iii.131 (porāṇaŋ vaḍḍhaŋ vaḍḍhataŋ, imper. med. 3rd sg.); v.66 (sadā so vaḍḍhate rājā sukka -- pakkhe va candimā); Pv i.12 (dātā puññena v.); Pug 71; Miln 9; Mhvs 7, 68 (putta -- dhītāhi vaḍḍhitvā having numerous sons & daughters); 22, 73 (ubho vaḍḍhiŋsu dārakā, grew up); SnA 319; PvA 94. -- ppr. vaḍḍhamāna (1) thriving KhA 119 (read as Vaḍḍh˚, Np.); -- (2) increasing J i.199 (putta -- dhītāhi); Mhvs 23, 34 (˚chāyāyaŋ as the shadows increased). -- See also pari˚. -- pp. vaḍḍha, vaddha, vuḍḍha, vuddha, buḍḍha. -- Caus. I. vaḍḍheti, in many shades of meaning, all based upon the notion of progressive motion. Thus to be translated in any of the foll. senses: to increase, to make move on (cp. vv. ll. vaṭṭeti), to bring on to, to further; to take an interest in, to indulge in, practise; to be busy with, cause to prosper; to arrange; to make for; and in a general sense "to make" (cp. derivation vaḍḍhaka "maker," i. e. tailor; vaḍḍhaki id., i. e. carpenter; vaḍḍhana, etc.). The latter development into "make" is late. -- 1. to increase, to raise Sn 275 (rajaŋ); DA i.115; Mhvs 29, 66 (mangalaŋ to raise the chant); PvA 168 (+brūheti). -- 2. to cultivate (vipassanaŋ insight) J i.117 (aor. ˚esi); PvA 14. -- 3. to rear, to bring up Mhvs 35, 103 (aor. vaḍḍhesi). -- 4. (with ref. to food) to get ready, arrange, serve in (loc.) J iii.445 (pātiyā on the dish); iv.67 (karoṭiyaŋ), 391. -- 5. to exalt J i.338 (akulīne vaḍḍhessati). -- 6. to participate in, to practise, attend to, to serve (acc.) S ii.109 (tanhaŋ); A ii.54 (kaṭasiŋ to serve the cemetery, i. e. to die again and again: see refs. under kaṭasi); Vism 111 (kasiṇaŋ), 152. -- 7. to make move on, to set into motion (for vaṭṭeti?), in tasaraŋ v. SnA 265, 266. -- 8. to take up Mhvs 26, 10 (kuntaŋ). -- pp. vaḍḍhita. -- Caus. II. vaḍḍhāpeti: 1. to cause to be enlarged Mhvs 35, 119. -> 2. to cause to be brought up or reared J i.455. -- 3. to have attended to Vin ii.134 (massuŋ). -- 4. to cause to be made up (of food) J iv.68. Vaḍḍhana
Vaḍḍhana
(nt. & adj.) [fr. vaḍḍheti; see also vaddhana] 1. increasing, augmenting, fostering; increase, enlargement, prolongation M i.518 (hāyana˚ decrease & increase); J iii.422 (kula˚, spelling ddh); Mhvs 35, 73 (āyussa); DhsA 406; PvA 31; Miln 320 (bala˚ strengthincreasing); Dhtp 109; Sdhp 361. -- 2. indulgence in, attachment; serving, practising Sn 1084 (takka˚); J i.146 (kaṭasi˚, q. v. & cp. vaḍḍheti 6); Vism 111 (˚âvaḍḍhana), 152, 320. Here belong the phrases raja˚ & loka˚. -- 3. arrangement J vi.11 (paṭhavi -- vaḍḍhanaka -- kamma the act of attending to, i. e. smoothing the ground). -- 4. serving for, enhancing, favouring Pv iii.36 (rati -- nandi˚). -- 5. potsherd [connected with vardh? See vaddheti] J iii.226 (C. kaṭhalika; uncertain). -- 6. a kind of garment, as puṇṇa˚ (full of costliness? but perhaps not connected with vaḍḍh˚ at all) Mhvs 23, 33 & 37 (where C. expls: anagghāni evaŋnāmikāni vattha -- yugāni). Cp. vaḍḍhamāna. Vaḍḍhanaka
Vaḍḍhanaka
(adj.) [fr. vaḍḍhana, cp. vaḍḍheti 4] serving, in f. ˚ikā a serving (of food), a dish (bhatta˚) DhA 188 (so read for vaḍḍhinikā). Vaḍḍhamāna
Vaḍḍhamāna
(nt.) at Dpvs xi.33 is probably equivalent to vaḍḍhana (6) in special sense at Mhvs 23, 33, and designates a (pair of) special (ly costly) garment(s). One might think of meaning vaḍḍheti [BSk. vardhate] "to bid higher (at a sale)," as in Divy 403; AvŚ i.36, and explain as "that which causes higher bidding," i. e. very precious. The passage is doubtful. It may simply mean "costly" (belonging to nandiyāvaṭṭaŋ); or is it to be read as vaṭṭamāna? Vaḍḍhamānaka
Vaḍḍhamānaka
(adj.) [ppr. of vaḍḍheti+ka] growing, increasing, getting bigger; only in phrase vaḍḍhamānaka -- cchāyāya (loc.) with growing shade, as the shadows lengthened, when evening drew near DhA i.96, 416; ii.79; Mhvs 19, 40. Vaḍḍhi
Vaḍḍhi
(f.) [fr. vṛdh, Vedic vṛddhi refreshment etc., which is differentiated in Pāli into vuddhi & vaḍḍhi] 1. increase, growth (cp. Cpd. 251 sq.) S iv.250 (ariya˚); J ii.426 ( = phāti); Miln 109 (guṇa˚); DhsA 327; DhA iii.335 (avaḍḍhi= parihāni). -- 2. welfare, good fortune, happiness J v.101; vi.330. -- 3. (as t. t.) profit, interest (on money, esp. loans) Th 2, 444 (=iṇa -- vaḍḍhi ThA 271); DA i.212, 270; VbhA 256 (in simile); SnA 179 (˚gahaṇa). Vaḍḍhika
Vaḍḍhika
(adj.) [fr. vaḍḍhi] leading to increase, augmenting, prosperous Miln 351 (ekanta˚, equal to aparihā- niya). -- 596 -- Vaḍḍhita
Vaḍḍhita
[pp. of vaḍḍheti] 1. increased, augmented; raised, enlarged; big Th 1, 72 (su -- su˚); DA i.115; DhsA 188, 364; J v.340 (˚kāya). -- 2. grown up DhA i.126. -> 3. brought up, reared J i.455. -- 4. served, indulged, supplied: see kaṭasi˚ (S ii.178 e. g.). Vaṇa
Vaṇa
(nt. & m.) [cp. Vedic vraṇa; Serbian rana; Obulg. var̄e, both "wound"] a wound, sore Vin i.205 (m.), 218 (vaṇo rūḷho); iii.36 (m; angajāte), 117 (angajāte); S iv.177 (vaṇaŋ ālimpeti); A v.347 sq., 350 sq.; 359; Nd2 540; PugA 212 (purāṇa -- vaṇa -- sadisa -- citto); DhA ii.165 (˚ŋ bandhati to bandage); VvA 77; PvA 80; Sdhp 395. On vaṇa in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 132.

-- ālepana putting ointment on a sore SnA 58 (in sim.). -- coḷaka a rag for dressing a wound Vism 342; VbhA 361. -- paṭikamma restoration or healing of a wound DhA ii.164. -- paṭicchādana dressing of a wound DhA i.375. -- paṭṭa id., bandage SnA 100. -- bandhana id. Vin i.205. -- mukha the opening of a sore A iv.386 (nava ˚āni); VvA 77 (id.). Vaṇi
Vaṇi
(f.) [fr. van to desire] wish, request Ud 53; J iv.404 ( = yācana C.); cp. J.P.T.S. 1891, 18 See vana2 & cp. vaṇeti. Vaṇijjā
Vaṇijjā
(f.) [Vedic vaṇijyā, fr. vaṇij˚ (vaṇik) merchant, cp. vāṇija & vaṇibbaka] trade, trading M ii.198; Sn 404 (payojaye dhammikaŋ so vaṇijjaŋ); A ii.81 sq.; Pv i.56 (no trade among the Petas); J i.169; PvA 47 (tela˚); Sdhp 332, 390. -- Five trades must not be carried on by lay followers of the Buddha, viz. sattha˚ trade in swords, satta˚ in living beings, maŋsa˚ in meat, majja˚ in intoxicants, visa˚ in poisons A iii.208, quoted at DA i.235 and SnA 379. Vaṇita
Vaṇita
[pp. of *vaṇeti, Denom. fr. vaṇa] wounded, bruised Pv ii.24; J i.150; Sdhp 395. Vaṇippattha
Vaṇippattha
[vaṇik+patha, in meaning patha 2] trading, trade Vin i.229 = D ii.87= Ud 88 (with ref. to Pāṭaliputta). Vaṇibbaka
Vaṇibbaka
[vaṇibba+ka. The form *vaṇibba, according to Geiger, P.Gr. § 461, distorted fr. vaṇiya, thus "travelling merchant, wayfarer." Spelling wavers between vaṇibb˚ & vanibb˚. The BSk. form is vanīpaka, e. g. at AvŚ i.248; ii.37; Divy 83; occurring also as vaṇīyaka at Divy 83] a wayfarer, beggar, pauper Sn 100 (ṇ); J iv.403, 406 (n); v.172 ( = bhojaputta C.; n); vi.232 (n); DA i.298 (ṇ); PvA 78 (n), 112 (n); VvA 5 (n). Often combd with similar terms in phrase kapaṇ' addhika [iddhika] vaṇibbaka -- yācakā indigents, tramps, wayfarers & beggars, e. g. D i.137 (ṇ); Miln 204 (ṇ); DhA i.105 (ṇ). Other spurious forms are vaṇidīpaka PvA 120; vanīpaka Cp. i.49. Vaṇibbin
Vaṇibbin
(adj. -- n.) [fr. *vaṇibba] begging, a beggar, tramp J iii.312; iv.410 ( = yācanto C.). Spelling at both places n. See also vanin. Vaṇīyati
Vaṇīyati
see vanīyati. Vaṇeti
Vaṇeti
[Caus. of van (see etym. under vana2), cp. vaṇi (vani). It may be derived directly fr. vṛ, vṛṇāti = P. vuṇāti, as shown by vaṇimhase. A Denom. fr. vani is vanīyati] to wish, desire, ask, beg J v.27 (spelt vaṇṇeti; C. expls as vāreti icchati); pres. med. 1st pl. vaṇimhase (=Sk. vṛṇīmahe) J ii.137 (= icchāma C.). As vanayati at KhA 111 (vanayatī ti vanaŋ). Vaṇṭa
Vaṇṭa
(nt.) [Epic Sk. vṛnta] a stalk S iii.155 = D i.73 (˚chinna with its stalk cut); J i.70; Ap 62; Vism 356 (in comparison); SnA 296; VbhA 60; DhA ii.42; iv.112; VvA 44. avaṇṭa (of thana, the breast of a woman) not on a stalk (i. e. well -- formed, plump) J v.155. So to be trsld here, although vaṇṭa as medical term is given in BR with meaning "nipple." -- See also tālavaṇṭa Vaṇṭaka
Vaṇṭaka
(adj:) ( -- ˚) [vaṇṭa+ka] having a stalk; a˚ not fastened on stalks J v.203. Vaṇṭati
Vaṇṭati
[dial. Sk. vaṇṭ] to partition, share; is given as root vaṇṭ at Dhtp 92, 561 and Dhtm 787 in meaning "vibhājana." -- Another root vaṇṭ is found at Dhtm 108 with unmeaning expln "vaṇṭ' atthe." Vaṇṭika
Vaṇṭika
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [vaṇṭa+ika] having a stalk; only in phrase ekato˚ & ubhato˚ having a stalk on one or on both sides (of a wreath) Vin ii.10; iii.180; DhA i.419. Vaṇṇa
Vaṇṇa
[cp. Vedic varṇa, of vṛ: see vuṇāti. Customary definition as "vaṇṇane" at Dhtp 572] appearance etc. (lit. "cover, coating"). There is a considerable fluctuation of meaning, especially between meanings 2, 3, 4. One may group as follows. -- 1. colour Sn 447 (meda˚); S v.216 (chavi˚ of the skin); A iii.324 (sankha˚); Th 1, 13 (nīl'abbha˚); Vv 4510 (danta˚ = ivory white); Pv iv.39; DhA ii.3 (aruṇa˚); SnA 319 (chavi˚); VvA 2 (vicitta˚); PvA 215. Six colours are usually enumd as vaṇṇā, viz. nīla pīta lohitaka odāta mañjeṭṭha pabhassara Ps i.126; cp. the 6 colours under rūpa at Dhs 617 (where kāḷaka for pabbassara); J i.12 (chabbaṇṇa -- buddha -- rasmiyo). Groups of five see under pañca 3 (cp. J i.222). -- dubbaṇṇa of bad colour, ugly S i.94; A v.61; Ud 76; Sn 426; It 99; Pug 33; VvA 9; PvA 32, 68. Opp. suvaṇṇa of beautiful colour, lovely A v.61; It 99. Also as term for "silver." -- As t. t. in descriptions or analyses (perhaps better in meaning "appearance") in abl. vaṇṇato by colour, with saṇṭhānato and others: Vism 184 ("kāḷa vā odāta vā manguracchavi vā"), 243=VbhA 225; Nett 27. -- 2. appearance S i.115 (kassaka -- vaṇṇaŋ abhinimminitvā); J i.84 (id. with māṇavaka˚); Pv ii.110 (=chavi -- vaṇṇa PvA 71); iii.32 (kanakassa sannibha); VvA 16; cp. ˚dhātu. -- 3. lustre, splendour (cp. next meaning) D iii.143 (suvaṇṇa˚, or=1); Pv ii.962 (na koci devo vaṇṇena sambuddhaŋ atirocati); iii.91 (suriya˚); Vv 291 (=sarīr' obhāsa VvA 122); PvA 10 (suvaṇṇa˚), 44. -- 4. beauty (cp. vaṇṇavant) D ii.220 (abhikkanta˚); M i.142 (id.); D iii.68 (āyu+); Pv ii.910 (=rūpa -- sampatti PvA 117). Sometimes combd with other ideals, as (in set of 5): āyu, sukha, yasa, sagga A iii.47; or āyu, yasa, sukha, ādhipacca J iv.275, or (4): āyu, sukha, bala A iii.63. -- 5. expression, look, specified as mukha˚, e. g. S iii.2, 235; iv.275 sq.; A v.342; Pv iii.91; PvA 122. -> 6. colour of skin, appearance of body, complexion M ii.32 (parama), 84 (seṭṭha); A iii.33 (dibba); iv.396 (id.); Sn 610 (doubtful, more likely because of its combn with sara to below 8!), 686 (anoma˚); Vism 422 (evaŋ˚=odato vā sāmo vā). Cp. ˚pokkharatā. -> In special sense applied as distinguishing mark of race or species, thus also constituting a mark of class (caste) distinction & translatable as "(social) grade, rank, caste" (see on term Dial. i.27, 99 sq.; cp. Vedic ārya varṇa and dāsa varṇa RV ii.12, 9; iii.34, 9: see Zimmer, Altind. Leben 113 and in greater detail Macdonell & Keith, Vedic Index ii.247 sq.). The customary enumn is of 4 such grades, viz. khattiyā brāhmaṇā vessā suddā Vin ii.239; A iv.202; M ii.128, but cp. Dial. i.99 sq. -- See also Vin iv.243 (here applied as general term of "grade" to the alms -- bowls: tayo pattassa vaṇṇā, viz. ukkaṭṭha, majjhima, omaka; cp. below 7); D i.13, 91; J vi.334; Miln 225 (khattiya˚, brāhmaṇa˚). -- 7. kind, sort Miln 128 (nānā˚), cp. Vin iv.243, as mentioned under 6. -- 8. timbre (i. e. appearance) of voice, contrasted to sara intonation, accent; may occasionally be taken as "vowel." See A i.229 (+sara); iv.307 (id.); Sn 610 (id., but may mean "colour of skin": see 6), 1132 (giraŋ vaṇṇ' upasaŋhitaŋ, better than meaning "comment"); Miln 340 (+sara). -> 9. constitution, likeness, property; adj. ( -- ˚) "like": aggi˚ like fire Pv iii.66 (=aggi -- sadisa PvA 203). -- 10. ("good impression") praise DhA i.115 (magga˚); usually combd and contrasted with avaṇṇa blame, e. g. D i.1, 117, 174; A i.89; ii.3; iii.264; iv.179, 345; DA i.37. -- 11. reason ("outward appearance") S i.206 (=kāraṇa K.S. i.320); Vv 846 (=kāraṇa VvA 336); Pv iv.16 (id. PvA 220); iv.148.

-- āroha (large) extent of beauty Sn 420. -- kasiṇa the colour circle in the practice of meditation VbhA 251. -- kāraka (avaṇṇe) one who makes something (unsightly) appear beautiful J v.270. -- da giving colour, i. e. beauty Sn 297. -- dada giving beauty A ii.64. -- dasaka the ten (years) of complexion or beauty (the 3rd decade in the life of man) Vism 619; J iv.497. -- dāsī "slave of beauty," courtezan, prostitute J i.156 sq., 385; ii.367, 380; iii.463; vi.300; DhA i.395; iv.88. -- dhātu composition or condition of appearance, specific form, material form, natural beauty S i.131; Pv i.31; PvA 137 ( = chavivaṇṇa); DhsA 15. -- patha see vaṇṇu˚. -- pokkharatā beauty of complexion D i.114, 115; A i.38; ii.203; Pug 66; VbhA 486 (defd); DhA iii.389; PvA 46. -- bhū place of praise J i.84 (for ˚bhūmi: see bhū2). -- bhūta being of a (natural) species PvA 97. -- vādin saying praise, praising D i.179, 206; A ii.27; V.164 sq.; Vin ii.197. -- sampanna endowed with beauty A i.244 sq., 288; ii.250 sq. -- 597 -- Vaṇṇaka
Vaṇṇaka
(nt.) [fr. vaṇṇa] paint, rouge D ii.142; Th 1,960; Dpvs vi.70. Vaṇṇatā
Vaṇṇatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. vaṇṇa] having colour, complexion A i.246 (dubbaṇṇatā bad c.); VvA 9. Vaṇṇanā
Vaṇṇanā
(f.) [fr. vaṇṇeti] 1. explanation, commentary, exposition KhA 11, 145, 227; SnA 65 (pada˚); PvA 2. -- pāḷi˚ explanation of the text (as regards meaning of words), purely textual analysis (opp. vinicchayakathā) VbhA 291. -- 2. praise DhA ii.100 (vana˚). Vaṇṇanīya
Vaṇṇanīya
(adj.) [grd. formation fr. vaṇṇeti] to be de- scribed; a˚ indescribable J v.282. Vaṇṇavant
Vaṇṇavant
(adj.) [fr. vaṇṇa] beautiful A iv.240 (cātum- mahārājikā devā dīgh'āyukā vaṇṇavanto; v. l. ˚vantā); Pug 34; Pv iii.212 ( = rūpasampanna PvA 184); DhA i.383. Vaṇṇita
Vaṇṇita
[pp. of vaṇṇeti] 1. explained, commented on SnA 368. -- 2. praised, extolled Pug 69; J i.9; Miln 278 (+thuta & pasattha); PvA 116 ( = pasaŋsita), 241; VvA 156 (=pasaŋsita). Vaṇṇin
Vaṇṇin
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. vaṇṇa] 1. having colour Th 1, 1190 (accharā nānattavaṇṇiyo "in divers hues"). -- 2. belonging to a caste, in cātu˚ (suddhi) (purity of) the fourfold castes M ii.132. -- 3. having beauty Sn 551 (uttama˚). -- 4. having the appearance of A ii.106 = Pug 44 (āma˚, pakka˚); J v.322 (vijju˚). Vaṇṇiya
Vaṇṇiya
(nt.) [fr. vaṇṇeti] colouring; having or giving colour, complexion M i.446 (in phrase assaŋ assa -- damako vaṇṇiyañ ca valiyañ ca anuppavecchati, trsld by Neumann as "lässt der Rossebändiger noch die letzte Strählung und Striegelung angedeihen"; still doubtful); A iii.54 (dubbaṇṇiyaŋ bad complexion); It 76 (dub˚ evil colour). Vaṇṇu
Vaṇṇu
(f.) [cp. late Sk. varṇu, N. of a river ( -- district)] is given at Abhp 663 in meaning of "sand." Occurs only in cpd. vaṇṇupatha a sandy place, quicksand, swamp J i.109; Vv 843 ( = vālu -- kantāra VvA 334); Pv iv.32 (=petena nimmitaŋ mudu -- bhūmi -- magga PvA 250, so read for vaṇṇapatha); shortened to vaṇṇu at Vv 8411 (where MSS vaṇṇa). Vaṇṇeti
Vaṇṇeti
[Denom. fr. vaṇṇa] 1. to describe, explain, comment on J i.2, 222; KhA 168; SnA 23, 160, 368. -> 2. to praise, applaud, extol J i.59, 84; PvA 131 (+pasaŋsati). -- pp. vaṇṇita. Vata
Vata1
(indecl.) [Vedic bata, post -- Vedic vata] part of ex- clamation: surely, certainly, indeed, alas! Vin iii.39 (puris' usabho vat' âyaŋ "for sure he is a human bull"); Th 2, 316 (abbhutaŋ vata vācaŋ bhāsasi); Sn 178, 191, 358; Vv 4713; Pv i.85; J iv.355; PvA 13, 61, 75, 121. Often combd with other emphatic particles, like aho vata Pv ii.945 ( = sādhu vata PvA 131); lābhā vata no it is surely a gain that Sn 31; DhA ii.95; vata bho J i.81. Vata
Vata2
(m. & nt.) [cp. Vedic vrata vow. fr. vṛt, meaning later "milk" (see Macdonell & Keith, Vedic Index ii.341)] 1. a religious duty, observance, rite, practice, custom S i.143, 201; iv.180; A iv.461 (sīla, vata, tapas, brahmacariya); v.18; Sn 792, 898; Vv 8424; J iii.75; VvA 9; PvA 60. -- subbata of good practice Vv 346. Cp. patibbata, sīlabbata. -- 2. manner of (behaving like) a certain animal (as a practice of ascetics), e. g. aja˚ like a goat J iv.318; go˚ like a cow M i.387; J iv.318; vagguli˚ bat practice J i.493; iii.235; iv.299; hatthi˚ elephant behaviour Nd1 92 (here as vatta; see under vatta1).

-- pada an item of good practice, virtue (otherwise called guṇa at Miln 90) J i.202 (where 7 are enumd, viz. devotion to one's mother & father, reverence towards elder people, speaking the truth, gentle speech, open speech, unselfishness); Miln 90 (where 8 are given in detail, differing from the above). See also vatta1 2. where other sets of 7 & 8 are quoted. -- samādāna taking up a (good) practice, observance of a vow J i.157. Vatavant
Vatavant
(adj.) [vata2+vant] observant of religious duties, devout Sn 624 ( = dhuta -- vatena samannāgata SnA 467); Dh 400 (with same expln at DhA iv.165 as as SnA 467). Vati
Vati1
(f.) [later Sk. vṛti, fr. vṛ] a fence J i.153; iii.272; v.472; Vism 186 (vatī, v. l. vati); SnA 98 (v. l. for gutti), 148 (v. l. for ˚vatikā). Vati
Vati2
(f.) [fr. vṛ, cp. Sk. vṛti] a choice, boon DhA i.190 (pubbe Sāmā nāma vatiyā pana kāritattā Sāmāvatī nāma jātā). Vatika
Vatika
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [vata2+ika] having the habit (of), acting like M i.387 (kukkura˚). Vatikā
Vatikā
(f.) [fr. vati1] a fence SnA 148 (kaṇṭaka˚ & rukkha˚). Vatta
Vatta1
(nt.) [orig. pp. of vattati] 1. that which is done, which goes on or is customary, i. e. duty, service, custom, function Vin ii.31; Sn 294, 393 (gahaṭṭha˚); Vism 188 (cetiy' angaṇa˚ etc.); DhA i.92 (ācariya˚); VbhA 354 (gata -- paccāgata˚); VvA 47 (gāma˚). -- 2. (for vata2) observance, vow, virtue D iii.9 (the 7 vattapadāni, diff. from those enumd under vata -- pada); Nd1 66 (sīlañ ca vattañ ca), 92 (hatthi˚ etc.: see vata2 2), 104 (˚suddhi), 106 (id.), 188 (giving 8 dhutangas as vattas).

-- paṭivatta all kinds of practices or duties J i.67; ii.103; iii.339; iv.298; Miln 416 (sucarita˚); DhA i.13 sq.; ii.277; iv.28. -- bbata the usual custom DhA iv.44; C on S i.36 § 2 and on S ii.18 § 4 sq. -- sampanna one who keeps all observances VbhA 297 (where the foll. vattāni are enumd: 82 khuddaka -- vattāni. 14 mahā˚, cetiyangaṇa˚, bodhiyangaṇa˚, pānīyamāḷa˚, uposathāgāra˚, āgantuka˚, gamika˚). Vatta
Vatta2
(nt.) [cp. Sk. vaktra & P. vattar] the mouth (lit. "speaker") Pgdp 55 (sūci -- vatto mah'odaro peto). Vatta
Vatta3
[vyatta, Sk. vyātta, of vi+ā+dā] opened wide Vin iii.37; J v.268 (vatte mukhe). -- 598 -- Vatta
Vatta4
at J v.443 is corrupt for vaṇṭha cripple. Vattaka
Vattaka
(adj.) [fr. vatta1] doing, exercising, influencing; in vasa˚ having power, neg. avasa˚ having no free will, involuntary PvA 64. Vattati
Vattati
[Vedic vartate; vṛt. A differentiated P. form is vaṭṭati. -- Cp. Av. varət to turn, Sk. vartana turning, vartulā = Lat. vertellum=E. whorl (Ger. wirtel) & vertil; Gr. r(ata/nh; Goth. waírpan=Ger. werden (to become, E. "turn"); Goth. -- waírps=E. -- wards; Obulg. vrěteno spindle; and many others (e. g. Lat. vertex, vortex), q. v. Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. verto] to move, go on, proceed; to happen, take place, to be; to be in existence; to fare, to do Sn p. 13 (parivesanā vattati distribution of food was in progress); Sn 654 (kammanā vattati loko keeps up, goes on); Pv ii.944 (vatteyya); Miln 338 (na ciraŋ vattate bhavo). -- grd. vattabba to be proceeded, or simply "to be" Vin ii.8 (so read for vatth˚): nissāya te v. "thou must remain under the superintendence of others" (Vin. Texts, ii.344). -- Often equal to atthi or (pl.) santi, i. e. is (are), e. g. J vi.504; SnA 100 (bāḷhā vedanā vattanti); PvA 40. -- ppr. med. vattamāna see sep. -- pp. vatta. -- Caus. vatteti to make go on, to keep up, practise, pursue Sn 404 (etaŋ vattayaŋ pursuing this); freq. in phrases vasaŋ vatteti to exercise power, e. g. PvA 89; and cakkaŋ vatteti to wield royal power, to govern (cp. expression cakkavattin & see pavatteti) Sn 554, 684 (vattessati), 693 (dhamma -- cakkaŋ); J iii.412. -- grd. vattitabba to be practised Vin ii.32. -- pp. vattita. Vattana
Vattana
(nt.) [fr. vattati] moving on, upkeep, existence, continuance Sn 698 (cakka˚ continuance of royal power); Mhvs 3, 38. Vattanī
Vattanī
(& ˚i) (f.) [cp. Sk. vartanī, fr. vṛt] a track, a road J i.196, 395, 429; iii.200. -- kaṇha˚ leaving a black trail, Ep. of the fire J iii.140. Vattamāna
Vattamāna
(adj. -- nt.) [ppr. med. of vattati] being in exist- ence, going on, happening at the time; nt. process, progress, (as ˚ -- ) in progress SnA 4 (˚uppanna); PvA 55. -- ˚vacana the present tense SnA 16, 23. Vattamānaka
Vattamānaka
(adj.) [fr. last] going on, being, existing; ˚bhave in the present existence or period Miln 291. Vattar
Vattar
[n. ag. of vatti, vac] one who speaks, a sayer, speaker M i.470; S i.63; ii.182; vi.94, 198; D i.139; A iv.32; v.79 sq., 226 sq.; Th 1, 334 (read ariya -- vattā for ˚ vatā); J i.134; SnA 272; PvA 15. Vatti
Vatti
[Vedic vakti, vac] to speak, say, call; pres. not found (for which vadati); fut. 1st sg. vakkhāmi J i.346; 3rd vakkhati S i.142; J i.356; ii.40; vi.352; VbhA 51; 1st pl. vakkhāma S iv.72; M iii.207; Vism 170, 446; 3rd vakkhanti Vin ii.1; pte. fut. vakkhamāna PvA 18. -- aor. 1st sg. avacaŋ J iii.280; DhA iii.194, & avocaŋ Th 2, 124; Vv 797; S i.10; DhA iii.285; 2nd avaca Th 2, 415, avoca Dh 133, & avacāsi Vv 357; 539; 3rd avaca J i.294; Pv ii.319; PvA 65 (mā a.); avoca Th 2, 494; S i.150; Sn p. 78; J ii.160; PvA 6, 31, 49, & avacāsi J vi.525; 1st pl. avacumha & avocumha M ii.91; iii.15; 2nd avacuttha Vin i.75 (mā a.); ii.297; J ii.48; DhA i.73; iv.228, & avocuttha J i.176; Miln 9; 3rd pl. avacuŋ J v.260, & avocuŋ M ii.147. -- inf. vattuŋ Sn 431; J vi.351; Vism 522 = VbhA 130 (vattukāma); SnA 414; DA i.109; DhA i.329; ii.5. -- ger. vatvā SnA 398; PvA 68, 73, & vatvāna Sn p. 78. -> grd. vattabba Miln 276 (kiŋ vattabbaŋ what is there to be said about it? i. e. it goes without saying); SnA 123, 174, 178; PvA 12, 27, 92. -- ppr. med. vuccamāna Vin i.60; iii.221; PvA 13. -- Pass. vuccati D i.168, 245; Dh 63; Mhvs 9, 9; 34, 81 (vuccate, v. l. uccate); J i.129 (vuccare, 3rd pl.); PvA 24, 34, 63, 76; -- pp. vutta (q. v.). -- Caus. vāceti to make speak, i. e. to read out; to cause to read; also to teach, to instruct Sn 1018, 1020; J i.452 (read); PvA 97. -- pp. vācita (q. v.). -> Desid. vavakkhati (see Geiger, P.Gr. § 184=Sk. vivakṣati) to wish to call D ii.256. Vattika=vatika
Vattika
= vatika Nd1 89 (having the habit of horses, elephants etc.). Vattita
Vattita
(nt.) [fr. vatteti] that which goes on, round (of existence), revolution Miln 226. Vattin
Vattin
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. vṛt] engaged in, having power over, making, doing; only in cpds. cakka˚ & vasa˚ (q. v.). Vattha
Vattha1
(nt.) [Vedic vastra, fr. vas, vaste to clothe; Idg. *ṷes, enlargement of *eu (: Lat. ex -- uo); cp. Lat. vestis "vest( -- ment)," Gr. e(/nnumi to clothe, ei(_ma dress; Goth. wasjan to clothe; wasti dress] 1. cloth; clothing, garment, raiment; also collectively: clothes; M i.36 sq.; A i.132, 209, 286; ii.85, 241; iii.27 (odātaŋ), 50 (kāsikaŋ), 386 (kāsāyaŋ); iv.60, 186, 210; v.61 sq. (ubhatobhāga -- vimaṭṭhaŋ = M ii.13, reading vimaddha; with the expression cp. ubhato -- bhāga -- vimutta); Sn 295, 304; KhA 237 (˚ŋ pariyodāyati, simile); PvA 43, 50, 70; Sdhp 217. -- alla˚ fresh, clean clothes DhA iv.220; ahata˚ new clothes J i.50; Dāvs ii.39; dibba˚ heavenly, i. e. exquisite dresses PvA 23, 46, 53. -- pl. vatthāni garments, clothes Sn 64, 287, 924; Pug 57 (kāsāyāni); DhA i.219 (their uses, from a new dress down to a bit of rag). -- 2. hangings, tapestry J iv.304. -- On vattha in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 132.

-- guyha "that which is concealed by a cloth," i. e. the pudendum D i.106; Sn 1022; DA i.275 ( = angajātaŋ; Bhagavato ti vāraṇass' eva kosohitaŋ vatthaguyhaŋ suvaṇṇavaṇṇaŋ paduma -- gabbha -- samānaŋ). -- yuga a pair of garments J iv.172; Dāvs i.34. -- lakkhaṇa fortune telling from clothes SnA 362. -- sannidhi storing up of clothes D i.6; Nd1 372; DA i.82. -- sutta the Suttanta on clothes (i. e. with the parable of the clothes: vatth' upama -- sutta) M i.36 sq., quoted at Vism 377 and SnA 119. Vattha
Vattha2
as pp. of vasati1 occurs only in cpd. nivattha. The two passages in PvA where vattha is printed as pp. (vatthāni vattha) are to be read as vattha -- nivattha (PvA 46, 62). Vatthabba
Vatthabba
at Vin ii.8 is to be spelt vattabba (see vattati). Vatthi
Vatthi
(m. & f.) [Vedic vasti in meaning 1; the other meanings later] 1. the bladder Vin iii.117; J i.146; Sn 195; Vism 144 = DhsA 117; Vism 264, 345 (mutta˚), 362; DA i.161; VbhA 248. -- 2. the pudendum: see ˚kosa. -- 3. a clyster ( -- bag): see ˚kamma.

-- kamma(ŋ karoti) to use a clyster Vin i.216. -- kosa a membranous sheath enveloping the sexual organ of a male DA i.275 (˚kosena paṭicchanna vatthaguyha: so read for ˚kesena); VvA 252 (˚mukha orifice of the pudendum of an elephant). Vatthu
Vatthu1
(nt.) [Class. Sk. vastu, fr. vas1] lit. "ground," hence 1. (lit.) object, real thing, property, thing, substance (cp. vatthu2!) A ii.209 (khetta˚, where khetta in lit. sense, cp. No. 2). Here belongs the defn of kāma as twofold: vatthu -- kāma and kilesa -- kāma, or desire for realities, objective kāma, and desire as property of stained character, i. e. subjective kāma, e. g. Nd1 1; SnA 99, 112; DhsA 62. -- On vatthụ as general philos. term cp. Dhs. trsln 2§§ 455, 679, 1229, also introd. p. 86; Cpd. 15, 31, 1741. -- 2. (appld meaning) object, item Vin i.121 (antima -- vatthuŋ ajjhāpannaka guilty of an extreme offence?); v.138 (the 10 āghāta -- vatthūni, as at Vbh 86); D iii.252 (seven niddesa˚), 255 (eight kusīta˚), 258 (eight dāna˚); S ii.41, 56 sq.; Vbh 71 (cakkhu˚ etc.), 306 sq., 353; Nett 114 (ten); SnA 172; DhA iv.2 (akkosa˚); PvA 8, 20 (dāna˚), 26 (left out in id. p. KhA 209), 29, 65 (alabbhaneyya˚), 96 (id.), 119, 121 (iṭṭha˚), 177, 220. Cp. ˚bhūta. -- 3. occasion for, reason, ground A ii.158 (+khetta [in fig. sense!], āyatana & adhikaraṇa); iv.334; D i.13 sq. (aṭṭhādasahi vatthūhi etc.); J ii.5 (avatthumhi chandaŋ mâkari do not set your heart on what is unreasonable); vatthunā (instr.) because PvA 118; vatthuto (abl.) on account of PvA 241. -> 4. basis, foundation, seat, (objective) substratum, substance, element J i.146 (kāyo paridevānaŋ v.); VbhA 404 (+ārammaṇa). See most of the cpds. -- 5. subjectmatter, subject, story, account SnA 4; DhA ii.66; PvA 77, 92, 263, 269. Cp. ˚gāthā & titles like Petavatthu, Vimānavatthu.

-- kata made a foundation or basis of, practised thoroughly J ii.61; v.14 and passim (+bhāvita etc.). In phrase tālâvatthukata ( = tāla avatthu kata) vatthu means foundation, basis, ground to feed and live on, thus "a palm deprived of its foundation": see refs. under tāla. -- gāthā the stanzas of the story, the introductory (explanatory, essential to its understanding) stanzas, something like "prologue" SnA 483, 575 (preceding Sn 699 & 976). -- dasaka tenfold substance or material basis VbhA 22. -- bhūta being an object, i. e. subject to J v.210. -- rūpa substance or substratum of matter, material form Vism 561, 564; VbhA 22, 172. -- visadakiriyā clearing of the foundation or fundamentals, purification of the elements VbhA 283=DhsA 76 (˚kiriyatā; trsln Expos. 101 "cleansing of things or substance"); Vism 128; VbhA 276. -- 599 -- Vatthu
Vatthu2
[Vedic vāstu; fr. vas] site, ground, field, plot Vin iii.50 (ārāma˚ & vihāra˚), 90 (id.); Sn 209, 473 (sakhetta˚, cp. vatthu1 4), 769 (khetta+), 858 (id.); Th 1, 957 (khetta+vatthu, cp. Brethren p. 3371 & Vin. Texts iii.389 sq.); Miln 279 (khetta˚ a plot of arable land); DA i.78 (contrasted with khetta, see khetta 1 and cp. vatthu1 1); PvA 88 (gehassa the back yard of the house); haunted by fairies (parigaṇhanti) D ii.87.

-- kamma "act concerning sites," i. e. preparing the ground for building D i.12 (trsln: fixing on lucky sites for dwellings), cp. DA i.98: akaṭa -- vatthumhi gehapatiṭṭhāpanaŋ. -- devatā the gods protecting the grounds, field -- gods, house -- gods Pv i.41 ( = ghara -- vatthuŋ adhivatthā devatā PvA 17). -- parikiraṇa offerings over the site of a house ("consecrating sites" trsln) D i.12 (cp. DA i.98=balikamma -- karaṇaŋ). -- vijjā the science of (building -- ) sites, the art of determining a suitable (i. e. lucky) site for a house D i.9 (see expln at DA i.93); S iii.239; Nd1 372; Vism 269 (in comparison); KhA 237. See also Dial ii.92 & Fick, Sociale Gliederung 152. Vatthuka
Vatthuka
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. vatthu1] 1. having a site or founda- tion or ground, in ucca˚ (high) and nīca˚ (low) Vin ii.117, 120; Mhvs 33, 87. -- 2. having its ground in, founded on, being of such & such a nature or composition S iv.67 (vācā˚); Ps i.130 (micchādiṭṭhi˚, correct in Index J.P.T.S. 1908!); Vbh 319 (uppanna˚; +ārammaṇa), 392 (micchādiṭṭhi˚); VbhA 403 (uppanna˚ etc.). Vada
Vada
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. vad] speaking, in cpd. vaggu˚ speaking pleasantly Sn 955 (cp. Nd1 446; SnA 571 = sundaravada); suddhiŋ˚ of clean speech Sn 910. Vadaññu
Vadaññu
(adj.) [cp. Sk. vadāniya, which also in P. avadā- niya] lit. "(easily) spoken to," addressable, i. e. liberal, bountiful, kind S i.43; A ii.59, 61 sq.; iv.271 sq., 285, 289, 322; Sn 487; Pv iv.133, 342, 1011, 154; VvA 281. Vadaññutā
Vadaññutā
(f.) [abstr. fr. vadaññu] bounty, kindness, liberality; neg. a˚ stinginess A v.146, 148 sq.; Vbh 371. Vadati
Vadati
[vad, Ved. vadati; Dhtp 134 vada = vacana] to speak, say, tell A iv.79; Sn 1037, 1077 sq.; Pug 42; PvA 13, 16, 39; Pot. 1st sg. vade (so read for vado?) M i.258; 3rd sg. vadeyya Pv i.33; aor. 3rd pl. vadiŋsu PvA 4. -- Cp. abhi˚, upa˚, pa˚, vi˚. -- Another form (not Caus.: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 1392) is vadeti D i.36; Vin ii.1; Sn 825; Sn p. 140 (kiŋ vadetha); J i.294; imper. vadehi PvA 62; Pot. med. 1st pl. vademase D iii.197; fut. vadessati Sn 351; aor. vadesi DhA iii.174. -- A specific Pāli formation is a Caus. vādiyati in act. and med. sense (all forms only in Gāthā style), e. g. indic. vādiyati Sn 824=892, 832; expld as vadati SnA 541, 542, or katheti bhaṇati etc. (the typical Niddesa expln of vadati: see Nd2 555) Nd1 161. In contracted (& shortened) form Pot. 2nd sg. vajjesi (*vādiyesi) you might tell, i. e. please tell Pv ii.116 (= vadeyyāsi PvA 149); iii.67 (same expln p. 203). The other Pot. forms from the same base are the foll.: 1st sg. vajjaŋ Th 2, 308; 2nd sg. vajjāsi Th 2, 307; J iii.272; vi.19; and vajja Th 2, 323; 3rd sg. vajjā Sn 971 (cp. Nd1 498); J vi.526 (=vadeyya C.); 3rd pl. vajjuŋ Sn 859 (=vadeyyuŋ katheyyuŋ etc. Nd2 555); J v.221. -- Caus. vādeti to make sound, to play (a musical instrument) J i.293; ii.110, 254 (vādeyyāma we might play); Ap 31 (aor. vādesuŋ); PvA 151 (vīṇaŋ vādento). -- Pass. vajjati (*vādiyati) to be played or sounded J i.13 (vajjanti bheriyo); Ap 31 (ppr. vajjamāna & aor. vajjiŋsu). -> Another form of ppr. med. (or Pass.) is vadāna (being called, so -- called) which is found in poetry only (contracted fr. vadamāna) at Vin i.36=J i.83. -- pp. udita2 & vādita (q. v.). -- Caus. II. vādāpeti to cause to be played Mhvs 25, 74 (tūriyaŋ). Vadana
Vadana
(nt.) [fr. vad] speech, utterance VvA 345 (+ka- thana). Vadāna
Vadāna
see vadati. Vadāniya
Vadāniya
[another form of vadaññu] see a˚. Vadāpana
Vadāpana
(nt.) [fr. vādāpeti, Caus. II. of vadati] making somebody speak or something sound DhsA 333 (we should better read vād˚). Vaddalikā
Vaddalikā
(f.) [cp. late Sk. vārdala & BSk. vardalikā MVastu iii.301; Divy 500] rainy weather Vin i.3; J vi.52 (loc. vaddalike); DhA iii.339; VbhA 109. Vaddha
Vaddha1
(adj. -- n.) [pp. of vaḍḍhati; see also vaḍḍha, vuḍḍha & vuddha. The root given by Dhtp (166) for vṛdh is vadh in meaning "vuddhi"] 1. grown, old; an Elder; venerable, respectable; one who has authority. At J i.219 three kinds of vaddha are distinguished: one by nature (jāti˚), one by age (vayo˚), one by virtue (guṇa˚); J v.140 ( = paññāya vuddha C.). Usually combd with apacāyati to respect the aged, e. g. J i.219; and in cpd. vaddh -- apacāyika respecting the elders or those in authority J iv.94; and ˚apacāyin id. Sn 325 (=vaddhānaŋ apaciti -- karaṇa SnA 332); Dh 109; DhA ii.239 (=buḍḍhatare guṇavuddhe apacāyamāna). Cp. jeṭṭh' apacāyin. -- 2. glad, joyful; in cpd. ˚bhūta gladdened, cheerful J v.6. Vaddha
Vaddha2
(m. & nt.) [cp. Vedic vardhra in meaning "tape"] a (leather) strap, thong J ii.154 (vv. ll. baddha, bandhana, bandha, vaṭṭa). Occurs as aŋsa˚ shoulder strap at Ap 310, where ed. prints baddha ( = baddha2).

-- maya consisting of a strap, made of leather J ii.153. Vaddhaka
Vaddhaka
[vaddha+ka] in cpd. aŋsa˚ "shoulder strap" should be the uniform reading for a series of diff. spellings (˚vaṭṭaka, ˚baddhaka, ˚bandhaka) at Vin i.204; ii.114; iv.170. Cp. Geiger, Zeitschrift fur Buddhismus iv.107. Vaddhana
Vaddhana
(nt.) [fr. vṛdh; see the usual vaḍḍhana] increase, furthering J iii.422 (kula˚); Sdhp 247 (pīti˚), 307 (id.). Vaddhava
Vaddhava
(nt.) [fr. vaddha1 2] joy, pleasure J v.6 (but C. = paṇḍita -- bhāva). Vaddhavya
Vaddhavya
(nt.) [fr. vaddha1 1] (old) age J ii.137 ( = vuddha- bhāva, mahallakatā C.). Vaddhi
Vaddhi
in anta˚ at J i.260 is to be read as vaṭṭi. -- 600 -- Vaddheti
Vaddheti
[fr. vardh to cut, cp. vaḍḍhaka & vaḍḍhakī] to cut off, is Kern's proposed reading (see Toev. s. v.) at J vi.527 (siro vaddhayitvāna) for vajjheti (T. reading vajjhayitvāna). Vadha
Vadha
[fr. vadh] striking, killing; slaughter, destruction, execution D iii.176; A ii.113; Pug 58; J ii.347; Miln 419 (˚kata); DhA i.69 (pāṇa˚+pāṇa -- ghāta), 80, 296; DhA ii.39; VbhA 382. -- vadhaŋ dadāti to flog J iv.382. -- atta˚ self -- destruction S ii.241; piti˚ parricide DA i.153; miga˚ hunting J i.149.

-- bandhana flogging and binding (imprisoning). In this connection vadh is given as a separate root at Dhtp 172 & 384 in meaning "bandhana." See A ii.209; v.206; Sn 242 (vadha -- cheda -- bandhana; v. is expld at SnA 285 as "sattānaŋ daṇḍ' ādīhi ākoṭanan" i. e. beating) 623 ( = poṭhana SnA 467); J i.435; iv.11; VbhA 97. Vadhaka
Vadhaka
[fr. vadh] slaying, killing; murderous; a murderer S iii.112 (in simile); iv.173 (id.); A iv.92 (id.); Th 2, 347; D iii.72 (˚citta); KhA 27; VvA 72 (˚cetanā murderous intention); Vism 230, 231 (in sim.); Sdhp 58. -> f. vadhikā J v.425 (pl. ˚āyo). Vadhati
Vadhati
[Vedic vadh; the root is given at Dhtp 169 in meaning of "hiŋsā"] to strike, punish; kill, slaughter, slay; imper. 2nd pl. vadhetha Vism 314; ger. vadhitvā M i.159; D i.98; J i.12; iv.67; SnA 257 (hiŋsitvā+); fut. vadhissati Mhvs 25, 62; aor. vadhi J i.18 (cp. ud -- abbadhi); cond. 1st sg. vadhissaŋ Miln 221. -- grd. vajjha: see a˚. -- Caus. vadheti J i.168; Miln 109. -> pp. vadhita. Vadhita
Vadhita
[pp. of vadheti] smitten Th 1, 783 = M ii.73 (not with Kern, Toev. s. v.= vyathita). Vadhukā
Vadhukā
(f.) [fr. vadhū] a daughter-in-law, a young wife A ii.78; DhA iii.260. Vadhū
Vadhū
(f.) [Ved. vadhū; to Lith. vedù to lead into one's house] a daughter-in-law VvA 123. Vana
Vana1
(nt.) [Ved. vana. -- The P. (edifying) etymology clearly takes vana as belonging to van, and, dogmatically, equals it with vana2 as an allegorical expression ("jungle") to taṇhā (e. g. DhsA 364 on Dhs 1059; DhA iii.424 on Dh 283). -- The Dhtp (174) & Dhtm (254) define it "sambhattiyaŋ," i. e. as meaning companionship] the forest; wood; as a place of pleasure & sport ("wood"), as well as of danger & frightfulness ("jungle"), also as resort of ascetics, noted for its loneliness ("forest"). Of (fanciful) defns of vana may be mentioned: SnA 24 (vanute vanotī ti vanaŋ); KhA 111 (vanayatī ti vanaŋ); DhsA 364 (taŋ taŋ ārammaṇaŋ vanati bhajati allīyatī ti vanaŋ, yācati vā ti vanaŋ [i. e. vana2]. vanatho ti vyañjanena padaŋ vaḍḍhitaŋ . . . balava -- taṇhāy'etaŋ nāma); DhA iii.424 (mahantā rukkhā vanaŋ nāma, khuddakā tasmiŋ vane ṭhitattā vanathā nāma etc., with further distinguishing detail, concerning the allegorical meanings). -- D ii.256 (bhikkhūṇaŋ samitiŋ vanaŋ); A i.35, 37; Dh 283 (also as vana2); Sn 272, 562 (sīho nadati vane), 1015 (id.), 684 (Isivhaya v.); Sn p. 18 (Jetavana), p. 115 (Icchānangala); Th 2, 147 (Añjanavana; a wood near Sāketa, with a vihāra); J v.37 (here meaning beds of lotuses); Miln 219 (vanaŋ sodheti to clear a jungle); Dhs 1059 ("jungle" = taṇhā); Pv ii.65 (arañña˚ -- gocara); Vism 424 (Nandana˚ etc.); DhA iv.53 (taṇhā˚ the jungle of lust). Characterized as amba˚ mango grove D ii.126 and passim; ambāṭaka˚ plum grove Vin ii.17; udumbara of figs DhA i.284; tapo˚ forest of ascetics ThA 136; DhA iv.53; nāga˚ elephant forest M i.175; brahā wild forest A i.152; iii.44; Vv 633; J v.215; mahā˚ great forest Th 2, 373 (rahitaŋ & bhiŋsanakaŋ). -- vanataraŋ (with compar. suffix) thicker jungle, denser forest Miln 269 (vanato vanataraŋ pavisāma). -- On similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 133. Cp. vi˚.

-- anta the border of the forest, the forest itself Sn 708, 709; Pv ii.310 ( = vana C.). -- kammika one who works in the woods J iv.210 (˚purisa); v.427, 429. -- gahana jungle thicket Vism 647 (in simile). -- gumba a dense cluster of trees Vv 817 (cp. VvA 315). -- caraka a forester SnA 51 (in simile). -- cetya a shrine in the wood J v.255. -- timira forest darkness; in metaphor ˚matt -- akkhin at J iv.285=v.284, which Kern (Toev. s. v.) changes into ˚patt -- akkhin , i. e. with eyes like the leaves of the forest darkness. Kern compares Sk. vanajapattr'ākṣī Mbh i.171, 43, and vanaja -- locanā Avad. Kalp. 3, 137. The Cy. explns are "vana -- timira -- puppha -- samān' akkhī," and "giri -- kaṇṇika -- samāna -- nettā"; thus taking it as name of the plant Clitoria ternatea. -- dahaka (& ˚dahana) burning the forest (aggi) KhA 21 (in simile). -- devatā forest deva S iv.302. -- ppagumba a forest grove VbhA 196. -- ppati (& vanaspati) [cp. Vedic vanaspati, Prk. vaṇapphai] "lord of the forest," a forest tree; as vanappati only at Vin iii.47; otherwise vanaspati, e. g. S iv.302 (osadhī+tiṇa+v.; opposed to herbs, as in R.V.); A i.152; J i.329; iv.233 (tiṇa -- latā -- vanaspatiyo); DhA i.3. -- pattha a forest jungle D i.71; iii.38, 49, 195; M i.16, 104; Vin ii.146; A i.60; iii.138 (arañña˚); Pug 59, 68; DA i.210. -- pantha a jungle road A i.241. -- bhanga gleanings of the wood, i. e. presents of wild fruit & flowers A iv.197. -- mūla a wild root D i.166 (+phala); A i.241 (id.); Miln 278. -- rati delight in the forest DhA ii.100. -- vaṇṇanā praise of the jungle DhA ii.100. -- vāsin forest -- dweller SnA 56 (Mahā -- tissatthera). -- saṇḍa jungle -- thicket, dense jungle D i.87, 117; S iii.109 (tibba v. avijjāya adhivacana); A iii.30; J i.82, 170; DhA i.313; ii.100. Vana
Vana2
(nt.) [van; vanati & vanoti to desire = Av. vanaiti Lat. venus, Ohg. wini friend (: E. winsome, attractive) wunsc=E. wish, giwon=E. wont; also "to win." The spelling sometimes is vaṇ: see vaṇi. -- The defn at Dhtp 523 is "yācane" (i. e. from begging), at Dhtm 736 "yācāyaŋ"] lust, desire. In exegetical literature mixed up with vana1 (see definitions of vana1). -- The word to the Pāli Buddhist forms a connection between vana and nibbāna, which is felt as a quâsi derivation fr. nibbana= nis+vana: see nibbana & cp. nibbāna II. B 1. -- S i.180 (so 'haŋ vane nibbanatho visallo); Sn 1131 (nibbana); Dh 334; Th 1, 691 (vanā nibbanaŋ āgataŋ). -- A Denom. fr. vana2 is vanāyati (like vanīyati fr. vaṇi). Vanaka
Vanaka
( -- ) (adj.) [fr. vana1] belonging to the forest, forest- like; adj. in cpd. ku˚ (kubbanaka, q. v.) brushwood Sn 1134. Vanati, Vanute, Vanoti
Vanati,
Vanute, Vanoti [van; Sk. vanoti & vanute. See also vana2, vaṇi, vaṇeti] to desire, love, wish, aim at, ask for SnA 24 (vanute & vanoti); DhsA 364 (vanati, bhajati, allīyati). Caus. vanayati KhA 111. Vanatha
Vanatha
[vana+tha; same in BSk. e. g. MVastu i.204] underwood, brushwood, thicket. Does not occur in lit. meaning, except in exegesis of Dh 283 at DhA iii.424; q. v. under vana1. Another defn is given at SnA 24: "taṇhā pariyuṭṭhāna -- vasena vanaŋ tanotī ti vanatho, taṇh' ānusayass' etaŋ adhivacanaŋ." -- The fig. meaning is "lust, desire," see e. g. S i.186; Th 1, 338; Dh 344; Sn 16 (˚ja); Dhs 1059 (as epithet of taṇhā); J ii.205 (vanathaŋ na kayirā); Nett 81, 82. -- nibbanatha free from desire S i.180; DhsA 364. Vanāyati
Vanāyati
[Denom. fr. vana2, cp, vanāyati] to desire, wish, covet, to hanker after M i.260; S iii.190. See also allīyati. Vanika
Vanika
= vanaka; only in cpd. nāga˚ one belonging to the elephant forest, i e. an elephant -- hunter M i.175; iii.132. Vanin
Vanin
(adj. -- n.) [either fr. Sk. vani ( = P. vaṇi) in meaning "begging," or poetical abbreviation of vaṇibbin] poor, begging; one who asks (for alms) or begs, a mendicant J vi.232 (=vanibbaka C.). -- 601 -- Vanibbaka see vaṇibbaka
Vanibbaka
see vaṇibbaka. Vanīyati
Vanīyati
[Denom. fr. vani = P. vaṇi] to desire J vi.264 C.: (pattheti), 270 (hadayaŋ vanīyati, v. l. dhanīyati: cp. allīyati). -- See also vanati & vaṇeti. Vaneja
Vaneja
[vane (loc. of vana1)+ja] born in the woods J ii.446. Vanta
Vanta
[pp. of vamati] 1. vomited, or one who has vomited Miln 214; PvA 80. As nt. vomit at Vin i.303. -- 2. (fig.) given up, thrown up, left behind, renounced M i.37 (+catta, mutta & pahīna). Cp. BSk. vāntī -- bhāva, syn. with prahāna AvŚ ii.188.

-- âda refuse -- feeder, crow J ii.439. -- āsa one who has given up all wishes, an Arahant Dh 97 ( = sabbā āsā iminā vantā DhA i.187). -- âsika eating what has been vomited, a certain class of Petas Miln 294. -- kasāva one who has left behind all fault Dh 10 (=chaḍḍita˚ DhA i.82). -- gamana at Vism 210=DA i.34 read either as v' antagamana or c' anta˚. -- mala stainless Dh 261. -- lokāmisa renouncing worldly profit Dh 378. Vandaka
Vandaka
(adj.) [fr. vand] disposed to veneration; f. ˚ikā Th 2, 337. Vandati
Vandati
[vand, originally identical with vad; the defn at Dhtp (135 & 588) is "abhivādana & thuti"] to greet respectfully, salute, to pay homage, to honour, respect, to revere, venerate, adore Sn 366, 547, 573, 1028; Pv ii.16; Mhvs 15, 14 (+pūjeti); Miln 14; SnA 191; PvA 53 (sirasā with the head, a very respectful way of greeting), 67; VvA 71. imper. vanda Vv 211 ( = abhivādaya VvA 105); pl. vandantu Sn 573; ppr. vandamāna Sn 598; aor. vandi Sn 252; J i.88; PvA 38, 61, 81, 141, 275; inf. vandituŋ PvA 77; grd. vandiya (neg. a˚) Vin ii.162. -- Caus. II. vandāpeti to cause somebody to pay homage J i.88; iii.11. -- pp. vandita. Vandana
Vandana
(nt.) & Vandanā (f.) [fr. vand, cp. Vedic vandana] salutation, respect, paying homage; veneration, adoration A i.294 (ā); ii.203 (+pūjā); J i.88; Pug 19, 24; Mhvs 15, 18; Miln 377; PvA i.53; SnA 492; ThA 256; Sdhp 221, 540. Vandāpana
Vandāpana
(nt.) [fr. vandāpeti; Caus. of vandati] causing to do homage J i.67. Vandita
Vandita
[pp. of vandati] saluted, revered, honoured, paid homage to; as nt. homage, respect, veneration Sn 702 (akkuṭṭha+); Th 2, 388 (id.); J i.88. Vanditar
Vanditar
[n. ag. fr. vandita] one who venerates or adores, a worshipper J vi.207 (vandit' assa = vanditā bhaveyya C.). Vapakassati
Vapakassati
see vavakassati. Vapati
Vapati1
[vap, Vedic vapate. Defn at Dhtp 192; bīja- nikkhepe] to sow Sn p. 13 (kasati+); J i.150 (nivāpaŋ vapitvā); PvA 139. -- Pass. vappate S i.227 (yādisaŋ v. bījaŋ tādisaŋ harate phalaŋ), and vuppati [Vedic upyate] Th 1, 530. -- pp. vutta. -- Caus. I. vāpeti: see pp. vāpita1. -- Caus. II. vapāpeti to cause to be sown Vin iii.131 (khettaŋ); J iv.276 (sāliŋ). Vapati
Vapati2
[vap, probably identical with vapati1] to shear, mow, to cut, shave: only in pp. of Caus. vāpita2 (q. v.). Vapana
Vapana
(nt.) [fr. vap] sowing SnA 137; DhA iii.220 (˚kas- saka); PvA 8. Vapayāti
Vapayāti
[vi+apa+yā] to go away, to disappear, only at Vin. i.2 = Kvu 186 (kankhā vapayanti sabbā; cp. id. p. MVastu ii.416 vyapananti, to be read as vyapayanti). Vappa
Vappa1
(m. or nt.) [orig. grd. fr. vap = Sk. vāpya] to be sown, sowing; or soil to be sown on, in paŋsu˚ sowing on light soil & kalala˚ on heavy soil SnA 137. -- Note. The defn of a root vapp at Dhtm 541 with "vāraṇe" refers to P. vappa bank of a river (Abhp 1133)=Sk. vapra, which is not found in our texts.

-- kamma the act or occupation of sowing J i.340 (+kasi -- kamma). -- kāla sowing time Sn p. 13; S i.172 ( = vapanakāla, bīja -- nikkhepa -- kāla SnA 137). -- mangala ploughing festival J i.57; DhA ii.113; SnA 141. Vappa
Vappa2
[cp. Epic. & Class. Sk. bāṣpa] a tear, tears Vin i.345 (vappaŋ puñchitvā wiping the tears). Vabbhācitaŋ
Vabbhācitaŋ
is a a(/pac legome/non at M i.172; read perhaps better as vambhayitaŋ: see p. 545. Neumann trsls only "thus spoken" (i. e. bhāsitam etaŋ). Vamati
Vamati
[vam, Idg. *ṷemo, cp. Lat. vomo, vomitus = vama- thu; Gr. e)me/w (E. emetic); Oicel. vaema seasickness. -- The defn at Dhtp 221 & Dhtm 315 is "uggiraṇa"] to vomit, eject, throw out, discharge Sn 198=J i.146; J v.255 (fut. vamissati); Pv iv.354 (=uḍḍayati chaḍḍayati PvA 256). -- Caus. vameti Miln 169. -- pp. vanta. Vamathu
Vamathu
[fr. vam] vomiting; discharged food PvA 173 (˚bhatta; +ucchiṭṭha˚). Vamana
Vamana
(nt.) [fr. vam] an emetic D i.12; A v.219; cp. J.P.T.S. 1907, 452. Vamanīya
Vamanīya
[grd. of vamati; cp. Sk. vāmanīya; ā often interchanges with a before 1 & m, like Caus. vameti & vāmeti] one who has to take an emetic Miln 169. Vambhanā
Vambhanā
(f.) [abstr. fr. vambheti] contempt, despite Vin iv.6; M i.402 (att'ukkaŋsana: para -- vambhana), Nd2 505; Vism 29; VbhA 484; Pgdp 100. -- Spelt vamhanā at J i.454 (vamhana -- vacana) & at DhsA 396 (khuŋsana˚). Vambhanīya
Vambhanīya
(adj.) [grd. of vambheti] to be despised, wretched, miserable PvA 175, 176. Vambhayita
Vambhayita
(nt.) [pp. of vambheti] being despised or reviled M i.172; Sn 905; Nd1 319 ( = nindita, garahita, upavādita). Vambhin
Vambhin
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. vambh] despising, treating with contempt, disparaging M i.95 (para˚, opp. to att' ukkaŋ-saka). Vambheti
Vambheti
(& Vamheti) [Caus. of vambh, a root of uncertain origin (connected with vam?). There is a form vambha given by Sk. lexicographers as a dial. word for vaŋśa. Could it be a contraction fr. vyambheti = vi+Denom. fr. ambho 2, part. of contempt? -- The Dhtp (602) defines vambh as "garahāyaŋ"] to treat with contempt, despise, revile, scold; usually either combd with khuŋseti or opposed to ukkaŋseti, e. g. Vin ii.18; iv.4; M i.200 (=Sn 132 avajānāti), 402 sq.; D i.90; A ii.27 sq.; Th 1, 621; DA i.256 (=hīḷeti); DhA iv.38; VvA 348. -- pp. vambhayita. -- vamheti is found at J i.191, 356; cp. vamhana. -- Note. The spelling bh interchanges with that of h (vamheti), as ambho shows var. amho. Trenckner (introd. to M 1. p. 1) gives vambheti (as BB reading) the preference over vamheti (as SS reading). Morris' note on vambheti in J.P.T.S. 1884, 96 does not throw any light on its etymology. Vamma
Vamma
(nt.) [Vedic varman, fr. vṛ to cover, enclose] armour J ii.22. Vammika
Vammika
(adj.) [fr. vamma] = vammin Vin i.342. Vammita
Vammita
[pp. of vammeti, cp. Sk. varmita] armoured, clad in armour J i.179 (assa); ii.315 (hatthi); iii.8; v.301, 322; DA i.40. Vammin
Vammin
(adj.) [fr. vamma; Vedic varmin] wearing armour, armoured J iv.353 ( = keṭaka -- phalaka -- hattha C.); v.259, 373; vi.25; Miln 331. -- 602 -- Vammīka & vammika
Vammīka
& vammika (m. & nt.) [cp. Vedic valmīka; Idg. *ṷorm(āi); cp. Av. maoiris, Sk. vamraḥ, Gr. mu/rmhz, Lat. formica, Cymr. mor; all of same origin & meaning] ant -- hill: (a) ˚ika: M i.142 sq.; J iii.85; iv.30 (˚bila the ant's hole); v.163. -- (b) ˚ika: J i.432; iv.30; Vism 183 (described), 304 (˚muddani), 446; DhA ii.51; iii.208; iv.154. Vammeti
Vammeti
[Denom. fr. vamma] to dress in armour, to armour J i.180; ii.94 (mangala -- hatthiŋ). -- pp. vammita. Vamha
Vamha
[for vambha: see vambheti] bragging, boasting, despising J i.319 (˚vacana). Vaya
Vaya1
(& vayo) (nt.) [Vedic vayas vitality, age; to be distinguished from another vayas meaning "fowl." The latter is probably meant at Dhtp 232 (& Dhtm 332) with defn "gamane." The etym. of vayo (age) is connected with Sk. vīra = Lat. vir. man, hero, vīs strength; Gr. i)/s sinew, i)/fios strong; Sk. vīḍayati to make fast, also veśati; whereas vayas (fowl) corresponds with Sk. vayasa (bird) & viḥ to Gr. ai)eto/s eagle, oi)wno/s bird of prey, Lat. avis bird] age, especially young age, prime, youth; meaning "old age" when characterized as such or contrasted to youth (the ord. term for old age being jarā). Three "ages" or "periods of life" are usually distinguished, viz. paṭhama˚ youth, majjhima˚ middle age, pacchima˚ old age, e. g. at J i.79; Vism 619; DhA iii.133. -- vayo anuppatta one who has attained old age, old D i.48 (=pacchima -- vayaŋ anuppatta DA i.143); Sn pp. 50, 92. -- Cp. Dh 260; J i.138 (vayo -- harā kesā); Vism 619 (the 3 vayas with subdivisions into dasakas or decades of life); Mhvs 2, 26 (ekūnatiŋso vayasā 29 years of age); PvA 5 (paṭhama -- vaye when quite young), 36 (id.; just grown up). In cpds. vaya˚.

-- kalyāṇa charm of youth DhA i.387. -- ppatta come of age, fit to marry (at 16) VvA 120; PvA 3, 112; ThA 266. Vaya
Vaya2
[Sk. vyaya, vi+i; occasionally as vyaya in Pāli as well] 1. loss, want, expense (opp. āya) A iv.282 (bhogānaŋ); Sn 739; PvA 130. -- avyayena safely D i.72. -> 2. decay (opp. uppāda) D ii.157 = J i.392 (aniccā vata sankhārā uppāda -- vaya -- dhammino); S iv.28; A i.152, 299.

-- karaṇa expense, expenditure J iv.355; Vin ii.321 (Sam. Pās on C. V. vi.4, 6, explaining veyyāsika or veyyāyika of Vin ii.157). Vayaŋ
Vayaŋ
is the Sk. form of the nom. pl. of pers. pron. ahaŋ, represented in Pāli by mayaŋ (q. v.). The form vayaŋ only in grammarians, mentioned also by Müller, P.Gr. p. 87 as occurring in Dh (?). The enclitic form for acc. gen. & dat. is no, found e. g. at Pv i.53 (gloss for vo; C. amhākaŋ); J ii.153, 352; DhA i.101; PvA 20, 73. Vayassa
Vayassa
[cp. Sk. vayasya] a friend J ii.31; iii.140; v.157. Vayha
Vayha
(nt.) & Vayhā (f.) [grd. formation fr. vah; cp. Sk. vahya (nt.)] a vehicle, portable bed, litter Vin iv.339 (enumd under yāna together with ratha sakaṭa sandamānikā sivikā & pāṭankī); J vi.500 (f.), with sivikā & ratha. Vara
Vara1
(adj.) [fr. vṛ to wish; Vedic vara] excellent, splendid, best, noble. As attribute it either precedes or follows the noun which it characterizes, e. g. ˚pañña of supreme wisdom Sn 391, 1128 ( = agga -- pañña Nd2 557); ˚bhatta excellent food (opp. lāmaka˚) J i.123; ˚lañcaka excellent gift (?) (Trenckner, Miln p. 424): see under lañcaka. -> dhamma˚ the best norm Sn 233; nagara˚ the noble city Vv 166 (=uttama˚, Rājagahaŋ sandhāya vuttaŋ VvA 82); ratana˚ the best of gems Sn 683; rāja˚ famous king Vv 321 (=Sakka VvA 134); or inserted between noun and apposition (or predicate), e. g. ākiṇṇa -- vara -- lakkhaṇa full of the best marks Sn 408; narī -- vara -- gaṇa a crowd of most lovely women Sn 301; esp. frequent in combn with predicate gata: "gone on to the best of," i. e. riding the most stately (horse or elephant), or walking on the royal (palace) etc., e. g. upari -- pāsādavara -- gata PvA 105; sindha -- piṭṭhi -- vara -- gata J i.179; hatthi -- khandha vara -- gata PvA 75, 216, 279. -- nt. varaŋ in compar. or superl. function: better than (instr.); the best, the most excellent thing A iv.128 (katamaŋ nu kho varaŋ: yaŋ . . . yaŋ); Dh 178 (ādhipaccena sotāpattiphalaŋ v.), 322 (varaŋ assatarā dantā . . . attadanto tato varaŋ).

-- anganā a noble or beautiful woman Mhvs 33, 84. -- ādāyin acquiring the best S iv.250; A iii.80. -- āroha (1) state elephant Vv 51 ( = varo aggo seṭṭho āroho ti varāroho VvA 35); (2) (f.) a noble lady J vi.562 (Maddī varārohā rājaputtī). Vara
Vara2
(m. & nt.) [fr. vṛ to wish] wish, boon, favour Miln 110, 139. Usually in phrases ilke varaŋ dadāti to grant a wish or a boon J iv.10; VvA 260; PvA 20. varaŋ gaṇhāti to take a wish or a vow J v.382; varaŋ vuṇāti (varati) id. J iii.493 (varaŋ varassu, imper.); Pv ii.940, 42; Miln 227. -- varaŋ yācati to ask a favour J iii.315 (varāni yācāmi). Varaka
Varaka1
[cp. *Sk. varaka] the bean Phaseolus trilobus J ii.75 (where equal to kalāya); Miln 267; DhA i.311. Varaka
Varaka2
(adj.) [fr. vṛ] wishing or asking (in marriage) Th 2, 406. Varaṇa
Varaṇa
[cp. Sk. varaṇa rampart, causeway, wall] the tree Crataeva roxburghii J i.222, 317 (˚rukkha), 319 = DhA iii.409 (˚kaṭṭhabhañja); J vi.535. *Varati
*Varati
[vṛ] & der. ("to choose" as well as "to obstruct") see vuṇāti. Varatta
Varatta
(nt.) & Varattā (f.) [cp. Vedic varatrā, given also in meaning "elephant's girth" at Halāyudha ii.66] a strap, thong, strip of leather S i.63; A ii.33; Sn 622; Dh 398 (fig. for taṇhā); J ii.153; v.45. As "harness" at J i.175; as straps on a ship's mast (to hold the sails) Miln 378. -- Cp. vārattika.

-- khaṇḍa strip of leather, a strap M i.244 = ii.193= iii.259=S iv.56=A iii.380. Varāka
Varāka
(adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. varāka] wretched, miserable S i.231; J iv.285; Vism 315; VvA 101; PvA 120 (syn. for kapaṇa), 175 (id.). Varāha
Varāha
[Vedic varāha & varāhu, freq. in Rigveda] a boar, wild hog Dh 325 = Th 1, 17; J v.406=vi.277; Miln 364; Sdhp 378. Valañja
Valañja
( -- ˚) [see valañjeti] 1. track, line, trace, in pada˚ track, footprint J i.8; ii.153 (v. l. lañca & lañcha); iv.221 (valañcha T.), 383; DhA ii.38. -- 2. that which is spent or secreted, i. e. outflow, faeces, excrement, in sarīra˚ faeces J i.70, 80, 421 (˚ŋ muñcati to ease oneself); iii.486; DhA ii.55. -- 2. design, use; only neg. avalañja useless, superfluous Vin iv.266; VvA 46 (˚ŋ akaŋsu rendered useless); DhA iv.116. Valañjana
Valañjana
(nt.) [fr. valañjeti] 1. resorting, acting as, behaviour VvA 248. -- 2. giving off, evacuation, easing the body J i.161 (˚vacca -- kuṭi privy); DhA iii.270 (sarīra˚). Valañjanaka
Valañjanaka
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. valañjana] being marked off, being traced, belonging to, behaving, living (anto˚ in the inner precincts, bahi˚ outside the bounds) J i.382, 385, 398. Valañjita
Valañjita
[pp. of valañjeti; cp. BSk. valañjita used, MVastu iii.276] traced, tracked, practised, travelled J iii.542 (magga). Valañjeti
Valañjeti
[customarily expld as ava+lañj (cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 661), the root lañj being given as a Sk. root in meaning "to fry," "to be strong," and a variety of others (see Mon. Williams s. v. lañj). But the root & its derivations are only found in lexicographical and grammatical works, therefore it is doubtful whether it is genuine. lañja is given as "pada," i. e. track, place, foot, and also "tail." We are inclined to see in lañj a by -- form of lañch, which is a variant of lakṣ "to mark" etc. (cp. lañcha, lañchaka, ˚ana, ˚ita). Thus the meaning would range from originally "trace," mark off, enclose, to: "being enclosed," assigned or belonging to, i. e. moving (in), frequenting etc., as given in C. explns. There seems to be a Singhalese word at the root of it, as it is certainly dialectical. -- The Dhtm (522) laconically defines valañj as "valañjane"] 1. to trace, track, travel (a road); practise, achieve, resort to Miln 359; VvA 58. -- 2. to use, use up, spend J i.102; iii.342; vi.369, 382, 521. -- ppr. Pass. (a -- )valañjiyamāna (not any longer) in use J i.111. -- pp. valañjita. -- 603 -- Valaya
Valaya
(m. & nt.) [Epic Sk. valaya, fr. Idg. *ṷel to turn; see Sk. roots vṛ to enclose, and val to turn, to which belong the foll.: varutra upper robe, ūrmi wave, fold, valita bent, vālayati to make roll, valli creeper, vaṭa rope, vāṇa cane. Cp. also Lat. volvo to roll, Gr. e)lu/w to wind, e)/lic round, e)/lutron cover; Goth. walwjan to roll on, Ohg. welzan & walzan = Ags. wealtan (E. waltz); Ags. wylm wave, and many others, q. v. in Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. volvo. -- The Dhtp (274) gives root val in meaning saŋvaraṇa, i. e. obstruct, cover. See further vuṇāti] a bracelet Vin ii.106; J ii.197 (dantakāre valay' -- ādīni karonte disvā); iii.377; vi.64, 65; DA i.50; DhA i.226 (danta˚ ivory bangle); PvA 157 (sankha˚); Mhvs 11, 14 (˚anguli -- veṭhakā). Valāhaka
Valāhaka
[valāha+ka; of dial. origin; cp. Epic Sk. balā- haka] 1. a cloud, dark cloud, thundercloud S i.212 = Th 2, 55; A ii.102; v.22; Th 1, 760; Pug 42, 43; Vv 681; J iii.245; 270 (ghana˚); Vism 285 (˚paṭala); Miln 274; DhsA 317; VvA 12 (=abbhā). -- 2. N. of mythical horses S iii.145.

-- kāyikā (devā) groups of cloud gods (viz. sīta˚, uṇha˚, abbha˚, vāta˚, vassa˚) S iii.254. Valāhassa
Valāhassa
[valāha+assa] cloud -- horse J ii.129 (the Valā- hassajātaka, pp. 127 sq.); cp. BSk. Bālāh'āśva ( -- rājā) Divy 120 sq. (see Index Divy). Vali & Valī
Vali
& Valī (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. vali; fr val. Spelling occa- sionally with ḷ] a line, fold, wrinkle, a streak, row; Vin ii.112 (read valiyo for valiŋ?); Th 2, 256; J iv.109; Shhp 104. -- muttā -- vali a string of pearls VvA 169. For vaṭṭanā -- valī see vaṭṭanā. See also āvali. Valika
Valika
(adj.) [fr. vali] having folds J i.499. Valita
Valita
[pp. of val: see valeti] wrinkled A i.138 (acc. khaṇḍa- dantaŋ palita -- kesaŋ vilūnaŋ khalitaŋ siro -- valitaŋ tilak'āhata -- gattaŋ: cp. valin with passage M i.88 = iii.180, one of the two evidehtly misread); PvA 56, 153. In compn with taca contracted to valittaca (for valitattaca) "with wrinkled skin" DhA ii.190 (phalitakesa+); with abstr. valittacatā the fact of having a wrinkled skin M i.49 (pālicca+; cp. MA 215); A ii.196 (khaṇḍicca pālicca+). Valin
Valin
(adj.) [fr. vali] having wrinkles M i.88 (acc. palita- kesiŋ vilūnaŋ khalita -- siraŋ valinaŋ) = iii.180 (palitakesaŋ vilūnaŋ khalitaŋ -- siraŋ valīnaŋ etc.) See valita for this passage. -- In compn vali -- mukha "wrinkled face," i. e. monkey J ii.298. Valiya
Valiya
at M i.446 is not clear. It is combd with vaṇṇiya (q. v.). See also note on p. 567; v. l. pāṇiya; C. silent. Valīkaŋ
Valīkaŋ
[cp. Sk. vyalīkaŋ] read for valikaŋ at Th 2, 403, in meaning "wrong, fault"; ThA 266 expls as "vyālikaŋ dosaŋ." So Kern, Toev. s. v. Vaḷīmant
Vaḷīmant
(adj.) [fr. vali] having wrinkles Th 2, 269 (pl. valīmatā). Valeti
Valeti
[cp. Sk. vāleti, Caus. of val to turn: see valaya] 1. to twist, turn, in gīvaŋ to wring (a fowl's neck) J i.436; iii.178 (gīvaŋ valitvā: read ˚etvā). -- 2. to twist or wind round, to put (a garment) on, to dress J i.452 (sāṭake valetuŋ; v. l. valañcetuŋ). -- pp. valita. Vallakī
Vallakī
(f.) cp. Epic Sk. vallakī, BSk. vallikī Divy 108; MVastu i.227] the Indian lute Abhp 138. Vallabha
Vallabha
[cp. Epic & Class. Sk. vallabha & BSk. valla- bhaka a sea monster Divy 231] a favourite J iv.404; vi.38, 371; rāja˚ a king's favourite, an overseer J i.342; Mhvs 37, 10; VbhA 501. -- f. vallabhā (a) beloved (woman), a favourite J iii.40; VvA 92, 135, 181. Vallabhatta
Vallabhatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. vallabha] being a favourite Dāvs v.7. Vallarī
Vallarī
(f.) [cp. Class. Sk. vallarī, Halāyudha ii.30] a branching footstalk, a compound pedicle Abhp 550. The word is found in BSk. in meaning of "musical instrument" at Divy 315 and passim. Vallikā
Vallikā
(f.) [cp. Sk. vālikā?] 1. an ornament for the ear Vin ii.106 (cp. Bdhgh's expln on p. 316). -- 2. a jungle rope Vin ii.122. Vallibha
Vallibha
[cp. late Sk. valibha wrinkled] the plant kum- bhaṇḍa i. e. a kind of gourd Abhp 597 (no other ref.?). Vallī
Vallī
(f.) [cp. Sk. vallī; for etym. see valaya] 1. a climbing plant, a creeper Vin iii.144; J v.37; vi.536; VvA 147, 335 (here as a root?). -- santānaka˚ a long, spreading creeper VvA 94, 162. -- 2. a reed or rush used as a string or rope for binding or tying (esp. in building), bast (?) M i.190 (Neumann, "Binse"); J iii.52 (satta rohita macche uddharitvā valliyā āvuṇitvā netvā etc.), 333 (in similar connection); DhA iii.118. -- 3. in kaṇṇa˚ the lobe of the ear Mhvs 25, 94. -- The compn form of vallī is valli˚.

-- koṭī the tips of a creeper J vi.548. -- pakka the fruit of a creeper Vv 3330. -- phala = ˚pakka J iv.445. -- santāna spreadings or shoots of a creeper KhA 48. -- hāraka carrying a (garland of) creeper Vism 523=VbhA 131 (in comparison illustrating the paṭicca -- samuppāda). Vallura
Vallura
(nt.) [cp. Class. Sk. vallūra] dried flesh S ii.98; J ii.245. Vaḷa
Vaḷa
at Vism 312 is to be read vāḷa (snake), in phrase vāḷehi upadduta "molested by snakes." Vaḷabhā
Vaḷabhā
[ = vaḷavā?] is not clear; it occurs only in the expression (is it found in the Canon?) vaḷabhā -- mukha a submarine fire or a purgatory Abhp 889. The Epic Sk. form is vaḍavā -- mukha (Halāyudha i.70; iii.1). Vaḷabhī
Vaḷabhī
(f.) [cp. late (dial.) Sk. vaḍabhī] a roof; only in cpd. ˚ratha a large covered van (cp. yogga1) M i.175 (sabba -- setena vaḷabhī -- rathena Sāvatthiyā niyyāti divā divaŋ); ii.208 (id.), but vaḷavābhi -- rathena); J vi.266 (vaḷabhiyo = bhaṇḍa -- sakaṭiyo C.). The expression reminds of vaḷavā -- ratha. Vaḷavā
Vaḷavā
(f.) [cp. Vedic vaḍavā] a mare, a common horse D i.5; Pug 58; Mhvs 10, 54; J i.180; vi.343; DhA i.399; iv.4 (assatarā vaḷavāya gadrabhena jātā).

-- ratha a carriage drawn by a mare D i.89, 105, 106. The expression reminds of vaḷabhī -- ratha. Vaḷīna
Vaḷīna
at J vi.90 is not clear (in phrase jaṭaŋ vaḷīnaŋ pankagataŋ). The C. reads valinaŋ, paraphrased by ākulaŋ. Fausböll suggests malinaŋ. Should we accept reading valinaŋ? It would then be acc. sg. of valin (q. v.). -- 604 -- Vavakaṭṭha
Vavakaṭṭha
[pp. of vavakassati] drawn away, alienated; withdrawn, secluded DhA ii.103 (˚kāya). Vavakassati
Vavakassati
[v+ava+kṛṣ, would correspond to Sk. vya- vakṛṣyate, Pass.] to be drawn away, to be distracted or alienated (from); so is to be read at all passages, where it is either combd with avakassati or stands by itself. The readings are: Vin ii.204 (apakāsanti avapakāsanti) = A v.74 (avakassanti vavakassanti); A iii.145 (bhikkhu n' âlaŋ sanghamhā 'vapakāsituŋ: read vavakāsituŋ or ˚kassituŋ), 393 (vapakassat' eva Satthārā, vapakassati garuṭṭhāniyehi). See also apakāsati, avakassati, avapakāsati. -- pp. vavakaṭṭha . Vavakkhati
Vavakkhati
see vatti. Vavatthapeti & ˚ṭṭhāpeti
Vavatthapeti
& ˚ṭṭhāpeti [Caus. of vi+ava+sthā] to determine, fix, settle, define, designate, point out J iv.17 (disaŋ ˚tthapetvā getting his bearings); Vbh 193 sq.; Vism 182; SnA 67; KhA 11, 42, 89; VvA 220. -- ppr. Pass. vavatthāpiyamāna DhA i.21, 35. -- pp. vavatthita & vavatthāpita. Vavatthāna
Vavatthāna
(nt.) [fr. vi+ava+sthā; cp. late Sk. vya- vasthāna which occurs in Ep. Sk. in meaning "stay"] determination, resolution, arrangement, fixing, analysis Ps i.53; Vin iv.289; Vism 111, 236 ( = nimitta), 347 (defn); Miln 136; KhA 23. Vavatthāpita
Vavatthāpita
[pp. of vavatthāpeti] arranged, settled, established Miln 345 (su˚). Vavatthita
Vavatthita
[pp. of vi+ava+sthā, cp. vavatthapeti & late Sk. vyavasthita "determination"] 1. entered on, arranged, fixed, determined, settled M iii.25; DhsA 36. -- 2. separated (opp. sambhinna) Vin ii.67 sq. Vavattheti
Vavattheti
[unusual pres. (Med. -- Pass.) formation fr. vi+ ava+sthā, formed perhaps after vavatthita] to be determined or analysed Ps i.53, 76, 84. Vavassagga
Vavassagga
[vi+ava+srj; Sk. vyavasarga] "letting go," i. e. starting on something, endeavouring, resolution A i.36; J vi.188 (handā ti vavassagg' atthe nipāto); DA i.237 (here handa is expld as vavasāy' atthe nipato). -> Kern, Toev. s. v. wrongly "consent." Vasa
Vasa
(m. & nt.) [cp. Vedic vaśa; vaś to be eager, to desire] power, authority, control, influence S i.43, 240 (kodho vo vasam āyātu: shall be in your power; vasa = āṇāpavattana K.S. i.320); M i.214 (bhikkhu cittaŋ vasaŋ vatteti, no ca cittassa vasena vattati: he brings the heart under his control, but is not under the influence of the heart); Sn 297, 315, 578, 586, 968; Sdhp 264. -- The instr. vasena is used as an adv. in meaning "on account of, because" e. g. mahaggha -- vasena mahâraha "costly on account of its great worth" PvA 77; cp. J i.94; PvA 36 (putta˚); Mhvs 33, 92 (paṭisanthāra˚). -- Freq. in phrase vase (loc.) vattati to be in somebody's power J v.316 (te vase vattati), cp. M i.214 (cittassa vasena vattati) & 231 (vatteti te tasmiŋ vaso have you power over that?); trs. vase vatteti to get under control, to get into one's power J iv.415 (attano vase vattetvā); v.316 (rājāno attano v. v.); DhA ii.14 (rājānaŋ attano v. v.), cp. M i.214 (vasan vatteti) & PvA 89 (vasaŋ vattento). -- Note. The compn form in connection with kṛ and bhū is vasī˚ (q. v.).

-- ânuga being in somebody's power, dependent, subjected, obedient Sn 332, 1095; J iii.224 ( = vasavattin C.); Th 2, 375 (=kinkāra -- paṭissāvin ThA 252); Sdhp 249. -- ânuvattin id.; f. ˚inī obedient, obliging (to one's husband) Vv 313. -- uttama highest authority, greatest ideal Sn 274. -- gata being in someone's power J v.453 (narīnaŋ); cp. vasī -- kata. -- vattaka wielding power Sdhp 483 (˚ika); a˚ having no free will PvA 64. -- vattana wielding power, (having) authority Miln 356. -- vattin -- 1. (act., i. e. vatteti) having highest power, domineering, autocrat, (all -- )mighty; fig. having self-mastery, controlling one's senses D i.247; ii.261; A ii.24; It 122; Th 2. 37; Pv ii.333; Miln 253; DA i.111, 114, 121; SnA 133 (˚bhavana). -- 2. (pass.; i. e. vattati) being in one's power, dependent, subject J iii.224; v.316; ThA 226 (read vattino for ˚vattito!). Vasati
Vasati1
[vas1; to Idg. *ṷes, cp. Gr. e)/nnumi to clothe, Sk. vasman cover, Goth. wasjan clothe, wasti dress; Lat. vestis = E. vest etc.; Dhtp 628 (& Dhtm 870): acchādane] to clothe. pp. vuttha1. Caus. vāseti: see ni˚. See also vāsana1 & vāsana1. Vasati
Vasati2
[vas2; Idg. *ṷes to stay, abide; cp. Av. varəhaiti; Lat. Vesta the goddess of the hearth = Gr. e(sti/a hearth; Goth. wisan to stay, remain, be (= Ohg. wesan, E. was, were); Oicel. vist to stay, Oir. foss rest. -- Dhtm 470: kanti -- nivāsesu] to live, dwell, stay, abide; to spend time (esp. with vassaŋ the rainy season); trs. to keep, observe, live, practise Sn 469 sq., 1088 (= saŋvasati āvasati parivasati Nd2 558); PvA 3, 12, 78 (imper. vasatha). -> uposathaŋ vasaŋ (ppr.) keeping the Sunday J vi.232; brahmacariyaŋ v. to live a chaste life M i.515 (cp. same expression Ait. Br. 5, 13; Śat. Br. 12, 2, 2; 13, 8. 22). -- ppr. vasanto PvA 75, 76; ppr. med. vasamāna J i.21, 236, 291; PvA 117; Pot. vaseyya M i.515; Pv ii.97 (ghare), & vase Miln 372. -- aor. vasi Sn 977; J iv.317 (piya -- saŋvāsaŋ); PvA 111; Mhvs 1, 13 (vasī vasi); 5, 229. -- ger. vasitvā J i.278; iv.317; PvA 13; grd. vasitabba Sn 678; PvA 42; & vatthabba Mhvs 3, 12; inf. vatthuŋ Th 2, 414, & vasituŋ PvA 12, 112. Fut. vasissati [=Sk. vasiṣyati] Mhvs 14, 26; PvA 12; and (older) vacchati [=Sk. vatsyati] Vin i.60; Th 2, 294; J iv.217; 1st sg. vacchāmi J v.467 (na te v. santike); vi.523, 524, & vacchaŋ Th 2, 414. -- Pass. vussati [Sk. uṣyate] M i.147 (brahmacariyaŋ v.). -- pp. vasita, vusita [=vi+uṣita], vuttha [perhaps= vi+uṣṭa], q. v. -- Caus. I. vāseti to cause to live, stay or dwell; to make live; to preserve (opp. nāseti at S iv.248) Vin iii.140; S iv.248; Miln 211; PvA 160 (inf. vāsetuŋ); see also vāseti2. -- Caus. II. vasāpeti (cp. adhivāsāpeti) to make live or spend, to cause to dwell, to detain J i.290; ii.27; PvA 20 (vassaŋ). -- pp. vāsita. -- See also adhi˚, ā˚, ni˚, pari˚. Vasati
Vasati3
(f.) [fr. vas2, cp. Vedic vasati] a dwelling, abode, residence J vi.292 (rāja˚ = rāja -- paricariyā C.); Miln 372 (rājavasatiŋ vase); Dāvs iv.27 (saka˚). Vasana
Vasana1
(nt.) [fr. vasati1] clothing, clothes Sn 971; Th 2, 374; D iii.118 (odāta˚), 124 (id.); Nd1 495 (the six cīvarāni); PvA 49. -- vasanāni clothing Mhvs 22, 30. -- vasana ( -- ˚) as adj. "clothed," e. g. odāta˚ wearing white robes Vin i.187; kāsāya˚ clad in yellow robes Mhvs 18, 10; pilotika˚ in rags J iv.380; suci˚ in bright garments Sn 679; Pv i.108. Vasana
Vasana2
(nt.) [fr. vasati2] dwelling ( -- place), abode; usually in cpds. like ˚gāma the village where (he) lived J ii.153; ˚ṭṭhāna residence, dwelling place PvA 12, 42, 92; DhA i.323 and passim. Vasanaka
Vasanaka
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. vasana2] living (in) J ii.435 (ni- baddha˚, i. e. of continuous abode). Vasanta
Vasanta
[Vedic vasanta; Idg. *ṷēr, cp. Av. varehar spring, Gr. e)/ar, Lat. vēr, Oicel. vār spring, Lith. vasarā summer] spring J i.86; v.206; KhA 192 (bāla˚ = Citra); DA i.132 (˚vana); PvA 135. Vasabha
Vasabha
[the Sanskritic -- Pāli form (*vṛṣabha) of the proper Pāli usabha (q. v. for etym.). Only in later (Com.) style under Sk. influence] a bull Miln 115 (rāja˚); SnA 40 (relation between usabha, vasabha & nisabha); VvA 83 (id.). Vasala
Vasala
[Vedic vṛṣala, Dimin. of vṛṣan, lit. "little man"] an outcaste; a low person, wretch; adj. vile, foul Vin ii.221; Sn 116 -- 136; J iv.388; SnA 183, -- f. vasalī outcaste, wretched woman S i.160; J iv.121, 375; DhA i.189; iii.119; iv.162; VvA 260.

-- ādhama = ˚dhamma Sn 135. -- dhamma vile conduct J ii.180. -- vāda foul talk Ud 28; SnA 347. -- sutta the suttanta on outcasts Sn 116 sq. (p, 21 sq.), commented on at SnA 174 sq., 289. -- 605 -- Vasalaka
Vasalaka
[vasala+ka in more disparaging sense] = vasala Sn p. 21. Vasā
Vasā1
(f.) [Vedic vaśā; cp. vāśitā; Lat. vacca cow] a cow (neither in calf nor giving suck) Sn 26, 27; SnA 49 ( = adamita -- vuddha -- vacchakā). Vasā
Vasā2
(f.) [cp. Vedic vasā] fat, tallow, grease Sn 196; Kh iii.; Pv ii.23; J iii.356; v.489; PvA 80; VbhA 67. In detail at Vism 263, 361; VbhA 246. Vasi˚
Vasi˚
is the shortened form of vasī˚ ( = vasa) in combns ˚ppatta one who has attained power, mastering: only in phrase ceto -- vasippatta A ii.6; iii.340; Miln 82; cp. BSk. vaśiprāpta Divy 210, 546; -- and ˚ppatti mastership, mastery Vism 190 (appanā+). Vasika
Vasika
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. vasa, cp. Sk. vaśika] being in the power of, subject to, as in kodha˚ a victim of anger J iii.135; taṇhā under the influence of craving J iv.3; mātugāma˚ fond of women J iii.277. Vasita
Vasita
[pp. of vasati2] dwelled, lived, spent Mhvs 20, 14. Vasitar
Vasitar
[n. ag. fr. vasita] one who abides, stays or lives (in), a dweller; fig. one who has a (regular) habit A ii.107 = Pug 43, cp. PugA 225. -- vasitā is given as "habit" at Cpd. 58 sq., 207. Vasin
Vasin
(adj.) [fr. vasa] having power (over), mastering, esp. one's senses; a master (over) Vin iii.93; D i.18 ( = ciṇṇavasitattā vasī DA i.112); iii.29; Sn 372; Vism 154 (fivefold); Mhvs 1, 13 (vasī vasi); Dāvs i.16. Vasima
Vasima
= vasin It 32 (acc. vasimaŋ; v. l. vasīmaŋ). Vasī˚
Vasī˚
is the composition form of vasa in combn with roots kṛ and bhū, e. g. ˚kata made dependent, brought into somebody's power, subject(ed) Th 2, 295 ( = vasavattino katvā, pl.); Sn 154; cp. BSk. vaśīkṛta Jtm 213. See also vasagata. -- ˚katvā having overcome or subjected Sn 561 (=attano vase vattetvā SnA 455). Metricausâ as vasiŋ karitvā at Sn 444. -- ˚bhāva state of having power, mastery Nd2 466 (balesu); Pug 14 (in same passage, but reading phalesu), expld at PugA 189 (with v. l. SS balesu!) as "ciṇṇa -- vasī -- bhāva"; Kvu 608 (implies balesu); Miln 170. Cp. BSk. bala -- vaśī -- bhāva MVastu iii.379. See also ciṇṇa. -- ˚bhūta having become a master (over), mastering S i.132; Miln 319; cp. MVastu i.47 & 399 vaśībhūta. -- The same change of vasa˚ to vasī˚ we find in combn vasippatta (vasī+ppatta), q. v. under vasi˚. Vasu
Vasu
(nt.) [Vedic vasu good, cp. Gr. e)u/s good, Oir. fīu worthy, Goth. iusiza better] wealth; only in cpds. ˚deva the god of wealth, i. e. Kṛṣṇa (Kaṇha) Miln 191 (as ˚devā followers of K.); J v.326 (here in T. as ādicco vāsudevo pabhankaro, expld in C. as vasudevo vasujotano, i. e. an Ep. of the sun); Vism 233 (Vāsudevo baladevo). -- ˚dharā (f.) (as vasun -- dharā) the bearer of wealth, i. e. the earth S i.100; A iii.34; J v.425; Vism 205, 366; DA i.61. -- ˚dhā id. J i.25; Ap 53; Vism 125. Vasumant
Vasumant
(adj.) [fr. vasu] having wealth, rich J vi.192. Vassa
Vassa
(m. & nt.) [cp. Vedic varṣa (nt.) rain. For etym. see vassati1] 1. rain, shower J iv.284; vi.486 (khaṇika sudden rain); Miln 307; Mhvs 21, 31; DhA iii.163 (pokkhara˚ portentous); SnA 224 (mahā˚ deluge of rain); PvA 55 (vāta˚ wind & rain). -- fig. shower, downpour, fall M i.130 = Vin ii.25 (kahāpaṇa˚); DhA ii.83 (kusuma˚). -- Esp. the rainy season, lasting roughly from June to October (Āsāḷha -- Kattika), often called "Lent," though the term does not strictly correspond. Usually in pl. vassā (A iv.138), also termed vassā -- ratta "time of rains" (J iv.74; v.38). Cp. BSk. varṣā, e. g: Divy 401, 509. -- Keeping Lent (i. e. spending the rainy season) is expressed by vassaŋ vasati Vin iii.10; Mhvs 16, 8; or by vassa -- vāsaŋ (vass' āvāsaŋ) vasati (see below), vassaŋ upeti S v.152, vassaŋ upagacchati S v.152; PvA 42. One who has kept Lent or finished the residence of the rains is a vuttha -- vassa J i.82; Mhvs 17, 1; or vassaŋ vuttha Vin iii.11; S i.199; v.405; PvA 43. Cp. BSk. varṣ' oṣita Divy 92, 489. -- Vassa -- residence is vassa -- vāsa (see below). -- vassaŋ vasāpeti (Caus.) to induce someone to spend the rainy season PvA 20. -- anto -- vassaŋ during Lent; cp. antovass' eka -- divasaŋ one day during Lent Mhvs 18, 2; antara -- vassaŋ id. S iv.63. -- 2. (nt.) a year A iv.252 (mānusakāni paññāsa vassāni); Sn 289, 446, 1073. satta˚ (adj.) seven years old Mhvs 5, 61; satta -- aṭṭha˚ 7 or 8 years old PvA 67. -- See cpd. ˚sata. -- 3. semen virile, virility: see cpds. ˚kamma & ˚vara.

-- agga shelter from the rain, a shed (agga = agāra) J i.123; DhA iii.105=VvA 75. -- āvāsa vassa -- residence A iii.67. -- āvāsika belonging to the spending of the rainy season, said of food (bhatta) given for that purpose J vi.71; DhA i.129 (as one of the 4 kinds: salāka˚, pakkhika˚, navacanda˚, vass' -- āvāsika˚), 298; iv.129 (˚lābha a gift for the r. s.). -- upagamana entering on the vassa -- residence PvA 42. -- upanāyikā (f.) the approach of the rainy season, commencement of Vassa residence [BSk. varṣopanāyikā Divy 18, 489; AvŚ i.182, where Ep. of the full moon of Āsāḷha]. Two such terms for taking up the residence: purimikā & pacchimikā A i.51; i. e. the day after the full moon of Ā. or a month after that date. See upanāyika. -- vass' ûpanāyika -- divasa the first day of Lent Vism 92; DhA iv.118; ˚ûpanāyikaŋ khandhakaŋ the section of the Vinaya dealing with the entrance upon Lent (i. e. Vin i.137 sq.) Mhvs 16, 9. -- odaka rain -- water Vism 260=VbhA 243. -- kamma causing virility D i.12 (=vasso ti puriso, vosso ti paṇḍako iti; vossassa vassa -- karaṇaŋ vassa -- kammaŋ, vassassa vossa -- karaṇaŋ vossa -- kammaŋ DA i.97). -- kāla time for rain J iv.55. -- dasa (& ˚dasaka) a decade of years: see enumd at J iv.397. -- pūgāni innumerable years J vi.532, cp. Sn 1073. -- vara a eunuch J vi.502. -- valāhaka a rain cloud A iii.243 (˚devā). -- vassana shedding of rain, raining DhA ii.83. -- vāsa Vassa residence S v.326; PvA 20. -- vuṭṭhi rainfall SnA 34, cp. 224. -- sata a century Sn 589, 804; A iv.138; Pv ii.115; PvA 3, 60, 69. -- satika centenarian Miln 301. Vassati
Vassati1
[vṛṣ, varṣati, vṛṣate; Idg. *ṷers to wet, cp. Vedic vṛṣa bull, varṣa rain, vṛṣabha (P. usabha), Av. varšna virile, Lat. verres boar; Gr. a)/rrhn virile, e)/rsh dew; with which root is connected *eres to flow: Sk. arṣati, ṛṣabha bull, Lat. ros dew = Sk. rasa essence etc. -> Dhtm 471 gives "secana" as defn] to rain (intrs.), fig. to shower, pour(down) Vin i.32 (mahāmegho vassi); S iii.141 (deve vassante); v.396 (id.); Sn 30 (devassa vassato, gen. sg. ppr.); PvA 6, 139, 287; Mhvs 21, 33; DhA ii.83 (vassatu, imper.; vassi, aor.); 265 (devo vassanto nom. sg.). -- Cp. kālena kālaŋ devo vṛṣyate Divy 71. -- Caus. II. vassāpeti to cause to rain J v.201 (Sakko devaŋ v. let the sky shed rain). -- pp. vaṭṭa, vaṭṭha, vuṭṭha. Another pp. of the Caus. *vasseti is vassita. Vassati
Vassati2
[vāś to bellow, Vedic vāśyate; Dhtm 471: "sad- dane"] to utter a cry (of animals), to bellow, bark, to bleat, to crow etc. S ii.230; J i.436 (of a cock); ii.37, 153, 307; iii.127; vi.497 (ppr. vassamāna = vāsamāna C.). -- pp. vassita2. Vassana
Vassana1
(nt.) [fr. vassati1] raining, shedding (water) DhA ii.83 (vassa˚). -- 606 -- Vassana
Vassana2
(nt.) [fr. vassati2] bleating; neg. a˚ J iv.251. Vassāna
Vassāna
[gen. pl. formation fr. vassa, like gimhāna fr. gimha (q. v.). Kern, Toev. s. v. sees in it a contraction of varṣāyaṇa. Cp. Trenckner, Miln p. 428] (belonging, to) the rainy season Vin iv.286; A iv.138; J ii.445; v.177. Vassāpanaka
Vassāpanaka
(adj.) [fr. vassāpeti; Caus. of vassati1] shedding, pouring out J i.253 (dhana˚). Vassika
Vassika
(adj.) [fr. vassa] 1. (cp. vassa1) for the rainy season D ii.21 (palace); cp. AvŚ i.269 varṣaka (id.). -- 2. ( -- ˚) of years, in gaṇa˚ for many years Sn 279; SnA 339; tero˚ more than one year (old): see under tero; satta˚ seven years old PvA 53. Vassikā
Vassikā
(f.) & Vassika (nt.) = vassikī, i. e. Jasminum Sambac; cp. BSk. varṣika Lal. Vist. 366, 431; Divy 628; AvŚ i.163. (a) f. (the plant) Dh 377 (=sumanā DhA iv.112); Miln 251. (b) nt. (the flower, said to be the most fragrant of all flowers) A v.22; S v.44; DhA iv.112 (˚puppha). Vassikī
Vassikī
(f.) the great -- flowered jasmine, Jasminum Sambac (cp. vassikā) Dh 55 = J iii.291=Miln 333; Miln 181, 338; DhA i.422. Vassita
Vassita1
[pp. of *vasseti, Caus. of vassati1] sprinkled with, wet with, endowed with, i. e. full of J iv.494 (balena vassita). Vassita
Vassita2
(nt.) [pp. of vassati2] a cry J i.432; iv.217, 225. Vassitar
Vassitar
[n. ag. fr. vassita1] a shedder of rain A ii.102 = Pug 42. Vassin
Vassin
(adj. n.) [fr. vassati1] raining; in padesa˚ shedding local showers It 64. Vaha
Vaha
( -- ˚) [fr. vah] 1. bringing, carrying, leading Pv i.58 (vāri˚ river = mahānadī PvA 29); S i.103; PvA 13 (anattha˚). Doubtful in hetu -- vahe Pv ii.85, better with v. l. ˚vaco, expld by sakāraṇa -- vacana PvA 109. -- 2. a current J iv.260 (Gangā˚); v.388 (mahā˚). -- Cp. vāha. Vahati
Vahati
[vah, Idg. *ṷeĝh to drive, lead, cp. Sk. vahitra = Lat. vehiculum=E. vehicle; Gr. o)/xos waggon, Av. vaƶaiti to lead, Lat. veho to drive etc.; Goth. ga -- wigan =Ohg. wegan=Ger. bewegen; Goth. wēgs=Ger. weg, E. way; Ohg. wagan= E. waggon, etc. -- Dhtp 333 & Dhtm 498: vaha pāpuṇane] 1. to carry, bear, transport J iv.260; PvA 14 (=dhāreti); Miln 415 (of iron: carry weight). -- imper. vaha Vv 8117; inf. vahituŋ PvA 122 (perhaps superfluous); grd. vahitabba Mhvs 23, 93. -> 2. to proceed, to do one's work M i.444; Mhvs 34, 4 guḷayantaŋ vahitvāna, old var. reading for P.T.S. ed. T. reading guḷayantamhi katvāna. -- 3. to work, to be able, to have power A i.282. -- Pass. vuyhati (Sk. uhyate) to be carried (along) Vin i.106; Th 1, 88; ppr. vuyhamāna S iv.179; Th 1, 88; J iv.260; PvA 153; pass. also vahīyati PvA 56 (=nīyati); ppr. vahīyamāna Miln 397. -- pp. ūḷha (see soḍha), vuḷha & vūḷha (būḷha). -- Caus. vāheti to cause to go, to carry, to drive away Vin ii.237; Sn 282; J vi.443. -- ppr. vāhiyamāna (in med. pass. sense) J vi.125. -- pp. vahita (for vāh˚) Miln 346. Cp. ubbahati2. Vahana
Vahana
(adj. nt.) [fr. vah] 1. carrying VvA 316; DhA iii.472 (dhura˚). -- 2. a current J iv.260. Vahanaka
Vahanaka
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [vahana+ka] carrying, bearing J ii.97 (dhura˚). Vā
Vā
(indecl.) [Ved. vā, Av. vā, Gr. h)/, Lat. -- ve] part. of dis- junction: "or"; always enclitic Kh viii. (itthiyā purisassa vā; mātari pitari vā pi). Usually repeated vā -- vā (is it so -- ) or, either -- or, e. g. Sn 1024 (Brahmā vā Indo vā pi); Dh 1 (bhāsati vā karoti vā); PvA 74 (putto vā dhītā vā natthi?). -- with negation in second place: whether -- or not, or not, e. g. hoti vā no vā is there or is there not D i.61; taŋ patthehi vā mā vā VvA 226. -- Combined with other emphatic particles: (na) vā pana not even Pv ii.69 (manussena amanussena vā pana); vā pi or even Sn 382 (ye vā pi ca); Pv ii.614 (isayo vā pi ye santā etc.); iti vā Nd2 420; atha vā Dh 83 (sukhena atha vā dukhena); uda . . . vā Sn 232 (kāyena vācā uda cetasā vā). -- In verse vā is sometimes shortened to va, e. g. devo va Brahmā vā Sn 1024: see va4. Vāk
Vāk
(˚ -- ) [Vedic vāc, for which the usual P. form is vācā] speech, voice, talk; only in cpd. ˚karaṇa talk, speaking, conversation, as kālyāṇa -- vāk -- karaṇa good speech A ii.97; iii.195, 261; iv.296 sq.; 328; v.155; abstr. ˚ta A i.38. Cp. vākya. Vāka
Vāka
(nt.) [late Sk. valka, cp. P. vakka] the bark of a tree D i.167; Vin iii.34; J i.304; ii.141; Vism 249 = VbhA 232 (akka˚ & makaci˚); Miln 128. -- avāka without bark J iii.522.

-- cīra ( = cīvara) a bark garment worn by an ascetic Vin iii.34; A i.240, 295; J i.8, 304; v.132; Pug 55. -- maya made of bark Vin ii.130. Vākarā=vāgulā
Vākarā
= vāgulā; net, snare M i.153 (daṇḍa˚, Dvandva); ii.65. -- As vākara at J iii.541; as vākura at Th 1, 774. Vākya
Vākya
(nt.) [fr. vac: see vāk & vācā; Vedic vākya] saying, speech, sentence, usually found in poetry only, e. g. D ii.166 (suṇantu bhonto mama eka -- vākyaŋ); A ii.34 (sutvā arahato vākyaŋ); iii.40 (katvāna vākyaŋ Asitassa tādino); Sn 1102 ( = vacana Nd2 559); J iv.5; v.78; Ap 25; KhA 166 (˚opādāna resumption of the sentence); DhsA 324 (˚bheda "significant sentence" trsln). Vāgamā
Vāgamā
at Mhvs 19, 28 (tadahe v. rājā) is to be read (tadah' ev) āgamā, i. e. came on the same day. The passage is corrupt: see trsln p. 130. Vāgura & ˚ā
Vāgura
& ˚ā (f.) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. vāgurā; to Idg. *ṷeg to weave, as in Lat. velum sail, Ags. wecca = E. wick; Ohg. waba=Ger. wabe] a net; as ˚a J vi.170; KhA 47 (sūkara˚); ThA 78; as ˚ā J vi.582. Another P. form is vākarā. Vācaka
Vācaka
(adj.) [fr. vācā] reciting, speaking, expressing SnA 164 (lekha˚); sotthi˚ an utterer of blessings, a herald Miln 359. -- f. ˚ikā speech Sdhp 55. Vācanaka
Vācanaka
(nt.) [fr. vāceti] talk, recitation, disputation; invitation (?), in brāhmaṇa˚ J i.318 (karoti); iii.171; iv.391 (karoti); regarded as a kind of festival. At J iii.238 vācanaka is used by itself (two brahmins receiving it). It refers to the treating of brāhmaṇas (br. teachers) on special occasions (on behalf of their pupils: a sort of farewell -- dinner?). -- It is not quite sure how we have to interpret vācanaka. Under brāhmaṇa (cpds.) we have trsld it as "elocution show" (cp. our "speech day"). The E. trsln gives "brahmin feast"; Prof. Dutoit "Brahmanen -- backwerk" (i. e. special cakes for br.). vācana may be a distortion of vājana, although the latter is never found as v. l. It is at all events a singular expression. BR give vācanaka as a(/pac legome/non in meaning of "sweetmeat," with the only ref. Hārāvalī 152 (Calc. ed.), where it is expld as "prahelaka" (see P. paheṇaka). On the subject see also Fick, Soc. Glied. 137, 205. Vācanā
Vācanā
(f.) [fr. vāceti] recitation, reading; ˚magga way of recitation, help for reading, division of text (into chapters or paragraphs) Tikp 239; KhA 12, 14, 24. Vācapeyya
Vācapeyya
(1) amiable speech (vācā+peyya = piya) J vi.575 (=piyavacana C.). -- (2) spelling for vājapeyya (q. v.). -- 607 -- Vācasika
Vācasika
(adj.) [fr. vācā] connected with speech, verbal (contrasted with kāyika & cetasika) Vin iv.2; Pug 21; Miln 91; Vism 18; DhsA 324. -- As nt. noun at Miln 352 in meaning "behaviour in speech." Vācā
Vācā
(f.) [vac, vakti & vivakti; cp. vacaḥ (P. vaco); Vedic vāk (vāc˚) voice, word, vākya; Av. vacah & vaxs word; Gr. e)/pos word, o)/y voice, Lat. vox = voice, voco to call; Ohg. gi -- wahan to mention etc. The P. form vācā is a remodelling of the nom. vāc after the oblique cases, thus transforming it from the cons. decl. to a vowel (˚ā) decl. Of the old inflexion we only find the instr. vācā Sn 130, 232. The compn forms are both vācā˚ and vacī˚] word, saying, speech; also as adj. ( -- ˚) vaca speaking, of such a speech (e. g. duṭṭha˚ Pv i.32, so to be read for dukkha˚). -- D iii.69 sq., 96 sq., 171 sq.; S iv.132 (in triad kāyena vācāya manasā: see kāya iii., and mano ii.3); Sn 232 (kāyena vācā uda cetasā vā), 397, 451 sq., 660, 973, 1061 (=vacana Nd2 560); Nd1 504; DhsA 324 (vuccatī ti vācā). -- In sequence vācā girā byappatha vacībheda vācasikā viññatti, as a defn of speech Vin iv.2, expld at DhsA 324: see byappatha. -- vācaŋ bhindati: (1) to modify the speech or expression SnA 216 (cp. vākya -- bheda DhsA 324). -- (2) to use a word, so say something Vin i.157; M i.207 (Neumann, "das Schweigen brechen"); Miln 231 (i. e. to break silence? So Rh. D. trsln). Cp. the English expression "to break the news." -- vācā is mostly applied with some moral characterization, as the foll., frequently found: atthasaŋhitā A iii.244; kalyāṇa˚ A iii.195, 261; iv.296; v.155; pisuṇā & pharusā A i.128, 174, 268 sq.; iii.433; iv.247 sq.; DA i.74, 75; Nd1 220, and passim; rakkhita˚ S iv.112; vikiṇṇa˚ S i.61, 204; A i.70; iii.199, 391 sq.; sacca˚ A ii.141, 228; saṇhā A ii.141, 228; iii.244; iv.172; see also vacī -- sucarita; sammā˚ Vbh 105, 106, 235; VbhA 119; see also magga; hīnā etc. S ii.54.

-- ânurakkhin guarding one's speech Dh 281 (cp. vācāya saŋvara DhA iv.86). -- âbhilāpa "speechjabbering," forbidden talk Sn 49 (i. e. the 32 tiracchānakathā Nd2 561). -- uggata with well intoned speech Miln 10. -- yata restrained in speech Sn 850 ( = yatta gutta rakkhita Nd1 221). -- vikkhepa confusion of speech, equivocation D i.24 sq.; DA i.115. Vācetar
Vācetar
[n. ag. fr. vāceti] one who teaches or instructs D i.123. Vāceti
Vāceti
[Caus. of vac] to make speak or recite, to teach: see vatti. -- pp. vācita. Vāja
Vāja
[cp. Vedic vāja strength; Idg. *ṷeĝ, cp. vājeti, vajra (P. vajira); Lat. vegeo to be alert ["vegetation"], vigeo to be strong ["vigour"]; Av. vaƶra; Oicel. wakr = Ags. wacor=Ger. wacker; E. wake, etc.] 1. strength, a strength -- giving drink, Soma SnA 322. -> 2. the feather of an arrow J iv.260; v.130. Vājapeyya
Vājapeyya
[cp. Vedic vājapeya; see Macdonell, Vedic Mythology pp. 131 sq., 155, quoting Weber, Vājapeya; Banerjea, Public Administration etc. 92] the vājapeya sacrifice, a soma offering. Spelling often vāca˚ (mostly as v. l.); see S i.76; A ii.42; iv.151; Sn 303; It 21; Miln 219; J iii.518. Cp. peyya2. Vājita
Vājita
(adj.) [pp. of vājeti: see vāja] feathered (of an arrow) M i.429. Vājin
Vājin
(adj. -- n.) [fr. vāja] possessed of strength or swiftness; a horse, stallion Dāvs i.31; v.35 (sita˚), 53 (sasi -- paṇḍara˚); VvA 278. Vāṭa
Vāṭa
[cp. Class. Sk. vāṭa; on etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. vallus] enclosure, enclosed place Vin ii.154. See also yañña˚. Vāṭaka
Vāṭaka
( -- ˚) [fr. vāṭa] enclosure, circle, ring; in gala˚ the throat circle, i. e. the bottom of the throat Vism 258; DhsA 316; DhA i.394; caṇḍāla˚ circle of Caṇḍālas J vi.156; brāhmaṇa˚ of Brahmins DhA iv.177. Vāṇija
Vāṇija
[fr. vaṇij (vaṇik): see vaṇijjā; lit. son of a mer- chant; Vedic vāṇija] a merchant, trader Vin iii.6 (assa˚); Sn 614, 651, 1014; J v.156 (so read for va˚); Pv i.106; Dāvs i.58; KhA 224; SnA 251; PvA 47, 48, 100, 191, 215, 271. On similes with v. see J.P.T.S. 1907, 134. Vāṇijaka = vāṇijā
Vāṇijaka
= vāṇijā S ii.215 (sūci˚); J iii.540. Vāṇijjā
Vāṇijjā
(f.) [fr. vāṇija, cp. vaṇijjā] trade, trading Vin iv.6 (as one of the exalted professions); PvA 111, 201, 273, 277. Vāta
Vāta
[Vedic vāta, of vā; cp. Sk. vāti & vāyati to blow, vāyu wind; Lat. ventus, Goth. winds = wind; Ohg. wājan to blow, Oir. feth air; Gr. a)/hmi to blow, a)h/ ths wind, Lith. áudra storm etc.] wind. There exists a common distinction of winds into 2 groups: "internal" and "external" winds, or the ajjhattikā vāyo -- dhātu (wind category), and the bāhirā. They are discussed at Vbh 84, quoted at MA 30, 31, and expld in detail at VbhA 70 sq.; Vism 350. The bāhirā also at Nd2 562, and in poetical form at S iv.218. -- The internal winds (see below 2) comprise the foll.: uddhangamā vātā, adhogamā, kucchisayā, koṭṭhāsasayā, angam -- ang'-> ânusārino, satthakā, khurakā, uppalakā, assāso, passāso, i. e. all kinds of winds (air) or drawing pains (rheumatic?) in the body, from hiccup, stitch and stomach -- ache up to breathing. Their complement are the external winds (see below 1), viz. puratthimā vātā, pacchimā, uttarā, dakkhiṇā (from the 4 quarters of the sky), sarajā arajā, sītā uṇhā, parittā adhimattā, kāḷā, verambha˚, pakkha˚, supaṇṇa˚, tālavanta˚, vidhūpana. ˚ These are characterized according to direction, dust, temperature, force, height & other causes (like fanning etc.). -- 1. wind (of the air) S iv.218 (vātā ākāse vāyanti); Sn 71, 348, 591 (vāto tūlaŋ va dhaŋsaye), 622, 1074; J i.72; Pug 32; Vism 31. adhimatta v. S iv.56; mahā˚ S ii.88; A i.136, 205; ii.199; iv.312; veramba˚ (winds blowing in high regions: upari ākāse S ii.231) A i.137; Th 1, 598; J vi.326. -- 2. "winds" of the body, i. e. pains caused by (bad) circulation, sometimes simply (uncontrolled) movements in the body, sometimes rheumatic pains, or sharp & dragging pains in var. parts of the body Nett. 74. Also applied to certain humours, supposed to be caused by derangements of the "winds" of the body (cp. Gr. qumo/s; or E. slang "get the wind up"), whereas normal "winds" condition normal health: Pv ii.61 (tassa vātā balīyanti: bad winds become strong, i. e. he is losing his senses, cp. PvA 94: ummāda -- vātā). -- anga˚ pain in the limbs (or joints), rheumatism Vin i.205; udara˚ belly ache J i.393, 433; DhA iv.129; kammaja˚ birth -- pains Vism 500; kucchi˚ pains in the abdomen (stomach) VbhA 5; piṭṭhi˚ pains in the back ibid. -- 3. (fig.) atmosphere, condition, state; or as pp. (of vāyati) scented (with), full of, pervaded (by), at Vin i.39 (vijana˚ pervaded by loneliness, having an atmosphere of loneliness; Kern. Toev. s. v. vāta wrongly "troop, crowd." The same passage occurs at D iii.38, where Rh. D., Dial. iii.35, trsls "where the breezes from the pastures blow"; with expln vijana= vṛjana [see vajati], hardly justified. In same connection at A iv.88); Miln 19 (isi˚ -- parivāta scented with an atmosphere of Sages; Rh. D. differently: "bringing down the breezes from the heights where the Sages dwell"; forced). -- On vāta in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 135.

-- ātapa (Dvandva) wind and heat. In this phrase Bdhgh. takes vāta as wind (above 1) at Vism 31 (saraja & araja v.), but as (bodily) pain (above 2) at VbhA 5. See D iii.353; S ii.88; iii.54; v.379; A i.204; ii.117, 143, 199; iii.394 sq., 404; v.15, 127; Sn 52; J i.93; Miln 259, 314, 416; DhA iii.112. -- ābādha "wind disease," internal pains (not rheumatism) Vin i.205; Miln 134; Vism 41. -- āyana air hole, window Mhvs 5, 37; Dāva v.57. -- āhata struck by the wind Vism 63; DhA iii.328. -- erita moved by the wind (of trees) S v.123; A iii.232; VvA 175. -- kkhandha "wind bulk," mass of wind, region of the wind J vi.326. -- ghāta ("wind -- struck") the tree Cassia (or Cathartocarpus) fistula, a syn. of uddāla(ka) J iv.298; VvA 197; also as ˚ka at J v.199, 407; VvA 43. -- java swiftness of the wind J vi.274. -- dhuta shaken by the wind, swaying in the w. Vv 385, cp. VvA 174. -- passa the wind side DhA ii.17. -- pāna lattice, window Vin i.209; ii.148, 211; A i.101, 137; iv.231; J ii.325; v.214; vi.349 (read vātapān˚ for dvārapān˚); KhA 54; DhA i.211, 370; VvA 67; PvA 4, 216, 279. -- bhakkha living on air DhA ii.57. -- maṇḍala a whirlwind, gust of wind, storm, tornado [cp. BSk. vāyu -- maṇḍala at AvŚ i.256 with note] J i.72; SnA 224. -- maṇḍalikā id. Vin ii.113; iv. 345; J iv.430. -- yoga direction of the wind J ii.11. -- roga "wind disease," upset of the body, disturbance of the intestines, colic SnA 69; VvA 185. -- vassā (pl.) wind and rain PvA 55. -- vuṭṭhi id. SnA 34. -- vega force of the wind Sn 1074; PvA 47. -- sakuṇa a certain kind of bird ("wind -- bird") Nd1 87, where KhA 118 reads bhāsa˚. -- 608 -- Vātaka
Vātaka
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. vāta 2] belonging to or connected with the winds (of the body) in ahi -- vātaka -- roga a cert. (intestinal) disease (lit. "snake -- pain"), pestilence, plague; dysentery (caused by a famine and attacking men and beasts alike) DhA i.169, 187, 231; iii.437. Vāti
Vāti
see vāyati (in meaning "weave," as well as "blow"). Vātika
Vātika
(adj.) [fr. vāta 2, cp. *Sk. vātakin Halāyudha ii.451] connected with the winds (humours) of the body, having bad circulation, suffering from internal trouble, rheumatic (?) Miln 135, 298. Vātingaṇa
Vātingaṇa
[cp. *Sk. vātingaṇa] the egg plant, Solanum melongena J v.131; DhsA 320. Vāda
Vāda
[fr. vad: see vadati; Vedic vāda (not in RV!), in meaning of "theory, disputation" only in Class. Sk. -> The relation of roots vac: vad is like E. speak: say; but vāda as t. t. has developed quite distinctly the specified meaning of an emphatic or formulated speech = assertion or doctrine] 1. speaking, speech, talk, nearly always -- ˚, e. g. iti˚ hearsay, general talk M. i.133; S v.73; A ii.26; kumāraka˚ child -- talk or childish talk, i. e. in the manner of talking to a child S ii.218 sq.; cori˚ deceitful talk PvA 89 (so read with v. l. for T. bheri˚); dhammika˚ righteous speech A v.230; musā˚ telling lies, false speech A i.129; ii.141; iv.401; PvA 15. See under musā. -- adj. ( -- ˚) speaking up for, proclaiming, advertising D i.174 (sīla˚, paññā˚ etc.); Sn 913 (nivissa˚ dogmatist); A i.287 (kamma˚, kiriya˚, viriya˚). -- vādaŋ bhindati to refute a speech, to make a view discrepant (cp. bhinna -- vāda under 4!) SnA 45 (Māravādaŋ bh.). -- 2. what is said, reputation, attribute, characteristic Sn 859 (but SnA 550=nindā -- vacana); J i.2 (jāti˚ genealogy, cp. D i.137). See also cpd. ˚patha. -- 3. discussion, disputation, argument, controversy, dispute Sn 390, 827 (also as adj. hīna˚); DhA iii.390= Vin iv.1; Mhvs 4, 42 (sutvā ubhinnaŋ vādaŋ). -- 4. doctrine, theory put forth, creed, belief, school, sect SnA 539 sq.; in cpds.: ācariya˚ traditional teaching Miln 148; also "heterodoxy" Mhbv 96, cp. Dpvs v.30; uccheda˚ annihilistic doctrine Nd1 282: see under uccheda; thera˚ the tradition of the Theras, i. e. the orthodox doctrine or word of Gotama Buddha Mhvs 5, 2; 33, 97 sq.; Dpvs v.10, 14 (theravādo aggavādo ti vuccati), 51 (17 heretical sects, one orthodox, altogether 18 schools); dhuta˚ (adj.) expounding punctiliousness Vism 81 (=aññe dhutangena ovadati anusāsati). See under dhuta; bhinna˚ heretical sect (lit. discrepant talk or view) Dpvs v.39, 51 (opp. abhinnaka vāda); sassata˚ an eternalist Ps i.155.

-- ânuvāda the trsln of this phrase (used as adj.) at S iii.6 (see K.S. iii.7) is "one who is of his way of thinking." all kinds of sectarian doctrines or doctrinal theses D i.161; iii.115; S iii.6; iv.51, 340, 381; v.7; A iii.4; Nett 52. -- kāma desirous of disputation Sn 825. -- khitta upset in disputation, thrown out of his belief Vin iv.1 = DhA iii.390. -- patha "way of speech," i. e. signs of recognition, attribute, definition Sn 1076 (expld dogmatically at Nd2 563); A ii.9. -- sattha the science of disputation, true doctrine SnA 540. -- sīla having the habit of, or used, to disputes Sn 381. Vādaka
Vādaka
(adj. n.) [fr. vāda] doctrinal, sectarian, heretical; vagga˚ (either vagga1 or vagga2) professing somebody's party, sectarian, schismatic Vin iii.175 (anu -- vattaka+); vādaka -- sammuti doctrinal (sectarian) statement A iv. 347. Vādana
Vādana
(nt.) [fr. vādeti] playing on a musical instrument, music VvA 276. Vādika
Vādika1
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. vāda] speaking, talking (of) Mhvs 5, 60 (pāra˚ speaking of the farther shore, i. e. wishing him across the sea). Vādika
Vādika2
[?] a species of bird J vi.538 (v. l. vāj˚). Vādita
Vādita
(nt.) [pp. of vādeti] (instrumental) music D i.6; iii.183; A i.212; ii.209; DhA iv.75; DA i.77. Vāditar
Vāditar
[n. ag. fr. vādeti] a speaker, one who professes or has a doctrine D iii.232; A ii.246; iv.307. Vādin
Vādin
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. vāda] speaking (of), saying, asserting, talking; professing, holding a view or doctrine; arguing. Abs. only at A ii.138 (cattāro vādī four kinds of disputants); Sn 382 (ye vā pi c'aññe vādino professing their view). Otherwise -- ˚, e. g. in agga˚ "teacher of things supreme" Th 1, 1142; uccheda˚ professing the doctrine of annihilation Nett 111 (see uccheda); kāla˚, bhūta˚ attha˚ etc. speaking in time, the truth & good etc. D i.4, 165; A i.202; V. 205, 265, 328; caṇḍāla˚ uttering the word C. Mhvs 5, 60; tathā˚ speaking thus, consistent or true speaker D iii.135; Sn 430; dhamma˚ professing the true doctrine S iii.138; in combn with vinaya -- vādin as much as "orthodox" Vin iii.175; mahā˚ a great doctrinaire or scholar SnA 540; yatha˚ cp. tathā˚ -- ; sacca˚ speaking the truth A ii.212; the Buddha so -- called Th ii.252 f.; vaṇṇa˚ singing the praises (of) Vin ii.197. Vāna
Vāna1
(nt.) [fr. vā2: see vāyati1] sewing, stuffing (of a couch) DA i.86; DhA i.234 (mañca˚). Vāna
Vāna2
(nt.) [fr. vana, both in meaning 1 & 2 but lit. meaning overshadowed by fig.] lit. "jungle" (cp. vana1 etym.), fig. desire, lust ( = taṇhā craving) DhsA 409; KhA 151, 152. Vānaya
Vānaya
in combn suvānaya (S i.124, 238) is to be separated su -- v -- ānaya (see ānaya). Vānara
Vānara
[fr. vana] monkey, lit. "forester" Th 1, 399 = Dh 334; Th 1, 454; J ii.78 (Senaka), 199 sq. (Nandiya); iii.429; iv.308; v.445; Miln 201; DhA ii.22.

-- inda monkey king J i.279; ii.159. Vāpi
Vāpi
(f.) [cp. Epic & Classic Sk. vāpī] a pond; ˚jala water from a pond Mhvs 25, 66. Vāpita
Vāpita1
[pp. of vāpeti] sown J i.6 (+ropita, of dhañña). Vapita
Vapita2
[pp. of vāpeti] mown DhsA 238. Vāpeti
Vāpeti
[Caus. fr. vap, representing vapati1 as well as vapati2] to cause to sow [cp. Divy 213 vāpayituŋ] or to mow. -- pp. vāpita. *Vābhi
*Vābhi
[fr. vā to weave] appears in P. as nābhi in uṇṇa- nābhi (q. v.). -- 609 -- Vāma
Vāma
(adj.) [Vedic vāma] 1. left, the left side (always opposed to dakkhiṇa) J iv.407 (˚akkhi); Pv iv.78; Miln 295 (˚gāhin left -- handed); PvA 178 (˚passa left side). As "northern" at J v.416. vāmaŋ karoti to upset J iv.101. -- instr. vāmena on the left Sn p. 80. -> abl. vāmato from or on the left J iii.340; Pv ii.320 (as much as "reverse"; PvA 87 = vilomato). -- 2. beautiful; only in cpd. vām -- ūru having beautiful thighs D ii.266; J ii.443. So read at both places for vāmuru. Vāmana
Vāmana
(adj.) [fr. vāma1, cp. Ger. linkisch = uncouth] dwarfish; m. dwarf Vin i.91; DA i.148. Vāmanaka
Vāmanaka
(adj. -- n.) [fr. vāmana] dwarfish, crippled J ii.226; iv.137; v.424, 427. -- f. ˚ikā N. of certain elephants M i.178. Vāya
Vāya
[fr. vā, vāyati1] weaving PvA 112 (tunna˚). See tanta˚. Vāyati
Vāyati1
[Vedic vayati, vā, cp. Sk. veman loom, vāṭikā band, Gr. i)/tus willow, Ohg. wīda id.; Lat. vieo to bind or plait] to weave, only in pp. vāyita. -- Pass. viyyati Vin iii.259. pp. also vīta. -- Caus. II. vāyāpeti to cause to be woven Vin iii.259 ( = vināpeti); VvA 181. -- See also vināti. Vāyati
Vāyati2
[Vedic vāti & vāyati. See etym. under vāta] 1. to blow (only as vāyati) Vin i.48; D ii.107 (mahāvātā vāyanti); S iv.218 (vātā ākāse v.); J i.18; vi.530; Mhvs 12, 12. -- aor. vāyi S iv.290; J i.51. Cp. abhi˚, upa˚, pa˚. -- 2. to breathe forth, to emit an odour, to smell Pv i.61; PvA 14; as vāti (2nd sg. vāsi) at J ii.11 ( = vāyasi C.). -- pp. vāta only as noun "wind" (q. v.). Vāyana
Vāyana
(nt.) [fr. vā, vāyati2] blowing VbhA 71 (upari˚- vāta). Vāyamati
Vāyamati
[vi+ā+yam] to struggle, strive, endeavour; to exert oneself S iv.308; v.398; A iv.462 sq. (chandaŋ janeti v. viriyaŋ ārabhati cittaŋ paggaṇhāti); Pv iv.52; Vbh 208 sq.; Pug 51; Vism 2; DhA iii.336; iv.137; PvA 185. Vāyasa
Vāyasa
[cp. Vedic vāyasa a large bird, Epic Sk. vāyasa crow] a crow D i.9 (˚vijjā: see DA i.93); S i.124; Sn 447, 675; J i.500; ii.440; Miln 373; DhA iii.206; VvA 27. Vāyāma
Vāyāma
[fr. vi+ā+yam] striving, effort, exertion, en- deavour S ii.168; iv.197; v.440; A i.174 (chando+), 219; ii.93; iii.307; iv.320; v.93 sq.; J i.72; Vbh 123, 211, 235; VbhA 91; DhA iv.109; PvA 259. On vāyāma as a constituent of the "Path" (sammā˚) see magga 2.a. -- vāyāmaŋ karoti to exert oneself DhA iv.26; PvA 259. Vāyita
Vāyita
[pp. of vāyati1, cp. Divy 276 vāyita] woven M iii.253 (sāma˚), where Miln 240 in id. p. reads sayaŋ˚; Vin iii.259. Cp. vīta. Vāyin
Vāyin
(adj.) [fr. vāyati2] blowing (forth), emitting an odour, smelling PvA 87. Vāyima
Vāyima
(adj.) [fr. vā: vāyati1] weaving, woven; a˚ not woven Vin iii.224 (of a rug or cover). Vāyu
Vāyu
[Vedic vāya, fr. vā: vāyati2] wind Miln 385; PvA 156. See next. Vāyo
Vāyo
(nt.) [for vāyu, in analogy to āpo & tejo, with which frequently enumerated] wind D iii.268 (˚kasiṇa); M i.1, 424 = A iv.375; A v.7, 318, 353 sq. (˚saññā); S iii.207; Vism 172 (˚kasiṇa), 350 (def.). On vāyo as t. t. for mobility, mobile principle (one of the 4 elements) see Cpd. 3, 270; Dhs trsln § 962.

-- dhātu the wind element, wind as one of the four great elements, wind as a general principle (consisting of var. kinds: see enumd under vāta) Vbh 84; Vism 363; Nett 74; VbhA 55; VvA 15; DA i.194. Vāra
Vāra
[fr. vṛ, in meaning "turn," cp. vuṇāti] 1. turn, occasion, time, opportunity J i.58 (utu -- vārena utuvārena according to the turn of the seasons), 150; vi.294; Vism 431 (santati˚ interval); DA i.36; DhA i.47 (dve vāre twice); DhsA 215; VvA 47 (tatiyavāraŋ for the 3rd & last time); PvA 109, 135. -- 2. In pada˚ "track -- occasion," i. e. foot -- track, walk(ing), step J i.62, 213 (˚vārena) by walking (here spelt pāda˚), 506 (pādavāre pādavāre at every step). -- 3. In udaka˚ v. stands for vāraka (i. e. bucket), the phrase udakavāraŋ gacchati means "to go for water," to fetch water (in a bucket) J iv.492; DhA i.49. Dutoit (J. trsln iv.594) trsls "Wunsch nach Wasser." -- 4. bhāṇa˚ "turn for recitation," i. e. a portion for recital, a chapter SnA 194. See bhāṇa. Vāraka
Vāraka
[cp. Sk. vāra & vāraka] a pot, jar Vin ii.122 (three kinds: loha˚, dāru˚ and cammakhaṇḍa˚); J i.349; ii.70; iii.52 (dadhi˚); Miln 260; DhsA 377 (phānita˚). Vāraṇa
Vāraṇa1
(nt.) [fr. vṛ to obstruct] warding off, obstruction, resistance VbhA 194, 195 ( = nivāraṇa). -- ātapa˚ sunshade Dāvs i.28; v.35. Vāraṇa
Vāraṇa2
[cp. Vedic vāraṇa strong] 1. elephant J i.358; iv.137; v.50, 416; DA i.275; DhA i.389 (˚līḷhā elephant's grace); VvA 36, 257. -- 2. the Hatthilinga bird Th 1, 1064. Vāraṇa
Vāraṇa3
[for vāruṇī?] spirituous liquor J v.505. Vāraṇika
Vāraṇika
at Th 1, 1129 read cāraṇika (a little play): see Brethren 419 note. Vārattika
Vārattika
(adj.) [fr. varatta] consisting of leather or a strap J iii.185. Vāri
Vāri
(nt.) [Vedic vāri, cp. Av. vār rain, vairi -- sea; Lat. ūrīna = urine; Ags. waer sea; Oicel. ūr spray, etc.] water D ii.266; M iii.300; A iii.26 (in lotus simile); Th 1, 1273; Sn 353, 591, 625, 811; Vv 7910; J iv.19; Nd1 135, 203 (= udaka); Miln 121; PvA 77.

-- gocara living or life (lit. feeding) in water Sn 605. -- ja "water -- born," i. e. (1) a lotus Sn 845, cp. Nd1 203; -- (2) a fish Dh 34 ( = maccha DhA i.289); J v.464 (=Ānanda -- maccha C.), 507. -- da "water -- giver," i. e. cloud Dāvs iii.40. -- dhara water -- holder, water jug J v.4. -- bindu a drop of water Sn 392. -- vāha "watercarrier," i. e. cloud A ii.56; iii.53; S v.400; J vi.26, 543, 569; Kh vii.8. -- vārita, -- yuta, -- dhuta, -- phuṭa (Jain practice) D i.57; M i.377. Vārita
Vārita
[pp. of vāreti, Caus. of vṛ1] obstructed, hindered J iv.264; restrained (sabbavāri) see vāri.

-- vata (so read for cārita˚) "having the habit of selfdenial" (trsln) S i.28 (cp. K.S. i.39 & 320 with note & Bdhgh's expln: "kilesānaŋ pana chinnattā vataŋ phala -- samādhinā samāhitaŋ"), cp. bhāvanā -- balena vāritattā dhammā etc. at Tikp. 14. Vāritta
Vāritta
(nt.) [fr. vṛ, on the analogy of cāritta. The BSk. is vāritra: Mvyut 84] avoidance, abstinence Th 1, 591; Miln 133 (cārittañ ca vārittañ ca); Vism 11. Vāruṇī
Vāruṇī
(f.) [cp. Sk. vāruṇī, with only ref. in BR.: Hari- vaŋśa 8432] 1. spirituous liquor A iii.213; J i.251 (˚vāṇija spirit merchant), 268; vi.502. -- 2. an intoxicated woman; term for a female fortune -- teller J vi.500 (Vāruṇī 'va pavedhati; C. devatā -- bhūta -- paviṭṭhā yakkha -- dāsī viya gahitā, i. e. possessed), 587 (vāruṇī 'va pavedhentī; C. yakkh' āviṭṭhā ikkhaṇikā viya). Vāreti
Vāreti
[Caus. of vuṇāti, representing vṛ1 (to enclose, obstruct), as well as vṛ1 (to choose)] 1. to prevent, obstruct, hinder Pv ii.77 (vārayissaŋ I had the habit of obstructing; = nivāresiŋ PvA 102); VvA 68; Sdhp 364. -- 2. to ask in marriage ThA 266; PvA 55. -- Caus. II. vārāpeti to induce somebody to choose a wife J iv. 289. -- Note. vāriyamāna (kālakaṇṇi -- salākā) at J iv.2 read cār˚ (cp. PvA 272 vicāresuŋ id.). -- pp. vārita. -- 610 -- Vāreyya
Vāreyya
(nt.) [grd. of vāreti] marriage, wedding Th 2, 464, 472, 479; SnA 19. Vāla
Vāla1
[Vedic vāla; connected with Lat. adūlāre (ad+ ūlāre) to flatter (lit. wag the tail, like a dog), cp. E. adulation; Lith. valaī horse hair] 1. the hair of the tail, horse -- hair, tail Vin ii.195 = J v.335 (pahaṭṭha -- kaṇṇavāla with bristling ears & tail, of an elephant); J v.274 (so read for phāla, cp. p. 268, v. 113); PvA 285 (˚koṭi, so read for bāla˚); Sdhp 139. -- pallankassa vāle bhinditvā destroying the hair ( -- stuffing) of a couch Vin ii.170=DA i.88; cp. Vin iv.299: pallanko āharimehi vālehi kato. -- On v. in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 136. -- 2. a hair -- sieve [also Vedic] M i.229.

-- agga the tip of a hair A iii.403; Miln 250 (˚vedha hitting the tip of a hair, of an archer); DA i.66. -- aṇḍupaka a cert. material, head dress (?) A i.209 (so read for vālanduka); Vism 142; DhsA 115 (reads leḍḍūpaka). -- kambala a blanket made of horse -- tails D i.167; A i.240, 296; Pug 55. -- koṭi the tip of the hair PvA 285. -- rajju a cord made of hair S ii.238; A iv.129; J ii.161. -- vījanī a fan made of a Yak's tail, a chowrie D i.7. -- vedhin (an archer) who can hit a hair J i.58 (akkhaṇa -- vedhin+); Vism 150; Mhvs 23, 86 (sadda -- vedhin vijju -- vedhin+). The abstr. ˚vedhā hitting a hair, at Vism 150. -- fig. an acute arguer, a hair -- splitter; in standing phrase paṇḍitā nipuṇā kata -- para -- ppavādā vālavedhi -- rūpā at D i.26; M i.176; ii.122; see expln at DA i.117. Vāla
Vāla2
(adj.) [cp. Sk. vyāla] malicious, troublesome, difficult Vin ii.299 (adhikaraṇa). Vāla
Vāla3
(nt.) [ = vāri, cp. late Sk. vāla] water; only in cpd. ˚ja a fish (cp. vārija). Vālatta
Vālatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. vāla2] trouble, difficulty Vin ii.86 (in same context as vāla2); A i.54. Vāladhi
Vāladhi
[cp. Epic Sk. vāladhi] a tail (usually of a large animal) Th 1, 695; J i.63, 149; vi.302; Pv i.83; Mhvs 10, 59; VvA 252, Sdhp 621; Vism 36 quoting Ap. Vālikā
Vālikā
(f.) [a by -- form of vālukā] sand (often sprinkled in connection with festivities to make the place look neat) A i.253; J i.210; iii.52, 407; vi.64; Vism 420; DhA i.3, 111; VvA 160, 305; PvA 189. -- paritta˚ sand (on the head) as an amulet J i.396, 399. -- In cpds. usually vālika˚. Cp. vālukā.

-- puñja a heap of sand J vi.560. -- pulina sand bed or bank J ii.366; iii.389. -- vassa a shower of sand SnA 224. Vālin
Vālin
(adj.) [fr. vāla1] having a hairy tail Vv 647, cp. VvA 277. Vālukantāra
Vālukantāra
at VvA 332 probably for vāluka -- kantāra, i. e. sandy desert. See vaṇṇu. Vālukā
Vālukā
(f.) [cp. Vedic & Epic Sk. vālukā] sand. In compn usually vāluka˚. -- S iv.376; Vv 391; 441; Ap. 23; Nd2 p. 72 (Gangāya v.); J ii.258; iv.16; Pv ii.121; Mhvs 23, 86; DhA iii.243, 445; VvA 31, 177; Sdhp 244. See also vālika. Vāḷa
Vāḷa1
[cp. late Sk. vyāḍa, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 546] 1. a snake Vism 312 (so read for vaḷa). -- 2. a beast of prey A iii.102 (amanussa); J i.295; iii.345 (˚macchā predaceous fishes); Miln 23 (˚vana forest of wild beasts).

-- miga a beast of prey, predaceous animal, like tiger, leopard, etc. J vi.569; DhA i.171 (˚ṭṭhāna); iii.348 (˚rocanā); Vism 180, 239. Vāḷa
Vāḷa2
[misspelt for vāda?] music (?) Pgdp 83. Vāvatteti
Vāvatteti
(vi+ā+vṛt] to turn away (trs.), to do away with, remove M i.12 (aor. vāvattayi saŋyojanaŋ, expld at MA 87 as "parivattayi, nimmūlaŋ akāsi") = 122 (with v. l. vi˚, see p. 526); A ii.249 (v. l. vi˚). Vāsa
Vāsa1
[vas to clothe, see vasati1] clothing; adj. ( -- ˚) clothed in J vi.47 (hema -- kappana -- vāsase). Vāsa
Vāsa2
[vas to dwell, see vasati2] 1. living, sojourn, life Sn 191; Mhvs 17, 2 (anātha -- vāsaŋ vasati to lead a helpless life); PvA 12 (saraagga -- vāsaŋ v. live a life of concord); SnA 59 (lokantarika˚). Cp. pari˚, saŋ˚. -> 2. home, house, habitation Sn 40. vāsaŋ kappeti to live (at a place), to make one's home J i.242; PvA 47, 100. vāsaŋ upagacchati to enter a habitation (for spending the rainy season) PvA 32. In special sense "bed": see cpd. ˚ûpagata. -- 2. state, condition ( -- ˚), in ariya˚ holy state A v.29 sq.; brahmacariya˚ chastity PvA 61. -- 4. (adj.) ( -- ˚) staying, living, abiding, spending time Sn 19 (ekaratti˚), 414 (ettha˚). vassa˚ spending Lent PvA 20; vuttha˚ having spent Lent J i.183. Cp. ante -- vāsika -- vāsa.

-- attha home success, luck in the house, prosperity A ii.59, 61 sq. -- âgāra bedroom J iii.317. -- ûpagata (a) having entered one's hut or abode (for the rainy season) Sn 415. -- (b) gone to bed Pv ii.128; PvA 280. -- ghara living room, bedroom SnA 28 ( = kuṭī). -- dhura ordinary duty (lit. burden) or responsibility of living, or the elementary stages of saintliness SnA 194, 195 (contrasted to pariyatta -- dhura), 306 (: ganthadhura). Vāsa
Vāsa3
[cp. Class. Sk. vāsa, e. g. Mālatīm. 148, 4; fr. vā: see vāta] perfume J i.242; vi.42. Vāsaka, vāsika
Vāsaka,
vāsika (adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. vāsa2] living, dwelling; vāsaka: see saŋ˚. vāsika: gāma˚ villager Mhvs 28, 15; Bārāṇasi˚ living in Benares J iii.49. See also ante˚. Vāsati
Vāsati
[vāś, see vassati2] to cry (of animals) J vi.497. Vāsana
Vāsana1
(adj. -- nt.) [ = vasana1] clothing, clothed in ( -- ˚) PvA 173. Vāsana
Vāsana2
(adj. -- nt.) [ = vasana2] dwelling Dpvs v.18. Vāsanā
Vāsanā
(f.) [fr. vasati2 = vāsa2, but by Rh. D., following the P. Com̄. connected with vāseti & vāsa3] that which remains in the mind, tendencies of the past, impression, usually as pubba˚ former impression (Sn 1009; Miln 10, 263). -- Cp. Nett 4, 21, 48, 128, 133 sq., 153, 158 sq., 189 sq. -- Cp. BSk. vāsanā, e. g. MVastu i.345. Vāsara
Vāsara
[cp. Vedic vāsara matutinal, vasaḥ early] day (opp. night), a day Dāvs i.55; v.66. Vāsi
Vāsi
(f.) [cp. Sk. vāśī] 1. a sharp knife, axe, hatchet, adze (often combd with pharasu) J i.32, 199; ii.274; iii.281; iv.344; Miln 383; 413; DhA i.178 (tikhiṇā vāsiyā khaṇḍâkhaṇḍikaŋ chinditvā: cutting him up piecemeal with a sharp knife); KhA 49. -- ˚jaṭa handle of a mason's adze Vin iv.168; S iii.154; A iv.127. -- 2. a razor J i.65; ii.103; iii.186, 377. Vāsita
Vāsita
[fr. vāseti2] 1. scented J i.65; ii.235 (su˚); iii.299; v.89; Vism 345. -- 2. [preferably fr. vāseti1 = vasati2] established, made to be or live, preserved Mhvs 8, 2. So also in phrase vāsita -- vāsana (adj.) or vāsana -- vāsita one who is impressed with (or has retained) a former impression Sn 1009 (pubba˚, =vāsanāya vāsita -- citta SnA 583); Miln 263 (id.); Vism 185 (+bhāvita -- bhāvana). If taken as vāseti2, then to be trsld as "scented, filled, permeated," but preferably as vāseti1. -- Cp. pari˚. Vāsitaka
Vāsitaka
(adj.) [fr. vāsita] scented, perfumed Vin iv.341 (vāsitakena piññākena nhāyeyya: should bathe with perfumed soap). -- f. vāsitikā (scil. mattikā) scented clay Vin ii.280 (id.). Vāsin
Vāsin1
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. vas1] clothed in, clad Sn 456 (san- ghāṭi˚), 487 (kāsāya˚); Pv iii.16 (sāhunda˚); J iii.22 (nantaka˚); iv.380 (rumma˚); f. vāsinī Vin iii.139 (chanda˚, paṭa˚ etc.) = VvA 73. -- 611 -- Vāsin
Vāsin2
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. vas2] liking, dwelling (in) Sn 682 (Mern -- muddha˚), 754 (āruppa˚); PvA 1 (Mahāvihāra˚), 22 (Anga -- Magadha˚), 47 (Sāvatthi˚), 73 (Bārāṇasi˚) Vāseti
Vāseti1:
Caus. of vasati2 (q. v.). Vāseti
Vāseti2
[Denom. fr. vāsa perfume] to perfume, to clean or preserve by means of perfumes, to disinfect (?) Vin i.211 (here in the sense of "preserve, cure," probably as vāseti of vasati2); ii.120; J iv.52 (aṭṭhīni, for the sake of preservation); v.33 (saso avāsesi sake sarīre, expld as "sake sarīre attano sarīraŋ dātuŋ avāsesi vāsāpesī ti attho, sarīrañ c' assa bhakkh' atthāya adāsi." In this passage vāseti is by Kern, Toev. s. v. taken as Caus. of vas to eat, thus "he made eat, feasted, entertained by or on his own body"), 321 (kusumehi vāsetvā: perfume). See also vasati2 (Caus.). -- pp. vāsita. -> Caus. II. vāsāpeti J v.33. Vāha
Vāha
(adj. -- n.) [fr. vah] 1. carrying, leading; a leader, as in sattha˚ a caravan leader, merchant J i.271; Vv 847; 8420; VvA 337. -- 2. a cart, vehicle; also cartload Sn p. 126 (tila˚ = tila -- sakaṭa SnA 476); J iv.236 (saṭṭhi˚sahassāni 60,000 cartloads); Miln 80 (˚sataŋ). Vāhaka
Vāhaka
[fr. vāheti] that which carries (or causes to carry) away, i. e. a current, torrent, flow; only in combn with udaka˚ a flood of water A i.178; Vin i.32; Miln 176. Vāhana
Vāhana
[fr. vāheti] 1. (adj.) carrying, pulling, drawing Vin ii.122 (udaka˚ -- rajju); J i.136 (kaṭṭha˚ gathering fire -- wood); PvA 127 (ratha -- yuga˚). -- 2. (nt.) conveyance, beast of burden, monture Vin i.277 (˚āgāra stable, garage); Sn 442 (Māra sa˚ with his elephant); Pv ii.926; DhA i.192 (hatthi˚, elephant -- mount; cp. p. 196, where five. vāhanāni, belonging to King Pajjota, are enumd, viz. kaṇeru, dāsa, dve assā, hatthi). -- bala˚ army & elephants, i. e. army in general, forces J i.262. Vāhanaka
Vāhanaka
= vāha 1; VvA 337. Vāhasā
Vāhasā
(indecl.) [an instr. of vāha, formed after the manner of balasā, thāmasā, used adverbially] owing to, by dint of, on account of, through Vin iv.158; Th 1, 218, 1127; Miln 379; VvA 100. Vāhin
Vāhin
(adj. -- n.) [fr. vāha] carrying, conveying J vi.125 (haya˚ running by means of horses, i. e. drawn by horses); also as poetical expression for "horse" J vi.252 ( = sindhava C.). The reading vāhin at Mhvs 22, 52 is given as v. l. for T. vājin in P.T.S. ed. -- f. vāhinī, an army J iii.77 (miga˚; expld as "aneka -- sahassa -- sankhā migasenā"); vi.581. Vāheti
Vāheti
is Caus. of vahati (q. v.). Vi
Vi
(indecl.) [prefix, resting on Idg. *ṷi "two," as conno- tation of duality or separation (Ger. "ent -- zwei"), which is contained in viŋśati, num. for "twenty" (see vīsati), cp. Sk. viṣu apart, Gr. i)/dios private (lit. separate); also Sk. u -- bhau both; and *ṷidh, as in Lat. dīvido = divide. A secondary (compar.) formation in Sk. vitara further, farther, Goth. wipra against, Ger. wider] 1. (a) inseparable prefix of separation and expansion, in original meaning of "asunder," semantically closely related to Lat. dis -- & Ger ver -- . Often as base -- prefix in var. meanings (see below 1 -- 4), also very frequent as modifying prefix (in combn with other primary prefixes like ā, ni, pa, paṭi, saŋ), where its prevailing character is one of emphasis. -- (b) The native grammarians define vi- either as "vividha" (i. e. our meaning 2): see Bdhgh. at SnA 136 (viharati=vividhaŋ hitaŋ harati); and Vism 179 vividhaŋ khittaŋ=vikkhittaŋ; see also under viggaṇhati; or "prātilomya" (i. e. meaning 3): Nirukta (ed. Roth) i.3; or paraphrase it by su˚ or suṭṭhu (i. e. meaning 4): see under vimāna & vippasanna. The latter meaning also in Hemacandra's Anek' ārtha -- sangraha (ed. Calc.) 7, 15: "śreṣṭhe 'tīte nānārthe" (i. e. Nos. 4 & 2). -- (c) vi˚ occurs also as distributive (repetitional) prefix in reduplication compounds (here closely resembling paṭi˚ and the negative a˚), like cuṇṇa -- vicuṇṇa piecemeal, chidda -- vicchidda holes upon holes, vaṭṭa -- vivaṭṭa, etc. -- Contracted forms are vy˚ (=viy˚ before vowels) and vo˚ (=vi+ ava); the guṇa & vriddhi form is ve˚. -- II. Meanings. -- 1. denoting expansion, spreading out; fig. variety or detail, to be trsld by expressions with over or about (cp. Lat. e -- ), as: ˚kampati shake about, ˚kāseti open out, ˚kirati scatter about, ˚kūjati sing out (=upa -- nadati C), ˚carati move about (=ā -- hiṇḍati), ˚churita sprinkled about, ˚jāyati bring forth, ˚tāna "spread out," ˚tthāra ex -- tension, de -- tail, ˚dāleti break open, ˚dhammati whirl about, ˚dhāyaka providing, ˚pakirati strew all over, ˚pphāra pervading, ˚pphārika ef -- fulgence, ˚bhajati ex -- plain, ˚bhatta dis -- tributed, ˚bhāga division, distribution, ˚ravati shout out, ˚rūhana growing up, ˚rocati shine out, ˚ssajjati give out, ˚ssaṭṭha sent out, ˚ssara shouting out, ˚ssuta far -- famed. -- 2. denoting disturbance, separation, mixing up (opp. saŋ˚), as given with "away" or "down," or the prefixes de -- and dis -- , e. g. ˚kasita burst asunder, ˚kubbana change, i. e. miracle (meta -- morphosis), ˚kkaya sell ("ver -- kaufen"), ˚kkhambhati de -- stroy, ˚kkhāleti wash off (=ācameti), ˚kkhepa de -- rangement, ˚gata dis -- appeared (used as defn of vi˚ at ThA 80), ˚galita dripping down, ˚ggaha separation, ˚cinati dis -- criminate, ˚jahati dis -- miss, ˚desa foreign country (cp. verajjaka), ˚naṭṭha destroyed, ˚nata bending down, ˚nāsa de -- struction, ˚nicchaya dis -- crimination, ˚nodaka driving out, ˚pāteti to be destroyed, ˚ppalapati to talk confusedly, ˚rājeti discard as rāga, ˚rodha destruction, ˚lumpati break up, ˚vitta separated, ˚vidha mixed, ˚veka separation, ˚vāha carrying away, i. e. wedding. -- 3. denoting the reverse of the simple verb, or loss, difference, opposite, reverse, as expressed by un -- or dis -- , e. g. ˚asana mis -- fortune, ˚kaṭika unclean, ˚kappa change round, ˚kāra per -- turbation, dis -- tortion, ˚kāla wrong time, ˚tatha un -- truth, ˚dhūma smoke -- less, ˚patti corruption, ˚parīta dubious, ˚ppaṭipanna on the wrong track, ˚bhava non -- existence (or as 4 "more" bhava, i. e. wealth), ˚mati doubt, ˚mānana dis -- respect, ˚yoga separation, ˚raja fault -- less, ˚rata abs -- taining, ˚rūpa un -- sightly, ˚vaṭa unveiled, ˚vaṇṇeti defame, ˚vāda dis -- pute, ˚sama uneven, ˚ssandati overflow, ˚ssarita for -- gotten, ˚siṭṭha distinguished, ˚sesa difference, distinction. -- 4. in intensifying sense (developed fr. 1 & 2), mostly with terms expressing per se one or the other of shades of meanings given under 1 -- 3; to be trsld by "away," out, all over, "up," or similarly (completely), e. g. ˚ākula quite confused, ˚katta cut up, ˚kopeti shake up, ˚garahati scold intensely, ˚chindati cut off, ˚jita conquered altogether, ˚jjotita resplendent, ˚tarati come quite through, ˚niyoga close connection, ˚nivatteti turn off completely, ˚pariṇāma intense change, ˚ppamutta quite released, ˚ppasanna quite purified, ˚pphalita crumpled up, ˚bandhana (close) fetter, ˚ramati cease altogether, ˚sahati have sufficient strength, ˚sukkha dried up, ˚suddha very bright, ˚ssamati rest fully (Ger. aus -- ruhen), ˚haññati to get slain. Vikaca
Vikaca
(adj.) blossoming DA i.40. Vikaṭa
Vikaṭa
[vi+kata, of kṛ] changed, altered, distorted; dis- gusting, foul, filthy Pgdp 63 (˚ānana with filthy mouth). -- nt. filth, dirt; four mahā -- vikaṭāni applied against snake -- bite, viz., gūtha, mutta, chārikā, mattikā Vin i.206. -- Cp. vekaṭika.

-- bhojana filthy food D i.167; M i.79. Vikaṇṇa
Vikaṇṇa
(adj.) [vi+kaṇṇa] having deranged or bent corners, frayed Vin i.297; ii.116. Vikaṇṇaka
Vikaṇṇaka
[fr. vikaṇṇa] a kind of arrow (barbed?) J ii.227, 228. -- 612 -- Vikata
Vikata
changed, altered Vin i.194 (gihi -- vikata changed by the g.) Vikati
Vikati
(f.) [fr. vi+kṛ] "what is made of something," make, i. e. 1. sort, kind J i.59 (ābharaṇa˚ kind of ornament), 243 (maccha -- maŋsa˚); Miln 403 (bhojana˚ all kinds of material things); Vism 376 (bhājana˚ special bowl); VbhA 230 (pilandhana˚); DhA ii.10 (khajja˚). -- 2. product, make; vessel: danta˚ "ivory make," i. e. vessels of ivory M ii.18; D i.78; J i.320. -- 3. arrangement, get up, assortment; form, shape J v.292 (mālā˚ garlandarrangement).

-- phala an assortment of fruit J v.417. Vikatika
Vikatika
(f.) [fr. vikati] a woollen coverlet (embroidered with figures of lions, tigers etc.) D i.7 (cp. DA i.87); A i.181; Vin i.192; ThA 55 (Ap v.10: tūlikā˚). Vikatta
Vikatta
(adj.) [pp. of vi+kantati2] cut open J vi.111 (v. l. ˚kanta). Vikattana
Vikattana
(nt.) [fr. vi+kantati2] cutter, knife Vin iii.89 (tiṇha go˚) M i.449; J vi.441. Vikatthati
Vikatthati
[vi+katthati] to boast, show off S ii.229; J i.454 ( = vañcana -- vacanaŋ vadati C.). -- pp. vikatthita. Vikatthana
Vikatthana
(nt.) [fr. vi+katth] boasting SnA 549. Vikatthita
Vikatthita
(nt.) [fr. vikatthati] boasting J i.359. Vikatthin
Vikatthin
(adj.) [fr. vi+katth] boasting; only neg. a˚ not boasting, modest A v.157; Sn 850; Miln 414. Vikanta
Vikanta
= vikatta; cut open, cut into pieces J ii.420. Vikantati
Vikantati
[vi+kantati2] to cut J v.368 ( = chindati C.). - pp. vikatta & vikanta. Vikantana
Vikantana
(nt.) [fr. vikantati] knife M i.244. Cp. vikat- tana. Vikappa
Vikappa
[vi+kappa] 1. thinking over, considering, thought, intention Nd 97, 351. -- 2. doubtfulness, indecision, alternative, appld to the part. vā SnA 202, 266; KhA 166; DA i.51; PvA 18. -- attha˚ consideration or application of meaning, exposition, statement, sentence J iii.521; SnA 433, 591. -- Cp. nibbikappa. Vikappana
Vikappana
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. vikappeti] 1. assignment, apportioning Vin iv.60 = 123=283. At Vin iv.122 two ways of assigning a gift are distinguished: sammukhāvikappanā & parammukhā˚. All these passages refer to the cīvara. -- 2. alternative, indecision, indefiniteness (=vikappa), as t. t. g. applied to part. ca and vā, e. g. SnA 179 ("ca"); KhA 166 ("vā"). Vikappita
Vikappita
[pp. of vikappeti] prepared, put in order, arranged, made; in combn su˚ well prepared, beautifully set Sn 7; VvA 188 (manohara+). -- Bdhgh. at SnA 21 interprets ˚kappita as chinna "cut," saying it has that meaning from "kappita -- kesa -- massu" (with trimmed hair & beard), which he interprets ad sensum, but not etymologically correctly. Cp. vikappeti 5. Vikappin
Vikappin
(adj.) [fr. vikappa] having intentions upon ( -- ˚), designing A iii.136 (an -- issara˚ intentioning unruliness). Vikappiya
Vikappiya
(adj.) [grd. of vikappeti] to be designed or intended Sdhp 358. Vikappeti
Vikappeti
[vi+kappeti] 1. to distinguish, design, intend, to have intentions or preferences, to fix one's mind on (loc. or acc.) Sn 793 = 802 (=vikappaŋ āpajjati Nd1 97), 918 (id. Nd1 351). -- 2. to detail, describe, state KhA 166; SnA 43. -- 3. to assign, apportion, give Vin i.289 (cīvaraŋ); iv.121 (id.). -- 4. to arrange, put on, get ready Vin i.297. -- 5. to change, alter, shape, form J v.4 (ambapakkaŋ satthena v.; C. not quite correctly =vicchindati). -- pp. vikappita . Vikampati
Vikampati
[vi+kamp] to shake; fig. to be unsettled, to waver, to be in doubt S iv.71 (cittaŋ na vikampate); Th 1, 1076 (vidhāsu na v.; trsln Brethren p. 366: "who is not exercised about himself in this way or in that"); Nd1 195 (tīsu vidhāsu, as at Th 1, 1076; as comment on Sn 843); J vi.488. -- ppr. med. vikampamāna, only neg. a˚ not hesitating, settled, well balanced, resolved Sn 842; J iv.310; v.495 (C. anolīyamāna); vi.175 (C. nirāsanka). -- pp. vikampita. Vikampin
Vikampin
(adj.) [fr. vikampati] shaking; only neg. a˚ not shaking, steadfast, steady, settled Sn 952; Vv 5022. Vikaroti
Vikaroti
[vi+kṛ] to alter, change, disturb; aor. vyakāsi J ii.166 ( = vikāraŋ akāsi parivattayi C.); so read for T. vyākāsi. -- Imper. Pass. 3 sg. vikiriyyatu "let him be disturbed" J iii.368 (after Kern, Toev. s. v. One may take it to vikirati, q. v.). -- pp. vikaṭa & vikata. See also vikubbati, etc. Vikala
Vikala
(adj.) [Sk. vikala] defective, in want of, deprived, (being) without Th 2, 391; Pv iv.1 (bhoga˚); J iv.278; vi.232; Miln 106, 307 (udakena); DA i.222; PvA 4 (hattha˚). Cp. vekalla. Vikalaka
Vikalaka
(adj.) [vikala+ka] being short of, wanting Vin i.285. Vikasati
Vikasati1
[vi+kas] to open (out), to expand, to blossom fully (of flowers). -- pp. vikasita. Caus. vikāseti to open J vi.364 (hatthaŋ). Vikasati
Vikasati2
[vi+kāś, cp. okāsa] to shine; Caus. vikāseti to illuminate Davs v.47 (mukh' ambuja -- vanāni vikāsayanto). Vikasita
Vikasita
[pp. of vikasati1] burst asunder, blossoming, opened (wide), expanded, usually appld to flowers J iii.320 ( = phālita C.); iv.407; VvA 40, 206 (of eyes); SnA i 39; DA i.40. Vikāra
Vikāra
[fr. vi+kṛ] 1. change, alteration, in mahā˚ great change Vism 366, 367 (of two kinds: anupādiṇṇa & upādiṇṇa, or primary & secondary, i. e. the first caused by kappa -- vuṭṭhāna, the second by dhātu -- kkhobha); KhA 107 (vaṇṇa˚). -- 2. distortion, reversion, contortion, in var. connections, as kucchi˚ stomach -- ache Vin i.301; bhamuka˚ frowning DhA iv.90; raukha˚ grimace, contortion of the face, J ii.448; PvA 123; hattha˚ hand -- figuring, signs with the hand, gesture Vin i.157 (+hattha -- vilanghaka) = M i.207 (reads vilangaka); Vin v.163 (with other similaṛ gestures); J iv.491; v.287; vi.400, 489. -- Kern. Toev. s. v. vikāra is hardly correct in translating hattha -- vikārena at Vin i.157 by "eigenhandig," i. e. with his own hand. It has to be combd with hattha -- vilanghakena. -- 3. perturbation, disturbance, inconvenience, deformity Vin i.271, 272 (˚ŋ sallakkheti observe the uneasiness); Miln 224 (tāvataka v. temporary inconvenience), 254 (˚vipphāra disturbing influence); SnA 189 (bhūta˚ natural blemish). -- 4. constitution, property, quality (cp. Cpd. 1572, 1681) Vism 449 (rūpa˚ material quality); VvA 10 (so correct under maya in P.D. vol. iii. p. 147). -- 5. deception, fraud PvA 211 (=nikati). -- Cp. nibbikāra. Vikāla
Vikāla
[vi+kāla] "wrong time," i. e. not the proper time, which usually means "afternoon" or "evening," and therefore often "too late." -- Vin iv.274 ( = time from sunset to sunrise); J v.131 (ajja vikālo to -- day it is too late); VvA 230 (id.). -- loc. vikāle (opp. kāle) as adv., meaning: (1) at the wrong time Vin i.200; Sn 386; PvA 12. -- (2) too late Vv 84 (=akāle VvA 337); DhA i.356; iv.69. -- (3) very late (at night) J v.458.

-- bhojana taking a meal at the wrong time, i, e. in the afternoon Vin i.83; D i.5; A i.212; ii.209; Sn 400; DA i.77. -- 613 -- Vikāsa
Vikāsa
[vi+kas: see vikasati1] opening, expansion J vi.497 (vana˚ opening of the forest); Dhtp 265. Vikāsika
Vikāsika
[fr. vi+kṛṣ: see kasati] a linen bandage (Kern: "pluksel") Vin i.206 (for wound -- dressing). May be a dern fr. kāsika, i. e. Benares cloth, the vi˚ denoting as much as "a kind of." Vikāsitar
Vikāsitar
[fr. vi+kṛṣ, kasati] one who plucks or pulls, bender of a bow, archer J vi.201. Vikāsin
Vikāsin
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. vi+kāś: see vikasati2] illumining, delighting Mhvs 18, 68. Vikāseti
Vikāseti
see vikasati. Vikiṇṇa
Vikiṇṇa
[pp. of vikirati] scattered about, strewn all over, loose Vin i.209 (undurehi okiṇṇa˚; overrun); J v.82.

-- kesa with dishevelled hair J i.47; Vism 415. -- vāca (adj.) of loose talk S i.61 ( = asaññata -- vacana K.S. i.320); Pug 35 (same expln PugA 217): J v.77 (=patthaṭavacana C.). Vikitteti
Vikitteti
[vi+kitteti] to slander Miln 276 (opp. pakitteti). Vikiraṇa
Vikiraṇa
(nt. & adj.) [fr. vikirati] 1. scattering, dispersing; being scattered or dispersed D i.11 (cp. DA i.96). -- Vbh 358 (T. reads vikī˚; v. l. vikāraṇa & vikkir˚) = Pug 23 (which reads nikaraṇā; trsl. "guilefulness"). In this connection VbhA 493 interprets vikiraṇa (or ˚ā) as "denial, abnegation" (pretext?), by saying "nâhaŋ eva karomī ti pāpānaŋ vikkhipanato vikiraṇā." -- With ref. to Arahantship (the dissolution of the body) at DhA iii.109 in formula bhedana -- vikiraṇa -- viddhaŋsanadhamma i. e. "of the nature of total destruction." Cp. BSk. formula śatana -- patana -- vikiraṇa -- vidhvaŋsana ( -- dharmatā) AvŚ i.96 (where S. Speyer in Index considers vikaraṇa the correct form)=Divy 299 (reading cyavanapatana˚)=Lal. V. 242. See also S iii.190 (under vikirati). -- 2. (adj.) scattering, spending, squandering, f. ˚ī Sn. 112. Vikirati
Vikirati
[vi+kirati] to scatter about, sprinkle, spread, mix up (trs. & intrs.) M i.127; S iii.190 (in simile of playing children: paŋsv' āgārakāni hatthehi ca pādehi ca vikiranti [mix up] vidhamanti [fall about] viddhaŋsenti [tumble over] vikīḷanikaŋ karonti, describing the scrambling and crowding about. In quite a diff. interpretation appld to Arahantship: see under vikiraṇa, as also in the same chapter (S iii.190 § 11 sq.) in phrase rūpaŋ vikirati vidhamati etc. where it is meant in trs. sense of "destroy"; thus vi˚ in the same verb in meaning (vi˚ 1 & 2); S iv.41 (kāyo vikiri [came to pieces] seyyathâpi bhusa -- muṭṭhi); J i.226; Pv ii.38 (vikiri, v. l. for okiri); Miln 101, 237 (lokadhātu vikireyya , would fall to pieces; combd with vidhameyya & viddhaŋseyya "drop & tumble," denoting total confusion and destruction. Similarly on p. 250 = 337 "vāri pokkhara -- patte vikirati vidhamati viddhaŋsati": the water scatters, drops & falls off; appld figuratively to bad qualities at same passage); SnA 172. -- Pass. vikiriyyati & vikirīyati may be taken either to vikirati or vikaroti (cp. kiriyati); DhsA 19 (suttena sangahitāni pupphāni na vikirīyanti na viddhaŋsiyanti: get scattered and fall off); ppr. vikirīyamāna PvA 271 (with sprawling or confused limbs); imper. vikiriyyatu J iii.368. -- pp. vikiṇṇa. Vikīlanika
Vikīlanika
(adj. & nt.) [fr. vi+kīḷana] playing about; in phrase vikīḷanikaŋ karoti (intrs.) to play all over or excitedly (lit. to make play; vi˚ in meaning vi˚ 1) S iii.190; as trs. to put out of play, to discard (vi˚ 3) ibid. (rūpaŋ etc. v. karoti). Vikujjhita
Vikujjhita
[vi+pp. of kujjheti] made angry, angered, annoyed, vexed M ii.24 (so read for vikujjita). Vikuṇita
Vikuṇita
(adj.) [vi+kuṇita] distorted, deformed Vism 346 (˚mukha); PvA 123 (id.). Cp. vikūṇa. Vikuddha
Vikuddha
(adj.) [vi+kuddha] free fr. anger J v.308. Vikubbati
Vikubbati
[vi+kubbati, med. of karoti] to change round, transform, do magic J iii.114 ( = parivatteti); Dpvs i.40 (vikubbeyya); also in phrase iddhi -- vikubbati to work transformation by magic (psychic) potency Kvu 55. -- ppr. f. vikubbantī Vv 112 (iddhiŋ working magic, =vikubban' iddhiyo vaḷañjentī VvA 58), and vikubbamānā (iddhi˚) Vv 311. -- pp. *vikubbita miracle: see vikubbana. Vikubbana
Vikubbana
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. vikubbati] miraculous trans- formation, change; assuming a diff. form by supernatural power; miracle Th 1, 1183; Ps ii.174, 210; Dpvs viii.6 (˚esu kovida); Mhvs 19, 19; Miln 343; Vism 309, 316 sq. More specific as iddhi -- vikubbana (or ˚ā), i. e. by psychic powers, e. g. D ii.213; Vism 373 sq.; or vikubbanā iddhi Vism 378, 406; VvA 58; DhsA 91 (the var. forms of iddhi). Cp. Kvu trsl. 50; Cpd. 61. -- The BSk. form is represented by the pp. of vikubbati, i. e. vikurvita, e. g. AvŚ i.258; Divy 269 etc. Vikulāva(ka)
Vikulāva(ka)
(adj.) [vi+kulāva] having no nest, without a nest S i.224 (ka); J i.203. Vikūjati
Vikūjati
[vi+kūjati] to sing (like a bird), warble, chirp, coo PvA 189 ( = upanadati). -- ppr. med. vikūjamāna Vin iv.15; J v.12. Vikūṇa
Vikūṇa
[cp. vikuṇita & vikāra] distortion, grimace (mukha˚) SnA 30. Vikūla
Vikūla
(adj.) [vi+kūla] sloping down, low -- lying A i.35 (contrasted with ukkūla). We should expect ni˚ for vi˚, as in BSk. (see ukkūla). Vikūlaka
Vikūlaka
(adj.) [fr. vikūla] contrary, disgusting Th 2, 467 ( = paṭikūla ThA 284). Vikesikā
Vikesikā
(adj. -- f.) [vi+kesa+ika] with loose or dishevelled hair Vin i.15. Vikoṭṭita
Vikoṭṭita
[vi+koṭṭita] beaten, cut, slain, killed Miln 304 (koṭṭita+). Vikopana
Vikopana
(nt.) [fr. vi+kup] upsetting, injuring, doing harm J ii.330 = iv.471; Miln 185, 266; DhsA 145. Vikopin
Vikopin
(adj.) [vi+kup] shaking, disturbed; neg. a˚ J vi.226. Vikopeti
Vikopeti
[vi+kopeti] 1. to shake up PvA 253. -- 2. to upset, spoil, to do harm Vin iii.47; Miln 276 (vikitteti+). -- 3. to destroy J vi.68 (padaŋ a track). Vikkanta
Vikkanta
[pp. of vi+kram] heroic J i.119; ii.211; iv.271; Miln 400 (˚cārin, of a lion). Vikkandati
Vikkandati
[vi+kandati] to cry out, lament, wail J vi.525. Vikkama
Vikkama
[fr. vi+kram] 1. walking about, stepping; in ˚malaka walking -- enclosure, "peripatei_on," corridor J i.449. -- 2. strength, heroism J ii.211, 398; iii.386 (˚porisa). Vikkamati
Vikkamati
[vi+kamati] to have or show strength, to exert oneself J iii.184 ( = parakkamati); Miln 400. -- pp. vikkanta. Vikkaya
Vikkaya
[vi+kaya] selling, sale A ii.209; Sn 929 (kaya+); J i.121; ii.200; iv.115 (majja˚); Miln 194 (˚bhaṇḍa goods for sale, merchandise); PvA 29, 113 (˚bhaṇḍa). Vikkayika & ˚kāyika
Vikkayika
& ˚kāyika (adj. -- n.) [fr. vikiṇāti] 1. a salesman, vendor DhA iv.50 (ā). -- 2. for sale J i.201 (ā); DhA i.269 (a). Vikkiṇāti
Vikkiṇāti
[vi+kiṇāti] to sell J i.227, 377 (ger. vikkiṇitvā); PvA 100 (id.), 191 (aor. vikkiṇi). -- inf. vikketu ŋ J iii.283. -- grd. vikkiṇiya = for sale DhA i.390 (˚bhaṇḍa merchandise). -- 614 -- Vikkīḷita
Vikkīḷita
(nt.) [vi+kīḷita] sporting, amusement, pastime Nett 124 (in appld meaning). Vikkuthita
Vikkuthita
(adj.) [vi+kuthita] boiled, ˚duddha boiled milk KhA 60 (T. reads vikkuthita -- duṭṭha -- vaṇṇa, but App. SnA Index p. 870: vikkuṭṭhita -- duddha˚). The corresp. passage at Vism 260 has duṭṭha -- khīra -- vaṇṇa, which seems faulty. Vikkhaṇḍati
Vikkhaṇḍati
[vi+khaṇḍati] to break (up), destroy, spoil Sdhp 450 (ger. ˚iya). -- pp. vikkhaṇḍita. Vikkhaṇḍita
Vikkhaṇḍita
[pp. of vikkhaṇḍati] broken, ruined, spoilt Sdhp 436. Vikkhambha
Vikkhambha
[vi+khambha 1] diameter (lit. support) J v.268, 271; Mhvs 18, 27. Vikkhambhati
Vikkhambhati
[fr. vi+khambha 2] (intrs.) to become stiff (with fear), to be scared or frightened Ap. 50. Vikkhambhana
Vikkhambhana
(nt.) [vi+khambha+na] withdrawal of support, stopping (the nīvaraṇas or any evil influences or corruptions: kilesa˚), arresting, paralysing; elimination, discarding Ps ii.179; Nd1 6; Nd2 338, 606b; J iii.15 (kilesa˚+metta -- bhāvana -- jhān' uppatti); iv.17; Vism320; Sdhp 455. -- Usually in foll. cpds.: ˚pahāna elimination (of character -- blemishes) by discarding J ii.230; Nd2 203; Vism 5; DhsA 352; SnA 19; ˚vimutti emancipation by elimination J ii.35; ˚viveka arrest by aloofness DhsA 12, 164; Vism 140, 141. Vikkhambhanatā
Vikkhambhanatā
(f.) [vikkhambhana+tā] state of having undone or discarded, removal, destruction, paralysis Nett 15, 16. Vikkhambhika
Vikkhambhika
(adj.) [fr. vikkhambheti] leading to arrest (of passions), conducive to discarding (the blemishes of character) Vism 114. Vikkhambhita
Vikkhambhita
[pp. of vikkhambheti] arrested, stopped, paralysed, destroyed Ps ii.179; Tikp 155, 320 sq.; Dukp 10. Vikkhambhiya
Vikkhambhiya
(adj.) [grd. of vikkhambheti] in neg. a˚ not to be obstructed or overcome D iii.146. Vikkhambheti
Vikkhambheti
[vi+khambheti] (trs.) to "unprop," un- settle, discard; to destroy, extirpate, paralyse (cp. khambha 2 and chambheti), give up, reject Sn 969 ( = abhibhavati etc. Nd1 492); Vism 268; J i.303 (jhānabalena kilese v.); Miln 34 (nīvaraṇe); DhA iv.119 (pītiŋ vikkhambhetvā: here in meaning "set up, establish"? Or to produce such pīti as to be called pharaṇā pīti, thus vikkhambheti=pharati 2? Or as Denom. fr. vikkhambha "diameter"=to establish etc.?); VvA 156 (read ˚etvā.) -- pp. vikkhambhita. Vikkhalita
Vikkhalita
(nt.) [vi+khalita2] stumbling, fault, faux pas A i.199. Vikkhāyitaka
Vikkhāyitaka
(adj. -- nt.) [vi+khāyati( = khādita)+ka] "pertaining (or: of the nature of) to being eaten up," i. e. a (mental) representation obtained by contemplation of a corpse gnawed by animals, one of the asubhakammaṭṭhānas Vism 110=Miln 332 (˚saññā); Vism 179, 194. Vikkhālita
Vikkhālita
[pp. of vikkhāleti] washed off, cleansed Vin ii.201; Vism 59. Vikkhāleti
Vikkhāleti
[vi+khāḷeti] to wash off, to wash one's face (mukhaŋ) rinse one's mouth Vin ii.201; S ii.269; J i.266, 459; PvA 75, 209, 241 ( = ācameti). -- pp. vikkhālita Vikkhitta
Vikkhitta
(adj.) [vi+khitta] 1. upset, perplexed, mentally upset, confused S ii.122 (˚citta); v.157, 263 sq.; A iii.174 (˚citta); v.147 (id.); Vism 410 ( = uddhacc' ânugata). -- a˚ undisturbed, composed, collected A v.149; It 94; PvA 26. Vikkhittaka
Vikkhittaka
(adj.) [vi+khitta+ka] 1. scattered all over, deranged, dismembered; of a dead body with respect to its limbs (as one of the asubha -- kammaṭṭhāna's: cp. vikkhāyika & vicchiddaka) Vism 110 (˚saññā) = Miln 332; Vism 179 (with defn vividhaŋ khittaŋ vikkhittaŋ; aññena hatthaŋ aññena pādaŋ aññena sīsan ti evaŋ tato tato khittassa chava -- sarīrassa adhivacanaŋ), 194. -- hata˚ killed & cut up Vism 179. -- 2. citta˚ of unbalanced or deranged mind Miln 308. Vikkhipana
Vikkhipana
(nt.) [cp. BSk. viksepa refusal AvŚ i.94] refusal, denial VbhA 493 (see vikiraṇa 1). Vikkhipatti
Vikkhipatti
[Pass. of vikkhipati] to be disturbed J i.400 (gocare, in . . .); Miln 337 (cittaŋ). -- pp. vikkhitta. Vikkhīṇa
Vikkhīṇa
[vi+khīṇa] totally destroyed, finished, gone Th 2, 22. Vikkhīyati
Vikkhīyati
[vi+khīyati] to go to ruin, to be destroyed, to be lost J v.392 (fut. ˚īyissati). -- pp. vikkhīṇa. Vikkhepa
Vikkhepa
[vi+khepa] 1. disturbance, derangement J vi.139. -- 2. perplexity, confusion D i.59. -- vācā˚ equivocation, senseless talk D i.24. -- 3. in citta˚ & cetaso v. upset of mind, unbalanced mind, mental derangement: citta˚ S i.126; Pug 69; cetaso A iii.448; Dhs 429; Vbh 373. -- avikkhepa equanimity, balance D iii.213; A i.83; Ps i.94; Dhs 160, 430; Vbh 178 sq., 231 sq., 266 sq., 279 sq., 285 sq.

-- paṭibāhana exclusion or warding off of confusion (of mind) or disturbance Vism 244; VbhA 227. Vikkhepika
Vikkhepika
(adj.) [fr. vikkhepa], in phrase amarā˚: see under amarā; another suggestion as to explanation may be: khipa = eel -- basket, thus vikhep -- ika one who upsets the eel -- basket, i. e. causes confusion. Vikkheḷikā
Vikkheḷikā
(adj. -- f.) [vi+kheḷa+ikā] having saliva dropping from the mouth (of sleeping women), slobbering Vin i.15. Vikkhobhita
Vikkhobhita
[pp. of vikkhobheti: see khobha] thoroughly shaken up or disturbed Miln 377. Vikhādana
Vikhādana
(nt.) [vi+khādana] biting, chewing Dhs 646, 740, 875; DhsA 330. Vigacchati
Vigacchati
[vi+gacchati] to depart, disappear; to decrease D i.138 (bhogakkhandha vigacchissati); Sdhp 523. -> pp. vigata. Vigata
Vigata
(˚ -- ) [pp. of vigacchati, in act. (reflexive) & med- pass. function] gone away, disappeared, ceased; having lost or foregone (for -- gone = vi -- gata), deprived of, being without; often to be trsld simply as prep. "without." It nearly always occurs in compn, where it precedes the noun. By itself rare, e. g. Sn 483 (sārambhā yassa vigatā); VvA 33 (padumā mā vigatā hotu). Otherwise as follows: ˚āsa Pug 27; ˚āsava SnA 51; ˚icchā Dh 359; ˚khila Sn 19; ˚cāpalla D i.115; DA i.286; ˚chavivaṇṇa ThA 80 (=vivaṇṇa); ˚jīvita PvA 40; ˚paccaya Vism 541; Tikp 7, 21, 59; ˚paṭighāta DhA iv.176; ˚mada Mhvs 34, 94; ˚raja Sn 517; J i.117; ˚valita PvA 153. Cp. vīta˚ in similar application and meaning. Vigama
Vigama
( -- ˚) [fr. vi+gam] going away, disappearance, departing, departure Dāvs v.68 (sabb' āsava˚); DhsA 166; Sdhp 388 (jighacchā˚), 503 (sandeha˚). Vigayha
Vigayha
see vigāhati. Vigarahati
Vigarahati
[vi+garahati] to scold (intensely), to abuse Vin ii.161 (dhammiŋ kathaŋ); iii.46; S i.30 (ariyadhammaŋ); Miln 227. Vigaḷati
Vigaḷati
[vi+galati] to drop Miln 250. -- pp. vigaḷita. Cp. vinigaḷati. Vigaḷita
Vigaḷita
[pp. of vigaḷati] dropping, dripping (down) PvA 56. -- 615 -- Vigāhati
Vigāhati
[vi+gāhati] to plunge into, to enter S i.180 (ger. vigāhiya); J v.381 (˚gāhisuŋ, aor.); Mhvs 19, 29 (here as ˚gāhetvā). The ger. is also vigayha at Sn 2, 825; cp. Nd1 163 ( = ogayha pavisitvā). At Vin ii.106 we should prefer to read viggayha for vigayha. Viggaṇhati
Viggaṇhati
[vi+gaṇhati] 1. to take hold of, to quarrel, to be in disharmony with; only in ger. viggayha disputing, quarrelling, fighting Vin ii.106 (read gg for g! Bdhgh on p. 315: rubbing against each other); Ud 69; Sn 844, 878; Nd1 285 ( = uggahetvā parāmasitvā). -> 2. to stretch out, disperse, divide, spread; ger. viggayha Vv 501 (hattha -- pāde v.; expld as "vividhehi ākārehi gahetvā" VvA 209). Viggaha
Viggaha
[fr. vi+gah: see gaṇhati 3] 1. dispute, quarrel J i.208 (ñātakānaŋ aññamaññaŋ viggaho); Miln 90; often combd with kalaha, e. g. Vin ii.88; A iv.401; Nd1 302; Miln 383. -- 2. taking up form (lit. seizing on), "incorporation," form, body D ii.210 = 226 (sovaṇṇo viggaho mānusaŋ viggahaŋ atirocati); Vin i.97 (manussa˚); ii.286 (id.); iv.215 (tiracchānagata -- manussa˚), 269 (id.); J v.398=405 (=sarīra C); vi.188 (rucira˚); Dāvs i.42 (uju -- somma˚). -- 3. (t.t.g.) resolution of words into their elements, analysis, separation of words Miln 381; VvA 226 (pada˚); SnA 168; ThA 202 (pada˚). Viggahita
Viggahita
[pp. of viggaṇhati] taken hold of, seized; prejudiced against, seduced by ( -- ), in phrase dhamm' uddhacca -- viggahita -- mānasa A ii.157; Ps ii.101. Cp. BSk. vigrāhita, e. g. AvŚ i.83 = 308 (Ajātaśatru Devadatta˚); Divy 419, 557, 571; Jtm 143, 146. Viggāhika
Viggāhika
(adj.) [fr. viggaha] of the nature of dispute or quarrel; only in cpd. ˚kathā quarrelsome speech, dispute D i.8; S v.419; Sn 930; DA i.91. Vighaṭṭita
Vighaṭṭita
[vi+ghaṭṭita] struck, knocked, beaten J v.203 (a˚). Vighāṭana
Vighāṭana
(adj.) [fr. vighāṭeti] unfastening, breaking up, overthrowing Th 1, 419. Vighāṭita
Vighāṭita
[pp. of vighāṭeti, Denom. fr. vi+ghāṭa, cp. gantheti] overthrown, destroyed Sdhp 314. Vighāta
Vighāta
[vi+ghata] 1. destruction, killing, slaughter PvA 150 (vighātaŋ āpajjati = vihaññati). -- as adj. slain, beaten Pv iv.53 (=vighātavā vihata -- bala). -> 2. distress, annoyance, upset of mind, trouble, vexation D iii.249; M i.510; A ii.197 sq.; iv.161 (˚pariḷāha); Sn 814 (=ugghāta pīḷana ghaṭṭana upaddava Nd1 140=170); Th 2, 450 (bahu˚ full of annoyance). -- sa˚ connected with, or bringing vexation, with opp. a˚ free of annoyance: S iii.8; v.97; A i.202 sq.; iii.3, 429; Th 2, 352; ThA 242. -- 3. opposition M i.499.

-- pakkhika having its part in adversity, associated with trouble M i.115; S v.97; DhsA 382. -- bhūmi ground for vexation Sn 830 (cp. Nd1 170 with expln as above). Vighātavant
Vighātavant
(adj.) [vighāta+vant] full of annoyance or vexation S iii.16 sq.; A ii.143 ( = discontented); Th 1, 899 (in same connection, neg.); PvA 260 (= distressed). Vighāsa
Vighāsa
(& ˚ghasa) [fr. vi+ghasati] remains of food, broken meat, scraps Vin iv.265, 266; J ii.288; iii.113, 191, 311 (read ˚ghasa for metre); v.268 (do.); Sdhp 389.

-- âda one who eats the remains of food Vin i.200 (panca˚ -- satāni) J i.348; ii.96; iii.191; DhA ii.128. Also N. of an animal J vi.538. Vicakka
Vicakka
(adj.) [vi+cakka] without wheels J i.378 (sakaṭa). Doubtful in phrase asani˚, where used as a noun, probably in diff. meaning altogether ( = asani -- pāta?): see S ii.229 (="falling of a thunderbolt" K.S. ii.155); D iii.44, 47. Vicakkhaṇa
Vicakkhaṇa
(adj. -- nt.) [vi+cakkhaṇa, of cakṣ to see, attentive, watchful, sensible, skilful; (nt.) application, attention, wit S i.214 = Sn 186 (appamatta+; trsln K.S. i.277 "discerning wit"); Sn 583; J iv.58; vi.286; Miln 216; Vism 43; SnA 238; Sdhp 200, 293. Vicakkhu
Vicakkhu
(adj.) [vi+cakkhu] eyeless, blind, in phrase ˚kamma making blind or perplexed S i.111, 118 ("darkening their intelligence" trsln) [cp. BSk. vicakṣu -- karma MVastu iii.416; Lal V. 490]. Vicakkhuka
Vicakkhuka
(adj.) [vicakkhu+ka] not seeing, blinded, dulled in sight, half -- blind Miln 295 (Rh. D. "squinting"). Vicaya
Vicaya
[fr. vi+ci: see vicinati] search, investigation, examination S iii.96 (vicayaso, i. e. thoroughly); Pug 25; Miln 340 (dhamma˚); Nett 1, 2, 10; DhsA 147; Sdhp 466. For dhamma˚ see sambojjhanga. Vicaraṇa
Vicaraṇa
(adj. -- nt.) [fr. vicarati] going about, circulating, moving, travelling J v.484 (˚bhaṇḍa travelling merchandise). Vicarati
Vicarati
[vi+carati] to go or move about in (loc.), to walk (a road = acc.), to wander Sn 444 (raṭṭhā raṭṭhaŋ vicarissaŋ, fut.), 696 (dhamma -- maggaŋ); Nd1 201, 263; Pv iii.73 (aor. vicari); DhA i.66; PvA 4, 22, 33, 69, 120, 185 (= āhiṇḍati); Sdhp 133. -- In Sn often with loke (in this world), e. g. Sn 466, 501, 845, 846, 864. -> Caus. vicāreti; pp. vicarita, vicārita & viciṇṇa. Cp. anu˚. Vicarita
Vicarita
[pp. of vicarati] occupied by ( -- ˚), haunted, fre- quented VvA 163. Vicāra
Vicāra
[vi+cāra] investigation, examination, consideration, deliberation. -- Defd as "vicaraṇaŋ vicāro, anusañcaraṇan ti vuttaŋ hoti" Vism 142 (see in def. under vitakka). -- Hardly ever by itself (as at Th 1, 1117 mano˚), usually in close connection or direct combn with vitakka (q. v.). Vicāraka
Vicāraka
(adj.) [fr. vicāreti] 1. looking after something; watching J i.364 (ghara˚). -- 2. investigating; (n.) a judge Mhvs 35, 18. Vicāraṇā
Vicāraṇā
(f.) & a˚ (nt.) [fr. vicāreti] 1. investigation, search, attention Sn 1108, 1109 (f. & nt.); J iii.73 (˚paññā). -- 2. arranging, planning, looking after; scheme J i.220; ii.404 (yuddha˚); vi.333 sq. Vicārita
Vicārita
[pp. of vicāreti] thought out, considered; thought D i.37 (vitakkita+, like vitakka -- vicāra, cp. DA i.122), 213 (id.); SnA 385. Vicāreti
Vicāreti
[Caus. of vicarati] 1. to make go round, to pass round, to distribute PvA 272 (salākaŋ). -- 2. to think (over) S v.156 (vitakketi+). -- 3. to investigate, examine, test J ii.413; iii.258; VvA 336 (a˚ to omit examining). -- 4. to plan, consider, construct J ii.404; vi.333. -- 5. to go about (some business), to look after, administer, provide J ii.287; iii.378; Mhvs 35, 19 (rajjaŋ); PvA 93 (kammante). -- pp. vicārita & viciṇṇa. Vicāliya
Vicāliya
(adj.) [grd. of vi+cāleti] in neg. a˚ not to be shaken, not wavering Sdhp 444. Vicikicchati
Vicikicchati
[vi+cikicchati] lit. "dis -- reflect," to be dis- tracted in thought, i. e. to doubt, hesitate D i.106; S ii.17, 50, 54; iii.122, 135; J iv.272 (2 sg. vicikicchase); SnA 451; DA i.275; -- pp. vicikicchita. Vicikicchā
Vicikicchā
(f.) [fr. vicikicchati] doubt, perplexity, uncer- tainty (one of the nīvaraṇas) D i.246; iii.49, 216, 234, 269; S i.99; iii.106 sq. (dhammesu v. doubt about the precepts); iv.350; A iii.292, 438; iv.68, 144 sq.; v.144; Sn 343, 437, 540; Vv 81 ( = soḷasa -- vatthuka -- vicikicchā VvA 317); J ii.266; Pug 59; Vbh 168, 341, 364; Dhs 425; Nett 11; Tikp 108, 122, 152 sq., 171, 255, 275; Dukp 170 sq., 265 sq., 289 sq.; Vism 471 (=vigatā cikicchā ti v. etc.), 599 sq.; VbhA 209; VvA 156; MA 116; Sdhp 459. -- As adj. ( -- ˚) vicikiccha, e. g. tiṇṇa˚ one who has overcome all doubt D i.71, 110; M i.18; A ii.211; iii.92; 297 sq.; iv.186; 210. -- See also Cpd. 242; Dhs. trsl. § 425 n. 1; and cp. kathankathā, kicchati, vecikicchin. -- 616 -- Vicikicchita
Vicikicchita
(nt.) [pp. of vicikicchati] doubt Pv iv.137. Vicikicchin
Vicikicchin
see ve˚. Viciṇṇa
Viciṇṇa
[pp. of vicāreti] thought out; in neg. a˚ not thought out; reading however doubtful, better to be taken as adhiciṇṇa, i. e. procedure, method D i.8 = M ii.3=S iii.12 (vi˚ as v. l.). -- DA i.91 reads āciṇṇa (cp. M i.372). Vicita
Vicita
[pp. of vi+ci to gather] in phrase ˚kāḷaka bhatta rice from which the black grains have been separated D i.105; M ii.8; DA i.274; as vicita -- bhatta in same sense at J iv.371. Vicitta
Vicitta
(& ˚citra) (adj.) [vi+citta1] various, variegated, coloured, ornamented, etc. J i.18, 83; Pv ii.19; Vv 6410 (citra); Miln 338, 349; VvA 2, 77; Sdhp 92, 245. -- vicitra -- kathika eloquent Miln 196. Vicinati
Vicinati
(˚cināti) [vi+cināti] 1. to investigate, examine, discriminate S i.34 (yoniso vicine dhammaŋ); A iv.3 sq. (id.); Sn 658, 933; Ap 42; J vi.373; Nd1 398; Nett 10, 22 (grd. vicetabba), 25 sq.; Miln 298; Dpvs iv.2; DhsA 147; PvA 140; Sdhp 344. -- ger. viceyya discriminating; with discrimination D ii.21 (doubled: with careful discrimn); iii.167 (˚pekkhitar); Sn 524 sq.; usually in phrase viceyya -- dāna a gift given with discrimination S i.21; A iv.244; J iv.361; v.395; Pv ii.972; DhA iii.221; Mhvs 5, 35. -- 2. to look for, to seek, to linger, to choose Pv iii.64 (aor. vicini = gavesi C.); iv.142 (ger. viceyya= vicinitvā PvA 240); J i.419. -- See also pacinati. Vicinana
Vicinana
(nt.) [fr. vicinati] discrimination Vism 162. Vicinteti
Vicinteti
[vi+cinteti] to think, consider Sn 1023; Mhvs 4, 28 (vicintiya, ger.); 17, 38. Vicuṇṇa
Vicuṇṇa
[vi+cuṇṇa] crushed up, only in redupl. -- iter. formation cuṇṇa -- vicuṇṇa crushed to bits, piecemeal J i.26; iii.438 etc. See under cuṇṇa. Vicuṇṇita
Vicuṇṇita
[pp. of vi+cuṇṇeti] crushed up J i.203 (viddhasta+). Viccuta
Viccuta
[vi+cuta] fallen down J v.403 (expld as viyutta C.); Dh i.140. Vicchaḍḍeti
Vicchaḍḍeti
[vi+chaḍḍeti] to throw out, to vomit; in late (Sanskritic) Pāli at Sdhp 121 (pp. vicchaḍḍita) and 136 (nt. vicchaḍḍana throwing out). Vicchandanika
Vicchandanika
(& ˚ya) (adj.) [vi+chanda+na+ika] fit to disinterest, "disengrossing," in ˚kathā sermon to rid of the desire for the body Vin iii.271 (Sam. Pās. on Pār. iii.3, 1); & ˚sutta the Suttanta having disillusionment for its subject (another name given by Bdhgh to the Vijayasutta Sn 193 -- 206) SnA 241 sq. (˚ya). Cp. vicchindati. Vicchādanā
Vicchādanā
(f.) [vi+chādanā] concealment Pug 19, 23. Vicchika
Vicchika
[cp. Vedic vṛścīka: Zimmer, Altind. Leben 98] a scorpion D i.9 (˚vijjā scorpion craft); Vin ii.110; A ii.73; iii.101, 306; iv.320; v.289 sq.; J ii.146; Miln 272, 394; Vism 235; DA i.93. Vicchita
Vicchita
in phrase balavicchita -- kārin at Miln 110 is to be read balav' icchita -- kārin "a man strong to do what he likes," i. e. a man of influence. Vicchidda
Vicchidda
(adj.) [vi+chidda] only in (redupl.) combin. chidda˚ full of little holes, perforated all over J i.419. Vicchiddaka
Vicchiddaka
[vi+chidda+ka] "having holes all over," referring to one of the asubha -- kammaṭṭhānas, obtained by the contemplation of a corpse fissured from decay A ii.17 (˚saññā); v.106, 310; Miln 332; Vism 110, 178, 194. Vicchinda
Vicchinda
[fr. vi+chind as in vicchindati] breaking off, cutting off J ii.436, 438 (kāya˚). Kern, Toev. s. v. considers it as a corruption of vicchanda. See vicchandanika. Vicchindati
Vicchindati
[vi+chindati] to cut off, to interrupt, to prevent PvA 129 (˚itu -- kāma). The BSk. form is vicchandayati [ = vi+Denom. of chando] e. g. Divy 10, 11, 383, 590. -- pp. vicchinna. Vicchinna
Vicchinna
[pp. of vicchindati] cut off, destroyed Sdhp 34, 117, 370, 585. Vicchurita
Vicchurita
[vi+churita] besprinkled, sprinkled about VvA 4, 280 ( = ullitta). Viccheda
Viccheda
[vi+cheda] cutting off, destruction J iv.284 (santati˚). a˚ uninterruptedness VvA 16. Vijaṭana
Vijaṭana
(nt.) [fr. vijaṭeti] disentangling Miln 11. Vijaṭita
Vijaṭita
[pp. of vijaṭeti] disentangled S i.165. Vijaṭeti
Vijaṭeti
[vi+Caus. of jaṭ: see jaṭita] 1. to disentangle, to comb out; fig. to unravel, explain Vin ii.150 (bimbohanaŋ kātuŋ tūlāni v.); Miln 3; Vism 1, 2. -- 2. to plunder J iii.523. -- pp. vijaṭita. Vijana
Vijana
(adj.) [vi+jana] deserted of people, lonely S i.180; ThA 252. -- ˚vāta: see vāta. Vijambhati
Vijambhati
[vi+jambhati] to rouse oneself, to display activity, often appld to the awakening of a lion S iii.84; A ii.33; J i.12, 493; v.215 (˚amāna, ppr., getting roused), 433, 487; vi.173; Vism 311. Vijambhanā
Vijambhanā
(f.) [vi+jambhanā] arousing, activity, energy J vi.457. Vijambhikā
Vijambhikā
(f.) [fr. vijambhati] yawning (before rising) i. e. drowsiness, laziness, in ster. combn with arati & tandī S i.7 (trsln "the lanquid frame"); A i.3; Vbh 352; Vism 33. As vijambhitā at S v.64; J i.506 (here in meaning "activity, alertness," but sarcastically as sīha˚); VbhA 272 ( = kāya -- vināmanā). Vijaya
Vijaya
[fr. vi+ji] victory; conquering, mastering; triumph over ( -- ˚) D i.46; A iv.272 (idha -- loka˚); SnA 241 sq. (˚sutta, another name for the Kāya -- vicchandanika -- sutta). Vijayati
Vijayati
(& vijinati) [vi+jayati] to conquer, master, triumph over DA i.250 (vijeti); fut. vijessati J iv.102. -> ger. vijeyya Sn 524, 1002; and vijetvā J iii.523. -- pp. vijita. Cp. abhi˚. Vijahati
Vijahati
[vi+jahati] to abandon, forsake, leave; to give up, dismiss Pv iii.615 (sarīraŋ); VvA 119; Pot. vijaheyya Pv iv.110; fut. vijahissati S ii.220; Pv ii.67 (jīvitaŋ). -- ger. vihāya Mhvs 12, 55; & vijahitvā Vin iv.269; J i.117; iii.361 (iddh' ânubhāvena attabhāvaŋ). -- grd. vihātabba A iii.307 sq.; Miln 371. -- Pass. vihīyati J vi.499 (eko v. = kilamissati C.). -- pp. vijahita & vihīna. Vijahana
Vijahana
(nt.) [fr. vijahati] abandoning, relinquishing DA i.197. Vijahita
Vijahita
[pp. of vijahati] left, given up, relinquished; only in neg. a˚ J i.71, 76, 94, 178. Vijātā
Vijātā
(f.) [pp. of vijāyati] (a woman) having borne J ii.140; Pv ii.23 ( = pasūtā PvA 80).

-- kāla time of birth J ii.140. -- ghara birth -- chamber Miln 301. -- 617 -- Vijāti
Vijāti
in ˚loha a kind of copper VbhA 63. Vijāna
Vijāna
(nt. -- adj.) [fr. vijānāti] understanding; as adj. ( -- ˚) in cpds. du˚ (dubbijāna) hard to understand S i.60; J iv.217; and su˚ easy to perceive Sn 92; J iv.217. Vijānana
Vijānana
(nt.) [the diaeretic form of Sk. vijñāna: cp. jānana = ñāṇa] recognition, knowing, knowledge, discrimination Vian 452; DhsA 141. Vijānāti
Vijānāti
[vi+jñā] to have discriminative (dis = vi˚) know- ledge, to recognize, apprehend, ascertain, to become aware of, to understand, notice, perceive, distinguish, learn, know Sn 93 sq., 763; Dh 64, 65; Nd1 442. See also viññāṇa 2a. -- imper. 2nd sg. vijāna Sn 1091 (=ājāna Nd2 565b); Pv iv.55 (=vijānāhi PvA 260); ppr. vijānanto Sn 656, 953; Pv iv.188; PvA 41; and vijānaŋ neg. a˚ ignorant Dh 38, 60; It 103. Pot. 1st sg. (poet.) vijaññaŋ J iii.360 (= vijāneyyaŋ C.); Sn 1065, 1090, 1097 (=jāneyyaŋ Nd2 565a); & vijāniyaŋ Vv 415 (paṭivijjhiŋ C.); 3rd sg. vijañña Sn 253, 316, 967 (cp. Nd1 489). -- ger. vijāniya Mhvs 8, 16; viññāya Sn 232; & viññitvā Vin iv.264. -- aor. (3rd pl.) vijāniŋsu Mhvs 10, 18. -- Pass. viññāyati PvA 197; fut. viññissati Th 1, 703. -- inf. viññātuŋ S iii.134. -- grd. viññātabba (to be understood) VbhA 46; & viññeyya (q. v.). -- pp. viññāta. -- Caus. II. viññāpeti (q. v.). Vijāyana
Vijāyana
(nt.) [fr. vijāyati] bringing forth, birth, delivery A i.78; J iii.342; vi.333; Vism 500; VbhA 97. Vijāyati
Vijāyati
[vi+jāyati] to bring forth, to bear, to give birth to Sdhp 133; aor. vijāyi VvA 220; PvA 82 (puttaŋ); ger. vijāyitvā Mhvs 5, 43 (puttaŋ); and vijāyitvāna Pv i.63. -- pp. vijāta. -- Caus. II. vijāyāpeti to cause to bring forth J vi.340. Vijāyin
Vijāyin
(adj. -- n.) [fr. vijāyati] in f. ˚inī able to bear a child, fertile J iv.77 (opp. vañjhā); DhA i.46 (id.). Vijigucchati
Vijigucchati
[vi+j.] to loathe Sn 41 (˚amāna = aṭṭiyamāna harāyamāna Nd2 566), 253, 958 (˚ato=aṭṭiyato harāyato Nd1 466), 963; Nd1 479. Vijita
Vijita
[pp. of vijayati] 1. conquered, subdued, gained, won Sn 46; SnA 352; DA i.160; PvA 75, 76, 161. -> Cp. nijjita. -- 2. (nt.) conquered land, realm, territory, kingdom J i.262; Vv 8120 ( = desa VvA 316); DhA i.386.

-- anga at Pv iii.117 (PvA 176) read vījit.˚ -- indriya one who has conquered his senses Sn 250. -- sangāma by whom the battle has been won, victorious D ii.39; It 76; Nd2 542; Pug 68. Vijitāvin
Vijitāvin
(adj.) [vijita+āvin; see Geiger, P.Gr. 1983] victorious D i.88 (caturanta+); ii.146; S iii.83; Sn 552, 646; DA i.249; DhA iv.232; SnA 162. Vijina
Vijina
[doubtful] distress (?), in stock phrase at A v.156, 158, 160, 162 (v. l. at all pass. vicina). Vijīyati
Vijīyati
at J iii.374 is to be read as vījiyati (Pass. of vījati). Vijja
Vijja
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [ = vijjā] having vijjā, possessed of wisdom; in vatthu˚, tiracchāna˚, nakkhatta˚ etc. (referring to the lower arts condemned as heretic: vijjā c.) S iii.239. te˚ possessed of threefold wisdom: see vijjā b. Vijjaṭipatti
Vijjaṭipatti
(f.) [? doubtful spelling] adultery PvA 151. Vijjati, vijjamāna
Vijjati,
vijjamāna etc.: see vindati. Vijjantarikā
Vijjantarikā
(f.) is not clear; according to Kern, Toev. s. v. = vīthi+antarikā [a very bold assumption: vīthy˚ contracted to vijj˚!], i. e. space in between two streets or midstreet M i.448; A i.124. Neumann (Mittl. Slg. ii.182) translates "Rinnstein" (i. e. gutter). Under antarikā we have given the trsln "interval of lightning," thus taking it as vijju+antarikā. Quoted DA i.34. Vijjā
Vijjā
(f.) [cp. Vedic vidyā knowledge: etym. see under vindati] one of the dogmatic terms of Buddhist teaching, varying in meaning in diff. sections of the Canon. It is not always the positive to avijjā (which has quite a well-defined meaning from its first appearance in Buddhist psych. ethics), but has been taken into the terminology of Buddhism from Brahmanic and popular philosophy. The opposite of avijjā is usually ñāṇa (but cp. S iii.162 f., 171; v.429). Although certain vijjās pertain to the recognition of the "truth" and the destruction of avijjā, yet they are only secondary factors in achieving "vimutti" (cp. abhiññā, ñāṇa -- dassana & paññā). That vijjā at M i.22 is contrasted with avijjā is to be expld as a word -- play in a stereotype phrase. -- A diff. side of "knowledge" again is given by "bodhi." -> (a) Vijjā is a general, popular term for lore in the old sense, science, study, esp. study as a practice of some art (something like the secret science of the medicine man: cp. vejja!); hence appld in special, "dogmatic" sense as "secret science," revelation (put into a sort of magic formula), higher knowledge (of the learned man), knowledge which may be applied and used as an art (cp. magister artium!), practical knowledge; but also mysterious knowledge: "charm." -- (b) vijjā, having a varying content in its connotation, is applied to a series of diff. achievements. A rather old tabulation of the stages leading by degrees to the attainment of the highest knowledge is given in the Sāmañña -- phala -- sutta (D i.63 -- 86), repeated in nearly every Suttanta of D 1. It is composed of the 3 sampadās, viz. sīla˚, citta˚ & paññā˚. Under the first group belong sīla( -- kkhandha), indriya -- saŋvara, sati -- sampajañña, santuṭṭhi; the second is composed (1) of the overcoming of the nīvaraṇas, (2) of the 4 jhānas; the third consists of 8 items, viz. (1) ñāṇa -- dassana, (2) manomaya -- kāya, (3) iddhi, (4) dibba -- sota, (5) ceto -- pariyañāṇa, (6) pubbe -- nivās' ânussatiñāṇa, (7) cut' ûpapatti -- ñāṇa, (8) āsavānaŋ khaya -- ñāṇa. Other terms used are: for the 2nd sampadā: caraṇa (D. i.100), and for the 3rd: vijjā (ibid.). -> The discussion at D i.100 is represented as contradicting the (brahmaṇic) opinion of Ambaṭṭha, who thought that "vijjā nāma tayo Vedā, caraṇaŋ pañca sīlāni" (DA i.267 sq.). -- In the enumn of 3 vijjās at M i.22 sq. only Nos. 6 -- 8 of the 3rd sampadā (said to have been attained by the Buddha in the 3 night watches) with the verbs anussarati (No. 6), pajānāti (7), abhijānāti (8), each signifying a higher stage of ("saving") knowledge, yet all called "vijjā." Quoted at Vism 202, where all 8 stages are given as "aṭṭha vijjā," and caraṇa with 15 qualities (sīla -- saŋvara, indriyesu guttadvāra etc.). The same 3 vijjās (No. 6, 7, 8) are given at D iii.220, 275, and poetically at A ii.165 as the characteristics of a proper (ariya, Buddhist) monk (or brāhmaṇa): "etāhi tīhi vijjāhi tevijjo hoti brāhmaṇo," opposing the threeVeda -- knowledge of the Brahmins. -- Tevijja (adj.) in same meaning at S i.146 (where it refers to Nos. 3, 5, 8 of above enumn), 192, 194. In brahmanic sense at Sn 594 ( = tiveda SnA 463). Both meanings compared & contrasted at A i.163 (aññathā brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇaŋ tevijjaŋ paññāpenti, aññathā ca pana ariyassa vinaye tevijjo hoti "different in the Brahmanic and diff. in the Buddhist sense"). -- Tisso vijjā (without specification, but referring to above 6, 7, 8) further at Vin ii.183; Sn 656; Ps i.34; ii.56; Pv iv.134; Miln 359 (+chaḷabhiññā); DhA iv.30 (id.). It is doubtful whether the defn of ñāṇa as "tisso vijjā" at Vin iii.91 is genuine. -> On vijjā -- caraṇa see also D iii.97, 98, 237; S i.153, 166; ii.284; v.197; A ii.163; iv.238; v.327; Sn 163, 289, 442. -- On vijjā in the doctrinal appln see: D iii.156, 214, 274; S ii.7 sq. (cakkhu, ñāṇa, paññā, vijjā, āloka); iii.47; 163; 171; iv.31, 49 sq. A i.83; ii.247; Sn 334 (simply meaning "wisdom," craft, care, but Bdhgh SnA 339 takes it as "āsavānaŋ -- khaya -- ñāṇa"), 1026 (opposed to avijjā); Pug 14, 57; Vbh 324; Nett 76, 191. -- (c) popular meanings & usage of vijjā: science, craft, art, charm, spell D i.213 (Gandhārī nāma v., also mentioned at J iv.498 as practised by physicians), 214 (Maṇika n. v.); J iii.504 (Cintāmaṇi v.); iv.323 (vatthu˚: see under vatthu), 498 (ghora˚); v.458 (anga˚ palmistry); Miln 200; Dh i.259 (bhūmicala n. v. "earthquake" charm), 265 (dhanu -- agamanīyaŋ Ambaṭṭha n. v.); KhA 237 (vatthu˚, khetta˚, anga˚); and see the list of forbidden crafts at D i.9 (anga˚, vatthu˚, khetta˚ etc.; cp. Dial. i.18, 19).

-- gata having attained wisdom Sn 730 (opp. avijjā; the playful expln at SnA 505 is "ye arahatta -- maggavijjāya kilese vijjhitvā gatā khīṇāsava -- sattā"). -- caraṇa ( -- sampanna) (endowed with) special craft (wisdom) & virtue: see above, b. -- ṭṭhāna branch of study; there are 18 vijja -- ṭṭhānāni or "arts & sciences," subjects of study, referred to at J i.259. -- dhara a knower of charms, a sorcerer J iii.303, 529; iv.496; v.94; Miln 153, 200, 267. -- bhāgiyā (dhammā) (states) conducive to wisdom (6 kinds of saññā) A iii.334; cp. D iii.243; S v.395; A iv.52 sq. -- mayā (iddhi) (potency) accomplished by art or knowledge (Expos. i.122) Vism 383; see iddhi. -- vimutti wisdom (higher knowledge) as salvation S v.28, 335 sq.; Ps ii.243 (in detail). -- 618 -- Vijju & vijjutā
Vijju
& vijjutā (f.) [cp. Vedic vidyut; fr. vi+dyut: see juti] lightning. -- (a) vijju: S i.100 (˚māli); A i.124 (˚ūpamacitta); J v.322 (˚vaṇṇin); Pug 30; Miln 22 (˚jāla); VvA 12; Sdhp 244, 598. -- (b) vijjutā: Th 1, 1167; J ii.217. -- On similes with v. see J.P.T.S. 1907, 136. -- Cp. next. Vijjullatā
Vijjullatā
(f.) [vijju(t)+latā] a flash or streak of light- ning, forked lightning S i.106; J i.103, 279, 501. Vijjotati
Vijjotati
[vi+jotati] to shine (forth) PvA 56; Caus. ˚eti to illumine PvA 10. -- pp. vijjotita. Vijjotalati
Vijjotalati
[Freq. of vijjotati? Or = vijjotayati=vijjo- teti?] to flicker Vin ii.131; M i.86. Vijjotita
Vijjotita
[pp. of vijjotati] resplendent PvA 154. Vijjhati
Vijjhati
[vyadh] to pierce, perforate; to shoot with an arrow; to strike, hit, split; fut. ˚issati J iv.272; inf. ˚ituŋ ibid.; ger. ˚itvā Vin ii.150; J i.201 (boring through timber); SnA 505 (kilese); PvA 155; & viddhā J vi.77. -- Pass. vijjhati: ger. ˚itvā having been hit J iii.323; ppr. vijjhamāna PvA 107; grd. viddheyya J vi.77. -- pp. viddha. -- Caus. vijjheti J i.45 (sūlehi vijjhayanto); and vedheti to cause to be pierced J vi.453 (fut. vedhayissati). -- pp. vedhita. Vijjhana
Vijjhana
(nt.) [fr. vijjhati] piercing or getting pierced DA i.75; ii.87 (kaṇṇa˚ -- mangala, ear -- piercing ceremony); PvA 107. Vijjhāpeti
Vijjhāpeti
[vi+jhāpeti] to extinguish Vin i.31; ii.219, 221; J iv.292; Miln 42. Vijjhāyati
Vijjhāyati
[vi+jhāyati2] to be extinguished, to go out (of fire) Vin i.31 (imper. ˚āyatu & fut. ˚āyissati); DhA i.21 (akkhīni dīpa -- sikhā viya vijjhāyiŋsu). Viññatti
Viññatti
(f.) [fr. viññāpeti] intimation, giving to under- stand, information; begging or asking by intimation or hinting (a practice forbidden to the bhikkhu) Vin i.72 (˚bahula, intent on . . .); iii.144 sq. (id.); iv.290; J iii.72 (v. nāma na vaṭṭati, is improper); Vbh 13; Vism 41 (threefold: nimitta˚, obhāsa˚, parikathā; as t. t., cp. Cpd. 1201: medium of communication); Miln 343, 370; DhA ii.21 (viññattiŋ katvā bhuñjituŋ na vaṭṭati); PvA 146. -- Two kinds of viññatti are generally distinguished, viz. kāya˚ and vacī˚, or intimation by body (gesture) and by voice: Dhs 665, 718; Miln 229 sq.; Vism 448, 530, 531. Cp. Cpd. 22, 264. Viññāṇa
Viññāṇa
(nt.) [fr. vi+jñā; cp. Vedic vijñāna cognition] (as special term in Buddhist metaphysics) a mental quality as a constituent of individuality, the bearer of (individual) life, life -- force (as extending also over rebirths), principle of conscious life, general consciousness (as function of mind and matter), regenerative force, animation, mind as transmigrant, as transforming (according to individual kamma) one individual life (after death) into the next. (See also below, c & d). In this (fundamental) application it may be characterized as the sensory and perceptive activity commonly expressed by "mind." It is difficult to give any one word for v., because there is much difference between the old Buddhist and our modern points of view, and there is a varying use of the term in the Canon itself. In what may be a very old Sutta S ii.95 v. is given as a synonym of citta (q. v.) and mano (q. v.), in opposition to kāya used to mean body. This simpler unecclesiastical, unscholastic popular meaning is met with in other suttas. E. g. the body (kāya) is when animated called sa -- viññāṇaka (q. v. and cp. viññāṇatta). Again, v. was supposed, at the body's death, to pass over into another body (S i.122; iii.124) and so find a support or platform (patiṭṭhā). It was also held to be an immutable, persistent substance, a view strongly condemned (M i.258). Since, however, the persistence of v. from life to life is declared (D ii.68; S iii.54), we must judge that it is only the immutable persistence that is condemned. V. was justly conceived more as "minding" than as "mind." Its form is participial. For later variants of the foregoing cp. Miln 86; PvA 63, 219.

Ecclesiastical scholastic dogmatic considers v. under the categories of (a) khandha; (b) dhātu; (c) paṭiccasamuppāda; (d) āhāra; (e) kāya. (a) V. as fifth of the five khandhas (q. v.) is never properly described or defined. It is an ultimate. But as a factor of animate existence it is said to be the discriminating (vijānāti) of e. g. tastes or sapid things (S iii.87), or, again, of pleasant or painful feeling (M i.292). It is in no wise considered as a condition, or a climax of the other incorporeal khandhās. It is just one phase among others of mental life. In mediaeval dogmatic it appears rather as the bare phenomenon of aroused attention, the other khandhās having been reduced to adjuncts or concomitants brought to pass by the arousing of v. (Cpd. 13), and as such classed under cetasikā, the older sankhārakkhandha. -- (b) as dhātu, v. occurs only in the category of the four elements with space as a sixth element, and also where dhātu is substituted for khandha (S iii.10). -- (c) In the chain of causation (Paṭicca -- samuppāda) v. is conditioned by the sankhāras and is itself a necessary condition of nāma -- rūpa (individuality). See e. g. S ii.4, 6, 8, 12 etc.; Vin i.1; Vism 545 sq. = VbhA 150; Vism 558 sq.; VbhA 169 sq.; 192. -- At S ii.4=iii.61 viññāṇa (in the Paṭicca -- samuppāda) is defined in a similar way to the defn under v. -- ṭṭhiti (see c), viz. as a quality peculiar to (& underlying) each of the 6 senses: "katamaŋ viññāṇaŋ? cha -- y -- ime viññāṇa -- kāyā (groups of v.), viz. cakkhu˚ sota˚ etc.," which means that viññāṇa is the apperceptional or energizing principle, so to speak the soul or life (substratum, animator, lifepotency) of the sensory side of individuality. It arises through the mutual relation of sense and sense -- object (M iii.281, where also the 6 v. -- kāyā). As such it forms a factor of rebirth, as it is grouped under upadhi (q. v.). Translations of S ii.4: Mrs. Rh. D. (K.S. ii.4) "consciousness"; Geiger (in Z. f. B. iv.62) "Erkennen."-> (d) As one of the four āhāras (q. v.) v. is considered as the material, food or cause, through which comes rebirth (S ii.13; cp. B.Psy. p. 62). As such it is likened to seed in the field of action (kamma) A i.223, and as entering (a body) at rebirth the phrase viññāṇassa avakkanti is used (D ii.63; S ii.91). In this connection the expression paṭisandhi -- viññāṇa first appears in Ps i.52, and then in the Commentaries (VbhA 192; cf. Vism 548, 659 paṭisandhicitta); in Vism 554=VbhA 163, the v., here said to be located in the heart, is made out, at bodily death, "to quit its former ʻ support ʼ and proceed (pavattati) to another by way of its mental object and other conditions." Another scholastic expression, both early and late, is abhisankhāra -- v., or "endowment consciousness," viz. the individual transmigrant or transmitted function (viññāṇa) which supplies the next life with the accumulation of individual merit or demerit or indifference, as it is expressed at Nd2 569a in defn of v. (on Sn 1055: yaŋ kiñci sampajānāsi . . . panujja viññāṇaŋ bhave na tiṭṭhe): puññ' âbhisankhāra -- sahagata -- viññāṇaŋ, apuññ' . . ., ānejj' . . . -- Under the same heading at Nd2 569b we find abhisankhāra v. with ref. to the sotāpatti -- stage, i. e. the beginning of salvation, where it is said that by the gradual disappearance of abhis. -- v. there are still 7 existences left before nāma -- rūpa (individuality) entirely disappears. The climax of this development is "anupādi -- sesa nibbāna -- dhatu," or the nibbāna stage without a remainder (parinibbāna), which is characterized not by an abhisankhāra -- v., but by the carimaka -- v., or the final vital spark, which is now going to be extinct. This passage is referred to at DhsA 357, where the first half is quoted literally. -- (e) As kāya i. e. group, v. is considered psycho -- physically, as a factor in senseperception (D iii.243, M iii.281, etc.), namely, the contact between sense -- organ and object (medium, metazu/ was not taken into account) produces v. of sight, hearing etc. The three factors constitute the v. -- kāya of the given sense. And the v. is thus bound to bodily process as a catseye is threaded on a string (D ii.76). Cp. above c.

Other applications of the term v., both Canonical and mediaeval: on details as to attributes and functions, see Vin i.13 (as one of the khandhas in its quality of anattā, cp. S iv.166 sq.); D iii.223 (as khandha); S ii.101 sq. (˚assa avakkanti); iii.53 sq. (˚assa gati, āgati, cuti etc.); A i.223 sq.; iii.40; Sn 734 (yaŋ kiñci dukkhaŋ sambhoti, sabbaŋ viññāṇa -- paccayā), 1037 (nāma -- rūpa destroyed in consequence of v. destruction), 1073 (cavetha v. [so read for bhavetha]; v. at this passage expld as "punappaṭisandhi -- v." at Nd2 569c); 1110 (uparujjhati); Ps i.53 sq., 153 sq.; ii.102; Vbh 9 sq., 53 sq., 86; Nett 15 (nāma -- rūpa v. -- sampayutta), 16 (v. -- hetuka n. -- r.), 17 (nirodha), 28, 79, 116 (as khandha); Vism 529 (as simple, twofold, fourfold etc.), 545 = VbhA 150 sq. (in detail as product of sankhāras & in 32 groups); VbhA 172 (twofold: vipāka & avipāka); DhA iv.100.

-- ânañc'āyatana infinitude ( -- sphere) of life -- force or mind -- matter D i.35, 184, 223; iii.224, 262, 265; Nett 26, 39. It is the second of the Āruppa -- jhānas; see jhāna. -- āhāra consciousness (i. e. vital principle) sustenance: see above d and cp. Dhs 70, 126; Nett 114 sq.; Vism 341. -- kāya: see above e. -- khandha life -- force as one of the aggregates of physical life D iii.233; Tikp 61; DhsA 141; VbhA 21, 42. -- ṭṭhiti viññāṇa -- duration, phase of mental life. The emphasis is on duration or continuation rather than place, which would be ṭṭhāna. There are (a) 4 v. -- durations with regard to their "storing" (abhisankhāra) quality, viz. combinations of v. (as the governing, mind -- principle) with each of the 4 other khandhas or aggregates of material life (rūpa, vedanā, saññā, sankhārā), v. animating or bringing them to consciousness in any kind of life -- appearance; and (b) 7 v. -- durations with regard to their "regenerating" (new -- life combn or rebirth = paṭisandhi) quality, viz. the 4 planes of var. beings (from men to devas), followed by the 3 super -- dimensional stages (the ānañc' āyatanas) of ākāsa -- infinitude, viññāṇa -- infin. & ākiñ -- cañña -- infin. -- Passages in the Canon: (a) as 4: D 1 i.262 sq.; S iii.53 sq. ("standing for consciousness" & "platform," ˚patiṭṭhā S iii.54; K.S. iii.45) -> (b) the 7: D ii.68 sq.; iii.253 (trsln "station of consciousness"), 282; =A iv.39. Both the 4 and the 7 at Nd2 570. Cp. under a slightly diff. view S ii.65 (yaŋ ceteti . . . ārammaṇaŋ . . . hoti viññāṇassa ṭhitiyā). -- See also Ps i.22, 122; Sn 1114; Nett 31, 83 sq.; Vism 552; VbhA 169. -- dhātu mind -- element, which is the 6th dhātu after the 4 great elements (the mahābhūtāni) and ākāsa -- dhātu as fifth (this expld as "asamphuṭṭha -- dhātu" at VbhA 55, whereas v. -- dhātu as "vijānana -- dhātu") D iii.247; Vbh 85, 87; VbhA 55; cp. A i.176; M iii.31, 62, 240; S ii.248. -- vīthi the road of mind (fig.), a mediaeval t. t. for process in senseperception KhA 102. -- 619 -- Viññāṇaka
Viññāṇaka
(adj.) [viññāṇa+ka] having life or conscious- ness or sense, endowed with vitality. Found in the four Nikāyas only in one standard passage in the same connection, viz. sa -- viññāṇaka kāya "the body with its viññāṇa" (i. e. life -- force or mind): S ii.253; iii.80, 169; v.311; A i.132; iv.53. Thus (sa˚) should be read at all passages. -- Later in contrast pair sa˚ and a˚, i. e. with life & without, alive & lifeless, animate & inanimate, e. g. J i.466, 468; DhA i.6; PvA 130. Viññāṇatta
Viññāṇatta
(nt.) [abstr. formation fr. viññāṇa] the fact of being endowed with viññāṇa S iii.87; PvA 63. Viññāta
Viññāta
[pp. of vijānāti] apperceived, (re)cognized, under- stood, cogitated ( Cpd. 37), learned Sn 323 (˚dhamma, one who has recognized or understood the Dhamma); Vv 4418 ( = viññāta -- sāsana -- dhamma VvA 192); J i.2; Sdhp 429. -- Often in sequence diṭṭha suta muta viññāta to denote the whole range of the cognitional & apperceptional faculties (see muta), e. g. D iii.232; Sn 1086, 1122. Viññātar
Viññātar
[n. ag. of viññāta] a perceiver, one who apper- ceives or takes to heart, a learner D i.56; A iii.169; iv.196 (sotar, uggahetar, v.). Viññāpaka
Viññāpaka
(adj.) [fn. viññāpeti] clever in instruction, able to instruct S v.162 = Miln 373; It 107. Viññāpana
Viññāpana
(adj.) [fr. viññāpeti] instructing, informing A ii.51, 97. -- f. viññāpanī instructive, making clear (of speech) D i.114 (atthassa viññāpaniyā = viññāpanasamatthāya DA i.282); A iii.114; Dh 408 (=attha˚ DhA iv.182); Sn 632. Viññāpaya
Viññāpaya
(adj.) [grd. of viññāpeti, = *viññāpya] acces- sible to instruction; only in cpds du˚ & su˚ indocile & docile S i.138; D ii.38; Nd2 2353; Ps i.121; ii.195; Vbh 341. Viññāpita
Viññāpita
[pp. of viññāpeti] instructed, informed; su˚ well taught Miln 101. Viññāpetar
Viññāpetar
[n. ag. of viññāpita] an instructor, teacher D i.56; A iv.196. Viññāpeti
Viññāpeti
[Caus. II. of vijānāti] to address, inform, teach, instruct; to give to understand; to appeal to, to beg Vin i.54; iv.264; D i.251; J iii.72 (to intimate); Miln 229; VvA 72, 181. -- pp. viññāpita. Viññāya & viññāyati
Viññāya
& viññāyati see vijānāti. Viññutā & viññūtā
Viññutā
& viññūtā (f.) [fr. viññu] discretion; in phrase viññutaŋ pāpuṇāti to reach the years of discretion or puberty Vin i.269; ii.278; J i.231; iii.437: PvA 3. Viññupasaṭṭha
Viññupasaṭṭha
[vi+ni+upassaṭṭha, pp. of sṛj (?)] un- attacked, not deficient, unmolested, undisturbed: is Kern's (Toev. s. v.) proposed reading for viññū -- pasattha ("extolled by the wise") at S ii.70 (reads ṭṭh); v.343; D ii.80; iii.245: all identical passages. We consider Kern's change unnecessary: anupasaṭṭha would have been the most natural expression if it had been meant in the sense suggested by Kern. Viññū
Viññū
(adj.) [cp. Sk. vijña] intelligent, learned, wise D i.163; S i.9; iii.134; iv.41 sq., 93, 339; A ii.228; v.15; It 98; Sn 39, 294, 313, 396, 403; Ps ii.19, 21; Miln 21; DA i.18; VvA 87; PvA 130, 226; Sdhp 45. -> a˚ DhA iii.395. -- 620 -- Viññeyya
Viññeyya
(adj.) [grd. of vijānāti] to be recognized or apperceived (of the sense objects: cakkhu -- viññeyya rūpa, etc.) D i.245; M iii.291; A iii.377; iv.404 sq., 415, 430; Nd1 24. -- su˚ easily understood VvA 258. Viṭapa
Viṭapa
[cp. Epic Sk. viṭapa] the fork of a tree, a branch J i.169, 215, 222; iii.28; vi.177 (nigrodha˚). Viṭapin
Viṭapin
[viṭapa+in] a tree, lit. "having branches" J vi.178. Viṭabhī
Viṭabhī
(f.) [ = Sk. viṭapin] the fork of a tree M i.306; J ii.107; iii.203. Vitakka
Vitakka
[vi+takka] reflection, thought, thinking; "initial application" (Cpd. 282). -- Defd as "vitakkanaŋ vitakko, ūhanan ti vuttaŋ hoti" at Vism 142 (with simile on p. 143, comparing vitakka with vicāra: kumbhakārassa daṇḍa -- ppahārena cakkaŋ bhamayitvā, bhājanaŋ karontassa uppīḷana -- hattho viya vitakko (like the hand holding the wheel tight), ito c' ito sañcaraṇahattho viya vicāro: giving vitakka the characteristic of fixity & steadiness, vicāra that of movement & display). -- D ii.277 ("pre -- occupation" trsln: see note Dial. ii.311); iii.104, 222, 287 (eight Mahāpurisa˚); M i.114 (dvidhā -- kato v.), 377; S i.39, 126, 186, 203; ii.153; iv.69, 216; A ii.36; iii.87 (dhamma˚); iv.229 (Mahāpurisa˚), 353 (˚upaccheda); Sn 7, 270 sq., 970, 1109; J i.407 (Buddha˚, Sangha˚, Nibbāna˚); Nd1 386, 493, 501 (nine); Nd2 s. v. takka; Ps i.36, 136, 178; Pv iii.58; Pug 59, 68; Vbh 86, 104 (rūpa˚, sadda˚ etc.), 228 (sa˚), 362 (akusala˚); Dhs 7, 160, 1268; Tikp 61, 333, 353; Vism 291 (˚upaccheda); Miln 82, 309; DhsA 142; DhA iv.68; VbhA 490; PvA 226, 230. -- kāma˚, vihiŋsā˚, vyāpāda˚ (sensual, malign, cruel thought): D iii.226; S ii.151 sq.; iii.93; A i.148, 274 sq.; ii.16, 117, 252; iii.390, 428. Opp. nekkhamma˚, avyāpāda˚, avihiŋsā˚ A i.275; ii.76; iii.429. -- vitakka is often combd with vicāra or "initial & sustained application" Mrs. Rh. D.; Cpd. 282; "reflection & investigation" Rh. D.; to denote the whole of the mental process of thinking (viz. fixing one's attention and reasoning out, or as Cpd. 17 expls it "vitakka is the directing of concomitant properties towards the object; vicāra is the continued exercise of the mind on that object." See also above defn at Vism 142). Both are properties of the first jhāna (called sa -- vitakka sa -- vicāra) but are discarded in the second jhāna (called a˚). See e. g. D. i.37; S iv.360 sq.; A iv.300; Vin iii.4; Vism 85; and formula of jhāna. The same of pīti & samādhi at Vbh 228, of paññā at Vbh 323. The same combn (vitakka+vicāra) at foll. passages: D iii.219 (of samādhi which is either sa˚, or a˚, or avitakka vicāra -- matta); S iv.193; v.111; A iv.409 sq., 450; Nett 16; Miln 60, 62; Vism 453. Cp. rūpa -- (sadda -- etc.) vitakka+rūpa-> (sadda -- etc.) vicāra A iv.147; v.360; Vbh 103. -- On term (also with vicāra) see further: Cpd. 40, 56, 98, 238 sq., 282 (on difference between v. & manasikāra); Expos. i.188n; Kvu trsln 2381. -- Cp. pa˚, pari˚.

Note. Looking at the combn vitakka+vicāra in earlier and later works one comes to the conclusion that they were once used to denote one & the same thing: just thought, thinking, only in an emphatic way (as they are also semantically synonymous), and that one has to take them as one expression, like jānāti passati, without being able to state their difference. With the advance in the Sangha of intensive study of terminology they became distinguished mutually. Vitakka became the inception of mind, or attending, and was no longer applied, as in the Suttas, to thinking in general. The explns of Commentators are mostly of an edifying nature and based more on popular etymology than on natural psychological grounds. Vitakkana
Vitakkana
(nt.) = vitakka Vism 142. Vitakkita
Vitakkita
[pp. of vitakketi] reflected, reasoned, argued DA i.121. Cp. pari˚. Vitakketi
Vitakketi
[Denom. fr. vitakka] to reflect, reason, consider S i.197, 202; iv.169; v.156; A ii.36; Miln 311. -- pp. vitakkita. Vitacchika
Vitacchika
at S ii.99 = iv.188 read vītaccika (q. v.). Vitacchikā
Vitacchikā
(f.) [cp. *Sk. (medical) vicarcikā] scabies Nd2 3041 (as roga). Vitacchita
Vitacchita
[pp. of vitaccheti] planed, smoothed; su˚ well carded (of a cīvara) Vin iii.259. Vitaccheti
Vitaccheti
[vi+taccheti] 1. tear, pluck, pick to pieces; in simile M i.364 (+virājeti) = S ii.255 (reads vibhajeti for virājeti)=Vin iii.105 (id.). -- 2. to smoothe: see pp. vitacchita. Vitaṇḍā
Vitaṇḍā
(f.) [cp. Epic Sk. vitaṇḍā, e. g. Mbh 2, 1310; 7, 3022] tricky disputation, frivolous or captious discussion; in cpds. vitaṇḍa˚: ˚vāda sophistry SnA 447; DA i.247; ˚vādin a sophist, arguer DhsA 3 (so read for vidaḍḍha); VbhA 9, 51, 319, 459. See lokāyata. Vitata
Vitata
[pp. of vitanoti] stretched, extended, diffused S i.207; Sn 272, 669 (v. l. vitthata); J i.356 (tanta˚ where the strings were stretched); Miln 102, 307; Mhvs 17, 31 (vallīhi v.) -- nt. vitata a drum (with leather on both sides) VvA 37. Vitatha
Vitatha
(adj.) [vi+tatha; cp. Epic & Class. Sk. vitatha] untrue; nt. untruth D ii.73 (na hi Tathāgatā vitathaŋ bhaṇanti); Sn 9 sq.; Vv 5315 ( = atatha, musā ti attho VvA 240); J v.112; vi.207; Ps 104; DA i.62. -- avitatha true S ii.26; v.430; Miln 184; Sdhp 530; DA i.65. Vitanoti
Vitanoti
(*vitanati) [vi+tanoti] to stretch out, spread out; poet. ger. vitanitvāna J vi.453. -- Pass. vitaniyyati ibid. -- pp. vitata. Cp. vitāna. Vitaraṇa
Vitaraṇa
(nt.) [fr. vitarati] overcoming, getting through M i.147 (kankhā˚); Miln 233 (id.), 351; Sdhp 569. Vitarati
Vitarati
[vi+tarati] 1. to go through, come through, over- come Sn 495, 779 (ger. ˚eyya, taken as Pot. at Nd1 57: oghaŋ samatikkameyya), 941, 1052; Pv iii.24 (vitaritvā = vitiṇṇo hutvā PvA 181, q. v. for detail). -- 2. to perform J ii.14 (bubhukkhito no vitarāsi bhottuŋ; v. l. visahāmi). -- pp. vitiṇṇa. Vitāna
Vitāna
(m. & nt.) [fr. vi+tan] spread -- out, canopy, awning Vin iv.279; J i.40, 62, 83; DhA ii.42; SnA 447; VvA 32, 173; PvA 154. See also cela˚. Vitiṇṇa
Vitiṇṇa
[pp. of vitarati] 1. overcome or having overcome, gone through, conquered Dh 141 (˚kankha); Sn 514 (id.), 746; PvA 181. -- 2. given up, rejected, abandoned Dh 176 (˚paraloka); J iv.447 ( = pariccatta C.). Vitudati
Vitudati
[vi+tudati] to strike, prick, nudge, knock, push, attack D i.105; S iv.225; A iii.366; Sn 675; Ud 67; J ii.163, 185. -- Pass. vitujjati Vism 505; VbhA 104, 108. -- pp. vitunna. Vitunna
Vitunna
[pp. of vitudati] struck, pricked, pushed J iii.380. Vitureyyati
Vitureyyati
at J v.47 is not clear. The v. l. is vitariyati; the C. expls by tuleti tīreti, i. e. contemplates, examines. Kern, Toev. s. v. discusses it in detail & proposes writing vituriyata (3rd sg. praet. med.), & expls at "get over" [cp. Vedic tūryati overcome, fr. tur or tvar = P. tarati2]. Dutoit trsls "überstieg." Vitta
Vitta1
[orig. pp. of vindati = Av. vista, Gr. a)/istos, Lat. vīsus; lit. one who has found, acquired or recognized; but already in Vedic meaning (as nt.) "acquired possessions"] property, wealth, possessions, luxuries S i.42; Sn 181 sq., 302; J v.350, 445; vi.308; Pv ii.81 (=vittiyā upakaraṇa -- bhūtaŋ vittaŋ PvA 106). -- Often in phrase ˚ûpakaraṇa possessions & means, i. e. wealth, e. g. D i.134; S i.71; iv.324; Pug 52; Dh i.295; PvA 3, 71. Vittaŋ is probably the right reading S i.126 (15) for cittaŋ. Cf. p. 123 (3); K.S. i.153, n. 3. -- 621 -- Vitta
Vitta2
(adj.) [identical with vitta1] gladdened, joyful, happy J iii.413 ( = tuṭṭha); iv.103; Vv 414 (=tuṭṭha C.); 4414 (id.), 495 (id.). Vitta
Vitta3
[pp. of vic to sift, cp. Sk. vikta] see vi˚. Vittaka
Vittaka
(adj.) [fr. vitta1] possessing riches, becoming rich by ( -- ˚) J i.339 (lañca˚); iv.267 (miga˚), vi.256 (jūta˚). Vittakatā
Vittakatā
(f.) [vittaka+tā] in suta˚ "the fact of getting rich through learning" as an expln of the name Sutasoma J v.457 (for auspiciousness). Dutoit trsls quite differently: "weil er am Keltern des Somatrankes seine Freude hatte," hardly correct. Vitti
Vitti
(f.) [cp. Sk. vitti, fr. vid] prosperity, happiness, joy, felicity A iii.78; J iv.103; vi.117; Kvu 484; Th 1, 609; Dhs 9 (cp. DhsA 143); PvA 106. Vittha
Vittha
(nt.) [vi+sthā?] a bowl, in surā˚ for drinking spirits J v.427; DhA iii.66. Vitthaka
Vitthaka
(nt.) [fr. vittha] a small bowl, as receptacle (āvesana˚) for needles, scissors & thimbles Vin ii.117. Vitthata
Vitthata1
[pp. of vi+stṛ] 1. extended, spread out, wide M. i.178; Vin i.297; J v.319; Miln 311; SnA 214; PvA 68 (doubtful!). -- 2. wide, spacious (of a robe) Vin iii.259. -- 3. flat SnA 301. Vitthata
Vitthata2
[pp. of vitthāyati (?). A difficult form!] per- plexed, confused, hesitating Miln 36 (bhīta+). Ed. Müller, P.Gr. 102 considers it as pp. of vi+ tras to tremble, together with vitthāyati & vitthāyi. Vitthambhana
Vitthambhana
(nt.) [fr. vi+thambhati] making firm, strengthening, supporting Vism 351 (cp. DhsA 335). Vitthambheti
Vitthambheti
[vi+thambheti] to make firm, strengthen DhsA 335. Vitthāyati
Vitthāyati
[vi+styā: see under thīna] to be embarrassed or confused (lit. to become quite stiff), to be at a loss, to hesitate Vin i.94 = ii.272; aor. vitthāsi (vitthāyi?) ibid. [the latter taken as aor. of tras by Geiger, P.Gr. § 166]. -- pp. vitthata2 & vitthāyita. Vitthāyitatta
Vitthāyitatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. vitthāyita, pp. of vitthāyati] perplexity, hesitation D i.249. Vitthāra
Vitthāra
[fr, vi+stṛ] 1. expansion, breadth; instr. vitthā- rena in breadth Miln 17; same abl. vitthārato J i.49. -- 2. extension, detail; often in C. style, introducing & detailed explanation of the subject in question, either with simple statement "vitthāro" (i. e. here the foll. detail; opp. sankhepa), e. g. DA i.65, 229; SnA 325 [cp. same in BSk. "vistaraḥ," e. g. Divy 428], or with cpds. ˚kathā SnA 464; PvA 19; ˚desanā SnA 163; ˚vacana SnA 416. Thus in general often in instr. or abl. as adv. "in detail," in extenso (opp. sankhittena in short): vitthārena D iii.241; S iv.93; A ii.77, 177, 189; iii.177; Pug 41; PvA 53, 113; vitthārato Vism 351, 479; PvA 71, 77, 81. Cp. similarly BSk. vistarena kāryaŋ Divy 377. Vitthāratā
Vitthāratā
(f.) [fr. vitthāra] explicitness, detail Nett 2. As vitthāraṇā at Nett 9. Vitthārika
Vitthārika
(adj.) [vitthāra+ika] 1. wide -- spread Miln 272. -- 2. widely famed, renowned Sn 693; J iv.262. See also bahujañña. Vitthārita
Vitthārita
[pp. of vitthāreti] detailed, told in full Vism 351; Mhvs 1, 2 (ati˚ with too much detail; opp. sankhitta). Vitthāriyati
Vitthāriyati
[Denom. fr. vitthāra] to expand, to go into detail Nett 9. Vitthāreti
Vitthāreti
[fr. vitthāra] 1. to spread out A iii.187. -- 2. to expand, detail give in full Vism 351; SnA 94, 117, 127, 274 and passim. -- pp. vitthārita; f.pp. vithāretabba. Vitthiṇṇa
Vitthiṇṇa
[vi+thiṇṇa] "spread out," wide, large, extensive, roomy J ii.159 (so read for vittiṇṇa); Miln 102, 283, 311, 382; DhsA 307; SnA 76; VvA 88; Sdhp 391, 617. Cp. pari˚. Vidaŋsaka
Vidaŋsaka
(ad.) [fr. vidaŋseti] showing; danta˚ showing one's teeth (referring to laughter) A i.261; J iii.222. Vidanseti
Vidanseti
[vi+daŋseti = dasseti] to make appear, to show A i.261; Th 2, 74; J v.196; Miln 39. Cp. pa˚. Vidaḍḍha
Vidaḍḍha
[vi+daḍḍha] in redupl. -- iter. cpd. daḍḍha- vidaḍḍha -- gatta "with limbs all on fire" Miln 303. *Vidati
*Vidati
see vindati. Vidatthi
Vidatthi
(f.) [cp. Vedic vitasti; see Geiger, P.Gr. 383] a span (of 12 angulas or finger -- breadths) Vin iii.149 (dīghaso dvādasa vidatthiyo sugata -- vidatthiyā); iv.279; J i.337; iii.318; Miln 85; Vism 65, 124, 171, 175, 408; DhA iii.172; iv.220; VbhA 343 (dvādas' angulāni vidatthi; dve vidatthiyo ratanaŋ, etc.). Vidahati
Vidahati
[vi+dahati; dhā] to arrange, appoint, assign; to provide; to practise. -- Pres. vidahati: see saŋ˚; vidadhāti J vi.537; vidheti J v.107. Pot. vidahe Sn 927 ( = vidaheyya Nd1 382); aor. vidahi J v.347.-> Perf. 3rd pl. vidadhu [Sk. vidadhuḥ] J vi.284.-> inf. vidhātuŋ Vin i.303 (bhesajjaŋ); ger. vidhāya Mhvs 26, 12 (ārakkhaŋ, posting a guard). -- grd. vidheyya in meaning "obedient," tractable J vi.291. -- pp. vihita. Vidāraṇa
Vidāraṇa
(nt.) [fr. vidāreti] splitting, rending Dhtp 247 (in expln of dar), 381 (do of bhid). Vidārita
Vidārita
[pp. of vidāreti] split, rent Sdhp 381. Vidāreti
Vidāreti
[vi+dāreti: see under darī] to split, rend J i.340. -- pp. vidārita. Vidālana
Vidālana
(nt.) [fr. vidāleti] breaking open, bursting, splitting Miln 1. Vidālita
Vidālita
[pp. of vidāleti] split, broken, burst J i.493; PvA 220. Vidāleti
Vidāleti
[vi+dāleti; see dalati] to break open, split, burst Th 1, 184; PvA 135, 185. -- pp. vidālita. Vidita
Vidita
[pp. of vindati] known, found (out) D iii.100; S v.180; Sn 436, 1052; Mhvs 17, 4; DA i.135 (a˚). Viditatta
Viditatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. vidita] the fact of having found or known, experience J ii.53. Vidisā
Vidisā
(f.) [vi+disā] an intermediate point of the compass S i.224; iii.239; Sn 1122; J i.20, 101; vi.6, 531. Vidugga
Vidugga
(adj. -- n.) [vi+dugga] hard to walk; troublesome, difficult, painful. -- (m.) difficult passage; difficulty, distress D iii.27; A iii.128; J iii.269; iv.271. Vidura
Vidura
(adj.) [fr. vid, cp. Sk. vidura] wise, clever J v.399 ( = paṇḍita C.). Cp. vidhura 2. Vidū
Vidū
(adj.) [Vedic vidu] clever, wise, knowing, skilled in ( -- ˚) S i.62 (loka˚); v.197; Vin ii.241 (pl. paracittaviduno); Sn 677 (vidūhi), 996; J v.222 (dhamma˚); Vv 3011 ( = sappañña VvA 127); Miln 276; Mhvs 15, 51 (ṭhān' âṭhāṇa˚ knowing right & wrong sites). -- In Pass. sense in dubbidū hard to know J v.446. -- For vidū (vidu) "they knew" see vindati. Vidūpita
Vidūpita
at Ud 71 (vitakkā vidūpitā) is to be read as vi- dhūpita. -- 622 -- Vidūra
Vidūra
(adj.) [vi+dūra] far, remote, distant A ii.50 (su˚). Mostly neg. a˚ not far, i. e. near Sn 147; PvA 14, 31, 78, 81. Vidūsita
Vidūsita
(adj.) [vi+dūsita] corrupted, depraved PvA 178 (˚citta). Videsa
Videsa
[vi+desa; cp. disā at Vin i.50] foreign country Miln 326; VvA 338. Vidomanassā
Vidomanassā
(f.) [vi+domanassa] absence of dejection Vism 504 = VbhA 105. Viddasu
Viddasu
(adj.) [another form of vidvā = Sk. vidvān: see under vindati] skilled, wise M i.65 (gen. sg. & nom. pl. viddasuno), 310 (id.). Usually in neg. form aviddasu foolish Vin ii.296=A ii.56 (pl. aviddasū); S v.1; Th 2, 164 (pl. aviddasū); Sn 762 (=bāla C.); Dh 268=Nd2 514 (=aviññū DhA iii.395); PvA 18. Viddesa
Viddesa
[fr. vi+disa] enmity, hatred J iii.353; ThA 268. Viddesanā
Viddesanā
(f.) [abstr. formation fr. viddesa, cp. disatā2] enmity Th 2, 446; J iii.353. Viddesin
Viddesin
(adj. -- n.) [vi+desin; see dessin] hating; an enemy Th 1, 547. Viddessati
Viddessati
[vi+dessati] to hate Th 2, 418. -- grd. vidde- sanīya to be hated, hateful Sdhp 82. Viddha
Viddha1
[pp. of vijjhati] pierced, perforated; hit, struck, hurt Sn 331; Nd1 414 (sallena); Miln 251 (eaten through by worms); Sdhp 201 (kaṇṭakena). Viddha
Viddha2
(adj.) [cp. *Sk. vīdhra clear sky] clear; only in phrase viddha vigata -- valāhaka deva a clear sky without a cloud Vin i.3; M i.317 = S i.65=iii.156= v.44=It 20. Viddhaŋsa
Viddhaŋsa
[fr. vidhaŋsati] demolition, destruction J iv.58 (˚kārin). Viddhaŋsati
Viddhaŋsati
[vi+dhaŋsati] to fall down, to be shattered, to be ruined Miln 237; PvA 125 (Pot. ˚eyya). -- Caus. viddhaŋseti to shatter, to destroy S iii.190 (both trs. & intrs., the latter for ˚ati); J ii.298; iii.431; v.100; DA i.265; Nd1 5 (vikirati vidhameti viddhaŋseti: see also under vikirati). -- pp. viddhasta & viddhaŋsita.-> Pass. viddhaŋsīyati to drop or to be destroyed, to come to ruin DA i.18 = DhsA 19 (suttena sangahitāni pupphāni na vikirīyanti na v.). Viddhaŋsana
Viddhaŋsana
(adj. -- nt.) [fr. viddhaŋseti; cp. BSk. vidhvaŋ- sana Divy 180] shattering, destruction (trs. & intrs.), undoing, making disappear; adj. destroying S iv.83; Miln 351 (kosajja˚); J i.322; v.267 (adj.); Vism 85 (vikkhepa+); VvA 58, 161 (adj.). -- Often in phrase (denoting complete destruction): anicc -- ucchādana -- parimaddana -- bhedana -- viddhaŋsana -- dhamma, e. g. D i.76; M i.500; A iv.386; J i.146 [cp. Divy 180: śatanapatana -- vikiraṇa -- vidhvaŋsana -- dharmatā; see also under vikiraṇa]. Viddhaŋsaka
Viddhaŋsaka
(adj.) [fr. viddhaŋsana] destroying DhsA 165. Viddhaŋsanatā
Viddhaŋsanatā
(f.) [abstr. formation fr. viddhaŋsana] quality of destruction, ability to destroy Vism 8. Viddhaŋsita
Viddhaŋsita
[pp. of viddhaŋseti] shattered, destroyed DhA iii.129. Viddhasta
Viddhasta
[pp. of viddhaŋsati] fallen to pieces, broken, destroyed M i.227; A ii.50; Sn 542; J i.203; v.69, 401; Vv 6314 ( = vinaṭṭha VvA 265). Viddhā
Viddhā
poet. ger. of vijjhati J vi.77. Vidvā
Vidvā
see under vindati. Vidha
Vidha1
(adj. ( -- ˚) [ = vidhā] of a kind, consisting of, -- fold, e. g. aneka˚ manifold DA i.103; tathā˚ of such -- kind, such -- like Sn 772; ti˚ threefold D i.134; Sn 509; nānā˚ various PvA 53, 96, 113; bahu˚ manifold ThA 197; etc. Vidha
Vidha2
[ = vidha1 as noun] form, kind Th 1, 428 (māna˚). -- There are several other meanings of vidha, which are, however, uncertain & rest on doubtful readings. Thus it occurs at Vin ii.136 in meaning of "buckle" (v. l. pīṭha; C. silent); at Vin iv.168 in meaning "little box" (?); at DA i.269 as "carrying pole" (=kāca2, but text D i.101 has "vividha"). Vidhamaka
Vidhamaka
(adj.) [fr. vidhamati] one who throws away or does away with; destroying, clearing away Miln 344 (kilesa -- mala -- duggandha˚). Vidhamati
Vidhamati
& ˚eti [vi+dhmā in particular meaning of blowing i. e. driving asunder, cp. dhamati] (trs.) to destroy, ruin; do away with, scatter. -- (intrs.) to drop off, fall away, to be scattered, to roll or whirl about. -> Both vidhamati & ˚eti are used indiscriminately, although the Caus. ˚eti occurs mostly in meaning of "destroy." (1) vidhamati: S iii.190; J i.284 (in play of words with dhamati to blow; aor. vidhami = viddhaŋsesi C.); vi.490 (vidhamaŋ te raṭṭhaŋ, is ruined); Miln 91, 226 (Mārasenaŋ), 237, 337 (intrs., with vikirati & viddhaŋsati). -- (2) vidhameti: Nd1 5; J iii.261 (poet. vidhamemasi [write ˚se!]=vidhamema, nāsema C.); v.309; Miln 39; PvA 168. -- pp. vidhamita. Vidhamana
Vidhamana
(nt.) [fr. vidhamati] destroying, scattering, dispersing Miln 244 (Maccu -- sena˚). Vidhamita
Vidhamita
[pp. of vidhamati] destroyed Nd2 576a. Vidhavā
Vidhavā
(f.) [Vedic vidhavā widow, vidhu lonely, vidhura separaṭed, Av. vidavā = Goth. widuwō=Ohg. wituwa (Ger. Witwe=E. widow); Gr. h)i/qeos unmarried; Lat. vidua widow, etc., in all Idg. languages] a widow S i.170; A iii.128; J vi.33; Miln 288; Vism 17; PvA 65, 161; VbhA 339. Vidhā
Vidhā
(f.) [cp. Sk. vidhā] 1. mode, manner, sort, kind; proportion, form, variety D iii.103 (ādesana˚); Th 2, 395 (cakkhu˚ "shape of an eye" trsln); VbhA 496 (in expln of kathaŋ -- vidha: "ākāra -- saṇṭhānaŋ vidhā nāma"); DA i.222 (iddhi˚), 294 (in expln of tividha -- yañña: "ettha vidhā vuccati ṭhapanā" i. e. performance, arrangement), 299 (similarly tisso vidhā = tīṇi ṭhapanāni; of yañña). -- Used as (abl.) adv. vidhā in meaning "variously" at Pv ii.952 (C. expln=vidhātabba, not quite correctly; PvA 135). Perhaps the phrase vidhāsamatikkanta is to be explained in this way, viz. "excelling in a variety of ways, higher than a variety (of things)" or perhaps better: "going beyond all distinctions" (i. e. of personality); free from prejudice [i. e. No. 2] S ii.253; iii.80, 136, 170; A iv.53. -> 2. (ethically) in special sense: a distinctive feature (of a person as diff. from others), a "mode" of pride or delusion, a "form" of conceit. As such specified as three kinds of conceit ( tisso vidhā), viz. "seyyo 'ham asmi," "sadiso 'ham asmi," & "hīno 'ham asmi" (i. e. I am better than somebody else, equal to, & worse than somebody else). See e. g. D iii.216; S i.12; iii.48, 80, 127; v.56, 98; Nd1 195; Vbh 367; Sn 842; VbhA 496 (māno va vidhā nāma). -- The adj. form is vidha: see sep. Vidhātar
Vidhātar
[n. ag. of vidahati] provider, disposer J v.221 (dhātā vidhātā, as of Viśvakarman: cp. Macdonell, Vedic Mythology p. 118). Vidhāna
Vidhāna
(nt.) [fr. vi+dhā; Vedic vidhāna] 1. arrange- ment, get up, performance, process J iii.178 (attano vidhānena "in his robes of office"); Vism 66 sq.; DhsA 168 = Vism 122 (bhāvanā˚); VbhA 69, 71 (manasikāra˚); ThA 273 (id.). -- 2. ceremony, rite J vi.202 (yañña˚); Miln 3. -- 3. assignment, disposition, provision J ii.208 (vidhi -- vidhāna -- ññū; C. expld v. as "koṭṭhāso vā saŋvidahanaŋ vā"); PvA 30. -- 4. succession (as much as "supplement") KhA 216; SnA 23 (note 2). -- Cp. saŋvidahana & saŋvidhāna. -- 623 -- Vidhānavant
Vidhānavant
(adj.) [vidhāna+vant] making dispositions, careful in providing, circumspect, considerable J vi.287. Vidhāyaka
Vidhāyaka
[fr. vi+dhā] providing PvA 60. Vidhāvati
Vidhāvati
[vi+dhāvati] to run about, roam, cover space (acc.), stray S i.37; Sn 411, 939; Nd1 414; DA i.39. Vidhi
Vidhi
(f.) [fr. vi+dhā, cp. Ved. vidhi] 1. form, way; rule, direction, disposition, method, motto Vism 278 (manasikāra˚, eightfold); PvA 78 (dāna˚ = dāna), 126; VvA 82. -- instr. vidhinā in due form Mhvs 14, 52; PvA 130; Sdhp 336. -- 2. luck, destiny J ii.243 (˚rahita unlucky). Vidhutika
Vidhutika
[etym.?] a wreath Vin ii.10; iii.180. Vidhunāti
Vidhunāti
[vi+dhunāti] to shake S i.197; Miln 399; Vism 71. -- 2. to remove, to skin (an animal) Vin i.193. Vidhura
Vidhura
(adj.) [Vedic vidhura: see vidhavā] 1. destitute, lonely; miserable, wretched J v.399 (so read for vidura; according to Kern, Toev. s. v., but doubtful). -> 2. [vi+dhura] "burdenless," unequalled Sn 996 ( = vigata -- dhura, appaṭima SnA 583); A i.116 (here in meaning "clever," perhaps=vidura; spelt vidhūra). Cp. Np. Vidhura KhA 128; SnA 201 (as Vidhūra at J iv.361). Vidhūpana
Vidhūpana
(adj. -- nt.) [fr. vidhūpeti] fanning, a fan Vin ii.130; iv.263; A ii.130; Nd2 562; Vv 3342 ( = caturassa vījani) VvA 147; VbhA 71. Vidhūpita
Vidhūpita
[pp. of vidhūpeti] scattered, destroyed Sn 472 ( = daḍḍha SnA 409); Ud 71 (so read for vidūpita). Vidhūpeti
Vidhūpeti
(˚dhūpayati) [vi+dhūpayati] 1. to fumigate, perfume, diffuse Miln 252. -- 2. to scatter, destroy Vin i.2 (vidhūpayaŋ Māra -- senaŋ); S i.14; iii.90 = A v.325; S iv.210; Ps ii.167. -- pp. vidhūpita. Vidhūma
Vidhūma
(& vidhuma) (adj.) [vi+dhūma] "without smoke," i. e. passionless, quiet, emancipated S i.141 (K.S.: "no fume of vice is his"); Sn 460 ( = kodhadhūma -- vigamena v. SnA 405), 1048 (cp. Nd2 576 with long exegesis); Pv iv.134 (=vigata -- micchā -- vitakkadhūma PvA 230). Vinaṭṭha
Vinaṭṭha
[pp. of vinassati] destroyed VvA 265; PvA 55. Vinata
Vinata
[pp. of vi+nam] bent, bending PvA 154 (˚sākhā). Vinadati
Vinadati
[vi+nadati] to cry or shout out, to scold J iii.147 (kāmaŋ vinadantu let them shout!). Cp. BSk. vinādita "reviled" Divy 540. Vinaddha
Vinaddha
[pp. of vinandhati] covered, bound, intertwined Vin i.194 (camma˚, onaddha+); J v.416; vi.589 (kañcanalatā˚ bheri); Vism 1 ( = jaṭita saŋsibbita). Vinandhati
Vinandhati
[vi+nandhati] to close, encircle, cover Mhvs 19, 48; Vism 253 (ppr. vinandhamāna: so read for vinaddh˚). -- pp. vinaddha. Vinandhana
Vinandhana
(nt.) [fr. vi+nandhati] tying, binding Vin ii.116 (˚rajju rope for binding). Vinaya
Vinaya
[fr. vi+nī, cp. vineti] 1. driving out, abolishing destruction, removal Vin i.3 (asmi -- mānassa), 235 = iii.3 (akusalānaŋ dhammānaŋ vinayāya dhammaŋ desemi); S i.40; Sn 921; A i.91 (kodha˚, upanāha˚); ii.34 (pipāsa˚); iv.15 (icchā˚); v.165 (id.); SnA 12; PvA 114 (atthassa mūlaŋ nikati˚). Often in phrase rāga˚, dosa˚, moha˚, e. g. S iv.7 sq.; v.137 sq., 241; A iv.175; Nett 22. -- 2. rule (in logic), way of saying or judging, sense, terminology (cp. iminā nayena) S iv.95 (ariyassa vinaye vuccati loko); A i.163 (ariyassa vinaye tevijjo one called a threefold wise in the nomenclature of the Buddhist); ii.166 (ariyassa v.); SnA 403. -- 3. norm of conduct, ethics, morality, good behaviour Sn 916, 974; J iv.241 (=ācāra -- vinaya C.); A ii.112; iii.353 sq. (ariya -- vinaye saddhā yassa patiṭṭhitā etc. faith established in Buddhist ethics). -- 4. code of ethics, monastic discipline, rule, rules of morality or of canon law. In this sense applied to the large collection of rules which grew up in the monastic life and habits of the bhikkhus and which form the ecclesiastical introduction to the "Dhamma," the "doctrine," or theoretical, philosophical part of the Buddhist Canon. The history & importance of the Vinaya Piṭaka will be dealt with under the title "Vinaya" in the Dictionary of Names. Only a few refs. must suffice here to give a general idea. See also under Dhamma C., and in detail Geiger, Dhamma pp. 55 -- 58. -- Often combd with dhamma: dhammato vinayato ca on the ground of Dh. and V. Vin i.337; cp. ii.247. -- dhammo ca vinayo ca Vin i.356; ii.285, 302; or (as (Dvandva) dhammavinaya (i. e. the teaching of the Buddha in its completeness) D i.229; Vin ii.237 sq.; M i.284; ii.181 sq.; A i.283; iii.297, 327; S i.9; iii.65; Ud 53; VvA 3. Often approaches the meaning of "Buddhist order," e. g. Vin i.69; D i.176; M i.68, 459, 480; iii.127; S ii.120; A i.185; ii.123; v.122. -- See further Vin ii.96 (vinaye cheko hoti); A ii.168 (ayaŋ dhammo, ayaŋ v., idaŋ Satthu -- sāsanaŋ); Vism 522; VbhA 273; KhA 106, 151; SnA 4, 195, 310. -- a -- vinaya one who sins against the V. (like a -- dhamma one who neglects the Dh.) Vin ii.295 sq.; iii.174; A i.18; v.73 sq. -- The division of the books of the Vinaya is given at DhsA 18. Its character (as shown by its name) is given in the foll. verse at DhsA 19: "(vividha -- visesa -- ) nayattā vinayanato c' eva kāya -- vācānaŋ vinayy' attha -- vidūhi ayaŋ vinayo Vinayo ti akkhāto," i. e. "Because it shows precepts & principles, and governs both deed and word, therefore men call this scripture V., for so is V. interpreted" (Expos. i. 23).

-- aṭṭhakathā the (old) commentary on the Vinaya Vism 72, 272; VbhA 334; KhA 97. -- ânuggaha taking up (i. e. following the rules) of the Vinaya Vin iii.21; A i.98, 100; v.70. -- kathā exposition of the Vinaya Vin iv.142. -- dhara one who knows or masters the V. by heart, an expert in the V. Vin i.169; ii.299 (with dhamma -- dhara & mātikā -- dhara); A i.25; ii.147; iii.78 sq., 179, 361; iv.140 sq.; v.10 sq.; J iii.486; iv.219; Vism 41, 72; KhA 151; DhA ii.30 (with dhamma -- kathika & dhuta -- vāda) [cp. BSk. vinayadhara Divy 21]. -- piṭaka the V. Piṭaka KhA1 2, 97; VbhA 431. -- vatthu chapter of the V. Vin ii.307. -- vādin one who professes the V. (or "speaking in accordance with the rules of conduct"), a V. -- follower D i.4 (here expld by Bdhgh as "saŋvara -- vinaya -- pahāna -- vinaya sannissitaŋ katvā vadatī ti" v. DA i.76, thus taking it as vinaya 3) = M iii.49=Pug 58 (trsln here: "speaking according to self -- control"); D iii.135, 175. Vinayati
Vinayati
see vineti. Vinayana
Vinayana
(nt.) [fr. vi+nī] 1. removing, removal Miln 318 (pipāsā˚); PvA 39 (soka˚). -- 2. instruction, discipline, setting an example J v.457 (conversion); Miln 220. Vinaḷīkata
Vinaḷīkata
(adj.) [vi+naḷa+kata, with naḷī for naḷa in combn with kṛ] lit. "having the reed or stem removed," rendered useless, destroyed M i.227; A ii.39; Sn 542 ( = ucchinna SnA 435); Th 1, 216; J vi.60 (viddhasta+, as at Sn 542). Vinassati
Vinassati
[vi+nassati] to be lost; to perish, to be destroyed S iv.309; M ii.108 (imper. vinassa "away with you"); J iii.351; v.468; Pv iii.45; Vism 427. -- pp. vinaṭṭha. Caus. vināseti. -- 624 -- Vinā
Vinā
(indecl.) [Vedic vinā = vi -- nā (i. e. "not so"), of pron. base Idg. *no (cp. nānā "so & so"), as in Sk. ca -- na, Lat. ego -- ne, pō -- ne behind, etc. See na1] without, used as prep. (or post -- position) with (usually) instr., e. g. Vin ii.132 (vinā daṇḍena without a support); PvA 152 (purisehi vinā without men); or abl., e. g. Sn 589 (ñāti sanghā vinā hoti is separated from his relatives; cp. BSk. vinābhavati MVastu i.243); or acc., e. g. Mhvs 3, 10 (na sakkā hi taŋ vinā). In compn vinā -- bhāva separation [cp. BSk. vinābhāva MVastu ii.141] Sn 588, 805; Nd1 122; J iii.95; iv.155; v.180; vi.482 (=viyoga C.). Vināti
Vināti
[vi, by -- form of vā to weave: see vāyati1] to weave J ii.302; DhA i.428 (tantaŋ); inf. vetuŋ Vin ii.150. -> Pass. viyyati. Cp. upavīyati. -- Caus. II. vināpeti to order to be woven Vin iii.259 ( = vāyāpeti). Vināma
Vināma
(m.) & Vināmana (nt.) [fr. vināmeti] bending Miln 352 (˚na); VbhA 272 (kāya -- vināmanā, bending the body for the purpose of getting up; in expln of vijambhikā); Dhtp 208. Vināmeti
Vināmeti
[vi+nāmeti; Caus. of namati] to bend, twist Miln 107, 118. Vināyaka
Vināyaka
[fr. vi+nī] 1. a leader, guide, instructor M ii.94; Vv 167 ( = veneyya -- satte vineti VvA 83); ThA 69. -> 2. a judge J iii.336. Vināsa
Vināsa
[vi+nāsa, of naś] destruction, ruin, loss D i.34 (+uccheda & vibhava), 55; Pv ii.710; Vism 427 (so read for vinasa); DA i.120; PvA 102 (dhana˚), 133. Vināsaka (˚ika)
Vināsaka
(˚ika) (adj.) [fr. vināsa] causing ruin; only neg. a˚ not causing destruction A iii.38; iv.266, 270; J v.116. Vināsana
Vināsana
(adj.) [fr. vināsa], only neg. a˚ imperishable Dpvs iv.16. Vināseti
Vināseti
[Caus. of vinassati] 1. to cause destruction, to destroy, ruin, spoil Th 1, 1027; Sn 106; Pv ii.78; DA i.211; PvA 3 (dhanaŋ), 116; Sdhp 59, 314, 546. -> 2. to drive out of the country, to expel, banish J iv.200. Vinigaḷati
Vinigaḷati
[vi+nigaḷati] to drop down Miln 349. Viniggata
Viniggata
[vi+niggata] coming (out) from J vi.78; DA i.140; DhA iv.46; Sdhp 23. Viniggaha
Viniggaha
[vi+niggaha] checking, restraint Ps i.16; ii.119. Viniggilati
Viniggilati
[vi+niggilati] to throw out, to emit KhA 95. Vinighātin
Vinighātin
(adj.) [fr. vi+nighāta] afraid of defeat, anxious about the outcome (of a disputation), in phrase vinighāti -- hoti (for ˚ī -- hoti) Sn 826, cp. Nd1 164. Vinicchaya
Vinicchaya
[vi+nicchaya; cp. Vedic viniścaya] 1. dis- crimination, distinction, thought, (firm) opinion; thorough knowledge of ( -- ˚) A iii.354 (pāpakamma˚); Sn 327 (dhamma˚), 838 ( = dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhi -- vinicchayā Nd1 186), 867 (˚ŋ kūrute; cp. Nd1 265); J iii.205 (attha˚); PvA 1, 112, 210 (kūṭa˚), 287. -- 2. decision; (as t. t. in law:) investigation, trial, judgment (given by the king or his ministers) D ii.58 (with ref. to lābha, expld as deciding what to do with one's gains)=iii.289=A iv.400=Vbh 390 (expld at VbhA 512, where vinicchaya is said to be fourfold, viz. ñāṇa˚, taṇhā˚, diṭṭhi˚, vitakka˚); J ii.2. -- 3. court house, hall of judgment J i.176; iii.105; iv.122, 370; vi.333; Miln 332 (vinaya˚, i. e. having the Vinaya as the law court in the City of Righteousness). -- 4. (as t. t. in logic & psychology:) (process of) judgment, detailed analysis, deliberation, consideration, ascertainment J v.60 (˚ŋ vicāreti); VbhA 46 sq. (according to attha, lakkhaṇa, etc.), 83 sq. (id.); KhA 23, 75.

-- kathā analytical discussion, exegesis, interpretation Vism 16; VbhA 291 (opp. pāḷi -- vaṇṇanā). -- ññū clever in deciding or giving judgment J iii.205; v.367 (a˚). -- ṭṭhāna place of judgment, law court J v.229; DhA iii.141; iv.215. -- dhamma law practice J. v.125; DhA iii.141. -- vīthi process of judgment (in logic): see Cpd. 241. -- sālā the law court(s) J iv.120; DhA iii.380. Viniccharati
Viniccharati
[vi+niccharati] to go out (in all directions) J iv.181. Vinicchita
Vinicchita
[pp. of vinicchināti] discerned, decided, distinguished, detailed Vin i.65 (su˚); J v.65 (a˚); SnA 477; Sdhp 508. Vinicchin
Vinicchin
(adj.) [fr. vinicchināti] discerning Th 1, 551. Viniccninana
Viniccninana
(nt.) [fr. vinicchināti] giving judgment J v.229. Vinicchināti
Vinicchināti
(˚inati) & vinicchati [vi+nicchināti] to in- vestigate, try; to judge, determine, decide J v.229; fut. vinicchissati Vin iii.159; ger. vinicchinitvā Nd1 76; aor. vinicchini J ii.2; inf. vinicchituŋ J i.148; DhA iv.215. -- pp. vinicchita. Vinijjita
Vinijjita
(adj.) [vi+nijjita] unvanquished Sdhp 318. Vinidhāya
Vinidhāya
(indecl.) [vi+nidhāya, ger. of vinidahati] lit. "misplacing," i. e. asserting or representing wrongly, giving a false notion of (acc.) Vin ii.205, expld at Vin iv.2; SnA 204. Vinindati
Vinindati
[vi+nindati] to censure, blame, reproach J ii.346; vi.200. Vinipāta
Vinipāta
[fr. vi+nipāteti] ruin, destruction; a place of suffering, state of punishment, syn. with apāya & duggati (with which often combd, plus niraya, e. g. Vin i.227; D i.82, 162; M i.73; A iii.211; It 58; Pug 60): A v.169; Sn 278; J iii.32; Miln 108; Vism 427 (where expld as "vināsā nipatanti tattha dukkaṭakārino, " together with duggati & niraya). The sotāpanna is called "avinipāta -- dhammo," i. e. not liable to be punished in purgatory: see under sotāpanna, & cp. sym. term khīna -- niraya A iii.211. Vinipātika
Vinipātika
(adj.) [fr. vinipāta] destined to suffer in purga- tory, liable to punishment after death D ii.69; iii.253; M i.73, 390; A i.123; ii.232 sq.; iv.39, 401; J v.117, 119. Vinipāteti
Vinipāteti
[vi+nipāteti] to bring to ruin, to destroy, to frustrate Vin i.298; J vi.71; VvA 208. Vinibaddha
Vinibaddha
(adj.) [vi+nibaddha] bound (to) S i.20; iii.9; A iii.311 (chanda -- rāga˚); iv.289 (id.); Nd1 30 (+lagga etc.). Vinibandha
Vinibandha
[vi+nibandha] bondage S ii.17; iii.135, 186; A i.66 (+vinivesa); Sn 16. -- The five cetaso vinibandhā (bondages of the mind) are: kāmesu rāgo, kāye rāgo, rūpe rāgo, yāvadatthaŋ udar' âvadehakaŋ bhuñjitvā seyya -- sukhaŋ anuyogo, aññataraŋ deva -- nikāyaŋ paṇidhāya brahmacariyaŋ; thus at D iii.238; M i.103; A iii.249; iv.461, 463 sq.; v.17; Vbh 377. Vinibbhujati
Vinibbhujati
(or ˚bhuñjati) [vi+ni+bhujati] 1. [to bhuj, to bend, as in bhuja1 & nibbhujati] to turn inside out Th 2, 471. -- 2. [to bhuj or bhuñj as in bhuñjati2 and paribhuñjati2] to separate, cut off, remove M i.233; S iii.141; iv.168 (spells wrongly jj). -- 3. [id.] to cleanse; fig. to sift out thoroughly, to distinguish, discriminate M i.292; J v.121 (avinibbhujaŋ, ppr.); Miln 63 (doubled); Vism 438 (spelling wrongly jj); DhsA 311. -- pp. vinibbhutta . Vinibbhujana
Vinibbhujana
(nt.) [fr. vinibbhujati] turning inside out ThA 284. Vinibbhutta
Vinibbhutta
[pp. of vinibbhujati] separated, distinguished, discriminated Vism 368. -- 625 -- Vinibbhoga
Vinibbhoga1
(adj.) [vi+nibbhoga] lacking, deprived of ( -- ˚), deficient ThA 248 (viññāṇa˚). Vinibbhoga
Vinibbhoga2
[fr. vinibbhujati 3] sifting out, distinction, discrimination Vism 306 (dhātu˚), 368 (id.); neg. a˚ absence of discrimination, indistinction DhsA 47; used as adj. in sense of "not to be distinguished," indistinct at J iii.428 (˚sadda). Vinibhindati
Vinibhindati
[vi+ni+bhid] to break (right) through M i.233. Vinimaya
Vinimaya
[fr. vi+nimināti] reciprocity, barter, exchange J ii.369. Vinimīleti
Vinimīleti
[vi+nimīleti] to shut one's eyes Sdhp 189. Vinimutta
Vinimutta
(Vinimmutta) [vi+nis+mutta] 1. released, free from J i.375 (mm); Sdhp 1, 4, 16, 225. -- 2. discharged (of an arrow) DhA iii.132 (mm). Vinimoceti
Vinimoceti
[vi+nis+moceti, cp. nimmoka] to free (one- self) from, to get rid of A iii.92; Pug 68. Viniyujjati
Viniyujjati
[vi+niyujjati] to be connected with, to ensue, accrue PvA 29 ( = upakappati). Viniyoga
Viniyoga
[vi+niyoga] possession, application, use DhsA 151; VvA 157; PvA 171, 175. Vinivaṭṭeti
Vinivaṭṭeti
(& ˚vatteti) [vi+nivatteti] 1. to turn over, to repeat J i.25 (ṭṭ), 153 (ṭṭ), 190 (ṭṭ). -- 2. to turn (somebody) away from, to distract Pv i.88 (read ˚vattayi for ˚vattanti); ii.619 (˚vattayi; aor.); J iii.290 (ṭṭ). -> 3. to roll over, to glide off J iii.344 (ṭṭ); DhA ii.51 (ṭṭ). Vinivijjha
Vinivijjha
(adj.) [grd. of vinivijjhati] to be pierced; in dubbinivijjha difficult to pierce, hard to penetrate J v.46. Vinivijjhati
Vinivijjhati
[vi+ni+vijjhati] to pierce through & through J ii.91; Miln 339; DhsA 253. Vinivijjhana
Vinivijjhana
(nt.) [fr. vinivijjhati] piercing, perforating, penetrating DhsA 253; ThA 197 (in expln of bahuvidha). Vinividdha
Vinividdha
[pp. of vinivijjhati] pierced (all through), per- forated J v.269; vi.105; Vism 222. Viniveṭhana
Viniveṭhana
(& ˚nibbeṭhana) (nt.) [vi+nibbeṭhana] unwrapping, unravelling; fig. explaining, making clear, explanation, refutation Nd2 503 (diṭṭhi -- sanghātassa vinibbeṭhana; where id. p. at Nd1 343 reads vinivedhana, cp, nibbedha); Miln 96; VvA 297 (diṭṭhi -- gaṇṭhiviniveṭhana). Viniveṭheti
Viniveṭheti
[vi+nibbeṭheti] 1. to disentangle, to unwrap Vin i.3, 276 (anta -- gaṇṭhiŋ, the intestines); J ii.283 (sarīraŋ); v.47. -- 2. to disentangle oneself, to free oneself (from) A iii.92; Pug 68. Vinivesa
Vinivesa
[vi+nivesa] tie, bond, attachment A i.66 (+vini- bandha). Vinīta
Vinīta
[pp. of vineti] led, trained, educated S v.261; A iv.310 (viyatta+); DhA ii.66 (˚vatthu); PvA 38. -- avinīta not trained S iv.287; Vv 297; Dhs 1003, 1217; suvinīta well trained S iv.287; opp. dubbinīta badly trained J v.284, 287. -- ratha -- vinīta (nt.) a relay M i.149. Vinīlaka
Vinīlaka
(adj.) [vi+nīlaka] of a bluish -- black (purple) colour, discoloured J ii.39 (of a cygnet, bastard of a swan & a crow, "resembling neither father nor mother," i. e. "black & white"). Usually applied to the colour of a corpse (purple, discoloured), the contemplation of which forms one of the 10 asubha -- saññās: M i.88 (uddhumātaka+); Sn 200 (id.). -- A. i.42; ii.17; S v.129 sq.; Dhs 264; Nett 27; Miln 332; Vism 110, 178, 193. Vinīvaraṇa
Vinīvaraṇa
(adj.) [vi+nīvaraṇa] unobstructed, unbiassed, unprejudiced A ii.71; Sdhp 458. Usually in phrase ˚citta of an unbiassed mind, combd with mudu -- citta & udagga -- citta: Vin i.16, 181; D i.110, 148; A iv.186. -> Same in BSk., e.g. MVastu iii.225; Divy 616 sq. Vinudati
Vinudati
is only found in Caus. form vinodeti. Vinetar
Vinetar
[n. ag. fr. vineti] teacher, instructor, guide Sn 484; Ps ii.194 (netar, vinetar, anunetar); J iv.320. Vineti
Vineti
[vi+neti; cp. vinaya] 1. to remove, put away, give up. -- ppr. vinayaŋ J vi.499; Pot. 3rd sg. vinayetha Sn 361, & vineyya Sn 590; imper. vinaya Sn 1098, & vinayassu Sn 559. -- ger. vineyya Sn 58 (but taken as Pot. at Nd2 577b); Pv ii.334 (macchera -- malaŋ); vinetvā J v.403 (chandaŋ); vinayitvā VvA 156, & vinayitvāna Sn 485 (bhakuṭiŋ). -- 2. to lead, guide, instruct, train, educate A iii.106 (inf. vinetuŋ); S iv.105 (Pot. vineyyaŋ & fut. vinessati); aor. vinesi Miln 13 (Abhidhamme); ger. vinayitvāna ThA 69 (Ap. v. 10); grd. vinetabba SnA 464, & vineyya Miln 12; cp. veneyya. -- pp. vinīta. Vinodaka
Vinodaka
(adj.) [fr. vinodeti, cp. nudaka & nūdaka] driving out, dispelling, allaying PvA 114 (parissama˚). Vinodana
Vinodana
(adj. -- nt.) [fr. vinodeti] dispelling, removal A iii.387, 390; Sn 1086 (chanda -- rāga˚, = pahāna etc. Nd2 578); Miln 285; DA i.140 (niddā˚); DhA i.41 (tama˚, adj.); PvA 38 (soka˚). Vinodeti
Vinodeti
[Caus. of vi+nudati] to drive out, dispel, remove, put away S iv.70, 76, 190; A ii.13, 117; Sn 273, 956, (tamaŋ); 967; Nd1 454, 489; J i.183; ii.63, 283 (sinehaŋ); Vv 8426; Miln 259 (imper. vinodehi, +apanehi, nicchārehi); Mhvs 5, 245 (vimatiŋ); 31, 10 (kankhaŋ); DhA iv.145; PvA 38 (sokaŋ). Vindati
Vindati
[vid, both in meaning "to know" & "to find"; cp. Gr. ei)_don I saw, oi) _da I know = Sk. veda "Veda," ei)/dwlon "idol"; Vedic vindati to find, vetti to know, vidyā knowledge; Goth. witan to observe & know= Ger. wissen; Goth. weis= E. wise, etc., for which see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. video] the Vedic differentiations vetti "to know" and vindati "to find" are both in Pāli, but only in sporadic forms, some of which are archaic and therefore only found in poetry. Of vid are more frequent the Pass. vijjati and derivations fr. the Caus. ved˚. The root vind occurs only in the present tense and its derivations. -- A. vid to know, to ascertain: The old Vedic pres. vetti only at Th 1, 497 (spelt veti). Another old aor. is vedi [Sk. ayedīt] Dh. 419, 423; J iii.420 (= aññāsi); iv.35 (here perhaps as aor. to Caus. vedeti: to cause to know or feel). Remnants of the old perfect tense 3rd pl. [Sk. viduḥ] are vidū & viduŋ (appears as vidu in verse), e. g. at Th 1, 497; Sn 758; Pv ii.74 (=jānanti PvA 102); J v.62 (=vijānanti C.); Mhvs 23, 78. The old participle of the same tense is vidvā [=Sk. vidvān; cp. Geiger P.Gr. 1002] in meaning "wise" Sn 792, 897, 1056, 1060; expld as vijjāgato ñāṇī vibhāvī medhāvī at Nd1 93, 308; Nd2 575. Opp. avidvā Sn 535; M i.311. -- Younger forms are a reconstructed (grammatical) pres. vidati DA i.139; ger. viditvā S v.193; Sn 353, 365, 581, 1053, 1068 and pp. vidita (q. v.). -- Pass. vijjati to be found, to be known, to exist; very frequent, e. g. Sn 20 (pl. vijjare), 21, 431, 611, 856, 1001, 1026; Th 1, 132; D i.18; Pv i.56; ii.318 (spelt vijjite!) ii.914 (=atthi C.); 3rd sg. pret. vijjittha Sn 1098 (mā v.=saŋvijjittha Nd2 568). ppr. vijjamāna existing J i.214; iii.127; PvA 25, 87, 103; Miln 216 (gen. pl. vijjamānataŋ). -> Caus. vedeti; Pass. Caus. vediyati; grd. vedanīya: see separately, with other derivations. -- B. vind to find, possess, enjoy (cp. vitta1, vitta2, vitti) Sn 187 (vindate dhanaŋ), 658; Th 1, 551; 2, 79 (aor. vindi); J vi.508 (vindate, med.=look for, try to find for oneself); Mhvs 1, 13 (ppr. vindaŋ); DhA iii.128 (ppr. vindanto), 410. PvA 60, 77. -- inf. vindituŋ Miln 122; J 18; grd; vindiya Vism 526 (as avindiya in expln of avijjā). -> Cp. nibbindati. -- pp. vitta1 (for which adhigata in lit. meaning). -- 626 -- Vindussara
Vindussara
is v. l. of bindu˚ (q. v.). Vipakka
Vipakka
(adj.) [vi+pakka] fully ripe J i.136. Vipakkha
Vipakkha
(adj.) [vi+pakkha1 2] opposite, hostile; enemy; only in foll. cpds.:

-- sevaka siding in or consorting with the enemy, keeping bad company, a traitor J i.186; iii.321; DhA iv.95. -- sevin id. J i.487; ii.98. Vipakkhika
Vipakkhika
(adj.) [vipakkha+ika] 1. [vi+pakkha1 1] without wings J i.429. -- 2. [vi+pakkha1 2] opposite, hostile Sdhp 71. Vipakkhin
Vipakkhin
(adj.) [vi+pakkhin] having no wings, without wings J v.255. Vipaccatā
Vipaccatā
(f.) at Vin ii.88 is perhaps a der. fr. vi+vac, and not pac, thus representing a Sk. *vivācyatā, meȧning "challenging in disputation," quarrelsomeness, provocation. See also vipāceti. If fr. vi+pac, the meaning would be something like "heatedness, exasperation." Vipaccati
Vipaccati
[vi+paccati] 1. to be cooked, i. e. to ripen J v.121; PvA 104. -- 2. to bear fruit D ii.266; S i.144; M i.388; Nett 37; VvA 171. Vipaccanaka
Vipaccanaka
(adj.) [fr. vipaccati, cp. paccana] bearing fruit, ripening (fully) Miln 421 (Notes); PvA 190. Vipaccanīka
Vipaccanīka
(adj.) [vi+paccanīka] hostile M i.402; A iv.95; J iv.108; Pug 20; Vbh 351, 359, 371; VbhA 478; PvA 87. Vipajjati
Vipajjati
[vi+pajjati] to go wrong, to fail, to perish (opp. sampajjati) DhA iii.357; PvA 34. -- pp. vipanna. Vipañcanā & Vipañciyati
Vipañcanā
& Vipañciyati: see under vipañcita. Vipañcita
Vipañcita
[fr. vi+pañc, cp. papañcita] only in phrase ˚ññū either: knowing diffuseness or detail, or: of unillusioned understanding, clear -- minded, unprejudiced, combd with ugghaṭita -- ññū at A ii.135 = Pug 41 (trsld by B. C. Law as "learning by exposition"; PugA 223 expls as "vitthāritaŋ atthaŋ jānāti," i. e. one who knows a matter expld in detail. The spelling at A ii.135 is vipacita˚; at Pug 41 vipaccita˚ & at PugA vipaccita˚, with v. l. vipañcita˚); Nett 7 sq., 125; SnA 163 (where ugghaṭita -- ññū is applied to those who understand by condensed instruction, sankhepa -- desanāya, and vipañcita -- ññū to those who need a detailed one, vitthāradesanā; thus "learning by diffuseness"). -- At Nett 9 we have the var. terms vipañcanā, vipañcayati & vipañciyati (Denom.) used in the description of var. ways of parsing and grammatical analysis. Here vipañcanā (resting clearly on Sk. papañca expansion) means "expanding" (by letters & vowels) and stands midway between ugghaṭanā & vitthāraṇā "condensing & detailing." The term vipañcayati (=vipañciyati) is used in the same way. -- Note. The term is not sufficiently cleared up. It occurs in BSk. as vipañcika (e. g. Divy 319, 391, 475, where it is appld to "brāhmaṇā naimittikā" & trsld by Cowell as "sooth -- sayer"), and vipañcanaka (Divy 548?), with which cp. vipañcitājña at Lal. Vist. 520. See remark on vejjañjanika. Vipaṇeti
Vipaṇeti
[vi+Caus. of paṇati] to sell, to trade (with) J iv.363 ( = vikkiṇati C.). Vipatati
Vipatati
see vipāṭeti 2. Vipatti
Vipatti
(f.) [vi+patti2] wrong state, false manifestation, failure, misfortune (opp. sampatti) Vin i.171 (ācāra˚ failure of morality); A i.270 (ājīva˚); iv.26, 160 (atta˚, para˚); Ps i.122; J vi.292; Nett 126 (the 3 vipattiyo: sīla˚, diṭṭhi˚, ācāra˚); DhA i.16 (sīla˚) DA i.235. -> Often in pair diṭṭhi˚ wrong view, heresy, & sīla˚ moral failure: D ii.213; A i.95, 268, 270; Vin v.98; Vbh 361; Dhs 1361. -- payoga˚ wrong application PvA 117, 136 (opp. ˚sampatti). Vipatha
Vipatha
[vi+patha] wrong way or course Vv 5010 ( = apatha VvA 212). Vipanna
Vipanna
[pp. of vipajjati] gone wrong, having lost, failing in ( -- ˚), opp. sampanna: A iii.19 (rukkho sākhā -- palāsa˚ a tree which has lost branches and leaves); Sn 116 (˚diṭṭhi one who has wrong views, heretic; expld as "vinaṭṭha -- sammādiṭṭhi" SnA 177); Miln 258 (su˚ thoroughly fallen). -- sīla˚ gone wrong in morals, lacking morality Vin i.63 (+ācāra˚, diṭṭhi˚); ii.4 (id.); J iii.138 (vipanna -- sīla). Vipannatta
Vipannatta
(nt.) [fr. vipanna] failure, misfortune Dhs A 367. Viparakkamma
Viparakkamma
(indecl.) [ger. of vi+parakkamati] en- deavouring strongly, with all one's might Sn 425 Viparāmosa
Viparāmosa
(Viparāmāsa) [vi+parāmāsa, the form ˚mosa probably a distortion of ˚māsa] highway robbery D i.5 (expld as twofold at DA i.80, viz. hima˚ & gumba˚, or hidden by the snow & a thicket; the pop. etym. given here is "janaŋ musanti," i. e. they steal, or beguile people); iii.176 (v. l. ˚māsa); A ii.209; v.206; S v.473; Pug 58. Viparāvatta
Viparāvatta
[pp. of vi+parā+vṛt] reversed, changed D i.8; M ii.3; S iii.12; v.419; DA i.91. Vipariṇata
Vipariṇata
[vi+pariṇata] changed, perverted Dhs 1038; Vbh 1, 3, 5 sq.; Miln 50. Vipariṇāma
Vipariṇāma
[vi+pariṇāma] change (for the worse), reverse, vicissitude D iii.216 (˚dukkhatā); M i.457 (also as "disappointment"); S ii.274; iii.8; iv.7 sq., 67 sq.; A ii.177 (˚dhamma subject to change); iii.32; v.59 sq.; Vbh 379 (˚dhamma); Vism 499 (˚dukkha), 629 sq.; VbhA 93 (id.); PvA 60. -- a˚ absence of change, steadfastness D i.18; iii.31, 33; DhA i.121. Vipariṇāmeti
Vipariṇāmeti
[Denom. fr. vipariṇāma] to change, alter D i.56 (T. ˚ṇamati; but DA i.167 ˚ṇāmeti: sic for ˚ṇāmati!) = S iii.211; PvA 199. Viparibhinna
Viparibhinna
[vi+paribhinna] (entirely) broken up M i.296; S iv.294. Vipariyattha
Vipariyattha
in verse at J v.372 is the poet. form of vipal- lattha (so the C. expln). Vipariyaya
Vipariyaya
& Vipariyāya [vi+pariyaya] change, reversal DA i.148 (ā); SnA 499; DhsA 253 (ā); Sdhp 124, 333. Cp. vipariyesa & vipallāsa. Vipariyādikata
Vipariyādikata
(adj.) [vipariyāya+kata, with sound change y>d, viz. ˚āyi>˚ādi] thrown out of its course, upset, destroyed Th 1, 184 (cittaŋ; cp. similar phrase vipariyatthaŋ cittaŋ J v.372 -- The v. l. at Th passage is vimariyādi˚). Vipariyesa
Vipariyesa
[a contamination form between ˚pariyaya & ˚pallāsa] reversal, contrariness, wrong state Kvu 306 (three reversals: saññā˚, citta˚, diṭṭhi˚; or of perception, consciousness & views, cp. Kvu trsln 176); Vbh 376 (id.). -- ˚gāha inverted grasp i. e. holding opposite views or "holding the contrary aim" (B. C. Law) Pug 22; DhsA 253 ( = vipallattha -- gāha). Viparivatta
Viparivatta
[vi+parivatta] changing or turning round, upset J i.344 (lokassa ˚kāle). Viparivattati
Viparivattati
[vi+parivattati] to turn round, to upset J iv.224 (nāvā ˚amānā capsizing); Miln 117; ThA 255. Viparivattana
Viparivattana
(nt.) [fr. viparivattati] changing, change. reverse DhsA 367. -- 627 -- Viparīta
Viparīta
(adj.) [pp. of vi+pari+i] reversed, changed; equivocal; wrong, upset A iii.114 (˚dassana); iv.226 (id.); v.284; Th 2, 393; J i.334; Kvu 307; Miln 285, 324; Nett 85 (˚gāha), 126 (˚saññā); PvA 244. -- aviparīta unequivocal, certain, distinct, definite A v.268 (˚dassana); Miln 214 (˚vacana); PvA 231 ( = sacca & yāthāva). Viparītatā
Viparītatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. viparīta] contradistinction Vism 450 (tabbiparītatā). Vipalāvita
Vipalāvita
[vi+palāvita, pp. of Caus. of plu] made to float, floating, thrown out (into water) J iv.259 (reads viplāvitaŋ) = i.326 (reads vipalāvitaŋ, with reading nipalāvitaŋ in C.). The C. at J iv.259 expls as "uttārita," so at J i 326 as "brought out of water," fished out=thale ṭhapita, evidently incorrect. Vipallattha
Vipallattha
(adj.) [ = Sk. viparyasta, pp. of vi+pari+as: see vipallāsa] changed, reversed, upset, deranged, corrupt, perverted. Occurs in two forms: vipariyattha J v.372 (˚cittaŋ: in poetry); and vipallattha Vism 20 (˚citta: trsln "with corrupt thought"; T. spells vipallatta, v. l. ˚attha); DhsA 253 (˚gāha); PvA 212. Vipallāsa
Vipallāsa
[cp. Sk. viparyāsa, vi+pari+as (to throw). The diaeretic P. form (founded on Sk. is vipariyāsa; another bastard form is vipariyesa (q. v.)] reversal, change (esp. in a bad sense), inversion, perversion, derangement, corruption, distortion. -- The form vipariyāsa occurs at Vin ii.80 (citta -- ˚kata, with deranged mind or wrong thoughts); J i.344 (where it is expld by vipallāsa). Otherwise vipallāsa, e. g. Sn 299; Ps ii.80; Vism 214 (attha˚); Nett 4, 27, 31, 85 sq., 115 sq.; DhA ii.228; PvA 7, 70. -- There are 3 kinds of vipallāsas, viz. saññā˚ perversion of perception, citta˚ of thought, diṭṭhi˚ of views; A ii.52; Nett 85; Vism 683. See the same under vipariyesa! Vipallāsayati
Vipallāsayati
[Denom. fr. vipallāsa] to be deceived (about), to distort, to have or give a wrong notion (of) Nett 85. Vipassaka
Vipassaka
(adj.) [fr. vipassati] qualified to win insight, contemplating, gifted with introspection S ii.232; Ps i.167; Miln 342, 369; 393, VbhA 297. Vipassati
Vipassati
[vi+passati] to see clearly; to have intuition, to obtain spiritual insight D iii.196 (ye nibbutā loke yathābhūtaŋ vipassisuŋ, aor.); Th 1, 471; 2, 271 (vipassi for ˚passasi); Sn 1115; J iii.183 (pabbajitvā vipassitvā arahattaŋ pāpuṇiŋsu). Vipassanā
Vipassanā
(f.) [fr. vi+passati; BSk. vipaśyanā, e. g. Divy 44, 95, 264 etc.] inward vision, insight, intuition, introspection D iii.213, 273; S iv.195, 360; v.52 (samatha+); A i.61 (id.), 95; ii.140, 157 (samatha+); iv.360; v.99, 131; Ps i.28, 57 sq., 181; ii.92 sq.; Pug 25; J i.106; Dhs 55, 1356; Nett 7, 42 sq., 50, 82, 88 sq., 125 sq., 160, 191; Miln 16; Vism 2 (with jhāna etc.), 289 (+samādhi), 628 sq. (the 18 mahā˚); PvA 14 (samāhita -- citta˚), 167; VvA 77; Sdhp 457, 466.

-- anga constituent of intuition SnA 8 (given as "nāmarūpa -- pariccheda etc."). -- upekkhā indifference by introspection Vism 162. -- kammaṭṭhāna exercise for intuition DhA iv.46. -- ñāṇa ability or method of attaining insight Vism 629; DhA iv.30; cp. Cpd. 65 sq., where 10 such modes. -- dhura obligation of introspection DhA i.8; iv.37 sq. Vipassin
Vipassin
(adj.) [fr. vipassati] gifted with insight, wise A iv.244; Sn 349; It 2 = 7. Vipāka
Vipāka
[fr. vi+pac] fruit, fruition, product; always in pregnant meaning of "result, effect, consequence (of one's action)," either as good & meritorious ( kusala) or bad & detrimental (akusala). Hence "retribution" (kamma˚), reward or punishment. See on term e. g. Dhs. trsln introd.2 xciii; Cpd. 43. 249. -- D iii.150, 160, 176 sq.; S i.34, 57, 92 (kammassa); ii.128 (compar. vipākatara), 255 (id.); iv.186 sq., 348 sq.; A i.48, 97 (sukha˚, dukkha˚), 134 (kamma˚), 263; ii.34 (agga), 80, 112; iii.35, 172 (dānassa), 410 sq. (kāmānaŋ etc.), 436; iv. 303 (kamma˚); v.251; Sn 653 (kamma˚); Ps ii.79 (dukkha˚); Pv i.91; i.107 & passim; Pug 13, 21; Dhs 431, 497, 987; Vbh 16 sq., 73, 319, 326 sq., 334 (sukha˚); Kvu 353 sq., 464 (kamma & vipāka); Nett 99, 161, 180 sq.; Tikp 27 (fourfold), 44, 48, 50, 292 (a˚ & sa˚), 328 sq. (˚tika), 350 sq.; Dukp 17; Vism 177, 454 (fourfold), 456 (˚viññāṇa), 538 (˚paccaya), 545 sq.; VbhA 17, 150 sq. (kusala˚ & akusala), 144, 177, 391; PvA 50, 73, 77; Sdhp 12, 73, 197, 235. Vipākatta
Vipākatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. vipāka] state of being ripe PvA 52. Vipāceti
Vipāceti
[Caus. of vi+pac, or distorted fr. vivāceti?] to become annoyed, to get angry (lit. to get heated): this meaning as trsln of vi+pac, although not quite correct, as pac means to "ripen" and is not ordinarily used of heated conditions. Since the word is not sufficiently cleared up, we refrain from a detailed discussion concerning possible explanations. It may suffice to point out that it occurs only in Vinaya (and in one sporadic passage S i.232) in standing combn ujjhāyati khīyati vipāceti, expressing annoyance or irritation about something; e. g. Vin i.191; ii.85, 291; iv.64. The corresponding BSk. phrase is avadhyāyati dhriyati [to resist, dhṛ] vivācayati, e. g. Divy 492. It is not quite clear which of the two versions is the older one. There may be underlying a misunderstood (dial.) phrase which was changed by popular analogy. The BSk. phrase seems a priori the more intelligible one; if we take vipāceti = vivāceti, we should translate it as "to speak disparagingly." Mrs. Rh. D at K.S. i.296 trsls as "were vexed and fretted and consumed with indignation. " -- See remarks under khīyati & cp. vipaccatā. Vipāṭeti
Vipāṭeti
[vi+pāṭeti] 1. to rip or tear open Vin ii.115. - 2. to be destroyed, to fall to pieces (cp. pāṭeti & Pass. pāṭiyati in sense of "destroy") Pv iv.146 (sanghāṭiyo vipātayanti T.; vv. ll. vināsayati & vidālayati; PvA 240 expls as Pass. vipāḷiyati [ = vipaṭiyati?] with v. l. vidāliyati); J v.33 (reads: muddhā vipphaleyya sattadhā: perhaps the best reading), 493 (muddhā vipateyya [sic] sattadhā). See vipphalati. Vipāḷiyati
Vipāḷiyati
see vipāṭeti 2. Vipiṭṭhi
Vipiṭṭhi
[vi+piṭṭhi] in phrase vipiṭṭhi -- katvā(na) Sn 67 & 362, to turn one's back on (acc.), to leave behind, to abandon; cp. piṭṭhito karoti. The expln at Nd2 580 is pahāna etc.; at SnA 119 piṭṭhito katvā. Vipina
Vipina
(nt.) [cp. *Sk. vipina, Halāyudha 2, 55] wood, grove D i.248 (doubtful; vv. ll. vijina, vivada, vivana); Ap 51 (vv. ll. vivana, vicina; C. vivana & vipina); Dāvs iv.39; PvA 81 (read vicitta!). Viputta
Viputta
(adj.) [vi+putta] without a son, bereft of his son J v.106. Vipubbaka
Vipubbaka
(adj.) [fr. vi+pubba1] full of corruption or matter, festering (said of a dead body). The contemplation (saññā) of a festering corpse is one of the asubhakammaṭṭhānas. -- M i.58, 88; iii.91; A iii.324. -> As ˚saññā: A ii.17; v.310; Dhs 264; Nett 27; Miln 102, 332; Vism 110, 178, 193. Vipula
Vipula
(adj.) [cp. Sk. vipula] large, extensive, great, abundant. The word is poetical. -- D iii.150; A i.45 (˚paññatā); Sn 41, 675, 687, 978, 994; Th 1, 588; Nd1 581 ( = adhimatta); Vv 676 (=mahanta VvA 290); Ap 40; Pv ii.118; ii.49; ii.969 (=ulāra PvA 139); Miln 164, 311, 404; PvA 7, 76; Sdhp 271. -- 628 -- Vippakata
Vippakata
[pp. of vippakaroti; vi+pakata] 1. imper- fectly executed, left unfinished, interrupted D i.2 (cp. Dh i.49); Vin ii.172, 243, 304; iv.279; A ii.196; J i.120. -- 2. done wrongly J v.214. -- At Vin iv.358 (in Bdhgh's remarks on Pāc. 26, 1) we find vippagatamedhuna as inaccurate spelling for vippakata -- methuna ("interrupted intercourse"). Vippakaroti
Vippakaroti
[vi+pa+kṛ] to ill -- treat, abuse Vin ii.133. - pp. vippakata. Vippakāra
Vippakāra
[vi+pakāra] change, mutation, alteration J vi.370; DhA i.28; VvA 46. Vippakiṇṇa
Vippakiṇṇa
[pp. of vippakirati] strewn all over, beset with, sprinkled (with) J ii.240; vi.42; DhA i.140; DA i.40; VvA 36. Vippakiṇṇatā
Vippakiṇṇatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. vippakiṇṇa] the fact of being beset or endowed (with) Vism 8. Vippakirati
Vippakirati
[vi+pakirati] 1. to strew all over PvA 92. - 2. to confound, destroy J ii.398. -- pp. vippakiṇṇa. Vippakkamati
Vippakkamati
[vi+pakkamati] to part company, to go away Vin iv.284. Vippajahati
Vippajahati
[vi+pajahati] to give up, to abandon Sn 817 (inf. ˚pahātave), 926 (Pot. ˚pajahe); ger. ˚pahāya Sn 367, 499, 514; J i.87. -- pp. vippahīna. Vippaṭikkula
Vippaṭikkula
(adj.) [vi+paṭikkūla] contrary, antagonistic Dhs 1325 = Pug 20. Vippaṭipajjati
Vippaṭipajjati
[vi+paṭipajjati. Cp. BSk. vipratipadyate Divy 293] to go astray; fig. to err, fail; to commit sin Vin iii.166; S i.73; J i.438. -- pp. vippaṭipanna. -> Caus. vippaṭipādeti. Vippaṭipatti
Vippaṭipatti
(f.) [vi+paṭipatti] wrong way, error, sin Vism 511. Vippaṭipanna
Vippaṭipanna
[pp. of vippaṭipajjati] "on the wrong track," going or gone astray, committing sin Pv iv.159 (˚citta = adhammiyaŋ paṭipadaŋ paṭipanna PvA 242). Vippaṭipādeti
Vippaṭipādeti
[Caus. of vippaṭipajjati] to cause to commit sin (esp. adultery) Vin iii.40. Vippaṭisāra
Vippaṭisāra
[vi+paṭisāra] bad conscience, remorse, regret, repentance Vin ii.250; D i.138; S iii.120, 125; iv.46; A iii.166, 197, 353; iv.69; J iv.12; v.88; Pug 62; DhA iv.42; VvA 116; PvA 14, 60, 105, 152. -- a˚ no regret, no remorse A iii.46. Vippaṭisārin
Vippaṭisārin
(adj.) [fr. vippaṭisāra; cp. BSk. vipratisārin Divy 322, 638] remorseful, regretful, repentant S iii.125; iv.133, 320 sq., 359 sq.; A iii.165 sq.; iv.244, 390; J i.200; Miln 10, 285; Tikp 321, 346. Vippataccheti
Vippataccheti
[vi+pa+taccheti] to scratch open or apart M i.506. Vippanaṭṭha
Vippanaṭṭha
[vi+pp. of panassati] strayed, lost, perished Vv 849 = 8444 (=magga -- sammūḷha VvA 337); J iv.139; v.70; vi.525; Miln 326. Vippamutta
Vippamutta
[vi+pamutta] released, set free, saved S i.4, 29, 50; iii.31, 83; iv.11; A i.10; ii.34; Sn 176, 218, 363, 472, 492, 501, 913; J i.84; Vv 204≈2910; Nd1 331, 336. Vippamokkha
Vippamokkha
[vi+pamokkha] release, deliverance S i.154; J v.27. Vippayutta
Vippayutta
[vi+payutta] separated S ii.173 (visaŋ- yutta+); Sn 914 (or ˚mutta). -- ˚paccaya the relation of dissociation Tikp 6, 53 sq., 65; Vism 539. Vippayoga
Vippayoga
[vi+payoga] separation Sn 41; PvA 161 (piya˚). Vippalapati
Vippalapati
[vi+palapati] to talk confusedly (as in one's sleep), to chatter, wail, lament Vin i.15; S iv.303; J i.61; iii.217; iv.167; DhA ii.100; PvA 40, 93. Vippalambheti
Vippalambheti
[vi+palambheti] to deceive, mock DA i.151; ThA 78. Vippalāpa
Vippalāpa
[vi+palāpa] confused talk, wailing Ps i.38; PvA 18. Vippalujjati
Vippalujjati
[vi+palujjati] to be broken up, to be de- stroyed Nd1 5. Vippavadati
Vippavadati
[vi+pavadati] to dispute, disagree J iv.163; vi.267. Vippavasati
Vippavasati
[vi+pavasati] to go from home, to be away from (abl.), to be absent Sn 1138 ( = apeti apagacchati vinā hoti Nd2 582); J iv.51, 439. -- pp. vippavuttha. Vippavāsa
Vippavāsa
[vi+pavāsa] absence; in sati˚ absence of mind, neglect, absentmindedness, thoughtlessness J i.410; SnA 339; a˚ thoughtfulness, mindfulness Vin v.216; Sn 1142; J iv.92. Vippaviddha
Vippaviddha
[pp. of vippavijjhati, vi+pa+vyadh] pierced through and through J i.61. Vippavuttha
Vippavuttha
[pp. of vippavasati] absent; ˚sati neglectful DhA i.239. Vippasanna
Vippasanna
(adj.) [vi+pasanna] (quite) purified, clear; happy, bright, pure, sinless Vin iii.88 (˚chavivaṇṇa); S i.32 (cetas); iii.2, 235; iv.118, 294; v.301; A iii.41, 236; Sn 637; Dh 82, 413 ( = pasanna -- citta DhA iv.192); Pv i.1010 (=suṭṭhu pasanna); ii.935; Vism 262 (where KhA reads pasanna only); DhA ii.127; DA i.221. Vippasādeti
Vippasādeti
[Caus. of vippasīdati] to purify, cleanse Sn 506. Vippasīdati
Vippasīdati
[vi+pasīdati] to become bright; fig. to be reconciled or pleased, to be satisfied or happy Dh 82; J i.51; PvA 122 (mukha -- vaṇṇa). Caus. vippasādeti. Vippasukkhati
Vippasukkhati
[vi+pa+sukkhati] to dry up entirely J v.106. Vippahāna
Vippahāna
(nt.) [vi+pahāna] leaving, abandoning, giving up S i.39 = Sn 1109; Sn 1097; J vi.260; Miln 181. Vippahita
Vippahita
(nt.) [vi+pahita2] sending out in all directions, message J iii.386 (dūta˚). Vippahīna
Vippahīna
[pp. of vippajahati] given up, abandoned S i.99; A v.16, 29 sq.; Sn 360, 362. Vippita
Vippita
at J vi.185 is to be read cipiṭa ("flat"). Vipphandati
Vipphandati
[vi+phandati; cp. BSk. vispandati Jtm 11 to twitch, writhe, struggle Vv 5216 (5214 Ha.); J iv.495 -- pp. vipphandita. Vipphandita
Vipphandita
(nt.) [pp. of vipphandati] "writhing," twitching, struggle M i.446; S ii.62; -- (fig.) in diṭṭhi˚ combd with visūkāyita) "scuffling of opinion" (Mrs. Rh. D.), sceptical agitation, worry & writhing (cp. Dial. i.53) M i.8, 486; S i.123 (here without diṭṭhi˚; the C. expln is "hatthirājavaṇṇa sappavaṇṇ' ādidassa nāni" K.S. i.320); Dhs 381; Pug 22. Vipphala
Vipphala
(or is it pipphala?) = phala at J vi.518. Vipphalati
Vipphalati
[vi+phalati] (intrs.) to split open, to burst asunder: so read at J v.33, 493 (for vipatati); Pv iv.146 (for vipāteti); see detail under vipāṭeti. Vipphāra
Vipphāra
[fr. vi+pharati 1 or 2] diffusion, pervasion, (adj.) pervading, spreading out A i.171 (vitakka -- vip phāra -- sadda, cp. Kvu trsln 241), 206 (mahājutika mahā vipphāra); iv.252; Ps i.112 sq.; ii.174; J iii.12 (mahā˚ +mahājutika); v.150 (id.); Miln 230 & 270 (vacī˚ dilating in talk), 130, 346; Vism 42; DA i.192; VvA 103 (mahā˚+mahājutika); PvA 178 (karuṇā˚). -- 629 -- Vipphāravant
Vipphāravant
(adj.) [fr. vipphāra, cp. pharati 1 & vip- phurati] possessing vibration DhsA 115 = Vism 142. Vipphārika
Vipphārika
(adj.) [fr. vi+pharati 2] spreading out (in effulgence) VvA 5 (mahā˚). Vipphārita
Vipphārita
[pp. of Caus. vi+pharati] expanded Dāvs v.34 (˚akkhi -- yugala, both eyes wide open). Vipphālita
Vipphālita
(adj.) [vi+phālita 2] split open, cut to pieces PvA 152 (su˚; so read for vipphalita); Sdhp 188 (˚anga). Vipphāleti
Vipphāleti
[vi+sphar: cp. phālita 1. It is not = vi+ phāleti] to expand, to bend or draw the bow J vi.580. Vipphuraṇa
Vipphuraṇa
(nt.) [vi+phuraṇa = pharaṇa] spreading out, effulgence, pervasion VvA 277. Vipphurati
Vipphurati
[vi+phurati: see pharati] to vibrate, tremble, quiver, fly asunder, diffuse J i.51; SnA 225; VvA 12 (vijjotamāna vipphurato). Vipphoṭita
Vipphoṭita
(adj.) [vi+phoṭita: see phoṭa, cp. BSk. vis- phoṭa open Divy 603] burst open (of a boil) Th 1, 306. Viphala
Viphala
(adj.) [vi+phala] fruitless, useless Sdhp 527. Vibandha
Vibandha
[vi+bandha] fetter PvA 207. Vibandhana
Vibandhana
(nt.) [vi+bandhana] = vibandha ThA 243. Vibādhaka
Vibādhaka
(adj.) [fr. vibādha] doing harm to ( -- ˚), injuring, preventing Dāvs ii.88. Vibādhati
Vibādhati
[vi+bādhati] to oppress, harm Miln 135 (so read for ˚bhādati); DhsA 42. -- Pass. vibādhiyati to be oppressed PvA 239. Vibbedha
Vibbedha
[fr. vi+vyadh after analogy of ubbedha; not vi+bheda] circumference J i.212. Vibbhanta
Vibbhanta
[pp. of vibbhamati] 1. roaming, straying; strayed, confused M i.171 (padhāna˚ giving up exertion), 247 (id.). Usually in phrase ˚citta with wandering (or confused) mind S i.61 (see expln of C. at K.S. i.321), 204; iii.93; v.269; A i.70; ii.30; iii.391; It 90; J iv.459 (+kupit' indriya); Miln 324. -- At DhsA 260 we find the cpd. vibbhanti -- bhāva [vibbhanta in compn with bhu!] of citta, in meaning "wavering, roaming" (of mind): so read for vibhatti -- bhāva. Vibbhantaka
Vibbhantaka
(adj.) [vibbhanta+ka] 1. straying away from ( -- ˚), confused Vism 187 (jhāna˚), 429. -- 2. (a bhikkhu) who has forsaken the Order, apostate Vin ii.60. Vibbhamati
Vibbhamati
[vi+bhamati] to wander about, to go astray, to forsake the Order Vin i.72; ii.14; iii.40 (may be taken in the sense of enjoying oneself or sporting, i. e. cohabiting, at this passage), iv.216; J i.117; iii.462 (of a bhikkhu enticed by his former wife), 496. -- pp. vibbhanta. Vibhanga
Vibhanga
[vi+bhanga, of bhaj1] distribution, division, distinction, classification Vin i.359; Sn 600 (jāti˚ classification of species; expld as jāti -- vitthāra at SnA 464); J iv.361 (+vicaya; C. expls as vibhāga); Mhvs 30, 87 (dhātu˚ distribution of relics); SnA 422 (contrasted with uddesa). -- Vibhanga is the title of the second book of the Abhidhamma Piṭaka (see Pāli Name Dictionary). Cp. Sutta -- vibhanga. Vibhajati
Vibhajati
[vi+bhajati, i. e. bhaj1, as in bhājeti] (lit.) to distribute, divide; (fig.) to distinguish, dissect, divide up, classify; to deal with something in detail, to go into details M iii.223; S ii.2, 255 (vibhājeti) = M i.364 (reads virājeti); S iv.93 (atthaŋ); v.261 (dhammaŋ vivarati vibhajati uttāni -- karoti); Sn 87; Pug 41; Vbh 259; Miln 145; SnA 237; DA i.104; PvA 81, 111. ger. vibhajja (q. v.). -- pp. vibhatta. Vibhajana
Vibhajana
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. vibhajati] distinction, divi- sion, going into detail Nett 5, 8 sq., 38 (+vivaraṇā & uttāni -- kammatā); Tikp 10; SnA 445 (vivaraṇa, v., uttāni -- karaṇa); DhsA 343, 344. Cp. vibhājana. Vibhajja
Vibhajja
(adv.) [ger. of vibhajati] dividing, analysing, detailing; in detail (˚ -- ) D iii.229 (˚vyākaraṇīya pañha "discriminating reply" trsln); A ii.46 (˚vacana analysis). -- ˚vāda the Vibhajja doctrine, i. e. the doctrine which analyses, or the "religion of logic or reason"; a term identical with theravāda , the doctrine of the Elders, i. e. the original teaching of the Buddhist church. -- ˚vādin one who teaches the V. doctrine, Ep. of the Buddha Mhvs 5, 271; Tikp 366; VbhA 130; cp. Kvu trsln introd. p. 38. Vibhatta
Vibhatta
(adj.) [pp. of vibhajati] 1. (lit.) divided, distri- buted; parted, partitioned, having divisions, portioned off Sn 300; Pv i.1013 (of niraya); J v.266 (id.); Miln 316 (a˚ samudda). -- su˚ well divided, well planned, proportioned, regular Sn 305; Pv iii.221; Miln 330, 345; Vism 108. -- 2. (fig.) detailed, explained, analysed Vism 187; SnA 288; PvA 104. Vibhattavant
Vibhattavant
(adj.) [fr. vibhatta] full of details, giving all detail Vism 212; DA i.34. Vibhatti
Vibhatti
(f.) [fr. vibhajati] 1. division, distinction, classi- fication, detail, variety J vi.432 (of paintings); Nett 1 sq., 105; Miln 102, 381; Vism 352 (contrasted with sankhepa); PvA 199, 282 (rūpa˚ various forms, patterns). -- 2. (t. t. g.) inflection of nouns & verbs, declensions, conjugation SnA 397; VvA 78, 199. -- ˚lopa omission of inflection VvA 174, 192; PvA 147. -- Note. vibhattibhāva at DhsA 260 is to be read as vibbhanti˚ (see under vibbhanta). Vibhattika
Vibhattika
(adj.) [fr. vibhatti] having divisions; (fig.) detailed. Neg. a˚ not giving details VvA 164. Vibhava
Vibhava
[vi+bhava] 1. power, wealth, prosperity DA i.147; J i.56; v.285; Mhvs 26, 6; DhA i.6; ii.9, 84; iv.7; VvA 5, 302 (˚sampanna rich); PvA 122, 130, 176, 196. Great wealth is expressed by asīti -- koṭi -- vibhava, consisting in 80 koṭis, e. g. DhA i.367; ii.25. -- bahu˚ very rich J i.145; mahā˚ id. PvA 97, 107. -- yathā vibhavaŋ according to one's means or power PvA 54; vibhav' ânurūpaŋ id. VvA 254. -- 2. non -- existence, cessation of life, annihilation D i.34; Sn 514 (+bhava), 867 (id.); Nd1 274, 282; J iii.402 (˚ŋ gata = vināsaŋ patta C.); v.267 (id.); DhsA 392; DA i.120; VbhA 505 (=bhava -- vigama). See also taṇhā B 1.

-- taṇhā "craving for life to end" (Dial. iii.208), desire for non -- existence D iii,216, 275; Vin i.10; Ud 33; It 50; VbhA 111. -- diṭṭhi the theory of non -- becoming D iii.212; A i.83; Nd1 245, 274. Vibhavati
Vibhavati
[vi+bhavati] to cease to exist S iii.56 (fut. ˚issati); Sn 873 (vibhoti); Nd1 279 (id.). -- pp. vibhūta. Vibhassikata
Vibhassikata
(nt.) [vi+bhassa+kata] gossip, lit. "made into talk" Vin iv.241. Vibhāga
Vibhāga
[fr. vibhajati, cp. vibhanga & vibhajana] distri- bution, division; detailing, classification J iv.361; Vism 494; VbhA 83; ThA 100; VvA 37; PvA 122. -- attha˚ detailing of meaning Vism 569; dhātu˚ distribution of relics VvA 297; PvA 212; pada˚ division of words SnA 269; PvA 34. -- Cp. saŋ˚. Vibhājana
Vibhājana
(nt.) [vi+bhājana2] distribution, division Dhtp 92, 561; Dhtm 776, 787. -- 630 -- Vibhāta
Vibhāta
[pp. of vibhāti] shining, turned to light, bright; in phrase vibhātāya rattiyā when night had become light, i. e. at daybreak or dawn (DhA iv.105; PvA 13, 22). -- (nt.) daybreak, dawn DhA ii.5 (˚khaṇe). Vibhāti
Vibhāti
[vi+bhāti] to shine forth, to be or become light (said of the night turning into day); pres. also vibhāyati Vin i.78; fut. vibhāyissati D ii.148; aor. vibhāyi J v.354. -- pp. vibhāta. Vibhādati
Vibhādati
at Miln 135 should be read at vibādhati. Vibhāyana
Vibhāyana
(nt.) [fr. vibhāti] shining forth, brightening VvA 148. Vibhāvana
Vibhāvana
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. vibhāveti] 1. making clear, ascertainment, explanation, exposition J iii.389; Vbh 342, 343 (ā); Sn A 13, 261 sq., 318; VbhA 409 (ā); ThA 76 (ā), 230; PvA 137, 140 (so read for vibhavanā in attha˚). -- 2. annihilation, disappearance, making non -- existing (cp. vibhava 2) DhsA 163 (vibhāvanā nāma antara -- dhāpanā ti attho). Vibhāvaniya
Vibhāvaniya
(adj.) [fr. vibhāvana] pertaining to ascertain- ment, making clear, explaining PvA 244 (paramattha˚). Vibhāvita
Vibhāvita
[pp. of vibhāveti] made non -- existing, anni- hilated Nd2 584. Vibhāvin
Vibhāvin
(adj.) [fr. vibhāveti] intelligent, wise Sn 317; J vi.304; Nd2 259 ( = medhāvin); Miln 21, 276, 346; Sdhp 382. Vibhāveti
Vibhāveti
[vi+bhāveti] 1. to understand clearly (lit. "to produce intensively or well") Sn 318 (ger. a -- vibhāvayitvā). -- 2. to make clear, to explain KhA 89; SnA 406, 472; PvA 1, 70, 92, 135. -- 3. to put out of existence, to annihilate [as Caus. of vibhava 2] DhsA 163. -> pp. vibhāvita. Vibhāsita
Vibhāsita
[pp. Caus. of vi+bhāsati2] illuminated, made bright, shining forth Sdhp 591. Vibhinna
Vibhinna
(adj.) [vi+bhinna] scattered; divided, at vari- ance Sn 314 ( = aññam -- aññaŋ bhinna SnA 324). Vibhītaka
Vibhītaka
(& ˚ṭaka) [cp. *Sk. vibhīta & ˚ka] the plant Terminalia belerica; beleric myrobolan. Dice were made from its fruits, which are also used as medicine (intoxicant); its flowers smell vilely. -- Vin i.201; J iii.161; v.363; vi.529. Vibhūta
Vibhūta
(adj.) [pp. of vibhavati, or vi+bhūta] 1. [cp. bhūta 1, & vibhava 2] destroyed, annihilated, being without Th 1, 715; Sn 871 sq., 1113 ( = vibhāvita atikkanta vītivatta Nd2 584). -- 2. [cp. bhūta 3] false Sn 664. -- 3. [cp. vibhāveti 2] clear, distinct A v.325; Miln 311; Abdhs 16 (a˚ unclear); Vism 112 (& a˚). -- ˚ŋ karoti to explain Miln 308. Vibhūti
Vibhūti
(f.) [fr. vi+bhavati] 1. [cp. vibhūta 2] destruc- tion, ruin Th 1, 1018 (˚nandin = malign). -- 2. [cp. vibhava 1] splendour, majesty, glory J v.305; PvA 133 (dāna˚), 216 (rāja˚). Vibhūsana
Vibhūsana
(nt.) [vi+bhūsana] adornment A i.212; ii.40, 145, 209; Sn 59 (cp. Nd2 585); Pug 21, 58; J i.8; Dhs 1348; Miln 382. Vibhūsā
Vibhūsā
(f.) [vi+bhūsā] ornament, decoration, distinction, pride Sn 926; Nd1 380; Nd2 585; Miln 224 (Rh. D. trsls "dexterity," hardly correct. Should we read "vibhūti"?). Vibhūsita
Vibhūsita
[pp. of vibhūseti] adorned, decorated Mhvs 25, 102; Vism 10; PvA 46, 157. Vibhūseti
Vibhūseti
[vi+bhūseti] to adorn, embellish, beautify Th 2, 411; Mhvs 19, 25; DhA i.77. -- pp. vibhūsita. Vibheti
Vibheti
[vi+bhāyati] to be afraid, to stand in awe of J v.509 ( = bhāyati C.). Should we read bibheti? Vibhedaka
Vibhedaka
[vi+bhedaka] one who disturbs friendship, a slanderer J iii.260. Vibhedika
Vibhedika
(f.) [fr. vi+bhid] the palmyra tree J vi.529. Vibhedeti
Vibhedeti
[vi+bhedeti] to cause disruption, to slander A v.345 sq. Vimajjana
Vimajjana
(nt.) [fr. vi+majjati2] making smooth, polishing M i. 385. Vimaṭṭha
Vimaṭṭha
(adj.) [vi+maṭṭha] smoothed, soft, smooth, polished J v.96 (˚ābharana), (C. expls as "visāla"), 204, 400 (of ornaments). -- ubhato -- bhāga˚ polished or smooth on both sides M i. 385; A v.61 = M ii.13 (has ˚maddha). Vimata
Vimata
(adj.) [fr. vi+man] perplexed, in doubt J v.340. Vimati
Vimati
(f.) [vi+mati] doubt, perplexity, consternation D i.105; S iv.327; A ii.79, 185; Ap 29; Dhs 425; J iii.522; Miln 119, 144, 339; DA i.274. Vimada
Vimada
(adj.) [vi+mada] disintoxicated, without conceit J v.158 (taken as "unconscious" by C.). Vimaddana
Vimaddana
(nt.) [vi+maddana] crushing, destroying VvA 232. Vimana
Vimana
(adj.) [vi+mano] 1. perplexed, consternated Miln 23, 118; PvA 274. -- 2. infatuate Th 2, 380. -> 3. distracted, distressed Th 1, 1051; J vi.523. Vimariyādikata
Vimariyādikata
(adj.) [vi+mariyādā+kata] lit. made unrestricted, i. e. delivered, set free S ii.173; iii.31 (vippamutto ˚ena cetasā viharati); vi.11; A v.151 sq. -- At Th 1, 184 v. l. for vipariyādi˚. Vimala
Vimala
(adj.) [vi+mala] without stains, spotless, un- stained, clean, pure A iv.340; Sn 378, 476, 519, 637, 1131 (cp. Nd2 586); J i.18; Miln 324; DhA iv.192. Vimalayaka
Vimalayaka
[cp. Sk. vimalaka] a certain precious stone of dark -- blue colour VvA 111. Vimāna
Vimāna1
(nt.) [in the Pāli meaning not Vedic. Found in meaning "palace -- chariot" in the Mbhārata and elsewhere in Epic Sk.] lit. covering a certain space, measuring; the defns given by Dhpāla refer it to "without measure," i. e. immeasurable. Thus = vigata -- māne appamāṇe mahanta vara -- pāsāda VvA 131;= visiṭṭhamānaŋ, pamāṇato mahantaŋ VvA 160. -- Appld meaning: heavenly (magic) palace, a kind of paradise, elysium. -- 1. General remarks: (a) The notion of the vimāna is peculiar to the later, fantastic parts of the Canon, based on popular superstition (Vimāna & Peta Vatthu, Apadāna, Jātaka and similar fairy tales). It shows distinct traces of foreign (Hellenic -- Babylonian) influence and rests partly on tales of sea -- faring merchants (cp. location of V. in mid -- ocean). On the other hand it represents the old (Vedic) ratha as chariot of the gods, to be driven at will (cp. below 5, 7, 8). Thus at Vv 16 (here as 500 chariots!), 36, 63, 64; J i.59 (deva -- vimānasadisa ratha). -- (b) The vimānas are in remote parts of the world (cp. the island of the blessed), similar to the elysium in Homer's Odyssey, e. g. iv.563 sq.: s)e)s *)hlu/sion pedi/on kai\ pei/rata gai/hs a)qa/natoi pemyousin etc. (trsln G. Chapman: "the immortal ends of all the earth, the fields Elysian Fate to thee will give; where Rhadamanthus rules, and where men live a nevertroubled life, where snow, nor show'rs, nor irksome winter spends his fruitless pow'rs, but from the ocean zephyr still resumes a constant breath, that all the fields perfume"). Cp. Ehni, Yama p. 206 sq. -- (c) In popular religion the influence of this eschatological literature has been very great, so great in fact as to make the Vimāna and Peta -- vatthus & the Jātakastories, exemplifying the theory of retribution as appealing to an ordinary mind by vivid examples of mythology, greater favourites than any other canonical book. From this point of view we have to judge Mhvs 14, 58: Petavatthuŋ Vimānañ ca sacca -- saŋyuttaŋ eva ca desesi thero . . . -- 2. The descriptions of the Vimānas are in the most exuberant terms. The palaces (kingdoms in miniature) are of gold, crystal or exquisite jewels, their pillars are studded with gems, their glittering roofs are peaked with 700 pinnacled turrets (VvA 244, 289; also as "innumerable" VvA 188, or 18,000 Ap. 63). Surrounded are these towering (ucca) mansions by lovely, well -- planned gardens, the paths of which are sprinkled with gold dust; they are full of wishing -- trees, granting every desire. There is a variety of stately trees, bearing heavenly flowers & fruit, swaying gently in delicious breezes. Lotus ponds with cool waters invite to refreshing baths; a host of birds mix their songs with the strains of cymbals and lutes, played by heavenly musicians. Angelic maidens perform their dances, filling the atmosphere with a radiant light which shines from their bodies. Peace and happiness reign everywhere, the joys of such a vimāna cannot be expressed in words. This elysium lasts for aeons (cira -- ṭṭhitika Vv 801, kappa -- ṭṭhāyin Th 1, 1190); in short it is the most heavenly paradise which can be imagined. -- For a monograph of vimāna the Vimāna Vatthu and its Commentary should in the first place be consulted. -- 3. The inhabitants of the Vimānas are usually happy persons (or yakkhas: see Stede, P. V. trsl. 39 -- 41), called devatā, who have attained to such an exalted state through their own merit (puñña see foll. 4). -- Departed souls who have gone through the Petastage are frequently such devas (at Vv 172 called pubbadevatā). That these are liable to semi -- punishment and semi -- enjoyment is often emphasized, and is founded on the character of their respective kamma: J i.240 (vimāna -- petiyo sattāhaŋ sukhaŋ anubhavanti, sattāhaŋ dukkhaŋ); J v.2 (vemānika -- peta -- bhavena -- kammassa sarikkhako vipāko ahosi; i. e. by night pleasures; by day tortures); cp. Pv ii. 12 (see Stede, Gespenstergeschichten des Peta Vatthu p. 106), iii. 78; PvA 204, 210, & Divy p. 9. Expressions for these "mixed" devatās who are partly blessed, partly cursed are e. g.: vimānapeta PvA 145, 148, 271, 275; f. vimāna -- petī PvA 152, 160, 186, 190; vimāna devatā PvA 190; vemānika -- peta J v.2; PvA 244; DhA iii.192 (as powerful, by the side of nāgas & supaṇṇas). -- In their appearance they are like beautiful human beings, dressed in yellowish (pīta, expld as "golden" robes (cp. the angels in the oldest Christian apocalyptic literature: on their relation to Hellenic ideas see e. g. A. Dieterich, Nekyia, Leipzig 1903, pp. 10 -- 18, 29: red & white the colours of the land of the blessed), with gold and silver as complementary outfit in person and surroundings. Thus throughout the Vimāna Vatthu, esp. Nos, 36 & 47 (pīta -- vimāna). Their splendour is often likened to that of the moon or of the morning star. -- 4. Origin of Vimānas. A vimāna arises in the "other world" (paraloka) at the instant of somebody doing good (even during the lifetime of the doer) and waits for the entry of the owner: DhA iii.291 sq. In the description of the vimāna of the nāga -- king (J vi.315=Vv 8422) it is said on this subject: a vimāna is obtained neither without a cause (adhicca), nor has it arisen in the change of the seasons, nor is it self -- made (sayankata), nor given by the gods, but "sakehi kammehi apāpakehi puññehi laddha" (i. e. won by one's own sinless & meritorious deeds). -- Entering the Vimāna -- paradise is, analogous to all semi -- lethal passing over into enchanted conditions in fairy tales, compared with the awakening from sleep (as in a state of trance): sutta -- ppabuddha DhA iii.7. Of the Vimāna itself it is said that it appears (pātur ahosi), e. g. VvA 188; DhA i.131; or arises (uggañchi) DhA iii.291; VvA 221. -- 5. Location of the Vimānas. The "vimāna" is an individual paradisiacal state Therefore vimānas are not definitely located "Elysian Fields." They are anywhere (in this world as well as in the Beyond), but certain places are more favourable for their establishment than others. Thus we may state that kat) e) coxh/n they are found in the neighbourhood of water. Thus either in the Ocean (majjhe sāgarasmiŋ Th 1, 1190; samudda -- majjhe PvA 47), where access is possible only through adventures after shipwreck or similar causes (J. iv.1 sq.; Pv iv.11); or at one or the other of the great lakes of the Himavant (Pv ii.12). They are in out -- of -- the -- way places ("end of the world"); they are also found in the wilderness: Vv 84; Pv iv.32. As tree -- vimānas with rukkha -- devatā as inhabitants they occur e. g. at J iii.310; v.502; Pv i.9; ii.9; PvA 244. Very often they are phantasmagorical castles in the air. By special power of their inhabitants they may be transported to any place at will. This faculty of transference is combined with the ability of extremely swift motion (compared to the speed of thought: manojava). Thus a golden palanquin is suspended in mid -- air above a palace at VvA 6 (ākāsa -- cārin, sīgha -- java). They are said to be ākāsaṭṭhānāni J vi.117; SnA 222, 370 (but the palace of the Yakkha Āḷavaka is bhumma -- ṭṭha, i. e. stands on the ground, and is described as fortified: SnA 222). The place of a (flying) vimāna may be taken by various conveyances: a chair, an elephant, ship, bed, litter etc. Or the location of it in the other world is in the Cittalatāvana (Vv 37), or the Pāricchattaka tree (Vv 38), or in the Cātummahārājika -- bhavana (VvA 331). -- Later on, when the theory of meritorious deities (or departed souls raised to special rank) as vemānikā devā was established, their abode was with their vimānas settled among the Tāvatiŋsa (e. g. VvA 188, 217, 221, 244, 289; DhA iii.291), or in the Tusita heaven. Thus Tusita -- pura interchanges with Tusita -- vimāna at DhA ii. 208. The latter occurs e. g. at DhA iii.173, 219. -> 6. The dimensions of the Vimānas are of course enormous, but harmonious (being "divine"), i. e. either of equal extent in all directions, or specially proportioned with significant numbers. Of these the foll. may be mentioned. The typical numbers of greatest frequency are 12, 16, 30, 700, in connection with yojana. The dimensions, with ref. to which 12 & 16 are used, are length, width, height, & girth, whereas 700 applies usually to the height (DhA iii 291 e. g., where it is said to be "over 700"), and the number of turrets (see above 2). At VvA 267 (satta -- yojana -- pamāṇo ratho) No. 7 is used for 700; No. 30 (extent) is found e. g. at DhA iii.7; ThA 55; No. 12 e. g. at J vi.116; DhA iii.291; VvA 6, 217, 221, 244, 246, 291 sq.; No. 16 at VvA 188, 289. -- 7. Vimānas of sun and moon. A peculiar (late?) idea is that sun and moon have their vimānas (cp. Vedic ratha=sun). There are only very few passages in the post -- canonical books mentioning these. The idea that the celestial bodies are vimānas ("immense chariots in the shape of open hemispheres" Kirfel, Kosmographie der Inder p. 282) is essentially Jainistic. See on Jain Vimānas in general Kirfel, l. c. pp. 7 -- 9, 292 -- 300. -- In the Pāli Com. we find SnA 187, 188 (canda -- vimānaŋ bhinditvā=breaking up the moon's palace, i. e. the moon itself); and DhA iii.99 (candimasuriyā vimānāni gahetvā aṭṭhaŋsu). -- 8. Other terms for vimāna, and specifications. Var. other expressions are used more frequently for vimāna in general. Among these are ratha (see above 1 a); nagara (Pv ii.125); pura (see above 5, as tusita˚); pāsāda; either as dibba˚ (DhA iii.291), or vara˚ (VvA 130), or vimāna˚ (Vv 3110). -- The vimānas are specified as deva -- vimāna "heavenly palace," e. g. J i.59; Vism 342; VvA 173; or (in a still more superlative expression) brahmavimāna, i. e. best or most excellent magic palace, highest paradise, e. g. D i.17 (here perhaps "palace of Brahmā"); iii.28 ("abode of brahmās" Rh. D.); It 15; Vism 108. The latter expression is abbreviated to brahma (nt.) "highest, best thing of all," "summum bonum," paradise, magic palace: ThA 47 (Ap. v. 6) & 55 (Ap. v. 8), at both places as sukataŋ, i. e. well made. -- A rather odd expression for the paradisiacal state (in concrete form) is attabhāva (existence, cp. Gr. bioth/ Hom. Od. iv.365?) instead of vimāna, e. g. DhA i.131 (tigāvuta -- ppamāṇa); iii.7 (id.). -- 9. Various. Of innumerable passages in the books mentioned above (under 1) only the foll. may be given for ref.: J iii.310 398, 405; v.165, 171; vi.117 sq., 120 sq.; Ap 35, 55, 59; Dāvs iv.54 (acalaŋ v. antalikkhamhi nāvaŋ gativirahitaŋ ambhorāsi -- majjhamhi disvā); and Vimāna Vatthu throughout. Of passages in the 4 older Nikāyas we have only A ii.33 (ye devā dīgh' āyukā uccesu vimānesu cira -- ṭṭhitikā). At S i.12=23 we should read "na ca mānaŋ" for "na vimānaŋ" (K.S. i.18). -- 632 -- Vimāna
Vimāna2
[vi+māna] disrespect, contempt Sn 887 (˚dassin showing contempt). Vimānana
Vimānana
(nt.) [vi+mānana] disrespect, contempt D iii. 190 (a˚); Miln 377, 386. Vimānita
Vimānita
[pp. of vimāneti] treated with contempt A iii.158, 160. Vimāneti
Vimāneti
[vi+māneti] to disrespect, to treat with con- tempt Vin ii.260; Sn 888; Nd1 297. -- pp. vimānita. Vimukha
Vimukha
(adj.) [vi+mukha] turning away from, averted, neglectful Mhvs 22, 80; PvA 3 (dhamma -- saññā˚), 269 (carita˚). Vimuccati
Vimuccati
[vi+muccati, Pass. of muñcati] to be released, to be free (of passion), to be emancipated M i.352; S ii.94, 124; iii.46, 189; iv.86; v.218; A iv.126 sq., 135, 179; Sn 755; Pug 61, 68; Sdhp 613. -- aor. 3rd pl. vimucciŋsu Sn p. 149. -- pp. vimutta. See also (an)upādā & (an)upādāya. -- Caus. vimoceti to cause to be released or emancipated, to set free A ii.196 (cittaŋ); Vin iii.70 (id.). -- grd. vimocanīya A ii.196. Vimutta
Vimutta
[pp. of vimuñcati] freed, released, intellectually emancipated Vin i.8; A iv.75, 179, 340; v.29; D iii.97, 100, 133, 258; S i.23, 35; iii.13, 53, 137; Sn 354, 475, 522, 877, 1071 sq., 1101, 1114; Nd1 283; Nd2 587; Pv iv.132 (arahā+); Vism 410. -- Often as cittaŋ v. an emancipated heart, e. g. D i.80; A iii.21; S i.46, 141; iii.90; iv.164; v.157 (here taken by Mrs. Rh. D. at S vi.93, Index, as "unregulated, distrait"); Sn 975; Nd1 284; Vbh 197. ubhatobhāga˚ emancipated in both ways (see Dial ii. 70) D ii.71; iii.105, 253; S i.191; A i.73; iv.10, 77, 453; v.23; M i.439, 477 sq. -- paññā˚, emancipated by insight, freed by reason (see Dial. ii.68) S i.191; ii.123; D ii.70; iii.105, 254; M i.439, 477. -- saddhā˚ freed by faith A i.73; iv.10, 77; v.23; Ps ii.52; M i.439, 477. -- anupādā vimutta freed without any further clinging to the world M i.486; S ii.18; iii.59; iv.83 and passim.

-- atta having an emancipated self S iii.46, 55, 58; A iv.428. -- āyatana point or occasion of emancipation, of which there are 5, viz. hearing the Dhamma taught by the Master, teaching it oneself, reciting it, pondering over it, understanding it A iii.21 sq.; D iii.241, 279; Ps i.5. Vimutti
Vimutti
(f.) [fr. vimuccati] release, deliverance, emanci- pation D i.174; iii.288; S v.206 sq. (abhijānāti), 222 (ariya˚), 266, 356; A ii.247, iii.165 (yathābhūtaŋ pajānāti), 242, Sn 54, 73, 725 sq.; J i.77, 78, 80; Ps i.22; ii.143 sq.; Nd1 21; Pug 27, 54 sq.; Vbh 86, 272 sq., 392 (micchā˚) Nett 29; Vism 410; Sdhp 614. -- ceto˚ (& paññā˚) emancipation of heart (and reason) D i.156; iii.78, 108, 247 sq., 273; S i.120; ii.214; iv.119 sq.; v.118 sq., 289 sq.; A i.123 sq., 220 sq.; 243; ii.36, 87, 214; iii.20, 131, 400; iv.83, 314 sq.; v.10 sq.; Vbh 344; Nett 40, 43, 81 sq., 127. -- sammā˚ right or true emancipation A ii.222 sq.; v.327; Ps i.107; ii.173. -- See also arahatta, upekkhā, khandha ii.A, dassana, phala, mettā.

-- rasa the essence of emancipation A i.36; iv.203; PvA 287. -- sāra substance or essence of emancipation A ii.141, 243; iv.385. Vimokkha
Vimokkha
(& Vimokha) [fr. vi+muc, cp. mokkha1] deliverance, release, emancipation, dissociation from the things of the world, Arahantship D ii.70, 111); iii.34, 35, 230, 288; M i.196 (samaya˚ & asamaya˚); S i.159 (cetaso v.); ii.53, 123; iii.121; iv.33; A ii.87; iv.316; v.11; Vin v.164 (cittassa); Sn 1071 (which Nd2 588 expls as "agga" etc., thus strangely taking it in meaning of mokkha2, perhaps as edifying etym.); Nd2 466 (in expln of Bhagavā); Ps i.22; ii.35 (as 68!), 243; Pug 11 sq.; Vbh 342; Dhs 248; Nett 90, 100, 119, 126; Vism 13, 668 sq.; Miln 159; PvA 98; Sdhp 34, 264. -> The three vimokkhas are: suññato v., animitto v., appaṇihito v. Ps ii.35; Vism 658. The eight vimokkhas or stages of emancipation, are: the condition of rūpī, arūpa -- saññī, recognition of subha, realization of ākāsânañc'āyatana, of viññāṇ'ânañc'āyatana, ākiñcaññ'āyatana, neva -- saññā -- n'âsaññ'āyatana, saññāvedayita -- nirodha D iii.262 (cp. Dial. iii.242), A i.40; iv.306; Vbh 342; expld in detail at Ps ii.38 -- 40. [cp. BSk. aṣṭau vimokṣāḥ, e. g. AvŚ ii.69, 153.] -- In sequence jhāna vimokkha samādhi samāpatti (magga phala) at Vin i.97, 104; iii.91; iv.25; A iii.417, 419; v.34, 38; Vbh 342. -- See also jhāna. Vimocana
Vimocana
(nt.) [vi+mocana] 1. letting loose, discharging Dhtm 216 (assu˚). -- 2. release from, doing away with Mhvs 35, 73 (antarāya˚). Vimoceti
Vimoceti
see vimuccati. Vimohita
Vimohita
[pp. of vi+moheti] deluded, bewildered Sdhp 363. Vimba
Vimba
is another spelling for bimba at S v.217. Cp. BSk. vimbaka (form of face) Divy 172, 525. Vimhaya
Vimhaya
[cp. Sk. vismaya, vi+smi] astonishment, sur- prise, disappointment J v.69 (in expln of vyamhita); Mhvs 5, 92; SnA 42 (explaining "vata"), 256 (do. for "ve" = aho); DA i.43; VvA 234, 329. Vimhāpaka
Vimhāpaka
(adj.) [fr. vimhāpati] deceiving, dismaying SnA 549 ( = kuhaka). Vimhāpana
Vimhāpana
(nt.) [fr. vimhāpeti] dismaying, deceiving, disappointing Vism 24 (in expln of kuhana); Dhtp 633 (id.). Vimhāpeti
Vimhāpeti
[Caus. of *vimhayati = vi+smi] to astonish, to cause dismay to, to deceive Mhvs 17, 44; DA i.91 (in expln of kuhaka). Vimhita
Vimhita
(adj.) [pp. of vi+smi, cp. mihita] astonished, discouraged, dismayed J vi.270 (su˚ very dismayed); Miln 122; Mhvs 6, 19; Dāvs ii.80. See also vyamhita. Viya
Viya
(indecl.) [another form of iva, viâ *via (so some Prākrits: Pischel Prk. Gr., § 143, 336)>viya. Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 336, 337 derives it fr. viva = v' iva] 1. part of comparison: like, as; stands for iva (usually in verse after ā: Sn 420 (jātimā v.); Pv i.85 (vārinā v.); or o Sn 580 (vajjho v.), 818 (kapaṇo v.); or ŋ: Sn 381 (vajantaŋ v.), 689 (nekkhaŋ v.). -- 2. dubitative particle: na viya maññe I suppose not M ii.121. -> Cp. byā. Viya˚
Viya˚
the diaeretic form (for sake of metre) of vya˚ [ = vi+ a˚], which see generally. Cp. the identical veyya˚. Viyatta
Viyatta
(adj.) [cp. Sk. vyakta, vi+pp. of añj] determined, of settled opinion, learned, accomplished; only in stock phrase sāvakā viyattā vinītā visāradā (which Rh. D. trsls "true hearers, wise and well -- trained, ready etc." Dial. ii. 114) at D ii.104 = A iv.310=S v.260=Ud 63. The BSk. (at Divy 202) has śrāvakāh (for bhikkhū!) paṇḍitā bhaviṣyanti vyaktā vinītā viśāradāh. -> 2. separated, split, dissenting, heretic Sn 800 (= vavatthita bhinna dvejjhāpanna etc. Nd2 108; =bhinna SnA 530). Cp. the two meanings of vavatthita (=*vyakta), which quasi -- correspond to viyatta 1 & 2 At this passage the v. l. (all SS of the Commentary) viyutta is perhaps to be perferred to viyatta.

Note. It is to be noted that viyatta in § 1 does not occur in poetry, but seems to have spelling viy˚ because of the foll. vinīta and visārada. Cp. vyatta & veyyatta. -- 633 -- Viyatti
Viyatti
(f.) [cp. Sk. vyakti] distinctness Dhtp 366 & Dhtm 593 (in defn of brū ). Cp. veyyatti. Viyākāra
Viyākāra
[vi+ākāra] preparation, display, distinction, splendour, majesty Sn 299 ( = sampatti SnA 319). Viyācikkhati
Viyācikkhati
in verse at Sn 1090 for vyācikkhati, i. e. vi+ācikkhati, to tell, relate, explain; pp. vyākhyāta. Viyāpanna
Viyāpanna
[vi+āpanna, pp. of vi+āpajjati cp. vyāpaj- jati] gone down, lost, destroyed Sn 314 (in verse; gloss viyāvatta. The former expld as "naṭṭha," the latter as "viparivattitvā aññathā -- bhūta" at SnA 324). Viyāyata
Viyāyata
[vi+āyata] stretched out or across J iii.373 (in verse). Viyārambha
Viyārambha
[vi+ārambha] striving, endeavour, under- taking Sn 953 (expld as the 3 abhisankhāras, viz. puñña˚, apuñña˚ & āneñja˚ at Nd1 442). Viyūḷha
Viyūḷha
[apparently vi+ūḷha, pp. of viyūhati, but mixed in meaning with vi+ūha (of vah) = vyūha] massed, heaped; thick, dense (of fighting) M i.86=Nd2 1995 (ubhato viyūlḥaŋ sangāmaŋ massed battle on both sides); A iii.94, 99 (sangāma, cp. S iv.308); J vi.275 (balaggāni viyūḷhāni; C.=pabbūḷha -- vasena ṭhitāni where pabbūḷha evidently in meaning "sambādha." -> 2. put in array, prepared, imminent J ii.336 (maraṇe viyūḷhe=paccupaṭṭhite C.). Cp. saŋyūḷha. Viyūhati
Viyūhati
[vi+ūh, a differentiated form of vah] to take away, carry off, remove Vin iii.48 (paŋsuŋ vyūhati); J i.177, 199 (paŋsuŋ), 238, 331 (kaddamaŋ dvidhā viyūhitvā); iii.52 (vālikaŋ); iv.265 (paŋsuŋ); vi.448 (vālukaŋ); DhsA 315; DhA ii.38; iii.207 (paŋsuŋ). -> pp. viyūḷha. Cp. saŋyūhati. Viyūhana
Viyūhana
(nt.) [fr. viyūhati] removing, removal Vism 302 (paŋsu˚). Viyoga
Viyoga
[vi+yoga 2] separation J vi.482; Mhvs 19, 16 (Mahābodhi˚); PvA 160, 161 (pati˚ from her husband); Sdhp 77, 164. Viyyati
Viyyati
[Pass. of vāyati1 or vināti. The Vedic is ūyate] to be woven Vin iii.259. -- pp. vīta2. Viracita
Viracita
[vi+racita] 1. put together, composed, made VvA 14, 183. -- 2. ornamented ThA 257; VvA 188. Viraja
Viraja
(adj.) [vi+rajo] free from defilement or passion, stainless, faultless Vin i.294 (āgamma maggaŋ virajaŋ); Sn 139, 520, 636, 1105 (see exegesis at Nd2 590); Pv iii.36 ( = vigata -- raja, niddosa PvA 189); DhA iv.142, 187; DA i.237. Often in phrase virajaŋ vītamalaŋ dhamma -- cakkhuŋ udapādi "there arose in him the stainless eye of the Arahant," e. g. Vin i.16; S iv.47. -- virajaŋ (+asokaŋ) padaŋ "the stainless (+painless) element" is another expression for Nibbāna, e. g. S iv.210; A iv.157, 160; It 37, 46; Vv 169; similarly ṭhānaŋ (for padaŋ) Pv ii.333 (=sagga PvA 89). Virajjaka
Virajjaka
(adj.) [vi+rajja+ka] separated from one's kingdom, living in a foreign country VvA 336. Virajjati
Virajjati
[vi+rajjati] to detach oneself, to free oneself of passion, to show lack of interest in (loc.). S ii.94, 125 (nibbindaŋ [ppr.] virajjati); iii.46, 189; iv.2, 86; A v.3; Sn 739 = S iv.205 (tattha); Th 1, 247; Sn 813 (na rajjati na virajjati), 853; Nd1 138, 237; Miln 245; Sdhp 613. -- pp. viratta. -- Caus. virājeti to put away, to estrange (acc.) from (loc.), to cleanse (oneself) of passion (loc.), to purify, to discard as rāga D ii.51; S i.16=Sn 171 (ettha chandaŋ v.=vinetvā viddhaŋsetvā SnA 213); S iv.17=Kvu 178; A ii.196 (rajanīyesu dhammesu cittaŋ v.); Sn 139, 203; Th 1, 282; Pv ii.1319 (itthi -- cittaŋ= viratta -- citta PvA 168); ThA 49; DhA i.327 (itthi -- bhāve chandaŋ v. to give up desire for femininity). -- pp. virājita. Virajjana
Virajjana
(nt.) [fr. virajjati; cp. rajjana] discolouring J iii.148 (rajjana+). Virajjhati
Virajjhati
[vi+rādh; cp. Sk. virādhyati: see rādheti1] to fail, miss, lose S iv.117; J i.17, 490 (aor. virajjhi); ii.432 (id.); PvA 59. -- pp. viraddha. -- Caus. virādheti (q. v.). Viraṇa
Viraṇa
(adj. nt.) [vi+raṇa] without fight or harm, peace Sdhp 579. Virata
Virata
[pp. of viramati] abstaining from (abl.) Sn 59, 531, 704, 900, 1070; Nd1 314; Nd2 591; VvA 72; Sdhp 338. Virati
Virati
(f.) [vi+rati] abstinence Mhvs 20, 58. The three viratis given at DA i.305 ( = veramaṇī) are sampatta˚, samādāna˚, setughāta˚ (q. v.). Cp. DhsA 154 (tisso viratiyo), 218; Sdhp 215, 341 & Cpd. 244, n. 2. Viratta
Viratta
[pp. of virajjati] dispassioned, free from passion, detached, unattached to, displeased with (loc.) S iii.45 (rūpadhātuyā cittaŋ virattaŋ vimuttaŋ); Sn 204 (chandarāga˚), 235 (˚citta āyatike bhavasmiŋ); A v.3, 313; J v.233 (mayi); Sdhp 613. Viraddha
Viraddha
[pp. of virajjhati] failed, missed, neglecte S v.23 (ariyo maggo v.), 179 (satipaṭṭhānā viraddhā 254, 294; Nd1 512; J i.174, 490; ii.384; iv.71, 497; Nett 132. Viraddhi
Viraddhi
(f.) (missing, failure?) at Vin i.359 is uncertain reading. The vv. ll. are visuddhi, visandi & visandhi, with explns "viddhaṭṭhāna" & "viraddhaṭṭhāna": see p. 395. Virandha
Virandha
[vi+randha2] opening; defect, flaw Nd1 165. Viramaṇa
Viramaṇa
(nt.) ( -- ˚) [fr. viramati] abstinence, abstaining from ( -- ˚) Mhvs 14, 48 (uccā -- seyyā˚). Viramati
Viramati
[vi+ramati] to stop, cease; to desist (abl.), abstain, refrain Sn 400 (Pot. ˚meyya), 828 (Pot. ˚me), 925; Nd1 168, 376; Th 2, 397 (aor. viramāsi, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 1651); Pv iv.355 (pāpadassanaŋ, acc.); Miln 85; PvA 204. Virala
Virala
(& Viraḷa) (adj.) [connected with Vedic ṛtē excluding, without, & nirṛti perishing; cp. also Gr. e)/rhmos lonely; Lat. rarus = rare] 1. sparse, rare, thin Th 2, 254 (of hair, expld as vilūna -- kesa ThA 210, i. e. almost bald; spelling ḷ); DhsA 238 (ḷ); DhA i.122 (˚cchanna thinly covered); PvA 4 (in ratta -- vaṇṇa -- virala -- mālā read better with v. l. as ratta -- kaṇavīra -- mālā, cp. J iii.59). Viralita
Viralita
[pp. of Denom. of virala = viraleti, cp. Sk. viralā- yate to be rare] thin, sparse, rare Dāvs iv.24 (a˚), with v. l. viraḷita. Virava
Virava
(& ˚rāva) [vi+rava & rāva; cp. Vedic virava] shouting out, roaring; crying (of animals) J i.25, 74 (ā), 203 (of elephants); v.9 (ā, of swans). Viravati
Viravati
[vi+ravati] 1. to shout (out), to cry aloud; to utter a cry or sound (of animals) J ii.350 (kikī sakuṇo viravi); v.206; Mhvs 12, 49 (mahārāvaŋ viraviŋsu mahājanā); PvA 154, 217, 245 (vissaraŋ), 279 (id.); Sdhp 179, 188, 291. -- 2. to rattle J i.51. -- Caus. virāveti to sound Mhvs 21, 15 (ghaṇṭaŋ to ring a bell). -- 634 -- Viraha
Viraha
(adj.) [vi+raho] empty, rid of, bar, without PvA 137, 139 (sīla˚). Virahita
Virahita
(adj.) [vi+rahita] empty, exempt from, rid of, without Miln 330 (dosa˚); PvA 139. Virāga
Virāga
[vi+rāga] 1. absence of rāga, dispassionateness, indifference towards (abl. or loc.) disgust, absence of desire, destruction of passions; waning, fading away, cleansing, purifying; emancipation, Arahantship. -> D iii.130 sq., 136 sq., 222, 243, 251, 290; S i.136; iii.19 sq., 59 sq., 163, 189; iv.33 sq., 47, 226, 365; v.226, 255, 361; A i.100, 299; ii.26; iii.35, 85, 325 sq.; iv.146 sq., 423 sq.; v.112, 359; Th 1, 599; Sn 795; Ps ii.220 sq.; Nd1 100; Kvu 600 = Dh 273=Nett 188 (virāgo seṭṭho dhammānaŋ); Dhs 163; Nett 16, 29; Vism 290 (khaya˚ & accanta˚) 293. -- Often nearly synonymous with nibbāna, in the description of which it occurs frequently in foll. formula: taṇhakkhaya virāga nirodha nibbāna, e. g. S i.136; Vin i.5; A ii.118; It 88; -- or combd with nibbidā virāga nirodha upasama . . . nibbāna, e. g. M i.431; S ii.223; cp. nibbāna ii.B1 & iii.8. -- In other connection (more objectively as "destruction"): aniccatā sankhārānaŋ etc., vipariṇāma virāga nirodha, e. g. S iii.43; (as "ceasing, fading away":) khaya( -- dhamma liable to), vaya˚, virāga˚, nirodha˚ M i.500; S ii.26. -- 2. colouring, diversity or display of colour, dye, hue (=rāga 1) J i.89 (nānā˚ -- samujjala blazing forth different colours); 395 (nānā˚ variously dyed); PvA 50 (nānā˚ -- vaṇṇa -- samujjala). Virāgatā
Virāgatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. rāga] disinterestedness, absence of lust Kvu 212 = Ud 10. Virāgita
Virāgita
(adj.) [fr. vi+*rāgeti, Denom. of rāga?] at J v.96 is not clear. It is said of beautiful women & expld by C. as vilagga -- sarīrā, tanumajjhā, i. e. "having slender waists." Could it be "excited with passion" or "exciting passion"? Or could it be an old misreading for virājita2? It may also be a distorted vilāka (q. v.) or vilaggita. Virāgin
Virāgin
(adj.) [fr. virāga 2, cp. rāgin] 1. discoloured, fading in colour J iii.88 (fig. saddhā avirāginī), 148 (rāga˚ fading in the original dye, of citta). -- 2. changing, reversing A iii.416 (of dukkha: dandha˚ & khippa˚ of slow & quick change; v. l. M6 is viparāgi, which may represent a vipariyāyi, i. e. changing). Virāguṇa
Virāguṇa
in meaning "fading away, waning" in verse at It 69 (of viññāṇa) is doubtful reading. It corresponds to virāgadhamma of the prose part (virāgudh˚ vv. ll.). The v. l. is pabhanguṇa (which might be preferable, unless we regard it as an explanation of virāgin, if we should write it thus). Virāgeti
Virāgeti
[for virādheti, as in BSk. virāgayati (e. g. Divy 131, 133) to displease, estrange, the fig. meaning of virāgeti like BSk. ārāgeti for Pāli ārādheti in lit & fig. meanings] to fail, miss; only at M i.327 (puriso narakapapāte papatanto hatthehi ca pādehi ca paṭhaviŋ virāgeyya "would miss the earth"; differently Neumann: "Boden zu fassen suchte," i. e. tried to touch ground). -- Perhaps also in virāgāya (either as ger. to virāgeti or as instr. to virāga in sense of virādha(na)) Pv i.117 (sukhaŋ virāgāya, with gloss virāgena, i. e. spurning one's good fortune; expld as virajjhitvā virādhetvā at PvA 59). Cp. virāye ( = virāge?) at Th 1, 1113 (see virādheti). Virājati
Virājati
[vi+rājati] to shine PvA 189 ( = virocati). Virājita
Virājita1
[pp. of virājeti] cleansed, discarded as rāga, given up S iv.158 (dosa); J iii.404 ( = pahīna C.). Virājita
Virājita2
[pp. of Caus. of virājati] shining out, resplendent J ii.33 (mora . . . suratta -- rāji -- virājita here perhaps = streaked?). Cp. virāgita. Virājeti
Virājeti
see virajjati. Virādhanā
Virādhanā
(f.) [fr. virādheti] failing, failure D ii.287; A v.211 sq. Virādhita
Virādhita
[pp. of virādheti] failed, missed, lost J v.400; Pv iv.13 ( = pariccatta C.). Virādheti
Virādheti
[vi+rādheti1, or Caus. of virajjhati] to miss, omit, fail, transgress, sin Sn 899; Th 1, 37, 1113 virāye for virādhaya C., may be virāge, cp. Brethren 3752 & see virāgeti); Nd1 312; J i.113; Ap. 47; PvA 59. -- Cp. virageti. -- pp. virādhita. Virāva
Virāva
see virava. Viriccati
Viriccati
[Pass. of vi+riñcati] to get purged D ii.128 (ppr. viriccamāna). -- pp. viritta. -- Cp. vireka. Viritta
Viritta
[pp. of viriccati] purged Miln 214. Viriya
Viriya
(nt.) [fr. vīra; cp. Vedic vīrya & vīria] lit. "state of a strong man," i. e. vigour, energy, effort, exertion. On term see also Dhs. trsln § 13; Cpd. 242. -- D iii.113, 120 sq., 255 sq.; S ii.132, 206 sq.; Sn 79, 184, 353, 422, 531, 966, 1026 (chanda˚); Nd1 476, 487; Nd2 394; J i.178 (viriyaŋ karoti, with loc.); Pug 71; Vbh 10; Nett 16, 28; Tikp 60, 63; Miln 36; Vism 160 (˚upekkhā), 462; KhA 96; SnA 489; DhA iv.231; DA i.63; DhsA 120; VvA 14; PvA 98, 129; Sdhp 343, 517. -> accāraddha˚ too much exertion M iii.159; A iii.375; opp. atilīna˚ too little ibid; uṭṭhāna˚ initiative or rousing energy S i.21, 217; A iii.76; iv.282; ThA 267; PvA 129; nara˚ manly strength J iv.478, 487. -- viriyaŋ āra(m) bhati to put forth energy, to make an effort S ii.28; iv.125; v.9, 244 sq.; A i.39, 282, 296; ii.15 = iv.462. -- As adj. ( -- ˚) in alīna˚ alert, energetic J i.22; āraddha˚ full of energy, putting forth energy, strenuous S i.53, 166, 198; ii.29, 207 sq.; iv.224; v.225; A i.4, 12; ii.76, 228 sq.; iii.65, 127; iv.85, 229, 291, 357; v.93, 95, 153, 335; J i.110; ossaṭṭha˚ one who has given up effort J i.110; hīna˚ lacking in energy It 34 (here as vīriya, in metre). -- v. is one of the indriyas, the balas & the sambojjhangas (q. v.).

-- ârambha "putting forth of energy," application of exertion, will, energy, resolution D iii.252; S ii.202; iv.175; A i.12; iii.117; iv.15 sq., 280; v.123 sq.; Ps i.103 sq.; Vbh 107, 194, 208; DhsA 145, 146. -- indriya the faculty of energy D iii.239, 278; S v.196 sq.; Dhs 13; Vbh 123; Nett 7, 15, 19; VbhA 276. -- bala the power of energy D iii.229, 253; A iv.363; J i.109. -- saŋvara restraint by will Vism 7; SnA 8; DhsA 351. Viriyatā
Viriyatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. viriya] manliness, energy, strength M i.19; VvA 284. Viriyavant
Viriyavant
(adj.) [viriya+vant] energetic A i.236; Sn 528, 531 (four -- syllabic), 548 (three -- syllabic); Vism 3 ( = ātāpin); Sdhp 475. Virujaka
Virujaka
(vīṇā˚) lute -- player J vi.51 ( = vīṇā -- vādaka C.). See rujaka. Virujjhati
Virujjhati
[vi+rujjhati] to be obstructed Sn 73 (aviruj- jhamāna unobstructed); J vi.12. Virujjhana
Virujjhana
(nt.) [fr. virujjhati] obstructing or being obstructed, obstruction, J vi.448. Viruta
Viruta
(nt.) [vi+ruta] noise, sound (of animals), cry Sn 927; expld as "virudaŋ [spelling with d, like ruda for ruta] vuccati -- miga -- cakkaŋ; miga -- cakka -- pāthakā [i. e. experts in the ways of animals; knowers of auspices] migacakkaŋ ādisanti" at Nd1 382; and as "mig' ādīnaŋ vassitaŋ" at SnA 564. The passage is a little doubtful, when we compare the expression viruṭañ ca gabbhakaraṇaŋ at Sn 927 with the passage viruddha -- gabbhakaraṇaŋ at D i.11 (cp. DA i.96), which seems more original. Viruddha
Viruddha
[pp. of virundhati] hindered, obstructed, dis- turbed S i.236; Sn 248, 630; Nd1 239; Miln 99, 310; J i.97. -- Often neg. a˚ unobstructed, free S i.236; iv.71; A iii.276 (˚ka); Dh 406; Sn 365, 704, 854; VbhA 148 = Vism 543.

-- gabbha -- karaṇa (using charms for) procuring abortion D i.11; DA i.96 (expld here as first trying to destroy the foetus and afterwards giving medicine for its preservation). See also viruta. -- 635 -- *Virundhati
*Virundhati
[vi+rundhati] to obstruct etc. Pass. viruj- jhati (q. v.). -- pp. viruddha. -- Caus. virodheti. (q. v.). Virūpa
Virūpa
(adj.) [vi+rūpa] deformed, unsightly, ugly Sn 50; J i.47; iv.379; vi.31, 114; PvA 24, 32, 47; Sdhp 85.

at Sn 50 virūpa is taken as "various" by Bdhgh (SnA 99), and virūpa -- rūpa expld as vividha -- rūpa, i.e. diversity, variety. So also the Niddesa. Virūḷha
Virūḷha
[pp. of virūhati] having grown, growing S ii.65 (viññāṇe virūḷhe āyatiŋ punnabbhav' âbhinibbatti hoti). Virūḷhi
Virūḷhi
(f.) [vi+rūḷhi, of ruh] growth M i.250; S iii.53; A iii.8, 404 sq.; v.152 sq., 161, 350 sq.; It 113; Miln 33; Mhvs 15, 42; VbhA 196. -- avirūḷhi -- dhamma not liable to growth Sn 235; DhA i.245. Virūhati
Virūhati
[vi+rūhati1] to grow, sprout It 113; Miln 386; DA i.120. -- Cp. paṭi˚. -- pp. virūḷha. -- Caus II. virūhāpeti to make grow, to foster Miln 386. Virūhanā
Virūhanā
(f.) & ˚a (nt.) [vi+rūhanā] growing, growth J ii.323 (f.); Miln 354; Vism 220; DA i.161; PvA 7. Vireka = virecana
Vireka
= virecana; Miln 134 (cp. Vin i.279). Virecana
Virecana
(nt.) [vi+recana, ric] purging, a purgative Vin i.206 (˚ŋ pātuŋ to drink a p.), 279 (id.); D i.12; A v.218; J iii.48 (sineha˚ an oily or softening purgative); DA i.98. Virecaniya
Virecaniya
(adj.) [grd. formation fr. virecana] (one who is) to be treated with a purgative Miln 169. Vireceti
Vireceti
[vi+Caus. of riñcati] to purge Miln 229, 335. Virocati
Virocati
[vi+rocati] to shine (forth), to be brilliant Vin ii. 296 (tapati, bhāsati, v.); Sn 378, 550; It 64 (virocare); J i.18, 89; iv.233; Pv i.114; ii.962; iii.35 ( = virājati PvA 189); DhA i.446; iv.143; DhsA 14; PvA 110 (˚amāna =sobhamāna), 136 sq., 157. Cp. verocana. -> Caus. viroceti to illumine Miln 336. Virodha
Virodha
[vi+rodha1] obstruction, hindrance, opposition, enmity S i.111; iv.71, 210; Sn 362; Pug 18, 22; Kvu 485; Miln 394; DhsA 39. -- avirodha absence of obstruction, gentleness M ii.105 = Th 1, 875; Pv iii.73. Virodhana
Virodhana
(adj. nt.) [fr. virodheti] opposing, obstruction, opposition, contradiction, only neg. a˚ absence of opposition, J iii.274, 320, 412; v.378. Virodhita
Virodhita
[pp. of virodheti] obstructed, rendered hostile Pgdp 90 (or is it virādhita?). Virodheti
Virodheti
[Caus. of virundhati] to cause obstruction, to render hostile, to be in disharmony, to exasperate S iv.379 = A v.320 (which latter passage reads viggaṇhati instead); Sdhp 45, 496. -- pp. virodhita. Virosanā
Virosanā
(f.) [vi+rosanā] causing anger Vbh 86; VbhA 75. Vilakkhaṇa
Vilakkhaṇa
(adj. -- nt.) [vi+lakkhaṇa] wrong or false characteristic; (adj.) discharacteristic, i. e. inconsistent with characteristics, discrepant (opp. sa˚ in accordance with ch.) Miln 405; Nett 78; VbhA 250 sq. Vilagga
Vilagga
(adj.) [vi+lagga] 1. stuck Vin i.138; M i.393. - 2. slender (of waist) J v.96 (see virāgita), 216 (see vilāka). Vilaggita
Vilaggita
(adj.) [vi+laggita] stretched or bending (?), slender J iv.20 (see under vilāka). Vilanga
Vilanga
(nt.) [*Sk. viḍanga] the plant Erycibe paniculata Vin i.201 (v. l. viḷ˚). -- ˚thālikā at Nd1 154 read as bilanga˚ (q. v.). Vilanghaka
Vilanghaka
[fr. vilangheti] in hattha˚ jerking of the hand beckoning (as a mode of making signs) Vin i.157 = M i.207 (has g for gh, cp. p. 547). -- Cp. hattha -- vikāra. Vilanghati
Vilanghati
[vi+langhati] to jump about, to leap (over) Sdhp 168. Vilajjati
Vilajjati
[vi+lajjati] to be ashamed, to be bashful, to pretend bashfulness J v.433. Vilapati
Vilapati
[vi+lapati] 1. to talk idly J i.496. -- 2. to lament, wail Th 1, 705; J ii.156; v.179; Miln 275; ThA 148 (Ap. v. 66). Vilamba
Vilamba
(adj.) [vi+lamba] hanging down; only in redupl. -- iter. cpd. olamba -- vilamba dropping or falling off all round J iv.380. Vilambati
Vilambati
[vi+lambati] to loiter, to tarry, lit. "hang about" J i.413; DhA i.81. Vilambin
Vilambin
(adj.) [vi+lambin] hanging down, drooping M i.306 (f. ˚inī, of a creeper, i. e. growing tendrils all over). Vilaya
Vilaya
[vi+laya, cp. līyati] dissolution; ˚ŋ gacchati, as much as: "to be digested," to be dissolved Miln 67. -> adj. dissolved, dispersed Dpvs i.65. Vilasati
Vilasati
[vi+lasati] to play, dally, sport; to shine forth, to unfold splendour J v.38 (of a tree "stand herrlich da" Dutoit), 433 (of woman); vi.44 (of a tree, vilāsamāna T.). -- pp. vilasita. Vilasita
Vilasita
(adj.) [pp. of vilasati] shining; gay, playful, coquettish J v.420. Vilāka
Vilāka
(adj.) [perhaps = vilagga (Geiger, P.Gr. § 612), although difficult to connect in meaning] only in f. ˚a: slender (of waist); the expln with vilagga may refer to a comparison with a creeper (cp. vilambin & J v.215) as "hanging" ("climbing") i. e. slim, but seems forced. See also virāgita which is expld in the same way. The word is peculiar to the "Jātaka" style. -- J iv.19 (=suṭṭhu -- vilaggita -- tanu -- majjhā); v.155 (+mudukā; C. expls as sankhitta -- majjhā), 215 (˚majjhā=vilaggasarīrā C.), 506 (velli -- vilāka -- majjhā=vilagga -- majjhā, tanu -- dīgha -- majjhā C.); VvA 280 (˚majjhā for sumajjhimā of Vv 6413; T. reads vilāta˚). Vilāpa
Vilāpa
[vi+lāpa] idle talk J i.496; v.24. Cp. saŋ˚. Vilāpanatā
Vilāpanatā
(f.) = vilāpa Pug 21. Vilāsa
Vilāsa
[fr. vilasati] 1. charm, grace, beauty J i.470; vi.43; Miln 201; ThA 78; PvA 3. -- desanā˚ beauty of instruction DA i.67; Vism 524, 541; Tikp 21. -- 2. dalliance, sporting, coquetry J iii.408; v.436. vilāsa is often coupled with līlā (q. v.). Vilāsavant
Vilāsavant
(adj.) [fr. vilāsa] having splendour, grace or beauty Mhvs 29, 25. Vilāsin
Vilāsin
(adj.) [fr. vilāsa] shining forth, unfolding splendour, possessing charm or grace, charming DA i.40 (vyāmapabhā parikkhepa -- vilāsinī splendour shining over a radius of a vyāma). Vilikhati
Vilikhati
[vi+likhati] 1. to scrape, scratch S i.124 (bhū- miŋ); iv.198; DhsA 260 (fig. manaŋ v.; in expln of vilekha). -- 2. to scratch open Vin ii.175. -- pp. vilikhita. Vilikhita
Vilikhita
[pp. of vilikhati] scraped off SnA 207. Vilitta
Vilitta
[pp. of vilimpati] anointed D i.104 (su -- nahāta su- vilitta kappita -- kesa -- massu); J iii.91; iv.442. Vilimpati
Vilimpati
[vi+limpati] to smear, anoint A iii.57; J i.265 (ger. ˚itvā); iii.277 (ppr. ˚anto): Pv i.106 (ger ˚itvāna); PvA 62 (˚itvā). -- pp. vilitta. -- Caus. II. vilimpāpeti to cause to be anointed J i.50 (gandhehi), 254 (id.). -- 636 -- Vilivili (kriyā)
Vilivili
( -- kriyā) see biḷibiḷikā. Vilīna
Vilīna
(adj.) [vi+līna, pp. of vilīyati] 1. clinging, sticking [cp. līyati 1] Vin i.209 (olīna˚ sticking all over). -> 2. matured ("digested"? cp. vilaya) J iv.72 (nava˚gosappi freshly matured ghee); Miln 301 (phalāni ripefruit). -- 3. [cp. līyati 2] molten, i. e. refined, purified J iv.118 (tamba -- loha˚ molten or liquid -- hot copper); v. 269 (tamba -- loha˚, id.; cp. C. on p. 274; vilīnaŋ tambālohaŋ viya pakkaṭṭhitaŋ lohitaŋ pāyenti); DhsA 14 (˚suvaṇṇa). -- Cp. uttatta in same sense and the expln of velli as "uttatta -- ghana -- suvaṇṇa -- rāsi -- ppabbā" at J v.506 C. Vilīyati
Vilīyati
[vi+līyati 2] to melt (intrs.), to be dissolved, to perish J iv.498; Vism 420 (pabbata, spelling here with ḷ; Warren wrong "are hidden from view," i. e. nilīyati); DhsA 336 (phānita -- piṇḍa; trsln not to the point: "reduced or pounded"); Sdhp 383; Pgdp 21. -- pp. vilīna. -- Cp. pa˚. Vilīyana
Vilīyana
(nt.) [fr. vilīyati] melting, dissolution Sdhp 201. Vilīva & Viliva
Vilīva
& Viliva (adj.) [Kern, Toev. s. v. compares Sk, bilma slip, chip. Phonetically viliva = Sk. bilva: see billa] 1. made of split bamboo Vin ii.266 (i). -- 2. (ī) a chip of bamboo or any other reed, a slip of reed M i.566 (Bdhgh on M i.429); Vism 310 (˚maya). Vilīvakāra
Vilīvakāra
[vilīva+kāra] a worker in bamboo, a basket- maker Vin iii.82; Miln 331; VbhA 222 (˚ka in simile); PvA 175. Vilugga
Vilugga
(adj.) [vi+lugga] broken; only in redupl. -- iter. cpd. olugga -- vilugga all broken up, tumbling to pieces M i.80, 450. Vilutta
Vilutta
[pp. of vilumpati] plundered, stripped, robbed, ruined S i.85 = J ii.239; J v.99; vi.44; Miln 303; Mhvs 33, 71 (corehi). Vilumpaka
Vilumpaka
(adj.) [fr. vi+lup] (act. or pass.) plundering or being plundered J i.370 (˚cora); ii.239 (pass.). Vilumpati
Vilumpati
[vi+lumpati] to plunder, rob, steal, ruin S i.85 = J ii.239; v.99; Miln 193; VvA 100; DhA iii.23. -- Pass. viluppati J v.254 (gloss for ˚lump˚ of p. 253). -- pp. vilutta. -- Caus. II. vilumpāpeti to incite to plunder Miln 193; J i.263. Vilumpana
Vilumpana
(nt.) [fr. vilumpati] plundering DhA iii.23. Vilumpamāna(ka)
Vilumpamāna(ka)
[orig. ppr. med. of vilumpati] plundering, robbing J v.254; PvA 4 (˚ka cora). Vilulita
Vilulita
(adj.) [vi+luḷita; cp. BSk. vilulita Jtm 210] stirred, agitated, shaken, disturbed Dāvs iv.54 (bhaya˚citta). Cp. viloḷeti. Vilūna
Vilūna
(adj.) [vi+lūna] cut off (always with ref. to the hair) M iii.180 = A i.138; Miln 11; PvA 47. Vilekha
Vilekha
[vi+lekha] perplexity, lit. "scratching" Vin iv.143 (here as f. ˚ā); Dhs 1256 (mano˚); DhsA 260. -> The more common word for "perplexity" is vikkhepa. Vilepana
Vilepana
(nt.) [vi+lepana] ointment, cosmetic, toilet perfume A i.107, 212; ii.209; Th 1, 616 (sīlaŋ v. seṭṭhaŋ. Cp. J iii.290); Pug 51, 58; Pv ii.316; DA i.77, 88. Vilokana
Vilokana
(nt.) [vi+lok (loc = roc), see loka & rocati] looking, reflection, investigation, prognostication; usually as 5 objects of reflection as to when & where & how one shall be reborn (pañca -- mahā -- ˚āni), consisting in kāla, desa, dīpa, kula, mātā (the latter as janetti -- āyu i. e. mother and her time of delivery at J i.48) or time (right or wrong), continent, sky (orientation), family (or clan) and one's (future) mother: J i.48, 49; DhA i.84; as 8 at Miln 193, viz. kāla, dīpa, desa, kula, janetti, āyu, māsa, nekkhamma (i. e. the 5+period of gestation, month of his birthday, and his renunciation). Without special meaning at DA i.194 (ālokana+). Cp. volokana. Vilokita
Vilokita
(nt.) [pp. of viloketi] a look A ii.104, 106 sq., 210; Pug 44, 45; DA i.193; VvA 6 (ālokita+). Viloketar
Viloketar
[n. ag. fr. viloketi] one who looks or inspects DA i.194 (āloketar+). Viloketi
Viloketi
[vi+loketi, of lok, as in loka] to examine, study, inspect, scrutinize, reflect on Th 2, 282; J i.48, 49; DhA i.84; Miln 193; Mhvs 22, 18. -- pp. vilokita. -> Cp. pa˚ & vo˚. Vilocana
Vilocana
(nt.) [vi+locana] the eye Dāvs i.41; ThA 253. Vilopa
Vilopa
[vi+lopa] plunder, pillage M i.456 (maccha˚ fish- haul); J i.7; iii.8; vi.409; Dpvs ix.7 (˚kamma). -> vilopaŋ khādati to live by plunder J vi.131. Vilopaka
Vilopaka
(adj.) [fr. vilopa] plundering, living by plundering J i.5; Miln 122 (f. ˚ikā). Vilopiya
Vilopiya
(adj.) [grd. formation fr. vilopa] to be plundered; neg. a˚ Sdhp 311. Vilomatā
Vilomatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. viloma] unseemliness, repugnance SnA 106. Viloma
Viloma
(adj.) [vi+loma] against the grain (lit. against the hair), discrepant, reversed, wrong, unnatural Vin ii. 115 (of cīvara: unsightly); J iii.113; Dpvs vii.55; DhA i.379; PvA 87. Vilomana
Vilomana
(nt.) [fr. viloma] discrepancy, disagreement, reverse DhsA 253. Vilometi
Vilometi
[Denom. fr. viloma] to dispute, disagree with, to find fault Nett 22; Miln 29, 295; DhsA 253. Viloḷana
Viloḷana
(nt.) [fr. vi+luḷ] & Viloṭana [fr. vi+luḍ; cp. Whitney, Sanskrit Roots, 1885, p. 149, where themes & their forms are given by luṭh1 to roll, luṭh2 & luṇṭh to rob, luḍ to stir up (some forms of it having meaning of luṇṭh) = lul to be lively] shaking, stirring; only found in lexicogr. literature as defn of several roots, viz. of gāh Dhtp 349; Dhtm 504; math & manth (see mathati) Dhtp 126; Dhtm 183. See also luḷati. Viloḷeti
Viloḷeti
[vi+loḷeti or loleti, cp. vilulita] to stir, to move about J i.26; Dpvs vi.52. Viḷayhati
Viḷayhati
[vi+dayhati] to burn (intrs.) J ii.220. Viḷāra
Viḷāra
at A iii.122 read as biḷāra (sasa -- biḷārā rabbits & cats). Vivajjita
Vivajjita
[pp. of vivajjeti] 1. abandoning, abstaining from VvA 75 (˚kiliṭṭha -- kamma). -- 2. avoided Th 2, 459. -> 3. distant from (abl.) Miln 131. Vivajjeti
Vivajjeti
[vi+vajjeti] to avoid, abandon, forsake S i.43; A v.17; Sn 53 ( = parivajj˚ abhivajj˚ Nd2 592), 399 (˚jjaya), 407 (praet. ˚jjayi); Vv 8438 (˚jjayātha=parivajjetha VvA 346); J i.473; iii.263, 481 (˚jjayi); v.233 (Pot. ˚jjaye); Miln 129; Sdhp 210, 353, 395. -- pp. vivajjita. -- Pass. vivajjati J i.27. Vivaṭa
Vivaṭa
[vi+vaṭa, pp. of vṛ: see vuṇāti] uncovered, open (lit. & fig.), laid bare, unveiled Sn 19 (lit.), 374 (fig. = anāvaṭa SnA 366), 763, 793 (=open -- minded); Nd1 96; Pug 45, 46 (read vivaṭa for pi vaṭa; opp. pihita); Vism 185 (opp. pihita); J v.434; DhA iii.79; VvA 27; PvA 283 (mukha unveiled). -- vivaṭena cetasā "with mind awake & clear" D iii.223; A iv.86; S v.263; cp. cetovivaraṇa. -- vivaṭa is freq. v. l. for vivatta ( -- cchada), e. g. at A ii.44; Sn 372; DhA iii.195; SnA 265 (in expln of term); sometimes the only reading in this phrase (q. v.), e. g. at Nd2 593. -- instr. vivaṭena as adv. "openly" Vin ii.99; iv.21.

-- cakkhu open -- minded, clear -- sighted Sn 921; Nd1 354. -- dvāra (having) an open door, an open house J v.293 (aḍḍha˚ half open); DhA ii.74 -- nakkhatta a yearly festival, "Public Day," called after the fashion of the people going uncovered (appaṭicchannena sarīrena) & bare -- footed to the river DhA i.388. -- 637 -- Vivaṭaka
Vivaṭaka
(adj.) [vivaṭa+ka] open (i. e. not secret) Vin ii.99. Vivaṭṭa
Vivaṭṭa
(m. & nt.) [vi+vaṭṭa1] 1. "rolling back," with ref. to the development of the world (or the aeons, kappa) used to denote a devolving cycle ("devolution"), whereas vaṭṭa alone or saŋvaṭṭa denote the involving cycle (both either with or without kappa). Thus as "periods" of the world they practically mean the same thing & may both be interpreted in the sense of a new beginning. As redupl. -- inter. cpds. they express only the idea of constant change. We sometimes find vivaṭṭa in the sense of "renewal" & saŋvaṭṭa in the sense of "destruction," where we should expect the opposite meaning for each. See also vaṭṭa & saŋvaṭta. Dogmatically vivaṭṭa is used as "absence of vaṭṭa," i. e. nibbāna or salvation from saŋsāra (see vaṭṭa & cp. citta -- vivaṭṭa, ceto˚, ñāṇa˚, vimokkha˚ at Ps i.108 & ii.70). -- Fig. in kamma˚ "the rolling back of k.," i. e. devolution or course of kamma at S i.85. -- Abs. & combd with saŋvaṭṭa (i. e. devolution combd with evolution) e. g. at D i.14, 16 sq.; iii.109; A ii.142 (where read vivaṭṭe for vivaṭṭo); Pug 60; Vism 419 (here as m. vivaṭṭo, compared with saŋvaṭṭo), 420 (˚ṭṭhāyin). In cpd. ˚kappa (i. e. descending aeon) at D iii.51; Pug 60; It 15. -- 2. (nt.) part of a bhikkhu's dress (rolling up of the binding?), combd with anu -- vivaṭṭa at Vin i.287. Vivaṭṭati
Vivaṭṭati
[vi+vaṭṭati] 1. to move back, to go back, to revolve, to begin again (of a new world -- cycle), contrasted with saŋvaṭṭati to move in an ascending line (cp. vivaṭṭa) D i.17; iii.84, 109; Vism 327. -- 2. to be distracted or diverted from (abl.), to turn away; to turn over, to be upset Nett 131; Pug 32 (so read for vivattati); Ps ii.98 (ppr.). -- pp. vivaṭṭa. Vivaṭṭana
Vivaṭṭana
(nt.) & ˚ā (f) [fr. vivaṭṭati] turning away, moving on, moving back Ps i.66; ii.98; Vism 278 (f.; expld as "magga"). Vivaṭṭeti
Vivaṭṭeti
[vi+vaṭṭeti] to turn down or away (perhaps in dogmatic sense to turn away from saŋsāra), to divert, destroy: only in phrase vivaṭṭayi saŋyojanaŋ (in standard setting with acchecchi taṇhaŋ), where the usual v. l. is vāvattayi (see vāvatteti). Thus at M i.12, 122; S i.127; iv.105, 205, 207, 399; A i.134; iii.246, 444 sq.; iv.8 sq.; It 47 (T. vivattayi). Vivaṇṇa
Vivaṇṇa
(adj.) [vi+vaṇṇa] discoloured, pale, wan Sn 585; Th 2, 79; J ii.418. Vivaṇṇaka
Vivaṇṇaka
(nt.) [fr. vivaṇṇeti] dispraise, reviling Vin iv.143. Vivaṇṇeti
Vivaṇṇeti
[vi+vaṇṇeti] to dispraise, defame Pv iii.106 (thūpa -- pūjaŋ); PvA 212. Vivattacchada
Vivatta
-- cchada (adj.) having the cover removed, with the veil lifted; one who draws away the veil (cp. vivaraṇa) or reveals (the Universe etc.); or one who is freed of all (mental & spiritual) coverings (thus Bdhgh), Ep. of the Buddha. -- Spelling sometimes chadda˚ (see chada). -- D i.89; ii.16; iii.142 (dd; sammā -- sambuddha loke vivatta -- chadda; trsln "rolling back the veil from the world"), 177 (dd); A ii.44 (v. l. dd); Sn 372 (expld as "vivaṭa -- rāga -- dosa -- moha -- chadana SnA 365), 378, 1003 (ed. Sn prefers dd as T. reading); Nd2 593 (with allegorical interpretation); J i.51; iii.349; iv.271 (dd); DhA i.201 (v. l. dd); iii.195; DA i.250. -- It occurs either as vivatta˚ or vivaṭa˚. In the first case (vivatta˚) the expln presents difficulties, as it is neither the opp. of vatta ("duty"), nor the same as vivaṭṭa ("moving back" intrs.), nor a direct pp. of vivattati (like Sk. vivṛtta) in which meaning it would come nearer to "stopped, reverted, ceased." vivattati has not been found in Pāli. The only plausible expln would be taking it as an abs. pp. formation fr. vṛt in Caus. sense (vatteti), thus "moved back, stopped, discarded" [cp. BSk. vivartayati to cast off a garment, Divy 39). In the second case (vivaṭa˚) it is pp. of vivarati [vi+vṛ: see vuṇāti], in meaning "uncovered, lifted, off," referring to the covering (chada) as uncovered instead of the uncovered object. See vivaṭa. It is difficult to decide between the two meanings. On the principle of the "lectio difficilior" vivatta would have the preference, whereas from a natural & simple point of view vivaṭa seems more intelligible & more fitting. It is evidently an old phrase. Note. -- vivatta -- kkhandha at S i.121 is a curious expression ("with his shoulders twisted round"?). Is it an old misreading for pattakkhandha? Cp. however, S.A. quoted K.S. i.151, n. 5, explaining it as a dying monk's effort to gain an orthodox posture. Vivattati
Vivattati
at Pug 32 is to be read as vivaṭṭati. Vivadati
Vivadati
[vi+vadati] 1. to dispute, quarrel Sn 842, 884; J i.209; Miln 47. -- 2. (intrs.) to be quarrelled with S iii.138. Vivadana
Vivadana
(nt.) [fr. vivadati] causing separation, making discord D i.11; DA i.96. Vivadha
Vivadha
(carrying yoke) see khārī -- vidha and vividha2. Vivana
Vivana
(nt.) [vi+vana] wilderness, barren land S i.100; Vv 776 ( = arañña VvA 302); J ii.191, 317. Vivara
Vivara
(nt.) [fr. vi+vṛ] 1. opening (lit. dis -- covering), pore, cleft, leak, fissure Dh 127 (pabbatānaŋ; cp Divy 532; Miln 150; PvA 104); Vism 192, 262; J iv.16; v.87; DhA iv.46 (mukha˚); SnA 355; PvA 152, 283. -> 2. interval, interstice D i.56 (quoted at Pv iv.327); Vism 185. -- 3. fault, flaw, defect A iii.186 sq.; J v.376. Vivaraṇa
Vivaraṇa
(nt.) [fr. vivarati] 1. uncovering, unveiling, making open, revelation, in loka˚ laying open the worlds, unveiling of the Universe; referred to as a great miracle at Vism 392; Miln 350; Dāvs ii.120; J iv.266. -- 2. opening, unfolding, making accessible, purifying (fig.), in ceto˚ A iii.117, 121; iv.352; v.67. -- 3. explanation, making clear (cp. vibhajana) Nett 8 (as f.); SnA 445. Vivarati
Vivarati
[vi+varati vṛ; see vuṇāti] 1. to uncover, to open Vin ii.219 (windows, opp. thaketi); D i.85 (paṭicchannaŋ v.); J i.63 (dvāraŋ), 69; iv.133 (nagaraŋ); DhA i.328 (vātapānaŋ); DA i.228; PvA 74 (mukhaŋ); VvA 157, 284. -- 2. (fig.) to open, make clear, reveal S iv.166; v.261; KhA 12 (+vibhajati etc.). -- pp. vivaṭa. Vivasati
Vivasati
[vi+vasati2] to live away from home, to be separated, to be distant J iv.217. -- Cp. vippavasati. Vivasana
Vivasana
(nt.) [vi+vas (uṣ) to shine, cp. vibhāti] (gradually) getting light; turning into dawn (said of the night), only in phrase ratyā vivasane at the end of night, combd in stock phrase with suriy' uggamanaŋ pati "towards sunrise" (evidently an old phrase) at Th 1, 517; J iv.241; v.381, 461; vi.491; Pv iii.82. Also at Sn 710. Vivaseti
Vivaseti
[Caus. of vi+vas to shine] lit. to make [it] get light; rattiŋ v. to spend the night (till it gets light) Sn 1142; Nd2 594 ( = atināmeti) -- vivasati is Kern's proposed reading for vijahati (rattiŋ) at Th 1, 451. He founds his conjecture on a v. l. vivasate & the C. expln "atināmeti khepeti." Mrs. Rh. D. trsls "waste" (i. e. vijahati). Vivāda
Vivāda
[fr. vi+vad] dispute, quarrel, contention D i.236; iii.246; A iv.401; Sn 596, 863, 877, 912; Nd1 103, 167, 173, 260, 307; Pug 19, 22; Ud 67; J i.165; Miln 413; VvA 131. There are 6 vivāda -- mūlāni (roots of contention), viz. kodha, makkha, issā, sāṭheyya, pāpicchatā, sandiṭṭhi -- parāmāsa or anger, selfishness, envy, fraudulence, evil intention, worldliness: D iii.246; A iii.334 sq.; Vbh 380; referred to at Ps i.130. There is another list of 10 at A v.78 consisting in wrong representations regarding dhamma & vinaya. -- 638 -- Vivādaka
Vivādaka
[fr. vivāda] a quarreller J i.209. Vivādiyati
Vivādiyati
(vivādeti) [Denom. fr. vivāda] to quarrel Sn 832 ( = kalahaŋ karoti Nd1 173), 879, 895. Pot. 3rd sg. vivādiyetha (=kolahaŋ kareyya Nd1 307), & vivādayetha Sn 830 (id. expln Nd1 170). Vivāha
Vivāha
[fr. vi+vah] "carrying or sending away," i. e. marriage, wedding D i.99; Sn p. 105; PvA 144; SnA 448 (where distinction āvāha = kaññā -- gahaṇaŋ, vivāha= kaññā -- dānaŋ). -- As nt. at Vin iii.135. Cp. āvāha & vevāhika. Vivāhana
Vivāhana
(nt.) [fr. vi+vah] giving in marriage or getting a husband for a girl (cp. āvāhana) D i.11; DA i.96. Cp. Vin iii.135. Vivicca
Vivicca
(indecl.) [ger. of viviccati] separating oneself from (instr.), aloof from D i.37; A iii.25; J vi.388; Dhs 160; Pug 68; Vism 139, 140 (expld in detail). -- Doubtful reading at Pv i.119 (for viricca?). -- As viviccaŋ (& a˚) at J v.434 in meaning "secretly" ( = raho paṭicchannaŋ C.). Viviccati
Viviccati
[vi+vic] to separate oneself, to depart from, to be alone, to separate (intrs.) Vin iv.241; ger. viviccitvā DhsA 165, & vivicca (see sep.). -- pp. vivitta. -- Cp. viveceti. Vivicchati
Vivicchati
[Desid. of vindati] to desire, long for, want Nett 11. Vivicchā
Vivicchā
(f.) [Desid. of vid, cp. Sk. vivitsā] manifold desire, greediness, avarice DhsA 375; Nett 11 (where expln "vivicchā nāma vuccati vicikicchā"). See also veviccha. Vivitta
Vivitta
(adj.) [pp. of viviccati; vi+vitta3] separated, secluded, aloof, solitary, separate, alone D i.71; S i.110; A ii.210; iii.92; iv.436; v.207, 270; Sn 221, 338, 810, 845; Nd1 201; Kvu 605; Miln 205; DA i.208; DhsA 166; DhA iii.238; iv.157 (so read for vivivitta!); VbhA 365; PvA 28, 141, 283. Cp. pa˚. Vivittaka
Vivittaka
(adj.) [vivitta+ka] solitary J iv.242 (˚āvāsa). Vivittatā
Vivittatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. vivitta] seclusion ( = viveka) VbhA 316, cp. K.S. i.321. Vivitti
Vivitti
(f.) [fr. viviccati] separation DhsA 166. -- Cp. viveka. Vividha
Vividha1
(adj.) [vi+vidha1] divers, manifold, mixed; full of, gay with ( -- ˚) D ii.354; Pv ii.49; Vv 359; Miln 319; Mhvs 25, 30; SnA 136 (in expln of vi˚: "viharati = vividhaŋ hitaŋ harati"). Vividha
Vividha2
[for Sk. vivadha; vi+vah] carrying -- yoke D i.101; S i.78 (as v. l. khāri -- vividhaŋ, see khāri); J iii.116 (parikkhāraŋ vividhaŋ ādāya, where v. l. reads khāriŋ vividhaŋ). Viveka
Viveka
[fr. vi+vic] detachment, loneliness, separation, seclusion; "singleness" (of heart), discrimination (of thought) D i.37, 182; iii.222, 226, 283 = S iv.191 (˚ninna citta); S i.2, 194; iv.365 sq.; v.6, 240 sq.; A i.53; iii.329; iv.224; Vin iv.241; Sn 474, 772, 822, 851, 915, 1065; Nd1 158, 222; J i.79; iii.31; Dhs 160; Pug 59, 68; Nett 16, 50; DhsA 164, 166; ThA 64; PvA 43; Sdhp 471. -- viveka is given as fivefold at Ps ii.220 sq. and VbhA 316, cp. K.S. i.321 (Bdhgh on S iii.2, 8), viz. tadanga˚, vikkhambhana˚, samuccheda˚ paṭippassaddhi˚, nissaraṇa˚; as threefold at Vism 140, viz. kāya˚, citta˚, vikkhambhana˚, i. e. physically, mentally, ethically; which division amounts to the same as that given at Nd1 26 with kāya˚, citta˚, upadhi˚, the latter equivalent to "nibbāna." Cp. on term Dial. i.84. See also jhāna. Cp. pa˚. Vivekattā=vivittatā
Vivekattā
= vivittatā VbhA 316. Vivecitatta
Vivecitatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. vivecita, pp. of viveceti] dis- crimination, specification DhsA 388. Viveceti
Viveceti
[Caus. of viviccati] to cause separation, to separate, to keep back, dissuade Vin i.64; D i.226; S iii.110; M. i.256; Pv iii.107 ( = paribāheti PvA 214); Miln 339; DhsA 311; Nett 113, 164 (˚iyamāna). Viveṭhiyati
Viveṭhiyati
[vi+veṭhïyati] to get entangled Vin ii.117. Vivesa
Vivesa
[?] distinction D i.229, 233. We should read visesa, as printed on p. 233. Visa
Visa
(nt.) [cp. Vedic viṣa; Av. viš poison, Gr. i)o/s, Lat. vīrus, Oir. fī: all meaning "poison"] poison, virus, venom M i.316 = S ii.110; Th 1, 418; 768; Sn 1 (sappa˚ snake venom); A ii.110; J i.271 (halāhala˚ deadly p.); iii.201; iv.222; Pug 48; Miln 302; PvA 62, 256; ThA 489. -- On visa in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 137. Cp. āsī˚.

-- uggāra vomiting of poison SnA 176. -- kaṇṭaka a poisoned thorn or arrow, also name of a sort of sugar DhsA 203. -- kumbha a vessel filled with p. It 86. -- pānaka a drink of p. DhA ii.15. -- pīta (an arrow) dipped into poison (lit. which has drunk poison). At another place (see pīta1) we have suggested reading visappita (visa+appita), i. e. "poison -- applied," which was based on reading at Vism 303. See e. g. J v.36; Miln 198; Vism 303, 381; DhA i.216. -- rukkha "poison tree," a cert. tree Vism 512; VbhA 89; DA i.39. -- vaṇijjā trading with poison A iii.208. -- vijjā science of poison DA i.93. -- vejja a physician who cures poison (ous snake -- bites) J i.310. -- salla a poisoned arrow Vism 503. Visaŋ
Visaŋ
is P. prefix corresponding to Sk. viṣu (or visva˚ [see vi˚] in meaning "diverging, on opposite sides,") apart, against; only in cpd. ˚vādeti and derivations, lit. to speak wrong, i. e. to deceive. Visaŋyutta
Visaŋyutta
(& visaññutta) (adj.) [vi+saŋyutta] 1. (lit.) unharnessed, unyoked Th 1, 1021 (half -- fig.). -- 2. detached from the world A i.262 = iii.214; S ii.279 (ññ); Th 1, 1022; Sn 621, 626, 634; DhA iii.233 (sabba -- yoga˚); iv.141, 159, 185. Visaŋyoga
Visaŋyoga
(& visaññoga) [vi+saŋyoga] disconnection, separation from ( -- ˚), dissociation Vin ii.259 (ññ) = A iv.280; D iii.230 (kāma -- yoga˚, bhava˚, diṭṭhi˚, avijjā˚; cp. the 4 oghas), 276; A ii.11; iii.156. Visaŋvāda
Visaŋvāda
[visaŋ+vāda] deceiving; neg. a˚ Miln 354. Visaŋvādaka
Visaŋvādaka
(adj.) [visaŋ+vādaka] deceiving, untrust- worthy Vism 496; f. ˚ikā J v.401, 410. -- a˚ not deceiving D iii.170; A iv.249; M iii.33; Pug 57. Visaŋvādana
Visaŋvādana
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) & ˚atā (f.) [fr. visaŋvādeti] deceiving, disappointing A v.136 (˚ā); Vin iv.2. -- a˚ honesty D iii.190 (˚atā). Visaŋvādayitar
Visaŋvādayitar
[n. ag. fr. visaŋvādeti] one who deceives another D iii.171. Visaŋvādeti
Visaŋvādeti
[visaŋ+vādeti; cp. BSk. visaŋvādayati AvŚ i.262, after the Pāli] to deceive with words, to break one's word, to lie, deceive Vin iii.143; iv.1; Nett 91. -- Neg. a˚ J v.124. Visaŋsaṭṭha
Visaŋsaṭṭha
(adj.) [vi+saŋsaṭṭha] separated, uncon- nected with (instr.) M i.480; DA i.59. -- 639 -- Visaŋhata
Visaŋhata
[vi+saŋhata2] removed, destroyed Th 1, 89. Visakkiya
Visakkiya
[vi+sakkiya?] in ˚dūta is a special kind of messenger Vin iii.74. Visaggatā
Visaggatā
see a˚. Visanka
Visanka
(adj.) [vi+sanka; Sk. viśanka] fearless, secure; a˚ Sdhp 176. Visankita
Visankita
(adj.) [pp. of vi+śank] suspicious, anxious ThA 134 (Ap. v. 78). -- neg. a˚ not perturbed, trusting, secure Sdhp 128. Visankhāra
Visankhāra
[vi+sankhāra] divestment of all material things Dh 154 ( = nibbāna DhA iii.129). See sankhāra 3. Visankhita
Visankhita
[vi+sankhata] destroyed, annihilated Dh 154; J i.493 ( = viddhaŋsita DhA iii.129). Visajjati
Visajjati
[vi+sajjati, Pass. of sañj; the regular Act. would be visajati] to hang on, cling to, stick to, adhere (fig.); only in pp. visatta (q. v.). -- The apparent ger. form visajja belongs to vissajjati. Visajjana & visajjeti
Visajjana
& visajjeti: see viss˚. Visañña
Visañña
(adj.) [vi+sañña = saññā] 1. having wrong per- ceptions Sn 874. -- 2. unconscious J v.159. In composition with bhū as visaññī -- bhūta at J i.67. Visaññin
Visaññin
(adj.) [vi+saññin] unconscious, one who has lost consciousness; also in meaning "of unsound mind" ( = ummattaka Nd1 279) A ii.52 (khitta -- citta+); Miln 220; Sdhp 117. Visaṭa & visata
Visaṭa
& visata [pp. of vi+sṛ, Sk. visṛta] spread, diffused, wide, broad D iii.167 (ṭ); Sn 1 (T. reads t, v. l. BB has ṭ); J ii.439; iv.499 (t); Miln 221, 354 (ṭ; +vitthata), 357. Cp. anu˚. Visaṭā & visatā
Visaṭā
& visatā (f.) [abrh. formation fr. vi+sañj, spelling t for tt: see visatta. The writing of MSS. concerning t in these words is very confused] "hanging on," clinging, attachment. The word seems to be a quasi -- short form of visattikā. Thus at Sn 715 ( = taṇhā C.; spelling t); Dhs 1059 (trsln "diffusion," i. e. fr. vi+sṛ; spelling ṭ)=Nd2 s. v. taṇhā (spelt with t). Visaṭṭha
Visaṭṭha
see vissaṭṭha. Visaṭṭhi
Visaṭṭhi
(f.) [for vissaṭṭhi, fr. vi+sṛj] 1. emission; in sukka˚ emission of semen Vin ii.38; iii.112; Kvu 163. -- 2. visaṭṭhi at S iii.133 and A iv.52 (T. visaṭṭhi) probably stands for visatti in meaning "longing," clinging to (cp. BSk. viṣakti AvŚ ii.191), or "love for" (loc.). Visati
Visati
[viś, cp. viś dwelling -- place, veśa; Gr. oi/kos house, oi)ke/w to dwell; Lat. vīcus, Goth. weihs = E. ˚wick in Warwick, etc.] to enter, only in combn with prefixes, like upa˚, pa˚, pari˚, saŋ˚, abhisaŋ˚, etc. . . . See also vesma (house). Visatta
Visatta
[pp. of visajjati] hanging on (fig.), sticking or clinging to, entangled in (loc.) A ii.25; Sn 38, 272; Nd2 597; J ii.146; iii.241. Visattikā
Visattikā
(f.) [visatta+ikā, abstr. formation] clinging to, adhering, attachment (to = loc.), sinful bent, lust, desire. -- It is almost invariably found as a syn. of taṇhā. P. Commentators explain it with ref. either to visaṭa (diffused), or to visa (poison). These are of course only exegetical edifying etymologies. Cp. Dhs. trsln § 1059; Expositor ii.468: Brethren 213 n. 3, K.S. i.2, n. 6, and the varied exegesis of the term in the Niddesas. -> S i.1, 24, 35, 107, 110; A ii.211; iv.434; Sn 333, 768, 857, 1053 sq.; Th 1, 519; Nd1 8 sq., 247; Nd2 598; DhA iii.198; iv.43; DhsA 364; Nett 24; Dhs 1059. Visada
Visada
(adj.) [cp. Sk. viśada] 1. clean, pure, white D ii.14; Miln 93, 247; Dāvs v. 28. -- 2. clear, manifest Miln 93; DhsA 321, 328 (a˚); VbhA 388 sq.

-- kiriyā making clear: see under vatthu1. -- bhāva clearness Vism 128; Tikp 59. Visadatā
Visadatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. visada] purity, clearness Vism 134 (vatthu˚). Visanna
Visanna
[pp. of visīdati] sunk into (loc.), immersed J iv.399. The poetical form is vyasanna. Visappana
Visappana
in ˚rasa at Vism 470 is not clear. Is it "spreading" [vi+sṛp], or misprint for visa -- pāna? Visabhāga
Visabhāga
(adj.) [vi+sabhāga] different, unusual, extra- ordinary, uncommon Miln 78 sq.; DA i.212; Vism 180 (purisassa itthisarīraŋ, itthiyā purisa -- sarīraŋ visabhāgaŋ), 516; DhA iv.52; PvA 118. -- ˚ārammaṇa pudendum muliebre J ii.274 ≈ iii.498. Visama
Visama
(adj.) [vi+sama3] 1. uneven, unequal, dishar- monious, contrary A i.74; PvA 47 (vāta), 131 (a˚ = sama of the "middle" path). -- 2. (morally) discrepant, lawless, wrong A iii.285; v.329; Sn 57 (cp. Nd2 599); Miln 250 (˚diṭṭhi). -- 3. odd, peculiar, petty, disagreeable A ii.87; Miln 112, 304, 357; J i.391 (nagaraka). -> As nt. an uneven or dangerous or inaccessible place, rough road; (fig.) unevenness, badness, misconduct, disagreeableness A i.35 (pabbata˚); S iv.117; Vbh 368 (two sets of 3 visamāni: rāga, etc.); Miln 136, 157, 277, 351; J v.70; VvA 301. -- visamena (instr.) in a wrong way Pv iv.14. Visamāyati
Visamāyati
[Denom. fr. visama] to be uneven D ii.269 (so read for visamā yanti). Visaya
Visaya
[cp. Sk. viśaya, fr. vi+śī] 1. locality, spot, region; world, realm, province, neighbourhood Sn 977. Often in foll. combns: petti˚ (or pitti˚) and pettika (a) the world of the manes or petas M i.73; S iii.224; v.342, 356 sq.; A i.37, 267; ii.126 sq.; iii.211, 339, 414 sq.; iv.405 sq.; v.182 sq.; Pv ii.22; ii.79; J i.51; PvA 25 sq., 59 sq., 214. (b) the way of the fathers, native or proper beat or range D iii.58; S v.146 sq.; A iii.67; J ii.59. Yama˚ the realm of Yama or the Dead Pv ii.82 ( = petaloka PvA 107). -- 2. reach, sphere (of the senses), range, scope; object, characteristic, attribute (cp. Cpd. 143 n. 2) S v.218 (gocara˚); Nett 23 (iddhi˚); Miln 186, 215, 316; Vism 216 (visayī -- bhūta), 570=VbhA 182 (mahā˚ & appa˚); KhA 17; SnA 22, 154 (buddha˚), 228 (id.); PvA 72, 89. -- avisaya not forming an object, a wrong object, indefinable A v.50; J v.117 (so read for ˚ara); PvA 122, 197. -- 3. object of sense, sensual pleasure SnA 100. Visayha
Visayha
(adj.) [ger. of visahati] possible Pv iv.112 (yathā ˚ŋ as far as possible); a˚ impossible M i.207 = Vin i.157. Visara
Visara
[vi+sara] a multitude DA i.40. Visalla
Visalla
(adj.) [vi+salla] free from pain or grief S i.180; Sn 17, 86 = 367. Visaritā
Visaritā
(f.) at D ii.213 in phrase iddhi˚ is doubtful reading. The gloss (K) has "visevitā." Trsln (Dial. ii.246); "proficiency." It is combd with iddhi -- pahutā & iddhivikubbanatā. Bdhgh's expln is "visavanā" [fr. vi+sru?]. Visahati
Visahati
[vi+sahati] to be able, to dare, to venture Sn 1069 ( = ussahati sakkoti Nd2 600); J i.152. -- ppr. neg. avisahanto unable VvA 69, 112; and avisahamāna J i.91. -- ger. visayha (q. v.). Visākha
Visākha
(adj.) [visākhā as adj.] having branches, forked; in ti˚ three -- branched S i.118 = M i.109. Visākhā
Visākhā
(f.) [vi+sākhā, Sk. viśākhā] N. of a lunar mansion (nakkhatta) or month (see vesākha), usually as visākha˚ ( -- puṇṇamā), e. g. SnA 391; VvA 165. -- 640 -- Visāṭita
Visāṭita
[pp. of vi+sāṭeti] cut in pieces, smashed, broken J ii.163 ( = bhinna C.). Visāṇa
Visāṇa
(nt.) [cp. Sk. viṣāṇa] 1. the horn of an animal (as cow, ox, deer, rhinoceros) Vin i.191; A ii.207; iv.376; Sn 35 (khagga˚, q. v.), 309; Pug 56 (miga˚); Ap 50 (usabha˚); J i.505; Miln 103. -- 2. (also as m.) the tusks of an elephant J iii.184; v.41, 48.

-- maya made of horn Vin ii.115. Visāta
Visāta
(adj.) [fr. vi+śat, cp. sāṭeti] crushed to pieces, destroyed M 11 102 (˚gabbha, with mūḷha -- gabbha; v. l. vighāta). Visāda
Visāda
[fr. vi+sad] depression, dejection D i.248; DA i.121; Sdhp 117. Cp. visīdati. Visāra
Visāra
[fr. vi+sṛ] spreading, diffusion, scattering DhsA 118. Visāraka
Visāraka
(adj.) [vi+sāraka, of sṛ] spreading, extending, expanding Vin iii.97 (vattu˚ T.; vatthu˚ MSS.). Visārada
Visārada
(adj.) [cp. BSk. viśārada, e. g. AvS i.180. On etym. see sārada] self -- possessed, confident; knowing how to conduct oneself, skilled, wise D i.175; ii.86; S i.181; iv.246; v.261; A ii.8 (vyatta+); iii.183, 203; iv.310, 314 sq.; v.10 sq.; M i.386; Ap 23; J iii.342; v.41; Miln 21; Sdhp 277. -- avisārada diffident Miln 20, 105. Visāla
Visāla
(adj.) [cp. Sk. viśāla] wide, broad, extensive Sn 38; J v.49, 215 (˚pakhuma); Miln 102, 311.

-- akkhī (f.) having large eyes J v.40; Vv 371 (+vipulalocanā; or a petī). Visālatā
Visālatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. visāla] breadth, extensiveness VvA 104. Visāhaṭa
Visāhaṭa
(adj.) [visa+āhaṭa] only neg. a˚ imperturbed, balanced Dhs 11, 15, 24 etc. Visāhāra
Visāhāra
[visa+āhāra, or vi+saŋ+āhāra] distractedness, perturbation; neg. a˚ balance Dhs 11, 15. Visikhā
Visikhā
(f.) [cp. *Sk. (lexicogr.) viśikhā] a street, road Vin iv.312; J i.338; iv.310; v.16, 434.

-- kathā gossip at street corners D i.179; M i.513; Dh i.90. Visiṭṭha
Visiṭṭha
(adj.) [pp. of visissati] distinguished, prominent, superior, eminent D iii.159; Vv 324; J i.441; Miln 203, 239; DhA ii.15; VvA 1 (˚māna = vimāna), 85, 261; Sdhp 260, 269, 332, 489. -- compar. ˚tara Vism 207 (=anuttara). -- As visiṭṭhaka at Sdhp 334. -- See also abhi˚, paṭi˚, and vissaṭṭha. Visiṇṇa
Visiṇṇa
[pp. of viseyyati] broken, crushed, fallen to pieces J i.174. Visineti
Visineti
see usseneti. Visibbita
Visibbita
(adj.) [pp. of vi+sibbeti, sīv to sew] entwined, entangled Miln 102 (saŋsibbita˚ as redupl. -- iter. cpd.). Visibbeti
Visibbeti
[vi+sibbeti, sīv] to unsew, to undo the stitches Vin iv.280. -- Caus. II. visibbāpeti ibid. -- Another vịsibbeti see under visīveti. Visissati
Visissati
[Pass. of vi+śiṣ] to differ, to be distinguished or eminent Nett 188. -- pp. visiṭṭha. -- Caus. viseseti (q. v.). Visīdati
Visīdati
[vi+sad; cp. visāda & pp. BSk. viṣaṇṇa Divy 44] 1. to sink down J iv.223. -- 2. to falter, to be dejected or displeased S i.7; A iii.158; Pug 65. -- pp. visanna. Visīyati
Visīyati
[vi+sīyati; cp. Sk. śīyate, Pass. of śyā to coagu- late] to be dissolved; 3rd pl. imper. med. visīyaruŋ Th 1, 312 (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 126). Visīvana
Visīvana
(nt.) [fr. visīveti] warming oneself J i.326; v.202. As visibbana at Vin iv.115. Visīveti
Visīveti
[vi+sīveti, which corresponds to Sk. vi -- śyāpayati (lexicogr.!), Caus. of śyā, śyāyati to coagulate; lit. to dissolve, thaw. The v stands for p; śyā is contracted to sī] to warm oneself Miln 47; J ii.68; DhA i.225, 261; ii.89. As visibbeti (in analogy to visibbeti to sew) at Vin iv.115. -- Caus. II. visīvāpeti J ii.69. Visuŋ
Visuŋ
(indecl.) [cp. Sk. viṣu, a derivation fr. vi˚] separately, individually; separate, apart DhA ii.26 (mātā -- pitaro visuŋ honti). Usually repeated (distributively) visuŋ visuŋ each on his own, one by one, separately, e. g. Vism 250; Mhvs 6, 44; SnA 583; VvA 38; PvA 214. -- visukaraṇa separation ThA 257. Visukkha
Visukkha
(adj.) [vi+sukkha] dried out or up PvA 58. Visukkhita
Visukkhita
(adj.) [vi+sukkhita] dried up Miln 303. Visujjhati
Visujjhati
[vi+sujjhati] to be cleaned, to be cleansed, to be pure Vin ii.137; J i.75; iii.472. -- pp. visuddha. -> Caus. visodheti (q. v.). Visuddha
Visuddha
(adj.) [pp. of visujjhati] clean, pure, bright; in appld meaning: purified, stainless, sanctified Vin i.105; D iii.52 (cakkhu); S ii.122 (id.); iv.47 (sīla); A iv.304 (su˚); Sn 67, 517, 687; Nd2 601; Pug 60; PvA 1 (su˚); Sdhp 269, 383. Visuddhatta
Visuddhatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. visuddha] purity, purification A ii.239. Visuddhi
Visuddhi
(f.) [vi+suddhi] brightness, splendour, excel- lency; (ethically) purity, holiness, sanctification; virtue, rectitude Vin i.105 (visuddho paramāya visuddhiyā); D i.53; iii.214 (diṭṭhi˚, sīla˚), 288; M i.147; S iii.69; A i.95 (sīla˚ & diṭṭhi˚); ii.80 (catasso dakkhiṇā˚), 195; iii.315; v.64 (paramattha˚); Sn 813, 824, 840, 892; Dh 16 (kamma˚); Ps i.21 (sīla˚, citta˚, diṭṭhi˚); ii.85 (id.); Nd1 138, 162; Vism 2; SnA 188 (˚divasa), PvA 13 (˚cittatā); Sdhp 447. A class of divine beings (dogmatically the highest in the stages of development, viz. gods by sanctification) is called visuddhi -- devā Nd2 307; J i.139; VvA 18. See under deva. Visūka
Visūka
(nt.) [perhaps to sūc, sūcayati] restless motion, wriggling, twisting, twitching (better than "show," although connection with sūc would give meaning "indication, show"), almost synonymous with vipphandita. Usually in cpd. diṭṭhi˚ scuffling or wriggling of opinion, wrong views, heresy M i.8, 486; Sn 55 (cp. Nd2 301); Pv iv.137.

-- dassana visiting shows (as fairs) D i.5 (cp. DA i.77: "visūkaŋ paṭani -- bhūtaŋ dassanaŋ," reading not clear); A i.212; ii.209; Pug 58. Visūkāyita
Visūkāyita
(nt.) [pp. of visūkāyeti, denom. fr. visūka] 1. restlessness, impatience M i.446. -- 2. disorder, twisting, distortion (of views); usually in phrase diṭṭhi˚ with ˚visevita & ˚vipphandita e. g. M i.234; S i.123 (Bdhgh's expln at K.S. i.321 is "vinivijjhan' aṭṭhena viloman' aṭṭhena"); ii.62 (in same combn; Bdhgh at K.S. ii.203: "sabbaŋ micchādiṭṭhi -- vevacanaŋ"); Dhs 381 ("disorder of opinion" trsln); Nd2 271iii; Vbh 145; DhsA 253. Cp. v. l. S i.12317 (K.S. i.155 "disorders"; n. p. 321). Visūcikā
Visūcikā
(f.) [cp. *Sk. visūcikā] cholera Miln 153, 167. Viseni˚
Viseni˚
[vi+sena in combn with kṛ and bhū; cp. paṭisena] "without an enemy," in ˚katvā making armyless, i. e. disarming Sn 833, 1078. Expld in the Niddesa as "keep away as enemies, conquering" Nd1 174 = Nd2 602 (where Nd1 reads paṭisenikarā kilesā for visenikatvā kilesā). -- ˚bhūta disarmed, not acting as an enemy Sn 793=914, where Nd1 96=334 has the same expln as for ˚katvā; S i.141 (+upasanta -- citta; trsln "by all the hosts of evil unassailed" K.S. i.178). Kern, Toev. s. v. differently "not opposing" for both expressions. -- 641 -- Viseneti
Viseneti
to discard, dislike, get rid of (opp. usseneti) S iii.89; Ps ii.167. See usseneti. Viseyyati
Viseyyati
[vi+seyyati, cp. Sk. śīryati, of śṛ to crush] to be broken, to fall to pieces J i.174. -- pp. visiṇṇa. Visevita
Visevita
(nt.) [vi+sevita] 1. restlessness, trick, capers M i.446 (of a horse; combd with visūkāyita). -- 2. disagreement S i.123 ( = viruddha -- sevita K.S. i.320). Bdhgh at K.S. ii.203 reads ˚sedhita. Cp. visūkāyita. Visesa
Visesa
[fr. vi+śiṣ, cp. Epic Sk. viśeṣa] 1. (mark of) dis- tinction, characteristic, discrimination A i.267; S iv.210; J ii.9; Miln 29; VvA 58, 131; PvA 50, 60. -- 2. elegance, splendour, excellence J v.151; DhA i.399. -- 3. distinction, peculiar merit or advantage, eminence, excellence, extraordinary state D i.233 (so for vivesa all through?); A iii.349 (opp. hāna); J i.435; VvA 157 (puñña˚); PvA 71 (id.), 147 (sukha˚). -- 4. difference, variety SnA 477, 504; VvA 2; PvA 37, 81, 135 (pl. = items). abl. visesato, distinctively, altogether PvA 1, 259. -- 5. specific idea (in meditation), attainment J vi.69: see & cp. Brethren 24, n. 1; 110. -- Cp. paṭi˚.

-- âdhigama specific attainment A iv.22; M ii.96; Nett 92; Miln 412; DhA i.100. [Cp. BSk. viśeṣadhigama Divy 174]. -- gāmin reaching distinction, gaining merit A ii.185; iii.349 sq.; S v.108. -- gū reaching a higher state or attainment J vi.573. -- paccaya ground for distinction VvA 20. -- bhāgiya participating in, or leading to distinction or progress (spiritually) D iii.272 sq., 277, 282; Nett 77; Vism 11, 88 (abstr. ˚bhāgiyatā). Visesaka
Visesaka
(m. or nt.) [fr. visesa] 1. a (distinguishing) mark (on the forehead) Vin ii.267 (with apanga). -- 2. leading to distinction VvA 85. Visesatā = visesa
Visesatā
= visesa Sdhp 265. Visesana
Visesana
(nt.) [fr. viseseti] distinguishing, distinction, qualification, attribute Vv 1610; J iii.11; vi.63; SnA 181, 365, 399; VvA 13. -- instr. avisesena (adv.) without distinction, at all events, anyhow PvA 116. Visesikā
Visesikā
(f.) [fr. visesa] the Vaiśeṣika philosophy Miln 3. Visesita
Visesita
[pp. of viseseti] distinguished, differentiated Mhvs 11, 32; KhA 18; PvA 56. Visesin
Visesin
(adj.) [fr. visesa] possessing distinction, distin- guished from, better than others Sn 799, 842, 855, 905; Nd1 244. Visesiya
Visesiya
(adj.) [grd. of viseseti] distinguished Vv 1610 ( = visesaŋ patvā VvA 85); v. l. visesin (=visesavant C.). Viseseti
Viseseti
[Caus. of visissati] to make a distinction, to distinguish, define, specify J v.120, 451; SnA 343; grd. visesitabba ( -- vacana) qualifying (predicative) expression VvA 13. -- pp. visesita. Visoka
Visoka
(adj.) [vi+soka] freed from grief Dh 90; DhA ii.166. Visodha
Visodha
[fr. vi+śudh] cleaning, cleansing, in cpd. dubbi- sodha hard to clean Sn 279. Visodhana
Visodhana
(nt.) [fr. visodheti] cleansing, purifying, emending Ps ii.21, 23; PvA 130. Visodheti
Visodheti
[Caus. of visujjhati] to clean, cleanse, purify, sanctify Kvu 551; Pv iv.325; DhA iii.158; Sdhp 321. Visoseti
Visoseti
[Caus. of vissussati] to cause to dry up, to make wither, to destroy A i.204; Sn 949 = 1099; Nd1 434 (=sukkhāpeti); Nd2 603 (id.). Vissa
Vissa1
(adj.) [Vedic viśva, to vi˚] all, every, entire; only in Np. Vissakamma. The word is antiquated in Pāli (for it sabba); a few cases in poetry are doubtful. Thus at Dh 266 (dhamma), where DhA iii.393 expls as "visama, vissagandha"; and at It 32 (vissantaraŋ "among all beings"? v. l. vessantaraŋ). Vissa
Vissa2
(nt.) [cp. Sk. visra] a smell like raw flesh, as ˚gandha at Dhs 625; DhsA 319; SnA 286; DhA iii.393. Vissaka
Vissaka
[of viś] dwelling: see paṭi˚. Vissagga
Vissagga
[vi+sagga, vi+sṛj, cp. Sk. visarga] dispensing, serving, donation, giving out, holding (a meal), only in phrases bhatta˚ the function of a meal Vin ii.153; iv.263; Pv iii.29 (so read for vissatta); Miln 9; SnA 19, 140; and dāna˚ bestowing a gift Pv ii.927 ( = pariccāga -- ṭṭhāne dān'agge PvA 124). Vissajjaka
Vissajjaka
[fr. vissajjati] 1. giving out, distributing Vin ii.177 -- 2. one who answers (a question) Miln 295. Vissajjati
Vissajjati
[vi+sajjati, of sṛj. The ss after analogy of ussajjati & nissajjati, cp. ossajjati for osajjati]. A. The pres. vissajjati is not in use. The only forms of the simple verb system are the foll.: ger. vissajja, usually written visajja, in meaning "setting free," giving up, leaving behind Sn 522, 794, 912, 1060; Nd1 98; Nd2 596. -- grd. vissajjaniya [perhaps better to vissajjeti1] to be answered, answerable; nt. a reply Nett 161, 175 sq., 191; and vissajjiya to be given away: see under a˚. -> pp. vissaṭṭha. -- B. Very frequent is the Caus. vissajjeti (also occasionally as visajj˚) in var. meanings, based on the idea of sending forth or away, viz. to emit, discharge J i.164 (uccāra -- passāvaŋ). -- to send Mhvs 8, 3 (lekaŋ visajjayi). -- to dismiss PvA 81 (there). -- to let loose PvA 74 (rathaŋ). -- to spend, give away, bestow, hand over Pug 26 (visajj˚); Nd1 262 (dhanaŋ); Miln 41 (dhaññaŋ); PvA 111, 119. -- to get rid of J i.134 (muddikaŋ). -- to answer (questions), to reply, retort Sn 1005 (˚essati, fut.); VvA 71; PvA 15, 59, 87. -- pp. vissajjita. -- Caus. II. vissajjāpeti (in meanings of vissajjeti) J iv.2 (hatthaŋ = to push away); Miln 143; Mhvs 6, 43. Vissajjana
Vissajjana
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. vissajjeti] 1. giving out, bestowing Nd1 262 (dhana˚). -- 2. sending off, discharging J i.239 (nāvā˚ putting off to sea). -- 3. answer, reply Vism 6, 84; often in combn pucchā˚ question and answer, e. g. Mhvs 4, 54; PvA 2. Vissajjanaka
Vissajjanaka
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. vissajjana] 1. giving out, bestowing PvA 121. -- 2. answering J i.166 (pañha˚). Vissajjāpetar
Vissajjāpetar
[n. ag. fr. vissajjāpeti] one who replies or causes to reply DhA iv.199. Cp. vissajjetar. Vissajjita
Vissajjita
[pp. of vissajjeti] 1. spent, given away Sn 982 -- 2. let loose, sent off, discharged Mhvs 23, 88. Vissajjetar
Vissajjetar
[n. ag. fr. vissajjeti] one who answers (a ques- tion) A i.103 (pañhaŋ). Cp. vissajjāpetar. Vissaṭṭha
Vissaṭṭha
[pp. of vissajjati] 1. let loose; sent (out); released, dismissed; thrown; given out Mhvs 10, 68; J i.370; iii.373; PvA 46, 64, 123, 174. -- 2. (of the voice.) distinct, well enunciated D i.114 ( = apalibuddha, i. e. unobstructed; sandiddha -- vilambit' ādi dosa -- rahita DA i.282); ii.211; A ii.51; iii.114; S i.189; J vi.16 (here as vissattha -- vacana). -- 3. vissaṭṭha at J iv.219 in phrase ˚indriya means something like "strong," distinguished. The v. l. visatta˚ suggests a probable visaṭa˚; it may on the other hand be a corruption of visiṭṭha˚. Vissaṭṭhi
Vissaṭṭhi
see visaṭṭhi. Vissattha
Vissattha
[pp. of vissasati] trusting or trusted; confident; being confided in or demanding confidence, intimate, friendly A iii.114; Vin i.87 (so read for ṭṭh); iv.21; J ii.305; iii.343; Miln 109 (bahu˚ enjoying great confidence); SnA 188 (˚bhāva state of confidence); Sdhp 168, 593. -- vissaṭṭhena (instr.) in confidence Vin ii.99. -- Cp. abhi˚. -- 642 -- Vissandaka
Vissandaka
(adj.) [fr. vissandati] overflowing PvA 119. Vissandati
Vissandati
[vi+sandati, of syand] to flow out, to stream overflow J i.51; v.274; PvA 34 (aor. ˚sandi = pagghari), 51 (ppr. ˚amāna), 80 (ger. ˚itvā), 119 (˚anto=paggharanto), 123 (for paggharati; T. ˚eti). Vissamati
Vissamati
[vi+samati, of śram] to rest, repose; to recover from fatigue J i.485; ii.70; 128, 133; iii.208; iv.93, 293; v.73; PvA 43, 151. -- Caus. vissameti to give a rest, to make repose J iii.36. Vissamana
Vissamana
(nt.) [fr. vissamati] resting, reposing J iii.435. Vissametar
Vissametar
[n. ag. fr. vissameti] one who provides a rest, giver of repose, remover of fatigue J vi.526. Vissara
Vissara
[fr. vi+sarati, of svar] 1. outcry, shout, cry of distress, scream Vin i.87; ii.152, 207; iv.316; PvA 22, 245 (s), 279, 284 (˚ŋ karoti); Sdhp 188. -- 2. distress Vin iv.212, 229. Vissarati
Vissarati
[vi+sarati, of smṛ] to forget Vin i.207; iv.261; Mhvs 26, 16. -- pp. vissarita. Vissarita
Vissarita
[opp. of vissarati] forgotten PvA 202. Vissavati
Vissavati
[vi+savati, of sru] to flow, ooze Th 1, 453 = Sn 205 (v. l. SS vissasati). Vissasati
Vissasati
& vissāseti [vi+sasati, of śvas] to confide in, to put one's trust in (loc. or gen.), to be friendly with S i.79 (vissase); J i.461 (vissāsayitvā); iii.148 = 525 (vissāsaye); iv.56; vi.292. -- pp. vissattha. Vissāsa
Vissāsa
[vi+sāsa, of śvas] trust, confidence, intimacy, mutual agreement Vin i.296; 308, A ii.78; J i.189, 487; Miln 126; Vism 190; VvA 66; PvA 13, 265. -- dubbissāsa difficult to be trusted J iv.462. Vissāsaka
Vissāsaka
(& ˚ika) (adj.) [vissāsa] intimate, confidential; trustworthy A i.26; Miln 146; DA i.289. Vissāsaniya
Vissāsaniya
(adj.) [grd. of vissāseti] to be trusted, trust- worthy PvA 9; Sdhp 306, 441; neg. a˚ J iii.474; cp. dubbissāsaniya hard to trust J iv.462. Vissāsin
Vissāsin
(adj.) [fr. vissāsa] intimate, confidential A iii.136 (asanthava˚ intimate, although not acquainted). Vissuta
Vissuta
(adj.) [vi+suta, of śru] widely famed, renowned, famous Sn 137, 597, 998, 1009; Pv ii.74; Mhvs 5, 19; PvA 107 ( = dūra -- ghuṭṭha). Vissussati
Vissussati
[vi+śuṣ] to dry up, to wither S i.126 (in combn ussussati vissussati, with ss from uss˚). Spelling here visuss˚, but ss at S iii.149. -- Caus. visoseti (q. v.). Vissota
Vissota
(adj.) [vi+sota, of sru] flowedaway, wasted Miln 294. Vihaga
Vihaga
[viha, sky, +ga] a bird (lit. going through the sky) DA i.46. -- ˚pati lord of birds, a garuḷa Dāvs iv.33, 38, 55. Vihanga
Vihanga
= vihaga, J v.416; PvA 154, 157; Sdhp 241. Vihangama
Vihangama
(adj.) [viha+gam] going through the air, flying; (m.) a bird A ii.39; iii.43; Sn 221, 606; Th 1, 1108; J i.216; iii.255; DA i.125 = DhsA 141. Vihaññati
Vihaññati
[Pass. of vihanati] to be struck or slain; to be vexed or grieved, to get enraged, to be annoyed, suffer hardship; to be cast down Sn 168 sq.; Pv ii.117 ( = vighātaŋ āpajjati PvA 150); iv.52 (with same expln); J i.73, 359; ii.442; v.330; DA i.289. -- ppr. vihaññamāna Sn 1121 (with long and detailed exegesis at Nd2 604); S i.28 (a˚); PvA 150. pp. vihata DA i.231. Vihata
Vihata1
[pp. of vihanati] struck, killed, destroyed, impaired It 100 (where A i.164 reads vigata); J vi.171; Sdhp 313, 425. Vihata
Vihata2
(adj.) [cp. Sk. vihṛti] broad, wide J vi.171 ( = pu- thula C.). Vihanati
Vihanati
[vi+hanati] to strike, kill, put an end to, remove A iii.248 (kankhaŋ; v. l. vitarati perhaps to be preferred); Sn 673; Pot. 3rd sg. vihane Sn 975 (cp. Nd1 509); & vihāne Sn 348 = Th 1, 1268. -- ger. vihacca: see abhi˚. -- Pass. vihaññati (q. v.). -- pp. vihata. Viharaṇa
Viharaṇa
(nt.) [fr. viharati] abiding, dwelling DhsA 164, 168. Viharati
Viharati
[vi+harati] to stay, abide, dwell, sojourn (in a certain place); in general: to be, to live; appld: to behave, lead a life (as such expld with "iriyati" at Vism 16). Synonyms are given at Vbh 194 with iriyati, vattati, pāleti, yapeti, yāpeti, carati; cp. VbhA 262. -> See e. g. D i.251; Sn 136, 301, 925; Pug 68; DhsA 168; DA i.70, 132; PvA 22, 67, 78. -- Special Forms: aor. 3rd sg. vihāsi Sn p. 16; Pv ii.960; Mhvs 5, 233; PvA 54, 121; 3rd pl. vihiŋsu Th 1, 925, & vihaŋsu A ii.21; fut. viharissati A iii.70; vihessati Th 1, 257; vihissati Th 2, 181; and vihāhisi J i.298 (doubtful reading!), where C. expls as "vijahissati, parihāyissati"; with phrase sukhaŋ vihāhisi cp. dukkhaŋ viharati at A i.95, and see also vihāhesi. -- pp. not found. Vihaviha
Vihaviha
[for vihaga] a sort of bird Th 1, 49 (v. l. cihaciha). The C. expls by "parillaka." Vihāmi
Vihāmi
at J vi.78 (lohitaŋ) is poetical for vijahāmi; C. expls as niṭṭhubhāmi, i. e. I spit out. Vihāya
Vihāya
is ger. of vijahati (q. v.). Vihāyasa
Vihāyasa
[cp. Sk. viha & vihāyasa] the air, sky PvA 14. Cases adverbially: ˚yasā through the air Mhvs 12, 10, & ˚yasaŋ id. J iv.47. Cp. vehāyasa & vehāsa. Vihāra
Vihāra
[fr. viharati] 1. (as m. & adj.) spending one's time (sojourning or walking about), staying in a place, living; place of living, stay, abode (in general) VvA 50 (jala˚); PvA 22, 79; eka˚ living by oneself S ii.282 sq.; janghā˚ wandering on foot PvA 73; divā˚ passing the time of day Sn 679; PvA 142. See also below 3 a. -- 2. (appld meaning) state of life, condition, mode of life (in this meaning almost identical with that of vāsa2), e. g. ariya˚ best condition S v.326; SnA 136; dibba˚ supreme condition (of heart) Miln 225; brahma˚ divine state S v.326; SnA 136; Vism 295 sq. (ch. ix.); phāsu˚ comfort A iii.119, 132; sukha˚ happiness S iii.8; v.326; A i.43; ii.23; iii.131 sq.; iv.111 sq., 230 sq.; v.10 sq. See further D i.145, 196; iii.220 (dibba, brahma, ariya), 250 (cha satata˚), 281; S ii.273 (jhāna˚); iii.235 (id.); A iii.294 (˚ŋ kappeti to live one's life); Ps ii.20; Nett 119 sq. -> 3. (a) a habitation for a Buddhist mendicant, an abode in the forest (arañña˚), or a hut; a dwelling, habitation, lodging (for a bhikkhu), a single room Vin ii.207 sq.; D ii.7; A iii.51, 299 (yathāvihāraŋ each to his apartment); Sn 220 (dūra˚ a remote shelter for a bhikkhu), 391; Vism 118 (different kinds; may be taken as c.). -- (b) place for convention of the bhikkhus, meeting place; place for rest & recreation (in garden or park) DA i.133. -- (c) (later) a larger building for housing bhikkhus, an organized monastery, a Vihāra Vin i.58; iii.47; S i.185 (˚pāla the guard of the monastery); J i.126; Miln 212; Vism 292; DhA i.19 (˚cārikā visit to the monastery), 49 (˚pokkharaṇī), 416; Mhvs 19, 77; PvA 12, 20, 54, 67, 141. 151; and passim. See also Dictionary of Names. The modern province Behar bears its name from the vihāras. Vihāraka = vihāra
Vihāraka
= vihāra 3 (room, hut) Th 2, 94 (=vasanaka- ovaraka ThA 90). -- 643 -- Vihārika
Vihārika
(adj.) = vihārin; in saddhi˚ co -- resident A iii.70. Vihārin
Vihārin
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. vihāra] dwelling, living; being in such & such a state or condition D i.162 (appa -- dukkha˚), 251 (evaŋ˚); A i.24 (araṇa˚), 26 (mettā); It 74 (appamāda˚); Sn 45 (sādhu˚), 375; Pv iv.133 (araṇa˚); PvA 77, 230 (mettā˚); VvA 71. -- eka˚ living alone S ii.282 sq.; iv.35; opp. saddhi˚ together with another; a coresident, brother -- bhikkhu S ii.204; iv.103; A ii.239. Vihāhesi
Vihāhesi
"he banished" at J iv.471 is 3rd sg. aor. Caus. of vijahati (hā); expld in C. by pabbājesi. -- Another form vihāhisi see under viharati & cp. viheti2. Vihiŋsati
Vihiŋsati
[vi+hiŋsati] to hurt, injure, harass, annoy S i.165; It 86; Sn 117, 451; PvA 123, 198. Vihiŋsanā
Vihiŋsanā
(f.) a Commentary word for vihiŋsā VbhA 75. A similar vihiŋsakā occurs at PvA 123. Vihiŋsā
Vihiŋsā
(f.) (& adj. ˚a) [abstr. fr. vi+hiŋs, to injure] hurting, injuring, cruelty, injury D iii.215; 226 (˚vitakka); S i.202; ii.151 (˚dhātu); A iii.448; Sn 292; Nd1 207 (˚saññā), 386, 501 (˚vitakka); Vbh 86, 363 (˚vitakka); Dhs 1348; Pug 25; Nett 97; Miln 337, 367, 390; DhsA 403; VbhA 74 (˚dhātu), 118 (˚vitakka); Sdhp 510. Neg. avihiŋsā see sep. -- See also vihesā. Vihita
Vihita
(adj.) [pp. of vidahati] arranged, prepared, disposed, appointed; furnished, equipped J vi.201 (loka); Miln 345 (nagara); D i.45, S iii.46; Pug 55 (aneka˚); Mhvs 10, 93; PvA 51 (suṭṭhu˚). añña˚ engaged upon something else Vin iv.269. Vihitaka
Vihitaka
(adj.) = vihita; D iii.28 sq. (kathaŋ v. aggaññaŋ how as the beginning of things appointed?); -- añña˚ engaged upon something else J iv.389 (or does it belong to āhāra. in sense of "prepared by somebody else"?). Vihitatā
Vihitatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. vihita] in añña˚ being engaged upon something else DhA i.181. Vihīna
Vihīna
(adj.) [pp. of vijahati] left, given up, abandoned Sdhp 579. Viheṭhaka
Viheṭhaka
(adj.) [fr. viheṭheti] harassing, oppressing, annoying J i.504; v.143; Sdhp 89. Neg. a˚ see sep. Viheṭhana
Viheṭhana
(nt.) [fr. viheṭheti] harassing, hurting; oppres- sion VbhA 74; VvA 68; PvA 232. Viheṭhanaka
Viheṭhanaka
(adj.) [fr. viheṭhana] oppressing, hurting, doing harm J ii.123. Viheṭheti
Viheṭheti
[vi+heṭheti, of hīḍ or heḷ to be hostile. Same in BSk., e. g. MVastu iii.360, Divy 42, 145 etc.] to oppress, to bring into difficulties, to vex, annoy, plague, hurt D i.116, 135; ii.12; Sn 35; J i.187; ii.267; iv.375; Miln 6, 14; DhA 191; VvA 69 (Pass. ˚iyamāna). Viheti
Viheti1
[for bibheti?] to be afraid (of) J v.154 ( = bhāyati C.). Cp. vibheti. Viheti
Viheti2
[contracted Pass. of vijahāti = vihāyati, cp. vihā- hesi] to be given up, to disappear, to go awav J iv.216. Kern, Toev. s. v. wrongly=vi+eti. Vihesaka
Vihesaka
(adj.) [fr. viheseti] annoying, vexing, troubling Vin iv.36; Dpvs i.47. -- f. ˚ikā Vin iv.239, 241. Vihesā
Vihesā
(f.) [for vihiŋsā] vexation, annoyance, injury; worry M i.510; ii.241 sq.; S i.136; iii.132; iv.73; v.357; D iii.240 (a˚); Vin iv.143 (+vilekhā); A iii.245, 291; Sn 247, 275, 277; Vbh 369; Nett 25; Miln 295; DhA i.55. Vihesikā
Vihesikā
(f.) [probably for Sk. *vibhīṣikā, fr. bhī, Epic Sk. bhīṣā, cp. bhīṣma = P. bhiŋsa (q. v.)] fright J iii.147. (C. says "an expression of fearfullness"). Viheseti
Viheseti
[vi+hiŋs, or Denom. fr. vihesā, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 102] to harass, vex, annoy, insult S iv.63; v.346; A iii.194; Vin iv.36 sq.; Ud 44; Sn 277; Pv iv.147 (vihesaŋ, aor.); iv.149 (vihesayi, aor.). Vīci
Vīci
(m. & f.) [cp. late Sk. vīci wave; Vedic vīci only in meaning "deceit"; perhaps connected with Lat. vicis, Ags. wīce = E. week, lit. "change," cp. tide] 1. a wave J i.509; Miln 117 (jala˚), 319 (˚puppha wave -- flower, fig.); Vism 63 (samudda˚); Dāvs iv.46; DhsA 116= Vism 143. -- 2. interval, period of time (cp. "tide"= time interval) J v.271 (˚antara, in Avīci definition as "uninterrupted state of suffering"). In contrast pair avīci (adj.) uninterrupted, without an interval, & savīci with periods, in defn of jarā at VbhA 99 & DhsA 328, where avīci means "not changing quickly," and savīci "changing quickly." Also in defn of sadā (continuously) as "avīci -- santati" at Nd2 631. Cp. avīci. Vījati
Vījati
[vīj] to fan J i.165; SnA 487; VvA 6 (T. bījati). - Caus. vījeti DhA iv.213; Mhvs 5, 161. -- Pass. vījiyati: ppr. vījiyamāna getting fanned J iii.374 (so read for vijīy˚); PvA 176 (so for vijjamāna!). -- pp. vījita. Vījana
Vījana
(nt.) [fr. vīj, cp. Class. Sk. vījana] a fan, fanning; in vījana -- vāta a fanning wind, a breeze SnA 174. Vījanī
Vījanī
(f.) [fr. vījana, of vīj] a fan Vv 472 (T. bījanī, v. l. vīj˚); J i.46; Vism 310; DhA iv.39; VvA 147; PvA 176; KhA 95. There are 3 kinds of fans mentioned at Vin ii.130, viz. vākamaya˚, usīra˚, mora -- piñcha˚, or fans made of bark, of a root (?), and of a peacock's tail. Vījita
Vījita
[pp. of vījati] fanned Pv iii.117 (˚anga). *Vīṇati
*Vīṇati
(?), doubtful: see apa˚ & pa˚. Kern, Toev. s. v. wrong in treating it as a verb "to see." Vīṇā
Vīṇā
(f.) [cp. Vedic vīṇā] the Indian lute, mandoline S i.122 = Sn 449 (kacchā bhassati "let the lyre slide down from hollow of his arm" K.S. i.153); Th 1, 467; S iv.196 (six parts); A iii.375; J iii.91; v.196, 281 (named Kokanada "wolf's howl"); vi.465=580; Vv 6419; 8110; Miln 53 (all its var. parts); VvA 138, 161, 210; PvA 151. -- vīṇaŋ vādeti to play the lute Mhvs 31, 82; ThA 203.

-- daṇḍaka the neck of a lute J ii.225. -- doṇikā the sounding board of a lute (cp. doṇī1 4) Vism 251; VbhA 234; KhA 45. Vīta
Vīta1
(adj.) [vi+ita, pp. of i] deprived of, free from, (being) without. In meaning and use cp. vigata˚. Very frequent as first part of a cpd., as e. g. the foll.:

-- accika without a flame, i. e. glowing, aglow (of cinders), usually combd with ˚dhūma "without smoke" M i.365; S ii.99 (so read for vītacchika) = iv.188=M i.74; D ii.134; J i.15, 153; iii.447; v.135; DhA ii.68; Vism 301. -- iccha free from desire J ii.258. -- gedha without greed Sn 210, 860, 1100; Nd1 250; Nd2 606. -- taṇha without craving Sn 83, 741, 849, 1041, 1060; Nd1 211; Nd2 607. -- tapo without heat J ii.450. -- (d)dara fearless Th 1, 525; Dh 385. -- dosa without anger Sn 12. -- macchara without envy, unselfish Sn 954; Nd1 444; J v.398; Pv iii.115. -- mada not conceited So 328, cp. A ii.120. -- mala stainless (cp. vimala) S iv.47, 107; DA i.237; Miln 16. -- moha without bewilderment Sn 13. I have to remark that the reading vīta˚ seems to be well established. It occurs very frequently in the Apadāna. Should we take it in meaning of "excessive"? And are we confronted with an attribute of osadhi, the morning star, which points to Babylonian influence (star of the East)? As it occurs in the Vatthugāthās of the Pārāyanavagga, this does not seem improbable. -- raŋsi rayless (?) Sn 1016 (said of the sun; the expression is not clear. One MS. of Nd2 at this passage reads pīta˚, i. e. with yellow, i. e. golden, rays; which is to be preferred). Cp. note in Index to SnA. -- rāga passionless Sn 11, 507, 1071; Pug 32; Pv ii.47; Miln 76, and frequently elsewhere. -- lobha without greed Sn 10, 469, 494. -- vaṇṇa colourless Sn 1120. -- salla without a sting S iv.64. -- sārada not fresh, not unexperienced, i. e. wise It 123. Vīta
Vīta2
[pp. of vāyati1, or vināti] woven Vin iii.259 (su˚). -- 644 -- Vītaŋsa
Vītaŋsa
[fr. vi+tan, according to BR. The word is found in late Sk. (lexicogr.) as vītaŋsa. BR compare Sk. avataŋsa (garland: see P. vaṭaŋsa) & uttaŋsa. The etym. is not clear] a bird -- snare (BR.: "jedes zum Fangen von Wild & Vögeln dienende Gerät"), a decoy bird Th 1, 139. Kern, Toev. s. v. "vogelstrik." Vīti˚
Vīti˚
is the contracted prepositional combn vi+ati, representing an emphatic ati, e. g. in the foll.:

-- (k)kama (1) going beyond, transgression, sin Vin iii.112; iv.290; J i.412; iv.376; Pug 21; Miln 380; Vism 11, 17; DhA iv.3. -- (2) going on, course (of time) PvA 137 (˚ena by and by; v. l. anukkamena). -- kiṇṇa sprinkled, speckled, gay with J v.188. -- nāmeti to make pass (time), to spend the time, to live, pass, wait J iii.63, 381; DhA ii.57; VvA 158; PvA 12, 21, 47, 76. -- patati to fly past, to flit by, to fly up & down Sn 688; A v.88 = Miln 392. -- missa mingled, mixed (with) M i.318; D iii.96; J vi.151. -- vatta having passed or overcome, gone through; passed, spent S i.14, 145; iii.225; iv.52; A ii.44; Sn 6, 395, 796; J i.374; ThA 170; PvA 21, 55, 83. -- sāreti [fr. vi+ati+ sṛ; not with Childers fr. smṛ; cp. BSk. vyatisārayati] to make pass (between), to exchange (greeting), to address, converse (kathaŋ), greet. Often in phrase sārāṇīyaŋ sammodanīyaŋ kathaŋ vītisāreti [for which BSk. sammodanīŋ saŋrañjanīŋ vividhāŋ kathāŋ vyatisārayati, e. g. AvŚ ii.140] D i.52, 90, 118, 152; Sn 419; cp. Miln 19; J iv.98 (shortened to sārāṇīyaŋ vītisārimha; expld with sārayimha); v.264. -- haraṇa passing (mutually), carrying in between J vi.355 (bhojanānaŋ). -- harati to associate with (at a meal) S i.162. -- hāra, in pada˚ "taking over or exchange of steps," a stride S i.211; A iv.429; J vi.354. Same in BSk., e. g. MVastu i.35; iii.162. Vīthi
Vīthi
(f.) [cp. Epic Sk. vīthi, to Idg. *ṷei̯ā -- to aim at, as in Lat. via way, Sk. veti to pursue; Lat. venor to hunt; Gr. ei)/sato he went] 1. street, way, road, path, track A v.347, 350 sq.; Vv 836; J i.158 (garden path); v.350 (dve vīthiyo gahetvā tiṭṭhati, of a house); vi.276 (v. and raccha); DhA i.14; VvA 31; PvA 54. -- antaravīthiyaŋ (loc.) in the middle of the road J i.373; PvA 96. -- ˚sabhāga share of road J i.422; -- ˚singhāṭaka crossroad DhA iv.4. -- Of the path of the stars and heavenly bodies J i.23; VvA 326. -- Various streets (roads, paths) are named either after the professions carried on in them, e. g. dantakāra˚ street of ivory -- workers J i.320; pesakāra˚ weaver st. DhA i.424; bhatakāra˚ soldier st. DhA i.233; -- or after the main kind of traffic frequenting these, e. g. nāga˚ elephant road VvA 316; miga˚ animal rd. J i.372; -- or after special occasions (like distinguished people passing by this or that road), e. g. buddha˚ the road of the Buddha DhA ii.80; rāja˚ King st. ThA 52; Mhvs 20, 38. -- 2. (t.t. in psychology) course, process (of judgment, senseperception or cognition, cp. Cpd. 25, 124, 241 (vinicchaya˚), 266. -- Vism 187 (kammaṭṭhāna˚); KhA 102 (viññāṇa˚). -- ˚citta process of cognition (lit. processed cognition) Vism 22; DhsA 269. Vīthika
Vīthika
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. vīthi] having (as) a road Miln 322 (satipaṭṭhāna˚, in the city of Righteousness). Vīmaŋsaka
Vīmaŋsaka
(adj.) [fr. vīmaŋsā] testing, investigating, examining S iii.6 sq.; Sn 827; Nd1 166; J i.369. Vīmaŋsati
Vīmaŋsati
(& ˚eti) [Vedic mīmāŋsate, Desid. of man. The P. form arose through dissimilation m>v, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. 46, 4] "to try to think," to consider, examine, find out, investigate, test, trace, think over Sn 215 (˚amāna), 405; J i.128, 147, 200; vi.334; Miln 143; PvA 145, 215, 272; Sdhp 91. -- ger. ˚itvā J vi.368; Mhvs 5, 36; PvA 155; inf. ˚ituŋ Mhvs 37, 234; PvA 30, 155, 283 (sippaŋ). -- Caus. II, vīmaŋsāpeti to cause to investigate J v.110. -- Cp. pari˚. Vīmaŋsana
Vīmaŋsana
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. vīmaŋsati] trying, testing; finding out, experiment Vin iii.79; J iii.55; Mhvs 22, 78; PvA 153. Vīmaŋsā
Vīmaŋsā
(f.) [fr. vīmaŋsati] consideration, examination, test, investigation, the fourth of the Iddhipādas, q. v.; D iii.77 (˚samādhi), 222; S v.280; A i.39, 297; iii.37, 346; v.24, 90, 338; Ps i.19; ii.123; Kvu 508; Dhs 269; Vbh 219 (˚samādhi), 222, 227; Tikp 2; Nett 16 (˚samādhi), 42; DA i.106; SnA 349 (vīmaŋsa -- kāra = sankheyya -- kāra). -- Cp. pari˚. Vīmaŋsin
Vīmaŋsin
= vīmaŋsaka Sn 877; Nd1 283; DA i.106. Vīra
Vīra
[Vedic vīra; cp. Av. vīra, Lat. vir, virtus "virtue"; Gotu. wair, Ohg, Ags wer; to vayas strength etc.; cp. viriya] manly, mighty, heroic; a hero S i.137; Sn 44, 165 (not dhīra), 642, 1096, 1102; Th 1, 736 (nara˚ hero); Nd2 609; DhA iv.225. -- mahā˚ a hero S i.110, 193; iii.83 (of the Arahant). -- vīra is often an Ep. of the Buddha.

-- angarūpa built like a hero, heroic, divine D i.89; ii.16; iii.59, 142, 145; S i.89; Sn p. 106; expld as "devaputta -- sadisa -- kāya" at DA i.250 & SnA 450. -> The BSk. equivalent is var -- anga -- rūpin (distorted fr. vīr˚), e. g. MVastu i.49; ii.158; iii.197. Vīyati
Vīyati
[Pass. of vināti] see viyyati. Vīvadāta
Vīvadāta
(adj.) [vi+avadāta, the metric form of vodāta] clean, pure Sn 784, 881. Vīsati & vīsaŋ
Vīsati
& vīsaŋ (indecl.) [both for Vedic viŋśati; cp. Av. vīsaiti, Gr. ei)/ kosi, Lat. viginti, Oir. fiche, etc.; fr. Idg. *ṷi+komt (decad), thus "two decads." Cp. vi˚] number 20. -- Both forms are used indiscriminately. -- (1) vīsati, e. g. Vin ii.271 (˚vassa, as minimum age of ordination); Sn 457 (catu -- vīsat'akkharaŋ); J i.89 (˚sahassa bhikkhū); iii.360; VbhA 191 sq.; DhA i.4 (ekūna˚, 19); ii.9, 54; iii.62 (˚sahassa bhikkhū, as followers); as vīsatiŋ at DhA ii.61 (vassa -- sahassāni). -> (2) vīsaŋ; e. g. Sn 1019 (˚vassa -- sata); It 99 (jātiyo); J i.395 (˚yojana -- sata); v.36 (˚ratana -- sata); DhA i.8; ii.91 (˚yojana -- sataŋ). Vīhi
Vīhi
[cp. Vedic vrīhi] rice, paddy Vin iv.264 (as one of the 7 kinds of āmaka -- dhañña); J i.429; iii.356; Miln 102, 267; Vism 383 (˚tumba); DhA i.125; iii.374 (˚piṭaka). Vuccati
Vuccati
[Pass. of vac] to be called D i.168, 245; Sn 436, 759, 848, 861, 946; Nd1 431; Nd2 s. v. katheti; SnA 204; DhA ii.35. See also vatti. -- pp. vutta. Vuṭṭha
Vuṭṭha
[pp. of vassati1] (water) shed, rained Pv i.56; PvA 29. See also vaṭṭa & vaṭṭha. Vuṭṭhavant
Vuṭṭhavant
= vusitavant, Nd2 179, 284, 611. Vuṭṭhahati & vuṭṭhāti
Vuṭṭhahati
& vuṭṭhāti [the sandhi form of uṭṭhahati (q. v.), with euphonic v, which however appears in BSk. as vyut˚ (i. e. vi+ud˚); vyuttisṭhate "to come back from sea" Divy 35, and freq. in AvŚ, e. g. i.242] 1. to rise, arise; to be produced Vin ii.278 (gabbha). -- 2. to rise out of (abl.), to emerge from, to come back S iv.294; Vism 661 (vuṭṭhāti). -- pp. vuṭṭhita. -- Caus. vuṭṭhāpeti (1) to ordain, rehabilitate Vin iv.226, 317 sq. ( = upasampādeti). (2) to rouse out of (abl.), to turn away from A iii.115. Vuṭṭhāna
Vuṭṭhāna
(nt.) [the sandhi form of uṭṭhāna] 1. rise, origin J i.114 (gabbha˚). -- 2. ordination, rehabilitation (in the Order) Vin iv.320; Miln 344. -- 3. (cp. uṭṭhāna 3) rousing, rising out, emerging, emergence; appld as a religious term to revival from jhāna -- abstraction (cp. Cpd. 67, 215 n. 4; Dhs. trln, § 1332) M i.302; S iii.270; iv.294; A iii.311, 418, 427 sq.; Vism 661 (in detail), 681 sq. (id.); Dhs 1332; Nett 100; Tikp 272, 346. -- ˚gāminī ( -- vipassanā -- ñāṇa) "insight of discernment leading to uprising" (Cpd. 67) Vism 661, 681 sq. -- 645 -- Vuṭṭhānatā
Vuṭṭhānatā
(f.) [fr. vuṭṭhāna] rehabilitation; in āpatti˚ forgiveness of an offence Vin ii.250. Vuṭṭhānima
Vuṭṭhānima
[?] is an expression for a certain punishment (pain) in purgatory M i.337 (vuṭṭhānimaŋ nāma vedanaŋ vediyamāna). Vuṭṭhi
Vuṭṭhi
(f.) [fr. vṛṣ, see vassati1 & cp. Vedic vṛṣṭi] rain S i.172 = Sn 77 (fig.= saddhā bījaŋ tapo vuṭṭhi); A iii.370, 378 (vāta˚); It 83; Dh 14; J vi.587 (˚dhārā); Ap 38 (fig.), 52 (amata˚); Miln 416; Vism 37, 234 (salila˚); Mhvs 1, 24; SnA 34, 224; PvA 139 (˚dhārā shower of rain). -- dubbuṭṭhi lack of rain, drought (opp. suvuṭṭhi) J ii.367=vi.487; Vism 512. Vuṭṭhikā
Vuṭṭhikā
(f.) = vuṭṭhi; only in cpd. dubbuṭṭhikā time of drought, lack of rain D i.11; DA i.95; It 64 sq. (as avuṭṭhika -- sama resembling a drought); DhA i.52. Vuṭṭhita
Vuṭṭhita
[pp. of vuṭṭhahati; cp. uṭṭhita] risen (out of), aroused, having come back from (abl.) D ii.9 (paṭisallāṇā); Sn p. 59; S iv.294. Vuṭṭhimant
Vuṭṭhimant
(adj.) [fr. vuṭṭhi, cp. Vedic vṛṣṭimant in same meaning] containing rain, full of rain; the rainy sky Th 2, 487 ( = deva, i. e. rain -- god or sky ThA 287). Kern, Toev. s. v. wrongly=*vyuṣṭi˚, i. e. fr. vi+uṣ (vas) to shine, "luisterrijk," i. e. lustrous, resplendent. Vuḍḍha & vuddha
Vuḍḍha
& vuddha [pp. of vaḍḍhati] old (fig. venerable) - 1. vuḍḍha Pv ii.114; Mhvs 13, 2. -- 2. vuddha M ii.168; J v.140; Sn p. 108 (+mahallaka); DA i.283. Vuḍḍhaka
Vuḍḍhaka
(adj.) [vuḍḍha+ka] old; f. ˚ikā old woman Th 2, 16. Vuḍḍhi & vuddhi
Vuḍḍhi
& vuddhi (f.) [a by -- form of vaḍḍhi] increase, growth, furtherance, prosperity. -- 1. vuḍḍhi PvA 22. Often in phrase vuḍḍhi virūḷhi vepulla (all three almost tautological) Miln 51; Vism 129. -- 2. vuddhi M i.117 (+virūḷhi etc.); S ii.205 sq.; iii.53; v.94, 97; A iii.76 (opp. parihāni), 404 (+virūḷhi), 434 (kusalesu dhammesu); v.123 sq.; It 108; J v.37 (˚ppatta grown up); Vism 271, 439 (so read for buddhi); DhA ii.82, 87; Sdhp 537. *Vuṇāti
*Vuṇāti
[we are giving this base as such only from analogy with the Sk. form vrṇāti (vṛṇoti); from the point of view of Pāli grammar we must consider a present tense varati as legitimate (cp. saŋ˚). There are no forms from the base vuṇāti found in the present tense; the Caus. vāreti points directly to varati]. The two meanings of the root vṛ as existing in Sk. are also found in Pāli, but only peculiar to the Caus. vâreti (the form aor avari as given by Childers should be read avāriŋsu Mhvs 36, 78). The present tense varati is only found in meaning "to wish" (except in prep. cpds. like saŋvarati to restrain). -- Defns of vṛ: Dhtp 255 var = varaṇa -- sambhattisu; 274 val=saŋvaraṇe (see valaya); 606 var=āvaraṇ'icchāsu. -- 1. to hinder, obstruct; to conceal, protect (on meanings "hinder" and "conceal" cp. rundhati); Idg. *ṷer and *ṷel, cp. Gr. e)/lutron, Sk. varutra, Lat. volvo, aperio etc. See vivarati. The pp. *vuta only in combn with prefixes, like pari˚, saŋ˚. It also appears as *vaṭa in vivaṭa. -- 2. to wish, desire; Idg. *ṷel, cp. Sk. varaṇa, varīyān "better," Gr. e)/ldomai to long for, Lat. volo to intend, Goth. wiljan to "will," wilja=E. will. -- Pres. varati (cp. vaṇeti): imper. varassu J iii.493 (varaŋ take a wish; Pot. vare Pv ii.940 (=vareyyāsi C.); ppr. varamāna Pv ii.940 (=patthayamāna PvA 128). -- pp. does not occur. Vuṇhi˚
Vuṇhi˚
(& instr. vuṇhinā) at Pgdp 13, 15, 19, 35 must be meant for v -- uṇha˚ (& v'uṇhena), i. e. heat (see uṇha). Vutta
Vutta1
[pp. of vatti, vac; cp. utta] said DA i.17 (˚ŋ hoti that is to say); DhA ii.21, 75, 80; SnA 174.

-- vādin one who speaks what is said (correctly), telling the truth M i.369; S ii.33; iii.6. Vutta
Vutta2
[pp. of vapati1] sown S i.134 (khetta); J i.340; iii.12; vi.14; Miln 375 (khetta); PvA 7, 137, 139. Vutta
Vutta3
[pp. of vapati2] shaven M ii.168 (˚siro). Cp. nivutta2. Vuttavelā
Vutta
-- velā at J iv.45 (tena vutta -- velāyaŋ & ittarāya vutta -- velāya) is by Kern, Toev. s. v. vutta2 fancifully & wrongly taken as *vyuṣṭa ( = vi+uṣṭa, pp. of vas to shine), i. e. dawned; it is however simply vutta1=at the time said by him (or her). Vuttaka
Vuttaka
(nt.) [vutta1+ka. The P. conneetion seems to be vac, although formally it may be derived fr. vṛt "to happen" etc. (cp. vuttin & vattin, both fr. vṛt, & vutti). The BSk. equivalent is vṛttaka "tale" (lit. happening), e. g. Divy 439] what has been said, saying; only in title of a canonical book "iti -- vuttakaŋ" ("logia"): see under iti. Vuttamāna
Vuttamāna
at S i.129 read as vattamāna. Vuttari
Vuttari
of Dh 370 is pañca -- v -- uttari(ŋ), cp. DhA iv.109. Vutti
Vutti
(f.) [fr. vṛt, cp. vattati; Sk. vṛtti] mode of being or acting, conduct, practice, usage, livelihood, habit S i.100 (ariya˚; cp. ariya -- vāsa); Sn 81 = Miln 228 (=jīvitavutti SnA 152); Sn 68, 220, 326, 676; J vi.224 (=jīvita -- vutti C.); Pv ii.914 (=jīvita PvA 120); iv.121 (=jīvikā PvA 229); Miln 224, 253; VvA 23. Vuttika
Vuttika
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [vutti+ka] living, behaving, acting A iii.383 (kaṇḍaka˚); PvA 120 (dukkha˚); sabhāga˚ living in mutual courtesy or properly, always combd with sappatissa, e. g. Vin i.187; ii.162; A iii.14 sq. Vuttitā
Vuttitā
(f.) ( -- ˚) [abstr. formation fr. vutti] condition Vism 310 (āyatta˚). Vuttin
Vuttin
(adj.) [cp. Sk. vṛttin] = vuttika; in sabhāga˚ Vin i.45; J i.219. Cp. vattin. Vuttha
Vuttha1
[pp. of vasati1] clothed: not found. More usual nivattha. Vuttha
Vuttha2
[pp. of vasati2] having dwelt, lived or spent (time), only in connection with vassa (rainy season) or vāsa (id.: see vāsa2). See e. g. DhA i.7; PvA 32, 43; J i.183 (˚vāsa). With ref. to vassa "year" at J iv.317. -- At DhA i.327 vuttha stands most likely for vuddha (arisen, grown), as also in abstr. vutthattaŋ at DhA i.330. -- See also parivuttha, pavuttha & vusita. Vutthaka
Vutthaka
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [vuttha2+ka] dwelt, lived, only in pubba˚ where he had lived before Mhvs 1, 53 (so for ˚vuttaka). Vuddha & Vuddhi
Vuddha
& Vuddhi: see vuḍḍha & vuḍḍhi. Vuppati
Vuppati
is Pass. of vapati. Vuyhati
Vuyhati
to be carried away: Pass. of vahati, q. v. and add refs.: Miln 69; Vism 603 (vuyhare). -- ppr. vuyhamāna: -- 1. being drawn M i.225 (of a calf following its mother's voice). -- 2. being carried away (by the current of a river), in danger of drowning Sn 319. -> pp. vuḷha & vūḷha. Vuyhamānaka
Vuyhamānaka
(adj.) [vuyhemāna with disparaging suffix ˚ka] one who is getting drowned, "drownedling" J iii.507. Vuḷha & Vūḷha
Vuḷha
& Vūḷha [pp. of vahati, Pass. vuyhati; but may be vi+ūḷha] carried away. -- 1. vuḷha: Vin i.32, 109. -> 2. vūḷha: A iii.69; J i.193; DhA ii.265 (udakena). See also būḷha. -- 646 -- Vuvahyamāna
Vuvahyamāna
at A iv.170 read with C. at opuniyamāna "sifting" (fr. opunāti): see remark at A iv.476. Vusita
Vusita
[Kern, Toev. s. v. vasati takes it as vi+uṣita (of vas2), against which speaks meaning of vivasati "to live from home." Geiger, P.Gr. § 661 & 195 expld it as uṣita with prothetic v, as by -- form of vuttha. Best fitting in meaning is assumption of vusita being a variant of vosita, with change of o to u in analogy to vuttha; thus = vi+osita "fulfilled, come to an end or to perfection"; cp. pariyosita. Geiger's expln is supported by phrase brahmacariyaŋ vasati] fulfilled, accomplished; (or:) lived, spent (=vuttha); only in phrase vusitaŋ brahmacariyaŋ (trsln Dial. i.93; "the higher life has been fulfilled") D i.84 (cp. Dh i.225= vutthaŋ parivutthaŋ); It 115 (ed. vūsita˚); Sn 463, 493; Pug 61. -- Also at D i.90 neg. a˚, with ref. to avusitavā, where Rh. D. (Dial. i.112) trsls "ill -- bred" and "rude," hardly just. See also arahant ii.A. Vusitatta
Vusitatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. vusita] state of perfection D i.90 (vusitavā -- mānin kiŋ aññatra avusitattā = he is proud of his perfection rather from imperfection). Vusitavant
Vusitavant
(adj.) [vusita+vant] one who has reached per- fection (in chaste living), Ep. of the arahant D ii.223 (trsln "who has lived ʻ the life ʼ"): M i.4; S iii.61 ; A v.16; Sn 514; Nd1 611; Miln 104. On D i.90 see vusita (end). See also arahant ii C. Vusīmant
Vusīmant
(adj.) [difficult to explain; perhaps for vasī- mant (see vasīvasa) in sense of vasavattin] = vusitavant A iv.340; Sn 1115 (cp. Nd2 611=vuṭṭhavā ciṇṇa -- caraṇo etc., thus "perfected," cp. ciṇṇavasin in same meaning). Vussati
Vussati
is Pass. of vasati2 (q. v.). Vūpakaṭṭha
Vūpakaṭṭha
[doubtful, whether vi+upakaṭṭha (since the latter is only used of time), or = vavakaṭṭha, with which it is identical in meaning. Cp. also BSk. vyapakṛṣṭa AvS i.233; ii.194; of which it might be a re -- translation] alienated, withdrawn, drawn away (from), secluded: often in phrase eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī etc. (see arahant ii.B.), e. g. D iii.76; S i.117; ii.21, 244; iii.35, 73 sq.; iv.72; A iv.299. Cp. also A iv.435 (gaṇasmā v.). Vūpakāsa
Vūpakāsa
[formed fr. vūpakāseti] estrangement, aliena- tion, separation, seclusion; always as twofold: kāya˚ & citta˚ (of body & of mind), e. g. D iii.285 (Dial. iii.260 not correctly "serenity"); S v.67; A iv.152. Vūpakāseti
Vūpakāseti
[Caus. of vavakassati] to draw away, alienate, distract, exclude Vin iv.326; A v.72 sq. -- Caus. II. vūpakāsāpeti to cause to distract or draw away Vin i.49; iv.326. -- pp. vūpakaṭṭha. Vūparati
Vūparati
[vi+uparati] = uparati cessation DhsA 403. Vūpasanta
Vūpasanta
[pp. of vūpasammati] appeased, allayed, calmed S iv.217, 294; A i.4 (˚citta); iii.205; Sn 82; Pug 61 (˚citta); PvA 113. Vūpasama
Vūpasama
[fr. vi+upa+śam; cp. BSk. vyupaśama Divy 578] 1. allaying, relief, suppression, mastery, cessation, calmness S iii.32; iv.217; v.65 (cetaso); D ii.157 (sankhārā); A i.4 (id.); ii.162 (papañca˚); v.72; Pug 69; J i.392; DhsA 403. -- 2. quenching (of thirst) PvA 104. Vūpasamana
Vūpasamana
(nt.) [fr. vi+upa+śam; cp. BSk. vyupaśa- mana AvŚ ii.114] allayment, cessation J i.393; Miln 320; PvA 37, 98. Vūpasammati
Vūpasammati
[vi+upasammati] 1. to be assuaged or quieted S iv.215. -- 2. to be suppressed or removed J iii.334. -- 3. to be subdued or extinguished, to go out (of light) Ap. 35. -- pp. vūpasanta. -- Caus. vūpasāmeti to appease, allay, quiet, suppress, relieve S v.50: SnA 132 (reṇuŋ); PvA 20, 38 (sokaŋ), 200 Vūḷha
Vūḷha
see vuḷha. Ve
Ve1
(indecl.) [cp. Vedic vē, vai] part. of affirmation, em- phasizing the preceding word: indeed, truly Vin i.3 (etaŋ ve sukhaŋ); Dh 63 (sa ve bāḷo ti vuccati), 83 (sabbattha ve), 163 (yaŋ ve . . . taŋ ve); Sn 1050, 1075, 1082; DhA iii.155 ( = yeva). See also have. Ve
Ve2
may be enclitic form of tumhe, for the usual vo at Sn 333 ( = tumhākaŋ SnA 339). See P.T.S. ed. of Sn; cp. v. l. ve for vo at Sn 560 (here as particle!). Ve˚
Ve˚
is the guṇa (increment) form of vi˚, found in many secondary (mostly f. & nt. abstr.) derivations from words with vi˚, e. g. vekalla, vecikicchin, veneyya, vepulla, vematta, vevicchā, veramaṇī, which Bdhgh expls simply as "vi -- kārassa ve -- kāraŋ katvā veramaṇī" KhA 24. -> Cp. veyy˚. Vekaṭika
Vekaṭika
(adj.) [fr. vikaṭa] one addicted to dirt, living on dirty food D i.167; Miln 259 (doubled). Vekaṇḍa
Vekaṇḍa
[perhaps connected with vikaṇṇaka] a kind of arrow M i.429. Vekata
Vekata
(adj.) [ = vikata] changed VvA 10. Vekantaka
Vekantaka
(VbhA 63) is a kind of copper: see loha. Vekalla
Vekalla
(nt.) [fr. vikala] deficiency J v.400; Miln 107; Dhs 223; DhA ii.26 (anga˚ deformity), 79; iii.22; VvA 193; Sdhp 5, 17. -- As vekalya at KhA 187 (where contrasted to sākalya). -- jaṇṇū avekallaŋ karoti to keep one's knees straight Miln 418 (Kern, Toev. s. v. trsls "presses tightly together"). See also avekalla. Vekallatā & vekalyatā
Vekallatā
& vekalyatā (f.) [abstr. fr. vekalla] deficiency A iii.441 (a˚); Vism 350 (indriya˚); J i.45 (v. 254) (˚lya˚). Vekkhiya
Vekkhiya
is poetical for avekkhiya ( = avekkhitvā: see avekkhati) in appaṭivekkhiya not considering J iv.4. See the usual paccavekkhati. Vega
Vega
[cp. Vedic vega, fr. vij to tremble] quick motion, impulse, force; speed, velocity S iv.157; A iii.158 (sara˚); Sn 1074; Miln 202, 258, 391; PvA 11, 47 (vāta˚), 62 (visa˚), 67, 284 (kamma˚); Sdhp 295. -- instr. vegena (adv.) quickly DhA i.49; another form in same meaning is vegasā, after analogy of thāmasā, balasā etc., e. g. J iii.6; v. 117. -- Cp. saŋ˚. Vegha
Vegha
at D ii.100 (˚missakena, trsln Rh. D. "with the help of thongs") = S v.153 (T. reads vedha˚), & Th 1, 143 (˚missena, trsln "violence") may with Kern, Toev. s. v. be taken as veggha=viggha (Sk. vighna), i. e. obstacle, hindrance; cp. uparundhati Th 1, 143. It remains obscure & Kern's expln problematic. Cp. Dial. ii.107. Vecikicchin
Vecikicchin
(adj.) [fr. vicikicchā] doubting, doubtful A ii.174 (kankhin+); S iii.99 (id.); M i.18; Sn 510. Vecitta
Vecitta
(nt.) [fr. vi+citta2] confusion, disturbed state of mind Dhtp 460 (in defn of root muh) Vejja
Vejja
[fr. vid, *Sk. vaidya, but to Pāli etym. feeling fr. vijjā] a physician, doctor, medical man, surgeon J i.455; iii.142; KhA 21; SnA 274 (in simile); VvA 185, 322; DhA i.8; PvA 36, 86; Sdhp 279, 351. -- hatthi˚ elephantdoctor J vi.490; Mhvs 25, 34; visa˚ a physician who cures poison(ous bites) J i.310; iv.498.

-- kamma medical practice or treatment J ii.421; v.253; Vism 384; DhA iii.257, 351; iv.172. Vejjikā
Vejjikā
(f.) [fr. vejja?] medicine (?) Vin iii.185. Veṭha
Veṭha
[fr. viṣṭ, veṣṭ] wrap, in sīsa˚ head -- wrap, turban M i.244; S iv.56. Veṭhaka
Veṭhaka
(adj.) [fr. veṭheti] surrounding, enveloping D i.105 ("furbelow" see Dial. i.130); Mhvs 11, 14 (valayanguli˚). -- 647 -- Veṭhana
Veṭhana
(nt.) [fr. veṭheti, cp. Epic & Class. Sk. veṣṭhana] 1. surrounding, enveloping J vi.489. -- 2. a turban, head -- dress D i.126; A i.145; iii.380 (sīsa˚); J v.187; DhA iv.213; PvA 161. -- 3. wrapping, clothing, wrap, shawl J vi.12. -- Cp. pali˚. Veṭhita
Veṭhita
[pp. of veṭheti] enveloped, enclosed, surrounded, wrapped Sdhp 362. Cp. ni˚, pari˚. Veṭheti
Veṭheti
[Vedic veṣṭate, viṣṭ or veṣṭ, to Lat. virga, branch, lit. twisting] to twist round, envelope, wrap, surround J i.5, 422; Miln 282. -- Pass. veṭhiyati: see vi˚. -- pp. veṭhita. -- Cp. pali˚. Veṇa
Veṇa
[cp. *Sk. vaiṇa, dial.] 1. a worker in bamboo PvA 175. -- 2. a member of a low & despised class (cp. pukkusa) Vin iv.6; S i.93 (˚kula); A ii.85 (id.); iii.385; Pug 51; f. veṇī J v.306 ( = tacchikā C.); Pv iii.113 (read veṇī for veṇiŋ). Veṇi
Veṇi
(f.) [cp. Sk. veṇi] a braid of hair, plaited hair, hair twisted into a single braid A iii.295; Vin ii.266 (dussa˚); Th 2, 255; Vv 384 ( = kesa -- veṇi C.). fig. of a "string" of people D i.239 (andha˚). -- ˚kata plaited, having the hair plaited J ii.185; v.431. Veṇu
Veṇu
[cp. Vedic veṇu. Another P, form is veḷu (q. v.)] bamboo; occurs only in cpds., e. g. -- ˚gumba thicket of bamboo DhA i.177; -- ˚tinduka the tree Diospyros J v.405 ( = timbaru C.); -- ˚daṇḍaka jungle -- rope J iii.204; -- ˚bali a tax to be paid in bamboo (by bamboo workers) DhA i.177; ˚ -- vana bamboo forest J v.38. Vetaṇḍin
Vetaṇḍin
(adj.) [fr. vitaṇḍā] full of sophistry, skilled in vitaṇḍā Miln 90 (said of King Milinda). Vetana
Vetana
(nt.) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. vetana] wages, hire; payment, fee, remuneration; tip J i.194 (nivāsa˚ rent); Sn 24; VvA 141; DhA i.25; PvA 112. Most frequently combd with bhatta˚ (q. v.). As vedana at J iii.349. Vetabba
Vetabba
is grd. of *veti [vi] = vināti to weave (q, v.), thus "to be woven," or what is left to be woven J vi.26. -> inf. vetuŋ Vin ii.150. Vetasa
Vetasa
[Vedic vetasa] the ratan reed, Calamus rotang J v.167; SnA 451. Vetāla
Vetāla
at D i.6 (in the lists of forbidden crafts) refers to some magic art. The proper meaning of the word was already unknown when Bdhgh at DA i.84 explained it as "ghana -- tāḷaŋ" (cymbal beating) with remark "mantena mata -- sarīr' uṭṭhāpanan ti eke" (some take it to be raising the dead by magic charms). Rh. D. at Dial. i.8 translates "chanting of bards" (cp. vetālika). It is of dialectical origin. Vetālika
Vetālika
[dial.; cp. Epic & Class. Sk. vaitālika] a certain office or occupation at court connected with music or other entertainment, a bard. With other terms in list at Miln 331, some of them obscure and regional. Also at J vi.277, where expld as "vetālā [read vettāya?] uṭṭhāpake," i. e. those whose duty it is [by vetāla or vetta] to make (people] rise. The expln is obscure, the uṭṭhāpaka reminds of Bdhgh's uṭṭhāpana (under vetāla). Kern misunderstands the phrase by translating "chasing bards away." Veti
Veti
[vi+eti, of i; Sk. vyeti] to go away, disappear, wane S iii.135; A ii.51; J iii.154; DhsA 329. Cp. vyavayāti. Vetulla
Vetulla
(& vetulya) [cp. *Sk. vaitulya; also called vai- pulya, fr. vipula. The P. form is not clear; it probably rests on dial. trsln of a later term] a certain dissenting sect (see Mhvs. trsln 259, n. 2) in ˚vāda heretic doctrine Mhvs 36, 41; Dpvs 22, 45; -- ˚vādin an adherent of this doctrine. Vetta
Vetta
(nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. vetra] twig, rod; creeper; jungle- rope (cp. veṇu -- daṇḍa); cane (calamus). By itself only in standard list of punishments (tortures): vettehi tāḷeti to flog with canes, e. g. A i.47; ii.122; Miln 196. Otherwise freq. in cpds.:

-- agga cane -- top, sprout of bamboo (cp. kaḷīra) Vism 255 (where KhA in id. p. reads ˚ankura); VbhA 60, 239, 252. -- ankura a shoot of bamboo KhA 52, 67. -- āsana cane chair VvA 8. -- cāra (vettācāra) "stick -- wandering" (?) J iii.541 (+sankupatha; C.: vettehi sañcaritabba); Vv 8411 (vettācāraŋ sankupathañ ca maggaŋ, expld as vettalatā bandhitvā ācaritabba magga VvA 338); better as "jungle -- path." -- patha "a jungle full of sticks" (trsln Rh. D.) Miln 280 (+sankupatha), jungle -- path. -- bandhana binding with twigs (rope?), creeper -- bands S iii.155; v.51 = A iv.127. -- latā cane creeper J i.342; VvA 8, 338. -- valli garland of creeper Dāvs iii.40. Veda
Veda
[fr. vid, or more specifically ved as P. root] 1. (cp. vediyati & vedanā) (joyful) feeling, religious feeling, enthusiasm, awe, emotion, excitement (something like saŋvega) D ii.210 (˚paṭilābha+somanassa -- paṭilābha); M i.465 (uḷāra); Sn 1027 ( = pīti SnA 585); J ii.336; iii.266. attha -- veda+dhamma -- veda enthusiasm for the truth (for the letter & the spirit) of Buddha's teaching M i.37; A v.329 sq., 333, 349, 352; veda here interpreted as "somanassaŋ" at MA i.173. -- See also cpd. ˚jāta. -- 2. (cp. vedeti & vijjā) (higher) knowledge (as "Buddhist" antithesis to the authority of the "Veda"), insight, revelation, wisdom: that which Bdhgh at MA i.173 defines with "ñāṇa," and illustrates with vedagū of Sn 1059; or refers to at DA i.139 with defn "vidanti etenā ti vedo." Thus at Sn 529 & 792 (=vedā vuccanti catūsu maggesu ñāṇaŋ paññā Nd1 93), cp. SnA 403. -- As adj. veda Ep. of the Buddha "the knower" or the possessor of revelation, at M i.386. See also vedagū. -- 3. the Veda(s), the brahmanic canon of authorized religious teaching (revelation) & practice; otherwise given as "gantha" i. e. "text" at MA i.173, & illustrated with "tiṇṇaŋ vedānaŋ pāragū." The latter formula is frequent in stock phrase describing the accomplishments of a Brahmin, e. g. at D i.88; M ii.133; Sn 1019; A i.163; DhA iii.361. In the older texts only the 3 Vedas (irubbeda=Rg; yaju˚ & sāma˚) are referred to, whereas later (in the Commentaries) we find the 4 mentioned (athabbana added), e. g. the three at S iv.118; J i.168; ii.47; iii.537; Miln 10; Vism 384; the four at DA i.247; Miln 178. -- Unspecified (sg.): SnA 462. As adj. veda "knowing the Vedas" SnA 463 (ti˚), cp. tevijja. -- The Vedas in this connection are not often mentioned, they are almost identical with the Mantras (see manta) and are often (in Com.) mentioned either jointly with manta or promiscuously, e. g. Pv ii.613 (the Vedas with the 6 angas, i. e. vedāngas, called manta); SnA 293 (manta -- pāragū+veda -- pāragū), 322, 448.

-- antagu "one who has reached the end of knowledge," i. e. one who has obtained perfection in wisdom Vin i.3; Sn 463. -- gū one who has attained to highest knowledge (said of the Buddha). Thus different from "tiṇṇaŋ vedānaŋ pāragū," which is brahmanic. The expln of vedagū is "catūsu maggesu ñāṇaŋ" Nd2 612, & see above 2. -- S i.141, 168; iv.83, 206; A ii 6; iv.340; Sn 322, 458, 529, 749, 846, 947, 1049, 1060; Nd1 93, 204, 299, 431. A peculiar meaning of vedagū is that of "soul" (lit. attainer of wisdom) at Miln 54 & 71. -- jāta thrilled, filled with enthusiasm, overcome with awe, excited A ii.63; Sn 995, 1023; Kvu 554 = Vv 3427 (=jāta -- somanassa VvA 156); J i.11; Miln 297. -- pāragū one who excels in the knowledge of the Vedas, perfected in the Veda SnA 293; cp. above 3. -- bandhu one who is familiar with the Vedas SnA 192. Vedaka
Vedaka
(adj.) [fr. veda 3] knowing or studying the Vedas SnA 462 (brāhmaṇa). -- 648 -- Vedanaka
Vedanaka
(adj.) [fr. vedanā] having feeling, endowed with sensation Vbh 419 (a˚+asaññaka). Vedanā
Vedanā
(f.) [fr. ved˚: see vedeti; cp. Epic Sk. vedanā] feeling, sensation (see on term, e. g. Cpd. 14 Mrs. Rh. D. B. Psy., ch. iv.) D i.45; ii.58 (cp. Dial. ii.54), 66; iii.58, 77, 221, 228, 238 (˚upādāna); S iii.86 sq.; A i.39, 122, 141; ii.79, 198, 256; iii.245 sq., 450; iv.301, 385; Kh iii. (tisso v.); Sn 435, 529, 739, 1111; Nd1 109; Nd2 551 (tisso v.); Ps i.6, 50 sq., 145 sq., 153 sq.; ii.109 sq., 181 sq.; Vbh 135 sq., 294, 401, 403 sq.; Dhs 3, 1348; Nett 27, 65 sq.; 83, 123, 126; Tikp 246, 317 sq., 345 sq.; Vism 460 sq.; DA i.125; VbhA 13 sq., 39 sq., 80, 178, 193, 221 (˚ânupassanā, in detail), 263 sq., 382 (various). -- Three modes of feeling (usually understood whenever mention is made of "tisso vedanā"): sukhā (pleasant), dukkhā (painful) adukkha -- m -- asukhā (indifferent) D iii.275; S ii.53, 82; iv.207; A iii.400; It 46; Tikp 317 sq. -- or: kusalā, akusalā, avyākatā Vism 460. -- Five vedanās: sukhaŋ, dukkhaŋ, somanassaŋ, domanassaŋ, upekkhā Vism 461. Categories of 2 to 108 modes of Vedanā, S iv.223 sq. -- vedanā is one of the 5 khandhas (see khandha ii.B). -- On relation of old and new sensations (purāṇa˚>nava˚) see e. g. A ii.40; iii.388; iv.167; Vism 33; and see formula under yātrā. -- In the Paṭiccasamuppāda (q. v.) vedanā stands between phassa as condition and taṇhā as result; see e. g. Vism 567 sq. -- 2. (in special application) painful sensation, suffering, pain (i. e. dukkhavedanā) M i.59; A i.153 (sārīrikā bodily pain); ii.116 (id.); iii.143 (id.); Pv i.1015; Miln 253 (kāyikā & cetasikā); VbhA 101 (maraṇ' antikā v. agonies of death). -- vedan' aṭṭa afflicted by pain Vin ii.61; iii.100; J i.293. -- As adj. vedana suffering or to be suffered Pv iii.106 ( = anubhūyamāna PvA 214). -- vedana at J iii.349 is to be read as vetana. Vedayita
Vedayita
[pp. of vedeti] felt, experienced S i.112; ii.65; iii.46; A ii.198; iv.415; Vism 460. Vedalla
Vedalla
(nt.) [may be dialectical, obscure as to origin; Bdhgh refers it to Veda 1] Name of one of the 9 angas (see nava) or divisions of the Canon according to matter A ii.7, 103, 178; iii.88, 107, 361 sq.; iv.113; Vin iii.8; Pug 43; DhsA 26; DA i.24; PvA 22. The DhsA comprises under this anga the 2 suttas so -- called in M. (43, 44), the Sammādiṭṭhi, Sakkapañha, Sankhārābhājaniya, Mahāpuṇṇama etc. Suttas, as catechetical DhsA 26 = DA i.24. --

Note. The 2nd part of the word looks like a distortion fr. ariya (cp. mahalla> mah' ariya). Or might it be = vedanga? Vedi
Vedi
& Vedī (f.) [Vedic vedi sacrificial bench] ledge, cornice, rail Mhvs 32, 5; 35, 2; 36, 52 (pāsāṇa˚); 36, 103; Vv 8416 ( = vedikā VvA 346). -- See on term Dial. ii.210; Mhvs. tsrln 220, 296. Cp. vedikā & velli. Vedikā
Vedikā
(f.) (& vediyā) [fr. vedi] cornice, ledge, railing D ii.179; Vin ii.120; J iv.229, 266; Vv 786 (vediyā = vedikā VvA 304); 8416 (=vedikā VvA 340); VvA 275. Vedita
Vedita
[pp. of vedeti] experienced, felt S iv.205 (sukha & dukkha) = Sn 738. Vedisa
Vedisa
[fr. vidisā?] N. of a tree J v.405; vi.550. Vedeti
Vedeti
[Vedic vedayati; Denom. or Caus. fr. vid to know or feel] "to sense," usually in Denom. function (only one Caus. meaning: see aor. avedi); meaning twofold: either intellectually "to know" (cp. veda), or with ref. to general feeling "to experience" (cp. vedanā). -> For the present tense two bases are to be distinguished, viz. ved˚, used in both meanings; and vediy˚ ( = *vedy˚), a specific Pāli formation after the manner of the 4th (y) class of Sk. verbs, used only in meaning of "experience." Thus vedeti: (a) to know (as=acc., equal to "to call") Sn 211 sq. (taŋ muniŋ vedayanti); (b) to feel, to experience S iv.68 (phuṭṭho vedeti, ceteti, sañjānāti); M i.37; Pv iv.150 (dukkhaŋ= anubhavati PvA 241). -- vediyati: to feel, to experience a sensation or feeling (usually with vedanaŋ or pl. vedanā) M i.59; ii.70 (also Pot. vediyeyya); S ii.82; iii.86 sq.; iv.207; A i.141; ii.198 (also ppr. vediyamāna); J ii.241; Miln 253. -- aor. avedi he knew, recognized J iii.420 (=aññāsi C.); he made known, i. e. informed J iv.35 (=jānāpesi C.); vedi (recognized, knew) Sn 643, 647, 1148 (=aññāsi aphusi paṭivijjhi Nd2 613); & vedayi Sn 251 (=aññāsi SnA 293). -- Fut. vedissati (shall experience) Pv i.1015 (dukkhaŋ vedanaŋ v.). -- grd. vediya (to be known) Sn 474 (para˚ diṭṭhi held as view by others; expld as "ñāpetabba" SnA 410); vedanīya: (a) to be known, intelligible, comprehensible D i.12; (dhammā nipuṇā . . . paṇḍita -- vedanīyā); ii.36; M i.487; ii.220; (b) to be experienced S iv.114 (sukha˚ & dukkha˚); A i.249 (diṭṭhadhamma˚); iv.382; Pv ii.117 (sukha˚ -- kamma= sukha -- vipāka PvA 150); iii.37 (kamma); iv.129 (of kamma -- vipāka=anubhavana -- yogga PvA 228); PvA 145 (kamma); & veditabba to be understood or known D i.186; PvA 71, 92, 104. -- pp. vedita & vedayita. Vedeha
Vedeha
[ = Npl. Vedeha] lit. from the Videha country; wise (see connection between Vedeha & ved, vedeti at DA i.139, resting on popular etymology) S ii.215 sq. (˚muni, of Ānanda; expld as "vedeha -- muni=paṇḍitamuni," cp. K.S. i.321; trsln K.S. ii.145 "the learned sage"); Mhvs 3, 36 (same phrase; trsln "the sage of the Videha country"); Ap 7 (id.). Vedha
Vedha
[adj. -- n.) [fr. vidh = vyadh, cp. vyādha] 1. piercing, pricking, hitting A ii.114 sq. (where it is said of a horse receiving pricks on var. parts, viz. on its hair: loma˚; its flesh: maŋsa˚; its bone: aṭṭhi˚). -- avedha [to vyath!] not to be shaken or disturbed, imperturbable Sn 322 (=akampana -- sabhāva SnA 331). -- 2. a wound J ii.274 sq. -- 3. a flaw Miln 119. -- Cp. ubbedha. Vedhati
Vedhati
[for *vethati = vyathati, of vyath] to tremble, quiver, quake, shake S v.402; Th 1, 651; 2, 237 (˚amāna); Sn 899, 902 (Pot. vedheyya); Nd1 312, 467; J ii.191 (kampati+); Miln 254 (+calati); VvA 76 (vedhamānena sarīrena); DhA ii.249 (Pass. vedhiyamāna trembling; v. l. pa˚). Cp. vyadhati, ubbedhati & pavedhati. Vedhana
Vedhana
(nt.) [fr. vidh to pierce] piercing J iv.29; DA i.221. Vedhabba
Vedhabba
(nt.) [abstr. fr. vidhavā, = Epic Sk. vaidhavya] widowhood J vi.508. Vedhavera
Vedhavera
[for *Sk. vaidhaveya, fr. vidhavā] son of a widow; in two diff. passages of the Jātaka, both times characterized as sukka -- cchavī vedhaverā "sons of widows, with white skins," and at both places misunderstood (or unintelligibly expld) by the Cy., viz. J iv.184 (+thulla -- bāhū; C.: vidhavā apatikā tehi vidhavā sarantī ti [ti]vidha -- verā ca vedhaverā); vi.508 (C.: vidhav' itthakā; v. l. vidhav -- ittikāmā purisā). Vedhitā
Vedhitā
(f.) [pp. of vedheti, Caus. of vijjhati] shooting, hitting J vi.448. Vedhin
Vedhin
(adj.) [fr. vidh = vyadh] piercing, shooting, hitting: see akkhaṇa˚. Venateyya
Venateyya
[fr. vinata] descended from Vinatā, Ep. of a garuḷa Ps ii.196; J vi.260; Dāvs iv.45. Venayika
Venayika1
[fr. vi 3+naya] a nihilist. The Buddha was accused of being a v. M i.140. Venayika
Venayika2
(adj.) [fr. vinaya] versed in the Vinaya Vin i.235; iii.3 (cp. Vin A i.135); M i.140; A iv.175, 182 sq.; v.190; Miln 341. Veneyya
Veneyya
(adj.) [ = vineyya, grd. of vineti; cp. BSk. vaineya Divy 36, 202 & passim] to be instructed, accessible to instruction, tractable, ready to receive the teaching (of the Buddha). The term is late (Jātaka style & Com.) J i.182 (Buddha˚), 504; SnA 169, 510; DhA i.26; VbhA 79; VvA 217; ThA 69 (Ap. v. 10). Cp. buddha˚. -- 649 -- Veneyyatta
Veneyyatta
(nt.) [fr. veneyya] tractableness Nett 99. Vepakka
Vepakka
(nt.) [fr. vipakka] ripening, ripeness, maturity. - (adj.) yielding fruit, resulting in ( -- ˚) A i.223 (kāmadhātu˚ kamma); iii.416 (sammoha˚ dukkha); Sn 537 (dukkha˚ kamma). Vepurisikā
Vepurisikā
(f.) [vi+purisa+aka] a woman resembling a man (sexually), a man -- like woman, androgyn Vin ii.271; iii.129. Vepulla
Vepulla
(nt.) [fr. vipula] full development, abundance, plenty, fullness D iii.70, 221, 285; S iii.53; A i.94 (āmisa˚, dhamma˚); iii.8, 404; v.152 sq., 350 sq.; Miln 33, 251; Vism 212 (saddhā˚, sati˚, paññā˚, puñña˚), 619; DhA i.262 (sati˚); VbhA 290. -- Often in phrase vuḍḍhi virūḷhi vepulla (see vuḍḍhi), e. g. Vin i.60; It 113. Cp. vetulla. Vepullatā
Vepullatā
(f.) [abstr. formation fr. vepulla] = vepulla; A ii.144 (rāga˚, dosa˚, moha˚); Ap 26, 39; Miln 252. As vepullataŋ (nt.) at A iii.432. Vebhanga
Vebhanga
[fr. vibhanga] futility, failure J iv.451 (opp. sampatti; expld as vipatti C.). Vebhangika
Vebhangika
(& ˚iya) (adj.) see a˚. Vebhavya
Vebhavya
(& ˚ā) (nt. & f.) [fr. vibhāvin] thinking over, criticism Dhs 16; Ps i.119; Pug 25; Nett 76. Vebhassi
Vebhassi
(f.) = vibhassikatā, i. e. gossiping Vin iv.241. Vebhūtika
Vebhūtika
(& ˚ya) (adj. -- nt.) [fr. vibhūti 1] causing disaster or ruin; nt. calumnious speech, bad language D iii.106 (˚ya); Sn 158 (˚ya); Vv 8440 (˚ka; expld as "sahitānaŋ vinābhāva -- karaṇato vebhūtikaŋ," i. e. pisuṇaŋ VvA 347). Vema
Vema
(nt.) [fr. vāyati2, cp. Sk. veman (nt.); Lat. vimen] loom or shuttle DhA iii.175; SnA 268. Vemaka
Vemaka
(nt.) = vema Vin ii.135. Vemajjha
Vemajjha
(nt.) [fr. vi+majjha] middle, centre J iv.250; vi.485; Pug 16, 17; Vism 182 (˚bhāga central part); VvA 241, 277. -- loc. vemajjhe: (a) in the present, or central interval of saŋsāra Sn 849 (cp. Nd1 213 and majjha 3 b); (b) in two, asunder Vism 178. Vematika
Vematika
(adj.) [fr. vimati] in doubt, uncertain, doubtful Vin i.126; ii.65; iv.220, 259; Vism 14 (˚sīla). Opp. nibbematika. Vematta
Vematta
(nt.) [fr. vi+matta1] difference, distinction Miln 410; Vism 195. Vemattatā
Vemattatā
(f.) [abstr. formation fr. vematta] difference, distinction, discrepancy, disproportion(ateness) M i.453, 494; S ii.21; iii.101; v.200; A iii.410 sq.; Sn p.102 (puggala˚); Nett 4, 72 sq., 107 sq.; Miln 284, 285. -> The 8 differences of the var. Buddhas are given at SnA 407 sq. as addhāna˚, āyu˚, kula˚, pamāṇa˚, nekkhamma˚, padhāna˚, bodhi˚, raŋsi˚. Vemātika
Vemātika
(adj.) [vi+˚mātika] having a different mother J iv.105 (˚bhāginī); vi.134 (˚bhātaro); PvA 19. Vemānika
Vemānika
(adj.) [fr. vimāna1] having a fairy palace (see vimāna 3) J v.2; DhA iii.192. Veyy˚
Veyy˚
is a (purely phonetic) diaeretic form of vy˚, for which viy˚ & veyy˚ are used indiscriminately. There is as little difference between viy˚ & veyy˚ as between vi˚ & ve˚ in those cases where (double, as it were) abstract nouns are formed from words with ve˚ (vepullatā, vemattatā, etc.), which shows that ve˚ was simply felt as vi˚. Cp. the use of e for i (esp. before y) in cases like alabbhaneyya>˚iya; addhaneyya>˚iya; pesuṇeyya>˚iya, without any difference in meaning. Veyyaggha
Veyyaggha
(adj.) [fr. vyaggha] belonging to a tiger Dh 295 (here simply = vyaggha. i. e. with a tiger as fifth; veyya˚=vya˚ metri causâ; Bdhgh's expln at DhA iii.455 is forced). -- (m). a car covered with a tiger's skin J v.259, cp. 377. Veyyagghin=veyyaggha
Veyyagghin
= veyyaggha (adj.) J iv.347. Veyyañjanika
Veyyañjanika
[ = vyañjanika] one who knows the signs, a fortune -- teller, soothsayer J v.233, 235. -- The BSk. equivalent is vaipañcanika (MVastu i.207) etc.: see under vipañcita, which may have to be derived (as viyañcita= viyañjita) from vi+añj=vyañjana. See also Kern. Toev. p. 19. Veyyatta
Veyyatta
= viyatta, i. e. accomplished, clever J v.258. Veyyatti
Veyyatti
(f.) [ = viyatti] distinction, cleverness, accom- plishment J v.258; vi.305. Veyyattiya
Veyyattiya
(nt.) [abstr. form (˚ya = ˚ka) fr. veyyatti= viyatti] distinction, lucidity; accomplishment D iii.38 (paññā˚ in wisdom); M i.82, 175; ii.209. Veyyākaraṇa
Veyyākaraṇa
(m. nt.) [ = vyākaraṇa] 1. (nt.) answer, ex- planation, exposition D i.46, 51, 105, 223; ii.202; A iii.125; v.50 sq.; Sn 352, 510, 1127; Pug 43, 50; Miln 347; DA i.247. -- 2. (m.) one who is expert in explanation or answer, a grammarian D i.88; A iii.125; Sn 595; Miln 236; SnA 447. Veyyābādhika
Veyyābādhika
(adj.) [ = vyābādhika] causing injury or oppression, oppressive, annoying (of pains) M i.10; A iii.388; Vism 35 (expld diff. by Bdhgh as "vyābādhato uppannattā veyyābādhikā"). Veyyāyika
Veyyāyika
(nt.) [fr. vyaya] money to defray expenses, means Vin ii.157. Veyyāvacca
Veyyāvacca
(nt.) [corresponds to (although doubtful in what relation) Sk. *vaiyā -- pṛtya, abstr. fr. vyāpṛta active, busy (to pṛ, pṛṇoti) = P. vyāvaṭa; it was later retranslated into BSk. as vaiyāvṛtya (as if vi+ā+vṛt); e. g. Divy 54, 347; MVastu i.298] service, attention, rendering a service; work, labour, commission, duty Vin i.23; A iii.41; J i.12 (kāya˚); vi.154; SnA 466; VvA 94; ThA 253. -- ˚kamma doing service, work J iii.422; -- ˚kara servant, agent, (f.) housekeeper J iii.327; VvA 349; ˚ -- kārikā (f.) id. PvA 65. -- Cp. vyappatha. Veyyāvaṭika
Veyyāvaṭika
(nt.) [doublet of veyyāvacca; ˚ka = ˚ya] service, waiting on, attention Sn p. 104 (kāya˚); J iv.463; vi.154, 418, 503 (dāna˚); DhA i.27 (kāya˚); iii.19 (dāna˚); Dpvs vi.61. Vera
Vera
(nt.) [cp. Sk. vaira, der. fr. vīra] hatred, revenge, hostile action, sin A iv.247; Dh 5; J iv.71; DhA i.50.; PvA 13. -- avera absence of enmity, friendliness; (adj.) friendly, peaceable, kind D i.167, 247 (sa˚ & a˚), 251; S iv.296; A iv.246; Sn 150. The pañca bhayāni verāni (or vera -- bhayā) or pañca verā (Vbh 378) "the fivefold guilty dread" are the fears connected with sins against the 5 first commandments (sīlāni); see S ii.68; A iii.204 sq.; iv.405 sq.; v.182; It 57 = Sn 167 (vera -- bhay'atīta). Veraka=vera; a˚
Veraka
= vera; a˚ Pv iv.138. See also verika. Verajja
Verajja
(nt.) [fr. vi+rajja] a variety of kingdoms or provinces S iii.6 (nānā˚ -- gata bhikkhu a bh. who has travelled much). -- 650 -- Verajjaka
Verajjaka
(adj.) [fr. verajja] belonging to var. kingdoms or provinces, coming from various countries (nānā˚); living in a different country, foreign, alien D i.113; M ii.165 (brāhmaṇā); A iii.263 (bhikkhū); Th 1, 1037; Vv 8412 ( = videsa -- vasika VvA 338); Miln 359. Veramaṇī
Veramaṇī
(f.) [fr. viramaṇa; cp. the odd form BSk. vīramaṇī, e. g. Jtm. 213] abstaining from ( -- ˚), absti nence A ii.217, 253; v.252 sq., 304 sq.; Sn 291; Pug 39, 43; Vism 11; KhA 24; DhA i.235, 305. Veramba
Veramba
(& ˚bha) (adj.) [etym.? Probably dialectical, i. e. regional] attribute of the wind (vāta or pl. vātā), a wind blowing in high altitudes [cp. BSk. vairambhaka Divy 90] S ii.231; A i.137; Th i.597; J iii.255, 484; vi.326; Nd2 562; VbhA 71. Verika
Verika
= vera i. e, inimical; enemy (cp. veraka) J v.229, 505; Vism 48. Verin
Verin
(adj.) [fr. vera] bearing hostility, inimical, revenge- ful J iii.177; Pv iv.325 ( = veravanto PvA 252); Miln 196; Vism 296 (˚puggala), 326 (˚purisa, in simile), 512 (in sim.); VbhA 89. -- Neg. averin Dh 197, 258. Verocana
Verocana
[ = virocana, fr virocati] the sun (lit. "shining forth") S i.51; A ii.50. Velā
Velā
(f.) [Vedic velā in meaning 1; Ep. Sk. in meanings 2 & 3] -- 1. time, point of time (often equal to kāla) Pug 13 (uḍḍahana˚); J iv.294; Miln 87; KhA 181; PugA 187; SnA 111 (bhatta˚ meal -- time); DhsA 219; PvA 61, 104, 109 (aruṇ' uggamana˚), 129, 155; VvA 165 (paccūsa˚ in the early morning). -- 2. shore, sea -- shore Vin ii.237 = A iv.198; J i.212; Mhvs 19, 30. -- 3. limit, boundary A v.250 (between v. & agyāgāra); Th 1, 762; Miln 358; DhsA 219; in spec. sense as "measure," restriction, control (of character, sīla -- velā) at Dhs 299 ("not to trespass" trsln), and in dogmatic exegesis of ativelaŋ at Nd1 504; cp. Nd2 462 & DhsA 219. -- 4. heap, multitude (?) DhsA 219 (in Npl. Uruvelā which is however *Uruvilvā). Velāmika
Velāmika
(adj.) [velāma+ika, the word velāma probably a district word] "belonging to Velāma," at D ii.198 used as a clan -- name (f. Velāmikānī), with vv. ll. Vessinī & Vessāyinī (cp. Velāma Np. combd with Vessantara at VbhA 414), and at D ii.333 classed with khujjā, vāmanikā & komārikā (trsln "maidens"; Bdhgh: "very young & childish": see Dial. ii.359); v. l. celāvikā. They are some sort of servants, esp. in demand for a noble's retinue. See also Np. Velāma (the V.-> sutta at J i.228 sq.). Velāyati
Velāyati
[Denom. fr. velā] to destroy (?) DhsA 219 (cp. Expos. ii.297); expld by viddhaŋseti. More appropriate would be a meaning like "control," bound, restrict. Vellāḷin
Vellāḷin
(adj.) [Is it a corruption fr. *veyyāyin = *vyāyin?] flashing (of swords) J vi.449. Velli
Velli
[dial.?] is a word peculiar to the Jātaka. At one passage it is expld by the Commentary as "vedi" (i. e. rail, cornice), where it is applied to the slender waist of a woman (cp. vilāka & vilaggita): J vi.456. At most of the other passages it is expld as "a heap of gold": thus at J v.506 (verse: velli -- vilāka -- majjhā; C.: "ettha vellī ti rāsi vilākamajjhā ti vilagga -- majjhā uttattaghana -- suvaṇṇa -- rāsi -- ppabhā c' eva tanu -- dīgha -- majjhā ca"), and vi.269 (verse: kañcana -- velli -- viggaha; C.: "suvaṇṇa -- rāsi -- sassirīka -- sarīrā"). At v.398 in the same passage as vi.269 expld in C. as "kañcana -- rūpakasadisa -- sarīrā"). The idea of "golden" is connected with it throughout. Vellita
Vellita
(adj.) [pp. of vellati, vell to stagger, cp. paṭivellati] crooked, bent; (of hair:) curly PvA 189. It is only used with ref. to hair.

-- agga with bending (or crooked) tip (of hair), i. e. curled Th 2, 252 (cp. ThA 209); J v.203 ( = kuñcit' agga C.); vi.86 (sun -- agga -- vellita); PvA 46, 142. -- Cp. kuñcita -- kesa J i.89. Veḷu
Veḷu
[ = veṇu, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 433 & Prk. veḷu: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 243] a bamboo A ii.73; Vin iv.35; J iv.382 (daṇḍa˚); v.71; Vism 1, 17; SnA 76 (= vaŋsa); VbhA 334.

-- agga (veḷagga) the top of a bamboo Vin ii.110. -- gumba a bamboo thicket SnA 49, 75. -- daṇḍa a bamboo stick SnA 330. -- dāna a gift of bamboo Vbh 246; Miln 369; SnA 311; KhA 236; VbhA 333. -- nāḷi (˚nalaka, ˚nāḷika) a stalk or shaft of bamboo Vism 260; KhA 52; ThA 212. -- pabba a stalk or section of the b. J i.245; Vism 358 = VbhA 63. Veḷuka
Veḷuka
[fr. veḷu] a kind of tree J v.405 ( = vaŋsa -- coraka). Veḷuriya
Veḷuriya
(nt.) [cp. dial. Sk. vaiḍūrya] a precious stone, lapis lazuli; cp. the same word "beryl" (with metathesis r>l; not fr. the Sk. form), which the Greeks brought to Europe from India. -- D i.76; Vin ii.112; S i.64; A i.215; iv.199, 203 sq.; J iii.437; Pv ii.75; Mhvs 11, 16; DhA ii.220. Often in descriptions of Vimānas, e. g. Vv 21; 121; 171; cp. VvA 27, 60. -- Probably through a word -- play with veḷu (bamboo; popular etymology) it is said to have the colour of bamboo: see vaŋsa -- rāga & vaŋsa -- vaṇṇa. At J i.207 a peacock's neck is described as having the colour of the veḷuriya. At Miln 267 (in inventory of "loka") we have the foll. enumeration of precious stones: pavāḷa coral, lohitanka ruby, masāragalla cat's eye, veḷuriya lapis lazuli, vajira diamend. See also under ratana1. Veḷuva
Veḷuva
[cp. Vedic vainava (made of cane)?] probably not to veḷu, but another spelling for beḷuva, in ˚laṭṭhikā S iii.91, as sometimes v. l. veḷuva for beḷuva (q. v.). Vevacana
Vevacana
(nt.) [fr. vivacana] attribute, epithet; synonym Nett 1 sq., 24, 53 sq., 82, 106; Vism 427; SnA 24, 447. Cp. adhivacana. Vevaṇṇa
Vevaṇṇa
(nt.) [fr. vivaṇṇa] discolouring ThA 85 (Ap. v. 42). Vevaṇṇiya
Vevaṇṇiya
(nt.) [abstr. fr. vivaṇṇa] 1. state of having no caste, life of an outcast A v.87≈200. [Cp. BSk. vaivarṇika outcast Divy 424]. -- 2. discolouring, fading, waning J iii.394. Vevāhika
Vevāhika
[fr. vivāha] wedding -- guest J ii.420. Veviccha
Veviccha
(nt.) [abstr. formation fr. vivicchā] "multi- farious wants," greediness, selfishness, avarice Sn 941 ( = pañca macchariyāni Nd1 422, as at Nd2 614), 1033 (where Nett 11 reads vivicchā); Pug 19, 23; Dhs 1059, 1122; Nd2 s. v. taṇhā; DhsA 366, 375. Vesa
Vesa
[cp. Sk. veṣa, fr. viṣ to be active] dress, apparel; (more frequently:) disguise, (assumed) appearance J i.146 (pakati˚ usual dress), 230 (āyuttaka˚); iii.418 (andha˚); Miln 12; DhA ii.4; PvA 62, 93 (ummattaka˚), 161 (tunnavāya˚); Sdhp 384; purisa˚ (of women) DA i.147. Vesama
Vesama
= visama VvA 10. Vesākha
Vesākha
[cp. Vedic vaiśākha] N. of a month (April -- May) Mhvs 1, 73; 29, 1. Vesārajja
Vesārajja
(nt.) [abstr. formation fr. visārada, i. e. *vaiśā- radya] (the Buddha's or an Arahant's) perfect selfconfidence (which is of 4 kinds), self -- satisfaction, subject of confidence. The four are given in full at M i.71 sq., viz. highest knowledge, khīṇāsava state, recognition of the obstacles, recognition & preaching of the way to salvation. See also D i.110; J ii.27; A ii.13; iii.297 sq.; iv.83, 210, 213; M i.380; Ps ii.194; Nd2 466b; DhA i 86; DA i.278; KhA 104; VvA 213; Sdhp 593. Vesiyāna
Vesiyāna
[ = vessa, with ˚na as in gimhāna, vassāna etc.] a Vaiśya (Vessa) J vi.15, 21, 328, 490, 492. As vessāyana at Sn 455 (where vesiyāna is required). Vesī & Vesiyā
Vesī
& Vesiyā (f.) [the f. of vessa] a woman of low caste, a harlot, prostitute. -- (a) vesī: Vin iii.138; J v.425; in cpd. vesi -- dvāra a pleasure house Th 2, 73. -- (b) vesiyā: Vin iv.278; Sn 108; Vbh 247; in cpd. vesiyā -- gocara asking alms from a prostitute's house DhA iii.275; DhsA 151; VbhA 339. -- 651 -- Vesma
Vesma
(nt.) [Vedic veśman, fr. viś to enter: see visati] a house J v.84. A trace of the n -- stem in loc. vesmani J v.60. Vessa
Vessa
[cp. Vedic vaiśya, a dial. (local) word] a Vaiśya, i. e. a member of the third social (i. e. lower) grade (see vaṇṇa 6), a man of the people D iii.81, 95 (origin); S i.102, 166; iv.219; v.51; A i.162; ii.194; iii.214, 242; Vbh 394; DA i.254 (origin). -- f. vesī (q. v.); vessī (as a member of that caste) D i.193; A iii.226, 229. Vessikā
Vessikā
(f.) [fr. vessa] a Vaiśya woman Sn 314. Vehāyasa = vihāyasa
Vehāyasa
= vihāyasa, i. e. air, sky; only used in acc. vehāyasaŋ in function of a loc. (cp. VvA 182: vehāyasaŋ=vehāyasa -- bhūte hatthi -- piṭṭhe), combd with ṭhita (standing in the air) Vv 41; Mhvs 1, 24; PvA 14. Vehāsa
Vehāsa
[contraction of vehāyasa] the air, sky, heaven; only in the two cases (both used as loc. "in the air"): acc. vehāsaŋ D iii.27; S v.283; Vin iii.105; VvA 78; & loc. vehāse Vin i.320.

-- kuṭī "air hut" i. e. airy room, "a hut in which a middle -- sized man can stand without knocking his head against the ceiling" (expln) Vin iv.46. -- gamana going through the air Vism 382; Dhtm 586. -- ṭṭha standing in the air D i.115; DA i.284. -- ṭṭhita id. D i.95. Vehāsaya
Vehāsaya
[ = vehāyasa with metathesis y>s] occurs only in acc. (=loc.) vehāsayaŋ, equal to vihāyasaŋ at J iv.471. Vo
Vo1
(indecl.) a particle of emphasis, perhaps = eva, or =vo2 (as dative of interest). The Commentaries explain it as "nipāta," i. e. particle. Thus at Sn 560, 760. Vo
Vo2
[cp. Vedic vaḥ, Av. vō, Lat. vos, Gr. u)/mme] is enclitic form of tumhe (see under tuvaŋ), i. e. to you, of you; but it is generally interpreted by the C. as "nipāta," i. e. particle (of emphasis or exclamation; i. e. vo1). Thus e. g. at Pv i.53 (cp. PvA 26). Vo˚
Vo˚
is commonly regarded as the prefix combn vi+ava˚ (i. e. vi+o˚), but in many cases it simply represents ava˚ ( = o˚) with v as euphonic ("vorschlag"), as in vonata (=onata), voloketi, vokkanti, vokiṇṇa, voropeti, vosāpeti, vosāna, vossagga. In a few cases it corresponds to vi+ud˚, as in vokkamati, vocchijjati, voyoga. Vokāra
Vokāra
[v(i)+okāra; cp. vikāra] 1. difference Sn 611. - 2. constituent of being (i. e. the khandhas), usually as eka˚, catu˚ & pañca˚ -- bhava, e. g. Kvu 261; Vbh 137; Tikp 32, 36 sq.; Vism 572; KhA 245; SnA 19, 158. In this meaning vokāra is peculiar to the Abhidhamma and is almost synonymous with vikāra 4, and in the Yamaka with khandha, e. g. pañca v., catu v. etc. -> 3. worthless thing, trifle S ii.29. -- 4. inconvenience, disadvantage (cp. vikāra 3) PvA 12 (line 1 read: anek' ākāra -- vokāraŋ). Vokiṇṇa
Vokiṇṇa
(adj.) [v(i)+okiṇṇa] covered with, drenched (with); mixed up, full of (instr.) M i.390; S ii.29; A i.123, 148; ii.232; J i.110; DhsA 69. -- Cp. abbokiṇṇa. Vokiṇṇaka
Vokiṇṇaka
(adj.) [vokiṇṇa+ka] mixed up Miln 300 (kapi- niddā -- pareto vokiṇṇakaŋ jaggati a person with light sleep, so -- called "monkey -- doze," lies confusedly awake, i. e. is half asleep, half awake). Rh. D. not quite to the point: "a man still guards his scattered thoughts." Vokkanta
Vokkanta
[pp. of vokkamati] deviated from (abl.) It 36. Vokkanti
Vokkanti
(f.) [v(i)+akkanti] descent (into the womb), conception Th 1, 790. Vokkamati
Vokkamati
[vi+ukkamati] to turn aside, deviate from (abl.); mostly in ger. vokkamma Vin ii.213; D i.230; M iii.117; S iv.117; Sn 946; J i.23; Vism 18. -- pp. vokkanta. Vokkamana
Vokkamana
(nt.) [fr. vokkamati] turning aside, deviation fr. (abl.) M i.14; A i.243. Vokkha
Vokkha
(adj) [? doubtful reading] is at J iii.21 given as syn. of vaggu (q. v.). Vocarita
Vocarita
[pp. of vi+ocarati] penetrated (into conscious- ness), investigated, apperceived M i.478; A iv.363 ( = manodvāre samudācāra -- ppatta). Vocchādanā
Vocchādanā
(f.) [fr. vi+ava+chad] covering up (entirely) VbhA 493. Vocchijjati
Vocchijjati
[vi+ud+chijjati, Pass. of chid] to be cut off S iii.53 (so read). -- pp. neg. abbocchinna: see abbhocchinna. ( = *avyucch˚). Votthapana
Votthapana
(& ˚ṭṭhapana) (nt.) [ = vavatth˚] establishing, synthesis, determination, a momentary stage in the unit called percept (cp. Cpd. 29), always with ˚kicca (or ˚kiriyā) "accomplishing the function of determination" Vism 21; DhsA 401; DA i.194 (v. l. voṭṭhabb˚); Tikp 276 (˚kiriyā). Votthāpeti
Votthāpeti
[ = vavatthāpeti] to establish, put up, arrange J vi.583. Vodaka
Vodaka
(adj.) [vi+odaka = udaka] free from water Vin ii.113. Vodapeti
Vodapeti
(or ˚dāpeti) [Caus. of vodāyati] to cleanse, purify DhA ii.162. Vodāta
Vodāta
(adj.) [vi+odāta, cp. vīvadāta] clean, pure M i.319. Vodāna
Vodāna
(nt.) [fr. vi+ava+dā4 to clean, cp. BSk. vyava- dāna Divy 616; AvŚ ii.188] 1. cleansing, getting bright (of sun & moon) D i.10 ( = visuddhatā DA i.95). -- 2. purity (from the kilesas, or stains of sin), purification, sanctification M i.115 (opp. sankilesa); S iii.151 (citta˚, adj.; opp. citta -- sankilesa); A iii.418 sq.; v.34; Ps i.166; Vbh 343; Nett 96, 100, 125 sq.; Vism 51 sq., 89; VbhA 401; DhA iii.405. Vodāniya
Vodāniya
(adj.) [grd. formn from vodāna] apt to purify, purifying D i.195; iii.57. Opp. sankilesika. Vodāpana
Vodāpana
(nt.) [fr. vodapeti] cleansing, purification DhA iii.237 ( = pariyodapana). Vodāya
Vodāya
at J iv.184 appears to be a misreading for codāya (ger. from codeti) in meaning iṇaŋ codeti to undertake a loan, to lend money at interest ( = vaḍḍhiyā inaŋ payojetvā C.), to demand payment for a loan. The v. l. at all places is codāya (=codetvā). See codeti. Vodāyati
Vodāyati
[vi+ava+dā4 to clean] to become clean or clear, to be purified or cleansed A v.169 (fig. saddhammassa), 317 (id.; expld by C. as "vodānaŋ gacchati"); J ii.418 (of a precious stone). Vodāsa
Vodāsa
[?] only at D iii.43 in phrase ˚ŋ āpajjati in meaning of "making a distinction," being particular (about food: bhojanesu), having a dainty appetite; expld by "dve bhāge karoti" Bdhgh. It seems to stand for vokāra, unless we take it to be a misspelling for vodāya "cutting off," fr. vi+ava+dā, thus "separating the food" (?): Suggestive also is the likeness with vosānaŋ āpajjati. Vodiṭṭha
Vodiṭṭha
[pp. of vi+ava+diś, cp. odissa & the BSk. vyapadeśa pretext Divy 435] defined, fully understood, recognized M i.478; A iv.363 ( = suṭṭhu diṭṭha C.). Vonata
Vonata
(adj.) [v(i)+onata] bent down Th 1, 662. -- 652 -- Vopeti
Vopeti
at DA i.277 (avopetvā) is to be read with v. l. as copeti, i. e. shake, move, disturb, violate (a rule). Vobhindati
Vobhindati
[vi+ava+bhindati] to split; ppr. ˚anto (fig.) hair -- splitting D i.162; M i.176; aor. vobhindi (lit.) to break, split (one's head, sīsaŋ) M i.336. Vomādapeti
Vomādapeti
at DA i.300 is to be read as vodāpeti (cleanse, purify); v. l. BB vodāpeti; SS cāmā[dā]peti, i. e. to cause to be rinsed, cleanse. Vomissa(ka)
Vomissa(ka)
(adj.) [v(i)+omissa(ka)] miscellaneous, various Vism 87 (˚katā), 88 (˚ka), 104 (˚carita). Voyoga
Voyoga
[vi+uyyoga in sense of uyyutta?] effort (?), application KhA 243. Reading doubtful. Voropana
Voropana
(nt.) [abstr. fr. voropeti] depriving (jīvita˚ of life) J i.99. Voropeti
Voropeti
[ = oropeti] to deprive of (abl.), to take away; only in phrase jīvitā voropeti [which shows that -- v -- is purely euphonic] to deprive of life, to kill D i.85; J iv.454; DA i.236; DhA iv.68; PvA 67, 105, 274. Volokana
Volokana
(nt.) [v(i)+olokana, but cp. BSk. vyavalokana "inspection" Divy 435] looking at, examination J iv.237 (v. l. vi˚). Voloketi
Voloketi
[v(i)+oloketi; in meaning equal to viloketi & oloketi] to examine, study, scrutinize M i.213 (with gen.); Vin i.6 (lokaŋ); Kvu 591; DhA i.319 (lokaŋ); ii.96 (v. l. oloketi). Vosāṭitaka
Vosāṭitaka
(nt.) [wrong spelling for *vossaṭṭhika = v(i)+ ossaṭṭha+ika] (food) put down (on cemeteries etc.) for (the spirits of) the departed Vin iv.89. Vosāna
Vosāna
(nt.) [v(i)+osāna] 1. (relative) achievement, per- fection (in this world), accomplishment M ii.211 (diṭṭhadhamm' âbhiññāvosāna -- pārami -- ppatta); Dh 423 (cp. DhA iv.233); Th 1, 784 (˚ŋ adhigacchati to reach perfection). -- 2. stopping, ceasing; in phrase ˚ŋ āpajjati (almost equal to pamāda) to come to an end (with), to stop, to become careless, to flag M i.193; J iii.5; PvA 29; antarā ˚ŋ āpajjati to produce half -- way achievement, to stop half -- way A v.157, 164; It 85. Kern, Toev. s. v. quite wrong "to arrive at a conclusion, to be convinced." Vosāpeti
Vosāpeti
[v(i)+osāpeti] to make end, to bring to an end or a finish SnA 46 (desanaŋ). Vosāraṇiya
Vosāraṇiya
(adj. nt.) [fr. v(i)+osāraṇā] belonging to reinstatement A i.99. Vosita
Vosita
[vi+osita, pp. of ava+sā. See also vusita & vyosita] one who has attained (relative) achievement, perfected, accomplished, mastering, in phrase abhiññā˚ one who masters special knowledge S i.167; Dh 423; It 47 = 61=81; A i.165; cp. DhA iv.233: "niṭṭhānaŋ patto vusita -- vosānaŋ vā patto etc." Vossa (kamma)
Vossa
( -- kamma) (nt.) making impotent (see under vassa- kamma) D i.12; DA i.97. Vossagga
Vossagga
[ = ossagga; ava+sṛj] relinquishing, relaxation; handing over, donation, gift (see on term as ethical Bdhgh at K.S. i.321) D iii.190 (issariya˚ handing over of authority), 226; S iv.365 sq.; v.63 sq., 351 (˚rata fond of giving); A ii.66 (id.); iii.53 (id.); Ps i.109; ii.24, 117; J vi.213 (kamma˚); Nett 16; Vbh 229, 350; Vism 224; VbhA 317. -- sati -- vossagga relaxation of attention, inattention, indifference DhA i.228; iii.163, 482; iv.43. -- pariṇāmi, maturity of surrender S i.88. Vossajjati
Vossajjati
[ = ossaj(j)ati] to give up, relinquish; to hand over, resign Sn 751 (ger. vossajja; SnA 508 reads oss˚); J v.124 (issariyaŋ vossajjanto; cp. D iii.190). Voharati
Voharati
[vi+oharati] 1. to express, define, decide M i.499; D i.202; Miln 218. -- 2. to decide, govern over (a kingdom), give justice, administrate J iv.134 (Bārāṇasiŋ maŋsa -- sur -- odakaŋ, i. e. provide with; double acc.), 192 (inf. vohātuŋ = voharituŋ C.). -- Pass. vohariyati to be called SnA 26; PvA 94; ThA 24. Vohāra
Vohāra
[vi+avahāra] 1. trade, business M ii.360; Sn 614 (˚ŋ upajīvati); J i.495; ii.133, 202; v.471; PvA 111, 278. -- 2. current appellation, common use (of language), popular logic, common way of defining, usage, designation, term, cognomen; (adj.) ( -- ˚) so called SnA 383, 466, 483 (laddha˚ so -- called); DA i.70; PvA 56, 231 (laddha˚ padesa, with the name) VvA 8, 72 (pāṇo ti vohārato satto), 108 (loka nirūḷhāya samaññāya v.). -- ariya -- vohāra proper (i. e. Buddhist) mode of speech (opp. anariya˚ unbuddhist or vulgar, common speech) D iii.232; A ii.246; iv.307; Vin iv.2; Vbh 376, 387. lokiya -- vohāra common definition, general way of speech SnA 382. On term see also Dhs. trsln § 1306. -- 3. lawsuit, law, lawful obligation; juridical practice, jurisprudence (cp. vohārika) Sn 246 (˚kūṭa fraudulent lawyer); J ii.423 (˚ŋ sādheti to claim a debt by way of law, or a lawful debt); vi.229; DhA iii.12 (˚ûpajīvin a lawyer); SnA 289. -- 4. name of a sea -- monster, which gets hold of ships J v.259. Vohārika
Vohārika
[fr. vohāra] "decider," one connected with a law -- suit or with the law, magistrate, a higher official (mahāmatta) in the law -- courts, a judge or justice. At Vin i.74 two classes of mahāmattā (ministers) are given: senānāyakā those of defence, and vohārikā of justice; cp. Vin ii.158; iii.45 (purāṇa -- vohāriko mahāmatto); iv.223. Vy˚
Vy˚
is the semi -- vowel (i. e. half -- consonantic) form of vi˚ before following a & ā (vya˚, vyā), very rarely ū & o. The prefix vi˚ is very unstable, and a variety of forms are also attached to vy˚, which, after the manner of all consonant -- combns in Pāḷi, may apart from its regular form vy˚ appear either as contracted to vv˚ (written v˚), like vagga (for vyagga), vaya (for vyaya), vosita ( = vyosita), *vvūha (=vyūha, appearing as ˚bhūha), or diaeretic as viy˚ (in poetry) or veyy˚ (popular), e. g. viyañjana, viyārambha, viyāyata; or veyvañjanika, veyyākaraṇa, veyyāyika. It further appears as by˚ (like byaggha, byañjana, byappatha, byamha, byāpanna, byābādha etc.). In a few cases vya˚ represents (a diaeretic) vi˚, as in vyamhita & vyasanna; and vyā˚= vi˚ in vyārosa. Vyakkhissaŋ
Vyakkhissaŋ
at Sn 600 is fut. of vyācikkhati (see viyā˚). Vyagga
Vyagga
(adj.) [vi+agga, of which the contracted form is vagga2] distracted, confused, bewildered; neg. a˚ S i.96 (˚mānasa); v.66, 107. Vyaggha
Vyaggha
[cp. Vedic vyāghra] a tiger D iii.25; A iii.101; Sn 416 (˚usabha); Ap 68 (˚rājā); J i.357; iii.192 (Subāhu); v.14 (giri -- sānuja). -- f. viyagghinī (biy˚) Miln 67. See also byaggha. Vyagghīnasa
Vyagghīnasa
[?] a hawk S i.148 (as ˚nisa); J vi.538. Another word for "hawk" is sakuṇagghi. Vyañjana
Vyañjana
(nt.) [fr. vi+añj, cp. añjati2 & abbhañjati] 1. (accompanying) attribute, distinctive mark, sign, characteristic (cp. anu˚) Sn 549, 1017; Th 1, 819 (metric: viyañjana); J v.86 (viyañjanena under the pretext); Dhs 1306. gihi˚ characteristic of a layman Sn 44 (cp. SnA 91); Miln 11; purisa˚ membrum virile Vin ii.269. -- 2. letter (of a word) as opposed to attha (meaning, sense, spirit), e, g. D iii.127; S iv.281, 296; v.430; A ii.139 (Cp. savyañjana ); or pada (word), e. g. M i.213; A i.59; ii.147, 168, 182; iii.178 sq.; Vin ii.316; Nett 4; SnA 177. -- vyañjanato according to the letter Miln 18 (opp. atthato). -- 3. condiment, curry Vin ii.214; A iii.49 (odano anekasūpo aneka -- vyañjano); Pv ii.115 (bhatta˚ rice with curry); PvA 50. -- Cp. byañjana. Vyañjanaka
Vyañjanaka
(adj.) [fr. vyañjana] see ubhato˚ & veyyañ- janika. -- 653 -- Vyañjayati
Vyañjayati
[vi+añjati, or añjeti] to characterise, denote, express, indicate SnA 91; Nett 209 (Cy.). Vyatireka
Vyatireka
[vi+atireka] what is left over, addition, surplus PvA 18 (of "ca"), 228 (˚to). Vyatta
Vyatta
(adj.) [cp. viyatta, veyyatta & byatta] 1. experi- enced, accomplished, learned, wise, prudent, clever S iv.174 (paṇḍita+), 375; A iii.117, 258; J vi.368; VvA 131 (paṇḍita+); PvA 39 (id.). -- a˚ unskilled, foolish (+bāla) S iv.380; A iii.258; J i.98. -- 2. evident, manifest PvA 266 (˚pākaṭa -- bhāva). Vyattatā
Vyattatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. vyatta] experience, learning, cleverness Miln 349 (as by˚); DhA ii.38 (avyattatā foolishness: so correct under avyattatā P.D. i.86). Vyattaya
Vyattaya
[vi+ati+aya] opposition, reversal; in purisa˚ change of person (gram.) SnA 545; vacana˚ reversal of number (i. e. sg. & pl.) DA i.141; SnA 509. Vyathana
Vyathana
(nt.) [fr. vyath] shaking, wavering Dhtp 465 (as defn of tud). Vyadhati
Vyadhati
[in poetry for the usual vedhati of vyath, cp. Goth. wipōn] to tremble, shake, waver; to be frightened Vin ii.202 (so for vyādhati); J iii.398 (vyadhase; C. vyadhasi = kampasi). -- Caus. vyadheti (& vyādheti) to frighten, confuse J iv.166 (=vyādheti bādheti C.). -- Fut. vyādhayissati S i.120=Th 1, 46 (by˚). Under byādheti we had given a different derivation (viz. Caus. fr. vyādhi). Vyanta
Vyanta
(adj. nt.) [vi+anta] removed, remote; nt. end, finish; only as vyanti˚ in combn with kṛ and bhū. The spelling is often byanti˚. -- (1) vyantikaroti to abolish, remove, get rid of, destroy M i.115 (byant' eva ekāsiŋ), 453 (by˚); D i.71 (˚kareyya); S iv.76, 190; A iv.195; DA i.125, 212. -- Fut. vyantikāhiti Miln 391 (by˚); DhA iv.69. -- pp. vyantikata Th 1, 526. -- (2) vyantibhavati to cease, stop; to come to an end, to be destroyed Kvu 597 (by˚); or ˚hoti A i.141; iii.74; Ps i.171 (by˚); Miln 67 (by˚), vyantibhāva destruction, annihilation M i.93; A v.292, 297 sq.; Pv iv.173; Kvu 544 (by˚). vyantibhuta come to an end J v.4. Vyapagacchati
Vyapagacchati
[vi+apagacchati] to depart, to be dispelled J ii.407 (ger. ˚gamma ). -- pp. ˚gata. Vyapagata
Vyapagata
[pp. of vyapagacchati] departed J i.17; Miln 133, 225. Vyapanudati
Vyapanudati
[vi+apanudati] to drive away, expel; ger ˚nujja Sn 66. aor. vyapānudi Th 2, 318. Vyapahaññati
Vyapahaññati
[vi+apa+haññati] to be removed or destroyed J vi.565. Vyappatha
Vyappatha
(nt.) [perhaps a distortion of *vyāpṛta, for which the usual P. (der.) veyyāvacca (q. v.) in meaning "duty"] 1. duty, occupation, activity Sn 158 (khīṇa˚ of the Arahant: having no more duties, cp. vyappathi). -- 2. way of speaking, speech, utterance Sn 163, 164 (contrasted to citta & kamma; cp. kāya, vācā, mano in same use), expld at SnA 206 by vacīkamma; & in defn of "speech" at Vin iv.2 (see under byappatha); DhsA 324 (expld as vākya -- bheda). Vyappathi
Vyappathi
(f.) [cp. Sk. vyāpṛti] activity, occupation, duty (?) Sn 961. See remarks on byappatha. Vyappanā
Vyappanā
(f.) [vi+appanā] application (of mind), focussing (of attention) Dhs 7. Vyamha
Vyamha
(nt.) [etym.?] palace; a celestial mansion, a vimāna, abode for fairies etc. J v. 454; vi.119, 251 ( = pura & rāja -- nivesa C.); Vv 351 (=bhavana VvA 160). Cp. byamha. Vyamhita
Vyamhita
(adj.) [metric for vimhita] astounded, shocked, awed; dismayed, frightened J v.69 ( = bhīta C.); vi.243, 314. Vyaya
Vyaya
[vi+aya, of i; the assimilation form is vaya2] expense, loss, decay S iv.68, 140; Miln 393 (as abbaya). avyayena (instr.) safely D i.72. Cp. veyyāyika & vyāyika. Vyavayāti
Vyavayāti
[vi+ava( = apa)+i, cp. apeti & veti] to go away, disappear J v.82. Vyavasāna
Vyavasāna
(nt.) [somewhat doubtful. It has to be com- pared with vavassagga, although it should be derived fr. sā (cp. pp. vyavasita; or śri?), thus mixture of sṛj & sā. Cp. a similar difficulty of sā under osāpeti] decision, resolution; only used to explain part. handa (exhortation) at SnA 200, 491 (v. l. vyavasāya: cp. vavasāya at DA i.237), for which otherwise vavassagga. Vyavasita
Vyavasita
(adj.) [pp. of vi+ava+sā (or śri?), cp. vya- vasāna] decided, resolute SnA 200. Vyasana
Vyasana
(nt.) [fr. vy+as] misfortune, misery, ruin, destruc- tion, loss D i.248; S iii.137 (anaya˚); iv.159; A i.33; v.156 sq., 317 (several); Sn 694 (˚gata ruined); Pv i.64 ( = dukkha PvA 33); iii.56 (=anattha PvA 199); Vbh 99 sq., 137; VbhA 102 (several); PvA 4, 103, 112; Sdhp 499. -- The 5 vyasanas are: ñāti˚, bhoga˚, roga˚, sīla˚, diṭṭhi˚ or misfortune concerning one's relations, wealth, health, character, views. Thus at D iii.235; A iii.147; Vin iv.277. Vyasanin
Vyasanin
(adj.) [fr. vyasana] having misfortune, unlucky, faring ill J v.259. Vyasanna
Vyasanna
[metric (diaeretic) for visanna] sunk into (loc.), immersed J iv.399; v.16 (here doubtful; not, as C., vyasanāpanna; gloss visanna; vv. ll. in C.: vyaccanna, viphanna, visatta). Vyākata
Vyākata
[pp. of vyākaroti] 1. answered, explained, de- clared, decided M i.431 (by˚); A i.119; S ii.51, 223; iv.59, 194; v.177; Sn 1023. -- avyākata unexplained, undecided, not declared, indeterminate M i.431 (by˚); D i.187, 189; S ii.222; iv.375 sq., 384 sq., 391 sq.; Ps ii.108 sq.; Dhs 431, 576. -- 2. predicted J i.26. -> 3. settled, determined J iii.529 (asinā v. brought to a decision by the sword). Vyākatatta
Vyākatatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. vyākata] explanation, definite- ness PvA 27. Vyākattar
Vyākattar
[n. ag. of vyākaroti; cp. BSk. vyākartṛ Divy 620] expounder A iii.81. Vyākaraṇa
Vyākaraṇa
(nt.) [fr. vyākaroti; see also veyyākaraṇa] 1. answer (pañha˚), explanation, exposition A i.197; ii.46; iii.119; SnA 63, 99; KhA 75, 76. -- 2. grammar (as one of the 6 angas) SnA 447; PvA 97. -- 3. prediction J i.34, 44; DhA iv.120. Vyākaroti
Vyākaroti
[vi+ā+kṛ] 1. to explain, answer (in combn with puṭṭha, asked) D i.25, 58, 175, 200; Sn 510, 513 sq., 1102, 1116; Miln 318 (byākareyya); VvA 71. Fut. ˚karissati D i.236; Sn 993; PvA 281. For vyākarissati we have vyakkhissati (of viyācikkhati) at Sn 600. -- aor. sg. vyākāsi Sn 541, 1116, 1127; PvA 212; pl. vyākaŋsu Sn 1084; Pv ii.135. -- grd. vyākātabba D i.94, 118. -> 2. to prophesy, predict [cp. BSk. vyākaroti in same sense Divy 65, 131] J i.140; Pv iii.55 (aor. ˚ākari); Mhvs 6, 2 (aor. ˚ākaruŋ); DhA iv.120 (˚ākāsi); PvA 196, 199 (˚ākāsi). -- pp. vyākata. Vyākāra
Vyākāra
see viy˚. Vyākhyāta
Vyākhyāta
[pp. of v(i)yācikkhati] told, announced, set forth, enumerated Sn 1,000. Vyākula
Vyākula
(adj.) [vi+ākula] perplexed J i.301; PvA 160; VvA 30; Sdhp 403. Vyādinna
Vyādinna
[for vyādiṇṇa, vi+ādiṇṇa?] at A iii.64 (soto vikkhitto visato+) is doubtful in reading & meaning ("split"?). It must mean something like "interrupted, diverted." The vv. ll. are vicchinna & jiṇṇa. -- 654 -- Vyādha
Vyādha
[fr. vyadh: see vedha & vijjhati] a huntsman, deer -- hunter Mhvs 10, 89 (read either vyādha -- deva god of the h.; or vyādhi˚ demon of maladies); 10, 95. Vyādhi
Vyādhi1
[see byādhi] sickness, malady, illness, disease A i.139 (as devadūta), 146, 155 sq.; iii.66; Ps i.59 sq.; ii.147; J vi.224; Vism 236. Often in sequence jāti jarā vyādhi maraṇa, e. g. A ii.172; iii.74 sq.; Vism 232. Vyādhi
Vyādhi2
(camel) see oṭṭhi˚. Vyādhita
Vyādhita
[pp. of vyādheti] 1. affected with an illness, ill J v.497; Miln 168. See byādhita. -- 2. shaken, f. ˚ā as abstr, shakiness, trembling VbhA 479. Vyādhiyaka
Vyādhiyaka
(nt.) [fr. vyādheti] shaking up Vbh 352; VbhA 479 (uppannavyādhitā; i. e. kāya -- pphandana). Vyādhati
Vyādhati
see vyadhati. -- pp. vyādhita. Vyāpaka
Vyāpaka
(adj.) [fr. vyāpeti] filling or summing up, com- bining, completing PvA 71 (in expln of "ye keci": anavasesa˚ niddesa). Vyāpajjati
Vyāpajjati
[vi+āpajjati] (instr.) to go wrong, to fail, disagree; to be troubled; also (trs.) to do harm, to injure S iii.119; iv.184 = Nd2 40 (by˚); A iii.101 (bhattaŋ me vyāpajjeyya disagrees with me, makes me ill); Sn 1065 (ākāso avyāpajjamāno not troubled, not getting upset); Nd2 74 (by˚). -- pp. vyāpanna. -- Caus. vyāpādeti. Vyāpajjanā
Vyāpajjanā
(f.) [fr. vyāpajjati] injuring, doing harm, ill-will Pug 18; Dhs 418 ("getting upset" trsln). Vyāpajjha
Vyāpajjha
(adj. -- nt.) [perhaps grd. of vyāpajjati; but see also avyāpajjha] to be troubled or troubling, doing harm, injuring; only neg. avyāpajjha (& abyābajjha) (adj.) not hurting, peaceful, friendly; (nt.) kindness of heart Vin i.183; M i.90 (abyābajjhaŋ vedanaŋ vedeti), 526; D i.167, 247, 251; S iv.296, 371; A i.98; ii.231 sq.; iii.285, 329 sq., 376 sq. Cp. byāpajjha & vyābādha etc. Vyāpatti
Vyāpatti
(f.) [fr. vyāpajjati] injury, harm; doing harm, malevolence A v.292 sq.; Pug 18; J iv.137; Dhs 418 ("disordered temper" trsln) Vyāpanna
Vyāpanna
(adj.) [pp. of vyāpajjati] spoilt, disagreeing, gone wrong; corrupt; only with citta, i. e. a corrupted heart, or a malevolent intention; adj. malevolent D i.139; iii.82; A i.262, 299; opp. avyāpanna (q. v.). See also byāpanna & viyāpanna. Vyāpāda
Vyāpāda
[fr. vyāpajjati. See also byāpāda] making bad, doing harm: desire to injure, malevolence, ill -- will D i.71, 246; iii.70 sq., 226, 234; S i.99; ii.151; iv.343; A i.194, 280; ii.14, 210; iii.92, 231, 245; iv.437; Vbh 86, 363 sq., 391; Pug 17 sq.; Dhs 1137; Vism 7; DA i.211; VbhA 74, 118, 369. ˚anusaya M i.433. ˚dosa M iii.3. ˚dhātu M iii.62. ˚nīvaraṇa M ii.203. See under each affix. -- Cp. avyāpāda. Vyāpādeti
Vyāpādeti
[Caus. of vyāpajjati] to spoil Miln 92. Vyāpāra
Vyāpāra
[vi+ā+pṛ] occupation, business, service, work J i.341; v.60; Vism 595. Cp. veyyāvacca, vyappatha (by˚), vyāvaṭa. Vyāpāritar
Vyāpāritar
one occupied with M iii.126. Vyāpin
Vyāpin
(adj.) [fr. vi+āp] pervading, diffused DhsA 311. Vyāpeti
Vyāpeti
[vi+Caus. of āp] to make full, pervade, fill, com- prise DhsA 307; VvA 17; ThA 287; PvA 52 ( = pharati), 71 (in expln of "ye keci"). Vyābādha
Vyābādha
(& byābādha) [fr. vi+ā+bādh, but semantically connected with vi+ā+pad, as in vyāpāda & vyāpajjha] oppression, injury, harm, hurting; usually in phrase atta˚ & para˚ (disturbing the peace of others & of oneself) M i.89; S iv.339; A i.114, 157, 216; ii.179. -- Also at S iv.159 (pāṇinaŋ vyābādhāya, with v. l. vadhāya). See also byābādha. The corresponding adjectives are (a)vyāpajjha & veyyābādhika (q. v.). Vyābādheti
Vyābādheti
(& bya˚) [Caus. of vi+ā+badh or distortion fr. vyāpadeti, with which identical in meaning] to do harm, hurt, injure Vin ii.77/78; S iv.351 sq.; DA i.167. The BSk. is vyābādhayate (e. g. Divy 105). Vyābāheti
Vyābāheti
[vi+ā+bah: see bahati3] lit. "to make an outsider," to keep or to be kept out or away Vin ii.140 (˚bāhiŋsu in Pass. sense; so that they may not be kept away). Oldenberg (on p. 320) suggests reading vyābādhiŋsu, which may be better, viz. "may not be offended" (?). The form is difficult to explain. Vyābhangī
Vyābhangī
(f.) [see byā˚] 1. a carrying pole (or flail?) Th 1, 623; combd with asita (see asita4 in corr. to pt. 2) "sickle & pole" M ii.180; A iii.5. -- 2. a flail S iv.201. Vyāma
Vyāma
see byāma & add ref. D ii.18≈Vism 136 (catu˚- pamāṇa). Vyāyata
Vyāyata
[vi+āyata] stretched; only neg. a˚ senseless, confused (should it be vyāyatta?) J i.496 ( = avyatta C.). See also viyāyata. Vyāyāma=vāyāma
Vyāyāma
= vāyāma DhsA 146. Vyāyika
Vyāyika
(adj.) [fr. vyaya] belonging to decay; only neg. a˚ not decaying, imperishable A ii.51; J v.508. Vyārambha
Vyārambha
see viy˚. Vyāruddha
Vyāruddha
(adj.) [pp. of vi+ā+rundh] opposed, hostile Th 2, 344; Sn 936. See byāruddha. Vyārosa
Vyārosa
[vi+ā+rosa, cp. virosanā] anger M iii.78; S iii.73. Vyālika
Vyālika
(nt.) [for vy+alika] fault ThA 266. Vyāvaṭa
Vyāvaṭa
(adj.) [ = Sk. vyāpṛta, cp. vyāpāra, byappatha. & veyyāvacca] doing service, active, busy; eager, keen, intent on (loc.), busy with A iv.195 (mayi= worrying about me); J iii.315 (su˚); iv.371 (kiccâkiccesu v.= uyyatta C.); v.395 (=ussukka); vi.229 (=kāya -- veyyāvacca -- dān' ādi -- kamma -- karaṇena vyāvaṭa C.). -- dassana˚ keen on a sight, eager to see J i.89; VvA 213 (preferred to T. reading!). -- dāna˚ serving in connection with a gift, busy with giving, a "commissioner of gifts," i. e. a superintendent installed by a higher (rich) person (as a king or seṭṭhi) to look after the distribution of all kinds of gifts in connection with a mahādāna. Rh. Davids at Dial. ii.372 (following Childers) has quite misunderstood the term in referring it to a vyāvaṭa in meaning of "hindered," and by translating it as "hindered at the largesse" or "objecting to the largesse." At none of the passages quoted by him has it that meaning. See e. g. D ii.354; J iii.129; Pv ii.950 (dāne v.=ussukkaŋ āpanna PvA 135); PvA 112 (dāne), 124 (id.); DA i.296 (? not found). avyāvaṭa not busy, not bothering about (loc.), unconcerned with, not worrying D ii.141 (Tathāgatassa sarīre; trsln not to the point "hinder not yourselves"); Vin iii.136. See also separately. -- Note. vyāvaṭa (& a˚) only occur in the meaning given above, and not in the sense of "covered, obstructed" [wrongly fr. vṛ] as given by Childers. Correct the trsln given under byāvaṭa accordingly! Vyāviddha
Vyāviddha
(adj.) [vi+āviddha] whirling about, flitting (here & there), moving about, pell -- mell J vi.530. Vyāsa
Vyāsa
[fr. vi+ās to sit] separation, division; always con- trasted with samāsa, e. g. Vism 82 (vyāsato separately, distributively; opp. samāsato); KhA 187. Vyāsatta
Vyāsatta
see byāsatta. Vyāsiñcati
Vyāsiñcati
[vi+āsiñcati] to defile, corrupt, tarnish S iv.78 (cittaŋ). -- pp. vyāsitta ibid. -- 655 -- Vyāseka
Vyāseka
[fr. vi+ā+sic] mixed; only neg. a˚ unmixed, untarnished, undefiled D i.70; DA i.183; Pug 59; Th 1, 926. Vyāharati
Vyāharati
[vi+āharati] to utter, talk, speak Vin ii.214; J ii.177; iv.225 (puṭṭho vyāhāsi, perhaps with v. l. as vyākāsi). See also avyāharati. -- Cp. paṭi˚. Vyūha
Vyūha
[fr. vi+vah; see byūha] 1. heap, mass; massing or array, grouping of troops S v.369 (sambādha˚ a dense crowd, or massed with troops (?); in phrase iddha phīta etc., as given under bāhujañña); J ii.406 (battle array: paduma˚, cakka˚, sakaṭa˚). -- 2. a side street (?), in sandhibbūha J vi.276. See also byūha. Vyūhati
Vyūhati
at VvA 104 is not clear (see byūhati). It looks more like a present tense to viyūḷha in sense "to be bulky," than a Denom. fr. vyūha as "stand in array." For the regular verb vi+vah see viyūhati. Cp. paṭi˚ & saŋyūhati. Vyosita
Vyosita
(adj.) [ = vosita] perfected; neg. a˚ not perfected, imperfect Th 1, 784 (aby˚). -- S. S
--
S -- a euphonic -- s -- seems to occur in combn ras -- agga -- s- aggin (see rasa2). An apparent hiatus -- s in ye s -- idha Sn 1083, and evaŋ s -- ahaŋ Sn 1134 (v. l.) may be an abbreviated su˚ (see su2), unless we take it as a misspelling for p. Sa
Sa1
the letter s (sa -- kāra) SnA 23; or the syllable sa DhA ii.6; PvA 280. Sa
Sa2
[Idg. *so -- (m.), *sā -- (f.); nom. sg. to base *to -- of the oblique cases; cp. Sk. sa (saḥ), sā; Av. hō, hā; Gr. o(, h(; Goth. sa, sō; Ags. sē "the" ( = that one); pe -- s=E. thi -- s] base of the nom. of the demonstr. pron. that, he, she. The form sg. m. sa is rare (e. g. Dh 142; Sn 89). According to Geiger (P.Gr. § 105) sa occurs in Sn 40 times, but so 124 times. In later Pāli sa is almost extinct. The final o of so is often changed into v before vowels, and a short vowel is lengthened after this v: svājja Sn 998=so ajja; svāhaŋ J i.167=so ahaŋ; svāyaŋ Vin i.2=so ayaŋ. The foll. vowel is dropped in so maŋ It 57=so imaŋ. -- A form se is Māgadhism for nt. acc. sg. taŋ, found e. g. at D ii.278, 279; M ii.254, 255, and in combn seyyathā, seyyathīdaŋ (for which taŋyathā Miln 1). An idiomatic use is that of so in meaning of "that (he or somebody)," e. g. "so vata . . . palipanno paraŋ palipannaŋ uddharissatī ti: n' etaŋ ṭhānaŋ vijjati" M i.45; cp. "sā 'haŋ dhammaŋ nâssosiŋ" that I did not hear the Dh. Vv 405. Or in the sense of a cond. (or causal) part. "if," or "once," e. g. sa kho so bhikkhu . . . upakkileso ti iti viditvā . . . upakkilesaŋ pajahati "once he has recognised . . ." M i.37. Cp. ya˚ ii.2 b. On correl. use with ya˚ (yo so etc.) see ya˚ ii.1. Sa
Sa3
[identical with saŋ˚] prefix, used as first pt. of com- pounds, is the sense of "with," possessed of, having, same as; e. g. sadevaka with the devas Vin i.8; sadhammika having common faith D ii.273; sajāti having the same origin J ii.108. Often opposed to a -- and other neg. prefixes (like nir˚). Sometimes almost pleonastical (like sa -- antara). -- Of combinations we only mention a few of those in which a vocalic initial of the 2nd pt. remains uncontracted. Other examples see under their heading in alph. order. E. g. sa -- antara inside DhA iii.788 (for santara Dh 315); sa -- Inda together with Indra D ii.261, 274; A v.325 sq.; ˚ -- uttara having something beyond, inferior (opp. an˚) D i.80; ii.299 = M i.59; Dhs 1292, 1596; DhsA 50; ˚ -- uttaracchada (& ˚chadana) a carpet with awnings above it D i.7≈; ii.187 (˚ava); A i.181; Vin i.192; DA i.87; -- ˚udaka with water, wet Vin i.46; -- ˚udariya born from the same womb, a brother J iv.417, cp. sodariya; -- ˚uddesa with explanation It 99; Vism 423 (nāma -- gotta -- vasena sa -- udd.; vaṇṇ'ādi -- vasena sākāra); -- ˚upanisa together with its cause, causally associated S ii.30; -- ˚upavajja having a helper M iii.266; -- ˚upādāna showing attachment M ii.265; -- ˚upādisesa having the substratum of life remaining Sn 354; It 38; Nett 92. Opp. anupādisesa; -- ˚ummi roaring of the billows It 57, 114. -- Note. sa2 & sa3 are differentiations of one and the same sa, which is originally the deictic pronoun in the function of identity & close connection. See etym. under saŋ˚. Sa
Sa4
(reflex. pron.) [Vedic sva & svayaŋ ( = P. sayaŋ); Idg. *seṷo, *sṷe; cp. Av. hava & hva own; Gr. e(o/s & o(/s his own; Lat. sui, suus; Goth. swēs own, sik= Ger. sich himself; etc.] own M i.366; D ii.209; Sn 905; J ii.7; iii.164, 323 (loc. samhi lohite), 402 (acc. saŋ his own, viz. kinsman; C=sakaŋ janaŋ); iv.249 (saŋ bhātaraŋ); Pv ii.121=DhA iii.277 (acc. san tanuŋ); instr. sena on one's own, by oneself J v.24 (C. not quite to the point: mama santakena). Often in composition, like sadesa one's own country Dāvs i.10. Cp. saka. Saŋ˚
Saŋ˚
(indecl.) [prefix; Idg. *sem one; one & the same, cp. Gr. o(malo/s even, a (/ma at one, o(mo/s together; Sk. sama even, the same; samā in the same way; Av. hama same = Goth. sama, samap together; Lat. simul (=simultaneous), similis "re -- sembling." Also Sk. sa (=sa2) together=Gr. a( -- a) -- (e. g. a)/ koitis); Av. ha -- ; and samyak towards one point=P. sammā. -- Analogously to Lat. semel "once," simul, we find sa˚ as numeral base for "one" in Vedic sakṛt "once"=P. sakid (& sakad), sahasra 1000=P. sahassa, and in adv. sadā "always," lit. "in one"] prefix, implying conjunction & completeness. saŋ˚ is after vi˚ (19%) the most frequent (16%) of all Pāli prefixes. Its primary meaning is "together" (cp. Lat. con˚); hence arises that of a closer connection or a more accentuated action than that expressed by the simple verb (intensifying= thoroughly, quite), or noun. Very often merely pleonastic, esp. in combn with other prefixes (e. g. sam -- anu˚, sam -- ā˚, sam -- pa˚). In meaning of "near by, together" it is opposed to para˚; as modifying prefix it is contrary to abhi˚ and (more frequently) to vi˚ (e. g. saŋvadati> vivadati), whereas it often equals pa˚ (e. g. pamodati> sammodati), with which it is often combd as sampa˚; and also abhi˚ (e. g. abhivaḍḍhati>saŋvaḍḍhati), with which often combd as abhisaŋ˚. -- Bdhgh & Dhpāla explain saŋ˚ by sammā (SnA 151; KhA 209: so read for samā āgatā), suṭṭhu (see e. g. santasita, santusita), or samantā (= altogether; SnA 152, 154), or (dogmatically) sakena santena samena (KhA 240), or as "saŋyoga" Vism 495. -- In combn with y we find both saŋy˚ and saññ˚. The usual conṭracted form before r is sā˚. Saŋyata
Saŋyata
(& saññata) [pp. of saŋyamati] lit. drawn together; fig. restrained, self -- controlled D ii.88; S i.79; Sn 88, 156, 716; J i.188; Vv 3411; Miln 213.

-- atta having one's self restrained, self -- controlled S i.14 (for saya˚); Sn 216, 284 (ññ), 723; Pv ii.614 (ññ; = saññata -- citta PvA 98). -- ūru having the thighs pressed together, having firm thighs J v.89, 107 (ññ). 155 (ññ). -- cārin living in self -- control Dh 104 (ññ). -- pakhuma having the eyelashes close together VvA 162. Saŋyama
Saŋyama
(& saññama) [fr. saŋ+yam] 1. restraint, self- control, abstinence S i.21, 169; D i.53; Vin i.3; A i.155 sq. (kāyena, vācāya, manasā); D iii.147; It 15 (ññ); Sn 264, 655; M ii.101 (sīla˚); Dh 25 (saññama dama); DA i.160; DhA ii.255 ( = catu -- pārisuddhi -- sīla); VbhA 332. -- 2. restraint in giving alms saving (of money etc.), stinginess Vin i.272; Pv ii.711 (=sankoca PvA 102). -- 656 -- Saŋyamati
Saŋyamati
[saŋ+yamati] to practise self -- control S i.209 (pāṇesu ca saŋyamāmase, trsln "if we can keep our hands off living things"). -- pp. saŋyata. -- Caus. saññāmeti to restrain M i.365, 507; Dh 37, 380. Cp. paṭi˚. Saŋyamana
Saŋyamana
(nt.) [fr. saŋ+yam] fastening J v.202, 207. Saŋyamanī
Saŋyamanī
(f.) [fr. last] a kind of ornament J v.202 ( = maṇisuvaṇṇa -- pavāḷa -- rajata -- mayāni pilandhanāni C.). Saŋyācikā
Saŋyācikā
(f.) [collect. abstr. fr. saŋ+yāc] begging, what is begged; only in instr. ˚āya (adv.) by begging together, by collecting voluntary offerings Vin iii.144 (so read for ˚āyo), 149 (expld incorrectly as "sayaŋ yācitvā"); J ii.282 (so read for ˚āyo). Saŋyuga
Saŋyuga
(nt.) [fr. saŋ+yuj] harness Th 1, 659. Saŋyuñjati
Saŋyuñjati
[saŋ+yuñjati] to connect, join with (instr.), unite S i.72. Pass. saŋyujjati S iii.70. -- pp. saŋyutta. -- Caus. saŋyojeti (1) to put together, to endow with D ii.355; S v.354; J i.277. -- (2) to couple, to wed someone to (instr.) J iii.512 (dārena); iv.7 (id.). -- pp. saŋyojita. Saŋyuta
Saŋyuta
(adj.) [saŋ+yuta, of yu] connected, combined Sn 574 (ññ), 1026. Saŋyutta
Saŋyutta
[pp. of saŋyuñjati] 1. tied, bound, fettered M iii.275 (cammena); S iv.163; A iv.216 (saŋyojanena s. by bonds to this world); Sn 194 (ññ), 300, 304; It 8; Sdhp 211. -- 2. connected with, mixed with ( -- ˚) J i.269 (visa˚). -- Cp. paṭi˚, vi˚. Saŋyūḷha
Saŋyūḷha
[pp. of saŋyūhati, cp. in similar meaning viyūḷha] massed, collected, put together, composed or gathered (like a bunch of flowers D ii.267 (gāthā); M i.386; DA i.38 (spelt saŋvūḷha, i. e. saŋvyūḷha; v. l. sañaḷha, i. e. sannaddha). Saŋyūhati
Saŋyūhati
[saŋ+vyūhati] to form into a mass, to ball together, to conglomerate A iv.137 (kheḷapiṇḍaŋ). -> pp. saŋyūḷha. Saŋyoga
Saŋyoga
[fr. saŋ+yuj] 1. bond, fetter M i.498; S i.226; iii.70; iv.36; A iv.280 = Vin ii.259 (opp. vi˚); Sn 522, 733; Dh 384 (=kāmayog'ādayo saŋyogā DhA iv.140). -- 2. union, association J iii.12 (ññ); Vism 495. -> 3. connection (within the sentence), construction PvA 73 (accanta˚), 135 (id.). Saŋyojana
Saŋyojana
(nt.) [fr. saŋyuñjati] bond, fetter S iv.163 etc.; especially the fetters that bind man to the wheel of transmigration Vin i.183; S i.23; v.241, 251; A i.264; iii.443; iv.7 sq. (diṭṭhi˚); M i.483; Dh 370; It 8 (taṇhā); Sn 62, 74, 621; J i.275; ii.22; Nett 49; DhA iii.298; iv.49.

The ten fetters are (1) sakkāyadiṭṭhi; (2) vicikicchā; (3) sīlabbataparāmāso; (4) kāmacchando; (5) vyāpādo; (6) rūparāgo; (7) arūparāgo; (8) māno; (9) uddhaccaŋ; (10) avijjā. The first three are the tīṇi saŋyojanāni -> e. g. M i.9; A i.231, 233; D i.156; ii.92 sq., 252; iii.107, 132, 216; S v.357, 376, 406; Pug 12, 15; Nett 14; Dhs 1002; DA i.312. The seven last are the satta saŋyojanāni, Nett. 14. The first five are called orambhāgiyāni -- e. g. A i.232 sq.; ii.5, 133; v.17; D i.156; ii.92, 252; M i.432; S v.61, 69; Th 2, 165; Pug 17. The last five are called uddhambhāgiyāni -> e. g. A v.17; S v.61, 69; Th 2, 167; ThA 159; Pug 22; Nett 14, 49.

A different enumeration of the ten saŋyojanas, at Nd2 657 = Dhs 1113, 1463 (kāmarāga, paṭigha, māna, diṭṭhi, vicikicchā, sīlabbataparāmāsa, bhavarāga, issā, macchariya, avijjā); compare, however, Dhs 1002.

A diff. enumn of seven saŋyojanas at D iii.254 & A iv.7, viz. anunaya˚, paṭigha˚, diṭṭhi˚, vicikicchā˚, māna˚, bhavarāga˚, avijjā˚. A list of eight is found at M i.361 sq. Cp. also ajjhatta -- saŋyojano & bahiddhāsaŋyojano puggalo A i.63 sq.; Pug 22; kiŋ -- su -- s˚ S i.39 = Sn 1108. Saŋyojaniya
Saŋyojaniya
(saññ˚) (adj.) [fr. saŋyojana] connected with the saŋyojanas, favourable to the saŋyojanas, A i.50; S ii.86; iii.166 sq.; iv.89, 107; Dhs 584, 1125, 1462; DhsA 49. Used as a noun, with dhammā understood, Sn 363, 375. Saŋyojita
Saŋyojita
[pp. of saŋyojeti, Caus. of saŋyuñjati] combined, connected with, mixed with J i.269 (bhesajja˚). Saŋrakkhati
Saŋrakkhati
[saŋ+rakkhati] to guard, ward off Sdhp 364. Saŋrambha
Saŋrambha
[saŋ+*rambha, fr. rabh, as in rabhasa (q. v.)] impetuosity, rage Dāvs iv.34. This is the Sanskritic form for the usual P. sārambha. Saŋrāga
Saŋrāga
[saŋ+rāga] passion J iv.22. Cp. sārāga. Saŋrūḷha
Saŋrūḷha
[pp. of saŋrūhati] grown together, healed J iii.216; v.344. Saŋrūhati
Saŋrūhati
[saŋ+rūhati] to grow J iv.429 ( = vaḍḍhati). Saŋroceti
Saŋroceti
[saŋ+roceti] to find pleasure in, only in aor. (poetical) samarocayi Sn 290, 306, 405; J iv.471. Saŋvacana
Saŋvacana
(nt.) [saŋ+vacana] sentence DhsA 52. Saŋvacchara
Saŋvacchara
[saŋ+vacchara; cp. Vedic saŋvatsara] a year D ii.327; A ii.75; iv.139, 252 sq.; Dh 108; J ii.80; Sdhp 239; nom. pl. saŋvaccharāni J ii.128. Saŋvaṭṭa
Saŋvaṭṭa
(m. & nt.) [saŋ+vaṭṭa1] 1. "rolling on or for- ward" (opp. vivaṭṭa "rolling back"), with ref. to the development of the Universe & time (kappa) the ascending aeon (vivaṭṭa the descending cycle), evolution It 99; Pug 60; Vism 419; Sdhp 484, 485. -- ˚vivaṭṭa a period within which evolution & dissolution of the world takes place, a complete world -- cycle (see also vivaṭṭa) D i.14; A ii.142; It 15, 99; Pug 60. Saŋvaṭṭati
Saŋvaṭṭati
[saŋ+vaṭṭati] 1. to be evolved, to be in a process of evolution (opp. vivaṭṭati in devolution) D i.17; iii.84, 109; A ii.142; DA i.110. -- 2. to fall to pieces, to come to an end (like the world's destruction), to pass away, perish, dissolve (intrs.) J iii.75 (paṭhavī s.; v. l. saŋvaddh˚); Miln 287 (ākāso ˚eyya). For saŋvaṭṭ˚ at J i.189 read saŋvaddh˚. Saŋvaṭṭanika
Saŋvaṭṭanika
(adj.) [fr. saŋvaṭṭa(na)] turning to, being reborn D i.17. Saŋvaḍḍha
Saŋvaḍḍha
[pp. of saŋvaḍḍhati] grown up, brought up D i.75; ii.38; PvA 66. Saŋvaḍḍhati
Saŋvaḍḍhati
[saŋ+vaḍḍhati] to grow up; ppr. ˚amāna (ddh.) growing up, subsisting J i.189 (so far ˚vaṭṭ˚). -> Caus. ˚vaḍḍheti to rear, nourish, bring up J i.231 (ppr. pass. ˚vaḍḍhiyamāna). Saŋvaṇṇana
Saŋvaṇṇana
(nt.) [saŋ+vaṇṇana] praising, praise J i.234. Saŋvaṇṇita
Saŋvaṇṇita
[pp. of saŋvaṇṇeti] praised, combd with sambhāvita honoured M i.110; iii.194, 223. Saŋvaṇṇeti
Saŋvaṇṇeti
[saŋ+vaṇṇeti] to praise Vin iii.73 sq.; J v.292 (aor. 3rd pl. ˚vaṇṇayuŋ). Cp. BSk. saŋvarṇayati Divy 115. -- pp. saŋvaṇṇita. Saŋvattati
Saŋvattati
[saŋ+vattati] to lead (to), to be useful (for) A i.54, 58 (ahitāya dukkhāya); Vin i.10 = S v.421; It 71 sq.; J i.97; Pot. saŋvatteyya Vin i.13. -- Often in phrase nibbidāya, virāgāya . . . nibbānāya saŋvattati e. g. D i.189; ii.251; iii.130; S v.80, 255; A iii.83, 326. -- 657 -- Saŋvattanika
Saŋvattanika
(adj.) [fr. saŋvattati] conducive to, involving A ii.54, 65; It 82; Kvu 618; J i.275; Nett 134 = S v.371. As ˚iya at PvA 205. Saŋvadati
Saŋvadati
[saŋ+vadati] to agree M i.500 (opp. vivadati). Saŋvadana
Saŋvadana
(nt.) [fr. saŋvadati] a certain magic act per- formed in order to procure harmony D i.11; DA i.96; cp. Dial. i.23. Saŋvaddhana
Saŋvaddhana
(nt.) [fr. saŋ+vṛdh] increasing, causing to grow J iv.16. Saŋvara
Saŋvara
[fr. saŋ+vṛ] restraint D i.57, 70, 89; ii.281 (in- driya˚); iii.130, 225; A ii.26; S iv.189 sq.; It 28, 96, 118; Pug 59; Sn 1034; Vin ii.126, 192 (āyatiŋ saŋvarāya "for restraint in the future," in confession formula), Dh 185; Nett 192; Vism 11, 44; DhA iii.238; iv.86 (˚dvārāni). The fivefold saŋvara: sīla˚, sati˚, ñāṇa˚, khanti˚, viriya˚, i. e. by virtue, mindfulness, insight, patience, effort DhsA 351; as pātimokkha˚ etc. at Vism 7; VbhA 330 sq. -- ˚vinaya norm of self -- control, good conduct SnA 8. cātuyāma˚, Jain discipline M l.377. Saŋvaraṇa
Saŋvaraṇa
(nt.) [fr. saŋ+vṛ] covering; obstruction Dhtp 274 (as def. of root val, i. e. vṛ). Saŋvarati
Saŋvarati
[saŋ+varati = vuṇāti 1] to restrain, hold; to restrain oneself Vin ii.102 (Pot. ˚vareyyāsi); Miln 152 (pāso na saŋvarati). -- pp. saŋvuta. Saŋvarī
Saŋvarī
(f.) [Vedic śarvarī fr. śarvara speckled; the P. form viâ sabbarī> sāvarī>saŋvarī] the night (poetical) D iii.196; J iv.441; v.14, 269; vi.243. Saŋvasati
Saŋvasati
[saŋ+vasati2] to live, to associate, cohabitate A ii.57; Vin ii.237; Nd2 423; Pug 65; Dh 167; Dpvs x.8; Miln 250. -- Caus. ˚vāseti same meaning Vin iv.137. -- Cp. upa˚. Saŋvāti
Saŋvāti
[saŋ+vāyati2] to be fragrant J v.206 (cp. vv. ll. on p. 203). Saŋvāsa
Saŋvāsa
[saŋ+vāsa2] 1. living with, co -- residence Vin i.97; ii.237; iii.28; A ii.57 sq., 187; iii.164 sq.; iv.172; J i.236; iv.317 (piya -- saŋvāsaŋ vasi lived together in harmony); Sn 283, 290, 335; Dh 207, 302; Sdhp 435. -> 2. intimacy J ii.39. -- 3. cohabitation, sexual intercourse D i.97; J i.134; ii.108; SnA 355. Saŋvāsaka
Saŋvāsaka
(adj.) [fr. saŋvāsa] living together Vin ii.162; iii.173. Saŋvāsiya
Saŋvāsiya
[fr. saŋvāsa] one who lives with somebody Sn 22; a˚ -- bhāva impossibility to co -- reside Miln 249. Saŋvigga
Saŋvigga
[pp. of saŋvijjati1] agitated, moved by fear or awe, excited, stirred D i.50; ii.240; A ii.115; S iv.290; v.270; J i.59; Miln 236; PvA 31 (˚hadaya). Saŋvijita
Saŋvijita
[pp. of saŋvejeti] (med.) filled with fear or awe, made to tremble; (pass.) felt, realized Sn 935 ( = saŋvejita ubbejita Nd1 406). Saŋvijjati
Saŋvijjati1
[Vedic vijate, vij; not as simple verb in P.] to be agitated or moved, to be stirred A ii.114; It 30. -> pp. saŋvigga. -- Caus. saŋvejeti M i.253; S i.141; Vin i.32; imper. ˚vejehi S v.270; aor. ˚vejesi Miln 236; inf. ˚vejetuŋ S i.197; ger ˚vejetvā J i.327; grd. ˚vejanīya that which should cause awe, in ˚āni ṭhānāni places of pilgrimage D ii.140; A i.36; ii.120; It 30. -- pp. saŋvijita & ˚vejita. Saŋvijjati
Saŋvijjati2
[Pass. of saŋvindati] to be found, to exist, to be D i.3; Vin ii.122; J i.214 (˚amāna); PvA 153. Saŋvidati
Saŋvidati
[saŋ+vidati: see vindati] to know; ger. ˚viditvā J iii.114; v.172. -- pp. saŋvidita. Saŋvidahati
Saŋvidahati
[saŋ+vidahati] to arrange, appoint, fix, settle, provide, prepare D i.61 (Pot. ˚eyyāma); aor. ˚vidahi PvA 198; inf. ˚vidhātuŋ A ii.35, & ˚vidahituŋ Vin i.287; ger. ˚vidhāya Vin iv.62 sq., 133; Mhvs 17, 37, & ˚vidahitvā Vin i.287; iii.53, 64; J i.59; v.46; also as Caus. formn ˚vidahetvāna J vi.301. -- pp. saŋvidahita & saŋvihita. Saŋvidahana
Saŋvidahana
(nt.) [for the usual ˚vidhāna] arrangement, appointment, provision J ii.209; DA i.148; DhsA 111. The word is peculiar to the Commentary style. Saŋvidahita
Saŋvidahita
[pp. of saŋvidahati] arranged Vin iv.64; DhA i.397. Saŋvidita
Saŋvidita
[pp. of saŋvidati] known Sn 935. Saŋvidhātar
Saŋvidhātar
[n. ag. fr. saŋvidahati] one who arranges or provides (cp. vidhātar) D iii.148. Saŋvidhāna
Saŋvidhāna
(nt.) [fr. saŋvidahati] arranging, providing, arrangement D i.135; J i.140 (rakkhā˚). Saŋvidhāyaka
Saŋvidhāyaka
(adj.) [saŋ+vidhāyaka] providing, managing; f. ˚ikā J i.155. Saŋvidhāvahāra
Saŋvidhāvahāra
[saŋvidhā (short ger. form)+avahāra] taking by arrangement, i. e. theft committed in agreement with others Vin iii.53. Saŋvindati
Saŋvindati
[saŋ+vindati] to find; ppr. (a)saŋvindaŋ Th 1, 717. -- Pass. saŋvijjati (q. v.). Saŋvibhajati
Saŋvibhajati
[saŋ+vibhajati] to divide, to share, to com- municate D ii.233; Miln 94, 344; inf. ˚vibhajituŋ Miln 295; Dāvs v.54. -- pp. saŋvibhatta. -- Caus. ˚vibhājeti. It 65. Saŋvibhatta
Saŋvibhatta
[pp. of saŋvibhajati] divided, shared Th 1, 9. Saŋvibhāga
Saŋvibhāga
[saŋ+vibhāga] distribution, sharing out D iii.191; A i.92, 150; It 18 sq., 98, 102; Vv 375; Miln 94. -- dāna˚ (of gifts) J v.331; Vism 306. Saŋvibhāgin
Saŋvibhāgin
(adj.) [fr. saŋvibhāga] generous, open -- handed S i.43 = J iv.110; v.397 (a˚); Miln 207. Saŋvirūḷha
Saŋvirūḷha
(adj.) [pp. of saŋvirūhati] fully grown, healed up J ii.117. Saŋvirūhati
Saŋvirūhati
[saŋ+virūhati] to germinate, to sprout Miln 99, 125, 130, 375. -- pp. saŋvirūḷha. -- Caus. ˚virūheti to cause to grow, to nourish J iv.429. Saŋvilāpa
Saŋvilāpa
[saŋ+vilāpa] noisy talk; fig. for thundering S iv.289 (abbha˚). Saŋvisati
Saŋvisati
[saŋ+visati] to enter; Caus. saŋveseti (q. v.). Cp. -- bhisaŋvisati. Saŋvissajjetar
Saŋvissajjetar
[saŋ+vissajjetar] one who appoints or assigns DA i.112. Saŋvissandati
Saŋvissandati
[saŋ+vissandati] to overflow M ii.117; Miln 36. Saŋvihita
Saŋvihita
[pp. of saŋvidahati] arranged, prepared, pro- vided J i.133 (˚ārakkha i. e. protected); in cpd. su˚ well arranged or appointed, fully provided D ii.75; M ii.75; DA i.147, 182; a˚ unappointed Vin i.175; Vism 37. Saŋvījita
Saŋvījita
[saŋ+vījita] fanned Dāvs v.18. Saŋvuta
Saŋvuta
[pp. of saŋvarati] 1. closed D i.81. -- 2. tied up J iv.361. -- 3. restrained, governed, (self -- )controlled, guarded D i.250; iii.48, 97; S ii.231; iv.351 sq.; A i.7 (cittaŋ); ii.25; iii.387; It 96, 118; Sn 340 (indriyesu); Dh 340; DA i.181. asaŋvuta unrestrained S iv.70; A iii.387; Pug 20, 24; in phrase asaŋvuṭā lokantarikā andhakārā (the world -- spaces which are dark &) ungoverned, orderless, not supported, baseless D ii.12. -- su˚ well controlled Vin ii.213; iv.186; S iv.70; Sn 413; Dh 8.

-- atta self -- controlled S i.66. -- indriya having the senses under control It 91; Pug 35. -- kārin M ii.260. -- 658 -- Saŋvūḷha
Saŋvūḷha
see saŋyūḷha. Saŋvega
Saŋvega
[fr. saŋ+vij] agitation, fear, anxiety; thrill, religious emotion (caused by contemplation of the miseries of this world) D iii.214; A i.43; ii.33, 114; S i.197; iii.85; v.130, 133; It 30; Sn 935; J i.138; Nd1 406; Vism 135 = KhA 235 (eight objects inducing emotion: birth, old age, illness, death, misery in the apāyas, and the misery caused by saŋsāra in past, present & future stages); Mhvs 1, 4; 23, 62; PvA 1, 22, 32, 39, 76. Saŋvejana
Saŋvejana
(adj.) [fr. saŋ+vij] agitating, moving It 30. Saŋvejaniya
Saŋvejaniya
(adj.) [fr. saŋvejana] apt to cause emotion A ii.120; Vism 238. See also saŋvijjati1. Saŋvejita
Saŋvejita
[pp. of saŋvejeti] stirred, moved, agitated S i.197; Nd1 406. Saŋvejeti
Saŋvejeti
Caus. of saŋvijjati1 (q. v.). Saŋveṭheti
Saŋveṭheti
[saŋ+veṭheti] to wrap, stuff, tuck in Vin iv.40. Saŋvedhita
Saŋvedhita
[saŋ+vyathita: see vyadhati] shaken up, confused, trembling Sn 902. Saŋvelli
Saŋvelli
(f.) [saŋ+velli, cp. vellita] "that which is wound round," a loin cloth J v.306. As saŋvelliya at Vin ii.137, 271. Saŋvelleti
Saŋvelleti
[fr. saŋ+vell] to gather up, bundle together, fold up Vism 327. Saŋvesanā
Saŋvesanā
(f.) [fr. saŋveseti] lying down, being in bed, sleeping J vi.551 sq., 557. Saŋveseti
Saŋveseti
[Caus. of saŋvisati] to lead, conduct A i.141; Pass. saŋvesiyati to be put to bed (applied to a sick person) M i.88 = iii. 181;D ii.24. Cp. abhi˚. Saŋvossajjati
Saŋvossajjati
see samavossajjati. Saŋvohāra
Saŋvohāra
[saŋ+vohāra] business, traffic Vin iii.239; A ii.187 = S i.78; A iii.77; SnA 471. Saŋvohārati
Saŋvohārati
[Denom. fr. saŋvohāra] to trade (with); ppr. ˚vohāramāna [cp. BSk. saŋvyavahāramāna Divy 259] A ii.188. Saŋsagga
Saŋsagga
[fr. saŋ+sṛj] contact, connection, association Vin iii.120; A iii.293 sq. (˚ārāmatā); iv.87 sq., 331; It 70; J i.376; iv.57; Miln 386; Nd2 137; VbhA 340 (an -- anulomika˚); PvA 5 (pāpamitta˚). -- Two kinds of contact at Nd2 659: by sight (dassana˚) and by hearing (savaṇa˚). -- pada˚ contact of two words, "sandhi" Nd1 139; Nd2 137 (for iti); SnA 28. -- a˚ S ii.202; Miln 344. -- ˚jāta one who has come into contact Sn 36. Saŋsaṭṭha
Saŋsaṭṭha
[pp. of saŋ+sṛj] 1. mixed with (instr.), asso- ciating with, joined M i.480 (opp. vi˚); A iii.109, 116, 258 sq., 393; PvA 47. -- 2. living in society Vin i.200; ii.4; iv.239, 294; D ii.214; Kvu 337 = DhsA 42; Dhs 1193; J ii.105; DhsA 49, 72. -- a˚ not given to society M i.214; S i.63; Miln 244; Vism 73. Saŋsati
Saŋsati
[Vedic śaŋsati, cp. Av. saŋhaiti to proclaim, Lat. censeo = censure; Obulg. qom to say] to proclaim, point out J v.77; vi.533; Pot. saŋse J vi.181; aor. asaŋsi J iii.420; iv.395; v.66; & asāsī (Sk. aśaŋsīt) J iii.484. Cp. abhi˚. Saŋsatta
Saŋsatta
[pp. of saŋ+sañj] adhering, clinging D i.239 (paramparā˚). Saŋsad
Saŋsad
(f.) [fr. saŋ+sad] session, assembly; loc. saŋsati J iii.493 ( = parisamajjhe C.), 495 Saŋsaddati
Saŋsaddati
[saŋ+śabd] to sound, in def. of root kitt at Dhtp 579; Dhtm 812. Saŋsandati
Saŋsandati
[saŋ+syand, cp. BSk. saŋsyandati AvŚ ii.142 sq., 188] to run together, to associate D i.248; ii.223; S ii.158 = It 70; S iv.379; Pug 32. -- Caus. saŋsandeti to put together; unite, combine J i.403; v.216; Miln 131; DhA ii.12; iv.51. Saŋsandanā
Saŋsandanā
(f.) [fr. saŋsandati] 1. (lit.) coming together J vi.414 (v. l. for T. saŋsandita). -- 2. (fig.) import, application, reference, conclusion (lit. "flowing together") Tikp 264. opamma˚ application of a simile, "tertium comparationis" Vism 326; DA i.127. diṭṭha˚ (pucchā) a question with reference to observation Nd2 s. v. pucchā; DhsA 55. Saŋsanna
Saŋsanna
[pp. of saŋsīdati or saŋsandati] depressed, ex- hausted Dh 280 ( = osanna DhA iii.410: see ossanna). Saŋsappa
Saŋsappa
(adj.) [fr. saŋ+sṛp] creeping A v.289. Saŋsappati
Saŋsappati
[saŋ+sappati] to creep along, to crawl, move A v.289; VvA 278; DhA iv.49. Saŋsappaniyapariyāya
Saŋsappaniyapariyāya,
the creeping exposition, a dis- cussion of the consequences of certain kinds of kamma, A v.288 sq. Saŋsappin
Saŋsappin
(adj.) = saŋsappa A iv.172. Saŋsaya
Saŋsaya
[cp. Vedic saŋśaya] doubt A ii.24; Nd2 660 ( = vicikicchā etc.); Miln 94; Dhs 425. Saŋsayita
Saŋsayita
(nt.) [pp. of saŋsayati = saŋ+seti of śi; in meaning=saŋsaya] doubt Dāvs i.50. Saŋsarati
Saŋsarati
[saŋ+sarati, of sṛ] to move about continuously, to come again and again J i.335. -- 2. to go through one life after the other, to transmigrate D i.14; DA i.105; ppr. saŋsaranto (& saŋsaraŋ) S iii.149; iv.439; It 109; PvA 166; med. saŋsaramāna Vv 197; ger. ˚saritvā S iii.212; Pug 16. -- pp. saŋsarita & saŋsita. Saŋsaraṇa
Saŋsaraṇa
(nt.) [fr. saŋ+sṛ] 1. moving about, running; ˚lohita blood in circulation (opp. sannicita˚) Vism 261; KhA 62; VbhA 245. -- 2. a movable curtain, a blind that can be drawn aside Vin ii.153. Saŋsarita
Saŋsarita
[pp. of saŋsarati] transmigrated D ii.90; A ii.1; Th 2, 496. a˚ M i.82. Saŋsava
Saŋsava
[fr. saŋ+sru] flowing VvA 227. Saŋsavaka
Saŋsavaka
[fr. saŋsava] N. of a purgatory Vv 5212, cp. VvA 226 sq. Saŋsā̆veti
Saŋsā̆veti
[fr. saŋ+sru] to cause to flow together, to pour into (loc.), to put in J v.268 ( = pakkhipati C.). Saŋsādiyā
Saŋsādiyā
(f.) [cp. *Sk. syavaŋ -- sātikā, on which see Kern, Toev. ii.62, s. v.] a kind of inferior rice J vi.530. Saŋsādeti
Saŋsādeti
Caus. of saŋsīdati (q. v.). Saŋsāmeti
Saŋsāmeti
[Caus. of saŋ+śam] lit. "to smoothe," to fold up (one's sleeping mat), to leave (one's bed), in phrase senāsanaŋ saŋsāmetvā Vin ii.185; iv.24; M i.457; S iii.95, 133; iv.288. Saŋsāyati
Saŋsāyati
[saŋ+sāyati, which stands for sādati (of svad to sweeten). On y>d cp. khāyita>khādita & sankhāyita] to taste, enjoy J iii.201 (aor. samasāyisuŋ: so read for samāsāsisuŋ). Saŋsāra
Saŋsāra
[fr. saŋsarati] 1. transmigration, lit. faring on D i.54; ii.206 (here = existence); M i.81 (saŋsārena suddhi); S ii.178 sq.; A i.10; ii.12=52; Sn 517; Dh 60; J i.115; Pv ii.1311; Vism 544 (in detail), 578, 603 (˚assa kāraka); PvA 63, 243. For description of saŋsāra (its endlessness & inevitableness) see e. g. S ii.178, 184 sq., 263; iii.149 sq.; VbhA 134 (anta -- virahita) & anamatagga (to which add refs. VbhA 45, 182, 259, 260). -- 2. moving on, circulation: vacī˚ exchange of words A i.79.

-- cakka [cp. BSk. saŋsāra -- cakra] the wheel of tr. Vism 198, 201; VvA 105 = PvA 7. -- dukkha the ill of tr. Vism 531; VbhA 145, 149. -- bhaya fear of tr. VbhA 199. -- sāgara the ocean of tr. J iii.241. -- 659 -- Saŋsijjhati
Saŋsijjhati
[saŋ+sidh] to be fulfilled Sdhp 451. Saŋsita
Saŋsita1
= saŋsarita J v.56 (cira -- ratta˚=carita anuciṇṇa C.). Saŋsita
Saŋsita2
[pp. of saŋ+śri] dependent Sdhp 306. Saŋsiddhi
Saŋsiddhi
(f.) [saŋ+siddhi] success Dhtp 420. Saŋsibbita
Saŋsibbita
[pp. of saŋ+sibbati] entwined Vism 1; Miln 102, 148; DhA iii.198. Saŋsīda
Saŋsīda
[fr. saŋsīdati] sinking (down) S iv.180 (v. l. saŋ- sāda). Saŋsīdati
Saŋsīdati
[saŋ+sad] 1. to sink down, to lose heart D i.248; A iii.89 = Pug 65; Th 1, 681; J ii.330. -- 2. to be at an end (said of a path, magga) Vin iii.131; S i.1. -- Caus. saŋsādeti: 1. to get tired, give out M i.214; A i.288. -> 2. to drop, fail in A iv.398 (pañhaŋ, i. e. not answer). -- 3. to place DA i.49. Saŋsīdana
Saŋsīdana
(nt.) [fr. saŋsīdati] = saŋsīda Th 1, 572 (ogha˚). Saŋsīna
Saŋsīna
[saŋ+sīna, pp. of śṛ to crush, Sk. śīrṇa] fallen off, destroyed Sn 44 (˚patta without leaves = patita -- patta C.). Saŋsuddha
Saŋsuddha
(adj.) [saŋ+suddha] pure D i.113; Sn 372, 1107; Nd1 289; Nd2 661; J i.2.

-- gahaṇika of pure descent D i.113; DA i.281. Saŋsuddhi
Saŋsuddhi
(f.) [saŋ+suddhi) purification Sn 788; Nd1 84. Saŋsumbhati
Saŋsumbhati
[saŋ+sumbhati] to beat J vi.53, 88 (˚amāna). Saŋsūcaka
Saŋsūcaka
(adj.) [fr. saŋsūceti] indicating VvA 244, 302. Saŋsūceti
Saŋsūceti
[saŋ+sūcay˚, Denom. fr. sūci] to indicate, show, betray Dāvs v.50; DA i.311. Saŋseda
Saŋseda
[saŋ+seda] sweat, moisture M i.73; ThA 185.

-- ja [cp. BSk saŋsvedaja Divy 627] born or arisen from moisture D iii.230; Miln 128; KhA 247; VbhA 161. Saŋseva
Saŋseva
(adj.) [fr. saŋ+sev] associating A ii.245; v.113 sq. (sappurisa˚ & asappurisa˚); Miln 93. Saŋsevanā
Saŋsevanā
(f.) [fr. saŋsevati] associating Dhs 1326 = Pug 20. Saŋsevā
Saŋsevā
(f.) [fr. saŋseva] worshipping, attending Miln 93 (sneha˚). Saŋsevita
Saŋsevita
[saŋ+sevita] frequented, inhabited J vi.539. Saŋsevin
Saŋsevin
(adj.) = saŋseva J i.488. Saŋhata
Saŋhata1
[pp. of saŋ+han] firm, compact Miln 416; Sdhp 388. Saŋhata
Saŋhata2
[pp. of saŋ+hṛ] DA i.280; see vi˚. Saŋhanati & saŋhanti
Saŋhanati
& saŋhanti [saŋ+han] 1. to join together, reach to J v.372. -- 2. to suppress, allay, destroy A iv.437 (kaṇḍuŋ). -- pp. saŋhata. Saŋhanana
Saŋhanana
(nt.) [fr. saŋhanati] joining together, closing D i.11; J vi.65. Saŋhara
Saŋhara
[fr. saŋ+hṛ] collecting; dus˚ hard to collect Vin iii.148; J iv.36 (here as dussanghara, on which see Kern, Toev. i.121). Saŋharaṇa
Saŋharaṇa
(nt.) [fr. saŋharati] collecting, gathering Dāvs v.33. Cp. upa˚ & sangharaṇa. Saŋharati
Saŋharati
[saŋ+harati] 1. to collect, fold up Vin i.46; ii.117, 150; M iii.169; J i.66, 422; Dāvs iv.12; PvA 73. -- 2. to draw together Vin ii.217. -- 3. to gather up, take up SnA 369 (rūpaŋ). -- 4. to heap up Pv iv.14 (saŋharimha = sañcinimha PvA 279). -- asaŋhāriya (grd.) which cannot be destroyed (see also saŋhīra) S v.219. -> Caus. II. ˚harāpeti to cause to collect, to make gather or grow Vin iv.259 (lomāni), 260 (id.). -- Pass. saŋhīrati (q. v.). -- pp. saŋhata. Cp. upa˚. Saŋhasati
Saŋhasati
[san+hasati] to laugh with M ii.223. Saŋhāni
Saŋhāni
(f.) [saŋ+hāni] shrinking, decrease, dwindling away D ii.305 = M i.49=S ii.2=Dhs 644; DhsA 328. Cp. parihāni. Saŋhāra
Saŋhāra
[fr. saŋ+hṛ] abridgment, compilation PvA 114. Cp. upa˚. Saŋhāraka
Saŋhāraka
[saŋ+hāra+ka] drawing together, a collector S ii.185 = It 17. sabba˚ a kind of mixed perfume J vi.336. Saŋhārima
Saŋhārima
(adj.) [fr. saŋ+hṛ] movable Vism 124; Sn 28, 321. a˚ Vin iv.272. Saŋhita
Saŋhita
[pp. of sandahati] connected, equipped with, possessed of D i.5; M ii.202; S i.103; Dh 101 (gāthā anattha -- pada˚). Often as attha˚ endowed with profit, bringing advantage, profitable D i.189; S ii.223; iv.330; v.417; A iii.196 sq.; v.81; Sn 722. Cp. upa˚. Saŋhīyati
Saŋhīyati
see sandhīyati. Saŋhīra
Saŋhīra
(& saŋhāriya) [grd. of saŋharati] that which can be restrained, conquerable Th 1, 1248; J v.81. a˚ immovable, unconquerable S i.193; Vin ii.96; A iv.141 sq.; Th 1, 649; Sn 1149; J iv.283. See also asaŋhāriya. Saŋhīrati
Saŋhīrati
[Pass. of saŋharati] to be drawn away or caught in (loc.) M iii.188 sq. (paccuppannesu dhammesu); DhsA 420 (id.); J iii.333. Saka
Saka
(adj.) [sa4+ka] own D i.106, 119, 231; ii.173 (sakaŋ te "all be your own," as greeting to the king); M i.79; Vin i.3, 249 (ācariyaka); S v.261 (id.); Sn 861; It 76; Nd1 252; Pv i.51 (ghara); ii.61 (bhātā). -- Opp. assaka2. -- appassaka having little or nothing as one's own ( = daḷidda) A i.261; ii.203; kamma -- ssaka possessing one's own kamma M iii.203 sq.; A v.288; Miln 65; Dhs 1366.

-- gavacaṇḍa violent towards one's own cows, harassing one's own Pug 47. Sakaṭa
Sakaṭa1
(m. & nt.) [cp. Sk. śakaṭa; Vedic śakaṭī] a cart, waggon; a cartload D ii.110; Vin iii.114; J i.191; Miln 238; PvA 102; VbhA 435 (simile of two carts); SnA 58 (udaka -- bharita˚), 137 (bīja˚). sakaṭāni pajāpeti to cause the carts to go on J ii.296.

-- gopaka the guardian of the waggon DhA iv.60. -- bhāra a cart -- load VvA 79. -- mukha the front or opening of the waggon, used as adj. "facing the waggon or the cart" (?) at D ii.234, of the earth -- that is, India as then known -- and at D ii.235 (comp. Mahāvastu iii.208), of six kingdoms in Northern India. At the second passage B. explains that the six kingdoms all debouched alike on the central kingdom, which was hexagonal in shape. This explanation does not fit the other passage. Could sakaṭa there be used of the constellation Rohinī, which in mediaeval times was called the Cart? Cp. Dial. ii.269. -- vāha a cart -- load Pv ii.75. -- vyūha "the waggon array," a wedge -- shaped phalanx J ii.404; iv.343; Vism 384. Sakaṭa
Sakaṭa2
see kasaṭa. Sakaṇika
Sakaṇika
(adj.) [sa+kaṇa+ika] having a mole D i.80; DA i.223. Sakaṇṭaka
Sakaṇṭaka
(adj.) [sa+kaṇṭaka] thorny, dangerous D i.135; Th 2, 352; DA i.296. -- 660 -- Sakaṇṇajappaka
Sakaṇṇajappaka
[sa+kaṇṇa+jappa+ka] whispering in the ear, a method of (secretly) taking votes Vin ii.98 sq. (salāka -- gāha). Sakatā
Sakatā
(f.) ( -- ˚) [abstr. fr. saka] one's own nature, identity, peculiarity: see kamma -- ssakatā & adj. ˚ssakata. It may also be considered as an abstr. formation fr. kamma -- ssaka. Sakadāgāmin
Sakadāgāmin
[sakad = sakid, +āgāmin] "returning once," one who will not be reborn on earth more than once; one who has attained the second grade of saving wisdom Vin i.293; D i.156, 229; iii.107; M i.34; S iii.168; A i.120, 232 sq.; ii.89, 134; iii.348; iv.292 sq., 380; v.138 sq., 372 sq.; DhA iv.66. Sakadāgāmitā
Sakadāgāmitā
(f.) [abstr. fr. last] the state of a "once- returner" D ii.206. Sakabala
Sakabala
(adj.) [sa+kabala] containing a mouthful Vin iv.195. Sakamana
Sakamana
[saka+mana] is Bdhgh's expln of attamana (q. v.), e. g. DA i.129, 255. Sakamma
Sakamma
(nt.) [sa4+kamma] one's own occupation D i.135. Sakaraṇīya
Sakaraṇīya
(adj.) [sa3+karaṇīya] one who still has something to do (in order to attain perfection) D ii.143; Th 1, 1045; Miln 138. Sakaruṇabhāva
Sakaruṇa
-- bhāva [sa3+karuṇa+bhāva] being full of com- passion SnA 318. Sakala
Sakala
(adj.) [cp. Sk. sakala] all, whole, entire Vin ii.109; Vism 321; SnA 132; PvA 93, 97, 111. Cp. sākalya. Sakalikā
Sakalikā
(f.) [fr. sakala = Sk. śakala potsherd] a potsherd; a splinter, bit D ii.341; A ii.199=S iv.197; S i.27= Miln 179; M i.259; A v.9 (˚aggi); J iv.430; Miln 134; KhA 43 (maccha˚); Nett 23; DhsA 319. -- sakalikaŋ sakalikaŋ in little pieces Vin ii.112. -- sakalika -- hīra a skewer J iv.29, 30. Sakasaṭa
Sakasaṭa
(adj.) [sa3+k.] faulty, wrong (lit. bitter) Miln 119 (vacana). Sakāsa
Sakāsa
[sa3+k. = Sk. kāśa] presence; acc. sakāsaŋ towards, to Sn 326; J v.480; PvA 237; loc. sakāse in the presence of, before J iii.24; iv.281; v.394; vi.282. Sakicca
Sakicca
(nt.) [sa4+kicca] one's own duty or business Vism 321 (˚pasuta). Sakiccaya
Sakiccaya
(nt.) [sa4+kiccaya = kṛtya]=sakicca Miln 42; DhsA 196 (˚pasuta). Sakiñcana
Sakiñcana
(adj.) [sa3+kiñcana] having something; (appld) with attachment, full of worldly attachment Sn 620 = Dh i.246; Dh 396 (=rāg'ādīhi kiñcanehi sakiñcana DhA iv.158). Sakid & Sakiŋ
Sakid
& Sakiŋ (adv.) [fr. sa˚ = saŋ] once. (1) sakiŋ: D ii.188; J i.397; DhA iii.116 (sakiŋvijātā itthi= primipara); once more: Miln 238; once for all: Th 2, 466; DhA ii.44; ThA 284. -- (2) sakid (in composition; see also sakad -- āgāmin): in sakid eva once only A ii.238; iv.380; Pug 16; PvA 243; at once Vin i.31. Sakiya
Sakiya
(adj.) [fr. saka, cp. Sk. svakīya] own J ii.177 iii.48, 49; iv.177. Sakuṇa
Sakuṇa
[Vedic śakuna] a bird (esp. with ref. to augury) D i.71 (pakkhin+); Vin iii.147; S i.197; A ii.209; iii.241 sq., 368; J ii.111, 162 (Kandagala); KhA 241. pantha˚ see under pantha. -- f. sakuṇī S i.44. adj. sakuṇa J v.503 (maŋsa).

-- kulāvaka a bird's nest KhA 56. -- patha bird -- course, Npl. Nd1 155. -- pāda bird foot KhA 47. -- ruta the cry of birds Miln 178. -- vatta the habit (i. e. life) of a bird J v.254. -- vijjā bird craft, augury (i. e. understanding the cries of birds) D i.9; DA i.93. Sakuṇaka = sakuṇa
Sakuṇaka
= sakuṇa SnA 27. -- f. sakuṇikā D i.91; Miln 202; J i.171; iv.290. Sakuṇagghi
Sakuṇagghi
(f.) [sakuṇa+˚ghi, f. of ˚gha] a kind of hawk (lit. "bird -- killer") S v.146; J ii.59; Miln 365. Cp. vyagghīnasa. Sakuṇita
Sakuṇita
at PvA 123 read sankucita. Sakunta
Sakunta
[cp. Sk. śakunta] a bird; a kind of vulture Sn 241; Dh 92, 174; J iv.225; vi.272. Sakuntaka
Sakuntaka
= sakunta Vin i.137. Sakumāra
Sakumāra
(adj.) [sa2+kumāra] of the same age; a play- mate J v.360, 366. Sakula
Sakula
[cp. Epic Sk. śakula] a kind of fish J v.405. Sakka
Sakka
(adj.) [fr. śak, cp. Sk. śakya] able, possible Sn 143. sasakkaŋ ( = sa3+s.) as much as possible, as much as one is able to M i.415, 514. Sakkacca(ŋ)
Sakkacca(ŋ)
(adv.) [orig. ger. of sakkaroti] respectfully, carefully, duly, thoroughly; often with uppaṭṭhahati to attend, serve with due honour. -- Vv 125; Miln 305; J iv.310. The form sakkaccaŋ is the older and more usual, e. g. at D ii.356 sq.; S iv.314; A ii.147; iv.392; Vin iv.190, 275; Th 1, 1054; J i.480; Dh 392; PvA 26, 121. The BSk. form is satkṛtya, e. g. MVastu i.10. -- kārin zealous S iii.267; Miln 94. -- dāna M iii.24. Sakkata
Sakkata
[pp. of sakkaroti] honoured, duly attendo D i.114, 116; ii.167; Nd 73; J i.334; Miln 21; SnA 43 Usually combd with garukata, pūjita, mānita. Sakkati
Sakkati
[ṣvaṣk; Dhtp 9: gamana] to go; see osakkati & cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 302. Other P. cpds. are ussakkati & paṭisakkati. Sakkatta
Sakkatta
(nt.) [fr. Sakka = Indra] Śakraship, the position as the ruler of the devas M iii. 65; J i.315; Vism 301 (brahmatta+). ˚rajja a kingdom rivalling Sakka's J i.315. Sakkaroti
Sakkaroti
[sat+kṛ] to honour, esteem, treat with respect, receive hospitably; often combd with garukaroti, māneti, pūjeti, e. g. D i.91, 117; iii.84; M i.126. ppr. ˚karonto D ii.159; Pot. ˚kareyya It 110; aor. ˚kari PvA 54; ger. ˚katvā Pug 35; J vi.14, & ˚kacca (q. v.). -- pp. sakkata. -- Caus. sakkāreti = sakkaroti; Mhvs 32, 44; grd. sakkāreyya Th 1, 186 (so read for ˚kareyya). Sakkā
Sakkā
(indecl.) [originally Pot. of sakkoti = Vedic śakyāt; cp. Prk. sakkā with Pischel's expln in Prk. Gr. § 465. A corresponding formation, similar in meaning, is labbhā (q. v.)] possible (lit. one might be able to); in the older language still used as a Pot., but later reduced to an adv. with infin. E. g. sakkā sāmaaññphalaŋpaññāpetuŋ would one be able to point out a result of samaṇaship, D i.51; khādituŋ na sakkā, one could not eat, J ii.16; na sakkā maggo akkhātuŋ, the way cannot be shown, Mil 269; sakkā etaŋ mayā ñātuŋ? can I ascertain this? D i.187; sakkā honti imāni aṭṭha sukhāni vindituŋ, these eight advantages are able to be enjoyed, J i.8; sakkā etaŋ abhavissa kātuŋ, this would be possible to do, D i.168; imaŋ sakkā gaṇhituŋ, this one we can take J iv.219. See also SnA 338, 376 (=labbhā); PvA 12, 69, 96. Sakkāya
Sakkāya
[sat+kāya, cp. BSk. satkāya Divy 46; AvŚ i.85. See on expln of term Mrs. Rh. D. in J.R.A.S. 1894, 324; Franke Dīgha trsln p. 45; Geiger P.Gr. § 241; Kern. Toev. ii.52] the body in being, the existing body or group ( = -- nikāya q. v.); as a t.t. in P. psychology almost equal to individuality; identified with the five khandhas M i.299; S iii.159; iv.259; A ii.34; Th 2, 170, 239; DhsA 348. See also D iii.216 (cp. Dial. iii.2161); A iii.293, 401; Nd1 109.

-- diṭṭhi theory of soul, heresy of individuality, speculation as to the eternity or otherwise of one's own individuality M i.300 = iii.17=DhS 1003, S iii.16 sq. In these passages this is explained as the belief that in one or other of the khandhas there is a permanent entity, an attā. The same explanation, at greater length, in the Diṭṭhigata Sutta (Ps i.143 -- 151). As delusions about the soul or ghost can arise out of four sorts of bias (see abhinivesa) concerning each of the five khandhas, we have twenty kinds of s˚ diṭṭhi: fifteen of these are kinds of sakkāya -- vatthukā sassata -- diṭṭhi, and five are kinds of s˚ -- vatthukā uccheda -- diṭṭhi (ibid. 149, 150). Gods as well as men are s˚ pariyāpannā S iii.85; and so is the eye, DhsA 308. When the word diṭṭhi is not expressed it is often implied, Th 2, 199, 339; Sn 231. S˚ diṭṭhi is the first Bond to be broken on entering the Path (see saŋyojana); it is identical with the fourth kind of Grasping (see upādāna); it is opposed to Nibbāna, S iv.175; is extinguished by the Path, M i.299; S iii.159; iv.260; and is to be put away by insight DhsA 346. -- See further: D iii.234; A iii.438; iv.144 sq.; Kvu 81; Sn 950; Dhs 1003; and on term Dhs. trsln § 1003; K.S. iii.80, n. 3. -- nirodha the destruction of the existing body or of individuality A ii.165 sq.; iii.246; D iii.216. -- samudaya the rise of individuality D iii.216; Nd1 109. -- 661 -- Sakkāra
Sakkāra
[fr. sat+kṛ] hospitality, honour, worship Vin i.27, 183; A ii.203; J i.63; ii.9, 104; Dh 75; Miln 386; Dhs 1121; Vism 270; SnA 284; VbhA 466. ˚ŋ karoti to pay reverence, to say goodbye DhA i.398. Cp. lābha. Sakkāreti
Sakkāreti
is Caus. of sakkaroti (q. v.). Sakkuṇeyyatta
Sakkuṇeyyatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. sakkuṇeyya, grd. of sak- koti] possibility; a˚ impossibility PvA 48. Sakkoti
Sakkoti
[śak; def. Dhtp 508 etc. as "sattiyaŋ": see satti] to be able. Pres. sakkoti D i.246; Vin i.31; Miln 4; DhA i.200; sakkati [ = Class. Sk. śakyate] Nett 23. Pot. sakkuṇeyya J i.361; PvA 106; archaic 1st pl. sakkuṇemu J v.24; Pv ii.81. ppr. sakkonto Miln 27. -- Fut. sakkhati Sn 319; sakkhīti [=Sk. śakṣyati] M i.393; pl. 3rd sakkhinti Sn 28; 2nd sg. sagghasi Sn 834; 3rd sg. sakkhissati DhA iv.87. -- Aor. asakkhi D i.96, 236; PvA 38; sakkhi Miln 5; J v.116; 1st pl. asakkhimha PvA 262, & asakkhimhā Vin iii.23; 3rd sg. also sakkuṇi Mhvs 7, 13. -- grd. sakkuṇeyya (neg. a˚) (im)possible J i.55; PvA 122. -- sakka & sakkā see sep. Sakkharā
Sakkharā
(f.) [cp. Vedic śarkarā gravel] 1. gravel, grit Vin iii.147 = J ii.284; J i.192; A i.253; D i.84; Pv iii.228; DhA iv.87. -- 2. potsherd VvA 157; PvA 282, 285. -- 3. grain, granule, crystal, in loṇa˚ a salt crystal S ii.276; DhA i.370; SnA 222. -- 4. (granulated) sugar J i.50. Sakkharikā
Sakkharikā
(f.) [fr. sakkharā] in loṇa˚ a piece of salt crystal Vin i.206; ii.237. Sakkharilla
Sakkharilla
(adj.) [ = sakkharika, fr. sakkharā] containing gravel, pebbly, stony A iv.237. Sakkhali
Sakkhali
(& ˚ikā) (f.) [cp. Sk. śaṣkulī] 1. the orifice of the ear: see kaṇṇa˚. -- 2. a sort of cake or sweetmeat (cp. sanguḷikā) A iii.76 (T. sakkhalakā; v. l. ˚likā & sankulikā); Vin iii.59; J ii.281. Sakkhi
Sakkhi1
[sa3+akkhin; cp. Sk. sākṣin] an eyewitness D ii.237 (nom. sg. sakkhī = with his own eyes, as an eyewitness); Sn 479, 921, 934 (sakkhi dhammaŋ adassi, where the corresp. Sk. form would be sākṣād); J i.74. -- kāya -- sakkhī a bodily witness, i. e. one who has bodily experienced the 8 vimokkhas A iv.451; Vism 93, 387, 659. -- sakkhiŋ karoti [Sk. sākṣī karoti] (1) to see with one's own eyes S ii.255; (2) to call upon as a witness (with gen. of person) J vi.280 (rājāno); DhA ii.69 (Moggallānassa sakkhiŋ katvā); PvA 217 (but at 241 as "friendship"). Note. The P. form is rather to be taken as an adv. ("as present") than adj.: sakkhiŋ & sakkhi, with reduced sakkhi˚ (cp. sakid & sakiŋ). See also sacchi˚.

-- diṭṭha seen face to face M i.369; D i.238; J vi.233. -- puṭṭha asked as a witness Sn 84, 122; Pug 29. -- bhabbatā the state of becoming an eyewitness, of experiencing M i.494; DhsA 141. -- sāvaka a contemporaneous or personal disciple D ii.153. Sakkhī
Sakkhī
(f.) or sakkhi2 (nt.) [cp. Sk. sākhya] friendship (with somebody = instr.) S i.123=A v.46 (janena karoti sakkhiŋ make friends with people); Pv iv.157; iv.165; J iii.493; iv.478. Cp. sakhya. Sakya
Sakya:
see Dictionary of Names. In cpd. ˚puttiya (be- longing to the Sakya son) in general meaning of "a (true) follower of the Buddha," A iv.202; Vin i.44; Ud 44; a˚ not a follower of the B. Vin iii.25. Sakhi
Sakhi
[Vedic sakhi m. & f.] a companion, friend; nom. sakhā J ii.29; 348; acc. sakhāraŋ J ii.348; v.509; & sakhaŋ J ii.299; instr. sakhinā J iv.41; abl. sakhārasmā J iii.534; gen. sakhino J vi.478; voc. sakhā J iii.295; nom. pl. sakhā J iii.323; & sakhāro J iii.492; gen. sakhīnaŋ J iii.492; iv.42; & sakhānaŋ J ii.228. In compn with bhū as sakhi˚ & sakhī˚, e. g. sakhibhāva friendship J vi.424; PvA 241; & sakhībhāva J iii.493. Sakhikā
Sakhikā
(f.) [fr. sakhi] a female friend J iii.533. Sakhitā
Sakhitā
(f.) [abstr. fr. sakhi] friendship Th 1, 1018, 1019. Sakhila
Sakhila
(adj.) [fr. sakhi] kindly in speech, congenial D i.116; Vin ii.11; J i.202, 376; Miln 207; Pv iv.133 ( = mudu PvA 230). Cp. sākhalya.

-- vācatā use of friendly speech Dhs 1343. Sakhī
Sakhī
(f.) [to sakhi] a female friend J ii. 27, 348. Sakhura
Sakhura
(adj.) [sa3+khura] with the hoofs J i.9; Bdhgh on M. i.78 (see M i.536). Sakhya
Sakhya
(nt.) [Sk. sākhya; cp. sakkhī] friendship J ii.409; vi.353 sq. Sagandhaka
Sagandhaka
(adj.) [sa3+gandha+ka] fragment Dh 52. Sagabbha
Sagabbha
(adj.) [sa3+gabbha] with a foetus, pregnant Mhvs 33, 46. Sagaha
Sagaha
(adj.) [sa3+gaha2] full of crocodiles It 57, 114. As sagāha at S iv.157. Sagāmeyya
Sagāmeyya
(adj.) [grd. formation fr. gāma,+sa2 = saŋ˚) hailing from the same village S i.36, 60. Sagārava
Sagārava
(adj.) [sa3+gārava] respectful, usually combd with sappatissa & other syn., e. g. Vin i.45; It 10; Vism 19, 221. Sagāravatā
Sagāravatā
(f.) [fr. sagārava] respect Th 1, 589. Saguṇa
Saguṇa
(adj.) [either sa3+guṇa1 1, as given under guṇa1; or sa˚ = saŋ˚ once, as in sakṛt,+guṇa1 2] either "with the string," or "in one"; Vin i.46 (saguṇaŋ karoti to put together, to fold up; C ekato katvā). This interpretation (as "put together") is much to be preferred to the one given under guṇa1 1; saguṇaŋ katvā belongs to sanghāṭiyo, and not to kāyabandhanaŋ, thus: "the upper robes are to be given, putting them into one (bundle)." Saguḷa
Saguḷa
[sa3+guḷa2] a cake with sugar J vi.524. Cp. sangu- ḷikā. -- 662 -- Sagocara
Sagocara
[sa2 = saŋ, +gocara] companion, mate (lit. having the same activity) J ii.31. Sagotta
Sagotta
[sa2 = saŋ,+gotta] a kinsman J v.411; cp. vi.500. Sagga
Sagga
[Vedic svarga, svar+ga] 1. heaven, the next world, popularly conceived as a place of happiness and long life (cp. the pop. etym. of "suṭṭhu -- aggattā sagga" PvA 9; "rūpādīhi visayehi suṭṭhu aggo ti saggo" Vism 427); usually the kām'âvacara -- devaloka, sometimes also the 26 heavens (ThA 74). Sometimes as sagga ṭhāna (cp. ˚loka), e. g. J vi.210. -- Vin i.223; D ii.86; iii.52, 146 sq.; M i.22, 483; S i.12; A i.55 sq., 292 sq.; ii.83 sq.; iii.244, 253 sq.; iv.81; v.135 sq.; Sn 224 (loc. pl. saggesu); It 14; Pv i.13; Vism 103, 199.

-- âpāya heaven and hell Th 2, 63; Sn 647. -- ārohaṇa ( -- sopāna) (the stairs) leading to heaven (something like Jacob's ladder) Vism 10. -- kathā discourse or talk about heaven Vin i.15 (cp. anupubbikathā) -- kāya the heavenly assembly (of the gods) J vi.573. -- dvāra heaven's gate Vism 57. -- patha = sagga J i.256. -- pada heavenly region, heaven J ii.5; iv.272 (= saggaloka). -- magga the way to heaven J vi.287; DhA i.4. -- loka the heavenworld M i.73; J iv.272. -- saŋvattanika leading to heaven D iii.66. Sagguṇa
Sagguṇa
[sat+guṇa] good quality, virtue Sdhp 313. Saggh˚
Saggh˚
see sakkoti. Saghaccā
Saghaccā
(f.) [sat+ghaccā] just or true killing J i.177. Sankacchā
Sankacchā
(f.) [saŋ+kacchā1] part of a woman's dress, bodice, girdle (?) J v.96 (suvaṇṇa˚). Sankacchika
Sankacchika
(nt.) [fr. sankacchā] a part of clothing, belt, waist -- cloth Vin ii.272; iv.345. The C. expln is incorrect. Sankaṭīra
Sankaṭīra
(nt.) [unexplained] a dust heap D ii.160; S ii.270; M i.334. Expld as "sankāra -- ṭṭhāna" K.S. ii.203. Sankaḍḍhati
Sankaḍḍhati
[saŋ+kaḍḍhati] 1. to collect M i.135; J i.254; iv.224; Dh i.49; Pass. ˚khaḍḍiyati Vism 251 (ppr. ˚iyamāna being collected, comprising). -- 2. to examine, scrutinize J vi.351 (cintetvā ˚kaḍḍhituŋ). Sankati
Sankati
[śank, Vedic śankate, cp. Lat. cunctor to hesitate; Goth. hāhan = Ags. hangon "to hang"; Oicel. hāētta danger] to doubt, hesitate, to be uncertain about; pres. (med.) 1st sg. sanke S i.111; J iii.253 (=āsankāmi C.); vi.312 (na sanke maraṇ'āgamāya); Pot. sanketha J ii.53=v.85. Pass. sankīyati S iii.=Kvu 141; A iv.246. Sankathati
Sankathati
[saŋ+kathati] to name, explain. Pass. sanka- thīyati DhsA 390. Sankanta
Sankanta
[pp. of sankamati] gone together with ( -- ˚), gone over to, joined Vin i.60; iv.217. Sankantati
Sankantati
[saŋ+kantati] to cut all round, M iii.275. Sankanti
Sankanti
(f.) [fr. sankamati] transition, passage Kvu 569; Vism 374 sq. Sankantika
Sankantika
[fr. sankanta] a school of thought (lit. gone over to a faction), a subdivision of the Sabbatthivādins S v.14; Vism 374 sq.; Mhvs 5, 6; Dpvs 5, 48; Mhbv 97. Sankappa
Sankappa
[saŋ+kḷp, cp. kappeti fig. meaning] thought, intention, purpose, plan D iii.215; S ii.143 sq.; A i.281; ii.36; Dh 74; Sn 154, 1144; Nd1 616 ( = vitakka ñāṇa paññā buddhi); Dhs 21; DhA ii.78. As equivalent of vitakka also at D iii.215; A iv.385; Dhs 7. -- kāma˚ a lustful thought A iii.259; v.31. paripuṇṇa˚ having one's intentions fulfilled M i.192; iii.276; D iii.42; A v.92, 97 sq.; sara˚ memories & hopes M i.453; S iv.76; vyāpāda˚, vihiŋsa˚, malicious, cruel purposes, M ii.27 sq.; sammā˚ right thoughts or intentions, one of the angas of the 8 -- fold Path (ariya -- magga) Vin i.10; D ii.312; A iii.140; VbhA 117. Sankappa is defd at DhsA 124 as (cetaso) abhiniropanā, i. e. application of the mind. See on term also Cpd. 238. Sankappeti
Sankappeti
[Den. fr. sankappa] 1. to imagine; wish A ii.36; M i.402; Pug 19. -- 2. to determine, to think about, strive after J iii.449 sq. Sankamati
Sankamati
[saŋ+kamati] 1. to go on, to pass over to (acc.), to join D i.55 (ākāsaŋ indriyāni s.); Vin i.54; ii.138 (bhikkhū rukkhā rukkhaŋ s., climb fr. tree to tree); Kvu 565 sq. (jhānā jhānaŋ). -- 2. to transmigrate Miln 71 sq. (+paṭisandahati). -- grd. sankamanīya to be passed on or transferred Vin i.190; cīvara˚ a dress that should be handed over, which does not belong to one Vin iv.282. -- pp. sankanta. -- Caus. sankāmeti (1) to pass over, to cause to go, to move, to shift Vin iii.49, 58, 59. -- 2. to come in together (sensations to the heart) DhsA 264. -- Cp. upa˚. Sankama
Sankama
[fr. saŋ+kram] a passage, bridge M i.439; Vin iii.127; J iii.373 (attānaŋ ˚ŋ katvā yo sotthiŋ samatārayi); Miln 91, 229. Sankamana
Sankamana
(nt.) [fr. sankamati] lit. "going over," i e. step; hence "bridge," passage, path S i.110; Vv 5222; 775; Pv ii.78; ii.925; J vi.120 (papā˚). Cp. upa˚. Sankampati
Sankampati
[saŋ+kampati] to tremble, shake Vin i.12; D ii.12, 108; J i.25. -- Caus. sankampeti id. D ii.108. Sankara
Sankara1
(fight, confusion) wrongly for sangara Nett 149, in quot. fr. M iii.187. Sankara
Sankara2
(adj.) [cp. Sk. śankara] blissful Mhbv 4 (sabba˚). Sankalana
Sankalana
(nt.) [fr. saŋ+kal to produce] addition DA i.95; MA i.2. Sankalaha
Sankalaha
[saŋ+kalaha] inciting words, quarrel J v.393. Sankasāyati
Sankasāyati
[fr. saŋ+kṛṣ, kasati? Or has it anything to do with kasāya?] to become weak, to fail S i.202; ii.277; iv.178; A i.68. Sankassara
Sankassara
(adj.) [doubtful, if Vedic sankasuka] doubtful; wicked Vin ii.236 (cp. Vin. Texts iii.300); S i.49 = Dh 312 (expld as "sankāhi saritabba, āsankāhi sarita, ussankita, parisankita" DhA iii.485, thus taken as sankā+sṛ by Bdhgh; of course not cogent); A ii.239; iv.128, 201; S i.66 (˚ācāra="suspecting all" trsln); iv.180; Th 1, 277; Pug 27. Sankā
Sankā
(f.) [fr. śank: see sankati] doubt, uncertainty, fear (cp. visanka) J vi.158; DhA iii.485. Sankāpeti
Sankāpeti
[fr. saŋ+kḷp] to prepare, get ready, undertake Vin i.137 (vass'āvāsaŋ); S iv.312. Sankāyati
Sankāyati
[Denom. fr. sankā; Dhtp 4 defines sank as "sankāyaŋ"] to be uncertain about Vin ii.274. Cp. pari˚. Sankāra
Sankāra
[fr. saŋ+kṛ] rubbish Vin i.48; iv.265; J i.315; ii.196.

-- kūṭa rubbish heap, dust heap M ii.7; Pug 33; Miln 365; DhA i.174. Cp. kacavara & kattara. -- cola a rag picked up from a rubbish heap J iv.380. -- ṭhāna dust heap Th 1, 1175, J i.244; Vism 250; DhA ii.27. -- dhāna id. Dh 58. -- yakkha a rubbish heap demon J iv.379. Sankāsa
Sankāsa
[saŋ+kāsa, of kāś, cp. okāsa] appearance; ( -- ˚) having the appearance of, like, similar J ii.150; v.71, 155, 370 (puñña˚ = sadisa C.); Bu 17, 21; Miln 2. Sankāsana
Sankāsana
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. saŋ+kāś] explanation, illus- tration S v.430; Nett 5, 8, 38; SnA 445 (+pakāsana). Sankiṇṇa
Sankiṇṇa
[pp. of sankirati] mixed; impure S iii.71; A iv.246.

-- parikha having the trenches filled; said of one who is free of saŋsāra M i.139; A iii.84; Nd2 p. 161. -- 663 -- Sankita
Sankita
[fr. śank] anxious, doubtful J v.85; Mhvs 7, 15; SnA 60. Cp. pari˚, vi˚. Sankittana
Sankittana
(nt.) [saŋ+kittana] proclaiming, making known PvA 164. Sankitti
Sankitti
(f.) [perhaps saŋ+kitti] derivation & meaning very doubtful; Bdhgh's expln at PugA 231 is not to be taken as reliable, viz. "sankittetvā katabhattesu hoti. dubbhikkha -- samaye kira acela -- kāsāvakā acelakānaŋ atthāya tato tato taṇḍul'ādīni samādapetvā bhattaŋ pacanti, ukkaṭṭhâcelako tato na paṭigaṇhāti." D i.166 (trsln Dial. i.229 "he will not accept food collected, i. e. by the faithful in time of drought"; Neumann "not from the dirty"; Franke "nichts von Mahlzeiten, für die die Mittel durch Aufruf beschafft sind"?); M i.77; A ii.206; Pug 55. It may be something like "convocation." Sankin
Sankin
(adj.) [fr. śank] anxious Mhvs 35, 101. Sankiya
Sankiya
(adj.) [grd. fr. śankati] 1. apt to be suspected It 67. -- 2. anxious J i.334. Sankiraṇa
Sankiraṇa
(nt.) [fr. saŋ+kirati] an astrological t.t., denoting the act of or time for collecting or calling in of debts (Bdhgh; doubtful) D i.11; DA i.96; cp. Dial. i.23. Sankirati
Sankirati
[saŋ+kirati] to mix together; Pass. sankīyati (q. v.); pp. sankiṇṇa. Sankiliṭṭha
Sankiliṭṭha
[pp. of sankilissati] stained, tarnished, impure, corrupt, foul D i.247; S ii.271; A iii.124; v.169; Dh 244; J ii.418; Dhs 993, 1243; Pv iv.123 (kāyena vācāya ca); DhsA 319. Sankilissati
Sankilissati
[saŋ+kilissati, cp. BSk. sankliśyati Divy 57] to become soiled or impure D i.53; S iii.70; Dh 165; J ii.33, 271. -- pp. sankiliṭṭha. -- Caus. sankileseti. Sankilissana
Sankilissana
(nt.) [fr. sankilissati] staining, defiling; getting defiled VvA 329. Sankilesa
Sankilesa
[saŋ+kilesa] impurity, defilement, corruption, sinfulness Vin i.15; D i.10, 53, 247 (opp. visuddhi); M i.402; S iii.69; A ii.11; iii.418 sq.; v.34; J i.302; Dhs 993, 1229; Nett 100; Vism 6, 51, 89; DhsA 165. Sankilesika
Sankilesika
(adj.) [fr. sankilesa] baneful, sinful D i.195; iii.57; A ii.172; Dhs 993 (cp. DhsA 345); Tikp 333, 353. Sankīyati
Sankīyati
[Pass. of sankirati, saŋ+kīr; Sk. ˚kīryate> *kiyyati>P. ˚kīyati] to become confused or impure S iii.71; A ii.29; iv.246. Sankīḷati
Sankīḷati
[saŋ+kīḷati] to play or sport D i.91; A iv.55, 343; DA i.256. Sanku
Sanku
[cp. Vedic śanku] a stake, spike; javelin M i.337; S iv.168; J vi.112; DhA i.69. -- ayo˚ an iron stake A iv.131.

-- patha a path full of stakes & sticks Vv 8411; J iii.485, 541; Miln 280; Vism 305. -- sata a hundred sticks, hundreds of sticks J vi.112; Vism 153 (both passages same simile with the beating of an ox -- hide). -- samāhata set with iron spikes, N. of a purgatory M i.337; J vi.453. Sankuka
Sankuka
[fr. sanku] a stake VvA 338. Cp. khāṇuka. Sankucati
Sankucati
[saŋ+kucati: see kuñcita] to become contracted, to shrink DhsA 376. -- pp. ˚kucita. -- Caus. ˚koceti. Sankucita
Sankucita
[pp. of sankucati] shrunk, contracted, clenched (of the first: ˚hattha) J i.275; vi.468 (˚hattha, opposed to pasārita -- hattha); DA i.287; PvA 123, 124. Sankuṭika
Sankuṭika
[fr. saŋ+*kuṭ kuc, cp. kuṭila] doubled up J ii.68; cp. J.P.T.S. 1884, 102. Sankuṭita
Sankuṭita
[ = last] doubled up, shrivelled, shrunk; J ii.225; Miln 251, 362; DhsA 376; Vism 255 (where KhA reads bahala); VbhA 238. Sankuṭila
Sankuṭila
(adj.) [saŋ+kuṭila] curved, winding Miln 297. Sankuṇḍita
Sankuṇḍita
[pp. of saŋ+kuṇḍ: see kuṇḍa] contorted, dis- torted PvA 123. Sankuddha
Sankuddha
[saŋ+kuddha] angry D ii.262. Sankupita
Sankupita
[saŋ+kupita] shaken, enraged S i.222. Sankuppa
Sankuppa
(adj.) [saŋ+kuppa] to be shaken, movable; a˚ immovable Th 1, 649; Sn 1149. Sankula
Sankula
(adj.) [saŋ+kula] crowded, full Sdhp 603. Sankuli
Sankuli
[cp. sakkhali 2 & sanguḷikā] a kind of cake J vi.580. Sankulya
Sankulya
(nt.) = sankuli J vi.524. Sankusaka
Sankusaka
(adj.) [cp. Sk. sankasuka crumbling up] con- trary; neg. a˚ J vi.297 ( = appaṭiloma C.). Sankusumita
Sankusumita
(adj.) [saŋ+kusumita] flowering, in blossom J v.420; Miln 319. Sanketa
Sanketa
[saŋ+keta: see ketu] intimation, agreement, engagement, appointed place, rendezvous Vin i.298; Miln 212; Nett 15, 18; cp. Cpd. 6, 33. sanketaŋ gacchati to keep an appointment, to come to the rendezvous Vin ii.265. asanketena without appointing a place Vin i.107. vassika˚ the appointed time for keeping the rainy season Vin i.298.

-- kamma agreement Vin iii.47, 53, 78. Sanketana
Sanketana
(nt.) = sanketa, ˚ṭṭhāna place of rendezvous DhA ii.261. Sankeḷāyati
Sankeḷāyati
[saŋ+keḷāyati] to amuse oneself (with) A iv.55. Sankoca
Sankoca
[saŋ+koca, of kuñc: see kuñcita] contraction (as a sign of anger or annoyance), grimace (mukha˚) PvA 103; also as hattha˚, etc. at PvA 124. Sankocana
Sankocana
(nt.) = sankoca J iii.57 (mukha˚); DhA iii.270; Dhtp 809. Sankoceti
Sankoceti
[Caus. of sankucati] to contract J i.228; DhsA 324. Sankopa
Sankopa
see sankhepa. Sankha
Sankha1
[cp. Vedic śankha; Gr. ko/gxos shell, measure of capacity, & ko/xlos; Lat. congius a measure] a shell, conch; mother -- of -- pearl; a chank, commonly used as a trumpet D i.79; ii.297 = M i.58; A ii.117; iv.199; Vv 8110; J i.72; ii.110; vi.465, 580; Miln 21 (dhamma˚); DhA i.18. Combined with paṇava (small drum) Vism 408; J vi.21; or with bheri (large drum) Miln 21; Vism 408.

-- ûpama like a shell, i. e. white J v.396, cp. vi.572. -- kuṭṭhin a kind of leper; whose body becomes as white as mother -- of -- pearl DhA i.194, 195. -- thāla mother ofpearl, (shell -- ) plate Vism 126 (sudhota˚), 255. -- dhama a trumpeter D i.259 = M ii.19; M ii.207=S iv.322. -- dhamaka a conch blower, trumpeter J i.284; vi.7. -- nābhi a kind of shell Vin i.203; ii.117. -- patta motherof -- pearl DhA i.387. -- muṇḍika the shell -- tonsure, a kind of torture M i.87; A i.47; ii.122. -- mutta mother -- ofpearl J v.380 (C expls as "shell -- jewel & pearl -- jewel"); vi.211, 230. -- likhita polished like mother -- of -- pearl; bright, perfect D i.63, 250; S ii.219; A v.204; Vin i.181; Pug 57; DA i.181; DhA iv.195. See also under likhita, & cp. Franke, Wiener Zeitschrift 1893, 357. -- vaṇṇa pearl -- white J iii.477; M i.58=A iii.324. -- sadda the sound of a chank A ii.186; Vism 408; Dhs 621. -- silā "shell -- stone," a precious stone, mother -- of -- pearl (?) Ud 54; J iv.85; Pv ii.64. Frequent in BSk., e. g. AvŚ i.184, 201, 205; Divy 291. -- 664 -- Sankha
Sankha2
[etym.?] a water plant (combd with sevāla) Miln 35. See detail under paṇṇaka 2. Sankhata
Sankhata
[pp. of sankharoti; Sk. saŋskṛta] 1. put together, compound; conditioned, produced by a combination of causes, "created," brought about as effect of actions in former births S ii.26; iii.56; Vin ii.284; It 37, 88; J ii.38; Nett 14; Dhs 1085; DhsA 47. As nt. that which is produced from a cause, i. e. the sankhāras S i.112; A i.83, 152; Nett 22. asankhata not put together, not proceeding from a cause Dhs 983 (so read for sankhata), 1086; Ep. of nibbāna "the Unconditioned" (& therefore unproductive of further life) A i.152; S iv.359 sq.; Kvu 317 sq.; Pv iii.710 ( = laddhanāma amataŋ PvA 207); Miln 270; Dhs 583 (see trsln ibid.), 1439. The discernment of higher jhāna- states as sankhata is a preliminary to the attainment of Arahantship M iii.244. Cp. abhi˚; visankhita; visankhāra. -- 2. cooked, dressed Mhvs 32, 39. -- 3. embellished Mhvs 22, 29.

-- lakkhaṇa properties of the sankhata, i. e. production, decay and change A i.152; VvA 29. Sankhati
Sankhati
(f.) [cp. Sk. saŋskṛti] cookery M i.448. Sankhaya
Sankhaya
[saŋ+khaya] destruction, consumption, loss, end Vin i.42; D ii.283; M i.152; S i.2, 124; iv.391; It 38; Dh 282 ( = vināsa DhA iii.421), 331; J ii.52; v.465; Miln 205, 304. Sankharoti
Sankharoti
[saŋ+kṛ] to put together, prepare, work PvA 287. a -- sankhārāna S i.126. Ger. sankharitvā S ii.269 (v. l. sankhāditvā, as is read at id. p. Vin ii.201). Cp. abhi˚. -- pp. sankhata. Sankhalā
Sankhalā
(f.) [cp. Sk. śṛnkhalā] a chain Th 2, 509. aṭṭhi˚ a chain of bones, skeleton A iii.97. As ˚kankalā at Th 2, 488. Sankhalikā
Sankhalikā
(f.) [fr. sankhalā] a chain S i.76; J iii.168; vi.3; Nd2 304iii; Miln 149, 279; DhA iv.54; PvA 152. Sometimes sankhalika (esp. in composition), e. g. J iii.125 (˚bandhana); vi.3; Miln 279. -- aṭṭhi˚ a chain of bones, a skeleton [cp. BSk. asthi -- sankhalikā MVastu i.21] D ii.296 = M i.58; Vin iii.105; J i.433; Pv ii.1211; DhA iii.479. -- deva˚ a magic chain J ii.128; v.92. Sankhā
Sankhā
(f.) & Sankhyā (f.) [fr. saŋ+khyā] 1. enumeration, calculation, estimating D ii.277; M i.109; Miln 59 -> 2. number Dāvs i.25. -- 3. denomination, definition, word, name (cp. on term K.S. i.321) S iii.71 sq.; iv.376 sq.; Nd2 617 ( = uddesa gaṇanā paññatti); Dhs 1306; Miln 25. -- sankhaŋ gacchati to be styled, called or defined; to be put into words D i.199, 201; Vin ii.239; M i.190, 487; A i.68, 244=ii.113; Pug 42; Nett 66 sq.; Vism 212, 225, 235, 294 (khy); SnA 167 (khy); DhsA 11 (khy). sankhaŋ gata (cp. sankhāta) is called DA i.41 (uyyānaŋ Ambalaṭṭhikā t'eva s. g.). sankhaŋ na upeti (nopeti) cannot be called by a name, does not count, cannot be defined It 54; Sn 209, 749, 911, 1074; Nd1 327; Nd2 617. Sankhāta
Sankhāta
[pp. of sankhāyati] agreed on, reckoned; ( -- ˚) so -- called, named D i.163 (akusala˚ dhammā); iii.65, 133 = Vin iii.46 (theyya˚ what is called theft); DA i.313 (the sambodhi, by which is meant that of the three higher stages); DhsA 378 (khandha -- ttaya˚ kāya, cp. Expos. ii.485); PvA 40 (medha˚ paññā), 56 (hattha˚ pāṇi), 131 (pariccāga˚ atidāna), 163 (caraṇa˚ guṇa).

-- dhamma one who has examined or recognized the dhamma ("they who have mastered well the truth of things" K.S. ii.36), an Ep. of the arahant S ii.47; iv.210; Sn 70 (˚dhammo, with expln Nd2 618b: "vuccati ñāṇaŋ" etc.; "sankhāta -- dh. = ñāta -- dhammo," of the paccekabuddha), 1038 (˚dhammā=vuccanti arahanto khīṇāsavā Nd2 618a), Dh 70 (T. sankhata˚, but DhA ii.63 sankhāta˚). Sankhādati
Sankhādati
[saŋ+khādati] to masticate Vin ii.201 = S ii.269 (reads ˚kharitvā); A iii.304 sq.; J i.507. -- pp. ˚khādita. Sankhādita
Sankhādita
[pp. of sankhādati] chewed, masticated KhA 56, 257; VbhA 241 (where Vism 257 reads ˚khāyita). Sankhāna
Sankhāna1
(nt.) & Sankhyāna (nt.) [fr. saŋ+khyā, cp. sankhā] calculation, counting D i.11; M i.85; DA i.95; Dhtp 613 (khy). Sankhāna
Sankhāna2
(nt.) [?] a strong leash ThA 292 (where Th 2, 509 reads sankhalā). Sankhāyaka
Sankhāyaka
[fr. saŋ+khyā] a calculator S iv.376. Sankhāyati
Sankhāyati
& Sankhāti [saŋ+khyā] 1. to appear J v.203 (˚āti). -- 2. to calculate Sn p. 126 (inf. ˚khātuŋ); Dh 196. ger. sankhāya having considered, discriminately, carefully, with open mind D ii.227; iii.224 (paṭisevati etc.: with ref. to the 4 apassenāni); S i.182; Sn 209, 391, 749, 1048 ( = jānitvā etc. Nd2 619); Nd1 327; Dh 267 (=ñāṇena DhA iii.393); It 54. sankhā pi deliberately M i.105 sq. Sankhāyita
Sankhāyita
= sankhādita; Vism 257. Sankhāra
Sankhāra
[fr. saŋ+kṛ, not Vedic, but as saŋskāra Epic & Class. Sk. meaning "preparation" and "sacrament," also in philosophical literature "former impression, disposition, " cp. vāsanā] one of the most difficult terms in Buddhist metaphysics, in which the blending of the subjective -- objective view of the world and of happening, peculiar to the East, is so complete, that it is almost impossible for Occidental terminology to get at the root of its meaning in a translation. We can only convey an idea of its import by representing several sides of its application, without attempting to give a "word" as a def. trsln. -- An exhaustive discussion of the term is given by Franke in his Dīgha translation (pp. 307 sq., esp. 311 sq.); see also the analysis in Cpd. 273 -- 276. -- Lit. "preparation, get up"; appld: coefficient (of consciousness as well as of physical life, cp. viññāṇa), constituent, constituent potentiality; (pl.) synergies, cause -- combination, as in S iii.87; discussed, B. Psy., p. 50 sq. (cp. DhsA 156, where paraphrased in defn of sa -- sankhāra with "ussāha, payoga, upāya, paccaya -- gahaṇa"); composition, aggregate. 1. Aggregate of the conditions or essential properties for a given process or result -- e. g. (i.) the sum of the conditions or properties making up or resulting in life or existence; the essentials or "element" of anything ( -- ˚), e. g. āyusaṅkhāra, life -- element D ii.106; S ii.266; PvA 210; bhavasankhāra, jīvitasaṅkhāra, D ii.99, 107. (ii.) Essential conditions, antecedents or synergy (co -- ordinated activity), mental coefficients, requisite for act, speech, thought: kāya˚, vacī˚, citta˚, or mano˚, described respectively as "respiration," "attention and consideration," "percepts and feelings," "because these are (respectively) bound up with," or "precede" those M i.301 (cp. 56); S iv.293; Kvu 395 (cp. trsln 227); Vism 530 sq.; DhsA 8; VbhA 142 sq. -- 2. One of the five khandhas, or constitutional elements of physical life (see khandha), comprising all the citta -- sampayutta -- cetasikā dhammā -- i. e. the mental concomitants, or adjuncts which come, or tend to come, into consciousness at the uprising of a citta, or unit of cognition Dhs 1 (cp. M iii.25). As thus classified, the saṅkhāra's form the mental factor corresponding to the bodily aggregate or rūpakkhandha, and are in contrast to the three khandhas which represent a single mental function only. But just as kāya stands for both body and action, so do the concrete mental syntheses called sankhārā tend to take on the implication of synergies, of purposive intellection, connoted by the term abhisaṅkhāra, q. v. -- e. g. M iii.99, where saṅkhārā are a purposive, aspiring state of mind to induce a specific rebirth; S ii.82, where puññaŋ, opuññaŋ, āṇeñjaŋ s. abhisankharoti, is, in D iii.217 & Vbh 135, catalogued as the three classes of abhisankhāra; S ii.39, 360; A ii.157, where s. is tantamount to sañcetanā; Miln 61, where s., as khandha, is replaced by cetanā (purposive conception). Thus, too, the ss. in the Paṭiccasamuppāda formula are considered as the aggregate of mental conditions which, under the law of kamma, bring about the inception of the paṭisandhiviññāṇa, or first stirring of mental life in a newly begun individual. Lists of the psychologically, or logically distinguishable factors making up the composite saṅkhārakkhandha, with constants and variants, are given for each class of citta in Dhs 62, etc. (N.B. -- Read cetanā for vedanā, § 338.) Phassa and cetanā are the two constant factors in the s -- kkhandha. These lists may be compared with the later elaboration of the saṅkhāra -- elements given at Vism 462 sq. -- 3. sankhārā (pl.) in popular meaning. In the famous formula (and in many other connections, as e. g. sabbe sankhārā) "aniccā vata sankhārā uppādavaya -- dhammino" (D ii.157; S i.6, 158, 200; ii.193; Th 1, 1159; J i.392, cp. Vism 527), which is rendered by Mrs. Rh. D. (Brethren, p 385 e. g.) as "O, transient are our life's experiences! Their nature 'tis to rise and pass away," we have the use of s. in quite a general & popular sense of "life, physical or material life"; and sabbe sankhārā means "everything, all physical and visible life, all creation." Taken with caution the term "creation" may be applied as t.t. in the Paṭiccasamuppāda , when we regard avijjā as creating, i. e. producing by spontaneous causality the sankhāras, and sankhārā as "natura genita atque genitura" (the latter with ref. to the foll. viññāṇa). If we render it by "formations" (cp. Oldenberg's "Gestaltungen," Buddha 71920, p. 254), we imply the mental "constitutional" element as well as the physical, although the latter in customary materialistic popular philosophy is the predominant factor (cp. the discrepancies of "life eternal" and "life is extinct" in one & the same European term). None of the "links" in the Paṭicca -- samuppāda meant to the people that which it meant or was supposed to mean in the subtle and schematic philosophy (dhammā duddasā nipuṇā!) of the dogmatists. -- Thus sankhārā are in the widest sense the "world of phenomena" (cp. below ˚loka), all things which have been made up by pre -- existing causes. -- At PvA 71 we find sankhārā in lit. meaning as "things" (preparations) in defn of ye keci (bhogā) "whatever." The sabbe s. at S ii.178 (trsln "all the things of this world") denote all 5 aggregates exhausting all conditioned things; cp. Kvu 226 (trsln "things"); Mhvs iv.66 (: the material and transitory world); Dh 154 (vi -- sankhāragataŋ cittaŋ = mind divested of all material things); DhsA 304 (trsln "kamma activities," in connection avijjā -- paccaya -- s˚); Cpd. 211, n. 3. -- The defn of sankhārā at Vism 526 (as result of avijjā & cause of viññāṇa in the P. -- S.) is: sankhataŋ abhisankharontī ti sankhārā. Api ca: avijjā -- paccayā sankhārā sankhāra -- saddena āgata -- sankhārā ti duvidhā sankhārā; etc. with further def. of the 4 sankhāras. -> 4. Var. passages for sankhāra in general: D ii. 213; iii.221 sq., M ii.223 (imassa dukkha -- nidānassa sankhāraŋ padahato sankhāra -- ppadhānā virāgo hoti); S iii.69 (ekanta -- dukkhā sankhārā); iv.216 sq. (sankhārāṇaŋ khaya -- dhammatā; id. with vaya˚, virāga˚, nirodha˚ etc.); Sn 731 (yaŋ kiñci dukkhaŋ sambhoti sabbaŋ sankhāra -- paccayā; sankhārānaŋ nirodhena n'atthi dukkhassa sambhavo); Vism 453, 462 sq. (the 51), 529 sq.; DhA iii.264, 379; VbhA 134 (4 fold), 149 (3 fold), 192 (āyūhanā); PvA 41 (bhijjana -- dhammā). -> Of passages dealing with the sankhāras as aniccā, vayadhammā, anattā, dukkhā etc. the foll. may be mentioned: Vin i.13; S i.200; iii.24; iv.216, 259; v.56, 345; M iii.64, 108; A i.286; ii.150 sq.; iii.83, 143; iv.13, 100; It 38; Dh 277, 383; Ps i.37, 132; ii.48; 109 sq.; Nd2 444, 450; also Nd2 p. 259 (s. v. sankhārā).

-- upekkhā equanimity among "things" Vism 161, 162. -- ûpasama allayment of the constituents of life Dh 368, 381; cp. DhA iv.108. -- khandha the aggregate of (mental) coefficients D iii.233; Kvu 578; Tikp 61; DhsA 345; VbhA 20, 42. -- dukkha the evil of material life, constitutional or inherent ill VbhA 93 (in the classification of the sevenfold sukkha). -- paccayā (viññāṇaŋ) conditioned by the synergies (is vital consciousness), the second linkage in the Paṭicca -- samuppāda (q. v.) Vism 577; VbhA 152 sq. -- padhāna concentration on the sankhāras M ii.223. -- majjhattatā = ˚upekkhā VbhA 283. -- loka the material world, the world of formation (or phenomena), creation, loka "per se," as contrasted to satta -- loka, the world of (morally responsible) beings, loka "per hominem" Vism 205; VbhA 456; SnA 442. -- 665 -- Sankhāravant
Sankhāravant
(adj.) [fr. sankhāra] having sankhāras A ii.214 = Dhs 1003. Sankhitta
Sankhitta
[pp. of sankhipati] 1. concise, brief Miln 227; DhsA 344; instr. sankhittena in short, concisely (opp. vitthārena) Vin i.10; D ii.305; S v.421; Pug 41. Cp. BSk. sankṣiptena Divy 37 etc. -- 2. concentrated, attentive D i.80 (which at Vism 410 however is expld as "thīna -- middh' ânugata"); S ii.122; v.263; D ii.299 = M i.59. -- 3. contracted, thin, slender: ˚majjhā of slender waist J v.155. -- Cp. abhi˚. Sankhipati
Sankhipati
[saŋ+khipati] 1. to collect, heap together Mhvs 1, 31. -- 2. to withdraw, put off Dāvs iv.35. -> 3. to concentrate J i.82. -- 4. to abridge, shorten. -> pp. sankhitta. Sankhippa
Sankhippa
(adj.) [saŋ+khippa] quick J vi.323. Sankhiyādhamma
Sankhiyā
-- dhamma form of talk, the trend of talk D i.2; DA i.43. Cp. sankhyā. Sankhubhati
Sankhubhati
[saŋ+khubbati] to be shaken, to be agitated, to stir J i.446 (ger. ˚khubhitvā); DhA ii.43, 57; aor. ˚khubhi PvA 93. -- pp. sankhubhita. -- Caus. sankhobheti to shake, stir up, agitate J i.119, 350; ii.119. Sankhubhita
Sankhubhita
[pp. of sankhubhati] shaken, stirred J iii.443. Sankhepa
Sankhepa
[saŋ+khepa] 1. abridgment, abstract, condensed account (opp. vitthāra ), e. g. Vism 532, 479; Dh i.125; KhA 183; DhsA 344; SnA 150, 160, 314; VbhA 47. Cp. ati˚. -- 2. the sum of, quintessence of; instr. ˚ena (adv.) by way of, as if, e. g. rāja˚ as if he were king DA i.246; bhūmi -- ghara˚ in the shape of an earth house DA i.260. -- 3. group, heaping up, amassing, collection: pabbata -- sankhepe in a mountain glen (lit. in the midst of a group of mountains) D i.84; A iii.396. bhava˚ amassing of existences J i.165 sq., 366, 463; ii.137. -> 4. aṭavi˚ at A i.178; iii.66 is probably a wrong reading for ˚sankopa "inroad of savage tribes." Sankheyya
Sankheyya1
(adj.) [grd. of sankhāyati] calculable; only neg. a˚ incalculable S v.400; A iii.366; PvA 212. -- ˚kāra acting with a set purpose Sn 351. -- As grd. of sankharoti: see upa˚. Sankheyya
Sankheyya2
(nt.) a hermitage, the residence of Thera Āyupāla Miln 19, 22 etc. Sankhobha
Sankhobha
[san+khobha] shaking, commotion, upsetting, disturbance J i.64; Sdhp 471. Sankhobheti
Sankhobheti
see sankhubhati. Sanga
Sanga
[fr. sañj: see sajjati1] cleaving, clinging, attach- ment, bond S i.25, 117 sq.; A iii.311; iv.289; Dh 170, 342, etc.; Sn 61, 212, 386, 390, 475, etc.; Dhs 1059; DhsA 363; J iii.201; the five sangas are rāga, dosa, moha, māna, and diṭṭhi, Thag. 633 = Dhp. 370; DhA iv.187; seven sangas, It. 94; Nd1 91, 432; Nd2 620.

-- âtiga one who has overcome attachment, free from attachment, an Arahant M i.386; S i.3, 23; iv.158 = It 58; Sn 250, 473, 621; DhA iv.159. -- 666 -- Sangacchati
Sangacchati
[saŋ+gacchati] to come together, to meet with; ger. ˚gamma It 123; & ˚gantva Sn 290. -- pp. sangata. Sangaṇa
Sangaṇa
(adj.) [sa+angaṇa) sinful Sn 279. Cp. sāngaṇa. Sangaṇikā
Sangaṇikā
(f.) [saŋ+gaṇa+ikā, cp. BSk. sangaṇikā MVastu ii.355; Divy 464] communication, association, society Vin i.45; A iii.256; J i.106.

-- ārāma delighting in society D ii.78; M iii.110; VbhA 474. -- ārāmatā delight in company D ii.78; M iii.110; A iii.116, 293 sq., 310, 422. -- rata fond of society D ii.78; Sn 54; cp. sangaṇike rata Th 1, 84. -- vihāra (sangaṇika˚) living in society A iii.104; iv.342. Sangaṇha
Sangaṇha
(adj.) [fr. saŋ+grah] showing kindness, helping VvA 59 (˚sīla). Sangaṇhāti
Sangaṇhāti
[saŋ+gaṇhāti] 1. to comprise PvA 80, 117; SnA 200 (ger. ˚gahetvā), 347 (˚gaṇhitvā). -- 2. to collect Mhvs 10, 24. -- 3. to contain, include Miln 40. -- 4. to compile, abridge Mhvs 37, 244. -- 5. to take up; to treat kindly, sympathize with, favour, help, protect Vin i.50; J ii.6; iv.132; v.426 (aor. ˚gaṇhi), 438 (to favour with one's love), 510; Miln 234; KhA 160. -> aor. sangahesi Mhvs 38, 31; fut. ˚gahissati J vi.392; ger. ˚gahetvā Mhvs 37, 244; grd. ˚gahetabba Vin i.50; ppr. Pass. ˚gayhamāna DhsA 18. -- pp. sangahita. -> Caus. II. sangaṇhāpeti: see pari˚ (e. g. J vi.328). Sangata
Sangata
[pp. of sangacchati] 1. come together, met Sn 807, 1102 ( = samāgata samohita sannipātita Nd2 621); nt. sangataŋ association Dh 207. -- 2. compact, tightly fastened or closed, well -- joined Vv 642 (=nibbivara VvA 275). Sangati
Sangati
(f.) [fr. sangacchati] 1. meeting, intercourse J iv.98; v.78, 483. In defn of yajati ( = service?) at Dhtp 62 & Dhtm 79. -- 2. union, combination M i.111; S ii.72; iv.32 sq., 68 sq.; Vbh 138 (=VbhA 188). -> 3. accidental occurrence D i.53; DA i.161. Sangatika
Sangatika
[adj.] kalyāṇa˚, pāpa˚, united with, M ii.222, 227. Sangama
Sangama
[fr. saŋ+gam] 1. meeting, intercourse, associa- tion Sn 681; J ii.42; iii.488; v.483. -- 2. sexual intercourse M i.407; J iv.106. Sangara
Sangara
[fr. saŋ+gṛ1 to sing, proclaim, cp. gāyati & gīta] 1. a promise, agreement J iv.105, 111, 473; v.25, 479; sangaraŋ karoti to make a compact Vin i.247; J iv.105; v.479. -- 2. (also nt.) a fight M iii.187 = Nett 149; S v.109. Sangaha
Sangaha1
[fr. saŋ+grah] 1. collecting, gathering, accu- mulation Vin i.253; Mhvs 35, 28. -- 2. comprising, collection, inclusion, classification Kvu 335 sq. (˚kathā), cp. Kvu. trsln 388 sq.; Vism 191, 368 (eka˚); ˚ŋ gacchati to be comprised, included, or classified SnA 7, 24, 291. -- 3. inclusion, i. e. constitution of consciousness, phase Miln 40. -- 4. recension, collection of the Scriptures Mhvs 4, 61; 5, 95; 38, 44; DA i.131. -- 5. (appld) kind disposition, kindliness, sympathy, friendliness, help, assistance, protection, favour D iii.245; Sn 262, 263; A i.92; J i.86 sq.; iii.471; vi.574; DA i.318; VvA 63, 64; PvA 196 (˚ŋ karoti). The 4 sangaha -- vatthūni or objects (characteristics) of sympathy are: dāna, peyyavajja, atthacariyā, samānattatā, or liberality, kindly speech, a life of usefulness (Rh. D. at Dial. iii.145: sagacious conduct; 223: justice), impartiality (? better as state of equality, i. e. sensus communis or feeling of common good). The BSk. equivalents (as sangrahavastūni) are dāna, priyavākya, tathārthacaryā, samānasukha -- duḥkatā MVastu i.3; and d., p., arthakriyā, samānārthatā ( = samāna+artha+tā) Lal. Vist. 30. Cp. Divy 95, 124, 264. The P. refs. are D iii.152, 232; A ii.32, 248; iv.219, 364; J v.330; SnA 236, 240. See also Kern, Toev. ii.67 s. v. Sangaha
Sangaha2
(nt.) [fr. saŋ+grah] restraining, hindrance, bond It 73 (both reading & meaning very doubtful). Sangahaṇa
Sangahaṇa
(adj.) [fr. sangaṇhāti] firm, well -- supported J v.484. Sangahita
Sangahita
(& ˚gahīta) [pp. of sangaṇhāti] 1. comprised, included Miln 40 (eka˚); PvA 80. -- 2. collected Mhvs 10, 24. -- 3. grouped Kvu 335 sq. -- 4. restrained Sn 388 (˚attabhāva); SnA 291 (˚atta). -- 5. kindly disposed Vv 116 = Pv iv.160 (˚attabhāva=paresaŋ sangaṇha -- sīla VvA 59, i. e. of sympathetic nature). Sangāma
Sangāma
[fr. saŋ+*gam: see grāma; lit. "collection"] a fight, battle D i.46; ii.285; M i.86, 253; S i.98; iv.308 sq.; A i.106; ii.116; iii.94; Vin i.6; It 75; Sn 440; Nd2 199; Pug 68; J i.358; ii.11; Miln 332; Vism 401. Cp. vijita˚.

-- âvacara whose sphere is the battle, quite at home on the battlefield J ii.94, 95; Vin v.163 sq., 183 (here said fig. of the bhikkhu). -- ji (sangāma -- j -- uttama) victorious in battle Dh 103 (cp. DhA ii.227 = sangāma -- sīsa -- yodha). -- bheri battle drum DhA iii.298; iv.25. -- yodha a warrior J i.358. Sangāmeti
Sangāmeti
[Denom. fr. sangāma; given as special root sangām˚ at Dhtp 605 with defn "yuddha"] to fight, to come into conflict with Vin ii.195; iii.108; It 75; J ii.11, 212. aor. ˚gāmesi J v.417, 420 (C. = samāgami, cp. sangacchati). Sangāyati
Sangāyati
[saŋ+gāyati] to chant, proclaim (cp. sangara), to rehearse, to establish the text of the B. scriptures Vin ii.285; DA i.25 (Buddha -- vacanaŋ). -- pp. sangīta. Sangāyika
Sangāyika
(adj.) [fr. sangāyati] connected with the procla- mation; dhamma˚ -- therā the Elders gathered in the council for proclaiming the Doctrine J v.56. Sangāha
Sangāha
(adj. -- n.) [fr. saŋ+grah] 1. collecting, collection, Mhvs 10, 24. -- 2. restraining, self -- restraint A ii.142. Sangāhaka
Sangāhaka
(adj. -- n.) [fr. sangāha] 1. compiling, collection, making a recension J i.1; Miln 369; VvA 169 (dhamma˚). -- 2. treating kindly, compassionate, kind (cp. sangaha 5) A iv.90; J i.203; iii.262. -- 3. (m.) a charioteer D ii.268; J i.203; ii.257; iv.63. Sangāhika
Sangāhika
(adj.) [ = last] 1. comprising, including J i.160; Vism 6; DA i.94. -- 2. holding together M i.322=A iii.10. -- 3. comprehensive, concise J ii.236. Sangīta
Sangīta
[pp. of sangāyati] sung; uttered, proclaimed, established as the text Vin ii.290; J i.1; DA i.25 (of the Canon, said to have been rehearsed in seven months). -- (nt.) a song, chant, chorus D ii.138; J vi.529. Sangīti
Sangīti
(f.) [fr. saŋgāyati; BSk. sangīti Divy 61] 1. a song, chorus, music J i.32 (dibba˚); vi.528 (of birds). -- 2. proclamation (cp. sangara), rehearsal, general convocation of the Buddhist clergy in order to settle questions of doctrine and to fix the text of the Scriptures. The first Council is alleged to have been held at Rājagaha, Vin ii.284 sq.; Dpvs iv.; Mhvs iii.; DA i.2 sq.; SnA 67, 483. The second Council at Vesāli Vin ii.294 sq.; Dpvs iv.27 sq.; Mhvs iv.; the third at Pāṭaliputta, Dpvs vii.34 sq.; Mhvs v.268 sq. A Council of heretics, the so -- called Mahāsaṅgīti, is mentioned Dpvs v.31 sq. -> 3. text rehearsed, recension Vin ii.290; DA i.17; Miln 175 (dhamma˚); text, formula Vin i.95; ii.274, 278. On the question of the Councils see especially Franke J.P.T.S. 1908, 1 sq.

-- kāra editor of a redaction of the Holy Scriptures SnA 42 sq., 292, 394, 413 sq., 504 and passim; PvA 49, 70, etc. -- kāraka id J i.345 -- kāla the time of the redaction of the Pāli Canon, or of (one of them, probably the last) the Council Tikp 241; SnA 580; VvA 270. -- pariyāya the discourse on the Holy Text D iii.271 (Rh. D. "scheme of chanting together"). -- 667 -- Sanguḷikā
Sanguḷikā
(f.) [either = Sk. śaṣkulikā, cp, sakkhali 2, or fr. saguḷa=sanguḷa] a cake Vin ii.17; DhA ii.75; cp. sankulikā A iii.78. Sangopeti
Sangopeti
[saŋ+gopeti] to guard; to keep, preserve; to hold on to (acc.) J iv.351 (dhanaŋ). Sangha
Sangha
[fr. saŋ+hṛ; lit. "comprising." The quâsi pop. etym. at VvA 233 is "diṭṭhi -- sīla -- sāmaññena sanghāṭabhāvena sangha"] 1. multitude, assemblage Miln 403 (kāka˚); J i.52 (sakuṇa˚); Sn 589 (ñāti˚); 680 (deva˚); D iii.23 (miga˚); Vv 55 (accharā˚ = samūha VvA 37). bhikkhu˚ an assembly of Buddhist priests A i.56, etc.; D i.1, etc.; S i.236; Sum i.230, 280; Vin i.16; ii.147; bhikkhunī˚ an assembly of nuns S v.360; Vin i.140; sāvaka˚ an assembly of disciples A i.208; D ii.93; S i.220; PvA 195, etc.; samaṇa˚ an assembly of ascetics Sn 550. -- 2. the Order, the priesthood, the clergy, the Buddhist church A i.68, 123, etc.; D i.2, etc.; iii.102, 126, 193, 246; S iv.270 sq.; Sn 227, etc.; J ii.147, etc.; Dhs 1004; It 11, 12, 88; Vin i.102, 326; ii.164, etc. -> 3. a larger assemblage, a community A ii.55=Sv.400; M i.231 (cp. gaṇa). -- On the formula Buddha, Dhamma, Sangha see dhamma C 2.

-- ânussati meditation on the Order (a kammaṭṭhāna) D iii.250, 280; A i.30; J i.97. -- ārāma a residence for members of the Order J i.94; VbhA 13. -- kamma an act or ceremony performed by a chapter of bhikkhus assembled in solemn conclave Vin i.123 (cp. i.53, 143 & expln at S.B.E. xxii.7); iii.38 sq.; J i.341. -- gata gone into the sangha, joining the community M i.469. -- thera senior of the congregation Vin ii.212, 303. -- bhatta food given to the community of bhikkhus Vin i.58; ii.109, 212. -- bhinna schismatic Vin v.216. -- bheda causing dissension among the Order Vin i.150; ii.180 sq.; A ii.239 sq.; It 11; Tikp 167, 171; J vi.129; VbhA 425 sq. -- bhedaka causing dissension or divisions, schismatic Vin i.89, 136, 168; It 11. -- māmaka devoted to the Sangha DhA i.206. -- rāji [ = rāji2] dissension in the Order Vin i.339; ii.203= VbhA 428; Vin iv.37. Sanghaŋsati
Sanghaŋsati
[saŋ+ghaŋsati] to rub together, to rub against Vin ii.315 (Bdhgh). Sanghaṭita
Sanghaṭita
[saŋ+ghaṭita, for ˚ghaṭṭita, pp. of ghaṭṭeti] 1. struck, sounded, resounding with ( -- ˚) J v.9 (v. l. ṭṭ); Miln 2. -- 2. pierced together, pegged together, constructed Miln 161 (nāvā nānā -- dāru˚). Sanghaṭṭa
Sanghaṭṭa1
(adj.) [fr. saŋ+ghaṭṭ] knocking against, offending, provoking, making angry J vi.295. Sanghaṭṭa
Sanghaṭṭa2
(?) bangle Sn 48 (˚yanta): thus Nd2 reading for ˚māna (ppr. med. of sanghaṭṭeti). Sanghaṭṭana
Sanghaṭṭana
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. sanghaṭṭeti] 1. rubbing or striking together, close contact, impact S iv.215; v.212; J vi.65; Vism 112; DA i.256 (anguli˚). -> 2. bracelet (?) SnA 96 (on Sn 48). Sanghaṭṭeti
Sanghaṭṭeti
[saŋ+ghaṭṭeti] 1. to knock against Vin ii.208. -- 2. to sound, to ring Mhvs 21, 29 (˚aghaṭṭayi). -- 3 to knock together, to rub against each other J iv.98 (aŋsena aŋsaŋ samaghaṭṭayimha); Dāvs iii.87. -- 4. to provoke by scoffing, to make angry J vi.295 (paraŋ asanghaṭṭento, C. on asanghaṭṭa); VvA 139 (pres. pass. ˚ghaṭṭiyati). -- pp. sanghaṭ(ṭ)ita. Sanghara
Sanghara
= saghara [sa4+ghara] one's own house J v.222. Sangharaṇa
Sangharaṇa
(nt.) [ = saŋharaṇa] accumulation J iii.319 (dhana˚). Sangharati
Sangharati
[ = saŋharati] 1. to bring together, collect, accumulate J iii.261; iv.36 (dhanaŋ), 371; v.383. -> 2. to crush, to pound J i.493. Sanghāṭa
Sanghāṭa
[fr. saŋ+ghaṭeti, lit. "binding together"; on etym. see Kern, Toev. ii.68] 1. a raft J ii.20, 332 (nāvā˚); iii.362 (id.), 371. Miln 376. dāru˚ ( = nāvā˚) J v.194, 195. -- 2. junction, union VvA 233. -- 3. collection, aggregate J iv.15 (upāhana˚); Th 1, 519 (papañca˚). Freq. as aṭṭhi˚ (cp. sankhalā etc.) a string of bones, i. e. a skeleton Th 1, 570; DhA iii.112; J v.256. -- 4. a weft, tangle, mass (almost="robe," i. e. sanghāṭī), in taṇhā˚ -- paṭimukka M i.271; vāda˚ -- paṭimukka M i.383 (Neumann "defeat"); diṭṭhi˚ -- paṭimukka Miln 390. -> 5. a post, in piṭṭha˚ door -- post, lintel Vin ii.120. Sanghāṭika
Sanghāṭika
(adj.) [fr. sanghāṭī] wearing a sanghāṭī M i.281. Sanghāṭī
Sanghāṭī
(f.) [fr. sanghaṭeti; cp. BSk. sanghāṭī Divy 154, 159, 494] one of the three robes of a Buddhist Vin i.46, 289; ii.78, 135, 213; D i.70; ii.65; M i.281; ii.45; S i.175; A ii.104, 106 sq., 210; iv.169 sq.; v.123; Pv iv.146; VbhA 359 (˚cīvara); PvA 43.

-- cāra wandering about in a sanghāṭī, having deposited the cīvara Vin iv.281. -- vāsin dressed in a s. Sn 456. Sanghāṇi
Sanghāṇi
(f.) a loin -- cloth Vin iv.339 sq. Sanghāta
Sanghāta
[saŋ+ghāta] 1. striking, killing, murder Vin i.137; D i.141; ii.354; M i.78; A ii.42 sq. -- 2. knocking together (cp. sanghaṭṭeti), snapping of the fingers (acchara˚) A i.34, 38; J vi.64. -- 3. accumulation, aggregate, multitude PvA 206 (aṭṭhi˚ mass of bones, for the usual ˚sanghāṭa); Nett 28. -- 4. N. of one of the 8 principle purgatories J v.266, 270. Sanghātanika
Sanghātanika
(adj.) [fr. sanghāta or sanghāṭa] holding or binding together M i.322 (+agga -- sangāhika); A iii.10 (id.); Vin i.70 ("the decisive moment" Vin. Texts i.190). Sanghādisesa
Sanghādisesa
[unexplained as regards etym.; Geiger, P.Gr. § 383, after S. Lévi, = sangh'âtisesa; but atisesa does not occur in Pāli] requiring suspension from the Order; a class of offences which can be decided only by a formal sangha -- kamma Vin ii.38 sq.; iii.112, 186; iv.110 sq., 225 (where explained); A ii.242; Vism 22; DhA iii.5. Sanghika
Sanghika
(adj.) [fr. sangha] belonging to, or connected with the Order Vin i.250. Sanghin
Sanghin
(adj.) [fr. sangha] having a crowd (of followers), the head of an order D i.47, 116; S i.68; Miln 4; DA i 143. -- sanghâsanghī (pl.) in crowds, with crowds (redupl. cpd.!), with gaṇi -- bhūtā "crowd upon crowd" at D i.112, 128; ii.317; DA i.280. Sanghuṭṭha
Sanghuṭṭha
(adj.) [saŋ+ghuṭṭha] 1. resounding (with) J vi.60, 277 (turiya -- tāḷita˚); Mhvs 15, 196; 29, 25 (turiya˚); Sdhp 298. -- 2. proclaimed, announced PvA 73. Sacāca
Sacāca
(conj.) if indeed Vin i.88; see sace. Sacitta
Sacitta1
(nt.) [sa4+citta] one's own mind or heart D ii.120; Dh 183, 327 = Miln 379. Sacitta
Sacitta2
(adj.) [sa2+citta] of the same mind J v.360. Sacittaka
Sacittaka
(adj.) [sa3+citta+ka] endowed with mind, in- telligent DhsA 295. Sace
Sace
(conj.) [sa2+ce; cp. sacāca] if D i.8, 51; Vin i.7; Dh 134; J i.311. -- sace . . . noce if . . . if not J vi.365. Sacetana
Sacetana
(adj.) [sa3+cetana] animate, conscious, rational J i.74; Mhvs 38, 97. Sacetasa
Sacetasa
(adj.) [sa3+cetasa] attentive, thoughtful A i.254 ( = citta -- sampanna C.). -- 668 -- Sacca
Sacca
(adj.) [cp. Sk. satya] real, true D i.182; M ii.169; iii.207; Dh 408; nt. saccaŋ truly, verily, certainly Miln 120; saccaŋ kira is it really true? D i.113; Vin i.45, 60; J i.107; saccato truly S iii.112. -- (nt. as noun) saccaŋ the truth A ii.25, 115 (parama˚); Dh 393; also: a solemn asseveration Mhvs 25, 18. Sacce patiṭṭhāya keeping to fact, M i.376. -- pl. (cattāri) saccāni the (four) truths M ii.199; A ii.41, 176; Sn 883 sq.; Dhs 358. -- The 4 ariya -- saccāni are the truth about dukkha, dukkhasamudaya, dukkha -- nirodha, and dukkha -- nirodha -- gāminipaṭipadā. Thus e. g. at Vin i.230; D ii.304 sq.; iii.277; A i.175 sq.; Vism 494 sq.; VbhA 116 sq., 141 sq. A shortened statement as dukkha, samudaya, nirodha, magga is freq. found, e. g. Vin i.16; see under dukkha B. 1. -- See also ariyasacca & asacca. -- iminā saccena in consequence of this truth, i. e. if this be true J i.294.

-- avhaya deserving his name, Cp. of the Buddha Sn 1133, cp. Nd2 624. -- âdhitthāna determined on truth M iii.245; D iii.229. -- ânupaṭṭi realization of truth M ii.173 sq. -- ânubodha awakening to truth M ii.171 sq. -- ânurakkhaṇa warding of truth, M ii.176. -- âbhinivesa inclination to dogmatize, one of the kāya -- ganthas S v.59; Dhs 1139; DhsA 377. -- âbhisamaya comprehension of the truth Sn 758; Th 1, 338; ThA 239. -- kāra ratification, pledge, payment in advance as guarantee J i.121. -- kiriyā a solemn declaration, a declaration on oath J i.214, 294; iv.31, 142; v.94; Miln 120; Mhvs 18, 39 (see trsln p. 125 on term). -- ñāṇa knowledge of the truth Vism 510; DhA iv.152. -- nāma doing justice to one's name, bearing a true name, Ep. of the Buddha A iii.346; iv.285, 289; PvA 231. -- nikkhama truthful Sn 542. -- paṭivedha penetration of the truth Ps ii.57. -- vanka a certain kind of fish J v.405 (the Copenhagen MS. has [sa]sacca -- vanka, which has been given by Fausböll as sata -- vanka). -- vacana (1) veracity M i.403; Dh i.160; (2) = saccakiriyā KhA 169, 180. -- vajja truthfulness D i.53; S iv.349; J iv.320. -- vācā id. A ii.228; iii.244; J i.201. -- vādin truthful, speaking the truth D i.4; iii.170; A ii.209; iv.249, 389; S i.66; Sn 59; Dh 217; Miln 120; Nd2 623; DhA iii.288. -- vivaṭṭa revelation of truth Ps i.11. -- sandha truthful, reliable D i.4; iii.170; A ii.209; iv.249; DA i.73. -- sammatā popular truth, maxim S iv.230. Saccāpeti
Saccāpeti
at A iv.346 = Vin ii.19 is probably misreading or an old misspelling for sajjāpeti fr. sajjeti, the confusion sac: saj being frequent. Meaning: to undertake, fulfil, realize. Saccika
Saccika
(adj.) [cp. Sk. satyaka] real, true Miln 226 (the same passage at Ps i.174 & Nd1 458 spells sacchika). -> saccik' aṭṭha truth, reality, the highest truth Kvu 1 sq.; DhsA 4 (nearly = paramaṭṭha); KhA 102. Kern in a phantastic interpretation (Toev. ii.49, 50) takes it as sacci -- kaṭṭha (=Sk. sāci -- kṛṣta) "pulled sideways," i. e. "misunderstood." Sacceti
Sacceti
in fut. saccessati at A iv.343 is most likely an old mistake for ghaṭṭessati is the same passage at A iii.343; the meaning is "to touch," or to approach, disturb. It is hardly = saśc "to accompany." Sacchanda
Sacchanda
(adj.) [sa4+chanda] self -- willed, headstrong J i.421; as sacchandin ibid. Sacchavīni
Sacchavīni
(mūlāni) at A iii.371 (opp. ummūla) means "roots taking to the soil again." It is doubtful whether it belongs to chavi "skin." Sacchikata
Sacchikata
[pp. of sacchikaroti cp. BSk. sākṣātkṛtaḥ AvŚ i.210] seen with one's own eyes, realized, experienced D i.250; S v.422 = Vin i.11; DhA iv.117. Sacchikaraṇīya
Sacchikaraṇīya
(adj.) [grd: of sacchikaroti] (able) to be realized S iii.223 sq.; D iii.230 = A ii.182 (in four ways: by kāya, sati, cakkhu, paññā). Sacchikaroti
Sacchikaroti
[cp. Sk. sākṣāt kṛ; the P. form being *saccha˚ ( = sa3+akṣ, as in akkhi), with change of ˚a to ˚i before kṛ. See also sakkhiŋ karoti] to see with one's eyes, to realize, to experience for oneself. Pres. ˚karoti D i.229; S iv.337; v.11, 49. -- Fut. ˚karissati S v.10; M ii.201 (as sacchi vā k.). -- Aor. sacch'âkāsi S iv.63; SnA 166. -- Grd. ˚kātabba Vin i.11; S v.422; & ˚karaṇīya (q. v.). -- pp. sacchikata. Sacchikiriyā
Sacchikiriyā
(f.) [fr. sacchikaroti] realization, experiencing oath, ordeal, confirmation D i.100 (etc.). D i.100; iii.255; S iv.254; A i.22; ii.148; iii.101; iv.332 sq.; Sn 267; Vism 696 sq.; Dhs 296; DhA iv.63. Sajati
Sajati1
[sṛj, cp. Av. hərəƶaiti to let loose; Sk. sarga pouring out, sṛṣṭi emanation, creation] to let loose, send forth; dismiss, give up Sn 386, 390; J i.359; v.218 (imper. sajāhi); vi.185, 205. -- infin. saṭṭhuŋ (q. v.); pp. saṭṭha (see vissaṭṭha). -- Caus. sajjeti (q. v.). -- For sajj˚ (Caus.) we find sañj˚ in sañjitar. Sajati
Sajati2
[svaj; Dhtp 74, 549 = ajjana (?) or=sajati1?] to embrace D ii.266 (imper. saja). udakaŋ sajati to embrace the water, poet. for "to descend into the water" J iv.448 (T. sajāti); vi.198 (C.=abhisiñcati), 205 (C.= attano upari sajati [i. e. sajati1] abbhukkirati). On C. readings cp. Kern, Toev ii.51. Sajana
Sajana
[sa4+jana] a kinsman J iv.11 (read ˚parijanaŋ). Sajala
Sajala
(adj. -- n.) [sa3+jala] watery, wet; nt. water.

-- da giving water, bringing rain (of wind) Vism 10. -- dhara holding water, i, e. a cloud VvA 223. Sajāti
Sajāti
(f.) [sa2+jāti] (being of) the same class or caste Vin i.87; J ii.108 (˚putta). Sajitar
Sajitar
see sañjitar. Sajīva
Sajīva1
(adj.) [sa3+jīva] endowed with life Mhvs 11, 13. Sajīva
Sajīva2
[for saciva?] a minister J vi.307, 318 ( = amacca C.). Sajīvāna
Sajīvāna
(nt.) at S i.44 is metric spelling for sa -- jīvana [sa2 = saŋ,+jīvana] "same livelihood," in phrase kiŋsu kamme s. "what is (of) the same livelihood in work, i. e. occupation?" The form is the same as jīvāna at J iii.353. Taken wrongly as gen. pl. by Mrs. Rh. D. in trsln (K.S. i.63): "who in their work is mate to sons of men?" following Bdhgh's wrong interpretation (see K.S. i.321) as "kammena saha jīvantānan; kammadutiyakā nāma honti." Sajotibhūta
Sajotibhūta
(adj.) [sa3+joti+bhūta; same BSk., e. g. MVastu i.5] flaming, ablaze, aglow D i.95; Vin i.25; A i.141; J i.232; DA i.264. Sajja
Sajja
(adj.) [grd. formation fr. sajj = sañj Caus.; cp. the exact likeness of Ger. "fertig"] prepared, ready J i.98; ii.325; iii.271; Miln 351; PvA 156, 256. Of a bow furnished with a bow -- string A iii.75. Sajjaka
Sajjaka
(adj.) = sajja; J iv.45 (gamana˚ ready for going, "fertig"). Sajjati
Sajjati
[Pass. of sañj or saj to hang. Cp. sanga] 1. to cling, to, to be attached S i.38, 111 (aor. 2 sg. sajjittho); ii.228; A ii.165; J i.376 (id. asajjittho); Sn 522, 536. ppr. (a)sajjamāna (un) -- attached Sn 28, 466; J iii.352. -- 2. to hesitate J i.376 (asajjitvā without hesitation). -- pp. satta1. -- Cp. abhi˚ & vi˚. Sajjana
Sajjana1
(nt.) [fr. sṛj] decking, equipping ThA 241. Sajjana
Sajjana2
[sat( = sant)+jana] a good man Miln 321. Sajjā
Sajjā
(f.) [orig. grd. of sad] seat, couch Pv ii.128 (expln at PvA 157 doubtful). Sajjita
Sajjita
[pp. of sajjeti] issued, sent off; offered, prepared S ii.186; Vin iii.137 (here in sense of "happy" = sukhita); Miln 244 (of an arrow: sent); Mhvs 17, 7; 27, 16. -- nt. offering (= upakkhaṭa) DA i.294; PvA 107. -- 669 -- Sajju
Sajju
(adv.) [Sk. sadyaḥ, sa+dyaḥ, lit. one the same day] 1. instantly, speedily, quickly Dāvs iii.37. -- 2. newly, recently Dh 71 (˚khīra; cp. DhA ii.67). Sajjukaŋ = sajju
Sajjukaŋ
= sajju: 1. quickly Mhvs 7, 6; 14, 62. -- 2. newly VvA 197. Sajjulasa
Sajjulasa
[cp. Sk. sarjarasa; see Geiger, P.Gr. § 192] resin Vin i.202. Sajjeti
Sajjeti
[Caus. of sṛj (sajati1), Sk. sarjayati] to send out, prepare, give, equip; to fit up, decorate: dānaŋ to give a donation DhA ii.88; pātheyyaŋ to prepare provisions J iii.343; gehe to construct houses J i.18; nāṭakāni to arrange ballets J i.59; yaññaŋ to set up a sacrifice J i.336; dhammasabhaŋ to equip a hall for a religious meeting J iii.342; nagaraŋ to decorate the town J v.212; paṇṇākāraŋ to send a present J iii.10. -- Caus. II. sajjāpeti to cause to be given or prepared J i.446: PvA 81. Cp. vissajjeti. Sajjha
Sajjha
(nt.) [cp. Sk. sādhya] silver D ii.351 (v. l.); S v.92 (v. l.); A iii.16. Cp. sajjhu.

-- kāra silversmith Miln 331. Sajjhāya
Sajjhāya
[cp. Sk. svādhyāya, sva+adhyāya, i. e. sa4+ ajjhaya, cp. ajjhayana & ajjhāyaka] repetition, rehearsal study D iii.241; Vin i.133; ii.194; A iv.136; S v.121 J i.116, 436; ii.48; Miln 12, KhA 24; VbhA 250 sq. -> ˚ŋ karoti to study D iii.241; A iii.22; J v.54. Sajjhāyati
Sajjhāyati
[Denom. fr. sajjhāya, cp. BSk. svādhyāyita AvŚ i.287; ii.23] to rehearse, to repeat (aloud or silently), to study J i.435; ii.273; iii.216; iv.64; Miln 10. -- ppr. ˚āyanto DhA iii.347; ger. sajjhāya S i.202, & sajjhāyitvā J iv.477; v.450; KhA 97. -- Caus. sajjhāpeti to cause to learn, to teach J iii.28 (of teacher, with adhīyati, of pupil). Caus. II. sajjhāyāpeti id. Miln 10. Sajjhu
Sajjhu
(nt.) [cp. sajjha] silver D ii.351; S v.92; J vi.48; Mhvs 19, 4; 27, 26; 28, 33. Sañcaya
Sañcaya
[fr. saŋ+ci] accumulation, quantity Sn 697; It 17 (aṭṭhi˚); Miln 220. Sañcara
Sañcara
[fr. saŋ+car] passage, way, medium DA i.289. Sañcaraṇa
Sañcaraṇa
(nt.) [fr. saŋ+car] wandering about, meeting meeting -- place J i.163; iv.335; Miln 359. a˚ impassable Miln 217. Sañcarati
Sañcarati
[saŋ+carati] 1. to go about, to wander D i.83. -- 2. to meet, unite, come together J ii.36 (of the noose of a snare). -- 3. to move, to rock J i.265. -- 4. to pass J i.491. -- Caus. ˚cāreti to cause to move about Miln 377, 385. -- Caus. II. ˚carāpeti to cause to go, to emit J i.164; to make one's mind dwell on Vism 187. Sañcaritta
Sañcaritta
(nt.) [fr. saŋ+caritar] 1. going backwards & forwards, acting as go -- between Vin iii.137. -- 2. intercourse Miln 266. Sañcāra
Sañcāra
[saŋ+cāra] 1. going, movement, passing through Sdhp 244. -- 2. passages entrance, road J i.409; ii.70, 122. Sañcalati
Sañcalati
[saŋ+calati] to be unsteady or agitated Miln 117. Caus. ˚cāleti to shake Vin iii.127; J v.434. -- pp. ˚calita. Sañcalita
Sañcalita
[pp. of sañcalati] shaken Miln 224 (a˚). Sañcicca
Sañcicca
(adv.) [ger. of saŋ+cinteti; ch. BSk. sañcintya Divy 494] discriminately, purposely, with intention Vin ii.76; iii.71, 112; iv.149, 290; D iii.133; Kvu 593; Miln 380; PvA 103. Sañcita
Sañcita
[pp. of sañcināti] accumulated, filled (with) J vi.249; ThA 282; Sdhp 319. Sañcināti
Sañcināti
(& saŋcayati) [saŋ+cināti] to accumulate; ppr. ˚cayanto Mhvs 21, 4; aor. cini˚ PvA 202 (puññaŋ), 279 (pl. ˚cinimha). -- pp. sañcita. -- Cp. abhi˚. Sañcinteti
Sañcinteti
(& ˚ceteti) [saŋ+cinteti] to think, find out, plan, devise means D ii.180, 245 (aor. samacintesuŋ); Th 1, 1103 (Pot. ˚cintaye); J iii.438 (aor. samacetayi). Sañcuṇṇa
Sañcuṇṇa
[saŋ+cuṇṇa] crushed, shattered Bu ii.170 = J i.26. Sañcuṇṇita
Sañcuṇṇita
[pp. of sañcuṇṇeti] crushed J ii.41; Miln 188; Vism 259. Sañcuṇṇeti
Sañcuṇṇeti
[saŋ+cuṇṇeti] to crush J ii.210, 387 (aor. ˚esi); iii.175 (Pot. ˚eyya), 176 (ger. ˚etvā). -- pp. ˚cuṇṇita. Sañcetanā
Sañcetanā
(f.) [saŋ+cetanā] thought, cogitation, percep- tion, intention A ii.159 (atta˚, para˚); D iii.231 (id.); S ii.11, 40, 99 (mano˚); ii.39 sq., 247; iii.60, 227 sq.; Vbh 285; Dhs 70, 126. Sixfold (i. e. the 6 fold sensory perception, rūpa˚, sadda˚, etc.): D ii.309; iii.244; Ps i.136. Threefold (viz. kāya˚, vacī˚, mano˚): Vism 341, 530; VbhA 144, 145. Sañcetanika
Sañcetanika
(adj.) [fr. sañcetanā] intentional Vin iii.112; M iii.207; A v.292 sq.; a˚ M i.377. Sañcetayitatta
Sañcetayitatta
(nt.) reflection Dhs 5, 72. Sañceteti
Sañceteti
see ˚cinteti. Sañcodita
Sañcodita
[saŋ+codita] instigated, excited PvA 5, 68, 171, 213; ThA 207. Sañcopati
Sañcopati
[cp. Sk. copati, as a(/pac in Mhbh. We should expect copeti in Pāli, fr. cup to stir] to move, to stir; a misunderstood term. Found in aor. samacopi (so read for T. samadhosi & v. l. samañcopi) mañcake "he stirred fr. his bed" S iii.120, 125; and sañcopa (pret.) J v.340 (v. l. for T. sañcesuŋ āsanā; C. expls as "caliŋsu"). Sañcopana
Sañcopana
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [saŋ+copana] touching, handling Vin iii.121 (ā); iv.214 (a) ( = parāmasanan nāma ito c' ito ca). Sañchanna
Sañchanna
[saŋ+channa1] covered (with = -- ˚) M i.124; Th 1, 13; J i.201; SnA 91 (˚patta full of leaves; puppha˚ of flowers). Often in cpd. paduma˚ covered with lotuses (of ponds) Pv ii.120; ii.122; Vv 441; J i.222; v.337. Sañchavin
Sañchavin,
M ii.217, 259. Sañchādita
Sañchādita
[pp. of sañchādeti] covered PvA 157. Sañchindati
Sañchindati
[saŋ+chindati] to cut, destroy M iii.275 (Pot. ˚chindeyya); A ii.33 = S iii.85 (ger. ˚chinditvā). -- pp. sañchinna. Sañchinna
Sañchinna
[pp. of sañchindati] Vin i.255 (of the kaṭhina, with samaṇḍalīkata "hemmed"). Also in cpd. ˚patta "with leaves destroyed" is Nd2 reading at Sn 44 (where T. ed. & SnA 91 read saŋsīna), as well as at Sn 64 (in similar context, where T. ed. reads sañchinna). The latter passage is expld (Nd2 625) as "bahula -- pattapalāsa saṇḍa -- cchāya," i. e. having thick & dense foliage. The same meaning is attached to sañchinna -- patta at VvA 288 (with v. l. saŋsīna!), thus evidently in sense of sañchanna. The C. on Sn 64 (viz. SnA 117) takes it as sañchanna in introductory story. Sañjagghati
Sañjagghati
[saŋ+jagghati] to joke, to jest D i.91; A iv.55, 343; DA i.256. Sañjati
Sañjati
is the P. correspondent of sajati1 (sṛj), but Sk. sañj = sajjati (to hang on, cling), which at Dhtp 67 & 397 defd as sanga. The Dhtp (64) & Dhtm (82) take sañj in all meanings of ālingana (=sajati2), vissagga (=sajati1), & nimmāna (= sajjeti). -- 670 -- Sañjanati
Sañjanati
[saŋ+janati] to be born; only in Caus. ˚janeti to cause, produce; realize Pug 16; Sdhp 564 (ger. ˚janayitvāna). -- pp. sañjāta. See also Pass. saŋjāyati. Sañjanana
Sañjanana
(nt.) producing; f. ˚ī progenetrix (identical with taṇhā) Dhs 1059; DhsA 363. Sañjanetar
Sañjanetar
[n. ag. fr. sañjaneti] one who produces S i.191; iii.66. Sañjambhari
Sañjambhari
in ˚ŋ karoti is not clear in dern & meaning; perhaps "to tease, abuse," see D i.189 (˚riyaŋ); A i.187; S ii.282. Probably fr. bhṛ (Intensive jarbhṛta Vedic!) as *jarbhari. See on dern Konow, J.P.T.S. 1909, 42; Kern, Toev. ii.69. The C. on S ii.282 (K.S. ii.203) expls as "sambharitaŋ nirantaraŋ phuṭaŋ akaŋsu, upari vijjhiŋsū ti," i. e. continually touching (or nudging) (phuṭa = phuṭṭha or phoṭita). Sañjāta
Sañjāta1
[pp. of sañjanati] having become, produced, arisen Dhs 1035 (+bhūta & other syn.). ˚ -- full of, grown into, being in a state of Sn 53 (˚khandha = susaṇṭhita˚ SnA 103); VvA 312, 318 (˚gārava full of respect), 324 (˚pasāda). Sañjāta
Sañjāta2
(adj.) [sa2+jāta] of the same origin (con -- gener) J iv.134. Cp. sajāti. Sañjāti
Sañjāti
(f.) [saŋ+jāti] birth, origin; outcome; produce D i.227; ii.305. Sañjādiya
Sañjādiya
a grove, wood J v.417, 421 (v. l sañcāriya). Sañjānana
Sañjānana
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. sañjānāti] knowing, perceiving, recognition Miln 61; DA i.211; characteristic, that by which one is distinguished DhsA 321. As f. at Dhs 4; DhsA 110, 140 (trsln Expos. 185: "the act of perceiving by noting"). Sañjānāti
Sañjānāti
[saŋ+jānāti] 1. to recognize, perceive, know, to be aware of Vin iii.112; D ii.12; M i.111, 473; S iii.87; A v.46, 60, 63; J i.135; iv.194; ThA 110. -- 2. to think, to suppose J ii.98. -- 3. to call, name, nickname D i.93; J i.148. -- Aor. sañjāni DA i.261; ger. saññāya J i.187; ii.98; saññatvā M i.1; and sañjānitvā J i.352. -- Caus. saññāpeti (q. v.). -- pp. saññāta. Sañjānitatta
Sañjānitatta
(nt.) [fr. sañjānita, pp. Caus. of sañjānāti] the state of having perceived Dhs 4. Sañjānetar
Sañjānetar
at S iii.66 read sañjanetā. Sañjāyati
Sañjāyati
[saŋ+jāyati, cp. sañjanati] to be born or pro- duced D i.220; J ii.97; aor. sañjāyi D ii.209; Vin i.32; ppr. ˚jāyamāna J v.384. Sañjiṇṇa
Sañjiṇṇa
[saŋ+jiṇṇa] decayed J i.503 (v. l.). Sañjitar
Sañjitar
[n. ag. fr. sajati1, cp. sañjati] creator, one who assigns to each his station D i.18, 221; M i.327; DA i.111 (v. l. sajjitar, cp. Sk. sraṣṭar). Sañjīvana
Sañjīvana
(adj.) [fr. saŋ+jīv] reviving ThA 181 (Ap. v. 23: putta˚). Sañjhā
Sañjhā
(f.) [cp. Sk. sandhyā] evening; only in cpds. ˚ātapa evening sun VvA 4, 12; ˚ghana evening cloud ThA 146 (Ap. v.44); Dāvs v.60. Saññ˚
Saññ˚
is frequent spelling for saŋy˚ (in saŋyojana = sañ- ñojana e. g.), q. v. Saññatta
Saññatta1
(nt.) [abstr. formation fr. saññā] the state of being a saññā, perceptibility S iii.87. Saññatta
Saññatta2
[pp. of saññāpeti] induced, talked over Sn 303, 308 Saññatti
Saññatti
(f.) [fr. saññāpeti] 1. informing, convincing A i.75; S i.199; Vin ii.98, 199, 307; J iii.402. -- 2. appeasing, pacification M i.320. Saññā
Saññā
(f.) [fr. saŋ+jñā] (pl. saññāyo and saññā -- e. g. M i.108) 1. sense, consciousness, perception, being the third khandha Vin i.13; M i.300; S iii.3 sq.; Dhs 40, 58, 61, 113; VbhA 42. -- 2. sense, perception, discernment, recognition, assimilation of sensations, awareness M i.293; A iii.443 (nibbāna˚); S iii.87; Sn 732 (saññāya uparodhanā dukkhakkhayo hoti; expld as "kāmasaññā" SnA); Miln 61; Dhs 4; DhsA 110, 200 (rūpa˚ perception of material qualities). -- 3. consciousness D i.180 sq.; M i.108; Vbh 369 (nānatta˚ c. of diversity: see nānatta); Miln 159; J iv.391; is previous to ñāṇa D i.185; a constituent part of nāma S ii.3, cp. Sn 779; according to later teaching differs from viññāṇa and paññā only as a child's perceiving differs from (a) an adult's, (b) an expert's Vism 436 sq.; Dhs. trsln 7 n. 2, 17 n. 2. -- nevasaññā -- nâsaññā neither consciousness nor unconsciousness D iii.224, 262 sq.; M i.41, 160; ii.255; iii.28, 44; Ps i.36; Dhs 268, 582, 1417; Kvu 202; Nett 26, 29; Vism 571. -- 4. conception, idea, notion D i.28; iii.289 (cp. Dial. iii.263: "concept rather than percept"); M iii.104; S i.107; Sn 802, 841; J i.368 (ambaphala saññāya in the notion or imagining of mango fruit); Vism 112 (rūpa˚ & aṭṭhika˚). saññaŋ karoti to imagine, to think J ii.71; to take notice, to mind J i.117. -- 5. sign, gesture token, mark J i.287; ii.18; paṇṇa˚ a mark of leaves J i.153; rajjusaññā a rope used as a mark, a guiding rope, J i.287; rukkha -- saññaŋ pabbata -- saññaŋ karonto, using trees and hills as guiding marks J iv.91; saññaŋ dadāti to give the sign (with the whip, for the horse to start) J vi.302. -- 6. saññā is twofold, paṭighasamphassajā and adhivacanasamphassajā i. e. sense impression and recognition (impression of something similar, "association by similarity," as when a seen person calls up some one we know), Vbh 6; VbhA 19 sq.; threefold, rūpasaññā, paṭighasaññā, and nānattasaññā A ii.184; S ii.211; cp. Sn 535; or kāma˚, vyāpāda˚, vihiŋsā˚ (as nānatta˚) Vbh 369, cp. VbhA 499; fivefold (pañca vimutti -- paripācaniyā saññā); anicca˚, anicce dukkha˚, dukkhe anatta˚, pahāna˚, virāga˚ D iii.243, cp. A iii.334; there are six perceptions of rūpa, sadda, gandha, rasa, phoṭṭhabba, and dhamma, D ii.309; S iii.60; the sevenfold perception, anicca -- , anatta -- , asubha -- , ādīnava -- , pahāna -- , virāga -- , and nirodha -- saññā, D ii.79; cp. A iii.79; the tenfold perception, asubha -- , maraṇa -- , āhāre paṭikkūla -- , sabbaloke anabhirata -- , anicca -- , anicce dukkha -- , dukkhe anatta -- , pahāna -- , virāga -- , nirodha -- saññā A v.105; the one perception, āhāre paṭikkūlasaññā, Cpd. 21. -- 7. See further (unclassified refs.): D i.180; ii.277 (papañca˚); iii.33, 223; S ii.143; A ii.17; iv.312; Nd1 193, 207; Nett 27; Vism 111, 437, 461 sq. (in detail); VbhA 20 (pañca -- dvārikā), 34; VvA 110; and on term Cpd. 40, 42.

-- gata perceptible, the world of sense M i.38. -- bhava conscious existence Vism 572; VbhA 183. -- maya = arūpin M i.410 (opp. manomaya=rūpin). -- vedayitanirodha cessation of consciousness and sensation M i.160, 301; iii.45; A i.41; Kvu 202; S ii.212. -- viratta free from consciousness, an Arahant, Sn 847. -- vimokkha emancipation from consciousness Sn 1071 sq.; Miln 159=Vin v.116. Saññāṇa
Saññāṇa
(nt.) [Vedic sañjñāna] 1. perception, knowledge VvA 110. -- 2. token, mark J iv.301; DA i.46; Vism 244. -- 3. monument Mhvs 19, 35. Saññāta
Saññāta
[pp. of sañjānāti] skilled M i.396. Saññāpana
Saññāpana
(nt.) [fr. saññāpeti] convincing J v.462. Saññāpeti
Saññāpeti
[Caus. of sañjānāti] 1. to make known, to teach J i.344; Miln 45. -- 2. to remonstrate with, gain over, convince D i.236; M i.397; A i.75; S iv.313; Vin i.10; ii.197; Miln 316. -- 3. to appease, conciliate J i.479; PvA 16. Also saññapeti J i.26, etc. -- inf. saññattuŋ Sn 597. -- pp. saññatta. -- At J i.408 read saññāpāpetvā (instead of saññaŋ pāpetvā), or simply saññāpetvā, like the parallel text at Ud 17. -- 671 -- Saññāvant
Saññāvant
(adj.) [fr. saññā] having perception A ii.215 = Dhs 1003. Saññita
Saññita
[ = saññāta; pp. of sañjānāti] so -- called, named, so -- to -- speak Mhvs 7, 45; PvA 135; Sdhp 72, 461. See also aya under niraya. Saññin
Saññin
(adj.) [fr. saññā] (f. saññinī) conscious, being aware of ( -- ˚), perceiving, having perception D i.31, 180; iii.49, 111, 140, 260; S i.62; A ii.34, 48, 50; iii.35; iv.427; Dh 253; Nd1 97, 138. -- ālokasaññin having a clear perception D i.71; A ii.211; v.207; Sum i.211; nānatta˚ conscious of diversity A iv.39 sq.; paṭhavīsaññin conscious of the earth (kasiṇa), in samādhi A v.8 sq.; paṭhavisaññiniyo (fem. plur.), having a worldly mind D ii.139; asubhasaññin perceiving the corruption of the world It 93; vihiŋsasaññin conscious of the trouble Vin i.7; nevasaññī -- nâsaññin neither conscious nor unconscious D iii.111; A ii.34; Nd1 97, 138; It 90; DA i.119. Cp. vi˚. -- In composition saññi˚, e. g. ˚gabbha animate production D i.54; DA i.163. Saññīvāda
Saññīvāda
[saññin+vāda] name of a school maintaining con- scious existence after death D i.31; DA i.119; Mhbv 110. Saṭa
Saṭa
[most likely = Sk. śada (fall), fr. śad to fall; Kern Toev. s. v. equals it to Sk. sūta (or sṛta) of sṛ (or su) to run (to impel), as in ussaṭa and visaṭa. The Dhtm (789) gives a root saṭ in meaning of "visaraṇa," i. e. profusion, diffusion (cp. visaṭa)] a fall, a heap of things fallen; only in cpd. paṇṇa˚ a heap of fallen leaves M i.21 (=paṇṇa -- kacavara MA i.120); J ii.271. Saṭṭha
Saṭṭha
[pp. of sajati1] dismissed; in cpd. -- ˚esana one who has abandoned all longing or research D iii.269 (cp. Dial. iii.247 "has utterly given up quests"); A ii.41 (so read for saṭh˚). -- saṭṭha at S iii.84 is to be read seṭṭha, and at S iv.298 saṭha. Saṭṭhi
Saṭṭhi
(num. ord.) [cp. Sk. ṣaṣṭi: see cha] sixty D i.45; ii.261; Sn 538; DhA iii.412 (ekūna˚). It is found mostly in the same application as cha (group -- number), e. g. at J i.64 (˚turiya -- sahassāni); VvA 92 (id.); J i.87 (˚yojana); vi.512 (˚sahassa); DhA i.8, 17, 26, 131 (˚sakaṭa). -- ˚hāyana 60 years old (of elephant) M i.229; J ii.343. Saṭṭhuŋ
Saṭṭhuŋ
at J vi.185 (taŋ asakkhi saṭṭhuŋ) is inf. of sajati1 (sṛj = Sk. sraṣṭuŋ) to dismiss, let loose. The form has caused trouble, since the Com. explains it with gaṇhituŋ "to take." This has induced Kern (Toev. s. v.) to see in it a very old (even pre -- Vedic!) form with *sāḍhuŋ as original. Evidently he derives it fr. sah (Epic Sk. soḍhuŋ!), as he trsls it as "to master, overpower. " Saṭha
Saṭha
(adj.) [cp. Sk. śaṭha] crafty, treacherous, fraudulent D ii.258; iii.246; M i.32, 153; S iv.299; A ii.41; iii.35; v.157; Dh 252; Vin ii.89; Nd1 395; Miln 250; Dāvs ii.88; DhA iii.375; Dhtp 100 ( = keṭave). -- f. saṭhī Pv ii.34. See also kerāṭika, samaya˚, sāṭheyya. Saṭhatā
Saṭhatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. saṭha] craft, wickedness Pug 19. Saṭhila
Saṭhila
(adj.) [Sk. śithila, which also appears as sithila, e. g. Th 1, 277] loose, inattentive Dh 312. Saṭhesana
Saṭhesana
see saṭṭha. Saṇa
Saṇa
(nt.) [Vedic śaṇa; Gr. ka/nnabis = Lat. cannabis; Ags haenep=E. hemp; Ger. hanf.] a kind of hemp D ii.350 (v. l.); S i.115 (do.); cp. sāṇa1 & sāṇī.

-- dhovika [perhaps (Kern's suggestion) sāṇa˚ (v. l.) = visāṇa˚?] name of a particular kind of gambol of elephants in water M i.229, 375. Bdhgh at DA i.84 uses the obscure term sāṇa -- dhovana -- kīḷā to denote a trick of Caṇḍālas. But see sandhovika. Saṇati
Saṇati
[svan; Idg. *sṷenō = Lat. sono, Ags. swin music, swinsian to sing; Ohg. swan=swan] to sound, to make a noise Sn 721 (T. sanati)=Miln 414; sanate S i.7= 203; J vi.507; ppr. saṇanto Sn 720 (T. n). Saṇiŋ
Saṇiŋ
(adv.) [cp. Sk. śanaiḥ] softly, gradually Sn 350; Mhvs 25, 84. Saṇikaŋ
Saṇikaŋ
(adv.) [fr. last] slowly, gently, gradually D ii.333; M i.120; S i.82, 203; J i.9, 292; ii.103; Miln 117; DA i.197; DhA i.60, 389; VvA 36, 178. Saṇṭha
Saṇṭha
a reed (used for bow -- strings) M i.429. Saṇṭhapeti & ˚ṭhāpeti
Saṇṭhapeti
& ˚ṭhāpeti [Caus. of santiṭṭhati] 1. to settle, to establish A ii.94 (cittaŋ); S iv.263; J i.225; PvA 196. -- 2. to call to order D i.179 (˚āp˚). -- 3. to adjust, fold up J i.304. Saṇṭhahana
Saṇṭhahana
(nt.) [fr. santiṭṭhati] recreation Vism 420 sq. Saṇṭhāti
Saṇṭhāti
see santiṭṭhati. Saṇṭhāna
Saṇṭhāna
(nt.) [fr. saŋ+sthā] 1. configuration, position; composition, nature, shape, form Vin ii.76; M i.120 (spelt ˚nth˚); A i.50; iv.190 (C. osakkana); Miln 270, 316, 405; J i.71, 291, 368; ii.108; Vism 184, 225, 243; DhsA 321; DA i.88 (nth); SnA 464 ( = linga). su˚ well formed Sn 28. -- adj. ( -- ˚) having the appearance of megha -- vaṇṇa˚ PvA 251; chavi˚ appearance of the skin J i.489; vaṇṇa˚ outward semblance Nett 27; J i.271; sarīra˚ the (material) body Vism 193. -- 2. fuel J ii.330 =iv.471. -- 3. (usually spelt ˚nth˚) a resting place, meeting place, public place (market) (cp. Sk. sansthāna in this meaning). At S i.201 in phrase nadī -- tīresu saṇṭhāne sabhāsu rathiyāsu (i. e. at all public places). S i.201 reads saṇṭhāne (v. l. santhāne); cp. K.S. i.256 from C.: "a resting place (vissamana -- ṭṭhāne) near the city gate, when market -- wares had been brought down," trsln "resting by the gates." This stanza is quoted at SnA 20, where the ed. prefers reading panthāne as correct reading (v. l. saṇṭhāne). At M i.481 (˚nth˚)= S ii.28 (2 fr. b.), it seems to be used in the sense of "end, stopping, cessation"=A iv.190 (the editions of S and A have saṇṭhāna). At J vi.113 it is translated by "market place," the comp. saṇṭhāna -- gata being explained by the Comm. by saṇṭhāna -- mariyādaŋ gatā, but at J vi.360 saṇṭhāna -- gata is by the English translator translated "a wealthy man" (vinicchaye ṭhito, Com.), which, however, ought to be "in the court house" (cp. vinicchaya -- ṭṭhāna), i. e. publicly. In both places there is also v. l. santhāna -- ˚. Saṇṭhita
Saṇṭhita
[pp. of santiṭṭhati] 1. established in ( -- ˚), settled, composed Sn 330 (santi -- soracca -- samādhi˚); Sdhp 458; su˚ firmly or well established Sn 755; Miln 383; in a good position, well situated DhsA 65. -- 2. being composed (as), being of the nature of ( -- ˚), ullumpanasabhāva˚ of a helping disposition DA i.177; PvA 35. Saṇṭhiti
Saṇṭhiti
(f.) [fr. santiṭṭhati] 1. stability, firmness S v.228; Dhs 11; Vism 206; DhsA 143; Sdhp 460. -- 2. fixing, settling Miln 144. Saṇḍa
Saṇḍa
[dial.; Dhtm 157: gumb' attha -- m -- īraṇe; cp. Sk. ṣaṇḍa] a heap, cluster, multitude; a grove (vana˚) D i.87; S iii.108; Vin i.23; J i.134 (vana˚); satta˚ teeming with beings It 21. -- Jambu˚ N. of Jambudīpa Sn 352 = Th 1, 822 (v. l. ˚maṇḍa, which Kern considers to be the correct reading; see Toev. ii.67). -- saṇḍa˚cārin swarming D i.166=M i.77=A ii 206. -- 672 -- Saṇḍāsa
Saṇḍāsa
[saŋ+ḍaŋsa, fr. ḍasati] (long) pincers, tweezers A i.210; J i.223; iii.138; used to pull out hair M ii.75; Vin ii.134. Saṇṇikā (saṇikā)
Saṇṇikā
(saṇikā) [cp. saṇi = Sk. sṛṇi] an elephant -- driver's hook J i.445 (so read for paṇṇ˚). Saṇha
Saṇha
(adj.) [cp. Sk. ślakṣṇa] 1. smooth, soft Vin i.202; ii.151; Vv 5018 ( = mudu VvA 213); Vism 260=KhA 59. saṇhena softly Th 1, 460. -- 2. gentle, mild D ii.259; Sn 853; J i.202, 376; Nd1 234; PvA 56, 215. Of speech (opp. pharusa harsh) M i.126; A iii.196; Dhs 1343. -> 3. delicate, exquisite Th 2, 258, 262, 264, 268. Cp. pari˚.

-- karaṇī "a wooden instrument for smoothing the ground, or a sort of trowel," Abhp 1007; J iv.250 (loc. ˚iyaŋ piŋsito); iv.4 (˚ī viya tilāni piŋsamānā); v.271; vi.114 (asani viya viravanto ˚iyaŋ viya piŋsanto); cp. KhA 59; thus it seems to mean also a sort of instrument for oil -- pressing, or a mortar. Saṇhaka
Saṇhaka,
at J iii.394 (of hair growing white "saṇhaka- sadisā") according to Kern, Toev. ii.69 (coarse) hempen cloth ( = sāṇavāka), as indicated by v. l. sāṇalāka. Thus a der. fr. saṇa=sāṇa. Kern compares P. tuṇhīra= tūṇīra; Sk. śaṇa =śāṇaka. According to Andersen, Pāli Glossary "betelnut" (=saṇha). Saṇheti
Saṇheti
[Caus. fr. saṇha] to brush down, smooth (kese): only as cpd. o˚ at Vin ii.107; J iv.219. Sata
Sata1
(num. card.) [Vedic śataŋ; cp. Av. satəm, Gr. e( -- kato/n, Lat. centum; Goth. hund = hundred; Idg. *kmtóm fr. dkm̊tóm (=decem), thus ultimately the same as daśa, i. e. decad (of tens)] a hundred, used as nt. (collect.), either -- ˚ or as apposition, viz. gāma -- sataŋ a hundred (ship of) villages DhA i.180; jaṭila -- satāni 100 ascetics Vin i.24; jāti˚ D i.13; or gāthā sataŋ 100 stanzas Dh 102. -- Often in sense of "many" or "innumerable," e. g. ˚kaku, ˚raŋsi, etc.; cp. ˚satāni bahūni J iv.310, 311.

-- kaku having a hundred corners, epithet of a cloud A iii.34 = S i.100 (v. l. sattakatu) see J.P.T.S. 1891 -- 93 p. 5. -- patta the Indian crane (or woodpecker?) J ii.153; 388; Miln 404. -- padī a centipede A ii.73; iii.101, 306; iv.320; v.290; Vin ii.110, 148; Miln 272. -- pala (Th 1, 97) see pala. -- pāka ( -- tela) oil mixture, worth 100 pieces J iv.281; DhA ii.48; iii.311; see also pāka. -- puñña 100, i. e. innumerable merits Vism 211. -- pupphā Anethum sowa, a sort of dill or fennel J vi.537. -- porisa of the height of a hundred men, extremely high, attribute of a hell Vv 52, 12 sq.; name of a hell J v.269. -- mūlī Asparagus racemosus Abhp 585. -- raŋsi "having 100 rays," the sun Sdhp 590; J i.44. -- rasabhojana food of 100 flavours DhA iii.96 (v. l. all pass, satta˚) -- vanka a kind of fish Abhp 672. -- vallikā an under -- garment, arranged like a row of jewelry Vin ii.137. -- sahassa one hundred thousand J ii.20; Miln 88; 136; DhA ii.86. -- sahassima id. S ii.133. Sata
Sata2
[pp. of sarati, of smṛ, cp. BSk. smṛta AvŚ i.228; ii.197] remembering, mindful, conscious D i.37; ii.94; iii.49, 107, 222, 269; M i.520 (su -- ssata & dus -- sata); S iv.211; A iii.169 (+sampajāna), 325; iv.311; Sn 741; Dhs 163; DA i.211. -- satokārin cultivator of sati Ps i.175. Sataka
Sataka
(nt.) [cp. BSk. śataka] a hundred, collection of 100 J i.74. Satakkhattuŋ
Satakkhattuŋ
(adv.) [cp. dvi -- kkhattuŋ, ti -- kkhattuŋ etc.] a hundred times. Satata
Satata
(adj.) [with satrā "completely" & sadā "always" to sa˚ "one": see saŋ˚; lit. "in one (continuous) stretch"] continual, chronic. Only in nt. satataŋ (adv.) continually A iv.14; It 116; Sn 507; Miln 70; Pv ii.811 ( = nirantaraŋ PvA 110); iii.710 (=sabbakālaŋ PvA 207); PvA 177; and as ˚ -- in ˚vihāra a chronic state of life, i. e. a behaviour remaining even & the same A ii.198=D iii.250, 281. Cp. sātacca. Satadhā
Satadhā
(adv.) [sata+dhā, cp. ekadhā, dvidhā etc.] in 100 ways, into 100 pieces D ii.341. Sati
Sati
(f.) [Vedic smṛti: see etym. under sarati2] memory, recognition, consciousness, D i.180; ii.292; Miln 77 -- 80; intentness of mind, wakefulness of mind, mindfulness, alertness, lucidity of mind, self -- possession, conscience, self -- consciousness D i.19; iii.31, 49, 213, 230, 270 sq.; A i.95; Dhs 14; Nd1 7; Tikp 61; VbhA 91; DhsA 121; Miln 37; upaṭṭhitā sati presence of mind D iii.252, 282, 287; S ii.231; A ii.6, 218; iii.199; iv.232; It 120; parimukhaŋ satiŋ upaṭṭhāpetuŋ to surround oneself with watchfulness of mind M iii.89; Vin i.24, satiŋ paccupaṭṭhāpetuŋ to preserve self -- possession J i.112; iv.215; kāyagatā sati intentness of mind on the body, realization of the impermanency of all things M iii.89; A i.43; S i.188; Miln 248; 336; muṭṭhasati forgetful, careless D iii.252, 282; maraṇasati mindfulness as to death A iv.317 sq.; J iv.216; SnA 54; PvA 61, 66. asati not thinking of, forgetfulness DhsA 241; instr. asatiyā through forgetfulness, without thinking of it, not intentionally Vin ii.2892. sati (sammā˚) is one of the constituents of the 8 -- fold Ariyan Path (e g. A iii.141 sq.; VbhA 120): see magga 2.

-- âdhipateyya (sat˚) dominant mindfulness A ii.243 sq.; It 40. -- indriya the sense, faculty, of mindfulness A ii.149; Dhs 14. -- uppāda arising, production of recollection J i.98; A ii.185; M i.124. -- ullapakāyika, a class of devas S i.16 sq. -- paṭṭhāna [BSk. smṛty'upasthāna Divy 126, 182, 208] intent contemplation and mindfulness, earnest thought, application of mindfulness; there are four satipaṭṭhānas, referring to the body, the sensations, the mind, and phenomena respectively, D ii.83, 290 sq.; iii.101 sq., 127, 221; M i.56, 339; ii.11 etc.; A ii.218; iii.12; iv.125 sq., 457 sq.; v.175; S iii.96, 153; v.9, 166; Dhs 358; Kvu 155 (cp. Kvu. trsln 104 sq.); Nd1 14, 45, 325, 340; Vism 3; VbhA 57, 214 sq., 417. -- See on term e. g. Cpd. 179; and in greater detail Dial. ii.322 sq. -- vinaya disciplinary proceeding under appeal to the accused monk's own conscience Vin i.325; ii.79 etc.; M ii.247; A i.99. -- vepullappatta having attained a clear conscience Vin ii.79. -- saŋvara restraint in mindfulness Vism 7; DhsA 351; SnA 8. -- sampajañña mindfulness and self -- possession D i.70; A ii.210; DA i.183 sq. -- sambojjhanga (e. g. S v.90) see (sam)bojjhanga. -- sammosa loss of mindfulness or memory, lack of concentration or attention D i.19; Vin ii.114; DA i.113; Pug 32; Vism 63; Miln 266. Satika
Satika
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. sata1] consisting of a hundred, belonging to a hundred; yojanasatika extending one hundred yojanas Vin ii.238; vīsaŋvassasatika of hundred and twenty years' standing Vin ii.303. Satitā
Satitā
(f.) [abstr. formation fr. sati] mindfulness, memory DhsA 405 ( -- ˚). Satima
Satima
(adj.) [superl. formn fr. sata1] the hundredth S ii.133; J i.167 (pañca˚). Satimant
Satimant
(adj.) [fr. sati] mindful, thoughtful, contempla- tive, pensive; nom. sg. satimā D i.37; S i.126; Sn 174; A ii.35; Dhs 163; DhA iv.117; Pv iv.344; satīmā (in verse) Sn 45; nt. satīmaŋ Sn 211; gen. satimato S i.208; satīmato S i.81; Dh 24; nom. pl. satīmanto D ii.120; Dh 91; DhA ii.170; gen. satīmataŋ Dh 181; It 35; satimantānaŋ A i.24. -- See also D iii.77, 141, 221 sq.; A iv.4, 38, 300 sq., 457 sq.; Nd1 506; Nd2 629. Satī
Satī
(f.) [fr. sant, ppr. of as] 1. being J iii.251. -- 2. a good or chaste woman Abhp 237; asatī an unchaste woman Miln 122 = J iii.350; J v.418; vi.310. -- 673 -- Satekiccha
Satekiccha
(adj.) [sa3+tekiccha] curable, pardonable Miln 192, 221; Vism 425. See tekiccha. Sateratā
Sateratā
(f.) [cp. Sk. śatahradā, śata+hrada] lightning J v.14, 203. Also as sateritā Vv 333; 644; VvA 161 ( = vijjulatā), 277. As saderitā at Th 1, 260. Satta
Satta1
[pp. of sañj: sajjati] hanging, clinging or attached to Vin i.185; D ii.246; Nd1 23, 24; Dh 342; J i.376. Cp. āsatta1 & byāsatta. Satta
Satta2
[cp, Vedic sattva living being, satvan "strong man, warrior," fr. sant] 1. (m.) a living being, creature, a sentient & rational being, a person D i.17, 34, 53, 82; ii.68; A i.35 sq., 55 sq.; S i.135; v.41; Vin i.5; Miln 273; Vism 310 (defn: "rūp'ādisu khandhesu chandarāgena sattā visattā ti sattā," thus = satta1); Nett 161; DA i.51, 161; VbhA 144. -- naraka˚ a being in purgatory (cp. niraya˚) Vism 500. -- 2. (nt.) soul (=jīvita or viññāṇa) Pv i.81 (gata˚=vigata -- jīvita PvA 40). -> 3. (nt.) substance Vin i.287. nissatta non -- substantial, phenomenal DhsA 38.

-- āvāsa abode of sentient beings (see nava1 2) D iii.263, 268; A v.53; Vism 552; VbhA 168. -- ussada (see ussada 4) teeming with life, full of people D i.87, 111, 131. -- loka the world of living creatures SnA 263, 442; Vism 205. See also sankhāra -- loka. -- vaṇijjā slave trade DA i.235 = A iii.208 (C.: manussa -- vikkaya). Satta
Satta3
[pp. of sapati to curse; Sk. śapta] cursed, sworn J iii.460; v.445. Satta
Satta4
(num.) [cp. Vedic sapta, Gr. e(pta/; Av. hapta; Lat. septem, Goth. sibun = E. seven etc.] number seven. It is a collective and concluding (serial) number; its application has spread from the week of 7 days (or nights), and is based on astronomical conception (Babylon!), this science being regarded as mystic, it invests the number with a peculiar magic nimbus. From time -- expressions it was transferred to space, esp. when originally connected with time (like satta -- bhūmaka the 7 -- storied palace; the Vimānas with 700 towers: see vimāna 2 & 6; or the 7 great lakes: see sara3; ˚yojana 7 miles, cp. the 7 league -- boots!). Extremely frequent in folklore and fairy tales (cp. 7 years of famine in Egypt, 7 days' festivals, dragon with 7 heads, 7 ravens, 7 dwarfs, 7 little goats, 7 years enchantment, etc. etc.). -> For time expressions see in cpds.: ˚āha, ˚māsa, ˚ratta, ˚vassa. Cp. Sn 446 (vassāni); J ii.91 (kāyā, thick masses); DA i.25 (of the Buddh. Scriptures: sattahi māsehi sangītaŋ); DhA ii.34 (dhanāni), 101 (mangalā); the collective expression 7 years, 7 months, 7 days at J v.48; the 7X70 ñāṇavatthūni S ii.59; and the curious enumeration of heptads at D i.54. -- Cases: instr. sattahi D i.34; gen. sattannaŋ D i.56; loc. sattasu D ii.303=M i.61.

-- anga a couch with 7 members (i. e. four legs, head support, foot support, side) Vin ii.149. -- aṭṭha seven or eight J ii.101. -- āgārika a "seven -- houser," one who turns back from his round, as soon as he has received alms at 7 houses D i.166. -- ālopika a "seven -- mouthful," one who does not eat more than 7 bits D i.166. -- āha (nt.) seven days, a week of 7 days [cp. BSk. saptaka Divy 99] D ii.248; Vin i.1, 139; J i.78; ii.85; iv.360; v.472; vi.37; DhA i.109; VvA 63. satta˚ 7 weeks DhA i.86; cp. satta -- satta -- divasā J v.443. -- ussada (see ussada 2) having 7 prominences or protuberances (on the body), a sign of a Mahāpurisa D ii.18; iii.144, 151 (i. e. on both hands, on both feet, on both shoulders, on the back). -- guṇa sevenfold Mhvs 25, 36. -- jaṭa with seven plaits (of hair) J v.91 (of a hunter). -- tanti having 7 strings, a lute VvA 139. -- tāla ( -- matta) (as big as) 7 palm trees DhA ii.62, 100. -- tiŋsa 37 (see bodhipakkhiya -- dhammā). -- dina a week Mhvs 11, 23. -- pakaraṇika mastering the 7 books of the Abhidhamma J i.312; DhA iii.223. -- patiṭṭha sevenfold firm D ii.174; Miln 282. -- padaŋ for 7 steps J vi.351 (Kern, Toev. s. v. "unfailing"). -- bhūmaka (pāsāda) (a palace) with 7 stories Mhvs 37, 11; J i.58; iv.378; DhA i.180, 239; iv.209. -- māsaŋ (for) seven months PvA 20. -- yojanika 7 miles in extent J v.484. -- ratana the 7 royal treasures D i.88; It 15; J v.484. -- ratta a week J vi.230 (dve˚ = a fortnight), 304; Sn 570. -- vassika 7 years old Miln 9. 310; DhA ii.87, 89 (sāmaṇera), 139; PvA 53 (Sankicca arahattaŋ patvā); DhA iii.98 (kumāro arahattaŋ patto); J v.249. On the age of seven as that of child arahants see Mrs. Rh. D. in Brethren introd. xxx. -- vīsati twenty seven DhA i.4. Sattakkhattuŋ
Sattakkhattuŋ
(adv.) [cp. tikkhattuŋ etc.] seven times Vin i.3; It 18; sattakkhattuparamaŋ seven times at the utmost; ˚parama one who will not be reborn more than seven times S ii.134 sq.; A i.233, 235; iv.381; Kvu 104; Pug 15 sq.; Nett 189; KhA 187; J i.239; DhA iii.61, 63. Sattati
Sattati
[cp. Sk. saptati] seventy D ii.256; Ap 118, 126 & passim. As sattari at S ii.59; Ap 248 & passim. Sattatta
Sattatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. satta2] state of having existence D i.29. Sattadhā
Sattadhā
(adv.) [fr. satta4, cp. dvidhā] in seven pieces D i.94; ii.235; Sn 783; J v.33, 493; DhA i.17, 41. Cp. phalati. Sattapaṇṇirukkha
Sattapaṇṇi
-- rukkha N. of a tree Mhvs 30, 47; cp. satta- paṇṇi -- guhā N. of a cave KhA 95. Sattama
Sattama1
(adj.) [superl. fr. sant] best, excellent Sn 356; J i.233. Sattama
Sattama2
(num. ord.) [fr. satta4] the seventh D i.89; Sn 103. -- f. ˚mī Sn 437. Often in loc. ˚divase on the 7th day Sn 983; J i.395; Miln 15; PvA 6, 74. -- ˚bhavika one who has reached the 7th existence (or rebirth) Kvu 475 (cp. trsln 2714). Sattarasa
Sattarasa
(num. card.) [satta4+rasa2 = dasa] seventeen Vin i.77; iv.112 (˚vaggiyā bhikkhū, group of 17). Sattari
Sattari
= sattati, at S ii.59 sq. Sattali
Sattali
(f.) [cp. Sk. saptalā, name of var. plants, e. g. jasmine, or many -- flowered nykkanthes, Halāy. 2, 52] the plantain, and its flower J iv.440 ( = kadali -- puppha C.; so read for kandala˚); and perhaps at Th 2, 260 for pattali (q. v.), which is expld as kadali( -- makula) at ThA 211. Sattava=satta
Sattava
= satta2 [a diaeretic sattva] J v.351. Cp. Lal. Vist. 520. Satti
Satti1
(f.) [fr. śak, cp. Vedic śakti] ability, power Dhtp 508 Usually in phrase yathā satti as much as one can do, according to one's ability Cp i.106; DhA i.399; or yathā sattiŋ D i.102, or y. sattiyā DhA i.92. Satti
Satti2
(f.) [cp. Vedic śakti, orig. identical with satti1] 1. knife, dagger, sword A iv.130; J ii.153; Vism 313 (dīgha -- daṇḍa˚ with a long handle); DhA i.189; ii.134 (tikhiṇa˚ a sharp knife). mukha˚ piercing words J i.341. -- 2. a spear, javelin S i.13; A ii.117; J i.150.

-- pañjara lattice work of spears D ii.164. -- langhana javelin dance J i.430. -- simbali -- vana the forest of swords (in purgatory) J v.453. -- sūla a sword stake, often in simile ˚ûpamā kāmā S i.128; A iii.97; Vism 341. Also N. of a purgatory J v.143 sq. Sattika
Sattika
see tala˚. Sattu
Sattu1
[Vedic śatru] an enemy J v.94 (acc. pl. sattavo); Vism 234 (˚nimmathana). Sattu
Sattu2
[cp. Sk. śaktu] barley -- meal, flour Vin ii.116 (satthu); Nd1 372; J iii.343 sq.; Pv iii.13; Dhs 646.

-- āpaṇa baker's shop J vi.365. -- pasibbaka flour sack; ˚bhasta id. J iii.346. -- 674 -- Sattuka
Sattuka
[fr. sattu1] an enemy J iii.154; Mhvs 32, 18. Sattha
Sattha1
(nt.) [cp. Vedic śastra, fr. śas to cut] a weapon, sword, knife; coll. "arms" D i.4, 56; Sn 309, 819 (expld as 3: kāya˚, vacī˚, mano˚, referring to A iv.42, at Nd1 151); J i.72, 504; Pv iii.102; SnA 458 (˚mukhena); PvA 253. Often in combn daṇḍa+sattha (cp. daṇḍa 4), coll. for "arms," Vin i.349; D i.63; A iv.249; Nd2 576. -- satthaŋ āharati to stab oneself S i.121; iii.123; iv.57 sq.

-- kamma application of the knife, incision, operation Vin i.205; SnA 100. -- kāraka an assassin Vin iii.73. -- vaṇijjā trade in arms A iii.208. -- hāraka an assassin Vin iii.73; S iv.62. Sattha
Sattha2
(nt.) [cp. Vedic śāstra, fr. śās to teach] a science, art, lore Miln 3; SnA 327, 447. -- vāda˚ science of right belief SnA 540; sadda˚ grammar SnA 266; supina˚ dream -- telling SnA 564. Sattha
Sattha3
[sa3+attha; Sk. sārtha] a caravan D ii.130, 339; Vin i.152, 292; Nd1 446; Dh 123 (appa˚ with a small c.), Miln 351.

-- gamanīya (magga) a caravan road Vin iv.63. -- vāsa encampment D ii.340, 344. -- vāsika & ˚vāsin caravan people J i.333. -- vāha a caravan leader, a merchant D ii.342; Vv 847 (cp. VvA 337); leader of a band, teacher; used as Ep. of the Buddha S i.192; It 80, 108; Vin i.6. In exegesis of term Satthā at Nd1 446 = Nd2 630=Vism 208. Sattha
Sattha4
[pp. of sāsati; śās] told, taught J ii.298 (v. l. siṭṭha). Sattha
Sattha5
(adj.) [wrong for satta = śakta] able, competent J iii.173 (=samattha C.). Sattha
Sattha6
[cp. Sk. śvasta, śvas] breathed: see vissattha. Satthaka
Satthaka1
(nt.) [fr. sattha1] a knife, scissors Vin ii.115 (daṇḍa˚, with a handle); J v.254 (as one of the 8 parikkhāras); Miln 282. aya˚ at J v.338 read ˚paṭṭaka.

-- nisādana [cp. Sk. niśātana] knife -- sharpening DhA i.308, cp. Miln 282 ˚nisāna [ = Sk. niśāna]. -- vāta a cutting pain A i.101=307; J iii.445. Satthaka
Satthaka2
(adj.) [fr. sattha3] belonging to a caravan, caravan people, merchant PvA 274. Satthar
Satthar
[Venic śāstṛ, n. ag. fr. śās] teacher, master. -- nom. satthā D i.49; Sn 179; acc. satthāraŋ D i.163; Sn 153, 343; instr. satthārā D i.163; instr. satthunā Mhvs 32, 19; gen. satthu D i.110; It 79; Vin i.12; gen. satthuno D ii.128; Sn 547, 573, loc. satthari Dhs 1004; nom. and acc. pl. satthāro D i.230; A i.277; Miln 4; gen. pl. satthārānaŋ J i.509. -- See e. g. D i.230; A i.277; Vin i.8; Th 2, 387. -- The 6 teachers (as in detail at D i.52 -- 59 & var. places) are Pūraṇa Kassapa, Makkhali Gosāla, Nigaṇṭha Nāthaputta, Sañjaya Belaṭṭhiputta, Ajita -- Kesakambalī. -- 5 teachers at Vin ii.186; A iii.123. -- 3 at D i.230; A i.277. -> The Master par excellence is the Buddha D i.110; ii.128; iii.119 sq.; A iii.248; iv.120, 460; Sn 153, 545, 955 (see exegesis in detail at Nd1 446 = Nd2 630), 1148; Vism 389, 401, 604. -- gaṇa -- satthar leader of a company J ii.41, 72; satthāra -- dassana sight of the Master SnA 49; satthu -- d -- anvaya successor of the M. Sn 556. Satthi
Satthi1
(nt. & f.) [cp. Sk. sakthi] the thigh Vin ii.161; Th 1, 151; Vv 8117; J ii.408; iii.83; vi.528; antarā˚ between the thighs A ii.245. Satthika
Satthika
(adj.) [fr. sattha3] belonging to a caravan D ii.344. Satthu
Satthu
see sattu2; satthu˚ see satthar. Satthuka
Satthuka
"having a teacher," in atīta˚ [belonging to the whole cpd.] whose teacher is dead D ii.154. Satthuna
Satthuna
[?] a friend J i.365. Satthuvaṇṇa
Satthuvaṇṇa
[satthar˚+vaṇṇa] gold (lit. the colour of the Master) Vin iii.238, 240. Sathera
Sathera
(adj.) [sa3+thera] including the Theras A ii.169 Sadattha
Sadattha
[sat ( = sant)+attha] the highest good, ideal D ii.141; M i.4; A v.207 sq.; Dh 166; Mhvs 3, 24. It may be taken as sa4+attha (with euphonic -- d -- ), i. e. one's own good, as it is expld by Bdhgh at DhA iii.160 ("sake atthe"), & adopted in trsln at Dial. ii.154. Sadatthuta
Sadatthuta
(adj.) [sadā+thuta] always praised J iv.101 ( = nicca -- pasattha C.). Sadara
Sadara
(adj.) [sa3+dara] fearful, unhappy A ii.172; M i.280, 465 = D iii.57 (reads dd). Sadasa
Sadasa
[sa+dasā] a squatting mat with a fringe Vin iv.171. Sadassa
Sadassa
[sat( = sant)+assa] a horse of good breed A i.289. Sadā
Sadā
(adv.) [fr. saŋ˚] always Sn 1041, 1087, 1119; Nd2 631 (where long stereotype definition); Dh 79; Pv ii.811 ( = sabbakālaŋ yāvajīvaŋ PvA 110); ii.937 (=sabbakālaŋ divase divase sāyañ ca pāto ca PvA 127); iv.130.

-- matta "always revelling," N. of a palace J i.363 sq. (cp. Divy 603); a class of devas D ii.260. Sadisa
Sadisa
(adj.) [sa2+disa = dṛśa] similar, like, equal D ii.261; S iii.48 sq.; A i.125=Pug 35; Vin i.8; J i.191; Dhs 116; Vism 543=VbhA 148. Cp. sādisa. Saderita
Saderita
see saterita. Sadevaka
Sadevaka
(adj.) [sa3+deva+ka] together with the devas, with the deva world D i.62; iii.76, 135; Sn 86; Vin i.8, 11; Dh 44; DA i.174. At J i.14 sadevake (loc.) is used in the sense of "in the world of men & gods." Sadevika
Sadevika
(adj.) [sa3+devī+ka] together with his queen Mhvs 33, 70. Sadda
Sadda
[cp. late Vedic śabda; BSk. śabda as nt. at AvŚ i.3] 1. sound, noise D i.79, 152; iii. 102 sq., 146, 234, 244 sq., 269, 281; M iii.56, 267; A iii.30 sq.; iv.91, 248; J i.3 (ten sounds); Sn 71; Vism 408 (var. kinds); Dhs 621 (udaka˚); DhA ii.7 (udrīyana˚); defd at Vism 446 ("sota -- paṭihanana -- lakkhaṇa," etc.) & at VbhA 45 ("sappatī ti saddo, udāhariyatī ti attho"). -- 2. voice J ii.108. -- 3. word Vin i.11; It 114; DhA i.15 (itthi˚); VbhA 387 (in nirutti); SnA 261, 318, 335.

-- kovida a grammarian or phonetician SnA 321. -- dhātu element of sound Dhs 707. -- naya science of grammar, etymology KhA 107. -- bheda word analysis Vism 519 sq. -- vidū a grammarian SnA 169. -- vedhin shooting by sound Mhvs 23, 85. -- sattha science of words, grammar SnA 266. -- siddhi analysis or correct formation of a word, grammatical explanation SnA 304, 551. Saddana
Saddana
(nt.) [fr. śabd: see saddāyati] making a noise Dhtm 401. Saddala
Saddala
(adj.) [cp. Sk. śādvala] grassy Th 1, 211; J i.87; vi. 518; Miln 286; Pv ii.1210 ( = taruṇa -- tiṇa PvA 158). Saddahati
Saddahati
[Vedic śrad -- dhā, only in impers. forms grd. śrad -- dadhāna; pp. śrad -- dhita; inf. śrad -- dhā; cp. Av. ƶraƶ -- dā id.; Lat. cred -- (d)o (cp. "creed"); Oir. cretim to believe. Fr. Idg. *kred ( = cord˚ heart)+*dhe, lit. to put one's heart on] to believe, to have faith D ii.115; 244; S iii.225; Pv ii.83; J v.480; DhA ii.27. ppr saddahanto DA i.81; PvA 148 (a˚), 151 (a˚), 285; & saddahāna S i.20, 214; Sn 186; It 112. Pot. saddheyya J ii.446 (=saddaheyya C.); 2nd pl. saddahetha J iii.192; 3rd pl. saddheyyuŋ S ii.255. At J vi.575 (Pot.) saddahe seems to be used as an exclamation in the sense of "I wonder" (cp. maññe). -- saddahase at Pv iv.81 is to be read saddāyase (see saddāyati). -- grd. saddhātabba J ii.37; v.480; PvA 217; saddahātabba D ii.346; saddahitabba Miln 310; saddheyya Vin iii.188; and saddhāyitabba (Caus.!) PvA 109. A Caus. aor. 2 sg. is (mā) . . . saddahesi J vi.136140 -- ger. saddhāya J v.176 (=saddahitvā C.); inf. saddhātuŋ J v.445. -> pp. (Caus.) saddhāyita. -- Caus. II. saddahāpeti to make believe, to convince; Pot. ˚dahāpeyya J vi.575; Pv iv.125; fut. ˚dahāpessati J i.294. -- 675 -- Saddahanā
Saddahanā
(f.) [fr. sad+dhā] believing, trusting, having faith Nd2 632; Dhs 12, 25; Nett 15, 19; DhA i.76. Saddāyati
Saddāyati
[Denom. fr. sadda; i. e. śabd] cp. Epic Sk. śab- dayati & śabdāyati] 1. to make a sound Miln 258; Pv iv.81 (saddāyase read for saddahase); iv.161 (id.); Ud 61 (˚āyamāna noisy). -- 2. to call, summon (with acc.) J iii.288. Saddita
Saddita
[pp. of śabd; cp. saddāyati] sounded, called Sdhp 100. Saddūla
Saddūla
[cp. Sk. śārdūla] a leopard Miln 23. Saddha
Saddha1
(adj.) [orig. adj. of saddha2, but felt to be adj. of saddhā; cp. BSk. śrāddha AvŚ i.83, 383] 1. believing faithful D i.171; S i.43; ii.159 sq.; A i.150; ii.164, 227 sq.; iii.3 sq., 34, 182; iv.38, 145, 314 sq.; v.10 sq., 124 sq.; Sn 188, 371; Dh. 8; Pv i.104; iv.186; DhA ii.82. -- as(s)addha unbelieving PvA 42, 54, 67, 243 & passim (see a˚). -- 2. credulous Sn 853; Dh 97. Saddha
Saddha2
[cp. Epic Sk. & Sūtra literature śrāddha, fr. śrad -- dhā] a funeral rite in honour of departed relatives connected with meals and gifts to the brahmins D i.97; A i.166; v.269, 273; DA i.267; saddhaŋ pamuñcati to give up offerings, to abandon Brahmanism Vin i.7; D ii.39; Sn 1146. The word is n. according to Abhp and A v.269 -- 273; loc. ˚e, D i.97; J ii.360; kaŋ saddhaŋ (acc. in a gāthā), seems to be f.; Com. ib. 360 has saddhā -- bhattaŋ, a funeral repast (v. l. saddha -- ˚). Thus it seems to be confused with saddhā. Saddhamma
Saddhamma
[sad( = sant)+dhamma, cp. BSk. saddharma, e. g. Jtm 224] the true dhamma, the best religion, good practice, the "doctrine of the good" (so Geiger, Pali Dhamma pp. 53, 54, q. v. for detailed discussion of the term) M i.46; S v.172 sq.; A i.69; iii.7 sq., 174 sq., 435 sq.; v.169, 317; Sn 1020; Dh 38; J v.483; DhA iv.95. Seven saddhammas: M i.354, 356; D iii.252, 282; A iv.108 sq. -- Opp. a -- saddhamma (q. v.); four a˚: A ii.47; eight: Vin ii.202.

-- garu paying homage to the true religion S i.140. -- savana hearing the (preaching of the) true dhamma D iii.227, 274; A i.279; ii.245; iv.25 sq., 221; v.115 sq. Saddhā
Saddhā
(f.) [cp. Vedic śraddhā: see saddahati] faith (on term cp. Geiger, Saŋyutta trsln ii.452) D i.63; iii.164 sq.; S i.172 = Sn 76; S v.196; Dh 144; A i.150, 210; iii.4 sq., 352; iv.23; v.96; Dhs 12; Miln 34 sq.; Tikp 61, 166, 277, 282. -- instr. saddhāya (used as adv.) in faith, by faith in (acc. or gen.) Vin ii.289 (āyasmantānaŋ); J v.176 (pabbajita); PvA 49 (kammaphalaŋ s.); or shortened to saddhā ( -- pabbajita) M i.123; A i.24; J i.130. The same phrase as saddhāya pabbajita at S i.120 is expld as "saddahitvā" by Bdhgh (see K.S. i.321), thus taking it as ger.

-- ânusārin walking according to faith M i.479; A i.74; Pug 15; Nett 112, 189. -- indriya (saddh˚) the faculty, i. e. the moral sense, of faith D iii.239, 278; A ii.149; S v.193, 377; Dhs 12, 62, 75; Nett 19. -- cariyā living in faith Vism 101. -- deyya a gift in faith D i.5; Vin i.298; iv.30; DA i.81. -- vimutta emancipated through faith M i.478; A i.74, 118 sq.; Pug 15; Nett 190. -- vimutti emancipation through faith Pug 15. Saddhātar
Saddhātar
[n. ag. fr. saddahati, i. e. sad+dhātar] a believer Sdhp 39. Saddhāyika
Saddhāyika
(adj.) [fr. saddhāya, ger. of saddahati] trust- worthy D ii.320; A iv.109 (so read for ˚sika); Th 2, 43, 69. Saddhāyita
Saddhāyita
[pp. of saddahati; BSk. śraddhayita] one who is trusted; nt. that which is believed, faith Pv ii.85 May be misspelling for saddhāyika. Saddhiŋ
Saddhiŋ
(& saddhi˚) (adv.) [in form = Vedic sadhrīŋ "towards one aim," but in meaning=Vedic sadhryak (opp. viṣvak, cp. P. visuŋ) "together." Cp. also Vedic saŋyak=P. sammā. The BSk. is sārdhaŋ, e. g. s. vihārin AvŚ ii.139] together; as prep. (following the noun): in company with (instr.) D i.31; Vin i.32; iii.188 (expld as "ekato"); J i.189; ii.273; DA i.35; Miln 23; also with loc. DA i.15; or gen. Vin ii.154; J i.420. As adv. saddhiŋ agamāsi J i.154, cp. saddhiŋkīḷita J ii.20.

-- cara companion Sn 45, 46 ( = ekato cara Nd2 633); Dh 328. -- vihārika (saddhi˚) co -- resident, fellow -- bhikkhu; pupil Vin i.45 sq.; A iii.70; J i.182, 224; Vism 94; DhA ii.19. -- vihārin id. A ii.239; iii.69; J i.1; f. ˚vihārinī Vin iv.291. Saddhiya
Saddhiya
(nt.) [abstr. fr. *śraddhya] only in neg. a˚ (q. v.). Sadhana
Sadhana
(adj). [sa3+dhana] wealthy, rich D i.73; J i.334. Sadhamma
Sadhamma
[sa4+dhamma] one's own religion or faith M i.523; Sn 1020; Bu ii.6 = J i.3. Sadhammika
Sadhammika
[sa2+dhamma+ika] co -- religionist D ii.273. San
San1
[cp. Vedic śvā, gen. śunaḥ; Av. spā, Gr. ku/wn; Lat. canis, Oir. cū, Goth. hunds = hound] a dog; nom. sg. sā D i.166=M i.77; S i.176; iii.150; Kvu 336. For other forms of the same base see suvāṇa. San
San2
( = saŋ) acc. of sa4. Sanacca
Sanacca
(nt.) [sa3+nacca] dancing ( -- party) Vin ii.267. Sanati
Sanati
see saṇati. Sanantana
Sanantana
(adj.) [for sanātana (cp. purātana); Idg. *seno = Gr. e(/nos old; Sk. sanaḥ in old times; Av. hana old, Lat. seneo, senex ("senile"), senatus; Goth. sineigs old; Oir. sen old] primeval, of old; for ever, eternal D ii.240, 244; S i.189 (cp. K.S. i.321: porāṇaka, santānaŋ vā paṇḍitānaŋ dhamma); DhA i.51. Sanābhika
Sanābhika
(adj.) [sa3+nābhi+ka] having a nave (of a wheel) D ii.17, 172; A ii.37; at both places combd with sa -- nemika "with a felly" (i. e. complete). Sanāmika
Sanāmika
(adj.) [sa3+nāma+ika] having a name, called Bu ii.194 = J i.28. Sanidassana
Sanidassana
(adj.) [sa3+nidassana] visible D iii.217; Dhs 1087. Sant
Sant
[ppr. of atthi] 1. being, existing D i.61, 152; A i.176; It 62 sq.; Sn 98, 124. -- 2. good, true S i.17; Dh 151. -> Cases: nom. sg. m. santo Sn 98; Miln 32; Nd2 635 ( = samāna); f. satī (q. v.); nt. santaŋ A v.8; PvA 192; acc. santaŋ D ii.65; & sataŋ J iv.435 (opp. asaŋ); instr. satā D ii.55; loc. sati D ii.32; A i.176; iii.338; Sn 81; Dh 146; It 85; & sante D i.61; abl. santato Nett 88; DhsA 206 sq. -- pl. nom. santo M i.24; S i.71; Sn 450; It 62; Dh 151; nt. santāni D i.152; acc. sante Sn 94, 665; gen. sataŋ M i.24; S i.17; Sn 227; instr. sabbhi D ii.246; S i.17, 56; Miln 221=J v.49; Dh 151; loc. santesu. -- Compar. santatara It 62; superl. sattama (q. v.). Santa
Santa1
[pp. of sammati1] calmed, tranquil, peaceful, pure D i.12; Vin i.4; S i.5; A ii.18; Sn 746; Pv iv.134 ( = upasanta -- kilesa PvA 230); Miln 232, 409; Vism 155 (˚anga; opp. oḷārik'anga); DhA ii.13; iii.83. -- nt. peace, bliss, nibbāna S iv.370.

-- indriya one whose senses are tranquil A ii.38; Sn 144; Vin i.195; J i.506; -- kāya of calmed body Dh 378; DhA iv.114. -- dhamma peaceful condition, quietude J i.506; -- bhāva id. Miln 265. -- mānasa of tranquil mind Vin i.195; J i.506. -- vāsa peaceful state DhA iv.114. -- vutti living a peaceful life It 30, 121. -- 676 -- Santa
Santa2
[pp. of sammati2] tired, wearied, exhausted Dh 60; J i.498; Pv ii.936 ( = parissama -- patta PvA 127). Santaka
Santaka1
(adj.) [fr. sant; cp. BSk. santaka Divy 280 etc.] 1. belonging to J i.122; nt. property J i.91, 494; DhA i.346. -- 2. due to (gen.) J iii.408; iv.37. -- 3. (being) in the power of J iv.260 (bhaya˚). Santaka
Santaka2
(adj.) [sa3+antaka] limited (opp. anantika) S v.272. Santacā
Santacā
(f.) [?] bark J v.202 (sattacaŋ?). Santajjeti
Santajjeti
[saŋ+tajjeti] to frighten, scold, menace J i.479; v.94; ThA 65; PvA 123, 195. Santataŋ
Santataŋ
(adv.) [ satataŋ, or fr. saŋ+tan] continually, only in cpds.: ˚kārin consistent A ii.187; ˚vutti of consistent behaviour A ii.187; M i.339; ˚sīla steady in character M i.339. Santatara
Santatara
see sant. Santati
Santati
(f.) [fr. saŋ+tan, lit. stretch] 1. continuity, dura- tion, subsistence Dhs 643; Nett 79; Miln 72, 185; VbhA 8, 170, 173; VvA 25; Vism 431, 449. citta˚ continuity of consciousness Kvu 458; cp. Cpd. 6, 1531, 252 sq.; dhamma˚ continuity of states Miln 40; rūpa˚ of form VbhA 21; sankhāra˚ causal connection of material things Th 1, 716. -- 2. lineage Miln 160. Santatta
Santatta1
[pp. of santappati] heated, glowing D ii.335; M i.453; S i.169 (divasa˚); J iv.118; Miln 325; PvA 38 (soka˚). Santatta
Santatta2
[pp. of santasati] frightened, disturbed J iii.77 ( = santrasta C.). Santaneti
Santaneti
(& ˚tāneti) [Caus. of saŋ+tan] to continue A iii.96 sq.; S iv.104; Pug 66 sq.; SnA 5 (see santāyati). Santappati
Santappati
[saŋ+tappati1] to be heated or chafed; fig. to grieve, sorrow M i.188; J iii.153. -- pp. santatta1 -> Caus. ˚tāpeti to burn, scorch, torment M i.128; S iv.56 sq. -- pp. santāpita. Santappita
Santappita
[pp. of santappeti] satisfied, pleased J ii.44; Pv ii.811 ( = pīṇita PvA 110). Santappeti
Santappeti
[Caus. of saŋ+tappati2] to satisfy, please D i.109; Vin i.18; J i.50, 272. -- pp. santappita. Santara
Santara
(adj.) [sa3+antara, cp. E. with -- in] inside; in compn ˚uttara inner & outer Vin iii.214; iv.281; ˚uttarena with an inner & outer garment Vin i.298; ThA 171; ˚bāhira within & without D i.74; Dh 315; J i.125; DA i.218; DhA iii.488. Santarati
Santarati
[saŋ+tarati2] to be in haste, to be agitated; ppr. ˚amāna (˚rūpa) J iii.156, 172; vi.12, 451. Santavant
Santavant
(adj.) [fr. santa1] tranquil Dh 378. Santasati
Santasati
[saŋ+tasati2] to be frightened or terrified, to fear, to be disturbed Miln 92. ppr. santasaŋ J vi.306 (a˚), & santasanto J iv.101 (a˚); Pot. santase J iii.147; v.378; ger. santasitvā J ii.398. -- pp. santasita & santatta. Santasita
Santasita
[pp. of santasati] frightened Miln 92; PvA 260 ( = suṭṭhu tasita). Santāna
Santāna
(nt.) [fr. saŋ+tan] 1. spreading, ramification, tendril (valli˚) KhA 48. -- 2. one of the 5 celestial trees J vi.239 (˚maya made of its flowers). -- 3. (also m,) continuity, succession; lineage S iii.143; DA i.46; DhsA 63, 217, 297; Vism 555; VbhA 164. Cp. citta˚ continuity of consciousness Cpd. 1677. Santānaka
Santānaka
[santanā+ka] 1. (nt.) = santāna 1; VvA 94, 162 (˚valli a sort of long creeper). mūla˚ a spreading root S iii.155; J i.277. -- 2.=santāna 2 VvA 12. -> 3. (nt.) a cobweb Vin i.48. -- 4. offspring S i.8. Santāpa
Santāpa
(adj. -- n.) [fr. saŋ+tap] burning; heat, fire; fig. torment, torture Sn 1123 (cp. Nd2 636); J i.502; Miln 97, 324; VbhA 70 (various), 245 (aggi˚, suriya˚); Sdhp 9, 572. Santāpita
Santāpita
[pp. of santāpeti] heated, aglow Th 2, 504. Santāpeti
Santāpeti
see santappati. Santāyati
Santāyati
[saŋ+tāyati] to preserve (connect?) Vism 688 (better ˚dhāyati) = SnA 5 (reads ˚tāneti). Santāraṇa
Santāraṇa
(nt.) & ˚ī (f.) [fr. saŋ+tāreti1] conveying to the other shore S iv.174; M i.134. -- f. santāraṇī Ap 234 (scil. nāvā). Santāsa
Santāsa
[saŋ+tāsa] trembling, fear, shock A ii.33; S iii.85; J i.274; Miln 146, 207; PvA 22. Santāsaniya
Santāsaniya
(adj.) [fr. saŋ+tāsana] making frightened, inspiring terror Miln 387. Santāsin
Santāsin
(adj.) [fr. santāsa] trembling, frightened Dh 351. Santi
Santi
(f.) [fr. śam, cp. Sk. ˚śānti] tranquillity, peace Sn 204; D ii.157; A ii.24; Dh 202.

-- kamma act of appeasing (the gods), pacification D i.12; DA i.97. -- pada "the place of tranquillity"; tranquil state, i. e. Nibbāna A ii.18; VvA 219. -- vāda an advocate of mental calm Sn 845 (˚vada in verse); Nd1 203. Santika
Santika
(nt.) [sa2+antika] vicinity, presence; santikaŋ into the presence of, towards J i.91, 185; santikā from the presence of, from J i.43, 83, 189; santike in the presence of, before, with D i.79, 144; Dh 32 = Miln 408; Sn 379; Vin i.12; S i.33; J v.467; with acc. S iv.74; with abl. Mhvs 205; nibbānasantike Dh 372; instr. santikena=by, along with J ii.301 (if not a mistake instead of santikaŋ or santike?).

-- âvacara keeping or being near D i.206; ii.139; J i.67. Santikā
Santikā
(f.) [unclear in origin & meaning] a kind of game, "spellicans" (Rh. D.); (Kern: knibbelspel) D i.6; Vin ii.10; iii.180; DA i.85. Santiṭṭhati
Santiṭṭhati
[saŋ+tiṭṭhati] 1. to stand, stand still, remain, continue A iv.101 (udakaŋ = stands still), 282, 302 sq.; Pug 31; J i.26. -- 2. to be established, to be put into order Vin ii.11. -- 3. to stick to, to be fixed or settled, to be composed D ii.206; iii.239 (citta); S v.321; Vin i.9, 15; It 43. -- 4. to restrain oneself J i.438. -> 5. to wait for (acc.) DhA i.50. -- Forms: pres. santiṭṭhati D ii.206; S iii.133; saṇṭhahati J vi.160; & saṇṭhāti Pug 31; J iv.469. ppr. saṇṭhahanto Vin i.9; Pot. saṇṭhaheyya Vin ii.11; S v.321. aor. saṇṭhāsi Vin i.15; saṇṭhahiŋsu (3rd pl.) S ii.224. Inf. saṇṭhātuŋ J i.438; DhA i.50. -- pp. saṇṭhita -- Caus. II. saṇṭhapeti (& ˚ṭhāpeti). Santīraṇa
Santīraṇa
(nt.) [saŋ+tīraṇa] investigation, decision; as t.t. denoting a stage in the act of sense -- cognition, judging an impression (see Cpd. 28, 40, 238) DA i.194; DhsA 264, 269, 272; Vism 459. As ˚ā (f.) at Nett 82, 191. -- ˚kicca function of judging Tikp 33; Vism 21, 454. -- 677 -- Santuṭṭha
Santuṭṭha
[pp. of santussati] pleased, happy D i.60, 71; M ii.6; A ii.209; iv.232 sq.; v.25, 67, 130, 154. mahā˚, the greatly contented one, the Arahant DhsA 407. Santuṭṭhi
Santuṭṭhi
(f.) [saŋ+tuṭṭhi] satisfaction, contentment D i.71; M i.13; Sn 265; Dh 204; A ii.27, 31; iii.219 sq., 432 (a˚); DhA iv.111. Santuṭṭhitā
Santuṭṭhitā
(f.) [abstr. formation fr. last] state of content- ment D iii.115; A i.12; Pug 25; Vism 53; Dhs 1367 (a˚). Santuleyya
Santuleyya
(adj.) [metric for ˚tulya, grd. of saŋ+tuleti] commeasurable; neg. a˚ J vi.283. Santus(s)ita
Santus(s)ita
[pp. of santussati] contented, pleased, happy S iii.45 (˚tussit' attā); Sn 1040; Dh 362 ( = suṭṭhu tusita DhA iv.90); Mhbv 31 (ss). Santussaka
Santussaka
(adj.) [fr. santussati] content Sn 144. Santussati
Santussati
[saŋ+tussati] to be contented, or pleased, or happy; ppr. ˚amāna Sn 42. -- pp. santuṭṭha & ˚tusita. Santosa
Santosa
[fr. saŋ+tuṣ] contentment DA i.204. Santhata
Santhata
[pp. of santharati] 1. spread, strewn with ( -- ˚), covered D ii.160; Vin iii.32; Sn 401, 668. -- dhamani˚gatta having the body strewn with veins, emaciated Vin iii.146 = J ii.283; J i.346, 350 & passim (see dhamani). Kern, Toev. s. v. considers santata the right spelling. -- 2. (nt.) a rug or mat Vin iii.224; Vv 635 (=tiṇa -- santharaka VvA 262). Santhatika
Santhatika
(adj.) [fr. santhata 2] sleeping on a rug Miln 342, 359. Santhana
Santhana
(nt.) [fr. śam, cp. Sk. śāntvana] 1. appeasing Dh 275. -- 2. satisfaction Vv 186. Santhamati
Santhamati
at J i.122 is to be read saṇdhamati "to blow." Santhambhati
Santhambhati
[saŋ+thambhati] to restrain oneself, to keep firm Sn 701 (imper. med. 2nd sg. ˚thambhassu); Pug 65; J i.255; iii.95. -- Caus. ˚thambheti to make stiff or rigid, to numb J i.10. Santhambhanā
Santhambhanā
(f.) & ˚thambhitatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. san- thambhati] stiffening, stiffness, rigidity Dhs 636; DhsA 324; J i.10 (a -- santhambhana -- bhāva). Santhara
Santhara
[fr. saŋ+str] a couch or mat Vin ii.162; A i.277; Ap 97 (tiṇa˚). Santharaka
Santharaka
= santhara; only as tiṇa˚ made of grass Vin i.24; M i.501; J i.360; VvA 262. Santharaṇaka
Santharaṇaka
(adj.) [fr. santharati] spreading, strewing; ˚vāta a wind which strews things about SnA 67. Santharati
Santharati
[saŋ+tharati] to spread, strew D ii.84. -- pp. santhata. -- Caus. santhāreti Mhvs 29, 12. -- Caus. II. santharāpeti to cause to be spread Vin iv.39; Mhvs 29, 9. Santhariŋ
Santhariŋ
(adv.) [fr. santhara] by way of spreading; in sabba˚ so that all is spread, prepared D ii.84; cp. Vin i.227, 384. Santhava
Santhava
[fr. saŋ+stu, cp. santhuta] acquaintance, inti- macy S i.17; Sn 37, 168, 207, 245; J i.158; ii.27, 42, 180; Dhs 1059; DhsA 364; DhA i.235. nom. pl. santhavāni Sn 844 = S iii.9; J iv.98. -- ˚jāta having become acquainted, an acquaintance Nd1 198. -- a˚vissāsin intimate without being acquainted A iii.136. Santhavana
Santhavana
(nt.) [fr. saŋ+thavati] acquaintance DhsA 364. Santhāgāra
Santhāgāra
[Sk. sansthāgāra] a council hall, a mote hall D i.91; ii.147; A ii.207; M i.228, 353, 457; iii.207; DA i.256; J iv.72, 147; Vin i.233; VvA 298; DhA i.347. Cp. saṇṭhāna 3. Santhāna
Santhāna
see saṇṭhāna. Santhāra
Santhāra
[saŋ+thāra] spreading, covering, floor(ing) S i.170; Vin ii.120 (3 kinds of floors: iṭṭhakā˚, silā˚, dāru˚, i. e. of tiles, flags, wood); A i.136 (paṇṇa˚); J vi.24 (id.); J i.92; Ps i.176. -- 2. (cp. paṭi˚) friendly welcome A i.93 (āmisa˚ & dhamma˚). Santhāraka
Santhāraka
[santhāra+ka cp. BSk. sanstāraka MVastu iii.272] a spread, cover, mat Vin ii.113 (tiṇa˚), 116. Santhuta
Santhuta
(adj.) [saŋ+thuta] acquainted, familiar J i.365; iii.63 (cira˚); v.448 (so read for santhata); Sdhp 31; Neg. a˚ J iii.63, 221; vi.310. Cp. santhava. Santhutika
Santhutika
(adj.) [fr. santhuta] acquainted Vism 78. Sanda
Sanda1
[cp. Sk. sāndra] 1. (adj.) thick, dense; in -- ˚cchāya giving dense shade S iv.194; J i.57, 249; DA i.209. -> (2) (thick) wood, forest; in -- ˚vihāra dwelling in the wood, life as a hermit Th 1, 688. Sandati
Sandati
[syand; Dhtp 149: passavane] to flow D ii.128, 129 (aor. sandittha); J i.18; vi.534 (v. l. sikandati = siyandati?); Pv ii.104 (=pavatteti PvA 143). -- Caus. sandāpeti to cause to flow Miln 122. -- pp. sanna. -> Cp. vissandati & vissandaka. Sandana
Sandana1
(nt.) trappings D ii.188 (read sandāna?). Sandana
Sandana2
[cp. Vedic syandana] a chariot Mhvs 21, 25; Dpvs 14, 56; Vv 642; J iv.103; v.264; vi.22. Sandamānikā
Sandamānikā
(f.) [fr. syand] a chariot Vin iii.49; iv.339; DA i.82; KhA 50; Vism 255. Sandambhita
Sandambhita
[fr. Sk. sandarbhati] is Kern's proposed reading for santhambhita at J vi.207. Sandassaka
Sandassaka
[fr. sandassati, Caus. of sandissati] instructing M i.145; A ii.97; iv.296; S v.162; It 107; Miln 373. Sandassana
Sandassana
showing J i.67. Sandahati
Sandahati
[saŋ+dahati1] to put together, to connect, to fit, to arrange J iv.336; Mhvs vii.18; ppr. med. sandahamāna DhsA 113; ger. sandahitvā J iv.336; & sandhāya lit. after putting on J iv.258 (the arrow on to the bow); fig. with reference to, concerning M i.503; J i.203, 274; ii.177; PvA 87, 89, 110; towards J i.491; iii.295. pp. sandhīyate [& sandhiyyate] to be put together, to be self -- contained Pug 32; to be connected SnA 376, 572; to reflect upon, to resent Sn 366; to be reconciled J ii.114. -- pp. saŋhita. Sandahana
Sandahana
(nt.) [fr. saŋ+dhā] applying, placing (an arrow) on the string Miln 352. Sandāna
Sandāna
(nt.) [saŋ+dāna, fr. dā to bind: see dāma], a cord, tether, fetter D ii.274; Th 1, 290; Dhp 398; Sn 622; J ii.32; Ud 77 (text sandhāna); DhA iv.161. Sandāleti
Sandāleti
[saŋ+dāleti] to break; ger. sandālayitvāna Sn 62. Sandiṭṭha
Sandiṭṭha
[pp. of sandissati] seen together, a friend J i.106, 442; Vin iii.42; yathāsandiṭṭhaŋ, where one's friends live D ii.98; S v.152. Sandiṭṭhi
Sandiṭṭhi
(f.) [fr. saŋ+dṛś] the visible world, worldly gain D iii.45, 247; M i.43; Sn 891; Vin ii.89; Nd1 288, 300; ˚parāmāsin infected with worldliness M i.97. Sandiṭṭhika
Sandiṭṭhika
[cp. BSk. sandṛṣṭika Divy 426] visible; belonging to, of advantage to, this life, actual D i.51; ii.93, 217; iii.5; M i.85, 474; A i.156 sq.; ii.56, 198; S i.9, 117, iv.41, 339; Sn 567, 1137; Vism 215 sq. -- As sandiṭṭhiyā (f.) at J vi.213 -- 678 -- Sandita
Sandita
[fr. saŋ+dā: see sandāna] bound, tied, Th 1, 290 (diṭṭhi -- sandāna˚). Sandiddha
Sandiddha
[saŋ+diddha] smeared, indistinct, husky Vin ii.202; DA i.282. Sandiyyati
Sandiyyati
& sandīyati [saŋ+diyyati( = dīyati)=Sk. dīyate of dyati, i. e. dā2 to cut: see dātta] to be vexed, to resent S ii.200 sq.; J vi.570 (spelt wrongly sandhīyati; C. expls as "manku hoti"). Sandissati
Sandissati
[saŋ+dissati] to be seen together with, to be engaged in, or to tally, agree with, to live conformably to (loc., e. g. dhamme) D i.102; ii.75; S v.177; Sn 50; D ii.127; Nett 23; ppr. a -- saŋdissamāna invisible Dāvs iv.30; Caus. saŋdasseti to teach, instruct D i.126; ii.95; Vin i.18; to compare, verify, D ii.124; ppr. sandassiyamāna D ii.124; J vi.217 (sunakhesu sandissanti, i. e. they are of no more value). Sandīpeti
Sandīpeti
[saŋ+dīpeti] to kindle J v.32. Sandesa
Sandesa
[Sk. sandeśa] news, message Mhvs 18, 13. Sandeha
Sandeha
[saŋ+deha] 1. accumulation; the human body Dh 148. -- 2. doubt Miln 295. Sandosa
Sandosa
[saŋ+dosa] pollution, defilement M i.17; A iii.106, 358; v.292; Sn 327. Sandhana
Sandhana
(nt.) [saŋ+dhana] property, belongings M ii.180. Sandhanta
Sandhanta
[pp. of sandhamati] blown, smelted (of gold) A i.253. Sandhamati
Sandhamati
[saŋ+dhamati] to blow, to fan J i.122. - pp. sandhanta. Sandhātar
Sandhātar
[saŋ+dhātar] one who puts together, a con- ciliator D i.4; iii.171; M i.345; A ii.209; Pug 57. Sandhāna
Sandhāna
(nt.) [fr. saŋ+dhā] 1. uniting, conciliation, friendship DA i.74; DhsA 113. -- 2. bond, fetter Ud 77 (read sandāna?). Sandhāpana
Sandhāpana
(nt.) [fr. sandhāpeti, Caus. of sandahati] combination VvA 349. Sandhāya
Sandhāya
see sandahati. Sandhāraka
Sandhāraka
(adj.) [fr. sandhāreti] checking, restraining Vism 205. Sandhārana
Sandhārana
(nt.) [fr. sandhāreti] checking Miln 352. Sandhāreti
Sandhāreti
[saŋ+dhāreti] 1. to hold, bear, carry J iii.184. -- 2. to hold up, support J iv.167. -- 3. to curb, restrain, check Vin ii.212; J ii.26, 59. -- dussandhāriya difficult to keep back J iii.340. Sandhāvati
Sandhāvati
[saŋ+dhāvati] to run through, to transmigrate D i.14; A ii.1; S iii.149; J i.503; aor. sandhāvissaŋ Dh 153 = J i.76 (=apar' âparaŋ anuvicariŋ DhA iii.128). Sandhi
Sandhi
(m. & f.) [fr. saŋ+dhā] 1. union, junction Miln 330 (of 2 roads); Bdhgh on S ii.270 (between 2 houses). -> 2. breach, break, hole, chasm D ii.83 = A v.195; Th 1, 786; J v.459. āloka˚ a window Vin ii.172; sandhiŋ chindati to make a break, to break into a house D i.52; DA i.159. -- 3. joint, piece, link J ii.88; Vism 277 (the 5, of kammaṭṭhāna); Mhvs 33, 11; 34, 47; applied to the joints of the body Vism 185 (the 14 mahā˚); DhsA 324. -- 4. connection, combination VbhA 191 (hetuphala˚ & phalahetu˚ etc.). -- 5. euphonic junction, euphony, "sandhi" SnA 76. See pada˚. -- 6. agreement Mhvs 9, 16.

-- cheda (1) housebreaking J i.187 sq.; ii.388. -- (2) one who has brought rebirths ( = paṭisandhi) to an end Dh 97; DhA ii.187; iii.257. -- chedaka one who can cut a break, an underminer J vi.458. -- bheda(ka) causing discord J iii.151. -- mukha opening of a break (made by burglars) into a house Th 1, 786; PvA 4. -- samala ( -- sankaṭīva) refuse heap of a house -- sewer (cp. K.S. ii.181, 203) D ii.160; M i.334=S ii.270. Sandhika
Sandhika
(adj.) ( -- ˚), in pañca˚ having 5 links or pieces Vism 277. Sandhīyati
Sandhīyati
see sandahati. Sandhunāti
Sandhunāti
[saŋ+dhunāti] to shake D ii.336. Sandhūpeti
Sandhūpeti
[saŋ+dhūpeti] to fumigate S iii.89; Ps ii.167. As sandhūpāyati to cause thick smoke or steam thickly, at Vin i.225; Sn p. 15 ( = samantā dhūpāyati SnA 154). Sandhovati
Sandhovati
[saŋ+dhovati] to clean A i.253. Sandhovika
Sandhovika
[fr. sandhovati] washing; kaṇṇa -- sandhovikā khiḍḍā ear -- washing sport or gambol (of elephants, with piṭṭhi˚ etc.) A v.202. So probably for saṇadhovika at M i.229, 375. Cp. sāṇadhovana (?). Sanna
Sanna1
[pp. of sīdati] sunk Dh 327. Sanna
Sanna2
[pp. of sandati] flown J vi.203 (dadhi˚). Sannakaddu
Sannakaddu
[lexicogr. Sk. sannakadru] the tree Bu- chanania latifolia Abḥp 556. Sannata
Sannata
[pp. of saŋ+nam, cp. sannāmeti] 1. bent down, low J vi.58 (opp. unnata). -- 2. bent, prepared J v.215 (C. suphassita). Sannaddha
Sannaddha
[pp. of sannayhati] 1. fastened, bound, D ii.350 (susannaddha); Miln 339. -- 2. put on, clothed (with) Pv iv.136 (˚dussa). -- 3. armed, accoutred S ii.284; J i.179; Dh 387; DhA iv.144; PvA 154 (˚dhanu -- kalāpa). Sannayhati
Sannayhati
[saŋ+nayhati] to tie, bind, fasten, to arm oneself J i.129; to array, arm D ii.175; Vin i. 342; to arrange, fit D i.96; J i.273; aor. sannayhi D i.96; inf. sannayhituŋ J i.179; ger. sannayhitvā D ii.175; J ii.77; & sannahitvā J i.273. Sannāmeti
Sannāmeti
[Caus. of saŋ+nam] to bend M i.365, 439, 450, 507 = S iv.188 (kāyaŋ sannāmeyya -- i. e. to writhe). Cp. Cpd. 162 n. 5 ("strengthen"?). Sannāha
Sannāha
[fr. sannay ati] 1. dressing, fastening together PvA 231. -- 2. armour, mail S v.6; J ii.443; Th. 1, 543; J i.179. Sannikāsa
Sannikāsa
(adj.) [saŋ+nikāsa] resembling, looking like J iii.522; v.87 = vi.306; v.169 (C. dassana); vi.240, 279. Sannikkhepana
Sannikkhepana
(nt.) [saŋ+nikkhepana] elimination VbhA 355. Sanniggaṇhāti
Sanniggaṇhāti
[saŋ+niggaṇhāti] to restrain S i.238. Sannighāta
Sannighāta
[saŋ+nighāta] concussion, knocking against each other Dhs 621. Sannicaya
Sannicaya
[saŋ+nicaya] accumulation, hoarding A i.94; ii.23; Dh 92; Vin ii.95; iv.243; DhA ii.171; A iv.108; KhA 62 (lohita). Sannicita
Sannicita
[saŋ+nicita] accumulated, hoarded Miln 120. Sanniṭṭhāna
Sanniṭṭhāna
(nt.) [saŋ+niṭṭhāna] 1. conclusion, consum- mation, J ii.166. -- 2. resolve J i.19; 69; 187; iv.167; Vin i.255 sq. -- 3. ascertainment, definite conclusion, conviction, J vi.324; Vism 43. Sannitāḷeti
Sannitāḷeti
[saŋ+nitāḷeti] to strike J v.71. Sannitodaka
Sannitodaka
(nt.) [fr. saŋ+ni+tud] "pricking," instigating, jeering D i.189; A i.187; S ii.282. -- 679 -- Sannidhāna
Sannidhāna
(nt.) [saŋ+nidhāna) lit. "putting down together," proximity Dāvs v.39. Sannidhi
Sannidhi
[saŋ+nidhi] putting together, storing up D i.6; Sn 306, 924; Nd1 372; -- kāra storing D i.6; -- kāraka, storing up, store M i.523; Vin i.209; iv.87; D iii.235; A iii.109; iv.370. -- kata stored up Vin ii.270; put by, postponed Vin i.254. Sannipatati
Sannipatati
[saŋ+nipatati] to assemble, come together J i.167; pp. ˚ita. Caus. sannipāteti to bring together, convoke D ii.76; Miln 6; Caus. II. sannipātāpeti to cause to be convoked or called together J i.58, 153, 271; iii.376; Vin i.44; iii.71. Sannipatita
Sannipatita
[pp. of ˚nipatati] come together D i.2; ii.76. Sannipāta
Sannipāta
[fr. sannipatati] 1. union, coincidence S iv.68 sq.; Miln 60, 123 sq.; Nett 28. -- 2. assemblage, assembly, congregation D ii.5; Miln 7. -- 3. union of the humours of the body Miln 303. -- 4. collocation Dh 352. Sannipātika
Sannipātika
(adj.) [fr. last] resulting from the union of the humours of the body A ii.87; v.110; S iv.230; Miln 135, 137, 302, 304. Sannibha
Sannibha
(adj.) [saŋ+nibha] resembling D ii.17; Sn 551; J i.319. Sanniyojeti
Sanniyojeti
[saŋ+niyojeti] to appoint, command Mhvs 5, 34. Sanniyyātana
Sanniyyātana
(nt.) [saŋ+niyyātana] handing over, resigna- tion DA i.232. Sannirata
Sannirata
(adj.) [saŋ+nirata] being (quite) happy to- gether J v.405. Sannirumbhati (˚rundhati)
Sannirumbhati
(˚rundhati) [saŋ+nirumbhati] to restrain, block, impede; ger. sannirumhitvā J i.109, 164; ii.6; VvA 217. sannirumbhitvā J i.62; ii.341. sannirujjhitvā Vism 143; Pot. sannirundheyya M i.115. -> pp. sanniruddha Vism 278. Sannirumhana
Sannirumhana
(nt.) [fr. last] restraining, checking, sup- pression J i.163; DA i.193; as ˚bhana at VbhA 355. Sannivaṭṭa
Sannivaṭṭa
[ = saŋ+nivatta] returning, return Vin i.139 sq. Sannivasati
Sannivasati
[saŋ+nivasati] to live together, to associate A i.78; pp. sannivuttha. Sannivāreti
Sannivāreti
[saŋ+nivāreti] to restrain, check; to keep together M i.115; Th 2, 366. Sannivāsa
Sannivāsa
[saŋ+nivāsa] association, living with; com- munity A i.78; ii.57; D iii.271; Dh 206; J iv.403; loka -- sannivāsa the society of men, all the world J i.366; ii.205. Sannivuttha
Sannivuttha
[pp. of sannivasati] living together (with), associating A iv.303 sq. Sannivesa
Sannivesa
[saŋ+nivesa] preparation, encampment, settle- ment ThA 257. Sannivesana
Sannivesana
(nt.) [saŋ+nivesana] position, settlement; pāṭiekka -- ˚ private, separate J i.92. Sannisajjā
Sannisajjā
(f.) [saŋ+nissajjā] meeting -- place Vin i.188; ii.174 = iii.66; sannisajja -- ṭṭhāna (n.) the same Vin iii.287. Sannisinna
Sannisinna
[pp. of sannisīdati] 1. sitting down together D i.2; ii.109; Vin ii.296; J i.120. -- 2. (having become) settled, established Vin ii.278 (˚gabbhā pregnant). Sannisīdati
Sannisīdati
[saŋ+nisīdati] 1. (lit.) to sink down, to settle Miln 35. -- 2. (fig.) to subside, to become quiet M i.121; S iv.196; A ii.157. -- Caus. sannisādeti to make quiet, to calm M i.116; A ii.94. -- Caus. II. sannisīdāpeti to cause to halt J iv.258. -- pp. sannisinna. Sannissayatā
Sannissayatā
(f.) [saŋ+nissayatā] dependency, connection Nett 80. Sannissita
Sannissita
[saŋ+nissita, cp. BSk. sanniśrita] based on, connected with, attached to Vism 43, 118, 120, 554 (viññāṇa is "hadaya -- vatthu˚"; cp. VbhA 163). Sannihita
Sannihita
[saŋ+nihita; cp. sannidhi] 1. put down, placed Miln 326. -- 2. stored up Th 2, 409; ThA 267. Sannīta
Sannīta
[pp. fr. sanneti] mixed, put together, kneaded Mhvs 29, 11 & 12. Sanneti
Sanneti
[fr. saŋ+neti] to mix, knead D i.74 (Pot. san- neyya); iii.29; Vin i.47 (grd. ˚netabba); M i.276; S ii.58 sq.; J vi.432. -- pp. sannīta. Sapajāpatika
Sapajāpatika
(adj.) 1. with Pajāpati. The passage under pajāpati 1. was distorted through copyist's default. It should read: "only in one formula, with Inda & Brahmā, viz. devā sa -- indakā sa -- brahmakā sa -- pajāpatikā D ii.274 (without sa -- brahmakā); S iii.90 = A v.325. Otherwise sapajāpatika in sense of foll. Also at VbhA 497 with Brahmā." -- 2. with one's wife Vin i.23; iv.62; J i.345. Sapati
Sapati
[śap, cp. Dhtp 184 "akkose"] to swear, curse S i.225; J v.104, 397; Mhvs 25, 113; VvA 336. -- pp. satta3. Sapatikā
Sapatikā
(adj.) having a husband, a woman whose husband is alive J vi.158; PvA 86. Sapatī
Sapatī
(f.) having the same husband; a rival wife, a co- wife Pv i.66; ii.32. Sapatta
Sapatta
[Sk. sapatna] hostile, rival Th 2, 347; ThA 242; sapattarājā a rival king J i.358; ii.94; iii.416; asapatta without enmity Sn 150; sapatta (m.) a rival, foe, It 83; A iv.94 sq.; J i.297. Sapattaka
Sapattaka
(adj.) [fr. last] hostile, full of enmity D i.227. Sapattabhāra
Sapattabhāra
[sa3+patta1+bhāra] with the weight of the wings, carrying one's wings with oneself D i.71; M i.180, 268; A ii.210; Pug. 58. Sapattika
Sapattika
(nt.) the state of a co -- wife Th 2, 216; ThA 178. -- Kern, Toev. s.v. proposes reading sā˚. Sapattī
Sapattī
(f.) [Sk. sapatnī] a co -- wife D ii.330; J i.398; iv.316, 491; Th 2, 224; DhA i.47. asapattī without any co -- wife S iv.249. Sapatha
Sapatha
[fr. śap] an oath Vin i.347; J i.180, 267; iii.138; SnA 418. Sapadānaŋ
Sapadānaŋ
(adv.) [fr. phrase sa -- padānaŋ -- cārikā; i. e. sa2+gen. pl. of pada (cp. gimhāna). Weber (Ind. Str. iii.398) suggests sapadā+naŋ, sapadā being an instr. by -- form of sapadā, and naŋ an enclitic. Trenckner (Miln. p. 428) says sapadi+ayana. Kern (Toev. ii.73) agrees on the whole, but expls padānaŋ as pad'āyanaŋ] "with the same steps," i. e. without interruption, constant, successive (cp. Lat stante pede & Sk. adv. sapadi at once). (1) lit. (perhaps a later use) of a bird at J v.358 (s. sāliŋ khādanto, without a stop); of a lion at Miln 400 (sapadāna -- bhakkha). (2) appld in phrase sapadānaŋ carati to go on uninterrupted alms -- begging Vin iv.191; S iii.238; Sn 413; J i.66; Pv iv.344; VvA 121; and in phrases sapadāna -- cārikā J i.89; ˚cārika (adj.) Vin iii.15; ˚cārin M i.30; ii.7; Sn 65; Nd2 646. Also as adj. sapadāna (piṇḍapāta) Vin ii.214. Sapadi
Sapadi
(adv.) [sa2+adv. formn fr. pada] instantly, at once Dāvs i.62. -- 680 -- Sapariggaha
Sapariggaha
(adj.) [sa3+pariggaha] 1. provided with possessions D i.247; Sn 393. -- 2. having a wife, married J vi.369. Saparidaṇḍā
Saparidaṇḍā
(f.) a cert. class of women, the use of whom renders a person liable to punishment Vin iii.139 = A v.264 M i.286. Sapallava
Sapallava
(adj.) [sa3+pallava] with the sprouts VvA 173. Sapāka
Sapāka
[san+pāka; cp. Sk. śvapāka] "dog -- cooker," an outcast or Caṇḍāla J iv.380. Cp. sopāka. Sappa
Sappa
[cp. Sk. sarpa, fr. sṛp; "serpent"] a snake M i.130; A iii.97, 260 sq.; Sn 768; J i.46, 259, 310, 372; v.447 (kaṇha˚); Nd1 7; DA i.197; SnA 13. Often in similes, e. g. Vism 161, 587; KhA 144; SnA 226, 333. -- ˚potaka a young snake Vism 500; -- ˚phaṇa the hood of a snake KhA 50. -- Cp. sappin. Sappaccaya
Sappaccaya
(adj.) [sa3+paccaya] correlated, having a cause, conditioned D i.180; A i.82; Dhs 1083. Sappañña
Sappañña
(adj.) [sa3+pañña] wise M i.225; Sn 591; often as sapañña It 36; Sn 90; J ii.65. Sappaṭigha
Sappaṭigha
(adj.) [sa3+paṭigha] producing reaction, reacting D iii.217; Dhs 597, 617, 648, 1089; DhsA 317; Vism 451. Sappaṭipuggala
Sappaṭipuggala
[sa3+paṭipuggala] having an equal, com- parable, a friend M i.27. Sappaṭibhāga
Sappaṭibhāga
(adj.) [sa3+paṭibhāga] 1. resembling, like D ii.215; J i.303; Pug 30 sq.; Miln 37. -- 2. having as (equal) counterparts, evenly mixed with M i.320 (kaṇhasukka˚); Miln 379 (id.). Sappaṭissa
Sappaṭissa
(adj.) [sa+paṭissā, cp. BSk. sapratīśa Divy 333, 484] reverential, deferential It 10; Vin i.45; Vv 8441 (cp. VvA 347). See also gārava. Sappaṭissava
Sappaṭissava
(adj.) [sa+paṭissava] deferential, respectful DhsA 125, 127 = J i.129, 131; -- tā deference, reverence Dhs 1327=Pug 24. Sappati
Sappati
[sṛp, cp. Vedic sarpati, Gr. e(/rpw, Lat. serpo; Dhtp 194 "gamana"] to creep, crawl: see saŋ˚. Sappadesa
Sappadesa
(adj.) [sa3+padesa] in all places, all round M i.153. Sappana
Sappana
(nt.) [fr. sappati] gliding on DhsA 133. Sappāṭihāriya
Sappāṭihāriya
(adj.) [sa3+pāṭihāriya] accompanied by wonders D i.198; S v.261; Ud 63. Sappāṭihīrakata
Sappāṭihīrakata
(adj.) [sa3+pāṭihīra+kata] made with wonders, substantiated by wonders, substantiated, well founded D i.198; iii.121 ("has been made a thing of saving grace" Dial. iii.115, q. v.). Sappāṇaka
Sappāṇaka
(adj.) [sa3+pāṇa+ka] containing animate beings Vin iii.125; J i.198. Sappāya
Sappāya
(adj.) [saŋ+pā ( = pra+ā)+i, cp. pāya. The corresponding BSk. form is sāmpreya (=saŋ+pra+i, with guṇa), e. g. AvŚ i.255; iii.110] likely, beneficial, fit, suitable A i.120; S iii.268; iv.23 sq., 133 sq. (Nibbāna˚ paṭipadā); J i.182, 195; ii.436 (kiŋci sappāyaŋ something that did him good, a remedy); Vin i.292, 302; Miln 215 (sappāyakiriyā, giving a drug). nt. something beneficial, benefit, help Vism 34, 87 (˚sevin); VbhA 265 (various), 271 (˚kathā). -- Ten sappāyas & 10 asappāyas at DhsA 168. -- sappāyâsappāyaŋ what is suitable, and what not J i.215, 471; used as the last part of a compound, meaning what is suitable with reference to: senāsanasappāya (nt.) suitable lodgings J i.215. Sappāyatā
Sappāyatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. sappāya] agreeableness, suitability, convenience Vism 79, 121 (a˚), 127. Sappi
Sappi
(nt.) [Vedic sarpis] clarified butter, ghee D i.9, 141, 201; A i.278; A ii.95, 207 (˚tela); iii.219; iv.103; Sn 295 (˚tela). Dhs 646; J i.184; ii.43; iv.223 (˚tela); Vin i.58, etc. -- ˚maṇḍa [cp. BSk. sarpimaṇḍa Divy 3 etc.] the scum, froth, cream of clarified butter, the best of ghee D i.201; A ii.95; VvA 172; Pug 70; its tayo guṇā Miln 322. Sappin
Sappin
(adj. -- n.) [fr. sappati] crawling, creeping; moving along: see pīṭha˚. -- (f.) sappinī a female snake J vi.339 (where the differences between a male and a female snake are discussed). Sappītika
Sappītika
(adj.) [sa3+pīti+ka] accompanied by the feeling of joy, joyful A i.81; J i.10; Vism 86 (opp. nippītika). Sappurisa
Sappurisa
[sat ( = sant)+purisa] a good, worthy man M iii.21, 37; D iii.252 (the 7 s˚ -- dhammā), 274, 276, 283; A ii.217 sq., 239; Dhs 259=1003; Vin i.56; Dh 54; Pv ii.98; ii.945; iv.187; J i.202; equal to ariya M i.8; S iii.4; asappurisa=anariya SnA 479. sappurisatara a better man S v.20. Saphala
Saphala
(adj.) [sa3+phala] bearing fruit, having its reward Dh 52. Saphalaka
Saphalaka
(adj.) [sa3+phalaka] together with his shield Mhvs 25, 63. Sabala
Sabala
[Vedic śabala (e. g. A. V. 8, 1, 9) = ke/rberos, Weber, Ind. Stud. ii.297] spotted, variegated Sn 675; Vism 51; VvA 253; name of one of the dogs in the Lokantara hell J vi.106, 247 (Sabálo ca Sāmo ca). asabala, unspotted D ii.80.

-- kārin acting inconsistently A ii.187. Sabba
Sabba
(adj.) [Vedic sarva = Av. haurva (complete); Gr. o(/los ("holo -- caust") whole; Lat. solidus & soldus "solid," perhaps also Lat. salvus safe] whole, entire; all, every D i.4; S iv.15; Vin i.5; It 3; Nd2 s. v., nom. pl. sabbe Sn 66; gen. pl. sabbesaŋ Sn 1030. -- nt. sabbaŋ the (whole) world of sense -- experience S iv.15, cp. M i.3. -- At Vism 310 "sabbe" is defined as "anavasesa -- pariyādānaŋ." In compn with superlative expressions sabba˚ has the meaning of "(best) of all," quite, very, nothing but, all round; entirely: ˚bāla the greatest fool D i.59; ˚paṭhama the very first, right in front PvA 56; ˚sovaṇṇa nothing but gold Pv i.21; ii.911; ˚kaniṭṭha the very youngest PvA iii; ˚atthaka in every way useful; ˚sangāhika thoroughly comprehensive SnA 304. -- In connection with numerals sabba˚ has the distributive sense of "of each," i. e. so & so many things of each kind, like ˚catukka (with four of each, said of a gift or sacrifice) J iii.44; DhA iii.3; ˚aṭṭhaka (dāna) (a gift consisting of 8 X 8 things) Miln 291. See detail under aṭṭha B 1. a. -- ˚soḷasaka (of 16 each) DhA iii.3; ˚sata (of 100 each) DhA ii.6. -- Cases adverbially: instr. sabbena sabbaŋ altogether all, i. e. with everything [cp. BSk. sarvena sarvaŋ Divy 39, 144, 270; 502] D ii.57; PvA 130; 131. -- abl. sabbato "all round," in every respect Pv i.111; J vi.76; & sabbaso altogether, throughout D i.34; Sn 288; Dh 265; PvA 119; Nd1 421; DhA iv.100. -- Derivations: 1. sabbattha everywhere, under all circumstances S i.134; Dh 83; Sn 269; Nd 133; PvA 1, 18, 107; VbhA 372 sq. ˚kaŋ everywhere J i.15, 176, 172; Dāṭh v.57. -- 2. sabbathā in every way; sabbathā sabbaŋ completely D ii.57; S iv.167. -- 3. sabbadā always Sn 174, 197, 536; Dh 202; Pv i.91 (=sabbakālaŋ C.); i.1014 (id.). sabbadā -- cana always It 36. -- 4. sabbadhi (fr. Sk. *sarvadha=vic̦vadha, Weber, Ind. Str. iii.392) everywhere, in every respect D i.251; ii.186; Sn 176; Dh 90; also sabbadhī Sn 952, 1034; Vin i.38; VbhA 377; Vism 308 (=sabbattha); Nd1 441, 443.

-- atthaka concerned with everything, a do -- all J ii.30; 74; DhA ii.151 (mahāmatta). -- profitable to all Miln 373 (T. ṭṭh). of kammaṭṭhāna SnA ii.54; Vism 97. -- atthika always useful Miln 153. -- âbhibhū conquering all Sn 211; Vin i.8. -- otuka corresponding to all the seasons D ii.179; Pv iv.122; Sdhp 248. -- kammika (amacca) (a minister) doing all work Vism 130. -- kālaŋ always: see sadā. -- ghasa all -- devouring J i.288. -- ji all -- conquering S iv.83. -- (ñ)jaha abandoning everything S ii.284; Sn 211; Dh 353 = Vin i.8. -- ññu omniscient M i.482; ii.31, 126; A i.220; Miln 74; VbhA 50; SnA 229, 424, 585; J i.214; 335; ˚tā (f.) omniscience Pug 14; 70; J i.2, 14; Nett 61, 103; also written sabbaññūtā; sabbaññutā -- ñāṇa (nt.) omniscience Nett 103; DA i.99; VbhA 197. Also written sabbaññū˚, thus J i.75; -- dassāvin one who sees (i.e. knows) everything M i.92. -- byohāra business, intercourse Ud 65; see saŋvohāra. -- bhumma universal monarch J vi.45. -- vidū all wise Sn 177, 211; Vin i.8; Dh 353. -- saŋharaka a kind of perfume "eau de mille fleurs" J vi.336. -- sādhāraṇa common to all J i.301 sq. -- 681 -- Sabbatthatā
Sabbatthatā
the state of being everywhere; sabbatthatāya on the whole D i.251; ii.187; M i.38; S iv.296; A iii.225; v.299, 344. Expld at Vism 308 (with tt). Sabbassa
Sabbassa
(nt.) [sarvasva] the whole of one's property J iii.105; v.100 (read: sabbasaŋ vā pan'assa haranti); ˚ -- haraṇa (nt.) confiscation of one's property J iii.105; v.246 (v. l.); sabbassaharaṇadaṇḍa (m.) the same J iv.204 (so read instead of sabbappaharaṇa). At some passages sabba (nt.) "all," seems to be used in the same sense, esp. gen. sabbassa -- e. g. J iii.50; iv.19; v.324. Sabbāvant
Sabbāvant
(adj.) [cp. BSk. sarvāvant Divy 294, 298, 352] all, entire D i.73, 251; iii.224; A iii.27; v.299 sq., 344 sq. Sabbha
Sabbha
see a˚. Sabbhin
Sabbhin
see a˚. Sabrahmaka
Sabrahmaka
(adj.) [sa3+brahma+ka] including the Brahma world D i.62; iii.76, 135; A i.260; ii.70; S v.423; Vin i.11; DA i.174. Sabrahmacarin
Sabrahmacarin
(adj. -- n.) [sa3+brahmacārin] a fellow student D ii.77; iii.241 sq., 245; M i. 101; A ii.97; Sn 973; VbhA 281. Sabhaggata
Sabhaggata
(adj.) [sabhā+gata] gone to the hall of assembly A i.128; Sn 397; Pug 29. Sabhā
Sabhā
(f.) [Vedic sabhā, cp. K.Z. iv.370] 1. a hall, assembly- room D ii.274; A i.143; S i.176; J i.119; 157, 204. -> 2. a public rest -- house, hostelry J i.302. dhamma˚ chapel J vi.333.

-- gata = sabhaggata S v.394; M i.286. Sabhāga
Sabhāga
(adj.) [sa2+bhāga] common, being of the same division Vin ii.75; like, equal, similar Miln 79; s. āpatti a common offence, shared by all Vin i.126 sq.; vīthisabhāgena in street company, the whole street in common J ii.45; opp. visabhāga unusual J i.303; different Vism 516; Miln 79.

-- ṭṭhāna a common room, a suitable or convenient place J i.426; iii.49; v.235. -- vuttin living in mutual courtesy, properly, suitably Vin i.45; J i.219; a -- sabhāgavuttin J i.218; sabhāgavuttika Vin ii.162; A iii.14 sq.; a -- sabhāgavuttika ibid. Sabhājana
Sabhājana
[Dhtp 553: pīti -- dassanesu] honouring, salu- tation Miln 2. Sabhāya
Sabhāya
(nt.) = sabhā Vin iii.200. Sabhāva
Sabhāva
[sa4+bhāva] 1. state (of mind), nature, con- dition Miln 90, 212, 360; PvA 39 (ummattaka˚), 98 (santa˚), 219. -- 2. character, disposition, behaviour PvA 13, 35 (ullumpana˚), 220 (lokiya˚). -- 3. truth, reality, sincerity Miln 164; J v.459; v.198 (opp. musāvāda); J vi.469; sabhāvaŋ sincerely, devotedly J vi.486.

-- dhamma principle of nature J i.214; -- dhammatta = ˚dhamma Vism 238. -- bhūta true J iii.20. Sabhoga
Sabhoga1
(adj.) [sa3+bhoga] wealthy D i.73. Sabhoga
Sabhoga2
[sa4+bhoga] property, possession Miln 139. Sabhojana
Sabhojana
(adj. -- nt.) [sa3+bhojana] sharing food (?) Vin iv.95; Sn 102. Sama
Sama1
[fr. śam: see sammati1] calmness, tranquillity, mental quiet Sn 896. samaŋ carati to become calm, quiescent J iv.172. Cp. ˚cariyā & ˚cārin. Sama
Sama2
[fr. śram: see sammati2] fatigue J vi.565. Sama
Sama3
(adj.) [Vedic sama, fr. sa2; see etym. under saŋ˚] 1. even, level J i.315; iii.172; Mhvs 23, 51. samaŋ karoti to level Dh 178; SnA 66. Opp. visama. -- 2. like, equal, the same D i.123, 174; S i.12; Sn 90, 226, 799, 842; It 17, 64; Dh 306; Miln 4. The compared noun is put in the instr.; or precedes as first part of cpd. -> 3. impartial, upright, of even mind, just A i.74, 293 sq.; Sn 215, 468, 952. -- 4. sama˚, foll. by numerals, means "altogether,". e. g. ˚tiŋsa thirty altogether Bu 18, 18. -- 5. Cases as adv.: instr. samena with justice, impartially ( = dhammena K.S. i.321) Dh 257; J i.180; acc. samaŋ equally D ii.166; together with, at, D ii.288; Mhvs 11, 12.

-- cāga equally liberal A ii.62. -- jana an ordinary man, common people M iii.154 = Vin i.349. -- jātika of the same caste J i.68. -- jīvitā regular life, living economically A iv.281 sq. -- tala level, even J i.7; Pv iv.121 (of a pond). -- dhāraṇa equal support or sustenance SnA 95. -- dhura carrying an equal burden, equal J i.191; asamadhura incomparable Sn 694 sq.; J i.193. But sama -- dhura -- ggahaṇa "complete imperiousness" VbhA 492 (see yugaggāha). -- vāhita evenly borne along (of equanimity) DhsA 133. -- vibhatta in equal shares J i.266. -- sama exactly the same D i.123; ii.136; Pug 64; Miln 410; DA i.290. -- sīsin a kind of puggala, lit. "equal -- headed," i. e. one who simultaneously attains an end of craving and of life (cp. PugA 186. The expln in J.P.T.S. 1891, 5 is wrong) Pug 13; Nett 190. -- sūpaka with equal curry (when the curry is in quantity of onefourth of the rice) Vin iv.190. Samaka
Samaka
(adj.) [cp. BSk. samaka Divy 585] equal, like, same Miln 122, 410; of the same height (of a seat) Vin ii.169. samakaŋ (adv.) equally Miln 82. Samakkhāta
Samakkhāta
[saŋ+akkhāta] counted, known Sdhp 70, 458. Samagga
Samagga
(adj.) [saŋ+agga] being in unity, harmonious M ii.239; D iii.172; A ii.240; v.74 sq.; plur. = all unitedly, in common Vin i.105; J vi.2731. A i.70= 243; Sn 281, 283; Dh 194; Th 2, 161; ThA 143; J i.198, 209; samaggakaraṇa making for peace D i.4=A ii.209 =Pug 57; DA i.74; samagganandin, samaggarata, and samaggārāma, rejoicing in peace, delighting in peace, impassioned for peace D i.4=A ii.209=Pug 57; DA i.74; samaggavāsa dwelling in concord J i.362; ii.27. -- samaggi -- karoti to harmonize, to conciliate D iii.161. -- Cp. sāmaggī etc. Samaggatta
Samaggatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. samagga] agreement, consent Vin i.316. Samangitā
Samangitā
(f.) [abstr. fr. foll.] the fact of being endowed or connected with ( -- ˚) J iii.95 (paraloka˚); VbhA 438 (fivefold: āyūhana˚ etc.). Samangin
Samangin
(adj.) [saŋ+angin] endowed with, possessing Pug 13, 14; J i.303; Miln 342; VbhA 438. -- samangibhūta, possessed of, provided with D i.36; A ii.125; Sn 321; Vin i.15; DA i.121; samangi -- karoti to provide with J vi.266, 289, 290 (cp. vi.323: akarī samangiŋ). -- 682 -- Samacariyā
Samacariyā
[sama1+cariyā] (f.) living in spiritual calm, quietism A i.55; S i.96, 101 sq.; It 16, 52; Dh 388; Miln 19; J vi.128; DhA iv.145. Samacāga
Samacāga
[sama3+cāga] equally liberal A ii.62. Samacārin
Samacārin
(śama -- ) living in peace M i.289. Samacitta
Samacitta
possessed of equanimity A i.65; iv.215; SnA 174 (˚paṭipadā -- sutta). Samacchati
Samacchati
[saŋ+acchati] to sit down together J ii.67 (samacchare); iv.356; vi.104, 127. Samacchidagatta
Samacchidagatta
(adj.) [sam+ā+chida+gatta] with mangled limbs Sn 673. Samajja
Samajja
(nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. samāja (fr. saŋ+aj) congre- gation, gathering, company] a festive gathering, fair; a show, theatrical display. Originally a mountain cult, as it was esp. held on the mountains near Rājagaha. -> J ii.13; iii.541; vi.277, 559; S v.170; DA i.84; DhA iv.59; DhsA 255. -- On character and history of the festival see Hardy, Album Kern pp. 61 -- 66. -- gir -- aggasamajjaŋ mountain fair Vin ii.107, 150; iv.85, 267, 360; DhA i.89, 113. samajjaŋ karoti or kāreti to hold high revel J vi.383.

-- âbhicaraṇa visiting fairs D iii.183. -- ṭṭhāna the place of the festival, the arena, Vin ii.150; J i.394; -- dāna giving festivals Miln 278; -- majjhe on the arena S iv.306 sq.; J iii.541; -- maṇḍala the circle of the assembly J i.283 sq. Samajjhagaŋ
Samajjhagaŋ
(B ˚ -- guŋ) aor. from sam -- adhi -- gā. (See samadhigacchati.) Samañcati
Samañcati
[sam+añc] to bend together Vin iv.171, 363. Samañcara
Samañcara
[sama1+cara] pacified, calm S i.236. Samañcinteti
Samañcinteti
to think S i.124; see sañcinteti. Samaññā
Samaññā
(f.) [saŋ+aññā] designation, name D i.202; ii.20; M iii.68; S ii.191; Sn 611, 648; J ii.65; Dhs § 1306; loka˚ a common appellation, a popular expression D i.202. Samaññāta
Samaññāta
[saŋ+aññāta] designated, known, notorious S i.65; Sn 118, 820; Nd1 153; Vin ii.203. Samaṇa
Samaṇa
[BSk. śramaṇa, fr. śram, but mixed in meaning with śam] a wanderer, recluse, religieux A i.67; D iii.16, 95 sq., 130 sq.; S i.45; Dh 184; of a non -- Buddhist (tāpasa) J iii.390; an edifying etymology of the word DhA iii.84: "samita -- pāpattā s.," cp. Dh 265 "samitattā pāpānaŋ ʻ samaṇo ʼ ti pavuccati"; four grades mentioned D ii.151; M i.63; compare Sn 84 sq.; the state of a Samaṇa is attended by eight sukhas J i.7; the Buddha is often mentioned and addressed by nonBuddhists as Samaṇa: thus D i.4, 87; Sn p. 91, 99; Vin i.8 350; Samaṇas often opposed to Brāhmaṇas: thus, D i.13; It 58, 60; Sn, p. 90; Vin i.12; ii.110; samaṇabrāhmaṇā, Samaṇas and Brāhmaṇas quite generally: "leaders in religious life" (cp. Dial. ii.165) D i.5; ii.150; A i.110, -- 173 sq.; It 64; Sn 189; Vin ii.295; samaṇadhammaŋ the duties of a samaṇa A iii.371; J i.106, 107, 138; pure -- samaṇa a junior who walks before a Bhikkhu Vin ii.32; pacchāsamaṇa one who walks behind Vin i.186; ii.32; A iii.137. -- samaṇī a female recluse S i.133; ThA 18; J v.424, 427; Vin iv.235. -- assamaṇa not a true samaṇa Vin i.96.

-- uddesa a novice, a sāmaṇera D i.151; M iii.128; S v.161; Vin iv.139; A ii.78; iii.343. Cp. BSk. śramaṇoddeśa Divy 160. -- kuttaka (m.) who wears the dress of a Samaṇa Vin iii.68 sq. ( = samaṇa -- vesa -- dhārako, Bdhgh ib. p. 271). Samaṇaka
Samaṇaka
[samaṇa+ka] a contemptible (little) ascetic, "some sort of samaṇa" D i.90; M ii.47, 210; Sn p. 21; Miln 222; DA i.254. At A ii.48 samaṇaka is a slip for sasanaka. Cp. muṇḍaka in form & meaning. Samaṇḍalīkata
Samaṇḍalīkata
[sa+maṇḍala+kata] hemmed Vin i.255 (kaṭhina). Samatā
Samatā
[fr. sama3] equality, evenness, normal state Vin i.183; A iii.375 sq.; Miln 351. Samatikkama
Samatikkama
(adj.) [saŋ+atikamma] passing beyond, overcoming D i.34; ii.290; M i.41, 455; Vin i.3; J v.454; Vism 111. Samatikkamati
Samatikkamati
[saŋ+atikkamati] to cross over, to tran- scend D i.35; to elapse Mhvs 13, 5; ger. samatikkamma D i.35; M 41; pp. samatikkanta crossed over, or escaped from S iii.80; Dh 195. Samatiggaṇhāti
Samatiggaṇhāti
[saŋ+ati+gṛh] to stretch over, rise above, to reach beyond J iv.411 (ger. samatiggayha). Samatittha
Samatittha
(adj.) [sama3+tittha] with even banks (of a pond) J v.407. Samatitthika
Samatitthika
(adj.) [sama3+tittha+ika] even or level with the border or bank, i. e. quite full, brimful D i.244; ii.89; M i.435; ii.7 = Miln 213; S ii.134; v.170; J i.400; J i.235, 393; Miln 121; Vism 170 (pattaŋ ˚tittikaŋ pūretvā; v. l. ˚titthikaŋ); A iii.403; Vin i.230; iv.190; often written ˚tittika and ˚tittiya. [The form is probably connected with samaicchia -- i. e. samaitthia (*samatisthita) in the Deśināmamālā viii.20 (Konow). Compare, however, Rhys Davids' Buddhist Suttas, p. 1781; ˚ -- aŋ buñjāmi Miln 213; "I eat (only just) to the full" (opp. to bhiyyo bhuñjāmi) suggests the etymology: sama -- titti+ka. Kern, Toev. s. v. as above.] Samatimaññti
Samatimaññti
[saŋ+atimaññti] to despise (aor.) sama- timaññi Th 2, 72. Samativattati
Samativattati
[saŋ+ativattati] to transcend, overcome Sn 768, cp. Nd1 10. Samativijjhati
Samativijjhati
[saŋ+ativijjhati] to penetrate Dh 13 = Th 1, 133. Samatta
Samatta1
(nt.) [abstr. fr. sama3] equality A iii.359; Mhvs 3, 7; equanimity, justice A i.75. Samatta
Samatta2
[cp. Sk. samāpta, pp. of saŋ+āp] 1. accom- plished, brought to an end A ii.193; Sn 781 = paripuṇṇa Nd1 65. -- 2. [cp. Sk. samasta, pp. of saŋ+as to throw, cp. BSk. samasta, e. g. Jtm xxxi.90] complete, entire, perfect Miln 349; Sn 881; 1000; Nd1 289, 298. samattaŋ completely S v.175; accomplished, full Sn 889. Samattha
Samattha
(adj.) [cp. Sk. samartha, saŋ+artha] able, strong J i.179; 187; SnA 143. Samatthita
Samatthita
(adj.) [cp. Sk. samarthita, saŋ+pp. of artha- yati] unravelling Miln 1. Samatthiya
Samatthiya
(adj.) [fr. samattha] able Sdhp 619. Samatha
Samatha
[fr. śam, cp. BSk. śamatha] 1. calm, quietude of heart M i.33; A i.61, 95; ii.140; iii.86 sq. (ceto˚), 116 sq., 449; iv.360; v.99; D iii.54, 213, 273; DhA ii.177; S iv.362; Dhs 11, 15, 54; cessation of the Sankhāras S i.136; iii.133; A i.133; Sn 732; Vin i.5. -> 2. settlement of legal questions (adhikaraṇa) Vin ii.93; iv.207; cp. DhsA 144; s. paṭivijjhati Pts i.180.

-- yānika who makes quietude his vehicle, devoted to quietude, a kind of Arahant; cp. Geiger, Saŋyutta trsln ii.172. -- vipassanā introspection ("auto -- hypnosis" Cpd. 202) for promoting calm [cp. śamatha -- vipaśyanā Divy 95] S v.52; A ii.157; DhA iv.140; also separately "calm & intuition," e. g. M i.494. -- 683 -- Samadhigacchati
Samadhigacchati
[saŋ+adhigacchati] to attain Th 1, 4; aor. samajjhagā It 83; 3rd pl. samajjhagaŋ S i.103. Samadhigaṇhāti
Samadhigaṇhāti
[saŋ+adhigaṇhāti] 1. to reach, to get, obtain; ger. samadhiggayha M i.506; ii.25; S i.86 = It 16. -- 2. to exceed, surpass, to overcome, to master J vi.261 (pañhaŋ samadhiggahetvā). Often confounded with samatigaṇhāti. Samadhosi
Samadhosi
variant reading S iii.120 sq.; iv.46; the form is aor. of saŋdhū. See sañcopati. Samana
Samana
(nt.) [fr. śam] suppression Mhvs 4, 35. Samanaka
Samanaka
(adj.) [sa3+mana+ka] endowed with mind A ii.48 (text, samaṇaka); S i.62. Samanantara
Samanantara
(adj.) [saŋ+anantara] immediate; usually in abl. (as adv.); samanantarā immediately, after, just after D ii.156; Vin i.56; rattibhāga -- samanantare at midnight J i.101.

-- paccaya the relation of immediate contiguity Tikp 3, 61 sq.; Dukp 26; Vism 534. Samanukkamati
Samanukkamati
[saŋ+anukkamati] to walk along to- gether J iii.373. Samanugāhati
Samanugāhati
[saŋ+anugāhati] to ask for reasons, to question closely D i.26; M i.130; A v.156 sq.; ppr. med. samanuggāhiyamāna being pressed M i.130; A v.156; Vin iii.91. Samanujānāti
Samanujānāti
[saŋ+anujānāti] to approve; samanujā- nissanti (fut. 3 pl.) M i.398; S iv.225; pp. samanuññāta approved, allowed Mhvs 8, 11; aor. 1 sg. samanuññāsin J iv.117 ( = samanuñño āsiŋ Com. ib. 11715). Samanuñña
Samanuñña
(adj.) [ = next] approving D iii.271; A ii.253; iii.359; v.305; S i.1, 153; iv.187; J iv.117. Samanuññā
Samanuññā
(f.) [fr. samanujānāti] approval S i.1; M i.359. Samanupassati
Samanupassati
[saŋ+anupassati] to see, perceive, regard D i.69, 73; ii.198; M i.435 sq.; ii.205; Pot. Vin ii.89; ppr. ˚passanto J i.140; ppr. med. ˚passamāno D ii.66; inf. ˚passituŋ Vin i.14; rūpaŋ attato samanupassati to regard form as self S iii.42. Samanupassanā
Samanupassanā
(f.) [fr. last] considering S iii.44; Nett 27. Samanubandhati
Samanubandhati
[saŋ+anubandhati] to pursue Mhvs 10, 5. Samanubhāsati
Samanubhāsati
[saŋ+anubhāsati] to converse or study together D i.26, 163; M i.130; A i.138; v.156 sq.; Vin iii.173 sq.; iv.236 sq.; DA i.117. Samanubhāsanā
Samanubhāsanā
(f.) [fr. last] conversation, repeating together Vin iii.174 sq.; iv.236 sq. Samanumaññati
Samanumaññati
[saŋ+anumaññati] to approve; fut. 3 pl. ˚maññissanti M i.398; S iv.225; aor. 3 pl. ˚maññiŋsu J iv.134. Samanumodati
Samanumodati
[saŋ+anumodati] to rejoice at, to approve M i.398; S iv.225; Miln 89. Samanuyuñjati
Samanuyuñjati
[saŋ+anuyuñjati] to cross -- question D i.26, 163; M i.130; A i.138; v.156; DA i.117. Samanussarati
Samanussarati
(saŋ+anussarati] to recollect, call to mind S iv.196; Vin ii.183. Samanta
Samanta
(adj.) [saŋ+anta "of complete ends"] all, entire Sn 672; Miln 3. occurs usually in oblique cases, used adverbially, e. g. acc. samantaŋ completely Sn 442; abl. samantā (D i.222; J ii.106; Vin i.32) & samantato (M i.168 = Vin i.5; Mhvs 1, 29; Vism 185; and in definitions of prefix pari˚ DA i.217; VvA 236; PvA 32); instr. samantena (Th 2, 487) on all sides, everywhere, anywhere; also used as prepositions; thus, samantā Vesāliŋ, everywhere in Vesāli D ii.98; samantato nagarassa all round the city Mhvs 34, 39; samāsamantato everywhere DA i.61.

-- cakkhu all -- seeing, an epithet of the Buddha M i.168 = Vin i.5; Sn 345, etc.; Miln 111; Nd1 360. -- pāsādika all -- pleasing, quite serene A i.24; ˚kā Buddhaghosa's commentary on the Vinaya Piṭaka DA i.84; -- bhaddakatta complete auspiciousness, perfect loveliness SnA 444; VbhA 132. -- rahita entirely gone J i.29. -- veda one whose knowledge (of the Veda) is complete J vi.213. Samandhakāra
Samandhakāra
[saŋ+andhakāra] the dark of night Vin iv.54; DhA ii.94; S iii.60. Samannāgata
Samannāgata
(adj.) [saŋ+anvāgata] followed by, pos- sessed of, endowed with (instr.) D i.50; 88 Vin i.54; Sn p. 78, 102, 104. SnA 177 (in expln of ending " -- in"), 216 (of " -- mant"); PvA 46, 73. -- nt. abstr. ˚annāgatatta PvA 49. Samannāneti
Samannāneti
[samanvā+nī] to lead, conduct properly, control, pres. sam -- anv -- āneti M iii.188; ppr. ˚annānayamāna M i.477. Samannāhata
Samannāhata
[saŋ+anvāhata] struck (together), played upon D ii.171. Samannāharati
Samannāharati
[saŋ+anu+āharati; cp. BSk. samanvā- harati] 1. to concentrate the mind on, to consider, reflect D ii.204; M i.445; A iii.162 sq., 402 sq.; S i.114. -- 2. to pay respect to, to honour M ii.169; Vin i.180. Samannāhāra
Samannāhāra
[saŋ+anu+āhāra] concentration, bringing together M i.190 sq.; DA i.123; Miln 189. Samannesati
Samannesati
[saŋ+anvesati] to seek, to look for, to ex- amine D i.105; S iii.124; iv.197; Miln 37; DA i.274. pres. also samanvesati S i.122. Samannesanā
Samannesanā
(f.) [fr. last] search, examination M i.317. Samapekkhaṇa
Samapekkhaṇa
(nt.) considering; a˚ S iii.261. Samapekkhati
Samapekkhati
[saŋ+apekkhati] to consider, ger. ekkhiya Sdhp 536; cp. samavekkh˚. Samappita
Samappita
[pp. of samappeti] 1. made over, consigned Dh 315; Sn 333; Th 2, 451. -- 2. endowed with ( -- ˚), affected with, possessed of J v.102 (kaṇṭakena); Pv iv.16 ( = allīna PvA 265); PvA 162 (soka -- salla˚ -- hadaya); Vism 303 (sallena). -- yasabhoga˚ possessed of fame & wealth Dh 303; dukkhena afflicted with pain Vv 523; pañcehi kāmaguṇehi s. endowed with the 5 pleasures of the senses D i.36, 60; Vin i.15; DA i.121. Samappeti
Samappeti
[saŋ+appeti] to hand over, consign, commit, deposit, give Mhvs 7, 72; 19, 30; 21, 21; 34, 21; Dāvs ii.64. -- pp. samappita. Samabbhāhata
Samabbhāhata
[saŋ+abbhāhata] struck, beaten (thor- oughly) Vism 153; DA i.140. Samabhijānāti
Samabhijānāti
[saŋ+abhijānati] to recollect, to know J vi.126. Samabhisāta
Samabhisāta
joyful Th 2, 461. Samabhisiñcati
Samabhisiñcati
[saŋ+abhisiñcati] to inaugurate as a king Mhvs 4, 6; v.14. Samaya
Samaya
[cp. Sk. samaya, fr. saŋ+i. See also samiti] congregation; time, condition, etc. -- At DhsA 57 sq. we find a detailed expln of the word samaya (s -- sadda), with meanings given as follows: (1) samavāya ("harmony in antecedents" trsln), (2) khaṇa (opportunity), (3) kāla (season), (4) samūha (crowd, assembly), (5) hetu (condition), (6) diṭṭhi (opinion). (7) paṭilābha (acquisition), (8) pahāna (elimination), (9) paṭivedha (penetration). Bdhgh illustrates each one with fitting examples; cp. DhsA 61. -- We may group as follows: 1. coming together, gathering; a crowd, multitude D i.178 (˚pavādaka debating hall); ii.254 sq.; Miln 257; J i.373; PvA 86 ( = samāgama). samayā in a crowd Pv iii.34 (so read for samayyā; PvA 189 "sangamma"). -> 2. consorting with, intercourse Miln 163; DhA i.90; sabba˚ consorting with everybody J iv.317. -- 3. time, point of time, season D i.1; Sn 291, 1015; Vin i.15; VbhA 157 (maraṇa˚); Vism 473 (def.); -- samayā samayaŋ upādāya from time to time It 75. Cases adverbially: ekaŋ samayaŋ at one time D i.47, 87, 111; tena samayena at that time D i.179; DhA i.90. aparena s. in course of time, later PvA 31, 68; yasmiŋ samaye at which time D i.199; DhsA 61. ekasmiŋ samaye some time, once J i.306. paccūsa˚ at daybreak PvA 38; aḍḍharatti˚ at midnight PvA 155; cp. ratta˚. -- 4. proper time, due season, opportunity, occasion Sn 388; Vin iv.77; Bu ii.181; Mhvs 22, 59; VbhA 283 sq.; aññatra samayā except at due season Vin iii.212; iv.77; samaye at the right time J i.27. -- asamaya inopportune, unseasonable D iii.263, 287. -- 5. coincidence, circumstance M i.438. akkhara˚ spelling DhA i.181. -- 6. condition, state; extent, sphere (cp. defn of Bdhgh, above 9); taken dogmatically as "diṭṭhi," doctrine, view (equal to above defn 6) It 14 (imamhi samaye); DhA i.90 (jānana˚); Dāvs vi.4 (˚antara var. views). bāhira˚ state of an outsider, doctrine of outsiders, i. e. brahmanic DhA iii.392, cp. brāhmaṇānaŋ samaye DA i.291; ariyānaŋ samaye Miln 229. -- 7. end, conclusion, annihilation Sn 876; ˚vimutta finally emancipated A iii.173; v.336 (a˚); Pug 11; cp. DhsA 57. -- Pp. abhi˚.

-- vasaṭha at A ii.41 is to be read as samavasaṭṭha, i. e. thoroughly given up. Thus Kern, Toev. The same passage occurs at D iii.269 as samavaya -- saṭhesana (see under saṭha). -- 684 -- Samara
Samara
[sa+mara] battle Dāvs iv.1 Samala
Samala
(adj.) [BSk. samala] impure, contaminated Vin i.5; samalā (f.) dustbin S ii.270 ( = gāmato gūthanikkhamana -- magga, i. e sewer K.S. ii.203); see sandhi˚. Samalankaroti
Samalankaroti
[saŋ+alankaroti] to decorate, adorn Mhvs 7, 56; ˚kata pp. Dāvs v.36: ˚karitvā J vi.577. Samavaṭṭhita
Samavaṭṭhita
ready Sn 345 (˚ -- ā savanāya sotā). Samavattakkhandha
Samavattakkhandha
(adj.) [sama+vatta+kh., but BSk. sasaŋvṛtta˚] having the shoulders round, one of the lakkhaṇas of a Buddha D ii.18; iii.144, 164; Dial. ii.15: "his bust is equally rounded." Samavattasaŋvāsa
Samavattasaŋvāsa
[sama+vatta1+saŋvāsa] living together with the same duties, on terms of equality J i.236. Samavadhāna
Samavadhāna
(nt.) concurrence, co -- existence Nett 79. Samavaya
Samavaya
annihilation, termination (?) see samaya (cpd.) & saṭha. Samavasarati
Samavasarati
of a goad or spur Th 2, 210. See samo- sarati. Samavāpaka
Samavāpaka
(nt.) [sama+vāpaka, cp. vapati1] a store- room M i.451. Samavāya
Samavāya
(m.) coming together, combination S iv.68; Miln 376; DhsA 57, 196; PvA 104; VvA 20, 55. samavāyena in common VvA 336; khaṇa -- s˚ a momentary meeting J i.381. Samavekkhati
Samavekkhati
[saŋ+avekkhati] to consider, examine M i.225; A ii.32; It 30. Samavekkhitar
Samavekkhitar
[fr. last] one who considers It 120. Samavepākin
Samavepākin
(adj.) [sama+vepākin, cp. vepakka] pro- moting a good digestion D ii.177; iii.166; M ii.67; A iii.65 sq., 103, 153; v.15. Samavossajjati
Samavossajjati
[read saŋvossajjati!] to transfer, entrust D ii.231. Samavhaya
Samavhaya
[saŋ+ahvaya] a name Dāvs v.67. Samasāyisun
Samasāyisun
(aor.) J iii.201 (text, samāsāsisuŋ, cp. J.P.T.S. 1885, 60; read taŋ asāyisuŋ). Samassattha
Samassattha
[saŋ+assattha2] refreshed, relieved J iii.189. Samassasati
Samassasati
[saŋ+assasati] to be refreshed J i.176; Caus. samassāseti to relieve, refresh J i.175. Samassāsa
Samassāsa
[saŋ+assāsa] refreshing, relief DhsA 150 (expln of passaddhi). Samassita
Samassita
[saŋ+assita] leaning towards Th 1, 525. Samā
Samā
(f.) [Vedic samā] 1. a year Dh 106; Mhvs 7, 78. - 2. in agginisamā a pyre Sn 668, 670. Samākaḍḍhati
Samākaḍḍhati
[saŋ+ākaḍḍhati] to pull along; to entice; ger. ˚iya Mhvs 37, 145. Samākiṇṇa
Samākiṇṇa
[saŋ+ākiṇṇa] covered, filled S i.6; Miln 342. Samākula
Samākula
(adj.) [saŋ+ākula] 1. filled, crowded B ii.4 = J i.3; Miln 331, 342. -- 2. crowded together Vin ii.117. -- 3. confused, jumbled together J v.302. Samāgacchati
Samāgacchati
[saŋ+āgacchati] to meet together, to assemble Bu ii.171; Sn 222; to associate with, to enter with, to meet, D ii.354; Sn 834; J ii.82; to go to see Vin i.308; to arrive, come Sn 698; aor. 1 sg. ˚gañchiŋ D ii.354; 3rd ˚gañchi Dh 210; J ii.62; aor. 2 sg. ˚gamā Sn 834; ger. ˚gamma B ii.171 = J i.26; ger. ˚gantvā Vin i.308; pp. samāgata. Samāgata
Samāgata
[pp. of samāgacchati] met, assembled Dh 337; Sn 222. Samāgama
Samāgama
[saŋ+āgama] meeting, meeting with, inter- course A ii.51; iii.31; Miln 204; cohabitation D ii.268; meeting, assembly J ii.107; Miln 349; DhA iii.443 (three: yamaka -- pāṭihāriya˚; dev'orohaṇa˚; Gangārohaṇa˚). Samācarati
Samācarati
[saŋ+ācarati] to behave, act, practise M ii.113. Samācāra
Samācāra
[saŋ+ācāra] conduct, behaviour D ii.279; iii.106, 217; M ii.113; A ii.200, 239; iv.82; Sn 279; Vin ii.248; iii.184. Samātapa
Samātapa
[saŋ+ātapa] ardour, zeal A iii.346. Samādapaka
Samādapaka
[fr. samādapeti; cp. BSk. samādāpaka Divy 142] instructing, arousing M i.145; A ii.97; iv.296, 328; v.155; S v.162; Miln 373; It 107; DhA ii.129. Samādapana
Samādapana
(nt.) instructing, instigating M iii.132. Samādapetar
Samādapetar
adviser, instigator M i.16. Samādapeti
Samādapeti
[saŋ+ādapeti, cp. BSk. samādāpayati Divy 51] to cause to take, to incite, rouse Pug 39, 55; Vin i.250; iii.73; DA i.293, 300; aor. ˚dapesi D ii.42, 95, 206; Miln 195; Sn 695; ger. ˚dapetvā D i.126; Vin i.18; ger. samādetvā (sic) Mhvs 37, 201; ppr. pass. ˚dapiyamāna D ii.42. Samādahati
Samādahati
[saŋ+ādahati1] to put together S i.169. jotiŋ s. to kindle a fire Vin iv.115; cittaŋ s. to compose the mind, concentrate M i.116; pres. samādheti Th 2, 50; pr. part. samādahaŋ S v.312; ppr. med. samādahāna S i.169; aor 3rd pl. samādahaŋsu D ii.254. Pass. samādhiyati to be stayed, composed D i.73; M i.37; Miln 289; Caus. II. samādahāpeti Vin iv.115. -- pp. samāhita. Samādāna
Samādāna
1. taking, bringing; asamādānacāra (m.) going for alms without taking with one (the usual set of three robes) Vin i.254. -- 2. taking upon oneself, undertaking, acquiring M i.305 sq.; A i.229 sq.; ii.52; J i.157, 219; Vin iv.319; KhA 16, 142. kammasamādāna acquiring for oneself of Karma D i.82; A iii.417; v.33; S v.266, 304; It 58 sq., 99 sq.; VbhA 443 sq. -- 3. resolution, vow Vin ii.268; J i.233; Miln 352. -- 685 -- Samādinna
Samādinna
[pp. of samādiyati] taken up, undertaken A ii.193. Samādiyati
Samādiyati
[saŋ+ādiyati1] to take with oneself, to take upon oneself, to undertake D i.146; imper. samādiya Bu ii.118 = J i.20; aor. samādiyi S i.232; J i.219; ger. samādiyitvā S i.232; & samādāya having taken up, i. e. with D i.71; Pug 58; DA i.207; Mhvs 1, 47; having taken upon himself, conforming to D i.163; ii.74; Dh 266; Sn 792, 898, 962; samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesu, he adopts and trains himself in the precepts D i.63; S v.187; It 118; Sn 962 (cp. Nd1 478). -- pp. samādinna. Samādisati
Samādisati
[saŋ+ādisati] to indicate, to command D i.211; Mhvs 38, 59. Samādhāna
Samādhāna
(nt.) [saŋ+ā+dhā] putting together, fixing; concentration Vism 84 ( = sammā ādhānaŋ ṭhapanaŋ) in defn of samādhi as "samādhān' aṭṭhena." Samādhi
Samādhi
[fr. saŋ+ā+dhā] 1. concentration; a concen- trated, self -- collected, intent state of mind and meditation, which, concomitant with right living, is a necessary condition to the attainment of higher wisdom and emancipation. In the Subha -- suttanta of the Dīgha (D i.209 sq.) samādhi -- khandha ("section on concentration") is the title otherwise given to the cittasampadā, which, in the ascending order of merit accruing from the life of a samaṇa (see Sāmaññaphala -- suttanta, and cp. Dial. i.57 sq.) stands between the sīla -- sampadā and the paññā -- sampadā. In the Ambaṭṭha -- sutta the corresponding terms are sīla, caraṇa, vijjā (D. i.100). Thus samādhi would comprise (a) the guarding of the senses (indriyesu gutta -- dvāratā), (b) self -- possession (sati -- sampajañña), (c) contentment (santuṭṭhi), (d) emancipation from the 5 hindrances (nīvaraṇāni), (e) the 4 jhānas. In the same way we find samādhi grouped as one of the sampadās at A iii.12 (sīla˚, samādhi˚, paññā˚, vimutti˚), and as samādhi -- khandha (with sīla˚ & paññā˚) at D iii.229 (+vimutti˚); A i.125; ii.20; iii.15; v.326; Nd1 21; Nd2 p. 277 (s. v. sīla). It is defined as cittassa ekaggatā M i.301; Dhs 15; DhsA 118; cp. Cpd. 89 n. 4; identified with avikkhepa Dhs 57, and with samatha Dhs 54. -- sammā˚ is one the constituents of the eightfold ariya -- magga, e. g. D iii.277; VbhA 120 sq. -- See further D ii.123 (ariya); Vin i.97, 104; S i.28; Nd1 365; Miln 337; Vism 84 sq. (with definition), 289 (+vipassanā), 380 (˚vipphārā iddhi); VbhA 91; DhA i.427; and on term in general Heiler, Buddhistische Versenkung 104 sq. -- 2. Description & characterization of samādhi: Its four nimittas or signs are the four satipaṭṭhānas M i.301; six conditions and six hindrances A iii.427; other hindrances M iii.158. The second jhāna is born from samādhi D ii.186; it is a condition for attaining kusalā dhammā A i.115; Miln 38; conducive to insight A iii.19, 24 sq., 200; S iv.80; to seeing heavenly sights etc. D i.173; to removing mountains etc. A iii.311; removes the delusions of self A i.132 sq.; leads to Arahantship A ii.45; the ānantarika s. Sn 226; cetosamādhi (rapture of mind) D i.13; A ii.54; iii.51; S iv.297; citta˚ id. Nett 16. dhammasamādhi almost identical with samatha S iv.350 sq. -- Two grades of samādhi distinguished, viz. upacāra -- s. (preparatory concentration) and appanā -- s. (attainment concentration) DA i.217; Vism 126; Cpd. 54, 56 sq.; only the latter results in jhāna; to these a 3rd (preliminary) grade is added as khaṇika˚ (momentary) at Vism 144. -- Three kinds of s. are distinguished, suññata or empty, appaṇihita or aimless, and animitta or signless A i.299; S iv.360; cp. iv.296; Vin iii.93; Miln 337; cp. 333 sq.; DhsA 179 sq., 222 sq., 290 sq.; see Yogāvacara's Manual p. xxvii; samādhi (tayo samādhī) is savitakka savicāra, avitakka vicāramatta or avitakka avicāra D iii.219; Kvu 570; cp. 413; Miln 337; DhsA 179 sq.; it is fourfold chanda -- , viriya -- , citta -- , and vīmaŋsā -- samādhi D ii.213; S v.268. -- Another fourfold division is that into hāna -- bhāgiya, ṭhiti˚, visesa˚, nibbedha˚ D iii.277 (as "dhammā duppaṭivijjhā").

-- indriya the faculty of concentration A ii.149; Dhs 15. -- khandha the section on s. see above 1. -- ja produced by concentration D i.74; iii.13; Vism 158. -- parikkhāra requisite to the attainment of samādhi: either 4 (the sammappadhānas) M i.301; or 7: D ii.216; iii.252; A iv.40. -- bala the power of concentration A i.94; ii.252; D iii.213, 253; Dhs 28. -- bhāvanā cultivation, attainment of samādhi M i.301; A ii.44 sq. (four different kinds mentioned); iii.25 sq.; D iii.222; Vism 371. -- saŋvattanika conducive to concentration A ii.57; S iv.272 sq.; D iii.245; Dhs 1344. -- sambojjhanga the s. constituent of enlightment D iii.106, 226, 252; Vism 134 = VbhA 283 (with the eleven means of cultivating it). Samādhika
Samādhika
(adj.) [sama+adhika] excessive, abundant D ii.151; J ii.383; iv.31. Samādhiyati
Samādhiyati
is Passive of samādahati. Samāna
Samāna1
(adj.) [Vedic samāna, fr. sama3] similar, equal, even, same Sn 18, 309; J ii.108. Cp. sāmañña1. Samāna
Samāna2
[ppr. fr. as to be] 1. being, existing D i.18, 60; J i.218; PvA 129 ( = santo), 167 (id.). -- 2. a kind of god D ii.260.

-- āsanika entitled to a seat of the same height Vin ii. 169. -- gatika identical Tikp 35. -- bhāva equanimity Sn 702. -- vassika having spent the rainy season together Vin i.168 sq. -- saŋvāsa living together with equals Dh 302 (a˚), cp. DhA iii.462. -- saŋvāsaka belonging to the same communion Vin i.321. -- sīmā the same boundary, parish Vin i.321; ˚ma belonging to the same parish Vin ii.300. Samānatta
Samānatta
(adj.) [samāna+attan] equanimous, of even mind A iv.364. Samānattatā
Samānattatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. last] equanimity, impartiality A ii.32 = 248; iv.219, 364; D iii.152, 190 sq., 232. Samāniyā
Samāniyā
[instr. fem. of samāna, used adverbially, Vedic samānyā] (all) equally, in common Sn 24. Samānīta
Samānīta
[pp. of samāneti] brought home, settled Miln 349. Samāneti
Samāneti
[saŋ+āneti] 1. to bring together J i.68. -- 2. to bring, produce J i.433. -- 3. to put together, cp. J i.120, 148. -- 4. to collect, enumerate J i.429. -- 5. to calculate (the time) J i.120, 148; aor. samānayi DA i.275 -> pp. samānīta. Samāpajjati
Samāpajjati
[saŋ+āpajjati] 1. to come into, enter upon, attain D i.215 (samādhiŋ samāpajji); Vin iii.241 (Pot. ˚pajjeyya); samāpattiŋ J i.77; arahattamaggaŋ A ii.42 sq.; Vin i.32; saññāvedayitanirodhaŋ to attain the trance of cessation S iv.293; kayavikkayaŋ to engage in buying and selling Vin iii.241; sākacchaŋ to engage in conversation D ii.109; tejodhātuŋ to convert one's body into fire Vin i.25; ii.76. -- 2. to become S iii.86 (aor. 3rd pl. samāpaduŋ). -- pp. samāpajjita & samāpanna. Samāpajjana
Samāpajjana
(nt.) [fr. last] entering upon, passing through (?) Miln 176. Samāpajjita
Samāpajjita
[pp. of ˚āpajjati] attained, reached, got into D ii.109 (parisā ˚pubbā). -- 686 -- Samāpaṭipatti
Samāpaṭipatti
misprint for sammā˚ A i.69. Samāpatti
Samāpatti
(f.) [fr. saŋ+ā+pad] attainment A iii.5; S ii.150 sq.; iv.293 (saññā -- vedayita -- nirodha˚); Dhs 30 = 101; a stage of meditation A i.94; Dhs 1331; J i.343, 473; PvA 61 (mahā -- karuṇā˚); Nd1 100, 106, 139, 143; the Buddha acquired anekakoṭisata -- sahassā s. J i.77. The eight attainments comprise the four Jhānas, the realm of the infinity of space, realm of the infinity of consciousness, realm of nothingness, realm of neither consciousness nor unconsciousness Ps i.8, 20 sq.; Nd1 108, 328; Bu 192=J i.28, 54; necessary for becoming a Buddha J i.14; acquired by the Buddha J i.66; the nine attainments, the preceding and the trance of cessation of perception and sensation S ii.216, 222; described M i.159 sq. etc.; otherwise called anupubbavihārā D ii.156; A iv.410, 448 & passim [cp. Divy 95 etc.]. -- In collocation with jhāna, vimokkha, and samādhi Vin i.97; A iii.417 sq.; cp. Cpd. 59, 133 n. 3. -- ˚bhāvanā realizing the attainments J i.67; ˚kusalatā success in attainment D iii.212; Dhs 1331 sq. Samāpattila
Samāpattila
[fr. last] one who has acquired J i.406. Samāpattesiya
Samāpattesiya
(adj.) [samāpatti+esiya, adj. to esikā] longing for attainment Kvu 502 sq. Samāpanna
Samāpanna
[pp. of samāpajjati] having attained, got to, entered, reached S iv.293 (saññā -- nirodhaŋ); A ii.42 (arahatta -- maggaŋ entered the Path); Dh 264 (icchālobha˚ given to desire); Kvu 572 (in special sense = attaining the samāpattis). Samāpannaka
Samāpannaka
(adj.) [last+ka] possessed of the samāpattis DA i.119. Samāpeti
Samāpeti
[saŋ+āpeti] to complete, conclude Mhvs 5, 280; 30, 55; DA i.307 (desanaŋ). -- pp. samatta2. Samāyāti
Samāyāti
[saŋ+āyāti] to come together, to be united J iii.38. Samāyuta
Samāyuta
[saŋ+āyuta] combined, united Miln 274. Samāyoga
Samāyoga
[saŋ+āyoga] combination, conjunction DA i.95; Sdhp 45, 469. Samāraka
Samāraka
(adj.) [sa3+māra+ka] including Māra Vin i.11 = S v.423; D i.250; iii.76, 135 & passim. Samāraddha
Samāraddha
[pp. of samārabhati] undertaken S iv.197; Dh 293; J ii.61. Samārambha
Samārambha
[saŋ+ārambha] 1. undertaking, effort, en- deavour, activity A ii.197 sq. (kāya˚, vacī˚, mano˚); Vin iv.67. -- 2. injuring, killing, slaughter Sn 311; D i.5; DA i.77; A ii.197; S v.470; Pug 58; DhsA 146. -- appasamārambha (written ˚rabbha) connected with little (or no) injury (to life) D i.143. Cp. ārabhati1. Samārabhati
Samārabhati
[saŋ+ārabhati2] to begin, undertake M i.227; Mhvs 5, 79. -- pp. samāraddha. Samāruhati
Samāruhati
[saŋ+āruhati] to climb up, to ascend, enter; pres. samārohati J vi.209 (cp. samorohatī p. 206, read samārohatī); aor. samārūhi Mhvs 14, 38. -- pp. samārūḷha. -- Caus. samāropeti to raise, cause to enter Miln 85; to put down, enter Nett 4, 206. Samārūḷha
Samārūḷha
[pp. of samāruhati] ascended, entered M i.74. Samāropana
Samāropana
[fr. samāropeti] one of the Hāras Nett 1, 2, 4, 108, 205 sq., 256 sq. Samālapati
Samālapati
[saŋ+ālapati] to speak to, address J i.478. At J i.51 it seems to mean "to recover the power of speech." Samāvaya = samavāya
Samāvaya
= samavāya, closely united J vi.475 (in verse). Samāsa
Samāsa
[fr. saŋ+ās] 1. compound, combination Vism 82; SnA 303; KhA 228. Cp. vyāsa. -- 2. an abridgment Mhvs 37, 244. Samāsati
Samāsati
[saŋ+āsati] to sit together, associate; Pot. 3 sg. samāsetha S i.17, 56 sq.; J ii.112; v.483, 494; Th 1, 4. Samāsana
Samāsana
(nt.) [saŋ+āsana] sitting together with, com- pany Sn 977. Samāsama
Samāsama
"exactly the same" at Ud 85 ( = D ii.135) read sama˚. Samāsādeti
Samāsādeti
[saŋ+āsādeti] to obtain, get; ger. samāsajja J iii.218. Samāhata
Samāhata
[saŋ+āhata] hit, struck Sn 153 (ayosanku˚); Miln 181, 254, 304. Sankusamāhata name of a purgatory M i.337. Samāhita
Samāhita
[pp. of samādahati] 1. put down, fitted J iv.337; -- 2. collected (of mind), settled, composed, firm, attentive D i.13; S i.169; A ii.6 (˚indriya); iii.312, 343 sq.; v.3, 93 sq., 329 sq.; Sn 212, 225, 972 etc.; Dh 362; It 119; Pug 35; Vin iii.4; Miln 300; Vism 410; Nd1 501. -- 3. having attained S i.48 (cp. K.S. i.321 & Miln 352). Samijjhati
Samijjhati
[saŋ+ijjhati] to succeed, prosper, take effect D i.71; Sn 766 (cp. Nd1 2 = labhati etc.); Bu ii.59= J i.14, 267; Pot. samijjheyyuŋ D i.71; aor. samijjhi J i.68; Fut. samijjhissati J i.15. -- pp. samiddha. -> Caus. II. ˚ijjhāpeti to endow or invest with (acc.) J vi.484. Samijjhana
Samijjhana
(nt.) [fr. samijjhati] fulfilment, success DhA i.112. Samijjhiṭṭha
Samijjhiṭṭha
[saŋ+ajjhiṭṭha] ordered, requested J vi.12 ( = āṇatta C.). Samiñjati
Samiñjati
[saŋ+iñjati of ṛñj or ṛj to stretch] 1. to double up M i.326. -- 2. (intrs.) to be moved or shaken Dh 81 ( = calati kampati DhA ii.149). See also sammiñjati. Samiñjana
Samiñjana
(nt.) [fr. samiñjati] doubling up, bending back (orig. stretching!) Vism 500 (opp. pasāraṇa). See also sammiñjana. Samita
Samita1
[saŋ+ita, pp. of sameti] gathered, assembled Vv 6410; VvA 277. -- nt. as adv. samitaŋ continuously M i.93; A iv.13; It 116; Miln 70, 116. Samita
Samita2
[sa+mita, of mā] equal (in measure), like S i.6. Samita
Samita3
[pp. of sammati1] quiet, appeased DhA iii.84. Samita
Samita4
[pp. of saŋ+śam to labour] arranged, put in order J v.201 ( = saŋvidahita C.). Samitatta
Samitatta
(nt.) [fr. samita3] state of being quieted Dh 265. Samitāvin
Samitāvin
[samita3+āvin, cp. vijitāvin] one who has quieted himself, calm, Sn 449, 520; S i.62, 188; A ii.49, 50. Cp. BSk. śamitāvin & samitāvin. Samiti
Samiti
(f.) [fr. saŋ+i] assembly D ii.256; Dh 321; J iv.351; Pv ii.313 ( = sannipāta PvA 86); DhA iv.13. Samiddha
Samiddha
[pp. of samijjhati] 1. succeeded, successful Vin i.37; Bu ii.4 = J i.3; Miln 331. -- 2. rich, magnificent J vi.393; J iii.14; samiddhena (adv.) successfully J vi.314. Samiddhi
Samiddhi
(f.) [fr. samijjhati] success, prosperity Dh 84; S i.200. Samiddhika
Samiddhika
(adj.) [samiddhi+ka] rich in, abounding in Sdhp 421. Samiddhin
Samiddhin
(adj.) [fr. samiddhi] richly endowed with ThA 18 (Ap v.23); fem. -- inī J v.90. -- 687 -- Samidhā
Samidhā
(f.) [fr. saŋ+idh; see indhana] fuel, firewood SnA 174. Samihita
Samihita
[ = saŋhita] collected, composed Vin i.245= D i.104=238; A iii.224=229= DA i.273; D i.241, 272. Samīcī
Samīcī
D ii.94: see sāmīcī. Samītar
Samītar
[ = sametar] one who meets, assembles; pl. samī- tāro J v.324. Samīpa
Samīpa
(adj.) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. samīpa] near, close (to) SnA 43 (bhumma -- vacana), 174, 437; KhA 111; PvA 47 (dvāra˚ magga) (nt.) proximity D i.118. Cases adverbially: acc. ˚aŋ near to PvA 107; loc. ˚ -- e near (with gen.) SnA 23, 256; PvA 10, 17, 67, 120.

-- ga approaching Mhvs 4, 27; 25, 74. -- cara being near DhsA 193. -- cārin being near D i.206; ii.139. -- ṭṭha standing near Mhvs 37, 164. Samīpaka
Samīpaka
(adj.) [samīpa+ka] being near Mhvs 33, 52. Samīra
Samīra
[fr. saŋ+īr] air, wind Dāvs iv.40. Samīrati
Samīrati
[saŋ+īrati] to be moved Vin i.185; Dh 81; DhA ii.149. -- pp. samīrita J i.393. Samīrita
Samīrita
[saŋ+īrita] stirred, moved J i.393. Samīhati
Samīhati
[saŋ+īhati] to move, stir; to be active; to long for, strive after Sn 1064 (cp. Nd2 651); Vv 51; VvA 35; J v.388. -- pp. samīhita. Samīhita
Samīhita
(nt.) [pp. of samīhati] endeavour, striving after, pursuit J v.388. Samukkaŋsati
Samukkaŋsati
[saŋ+ukkaŋsati] to extol, to praise Sn 132, 438; M i.498. -- pp. samukkaṭṭha. Samukkaṭṭha
Samukkaṭṭha
[saŋ+ukkaṭṭha] exalted A iv.293; Th 1, 632. Samukkācanā
Samukkācanā
= ukkācanā Vbh 352; Vism 23. Samukkheṭita
Samukkheṭita
[saŋ+ukkheṭita] despised, rejected Vin iii.95; iv.27. Samugga
Samugga
[Class. Sk. samudga] a box, basket J i.265, 372, 383; Miln 153, 247; Sdhp 360 (read samuggābhaŋ). Samugga -- jātaka the 436th Jātaka J iii.527 sq. (called Karaṇḍaka -- Jātaka ibid.; v.455). Samuggaṇhāti
Samuggaṇhāti
[saŋ+uggaṇhati] to seize, grasp, embrace; ger. samuggahāya Sn 797; Nd1 105. -- pp. samuggahīta. Samuggata
Samuggata
[saŋ+uggata] arisen VvA 280; J iv.403 (text samuggagata). Samuggama
Samuggama
[saŋ+uggama] rise, origin VbhA 21 (twofold, of the khandhas). Samuggahīta
Samuggahīta
[pp. of samuggaṇhāti] seized, taken up Sn 352, 785, 801, 837, 907; Nd1 76, 100, 193. Samuggirati
Samuggirati
[saŋ+uggirati] to throw out, eject VvA 199; to cry aloud Dāvs v.29. Samugghāta
Samugghāta
[saŋ+ugghāta; BSk. samudghāṭa Lal. Vist. 36, 571] uprooting, abolishing, removal D i.135; M i.136; A ii.34; iii.407; v.198; S ii.263; iii.131; iv.31; Vin i.107, 110; J iii.397. Samugghātaka
Samugghātaka
(adj.) [fr. last] removing Miln 278. Samugghātita
Samugghātita
[pp. of samugghāteti, see samūhanati] abolished, completely removed; nt. abstr. ˚tta Miln 101. Samucita
Samucita
[saŋ+ucita, pp. of uc to be pleased] suitable Vin iv.147 (must mean something else here, perhaps "hurt," or "frightened") Dāvs v.55. Samuccaya
Samuccaya
[saŋ+uccaya] collection, accumulation J ii.235 (the signification of the particle vā); SnA 266 (id.). -- samuccaya -- kkhandhaka the third section of Cullavagga Vin ii.38 -- 72. Samucchaka
Samucchaka
see samuñchaka. Samucchati
Samucchati
[derivation and meaning uncertain; Windisch, Buddha's Geburt, p. 39, n. 1 derives it fr. saŋ+mucchati. Cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 157] to be consolidated, to arise samucchissatha (Conditional) D ii.63. Samucchita
Samucchita
[saŋ+mucchita] infatuated S i.187; iv.71; Th 1, 1219. It is better to read pamucchita at all passages. Samucchindati
Samucchindati
[saŋ+ucchindati] to extirpate, abolish, spoil, give up D i.34; ii.74; M i.101 sq., 360; J iv.63. -> pp. samucchinna. Samucchinna
Samucchinna
[saŋ+ucchinna] cut off, extirpated D i.34. Samuccheda
Samuccheda
[saŋ+uccheda] cutting off, abolishing, giving up M i.360; KhA 142; sammā s. Ps i.101; ˚pahāna relinquishing by extirpation Vism 5; SnA 9; ˚maraṇa dying by extirpation (of saŋsāra) Vism 229; ˚visuddhi Ps ii.3; ˚suññaŋ Ps ii.180. Samujjala
Samujjala
(adj.) [saŋ+ujjala] resplendent J i.89, 92 (pañca- vaṇṇa -- vattha˚). raŋsi -- jāla˚ resplendent with the blaze of rays VvA 12, 14, 166. Samujju
Samujju
(adj.) [saŋ+uju] straightforward, perfect Sn 352; S iv.196 (text saŋmuju). Samuñchaka
Samuñchaka
(adj.) [saŋ+uncha+ka] only as nt. adv. ˚ŋ gleaning, (living) by gleaning S i.19; J iv.466 (˚ŋ carati). Samuṭṭhahati
Samuṭṭhahati
[saŋ+uṭṭhahati] to rise up, to originate; pres. samuṭṭhāti Vin v.1; aor. samuṭṭhahi Mhvs 28, 16. -- pp. samuṭṭhita. -- Caus. samuṭṭhāpeti to raise, to originate, set on foot J i.144, 191, 318. Samuṭṭhāna
Samuṭṭhāna
(nt.) [saŋ+uṭṭhāna] rising, origination, cause; as adj. ( -- ˚) arising from A ii.87; Dhs 766 sq., 981, 1175; Miln 134, 302, 304; J i.207; iv.171; KhA 23, 31, 123; Vism 366. Samuṭṭhānika
Samuṭṭhānika
(adj.) [fr. last] originating DhsA 263. Samuṭṭhāpaka
Samuṭṭhāpaka
(f. ˚ikā) [fr. samuṭṭhāpeti] occasioning, causing DhsA 344; VvA 72. Samuṭṭhita
Samuṭṭhita
[pp. of samuṭṭhahati] arisen, originated, hap- pened, occurred J ii.196; Dhs 1035. Samuttarati
Samuttarati
[saŋ+uttarati] to pass over Miln 372. Samuttejaka
Samuttejaka
(adj.) [fr. samuttejeti] instigating, inciting, gladdening M i.146; A ii.97; iv.296, 328; v.155; S v.162; It 107. Samuttejeti
Samuttejeti
[saŋ+ud+tij] to excite, gladden, to fill with enthusiasm Vin i.18; D i.126. Cp. BSk. samuttejayati, e. g. Divy 80. Samudaya
Samudaya
[saŋ+udaya] 1. rise, origin D i.17; ii.33, 308; iii.227; A i.263 (kamma˚); Vin i.10; Sn p. 135; It 16 (samuddaya metri causa) etc. dukkha˚ the origin of ill, the second ariya -- sacca, e. g. D iii.136; A i.177; Vism 495 (where samudaya is expld in its parts as sam+ u+aya); VbhA 124. -- 2. bursting forth, effulgence (pabhā˚) J i.83. -- 3. produce, revenue D i.227. Samudāgacchati
Samudāgacchati
[saŋ+udāgacchati] to result, rise; to be got, to be at hand D i.116; M i.104. -- pp. samudāgata. Samudāgata
Samudāgata
[pp. of last] arisen, resulted; received S ii.24; Sn 648 ( = āgata C.). Samudāgama
Samudāgama
[saŋ+ud+āgama] beginning J i.2. -- 688 -- Samudācarati
Samudācarati
[saŋ+ud+ācarati] 1. to be current, to be in use M i.40 ( = kāya -- vacī -- dvāraŋ sampatta s. MA 182). -- 2. to occur to, to befall, beset, assail M i.109, 112, 453; S ii.273; It 31; Vism 343. -- 3. to behave towards, to converse with (instr.), to address Vin i.9; D ii.154, 192; A iii.124, 131; iv.415, 440; v.103; J i.192. -- 4. to practise J ii.33 (aor. ˚ācariŋsu). -- 5. to claim, to boast of Vin iii.91. -- pp. samudāciṇṇa. Samudācaritatta
Samudācaritatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. samudācarita, pp. of samudācarati] practice Miln 59. Samudācāra
Samudācāra
[saŋ+ud+ācāra] behaviour, practice, habit, familiarity J iv.22; SnA 6; DhsA 392; PvA 279. Samudāciṇṇa
Samudāciṇṇa
[pp. of samudācarati] practised, indulged in J ii.33; Tikp 320. Samudānaya
Samudānaya
(adj.) [grd. of samudāneti] to be procured or attained J iii.313 (su˚). Samudānīta
Samudānīta
[pp. of samudāneti, cp. BSk. samudānīta MVastu i.231] collected, procured J iv.177. Samudāneti
Samudāneti
[saŋ+ud+āneti; cp. BSk. samudānayati Divy 26, 50, 490; AvŚ i.199] to collect, procure, attain, get M i.104; Sn 295. -- pp. ˚ānīta. Samudāya
Samudāya
[fr. saŋ+ud+ā+i] multitude, quantity VvA 175; the whole VvA 276. Samudāvaṭa
Samudāvaṭa
[saŋ+ud+āvaṭa? Better read as saŋ+ udāvatta] restrained DhsA 75. Samudāhāra
Samudāhāra
[saŋ+udāhāra, cp. BSk. samudāhāra Divy 143] talk, conversation Miln 344; piya˚ A v.24, 27, 90, 201, 339; ThA 226. Samudikkhati
Samudikkhati
[saŋ+udikkhati] to behold ThA 147 (Ap. v.52). Samudita
Samudita
[saŋ+udita1] 1. arisen Dāvs v.4. -- 2. excited S i.136. -- 3. united VvA 321. Samudīraṇa
Samudīraṇa
(nt.) [saŋ+udīraṇa in meaning udīreti 1] moving M i.119; D i.76; Vism 365; DhsA 307. Samudīrita
Samudīrita
[saŋ+udīrita] uttered J vi.17. Samudeti
Samudeti
[saŋ+udeti] to arise; pres. samudayati (v. l. samudīyati) S ii.78; samudeti A iii.338; pp. samudita. Samudda
Samudda
[cp. Vedic samudra, fr. saŋ+udra, water] a (large) quantity of water, e. g. the Ganges; the sea, the ocean D i.222; M i.493; A i.243; ii.48 sq.; iii.240; D iii.196, 198; S i.6, 32, 67; J i.230; iv.167, 172; Dh 127; Nd1 353; SnA 30; PvA 47, 104, 133, 271; explained by adding sāgara, S ii.32; four oceans S ii.180, 187; ThA 111. Often characterized as mahā˚ the great ocean, e. g. Vin ii.237; A i.227; ii.55; iii.52; iv.101; SnA 371; DhA iii.44. Eight qualities: A iv.198, 206; popular etymology Miln 85 sq. (viz. "yattakaŋ udakaŋ tattakaŋ loṇaŋ," and vice versa); the eye etc. (the senses), an ocean which engulfs all beings S iv.157 (samudda = mahā udakarāsi). -- Cp. sāmuddika.

-- akkhāyikā (f.) tales about the origin of the sea, cosmogony Vin i.188; M i.513 sq.; D i.8; DA i.91. -- ṭṭhaka situated in the ocean J vi.158. -- vīci a wave of the ocean Vism 63. Samuddaya
Samuddaya
metri causa instead of samudaya It 16, 52. Samuddhaṭa
Samuddhaṭa
[saŋ+uddhaṭa] pulled out, eradicated Mhvs 59, 15; J vi.309; Sdhp 143. Samuddharana
Samuddharana
(nt.) [saŋ+uddharaṇa] pulling out, sal- vation Miln 232. Samuddharati
Samuddharati
[saŋ+uddharati] to take out or away; to lift up, carry away, save from; aor. samuddhari J vi.271; samuddhāsi (aor. thus read instead of samuṭṭhāsi) J v.70. Samunna
Samunna
[saŋ+unna] moistened, wet, immersed S iv.158; cp. the similar passage A ii.211 with ref. to taṇhā as a snare (pariyonaddha). Samunnameti
Samunnameti
[saŋ+unnameti] to raise, elevate, Th 1, 29. Samupagacchati
Samupagacchati
[saŋ+upagacchati] to approach Miln 209. Samupajaneti
Samupajaneti
[saŋ+upa+janeti] to produce; ˚janiya- māna (ppr. pass.) Nett 195. Samupaṭṭhahati
Samupaṭṭhahati
[saŋ+upaṭṭhahati] to serve, help; pres. samupaṭṭhāti Sdhp 283; aor. samupaṭṭhahi Mhvs 33, 95. Samupabbūḷha
Samupabbūḷha
[saŋ+upa+viyūḷha] set up; heaped, massed, in full swing (of a battle), crowded M i.253; D ii.285; S i.98; Miln 292; J i.89. Samupama
Samupama
[saŋ+upama] resembling Mhvs 37, 68; also samūpama J i.146; v.155; vi.534. Samuparūḷha
Samuparūḷha
[saŋ+uparūḷha] ascended Dāvs iv.42. Samupasobhita
Samupasobhita
[saŋ+upasobhita] adorned Miln 2. Samupāgacchati
Samupāgacchati
[saŋ+upāgacchati] to come to; aor. samupāgami Mhvs 36, 91; pp. samupāgata. Samupāgata
Samupāgata
[saŋ+upāgata] come to, arrived at Mhvs 37, 115; 38, 12; J vi.282; Sdhp 324. Samupādika
Samupādika
being on a level with the water Miln 237 (Trenckner conjectures samupodika). The better reading, however, is samupp˚, sama = peace, quiet, thus "producing quiet," calm. Samupeta
Samupeta
[saŋ+upeta] endowed with, Miln 352. Samuppajjati
Samuppajjati
[saŋ+uppajjati] to arise, to be produced S iv.218; pp. samuppanna. Samuppatti
Samuppatti
(f.) origin, arising S iv.218. Samuppanna
Samuppanna
[saŋ+uppanna] arisen, produced, come about Sn 168, 599; Dhs 1035. Samuppāda
Samuppāda
[saŋ+uppāda] origin, arising, genesis, coming to be, production Vin ii.96; S iii.16 sq.; It 17; A iii.406 (dhamma˚); J vi.223 (anilūpana -- samuppāda, v. read, ˚ -- samuppāta, "swift as the wind"); Vism 521 (sammā & saha uppajjati = samuppāda). Cp. paṭicca˚. Samuppilava
Samuppilava
(adj.) [fr. saŋ+uppilavati] jumping or bubbling up Sn 670 (˚āso nom. pl.). Samupphosita
Samupphosita
[saŋ+ud+phosita] sprinkled J vi.481. Samubbahati
Samubbahati
[saŋ+ubbahati2] to carry Dāvs iii.3; v.35; ppr. samubbahanto J vi.21 (making display of). Samubbhūta
Samubbhūta
[saŋ+ud+bhūta] borne from, produced from Dāvs ii.25. Samuyyuta
Samuyyuta
[saŋ+uyyuta] energetic, devoted Vv 6333; VvA 269. Samullapati
Samullapati
[saŋ+ullapati] to talk, converse Vin iii.187; PvA 237; ppr. samullapanto J iii.49. Samullapana
Samullapana
(nt.) [saŋ+ullapana] talking (with), con- versation SnA 71. Samullāpa
Samullāpa
[ = last] conversation, talk Miln 351. Samussaya
Samussaya
[saŋ+ud+śri, cp. BSk. samucchraya "body," Divy 70 = AvŚ i.162] 1. accumulation, complex A ii.42= It 48; It 34; bhassasamuccaya, grandiloquence Sn 245; -- 2. complex form, the body D ii.157=S i.148; Vv3512 (=sarīra VvA 164); Dh 351; Th 1, 202 ("confluence," i. e. of the 5 factors, trsln); Th 2, 22, 270; DhA iv.70; ThA 98, 212; rūpasamussaya the same Th 2, 102; cp. samuccaya. -- 689 -- Samussāpita
Samussāpita
[saŋ+ussāpita] lifted, raised J iii.408. Samussāhita
Samussāhita
[saŋ+ussāhita] instigated VvA 105. Samussita
Samussita
[saŋ+ussita] 1. elevated, erected J iii.497. - 2. arrogant, proud, haughty Dh 147 (interpreted at DhA iii.109 as "compounded," i. e. the body made up of 300 bones); A i.199; SnA 288 (˚ŋ bhassaŋ high and mighty talk). Samusseti
Samusseti
[saŋ+ud+śri] to raise, lift up, Pot. samusseyya A i.199 (here = to be grandiloquent). -- pp. samussita. Samūpasanta
Samūpasanta
[saŋ+upasanta] is v. l. for su -- vūpasanta (?) "calmed," at KhA 21. Samūlaka
Samūlaka
(adj.) [sa3+mūla+ka] including the root Th 2 385; ThA 256. Samūha
Samūha
[fr. saŋ+vah, uh] multitude, mass, aggregation Nett 195; PvA 49, 127, 157 ( = gaṇa), 200 (id.). Samūhata
Samūhata
[pp. of samūhanati] taken out, removed D i.136; S iii.131; Th 1,604; Dh 250; Sn 14, 360; It 83; J iv.345 (Kern, wrongly, "combined"). Samūhatatta
Samūhatatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. samūhata] abolition M iii.151. Samūhanati
Samūhanati
[saŋ+ūhanati2] to remove, to abolish Vin i.110; D i.135 sq. (˚hanissati); ii.91 = S v.432; M i.47; ii.193; S v.76; J i.374=Sn 360; Sn 14, 369, 1076; sikkhāpadaŋ Vin iii.23; D ii.154; uposathāgāraŋ to discontinue using a Vihāra as an Uposathāgāra Vin i.107; sīmaŋ to remove the boundary Vin i.110. Pres. also samūhanti S iii.156; Pot. samūhaneyya Vin i.110; imper. samūhantu D ii.154; & ˚ūhanatu Miln 143; ger. samūhanitvā M i.47; Vin i.107; a˚ M iii.285; inf. samugghātuŋ Mhvs 37, 32; grd. samūhantabba Vin i.107. -- Caus. II. samugghātāpeti to cause to be removed, i. e. to put to death Miln 193; samūhanāpeti Miln 142. -> pp. samūhata & (Caus.) samugghātita. Samūheti
Samūheti
[Caus. of saŋ+uh = vah] to gather, collect Mhvs 37, 245. Samekkhati
Samekkhati
[saŋ+ikkhati] to consider, to seek, look for; Pot. samekkhe J iv.5; ppr. samekkhamāna Th 1, 547; & samekkhaŋ J ii.65; ger. samekkhiya Mhvs 37, 237. Sameta
Sameta
[pp. of sameti] associating with Miln 396; con- nected with, provided with Mhvs 19, 69; combined, constituted Sn 873, 874. Sameti
Sameti
[saŋ+eti] 1. to come together, to meet, to assemble Bu ii.199 = J i.29. -- 2. to associate with, to go to D ii.273; J iv.93. -- 3. to correspond to, to agree D i.162, 247; J i.358; iii.278. -- 4. to know, consider S i.186; Nd1 284. -- 5. to fit in J vi.334. -- imper. sametu J iv.9320; fut. samessati S iv.379; It 70; aor. samiŋsu Bu ii.199; S ii.158=It 70; & samesuŋ J ii.3016; ger. samecca (1) (coming) together with D ii.273; J vi.211, 318. -- (2) having acquired or learnt, knowing S i.186; Sn 361, 793; A ii.6. -- pp. samita & sameta [=saŋ+ā+ita]. Sametikā
Sametikā
Sii.285; read samāhitā. Samerita
Samerita
[saŋ+erita] moved, set in motion; filled with ( -- ˚), pervaded by Sn 937; Nd1 410; J vi.529; Vism 172. Samokiṇṇa
Samokiṇṇa
[pp. of samokirati] besprinkled, covered (with) J i.233. Samokirati
Samokirati
[saŋ+okirati] to sprinkle Bu ii.178 = J i.27. - pp. samokiṇṇa. Samocita
Samocita
[saŋ+ocita] gathered, arranged J v.156 ( = suro- cita C.). Samotata
Samotata
[saŋ+otata] strewn all over, spread Vv 816 (vv. ll. samogata and samohata); J i.183; Ap 191. Samotarati
Samotarati
[saŋ+otarati] to descend Mhvs 10, 57. Samodakaŋ
Samodakaŋ
(adv.) [saŋ+odakaŋ] at the water's edge Vin i.6 = M i.169=D ii.38. Samodahati
Samodahati
[saŋ+odahati] to put together, supply, apply S. i.7; iv.178 sq.; to fix Nett 165, 178; ppr. samodahaŋ S i.7 = iv.179; ger. samodahitvā S iv.178; & samodhāya Vism 105; Sdhp 588. -- pp. samohita. Samodita
Samodita
united VvA 186 (so read for samm˚), 320; cp. samudita. Samodhāna
Samodhāna
(nt.) [saŋ+odhāna, cp. odahana] collocation, combination Bu ii.59 = J i.14; S iv.215=v.212; application (of a story) J ii.381. samodhānaŋ gacchati to come together, to combine, to be contained in Vin i.62; M i.184=S i.86; v.43, 231=A v.21 (Com. odhānapakkhepaŋ) A iii.364; SnA 2; Vism 7; VbhA 107; samodhānagata wrapped together Miln 362; samodhānaparivāsa a combined, inclusive probation Vin ii.48 sq. Samodhānatā
Samodhānatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. samodhāna] combination, application, pursuance, in vutti˚ J iii.541 (so read for vatti˚). Samodhāneti
Samodhāneti
[Denom. fr. samodhāna] to combine, put together, connect J i.9, 14; DA i.18; SnA 167, 193, 400; especially jātakaŋ s. to apply a Jātaka to the incident J i.106, 171; ii.381 & passim. Samorodha
Samorodha
[saŋ+orodha] barricading, torpor Dhs 1157; DhsA 379. Samorohati
Samorohati
[saŋ+orohati] to descend; ger. samoruyha Mhvs 10, 35. Samosaraṇa
Samosaraṇa
(nt.) [saŋ+osaraṇa] coming together, meeting, union, junction D i.237; ii.61; S iii.156; v.42 sq., 91; A iii.364; Miln 38. Samosarati
Samosarati
[saŋ+osarati] 1. to flow down together Miln 349. -- 2. to come together, gather J i.178 (see on this Kern, Toev. ii.60). Samoha
Samoha
infatuated Pug 61. Samohita
Samohita
[pp. of samodahati] 1. put together, joined J vi.261 (su˚). -- 2. connected with, covered with Nd1 149 (for pareta); Miln 346 (raja -- panka˚). Sampakampati
Sampakampati
[saŋ+pakampati] to tremble, to be shaken Vin i.12; D ii.12, 108; M i.227; iii.120. -- Caus. sampakampeti to shake D ii.108. Sampakopa
Sampakopa
[saŋ+pakopa] indignation Dhs 1060. Sampakkhandati
Sampakkhandati
[saŋ+pakkhandati, cp. BSk. sampra- skandati MVastu ii.157] to aspire to, to enter into Miln 35. Sampakkhandana
Sampakkhandana
(nt.) [saŋ+pakkhandana] aspiration Miln 34 sq. Sampaggaṇhāti
Sampaggaṇhāti
[saŋ+pagganhāti] 1. to exert, strain DhsA 372. -- 2. to show a liking for, to favour, befriend J vi.294. -- pp. sampaggahīta. Sampaggaha
Sampaggaha
[saŋ+paggaha] support, patronage Mhvs 4, 44. Sampaggahīta
Sampaggahīta
[saŋ+paggahīta] uplifted Miln 309. -- 690 -- Sampaggāha
Sampaggāha
assumption, arrogance Dhs 1116. Sampaghosa
Sampaghosa
sound, noise Mhbv 45. Sampacura
Sampacura
(adj.) [saŋ+pacura] abundant, very many A ii.59, 61; S i.110. Sampajañña
Sampajañña
(nt.) [fr. sampajāna, i. e. *sampajānya] atten- tion, consideration, discrimination, comprehension, circumspection A i.13 sq.; ii.93; iii.307; iv.320; v.98 sq.; S iii.169; D iii.213 (sati+samp. opp. to muṭṭha -- sacca+ asampajañña), 273. Description of it in detail at DA i.183 sq. = VbhA 347 sq., where given as fourfold, viz. sātthaka˚, sappāya˚, gocara˚, asammoha˚, with examples. Often combined with sati, with which almost synonymous, e. g. at D i.63; A i.43; ii.44 sq.; v.115, 118. Sampajāna
Sampajāna
(adj.) [saŋ+pajāna, cp. pajānāti; BSk. sam- prajāna, MVastu i.206; ii.360] thoughtful, mindful, attentive, deliberate, almost syn. with sata, mindful D i.37; ii.94 sq.; Sn 413, 931; It 10, 42; Pug 25; D iii.49, 58, 221, 224 sq.; A iv.47 sq., 300 sq., 457 sq.; Nd1 395; Nd2 141. sampajānakārin acting with consideration or full attention D i.70; ii.95, 292; A ii.210; v.206; VbhA 347 sq.; DA i.184 sq.; sampājanamusāvāda deliberate lie Vin iv.2; It 18; D iii.45; A i.128; iv.370; v.265; J i.23. Sampajānāti
Sampajānāti
[saŋ+pajānāti] to know S v.154; Sn 1055; Nd2 655. Sampajjati
Sampajjati
[saŋ+pajjati] 1. to come to, to fall to; to succeed, prosper J i.7; ii.105. -- 2. to turn out, to happen, become D i.91, 101, 193, 239; PvA 192. aor. sampādi D ii.266, 269. -- pp. sampanna. -- Caus. sampādeti. Sampajjalita
Sampajjalita
(adj.) [saŋ+pajjalita] in flames, ablaze A iv.131; Vin i.25; D i.95; ii.335; J i.232; Miln 84. Sampaṭike
Sampaṭike
(adv.) [loc. fr. saŋ+paṭi+ka] now J iv.432 ( = sampati, idāni C.). Sampaṭiggaha
Sampaṭiggaha
[saŋ+paṭiggaha] summing up, agreement KhA 100. Sampaṭicchati
Sampaṭicchati
[saŋ+paṭicchati] to receive, accept J i.69; iii.351; Mhvs 6, 34; ovādaŋ s. to comply with an admonition J iii.52; sādhū ti s. to say "well" and agree J ii.31; Miln 8. Caus. II. sampaṭicchāpeti J vi.336. Sampaṭicchana
Sampaṭicchana
(nt.) [fr. last] acceptance, agreement DhsA 332; SnA 176 ("sādhu"); Vism 21; Sdhp 59, 62. Sampaṭinipajjā
Sampaṭinipajjā
(f.) [saŋ+paṭi+nipajjā] squatting down, lying down ThA 111. Sampaṭivijjhati
Sampaṭivijjhati
[saŋ+paṭivijjhati] to penetrate; Pass. sampaṭivijjhiyati Nett 220. Sampaṭivedha
Sampaṭivedha
[saŋ+paṭivedha] penetration Nett 27, 41, 42, 220. Sampaṭisaŋkhā
Sampaṭisaŋkhā
deliberately S ii.111; contracted from ger. ˚ -- saŋkhāya. Sampatati
Sampatati
[saŋ+patati] to jump about, to fly along or about J vi.528 (dumā dumaŋ); imper, sampatantu, ib. vi.448 (itarītaraŋ); ppr. sampatanto flying to J iii.491. pp. sampatita. Sampati
Sampati
[saŋ+paṭi; cp. Sk. samprati] now Miln 87; sampatijāta, just born D ii.15 = M iii.123. Cp. sampaṭike. Sampatita
Sampatita
[pp. of sampatati] jumping about J vi.507. Sampatta
Sampatta
[pp. of sampāpuṇāti] reached, arrived, come to, present J iv.142; Miln 9, 66; PvA 12; KhA 142; SnA 295; Sdhp 56. Sampattakajāta
Sampattakajāta
merged in, given to Ud 75 [read sammat- taka (?)]. Sampatti
Sampatti
(f.) [saŋ+patti2] 1. success, attainment; happi- ness, bliss, fortune (opp. vipatti) A iv.26, 160; Vism 58, 232; J iv.3 (dibba˚); DA i.126; three attainments J i.105; Miln 96; DhA iii.183 (manussa˚, devaloka˚, nibbāna˚); Nett 126 (sīla˚, samādhi˚, paññā˚; cp. sampadā); four VbhA 439 sq. (gati˚, upadhi˚, kāla˚, payoga˚); six J i.105; nine Miln 341. -- 2. excellency, magnificence SnA 397; rūpasampatti beauty J iii.187; iv.333. -- 3. honour Mhvs 22, 48. -- 4. prosperity, splendour J iv.455; Mhvs 38, 92; s. bhavaloko Ps i.122. Cp. samāpatti & sampadā. Sampatthanā
Sampatthanā
(f.) [saŋ+patthanā] entreating, imploring Dhs 1059. Sampadā
Sampadā
(f.) [fr. saŋ+pad, cp. BSk. sampadā Divy 401 (devamanuṣya˚), also sampatti] 1. attainment, success, accomplishment; happiness, good fortune; blessing, bliss A i.38; Pv ii.947 ( = sampatti PvA 132). -- Sampadā in its pregnant meaning is applied to the accomplishments of the individual in the course of his religious development. Thus it is used with sīla, citta, & paññā at D i.171 sq. and many other passages in an almost encyclopedic sense. Here with sīla˚ the whole of the sīlakkhandha (D i.63 sq.) is understood; citta˚ means the cultivation of the heart & attainments of the mind relating to composure, concentration and religious meditation, otherwise called samādhikkhandha. It includes those stages of meditation which are enumd under samādhi. With paññā˚ are meant the attainments of higher wisdom and spiritual emancipation, connected with supernormal faculties, culminating in Arahantship and extinction of all causes of rebirth, otherwise called vijjā (see the 8 items of this under vijjā b.). The same ground as by this 3 fold division is covered by the enumeration of 5 sampadās as sīla˚, samādhi˚, paññā˚, vimutti˚, vimutti -- ñāṇadassana˚ M i.145; Pug 54; cp. S i.139; A iii.12.

The term sampadā is not restricted to a definite set of accomplishments. It is applied to various such sets besides the one mentioned above. Thus we find a set of 3 sampadās called sīla˚, citta˚ & diṭṭhi˚ at A i.269, where under sīla the Nos. 1 -- 7 of the 10 sīlas are understood (see sīla 2 a), under citta Nos. 8 & 9, under diṭṭhi No. 10. -> sīla & diṭṭhi˚ also at D iii.213. -- A set of 8 sampadās is given at A iv.322 with uṭṭhāna˚, ārakkha˚, kalyāṇamittatā, sammājīvitā, saddhā˚, sīla˚, cāga˚, paññā˚; of which the first 4 are expld in detail at A iv.281 = 322 as bringing wordly happiness, viz. alertness, wariness, association with good friends, right livelihood; and the last 4 as leading to future bliss (viz. faith in the Buddha, keeping the 5 sīlas, liberality, higher wisdom) at A iv.284=324. Another set of 5 frequently mentioned is: ñāti˚, bhoga˚, ārogya˚, sīla˚, diṭṭhi˚ (or the blessings, i. e. good fortune, of having relatives, possessions, health, good conduct, right views) representing the "summa bona" of popular choice, to which is opposed deficiency (vyasana, reverse) of the same items. Thus e. g. at A iii.147; D iii.235. -> Three sampadās: kammanta˚, ājīva˚, diṭṭhi,˚ i. e. the 7 sīlas, right living (sammā -- ājīva), right views A i.271. -- Another three as saddhā˚, sīla˚, paññā˚ at A i.287. -> Bdhgh at DhA iii.93, 94 speaks of four sampadās, viz. vatthu˚, paccaya˚, cetanā˚, guṇâtireka˚; of the blessings of a foundation (for merit), ofmeans (for salvation), of good intentions, of virtue (& merit). -- A (later) set of seven sampadās is given at J iv.96 with āgama˚, adhigama˚, pubbahetu˚, attattha -- paripucchā˚, titthavāsa˚, yoniso -- manasikāra˚, buddh'ûpanissaya˚. -- Cp. the following: atta˚ S v.30 sq.; ākappa˚ A i.38; ājīva˚ A i.271; DA i.235; kamma˚ A iv.238 sq.; dassana˚ Sn 231; nibbāna˚ Vism 58; bhoga˚ (+parivāra˚) DhA i.78; yāga˚ ThA 40 (Ap. v.7); vijjācaraṇa˚ D i.99.

2. execution, performance; result, consequence; thus yañña˚ successful performance of a sacrifice D i.128; Sn 505, 509; piṭaka -- sampadāya "on the authority of the Piṭaka tradition," according to the P.; in exegesis of iti -- kira (hearsay) A i.189 = ii.191=Nd2 151; and of itihītiha M i.520=ii.169. -- 691 -- Sampadāti
Sampadāti
[saŋ+padāti] to hand on, give over J iv.204 (aor. ˚padāsi). Sampadāna
Sampadāna
(nt.) [saŋ+padāna] the dative relation J v.214 (upayogatthe), 237 (karaṇatthe); SnA 499 (˚vacana). Sampadāleti
Sampadāleti
[saŋ+padāleti] to tear, to cut M i.450; A ii.33 = S iii.85; S iii.155; Mhvs 23, 10. -- Act. intrs. sampadālati to burst J vi.559 (=phalati, C.). Sampaditta
Sampaditta
[saŋ+paditta] kindled Sdhp 33. Sampaduṭṭha
Sampaduṭṭha
[saŋ+paduṭṭha] corrupted, wicked J vi.317 (a˚); Sdhp 70. Sampadussati
Sampadussati
[saŋ+padussati] to be corrupted, to tres- pass Vin iv.260; J ii.193; pp. sampaduṭṭha. Sampadosa
Sampadosa
[saŋ+padosa1] wickedness Dhs 1060; a -- sam- padosa innocence J vi.317 = vi.321. Sampaddavati
Sampaddavati
[saŋ+pa+dru] to run away; aor. sam- paddavi J vi.53. -- pp. sampadduta. Sampadduta
Sampadduta
[pp. of sampaddavati] run away J vi.53. Sampadhūpeti
Sampadhūpeti
(˚dhūpāyati, ˚dhūpāti) [saŋ+padhūpāti] to send forth (thick) smoke, to fill with smoke or incense, to pervade, permeate S i.169; Vin i.225; Sn p. 15; Miln 333. Cp. sandhūpāyati. Sampanna
Sampanna
[pp. of sampajjati] 1. successful, complete, perfect Vin ii.256; sampannaveyyākaraṇa a full explanation Sn 352. -- 2. endowed with, possessed of, abounding in Vin i.17; Sn 152, 727 (ceto -- vimutti˚); J i.421; vijjācaraṇasampanna full of wisdom and goodness D i.49; Sn 164; often used as first part of a compound, e. g. sampannavijjācaraṇa Dh 144; DhA iii.86; sampannasīla virtuous It 118; Dh 57; sampannodaka abounding in water J iv.125. -- 3. sweet, well cooked Vin ii.196; Miln 395. Sampaphulla
Sampaphulla
(adj.) [saŋ+pa+phulla] blooming, blossoming Sdhp 245. Sampabhāsa
Sampabhāsa
[saŋ+pa+bhāṣ] frivolous talk S v.355. Sampabhāsati
Sampabhāsati
[saŋ+pa+bhās] to shine Miln 338. Sampamathita
Sampamathita
[saŋ+pamathita] altogether crushed or overwhelmed J vi.189. Sampamaddati
Sampamaddati
[saŋ+pamaddati] to crush out Miln 403. Sampamūḷha
Sampamūḷha
(adj.) [saŋ+pamūḷha] confounded Sn 762. Sampamodati
Sampamodati
[saŋ+pamodati] to rejoice Vv 368. -- pp. sampamodita. Sampamodita
Sampamodita
[saŋ+pamodita] delighted, rejoicing Sdhp 301. Sampayāta
Sampayāta
[saŋ+payāta] gone forth, proceeded Dh 237. Sampayāti
Sampayāti
[saŋ+payāti] to proceed, to go on; inf. sam- payātave Sn 834; pp. sampayāta. Sampayutta
Sampayutta
[saŋ+payutta] associated with, connected Dhs 1; Kvu 337; DhsA 42. -- ˚paccaya the relation of association (opp. vippayutta˚) Vism 539; VbhA 206; Tikp 6, 20, 53, 65, 152 sq.; Dukp 1 sq. Sampayoga
Sampayoga
[saŋ+payoga] union, association Vin i.10; S v.421; DA i.96, 260. Sampayojeti
Sampayojeti
[saŋ+payojeti] 1. to associate (with) Vin ii.262; M ii.5. -- 2. to quarrel Vin ii.5; S i.239. -- pp. sampayutta. Samparāya
Samparāya
[fr. saŋ+parā+i] future state, the next world Vin ii.162; A iii.154; iv.284 sq.; D ii.240; S i.108; Sn 141, 864, J i.219; iii.195; Miln 357; DhA ii.50. Samparāyika
Samparāyika
(adj.) [fr. last] belonging to the next world Vin i.179; iii.21; D ii.240; iii.130; A iii.49, 364; iv.285; M i.87; It 17, 39; J ii.74. Samparikaḍḍhati
Samparikaḍḍhati
[saŋ+parikaḍḍhati] to pull about, drag along M i.228. Samparikantati
Samparikantati
[saŋ+parikantati] to cut all round M iii.275. (Trenckner reads sampakantati.) Samparikiṇṇa
Samparikiṇṇa
[saŋ+parikiṇṇa] surrounded by Vin iii.86; Miln 155. Samparitāpeti
Samparitāpeti
[saŋ+paritāpeti] to make warm, heat, scourge M i.128, 244 = S iv.57. Samparibhinna
Samparibhinna
(adj.) [saŋ+paribhinna] broken up J vi.113 (˚gatta). Samparivajjeti
Samparivajjeti
[saŋ+parivajjeti] to avoid, shun Sdhp 52, 208. Samparivatta
Samparivatta
(adj.) [saŋ+parivatta] rolling about Dh 325. Samparivattaka
Samparivattaka
(adj.) [saŋ+parivattaka] rolling about grovelling J ii.142 (turning somersaults); DhA ii.5, 12; Miln 253, 357; samparivattakaŋ (adv.) in a rolling about manner M ii.138; samparivattakaŋ -- samparivattakaŋ continually turning (it) Vin i.50. Samparivattati
Samparivattati
[saŋ+parivattati] to turn, to roll about; ppr. samparivattamāna J i.140; pp. samparivatta. -> Caus. samparivatteti [cp. BSk. ˚parivartayati to wring one's hands Divy 263] to turn over in one's mind, to ponder over S v.89. Samparivāreti
Samparivāreti
[saŋ+parivāreti] to surround, wait upon, attend on J i.61; aor. 3rd pl. samparivāresuŋ J i.164; ger. samparivārayitvā J i.61; ˚etvā (do.) J vi.43, 108. Cp. sampavāreti. Samparivāsita
Samparivāsita
see parivāsita. Sampareta
Sampareta
(adj.) [saŋ+pareta] surrounded, beset with J ii.317; iii.360 = S i.143. Sampalibodha
Sampalibodha
[saŋ+palibodha] hindrance, obstruction Nett 79. Sampalibhagga
Sampalibhagga
[pp. of next] broken up S i.123. Sampalibhañjati
Sampalibhañjati
[saŋ+pari+bhañj] to break, to crack M i.234; S i.123; pp. sampalibhagga. Sampalimaṭṭha
Sampalimaṭṭha
[saŋ+palimaṭṭha] touched, handled, blotted out, destroyed S iv.168 sq. = J iii.532=Vism 36. Sampaliveṭhita
Sampaliveṭhita
(adj.) [saŋ+paliveṭhita] wrapped up, enveloped M i.281. Sampaliveṭheti
Sampaliveṭheti
[saŋ+paliveṭheti] to wrap up, envelop; ˚eyya Aiv.131 (kāyaŋ). Sampavanka
Sampavanka
(adj.) [perhaps saŋ+pari+anka2, con- tracted to *payyanka>*pavanka] intimate, friend D ii.78; S i.83, 87; Pug 36. Sampavankatā
Sampavankatā
(f.) [fr. last] connection, friendliness, intimacy S i.87; A iii.422 (pāpa˚ & kalyāṇa˚); iv.283 sq.; v.24, 199; Dhs 1326; Pug 20, 24; DhsA 394. Cp. anu˚ Vin ii.88. Sampavaṇṇita
Sampavaṇṇita
(adj.) [saŋ+pa+vaṇṇita] described, praised J vi.398. -- 692 -- Sampavattar
Sampavattar
[saŋ+pavattar] an instigator A iii.133. Sampavatteti
Sampavatteti
[saŋ+pavatteti] to produce, set going A iii.222 (saŋvāsaŋ); Mhvs 23, 75. Sampavāti
Sampavāti
[saŋ+pavāti] to blow, to be fragrant M i.212; J vi.534; VvA 343 ( = Vv 8432). Sampavāyati
Sampavāyati
[saŋ+pavāyati] to make fragrant, Vv 816, 8432; VvA 344. Sampavāyana
Sampavāyana
(nt.) [fr. last] making fragrant VvA 344. Sampavāreti
Sampavāreti
[saŋ+pavāreti; cp. BSk. saŋpravārayati Divy 285, 310, etc.; AvŚ i.90; MVastu iii.142] to cause to accept, to offer, to regale, serve with; ger. sampavāretvā Vin i.18; ii.128; D i.109; aor. sampavāresi D ii.97. Sampavedhati
Sampavedhati
[saŋ+pavedhati] to be shaken violently, to be highly affected Vin i.12; D ii.12, 108; M i.227; Th 2, 231; J i.25; S iv.71. -- Caus. sampavedheti to shake violently D ii.108; M i.253; Nd1 316, 371 (pp. ˚pavedhita). Sampavedhin
Sampavedhin
to be shaken Sn 28; Miln 386. Sampasāda
Sampasāda
[saŋ+pasāda] serenity, pleasure D ii.211, 222; A ii.199; M ii.262. Sampasādana
Sampasādana
[saŋ+pasādana] (nt.) tranquillizing D i.37; Dhs 161; Miln 34; Vism 156; DhsA 170 (in the description of the second Jhāna); happiness, joy Bu i.35. Sampasādaniya
Sampasādaniya
(adj.) [saŋ+pasādaniya] leading to serenity, inspiring faith D iii.99 sq. (the S. Suttanta), 116. Sampasāreti
Sampasāreti
[saŋ+pasāreti] to stretch out, to distract Vism 365. -- Pass. sampasāriyati A iv.47; Miln 297; DhsA 376. Sampasīdati
Sampasīdati
[saŋ+pasīdati] to be tranquillized, reassured D i.106; M i.101; DA i.275. Sampasīdana
Sampasīdana
(nt.) [fr. last] becoming tranquillized Nett 28. Sampassati
Sampassati
[saŋ+passati] to see, behold; to look to, to consider; ppr sampassanto Vin i.42; D ii.285; sampassaŋ Dh 290. Sampahaŋsaka
Sampahaŋsaka
(adj.) [fr. next] gladdening M i.146; A ii.97; iv.296, 328; v.155; It 107; Miln 373. Sampahaŋsati
Sampahaŋsati
[saŋ+pahaŋsati2] to be glad; pp. sam- pahaṭṭha. -- Caus. sampahaŋseti to gladden, delight Vin i.18; D i.126. Sampahaŋsana
Sampahaŋsana
(nt.) [fr. sampahaŋsati] being glad, plea- sure; approval Ps i.167; Vism 148 (˚ā); KhA 100 ("evaŋ"); SnA 176 ("sādhu"); Sdhp 568. Sampahaṭṭha
Sampahaṭṭha1
(adj.) [saŋ+pahaṭṭha1] beaten, struck (of metal), refined, wrought S i.65 (sakusala˚; Bdhgh: ukkāmukhe pacitvā s.; K.S. i.321); Sn 686 (sukusala˚; SnA 486: "kusalena suvaṇṇakārena sanghaṭṭitaŋ sanghaṭṭentena tāpitaŋ"). Sampahaṭṭha
Sampahaṭṭha2
[saŋ+pahaṭṭha2] gladdened, joyful Sdhp 301. Sampahāra
Sampahāra
[saŋ+pahāra] clashing, beating together, im- pact, striking; battle, strife D ii.166; Pug 66 sq.; DA i.150; Miln 161 (ūmi -- vega˚), 179 (of two rocks), 224. Sampāka
Sampāka
[saŋ+pāka] 1. what is cooked, a cooked preparation, concoction Vin ii.259 (maŋsa˚ etc.); Vv 435 (kola˚); VvA 186. -- 2. ripeness, development J vi.236. Sampāta
Sampāta
[saŋ+pāta] falling together, concurrence, collision It 68; kukkuṭasampāta neighbouring, closely adjoining (yasmā gāmā nikkhamitvā kukkuṭo padasā va aññaŋ gāmaŋ gacchati, ayaŋ kukkuṭasampāto ti vuccati) Vin iv.63, 358; kukkuṭasampātaka lying close together (lit. like a flock of poultry) A i.159. Cp. the similar sannipāta. Sampādaka
Sampādaka
[fr. sampādeti] one who obtains Miln 349. Sampādana
Sampādana
(nt.) [fr. sampādeti] effecting, accomplishment Nett 44; preparing, obtaining J i.80. Sampādeti
Sampādeti
[Caus. of sampajjati] 1. to procure, obtain Vin i.217; ii.214; ekavacanaŋ s. to be able to utter a single word J ii.164; kathaŋ s. to be able to talk J ii.165; dohaḷe s. to satisfy the longing Mhvs 22, 51. -- 2. to strive, to try to accomplish one's aim D ii.120; S ii.29 Sampāpaka
Sampāpaka
(adj.) [fr. sampāpeti] causing to obtain, leading to, bringing J iii.348; vi.235. Sampāpana
Sampāpana
(nt.) [fr. sampāpuṇāti] reaching, getting to Miln 355, 356 (tīra˚). Sampāpuṇāti
Sampāpuṇāti
[saŋ+pāpuṇāti] to reach, attain; to come to, meet with; aor. sampāpuṇi J i.67; ii.20; pp. sampatta. -- Caus. sampāpeti to bring, to make attain Vism 303. Sampāyati
Sampāyati
[dern not clear; Kern, Toev. i.62 = sampāda- yati; but more likely= sampāyāti, i. e. sam+pa+ā+yā] to be able to explain (DA i.117: sampādetvā kathetuŋ sakkuṇoti), to agree, to come to terms, succeed D i.26; ii.284; M i.85, 96, 472; ii.157; A v.50; S iv.15, 67; v.109; Vin ii.249 (cp. p. 364); aor. sampāyāsi M i.239. Cp. sampayāti. Sampāruta
Sampāruta
[saŋ+pāruta] (quite) covered M i.281. Sampāleti
Sampāleti
[saŋ+pāleti] to protect J iv.127. Sampiṇḍana
Sampiṇḍana
(nt.) [fr. saŋ+piṇḍ˚] combining, connection, addition Vism 159 (of "ca"); KhA 228 (id.); DhsA 171. Sampiṇḍita
Sampiṇḍita
[pp. of sampiṇḍeti] brought together, restored J i.230; compact, firm J v.89. Sampiṇḍeti
Sampiṇḍeti
[saŋ+piṇḍeti] to knead or ball together, com- bine, unite Vism 159; KhA 125, 221, 230; DhsA 177; pp. sampiṇḍita. Sampiya
Sampiya
(adj.) [saŋ+piya] friendly; sampiyena by mutual consent, in mutual love Sn 123, 290. Sampiyāyati
Sampiyāyati
[saŋ+piyāyati] to receive with joy, to treat kindly, address with love J iii.482; ppr. sampiyāyanto J i.135; sampiyāyamāna (do.) fondling, being fond of D ii.223; J i.191, 297, 361; ii.85; DhA ii.65. aor. 3rd pl. sampiyāyiŋsu J vi.127. Sampiyāyanā
Sampiyāyanā
(f.) [saŋ+piyāyanā] intimate relation, great fondness J iii.492. Sampīṇeti
Sampīṇeti
[saŋ+pīṇeti] to satisfy, gladden, please; aor. 2nd sg. sampesi J iii.253; ger. sampīṇayitvā Dāvs iv.11. Sampīḷa
Sampīḷa
(nt.) [saŋ+pīḷa, cp. pīḷā] trouble, pain; asam- pīḷaŋ free from trouble Miln 351. Sampīḷita
Sampīḷita
[pp. of sampīḷeti] troubled; as nt., worry, trouble Miln 368. Sampīḷeti
Sampīḷeti
[saŋ+pīḷeti] to press, to pinch, to worry Vin iii.126; pp. sampīḷita. Sampucchati
Sampucchati
[saŋ+pucchati] to ask D i.116; ger. sam- puccha having made an appointment with S i.176. Sampuṭa
Sampuṭa
[cp. saŋ+puṭa (lexicogr. Sk. sampuṭa "round box") & BSk. sampuṭa in meaning "añjali" at Divy 380, in phrase kṛta -- kara -- sampuṭah] the hollow of the hand (in posture of veneration), in pāṇi˚ Mhvs 37, 192, i. e. Cūḷavaŋsa (ed. Geiger) p. 15. -- 693 -- Sampuṭita
Sampuṭita
[saŋ+puṭita = phuṭita, cp. BSk. sampuṭaka MVastu ii.127] shrunk, shrivelled M i.80. Sampuṇṇa
Sampuṇṇa
(sampūrṇa) filled, full Sn 279; Bu ii.119 = J i.20; Mhvs 22, 60. Sampupphita
Sampupphita
[saŋ+pupphita] in full bloom Pv iv.12 ( = niccaŋ pupphita PvA 275). Sampurekkharoti
Sampurekkharoti
[saŋ+purakkharoti] to honour M ii.169. Sampūjeti
Sampūjeti
[saŋ+pūjeti] to venerate Mhvs 30, 100. Sampūreti
Sampūreti
[saŋ+pūreti] Pass. pūriyati˚ to be filled, ended; aor. sampūri (māso, "it was a full month since . . .") J iv.458. Sampha
Sampha
(adj. -- n.) [not clear, if & how connected with Sk. śaśpa, grass. The BSk. has sambhinna -- pralāpa for sampha -- ppalāpa] frivolous; nt. frivolity, foolishness; only in connection with expressions of talking, as samphaŋ bhāsati to speak frivolously A ii.23; Sn 158; samphaŋ giraŋ bh. J vi.295; samphaŋ palapati Tikp 167 sq. -> Also in cpds. ˚palāpa frivolous talk D i.4; iii.69, 82, 175, 269; A i.269 sq., 298; ii.60, 84, 209; iii.254, 433; iv. 248; v.251 sq., 261 sq.; Tikp 168, 281; DA i.76; ˚palāpin talking frivolously D i.138; iii.82; A i.298; Pug 39, 58. Samphala
Samphala
(adj.) [saŋ+phala] abounding in fruits S i.70; 90 = It 45. Samphassa
Samphassa
[saŋ+phassa] contact, reaction Vin i.3; A ii.117; D ii.62; M i.85; J i.502; kāya -- s. the touch of the skin D ii.75; cakkhu -- , sota -- , ghāna -- , jivhā -- , kāya -- , and mano -- s. D ii.58, 308; S iv.68 sq.; VbhA 19. Samphuṭṭha
Samphuṭṭha
[pp. of samphassati] touched S iv.97; Av.103; It 68. Samphulla
Samphulla
(adj.) [saŋ+phulla] full -- blown J vi.188. Samphusati
Samphusati
[saŋ+phusati] to touch, to come in contact with; ppr. samphussaŋ It 68; ppr. med. samphusamāna Sn 671; Nd2 199 (reads samphassamāna, where id. p. at M i.85 has rissamāna); aor. samphusi D ii.128; inf. samphusituŋ Sn 835; D ii.355; pp. samphuṭṭha. Samphusanā
Samphusanā
(f.) [saŋ+phusanā] touch, contact Th 2, 367; Dhs 2, 71. Samphusitatta
Samphusitatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. samphusita] the state of having been brought into touch with Dhs 2, 71. Sambaddha
Sambaddha
[saŋ+baddha] bound together Sdhp 81. Sambandha
Sambandha
[saŋ+bandha] connection, tie D ii.296 = M i.58; SnA 108, 166, 249, 273, 343, 516. ˚ -- kula related family J iii.362; a -- sambandha (adj.) incompatible (C. on asaññuta J iii.266). Sambandhati
Sambandhati
[saŋ+bandhati] to bind together, to unite Vin ii.116; pass. sambajjhati is united, attached to J iii.7; ger. sambandhitvā Vin i.274; ii.116. -- pp. sambaddha. Sambandhana
Sambandhana
(nt.) [saŋ+bandhana] binding together, connection J i.328. Sambarimāyā
Sambarimāyā
(f.) [sambarī+māyā] the art of Sambari, jugglery S i.239 (trsln "Sambara's magic art"). Sambara is a king of the Asuras. Sambala
Sambala
(nt.) [cp. *Sk. śambala] provision S ii.98; J v.71, 240; vi.531. Sambahula
Sambahula
(adj.) [saŋ+bahula] many Vin i.32; D i.2; J i.126, 329; Sn 19; sambahulaŋ karoti to take a plurality vote J ii.45. Sambahulatā
Sambahulatā
(f.) [fr. sambahula] a plurality vote J ii.45. Sambahulika
Sambahulika
(adj.) in ˚ŋ karoti = sambahulaŋ karoti J ii.197. Sambādha
Sambādha
[cp. Sk. sambādha] 1. crowding, pressure, in- convenience from crowding, obstruction Vism 119. janasambādharahita free from crowding Miln 409; kiṭṭhasambādha crowding of corn, the time when the corn is growing thick M i.115; J i.143, 388. -- yassa sambādho bhavissati he who finds it too crowded Vin iv.43; asambādha unobstructed Sn 150; atisambādhatā (q. v.) the state of being too narrow J i.7; puttadārasambādhasayana a bed encumbered with child and wife Miln 243; cp. S i.78; (in fig. sense) difficulty, trouble S i.7, 48; J iv.488; sambādhapaṭipanna of the eclipsed moon S i.50. As adjective "crowded, dense" sambādho gharavāso life in the family is confined, i. e. a narrow life, full of hindrances D i.63, 250; S ii.219; v.350; DA i.180; s. magga a crowded path J i.104; nijana˚ vana Vism 342; s. vyūha S v.369. -- atisambādha too confined DhA i.310 (cakkavāḷa). -- compar. sambādhatara S v.350; asambādhaŋ comfortably J i.80. -> 2. pudendum masculinum Vin i.216; ii.134; pudendum muliebre Vin iv.259; Sn 609; sambādhaṭṭhāna (nt.) pudendum muliebre J i.61; iv.260. Sambādheti
Sambādheti
[saŋ+bādheti] to be crowded D ii.269 (read ˚bādhāyanti). Sambāhati
Sambāhati
[saŋ+bāhati; Kern, Toev. s. v. disputes rela- tion to vah, but connects it with bāh "press"] 1. to rub, shampoo J i.293; ii.16; iv.431; v.126; also sambāheti Miln 241; Caus. sambāhāpeti to cause to shampoo Vin iv.342; ppr. sambāhanta J vi.77; aor. sambāhi J i.293 Cp. pari˚. Sambāhana
Sambāhana
(nt.) [fr. last] rubbing, shampooing D i.7 (as a kind of exercise for wrestlers DA i.88); A i.62; iv.54; Miln 241; J i.286. Sambuka
Sambuka
[cp. Sk. śambuka] a shell D i.84 = A i.9; iii.395 (sippi˚); J ii.100. Sambujjhati
Sambujjhati
[saŋ+bujjhati] to understand, achieve, know DhsA 218; inf. sambuddhuŋ Sn 765 (v. l. sambuddhaŋ); Caus. sambodheti to teach, instruct J i.142. Cp. sammā˚. Sambuddha
Sambuddha
[saŋ+buddha] 1. well understood Sn 765 (various reading, sambuddhuŋ = to know); J v.77 (sam˚ & a˚, taken by C. as ppr. "jānanto" & "ajānanto"); susambuddha easily understood Sn 764. -- 2. one who has thoroughly understood, being enlightened, a Buddha Sn 178 etc., 559; A ii.4; Dh 181; S i.4; It 35 etc. Sambuddhi
Sambuddhi
(f.) [saŋ+buddhi] complete understanding; adj. ˚vant wise J iii.361 ( = buddhisampanna). Sambojjhanga
Sambojjhanga
[saŋ+bojjhanga] constituent of Sambodhi (enlightenment), of which there are seven: sati, selfpossession; dhammavicaya, investigation of doctrine; viriya, energy; pīti, joy; passaddhi, tranquillity; samādhi, concentration; upekhā, equanimity D ii.79, 303 sq.; iii.106, 226; M i.61 sq.; A iv.23; S v.110 sq.; Nd2 s. v. Miln 340; VbhA 135, 310. The characteristics of the several constitutents together with var. means of cultivation are given at Vism 132 sq. = VbhA 275 sq. Sambodha
Sambodha
[saŋ+bodha] enlightenment, highest wisdom, awakening; the insight belonging to the three higher stages of the Path, Vin i.10; D iii.130 sq., 136 sq.; S ii.223; v.214; M i.16, 241; A i.258; ii.200, 240 sq., 325 sq.; v.238 sq.; It 27; pubbe sambodhā, before attaining insight M i.17, 163; ii.211; iii.157; S ii.5, 10; iv.6, 8, 97, 233; v.281; A i.258; iii.82, 240. abhabba sambodhāya, incapable of insight M i.200, 241 = A ii 200. (Cp. Dial. i.190 -- 192.)

-- gāmin leading to enlightenment D iii.264; Sn p. 140. -- pakkhika belonging to enlightenment A iv.357. -- sukha the bliss of enlightenment A iv.341 sq. -- 694 -- Sambodhana
Sambodhana
(nt.) [saŋ+bodhana] the vocative case VvA 12, 18. Sambodhi
Sambodhi
(f.) [saŋ+bodhi1] the same as sambodha, the highest enlightenment D i.156; ii.155; Dh 89 = S v.29; Sn 478; S i.68, 181; A ii.14; It 28, 42, 117; SnA 73. See also sammā˚.

-- agga [˚yagga] the summit of enlightenment Sn 693; -- gāmin leading to enlightenment S v.234; -- patta having attained enlightenment, an Arahant Sn 503, 696; -- parāyana that which has enlightenment as its aim, proceeding towards enlightenment, frequently of the Sotāpanna D i.156 (discussed in Dialogues i.190 sq.); iii.131 sq.; A i.232; ii.80, 238; iii.211; iv.12, 405; S v.343, 346; DA i.313. -- sukha the bliss of enlightenment Kvu 209. Sambodhiyanga
Sambodhiyanga
the same as sambojjhanga A v.253 sq.; S v.24; cp. spelling sambodhi -- anga at Dh 89; DhA ii.162. Sambodheti
Sambodheti
see sambujjhati. Sambhagga
Sambhagga
[saŋ+bhagga] broken S i.123; M i.237. Cp. sampali˚. Sambhajati
Sambhajati
[saŋ+bhajati] to consort with, love, to be attached, devoted J iii.495; ppr. sambhajanto J iii.108; Pot. sambhajeyya ibid. (C. samāgaccheyya). -- pp. sambhatta. Sambhajanā
Sambhajanā
(f.) [saŋ+bhajanā] consorting with Dhs 1326; Pug 20. Sambhañjati
Sambhañjati
[saŋ+bhañjati] to split, break J v.32; Caus. sambhañjeti to break M i.237; S i.123; pass. aor. samabhajjisaŋ J v.70. -- pp. sambhagga. -- Cp. sampali˚. Sambhata
Sambhata
[saŋ+bhata] brought together, stored up; (nt.) store, provisions M i.116; D iii.190; A iii.38 = iv.266; S i.35; ii.185=It 17; J i.338; ThA 11. Sambhati
Sambhati
[śrambh, given as sambh at Dhtp 214 in meaning "vissāsa"] to subside, to be calmed; only in prep. combn paṭippassambhati (q. v.). Sambhatta
Sambhatta
[pp. of sambhajati] devoted, a friend J i.106, 221; Nd1 226 = Vism 25. -- yathāsambhattaŋ according to where each one's companions live D ii.98; S v.152. Sambhatti
Sambhatti
(f.) [saŋ+bhatti] joining, consorting with Dhs 1326; Pug 20. Sambhama
Sambhama
[saŋ+bhama, fr. bhram] confusion, excitement; ˚ -- patta overwhelmed with excitement J iv.433. Sambhamati
Sambhamati
[saŋ+bhamati] to revolve DhsA 307. Sambhava
Sambhava
[saŋ+bhava] 1. origin, birth, production D ii.107; S iii.86; A ii.10, 18; Sn 724, 741 etc.; Dh 161; J i.168; mātāpettikas˚ born from father and mother D i.34; DhsA 306; natthi sambhavaŋ has not arisen Sn 235. -- 2. semen virile J v.152; vi.160; Miln 124.

-- esin seeking birth M i.48; S ii.11; Sn 147. Sambhavati, sambhuṇāti & sambhoti
Sambhavati,
sambhuṇāti & sambhoti [saŋ+bhavati] 1. to be produced, to arise D i.45, 76; S i.135; iv.67; Sn 734; Dāvs v.6; Miln 210. -- 2. to be adequate, competent D ii.287; na s. is of no use or avail Miln 152. -- 3. to be present, to witness J i.56. -- 4. to be together with J ii.205 (C. on sambhaj -- ˚). -- Pres. ˚ -- bhuṇati or ˚ -- bhuṇāti (like abhi -- sam -- bhuṇā̆ti) in the sense of "to reach" or "to be able to," capable of Vin i.256 (˚ -- bhuṇāti); Sn 396 (part. a -- sambhuṇanto = asakkonto, C.); also sambhoti Sn 734, D ii.287; fut. sambhossāma Mhvs 5, 100. -- aor. sambhavi D i.96; 3rd pl. samabhavuŋ Dāvs v.6; ger. sambhuyya having come together with VvA 232. -- pp. sambhūta. -- Caus. sambhāveti (q. v.). Sambhavana
Sambhavana
(nt.) [fr. sambhavati] coming into existence Nett 28. Sambhāra
Sambhāra
[fr. saŋ+bhṛ] "what is carried together," viz. 1. accumulation, product, preparation; sambhāraseda bringing on sweating by artificial means Vin i.205. -- 2. materials, requisite ingredients (of food) Miln 258; J i.481; v.13, 506; J i.9; ii.18; iv.492; dabba˚ an effective requisite DhA i.321; ii.114; bodhis˚ the necessary conditions for obtaining enlightening J i.1; vimokkhas˚ ThA 214. -- 3. constituent part, element S iv.197; DhsA 306. -- 4. bringing together, collocation S i.135; Miln 28. Sambhāvana
Sambhāvana
(nt.) [fr. sambhāveti] supposition, assump- tion, the meaning of the particle sace Vin i.37219; cp. J ii.29; DhA ii.77. Sambhāvanā
Sambhāvanā
(f.) [fr. sambhāveti] honour, reverence, intention, confidence Mhvs 29, 55; DhsA 163 ( = okappanā); Sdhp 224. Sambhāvita
Sambhāvita
[pp. of sambhāveti] honoured, esteemed M i.110, 145; ThA 200; J iii.269 ( = bhaddaka); VbhA 109. Sambhāveti
Sambhāveti
[Caus. of sambhavati. The Dhtp (512) gives a special root sambhu in meaning "pāpuṇana"] 1. to undertake, achieve, to be intent on (acc.) Vin i.253; DhsA 163. -- 2. to reach, catch up to (acc.) Vin i.277; ii.300. -- 3. to produce, effect Miln 49. -- 4. to consider J iii.220. -- 5. to honour, esteem; grd. ˚bhāvanīya to be honoured or respected, honourable VvA 152; MA 156. -- pp. sambhāvita. Sambhāsā
Sambhāsā
(f.) [saŋ+bhāsā] conversation, talk; sukha -- ˚ J vi.296 (v. l.); mudu -- ˚ J ii.326 = iv.471=v.451. Sambhindati
Sambhindati
[saŋ+bhindati] to mix Vin i.111 (sīmāya sīmaŋ s. to mix a new boundary with an old one, i. e. to run on a boundary unduly); DA i.134 (udakena). -> pp. sambhinna. -- Cp. sambhejja. Sambhinna
Sambhinna
[pp. of sambhindati] 1. mixed, mixed up Vin i.210; ii.67, 68 (cp. Vin. Texts ii.431); J i.55; Sn 9, 319 (˚mariyāda -- bhāva confusing the dividing lines, indistinctness), 325 (id.). Said of a woman (i. e. of indistinct sexuality) Vin ii.271 = iii.129. -- 2. broken up (?), exhausted J i.503 (˚sarīra). -- asambhinna: 1. unmixed, unadulterated Vism 41 (˚khīra -- pāyāsa); J v.257 (˚khattiyavaŋsa); DhA ii.85 (id.). -- 2. (of the voice) unmixed, i. e. distinct, clear Miln 360. -- 3. name of a kind of ointment Vin iv.117. Sambhīta
Sambhīta
(adj.) [saŋ+bhīta] terrified Miln 339; a -- sam- bhīta, fearless Miln 105; J iv.92; v.34; vi.302. Sambhuñjati
Sambhuñjati
[saŋ+bhuñjati] 1. to eat together with Vin iv.137. -- 2. to associate with S i.162. Sambhuṇāti
Sambhuṇāti
see sambhavati. Sambhūta
Sambhūta
[pp. of sambhavati] arisen from, produced Sn 272 (atta˚ self -- ; cp. SnA 304; attabhāva -- pariyāye attani s.); S i.134. Sambhejja
Sambhejja
[grd. of sambhindati] belonging to the confluence of rivers (said of the water of the ocean), united S ii.135; v.461 (various reading sambhojja). Sambheda
Sambheda
[saŋ+bheda] mixing up, confusion, contamina- tion D iii.72; A i.51 = It 36; DA i.260 (jāti˚ mixing of caste); Vism 123 (of colours). Sambhoga
Sambhoga
[saŋ+bhoga] eating, living together with Vin i.97; ii.21; iv.137; A i.92; SnA 71; J iv.127; Sdhp 435. -- 695 -- Sambhoti
Sambhoti
see sambhavati. Samma
Samma1
[as to etym. Andersen, P. Reader ii.263 quite plausibly connects it with Vedic śam (indecl.) "hail," which is often used in a vocative sense, esp. in combn śam ca yos ca "hail & blessing!", but also suggests relation to sammā. Other suggestions see Andersen, s. v.] a term of familiar address D i.49, 225; DA i.151; Vin ii.161; J i.59; PvA 204; plur. sammā Vin ii.161. Samma
Samma2
[samyak] see sammā. Samma
Samma3
a cymbal Miln 60; Dhs 621; J i.3; DhsA 319. - Otherwise as ˚tāḷa a kind of cymbal Th 1, 893, 911; Vv 353; VvA 161; J vi.60; 277 ( -- l -- ). Sammakkhana
Sammakkhana
(nt.) [saŋ+makkhana] smearing Vism 346. Sammakkhita
Sammakkhita
[saŋ+makkhita] smeared J v.16; abstr. ˚tta (nt.) Vism 346. Sammakkheti
Sammakkheti
[saŋ+makkheti] to smear Vism 346. Sammaggata
Sammaggata
see under sammā˚. Sammajjati
Sammajjati
[saŋ+majjati2] 1. to sweep Vin i.46; ii.209; J ii.25; DhA i.58; ii.184; iii.168. -- 2. to rub, polish J i.338. -- pp. sammaṭṭha. -- Caus. II. sammajjāpeti Vin i.240. Sammajjana
Sammajjana
(adj. -- nt.) [fr. last] sweeping J i.67; SnA 66 (˚ka); VvA 319 (T. sammajja). Sammajjanī
Sammajjanī
(f.) [fr. last] a broom Vin ii.129; A iv.170; Vism 105; DhA iii.7; cp. sammujjanī. Sammaññati
Sammaññati
see sammannati. Sammaṭṭha
Sammaṭṭha
[pp. of sammajjati] swept, cleaned, polished, smooth Vin iii.119 (su˚); J i.10; iii.395 (smooth). Spelt ˚maṭṭa at Miln 15. Sammata
Sammata
[pp. of sammannati] 1. considered as M i.39; S ii.15; iv.127; D iii.89 (dhamma˚); Vin iv.161, 295. -- 2. honoured, revered M ii.213; J i.49; v.79; sādhusammata considered, revered, as good D i.47; S iv.398. -- 3. authorized, selected, agreed upon D iii.93 (mahājana˚) Vin i.111; iii.150. Sammati
Sammati1
[śam; Dhtp 436 = upasama] 1. to be appeased, calmed; to cease Dh 5; Pot 3rd pl. sammeyyuŋ S i.24. -- 2. to rest, to dwell D i.92; S i.226; J v.396; DA i.262 (=vasati); pp. santa. -- Caus. sāmeti to appease, suppress, stop, A ii.24; It 82, 83, 117, 183; Dh 265. Sammati
Sammati2
[śram; Vedic śrāmyati Dhtp 220 = parissama, 436=kheda] to be weary or fatigued. Sammati
Sammati3
[śam to labour; pres. śamyati; pp. Vedic śamita] to work; to be satisfactory Vin ii.119 (parissāvanaŋ na s.), 278 (navakammaŋ etc. na s.). Sammatta
Sammatta1
[saŋ+matta2] intoxicated, maddened, delighted D ii.266; Dh 287; J iii.188; doting on J v.443; rogasammatta tormented by illness J v.90 ( = ˚pīḷita C.; v. l. ˚patta, as under matta2). Sammatta
Sammatta2
(nt.) [abstr. fr. sammā] correctness, righteousness A i.121; iii.441; Pug 13; Dhs 1029; Nett 44; 96, 112; Kvu 609; DhsA 45; KvA 141; ˚kārin, attained to proficiency in Miln 191; sammatta -- kāritā ibid. -- The 8 sammattā are the 8 angas of the ariya -- magga (see magga 2 a) D iii.255; the 10 are the above with the addition of sammā -- ñāṇa and ˚vimutti A v.240. Sammad˚
Sammad˚
see sammā. Sammada
Sammada
[saŋ+mada] drowsiness after a meal D ii.195; A i.3; v.83; J ii.63; bhatta -- ˚ S i.7; J vi.57. Sammaddati
Sammaddati
[saŋ+maddati] to trample down Vin i.137; 286 (cīvaraŋ, to soak, steep); ppr. sammaddanto Vin i.137 (to crush). Sammanteti
Sammanteti
[saŋ+manteti] to consult together D i.142; J i.269, 399; DA i.135. Sammannati
Sammannati
[saŋ+man, fr. Vedic manute, manvate, for the usual manyate: see maññati] 1. to assent, to consent to Mhvs 3, 10; DA i.11. -- 2. to agree to, to authorize, select Vin iii.150, 158, 238; iv.50; Mhvs 3, 9; sīmaŋ s. to determine, to fix the boundary Vin i.106 sq. -- 3. to esteem, honour; inf. sammannituŋ Vin iv.50. sammannesi D i.105 is misprint for samannesi. -- ppr. sammata. Sammasati
Sammasati
[saŋ+masati] to touch, seize, grasp, know thoroughly, master S ii.107; Dh 374; Miln 325; to think, meditate on (acc.) J vi.379; ppr. sammasaŋ ii.107 & sammasanto Miln 379; J i.74, 75; fem. sammasantī ThA 62; sammasamāna Miln 219, 325, 398; pp. sammasita. Sammasana
Sammasana
[(nt.) fr. last] grasping, mastering Miln 178; Vism 287, 629 sq.; cp. Cpd. 65, 210. Sammasita
Sammasita
[pp. of sammasati] grasped, understood, mastered J i.78. Sammasitar
Sammasitar
one who grasps, sees clearly Sn 69. Sammā
Sammā1
[cp. Sk. śamyā] a pin of the yoke Abhp 449; a kind of sacrificial instrument SnA 321 (sammaŋ ettha pāsantī ti sammāpāso; and sātrā -- yāgass' etaŋ adhivacanaŋ). Cp. Weber Indische Streifen i.36, and sammāpāsa, below. Sammā
Sammā2
(indecl.) [Vedic samyac ( = samyak) & samīś "connected, in one"; see under saŋ˚] thoroughly, properly, rightly; in the right way, as it ought to be, best, perfectly (opp. micchā) D i.12; Vin i.12; Sn 359; 947; Dh 89, 373. Usually as ˚ -- , like sammā -- dhārā even or proper showers (i. e. at the right time) Pv ii.970; especially in connection with constituents of the eightfold Aryan Path, where it is contrasted with micchā; see magga 2 a. (e. g. VbhA 114 sq., 121, 320 sq.). -> The form sammā is reduced to samma˚ before short vowels (with the insertion of a sandhi -- d -- , cp. puna -- deva), like samma -- d -- eva properly, in harmony or completeness D i.110; Vin i.9: PvA 139, 157; samma -- daññā & ˚akkhāta (see below); and before double consonants arisen from assimilation, like sammag -- gata (=samyak+gata). The cpds. we shall divide into two groups, viz. (A) cpds. with samma˚, (B) with sammā˚.

A. -- akkhāta well preached Dh 86. -- aññā perfect knowledge Vin i.183; S i.4; iv.128; Dh 57 (˚vimutta, cp. DhA i.434); It 38, 79, 93, 95, 108. -- attha a proper or good thing or cause J vi.16. -- ddasa having right views A ii.18; S iv.205, 207; Sn 733; It 47, 61, 81; Kvu 339. -- ggata [cp. BSk. samyaggata Divy 399] who has wandered rightly, perfect M i.66; who has attained the highest point, an Arahant D i.55; S i.76; A i.269; iv.226; v.265; J iii.305; It 87; Ap 218. Also sammāgata Vin ii.20317. -- ppajāna having right knowledge Dh 20; It 115. -- ppaññā right knowledge, true wisdom Vin i.14; Dh 57, 190; Sn 143; It 17; Miln 39. -- ppadhāna [cp. BSk. samyakprahāna Divy 208] right exertion Vin i.22; Dhs 358; Dpvs 18, 5; they are four D ii.120; M iii.296; explained M ii.11 (anuppannānaŋ pāpakānaŋ akusalānaŋ dhammānaŋ anuppādāya; uppannānaŋ pahānāya; anuppannānaŋ kusalānaŋ dhammānaŋ uppādāya; uppannānaŋ ṭhitiyā).

B. -- ājīva right living, right means of livelihood, right occupation Vin i.10; S v.421, etc.; formula D ii.312; (adj.) living in the right way M i.42; A ii.89. -- kammanta right conduct, right behaviour Vin i.10; S v.421 etc.; definition D ii.312; Dhs 300; adj. behaving in the right way M i.42; A ii.89. -- ñāṇa right knowledge, enlightenment, results from right concentration D ii.217; A i.292; adj. M i.42. -- ñāṇin possessing the right insight A ii.89, 222. -- dassana right views Vism 605. -- diṭṭhi right views, right belief, the first stage of the noble eightfold path, consists in the knowledge of the four truths D ii.311; its essence is knowledge Dhs 20, 297, 317; cp. Vism 509; comprises the knowledge of the absence of all permanent Being and the reality of universal conditioned Becoming S ii.17; iii.135; and of the impermanence of the 5 Khandhas S iii.51 = iv.142; and of Sīla, of causation and of the destruction of the Āsavas M i.46 -- 55; how obtained M i.294; two degrees of M iii.72; supremely important A i.30 -- 2 292 sq.; (adj.) Miln i.47. -- diṭṭhika having the right belief D i.139; A ii.89; 220 sq.; iii.115, 138; iv.290; v.124 sq.; S iv.322. -- dvayatānupassin duly considering both -- i. e. misery with its origin, the destruction of misery with the path, respectively Sn p. 140. -- dhārā a heavy shower S v.379. -- paṭipatti right mental disposition A i.69; Nett 27; Miln 97; sammāpaṭipadā Pug 49 sq.; DhA iv.127; sammāpaṭipanna rightly disposed, having the right view D i.8, 55; Pug 49 sq. -- passaŋ viewing the matter in the right way S iii.51; iv.142. -- pāsa [Sk. śamyāprāsa, but BSk. śamyaprāśa Divy 634] a kind of sacrifice Sn 303; A ii.42; iv.151; S i.76; It 21; J iv.302; SnA 321. Cp. sammā1. -- manasikāra right, careful, thought D i.13; DA i.104. -- vattanā strict, proper, conduct Vin i.46, 50; ii.5. -- vācā right speech Vin i.10; DA i.314; definition D ii.312; Dhs 299; (adj.) speaking properly M i.42; A ii.89. -- vāyāma right effort Vin i.10; Dhs 13, 22, 302; definition D ii.312; adj. M i.42; A ii.89. -- vimutta right emancipation A i.292; ˚vimutti the same D ii.217; A ii.196, 222; (adj.) M i.42; A ii.89. -- sankappa right resolve, right intention Dh 12; Vin i.10; Dhs 21, 298; definition D ii.312; (adj.) M i.42; A ii.89. -- sati right memory, right mindfulness, self -- possession Vin i.10; Dhs 23, 303; definition D ii.313; (adj.) M i.42; A ii.89. -- samādhi right concentration, the last stage of the noble eightfold path Vin i.10; Dhs 24, 304; definition D ii.313; adj. M i.12; A ii.89. -- sampassaŋ having the right view S iv.142. -- sambuddha perfectly enlightened, a universal Buddha Vin i.5; D i.49; Dh 187; J i.44; DhA i.445; iii.241; VbhA 436, etc. -- sambodhi perfect enlightenment, supreme Buddhaship Vin i.11; D ii.83; S i.68, etc. -- 696 -- Sammāna
Sammāna
(nt.) [fr. saŋ+man] honour J i.182; vi.390; Sdhp 355. Sammānanā
Sammānanā
(f.) [saŋ+mānanā] honouring, veneration D iii.190; Miln 162, 375, 386. Sammiñjati
Sammiñjati
(& ˚eti) [saŋ+iñjati, see also samiñjati; cp. BSk. sammiñjayati Divy 473. See also Leumann, Album Kern, p. 393] to bend back, to double up (opp. pasārati or sampasāreti) Vin i.5; M i.57, 168; D i.70; J i.321; Vism 365 (v. l. samiñjeti); DA i.196. -- pp. sammiñjita. Sammiñjana
Sammiñjana
(nt.) [fr. sammiñjati] bending DA i.196 (opp. pasāraṇa); VbhA 358. Sammiñjita
Sammiñjita
[pp. of sammiñjati] bent back M i.326 (spelt samiñjita); A ii.104, 106 sq., 210. Sammita
Sammita
[saŋ+mita] measured, i. e. just so much, no more or less; ˚ -- bhānin Th 1, 209. Sammilāta
Sammilāta
[saŋ+milāta] withered, shrunk M i.80. Sammillabhāsinī
Sammillabhāsinī
(f.) [saŋ+milla = mihita,+bhāsin] speaking with smiles J iv.24; name of a girl in Benares J iii.93 sq. Sammissatā
Sammissatā
(f.) [fr. saŋ+missa] the state of being mixed, confusion DhsA 311. Sammukha
Sammukha
(adj.) [saŋ+mukha] face to face with, in presence; sammukhaciṇṇa a deed done in a person's presence J iii.27; sammukhā (abl.) 1. face to face, before, from before D ii.155; Sn p. 79; J i.115; iii.89 (opp. parokkhā); with acc. Bu ii.73 = J i.17; with gen. D i.222; ii.220; M i.146. -- 2. in a full assembly of qualified persons Vin ii.3; loc. sammukhe D ii.206; J v.461. In composition sammukha˚, sammukhā˚ & sammukhī˚ (before bhū): ˚bhāva (˚a˚) presence, confrontation Miln 126; (˚ī˚) being face to face with, coming into one's presence D i.103; M i.438; A i.150; ˚bhūta (˚ī˚) being face to face with, confronted D ii.155; S iv.94; Vin ii.73; A iii.404 sq.; v.226; one who has realized the saŋyojanas Kvu 483; ˚vinaya (˚ā˚) proceeding in presence, requiring the presence of a chapter of priests and of the party accused Vin ii.74, 93 sq.; iv.207; A i.99; DhsA 144. See also yebhuyyasikā. Sammukhatā
Sammukhatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. sammukha] presence, con- frontation Vin ii.93 (sangha˚). Sammucchita
Sammucchita
see samucchita. Sammujjanī
Sammujjanī
(f.) [ = sammajjanī] a broom J i.161; sam- muñjanī the same Miln 2. Sammuṭṭha
Sammuṭṭha
[saŋ+muṭṭha] confused M i.21; S iv.125; v.331; one who has forgotten Vin iv.45 ( = na ssarati); iii.16513; ˚ssati id. A i.280. Sammuti
Sammuti
(f.) [fr. saŋ+man] 1. consent, permission Vin iii.199. -- 2. choice, selection, delegation Vin iii.159. -> 3. fixing, determination (of boundary) Vin i.106. -> 4. common consent, general opinion, convention, that which is generally accepted; as ˚ -- conventional, e. g. ˚sacca conventional truth (as opposed to paramattha˚ the absolute truth) Miln 160; ˚ñāṇa common knowledge D iii.226; ˚deva what is called a deva J i.132; DA i.174; see under deva; ˚maraṇa what is commonly called "death" Vism 229. -- sammuccā (instr.) by convention or common consent Sn 648 (v. l. sammacca = ger. of sammannati). -- 5. opinion, doctrine Sn 897 (=dvāsaṭṭhī diṭṭhigatāni Nd1 308), 904, 911. -- 6. definition, declaration, statement Vin i.123 (ummattaka˚); A iv.347 (vādaka˚); VbhA 164 (bhuñjaka˚). -- 7. a popular expression, a mere name or word Miln 28. -> 8. tradition, lore; combd with suti at Miln 3. Sammudita
Sammudita
[pp. of sammodati] delighted, delighting in Vin i.4; M i.503; S iv.390. Sammuyhati
Sammuyhati
[saŋ+muyhati] to be bewildered, infatuated, muddle -- headed J iv.385; Miln 42. -- pp. sammūḷha D ii.85; M i.250; A i.165; Sn 583; Caus. sammoheti to befool Miln 224. Sammuyhana
Sammuyhana
(nt.) [saŋ+muyhana] bewilderment DA i.193 Sammusā
Sammusā
M ii.202, read sammuccā (from sammuti). Sammussanatā
Sammussanatā
(f.) [fr. saŋ+mussati] forgetfulness Dhs 14 1349; Pug 21. Sammūḷha
Sammūḷha
[saŋ+mūḷha] infatuated, bewildered D ii.85; M i.250; A i.165; Sn 583; J v.294; Tikp 366. Sammegha
Sammegha
[saŋ+megha] rainy or cloudy weather J vi.51, 52. Sammoda
Sammoda
[fr. saŋ+mud] odour, fragrance; ekagandha˚, filled with fragrance J vi.9. Sammodaka
Sammodaka
(adj.) [fr. sammodati] polite D i.116; DA i.287; a -- sammodaka (f. ˚ -- ikā) Vin i.34116. Sammodati
Sammodati
[saŋ+modati] 1. to rejoice, delight; pp. sam- mudita (q. v.). -- 2. to agree with, to exchange friendly greeting with; aor. sammodi Vin i.2; D i.52; Sn 419; J vi.224; ppr. sammodamāna in agreement, on friendly terms J i.209; ii.6; ger. sammoditvā J ii.107; grd. sammodanīya [cp. BSk. sammodanī saŋrañjanī kathā Divy 70, 156 & passim] pleasant, friendly A v.193; cp. Sn 419; Vin i.2; D i.52. -- sammodita at VvA 186 read samodita. -- 697 -- Sammodana
Sammodana
(nt.) [saŋ+modana] satisfaction, compli- ment; ˚ŋ karoti to exchange politeness, to welcome VvA 141, 259. Sammosa
Sammosa
[for *sam -- mṛṣa, of mṛṣ: see mussati. sammosa after moha & musā>mosa] bewilderment, confusion D i.19; A i.58; ii.147; S ii.224; iv.190; Vin ii.114; Miln 266, 289; Vism 63 (sati˚ lapse of memory). Sammoha
Sammoha
[saŋ+moha] bewilderment, infatuation, delu- sion M i.86, 136; Vin i.183; Nd1 193; A ii.174; iii.54 sq., 416; S i.24; iv.206; Dhs 390. Sammoheti
Sammoheti
see sammuyhati. Saya = saka
Saya
= saka (?) one's own J vi.414 (=saka -- raṭṭha C.). Sayaŋ
Sayaŋ
(adv.) [see etym. under sa4] self, by oneself Vin i.8; D i.12; DA i.175; Sn 57, 320, etc.; p. 57, 100, etc.; Mhvs 7, 63 (for f.). Also with ref. to several people, e. g. DhA i.13.

-- kata made by itself, spontaneous D iii.137 (loka); S ii.19 sq. (dukkha); Ud 69 sq. -- jāta born from oneself, sprung up spontaneously J i.325; ii.129. -- pabha radiating light from oneself, a kind of devas D i.17; iii.28 sq., 84 sq.; Sn 404; DA i.110 -- bhū self -- dependent, an epithet of a Buddha Bu xiv.1 = J i.39; Miln 214, 227, 236; Vism 234; SnA 106 (f. abstr. sayambhutā), 135. -- vara self -- choice J v.426. -- vasin self -- controlled, independent Bu ii.20= J i.5; Dāvs i.22. Sayatatta
Sayatatta
at S i.14 read saŋyatatta. Sayati
Sayati1
[śī] to lie down: see seti. Caus. II. sayāpeti ibid. Sayati
Sayati2
[śri which is given in meaning sevā at Dhtp 289] to lean on; to be supported etc.: only in pp. sita, and in prep. cpd. nissayati. Sayathā
Sayathā
(adv.) [cp. Sk. sayathā or tadyathā; see sa2. The usual P. form is seyyathā] like, as Th 1, 412. Sayana
Sayana
(nt.) [fr. śī] 1. lying down, sleeping Vism 26; PvA 80 (mañca˚). -- 2. bed, couch Vin i.57, 72; ii.123; D i.5, 7; A i.132; J ii.88; v.110 (˚ŋ attharāpeti to spread out a bed); Miln 243, 348; Nd1 372 (˚sannidhi); Pv i.117 (kis˚ = kiŋ˚); PvA 78. -- sayanakalaha a quarrel in the bedroom, a curtain -- lecture J iii.20; sayanāsana bed & seat It 112; Dh 185, etc.: see senāsana. Sayanighara
Sayanighara
(nt.) a sleeping -- room Vin i.140 sq.; iv.160; J i.433; iii.275, 276. Sayāna
Sayāna
is ppr. of sayati lying down (e. g. A ii.13 sq.): see seti. Sayāpita
Sayāpita
[pp. of sayāpeti] made to lie down VbhA 11. Sayita
Sayita
[pp. of seti] lying down J i.338; v.438. sukha˚ lying in a good position, sleeping well, well -- embedded (of seeds) A iii.404 = D ii.354; Miln 255. sukha -- sayitabhāva "having had a good sleep," being well J v.127. Sayha
Sayha
see sahati. Sara
Sara1
[cp. Vedic śara] 1. the reed Saccharum sara Miln 342. -- 2. an arrow (orig. made of that reed) D i.9; Dh 304; Miln 396; DhA 216 (visa -- pīta).

-- tuṇḍa a beak as sharp as an arrow DhA iii.32. -- daṇḍaka shaft of an arrow DhA ii.141. -- bhanga arrow -- breaking Vism 411 (in comp.). Sara
Sara2
(adj. -- n.) [fr. sarati1 1. going, moving, following Sn 3, 901 -- 2. fluid, flow J i.359 (pūti˚). Sara
Sara2
(m. -- nt.) [Vedic saras] a lake J i.221; ii.10; vi.518 (Mucalinda); there are seven great lakes (mahā -- sarā, viz. Anotatta, Sīhapapāta, Rathakāra, Kaṇṇamuṇḍa, Kuṇāla, Chaddanta, Mandākini) A iv.101; D i.54; J ii.92; DA i.164, 283; aṇṇava˚ the ocean D ii.89; cp. A ii.55; loc. sare J ii.80; sarasmiŋ Sn 1092; & sarasi Mhvs 10, 7; jātassara a natural lake J i.472 sq. Sara
Sara4
(adj.) [fr. sarati2] remembering M i.453; A ii.21; DA i.106. ˚sankappa mindfulness and aspiration M i.453; iii.132; S iv.76, 137, 190; Nett 16. Sara
Sara5
[Vedic svara, svar, cp. Lat. su -- surrus, Ger. surren] sound, voice, intonation, accent Vin ii.108; D ii.24 sq.; A i.227; Pv ii.124 (of birds' singing = abhiruda C.); J ii.109; Sn 610 (+vaṇṇa, which is doubtful here, whether "complexion" or "speech," preferably the former); DhsA 17; eight qualities D ii.211, 227; gītāssara song Vin ii.108; bindussara a sweet voice Sn 350; adj. J ii.439; sīhassara with a voice like a lion's J v.296, 311 (said of a prince). Cp. vissara. -- In combn with vaṇṇa (vowel) at A iv.307; Miln 340.

-- kutti [ = kḷpti; can we compare BSk. svaragupti "depth of voice" Divy 222?] intonation, resonance, timbre, melodiousness of voice Vin ii.108=A iii.251; J vi.293 (Kern, "enamoured behaviour" [?]); DhsA 16. Cp. Vin. Texts iii.72. -- bhañña intoning, a particular mode of reciting Vin i.196; ii.108, 316; J ii.109; DhA i.154. -- bhāṇa=˚bhañña DhA ii.95 (v. l. ˚bhañña). -- bhāṇaka an intoner, one who intones or recites the sacred texts in the Sarabhañña manner Vin ii.300. -- sara an imitative word; sarasaraŋ karoti to make the noise sarasara M i.128. Saraŋsā
Saraŋsā
(f.) [fr. sa3+raŋsi] the sun (lit. having rays) Mhvs 18, 68. Saraka
Saraka
a vessel, a drinking vessel J i.157, 266; iv.384; DA i.134, 136; Mhvs 32, 32; DhA ii.85; iii.7. Saraja
Saraja
(adj.) [sa+rajo] dusty Vin i.48; A ii.54. Saraṇa
Saraṇa1
(nt.) [cp. Vedic śaraṇa protection, shelter, house, śarman id.; śālā hall; to Idj. *kel to hide, as in Lat. celo, Gr. kalu/ptw to conceal, Oir. celim, Ohg. Ags. helan, Goth. huljan to envelop; Ohg. hella = E. hell; also E. hall, and others] shelter, house Sn 591; refuge, protection D iii.187; Sn 503; J ii.28; DA i.229; especially the three refuges -- the Buddha, the Dhamma, and the Brotherhood -- A i.56; D i.145; J i.28; usually combined with verbs like upeti Vv 532; Sn 31; gacchati D i.116; A iii.242; Vin i.4; Dh 190; Sn p. 15, 25; It 63; or yāti Sn 179; Dh 188; asaraṇa, asaraṇībhūta without help and refuge Miln 148. See leṇa 2.

-- āgamana = ˚gamana D i.146; SnA 42, 157. -- gamana (nt.) taking refuge in the three Saraṇas Vin iii.24; S iv.270. Saraṇa
Saraṇa2
(adj.) [sa+raṇa] concomitant with war Dhs 1294; DhsA 50. Saraṇa
Saraṇa3
[fr. smṛ; i. e. sarati2] (nt.) remembrance; -- tā (f.) remembering Dhs 14, 23; Pug 21, 25. Saraṇīya
Saraṇīya
(nt.) [grd. formation fr. saraṇa2] something to be remembered A i.106. Sarati
Sarati1
[sṛ given by Dhtp 248 as "gati"] to go, flow, run, move along J iii.95 ( = parihāyati nassati C.); Pot. sare J iv.284. -- aor. asarā J vi.199. -- pp. sarita1. -- Caus. sāreti (1) to make go A i.141; iii.28=M i.124=S iv.176 J iv.99; Miln 378; Vism 207. -- (2) to rub, to mix Vin ii.116. Also sarāpeti. A Desid. formn is siŋsare (3rd pl. med.) at Vv 647 (=Sk. sisīrṣati), cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 184. Sarati
Sarati2
[smṛ, cp. smṛti = sati; Dhtp 248 "cintā"; Lat memor, memoria=memory; Gr. me/rimna care, ma/rtu witness, martyr; Goth. maúrnan=E. mourn to care, etc.] to remember D ii.234; Vin i.28; ii.79; J ii.29. A diaeretic form is sumarati Dh 324; ger. sumariya Mhvs 4, 65. -- 1st pl. saremhase Th 2, 383; med. sare J vi.227; imper. sara Th 1, 445; & sarāhi Miln 79; 3rd sg. saratu Vin i.273. -- ppr. saraŋ Mhvs 3, 6; & saramāna Vin i.103. -- aor. sari J i.330; fut. sarissati J vi.496. -- ger. saritvā J i.214. -- pp. sata2 & sarita2. -- Caus. sāreti to remind Vin ii.3 sq., 276; iii.221; sārayamāna, reminding J i.50; ppr. pass. sāriyamāna Vin iii.221; w. acc. D ii.234; w. gen. Dh 324; J vi.496; with foll. fut. II. (in ˚tā) Vin ii.125, 4; iii.44, 9, etc. -- Caus. II. sarāpeti Vin iii.44; Miln 37 (with double acc.), 79. -- 698 -- Sarati
Sarati3
[śṛ; Dhtp 248: hiŋsā] to crush: see seyyati. Caus. sāreti Vin ii.116 (madhu -- sitthakena, to pound up, or mix with beeswax). Cp. saritaka. Sarada
Sarada
[Vedic śarad (f.) traces of the cons. decl. only in acc. pl. sarado sataŋ "100 autumns" J ii.16] autumn, the season following on the rains Sn 687; Vv 352. ˚ -- samaya the autumn season D ii.183; M i.115; A iv.102; v.22; It 20; S i.65; iii.141, 155; v.44; VvA 134, 161. Sarabha
Sarabha
[Vedic śarabha a sort of deer J iv.267; vi.537] (rohiccasarabhā migā = rohitā sarabhamigā, C. ibid. 538); Sarabhamigajātaka the 483rd Jātaka J i.193, 406 (text Sarabhanga); iv.263 sq.

-- pallanka "antelope -- couch," a high seat, from which the Bodhisat preaches J iii.342 (cp. vara -- pallanka J iii.364). -- pādaka having legs like those of a gazelle J i.267. Sarabhasaŋ
Sarabhasaŋ
(adv.) [sa2+rabhasaŋ] eagerly, quickly Dāvs iv.22, 34 sq., 43. Sarabhū
Sarabhū
(f.) [cp. Sk. saraṭa] a lizard Vin ii.110; A ii.73; J ii.135, 147; SnA 439. Sarala
Sarala
the tree Pinus longifolia J v.420 (thus read with B instead of salaḷa [?]). Saravant
Saravant
(adj.) [sara5+vant] 1. having or making a sound, well -- sounding Vin i.182; A iii.375. -- 2. with a noise Mhvs 25, 38. Sarasa
Sarasa
(adj.) [sa3+rasa] with its essential properties (see rasa) Nd1 43; sarasabhāva a method of exposition DhsA 71. Sarasī
Sarasī
(f.) [Vedic sarasī] a large pond Vin ii.201 = S ii.269; J v.46. Sarāga
Sarāga
(adj.) [sa3+rāga] connected with lust, passionate D i.79; ii.299; M i.59; Vism 410. Sarājaka
Sarājaka
(adj.) [sa3+rāja+ka] including the king J i.126; fem. -- ikā Vin ii.188; S i.162; J ii.113, 114 (sarājika at J iii.453); with the king's participation Tikp 26 (sassāmika -- sarājaka geha). Sarājita
Sarājita
denomination of a purgatory and its inhabitants S iv.309 sq. Various readings Parājita and Sarañjita. Sarāpana
Sarāpana
(nt.) [fr. sarāpeti Caus. of sarati2] causing somebody to remember Miln 79. Sarāva
Sarāva
[Sk. śarāva] a cup, saucer A i.161; J i.8; M iii.235 for patta); Miln 282; DA i.298; PvA 244, 251. Sarāvaka
Sarāvaka
= sarāva Vin i.203; ii.142, 153, 222. Sari
Sari
according to Payogasiddhi = sarisa (sadisa) cp. sarī- vaṇṇa J ii.439 (= samāna -- vaṇṇa, C.). Sarikkha
Sarikkha
(adj.) [cp. Sk. sadṛkṣa, fr. sadṛś = P. sadisa] like, resembling S i.66; J i.443; iii.262. Sarikkhaka
Sarikkhaka
(adj.) [ = sarikkha] in accordance with, like J iv.215; PvA 206, 284. See also kamma˚. Sarikkhatā
Sarikkhatā
(f.) [fr. sarikkha] resemblance, likeness J iii.241 (taŋ˚ being like that); VvA 6 (cp. kamma˚). Sarikkhatta
Sarikkhatta
(nt.) [fr. sarikkha] likeness DhsA 63; as sarikkhakatta (kamma˚) at DhsA 347. Sarita
Sarita1
[pp. of sarati1] gone, set into motion Dh 341 ( = anusaṭa, payāta DhA iv.49). Sarita
Sarita2
[pp. of sarati2] remembered Vin ii.85. Saritaka
Saritaka
(nt.) powdered stone (pāsāna -- cuṇṇa) Vin ii.116; saritasipāṭika powder mixed with gum Vin ii.116. Saritar
Saritar
[n. ag. fr. sarati2] one who remembers D iii.268, 286; A ii.35; S v.197, 225. Saritā
Saritā
(f.) [cp. Vedic sarit, fr. sarati1] a river Dhs 1059; saritaŋ acc. Sn 3; gen. pl. J ii.442; nom. pl. saritā Miln 125. Sarisa
Sarisa
(adj.) [ = sadisa] like, resembling J v.159. Sarisapa
Sarisapa
various reading of siriŋsapa M i.10 etc. Sarīra
Sarīra
(nt.) [Vedic śarīra] 1. the (physical) body D i.157; M i.157; S iv.286; A i.50; ii.41; iii.57 sq., 323 sq.; iv.190. Sn 478, 584; Dh 151; Nd1 181; J i.394 (six blemishes); ii.31; antimasarīra one who wears his last body, an Anāgāmin Sn 624; S i.210; Dh 400. -- 2. a dead body, a corpse D ii.141, 164; M iii.91. -- 3. the bones D ii.164. -- 4. relics Vv 63, 32; VvA 269.

-- aṭṭhaka the bony framework of the body DhsA 338. -- ābhā radiation of light proceeding from the body, lustre SnA 16 (˚ŋ muñcati to send forth), 41 (id.), 140 (id.). -- kicca (1) funeral ceremonies, obsequies J i.180; ii.5; VvA 76, 257; PvA 74, 76, 162. -- (2) "bodily function," satisfying the body's wants J ii.77; iv.37. -- davya ( = dabba1) fitness of body, good body, beauty J ii.137. -- dhātu a body relic (of the Buddha) Mhvs 13, 167; VvA 165, 269. -- pabhā lustre of the body DhA i.106. -- parikamma attending the body SnA 52. -- maŋsa the flesh of the body J iii.53. -- vaṇṇa the (outward) appearance of the body Vism 193. -- valañja discharge from the body, faeces DhA ii.55; iv.46 (˚ṭhāna). See valañja. -- sanghāta perfection of body Vism 194. -- saṇṭhāna constitution of the body, bodily form Vism 193. Sarīravant
Sarīravant
(adj.) [sarīra+vant] having a body S ii.279. Sarīvaṇṇa
Sarīvaṇṇa
resembling J ii.439 (v. l. sarīra˚). Cp. sari. Sarūpa
Sarūpa
(adj.) [sa2+rūpa] 1. of the same form A i.162; Pug 56. -- 2. [sa3+rūpa] having a body A i.83. Saroja
Saroja
(nt.) [Sk. saroja, saras+ja] "lake -- born," a lotus Dāvs iii.13. Sarojayoni
Sarojayoni
[fr. last] a Brahmā, an archangel Dāvs i.34. Saroruha
Saroruha
(nt.) [saras+ruha] a lotus Dāvs iii.83. Salakkhaṇa
Salakkhaṇa1
(adj.) [sa3+lakkhaṇa] together with the characteristics Sn 1018. Salakkhaṇa
Salakkhaṇa2
(nt.) [sa1+lakkhaṇa] own characteristic, that which is consistent with one's own nature Miln 205; Nett 20. Opp. vilakkhaṇa. Salana
Salana
(nt.) [fr. śal] moving, shaking VvA 169; DhsA 62 (in defn of kusala as "kucchitānaŋ salan'ādīhi atthehi kusalaŋ"). Salabha
Salabha
[cp. Sk. śalabha] a moth J v.401; Ud 72 (C.); VbhA 146. Salayati
Salayati
[Caus. of śal to leap] to shake DhsA 39. Salaḷa
Salaḷa
a kind of sweet -- scented tree J v.420; Bu ii.51 = J i.13; Vv 355; VvA 162; Miln 338; M ii.184. -- 699 -- Salākā
Salākā
(f.) [cp. Vedic śalākā] 1. an arrow, a dart A iv.107 (T. has it as nt.). -- 2. a small stick, peg, thin bar S iv.168; Dāvs iv.51. -- 3. blade of a grass M i.79; J i.439. -- 4. ribs of a parasol Vin iv.338; SnA 487; Miln 226. -- 5. a pencil, small stick (used in painting the eyes with collyrium) Vin i.204; J iii.419 (añjana˚). -> 6. a kind of needle Vin ii.116. -- 7. a kind of surgical instrument, a stick of caustic Miln 112, 149. -- 8. a gong stick (of bronze, loha˚) J ii.342; Vism 283. -- 9. membrum virile J ii.359. -- 10. a ticket consisting of slips of wood used in voting and distributing food, vote, lot Vin ii.99, 176, 306; J i.123; PvA 272 (kāḷakaṇṇi˚); salākaŋ gaṇhāti to take tickets (in order to vote or to be counted) Vin i.117; ii.199; paṭhaman salākaŋ gaṇhanto taking the first vote, first rate A i.24; salākaŋ gāheti to issue tickets, to take a vote Vin ii.205; salākaŋ dadāti to issue tickets J i.123; salākaŋ vāreti to throw lots J i.239 (kāḷakaṇṇi˚).

-- agga room for distributing food by tickets J i.123; Mhvs 15, 205. -- odhāniya a case for the ointment -- stick Vin i.204. -- gāha taking of votes, voting Vin ii.85, 98 sq. (3 kinds). -- gāhāpaka ticket -- issuer, taker of voting tickets Vin ii.84. -- bhatta food to be distributed by tickets Vin i.58, 96; ii.175; J i.123; DhA i.53 (eight kinds). -- vātapāna a window made with slips of wood Vin ii.148. -- vutta "subsisting on blades of grass" (or "by means of food tickets"?) Vin iii.6, 67; iv.23; A i.160; S iv.323. Cp. BSk. śalākāvṛtti Divy 131. -- hattha brush -- hand, a kind of play, where the hand is dipped in lac or dye and used as a brush (?) D i.65; DA i.85. Salāṭuka
Salāṭuka
(adj.) [cp. *Sk. śalāṭu] fresh, unripe S i.150 = Sn p. 125; Miln 334; VvA 288. Salābha
Salābha
[sa4+lābha] one's own advantage Dh 365. Salila
Salila
(nt.) [cp. Sk. salila, to sarati1] water Sn 62, 319, 672; J i.8; v.169; VvA 41; PvA 157; Nd2 665 ("vuccati udakaŋ"); Miln 132 (written saliḷa); Sdhp 168. It is also adj. salilaŋ āpo flowing water J vi.534; cp. Miln 114: na tā nadiyo dhuva -- salilā.

-- dhārā shower of water Miln 117. -- vuṭṭhi id. Vism 234. Salla
Salla
(nt.) [Vedic śalya, cp. śalākā] an arrow, dart M i.429 (˚ŋ āharati to remove the a); ii.216; S iv.206; J i.180; v.49; Sn 331, 767; Miln 112; Vism 503 (visa˚ sting of poison; cp. VbhA 104 sallaŋ viya vitujjati); often metaphorically of the piercing sting of craving, evil, sorrow etc., e. g. antodosa˚ Miln 323; taṇhā˚ S i.40, 192; bhava˚ Dh 351; rāga˚ DhA iii.404; PvA 230; soka˚ Sn 985; Pv i.86; KhA 153. Cp. also D ii.283; Sn 51, 334, 938; J i.155; iii.157; DhA iv.70. At Nd1 59 seven such stings are given with rāga˚, dosa˚, moha˚, māna˚, diṭṭhi˚, soka˚, kathankathā˚. -- abhūḷha˚ one whose sting of craving or attachment is pulled out D ii.283; Sn 593; J iii.390; Pv i.87 etc. (see abbūḷha). -> Cp. vi˚.

-- katta [*kartṛ cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 90, 4] "one who works on the (poisoned) arrow," i. e. a surgeon M i.429; ii.216; Sn 562; It 101; Miln 110, 169; Vism 136 (in simile); KhA 21 (id.). The Buddha is the best surgeon: Sn 560; Miln 215. -- kattiya surgery D i.12 (T. ˚ka); DA i.98. -- bandhana at Th 2, 347 take as salla+ bandhana "arrow & prison bond" (ThA 242 different). -- viddha pierced by an arrow Th 1, 967; Sn 331; cp. ruppati. -- santhana removal of the sting Dh 275 ( = nimmathana abbāhana DhA iii.404). Sallaka
Sallaka
[cp. *Sk. śalala & śallaka] a porcupine J v.489. Sallakī
Sallakī
(f.) [cp. Class. Sk. śallakī] the tree Boswellia thurifera (incense tree) J iv.92; pl. ˚ -- iyo J vi.535; bahu- kuṭaja -- sallakika Th 1, 115 ( = indasālarukkha [?]). Sallakkhaṇā
Sallakkhaṇā
(f.) [fr. sallakkheti] discernment, testing Dhs 16, 292, 555; Pug 25; Vism 278; VbhA 254; DhsA 147; asallakkaṇa non-discernment S iii.261. Sallakkhita
Sallakkhita
[pp. of sallakkheti] realized, thought DhA i.89. Sallakkheti
Sallakkheti
[saŋ+lakkheti] to observe, consider Vin i.48, 271; J i.123; ii.8; Vism 150; to examine J v.13; to bear in mind DhsA 110; J vi.566; to understand, realize, conclude, think over J iv.146; VvA 185; VbhA 53; asallakkhetvā without deliberation Vin ii.215; inadvertently J i.209. -- Caus. II. sallakkhāpeti to cause to be noted Mhvs 9, 24; DhsA 121; to persuade, bring to reason J vi.393. Sallapati
Sallapati
[saŋ+lapati] to talk (with) D i.90; ii.109; Miln 4; sallapeti the same Vin iv.14. Sallalīkata
Sallalīkata
pierced, perforated J i.180. Trenckner suggests that this form may have arisen from *sallakīkata (from sallaka, porcupine). Sallahuka
Sallahuka
(adj.) [saŋ+lahuka] light J i.277; ii.26; Vism 65; DhA iv.17; sallahukena nakkhattena on lucky nights J ii.278; sallahukavuttin whose wants are easily met, frugal Sn 144; DA i.207. Sallāpa
Sallāpa
[saŋ+lāpa] conversation D i.89; A ii.182; J i.112, 189; Miln 94. Often in cpd. kathā & allāpa˚. Sallitta
Sallitta
[saŋ+litta] smeared (with) Th 1, 1175 (mīḷha˚). Sallīna
Sallīna
[saŋ+līna] sluggish, cowering D ii.255; asallīna active, upright, unshaken D ii.157; S i.159; iv.125; Cp. v.68. paṭi˚. Sallīyanā
Sallīyanā
(f.) stolidity Dhs 1156, 1236. Sallekha
Sallekha
[fr. saŋ+likh] austere penance, the higher life M i.13, 40; Vin i.305; Ps i.102, 103; Pug 69 sq.; DA i.82; Vism 69; Miln 360, 380; adj. Vin i.45; sallekhitācāra practising austere penance Miln 230, 244, 348 sq.; ˚vutti Vin ii.197; Vism 65 (˚vuttitā). Cp. abhi˚. Sallekhatā
Sallekhatā
(f.) = sallekha D iii.115; Vism 53. Saḷāyatana
Saḷāyatana
(nt.) [ṣaḍ˚ for which ordinarily chal˚: see cha] the six organs of sense and the six objects -- viz., eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind; forms, sounds, odouis, tastes, tangible things, ideas; occupying the fourth place in the Paṭiccasamuppāda D ii.32; M i.52; A i.176; S ii.3; Vin i.1; Vism 529, 562 sq., 671; VbhA 174, 176 sq., 319. Sava
Sava
(adj.) [fr. sru, savati] dripping, flowing with ( -- ˚) Pv ii.911 (madhu˚, with honey). Savaka
Savaka
see ˚saŋ. Savanka
Savanka
a sort of fish J v.405. Cp. satavanka & sacca- vanka. Savacanīya
Savacanīya
[sa3+vacanīya] (the subject of a) conversation Vin ii.5, 22, 276. Savati
Savati
[sru; cp. Sk. srotas stream; Gr. r(eu_ma, r(e/w to flow; Ags. strēam = stream; Oir. sruth] to flow Sn 197, 1034; J vi.278; Dh 370. -- ppr. fr. savantī ThA 109. Savana
Savana1
(nt.) [fr. śru: see suṇāti] 1. the ear Sn 1120; Miln 258. -- 2. hearing D i.153, 179; A i.121; S i.24; Vin i.26; Sn 265, 345; Dh 182; J i.160, 250; Miln 257; Nd1 188. sussavanaŋ sāvesi she made me hear a good hearing, she taught me a good thing J i.61; savanaṭṭhāne within hearing J iv.378. dhamma˚ hearing the preaching of the Dhamma Vin i.101 etc. Savana
Savana2
(nt.) [fr. savati] flowing Dh 339; J iv.288; v.257; savana -- gandha of the body, having a tainted odour Th 2, 466. Savanīya
Savanīya
(adj.) [grd. of suṇāti] pleasant to hear D ii.211; J i.96 ( -- ṇ -- ); J vi.120 = 122 (savaneyya). -- 700 -- Savantī
Savantī
(f.) [cp. Vedic sravat, orig. ppr. of sru, sravati] a river Vin ii.238; Bu ii.86 = J i.18; J vi.485; Miln 319. Savara
Savara
[Epic Sk. śabara, cp. śabala = P. sabala] an ab- original tribe, a savage Vin i.168; Miln 191. Savasa
Savasa
[sa4+vasa] one's own will DhsA 61 (˚vattitā; cp. Expos. 81). Savighāta
Savighāta
(adj.) [sa3+vighāta] bringing vexation Th 2, 352; ThA 242. Savicāra
Savicāra
accompanied by investigation D i.37 etc., in the description of the first Jhāna. See vicāra. Savijjuka
Savijjuka
(adj.) [sa3+vijju+ka] accompanied by lightning D ii.262. Saviññāṇa
Saviññāṇa
possessed of consciousness, conscious, animate A i.83; -- ka the same A i.132; DhA i.6. -- See viññāṇaka. Savitakka
Savitakka
accompanied by reasoning D i.37 etc., in the formula of the first Jhāna. See vitakka. Savidha
Savidha
(adj.) [Sk. savidha] near; (nt.) neighbourhood Dāvs iv.32; v.9. Savibhattika
Savibhattika
(adj.) [sa3+vibhatti+ka] (able) to be clas- sified DhsA 134. Savupādāna = saupādāna
Savupādāna
= sa -- upādāna (A ii.163): see upādāna. Savera
Savera
(adj.) [sa3+vera] angry D i.247. Savyañjana
Savyañjana
(adj.) [sa3+vyañjana] with the letters Vin i.21; D i.62; DA i.176; Sn. p. 103; Vism 214. Savhaya
Savhaya
(adj.) [sa3+avhaya] called, named Dpvs 4, 7; Ap 109. Sasa
Sasa
[Vedic śaśa, with Ohg. haso = E. hare to Lat. canus grey, greyish -- brown; cp. Ags. hasu] a hare, rabbit Dh 342; J iv.85; of the hare in the moon J iv.84 sq.; sasôlūkā (=sasā ca ulūkā ca) J vi.564.

-- lakkhaṇa the sign of a hare J i.172; iii.55. -- lañjana id. VvA 314 (˚vant = sasin, the moon). -- visāṇa a hare's horn (an impossibility) J iii.477. Sasaka
Sasaka
= sasa J ii.26; iv.85; Cp i.101. Sasakkaŋ
Sasakkaŋ
[sa+sakkaŋ] as much as one can M i.415, 514 sq. Sasati
Sasati1
[śas. cp. Dhtp 301: gati -- hiŋsā -- pāṇanesu] to slay, slaughter; sassamāna ppr. pass. J v.24 (C. = hiŋsamāna). inf. sasituŋ J vi.291 (read sāsituŋ from sāsati?). pp. sattha. Sasati
Sasati2
[śvas] to breathe (cp. Dhtp 301: pāṇana): see vissasati. Sasattha
Sasattha
[sa3+sattha] with swords J iv.222; DhsA 62. Sasambhama
Sasambhama
(adj.) [sa+sambhama] with great confusion Mhvs 5, 139. Sasambhāra
Sasambhāra
(adj.) [sa3+sambhāra] with the ingredients or constituents Vism 20, 352, 353. Sasin
Sasin
[Sk. śaśin, fr. śaśa] the moon Dāvs iv.29; J iii.141; v.33; Vv 811 ( = canda VvA 314), 823. Sasīsa
Sasīsa
(adj.) [sa3+sīsa] together with the head; sasīsaŋ up to the head D i.76, 246; J i.298; sasīsaka head and all D ii.324; Sn, p. 80. Sasura
Sasura
[Vedic śvaśura, f. śvaśrū (see P. sassū), Idg. *sṷe- kuros, *sṷekrū; cp. Gr. e(kuro/s & e(kura/; Lat. socer & socrus; Goth. swaihra & swaíhrō, Ags. swēor & sweger; Ohg. swehur & swigar] father-in-law Vin iii.137; M i.168; A ii.78; VvA 69, 121; Th 2, 407 (sassura); J i.337; sassu -- sasurā mother -- and father-in-law J ii.347; iii.182; iv.38; vi.510; the form sassura Th 2, 407 has probably arisen through analogy with sassu. -- f. sasurī VvA 69. Sasenaka
Sasenaka
(adj.) [sa3+sena+ka] accompanied by an army Mhvs 19, 27. Sassa
Sassa
(nt.) [cp. Vedic sasya] corn, crop M i.116; J i.86, 143, 152; ii.135; Miln 2; DhA i.97; SnA 48; sassasamaya crop time J i.143; susassa abounding in corn Vin i.238; pl. m. sassā J i.340. ˚ -- kamma agriculture J vi.101; ˚ -- kāla harvest time Vin iv.264; ˚ -- ṭṭhāna = ˚ -- khetta J vi.297; dussassa (having) bad crops Vin i.238; A i.160; KhA 218 (=dubbhikkhā).

-- uddharaṇa lifting the corn Miln 307. -- ghāta destroying property S ii.218 sq. Sassata
Sassata
(adj.) [Vedic śaśvat] eternal, perpetual D i.13; iii.31 sq., 137 sq.; M i.8, 426; A i.41; Dh 255; Dhs 1099; J i.468; Miln 413; DA i.112; dhuvasassata sure and certain Bu ii.111 sq. = J i.19; sassatiyā for ever, Sn 1075; a -- sassata J v.176; vi.315; sassatāyaŋ adv. (dat.) for ever (?) J i.468; v.172; Fausböll takes it=sassatā ayam (following the C.), and writes sassat'āyaŋ.

-- diṭṭhi eternalism, the doctrine that soul and world are eternal Dhs 1315; S ii.20; iii.98; Nett 40, 127. -- mūla eternalist Dpvs 6, 25. -- vāda an eternalist, eternalism D i.13; iii.108; S ii.20; iii.99, 182; iv.400; Pug 38; DA i.104 sq.; Ps i.155; VbhA 509. -- vādin eternalist Nett 111; Mhbv 110. Sassatika
Sassatika
[fr. sassata] eternalist D i.17; Mhbv 110 (ekacca˚ partial eternalist); Vin iii.312; ˚ -- ika J v.18, 19. Sassatisamaŋ
Sassatisamaŋ
(adv.) [cp. Sk. śaśvatīḥ samāḥ] for ever and ever D i.14; M i.8; S iii.143; also sassatī samā J iii.255; Vv 6314 (explained by sassatīhi samāna, like the eternal things -- viz., earth, sun, moon, etc., VvA 265); J iii.256; DA i.105. Sassamāṇabrāhmaṇa
Sassamāṇabrāhmaṇa
(fem. -- ī) together, with samaṇas and brahmins Vin i.11; D i.62; iii.76, 135; S v.423; Sn p. 100; DA i.174. Sassara
Sassara
imitative of the sound sarasara; chinnasassara giving out a broken or irregular sound of sarasara M i.128; see J.P.T.S., 1889, p. 209. Sassāmika
Sassāmika
(adj.) [sa+sāmin+ka] 1. having a master, belonging to somebody D ii.176. -- 2. having a husband, married J i.177, 397; iv.190. Sassirīka
Sassirīka
(adj.) [sa3+sirī+ka] glorious, resplendent J i.95; ii.1; iv.189; vi.270. Sassū
Sassū
and Sassu (f.) [Vedic śvaśrū: see sasura] mother-in-law Vin iii.137; A ii.78; Th 2, 407; Sn 125; J i.337; iii.425 sq.; v.286 (gen. sassuyā); DhA i.307; VvA 110, 121; PvA 89. sassu -- sasure, see sasura; sassudeva worshipping one's mother-in-law as a god S i.86; J iv.322. Saha
Saha1
(indecl.) [fr. sa3; cp. Vedic saha] prep. & prefix, meaning: in conjunction with, together, accompanied by; immediately after (with instr.) Vin i.38; Sn 49, 928; Th 2, 414 = 425; sahā Sn 231.

-- anukkama = sahānukkama with the bridle Dh 398; DhA iv.161. -- āmacca together with the ministers Mhvs 5, 182. -- āvudha together with one's weapons J iv.416. -- indaka together with Indra D ii.208, 221; Vv 301. -- ūdaka together with water J v.407. -- oḍha together with the stolen goods; coraŋ ˚ -- aŋ gahetvā Vism 180; Mhvs 23, 11 (thena); 35, 11. See oḍḍha. -- odaka containing water Mhvs 4, 13. -- orodha with his harem Mhvs 5, 182; -- kathin conversing with (instr.) M i.489. -- kāra a sort of fragrant mango KhA 53. -- gata accompanying, connected with, concomitant Vin i.10; D ii.186; S v.421; Kvu 337; DhsA 157. -- ggaṇa together with his companions Dpvs 14, 58. -- cetiya containing a Cetiya Mhvs 33, 10. -- ja born at the same time Vv 8115. -- jāta 1. born at the same time, of equal age J i.54; vi.512. -- 2. arisen at the same time, coinciding with (instr.) Kvu 337, 620; VbhA 127. -> 3. (in ˚paccaya) the relation of co -- nascence, coincidence Dukp 17 sq., 52 sq., 113 sq., 129 sq., 145 sq., 225 sq., 334 sq. and passim; Tikp 36 sq., 62 sq., 107 sq., 243 sq.; Vism 535. -- jīvin (fem. -- ī) living together with Vin iv.291, 325 sq. -- dhammika having the same Dhamma, co -- religionist M i.64; Nd1 485 (opp. para˚); regarding the Dhamma D i.94, 161; M i.368; Vin i.134; Nett 52; DA i.263 (=sahetuka, sakāraṇa); that which is in accordance with the dhamma Dhs 1327; M i.482; ˚ŋ adv. in accordance with the dhamma Vin i.60, 69; iii.178; iv.141. -- dhammiya co -- religionist Nett 169. -- dhenuka accompanied by a cow Mhvs 21, 18. -- nandin rejoicing with It 73. -- paŋsukīḷita a companion in play, a playfellow A ii.186: J i.364; iv.77; PvA 30. -- pesuṇa together with slander Sn 862 f.; Nd1 257. -- bhāvin being at one's service J iii.181 (amacca). -- bhū arising together with Dhs 1197; Nett 16; a class of devas D ii.260. -- macchara with envy Sn 862. -- yoga=karaṇa -- vacana SnA 44. -- vatthu living together with Th 2, 414= 425; ThA 269. -- vāsa living together, associating Vin ii.34; It 68. -- vāsin living together J v.352. -- sangha together with the Order Mhvs 1, 71. -- seyyā sharing the same couch, living together Vin iv.16; KhA 190. -- sevaka together with the servants Mhvs 36, 43. -- sokin sorrowful (?) S iv.180. -- 701 -- Saha
Saha2
(adj.) [fr. sah] submitting to, enduring M i.33; Th 1, 659; J vi.379; sabbasaha J v.425, 431. -- dussaha hard to endure Sdhp 95, 118, 196 Sahati
Sahati
[sah to prevail] 1. to conquer, defeat, overcome M i.33; S iv.157; Sn 942; Dh 335; It 84; J i.74; ii.386 (avamānaŋ); iii.423 (id.). -- 2. to bear, endure Sn 20; Pug 68. -- 3. to be able D ii.342 (sayhāmi); Pot. sahe Sn 942; Pot. saheyya M i.33; saha (imper. excuse, forgive, beg your pardon!) J iii.109; grd. sayha that which can be endured, able to be done Sn 253; Dāvs ii.29; a -- sayha Miln 1148. Sahattha
Sahattha
[sa4+hattha] one's own hand J i.68; usually sahatthā (abl.) with one's own hand Vin i.18; A i.274; D i.109; Sn p. 107; J i.286; Pv ii.98; ii.954; Miln 15. instr. sahatthena id. PvA 110, 124, 135; J iii.267; vi.305. Cp. sāhatthika. Sahatthin
Sahatthin
(adj.) [sa3+hatthin] together with the elephant Mhvs 25, 70. Sahavya
Sahavya
(nt.) [fr. sahāya, cp. Sk. sāhāyya] companionship Vv 477 ( = sahabhāva VvA 202). -- ˚ûpaga coming into union with D i.245. Sahavyatā
Sahavyatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. sahavya] companionship D i.18, 235; ii.206; M ii.195; iii.99; S iv.306; A iii.192. Sahasā
Sahasā
(adv.) [instr. of sahas (Vedic), force] forcibly, hastily, suddenly Sn 123; DhA iii.381; PvA 40, 279; inconsiderately J i.173; iii.441. -- ˚kāra violence D i.5; iii.176; A ii.209; Pug 58; J iv.11; DA i.80. Sahassa
Sahassa
[Sk. sahasra, see etym. under saŋ˚] a thousand, used as a singular with a noun in the plural, sahassaŋ vācā Dh 100; satasahassaŋ vassāni J i.29; also in the plural after other numerals cattāri satasahassāni chaḷabhiññā Bu ii.204 = J i.29; also with the thing counted in the genitive, accharānaŋ sahassaŋ Mhvs 17, 13; A i.227; or ˚ -- , as sahassa -- yakkha -- parivāra SnA 209. In combination with other numerals, sahassa is sometimes inflected like an adjective, saṭṭhisahassā amaccā sixty thousand ministers J vi.484; satasahassiyo gāvo 100,000 cows Sn 308; the thing counted then precedes in a compound jāti -- sahassaŋ 1,000 births D i.13; It 99; ghaṭa -- sahassam pi udakaŋ Miln 189; sindhava -- sahasso ratho J vi.103; sahassaŋ sahassena a thousand times a thousand Dh 103; sahassass' eva in thousands D ii.87. -- sahassaŋ (nt.) 1,000 gold pieces Dh 106; J vi.484; Miln 10; satasahassaŋ a hundred thousand J i.28; sahassa (adj.) (fem. ī) worth a thousand J v.484, 485; ThA 72 (Ap v.45, read sahassayo for ˚aso); epithet of Brahmā, the B. of a thousand world systems M iii.101. Cp. dasa -- sahassī.

-- akkha thousand -- eyed, the god Sakka S i.229; J vi.203; sahassacakkhu the same J v.394, 407. -- aggha worth a thousand Miln 284. -- āra having 1,000 spokes D ii.172. -- ṭṭhavikā a purse with 1,000 pieces (of money) Vism 383; J i.506; DhA ii.37; VvA 33. -- netta thousand-eyed, the god Sakka S i.226; Sn 346; J iii.426; iv.313; v.408; vi.174; Vv 3010; DhA i.17. -- bāhu having a thousand arms, said of Ajjuna J v.119, 135, 145 (˚ -- rājā); 267, 273; vi.201. -- bhaṇḍikā a heap of 1,000 pieces J ii.424; iii.60; iv.2. -- raŋsi the sun J i.183. Sahassadhā
Sahassadhā
(adv.) [cp. satadhā etc.] in a thousand ways A i.227; Th 1, 909. Sahassika
Sahassika
(adj.) [fr. sahassa] thousandfold J i.17; iv.175 (so for ˚iyo). Sahassīlokadhātu
Sahassī
-- lokadhātu (f.) a thousandfold world, a world system D i.46; A i.228; DA i.130; dasasahassī -- lokadhātu ten world systems J i.51, 63; cp. dasasahassī and lokadhātu. Sahājanetta
Sahājanetta
[sahāja+netta] at Sn 1096 is of doubtful meaning ("all -- seeing"?), it is expld as "spontaneously arisen omniscience" at Nd2 669 (where spelling is sahajānetta); lit. "coinciding eye"; SnA 598 expls as "sahajāta -- sabbaññuta -- ñāṇa -- cakkhu." Sahāya
Sahāya
[cp. Epic Sk. sahāya, fr. saha+i] companion, friend D ii.78; M i.86; S iv.288; Pug 36; Sn 35, 45 sq.; J ii.29; ˚ -- kicca assistance (?) J v.339; ˚ -- matta companion J iv.76; ˚ -- sampadā the good luck of having companions Sn 47; adiṭṭha -- ˚ a friend who has not yet been seen personally J i.377; iii.364; bahu -- ˚ having many friends Vin ii.158; nāhaŋ ettha sahāyo bhavis -- sāmi I am not a party to that J iii.46; asahāya Miln 225. Sahāyaka
Sahāyaka
(adj.) [fr. last] f. ˚yikā companion, ally, friend Vin i.18; D ii.155; A ii.79, 186; J i.165; ii.29; v.159; vi.256 (gihī sahāyakā, read gihisahāyakā [?]). Sahāyatā
Sahāyatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. sahāya] companionship Dh 61; sahāyatta (nt.) the same Mhvs 30, 21. Sahita
Sahita
[pp. of saŋ+dhā, cp. Sk. sahita = saŋhita] 1. accompanied with Mhvs 7, 27. -- 2. united, keeping together D i.4; J iv.347; Pug 57. -- 3. consistent, sensible, to the point D i.8; A ii.138; iv.196; S iii.12; Dh 19 (at DhA i.157 expld as a name for the Tipiṭaka, thus equalling Sk. saŋhita); Pug 42. -- 4. close together, thick Th 2, 254. -- araṇisahita (nt.) firewood and appurtenances Vin ii.217; D ii.340 sq.; J i.212; DhA ii.246. -- sahitaŋvata (adj.) having a consistent or perpetual vow, i.e. living the holy life J v.320 (=sīlācāra -- sampanna C.); vi.525 (T. sahitabbata; C. expls as samādinna -- vata gahita -- tāpasa -- vesa). Kern, Toev. ii.51 takes it as a corrupted Sk. śaŋsita -- vrata. Sahitar
Sahitar
[n. ag. fr. sahati] one who endures Sn 42. Sahirañña
Sahirañña
(adj.) [sa+hirañña] possessing gold Sn 102. Sahetu
Sahetu
(adj.) [sa+hetu] having a cause, together with the cause Vin i.2; D i.180; DA i.263. See hetu. Sahetuka
Sahetuka
having a cause, accompanied by a cause (especially of good or bad karma) A i.82; Dhs 1073. Sahoḍha
Sahoḍha
see under saha1. Sā
Sā
see under San1. Sāka
Sāka
(nt.) [Epic Sk. śāka] 1. vegetable, potherb D i.166; M i.78, 156; A i.241, 295; ii.206; Pug 55; Vism 70; Vv 3333; J iii.225; iv.445; v.103. -- 2. (m.) name of a tree (Tectona grandis) D i.92; DA i.259; Vism 250. ˚ -- vatthu ground for cultivation of vegetables J iv.446; sāka -- paṇṇavaṇṇa "like the colour of vegetable leaf" (said of teeth) J v.206 (cp. 203). -- 702 -- Sākacchā
Sākacchā
(f.) conversation, talking over, discussing D i.103; ii.109; M i.72; S i.79; A ii.140, 187 sq.; iii.81; Sn 266; Miln 19, 24; DhA i.90 (˚aŋ karoti); J vi.414. Sākaccheti
Sākaccheti
[Denom. fr. sākacchā] to converse with, talk over with, discuss D ii.237 (+sallapati); ppr. sākacchanto Vin i.169; fut. sākacchissanti Vin ii.75; iii.159; grd. sākacchātabba Vin v.123, 196; ppr. med. sākacchā yamāna A ii.189. Sākaṭika
Sākaṭika
[fr. sakaṭa1] a carter S i.57; Th 2, 443 (ThA 271 = senaka); J iii.104; Miln 66, 164. Sākalya
Sākalya
(nt.) [fr. sakala] totality; KhA 187 (opp. vekalya); sākalya A i.94 is misprint for sākhalya. Sākāra
Sākāra
(adj.) [sa3+ākāra] with its characteristics D i.13; iii.111; M i.35; Pug 60; Vism 423 (+sa -- uddesa). Sākuṇika
Sākuṇika
[fr. sakuṇa] a fowler S ii.256; A iii.303; Pug 56; J i.208. Combd with miga -- bandhaka & macchaghātaka at SnA 289; with māgavika & maccha -- ghātaka at Pug 56. Sākuntika
Sākuntika
[fr. sakunta] a fowler, bird -- catcher A ii.207; Th 2, 299; ThA 227; DA i.162. Sākkharappabheda
Sākkharappabheda
[sa3+akkhara+pabheda] together with the distinction of letters, with the phonology D i.88; A i.163; Sn, p. 101; Miln 10; DA i.247 (akkharappabhedo ti sikkhā ca nirutti ca). Sākhapurāṇasanthuta
Sākhapurāṇasanthuta
[fr. sakhi+purāṇa˚] one with whom one has formerly been friendly J v.448. Sākhalya & Sakhalla
Sākhalya
& Sakhalla (nt.) [abstr. from sakhila] friendship M i.446 ( = tameness); A i.94; D iii.213; Dhs 1343; DA i.287; DhsA 396; J iv.57, 58 (=maṭṭhavacana "smooth words"). Sākhavant
Sākhavant
(adj.) [sākhā+vant] having branches J iii.493. Sākhā
Sākhā
[Vedic śākhā, cp. also śanku stick, & Goth. hōha plough] a branch Vin i.28; M i.135; A i.152; ii.165, 200 sq.; iii.19, 43 sq., 200; iv.99, 336; v.314 sq.; Sn 791; J v.393; J ii.44; a spur of a hill A i.243; ii.140; Miln 36; also sākha (nt.) Mhvs 1, 55; J i.52; iv.350; J i.164 (? yāva aggasākhā). -- the rib of a parasol Sn 688. -> adj. sīla -- sākha -- pasākha whose branches and boughs are like the virtues J vi.324. In cpds. sākha˚ & sākhā˚.

-- nagaraka "little town in the branches," i. e. a suburb, a small town D ii.146; J i.391. -- patta -- palāsa branches and foliage A iii.44; -- patta -- phal'upeta with branches, leaves & fruit A iii.43. -- palāsa id. M i.488; A ii.200. -- bhanga faggots J i.158; iii.407; DhA ii.204; iii.375. -- miga a monkey J ii.73; -- ssita living upon branches (i. e. monkey) J v.233. Sāgataŋ
Sāgataŋ
(indecl.) [su+āgata, orij. nt. = wel -- come] "greeting of welcome," hail! D i.179=M i.481 (sāgataŋ bhante Bhagavato); D ii.173; M i.514 (˚aŋ bhoto Ānandassa); DA i.287; DhA iii.293. Sāgara
Sāgara
[cp. Epic Sk. sāgara] the ocean D i.89; A ii.56, 140; iii.52; v.116 sq.; Vin i.246; Sn 568; PvA 29; sāgara-> ūmi a wave of the ocean, a flood J iv.165; ˚ -- vāri the ocean J iv.165; sāgaranta or sāgarapariyanta bounded or surrounded by the ocean (said of the earth) J vi.203; ˚ -- kuṇḍala the same J iii.32; vi.278. Sāgāra
Sāgāra
(adj.) [sa3+agāra] living in a house, It 111; sleeping under the same roof Vin ii.279. Sāngaṇa
Sāngaṇa
(adj.) [sa+angaṇa] full of lust, impure M i.24 (var. read sangaṇa; this is also the reading at Sn 279, see above). Sācakka
Sācakka
(nt.) [sā = śvan, dog; +cakka; cp. sopāka & suva] name of a science ("the interpretation of omens to be drawn from dogs") Miln 178. Sācariyaka
Sācariyaka
(adj.) [sa3+ācariya+ka] together with one's teacher D i.102. Sāciyoga
Sāciyoga
[sāci+yoga; cp. Sk. sāci crooked] crooked ways, insincerity D i.5; iii.176; M i.180; A ii.209; v.206; Pug 58; DA i.80. Sājīva
Sājīva
(nt.) rule of life, precept governing the monastic life of the Buddhist bhikkhus Vin iii.2416; adj. ˚ -- samāpanna ibid.; adj. ˚ -- kara one who supports J iv.42 ( = sa -- ājīvakara, C.). Sāṭa
Sāṭa
[cp. Sk. śāṭa] a garment, cloth Th 2, 245; sāṭi (f.) the same S i.115; Dh 394; J i.230 (udaka˚ bathing mantle), 481. Sāṭaka
Sāṭaka
[sāṭa+ka] an outer garment, cloak; cloth ThA 246; J i.89, 138, 195, 373, 426; Vism 54 (sāṇa˚), 275 (alla˚); DhA i.393 (thūla˚). Cp. antara˚, alaŋ˚.

-- lakkhaṇa prognostication drawn from pieces of cloth J i.371. Sāṭikā
Sāṭikā
(f.) = sāṭaka Vin i.292 sq.; ii.31; 272, 279 (udaka˚ bathing mantle) J i.330; Vism 339 (in simile); Miln 240 (cp. M iii.253). sāṭiya the same Vin ii.177 (˚gāhāpaka receiver of undergarments). Sāṭetar
Sāṭetar
[n. ag. fr. sāṭeti] one who dispels, drives away M i.220; A v.347 sq., 351, 359. Sāṭeti
Sāṭeti
[śat to cut, destroy] to cut open, to destroy; fig. to torment: Kern's proposed reading (see Toev. s. v. sāveti) for sāveti at J iii.198 (amba -- pakkāni); iv.402 (attānaŋ sāṭetvā dāsakammaŋ karissāni); vi.486 (kāyaŋ s.). He compares MVastu iii.385: śāṭeti gātrāni. Cp. visāṭita & visāta. Sāṭheyya
Sāṭheyya
(nt.) [abstr. fr. saṭha = *śāṭhya] craft, treachery M i.15, 36, 281, 340; A i.95, 100; Nd1 395; Pug 19, 23; Miln 289. Cp paṭi˚. Sāṇa
Sāṇa1
(nt.) [cp. Sk. śāṇa hempen, fr. śaṇa = P. saṇa; cp. bhanga1] hemp D ii.350; Miln 267; a coarse hempen cloth Vin i.58; D i.166; iii.41; M i.78; A i.240; S ii.202, 221; Pug 55; Vism 54 (˚sāṭaka). -- sāṇavāka the same Th 2, 252; J iii.394 (var. read). Sāṇa
Sāṇa2
[sa+iṇa] having a debt, indebted, fig. subjected to the kilesas, imperfect M iii.127 = S ii.221 (=sakilesa, sa -- iṇa K.S. ii.203); ThA 8; cp. anaṇa under aṇa. Sāṇadhovana
Sāṇadhovana
(nt.) a kind of play DA i.84 = saṇadhovikā. Sāṇikā
Sāṇikā
(f.) [fr. sāṇī] a curtain J iii.462. Sāṇī
Sāṇī
(f.) [fr. saṇa] hemp -- cloth D ii.350; Vin iii.17; a screen, curtain, tent J i.58, 148 sq., 178, 419; DhA i.194; ii.49. ˚ -- pākāra a screen -- wall Vin iv.269, 279; J ii.88; DhA ii.68, 71, 186; VvA 173; PvA 283; Mhvs 7, 27; sāṇipasibbaka a sack or bag of hempcloth Vin iii.1710. -- paṭṭa -- sāṇī a screen of fine cloth J i.395. Sāta
Sāta
(adj.) [cp. *Sk. śāta] pleasant, agreeable It 114; Nett 27. Often combd with piya, e. g. It 114; Vbh 103; DA i.311. -- Opp. kaṭuka. -- sāta (nt.) pleasure, joy M i.508; A i.81 sq.; S ii.220; J i.410; Dh 341 (˚sita = sāta -- nissita DhA iv.49); Sn 867 sq.; Nd1 30 (three, of bhava); Pv ii.113; iv.54 (+sukha); Dhs 3. asāta disagreeable, unpleasant Dhs 1343; J i.410; J i.288; ii.105; Sn 867 sq.; sātabhakkha Pug 55, read haṭabhakkha.

-- odaka with pleasant water D ii.129; M i.76; Vin iii.108. -- kumbha gold VvA 13. See also v. l. under hāṭaka. -- putta a noble son J vi.238 ( = amacca -- putta C.). -- 703 -- Sātaka
Sātaka
name of a kind of bird J vi.539 (koṭṭhapokkhara -- ˚, cp. 540); SnA 359 (id.). Sātacca
Sātacca
(nt.) [fr. satata] perseverance M i.101; S ii.132; A iii.249 sq.; iv.460 sq.; v.17 sq.; Th 1, 585; Vism 4; VbhA 346. ˚ -- kārin persevering S iii.268, 271, 277 sq.; Dh 293; ˚ -- kiriyatā persevering performance Dhs 1367. Sātataŋ
Sātataŋ
(adv.) [fr. satata] continually S i.17 = 57. Sātatā
Sātatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. sāta] happiness S i.17. Sātatika
Sātatika
(adj.) [fr. last] persevering Dh 23; S ii.232; It 74; DhA i.230. Sātatta
Sātatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. sāta] tastiness, sweetness A i.32. Sātava
Sātava
(nt.) sweet result (of good words) kalyāṇakamma, Com.) J vi.235, 237. Is it misspelling for sādhava (fr. sādhu)? Sātiya
Sātiya
(adj.) [fr. sāta] pleasant Sn 853. Sātireka
Sātireka
(adj.) [sa+atireka, cp. BSk. sātirikta Divy 27] having something in excess D ii.93. Sātisāra
Sātisāra
(adj.) [sa+atisāra] trespassing Vin i.55. Sāttha
Sāttha
[sa3+attha] with the meaning, in spirit D i.62; ii.48; It 79, 111; Sn p. 100; Vin i.21; DA i.176; Vism 214. Sātthaka
Sātthaka
(adj.) [sa+atthaka] (fem. -- ikā) useful PvA 12. Sātrāyāga
Sātrā
-- yāga identical with sammāpāsa (Sn 303) SnA 322 (? conjecture yātrā˚). Sāthalika
Sāthalika
(adj.) [śrath, cp. saṭhila & sithila] lethargic, lax M i.14, 200 sq.; iii.6; A i.71; ii.148; iii.108, 179 sq. Sādana
Sādana
(nt.) [cp. Vedic sādana, fr. sad] place, house J iv.405; Yama -- sādanaŋ sampatto come to Yama's abode: dead J iv.405; v.267, 304; vi.457, 505 (do., the MSS. always read ˚ -- sādhana). Sādara
Sādara
(adj.) [sa+ādara] reverential Mhvs 5, 246; 15, 2; 28, 25; 33, 82; sādariya (nt.) and sādariyatā (f.) showing regard and consideration Pug 24; cp. Dhs 1327. Sādāna
Sādāna
(adj.) [sa+ādāna] attached to the world, passionate Dh 406 = Sn 630; DhA iv.180. Sāditar
Sāditar
[n. ag. fr. sādiyati] one who accepts, appropriates M iii.126. Sādiyati
Sādiyati
[cp. BSk. svādīyati: MVastu ii.145; Med. -- Pass fr. *sādeti, Caus. of svad] lit. to enjoy for oneself, to agree to, permit, let take place D i.166; Vin ii.294; A iv.54, 347; S i.78; iv.226 sq.; Pug 55; Miln 95 sq.; aor. sādiyi Vin iii.38 sq.; fut. sādiyissati J vi.158. Sādiyanā
Sādiyanā
(f.) [fr. sādiyati] appropriating, accepting Miln 95. Sādisa
Sādisa
[fr. sadisa] (fem. -- sī) like, similar D ii.239; Sn 595; Th 2, 252 (sa˚ for sā˚); Ap 239; J iv.97; Miln 217 (with instr.). Sādu
Sādu
(adj.) [Vedic svādu, f. svādvī; fr. svad, cp. Gr. h(du/s, Lat. suavis, Goth. sūts = E. sweet; also Sk. sūda cook; Gr. h(/domai to enjoy, h/donh/ pleasure] sweet, nice, pleasant Vin ii.196; M i.114; Th 2, 273; Sn 102; J iv.168; v.5; Dhs 629; asādu (ka) J iii.145; iv.509 (text, asādhuka, com. on kaṭuka); sādu -- karoti makes sweet J iii.319; Pot. a -- sādu -- kiyirā makes bitter, ibid. 319; sādu sweet things Vin ii.196; sādu -- phala see sādhuphala; for ˚kamyatā see the latter. Sādutā
Sādutā
(f.) [fr. sādu] sweetness Dāvs i.40. Sādeti
Sādeti1
[Caus. of sad: see sīdati] to cause to sink, to throw down DhA i.75 (+vināseti; v. l. pāteti). Sādeti
Sādeti2
[Caus. of svad; given as root in meaning "assā- dane" at Dhtp 147] to enjoy: see ucchādeti (where better referred to avad) and chādeti2. Sādhaka
Sādhaka
(adj.) [fr. sādh] accomplishing, effecting J i.86; SnA 394, 415; Sdhp 161; iṇa˚ debt -- collector Miln 365; bali˚ tax -- collector J iv.366; v.103, 105, 106. Sādhakatā
Sādhakatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. sādhaka] effectiveness, efficiency Sdhp 329. Sādhana
Sādhana
(adj. -- nt.) [fr. sādh] 1. enforcing, proving J i.307; DA i.105. -- 2. settling, clearing (a debt) J ii.341 (uddhāra˚). In this meaning mixed with sodheti; it is impossible to decide which of the two is to be preferred. See iṇa & uddhāra. -- 3. yielding, effecting, producing, resulting in ( -- ˚) A iii.156 (laṇḍa˚ dung -- producing); DA i.273; VvA 194; PvA 278 (hita˚). -- 4. materials, instrument VvA 349; PvA 199. Sādhāraṇa
Sādhāraṇa
(adj.) general, common, joint Vin ii.258; iii.35; Th 2, 505; J i.202, 302; iv.7 (pañca˚ -- bhāva 5 fold connection); Nett 49 sq.; PvA 122, 194, 265. a˚ J i.78; DA i.71. Sādhika
Sādhika
(adj.) [sa+adhika; cp. BSk. sādhika Divy 44] having something beyond D ii.93; Vv 535 (˚vīsati). ˚ -- porisa exceeding a man's height M i.74, 365; A iii.403. Sādhiya
Sādhiya
(adj.) [fr. sādh] that which can be accomplished Sdhp 258 etc. Sādhu
Sādhu
(adj.) [Vedic sādhu, fr. sādh] 1. good, virtuous, pious Sn 376, 393; J i.1; Mhvs 37, 119; PvA 116, 132; asādhu bad, wicked Dh 163, 223; DhA iii.313. -- 2. good, profitable, proficient, meritorious Dh 35, 206 ( = sundara, bhaddaka DhA iii.271); D i.88; Pv ii.97; nt. adv. well, thoroughly Dh 67; J i.1; Mhvs 36, 97; 37, 73. Very frequent as interjection, denoting (a) request (adhortative, with imper.: sādhu gaccha please go! Miln 18; gacchatha VvA 305), to be translated with "come on, welcome, please," or similar adverbs. Thus e. g. at Pv iv.140 (=āyācane PvA 232); J i.92; PvA 6, 35, 272; VvA 69; -- (b) assent & approval in replies to a question "alright, yes" or similarly; usually with the verbs (in ger.) paṭisuṇitvā, vatvā, sampaṭicchitvā etc. Thus e. g. at J v.297; Vin i.56; Miln 7; DhA iii.13; VvA 149; DA i.171; SnA 176 (= sampahaŋsane); PvA 55, 78 and passim.

-- kamyatā desire for proficiency VbhA 477. -- kāra saying "well," approval, cheering, applause J i.223; Miln 13, 16, 18; VvA 132; DhA i.390; iii.385. -- kīḷana a festive play, a sacred festivity Mhvs 3, 11; sādhukīḷita the same Mhvs 20, 36; ˚ -- divasa Vin iii.285; sādhu -- kīḷā J iii.434; v.127; sādhu -- kīḷikā J iii.433. -- jīvin leading a virtuous life It 71. -- phala having wholesome fruits J i.272 (read sādu˚). -- rūpa good, respectable Dh 262. -- sammata highly honoured D i.48; S iv.398; Sn p. 90 sq.; Miln 4, 21; DA i.143. -- sīliya good character J ii.137. Sādhukaŋ
Sādhukaŋ
(adv.) [fr. sādhu] well, thoroughly Vin i.46; ii.208; D i.62. -- instr. sādhukena (as adv.) willingly (opp. with force) Pv ii.92. Sādheti
Sādheti
[Caus. of sādh to succeed. Dhtp 421 = saŋsiddhiyan] 1. to accomplish, further, effect J ii.236 (Pot. sādhayemase). -- 2. to make prosperous PvA 113, 125. -- 3. to arrange, prepare Mhvs 7, 24. -- 4. to perform, execute J i.38 (ārāmika -- kiccaŋ); DA i.194; Mhvs 36, 62; Vism 344 (see udukkhala). -- 5. to make clear, bring to a (logical) conclusion, to prove J ii.306; SnA 192 (atthaŋ), 459; Tikp 58; PvA 30 (here as much as "is any good"). -- 6. to collect or clear a debt, to recover (money). In this sense sādheti is mixed up with sodheti, which is regularly found as v. l., is it almost better to substitute sodheti at all passages for sādheti (cp. iṇa, uddhāra), e. g. J i.230; ii.341, 423; iii.106; iv.45; DhA iii.12. -- Cp. abhi˚. -- 704 -- Sānu
Sānu
(m. and nt.) [Vedic sānu] ridge Vv 3210; J iii.172. The commentary on the former passage (VvA 136), translates vana wood, that on the latter paŋsupabbata; sānupabbata a forest -- hill J iv.277; vi.415, 540; pabbatasānu -- ˚ J iii.175; girisānu -- ˚ J iii.301; iv.195. Sānucara
Sānucara
(adj.) [sa3+anucara] together with followers Dh 294; J vi.172. Sānuvajja
Sānuvajja
(adj.) [sa+anuvajja] blameable A ii.3. Sānuseti
Sānuseti
[sa ( = saŋ)+anuseti] to fill (the mind) completely A ii.10. Sāpa
Sāpa
[fr. sap, cp. Sk. śāpa] a curse VvA 336; DhA i.41. Sāpateyya
Sāpateyya
(nt.) [sā ( = guṇa of sva)+pateyya (abstr. fr. pati lord), cp. ādhi -- pateyya] property, wealth D i.142; ii.180; iii.190; Vin i.72, 274; iii.66; J i.439, 466; Th 2, 340; ThA 240; J v.117 (sāpateya, var. read. sāpatiyya); DhA i.67. Sāpattika
Sāpattika
(adj.) [sa3+āpatti+ka] one who has committed a sin (see āpatti) Vin i.125; ii.240; Nd1 102. Sāpada
Sāpada
(nt.) [cp. Sk. śvāpada] a beast of prey J ii.126; vi.79. Sāpadesa
Sāpadesa
(adj.) [sa+apadesa] with reasons D i.4; A ii.22; M i.180; iii.34, 49; Pug 58; DA i.76. Opp. anapadesa M i.287. Sāpānadoṇī
Sāpānadoṇī
M ii.183 = 152 (C.=sunakhānaŋ pivanadoṇi a dog's trough). Sāpekha
Sāpekha
[sa+apekhā] longing for D ii.77; iii.43. Sāma
Sāma1
[cp. Vedic śyāma black & śyāva brown; Av. syāva; Ags. hāēven blue ( = E. heaven); Gr. skoio/s, skia/ (shadow)=Sk. chāyā; Goth. skeinan=shine, etc.] 1. black, dark (something like deep brown) Vin iv.120 (kāḷasāma dark blue [?]); D i.193; M i.246 (different from kāḷa); J vi.187 (˚aŋ mukhaŋ dark, i. e. on account of bad spirits); Vism 422 (opp. to odāta in colour of skin). -- 2. yellow, of a golden colour, beautiful J ii.44, 45 (migī); v.215 (suvaṇṇa -- sāmā), 366 (suvaṇṇa -- vaṇṇa). -- f. sāmā, q. v. -- See sabala. Sāma
Sāma2
(nt.) [perhaps = Vedic sāman] song, sacred song, devotion, worship, propitiation D ii.288. Sāmaŋ
Sāmaŋ
[on etymology, see Andersen Pāli Gloss., p. 268 (contracted from sayamaŋ, Trenckner), cp. Michelson, Indog. Forsch., vol. xxiii, p. 235, n. 3 ( = avest., hāmō; slav., samz)] self, of oneself Vin i.16, 33, 211 (s. pāka); iv.121; D i.165; M i.383; ii.211; iii.253 (sāmaŋ kantaŋ sāmaŋ vāyitaŋ dussayugaŋ); S ii.40; iv.230 sq.; v.390; Sn 270 (asāma -- pāka not cooking for oneself), 889; J i.150; sāmaññeva, i. e. sāmaŋ yeva Sn p. 101. Sāmaggiya
Sāmaggiya
(nt.) [fr. samagga] completeness, concord Sn 810; sāmaggiya -- rasa J iii.21 ("the sweets of concord"); adj. asāmaggiya, unpleasant J vi.517 (C. on asammodiya). Sāmaggī
Sāmaggī
(f.) [abstr. fr. samagga] completeness, a quorum Vin i.105, 106; meeting, communion Vin i.132 sq.; ii.243; unanimity, concord Vin i.97, 136, 357; ii.204; D iii.245 sq.; A iii.289; Nd1 131; J i.328; It 12. Sāmacca
Sāmacca
(adj.) [sa2+amacca] together with the ministers D i.110. Sāmañña
Sāmañña1
(nt.) [abstr. fr. samāna] generality; equality, conformity; unity, company Miln 163; SnA 449 (jāti˚ identity of descent), 449 (generality, contrasted to visesa detail), 548 (id.); VvA 233 (diṭṭhi˚, sīla˚, equality). ˚ -- gata united D ii.80; ˚ -- nāma a name given by general assent DhsA 390. Sāmañña
Sāmañña2
(nt.) [abstr. fr. samaṇa] Samaṇaship D i.51 sq.; iii.72, 245; M i.281 sq.; S v.25; A ii.27 = It 103; Dh 19 sq., 311; DA i.158; Vism 132; adj., in accordance with true Samaṇaship, striving to be a samaṇa Miln 18; Samaṇaship A i.142 sq.; Pv ii.718 (expld at PvA 104 as "honouring the samaṇas").

-- attha the aim of Samaṇaship D i.230; A iv.366; M i.271; S ii.15; iii.93; J i.482; -- phala advantage resulting from Samaṇaship, fruit of the life of the recluse D i.51 sq.; Vism 215, 512; VvA 71; VbhA 317; more especially the fruition of the four stages of the Path, sotāpatti -- , sakadāgāmi -- , anāgāmi -- , and arahattaphala S v.25; D iii.227, 277; Dhs 1016; DhsA 423; Miln 344, 358; DA i.158; three samaññaphalas Kvu 112. Sāmaññatā
Sāmaññatā1
= sāmañña1 (identity, congruity etc.) J vi.371 (vaṇṇa˚); Vism 234 (maraṇa˚). Sāmaññatā
Sāmaññatā2
= sāmañña2 D iii.145, 169; Dh 332; DhA iii.484; iv.33. Sāmaṇaka
Sāmaṇaka
(adj.) [fr. samaṇa] worthy of or needful for a Samaṇa Mhvs 4, 26; 30, 37; assāmaṇaka unworthy of a Samaṇa Vin i.45. Sāmaṇera
Sāmaṇera
[fr. samaṇa; cp. BSk. śrāmaṇeraka Divy 342] fem. ˚ -- rī a novice Vin i.62 sq.; iv.121; S ii.261; Miln 2; VbhA 383; are not present at the recital of the Pātimokkha Vin i.135; ˚pabbajjā ordination of a novice Vin i.82. ˚pēsaka superintendent of Sāmaṇeras Vin ii.177; A iii.275. -- f., also -- ˚ā A iii.276; as -- ˚ī at Vin i.141. Sāmattha
Sāmattha
(adj.) [ = samattha] able J ii.29. Sāmatthiya
Sāmatthiya
[abstr. fr. samattha] (nt.) ability Mhvs 37, 243 Sāmanta
Sāmanta
(adj.) [fr. samanta] neighbouring, bordering D i.101; Vin i.46 (āpatti˚ bordering on a transgression); J ii.21; iv.124; connected with M i.95; ˚jappā (or ˚jappana) roundabout talk Vbh 353; Vism 28; Nd1 226; VbhA 484. abl. sāmantā in the neighbourhood of Vin iii.36; D ii.339; loc. sāmante the same J iv.152 (Kapila -- vatthu -- ˚). Sāmayika
Sāmayika
(adj.) [fr. samaya] temporary Sn 54; Miln 302 (so read); see sāmāyika. Sāmalatā
Sāmalatā
(f.) [sāma1+latā; Sk. śyāmalatā] the creeper Ichnocarpus J i.60. Sāmā
Sāmā
(f) [Sk. śyāmā Halāyudha 2, 38; see sāma1, sāma- latā, and sāmāka] a medicinal plant J iv.92 (bhisasāmā, C. bhisāni ca sāmākā ca); the Priyangu creeper J i.500; v.405. Sāmāka
Sāmāka
[cp. Vedic śyāmāka] a kind of millet (Panicum frumentaceum) D i.166; M i.78, 156, 343; A i.295; ii.206; Sn 239; Pug 55; J iii.144, 371; Nett 141; DhA v.81. Sāmājika
Sāmājika
[fr. Sk. samāja: see samajja] a member of an assembly Dāvs iii.27. Sāmādhika
Sāmādhika
(adj.) [fr. samādhi] consisting in concentration S i.120. Sāmāmigī
Sāmāmigī
(f.) a black hind J ii.44. Sāmāyika
Sāmāyika
(adj.) [fr. samaya] 1. on a friendly footing, in agreement M iii.110; Miln 22. -- 2. occurring in due season, timely Miln 302 sq., 305. -- 3. temporary A iii.349 sq.; cp. sāmayika. Sāmi
Sāmi
J v.489, read sāvi. -- 705 -- Sāmika
Sāmika
[fr. sāmin] 1. owner M i.27; J i.194; Vism 63. - 2. husband Vin iii.137; J i.307; ii.128; A ii.58 sq.; Pv ii.37. Sāmin
Sāmin
[cp. Sk. svāmin, fr. sva = sa4] 1. owner, ruler, lord, master Vin i.303, 307; Sn 83; Mhvs 37, 241; J v.253 (˚paribhoga, q. v.); Pv iv.66; Vism 63; DA i.261; PvA 43, 65. voc. sāmi "Sir" J vi.300; DhA i.20. f. sāminī J v.297; VvA 225. See also suvāmin. -- assāmin not ruling Miln 253; Pv iv.66. -- 2. husband PvA 31 (sāmi, voc.="my lord"), 82. -- f. sāminī wife Mhvs 5, 43; PvA 82, 276.

-- vacana (sāmi˚) the genitive case J i.185; iii.98 (upayog'atthe); v.42 (karaṇ'atthe), 444; VvA 304; SnA 210 (for upayoga), 310 (id.). Sāmiya
Sāmiya
husband J i.352; see sāmika. Sāmisa
Sāmisa
(adj.) [sa+āmisa] 1. holding food Vin ii.214 = iv.198. -- 2. fleshly, carnal D ii.298=M i.59; A i.81; Ps ii.41. Opp. to nirāmisa spiritual (e. g. Ps i.59). Sāmīcī & sāmīci˚
Sāmīcī
& sāmīci˚ (f.) [fr. sammā2 = Vedic samyac, of which pl. nom. f. samīcīḥ freq. in R. V.] right, proper course Vin iii.246; D ii.104; A ii.56, 65; S v.261, 343; Miln 8; DhA i.57.

-- kamma proper act, homage Vin ii.22, 162, 255; A i.123; ii.180; D iii.83; J i.218, 219; Miln 8. -- paṭipadā right course of life M i.281; A ii.65. -- paṭipanna correct in life D ii.104; S i.220; A ii.56; iv.310. Sāmukkaŋsika
Sāmukkaŋsika
(adj.) [fr. samukkaŋsati, cp. ukkaŋsaka. The BSk. is sāmutkarṣikī dharmadeśanā Divy 617] exalting, praising (i. e. the 4 truths), as much as "standard." Kern, Toev. ii.64, takes it to mean "condensed, given in brief." Usually in phrase ˚ikā dhammadesanā (thus as f. of ˚aka!) e. g. Vin i.16, 18; ii.156; D i.110; M i.380; A iv.186; v.194; DA i.277 (expld); ThA 137; PvA 38, 195; VvA 50. Only once with ñāṇa at DhsA 9. Sāmudda
Sāmudda
(nt.) [fr. samudda] sea salt Vin i.202; Abhp 461. Sāmuddika
Sāmuddika
(adj.) [fr. samudda] seafaring D i.222; S iii.155; A iii.368 (vāṇijā); iv.127 (nāvā); Vism 63; DhsA 320. At J vi.581 s. -- mahāsankha denotes a kind of trumpet. Sāmeti
Sāmeti
see sammati1. Sāya
Sāya
[cp. Sk. sāyaŋ, on which Aufrecht, Halāyudha p. 380, remarks: "this word seems to be the gerund of sā, and to have signified originally ʻ having finished. ʼ A masc. sāya does not exist." Cp. Vedic ˚sāya] evening, only adverbially sāyaŋ, at night Vin iii.147; J ii.83; DhA i.234; usually opposed to pāto (pātaŋ) in the morning, early e. g. sāya -- pātaŋ D ii.188; Miln 419; J i.432, 460; v.462; sāyaŋ -- pātaŋ Vin ii.185; DhA ii.66; sāyañ ca pāto ca Pv i.63; ii.937; PvA 127; sāya -- tatiyaka for the third time in the evening D i.167; A ii.206; v.263, 266, 268; M i.343; sāyamāsa supper J i.297; v.461; DhA i.204. sāyaŋ as quâsi -- nominative: sāyaŋ ahosi J vi.505; atisāyaŋ too late Th 1, 231; J ii.362; v.94; sāyataraŋ later in the evening (compar.) J vi.366. Sāyaṇha
Sāyaṇha
[sāyaŋ+aṇha, cp. Sk. sāyāhna] evening D ii.9; J i.144; -- ˚samayaŋ at evening time D ii.205; M i.147; Vin i.21; sāyaṇhasamaye J i.148, 279; PvA 33, 43, 100; ˚ -- kāle the same J iv.120; sāyaṇhe (loc.) J i.144, 237; atisāyaṇha late evening J vi.540. Sāyati
Sāyati
[svad, Sk. svādate, cp. sādiyati] to taste, eat; pres. sāyati Vin ii.121; ppr. sāyanto D iii.85; grd. sāyanīya savoury Vin i.44; S i.162; ger. sāyitvā S iv.176; A iii.163. Cp. saŋsāyati. Sāyana
Sāyana1
(nt.) [fr. sāyati] tasting, taste Dhtp 229. Sāyana
Sāyana2
the Nāga tree (cp. nāga 3) J vi.535 (vāraṇā sā yanā = nāgarukkhā, C., ibid. 535, var. read. vāyana). Kern, Toev. ii.77 conjectures sāsanā "with Asana's Terminalia's." Sāyika
Sāyika
(adj.) [fr. śī] lying, sleeping, resting in ( -- ˚) Dh 141; M i.328 (vatthu˚); Th 1, 501 = Miln 367. Sāyita
Sāyita
[pp. of sāyati, cp. sāditar] (having) tasted, tasting D i.70; ii.95, 292; M i.188, 461; Miln 378; Vism 258 (khāyita+). Sāyin
Sāyin
(adj.) [fr. śī] lying Dh 325. Sāra
Sāra
[Vedic sāra nt.] 1. essential, most excellent, strong A ii.110; Vin iv.214; J iii.368; Pug 53. -- 2. (m.) the innermost, hardest part of anything, the heart or pith of a tree (see also pheggu) M i.111; J i.331; Miln 413; most excellent kind of wood Vin ii.110; D ii.182, 187; sattasārā the elect, the salt of the earth M iii.69. -> 3. substance, essence, choicest part (generally at the end of comp.) Vin i.184; A ii.141; S iii.83, 140; Sn 5, 330, 364; Dh 11 sq.; PvA 132, 211 (candana˚). sāre patiṭṭhito established, based, on what is essential M i.31; A ii.183. -- 4. value Miln 10; appasāra of small value D ii.346. -- asāra worthless Sn 937; nissāra the same J ii.163 (pithless); mahāsāra of high value J i.384, 463.

-- ādāyin acquiring what is essential S iv.250. -- gandha the odour of the heart of a tree Dhs 625. -- gabbha a treasury J iii.408; v.331. -- gavesin searching for hard wood M i.111, 233; sārapariyesana the same ibid. -- dāru strong, durable wood J ii.68. -- bhaṇḍa(ka) a bundle of one's best things J ii.225. -- bhūmi good soil J ii.188. -- mañjūsā a box made of choice wood J iv.335. -- maya being of hard or solid wood J iii.318 (C. sārarukkhamaya, "of sāra wood" trsln). -- suvaṇṇa sterling gold SnA 448 (in expln of name Bimbisāra). -- sūci a needle made of hard wood J i.9. Sāraka
Sāraka1
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. sāra] having as most essential Miln 133; a -- sāraka rotten (said of wood) J ii.163. Sāraka
Sāraka2
[fr. sarati1] a messenger. Sāraka
Sāraka3
in the comp. kaṭa -- sāraka a mat J iv.248 (v. l.); iv.474; v.97 (cp. osāraka). Sārakkhati = saŋrakkhati
Sārakkhati
= saŋrakkhati Th 1, 729. Sārakkhā
Sārakkhā
(f.) [fr. sa3+rakkha] "standing under protec- tion" (?), a category of married women Vin iii.139 (cp. M i.287). Sārajja
Sārajja
(nt.) [abstr. fr. sārada = *sāradya] timidity A iii.127, 203; iv.359, 364; Miln 24, 72, 196 (parisa˚, cp. Nd2 470); J i.334; ii.66; nissārajja undaunted J i.274. Sārajjati
Sārajjati
[saŋ+raj, cp. BSk. sārajyati, Sk. saŋrajyate, cp. sārāga] to be pleased with, to be attached to A i.260; S ii.172; iii.69 sq.; iv.10 sq. Sārajjanā
Sārajjanā
(f.) [fr. sārajjati] infatuation, feeling infatuated Dhs 389; J v.446. Sārajjāyati
Sārajjāyati
[Denom. of sārajja] to be embarrassed, per- plexed, ashamed S iii.92; A iv.359. Sārajjitatta
Sārajjitatta
(nt.) [ = sārajjanā] infatuation, the state of being infatuated Dhs 389. Sāraṇā
Sāraṇā
(f.) [fr. sāreti2] reminding, remonstrating with Vin v.158, 164. Sāratta
Sāratta
[ = saŋratta, pp. of sārajjati] impassioned, en- amoured, passionately devoted Vin iii.118; M ii.160, 223; S i.74, 77; Dh 345; J i.288; ii.140; Mhvs 10, 34 (˚mānaso). asāratta unattached Sn 704. Sārathi
Sārathi
[fr. sa -- ratha; Vedic sārathi] charioteer, coachman D ii.178, 254; S i.33; v.6; A ii.112; iv.190 sq.; Sn 83; J i.59, 180; Pv iv.33. assadammasārathi a coachman by whom horses are driven, a trainer of horses M i.124; S iv.176; purisadammasārathi a coachman of the driving animal called man, a man -- trainer Vin i.35; D i.49; Sn p. 103; It 79. -- In similes: Vism 466; KhA 21. -- 706 -- Sārada
Sārada
(adj.) [Vedic śārada, fr. śarad autumn (of Babyl. origin? cp. Assyr. šabātu corn month)] autumnal, of the latest harvest, this year's, fresh A iii.404 = D iii.354 (bījāni fresh seeds); A i.135, 181 (badara -- paṇḍu); S iii.54; v.380; Miln 255; Dh 149 (but at this passage expld as "scattered by the autumn winds" DhA iii.112). -- asārada stale, old D ii.353; S v.379. Fig. sārada unripe, not experienced, immature (see sārajja shyness), opp. visārada (der. vesārajja) experienced, wise, selfconfident; vīta -- sārada id. (e. g. A ii.24; It 123). -- Note: At K.S. iii.46 (=S iii.54) s. is wrongly taken as sāra+da, i. e. "giving sāra"; but seeds do not give sāra: they contain sāra (cp. sāravant). The C expln as sār -- ādāyin is nearer the truth, but of course not literal; ˚da is not ā+˚da, Moreover, the fig. meaning cannot be reconciled with this expln. Sāradika
Sāradika
(adj.) [fr. sārada] autumnal Vin i.199; ii.41; Dh 285 = J i.183; Vv 6417; DhA iii.428. Sāraddha
Sāraddha
[ = saŋraddha] violent, angry A i.148, 282; S iv.125; M i.21; Vism 134 (opp. passaddha -- kāya), 282 (˚kāya); VbhA 283 (id.). Sārana
Sārana
[fr. sarati1] going DhsA 133. Sārameya
Sārameya
[Vedic sārameya] a dog (lit. "son of Saramā") Mhbv 111. Sārambha
Sārambha1
[ = saŋrambha] 1. impetuosity, anger A i.100, 299; ii.193; M i.16; Dh 133; J iv.26; Miln 289 (sasaŋrambha). -- 2. quarrel Sn 483; J ii.223; v.141. -> 3. pride Th 1, 759; VvA 139.

-- kathā angry or haughty talk, imperiousness Dh 133; M i.16; DhA iii.57. Sārambha
Sārambha2
[sa+ārambha] involving killing or danger to living creatures Vin iii.149; A ii.42 sq. Cp. samārambha. Sārambhin
Sārambhin
(adj.) [fr. sārambha] impetuous J iii.259. Sāravant
Sāravant
(adj.) [fr. sāra] valuable, having kernel or pith (said of grain or trees) A iv.170 (synom. daḷha, opp. palāpa); S v.163; M i.111 = 233. Sārasa
Sārasa
[cp. Epic Sk. sārasa] a water bird, Ardea sibirica VvA 57, 163; at both pass. = koñca. Sārāga
Sārāga
[ = saŋrāga, fr. saŋ+raj] affection, infatuation Vin ii.258; M i.17, 498; A i.264; S iii.69 sq., 93; Dhs 1059, 1230; cp. saŋrāga. -- Neg. a˚ Dhs 32, 312, 315. Sārāgin
Sārāgin
(adj.) [fr. last] attached to M i.239 (sukha -- ˚); sukha -- sārāgita ibid. impassioned. Sārāṇīya
Sārāṇīya
(adj.) [the question of derivation is still unsettled. According to Trenckner (Notes 75) fr. saraṇa (i. e. saraṇa1 or sarana2?) with double vṛddhi. Kern (Toev. ii.74) considers the (B) Sk. saŋrañjanīya as the original and derives it fr. saŋ+raj to rejoice, to gladden: see rañjati. The BSk. is divided: MVastu iii.47, 60, 206 etc. has sārāyaṇiya, whereas AvŚ i.229 & Divy 404 read saŋrañjanī and saŋrañjanīya (see below). -- The C. at J iv.99 derives it fr. saraṇa3 in explaining sārāṇīyā kathā as "sāritabba -- yuttakā kathā"] courteous, polite, friendly (making happy, pleasing, gladdening?), only in combn with kathā, dhamma, or dhammakathā, e. g. s. kathā polite speech, either in phrase sammodanīyaŋ kathaŋ sārāṇīyaŋ vītisāreti to exchange greetings of friendliness & courtesy D i.52; M i.16 (expld inter alia as "anussariyamānasukhato s." at MA 110); A i.55, 281; ii.42; cp. BSk. sammodanīŋ saŋrañjanīŋ vividhāŋ k. vyatisārya AvŚ i.229. -- sārāṇīyaŋ kathaŋ. katheti DhA i.107; iv.87; sārāṇīyā dhammā states of conciliation, fraternal living (Dial. iii.231) D iii. 245; M i.322; ii.250; A iii.288; v.89; DhsA 294; J v.382; cp. BSk. saŋrañjanīyan dharmaŋ samādāya Divy 404. -- sārāṇīyaŋ dhammakathaŋ suṇāti DhA iv.168. Sāri
Sāri
[cp. *Sk. śāri] chessman DA i.85. Sārin
Sārin
(adj.) [fr. sāreti] wandering, going after, following, conforming to (loc.) J v.15; aniketasārin wandering about houseless Sn 844, 970; anokasārin wandering homeless Dh 404; Sn 628; diṭṭhisārin a partisan of certain views Sn 911; vaggasārin conforming to a party, a partisan Sn 371, 800, 912. Sārīrika
Sārīrika
(adj.) [fr. sarīra] connected with the body, bodily M i.10; A i.168 sq.; ii.153; (nt.) bodily relics Miln 341; ˚ŋ cetiyaŋ one of the 3 kinds: paribhogika, s., uddesika J iv.228. Sāruppa
Sāruppa
(nt.) [abstr. fr. sarūpa, BSk. sārūpya & sāropya] equal state; as adj. fit, suitable, proper Vin i.39, 287; D ii.277; S iv.21 sq.; J i.65, 362; DhsA 294; Sn 368; p. 79, 97, 104; J iv.404. (a˚) (nt.) Vism 24; PvA 269. paribbājaka -- s˚, as befits a Wanderer J v.228. Sāreti
Sāreti
is Caus. of sarati1 as well as sarati2. Cp. vīti˚. Sāropin
Sāropin
(adj.) [saŋ+ropin, cp. ropeti1 & rūhati1] healing, curative M ii.257 (vaṇa -- ˚). Sāla
Sāla
[cp. Sk. śāla & sāla] a Sal tree (Shorea robusta) M i.488; D ii.134; A i.202; iii.49, 214; Dh 162.

-- māḷaka an enclosure of Sal trees J i.316. -- rukkha Sal tree VvA 176. -- laṭṭhi Sal sprout A ii.200. -- vana Sal grove D ii.134; M i.124; S i.157; Vv 392. Sālaka
Sālaka
[Sk. syāla+ka] a brother-in-law J ii.268. Sālakakimi
Sālakakimi
a kind of worm Miln 312. Sālaya
Sālaya
(adj.) [sa3+ālaya] having intentions (on), being attached (to = loc.) J iii.332. Sālā
Sālā
(f.) [cv. Vedic śālā, cp. Gr. kali/a hut, Lat. cella cell, Ohg. halla, E. hall] a large (covered & enclosed) hall, large room, house; shed, stable etc., as seen fr. foll. examples: aggi˚ a hall with a fire Vin i.25, 49 = ii.210; āsana˚ hall with seats DhA ii.65; udapāna˚ a shed over the well Vin i.139; ii.122; upaṭṭhāna˚ á service hall Vin i.49, 139; ii.153, 208, 210; S ii.280; v.321; J i.160; kaṭhina˚ a hall for the kaṭhina Vin ii.117. kīḷa˚ playhouse J vi.332; kutūhala˚ a common room D i.179= S iv.398. kumbhakāra˚ potter's hall DhA i.39; gilāna˚ sick room, hospital S iv.210; Vism 259; jantāghāra˚ (large) bath room Vin i.140; ii.122; dāna˚ a hall for donations J i.262; dvāra˚ hall with doors M i.382; ii.66; pāniya˚ a water -- room Vin ii.153; bhatta˚ refectory Vism 72; yañña˚ hall of sacrifice PugA 233; rajana˚ dyeing workshop Vism 65; ratha˚ car shed DhA iii.121; hatthi˚ an elephant stable Vin i.277, 345; ii.194; J i.187. Sālākiya
Sālākiya
(nt.) [cp. Sk. śālākya in Suśruta] ophthalmology D i.12, 69; DA i.98. Sāli
Sāli
[cp. Sk. śāli] rice D i.105, 230; ii.293; Vin iv.264; M i.57; A i.32, 145; iii.49; iv.108 (+yavaka), 231; S v.10, 48; J i.66, 178; iv.276; v.37; vi.531; Miln 251; Sn 240 sq.; Vism 418; pl. ˚ -- iyo J i.325; gen. pl. ˚ -- inaŋ J vi.510. -- lohitaka˚ red rice Miln 252.

-- khetta a rice -- field A i.241; iv.278; Vin ii.256; DhA i.97; iii.6. -- gabbha ripening (young) rice DhA i.97. -- bīja rice seed A i.32; v.213. -- bhatta a meal of rice Vism 191. -- bhojana rice food J i.178. Sālika
Sālika
(adj.) [fr. sāli] belonging to rice DhA iii.33. Sālikā
Sālikā
(f.) [cp. Epic Sk. sārikā crow, usually combd with śuka parrot] a kind of bird S i.190 = Th 1, 1232; J v.110. See sāliya & sāḷikā. Sālittaka
Sālittaka
(nt.) [fr. Sk. saŋlepa?] a sling, catapult (?); slinging stones, throwing potsherds etc. Pv iv.167; PvA 285; J i.418, 420; DhA ii.69. Sālin
Sālin
excellent Dāvs i.9. -- 707 -- Sāliya
Sāliya
or sāliyā the maina bird ( = sālikā) J iii.203; sāliya- chāpa (a young bird of that kind), and sāliyacchāpa (i. e. sāliyā which is probably the right form) J iii.202. -> madhu -- sāliyā J v.8 (=suvaṇṇa -- sālika -- sakunā C. p. 911); J vi.199 (suva -- sāliya -- ˚), 425 (Sāliya -- vacana the story of the maina bird, var. read. suva -- khaṇḍa; a section of the 546th Jātaka, but sāḷiyā, sālikā, sāliyā is not a paṛrot. Sālīna
Sālīna
(adj.) [fr. sāli] fine (rice) Miln 16 (˚ŋ odanaŋ; cp. śālīnaŋ odanaŋ Divy 559). Sāluka
Sāluka
(& ˚ūka) (nt.) [cp. Sk. śālūka] the edible root of the water -- lily Vin i.246; J vi.563; VvA 142 (˚muṭṭhi). Sālūra
Sālūra
[but cp. Sk. śālūra a frog] a dog J iv.438 (˚ -- saŋgha = sunakhagaṇa, C.; spelling ḷ). Sāloka
Sāloka
[sa2+āloka] sight, view, sāloke tiṭṭhati to expose oneself to view in an open door Vin ii.267. Sālohita
Sālohita
[fr. sa2+lohita] a kinsman, a blood relation, usually together with ñāti Vin i.4; D ii.26, 345; A i.139, 222; ii.115; Sn p. 91; PvA 28; VbhA 108. Sāḷava
Sāḷava
[cp. Sk. ṣāḍava, which is given in diff. meaning, viz. "comfits with fruits"] a certain dish, perhaps a kind of salad, given as "lambila," i. e. bitter or astringent at DhsA 320 (made of badara or kapiṭṭha); cp. Vin iv.259. Sāḷika
Sāḷika
a bird; f. ˚ā the Maina bird J i.429; vi.421. Spelt sāḷiyā at J vi.425. See sālikā & sāliya. Sāva
Sāva
[fr. sru] juice VvA 186. Sāvaka
Sāvaka
[fr. śru] a hearer, disciple (never an Arahant) D i.164; ii.104; iii.47, 52, 120 sq., 133; A i.88; M i.234; S ii.26; It 75 sq., 79; J i.229; Vism 214, 411. -- fem. sāvikā D ii.105; iii.123; Th 2, 335; S iv.379; A i.25, 88. (Cp. ariya -- ˚, agga -- ˚, mahā).

-- sangha the congregation of the eight Aryas M ii.120; S i.220 (cattāri purisayugāni aṭṭha purisapuggalā); ii.79 sq.; It 88. Sāvakatta
Sāvakatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. last] the state of a disciple M i.379 sq. Sāvajja
Sāvajja
(adj.) [sa+avajja] blameable, faulty D i.163; ii.215; M i.119; S v.66, 104 sq.; Sn 534; Pug 30, 41; (nt.) what is censurable, sin J i.130; Miln 392; VbhA 382 (mahā˚ or appa˚, with ref. to var. crimes). Sāvajjatā
Sāvajjatā
(f.) [fr. last] guilt Miln 293. Sāvaṭa
Sāvaṭa
(nt.) name of a certain throw in playing at dice J vi.281 (v. l. sāvaṭṭa). Sāvaṭṭa
Sāvaṭṭa
(adj.) [sa3+āvaṭṭa] containing whirlpools It 114. Sāvana
Sāvana
(nt.) [fr. sāveti] shouting out, announcement, sound, word J ii.352; Sdhp 67. Sāvasesa
Sāvasesa
(adj.) [sa3+avasesa] with a remainder, incom- plete, of an offence which can be done away Vin i.354; ii.88; v.153; A i.88. -- Of a text (pāṭha) KhA 238; SnA 96. Sāvi
Sāvi
[Sk. śvāvidh, see Lüder's Z.D.M.G. 61, 643] a por- cupine J v.489 (MSS. sāmi and sāsi, cp. Manu v.18). Sāvittī
Sāvittī
(f.) the Vedic verse Sāvitrī Sn 457, 568 = Vin i.246 (Sāvitthī); J iv.184. Sāvetar
Sāvetar
[n. ag. fr. sāveti] one who makes others hear, who tells D i.56; A iv.196. Sāveti
Sāveti
is Caus. of suṇāti. Sāsa
Sāsa
[Sk. śvāsa, fr. śvas] asthma A v.110; J vi.295. Sāsanka
Sāsanka
(adj.) [fr. sa3+āsankā] dangerous, fearful, sus- picious S iv.175 (opp. khema); Th 2, 343; ThA 241; Vism 107; J i.154; PvA 13; Miln 351. Sāsati
Sāsati
[śās, Dhtp 300 = anusiṭṭhi] to instruct, teach, command; tell J vi.472 (dūtāni, =pesesi C.); inf. săsituŋ J vi.291 (=anusāsituŋ C.). Sāsana
Sāsana
(nt.) [cp. Vedic śāsana] order, message, teaching J i.60, 328; ii.21; Pv iv.354 (Buddhānaŋ); KhA 11 sq.; the doctrine of the Buddha Vin i.12; D i.110; ii.206; A i.294; Dh 381; Sn 482 etc.; J i.116. sāsanaŋ āroceti to give a message (dūtassa to the messenger) Vin iii.76.

-- antaradhāna the disappearance or decline of the teaching of the Buddha. Said of the doctrine of Kassapa Bhagavā SnA 156 (cp. sāsane parihāyamāne SnA 223), and with ref. to the Pāli Tipiṭaka VbhA 432 sq., where 3 periods of the development of the Buddhist doctrine are discussed, viz. sāsana -- ṭhita -- kāla, ˚osakkana -- kāla, ˚antaradhāna. -- kara complying with one's order and teaching M i.129; -- kāraka the same Sn 445; -- kārin the same A ii.26; susāsanaŋ dussānaŋ J i.239 (English transl.: "true and false doctrine," "good and bad news"). -- hara (+˚jotaka) taking up (& explaining) an order SnA 164. Sāsapa
Sāsapa
[cp. Sk. sarṣapa] a mustard seed S ii.137; v.464; A v.170; J vi.174 (comp. with mt. Meru); Sn 625, 631, p. 122; Dh 401; DA i.93; DhA i.107; ii.51; iv.166; Vism 306 (ār'agge), 633; PvA 198 (˚tela). -- ˚kuṭṭa mustard powder Vin i.205; ii.151. Sāsava
Sāsava
(adj.) [sa3 = āsava] connected with the āsavas D iii.112; A i.81; Dhs 990, 1103; Nett 80. Sāha
Sāha
six days (cp. chāha) J vi.80 ( = chadivasa, C.). Sāhatthika
Sāhatthika
(adj.) [fr. sahattha] with one's own hand J i.168; DhsA 97; SnA 493; KhA 29. Sāhaŋ
Sāhaŋ
contraction of so ahaŋ. Sāhasa
Sāhasa
[fr. sahas power] violent, hasty Sn 329; (nt.) violence, arbitrary action, acts of violence Sn 943; J vi.284; Mhvs 6, 39; sāhasena arbitrarily A v.177; opp. a˚ ibid.; Dh 257; J vi.280. sāhasaŋ id. J vi.358 ( = sāhasena sāhasikaŋ kammaŋ katvā ibid. 359); adv. asāhasaŋ=asāhasena J iii.319 (C. sāhasiyataṇhāya ibid. 320, if we do not have to read sāhasiyā taṇhāya, from sāhasī).

-- kiriyā violence J iii.321. Sāhasika
Sāhasika
(adj.) [fr. sāhasa] brutal, violent, savage J i.187, 504; ii.11; PvA 209; DhA i.17. Sāhasiyakamma
Sāhasiyakamma
(nt.) a brutal act J i.412, 438. Sāhāra
Sāhāra
(adj.) [sa+āhāra] with its food S iii.54 (viññāṇa s.); D ii.96 (Vesālī s.; trsln "with its subject territory"). Sāhin
Sāhin
( -- ˚) (adj.) [fr. sah] enduring It 32. See asayha˚. Sāhu
Sāhu
(adj.) [ = sādhu] good, well Vin i.45; S i.8; Pug 71 sq.; Th 1, 43; VvA 284. Sāhuḷacīvara
Sāhuḷacīvara
(nt.) a coarse cloth M i.509 (cp. Deśīnāma- mālā viii.52; Karpūramañjarī p. 19; J.P.T.S. 1891, 5, and Prākrit sāhulī, Z.D.M.G., xxviii., p. 415). Sāhuneyyaka
Sāhuneyyaka
see āhuneyya. Sāhunna
Sāhunna
[ = sāhuḷa] a strip of ragged cloth Pv iii.16; PvA 173; J.P.T.S. 1891, 5; var. read. sāhunda. Si
Si
( -- ˚) [ = svid, for which ordinarily ˚su] part. of interro- gation; e. g. kaŋ -- si DhA i.91. Siŋsaka
Siŋsaka
(nt.) [Sk. śīrṣaka?] name of a water plant J vi.536 (C. not correct). -- 708 -- Siŋsati
Siŋsati1
[śaŋs] to hope for Dhtp 296 (def. as "icchā"); only in cpd. ā˚ (q. v.). Siŋsati
Siŋsati2
is Desiderative of sarati1. -- Siŋsati "to neigh" at J v.304 is to be read hiŋsati (for hesati, q. v.). Siŋsapā
Siŋsapā
(f.) [cp. Vedic śiŋśapā] the tree Dalbergia sisu (a strong & large tree) S v.437; Siŋsapā -- groves (s. -- vanā) are mentioned near Āḷavi A i.136; near Setavyā D ii.316 sq.; DhA i.71; VvA 297; and near Kosambi S v.437. Sikatā
Sikatā
(f.) [cp. Sk. sikatā] sand, gravel; suvaṇṇa˚ gold dust A i.253. Sikāyasamaya
Sikāyasa
-- maya (adj.) [made of tempered steel (said of swords) J vi.449 (cp. Notes of the trsln p. 546). Sikkā
Sikkā
(f.) [cp. Sk. śikyā] string, string of a balance Vin ii.110; 131, J i.9; ii.399; iii.13 (text sikkhā); vi.242; VvA 244 (muttā˚ string of pearls); Kvu 336 sq. Sikkhati
Sikkhati
[Vedic śikṣati; Desid. to śak: see sakkoti. -- The Dhtp (12) gives "vijj' opādāna" as meaning] 1. to learn, to train oneself ( = ghaṭati vāyamati Vism 274); usually combined with the locative, thus sikkhā -- padesu s. to train oneself in the Sikkhāpadas D i.63, 250; Vin i.84; It 96, 118; also with the dative, indicating the purpose; thus vinayāya s. to train oneself to give up Sn 974; the thing acquired by training is also put in the accusative; thus nibbānaŋ s. to learn, to train oneself towards Nibbāna Sn 940, 1061; Miln 10; Pot. sikkheyyāsi Miln 10; sikkheyyāma D ii.245; sikkhema Sn 898; sikkhe Sn 974; sikkheyya Sn 930. Fut. sikkhissāmi Vin iv.141; sikkhissāmase Sn 814; ppr. sikkhanto Sn 657; ppr. med. sikkhamāna training oneself Vin iv.141; D ii.241; It 104, 121; sikkhamānā (f.) a young woman undergoing a probationary course of training in order to become a nun Vin i.135, 139, 145, 147, 167; iv.121; A iii.276; S ii.261; grd. sikkhitabba Vin i.83; J vi.296; M i.123; D ii.138; Miln 10; & sikkha that ought to be learnt Miln 10; inf. sikkhituŋ Vin i.84, 270; ger. sikkhitvā Miln 219. -- 2. to want to overcome, to try, tempt D ii.245. -- pp. sikkhita. -> Caus. II. sikkhāpeti to teach, to train J i.162, 187, 257; DA i.261; Miln 32; PvA 3, 4. Sikkhana
Sikkhana
(nt.) [fr. śikṣ] training, study J i.58. Sikkhā
Sikkhā
(f.) [Vedic śikṣā] 1. study, training, discipline Vin iii.23; D i.181; A i.238; S ii.50, 131; v.378; Dhs 1004; VbhA 344 (various). -- sikkhaŋ paccakkhātaka one who has abandoned the precepts Vin i.135, 167; ii.244 sq. (cp. sikkhā -- paccakkhāna Vin ii.279, and sikkhaŋ apaccakkhāya Vin iii.24; S iv.190; sikkhā apaccakkhātā, ibid.); tisso sikkhā S iii.83; Ps i.46 sq.; Miln 133, 237; Nd1 39; explained as adhisīla -- , adhicitta -- , and adhipaññā -- sikkhā A i.234 sq.; Nett 126; with the synonyms saŋvara, samādhi & paññā at Vism 274. -> 2. (as one of the 6 Vedāngas) phonology or phonetics, combd with nirutti (interpretation, etymology) DA i.247 = SnA 447.

-- ānisaŋsa whose virtue is training, praise of discipline A ii.243; It 40 -- ânusantatavutti whose behaviour is thoroughly in accordance with the discipline Nett 112. -- kāma anxious for training Vin i.44; D ii.101; S v.154, 163; A i.24, 238; ˚ -- tā anxiety for training J i.161. -- samādāna taking the precepts upon oneself Vin i.146; Miln 162; A i.238 sq.; iv.15; v.165. -- sājīva system of training Vin iii.23 sq.; Pug 57. Sikkhāpada
Sikkhāpada
(nt.) [sikkhā+pada, the latter in sense of pada 3. Cp. BSk. śikṣāpada] set of precepts, "preceptorial," code of training; instruction, precept, rule. -- 1. in general: D i.63, 146, 250; M i.33; A i.63, 235 sq.; ii.14, 250 sq.; iii.113, 262; iv.152, 290 sq.; S ii.224; v.187; Vin i.102; ii.95, 258; iii.177; iv.141 (sahadhammika), 143 (khudd' ânukhuddakāni); It 96, 118; VbhA 69 (bhesajja˚); DhA iii.16. -- 2. in special: the 5 (or 10) rules of morality, or the precepts to be adopted in particular by one who is entering the Buddhist community either as a layman or an initiate. There seem to have been only 5 rules at first, which are the same as the first 5 sīlas (see sīla 2 b): S ii.167; Vbh 285 (expld in detail at VbhA 381 sq.); DhA i.32 and passim. To these were added another 5, so as to make the whole list (the dasasikkhāpadaŋ or ˚padāni) one of 10 (which are not the 10 sīlas!). These are (6) vikāla -- bhojanā ( -- veramaṇī) not eating at the wrong hour; (7) nacca -- gītavādita -- visūka -- dassanā˚ to avoid worldly amusements; (8) mālā -- gandha -- vilepana -- dhāraṇa -- maṇḍana -- vibhūsanaṭṭhānā˚ to use neither unguents nor ornaments; (9) uccā -- sayana -- mahā -- sayanā˚ not to sleep on a high, big bed; (10) jātarūpa rajata -- paṭiggahaṇā˚ not to accept any gold or silver: Vin i.83 = Kh ii.; A i.211, and frequently. -- dasa -- sikkhāpadikā (f.) conforming to the 10 obligations (of a nun) Vin iv.343 (=sāmaṇerī). There is nowhere any mention of the 8 sikkhāpadas as such, but they are called aṭṭhangika uposatha (see sīla 2b), e. g. Mhvs 37, 202. -- diyaḍḍha -- sikkhāpada -- sata the 150 precepts, i. e. the Pāṭimokkha A i.230, 234; Miln 243. Sikkhāpaka
Sikkhāpaka
(adj.) [fr. sikkhāpeti] teaching PvA 252; Miln 164. Sikkhāpana
Sikkhāpana
(nt.) [fr. sikkhāpeti] teaching Miln 163. Sikkhāpanaka
Sikkhāpanaka
teaching J i.432. Sikkhita
Sikkhita
[pp. of sikkhati] trained, taught Vin iv.343 (˚sikkha, adj., trained in . . .; chasu dhammesu); Miln 40; PvA 263 (˚sippa). Sikhaṇḍin
Sikhaṇḍin
(adj. -- n.) [Sk. śikhaṇḍin] 1. tufted, crested (as birds); J v.406; vi.539; Th 1, 1103 (mayūra); with tonsured hair (as ascetics) J iii.311. -- 2. a peacock J v.406; VvA 163. Sikhara
Sikhara
[cp. Sk. śikhara] the top, summit of a mountain J vi.519; Miln 2; a peak DhA iii.364 (˚thūpiyo or ˚thūpikāyo peaked domes); the point or edge of a sword M i.243; S iv.56; crest, tuft J ii.99; (this is a very difficult reading; it is explained by the C. by sundara (elegant); Trenckner suggests singāra, cp. ii.98); a bud Th 2, 382. Sikhariṇī
Sikhariṇī
(f.) [fr. last] a kind of woman (with certain defects of the pudendum) Vin ii.271; iii.129 (text, ˚aṇī). Sikhā
Sikhā
(f.) [Vedic śikhā] point, edge M i.104; crest, top- knot DA i.89; J v.406; of a flame Dh 308; DhsA 124; of fire (aggi˚) Sn 703; J v.213; (dhūma˚) J vi.206; of a ray of light J i.88; in the corn trade, the pyramid of corn at the top of the measuring vessel DA i.79; ˚ -- bandha top -- knot D i.7; vātasikhā (tikkhā a raging blast) J iii.484; susikha (adj.) with a beautiful crest Th 1, 211 (mora), 1136. Sikkhitaṛ
Sikkhitaṛ
[n. ag. fr. sikkhati] a master, adept; proficient, professional J vi.449, 450. Sikhin
Sikhin
(adj.) [fr. sikhā] crested, tufted Th 1, 22 (mora); J ii.363 (f. ˚inī). Also name of (a) the fire J i.215, 288; (b) the peacock Sn 221, 687. Sigāla
Sigāla
(śṛ˚) [cp. Vedic sṛgāla; as loan -- word in English = jackal] a jackal D ii.295; iii.24 sq.; A i.187; S ii.230, 271; iv.177 sq. (text singāla); iv.199; J i.502; iii.532 (Pūtimaŋsa by name). -- sigālī (f.) a female jackal J i.336; ii.108; iii.333 (called Māyāvī); Miln 365. -- See also singāla. Sigālika
Sigālika
(adj.) [fr. sigāla] belonging to a jackal J ii.108; iii.113 (˚aŋ nādaŋ, cp. segalikaŋ A i.187, where the Copenhagen MS. has sigālakaŋ corrected to segālakaŋ). -- (nt.) a jackal's roar (sigālakaŋ nadati) D iii.25. Cp. segālaka. -- 709 -- Siggu
Siggu
(nt.) [cp. Vedic śigru, N. of a tribe; as a tree in Suśruta] name of a tree (Hyperanthera moringa) J iii.161; v.406. Singa
Singa1
(nt.) [Vedic śṛnga, cp. Gr. ka/rnon, kraggw/n; Lat. cornu = E. horn] a horn J i.57, 149, 194; iv.173 (of a cow); Vism 106; VvhA 476.

-- dhanu horn -- bow DhA i.216. -- dhamaka blowing a horn Miln 31. Singa
Singa2
the young of an animal, calf J v.92; cp. Deśīnāma- mālā viii.31. Singāra
Singāra
[cp. Sk. śṛngāra] erotic sentiment; singāratā (f.) fondness of decorations J i.184; an elegant dress, finery Miln 2; (adj.) elegant, graceful (thus read) J ii.99; singāra -- bhāva being elegant or graceful (said of a horse) J ii.98. Singāla
Singāla
variant reading instead of sigāla S ii.231 etc.; Vism 196; Pv iii.52. Singika
Singika
(adj.) [fr. singa1] having horns J vi.354 (āvelita -- ˚ having twisted horns). Singin
Singin
(adj.) [Vedic śṛngin] having a horn Vin ii.300; J iv.173 ( = cow); clever, sharp -- witted, false Th 1, 959; A ii.26; It 112; cp. J.P.T.S. 1885, 53. Singila
Singila
a kind of horned bird J iii.73; DhA iii.22 (v. l. singala). Singivera
Singivera
(nt.) [Sk. śṛnga+Tamil vera "root," as E. loan word = ginger] ginger Vin i.201; iv.35; J i.244; iii.225 (alla -- ˚); Miln 63; Mhvs 28, 21; DhsA 320; DA i.81. Singī & singi
Singī
& singi (f.) [cp. Sk. śṛngī] 1. gold Vin i.38; S ii.234; J i.84. -- 2. "ginger" in sense of "dainties, sweets" J iv.352 ( = singiver' ādika uttaribhanga C.; cp. Tamil iñji ginger).

-- nada gold Vv 6428; VvA 284. -- loṇa ( -- kappa) license as to ginger & salt Vin ii.300, 306. -- vaṇṇa gold-coloured D ii.133. -- suvaṇṇa gold VvA 167. Singu
Singu
(f.) (?) a kind of fish J v.406; plur. singū J vi.537. According to Abhp. singū is m. and Payogasiddhi gives it as nt. Singhati
Singhati
[singh, given as "ghāyana" at Dhtp 34] to sniff, to get scent of S i.204 = J iii.308; DA i.38. Cp. upa˚. Singhāṭaka
Singhāṭaka
[cp. Sk. śṛngāṭaka; fr. śṛnga] (m. and n.) 1. a square, a place where four roads meet Vin i.237, 287, 344; iv.271; D i.83; A ii.241; iv.187, 376; S i.212; ii.128; iv.194; Miln 62, 330, 365; DhA i.317. aya -- s˚ perhaps an iron ring (in the shape of a square or triangle) M i.393; J v.45. -- 2. a water plant (Trapa bispinosa?) J vi.530, 563. Singhāṇikā
Singhāṇikā
(f.) [Sk. singhāṇaka] mucus of the nose, snot D ii.293; M i.187; Sn 196 -- 198 = J i.148 (all MSS. of both books -- n -- instead of -- ṇ -- ); Miln 154, 382; Pv ii.23; Vism 264 & 362 (in detail); DhA i.50; VbhA 68, 247. Sijjati
Sijjati
[svid, Epic Sk. svidyate] to boil (intr.), to sweat; ppr. sijjamāna boiling J i.503; Caus. sedeti (q. v.). The Dhtp 162 gives "pāka" as meaning of sid. -- pp. sinna (wet) & siddha1 (cooked). Sijjhati
Sijjhati
[sidh; Epic Sk. sidhyate. The Dhtp gives 2 roots sidh, viz. one as "gamana" (170), the other as "saŋsidhi" (419)] to succeed, to be accomplished, to avail, suit SnA 310; PvA 58, 113, 254 (inf. sijjhituŋ). -- pp. siddha. Siñcaka
Siñcaka
[fr. siñcati] watering, one who waters Vv 797 (amba˚). Siñcati
Siñcati
[sic, cp. Av. hinčaiti to pour; Lat. siat "urinate," Ags. sēon; Ohg. sīhan, Ger. ver -- siegen; Gr. i)kma/s wet; Goth saiws = E. sea. -- Dhtp 377: kkharaṇe] 1. to sprinkle J iii.144; v.26; Mhvs 37, 203; SnA 66. -- 2. to bale out a ship Sn 771; Dh 369. inf. siñcituŋ J vi.583; pass. siccati Th 1, 50 (all MSS. siñcati); imper. siñca Dh 369; ppr. med. siñcamāna Mhvs 37, 203; ger. sitvā Sn 771=Nett 6; pp. sitta. -- Caus. seceti to cause to sprinkle Mhvs 34, 45; Caus. II. siñcāpeti J ii.20, 104. -> Cp. pari˚. Siñcanaka
Siñcanaka
(adj.) [fr. siñcati] sprinkling (water) SnA 66 (vāta). Siṭṭha
Siṭṭha
[pp. of śiṣ; Sk. śiṣṭha] see vi˚. Siṇāti
Siṇāti
see seyyati. Sita
Sita1
(adj.) [pp. of śā; Sk. śita] sharp Dāvs i.32. Sita
Sita2
[pp. of sayati2] 1. (lit.) stuck in or to: hadaya˚ salla Sn 938; Nd1 412. -- 2. (fig.) reclining, resting, depending on, attached, clinging to D i.45, 76; ii.255; M i.364; Cp. 100; J v.453; Sn 229, 333, 791, 944, 1044. See also asita2. Sita
Sita3
[pp. of sinoti] bound; sātu -- ˚ Dh 341 (bound to plea- sure); taṇhā -- ˚ Miln 248. Perhaps as sita2. Sita
Sita4
(adj.) [Sk. sita] white Dāvs iii.4. Sita
Sita5
(nt.) [pp. of smi, cp. vimhāpeti. The other P. form is mihita] a smile Vin iii.105; iv.159; S i.24; ii.254; M ii.45; Th 1, 630; Ap 21 (pātukari), 22 (˚kamma) DhA ii.64 (˚ŋ pātvakāsi); iii.479; VvA 68. -- ˚kāra smiling J i.351 (as ˚ākāra). Sitta
Sitta
[pp. of siñcati] sprinkled Dh 369; J iii.144; Vism 109 Sittha
Sittha
(nt.) [cp. *Sk. siktha] a lump of boiled rice Vin ii.165, 214; J i.189, 235; v.387; vi.358 (odana˚), 365 (yāgu˚); PvA 99; sitthatelaka oil of beeswax Vin ii.107, 151.

-- âvakārakaŋ (adv.) scattering the lumps of boiled rice Vin iv.196. Sitthaka
Sitthaka
(nt.) [cp. Sk. sikthaka] beeswax Vin ii.116 (madhu˚). Sithila
Sithila
(adj.) [Vedic śithira, later śithila] loose, lax, bending, yielding S i.49, 77 = Dh 346=J ii.140; J i.179; ii.249; Miln 144; DhA iv.52, 56; PvA 13. In compn with bhū as sithilī˚, e. g. ˚bhāva lax state Vism 502=VbhA 100; ˚bhūta hanging loose PvA 47 (so read for sithila˚). -- ˚hanu a kind of bird M i.429. -- Cp. saṭhila. Siddha
Siddha1
[a specific Pali formation fr. sijjati (svid) in meaning "to cook," in analogy to siddha2] boiled, cooked J ii.435 ( = pakka); v.201 (˚bhojana); Miln 272; SnA 27 (˚bhatta=pakk'odana of Sn 18). Siddha
Siddha2
[pp. of sijjhati] ended, accomplished Mhvs 23, 45, 78; successful Miln 247. -- (m.) a kind of semi -- divine beings possessed of supernatural faculties, a magician Miln 120, 267 [cp. Sk. siddha Halāyudha 1, 87; Yogasūtra 3, 33; Aufrecht remarks: "This is a post -- vedic mythological fiction formed on the analogy of sādhya"].

-- attha one who has completed his task Miln 214. Siddhatthaka
Siddhatthaka
[Sk. siddhārthaka] white mustard ThA 181 (Ap. v.24); J iii.225; vi.537; DhA ii.273 (in Kisāgotamī story). Siddhi
Siddhi
(f.) [fr. sidh, Vedic siddhi] accomplishment, success, prosperity Mhvs 29, 70; Sdhp 14, 17, 325, 469; PvA 63 (attha˚ advantage); padasiddhi substantiation of the meaning of the word DA i.66; cp. sadda˚. Siddhika
Siddhika
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. siddhi] connected with success; nāmasiddhika who thinks luck goes by names J i.401; appasiddhika unprofitable, fatal, etc. J iv.4, 5 (sāgara); vi.34 (samudda). -- 710 -- Sināta
Sināta
[pp. of sināti] bathed, bathing M i.39; S i.169 = 183; J v.330. Sināti
Sināti1
(to bind): see sinoti. Sināti
Sināti2
[Vedic snāti, snā. For detail see nahāyati. The Dhtp 426 gives root sinā in meaning "soceyya," i. e. cleaning] to bathe; imper. sināhi M i.39; inf. sināyituŋ M i.39; aor. sināyi Ap 204. -- pp. sināta. Sināna
Sināna
(nt.) [fr. snā] bathing M i.39; S i.38, 43; iv.118; Nd2 39; Vism 17; VbhA 337. Sinānī
Sinānī
(f.) bath -- powder (?) M ii.46, 151, 182. Siniddha
Siniddha
[pp. of siniyhati; cp. Epic Sk. snigdha] 1. wet, moist Vism 171. -- 2. oily, greasy, fatty J i.463, 481; SnA 100 (˚āhāra fattening food). -- 3. smooth, glossy J i.89; iv.350 (of leaves); Miln 133. -- 4. resplendent, charming ThA 139. -- 5. pliable Vin i.279 (kāya, a body with good movement of bowels). -- 6. affectionate, attached, fond, loving J i.10; Miln 229, 361; VbhA 282 (˚puggala -- sevanatā). Siniyhati
Siniyhati
[Vedic snihyate, snih; cp. Av. snāēƶaiti it snows = Lat. ninguit, Gr. nei/gei; Oir. snigid it rains; Lat. nix snow=Gr. ni/ga =Goth, snaiws, Ohg. sneo =snow; Oir. snige rain; etc. -- The Dhtp 463 gives the 2 forms sinih & snih in meaning pīṇana. Cp. sineha] (to be moist or sticky, fig.) to feel love, to be attached Vism 317=DhsA 192 (in defn of mettā). Caus. sineheti (sneheti, snehayati) to lubricate, make oily or tender (through purgatives etc.) Vin i.279 (kāyaŋ); Miln 172; DA i.217 (temeti+); to make pliable, to soften Miln 139 (mānasaŋ). -- pp. siniddha. Sineha & sneha
Sineha
& sneha [fr. snih] Both forms occur without distinction; sneha more frequently (as archaic) in poetry. - A. sineha: 1. viscous liquid, unctuous moisture, sap S i.134; A i.223 sq.; J i.108; Dhs 652 ( = sinehana DhsA 335); Vism 262 (thīna˚=meda; vilīna˚=vasā). -- 2. fat J ii.44 (bahu˚); VbhA 67. -- 3. affection, love, desire, lust J i.190; ii.27; PvA 82. -- B. sneha: 1. (oily liquid) D i.74; Pv iii.52 (anguṭṭha˚, something like milk; expld as khīra PvA 198). -- 2. (affection) A ii.10; S iv.188 (kāma˚); Sn 36, 209, 943 (=chanda, pema, rāga, Nd1 426); J iv.11.

-- anvaya following an affection Sn 36. -- gata anything moist or oily A iii.394 sq.; DhsA 335. -- ja sprung from affection Sn 272; S i.207. -- bindu a drop of oil Vism 263. -- virecana an oily purgative J iii.48. Sinehaka
Sinehaka
a friend Mhvs 36, 44. Sinehana
Sinehana
(nt.) oiling, softening Miln 229; DhsA 335. - Cp. senehika. Sinehaniya
Sinehaniya
(adj.) [grd. formation fr. sinehana] softening, oily; ˚āni bhesajjāni softening medicines Miln 172 (opp. lekhaniyāni). Sinehita
Sinehita
[pp. of sineheti] lustful, covetous Dh 341; DhA iv.49. Sinoti
Sinoti
[sā or si; Vedic syati & sināti; the Dhtp 505 gives si in meaning "bandhana"] to bind DhsA 219 (sinoti bandhatī ti setu). pp. sita3. Sindī
Sindī
(f.) [etym.?] N. of a tree Vism 183, where KhA 49 in id. passage reads khajjūrikā. See also Abhp 603; Deśīn viii.29. Sinduvāra
Sinduvāra
[Sk. sinduvāra] the tree Vitex negundo DA i.252; DhsA 14, 317; also spelt sindhavāra VvA 177; sinduvārikā J vi.269; sindhuvāritā (i. e. sinduvārikā?) J vi.550 = 553; sinduvārita J iv.440, 442 (v. l. ˚vārakā). Sindhava
Sindhava
[Sk. saindhava] belonging to the Sindh, a Sindh horse J i.175; ii.96; iii.278; v.259; DhA iv.4 ( = Sindhava -- raṭṭhe jatā assā); (nt.) rock salt Vin i.202; Sindhavaraṭṭha the Sindh country ThA 270; J v.260. Sindhavāra
Sindhavāra
see sinduvāra. Sinna
Sinna
[pp. of sijjati; Vedic svinna] 1. wet with perspira- tion Vin i.46, 51; ii.223. -- 2. boiled (cp. siddha1) esp. in the comp. udaka -- sinna -- paṇṇa; it occurs in a series of passages J iii.142, 144; iv.236, 238, where Fausböll reads sitta, although the var. readings give also sinna. The English translation, p. 149, says "sprinkled with water," but the text, 238, speaks of leaves which are "sodden" (sedetvā). Sipāṭikā
Sipāṭikā
(f.) [cp. Sk. sṛpāṭikā, beak, BR.] 1. pericarp M i.306; Vv 8433; VvA 344; hingu˚ a s. yielding gum Vin i.201. Also written sipātikā; thus ādiṇṇasipātikā with burst pod or fruit skin S iv.193. -- 2. a small case, receptacle; khura˚ a razor case Vin ii.134. On s. at Pv iii.229 the C. has ekapaṭalā upānahā PvA 186. Sippa
Sippa
(nt.) [cp. Sk. śilpa] art, branch of knowledge, craft Sn 261; A iii.225; iv.281 sq., 322; D iii.156, 189; J i.239, 478; Miln 315; excludes the Vedas Miln 10; sabbasippāni J i.356, 463; ii.53; eight various kinds enumerated M i.85; twelve crafts Ud 31, cp. dvādasavidha s. J i.58; eighteen sippas mentioned J ii.243; some sippas are hīna, others ukkaṭṭha Vin iv.6 sq.; VbhA 410. asippa untaught, unqualified J iv.177; vi.228 = asippin Miln 250. -- sippaŋ uggaṇhāti to learn a craft VvA 138.

-- āyatana object or branch of study, art D i.51; Miln 78; VbhA 490 (pāpaka). -- uggahaṇa taking up, i. e. learning, a craft J iv.7; PvA 3. -- ṭṭhāna a craft M i.85; cp. BSk. śilpasthāna Divy 58, 100, 212. -- phala result of one's craft D i.51. -- mada conceit regarding one's accomplishment VbhA 468. Sippaka
Sippaka
= sippa J i.420. Sippavant
Sippavant
[fr. sippa] one who masters a craft J vi.296. Sippika
Sippika
[fr. sippa] an artisan Sn 613, 651; Miln 78; Vism 336. Also sippiya J vi.396, 397. Sippikā
Sippikā1
(f.) [fr. sippī] a pearl oyster J i.426; ii.100 (sippika- sambukaŋ); Vism 362 (in comp.) = VbhA 68. Sippikā
Sippikā2
at Th 1, 49 is difficult to understand. It must mean a kind of bird (˚abhiruta), and may be (so Kern) a misread pippikā (cp. Sk. pippaka & pippīka). See also Brethren p. 533. Sippī
Sippī
[cp. Prākrit sippī] (f.) a pearl oyster J ii.100; sippi- puṭa oyster shell J v.197, 206. sippi -- sambuka oysters and shells D i.84; M i.279; A i.9; iii.395. Sibala
Sibala
N. of a tree J vi.535. Sibba
Sibba
(nt.) [fr. sīv] a suture of the skull; plur. ˚ -- āni J vi.339; sibbinī (f.) the same Vin i.274. Sibbati
Sibbati
[sīv, Vedic sīvyati. The root is sometimes given as siv, e. g. Dhtp 390, with defn "tantu -- santāna"] to sew J iv.25; VvA 251. Pres. also sibbeti Vin ii.116; iv.61, 280; ger. sibbetvā J i.316; grd. sibbitabba J i.9; aor. sibbi J iv.25; & sibbesi Vin ii.289; inf. sibbetuŋ, Vin i.203. -- pp. sibbita. -- Caus. II. sibbāpeti J ii.197; Vin iv.61. Sibbana
Sibbana
(nt.) [fr. sīv] sewing Sn 304 = J iv.395; J i.220; vi.218. sibbanī (f.) "seamstress"=greed, lust Dhs 1059; A iii.399; DhsA 363; Sn 1040 (see lobha). -- ˚magga suture Vism 260; KhA 60 (id.). Sibbāpana
Sibbāpana
(nt.) [fr. sibbāpeti] causing to be sewn Vin iv.280. Sibbita
Sibbita
[pp. of sibbati] sewn Vin iv.279 (dus˚); J iv.20 (su˚); VbhA 252 (˚rajjukā). Cp. vi˚ & pari˚. -- 711 -- Sibbitar
Sibbitar
[n. ag. fr. sīv] one who sews M iii.126. Sibbinī
Sibbinī
Dhs 1059, read sibbanī. Cp. sibba. Simbali
Simbali
(f.) [cp. Vedic śimbala flower of the B., cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 109] the silk -- cotton tree Bombax heptaphyllum J i.203; iii.397; Vism 206; DhA i.279. ˚ -- vana a forest of simbali trees J i.202; ii.162 (s. ˚ -- pālibhaddaka -- vana); iv.277. sattisimbalivana the sword forest, in purgatory J v.453. Siyyati
Siyyati
see seyyati. Sira
Sira
(nt. and m.) [cp. Vedic śiras, śīan; Av. sarō, Gr. kara/ra head, ke/ras horn, krani/on; Lat. cerebrum; Ohg. hirni brain] head, nom. siraŋ Th 2, 255, acc. siraŋ A i.141; siro Sn 768; sirasaŋ J v.434; instr. sirasā Vin i.4; D i.126; Sn 1027; loc. sirasmiŋ M i.32; sire DA i.97; in compounds siro -- A i.138. -- sirasā paṭiggaṇhāti to accept with reverence J i.65; pādesu sirasā nipatati to bow one's head to another's feet, to salute respectfully Vin i.4, 34; Sn p. 15, p. 101. siraŋ muñcati to loosen the hair J v.434; cp. i.47; mutta˚ with loose hair KhA 120 = Vism 415; adho -- siraŋ with bowed head, head down A i.141; iv.133; J vi.298; cp. avaŋ˚; dvedhā˚ with broken head J v.206; muṇḍa˚ a shaven head DhA ii.125. Sirā
Sirā
[Sk. sirā] (f.) a bloodvessel, vein Mhvs 37, 136; nerve, tendon, gut J v.344, 364; ˚ -- jāla the network of veins J v.69; PvA 68. Siriŋsapa
Siriŋsapa
[Sk. sarīsṛpa] a (long) creeping animal, serpent, a reptile Vin i.3; ii.110; D ii.57; M i.10; S i.154; A ii.73, 117, 143; v.15; Sn 52, 964; J i.93; Pv iii.52; Nd1 484; VbhA 6. -- tta (nt.) the state of being a creeping thing D ii.57. Sirimant
Sirimant
(adj.) [siri+mant] glorious D ii.240. Sirī (siri)
Sirī
(siri) (f.) [Vedic śrī] 1. splendour, beauty Sn 686 (instr. siriyā); J vi.318 (siriŋ dhāreti). -- 2. luck, glory, majesty, prosperity S i.44 (nom. siri); J ii.410 (siriŋ), 466; DA i.148; VvA 323 (instr. buddha -- siriyā). rajjasirī -- dāyikā devatā the goddess which gives prosperity to the kingdom DhA ii.17; sirī+lakkhī splendour & luck J iii.443. -- 3. the goddess of luck D i.11 (see Rh. D. Buddhist India 216 -- 222); DA i.97; J v.112; Miln 191 (˚devatā). -- 4. the royal bed -- chamber ( = sirigabbha) J vi.383. -- assirī unfortunate Nett 62=Ud 79 (reads sassar'iva). sassirīka (q. v.) resplendent SnA 91; sassirika J v.177 (puṇṇa -- canda˚); opp. nissirīka (a) without splendour J vi.225, 456; (b) unlucky VvA 212 (for alakkhika). -- The composition form is siri˚.

-- gabbha bedroom J i.228, 266; iii. 125; v.214. -- corabrāhmaṇa "a brahmin who stole good luck" J ii.409 (cp. sirilakkhaṇa -- ˚). -- devatā goddess(es) of luck Miln 191 (+kalidevatā). -- dhara glorious Mhvs 5, 13. -- nigguṇḍi a kind of tree J vi.535. -- vilāsa pomp and splendour J iv.232. -- vivāda a bedchamber quarrel J iii.20 (sayanakalaho ti pi vadanti yeva, C.). -- sayana a state couch, royal bed J i.398; iii.264; vi.10; DhA ii.86; PvA 280. Sirīsa
Sirīsa
(nt.) [cp. Class. Sk. śirṣa] the tree Acacia sirissa D ii.4; S iv.193; Vv 8432; VvA 331, 344; ˚ -- puppha a kind of gem Miln 118. Cp. serīsaka. Siroruha
Siroruha
[Sk. śiras+ruha] the hair of the head Mhvs 1, 34; Sdhp 286. Silā
Silā
(f.) [cp. Sk. śilā] a stone, rock Vin i.28; S iv.312 sq.; Vin 445; DA i.154; J v.68; Vism 230 (in comparison); VbhA 64 (var. kinds); a precious stone, quartz Vin ii.238; Miln 267, 380; Vv 8415 ( = phalika˚ VvA 339); pada -- silā a flag -- stone Vin ii.121, 154. Cp. sela.

-- uccaya a mountain A iii.346; Th 1, 692; J i.29; vi.272, 278; Dāvs v.63. -- guḷa a ball of stone, a round stone M iii.94. -- tthambha (sila˚) stone pillar Mhvs 15, 173. -- paṭimā stone image J iv.95. -- paṭṭa a slab of stone, a stone bench J i.59; vi.37 (mangala˚); SnA 80, 117. -- pākāra stone wall Vin ii.153. -- maya made of stone J vi.269, 270; Mhvs 33, 22; 36, 104. -- yūpa a stone column S v.445; A iv.404; Mhvs 28, 2. -- santhāra stone floor Vin ii.120. Silāghati
Silāghati
[Epic Sk. ślāgh] to extol, only in Dhtp 30 as root silāgh, with defn "katthana," i. e. boasting. Silābhu
Silābhu
(nt.) a whip snake J vi.194 ( = nīlapaṇṇavaṇṇa- sappa). Siliṭṭha
Siliṭṭha
[cp. Sk. śliṣṭa, pp. of śliṣ to clasp, to which śleṣman slime = P. silesuma & semha. The Dhtp (443) expls silis by "ālingana"] adhering, connected A i.103; DA i.91; J iii.154; DhsA 15; Sdhp 489 (a˚). Siliṭṭhatā
Siliṭṭhatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. siliṭṭha] adherence, adhesion, junction Nd2 137 (byañjana˚, of "iti"). Silutta
Silutta
a rat snake J vi.194 ( = gharasappa). Silesa
Silesa
[fr. śliṣ] junction, embrace; a rhetoric figure, riddle, puzzle, pun J v.445 (silesūpamā said of women = purisānaŋ cittabandhanena silesasadisā, ibid. 447). Silesuma
Silesuma
(nt.) [Sk. śleṣman, fr. śliṣ. This the diaeretic form for the usual contracted form semha] phlegm Pv ii.23 ( = semha PvA 80). Siloka
Siloka
[Vedic śloka Dhtp 8: silok = sanghāta] fame D ii.223, 255; M i.192; S ii.226 (lābha -- sakkāra˚); A ii.26, 143; Sn 438; Vin i.183; J iv. 223 (=kitti -- vaṇṇa); Miln 325; SnA 86 (˚bhaṇana, i. e. recitation); pāpasiloka having a bad reputation Vin iv.239; asiloka blame A iv.364 (˚bhaya); J vi.491. -- 2. a verse Miln 71; J v.387. Silokavant
Silokavant
(adj.) [siloka+vant] famous M i.200. Siva
Siva
(adj. -- n.) [Vedic śiva] auspicious, happy, fortunate, blest S i.181; J i.5; ii.126; Miln 248; Pv iv.33; Vv 187. -- 2. a worshipper of the god Siva Miln 191; the same as Sivi J iii.468. -- 3. nt. happiness, bliss Sn 115, 478; S iv.370.

-- vijjā knowledge of auspicious charms D i.9; DA i.93 (alternatively explained as knowledge of the cries of jackals); cp. Divy 630 śivāvidyā. Sivā
Sivā
(f.) [Sk. śivā] a jackal DA i.93. Sivāṭikā
Sivāṭikā
various reading instead of sipāṭikā, which see. Sivikā
Sivikā
(f.) [Epic Sk. śibikā] a palanquin, litter Bu 17, 16 (text savakā); Pv i.111; Vin i.192; ˚ -- gabbha a room in shape like a palanquin, an alcove Vin ii.152; mañca -- ˚ J v.136, 262 (a throne palanquin?). suvaṇṇa˚ a golden litter J i.52, 89; DhA i.89; Vism 316. Siveyyaka
Siveyyaka
(adj.) hailing from the Sivi country, a kind of cloth (very valuable) Vin i.278, 280; J iv.401; DA i.133. The two latter passages read sīveyyaka. Sisira
Sisira
(adj.) [Sk. śiśira] cool, cold Dāvs v.33; VvA 132. (m.) cold, cold season Vin ii.47 = J i.93. Sissa
Sissa
[cp. Sk. śiṣya, grd. of śiṣ or śās to instruct: see sāsati etc.] a pupil; Sn 997, 1028; DhsA 32 (˚ânusissā). Sissati
Sissati
[Pass. of śiṣ to leave; Dhtp 630: visesana] to be left, to remain VvA 344. Cp. visissati. -- Caus. seseti to leave (over) D ii.344 (aor. sesesi); J i.399; v.107; DhA i.398 (asesetvā without a remainder). -- pp. siṭṭha: see visiṭṭha. Sīgha
Sīgha
(adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. śīghra] quick, rapid, swift M i.120; A i.45; Dh 29; Pug 42; ˚ -- gāmin walking quickly Sn 381; sīghasota swiftly running D ii.132; A ii.199; Sn 319; ˚ -- vāhana swift (as horses) J vi.22; cp. adv. sīghataraŋ Miln 82; sīghaŋ (adv.) quickly Miln 147; VvA 6; VbhA 256; usually redupl. sīgha -- sīghaŋ very quickly J i.103; PvA 4. -- 712 -- Sīta
Sīta
(adj.) [Vedic śīta] cold, cool D i.74, 148; ii.129; A ii.117, 143; Sn 467, 1014; Vin i.31, 288. (nt.) cold Vin i.3; J i.165; Mhvs 1, 28; Sn 52, 966. In compn with kṛ & bhū the form is sīti˚, e. g. sīti -- kata made cool Vin ii.122; sīti -- bhavati to become cooled, tranquillized S ii.83; iii.126; iv.213; v.319; Sn 1073 (sīti -- siyā, Pot. of bhavati); It 38; ˚ -- bhūta, tranquillized Vin i.8; ii.156; S i.141, 178; Sn 542, 642; A i.138; v.65; D iii.233; Vv 5324; Pv i.87; iv.132. sīti -- bhāva coolness, dispassionateness, calm A iii.435; Th 2, 360; Ps ii.43; Vism 248; VbhA 230; PvA 230; ThA 244. -> At J ii.163 & v.70 read sīna ("fallen") for sīta.

-- āluka susceptible of cold Vin i.288 (synon. sītabhīruka). -- uṇha cold and heat J i.10. -- odaka with cool water (pokkharaṇī) M i.76; Pv ii.104; sītodika (˚iya) the same J iv.438. -- bhīruka being a chilly fellow Vin i.28816 (cp. sītāluka). Sīta
Sīta
(nt.) sail J iv.21. So also in BSk.: Jtm 94. Sītaka = sīta
Sītaka
= sīta S iv.289 (vāta). Sītala
Sītala
(adj.) [cp. Vedic śītala] cold, cool J ii.128; DA i.1; Miln 246; tranquil J i.3; (nt.) coolness Miln 76, 323; VvA 44, 68, 100; PvA 77, 244. sītalībhāva becoming cool Sdhp 33. Sītā
Sītā
(f.) a furrow Vin i.240 (satta sītāyo); gambhīrasīta with deep mould (khetta) A iv.237, 238 (text, ˚ -- sita).

-- āloḷī mud from the furrow adhering to the plough Vin i.206. Sīti˚
Sīti˚
see sīta. The word sītisiyāvimokkha Ps ii.43, must be artificial, arisen from the pāda, sīti -- siyā vimutto Sn 1073 (on which see expln at Nd2 678). Sīdati
Sīdati
[sad, Idg. *si -- ƶd -- ō, redupl. formation like tiṣṭhati; cp. Lat. sīdo, Gr. i(/zw; Av. hidaiti. -- The Dhtp (50) gives the 3 meanings of "visaraṇa -- gaty -- avasādanesu"] to subside, sink; to yield, give way S i.53; Sn 939 ( = saŋsīdati osīdati Nd2 420); It 71; Mhvs 35, 35; 3rd pl. sīdare J ii.393; Pot. sīde It 71; fut. sīdissati: see ni˚. -- pp. sanna. -- Caus. sādeti (q. v.); Caus. II. sīdāpeti to cause to sink Sdhp 43. -- Cp. ni˚, vi˚. Sīdana
Sīdana
(nt.) [fr. sīdati] sinking Mhvs 30, 54. Sīna
Sīna1
[pp. of śṛ to crush; Sk. śīrṇa] fallen off, destroyed Miln 117 (˚patta leafless); J ii.163 (˚patta, so read for sīta˚). See also saŋsīna. Sīna
Sīna2
[pp. of sīyati; Sk. śīna] congealed; cold, frosty M i.79. Sīpada
Sīpada
(nt.) [Sk. slīpada] the Beri disease (elephantiasis) morbid enlargement of the legs; hence sīpadin and sīpadika suffering from that disease Vin i.91, 322. Sīmantinī
Sīmantinī
(f.) a woman J iv.310; vi.142. Sīmā
Sīmā
(f.) [cp. Sk. sīmā] boundary, limit, parish Vin i.106 sq., 309, 340; Nd1 99 (four); DhA iv.115 (mālaka˚); antosīmaŋ within the boundary Vin i.132, 167; ekasīmāya within one boundary, in the same parish J i.425; nissīmaŋ outside the boundary Vin i.122, 132; bahisīmagata gone outside the boundary Vin i.255. bhinnasīma transgressing the bounds (of decency) Miln 122. -- In compn sīma˚ & sīmā˚.

-- anta a boundary Mhvs 25, 87; sin Sn 484; J iv.311. -- antarikā the interval between the boundaries J i.265; Vism 74. -- âtiga transgressing the limits of sin, conquering sin Sn 795; Nd1 99. -- kata bounded, restricted Nd2 p. 153 (cp. pariyanta). -- ṭṭha dwelling within the boundary Vin i.255. -- samugghāta removal, abolishing, of a boundary Mhvs 37, 33. -- sambheda mixing up of the boundary lines Vism 193, 307, 315. Sīyati
Sīyati
[for Sk. śyāyati] to congeal or freeze: see visīyati & visīveti. -- pp. sīna2. Sīra
Sīra
[Vedic sīra] plough ThA 270 ( = nangala). Sīla
Sīla
(nt.) [cp. Sk. śīla. It is interesting to note that the Dhtp puts down a root sīl in meaning of samādhi (No. 268) and upadhāraṇa (615)] 1. nature, character, habit, behaviour; usually as -- ˚ in adj. function "being of such a nature," like, having the character of . . ., e. g. adāna˚ of stingy character, illiberal Sn 244; PvA 68 (+maccharin); kiŋ˚ of what behaviour? Pv ii.913; keḷi˚ tricky PvA 241; damana˚ one who conquers PvA 251; parisuddha˚ of excellent character A iii.124; pāpa˚ wicked Sn 246; bhaṇana˚ wont to speak DhA iv.93; vāda˚ quarrelsome Sn 381 sq. -- dussīla (of) bad character D iii.235; Dhs 1327; Pug 20, 53; Pv ii.82 (noun); ii.969 (adj.); DhA ii.252; iv.3; Sdhp 338; Miln 257; opp. susīla S i.141. -- 2. moral practice, good character, Buddhist ethics, code of morality. (a) The dasa -- sīla or 10 items of good character ( not "commandments") are (1) pāṇâtipātā veramaṇī, i. e. abstinence from taking life; (2) adinn'ādānā (from) taking what is not given to one; (3) abrahmacariyā adultery (oṭherwise called kāmesu micchā -- cārā); (4) musāvādā telling lies; (5) pisuna -- vācāya slander; (6) pharusa -- vācāya harsh or impolite speech; (7) samphappalāpā frivolous and senseless talk; (8) abhijjhāya covetousness; (9) byāpādā malevolence; (10) micchādiṭṭhiyā heretic views. -- Of these 10 we sometimes find only the first 7 designated as "sīla" per se, or good character generally. See e. g. A i.269 (where called sīla -- sampadā); ii.83 sq. (not called "sīla"), & sampadā. -- (b) The pañca -- sīla or 5 items of good behaviour are Nos. 1 -- 4 of dasa -- sīla, and (5) abstaining from any state of indolence arising from (the use of) intoxicants, viz. surā -- meraya -- majjapamāda -- ṭṭhānā veramaṇī. These five also from the first half of the 10 sikkha -- padāni. They are a sort of preliminary condition to any higher development after conforming to the teaching of the Buddha (saraṇaŋgamana) and as such often mentioned when a new follower is "officially" installed, e. g. Bu ii.190: saraṇâgamane kañci nivesesi Tathāgato kañci pañcasu sīlesu sīle dasavidhe paraŋ. From Pv iv.176 sq. (as also fr. Kh ii. as following upon Kh i.) it is evident that the sikkhāpadāni are meant in this connection (either 5 or 10), and not the sīlaŋ, cp. also Pv iv.350 sq., although at the above passage of Bu and at J i.28 as well as at Mhvs 18, 10 the expression dasa -- sīla is used: evidently a later development of the term as regards dasa -- sīla (cp. Mhvs trsln 122, n. 3), which through the identity of the 5 sīlas & sikkhāpadas was transferred to the 10 sikkhāpadas. These 5 are often simply called pañca dhammā, e. g. at A iii.203 sq., 208 sq. Without a special title they are mentioned in connection with the "saraṇaŋ gata" formula e. g. at A iv.266. Similarly the 10 sīlas (as above a) are only called dhammā at A ii.253 sq.; v.260; nor are they designated as sīla at A ii.221. -- pañcasu sīlesu samādapeti to instruct in the 5 sīlas (alias sikkhāpadāni) Vin ii.162. -- (c) The only standard enumerations of the 5 or 10 sīlas are found at two places in the Saŋyutta and correspond with those given in the Niddesa. See on the 10 (as given under a) S iv.342 & Nd2 s. v. sīla; on the 5 (also as under b) S ii.68 & Nd2 s. v. The so -- called 10 sīlas (Childers) as found at Kh ii. (under the name of dasa -- sikkhāpada) are of late origin & served as memorial verses for the use of novices. Strictly speaking they should not be called dasa -- sīla. -- The eightfold sīla or the eight pledges which are recommended to the Buddhist layman (cp. Miln 333 mentioned below) are the sikkhāpadas Nos. 1 -- 8 (see sikkhāpada), which in the Canon however do not occur under the name of sīla nor sikkhāpada, but as aṭṭhanga -- samannāgata uposatha (or aṭṭhangika u.) "the fast -- day with its 8 constituents." They are discussed in detail at A iv.248 sq., with a poetical setting of the eight at A iv.254 = Sn 400, 401 -- (d) Three special tracts on morality are found in the Canon. The Cullasīla (D i.3 sq.) consists first of the items (dasa) sīla 1-7; then follow specific injunctions as to practices of daily living & special conduct, of which the first 5 (omitting the introductory item of bījagāma -- bhūtagāma -- samārambha) form the second 5 sikkhāpadāni. Upon the Culla˚ follows the Majjhima˚ (D i.5 sq.) & then the Mahāsīla D i.9 sq. The whole of these 3 sīlas is called sīlakkhandha and is (in the Sāmaññaphala sutta e. g.) grouped with samādhi -- and paññākkhandha: D i.206 sq.; at A v.205, 206 sīla -- kkhandha refers to the Culla -- sīla only. The three (s., samādhi & paññā) are often mentioned together, e. g. D ii.81, 84; It 51; DA i.57. -- The characteristic of a kalyāṇa -- mitta is endowment with saddhā, sīla, cāga, paññā A iv.282. These four are counted as constituents of future bliss A iv.282, and form the 4 sampadās ibid. 322. In another connection at M iii.99; Vism 19. They are, with suta (foll. after sīla) characteristic of the merit of the devatās A i.210 sq. (under devat'ânussati). -- At Miln 333 sīla is classed as: saraṇa˚, pañca˚, aṭṭhanga˚, dasanga˚, pātimokkhasaŋvara˚, all of which expressions refer to the sikkhāpadas and not to the sīlas. -- At Miln 336 sq. sīla functions as one of the 7 ratanas (the 5 as given under sampadā up to vimuttiñāṇadassana; plus paṭisambhidā and bojjhanga). -- cattāro sīlakkhandhā "4 sections of morality" Miln 243; Vism 15 & DhsA 168 (here as pātimokkha -- saŋvara, indriya -- saŋvara, ājīvapārisuddhi, paccaya -- sannissita. The same with ref. to catubbidha sīla at J iii.195). See also under cpds. -> At Ps i.46 sq. we find the fivefold grouping as (1) pāṇâtipatassa pahānaŋ, (2) veramaṇī, (3) cetanā, (4) saŋvara, (5) avītikkama, which is commented on at Vism 49. -- A fourfold sīla (referring to the sikkhāpada) is given at Vism 15 as bhikkhu˚, bhikkhunī˚, anupasampanna˚ gahaṭṭha˚. -- On sīla and adhisīla see e. g. A i.229 sq.; VbhA 413 sq. -- The division of sīla at J iii.195 is a distinction of a simple sīla as "saŋvara," of twofold sīla as "caritta -- vāritta," threefold as "kāyika, vācasika, mānasika," and fourfold as above under cattāro sīlakkhandhā. -- See further generally: Ps i.42 sq.; Vism 3 sq.; Tikp 154, 165 sq., 269, 277; Nd1 14, 188 (expld as "pātimokkha -- saŋvara"); Nd2 p. 277; VbhA 143.

-- anga constituent of morality (applied to the pañcasikkhāpadaŋ) VbhA 381. -- ācāra practice of morality J i.187; ii.3. -- kathā exposition of the duties of morality Vin i.15; A i.125; J i.188. -- kkhandha all that belongs to moral practices, body of morality as forming the first constituent of the 5 khandhas or groups (+samādhi˚, paññā˚, vimutti˚, ñāṇadassana -- kkhandha), which make up the 5 sampadās or whole range of religious development; see e. g. Nd1 21, 39; Nd2 p. 277. -- Vin. 162 sq.; iii.164; A i.124, 291; ii.20; S i.99 sq.; It 51, 107; Nett 90 sq., 128; Miln 243; DhA iii.417. -- gandha the fragrance of good works Dh 55; Vism 58. -- caraṇa moral life J iv.328, 332. -- tittha having good behaviour as its banks S i.169, 183 (trsln Mrs. Rh. D. "with virtue's strand for bathing"). -- bbata [ = vata2] good works and ceremonial observances Dh 271; A i.225; S iv.118; Ud 71; Sn 231, etc.; sīlavata the same Sn 212, 782, 790, 797, 803, 899; It 79 sq.; ˚ -- parāmāsa the contagion of mere rule and ritual, the infatuation of good works, the delusion that they suffice Vin i.184; M i.433; Dhs 1005; A iii.377; iv.144 sq.; Nd1 98; Dukp 245, 282 sq.; DhsA 348; see also expln at Cpd. 171, n. 4. -> sīlabbatupādāna grasping after works and rites D ii.58; Dhs 1005, 1216; Vism 569; VbhA 181 sq. -- The old form sīlavata still preserves the original good sense, as much as "observing the rules of good conduct," "being of virtuous behaviour." Thus at Th 1, 12; Sn 212, 782 (expld in detail at Nd1 66), 790, 797, 803; It 79; J vi.491 (ariya˚). -- bheda a breach of morality J i.296. -- mattaka a matter of mere morality D i.3; DA i.55. -- maya consisting in morality It 51; VvA 10 (see maya, defn 6). -- vatta morality, virtue S i.143; cp. J iii.360. -- vipatti moral transgression Vin i.171 sq.; D ii.85; A i.95; 268 sq.; iii.252; Pug 21; Vism 54, 57. -- vipanna trespassing D ii.85; Pug 21; Vin i.227. -- vīmaŋsaka testing one's reputation J i.369; ii.429; iii.100, 193. -- saŋvara self -- restraint in conduct D i.69; Dhs 1342; DA i.182. -- saŋvuta living under moral self -- restraint Dh 281. -- sampatti accomplishment or attainment by moral living Vism 57. -- sampadā practice of morality Vin i.227; D ii.86; M i.194, 201 sq.; A i.95, 269 sq., ii.66; Pug. 25, 54. -- sampanna practising morality, virtuous Vin i.228; D i.63; ii.86; M i.354; Th 2, 196; ThA 168; DA i.182. -- 713 -- Sīlatā
Sīlatā
(f.) ( -- ˚) [abstr. fr. sīla] character(istic), nature, capacity DhA iii.272. Sīlavant
Sīlavant
(adj.) [sīla+vant] virtuous, observing the moral precepts D iii.77, 259 sq., 285; A i.150; ii.58, 76; iii.206 sq., 262 sq.; iv.290 sq., 314 sq.; v.10 sq., 71 sq.; Vism 58; DA i.286; Tikp 279. -- nom. sg. sīlavā D i.114; S i.166; It 63; Pug 26, 53; J i.187; acc. -- vantaŋ Vin iii.133; Sn 624; instr. -- vatā S iii.167; gen. -- vato S iv.303; nom. pl. -- vanto Pug 13; Dhs 1328; Nett 191; acc. pl. -- vante J i.187; instr. -- vantehi D ii.80; gen. pl. -- vantānaŋ M i.334; gen. pl. -- vataŋ Dh 56; J i.144; f. -- vatī D ii.12; Th 2, 449. compar. -- vantatara J ii.3. Sīlika
Sīlika
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. sīla] = sīlin J vi.64. Sīlin
Sīlin
(adj.) [fr. sīla] having a disposition or character; ariyasīlin having the virtue of an Ārya D i.115; DA i.286; niddāsīlin drowsy, Sn 96; vuddhasīlin increased in virtue D i.114; sabhāsīlin fond of society Sn 96. Sīliya
Sīliya
(nt.) [abstr. fr. sīla, Sk. śīlya for śailya] conduct, behaviour, character; said of bad behaviour, e. g. J iii.74 = iv.71; emphasized as dussīlya, e. g. S v.384; A i.105; v.145 sq.; opp. sādhu -- sīliya J ii.137 (=sundara -- sīla -- bhāva C.). Sīvathikā
Sīvathikā
(f.) [etym. doubtful; perhaps = *Sk. śivālaya; Kern derives it as śīvan "lying"+atthi "bone," problematic] a cemetery, place where dead bodies are thrown to rot away Vin iii.36; D ii.295 sq.; A iii.268, 323; J i.146; Pv iii.52 (=susāna PvA 198); Vism 181, 240; PvA 195. Sīvana & sīveti
Sīvana
& sīveti: see vi˚. Sīsa
Sīsa1
(nt.) [cp. Sk. sīsa] lead D ii.351; S v.92; Miln 331; VbhA 63 ( = kāḷa -- tipu); a leaden coin J i.7; ˚ -- kāra a worker in lead Miln 331; ˚ -- maya leaden Vin i.190. Sīsa
Sīsa2
(nt.) [Vedic śīrṣa: see under sira] 1. the head (of the body) Vin i.8; A i.207; Sn 199, 208, p. 80; J i.74; ii.103; sīsaŋ nahāta, one who has performed an ablution of the head D ii.172; PvA 82; āditta -- sīsa, one whose turban has caught fire S i.108; iii.143; v.440; A ii.93; sīsato towards the head Mhvs 25, 93; adho -- sīsa, head first J i.233. -- 2. highest part, top, front: bhūmi˚ hill, place of vantage Dpvs 15, 26; J ii.406; cankamana˚ head of the cloister Vism 121; sangāma˚ front of the battle Pug 69; J i.387; megha˚ head of the cloud J i.103. In this sense also opposed to pāda (foot), e. g. sopāṇa˚ head (& foot) of the stairs DhA i.115. Contrasted with sama (plain) Ps i.101 sq. -- 3. chief point Ps i.102. -- 4. panicle, ear (of rice or crops) A iv.169; DA i.118. -- 5. head, heading (as subdivision of a subject), as "chanda -- sīsa citta -- sīsa" grouped under chanda & citta Vism 376. Usually instr ˚sīsena "under the heading (or category) of," e. g. citta˚ Vism 3; paribhoga˚ J ii.24; saññā˚ DhsA 200; kammaṭṭhāna˚ DhA iii.159.

-- ânulokin looking ahead, looking attentively after something M i.147. -- ābādha disease of the head Vin i.270 sq.; J vi.331. -- âbhitāpa heat in the head, headache Vin i.204. -- kaṭāha a skull D ii.297 = M i.58; Vism 260=KhA 60; KhA 49. -- kalanda Miln 292. [Signification unknown; cp. kalanda a squirrel and kalandaka J vi.227; a blanket [cushion?] or kerchief.] -- cchavi the skin of the head Vin i.277. -- cola a headcloth, turban Mhvs 35, 53. -- cchejja resulting in decapitation A ii.241. -- ccheda decapitation, death J i.167; Miln 358. -- ppacālakaŋ swaying the head about Vin iv.188. -- paramparāya with heads close together DhA i.49. -- virecana purging to relieve the head D i.12; DA i.98. -- veṭha head wrap S iv.56. -- veṭhana headcloth, turban M ii.193; sīsaveṭha id. M i.244=S iv.56. -- vedanā headache M i.243; ii.193. -- 714 -- Sīsaka
Sīsaka
(nt.) [ = sīsa] head, as adj. -- ˚ heading, with the head towards; uttarasīsaka head northwards D ii.137; pācīna˚ (of Māyā's couch: eastward) J i.50. heṭṭhāsīsaka head downwards J iii.13; dhammasīsaka worshipping righteousness beyond everything Miln 47, 117. Sīha
Sīha
[Vedic siŋha] 1. a lion D ii.255; S i.16; A ii.33, 245; iii.121; Sn 72; J i.165; Miln 400; Nd2 679 ( = migarājā); VbhA 256, 398 (with pop. etym. "sahanato ca hananato ca sīho ti vuccati"); J v.425 (women like the lion); KhA 140; often used as an epithet of the Buddha A ii.24; iii.122; S i.28; It 123; fem. sīhī lioness J ii.27; iii.149, and sīhinī Miln 67.

-- āsana a throne Mhvs 5, 62; 25, 98. -- kuṇḍala "lion's ear -- ring," a very precious ear -- ring J v.348; SnA 138; also as ˚mukha -- kuṇḍala at J v.438. -- camma lion's hide A iv.393. -- tela "lion -- oil," a precious oil KhA 198. -- nāda a lion's roar, the Buddha's preaching, a song of ecstasy, a shout of exultation "halleluiah" A ii.33; M i.71; D i.161, 175; S ii.27, 55; J 119; Miln 22; DhA ii.43, 178; VbhA 398; ( = seṭṭha -- nāda abhīta -- nāda); SnA 163, 203. -- nādika one who utters a lion's roar, a song of ecstasy A i.23. -- pañjara a window J i.304; ii.31; DhA i.191. -- papātaka "lion's cliff," N. of one of the great lakes in the Himavā SnA 407 and passim. -- piṭṭhe on top of the lion J ii.244. -- potaka a young lion J iii.149. -- mukha "lion's mouth," an ornament at the side of the nave of the king's chariot KhA 172. See also ˚kuṇḍala. -- ratha a chariot drawn by lions Miln 121. -- vikkīḷita the lion's play, the attitude of the Buddhas and Arahants Nett 2, 4, 7, 124. -- seyyā lying like a lion, on the right side D ii.134; A i.114; ii.40, 244; J i.119, 330; VbhA 345; DhA i.357. -- ssara having a voice like a lion J v.284, 296 etc. (said of a prince). -- hanu having a jaw like a lion, of a Buddha D iii.144, 175; Bu xiii.1=J i.38. Sīhaḷa
Sīhaḷa
Ceylon; (adj.) Singhalese Mhvs 7, 44 sq.; 37, 62; 37, 175; Dhvs 9, 1; KhA 47, 50, 78; SnA 30, 53 sq., 397. -- ˚kuddāla a Singhalese hoe Vism 255; VbhA 238; -- ˚dīpa Ceylon J vi.30; DhsA 103; DA i.1; KhA 132; -- ˚bhāsā Singhalese (language) DA i.1; Tikp 259. See Dict. of Names. Sīhaḷaka
Sīhaḷaka
(adj.) [fr. last] Singhalese SnA 397. Su
Su1
(indecl.) [onomat.] a part. of exclamation "shoo!"; usually repeated su su J ii.250; vi.165 (of the hissing of a snake); ThA 110 (scaring somebody away), 305 (sound of puffing). Sometimes as sū sū, e. g. Tikp 280 (of a snake), cp. sūkara. -- Denom susumāyati (q. v.). Su
Su
-- 2 (indecl.) [Vedic su˚, cp. Gr. eu) -- ] a particle, combd with adj., nouns, and certain verb forms, to express the notion of "well, happily, thorough" (cp. E. well -- bred, wel -- come, wel -- fare); opp. du˚. It often acts as simple intensive prefix (cp. saŋ˚) in the sense of "very," and is thus also combd with concepts which in themselves denote a deficiency or bad quality (cp. su -- pāpika "very wicked") and the prefix du˚ (e. g. su -- duj -- jaya, su -- duddasa, su -- dub -- bala). -- Our usual practice is to register words with su˚ under the simple word, whenever the character of the composition is evident at first sight (cp. du˚). For convenience of the student however we give in the foll. a few compns as illustrating the use of su˚.

-- kaṭa well done, good, virtuous D i.55; Miln 5; sukata the same D i.27; (nt.) a good deed, virtue Dh 314; A iii.245. -- kara feasible, easy D i.250; Dh 163; Sn p. 123; na sukaro so Bhagavā amhehi upasaŋkamituŋ S i.9. -- kiccha great trouble, pain J iv.451. -- kittika well expounded Sn 1057. -- kumāra delicate, lovely Mhvs 59, 29; see sukhumāla. -- kumālatta loveliness DA i.282. -- kusala very skilful J i.220; -- khara very hard ( -- hearted) J vi.508. ( = suṭṭhu khara C.). -- khetta a good field D ii.353; A i.135; S i.21. -- gajjin shrieking beautifully (of peacocks) Th 1, 211. -- gandha fragrant J ii.20; pleasant odour Dhs 625. -- gandhi=sugandha J 100. -- gandhika fragrant Mhvs 7, 27; J i.266. -- gahana a good grip, tight seizing J i.223. -- gahita and suggahīta, grasped tightly, attentive A ii.148, 169; iii.179; J i.163, 222. -- ggava virtuous J iv.53 (probably misspelling for suggata). -- ghara having a nice house J vi.418, 420. -- carita well conducted, right, good Dh 168 sq. (nt.) good conduct, virtue, merit A i.49 sq., 57, 102; D iii.52, 96, 152 sq., 169; Dh 231; It 55, 59 sq.; Ps i.115; Vism 199. -- citta much variegated Dh 151; DhA iii.122. -- cchanna well covered Dh 14. -- cchavi having a lovely skin, pleasant to the skin D iii.159; J v.215; vi.269. -- jana a good man Mhvs 1, 85. -- jāta well born, of noble birth D i.93; Sn 548 sq. -- jāti of noble family Mhvs 24, 50. -- jīva easy to live Dh 244. -- tanu having a slender waist Vv 6412 (=sundara -- sarīra VvA 280). -- danta well subdued, tamed D ii.254; Dh 94; A iv.376. -- dassa easily seen Dh 252; (m.) a kind of gods, found in the fourteenth rūpa -- brahmaloka D ii.52; Pug 17; Kvu 207. -- diṭṭha well seen Sn 178; p. 143. -- divasa a lucky day J iv.209. -- dujjaya difficult to win Mhvs 26, 3. -- duttara very difficult to escape from A v.232 sq., 253 sq.; Dh 86; Sn 358. -- dukkara very difficult to do J v.31. -- duccaja very hard to give up J vi.473. -- duddasa very difficult to see Vin i.5; Th 1, 1098; Dh 36; DhA i.300; used as an epithet of Nibbāna S iv.369. -- duppadhaŋsiya very difficult to overwhelm D iii.176. -- dubbala very weak Sn 4. -- dullabha very difficult to obtain Sn 138; Vv 4419; Vism 2; VvA 20. -- desika a good guide Miln 354; DhsA 123; Vism 465. -- desita well preached Dh 44; Sn 88, 230. -- ddiṭṭha [= su+uddiṭṭha] well set out Vin i.129; J iv.192. -- ddhanta well blown M iii.243; DhsA 326;=saŋdhanta A i.253; Vin ii.59. -- dhammatā good nature, good character, goodness, virtue J ii.159; v.357; vi.527. -- dhota well washed, thoroughly clean J i.331. -- nandī (scil. vedanā) pleasing, pleasurable S i.53. -- naya easily deducted, clearly understood A iii.179=sunnaya A ii.148; iii. 179 (v. l.). -- nahāta well bathed, well groomed D i.104; as sunhāta at S i.79. -- nimmadaya easily overcome D 243 and sq. -- nisita well whetted or sharpened J iv.118; as ˚nissita at J vi.248. -- nisit -- agga with a very sharp point VvA 227. -- nīta well understood A i.59. -- pakka thoroughly ripe Mhvs 15, 38. -- paṇṇasālā a beautiful hut J i.7. -- patittha having beautiful banks D ii.129; Ud 83=sūpatittha M i.76. See also under sūpatittha. -- parikammakata well prepared, well polished D i.76; A ii.201; DA i.221. -- pariccaja easy to give away J iii.68. -- parimaṇḍala well rounded, complete Mhvs 37, 225. -- parihīna thoroughly bereft, quite done for It 35. -- pāpa -- kammin very wicked J v.143. -- pāpa -- dhamma very wicked Vv 521. -- pāpika very sinful, wicked A ii.203. -- pāyita well saturated, i. e. hardened (of a sword) J iv.118. Cp. suthita. -- pāsiya easily threaded (of a needle) J iii.282. -- picchita well polished, shiny, slippery J v.197 (cp. Sk. picchala?). Dutoit "fest gepresst" (pīḷ?), so also Kern, Toev. ii.85. C. expls as suphassita. -- pipi good to drink J vi.526. -- pīta see suthita. -- pubbaṇha a good morning A i.294. -- posatā good nature Vin i.45. -- ppaṭikāra easy requital A i.123. -- ppaṭipanna well conducted A ii.56; Pug 48; -- tā, good conduct Nett 50. -- ppaṭippatāḷita well played on D ii.171; A iv.263. -- ppaṭividdha thoroughly understood A ii.185. -- ppatiṭṭhita firmly established It 77; Sn 444. -- ppatīta well pleased Mhvs 24, 64. -- ppadhaŋsiya easily assaulted or overwhelmed D iii.176; S ii.264. Cp. ˚duppadhaŋsiya. -- ppadhota thoroughly cleansed D ii.324. -- ppabhāta a good daybreak Sn 178. -- ppameyya easily fathomed D i.266; Pug 35. -- ppavādita (music) well played Vv 39. -- ppavāyita well woven, evenly woven Vin iii.259. -- ppavedita well preached It 78; Th 2, 341; ThA 240. -- ppasanna thoroughly full of faith Mhvs 34, 74. -- ppahāra a good blow J iii.83. -- phassita agreeable to touch, very soft J i.220; v.197 (C. for supicchita); smooth VvA 275. -- bahu very much, very many Mhvs 20, 9; 30, 18; 34, 15; 37, 48. -- bāḷhika see bāḷhika. -- bbata virtuous, devout D i.52; S i.236; Sn 220; Dh 95; J vi.493; DhA ii.177; iii.99; PvA 226; VvA 151. -- bbināya easy to understand Nd 326. -- bbuṭṭhi abundant rainfall Mhvs 15, 97; DhA i.52; -- kā the same D i.11. -- brahā very big J iv.111. -- bhara easily supported, frugal; -- tā frugality Vin i.45; ii.2; M i.13. -- bhikkha having plenty of food (nt.) plenty D i.11. -- ˚vāca called plenty, renowned for great liberality It 66. -- bhūmi good soil M i.124. -- majja well polished J iii.282. -- majjhantika a good noon A i.294. -- mati wise Mhvs 15, 214. -- matikata well harrowed A i.239. -- mada very joyful J v.328. -- mana glad, happy D i.3; iii.269; A ii.198; Sn 222, 1028; Dh 68; Vism 174. kind, friendly J iv.217 (opp. disa). -- manohara very charming Mhvs 26, 17. -- manta well-advised, careful Miln 318. -- mānasa joyful Vin i.25; Mhvs 1, 76. -- māpita well built J i.7. -- mutta happily released D ii.162. -- medha wise Vin i.5; M i.142; A ii.49 and sq.; Dh 208; Sn 117, 211 etc.; It 33; Nd1 453. -- medhasa wise D ii.267; A ii.70; Dh 29. -- yiṭṭha well sacrificed A ii.44. -- yutta well suited, suitable J i.296. -- ratta very red J i.119; DhA i.249. -- rabhi fragrant S iv.71; Vv 8432; J i.119; A iii.238; Vv 4412, 538, 716; Pv ii.123; Vism 195 (˚vilepana); VvA 237; PvA 77; Davs iv.40; Miln 358. -- ˚karaṇḍaka fragrance box, a fragrant box Th 2, 253; ThA 209. -- ruci resplendent Sn 548. -- ruddha very fierce J v.425, 431 (read ˚rudda). -- rūpin handsome Mhvs 22, 20. -- rosita nicely anointed J v.173. -- laddha well taken; (nt.) a good gain, bliss Vin i.17; It 77. -- labha easy to be obtained It 102; J i.66; vi.125; PvA 87. -- vaca of nice speech, compliant M i.43, 126; Sn 143; A iii.78; J i.224. Often with padakkhiṇaggāhin (q. v.). See also subbaca & abstr. der. sovacassa. -- vatthi [i. e. su+asti] hail, well -- being Cp. 100=J iv.31; cp. sotthi. -- vammita well harnessed J i.179. -- vavatthāpita well known, ascertained J i.279; Miln 10. -- vānaya [i. e. su -- v -- ānaya] easily brought, easy to catch J i.80, 124, 238. -- viggaha of a fine figure, handsome Mhvs 19, 28. -- vijāna easily known Sn 92; J iv.217. -- viññāpaya easy to instruct Vin i.6. -- vidūravidūra very far off A ii.50. -- vibhatta well divided and arranged Sn 305. -- vilitta well perfumed D i.104. -- vimhita very dismayed J vi.270. -- visada very clean or clear SnA 195. -- visama very uneven, dangerous Th ii.352; ThA 242. -- vihīna thoroughly bereft J i.144. -- vuṭṭhikā abundance of rain J ii.80; SnA 27; DA i.95; see subbuṭṭhikā. -- vositaŋ happily ended J iv.314. -- sankhata well prepared A ii.63. -- saññā (f.) having a good understanding J v.304; vi.49, 52, 503 (for ˚soññā? C. sussoṇiya, i. e. having beautiful hips); Ap 307 (id.). -- saññata thoroughly restrained J i.188. -- saṇṭhāna having a good consistence, well made Sn 28. -- sattha well trained J iii.4. -- sandhi having a lovely opening J v.204. -- samāgata thoroughly applied to A iv.271 (aṭṭhanga˚, i. e. uposatha). -- samāraddha thoroughly undertaken D ii.103; S ii.264 sq.; Dh 293; DhA iii.452. -- samāhita well grounded, steadfast D ii.120; Dh 10; DhA iv.114; It 113; -- atta of steadfast mind S i.4, 29. -- samucchinna thoroughly eradicated M i.102. -- samuṭṭhāpaya easily raised S v.113. -- samudānaya easy to accomplish J iii.313. -- sambuddha easy to understand Vin i.5; Sn 764; S i.136. -- sāyaṇha a good, blissful evening A i.294. -- sikkhita well learnt, thoroughly acquired Sn 261; easily trained, docile J i.444; ii.43. -- sikkhāpita well taught, trained J i.444. -- sippika a skilful workman Mhvs 34, 72. -- sīla moral, virtuous S i.141. -- sukka very white, resplendent D ii.18; iii.144; Sn 548. -- seyya lying on soft beds S ii.268. -- ssata well remembered M i.520. -- ssara melodious Vv 364; SnA 355. -- ssavana good news J i.61. -- ssoṇi having beautiful hips J iv.19; v.7, 294; cp. sussoṇiya J vi.503, & see ˚saññā. -- hajja friend S iv.59; Dh 219; Sn 37; J i.274; A iv.96; DhA iii.293. -- hada friendly, good -- hearted a friend D iii.187 (=sundara -- hadaya C.) J iv.76; vi.382; suhadā a woman with child J v.330. -- hanna modesty J i.421. See hanna. -- huṭṭhita [su+ uṭṭhita] well risen Sn 178. -- huta well offered, burnt as a sacrifical offering A ii.44. -- 715 -- Su
Su3
(indecl.) ( -- ˚) [*ssu, fr. Vedic svid, interrog. part., of which other forms are si and sudaŋ. It also stands for Vedic sma, deictic part. of emphasis, for which also sa & assa] a particle of interrogation, often added to interrogative pronouns; thus kaŋ su S i.45; kena ssu S i.39; kissa ssu S i.39, 161 (so read for kissassa); ko su Sn 173, 181; kiŋ su Sn 1108; kathaŋ su Sn 183, 185, 1077; it is often also used as a pleonastic particle in narration; thus tadā su then D ii.212; hatthe su sati when the hand is there S iv.171. It often takes the forms ssu and assu; thus tyassu = te assu D ii.287; yassāhaŋ=ye assu ahaŋ D ii.284 n. 5; api ssu Vin i.5; ii.7, 76; tad -- assu=tadā su then J i.196; tay'assu three Sn 231; āditt'assu kindled D ii.264; nāssu not Sn 291, 295, 297, 309; sv -- assu=so su J i.196. Euphonic ŋ is sometimes added yehi -- ŋ -- su J vi.564 n. 3; kacciŋ -- su Sn 1045, 1079. Suŋsumāra
Suŋsumāra
[cp. Sk. śiśumāra, lit. child -- killing] a crocodile S iv.198; Th 2, 241; ThA 204; J ii.158 sq.; Vism 446; SnA 207 (˚kucchi); DhA iii.194. -- ˚rī (f.) a female crocodile J ii.159; suŋsumārinī (f.) Miln 67; suŋsumārapatitena vandeti to fall down in salutation DA i.291. Suka
Suka
[Vedic śuka, fr. śuc] a parrot J i.458; ii.132; instead of suka read sūka S v.10. See suva. Sukka
Sukka1
[Vedic śukra; fr. śuc] planet, star Ud. 9 = Nett 150; (nt.) semen, sukkavisaṭṭhi emission of semen Vin ii.38; iii.112; iv.30; Kvu 163. Sukka
Sukka2
(adj.) [Vedic śukla] white, bright; bright, pure, good S ii.240; v.66, 104; Dh 87; Dhs 1303; It 36; J i.129; Miln 200; sukkadhamma J i.129; kaṇhāsukkaŋ evil and good Sn 526; Sukkā a class of gods D ii.260.

-- aŋsa bright lot, fortune Dh 72; DhA ii.73. -- chavi having a white skin J iv.184; vi.508; at both pass. said of the sons of widows. -- pakkha [cp. BSk. śukla -- pakṣa Divy 38] the bright fortnight of a month A ii.19; Miln 388; J iv.26 (opp. kāḷa -- pakkha); the bright half, the good opportunity Th 2, 358; ThA 2. Sukkha
Sukkha
(adj.) [Vedic śuṣka, fr. śuṣ] dry, dried up D ii.347; J i.228, 326; iii.435; v.106; Miln 261, 407. Cp. pari˚, vi˚.

-- kaddama dried mud Mhvs 17, 35. -- kantāra desert J v.70. -- vipassaka "dry -- visioned" Cpd. 55, 75; with diff. expln Geiger, Saŋyutta tsrln ii.172 n. 1. -- 716 -- Sukkhati
Sukkhati
[fr. śuṣka dry; śuṣ] to be dried up Miln 152; J v.472; ppr. sukkhanto getting dry J i.498; ppr. med. sukkhamāna wasting away J i.104; Caus. II. sukkhāpeti S i.8; Vin iv.86; J i.201, 380; ii.56; DA i.262; see also pubbāpeti. -- pp. sukkhita. Sukkhana
Sukkhana
(nt.) [fr. sukkha] drying up J iii.390 (assu -- ˚). Sukkhāpana
Sukkhāpana
(nt.) [fr. sukkhāpeti] drying, making dry J vi.420. Sukkhita
Sukkhita
[pp. of sukkhati] dried up, emaciated Miln 303. Cp. pari˚. Sukha
Sukha
(adj. -- n.) [Vedic sukha; in R. V. only of ratha; later generally] agreeable, pleasant, blest Vin i.3; Dh 118, 194, 331; Sn 383; paṭipadā, pleasant path, easy progress A ii.149 sq.; Dhs 178; kaṇṇa -- s. pleasant to the ear D i.4; happy, pleased D ii.233. -- nt. sukhaŋ wellbeing, happiness, ease; ideal, success Vin i.294; D i.73 sq.; M i.37; S i.5; A iii.355 (deva -- manussānaŋ); It 47; Dh 2; Sn 67; Dhs 10; DhsA 117; PvA 207 (lokiya˚ worldly happiness). -- kāyika sukkha bodily welfare Tikp 283; cp. Cpd. 1121; sāmisaŋ s. material happiness A i.81; iii.412; VbhA 268. On relation to pīti (joy) see Vism 145 (sankhāra -- kkhandha -- sangahitā pīti, vedanā -- kkhandha -- sangahitaŋ sukhaŋ) and Cpd. 56, 243. -- Defined further at Vism 145 & 461 (iṭṭha -- phoṭṭhabb -- ânubhavana -- lakkhaṇaŋ; i. e. of the kind of experiencing pleasant contacts). -- Two kinds, viz. kāyika & cetasika at Ps i.188; several other pairs at A i.80; three (praise, wealth, heaven) It 67; another three (manussa˚, dibba˚, nibbāna˚) DhA iii.51; four (possessing, making good use of possessions, having no debts, living a blameless life) A ii.69. -- gātha -- bandhana -- sukh'atthaŋ for the beauty of the verse J ii.224. -- Opp. asukha D iii.222, 246; Sn 738; or dukkha, with which often combd (e. g. Sn 67, 873, with spelling dukha at both pass.). -- Cases: instr. sukhena with comfort, happily, through happiness Th 1, 220; DhsA 406; acc. sukhaŋ comfortably, in happiness; yathā s. according to liking PvA 133; sukhaŋ seti to rest in ease, to lie well S i.41; A i.136; Dh 19, 201; J i.141. Cp. sukhasayita. -- s. edhati to thrive, prosper S i.217; Dh 193; Sn 298; cp. sukham -- edha Vin iii.137 (with Kern's remarks Toev. ii.83). s. viharati to live happily, A i.96; iii.3; Dh 379. -- Der. sokhya.

-- atthin fem. -- nī longing for happiness Mhvs 6, 4. -- āvaha bringing happiness, conducive to ease S i.2 sq., 55; Dh 35; J ii.42. -- indriya the faculty of ease S v.209 sq.; Dhs 452; It 15, 52. -- udraya (sometimes spelt ˚undriya) having a happy result A i.97; Ps i.80; Pv iv.178 ( = sukha -- vipāka PvA 243); Vv 318. -- ūpaharaṇa happy offering, luxury J i.231. -- edhita read as sukhe ṭhita (i. e. being happy) at Vin iii.13 & S v.351 (v. l. sukhe ṭhita); also at DhA i.165; cp. J vi.219. -- esin looking for pleasure Dh 341. -- kāma longing for happiness M i.341; S iv.172, 188. -- da giving pleasure Sn 297. -- dhamma a good state M i.447. -- nisinna comfortably seated J iv.125. -- paṭisaŋvedin experiencing happiness Pug 61. -- ppatta come to well -- being, happy J iii.112. -- pharaṇatā diffusion of well -- being, ease Nett 89 (among the constituents of samādhi). -- bhāgiya participating in happiness Nett 120 sq., 125 sq., 239 (the four s. dhammā are indriyasaŋvara, tapasaŋkhāta puññadhamma, bojjhangabhāvanā and sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggasankhāta nibbāna). -- bhūmi a soil of ease, source of ease Dhs 984; DhsA 346. -- yānaka an easy -- going cart DhA 325. -- vinicchaya discernment of happiness M iii.230 sq. -- vipāka resulting in happiness, ease D i.51; A i.98; DA i.158. -- vihāra dwelling at ease S v.326. -- vihārin dwelling at ease, well at ease D i.75; Dhs 163; J i.140. -- saŋvāsa pleasant to associate with Dh 207. -- saññin conceiving happiness, considering as happiness A ii.52. -- samuddaya origin of bliss It 16, 52. -- samphassa pleasant to touch Dhs 648. -- sammata deemed a pleasure Sn 760. -- sayita well embedded (in soil), of seeds A iii.404=D ii.354. Sukhallikânuyoga
Sukhallikânuyoga
[same in BSk.] luxurious living Vin i.1012 (kāma -- ˚). See under kāma˚. Sukhāyati
Sukhāyati
[Denom. fr. sukha] to be pleased J ii.31 (asu- khāyamāna being displeased with). Sukhita
Sukhita
[pp. of sukheti] happy, blest, glad S i.52; iii.11 (sukhitesu sukhito dukkhitesu dukkhito); iv.180; Sn 1029; Pv ii.811; healthy Mhvs 37, 128; ˚ -- atta [ātman] happy, easy Sn 145. Sukhin
Sukhin
(adj.) [fr. sukha] happy, at ease D i.31, 73, 108; A ii.185; S i.20, 170; iii.83; Dh 177; Sn 145; being well, unhurt J iii.541; fem. -- nī D ii.13; M ii.126. Sukhuma
Sukhuma
(adj.) [Epic Sk. sūkṣma] subtle, minute Vin i.14; D i.182; S iv.202; A ii.171; Dhs 676; Th 2, 266; Dh 125 = Sn 662; Vism 274, 488 (˚rūpā). fine, exquisite D ii.17, 188; Miln 313; susukhuma, very subtle Th 1, 71=210 (˚ -- nipuṇattha -- dassin); cp. sokhumma; khoma -- ˚, kappāsa -- ˚, kambala -- ˚ (n.?) the finest sorts of linen, cotton stuff, woolwork (resp.) Miln 105. -- Der. sokhumma.

-- acchika fine -- meshed D i.45; DA i.127; Ap 21 (jāla). -- diṭṭhi subtle view It 75. -- dhāra with fine edge Miln 105. Sukhumaka
Sukhumaka
= sukhuma Ps i.185. Sukhumatta
Sukhumatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. sukhuma] fineness, delicacy D ii.17 sq. Sukhumāla
Sukhumāla
(adj.) [cp. Sk. su -- kumāra] tender, delicate, refined, delicately nurtured A i.145; ii.86 sq.; iii.130; Vin i.15, 179; ii.180; beautifully young, graceful J i.397; Sn 298; samaṇa -- ˚ a soft, graceful Samaṇa A ii.87; fem. sukhumālinī Th 2, 217; Miln 68, & sukhumālī J vi.514. Sukhumālatā
Sukhumālatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. sukhumāla] delicate constitution J v.295; DhA iii.283 (ati˚). Sukheti
Sukheti
[Caus. fr. sukha] to make happy D i.51; S iv.331; DA i.157; also sukhayati DhsA 117; Caus. II. sukhāpeti D ii.202; Miln 79. -- pp. sukhita. Sugata
Sugata
[su+gata] faring well, happy, having a happy life after death (gati): see under gata; cp. Vism 424 (s. = sugati -- gata). Freq. Ep. of the Buddha (see Dict. of Names).

-- angula a Buddha -- inch, an inch according to the standard accepted by Buddhists Vin iv.168. -- ālaya imitation of the Buddha J i.490, 491; ii.38, 148, 162; iii.112. -- ovāda a discourse of the Blessed one J i.119, 349; ii.9, 13, 46; iii.368. -- vidatthi a Buddha -- span, a span of the accepted length Vin iii.149; iv.173. -- vinaya the discipline of the Buddha A ii.147. Sugati
Sugati
(f.) [su+gati] happiness, bliss, a happy fate (see detail under gati) Vin ii.162, 195; D i.143; ii.141; Pug 60; It 24, 77, 112; A iii.5, 205; v.268; Vism 427 (where defd as "sundarā gati" & distinguished fr. sagga as including "manussagati," whereas sagga is "devagati"); VbhA 158; DhA i.153. -- suggati (in verses), Dh 18; D ii.202 (printed as prose); J iv.436 ( = sagga C.); vi.224. Kern, Toev. ii.83 expld suggati as svargati, analogous to svar -- ga (=sagga); doubtful. Cp. duggati. Sugatin
Sugatin
(adj.) [fr. sugati] righteous Dh 126; J i.219 = Vin ii.162 (suggatī). Sunka
Sunka
(m. and nt.) [cp. Vedic śulka, nt.] 1. toll, tax, customs Vin iii.52; iv.131; A i.54 sq.; DhA ii.2; J iv.132; vi.347; PvA iii. -- 2. gain, profit Th 2, 25; ThA 32. -- 3. purchase -- price of a wife Th 2, 420; J vi.266; Miln 47 sq. -- odhisunka stake J vi.279; ˚ -- gahana J v.254; a -- suŋkâraha J v.254.

-- ghāta customs' frontier Vin iii.47, 52. -- ṭṭhāna taxing place, customs' house Vin iii.62; Miln 359. -- sāyika (?) customs' officer Miln 365 (read perhaps ˚sādhaka or ˚sālika?). -- 717 -- Sunkika
Sunkika
[sunka+ika] a receiver of customs J v.254. Sunkiya
Sunkiya
(nt.) [abstr. fr. sunka] price paid for a wife J vi.266. Suci
Suci
(adj.) [Vedic śuci] pure, clean, white D i.4; A i.293; Sn 226, 410. -- opp. asuci impure A iii.226; v.109, 266. -- (nt.) purity, pure things J i.22; goodness, merit Dp 245; a tree used for making foot -- boards VvA 8.

-- kamma whose actions are pure Dh 24. -- gandha having a sweet perfume Dh 58; DhA i.445. -- gavesin longing for purity S i.205; DhA iii.354. -- ghaṭika read sūcighaṭikā at Vin ii.237. -- ghara Vin ii.301 sq.; see sūcighara. -- jātika of clean descent J ii.11. -- bhojana pure food Sn 128. -- mhita having a pleasant, serene smile Vv 1810; 5025; 6412; VvA 96, 280 (also explained as a name); J iv.107. -- vasana wearing clean, bright clothes Sn 679. Sucimant
Sucimant
(adj.) [suci+mant] pure, an epithet of the Buddha A iv.340. Sujā
Sujā
(f.) [Vedic sruc, f.] a sacrificial ladle D i.120, 138; S i.169; DA i.289, 299. Sujjhati
Sujjhati
[śudh which the Dhtp (417) defines as "soceyye," i. e. from cleansing] to become clean or pure M i.39; S i.34, 166; Nd1 85; Vism 3; cp. pari˚. -- pp. suddha. -- Caus. sodheti (q. v.). Sujjhana
Sujjhana
(nt.) [fr. sujjhati] purification Vism 44. Suñña
Suñña
(adj.) [cp. Sk. śūnya, fr. Vedic śūna, nt., void] 1. empty, uninhabited D i.17; ii.202; S i.180; iv.173; DA i.110; Miln 5. -- 2. empty, devoid of reality, unsubstantial, phenomenal M i.435; S iii.167; iv.54, 296; Sn 1119; Nd1 439 (loka). -- 3. empty, void, useless M i.483; S iv.54, 297; Dāvs v.17; Miln 96; Vism 594 sq. (of nāmarūpa, in simile with suñña dāruyanta). suññasuñña empty of permanent substance Ps ii.178; asuñña not empty Miln 130. -- nt. suññaŋ emptiness, annihilation, Nibbāna Vism 513 (three nirodha -- suññāni); abl. ˚to from the point of view of the "Empty" Nd2 680 (long exegesis of suññato at Sn 1119); Vism 512; VbhA 89, 261; KhA 74.

-- āgāra an empty place, an uninhabited spot, solitude Vin i.97, 228; ii.158, 183; iii.70, 91 sq.; D i.175; ii.86; 291, M i.33; S iv.133, 359 sq.; A iii.353; iv.139, 392, 437; v.109, 207, 323 sq.; It 39; J iii.191; Miln 344; Vism 270; Nd2 94. -- gāma an empty (deserted) village (in similes) Vism 484; VbhA 48; Dhs 597; DhsA 309; ˚tthāna Vism 353; VbhA 57. Suññata
Suññata
(adj.) [i. e. the abl. suññato used as adj. nom.] void, empty, devoid of lusts, evil dispositions, and karma, but especially of soul, ego Th 2, 46; ThA 50; Dhs 344; Mhvs 37, 7; nibbāna DhsA 221; phassa S iv.295; vimokkha Dh 92; DhA ii.172; Miln 413; vimokkha samādhi, and samāpatti Vin iii.92 sq.; iv.25 sq.; samādhi (contemplation of emptiness, see Cpd. 216) D iii.219 (one of. three samādhis); S iv.360, 363; Miln 337; anupassanā Ps ii.43 sq. Suññatā
Suññatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. suñña] emptiness, "void," unsub- stantiality, phenomenality; freedom from lust, ill -- will, and dullness, Nibbāna M iii.111; Kvu 232; DhsA 221; Nett 118 sq., 123 sq., 126; Miln 16; Vism 333 (n'atthi; suñña; vivitta; i, e. abhāva, suññatā, vivitt'-> ākāra), 578 (12 fold, relating to the Paṭiccasamuppāda), 653 sq.; VbhA 262 (atta˚, attaniya˚, niccabhāva˚).

-- pakāsana the gospel of emptiness DA i.99, 123; -- paṭisaŋyutta relating to the Void, connected with Nibbāna A i.72 = iii.107=S ii.267; DA i.100 sq.; Miln 16; -- vihāra dwelling in the concept of emptiness Vin ii.304; M iii.104, 294. See on term e. g. Cpd. 69; Kvu trsln 142, n. 4. Suññatta
Suññatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. suñña] emptiness, the state of being devoid DhsA 221. Suṭṭhu
Suṭṭhu
(indecl.) [cp. Sk. suṣṭhu, fr. su˚] well; the usual C. expln of the prefix su2 PvA 19, 51, 52, 58, 77, 103 etc.; s. tāta well, father J i.170; s. kataŋ you have done well J i.287; DA i.297; suṭṭhutaraŋ still more J i.229; SnA 418. Suṭṭhutā
Suṭṭhutā
(f.) [abstr. fr. suṭṭhu] excellence A i.98 sq.; Nett 50. Suṇa
Suṇa
"dog," preferable spelling for suna, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 931. Suṇāti
Suṇāti
(suṇoti) [śru, Vedic śṛṇoti; cp. Gr. kle/w to praise; Lat. clueo to be called; Oir. clunim to hear; Goth. hliup attention, hliuma hearing, and many others] to hear. Pres. suṇāti D i.62, 152; S v.265; Sn 696; It 98; Miln 5. -- suṇoti J iv.443; Pot. suṇeyya Vin i.7; D i.79; suṇe J iv.240; Imper. suṇa S iii.121; sunāhi Sn p. 21; suṇohi D i.62; Sn 997; 3rd sg. suṇātu Vin i.56; 1st pl. suṇāma Sn 354; suṇoma Sn 350, 988, 1110; Pv iv.131. -- 2nd pl. suṇātha D i.131; ii.76; It 41; Sn 385; PvA 13. suṇotha Sn 997; Miln 1. -- 3rd pl. suṇantu Vin i.5; -- ppr. sunanto Sn 1023; DA i.261; savaŋ J iii.244. -- inf. sotuŋ D ii.2; Sn 384; suṇitum Miln 91. -- Fut. sossati D ii.131, 265; J ii.107; J ii.63; Ap 156; VvA 187; 1st sg. sussaŋ Sn 694. -- 2nd sg. sossi J vi.423. -- aor. 1st sg. assuŋ J iii.572. -- 2nd sg. assu J iii.541. -- 3rd sg. suṇi J iv.336; assosi D i.87, 152; Sn p. 103; 1st pl. assumha J ii.79. -- 2nd pl. assuttha S i.157; ii.230. 3rd pl. assosuŋ Vin i.18; D i.111. -> ger. sutvā Vin i.12; D i.4; Sn 30. sutvāna Vin i.19; D ii.30; Sn 202. suṇitvā J v.96; Mhvs 23, 80. suṇiya Mhvs 23, 101. -- Pass. sūyati M i.30; J i.72, 86; Miln 152. suyyati J iv.141; J iv.160; v.459. 3rd pl. sūyare J vi.528. -- Grd. savanīya what should be heard, agreeable to the ear D ii.211. sotabba D i.175; ii.346. -> pp. suta: see separately. -- Caus. sāveti to cause to hear, to tell, declare, announce J i.344; Mhvs 5, 238; PvA 200; VvA 66. nāmaŋ s. to shout out one's name Vin i.36; DA i.262; maŋ dāsī ti sāvaya announce me to be your slave J iii.437; cp. J iv.402 (but see on this passage and on J iii.198; vi.486 Kern's proposed reading sāṭeti); to cause to be heard, to play D ii.265. Caus. also suṇāpeti DhA i.206. -- Desiderative sussūsati (often written sussūyati) D i.230; M iii.133 (text sussūsanti), A iv.393 (do.). -- ppr. sussusaŋ Sn 189 (var. read., text sussussā); sussūsamāna Sn 383; aor. sussūsiŋsu Vin i.10; fut. sussūsissanti Vin i.150; S ii.267 (text sussu -- ). Suṇisā
Suṇisā
(f.) [Vedic snuṣā; cp. Gr. nuo/s; Ohg. snur; Ags. snoru; Lat. nurus] a daughter-in-law Vin i.240; iii.136; D ii.148; M i.186, 253; J vi.498; Vv 135 ( = puttassa bhariyā VvA 61); DhA i.355; iv.8; Pv ii.46 (pl. suṇisāyo, so read for sūtisāye). -- suṇhā the same Vin ii.10; A iv.91; Th 2, 406; J ii.347; vi.506; Pv iv.3.43 Suta
Suta1
[pp. of suṇāti; cp. Vedic śruta] 1. heard; in special sense "received through inspiration or revelation"; learned; taught A 97 sq.; D iii.164 sq., 241 sq.; freq. in phrase "iti me sutaŋ" thus have I heard, I have received this on (religious) authority, e. g. It 22 sq. -> (nt.) sacred lore, inspired tradition, revelation; learning, religious knowledge M iii.99; A i.210 sq.; ii.6 sq.; S iv.250; J ii.42; v.450, 485; Miln 248. -- appa -- ssuta one who has little learning A ii.6 sq., 218; iii.181; v.40, 152; bahu -- ssuta one who has much learning, famous for inspired knowledge A ii.6 sq.; iii.113 sq., 182 sq., 261 sq.; S ii.159. See bahu. asuta not heard Vin i.238; Pv iv.161; J iii.233; also as assuta J i.390 (˚pubba never heard before); iii.233. -- na suta pubbaŋ a thing never heard of before J iii.285. dussuta M i.228; sussuta M iii.104. -- 2. renowned J ii.442.

-- ādhāra holding (i. e. keeping in mind, preserving) the sacred learning J iii.193; vi.287. -- kavi a Vedic poet, a poet of sacred songs A ii.230. -- dhana the treasure of revelation D iii.163, 251; A iii.53; iv.4 sq.; VvA 113. -- dhara remembering what has been heard (or taught in the Scriptures) A ii.23 (+˚sannicaya); iii.152, 261 sq. -- maya consisting in learning (or resting on sacred tradition), one of the 3 kinds of knowledge (paññā), viz. cintā -- mayā, s. -- m., bhāvanā -- mayā paññā D iii.219; Vbh 324 (expld at Vism 439); as ˚mayī at Ps i.4, 22 sq.; Nett 8, 50, 60. -- ssava far -- renowned (Ep. of the Buddha) Sn 353. -- 718 -- Suta
Suta2
[Sk. suta, pp. of sū (or su) to generate] son Mhvs 1, 47; fem. sutā daughter, Th 2, 384. Sutatta
Sutatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. suta1] the fact of having heard or learnt SnA 166. Sutappaya
Sutappaya
(adj.) [su+grd. of tappati2] easily contented A i.87; Pug 26 (opp. dut˚). Sutavant
Sutavant
(adj.) [suta1+vant] one who is learned in religious knowledge Vin i.14; A ii.178; iii.55; iv.68, 157; S iii.57; Tikp 279; Sn 70 ( = āgama -- sampanna SnA 124), 90, 371; sutavanta -- nimmita founded by learned, pious men Miln 1; assutavant, unlearned M i.1 (˚vā puthujjano laymen); Dhs 1003; A iii.54; iv.157. Suti
Suti
(f.) [cp. śruti revelation as opp. to smṛti tradition] 1. hearing, tradition, inspiration, knowledge of the Vedas Sn 839, 1078; Miln 3 (+sammuti); Mhvs 1, 3. -> 2. rumour; sutivasena by hearsay, as a story, through tradition J iii.285, 476; vi.100. -- 3. a sound, tone VvA 139 (dvāvīsati suti -- bhedā 22 kinds of sound). Sutitikkha
Sutitikkha
(adj.) [fr. su+titikkhā] easy to endure J 524. Sutta
Sutta1
[pp. of supati] asleep Vin iii.117; v.205; D i.70; ii.130; Dh 47; It 41; J v.328. -- (nt.) sleep D ii.95; M i.448; S iv.169. In phrase ˚ -- pabuddha "awakened from sleep" referring to the awakening (entrance) in the deva -- world, e. g. Vism 314 (brahmalokaŋ uppajjati); DhA i.28 (kanaka -- vimāne nibbatti); iii.7 (id.); cp. S i.143. Sutta
Sutta2
(nt.) [Vedic sūtra, fr. sīv to sew] 1. a thread, string D i.76; ii.13; Vin ii.150; Pv ii.111 ( = kappāsiyā sutta PvA 146); J i.52. -- fig. for taṇhā at Dhs 1059; DhsA 364. -- kāḷa˚ a carpenter's measuring line J ii.405; Miln 413; dīgha˚ with long thread J v.389; makkaṭa˚ spider's thread Vism 136; yantā˚ string of a machine VbhA 241. -- Mentioned with kappāsa as barter for cīvara at Vin iii.216. -- 2. the (discursive, narrational) part of the Buddhist Scriptures containing the suttas or dialogues, later called Sutta -- piṭaka (cp. Suttanta). As such complementary to the Vinaya. The fanciful expln of the word at DhsA 19 is: "atthānaŋ sūcanto suvuttato savanato 'tha sūdanato suttāṇā -- sutta -- sabhāgato ca suttaŋ Suttan ti akkhātaŋ." -- D ii.124; Vin ii.97; VbhA 130 (+vinaya); SnA 159, 310 (compared with Vinaya & Abhidhamma). -- 3. one of the divisions of the Scriptures (see navanga) A ii.103, 178; iii.177, 361 sq.; Miln 263. -- 4. a rule, a clause (of the Pātimokkha) Vin i.65, 68; ii.68, 95; iii.327. -- 5. a chapter, division, dialogue (of a Buddh. text), text, discourse (see also suttanta) S iii.221 (pl. suttā), 253; v.46; Nett 118; DhsA 28. suttaso chapter by chapter A v.72, 81; suttato according to the suttas Vism 562=VbhA 173. -- 6. an ancient verse, quotation J i.288, 307, 314. -> 7. book of rules, lore, text book J i.194 (go˚ lore of cows); ii.46 (hatthi˚ elephant trainer's handbook).

-- anta 1. a chapter of the Scriptures, a text, a discourse, a sutta, dialogue Vin i.140 sq., 169; ii.75; iii.159; iv.344; A i.60, 69, 72; ii.147; S ii.267 = A iii.107 (suttantā kavi -- katā kāveyyā citt'akkharā cittavyañjanā bāhirakā sāvaka -- bhāsitā); Vism 246 sq. (three suttantas helpful for kāyagatā sati). -- 2. the Suttantapiṭaka, opp. to the Vinaya Vism 272 (˚aṭṭhakathā opp. to Vinay'aṭṭhakathā). As ˚piṭaka e. g. at KhA 12; VbhA 431. See Proper Names. -- kantikā (scil. itthi) a woman spinner PvA 75; as ˚kantī at J ii.79. -- kāra a cotton -- spinner Miln 331. -- guḷa a ball of string D i.54; M iii.95; Pv iv.329; PvA 145. -- jāla a web of thread, a spider's web Nd2 260. -- bhikkhā begging for thread PvA 145. -- maya made of threads, i. e. a net SnA 115, 263. -- rajjuka a string of threads Vism 253; VbhA 236. -- lūkha roughly sewn together Vin i.287, 297. -- vāda a division of the Sabbatthavādins Dpvs 5, 48; Mhvs 5, 6; Mhbv 97. -- vibhanga classification of rules Vin ii.97. Also title of a portion of the Vinaya Piṭaka. Suttaka
Suttaka
(nt.) [fr. sutta] a string Vin ii.271; PvA 145; a string of jewels or beads Vin ii.106; iii.48; DhsA 321; a term for lust DhsA 364. Suttantika
Suttantika
versed in the Suttantas. A suttantika bhikkhu is one who knows the Suttas (contrasted with vinayadhara, who knows the rules of the Vinaya) Vin ii.75. Cp. dhamma C 1 & piṭaka. -- Vin i.169; ii.75, 161; iii.159; J i.218; Miln 341; Vism 41, 72, 93; KhA 151. -- duka the Suttanta pairs, the pairs of terms occurring in the Suttantas Dhs 1296 sq.; -- vatthūni the physical bases of spiritual exercise in the Suttantas Ps i.186. Sutti
Sutti1
(f.) [cp. Sk. śukti, given as pearl -- shell (Suśruta), and as a perfume] in kuruvindakasutti a powder for rubbing the body Vin ii.107; see sotti. Sutti
Sutti2
(f.) [Sk. sūkti] a good saying Sdhp 340, 617. Suthita
Suthita
(?) beaten out, Miln 415 (with vv. ll. suthiketa, suphita & supita). Should we read su -- poṭhita? Kern, Toev. ii.85 proposes su -- pīta "well saturated" (with which cp. supāyita J iv.118, said of a sword). Sudaŋ
Sudaŋ
(indecl.) [ = Vedic svid, influenced by sma: see su3] a deictic (seemingly pleonastic) particle in combn with demonstr. pronouns and adverbs; untranslatable, unless by "even, just," e. g. tapassī sudaŋ homi, lūkha ssudaŋ [sic] homi etc. M i.77=J i.390; cp. itthaŋ sudaŋ thus Sn p. 59; tatra sudaŋ there Vin i.4, 34; iv.108; D i.87; ii.91; It 15; api ssudaŋ D ii.264; S i.119; api sudaŋ S i.113; sā ssudam S ii.255. Sudda
Sudda
[cp. Vedic śūdra] (see detail under vaṇṇa 6) a Sūdra Vin ii.239; D i.104; iii.81, 95 sq. (origin); M i.384; A i.162; ii.194; S i.102; Pug 60; Sn 314; fem. suddī D i.241; A iii.226, 229; Vin iii.133. Suddha
Suddha
[pp. of sujjhati] 1. clean, pure, Vin i.16; ii.152; D i.110; Sn 476. -- 2. purified, pure of heart M i.39; Dh 125, 412; Sn 90 -- 3. simple, mere, unmixed, nothing but S i.135; DhsA 72; J ii.252 (˚daṇḍaka just the stick).

-- antaparivāsa a probation of complete purification Vin ii.59 sq. -- ājīva clean livelihood VbhA 116; DhA iv.111. -- ājīvin living a pure life Dp 366. -- ânupassin considering what is pure Sn 788; Nd1 85. -- āvāsa pure abode, name of a heaven and of the devas inhabiting it D ii.50; Vism 392. Five are enumd at D iii.237, viz. Avihā, Atappā, Sudassā, Sudassī, Akaniṭṭhā; cp. M iii.103. -- āvāsakāyika belonging to the pure abode, epithet of the Suddhāvāsa devas Vin ii.302; D ii.253; S i.26. -- pīti whose joy is pure Mhvs 29, 49. -- buddhi of pure intellect J i.1. -- vaŋsatā purity of lineage Mhvs 59, 25. -- vasana wearing pure clothes Th 2, 338; ThA 239. -- vālukā white sand Mhvs 19, 37. -- sankhārapuñja a mere heap of sankhāras S i.135. -- 719 -- Suddhaka
Suddhaka
(nt.) [suddha+ka] a trifle, a minor offence, less than a Sanghādisesa Vin ii.67. Suddhatā
Suddhatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. suddha] purity Sn 435. Suddhatta
Suddhatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. suddha] purity D ii.14; Vism 44. Suddhi
Suddhi
(f.) [fr. śudh] purity, purification, genuineness, sterling quality D i.54; M i.80; ii.132, 147; S i.166, 169, 182; iv.372; Th 2, 293; DhA iii.158 (v. l. visuddhi); VvA 60 (payoga˚); Vism 43 (fourfold: desanā˚, saŋvara˚, pariyeṭṭhi˚, paccavekkhaṇa˚); Dhs 1005; Sn 478; suddhiŋvada stating purity, Sn 910; Nd1 326; suddhināya leading to purity Sn 910. Cp. pari˚, vi˚.

-- magga the path of purification (cp. visuddhi˚) S i.103. Suddhika
Suddhika
(adj.) [suddhi+ka] 1. connected with purifica- tion Dhs 519 -- 522; udaka -- s. pure by use of water S i.182; Vin i.196; udakasuddhikā (f.) cleaning by water Vin iv.262; susāna -- s. fastidious in the matter of cemeteries J ii.54. -- 2. pure, simple; orthodox, schematized; justified Nd1 89 (vatta˚); Vism 63 (ekato & ubhato), 64 (id.); DhsA 185 (jhāna). Sudhā
Sudhā
(f.) [cp. Sk. sudhā] 1. the food of the gods, ambrosia J v.396; Vism 258 = KhA 56 (sakkhara˚). -- 2. lime, plaster, whitewash, cement Vin ii.154; ˚ -- kamma whitewashing, coating of cement J vi.432; Mhvs 38, 74. Suna
Suna1
[Sk. śūna, pp. of śū to swell] swollen Vin ii.253; A iv.275, 470. Suna
Suna2
[Sk. śuna; see suvāṇa] a dog, also written suṇa J vi.353, 357 (cp. sunakha). Sunakha
Sunakha
[cp. Sk. śunaka; the BSk. form is also sunakha, e. g. MVastu iii.361, 369] a dog A i.48; ii.122; Th 2, 509; J i.175, 189; ii.128, 246; PvA 151, 206. -- rukkha˚ some sort of animal J vi.538. fem. sunakhī a bitch J iv.400. -- Names of some dogs in the Jātakas are Kaṇha (or Mahā˚) J iv.183; Caturakkha iii.535; Jambuka, Pingiya ibid.; Bhattabhuñjana ii.246. Cp. suvāṇa. Sunaggavellita
Sunaggavellita
[su+agga+vellita; perhaps originally su- v -- agga˚] beautifully curled at the ends (of hair) J vi.86. Sundara
Sundara
(adj.) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. sundara] beautiful, good, nice, well J ii.11, 98; SnA 410, 493 (cp. parovara). It is very frequent as Commentary word, e. g. for prefix su˚ PvA 57, 77; VvA 111; for subha PvA 14, 44; for sādhu ṢnA 176; for sobhana PvA 49; for seyyo PvA 130. Supaṇṇa
Supaṇṇa
[Vedic suparṇa] "Fairwing" a kind of fairy bird, a mythical creature (cp. garuḷa), imagined as winged, considered as foe to the nāgas D ii.259; S i.148; J i.202; ii.13, 107; iii.91, 187, 188; vi.256, 257; Vism 155 (˚rājā), 400; Nd1 92, 448; DhA i.280; PvA 272; DA i.51; Mhvs 14, 40; 19, 20. Four kinds S iii.246. Supati
Supati
(suppati, soppati) [svap; Vedic svapiti & svapati; svapna sleep or dream (see supina), with which cp. Gr. u(/pnos sleep = Av. xvafna, Lat. somnus, Ags. swefn. -> Dhtp 481 "saye"] to sleep; supati Sn 110; J ii.61 (sukhaŋ supati he sleeps well); v.215; Pv ii.938; suppati S i.107; soppati S i.107, 110; Pot. supe S i.111; ppr. supanto Vin i.15; ppr. med. suppamāna J iii.404; aor. supi Miln 894; Vin ii.78; PvA 195 (sukhaŋ); inf. sottuŋ S i.111; pp. supita; also sutta1 & sotta. Supāṇa
Supāṇa
[ = suvāṇa] a dog D ii.295=M i.58, 88; Sn 201; Miln 147. Spelt supāna at J iv.400. Supāyika
Supāyika
J iv.118 (read: supāyita). See under su˚. Supita
Supita
[pp. of supati] sleeping; (nt.) sleep S i.198 (ko attho supitena) = Sn 331; SnA 338; Pv ii.61 (so read for supina?). Supina
Supina
(m. & nt.) [Vedic svapna; the contracted P. form is soppa] a dream, vision D i.9, 54; S i.198; iv.117 (supine in a dream; v. l. supinena); Sn 360, 807, 927; Nd1 126; J i.334 sq., 374; v.42; DA i.92, 164; Vv 4414; VbhA 407 (by 4 reasons), 408 (who has dreams); DhA i.215. The five dreams of the Buddha A iii.240; J i.69. dussupina an unpleasant dream J i.335; PvA 105 (of Ajātasattu); mangala˚ a lucky dream J vi.330; mahā˚ŋ passati to have (lit. see) a great vision J i.336 sq. (the 16 great visions); ˚ŋ ādisati to tell a dream Nd1 381. -- Supina at Pv ii.61 read supita.

-- anta [anta pleonastic, cp. ThA 258 "supinam eva supinantaŋ"] a dream; abl. ˚ante in a dream Th 2, 394; J v.328 (spelt suppante; C. sopp˚; expld as "supinena"); instr. ˚antena id. Vin ii.125; iii.112; J v.40; vi.131; ThA 258; KhA 175; SnA 80. -- pāṭhaka a dream -- teller, astrologer Nd1 381. -- sattha science of dream -- telling, oneiromantics SnA 564. Supinaka
Supinaka
[supina+ka] a dream Vin ii.25; D ii.333; M i.365; J v.354; DA i.92. Supīta
Supīta
read Miln 415 for suthita (Kern's suggestion). See under su˚. Supoṭhita
Supoṭhita
[su+poṭhita] well beaten; perhaps at Miln 415 for suthita (said of iron); (nt.) a good thrashing DhA i.48. Suppa
Suppa
[cp. Vedic śūrpa] a winnowing basket Ud 68; J i.502; ii.428; Vism 109 (+sarāva), 123; Miln 282; DhA i.174 (kattara˚); ii.131; Mhvs 30, 9. ˚ -- ka a toy basket, little sieve DhsA 321 (+musalaka). Suppatā
Suppatā
(f.) [fr. sūpa] in mugga -- s. pea -- soup talk, sugared words Miln 370. See under mugga. Suppanta
Suppanta
see under soppa. Suplavattha
Suplavattha
at J v.408 is doubtful in spelling & meaning. Perhaps to be read "suplavantaŋ" gliding along beautifully; C. expld as "sukhena plavan'atthaŋ." Subbaca
Subbaca
(adj.) [su+vaca] compliant, meek A iii.180. See also suvaca (under su˚). Der. sovacassa. Subbhū
Subbhū
(adj.) [su+bhū, Sk. bhrū, see bhūkuṭi] having beautiful eyebrows J iv.18 ( = subhamukhā C.). Subha
Subha
(adj.) [Vedic śubhas fr. subh; cp. sobhati] shining, bright, beautiful D i.76 = ii.13=M iii.102; Dhs 250; DA i.221; auspicious, lucky, pleasant Sn 341; It 80; good Sn 824, 910; subhato maññati to consider as a good thing Sn 199; J i.146; cp. S iv.111; (nt.) welfare, good, pleasantness, cleanliness, beauty, pleasure; -- vasena for pleasure's sake J i.303, 304; asubha anything repulsive, disgusting or unpleasant S i.188; v.320; subhâsubha pleasant and unpleasant Miln 136; J iii.243 (niraya=subhānaŋ asubhaŋ unpleasant for the good, C.); cp. below subhāsubha.

-- angana with beautiful courts J vi.272. -- âsubha good and bad, pleasant & unpleasant Dh 409 = Sn 633. -- kiṇṇa the lustrous devas, a class of devas D ii 69; M i 2. 329, 390; iii.102; A i.122; J iii.358; Kvu 207; also written ˚kiṇha A ii.231, 233; iv.40, 401; Vism 414, 420 sq.; VbhA 520; KhA 86. -- gati going to bliss, to heaven Mhvs 25, 115. -- ṭṭhāyin existing or remaining, continuing, in glory D i.17; DA i.110; A v.60. -- dhātu the element of splendour S ii.150. -- nimitta auspicious sign, auspiciousness as an object of one's thought M i 26; A i.3, 87, 200; S v.64, 103; Vism 20. -- saññā perception or notion of what is pleasant or beautiful Nett 27. Opp. asubhasaññā concept of repulsiveness A i.42; ii.17; iii.79; iv.46; v.106. See asubha. -- saññin considering as beautiful A ii.52. Subhaga
Subhaga
(adj.) [su+bhaga] lucky; ˚karaṇa making happy or beloved (by charms) D i.11; DA i.96. -- Der. sobhagga -- 720 -- Sumanā
Sumanā
the great -- flowered jasmine J i.62; iv.455; DhA iv.12. In composition sumana˚.

-- dāma a wreath of jasmine J iv.455. -- paṭṭa cloth with jasmine pattern J i.62. -- puppha j. flower Miln 291; VvA 147. -- makula a j. bud DhA iii.371. -- mālā garland of j. VvA 142. Sumarati
Sumarati
see sarati2. Sumbhati
Sumbhati
(& sumhati) [sumbh (?), cp. Geiger, P.Gr. 60, 128. The Dhtm (306 & 548) only says "saŋsumbhane." The BSk. form is subhati MVastu i.14] to push, throw over, strike J iii.185 (sumh˚); vi.549. -> pp. sumbhita. -- Cp. ā˚, pari˚. Sumbhita
Sumbhita
[pp. of sumbhati] knocked over, fallen (over) PvA 174. Suyyati
Suyyati
is Passive of suṇāti. Sura
Sura
[cp. Epic Sk. sura probably after asura] god Sn 681 ( = deva SnA 484); name of a Bodhisatta J v.12, 13; surakaññā a goddess, a heavenly maid J v.407 (= devadhītā, C.); surinda the king of gods Mhbv 28. Opp. asura. Surata
Surata
(adj.) [su+rata] (in good sense:) well -- loving, devoted: see soracca; (in bad sense:) sexual intercourse, thus wrongly for soracca at J iii.442 C., with expln as "dussīlya." Cp. sūrata. Surā
Surā
(f.) [Vedic surā] spirituous (intoxicating) liquor ("drink") Vin ii.295; 301; iv.110; D i.146; A i.212, 295; It 63; J i.199, 252 (tikhiṇaŋ suraŋ yojetvā mixing a sharp drink); DhA ii.9; Dh 247; as nt. at J vi.23 (v. l. surā as gloss). -- Five kinds of surā are mentioned, viz. piṭṭha˚, pūva˚, odana˚ (odaniya˚), kiṇṇapakkhitta˚, sambhāra -- saŋyutta˚ VvA 73; VbhA 381.

-- âdhiṭṭhaka addicted to drink J v.427. -- geha a drinking house J i.302. -- ghaṭa a pitcher of liquor J iii.477. -- ghara = ˚geha J v.367. -- chaṇa a drinking festival J i.489; DhA iii.100. -- dhutta a drunkard Sn 106; J i.268; iii.260. -- nakkhatta a drinking festival J 362; SnA 185. -- pāna drinking strong liquor J i.50; iv.23; VbhA 383. -- pāyikā a woman drinking liquor J v.11. -- pipāsita thirsty after strong drink S ii.110. -- pīta one who has drunk liquor J i.426. -- mada tipsiness, intoxication A iv.213; J i.352, 362. -- meraya ( -- pāna) (drinking) rum & spirits A i.261; ii.53. See also (pañca -- ) sikkhāpada. -- vitthaka bowl for drinking spirits J v.427; DhA iii.66. -- soṇḍa a drunkard DhA iii.129. -- soṇḍaka id. J v.433. Suriya
Suriya
[Vedic sūrya cp. suvar light, heaven; Idg. *sāṷel, as in Gr. h(/lios, Lat. sōl., Goth. sauil sun; Oir. sūil "eye"; cp. also Gr. se/las splendour, selh/nh moon, & many others, for which see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. sōl] 1. the sun Vin i.2; D ii.319; Sn 687; A i.227; S v.29 sq.; J ii.73; Vism 231 (in simile), 416 (the seventh sun), 417 (myth of pop. etym.), 690 (in sim.); Miln 299; KhA 21 (bāla˚, in simile); PvA 137, 211; VbhA 519; size of the sun DhsA 318; suriyaŋ uṭṭhāpeti to go on till sunrise J i.318. -- 2. the sun as a god D ii.259; S i.51; J iv.63, etc.; vi.89, 90, 201, 247, 263, etc.

-- atthangamana sunset VvA 295. -- uggamana sunrise Mhvs 23, 22; J i.107. -- kanta the sun -- gem, a kind of gem Miln 118. -- ggāha eclipse of the sun D i.10; J i.374. -- maṇḍala the orb of the sun A i.283; Dhs 617. -- rasmi a sunbeam J i.502. -- vattika a sun -- worshipper Nd1 89. Suru
Suru
(indecl.) [onamat.] a hissing sound ("suru"); suru- suru -- kārakaŋ (adv.) after the manner of making hissing sounds (when eating) Vin ii.214; iv.197. Surunga
Surunga
[a corruption of su_rigc] a subterranean passage Mhvs 7, 15. Sulasī
Sulasī
(f.) [cp. Sk. surasī, "basilienkraut" BR; fr. surasa] a medicinal plant Vin i.201; cp. Deśīnāmamālā viii.40. Sulopī
Sulopī
(f.) a kind of small deer J vi.437, 438. Suva
Suva
[cp. Sk. śuka] a parrot J i.324; iv.277 sq.; vi.421; 431 sq. (the two: Pupphaka & Sattigumba); DhA i.284 (˚rājā). fem. suvī J vi.421. Suvaṇṇa
Suvaṇṇa
[Sk. suvarṇa] of good colour, good, favoured, beautiful D i.82; Dhs 223; It 99; A iv.255; Pug 60; J i.226; suvaṇṇa (nt.) gold S iv.325 sq.; Sn 48, 686; Nd2 687 ( = jātarūpa); KhA 240; VvA 104; often together with hirañña Vin iii.16, 48; D ii.179; ˚ -- āni pl. precious things J i.206. -- Cp. soṇṇa.

-- iṭṭhakā gilt tiles DhA iii.29, 61; VvA 157. -- kāra goldsmith D i.78; M ii.18; iii.243; A i.253 sq.; J i.182; v.438 sq.; Nd1 478; Vism 376 (in sim.); DhA iii.340; SnA 15; VbhA 222 (in sim.). -- gabbha a safe ( -- room) for gold DhA iv.105. -- guhā "golden cave," N. of a cave SnA 66. -- toraṇa gilt spire VbhA 112. -- paṭṭa a golden (writing) slab J iv.7; SnA 228, 578; DhA iv.89. -- paṇaka a golden diadem Miln 210. -- pabbata N. of a mountain SnA 358. -- passa id. SnA 66. -- pādukā golden slippers Vin i.15. -- maya made of gold J i.146. -- mālā golden garland DhA i.388. -- meṇḍaka a golden ram DhA iii.364; iv.217; -- bhinkāra a g. vase Mhbv 154 -- bhūmi "gold -- land," N. of Cambodia Nd1 155. -- rājahaŋsa golden -- coloured royal mallard J i.342. -- vaṇṇa gold -- coloured (of the body of the Yathāgata) D iii.143, 159; J ii.104; iv.333; DhA iii.113. -- vīthi golden street (in Indra's town) J v.386. -- sivikā a g. litter DhA iii.164. -- haŋsa golden swan J i.207; ii.353; SnA 277, 349. Suvaṇṇatā
Suvaṇṇatā
(f.) [abstr. fr. suvaṇṇa] beauty of colour or complexion Pug 34. Suvāṇa
Suvāṇa
(& suvāna) [cp. Sk. śvan, also śvāna (f. śvānī): fr. Vedic acc. śuvānaŋ, of śvan. For etym. cp. Gr. ku/wn, Av. spā, Lat. canis, Oir. cū, Goth. hunds] a dog M iii.91 ( = supāṇa M i.58); J vi.247 (the 2 dogs of hell: Sabala & Sāma); Vism 259 (=supāṇa KhA 58). As suvā˚ at Sdhp 379, 408. -- See also the var. forms san, suṇa, suna, sunakha, supāṇa, soṇa.

-- doṇi a dog's (feeding) trough Vism 344, 358; VbhA 62. -- piṇḍa a dog biscuit Vism 344. -- vamathu dog's vomit Vism 344 ( = suvā -- vanta Sdhp 379). Suvanaya
Suvanaya
[su -- v -- ānaya] easy to bring S i.124 = J i.80. Suvāmin
Suvāmin
[metric for sāmin] a master Sn 666. Suve
Suve
see sve. Susāna
Susāna
(nt.) [cp. Vedic śmaśāna] a cemetery Vin i.15, 50; ii.146; D i.71; A i.241; ii.210; Pug 59; J i.175; Nd1 466; Nd2 342; Vism 76, 180; PvA 80, 92, 163, 195 sq. āmaka -- s. a place where the corpses are left to rot J i.61, 372; vi.10; DhA i.176. Cp. sosānika.

-- aggi a cemetery fire Vism 54. -- gopaka the cemetery keeper DhA i.69. -- vaḍḍhana augmenting the cemetery, fit to be thrown into the cemetery Th 2, 380. Cp. kaṭasi˚. Susānaka
Susānaka
(adj.) [fr. last] employed in a cemetery Mhvs 10, 91. Susira
Susira
(adj. -- nt.) [Sk. śuṣira] perforated, full of holes, hollow J i.146; Sn 199; J i.172, 442; DA i.261; Miln 112; Vism 194 = DhsA 199; KhA 172; asusira DhA ii.148 (Bdhgh for eka -- ghaṇa). (nt.) a hole; PvA 62. Susu
Susu1
[cp. Sk. śiśu] a boy, youngster, lad Vin iii.147 = J ii.284; Vv 6414 (= dahara C.); Sn 420; D i.115; M i.82; A ii.22; J ii.57; ājānīya -- susūpama M i.445, read ājānīy -- ass -- ūpama (cp. Th 1, 72). -- In phrase susukāḷa the susu is a double su˚, in meaning "very, very black" (see under kāḷa -- kesa), e. g. D i.115=M i.82= A ii.22=iii.66=J ii.57; expld as suṭṭhu -- kāḷa DA i.284. -- susunāga a young elephant D ii.254. -- 721 -- Susu
Susu2
the sound susu, hissing J iii.347 (cp. su and sū); ThA 189. Susu
Susu3
the name of a sort of water animal (alligator or sea- cow?) J vi.537 (plur. susū) = v.255 (kumbhīlā makasā susū). Susukā
Susukā
(f.) an alligator Vin i.200; A ii.123 (where id. p. at Nd2 470 has suŋsumāra); M i.459; Miln 196. Sussati
Sussati
[Vedic śuṣyati; śuṣ ( = sosana Dhtp 457)] to be dried, to wither Sn 434; J i.503; ii.424; vi.5 (being thirsty); ppr. med. sussamāna J i.498; Sn 434; fut. sussissati J i.48; ger. sussitvā J ii.5, 339; PvA 152. Cp. vissussati & sukkhati. -- Caus. soseti (q. v.). Sussūsa
Sussūsa
(adj.) wishing to hear or learn, obedient S i.6; J iv.134. Sussūsati
Sussūsati
[Desid. fr. suṇāti; Sk. śuśrūṣati] to wish to hear, to listen, attend D i.230; A i.72; iv.393; aor. sussūsimsu Vin i.10; ppr. med. sussūsamāna Sn 383. Sussūsā
Sussūsā
(f.) [Class. Sk. śuśrūṣā] wish to hear, obedience, attendance D iii.189; A v.136; Th 1, 588; Sn 186; J iii.526; Miln 115. Sussūsin
Sussūsin
(adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. śuśrūṣin] obedient, trusting J iii.525. Suhatā
Suhatā
(f.) [sukha+tā] happiness J iii.158. Suhita
Suhita
(adj.) [su+hita] satiated M i.30; J i.266, 361; v.384; Miln 249. Sū
Sū
(indecl.) an onomat. part. "shoo," applied to hissing sounds: see su1. Also doubled: sū sū DhA i.171; iii.352. Cp. sūkara & sūsūyati. Sūka
Sūka
[cp. Sk. śūka] the awn of barley etc. S v.10, 48; A i.8. Sūkara
Sūkara
[Sk. sūkara, perhaps as sū+kara; cp. Av. hū pig, Gr. u(_s; Lat. sūs; Ags. sū = E. sow] a hog, pig Vin i.200; D i.5; A ii.42 (kukkuṭa+), 209; It 36; J i.197 (Muṇika); ii.419 (Sālūka); iii.287 (Cullatuṇḍila & Mahā -- tuṇḍila); Miln 118, 267; VbhA 11 (vara -- sayane sayāpita). -- f. sūkarī J ii.406 (read vañjha˚).

-- antaka a kind of girdle Vin ii.136. -- maŋsa pork A iii.49 (sampanna -- kolaka). -- maddava is with Franke (Dīgha trsln 222 sq.) to be interpreted as "soft (tender) boar's flesh." So also Oldenberg (Reden des B. 1922, 100) & Fleet (J.R.A.S. 1906, 656 & 881). Scarcely with Rh. D. (Dial. ii.137, with note) as "quantity of truffles" D ii.127; Ud 81 sq.; Miln 175. -- potaka the young of a pig J v.19. -- sāli a kind of wild rice J vi.531 (v. l. sukasāli). Sūkarika
Sūkarika
[fr. sūkara; BSk. saukarika Divy 505] a pig-killer, pork -- butcher S ii.257; A ii.207; iii.303; Pug 56; Th 2, 242; J vi.111; ThA 204. Sūcaka
Sūcaka
[fr. sūc to point out] an informer, slanderer S ii.257 ( = pesuñña -- kāraka C.); Sn 246. Cp. saŋ˚. Sūcana
Sūcana
(nt.) indicating, exhibiting Dhtp 592 (for gandh). Sūci
Sūci
(f.) [cp. Sk. sūci; doubtful whether to sīv] a needle Vin ii.115, 117, 177; S ii.215 sq., 257; J i.111, 248; Vism 284 (in simile); a hairpin Th 2, 254; J i.9; a small door -- bolt, a pin to secure the bolt M i.126; Th 2, 116; J i.360; v.294 (so for suci); ThA 117; cross -- bar of a rail, railing [cp. BSk. sūcī Divy 221] D ii.179.

-- kāra a needle -- maker S ii.216. -- ghaṭikā a small bolt to a door Vin ii.237; Ud 52; A iv.206; J i.346; vi.444; Vism 394. -- ghara a needle case Vin ii.301 sq.; iv.123, 167; S ii.231; J i.170. -- nāḷikā a needle -- case made of bamboo Vin ii.116. -- mukha "needle -- mouthed," a mosquito Abhp 646; a sort of intestinal worm; ˚ā pāṇā (in the Gūthaniraya purgatory) M iii.185. -- loma needle -- haired, having hair like needles S ii.257; name of a Yakkha at Gayā S i.207; Sn p. 48; SnA 551; Vism 208. -- vatta needle -- faced, having a mouth like a needle Pgdp 55. -- vāṇijaka a needle -- seller S ii.215. Sūcikā
Sūcikā
(f.) [fr. sūci] 1. a needle; (fig.) hunger Pv ii.83; PvA 107. -- 2. a small bolt to a door Vin ii.120, 148. -> sūcik'aṭṭha whose bones are like needles (?) Pv iii.23; PvA 180 (sūcigātā ti vā pāṭho. Vijjhanatthena sūcikā ti laddhanāmāya khuppipāsāya ajjhāpīḷitā. Sūcikaṇṭhā ti keci paṭhanti. Sūcichiddasadisā mukhadvārā ti attho). Sūju
Sūju
(adj.) [su+uju] upright Sn 143 = Kh ix.1 (=suṭṭhu uju KhA 236). Sūṇā
Sūṇā
(f.) a slaughter -- house J vi.62; see sūnā. Sūta
Sūta
[Sk. sūta] a charioteer J iv.408; a bard, panegyrist J i.60; v.258. Sūtighara
Sūtighara
(nt.) [sūti+ghara] a lying-in-chamber J iv.188; vi.485; Vism 259 (KhA pasūti˚); VbhA 33, 242. Sūda
Sūda
[Sk. sūda; for etym. see sādu] a cook D i.51; S v.149 sq.; J v.292; DA i.157; Vism 150 (in simile); Pv ii.937, 950. Sūdaka = sūda
Sūdaka
= sūda (cook) J v.507. Sūna
Sūna
[Sk. śūna] swollen Miln 35719; J vi.555; often wrongly spelt suna (q. v.) Vin ii.253 = A iv.275 (cp. Leumann, Gött. Anz., 1899, p. 595); DhsA 197 (suna -- bhāva). Sūnā
Sūnā
(f.) [Sk. sūnā] a slaughter-house Vin i.202; ii.267; asisūnā the same Vin ii.26; M i.130, 143; also sūna J vi.111; and sūṇā J v.303; sūnāpaṇa J vi.111; sūnaghara Vin iii.59; sūna -- nissita Vin iii.151; sūnakāraghara VbhA 252. Sūnu
Sūnu
[Vedic sūnu, fr. sū, cp. sūti] a son, child Mhvs 38, 87. Sūpa
Sūpa
[Vedic sūpa, cp. Ags. sūpan = Ger. saufen; Ohg. sūf=soup] broth, soup, curry Vin ii.77, 214 sq.; iv.192; D i.105; S v.129 sq. (their var. flavours); A iii.49 (aneka˚); J ii.66; Vism 343. samasūpaka with equal curry Vin iv.192. Also nt. Vin i.23921 ( -- āni) and f. sūpi J iv.352 (bidalasūpiyo); sūpavyañjanaka a vessel for curry and sauce Vin i.240.

-- vyañjana curry J i.197. Sūpatittha
Sūpatittha
(adj.) [su+upatittha, the latter = tittha, cp. upavana: vana] with beautiful banks. Usually spelt su˚, as if su+patittha (see patittha), e. g. Vin iii.108; J vi.518, 555 (=sobhana˚); D ii.129; Ud 83; Pv ii.120 (=sundara -- tittha PvA 77). But sū˚ at M i.76, 283; Ap 333. Sūpadhārita
Sūpadhārita
= su+upadhārita well -- known Miln 10. Sūpika
Sūpika
[sūpa+ika] a cook DA i.157; J vi.62 (v. l.), 277. Sūpin
Sūpin
(adj.) [fr. sūpa] having curry, together with curry J iii.328. Sūpeyya
Sūpeyya
(nt.) [fr. sūpa = Sk. sūpya] 1. belonging to soup, broth, soup M i.448; S iii.146. -- 2. curry D ii.198; Nd2 314; DhA iv.209.

-- paṇṇa curry leaf, curry stuff Vism 250 = VbhA 233; J i.98, 99; -- sāka a potherb for making curry J iv.445. Sūyati
Sūyati
is passive of suṇāti. -- 722 -- Sūra
Sūra1
[Vedic śūra, fr. śū] valiant, courageous S i.21; J i.262, 320; ii.119; (m.) a hero, a valiant man D i.51, 89; iii.59, 142, 145 sq; A iv.107, 110; Sn 831; DA 157, 250; (nt.) valour S v.227, read sūriya.

-- kathā a tale about heroes D i.8; DA i.90. -- kāka the valiant crow DhA iii.352. -- bhāva strength, valour J i.130; Vism 417 (in def. of suriya). Sūra
Sūra2
[Vedic sūra] the sun ThA 150 (Ap v.90); J v.56. Sūrata
Sūrata
[ = surata] soft, mild J vi.286; Mhbv 75; kindly disposed S iv.305. Cp. surata & sorata. Sūrin
Sūrin
(adj.) [fr. sūra1] wise Mhvs 26, 23. Sūriya
Sūriya
(nt.) [abstr. fr. sūra1] valour S v.227 (text, sūra); J i.282; Miln 4. Sūla
Sūla
[cp. Vedic śūla] (m. and nt.) 1. a sharp -- pointed instru- ment, a stake Th 2, 488; S v.411; Pv iv.16; Vism 489 (in compar.), 646 (khadira˚, ayo˚, suvaṇṇa˚); ThA 288; J i.143, 326; sūle uttāseti to impale A i.48; J i.326; ii.443; iv.29; appeti the same J iii.34; vi.17, or āropeti PvA 220. ayasūla an iron stake J iv.29; Sn 667; cp. asi˚ & satti˚. -- 2. a spit J i.211; roasted on a spit, roasted meat J iii.220; maŋsa˚ the same, or perhaps a spit with roasted meat J iii.52, 220. -- 3. an acute, sharp pain DhsA 397; sūlā (f.) the same A v.1105. Cp. defn of sūl as "rujā" at Dhtp 272.

-- āropana impaling, execution Miln 197, 290. -- koṭi the point of the stake DhA ii.240. Sūḷāra
Sūḷāra
(adj.) [su+uḷāra] magnificent Mhvs 28, 1. Sūsūyati
Sūsūyati
[Denom. fr. sū] to make a hissing sound "sū sū" (of a snake) DhA ii.257 (v. l. susumāyati). Se
Se
(pron.) = taŋ: see under sa2. Seka
Seka
[fr. sic, see siñcati] sprinkling J i.93 (suvaṇṇa -- rasa -- s.- piñjara). Sekata
Sekata
(nt.) [Sk. saikata] a sandbank Dāvs i.32. Sekadhārī
Sekadhārī
(f.) (?) J vi.536 (nīlapupphi -- ˚, C. nīlapupphīti ādikā pupphavalliyo). Sekha
Sekha
(& sekkha) [cp. Sk. śaikṣa; fr. siks, sikkhati] belonging to training, in want of training, imperfect Vin i.17, 248; iii.24; Dhs 1016; one who has still to learn, denotes one who has not yet attained Arahantship D ii.143; M i.4, 144; A i.63; Pug 14; It 9 sq., 53, 71; Sn 970, 1038 = S ii.47; definition A i.231; S v.14, 145, 175, 229 sq., 298, 327; Nd1 493 (sikkhatī ti sekkho, etc.) =Nd2 689; VbhA 328. s. pāṭipadā the path of the student M i.354; iii.76, 300; s. sīla the moral practice of the student A i.219 sq.; ii.6, 86 sq.; asekha not to be trained, adept, perfect Vin i.62 sq.; iii.24; Pug 14 (=arahant). See asekha.

-- bala the strength of the disciple, of five kinds A ii.150. -- sammata esteemed to be under discipline, educated Vin iv.179. Sekhavant
Sekhavant
(?) quick J vi.199 (v. l. sīghavant). Sekhiya
Sekhiya
[fr. sekha] connected with training; s. dhamma rule of good breeding Vin iv.185 sq. Segālaka
Segālaka
(nt.) [fr. sigāla] a jackal's cry A i.187 sq. (˚ŋ nadati); cp. sigālika. Secanaka
Secanaka
[fr. seceti] sprinkling J vi.69; neg. asecanaka (q. v.). Seceti
Seceti
see siñcati. Secchā
Secchā
= sa -- icchā, Sdhp 249. Seṭṭha
Seṭṭha
best, excellent D i.18, 99; S iii.13; Sn 47, 181, 822, 907; Dh 1, 26; J i.443; Nd1 84 = Nd2 502 (with syn.); J i.88; cp. seṭṭhatara J v.148.

-- kamma excellent, pious deeds Mhvs 59, 9. -- sammata considered the best J iii.111. Seṭṭhi
Seṭṭhi
[fr. seṭṭha, Sk. śreṣṭhin] foreman of a guild, treasurer, banker, "City man", wealthy merchant Vin i.15 sq., 271 sq.; ii.110 sq., 157; S i.89; J i.122; ii.367 etc.; Rājagaha˚ the merchant of Rājagaha Vin ii.154; J iv.37; Bārāṇasi˚ the merchant of Benares J i.242, 269; jana -- pada -- seṭṭhi a commercial man of the country J iv.37; seṭṭhi gahapati Vin i.273; S i.92; there were families of seṭṭhis Vin i.18; J iv.62; ˚ -- ṭṭhāna the position of a seṭṭhi J ii.122, 231; hereditary J i.231, 243; ii.64; iii.475; iv.62 etc.; seṭṭhânuseṭṭhī treasurers and under -- treasurers Vin i.18; see Vinaya Texts i.102. Seṭṭhitta
Seṭṭhitta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. seṭṭhi] the office of treasurer or (wholesale) merchant S i.92. Seṇi
Seṇi
(f.) [Class. Sk. śreṇi in meaning "guild"; Vedic = row] 1. a guild Vin iv.226; J i.267, 314; iv.43; Dāvs ii.124; their number was eighteen J vi.22, 427; VbhA 466. ˚ -- pamukha the head of a guild J ii.12 (text seni -- ). -- 2. a division of an army J vi.583; ratha -- ˚ J vi.81, 49; seṇimokkha the chief of an army J vi.371 (cp. senā and seniya). Seta
Seta
(adj.) [Vedic śveta & śvitra; cp. Av. spaēta white; Lith. szaitýti to make light; Ohg. hwīz = E. white] white D ii.297=M i.58; Sn 689; A iii.241; VbhA 63 (opp. kāḷa); J i.175; PvA 157, 215. name of a mountain in the Himālayas S i.67= Miln 242; an elephant of King Pasenadi A iii.345.

-- anga white bodied Mhvs 10, 54. -- aṭṭhika lit. (having) white bones, (suffering from) famine [cp. BSk. śvetāsthi Divy 131] Vin iii.6; iv.23; S iv.323; A i.160; iv.279. -> f. mildew Vin ii.256; J v.401. -- odaka clear (transparent) water Pv ii.120. -- kambala white blanket J iv.353. -- kamma whitewashing J vi.432. -- kuṭṭha white leprosy J v.69; vi.196. -- geru N. of a plant J vi.535. -- cchatta a white parasol, an emblem of royalty D ii.19; A i.145; J i.177, 267; PvA 74; DhA i.167; iii.120. -- pacchāda with white covering S iv.292 = Ud 76=DhsA 397. -- puppha "white -- flowered," N. of a tree (Vitex trifolia?) J v.422 (=piyaka). -- vārī (& ˚vārisa) names of plants or trees J vi.535, 536. Setaka
Setaka
(adj.) [seta+ka] white, transparent D ii.129; M i.76, 167, 283. Setaccha
Setaccha
a tree J vi.535; setacchakūṭa adj. J vi.539 (sakuṇa). Setapaṇṇi
Setapaṇṇi
(f. [?]) a tree J vi.335. Seti & sayati
Seti
& sayati [śī, Vedic śete & śayate; cp. Av. saēte = Gr. kei_tai to lie, w) -- keano/s ("ocean")=Sk. ā -- śayānah, koima/w to put to sleep; Ags. hāēman to marry; also Lat. cīvis=citizen. -- The Dhtp simply defines as saya (374)] to lie down, to sleep; (applied) to be in a condition, to dwell, behave etc. -- Pres. seti S i.41, 47, 198 (kiŋ sesi why do you lie asleep? Cp. Pv ii.61); J i.141; Dh 79, 168; Sn 200; VvA 42; sayati Vin i.57; J ii.53; DA i.261. Pot. sayeyya Pv ii.3,9 & saye It 120. ppr. sayaŋ It 82, 117; Sn 193; sayāna (med.) D i.90; ii.292; M i.57; It 117; Sn 1145; & semāna D ii.24; M i.88; S i.121; J i.180; also sayamāna Th 1, 95. -- Fut. sessati S i.83; Sn 970; DhA i.320. -- Aor. sesi J v.70; settha Sn 970; sayi J vi.197, asayittha J i.335. -- Inf. sayituŋ PvA 157; ger. sayitvā J ii.77. -- pp. sayita (q. v.). -- Caus. II. sayāpeti to make lie down, to bed on a couch etc. J i.245; v.461; Mhvs 31, 35; PvA 104. -- pp. sayāpita. -- sukhaŋ seti to be at ease or happy S i.212; J v.242 (raṭṭhaŋ i. e. is prosperous); opp. dukkhaŋ s. to be miserable A i.137. Setu
Setu
[Vedic setu, to si or sā (see sinoti); cp. Av. haētu dam; Lat. saeta; Ags. sāda rope; etc.] a causeway, bridge Vin i.230 = D ii.89, J i.199; Vism 412 (simile); DhA i.83; SnA 357; PvA 102, 151, 215. uttāra˚ -- a bridge for crossing over M i.134; S iv.174; Miln 194; naḷa -- ˚ a bamboo bridge Th 1, 7.

-- kāraka a bridge -- maker, one who paves the way S i.33; Kv 345. -- ghāta pulling down of the bridge (leading to something) Vin i.59; iii.6; A i.220, 261; ii.145 sq.; Dhs 299; DhsA 219; DA i.305; Nd2 462; DhA iv.36. -- 723 -- Seda
Seda
[Vedic sveda, fr. svid, cp. Av. xvaēda, Gr. i)drw/s, Lat. sudor, Ags. svāt = E. sweat] sweat D ii.293; A ii.67 sq.; It 76; Sn 196; J i.118, 138, 146, 243; in detaiḷ (physiologically) at Vism 262, 360; VbhA 66, 245; sweating for medicinal purposes, mahā˚ a great steambath; sambhāra˚ bringing about sweating by the use of herbs, etc.; seda -- kamma sweating Vin i.205. -- pl. sedā drops of perspiration DhA i.253.

-- âvakkhitta earned in the sweat of the brow A ii.67 sq., iii.45, 76; iv.95, 282. -- gata sweat -- covered, sweating VvA 305. -- mala the stain of sweat J iii.290; VbhA 276. -- yūsa sweat Vism 195. Sedaka
Sedaka
(adj.) [fr. seda] sweating, transpiring D ii.265. Sedita
Sedita
[pp. of sedeti] moistened J i.52 (su˚). Cp. pari˚. Sedeti
Sedeti
[Caus. of sijjati] to cause to transpire, to heat, to steam J iv.238; v.271; KhA 52, 67; Vin iii.82 (aor. sedesi); ger. sedetvā J i.324; ii.74; pp. sedita. Caus II. sedāpeti J iii.122. Sena
Sena1
[ = sayana] lying, sleeping; couch, bed J v.96 (=sa- yana). Sena
Sena2
[Sk. śyena] a hawk J i.273; ii.51, 60; DhA ii.267. Senaka
Senaka1
a carter ThA 271 ( = sākaṭika of Th 2, 443). Senaka
Senaka2
= sena2 J iv.58, 291; vi.246. Senā
Senā
[Vedic senā2 perhaps fr. si to bind] an army Vin i.241; iv.104 sq. (where described as consisting of hatthī, assā, rathā, pattī), 160; S i.112; A iii.397; v.82; J ii.94; Miln 4; Nd1 95 (Māra˚), 174 (id.).

-- gutta [sena˚] a high official, a minister of war, only in cpd. mahā -- ˚ J vi.2, 54; mahāsenaguttaṭṭhāna the position of a generalissimo J v.115. -- nāyaka a general Vin i.73. -- pacca the position as general Mhvs 38, 81. -- pati a general Vin i.233 sq.; Sn 556; A iii.38; iv.79; J i.133; iv.43; dhamma -- ˚ a general of the Dhamma Miln 343; DhA iii.305. -- patika a general A iii.76, 78, 300. -- byūha massing of troops, grouping & fitting up an army Vin iv.107; D i.6; Ps ii.213; DA i.85 ( -- vyūha). Senānī
Senānī
a general; only in cpd. ˚ -- kuṭilatā strategy (lit. crookedness of a general) DhsA 151. Senāsana
Senāsana
(nt.) [sayana+āsana] sleeping and sitting, bed & chair, dwelling, lodging Vin i.196, 294, 356; ii.146, 150 (˚parikkhāra -- dussa); iii.88 etc.; D ii.77; A i.60; It 103, 109; DA i.208; J i.217; VbhA 365 ( = seti c'eva āsati ca etthā ti senāsanaŋ). See also panta.

-- gāha allotment of lodging -- places Vin ii.167. -- gāhāpaka house -- steward Vin ii.167. -- cārikā a wandering from lodging to lodging Vin i.182, 203; iii.21; J 126. -- paññāpaka regulator of lodging -- places Vin ii.75, 176; iii.158 sq.; iv.38. -- paṭibāhana keeping out of the lodging J i.217. -- paviveka secluson in respect of lodging A i.240 sq. -- vatta rule of conduct in respect of dwelling Vin ii.220. Seniya
Seniya
[fr. senā] belonging to an army, soldier J i.314. Senesika
Senesika
at Vin i.200 is to be read senehika (fr. sineha), i. e. greasy. Sepaṇṇī
Sepaṇṇī
(f.) [Sk. śrīparṇī, lit. having lucky leaves] name of a tree, Gmelina arborea J i.173, 174; DhA i.145. Semānaka
Semānaka
[semāna+ka; ppr. of seti] lying Th 1,14; DhA i.16. Semha
Semha
(nt.) [ = silesuma] phlegm Vin ii.137; D ii.14, 293; A ii.87; iii.101; iv.320; Sn 198, 434; Miln 112, 303. Physiologically in detail at Vism 359; VbhA 65, 244. Semhāra
Semhāra
some sort of animal (monkey?) (explained by makkaṭa) M i.429. Semhika
Semhika
(adj.) [fr. semha] a man of phlegmatic humour Miln 298. Seyya
Seyya
(adj.) [Sk. śreyas, compar. formn] better, excellent; nom. masc. seyyo S iii.48 sq.; Sn 918; Dh 308; Dhs 1116; J i.180; nom. fem. seyyasi J v.393; nom. neut. seyyo often used as a noun, meaning good, happiness, wellbeing Vin i.33; D i.184; ii.330; Sn 427, 440; Dh 76, 100; J ii.44; vi.4 (maraṇaŋ eva seyyo, with abl. of compar. rajjato); Pv ii.943 (dhanaŋ); iv.16 (jīvitaŋ); nom. fem. seyyā J v.94; nom. acc. neutr. seyyaŋ J ii.402; iii.237; abl. as adv. seyyaso "still better" Dh 43; J ii.402; iv.241. Superl. seṭṭha. Seyyaka
Seyyaka
(adj.) [fr. seyyā] lying M i.433, see uttānaseyyaka and gabbhaseyyaka. Seyyati
Seyyati
[śṛ, Vedic śṛṇāti & śīryate] to crush J i.174. See also sarati3 & vi˚. -- pp. siṇṇa: see vi˚. Seyyathā
Seyyathā
(adv.) [ = taŋ yathā, with Māgadhī se˚ for ta˚; cp. sayathā & taŋyathā] as, just as, s. pi Vin i.5; D i.45; It 90, 113; J i.339; seyyathīdaŋ as follows "i. e." or "viz." Vin i.10; D i.89; ii.91; S v.421; It 99. Seyyā
Seyyā
(f.) [Sk. śayyā; fr. śī] a bed, couch M i.502; A i.296; Vin ii.167 (˚aggena by the surplus in beds); Sn 29, 152, 535; Dh 305, 309; Pv ii.311; iv.12; J vi.197 (gilāna˚ sick -- bed). Four kinds A ii.244; VbhA 345. seyyaŋ kappeti to lie down Vin iv.15, 18 sq. -- Combd with āvasatha, e. g. at A ii.85, 203; iii.385; iv.60; v.271 sq. -- As -- ˚ used in adj. sense of "lying down, resting," viz. ussūra˚ sleeping beyond sunrise D iii.184 = DhA ii.227; divā˚ noon -- day rest D i.112, 167; sīha˚ like a lion D ii.134; A iv.87; dukkha˚ sleeping uncomfortably DhA iv.8. Seritā
Seritā
(f.) [fr. serin] independence, freedom Sn 39 sq. Serin
Serin
(adj.) [cp. Sk. svairin] self -- willed, independent, according to one's liking M i.506; Th 1, 1144; Pv iv.187; J i.5. Serivihāra
Serivihāra
(adj.) [serin+vihāra] lodging at one's own choice M i.469 sq.; Vism 66 (˚sukhaŋ). Serīsaka
Serīsaka
(adj.) [fr. sirīsa] made of Sirīsa wood, name of a hall D ii.356 sq.; Vv 8453; VvA 331, 351. Serīsamaha
Serīsamaha
a festival in honour of the Serīsaka Vimāna Vv 8437, 53 Sereyyaka
Sereyyaka
name of a tree (Barleria cristata) J iii.253. Sela
Sela
[fr. silā] rocky Dh 8; (m.) rock, stone, crystal S i.127; D ii.39; A iii.346; Dh 81; J ii.14; Vin i.4 sq.; iii.147 = J ii.284.

-- guḷa a rocky ball J i.147. -- maya made of rock (crystal?), of the bowl of the Buddha SnA 139, 159. Selaka
Selaka
[sela+ka] "rocky," a kind of copper (cp. pisāca) VbhA 63. Seḷita
Seḷita
(selita) [pp. of seḷeti] shouting, noise, row J ii.218. To this belongs the doubtful der. selissaka (nt.) noise, row, mad pranks at S iv.117 (v. l. seleyyaka). Seḷeti
Seḷeti
[according to Kern, Toev. ii.78 for sveḷayati, cp. Oir. fét whistle, music etc. Idg. *sveiƶd] to make a noise, shout, cry exultantly Sn 682; J v.67; Bu i.36. -> pp. seḷita. -- Other, diff. explns of the word see in J.P.T.S. 1885, p. 54. -- 724 -- Sevaka
Sevaka
serving, following; a servant, dependent J ii.12, 125, 420; SnA 453. See vipakkha˚. Sevati
Sevati
[sev] 1. to serve, associate with, resort to Vin ii.203; A i.124 sq.; Sn 57, 75; Pug 33; It 107; J iii.525; SnA 169. -- 2. to practice, embrace, make use of Vin i.10 = S v.421; D iii.157; S i.12; M iii.45; Dh 167, 293, 310; Sn 72, 391, 927; Nd1 383, 481; J i.152, 361; aor. asevissaŋ J iv.178. -- pp. sevita: see ā˚, vi˚. Sevanatā
Sevanatā
( -- ˚) (f.) [abstr, fr. sevati] = sevanā VbhA 282 sq. Sevanā
Sevanā
(f.) [fr. sevati] following, associating with Sn 259; Dhs 1326; Pug 20; Dhtp 285 (as nt.); cohabiting Vin iii.29. Sevā
Sevā
(f.) [fr. sev] service, resorting to S i.110; ThA 179. Sevāla
Sevāla
[cp. Epic Sk. śaivala & saivāla] the plant Blyxa octandra moss, A iii.187, 232, 235; J ii.150 = DhA i.144; J iii.520; iv.71; v.462; Miln 35; DhA iii.199; Tikp 12 (in sim.). (m. and nt.) J v.37; -- mālaka (or -- mālika) who makes garlands of Blyxa octandra A v.263; S iv.312. -- Often combd with another waterplant, paṇaka (see under paṇṇaka), e. g. A iii.187; Vism 261 (simile); VbhA 244 (id.); KhA 61 (cp. Schubring, Kalpasūtra p. 46 sq.). Sevin
Sevin
(adj.) [fr. sev] serving, practising Sn 749; It 54. See vipakkha˚. Seveti
Seveti
to cause to fall, to throw down J iii.198 (doubtful; C -- expls as pāteti & gives saveti [ = sāveti, Caus. of sru to make glide] as gloss; v. l. also sādeti). Sesa
Sesa
[fr. śiṣ] remaining, left D ii.48; Sn 217, 354; J ii.128; (nt.) remainder PvA 14, 70; ˚ -- ka the same Mhvs 10, 36; 22, 42; 25, 19. Seseti
Seseti:
see sissati. Sessan, sessati
Sessan,
sessati see seti. Sehi
Sehi
is instr. pl. of sa4 (his own): Dh 136; DhA iii.64. Soka
Soka
[fr. śuc, to gleam (which to the Dhtp however is known only in meaning "soka": Dhtp 39); cp. Vedic śoka the flame of fire, later in sense of "burning grief"] grief, sorrow, mourning; defd as "socanā socitattaŋ anto -- soko . . . cetaso parijjhāyanā domanassaŋ" at Ps i.38 = Nd1 128=Nd2 694; shorter as "ñāti -- vyasan'-> ādīhi phuṭṭhassa citta -- santāpo" at Vism 503=VbhA. Cp. the foll.: Vin i.6; D i.6; ii.305, 103; S i.110, 123, 137; A i.51, 144; ii.21; v.141; Sn 584, 586; J i.189; SnA 155; DhA ii.166; KhA 153 (abbūḷha˚); Pv i.43 (=citta -- santāpa PvA 18); PvA 6, 14, 38, 42, 61. -- asoka without grief: see viraja. See also dukkha B iii.1 b.

-- aggi the fire of sorrow PvA 41. pl. -- divasā the days of mourning (at the king's court after the death of the queen) SnA 89. -- parideva sorrow and lamenting A iii.32, 326 sq.; v.216 sq.; Vism 503; Nd1 128. -- pariddava id. Vv 8430. -- pareta overcome with grief Pv i.86. -- vinaya dispelling of grief PvA 39. -- vinodana id. PvA 61. -- salla the dart or sting of sorrow A iii.54, 58; Nd1 59, 414; Pv i.86; PvA 93, 162. Sokajjhāyikā
Sokajjhāyikā
(f.) [soka+ajjhāyaka; this soka perhaps *sūka, as in visūka?] a woman who plays the fool, a comedian Vin iv.285; J vi.580 (where C. expls as "grief-dispellers"). Sokavant
Sokavant
(adj.) [soka+vant] sorrowful Mhvs 19, 15. Sokika
Sokika
(adj.) [soka+ika] sorrowful; a -- ˚ free from sorrow ThA 229. Sokin
Sokin
(adj.) [fr. soka] (fem. ˚nī) sorrowful Dh 28. Sokhya
Sokhya
(nt.) [abstr. der. fr. sukha] happiness Sn 61; J v.205. Sokhumma
Sokhumma
(nt.) [abstr. fr. sukhuma] fineness, minuteness A ii.17; Th 1, 437. At A ii.18 with double suffix ˚tā. Sogandhika
Sogandhika
(nt.) [Sk. saugandhika; fr. sugandha] the white water -- lily (Nymphaea lotus) J v.419; vi.518, 537 (seta -- sogandhiyehi). -- As m. designation of a purgatory A v.173; S i.152; Sn p. 126. Socati
Socati
[Vedic śocati, śuc, said of the gleaming of a fire] 1. to mourn, grieve Sn 34; Dh 15; J i.168; Pv i.87 (+rodati); i.1015; i.122; Miln 11; pres 3rd pl. socare Sn 445; Dh 225; ppr. socamāna J ii.75; ppr. asocaŋ not grieving S i.116; mā soci do not sorrow D ii.144; J vi.190; plur. mā socayittha do not grieve D ii.158; Caus. socayati to cause to grieve D i.52; S i.116; Th 1, 743 (ger. ˚ayitvā); Miln 226; soceti J ii.8. -- pp. socita. -- Caus. II. socāpayati the same S i.116. Socana
Socana
(nt.) [fr. śuc] sorrow, mourning PvA 18, 62; -- nā (f.) the same D ii.306; S i.108 = Sn 34; Nd2 694. Socita
Socita
(nt.) [fr. socati] grief Th 2, 462. Socitatta
Socitatta
(nt.) sorrowfulness D ii.306; Ps i.38 = Nd2 694. Socin
Socin
[fr. socati] grieving A iv.294 (socī ca = socicca). Sociya
Sociya
[ = Sk. śocya] deplorable Sdhp 262. Soceyya
Soceyya
(nt.) [abstr. fr. śuc, *śaucya] purity S i.78; A i.94; ii.188; v.263; Vism 8; J i.214; Miln 115, 207; is threefold A i.271; It 55; D iii.219; further subdivided A v.264, 266 sq. In meaning of "cleaning, washing" given in the Dhtp as def. of roots for washing, bathing etc. (khal, nahā, sinā, sudh). Sojacca
Sojacca
(nt.) [abstr. fr. sujāta] nobility, high birth J ii.137. Soṇa
Soṇa1
[see suvāṇa] a dog J i.146; vi.107 ( = sunakha); Sn 675; Vism 191; DhA iii.255 (+sigāla); soṇi (f.) a bitch Mhvs 7, 8=sona It 36. Soṇa
Soṇa2
[cp. śyonāka] a kind of tree; the Bodhi trees of the Buddhas Paduma and Nārada Bu ix.22; x.24; J i.36, 37. Soṇita
Soṇita
(nt.) [Sk. śoṇita, fr. śoṇa red] blood Th 2, 467; DA i.120; Vism 259. Soṇī
Soṇī
(f.) [cp. Sk. śroṇī] 1. the buttock Sn 609; J v.155, 216, 302. -- 2. a bitch, see soṇa1. Soṇḍa
Soṇḍa
[cp. Sk. śauṇḍa] addicted to drink, intoxicated, a drunkard D ii.172; J v.436, 499; Miln 345; Vism 316. a -- soṇḍa A iii.38; iv.266; J v.166; (fem. -- ī) itthisoṇḍī a woman addicted to drink Sn 112 (? better "one who is addicted to women"; SnA 172 expls to that effect, cp. J ii.431 itthi -- surā -- maŋsa -- soṇḍa); yuddhasoṇḍa J i.204; dāsi -- soṇḍa a libertine J v.436 (+surā˚); dhamma -- soṇḍatā affectionate attachment to the law J v.482. Soṇḍaka
Soṇḍaka
[soṇḍa+ka] in cpd. surā˚ a drunkard J v.433; vi.30. Soṇḍā
Soṇḍā
(f.) [Sk. śuṇḍā] an elephant's trunk Vin ii.201; = S ii.269; M i.415; A iv.87 (uccā˚ fig. of a bhikkhu] J i.50, 187; iv.91; v.37; DhA i.58; Miln 368; soṇḍa (m.) the same S i.104. Soṇḍika
Soṇḍika
[fr. soṇḍa] 1. a distiller and seller of spirituous liquors; M i.228 = 374. -- 2. a drunkard Miln 93. Soṇḍikā
Soṇḍikā
(f.) 1. tendril of a creeper S i.106; Miln 374. - 2. peppered meat S ii.98 (cp. Sanskrit śauṇḍī long pepper). -- 3. in udaka˚ KhA 65 ( = sondī1) a tank. Soṇḍī
Soṇḍī1
(f.) a natural tank in a rock J i.462; DhA ii.56 (soṇḍi); udaka -- ˚ J iv.333; Vism 119; KhA 65 (soṇḍikā). -- 725 -- Soṇḍī
Soṇḍī2
(f.) the neck of a tortoise S iv.177 (soṇḍi -- pañcamāni angāni); Miln 371; the hood of a snake J vi.166 (nāgā soṇḍi -- katā). Soṇṇa
Soṇṇa
(nt.) [the contracted form of suvaṇṇa, cp. sovaṇṇa] gold; (adj.) golden Mhvs 5, 87; Vv 54, 367.

-- âlankāra with golden ornaments J ii.48. -- dhaja with golden flags J ii.48. -- bhinkāra a golden vase Sdhp 513. -- maya golden, made of gold J vi.203. -- vālukā gold dust J vi.278. Sota
Sota1
(nt.) [Vedic śrotas & śrotra; fr. śru: see suṇāti] ear, the organ of hearing Vin i.9, 34; D i.21; Sn 345 (nom. pl. sotā); Vism 444 (defined); Dhs 601; DhsA 310; -- dibba -- sota the divine ear (cp. dibba -- cakkhu) D i.79, 154; iii.38, 281; dhamma˚ the ear of the Dhamma A iii.285 sq., 350; v.140; S ii.43; sotaŋ odahati to listen (carefully) D i.230; ohita -- s. with open ears A iv.115; v.154; J i.129.

-- añjana a kind of ointment made with antimony Vin i.203. -- ânugata following on hearing, acquired by hearing A ii.185. -- āyatana the sense of hearing Dhs 601 sq.; D ii.243, 280, 290. -- âvadhāna giving ear, attention M ii.175. -- indriya the faculty of hearing Dhs 604; D iii.239. -- dvāra "door of the ear," auditory sensation VbhA 41. -- dhātu the ear element, the ear Vin ii.299; D i.79; S ii.121; A i.255 (dibba˚); iii.17 (id.); v.199; Vbh 334; Vism 407 (defd); Dhs 601, 604; Miln 6. -- viññāṇa auditory cognition, perception through the ear Dhs 443. -- viññeyya cognizable by hearing D ii.281; Dhs 467; KhA 101. Sota
Sota2
(m. & nt.) [Vedic srotas, nt., fr. sru; see savati] 1. stream, flood, torrent Sn 433; It 144; J i.323; sīgha -- s. having a quick current D ii.132; Sn 319; metaphorically, the stream of cravings Sn 715 (chinna˚; cp. MVastu iii.88 chinna -- srota), 1034; S iv.292; M i.226 (sotaŋ chetvā); It 114; denotes noble eightfold path S v.347; bhava -- s. torrent of rebirth S i.15; iv.128; viññāṇa -- s. flux of mind, D iii.105; nom. sing. soto S iv.291 sq.; v.347; nom. plur. sotā Sn 1034; acc. plur. sotāni Sn 433; plur. sotāyo (f. [?], or wrong reading instead of sotāso, sotāse [?]) J iv.287, 288. -- 2. passage, aperture (of body, as eyes, ears, etc.), in kaṇṇa˚ orifice of the ear, and nāsa˚ nostril, e. g. D i.106; Sn p. 108; J i.163, 164 (heṭṭhā -- nāsika -- s.); Vism 400 (dakkhiṇa˚ & vāma -- kaṇṇa -- s.).

-- āpatti entering upon the stream, i. e. the noble eightfold path (S v.347), conversion Vin ii.93 etc. By it the first three Saŋyojanas are broken S v.357, 376. It has four phases (angas): faith in the Buddha, the Dhamma, and the Order, and, further, the noble Sīlas S ii.68 sq.; v.362 sq.; A iii.12; iv.405; D iii.227 (in detail). Another set of four angas consists of sappurisa -- saŋsevā, saddhammasavana, yonisomanasikāra, and dhammânudhammapaṭipatti S v.347, 404. -- phala the effect of having entered upon the stream, the fruit of conversion Vin i.293; ii.183; M i.325; A i.44; iii.441; iv.292 sq., 372 sq.; D i.229; iii.227; S iii.168, 225; v.410 sq.; Pug 13; DhA iii.192; iv.5; PvA 22, 38, 66, 142. -- magga the way to conversion, the lower stage of conversion DA i.237; J i.97; VbhA 307; see magga. -- āpanna one who has entered the stream, a convert Vin ii.161, 240; iii.10; D i.156; iii.107 sq., 132, 227; A ii.89; S ii.68; iii.203 sq., 225 sq.; v.193 sq.; DA i.313; Vism 6, 709; PvA 5, 153. The converted is endowed with āyu, vaṇṇa, sukha, and ādhipateyya S v.390; he is called wealthy and glorious S v.402; conversion excludes rebirth in purgatory, among animals and petas, as well as in other places of misery; he is a -- vinipāta -- dhamma: D i.156; ii.200; S v.193 sq., 343; A i.232; ii.238; iii.331 sq.; iv.405 sq., v.182; M iii.81; or khīṇa -- niraya: A iii.211; iv.405 sq. (+khīṇa -- tiracchānayoni etc.). The converted man is sure to attain the sambodhi (niyato sambodhipārāyano D i.156, discussed in Dial. i.190 -- 192). Sotatta
Sotatta
scorched J i.390 = M i.79, read so tatto (cp. M i.536). See sosīta. Sotar
Sotar
[n. ag. fr. suṇāti] a hearer D i.56; A ii.116; iii.161 sq. -- sotā used as a feminine noun ThA 200 (Ap v.3). Sotavant
Sotavant
[sota1+vant] having ears, nom. pl. sotavanto S i.138; Vin i.7; D ii.39. Sotukāma
Sotukāma
[sotuŋ ( = inf. of suṇāti)+kāma] wish or wishing to hear A i.150; iv.115; Vism 444; f. abstr. ˚kamyatā desire to listen A v.145 sq., SnA 135. Sotta
Sotta
[pp. of supati, for sutta] asleep S i.170. Sotti
Sotti
(f.) [Sk. śukti] a shell (?) filled with chunam and lac, used for scratching the back, a back -- scratcher acting as a sponge M ii.46; A i.208; see sutti e. g. Vin ii.107. Sottiya
Sottiya
[ = *śrotriya] well versed in sacred learning, a learned man M i.280; Sn 533 sq. See sotthiya. Sottun
Sottun
see supati. Sotthāna
Sotthāna
(nt.) [cp. Sk. svastyayana] blessing, well -- fare Sn 258; A iv.271, 285; J v.29 (where the metre requires sotthayanaŋ, as at iv.75); vi.139. Sotthi
Sotthi
(f.) [Sk. svasti = su+asti] well -- being, safety, bless ing A iii.38= iv.266 ("brings future happiness"); J i.335; s. hotu hail! D i.96; sotthiŋ in safety, safely Dh 219 (=anupaddavena DhA iii.293); Pv iv.64 (=nirupaddava PvA 262); Sn 269; sotthinā safely, prosperously D i.72, 96; ii.346; M i.135; J ii.87; iii.201. suvatthi the same J iv.32. See sotthika & sovatthika.

-- kamma a blessing J i.343. -- kāra an utterer of blessings, a herald J vi.43. -- gata safe wandering, prosperous journey Mhvs 8, 10; sotthigamana the same J i.272. -- bhāva well -- being, prosperity, safety J i.209; iii.44; DhA ii.58; PvA 250. -- vācaka utterer of blessings, a herald Miln 359. -- sālā a hospital Mhvs 10, 101. Sotthika
Sotthika
(& ˚iya) (adj.) [fr. sotthi] happy, auspicious, blessed, safe VvA 95; DhA ii.227 (˚iya; in phrase dīgha˚ one who is happy for long [?]). Sotthiya = sottiya
Sotthiya1
= sottiya a learned man, a brahmin Dh 295; ThA 200 (Ap v.6); J iv.301, 303; v.466. Sotthiya
Sotthiya2
(nt.) [der.?] a childbirth rag Vism 63. Sotthivant
Sotthivant
(adj.) [sotthi+vant] lucky, happy, safe Vv 8452. Sodaka
Sodaka
(adj.) [sa+udaka] containing water Mhvs 30, 38; 37, 200. Sodariya
Sodariya
(adj.) [sa+udariya] having a common origin (in the same mother's womb), born of the same mother, a brother J i.308; iv.434; PvA 94 (bhātā). Sodhaka
Sodhaka
[fr. sodheti] one who cleanses Mhvs 10, 90; PvA 7. Sodhana
Sodhana
(nt.) [fr. sodheti] cleansing Vism 276 (as f. ˚nā); examining J i.292; payment (see uddhāra) J i.321. Sodheti
Sodheti
[Caus. of sujjhati] to make clean, to purify Vin i.47; M i.39; Dh 141; DA i.261, 135; to examine, search J i.200, 291; ii.123; iii.528; to search for, to seek J ii.135; to clean away, to remove J iv.404; to correct J ii.48; to clear a debt: in this meaning mixed with sādheti (q. v.) in phrases iṇaŋ s. and uddhāraŋ s.; we read iṇaŋ sodheti at PvA 276; uddhāraŋ sodheti at J iv.45; otherwise sādheti. -- Caus. II. sodhāpeti to cause to clean, to clean Vin iii.208, 248 = i.206; J i.305; ii.19; Pass. sodhīyati to be cleansed, to be adorned Bu ii.40 sq.=J i.12. Sona
Sona
dog It 36; see soṇa. Sopadhīka
Sopadhīka
= sa+upadhika. -- 726 -- Sopavāhana
Sopavāhana
= sa+upavāhana. Sopāka
Sopāka
[ = sapāka; śva+pāka] a man of a very low caste, an outcast Sn 137. See also sapāka. Sopāna
Sopāna
(m. and nt.) [cp. Sk. sopāna; Aufrecht "sa+ upāyana"] stairs, staircase Vin ii.117, 152; D ii.178; J i.330, 348; iv.265; Vism 10; VvA 188; PvA 156, 275; Vv 785; dhura -- sopāna the highest step of a staircase (?) J i.330.

-- kalingara flight of steps Vin ii.128 (v. l. sopāṇakaḷevara as at M ii.92). -- panti a flight or row of steps, a ladder Vism 392 (three). -- pāda the foot of the steps (opp. ˚sīsa) DhA i.115. -- phalaka a step of a staircase J i.330. Soppa
Soppa
(nt.) [ = supina] sleep, dream S i.110; A i.261 (i. e. laziness). ˚ante in a dream J v.329 (C. reading for T. suppante). Soppati
Soppati
see supati. Sobbha
Sobbha
[cp. Sk. śvabhra] a hole, (deep) pit D ii.127; M i.11; A i.243; ii.140; iii.389 (see papāta); v.114 sq.; J vi.166; Th 1, 229; SnA 355, 479; a water -- pool S ii.32; Sn 720; Vism 186; as adj. at S iii.109 (+papāta), i. e. "deep"; kussobbha a small collection of water S ii.32, 118; Sn 720; mahāsobbha the ocean S ii.32, 118. Sobhagga
Sobhagga
(nt.) [abstr. fr. subhaga] prosperity, beauty Th 2, 72; J i.51, 475; ii.158; iv.133. As sobhagyatā at DA i.161. Sobhañjana
Sobhañjana
the tree Hyperanthica moringa J v.405; sobhañjanaka the same J iii.161 ( = siggurukkha, C.); vi.535. Sobhaṇa
Sobhaṇa1
(nt.) [fr. śubh] 1. a kind of edging on a girdle Vin ii.136. -- 2. beauty, ornament Miln 356. Sobhaṇa
Sobhaṇa2
(adj.) [fr. śubh] 1. adorning, shining, embellishing A ii.8, 225; very often spelt sobhana J i.257; ThA 244; nagara -- sobhaṇā (or ˚iṇī) a courtesan J ii.367; iii.435, 475; Miln 350; PvA 4. -- 2. good Miln 46 (text ˚na); Cpd. 96; 101; 106. Sobhati
Sobhati
[śubh, Vedic śobhate] 1. to shine, to be splendid, look beautiful J i.89; ii.93; sobhetha let your light shine (with foll. yaŋ "in that . . .") Vin i.187, 349 = ii.162= J iii.487=S i.217; ppr. ˚māna Vism 58. aor. sobhi J i.143; Caus. sobheti to make resplendent, adorn, grace A ii.7; Sn 421; J i.43; Miln 1; Vism 79 (ppr. sobhayanto); to make clear D ii.105. Sobhanagaraka
Sobhanagaraka
(nt.) a kind of game, fairy scenes D i.6, 13; DA i.84. Sobhā
Sobhā
(f.) [fr. śubh; Sk. śobhā] splendour, radiance, beauty Mhvs 33, 30; J iv.333; ThA 226; Miln 356. Sobhiya
Sobhiya
[cp. Sk. śaubhika; BSk. śobhika MVastu iii.113] a sort of magician or trickster, clown J vi.277 (sobhiyā ti nagarasobhanā sampannarūpā purisā; not correct; C.). Somanassa
Somanassa
(nt.) [fr. su+mano; cp. domanassa] mental ease, happiness, joy D i.3; ii.278; iii.270; M i.85, 313; S iv.232; A ii.69; iii.207, 238; Dh 341; Sn 67; Pug 59; VbhA 73; PvA 6, 14, 133; DA i.53; it is more than sukha D ii.214; defined at Vism 461 (iṭṭh'ārammaṇ'-> ânubhavana -- lakkhaṇaŋ, etc.). A syn. of it is veda 1. On term see also Cpd. 277.

-- indriya the faculty of pleasure D iii.224; S v.209 sq.; Dhs 18. Somanassita
Somanassita
(adj.) [Caus. pp. formation fr. somanassa] satisfied, pleased, contented VvA 351. Somarukkha
Somarukkha
[soma+rukkha] a certain species of tree J vi.530. Sombhā
Sombhā
(f.) a puppet, doll Th 2, 390; explained as sombhakā ThA 257. Somma
Somma
(adj.) [Sk. saumya, fr. soma] pleasing, agreeable, gentle Dāvs i.42; DA i.247; DhsA 127; VvA 205; SnA 456; Vism 168. Soracca
Soracca
(nt.) [fr. sorata] gentleness, restraint, meekness A ii.68, 113; iii.248; S i.100, 172, 222; Sn 78, 292; Dhs 1342; J iii.442; iv.302; Miln 162; VvA 347. Often combd with khanti forbearance (q. v.). -- soracciya (nt.) the same J iii.453. Sorata
Sorata
(adj.) [ = su+rata, with so˚ for sū˚, which latter is customary for su˚ before r (cp. dūr˚ for dur˚). See du1 2 and Geiger, P.Gr. § 11. -- The (B)Sk. is sūrata] gentle, kind, humble, self -- restrained M i.125; S i.65; iv.305 (text, sūrata); A ii.43; iii.349, 393 sq.; Sn 309, 515, 540; J iv.303; DhA i.56. Soḷasa
Soḷasa
(num. card.) [Sk. ṣoḍaśa] sixteen D i.128; Sn 1006; J i.78 (lekhā); ii.87; iii.342 (atappiya -- vatthūni); v.175; vi.37; Miln 11 (palibodhā); DhA i.129 (˚salākā); iv.208 (˚karīsa -- matta). instr. soḷasahi D i.31, & soḷasehi D i.139; gen. soḷasannaŋ J iv.124. Very frequent in measures of time & space. -- ˚vassa˚ (16 years . . .) J i.231, 285; ii.43; iv.7; vi.10, 486; DhA i.25 and passim. The fem. ˚ -- sī acts as num. ord. "sixteenth," in phrase kalaŋ nagghati soḷasiŋ he is not worth a sixteenth particle of A iv.252; S iii.156; v.44, 343; Dh 70; It 19. Soḷasakkhattuŋ
Soḷasakkhattuŋ
sixteen times DA i.261; DhA i.353 = Mhvs 6, 37. Soḷasama
Soḷasama
sixteenth Mhvs 2, 29; Vism 292. Sovaggika
Sovaggika
(adj.) [fr. sagga = *svarga; cp. the similar formation dovārika=dvāra] connected with heaven Vin i.294; D i.51; A ii.54, 68; iii.46, 51, 259; iv.245; S i.90; DA i.158. Sovacassa
Sovacassa
(nt.) [fr. suvaca, in analogy to dovacassa] gentleness, suavity D iii.267; A ii.148; iii.180; Nett 40; 127; ˚ -- karaṇa making for gentleness M i.96; A ii.148 = iii.180. Sovacassatā
Sovacassatā
(f.) = sovacassa M i.126; D iii.212, 274; A i.83; iii.310, 423 sq., 449; iv.29; Sn 266; Dhs 1327; Pug 24. Sovaccasāya & sovacassiya the same (Dhs 1327; Pug 24). Sovaṇṇa
Sovaṇṇa
(adj.) [fr. suvaṇṇa] golden D ii.210; A iv.393; PvA ii.121; J i.226; ˚ -- maya golden Vin i.39; ii.116; D ii.170 etc.; J ii.112. Sovaṇṇaya
Sovaṇṇaya
(adj.) [ = sovaṇṇaka] golden J i.226. Sovatthika
Sovatthika
(adj.) [either fr. sotthi with diaeresis, or fr. su+atthi+ka = Sk. svastika] safe M i.117; Vv 187 (=sotthika VvA 95); J vi.339 (in the shape of a svastika?); Pv iv.33 (=sotthi -- bhāva -- vāha PvA 250). -- âlankāra a kind of auspicious mark J vi.488. Sovīraka
Sovīraka
(nt.) [dialectical?] sour gruel Vin i.210; S ii.111; Vv 198; PugA 232. Sosa
Sosa
[fr. śuṣ] drying up, consumption Vin i.71; Vism 345. Sosana
Sosana
(nt.) [fr. soseti] causing to dry (in surgery) Miln 353. Sosānika
Sosānika
(adj.) [fr. susāna] connected with a cemetery, bier -- like Vin ii.149; m., one who lives in or near a cemetery A iii.220; Pug 69 sq.; Miln 342; Vism 61 sq.; DhA i.69. Sosārita
Sosārita
(adj.) [su+osārita] well reinstated (opp. dosārita) Vin i.322. -- 727 -- Sosika
Sosika
(adj.) [fr. sosa] afflicted with pulmonary consump- tion Vin i.93; iv.8. Sosīta
Sosīta
at J i.390 means either "thoroughly chilled" or "well wetted." It is expld as "him'odakena su -- sīto suṭṭhu tinto." Perhaps we have to read so sīta , or sīna (cp. sīna2), or sinna. The corresponding sotatta (expld as "suriya -- santāpena su -- tatto") should then be so tatto. Soseti
Soseti
[Caus. of sussati] to cause to dry or wither Mhvs 21, 28; Vism 120. See vi˚. Sossati
Sossati
is Fut. of suṇāti. Sohada
Sohada
[Sk. sauhṛda, fr. su+hṛd] a friend Mhvs 38, 98. See also suhada. Sneha
Sneha
see sineha. Svākāra
Svākāra
[su+ākāra] being of good disposition Vin i.6. Svākkhāta
Svākkhāta
[su+akkhāta; on the long ā cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 7; BSk. svākhyāta] well preached Vin i.12, 187; ii.199; M i.67; A i.34; ii.56; Sn 567. Opp. durakkhāta Vism 213 (in detail). Svāgata
Svāgata
[su+āgata] 1. welcome Vin ii.11; Th 2, 337; ThA 236. -- 2. learnt by heart Vin ii.95, 249; A iv.140 (pātimokkhāni). See sāgata. Svātana
Svātana
[cp. Sk. śvastana; Geiger, P.Gr. § 6, 54] relating to the morrow; dat. ˚ -- nāya for the following day Vin i.27; D i.125; J i.11; DhA i.314; iv.12. Svātivatta
Svātivatta
[su+ativatta] easily overcome Sn 785; Nd1 76. Svāssu
Svāssu
= so assu J i.196. Svāhaŋ
Svāhaŋ
= so ahaŋ. Sve
Sve
(adv.) [cp. Sk. śvas] to -- morrow Vin ii.77; D i.108, 205; J i.32, 243; ii.47; VvA 230; svedivasa DhA i.103. The diaeretic form is suve, e. g. Pv iv.15; Mhvs 29, 17; and doubled suve suve day after day Dh 229; DhA iii.329; J v.507. -- H. Ha
Ha
[freq. in Rigveda, as gha or ha, Idg. *gho, *ghe; cp. Lat. hi -- c, Sk. hi] an emphatic particle "hey, oh, hallo, I say" Vin ii.109; Sn 666; iti ha, thus Vin i.5, 12; D i.1; a common beginning to traditional instruction Sn 1053; itihītihaŋ (saying), "thus and thus" Sn 1084; SnA 416 (ha -- kāra); PvA 4 (ha re), 58 (gloss for su). Haŋ
Haŋ
(indecl.) [cp. Sk. haŋ] an exclamation "I say, hey, hallo, look here!" Vv 508 ( = nipāta VvA 212); J v.422; VvA 77. Sometimes as han ti, e. g. J v.203; DhA iii.108. See also handa & hambho. In combn iti haŋ (=iti) Sn 783; Nd1 71; or with other part. like haŋ dhī DhA i.179, 216 (here as haŋ di). Haŋsa
Haŋsa1
[fr. haŋsati] bristling: see lomahaŋsa Sn 270 etc. Haŋsa
Haŋsa2
[cp. Sk. haŋsa = Lat. (h)anser "goose," Gr. xh/n= Ags. gōs=E. goose, Ger. gans] 1. a water -- bird, swan S i.148; Sn 221, 350, 1134; Dh 91, 175; DhA ii.170; J ii.176 sq.; SnA 277; Pv ii.123; iii.34. Considered as (suvaṇṇa -- ) rāja -- haŋsa ("golden royal swan") to be king of the birds: J i.207; ii.353; Vism 650. -- At SnA 277 Bdhgh gives various kinds of haŋsa's, viz. harita˚, tamba˚, khīra˚, kāḷa˚, pāka˚, suvaṇṇa˚. -- pāka˚ a species of water bird J v.356; vi.539; SnA 277. -- f. haŋsī Dāvs v.24 (rāja˚). -- 2. a kind of building J i.92.

-- potaka a young swan Vism 153 (in simile). -- rāja the king of swans Vv 358; Vin iv.259. Haŋsati
Haŋsati
[cp. Vedic harṣate Idg. *ĝher to bristle (of hair), as in Lat. horreo ("horrid, horripilation"), ēr hedgehog ("bristler") = Gr. xh/r id.; Lat. hirtus, hispidus "rough"; Ags. gorst=gorse; Ger. granne & many others, for which see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. ēr. -- The Dhtp (309) defines as "tuṭṭhi." See also ghaŋsati2, pahaŋsati2, pahaṭṭha2, pahaŋsita2] to bristle, stand on end (said of the hair) Vin iii.8; M i.79; Caus. haŋseti to cause to bristle J v.154. -- pp. haṭṭha. Haŋsana
Haŋsana
(adj. -- nt.) [fr. hṛṣ] bristling, see lomahaŋsa Sn 270 etc. Haŋsi
Haŋsi
(indecl.) [?] = hañci if, in case that J vi.343. Hankhati
Hankhati
see paṭi˚. Hacca
Hacca
(adj.) [fr. han] killing, in bhūnahacca killing an embryo A iv.98; J vi.579 = 587; Miln 314 (text bhūta -- ) Hañci
Hañci
(indecl.) [haŋ+ci] if Kvu 1. Haññati & hañchati
Haññati
& hañchati see hanati. Haṭa
Haṭa1
[pp. of harati] taken, carried off Vin iv.23; J i.498. haṭa -- haṭa -- kesa with dishevelled hair S i.115. Haṭa
Haṭa2
[cp. Sk. haṭha & haṭa] a kind of water -- plant, Pistia stratiotes D i.166; M i.78, 156; Pug 55 (text sāta -- ); A i.241, 295 (v. l. sāta; cp. hāṭaka). Haṭṭha
Haṭṭha
[pp. of haŋsati] 1. bristling, standing on end M i.83; Dāvs v.64; lomahaṭṭhajāta (cp. ˚loma) with bristling hairs, excited D ii.240; Sn p. 14. -- 2. joyful, happy Vin i.15; Sn 1017; J i.31, 335; ii.32; often combd with either tuṭṭha (e. g. J vi.427; PvA 113), or pahaṭṭha (DhA iii.292). Haṭha
Haṭha
[only as lexicogr. word; Dhtp 101 = balakkāra] violence. Hata
Hata
[pp. of hanti] struck, killed D ii.131; destroyed, spoilt, injured Vin i.25; Dhs 264; J ii.175; reṇuhata struck with dust, covered with dust Vin i.32; hatatta (nt.) the state of being destroyed Dh 390; hatâvakāsa who has cut off every occasion (for good and evil) Dh 97; DhA ii.188; hatâvasesaka surviving D i.135; pakkha˚ a cripple (q. v.); ˚vikkhittaka slain & cut up, killed & dismembered Vism 179, 194. -- hata is also used in sense of med., i. e. one who has destroyed or killed, e. g. nāga˚ slayer of a nāga Vin ii.195; ˚antarāya one who removes an obstacle PvA 1. -- ahata unsoiled, clean, new D ii.160; J i.50; Dāvs ii.39. -- 728 -- Hati
Hati
(f.) [fr. han] destruction Dāvs iv.17. Hattha
Hattha
[fr. hṛ, cp. Vedic hasta] 1. hand D i.124; A i.47; Sn 610; J vi.40. -- forearm Vin iv.221; of animals S v.148; J i.149; ˚pāda hand and foot M i.523; A i.47; J ii.117; PvA 241; DhA iv.7. sahassa˚ thousand -- armed Mhvs 30, 75; pañca˚ having five hands J v.425; J v.431 (mukhassa ceva catunnaŋ ca caranāṇaŋ vasena etaŋ vuttaŋ); kata˚ a practised hand, practised (of an archer) S i.62; A ii.48; J iv.211. -- hatthe karoti to bring under one's hand, to take possession of, to subdue J vi.490; hatthaŋ gacchati to come under somebody's hand, to come under the sway of J i.179; hatthaga being in the power of; hatthagata fallen into the hand or possession of, hatthappatta what one can put one's hand on, i. e. "before his very eyes" Vin i.15. As ˚hattha in hand, -- handed; e. g. daṇḍa˚ stick in hand J i.59; ritta˚ empty -- handed Sdhp 309; vīṇā˚ lute in hand Mhvs 30, 75. Cp. sa˚ with one's own hand. -> 2. the hand as measure, a cubit J i.34, 233 (asīti˚, q. v.); Mhvs 38, 52; Vism 92 (nava˚ sāṭaka). -- 3. a handful, a tuft (of hair) VvA 197.

-- anguli finger PvA 124 (+pādanguli toe). -- aṭṭhika hand -- bone KhA 49. -- antara a cubit Vism 124. -- âpalekhana licking the hands (to clean them after eating -- cp. the 52nd Sekhiya Vin iv.198) D i.166; iii.40; M i.77, 238, 307; A i.295 (v. l. ˚āva˚); Pug 55. -- ābharaṇa bracelet Vin ii.106. -- âbhijappana (nt.) incantations to make a man throw up his hands D i.11; DA i.97. -- âlankāra a (wrist) bracelet, wristlet VvA 167. -- kacchapaka making a hollow hand J iii.505. -- kamma manual work, craft, workmanship, labour J i.220; DhA i.98, 395; iv.64. -- gata received, come into the possession of J i.446; ii.94, 105; VvA 149; (nt.) possession J vi.392. -- gahaṇa seizing by the hand Vin iv.220. -- cchinna whose hand is cut off M i.523; Miln 5. -- ccheda cutting off the hand J i.155 (read sugatiyā va hatthacchedādi). -- cchedana = ˚cheda J iv.192; DhA iii.482. -- tala palm of the hand VvA 7. -- ttha [cp. Sk. hasta -- stha, of sthā] lit. standing in the hand of somebody, being in somebody's power (cp. hattha -- gata); used as abstr. hatthattha (nt.) power, captivity, ˚ŋ gacchati & āgacchati to come into the power of (gen.), to be at the mercy of [cp. hattha -- gata & hatthaŋ gacchati] J ii.383 (āyanti hatthatthaŋ); iv.420, 459; v.346 (˚ŋ āgata). As pp. hatth -- attha -- gata in somebody's power J i.244; iii.204; vi.582. An abstr. is further formed fr. hatthattha as hatthatthatā J v.349 (˚taŋ gata). The BSk. equivalent is hastatvaŋ MVastu ii.182. -- pajjotikā hand -- illumination, scorching of the hand (by holding it in a torch), a kind of punishment M i.87; A i.47; ii.122; Miln 197; Nd1 154. -- patāpaka a coal -- pan, heating of the hand Vv 3332; VvA 147; see mandāmukhi. -- pasāraṇa stretching out one's hand Vism 569. -- pāsa the side of the hand, vicinity Vin iv.221, 230. -- bandha a bracelet D i.7; DA i.89. -- vaṭṭaka hand -- cart Vin ii.276. -- vikāra motion of the hand J iv.491. -- sāra hand -- wealth, movable property DhA i.240; J i.114; DA i.216. Hatthaka
Hatthaka
[hattha+ka] a handful, a quantity (lit. a little hand) Vv 455 ( = kalāpa VvA 197). Hatthin
Hatthin
[Vedic hastin, lit. endowed with a hand, i. e. having a trunk] an elephant Vin i.218, 352; ii.194 sq. (Nālāgiri) = J v.335 (nom. sg. hatthī; gen. hatthissa); D i.5; A ii.209; J i.358; ii.102; DhA i.59 (correct haṭṭhi!), 80 (acc. pl. hatthī); size of an elephant Miln 312; one of the seven treasures D i.89; ii.174; often mentioned together with horses (˚ass'ādayo), e. g. A iv.107; M iii.104; Vism 269; DhA i.392. ekacārika -- h., an elephant who wanders alone, a royal elephant J iii.175; caṇḍa h. rogue elephant M i.519; DA i.37. -- hatthinī (f.) a she -- elephant Dh 105. hatthinikā (f.) the same Vin i.277; D i.49; DA i.147.

-- atthara elephant rug Vin i.192; D i.7; A i.181. -- âcariya elephant trainer Vin i.345; J ii.94, 221, 411; iv.91; Miln 201. -- āroha mounted on an elephant, an elephant -- driver D i.51; S iv.310. -- âlankāra elephant's trappings J ii.46. -- kanta = manta el. charm DhA i.163. -- kantavīṇā lute enticing an elephant DhA i.163. -- kalabha the young of an elephant A iv.435. -- kumbha the frontal globe of an elephant J ii.245. -- kula elephant species, ten enumd at VbhA 397. -- kkhandha the shoulder or back of an elephant J i.313; Mhvs vi.24. PvA 75. 178. -- gopaka an elephant's groom or keeper J i.187. -- damaka elephant tamer M iii.132, 136; SnA 161. -- damma an elephant in training M iii.222. -- nakha a sort of turrent projecting over the approach to a gate; ˚ka provided with such turrets, or supported on pillars with capitals of elephant heads Vin ii.169. -- pada an elephant's foot M i.176, 184; S v.43; J i.94. -- pākāra "elephant -- wall," wall of the upper storey with figures of elephants in relief Mhvs 33, 5. See Geiger, Mhvs trsln 228, n. 2. -- ppabhinna a furious elephant Dh 326; M i.236. -- bandha J i.135=hatthibhaṇḍa. -- bhaṇḍa an elephant -- keeper Vin i.85; ii.194. -- magga elephant track J ii.102. -- mangala an elephant festival J ii.46. -- matta only as big as an elephant J i.303. -- māraka elephant hunter DhA i.80. -- meṇḍa an elephant's groom J iii.431; v.287; vi.498. -- yāna an elephant carriage, a riding elephant D i.49; DA i.147; PvA 55. -- yuddha combat of elephants (as a theatrical show) D i.6. -- rūpaka elephant image or picture, toy elephant (+assa˚) DhA ii.69. -- laṇḍa elephant dung DhA iv.156. -- lingasakuṇa a vulture with a bill like an elephant's trunk DhA i.164. -- vatta elephant habit Nd1 92. -- sālā elephant stable Vin i.277; ii.194; DhA i.393. -- sippa the elephant lore, the professional knowledge of elephant -- training J ii.221 sq. -- sutta an elephant -- trainer's manual J ii.46 (cp. Mallinātha on Raghuv. vi.27). -- soṇḍaka "elephant trunk," an under -- garment arranged with appendages like elephant trunks Vin ii.137. Hadaya
Hadaya
[Vedic hṛdaya, hṛd = Av. ƶərədā, not the same as Lat. cor(dem), but perhaps=Lat. haru entrails (haruspex). See K.Z. xl.419] the heart. -- 1. the physical organ D ii.293; S i.207 (ettha uro hadayan ti vuttaŋ DhsA 140); in detail: Vism 256, 356; VbhA 60, 239. -> 2. the heart as seat of thought and feeling, esp. of strong emotion (as in Vedas!), which shows itself in the action of the heart S i.199. Thus defined as "cintā" at Dhtm 535 (as had), or as "hadayaŋ vuccati cittaŋ," with ster. expln "mano mānasa paṇḍara" etc. Dhs 17; Nd1 412. Cp. DhsA 140 (cittaŋ abbhantar' aṭṭhena hadayan ti vuttaŋ). -- With citta at Sn p. 32 (hadayaŋ te phalessāmi "I shall break your heart"); hadayaŋ phalitaŋ a broken heart J i.65; DhA i.173. chinna h. id. J v.180. hadayassa santi calmness of h. A v.64 sq.; hadayā hadayaŋ aññāya tacchati M i.32. h. nibbāyi the heart (i. e. anger) cooled down J vi.349; h. me avakaḍḍhati my heart is distraught J iv.415. -- duhadaya bad -- hearted J vi.469.

-- aṭṭhi a bone of the heart KhA 49, 50 (so read for pādaṭṭhi, see App. to Pj 1.); Vism 255; SnA 116. -- gata [˚ngata] gone to the heart, learnt by heart Miln 10. -- gama [˚ngama] heart -- stirring, pleasant, agreeable D i.4; iii.173; M i.345; A ii.209; v.205; Vin iii.77; Nd1 446; Dhs. 1343; DA i.75. -- pariḷāha heart -- glow Miln 318. -- phālana bursting of the heart J i.282. -- maŋsa the flesh of the heart, the heart J i.278, 347; ii.159 etc. (very frequent in the Jātakas); DhA i.5; ii.90. -- bheda "heart -- break," a certain trick in cheating with measures DA i.79. -- vañcana deluding the heart SnA 183 (cp. J vi.388 hadaya -- tthena), -- vatthu (1) the substance of the heart Miln 281; DhsA 140. (2) "heart -- basis," the heart as basis of mind, sensorium commune Tikp 17, 26, 53 sq., 62, 256; Vism 447; SnA 228; DhsA 257, 264. See the discussion at Dhs. trsln lxxxvi. and Cpd. 277 sq. -- santāpa heart -- burn, i. e. grief, sorrow Vism 54. -- ssita stuck in the heart (of salla, dart) Sn 938; Nd1 411. -- 729 -- Han
Han
(indecl.) see haŋ. Hanati
Hanati1
(& hanti) [han or ghan to smite, Idg. *gṷhen, as in Av. jainti to kill; Gr. qei/nw to strike, fo/nos murder; Lat. de -- fendo "defend" & of -- fendo; Ohg. gundea = Ags. gūd "battle." The Dhtp (363 & 429) gives "hiŋsā" as meaning of han] 1. to strike, to thresh S iv.201; J iv.102. -- 2. to kill D i.123; A iv.97 (asinā hanti attānaŋ); Sn 125; Dh 405; maggaŋ˚ to slay travellers on the road J i.274; iii.220. -- 3. to destroy, to remove Sn 118; Dh 72. -- Forms: Pres. 1st sg. hanāmi J ii.273; 2nd sg. hanāsi J iii.199; v.460; 3rd sg. hanti Sn 118; A iv.97; DhA ii.73 (=vināseti); Dh 72; hanāti J v.461; hanati J i.432; 1st pl. hanāma J i.200; 3rd pl. hananti Sn 669. Imper. hana J iii.185; hanassu J v.311; hanantu J iv.42; Dh 355; J i.368. Pot. hane Sn 394, 400; haneyya D i.123; Sn 705. ppr. a -- hanaŋ not killing D i.116; hananto J i.274. fut. hanissati J iv.102; hañchati J iv.102; hañchema J ii.418. aor. hani Mhvs 25, 64; 3rd pl. haniŋsu Sn 295; J i.256; ger. hantvā Sn 121; Dh 294 sq.; hanitvāna J iii.185. -- Pass. haññati D ii.352; S iv.175; Sn 312; J i.371; iv.102; DhA ii.28. ppr. haññamāna S iv.201. grd. hantabba D ii.173. aor. pass. haññiŋsu D i.141. fut. haññissati DA i.134. -- Caus. hanāpeti to cause to slay, destroy J i.262; DA i.159; ghātāpeti Vin i.277; ghāteti to cause to slay Dh 405; Sn 629; a -- ghātayaŋ, not causing to kill S i.116; Pot. ghātaye Sn 705; ghātayeyya Sn 394; aor. aghātayi Sn 308; ghātayi Sn 309; pass. ghātīyati Miln 186. See also ghāteti. Cp. upahanati, vihanati; ˚gha, ghāta etc., paligha. Hanati
Hanati2
[*han for had, probably from pp. hanna. The Dhtm (535) gives had in meaning of "uccāra ussagga"] to empty the bowels Pv iv.88 ( = vaccaŋ osajjate PvA 268). -- pp. hanna. Cp. ūhanati2 & ohanati. Hanana
Hanana
(nt.) [fr. hanati] killing, striking, injuring Mhvs 3, 42. Hanu
Hanu
(f.) [Vedic hanu; cp. Lat. gena jaw, Gr. ge/nus chin, Goth. kinnus = Ger. kinn=E. chin, Oir. gin mouth] the jaw D i.11; J i.28 (mahā˚), 498; SnA 30 (˚sañcalana); VbhA 145 (˚sañcopana). ˚ -- saŋhanana jaw -- binding, incantations to bring on dumbness D i.11; DA i.97. Hanukā
Hanukā
(f.) [fr. hanu] the jaw J i.498; DA i.97; Miln 229; also nt. Vin ii.266; J i.461; ii.127; iv.188; -- ˚aṭṭhika the jaw bone J i.265 sq.; Vism 251; VbhA 58; KhA 49; SnA 116. Hantar
Hantar
[n. ag. fr. hanati] a striker, one who kills D i.56; A ii.116 sq.; iii.161 sq.; S i.85; Dh 389. Handa
Handa
(indecl.) [cp. Sk. hanta, haŋ+ta] an exhortative-emphatic particle used like Gr. a)/ge dh/ or French allons, voilà: well then, now, come along, alas! It is constructed with 1st pres. & fut., or imper, 2nd person D i.106, 142; ii.288; Sn 153, 701, 1132; J i.88, 221, 233; iii.135; DA i.237 ( = vavasāy'atthe nipāto); Nd2 697 (=padasandhi); Pv i.103 (=gaṇha PvA 49); ii.321 (= upasagg'atthe nipāta PvA 88); DhA i.16, 410 (handa je); SnA 200 (vvavasāne), 491 (id.); VvA 230 (hand'-> âhaŋ gamissāmi). Hanna
Hanna
(nt.) [pp. of hanati2] easing oneself, emptying of the bowels; su˚ a good (i. e. modest) performance of bodily evacuation, i. e. modesty J i.421. Hambho
Hambho
(indecl.) [haŋ+bho] a particle expressing surprise or haughtiness J i.184, 494. See also ambho. Hammiya
Hammiya
(nt.) [cp. Vedic harmya house & BSk. harmikā "summer -- house" (?) Divy 244] customarily given as "a long, storied mansion which has an upper chamber placed on the top," a larger building, pāsāda, (store -- ) house Vin i.58, 96, 239; ii.146 (with vihāra, aḍḍhayoga, pāsāda, guhā, as the 5 lenāni), 152, 195; Miln 393; Nd1 226 = Vism 25. ˚ -- gabbha a chamber on the upper storey Vin ii.152. Haya
Haya
[cp. Vedic haya, fr. hi to impel. A diff. etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. haedus] 1. a horse Vv 641; J ii.98; Miln 2. -- 2. speed M i.446. -- ˚vāhin drawn by horses J vi.125. Hara
Hara
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. hṛ] taking, fetching; vayo˚ bringing age (said of grey hairs) J i.138; du˚ S i.36. Haraṇa
Haraṇa
(nt.) [fr. hṛ] taking, seizing, removing J i.117, 118, 232; DA i.71. kucchi˚ n. filling of the belly J i.277. ˚bhatta a meal to take along DhA ii.144. Haraṇaka
Haraṇaka
(nt.) [fr. haraṇa] goods in transit, movable goods Vin iii.51. Haraṇī
Haraṇī
(f.) [fr. haraṇa] 1. a nerve conveying a stimulus (lit. "carrier"); only used with rasa˚ nerve of taste Vin ii.137; usually given as "a hundred thousand" in number, e. g. J v.4, 293, 458; DhA i.134. -- 2. in kaṇṇamala˚, an instrument to remove the wax from the ear Vin ii.135. Cp. hāraka. Harati
Harati
[Idg. *ĝher; in meaning "take" cp. Gr. xei/r hand; in meaning "comprise" cp. Lat. cohors. Gr. xo/rtos; Ags. geard = yard. -- The Dhtm expls har laconically by "haraṇa"] 1. to carry J ii.176; Dh 124; to take with one D i.8, 142; opposed to paccāharati VbhA 349 -- 354; SnA 52 -- 58. -- 2. to bring J i.208; to offer J i.238; Sn 223. -- 3. to take, gather (fruits) Miln 263. -- 4. to fetch, buy J i.291 (mama santikā). -- 5. to carry away, to remove D ii.160, 166; J i.282; Sn 469; Mhvs 1, 26; to do away with, to abolish J i.345. -- 6. to take away by force, to plunder, steal D i.52; J i.187; v.254. -> 7. to take off, to destroy J i.222 (jīvitaŋ), 310 (visaŋ); to kill J i.281. -- Forms: aor. ahāsi Sn 469 sq.; Dh 3; J iv.308; cp. upasaŋhāsi S v.214; pahāsi, pariyudāhāsi, ajjhupāhari; ger. haritvā D ii.160; hātūna J iv.280 (=haritvā C.); inf. harituŋ J i.187; hātave Th 1, 186; hātuŋ: see voharati; hattuŋ: see āharati; Fut. hāhiti J vi.500 (=harissati). -- Pass. harīyati M i.33; hīrati J v.254; pret. ahīratha J v.253; grd. haritabba J i.187, 281. -- pp. haṭa. -- Caus. hāreti to cause to take Sn 395; to cause to be removed, to remove J i.345; ii.176; iii.431 (somebody out of office); hāretabba that which should be taken out of the way J i.298; Caus. II. harāpeti to cause to be brought, to offer Vin i.245; J ii.38; to cause to be taken (as a fine) Miln 193. Harāyati
Harāyati
[Denom. fr. hiri ( = hrī), cp. Vedic hrī to be ashamed, Pres. jihreti. -- The Dhtp (438) gives roots hiri & hara in meaning "lajjā"] 1. to be ashamed Vin i.88; ii.292; D i.213; M i.120; S iv.62; It 43; Pv i.102; ppr. harāyanto Nd1 466, & harāyamāna J iv.171; Nd2 566. Often combd with aṭṭiyati (q. v.). See also hiriyati. -- 2. [in this meaning=Vedic hṛ to be angry. Pres. hṛṇīte] to be depressed or vexed, to be cross, to worry (cp. hiriyati) J v.366 (ppr. hariyyamāna); Th 1, 1173 (mā hari "don't worry"). Hari
Hari
(adj.) [Idg. *ĝhel, as in Lat. helvus yellow, holus cabbage; Sk. harita, hariṇa pale (yellow or green), hiri (yellow); Av. ƶairi; Gr. xlo/os green, xlo/ h "greens"; Ags. geolo = E. yellow. Also the words for "gold": hāṭaka & hiraṇya] green, tawny Dhs 617; DhsA 317; ˚ -- ssavaṇṇa gold -- coloured J ii.33 (=hari -- samāna -- vaṇṇa suvaṇṇa˚ C.).

-- candana yellow sandal Vv 831; DhA i.28; -- tāla yellow orpiment Th 2, 393; DhA iii.29; iv.113; -- ttaca gold -- coloured Th 2, 333; ThA 235; -- pada gold foot, yellow leg, a deer J iii.184. -- 730 -- Hariṇa
Hariṇa
[fr. hari] a deer J ii.26. Harita
Harita
(adj.) [see hari for etym.] 1. green, pale( -- green), yellowish. It is expld by Dhpāla as nīla (e. g. VvA 197; PvA 158), and its connotation is not fixed. -- Vin i.137; D i.148; S i.5; J i.86, 87; ii.26, 110; Pv ii.1210 (bank of a pond); Vv 457 (˚patta, with green leaves, of a lotus); J ii.110 (of wheat); SnA 277 (˚haŋsa yellow, i. e. golden swan). -- 2. green, fresh Vin iii.16; A v.234 (kusa); nt. (collectively) vegetables, greens Vin 266 (here applied to a field of fresh (i. e. green) wheat or cereal in general, as indicated by expln "haritaŋ nāma pubbaṇṇaŋ aparaṇṇaŋ" etc.); cp. haritapaṇṇa vegetables SnA 283. -- 3. haritā (f.) gold Th 1, 164 = J ii.334 (˚maya made of gold; but expld as "harita -- maṇi -- parikkhata" by C.). -- 4. Two cpds., rather odd in form, are haritāmātar "son of a green frog" J ii.238 (in verse); and haritupattā (bhūmi) "covered with green" M i.343; J i.50, 399. Haritaka
Haritaka
(nt.) [harita+ka] a pot -- herb D ii.342. Haritatta
Haritatta
(nt.) [abstr. fr. harita] greenness Vin i.96. Harītaka
Harītaka
[cp. Epic Sk. harītaka] yellow myrobalan (Terminalia citrina or chebula) Vin i.201, 206; J i.80; iv.363; Miln 11; DhsA 320 (T. harīṭaka); VvA 5 (ṭ); ˚ -- kī (f.) the myrobalan tree Vin i.30; M iii.127. pūtiharīṭakī Vism 40; ˚paṇṇika all kinds of greens Vin ii.267. Hareṇukā
Hareṇukā
(f.) [cp. Sk. hareṇukā] a pea M i.245; J v.405 ( = aparaṇṇajā ti 406); vi.537; hareṇuka -- yūsa pea -- soup M i.245 (one of the 4 kinds of soup). Halaŋ
Halaŋ
= hi alaŋ (q. v.); "halaŋ dāni pakāsituŋ" why should I preach? Vin i.5=D ii.36=M i.168=S i.136. Halāhala
Halāhala1
[onomat.; cp. Sk. halāhala] a kind of deadly poison, usually as ˚visa J i.271, 273, 380; iii.103; v.465; Miln 256; Vism 57; ThA 287. Halāhala
Halāhala2
(nt.) [onomat.] uproar, tumult J i.47 sq.; Miln 122. Cp. kolāhala. Haliddā & Haliddī
Haliddā
& Haliddī (f.) [cp. Sk. haridrā] turmeric. - 1. haliddā: Vin i.201; J v.89. -- 2. haliddī (haliddi˚) M i.127; A iii.230, 233; S ii.101; KhA 64; ˚rāga like the colour of turmeric, or like the t. dye, i. e. not fast, quickly changing & fading J iii.148 (of citta), cp. J iii.524 sq. Hava
Hava
[cp. Vedc hava; hū or hvā to call] calling, challenge Dāvs ii.14. Have
Have
(indecl.) [ha+ve] indeed, certainly Vin i.2; D ii.168; S i.169; Sn 120, 181, 323, 462; Dh 104, 151, 177, 382; J i.31, 365; DhA ii.228. Havya
Havya
(nt.) [Vedic havya; fr. hū to sacrifice] an oblation, offering S i.169; Sn 463 sq.; 490. Hasati & Hassati
Hasati
& Hassati [owing to similarity of meaning the two roots has to laugh (Sk. hasati, pp. hasita) & hṛṣ to be excited (Sk. hṛṣyati, pp. hṛṣita & hṛṣṭa) have become mixed in Pāli (see also hāsa). -- The usual (differentiated) correspondent of Sk. hṛṣyati is haŋsati. The Dhtp (309) gives haŋsa ( = harṣa) with tuṭṭhi, and (310) hasa with hasana] 1. to laugh, to be merry; pres. hasati Bu i.28; Mhvs 35, 59; hassati Sn 328, 829; ppr. hasamāna is preferable v. l. at J iv.281 for bhāsamāna; aor. hasi J ii.103; DhA ii.17. -- Caus. hāseti [i. e. both fr. has & hṛṣ] to cause to laugh; to please, to gladden Mhvs 32, 46; J vi.217, 304; DhA ii.85; aor. hāsesi Vin iii.84; ppr. hāsayamana making merry J i.163, 209. 210; ger. hāsayitvāna Miln 1. -- Caus. II. hāsāpeti SnA 401; J vi.311. Cp. pari˚, pa˚. -- 2. to neigh (of horses) J i.62; vi.581 (strange aor. hasissiŋsu, expld as hasiŋsu by C.). -- pp. hasita (& haṭṭha). Hasana
Hasana
(nt.) [fr. hasati] laughter Dhtp 31. Hasamānaka
Hasamānaka
(adj.) [ppr. of hasati+ka] laughing, merry Mhvs 35, 55; (nt.) as adv. ˚ŋ jokingly, for fun Vin i.185. Hasita
Hasita
[pp. of hasati, representing both Sk. hasita & hṛṣita] laughing, merry; (nt.) laughter, mirth A i.261; Pv iii.35 ( = hasitavant hasita -- mukhin C.); Miln 297; Bu i.28; J i.62 (? read hesita); iii.223; Vism 20.

-- uppāda "genesis of mirth," aesthetic faculty Tikp 276; see Cpd. 20 sq. Hasula
Hasula
(adj.) [fr. has] is rather doubtful ("of charming speech"? or "smiling"?). It occurs in (corrupted) verse at J vi.503 = Ap 40 (& 307), which is to be read as "aḷāra -- bhamukhā (or ˚pamhā) hasulā sussoññā tanu -- majjhimā." See Kern's remarks at Toev. s. v. hasula. Hassa
Hassa
(adj. -- nt.) [fr. has, cp. Sk. hāsya] ridiculous Sn 328; (nt.) 1. laughter, mirth D i.19; Sn 926; DA i.72; PvA 226; DhA iii.258; Miln 266. -- 2. a joke, jest hassā pi, even in fun M i.415; hassena pi the same J v.481; Miln 220; ˚vasena in jest J i.439. Hā
Hā
(indecl.) an exclamation of grief, alas! ThA 154 (Ap v.154); VvA 323, 324. Hāṭaka
Hāṭaka
(nt.) [cp. Sk. hāṭaka, connected with hari; cp. Goth. gulp = E. gold] gold A i.215; iv.255, 258, 262 (where T reads haṭaka, with sātaka as v. l. at all passages); Th 2, 382; J v.90. Hātabba
Hātabba
at Nett 7, 32 may be interpreted as grd. of hā to go (pres. jihīte). The C. expls it as "gametabba, netabba" (i. e. to be understood). Doubtful. Hātūna
Hātūna
see harati. Hāna
Hāna
(nt.) [fr. hā, cp. Sk. hāna] relinquishing, giving up, falling off; decrease, diminution, degradation A ii.167; iii.349 sq. (opp. visesa), 427; Vism 11.

-- gāmin going into disgrace or insignificance A iii.349 sq. -- bhāgiya conducive to relinquishing (of perversity and ignorance) D iii.272 sq.; A ii.167; Nett 77; Vism 85. Hāni
Hāni
(f.) [cp. Sk. hāni] 1. decrease, loss A ii.434; v.123 sq.; S i.111; ii.206, 242; J i.338, 346. -- 2. falling off, waste Mhvs 33, 103. Cp. saŋ˚, pari˚. Hāpana
Hāpana
at J v.433 is with Kern. Toev. i.132 (giving the passage without ref.) to be read as hāpaka "neglectful" [i. e. fr. hāpeti1]. Hāpita
Hāpita
[pp. of hāpeti2] cultivated, attended, worshipped J iv.221; v.158 (aggihuttaŋ ahāpitaŋ; C. wrongly = hāpita); v.201=vi.565. On all passages & their relation to Com. & BSk. see Kern, Toev. i.132, 133. Hāpeti
Hāpeti1
[Caus. of hā to leave: see jahati; to which add fut. 2nd sg. hāhasi J iii.172; and aor. jahi J iv.314; v.469] 1. to neglect, omit A iii.44 (ahāpayaŋ); iv.25; Dh 166; J ii.437; iv.182; ahāpetvā without omitting anything, i. e. fully A ii.77; J iv.132; DA i.99. atthaŋ hāpeti to lose one's advantage, to fail Sn 37; J i.251. -> 2. to postpone, delay (the performance of . . .) J iii.448; Vism 129. -- 3. to cause to reduce, to beat down J i.124; ii.31. -- 4. to be lost Sn 90 (? read hāyati). Hāpeti
Hāpeti2
[in form = Sk. (Sūtras) hāvayati, Caus. of juhoti (see juhati), but in meaning=juhoti] to sacrifice to, worship, keep up, cultivate J v.195 (aggiŋ;= juhati C.). See Kern, Toev. i.133. -- pp. hāpita. Hāyati
Hāyati
is Pass. of jahati [hā], in sense of "to be left behind," as well as "to diminish, dwindle or waste away, disappear," e. g. Nd1 147 (+pari˚, antaradhāyati); Miln 297 (+khīyati); ppr. hāyamāna Nd2 543. Cp. hāyana. -- 731 -- Hāyana
Hāyana1
(nt.) [fr. hā] diminution, decay, decrease D i.54; DA i.165. Opposed to vaḍḍhana (increase) at M i.518. Hāyana
Hāyana2
(nt.) [Vedic hāyana] year; in saṭṭhi˚ 60 years old (of an elephant) M i.229; J ii.343; vi.448, 581. Hāyin
Hāyin
(adj.) [fr. hā] abandoning, leaving behind Sn 755 = It 62 (maccu˚). Hāra
Hāra
[fr. harati] 1. that which may be taken; grasping, taking; grasp, handful, booty. In cpd. ˚hārin taking all that can be taken, rapacious, ravaging J vi.581 (of an army; Kern, Toev. i.133 wrong in trsln "magnificent, or something like it"). Of a river: tearing, rapid A iii.64; iv.137; Vism 231. -- 2. category; name of the first sections of the Netti Pakaraṇa Nett 1 sq., 195. Hāraka
Hāraka
(adj.) [fr. hāra] carrying, taking, getting; removing (f. hārikā) M i.385; J i.134, 479; Pv ii.91 (dhana˚); SnA 259 (maŋsa˚). -- mala˚ an instrument for removing ear -- wax Ap 303; cp. haraṇī. sattha˚ a dagger carrier, assassin Vin iii.73; S iv.62. See also vallī. Hāri
Hāri
(adj.) [fr. hṛ; cp. Sk. hāri] attractive, charming S iv.316; J i.204 (˚sadda). Hārika
Hārika
(adj.) [fr. hāra] carrying D ii.348. Hārin
Hārin
(adj.) [fr. hāra] 1. taking, carrying (f. hārinī) J i.133; Pv ii.310 (nom. pl. f. hārī); PvA 113. -- 2. robbing J i.204. -- Cp. hāra˚. Hāriya
Hāriya
(adj.) [fr. hāra] carrying Vv 509; ThA 200; VvA 212. Hālidda
Hālidda
(adj.) [fr. haliddā] dyed with turmeric; a˚ undyed, i. e. not changing colour J iii.88; cp. iii.148. Hāsa
Hāsa
[fr. has, cp. Sk. hāsa & harṣa] laughter; mirth, joy Dh 146; DA i.228 = SnA 155 ("āmeṇḍita"); J i.33; ii.82; v.112; Miln 390. See also ahāsa.

-- kara giving pleasure, causing joy Miln 252. -- kkhaya ceasing of laughter Dhtp 439 (in defn of gilāna, illness). -- dhamma merriment, sporting Vin iv.112. Hāsaniya
Hāsaniya
(adj.) [fr. has or hṛṣ; cp. Sk. harṣanīya] giving joy or pleasure Miln 149. Hāsu˚
Hāsu˚
(of uncertain origin) occurs with hāsa˚ in combn with ˚pañña and is customarily taken in meaning "of bright knowledge" (i. e. hāsa+paññā), wise, clever. The syn. javana -- pañña points to a meaning like "quick-witted," thus implying "quick" also in hāsu. Kern, Toev. i.134 puts forth the ingenious expln that hāsu is a "cockneyism" for āsu = Sk. āśu "quick," which does not otherwise occur in Pāli. Thus his expln remains problematic. -- See e. g. M iii.25; S i.63; v.376; J iv.136; vi.255, 329. -- Abstr. ˚tā wisdom S v.412; A i.45. Hāseti
Hāseti
see hasati. Hāhasi
Hāhasi
is 2nd sg. fut. of jahati (e. g. J iii.172); in cpd. also ˚hāhisi: see vijahati. Hāhiti
Hāhiti
is fut. of harati. Hi
Hi
(indecl.) [cp. Sk. hi] for, because; indeed, surely Vin i.13; D i.4; Dh 5; Sn 21; Pv ii.118; ii.710 ( = hi saddo avadhāraṇe PvA 103); SnA 377 (=hi -- kāro nipāto padapūraṇa -- matto); PvA 70, 76. In verse J iv.495. h'etaŋ =hi etaŋ; no h'etaŋ not so D i.3. hevaŋ=hi evaŋ. Hiŋsati
Hiŋsati
[hiŋs, Vedic hinasti & hiŋsanti] 1. to hurt, injure D ii.243; S i.70; Sn 515; Dh 132; Pv ii.99 ( = bādheti C.); iii.42 (=paribādheti C.); SnA 460. -- 2. to kill M i.39; Dh 270. -- Caus. II. hiŋsāpeti PvA 123. -- Cp. vi˚. Hiŋsana
Hiŋsana
(nt.) [fr. hiŋs] striking, hurting, killing Mhvs 15, 28. Hiŋsā
Hiŋsā
(f.) [Vedic hiŋsā] injury, killing J i.445; Dhtp 387. hiŋsa -- mano wish to destroy Dh 390. Opp. a˚. Hiŋsitar
Hiŋsitar
[n. ag. fr. hiŋsati] one who hurts D ii.243; J iv.121. Hikkā
Hikkā
(f.) [cp. Epic Sk. hikkā, fr. hikk to sob; onomat.] hiccup Sdhp 279. Hikkāra
Hikkāra
[hik+kāra] = hikkā, VbhA 70. Hinkāra
Hinkāra
(indecl.) [hiŋ = hi, +kāra, i. e. the syllable "hiŋ"] an exclamation of surprise or wonder J vi.529 (C. hin ti kāraṇaŋ). Hingu
Hingu
(nt.) [Sk. hingu] the plant asafetida Vin i.201; VvA 186.

-- cuṇṇa powder of asafetida DhA iv.171. -- rāja a sort of bird J vi.539. Hingulaka
Hingulaka
[cp. Sk. hingula, nt.] vermilion; as jāti˚ J v.67. 416; VvA4, 168. Also as ˚ikā (f.) VvA 324. Hinguli
Hinguli
[Sk. hinguli] vermilion Mhvs 27, 18. Hiṇḍati
Hiṇḍati
[*Sk. hiṇḍ] to roam Dhtp 108 ( = āhiṇḍana). See ā˚. Hita
Hita
(adj.) [pp. of dahati1] useful, suitable, beneficial, friendly A i.58, 155 sq.; ii.191; D iii.211 sq.; Dh 163. -- (m.) a friend, benefactor Mhvs 3, 37. -- (nt.) benefit, blessing, good Vin i.4; Sn 233; A ii.96 sq., 176; It 78; SnA 500. -- Opp. ahita A i.194; M i.332.

-- ânukampin friendly & compassionate D i.4, 227; Sn 693; J i.241, 244. -- ûpacāra beneficial conduct. saving goodness J i.172. -- esin desiring another's welfare, well -- wishing M ii.238; S iv.359; v.157; ˚tā seeking another's welfare, solicitude Dhs 1056; DhsA 362; VvA 260. -- kara a benefactor Mhvs 4, 65. Hinati
Hinati
[hi, hinoti] to send; only in cpd. pahiṇati. Hintāla
Hintāla
[hiŋ+tāla] a kind of palm, Phoenix paludosa Vin i.190; DhA iii.451. Hindagu
Hindagu
[probably for indagu, inda+gu ( = ˚ga), i. e. sprung from Indra. The h perhaps fr. hindu. The spelling h˚ is a corrupt one] man, only found in the Niddesa in stock defn of jantu or nara; both spellings (with & without h) occur; see Nd1 3=Nd2 249. Hima
Hima
(adj. -- n.) [cp. Vedic hima; Gr. xei_ma & xeimw/n winter, xiw/n snow; Av. ƶaya winter; Lat. hiems etc.] cold, frosty DhsA 317. -- (nt.) ice, snow J iii.55.

-- pāta -- samaya the season of snow -- fall Vin i.31, 288; M i.79; J i.390; Miln 396. -- vāta a snow or ice wind J i.390. Himavant
Himavant
(adj.) [hima+vant] snowy J v.63 ( = hima- yutta C.). (m.) Himavā the Himālaya: see Dict. of Names. Hiyyo
Hiyyo
(adv.) [Vedic hyaḥ, Gr. xqe/s, Lat. heri; Goth. gistradagis "to -- morrow," E. yester -- day, Ger. gestern etc.] yesterday Vin i.28; ii.77; J i.70, 237; v.461; vi.352, 386; Miln 9. In sequence ajja hiyyo pare it seems to mean "to -- morrow"; thus at Vin iv.63, 69; J iv.481 ( = sve C.). See para 2. c. Hirañña
Hirañña
(nt.) [Vedic hiraṇya; see etym. under hari & cp. Av. ƶaranya gold] gold Vin i.245, 276; ii.159; A iv.393; Sn 285, 307, 769; Nd2 11; gold -- piece S i.89; J i.92. Often together with suvaṇṇa Vin i.150; D ii.179; h˚ -- suvaṇṇaŋ gold & money M iii.175; J i.341. ˚olokana ( -- kamma) valuation of gold J ii.272. -- 732 -- Hiri & hirī
Hiri
& hirī (f.) [cp. Vedic hrī] sense of shame, bashfulness, shyness S i.33; D iii.212; A i.51, 95; iii.4 sq., 331, 352; iv.11, 29; Sn 77, 253, 719; Pug 71; Pv iv.73; J i.129, 207; Nett 50, 82; Vism 8. Expld Pug 23 sq.; is one of the cāga -- dhana's: see cāga (cp. Jtm 311). -- Often contrasted to & combined with ottappa (cp. below) fear of sin: A i.51; D iii.284; S ii.206; It 36; Nett 39; their difference is expld at Vism 464 ("kāya -- duccarit' ādīhi hiriyatī ti hiri; lajjāy' etaŋ adhivacanaŋ; tehi yeva ottappatī ti ottappaŋ; pāpato ubbegass' etaŋ adhivacanaŋ"); J i.129 sq.; DhsA 124.

-- ottappa shame & fear of sin M i.271; S ii.220; It 34; A ii.78; J i.127, 206; Tikp 61; Vism 221; DhA iii.73. Frequently spelt otappa, e. g. J i.129; It 36. -- kopīna a loin cloth M i.10; Vism 31, 195. -- nisedha restrained by conscience S i.7, 168 = Sn 462; Dh 143; DhA iii.86. -- bala the power of conscientiousness A ii.150; Dhs 30, 101. -- mana modest in heart, conscientious D ii.78; M i.43; S ii.159. Hirika
Hirika
(& hirīka) (adj.) [fr. hiri] having shame, only as -- ˚ in neg. ahirika shameless, unscrupulous A i.51, 85; ii.219; Pug 19; It 27 (˚īka); J i.258 (chinna˚ id.); nt. ˚ŋ unscrupulousness Pug 19. Hirimant
Hirimant
(& hirīmant) (adj.) [fr. hiri] bashful, modest, shy D iii.252, 282; S ii.207 sq.; iv.243 sq.; A ii.218, 227; iii.2 sq., 7 sq., 112; iv.2 sq., 38, 109; v.124, 148; It 97; Pug 23. Hiriya
Hiriya
(m. & nt.) [fr. hiri] shame, conscientiousness VvA 194. Hiriyati (hirīyati)
Hiriyati
(hirīyati) [see harāyati] to blush, to be shy; to feel conscientious scruple, to be ashamed Pug 20, 24; Miln 171; Vism 464 (hirīyati); DhsA 149. Hirivera
Hirivera
(nt.) [cp. Sk. hrīvera] a kind of Andropogon (sort of perfume) J vi.537; DA i.81. Hilādati
Hilādati
[hlād] to refresh oneself, to be glad Dhtp 152 ( = sukha), 591 (id.). Hīna
Hīna
[pp. of jahati] 1. inferior, low; poor, miserable; vile, base, abject, contemptible, despicable Vin i.10; D i.82, 98; S ii.154 (hīnaŋ dhātuŋ paṭicca uppajjati hīnā saññā); iii.47; iv.88, 309 (citta h. duggata); D iii.106, 111 sq., 215 (dhātu); A ii.154; iii.349 sq.; v.59 sq.; Sn 799, 903 sq.; Nd1 48, 103, 107, 146; J ii.6; Pv iv.127 (opp. paṇīta); Vv 2413 ( = lāmaka VvA 116); Dhs 1025; DhsA 45; Miln 288; Vism 13; DhA iii.163. -- Often opposed to ukkaṭṭha (exalted, decent, noble), e. g. Vin iv.6; J i.20, 22; iii.218; VbhA 410; or in graduated sequence hīna (>majjhima)>paṇīta (i. e. low, medium, excellent), e. g. Vism 11, 85 sq., 424, 473. See majjhima. -- 2. deprived of, wanting, lacking Sn 725= It 106 (ceto -- vimutti˚); Pug 35. -- hīnāya āvattati to turn to the lower, to give up orders, return to secular life Vin i.17; S ii.231; iv.191; Ud 21; A iii.393 sq.; M i.460; Sn p. 92; Pug 66; hīnāya vattati id. J i.276; hīnāy'āvatta one who returns to the world M i.460, 462; S ii.50; iv.103; Nd1 147.

-- âdhimutta having low inclinations J iii.87; Pug 26; ˚ika id. S ii.157; It 70. -- kāya inferior assembly VvA 298 (here meaning Yamaloka); PvA 5. -- jacca low-born, low -- caste J ii.5; iii.452; v.19, 257. -- vāda one whose doctrine is defective Sn 827; Nd1 167. -- viriya lacking in energy It 116; DhA i.75; ii.260. Hīyati
Hīyati
is Pass. of jahati. Hīra
Hīra
[cp. late Sk. hīra] 1. a necklace (?) VvA 176. -- 2. a small piece, splinter J iv.30 (sakalika˚); hīrahīraŋ karoti to cut to pieces, to chop up J i.9; DhA i.224 (+khaṇḍâkhaṇḍaŋ). Hīraka
Hīraka
[hīra+ka, cp. lexic. Sk. hīraka "diamond"] a splinter; tāla˚ "palm -- splinter," a name for a class of worms Vism 258. Hīrati
Hīrati
is Pass. of harati. Hīḷana
Hīḷana
(nt.) & ˚ā (f.) [fr. hīḍ] scorn(ing), disdain, contempt Miln 357; DA i.276 (of part. "re": hīlana -- vasena āmantanaŋ); as ˚ā at Vbh 353 (+ohīḷanā); VbhA 486. Hīḷita
Hīḷita
[pp. of hīḷeti] despised, looked down upon, scorned Vin iv.6; Miln 227, 251; Vism 424 (+ohīḷita oññāta etc.); DA i.256. Hīḷeti
Hīḷeti
[Vedic hīḍ or hel to be hostile; cp. Av. ƶēaša awful; Goth. us -- geisnan to be terrified. Connected also with hiŋsati. -- The Dhtp (637) defines by "nindā"] 1. to be vexed, to grieve S i.308; to vex, grieve Vv 8446. -> 2. to scorn, disdain, to feel contempt for, despise D ii.275; Sn 713 (appaŋ dānaŋ na hīḷeyya); J ii.258; DA i.256 ( = vambheti); DhA iv.97; Miln 169 (+garahati). -- pp. hīḷita. Huŋ
Huŋ
(indecl.) the sound "huŋ" an utterance of discontent or refusal DhA iii.108 = VvA 77; Vism 96. Cp. haŋ. hunkāra growling, grumbling Vism 105. hunkaroti to grumble DhA i.173. hunkaraṇa=˚kāra DhA i.173 sq. See also huhunka. Hukku
Hukku
the sound uttered by a jackal J iii.113. Huta
Huta
[pp. of juhati] sacrificed, worshipped, offered Vin i.36 = J i.83; D i.55; J i.83 (nt. "oblation"); Vv 3426 (su˚, +sudinna, suyiṭṭha); Pug 21; Dhs 1215; DA i.165; DhA ii.234.

-- āsana [cp. Sk. hutāśana] the fire, lit. "oblation-eater" Dāvs ii.43; Vism 171 ( = aggi). Hutta
Hutta
(nt.) [cp. Vedic hotra] sacrifice: see aggi˚. Hunitabba
Hunitabba
is grd. of juhati "to be sacrificed," or "venerable" Vism 219 ( = āhuneyya). Hupeyya
Hupeyya
"it may be" Vin i.8; = huveyya M i.171. See bhavati. Huraŋ
Huraŋ
(adv.) [of uncertain origin] there, in the other world, in another existence. As prep. with acc. "on the other side of," i. e. before Sn 1084; Nd1 109; usually in connection idha vā huraŋ vā in this world or the other S i.12; Dh 20; Sn 224 = J i.96; hurāhuraŋ from existence to existence Dh 334; Th 1, 399; Vism 107; DhA iv.43. -- The expln by Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 105 may be discarded as improbable. Huhunka
Huhunka
(adj.) [fr. huŋ] saying "huŋ, huŋ," i. e. grumbly, rough; ˚jātika one who has a grumbly nature, said of the brahmins Vin i.2; Ud 3 ("proud of his caste" Seidenstūcker). nihuhunka ( = nis+h.) not grumbly (or proud), gentle Vin i.3; Ud 3. Thus also Kern, Toev. i.137; differently Hardy in J.P.T.S. 1901, 42 ("uttering & putting confidence into the word huŋ") Bdhgh (Vin i.362) says: "diṭṭha -- mangaliko mānavasena kodhavasena ca huhun ti karonto vicarati." Hūti
Hūti
(f.) [fr. hū, hvā "to call," cp. avhayati] calling, challenging S i.208. He
He
(indecl.) a vocative (exclam.) particle "eh," "here," hey M i.125, 126 (+je); DhA i.176 (double). Heṭṭhato
Heṭṭhato
(adv.) [fr. heṭṭhā] below, from below Ps i.84; Dhs 1282, 1284, Mhvs 5, 64. Heṭṭhā
Heṭṭhā
(indecl.) [cp. Vedic adhastāt = adhaḥ+abl. suff. ˚tāt] down, below, underneath Vin i.15; D i.198; It 114; J i.71; VvA 78; PvA 113. As prep. with gen. (abl.) or cpd. "under" J i.176; ii.103; lower in the manuscript, i. e. before, above J i.137, 206, 350; VvA 203; lower, farther on J i.235.

-- āsana a lower seat J i.176. -- nāsika -- (sota) the lower nostril J i.164. -- bhāga lower part J i.209, 484. -- mañce underneath the bed J i.197 (˚mañcato from under the bed); ii.275, 419; iv.365. -- vāta the wind below, a wind blowing underneath J i.481. -- sīsaka head downwards J iii.13. -- 733 -- Heṭṭhima
Heṭṭhima
(adj.) [compar. -- superl. formation fr. heṭṭhā] lower, lowest Vin iv.168; Dhs 1016; Tikp 41; PvA 281; Sdhp 238, 240, 256. ˚tala the lowest level J i.202. Heṭhaka
Heṭhaka
(adj. -- n.) [fr. heṭheti] one who harasses, a robber J iv.495, 498. Cp. vi˚. Heṭhanā
Heṭhanā
(f.) [fr. heṭheti] harassing D ii.243; VbhA 75. Heṭheti
Heṭheti
[Vedic heḍ = hel or hīḍ (see hīḷeti)] to harass, worry, injure J iv.446, 471; Pv iii.52 (=bādheti PvA 198); ppr. a -- heṭhayaŋ Dh 49; S i.21. med. a -- heṭhayāna S i.7; iv.179; ger. heṭhayitvāna J iii.480. -- pp. heṭhayita J iv.447. Hetaŋ
Hetaŋ
= hi etaŋ. Hetu
Hetu
[Vedic hetu, fr. hi to impel] 1. cause, reason, con- dition S i.134; A iii.440 sq.; Dhs 595, 1053; Vism 450; Tikp 11, 233, 239. In the older use paccaya and hetu are almost identical as synonyms, e. g. n'atthi hetu n'atthi paccayo D i.53; aṭṭha hetū aṭṭha paccayā D iii.284 sq.; cp. S iii.69 sq.; D ii.107; M i.407; A i.55 sq., 66, 200; iv.151 sq.; but later they were differentiated (see Mrs. Rh. D., Tikp introd. p. xi. sq.). The diff. between the two is expld e. g. at Nett 78 sq.; DhsA 303. -- There are a number of other terms, with which hetu is often combd, apparently without distinction in meaning, e. g. hetu paccaya kāraṇa Nd2 617 (s. v. sankhā); mūla h. nidāna sambhava pabhava samuṭṭhāna āhāra ārammaṇa paccaya samudaya: frequent in the Niddesa (see Nd2 p. 231, s. v. mūla). -> In the Abhidhamma we find hetu as "moral condition" referring to the 6 mūlas or bases of good & bad kamma, viz. lobha, dosa, moha and their opposites: Dhs 1053 sq.; Kvu 532 sq. -- Four kinds of hetu are distinguished at DhsA 303 = VbhA 402, viz. hetu˚, paccaya˚, uttama˚, sādhāraṇa˚. Another 4 at Tikp 27, viz. kusala˚, akusala˚, vipāka˚, kiriya˚, and 9 at Tikp 252, viz. kusala˚, akusala˚, avyākata˚, in 3X3 constellations (cp. DhsA 303). -- On term in detail see Cpd. 279 sq.; Dhs. trsln §§ 1053, 1075. -- abl. hetuso from or by way of (its) cause S v.304; A iii.417. -- acc. hetu ( -- ˚) (elliptically as adv.) on account of, for the sake of (with gen.); e. g. dāsa -- kammakara -- porisassa hetu M ii.187; kissa hetu why? A iii.303; iv.393; Sn 1131; Pv ii.81 (=kiŋ nimittaŋ PvA 106); pubbe kata˚ by reason (or in consequence) of what was formerly done A i.173 sq.; dhana˚ for the sake of gain Sn 122. -- 2. suitability for the attainment of Arahantship, one of the 8 conditions precedent to becoming a Buddha Bu ii.59=J i.14, 44. -> 3. logic Miln 3.

-- paccaya the moral causal relation, the first of the 24 Paccayas in the Paṭṭhāna Tikp 1 sq., 23 sq., 60 sq., 287, 320; Dukp 8, 41 sq.; Vism 532; VbhA 174. -- pabhava arising from a cause, conditioned Vin i.40; DhA i.92. -- vāda the theory of cause, as adj. "proclaimer of a cause," name of a sect M i.409; opp. ahetu -- vāda "denier of a cause" (also a sect) M i.408; ahetu -- vādin id. J v.228, 241 ( = Jtm 149). Hetuka
Hetuka
(adj.) ( -- ˚) [fr. hetu] connected with a cause, causing or caused, conditioned by, consisting in Mhvs 1, 45 (maṇi -- pallanka˚); Dhs 1009 (pahātabba˚); VbhA 17 (du˚, ti˚). usually as sa˚ and a˚ (with & without a moral condition) A i.82; Vism 454 sq.; Dukp 24 sq. sa˚ Dhs 1073 (trsln "having root -- conditions as concomitants"); Kvu 533 ("accompanied by moral conditions"); a˚ S iii.210 (˚vāda, as a "diṭṭhi"); Vism 450. Hetutta
Hetutta
(nt.) [abstr. formation fr. hetu] reason, consequence; abl. in consequence of ( -- ˚) Vism 424 (diṭṭhi- visuddhi˚). Hetuye
Hetuye
see bhavati. Hema
Hema
(nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. heman] gold D ii.187; J vi.574.

-- jāla golden netting (as cover of chariots etc.) A iv.393; Vv 351, 362 (˚ka). -- vaṇṇa golden -- coloured D ii.134; Th 2, 333; ThA 235; DhsA 317. Hemanta
Hemanta
[hema( = hima)+anta] winter A iv.138; J i.86; Miln 274. Hemantika
Hemantika
(adj.) [fr. hemanta] destined for the winter, wintry, icy cold Vin i.15, 31 (rattiyo), 288; M i.79; S v.51; A iv.127; Vism 73. Hemavataka
Hemavataka
(adj.) [fr. himavant] belonging to, living in the Himālaya J i.506; iv.374, 437; ˚vatika id. Dpvs v.54. Heraññika (& ˚aka)
Heraññika
(& ˚aka) [fr. hirañña, cp. BSk. hairaṇyika Divy 501; MVastu iii.443] goldsmith (? for which suvaṇṇakāra!), banker, money -- changer Vism 515 = VbhA 91; J i.369; iii.193; DA i.315; Miln 331 (goldsmith?).

-- phalaka the bench (i. e. table, counter) of a money changer or banker Vism 437 = VbhA 115; J ii.429; iii.193 sq. Hevaŋ
Hevaŋ
see hi. Hesati
Hesati
[both heṣ (Vedic) & hreṣ (Epic Sk.); in Pāli con- fused with hṛṣ (hasati): see hasati2] to neigh J i.51, 62 (here hasati); v.304 (T. siŋsati for hiŋsati; C. expls hiŋsati as "hessati," cp. abhihiŋsanā for ˚hesanā). -> pp. hesita. Hesā
Hesā
(f.) [fr. hesati] neighing, neigh Dāvs v.56. Hesita
Hesita
(nt.) [pp. of hesati] neighing J i.62 (here as hasita); Mhvs 23, 72. Hessati
Hessati
is: 1. Fut. of bhavati, e. g. J iii.279. -- 2. Fut. of jahati, e. g. J iv.415; vi.441. Hehiti
Hehiti
is Fut. 3rd sg. of bhavati, e. g. Bu ii.10 = J i.4 (v. 20). Hoti, hotabba
Hoti,
hotabba etc. see bhavati. Hotta
Hotta
(nt.) [Vedic hotra] (function of) offering; aggi˚ the sacrificial fire SnA 436 (v. l. BB ˚hutta). Homa
Homa
(m. & nt.) [fr. hu, juhati] oblation D i.9; DA i.93 (lohita˚). Horāpāṭhaka
Horāpāṭhaka
[late Sk. horā "hour" (in astrol. literature, fr. Gr. w(/ra: cp. Winternitz, Gesch. d. Ind. Lit. III.569 sq.)+pāṭhaka, i. e. expert] an astrologer Mhvs 35, 71.